^^^Hf ^^^^^^ ^^^^^H ^^^^H
493E
^^ ^^H ^^^^H ^^^1
Vm 1 3
mfli]i
^^^B^^^^^^^H ^^^H ^^^^^^^^^^^^^H t^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^^H
8
|39Q
i|cM
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATElSjT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
July 5, 1983 , Volume 1032 Number 1
CONTENTS
Page
Pktent and Trademark Office Notices I
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1032 OG
Reissue Applications Filed . . : 1032 OG
Erratum ' 1032 OG
Request for Reexamination Filed 1032 OG
I
Commissioner Ordered Reexamination 1032 OG
Services by Publication 1032 OG
Notice of Availability for Licensing 1032 OG
Patent Certificates of Correction 1032 OG
Disclaimers 1032 OG
Dedication 1032 OG
Disclaimer and Dedication 1032 OG
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in |
Patent Depository Libraries '032 OG;
Condition of Patent Applications '032 OG
Reexaminations '032 OG
Defensive Patent Publication: 103,201
Reissue Patents Granted (31,296) *
Plant Patents Granted (5,065)
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,390,995) . •
Chemical (4,391,601) ".
Electrical (4,392,005)
design Patents Granted (269,559)
Index of Patentees . . .i
Indices of Reissue. Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees
Index of Applicants of Defensive Publications
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues, and Reexaminations)
Designs, Plants and Defensive Publications
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues)
Designs, Plants and Applicants of Defensive Publications
$hange of Address Form and Subscription Order Form
2
2
2
3
3
3
4
5
5
5
5
6
7
9
1
< 3
7
9
221
331
417
PI 1
PI 44
PI 46
PI 47
PI 50
PI 51
PI 52
Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Oflice, Washington. D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
::pmmunications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly,
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
<>rders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, D.C., 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, U.S. Code P.T.O.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28. 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Starch fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No correspxDnding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
'^ • Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS nLED
Notice under 37 CFR l.n(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
3,588,917, Re. S.N. 491,552, Filed May 4, 1983, CI.
2/161, GOLF GLOVE, Anthony John Antonious,
Owner of Record: Inventor, Attorney or Agent: Eugene
L. Bernard, et al., Ex. Gp.: 353
3,645,835, Re. S.N. 494,013, Filed May 12, 1983, CI.
428/146, MOISTURE-VAPOR-PERMEABLE PRES-
SURE SENSITIVE ADHESIVE MATERIALS, Mar-
tin E. Hodgson, Owner of Record: T. J. Smith & Neph-
ew Ltd.. Yorkshire, England, Attorney or Agent: Albert
L. Jacobs, Jr., Ex. Gp.: 164
3,878,876, Re. S.N. 486,027, Filed Apr. 18, 1983, CI.
145/32R, MULTI-PURPOSE SAW BLADE SUSPEN-
SION ARRANGEMENT FOR RECIPROCATING
SAWS, Helmut Abel, Owner of Record: Inventor, At-
torney or Agent: Costas S. Krikelis, Ex. Gp.: 323
3,975,761, Re. S.N. 487,089, Filed Apr. 21, 1983, CI.
358/78, METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR
THE AVOIDANCE OF ERRORS DURING THE
REPRODUCTION OF AN IMAGE PATTERN,
Heinz Taudt, et al.. Owner of Record: Ing. Rudolf Hell
GmbH.. Kiel, Germany, Attorney or Agent: James Van
Santen, et al., Ex. Gp.: 233
4,119,754 Re. S.N. 485,508, Filed Apr. 15, 1983, CI.
162/000.000, PAPERMAKERS FABRICS, Bryan J.
Gisbourne, Owner of Record: Scapa-Porritt Ltd., Lanca-
shire, England, Attorney or Agent: Martin Fleit, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 173
4,135,213, Re. S.N. 492,037, Filed May 5, 1983, CI.
358/142, ROW GRABBING VIDEO DISPLAY TER-
MINAL HAVING LOCAL PROGRAMMABLE
CONTROL THEREOF, Leonard Wintfeld, et al..
Owner of Record: IDR, Inc., Farmingdale, N. Y., Attor-
ney or Agent: Lawrence G. Kurland, et al., Ex. Gp.:
233
4,256,945, Re. S.N. 474,096, Filed Mar. 10, 1983, CI.
219/10.75. ALTERNATING CURRENT ELECTRI-
CALLY RESISTIVE HEATING ELEMENT HAV-
ING INTRINSIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL, Phil-
ip S. Carter, et al.. Owner of Record: Oximetrix, Inc.,
Mountain View, Calif, Attorney or Agent: William D.
Hall, et al., Ex. Gp.: 213
4,265,193, Re. S.N. 491,937, Filed May 5, 1983, CI.
114/267, CONCRETE MARINE FLOAT AND
METHOD OF FABRICATING, Wesley W. Sluys,
Owner of Record: Builders Concrete, Inc., Billingham,
Wash., Attorney or Agent: Richard W. Seed, et al., Ex.
Gp.: 315
4,266,668, Re. S.N. 493,564, Filed May 11, 1983, CI.
206/557, TELESCOPING SLICED BREAD DIS-
PENSER. Yong K. Paek, Owner of Record: Inventor,
Attorney or Agent: Harold L. Stowell, et al., Ex. Gp.:
241
4,290,304, Re. S.N. 493,976, Filed May 12, 1983, CI.
73/862.25, BACK-UP POWER TONGS AND METH-
OD, Emery L. Eckel, Owner of Record: Eckel Manu-
facturing Co., Odessa. Tex.. Attorney or Agent: Robert
M. Carwell, et al., Ex. Gp.: 244
4,290,816, Re. S.N. 492,183, Filed May 6. 1983. CI.
106/287.32, SULFUR COMPOUNDS AND METHOD
OF MAKING SAME, Allen C. Ludwig, et al.. Owner
of Record: Southwest Research Institute, San Antonio,
Tex.. Attorney or Agent: W. F.Hyer, Ex. Gp.: 142
4,306,034, Re. S.N. 487,365, Filed Apr. 21, 1983, CI.
521/139.000, COMPOSITION FOR PRODUCING
ARTICLE SIMULATING PLANTATION CREPE
RUBBER, Agmund K. Thorsrud, Owner of Record:
Phillips Petroleum Co.. Bartlesville. Okla., Attorney or
Agent: Louis N. French, et al., Ex. Gp.: 143
4,319,214, Re. S.N. 485,261, Filed Apr. 15, 1983, CI.
337/343, CREEPLESS, SNAP ACTION THERMO-
STAT, Omar Givler, Owner of Record: Portage Electric
Products. Inc., North Can toft, Ohio, Attorney or Agent:
Lloyd McAulay, et al., Ex. Gp.: 212
4,364,292, Re. S.N. 491.758, Filed May 5. 1983, CI.
83/605, FLOOR OR BENCH MOUNTED CONDUIT
CUTTING DEVICE, Glenn A. Wozniak. et al., Owner
of Record: Indian Head Inc., New York, N. Y, Attorney
or Agent: William R. Laney, et al., Ex. Gp.: 324
Erratum
In the Official Gazette of Feb. 15, 1983, an incorrect
patent number, 4,306,624, appears in the following list-
ing under "REISSUE APPLICATIONS FILED":
4,306,624, Re. S.N. 442,9 1^ Filed Nov. 19, 1982. CI.
198/341, CONVEYOR APPARATUS, Antonio
1032OG 2
\/
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1032 OG 3
Magni, Owner of Record: AXIS, S.p.A., Firenze, It-
aly. Attorney or Agent: Lawrence I. Lemer, Ex.
Gp.: 313.
The listing should read as follows:
4,306,646, Re. S.N. 442,913, Filed Nov. 19, 1982, CI.
198/341, CONVEYOR APPARATUS, Antonio
Magni. Owner of Record: AXIS. S.p.A.. Firenze, It-
aly, Attorney or Agent: Lawrence I. Lerner, "
Gp.: 313.
Ex.
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION nLED
Notice under 37 CFR l.n(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen- .
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR l.248(aX5)and 1.525(b)).
3,732,068, Reexam. No. 90/000,382, Requested: May
16, 1983, CI. 432/120, CYLINDRICAL ELONGATED
FURNACE FOR TREATING MATERIAL AT
HIGH TEMPERATURE AND UNDER HIGH
PRESSURE, Hans Larker. Owner of Record: Alimanna
Svenska Flektriska Aktiebolaget, Vasteras, Sweden. Attor-
ney or Agent: None. Ex. Gp.: 344, Requester: Stanley P.
Fisher, et al.. Arlington. Va.
3,932,044, Reexam. No. 90/000.385, Requested: June 1,
1983, CI. 401/265, PEN POINT FOR WRITING IN-
STRUMENTS, Nobuyuki Otake, et al.. Owner of Rec-
ord: Requester, Attorney or Agent: Parkhurst & Oliff, Ex.
Gp.: 336, Requester: Tokyo Boski K. K., Tokyo, Japan
4,038,498, Reexam. No. 90/000,384, Requested: May
26. 1983. CI. 179/18PC, CENTRAL OFFICE
SWITCHING SYSTEM WITH REMOTE LINE
SWITCH, Frank S. Boxall, Owner of Record: Inventor.
Attorney or Agent: Flehr, Hohbach. et al.. Ex. Gp.: 214
Requester: Inventor
4,379,168, Reexam. No. 90/000.387. Requested: May
27, 1983. CI. 424/356. PESTICIDES CONTAINING
D-LIMONENE, Vincent Dotolo, Owner of Record: In-
ventor, Attorney or Agent: James C. Wray, Ex. Gp.: 125
Requester: Roger L. Browdy, Washington. DC.
Sendee by Publication
COMMISSIONER ORDERED REEXAMINATIONS
Notice under 37 CFR I.I 1(c). The orders for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Group. Copies of the
Orders and other related papers may be obtained by paying
the fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed. 37
CFR 1.248(aK5) and 1.525(b).
4,338,751, Reexam. No. 90/000,394, Ordered: June 10,
198'3, CI. 52/187 KNOCKDOWN SPIRAL STAIR-
WAY, Forest E. Sanders, Owner of Record: Inventor,
Attorney or Agent: Morton S. Adler, Ex. Gp.: 354.
4,338,757, Reexam. No. 90/000,393, Ordered: June 10,
1983, CI. 52/699, DEVICE FOR CONNECTING A
STRUCTURE WITH A WALL TO BE POURED
WITH CONCRETE, Heinz Witschi, et al., Owner of
Record: Inventors. Attorney or Agent: Wigman & Co-
hen, Ex. Gp.: 354.
4,343,124, Reexam. No. 90/000,392, Ordered: June 10.
1983. CI. 52/226. STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS. Fried-
rich C. Math, Owner of Record: British Petroleum Co..
Ltd.. London. England. Attorney or Agent: Morgan,
Finnegan, et al., Ex. Gp.: 354.
A petition to cancel each of the registrations identified
below having been filed, and the notice of such proceed-
ings sent by certified mail to registrant at the last known
address having been returned by the Postal Service as
undeliverable, notice is hereby given that unless the reg-
istrants listed herein, their legal assigns or legal represen-
tatives, shall enter an appearance within thirty days
from the date of this publication, the cancellation will be
proceeded with as in the case of default.
New World Communications, Inc., Indianapolis. Ind.,
Reg. No. 1,060,995. for the mark "NEW WORLD",
Cane. No. 13,459.
Insight Dynamics Corp., New York, N.Y., Reg. No.
1,136,437, for the mark "INSIGHT DYNAMICS",
Cane. No. 13,471.
Topper Corp., assignee, by assignment and change of
name, of De Luxe Reading Corp., Elizabeth, N.J., Reg.
No. 766,656, for the mark "CANDY FASHION", Cane.
No. 13,490.
The Thomas Holmes Corp., assignee by mesne assign-
ment of Sulray, Inc., Philadelphia, Pa., Reg. No.
770,851, for the mark "SPANETTE", Cane. No. 13,548.
Pro-Am Skateboard Products. Inc., Downey. Calif.,
Reg. No. 1,100,891, for the mark "PURE GOLD",
Cane. No. 13,603.
Mid-Tec, Inc., St. Charles, Mo., Reg. No. 923,403, for
the mark "CELL-TEC", Cane. No. 13,611.
Tri-R Chemicals, Inc.. Boca Raton, Fla., Reg. No.
1,066,008. for the mark "BOND-CRAFT", Cane. No.
13,623.
Newporter Industries, Inc., Irvine, Calif., Reg. No.
1,100,281, for the mark "PIPELINE", Cane. No. 13,629.
Dent-U-Sonic Corp., North Miami Beach, Fla., Reg.
No. 887,562, for the mark "DENT U SONIC", Cane.
No. 13,658.
Don Heyer, Anaheim. Calif, Reg. No. 404,741, for
the mark "VARIGEAR", Cane. No. 13,674.
Legi Electronics Corp., assignee of Ishimoto Trading
Co., Gardena, Calif, Reg. No. 865,664, for the mark
"ITRON", Cane. No. 13,675.
Joseph A. McCoirum, Inc., assignee of R. M. Hol-
lingshead Corp., Marlton, N.J., Reg. No. 443,509, for
the mark "COCOON", Cane. No. 13,700.
Whitney Paige Cosmetics, Ltd., Mount Vernon, N.Y.,
Reg. No. 1.106,954. for the mark "EMOLLIENCE
P.M.". Cane. No. 13,723.
ERMA S. BROWN,
Deputy Clerk of the
Trademark Trial and
Appeal Board.
For MARGARET M. LAURENCE,
Assistant Commissioner
for Trademarks.
Service by Publication
A petition to cancel the registration identified below
having been filed, and the notice of default of such pro-
ceedings sent to registrant at the last known address
having been returned by the Postal Service as un-
deliverable, notice is hereby given that unless the regis-
4rant listed herein, its legal assign or legal representative,
shall enter an appearance within thirty days from the
date of this publication, judgment will be entered against
registrant and said registration will be cancelled.
Drossier and Associates, Inc., assignee of Ceco Mar-
keting Consulting & Research, Inc., San Francisco,
Calif., Reg. No. 853,394, for the mark "COMPASS",
Cane. No. 13,469.
ERMA S. BROWN,
Deputy Clerk of the
Trademark Trial and
Appeal Board.
For MARGARET M. LAURENCE,
Assistant Commissioner
for Trademarks.
1032 CXj 4
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Government-Owned Inventions
Notice of Availability for Licensing
The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in
the U.S. in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex-
peditious commercialization of results of federally funded
research and development. Foreign patents are filed on
selected inventions to extend market coverage for U.S.
companies and may also be available for licensing.
Technical and licensing information on specific inven-
tions may be obtained by writing to:
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
U.S. Department of Commerce
P.O. Box 1423
Springfield, Va. 22151
Please cite the number and title of inventions of inter-
est.
GEORGE KUDRAVETZ,
• I Program Manager,
' Office of Government Inventions and Patents
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Department of Commerce.
Department of the Air Force
SN 6-169,231 (4,377,755). SIGNAL COMPRESSOR
APPARATUS
SN 6-191,044 (4,375,597). METHOD OF IMPLE-
MENTING UNIFORM BACKGROUND
CHARGE SUBTRACTION IN A RADIATION
SENSING ARRAY.
SN 6-222,845 (4,380,763). CORROSION MONITOR-
ING SYSTEM.
SN 6-227,558 (4,381,450). PULSED RADIATION DO-
SIMETRY APPARATUS.
SN 6-237,020 (4,381,509). CYLINDRICAL MICRO-
WAVE LENS ANTENNA FOR WIDEBAND
SCANNING APPLICATIONS.
SN 6-242,816 (4,377,341). SYSTEM FOR MEASUR-
ING ANGULAR DEVIATION IN A TRANSPAR-
ENCY.
SN 6-251,696 (4,377,824). MULTI-CHANNEL LON-
GITUDINAL VIDEO TAPE RECORDING.
SN 6-291,891 (4,377,546). PROCESS FOR PRO-
DUCING AROMATIC HETEROCYCLIC POL-
YMER ALLOYS.
SN 6-313,859 (4,377,641). METHOD AND AP-
PARATUS FOR THE CONTINUOUS
EXTRACTION OF INGREDIENTS FROM SAM-
PLES
SN 6-366,744 (4,380,619). OXY-AND THIOARYL-
PHENYLATED AROMATIC HETEROCYCLIC
POLYMERS.
SN 6-368,784 (4,377,291). SEALING ASSEMBLY.
SN 6-435,522. IMAGING APPARATUS FOR
TRANSVERSE ELECTRODE ELECTRO-OPTIC
TUNABLE FILTER.
SN 6-441,815. OPTICAL ALIGNMENT DEVICE
FOR BINOCULAR DISPLAYS.
SN 6-444,004. LIFTOFF SUPPRESSION APPARA-
TUS FOR THE FERROMAGNETIC RESO-
NANCE PROBE.
SN 6-447,599. SCHOTTKY BARRIER INFRARED
DETECTOR AND PROCESS.
SN 6-468,781. A METHOD FOR THE PREPARA-
TION OF EPITAXIAL FILMS OF MERCURY
CADMIUM TELLURIDE.
SN 6-470,749. VERTICAL LAUNCH ALIGNMENT
TRANSFER APPARATUS.
SN 6-471,078. ECCENTRICALLY TIGHTENED
LATCH DEVICE.
SN 6-475,417. STORAGE CABINET TRAVEL
LOCK.
SN 6-475,436. A SCANNING SYSTEM FOR MAP-
PING GAS FLOW UNIFORMITY IN A LAZER.
SN 6-475,664. PNEUMATIC CLAMPING DEVICE.
SN 6-475,665. LATERAL SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR
CANISTER-LAUNCHED MISSILE.
SN 6-475,669. AUGMENTOR FUEL SPRAYING
WITH DRAIN VENT.
SN 6-477,793. IMPROVED TITANIUM METAL-
MATRIX COMPOSITES.
SN 6-477,998. MULTI-MICROPROCESSOR APPA-
RATUS.
SN 6-478,581. SYNTHESIS OF PENTAFLUORO-
TELLURIUM HYPOFLUORITE.
SN 6-479,221. HYPERPRODUCING CELLULASE
MICROORGANISM.
SN 6-480,156. INTERFACE ALIGNMENT SYSTEM.
SN 6-480,170. TWO FAULT TOLERANT TRANS-
MITTER ACTIVATOR.
SN 6-484,329. FLAMEHOLDER WITH INTEGRAT-
ED AIR MIXER.
SN 6^84,390. STRUTLESS DIFFUSER FOR GAS
TURBINE ENGINE.
SN 6-488,887 (4,376,716). PREPARATION OF STA-
BLE SODIUM CARBONATE DISPERSIONS.
Enivronmental Protection Agency
SN 6-213,799 (4,381,681).
COLLECTOR.
PARTICULATE SAMPLt
Department of Health and Human Services
SN 6-476,830. A PRACTICAL TOTAL SYNTHESIS
UNNATURAL ENANTIOMERS OF OPIUM-DE-
RIVED MORPHINANS.
Department of the Interior
SN 6-363,367 (4,381,287). SEPARATION OF ZIRCO-
NIUM AND URANIUM.
SN 6-460,102. RECOVERY OF METALS FROM
GRINDING SLUDGES.
Tennessee Valley Authority
SN 6-164,418 (4,379,939). PREPARATION OF NI-
TROGEN ERTILIZERS FROM OXALATE ES-
TERS PREPARED BY THE OXIDATIVE CAR-
BONYLATION OF ALCOHOLS OVER NOBEL
METAL CATALYSTS UTILIZING REGENERA-
BLE 2,5-CYCLOHEXADIENE-l,4-DIONE OXI-
DANTS.
SN 6-336,662 (4,377,406). AMMONIUM POLYPHOS-
PHATE SULFATE FERTILIZERS FROM WET-
PROCESS PHOSPHORIC ACID.
<
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of July 5, 1983
Re. 31.177
3,920,278
4,012,326
4,045,563
4,108,366
4,150,779
4,151,645
4,184,203
4,192,935
4,213,987
4,233,080
4,234,493
4,236,365
4,249,451
4,254,793
4,273,898
4,276,122
4,282,867
4,283,249
4,287,338
4,294,309
4,296,889
4,298,927
4,301,052
4,303,098
4,304,267
4,309,304
4,315,699
4,322,816
4,328,013
4,331,175
4,342,161
4,343,902
4,344,356
4,344,539
4,345,302
4,345,855
4,347,678
4,349,848
4,350,975
4,351,977
4,353,997
4,354,497
4,355,151
4,359,273
4,359,304.
4,360,702
I 4,362,578
! 4,363,835
4,363,879
4,365,468
4,365,546
4,365,994
4,366,092
4,366,162
4,366.307
4,367,022
4,367,444
4,367,511
4,367,921
4,368,199
4,368,233
4,368,247
4,368,533
4,369,105
4,369,280
4,369,444
4.369,522
4.370,114
4,370,193
4,370,328
4,370,335
4,370,599
4,370,614
4,371,446
4,371,519
4,371,823
4,371,843
4,371,844
4,372,143
4,372,384
4,372,480
4,373,208
4,373,416
4,374,256
4,374,296
4,374,427
4,374,428
4,374,490
4,374,675
4,374,992
4,375,057
4,375,136
4,375,256
4,376,030
4,376,100
4,376,250
4,376,322
4,376,769
4,376,800
4,376,834
4,377,072
4,377,435
4,377,498
4,377,572
4,378,204
4,378,911
4,379,607
4,379,638
4,380,304
4,380,625
4,380,882
4,381,101
4,381,255
4,381,303
4,381,699
4,382,244
4,382,722
4,383,213
4,383,219
Disclaimers
4,i20,222.— John A. Lopez, Houston, Tex. STORAGE-
STABLE PRECATALYZED POLYEPOXIDE
COMPOSITIONS. Patent dated Mar. 16, 1982. Dis-
claimer filed Aug. 23, 1982, by the assignee. Shell Oil
Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 to 10, inclu-
sive of said patent.
4,332,320.— ^y^^rey A. Feibelman, Cranston, R.I. PEN-
DANT DISPLAY CARD. Patent dated June 1,
1982. Disclaimer filed Apr. 28, 1983, by the assignee,
A&H Mfg Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the entire remaining
^term of said patent.
4,366,761.— /Joy T. Card, Chattanooga, Tenn. DUAL
SHIFTABLE NEEDLE BARS FOR TUFTING
MACHINE. Patent dated Jan. 4, 1983. Disclaimer
filed Apr. 28, 1983, by the asignee, Tuftco Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1-5 and 11 of
said patent.
4,376,916.— yo/j« B. Glaberson, Stamford, Conn. SIG-
NAL COMPRESSION AND EXPANSION SYS-
TEM. Patent dated Mar. 15, 1983. Disclaimer filed
May 5, 1983, by the assignee, CBS. Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 16 and 17 of
said patent.
4 383,199.— SAo/cA/ Washino, Hyogo. and Eisho Nosaka,
Kyoto, Japan. ELECTRON GUN. Patent dated
May 10, 1983. Disclaimer filed Feb. 25. 1983. by the
assignee. Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha.
The term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 20, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
3,898,566.— 7s>-fle/ Switzer, North York, Ontario, Canada;
Arie Zimmerman, Santa Monica; Lucius T. La Fleur,
Torrance and Patrick A. Segrave, Santa Monica,
Calif METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RE-
DUCING DISTORTION IN MULTICARRIER
COMMUNICATION SYSTEMS. Patent dated July
29, 1975. Disclaimer filed May 9, 1983, by the assign-
ee, Phasecom Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 through 17
and 20 through 27 of said patent.
4,124,834.— fi/wcrrf J. Walsh, Hermitage, Pa. ELEC-
TRICAL INDUCTIVE APPARATUS. Patent dat-
ed Nov. 7, 1978. Disclaimer filed Apr. 29, 1983, by
the assignee, Westinghouse Electric Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
4,162,693.— yoA/i Heller Beckman, Downers Grove, 111.
REVERSIBLE SHIRRED CASING AND METH-
OD FOR PRODUCING IT. Patent dated Jifly 31,
1979. Disclaimer filed May 9, 1983, by the assignee.
Union Carbide Corp.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to the entire term of said
patent.
Dedication
3,929,191.— yo/jrt Wayne Graham; Thomas Wayne Muecke
and Claude Everett Cooke, Jr. Houston, Tex. METH-
OD FOR TREATING SUBTERRANEAN FOR-
MATIONS. Patent dated Dec. 30, 1975. Dedication
filed Mar. 25, 1983, by the assignee, Exxon Produc-
tion Research Co.
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining
term of said patent.
Disclaimer and Dedication
3 265.902.— S/^nev A. Wingate. Concord, Mass. PHOTO-
' ELECTRIC SHAFT ANGLE ENCODER. Patent
dated Aug. 9, 1966. Disclaimer and Dedication filed
May 2. 1983. by the assignee, Itek Corp.
Hereby disclaims and dedicates to the Public the term
of the patent subsequent to Mar. 15, 1983.
1032 OG 5
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent def>osi-
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope
of these collections varies from library to library, rang-
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870,
or earlier, in other libraries.
These patent collections are open to public use and
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g.
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro-
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the
public in gaining effective access to .information con-
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
State
Name of Library
table following, the collections are organized in patent
number sequence.
Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
in sotne combination of both. Facilities for making paper
copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general-
ly provided for a fee.
Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
patents at a pariicular library is advised to contact that
library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as
to avert possible inconvenience.
Telephone Contact
Alabama Birmingham Public Library (205) 254-2555
Arizona " Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University (602) 965-7607
California Los Angeles Public Library (213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-4572
Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* (408) 738-5580
Colorado Denver Public Library (303) 571-2122
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738-2238
Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Technology (404) 894-4508
Illinois Chicago Public Library (312) 269-2865
Louisiana Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University (504) 388-2570
Massachusetts Boston Public Library (617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
Michigan Detroit Public Library (313) 833-1450
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library &. Information Center (612) 372-6552
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library (816) 363-4600
St. Louis Public Library (314) 241-2288 Ext. 214,
Ext. 215
Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska- Lincoln, Engineering Library .. (402)472-3411
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library (603) 862-1777
New Jersey Newark Public Library (201) 733-7814
New York Albany: New York Suic library (518) 474-5125
Buffalo and Erie Coun» , i' hlic Library (716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
New York Public Libr«. The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library. N.C State University (919) 737-3280
Ohio Cincinnati & Hamilton Count y. Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Ext. 212
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library (405) 624-6546
Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321**
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library (401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center (901) 528-2957
Texas Dallas Public Library (214) 749-4176
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin (608) 262-6845
Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries offer CASSIS (Classification And Search Support Information System), which
provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
'Collection organized by subject matter.
' ••Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m.
1032 OG 6
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF April 2, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEN^ISTRY, GROUP 1 10-D. E TALBERT, Director ^
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; Metal-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120-C E. VAN HORN, Director . . . .^ . • , . . •
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids Oxo and Oxy: Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140-J O. THOMAS, JR., Director . .
Synthetic Resins Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Pari) e.g.. Coating; Molding;
Ink- Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S N. ZAHARNA, Director . . ... • ;^ • •
Coating- Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-
R. F. WHITE, Director ^ ^ \^ - ,. r,' x. y.^ ' ' 'r^^ ' xa ' ' r '^
Fertilizers- Foods- Fermentation; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
ture- GaV Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas,
and 'solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE Director
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distributioh; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director • • • • " ' vL
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications Op-
tics- Radar Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special. Fuel, Explosive and Thermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries. ^.„. , r-»,v/ T^ .
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION, STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; DaU Processing, Computation and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts. „_.,„ ,.„
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING. AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-
G. M. FDRLENZA, Director • • ' . • V ■ ' ' ' '^i ' -' '
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures, Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agitating; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projecors;
Web Feedingf Winding and. Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measunng and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Matenal Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors. .. . .T-T-..r-«,c. r^ .
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS, Director
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measunng.
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L CAGE, Director ^
Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fine Arts. .
^ MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA. GROUP 310-B. R. GRAY, Director ... _ . ' _ ;
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Pluid Sprin-
kline Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats;
Shins- Aeronautics Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATErKl SHAPING. ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS, GROUP 320-STEPHEN G^ K UNI N Director
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling. Combined Machines, Special Article Making, Metal Deforming; Sheft Metal
and Wire Workwig; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders. Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchenng; and Books and Pnnted Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY. PERSONAL TREATMENT. INFORMATION. GROUP 330- ^
Amusement and Exercisiig'li'evices;' Projectors;' Animal and' Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters; Infor-
HEATTOWEr'^AND FLUID ENGINEERING. GROUP 340-D. J. STOCKING, Director . . ^ •,>;-,
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Geanng;
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication. ,,^
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES. MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350-
B,iild^ng^s!/Sr2Xcks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineenng; Earth Dnllmg, Mining,
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches. ^
1-16-81
11-20-81
3-1-82
3-09-82
1-12-82
5-22-81
3-30-81
1-05-81
5-12-81
8-25-80
1-30-81
5-18-81
7-27-81
8-27-82
11-17-80
9-17-80
Expiratioii of patents:
The patenu within the range of numbers indicated below expire during April 1983 except those which may
have" had thar temis curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range
of numSi SdiSd Slow, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provi-
sions of 35 U.S.C. 151. Numbers 3.243.822 to 3,248.737, inclusive
Pf'«"^^ • Numbers 2.616 to 2.627 inclusive
Plant Patents
1032 OG 7
i
REEXAMINATIONS
JULY 5, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification; matter printed in
italics indicates additions made by reexamination.
Bl Re. 29,285 (101st)
METHOD FOR CONCOMITANT PARTICULATE
DIAMOND DEPOSITION IN ELECTROLESS
PLATING, AND THE PRODUCT THEREOF
Theodore Peter Christini, Dushore, Pa.; Albert Lawrence
Eustice, Lewiston, N.Y.; Arthur Hughes Graham, Wil-
mington, Del., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours
and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 208,233, Dec. 15, 1971,
abandoned.
Reexamination Request No. 90/100,120, Dec. 3, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. Re. 29,285,
issued Jun. 28, 1977, Ser. No. 694,047, Jun. 7, 1976.
U.S. a. 428/544 Int. Cl.^' C23C 3/02
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 4 and 6 is confirmed.
Claims 1-3 are determined to be j»patentable as
amended:
Claim 5, dependent on an amended claim, is deter-
mined to be patentable.
FIG. I
New claims 7-14 are added and determined to be pa-
tentable.
1. A coated article formed by electroless plating com-
prising a co-deposited uniform, dispersion of polycrystal-
line diamond particles secured by substantial nucleation
within a metallic matrix comprising one of the group
consisting of: (1) an alloy including a metal of the sub-
group made up of nickel, cobalt and mixtures thereof
with one of the elements phosphorus, boron and mixtures
thereof and (2) elemental copper, deposited on a support-
ing substrate consisting of polymer, metal, ceramic or
glass.
2. A method of forming a composite structure on an
article by electroless plating comprising immersing said
article in a stable electroless plating bath having a com-
position effecting concurrent deposition of particulate pol-
ycrystalline diamond having a particle size in the range of
0. l\i to 75\i dispersed in a metallic matrix comprising one
of the group consisting of: (1) an alloy including a metal
of the sub-group made up of nickel, cobalt and mixtures
thereof with one of -the elements phosphorus, boron and
mixtures thereof and (2) elemental [elemental] copper,
while maintaining agitation of said bath retaining said
particulate diamond in suspension, and removing said ar-
ticle carrying said composite structure from said bath
[whenj ajfter said composite structure has been plated
out on said article in preselected amount.
ELECTROLESS Ni-B/12/^ SYNTHETIC DIAMOND "A", 63^0X
N
(1) RECESSED GROWTH LEDGE
(2) CRATER
(5) UPSTANDING GROWTH PROJECTION
(4) Ni-B ALLOY GRAINS NUCLEATED
ON DIAMOND "A" SURFACE
Ni-B ALLOY GRAINS NUCLEATED
ON DIAMOND "A" EDGES
Ni-B ALLOY GRAIN MATRIX
(7) DIAMOND SURFACE
1032 OG 9
1032 OG 10
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
Bl 3,892,984 (102nd)
REGENERATING CIRCUIT IN THE FORM OF A
KEYED FLIP-FLOP
Karl-Ulrich Stein, Munich. Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,124, Dec. 14, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,892,984, issued
Jul. 1, 1975, Ser. No. 442,084, Feb. 13, 1974. '
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 23,
1973, 2309192.
U.S. CI. 307/530 Int. Cl.^ H03K 5/24. 3/356:
GllC 7/06
node self-capacitance from the assoicated bit line self-capaci-
tance, and so as to permit the flip-flop to assurhe a stable
state corresponding to the binary signal being read when
substantial feedback is initiated, said flip-flop option being
used to refresh one of the logic level binary signals stored
prior to readout over said same respective barrier transistor,
a refresh path for said logic level binary signal being formed
to extend from said associated node of the flip-flop over said
barrier transistor to the readout storage element.
■ 9
Bl 4,295,096 (103rd)
ELECTRODE PROSPECTING METHOD PROVID-
ING CALCULABLE ELECTROMAGNETIC COU-
PLING FOR THE INDIRECT DETECTION OF HY-
DROCARBON RESERVOIRS
Ben K. Sternberg; Dale E. Miller; Dhari S. Bahjat, all of
Ponca City, Okla., assignors to Conoco, Inc., Ponca
City, Okla.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,238, Aug. 5, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,295,096, issued
Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 971,177, Dec. 30, 1978.
U.S. a. 324/357 Int. Cl.^ GOIV 3/06
fO'a
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claims I to 7 are determined to be patentable as
amended: ^
New claims 8-10 are added and determmed to be pa-
tentable.
1. A regenerating circuit system in the form of a keyed
field-effect transistor flip-flop for "0" and "/" logic level
binary signals, in particular for the readout of such binary
logic signals of integrated single-transistor storage ele-
ments forming a storage field in which the si4^-transis-
tor storage elements are connected over a digit^line to
the flip-flop, characterized in that first and second digit
lines each with an associated digit line self-capacitance are
provided and with each connecting to a group of storage
elements and a respective dummy element; and wherein the
regenerating circuit comprises at least two inverting am-
plifier stages with feedback connected between first and
second nodes: [, at least one barrier transistor disposed at
the signal imput between the associated digit line and the
corresponding amplifier stage] first and second barrier
field effect transistors respectively connected at the first and
second nodes so as to connect the respective first or second
node with the respective associated first or second digit line
[,].■ means for selectively effecting a discontinuance of
the feedback function [and means for selectively adjust-
ing bias potentials at the inputs of the regenerating cir-
cuit. J of the flip-fiop: first potential means connected for
selectively setting a bias potential on the respective gates of
the first and second barrier transistors: second potential
means connected for precharging the digit lines and a node
self-capacitance of the fiip-fiop first and second nodes: and
the first and second barrier transistors, the first and second
potential means, and the means for discontinuance of the
feedback function being provided such that after a selection
of a storage element for reading of the stored binary signal
therein the respective barrier transistor associated with the
storage element signal level being readout forms a barrier
for a portion of time thereby isolating the associated flip-fiop
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claim 4 having been finally determined to be unpatent-
able, is cancelled.
Claims 1, 5, 6, 9, 11 are determined to be patentable as
amended:
Claims 2, 3, 7, 8, and 10, dependent on amended
claims, are determined to be patentable.
9. A method of electrical hydrocarbon prospecting,
using an electrode array in which a portion of its conductor
means is closely spaced, to investigate a subsurface polariz-
able stratum which is indicative of the presence of a
hydrocarbon deposit lower than the stratum wherein a
first set of space electrode means is placed in the surface
of the ground in electrical communication with said stra-
tum, a second set of space electrode means is placed in
the surface of the ground in electrical communication
with said stratum, with generating means coupled
through second conductor means to said second set of
electrode means, and a voltage measuring means coupled
through a first conductor means to said first set of spaced
electrode means, an improvement comprising:
(a) maintaining a calculable electromagnetic coupling
between said first and second conductor means where
said means are closely spaced:
(b) measuring the current through said second conduc-
tor means to said second set of spaced electrical
means; and
(c) recording in time synchronism voltage that is meas-
ured through said first conductor means from said
first set of spaced electrical means by said voltage
measuring means, and said measured current, where-
by an anomaly indication of a hydrocarbon deposit
can be ascertained by processing from the measured
current and voltage and said calculable [electro-
magnetic] electromagnetic coupling [.], said process-
ing including the step of ascertaining a decoupled phase
angle by subtracting the electromagnetic coupling phase
angle from a measured phase angle.
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS
PUBLISHED JULY 5, 1983
Published at the request of the applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16. 1969. 869 O.G. 687. The abstracts of Defensive
Publication applications are identified by distinctly numbered series and are arranged chronologically. The heading of each abstract indicates the
number of pages of specification, including claims and sheets of drawings contained in the application as onginally filed. The files of these
applications are available to the public for inspection and reproduction may be purchased for 30 cents a sheet.
Defensive Publication applications have not been examined as to the merits of alleged invention. The Patent and Trademark Office makes no
assertion as to the novelty of the disclosed subject matter.
T103,201
ADJUSTABLE RECLINE-CONTROL MECHANISM FOR
FURNITURE AND FURNITURE COMPRISING THE
MECHANISM
James D. Robinson, 3 The Jinnings, Welwyn Garden City, Hert-
fordshire, England
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,391
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 31, 1980,
8041570
Int. a.3 A47C 1/025
U.S. CI. 297—367
4 Sheets Drawing. 13 Pages Specification
to less than 0.1 percent in the acid product by the precipitation
of (Ca,Mg)Al2F8-2H20, which is acid insoluble and suitable
for storage with the byproduct calcium sulfate. Ferric iron also
serves as a catalyst for the simultaneous precipitation of
(Na,K)2SiF6. Subsequent additions of potassium as. for exam-
ple, in the teachings of Gilbert (U.S. Pat. No. 3,338,675), can
then be applied to obtain a purified phosphoric acid product
suitable for most commercial applications. The added potas-
sium serves two purposes in the 40 to 55 percent P2O5 acid
since ferric iron is reduced to 0.25 percent Fe203by the precip-
itation of Fe3KHi4(P04)8 4H2O and the SiF6= is reduced to
about 0.2 percent by the precipitation of K2SiF6. This subse-
quent precipitate contains about 50 percent P2O5 and is as
effective as superphosphate [Ca(H2P04)2H20] in supporting
plant growth.
An adjustable recline-control mechanism for furniture of the
type comprising a carrier for an occupant, e.g. a seat-pan and
a support e.g. a back-rest, reclinable relative to the carrier
wherein the angle of recline is controlled by the mechanism
which comprises a link one end of which is pivotally con-
nected to the support while the other end is latchable by at
least two co-operating latching portions which respectively
prevent travel of the link in opposite directions, the respective
latching portions being spaced apart relative to the pivot axis
of the link such that a jolt to the front or back of the support
exerts on the link a moment which biasses the link towards
latching irrespective of the direction of the jolt. Each latching .
portion suitably comprises a fixed toothed array and a cooper-
able displaceable tooth array, at least one tooth in each array
comprising a thrust face and the teeth being arranged so that
projections normal to a thrust face in each of the latching
portions pass respectively on opposite sides of the pivot axis of
the link. The mechanism is suitably incorporated into furniture,
especially a motor vehicle seat, and is of utility in household
and garden furniture.
T103,202
PRODUCTION OF PURIFIED STRONG WET-PROCESS
PHOSPHORIC ACID
Alva W. Frazier, 2219 Randolph, and Ewell F. Dillard, Rte. 10,
Box 1%, both of Florence, Ala. 35630
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,804
Int. C\? COIB 25/16
U.S. a. 423—321 R
I No Drawing. 41 Pages Specification
The concentration of impurities in wet-process phosphoric
acid limits the usefulness of the acid for the production of
fertilizers, feed-grade phosphate and detergents. The alumi-
num, magnesium, and fluoride impurities are removed with the
calcium sulfate hemihydrate filter cake by hydrolyzing and
recycling the off-gas scrubber solutions in the presence of a
ferric iron catalyst. The aluminum and magnesium are reduced
T103,203
THIN LAYER DEPOSITION PROCESS
Timothy W. Carr, 22 Kimball Dr.. Poughkeepsie, N.Y. 12603;
Charles D. Needham, Thornacre Rd., Wappingers Falls, N.Y.
12590, and Robert T. Villetto, Jr., 12 Hasbrouck Dr., Pough-
keepsie, N.Y. 12601
Continuation of Ser. No. 106,608. Dec. 26, 1979, abandoned.
This application Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,332
Int. Cl.J HOIL 21/443
U.S. a. 427—91
1 Sheets Drawing. 16 Pages Specification
i -Mr , iinii ;Tai;:iu»f
1
ijffJS'' UTTIAuC M»
ir
A method of preventing out-gassing from lift-off structures
formed of positive resists (as for example, o-quinone diazide/-
phenol formaldehyde novolak resins) during vacuum evapora-
tion of metals in the fabrication of semiconductor devices.
Such outgassing is avoided by compositional control of the
photosensitive resist lift-off layer and by providing an addi-
tional baking step after the lift-off mask has been formed. Both
conditions are required and critical to avoid the volatile resin
decomposition products which not only tend to contaminate
the device substrate surface, but also the deposited metal film.
The method employs a photosensitive polymer which contains
about 10 to 20 wt. % of the sensitizer (e.g. o-quinone diazi^de)
in conjunction with a secondary baking step at about 160° to
about 200° C. after the lift-off mask has been formed and prior
to metal film deposition. As a result the method provides an
improved metal film as well as increased through-put, particu-
larly when forming Schottky barrier diode contacts.
I
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
7103,204
PROCESS CONTROL DISPLAY PANEL
Carter E. Dorrell, 1113 10th St., Boulder, Colo. 80302; Donald
E. Gutscher, 412 Sumner St., Longmont, Colo. 80501, and
Carol J. Huffman, 2224-B Mapleton Ave., Boulder, Colo.
80302
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,577
Int. a.5 H05K 1/00, 1/18
U.S. a. 428—42
5 Sheets Drawing. 7 Pages Specification
-continued
F3C— C(C1)2CH2-
A
IV
-CO2
" "^
C6H5
are useful intermediates for preparation of an insecticidal com-
pound of formula (I):
Y
— CfCn=CH — L. — 1.
I
F3C— C(C1)=CH
■C02
"N,
C6H5
The intermediate II is prepared by reacting the acid halide,
alkali metal salt, or lower alkyl ester of 3,3-dimethyl-4-r>en-
tenoic acid with a compound of the formula
An easily modified, brilliantly backlit, switch controlled panel
graphically represents a process. An operator panel includes a
frame holding a light-transmitting screen in front of circuit
boards connected to a computer and to the controlled process.
The screen displays symbols, placed on the screen with self-
sticking tape, representing process steps and controls, transpar-
ent touch-sensitive switches, lights, illuminated digital dis-
plays, and the like. The switches, lights and displays connect to
the circuit boards.
T103,205
INTERMEDIATES AND PROCESS FOR INSECTIODAL
4-PHENYL-2-INDANYL ESTERS
Philip A. Cniickshank, 211 Dodds La., Princeton, N.J. 08540
Continuation of Ser. No. 286^9, Jul. 24, 1981, abandoned. This
application Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,230
Int. a.3 C07C 6 7/i/ 7
U.S. a. 560—124
No Drawing. 21 Pages Specification
Compounds of formulae II, III and IV:
H2C=CHC(CH3hCH2C02
•' "^
C6H5
F3C— C(C1)2CH2CH(C1)C(CH3)2CH2C02
"N
II
III
o
C6H5
in which X is a hydroxy group or a leaving group.
Intermediate III is prepared by reacting II with
l,l,l-trichloro-2,2,2-trifluoroethane in the presence of a
solvent, a solvating agent, and a catalyst. Intermediate
III is then di-dehydrochlorinated in the presence of
base, in one or two steps, to produce I.
C6H5
T103,206
PRODUCnON OF UREA PHOSPHATE
Harry T. Lewis, 802 Meadow La., and Ewell F. Dillard, Rte. 10,
Box 196, both of Florence, Ala. 35630
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,515
Int. a.3 C07C 727/0/, 126/08
U.S. a. 564—363
4 Sheets Drawing. 36 Pages Specification
A two-stage continuous crystallization process for production
of urea phosphate by reaction of impure wet-process ortho-
phosphoric acid (about 54 percent P2O5) and urea with simul-
taneous addition of a selected acidifying agent (sulfuric acid,
hydrochloric acid, or phosphoric acid) to clarified mother
liquor used as recycle in the process. Addition of the acidifying
agent decreases pH in the crystallization process whereby the
solubility of a contaminating water-insoluble iron phosphate-
urea salt [FeH3(P04)2.2CO(NH2)2] is increased, purity of the
crystalline urea phosphate product is improved significantly,
and the useful storage life of the recycle mother liquor is pro-
longed.
REISSUES
JULY 5, 1983
1
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets C 1 appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,296
TRANSMISSION WITH RESILIENTLY LOADED
MAINSHAFT GEARS
Elmer A. Richards, Kalamazoo, Mich., assignor to Eaton Corpo-
ration, Cleveland, Ohio
Reissued No. Re. 29,601, dated Apr. 4, 1978, Ser. No. 750,299,
Dec. 13, 1976.
Original No. 3,921,469, dated Nov. 25, 1975, Ser. No. 452,825,
Mar, 20, 1974. Division of Ser. No. 276,376, Jul. 31, 1972,
Pat. No. 3,799,002. Application for reissue Oct. 12, 1979, Ser.
No. 84,261
Int. C1.3 F16H 2/38; F16D 13/00. 21/02
U.S. a. 74— 339 SOaims
teeth when said jaw clutch portions are disengaged, one of
said trailing portions of said blocking teeth and said block-
ing portion defining an array of spaces in cross section, said
spaces capable of receiving therein the other of said trailing
portions of said blocking teeth and said blocking portions
when said spaces and said other of said trailing portions and
said blocking portions are aligned to permit said blocking
portions to relatively move axially past said trailing por-
tions of said blocking teeth so that said jaw clutch portions
can be engaged with one another; and
a surface on said blocker frictionally cooperating with a sur-
face on said second jaw clutch portion for causing said
blocker to tend to rotate relative to said first jaw clutch
portion to the extent permitted by said drive teeth wherever
and for so long as a substantial difference in relative roU-
tive speeds exist between said respective jaw clutch por-
tions, said blocking portions interferring with said trailing
portions of said blocking teeth when said blocker is rotated
relative to said first jaw clutch portion to the extent permit-
ted by said drive teeth so as to prevent engagement of said
jaw clutch portions. /
10. In an interengageable jaw clutch system, the combination
comprising:
a rotatable shaft and a first jaw clutch portion mounted
thereon for axial sliding movement relative to said shaft and
positive rotation therewith about an axis, said first jaw
clutch portion defining a plurality of radially outwardly
extending external drive teeth thereon;
a gear coaxially related to said shaft and a second jaw clutch
portion fixed to said gear, said second jaw clutch portion
defining a plurality of radially inwardly extending internal
drive teeth thereon for interengagement with said external
drive teeth of first jaw clutch portion upon relative axial
movement of said jaw clutch portions toward one another;
said first jaw clutch portion drive teeth at a radius suitable
for engaging with drive teeth on said second jaw clutch
portion, said drive teeth having leading edges for engage-
ment with the clutch teeth of the other jaw clutch portion
and defining the effective drive portions of said drive teeth,
said first jaw clutch portion having also blocking teeth, said
blocking teeth having leading portions generally axially
aligned with the effective drive portions of said external
drive teeth and trailing portions generally axially offset the
effective drive portions of said external drive teeth, said
trailing portions extending radially beyond the outer radial
surfaces of said leading portions;
means to selectively axially move said gear relative to said
shaft from a first position wherein said second clutch mem-
ber is axially spaced from said first clutch member to a
second position for engagement of said clutch members;
means resiliently biasing said first clutch portion toward said
second portion and a stop member limiting axial movement
of said first clutch portion to a positi«n axially spaced from
said second clutch portion when said gear is in said first
position;
blocker means coacting between said first and second jaw
clutch portions for positively preventing engagement of said
jaw clutch portions so long as a substantial difference in
relative speed exists therebetween, said blocker means
including an annular blocker having blocking portions ar-
ranged on and supported by said drive teeth for limited
rotation with respect thereto and positioned axially between
the trailing portion of said blocking teeth and said clutch
Re. 31,297
FULL COVERAGE RECIRCULATING SPRAYER
John O. Moore, West Helena, and Ray H. Dawson, Lexa, both
of Ark., assignors to Sprayrite Manufacturing Co., West
Helena, Ark.
Original No. 4,168,798, dated Sep. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 874,396,
Feb. 2, 1978. Application for reissue Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No.
165,132
Int. a.3 B05B 1/28
U.S. a. 239—121 31 aaims
1. A full-coverage recirculating sprayer assembly for appli-
cation of herbicidal and other liquids via [solid] spray streams
selectively to standing vegetation with recapture of liquid not
contacting the vegetation, the sprayer assembly being carried
on a vehicle for traversing an agricultural area in a direction;
the assembly comprising a source of pressurized liquid carried
on said vehicle, a horizontal bar carried on said vehicle and
extending laterally of said direction; and a plurality of [solid-
stream] spray-stream spray nozzles communicating to said
source of pressurized liquid, a collector means placed to inter-
cept said streams, and at least one reservoir located below said
collector, all carried by said bar, and wherein:
the spray nozzles direct said streams at an angle to the direc-
tion of travel of at least 15°;
the spray nozzles are arranged in opposed pairs to provide
[complete, criss-cross coverage to] criss<ross spray pat-
terns covering all parts of the area traversed;
said collector means comprising vertically disposed support
means and collector mat means formed of a [mat] fibrous
material and having a vertical orientation with a connection
3
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
at the upper end with said support means and a lower edge;
[and]
said reservoir being disposed enclosing said lower edge of the
collector mat and adapted -to collect liquid flowing from
the collector [, whereby to reduce wind and travel speed
effects on the solid streams of liquid and splashing of said
streams as they strike said weeds J and said reservoir having
an abutment surface projecting fonvardly in the direction of
travel of the vehicle to impact against vegetation and bend it
over towards and into said spray patterns.
outside space, the closure membrane being permeable to
oxygen and impermeable to water, and an aqueous elec-
Re. 31,298
SPRING SHACKLE ASSEMBLY
Edward J. Herbenar, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to TRW Inc.,
Cleveland, Ohio
Original No. 4,083,545, dated Apr. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 719,190,
Aug. 31, 1976. Application for reissue Jul. 31, 1979, Ser. No.
62,536
Int. a.3 B60G 11/12
U.S. a. 267—54 A 15 Oaims
trolyte containing the ligand cation of the said ligand
membrane, the said electrolyte being disposed between
said ligand membrane and said closure membrane.
Re. 31,300
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ALKYL- OR
ARYLPHOSPHONOTHIOIC DIHALIDES
Eugene H. Uhing, Pleasantville, N.Y., and Arthur D. f! Toy,
Stamford, Conn., assignors to Stauffer Chemical Company,
Westport, Conn.
Original No. 3,968,156, dated Jul. 6, 1976, Ser. No. 534,942,
Dec. 20, 1974. Application for reissue Jan. 5, 1979, Ser. No.
1,633
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 29,
1992, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07F 9/42
U.S. a. 260—543 P 6 Claims
1. A method of preparing compounds of the formula:
11. A pivot means constructed to interconnect first and second
members for angular displacement of one of said members relative
to the other of said members about a fixed pivot axis:
said pivot means comprising a pair of ball studs;
each of said ball studs having a shank portion and a head
portion;
said shank portions being in axial alignment with the ends of
said shank portions being in juxtaposed relationship;
a sleeve surrounding said shank portions supported by one of
said members;
a pair of socket means enclosing said head portions of said pair
of ball studs;
each of said socket means being secured to the other of said
members.
R— P
t/" ,
(1)
Re. 31,299
ION-SELECTIVE ELECTRODE DEVICE FOR
POLAROGRAPHIC MEASUREMENT OF OXYGEN
Manfred Kessler, and Jens Hoper, both of Dortmund, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Max Planck Gesellschaft zur Foer-
derung der Wissenschaften, Goettingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Original No. 4,263,115, dated Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 921,259,
Jul. 3, 1978. Application for reissue Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No.
357,563
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 4,
1977, 2730143
Int. a.J GOIN 27/30
U.S. a. 204—415 12 Qaims
1. An ion-sensitive electrode device for measuring oxygen
concentrations comprising
a source of potential voltage;
a reduction electrode for the oxygen com]X)sed of a noble
metal and connected to said voltage source;
a reference electrode annularly disposed about said reduc-
tion electrode;
a ligand membrane provided in front of the reduction elec-
trode, the said ligand membrane containing a cation-selec-
tive carrier and being permeable to hydrogen ions;
a closure membrane to seal the said electrodes against the
\
wherein R is a hydrocarbyl group consisting essentially of
hydrogen and carbon including C\ to Caoalkyl; the aryl substi-
tuted derivatives thereof, said aryl having 1 or 2 fused rings,
cycloalkyi of 5-6 carbons in the ring, aryl of up to 3 fused
rings, biphenyl and the C1-C4 alkyl substituted derivatives of
said cycloalkyi, aryl or biphenyl and X is chlorine or bromine,
comprising contacting under at least an autogenous pressure in
a reaction zone capable of withstanding elevated pressure at a
temperature of from about 175° C. to about 400° C. in the
presence of combinations o/phosphorus sulfides an alkyl or aryl
halide of the formula:
RX
(II)
wherein R and X are as deflned above with a trivalent phos-
phorus trihalide of the formula:
PX3 (HI)
or a pentavalent thiophosphoryl halide of the formula:
P(S)X3 (IV)
or mixtures thereof wherein X is as defined above [.J said
reactants being contacted approximately according to the follow-
ing general scheme;
3RX + aPX^ + bp(S)X-i + ^^ ^ 3RP(S)X2
wherein R and X are as defined above and a plus b equals 1.
July 5, 198;
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
Re. 31,301
in¥ramammary compositions
John S. Dowrick, Littlehampton, England, assignor to Beecham
Group P.I.C., England
Original No. 4,282,202, dated Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 88,859, Oct.
29, 1979. Application for reissue Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No.
345,474
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 27, 1978,
42336/78
Int. C1.3 A61K 9/06. 9/08. 9/10. 9/18
U.S. a. 424—23 *3 Qaims
1. A liquid veterinary composition adapted for intramam-
mary administration comprising a suspension of a powered
solid pharmaceutically acceptable alkali metal, alkaline earth
metal or amine salt of clavulanic acid in an amount of from
£1] 0.1 to 40% by weight of said composition calculated on
the basis of the equivalent weight of free clavulanic acid, and
from 5 to 20% by weight of a powdered solid molecular sieve
in a pharmaceutically acceptable oil carrier.
X
Re. 31,302
VALIDATION SYSTEMS FOR CREDIT CARD OR THE
LIKE
Leon Stambler, 534 Longacre Ave., Woodhaven, N.Y. 11598
Original No. 3,786,420, dated Jan. 15, 1974, Ser. No. 227,146,
Feb. 17, 1972. Continuation of Ser. No. 648,522, Jan. 12, 1976,
Pat. No. 3,786,420. Applicafion for reissue Jul. 23, 1979, Ser.
No. 59,784
Int. CI.' H04Q 9/00; G06K 9/00
U.S. a. 340—825.34 19 Cla'ms
1. In a system where the owner of an information bearing
card such as a credit card or the like is m the sole possession of
a predetermined memorized number of a given number of
significant digits, said credit card having on a surface thereof a
plurality of first indicia corresponding to said predetermined
number and a plurality of second indicia corresponding to a
code determining how said first indicia is manifested on said
information bearing card, in combination therewith apparatus
for verifying that said number and said first indicia correspond,
comprising:
a. first means including a keyboard for storing said number
after insertion thereby by an owner,
b. second means responsive to both said first and second
indicia on said credit card for providing at an output
thereof an electrical signal according to said indicia,
c. third means responsive to a digit of said number as stored
to provide a first control signal and then responsive to
only said second indicia for providing any one of a plural-
ity of control signals each one operative to determine how
sai^ first indicia is to be translated,
d. a plurality of translating means coupled to said second
means, each one capable of responding to said electrical
signal output representative of said first indicia to provide
a decoded signal therefrom according to the particular
format of said translator, each of said decoded signals
representative of a digit contained in said predetermined
number when translated according to said second indicia,
e. translating selector means responsive to said control sig-
nals and coupled to said translating means to cause a first
//-^
err
'-\-^Ak
^^2
7VAIVSIATM
^/^jt
^3
2f,
1IA.D
^v -
30-
■'«
20
SuBscKieeit
xefgcueo
AND
STORtOB^
~o J o o c
VAUOiiTi^
one, of said, translating means to be selected according to
said first control signal and thereafter others of said trans-
lating means to be selected according to said plurality of
control signals, whereby different selected ones of said
translating means provide different digits of said number
according to said second indicia on said credit card, and
f. comparison means responsive to said decoded signals and
said stroed number to provide an output when said decode
signals correspond to said stored number, said output
verifying that said memorized number and said first indi-
cia on said card correspond.
Re. 31.303
Patent Not Issued For this Number
^
PLANT PATENTS
_ GRANTED JULY 5, 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in colbr and therefore it .s not pract.cable to reproduce the drawing.
5,065
African violet named pink lady
Arnold W. Fischer, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Pan-American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla.
1 , Filed Apr. 10, 1981, S^r. No. 252,894
1 1 Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 69 „ laaim
1. A new African Violet cultivar, substantially as herein
shown and described, characterized by the large, star-shaped
flowers and the phlox pink coloring of its profusely produced
flowers.
5,066
AFRICAN VIOLET NAMED BIG STAR
Arnold W. Fischer, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Pan-American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,895
Int. Cl.^ AOIH 5/00
U.S. CI. Ph.— 69 * Claim
1. A new and distinct African Violet cultivar. substantially
as herein shown and described, distinguished by its vigorous
growth habit and its profuse production of very large, dark
blue, star-shaped flowers atop a plant of generally rosette
shape. _
PATENTS
GRANTED JUL. 5, 1983
ERRATA
For I See
CLASS PATENT NO.
604-1 10 ; 4,391 .272
604-1 10 4.391 ,273
604-190 4.391 ,274
604-266 4.39 1 .276
lh-210 4.391.338
/82-141 4.391.345
A39-075 : 4.391,408
/273-142 4.391.442
384-152 4,391 .474
384-226 4,391 ,475
549-525 4.39 1 .753
423-659 4.39 1 .880
435-042 4,39 1 ,887
236-036 4,39 1 ,9 1 3
215-307 4,392,055
382-022..... 4.392.120
366-129 4,392,168
346-154 4,392,194
PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SHOCK I
4 390 995
DAMPING FACE GUARD STRAP FOR
FOOTBALL HELMETS
Vernon R. Walck, 267 Bonita Dr., Bakersfield, Calif. 93305
Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,169
Int. a.3 A41D 13/00; A42B 3/00
U.S.a. 2— 9 13aaims
part comprising two legs, part of the upper edge of each leg
being permanently attached to the lower edge of the body and
the remainder of the upper edge being releasably attached to
the lower edge of the body by fastening means thereby to
provide a one piece suit, the jacket and trouser part each hav-
ing co-operable retaining means whereby, when the fastening
means are released and the trouser part folded relative to the
jacket, the trouser part may be retained between the upper and
lower edges of the body by said retaining means, whereby the
garment may be worn as a jacket only.
1. Shock damping anchor straps for a face guard mounted on
a transverse horizontal axis to a brow portion of a protective
helmet, the face guard having a. mounting bar rotatably
mounted to the helmet on said axis and extending rearward at
opposite sides of the helmet, and the face guard having oppo-
site side anchor bars depending from the mounting bar at the
front edges of opposite side ear portions of the helmet, there
being an ear hole through each side ear portion of the helmet,
and each anchor strap including a flexible body with inner and
outer loop portions continuing one into the other from one end
provided with a hole therethrough and to a terminal end, the
hole at said one end being engaged over a fastener means and
the inner loop portion formed into an inner loop wrapped
around the front edge of the ear portion and passing through
the ear hole of the helmet and secured by a second hole there-
through engaged over the fastener means, and the outer loop
portion formed into an outer loop wrapped over the anchor
bar and the said terminal end secured by a third hole there-
through engaged over and held by said fastener means.
4,390,997
HEAT PROTECTION GARMENT
Qaus-Dieter Hinz, Liibeck, and Adalbert Pasternack, Bad
Schwartau, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dra
gerwerk Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,656
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 2,
1980, 3004593
Int. a.3 A41D 13/00
U.S. a. 2—81 « Claims
4,390,996
GARMENT
Stuart W. Read, 87 Malvern Rd., St. Johns, Worcester, England
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,673
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 2, 1980,
8028302
Int. a? A41B 1/12
U.S.a.2-70 10 Claims
M'y'iiyyyyiiyiiyiiyi
1. A garment comprises a jacket and a trouser part, the
jacket comprising a body having a lower edge at or above
crotch level, two arms extending from the body, the trouser
6 1
1. A heat protection garment comprising:
at least one manifold having opposite parallel end walls
defining a mixing chamber;
at least one header having opposite parallel end w^lls defin-
ing a mixing chamber;
a plurality of coolant tubes connecting the manifold and
header mixing chambers, the tubes connected to one end
wall of each of the manifold and header;
at least one coolant supply conduit connected to the mani-
fold mixing chamber at a location spaced from the coolant
tubes connected thereto;
at least one coolant discharge conduit connected to the
header mixing chamber at a location spaced from the
coolant tubes connected thereto; and
a plurality of parallel rows of connecting pieces extending
across the manifold and header mixing chambers respec-
tively, between the conduits and the coolant tubes and
parallel to the end walls of the manifold and header re-
spectively;
the ratio, in each of the manifold and header cf the number
of coolant tubes to the number of parallel rows of connect-
ing pieces to the number of coolant conduits being approx-
imately equal to or smaller than 12:3:1; and
the ratio in each of the manifold and header of the spacing
between the parallel rows of connecting pieces to the
10
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
length of each connecting piece in each row to the spacing 4,391,000
between each connecting piece ineach row being approxi- EAR MUFF MOUNTING DEVICE
mately equal to or less than 1:3:1. Bo G. Lonnstedt, Kvambergsvagen 23, S-141 45 Huddinge,
i _ Sweden
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,397
4,390,998 Int. Q.^ A42B 3/00. 1/06
PREFABRICATED CAP FRAME U.S. CI. 2—423
Paul G. Gallin, Bronxville, N.Y., assignor to Art Cap Company,
Inc.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,227
Int. C\? A41C 5/00
U.S. a. 2—180 12 Qaims
3 U-*005 4(;^'5
o o ""o oco''ooc6
TT
16 17,
23 ^
1
^<19
7 20
0 .27
1
..M..
29 ..
26,8 2^
n
1. A prefabricated cap frame for a uniform cap of the type
having a visor and a grommet for supporting and stretching the
top of the cap comprising a one piece structure molded from a
flexible synthetic resin and including a perforated band portion
in the form of a substantially flat open strip adapted to be
curved and joined at the ends to form the hat band,
said band portion including a thickened portion at the upper
edge thereof for reinforcement,
and an integral vertical stay portion extending from the
upper edge of said band portion.
4,390,999
PANTY HOSE WITH BODY BULGE CONTROL
J. William Lawson, Siler City, and Robert M. Matthews, Pitts-
boro, both of N.C., assignors to Kellwood Company, St. Louis,
Mo.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,380
Int. CI.' A41B 11/04: D04B 9/46; A41B 9/10; D04B 7/12
U.S. a. 2—409 7 Qaims
1. A device for removably mounting an ear muff holder arm
at a hard hat having a narrow pocket defmed by substantially
parallel side walls and having an open bottom, said device
comprising a main body for rotatably receiving said holder
arm and defmed by a face adapted to rest against said hat, as
well as a plate member having a shape suitable for fitting into
said pocket, said plate member having an inward face to be
directed towards said hat and being arranged at an angle less
than 1 80° in relation to said face of said main body, as well as
by substantially parallel side edges and a transverse lower
edge, there being provided at said lower edge a ledge extend-
ing between said side edges and facing the same way as said
inward face, there also being provided a ledge means, being
narrower and shorter than said ledge, and being located above
and parallel to the latter.
1. In a panty hose type garment including certain portions
with elastic yarn in an amount sufficient to provide a relatively
great amount of compressive force against the underlying
portion of the body of the wearer, and other portions normally
joined directly to said certain portions and being knit solely of
stretchable yam to provide a relatively small amount of com-
pressive force against the underlying portion of the body of the
wearer, the combination therewith of a body bulge controlling
intermediate portion positioned between and interconnecting
said certain and said other portions, said intermediate portion
being knit of stretchable yam with elastic yam incorporated in
spaced-apart courses and providing a lesser amount of elastic
yam in said intermediate portion than the amount of elastic
yam provided in said certain portions to provide a medium
amount of compressive force against the portion of the body of
the wearer underlying said intermediate p>ortion, said succes-
sive great, medium, and small amounts of compressive forces
applied by said corresponding certain, intermediate, and other
portions of said garment thereby applying a gradually varying
amount of compressive force against the underlying portion of
the body to prevent an abrupt outward bulging of the corre-
sponding portion of the body of the wearer.
4,391,001
SOFT TOILET SEAT AND HINGE CONNECTOR
David E. Harrison, Columbus, Miss., assignor to Beatrice Foods
Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,388 I
Int. a.3 A47K 13/12
U.S. a. 4—236 25 Qaims
1. A toilet seat component and hinge combination compris-
ing:
a hinge member including an elongated connector spike
having an upper sawtooth-shaped surface and a lower
sawtooth-shaped surface; and
a toilet seat component including a female coupling means
provided adjacent the rear edge of the toilet seat compo-
nent for receiving and retaining said elongated connector
spike to provide a permanent and secure attachment
thereto, said female coupling means including:
a plurality of horizontally aligned upper lock lugs;
a plurality of horizontally aligned lower lock lugs posi-
tioned below and spaced from said upper lock logs; and
said upper lock lugs and said lower lock lugs defining the
upper extent and the lower extent of a coupling opening
extending inwardly from the rear extent of said female
coupling means, said coupling opening being dimen-
sioned to matingly receive said elongated connector
spike with the sawtoothed-shaped upper surface of the
elongated connector spike lockingly engaging the
upper lock lugs and the sawtooth-shaped lower surface
of the elongated connector spike lockingly engaging the
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
11
lower lock lugs for effecting automatic locked retention sure in the pressure tank, and a bypass duct connected to the
of the elongated connector spike in the female coupling regulator for exhausting excess air from the system when the
pressure tank is at its operating pressure, the improvement
comprising a tube extending into the container to a point close
to the bottom of the container and connected to the bypass
duct of the pressurized air supply system to continuously sup-
ply aerating air to said container during operation of the vehi-
,-fv j^- cle engine and when the pressure tank is at its operating pres-
sure and to substantially continuously aerate faecal matter in
said container during vehicle engine operation.
M--^
■za
<b4.
_54
4,391,003
WATER-SAVING DEVICE FOR USE WITH TOILETS
Joseph M. Talerico, 103 W. (ireenbrook Rd., and Henry
Fleischer, 15 Wind Ridge Dr., both of North Caldwell, N.J.
07006
Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,666
Int. CI.' E03D 1/00. 1/14. 3/12
U.S. Q. 4—415 16 Qaims
^•Vr
19 -j
^'^^'^
32 J
may..
5o
ZO ^
W^^^
n
1
'"^'^1.
! (
i^
in response to the insertion of the elongated connector
spike into the female coupling opening.
s^
4,391,002
WATER-CLOSET FOR VEHICLES, PARTICULARLY
MOTOR COACHES
Ernst Marti, Kallnach, Switzerland, assignor to Karl Kassbohrer
Fahrzeugwerke GmbH, Ulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 172,197
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26,
1979, 2930403
Int. Q.' E03D 1/00
U.S. Q. 4—321 * Claims
t
*
?
'V
'\
'U^'^~
yT:r/2A
M^f
W •» ' • '<»
1. In a water-closet for a vehicle including a completely
closed sewage container for receiving faecal matter and sew-
age therein, said vehicle having a pressurized air supply system
for operating brakes, doors, ventilation flaps and the like, said
system including a compressor operable continuously during
operation of the vehicle engine to supply pressurized air to a
pressure tank, a pressure regulator for controlling the air pres-
1. A water-saving device for use in conjunction with a toilet
bowl-tank assembly, which includes a tank having an outlet
opening in the bottom thereof and means for replenishing
water in the tank, comprising, in combination:
lower float means adapted to removably seat over the open-
ing in the bottom of a toilet tank;
upper float means actuated upon flushing and adapted to
float with the level of water in the toilet tank and contact
the lower float means as the water level drops to a prede-
termined level in the toilet tank and thence force the
12
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
lower float means to seat over the opening in the bottom
of the toilet tank;
locking means adapted to lock the upper float means in an
immobile position out of contact with the lower float
means when the toilet tank is filled with water;
float control means in communication with the locking
means and connected to the lower float means which,
uf)on flushing the toilet, is adapted to unseat the lower
float means from the outlet opening in the toilet tank to
allow water to drain out, while causing the locking means
to unlock the upper float means to thereby allow the
upper float means to fall with the falling level of water in
the toilet tank whereby when the water level has fallen to
a predetermined level, the upper float means contacts and
weighs against the lower float means forcing it down-
wardly and seat over the outlet opening in the toilet tank
and thereby preventing the water level in the tank from
dropping any further, and as the water level rises in the
tank the upper float means floats upwardly with the rising
water level until it contacts the locking means and is
locked into its immobile position while the lower float
means, through the force of water bearing against it and
suction, remains seated over the outlet opening in the
toilet tank.
toilet bowl and toilet seat, which rectal spraying device com-
prises:
a spraying head for spraying water;
means mounting said spraying head in the toilet bowl for
moving said spraying head between a first spraying posi-
tion underlying the anal or rectal area of an individual
seated on the toilet seat, and a second spraying position
located at the side of the toilet bowl; and
a spray deflecting member mounted on the toilet bowl at
said second spraying position for confronting said spray-
ing head when said spraying head is moved to said second
spraying position;
water ejected from said spraying head at said second spray-
ing position being deflected back toward said spraying
head.
f
\.
12
13
{
l^
\- l3o
, 1
I .'^— —
^
■ . A
\
^ -, I ,4
- - i A
4,391,005
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING SWIMMING POOLS
John M. Goettl, Phoenix, Ariz., assignor to George J. Ghiz,
Phoenix, Ariz.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,686
Int. a.3 E04H 3/20; B08B 3/02; B05B 15/W
U.S. a. 4—490 6 Claims
431,004
SPRAYING DEVICE FOR USE IN TOILET BOWLS
Shinji Kawai, Toyota; Koichi Suzuki, Chiryu, and Yuji Yamagu-
chi, Anjyo, all of Japan, assignors to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 376,219
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 9, 1981, 56-070021
Int. a.' A61H 35/00; A47K 3/22
U.S. a. 4—443 5 Qaims
19
1. A spraying device for use in toilets of the type having a
1. In an intermittently activated water delivery assembly for
cleaning a swimming pool, comprising:
a generally cylindrical housing in communication with a
source of water under pressure, said housing being in open
communication with the interior of said pool at a surface
of the pool structure, and
a generally cylindrical hollow nozzle head rot^tably
mounted in said housing and being axially movable from
an inactive, retracted position therein to an active position
in which a portion of said head projects outside said hous-
ing within said pool when water under pressure is supplied
to said housing;
the improvement comprising:
thickened wall regions diametrically and symmetrically
disposed interiorly of the portion of said nozzle head
projecting outside said housing, each of said wall regions
having at least one nozzle passage formed therein, said
nozzle passages being symmetrically disposed in said
nozzle head and being constructed to deliver streams of
water non-radially from said nozzle head across said sur-
face of the pool structure for cleaning said surface.
6. In an intermittently activated water delivery assembly for
cleaning a swimming pool, comprising:
a generally cylindrical housing in communication with a
source of water under pressure, said housing being in open
communication with the interior of said pool at a surface
of the pool structure, and
a generally cylindrical hollow nozzle head rotatably
July 5,
^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
13
mounted in said housing and being axially movable from
an inactive, retracted position therein to an active position
in which a portion of said head projects outside said hous-
ing within said pool when water under pressure is supplied
to said housing;
the improvement comprising:
a retainer ring threadably received in said housing for deter-
mining the active position of said housing, and means are
provided for releasable connecting said nozzle head and
said retainer ring for joint removal from said housing, said
last named means comprising a stop collar carried by said
nozzle head and engageable with said retainer ring for
limiting movement of said nozzle head to its active posi-
tion and a holding ring formed on said nozzle head, said
holding ring having a diameter slightly greater than the
inside diameter of said retainer ring whereby said retainer
ring may be forced over said holding ring to assemble said
retainer ring and said nozzle head but interference be-
tween the holding ring and said retainer ring prevents
accidental separation of the nozzle head and the retainer
ring when the retainer ring is removed from the housing.
4,391,006
TRANSFER BENCH
Alfred A. Smith, 13114 Margate St., Van Nuys, Calif. 91401
I Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 379,077
I I Int. a.3 A47K 3/00. 3/02. 3/022. 3/22
U.S. a. 4—559 6 Qaims
/
tion to the corresponding end portion of the other bar
member by a frame securable to and extending up-
wardly from each of said second end portions, said
frame being spaced from said rigid cushion element by
at least the width of a seat;
B. clamping means whereby the bench may be clamped to
said tub side wall, said means comprising an element ad-
justably securable to, and extending downwardly from,
the horizontal support section of each of said parallel bar
members in proximity to its first end portion, the lower
end of said adjustably securable element carrying a
threaded member extending through said lower end with
a first end directed toward the terminus of the first end
portion of the bar member which abuts the outside of said
tub side wall, said threaded member having knob means
on its other end to enable the said first end of the threaded
member^o be adjustably moved toward or away from the
inside of the tub side wall, and means disposed on said first
end to distribute force, applied by the torquing of said
threaded element by the knob means, over a broad area of
the inner wall of the tub when said tub wall is clamped
between the said means disposed on the first end of the
threaded member and the terminus of the first end portion
of horizontal support section of the parallel bar member,
in abutment with the outside of the tub wall; and
C. cushioned seating means, the last said means extending
across and fixedly secured to the horizontal support sec-
tion of each of said parallel bar members intermediate said
frame and said rigid cushioning element.
4,391,007
MULTI-POSITION WALL SPACER
Larry D. Mitchell, and Charles W. Keith, Jr., both of Manches-
ter, Mo., assignors to B-W Health Products, Inc., Maryland
Heights, Mo.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,415
Int. Q.' A61G 7/00
U.S. CI. 5—60 »3 Qaims
1. A transfer bench to facilitate the movement of an infirm
person or invalid from outside of a bathtub to a position at least
partially within the bathtub, said bathtub being defined by a
transverse floor and a wall extending upwardly from said floor
to terminate in a rim, said transfer bench comprising:
A. a pair of parallel bar members spaced from each other,
each of said bar members including a horizontal support
section, having
(i) a first end portion to be disposed transversely upon the
rim of the tub side wall and to extend outside of the tub
and downwardly and back to terminate in abutment
against the outside of the tub side wall, the horizontal
support section adjacent said first end portion of one of
said bar members being held in spaced parallel relation-
ship with the corresponding horizontal support section
of the other bar member by a rigid cushioning element
secured to and extending over both said horizontal
support sections; and
(ii) a second opposite end portion curved downwardly
and extending vertically as a leg to terminate upon the
transverse floor of the tub, the last said end portion of
each of said bar members being secured in spaced rela-
1. An adjustable hospital bed having a relatively fixed frame
having side rails and head and foot portions, a movable frame
having a headboard mounted thereon, and having head and
foot portions, said bed having a normal position wherein said
headboard is substantially parallel with an adjacent wall of a
hospital room, elevation linkage interconnecting said movable
frame with said fixed frame to elevate said movable frame, said
linkage also being adapted to elevate the head portion of said
movable frame into a reverse Trendelenberg tilt position, and
operable to elevate the foot portion of the movable frame into
a Trendelenberg tilt position, and an adjustable wall spacer
attached through pivot means to said adjustable frame, said
wall spacer comprising:
pivot means;
two tubes having guide bushings provided therein, each of
14
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said tubes attached through said pivot means to one of said
side rails;
a U-shaped tube having two legs, each of said legs slidably
received by said guide bushings;
two tenons, each attached to one leg of said U-shaped tube;
and
two U-shaped strike members, each attached to one of said
side rails and each having an aperture in the top thereof
and an aperture and an elongated notch in the bottom
thereof, said strike members each positioned to receive a
tenon selectively within either of said apertures.
second set of aligned bubblelike cells for giving sole sup-
port to said living body; and
4,391,008
ELEMENTS FOR ASSEMBLY OF KNOCKED-DOWN
WATERBED PEDESTAL
Don N. Yamaoka, and David L. Yamaoka, both of 13599 De-
smond, Pacoima, Calif. 91331
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 173,666, Jul. 29, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,844
Int. Cl.^ A47C 19/00
U.S. a. 5—200 R 3 Qaims
1. A drawer usable in a waterbed pedestal, comprising in
combination:
(a) a front section, having dovetailed slots at its respective
ends and a groove extending continuously horizontal
along its lower portion;
(b) side sections, the front ends of which dovetails, fitting
tightly into the slots of the front section, and grooves
extending continuously horizontal along the lower por-
tions thereof, the rear ends of the side sections being
provided, respectively, with dovetail slots;
(c) a bottom section fitting slidingly into the grooves of the
front and side sections;
(d) a back section, the ends of which have undersized dove-
tails fitting loosely within the dovetail slots of the rear end
portions of the side sections, respectively, so as to create
an elongated tapered cavity therewithin;
(e) elongated insert means adapted, respectively to be pres-
sure fitted within the cavity in the dovetail joints of the
end portions of the back and side sections, so as to estab-
lish rigid joining of the back and side section of the draw-
ers, respeptively.
■^
second pump means coupled to said alternating inflatable
support means for alternately inflating at a relatively high
pressure said first and second interdigitated sets of aligned
bubblelike cells.
4,391,010
DISPOSABLE DRAW SHEET
Albert F. Kronman, Locust Valley, N.Y., assignor to Hosposable
Products Inc., Bound Brook, N.J.
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,864
Int. aj A47G 9/00; A61G 72/00
U.S. a. 5—484 8 Qaims
^^'-'
^'T^
1. A disposable draw sheet for application to the mattress of
a bed comprising a thin sheet of liquid impervious material, a
top surface, a bottom surface, longitudinal margins on said
sheet and a sheet width substantially greater than that of the
mattress to which it is to be applied so that said sheet margins
may be tucked under said mattress on opposite sides thereof, a
layer of liquid absorbent material carried by the top surface of
the sheet across the midregion of said sheet, said absorbent
material being of a width less than the top of the mattress, a
doubled back portion on the longitudinal margins of the sheet,
and means to secure the doubled back portion of the said
margins to the top surface of the said sheet in at least two
spaced discrete areas to form at least one pocket in each of the
doubled back portions.
4,391,009
VENTILATED BODY SUPPORT
Rolf Schild; Denis G. Melrose, both of London, and Brian M.
Hawkins, Luton, all of England, assignors to Huntleigh Medi-
cal Ltd., Bedfordshire, England
FUed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,111
Int. a.3 A61G 7/04: A47C 27/10
U.S. a. 5—453 A 13 Oalms
1. A ventilated support for living bodies comprising:
a plenum chamber having a plurality of apertures for com-
munication with the environment;
first pump means coupled to said plenum chamber for pro-
viding passage of air through said plenum chamber at a
relatively low pressure;
alternating inflatable support means disposed in operative
relationship to said plenum chamber and having a first set
of aligned bubblelike cells which are interdigitated with a
4,391,011
MACHINE ADAPTED FOR USE IN THE
MANUFACTURE OF SHOES
Alan M. Peck, Beverly, Mass.; Kingsley J. Tutt, Birstall, and
Andrew G. N. Walter, Quom, both of England, assignors to
USM Corporation, Farmington, Conn.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,585
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 10, 1980,
8019008
Int. a.3 C14B 1/44
U.S. a. 12—1 B 11 Qaims
1. A machine suitable for performing a roughing operation
progressively along marginal portions of shoe bottoms com-
prising a shoe support, tool supporting means, means for effect-
ing relative movement, lengthwise of the bottom of a shoe
supported by the shoe support, between said shoe support and
July 5, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
15
1 the tool supporting means first in one direction and then in an
opposite direction, and means, operable as relative lengthwise
movement takes place as aforesaid, for effecting relative move-
ment, widthwise of the bottom of a shoe supported by the shoe
support, between said shoe support and the tool supporting
means, whereby, in the operation of the machine, a roughing
operation can be progressively performed along marginal
portions of such shoe bottom, wherein the tool supporting
means is arranged to support two roughing tools side-by-side
for operating along opposite marginal portions of the shoe
bottom, the arrangement being such that each tool is caused to
effect an in-wiping action on the marginal portion on which it
is caused to operate, and further wherein, in a cycle of opera-
tion of the machine, a left-hand one of said tools is caused to
operate along the marginal portion of the shoe bottom at the
right-hand side thereof during relative lengthwise movement
as aforesaid in said one direction, and the right-hand one of said
tools is caused to operate along the marginal portion of such
shoe bottom at the left-hand side thereof during said relative
lengthwise movement in said opposite direction.
tween a lower position and an upper position; a plurality of
pincers extending about the insole rest, each pincers having a
pair of jaws movable between open and closed positions; wip-
ing means, mounted for forward and inward movement, ex-
tending outwardly about the insole rest; means for initially
maintaining the insole rest in its lower position wherein the top
of the insole rest is below the top of the wiping means with the
shoe assembly so supported on the insole rest that the toe end
of the shoe assembly faces rearwardly; means for initially
maintaining all of the pincers jaws in their open positions;
means for thereafter causing all of the pincers jaws to move to
their closed positions to thereby grip the vamp of the upper
margin; means for thereafter effecting rising movement to the
insole rest to its upper position wherein the top of the insole
rest is substantially at the level of the top of the wiping means
to thereby enable the vamp of the upper to be stretched about
the vamp of the last; means for thereafter imparting forward
and inward movement, in a wiping stroke, to the wiping means
to cause the wiping means to wipe the vamp of the upper
margin against the insole; and means for causing all of the
pincers jaws to move to their open positions and release the
gripped vamp of the upper margin prior to the completion of
the wiping stroke; characterized in that the machine comprises:
means mounting the insole rest for heightwise swinging move-
ment, about a prone axis that is located rearwardly of the insole
rest, between an inclined position wherein the insole rest top is
inclined rearwardly and upwardly and a prone position
wherein the insole rest top is substantially parallel to the top of
the wiping means; means for initially maintaining the insole
rest in its inclined position when the insole rest is in its lower
position; and means to effect such swinging movement to the
insole rest about said axis that the insole rest is in its prone
position when the insole rest is in its upper position.
4,391,012 ,
SWINGABLE INSOLE REST '
Michael M. Becka, Nashua, N.H., assignor to International
Shoe Machine Corporation, Nashua, N.H.
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,447
Int. a.3 A43D 21/00. 3/00
U.S. a. il—W.S 4 Qaims
! 4,391,013
FINISHING TOOL FOR SMOOTHING WALLBOARD
TAPE JOINTS
Craig R. Janssen, Arden Hills, Minn., assignor to Padco, Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,708
Int. a.5 A46B 3/02. 11/00
U.S. a. 15—210 R 14 aaims
h— /rf
1. A machine, operable on a shoe assembly formed of a last
having an upper draped thereon and an insole located on its
bottom, for stretching the vamp of the upper about the last and
wiping the vamp of the upper margin against the insole com-
prising: an insole rest mounted for heightwise movement be-
1. A tool for smoothing joints between adjacent wallboards,
the joints having been prepared with a tape joint compound,
the tool comprising:
a fluid retaining resilient foam pad having first and second
major surfaces;
an adhesive layer bonded to and covering substantially all of
the first major surface;
a wettable abrasive surface formed by a plurality of coarse,
short, stiff synthetic polymer fibers oriented generally
perpendiculariy to the first major surface and bonded to
the first major surface by the adhesive layer at first ends
and having second free ends wherein the fibers are of a
thickness of about 100 Denier and a length of not more
than about 0.100 inch so that when the free ends are
placed in moving abrasive contact with the wetted Upe
16
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
joint compound, the wetted compound is smoothed flush the other of said pivot pins (6,5), characterized in that the two
with the adjacent wallboards as a resuh of moving abra- pivot pins (6) at the extremities of the first yoke (1) are formed
sive action of the free ends.
' 4,391,014
CLEANING WIPER
James F. Pitzen, Maplewood, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 311,055
Int. aj A47L 13/46. 13/256
U.S. CI. 15—231 8 Claims
L
U 46 ,10
from a tongue (14) cut in the web (4) of said yoke (1) and rolled
to form a tubular pivot.
1. A cleaning wiper adapted to hold a roll of cleaning web,
comprising:
a body having a slot along one side thereof;
a support member movably mounted within said body, a
portion of which is accessible through said slot;
a supply holder mounted in said body adapted to hold said
roll of said cleaning web;
a take-up holder mounted in said body adapted to hold a
take-up roll for said cleaning web;
said cleaning web when intermediate said supply roll and
said take-up roll passing over said portion of said support
member forming a cleaning surface;
said support member being resiliently biased within said slot;
and
an advance linkage activated by movement of said support
member within said slot and coupled to said take-up
holder for advancing the rotation of said take-up holder a
predetermined am.ount;
whereby said cleaning surface maintains a fresh portion of
said cleaning web by automatically advancing said clean-
ing web as said cleaning wiper is utilized.
4,391,015
PIVOT CONNECnON FOR WIPER BLADES
Johan H. van den Berg, Hasselt, Belgium, assignor to Champion
Spark Plug Europe S.A., Binche, Belgium
Filed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,639
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 27, 1980, 80 22923
Int. aj B60S 1/38
U.S. a. 15—250.42 9 Qaims
1. A pivot connection for two yokes (1,2,10) of a wiper blade
wherein the cross-section of a first metallic yoke (1) has sub-
stantially the form of an inverted U comprising a web and two
flanges and further comprising at its two extremities, as well as
in its central portion, a transverse pivot pin extending between
said fianges (6,5) and wherein a second yoke (2,10) comprises
attaching means (11,15,16) capable of cooperating with one or
4,391,016
DECREASING APPARATUS FOR ELONGATED
MATERIALS
Teruaki Kawamura; Nobuhiko Harada; Yukihiko Komatsu, and
Masarii Sakai, all of Shimonoseki, Japan, assignors to Kabu-
shiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho, Kobe, Japan
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,135
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 14, 1980, 55-
146429[U]
Int. Q.3 B21B 45/02
U.S. Q. 15—302 11 Claims
1. A degreasing apparatus for degreasing an elongated mem-
ber comprising:
a treatment room having a plurality of chambers sequentially
divided in an isolated fashion along a feeding direction of
the elongated member wherein said plurality of chambers
comprise a degreasing chamber, a predrying chamber and
a finish drying chamber;
at least one pair of rotary brushes provided in the degreasing
chamber such that said brushes are maintained in contact
with an outer surface portion of the elongated member;
means disposed in the degreasing chamber for jetting out a
degreasing liquid in a direction toward the inlet side of a
contact area between said brushes and said elongated
member;
a plurality of degreasing members provided, respectively, at
the inlet and outlet sides of the degreasing chamber along
an axis on which the elongated material is fed, wherein
each of said degreasing members comprises an elastic
material and defines an opening for permitting said elon-
gated member to forceably pass therethrough;
means disposed in said predrying chamber for jetting out
water or steam against the elongated material; and
means mounted in said finish drying chamber for jetting out
a drying medium of hot air against the elongated member.
July 5^
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
17
4,391,017
DEVICE FOR REMOVING INCENDIARY MATTER
FROM THE INTERIOR OF AN AIRCRAFT
Wilhelm A. Bruensicke, Santa Monica, Calif., assignor to Lock-
heed Corporation, Burbank, Calif.
1 1 Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,178
' ' Int. Q.3 A47L 5/18. 5/38
U.S. Q. 15—313
9 Qaims
1. A device for disposing of flammable fluids and other
incendiary material from the pressurized interior of an aircraft
comprising:
an intake nozzle;
an intermediate wand portion having a longitudinal bore
extending therethrough, said bore being in fluid communi-
cation with said nozzle;
a flexible hose connected at the end of said intermediate
wand portion bore remote from said intake nozzle;
a quick connect fitting at the other end of said flexible hose
and in fluid communication therewith;
an outlet fitting adapted for forming a flow path for fluid
communication with said quick connect fitting, said outlet
fitting comprising
a plug which when removed results in said outlet fitting
being in fluid communication with the external air-
stream and
means for removing said plug by ejecting it into said
external airstream.
rotatably supporting said rear set of wheels, front axle means
including a central portion having a pintle shaft mounted
therewith and with the chassis for enabling rocking movement
of said front axle means relative said chassis, said front axle
means including an actuating portion extending rearwardly
from said pintle shaft and a pair of offset arms forwardly of and
formed on an opposite side of said pintle shaft extending later-
ally outwardly thereof for journalmg said front set of wheels,
said offset arms being longitudinally spaced from said rear axle
means, means for adjusting the position of said front wheels
relative said chassis, said adjusting means including an adjust-
ment lever journaled on said chassis adjacent said rear axle
with a journaled portion thereof substantially parallel thereto
and having one end angulated to engage said actuating portion
so that rocking movement of said adjustment lever rocks said
front axle means about said pintle shaft and thereby raises or
lowers said front set of wheels relative said chassis, an operator
engageable means for cooperating with a second end of said
adjustment lever and extending upwardly through said chassis
to a position accessible by an operator from an operating posi-
tion for said suction cleaner for engagement by the foot of said
operator to adjust nozzle height as said operator engageble
means is rocked in a front to back direction thereby.
4,391,019
CORNER CONNECTOR FOR SLIDING DOORS
Peter B. Downes, Oakville, Canada, assignor to DSH, Concord,
Canada
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,147
Int. Q.' A47H 75/00.- E05D 13/02
U.S. Q. 16—105 7 Qaims
4,391,018
VACUUM CLEANER WITH WHEEL AND NOZZLE
HEIGHT ADJUSTING MECHANISM
Don W. Vermillion; Francis S. Gromek, both of Anderson, S.C,
and Scott S. Bair, III, Atlanta, Ga., assignors to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,413
Int. Q.^ A47L 5/34
U.S. Q. 15—339 5 Claims
1. In a suction cleaner having a chassis including a front
suction nozzle inlet at the bottom thereof and rear and front
sets of wheels supporting such chassis for movement on a floor
surface, a nozzle height adjusting mechanism comprising rear
axle means including a rear axle carried by said chassis for
1. In a comer connector for a sliding door slidable along top
and bottom tracks, said connector comprising a rigid connec-
tor member for locking engagement with a vertical stile and a
horizontal rail of such a door whereby to hold them together,
and an elongated arm movable vertically within said connector
member whereby to control the extension of the distal end of
said arm beyond the connector member, said distal end having
a track engaging guide member, the connector member being
a one-piece stamping formed from metal sheet, the general
plane of which is located when in use in a vertical plane behind
and parallel to a panel of the door, said connector member
including a portion at one vertical margin bent rearwardly out
of the general plane of the sheet and configured for locking
engagement with the stile and a portion at an opposite vertical
margin configured for engagement with a slot in the rail, the
arm being supported for vertical sliding movement in contact
with the rear surface of the sheet, the improvement wherein
the arm is separable from the connector member, and is nor-
mally guided longitudinally and retained in contact with the
rear surface of the sheet solely by a plurality of portions of the
sheet struck rearwardly out of the plane of the sheet and pres-
enting guiding and retaining surfaces to the arm which restrict
it to vertical sliding movement in contact with the rear surface
of the connector throughout its normal range of movement,
the rearwardly struck portions being so located and configured
relative to the location and configuration of the arm that the
latter can be disengaged therefrom but only when moved
18
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
vertically to a position beyond one end of its normal range of whereby said top and bottom aprons extend in confronting
movement. ^ relationship from said back apron pins through the nip between
4^91,020
GRAVITY RETURN HINGE HAVING AN AXLE ROD IN
AN AXLE SLEEVE
Yun-Tung Hsu, Taipei, Taiwan, assignor to Pei-Liang Chiu,
Taipei, Taiwan
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,213
Int. aj E05F 1/04
U.S. a. 16—314 5 Qaims
said middle rolls and to said front apron pins to control the
textile fibers in abutting contact in both the back and front
drafting zones.
1. An automatic return hinge comprising one primary hinge
and one secondary hinge, and said primary hinge including a
left side primary hinge piece to be attached to a suitable upper
portion of the jamb, and a right side primary hinge piece to be
attached to a suitable upper portion of the door, and a locating
piece of said right side primary hinge piece being furnished
with a sleeve in which an axle sleeve being fitted, and around
said axle sleeve, three locating balls being mounted at an equal
distance of 120° angle, and in said axle sleeve fitting an axle rod
with three slantingly upwards spiral grooves separated at an
equal distance of 120° angle so as to match said three locating
balls; and at one side of a locating piece of the left side primary
hinge piece, having two axle seats with locating grooves in
corresponding position; and when the sleeve of said right side
primary hinge piece being placed in between the two axle seats
of the left side primary hinge piece, the flat ends of the axle rod
then being inserted into said locating grooves, and being fixed
with screws; and when opening the door moving upwards
slightly as a result of the matching function of said spiral
grooves and said locating balls, and upon the door opening
being over, the door automatically returning to shutting posi-
tion as a result of door gravity effect.
4,391,022
AUTOMATIC LOCK SLIDER FOR SLIDE FASTENERS
Kiyoshi Oda, Namerikawa, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K.
K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,573
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1980, 55-
28108[U]; Mar. 4, 1980, 55-28 I09[U]
Int. a J A44B 79/00
U.S. a. 24—205.14 R 8 Claims
10
4,391,021
APRON DRAFTING SYSTEM
Fouad A. Kamel, Pineville, N.C., assignor to Whitin Roberts
Company, Charlotte, N.C.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,318
Int. q,3 DOIH 5/86
U.S. a. 19—253 23 Qaims
1. A drafting apparatus for textile fibers comprising a pair of
back rolls, a pair of middle rolls, and a pair of front rolls, each
of said pairs of rolls including a top roll and a bottom roll, a
cradle supported on said middle rolls and including a pair of
side plates, a top apron extending around said top middle roll
between said side plates, a bottom apron extending around said
bottom middle roll between said side plates, said cradle includ-
ing a pair of front apron pins in the front drafting zone between
said front and middle rolls, said cradle including a pair of back
apron pins in the back drafting zone between said back and
middle rolls, said top apron extending around the top ones of
said front and back apron pins, said bottom apron extending
around the bottom ones of said front and back apron pins.
1. An automatically locking slider for a slide fastener having
a pair of coupling element rows, said slider comprising:
(a) a slider body including a pair of first and second wings
joined at one end by a neck, there being defined a Y-
shaped guide channel between said wings for the passage
of the pair of coupling element rows of the slider fastener,
said first wing having an aperture communicating with
said guide channel, said neck having a projecting locking-
member retaining nose adjacent to said second wing;
' (b) a pair of laterally spaced lugs on said first wing, one on
each side of said aperture;
(c) a pull tab pivotably connected to said lugs and having a
transverse spindle journalled thereby in a fixed axis; and
(d) a locking member pivotably supported on said slider
body and including a resilient strip having
(1) a U-shaped base extending around said transverse
spindle and normally urged thereagainst by the resil-
ience of said strip, said base being angularly movable
away from said first wing in response to the pivotal
movement of said pull tab against the bias of said strip,
(2) an anchor extending from one end of said base and
terminating in a hook-shaped end hooked with said
retaining nose, said hook-shaped end being urged
against said nose by the resilience of said strip and
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
19
\
thereby prevented from being unhooked from said nose,
and
(3) a locking prong extending from the other end of said
base for normally projecting into said guide channel
through said aperture to lockingly engage with the pair
of coupling element rows, said locking prong being
retractable, from said guide channel into said aperture,
in response to the angular movement of said base away
from said first wing.
3as<l
ally supported on said bas^ and having a first portion adapted
to be engaged by said push button member when the push
button member is manually operated, a second portion adapted
to engage said latch member so as to bring said latch member
into said engaged position and to hold said latch member in
such position, a third portion adapted to engage said latch
member when said push button member is manually operated
to bring said latch member from said engaged position into said
non-engaged position, the latch member being held loosely
4,391,023
BUCKLE ARRANGEMENT FOR SEAT BELTS
Kobun Tanaka, Nagoya, and Takashi Kawaharazaki, Toyoake,
both of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika
Denki Seisakusho, Aichi, Japan
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,474
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1980, 55-6788[U]
Int. a.5 A44B 11/26
U.S. a. 24—230 AL 4 Oaims
4 10 17 21 24fl 24
11 I 210 2b
1. A buckle arrangement for a seat belt comprising:
a frame member;
a tongue portion having an inserting end, insertable into said
frame member in an insertion direction and withdrawable
from said frame member in a withdrawal direction;
a locking member having contact portions, movably dis-
posed on said frame member for movement into a locking
position in which said tongue portion is locked in said
frame member upon insertion of said tongue portion into
said frame member, and for movement from said locking
position in a direction of unlocking to unlock said tongue
portion from said frame member; said tongue portion
having engaging means, formed at said inserting end, for
selective engagement of said tongue portion with and
disengagement of said tongue portion form said locking
member;
means for moving said locking member form said locking
position in said direction oi unlocking; and
a retaining plate having a plate-like surface, provided on said
frame member for retaining said locking member in said
locking position, said retaining plate having portions in-
clined to said plate-like surface for contact with said
contact portions of said locking member, such that said
retaining plate exerts a component force in said with-
drawal direction on said tongue portion.
between said second and third portions, and a spring portion
for imparting a biasing force to the lever member in a direction
in which said second portion is engaged with said latch mem-
ber, said lever member being adapted, when said push button
member is operated with said tongue and said latch member
being engaged with each other, to receive a rotational force
applied to said first portion and to transmit said rotational force
to said latch member through said third portion to thereby
bring said latch member from said engaged position into said
non-engaged position.
4,391,025
PROCESS FOR LAYING DOWN CONTINUOUS
MATERIAL
Frank R. Mehdorn, Steppach, and Johann Seelig, Schwabmiinc-
hen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst
Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug, 18, 1980. Ser. No. 178,740
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 22,
1979, 2933963
Int. Cl.^ B65H 54/80
U.S. CI. 28—289 1 Qaim
4,391,024
BUCKLE DEVICE
Masaru Morinaga, Yamato, Japan, assignor to NSK-Warner
K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,148
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 10, 1980, 55-
47613[U]
Int. CI.3 A44B 11/25
U.S. a. 24—230 A 8 Qaims
1. A buckle device for latching to a tongue, comprising a
base, a latch member supported on said base so as to be mov-
able between an engaged position with said tongue and a non-
engaged position with said tongue, a push button member for
releasing the engagement between said tongue and said latch
member when manually operated, and a lever member pivot-
1. An apparatus for forming meanders in a continuous spin-
ning tow running in a plane comprising a single rotating wheel
and meander-forming and -releasing means comprising:
reversing elements (2) arranged generally in a circle on the
surface and around the periphery of the wheel (1) and,
between each pair of reversing elements (2), a guide
groove (3) in wheeel (1) for guiding a catching device (5);
movable catching devices (5), each catching device (5)
arranged on a fork (4) sliding in a guide groove (3), and
mechanical actuating means for the catching devices (5),
each catching device (5) having an initial position, outside
of the plane in which the continuous spinning tow is
running and in closely spaced relation to the periphery of
20
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
the wheel, and being movable from this initial position
radially inwardly toward the axis of the wheel and into
said plane; each fork (4) being fastened to the wheel (1) via
a first joint (6), a connecting rod (7), and a pillow block
(8);
said mechanical actuating means including means for:
sequentially moving the catching devices (5) to a rela-
tively radially inward position from their initial position
while also moving the catching devices into the plane in
which the spinning tow is running thereby catching the
spinning tow and forming a first meander of a sequential
series of meanders in said spinning tow, each meander
extending from a reversing element (2) to a catching
device (5) which is in the relatively radially inward
position, and
moving each catching device (5) back toward its initial
position after the catching device has rotated more than
60° of the circumference of the wheel (1), thereby re-
leasing the meander;
the actuating means for each catching device (5) including a
slide rod (10) for driving each fork (4) via a second joint
(11); the slide rod (10) sliding in a corresponding track
(14), and the motion cycle of the slide rod (10) being
determined by a cam disk (13) via a cam roller (12).
4,391,026
MILL ROLL
John A. Casey, San Francisco, and Joseph C. V. Ducasse, Marti-
nez, both of Calif., assignors to Fabcon Incorporated, San
Francisco, Calif.
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,689
Int. CV B21B 27/02
U.S. a. 29—121.6 6 Claims
— ^
'^'^,'^1^•^.■^.•^."^'
iy^pppi^iM^<
'K'KIKV
^^^^^il^^l^^jl^^j^^
1. A mill roll for use in grinding rnaterial such as sugar cane
and for extracting juice therefrom, said mill roll comprising:
a roll body;
a plurality of circumferentially extending grooves formed in
the periphery of said roll body, each said circumferen-
tially extending groove comprising a substantially V-
shaped groove defined by a pair of facing flank surfaces
which converge radially of said roll body;
a plurality of channels extending axially through said roll
body at positions inwardly of said grooves;
a plurality of radially extending recesses formed at locations
spaced circumferentially around each said groove, each
said recess being formed in at least portions of said facing
fiank surfaces of the respective said groove, and each said
recess extending inwardly of the bottom of said respective
groove;
a plurality of inserts, each said insert being fitted within a
respective said recess, and each said insert being secured
in the respective said recess by welds filling-in portions of
said recess in said facing fiank surfaces and reforming said
flank surfaces;
each said insert having extending substantially radially
therethrough an opening connecting the respective said
groove with a respective said channel, each said opening
having an elongated, substantially rectangular circumfer-
ential cross-section with a longer dimension extending
substantially circumferentially of said roll body and a
narrower dimension extending axially of said roll body;
and
said welds covering substantially the entire radial outer
surface of the respective said insert, except for said open-
ing therethrough, such that said welds protect the radially
outer edges of said opening.
4,391,027
METHOD OF MAKING A HEAT EXCHANGER
ASSEMBLY
James C. Fleury, Ora, Ind., assignor to Ex-Cell-O Corporation,
Troy, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 104,588, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No. 4,296,805.
This application Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,602
Int. CV B23F 15/26
U.S. a. 29—157.3 B 10 Qaims
1. A method of making a heat exchanger assembly of the
type having a core with front and rear faces with a plurality of
tubes parallel to the faces and a plurality of fins extending
transversely to the faces and tubes respectively and intercon-
necting the tubes, comprising the steps of; assembling the fins
and tubes together and with a peripheral wall extending be-
tween the front and rear faces to define oppositely facing
openings adjacent the faces and including perforated top and
bottom walls interconnected by side walls inserting a first
group of tubes through the perforations in the top and bottom
walls so as to extend between the top and bottom walls, remov-
ing the lengths of the first group of tubes extending between
the top and bottom walls, and closing the oppositely facing
openings of the peripheral wall with closure members.
9. A method of making a heat exchanger assembly of the
type having a core with front and rear faces with a plurality of
fins extending transversely to the faces and tubes respectively
and interconnecting the tubes comprising the steps of; provid-
ing tube nesting members each having a notch extending along
the longitudinal axis of said tube nesting member, arranging
said tube nesting members so that said notches are oriented
vertically and disposing said tube nesting members a horizontal
distance apart approximately the distance between the top and
bottom of the core, disposing a first group of vertically spaced
horizontal tubes between the tube nesting members and within
the notches, disposing horizontal lengths of serpentine fin
extending between the tube nesting members and engaging
adjacently spaced rows of tubes, disposing a peripheral wall
extending between the front and rear faces of the core to define
Julys, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
21
oppositely facing openings adjacent the faces and including
perforated top and bottom walls interconnected by side walls
between the tube nesting members, disposing a second group
of tubes to extend between and within each nesting member
and the perforations in one of the top and bottom walls, closing
the oppositely facing openings of the peripheral wall with
closure members, removing the tube nesting members, and
securing the tubes, fins and peripheral wall together to form
the heat exchanger. i
while not exposing the remainder of said catheter to heat, and
thereafter pressing the end of said catheter at at least its soften-
4,391,028
SOLVENTLESS ASSEMBLY OF FLEXIBLE TUBING TO
A COMPONENT
Hrishikesh Choudhury, Gurnee, III., and Juergen H. Zaha,
Moore, S.C., assignors to Abbott Laboratories, North Chi-
cago, IIL
I Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,076
Int. a.3 B23P 19/00: B29C 17/00. 25/00
U.S. a. 29—235
10 Qaims
1. An assembly apparatus for securing a length of flexible
tubing having a predetermined internal diameter to a tubular
portion having an external diameter larger than said predeter-
mined internal diameter comprising:
a multiplicity of jaw members each having a longitudinal
port^'kn dimensioned to fit within said length of flexible
tubing;
means to radially guide said jaw members from a closed
position to a position spaced therefrom while maintaining
a parallel relationship with respect to the jaw members;
means operatively associated with said jaw members to
move said jaw members from said closed position to said
spaced apart position; and
means positioned adjacent said jaw members to introduce a
cooling media having a temperature to temporarily freeze
said length of tubing in an expanded state when contacted
with said jaws in said spaced apart position.
ing temperature against a flat surface to form a thickened
annular lip about the catheter end. .
4,391J)30
METHOD OF PRODUCING A LOOPED STRAND t
LACING MEMBER FOR USE IN TRANSPLANTING /
TREES ^^^ I
Barry Weidner, 153 E. Marion St., DoylestowiiiWaynr County,
Ohio 44230
Division of Ser. No. 131,208, Mar. 17, 1980, Pat. No. 4,287,840.
This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,041
Int. a.' B21D 39/00: B23P 11/02
U.S. a. 29—509 4 Claims
4,391,029
CATHETER HUB ASSEMBLY
Leonard F. Czuba, Lombard, and Dean G. Laurin, Lake Zurich,
both of III., assignors to Baxter Travenol Laboratories Inc.,
Deerfield, III.
Division of Ser. No. 970,609, Dec. 18, 1978, abandoned. This
application Apr. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 143,072
Int. a? B23P 11/02: B29C 13/00
U.S. a. 29— 450 ^ 3 Qaims
1. The method of forming an end having a plurality of areas
of increasing wall thickness on a heat recoverable stressed
thermoplastic tubular catheter, which comprises: heating the
end of the tubular catheter to cause it to spontaneously reduce
its length and increase its wall thickness and inner diameter as
stresses are relieved in the heated portion of said catheter,
1032 QC— 2
1. A method of forming a looped-strand drum lacing mem-
ber for use in transplanting trees, including the steps of:
(a) providing a wheel-like member having a central hub with
a plurality of posts arranged in a circular manner on the
hub, and having a plurality of outwardly radially extend-
ing legs with a peg mounted on each of the legs at a
predetermined radial distance from the central hub posts;
(b) looping a first piece of flexible strand material in a repeat-
ing manner about one of the central hub posts and then
outwardly along one ofthe legs and about the peg of said
one leg and then inwardly and around a next post adjacent
to said one post to form a closed end loop, and continuing
said loop-forming procedure until a loop is formed along
each of the legs;
(c) securing the first piece of strand material after complet-
ing the formation of the loops;
(d) weaving a second piece flexible strand material into a
circular arrangement about the central hub posts; and
(e) securing together certain areas of the first and second
pieces of stand material adjacent the central hub posts.
22
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,031
METHOD OF ASSEMBLING TWO SHAPED SECTIONS
WITH A COTTER
Yves D. Laugier, Toulouse, France, assignor to Technal Interna-
tional S.A., Toulouse, France
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,344
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 21, 1980, 80 16083
Int. a.3 B23P 79/00
U.S. a. 29—526 R 9 Qaims
1. A method for assembling first and second shaped sections
at substantially perpendicular directions comprising:
providing a first shaped section having a wall (la), two
flanges {lb, Ic), two bends (Id, le) and a slot formed in
said wall, said slot having a configuration such as to re-
ceive said second shaped section therein,
providing at least one cotter (3) comprising a rod (3a) having
a thinned segment formed on a portion of its periphery,
providing a second shaped section having a cross-sectional
configuration complementary to said slot and at least one
circular aperture for receiving a cotter, said aperture
being positioned in said second shaped section such that
when said second shaped section is inserted in said slot and
abutted against said bends, said aperture extends beyond
said first section a distance at least as great as the thickness
of said cotter at said thinned segment and less than the
thickness of said cotter at its unthinned segment,
inserting said second shaped section (2) into said slot (4) until
its end (2a) abuts the bends (Id, le) of said first shaped
section,
inserting said at least one cotter into said at least one aper-
ture with said thinned segment against the wall of said first
shaped section, and
rotating said at least one cotter about the longitudinal axis
thereof for urging the unthinned portion thereof in com-
pression against said wall.
ing of one field-effect transistor and one storage capacitor,
which comprises
(a) insulating areas of the semiconductor substrate for the
one-transistor cells by thick oxide structures to insulate
the cells from each other and covering the areas for the
cells between the thick oxide structures with first thin
oxide layers,
(b) forming an electrode for the storage capacitors by apply-
ing a first polycrystalline semiconductor layer over the
entire surface of the thick oxide structures and the first
thin oxide layers, and structuring by etching in the areas of
the semiconductor substrate together with the first thin
oxide layers, to leave remaining on the storage capacitor
parts of the one-transistor cell areas of the semiconductor
substrate a layer sequence of thin oxide as a capacitor
dielectric and the polycrystalline layer as the capacitor
electrode,
(c) applying a second thin oxide layer over the entire surface
to form a gate oxide for the transistors,
(d) doping the transistor parts of the one-transistor cell areas
of the semiconductor substrate by another ion implanta-
tion to adjust the cut-ofT voltage of the transistors,
(e) forming the gate electrodes of the transistors, by applying
a second polycrystalline semiconductor layer over the
entire surface and structuring by etching to leave parts of
the second polycrystalline semiconductor on the transis-
tor parts of the one-transistor cell areas, the combination
therewith of
(0 adjusting the storage capacitors to a predetermined stor-
age capacity after the thick oxide structures and the first
thin oxide layers are formed, and using the thick oxide
structures as a mask, subjecting the cell areas to an ion
implantation for preparing a doped layer which with the
semiconductor substrate forms a pn-junction in the stor-
age capacitor parts in the semiconductor substrate, and
(g) performing said another ion implantation for adjusting
the cut-off voltage of the transfer transistors utilizing as a
mask the parts of the first polycrystalline semiconductor
layer which form the electrode of the storage capacitors.
4,391,032
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING INTEGRATED
DYNAMIC RAM ONE-TRANSISTOR STORAGE CELLS
Heinz Schulte, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,706
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 29,
1980, 3032632
Int. aj HOIL 21/20; BOIJ 77/00,- HOIL 27/04
U.S. a. 29—571 3 Qaims
1. Method for manufacturing dynamic RAM one-transistor
cells integrated in a semiconductor substrate, each cell consist-
4,391,033
METHOD OF MAKING V-ISOLATION GROOVES BY
OVER-FILLING WITH POLYCRYSTALLINE SILICON
OF GRADED CONDUCTIVITY AND ETCHING
Satoshi Shinozaki, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,507
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1980, 55-103341;
Dec. 12, 1980, 55-175292; Dec. 12, 1980, 55-175293; Mar. 5,
1981, 56-31602
Int. Q.^ HOIL 21/20, 21/306
U.S. Q. 29—576 W 20 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing a semiconductor circuit,
comprising the steps of:
(a) forming a groove on one main surface of a semiconductor
substrate such that an island region is defined by said
groove;
(b) oxidizing said main surface of the substrate including at
least the surface of the groove;
(c) depositing a semiconductor layer in said groove and on
the substrate surface adjacent said groove, said semicon-
ductor layer being deposited to a depth greater than the
depth of said groove so that at the location of said groove
said semiconductor layer fills said groove and extends
above the main surface of said substrate;
(d) introducing an impurity into said semiconductor layer
whereby the impurity concentration of the semiconductor
layer within the groove is substantially different than the
impurity concentration of the semiconductor layer above
and adjacent the groove; and
(e) selectively removing the semiconductor layer above and
July 5, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
23
adjaceht the groove by utilizing the difference in impurity
concentration so as to follow the semiconductor layer to
J
,s.
zr 23 zr zr -
2^]
» 36 36 37 »
iX 340 3* yKSi2B
j
1 ^ 1
)
r 22
remain only within the groove and, thus, to provide a
region for separating two adjacent island regions.
1 1 4,391,034
THERMALLY COMPENSATED SHADOW MASK
Kenneth P. Stuby, Catlett, Va., assignor to IBM Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,910
Int. Q.3 HOIL 5/00, 7/10 7/54
tJ.S. Q. 29—579 3 Qaims
3. A method for making an improved high temperature
shadow mask assembly for a large diameter silicon wafer,
comprising the steps of:
forming a planar plate having a pattern of apertures misreg-
istered at room temperature but registered at high temper-
ature during a deposition process, each of those respective
distances from the centroid of said plate at room tempera-
ture is misregistered with respect to the corresponding
desired distance from the centroid of said wafer of a corre-
sponding shadow image on the silicon wafer at room
temperature, by approximately the product of the differ-
ence between said high temperature and said room tem-
perature times said desired distance times the difference
between the thermal coefficient of expansion of the plate
material and the thermal coefficient of expansion of the
silicon wafer;
clamping said plate and said wafer with their said centroids
mutually coincident, in a fixture which does not maintain
their said centroids mutually coincident at said high tem-
perature;
raising the temperature of said plate and silicon wafer to said
high temperature for processing;
whereby the differential expansion of the plate material will
bring the apertures therein into a minimum total misalign-
ment with the intended deposition locations on the silicon
wafer.
431,035
METHOD OF MOUNTING A MAGNETIC HEAD UNIT
ON A MOVABLE CARRIER
Oeike Van de Bult, The Hague, Netherlands, assignor to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,313
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 14, 1981,
8101824
Int. Q.^ GllB 5/42
U.S. Q. 29—603 4 Qaims
i3 S8
1. A method of mounting a magnetic head unit (6) on a
carrying arm (3) of a movable carrier (2) of a magnetic disk
storage device for digital data, which device comprises at least
one rotating rigid magnetic disk (1) having a surface over
which the magnetic head unit is moved for the storage and/or
reproduction of the data in closely spaced tracks, and a bearing
arrangement (29) which comprises bearing parts (31a, b; 32a, b)
respectively connected to the movable carrier (2) and to a
stationary frame (30) of the magnetic disk storage device, for
accurately guiding the movements of the carrier (2) relative to
the frame (30) and thereby guiding the movements of the
magnetic head unit (6) over said surface of said magnetic disk
(1) in an accurately defined plane, characterized in that the
method comprises the following steps in the specified order:
a. manufacturing a fixing part (9) for the magnetic head unit
(6), the part being provided with locating faces, recesses,
projections and openings for subsequent positioning and
fixing of the magnetic head unit;
b. arranging said carrying arm (3) and the fixing part (9) on
a mounting aid (53) provided with first means (45) for
positioning the carrying arm (3) relative to the mounting
aid and second means (46, 47) for positioning the fixing
part (9) relative to the mounting aid, the carrying arm 3
and the fixing part (9) assuming a relative position on the
mounting aid (53) which is within the required positional
tolerances of the finished product, but leaving a certain
space between the fixing part (9) and the carrying arm (3);
c. filling said space, at least partly, with a bonding agent in
liquid form, such as an adhesive or solder;
d. allowing the bonding agent to cure; thereby securing said
fixing part and said carrying arm in said relative position
determined in step b, and
e. securing the magnetic head unit to the fixing part.
4,391,036
PROCESS FOR PRODUQNG SEALED LEAD-AQD
BATTERY
Kenjiro Kishimoto; Hideaki Igarashi, and Migaki Kono, all of
Osaka, Japan, assignors to Yuasa Battery Company Limited,
Takatsuki, Japan
FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,791
Int. Q.^ HOIM 10/04
U.S. Q. 29—623.2 8 Qaims
1. A process for producing a sealed lead-acid battery com-
prising the steps of
positioning a plate group in a container, the plate group
being formed of positive and negative plates with separa-
,Li
24
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
tors therebetween, the separators being formed mostly of
glass fibers having diameters of not more than 1.0 micron,
arranging a viscosity-increasing agent in the peripheral part
of the plate group,
pouring a first sulfuric acid electrolyte into the container in
an amount which is less than the total pore volume of the
plate group,
8 n 7
431,038
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR PREPARING THE
TERMINATED END OF FLAT CABLE FOR
CONNECrORIZATION
Richard A. Greene, Pickerington, and Robert P. Kennedy, Co-
lumbus, both of Ohio, assignors to Western Electric Company,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,981
Int. a.3 H05K 3/00; B23P 23/00
U.S. a. 29— 829 26Qaims
pouring a second sulfuric acid electrolyte into the container
in an amount such that thfe total amoi^nt of poured electro-
lyte is at least equal to the total p<M^ volume of the plate
group, and
sealing the container to form the sealed lead-acid battery.
4,391,037
APPARATUS FOR JOINING THIN METAL STRIPS
END-TO-END
Giovanni Giasini, Via Vespucci 24, Grassobbio, Bergamo, Italy
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,079
Qaims priority, application Italy, Nov. 16, 1979, 27349 A/79
Int. C\? B23P 21/00; B23Q 15/00
U.S. CI. 29—716 8 Qaims
1. An apparatus for joining thin metal strips end-to-end,
comprising:
clamping means for relatively immobilizing two metal strips
with extremities thereof overlapping but accessible from
opposite sides;
a plurality of four-sided-cross-section piercing tools on the
side of one of said strips operable to form as many
throughgoing perforations with two pairs of parallel sides
in said overlapping extremities, with punched-out metal
from both strips extending through each perforation to
form a double burr projecting through the other strip,
each of said tools having a tip substantially in the form of
a four-sided pyramid with outlines conforming to said
perforations adapted to split said double burr into four
separate double tabs of substantially triangular shape;
a support having a plurality of openings aligned with said
piercing tools; and
a plurality of pushers on the side of said other strip disposed
opposite said tools and operable to spread said double tabs
and flatten same against the perforated extremity of said
other strip.
1. A method of forming the terminated end of a flat cable of
indefinite length with fold-back portions so as to facilitate the
subsequent connectorization thereof, wherein the cable is of
the type having two overlying/underlying arrays of laterally
disposed conductors separated by a resilient insulative center
film, with each array being secured directly to only the respec-
tively adjacent one of two mutually disposed outer insulative
films, and wherein the cable, as fabricated, further includes an
aligned pair of insulative isolating members respectively posi-
tioned on opposite sides of, and extending transversely across,
the center film at each predetermined terminated end of the
cable, said isolating members being of a material that will not
adhere to the associated array of conductors and outer film,
said method including the steps of:
confining at least an end region of the fiat cable such that
only an end portion thereof of predetermined length is
exposed;
applying a first force against the major surface of one outer
film end section, in a first direction, to effect a sharp,
retainable bend, at a predetermined angle, in both the
other outer film end section, and the coextensive array of
conductor end portions secured thereto;
releasing the first force from the one outer film end section
so as to allow the center film end portion and the opposite
side isolating members positioned thereon, to snap back to
at least approximately their original positions as a result of
the selective inherent resiliency thereof, thereby, also
forcing the one outer film end section, and the coextensive
array of conductor end portions secured thereto, back to
at least approximately their original positions;
applying a second force against the major surface of the then
one exposed isolating member previously positioned adja-
cent the other then bent-out outer film end section, in a
second direction, to effect a sharp, retainable bond, at a
predetermined angle, in both the one outer film end sec-
tion, and the array of conductor end portions secured
thereto;
releasing the second force from the one exposed isolating
member so as to allow the center film end portion and the
one and other side isolating members positioned thereon,
to snap back to at least approximately their original posi-
tions as a result of the selective inherent resiliency thereof,
and
applying a force against each of said bent-out outer film end
sections, on the conductor-secured side thereof, and in a
direction to effect the sharp fold-back thereof against the
adjacent portion of the associated outer film that remains
a part of the fabricated cable and, thereby, position the
associated array of conductor end portions in the plane of
the cable to facilitate the subsequent connectorization
thereof.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
25
15. An apparatus for forming the terminated end of a flat
cable of indefinite length with fold-back portions so as to
facilitate the subsequent connectorization thereof, wherein the
cable is of the type having two overlying/underlying arrays of
laterally disposed conductors separated by a resilient insulative
center film, with each array being secured directly to only the
respectively adjacent one of two mutually disposed outer
insulative films, and wherein the cable, as fabricated, further
includes an aligned pair of resilient insulative isolating mem-
bers respectively positioned on opposite sides of, and extend-
ing transversely across, the center film at each predetermined
terminated end of the cable, said isolating members being of a
material that will not adhere to the associated array of conduc-
tors and outer film, said apparatus including:
positioning means including upper and lower channel-form-
ing means for confining and controllably transporting a
cable back and forth between first and second work sta-
tions, while an exposed end section of such a confined
cable, of predetermined length, extends beyond two later-
ally disposed face portions of said upper and lower chan-
nel-forming means at the upstream end thereof;
flare-out die means including a reciprocally driven die mem-
ber located at said second work station, said die member
having a laterally disposed cable end-receiving notch
formed therein and a specially contoured outer cable
wiping surface profile, said die member, in response to
being reciprocally displaced in a direction perpendicular
to the initial plane of an exposed end of a channel-confined
cable, while being brought into periodic wiping contact
therewith, cooperating with the forward face portions of
said upper and lower channel-forming means to sequen-
tially effect the bending of the two exposed end sections of
the outer films, together with the coextensive arrays of
conductor end portions respectively secured thereto, at
sharp predetermined angles, and in different directions,
relative to the initially coextensive center film end por-
tion, and associated isolating members, which are also
momentarily sequentially bent, in said different directions,
but each time allowed to snap back to at least their approx-
imate original positions, one time because of the presence
of said die member notch, and
reciprocally driven fold-back means located at said first
work station for sharply folding back each previously
outwardly bent outer film end section of a channel-con-
fined cable, together with the array of exposed conductor
end portions secured thereto, firmly against the adjacent
portion of the outer film still remaining as part of the
fabricated cable so as to facilitate the subsequent connec-
torization of the cable.
test energy with said retained conductive end portions of
said wire leads; and
;>=r
assembling leaf-like battery contacts on said support member
to be electrically joined with said wire lead conductive
end portions after said pretesting step.
4,391,040
HAIR CUTTING DEVICE
Yukio Kanazawa, No. 880 Sekishi-cho, Hamamastu-shi, Shizuo-
ka-ken, Japan
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,817
Int. a.3 B26B 19/20 19/44
U.S. a. 30—201 % 15 Qaims
4,391,039
ELECTRlt WIRE TERMINAL CONNECTING METHOD
Jonathan I. Kaplan, West Newton, Mass., assignor to Polaroid
Corporation, Cambridge, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 67,029, Aug. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,281,886.
This application Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 287,766
Int. a.3 HOIR 43/00
U.S. Q. 29—884 1 Qaim
1. The method of assembling a photographic camera having
an internal support member on which functioning electrical
components are mounted to provide a functioning module for
subsequent completion and assembly in an exterior housing,
said method comprising the steps of:
assembling wire leads on said module for connection of
components with a source of electrical energy;
fixing a conductive end portion of said wire leads to a non-
conductive bracket formation;
pretesting said module by connecting a source of electrical
1. A hair cutting device comprising a unit consisting of a
casing having an open end surface and an electrically operated
clipper having fixed cutting blade end surface arranged adja-
cent the open end surface of the casing when in a home posi-
tion so that both end surfaces may be in the same plane, guide
means supporting the clipper for guided controlled movement
in the casing, a first rotary drum mounted in the casing, a first
thread mounted on the first drum and having one end con-
nected to a connector fixable to a fixedly positioned external
object, power transmitting means connecting the rotary drum
with the clipper to operatively effect displacement of the
clipper from the home position relative to the casing in re-
sponse to rotation of the rotary drum so that rotation of the
rotary drum causes the relative position of the clipper with
respect to the casing to vary in response to the spacing of the
unit from the fixedly positioned external object, and resilient
means connecting the casing with the clipper for urging the
clipper toward said home position.
26
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,041
POWERED GROUND CARE IMPLEMENT
David E. Porter-Bennett, Willmar, Minn., assignor to The Toro
Company, Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,571
Int. aj AOID 50/00
U.S. a. 30—296 R 14 Qaims
'0 ?
/
1. A powered ground care implement, which comprises:
(a) active means for performing a grooming or working
action on the ground or ground growing vegetation;
(b) an elongated upwardly extending handle assembly hav-
ing a lower end on which the active means is carried, the
handle assembly being sufficiently long so that a standing
operator can hold the handle assembly while positioning
the active means closely adjacent to or in contact with the
ground;
(c) engine means for driving the active means, wherein the
engine means has a crankshaft configured to cause engine
vibration substantially more in a first direction than in
other directions; and
(d) means for mounting the engine means on the handle
assembly, wherein the mounting means includes means for
vibrationally isolating the engine means from the handle
assembly to help an operator hold the handle assembly
when the engine means is operating, wherein the mount-
ing means has means for damping out vibration primarily
in the first direction, and wherein the mounting means
comprises:
(i) a backing plate fixedly secured to the engine means;
(ii) an engine housing fixedly secured to the handle assem-
bly for receiving the backing plate;
(iii) flexible means for mounting the backing plate in the
engine housing so that vibration of the engine means is
not transmitted to the housing.
4,391,042
CUTTING APPARATUS FOR CUTTING A
NON-ORCULAR OPENING
Ned E. Sunderland, 209 Melbourne Way, Lexington, Ky. 40503
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,748
Int. a.3 B26B 27/00
U.S. a. 30—316 19 Qaims
39
38
10 ^
f \
,- 14
15-
9^t\
. ^
m
C
H-' 3«' -35
31 -
30 -
r '
1. A cutting apparatus for cutting a non-circular opening in
a face plate for a non-circular stoma in which the face plate has
an annular flange to support a bag of an ostomy appliance
including:
a body having a single recess in one surface thereof, said
recess having a single continuous peripheral wall;
a non-circular cutting element disposed within said recess
and extending a selected distance beyond said one surface
of said body;
said body having a circular periphery to center said body
relative to an annular flange of a face plate in which a
non-circular opening is to be cut by said non-circular
cutting element;
said recess in said body having a non-circular shape substan-
tially the same shape as said non-circular cutting element;
said non-circular cutting element having a selected non-cir-
cular shape in accordance with the shape of the non-circu-
lar stoma with which the face plate is to be used;
said non-circular cutting element having its outer surface
straight and its inner surface beveled at its outer end to
form the cutting surface of said non-circular cutting ele-
ment;
and retaining means to permanently retain said non-circular
cutting element in its desired position within said recess.
4,391,043
KNIFE WITH REMOVABLE BLADES
Howard Sizemore, 26384 Couzens Rd., Madison Heights, Mich.
48071, and Robert Bniner, 1730 Peavey Rd., Howell, Mich.
48843
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,589
Int. a.^ B26B 1/00
U.S. a. 30—330 9 Qaims
1. A knife comprising:
an elongated blade comprising a cutting end having a sharp-
ened edge extending along at least one side and a tang
formed with sides extending generally away from said
cutting end, and also having a recess extending into one
side thereof, said tang formed at the end thereof remote
from said blade cutting end with an angled surface;
said blade including a pair of inwardly and forwardly angled
shoulders on either side of said tang;
a handle including grip portions and a socket at a forward
end adapted to slidably receive said tang, said socket
including a fixed angled surface aligned with said tang and
adapted to mate with said tang angled surface upon full
insertion of said tang in said handle socket;
and also including a pair of angled shoulders on said forward
end of said handle adjacent said socket, and configured to
be brought into mating engagement with said angled
shoulders on said blade with said tang fully inserted in said
socket;
an elongated locking plate and a pivotal mount pivotally
mounting said locking plate to said handle at a point inter-
mediate the length of the locking plate to allow limited
pivoting motion between locking and releasing positions;
said locking plate including a forward locking end and a
rear-end, said locking end on a side adjacent to said
socket, and formed with a locking tab configured to be
moved downward into mating relationship with said re-
cess in said tang, with said tang fully inserted in said
socket;
spring bias means urging said locking plate to said locked
position;
r •
July 5, im
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
27
whereby said blade may be released by pivoting said locking
plate rear-end to release position against the resistance of
said spring bias means.
4,391,044
METROLOGY INSTRUMENT FOR MEASURING
VERTICAL PROnLES OF INTEGRATED ORCUITS AND
THE LIKE
William R. Wheeler, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Tencor Instru-
ments, Mountain View, Calif.
1 1 Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,986
1 1 Int. a.3 GOIB 7/28
U.S. a. 33—174 P 7 aaims
2. A tilt compensated stylus scanner comprising,
an elongated beam suspended in a frame, the beam support-
ing a housing movable along the beam,
a stylus mounted on a lower portion of said housing for
contact with a generally flat article to be scanned linearly
in the direction of said beam,
a transducer connected to said stylus for generating an elec-
trical signal representing a step height profile of said
generally flat article,
a bracket having spaced apart extensions with aligned pivots
defining an axis for tilt compensation of the beam to be
scanned relative to the article to be scanned, the tilt axis
being perpendicular to said elongated beam, said bracket
supported from a base at said pivots and having said frame
mounted thereto,
force means communicating with said bracket for compen-
sating undesired tilt of the beam, and
drive motor means for moving said movable housing on the
beam.
It
— 1_
/.? JO \ . I -M
'4
first member having a first substantially circular multi-lobed
cam-shaped surface formed with a first number of identical
angularly spaced outwardly projecting lobes, a second mem-
ber having a second substantially circular multi-lobed cam-
shaped surface formed with a second number of identical
angularly spaced inwardly projecting lobes having notches
therebetween, said first number being one less than said second
number and the size and shape of said first lobes being corre-
lated with the size and shape of said notches so that said first
lobes engage and interfit in said notches between said second
lobes, means for joining said first and second members together
so that contact can be produced between successive portions of
said cam-shaped surfaces, said first and second members being
movable relative to each other, the size of said surfaces with
respect to each other being such that when one of said lobes on
said first member is fully received or engaged in one notch
between two adjacent lobes on said second member there is a
slight clearance between the lobe on said first member located
substantially opposite said one lobe, said slight clearance being
less than the distance said first lobes project from said first
member and only sufficient to permit angular movement of
said opposite lobe relative to the nearest lobe on said second
member while said one lobe is fully received or engaged in said
one notch between said two adjacent lobes on said second
member, said first member having at least one shaped opening
therein, whereby a design can be formed on a surface by trac-
ing the opening shape in said first member with a writing
instrument by engaging the edge of said opening and moving
said instrument within said opening in one direction while
engaging said edge, said first member having indexed one part
of one revolution in an opposite direction with respect to said
second member each time that the opening in the first member
is traced.
4,391,046
SOLAR HEATED GRAIN DRYING SYSTEM
Roy Pietraschke, Rte. #1, Box 194, Cuba, Mo. 65453
Continuation of Ser. No. 40,942, May 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,228
Int. a.^ F26B 3/06. 3/28
U.S. a. 34—93 4 Qaims
4,391,045
DRAWING INSTRUMENT OR APPARATUS
Denys Fisher, Kirkconnel Lea, Glencaple, Dumfries DGl 4RG,
Scotland
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,506
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 18, 1980,
8009084; Sep. 19, 1980, 8029079
Int. a.3 B43L 11/00
U.S. a. 33—27 L 11 Oaims
1. A self-indexing design drawing apparatus comprising a
1. A method of utilizing straight cylindrical irrigation line
pipes for a solar collector system for drying grain, comprising /
the steps of: /
(a) dismantling the irrigation pipe line after the irrigation
season to provide a plurality of pipe lengths,
(b) arranging the pipe lengths separately in side-by-side
relation to receive solar heat,
(c) removably connecting one end of the pipe lengths to a
manifold leaving the other end open,
(d) drawing air through the pipes and the manifold,
(e) directing warmed air from the manifold into a grain
storage bin, and
(0 dismantling the solar collector system to utilize the pipes
for irrigation during the irrigation season.
28
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,047
HAND-HELD HAIR DRYER
Wilhelmus G. E. Janssens, Drachten, Netherlands, and Heinz
Merges, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 130,945
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 20, 1979,
7902158
Int. a.3 F26B 19/00
U.S. CI. 34—97 5 Qaims
4,391,049
COVERING ELEMENT OR TONGUE FOR
ROCK-CLIMBING AND SIMILAR SPORT BOOTS
Francesco Parisotto, Asolo, Italy, assignor to CALZATURIF-
ICIO S.C.A.R.P.A. S.n.c. di Parisotto Francesco & C, Italy
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,949
Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 12, 1980, 20768/80[U]
Int. a.3 A43B 5/04. 23/26
U.S. a. 36—114 5 Claims
W'5
1. An attachment formed of a substantially flexible material
for use with a hair dryer having an air discharge nozzle, said
attachment being expandable in use from a collapsed position
to an expanded shape, which comprises an imperforate funnel-
shaped wall portion open at both ends; means to connect the
small end of said funnel-shaped wall portion to the air dis-
charge nozzle; an outer end wall extending across the larger
end of said funnel-shaped wall portion and being connected
thereto, said outer end wall being provided with a plurality of
outlet openings; and a plurality of flexible strips situated within
.-the funnel-shaped wall portion and connecting the central
portion of the outer end wall to the small end of the funnel-
shapeti wall portion, said flexible strips serving to maintain the
outer end wall in its expanded shape during use.
4,391,048
ELASTIC SOLE FOR A SHOE INCORPORATING A
SPRING MEMBER
Dieter Lutz, Schweinfurt, Fed, Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Sachs- Systemtechnik GmbH, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Dec, 16, 1980, Ser, No. 217,037
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 21,
1979, 2951572
Int. a.3 A43B 13/18. 21/26
U.S. a. 36—28 30 Qaims
1. A covering element or tongue for rock-climbing and
similar sport boots, comprising:
a single, shaped laminar element divided into first and sec-
ond parts, one end of one part being connected to an
opposite end of the other part by hinge means formed by
a partly notched intermediate zone of the covering ele-
ment, and wherein one end region of one part overlies and
is superimposed over an end region of the other part so
that said one end of one part is relatively slidable or longi-
tudinally moveable with respect to said opposite end of
the other part, whereby an improved flexibility is im-
parted to the covering element.
431,050
TOOTH ASSEMBLY
Wayne G. Smith, and Herman J. Maurer, both of Burlington,
Iowa, assignors to J. I. Case Company, Racine, Wis.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,347
Int. a.3 E02F 9/28
U.S. a. 37—142 A 1 Claim
'\ ,6 '? /
1. A shoe, particularly for use as a sport shoe, comprising an
elastic sole, at least one chamber located in said sole, and a
spring member formed of an elastomer material located within
said chamber, wherein the improvement comprises at least one
elongated tension rod located in and extending through said
chamber and disposed generally parallel to said sole, at least
two abutments spaced apart in the elongated direction of said
tension rod, said spring member is located between said abut-
ments, said spring members slidably displaceable within said
chamber, and an adjusting device positioned on said tension
rod and operable from the exterior of said sole for varying the
distance between said abutments in the elongated direction of
said tension rod for adjusting said spring member.
1. A digging tooth assembly comprising:
an elongated generally rectangular digging tooth of hard
wear-resisting material having substantially parallel top
and bottom surfaces and opposed side surfaces, said dig-
ging tooth being substantially rectangular in transverse
cross-section and tapered to a horizontal cutting edge at
one end;
a generally V-shaped support shank including top and bot-
tom spaced apart portions which converge at one end to
form a tip portion for the shank, said shank including flat
top and bottom surfaces which converge to said tip por-
tion, said top and bottom portions of said shank forming
an undercut adaptable for mounting said shank on the
cutting edge of an excavating machine;
a resilient housing mounted to the top surface of said digging
tooth, said housing having an open end and including
opposed side walls which intersect the top surface of said
digging tooth inwardly of the opposed side surfaces of
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
29
said digging tooth, and said housing being mounted over
the tip portion of said shank, said housing being substan-
tially U-shaped in transverse cross-section having a top
wall extending between and connecting said side walls,
said side walls being flat and substantially parallel to lie
closely against the tip portion of said shank and said side
walls being substantially triangular in side elevation and
including upper edges sloping downwardly and forwardly
to engage against said tip portion of said shank;
retaining means for releasably securing said digging tooth to
said shank, said retaining means including a wedge-shaped
projection mounted on the top surface of said shank, said
projection being inclined relative to said shank top sur-
face, said projection being received for locking engage-
ment within an opening formed through the top wall of
said housing for mounting said digging tooth to said
shank, and said digging tooth being held on said shank tip
portion by the locking coaction between said projection
and said opening and the resiliency of said housing; and
said top surface of said digging tooth abutting only against
the flat bottom surface of said shank and said bottom
surface of said digging tooth being spaced downwardly
from the bottom surface of said shank with the top and
bottcwn surfaces of said digging tooth being generally
parallel to the bottom surface of said shank such that the
impact force against said tooth is transmitted through said
resilient housing to said support shank, and wherein the
longitudinal axis of said support shank being on a vertical
plane that is perpendicular to the horizontal digging tooth
cutting edge, and the digging tooth cutting edge provid-
ing a horizontal cutting action during excavation whereas
said supporting shank providing a subsequent vertical
cutting action.
vertically relative to the driving vehicle to adjust their vertical
position to the height of the snow cover.
4,391,052
SNOW BLOWER
Burlin A, Guy, Jr„ P,0. Box 83, Caroga Uke, N.Y. 12032
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No, 333,727
i Int, a,' EOIH 5/04, 5/09
U.S. a. 37X236 7 Qaims
4,391,051
MACHINE ARRANGEMENT FOR FORMING TRACKS
I AND/OR LEVELLING SURFACES RELATED TO
CROSS-COUNTRY SKI TRAILS OR DOWNHILL SKI
SLOPES
Anton R, Bachler, Seeburgstrasse 10, 6006 Luzern, Swit/eriand
Filed Jun, 29, 1981, Ser, No. 278,695
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul, 4, 1980, 5149/80
Int, Q.^ EOIH 4/00: EOlC 19/41
U.S. Q. 37—223 17 Claims
«^ ^^
1. A snow blower assembly including a horizontally elon-
gated and laterally opening shroud having one open longitudi-
nal front side and one closed longitudinal rear side as well as
opposite end mounting structures at least substantially closing
the opposite ends of said shroud, a pair of spiral bladed rotary
conveyor members journalled in the opposite end portions of
said shroud for simultaneous rotation about an axis extending
longitudinally of said shroud, said closed side including a
lateral outlet formed therein centrally intermediate said mount-
ing structures and opening rearwardly outwardly -of said
shroud, a horizontal axial inlet and upwardly opening tangen-
tial outlet blower assembly supported relative to said closed
side of said shroud and including a rotary impeller registered
with said lateral outlet, first and second fluid motors drivingly
coupled to said rotary conveyor members and said rotary
impeller, each of said first and second fluid motors being of the
variable speed type, a pair of opposite end laterally extending
horizontal skids carried by opposite ends of said shroud and
projecting slightly below the lower periphery of said shroud,
rearwardly projecting arm means carried by said shroud, a
prime mover including front and rear ends, means pivotally
supporting the rear ends of said arm means from said prime
mover for angular displacement about a horizontal axis gener-
ally paralleling the first mentioned axis, first motor means
operatively connected between said arm means and said prime
mover for adjustably angularly displacing said arm means
relative to said prime mover, said tangential outlet including a
horizontally curving outlet head rotatably supported there-
from for rotation about an upstanding axis concentric with said
tangential outlet, and second motor means operatively con-
nected between said outlet head and said tangential outlet for
adjustably angularly displacing said head relative to said tan-
gential outlet, support means supporting said skids from said
shroud for vertical adjustment relative thereto, said support
means including fluid motor means for adjustably shifting said
skids relative to said shroud.
1. Appiratus for treating a snow cover of varying height to
make tracks for ski trails and/or to level surfaces for ski slopes
and adapted to be attached to and positioned in front of a
driving vehicle, comprising a frame, at least one front support,
at least one rear support, said front and rear supports being
adapted to contact the snow cover and support the apparatus
thereon, pivot means for connecting said front and rear sup-
ports to said frame, cutting means connected to said frame
between said front and rear supports for treating the snow
cover, and coupling means for attaching said frame to the
driving vehicle, said coupling means being responsive to the
height of the snow cover relative to the driving vehicle
whereby said frame and thereby said cutting means may move
4,391,053
VISOR PICTURE FRAME
Alfred Anthony, Westport, Conn., assignor to Yankee Metal
Products, Inc., Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,773
Int. Q.' A47G 1/06: G09F 1/12: B60J 3/00
U.S. Q. 40—152 13 Qaims
1. For displaying a plurality of pictures, a frame assembly
adapted to be detachably secured to the sun visor of an auto-
motive vehicle or the like comprising:
a rigid frame member including a top, a bottom and a pair of
side edges joining said top and bottom edges;
30
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a front panel affixed to said frame member, said panel having
a plurality of viewing openings therein;
a backing plate removably mounted within said frame mem-
ber behind said front panel adapted to removably receive
a plurality of pictures thereon behind said viewing open-
ings in said front panel; and
at least one resilient clip integrally attached to said frame
edge walls joining said pair of side walls, said housing
defining an opening;
a bullet support plate located in said housing;
a spring disposed in said housing and underneath said sup-
port plate for urging bullets towards said opening,
said opening being configured to provide means for reten-
tion of bullets located in said housing; and
m
22
40 cS
53
24— O
A 18 1
f-sz
member and overlying the rear surface of said backing
plate for mounting said assembly to another supporting
surface, said clip including a substantially planar top por-
tion extending rearwardly from and coplanar to the top
edge of said frame member and a bottom portion extend-
ing downwardly from said top portion having a pair of
generally parallel spaced edges for contacting said sup-
porting surface in gripping relation thereta
4,391,054
METHOD, APPARATUS AND ARTICLE FOR FORMING
A PICTURE FRAME
John R. Schovee, 10 Burr Oak Dr., Pittsford, N.Y. 14534
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,809
Int. a.^ A47G 1/06; B32B 31/18
U.S. a. 40—154 31 Oaims
1. In a method of making frames from a plurality of frame
sections comprising:
(a) providing a length of frame section;
(b) forming a groove in a surface of said length of frame
section and inserting a fusible strip into said groove;
(c) cutting said molding across said fusible strip into a plural-
ity of sections that mate together at comers to form a
frame;
(d) abutting said sections at said comers of the frame; and
(e) fusing the abutting ends of said fusible strip together at
said comers, whereby said sections of molding are held
together to form a frame.
I 4,391,055
AMMUNITION MAGAZINE
Azriel Kadim, Tel Ayiv, Israel, assignor to Orlite Engineering
Ltd^ Nes Ziona, Israel
1 FUed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,087
Int a.3 F41C 25/02
VJS. a. 42—50 5 Qaims
1. An ammunition magazine formed of plastic and compris-
ing:
a housing defming a pair of side walls and front and rear
reinforcing means in the form of a reinforcing web moulded
into said housing and spanning said rear edge wall and
parts of said pair of side walls adjacent thereto in a region
adjacent said opening for preventing fracture of said hous-
ing upon impact.
4,391,056
RETAINING MEANS FOR REVOLVER CYLINDERS
Jose C. M. Bornancini, Porto Alegre, Brazil, assignor to Forjas
Taurus S/A, Porto Alegre, Brazil
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,433
Claims priority, application Brazil, Dec. 27, 1979, 7908530
Int. a.3 F41C 1/00
U.S. a. 42—62 5 Oaims
1. In a firearm including a frame, a hammer mounted in the
frame, a barrel, a cylinder opening between said hammer and
said barrel, a bore in the wall of the cylinder opening beneath
said hammer, a cylinder rotatably mounted in said opening and
tiltably movable out of said opening for the loading and extrac-
tion of cartridges therefrom, said cylinder having a centrally
disposed bore, a hollow cylinder axle telescopically fitted
within said cylinder bore, a cartridge extraction mechanism,
said mechlbiism including an extractor rod having an inner end
and an outer end, a star shaped member at the outer end of said
rod, the improvement comprising a resilient bushing fitted in
that end of the cylinder bore adjacent said hammer, said end of
the cylinder bore having a recess therein, said recess being of
lesser diameter than the diameter of the remainder of the bore,
a projection extending into said recess, means on said bushing
cooperating with said projection to fix said bushing against
rotation, retaining means on the inner wall of said cylinder
axle, retaining means on the outer wall of said bushing,
whereby when said cylinder axle is moved axially in said cylin-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
31
der bore from the barrel end of said frame toward said ham-
mer, said cylinder axle retaining means and said bushing retain-
ing means engage with each other and connect the bushing to
said cylinder axle.
Ih
4,391,057
ACTUATOR SYSTEM FOR THE RETURN OF THE
TRIGGER IN DOUBLE-ACTION REVOLVERS
Jose C. M. Bornancini, Porto Alegre, Brazil, assignor to Forjas
Taurus S/A, Porto Alegre, Brazil
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,432
Oaims priority, application Brazil, Dec. 27, 1979, 7908531 [U]
Int. O.^ F41C 1/00. 19/00
U.S. O. 42—65 15 Oaims
^
1. A trigger return actuator mechanism for a double-action
revolver having a hammer and trigger pivotally supported
within a frame, a hammer rod provided with a mainspring and
engaging said hammer, said mechanism including an actuating
rod provided with a forward end bearing against said trigger,
an abutment member within said frame having a bore there-
through, said actuating rod having a rear end slidably disposed
through said bore, said abutment member mounted within said
frame for rotary displacement about a fixed transverse axis, and
spring means biasing said actuating rod forward end away
from said abutment member and toward said trigger.
I r 4,391,058
TRIGGER AND HRING MECHANISM FOR BOLT
ACTION RIFLE
Richard J. Casull, P. O. Box 276, Freedom, Wyo. 83120
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,183
Int. 0.3 F41C 79/00. 17/02
U.S. CI. 42—69 A 5 Claims
1. In a oolt action type firearm, in which the barrel of the
firearm is attached to a receiver and a bolt is received in a bore
in the receiver, an improved firing mechanism comprising
a longitudinal bore within the bolt extending from the head
end of the bolt;
an elongate firing pin positioned in said longitudinal bore,
with the forward end of the pin adapated to project from
the forward end of the bolt to strike the end of a cartridge
in the firing chamber of the firearm when the bolt is in its
closed position, and with the rear end of the firing pin
positioned near the innermost end of the longitudinal bore
in said bolt;
a cammed notch in the bolt extending inwardly from a
longitudinal side of the bolt and intersecting the innermost
end of the longitudinal bore in said bolt;
an opening in the receiver adapted to be in alignment with
the cammed notch in the bolt when the bolt is in its closed
position;
an elongate spring-biased puncher having a recess in its side
surface, said puncher being adapted to move lengthwise
within the opening from a cocked position in which the
lead end of the puncher is substantially withdrawn from
the cammed notch to a fired position in which the lead end
of the puncher enters into the cammed notch in the bolt so
as to strike the rear end of the firing pin, with said cammed
surface on the cammed notch being adapted to push the
puncher from the cammed notch in the bolt to the punch-
er's cocked position during movement of the bolt to ex-
tract a spent shell casing from the firearm;
trigger means having a sear pin thereon adapted to engage
the recess in the spring-loaded puncher when the puncher
is moved into its cocked position, whereby the puncher is
retained in its cocked position until the trigger is pulled so
as to move the sear pin from the recess in said puncher,
whereupon the puncher moves into the cammed notch in
the bolt and strikes the firing pin and the firing pin is, in
turn, forced forward so as to strike the end of the cartridge
in the firing chamber of the firearm.
4,391,059
AUTOMATIC nSH HOOK SETTER
Samuel Cordova, Denver, Colo., and Roberi J. Spitz, 1548 S.
Gray, Lakewood, Colo. 80226, assignors to Roberi J. Spitz,
Lakewood, Colo.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253,065
Int. 0.3 AOIK 97/00
U.S. O. 43—15
4 Oaims
V'-
1. In an automatic fishing device having a base for securing
to a rigid structure, and a pivoted pole holding tube spring
biased to an upright position, the improvement of:
(a) latch/release means arranged to temporarily hold the
pole holding tube in downwardly pivoted position,
(b) said latch/release means including:
(1) a plate generally centrally mounted for limited pivotal
movement on the base and an upright latch plate
mounted on said plate and having an aperture therein,
(2) spring means biasing said plate toward a latching direc-
tion,
32
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
(3) stop means limiting the biased pivotal movement of
said plate in said latching direction,
(4) a pin mounted on the pole holding tube positioned to
mate with and be held in said aperture in said latch
plate,
(5) the top edge of said latch plate being beveled toward
said pin so as to aid the latching of the pole holding
tube, and
(6) trigger means rigidly secured to said latch/release
means and having a portion extending beyond said latch
plate and generally aligned therewith, said portion
extending beyond said latch plate including fish line
holding means, whereby said latch/release means per-
mits easy one hand latching of said pole holding tube in
a down position under spring bias.
4,391,060
TOY ROBOT VEHICLE ASSEMBLY
Shigeru Nakane, Yachiyo, Japan, assignor to Takara Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 294,894
Int. a? A63H 33/00
U.S. a. 46—22 11 Qaims
1. A toy assembly simulating a robot of humanoid form with
removable members reconfigurable into separate toy vehicles
comprising:
a first member configured to simulate a robotic humanoid
head and trunk;
a second member removably attached to the first member
and configured to simulate a pair of robotic humanoid arm
appendages;
a third member removably attached to the first member and
configured to simulate a pair of robotic humanoid leg
appendages;
means on the first member for removable connection to the
second and third members, and
means for providing locomotion on each of the first, second
and third members to permit each member to operate
independently as separate vehicles.
fluid communication with said first outlet port of one of
said air manifolds;
(e) a plurality of tubes positioned essentially vertically in the
interior of said housing, each of said tubes having its lower
end in fluid communication with said second outlet port of
one of said air manifolds and its upper end extending out
of an opening through said housing;
(0 a plurality of pistons moveably positioned in said tubes,
23 .. ~
each of said pistons having a flexible seal on its lower end,
a lower flange, an upper flange, a centering ring resting on
said upper flange and its upper end extending out of said
upper end of one of said tubes;
(g) means for limiting the distance of travel of said pistons;
and
(h) a plurality of moveable ornaments exterior to said hous-
ing, each of said moveable ornaments being connected to
one of said pistons.
4,391,062
INFLATABLE ARTICLES
Sidney H. Magid, 4th Fl., No. 10, Alley 5, La. 12, Section 4, Jen
Ai Rd., Taipei, Taiwan
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,513
Claims priority, application Taiwan, Jun. 1, 1981, 7011599
Int. a.3 A63H 3/06
U.S. a. 46—88 13 Claims
19 65 16b |59 ,5
-V-
4,391,061
MUSICAL TOY
A. Edward Fogarty, and Bonnie R. Fogarty, both of 3513 School
Ave., Sarasota, Fla. 33579
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,580
Int. a.3 A63H 29/16
LI.S. a. 46—44 3 aaims
1. A musical toy, comprising:
(a) a housing;
(b) a plurality of air manifolds positioned in the interior of
said housing, each of said air manifolds having an inlet
port, a first outlet port and a second outlet port;
, (c) a plurality of bellows operatively positioned in openings
through said housing, each of said bellows having its open
end in fluid communication with said inlet ix)rt of one of
said air manifolds;
(d) a plurality of whistles positioned in the interior of said
housing, each of said whistles having one of its ends in
1. An inflatable article comprising:
an inflatable envelope made of a gas impervious material
which is at least in part resilient and has at least one inflat-
ing valve provided thereon;
at least one flexible hollow protrusion attached to a wall of
said envelope, said hollow protrusion having a closed end
and an open end;
at least one external control element connected with the
closed end of said hollow protrusion and extending out-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
33
wardly from said hollow protrusion so that said protru-
sion can be flex'ed from a normally unflexed position by an
external force, applied by a user, to activate said external
control element;
an internal supporting element attached to the wall of said
envelope;
an engaging member provided on said closed end of said
hollow protrusion;
at least one movement imparting element capable of being
selectively engaged and disengaged with the closed end of
said hollow protrusion by means of said engaging mem-
ber;
at least one internal movable object contained in said enve-
lope, said movable object being movable by said move-
ment imparting element;
one or more returning elements associated with said hollow
protrusion for returning said hollow protrusion to its
unflexed position after said external force is released.
II 4,391,063
BALLOON WITH SEALING DEVICE THEREFOR AND
METHOD
H. Ross Gill, III, Ashland, Ohio, assignor to The National Latex
Products Co., Ashland, Ohio
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,858
Int. a.J A63H 3/06: B32B 15/14, 15/20; B65D 63/02
U.S. a. 46—90 10 Claims
of said strip as well as extending a predetermined amount of
substantially greater length as compared to the length of said
strip from an end of said strip, for providing for gripping of the
line by the balloon user, said walls of said strip being secured
to one another by an adhesive disposed between the same, with
said adhesive also securing said line to said strip walls interme-
diate thereof, the wall thickness of each of said strip walls
being in the range of approximately 0.001 of an inch to 0.002 of
an inch, said strip encircling the exterior of said neck portion
and being readily wound or twisted about the neck portion of
the inflated balloon by one's fingers, and being self-sustaining
in said wound or twisted condition and preventing the escape
of air through said neck portion, while securing said flexible
retainer line to said balloon, said combined sealing device and
retainer line being readily removable from said balloon by
unwinding "or untwisting said strip from about said neck.
8. A method of forming a combined sealing device and
flexible retainer line for a toy balloon comprising, providing a
relatively thin deformable but self-sustaining elongated section
of foil having on one side thereof a coating of adhesive, the
wall thickness of said foil being in the range of approximately
0.001 of an inch to 0.002 of an inch, laying a non-self-sustaining
retainer line such as a string or the like longitudinally of said
foil section for substantially the full length of said section with
the line extending a predetermined amount of substantially
greater length as compared to the length of said section from
an end of said section, and then folding said foil section upon
itself to form an elongated foil strip of double wall thickness
which clasps said retainer line therein, with said adhesive
securing the double wall thickness of the foil together and to
the intermediate retainer line, said strip being self-sustaining
but being readily wound or twisted about the neck of an in-
flated toy balloon for expeditiously sealing the latter against
the escape of pressure from within the balloon and at the same
time being operable to securely attach the retainer line to the
balloon, with said combined sealing device and attached re-
tainer line being readily removable from the balloon by un-
winding or untwisting the strip from about the neck of the
balloon.
1. A combined sealing device and flexible retainer line for a
toy balloon, comprising a double wall thickness strip of de-
formable but self-sustaining foil with the retainer line being
non-self-sustaining, as for example string, disposed intermedi-
ate the walls of said double wall thickness foil strip, and ex-
tending for substantially the full length of said strip as well as
extending a predetermined amount of substantially greater
length as compared to the length of said strip from an end of
said strip, for providing for gripping of the line by the balloon
user, said walls of said strip being secured to one another by an
adhesive disposed between the same, said adhesive also secur-
ing said line to said strip walls intermediate thereof, the wall
thickness of said foil being in the range of approximately 0.001
of an inch to 0.002 of an inch, said strip being readily wound or
twisted about the neck of an inflated balloon by one's fingers
and being self-sustaining in said wound or twisted condition for
expeditiously sealing the balloon against the escape of pressure
from within the balloon's interior while at the same securely
attaching the retainer line to the balloon, said combined sealing
device and attached retainer line being readily removable from
the balloon neck by unwinding or untwisting said strip.
5. In combination a toy balloon comprising an inflatable
resilient body portion and a neck portion connected to said
body portion, and a combined sealing device and flexible re-
tainer line wound or twisted about the neck portion and car-
ried thereby, said sealing device comprising a relatively thin
deformable but self-sustaining strip of foil of double wall thick-
ness with said flexible retainer line being non-self-sustaining, as
for example string, attached to said strip intermediate the walls
of said strip, said line extending for substantially the full length
4,391,064
ACROBATIC TOY
Willis M. Lakin, 7879 Northway Dr., Hanover Park, III. 60103;
Faith L, Goodman, North Bergen, N.J., and Diane L. Savoca,
Howard Beach, N.Y., assignors to Willis Lakin, Hanover
Park, III.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,463
Int. a.' A63H 13/12
U.S. a. 46—130 3 aaims
r\
1. A toy comprising:
(a) supporting means comprising a cross bar and a pair of
eyelets on the respective ends of said cross bar wherein a
34
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
pair of spaced bearing sleeves is on and rotatable about
said cross bar;
(b) a hollow main shaft, disposed around, rotatably sup-
ported by said supporting means at spaced locations along
said main shaft;
(c) a figure suspended on said main shaft, wherein said figure
comprises a body and a pair of arms, said pair of arms
being fixedly attached at their respective one ends to said
main shaft and pivotally mounted to said body at their
respective other ends;
(d) driving means for rotating said main shaft about its axis,
said means comprising a cord wound about a reel, a
ratchet gear means arranged between said reel and said
main shaft, wherein the gears of said ratchet gear means
positively engage for driving said main shaft when said
cord is pulled and thereby unwound from the reel, and
wherein said gears slip as the cord is rewound onto the
reel so as not to drive said main shaft;
(e) biasing means for rewinding the cord onto the reel;
(0 means for suspending said supporting means and hence
the toy from a crib or the like for providing counterforce
to pulling action on said cord;
(g) a first and second housing supported at spaced locations
by said supporting means and means for attaching said
housings to said cross bar, wherein said first housing
comprises a gear housing for containing said driving
means;
(h) a drive shaft mounted in said gear housing, wherein said
driving means is contained on said drive shaft, wherein
said reel is rotatably mounted on said drive shaft and
axially displaceable along said drive shaft, and wherein
said driving means comprises a first ratchet gear on said
reel, a second ratchet gear fixed on said drive shaft for
cooperating with said first ratchet gear, a spring fixed at
one end on said gear housing and at the other end to said
reel for urging said first ratchet gear into engagement with
said second ratchet gear, and an output gear fixed on one
of said drive shaft and said second ratchet gear for driving
said main shaft when said cord is pulled and said ratchet
gears are in positive engagement;
(i) a drive gear coupled with said main shaft for rotation
therewith and engaging said output gear wherein one of
said bearing sleeves forms a part of said driving gear; and
(j) a pivot shaft extending through aligned holes in said other
ends of said arms and said body for rotatably mounting
said body to said arms.
4,391.065
COVER PLATE FOR ACCESS OPENING
Dennis A. Rice, Dubuque, Iowa, assignor to Deere & Company,
Moline, III.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,7%
Int. a.3 E05C 21/02
U.S. a. 49—465 8 Qaims
s^LtrinT^^^^LJ^J-
1. In combination, a plate structure forming part of a housing
and having an access opening therein; a cover plate positioned
in said opening having an enlarged portion closing the main
part of the opening and a small portion, contiguous with and
extending from the enlarged portion closing a matching part of
the opening, said plate structure and said cover plate having
internal and external surfaces extending from the respective
edges of the opening and plate; a series of rigid stop elements
fixed to the internal surface of the plate structure adjacent the
edges of the opening and extending beyond the edges into said
Ojjening and engaging the internal surface of the cover plate so
as to limit movement of the cover to a position in which the
internal and external surfaces of the plate structure and cover
are co-extensive at their edges, and in which two of the ele-
ments are on opposite sides of the opening in the areas where
the edges forming said main part of the opening join the edges
forming the aforesaid matching part of the opening; a rod fixed
to the internal surface of and extending across the small portion
of the cover plate and having opposite end sections that extend
beyond the opposite edges of the small portion and engage the
internal surface of the plate structure, said end sections being
inclined in a direction toward the external surface and when in
a free state, extending to ends beyond the internal surface; and
means spaced from said rod and extending between the plate
structure and cover plate for drawing the cover plate against
the stop elements to thereby distort said rod end sections.
4,391,066
GRINDING MACHINE WITH DETECTION DEVICE FOR
USEABLE LIMIT OR GRINDING WHEEL
Kenichi Munekata; Kunihiko Unno, both of Kariya, and
Norihiko Shimizu, Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to Toyoda
Koki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,580
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 18, 1980, 55-82447
Int. aj B24B 49/18
Lf.S. a. 51—165.87 13 Qaims
1. A grinding machine having a truing device of the type
wherein a grinding wheel is trued by in-feeding a truing tool a
predetermined truing in-feed amount against said grinding
wheel at the time of each truing of>eration, comprising:
truing tool wear detection means for detecting a total wear
amount 2Ar of said truing tool after each truing operation,
and
arithmetic and judgement means coupled to said truing tool
wear detection means for receiving said total wear amount
2Ar and for judging whether or not said grinding wheel
has been worn down to a predetermined size limit Rmin
based upon at least said total wear amount 2Ar.
4,391,067
LOG WALL CONSTRUCTION FOR LOG HOME
Dale A. Frady, and David C. Frady, both of Waynesville, N.C.,
assignors to Frontier Homes, Inc., Waynesville, N.C.
Filed Apr. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 140,240
Int. a.3 E04B 1/10. 1/78
U.S. a. 52—97 24 Oaims
1. A building wall comprising a plurality of logs arranged
generally parallel, one above another, said logs having respec-
tive inner and outer sides and respective upper and lower sides
positioned in opposing relation to the adjacent upper and
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
35
lower sides of other logs, the upper side of each of said logs
including a longitudinally extending generally vertical abut-
ment surface located between the inner and outer sides of the
log and a longitudinally extending inclined surface portion
adjoining said abutment surface and sloping continuously
downwardly therefrom toward and adjoining the outer side of
said log, respective longitudinally extending filler panels lo-
cated between the upper side of each log and the lower side of
the next higher log and positioned against said vertically ex-
tending abutment surface on the upper side of the log for
substantially filling any longitudinal spaces between adjacent
logs, and a hardenable filler material located between the
upper side of each log and the lower side of the next higher log
and covering the outer side of said filler panel located therebe-
tween to provide a seal between adjacent logs to prevent the
passage of water and air through said wall.
4,391,068
WATER DEFLECTOR
Walter F. Kosar, 103 Elmore Rd., Pittsburgh, Pa. 15221
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,394
Int. a.3 E04D 13/00
U.S. a. 52—97 7 Oaims
,24 18 26
5. A deflector adapted to be mounted between overlapping
shingles along the edge of a roof, said deflector comprising:
(a) a substantially flat base with a side edge and a front edge
extending at an angle from said side edge, said base includ-
ing at least one tab adapted to engage the lower surface of
a shingle placed on top of said base and secure said base
thereto,
(b) a first upstanding lip integral with said base along said
side edge and substantially perpendicular to said base, and
(c) a second upstanding lip integral with said base along said
front edge and integral with said first lip and substantially
perpendicular to said base, said upstanding lips forming a
continuous deflector lip adapted to deflect liquid.
4,391,069
FREE STANDING WALL
Eugene F. Vermillion, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to The Colum-
bus Show Case Company, Columbus, Ohio
Filed 9ct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,026
Int. a.3 E04D 15/00
U.S. a. 52—126.4 4 Qaims
n «4i^"
1. A prefabricated, free standing wall comprising:
(a) an elongated floor-mounted, substantially horizontally
disposed sill member formed with upwardly opening,
longitudinally coextensive, transversely spaced apart,
medial and first and second lateral channels;
(b) an elongated substantially horizontally disposed cap
member formed with downwardly opening, longitudi-
nally coextensive transversely spaced apart, medial and
first and second lateral channels;
(c) a plurality of substantially vertically disposed frame
members extending between and connecting said sill and
cap members in relatively spaced apart, coplanar relation,
each of said frame members having laterally outwardly
projecting, horizontally extended foot and head sections
secured in the medial channels of said sill and cap mem-
bers, respectively;
(d) a plurality of substantially vertically disposed, horizon-
tally spaced apart panel-positioning studs having opposite
end portions positioned in each of the first and second
lateral channels of said sill and cap members; and
(e) at least two, coplanar wall panels removably carried in
each of the first and second lateral channels of said sill and
cap members and having adjacent edges thereof disposed
in abutment with and separated by one of said studs.
4,391,070
CHIMNEY
Manfred Bonnighausen, Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Babcock-Bau GmbH, Oberhausen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,116
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 29,
1980, 3007719
Int. Q.3 E04H 12/28; F23J 13/02: E04B 1/35
U.S. Q. 52—127.2 5 Qaims
1. Method for constructing a chimney having a loadbearing
external trunk which is built in sliding or climbing shuttering
and supports platforms for accommodating flue gas pipe or
flue gas pipes, comprising the steps: forming support elements
on the inner wall of the external trunk at planned levels of the
platforms; constructing said support elements as individual
brackets; providing the platforms with support arms; building
the platforms with support arms completely within the exter-
nal trunk at ground level; raising the platforms to respective
levels with lifting equipment; passing each platform by the
brackets when being raised to a respective level; turning the
36
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
hanging platform by an amount so as to locate its support arms
above the brackets; and then lowering the platform with sup-
4,391,072
WINDOW TRIM
John W. Moore, Creve Coeur, Mo., assignor to The Swan Corpo-
ration, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,807
Int. a.3 E06B 1/04
U.S. a. 52—211 10 Qaims
porting arms onto the brackets, said platforms and support
elements being prefabricated.
4,391,071
BASEMENT WATER DRAIN COVE
Socrates J. Schantz, Marine, 111., assignor to Schantz & Sons,
Inc., Marine, 111.
Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 181,986
Int. a.3 E04B 7/70; E04F 17/00; E02D 31/02
U.S. a. 52—169.5 3 Qaims
^-^^^-^^^-^^^^^
1. A unitary integral plastic or rubber-like drain cove of
uniform composition for draining water from a basement wall
along a junction of the wall and floor which comprises a base
member secured in sealed relation on the floor adjacent to and
spaced from said wall to defme a drain channel bounded by the
wall, the floor and said base member and a water directing
cove member integrally connected to said base member ex-
tending upwardly from and inwardly of said base and having a
water directing portion at a top part of the cove member
extending downwardly toward and bearing lightly against the
wall and being free of any connection thereto to provide water
drain means for moisture on said wall surfaces to said drain
channel, said base member extending outwardly along the
floor from a bottom portion of the cove member, said water
directing portion being constructed of a plastic or rubber-like
material having the capacity to conform to irregularities in the
wall surface against which it bears and extending from a point
above and inwardly from said base member and spaced from
said wall downwardly toward and against said wall to provide
a gutter defming said water drain means and said base member
being spaced from said wall and secured to the floor outwardly
of said water directing portion.
1. A window trim assembly for use with a building window
having a sill and jambs at opposite sides of said window, for the
purpose of modifying the appearance of said window, said
assembly comprising a sill trim component for covering dispo-
sition of said sill including a main or body section of planar
configuration and an apron depending from a horizontal edge
of said main body portion for obscuring the adjacent edge
portion of said sill, said apron having a planar configuration
and being in substantially planar perpendicular relationship to
said main or body section, and a pair of jamb trim components,
each of said jamb trim components having a panel portion for
covering disposition of corresponding portions of said jambs,
each said panel portion being directed toward the opening of
said window and being presented in upstanding relationship to
the main or body section of said sill trim component, each said
panel portion having a base extension projecting from said
panel portion inwardly from the corresponding jamb member
toward the opposite panel portion in overlying relation to the
adjacent portion of the main or body section of said sill trim
component, each base extension including a skirt integral with
said base extension extending over the proximate portion of
said apron of said sill trim component in covering disposition,
and means securing together said sill trim component and jamb
trim components.
4,391,073
MOVABLE PANEL ASSEMBLY
Lloyd C. Mollenkopf, Akeley, and Daniel J. Branson, Prior
Lake, both of Minn., assignors to Rosemount Office Systems,
Inc., Lakeville, Minn.
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,692
Int. C1.3 GOIK 11/04; E04B 2/82; E04H 5/00
U.S. a. 52—241 6 aaims
1. A movable panel assembly comprising a frame defining a
perimeter and including generally vertical frame members and
a generally horizontal lower frame member:
support means operable to hold said frame members in an
assembly defining an interior space;
said vertical frame members comprising channel shaped
members having a base and side walls, the sidewalls hav-
ing intumed ends spaced from the base and defining an
opening facing away from the space defined by the perim-
eter frame;
sheet means extending across said space to form a support
resisting forces perpendicular to the plane of the perimeter
frame;
a layer of fabric over said sheet means;
retainer means on each of the edges of the frame members
comprising a plurality of teeth extending in direction
relative to the frame so that edge portions of the fabric
layer placed over the teeth under tension are retained by
the teeth, and
a pair of support feet mounted on the lower horizontal frame
member, a raceway having a lower wall and hingedly
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
37
attached side walls, means to mount the lower wall of the
raceway to the support feet with the raceway side walls
extending upwardly to position adjacent the lower frame
member to form an enclosure in cooperation with the
lower frame member, said raceway side walls having
intumed side edges adjacent the lower frame member, and
cooperating grooves and lip means acting between the
intumed edges of the raceway sidewalls and the support
feet to releasably retain the raceway sidewalls uprightly
on the support feet.
4,391,074
WEEP SCREED
Henrietta H. Holsman, 101 Ocean Ave., Apt. B7, Santa Monica,
Calif. 90402
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,309
Int. Cl.^ E04B 1/00
U.S. a. 52—367 34 Qaims
1. In combination in a weep screed for providing a reinforce-
ment for stucco at or near the foundation plate line of a build-
ing.
a first lattice network disposable against the wall of the
building before the addition of stucco to the building and
including undulating wires disposed in overlapping rela-
tionship for receiving and reinforcing the stucco and
including line wires extending across the undulating wires
to define overlapping relationships with the undulating
wires, and
a second lattice network extendable from the wall of tlie
building in transverse relationship to the first lattice net-
work before the addition of stucco to the building and
disposed in a horizontal relationship and including undu-
lating wires disposed in overlapping relationship for re-
ceiving and reinforcing the stucco and including line
wires extending across undulating wires lo define overlap-
ping relationships with the undulating wires, and
the second lattice network including undulating wires ex-
tending into the first lattice network to provide u continu-
ation between the first and second lattice networks
4,391.075
INSULATED ROOF STRUCTURE
Dwight S. Musgrave, Granville, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Corn-
ing Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No, 202,989
Int. CI.' E04B 1/74. 5/57
U.S. CI. 52—404 13 Qaims
1. An insulated roof structure (10) comprising a plurality of
parallel, spaced main support beams (18), a plurality of parallel,
horizontally extending auxiliary support beams (12) spaced
apart from each other and supported by and extending trans-
versely of the main support beams (18), the auxiliary support
beams (12) each having a lower upstanding fiange, a plurality
of roof panels (14) mounted in covering relationship to the
auxiliary support beams (12), a plurality of hangers (20)
mounted in spaced relationship along each of the auxiliary
support beams (12) between each pair of adjacent main supptiri
beams (18), each hanger (20) including an upper hook portion
(28) in cooperative engagement with the lower upstanding
fiange of an auxiliary support beam (12), a plurality of elon-
gated support members (22) hung on each of the auxiliary
support beams (12) in alignment with each other and parallel to
the auxiliary support beams (12), the support members (22)
being cooperatively engaged with and suspended by the hang-
ers (20), and insulation strips (36) strung over the support
members (22) transversely of the auxiliary support beams (12).
4,391,076
' ROOF OR SIDEWALL CONSTRUCTION
Stewart Ferguson, P.O. Box 12, Aloha, Wash. 98525
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 59,998, Jul. 23. 1979. This
application Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,495
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 20,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' E04D 1/00
U.S. CI. 52—553 24 Qaims
1. In a covering for a surface of a building structure, such
covering including separate generally rectangular covering
elements having respective butt and tip ends and applied in
generally coplanar, side adjacent relationship in each of several
courses with the tip portions of the covering elements of one
course being overlapped by the butt portions of the covering
elements of a higher course, the improvement comprising a
filler element having respective butt and tip ends, at least one
side of said filler element having a shoulder extending trans-
versely of such side and dividing said filler element into a wide
38
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
tip portion and a narrower butt portion, said filler butt portion effectively provide shear resistance in the finished structure,
being fitted between the adjacent sides of adjacent covering and continuing said process of assembling and connecting said
components until said structure is completed.
4,391,078
LOADING BLADES FOR PACKAGING APPARATUS
Biagio J. Nigrelli, Kiel, Wis., assignor to Nigrelli Corporation,
Kiel, Wis.
Division of Ser. No. 112,589, Jan. 16, 1980, Pat. No. 4,332,121.
This application Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,066
Int. a.3 B65B 5/04
U.S. a. 53—251 2 Gaims
elements in a course and said shoulder abutting the tip end of
one of such adjacent covering elements.
' 4,391,077
METHOD OF CONSTRUCTING A BUILDING SYSTEM
Hans J. Giess, Rotorua, New Zealand, assignor to Fletcher
Timber Limited, Auckland, New Zealand
Continuation of Ser. No. 100,976, Dec. 6, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,144
Claims priority, application New Zealand, Dec. 8, 1978,
189128
Int. a.3 E04B 1/10
U.S. a. 52—747 4 Qaims
1. A method of constructing an essentially one component
thick structure of substantially planar walls from contiguous
lengths of plank-like building components comprising the steps
of producing a plurality of equally spaced parallel holes
through each said component, producing slots through each
component parallel to said holes and extending from an outer
surface of said component where a contiguous component is to
be joined to the hole adjacent thereto, placing at least one of
said components in position for construction, providing an
elongated joining member having the cross-sectional shape of
a straight shank with elongated bulbous ends, the dimensions
of said shank and bulbous ends being such as to provide a snug
sliding fit in said slot and holes respectively, inserting said
joining member into at least one of said holes and slot with said
shank and one bulbous end in said slot and hole resp>ectively,
'said joining member also being dimensioned so that when
inserted into said hole and slot substantially half of the cross-
section of said joining member extends from said component
and the length of said joining member extends substantially
parallel to the central axis of said hole for a distance compara-
ble to at least one-half the length of said hole, positioning
another component with respect to said construction position
with the hole and slot thereof in aligned engagement with the
extending end of said joining member, sliding said another
component into abutting engagement with said first positioned
component using said joining member as a guide, inserting
wooden dowels into said holes in said another component
which are aligned with said holes in previously positioned
adjacent components, said dowels having a diameter to pro-
vide a snug fit with said holes and a length no greater than the
length of a hole, driving said dowels into said aligned holes to
1. In a case loader having an article conveyor for moving
articles along support means having an upper surface defining
a first plane, a case conveyor located beneath the article con-
veyor and in which the case conveyor path merges upwardly
into the conveying path of the article conveyor from below,
the improvement wherein said case conveyor includes two
spaced parallel conveyor runs separated by a gap and a case
displacement lever, and means for supporting and operating
said lever for pivotal movement between an advanced position
extending in said gap between said conveyor runs to engage
the under surface of a carton and raise a portion of the carton
above said first plane and above the bottom of an article car-
ried on said article conveyor to intercept the leading end of an
article carried on said conveyor to insure engagement of the
leading edge of said carton with the article being loaded and to
minimize the distance the articles must fall into the case and
said means for supporting and operating said lever affording
movement of said lever to retracted position below said first
plane to afford movement of the filled case from said case
conveyor.
4,391,079
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR CYCLIC MACHINES
Dale M. Cherney, Howards Grove, Wis., assignor to Hayssen
Manufacturing Company, Sheboygan, Wis.
Filed Aug. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 180,039
Int. a.3 B65B 41/18: B31B 1/10; G05B 19/28; G06F 15/46
U.S. a. 53—396 15 Qaims
1. The method of controlling apparatus for sealing packages
wherein a web of flexible packaging material having a series of
registration marks is formed into tubing and fed past sealing
means for sealing the tubing to form packages, comprising:
presetting a predetermined delay length of tubing to be fed
past the sealing means;
initiating web feeding;
detecting a registration mark;
feeding said predetermined delay length past the sealing
means in response to said detection of a registration mark
before sealing of the tubing, said predetermined delay
length being substantially independent of the rate at which
packaging material is fed past the sealing means;
determining when the predetermined delay length of tubing
has passed the sealing means after detection of said regis-
tration mark;
stopping the feeding of material past the sealing means in
July 5,
1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
39
response to said predetermined delay length's having
passed the sealing means;
actuating the sealing means; and reinitiating feeding of the
web.
4,391,080
METHOD FOR PROVIDING AN INERT STERILE
ATMOSPHERE IN AN ASEPTIC PACKAGING MACHINE
Aaron L. Brody, Dunwoody; Joseph J. Embro, Atlanta, both of
Ga., and William E. Young, Neptune, N.J., assignors to The
Mead p)rporation, Dayton, Ohio
1 1 Filed Sep. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 76,932
Int. a.J B65B 55/10
U.S. a. 53—426 6 Qaims
1. In a method for providing a sterile inert atmosphere in an
aseptic packaging machine whereby inert gas is supplied to the
interior of the machine and wherein preformed Hanged con-
tainers are introduced into said interior through a sterilant
bath, then filled by a filler means and thereafter covered with
a cover material which is supplied through another sterilant
bath, the improvement whereby said inert gas is introduced
into the interior of said machine by sparging said gas into and
through said container sterilant bath, and a portion of said gas
! is withdrawn from said interior, divided into three parts and
delivered to (i) said containers for drying the flange areas
thereof prior to filling and sealing, (ii) to said filler means to aid
in the operation thereof and to provide a microbiological
barrier therefor, and (iii) to said cover material as it emerges
from said other sterilant bath for removing residual sterilant.
4,391,081
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING,
HLLING AND SEALING PACKAGES
Lloyd Kovacs, Sheboygan, Wis., assignor to Hayssen Manufac-
turing Company, Sheboygan, Wis.
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,209
Int. a.5 B65B 1/24. 9/06
U.S. a. 53—436 14 Qaims
1. The method of forming, filling and sealing packages com-
prising forming a flexible packaging material into tubing, the
tubing extending downwardly, feeding the tubing down-
wardly and transversely sealing it at package length intervals,
and delivering a quantity of the product with which the pack-
ages are to be filled into the tubing during an interval of time
between successive sealing operations, the transverst seals
being formed by a pair of sealing members movable relative to
one another between an open position and a closed position in
sealing engagement with the tubing, and, with the sealing
members open and after the delivery of the product into the
tubing and before the next seal is made, squeezing the tubing
above the sealing members by positively moving a pair of
stripper members relative to one another independently of the
movement of the sealing members from an open position to a
closed position wherein the stripper members are closely adja-
cent one another on op|X)site sides of the tubing in engagement
with the tubing above the sealing members, then holding the
stripper members in their closed position while moving them
generally straight down on the tubing between the sealing
members from above to below the sealing members, thereby to
compact the product in the tubing below the level of the next
seal to be made, closing the sealing members on the tubing
above the stripper members, and then opening the stripper
members and the sealing members and moving the stripper
members up between the sealing members returning them to
their open position.
4,391,082
,^_34DE MOUNTER WITH HLM CURL
ACCOMMODATOR
Robert E. Diesch, Rogers, Minn., assignor to Pako Corporation,
Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,555
Int. a.^ B65B 61/00. 63/00
U.S. a. 53—520 16 Oaims
1. Apparatus for mounting a film transparency in a slide
mount, said slide mount having opposing portions defining a
plane therebetween, the apparatus comprising:
means for partially inserting a film transparency, while at-
tached to a film web, into the slide mount;
means for severing the transparency from the web at a posi-
tion outside the slide mount; .
means for engaging the transparency to fully insert the
transparency into the slidemount; and
means for bowing both portions of the slide mount in the
40
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
same direction relative to said plane about an axis parallel
to the direction of transparency insertion to match a curl
in the transparency as the transparency is fully inserted
into the slide mount.
4,391,083
PACKING MACHINE
Austin L. Fox, London, England, assignor to Molins Limited,
London, England
Filed Jun. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 163,457
Int. CI.3 B65B 19/24
U.S. a. 53—575 9 Qaims
V— »' '
JL
'f-.-^'^
■"■/ ■
78
other of said shafts having at least one corresponding slot,
said tongue and slot being arrangedto engage each other
to provide a drive connection therebetween when said
driving and coupling shafts are in axial alignment.
4^91,084
TOBACCO DEFOLIATING UNITS WITH OVERLAPPING
CUTTING EDGES
Robert W. Wilson, Charlotte, N.C, assignor to Powell Manufac-
turing Company, Inc., Bennettsville, S.C.
Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,524
Int. a.' AOID 45/16
U.S. a. 56—27.5 4 Qaims
1. A packing machine comprising:
(a) a movable carrier;
(b) a plurality of packet-forming assemblies mounted on said
movable carrier, each assembly comprising a stationary
member and at least one operating member mounted for
movement toward>^nd away from said stationary mem-
ber; y
(c) means for mo^'ing said carrier intermittently along a path
so that each of said assemblies stops successively at each
of a plurality of stations; and
(d) means for positively driving said at least one operating
member of each of said assemblies to progressively move
said operating member towards and away from said sta-
tionary member, said driving means comprising at least
one coupling shaft rotatably mounted on said movable
carrier and operatively connected to said at least one
operating member, said coupling shaft extending trans-
verse to the directional movement of said assembly along
said path between successive stations, and at least one
rotatably mounted driving shaft at each of a selected
plurality of said stations where at least one operating
member of each of said assemblies is to be moved, said at
least one driving shaft at each of said selected stations
being so located that when each of said assemblies is
stopped at each of said selected stations said at least one
driving shaft is in axial alignment with said at least one
coupling shaft on said movable carrier, the end of one of
said shafts having at least one tongue and the end of the
-30
1. In an apparatus for priming tobacco plants having stalks
and leaves extending outwardly therefrom comprising a vehi-
cle frame movable along a row of tobacco plants, a pair of
intermeshing defoliating units, means mounting said units on
said frame in spaced side-by-side relation for vertical adjust-
ment together with respect to said frame, each of said defoliat-
ing units including a forward rotary element mounted on said
frame for rotation about a first axis, a rearward rotary element
mounted on said frame in a position spaced rearwardly and
upwardly with respect to said forward rotary element for
rotation about a second axis parallel to said first axis, a plurality
of elongated members extending between said rotary elements,
means mounting the forward ends of said elongated members
on said forward rotary element for rotational movement about
axes parallel to said first axis and spaced circumferentially
thereabout, means mounting the rearward ends of said elon-
gated members on said rearward rotary element for rotational
movement about axes parallel with said second axis and spaced
circumferentially thereabout, each of said elongated members
including cutting blade means thereon having sharp upper
cutting edges extending generally in directions both longitudi-
nal and transverse with respect to the row of plants, the trans-
verse extent of the cutting edges of each unit being in a direc-
tion toward the other and in longitudinally intermeshing rela-
tion therewith, and driven means operatively connected with
at least one rotary element of each unit for rotating said ele-
ment and effecting an orbital translational movement of the
elongated members of each unit in a direction such that the
cutting edges of each elongated member will be moved in-
wardly toward the stalks, upwardly to sever the leaves from
the stalks and then outwardly to carry the severed leaves away
from the stalks, the improvement which comprises
the longitudinal extent of the cutting edges associated with
the elongated members of each unit during their move-
ment inwardly toward the stalks passing into a common
vertical plane disposed closely adjacent the associated side
of the stalks of a row of tobacco plants along which the
vehicle frame is moved so as to insure that leaves attached
to stalks at positions adjacent opposite sides thereof with
respect to the row will be severed,
the distance between the aforesaid vertical planes associated
with both units being less than the transverse extent of the
cutting edges of said units so that the free ends of the
transverse extent of the cutting edges of each elongated
member associated with each unit during their movement
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
41
1
mwafdly toward the stalk moves inwardly a distance
beyond the vertical plane associated with the other unit so
as to insure that leaves attached to stalks at positions other
than at opposite sides thereof with respect to the row will
be severed.
4,391,085
GRAPE HARVESTER
Robert H. Harris, Indianapolis; Troy G. Humphrey, Beech
Grove, and John J. Stimson, Jr., Indianapolis, all of Ind.,
assignors to Labeco Harvesters, Inc., Fresno, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 120,542, Feb. 11, 1980, Pat. No.
4,299,081. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,698
Int. CV AOID 46/26, 46/28
U.S. a. 56—330 9 Claims
1. A harvester comprising:
frame means operable to move along in straddling fashion a
row of plants having growing items thereon and including
a receptacle to catch said items falling from said plants;
a head pivotally mounted on said frame means to pulsate said
plants to cause items growing thereon to fall therefrom
into said receptacle, said head including:
a frame pivotally mounted to said frame means and having a
pair of downwardly extending spaced apart supports
forming a channel through which said row of plants may
pass;
a pair of horizontally movable arms mountable to said sup-
ports with spaced apart distal ends positionablc on oppo-
site sides of said row of plants;
driving means mounted on said frame and operatively asso-
ciated with said arms to reciprocate said arms back and
forth against said plants while limiting movement of one
arm to approximately the same horizontal direction of
movement as the other arm, said driving means including
first and second crank shafts rotatably mounted about an
axis of rotation on said frame, a source of energy having a
rotatable output operatively driving said first and second
crank shafts which arc connected to said arms maintaining
a constant spacing between said distal ends as said arms
are reciprocated by said driving means, said arms includ-
ing at least a pair of links with top ends pivotally mounted
to said frame and bottom ends pivotally connected to said
arms suspending said arms therefrom and allowing a
swinging arc movement of said arms in response to said
driving means and independent of pivotal movement of
said frame, said distal ends being rigid members extending
in the direction of said row of plants;
counterweight means including a first and a second off
centered counterweights respectively on said first and
second crank shaft rotatably mounted on said frame, said
counterweight means being operable to provide a vibra-
tion neutralizing force in a direction opposite of the direc-
tion of movement of said arms; and
timing means operatively associated with said first and sec-
ond off centered counterweights along with said first and
second crank shafts being operable to rotate said counter-
weights about said axis of rotation but in a direction oppo-
site of the crank shaft upon which each counterweight is
mounted dampening vibration imparted to said frame by
said arms.
4,391,086
APPARATUS FOR RESTRINGING MULTIPLE
THREADLINES
Charles H. Doherty, III, Nashville, Tenn., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 237,615, Feb. 24, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 357,856
Int. CI.' B65H 69/U6: D02J 1/(J8
U.S. CI. 57-22 4 Claims
n ji
'• /
1. In a machine for processing multiple threadlines moving
in a path from a supply source to a windup, an apparatus for
stringing an unstrung threadline of said multiple threadlines
that includes a jet adjacent said threadlines for interlacing the
unstrung threadline with a moving threadline comprising: a
forwarding jet located downstream of the interlacing jet, said
forwarding jet having an inlet and an outlet through which
said multiple threadlines pass in said path, said forwarding jet
having a coanda surface located at its outlet; a suction device
located below said coanda surface; a first elongated guide pin
located across the threadline path contacting the moving mul-
tiple threadlines adjacent the outlet of the forwarding jet; and
a second elongated pin having a notch in its surface at its center
pivotally mounted at the outlet of the forwarding jet for swing-
ing movement from a location belosv said coanda surface and
above said suction device past said suction device to a location
between the outlet of the forwarding jet and said first guide pin
and above and across the threadline path.
4,391,087
TWISTING APPARATUS
Aloys Greive, Miinster; Aloys Horstmann, Greven, and Wilbelm
Stupirak, Miinster, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Volkmann GmbH & Co., Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,764
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 18,
1980, 3015044
Int. a.3 DOIH 1/10. 7/86
U.S. a. 57—58.52 10 Qaims
1. A twisting apparatus comprising:
a spindle extending along an upright axis, having an upper
end and a rotatable lower end, and formed with a passage
opening axially upwardly at said upper end and radially
outwardly at said lower end;
means for rotating said spindle about said axis;
a bobbin support rotatably carried on said spindle between
said ends thereof and provided with a plurality of bobbin
42
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
holders spaced about and radially offset from said axis and
each adapted to support a respective bobbin carrying a
respective yam, whereby said yams can be led down
through said passage and up around said bobbin support
while said spindle is rotating to wind said yams together
and form a balloon around said support; and
'^
ping device, a bobbin of said wrapping thread carried on said
hollow spindle, a pair of delivery rolls for feeding said bundle
of spinning fibers to said hollow spindle and a pair of takeup
rolls for drawing off said wrap yam out of said hollow spindle,
a housing concentrically surrounding said bobbin, a jacket
forming part of said housing having openings for the passage of
air, and a suction duct arranged between said pair of delivery
rolls and said hollow spindle comprising:
a closing element associated with said openings for selec-
tively closing and opening during piecing-up of said yam;
said closing element being a pot inverted over said housing,
a fiber feed channel extending through said pot in axial
alignment with said hollow spindle, said suction duct
opening into said feed channel, and said pot being tele-
scopically displaceable during piecing-up in the direction
of said pair of takeoff rolls to an extent such that it covers
said openings.
2. A method for piecing-up a wrap yam being produced
from a bundle of spinning fibers and a wrapping thread by
means for preventing rotation of said support about said axis
even while said spindle is rotating, said bobbin holders
being angularly equispaced about and radially equispaced
from said axis, said bobbin holders number four, including
two for main bobbins and two for the reserve bobbins, the
holders for said main bobbins being diametrally opposite
each other and alternating with the holders for said re-
serve bobbins.
4,391,088
STRING FOR SPORTS RACKETS
Jerome Salsky, Emerson, N.J.; Patrick K. Janis, Oak Park, III.,
and Kenneth E. Branen, Nashua, N.H., assignors to United
States Tennis Gut Association, Inc., Emerson, N.J.
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,082
Int. a.3 D02G 3/04. 3/10. 3/38. 3/40
U.S. a. 57—234 . 15 Qaims
1. A string for sports rackets consisting of a gut core covered
with filamentary aramid and impregnated with at least one
coating of water-resistant, vapor-impermeable, wear-resistant,
flexible smooth adhesive polymeric resin.
4,391,089
APPARATUS FOR PIEaNG-UP A WRAP YARN
Werner Billner, and Erich Bock, both of Ingolstadt, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Schubert & Saizer, Ingolstadt, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,588
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 31,
1980, 3020726
Int. a.3 DOIH 15/00: D02G 3/36
U.S. a. 57—261 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for piecing-up a wrap yam being produced
from a bundle of spmning fibers and a wrapping thread on a
wrapping device, a hollow spindle forming part of said wrap-
means of a wrapping device comprising a hollow spindle car-
rying a bobbin of said wrapping thread and arranged between
a pair of delivery rolls for feeding said bundle of spinning fibers
to said hollow spindle and a pair of take-off rolls for drawing
off said wrap yarn out of the hollow spindle, a housing concen-
trically surrounding said bobbin, a jacket forming part of said
housing having ojsenings for the passage of air, and a suction
duct arranged between said pair of delivery rolls and said
hollow spindle, comprising the following steps:
stopping said wrapping device;
producing an eddy of air in said housing by an airflow
through said openings for seeking and exposure of a free
end of said wrapping thread on said bobbin;
introducing an end of said wrap yam withdrawn from a yam
bobbin into said hollow spindle, and
producing a concentrated suction air stream in said housing
by closing said openings for delivering back said ends of
said wrap yam and said wrapping thread into said suction
duct.
4,391,090
DEVICE FOR PNEUMATICALLY THREADING A YARN
IN A DOUBLE TWIST SPINDLE
Simon Charbonnler, Lyons, France, assignor to Verdol S.A.,
Caluire, France
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,969
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 3, 1980, 80 23666
Int. a.3 DOIH 15/00. 7/86
U.S. a. 57—279 5 Qaims
1. A pneumatic yam threading device for a double twist
spindle having a hollow central shaft with a yam brake therein,
and having means operative when the shaft is pneumatically
pressurized for introducing yam through its bore past the
brake, wherein the device comprises:
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
43
(a) a shaft comprising axially aligned mutually-spaced tubu-
lar portions joined together by a central portion having an
axial bore of diameter larger than the bores of said tubular
portions, the tubular portions having opposed ends facing
each other across the bore of the central portion, and the
central portion having a transverse passage extending
thereacross between the tubular portions;
(b) a yam brake comprising an elongated capsule in the bore
of the central portion and having opposed ends which are
disposed in a first axially aligned position to abut said
opposed ends of the tubular portions and close their bores,
and the capsule in a second displaced position being ofTset
from axial alignment to expose the bores at said opposed
ends to permit yarn to be passed therethrough; and
(c) means lor controlling the position of the capsule compris-
ing piston means slidably mounted in said transverse pas-
sage and having an opening therethrough receiving said
capsule, the opening being larger in diameter than the
capsule; yieldable spring means urging the capsule and the
piston means normally to occupy a first position wherein
the capsule is axially aligned with and closes the bores of
the tubular portions; and one side of the piston means
being pneumatically coupled to the bore of the central
portion and operative when the hollow shaft is pressur-
ized to displace the piston means and move the capsule to
said second displaced position, whereby yam can pass
through said bores and the opening of the piston means for
threading the double twist spindle.
1 1 4,391,091
FALSE TWISTING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Hellmut Lorenz, Remscheid-Lennep, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Barmag Barmer Maschinenfabrik AG, Remscheid,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,196
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 17,
1981, 3110242; May 9, 1981, 3118410
Int. Q.^ D02G 1/08
U.S. Q. 57—340 20 Qaims
1. A yam false twisting apparatus comprising
a frame,
a pair of twist imparting discs, with each disc being mounted
to a supporting shaft and having a yam engaging friction
surface on one face thereof,
means mounting said discs to said frame and including a
carrier plate mounting said shafts for rotation about essen-
tially parallel, spaced apart axes and such that portions of
the respective yam engaging friction surfaces are disposed
in opposing relationship and define a twisting zone there-
between;
drive means for rotating each of said discs in opposite rota-
tional directions, said drive means including a whori
mounted to each of said shafts, and an endless drive belt
rotatably mounted to said frame so as to have a run con-
tacting opposite surfaces of said whorls and thereby rotate
the same in opposite directions.
whereby a yarn may be continuously moved through said
twisting zone in a direction extending perpendicular to the
plane defined by said axes of rotation and so as to have
twist imparted thereto by frictional contact between the
yarn and the respective opposed friction surfaces.
4,391,092
MULTIPLE POSITION DIGITAL ACTUATOR
Samuel E. Arnett, South Bend, Ind., assignor to The Bendix
Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,531
Int. Q.3 F02C 9/18
U.S. Q. 60-39.29 11 Qaims
1. A multiposition actuator for changing a N-bit digital word
into N physical positions of an actuator element comprising:
N-1 telescoped open ended cylinders mounted in an open
ended bore with the open ends of said cylinders disposed
toward the closed end of said bore and an end cap closing
the open end of said bore;
said actuator element including an elongated body passing
through an aperture in the closed end of said bore and
having a flange being a double acting piston disposed
within the innermost cylinder;
said actuator element, cylinders and end cap forming N
piston cylinder combinations wherein the piston area of
each successive piston increases from the innermost com-
bination to the outermost combination, and wherein the
flange piston area disposed toward the closed end of the
bore is less than the flange piston area for the innermost
cylinder;
each of said combinations operable to move said actuator
element independently of the other combinations through
a distance controlled by an expandable chamber disposed
between the cylinder and piston of each combination,
each distance being related to the other distances by pow-
ers of the numeral 2;
N pilot solenoids, each associated with an expandable cham-
ber and opeirable to control means for communicating a
44
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
source pressure to a corresponding chamber and the said striker device to the pressure of said precombustioncham-
source pressure from a corresponding chamber to a refer-
ence pressure and each associated with one of the bits of
said digital input and actuated by one of the states of said
bit;
a bias chamber defined by the open ends of said cyhnders
and the closed end of said bore;
means for communicating said source pressure to said bias
chamber such that movement of the expandable chambers
is accomplished by the force difference between the pis-
tons because of the source and reference pressures acting
over the differing piston areas.
ber so as to effect movement of said striker device to destroy
4,391,093
TEMPERATURE-RESPONSIVE ACTUATOR
Williain K. Gulick, Glendale, OlHo, assignor to General Electric
Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jun. 29. 1981, Scr. No. 278,922
Int. a.5 F02C 7/042
U.S. CI. 60—39.29 8 Qaims
SJ 56 ' -'K
;:fflS^^;^i
I. A temperature-responsive actuator comprising:
■i support member;
a spaced pair of thermally expandable members extending
longitudinally in parallel alignment, one of said expand-
able members having one end fixedly connected to said
support member and an opposite end connected to a cor-
responding end of the other expandable member;
means directing a flow of fluid into contact with both said
expandable members; and
means restricting the flow of said fluid into contact with one
of said expandable members in a first mode of operation
and enabling relatively unrestricted flow of said fluid in
contact therewith in a second mode of operation;
whereby said one expandable member expands longitudi-
nally in one direction during said first mode and the
other of said expandable members expands longitudi-
nally in an opposite direction during said second mode
for retracting said one expandable member.
said cover and open said air inlet on the occurrence of a prede-
termined pressure in said precombustion chamber. _
4.391,094
DESTRUCTABLE AIR INLET COVER FOR ROCKET
ENGINES
Herbert Engel, Munich, and Horst Boettger, 2^rneding, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Messerschmitt-Bolkow-
Blohm Gesellschaft mit Beschranktcr Haftung, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,607
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 29,
1980, 3003004
Int. Q\? F02K 7/10, 9/08
U.S. a. 60—245 5 Oaims
5. A movable air inlet control device for a ram jet engine
which includes a precombustion chamber connected through a
flow passage to a main combustion chamber which has an inlet
having a breakable cover closing said inlet which may be
broken to permit air to enter into said main combustion cham-
ber for combustion, comprising a tubular connection between
said air inlet passage and said precombustion chamber, a striker
device movable in said tubular connection, means for exposing
4,391,095
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH EXHAUST
FILTER REJUVENATION
Kashmir S. Virk, Hopewell Junction, N.Y., assignor to Texaco
Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,913
Int. a.^ FOIN 3/02
U.S. CI. 60—286 7 Oaims
-•?C3^
-/^ JO
I . In a multi-cylinder internal combustion engine 10 having
a plurality of cylinders 12, and a primary fuel injection system
including a fuel injector 11 communicated with each of said
cylinders 12 to inject a primary liquid fuel charge thereto,
intake 17 and exhaust valve 18 sets communicated with each
of said cylinders 12, said valve sets being operable be-
tween opened and closed positions when the engine is
functioning,
a valve override means 41 engaging the intake valve 17 in at
least one of said cylinders 12 and being operable to main-
tain said intake valve 17 in closed position whereby to
immobilize said at least one cylinder during a period of
engine operation,
power control means communicated with said valve over-
ride means and with said primary fuel system, and being
operable to discontinue fuel flow to said at least one cylin-
der when the latter is in immobilized mode,
an exhaust gas filter 24 communicated with the respective
engine exhaust valves 18 to receive a stream of hot exhaust
gas therefrom,
an exhaust gas filter rejuvenation system including: supple-
mentary fluid fuel injector means communicated with a
source of supplementary fuel and being operable to con-
trollably inject an amount of said supplementary fluid fuel
into an immobilized cylinder 12 when said cylinder is in
immobilized mode.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4S
II 4,391,096 >
HYDRODYNAMIC REVERSING TRANSMISSION
Erich Polzer, Gottfried Ruetz, both of Heidenheim; Hubert
Schmolz, Nattbeim, and Remy Pochon, Heidenheim, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Voith Getriebe KG, Hei-
denheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,554
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20,
1980, 3010661
Int. a.3 F16D 33/00
U.S. a. 60— 335 Uaaims
4,391,097
• PUMPING UP HYDROELECTRIC POWER PLANT
Sachio Tsunoda, Yokohama, and Kaneo Sugisita, Ayase, both of
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,036
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1979, 54/143291
Int. a.' F16D 31/02
U.S. a. 60—398 4 Qaims
^-^l-lp^
WJ
1. A hydrodynamic reversing transmission, particularly for
use in earth moving and like vehicles, comprising rotary input
means; reversible rotary output means; forward and reverse
drive trains connecting said input means with said output
means and respectively including first and second hydrody-
namic starting torque converters respectively comprising first
and second working circuits which are respectively rendered
operative and ineffective, also within the counterbraking
range, in response to admission and evacuation of working
fluid, each of said circuits including a stationary housing, a
turbine wheel designed for substantially centrifugal flow of
^fluid therethrough and means for influencing the torus stream
in the respective circuit; a source of pressurized working fiuid;
a sump; first and second filling lines connecting said source
with the respective circuits; first and second draining lines
having inlet portions connected with the respective housings
and outlet portions discharging into said sump; and reversing
means for regulating the flow of fluid in said lines so that said
first filling line delivers fluid from said source to said first
circuit and said first draining line is sealed when said second
filling line is sealed from said source and said second draining
line is open, and vice versa, said inlet portions having perma-
nently open apertures for evacuation of some fluid from the
respective housings, said apertures being arranged to admit
working fluid into said sump and said inlet portions being
disposed in the regions of outflow of fluid from the respective
turbine wheels, the orientation of said inlet portions being such
that the direction of fluid flow therein coincides, at least sub-
stantially, with the direction of fluid flow toward said inlet
portions within said counterbraking range.
^..
3. A pumping up hydroelectric power plant structure com-
prising a main pump/turbine having a draft tube, a booster
pump provided in said draft tube, so that said booster pump is
operated in series with said main pump/turbine during the
pumping operation of the pump/turbine, and a power system
for operating the main pump/turbine and booster pump, said
main pump/turbine and said booster pump being constructed
to satisfy relations
and
(Ki/K2)(y2/yi)=tO
0.71 SK/K^ 1.42
wherein
Ki: time constant of the rotating part of the pump/turbine
K2: time constant of the rotating part of the booster pump,
yi: average torque exerted to the rotating part of the pump-
/turbine,
y2: average torque exerted to the rotating part of the booster
pump,
so that when the main pump/turbine and booster pump are
simultaneously disconnected from the power system, the rotat-
ing speeds of each pump are simultaneously reduced to zero.
4,391,098
TURBO-COMPOUND INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Hideaki Kosuge, Hayama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,115
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1980, 55-132519
Int. a.3 F02B 37/00
U.S. a. 60—602 4 Qaims
1. In a engine system including a internal combustion engine
equipped with a turbo-charger and an auxiliary turbine inte-
grated with said engine, the combination comprising:
an exhaust passage leading from a combustion chamber of said
engine to a turbine of said turbo-charger;
a transfer passage leading from the turbo-charger turbine to a
scroll of said auxiliary turbine;
a first by-pass passage leading from said exhaust passage to said
scroll;
a second by-pass passage leading from said transfer passage to
an exhaust conduit of said engine;
46
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a first waste gate responsive to the discharge pressure of a 4,391,100
compressor of said turbo-charger which controls the com- CLOSED LOOP HERMETICALLY SEALED SOLAR
munication between said exhaust passage and said first by- POWER GENERATOR
pass passage, said first waste gate being adapted to open Derrick A. Smith, 1180 S. Seabreeze Blvd., Fort Lauderdale,
upon the discharge pressure of said turbo-charger compres- ^"^ 33316
sor reaching a first predetermined value; Filed Aug. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 70,327
a second waste gate responsive to the pressure prevailing in
U.S. a. 60—641.11
Int. Cl.^ F03G 7/02
lOaim
26 V-
c^ki
said transfer passage which controls the communication
between said second by-pass passage and said transfer pas-
sage, said second waste gate being adapted to open upon a
second predetermined pressure prevailing in said transfer
passage; and
means defining first and second passages within said scroll
which exclusively communicate with said first by-pass pas-
sage and said transfer passage, respectively.
4,391,099
ATMOSPHERIC THERMAL ENERGY CONVERSION
UTILIZING INFLATABLE PRESSURIZED RISING
CONDUIT
Jens O. Sorensen, P. O. Box 2274, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif.
92067
I Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,610
Int. a.3 F03G 7/02, 7/04
U.S. a. 60-641.6 32 Claims
1. A method of atmospheric thermal energy conversion
utilizing pressurized rising conduit comprising the steps of:
(a) providing warm gas at a low elevation,
(b) transporting the warm gas upwards from the low eleva-
tion to a high elevation through a thin-walled, inflatable,
rising conduit thereby providing gas within the conduit
with a low density which causes the upward flow of the
gas through the conduit,
(c) converting the energy of the flowing gas by passing the
gas through a transducer,
(d) pressurizing the conduit from the inside with the trans-
ported gas to thereby inflate and suppori the thin-walled,
inflatable rising conduit.
1. A closed loop sealed recirculatory water conservation
solar power generator comprising:
(a) a stationary hollow globular boiler, said boiler including
water inlet means disposed adjacent said ugper portion of
said globular boiler, an upwardly directed steam outlet
conduit originating from the uppermost portion of said
globular boiler, and a refractor lens window disposed
within an upper portion of said globular boiler, said boiler
being adapted to contain a body of water;
(b) controllable means comprising a paraboloid reflector
mounted on a post for directing the sun's rays towards
said refractor lens window, thereby to generate heat to
boil water in said globular boiler;
(c) a primary steam-powered turbine for the generation of
electricity, said turbine being disposed at a level above
that of said boiler, said primary steam-powered turbine
being connected to said steam outlet conduit and thus
being driven by steam under pressure from said globular
boiler;
(d) steam condenser means comprising a radiator connected
to the outlet from said primary steam-powered turbine for
simultaneously recovering useful heat from said steam and
for partially condensing said steam to a mixture of steam
and water, and a condenser connected to the outlet from
said radiator for substantially completely condensing said
steam to substantially pure water;
(e) a closed reservoir connected to an outlet from said con-
denser, said reservoir being disposed at a level lower than
the level of said primary steam-powered turbine but at a
level higher than the level of said globular boiler, said
reservoir being for receiving and storing said substantially
pure water from said condenser;
(0 a secondary water-powered turbine for the generation of
electricity, said turbine being disposed at a level lower
than that of said reservoir but at a level higher than that of
said globular boiler, said turbine being connected to said
reservoir, said secondary, water-powered turbine and
being selectively driven by water from said reservoir;
(g) a valve automatically sequenced for periodic opening, to
permit flow of water from said reservoir to said secondary
turbine to drive said turbine, for for periodic closing to
cut-off said flow of water to permit said secondary turbine
to remain at rest;
(h) effluent means from said secondary turbine to conduct
pure water to an inlet to said globular boiler, said inlet
being disposed at an upper portion of said globular boiler;
and
(i) a check valve in said effluent means (h) to control the
recirculating flow of water back to said globular boiler
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
47
4,391,101
ATTEMPERATOR-DEAERATOR CONDENSER
Donald E. Labbe, Wobum, and Mayo E. Brown, Jr., Milton,
both of Mass., assignors to General Electric Company, Lynn,
Mass.
I Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,967
I Int. a.3 POIK 21/06
U.S. a. 60—646 6 Claims
1. In an improved power plant of the type having a steam
generator providing steam to a steam turbine, said steam tur-
bine exhausting into a condenser for condensing exhaust steam
into feedwater for the steam generator; means for pumping
feedwater from the condenser to the steam generator, said
steam generator connected to said steam turbine and condenser
through a main steam header and a bypass line respectively;
and, wherein the improvement comprises:
a recirculation loop for recirculating a portion of said feed-
water into the condenser;
means for heating said feedwater upstream from said con-
denser whereby said feedwater is slightly above saturation
temperature; and,
nozzle means for delivering said heated feedwater into said
condenser whereby flashing is effected for deaeration
purposes.
4,391,102
FRESH WATER PRODUCTION FROM POWER PLANT
WASTE HEAT
Walter R. Studhalter, Woodland Hills; William E. Amend, Roll-
ing Hills Estates, and Norman L. Helgeson, Pasadena, all of
Calif., assignors to Biphase Energy Systems, Santa Monica,
I I tiled Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,339
Int. C1.J FOIK 25/04; F03G 7/00
U.S. a. 60—649 18 Oaims
1. In reaction turbine and pump apparatus, the combination
comprising
(a) first nozzle means to receive heated fluid for expansion
therein to form a two-phase discharge of gas and liquid,
(b) a separator rotor having an axis and a rotating surface
located in the path of said discharge for supporting a layer
of separated liquid on said surface,
(c) the rotor having reaction nozzle means to communicate
with said layer to receive liquid therefrom for discharge in
a direction or directions developing torque acting to ro-
tate the rotor,
(d) and a pump associated with and driven by said rotor, the
pump including an annular rim surface to receive impinge-
ment of liquid to be pumped, the liquid collecting as a
rotating ring on said rim surface.
4,391,103
FLUIDIC CRYOGENIC REFRIGERATOR
Domenico S. Sarcia, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to CVI Incorpo-
rated, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,865
Int. C\? F25B 9/00
U.S. a. 62—6 10 Qaims
108',
1. In a cryogenic refrigerator in which a movable displacer
means defined within an enclosure first and second chambers
of variable volume, and in which a refrigerant fluid is circu-
lated in a fluid flow path between said first chamber and said
second chamber by the movement of said displacer means
controlled in part through the introduction of high-pressure
fluid and the discharge of low-pressure fluid, chamber means
for guiding a slide connected to the displacer means, said slide
having an axial passage communicating with one end of said
chamber means remote from the displacer means, a piston
coupled to said slide for controlling movement of the displacer
means, valve means for metering flow between opposite sides
of said piston, the cross-section of said slide being smaller on
one side of the piston than on the other side, said passage in said
slide having a restriction, a valve having a spool valve member
for controlling flow the high and low pressure fluid, means
48
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
including a conduit communicating one end of said S]X)ol valve
member with said one end of said chamber means for introduc-
ing high fluid pressure into the conduit to shift the spool valve
member when the displacer means is at one of the extremities
of its movement.
431,104
CASCADE HEAT PUMP FOR HEATING WATER AND
FOR COOLING OR HEATING A COMFORT ZONE
James C. Wendschlag, Onalaska, Wis., assignor to The Trane
Company, La Crosse, Wis.
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,540
Int. CIJ F25B 27/02. 7/00
U.S. a. 62—79 15 Oaims
4,391,105
YARN FEED UNIT IN A SINGLE-CYLINDER ORCULAR
KNTTTING MACHINE
Francesco Lonati, Brescia, Italy, assignor to Costnizioni Mec-
caniche Lonati S.p.A., Brescia, Italy
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,472
Claims priority, application Italy, Apr. 1, 1980, 21362/80[U]
Int. a.3 D04B 15/58
U.S. a. 66—138 5 Claims
1. A heat pump system selectively operable in cascade fash-
ion for heating water and in non-cascade fashion, for heating or
cooling air, comprising
a. a first compressor selectively operative to compress a first
refrigerant fiuid, and including a first suction port and a
first discharge port;
b. a refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger connected in fluid
communication with the first discharge port and operative
to transfer heat from the first refrigerant fluid compressed
in the first compressor, to water, thereby condensing the
first refrigerant fluid and heating the water;
c. first expansion means, in fluid communication with the
refrigerant-to-water heat exchanger, for expanding and
reducing the pressure of the condensed first refrigerant
fluid;
^ d. a tri-fluid heat exchanger including non-communicating
first and second circuits and air passages arranged to
provide heat transfer between the first refrigerant fluid, a
second refrigerant fluid, and air, respectively; an inlet to
said first circuit being connected in fluid communication
to the first expansion means, and an outlet from said first
circuit being connected in fluid communication with the
first suction port for return of the first refrigerant fluid
vapxjrized in said tri-fluid heat exchanger to the first com-
pressor;
e. a second compressor selectively operative to compress the
second refrigerant fluid, including a second suction port,
and a second discharge port connected in fluid communi-
cation with an inlet to said second circuit in the tri-fluid
heat exchanger;
f second expansion means connected to an outlet from said
second circuit, for expanding and reducing the pressure of
the second refrigerant fluid condense^n the tri-fluid heat
exchanger; and
g. an evaporator heat exchanger, connected in fluid commu-
nication between said second expansion means, and said
second suction port, operative to provide heat transfer
with a source of heat to vaporize the second refrigerant
fluid prior to its return to the second compressor, said
system being used in a first mode to heat the water and
cool the air when only the first compressor is selectively
energized, or in a second mode to heat the water when
both the first and second compressors are selectively
energized, in cascade relationship, or, in a third mode, to
heat the air when only the second compressor is ener-
gized.
£4
-e6 d3di
as
27
^■
1. An improved yarn feed unit in a single-cylinder circular
knitting machine, in particular a hose or the like knitting ma-
chine, comprising a plurality of yam feeding fingers arranged
side-by-side and independently joumalled about a common
axis, said yarn feeding fingers being movable independently of
one another between inoperative and operative positions, an
arm joumalled to said common axis and having a small plate
secured thereto and extending underneath all of said yam
feeding fingers, means for raising said arm and along there-
with, through the intermediary of said small plate, all of said
yarn feeding fingers at once to a rest position substantially
coincident with said inoperative position, a carrier body sup-
porting said axis, means for substantially radially displacing
said carrier body between a position close to said needle cylin-
der and a position remote from said needle cylinder, said means
for raising said arm being operative upon said carrier body
being displaced to said position remote from said needle cylin-
der.
4,391,106
WOUND DRESSING
Ewald Schafer, Wolfstein, and Harald Jung, Kreimbach, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Karl Otto Braun K.G.,
Wolfstein, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 880,150, Feb. 22, 1978, abandoned.
This application Apr. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 141,812
Int. C\? D04B 23/08
U.S. a. 66—193 9 Qaims
1. A warp knitted fabric for use as a surgical bandage and
dressing comprising four yams arranged in a plurality of wales
and causes including a first yam comprising a basic stitch
construction (LI) and second, third, and fourth yams bound in
as in-laid threads (L2, L3, L4), said fourth yam consisting of a
thick, roughened binding yam of high volume bound in warp-
wise, said second and third yams consisting of cross filling long
looped, highly twisted yams of sinuous configuration having a
twist of one of the Z-twisting direction and S-twisting direc-
tion, one of said second and third yams being bound in be-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
49
tween two adjacent wales and the other of said second and the drum shell, and a surface corresponding to a half helicoid
third yarns being bound in between three adjacent wales. of the conveying screw, said half helicoid surface being
4,391,107
SPIRAL GYRATOR FOR WASHING MACHINES
George M. Gibson, 322 Brookvale Rd., Kinnelon, N.J. 07405
I Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,936
I Int. a.3D06F7 7/;0
U.S. CI. 68—133 2 Qaims
{LN'DiHECTIONAL ATA fATE
\WTHIN THE \OR\{Al eAI\l6E
\fcr riRYi'VQ 8Y spm.vim
1. A washing machine comprising:
a tub having a bottom and a substantially vertical wall for
enclosing a space to contain wash,
a gyrator having a base and a driving post, said base subtend-
ing a substantial portion of said bottom, said base having
an outer circumferential portion and an inner upper por-
tion shaped substantially as a frustum of a cone, the base of
the cone being parallel with said bottom and said outer
portion extending outwardly therefrom, said driving post
extending coaxially upwardly from the truncated end of
said inner portion of said base,
a driving surface comprising a spiral ridge having one end
positioned substantially circumferentially on the upper
surface of said outer circumferential portion and extend-
ing from said one end gradually inwardly and upwardly in
one circumferential direction on the surface of said inner
portion of said base to said truncated end thereof and
continuing in said one circumferential direction like an
expanded helical screw thread upwardly about said driv-
ing post to an upper intermediate region of said post
where said ridge gradually reverses in circumferential
direction to form at least one helical turn of opposite
direction near the upper end of said driving post, the ends
of said driving surface having gradual and smooth con-
tours, and
unidirectional driving means connected to said driving post
to rotate said gyrator about said axis thereof.
4,391,108
DRUM FOR A CONTINUOUSLY OPERATING LAUNDRY
PROCESSING MACHINE
Richard R. Albers, Warren, N.J., assignor to Passat-Maschinen-
bau GmbH, Heilbronn, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,659
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 7,
1979 2944857
Int. a.3 D06F 21/02. 37/08
U.S. a. 68—143 8 Qaims
1. A dmm for a continuously operating textile processing
machine, comprising a drum shell, defining an interior space
having a central longitudinal axis and a horizontal middle
plane, a conveying screw composed of right helicoids which
divide the interior space of the drum shell into individual
Chambers, the drum being constructed from individual ele-
ments joined to each other by weld seams, each element com-
prising an upper portion and a lower poriion which are welded
together in the horizontal middle plane of the drum interior
space, each of said upper and lower portions consisting of a
surface which follows the shape of a helix and forms a pari of
welded to the said surface forming a part of the drum shell of
the said portion.
4,391,109
APPLIANCE DESIGNED FOR THE TREATMENT,
PARTICULARLY IN A LIQUID, OF A PRODUCT LIKE
LEATHER AND PROCEDURE FOR APPLYING THIS
APPLIANCE
Yves Grenier, Le Verdin, France, assignor to R.I.A.T., Chara-
vines, France
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,478
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 18, 1980, 80 03516
Int. a.' C14C 1/00: D06F 21/00
U.S. CI. 69—30 17 Qaims
1. An appliance designed for the liquid treatment of a prod-
uct like leather, comprising a tank which can be filled at least
partly with the treatment liquid and which is provided with an
opening made in its peripheral wall, a rotary drum placed
inside the tank, said drum being mounted on a roughly hori-
zontal shaft which runs from end to end of the said tank and
which can be driven in rotation, said drum having a peripheral
envelope and compartments separated by axial partitions ex-
tending roughly radially from its shaft to said peripheral enve-
lope, the product being loaded into each of the compartments
in order to be treated by rotation of the drum and discharged
through the said tank opening, each compartment having an
opening and a lockable door in said peripheral envelope, said
appliance being characterized by the fact that said tank is
mounted to swing round the drum shaft, a fixing means for
temporarily fixing together in rotation the drum and the tank
when the opening of one of the compartments is placed oppo-
site the tank Of>ening with the object of loading and discharg-
ing the product in this compartment, a drive means for swing-
ing the tank between a first position in which its opening is
placed roughly in its top f>osition and a second position in
which its opening is placed on the side, the product being
treated by rotation of the drum when the opening of the said
tank is in the said first position, loading of the product being
50
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
|)erformed through the top when the opening of the tank is in
the said first position and the opening of the compartment to be
loaded is opposite the tank opening, and discharge of the prod-
uct being carried out on thf side after the tank and the drum
fixed together by the fixing means have been swung round by
means of the said drive means to move the tank opening from
the first position to said second position .
4,391,110
BARREL LOCK SLEEVE
Anker J. Nielsen, Jr., Holden, Mass., assignor to Omco Inc.,
Holden, Mass.
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,189
Int. a.3 E05B 17/14. 67/36
U.S. a. 70—34 7 Oaims
24 ^28
1. A barrel lock sleeve adapted to be pushed into and resil-
iently snap-mounted in a meter box door aperture, said sleeve
adapted to be fixed in the door aperture by a barrel lock in-
serted and locked within said sleeve, said sleeve comprising:
(a) a hollow cylindrical sleeve having open leading and
trailing ends;
(b) said sleeve having four axially sequential portions includ-
ing a tip portion and a locking ball retaining poriion both
adapted to be inserted through the door aperture and
positioned on the inside of the door, a neck portion
adapted to be positioned within the door aperture, and a
shoulder portion adapted to be positioned on the outside
of the door;
(c) said tip portion being located at the extreme leading end
of said sleeve and having an uncompressed outside diame-
ter smaller than the door aperture diameter;
(d) said locking ball retaining portion being located to the
rear of said tip portion and having at least a portion of its
uncompressed outside diameter larger than the door aper-
ture diameter, said locking ball retaining portion including
means for permitting said larger outside diameter portion
of said locking ball retaining portion to be resiliently and
sufficiently reduced in diameter as said larger portion is
pushed through the door aperture, and for permitting said
larger outside diameter portion of said locking ball retain-
ing portion to snap back to its original uncompressed
outside diameter after said larger portion has passed to the
inside of the meter box door;
(e) said neck portion being located to the rear of said locking
ball retaining portion, and having an outside diameter
smaller than the door af)erture diameter;
(0 said shoulder portion being located to the rear of said
neck portion and having at least a portion of its outside
diameter larger than the door aperture diameter and hav-
I ing an inside diameter larger than the barrel lock head
diameter; and
(g) said sleeve having an interior length, shape and inside
diameter selected to permit the insertion of an unlocked
barrel lock entirely therein, and to accommodate the
radial extension of the barrel lock locking balls within said
j locking ball retaining portion when said barrel lock is
locked, said sleeve being sized and shaped to remain fixed
in the meter -box door aperture when the barrel lock is
locked, and to be removed from the door aperture when
the barrel lock is unlocked.
4,391,111
LATCHING MECHANISM FOR DISPENSER
APPARATUS
Russell A. Marcy, Watertown, Conn., assignor to Waterbury
Companies, Inc., Waterbury, Conn.
FUed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,137
Int. a.3 B65D 55/14: E05B 15/06
UJS. a. 70—162 10 Claims
1. Dispenser apparatus for repeated use in dispensing a con- '
sumable through an outlet opening, said dispenser apparatus
including a casing having a body member both for supporting
a container for said consumable and enclosing said container
within a space, and a closure member mounted on said body
member to close said space preventing access to said consum-
able; means mounting said closure member for movement
between an open position to permit replenishment of said
consumable and a closed position; latching means for latching
said closure member in said closed position to prevent substan-
tially unauthorized access to said space, said latching means
including a stationary latching element carried by one of said
body member and container, a movable latching element car-
ried by said closure member, said movable latching element
including a base, a hub extending from said base, a rim likewise
extending from said base and spaced outwardly of said hub to
define a recess therebetween, at least one projection within
said recess at said base, an ear extending from said base, means
for mounting said movable latching element to said closure
member, means for biasing said movable latching element to a
first position, means carried by said mounting means for sup-
porting one end of said biasing means whose other end is
supported by said ear, and a nose extending from said base to
cooperatively interact with said stationary latching element for
latching said closure member when said movable latching
element is in said first position; said mounting means also sup-
porting said movable latching element for movement from said
first position; and a key having an operative portion to be
received in said recess, said operative portion having a slot
equal in number and spaced apart in accordance with the
spacing of each said projection, each said projection being
received in a slot to engage said key and movable latching
element whereby movement of said movable latching element
in opposition to said biasing means in following movement of
said key results in movement of said movable latching element
from said first position toward a second position for release of
said cooperative interaction between latching elements.
4,391,112
PISTON-TYPE LOCKS
Guy Neyret, OuUins, France, assignor to Sodex-Magister, So-
ciete d'Exploitation, Croissy, France
Filed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,283
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 23, 1979, 79 18918
Int. a.3 E05B 9/04. 27/04
U.S. a. 70—364 A 7 Claims
1. A piston-type lock comprising:
(a) a stator,
(b) a cylindrical rotor pivoting in a longitudinal bore of the
stator, said rotor comprising a longitudinal key passage
and a plurality of radial bores opening into the key passage
and to the periphery of the rotor, said stator comprising a
plurality of bores oi>ening into the longitudinal bore of the
July 5, 198J
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
51
stator and each continuing, in one angular position of the
rotor, a radial bore of the rotor,
(c) a sliding piston within each radial bore of the rotor,
(d) a sliding piston within each radial bore of the stator
spring-loaded towards the longitudinal bore of the stator,
the pistons of the rotor each cooperating with a piston of
the stator in the said angular position, the inner extremities
of the pistons of the rotor cooperating with the notches of
a coded key introduced into the key passage in such man-
ner that the other extremities of the said rotor pistons are
flush with the periphery of the rotor, said stator compris-
ing an aperture opening at its periphery and into the said
longitudinal bore,
(e) an insert within said aperture having radial passages, and
(0 a pair of pistons and a return spring located within each
radial passage, said insert being in two parts sliding tele-
scopically one in relation to the other to reduce the effec-
tive length of said radial passages,
(g) said insert comprising retractable stops for the inner
radial extremity of each of the said pairs of pistons, the
retraction of the said stops causing the liberation of the
said pairs of pistons and the introduction of the lower
pistons into the radial bores of the rotor.
1. A key ring device adapted to be attached at one end to a
piece of clothing and to hold a ring of keys at the other com-
prising a tubular outer shell, a slot disposed within said outer
portion, a U-shaped inner body, a spring disposed within said
U-shaped inner body, a button fixedly attached to said U-
shaped inner body which button passes through the slot in the
outer shell, said inner body comprising a U-shaped key ring
holder portion, means to attach the key ring device to a piece
of clothing.
4,391,114
SHEAR FORMING APPARATUS FOR ELONGATED
NON-ROTATING METAL TUBES
Anthony C. Keathley, Xenia, Ohio; Howard F. Stanton, Lock-
port, and Mahesh M. Wagle, Amherst, both of N.Y., assignors
to Tubing Technology, Inc., Alpha, Ohio
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,708
Int. a.3 B21B 19/12
U.S. a. 72-78 28 Qaims
V Jl ]l
Hlf
4,391,113
ONE-HAND KEY RING
Douglas M. Jorgens, 1527 Sitka Ave., Sun Valley, Calif. 93063
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,507
' Int. a.^ A47G 29/70 ,
U.S. a. 70—459 5 Oaims
36 20
1. Shear forming apparatus for reducing the diameter of an
elongated cylindrical workpiece, comprising a tubular spindle
supporting an annular forming head for rotation on an axis, a
plurality of angularly disposed forming wheels supported by
said head for orbital movement around the axis, an actuating
tube disposed within said spindle for rotation therewith and
supported for axial movement within said spindle, actuating
means within said head and connected to said actuating tube,
said actuating means being effective to move said forming
wheels in corresponding generally radial directions in response
to axial movement of said actuating tube within said spindle,
means for pulling the workpiece axially through said spindle
and said head and between said forming wheels, a fiuid cylin-
der having a non-rotating piston, means including a non-rotat-
ing connecting tube and a thrust bearing for connecting said
piston to said actuating tube for moving said actuating tube
axially while said spindle and head are rotating to effect radial
inward deformation of the workpiece by said forming wheels,
and means for precisely adjusting a limit of movement of said
connecting tube to control the limit of generally radial inward
movement of said forming wheels.
4,391,115
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BENDING METAL
BEAMS
William Slattery, Annbank Station; Thomas Brechany, Ayr, and
Colin J. MacLeod, Glasgow, all of Scotland, assignors to
Caledonian Mining Company Limited, Nottinghamshire, En-
gland
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,594
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 4, 1979,
7941886
Int. a.3 B21D 7/04, 43/28
U.S. a. 72—131 21 Oaims
1. A machine for forming a curved beam, said machine
comprising
a former having a convex arcuate edge bounded by opposed
ends,
a first clamp positioned to cooperate with one of said ends of
said arcuate edge, said first clamp being adapted to hold
one end of a beam in fixed position relative to said arcuate
edge prior to and during the bending of that beam about
said arcuate edge,
a roller positioned adjacent to said arcuate edge but spaced
therefrom a distance not significantly greater than the
width of said beam, said roller being moveable relative to
said former for bending said beam about said arcuate edge
between a beam entry position at which said beam is
initially clamped to said arcuate edge between said roller
52
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
and said arcuate edge, and a curved beam position at
which said beam is bent about said arcuate edge,
motor means for moving said former relative to said roller
for translating said beam between said entry and curved
positions, and
a second clamp positioned to cooperate with the opposite
-M
1^'
m
Qe.
end of said arcuate edge, said second clamp being adapted
to hold the other end of said beam in fixed position adja-
cent said opposite end of said arcuate edge after said beam
has been bent about said arcuate edge, said second clamp
being operatively connectable with the other end of said
beam only after said beam has been bent about said arcuate
edge.
I 4,391,116
LACE BENDING APPARATUS
Teruaki Yogo, Kabushikikaisha Cbuodenkiseisakusho 4423
aza-Johnoh, Ohaza-Ohmori, Moriyama-ku, Nagoya-shi,
Japan
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,184
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 3, 1979, 54-157225;
Sep. 1, 1980, 55-120944
Int. a.3 B21B 15/00. 39/00
U.S. a. 72—168 5 Qaims
element for moving said movable element in said perpen-
dicular directions,
g. a means connected to said material feed device for detect-
ing the amount of feed of said material by said material
feed device, and
h. a control device responsive to information from said
feed-amount detecting means for controlling said driving
means, including an input portion adapted to receive the
feed amount information from said detecting means, a
memory portion for storing in advance the relationship
between the feed amount of said material and the moving
amount of said movable element, and a command portion
adapted to designate driving amounts of said driving
means based on said relationship stored in said memory
portion, in accordance with said information from said
input portion, wherein said movable element includes a
first slide provided movable in the horizontal direction
perpendicular to the direction of supply of said material
from said first guide roller element and a second slide
provided movable in a vertical direction, said driving
means includes a first-slide driving element connected to
' said first slide for moving said first slide in said horizontal
direction and a second-slide driving element connected to
said second slide for moving said second slide in a vertical
direction, and said memory portion of said control device
includes a first memory means storing in advance the
relationship between the amount of feed of said material
and the moving amount of said first slide and a second
memory means storing in advance the relationship be-
tween the amount of feed of said material and the moving
amount of said second slide and wherein said command
portion of said control device includes a first command
means responsive to information from said input portion
for designating a moving amount to said first-slide driving
element based on the relationship stored in advance into
said first memory means and a second command means
responsive to information from said input portion for
designating a moving amount to said second-slide driving
element based on the relationship stored in advance into
said second memory means.
4,391,117
ROLLING MILLS AND METHODS OF ROLLING
Werner Demny, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Friedrich Kocks GmbH & Company, Ilden, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 42,812, May 29, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,325
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2,
1978, 2824143
Int. C1.3 B21B 13/22. 1/46
U.S. CI. 72—224 13 Qaims
1. A lace bending apparatus comprising:
a. a material feed device for supplying a material in the
lengthwise direction thereof,
b. a first guide roller element provided fixedly on the side to
receive said material supplied from said material feed
device and adapted to locate said material,
c. a support mechanism including a plurality of frames pro-
vided fixedly on the side to receive said material supplied
from said first guide roller element and a movable element
mounted to move in directions perpendicular to the direc-
tion of supply of said material from said first guide roller
element,
d. a second guide roller element provided in said movable
element and adapted to bend said material,
e. means to maintain said second guide roller element sub-
stantially at right angles to the direction of feed of said
material,
f. a plurality of driving means connected to said movable
1. A rolling mill for rolling of bars and wire from stock
having a rectangular, oval or similar elongate cross-sectional
shape, the ratio of the lengths of the principal axes of the cross
section of said stock being larger than approximately 1 :2, com-
prising a plurality of roll stands arranged closely one behind
the other to define a line of sizing passes, said roll stands having
(a) a first entry sizing pass stand formed by two rolls whose roll
axis is substantially transverse to the principal axis of the stock
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
53
being rolled and receiving the stock to be rolled, (b) the cross-
sectional shape of the said first sizing pass being one of an exact
circle, a regular polygon having an even number of sides and a
like but somewhat elongated geometrical figure, (c) the ratio of
the lengths of whose principal axes does not exceed approxi-
mately 1:2, and (d) at least one three roll stand immediately
following said two roll stand receiving the rolled stock from
said first stand, the first stand of said three roll stands adjacent
the two roll stand having one roll axis extending parallel to the
longer principal axis of the first sizing pass cross section, in the
case wherein the latter is somewhat elongated, all roll stands
following the first stand being three roll stands.
9. A method of rolling bars and wire from stock having a
rectangular, oval or similar elongate cross-sectional shape, the
ratio of the lengths of the principal axes of the cross section of
said stock being larger than about 1 :2, comprising the steps of:
(a) passing said stock between two rolls forming a first roll
pass opening having a cross-sectional shape in one of an
exact circle, a regular polygon having an even number of
sides and a like elongate geometric figure having principal
cross-sectional axes whose ratio is less than 1 :2, and whose
roll axes are substantially transverse to the principal axis
of the stock being rolled; and
(b) thereafter passing the sized product successively through
at least one additional roll pass formed by three rolls, said
roll pass immediately following the two roll pass having
one roll axis extending parallel to the longer principal axis
of said first roll pass section in the case where said section
is elongate, and all passes thereafter being three roll
passes.
4,391,118
MECHANISM FOR FORMING A HOLE THROUGH A
FORGED WORKPIECE
Wayne A. Martin, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to United States
Steel Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 45,529, Jun. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 4,299,110,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 892,715, Apr. 3, 1978,
i abandoned. This application May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,071
Int. a? B21D 28/00
U.S. Q. 72—356 4 Qaims
4,391,119 ~
APPARATUS FOR CUTTING SWIVEL-BENDING AND
PRESS-BENDING SHEET METAL AND SIMILAR
MATERIALS
Peter Schmitz, Pietra Rossa-Renon, Prov. Bozen, Italy
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,415
Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 20, 1980, 4810 A/80
Int. a.^ B21D 5/01
U.S. G. 72—384 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for cutting, swivel-bending and press-bending
of sheet material, comprising: a frame for receiving said sheet
material; a cross-beam having a first press-bending element; an
integral clamping beam having a second press-bending ele-
ment; means providing a bearing surface, said frame supporting
said cross-beam and said clamping beam for movement relative
to one another to effect engagement of said first and second
press-bending elements with said sheet materials for press-
bending thereof, said frame further supporting said clamping
beam and such bearing surface means for movement relative to
one another to clamp said sheet material for cutting and swiv-
el-bending thereof, and a shearing beam supported by said
frame for movement independently of movement of said
clamping beam.
4,391,120
RADIAL DEFORMATION MEANS FOR CYLINDRICAL
OBJECTS SUCH AS WHEELS
David Trevarrow, 119 Reiniche, Horton, Mich. 49246
Filed Mar. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 19,683
Int. Q.3 B21D 53/26
U.S. Q. 72—403 20 Qaims
1. In a forging press which includes cooperating sets of top
and bottom dies for shaping a workpiece heated to a hot forg-
ing temperature, the combination therewith of an improved
mechanism for forming a hole through the workpiece, said
mechanism comprising:
a male die member in said set of top dies engageable with the
upper surface of the workpiece for forming an indentation
therein; and
a tubular trepanning tool having at least one sloping face
extending around its circumference at its lower end;
said male die member having tapered circumferential edges
matching the sloping face of said tool and being of a
diameter substantially equal to the tool diameter, whereby
the indentation formed in the workpiece receives the
sloping face of said tool and serves to center it;
said set of top dies being adapted to apply force to said tool
to hot-trepan a hole in the workpiece at the indentation
before the workpiece is removed from the press following
the forging operation.
1032 O.G.r— 3
It-
1. Truing apparatus for wheels having a rim with opposing
bead seats and a web, said apparatus comprising: radially in-
wardly moving concentric dies movable in a predetermined
plane, a rigid support surface parallel to said predetermined
plane, a plurality of rollers having the same diameter on said
rigid support surface, an annular surface plate on said rollers
free to move parallel to said rigid support surface, and a resil-
ient surface on said annular surface plate, said resilient surface
being arranged to support the rim of a wheel being worked
open by said radially inwardly moving dies and being adapted
to accommodate lateral deflection produced by said dies.
54
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,121 4,391,122
ORBITAL TOOL ASSEMBLY FOR FORMING RIVET COMBINED HYDRAULIC CLAMPING AND ROTATING
HEADS SADDLE DEVICE ON FORGING PRESSES
V. Taruntaev, Davison, Mich., assignor to T. A. Systems, Inc., Fritz Priebe, Duisburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to SMS
Troy, Micb. Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep.
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,380 of Germany
Int. C\J B21J 7/20 Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,681
U.S. CI. 72^406 27 Claims Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11,
1980, 3026295
Int. a.3 B21J 13/02
U.S. a. 72—481 4 Qaims
J'
1. An orbital tool assembly for forming rivet heads compris-
ing a housing adapted for an attachment to a driven member
rotatable upon a first axis;
said housing having a bore extending along a second axis
inclined at an acute angle to said first axis;
an elongated equalizing head having a longitudinal axis
coincident with said second axis nested and retained
within said housing;
bearing means interposed between said head and housing for
journalling said housing for rotation about said first axis
relative to said head;
said head having an axial bore defining a fluid pressure
chamber open at one end;
a cylindrical driver coaxial with and mounted upon said
head projecting from said housing and having a plurality
of longitudinal bores parallel to said second axis and com-
municating with said pressure chamber;
a longitudinally reciprocal peening tool holder having an
elongated bore movably mounted in each of said driver
bores;
each holder having a piston movable in said driver head bore
and normally biased outward by pressurized fluid filling
said head and driver bores on one side of said piston;
an elongated peening tool mounted within each peening tool
holder, at its outer end having a transverse rivet working
surface, adapted for registry and operative engagement
with an unheaded rivet projecting through a pair of parts
upon a support to be secured together;
an elongated anti-rotation arm extending at right angles to
said driver and at one end mounted upon and secured
thereto;
and a bracket means upon a support retainingly engaging
said arm at its opposite end against rotation, said arm
being free for rocking movements in a plane passing
through said axes;
continuous rotation of said housing oscillating said head and
peening tools in said plane over the ends of said rivets
forming heads thereon.
1. In a forging press having a movable crosshead and an
upper pf&ss saddle carried by said crosshead; the improvement
comprising the combination of:
(a) a plurality of vertical hammer-headed saddle-retaining
rods mounted for rotation and longitudinal movement on
the movable crosshead, for releasably clamping said upper
saddle to said movable crosshead;
(b) a centrally disposed vertical hammer-headed saddle-
rotating rod mounted for rotation on the movable cross-
head with the hammer head of said rod at the lower end
thereof projecting downwardy from said crosshead;
(c) a receptacle provided on said upper saddle for receiving
said hammer head of said saddle-rotating rod, which re-
ceptacle has a slot-like through aperture for vertical pas-
sage therethrough of said hammer head and a down-
wardly open slot-like seat transverse to said through aper-
ture for receiving said hammer head and effecting rota-
tional driving engagement of said hammer head with said
upper saddle, a recess of a size corresponding to the length
and height of the hammer head being provided directly
below said seat and aperture whereby said hammer head is
transferrable from said aperture to said seat and vice versa
by rotation within said recess;
(d) means for effecting rotation of said saddle-rotating rod
and for effecting relative movement of said rod and said
upper saddle in the longitudinal direction of said rod; and
(e) means for effecting said rotation and longitudinal move-
ment of said saddle-retaining rods.
4,391J23
AUTOMATIC PUNCHING MACHINE
Guido Salvagnini, Arzignano, Italy, assignor to Salvagnini
Transferica S.p.A., Italy
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,565
Qaims priority, application Italy, Sep. 12, 1979, 25676 A/79
Int. a.3 B26F 1/04
U.S. O. 72—464 6 Oaims
1. An automatic punching machine for p>erfonning punching
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SS
of a metal sheet in a programmed and programmable manner,
comprising, in combination, a punching head provided with a
plurality of independently operable punch and die pairs ar-
ranged at respective operative positions of the punching head,
a numerically controlled programmable manipulator equipped
with gripping means for gripping the metal sheet and with first
and second driving means for displacing said gripping means in
first and second horizontal directions perpendicular to one
another, and a rotator for rotating the metal sheet through
desired angles about a vertical axis, said manipulator including
a first horizontal arm movable in the first direction and a sec-
ond horizontal arm mounted on said first arm and movable in
' ' 4,391,124
ELECTROACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER CALIBRATION
METHOD AND APPARATUS
Comelis J. Drost, and G. Jan Milanowski, both of Ithaca, N.Y.,
assignors to Cornell Research Foundation, Inc., Ithaca, N.Y.
I Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,319
Int. a.3 H04B 11/00; H04R 29/00
U.S. CI. 73—1 DV 33 Qaims
TRMS
Mil
5ICML
measuring the ideal source value of said driving signal
source;
measuring said transducer output signal, said driving signal
and said output signal being fed through substantially
identical impedance values; and
deriving from the measures of said driving signal and said
output signal a measure of transducer performance in
absolute terms under conditions of actual termination.
4,391,125
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TESTING AND/OR
ADJUSTING VIBRATION ABSORBER FOR SUSPENDED
CABLES
Olaf Nigol, Etobicoke, and Herbert J. Houston, Oakville, both
of Canada, assignors to Slater Steel Industries Limited, Ham-
ilton, Canada
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,163
Int. Q.5 GOIM 79/00
U.S. Q. 73—11 12 Qaims
said second horizontal direction, said second arm being
equipped with the said means for gripping the metal sheet, and
motor means for rectilinear alternating displacements of the
said arms independently from one another, a disappearing
plane is provided for receiving and supporting the metal sheet
to be punched, said plane being defined by a plurality of rods
extending parallel to said second arm of the manipulator and
eccentrically mounted on pivot pins so as to be normally held
in raised position, said manipulator further including a rectilin-
ear shaft fixed to and extending parallel to said first arm in such
a position as to engage progressively said rods and to displace
the same to a lowered position during the advancing move-
ment of said first arm of the manipulator.
ACOUSTIC TEST WTH
1. A self-reciprocity calibration method for terminated ultra-
sonic transducers, comprising:
supplying a driving signal from a driving source to a trans-
ducer in a transmit mode to cause said transducer to emit
a burst of ultrasonic waves;
switching said transducer to a receive mode to receive an
echo of its emitted wave, said transducer responding to
said echo wave to produce a transducer output signal;
1. A method for testing and/or adjusting a vibration ab-
sorber to be used to absorb vibration from a suspended cable,
comprising the steps of:
determining the desired damping of said absorber, the de-
sired oscillation frequency at which the test is to be con-
ducted, and the tension and mass per unit length of the
cable from which vibration is to be absorbed;
selecting a logarithmic decrement value to be utilized for
test purposes;
providing a pendulum to be used as a mechanical analog of
the susp>ended cable-vibration absorber system;
adjusting the weight and radius of gyration of said pendulum
to cause said pendulum to oscillate at said frequency and
with said logarithmic decrement when said damping fac-
tor has said desired value;
coupling said vibration absorber to said pendulum to damp
the oscillation thereof;
setting said adjusted pendulum into oscillation; and
displaying information responsive to the sensed amplitude
and indicative of the logarithmic decrement of said oscil-
lation.
6. Apparatus for testing and/or adjusting a vibration ab-
sorber to be used to absorb vibration from a suspended cable,
comprising:
a pendulum;
means for adjusting the weight and radius of gyration of said
pendulum;
means for coupling said vibration absorber to said pendulum
so as to damp any oscillation of said pendulum;
means for sensing the amplitude of oscillation of said pendu-
lum; and
display means coupled to said sensing means for displaying
information indicative of the logarithmic decrement of
said oscillation.
56
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
, 431,126
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETECTING ENGINE
KNOCK IN AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Anton van Zanten, Ditzingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,892
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2,
1980, 3020853
Int. a.3 GOIL 2i/22
U.S. a. 73—35 8 Qaims
-f-
'Xln
■ 1 !30 ^'I
-H
KI}&EM}S©^^©&L
Id^ SS>{fr
i; 14 '6 : » ?b 22 k \ id 2t
-4-
U— 'J
1. Method for detection of knocking in an internal combus-
tion engine comprising the steps of:
detecting the wave shape of mechanical vibrations by a
sensor responsive to engine vibrations both in a first fre-
quency range within which engine knock vibrations com-
monly occur and in a second frequency range in which
few, if any, components of engine vibrations commonly
occur;
separating the outputs of said sensor in said first and second
frequency ranges to produce a main signal and a reference
signal;
initiating a comparison of said signals when both rise to a
peak at approximately the same time;
performing said comparison during an interval beginning
substantially when the peaks of said signals have passed, in
such a way as to provide an engine knock signal when said
main signal falls off more slowly than said reference signal
and thereby produces a comparison output exceeding a
predetermined output value. ^
4,391,127
PROXIMITY SENSOR
William E. Hawkins, Circleville, Ohio, assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 252,519
Int. a.3 GOIB 13/00
U.S. a. 73—37.7 3 Qaims
|l. A proximity sensor comprising:
a body having a plenum therein in communication with inlet
and outlet passages;
an elongated tube extending through the plenum and pro-
jecting from the outlet passage, said tube having a lesser
diameter than the outlet passage, presenting an annular
discharge orifice, and a flared end located externally of
said body and the discharge orifice; and
a pressure switch having a sensing chamber in communica-
tion with the tube.
4,391,128
BACK-DIFFUSION QUALITY CONTROL METHOD FOR
BARRIER TREATED CONTAINERS
Thomas E. McWhorter, Whitehall, Pa., assignor to Air Products
and Chemicals, Inc., AUentown, Pa.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,958
Int. C\? GOIN 15/08
U.S. a. 73—38 10 Qaims
K) 12 M 16 la 20 22 24 2€ 26 30
BACK OlFruSSIONTiMC.
MINUTES
1. A method for distinguishing between a solid material
having at least one surface treated to impart a measurable
degree of impermeability to a volatile fluid and an untreated
material which comprises the steps of:
(a) exposing the treated surface to a high concentration of
said volatile fluid for a fixed period of time,
(b) removing the excess fluid from said treated surface after
said fixed period of time,
(c) exposing said treated surface from step (b) to an environ-
ment for causing volatile fluid to back-diffuse through said
treated surface into the environment; and
(d) measuring if the concentration of said volatile fluid back-
diffusing into the environment from said treated surface
after a fixed period of time is at least one order of magni-
tude less than the concentration of such a fluid back-dif-
fusing from said untreated material.
4,391,129
SYSTEM FOR MONITORING PHYSICAL
CHARACTERISTICS OF FLUIDS
Eugene Trinh, Los Angeles, and Taylor G. Wang, Glendale,
both of Calif., assignors to the United States of America as
represented by the Administrator of the National Aeronau-
tics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,774
Int. a.3 GOIN 13/02
U.S. a. 73—64.4 14 Qaims
1. Apparatus useful in oscillating a drop of a first fluid when
surrounded by a bath fluid, comprising:
a container for holding a bath fluid and for receiving a drop
of the first fluid within the bath fluid;
transducer means coupled to said container and energizable
for generating acoustic energy and conducting it into bath
fluid lying in said container;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
57
means for energizing said transducer means; and
means for sensing oscillations of the drop of first fluid;
22 24
1« 25 23\
Mj St I !? I
4^-t
ose. I
■ eoNT
said energizing means being frequency controllable to alter
the frequency to a value which produces resonant oscilla-
tions of said drop of first fluid.
II 4,391,130
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR
COMMUNICATING THE OPERATING CONDITION OF
AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Jiro Nakano, Okazaki, and Hironobu Ono, Toyota, both of
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Toyota, Japan
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,493
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1980, 55/132269
Int. a.3 GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—117.3 14 Claims
1. A method of communicating the operating conditions of
an internal combustion engine havng a throttle valve, an infor-
mation output terminal, an exhaust gas sensor for detecting the
concentration of a predetermined component in the exhaust
gas and producing an output signal which alternates in re-
sponse to the change of the detected concentration, and a
feedback control system for producing, depending upon the
output signal from the exhaust gas sensor, a loop feedback
signal and for correcting the air-fuel ratio of the air-fuel mix-
ture supplied to the engine depending upon the produced loop
feedback signal, said method comprising the steps of:
detecting whether the throttle valve is in the idling position
and producing an idling detection signal which indicates
whether the throttle valve is in the idling position;
in response to the idling detection signal, discriminating
whether the loop feedback signal is within a predeter-
mined range and supplying an electrical signal which
indicates whether the loop feedback signal is within the
predetermined range, to said information output terminal,
only when the throttle valve is in the idling position; and
in response to the idling detection signal, supplying an elec-
trical signal which is synchronized with the output signal
from the exhaust gas sensor to said information output
terminal, when the throttle valve is not in the idling posi-
tion. —
4,391,131
TRANSMISSION TESTING APPARATUS AND METHOD
George Scourtes, Plymouth, Mich., assignor to The Allen Group
Inc., Saginaw, Mich.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,609
Int. a.3 GOIM 13/02
U.S. a. 73—118 12 Qaims
1. A method of testing a front wheel drive vehicle transmis-
sion having a rotary input and two rotary outputs, said method
comprising coupling drive means to said input; coupling driven
means to each of said outputs; coupling each of said driven
means to a single rotary member so that neither output can
rotate relatively to the other; and driving said drive means.
8. Apparatus for testing an automotive transmission having a
pair of drive outputs each of which may be driven in a selected
one of two different directions from a single drive input, said
apparatus comprising an input drive shaft for connection to the
transmission drive input; a pair of output shafts for connection
to the respective drive outputs of the transmission; a single
driven shaft; non-slip, positive drive transmitting means cou-
pling said driven shaft to each of said output shafts and pre-
cluding any rotation of either one of sai^output shafts without
corresponding rotation of the other in the same direction and
at the same speed of rotation as said one of said output shafts;
and means coupled to said driven shaft for imposing a load on
the latter.
4,391,132
GAS FLOW MEASURING APPARATUS
Tsuneyuki Egami, Aichi; Hisasi Kawai, Toyohashi; Tokio
Kohama, Nishio, and Hideki Obayashi, Okazaki, all of Japan,
assignors to Nippon Soken, Inc., Nishio, Japan
Filed Sep. 11. 1981, Ser. No. 301,448
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1980, 55-130003
Int. Q.3 GOIF 1/68: GOIM 15/00
U.S. Q. 73—118 5 Qaims
1. A gas flow measuring apparatus comprising:
an electric heater disposed in a tube in which an object gas
flows;
a first temperature dependent resistor disposed downstream
of said electric heater in said tube;
a second temperature dependent resistor disposed at a point
58
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
free from the heat effect of said electric heater in said tube,
and
a measuring circuit for measuring the flow rate of said object
gas by use of output signals of said electric heater and said
first and second temperature dependent resistors,
said measuring circuit includes a reference resistor circuit
making up a bridge together with said first and second
temperature dependent resistors,
an oscillator circuit for producing a pulse signal,
a voltage generator circuit for generating a predetermined
reference voltage,
a chopper circuit driven by said pulse signal of said oscillator
circuit for amplitude-modulating and converting a poten-
tial difference between one pair of diagonal points of said
bridge into an AC signal,
a sample-hold circuit for sampling an amplified output volt-
age of said chopper circuit only for a partial period syn-
chronous with the pulse signal of said oscillator circuit
and holding said sampling votage,
a DC differential amplifier circuit for amplifying a difference
voltage between a voltage based on the reference voltage
produced from said voltage generator circuit and the
output voltage of said sample hold circuit, and
a power amplifier circuit for power amplifying the output
voltage of said DC differential amplifier circuit and apply-
ing the resulting voltage to said electric heater and said
bridge, said potential difference between the pair of diago-
nal points of said bridge being controlled at a constant
level thereby to measure the flow rate of the object gas
from the value of the current flowing in said electric
heater.
injection device on the basis ,of the relative displace-
ment of said displacement member between said first
and second positions,
wherein said raising step is carried out before each injection of
the liquid from said injection device, and said predetermined
value is equal to or slightly higher than a pressure at which said
displacement member starts displacing before said injection
step.
4 391 134
MEASURING APPARATUS FOR RAIL HEAD RUNNING
SURFACE IRREGULARITIES
Josef Theurer, Vienna; Johann Hansmann, Klosterneuburg, and
Klaus Riessberger, Vienna, all of Austria, assignors to Franz
Plasser Bahnbaumaschinen-Industriegeselischaft m.b.H., Vi-
enna, Austria
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,832
Qaims priority, application Austria, Feb. 27, 1980, 1093/80
Int. a.3 B61K 9/00
U.S. a. 73-146 ,3 Qai^
4,391,133
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING AN
INJECTION AMOUNT FROM AN INJECTION DEVICE
FOR USE WITH AN ENGINE
Shinzo Ito, Aichi, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.,
Kariya, Japan
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,607
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 30, 1979, 54-38658
Int. C\? GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73-119 A 4 Qaims
^
-
1
iMTMETlCUWT f-
1 -^5
™_d,™_
>«ESSUC RASIOC
QCVKX
■
MccnoK CHueoi
tASUROCNT
1
h^
oeovwstp
1
h'
pmic
HOkEI)
1. In an apparatus for measuring an injection amount from an
injection device, said apparatus having,
a body formed with a bore,
a displacement member slidably disposed in said bore for
defining an injection chamber into which a liquid is in-
jected from said injection device, and
a prime mover for driving said injection device,
a measuring method for the injection amount comprising the
steps of:
(a) raising pressure of the liquid in said injection chamber
to a predetermined value;
(b) detecting a first position of said displacement member;
(c) injecting a liquid into said injection chamber from said
injection device under measurement so that said dis-
placement member is displaced in accordance with the
increased amount of the liquid within said injection
chamber;
(d) detecting a second position of said displacement mem-
ber after said member is displaced; and
(e) calculating the amount of the liquid injected from said
1. A mobile apparatus mounted on a railroad track for move-
ment in an operating direction, the track including two rails
each having a rail head defining a gage side, a field side and a
running surface, the apparatus being arranged for measuring
and indicating such running surface irregularities as undula-
tions and ripples, which comprises
(a) a frame,
(b) a measuring carriage linked to the frame,
(c) drive means for vertically adjusting the measuring car-
riage in relation to the frame and for pressing the carriage
against the running surface of the rail head of a respective
rail,
(d) guide roller means for vertically and laterally guiding the
measuring carriage along said rail head, the guide roller
means including
(1) a pair of guide rollers laterally guiding the measuring
carriage along a portion of the gage side of said rail
head \^hich is not worn and the guide rollers being
spaced from each other in the operating direction, and
(2) a plurality of additional guide rollers selectively en-
gageable with the running surface of said rail head for
vertically guiding the measuring carriage along the
running surface of said rail head upon engagement
therewith, the additional guide rollers each having an
axis extending substantially parallel and transversely to
the railroad track, the additional guide rollers including
a pair of inner guide rollers, a pair of outer guide rollers
and a pair of intermediately arranged guide rollers
spaced from each other in the operating direction, the
pair of outer guide rollers defining a rigid measuring
reference in the wave length range of longer undula-
tions and being spaced from each other a distance of
about two meters, and a respective one of the pairs of
the inner or intermediate guide rollers selectively en-
gaged with the running surface defining a rigid measur-
ing reference in the shorter wave length range of ripples
and being spaced from each other a selected distance
corresponding to at least about one sixth to one eighth
of the distance between the outer guide rollers, and
(e) a rail head running surface sensing element vertically
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S9
adjustably mounted on the measuring carriage substan-
tially centered between the pairs of guide rollers.
4,391,135
AUTOMATIC LIQUID LEVEL MONITOR
John K. Godbey, Dallas, and Billy G. Ballard, Garland, both
of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 140,410, .4pr. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,318,298, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 822,507, Aug. 8,
1977, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
749,940, Dec. 13, 1976, abandoned, which is a continuation of
Ser. No. 563,249, Mar. 28, 1975, abandoned. This application
\^ \\ Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,641
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 9,
1999, has been disclaimed.
I ■ Int. a.3 GOIS 9/66
tf-S. a. 73—155 4 Claims
COHPUItlCII
;iiouio
-lOCPTM
COUNTCK
'nil- '"
_ ll WHZ
STW '^-SB Pxses
OSCILLITDK
CLOCK
IMt «0J 'Si
sec
TIllE/OtPTH
-1>IW«T/DISH.«»1- -
J COMT«Ou.E» I
0IG1TA1.
IHOOUT
'lllt/OCrTM
r--3"0'»'>|
FAINC TINC '
-nvroDi or
CLtPSED
TIMf
ACCUMULITOW
2 J
tUTO
oieiTM.
rue / MPTH
Y
r
kit
[acoustic tdmsoxciJ
1. An apparatus for determining the location of the liquid
surface in a well drilled through the substrata of the earth
comprising:
a source of acoustic pulses coupled to said well;
a transducer coupled to said well producing an electric
! signal in response to the occurrence of acoustic pulses in
said well;
a clock pulse source;
digital counting means;
gating means responsive to the output of said transducer for
starting the counting of clock pulses by said digital count-
ing means upon the occurrence of an acoustic pulse in said
well and for stopping said counting upon detection of the
acoustic pulse reflected from the liquid surface in said
well, said reflected pulses including a component reflected
from the liquid surface having a frequency content about
5 Hz;
a digital readout device responsive to said digital counting
means for indicating the depth of said liquid surface; and
means for gating out acoustic pulses for adjustable periods of
time during and after the generation of each initiating
acoustic pulse.
fingers projecting upstream from said sensor assembly,
said fingers being mounted on said sensor assembly, and
said acoustic transducers defining three intersecting
acoustic paths which form a skewed coordinate system.
4,391,137
GROUNDWATER FLOW METER
William B. Kerfoot, Falmouth, and Stuart M. Skinner, Jr.,
Marion, both of Mass., assignors to K-V Associates, Inc.,
Falmouth, Mass.
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,787
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28,
1980, 3024417
Int. CI.' GOIF 1/68
U.S. a. 73—204 20 Claims
O iO
4,391,136
THREE-AXIS CURRENT METER
Henry T. k*erkins, Slidell, La.; Kim D. Saunders, Picayune,
Miss., aad Albert W. Green, Slidell, La., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Navy, Washington, D.C.
, , Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,857
I ' 1 1 Int. a.5 GOIP 5/18, 13/02
U.S. a. 73—189 4 Qaims
1. A three-axis current meter comprising:
a sensor assembly; and
a plurality of acoustic transducers mounted on the tips of
,4> J. tj,
.1 ■
1. The method of measuring a flow characteristic of a fluid,
which comprises the steps of:
(a) providing a heat conductive porous medium;
(b) heating a localized region of said heat conductive porous
medium through which fluid is flowing, the heat conduc-
tivity of the porous medium being substantially greater
than the heat conductivity of the fluid; and
(c) measuring the temperature of the medium at at least two
regions spaced from said localized region and determining
a flow characteristic of the fluid therefrom.
4,391,138
COLLECTING VESSEL
Anton Harle, Schelmenstiege 8, D-4400 Munster, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,990
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 21,
1980, 3023348
Int. CI.3 GOIF 3/38
U.S. a. 73—223 5 Claims
1. A flexible collecting vessel having a main pouch part and
60
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a measuring pouch part, said measuring part, being tapered and
having a narrow end and a wide end, said wide end of said
measuring part in fluid communication with said main part;
a graduated measurment scale positioned along said tapered
part, said graduations starting at said narrow end of said
measuring part;
an inflow tube having a free end, said tube passing through
said narrow end of said measuring part and extending in a
direction toward- said main part for a distance and having
a generally semicircular, U-shaped bend subtantially at
said free end of said tube; and
suspension means affixed to said main part between said
measuring part and said main part, said suspension means
for suspending said vessel in a folded-over fashion so that
said narrow end of said measuring part hangs down-
wardly from said affixment of said suspension means.
4,391,139
PLASTIC WATER METER MAIN CASE
Ray Sutherland, Hopewood, and Mark S. Wood, Lemont Fur-
nace, both of Pa., assignors to Rockwell International Corpo-
ration, Pittsburgh, Pa.
j Filed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,827
I Int. aj GOIF 15/14
U.S. a. 73—273 4 Qaims
1. A water meter comprised of a main case enclosing an inlet
chamber and a generally circular measuring chamber compart-
ment, inlet and outlet passages in said main case communicat-
ing respectively with said inlet chamber and said compartment,
a continuous compartment seating surface circumscribing said
compartment including a first portion which is circular and
concentric with the axis of said compartment and a second
portion at a radial distance, from said axis greater than the
radius of said first portion, said portions of said seating surface
being co-planar, a generally circular measuring chamber hav-
ing a continuous downwardly facing seating surface circum-
scribing said measuring chamber and seated on said compart-
ment seating surface and comprised of a first measuring cham-
ber seating surface portion which is circular and coextensive
and co-axial with said first portion of said compartment seating
surface, and a second measuring chamber seating surface por-
tion which projects beyond the radius of said first measuring
chamber seating surface portion and is seated on the second
portion of said compartment seating surface.
4,391,140
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR METERING
PARTICULATE MATERIAL
Max Reinhard, and Horst Kommayer, both of Bad Homburg,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Colortronic Reinhard &
Co. KG, Friedrichsdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,081
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 25,
1980, 3038260
Int. a.3 GOIM 79/00
U.S. Q. 73—432 R 10 Qaims
,21
r"
■^' u
-R
17^
1/
i'\'
in
&K^
12 W
n
^^'^yd
1
ir"
t
1. Apparatus for metering particulate material into a mixing
vessel, comprising a vessel for containing a body of the partic-
ulate material, the vessel having a bottom plate, a metering disc
disposed directly above the bottom plate in the containing
vessel, the disc being mounted for rotation in a given direction
and having apertures for separating respective portions from
the body of material, the containing vessel having first and
second apertures positioned so that each disc aperture comes
successively into alignment with them, the first, upstream
aperture being intended for connection to a sampling receiver,
the second, downstream aperture being intended for connec-
tion to a mixing vessel, and covering means in the containing
vessel arranged to cover the disc in the region above the first
and second apertures in order to prevent the body of material
from escaping through the aligned apertures.
4,391,141
APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE PROPERTIES
OF A MATERIAL HAVING PLASTIC PROPERTIES BY
DETERMINING ITS DENSITY
Olfert H. Petersen, Lejre, Denmark, assignor to Slagteriernes
Forskningsinstitut, Roskilde, Denmark
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,305
Claims priority, application Denmark, Oct. 8, 1979, 4211/79
Int. C1.3 GOIN 9/02, 7/00
U.S. a. 73—433 4 Claims
1. An apparatus for determining the properties of a material
having plastic properties by determining its density on the basis
of a measurement of weight and volume, which comprises:
a chamber for receiving said material;
a displacement member for contacting the material to
thereby apply pressure to the material, which member is
slidably movable through a wall of the chamber and has a
cross sectional area perpendicular to the direction of
movement smaller than the cross sectional area of the
chamber in the cross section;
drive means connected to said member for applying a prede-
termined force on said displacement member towards the
interior of the chamber, said drive means comprising
means for applying a predetermined weight to said dis-
placement member; and
July 5, 19M
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
measuring means for measuring the penetration depth of the
displacement member into the chamber to thereby deter-
mine the volume of the material, the measured volume and
weight bping used to determine density of the product.
4,391,142
FREQUENCY TRACKED GATED PULSE TECHNIQUE
FOR ULTRASONIC FREQUENCY
John H. Cantrell, Jr., Newport News, and Joseph S. Heyman,
Gloucester, both of Va., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Administrator of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 158,183
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00; GOIH 9/24 I
U.S. a. 73—610 3 Qaims
IfflCKING
gSnerator L
4^:
1 TR4MSMITTER
a
SWEEPINS
LOCAL
OSCILLATOR
3
SPtCTRUM
ANALYZER
CRO
_|.-_
"TRANSDUCER];
DELAY 1-
SAMPLE 1
26
27
t
RECEIVER
SATE
i
MEDIUM 3
,24
L0GIC/TIMIN6
GENERATOR
TRIGGER
1. A device for obtaining an ultrasonic frequency analysis
comprising:
a spectrum analyzer having a tuning frequency;
a tracking generator means connected to said spectrum
analyzer for producing an RF source locked to the tuning
frequency of said spectrum analyzer;
a transducer means suitable for attachment to the sample to
be frequency analyzed;
a transmitter on-off gate connected between said tracking
generator means and said transducer means;
a receiver on-off gate connected between said transducer
means and said spectrum analyzer; and
circuit means connected to said transmitter gate and said
receiver gate for gating pulses of the RF signal from the
tracking generator to the transducer means through the
transmitter gate and for gating selected durations not
coinciding with the durations of said pulses the resulting
61
echo signals from the transducer means to the spectrum
analyzer through the receiver gate.
4,391,143
ULTRASONIC PROBE FOR INSPECTING
DOUBLE-WALL TUBE
Kenneth V. Cook, Clinton; Robert A. Cunningham, Jr., Powell,
and Horace T. Murrin, Alcoa, all of Tenn., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,424
Int. Q.' A61B 5/04: GOIN 29/00: GOIM 7/00
U.S. Q. 73-623 2 Qaims
1. An ultrasonic probe assembly for inspecting a double-wall
structure, comprising:
a body member having first and second cavities extending
inwardly from its periphery and spaced apart from each
other axially of one side thereof, the portion of said body
member disposed between said first and second cavities
constituting a baffle wall blocking direct transmission of
ultrasonic energy therebetween;
a first transducer mounted within said body member and
operative to (1) transmit ultrasonic energy into said first
cavity and (2) sense ultrasonic energy;
a first reflector mounted within said first cavity and aligned
with said first transducer so as to receive ultrasonic en-
ergy therefrom and reflect it to said double-wall structure
at a predetermined angle, said first reflector also receiving
ultrasonic energy reflected back from said double-wall
structure and reflecting it to said first transducer;
a second transducer mounted within said body member and
operative to sense ultrasonic energy, said second trans-
ducer being spaced from said second cavity on the side
thereof remote from said first cavity;
an aperture in said body member extending from said second
cavity to said second transducer;
a tubular collimator insert mounted within said aperture; and
a second reflector mounted within said second cavity and
arranged to receive ultrasonic energy reflected from the
end of said collimator insert adjacent thereto and reflect it
through said collimator insert to said second transducer.
4,391,144
ULTRASONIC TEST PROBE
Rolf Diederichs, Hiirth-Hermiilheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Krautkramer-Branson, Inc., Stratford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,303
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 12,
1979, 2948552
Int. Q.^ GOIN 29/04
U.S. Q. 73—629 2 Qaims
1. An ultrasonic test probe comprising a housing in which is
disposed:
(a) a piezoelectric transducer element adapted to transmit an
ultrasonic seach pulse into a workpiece and to receive
ultrasonic echo signals from such workpiece;
(b) an electrical circuit coupled to said transducer element
62
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
Julys, 1983
for periodically energizing said transducer element with a
high voltage pulse, said circuit including;
(i) an electrical inductor coupled with one of its two
terminals for receiving a trigger pulse;
(ii) an electrical switching means coupled serially between
the other terminal of said inductor and ground poten-
tial;
(iii) control means coupled to said switching means and
controlled by said trigger pulse for periodically render-
ing said switching means briefly non-conductive when
said switching means is in its conductive state;
(iv) a capacitor coupled with one of its two terminals to
4,391,146
PARALLEL T IMPEDANCE MEASUREMENT CTRCUIT
FOR USE WITH VARIABLE IMPEDANCE SENSOR
Earl A. Grindheim, Richfield, Minn., assignor to Rosemount
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,415
Int. a.3 GOIL 9/12
U.S. a. 73—718 34 Qaims
TRIGGER
y coMP
coWCnsatiqn I n
0SC1LL»T0« --
R ; ^ '^"'^ i OSCILLATOR
LO I <■» LO
TRANSMIT PULSE GENERATOR
the junction between said inductor and said switching
means, and
(v) a resistor coupled with one of its two terminals to
ground potential and with its other terminal to the other
terminal of said capacitor,
whereby responsive to the provision of a trigger pulse said
control means renders said switching means non-conductive to
cause a high voltage signal to form across said inductor which
charges said capacitor with a potential, and responsive to said
control means subsequently rendering said switching means
conductive said capacitor discharges its potential to provide a
high voltage pulse across said resistor which pulse is applied to
said transducer element to energize said element.
4,391,145
FLUID-PRESSURE RESPONSIVE APPARATUS
Sylvain Janssen, Neuilly, and Jean Sequies, Rueil Malmaison,
both of France, assignors to Giers, Montrouge, France
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,620
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 3, 1980,
8011351
Int. a.3 GOIL 11/00
U.S. a. 73—704 12 Qaims
I '-;
LS^SS^^^
34. A circuit for providing an output signal having a fre-
quency which is representative of a sensed parameter, the
circuit comprising:
sensing means for sensing the parameter, the sensing means
exhibiting a variable impedance which is a function of the
parameter;
controllable impedance means for providing a controllable
impedance which is a function of a direct current control
signal;
frequency determining means, connected to the sensing
means and the controllable impedance means to form a
parallel T circuit, for receiving the output signal and
providing an oscillatory frequency signal which has a
frequency which is a function of the variable impedance
and the controllable impedance;
signal amplification means for amplifying the oscillatory
frequency signal to produce the output signal; and
detection means for providing the direct current control
signal to the controllable impedance means as a function
of amplitude of the output signal.
4,391,147
TRANSDUCER DEVICE FOR MEASURING
MECHANICAL VALUES ON HOLLOW BODIES
Peter W. Krempl, Vienna; Peter Oaassen, and Rudolf Zeiringer,
both of Graz, all of Austria, assignors to Hans List, Graz,
Austria
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,456
Claims priority, application Austria, Mar. 19, 1980, 1501/80
Int. a.i GOIL 7/02: HOIL 41/18
U.S. a. 73—730 17 Qaims
1. Fluid-pressure responsive apparatus comprising:
elongate means at least a portion of which is hollow and
curved, and a resilient member interconnecting two points
on said elongate means which are separated by said hol-
low, curved portion, whereby application of fluid pres-
sure within said portion causes a change in tension in said
resilient member; and
means arranged to induce oscillation of said resilient member
and to generate a signal related to the frequency of said
oscillation; and wherein
at least the entirety of said hollow, curved portion of said
elongate means is of unitary construction and said elon-
gate means is placed under a predetermined amount of
tension by said resilient member, whereby temperature
sensitivity of said apparatus is reduced.
f— J
1. A transducer device for measuring mechanical values on
hollow bodies, especially for measuring pressure distributions
within a pipe by detecting deformations in the outer surface
thereof, comprising a housing for detachably enclosing the
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
63
pipe whose outer surface deformation is to be measured, and at
least one elastic sensor element being mounted in said housing,
said sensor element being capable to at least indirectly contact
the surface of said enclosed pipe and having electrical connec-
tions for taking off the measuring signals, said sensor element
further being connected to at least two points of said housing
and having a free length between said connecting points so as
to be stretched over the surface of the pipe when the trans-
ducer device is attached, and wherein at least one part of said
sensor element is made in one piece with said housing.
4,391,148
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE
CROSS-SECnONAL AREA OF A DUCT AND THE
VOLUME FLOW RATE OF FLUID IN THE DUCT
Antonio J. Sainz, and Victor C. Roberts, both of London, En-
gland, assignors to National Research Development Corpora-
tion, London, England
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,952
QaimS^priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 29, 1980,
8007008; Jun. 11, 1980, 8019049
Int. Q.3 A61B 5/10; GOIF 1/66
U.S. Q. 73— 861 J5 9 Qaims
-'//>' I '■ /r/AV otrtcroK \
M^ ' r- '
-,, i voiufic
1. Apparatus for measuring the cross-sectional area of a duct
containing a fluid, comprising
means for deriving a plurality of velocity signals, each hav-
ing a frequency which corresponds to a respective veloc-
ity of fluid in a duct, the number of velocity signals de-
pending on the number of different velocities currently
present in the duct,
a frequency-to-voltage converter coupled to receive the
velocity signals, and
means responsive to the varying output of the said converter
to provide a signal representative of duct cross-sectional
area.
4,391,149
DOPPLER-TYPE ULTRASONIC FLOWMETER
Peter J. Herzl, Morrisville, Pa., assignor to Fischer & Porter
Company, Warminster, Pa.
I Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,473
I ' Int. Q.3 GOIF 1/66
U.S. Q. 73—861.25 7 Qaims
-jyt
1>
1
T
fn.rwi
OSC-
fr-fR
1. A Doppler-type ultrasonic flowmeter for measuring the
mean flow velocity of a fluid stream carrying contaminants
passing through a pipe, said stream having a changing velocity
profile, said flowmeter comprising:
A. a transmitting transducer mounted on the pipe to project
in the upstream direction therein a diverging beam of
ultrasonic energy;
B. a stable oscillator coupled to the transmitting transducer
to excite same at a predetermined ultrasonic frequency;
C. a receiving transducer mounted on the pipe to pick up
ultrasonic energy reflected by moving contaminants in the
fluid which lie within the zone in which the projected
beam intersects a converging reception beam leading
downstream to the receiving transducer to produce a
Doppler signal;
D. means responsive to the transmitted frequency and the
Doppler signal to produce a band of negative beat fre-
quencies which are determined by the disparate flow
velocities of the reflecting contaminants dictated by the
prevailing velocity profile; and
E. means responsive to the band of negative beat frequencies
to determine the prevailing velocity profile and to derive
therefrom the mean flow velocity, said means including
spectral analyzer which sweeps through a frequency
range that includes said band, the analyzer functioning to
measure the amplitude output of each frequency in the
band to provide a spectral analysis.
4,391,150
ELECTRO-ACOUSTIC FLOWMETER
Thomas J. Rey, 319 Nashua Rd., Bedford, Mass. 01730
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,667
Int. Q.^ GOIF 1/66
U,S. Q. 73—861.29 7 Qaims
,i9
/
'',
^fi,
1 ,
— 1 i -;,.'.«
r
Con£rs//er
1. A flowmeter for measuring the velocity of fluid flow in a
conduit comprising a pair of transducers mounted in spaced
apart relationship in the direction of fiuid flow on the exterior
of the conduit, each of the transducers being tuned to its reso-
nant frequency near that of the other, excitation means for
causing both of the transducers to emit sonic energy intermit-
tently and at the same time through the wall of the conduit and
into the fiuid, amplifier means for processing upstream and
downstream travelling signals received by the transducers
including a differential amplifier to which both transducers are
connected, whereby signals carried through the isotropic me-
dium of the wall of the conduit simultaneously between the
transducers produce zero differential signals at the input of the
differential amplifier, counting means controlled by the down-
stream signal and the upstream signal and means for converting
the counts into fluid velocity.
I 4,391,151
QRCULAR TWO-STAGE AIR PARTICULATE AND GAS
SAMPLER
John W. Nelson, and Bruno Jensen, both of Tallahassee, Fla.,
assignors to PIXE International Corporation, Tallahassee,
Fla.
FUed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,833
Int. a.3 BOID 50/00; COIN 1/22
U.S.tl. 73—863.23 6 Qaims
2. A sampling device for the particulate matter of air and
gaseous fluids comprising:
(a) a chamber (19) having an inlet (40) and an outlet (31);
64
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
(b) a vacuum pump (30) for sucking said fluid through said
inlet into said chamber and through said outlet;
(c) a collector member (41) with an associated orifice mem-
ber (44, 45) at said inlet and adapted to retain from said
fluid the coarser particulates of a predetermined size and
larger, and to transmit therefrom the finer particulates into
said chamber, one of said members being disposed within
said chamber and rotatable relative to the other member;
(d) a second collector member (34) with an associated sec-
ond orifice member (32, 39) disposed within said chamber
and adapted to retain from said finer particulates transmit-
ted to said chamber those particulates of a predetermined
4,391,152
SAMPLER
James R. Ellett, Edmonton, Canada, assignor to Bralorne Re-
sources Limited, Vancouver, Canada
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 257,856
Claims priority, application Canada, Dec. 16, 1980, 366918
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/14
U.S. a. 73—863.84 29 Qaims
tance and exit of said fluid, respectively, and a substantially
uninterrupted passageway for said fluid extending through said
housing and probe, said passageway being adapted to allow for
the admission of cleaning means to clean said passageway
without disassembly of said probe and housing.
4,391,153
SEGMENTED HBER SAMPLER
Robert A. Taylor, Anderson, S.C., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the United States Department of
Agriculture, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,044
Int. C1.3 GOIN 3/10
U.S. a. 73—864.41 2 Qaims
size and larger, and to transmit therefrom the remaining
finer particulates to said outlet, said second collector
member (34) being rotatable relative to said second orifice
member (32, 39) and about an axis (46) common to the axis
of rotation of said first rotatable member (44, 45), and
(e) means (20, 63) for effecting rotary movement of said first
rotatable member to chronologically form a circular arcu-
ate deposit (41a) of said coarser particulates on said first
collector member and, concurrently, for effecting rotary
movement of said second collector member (34) to chro-
nologically form a circular arcuate deposit (34<7) of said
remaining finer particulates retained by said second col-
lector member.
1. An apparatus for sampling staple fibers comprising in
combination:
(a) a rigid lower jaw;
(b) an upper jaw juxtaposed to said lower rigid jaw, one end
of said upper jaw fabricated into a plurality of segments,
said segments capable of deflecting in different amounts to
accommodate local differences in fiber density and/or
imbedded trash/foreign particles;
(c) means for pivoting said upper jaw in relation to said rigid
lower jaw;
(d) a spring assembly located between said upper and lower
jaws, said spring assembly also located on the opposite
end from the segmented end of said upper jaw to provide
clamping pressure during and after the taking of a sample.
4,391,154
VARIABLE SPEED DIGGING MACHINE PROVIDED
WITH A GEARBOX HAVING AN ORIENTABLE DRIVE
Michele Tortella, Zona Industrial, Madonna delle Grazie-
Ortona (Chieti), Italy
Filed May 6, 1980, Ser. No. 147,219
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 11, 1979, 49033 A/79
Int. a.3 F16H 37/00. 3/22. 57/02
U.S. a. 74—15.4 12 Qaims
1. A sampling device for taking fluid samples, said device
comprising a probe adapted to extend into fluid and to act as an
intake port, a housing connected to said probe, first valve
means in said housing adapted to allow admittance of a portion
of said fluid, second valve means adapted to allow exit of said
admitted fluid to a storage container, sample holding means 1 In a digging machine including a longitudinal frame sup-
adapted to hold a predetermined amount of said admitted fluid, porting at least one hoe-driving shaft driven by a main drive
actuating means adapted to open and close said first and second shaft for coupling to the power takeoff of a tractor operating
valve means at predetermined intervals to allow for said admit- the digging machine, the improvement comprising:
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
65
(a) an elongate gearbox carried by the machine;
(b) means for supporting the elongate gearbox for movable
orientation in a vertical plane about the longitudinal axis
of the machine;
(c) the gearbox supporting the main drive shaft of the ma-
chine and interposed between the main drive shaft and the
hoe-driving shaft;
(d) a first gear shaft connected to and driven by the main
drive shaft;
(e) a second gear shaft for driving the hoe-driving shaft;
(0 the first and second gear shafts being journaled through
the gearbox;
(g) a first gear set including three gears mounted on the first
gear shaft;
(h) a second gear set including three gears mounted on the
second gear shaft; and
(i) each gear of the second gear set being engageable with
and selectively driven by a corresponding gear of the first
gear set, with the diameters of the corresponding gears
being such that the second gear shaft may be driven by the
first gear shaft at any one of three different speeds depend-
ing upon which corresponding gears of the first and sec-
ond gear shafts are in selected driving engagement with
each other for transmitting the motion of the first gear
shaft to the second gear shaft.
means being arranged to move the limit switch to the third
position when the counterweight is in its lowermost position
4,391,155
RECIPROCATING DRIVE AND REVERSING
MECHANISM FOR LONG STROKE, WELL PUMPING
UNIT
Emil A. Bender, 6625 Kane Way, Bakersfield, Calif. 93309
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,100
Int. C\? F16H 27/02, 29/02; F04B 47/06
U.S. a. 74—89.2 5 Claims
1. A long stroke, well pumping unit comprising: a base
platform; a tower on the base platform; drive train means
including rotatable, winding drum means on the base platform
and power means to rotate the drum means; a flexible lift belt
attached at one end to the drum means and at its other end to
the polish rod of a pump; a freely rotatable spool mounted atop
the tower, the belt being trained over the spool; a counter-
weight attached to that portion of the lift belt between the
spool and the rotatable drum; and means for reversing the
power means, thus to cyclically wind and unwind the belt from
the winding drum and thus impart reciprocating movement to
the polish rod of a pump, said reversing means including:
rotary motion transmission means responsive to rotation in the
drive train means; control means responsive to said transmis--
sion means; and a three position limit switch operable from said
control means, the switch being arranged to cause the power
means to rotate the winding drum clockwise in a first position
and counterclockwise in a second position, the third position of
the switch being an off position and providing a dwell or rest
period between reversals of said power means, the control
1 .
T
66 ,^70
and to maintain the limit switch in one of the first or second
positions at all other times.
4,391,156
ELECTRIC MOTOR DRIVE WITH INHNITELY
VARIABLE SPEED TRANSMISSION
Edward C. Tibbals, Jr., Greensboro, N.C., assignor to William
R. Loeffler, Denver, Colo.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 207,190
Int. CI.' F16H 5/44
U.S. a. 74— 336.5 18 Oaims
/ J W J Jy^' [ r* J/.
"1
m:.
1. A variable speed drive for motor vehicles and the like
66
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
V-
characterized by having an output shaft with high torque
requirements at low speeds of operation, the combination
comprising:
an electric motor drive;
infmitely variable speed transmission means having an input
driven by said motor drive and an output coupled to a
vehicle to be driven, said infmitely variable speed trans-
mission means including a movable control member shift-
able to vary the speed ratio between the input and output
' of said transmission means over a predetermined range of
speed ratios;
speed ratio control means operatively coupled to said mov-
able cbntrol member, said control means movable in re-
sponse to rotation of said motor drive to vary the ratio of
the output speed and torque at the output side of said
transmission with respect to the input speed and torque;
and
resistance compensator means for imposing a predetermined
resistance to movement of said control means whereby to
control the speed ratio between the input side and the
output side of said infinitely variable speed transmission,
the maximum output speed of said transmission means
being matched to the most efficient operating speed of said
electric motor drive.
4^1,158
BIASED TRANSMISSION CONTROL SHAFT
Theodore A. Malott, and Robert W. Wolfe, both of Jackson,
Mich., assignors to Clark Equipment Company, Buchanan,
Mich.
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 230,781
Int. a.3 G05G 9/12, 5/10
U.S. a. 74—473 R 5 Qaims
4,391,157 .
BEVEL GEAR AND PINION DRIVE WITH BIASED
THRUST BEARING
Roger L. Jacklin, Waterloo, Iowa, assignor to Deere & Com-
pany, Moline, III.
I Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser, No. 198,076
I Int. Ci.^ F16H 35/08, 1/14
U.S. a. 74—402 3 Qaims
1. Drive mechanism including a fore-and-aft shaft having a
spiral bevel pinion fixed at its rear end, a spiral bevel gear
meshing with the pinion, a combination radial-thrust bearing
including an inner race ring fitting the shaft so as to receive
forward thrust forces imparted thereto by the meshing pinion
and gear, an outer race ring and rolling elements between the
rings, and fixed support structure carrying the bearing, charac-
terized in that the support structure has a stepped annular
groove therein concentrically surrounding the shaft ahead of
the bearing and including a first radial shoulder facing toward
and axially abutting the outer race ring and a second radical
shoulder of lesser diameter than the first shoulder and spaced
ahead of and facing the inner race ring and biasing means is
disposed in the groove and is interposed between the second
shoulder and the inner race ring in opposition to the aforesaid
thrust forces.
1. A transmission having a plurality of speed ratios compris-
ing:
a housing;
a shift lever pivotally connected with the housing, the shift
lever having a lower end extending through the housing;
a control shaft contained in the housing and operably associ-
ated with the shift lever, the control shaft being shiftable
in opposed directions in response to pivotal movement of
the shift lever, the control shaft having two ends, one of
the ends having an internal bore;
a bias assembly operably associated with the control shaft
for resisting the shifting of the control shaft in a selected
direction past a predetermined point, the bias assembly
being mounted in the internal bore and projecting there-
from, whereby a first amount of resistance is provided to
enable the operator to sense his position in the transmis-
sion shift pattern.
4,391,159 —
PARKING BRAKE ACTUATING DEVICE
Daniel J. Sellmeyer, Royal Oak, Mich., assignor to Gulf &
Western Manufacturing Company, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,270
Int. a.3 G05G 1/04
U.S. a. 74—516 23 Qaims
1. In a parking brake operating mechanism for a vehicle,
which mechanism includes a support structure; a pedal actu-
ated lever; means for mounting said lever on said structure to
pivot about a fixed axis; a movable force transmitting means for
applying an actuating force to a brake actuating element upon
movement of said force transmitting means along a preselected
path between a brake release position and a brake actuating
position; coupling means for connecting said force transmitting
means to said pedal actuated lever to move said force transmit-
ting means along said preselected path as said pedal actuated
lever is pivoted about said fixed axis; and, means for releasably
locking said force transmitting means in said brake actuating
position on said path, the improvement comprising: said cou-
pling means comprises a drag link having first and second
spaced ends; means for pivotally connecting said first end to
said pedal actuated lever on a second axis spaced from said
fixed axis whereby said first end of said drag link is moved with
said second axis in an arcuate path generally concentric with
said fixed axis; means for connecting said force transmitting
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
67
means onto said second end of said drag link; and, cam means
for pivoting said drag link about said second axis on said pedal
actuated lever as said first end of said drag link is moved in said
arcuate path by pivotal movement of said pedal actuated lever.
4,391,160
SUPPORT ASSEMBLY HAVING RELEASABLE LEVER
MOUNTING FOR HANDLE BAR
John E. Myers, Star Rte., Echo, Oreg. 97826
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,316
Int. a.3 B62K 21/12
U.S. a. 74—551.8 3 Qaims
1. A support assembly for securing a mechanical device on a
bar comprising
an annular sleeve for encompassing and fixable to such bar,
a tubular base portion encompassing said sleeve,
a post laterally projecting from and integral with said base
portion adapted for attaching to such device,
releasable means releasably locking said base portion to said
sleeve, said base portion being movable relative to said
sleeve with release of said releasable means, and
a tubular bushing positioned between said sleeve and said
base portion for facilitating movement of said base portion
relative to said sleeve with release of said locking means.
4,391,161
CONNECTING ROD OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Keisuke Ban, Fujimi, and Takeo Arai, Higashimatsuyama, both
of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,227
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aue. 29, 1979, 54-109854
Int. a.3 G05G 1/00
U.S. a. 74—579 E 3 Claims
1. A connecting rod of an internal combustion engine includ-
ing a rod portion having longitudinal stiffening rib portions, a
longitudinal axis and two ends, a big end portion connected to
one end of said rod portion and being adapted to be connected
to a crankshaft of the engine, and a small end portion con-
nected to the other end of said rod portion having a hole bored
therethrough for receiving a piston pin having an axis; said rod
portion having a Y-axis perpendicular to said longitudinal axis
and parallel to said axis of said piston pin and an X-axis perp>en-
dicular to both said Y-axis and said longitudinal axis; said rod
portion comprising at least one reinforced portion and a re-
maining portion; said remaining portion being made of a light
alloy material, said at least one reinforced portion being made
of a bundle of inorganic fibers extending along said longitudi-
nal axis formed into a metal matrix impregnated with said light
alloy material; said fibers having a cross-sectional area; said rod
portion having a cross-sectional area, a cross-sectional shape, a
Y-axis second moment of inertia, and an X-axis second moment
of inertia; said at least one reinforced portion having a cross-
sectional area and a Y-axis second moment of inertia; said
cross-sectional shape of said rod portion taken perpendicular
to said longitudinal axis being such that said Y-axis second
moment of inertia of said rod portion is smaller than said X-axis
second moment of inertia of said rod portion; and said rein-
forced portion being positioned and sized in said rod portion
such that said Y-axis second moment of inertia of said rein-
forced portion is equal to or greater than said X-axis second
moment of inertia of said reinforced portion.
4,391,162
FLUID ASSISTED BOOSTER
John P. Burke, Leamington Spa, England, assignor to Automo-
tive Products Limited, Leamington Spa, England
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,579
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 5, 1979, 79
30723
Int. C\? G05G 1/00
U.S. a. 74—579 R 4 Qaims
1. A fluid assisted brake booster having:
an output rod with a piston head thereon having a load
bearing face with an axial bore therein;
an annular load transfer means located adjacent the load
bearing face;
an input rod located on the other side of the transfer means
relative to the output rod and having a thrust member
with an axial projection that extends through the centre of
the transfer means into said axial bore; and a cap fitted to
the load bearing face to provide anchorage means for the
68
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
thrust member to the piston head, said anchorage means gear for rotation and for axial displacement in a fixed radial
allowing the thrust member a forward stroke towards the position in said housing.
t^^.
4,391,164
OVERDRIVE FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Stig H. A. Weiertz, Kungalv, and Grzegorz K. Janiszewski,
Angered, both of Sweden, assignors to AB Volvo, Gothenburg,
Sweden
Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 204,082
Claims priority, application Sweden, Nov. 22, 1979, 7909663
Int. C1.3 F16H 57/10
U.S. a. 74—781 R 7 Qaims
output rod to apply a load to the load transfer means but
limiting the relative displacement of the thrust member on
the return stroke.
1. A planetary gear assembly comprising a housing (9), an
input shaft (1) rotatably mounted in said housing, an output
shaft (23) mounted for rotation adjacent said input shaft, a pair
of outer central internal gears (6a,6Z') fixed to said housing, an
inner central gear (10) having two axially spaced opposite
helical gear portions (10a,10^), first and second substantially
parallel rotatable planetary gears (5<2,56) having opp>ositely
helically geared portions disposed between said outer central
internal gears and said inner central gear and in meshing en-
gagement with said outer central internal gears and said axially
spaced opposite helical gear portions of said inner central gear,
first and second carriers (3<7,36) for supporting said first and
second planetary gears for rotation respectively, and for re-
volving movement around said inner central gear, a first gear
coupling (2) connecting said first carrier (3a) to said input shaft
for co-rotation and relative axial motion for transmitting all
rotational power from said input shaft to said first carrier, a
second gear coupling (4) connecting said first and second
carriers (3a,36) for co-rotation and relative axial motion so that
a portion of the rotational power from said first carrier is
transmitted to said second carrier over said second gear cou-
pling and a remainder of the power is transmitted directly to
said central gear over one of said opposite helical gear por-
tions, and bearing means (11,12) mounting said inner central
4,391,163
PLANETARY GEAR ASSEMBLY
Heinz Benthake, Kassel; Curt Kronert, Miilheim, and Josef
Kunnen, Meerbusch, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Thyssen Industrie AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,607
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 14,
1980, 3005463
Int. a.J F16H i/44, 1/28
\iS. a. 74—768 3 Qaims
O
H
na 'J'
;»
-*■■'—) ' i.1 IS i^ ,
-.^:fi^-=^=Fi=^-_ .._»4^:
Ji
J
1. In an overdrive for motor vehicles, comprising a housing
for the overdrive, a planet carrier which is joined to an input
shaft, a ring gear with internal teeth, which ring gear engages
planet pinions carried on the planet carrier and is joined to an
output shaft, a sun pinion engaging the planet pinions, a one-
way brake coupled between the housing of the overdrive and
the sun pinion, said one-way brake being arranged to lock the
sun pinion to the housing when driving torque is transmitted
from the input shaft to the output shaft, and a clutch which is
disposed, when engaged, to establish non-rotatable connection
between the sun pinion and the ring gear, and means to suspend
the braking function of the one-way brake before the clutch is
engaged; the improvement comprising brake means that brake
the sun pinion after disengagement of the clutch and prior to
the establishment of the braking function of the one-way brake.
4,391,165
KICK-DOWN SHIFTING MECHANISM FOR
AUTOMATIC CHANGE-SPEED TRANSMISSIONS
Hermann Gaus, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 169,521
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 21,
1979, 2929729
Int. Q\} B60K 41/10
U.S. a. 74—869 8 Qaims
1. A kick-down circuit for an automatic change-speed trans-
mission, the circuit including a kick-down control means for
transmitting a kick-down control signal when an accelerator
pedal of a vehicle in which the transmission is installed is
displaced to a predetermined position, at least one gearshift
valve means including a valve body for controlling an operat-
ing pressure of a shift-actuating means which participates in a
shifting between a higher gear and a lower gear, means for
setting a control pressure acting upon the valve body is depen-
dence upon a driving speed of the vehicle for shifting from a
lower gear to a higher gear, and means for setting a control
pressure acting upon the valve body in dependence upon a
positioning of the accelerator pedal for shifting from a higher
gear to a lower gear, characterized in that means are provided
for elevating the control pressure dependent upon the position
of the accelerator upon the occurrence of a kick-down signal,
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
69
and in that means are operatively connected with the control
pressure elevating means for limiting a duration of the elevated
control pressure acting upon the valve body independently of
the position of the accelerator pedal.
/( 4,391,166
HYDRAULIC FLUID PRESSURE CONTROL SYSTEM
TOR AN AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Seitoku Kubo, Toyota; Koujiro Kuramochi, Okazaki, and Yukio
Terakura, Toyota, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,510
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 10, 1979, 54-116563
Int. a.3 F16H 47/08; B60K 41/10
U.S. a. 74—869 6 Claims
Mi 1 ^Mt* 6
1. In an automatic transmission, for a vehicle comprising a
throttle, comprising: a fluid torque converter having input and
output members, a lock-up clutch formed with a hydraulic
pressure chamber which directly connects said input and out-
put members when hydraulic fluid pressure is supplied to the
hydraulic pressure chamber; and a gear transmission mecha-
nism comprising a plurality of hydraulic fluid actuated friction
engaging devices for providing a plurality of speed stages;
a hydraulic fluid pressure control system which provides
selective supply of hydraulic fluid pressures for actuating
the plurality of friction engaging devices, comprising:
(a) a throttle hydraulic fluid pressure control valve for
producing a throttle hydraulic fluid pressure according
to the amount of actuation of the throttle;
(b) a governor hydraulic fluid pressure coatrol valve for
producing a governor hydraulic fluid pressure accord-
ing to the speed of the vehicle;
(c) means for manually selecting any of a plurality of
desired shift ranges;
(d) a plurality of shift valves for selectively providing
actuating hydraulic fluid pressures for the plurality of
friction engaging devices, according to the shift range
selected by the manual selecting means, and according
to the values of the throttle hydraulic fluid pressure and
the governor hydraulic fluid pressure; and
(e) leading means for leading hydraulic fluid pressure to
the hydraulic fluid pressure chamber of the torque
converter, when any one of a plurality of shift ranges is
selected by the manual selecting means, only when the
highest speed stage available from the gear transmission
mechanism, for that shift range, is being provided by the
gear transmission mechanism;
said leading means includes a hydraulic fluid pressure
switching valve comprising an output port, leading to the
hydraulic fluid pressure chamber of the torque converter,
and a first, a second, and a third input port;
in the hydraulic fluid pressure switching valve, the output
port being connected to the third input port when and
only when hydraulic fluid pressure is provided to either
the first input port or the second input port;
the first input port being provided with a hydraulic fluid
pressure whenever the highest speed range available for
the automatic transmission is not selected by the selecting
means;
thie second input port being provided with a hydraulic fluid
pressure which is an actuating pressure for a one of the
friction engaging devices which is engaged only for pro-
ducing the highest speed stage available from the gear
transmission mechanism and is otherwise disengaged;
and the third input port being provided with a hydraulic
fluid pressure which is an actuating pressure for a one of
the friction engaging devices which is engaged for provid-
ing the highest and also the next to highest speed stage
available from the gear transmission mechanism, and is
otherwise disengaged, during forward operation of the
gear transmission mechanism.
4,391,167
LIFT-TOP CAN OPENER
Josef J. Bergmeister, 620 Jones, San Francisco, Calif. 94102
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,726
Int. Cl.^ B67B 7/40
U.S. CI. 81—3.46 R 3 Claims
1. A lift top can opener including an elongated lever member
defining first and second ends, said first end defining an elon-
gated handle and said second end including recess means defin-
ing an endwise outwardly opening recess having a first narrow
cross sectional dimension and a second wide cross sectional
dimension several times the first narrow dimension, said recess
being adapted to receive therein the lift tab of a top can with
said lever member thereafter being usable as an operating lever
to assist in lifting the lift tab, said elongated handle including at
least one cylindrical end, said recess means including a cylin-
drical sleeve having one partially flattened end and the other
end of said sleeve being snugly telescoped over said one cylin-
drical end of said handle for stationary support of said sleeve
from said handle, said recess being defined within said pariially
flattened end, one of the flattened sides of said pariially flat-
tened end including an integral laterally outwardly struck
portion defining a hook spaced laterally outward of said one
flattened side and opening toward the other end of said sleeve.
70
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,168
METHOD FOR CITTTING SHEET MATERIAL WITH A
CUTTING WHEEL
Heinz J. Gerber, and David R. Pearl, both of West Hartford,
Conn., assignors to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc., South
Windsor, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 168,312, Jul. 10, 1980. This application Dec.
I 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,788
I Int. aJ D06H 7/00; B26D 1/18
U.S. a. 83—34 3 Oaims
said blades angled toward the same side of the perpendicular,
thereby causing the fibers to undergo angular bodily swinging
movement after cutting and while passing through the spaces
between the blades.
4,391,170
APPARATUS FOR WORKING ON ADVANONG SHEET
MATERIAL
Bentsion Boverman, and Vilen Vodyanitsky, both of West Hart-
ford, Conn., assignors to Gerber Garment Technology, Inc.,
South Windsor, Conn.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,650
Int. a? D06H 7/00
U.S. a. 83—71 19 Claims
r^3-«
1. A method of cutting pattern pieces from a single ply of
sheet material comprising:
spreading a single ply of sheet material on a hard support
surface in a smooth and flattened condition;
translating a cutting wheel having a sharp peripheral cutting
edge along straight and curved lines of cut defming the
perimeter of a pattern piece with the cutting edge cutting
through the material to the hard support surface; and
at angles in the perimeter translating the cutting wheel along
one side of the angle toward the apex of the angle, stop-
ping the translating when the center of the wheel is di-
rectly over the apex, then lifting the cutting wheel away
from the support surface and rotating the wheel above the
surface into alignment with the other side of the angle,
then lowering the cutting wheel into engagement with the
sheet material and the support surface with the center of
the wheel directly over the apex of the angle, and thereaf-
ter advancing the wheel along the other side of the angle
away from the apex whereby the angle is cut without
overcuts or excessive heel cuts.
I 4,391,169
CUTTER WITH ANGULAR BLADES AND METHOD FOR
CUTTING ROPE THEREWITH
William F. Laird, and Kenneth A. Wood, both of Kingston,
Canada, assignors to Hartford Fibres, Ltd., Ontario, Canada
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,917
Int. a.^ DIOG 1/04
U.S. a. 83—37 21 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for working on sheet material and having
conveying means for supporting and moving sheet material, a
carriage assembly, means supporting the carriage assembly for
movement relative to the conveyor means and in one and an
opposite direction generally parallel to the direction of move-
ment of the conveyor means, instrument means mounted on
said carriage assembly for movement with the carriage assem-
bly and in working relation to sheet material supported by the
conveyor means, and drive means for moving the carriage
assembly relative to the conveyor means to move the instru-
ment in working relation to the sheet material supported by the
conveyor means, the improvement wherein said drive means
comprises coengaging drive elements including one drive
element mounted on the conveyor means to move with the
conveyor means and another drive element supported on the
carriage assembly to move with the carriage assembly and
relative to the conveyor means.
11. In a method of cutting a rope wherein said rope is laid
out lengthwise against a plurality of cutting blades which are
spaced apart from one another, and which is cut into fibers by
forcing the rope against the cutting edges of the blades and
forcing the cut fibers through the spaces between the blades,
the step which comprises cutting said rope while maintaining
said blades at an angle to the lengthwise orientation of said
rope at an angle to a line perpendicular thereto, and with all of
4,391,171
TRIM PRESS INCLUDING EJECTOR
Michael Wendt, Hope, Mich., assignor to Lyie Development,
Inc., Beaverton, Mich.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,207
Int. a.3 B26F 1/02
U.S. CI. 83—82 4 Claims
1. In a trim press for trimming articles, which have been
differentially pressure formed in a plastic sheet, from the plas-
tic sheet comprising:
a frame;
means for incrementally indexing said sheet of plastic to
successively position articles at a trim station;
first and second trim dies mounted on said frame for relative
movement toward and away from each other between
spaced apart positions and closed positions in which the
trim dies engage opposite sides of said plastic sheet to
sever the articles from the sheet at said trim station;
means for reciprocally moving at least one of said trim dies
toward and away from the other of said trim dies compris-
ing:
a flywheel rotaubly mounted about a first axis on said frame;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
71
a first eccentric drive pin having a second axis radially offset
from said first axis, mounted on said flywheel for bodily
movement about a third axis;
first coupler means coupling said eccentric drive pin to said
one trim die to reciprocally move said one trim die; and
ejector means reciprocally mounted on said one trim die for
movement relative thereto; and the improvement com-
prising:
means for moving said ejector means relative to said one
trim die comprising:
rocker arm means mounted on said first coupler means for
to-and-fro swinging movement;
a second eccentric pin, having a fourth axis, radially offset
from said first, second and third axes, coupled to said
first eccentric drive pin for bodily movement therewith;
and
connector means coupling said second eccentric drive pin
to said rocker arm means to swing said rocker arm in
said to-and-fro path;
said coupler means coupled to said ejector means and to said
rocker arm means for reciprocally moving said ejector
means relative to said trim die to separate severed articles
at said trim station from said one trim die.
1 1 4,391,172
ROTARY CUTTING MACHINE
Lesley A. Galland, and Bruce W. Skiver, both of Caldwell, Id.,
assignors to J. R. Simplot Company, Boise, Id.
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,926
Int. a.3 B26D 3/28
U.S. CI. 83—403 30 Qaims
1. A rotary cutting machine for cutting a product into a
plurality of pieces, comprising:
a generally cylindrical housing having a plurality of circum-
ferentially spaced, axially open slots formed therein;
a plurality of cutting knives each including an axially extend-
ing cutting edge at one side of a respective one of said
slots, said cutting edges being presented in a common
circumferential direction; and
a generally cylindrical impeller mounted for rotation within
said housing, said impeller including a base plate closing
'one axial end thereof, an annular cover plate at the oppo-
site axial end defining a central opening for admission of a
flow of the product into the impeller, means cooperating
with said base plate and said cover plate to form a plural-
ity of axially separated and radially open passages, said
passages forming means including at least one annular
divider plate disposed axially between said base and cover
plates and generally in parallel therewith, and a plurality
of circumferentially spaced axially extending paddles
connected to said base, cover, and divider plates near their
peripheries for securing said base, cover, and divider
plates with respect to each other and for rotationally
carrying the product flowing through said passages into
cutting engagement with said cutting knives, and means
for directing the flow of the product upon rotation of the
impeller in a radially outward direction for flow in sub-
stantially equal portions through said passages into cutting
engagement with said cutting knives.
4,391,173
SHEARING CRADLE
Colin C. Anderson, 6 Montrose PI., Beaumont, South Australia,
Australia
Continuation of Ser. No. 108,164, Dec. 28, 1979, abandoned.
This application Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,449
Claims priority, application Australia, Jan. 2, 1979, PD7250
Int. Cl.^ B26D 7/06
U.S. CI. 83—424 6 Claims
1. Apparatus for shearing sheep, said apparatus comprising a
frame supporting a plurality of propelled parallel rollers ex-
tending longitudinally of the frame to support a sheep in a
reclining position, an endless belt cutter positioned between an
adjacent pair of said rollers, said rollers being positioned to
have central and outermost rollers with the central rollers
lower than the outermost rollers to allow the sheep to lie on
the rollers, said cutter means being characterized by said end-
less belt cutter having a course extending axially of said rollers
intermediate said central rollers, and means to drive the rollers
to move the sheep through an arc to present the unshorn wool
to the endless belt cutter.
4,391,174
PUNCH PRESS MACHINE WITH ADJUSTABLE TOOL
POSITIONING
Gerard G. F. Smeets, 50 Inverlochy Blvd., Apt. 102, Thornhill,
Ontario, Canada
Filed Sep. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 72.668
Oaims priority, application Canada, Aug. 30, 1978, 310359
Int. a.3 B21D 28/26; B26F 1/04
U.S. a. 83—552 8 Oaims
1. In a turret type punch press machine, adjustable means for
aligning tool elements of spaced rotors comprising, a support-
ing member for at least one of the rotors, the supporting mem-
ber being pivottably connected to a main frame of the machine,
adjustable positioning and locking means for providing limited
72
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
vernier adjustment of said supporting member about its pivot
point on the machine, an indexing mechanism mounted on the
supporting member providing for multi-position indexing of
the rotor about its axis, and wherein the indexing mechanism is
adjustable to provide limited angular positioning of the rotor
for each indexed position thereof and to provide, in conjunc-
tion with the adjustable positioning of the supporting member
two limited and substantial orthogonal directions of adjust-
ment of the position of a tool mounted in the rotor on the
supporting member.
4,391,175
PERFORATING DEVICE ESPEQALLY ADAPTED FOR
USE WITH PRINTING MACHINES
Steve Christian, 43, me Rodin, 93290 Tremblay-les-Gonesse,
France
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,996
Oaims priority, application France, Mar. 27, 1980, 80 06862
Int. Cl.^ B26D 3/00
U.S. a. 83—678 3 Qaims
r\T^\j),
7\f))J\f\jr\.Pyf\J\pj\f\S''r
'^^K'
'^fXO:i'£^7IXtJTZ^ZrfTl
. \
5 6
1. Perforating device or similar means, especially adapted
for use with printing machines such as offset machines which
comprises:
(a) a rigid, thin metallic plate in the form of a strip,, which
presents, in protrusion, on one of its two faces, at least one
cutting or perforating element;
(b) a layer of adhesive material applied upon the side of thin
metal plate opposite said cutting or perforating element,
said adhesive layer capable of being protected by a protec-
tive strip which is removed at the moment of use; and
(c) a double faced self-adhesive tape adhering upon one of its
faces, upon the side of said thin metal plate adjacent to
said cutting or perforating element, the other face of the
double faced self-adhesive tape capable of being protected
by a protective strip which is removed at the moment of
use.
4,391,176
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENT WITH
MUSICAL COMPOSITION FASHION SELECTORS
Naoyuki Niinomi, and Kunihiko Watanabe, both of Hamamatsu,
Japan, assignors to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,575
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1979, 54-115400
Int. a.3 GIOH 1/12, 1/38. 1/46
VJS. a. 84—1.17 18 Oaims
1. An electronic musical instrument comprising:
a first keyboard having a plurality of keys for performing a
melody;
a second keyboard having a plurality of keys for performing
an accompaniment;
a melody tone generator generating a melody tone in re-
sponse to depression of a key of said melody performance
keyboard;
an accompaniment tone generator generating an accompani-
ment tone in response to depression of a key of said ac-
companiment performance keyboard;
a plurality of melody musical composition fashion selection
switches connected to a like plurality of first logic circuit
means for designating a single one of a musical composi-
tion fashion of a melody tone to be produced from among
a plurality of predetermined kinds of musical composition
fashions for melody;
a plurality of accompaniment musical composition fashion
selection switches connected to a like plurality of second
logic circuit means for designating a single one of a musi-
cal composition fashion of an accompaniment tone to be
produced from among a plurality of predetermined kinds
of musical composition fashions for accompaniment;
snin
A"
^^ '
0
1 9v
m
[immm
ii »■
^
»!» ni
01 'Itt
said second logic circuit means being connected to said first
logic circuit means such that the musical composition
fashion of an accompaniment tone is selected in corre-
spondence with the selected musical composition fashion
of a melody tone when none of said plurality of accompa-
niment musical composition fashion selection switches are
operated, and such that the musical composition fashion of
a melody tone is selected in correspondence with the
selected musical composition fashion of an accompani-
ment tone when none of said plurality of melody musical
composition fashion selection switches are operated;
a modifying parameter generator which generates a modify-
ing parameter corresponding to an operated one of said
musical composition fashion selection switches;
modifying means for modifying outputs of said melody and
accompaniment tone generators in accordance with said
modifying parameter generated from said modifying pa-
rameter generator; and
means for producing a musical tone signal in accordance
with said output of said modifying means.
4,391,177
PIANO SOUNDBOARD AND METHOD OF MAKING
SAME
Stanley A. Grajek, DeKalb, III.; Robert S. Hill, Holly Springs,
Miss., and George S. Klaiber, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignors to
The Wurlitzer Company, DeKalb, III.
Division of Ser. No. 234,360, Feb. 13, 1981, Pat. No. 4,361,458.
This application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,293
Int. O.J GIOC 3/06
U.S. O. 84—196 8 Oaims
1. A soundboard for a piano comprising: three plies of wood
bonded together, the front and back plies being of substantially
equal thickness and the center ply being of a thickness greater
than the sum of the thicknesses of the front and back plies, the
center ply comprising a plurality of elongate boards each
having a preselected curvature from side-to-side and bonded
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
73
together edge-to-edge with the curvature of each board in the
same direction to form a composite board having a substan-
4,391,179
COMBAT VEHICLE
Erling Tidstrom, Karlskoga, Sweden, assignor to Aktiebolaget
Bofors, Bofors, Sweden
Filed May 1, 1980, Ser. No. 145,635
Oaims priority, application Sweden, May 14, 1979, 7904188
Int. O.^ F41H 7/06
U.S. O. 89—46 6 Oaims
tially contmuous curvature, concave on one side and convex
on the other side, whereby the assembled, three-ply sound-
board has a curvature imparied thereto by the center ply.
4,391,178
' LOGISTIC VEHICLE ARMOR
Victor H. Pagano, Oakland, Mich., assignor to^The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,287
Int. 0.3 F41H 7/00
U.S. O. 89—36 H 1 Oaim
1. In a military vehicle that includes a cargo box having side
walls (14 and 16): the improvement comprising an inverted
U-frame structure having a number of elevated bow roof sec-
tions (28) and downwardly extending leg sections (22 and 24)
connected to the box side walls; a central ridge pole (30) ex-
tending between and normal to the bow roof sections on the
longitudinal axis of the cargo box; two fabric covers (32 and
34) extending horizontally in opposite directions from the
central ride pole and thence downwardly along the aforemen-
tioned leg sections at least to the upper edges of the cargo box
side walls; means defining a number of horizontal hollow
fabric sleeves on the downwardly extending portions of the
fabric covers; each of the individual fabric sleeves being the
same length in the horizontal direction as the associated cover;
said fabric sleeves being open at their ends for enabling ballistic
armor slats to be inserted into said sleeves; adjacent sleeves
being overlapped on one another and being sufficient in num-
ber so that the sleeves collectively occupy the entire down-
wardly extending portion of each fabric cover; an elongated
ballistic armor slat (44) insertable lengthwise into each fabric
sleeve to provide ballistic protection for personnel occupying
the cargo box; the fabric sleeves for each cover being formed
from a single length of fabric material that is periodically
doubled back on itself, each doubled back area being stitched
to the fabric cover whereby the zones between adjacent
stitched areas define the fabric sleeves; the individual armor
slats having flat parallel faces and interconnecting longitudinal
edges, opposite edges on individual slats being beveled so that
edges on adjacent slats overlap one another when the slats
occupy a given plane within the fabric sleeves; said armor slats
being removable from the fabric sleeves, said covers being
capable of being rolled up to a non-use storage position adja-
cent to the ridge pole when the slats are removed from the
sleeves.
ROnTWC JNIT
DRIVE ''"C—.-i
UNIT
..4^<**^
1. A track driven combat vehicle comprising:
a track driven mechanism supporting a lower chassis for
movement in a longitudinal direction,
said lower chassis including at a rear poriion thereof a maga-
zine for holding explosive ammunition units,
a conveyor for receiving ammunition units from said maga-
zine and delivering said ammunition units to a forward
position along said chassis to a rotary table for rotating
said ammunition units;
a turret mechanism centrally located for rotation about said
chassis including a front portion narrower in width than in
length for presenting a minimum target area;
said front poriion including a breech loading firearm, and a
rear portion of said turret including a compartment for
supporting a crew member, a turret magazine located
above said rotary table;
means for positioning a vertically oriented projectile in said
turret magazine to a lateral position;
a hoist car vertically supported for movement in a vertically
extending frame from a position for receiving an ammuni-
tion unit from said table, and a projectile in said lateral
position, to a breech loading position of said firearm,
whereby the vulnerability of a hit to said vehicle is mini-
mized by maintaining the bulk of explosive ammunition
units at the rear of said vehicle, and the probability of a hit
to said turret is minimized by said front portion presenting
a minimum target area.
74
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,180
METHOD AND MEANS FOR CONTROLLING THE
FIRING RATE FROM A MACHINE GUN
Richard Koine, Ratingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Rheinmetall GmbH, Duesseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 147,291, May 6, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 864,237, Dec. 27,
1977, abandoned. This application Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No.
168,331
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 24,
1976, 2658770
Int. a.^ F41D 11/00
U.S. a. 89—129 R 5 Qaims
11 ]? » B 21
S M
i '
control devices (11, 11') for selectively connecting the feed and
return lines to respective first (15) and second (16) working
chambers of associated props (10) of which a first working
chamber (15) serves to extend and set the prop when con-
nected to the pressure line; the improvement comprising set-
ting valve means (18) with opposed first (24) and second (23)
pressure-fluid of>erated control pistons, the setting valve means
being settable with the first piston (24) into a first state where
connection between the pressure line and said first working
chamber (15) is blocked and settable with the second piston
(23) into a second state where connection between the pressure
line and said first working chamber is established indepen-
dently of the operating position of the manually operated
control devices (11, 11') the first control piston (24) of the
setting valve means being connected to said first working
chamber (15) and biased with spring force (35) into the first
state; and control valve means (25) provided with a control
piston (29) connected to said first working chamber (15) and
biased with opposed spring force (31) to block the pressure line
1. An improved arrangement for controlling the rate of
firing of fire bursts in a machine gun having a breech block, an
ammunition feed device and a recoil and counter-recoil device
for elastically coupling the gun to gun mount by means of a
differential recoil system so as to enable the gun to oscillate
with preselected oscillation characteristics during firing said
gun emitting energy impulses during firing of a shell which are
operatively conducted by conduit means to produce ignition of
the following shell fed into the gun by the ammunition feed
device, the improvement comprising:
receiving means and storing means operatively mounted in
said recoil and counter-recoil device said storing means
being adapted to store the recoil energy of the gun during
recoil thereof, control means -operatively connected to
said storing and receiving means, said control means hav-
ing a timing element and being adapted to selectively
release a predetermined amount of energy for the counter-
recoil motion;
adjusting means operatively connected to said control means
for adjusting said timing element;
a primary transmitter operatively associated with said
breech block to emit a first signal at a preselected position
of said breech block;
a secondary transmitter operatively associated with said
recoil and counter-recoil device for emitting a second
signal at a preselected position of said recoil and counter-
recoil device; and
a relay in said conduit means adapted to conduct an energy
pulse emitted from the gun during firing of a shell to
initiate ignition of the following shell in the breech block
when said first and second signals have placed said relay
in a conductive state;
said primary and secondary energy transmitters being opera-
tively coupled to said conduit means.
4,391,181
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR MININjG
APPARATUS V
Walter Weirich, Dortmund; Michael Dettmers, Kamen; Kunib
ert Becker, Werl, and Harry Rosenberg, Liidinghausen, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte
Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 948,458, Oct. 4, 1978, abandoned. This
application Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,507
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 4,
1977, 2749312
Int. a.3 F15B 13/04
U.S. a. 91—29 4 Qaims
1. In a hydraulic control system for controlling the operation
of pressure-fluid operated support props of mining apparatus;
said system comprising a common pressure fluid feed line (P),
a common pressure fluid return line (R) and manually operated
(P) from the second piston (23) of the setting valve means (18)
unless a predetermined threshold pressure level prevails in said
first working chamber (15) and to connect said second piston
(23) of the setting valve means (18) to the pressure line (P)
when said predetermined threshold pressure is exceeded in said
first working chamber (15); whereby the control valve means
(25) causes the setting valve means (18) to change from its first
state to its second state to connect the first working chamber
(15) to the pressure line (8) after an associated control device
(11, 11') has connected the pressure line (P) to said first work-
ing chamber (15) and the threshold pressure level thereafter is
exceeded so that connection between said first working cham-
ber (15) and said pressure line (P) is maintained independent of
he operating position of said associated control device, and
ereby the setting valve means (18) thereafter reverts to its
fir^t state under the action of the first control piston (24)
thereof once the pressure in the first working chamber (15)
-Reaches a level in excess of the threshold level and signifying
that prop setting has occurred.
4,391,182
FLUID ACTUATED POSITIONER
Jacob Kobelt, 6110 Oak St., Vancouver, Britisb Columbia,
Canada (V6M 2W2)
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,279
Int. a.3 F15B 9/10. 15/17
U.S. a. 91—378 10 Qaims
1. A fluid actuated positioner adapted to receive a working
fluid of constant pressure and to produce a mechanical output
signal proportional to a fluid input signal from a signal fluid of
varying pressure, the positioner having:
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
75
(a) an input cylinder having input partition means dividing
the cylinder into first and second input chambers, an input
rod mounting the partition means for movement axially of
the cylinder, the first input chamber receiving the signal
fluid under varying pressure which generates a varying
input signal on the input rod, and resilient means cooperat-
ing with the input rod to oppose the input signal on the
input rod, the input rod being essentially unaffected by
contact with the working fluid,
(b) an output cylinder having an output member with an
output partition means and an output rod, the output
partition means dividing the output cylinder into first and
second output chambers, the output partition means hav-
ing first and second faces within the respective output
chambers, the output rod mounting the output partition
means for movement axially of the output cylinder, the
first output chamber receiving the working fluid under a
constant pressure which generates a first force on the
output partition means, the output rod extending from the
output partition means through the first output chamber
so that the first face has a smaller efl^ective area than the
/" , '^. \
second face, and a fixed metering means disposed between
exhaust and the second output chamber to control flow of
working fluid therefrom prior to exhausting the working
fluid,
(c) a main control valve communicating with the first and
second output chambers and having first and second valve
portions, the first valve portion being a connecting bore
within the output member, the connecting bore communi-
cating with the first output chamber, and the second valve
portion being a portion of the input rod which cooperates
with the connecting bore to control fluid flow there-
through, so that relative positions of the output member
and the input rod control metering of a continuous flow of
working fluid passing between the first and second valve
portions so as to control flow of working fluid from the
first output chamber into the second output chamber prior
to exhausting the working fluid from the positioner,
so that the working fluid in the second output chamber gener-
ates a second force on the second face in opposition to the first
force to produce on the output rod a resultant displacement
proportional to the input signal.
4,391,183
HYDRAULIC BLOCKING VALVE
Stig Broms, Tiiby, and Lennart Freese, Jarfalla, both of Sweden,
assignors to Innovation Aktiebolag, Sundbyberg, Sweden
Filed Feb. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 121,619
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 22, 1979, 7809012
Int. Q.3 F15B 13/042: F16K 31/122
U.S. Q. 91—461 4 Qaims
1. In a hydraulic blocking or holding valve including a valve
housing having a hollow interior with an inlet and an outlet
and a valve body shiftable-to close a main valve seat for inter-
rupting the communication between the inlet and outlet and
alternately to open said main valve seat for permitting said
communication, the valve body being arranged between two
chambers in said housing interior, namely one inlet chamber in
communication with the inlet and located between the valve
body and the valve seat, and one operating chamber located on
the opposite side of the valve body from the valve seat, a
throttling or constricting passage via which the inlet chamber
and the operating chamber are in communication with each
other for counteracting flow of hydraulic liquid between the
chambers, and control valve means in normally unconstricted
communication with the operating chamber and actuable for
lowering the pressure in the operating chamber in relation to
the pressure in the inlet chamber to thereby create a pressure
difference between the two chambers causing the valve body
to shift to an open position opening said main valve seat,
wherein the improvement comprises a constriction means
responsive to said shifting of said valve body to its open f>osi-
tion for constricting but not stopping the outflow of hydraulic
liquid from the operating chamber to said valve means, said
valve body being a ball received in a movable sleeve communi-
cating with said inlet chamber, said housing including a fixed
internal spigot protruding into the housing interior and sepa-
.2
1.38
rated from said main valve seat by said ball, spring means
backed with respect to said housing for urging said ball against
said valve seat and away from said spigot, said sleeve being
slidable over said spigot and defining with the spigot said
operating chamber, a sliding gap between said sleeve and
spigot forming said throttling passage between the inlet cham-
ber and operating chamber, an orifice in said spigot providing
said normally unconstricted communication of said operating
chamber with said valve means, said orifice being located in
said operating chamber to face said ball, said spring means
being dimensioned for causing said ball, in response to said
shifting of said ball and sleeve away from said main valve seat
by said pressure difference, to assume an almost abutting rela-
tion with said spigot at said orifice forming said constriction
means therebetween, for simultaneously constricting outflow
into the orifice and maintaining the constricted outflow of
hydraulic liquid from the operating chamber through the ori-
fice to the open valve means.
4,391,184
DIAPHRAGM ACTUATOR
Ken Yamane, Yokohama, Japan, and Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.,
Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,164
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 6, 1979, 54-137938;
Oct. 16, 1979, 54-132445
Int. Q.3 F16J 15/16
U.S. Q. 92—100 2 Qaims
1. A diaphragm actuator comprising a pressure chamber
supplied with positive or negative pressure, a negative pressure
chamber supplied with negative pressure, a diaphragm defin-
ing said pressure chamber and said negative pressure chamber,
an operating shaft extending through a wall portion of the
negative pressure chamber and connected at one end with the
diaphragm, said diaphragm causing the operating shaft to
axially slide, relative to said wall portion, in response to the
pressure difference between the positive or negative pressure
in said pressure chamber, and the negative pressure in said
76
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
negative pressure chamber, wherein said wall portion is pro-
vided with a sealing arrangement which includes a sealing
diaphragm mounted on said wall portion and having an axially
movable inner peripheral portion surrounding the operating
shaft, a movable annular member supported by the inner pe-
ripheral portion of the sealing diaphragm, a stationary annular
member secured to the wall portion in the negative pressure
chamber and opposing to the movable annular member, and a
resilient O-ring inserted between said annular members and
slidably receiving the operating shaft, at least one of the oppo-
site surfaces of said annular members being tapered such that
the O-ring is compressed by said opposite surfaces axially and
radially inwardly as the negative pressure in the negative
pressure chamber exceeds a predetermined value.
4,391,185
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING A JUICE EXTRACTION
FAOLITY
\
Robert C. Stanley, Lakeland, Fla., assignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 171,917, Jul. 24, 1980, Pat. No. 4,335,145.
This application Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,671
Int. a.5 A23N 7/00; B02C 25/00; B23Q 15/00; GOlN 33/14
U.S. a. 99—489 2 Qaims
1. A system for controlling the flow of fruit and fruit juice
through a juice extraction facility, said juice extraction facility
including a fruit storage location for storing the fruit in bulk, a
sizer for separating the fruit into at least two size categories,
said sizer being adjustable to vary the size limits of each cate-
gory, a feeder for feeding the fruit from the fruit storage loca-
tion to the sizer, said feeder powered by a motor, a plurality of
juice extractors, each of said extractors powered by a motor
and said extractors being arranged in two or more groups with
each group of extractors adapted to extract juice from fruit in
one of said size categories, means for conveying the fruit from
the sizer to the extractors according to size, means for recy-
cling unused fruit from each group of extractors to a location
upstream of said group, and a juice storage location adapted to
receive juice collected from all extractors, said system com-
prising:
a central processing unit adapted to receive signals from
sensors located at various remote locations, process said
signals, and transmit control signals to various remote
final control devices, said control signals calculated ac-
cording to predetermined algorithms;
means associated with each group of extractors for counting
the number of fruit recycled from that group and for
transmitting a signal indicative of said number of fruit to
the central processing unit;
sensing means mounted at the juice storage location for
measuring the amount of juice therein and for transmitting
a signal indicative of said amount to the central processing
unit;
a sizer motor adapted to receive a control signal from the
central processing unit and to vary the limits of each size
category accordingly;
a plurality of motor control centers, each of said centers
associated with one extractor, adapted to start and stop
the associated extractor motors in accordance with signals
received from the central processing unit; and
a motor speed control unit associated with the feeder motor
and adapted to vary the feed rate of fruit to the extractors
in accordance with a signal received from the central
processing unit;
said control signals to the sizer motor, to the motor control
centers, and to the motor speed control unit calculated to
maintain a preselected amount of juice at the juice storage
facility, to equalize the number of fruit recycled from each
group of extractors, and to minimize the total number of
fruit recycled.
4,391,186
COTTON PRESS
William R. Davis, P.O. Box 131, Charleston, Mo. 63834
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,629
Int. a.3 B65B 13/18
U.S. a. 100—7 18 Claims
1. A cotton press adapted to receive a debanded bale for
compressing the same to a configuration to receive bands
therearound, the press being of the Webb type incorporating a
frame having a pair of aligned spaced inverted U-shaped mem--
bers; a movable platen mounted for upward movement toward
a stationary platen; and means for forcing the movable platen
upwardly toward the stationary platen including a vertically
mounted piston-cylinder arrangement and a linkage mecha-
nism interconnecting the piston-cylinder arrangement and the
movable platen, the linkage mechanism comprising first and
second pairs of links on opposite ends of the U-shaped mem-
bers, each of the links being generally aligned with one of the
U-shaped members, the improvement comprising
means providing cotton movement through the press in a
path between the spaced inverted U-shaped members
including means for feeding a debanded cotton bale be-
tween the links of the first link pair toward a pressing
location between the platens and for moving a banded
cotton bale between the links of the second link pair away
from the pressing location.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
77
4 391 187
BELT-TENSIONING SYSTEM FOR ROUND BALERS
Richard W. Koning; Gerald F. Meiers, and Henry D. Anstey, all
of Ottunwa, Iowa, assignors to Deere & Company, Moline,
111*
I 1 1 Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,223
Int. a.i B30B 5/06; AOID 39/00
U.S. a lOQ-88 10 Qaims
"l at '^
1. A round baler having a main frame and including an
endless belt and roll system providing first and second oppo-
sitely moving belt stretches to at least partly define a bale
chamber, said system further including means for holding the
stretches apart to define a crop inlet, first and second rolls
spaced above the inlet and closesly spaced apart to substan-
tially close the upper part of the chamber and carrier means
journalling the first and second rolls and mounted on the main
frame for upward movement as the bale chamber grows and
belt-tensioning mechanism characterized in that the belt-ten-
sioning mechanism includes a third roll spaced above the first
and second rolls and supporting a third belt stretch, means
mounting the third roll on the main frame for movement
toward and away from the carrier means, and means intercon-
necting the carrier means and the third roll mounting means
for causing the third roll to move upwardly as the carrier
means moves upwardly.
' 1 1 4,391,188
PIN-OFF AND DOOR CLOSURE ASSEMBLY FOR A
STATIONARY REFUSE COMPACTOR
Kenneth W. Gwathney, Vernon; David L. Gann, Guin; Steven G.
Seagraves, Sr., Millport, all of Ala.; Gary R. Fenner, Green-
ville, and Gordon H. Fenner, Columbus, both of Miss., assign-
ors to Mjarathon Equipment Company, Vernon, Ala.
I Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,021
Int. a.3 B30B 15/06
V.S. a. lOp— 229 A 20 Oaims
bly including a refuse container having a load opening, and a
packer unit having a reciprocating ram detachably engaged
with said container for forcing refuse through the load opening
into the refuse container, a pin-off assembly for positioning
across the load opening of the refuse container, said pin-off
assembly including
(a) an elongated member adapted to be positioned across the
load opening, the ends of said elongated member being
provided with pin-receiving recesses
(b) said refuse container being provided with opposed open-
ings adjacent the load opening
(c) pin support means carried by said container and aligned-
with the opposed openings adjacent the load opening
(d) retaining pins positioned in said pin support means and
inserted through the opposed openings of the refuse con-
tainer into the pin-receiving recesses in said elongated
member
(e) said retaining pins being removable to withdraw said
elongated member from the load opening, and
(0 stop means for limiting the extent of entry of each of said
retaining pins into the pin-receiving recesses of said elon-
gated member.
4,391,189
CODE DATER FOR TRAY FORMING APPARATUS
David Anenson, River Falls, Wis., assignor to Champion Inter-
national Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 85,788, Oct. 17, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,150
Int. a.3 B41F 17/22
U.S. a. 101-36 2 Qaims
8. In combination with a stationary refuse compactor assem-
.-J
1. A code dater for coding tray blanks being formed into
trays in a tray forming machine comprising;
(a) means attached to said machine for maintaining each of
said tray blanks in a semi-rigid condition as said blanks
move through said machine, said means including a drive
wheel mounted on a driven shaft, said drive wheel being
rotated in one direction only, said drive wheel being dis-
posed in contact with one side of said blanks thereby
aiding in drawing said blanks through said tray forming
machine, said means further including a freely rotatable
idler wheel disposed on the opposite side of said tray
blanks and aligned with said drive wheel, said means
further including a pair of side plates for supporting the
opposed ends of said tray blanks as they pass through said
machine, said drive and idler wheels cooperating with said
plates to deform said tray blank into a bow-like configura-
tion to maintain said tray blanks in a semi-rigid condition,
said drive and idler wheels being in contact with said
blanks at approximately the apex of said bow-like configu-
ration; and
(b) means for printing coded information on said blanks as
they are maintained in said semi-rigid condition, said
means including a circular code dater wheel having a
printing font located on the periphery thereof, said wheel
being eccentrically mounted at a point spaced from its
center on said driven shaft, such that the portion of the
periphery of said code dater wheel having said printing
font thereon comes into contact with one side of said
blanks one time for each revolution of said driven shaft,
and with said code dater wheel being mounted in close
78
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
proximity to and adjacent, said drive wheel, whereby said
printing font thereon contacts with tray blanks at a point
on said blanks which is maintained in said semi-rigid con-
dition by said drive and idler wheels, in close proximity to
and adjacent the apex of said bow-like configuration, and
said machine being devoid of any support means for said
coder dater wheel on said opposite side of said tray blanks
whereby the semi-rigid condition and bow-like configura-
tion of said blanks comprising the sole support surface for
said code dater wheel.
4,391,191
REOPROCAL SUPPORTING ARRANGEMENT FOR
CONTACTING CYLINDERS OF A PRINTING UNIT
Hans-Bernhard Bolza-Schunemann, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignor to Koenig & Bauer AG, Wurzburg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 94,540, Nov. 15, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug, 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,651
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 30,
1979, 2926570
Int. a.3 B41F lS/20
U.S. a. 101—216 4 Qaims
4,391,190
PRE-SETTING OF PRINTING MACHINES
Hans-Georg Metzler, Hochstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,368
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26,
1979 2930438
Int. a.3 B41M 1/14: B41F 5/16; B65H 23/04
VS. a. 101—211 13 Qaims
T\imr\£
52 5
0 /niN
8. In a printing machine including a plurality of printing
stations each having at least one printing cylinder which can be
activated for printing independently of printing cylinders of
other stations, means for determining the angular offset of the
printing cylinders of an upstream and a downstream printing
station comprising means disposed at a predetermined location
on each of the Cylinders of the upstream and downstream
printing stations for printing a reference mark on web or sheet
material moved past the cylinders, optical scanning means
disposed downstream of the printing cylinder of the down-
stream station for detecting reference marks printed by the two
cylinders and providing respective output signals in response
thereto, first transducer means having an output signal propor-
tional to the length of material moved past the Hrst transducer
means, second transducer means having an output signal pro-
portional to the angular rotation of a respective cylinder, first
means coupled to receive the output signals of the scanning
means and the second transducer means and in response
thereto determining the relative angular position of the prede-
termined location of the downstream printing cylinder when a
reference mark printed by the downstream printing dylinder is
detected and for providing an output signal each time the
predetermined location of the upstream printing cylinder ro-
tates past an angular position corresponding to the relative
angular position of the predetermined location of the down-
stream printing cylinder when the reference mark printed by
the downstream printing cylinder was detected and second
means coupled to receive the output signals of the first trans-
ducer means, the scanning means and the first means and pro-
viding a signal proportional to the distance travelled by the
material between an output signal of the first means when the
printing cylinder of the downstream printing station is not
printing and when the printing cyhnder of the upstream print-
ing station is printing and the next reference mark printed by
the printing cylinder of the upstream printing station detected
by the optical scanning means.
1. An arrangement for the precise support and rotation of
first and second cylinders which contact each other in a print-
ing unit of a rotary printing press, the cylinders being carried
on shafts which rotate in journals that are carried in spaced
side frames, the cylinders being positioned between the spaced
side frames, said support arrangement comprising:
spaced pairs of non-rotating support rings carried by the
shafts of the first and second cylinders, said support rings
on the first cylinder shaft contacting said support rings on
the second cylinder shaft to produce an initial stress force
between said pairs of support rings to maintain the cylin-
ders spaced an exact distance from each other and to
maintain journal deflections constant, said support rings
being positioned adjacent planar ends of the cylinders
interiorly of the side frames, and being constrained from
rotation with the shafts;
at least a first pair of contacting rotatable cylinder rings, one
of said rotatable cylinder rings being secured to the shaft
of the first cylinder for rotation therewith, and another of
said rotatable cylinder rings being secured to the shaft of
the second cylinder for rotation therewith, said rotatable
cylinder rings being sized to provide a selected peripheral
contact force between said cylinder rings to ensure a
precise rolling drive for the cylinders and to dampen
vibrations, said cylinder rings contacting each other exte-
riorly of the side frames; and,
drive means to rotate the first and second cylinders.
4 391 192
BEARING ARRANGEMENT FOR AN INK FOUNTAIN IN
A ROTARY PRINTING MACHINE
Erich G. Wieland, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Koenig & Bauer AG, Wurzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,850
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10,
1980, 3033998
Int. a.3 B41F 31/06; B41L 27/08
U.S. a. 101—350 8 Qaims
1. A bearing arrangement for a pivotable ink fountain in a
rotary printing machine having a driven ink fountain roller
plunging into said ink fountain, wherein a supporting ring is
supported on either side of said fountain roller on a roller
journal, each of said supporting rings carrying a securement
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
79
means which wraps on a periphery of said supporting ring, a
first end of said securement means being secured to said ink
fountain, a second end of said securement means being con-
4 391 193
PLATE HOLDING DEVICE FOR OFFSET DUPLICATOR
Koji Ishii; Takahiko Shinmoto, both of Fuchu, and Kenso Ma-
ehara, Hiroshima, all of Japan, assignors to Ryobi Ltd., Hiro-
shima, Japan
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,450
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 17, 1980, 55-52663
Int. Q.' B41F 27/00
U.S. Q. 101-415.1 9 Qaims
H
1. A printing plate holding device for an offset duplicator,
said holding device being positioned in a grooved portion of a
plate cylinder and confronting a tail clamp device, said holding
device comprising: a base positioned along one side of said
grooved portion and slidably secured thereto in a horizontal
plane; a clamp plate pivotally secured to said base and pro-
vided with a first pin; a clamp lever fixed to said clamp plate
and provided with a second pin; a latch loosely secured to said
second pin of said clamp lever and connected to a spring so as
to provide a plate clamping force to said clamp plate, said latch
being engageable with a bracket of said base so as to maintain
said clamp plate at an open position; a guide plate and a plate
release preventing plate both fixed to an outer longitudinal side
of said base; axial displacement control means positioned at one
longitudinal end of said cylinder; circumferential displacement
control means positioned at the other longitudinal end of said
cylinder; said axial displacement control means comprising a
first knob rotatably extending through a slot formed in a first
bracket fixed to said base, said first knob being threadingly
engaged with said plate cylinder; and said circumferential
displacement control means comprising a second knob rotat-
ably extending through a slot formed in a second bracket fixed
to said cylinder, said second knob being threadingly engaged
with a third bracket fixed to said base.
4 391 194
METHOD FOR ADDRESSING CARDS AND ENVELOPES
Ronald A. Rogers, Appie Valley; Ansel J. Wright, Minneapolis,
and William H. Wright, Hopkins, all of Minn., assignors to
Master Addresser Company, Minneapolis, Minn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 97,377, Nov. 21, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 854,611, Nov. 25, 1977, Pat. No.
4,186,659. This application Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,181
Int. CI.' B41M 5/00
U.S.Q. 101-471 18 Qaims
nected to la tensioning device which is secured to said ink
fountain so that said ink fountain is capable of being pivoted off
said ink fountain roller.
1. A method of reproducing material imprinted on a master
element having indicia of heat conducting material thereon,
comprising:
(a) feeding the master element through a printing zone in
which a heating element is disposed;
(b) feeding a print receiving member through the printing
zone outwardly of the master element relative to the
heating element and in the same direction as the master
element;
(c) supporting a length of flexible sheet material provided
with a heat transferable printing medium under predeter-
mined tension between the master element and the print
receiving member; ;
(d) intermittently advancing a predetermined length of the
flexible sheet material through the printing zone against its
supporting tension in the same direction as the master
element;
(e) and pressing the master element, flexible sheet material
and printing receiving member together during movement
thereof through the printing zone.
4 391 195
DETONATION OF EXPLOSIVE CHARGES AND
EQUIPMENT THEREFOR
Peter C. Shann, 4, Orchard Way, Dringhouses, York, England
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No, 179,153
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 21, 1979,
7929128; Aug. 21, 1979, 7929129; Oct. 20, 1979, 7936504
Int. Q.J F42B 3/10
U.S. Q. 102—201 36 Qaims
1. A system for connecting a set of explosive charges with a
laser for detonation by optical energy from the laser which
comprises an input for optical energy produced by the laser, a
set of optical fibres for connection one with each of the charges
and distributor means for distributing optical energy from the
input to the fibres of said set, said fibres having longitudinal
axes and said distributor means being operable to receive en-
ergy from the laser and to direct a part of the received energy
into the fibres and to direct the remainder of the received
80
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
energy to waste, at least a substantial proportion of the part
directed into the fibres being directed non-axially so that the
4,391,197
SMOKE CARTRIDGE
Kjell O. Jacobsen, Raufoss, and Gudmund Engen, Jonsvatnet,
both of Norway, assignors to A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfab-
rikker, Raufoss, Norway
Continuation of Ser. No. 16,379, Mar. 1, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,954
Claims priority, application Norway, Mar. 8, 1978, 780819
Int. a.3 F42B 13/44
U.S. a. 102—334 3 Claims
COK^SOL ONIT
»(\0%iy/t CMKIQE.S ■
propagation of said at least a substantial proportion through
the fibres is by zigzag paths.
4,391,196
ADD-ON IGNITER FOR PYROGEN TYPE IGNITER
Robert E. Betts, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
I Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,906
' Int. a.3 F02K 9/95
U.S. a. 102—202 2 Qaims
1. In a solid propellant rocket motor having a solid propel-
lant perforated grain contained in a case, an exhaust nozzle at
the aft end of said case and a pyrogen igniter at the forward
end of said case, said pyrogen igniter including:
(i) an exhaust nozzle for exhausting hot gases;
(ii) an add-on pyrotechnic package secured to said pyrogen
exhaust nozzle, said add-on pyrotechnic package compris-
ing a suitable container for containing pyrotechnic pellets;
and,
(iii) pyrotechnic pellets contained in said container which
are ignitable by hot pyrogen exhaust gases when said hot
pyrogen exhaust gases impinge upon said pellets and pro-
duces rapid burning of said pellets that are subsequently
discharged in the form of hot gases and hot particles along
with said hot pyrogen exhaust gases to perform the func-
tions of rapidly sweeping away any undesirable solid
propellant perforated grain constituents that have mi-
grated to the surface of said solid propellant perforated
grain or reaction products that have formed on said sur-
face from chemical reactions, rapidly igniting said solid
propellant, perforated grain, and maintaining a high pres-
sure rate rise in said solid propellant rocket motor which
achieves improved ignition and performance of said pro-
pellant rocket motor.
1. A smoke cartridge for producing instantaneous smoke,
comprising:
a casing,
a first compartment within said casing comprising a stack of
annular disc shaped smoke elements piled one on top of
the other, and a hole passing longitudinally through each
smoke element such that the holes through all of the
smoke elements form a central passageway passing longi-
tudinally of the casing through the entire first compart-
ment, the forward end of the casing having a releasable
cover,
at least some of the smoke producing material of every
smoke element being directly exposed to the central pas-
sageway, the smoke elements being free of connection to
each other, such that immediately upon leaving the casing,
each smoke element is separate from the other smoke
elements,
a second compartment separated axially from the first com-
partment and axially adjacent the rearward end of the first
compartment and containing a discharge composition and
a means for igniting the discharge composition, said dis-
charge composition comprising substantially the complete
ignition composition for igniting all the disc shaped smoke
elements, such that upon ignition of the discharge com-
positon a jet of flames passes into one end of and then
through the passageway to ignite all of the smoke ele-
ments directly exposed thereto as this same discharge
composition expels all of the smoke elements out of the
casing, whereupon, immediately upon discharge, each
smoke element is free to scatter independently of the other
smoke elements,
a third compartment adjacent the second compartment on
the side thereof opposite the first compartment, a second
discharge composition in said third compartment for pro-
pelling the casing itself, and including a delay means be-
tween the second and third compartment such that igni-
tion of the second discharge composition is delayed until
after the smoke elements have been discharged from the
first compartment.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4 391 198
BIDIRECnONAL DISPERSIBLE SHAPED-CHARGE
MINE
Gaude Auge, Bourges, France, assignor to Etat Francais, Paris,
France
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,496
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 11, 1980, 80 02907
Int. a.3 F42B 23/24
U.S. a. 102-401 I 7 Qaims
1. A shaped charge mine with action directed along one of
the two opposite directions of the axis of revolution perpendic-
ular to the central plane of the mine which is of generally
flattened shape, including a substantially cylindrical housing
containing the charge to the ends of which housing there are
fastened two metal coverings, an igniter provided with a cock-
ing rod extracted by a spring, said mine being characterized by
the fact that it comprises a damping means surrounding the
housing and imparting to the mine a ratio of height h to outside
diameter d which is less than 0.5 in order to assure laying along
.one or the other of the preferred directions, wherein the damp-
ing means consists of a layer of damping material surrounding
the housing, on which layer flexible tongues are fastened on
opposite sides of the central plane and at a given distance from
it, said flexible tongues having free ends which extend away
from the axis of revolution and which are substantially ori-
ented in the median plane of the mine.
4,391,199
SAFE AMMUNITION FOR EXHIBITION AND TARGET
SHOOTING
Lionel Morin, 20, avenue Gambetta, 19200 Ussel, France
1 1 Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,261
I ! Int. a.3 F42B J/22, 9/20
U.S. CI. 102-444 17 Qaims
' ^n^^
81
closed, generally conical nose, said closed generally coni-
cal nose having an enlarged, constant diameter and gener-
ally cylindrical portion, a median small collar and a tail
provided with an enlarged portion having a uniform diam-
eter which is substantially the same as the enlarged nose
portion, said charge carrier being generally hollow and
having a narrow, circular groove positioned adjacent to
said small collar, said groove comprising a fracture line;
(b) a hollow plastic projectile coupled with said charge
carrier, said projectile including an interior opening
adapted to receive either the tail or the nose of said charge
carrier, said charge carrier and projectile including means
for assembling them into a single unit having two different
positions, a safety position in which said projectile open-
ing receives said charge carrier tail, and a firing position in
which said projectile opening receives said charge carrier
nose; and
(c) a holder coupled to said charge carrier and said projec-
tile.
4,391,200
MEDIUM DISTANCE TRANSPORT DEVICE
Roger Bajuiaz, Chemin William Barbey 22, 1292 Chambesy,
Geneva, Switzerland
per No. PCr/CH80/00049, § 371 Date Dec. 16, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 16, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02403, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 13, 1980
PCT Filed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 220,069
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, May 4, 1979,
4200/79
Int. Q.3 B61K 1/00
U.S. Q. 104-20 9 Qaims
1. Safety ammunition adapted for shooting at a reduced level
in order to minimize noise, range and physical danger, said
ammunition adapted to be used with various weapons, includ-
ing both muzzle loading and breech loading weapons, said
ammunition comprising:
(a) a plastic charge carrier, said charge carrier comprising a
small, tubular container having an interior opening and a
1. Transport device for persons, comprising at least one
passenger loading and unloading platform, track means extend-
ing along said platform an^ extending a distance away from
said platform, a plurality of passenger cabins movable on said
track means into and out of adjacency with said platform, each
cabin having a fixed floor and an upright wall extending up-
wardly from said fixed floor, each cabin having a vertically
movable floor that extends laterally outwardly from said fixed
floor, means mounting sa,id movable floor for vertical move-
ment relative to said fixed floor, means to raise said vertically
movable floor when the cabin is adjacent said platform to bring
said movable floor adjacent a level position with the platform,
means thereafter to lower said movable floor relative to said
fixed floor to permit said movable floor to pass beneath said
platform, and a door to close the cabin.
82
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,201
AQUATIC TOBOGGAN SLIDE
Kenneth I. Bailey, R.R. #2, Whitby, Ontario, Canada
Continuation of Ser. No. 174,757, Aug. 4, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 25,795, Apr. 2, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,703
Int. a.J B62B 13/06: A63G 21/18
U.S. a. 104—70 10 Qaims
1. In an aquatic toboggan slide comprising the combination
of a steeply downwardly inclined chute, a plurality of tobog-
gans dischargable down the chute, and a body of water adja-
cent the lower end of the chute, the improvement wherein:
the chute is in the shape of a trough with continuous side
walls and a load bearing bottom surface free of dangerous
projections and formed by a plurality of parallel horizon-
tal rollers extending laterally between the side walls, said
chute providing a vertical drop of at least about 20 feet
and the side walls extending higher than side walls of a
toboggan so that a toboggan and rider discharged down
the chute will be confined between the chute side walls,
the lower portion of the chute being curved so that its
discharge end is level and about 12 to about 20 inches
above the surface of the body of water, and the curvature
of the lower end of the chute being at least about 16 feet
in radius, with the rollers being closely spaced at least in
the curved lower portion of the chute;
the body of water extends a distance in feet beyond the bottom
of the chute which is at least about three times the velocity
in feet per second at which a toboggan will leave the chute;
and
each toboggan is moulded from synthetic plastics material, has
a continuous bottom wall defining the longitudinally ribbed
under surfaces inclined upwardly at its front end to a prow,
raised side walls, a resilient backless seat member at the rear
of the toboggan extending between the side walls and main-
tained spaced from the bottom wall by a filling of foamed
plastic material, a leg space extending forwardly of the seat
to, and including a foot rest near the prow of the toboggan,
and individual hand grips extending from the toboggan
structure and located inwardly of the side walls to either side
of the leg space, and between the seat and the foot rest
whereby to constrain a rider to assume a position with the
rider's hands within the walls and the rider's legs between
the rider's arms.
paperboard and each of said runners including a plurality
of spaced, parallel corrugation sections;
each of said corrugation sections including a fiat section A
attached to said deck, two leg sections B each connected
to opposite ends of said flat section, and radius of curva-
ture sections C each having a transverse axis; and
said paperboard runners having a main grain direction in
which a majority of the paperboard fibers extend in said
longitudinal direction and perpendicular to said transverse
axes to provide substantially improved structural rigidity
to said runners.
4,391,203
SECURITY APPARATUS
Frederick W. Millar, 3 Fenton Crescent, Frankston 3199,
Victoria, Australia
PCT No. PCr/AU80/00025, § 371 Date Feb. 26, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 26, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00043, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 22, 1981
PCT Filed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 243,910
Qaims priority, application Australia, Jun. 2, 1979, PD9421
Int. a.^ E05G 1/12; G08B 13/20
U.S. CI. 109—25 12 Claims
4,391,202
PAPERBOARD LOAD-SUPPORTING PALLET
Leewood C. Carter, 18 Upper Warren Way, Warren, N.J. 07060,
and Robin P. Neary, 53 Castle Way, Basking Ridge, N.J.
07920
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,930
Int. a.3 B65D 19/34
U.S. a. 108—51.3 28 Qaims
1. A paperboard load-supporting pallet, comprising:
a flat deck formed of a plurality of layers of paperboard;
a plurality of runners extending in a longitudinal direction
and attached to the bottom surface of said deck;
each of said runners being formed of a plurality of layers of
1. A transportable security container comprising: a hollow
receptacle for receiving valuables; an enclosure surrounding
the hollow receptacle such as to form between the enclosure
and the receptacle a chamber enveloping the receptacle; a
chute extending from an opening in the enclosure and through
the chamber and into the interior of the receptacle through
which to deposit valuables into the receptacle; a flexible dia-
phragm incorporated in the wall of the receptacle and movable
in response to changes of pressure within the chamber; a pack
of dye disposed within the receptacle; and means to cause
discharge of the dye in response to movement of the dia-
phragm on change of pressure within the chamber.
4,391,204
SECURITY CABINETS FOR HOTEL ROOMS
Ernst K, Mitchell, Mt. Qemens, and Richard H. Terry, Bloom-
field Hills, both of Mich., assignors to Safekeepcr Systems,
Inc., Troy, Mich.
Filed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,653
Int. a.3 E05G 3/00, 1/04
U.S. a. 109—39 ♦ Claims
1. A security cabinet including a door frame and a door
hingedly mounted thereon,
said door having front and rear panels in spaced relation,
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
83
a latch keeper in said door frame,
a tamper detector alarm mounted inside said door,
a latch mechanism mounted in the door and having a mov-
able latch plate and a bolt movable therewith adapted to
engage said latch keeper when the door is closed and the
latch plate is moved from a retracted position to an ex-
tended position,
a key-lock mounted in said latch mechanism and having a
cylinder adapted to receive a user's key through the front
panel of said door,
said key-lock including a cam coacting with said latch bolt
and adapted to moveMt between said retracted and ex-
tended positions,
r
\t^^"^
7
' \.
) --g
\
dw-^-^-=^
^/e
1^.
Ml
10}
a coin detector mounted in the door and including a detain-
ing lever adapted to engage said latch plate for blocking
movement thereof to the extended position unless a valid
coin is deposited in said coin detector, whereby said latch
plate may be actuated to the fully extended position by
rotation of the user's key only when a valid coin is depos-
ited,
a coin box mounted in the door and adapted to receive coins
from said coin detector,
said rear panel of said door being movably mounted on said
front panel for movement between closed and open posi-
tions whereby said rear panel may be opened for servicing
of said latch mechanism, coin box and coin detector,
a lock means for said rear panel.
4,391,205
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR BURNING GREEN
WOOD CHIPS
Noryal K. Morey, Box 97, Winn, Mich. 48896
1 1 Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,947
1 1 Int. a.3 F23G 5/04
U.S. a. 110-224 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for burning wood chips comprising a wood
chips combusting furnace with an exhaust conduit communi-
cating therewith and leading out of said furnace, a top vented
vertically extending silo, separate from said furnace to prevent
combustion of its contents but adjacent thereto, filled with a
stack of porous cellular wood chips to provide a silo-encased
continuous vertical chip column of substantial height, feed
means for feeding wood chips from the lower end of said stack
to said furnace, supply means for supplying moisture laden
wood chips to the upper end of said silo to replenish chips
withdrawn from said silo by said feed means, and manifold
means on said silo to which said exhaust conduit leads commu-
nicating with the exhaust conduit of said furnace for peripher-
ally discharging combustion gases from said furnace into the
periphery of the stack of chips in said silo at a location below
the top of said stack of chips contained therein to dry the chips
in the upper portion of said stack as said gases pass upwardly
therethrough to be vented from the top of said silo and to filter
contaminants from said gases, said manifold means comprising
a manifold band substantially surrounding said silo above the
said feed means and substantially below and remote from the
said wood chips supply means, there being perforations in the
wall of said silo at said band placing the interior of said silo in
communication with said manifold whereby combustion gases
pass from said manifold into said stack perimetrally through
said perforations.
4,391,206
TUBULAR ROTARY FURNACE FOR INCINERATING
REFUSE AND THE LIKE, WITH INNER
DEMOUNTABLE GRID
Silvano Matteini, Via Bellosgu^do 4A, Florence, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 3,906, Jan. 16, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 202,897
Claims priority, application Italy, Jan. 18, 1978, 11535/78[U]
Int. Q.' F23G 5/06
U.S. Q. 110-246 5 Qaims
1. A rotary cylindrical furnace for incinerating refuse and
the like comprising: ,
an outer wall; '
grid means mounted about the inner periphery of said outer
wall;
with respect to the direction of rotation of said furnace, the
forward edge of said grid means being spaced a greater
distance apart from said outer wall than the rearward edge
of said grid means so that said grid means are inclined with
respect to said wall; and
said grid means not extending into the central area of said
. furnace.
84
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,207
METHOD OF CONDITIONING EXHAUST GASES FROM
COAL nRING
Helge H, Petersen, Copenhagen, Denmark, assignor to F. L.
Smidth & Co., Cresskill, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 60,598, Jul. 25, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,795
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 25, 1979,
31061/78
Int. CI.3 F23B 7/00
U.S. a. 110—342 10 Qaims
1. A method of conditioning exhaust gases, containing sub-
stantial amounts of dust and lesser amounts of fly ash, from
burnmg processes in a kiln plant, with an electrostatic precipi-
tator, for the treatment of mineral materials which produce the
substantial amounts of dust during treatment comprising:
(a) taking a solid fuel;
(b) adding to said fuel at least one alkali-metal compound;
(c) grinding said solid fuel and alkali-metal compound such
that at least a portion of the fuel assumes a solid pulverized
condition;
(d) feeding into a rotary kiln mineral materials which, upon
burning, produce substantial amounts of dust;
(e) introducing said fuel into the rotary kiln in its ground
condition;
(0 firing the treated, solid ground fuel in the kiln to bum the
mineral materials thereby producing a mineral product
and exhaust gases containing the substantial amounts of
dust and lesser amounts of fly ash which now contain
alkali-metal to reduce resistance;
(g) separating the exhaust gases and the alkali-metal and dust
and fly ash by precipitation in the electrostatic precipita-
tor; and
(h) recovering the conditioned exhaust gases.
high enough to maintain the temperature of the afterburner
within preselected limits to remove malodorous exhaust gases,
and (11) controlling the temperatures of the combustion
hearths by supplying air to the individual hearths in amounts
sufficient to control the temperatures of said individual hearths
at temperatures at or below preselected maximum tempera-
tures, which temperatures are below that which would cause
thermal stress in the furnace parts.
18. In a method of incinerating combustible waste in a multi-
ple hearth furnace containing a series of superimposed hearths
which comprises feeding the combustible waste at the upper
end of the furnace and passing the waste downward through a
series of combustion hearths, supplying air to the combustion
hearths to combust the waste material and discharging the
inert solid products of combustion at the lower end of the
furnace, while the gaseous products of combustion flow up-
ward countercurrent to the flow of waste material through the
SJ-UDGE
4,391,208
METHOD FOR CONTROLLING TEMPERATURES IN
THE AFTERBURNER AND COMBUSTION HEARTHS OF
A MULTIPLE HEARTH FURNACE
Frederick M. Lewis, Mountain View, Calif., assignor to Sterling
Drug, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,021
Int. a.J F23G 5/04
U.S. a. 110—346 23 Claims
1. In a method of incinerating combustible waste in a multi-
ple hearth furnace containing a series of superimposed hearths
which comprises feeding the combustible waste at the upper
end of the furnace and passing the waste downward through a
series of combustion hearths, supplying air to the combustion
hearths to combust the waste material, and discharging the
inert solid products of combustion at the lower end of the
furnace, while the gaseous products of combustion flow up-
ward countercurrent to the flow of waste material through the
hearths and into an afterburner to remove the malodorous
gases and/or pollutants, said afterburner being located after
the uppermost waste handling hearth, the improvement
wherein the temperatures of the afterburner and individual
combustion hearths of the multiple hearth furnace are simulta-
neously controlled by:
(A) splitting the waste feed between (1) the uppermost waste
handling hearth and (2) the hearth directly below the
uppermost waste handling hearth in such proportions as to
control the temperature of the afterburner to a tempera-
ture within preselected limits; and
(B) controlling the supply of combustion air to the individual
combustion hearths in sufficient quantities so as to o|jerate
the combustion hearths at a temperature at or below a
preselected maximum temperature;
wherein said steps (A) and (B) are synchronized in response to
the temperature of the afterburner and also in response to the
temperatures in the individual combustion hearths by (1) con-
trolling the temperature of the uppermost waste handling
hearth below temperatures which would result in thermal
stress of the furnace parts beyond safe operating limits and yet
/ / // /i> / //7 / //^ /^
hearths and into an afterburner to remove the malodorous
gases and/or pollutants, said afterburner being located after
the uppermost waste handling hearth, the improvement com-
prising directing high velocity jets of small amounts of air into
the respective individual combustion hearths at constant air
flow rates in amounts sufficient to promote a cyclonic gas flow
and create turbulence to ensure uniform mixing of the air and
combustion gases so that the temperature in an individual
hearth accurately represents the combustion conditions therein
and directing large cross-section low velocity streams of air
from main air combustion jets into the respective individual
combustion hearths for supplying the bulk of the combustion
air to control the combustion in the hearths, said air flow rates
from the main combustion jets being varied in accordance with
the amount of air needed to control the temperatures of the
individual hearths in response to the respective temperature of
the individual hearths.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
85
4,391,209
EXOTHERMIC CUTTING ELECTRODE
Paul E. Moore, Lancaster, Ohio, assignor to Arcair Company,
Lancaster, Ohio
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,118
Int. C1.3 F23B 7/00
U.S. a. 110—349 16 Claims
distance said transport means moves said tag from said
tag supply; and
gauge means coupled to said distance controlling means
and adjustable to accommodate the width of said tag,
adjustment of said gauge means causing proportional
adjustment of said distance controlling means such that
the distance said transport means moves said tag is
precisely that required to bring the same to said tag
attaching station.
1. An exothermic cutting electrode for use on land or under-
water of the type comprising a metal tube within which are
disposed a plurality of elongated metallic rods or wires the
electrode adapted to be held by a torch for conducting electri-
cal current to said electrode and a gaseous oxidant through
said electrode for ignition and continuation of combustion of
the free end of said electrode producing a high temperature
flame whereby said electrode and said flame can be brought
into contact with a workpiece for performing a cutting opera-
tion thereon the improvement comprising:
an inner tube of a metal of the same general type as said outer
tube, said inner tube disposed within and spaced apart
from said outer tube thus defining an annulus between said
tubes;
a mass of metal disposed in said annulus said metal being of
the same general type of metal as said inner and outer
tubes said electrode constructed to cause flow of gaseous
oxidant through said inner tube to produce a jet of oxygen
and flame at the free end of said electrode.
4,391,210
TAG ATTACHING MACHINE
Michitoshi Watanabe, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Tomoe Spe-
cial Machine Co., Ltd., Nagoya, Japan
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,613
Int. CV D05B 3/20
U.S. O. 112—104 18 Qaims
1. A tag attaching machine comprising:
a feed assembly for feeding tags one at a time from a tag
supply to a tag attaching station;
a tag attaching assembly for attaching a tag to an article at
the tag attaching station; and
a control network for controlling the sequence of operations
performed by the feed assembly and the tag attaching
assembly;
said feed assembly comprising:
transport means for moving a tag from the tag supply
toward the tag attaching station;
means coupled to said transport means for controlling the
4,391,211
AUTOMATIC SEWING MACHINE
Yoshikazu Yamamoto, and Toshiaki Yanagi, both of Nagoya,
Japan, assignors to Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Na-
goya, Japan
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,993
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1979, 54-154055
Int. OX? D05B 21/00
U.S. Q. 112—121.12 9 Qaims
/^^5H^^-
1. In an automatic sewing machine having
stitch forming instrumentalities including an endwise recip-
rocatory needle, the combination comprising
a drive motor for reciprocating the needle to produce
stitches in a workpiece,
drive means operative to vary the relative position between
the needle and the workpiece,
stitch instruction storage means for storing stitch instruc-
tions capable of influencing the relative positions to form
a stitch pattern,
means operative synchronously with reciprocation of the
needle for extracting the stitch instruction from the stitch
instruction storage means in a predetermined sequence,
position control means responsive to the extracted stitch
instruction for controlling operation of the drive means
between successive stitches in the stitch pattern,
processing means for scanning all of said stitch instructions
in said stitch instruction storage means to determine a
maximum permissible speed of said drive motor depend-
ing on the variation of said relative position between
successive stitches in said stitch pattern and for starting
said drive motor to form said stitch pattern after determi-
nation of the maximum permissible speed, and
speed control means for limiting the actual speed of said
drive motor to no more than said maximum permissible
sr>eed during formation of said stitch pattern.
4391,212
ELECTRONIC CONTROL SEWING MACHINE
Yoshimichi Tamiya, Narita-Higashi; Yasukata Eguchi, Kunita-
chi, and Hachiro Makabe, Fussa, all of Japan, assignors to
Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,289
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 5, 1979, 54/128660
Int. Q.3 D05B 3/02
U.S. Q. 112—158 E 3 Qaims
1. A sewing machine having electronically controlled means
to change the lateral position of the needle relative to the fabric
to be sewn, comprising
1032 O.G.
86
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a first memory (ROMl) for storing control data for produc-
ing different patterns of stitches including data for produc-
ing straight stitches, said first memory having input termi-
nals for receiving address signals and output terminals for
releasing control signals for lateral swing of the needle
and fabric feed control signals;
stitch pattern selecting means coupled to the input terminals
of said first memory to release at the output terminals of
the same a set of selected control signals;
a second memory (ROM2) for storing automatic setting data
specific to individual stitch patterns stored in the first
memory, said second memory having input terminals
connected to said pattern selecting means and output
feeder for moving said hook eye in an ascending path
having an upper reversal point and a descending path;
- A8
Hs-sa
AND ORi
GbJ
I
AUI
"-(l
zz:
BO
'§){^-"^
ANO'ORa
AU2
-
"^m
Gf{
--
^
FO
terminals for releasing automatic setting data for the lat-
eral swing of the needle and fabric feed automatic setting
data;
operator controlled setting means (VRl, VR2) for releasing
optional needle swing setting data and fabric feed setting
data for the selected stitch patterns independently from
the automatic setting data in the second memory; and
calculating means (AUI, AU2) having input terminals for
receiving the corTtrol signals from the first memory
(ROMl), the automatic setting data from the second mem-
ory (ROM2) or the setting data from the setting means
(VRl, VR2) to calculate the stich coordinates for each of
the stitches of the selected pattern, and output terminals
connected to said electronically controlled means.
said thread catcher including a hook eye being aligned in an
operative position with the hook eye of said thread feeder
at said upper reversal point of said ascending path for
catching a thread loop being fed by said thread feeder.
4,391,214
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORMING AN OVERCAST
SEAM BY MEANS OF A ZIGZAG SEWING MACHINE
Helmar Holl, and Rolf Kessler, both of Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Dorina Nahmaschinen GmbH, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,415
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19,
1980, 80105642[U]
Int. CI.' D05B 1/20, 3/02
U.S. a. 112—269.1 7 Claims
4,391,213
NEEDLE THREAD GUIDE DEVICE
Ernst Dreier, Steckbom, and Kurt Spring, Kreuzlingen, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Fritz Gegauf Aktiengesellschaft
Bemina-Naehmaschinenfabrik, Steckborn, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,281
Int. a.3 D05B 49/02
U.S. a. 112—246 8 Qaims
1. A needle thread guide device for use with a sewing ma-
chine provided with a skip stitch mechanism operating at
intervals to form stitches of varying lengths comprising:
a thread feeder being operatively, articulated mounted to
oscillate in a vertical plane;
drive means operatively connected to said thread feeder for
imparting oscillating motion thereto;
a thread catcher operatively mounted adjacent to said thread
feeder;
lever means operatively connected to said thread catcher for
engaging and disengaging said thread catcher in synchro-
nism with the skip stitch mechanism;
said thread feeder including a hook eye disposed at one end
thereof;
oscillating means operatively connected to said thread
1. In a method for the formation of an overcast seam using a
zigzag sewing machine of the type having a fabric presser, a
needle bar carrying a needle with a needle thread movable into
first and second overstitch positions, the needle being movable
in axial reciprocating motions and pendulum motions selec-
tively oriented transverse thereto between the first and second
overstitch positions, a looper carrying a looper thread and a
fabric feeder for feeding a fabric in a feed direction, the method
being of the type having the steps of forming a first intertwin-
ing of the needle thread and the looper thread in the first
overstitch position, then moving the needle bar with the needle
July 5, 1983
if
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
87
thread into the second overstitch position thereby slackening
the needle thread, then forming a second intertwining needle
thread and looper thread in the second overstitch position
whereby the slackened needle thread leading from the first to
the second thread loop is pulled into the first overstitch posi-
tion to form an overstitch loop into which the needle is in-
serted to form a subsequent loop and then released, the im-
provement, in combination therewith, comprising the steps of
moving the needle bar into the second overstitch position and
concurrently feeding the fabric being sewn by one stitch length
in the feed direction.
2. In a zigzag sewing machine of the type having a fabric
presser, a needle bar carrying a needle with a needle thread
movable into first and second overstitch positions, the needle
being movable in axial reciprocating motions and pendulum
motions selectively oriented transverse thereto between the
first and second overstitch positions, A looper carrying a
looper thread, and a fabric feeder for feeding a fabric in a feed
direction, an improved device for forming an overcast seam,
the device being of the type having an oversew mandrel with
first and second means for respectively moving the mandrel
into two successive positions responsive to rotary and axial
movement of the needle to form an overstitch loop in the
needle path, and a loop stripper for disengaging the overstitch
loop from the oversew mandrel, comprising the improvement
wherein the loop stripper is movably mounted to the oversew
mandrel for movement responsive to the axial movement of
the needle bar in the first overstitch position, the loop stripper
including a first arm portion adjacent to the oversew mandrel
to supplement the formation of an overstitch loop.
4,391,215
SELF COMPENSATING OPTOELECTRONIC PLY AND
EDGE DETECTOR FOR SEWING MACHINE
Eugene A. Sansone, Belle Meade, N.J., assignor to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,660
Int. a.^ D05B 69/26. 69/20
U.S. a. 112—275 12 Qaims
1'
'■*!-
5:-n
; titff-^ti^ »^»i>«mi.-
/■ _
y
. 1.
STOP
- -5CT ^
-I .-i
^o<.iC lurOlFACK.
1. A self compensating fabric ply and edge detector for a
sewing machine having a frame including a work supporting
bed, said frame supporting a needle bar for endwise reciproca-
tion, a sewing needle fastened to one end of said needle bar, a
throat plate, a needle accommodating orifice extending
through said throat plate, a loop taker supported beneath said
throat plate for cooperation with said sewing needle extending
through said needle accommodating orifice in the formation of
stitches, means for feeding a work fabric through said sewing
machine beneath said sewing needle, said fabric ply and edge
detector comprising: a light sensing device, means for support-
ing said light sensing device in said work supporting bed before
said needle accommodating orifice in the direction of feed of
said work fabric, a source of light for said light sensing device,
means for establishing a DC level related to average light
reaching said light sensing device, means for passing an AC
component of a change in incident light reaching said light
sensing device, means for variably diverting current in re-
sponse lo said AC component from said passing means, means
for supplying current related to said average light for diversion
by said diverting means, and means for initiating a selected
response on diversion of current by said diverting means sub-
stantially greater than that related to said average light.
4,391,216
FEED MECHANISM FOR SEWING MACHINES
James C. Hsiao, Morton Grove, III., assignor to Union Special
Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,410
Int. Cl.^ D05B 27/02. 27/22
U.S. O. 112—316 27 Qaims
.r<>--^
a*
so
143
,142
, < . I '143
,<^
W ^100
9. A sewing machine having a frame, work support means,
revoluble shaft means arranged in the frame beneath the work
support means, eccentric means arranged on said shaft means
and a work feeding mechanism capable of forward and reverse
feeding comprising:
elongated feed bar means having feed dog means arranged at
the distal end thereof for movement in a generally orbital
path, said feed dog means being adapted to engage and
convey a workpiece over said support means;
drive mechanism means including a series of interconnected
linkages ojseratively associated with said eccentric means
and said feed bar means;
operator actuated shiftable means associated with said drive
mechanism means for translating movement between said
eccentric and the feed bar means and capable of selec-
tively varying the direction and amount of workpiece
movement as a function of its disposition; and
feed regulating means including an aligned spaced pair of
limit means provided with a singular adjustment member
for independently controlling both limit means whereby
controlling the degree of movement and disposition of
said shiftable means and thereby the direction and amount
of workpiece movement.
88
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391^17
SIZE PRESS WITH COATING POOL SUPPRESSING
ARRANGEMENT
Erkki Koski, Jyviiskyla, Finland, assignor to Valmet OY, Fin-
land
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,426
Claims priority, application Finland, Not. 28, 1980, 803708
Int a.3 B05C 3/12
U.S. a. 118—405 10 Oaims
4,391,218
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING
CORROSION-RESISTANT LAYER AND SURFACE
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCHVE LAYER ON CABLE AND
APPARATUS FOR PRACTIONG SAME
Takahiro Horikawa; Yutaka Hibino, and Seiichi Maki, all of
Osaka, Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Electric Industries,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 152,959, May 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,315,883.
This application Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,457
Claims priority, application Japan, May 25, 1979, 54-65147
Int. a.3 B05D 3/12. 1/24
U.S. CI. 118—621 6 Claims
4 3
1. Apparatus for forming an electrically conductive layer on
a corrosion-resistant surface of a cable comprising:
a powder accumulating tank having an inlet and outlet for
passing a cable through said tank through a layer formed
by accumulating electrically conductive powder therein
to allow said p>owder to adhere to the surface of said cable,
and a cloth pipe in said outlet for pressing said powder
against said cable at the cable outlet of said powder accu-
mulating tank;
powder applying means for pressing said powder against
said cable with a powder applying belt to cause said pow-
der to more firmly adhere to said cable, said power apply-
^ ing means comprising a rotary unit rotated at a speed in
proportion to the sp>eed of passage of said cable through
said powder applying means and an endless powder apply-
ing belt arranged in said rotary unit in such a manner that
said endless powder applying belt is tensioned and presses
against at least a portion of the surface of said cable;
heating means for heating without surface contact the sur-
face of said cable to melt binder powder mixed with said
electrically conductive powder; and
cooling means for blowing air onto the surface of said cable
for cooling said cable;
said powder accumulating tank, said powder applying
means, said heating means and said cooling means being
arranged in the stated order.
4,391,219
IONIC STRIP COATER
Edward J. Schaming, P.O. Box 1070, Butler, Pa. 16001
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,643
Int. a.3 B05B 5/04, 7/08
U.S. a. 118—630 5 Oaims
1. A size press having at least two coating rollers forming
with each other at least one coating nip through which the web
to be treated is arranged to run and coating pools at the en-
trance of the nip between the coating rollers and the web
entering said nip, said size press comprising
coating supply apparatus for supplying a coating agent to
said coating pools, said coating supply apparatus including
filling pieces at said entrance of said nip placed in said
coating pools in operation, said filling pieces consisting of
one of a liquid permeable porous, and perforated material
and suppressing said coating pools and substantially de-
creasing and preventing splashing of the coating agent.
'^
1. An apparatus for coating a high speed moving strip with
a liquid comprising liquid header delivery means for position-
ing on at least one side of the strip in spaced relation thereto so
as to deliver multiple streams of liquid onto the strip, and
simultaneously operable pressurized air spray delivery means
directing an air spray onto said streams and dispersing the
streams into a multitude of much finer liquid streams in a
crossing pattern to completely and uniformly coat said strip,
the air spray delivery means substantially surrounding the
liquid header and having an outlet substantially in registration
with the outlet of the header, and the liquid header and air
spray delivery means comprising eccentrically interfitting
cylindrical bodies, and means to adjust the eccentric relation-
ship of the bodies one with respect to the other.
4,391,220
APPARATUS FOR APPLYING FLUID TO ARTICLES
William C. Kent, Garland, Tex., assignor to Western Electric
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,875
Int. a.3 B05C 3/10. 11/00. 13/02
U.S. a. 118—707 10 Oaims
1. An apparatus for applying liquid to an article, which
comprises:
an enclosure having an entry door movable from an open to
a closed position;
a tank within the enclosure for receiving a quantity of liquid;
a holder for supporting an article with a section extending
downwardly toward said tank;
an elevator mechanism for lowering the holder from a load
position toward said tank to move the extending section of
the article within said tank, aod then return said holder to
the load position;
means responsive to the closure of said entry door for oper-
ating said elevator mechanism;
July 5, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
89
means responsive to the closure of said entry door for filling
said tank with liquid; and
4,391,222
h&
MILK METER FOR MEASURING THE TOTAL AMOUNT
OF MILK FROM A COW IN THE COURSE OF A
MILKING
Friedrich Icking, Oelde, and Friedrich Stolte, Halle, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Westfalia Separator AG,
Oelde, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,646
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 4,
1981, 3103669
Int. 0.3 AOIJ 7/00
U.S. O. 119—14.17
11 Oaims
means rendered effective during the return of said elevator
mechanism to the load position for draining the liquid
from said tank.
4,391,221
METHOD FOR MECHANICAL MILK REMOVAL
Tilman Hoefelmayr, Niederteufen, Switzerland, and Jakob
Maier, Tiirkheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bi-
omelktedinik Hoefelmayr & Co., Niederteufen, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 225,938
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21,
1980, 3001963; Dec. 17, 1980, 3047579
Int. CV AOIJ 5/16
U.S. O. 119—14.08 35 Oaims
1. In a milk meter for milking installations, for the direct
measurment of the amount of milk given by a cow during
milking, having a separating chamber including a floor, a roof
and an outside wall, means for creating a partial vacuum in the
separating chamber to effect the separation of the air from the
milked milk-air mixture, a measuring chamber, means provid-
ing fluid communication between the measuring chamber and
the separating chamber including a permanently open inlet
aperture in the measuring chamber, two sensors situated at
difl"erent levels, one above the other, in the measuring chamber
for effecting discrete quantity measurements while milk is*
constantly being fed to the separating chamber, an outlet open-
ing in the separating chamber adjacent the floor thereof and an
actuatable valve for opening and closing the outlet opening,
the improvement wherein:
the inlet aperture of the measuring chamber is disposed
adjacent the floor of the separating chamber and the fluid
communication means comprises means forming a weir
extending from the floor of the separating chamber up-
wardly into the separating chamber with the upper edge
— thereof disposed at a higher level than the inlet aperture,
terminating at the outside wall of the separating chamber
and having means defining at least one drain hole there-
through.
4,391,223
CARDBOARD HOUSE FOR PETS
Gwendolyn B. Holland, and John W. Holland, both of 97 Gay
Bower Rd., Monroe, Conn. 06468
Filed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,345
Int. 0.5 AOIK 1/00
U.S. O. 119—19 10 Oaims
1. In a method for mechanical milk removal in which a
predetermined underpressure is applied to the interior of a
milking cup applied to a teat to remove the milk and a pulsation
of a teat rubber is effected at a predetermined frequency and
intensity, and while the milking cup is in place the teat is stimu-
lated during a stimulation phase for a predetermined interval
prior to the principal milking operation, the improvement
comprising wherein no milk is removed for an interval in the
range of 40 to 90 seconds after commencement of the stimula-
tion phase and only immediately subsequently thereto is milk 1. A one-piece cardboard house for an animal or pet, com-
removal begun and wherein the pulsation frequency during the prising in combination:
stimulation phase is higher than in the milk removal phase. (a) a bottom panel constituting a floor.
90
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
(b) front and rear panels, and two side panels, each of said
panels having two substantially vertical edge portions and
being integral with the bottom panel, thereby being
adapted to form the four walls of the house,
(c) a pair of roof panels having free edge portions, said roof
panels being integral with each other and with one of the
side panels of the house, and being hingedly connected
with each other and adapted to form a peaked roof,
(d) means releasably joining one free edge portion of one
roof panel to the other of said side panels,
(e) means releasably holding the vertical edge portions of the
front and rear panels adjacent to corresponding edge
portions of the side panels of the house, and
(0 means providing an entrance passage at the front of the
house, said entrance passage being defined by edge por-
tions of the front panel and by adjacent front edge por-
tions of the said roof panels,
(g) said front panel having a deep and wide notch in its top
edge portion, outlining the bottom of said entrance pas-
sage.
4,39U24
ANIMAL AMUSEMENT APPARATUS
Harold A. Adler, 1457 Eastwind Cir., Westlake Village, Calif.
91361
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,191
Int. a.3 AOIK 29/00
U.S. a. 119— 29 aaaims
1
-10
-12
V
1. Animal attraction apparatus comprising:
motor means for operating only when actuated;
transmitter means for transmitting a signal;
receiver means having an output coupled in actuation rela-
tionship to said motor means, said receiver means being
for receiving said signal and, when said signal as received
is of predetermined power, for causing actuation of said
motor means;
attachment means for carrying said transmitter means and
for mounting on a domesticated animal of the predator
type; and
simulated prey means which is normally unmoving and
which, when in motion, tends to attract such animal, said
prey means being for carrying said motor means and
coupled to said motor means so that said motor means,
when actuated, operates to cause said prey means to
move;
said transmitter means and receiver means having a signal
transmitting and receiving power relationship such that,
when said transmitter means is carried by such animal to
within a predetermined distance of said prey means, said
* receiver means actuates said motor means to cause said
prey means to move.
(1) one end having means for attaching said valve to a
source of fluid supply;
(2) a fluid conducting passageway;
(3) a valve seat located in said passageway; and
(4) an opposite end having a cut away portion to expose a
portion of said passageway;
(b) a valve member positioned in said passageway and hav-
ing a valve head and valve stem that extends through said
valve seat and has a free end that projects into said ex-
posed portion of said passageway;
(c) a resilient seal member positioned between said valve
head and said valve seat;
(d) an abutment member secured in said one end of said
passageway and having at least one fluid conducting
throughbore and a cone shaped apex end in engagement
with the head of said valve member to normally bias said
head in sealing contact against said sealing member pre-
venting fluid flow through said valve but permitting said
valve head to pivot about said apex;
(e) said valve being actuable by an animal pressing on the
free end of said valve stem to pivot said valve head from
sealing contact with said sealing member by compressing
a portion of said seal member, to thereby permit fluid flow
through said valve.
4,391,226
DOG LEASH
Richard A. Guthrie, 652 N. 94th PI., Mesa, Ariz. 85207
Continuation of Ser. No. 63,661, Sep. 10, 1979, abandoned, and
Ser. No. 199,439, Oct. 22, 1980, abandoned. This application
Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,186
Int. a.3 AOIK 27/00
U.S. a. 119—109 10 Oaims
431,225
SPRINGLESS NIPPLE WATERER VALVE
Jacob D. Sparks, 1005 W. Third, Indianola, Iowa 50125
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,052
Int. C\? AOIK 7/00
U.S. a. 119—72.5 4 Qaims
1. A springless nipple waterer valve that is actuable by an
animal to provide fluids thereto, comprising:
(a) A valve body having
1. In a leash device:
(a) a leash line having an entrance end and an exit end;
(b) a housing constructed and arranged to lodge in the palm
of a user's first hand;
(c) said housing comprising a leash line entrance opening
situate in a first surface of said housing facing away from
the palm of a user's first hand, a leash line exit opening
situate in a second surface of said housing facing away
from the user, and a leash line passageway between said
entrance opening and said exit opening, said leash line
passageway comprising a bearing surface for said leash
line;
(d) within said housing, adjacent said bearing surface, vari-
able mechanical compression means for compressing said
leash line against said bearing surface;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
91
(e) outside said housing and adjacent thereto, mechanical
control means for controlling the compression of said
variable mechanical compression means;
(0 said leash line being constructed and arranged to pass
through said housing in either direction by passing
through said entrance opening, then through said passage-
way adjacent said bearing surface and said variable me-
chanical compression means, then out of said housing
through said exit opening; and
(g) said leash device being constructed and arranged so that
a user's second hand, by controlling said entrance end of
said leash line, will control an animal connected to said
exit end of said leash line when said mechanical control
means is in a non-compression position.
4,391,227
FLUID-HEATING APPARATUS
Siegfried FSrster, Alsdorf; Peter Quell, Aachen-Haaren, and
Huber Jaegers, Jiilich-Welldorf, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Kernforschungsanlage Jiilich GmbH, Jiilich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,258
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 14,
1980, 3014245
Int. CI.3 F22B 5/00
U.S.a. 122— 16 13 Claims
?i
I %I10 12' 15 12 ,2
4.391,228
FALLING SHOT HEATING METHOD AND APPARATUS
A. Joe Reinert, Ponca City, Okla., assignor to Conoco Inc.,
Ponca City, Okla.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,652
Int. a.3 F22B 1/02
U.S. a. 122—28 15 Claims
1. A heating unit comprising:
a ceramic burner body formed with a plurality of parallel
slit-like passages at least some of which open at a side of
said body;
means for supplying a fuel to alternate ones of said passages
of said burner body and for supplying a combustion-sus-
taining gas to the remainder of said passages whereby a
combustible gas mixture is formed at said side of said
body;
means defining a combustion chamber at said side of said
body and into which said some of said openings discharge
whereby hot combustion gases are formed in said combus-
tion chamber;
a ceramic recuperator body constituting a unitary ceramic
structure with said ceramic burner body and said means
defining said combustion chamber, said recuperator body
being formed with mutually parallel slit-like channels,
alternate ones of said channels communicating with said
combustion chamber for conducting said hot combustion
gases therefrom; and
means for passing a fluid to be heated through others of said
channels in a direction counter to the flow of said combus-
tion gases for heat exchange between said fluid and said
combustion gases through walls of said recuperator body
between said channels.
j-JJ--
1. A process for the heating of an aqueous fluid comprising:
(a) circulating an aqueous fluid into a heating zone;
(b) heating a heat-transfer medium to a temperature above its
melting point to produce molten heat-transfer medium at
an elevation above said heatmg zone and establishing a
reservoir of said molten heat-transfer medium above said
heating zone;
(c) sparging said molten medium downwardly through said
heating zone whereby the sparged molten medium solidi-
fies to form shot particles and said fluid is heated by said
medium as it is cooled and solidified;
(d) recovering hot aqueous fluid from said heating zone;
(e) recovering cooled shot particles from said heating zone;
and
(0 recirculating said shot particles and heating said shot
particles to produce molten heat-trasfer medium in accor-
dance with step (b).
4,391,229
STEAM INJECTION APPARATUS
Larry G. Turner, 1005 Vine St., Collinsville, III. 62234
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,739
Int. C1.3 F02D 79/00
U.S. a. 123—25 B 4 Qaims
1. A steam injection apparatus for an internal combustion
engine having an exhaust system, and a vacuum line communi-
cating with the engine, comprising:
(a) a reservoir of liquid water,
(b) conduit means communicating with the reservoir,
(c) heater means, including a coil of metallic tubing having
an inlet communicating with the conduit means, and an
outlet communicating with the vacuum line, the coil being
placed in heat-receiving relation to the engine exhaust
system for heating water in the coil, and
(d) metering means including an air inlet connected in the
conduit means for mixing air with water from the reser-
voir, and means carried by the air inlet for selectively
92
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
controlling the amount of air entering the conduit means
at a predetermined engine vacuum and thereby solely and
selectively regulating the amount of water flow through
the conduit means.
4,391,230
WATER-ALCOHOL INJECTION APPARATUS FOR I.C.E.
Eugene B. Pesce, 1724 S. Quince St., Escondido, Calif. 92025,
and James A. Krikava, 1110 Lancer La., West, Tarpon
Springs, Fla. 33589
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 242,021
Int. a.3 F02D 19/00; F02M 25/02
U.S. a. 123—25 E 5 Qaims
1. An injection apparatus for injecting a fluid mixture of
water and alcohol into a fuel distribution system for an internal
combustion engine, the fuel distribution system including
a carburetor having a throttle valve, the carburetor being
connected to the intake manifold of an internal combus-
tion engine which includes a crankcase,
said apparatus comprising a reservoir for said fluid mixture,
first conduit means connected to said manifold downstream
from said throttle valve,
second conduit means connected to said manifold upstream
from said throttle valve,
main passage means connecting said first and second conduit
means to said reservoir,
one way flow control means in said main passage means for
controlling the flow of fluid mixture to the manifold,
and a third conduit means connected between said first
conduit means and the crankcase of the engine,
said third conduit means including a pressure-compensating
valve positioned to vent crankcase emissions to said first
conduit means.
4,391,231
CYLINDER HEAD FOR AIR-COOLED ENGINES
Yoshikazu TateBe; Masafumi Egami, and Toshimitsu
Miyawaki, all of Nagoya, Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi
Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,593
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1980, 55-27882[U]
Int. C1.3 FOIP 1/02
U.S. a. 123—41.69 2 Claims
1^ 31213
X'
-w
1. A cylinder head with a head body for an overhead valve, \
air-cooled engine having a rocker arm chamber (c), a suction
port (21) and an exhaust port (7), comprising a part of a top
wall of the cylinder head being depressed downwardly to form
said rocker arm chamber (c) and deflning a top of a first cool-
ing wind passage (H) which extends over an upper part (15) of
said suction portion, said part of the top wall of the cylinder
head extending from a side of said exhaust port (7), said first
passage (H) formed between a bottom wall (14) of said rocker
arm chamber (c) and an upper wall of a cylinder fitting surface
(10) of said head, said suction port (21) extending from a top of
said upper wall of said cylinder fitting surface, a fin (17) ex-
tending around said first passage on a side thereof opposite said
exhaust port (7), and a cooling wind guide (19) for guiding a
cooling wind to a spark plug side of head, formed integrally
with said cylinder head body on a side thereof opposite said
cooling first cooling wind passage (H) and near said exhaust
port (7) to form a second cooling wind passage (K), said first
and second passages passing on opposite sides of said exhaust
port.
4,391,232
INTERNAL-COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH OPPOSED
PISTONS
Marcel J. Geirnaert, Assesteenweg 360, B-1741, Wambeek-Ter-
nat, Belgium
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,317
Oaims priority, application Belgium, Mar. 27, 1980, 199984
Int. a.3 F02B 75/28
U.S. a. 123—51 BA 3 Qaims
1. An internal-combustion engine comprising a housing
including at least one cylinder unit comprising a cylinder bore
with two opposed pistons each having two working faces
slidably mounted therein and with fuel admission means, first,
second, third and fourth annular channels extending around
and adjacent the wall of the cylinder bore over a portion of the
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
93
length thereof, each of said annular channels being in commu-
nication with the interior volume of the cylinder bore through
spaced apart openings, the first and fourth annular channels
being located at one end of the cylinder bore and the second
and third annular channels being located at the opposite end of
the cylinder bore; transfer channel means having a length
extending lengthwise of the cylinder bore and extending
around and adjacent a portion of the wall of the cylinder bore,
said transfer channel means being in direct communication
with said first second and third annular channels; air intake
pipe means extending lengthwise adjacent and along the length
of said transfer channel means, a common partition between
the air intake pipe means and the transfer channel means along
the length of said transfer channel means, said common parti-
tion having a plurality of spaced apart apertures therethrough
distributed lengthwise of the transfer channel means, said
apertures having one-way low-inertia gate means allowing a
high rate of air flow from the air intake pipe means through the
transfer channel into the cylinder bore and substantially no air
flow back from the cylinder bore through the transfer channel
means into the air intake pipe means; and an exhaust pipe
connected to said fourth annular channel for discharge of the
spent products of combustion.
4,391,233
IIVTERNALCOMBUSTION ENGINE
Rudolph Jackisch, 3927 N. Elston Ave., Chicago, 111. 60618
1 1 Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,874
Int. a.3 F02B 75/16
U.S. a. 123—61 R 13 Claims
^^^^^"rf^^n
^^.
volume ratio of approximately 6:1 to approximately 12:1
as to each other;
said working piston being provided with an engaging piece
with which a stop on the piston rod of said auxiliary piston
coacts so that during at least part of the decompression
phase thereof, said working piston drives said auxiliary
piston;
an intermediate space connecting each auxiliary chamber
with an associated combustion chamber in which said
intermediate space widens out from said auxiliary cham-
ber toward said combustion chamber like a Venturi tube,
each auxiliary chamber being in constant open communi-
cation with its associated combustion chamber via said
intermediate space during the entire working cycle of said
engine;
an inlet nozzle for each of said combustion chambers for
supplying fuel thereto, each inlet nozzle opening into an
associated intermediate space and being controlled in the
working cycle of said auxiliary piston, and
wherein during the return in the decompression phase, said
auxiliary piston is forcibly controlled by said working
piston and, during the compression stroke, is moved by
means of action of a spring acting on said auxiliary piston
which is greater than the maximum compression pressure.
4,391,234
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE COMPRISING
MEANS FOR CONTROLLING THE AXIAL EXTENT OF A
PORT IN A CYLINDER
Johann Holzleitner, Gunskirchen, Austria, assignor to Bombar-
dier-Rotax G.m.b.H., Gunskirchen, Austria
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,939
Qaims priority, application Austria, Dec. 18, 1980, 6172/80
Int. Q.' F02D 9/06. F02B 75/02
U.S. Q. 123—65 V 4 Qaims
1. An internal combustion engine, having an entire working
cycle including combustion air therewith capable of being
brought to a compression pressure and being suitable for vari-
ous types of fuel and for single and dual piston operation,
comprising in combination:
at least one working cylinder, which includes a shell pro-
vided with a combustion chamber and a working piston
having a working cycle including bottom and top dead
center therewith;
a crankshaft to which said working piston is operatively
connected, said crankshaft including a bent section, which
includes a crank bearing rotatably mounted on said bent
section, and a crank arm connected to said working piston
and to said crank bearing;
at least one auxiliary cylinder associated with each working
cylinder and provided with a wall, each of said auxiliary
cylinders including an auxiliary chamber and an auxiliary
piston which has a piston rod and a working cycle includ-
ing a decompression phase and a compression stroke as
well as having bottom and top dead center p>ositions in
which said top and bottom dead center positions of said
auxiliary piston are determined by at least one stop device
and which moves back and forth and is forcibly controlled
in the working cycle of said working piston in which the
compression stroke takes place up to approximately 45'
after top dead center of said working piston wherein said
auxiliary piston compresses the combustion air to the
compression pressure necessary for spontaneous ignition
just prior to completion of the compression stroke, the
combustion chamber and the auxiliary chamber having a
1. In a two-stroke-cycle internal combustion engine compris-
mg
cylinder structure having an inside peripheral surface which
defines a cylinder bore and is formed with a port which
has an axial extent along the axis of said cylinder bore, said
cylinder structure being formed with a flow passage
which at one end adjoins said port and has a boundary
surface poriion which adjoins said pori at one end of said
axial extent,
a piston, which is axially reciprocable in said cylinder bore
and adapted to open and close said port, and
a pivoted restricting member which defines said flow pas-
sage on one side thereof adjacent to said pori and has a
restricting edge which faces said port and extends gener-
ally in the peripheral direction of the adjacent portion of
said inside peripheral surface, said restricting member
being angularly movable between a full-flow position, in
which said restricting edge is clear of said port, and a
restricting position, in which said restricting edge extends
94
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
across said port intermediate said axial extent and is sub-
stantially flush with said inside peripheral surface,
the improvement residing in that
said restricting member constitutes a hinged member, which
is formed with said restricting edge at one end and is
pivoted at its end that is opposite to said restricting edge.
4,391,235
VEHICLE EXHAUST GAS WARM-UP HEATER SYSTEM
David S. Majkrzak, 345 Cherry Ct., West Fargo, N. Dak. 58078
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,797
! Int. a.^ F02N n/02
U.S. a. 123—142.5 R 11 Qaims
ing said charge capacitor and said ignition SCR in series rela-
tionship with said primary winding and operative for selec-
tively preventing full discharge of said capacitor through said
primary winding for a predetermined period of time after said
ignition SCR is rendered conductive, thereby providing for
automatic spark retard at higher engine rpm.
^ff
L^hfcb^J
4,391,237
APPARATUS FOR USE IN STARTING A DIESEL ENGINE
Yoshiaki Abe, Higashimatsuyama; Yutaka Kubota, Kawagoe,
and Hitoshi Sugimoto, Higashimatsuyama, all of Japan, as-
signors to Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,384
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 12, 1980, 55/31049
Int. a.3 F02N 77/00
U.S. a. 123—179 H 13 Qaims
1. A motor vehicle exhaust gas warm-up system in combina-
tion with a motor vehicle, the motor vehicle having an engine
with a single cooling system having a liquid coolant for cooling
the engine and a conventional exhaust system with a plurality
of exhaust pipes and a muffler for conveying hot exhaust gases
from the engine, the system comprising:
heat exchanger means for transferring heat from the hot
exhaust gases to the coolant;
means for conveying only a portion of the coolant from the
engine to the heat exchanger means and back to the en-
gine, the portion being of an amount that substantial inter-
ruption of normal coolant flow in the cooling system is
avoided;
means for conveying the exhaust gases from the exhaust
system to the heat exchanger means;
a diverter valve for diverting the exhaust gases from the
exhaust system to the heat exchanger means; and
means for sensing the temperature of the coolant and for
actuating the diverter valve at a predetermined coolant
temperature to control the flow of exhaust gases to the
heat exchanger means.
I
4,391,236
CD IGNITION WITH AUTOMATIC SPARK RETARD
Philip A. Anderson, Waukegan, III., assignor to Outboard Ma-
rine Corporation, Waukegan, 111.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,699
Int. CI.5 F02D 5/04; F02P 1/00. 3/06. 1/08
U.S. a. 123—149 C 22 Qaims
1. A capacitor discharge ignition circuit adapted for use with
an internal combustion engine and for connection to an ignition
coil primary winding, said circuit comprising a charge capaci-
tor, an ignition SCR, and spark retard circuit means connect-
! 2«r .9» I S . _^^ r ~l I I I
^1
1. An apparatus for use in starting a diesel engine having at
least one glow plug energized by actuation of an ignition
switch having an OFF position, an ON position for connecting
said apparatus to a voltage source and an ST position for
starting the diesel engine, said apparatus comprising:
means including a first switch for connecting each said glow
plug to the voltage source to supply a first level of current
to each said glow plug;
means including a second switch for connecting each said
glow plug to the voltage source through a resistance
adapted to limit the current from the voltage source to
supply a second level of current below said first level to
each said glow plug;
preheating means for activating said first switch for a first
predetermined time period beginning from switching of
said ignition switch from the OFF position to the ON
position;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
95
afterglow means for activating said second switch for a
second predetermined time period beginning from the
switching of said ignition switch from the ST position to
the ON position; and
controlling means for periodically activating and de-activat-
ing said first switch to periodically supply said first level
of current and maintain the temperature of each glow plug
within a predetermined range during a period of time
occurring when said ignition switch is in the ST position.
4,391,238
AIR-COOLED INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Josef Greier, and Colin T. Pomfret, both of Graz, Austria, as-
signors to Hans List, Graz, Austria
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,745
Oaims priority, application Austria, Mar. 31, 1980, 1747/80
Int. CI.' F02F 1/02
U.S. a. 123—193 C 6 Qaims
1. An air-cooled internal combustion engine which com-
prises a crankcase which defines an inner space and an outer
space, said crankcase including at least one opening therein
which communicates between the inner space and the outer
space; a cylinder barrel fitted in each opening to extend from
the inner space to the outer space, each cylinder barrel includ-
ing a first external threaded portion located along the length
thereof in the region of- the associated opening and a second
external threaded portion located along the length thereof in
the outer space; a bearing ring positioned between each cylin-
der barrel and the associated opening in which it fits, each
bearing ring extending from the inner space to the outer space
and including a flange portion located in the inner space which
is abuttabte against the portion of the crankcase forming the
associated opening, an internal threaded portion which is co-
operable with at least said first external threaded portion of the
associated cylinder barrel, and an outer threaded portion lo-
cated on a portion thereof which is in the outer space; a ring
nut screwed on said outer threaded portion of each bearing
ring to brace the bearing ring to the portion of the crankcase
forming the associated opening; and a lock nut screwed on said
second external threaded portion of each cylinder barrel to
brace the cylinder barrel to the associated bearing ring.
more watertight boxes fitted inside the casing, the casing itself
being open to ingress of water and protecting all other water
Fa o
T^-F
-^-1
.J3
sensitive engine regions from ingress of water upon inversion
of the engine.
4,391,240
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Fukashi Sugasawa, Yokohama, and Haruhiko lizuka, Yokosuka,
both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited,
Yokohama, Japan
Filed Mar. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 134,314
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1979, 54-35015
Int. CI.3F02D 17/03
U.S. a. 123—198 F 26 Qaims
4,391,239
INVERSION PROTECTION OF OUTBOARD MARINE
ENGINES
Michael B. J. Brinton, East Cowes; John Barnes, and Peter D.
Chandler, both of Newtown, all of England, assignors to
R.N.L.I. (Trading) Limited, Dorset, England
1 1 Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,766
1 1 Int. Q.3 F02B 77/00
U.S. Q. 123—198 E 10 Qaims
1. A method of inversion-protecting an outboard marine
engine having a starter motor, spindle, and solenoid and engine
power pack including a c^il and terminal blocks located in a
main engine casing, whereiiii all of the water-sensitive electrical
equipment within the main engine casing is enclosed in one or
1. An internal combustion engine comprising:
(a) first and second cylinder units each including at least one
cylinder;
(b) an intake passage provided therein with a throttle valve
and divided downstream of said throttle valve into first
and second branches leading to said first and second cylin-
der units, respectively, said second intake passage branch
having therein a first valve means which is normally open;
(c) an exhaust passage divided into first and second branches
leading from said first and second cylinder units, respec-
tively;
(d) a first passage having one end opening into said second
exhaust passage branch and another end opening into said
second intake passage branch, said first passage having
therein a second valve means which is normally closed;
(e) fuel supply means for supplying an optimum amount of
fuel to said first and second cylinder units under varying
conditions;
(0 a load detector responsive to engine load for providing a
low load indicative signal when the engine load is below
a predetermined value;
96
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
(g) means responsive to the low load indicative signal to
inactivate said second cylinder unit;
(h) delay means responsive to the low load indicative signal
from said load detector for providing a drive signal a
predetermined time after the arrival of the low load indic-
ative signal thereto; and
(i) first valve drive means responsive to the drive signal from
said delay means for closing said first valve means and
opening said second valve means.
* ,
4,391^1
STOPPING DEVICE FOR ENGINE SUPPLIED WITH
FUEL BY FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Hidetoshi Dohshita, Okazaki; Yoshiya Ishii, Toyota, and
Nobuyuki Fujitani, Kariya, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon-
denso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,415
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 21, 1979, 54-166333
Int. a.3 P02D 77/00
U.S. a. 123—198 DB 7 Qaims
iary device to ^suspend operation of the auxiliary device
for the time period from when the acceleration rate of the
load on the driving system of the vehicle exceeds a prede-
termined level until the time the load of the driving system
of the vehicle returns to the predetermined level.
4,391,243
METHOD AND APPARATUS OF SUPPLYING FUEL IN
ELECTRONIC CONTROL FUEL INJECTION ENGINE
Hironori Bessho, Susono, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,179
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1981, 56-142535
Int. Q.3 F02D 5/02
U.S. Q. 123—325 6 Qaims
1. A stopping device for an engine which has a key switch
and which is supplied with fuel by a fuel injection pump con-
nected to a fuel tank by a fuel supply pump driven by the
engine, comprising:
a change-over valve movable between a first position and a
second position,
said change-over valve connecting said fuel tank with an
inlet of said fuel supply pump and connecting an outlet of
said fuel supply pump with an inlet of said fuel injection
pump when disposed in the first position, and
said change-over valve connecting the inlet of said fuel
injection pump with the inlet of said fuel supply pump and
connecting the outlet of said fuel supply pump with said
fuel tank when disposed in the second position; and
an electromagnetic actuator for electromagnetically actuat-
ing said change-over valve in response to the position of
said engine key switch so that said change-over valve is
held in the first and second positions during engine opera-
tion and engine shutdown, respectively.
|elECIronic~1 :. - — ^
4 OONTBOL - 1 ' ,
-1'!
4,391,242
CONTROL DEVICE FOR AUXILIARY MEMBERS OF A
VEHICLE
Sakae Mashio, Tatebayashi, Japan, assignor to Tama Manufac-
turing Co., Limited, Gumma, Japan
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,359
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 23, 1980, 55-68758
Int. Q.^ F02D J 1/08; B60H 3/04; F02B 77/00
U.S. Q. 123—198 R 9 Qaims
1. A control apparatus for a vehicle-mounted auxiliary de-
vice to be driven by an engine, comprising:
a pair of pressure switches to detect the load through the
negative pressure intake of the engine;
means to detect the rate of acceleration of the load by the
difference in operation time between the pressure
switches;
control means to control the driving of said auxiliary device,
and
means to transmit a signal to the control means of said auxil-
1. A fuel supply method for an electronic control fuel injec-
tion engine in which a fuel injection valve is operated by
electric signals to control an amount of fuel supply from the
fuel injection valve to an intake system, characterized in that,
when a brake device is operated or vehicle speed is higher than
a predetermined value, the rotational speed of the engine with
the fuel cut-off being completed in the deceleration of the
vehicle and the fuel supply being resumed is set to a value
smaller than that otherwise set.
4. An apparatus for supplying fuel to an electronic control
fuel injection engine in which a fuel injection valve is operated
by electric signals to control an amount of fuel supply from the
fuel injection valve to an intake system, characterized in that
said apparatus comprises a first detecting means for detecting
the operation of a brake device, a second detecting means for
detecting vehicle speed, a comparator means for comparing
the rotational sf)eed of the engine with a reference value to
allow the fuel injection valve to be operated when the rota-
tional speed of the engine is lower than the reference value and
a control means for receiving detecting signals from the first
and second detecting means to set thereby the reference value
of the comparator means lower than that set otherwise when
the brake device is operated or the vehicle speed is higher than
a predetermined value.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
97
4,391,244
DEVICE OF CONTROLLING THE IDLING SPEED OF AN
ENGINE
Mamoru Kobashi, Aichi; Shinichiro Tanaka, Susono, and Hideo
Saji, Aichi, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota and Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya,
both of, Japan
Filed Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,755
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 22, 1981, 56-95213
Int. Q.3 F02D 11/10
,U.S. Q. 123—339 10 Qaims
moved toward a closed position, said abutment means when in
a first position being operatively engagable by said throttle
valve means when said throttle valve means is moved to a"
normal idle throttle position, said abutment means being effec-
tive when in said first position to hold open said throttle valve
means a relatively small first amount, pressure responsive
movable wall means efiective upon being exposed to a first
vacuunji generated by said engine for moving said abutment
means to a second position whereat said throttle valve means
when moved toward said closed position operatively engages
said abutment means to thereby be held open a relatively larger
second' amount, said pressure responsiv)e movable wall means
H« ^
^^J_] r^
1 r
i ! ill
r^
11 '^62
(- -
Sea
67
■t]
1. A device of controlling the idling speed of an engine
comprising a main intake passage, a throttle valve arranged in
the main intake passage, a bypass passage branched off from
the main intake passage upstream of the throttle valve and
connected to the main intake passage downstream of the throt-
tle valve, and a control valve arranged in the bypass passage,
said device comprising:
a step motor actuating the control valve for controlling the
amount of air flowing within the bypass passage;
first means for detecting the engine speed to produce an
output signal indicating the engine speed,
second means for detecting the operating condition of the
engine to produce an output signal indicating that the
engine is operating in an idling state,
electronic control means operated in response to the output
signal of said first means and the output signal of said
second means and producing continuous control pulse
signals at predetermined first time intervals for rotating
the step motor in a stepping manner at a first speed in a
direction wherein the engine speed approaches a desired
engine speed when the engine is operating in an idling
state, and;
power supply control means including an ignition switch
and inserted between said electronic control means and a
power source, said electronic control means producing
continuous control pulse signals at predetermined second
time intervals which are longer than said first time inter-
vals for rotating the step motor in a predetermined direc-
tion at a second speed which is lower than said first speed
when the ignition switch is turned to the OFF position.
^- ^
■X
a*
being effective upon being exposed to a second vacuum gener-
ated by said engine for moving said abutment means to a third
position whereat said throttle valve means is held open a rela-
tively greatest third amount, and resilient means, said resilient
means being the only resistive means effective to operatively
resiliently resist the movement of said abutment means from
said first position to said second position and from said second
position to said third position, said resilient means exhibiting
only a single spring rate and being devoid of abrupt changes in
the spring rate thereof during the entire distance of movement
of said abutment means from said first position to said third
position.
4,391,246
THROTTLE OPENER DEVICE FOR VEHICLE ENGINES
Etsuo Kawabata, Wakoh; Masahiko Ogura, Sakado; Akinobu
Takagi, Yokohama, and Akira Fujimura, Niiza, all of Japan,
assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 144,325, Apr. 28, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jun. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 385,488
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 7, 1979, 54-54705;
Nov. 20, 1979, 54-151264
Int. CV F02S U/10; F02D 1/04; F02M 19/12
U.S. CI. 123—391 7 Qaims
4,391,245
PRESSURE OPERATED THREE-POSITION THROTTLE
STOP ASSEMBLY
William C. Larson, Rochester, Mich., assignor to Colt Industries
Operating Corp., New York, N.Y,
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,392
Int. Q.5 F02M i/00
U.S. Q. 123—339 18 Qaims
1. Apparatus for variably stopping the closing movement of
throttle valve means controlling the flow of motive fluid to an
associated combustion engine, comprising variably position-
able abutment means effective for operative engagement with
said throttle valve means when said throttle valve means is
1. For use with an internal combustion engine for driving a
vehicle, the engine having an intake passage provided with a
98
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
throttle valve and a throttle valve opener, the improvement
comprising, in combination: a suction passage connecting said
throttle valve opener with a vacuum port on the intake passage
downstream from said throttle valve, a vacuum responsive
throttle opener control valve in said suction passage which
transmits a controlled vacuum pressure into said throttle valve
opener when the vehicle speed is above a predetermined speed,
vacuum pressure regulating means positioned in said suction
passage between said vacuum port and said throttle opener
control valve, said vacuum pressure regulating means includ-
ing restriction means and including atmospheric intake valve
means, said vacuum pressure regulating means acting to reduce
vacuum pressure transmitted from said vacuum port to said
throttle opener control valve in response to an operative state
of the engine.
4,391,247
AIR FLOW DETECTION ARRANGEMENT
Giichi Shioyama, Yokosuka; Yoshitaka Hata, Fujisawa, and
Masao Nakajima, Atsugi, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Company, Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Oct. 14, 1980. Ser. No. 196,524
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1979, 54-132624
Int. aj F02D 9/08
U.S. a. 123—403 9 Claims
- R,
R,
- - Tl
30
I
1
Rm
34
34/
V.
14
-Rt
Rm
f
32
34B
- R. . -f- R, --*
1. In an internal combustion engine, having a cylinder and an
induction passage leading from the ambient atmosphere to said
cylinder, an air flow sensor comprising:
a manually controlled butterfly valve operatively disposed
in said induction passage and rotatable for controlling the
amount of air inducted through said induction passage;
a position sensor operatively connected to said butterfly
valve for sensing the angular position thereof and produc-
ing an output signal indicative of said sensed position; and
means defming a curved wall on one of said butterfly valves
and said induction passage for restricting the air flow past
said butterfly valve as it opens from a closed position and
for causing said air flow to be essentially proportional to
the opening degree of said butterfly valve whereby said
signal outputted by said sensor accurately indicates said
air flow.
4,391,248
METHOD FOR CLOSED-LOOP CONTROL OF THE
IGNITION ANGLE OR THE COMPOSITION OF THE
OPERATIONAL MIXTURE FURNISHED AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Reinhard Latsch, Vaihingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,743
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 29,
1979, 2939590
Int. a.5 P02D 33/00; F02P 5/10
U.S. a. 123—425 6 Oaims
l.*A method of closed-loop control for the composition of an
operational mixture furnished to an internal combustion engine
for combustion therein, comprising the steps of:
ascertaining the occurrence of the top dead center in sequen-
tial work cycles of at least one combustion chamber of the
engine;
measuring the magnitude of the combustion chamber pres-
sure of said at least one combusting chamber with a pres-
sure probe;
ascertaining the occurrence of the peak combustion chamber
pressure from the measured magnitude of the combustion
chamber pressure, relative to the ascertained top dead
center occurrence in sequential work cycles of said at least
one combustion chamber;
generating a control signal as a function of the difference
between two successive occurrences of the peak combus-
tion chamber pressure relative to the occurrence of the
top dead center in sequential work cycles of said at least
one combustion chamber;
mmm- ^^T.-mi .DutHmtm
■'• MJUSIttW
DEVICE
i^m»u-
«fflOI
generating a set-point value for the control signal;
comparing the generated control signal to the generated
set-point value and generating a difference signal; and
adjusting the proportion of at least one component of the
operational mixture in accordance with the generated
difference signal.
4,391,249
METHOD OF OPERATING A COMBUSTIBLE MIXTURE
GENERATOR OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE AND APPARATUS FOR CARRYING OUT THE
METHOD
Valerio Bianchi, Neuss-Hoisten; Franz-Josef Ehrentraut,
Monchengladbach, and Peter Wcbky, Dormagen, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bosch und Pierburg System
oHG, Neuss, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 163,992
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 11,
1979, 2927881
Int. a.3 F02M 7/06
U.S. a. 123—438 17 Qaims
EhGlNE
TtMPERATuBC
SENSOR
SENSOR
FOR TEMPERATURE
«T *AlL 0*
INLET MlNlFOtO
1. In a method of operating a combustible mixture generator
of an internal combustion engine to produce a transition mix-
ture enrichment during acceleration of said engine, said mix-
ture generator including means defming a mixing chamber, a
main throttle downstream of said chamber, a choke valve
upstream of said chamber, an electric drive for operating said
choke valve, means for sensing at least one operating parame-
ter of said engine, and a control device which is controlled by
said sensing means and controls said electric drive to move said
choke valve into positions for cold starting, running-up and
hot-running mixture enrichment, said method comprising the
steps of holding said choke valve open in steady operation of
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
99
said engine, sensing the instantaneous degree of opening of said
main throttle valve with the sensing means, and when the
speed of opening said main throttle exceeds a predetermined
threshold value conveying respective signals from the sensing
means to the control device and from the control device to the
electric drive for temporarily abruptly at least partly closing
said choke valve by a predetermined magnitude by means of
said electric drive and measuring at least one of a plurality of
operating parameters of said engine and making said predeter-
mined magnitude and the duration of said closing of said choke
valve dependent upon the measurements of said at least one
parameter.
4,391,250
SYSTEM FOR DETECTING THE OPERATION OF THE
THROTTLE VALVE
Fujio Matsui, Mitaka, Japan, assignor to Fuji Jukogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo and Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama,
both of, Japan
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,373
Claims priority, application J^an, Aug. 2, 1979, 54-98918
Int. CI.' F02D 35/00
U.S. a. 123—438 11 Claims
:^
IsSm
I
■SO
40
, ,( 26
!s.TTX*-rtn(11 ■> ■ —^"^ f-f*
holCMCuill T ;» ' ■*• "-T^*-^ I
I pulse J-\C
27
29
25, r
UsamOe-andL ^ £<^__
-UU.
H , 41 , 32
31 *
' |r»erlB| 'i^i
1. A system for detecting the operation of a throttle valve of
an internal combustion engine, comprising
means comprising a transducer for converting a physical
parameter of the operation of the throttle valve into an
electrical signal constituting an output voltage of said
transducer,
holding circuit means for periodically operatively receiving
the output voltage of said transducer with respect to time
and holding constant a value proportional to the periodi-
cally received output voltage of said transducer,
an output circuit means for continuously producing a result-
ing voltage corresponding to the change of said value, at
every periodic time interval of the operation of said hold-
ing circuit means, from said value at the respective prior
time interval and proportional to angular velocity of the
throttle valve respectively.
a clock signal generator providing synchronous signals and a
clock signal at the electrovalve cycle frequency;
a closed loop digital circuit of the proportional integral type
with variable gain, said closed loop being connected be-
tween said EGO sensor and said electrovalve and including
a digital integrator having a gain control input receiving a
digital signal representative of the rotation speed of the
motor, a digital time duration modulator having a control
input connected to the EGO sensor, and a multiplexer for
opening said closed loop, said multiplexer having a com-
mand input connected to a logic circuit sensitive to operat-
ing conditions of said motor and at least a second input
receiving a command signal sensitive to a motor physical
parameter such as the temperature or the rotation speed of
the motor.
4,391,252
FUEL INJECTION SYSTEM
Giinther Jaggle, Stuttgart; Klaus-Jiirgen Peters, Affalterbach,
and Klaus Riel, Moglingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,210
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 7,
1980, 3021561
Int. CI.' F02M 39/00
U.S. CI. 123—454 — 5 Qaims
4,391,251
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLER FOR CONTROLLING THE
AIR/FUEL RATIO OF THE MIXTURE SUPPLIED TO AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Pierre Planteline, and Roger Machetel, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Groupement d'Interet Economique de Re-
cherche et de Developpement PSA, Paris, France
1 1 Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,604
Qaims' t»riority, application France, Oct. 19, 1979, 79 26045
Int. CI.' F02B 3/00
U.S. a. 123—440 10 Qaims
1. A digital electronic controller for regulating the air/fuel
ratio of the mixture supplied to the cylinders of an internal
combustion engine, having an EGO sensor situated on the
exhaust path of the burned gases, at least one fuel supply de-
vice, such as a carburetor, whose fuel flow rate can be modi-
fied by an electrovalve controlled on the basis of an opening/-
closing cycle and a plurality of sensors for measuring operating
conditions of this engine, said electronic controller comprising:
1. A fuel injection system for compressor-equipped internal
combustion engines having injection into an intake tube, in
which a flow rate member and an arbitrarily actuatable throttle
valve are disposed in sequence downstream of a compressor,
the flow rate member being movable counter to a restoring
force in accordance with a quantity of air flowing there-
through, and a valve disposed in a fuel supply line having a
movable element for metering a fuel quantity corresponding to
the quantity of air, characterized in that said restoring force is
generated by means of pressure fluid, which is exerted continu-
ously upon a control slide under a constant but arbitrarily
variable pressure supplied by a control pressure line, said re-
storing force, and the variation of the pressure of the pressure
fluid being effected by means of at least one pressure control
100
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
valve controllable in accordance with engine characteristics,
further wherein said pressure control valve includes a movable
valve element upon which a compression spring acts in the
closing direction of the pressure control valve, the force of said
spring exerted upon the movable valve element being capable
of reduction with increasing intake tube pressure downstream
of said compressor.
4,391,254
ATOMIZATION COMPENSATION FOR ELECTRONIC
FUEL INJECTION
Richard E. Staerzl, Fond du Lac, Wis., assignor to Brunswick
Corporation, Skokie, III.
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,993
Int. a.3 F02M 51/00
U.S. a. 123—478 6 Qaims
4,391,253
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLING, FUEL INJECHON
METHOD
Sumio Ito, Gotenba, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,132
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1980, 55-150627;
Oct. 30, 1980, 55-151390
Int. a.3 F02D 37/02
U.S. a. 123—478 11 Oaims
33l>
_1
ENGlNt nJWtlNG SPEED
FLOW HATE Of INTAKE AH
7
16b
BASIC AflOUNT Of FUEL BEING
INJECTED IS CALCULATED.
450
I BASIC IGNITION TIHING
I IS CALCULATED.
-^
38 D
ACTUAL AHOUNI uF FUEL BEING
INJECTED IS DETERWINED.
I
4eb
I
;
BASIC IGNITION TmiKG
IS CORRECTED.
47b
IIUECTOR IS OPERATED.
T-
/IGNITION SIGNAL
/IS PRODUCED.
7
IL
-HL
MOOULA7EO
'^ttoo
-^IMjfcroK en vf*
■rMuecTor cvc f^e
^-^iMjecToe at *?/
1. In an electronic fuel-injection control circuit for an inter-
nal-combustion engine having an intake air manifold wherein a
square-wave pulse generator provides output signals of vari-
able duration, said output signals controlling the fuel flow rate
to the internal combustion engine with an output signal of a
first duration providing an increased fuel flow rate and an
output signal of a second duration providing a decreased fuel
flow rate, said first duration being greater than said second
duration, the improvement comprising, means for sensing the
air temperature within said intake air manifold, means for
detecting the instantaneous speed of said internal combustion
engine, means responsive to a decrease in manifold air temper-
ature for increasing the duration of said output signals and
responsive to an increase in manifold air temperature for de-
creasing the duration of said output signals, and means respon-
sive to a decrease in engine speed for increasing the duration of
said output signals and responsive to an increase in engine
speed for decreasing the duration of said output signals, said
detecting means including a linear inverting operational ampli-
fier, a first input of said operational amplifier having applied
thereto a signal linearly related to engine speed, a second input
of said operational amplifier having applied thereto a predeter-
mined bias voltage, and the output of said operational amplifier
being at a maximum value when said engine speed is minimum
and being at a minimum value when said engine speed reaches
a predetermined value in excess of said minimum engine speed.
1. In an electronically controlling, fuel injection method,
wherein a gasoline fuel containing alcohol is supplied via an
electromagnetic fuel injection valve into an intake system of an
engine; comprising the steps of:
storing in a storage means a comparison value representing a
comparison of a basic amount of fuel being injected and an
actual amount of fuel being injected, in closed loop con-
trolling, said basic amount of fuel being injected calcu-
lated on the basis of operational parameters of the engine,
and said actual amount of fuel being injected being deter-
mined by correcting said basic amount of fuel being in-
jected on the basis of air-fuel-ratio feedback signals, and
wherein a basic ignition timing is calculated on the basis of
operational parameters of the engine, and said basic igni-
tion timing is corrected on the basis of said comparison
value, whereby an actual ignition timing is obtained; and
correcting said biisic amount of fuel being injected on the
basis of said comparison value, in open loop controlling, in
order to determine an actual amount of fuel being in-
jected.
4,391,255
PROGRAMMED SEQUENTIAL FUEL INJECTION IN AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Richard E. Staerzl, Fond du Lac, Wis., assignor to Brunswick
Corporation, Skokie, III.
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,374
Int. C\? F02D 17/00
U.S. a. 123—481 6 Claims
1. A fuel-injection control circuit for an internal-combustion
engine, said internal-combustion engine having a variable
position throttle and a plurality of engine cylinders with each
cylinder having associated therewith individually controllable
fuel injection apparatus, the fuel injection control circuit com-
prising,
means for generating a throttle position control signal whose
voltage level is dependent upon the movement of said
variable position throttle from a closed position to an open
position and from an open position to a closed position,
means for comparing the voltage level of said throttle posi-
tion control signal with a fixed reference level and for
generating a predetermined pattern of logic signals in
response to said comparison.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
101
a bistable device which changes state once per crankshaft
revolution of said internal combustion engine and
means responsive to said predetermined pattern of logic
signals and to the state of said bistable device for applying
enabling signals to a minimum number of said individually
controllable fuel injection apparatus at an essentially
closed throttle position, for progressively applying said
' ' 4,391,256
AIR-FUEL RATIO CONTROL APPARATUS
Hiroshi Sawada, and Takayuki Demura, both of Susono, Japan,
assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 153,521, May 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,574
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1979, 54-68804
Int. Q.3 F02B 3/08
U.S. Q. 123—489 3 Qaims
2!
WR- FUEL
RATIO
SENSOR
1
|4
vaTAGE
FOLLCWER
HC0Mf^4-
FWTOR
23
•D
24
\fiRlABLE
VOLTAGE r
PIVIDER
y27
L MAX
I DETECT
CIRdilT
LlaSTABLElfi,
CIRCUIT
r-
25
INTEGRA-
TOR
a
2ft
1. An air-fuel ratio control apparatus for an internal combus-
tion engine having an exhaust system and means for supplying
secondary air to the exhaust system, said apparatus comprising:
sensor means disposed in the exhaust system, for detecting the
concentration value of a predetermined constituent in the
exhaust gas of the engine, said sensor means generating a
first signal which indicates the concentration value of the
predetermined constituent in the exhaust gas;
first circuit means for calculating the average value of the first
signal from said sensor means, said first circuit means gener-
ating a second signal indicative of the calculated average
value that represents the closed loop air-fuel ratio in the
exhaust system to which the secondary air is supplied;
second circuit means for generating a reference signal based
upon the first signal and the second signal, comprising means
for detecting the maximum v^ue of the first signal and
means for dividing the signal derived from said maximum
value detecting means by a variable division factor, to gener-
ate the reference signal, said variable division factor being
continuously changed responding to said second signal;
third circuit means for making a comparison between the
values of said first signal and said reference signal, said third
circuit means generating a control signal which indicates the
result of said comparison; and
means for adjusting the amount of secondary air supplied to
the exhaust system in response to said control signal from the
third circuit means.
4,391,257
FUEL INJECTION PUMP FOR INTERNAr
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Franz Eheim, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep, of Germany
Filed Feb. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 121,867
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 10,
1979, 2909556
Int. Q.^ F02D ///*. 5/00
U.S. Q. 123-503 1 Qaim
enab ing signals to a greater number of said individually
controllable fuel injection apparatus as said variable posi-
tion throttle moves from an essentially closed position to
nearer said open position and for applying said enabling
signals to all of said individually controllable fuel injection
apparatus when said variable position throttle reaches said
open position.
" « :i7ii:
1. A fuel injection pump having a housing for internal com-
bustion engines having a control member for a fuel injection
quantity actuatable by means of an adjusting member of an rpm
governor via a governor lever and a drag spring which stresses
said governor lever counter to a shut off direction which
permits a sufficient range of motion relative to said rpm gover-
nor, and further having an electric servomotor, said servomo-
tor including an electromagnet, an armature and a force spring
which drives against said armature for adjusting the control
member into a stop position in which a fuel supplied by the
pump is diverted and not used, characterized in that said arma-
ture of said servomotor engages said governor lever and there-
through is connected in a force-locking manner with said
control member so that upon the adjustment effected by means
of said servomotor, the position of said adjusting member of
the rpm governor remains unchanged, and said force spring
acts upon said armature so that a fuel diversion, when the
electromagnet is switched off, is triggered via said force spring
and said armature.
4,391,258
ARRANGEMENT FOR DRIVING A MECHANISM IN AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Dick V. Claesson, Sodertalje, Sweden, assignor to Saab-Scania
Aktiebolag, Sodertalje, Sweden
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,654
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 6, 1980, 8001778
Int. Q,' F02M 37/04
U.S. Q. 123—508 7 Qaims
1. In apparatus for mechanically driving a mechanism associ-
ated with an internal combustion engine: a driven rotatable
shaft having a rotation axis, said shaft having a peripheral
groove which has side walls and a bottom wall forming a
continuously curved cam surface which is eccentric to the
rotation axis of said shaft; a push rod having a first end driv-
ingly connected to said mechanism and a second end having a
102
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
fork configuration including two extensions which are ori- chamber in order to additionally agitate the fuel through ex-
ented radially on either side of the cam surface and, between pansion and to lower the flow velocity of same as the fuel
said extensions, a curved surface engaging said cam surface so flows through said first agitating screen means into the heating
that rotation of said shaft imparts oscillating axial motion to chamber, said lowering of said flow velocity allows the fuel to
said push rod and swinging movement to said second end of j,pg„jj adequate time in said heating chamber to be heated by
said push rod, said two extensions residing in said groove and jj,g heating coil; said point of communication opening of the
being engageable with the side walls of said groove whereby
said swinging movement of said second end of said push rod is
accommodated, whereby said second end of said push rod is
/r^,-'
fuel exit conduit has a diameter smaller than the diameter of the
generally cylindrical heating chamber in order to increase the
velocity of the heated fuel as it passes through the second
agitating screen means into the exit conduit of the shell body;
an overmold means circumscribing the shell body, said electri-
cal conduit means passing through said overmold means; and
said overmold means circumscribes the structural portion of
said shell body that defines the heating chamber.
guided by said side walls in the longitudinal direction of said
shaft and whereby no extra guidance is needed in the axial
direction of said push rod, wherein said push rod comprising
first and second longitudinal portions and means connecting
said first and second portions in end-to-end relationship in a
manner to accommodate angular play during said transverse
movements of said first end, said first longitudinal portion
incorporating said first end and said second longitudinal por-
tion incorporating said second end.
4,391,260
FLUID PRESSURE RESPONSIVE VALVE DEVICE
Kiyonobu Asahi, Anjo, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki
Kaisba, Kariya, Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,786
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 17, 1979, 54-164322
Int. a.3 F02M 25/06
U.S. a. 123—568 8 Qaims
4,391,259
FUEL CONDITIONER AND METHOD OF
CONDITIONING FUEL TO AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE THEREWITH
Milfred W. Urban, 1819 N. Edwards, Wichita, Kans. 67203
Filed May 22. 1981, Ser. No. 266,332
Int. CI.' F02M 15/00
U.S. CI. 123—557
3 Claims
1. A fuel conditioner comprising a conduit shell body having
a pair of compression connection ends; said shell body having
a structure defining a fuel entrance conduit, a fuel exit conduit
and a heating chamber interposed between the entrance con-
duit and the exit conduit and in communication with each; a
first agitating screen means and a second agitating screen
» means respectively covering the point of communication open-
ing of the entrance conduit and the exit conduit with the heat-
ing chamber; a pair of electrical conduit means passing through
said shell body into said heating chamber; a heating coil means
electrically attached in series to the ends of said pair of electri-
cal conduits in said heating chamber; and electrical power
means engaging the other ends of said electrical conduits for
energizing the heating coil means, said fuel entrance conduit
and said fuel exit conduit are essentially aligned in the same
plane and directly opposed with respect to each other; said
heating chamber is generally cylindrical, said point of commu-
nication opening of said fuel entrance conduit has a diameter
smaller than the diameter of said generally cylindrical heating
1. A fiuid pressure responsive valve device including an
exhaust gas recirculation device, said fluid pressure responsive
valve device comprising:
a body having an inlet port, at least one signal pressure port
connected to an engine intake means and first and second
outlet ports formed therein,
means disposed within said body movable in response to
fluid pressure communicated to said signal pressure port,
a hollow rod secured to said movable means and comprising
a part of a first passage member connecting said inlet port
and said first outlet port,
a second passage member for connecting said inlet port and
said second outlet port, said second passage member in-
cluding restriction means, said second outlet port being in
fiuid communication with said exhaust gas recirculation
device, and
a plurality of first valve means arranged within said first and
second passages, respectively, to thereby control fluid
communication through said first and second passage
members in response to movement of said movable means,
wherein said exhaust gas recirculation device comprises a
third passage member connected between an engine ex-
haust manifold and said intake means, said third passage
member including parallel flow portions, wherein said
exhaust gas recirculation device further comprises second
valve means connected to said intake means for selectively
closing said third passage member and third valve means
connected to said third passage member for selectively
closing one of said parallel flow portions of said third
passage member.
July 5, 983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
103
4,391,261
CARBURETOR ACTUATING SYSTEM FOR V-ENGINES
Yoshiaki Tomita, Hamakita, Japan, assignor to Yamaha Hat-
sudoki Kabushiki Kalsha, Iwata, Japan
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,932
Claims |Mriority, application Japan, Jul. 8, 1980, 55-107649
Int. a.3 F02B 13/00
U.S. a. 123—584 8 Qaims
1. A dual carburetor system for a V-engine utilizing two
carburetors, each having a throttle valve stem protruding
through at least one side, the protruding valve stem of one
having connected to it a drive arm, and the protruding valve
stem of the other having connected to it a driven arm. charac-
terized in that the carburetors are positioned side by side in the
V-shaped space between two engine cylinders with said valve
stems having said drive arm and driven arm fixed thereto
protruding toward each other; said drive arm being connected
to said driven arm by means of two connecting links hinged to
the respective drive and driven arms at one end of each and
hinged to each other at their other ends; and a slot in a plate
between the carburetors to constrain motion of said hinge
between the links along a perpendicular bisector of a line
passing through the axes of the protruding valve stems of the
two carburetors.
1. Ignition system for an internal combustion engine having
means (16) operating similarly to an a-c generator for gener-
ating an ignition signal (\i\6)\
an ignition coil (5, 6);
a controlled switch (7, 8) controlling current flow through
the ignition coil;
and a signal processing stage (32, 9) interconnecting the
signal generating means (16) and the controlled switch (7,
8) for rendering the controlled switch conductive, to store
electromagnetic energy in the coil, at an instant of time
during which the ignition signal changes in value in a first
predetermined direction, and rendering the controlled
switch non-conductive, and hence interrupting current
flow through the coil and cause a high-voltage ignition
pulse to appear thereacross, at an instant of time during
which the ignition signal changes values, and in opposite
direction,
wherein, in accordance with the invention.
the signal processing stage includes means (32) deriving a
first control signal portion (Ua-Ub) occurring in advance
of the peak value of the ignition signal, and having an at
least approximately uniformly changing rate in said first
direction during at least part of the time when the ignition
signal changes level or value in the opposite direction;
and means (33) combining said first control signal portion
and the ignition signal at a time (Ub) when both the igni-
tion signal and the first portion of the control signal are
changing in said first direction, and said ignition signal is
at a level below its peak value (Us),
so that the differential, in a voltage-time diagram of the
control signal portion (Ua-Ub) and the ignition signal
portion below the peak thereof (Ub-Us) will have the
same sign.
i
4,391,263
BOWSTRING RELEASE DE\ ICE
Paul A. Dodge, Rte. 3, Menomonie, Wis. 54751
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,355
Int. CI,' F41B 5/00
U.S. CI. 124—35 A
27 Claims
4,391,262
IGNITION SYSTEM FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Richard Schleupen, Ingersheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,358
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 28,
1980, 3040509
Int. a.3 F02P 1/00
U.S. a. 123—618 8 Qaims
1. A bowstring release device useable by an archer in con-
junction with an arrow and a bowstring mounted on a bow to
effect release of the bowstring to discharge the arrow along an
intended forward longitudinal path of travel, said device com-
prising:
^ a housing having interior walls defining an interior cavity
with a latch opening and a trigger opening;
a latch member having a generally fiat central base located
in the cavity for rotation about an axis generally perpen-
dicular to the intended longitudinal path of travel of the
arrow and having a generally segmented circular arcuate
rib portion outwardly extended from both sides of the
base in a direction parallel to said axis of rotation;
said interior walls defining said cavity shaped to closely
conform to the latch member and having generally seg-
mented circular arcuate groove means on both sides of the
base located to define the path of travel of the rib portion
of the latch member upon rotation of the latch member in
the cavity, said rib portion of the latch member being
movably located in said groove means to support the latch
member and to guide rotation of the latch member about
said axis generally perpendicular to the intended- longitu-
dinal path of travel of the arrow;
said latch member having a generally rearwardly facing
shoulder accessible through the latch opening defining a
cord retaining seat rotatable between a cord retaining
104
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
position and a cord release position upon rotation of the
latch member;
trigger means in said cavity having a trigger finger extended
through the trigger opening for engagement and move-
ment by an archer, said trigger means operatively con-
nected to the latch member for rotation of the latch mem-
ber from the cord retaining position to the cord release
position upon movement of the trigger finger; and
handle means connected to the housing.
4,391,264
BALL PITCHING APPARATUS
Jeffrey L. Abraham, 218 Maplewood, San Antonio, Tex. 78216,
and Gary D. Banse, 546 Gilbert, San Antonio, Tex. 78213
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,660
Int. a.3 F41B 7/00
U.S. a. 124—50 4 aaims
1. A ball feeding apparatus for an automatic ball pitching
machine, comprising:
a power drive means for driving the machine;
a ball de-jammer means operated by the power drive means
for preventing the clogging of balls being delivered to a
ball throwing arm,
a ball container having a stationary sloping floor member for
holding a plurality of balls for delivery to said ball de-jam-
mer means which is adjacent said container;
said ball de-jammer means having a ball de-jammer operated
by the drive means to engage balls for preventing jam-
ming of balls to a ball feed channel to allow at least one
ball to be supplied from the ball container at predeter-
mined intervals;
said de-jammer means having a tilting floor member mov-
able between horizontal rest and inclined positions to
selectively roll balls to a ball feed channel;
said de-jammer means having a horizontally reciprocating
member to engage and remove balls so as to prevent a
plurality of balls in the ball container from engaging and
jamming a ball which is to be released by the tilting action
of said tilting floor member upon operation of the de-jam-
mer means by the power drive means.
4,391,265
KEY-(TOUCH-) CONTROLLED GAS RANGE
Si-Yu Chen, 37 Kueiyang St. Sec. 1, Taipei, Taiwan
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,181
Int. a.3 F24C i/OO
U.S. a. 126—39 E 3 Qaims
1. A controlled gas range comprising:
means for adjusting the flame intensity in a controlled man-
ner;
a continuous electronic ignition circuit;
a valve; and
a burner,
characterized in that said valve includes a rotor defining a
plurality of channels therein, a housing and a servo-motor
connected to said rotor, a gas inlet and a gas outlet said gas
outlet having a diameter slightly greater or equal to that of
the largest channel within the rotor, said gas inlet and said
gas outlet being respectively provided on said housing in
an opposing relationship to each other, said gas inlet fur-
ther being connected to a gas source and said gas outlet
further being directed to the burner;
said housing further including an upper face defining a small
orifice with a diameter sufficient to supply the amount of
gas for a base fire, said orofice being connected to and
adjacent to said electronic ignition circuit of said burner
by a tube;
said plurality of channels including communicating channels
and at least one blocked channel at symmetrical positions
in said rotor, the size of said communicating channels
being different for each symmetrical position, said com-
^«H,
r^.-s^-T^n
U'
i 4;-
' hi '
B- ac E tr
->s.
il
±-
20
municating channels communicating with the center of
said rotor so that there are channels with different sizes
connected between said gas inlet and outlet under differ-
ent rotating angles of said rotor thereby directing various
amounts of gas to said burner, said gas inlet and said outlet
both being blocked by said rotor when said rotor is ro-
tated with an angle for said blocked channel to cut off the
gas supply, said channels including one base fire channel
which is blocked at one end so that the base fire channel
is only connected between said gas inlet and said orifice
when said rotor is rotated with an angle for said base fire
channel.
4,391,266
STOVE APPARATUS
Arthur J. Leffers, 13004 Tonkel Rd., Fort Wayne, Ind. 46825
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,431
Int. a.3 F24B 7/00
U.S. CI. 126—123 16 Qaims
1. Stove apparatus comprising a firebox, a heat-exchange
housing enclosing said firebox and spaced therefrom to pro-
vide air circulating passages, said firebox having a top, lateral
sides and a rear end, said housing also having a bottom, top,
lateral sides and a rear end respectively spaced in substantial
parallelism from the corresponding parts of said firebox, a
front closure on said firebox having an access door, said spaced
lateral sides of said firebox and housing defining air inlet pas-
sages having at the front ends thereof air inlet ports, said
spaced tops defining an air outlet passage in communication
with said inlet passages and having at the front end thereof an
air outlet port, means connected to said inlet ports for supply-
ing a flow of air to said inlet passages, means for admitting
combustion air to said firebox, and means for venting smoke
from said firebox in by-passing relation to said housing and said
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
105
top air outlet passage, said firebox projecting beyond the front 4,391,268
portion of said housing, said top of said firebox being in the SOLAR WATER HEATER CONTROL AND PROTECTION
form of a plate having a flat horizontal portion which projects SYSTEM
forwardly of said housing and is exposed thereby providing a Donovan B. Mathes; Floyd B. Hamilton, and Douglas C. Spreng,
all of Lake Havasu City, Ariz., assignors to Solar Dynamics
>
stove top, said top plate of said firebox engaging at the lateral
edges thereof said housing sides thereby further defining said
inlet passages, the space between said housing and firebox rear
ends serving to connect said inlet passages to said outlet pas-
sage.
4,391,267
HEAT STORAGE MATERIAL
Gustaf O. Arrhenius, La Jolla, Calif., assignor to Kay Laborato-
ries, Inc., San Diego, Calif.
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,547
Int. a.3 F24H 7/00; C09K 3/18: F28D 77/00
U.S. a. 126—400 15 Claims
1. In combination,
a melt formed from at least one of sodium thiosulfate penta-
hydrate and sodium sulfate decahydrate and having prop-
erties of crystallizing into a monolithic mass when nucle-
ated, and
an additive material having properties of dissolving stably in
the melt and metastably in the growing crystals and ex-
solving to separate the resulting crystallites and limit their
size and having properties of providing the solution of the
additive material in the melt with chemically basic proper-
ties,
the additive material consisting of at least one of disodium
hydrogen phosphate, trisodium phosphate and their potas-
sium and ammonium analogs.
Inc., Lake Havasu, Ariz.
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 238,108
Int. a.i F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—437
2 Qaims
O ^e
1. A solar water heater system wherein a collector receives
a liquid from a tank through a feed conduit and provides said
liquid to said tank through a return conduit, and first and
second drain down valves connected to said first and second
conduits, respectively, are operable to drain said liquid from
said system, comprising:
first and second isolating valves resjjectively situated in said
feed and return conduits that isolate said tank from said
conduits when said fluid is being drained;
a venting valve connected to said collector and to the atmo-
sphere that allows a flow of air therethrough into said
conduits and said collector in response to said system
being drained;
a reversible gear motor; and
linkage means for sealing said isolating valves prior to open-
ing said drain down valves and for closing said drain
down valves prior to opening said isolating valves.
4,391,269
CONTROLLED SOLAR HEATING AND HEAT
RETENTION OF LIQUID
W. Keith R. Watson, P.O. Box 1537, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif.
92067
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,970
Int. CV F24J 3/02: G02B 5/08
U.S. Q. 126—437 11 Qaims
JO
> ^i; ^- f .2
r \
1. In solar heating apparatus:
(a) a generally horizontally elongated tank to contain liquid,
the tank being solar radiation absorbing,
(b) a generally longitudinally extending horizontally elon-
gated container extending about said tank, the container
defining glazing facing one side of the tank and top por-
tion of the tank, adapted to received impingement of solar
radiation, the glazing spaced from the tank, and being
insulative,
(c) and solar radiation auxiliary reflecting panels including at
least one panel projecting generally away from a region
below the level of the lower extent of the tank and exteri-
orly of the container to reflect solar radiation toward and
through said glazing for impingement on the tank, said
106
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
panels being hinge supported and having alternate posi-
tions in which they have been swung to extend adjacent
the glazing facing the side and top portion of the tank to
block heat loss from the tank at night,
(d) the container being polygonal in lateral upright planes,
and having planar generally rectangular sections of said
glazing, the panels sized in correspondence to said glazing
sections to which they extend respectively adjacent, in
said alternate positions.
4,391,270
MAGNETIC MEDICAL TREATMENT MEMBER
Hideaki Uragami, 12-12, Mefugaoka, Takarazuka-shi, Hyogo
665, Japan
per No. PCr/JP80/00115, § 371 Date Apr. 6, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 17, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00357, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 19, 1981
PCT Filed May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 237,165
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 6, 1979, 54-100519;
Jan. 24, 1980, 55-7860[U]
Int. Cl.^ A61N 1/42
U.S. a. 128—1.3 13 Claims
1. A magnetic treatment member comprising a generally flat
magnetic press element mounted on a sticking surface of a
sticking member, said magnetic press element having a gener-
ally flat surface extending to an outer peripheral edge of said
magnetic press element, said magnetic press element having an
outer peripheral wall along said outer peripheral edge, and a
plurality of projections protruding from said flat surface, said
projections extending substantially to said outer peripheral
edge such that said projections are substantially continuous
with said outer peripheral wall, whereby the lines of magnetic
force are concentrated on said projections.
air or pure oxygen passing from the respirator into the first
conduit tube;
the drainage means disposed at a lowermost point of and
extending longitudinally along the bottom portions of the
first and second conduit tubes, said drainage means being
in fluid communication with said first and second conduit
tubes through a plurality of perforations opening into the
drainage means from the first and second conduit tubes;
and
means to dispose of moisture passing through said perfora-
tions into the drainage means from the first and second
conduit tubes.
4,391,272
DISPOSABLE SYRINGE
Jackie Staempfli, Paris, France, assignor to Tulcea, S.A., Vaduz,
Liechtenstein
Filed Mar. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 19,251
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 10, 1978,
2624/78
Int. a.5 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—110 10 Oaims
4,391,271
RESPIRATOR CIRCUIT
Albert Blanco, 3315 SW. 127th Ave., Miami, Fla. 33175
j Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,358
I Int. CI.' A61M 76/00
U.S. a. 128—203.12 24 Qaims
1. A respirator circuit comprising:
first and second conduit tubes, the cross-section of which has
opposed planar lower side portions that are angled oppo-
sitely downwardly and inwardly toward drainage means
connected thereto, said first and second conduit tubes in
open connection respectively to first and second branches
of a generally Y-shaped conduit tube portion, including a
leg portion for open connection to a conventional endo-
tracheal tube;
a respirator connected to an end of the first conduit tube
through a water cascade to humidify air, oxygen enriched
1. A disposable syringe comprising:
a cylinder, one end of which cylinder is formed with a
nozzle whereby a syringe needle can be fixed to the cylin-
der;
an intake and delivery piston capable of sliding inside said
cylinder comprising a body arranged so as to form a tight
movable partition, said body having a circular groove or
channel;
a rod connected with the piston body so as to permit said
body to be displaced by sliding movement in the cylinder;
at least one resilient member provided in said piston body
and having at least one peripheral rim or flange tending to
be applied to the inside wall of said cylinder;
at least one resilient sealing j'oint provided in said piston of
which at least one peripheral part in the form of an O-ring
is retained by a wedging action between the inside wall of
the cylinder and said circular groove or channel of said
piston body;
at least a first circular groove, in the inside wall of said
cylinder, perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder and
having an edge capable of retaining the rim of the resilient
member; and
at least one second circular groove, in the inside wall of said
cylinder, perpendicular to the axis of the cylinder and
arranged in such a way as to receive the toroidal part of
the sealing joint;
whereby the said first groove and said second groove are so
disposed as to cause, when the piston body is pulled in a
rearward direction, the disconnection of the sealing joint
from the piston body and the retention thereof in thf
second groove, and then the locking of the rim or edge of
the resilient member against the edge of the first groove
opposite to that end of the cylinder which has the nozzle.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
107
4,391,273
NON-REUSABLE, DISPOSABLE SYRINGES
Marcelo Chiquiar-Arias, Mexico City, Mexico, assignor to
Mercantile & Technical Promotions Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,264
Claims priority, application Mexico, Aug. 8, 1980, 183508
Int. C\? A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—110 9 Qaims
4,391,274
nLTERED HUB DEVICE FOR ASPIRATING AND
INJECTING LIQUIDS
Jonathan Kagan, Fairview, Pa., assignor to Becton, Dickinson
and Company, Paramus, N.J.
1 1 Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,475
1 1 Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—190 1 Qaim
1. A hub device for use in aspirating and injecting liquids
comprising:
a housing having a chamber therein, a first opening for
aspirating liquid into the chamber and for injecting liquid
out of the chamber and a second opening extending
through a mouth portion which is adapted to connect to a
mating portion of a liquid movement device which serves
as a driving force for aspirating liquid into and injecting
liquid out of said device, said openings being located on
opposite sides of said housing in substantially axial align-
ment with each other;
a tubular valve in said chamber having a flexible, operable
closure element on opposite ends thereof; and
a filter in said chamber adapted to filter particulate matter
from liquids passing therethrough, said filter also serving
as a support member to maintain said valve in position in
said chamber, said filter surrounding said valve including
the first operable closure element thereof, said first ele-
ment of said valve being positioned directly over said first
opening and normally closing radially outwardly against
said surrounding filter in an orientation substantially paral-
lel to the axial alignment of said openings so that the
interior of said tubular valve is in liquid communication
1. A disposable syringe which renders itself non-reusable
which comprises a rigid cylinder having a bottom wall at one
end with an opening for the exit of the solution to be injected,
and having the other end open, support flanges being affixed to
said cylinder adjacent the open end and extending outwardly
from the axis of the cylinder, an injection needle integrally
attached to the bottom wall of the cylinder and extendmg
outwardly beyond said bottom wall and communicating with
said opening, and a plunger with a piston slidably positioned
within the cylinder with the piston adjacent the closed end of
the cylinder and the other end of said plunger being adapted
for pressing to force the piston toward the bottom wall, the
piston having puncturing means extending longitudinally
therefrom and adapted to puncture the bottom wall of said
cylinder so as to prevent reuse, and an annular protrusion
extending beyond the bottom wall of the cylinder and integral
therewith and having such dimensions as to prevent the user's
fingers from being pricked by the puncturing means extending
through the bottom wall of the cylinder, said needle extending
a sufficient distance beyond said annular protrusion to permit
insertion of said needle in said patient, and which includes a
cover plate for the opening at the forward end of the annular
protrusion, said cover plate having a centrally disposed open-
ing, said injection needle having a diameter less than the inner
diameter of said opening in said cover plate and passing
through said opening.
with said first opening whereby liquid flowing through
said first opening during aspiration is directed through
said tubular member, said first element adapted to flexibly
move away from said filter to thereby open and place said
first opening in liquid communication with the chamber
exterior to said tubular valve during injection of liquid
into the chamber through said second opening, said sec-
ond element mcluding an operable slot adapted to open
dunng aspiration of liquid inwardly through said first
opening and normally close under static conditions and
remain closed upon injection of liquid into said chamber
through said second opening.
4,391,275
METHOD FOR THE SURGICAL TREATMENT OF THE
EYE
Franz Fankhauser; Eugen van der Zypen, both of Bern, and
Philippe Roussel, Thun, all of Switzerland, assignors to Lasag
AG, Thun, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,202
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 28, 1979,
10570/79; France, Mar. 5, 1980, 80 04994
Int. Q.' A61B 17/36
U.S. CI. 128—303.1 13 Claims
1. For a method of non-invasive surgical treatment of the
eye which comprises the steps of
forming a convergent treatment laser beam,
directing the focus of the convergent treatment laser beam
onto the structure to be treated,
shifting the focus with respect to the structure to be a certain
distance in front of or behind the structure,
delivering the treatment laser beam into said focus where the
radiation intensity performs the surgery,
an improvement to prevent damage to the structure of the
eye not being treated, the improvement comprising the
steps of:
generating visible ancillary lower power laser observation
108
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
beams to sense the outside envelope of the treatment
laser beam,
rotating said laser observation beam's around the optical
axis of said laser treatment beam, said laser observation
beams intersecting in the focus position of the laser
treatment beam,
shifting the focus position of the treatment beam along the
optical axis with respect to the intersection' point of said
laser observation beams,
directing the laser observation beams onto treatment point
of the structure to be irradiated so that they intersect
said structure and provide dots of light thereon for
observation purposes,
inspecting the path of the observation laser beams to
determine if the treatment beam on its pass into the
focus will touch eye structure not being treated,
adjusting the treatment laser beam in accordance with the
results of the inspection step to ensure that the treat-
ment beam does not touch structures not to be treated,
and
delivering the treatment laser beam into the focus to cause
the surgery.
middle of the chest of the user for supporting the breast in a
first mode when the breast is positioned there from gravity and
said opposite end of the pleated portion being closed, and said
middle pleated portion being adapted for expanding into a cup
4,391,276
PERITONEAL CATHETER
Harrison Lazarus, 1474 Penrose Dr., Salt Lake City, Utah
84103, and James A. Nelson, 1708 Forest Hills Dr., Salt Lake
City, Utah 84106
; Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,127
Int. a.3 A61M 25/00
U.S. tn. 604—266 - 5 Qaims
13-
\
at the other end away from said vertical chest wound for
supporting the breast in a second mode when the breast is
positioned there from gravity and said opposite end of said
pleated portion being closed.
4,391,278
TAPE ELECTRODE
Patrick T. Cahalan, Champlin, and Arthur J. Coury, St. Paul,
both of Minn., assignors to Medtronic, Inc., Minneapolis,
Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 968,489, Dec. 11, 1978,
abandoned. This application Feb. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 121,387
Int. CV A61B 5/04
U.S. a. 128—640 15 Qaims
1. A catheter comprising:
a thin-walled, hollow-bore tubular member having an open-
ing on an extraction end, said tubular member having a
hollow-bore diameter of from about 1.0 to about 3.5 milli-
meters and an external diameter of from about 2.0 to about
4.0 millimeters;
a plurality of sidewall openings in said tubular member, said
openings having protrusions associated therewith pro-
truding from the exterior sidewall, at least a substantial
portion of said protrusions being longitudinally aligned
with a substantial portion of said sidewall openings, said
sidewall openings having a diameter of from about 0.01 to
about 2.0 millimeters and said sidewall protrusions project
from about 0.01 to about 1.0 millimeter from the exterior
wall surface.
4,391,277
BREAST SUPPORT
Marian L. Horvat, 3811 W. Pleasant Valley Rd., Parma, Ohio
44134
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 238,880
Int. a.3 A41C 3/00
U.S. a. 128—492 4 Qaims
1. A breast support comprising a long narrow cloth strip,
said cloth strip having a middle pleated portion which is
adapted for expanding open into a cup for automatically ad-
justing to any breast size, and means for adjusting said strip to
various lengths, said middle pleated portion adapted for ex-
panding into a cup at one end near a vertical wound in the
1. A skin electrode consisting g^entially of:
an adhesive electrically conductive skin-contacting member
consisting essentially of a polymer component selected
from the group consisting of polymerized 2-acrylamido-2-
methylpropanesulfonic acid, its salts, copolymers of the
acid, copolymers of the salts of the acid, and mixtures
thereof, and a second component selected from the group
consisting of water, alcohols and mixtures thereof, suffi-
cient relative amounts of the polymer component and the
second component being included to provide adhesive-
ness and flexibility to the member, and
electrical contact means connected to the conductive mem-
ber for establishing electrical contact therewith.
4,391,279
ELECTRODE BELT
Israel M. Stein, Brookline, Mass., assignor to Oinical Data,
Inc., Brookline, Mass.
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,646
Int. aj A61B 5/04
U.S. a. 128—643 8 Qaims
1. An electrode belt which comprises a belt of soft pliable
material, a sheet of conductive, flexible, compliant, impervious
material providing an electrode pad having opposite surfaces,
one of which is disposed upon said belt and the other against
the wearer when the belt is on the wearer, a fastener of con-
ductive material having opposed plates disposed in clamping
relationship with said pad and belt therebetween to form a
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
109
depression in said pad of cup shape to provide a suction area
between the skin of the wearer, the pad and one of said plates.
said fastener having means providing an attachment for an
electrode lead.
4,391,280
ENEMA APPARATA IMPROVEMENTS RELATING TO
DOUBLE CONTRAST STUDIES
Roscoe E. Miller, 7400 W. 88th St., Indianapolis, Ind. 46278
Division of Ser. No. 131,965, Apr. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,333,460,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 39,502, May 16, 1979,
abandoned. This application Noy. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 326,015
Int. Q.3 A61B 5/00
U.S. Q, 128—654 i Qaim
1. An enema-administering apparatus insertable into the
rectum for delivery of a contrast medium to internal portions
of a patient's anatomy, for the subsequent removal of said
contrast medium, and for the delivery of air to said internal
portions of the anatomy after the contrast medium has been
removed, said enema-administering apparatus comprising:
a generally tubular stem having a free end, an opposite insert-
able end and a first contrast medium passageway extending
therethrough from a contrast medium inject location adja-
cent said free end to a contrast medium discharge location
adjacent said insertable end, said tubular stem further having
a first air passageway disposed completely external of said
first contrast medium passageway, said first air passageway
extending through said tubular stem from an air inject loca-
tion adjacent said free end to an air discharge location adja-
cent said insertable end;
an enlarged hollow tip cooperatively arranged with said stem
and disposed adjacent said insertable end, said hollow tip
having a contrast medium exit aperture disposed therein and
defining a second contrast medium passageway arranged in
flow communication with and disposed between said first
contrast medium passageway and said contrast medium exit
aperture, said tip further having an air delivery outlet open-
ing disposed therein and defining a second air passageway
which is disposed completely external of said second con-
trast medium passageway and arranged in flow communica-
tion with and disposed between said first air passageway and
said air delivery outlet opening;
said air delivery outlet opening is spaced apart from said con-
trast medium exit aperture so as to avoid the entry of said
contrast medium into said second air passageway.
4,391,281
ULTRASONIC TRANSDUCER SYSTEM AND METHOD
Philip S. Green, Atherton, Calif., assignor to SRI International,
Menio Park, Calif.
Filed Jan. 6, 1977, Ser. No. 757,132
Int. Q.^ A61B 10/00
U.S. Q. 128-660 13 Qaims
1. A medical ultrasonic system for the non-invasive examina-
tion of a soft tissue region within a subject's body comprising,
focusing transducer means,
a container for said focusing transducer -means having a
liquid tight acoustically transparent rigid diaphragm for
acoustically coupling directly to the subject's skin,
sonic coupling liquid within the container for acoustically
coupling the focusing transducer means to said dia-
phragm,
pulse operated transmitter/receiver means connected to said
transducer means for energization of said transducer
means for producing ultrasonic waves which are coupled
to the subject's skin through said coupling liquid and
diaphragm and for processing electrical signals produced
by said transducer means upon receipt of ultrasonic waves
reflected from discontinuities within the tissue of the
subject, and
indicating means for the display of echo signals received
from discontinuities within the subject's body,
the material of said coupling liquid being selected so that the
velocity of propagation of acoustic waves therein is sub-
stantially less than the velocity of propagation of acoustic
waves in said soft tissue,
the acoustic path between the transducer means and dia-
phragm being substantially less than the maximum dis-
tance in soft tissue within the subject's body from which
echo signals are received and displayed without interfer-
ence by display of multiple reflections from the dia-
phragm.
4,3.91,282
COELIAC CAVITY ULTRASONIC DIAGNOSIS
APPARATUS
Otaro Ando, Hino, and Toshitaka Suwaki, Hachioji, both of
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Company Limited, To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,246
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136442;
Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136443; Sep. 12, 1980, 55-126966
Int. Q.3 A61B 5/02
U.S. Q. 128-660 22 Qaims
1. A coeliac cavity ultrasonic diagnosis apparatus including
a scanner portion insertable into a physical body of a patient
and operative to effect a B-mode sector scan of an ultrasonic
wave to produce a tomographic image, comprising
(a) an endoscope including at least an observation means and
illumination means and provided at its side surface near
the distal end portion thereof with an opening;
(b) an ultrasonic signal transducer fixed to the distal end
portion of the endoscope for generating and transmitting
ultrasonic wave radiation in a direction substantially
110
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
aligned with the axial direction of an insertable f)ortion of
said endoscope;
(c) a reflecting mirror opposed to and inclined at substan-
tially a constant angle with respect to the ultrasonic wave
radiation surface of the ultrasonic signal transducer and
rotatably mounted at the opening provided at the distal
end portion of said endoscope;
(d) a power means provided in an operating portion located
in the rear of said endoscope and operative to rotate said
I reflecting mirror;
(e) a flexible shaft extending through a flexible portion of
said endoscope and transmitting the rotation of said power
1 means to said reflecting mirror;
(0 an initial pulse generating means rotatable together with
said reflecting mirror at the distal end portion of said
endoscope to generate a pulse just prior to the arrival of
said reflecting mirror at a given position so as to define a
display starting point at every ultrasonic scanning frame;
(g) an angle detecting means arranged in said operating
portion located in the rear of said endoscope and rotatable
in synchronism with said rotary shaft of said power means
to detect the rotary angle of said power means and gener-
ate a pulse each time said rotary shaft rotates by a constant
angle;
(h) means for obtaining a reflecting signal for reproducing an
ultrasonic image from a pulse delivered from said initial
pulse generating means and from a pulse delivered from
said angle detecting means;
(i) a brightness modulating means operative to transmit the
ultrasonic wave to said ultrasonic signal transducer and
receive the ultrasonic wave therefrom to effect brightness
modulation of the signal received; and
h) means for displaying the ultrasonic image from said de-
flecting signal and brightness modulating signal.
a visually-perceptible incentive indication for the patient;
and
inhibiting means responsive to inhalation suction force
above a predetermined force for inhibiting said incentive
indication.
4,391,284
USE IN MODIFYING SMOKING TOBACCO AROMA
AND FLAVOR OR MONO-OXOMETHYL SUBSTITUTED
POLYHYDRODIMETHANONAPHTHALENE
DERIVATIVES
Mark A. Sprecker, Sea Bright; Marie R. Hanna, Hazlet; Rich-
ard J. Tokarzewski, Keyport; Robert P. Belko, Woodbridge;
Hugh Watkins, Lincroft, and Manfred H. Vock, Locust, all of
N.J., assignors to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 2. 1982, Ser. No. 354,387
Int. a.3 A24B 3/12, 15/30
U.S. a. 131—276 10 aaims
GLC PROFILE FOR EXAMPLE I
I , 4,391,283
INCENTIVE SPIROMETER
Edward N. Sharpless, Somerville; Marvin Gordon, East Winsor,
and Joseph Lichtenstein, Colonia, all of N.J., assignors to
Whitman Medical Corporation, Oark, N.J.
I Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,097
Int. a.3 A61B 5/08
U.S. a. 128—725 29 Claims
1. An incentive spirometer comprising:
a flow path through which a patient can inhale air;
means responsive to air flow in said flow path for providing
•4 A
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma or taste
of a consumable material selected from the group consisting of
smoking tobacco compositions and smoking tobacco articles
comprising the step of adding to said consumable material an
aroma or taste augmenting or enhancing quantity of at least
one compound defined according to the structure:
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
111
wherein the dashed line represents a carbon-carbon double
bond or a carbon-carbon single bond; wherein R|, R]', Rj",
Rl' ", Ri"", R3, Rs, Rs', Rs", Rs"', Rs"" and Ra represent
hydrogen or methyl; with the provisos:
. (i) at least four of Ri, Ri', Ri", Ri"' and Ri"" represents
hydrogen; and
(ii) at least four of R5, R5', R5", R5'", R5"" represent hydro-
gen;
with Z being a moiety selected from the group consisting of:
y
X
o
H
H
\
PR7
+
+
+
+
ORs
4,391,286
HAIR CONDITIONING AND COMPOSITION
THEREFOR
Du Y. Hsiung, Park Forest; Chester A. Davis, Berwyn, and
Harold J. Nicholson. Roselle, all of III., assignors to Helene
Curtis Industries, Chicago, III.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,127
Int. Cl.^ A45D 7/00
U.S.a. 132-7 16aaims
1. A composition for conditioning hair comprising water
having dissolved therein about 0.05 to about 5 weight percent
of a quaternary nitrogen-containing polymer having a molecu-
lar weight between about 10,000 and about 10,000,000 and
about 0.5 to about 10 weight percent of a water-soluble, disul-
fide-containing polycarboxylic acid or salt thereof, said com-
position having a pH value at 80° F. from about 4 to about 9.
9. A process for treating hair whose configuration is to be
altered including the steps of:
applying the composition of claim 1 to the hair;
distributing said composition substantially evenly throughout
said hair; and
altering the configuration of the hair while the hair is at least
partially damp.
H /K
'C— o o
-c— o
H
; and
H-C— OH
with the line
■' [+ + + + ]
representing a carbon-carbon single bond or no bond at all; and
R7 and Rg being separately C1-C4 lower alkyl or, taken to-
gether, being C2-C4 alkylene.
4,391,285
SMOKING ARTICLE
George H. Burnett, Richmond; Warren E. Qaflin, Bon Air;
Harry V. Lanzillotti, Midlothian; A. Qifton Lilly, Jr., Rich-
mond; John F. Nienow, Midlothian; Thomas S. Osdene, and
Alline R. Wayte, both of Richmond, all of Va., assignors to
Philip Morris, Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 9, 1980, Ser. No. 148,124
Int. C\? A24B 3/14; A24F 1/00. 5/00
U.S. CI. 131—364 . 27 Qaims
/a
^
l*""^'"*
»^s\S\S\'sSS\svx^:v';\^:^^.^tt:^.^.> .. ■ ■ v>..v..-.^
1. A smoking article comprising a coherent mass of combus-
tible tobacco-containing material, said mass having at least one
through passage extending from a first opening in the surface
of said mass to a second opening remote from the first, said
mass having a porosity such as to support combustion of said
mass when ignited, said mass being of a density and porosity
such as to substantially occlude gas flow therethrough, thereby
providing that puff induced air flow through the smoking
article is through the passage and said mass further being of a
density, porosity and cross-sectional surface area such as to
produce frcan 0.1 mg to 0.3 mg of tar per puff.
4,391,287
CLEANING APPARATUS FOR ENDOSCOPE
Katunaga Konoshima, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus
Optical Company Ltd., Japan
Filed Mar. S^ 1981, Ser. No. 240,951
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 11, 1980, 55-47862
Int. a.' B08B 3/12
U.S. a. 134—99 11 Claims
1. A cleaning apparatus for an endoscope, comprising:
a cleaning vessel; a cleaning liquid supply mechanism for
supplying a cleaning liquid including liquid detergent or
the like to the cleaning vessel in which an endoscope to be
cleaned may be disposed;
a drain pipe connected t9 the cleaning vessel and through
which the cleaning liqu\(l may be drained after it has been
supplied to the cleaning 'vessel;
a liquid disinfectant circulating mechanism for supplying a
liquid disinfectant including a. tank for containing the
disinfectant and being connected to the cleaning vessel to
supply disinfectant to disinfect the endoscope after the
cleaning liquid has been drained from the cleaning vessel,
and the drain pipe being connectable to the tank for re-
turning the liquid disinfectant from the cleaning vessel to
the tank via the drain pipe, whereby residue detergent is
mixed with the disinfectant Jis the disinfectant passes
through the drain pipe; and
means disposed within the liquid disinfectant circulating
mechanism for supplying an anti-foaming agent there-
through which is effective to prevent a foaming from
occurring in the presence of any residue of detergent
which has mixed with the disinfectant.
112
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
431.288
METHOD AND A DEVICE FOR EFFECTING RINSING
OF AN INVERTED SIPHON, WHICH FORMS PART OF A
SEWER
Gosta Nilsson, Aratorpsvagen 38, Fritsla, Sweden (510 20)
PCT No. PCT/SE80/00163, § 371 Date Feb. 11, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 9, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02855, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 24, 1980
per Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 237,143
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 11, 1979, 7905094
Int. a.^ E03D 1/00: B08B 3/02
U.S. a. 137—15 10 Qaims
4,391,289
CHECK VALVE FOR ROD OUT
Donald L. Adams, P.O. Box T, Tulia, Tex. 79088
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 2<S4,578
Int. a.' B08B 1/02: F16K 51/00
U.S. a. 137—15
d. mounting a packing gland upon said rod, and
e. attaching said packing gland to the check valve before
inserting the rod through the check valve and before
unseating the check valve.
1. A method for effecting rinsing of an inverted siphon
which forms part of a sewer by interconnecting two separated
sections of a sewer line comprising, arranging upstream of the
inverted siphon a fluid reservoir having a volume which at
least corresponds to the volume of the siphon for the length
thereof requiring rinsing, and at least once every twenty-four
hours applying a jet force in said siphon to cause the fluid
contents of the reservoir to flow through the inverted siphon
with a flow velocity which at least corresponds to the rinsing
velocity required for removing sludge which has accumulated
in the inverted siphon.
14 Oaims
4,391,290
ALTITUDE SENSING CONTROL APPARATUS FOR A
GAS TURBINE ENGINE
Raymond L. Williams, Evendale, Ohio, assignor to General
Electric Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,221
Int. a.3 F16K 31/12, 49/00. 37/00
U.S. a. 137—81.1 6 Oaims
1. The process involving an opening such as a nozzle with a
duct extending to the opening with the duct being closed by a
main valve, wherein the improved method comprises:
a. cleaning debris from the duct and the opening below the
main valve by
b. inserting a rod through a check valve on the distal end of
the duct, through the main valve while the main valve is
closed and through the duct,
c. opening and unseating the check valve with said rod.
1. Altitude sensing control apparatus for a gas turbine engine
of the type including a compressor section which receives an
input airflow and develops a pressurized output airflow, which
comprises:
(a) means coupled to ambient air for developing a first pneu-
matic signal representative of ambient air pressure;
(b) means coupled to said compressor section for receiving a
portion of said pressurized output airflow and developing
a second pneumatic signal representative of said pressur-
ized output airflow; and
(c) pneumatic valve switching means for receiving said first
and second pneumatic signals and developing a control
apparatus pneumatic output signal in which said pneu-
matic valve switching means includes a first stage having
a poppet valve for driving a second stage, including a
drive piston, said piston being driven in a first direction for
ambient air pressures greater than said predetermined
value and being driven in a second opposing direction for
ambient air pressures less than said predetermined value,
said piston second stage including an output port, said
pneumatic output signal at said output port comprising
said first pneumatic signal when said piston is driven in the
first direction and comprising said second pneumatic
signal when said piston is driven in the second direction,
said poppet valve being coupled to a bellows through a
medially pivotable connecting link, said piston including a
pair of opposing head portions separated by a rod portion
and being sealingly located in said housing, a first region
being defined between one of the opposing head portions
of said piston and said housing, a second region being
defined between said opposing head portions of said hous-
ing and a third region being defined between the other
opposing head portion of said housing, wherein said sec-
ond region is coupled to receive said second pneumatic
signal, said first region is coupled to receive said first
pneumatic signal, said third region is coupled through said
poppet valve to a region in said housing at ambient air
pressure, said one opposing head portion including a servo
orifice therethrough coupling said second region to said
third region with said third region developing a third
pneumatic signal representative of a servo pressure for
controlling the movement of said piston, wherein:
(i) said pneumatic output signal comprises said first pneu-
matic signal for ambient air pressures greater than a
predetermined value which is representative of a prede-
termined altitude, and
(ii) said pneumatic output signal comprises said second
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
11^
pneumatic signal for ambient air pressures less than said
predetermined value.
4,391,291
APPARATUS FOR RECONSTITUTING A
CONCENTRATE
Ronald W. Hume, 848 Harbor Island, Qearwater, Fla. 33515
.Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,757
Int. a.3 F16K 19/00
U.S. a. 137—99
8 Oaims
1. An apparatus of the type designed to reconstitute a liquid
concentrate, said apparatus including a first reservoir for stor-
ing the concentrate and a second reservoir for storing the
reconstituted concentrate, and said apparatus further compris-
ing, in combination,
a pumping means operable to transfer predetermined
amounts of concentrate from said first reservoir to said
second reservoir,
said pumping means including a first piston means carried by
a first piston rod means,
a motor means operable to deliver predetermined amounts
of a reconstituting fluid to said second reservoir,
said motor means including a second piston means carried by
a second piston rod means,
a yoking means for interconnecting said motor means in
driving relation to said pumping means,
said first and second piston rod means disposed in axial
alignment with one another and operably interconnected
to one another through said yoking means,
a pair of multi-port, bi-directional valve means for operably
interconnecting an external source of fluid under pressure
in driving relation to said motor means,
said pair of valve means ojjerably jhterconnected to one
another so that one of said pair is a driving valve and the
other of said pair is a driven valve,
said driving valve being operably interconnected to said
yoking means so that the position of said yoking means
determines the opening and closing of the ports of said
driving valve,
said first piston rod means having a reduced diameter por-
tion to provide a shoulder means between the reduced and
un-reduced portions of said first piston rod means,
said yoking means provided with an aperture means for
receiving only the reduced diameter portion of said first
piston rod means so that travel of said first piston rod
means in a first direction toward said yoking means dis-
places and yoking means by abutting a leading portion of
said yoking means, but travel of said first piston rod means
in a second direction away from said yoking means does
not displace said yoking means. ,
4,391,292
FAST-RESPONSE THREE-WAY SOLENOID VALVE
Robert W. Millar, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Orshansky
Transmission Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 159,469, Jun. 16, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,661
Int. a.3 F15B 13/044
U.S. O. 137—269 21 Oaims
19. A fast-response three-way solenoid valve, comprising:
a housing having a first opening, a secnd opening, and a third
opening interconnected by a linear fluid pathway,
a first chamber disposed in said pathway between said first
opening and said second opening, each end of said first
chamber forming a first valve seat, one an inner valve seat
and one an outer valve seat, with respect to said second
opening,
a first ball in said first chamber movable toward and away
from a said first valve seat to open and to close off the
flow of fluid through the pathway at said first valve seat,
a second chamber disposed in said pathway m line with said
first chamber and between said second opening and said
third opening, each end of said second chamber forming a
second valve seat, one an inner valve seat and one an outer
valve seat, with respect to said second opening,
a second ball in said second chamber movable toward and
away from a said second valve seat to open and to close
off the flow of fluid through the pathway at that said
second valve seatt
a separator pin disposed, with clearance, within said linear
pathway between said first and second chambers and
bearing against both said first and second balls at substan-
tially all times, said valve seats, balls, and separator pin
being so related that when one said ball is seated against its
said seat the other ball is not seated by said separator pin,
a solenoid having a coil, a plunger which moves upon ener-
gization of the solenoid, and a guide passage between said
plunger and said first chamber, aligned with both said first
and second chambers and said first and second balls,
a plunger pin disposed in said guide passage, one end of said
plunger pin bearing against said first ball on the side
thereof opposite to said separator pin, the other end of said
plunger pin bearing against said plunger when said sole-
noid is energized,
movement of said plunger upon the energization of said
solenoid causing said plunger to contact and move said
plunger pin, in turn moving said first ball, said separator
pin, and said second ball so that one of said balls is seated
against the said seat when the solenoid is energized and
the other ball is seated against its said seat when the sole-
noid is de-energized.
114
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391^3
PACKING FOR EQUALIZING RESERVOIR CUT-OUT
VALVE
John R. Keenan, Watertown, N.Y^ assignor to General Signal
I Corp., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,872
' Int. CiJ F16K 51/00. 31/122
UJS. a. 137—312 15 Qaims
a mounting plate affixed to the diaphragm operator in said
output chamber,
said wall structure deflning an input port for the input cham-
ber, an output port for the output chamber, and an aper-
ture to communijpate said third chamber to atmosphere,
a stem positioned 'in the output chamber, which stem is
affixed to said mounting plate and operable by the dia-
phragm operator,
a seal means affixed near one end of the stem and positioned
to abut said separating plate port, and
a bias spring with a known bias force, positioned in the
output chamber to bias the diaphragm operator and stem
to open the separating plate port when the pressure differ-
ence between the output and third chambers is less than
the bias force of the spring. ^
<2S i
u2^:^^!J
l?6 /«
1. In a valve having a housing, a bore in said housing, a valve
seat in said bore, a first packing means providing a seal be-
tween said valve seat and said housing, said first packing means
being subjected to differential pressure reversals across that
packing means, the improvement comprising:
a second, separate packing means spaced from said first
packing means and adjacent thereto between said valve
seat and said housing and providing a seal between said
valve seat and said housing; and
means for eliminating differential pressure reversals across
said first and second packing means when said valve
experiences differential pressure reversals therein by con-
necting the space between said first and second packing
means to a fixed value of pressure such that said first and
second packing means do not oscillate in response to said
differential pressure reversals.
4,391,295
HOT WATER SYSTEM AND VALVE
Lester E. Stipe, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Precision Plumbing
Products, Inc., Portland, Oreg.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,263
Int. a.3 F24H 1/00
U.S. a. 137—522 3 Qaims
4,391,294
DUMP DELAY VALVE
John A. Aubel, Decatur, III., assignor to Borg-Wamer Corpora-
tion, Chicago, 111.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 326,231
Int. a.3 F16K 17/18: F02M 3/00
U.S. a. 137—493.8 13 Qaims
50
_l
SOURCE
VACUUM
OPERATED
ELEMENT
1^
52
1. A dump delay valve, comprising:
a wall structure defining an enclosure,
a separating plate mounted in said enclosure, defining an
input chamber and an output chamber, which separating
plate defines a port, an aperture and an umbrella valve
opening between the input and output chambers,
an umbrella valve mounted in said input chamber on the
separating plate, to cover said umbrella valve opening,
a diaphragm operator, mounted in the output chamber defin-
ing a third chamber, with the output chamber adjacent the
separating plate, which diaphragm operator separates and
seals the output and third chambers from each other.
1. A gravity operated valve comprising:
(a) a valve casing comprised of lower and upper sections
secured together detachably, the lower section having an
inlet fluid passage and the upper section having an outlet
fluid passage and a vertically elongated communication
passage communicating the outlet passage with the inlet
passage,
(b) a valve seat ring secured removably between the lower
and upper valve casing sections and having an upwardly
facing annular valve seat facing said communication pas-
sage,
(c) a hollow vertically elongated cylinder secured to said
valve seat ring outwardly of the annular valve seat and
extending vertically upward into said communication
passage, the cylinder having a cylinder wall having an
outer diameter substantially smaller than the diameter of
the communication passagf , the cylinder having a closed
top and an open bottom communicating with the valve
seat ring opening, the cylinder wall having an opening
therethrough adjacent the valve seat ring,
(d) a weighted piston slidably fitted within said cylinder for
vertical movement therein, said piston defining an upper
cavity within said cylinder above said piston, said piston
having a valve face on the bottom thereof for sealingly
fitting on the upwardly facing valve seat on the valve seat
ring when the fluid pressures at said inlet passage and said
outlet passage are in substantial equilibrium, said piston
being free to rise off said valve seat toward the closed top
of said cylinder when the fluid pressure at said inlet pas-
sage is greater than the fluid pressure at said outlet pas-
sage, and
(e) a flow limiting passage communicating the communica-
tion passage in the upper valve casing section with said
upper cavity in the cylinder for dampening the speed of
movement of the piston in the cylinder.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
lis
" 4,391,296
BY-PASS PILOT OPERATED HYDRAULIC
CHECK VALVE
John D. Abbott, 26395 S. Corral Hollow Rd., Tracy, Calif.
95395
I jFiled May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,458
' ! Int. a.3 F16K 17/32. 31/06
U.S. a. 137—523 4 Claims
4,391,297
MONO-RAIL BOOM SUPPORTED ARTICULATED
SERVICE LINE
Houston W. Knight, Whittier, Calif., assignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, Chicago, III.
Filed Nov. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,767
Int. aj F16L 3/00
U.S. a. 137—615 20 Claims
iZfe. 9
24 "^1
%
130
3Z
■too'
1. A mono-rail boom supported articulated well service line
for use in well service operations to interconnect a supply of
pressurized fluid to a wellhead, comprising:
an extendible mono-rail boom having a plurality of boom
sections with an inboard boom section mounted on a
mobile transport means and with the other boom sections
extendible outward from said inboard boom sections;
means for supporting an outer portion of said boom when
said boom is in an extended position;
an articulated pipe well service line;
a plurality of trolleys mounted for relative independent
movement along the length of said boom with the move-
ment of said trolleys independent of the extendible move-
ment of said boom sections;
means for connecting said service line to said trolleys for
movement of said service line between a retracted position
and an extended position when said boom is in an ex-
tended position; and
means for disconnecting said service line from said trolleys
for supporting said service line on the ground when said
service line is at least partially extended.
4,391,298
MULTILINE PIGGABLE FLUID SWIVEL
John E. Ortloff, Houston, Tex., assignor to Exxon Production
Research Co., Houston, Tex.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,738
Int. CI.3 F16L 27/06
U.S. a. 137—615 13 Claims
1. A valve comprising
means defining a housing,
means defining a main bore in said housing having a first end
and a second end,
means defining an inlet port in fluid communication with said
first end of said main bore,
means defining an outlet port in fluid communication with said
first end of said main bore,
a solenoid valve having a valve plug and a valve seat disposed
in said main bore between said inlet port and said outlet port,
said plug of said solenoid valve biased against said seat of
said solenoid valve when said solenoid valve is unenergized,
means defining a second fluid flow channel in fluid communi-
cation with said second end of said main bore,
a piston disposed in said main bore between said first and said
second ends,
means for applying hydraulic fluid pressure in said second
channel whereby said piston moves toward and engages said
solenoid valve plug and moves said plug away from said seat
to permit the flow of fluid from said inlet port to said outlet
port, and
means for decelerating said piston when said piston moves
away from said solenoid valve plug upon release of said
hydraulic fluid pressure in said second channel.
1. A piggable fluid swivel comprising:
a first element having a first surface;
a second element rotatably mounted on said first element so
that said first and second elements rotate with respect to
one another about a common axis, said second element
having a second surface which rotatably mates with said
first surface of said first element;
a continuous fluid passage in said swivel defined by a first
groove in said first surface and a second groove in said
second surface which align opposite each other when said
first and second elements are assembled;
seal means for preventing flow from said fluid passage be-
tween said first and second surfaces;
a first opening through said first element into said first
groove to provide fluid communication between the exte-
rior of said swivel and said fluid passage;
a second opening through said second element into said
second groove to provide fluid communication between
the exterior of said swivel and said fluid passage; and
fluid barrier means mounted on one of said elements for
substantially blocking fluid flow in said continuous flow
passage at the point of said barrier means, said fluid barrier
means comprising:
a housing on said one of said elements having a recess
therein which opens into said groove of said one of said
elements;
a baffle plate slidably positioned in said recess and being
movable between (a) an open position wherein said
baffle plate is sufficiently retracted within said recess so
that substantially no part of said baffle plate extends into
said groove on said one of said elements and (b) a closed
position wherein said baffle plate sufficiently extends
from said recess into said other groove on said other
element to substantially block fluid flow through said
continuous passage past said baffle plate, said baffle
plate movement occurring substantially along a straight
line coinciding with the longitudinal axis of said baffle
i;:
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
plate, said baffle plate having a sealing edge conforming
to a corresponding portion of said other groove on said
other element, whereby in response to said baffle plate
being in said closed position, said continuous fluid pas-
sage is substantially completely sealed from fluid flow
past said baffle plate; and
means in said housing for moving said baffle plate back
and forth between said open and closed positions.
4,391,300
PIPE PATCHING CLAMP
Arthur D. Saylor, Covina, and Henry L. Habegger, Anaheim,
both of Calif., assignors to Habegger International, Pasadena,
Calif.
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 182,942
Int. a.3 F16L 55/16
U.S. a. 138—99 8 Qaims
4,391,299
ELECTRO FLUIDIC ACTUATOR
ten B. Holmes, Rockville, M d., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Apr. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 142,547
Int. a.3 GOIV 1/04
VS. a. 137—831 5 Qaims
1. An actuator for converting electrical signals into power
pulses in a working fluid, comprising a sealed, fluid-tight enclo-
sure, including:
a housing having a plurality of openings therein, and
a like plurality of lightweight, low inertia bellows having
open end portions which adjoin the housing in intimate
contact therewith and which are aligned respectively with
the housing openings, opposite closed end portions having
one side in contact with the working fluid,, and intermedi-
ate side portions which are highly compliant to movement
of the closed end portions relative to the opposite open
. end portions and adjoining housing, the plurality of bel-
lows including first and second working bellows and a
pressure equalizing bellows;
electromechanical means, connected within the sealed en-
closure between the housing and the closed end of each
working bellows, for moving the closed end of each work-
ing bellows relative to the housing in accordance with the
electrical signals to generate corresponding power pulses
in the working fluid adjacent each working bellows, said
electromechanical means comprising
a movable shaft having one end connected to the closed
end of the first bellows and an opposite end connected
to the closed end of the second bellows,
a coil for urging said shaft in a first direction, and
a spring for urging said shaft in a second direction; and
pressure equalizing means for equalizing pressure within the
housing with pressure of the working fluid in contact with
the pressure equalizing bellows, including
an electrically non-conductive liquid which is disposed
within and fills the sealed enclosure, and
the pressure equalizing bellows, which serves as a freely
movable interface between the non-conductive liquid
within the housing and the working fluid in contact
with the pressure equalizing bellows.
?/^ ?7
1. A pipe patching clamp for repairing fissures in pipes in
situ, comprising:
a one-piece non-metallic strap member formed into a cylin-
der and having a pair of dogs forming the respective
opposite ends, said member being sufficiently resilient to
enable separation of the member ends and receipt of the
member about a pipe with inherent resiliency urging the
strap member ends toward one another;
first and second longitudinally extending grooves on the
member inner surface, the base of each groove and the
groove opening at the strap member surface being of
substantially same dimensions, said grooves being located
at approximately 180 degrees to each other;
threaded means for securing the strap member dogs together
and hold the strap member about the pipe; and
a sealing strip of a resilient material, one side of the strip
curved to conform to the inner surface of said strap mem-
ber and including at least one integral tongue of such
geometry enabling fitting receipt within a groove, the
other side of said strip extending outwardly of the inner
surface of the strap member.
4,391,301
HOLE REINFORCEMENT
Fred R. Pflederer, Wauwatosa, Wis., assignor to A. O. Smith
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis. - —
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,809
Int. a.^ B65D 90/02; F16L 9/16
U.S. a. 138—103 2 Claims
1. A structural article comprising:
a cylindrical wall having a longitudinal axis and formed of a
cured thermosetting resin reinforced by fibrous material,
said wall having an opening therein; and
a plurality of pairs of opening reinforcement bands, said
bands comprising a series of continuous filaments encir-
cling said wall and bonded to the outer surface of said
wall, with said bands in each of said pairs being disposed
JULY 5, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
117
tangentially to the perimeter of said opening and on sub- end edges for holding the folded band around the cable, said
stantially opposite sides of said opening, material of the band being a soft, extruded plastic, the configu-
one of said pairs of bands disposed substantially normal to
the longitudinal axis of said cylindrical wall and j
at least one of said pairs of bands overlapping at least one ' ,
other of said pairs of bands in the vicinity of said opening. ri
4,391,302
COUPLED TUBULAR CASING FOR FOODSTUFFS
Helmut Huhn, and Siegfried Kaiser, both of Walsrode, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Wolff Walsrode Aktiengesellschaft,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
I Filed Jan. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 114,655
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 27,
1979,2903117,'
1 1 Int. aj F16L 11/12
U.S. a. 138—118.1 11 Qaims
■i;
■>,
™^
ration of said grooves and said elevations being such to enable
said band to be wound into a roll.
A B
A. A flexible shirrable coupled tubular casing for foodstuffs
having a plurality of couplings the coupling seams of which are
formed by adjacent ends of tubular casing portions to be cou-
pled and a multilayered scalable foil, the adjacent ends of the
tubular casing portions to be coupled each having a continuous
circumferential edge portion which substantially lies in a plane
extending at an oblique angle of 10° to 80° to the longitudinal
axis of the tubular casing, and the foil placed in sealing engage-
ment with and partially inside each of the adjacent ends of the
tubular casing portions to be coupled and also extending at an
oblique angle of 10° to 80° to the longitudinal axis of the tubu-
lar casing.
4,391,304
WARP TENSION STRUCTURE
Ray M. Taylor, 1000 Park Ave., Quakertown, Pa. 18951, as-
signor to Ray A. Taylor, Quakertown, Pa.
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,881
Int. a.^ D03D 49/04. 49/08; F16D 63/00
U.S. a. 139—100 8 Qaims
■^2
4,391,303
BAND-SHAPED DEVICE FOR FORMING A
PIPE-SHAPED PROTECTION COVER
Stig L. Holgersson, Bredaryd, Sweden, assignor to Telefonak-
tiebolaget L M Ericsson, Stockholm, Sweden
PCT No. PCT/SE80/00126, § 371 Date Jan. 3, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 23, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02476, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 13, 1980
PCT Filed Apr. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 227,066
Qaims priority, application Sweden, May 3, 1979, 7903842
Int. Q.3 F16L 57/00
U.S. Q. 138—166 6 Qaims
1. An article for forming a tubular, protective cover around
a cable, said article comprising a generally flat band of material
having opposite upper and lower surfaces and end edges, one
of said surfaces being planar, the other surface being provided
with a plurality of spaced grooves extending parallel to said
end edges, each groove having inclined sides which intersect
to form an apex proximate said one planar surface to form a
hinge thereat where said band can be folded to enable the band
to surround a cable, said other surface of said band being
relatively flat between said grooves to define a continuous
planar surface, said band including elevations projecting be-
yond the plane of said other surface in continuation of said
sides of said grooves on both sides of each groove such that
with the band folded at the hinges, the elevations at the both
sides of the respective grooves approach one another to pro-
vide a stiffening effect for the folded band around the cable,
and locking means on said band on said band proximate said
I032O.G — S
1. A tensioning mechanism for a loom warp beam wherein
the beam includes at least one cylindrical head, said mechanism
defining a band including a discontinuous inner gripping ply
extending about said head and an outer tensioning ply secured
to and extending about the inner ply and having adjacent
opposite ends, one of said ends including roller means jour-
naled therefrom for rotation about an axis disposed transverse
to the longitudinal extent of said one end, an elongated flexible
tension member having one end anchored relative to the other
end of said tensioning ply and extending therefrom and about
said rolfer means and thereafter generally tangentially of said
roller means in a direction generally opposite to the direction
in which said tension member extends from said tension ply
one end toward said roller means, means non-yieldingly an-
choring the other end of said tension member relative to the
axis of rotation of said head, said one end of said outer tension-
ing ply being anchored to the corresponding end of said inner
play, the other end of said outer ply extending from the side of
said head opposite from the head side from which the other
end of said tension member extends toward its anchored posi-
tion relative to the axis of rotation of said head, said outer ply
other end generally paralleling said tension member other end
and variable force means oppositely connected to said other
118
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
end of said outer ply yieldingly biasing said other outer ply end
in a direction in which it extends from said head.
4^91,305
WEFT PICKING DEVICE OF AIR JET TYPE WEAVING
LOOM
Takao Takahashi, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed May 12, 1980, Ser. No. 149,083
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 18, 1979, 54-61767;
Oct. 19, 1979, 54-134242; Jan. 14, 1980, 55-2121
Int. a.5 D03D 47 /iO
U.S. a. 139—435 15 Claims
' li^J- ^.
1. A weft picking device of an air jet type weaving loom,
comprising:
(a) a weft inserting nozzle for injecting a weft yam under the
influence of an air jet therefrom to insert the weft yarn
into the shed of warp yarns;
(b) a plurality of air guide members each having a generally
looped section defming at the inner peripheral surface
thereof an air guide opening, said loop section having a slit
through which the weft yarn can leave said air guide
opening, said air guide openings forming an air guide
channel through which the weft yarn is picked into the
warp yam shed;
(c) an auxiliary nozzle in the shape of a pipe and having a
nozzle opening through which an auxiliary air jet is
ejected to enhance an air stream produced by the air jet
from said weft inserting nozzle so as to assist weft picking,
said nozzle opening of said auxiliary nozzle being so
formed that the extension of the axis thereof intersects the
axis of said air guide channel at a predetermined angle and
is {perpendicular to a tangent line of said air guide opening
of one of said air guide members at a point on said inner
peripheral surface of said loop section thereof; and
(d) means for pushing aside the warp yams when said auxil-
iary nozzle enters the array of warp yams, said pushing
aside means being located in the vicinity of said auxiliary
nozzle and the dents of a reed.
4,391,306
COIL WINDING APPARATUS
Tokuhito Hamane, Hirakata; Toshio Kinoshita, Katano;
Masafumi Kihira, Hyogo; Hitosi Hamada, Yawata, and Mikio
Gotou, Neyagawa, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Elec-
tric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,403
Int. C1.3 B21F i/00
U.S. CI. 140^92.1 3 Oalms
1. A coil winding apparatus comprising:
a coil winding spool on which coils are to be wound;
a flyer member for winding electric wire around said coil
winding spool to form the coils;
a coil inserting jig which is positioned adjacent said spool
member for receiving thereon coils formed on said spool
member and rotatably supported for rotation with respect
to said coil winding spool for having portions moved past
said winding spool for receiving respective coils on the
different portions of said winding spool;
coil depressing means movable past said winding spool
toward said coil inserting jig for moving coils off said
winding spool onto said coil receiving jig; and
a stop disposed beside said coil inserting jig and being recip-
rocally pivotable around an axis perpendicular to the
direction of movement of said coil depressing means only
between a position in which it extends directly toward
said coil inserting jig and a position in which it is pivoted
away from said coil depressing means to leave space be-
tween said stop and said coil inserting jig for passage of a
coil onto said coil inserting jig, whereby coils already
accomodated on said coil inserting jig are prevented from
moving past said stop toward said winding spool.
4,391,307
WIRE STRAIGHTENING AND CUTTING MECHANISM
George W. Levi, Littleton, and Kalman Kanyo, Westminster,
both of Colo., assignors, to G&D, Inc., Denver, Colo.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,781
Int. Q\? B21F 1/02
U.S. a. 140—140 18 Qaims
r~3^
1. In a wire straightening and cutting apparatus adapted to
cut wire of varying lengths from a supply source having a
continuous length of wire, wire feeding means for advancing
said continuous length of wire in a lengthwise direction from
said supply source, wire straightening means downstream of
said feeding means through which said continuous length of
wire is advanced, and guide means downstream of said wire
straightening means to permit said continuous length of wire to
float unrestrained from said wire straightening means, and a
cutter mechanism including a cutter blade and rotary drive
means for rotating said cutter blade in correlated relation to
said wire feeding means including means to vary the speed of
rotation of said cutter blade in relation to the rate of advance-
ment of said wire as established by said feeding means in regu-
lating the length of wire which is cut by said cutter blade.
4,391,308
SOAP DISPENSING SYSTEM
Robert L. Steiner, Chicago, III., assignor to Steiner Corporation,
Salt Lake City, Utah
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 255,034
Int. a.J B65B i/04
U.S. a. 141—18 49 Qaims
1. A system for dispensing liquid soap comprising a closed
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
119
wall structure deflning a container, partition means separating
said container into a lower liquid soap reservoir and an upper
refill compartment, dispensing means carried by said container
for dispensing liquid soap from said reservoir, a refill well
having a refill aperture therethrough providing communica-
tion between said reservoir and said refill compartment and
dimensioned to permit the free flow of liquid soap there-
through, a pusher member disposed in said refill well extending
upwardly toward said upper refill compartment, a refill car-
tridge containing liquid soap and having an outlet, a tubular
drain adaptor in said refill cartridge in sealing relation with
said outlet providing communication through said tubular
refill compartment in a refill configuration with the end of said
refill cartridge outlet disposed for cooperation with said refill
4,391,309
SOAP DISPENSING SYSTEM
Robert L. Steiner, Chicago, III., assignor to Steiner Corporation,
Salt Lake Oty, Utah
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 255,035
Int. C\? B65B i/04
U.S. Q. 141—18 35 Qaims
1. A system for dispensing liquid soap comprising a closed
wall stmcture defining a container, partition means separating
said container into a lower liquid soap reservoir and an upper
refill compariraent, dispensing means carried by said container
for dispensing liquid soap from said reservoir, a refill aperture
in said partition means providing communication between said
reservoir and said refill compartment, a refill cartridge contain-
ing liquid soap and having an outlet, and slot and key mecha-
nism carried by the end of said refill cartridge outlet and said
container for maintaining said cartridge in a predetermined
refill configuration and in communication with said refill aper-
ture, said refill cartridge being removably enclosed within said
aperture to permit fiow of liquid soap from said refill cartridge
to said reservoir thereby to refill said reservoir.
drain adaptor between the inside and outside of said cartridge,
and a stopper in said tubular drain adaptor slidable between a
sealed position thereof wherein liquid in said refill cartridge is
sealed therein and an open position thereof wherein said stop-
per is positioned away from said outlet to permit free flow of
soap therefrom, said refill cartridge being removably enclosed
within said refill compartment in a refill configuration with
said outlet disposed for cooperation with said refill well, said
pusher member sliding said stopper within said tubular drain
adaptor to the open position thereof when said refill cartridge
is in the refill configuration thereof to permit the free flow of
liquid soap from said refill cartridge to said reservoir thereby
to refill same.
4,391,310
BAG nLLER SPOUT
J. George Lepisto, Middletown, Ohio, assignor to Champion
International Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,358
Int. Q.3 B65B I /IS
U.S. Q. 141—286 _ 3 Qaims
12. u 30
1. A filler spout for use in feeding a stream of flowable
material into a closed end multi-wall bag to facilitate insertion
of the spout into the bag without damaging the inner wall
thereof, and to ensure a constant volume passage for exhaust
from the bag as the bag is filled by the flowable material, said
spout comprising:
(a) an outer tubular shroud member having a blunt curvilin-
ear closed end and an opposite open end, an exhaust port
formed in the side wall of the shroud member, and a
discharge opening formed in the side wall of said shroud
member intermediate said blunt curvilinear closed end and
said exhaust port; and
(b) an open ended material delivery tube disposed within the
bore of said shroud member and spaced from the wall
thereof so as to define an exhaust passage, one end of said
exhaust passage being in communication with said exhaust
port and the other end of said exhaust passage opening to
ambient surroundings through the open end of said shroud
member, said delivery tube having an inlet end adapted
for connection with a material impelling machine, and an
outlet end disposed contiguous to said discharge opening
of said shroud member, said inlet end of said delivery tube
projecting outwardly beyond said open end of said shroud
member, said delivery tube having a first straight line
portion extending from said inlet end into said shroud
member and a second curvilinear portion extending from
said first portion to said outlet end, said delivery tube
being operable to divert the direction of a stream of mate-
rial impelled therethrough approximately 90° from said
inlet end to said outlet end whereby said exhaust passage
120
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
is maintained at a constant volume by said shroud member 4,391^13
and whereby said closed curvilinear blunt end of said TIRE CHAIN
shroud facilitates entry of the spout into the bag without Erhard A. Weidler, Aalen-Unterkochen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
damaging the inner wall thereof.
assignor to RUD'Kettenfabrik Rieger & Dietz GmbH u. Co.,
Aalen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 416,153
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1981, 3137310
Int. a J B60C 27/00
4,391,311
LOG SPLITTING DEVICE
Warren Levercom, 3901 Main St. NE., Blaine, Minn. 55434
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,251
Int. a.3 B27L 7/00
VJS. CI. 144—193 D 9 Claims
U.S. a. 152—171
18 Oaims
1. A log splitting device comprising:
a pair of vertical rails spaced apart and parallel to one an-
other,
a splitting blade slideably connected between the rails,
a wedge secured to the splitting blade and extending below
the lower level thereof with its cutting surface facing
downward, and
a base plate adapted for securing the rails in vertical position
with the splitting blade mounted thereon.
1. Tire chain with a net configuration having nodal points, in
which at least three chain links are mutually connected in the
region of the nodal points via a component which is arranged
horizontally, that is to say parallel to the tire surface, and is
provided with hook-shaped holding arms and insertion slots
for hanging the chain links in and with at least one closure
element for the insertion slots, characterised in that the compo-
nent (1;14;21;24;30;33;36;38;41;47;48) has at least one substan-
tially T-shaped section, of which the transverse bar (3,4; 16) has
curved legs which form holding arms (5; 17, 18) and the longitu-
dinal bar (2; 15) is provided with a bore (7), the axis of which
runs substantially in the centre plane of the holding arms
(5; 17, 18) and which serves to receive the centre part of a
bolt-shaped closure element
(8;20;22;25;28;31;32;34;35;39;42;45;49;50), the mutually oppo-
site ends of which form locking pins (9) for the chain links (6)
hung into the holding arms (5;17,18) of the T-shaped section
and into at least one further holding arm (19).
4,391,312 4 391 314
LOG SPLirnNG HEAD SNOW TIRE SPIKES
Gerard J. Sakraida, Jr., R.D. #2, Douglas Rd., Beaver Falls, Pa. jjro Inamoto, Amagasaki, and Naohiro Hayata, Kakogawa, both
1^1^ of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.,
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,783 Osaka and Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd., Kobe, both of,
Int. a.3 B27L 7/00 japgn
U.S. a. 144—193 E 16 Qaims Ried Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,302
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1980, 55-45423
Int. a.3 B60C 11/00
U.S. a. 152—210 6 Claims
32
36
3a
34
24
1. A log splitting head comprising:
A. a baseplate;
B. first and second vertical cutting plates opposed and
spaced from each other and mounted to and perpendicular
with the baseplate, each including a cutting edge;
C. a horizontal cutting plate mounted to and supported by
the first and second cutting plates, and also including a
cutting edge; and
D. means for securing the baseplate to the main frame of a
log splitting machine.
1. A snow tire spike which comprises:
a single, integral spike body made of a ceramic material, said
spike body having a flrst end, defmed by a first radially
outer annular surface, for anchoring said spike in a tire,
and a second end, defined by a second radially outer
annular surface, for contacting the ground when said spike
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
121
'i.
is in use in the tire, said first end having a diameter larger
than, but smaller than l.S times, the diameter of said sec-
ond end, said first and second radially outer annular sur-
faces being joined by a third radially outer annular surface
to form a continuous smooth surface at least from said
second end to said first surface; and
a flange made of a plastic material coated directly on at least
said first surface of said spike body, on the entirety of said
first surface.
lcH>
4,391,315
TIRE 'CHAIN WITH ATTACHING DEVICE
Gerald D. Jacobson, 1816 113 Dr. SE., Everett, Wash. 98205
FUed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,505
Int. a.^ B60C 27/00
U.S. a. 152—213 A 5 Qaims
^Z4
xf-x
u
-JE
i»
■fS
;j fi :• St =. «; iJ-,: .-*5, ;4i: ;, * #^ ,
V
V'*
-le
wardly from the second sidewall gripping member and
being constructed from an elastic material, and being
adapted to be extended across the tire and stretched, to
engage the hook at its end onto the ring means adjacent
the first tire gripping member, so that when stretched said
elastic end portion will exert a drawing force on the two
tire gripping members, in the direction of the tread, for
forcing the sharply pointed members into gripping en-
gagement with the sidewalls of the tire.
4,391,316
ANTI-SKID DEVICE FOR VEHICLE WHEELS
Gianfiranco Seggio, Via Tracia 7, Milan, Italy
Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,770
Qaims priority, application Italy, Sep. 17, 1980, 22768/80[U]
Int. Q.' B60C 27/00
U.S. Q. 152—213 A 10 Qaims
' 1. An anti-skid tire appliance adapted to be installed onto and
removed from a vehicle tire, comprising:
a first elongated flexible side member adapted to extend
circumferentially of the tire along the outer sidewall of the
tire;
a second elongated flexible side member adapted to extend
circumferentially of the tire along the inner sidewall of the
tire;
a series of spaced apart cross members, connected at their
ends to the side members and extending laterally across
the tread of the tire, from one side member to the other;
said appliance having first and second ends;
each said side member having ring means at the first end of
the appliance;
each said side member having an end portion at the second
end of the appliance which extends outwardly beyond the
end-most cross member at the second end of the appli-
ance;
each said end portion having a hook at its outer end engage-
able with the ring means at the first end of the appliance,
for securing the two ends of the appliance together and
the appliance on the tire;
a first sidewall gripping member at the second end of the
appliance, connected to the first side member adjacent
said end-most cross member;
a ring adjacent said first sidewall gripping member;
a second sidewall gripping member at the second end of the
appliance, connected to the second side member of the
appliance adjacent said end-most cross member;
each said sidewall gripping member comprising sharply
pointed members adapted to dig into and grip a sidewall
portion of the tire when placed against such sidewall
portion and pulled on towards the tread; and
said end portion of said second side member extending out-
1. An anti-skid device or skid chain for vehicle tires mounted
on wheels comprising:
a plurality of U-shaped elements for radial mounting on said
tires, each of said U-shaped elements including a base
portion and first and second arm portions;
a first series of connecting levers each disposed between and
pivotally affixed on the ends thereof to adjacent ones of
said first arm portions;
a second series of connecting levers each disposed between
and pivotally affixed on the ends thereof to adjacent ones
of said second arm portions;
interlocking means for selectively substantially interlocking
said U-shaped elements to said levers of said first and
second series of levers in a range of positions such that
said first and second arms of said U-shaped elements are
disposed within a preselected range of angles relative to
said levers of said first and second series; and
locking means for locking said levers of said first series to
adjacent said levers of said first series within a preselected
degree of movement, and for locking said levers of said
second series to adjacent said levers of said second series
within a preselected degree of movement.
4,391,317
BAND DEVICE FOR RETAINING A TIRE ON A WHEEL
RIM
Bernard J. Savage, 7 Seymour Mews, London W.l, England
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,706
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 15, 1980,
8026636
Int. Q.3 B60B 25/12, 21/10; B60C 29/00
U.S. Q. 152—330 RF 6 Qaims
I. A band device for retaining a tire on a wheel rim in the
event that the tire should become deflated, which band device
comprises a first band portion which is part circular for sub-
stantially its entire length, a second band portion which is part
circular for substantialy its entire length and which is subsUn-
tially the same size as the first band portion, a link portion
which is part circular for substantially its entire length and
which is for joining the the first and second band portions
together at one end, and fastener means for joining the first and
122
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
second band portions together at their other ends whereby the
band portions and the link portion are retainable in position
vound a base of a wheel rim, the link portion having an aper-
tured part for receiving a valve of a tube of a tire, the link
portion being hooked at each end for connecting to inwardly
directed ends of the first and second band portions whereby
the link portion is positioned in use on the side of the band
device that is adjacent the base of the wheel rim so that the
inwardly directed pressure of the tire serves to bind the first
4,391^19
APPARATUS FOR INTRODUCTNG ELEMENTS INTO
MOLTEN METAL STREAMS AND CASTING IN INERT
ATMOSPHERE
Lawrence J. Heaslip, Toronto, Canada; Alphia L. Hohulin,
Tremont, and Joseph R. Mitchell, Peoria, both of 111., assign-
ors to Keystone Consolidated Industries, Inc., Peoria, 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 70,347, Aug. 27, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,719
Int. a.3 B22D 35/04, 11/10
U.S. a. 164—259 4 Gaims
and second portions and the link portion tighter around the
base of the wheel rim with increasing pressure, and the band
device including a plurality of legs which are secured at spaced
apart intervals to the first and second band portions on the side
of the band device that is adjacent the base of the wheel rim,
the base of the wheel rim having a well with an open mouth,
and the legs being locatable in the well such that they support
the first and second band portions in a well-blocking position at
the mouth of the well and such that they allow the first and
second band portions to flex with the wheel rim.
4,391,318
COMPOSITE OF RUBBER AND METAL
REINFORCEMENT THEREFOR
Frank S. Maxey, deceased, late of Uniontown, Ohio (by Ger-
trude Maxey, legal representative), and Syed K. Mowdood,
Akron, Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rubber Com-
pany, Akron, Ohio
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,163
Int. C\? B60C 7/00; B32B 25/02
U.S. a. 152—359 17 Qaims
1. A composite of rubber composition containing zinc oxide,
carbon black, optionally and/or mineral fillers, cure ac-
celerator(s), fatty acid and/or metal salt thereof, and filament
reinforcement therefor where said filament is selected from at
least one of steel, organic and inorganic filaments, optionally as
a multiple of filaments cabled together to form a cord, charac-
terized in that (i) when said filament or cord thereof is steel,
said rubber composition contains (A) about 0.05 to 8 phr of a
compound selected from at least one of diallyl cyanurate,
triallyl cyanurate, tris(2-hydroxyethyl) cyanurate, triphenyl
cyanurate, diallyl isocyanurate, triallyl isocyanurate, and 4-
ketobenz triazine and, optionally, (B) about O.OS to about 10
phr of at least one borate as the product of (i) a metal selected
from Groups lA, IIA, IIB, IVA, IVB, and VIII of the Periodic
Table of the Elements, and (ii) an acid selected from the group
consisting of boric, orthoboric, metaboric or polyboric acid;
and when said filament or cord thereof is not steel the rubber
composition contains both the (A) compound and the (B)
borate.
-*' 26 28 \
qf^' ' M / -_J°C~^^"^
1. In a casting system including a casting moid and a tundish
arranged above the casting mold, the improvement of appara-
tus for adding an alloy material to a molten metal stream flow-
ing form the tundish into the casting mold comprising in com-
bination:
a hollow tube generally extending in a horizontal direction,
said tube having a closed end and an open end; means
associated with the hollow tube for positioning the open
end of the hollow tube between the tundish and the cast-
ing mold and adapted to be in opposed relation to and on
one side of a molten metal stream and for maintaining the
tube generally transverse to a direction of travel of a
molten metal stream from the tundish to the casting mold;
means associated with the closed end of the hollow tube for
supplying inert gas to said hollow tube for discharge from
the open end toward and around a molten metal stream,
said open end being unblocked to permit visual observa-
tion of a molten metal stream on a side opposite the open
end;
means mounted in the hollow tube to reduce the velocity of
the inert gas supplied to the hollow tube to produce a low
velocity gas exciting the open end of the hollow tube;
an alloy feed tube positioned within the hollow tube, said
alloy feed tube including an inert gas inlet, and alloy inlet
for receiving pellets of alloy material and a discharge
nozzle arranged at the open end of the hollow tube and
having an outlet directed toward the open end of the
hollow tube;
means associated with the alloy feed tube for supplying a
mixture of alloy material and inert gas at a relatively
higher velocity then the velocity of said low velocity gas
to the alloy feed tube;
a gas feed tube in the hollow tube having an outlet at the
open end of the hollow tube, said outlet being arranged to
direct inert gas toward said casting mold; and means in the
alloy feed tube for directing the alloy pellets by flow of
said relatively higher velocity inert gas into the molten
metal stream simultaneous with the low velocity inert gas
flow which envelopes the molten metal stream.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
123
4,391,320
METHOD AND AN APPARATUS FOR AIR
CONDITIONING FOR VEHICLES BY CONTROLLING
ORCULATION OF INSIDE AIR AND INTRODUCTION
I OF OUTSIDE AIR
Yozo Inoue, Chiryu; Yoji Ito; Kiyoshi Hara, both of Kariya;
Kiyoshi Usami, Oobu, and Yasuhiro Iwata, Aichi, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Jul. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 171,030
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1979, 54-94769
Int. a.3 F25B 29/00
U.S. a. 165—2 3 Qaims
4,391,321
HEAT EXCHANGER IN PLANTS FOR VENTILATING
ROOMS OR BUILDINGS
Svante Thunberg, Obserratoriegatan 12, S-113 29 Stockholm,
Sweden
PCT No. PCr/SE80/00085, § 371 Date Nov. 20, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 20, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02064, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 2, 1980
PCT Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 217,019
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 21, 1979, 7902549
Int. Q.^ F24H 3/06
U.S. Q. 165—54 2 Qaims
^.
i;^« nfj-,[^
>23
n 29.- .
-.0, 2%
i
^"*-Jt(^3'^!^''!--^^:-
1-^2
30- •
32' Ul
8
4 0
^
-fH
:::prz^
:_;Lc:irr^
^'^
- 1 0 ■■f^.._■•^
^6
1 0
**
, ROW RAW
1 ' ^' '
CPU —CLK S
1. A method for air conditioning for vehicles with passenger
compartments by controlling circulation of inside air and intro-
duction of outside air in which an inlet for inside air and an
inlet for outside air are selectively opened and closed, and the
circulation of inside air and the introduction of outside air are
selectively effected, characterized in that said method com-
prises: a step of detecting a temperature of a vehicle passenger
compartment, atmospheric temperature and a preset tempera-
ture in an initial period of air conditioning, a step of judging the
results of comparisons between said temperatures, a step of
switching between air conditioning by the circulation of inside
air and air conditioning by the introduction of outside air, a
step of producing an instruction for the introduction of outside
air if either the passenger compartment temperature is higher
than the atmospheric temperature and higher than a preset
temperature or if the passenger compartment temperature is
lower than the atmospheric temperature and lower than a
preset temperature, and a step of producing an instruction for
the circulation of inside air if one of the following conditions is
established:
(a) the passenger compartment temperature is higher than
the atmospheric temperature and lower than a preset
temperature,
(b) the passenger compartment temperature is lower than
the atmospheric temperature and higher than a preset
temperature.
1. In a ventilating system for a building: first and second duct
systems separated by partition walls and arranged in heat-
exchange relationship such that heat may be transmitted from
air flowing through one duct system, through the partition
walls, to air flowing through the other duct system; reversible
fan means associated with each duct system for passing air
through the two duct systems countercurrently; a first outside
air duct placing one end of the first duct system in communica-
tion with outside air and a first inside air duct placing the other
end of the first duct system in communication with inside air;
a second outside air duct placing one end of the second duct
system in communication with outside air and a second inside
air duct placing the other end of the second duct system in
communication with inside air; and valve means for control-
ling air flow including first and second branch ducts arranged
in crossing relationship, each branch duct having a first end
connected to said first inside air duct and a second end con-
nected to said second inside air duct, a non-return valve in each
said first and second inside air ducts at locations between the
connections of the branch ducts to said first and second inside
air ducts, and a non-return valve in each said branch duct, the
arrangement being such that in one mode of fan operation
outside air flows through said first outside air duct, said first
duct system, said first branch duct and into said second inside
air duct while inside air flows through said first inside air duct,
said second branch duct, said second duct system into said
second outside air duct, and in another mode of fan operation
outside air flows through said second outside air duct, said
second duct system into said second inside air duct while inside
air flows through said first inside air duct, said first duct system
into said first outside air duct.
4,391,322
WIRE GUIDE FOR USE WITH A HEAT EXCHANGE
UNIT
Joseph A. Ciarlei, Brewerton; Curtis L. Tobin, Chittenango, and
William B. Jennings, Qay, all of N.Y., assignors to Carrier
Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,980
— Int. Q.' F28F 13/12
U.S. Q. 165—125 6 Qaims
1. A heat exchange unit comprising:
support means for supporting the unit;
a heat exchanger mounted to the support means and extend-
ing about at least a portion of the periphery of the unit;
a fan for circulating air in heat exchange relation with the
heat exchanger;
means defining a control area circumferentially spaced about
the fan and adjacent the heat exchanger wherein at least
124
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
one electrical component of the heat exchange unit may
be mounted, said means additionally defining a wire guide
opening; and
a wire guide connected to extend through the wire guide
opening and between the fan and the heat exchanger, said
wire guide deFming a wire securing cavity and including
means for connecting the wire guide to the means defining
the control area.
upper end that controls the flow of geothermal fluid from said
well, said device capable of having solid deposited material
scraf>ed from the interior surface thereof without shutting
down said well, said device including:
a. a first assembly that includes an elongate tubular body that
has upper and lower ends and is vertically disposed; first
means that effect communication between said lower end
of said tubular body and said upper end of said casing;
upper and lower longitudinally spaced sets of pins sup-
ported on said tubular member that may be moved in-
wardly and outwardly relative thereto, each of said upper
and lower pins having an inner end portion; at least one
tubular boss that projects outwardly from said tubular
body below said lower set of pins; and a valve in commu-
nication with said tubular boss for controlling the flow of
geothermal fluid therefrom;
b. a gate valve that includes an elongate valve body that
when vertically disposed has upper and lower ends, a
transversely movable valve member, and said valve body
having a longitudinally extending interior passage of at
least as great transverse cross section as that of the interior
of said tubular body;
c. second means for securing said lower end of said gate
valve to said upper end of said tubular body;
d. a hydraulic cylinder assembly that includes a hydraulic
cylinder that has a top and bottom; a piston slidably
4,391,323
BAFFLE FOR HEATING PIPES
Erhard Schnier, Roemerstr. 18, D-7143 Vaihingen/Enz 7 (Wiirt-
temberg). Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 7, 1981, Set. No. 223,097
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 10,
1980, 8000478[U]
Int. a.3 F28F 1/20: F24D 19/06
U.S. a. 165—183 9 Qaims
1. A reflector, particularly for mounting above a heating
pipe to reflect heat radiated upwardly by the pipe, comprising
an elongated sheet-material reflector body having at least three
parallel longitudinally extending concave sections each of
which is arcuately curved in transverse direction; each of said
arcuately curved sections having a center of curvature, the
center of curvature of a center one of said sections being lo-
cated in a vertical longitudinal plane of symmetry of said
reflector body; and the centers of curvature of the sections
which flank said center section being laterally spaced from said
vertical plane in mutually opposite direction and being spaced
from the center of curvature of said center section in a direc-
tion away from the center section.
4,391,324
GEOTHERMAL WELL HEAD AND ACTUATOR
ASSEMBLY
Lehman T. Reed, Bakersfield, Calif., assignor to Midway Fish-
ing Tool Co., Long Beach, Calif.
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,377
Int. a.3 E21B 37/04
U.S. a. 166—70 8 Qaims
1. In combination with a geothermal well that has a string of
casing that extends to a producing zone, said string of casing
having an upper end, a device in communication with said
mounted in said cylinder; third means for discharging
hydraulic fluid under pressure into and out of said cylin-
der to move said piston upwardly and downwardly
therein; fourth means for removably securing said bottom
of said hydraulic cylinder to said upper end of said gate
valve; a graduated rod that extends upwardly through a
seal defining opening in said top of said hydraulic cylin-
der; an actuating member that extends downwardly from
said piston through a seal defining opening in said bottom
of said hydraulic cylinder, downwardly through said gate
valve body when said valve member is in an outwardly
disposed position; a transverse pin on a lower portion of
said actuating member, which pin has projecting end
portions; and a force exerting member supported from
said actuating member above said pin;
a plug assembly that includes a rigid body that has a
cylindrical sidewall, a top surface, and a bottom surface
that may be disposed in said tubular body; a circular recess
in said sidewall that extends downwardly from said top
surface to terminate in a circular body shoulder; resilient
packing means in said recess; a cavity that extends down-
wardly from said top surface into rigid body to terminate
in a bottom, said cavity having a pair of vertical grooves
extending outwardly from the portion thereof adjacent
said top, said pair of grooves that extend from intermedi-
ate positions of said vertical grooves, said vertical and
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
125
horizontal grooves being removably engageable by said
projecting end portions of said transverse pin; a plurality
of slots that extend upwardly in said cylindrical sidewall
from said bottom surface that may be radially aligned with
said lower pins; a rigid force receiving ring that has a
downwardly extending first lej^ that abuts against said
packing means and an inwardly extending second leg that
may be contacted by said force exerting ring, said force
receiving ring having a pluraliry of circumferentially
spaced grooves therein that may be engaged by said upper
pins when said packing means is compressed by down-
ward movement of said first leg of said force receiving
ring; spring means in said cavity that exert an upward
force on said actuator member that tends to maintain said
end portions of said. transverse pin above said horizontal
slots when said end portions are in said vertical grooves;
and fifth means that slidably connect said force receiving
ring to said body of said plug assembly, with said force
receiving ring only compressing said packing means into
sealing contact with the interior surface of said tubular
body of said first assembly until after said transverse pin
end portions have moved downwardly in said vertical
grooves below said horizontal grooves; with said gradu-
ated rod visually indicating the position of said plug as-
sembly in said tubular body;
f. first and second insignias on said graduated rod and said
top of said hydraulic cylinder which when in a predeter-
mined position relative to one another indicate said slots
and grooves are radially with said upper and lower pins;
and
g. sixth means for rotating said graduated rod together with
said piston and actuating member, with said plug assembly
being in a sealing position in said tubular body when said
lower pins have said inner end portions in engagement
with said slots and said inner end portions of said upper
pins engage said grooves; with said plug scraping said
foreign material from the interior of said tubular body of
said first assembly when said graduated rod, piston and
actuating member are rotated to dispose said transverse
pin end portions in said horizontal slots, said lower pins
are moved outwardly from disengagement from said slots,
and said piston is caused to move said actuating member
and plug assembly downwardly in said tubular member
for said teeth to scrape said foreign material therefrom;
said plug assembly being returned to a sealing position
when said first and second insignia are aligned, said plug is
moved upwardly in said tubular body to a position where
said slots are above said lower pins, said lower pins are
moved inwardly, said plug assembly is moved down-
wardly for said inner end portions of said pins to engage
said slots, said actuating member, piston and graduated
rod are rotated to dispose said transverse pin end portions
in said vertical grooves, said actuating member is moved
downwardly to move said force exerting ring and force
receiving ring downwardly until said grooves are below
said upper pins, said upper pins are moved inwardly to
engage said grooves to maintain said packing means in
compressed sealing contact with the interior surface of
said tubular body of said first assembly; and said plug
assembly, actuator rod and hydraulic cylinder assembly
capable of being removed from said first assembly by
rotating said actuator rod to dispose said inner end i>or-
tions of said transverse pins in said horizontal slots, mov-
ing said upper pins outwardly from engagement with said
grooves, moving said plug assembly upwardly in said
elongate body of said gate valve above said transversely
movable valve member, and moving said valve member to
an inwardly disposed position whereupon said hydraulic
cylinder assembly, actuator member and plug assembly
may be removed from said gate valves without shutting
down said well.
4,391,325
LINER AND HYDRAULIC LINER HANGER SETTING
ARRANGEMENT
Samuel F. Baker, Cooroe, and Ronald D. Arnold, Missouri City,
both of Tex., assignors to Texas Iron Works, Inc, Houston,
Tex.
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,309
Int. a.3 E21B 2i/04
U.S. Q. 166—208 10 Claiau
1. In a hydraulic liner setting arrangement for setting a liner
in a well bore casing wherein the setting arrangement includes
a setting tool with a tubular mandrel forming part of a pipe
string which is connected to, and extends into, the liner includ-
ing a housing which surrounds and extends longitudinally of
the liner so that the liner and housing form inner and wall
portions defining an annular recess, the invention comprising:
a. longitudinally extending piston means including seal
means to sealably engage said piston means in the recess
and said piston means having a cone shaped end;
b. means to secure said piston means against premature
upward movement into the recess;
c. slip means;
d. means releasably securing said slip means to the liner;
e. port means in the liner for communicating fluid from the
tubular mandrel to the recess to move said piston means
downwardly in the recess and engage said cone shaped
end with said slip means and thereby urge said slip means
into engagement with the well bore casing for securing
the liner to the casing; and
r said seal means on said piston means including spaced seal
means sealably engaging the inner wall of the recess, said
piston means being retractable into th? recess by lowering
the setting tool and liner relative to said piston means after
said slip means engages the casing, said spaced seal means
being located on said piston means so as to span the hous-
ing port means to thereby seal off communication between
the port means and recess.
4,391,326
STINGER ASSEMBLY FOR OIL WELL TOOL
Donald R. Greenlee, Cedar Hill, Tex., assignor to Dresser Indus-
tries, Inc., Dallas, Tex. .,
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,291
Int. C\} E21B 2i/00
U.S. a. 166—240 12 Claims
2. A stinger assembly for use in releasably connecting an
upper section of a tubing string to a tool in a well including a
mandrel having a master cam slot therein defining upper and
lower support shoulders, an indexable collar telescoped onto
126
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said mandrel, a follower connected to said collar and extending
into said master cam slot, a collet joumaled on said collar and
having a plurality of radially flexible spring-fingers connected
thereto for latching said mandrel to the tool, said mandrel
having an outer surface for blocking said fingers from deflect-
proving the gas drainage characteristics of said coal seam;
and
(c) recovering injected material and naturally occurring gas
from said coal seam.
4,391^28
DRILL STRING SAFETY VALVE
James T. Aumann, Salt Lake City, Utah, assignor to Christen-
sen, Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,716
Int. a,3 E21B 34/08
U.S. a. 166—325 6 Claims
ing inwardly and a recess wherein said fingers are free to
deflect radially inwardly for connecting to and releasing from
the tool, said upper support shoulder locating said spring-fin-
gers vertically in registery with said recess when engaging said
follower.
! 4,391,327
SOLVENT FOAM STIMULATION OF COAL
DEGASIFICATION WELL
Leonard J. De Carlo, Morgantown, W. Va., assignor to Conoco
Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,575
Int. a.3 E21B 43/26, 43/27
U.S. a. 166—307
5 Qaims
^^ _J
1. A method for improving the gas drainage characteristics
of a coal seam comprising:
(a) injecting into safe coal seam a foamed fluid comprised of
a liquid solvent selected from the group consisting of
toluene, pyridine, xylene, tetralin, anthracene, coal tar and
mixtures thereof, a foam-producing surfactant and a high
pressure gas, said foamed fluid containing an amount of
said solvent effective to partially dissolve coal contacted
by said foamed fluid;
(b) maintaining said foamed fluid in contact with said coal
seam for a period of time sufficient for said solvent to
partially dissolve coal contacted therewith thereby im-
1. A safety valve for allowing controlled normal flow and
preventing uncontrolled abnormal back flow of fluid pressure
through an internal passage of a drill string casing comprising:
a valve seat situated in and around a portion of the internal
passage in a portion of the drill string casing;
a valve body retained within an adjoining portion of the
internal passage in the drill string casing and adapted to
allow fluid to pass around and through the internal pas-
sage comprising
a cylinder including an outer sidewall and an internal
chamber within the outer side wall extending between
opposite ends of the cylinder, and
closure means attached to and closing off opposite ends of
the cylinder and internal chamber;
a movable valve stem including opposite end portions each
slideably mounted in an aperature extending through each
of the closure means of the valve body;
a valve head attached to an opposite end portion of the valve
stem, adapted for sealing engagement with the valve seat
and normally maintained in a partially open position rela-
tive to the valve seat sufiicient to allow passage of fluid
and suspended cuttings during tripping of the drill string
casing into and out of the borehole, but displacable to a
wide open position in response to a predetermined normal
amount of differential fluid pressure in the internal passage
directed downstream against one side of the valve head
and movable into sealing mating engagement with the
valve seat in response to a predetermined abnormal
amount of differential fluid back pressure in the internal
passage directed back upstream against an opposite side of
the valve head; and
biasing means of predetermined opposing force comprising
abutment means projecting from an intermediate portion
of the movable valve stem within the internal chamber,
and
resilient means extending about each of the opposite end
portions of the valve stem and compressible between
each of the closure means and the abutment means on
and movable with the valve stem for opposing move-
ment of, returning and maintaining the valve stem in a
predetermined normal position and the attached valve
head in the partially open position in absence of and
until the predetermined amount of differential fluid
pressure directed against one side of the valve head is
sufficiently greater than the opposing force of the resil-
ient means and any fluid pressure directed against an
opposite side of the valve head and thereby displace the
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
127
valve head from the partially open position toward
either the wide open position or a closed position.
4,391,329
USE OF MARKER FLUID IN CEMENTING OFFSHORE
WELLS
Julius P. Gallus, Anaheim, Calif., assignor to Union Oil Com-
pany of California, Brea, Calif.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,510
Int. a.3 E21B 33/14
U.S. a. 166—336 12 Qaims
1. Method for cementing casing in an offshore well com-
pleted under water comprising sequentially:
(a) drilling a borehole,
(b) positioning a drilling fluid in the borehole,
(c) positioning one or more connected sections of casing in
the borehole,
(d) injecting into the casing, out the bottom thereof, up the
annular space between the casing and the borehole and
out into the surrounding water a slug of about 2 to 20
barrels of a black colored marker fluid comprising:
[1] 100 parts by weight cement;
[2] about 35 to 56 parts by weight water,
[3] about 5 to 8 parts by weight particulate carbon black,
[4] about 4 to 6.4 parts by weight coal dust, and
[5] about 0.52 to 0.84 parts by weight surface active agent,
(e) injecting into the casing via the same route a cement
slurry,
(0 observing the displaced fluid emerging into the surround-
ing water from the annular space,
(g) observing when the black colored marker fluid begins to
emerge from the annular space,
(h) removing the cement slurry from the casing, and
(i) shutting in the well for sufficient time to allow the cement
slurry to set.
of the bore through the suspension head, exhausting the clean-
ing fluid from the contact region through the bore in the spool,
fixing the suspension head in the bore, and sealing the contact
region of the bore so as to exclude well fluid therefrom.
4,391,330
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR INSTALLING AND
ENERGIZING SUBMERGIBLE PUMP IN UNDERWATER
WELL
Karl Kiefer, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to TRW Inc., Cleve-
land, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 78,907, Sep. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,304,452.
This application Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,503
Int. a.3 E21B 33/043
U.S. a. 166—341 5 Qaims
1. A method of installing and energizing an electric sub-
mergible pump in an underwater well, comprising providing at
an underwater wellhead a spool having a bore aligned with the
well and having a first set of electrical contacts at a contact
region of the bore, suspending the pump from a suspension
head having a second set of contacts adapted to engage corre-
sponding contacts of the first set, lowering the suspension head
and the pump into the bore with the pump passing through the
bore into the well, and with the contacts of the second set
f>ositioned for engagement with the corresponding contacts of
the first set, introducing a cleaning fluid into the contact region
4,391,331
GUIDES FOR USE IN FORMING PIPE CONNECTHONS
AND A PROCESS OF FORMING PIPE CONNECTIONS
Keith Shotbolt, Gerrards Cross, England, assignor to Construc-
tors John Brown Limited, London, England
Filed Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,293
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 10, 1979,
7928006
Int. a.3 E21B 7/128
U.S. Q. 166—342 8 Claims
1. A guide for use in connecting a pipe to a connector of a
sub sea wellhead, which guide comprises a guide post having a
reversibly radially expandable portion to locate in and rigidly
attach the guide post to the sub sea wellhead, and an elongate
portion to be received in the pipe wherein the elongate portion
comprises an elongate sleeve freely rotatable about the axis of
the post for supporting the pipe for rotation to connect to the
wellhead and suitable to constrain the pipe to an orientation in
which it is concentric and coaxial with the wellhead connec-
tor.
4,391,332
OFFSHORE FACTLITY FOR RECOVERY
HYDROCARBON DEPOSITS FROM DEEP SEA BEDS
Jose M. Fayren, Madrid, Spain, assignor to Astilleros y Talleres
del Noroeste, S.A., Madrid, Spain
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,951
Qaims priority, application Spain, May 20, 1980, 491.645
Int. Q.3 E21B 43/00
U.S. Q. 166—350 4 Qaims
1. An improved facility, for the drilling and production of
hydrocarbon deposits located in a deep sea bed, of the type
having a submarine base secured to the deep sea bed, a bundle
of tubular conduits connected to the submarine base and verti-
cally extended therefrom to a moderate depth where the effect
of surface sea waves is negligible, a subsea buoy connected to
the top end of the bundle of tubular conduits at the moderate
depth to thereby exert an ascensional force which places the
tubular conduits under a vertical tension, well heads mounted
on at least some of the tubular conduits, control means
mounted on the subsea buoy for controlling the well heads for
drilling and producing hydrocarbons, a floating plant adapted
to float at sea level, and a top conductor connected to the
128
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
subsea buoy and the floating plant, the improvement, in combi-
nation therewith, wherein the bundle of tubular conduits com-
prises a central structural column having a bottom end secured
to the submarine base and a top end secured to the subsea buoy,
a plurality of peripheral tubular conduits located around said
casing lowering operation, has a weight greater than the
load supporting capacity of said mast used in drilling;
effecting the downward movement of said casing string,
during at least said portion of the casing lowering opera-
tion when the weight of the string exceeds the capacity of
the mast, by relatively vertically actuating two casing
supporting units of a jacking mechanism positioned in the
rig, with the casing string being supported alternately by
the two units respectively; and
transmitting downward load forces resulting from the
weight of said casing string from each of said supporting
units to the earth without transmission of said forces
through said mast, but while said mast used in drilling
remains in said drilling position above the well.
r
r-5
4,391,334
HITCH ASSEMBLY
Lawrence K. Carrick, Spokane, Wash., assignor to Calkins
Manufacturing Company, Spokane, Wash.
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,127
Int. a.3 AOIB 59/04
U.S. a. 172—326 20 Oaims
central structural column, guide means for securing said pe-
ripheral tubular conduits to said central structural column at
vertically spaced intervals, said peripheral tubular conduits
being mounted to said guide means for sliding movement
relative thereto and in a parallel position relative to said central
structural column.
4,391,333
WELL CASING JACK MECHANISM
George I. Boyadjieff, Anaheim, and Andrew B. Campbell, San
Marino, both of Calif., assignors to Varco International, Inc.,
Orange, Calif.
Filed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,718
Int. C1.5 E21B 7/20
UJS. a. 166—379 10 Qaims
1. The method that comprises:
drilling a well utilizing a rig which includes a mast project-
ing upwardly above the well in a predetermined drilling
position, and utilizing a drill string extending along a
predetermined axis relative to said mast and downwardly
into the well;
removing said drill string from the rig after completion of
the drilling operation;
then lowering along said axis and into the well, while said
mast remains in said drilling position above the well, a
string of casing which, during at least a portion of the
1. A ground- working tool for attachment to a towing vehi-
cle, comprising:
a first longitudinal hitch frame having a front end adapted
for connection to the towing vehicle, and a rear end;
a second longitudinal hitch frame;
hinge means mounting the rear end of the first longitudinal
hitch frame to the second hitch frame for relative pivotal
movement about a horizontal transverse axis;
a ground-working implement operatively mounted to the
second hitch frame;
lift means on the second hitch frame for moving the ground
working implement between an elevated inoperative posi-
tion above the ground-working surface and an operative
position engaging the ground
wherein the lift means is comprised of a ground-engaging
wheel and hydraulic cylinder means on the second hitch
frame, mounting the wheel to the second hitch frame and
selectively operable to raise and lower the second hitch
frame and attached implement between the operative and
inopjerative positions;
control means op)erably connected with the hydraulic cylin-
der means to opjerate in conjunction with operation of the
hydraulic cylinder means for alternately operating to (a)
lock the first and second hitch frames together when the
ground-working implement is in the elevated inop)erative
position; (b) tip the second hitch frame and ground-work-
ing implement downward and forwardly as the support
means is operated to move the ground-working implement
to its operative position engaging the ground; and (c)
permit pivotal movement between the hitch frames rela-
tive to one another about the hinge axis after the ground-
working implement has been moved to its operative posi-
tion;
wheels movably holding the first hitch frame at a selected
elevation; and
suspension means between the wheels and first hitch frame
mounting the wheels to the first hitch frame for pivotal
movement about a longitudinal axis.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
129
y
4,391,335
ROTARY HOE WHEEL
Eugen J. Birkenbach, Kildeer, 111., assignor to International
Harvester Co., Chicago, 111.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,979
Int. a.3 AOIB 21/04
U.S. a. 172—540 8 Qaims
1. A rotary hoe wheel adapted to be drawn over the soil and
comprising a hub adapted to be rotationally connected to a
sup>porting member, a plurality of spokes extending radially
from said hub, a generally circular flange connected to said
spokes outward of said hub and a plurality of radially extend-
ing rearwardly curved to the direction of travel teeth con-
nected to said flange and extending to a distal end adapted to
work the soil, a tooth of said plurality having a rearward
surface that is tap)ered at substantially 3° generally from one
lateral surface rearwardly to the other from said distal end
radially inwardly for the entire soil working portion of said
tooth to engage, lift and move soil to one side of the wheel but
rearwardly and the adjacent tooth rearward surface similarly
and oppositely tap>ered at substantially 3° but also rearwardly
to similarly move soil to the other side of the wheel but rear-
wardly with the teeth alternating in this sequence around the
flange.
4,391,336
ACOUSTIC SYSTEM TO GUIDE A COAL SEAM AUGER
Julian B. Coon, Ponca City, Okla.; James C. Fowler, Burke, Va.;
Charles £. Payton, Houston, Tex., and Kenneth H. Waters,
Cape Town, South Africa, assignors to Conoco Inc., Ponca
City, Okla.
per No. PCrAJS80/01565, § 371 Date Aug. 21, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 21, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/01908, PCT Pub.
Date Jon. 10, 1982
per FUed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 301,993
Int. a.J E21B 47/09
VJS. a. 175—45 4 Oaims
1. Method for boring a hole so that its axis is substantially
parallel to the axis of a previously bored hole comprising:
(a) positioning an acoustical transmitter and receiver in
acoustical communication with the wall of the hole being
bored so that their position on the said wall lies on a plane
through the axis of said hole being bored and the axis of
the previously bored hole;
(b) transmitting a continuous frequency acoustical signal
into the wall of said hole;
(c) receiving the reflected signal from the adjacent wall
along with other unwanted acoustical reflections;
(d) determining the phase shift between said transmitted
signal and said first received signal; and
(e) determining the changes in the distance between the wall
of said bored hole and said hole being bored.
4,391,337
HIGH-VELOCITY JET AND PROPELLANT FRACTURE
DEVICE FOR GAS AND OIL WELL PRODUCTION
Franklin C. Ford, 3459 Edison Way, Fremont, Calif. 94538;
Gilmaa A. Hill, 6200 Plateau Dr., Englewood, Colo. 80110,
and Coye T. Vincent, 1201 Eva Ave., Los Altos, Calif. 94022
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,322
Int. a.3 E21B 43/] 17
U.S. a. 175—4.6 I 9 Oaims
1. An integrated jet p>erforation and controlled prop>ellant
fracture device for use in combination with a conventional
tamping means to enhance gas and liquid wells by p>erforating
and fracturing well formation materials comprising:
a housing having susp)ension means for locating said housing
at a predetermined location in a well;
at least one jet p>erforation unit contained in said housing
having a launchable projectile jet and an explosive charge
means for launching said projectile jet;
a controlled-bum, gas prop>ellant material contained in said
housing proximate said jet p)erforation unit; and
firing means for igniting said prop>ellant material and deto-
nating said charge means in a substantially simultaneous
manner, said prop)ellant material having the characteristic
130
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
on ignition of generating gases which instantaneously
follow said jet, said gases having a pressure pulse to aug-
ment and enhance fractures in a geological structure
around the well which are initiated by said jet, wherein in
use in a well having tamping means said device is con-
structed and arranged to produce gases having a pressure
pulse peak below the plastic flow limit of the well forma-
tion materials.
diameter of the outlet orifice; L is the distance between Do and
Det, and D is the diameter of the chamber at any point between
4,391,338
MICROBALANCE AND METHOD FOR MEASURING
THE MASS OF MATTER SUSPENDED WITHIN A FLUID
r MEDIUM
Harvey Patashnick, 27 Crow Ridge Rd., Voorheesville, N.Y.
12186, and Georg Rupprecht, R.D. #3, Apartment 67, Al-
tamont, N.Y. 12009
Filed Apr. 4, 1980, Set. No. 137,424
Int. a.3 GOIG 3/]4; GOIN 31/00
UJS. a. 177—210 FP 14 Qaims
Do and D^at a distance X from Do and wherein Do/L is 2 or
greater; Dq/De is 3 or greater; and n is 2 or greater.
4,391,340
DITHER ASSISTED STEERING
John Z. DeLorean, 280 Park Ave., New York, N.Y. 10017
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,399
Int. a.3 B62D 3/00
U.S. a. 180—79 12 Qaims
'13
1. Apparatus for measuring the mass of matter suspended in
medium comprising:
an elongate elastic element having a first end which is an-
chored and a second end free to oscillate;
filter means attached to the free end for receiving matter
whose mass is to be measured;
means for driving said element so that its second end with
the filter means attached will oscillate at a resonant fre-
quency;
means for passing the medium containing the matter through
the filter means as it oscillates in order to deposit the
matter thereon; and
means for sensing changes in the resonant frequency of
oscillation of said element and filter as they oscillate.
4,391,339
CAVITATING LIQUID JET ASSISTED DRILL BIT AND
METHOD FOR DEEP-HOLE DRILLING
VirgO E. Johnson, Jr., Gaithersburg; T. R. Sundaram, Columbia,
and Andrew F. Conn, Baltimore, all of Md., assignors to
Hydronautics, Incorporated, Laurel, Md.
Continuation of Ser. No. 931,244, Aug. 4, 1978, Pat. No.
4,262,757. This appUcation Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,662
Int a.3 E21B 10/60
U.S. a. 175—393 4 Qaims
1. A cavitating liquid jet nozzle for causing cavitational
errosion of a solid surface comprising a housing for receiving
a liquid and having an inlet end and an outlet end, said housing
having an interior chamber tapering from the inlet end toward
a narrower orifice at the outlet end and being shaped in accor-
dance with the following formula:
Do ~^ \^ Do )\^ L ^ Do )
wherein Do is the initial diameter of the chamber; Df is the
3. In combination with a steering system linkage coupling a
steering wheel to wheels having tires thereon, apparatus for
reducing steering effort at low speeds by introducing a low
amplitude dither into the steering linkage, comprising:
(a) means including an oscillating system attached to the
steering linkage; and
(b) means to input energy to said oscillating system.
4,391,341
SUPPORTING CHASSIS FOR A WORKING MACHINE,
SUCH AS A HYDRAULIC SHOVEL
Daniel Taghon, Cinqueux, France, assignor to Poclain, Le Pies-
sis Belleville, France
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,924
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 11, 1979, 79 25381
Int. a.3 B62D 55/00
U.S. a. 180—9.2 R 10 Qaims
1. Supporting chassis for a working machine such as a hy-
draulic shovel, comprising two longitudinal side-members,
preferably two lateral side-members, each side member being
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
131
essentially constituted by a metal sheet which is bent in such a
way that its cross-section presents a downward oriented con-
cavity, and by a plate closing off the bent metal sheet, the
lower edges of said metal sheet being secured to said plate; the
improvement wherein said plate is monobloc and obtained by
rolling and comprises a central zone of predetermined thick-
ness, which is flanked on each one of its sides with a monobloc
rim of material of thickness between opposite lateral surfaces
of each rim substantially greater than the predetermined thick-
ness adequate to receive upwardly directed fixing screw
screwed therein, and wherein the the lower edges of the said
metal sheet are in contact with the upper faces of the thick rims
bordering longitudinally the closing plate.
an operative ground engaging position and a retracted
position, relative to said platform;
traction means for each side of said trailer and including a
traction belt and belt supporting means;
second means for selectively pivotally moving the traction
means between a retracted position above said platform
and an operative ground engaging position outboard of
the adjacent road wheel;
1 1 4,391,342
STEERING MECHANISM FOR VEHICLES EQUIPPED
WITH POWER STEERING SYSTEM
Masao Nishikawa, Tokyo; Yoshihiko Toshimitsu, Asaka; To-
shihiko Aoyama, Saitama; Tokuro Takaoka, Tokyo; Takashi
Aoki, and Yoichi Sato, both of Wako, all of Japan, assignors
to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
j Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,492
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1980, 55-
30729[U]
U.S. Q. 180—143
Int. a.3 B62D 5/06, 1/16
7 Qaims
-jTi^j^ "
1. A steering mechanism for a vehicle equipped with a
power steering unit producing an increased steering reactive
force in proportion to vehicle speed and a resilient element
interposed in a path of torque transmission between a steering
wheel and said power steering unit, comprising: .
a damper means provided between two relatively rotatable
members operably associated with each other through
said resilient element, whereby torsional vibrations of a
first one of said members disposed on the side of said
steering wheel, caused by the resiliency of said resilient
element and the moment of inertia of said steering wheel,
are attenuated;
said damper means comprising two elements adapted to
produce a frictional force when one of said elements
rotates relative to the other of said elements; and
said two elements of said damper means comprising a ring
and a cover fitted on the outer periphery of said ring.
means for locking said traction means and said road wheels
in the r respective operative and retracted positions; and
drive mieans in said platform, engageable by the vehicle
drivp wheels, for driving said traction means when the
vehicle is on the platform and the traction means are in
their operative position.
4,391,344
LOADER OPERATOR RESTRAINT
Henry J. Weber, Oaks; Lonnie D. Hoechst, Gwinner; James R.
Christensen, and Verne C. Watts, both of Lisbon, all of N.
Dak., assignors to Qark Equipment Company, Buchanan,
Mich.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,534
Int. Q.' B60R 21/10. 25/06
U.S. Q. 180—271 17 Qaims
4,391,343
' ' RETRACTABLE TRACTED CART
Frederick A. Deare, 5 Kitchener Ave., Parry Sound, Ontario,
Canada (P2A 1R7)
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,035
Qaims priority, application Canada, Nov. 29, 1979, 3408%
Int. Q.' B62D 55/08. 55/26
U.S. Q. 180—198 12 Qaims
1. A convertible traction device for use with a vehicle hav-
ing at least two drive wheels, comprising:
a trailer for towing behind said vehicle and having a plat-
form sized to receive the vehicle, hitch means and a road
wheel assembly;
first means for selectively moving said road wheels between
1. A loader including:
a power operated working implement;
control apparatus having a plurality of operative positions
for supplying power to the working implement and at
least one neutral position where power is not supplied to
the working implement, the control apparatus capable of
manipulation by the operator of the loader for placing the
control apparatus in any one of the operative positions or
the neutral position;
132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
an operator restraint member having an engaged position for
securing the operator in the loader during operation and a
disengaged position for releasing the operator to permit
him to leave the loader;
a lock assembly in operative cooperation with the control
apparatus and the restraint member for locking the control
apparatus in the neutral position when the restraint mem-
ber is in its disengaged position, the locking assembly
including a locking member connected with the restraint
member, the locking member having a terminal end that is
moved in a first direction when the restraint member is
moved from its disengaged position to its engaged position
and moved in a second direction when the restraint mem-
ber is moved from its engaged position to its disengaged
position, the locking assembly further including a locking
device in operative association with the locking member
for selective locking engagement with the control appara-
tus, the locking device being pivotally movable to an
unlock position with the control apparatus when the ter-
minal end of the locking member is moved in its first
direction, the locking device being pivotally movable to a
. lock position spaced from the control apparatus when the
terminal end of the locking member is moved in the sec-
■ ond direction;
a cab portion;
a cab seat for the operator located in the cab portion;
the restraint member including a generally U-shaped seat bar
having two end portions and a bent center section, each of
the end portions of the seat bar being pivotally connected
to the cab portion at axially aligned pivot points, and the
bent center section being radially displaced from an axis
defined by the pivot points;
a friction device operatively associated with one of the pivot
points;
said one pivot point including aligned openings in the cab
portion and the seat bar and further including a pin in-
serted through the aligned openings;
the friction device including a spring mounted on the pin and
a friction washer urged by the spring into engagement
with the seat bar;
the bar including a pair of mounting ears rigidly mounted to
one end of the bar and one of said mounting ears having an
opening therethrough;
the cab portion including a rigidly attached bracket mounted
on a side post of the cab portion;
the bracket having first and second sections;
the first section mounted on the side post and the second
section disposed angularly from the first section and the
side [>ost;
said second section having an opening therethrough align-
able with the opening in said one mounting ear;
the pin being insertable through the aligned openings in said
one mounting ear and the second section of the bracket;
and
the spring mounted on the pin biasing the second section and
said one mounting ear together so that the bar remains in
the rotative position selected by the operator until reposi-
I tioned by the operator.
16 Claims
structural assemblies, one end of said cable being secured
near the end of one of said structural assemblies;
winch means mounted on said base and the other end of said
cable wound thereon so that operation of said winch
means may effect said elevating of said platform by further
winding of said cable thereon; and
means engageable by said cable when said lift assembly is in
said collapsed position for providing a mechanical advan-
tage in initiating the movement of said lift assembly
toward said extended positions, comprising a sheave as-
sembly mounted near the midpoint of one of the lower-
most of said elongated structural assemblies and including
at least first and second sheave members engageable by
said cable between said winch means and one end of said
one of the lowermost of said elongated structural assem-
blies, forcing a portion of said cable to assume an inclined
path from said first sheave member toward said one end of
said one of the lowermost of said elongated structural
assemblies for creating a vertical force, upon operation of
said winch means, to initiate movement of said lift struc-
ture from said collapsed position toward said extended
positions.
4,391,346
LOUD-SPEAKER
Naoyuki Murakami, 12-2-704, Kyuden 2-Chome, Setagaya-Ku,
Tokyo-To, Japan, and Hiroshi Zyo, Tokyo, Japan, assignors
to Naoyuki Murakami, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,187
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1979, 54-127325;
Aug. 30, 1980, 55-120187
Int. a.3 H05K 5/00
U.S. a. 181—147 2 Claims
I 4,391,345
ELEVATABLE SCAFFOLD
Jim N. Paul, 2737 S. Broadway, Tyler, Tex. 75701
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,353
Int. a.3 E04G 1/22; B66F 3/22
MS. a. 182—141
1. An elevatable scaffold including a base and a platform
connected therebetween by a lift assembly movable between a
collapsed position and extended positions for elevating said
platform above said base, said lift assembly comprising:
a series of elongated structural assemblies each pivoted at
one end and the middle thereof to some other structural
assembly in said series;
a cable passing substantially parallel with some of said struc-
tural assemblies and between the ends of mutually pivoted
kUm Ak> ..I . II ,,,.,.,—
■ ''^^'■'■^"^^■-'-^■■■■' ^^^s
1. A loudspeaker, comprising:
(a) a casing for accommodating therein speaker units, said
casing being enclosed by walls on all four sides and back
side, except for the front part;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
133
(b) a baffie board provided at the open front part of said
casing, said baffle board having an opening formed therein
opening into the ambient, said opening lying in a plane
substantially parallel to the said back wall and being sym-
metrical about a line perpendicular to said back wall;
(c) a plurality of speaker fitting panels mounted around and
behind said opening formed in said baffle board at an angle
to said baffle board diverging in the direction of said
opening, and a back fitting panel mounted on said speaker
fitting panels parallel to said back wall; and
(d) a plurality of speaker units intensively mounted on said
speaker fitting panels around and behind said opening in
said baffle board, and a back speaker unit mounted on the
said back fitting panel, the total area of the entire dia-
phragms of said speaker units being substantially equal to,
or larger than, the area of said opening in said baffle board,-
the sound wave radiating direction of said speaker units
mounted on said speaker fitting panels being concentrated
on a single imaginary point behind the plane of said open-
ing in the baffle board, hence within the ambit of the space
defined by said speaker fitting panels and on the said line
perpendicular to the back about which the said opening is
symmetrical, and the sound wave radiation direction of
said back speaker unit being alone said line. ,
4,391,347
SAFETY DEVICE FOR LADDER ACCESS OPENING TO
AN ELEVATED PLATFORM
John M. Cronan, Baton Rouge; Joseph M. Haynes, Baker, and
Darrfell D. Jones, Brusly, all of La., assignors to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
1 1 Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,878
' ' Int. C\? E04G 9/10, 5/00
U.S. a. 182—113 2 Qaims
1. A safety device for that portion of an elevated platform,
including a horizontal guard railing, to which an open access
ladder is attached, comprising an elongated, rigid member
adapted to form an extension of the horizontal portion of the
guard railing, and means for connecting the elongated member
to the platform railing including a pair of plates rigidly fas-
tened to each end of the elongated member, and means for
securely connecting each pair of plates at each end of the
elongated member together below the guard railing at a point
where the horizontal sections of the railing bend down to
attach to the platform or where the vertical support posts
converge together with the horizontal section of the railing,
whereby the ends of the safety device can be locked to the
railing above and on each side of the platform access opening
of the p atform ladder.
4,391,348
SCAFFOLD SAFETY PIN
Ronald L. Rieland, 963 S. Orient Ave., Fairmont, Minn. 56031
FUed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,843
Int. a.3 E04G 5/08. 1/15
U.S. CI. 182—119 9 Qaims
1. Safety apparatus for scaffolds, comprising:
(a) a scaffold having a platform and at least a pair of gener-
ally horizontally extending support members beneath said
platform spaced a first distance apart, said platform having
opposing surfaces;
(b) a pair of openings in said platform through one surface
extending generally normal to said one surface;
(c) safety pin means mounted within each said opening
comprising a hollow cylinder having a pin freely mounted
therein for limited movement between a retracted position
with respect to said one surface and an operative position
extending out of said opening beyond said one surface
such that with said platform disposed with said one sur-
face facing downwardly said pins are moved by gravity to
said operative positions, and with said platform disposed
with said one surface facing upwardly said pins are moved
by gravity to said retracted positions; and
(d) said openings being located a distance apart with respect
to said first distance such that sliding movement of said
platform in either direction will cause at least one of said
pin means, in the operative position, to encounter a sup-
port member to prevent further sliding movement thereof
4,391,349
TURBOMACHINE LUBRICATING OIL SYSTEM
Alexander A. Carroll, Greensburg, and William F. Hannan, III,
Pittsburgh, both of Pa., assignors to Carrier Corporation,
Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,063
Int. a.3 FOIM 7/00
U.S. a. 184—6.26 2 Qaims
1. A turbomachine lubricating oil system comprising:
a casing defining a chamber having a plurality of apertures in
the bottom;
a relatively large diameter member mounted within said
chamber and rotating therein with said member being
cooled and lubricated via a spray of lubricating oil which
drains from said casing via said plurality of apertures;
structural support means for said casing including a gener-
ally hollow member defining a plenum having inlet means
communicating with the interior of said chamber via a
plurality of apertures to receive the lubricant flowing
therefrom and outlet means;
134
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a separate lubricating oil reservoir located in spaced relation
to said structural support means, and
means connecting said reservoir with said outlet means, the
size of said plenum when compared to the size of said
outlet means being such that lubricant flowing into said
plenum will collect and form into a quiescent pool before
draining therefrom.
support assembly (35), said support tube (37,50) being
axially rotatable relative to said jack shaft (18); and
means (45,46) for converting axial rotation of said support
4,39U50
STRUCTURE FOR MOUNTING A BRAKE PAD
ABRASION DETECTOR
Michio Moriya, Hyogo, Japan, assignor to Sumitomo Electric
Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 15, 1978, Ser. No. 933,941
Gaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 20, 1977, 52-
127282[U]
Int. a.3 F16D 66/02
U.S. Q. 188—1.11 10 Qaims
1. A structure for mounting an electrical brake pad abrasion
detector, of the type in which a through hole is formed in a
backing plate in such a manner as to communicate with a blind
hole formed in a brake pad, wherein the improvement com-
prises:
a cylindrical holding member fixedly secured in said through
hole, said holding member having at least one no-retum
pawl provided on the inner periphery thereof, said pawl
having an end disf>osed within said cylindrical holding
member;
a substantially cylindrical probe having head and leg sec-
tions meeting to form a shoulder at the intermediate por-
tion of said probe, said probe being inserted into said
holding member so as to allow the end of said at least one
no-retum pawl to engage with said shoulder to thereby
hold said probe; and
the diameter of a portion of said holding member, extending
from the vicinity of the end of said at least one no-return
pawl to one end of said holding member adjacent said
head section, being made larger than that of a remaining
portion thereof.
4,391,351
PARKING DISC BRAKE ACTUATOR
Norman F. Jirousek, Garfield Heights, and William M.
Shipitalo, Novelty, both of Ohio, assignors to Towmotor Cor-
poration, Mentor, Ohio
PCT No. PCr/US80/01673, § 371 Date Dec. 12, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 12, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02077, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 24, 1982
PCT FUed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 273,885
Int. a.3 B60T 1/06
U.S. a. 188—18 A 7 Claims
1. In a power train subassembly (8) for a vehicle having a
frame (9), a support assembly (35) rigidly affixed to the frame
(9), a wheel drive assembly (22) rotatably mounted on the
support assembly (35), a differential (11) having a jack shaft
(18) extending therefrom and a brake (10) operatively associ-
ated with said wheel assembly (22) and actuatable between an
engaged and disengaged condition, comprising:
a support tube (37,50) connecting said differential (11) to said
tube (37,50) into lateral motion and mechanically actuat-
ing the brake (10) between said engaged and disengaged
condition, said means for converting (45,46) being con-
nected to said support tube (37,50).
4,391,352
BRAKE SYSTEM AND APPARATUS AND METHOD
THEREFOR
Lawrence G. Brown, 1629 Kuhilani St., Honolulu, Hi. 96816
Filed Feb. 2, 1977, Ser. No. 765,062
Int. a.3 B62L 1/14
U.S. a. 188—24.12 23 Qaims
150 165 '62
1. A brake system for a bicycle or the like, having frame
means for supporting a bicycle rider and rotatable wheel means
for enabling movement of frame means and bicycle rider, and
comprising:
brake pad means made from a substantially incompressible
non-ferrous material having an effective coefficient of
friction in both dry and wet operating conditions and
having a friction surface engageable with the wheel means
for generating a frictional braking force against the wheel
means effective in both dry and wet operating conditions;
a pair of brake pad support arm means of equal effective
length and being pivotally movably mounted relative to
the frame means and the wheel means in juxtaposition to
the wheel means for uniform equal length movement
relative thereto and for supporting said brake pad means
for uniform equal length movement between a non-brak-
ing position in maximum equally outwardly spaced rela-
tionship to the wheel means with each friction surface
spaced equally outwardly of the wheel means and an
inwardly displaced braking pxjsition with each friction
surface in frictional engagement with the wheel means to
apply braking force thereto;
hand operated braking force generating means mounted on
the frame means and operably connected to said brake pad
support arm means for operation of said brake pad support
arm means and for generation of braking force by the
bicycle rider;
force increasing means operatively associated with said
brake pad support arm means and said brake pad means
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
135
■L
for ihiformly equally increasing the brake force generated
by the bicycle rider and for providing a relatively high
uniform equal applied braking force on said brake pad
means to generate sufficiently high effective braking force
between said brake pad means and the rotatable wheel
means in both dry and wet operating conditions;
said force increasing means comprising: linkage means and
connecting means and operating means arranged and
connected to said support arm means for causing relative
rapid initial movement of said support arm means and said
brake pad means a relatively large distance from said
non-braking position toward said braking position at rela-
tively low mechanical advantage, and for causing rela-
tively slow final movement of said support arm means and
said brake pad means a relatively short distance toward
the braking position at relatively high mechanical advan-
tage and to generate relatively high uniform equal applied
braking force in the braking position; and
said force increasing means comprising formed spring wire
means being operably connected to said hand operated
force generating means and being operatively associated
with said brake pad support arm means for movement
between a non-braking position by application of braking
force generated by the bicycle rider and for causing move-
ment of said brake pad support arm means between the
non-braking position and the braking position.
4,391,353
HAND OPERATED HYDRAULIC BICYCLE BRAKE
William R. Mathauser, 3000 "B ' Ave., Anacortes, Wash. 98221
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,925
Int. a.3 B62L 1/10, 3/02
U.S. a. 188—24.12 17 Qaims
1. A hand actuated hydraulic brake for a bicycle comprising:
a hand actuated master cylinder mounted on the handlebars
of a bicycle;
a flexible fluid line connected to said master cylinder; and
a brake pad holder unit mounted on the bicycle, said brake
pad holder unit including a mounting fastener connected
to such bicycle, a mounting clamp pivotably mounted on
said mounting fastener, a bracket arm on said mounting
clamp, first and second bicycle brake housings mounted
on said bracket arm to be on opposite sides of a bicycle
front wheel, said housings each being of a size commonly
found on a bicycle, a lug mounted on said first housing, a
fluid actuated brake arm moving means mounted on said
first housing and a first brake pad mounted on said second
housing, said brake arm moving means including a rolling
diaphragm fluidly connected to said master cylinder by
said flexible fluid line via said lug to exchange hydraulic
fluid therewith, a movable brake pad holder having a
projecting arm thereon, said arm being slidably mounted
on said first housing and engaged against said rolling
diaphragm for movement therewith, said rolling dia-
phragm including a closed bottom portion contacting said
brake pad holder arm, a side portion adjacent to said first
housing and a connecting portion connecting said dia-
phragm bottom and side portions so that said rolling dia-
phragm can fold upon itself within said bicycle brake
housing and a lip on an end of said side portion remote
from said bottom, said lip being captured between said
first housing and said lug, said sufficient flexibility to
operate efficiently in a bicycle hydraulic brake unit, an
arm return means engaged against said rolling diaphragm
to bias said diaphragm against action of hydraulic fluid
forced thereinto by said master cylinder, and a second
brake pad mounted on said movable brake pad holder.
I 4,391,354
PISTON-AND-CYLINDER ASSEMBLY FOR HYDRAULIC
DISK CLLTCH OR BRAKE
Manfred Bucksch, Friedrichsbafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichsbafen AG, Friedrich-
sbafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,025
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2,
1980, 3012791
Int. Q.^ F16D 55/40; POIB 7/20; F16D 79/00
U.S. Q. 188—71.5 4 Qaims
1. In a fluidically operated speed-changing assembly com-
prising a cylinder with an annular working space, an annular
piston axially slidable in said working space under pressure of
an operating fluid, a stack of interleaved first and second annu-
lar friction plates confronting said piston, said first friction
plates being positively linked with said cylinder, said second
friction plates being positively linked with a relatively rotat-
able member to be coupled with said cylinder by fluid pressure
forcing said piston against said stack, and spring means in said
cylinder resisting a displacement of said piston toward said
stack,
the improvement wherein said piston occupies only part of
said working space, leaving an annular clearance radially
offset from said stack, and an ancillary ring is slidable
independently of said piston in said clearance under pres-
sure of said operating fluid while bearing only upon said
spring means without coming into contact with said stack.
4,391,355
SLIDING CALIPER DISC BRAKE
Anthony C. Evans, Norihville, Mich., assignor to Kelsey-Hayes
Company, Romulus, Mich.
FUed Dec. 3, 1979, Ser. No. 99,392
Int. a.3 F16D 65/00
U.S. Q. 188—73.44 6 Qaims
1. An improved disc brake for engaging a rotatable disc
having an axis of rotation and inboard and outboard frictional
surfaces, said disc brake comprising two pins, means for affix-
ing said pins to a stationary structure member inboard of said
disc to extended parallel to and radially spaced from said axis
with said pins spaced apart, a caliper extending over the pe-
riphery of said disc and having inboard and outboard legs,
means mounting said inboard caliper leg to slide axially on one
136
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
of said pins, an outboard brake pad, means mounting said
outboard brake pad on said outboard caliper leg, said outboard
brake pad moving into and out of frictional engagement with
said outboard frictional surface as said caliper moves axially on
said one pin, an inboard brake pad, means mounting said in-
board brake pad to slide axially on the other of said pins into
and out of frictional engagement with said inboard frictional
surface, said inboard calijier leg deflning a cylinder opening
towards said inboard pad, and piston means located in said
cylinder for moving said inboard pad against said inboard
frictional surface when a fluid is introduced into a chamber
defmed between said cylinder and said piston.
I 4,391,356
CLUTCH ENGAGEABLE/DISENGAGEABLE BY
MOMENTARY ENERGIZATION OF SOLENOID MEANS
Toji Takemura, and Kenzo Hirashima, both of Yokosuka, Japan,
assignors to Nissan Motor Co. Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 361,809
Claims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1981, 56-76860
Int a.3 F16D 27/10
U.S. O. 192—84 C 4 Claims
1. A clutch comprising:
an input element operatively connected to a prime mover for
being driven thereby;
a first rotatable clutch element;
a second rotatable clutch element movable with respect to
the first clutch element and engageable therewith, said
second clutch element being connected to said input ele-
ment for synchronous rotation therewith;
first biasing means for biasing said second clutch element
away from said first clutch element when in a first state
thereof, and for biasing said first and second clutch ele-
ments together when in a second state thereof;
an electromagnet associated with said first clutch element
for attracting said second clutch element to said first
clutch element and inducing said first biasing means to
assume said first state when energized with a first prede-
termined current; and
means responsive to the energization of said electromagnet
with a second predetermined current which is higher than
said first predetermined current for reversing the state of
said first biasing means from said second state to said first
state and for causing said first and second clutch elements
to separate.
4,391,357
COUPLINGS
Ali Bindemagel, Wermelskirchen; Helmut Holthoff, Diisseldorf,
and Hartmut Diel, Monchen-Gladbach, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Friedrich Kocks GmbH & Company,
Hilden, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 114,114
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 14,
1979, 2905560
Int. Q\? F16D 79/00
U.S. a. 192—94 22 Qaims
1i : .15
\
^^ 18 12 ^ ■ <JtS 1 <-*— ' '="
19
1. An engageable and releasable rotary coupling for the
non-relatively rotatable interconnection of two rotary machine
parts the coupling comprising two coupling halves, one said
coupling half including a screw-threaded member having an
external taper thread, the other of said coupling half including
a sleeve having a complementary internal taper thread screwa-
bly receiving the external tap>er thread of said one half to act as
a coupling means for transmitting torque from one machine
part to the other, the screw-threaded member and the screw-
threaded sleeve being axially movable towards and away from
one another, means associated with one of said machine parts
axially moving one of said coupling halves generally axially
relatively to the other thereby enabling a drive for one of the
two machine parts and a brake device for the other machine
part to be used in conjunction for engaging and releasing and
coupling, said coupling having means by which the screw-
threaded member and the screw-threaded sleeve can be pushed
axially one into the other before the commencement of the
rotary movement for the purpose of the coupling operation,
one of said member and sleeve being connected to its rotary
machine part so as to be non-rotatable relative thereto and
being displaceable to a limited extent in an axial direction
relative to its rotary machine part against the force of a spring,
and the other abutting against an alignment stop on its con-
nected rotary machine part, whereupon the displaceable
screw-threaded member or the screw-threaded sleeve is screw-
ably engaged with the respective counten..ember upon com-
mencement of the rotary movement.
4,391,358
HARDWARE PRESS AND PUNCH APPARATUS
VirgU J. Haeger, 1144 Post Rd., Oakdale, Calif. 95361
FUed Not. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,200
Int. Q\? B23Q 77/00
U.S. a. 192—130 7 Qaims
1. A hardware press for assembling fastenening devices or
punching holes in sheetmetal hardware devices and incorpo-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
137
rating safety provisions to prevent injury to the operator,
comprising:
(a) a base structure;
(b) a pedestal assembly on the base structure and including a
cantilever arm portion projecting laterally therefrom;
(c) a pressure-exerting ram assembly mounted on said canti-
lever arm adjacent the free end thereof and including a
hydraulic cylinder and a double-acting ram operatively
associated therewith and selectively movable through a
predetermined excursion along its longitudinal axis, said
ram assembly being electrically insulated from said canti-
lever arm on which it is mounted;
(d) an anvil mounted on said pedestal and underlying said
ram assembly;
(e) an upper tool holder slidably mounted on said ram in
electrically conductive interrelation therewith and
adapted to removably support a selected upper tool
thereon;
side walls being slopped upwardly in a manner such that the
material forming said sample moves with a rolling or sliding
action in a zig zag path on said chute and without significant
bouncing of the material down said chute as said chute is
4,391,359
SAMPLE SPLITTER
Joseph A. Lapointe, 223 Sprindale Ave., Pointe Qaire, Quebec,
Canada
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,268
Int. C\} B65G 7i/00
U.S. a. »3— 23 7 Qaims
1. A sample splitter for particulates or small elements com-
prising at least one chute slopped downwardly from a rear end
towards a discharge end, means for oscillating said chute on a
substantially horizontal path substantially perpendicular to the
axial center line of said chute, said chute being substantially
symmetrical on opposite sides of said axial centre line, side
walls on said chute on opposite sides of said centre line, said
t^'/
oscillated, an elongated V-shaped plow at the discharge end of
said chute to intercept material issuing from said chute, the line
forming the apex of said V-shaped plow being substantially in
alignment with axial centre line of said chute when said chute
is at the mid-point of its oscillation.
4,391,360
MACHINE FOR HANK DRAWING AND DOITING
Federico Minnetti, Pieve A Nievole, Italy, assignor to Officine
Minnetti Di Ornella Raveggi & C.S.a.s., Pieve A Nievole,
Italy
Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,638
Qaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 14, 1980, 20669 A/80
Int. Q.' B65G 47/24
U.S. Q. 198—412 31 Qaims
(0 a lower tool holder mounted on said anvil in electrically
conductive interrelation therewith and adapted to remov-
ably support a selected lower tool thereon in cooperative
relation to said upper tool; and
(g) control means for normally selectively advancing said
ram under a predetermined high hydraulic pressure to
bring said upper and lower tools together into a predeter-
mined pressure exerting relationship upon a workpiece
interposed therebetween with a pressure injurious to the
operator if imposed on the operator's hand while automat-
ically stopping advance of the ram if the operator's hand
is encountered between the upper and lower tool holders;
(h) said control means including a normally-open safety
switch operatively interposed between said ram and said
upper tool holder and operable to close a circuit to stop
the advance of the ram when a non-conductive element,
such as the operator's hand, is encountered with sufficient
force to slidably displace said upper tool holder to close
said normally-open switch.
1. A machine for removing yam hanks from hank carriers
and for unloading the removed hanks onto container means,
said machine comprising:
plier means for removing yam hanks from hank carriers, said
plier means including a fixed center rod and two side rods,
the side rods being movable towards the center rod at the
two opposite sides thereof for simultaneous gripping of
two hanks and being movable away from said center rod
for releasing gripped hanks; and
pliers operating means for controlling said gripping and said
releasing movements.
4,391,361
HOLD-DOWN APPARATUS FOR CABLE CONVEYORS
Beigamin O. Hall, and Thomas W. Amdt, both of Oskaloosa,
Iowa, assignors to Intraco, Inc., Oskaloosa, Iowa
FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No, 270,629
Int. Q.3 B65G 19/28
U.S. Q. 198—735 6 Claims
1. In a conveying apparatus of a type including a flexible
endless member, material engaging means disposed on said
flexible endless member for catching material and moving the
138
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
material in response to movement of the flexible endless mem-
ber and said material engaging means, channel means disposed
at least partially around said flexible endless member and said
material engaging means for conflning material for transporta-
tion from place to place, said channel means having a pair of
opposed sidewalls, and means for selectively causing said
flexible endless member to be pulled through said channel
meaiK, an improvement comprising:
.3. 'i
means for resiliently engaging said material engaging means
to bias said material means into said channel means, said
resilient engaging means being secured to an upper por-
tion of said pair of opposed sidewalls and comprising a
mounting bracket attached to said opposed sidewalls and
a loop shaped spring member secured to said mounting
bracket; said spring member extending into said channel
means for resiliently pushing against said material engag-
ing means.
-4,391,362
SPEED CONTROLLED INFEED CONVEYOR SYSTEM
Louis A. Spinelli, West Milford, N.J., assignor to Nabisco
Brands, Inc., Parsippany, N.J.
1 Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,680
I Int. Q\} B65G 43/08
U.S. a. 198—855 3 Qaims
mm ait
iitm sotmi ,* p
^
\i^^
mffie
"\.
men p«[ssmt
electrical signal proportional to the speed of the input con-
veyor, and means for summing said first and second signals and
producing a third signal proportional to the difference between
a reference voltage and the sum of said first and second signals.
4,391,363
AUTOMATIC LATCH FOR UNLOADING AUGER
T. William Waldrop, New Holland, Pa., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New Holland, Pa.
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,395
Int. a.3 B65G 21/10
U.S. a. 198—865 7 Qaims
1. In combination with a container having a movable unload-
ing auger, the improvement comprising:
means for supporting said auger, said means being a support
member connected to said container and extending there-
from;
a latch arm pivotally mounted on said auger;
a latch pin connected to said latch arm;
means for guiding said latch pin to a first obstruction posi-
tion relative to said support member;
means connected for raising and lowering said auger, said
means including a cable operably connected to pivot said
latch arm to move said latch pin between said first posi-
tion, and a second obstruction free position relative to said
support member;
resilient means for urging said latch pin from said second to
said first position;
means for limiting movement of said latch pin to said second
position;
said latch pin being moved from said first position to said
second position when the tension in said cable overcomes
the force of said resilient means; and
said latch pin being moved from said second position to said
first position when the force of said resilient means over-
comes the tension in said cable.
1. A speed controlled conveyor system for transporting a
continuous column of abutting articles, said system comprising
a generally horizontal infeed conveyor having an output end, a
curved chute aligned with said output end and extending in a
downward arc, a product handling device removing articles
from the lower end of the chute, said chute being open on the
side thereof facing upward and forward to permit the curved
column of articles on the chute to bow outwardly when axial
pressure within the column builds due to the infeed rate ex-
ceeding the removal rate, means for measuring the outward
displacement of the curved column on the chute and produc-
ing a first electrical signal proportional to that displacement, a
motor driving said infeed conveyor and speed control means
responsive to the first signal for adjusting the speed of said
motor, said means for measuring the displacement of said
curved column including a light source directing a light beam
so as to be progressively intercepted by the column as it bows
outwardly, and a photocell for detecting the degree to which
said light beam is intercepted by said column, said speed con-
trol means including a variable output magnetic clutch having
an electromagnetic control coil, means producing a second
4,391,364
AUTOMATIC LATCH FOR UNLOADING AUGER
Terry A. Young, Lititz, and Aquila D. Mast, Lancaster, both of
Pa., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New Holland, Pa.
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,396
Int. a.3 B65G 21/10
U.S. a. 198—865 11 Qaims
1. In combination with a container having a movable unload-
ing auger, the improvement comprising:
means for supporting said auger, said means being a support
member connected to said container and extending there-
from;
a latch arm movably mounted on said auger;
a latch arm receiver connected to said container;
means connected for raising and lowering said auger relative
to said support, said means including a cable operably
connected to move said latch arm between a first position,
in engagement with said receiver, and a second position,
out of engagement with said receiver;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
139
J
resilieit means for urging said latch arm from said second
position to said first position;
means for guiding said latch arm and for limiting movement
of said latch arm in said second position, said means being
a guide plate having a latch arm receiving slot formed
therein, said latch arm extending through said slot and
terminating adjacent said receiver;
said latch arm being moved from said first position to said
second position when the tension in said cable overcomes
the force of said resilient means; and
said latch arm being moved from said second position to said
first position when the force of said resilient means over-
comes the tension in said cable.
4,391,365
SINGLE DISPENSING MULTIPLE SUTURE PACKAGE
Jay A. Batchelor, Bethel, Conn., assignor to American Cyana-
mid Company, Stamford, Conn.
^ I i Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,159
" Int. Q.5 A61L 77/02
U.S. Q. 206—63.3 9 Qaims
4,391,366.
FOLDABLE CUP
Isao Hirata, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Tokai Metals Com-
pany Limited, Yokohama, Japan
Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,843
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 9, 1981, 56-16847
Int. Q.' B65D 5/46. 5/54. 5/56. 85/72
U.S. Q. 206—218 7 Qaims
1. A surgical suture package comprising a center panel; at
least one foam receptacle affixed to said panel; a plurality of
cards placed onto said panel adjacent to said receptacle; a
plurality of sutures each singly contained in a non-tangling
configuration over a major portion of each card wherein the
area surrounded by said configuration comprises an area larger
than the remaining portion of the card; a first flap placed onto
said cards; means for attaching said first flap to said cards and
to said panel; and a second flap foldably attached to said panel
and placed onto said receptacle and said first flap, whereby
said sutures can be contained with at least one end of each
suture contained by said receptacle.
^—1
'"
... - -
*-
! "
«
w
IC
<5
,5 «
i
<5 45
46
44
^e
1 "
5T
w •
1 1^—
- «
^^'»
'i
'5
P7„ jH^' ' -1 *?
L±
1-4—'^
1. A foldable cup comprising:
a substantially tubular outer shell made of a stiff material and
having longitudinally spaced opposite ends and two over-
lapping lateral edges extending between said ends, said
shell being foldable along longitudinal fold lines parallel to
said lateral edges to collapse said shell to a substantially
flat condition, said cup including a pouch made of a flexi-
ble material disposed within said outer shell for accommo-
dating contents, said pouch comprising a pair of opp)osing
body walls bonded to the inside of said outer shell and
having bottom wall portions foldable to lie between said
body walls when said pouch is collapsed to a flat condi-
tion, said bottom wall portions having bottom edges flexi-
bly connected to bottom edges of said body walls, respec-
tively, and each bottom wall portion having a common
edge flexibly joining said bottom wall portions together,
said body walls and said bottom wall portions each being
connected along lines extending obliquely from upper
portion thereof with respect to said longitudinal fold lines
toward the bottom edges of said respective body walls,
said pouch including longitudinal lateral edges along
which said body walls are flexibly connected, said lateral
edges of said pouch extending from the upper edges of
said body walls to a point intersecting the obliquely ex-
tending lines, the distance between said lateral edges of
said pouch being substantially equal to the distance be-
tween said lateral edges of said outer shell, the distance
between the upper and bottom edges of said pouch when
folded being substantially equal to the distance between
the upper and bottom edges of said outer shell, the dis-
tance between said common and bottom edges of said
bottom wall portions of said pouch and the length of said
obliquely extending lines being such that when said outer
shell and pouch are unfolded, said bottom wall portions lie
within the bottom edge of said outer shell, said lateral
edges of said body walls of said pouch having opposing
inner surfaces which are bonded together and folded
exteriorly over onto one of said body walls of said pouch,
the resulting folded portion of said lateral edges of said
pouch being bonded to the adjacent body wall in the
vicinity of said upper edge of said body wall of said pouch
4,391,367
PACKING CONTAINER
Lucio C. Perego, 4835 Campbell Q., Fort Wayne, Ind. 46804
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,876
Int. C\? B65D 5/50. 85/00
U.S. Q. 206—315 R 23 Qaims
1. A packing device comprising a packing container having
one or more wall portions, an auxiliary packing receptacle
within the volume of said packing container mounted adjacent
to one of said wall portions and having a first access opening
140
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
registrable with a second access ojjening in said one wall por-
tion, said receptacle includes means for retaining one or more
articles therein, said one wall portion having a manipulable
closure for the second opening therein, said one wall portion
^a
3~u
'32
including a first sheet-like element, a second sheet-like element
overlying said first element and having a third opening therein,
said receptacle being received by and carried within said third
opening and having a laterally extending flange-like portion
interposed between said elements.
accommodating the vertical nesting of one of said containers
within another like container in a fully nested storage relation-
ship, and bale means on said end walls selectively locatable in
any of a plurality of positions relative to said end walls to
selectively establish different depths to which said another like
container may be nested within said one container;
the improvement wherein said bale member comprises an
elongate rod-like bale member extending parallel to each
end wall, crank means fixed at one end to each end of said
bale member, aligned pivot means for establishing a piv-
otal axis parallel to and offset from said bale member at the
opposite end of said crank means from said bale member,
coupling means on said end walls receiving said pivot
means for pivotal movement of said bale member about
said axis relative to the associated end wall and for sliding
movement wherein said bale member is movable relative
to said end walls in directions normal to said axis, said
coupling means including means defining at least two
spaced stable rest positions of said pivot means relative to
4,391,368
PACKAGING AND DISPENSING SYSTEM
Leroy Washington, Jr., 143 Ironwood Cir., Sierra Vista, Ariz.
85635
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,301
I Int. a? B65D 8i/00, 33/00
U.S. a. 206—484 1 Qaim
1. A system for packaging and distributing predetermined
increments of flowable material, comprising: a web, a plurality
of discrete containers on said web in a predetermined pattern,
means for opening each container individually, means provid-
ing for separation of one or more containers with a part of said
web from the remainder of said containers and web, said means
for opening providing for opening to either one of two prede-
termined sizes of opening depending on direction of opening
by said means for opening, said means for opening including a
tapered side with widening and narrowing portions on said
container, and a pull-tab affixed across said tapered side at a
location intermediate the length of said tapered side in position
for being pulled in a direction producing a widening opening
by breaking free said widening portion of said tapered side
when pulled toward said widening portion of said tapered side,
and alternatively for being pulled in a direction producing a
narrowing opening by breaking free said narrowing portion of
said tapered side when pulled toward said narrowing portion
of said tapered side.
431^9
FOUR-LEVEL STACKING CONTAINER
Edward L. Stahl, Brighton, and Elsmer W. Kreeger, Allegan,
both of Mich., assignors to Pinckney Molded Plastics, Inc.,
Pinckney, Mich.
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,063
Int. a.^B6SD 21/06
VJS. a. 206—506 3 Claims
1. In an open topped, stackable container including a bot-
tom, a pair of end walls projecting upwardly from said bottom
at oj^xKite ends thereof, said end walls having means thereon
said end wall, means on said end wall selectively engage-
able with said bale member when said pivot means is in
any one of said stable rest positions to establish two alter-
native rest positions of said bale member at different levels
relative to said end wall for each of the two stable rest
positions of said pivot means and
wherein one of said rest positions of said bale member lo-
cates said bale member outwardly of vertical alignment
with the bottom of said container whereby a like container
may be lowered downwardly past said bale member into
said fully nested storage relationship, said bale member
when located in any of its three other rest positions being
located in overlying relationship with said bottom of said
container, and means defining a series of three spaced bale
member receiving notches in the bottom of said container
respectively located in vertical alignment with said three
other bale member rest positions, whereby a like container
may be stacked upon said container at any of four different
levels as determined by the rest position occupied by said
bale member.
4,391,370
EMBROIDERY PROJECT ACCESSORY CARRYING
CASE
Lorraine E. Dalbo, Atlanta, Ga., assignor to Dal-Craft, Inc.,
Tucker, Ga.
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,895
Int. aJ A45C 15/00. 7/00
U.S. a. 206—574 7 Claims
1. A carrying case for needlework materials including a
backing sheet having an inside surface and an outside surface,
said backing sheet comprising a flexible center section, a first
end section at one side of said flexible center section and con-
tiguous with said flexible center section, a second end section
at the opposite side of said flexible center section and contigu-
ous with said flexible center section, a first storage pocket
carried by said inside surface of said first end section, and a
second storage pocket carried by said inside surface of said
second end section, said flexible center section being foldjd)le
adjacent to said storage pockets, said second end section being
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
141
foldable towards said inside surface along a line adjacent to
said second storage pocket after said first end section is folded
towards said inside surface along a line adjacent to said first
storage pocket so that said second end section is disposed with
said inside surface of said second end section overlying said
outside surface of said first end section, and fastening means to
panels maintain a fixed spacing between said top and
bottom trays, thereby enclosing and protecting the article.
4,391,371
HBERBOARD SHIPPING CONTAINER HAVING
LAMINATED SPAONG MEMBERS
William G. Sieffert, Joliet, III., assignor to Champion Interna-
tional Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
I Filed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,695
Int. a.3 B65D 85/42
U.S. a. ,206—597 6 Qaims
5/
ss
^^-^
1. A fiberboard container for enclosing and protecting at
least one ariicle, said container comprising:
opposed top and bottom trays disposed in spaced parallel
relationship, each said tray comprising rectangular base
and article receiving pads defined by front, rear and op-
posed side edges, said pads being of substantially identical
dimensions and being disposed in spaced parallel relation-
ship such that the respective front, rear and side edges
thereof are in register, said article receiving pads being
further defined by at least one opening corresponding to
the shape of the article, said trays being disposed such that
the article receiving pads thereof face each other, and
spacers extending between and connected to said pads in
each said tray; and
an octagonal sleeve extending between and separating said
top and bottom trays, said sleeve including substantially
rectangular front, rear and opposed side panels extending
between the front, rear and opposed side edges respec-
tively of the base pads, four substantially rectangular
connecting panels extending between said article receiv-
ing pads and angularly aligned with respect to the front,
rear and opposed side edges thereof, two said connecting
panels foldably connecting said front panel to said side
panels, and the remaining two connecting panels foldably
connecting said rear panel to said side panels, whereby the
front, rear and opposed side panels of said sleeve maintain
said top and bottom trays in register while said connecting
4,391,372.
VACUUM STARWHEEL
Fredrick L. Calhoun, Rolling Hills, Calif., assignor to Industrial
Dynamics Company, Ltd., Torrance, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 738,824, Nov. 4, 1976, abandoned. This
application Apr. 3, 1978, Ser. No. 893,243
Int. CI.3 B07C 5/00
U.S. a. 209—523 23 Qaims
selectively retain said second end section in position over said
first end section, said flexible center section having suflicient
length to provide storage space between said inside surface of
saidjiexible center section and said first storage pocket, said
storage space being continuous with the inside of said second
storage pocket.
1. A mechanism for transferring individual containers from
one input position to one of at least two output positions,
including:
a first member continuously movable in a particular path
including at least one port and including means extending
from the member and communicating with the port and
constructed to retain one of the individual containers for
movement with the first member when a vacuum is ap-
plied to the part,
a second stationary member including at least first and sec-
ond parts disposed in the path of movement of the first
member for movement of the first port in the first member
into sequential communication with the first and second
ports in the second member,
means defining a source of vacuum,
means operatively coupled to the vacuum source and to the
first and second ports in the second stationary member for
producing vacuum in the first and second ports,
the first and second ports in the second member being elon-
gated in the path of movement of the first member and the
length of the port in the first member being less than the
length of the first and second ports in the second member
to provide a vacuum with the retaining means in the first
member for holding the container during the communica-
tion of the port in the first member with the ports in the
first and second members,
means for providing a source of at least atmospheric fluid
pressure,
the second stationary member including at least third and
fourth ports dis|K>sed in the path of movement of the port
in the first member for communication with the port in the
first member at least a portion of the time during the
movement of the first member, the third port being inter-
mediate the first and second ports and the fourth port
being positioned after the second port in the direction of
movement of the port in the first member, the third port
communicating with either the vacuum means or the
pressure means, the fourth port communicating with the
pressure means, the movable member providing a transfer
of the individual container for release at the position of the
142
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
third port when the third port communicates with the
pressure means or for release at the position of the fourth
port when the third port communicates with the vacuum
means,
the size of the first port in the first member in the path of
movement of the first member being greater than the
shortest distance between the second and third ports but
less than the respective distance between the first or sec-
ond ports and the side of the third port on the far side of
the first and second ports in the path of movement of the
first member,
means for providing a continuous movement of the first
member in the particular path,
means for testing particular parameters on the container for
particular characteristics during movement of the first
member with the first port on the first member in commu-
nication with the first port on the second member at an
intermediate position along the length of the first part, and
means for providing a communication of the third port on
the second member with a particular one of the vacuum
means and the pressure means, in accordance with the
characteristics of the particular parameters tested on the
container by the testing means, during the communication
of the first port on the first member only with the third
port on the second member.
update the stored signal values for signal drift compensa-
tion.
4,39U73
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR COMPENSATING
SIGNAL DRIFT DURING CONTAINER INSPECTION
Edmund C. Wiggins, Pinellas County, Fla., assignor to Barry-
Wehmiller Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,600
Int. a.^ GOIN 21/i2; G06M 7/00: HOIJ 39/12
U.S. a. 209—526 .-. 4 Qaims
431,374
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING
ELONGATED ARTICLES BY LENGTH
Robert A. Krynock, Indiana, Pa., assignor to FMC Corporation,
Chicago, 111.
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,297
Int. C\? B07C 5/02
U.S. a. 209—540 10 Qaims
1. A separator comprising a vibratory surface for conveying
elongated articles longitudinally thereon, said surface having a
slot with upstream and downstream edges extending trans-
versely of the direction of articles travel, a plate projecting
within the slot near the upstream edge to form a surface over
which articles slide, said plate having a downstream edge that
together with the downstream edge of the slot defines a grad-
ing gap through which articles of short length drop, and means
mounting the plate independently of the vibratory surface
whereby articles conveyed by the surface decelerate when
sliding across the plate before reaching the grading gap.
4,391,375
DISPLAY CARD AND ASSEMBLY HANGER
Robert D. Joyce, Greenville, R.I., assignor to Joyce Card &
Display Co., Providence, R.I.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,908
Int. a.3 A47F 7/00
UA a. 211—13 9 aaims
1. In apparatus for the inspection of containers movable
through an inspection zone, said apparatus having a plurality
of radiant energy beam emitters and detectors oriented on the
container passage in the inspection zone, such that said emitters
and detectors are aligned in cooperating pairs to produce
output signals from said detectors corresponding to container
insp>ection values and to values during intervals between con-
tainer movement through the inspection zone, the improve-
ment of processing circuit means connected to said emitters
and detectors including:
(1) subcircuit means for storing the signal values generted
each time during intervals between container movement
in the inspection zone and means for adjusting the stored
signal values to generate threshold signal values, said
subcircuit means comprising an analog to digital signal
converter, a memory circuit means connected to said
analog to digital output, and a digital to analog signal
converter, and
(2) subcircuit means for comparing the output signal values
from said detectors during each container inspection di-
rectly with said adjusted threshold signal values, whereby
each output of the analog to digital signal converter is
compared with the value of the signal previously stored in
said memory circuit means for determining the need to
1. A display assembly for jewelry and the like comprising:
a. a substantially vertically disposed card having a main
portion and an outwardly biased flap hingedly attached to
the top edge thereof extending downwardly and out-
wardly therefrom; and
b. a hanger for suspending said card comprising;
i. support means engageable with the bottom edge of said
flap to support said card;
ii retaining means engageable with the side of said card
opposite from said flap to retain the bottom edge of said
flap in engagement with said support means; and
iii fulcrum means engageable with said flap at an interme-
diate point in its extension causing said flap to be hinged
inwardly toward said card when said flap is pressed
against said fulcrum means.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
143
4,391,376
RESILIENT CLAMP FOR SUPPORTING ARTICLES
Charles C. Finnegan, Ei^ondido, Calif., assignor to LeLasso
Corporation, San Diego, Calif.
1 1 FUed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,620
1 1 Int. a.3 A47F 7/00: E21B 19/14
U.S. a. 211—60 SK
8 Claims
1. Apparatus for clampably supporting ariicles, comprising:
a mounting base for being secured to a supporting structure
incorporating a pair spaced inwardly directed opposed
projections,
said mounting base comprising a strap member, having a flat
central mounting section and end sections that are spaced
from said central mounting section and comprising in their
terminal portions said opposed projections;
a clamping member for removable mounting on said mount-
ing base,
said clamping member comprising a resilient mounting sec-
tion incorporating opposed outwardly directed openings
sized to receive said projections,
said outwardly opposed openings comprising a channel
through said mounting section,
said channel being elongated in a plane that is parallel, in the
mounted position, to the plane of said central mounting
section;
said resilient mounting section being compressible to a
length permitting said section to pass between said op-
posed projections and expandable to engage said opposed
projections,
a pair of opposed clamping elements extending from said
mounting section for receiving an article therebetween,
an elastic cord having end connectors for encircling said
clamping elements and an article received between said
clamping elements to resiliently urge said clamping mem-
bers toward one another,
said elastic cord being received through the channel in said
mounting section,
said end connectors comprising a hook member,
said hook member comprising at least one deformable
clamping strap means for being compressed onto an end of
said cord, and having a hook section extending from said
strap clamping means;
said cord and strap clamping means being receivable in said
channel in said mounting section,
said hook section having a cross section larger than said
channel and protruding therefrom when said cord and
strap are received in said channel.
4,391,377
KNOCK-DOWN ASSEMBLY FOR SUPPORTING
1 1 OXYGEN TANKS
Theodore Ziaylek, Jr., P.O. Box 292, Yardley, Pa. 19067
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,408
Int. a.3 A47F 7/28
U.S. a. 211—71 8 Qaims
1. A rack assembly for supporting oxygen tanks and like
cylindrical objects, comprising:
(a) a plurality of box sections each of which is of rectangular,
three-sided form with one open side and includes a web
portion and a pair of sidewall portions extending there-
from, said sections being adapted to be disposed in longi-
tudinally contacting relation;
(b) at least one cradle mounted in each section and adapted
to supportably engage an oxygen tank, the web portions of
some of the sections closing the open side of adjacent
sections;
M f
Wr-
it 30
3! »~J~« 3?
h- rJ^
32
J,
(c) a cover plate closing the open side of the remaining
sections; and
(d) connecting means extendingbetween and fixedly secured
together those sections disposed in longitudinally contact-
ing relation.
4,391,378
SHELVING CONSOLE FURNITURE
Edward Secon, Trumbull, Conn., assignor to The Sherwood
Corporation, Spring City, Tenn.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,218
Int. Q\? A47F 5/01
U.S. a. 211—187 8 Qaims
1. A shelving console furniture unit comprising a pair of
laterally spaced side frame support standards for supporting
the ends of at least one shelf member therebetween, each stan-
dard comprising a pair of wire frame members each frame
member being identical and having spaced vertical and spaced
horizontal portions interconnected to define a border about an
opening, a multiplicity of rungs of finite thickness secured to
and between each pair of frame members at substantially
equally spaced similarly disposed locations about the border
and extending into said opening, said shelf member comprising
a substantially rectangular frame, a hook outstanding at each
comer of said shelf frame having a downwardly disposed
portion, each said hook being positionable upon a rung with
the downwardly disposed portion projecting between the rung
and the adjacent frame members.
144
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91^79
LIFTING APPARATUS ADAPTED FOR MOUNTING IN A
VEHICLE TRUNK
Edgar C. Paffrath, Birch Run, Mich., assignor to Amigo Sales,
Inc., Bridgeport, Mich.
FUed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,411
I Int. a.3 B66C 23/44
U.S. a. 212—187 3 Qaims
cooperating with said knuckle movable between knuckle lock-
ing and knuckle unlocking positions, manual means selectively
translating said locking member between knuckle locking and
knuckle unlocking positions, the improvement comprising,
safety means mounted upon the body selectively engaging the
locking member to control movement of the locking member
from the locking position to the unlocking position, said safety
means comprising an expansible chamber motor mounted upon
the coupler body, a piston within said motor having a pressure
face and a rod face, a rod affixed to said piston extending from
said rod face and having an outer end projecting from said
1. Lifting apparatus adapted to be mounted in an automobile
trunk or the like comprising a base plate, adapted to be
mounted on a fixed frame, a vertical post fixedly mounted at its
lower end on said base plate, a sleeve rotatably supported on
said post for free rotation about a vertical axis, an elongate
boom, pivot means mounting said boom upon said sleeve for
pivotal movement about a horizontal axis located adjacent one
end of said boom, power driven lift means mounted on the
opposite end of said boom, extensible gas spring means
mounted between said sleeve and an intermediate location on
said boom gravitationally counterbalancing said boom about
said horizontal axis, and releasable lock means mounted on said
sleeve and engageable with said gas spring means to positively
maintain said gas spring means at a predetermined extended
position constituting an elevated lifting position of said boom;
said post projecting upwardly beyond the upper end of said
sleeve, and brace means for fixedly securing the upper end of
said post to said fixed frame; said boom comprising an elongate
boom member, a mounting bracket including a pair of spaced
plates fixedly mounted on and projecting from said boom
member at said one end thereof to receive said sleeve therebe-
tween, said pivot means being coupled to said sleeve and said
bracket at the side of said sleeve remote from said boom mem-
ber, said gas spring comprising a cylinder pivotally mounted at
its upper end between said bracket plates at the side of said
sleeve opposite said pivot means and a rod projecting from the
lower end of said cylinder, said lock means comprising a rigid
prop member, second pivot means commonly mounting the
lower ends of said rod and said prop member on said sleeve,
and a cylinder seat on the upper end of said prop member
supportingly engageable with the lower end of said cylinder to
maintain a predetermined extension of said rod from said cylin-
der.
motor toward the locking member, an air supply conduit com-
municating with said motor and piston pressure face, a com-
pression spring within said motor engaging said piston rod
face, valve means within the compressed air brake system
controlling air flow therethrough positionable between open
and closed positions and in communication with said air supply
conduit whereby closing of said valve means depressurizes said
motor permitting said spring to retract said rod and opening of
said valve means pressurizes said motor to extend said rod, and
a rod receiving recess defined upon the locking member and
aligning with said rod upon the locking member being in the
knuckle locking position to receive said rod outer end.
4,391,381
PAINT-COATED BOTTLE
Akiho Ota, and Fumio Negishi, both of Tokyo, Japan, assignors
to Yoshino Kogyosbo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 253,635, filed as PCT
JP79/00206, Aug. 3, 1979, published as WO8I/0039!, Feb.
19, 1981 § 102(e) date Mar. 3, 1980, abandoned. This
application Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,393
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 2, 1978, 53-12368
Int. a.3 B65D 2i/(X)
U.S. a. 215—1 C 3 Qaims
4,391,380
RAIL CAR COUPLER INTERLOCK
Demetrius H. Hoose, 404 Broad St., Michigan Center, Mich.
49254
FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,879
Int. a.3 B61G i/04. 3/28. 5/08
Ui». a. 213— 76 3 Claims
1. In a railroad coupler system for railroad cars utilizing a
compressed air brake system wherein the coupler includes a
body having a recess defined therein for receiving a coupler
knuckle head, a knuckle pivotally mounted upon said body
pivotal between open and closed positions with respect to said
recess, a locking member mounted upon said body selectively
1. A paint-coated bottle formed of a saturated polyester
resin, comprising: a chlorinated primer layer applied to the
exterior surface of the bottle; an acrylic undercoat layer ap-
plied to said primer layer; and a decorative paint layer applied
to said undercoat layer, said paint layer being prepared by
adding a pigment to titanium nitride.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL]
145
1 1 431,382
CONTAINER HAVING A SAFETY CLOSURE
Werner Emich, Bensheim-Langwaden, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Friedrich Sanner GmbH & Co. KG, Bensheim,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 17, 1982, Ser, No. 359,072
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 18,
1981, 3110514
Int. a.3 B65D 55/02
U.S. a. 215—213 20 Qaims
4,391,383 I
OVERSEALING CAPS
Pierre Babiol, Villefranche sur Saone, France, assignor to So-
ciete Nouvelle de Bouchons Plastiques S.N.B.P., Anse, France
per No. PCr/FR79/00105, § 371 Date Jul. 7, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 7, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01399, PCT Pub.
Date May 28, 1981
per FUed Nov. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 280,001
Int. a.3 B65D 41/48
U.S. a. 215—256 4 Qaims
1. A capping capsule with a thin wall comprising a closed
end and an axially extending skirt including a circumferential
tear-off guarantee strip which is joined at its upper and lower
edges to the skirt at two rupture lines defined by two circum-
ferential grooves extending around the inside of the skirt and
separated by the height of the guarantee strip, and the guaran-
tee strip including on its inner face multiple circumferentially
spaced axially extending ribs, the thickness of each rib decreas-
ing abruptly near its ends and blending into the rupture lines
4,391,384
AUTOMOBILE BODY PANEL HOLE CLOSURE
Dan T. Moore, III, and Michael F. Fischer, both of Oeveland
Heights, Ohio, assignors to Dan T. Moore Co., Geveland,
Ohio
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,483
Int. a.3 B65D 41/00
U.S. a. 220—359 11 Claims
1. In combination: a container, especially a container of
glass, metal or plastic material for pharmaceutical preparations
or chemicals, said container having a tubular neck and an open
mouth surrounded by an end face, a stopper adapted to be
pushed into the mouth of the container neck and having a grip
plate with a bottom surface limiting the extent to which the
stopper can be inserted into the neck and also having a circum-
ferential surface permitting grasping of the stopper by a per-
son, and a safety sleeve projecting above the end face of the
container neck, being disposed externally on the container
neck and having a projecting portion conformingly receiving
the circumferential surface of the grip plate of the stopper in
the closed position of the container, the bottom surface of the
grip plate resting upon an annular circumferential radial sur-
face of the safety sleeve, screw-threaded sections on said sleeve
and said container neck in the complementary engagement
with one another over a limited distance wfien looking in the
opening direction of the stopper and being secured against
axial separation from one another, the safety sleeve having at
least one projection directed radially inwardly from an inside
surface thereof, said projection being snapped over a first
annular bead on the outside surface of the container neck, said
first annular bead being directed radially outwardly and situ-
ated ahead of the projection when looking in the opening
direction of the stopper.
btzr^n^ m
Hi.
rtt/t/i t//tft'r/i ff/ 't/fftk^r^rttt rrrm^f
1. A closure for a hole in a panel such as a body panel in an
automotive vehicle, comprising a plate having dimensions
complementary to and somewhat larger than the hole, means
for attaching the plate to the panel, a gasket having dimensions
at least as large as the hole, the gasket being of an elastomeric
material responsive to the application of heat to expand to a
relatively high degree, means attaching the gasket to the plate
prior to assembly with the panel hole, the heat expansion
capacity of the gasket being sufficient to ensure that any gaps
existing between the plate and the opposed areas of the panel
surrounding the hole permitted by the plate attaching means
and resulting from manufacturing tolerances in the fabrication
of the panel hole and plate are closed.
4,391,385
CLOSING ARRANGEMENT
Hans Rausing, Lund, Sweden, assignor to Tetra Pak Developpe-
ment SA, Pully, Switzerland
FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,440
Claims priority, application Sweden, Aug. 20, 1980, 8005840
Int. a.J B65D 39/00
U.S. a. 220—307 15 Claims
1. A closing arrangement for containers which have at least
one plane end wall and an aperture therein, comprising:
a unitary closing body insertable into the aperture, said
closing body including:
flange means for retaining said closing body in the aper-
ture,
a container-emptying channel in said closing body, and
cover means sealed to said closing body for closing said
channel in said body; and a separate
seal means located on an outer periphery of said closing
body for sealing against an edge of the aperture, said seal
means including an annular layer of a material softer than
146
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said body in which material said edge of the aperture
becomes embedded.
through said second and third orifices to move a ticket
from the top of the stack of tickets out of the container
through said slot; and
4^9136
HANDLING CASE WITH INCORPORATED FOLDABLE
LID
Michel Moret, Ennont, France, assignor to Allibert S.A., France
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,926
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 21, 1981, 81 01034
Int. CIJ B65D 43/14. 51/04
U.S. a. 220— 343 7 Claims
1. A handling case entailing a lid hinged to the body of the
case along one of its edges along a hinge formed toward the
upper edge of the case, characterized in that the said lid (3) is
divided into two parts (4, 5) hinged one to the other about a
second hinge (6) parallel to the first hinge (9), respectively
forming a rear part (4) articulated around the said first hinge
(9) on the said edge of the case, and a front part (5) hinged to
the said rear part (4) of the lid about the said second hinge (6),
the said front part (5) including, in the vicinity of the ends of
the said second hinge (6), hook-shaped or similar parts (12)
which in the tipped position of the lid are locked into slots (13)
formed in corresponding positions along the edge (14) of the
case, the said front part (5) also including conventional locking
mechanisms (21, 22) to lock the lid onto the case.
controller means for electronically timing and sequencing
the air under pressure from said air jet orifices.
4,391,388
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INCREASING THE
VERSATILITY OF AN ALL PURPOSE MERCHANDISER
Merrill Krakauer, 1 Deer Path, Short Hills, N.J. 07078
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 258,937
Int. CI.5 G07F 11/54
U.S. a. 221—76 8 Qaims
I 4,391,387
MAGNETIC TICKET DISPENSER
Robert T. Bayne, Carmel, and Phillip E. Shireman, Martinsville,
both of Ind., assignors to Standard Change-Makers, Inc.,
Indianapolis, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 71,921, Sep. 4, 1979, Pat. No.
4,326,643. This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,741
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 27,
I 1999, has been disclaimed.
I Int. a.5 B65H 3/14
U.S. a. 221—13 2 Qaims
1. Apparatus for dispensing rectangular tickets or the like
comprising:
a container having a vertically extending opening therin
with a rectangular horizontal cross section adapted to
loosely receive a stack of tickets, said container having a
top and a ticket passage slot adjacent thereto and leading
from said opening to the outside of said container;
an elevator mounted for vertical movement in said container
and adapted to support the stack of said tickets;
means for operating said elevator to position the uppermost
ticket thereon slightly below said top;
said container having air jet orifices therein, a first of which
is located in the container side wall on the opposite side of
said container from said slot, said first orifice extending
toward the side of the stack of tickets below the upper-
most tickets, a second of said orifices being located in said
container top on the opposite side of said container from
said slot, and a third of said orifices being located in said
continer top above said slot;
means for providing a blast of air under pressure through
said first orifice to break apart the tickets in the stack and
1. In a merchandising machine, apparatus including a cabinet
formed with a plurality of vertically aligned access openings
leading into the interior of said cabinet, a plurality of normally
locked doors associated with said openings, a merchandise
carrier comprising a plurality of levels of compartments each
adapted to receive merchandise, means mounting said mer-
chandise carrier for movement as a unit around a vertical axis
with said merchandise levels respectively at the heights of said
openings, drive means adapted to be energized to move said
carrier, a plurality of selecting means corresponding respec-
tively with said levels, respective first control means associated
with said selecting means and adapted to be set to energize said
drive means in response to actuation of associated selecting
means for a period of time to move said carrier to position the
next full compartment of the level corresponding to the actu-
ated selecting means behind its associated opening and to stop
said carrier in said position, respective second control means
associated with said selecting means and adapted to be set to
energize said drive means in response to actuation of the asso-
ciated selecting means to permit the customer stationarily to
position any compartment of the corresponding level behind
the level opening, means for selectively setting one of said first
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
147
and second control means of each level to cause the level to
operate in a first-in first-out mode or in a shopper mode, and
means including said control means and coin responsive means
for releasing a door behind which a compartment containing
selected merchandise has been positioned.
4,391,389
ADJUSTIBLE ACTUATOR FOR PLURAL DISPENSING
DEVICES
Giuseppe Catalfamo, Via Sanvito, 14, Varese, Italy
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,392
Claims priority, application Italy, Apr. 8, 1980, 21240 A/80
Int. a.3 B67D 5/52
U.S. a. 222—135 18 Qaims
1. In a dispensing device, a combination comprising:
first means for holding containers for at least two substances
to be dispensed at a preselected ratio to one another, said
containers each being of the type having one end provided
with a stationary end wall and a second end provided with
a movable end wall which is slidable toward said one end
to effect expulsion of the substance of the container;
second means for effecting the dispensing of said substances,
said second means comprising a plurality of linearly mov-
able pusher members, one for each container, each pusher
member having a leading end portion adapted to press
against and effect movement of one of said movable end
walls and further comprising for each of said pusher mem-
bers an element of rigid strip material having a hole
through which the respective pusher member extends, an
abutment portion engaging said element spaced from and
at one axial side of the pusher member, a spring engaging
the element adjacent said pusher member at the opposite
axial side and urging the element towards said one side so
that the element tilts on the pusher member and the edge
portions bounding said hole entrainingly engage the
pusher member; and
third means connected with said second means and opera-
tive for changing said preselected ratio to a different ratio.
4,391,390
CHEMICAL-MIXING AND DISPENSING APPARATUS
Arthur G. Howard, 7711 Newport Way, Apt. D., Indianapolis,
Ind. 46250
FUed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,894
I Int. a.3 B05B 7/26
U.S. Q. 222— 136 12 Qaims
1. A chemical-mixing and dispensing apparatus for provid-
ing a volume of a chemical mixture to a dispensing location,
said chemical-mixing and dispensing apparatus comprising:
a first chemical container having an inlet port and an outlet
port;
a first chemical disposed within said first chemical container;
a source of a second chemical;
flow conduit in flow communication with the outlet port of
said first chemical container and with said source of a
second chemical, said flow conduit allowing simultaneous
passage therethrough of said first and second chemicals;
a fixed-volume chemical mixture holding tank having an
outlet port in flow communication with said dispensing
location and having an inlet port in flow communication
with said flow conduit;
a fixed-volume control tank in flow communication with and
between said flow conduit and the inlet port of said first
chemical container; and
flow control means for periodically releasing a portion of
the contents of said chemical mixture holding tank to said
dispensing location.
4,391,391
SYRINGE FOR APPLYING ADHESIVE RESIN TO THE
JUNCTIONS OF TENNIS RACKET NETTING
Aldo M. Robaldo, Corso Francia 33, Turin, Italy
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,586
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jan. 11, 1980, 52825/80[U];
Mar. 7, 1980, 53010/80[U]
Int. Q.5 B67D 5/00
U.S. Q. 222—478 14 Qaims
': 22
1. A syringe for applying adhesive resin to the junctions of
racket netting, comprising a reservoir cylinder to contain such
adhesive resin and an injecting piston to expel adhesive resin
from such reservoir cylinder and at least two separate adjacent
parallel tubular spray nozzles fluidically coupled with and
extending from the end of the reservoir cylinder to provide
simultaneous, substantially identical doses of adhesive resin
therethrough to such junctions.
4,391,392
SLIDING CLOSURE UNIT
Peter Jeschke, Walluf, and Jiirgen Plath, Wiesbaden, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Didier-Werke A.G., Wies-
baden, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,188
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 20,
1980, 3031377
Int. a? B22D 41/08
U.S. Q. 222—598 6 Qaims
1. In a sliding closure unit for selectively discharging liquid
melt from a liquid melt container of the type including an outer
jacket, an inner refractory lining and a pouring opening ex-
tending through the lining, said sliding closure unit cooperat-
14S
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
ing with the container for selectively blocking and unblocking
the pouring opening and including a stationary refractory plate
having therethrough a flow passage for communication with
the pouring opening, a sliding refractory plate in abutting
contact with said stationary refractory plate and having there-
through at least one flow passage to be selectively moved into
and out of alignment with said flow passage of said stationary
refractory plate, said stationary and sliding refractory plates
having complementary, abutting relative sliding surfaces, the
improvement wherein:
receiver means to initiate the operation of the first timer and
second radio transmitter and receiver means to initiate opera-
tion of the second timer; the improvement comprising
a third timer connected in parallel to and being adapted to
override the said second timer, the third timer including
an electrically timed operation cycle and a manual timer
adjustment knob, the adjustment knob being connected in
the timer to vary the duration of the timed operation
cycle, and
manual means connected into the electrical control circuit to
bypass the first and second radio transmitter and receiver
means, the manual means comprising a flexible electrical
cord and a switch, the manual means being adapted to
manually function the up and down pivotal movements of
the wetting arm and the spray cycle through the spray
nozzle from a location remote from the electrical control
circuit;
whereby the timed period of brine flow can be manually ad-
justed without requiring tools.
said stationary refractory plate consists essentially of a sub-
stantially non-wettable material having a Mohs' hardness
of from 1 to 2, a thermal conductivity of greater than 40
WAm at 700° C. and a crushing strength of not greater
than 25 N/mm^ at about room temperature; and
said sliding refractory plate consists essentially of a substan-
tially non-porous material having a Mohs' hardness of
from 6 to 7, a thermal conductivity of less than 3 WAm at
700° C. and a crushing strength of greater than 300
N/mm2 at about room temperature.
4 391 393
WETTED SALT SYSTEM INCLUDING ADJUSTABLE
I TIMER
Wm. G. Filmyer, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Pioneer De-Icing
Services, Inc., Philadelphia, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 67,304, Aug. 17, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,572
Int. C1.5 B67D 5/02
U.S. a. 222—642 1 Claim
4,391,394
METHOD FOR LAYING SHIRTS, ESPEOALLY MEN'S
SHIRTS, FOR PURPOSES OF WRAPPING
Rolf Hoffmann, Monchen-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to van Laack, Schmitz & Eltschig GmbH u. Co.,
Monchen-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,100
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 26,
1980, 3036277
Int. a.3 A41H 33/00
U.S. a. 223—37 6 Qalnis
1. In a wetted salt system suitable to extend the melting
range of highway salt of the type including a liquid storage
tank, a wetting arm pivotally connected at one end to a station-
ary support and having an unconnected end, the wetting arm
comprising an enlongated bar and at least one nozzle supported
near the unconnected end of the bar, and means to pivotally
function the wetting arm relative to the support between an
elevated position and a spray position; a brine pump taking its
suction from the storage tank and delivering liquid under
pressure to the spray nozzle; a hydraulic circuit to control the
operation of the means to pivotally function the arm; an electri-
cal control circuit including a first timer to control the time
period the wetting arm remains in the said spray position and
a second timer to control the time period of the flow of brine
from the pump to the spray nozzle, first radio transmitter and
1. A procedure for laying a shirt, in particular a men's shirt,
for purposes of wrapping, wherein the shirt yokes are folded-
over along mutually parallel folding lines on the back of the
shirt and the folded-over yokes lying on each other are fas-
tened by a slipped-on clamp in the area of a beak formed be-
tween them, whereupon the shirt sleeves are layed on the
folded-over yokes and then the torso end consisting of the
front and rear sides and away from the collar is turned-over
together with folded-over parts along a folding line extending
transversely to the lengthwise direction of the shirt and is
further fastened to the front side or to the folded-over parts
joining same, characterized in that the folded-over yokes (2,
10, 11) are merely joined together by the clamp (15), in that the
folded-over torso end (18) of the shirt (1) that is away from the
collar is fastened by at least two pins (22, 23) to the folded-over
parts (10, 11), and in that torso end (18) is folded-over so much
that a tuck-in end (20) projecting above the upper border (13.
14) is folded about this border (13, 14) of the yokes (2) and is
tucked-in behind the yokes (2, 10, 11).
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
149
4,391,395
CLOTHES HANGER
Franz Kamer, Lidkoping, Sweden, assignor to Kamer & Co AB,
Lidkoping, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 37,955, May 9, 1979, abandoned. This
qiplication Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 315,303
Claims iniority, application Sweden, May 11, 1978, 7805391
Int. a.3 A41D 27/22
U.S. CI. 223—94 5 Qainis
other at an acute angle in the direction that said web is offset
from said bag when said bags occupy a common plane so that
1. A clothes-hanger comprising a hollow central portion
having an outer end and having a slot in the lower region
thereof, the slot having a defining edge adjacent to the outer
end thereof, said edge being spaced inwardly from the outer
end of the central portion, a suspension member disposed on
the central portion, said central portion having abutment
means centrally therein, two end pieces, at least one said end
piece being telescopically in the central portion in order to be
movable between an inner and an outer position in the central
portion, the outer ends of said end pieces having gripping
portions for engagement with an article of clothing which is to
be hung up, said one end piece at its inner end having a trans-
verse abutment face, a compression spring disposed between
and abutting said abutment means in the central portion and
the abutment face of the end piece telescopically disposed in
the central portion, recess means in the bottom of said movable
end piece adjacent to and spaced from the transverse abutment
face thereof, and a locking device resiliently connected at the
inner end thereof to said one end piece with its inner end at the William D,
inner end of the one movable end piece and having a free outer
end remote from said inner ends, said outer end of said locking
piece having end surface means for engaging said defining
edge of said slot in said central portion, said locking device
extending from its inner end towards said gripping portion of
the one end piece and underlying said recess means, said recess
means being devoid of any obstruction to movement thereinto
of said locking means, the locking device having a lower sur-
face inclined downwardly toward the outer end thereof, said
locking device positioned when said inner end of said one end
piece is partially inserted into said central portion for engage-
ment of the lower surface thereof with the outer end of the
central portion whereby resiliently to move said locking de-
vice into said recess means in the said one end piece upon initial
insertion thereof and whereby after further insertion said lock-
ing device will be caused to snap down into said slot formed in
said central portion lower region by the resilient connection,
the end surface means at the free outer end of said locking
device engaging the defining edge of said slot and being urged
thereagainst by said compression spring.
said bags are level when they are carried, with said web resting
on the shoulder of said user.
U.S.
4,391,397
HREWOOD CARRIER
Taylor, Jr., P.O. Box 142, King George, Va. 22485
Filed Jan. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,153
Int. a.' A45C 11/00
a. 224—265 1 Qaim
4,391,396
CLOTHING TRAVEL BAG
Reginald D. Brady, 2524 Boyer Ave. East, Apt. 446, Seattle,
Wash. 98102
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,132
Int. a.3 A45F 3/02
U.S. a. 224—205 9 Qaims
1. A travel bag for carrying objects, comprising first and
second bags interconnected by a relatively thin, flexible web,
said web being offset from the center of at least one of said bags
to provide clearance for the neck of a user when said travel bag
is carried with said web over one shoulder and the first and
second bags extend downwardly along the back and chest of
the user, said web being secured to said bags in a manner that
causes the respective center axes of said bags to intersect each
1032O.G.— 6
1. A device for carrying wood, particularly firewood, com-
prising a front-carried frame formed of a pair of rigid, gener-
ally S-shaped, tubular elements formed of conventional electri-
cal conduit, spaced apart in parallel planes by a plurality of
rigidly attached cross members, the upper curvatures of the
S-elements being configured in downwardly-concave C-por-
tions, padded with conventional hot water pipe insulation to
rest on the shoulders of the wearer of the device, the lower
curvatures of the S-elements being configured in upwardly-
concave C-portions to form a receptacle for the transportation
of firewood, and the lower curvatures and two cross-members
being covered with canvas sleeves attaching to them a canvas
sheet which forms a part of the receptacle.
150
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,398
METHOD OF TENSIONING A TAPE
Heinrich Cap, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Papst Motoren GmbH A Co. KG, St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,684
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 26, 1979,
1886/79
Int. a.3 B65H 23/22
U.S. a. 226—4 5 Oaims
1. A method of tensioning a tape in a tape recording device,
comprising the steps of passing a tape between a braking roller,
a first sound shaft, a second sound shaft, and a pulling roller
located one after the other so that the tape runs with counter-
acting pulling forces and slips over the sound shafts; and ad-
justing the pulling forces of the rollers and the slip of the tape
on the sound shafts so that one pulling force of the tape be-
tween the braking roller and the first sound shaft, and another
pulling force of the tape between the first and second sound
shafts act in a direction toward the braking roller, whereas a
further pulling force of the tape between the second sound
shaft and the pulling roller acts opposite to said direction, and
also so that the first sound shaft reduces the one pulling force
between the braking roller and the first sound shaft and
thereby the other pulling force between the first and second
sound shafts is smaller than said one pulling force, and the
second sound shaft reduces the other pulling force between the
first and second shafts so that the further pulling force between
the second sound shaft and the pulling roller is smaller than
said other pulUng force.
4,391,399
MANUALLY ASSEMBLABLE SHEET-FEED TRACTOR
Alan F. Seitz, New Hartford, Conn., assignor to Data Motion,
Incorporated, Torrington, Conn.
FUed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,492
Int. a.3 B65H 17/38
VJS. a. 226—74 26 Qaims
1. A sheet-feed tractor adapted to be slidably mounted on
spaced apart and substantially parallel extending elongated
support and drive shafts comprising:
a. a first frame member having a support-shaft opening
therein;
b. a second frame member assembled on said first frame
member to form a tractor frame therewith;
c. a drive sprocket mounted on said tractor frame for rota-
tion about the axis of said drive sprocket and having an
aperture therethrough adapted to receive the drive shaft
for sliding therealong and for driving thereby upon rota-
tion of the drive shaft about its longitudinal axis;
d. an endless belt disposed about said tractor frame in en-
gagement with said drive sprocket to be driven thereby
upon driving movement of said sprocket by the drive
shaft, said drive belt including sheet engagement teeth
adapted to engage in the perforations of sheet material
perforated against the side margins thereof for advance-
ment thereof upon driving of said belt by said sprocket;
e. clamp means, having an aperture therethrough adapted to
receive the support shaft therein, for clamping the support
shaft received therein, said clamp means including a first
clamp part on said second frame member and extending
through said support-shaft opening in said first frame
member to the side of said first frame member opposite
that on which said second frame member is disposed, said
clamp means also including a second clamp part disen-
gageably mounted on said first clamp part and movable
relative thereto to clamp a support shaft received in said
aperture in said clamp means, said second clamp part
bearing against the side of said first frame member oppo-
site said second frame member to retain said first and
second frame members in assembly, said frame members
being held in assembly by said clamp parts, removal of
said second clamp part from said first clamp part permit-
ting ready disassembly of said frame members from each
other.
4,391,400
APPARATUS FOR STORING A VARIABLE LENGTH OF
STRIP
Daniel Sylvain, Saint Etienne, France, assignor to Oesid, St.
Chamond, France
FUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,642
Claims priority, application France, May 7, 1980, 80 10215
Int. a.5 B65H 17/42
U.S. a. 226—113 5 Qaims
n « » 9 10 ♦
1. A strip accumulator system of the horizontal type, com-
a cart having means for engaging a strip in a fashion to form
a horizontal loop, and constructed and arranged to be
motivated along a path of travel to increase or decrease
the length of said loop,
a number of roller assemblies for supporting and separating
an upper portion from a lower portion of said strip of said
formed loop,
said cart including means for storing said roller assemblies
thereon,
a number of stationary cooperative sets of frames trans-
versely opposed relative to said strip and spaced at se-
lected locations parallel to and on opposite sides of said
path of travel in a manner to permit free movement of said
cart therealong, and
means activated by said motion of said cart, for the succes-
sive removal of said roller assemblies off of said cart and
placement thereof onto a different one of said sets of
transversely opposed frames and into a working position
to support said upper portion of said strip upon said in-
crease of said loop and for successive removal of said
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
151
roller assemblies from said sets of frames onto said cart
upon said decrease of said loop.
1 1 4,391,401
SURGICAL STAPLERS AND STAPLE
Jerome F. Moshofsky, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Lawrence
M. Smith, Lake Oswego, Oreg.
Continuation of Ser. No. 26,071, Apr. 3, 1979, Pat. No.
4,256,251, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 899,350,
Apr. 24, 1978, abandoned. This application Jan. 26, 1981, Ser.
No. 228,620
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 17,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 A61B77/(W
U.S. Q. 227— 19 * 2 Qaims
L,
1. A surgical stapler comprising:
an elongate body having forward and rearward ends, and
having a longitudinally extending guideway opening
through its forward end;
a ram having a forming end portion and being mounted in
said guideway with said forming end portion adjacent the
forward end of the body for sliding movement along the
guideway between a forward position with its forming
end portion at said forward end and a retracted position
with its forming end portion spaced from said forward
end;
staple-holding means attached to said body for feeding a
staple into said guideway when said ram is in its retracted
position;
at least one toggle-joint linkage, said toggle-joint linkage
comprising first and second arms of generally equal
length, said arms having adjacent ends pivotally attached
together with the end of said first arm opposite said adja-
cent ends being pivotally attached to said body adjacent
its rearward end and the end of said second arm opposite
said adjacent ends projecting toward the forward end of
said body and being pivotally attached to said ram, the
adjacent ends of the arms of said toggle-joint linkage being
opposed and projecting away from said body when said
ram is in its retracted position so that pressing the adjacent
ends of the arms of said toggle-joint linkage in a direction
transverse of said guideway will move said ram from its
retracted to its forward position; and
an anvil fixed to the forward end of said body and projecting
across said guideway, said anvil and the forming end
portion of said ram being shaped to close a staple therebe-
tween upon movement of said ram to its forward position.
' ' 4,391,402
SURGICAL STAPLING CONTROL MEANS
Jay E. Campbell, Upper Black Eddy; Richard H. Reichmann,
Churchville, both of Pa., and Lehmann K. Lehmann, Fair-
field, Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 153,229, May 27, 1980,
abandoned. This application Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,653
Int. a.^ A61B 17/04
U.S. Q. 227—121 6 Qaims
1. A surgical stapling control means comprising a handle; a
trigger pivotally attached and compressible into said handle; a
staple forming means contained in the forward portion of said
handle; a flexible arm mounted on the rearward portion of said
trigger; a pawl and at least one guide pin attached to one end
of said arm; a multi-toothed ratchet attached to the rearward
portion of said handle; and guide means having upper and
lower portions, said guide means positioned adjacent the rear-
ward portion of said handle so as to coordinate with and pro-
vide tension to said guide pin, such that on partially compress-
ing said trigger the lower portion of said guide means provides
tension on said guide pin and flexes said arm such that the pawl
engages said ratchet and such that on complete compression of
said trigger, the upper portion of said guide means releases
tension from said guide pin allowing said arm to relax and
allowing said guide pin to cross over said guide means, thus
causing said pawl to be disengaged from said ratchet.
4,391,403
METHOD OF EXPLOSION-WELDING ROLLING
BILLETS INTENDED FOR PACKAGE ROLLING
Ingemar P. Persson, Striberg, Sweden, assignor to Nitro Nobel
AB, Gyttorp, Sweden
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,822
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 23, 1980, 8003071
Int. Q.3 B23K 20/08 ^
U.S. Q. 228—107 5 Qaims
ti'
m
\ VN \ <; VN
'^
1. A method of manufacturing a compound plate by explo-
iion-welding, said compound plate being intended for subse-
quent package-rolling, characterised in that the plating mate-
rial is smaller in area than the base material so that an edge is
left around the periphery of the base material without any
plating, that this free edge surface of the base material is pro-
tected by the attachment of metal strips, that an explosive
charge is placed on top of the plating material, said charge
having an area at least as great as that of the base material, after
which the explosive charge is detonated.
4,391,404
SLEEVE VALVE FOR FLEXIBLE BAGS
Albert Welter, Franklin, Ohio, assignor to Champion Interna-
tional Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,622
Int. Q.' B65D 30/24
U.S. Q. 229—62.5 11 Qaims
1. A flexible bag comprising side walls, a top wall and a
bottom wall, an open mouth in the comer of said top wall
comprising an end flap, a sleeve valve mounted in said open
mouth, said sleeve valve comprising a tubular sleeve and a
backing panel, the upper front portion of the tubular sleeve
oeing adhered to the backing panel by an adhesive are^ and the
152
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
lower front portion of the sleeve adhered to the end flap of said
open mouth of the bag, the upper and lower rear portions of
said sleeve being unattached to the backing panel and to said
end flap and being adapted to hang within the bag, and a
longitudinal slit located exclusively in the upper rear portion of
f/
said sleeve, said slit terminating short of said adhesive area to
form an unslit area of said upper rear portion unadhered to said
backing panel whereby the said unslit area together with the
lower rear portion of said sleeve folds over the open mouth to
seal the open mouth in the two-ply region of the sleeve.
I i^ i?
-te4? s_.
y^/ . Ipy
:^ -40 J^
by a diagonal score line extending from the juncture of
said hinged score line of said comer panel
each of said gusset panels having a locking tab extending
outwardly from its upper edge, said locking tabs of each
pair of said gusset panels being alignable in the erect
container body,
a locking panel extending outwardly from each of said side
panels, said locking panel being separated from said side
panel by a cut line along a portion of the width of said
locking panel and said side panel, said cut line separation
being alignable with said locking tabs in said erect con-
tainer body,
said locking panel and said side panel being further separated
along at least part of the remainder of their width by a pair
of shoulder panels, each said shoulder panel being defined
by a pair of parallel score lines which form the hinged
joint between said shoulder panel and said side panel and
said shoulder panel and said locking panel,
said score line between said side panel and said shoulder
panel being aligned substantially with the upper edge of
said gusset panel,
the width of said shoulder panel being substantially equal to
the combined thickness of a pair of gusset panels.
4,391,406
POWER SAVING SYSTEM WHICH ASSURES ROOM
SECURITY
Morton Fried, 706 Bolton Rd„ Far Rockaway, N.Y. 11691
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,701
Int. C1.3 E05B 65/00; G05D 2i/00
U.S. a. 236—47 8 Qaims
4,391,405
CONTAINER
Alva C. Drinon, Portland, Me., assignor to Weyerhaeuser Com-
pany, Tacoma, Wash.
I Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,262
I Int. Q\} B65D 5/24. 5/34
U.S. a. 229—31 R 20 Oaims
^■1 2S
r'^
COOL.
■ t-Oct^O, ^COCM^V
cOCn
1^3'
• T/M^'f
rse
^//wr
'»',
/f^ti^Ay
.^-2f_.
/
1. A blank for a container body comprising:
a rectangular base panel,
front and rear panels hingedly attached along score lines to
said base panel,
side panels hingedly attached along score lines to said base
panel,
four comer panels each hingedly attached by score lines
along two adjacent sides to said adjacent side panel and
said adjacent one of said front and rear panels,
said comer panels being divided into a pair of gusset panels
1. A power saving system for conserving energy consump-
tion by electric loads in a room having a dt)or with a locking
system, and which system also assures room security, compris-
ing:
closure switch means for coupling to the door and produc-
ing a control signal only throughout the time the door is
opened;
lock switch means for coupling to the door locking system
and producing a control signal only throughout the time
of proper locking of the door, both said control signals
being the same;
control means associated with an electric load in the room,
and
wire means coupling said closure switch means and said lock
switch means in parallel to said control means,
said control means comprising timing means responsive to
the termination of a control signal on said wire means for
producing a control signal for a preset limited interval of
time, and for ceasing operations upon the presence of a
control signal on said wire means, and control switch
means responsive to any of the aforesaid control signals
for controlling the energization of the electric load during
the time that a control signal is present.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
153
4,391,407
VEHICLE CABIN HEATER
Sadahani Nakazawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan ,
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,843
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 22, 1980, 55-
69494[U] 1 1
1 1 Int. a.3 B60H 1/02
U.S. a. 237—12.3 B 4 Qaims
1. A water circuit arrangement of an engine having a water
jacket therein, comprising:
an enjgine cooling circuit including a thermostat valve, a
radiator and a water pump connected in series by means
. having one end connected to an outlet of said water jacket
and the other end connected to an inlet of said water
jacket;
a bypass passage bypassing both said thermostat valve and
said radiator;
a vehicle cabin heating circuit including a passage having
one end connected to the outlet of said water jacket and
the other end connected to the passage of said engine
cooling circuit at a position just upstream of said water
pump, and a heater core unit arranged in the passage of
said vehicle cabin heating circuit to receive water from
the outlet of the water jacket flowing through said heater
core unit before reaching said water pump;
valve means arranged in said bypass passage for selectively
opening and closing said bypass passage;
temperature sensing means for measuring the temperature of
water circulating through said vehicle cabin heating cir-
cuit; and
control means for actuating said valve means to close the
bypass passage when said temperature sensing means
senses a water temperature in the vehicle cabin heating
circuit below a predetermined level, and to open said
bypass passage when said temperature sensing means
senses a water temperature in the vehicle cabin heating
circuit above the predetermined level.
4,391,408
LOW INSERTION FORCE CONNECTOR
Richard J. Hanlon, Attleboro, Mass., and Rudi O. H. Vetter,
Pawtucket, R.I., assignors to Augat Inc., Attleboro, Mass.
1 1 Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,216
' ' Int. a.3 HOIR B/6i9
U.S. a. 339—75 M 14 Qaims
1. A low insertion force connector for an integrated circuit
package having a plurality of terminals arranged in spaced
parallel rows, said connector comprising:
a rectangular base member formed with a plurality of aper-
tures along opposite edges thereof;
a spring loaded electrically-conductive contact member
mounted in each of said apertures, said contact member
having only one bearing surface adapted to move without
flexure of the bearing surface to coact with an electrically
non-conductive surface of a cover to make a single-sided
contact with an inserted terminal, said bearing surface
having a normal ON position and an OFF position;
a slide member on said base, said slide member being longitu-
dinally movable and having a plurality of upstanding pins
on its top surface;
a pair of actuator members on said slide member, each actua-
tor member associated with a different plurality of said
apertures, said actuator members having a plurality of
elongated first slots arranged at an angle with respect to
the direction of longitudinal movement of said slide mem-
ber, each of said first slots engaging a corresponding pin,
said actuators being laterally movable with respect to said
base member and said slide member; and
an electrically non-conductive cover engaging said base and
enclosing said slide, actuators and a portion of said contact
members including said bearing surfaces, said cover being
formed with a plurality of openings aligned with said
apertures and said contact members in said apertures,
said cover being further formed with electrically non-
conductive surfaces confronting said contact members
and said apertures in said base:
said actuators each having a plurality of second slots ar-
ranged in a row along one edge thereof, each of said
contact members being formed with a hook portion en-
gaging a corresponding one of said second slots;
whereby longitudinal movement of said slide member in one
direction moves said actuators away from each other to
the normal or ON position whereby said bearing surfaces
of said contact members are closely adjacent said con-
fronting surfaces of said cover, and longitudinal move-
ment of said slide in a second direction moves said actua-
tors toward each other to the OFF position whereby said
bearing surfaces are moved laterally away from said con-
fronting surfaces of said cover; and
whereby the terminals of said integrated circuit package
may be easily inserted through said openings and between
said bearing surfaces and said confronting surfaces when
said connector is in the OFF condition and the terminals
are positively confined between said bearing surfaces and
said confronting surfaces when said connector is in the
ON condition.
4,391,409
POSITIONING AND CONTROL SYSTEM FOR FAN
THRUST REVERSER COWLS IN A TURBOFAN ENGINE
Klaus H. Scholz, Renton, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Com-
pany, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,247
f Int. Q.3 F02K 1/60
U.S. Q. 239—265.29 5 Qaims
1. A pressurized hydraulic fiuid positioning and control
system for moving first and second fan thrust reverser cowls in
a turbofan engine, said fan thrust reverser cowls being movable
in retraction and deployment between a retracted position and
a deployed position, respectively, comprising:
first and second hydraulic actuator means coupled respec-
tively to said first and said second reverser cowls for
moving said cowls between said retracted and deployed
positions, each of said first and second hydraulic actuator
means including at least one double-acting hydraulic actu-
ator having cooperative piston and cylinder members and
a movable piston rod, said piston rod of said hydraulic
154
OFPICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
actuator of said first hydraulic actuator means being cou-
pled to said first reverser cowl, and said piston rod of said
hydraulic actuator of said second hydraulic actuator
means being coupled to said second reverser cowl, each
said cylinder member being affixed to said turbofan engine
and having a rod end pressurizable to retract said cowls
and a head end pressurizable to deploy said cowls;
means for supplying pressurized hydraulic fluid to said first
and said second hydraulic actuator means;
directional control valve means for selectively controlling
flow of said pressurized hydraulic fluid to and from said
first and second hydraulic actuator means to retract or
deploy said thrust reverser cowls; and.
the splash plate along the track to carry said impact point along
a path substantially intersecting said axis, and means for inter-
locking the splash plate and the arm in fixed position relative to
each other when said impact point is in substantial coincidence
with said axis.
4,391,411
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PULVERIZING
MATERIALS BY VACUUM COMMINUTION
William A. Colbum, Denver, Colo., assignor to Process Develop-
ment Corporation, Denver, Colo.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,679
Int. C1.3 B02C 19/18
U.S. a. 241—1 10 aaims
first and second flow regulator means respectively coupled
to said first and second actuator means for regulating flow
of said pressurized hydraulic fluid to and from said first
and second actuator means during deployment and retrac-
tion of said first and second reverser cowls, said first and
second flow regulator means being operable to regulate
the respective rates of flow of hydraulic fluid to and from
said first and second hydraulic actuator means to provide
substantially synchronous and independent movement of
said first and second reverser cowls during retraction and
deployment.
431,410
SPRINKLER WITH TRANSVERSELY MOUNTED
SPLASH PLATE
Allan L. Smith, 26591 Road 196, Exeter, Calif. 93221
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,959
Int. a.3 B05B 1/26
U.S. Q. 239—498 12 Qaims
1. A sprinkler comprising a body having a fluid passage
extending therethrough and communicating with the exterior
thereof for the release of a fluid stream therefrom substantially
along a predetermined axis, an arm mounted on the body
having a portion defining a track disf>osed in substantially right
angular relation to said axis, a splash plate having a predeter-
mined impact point for contact by said fluid stream when the
splash plate is in an operating position and a mount engageable
with the portion of the arm defining the track for movement of
\7
1. In a vacuum system for effecting the comminution of
minerals and other frangible substances, the method for in-
creasing the rate of pulverization and the fineness of the prod-
uct which comprises:
producing a low-pressure zone and a continuous flow of air
into the zone and a discharge of air from the zone;
providing a mass of material to be pulverized; and
injecting the material into the low-pressure zone at a signifi-
cant initial velocity produced by a force independent of
the force utilized for producing said low-pressure zone,
whereby the material is subjected to a sudden correspond-
ing increased rate of change of pressure upon entering said
low-pressure zone.
4,391,412
APPARATUS FOR LIMITING nLLING HEIGHT OF
CONTAINERS
Albert Goldhanuner, Zum Hecht 46, 7770 Uberlingen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,767
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 18,
1979, 2942241
Int. a.5 B02C 23/00
U.S. a. 241—36 7 aaims
1. An apparatus for limiting the filling height of a container
for a cutting or shredding machine for the destruction of docu-
ments and microfilms, a container pivotally mounted in a
housing and having a base, a rear end and a front end, the
housing supporting the rear end of the container on a horizon-
tal portion of an inclined support extending upwards from the
II
July 5, 1983
tr
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
155
base of the housing, an upper end of the front end of the con- falls downwardly away from said impact member and through
tamer being supported by a spnng catch actuating switch said generally annular space.
means to stop a cutting or shredding machine when a predeter-
mined height is sensed and reached.
4,391,413
APPARATUS FOR BREAKING ARTICLES
Ernest A. Pack, Uxbridge, England, assignor to B.H.F. (Engi-
neering) Limited, Middlesex, England
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,237
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 16, 1979,
7935961 I j
Int. a.3 B02C 19/14
U.S. a. 241—99
5 Claims
I
1. Apparatus for fracturing glassware into cullet comprising:
an upwardly and inwardly tapering impact member of noncir-
cular horizontal cross-section mounted for rotation in a given
direction about a vertical axis, said impact member including
generally vertically extending ribs which have side surfaces
facing generally in said given direction; a housing having a side
wall with a generally smooth inner surface, said side wall
surrounding and horizontally spaced from said impact member
and extending downwardly beyond the lower edge of said
impact member whereby a generally annular space is formed
between said side wall and the lower edge of said impact
member; means for rotating said impact member about said
vertical axis in said given direction; and glassware feed means
including a guide chute having a guide surface inclined down-
wardly and inwardly toward the side of said impact member
for directing glassware issuing from the chute onto the side of
said impact member, the arrangement of impact member, hous-
ing side wall and chute being such that the glassware is frac-
tured into cullet upon contact with said impact member and
4,391,414
CONE CRUSHER
Rudolf Reiter, Via Fratelli Cervi, 7 - Vimercate (Province of
Milan), Italy
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,409
Oaims priority, application Italy, Jul. 10, 1979, 24224 A/79
Int. a.J B02C 2/06
U.S. a. 241-213 1 Qaim
1. A cone crusher for crushing stones and the like, compris-
ing an outer shroud enclosing a space, a substantially vertical
shaft within said space and driven with a conical swinging
motion, said shaft having a downwardly diverging crushing
cone at a middle portion thereof, on said shroud a conical ring
spacingly arranged around said crushing cone and having a
smaller taper than said crushing cone to define an upwardly
widening space therebetween, a rotatory bushing member
surrounding said shaft below said crushing cone and rotatably
supported on said outer shroud, said bushing member having a
circular outer periphery defining an axis of rotation and a
cylindrical inner cavity having an axis eccentric with respect
to said axis of rotation, said cavity receiving a lower end por-
tion of said shaft and having a closed bottom, a piston axially
slidable within said inner cavity and arranged below said shaft,
bearing means between said shaft and said piston for routably
supporting said shaft on said piston on one side thereof facing
said shaft, said piston having another side thereof opposite to
said one side and forming a cylinder chamber with said closed
bottom, a hydraulic system for supplying pressure fluid into
said cylinder chamber thereby to hydraulically support said
piston and said shaft thereon, transmission means on said rotary
bushing member for imparting rotation thereto thereby to
impart rotation to said bushing member about said axis of
rotation thereof and to impart an eccentric rotatory movement
(fr*said piston and said shaft thereon, said hydraulic system
including a rotary joint connected to said rotary bushing mem-
ber, said rotary joint having a mounting flange for connection
to said closed bottom of said cavity, a fixed channel extending
through said mounting flange for the passage of pressure fluid
from said hydraulic system into said cylinder chamber of said
cavity, a seat in said mounting flange, rotary seals in said seats
and interposed between said fixed channel and said mounting
flange, a plate member surrounding said fixed channel and
providing a clearance therebetween for bleeding off pressure
fluid therethrough.
156
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4391,415
FAaLITATING THE EXCHANGE OF A HNISHED
PACKAGE WITH A NEW CORE
Joseph H. Hollier, Jr., Pearcy, Ark., assignor to Sutco, Inc., Hot
Springs, Ark.
FUed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,847
Int. a.3 B65H 19/04
U.S. a. 242—56.9 1 Claim
reel hub engaging member, said rotating member having a
circumferential surface;
a rotatable driving member having a circumferential surface
facing said circumferential surface of said rotating mem-
ber and being capable of rotating concentrically with said
reel hub engaging member, said driving member being
adapted to be selectively rotated in either of two direc-
tions by a rotary power supply means;
a plurality of rolling members having axes about which they
are rotatable, said rolling member being disposed between
said circumferential surface of said rotating member and
said facing circumferential surface of said driving member
so as to be rotatable about their own axes;
a cam member disposed on one of the respective circumfer-
ential surfaces of said rotating member and said driving
member, said cam member holding said plurality of rolling
members in coop>eration with the other of the respective
circumferential surfaces of said rotating member and said
driving member to rotate said rotating member together
with said driving member in one direction when said
driving member rotates in said one direction, and releasing
1. In a device for winding a plurality of endless webs of stock
material on individual cores on a driven cantilevered support
shaft to prepare finished packages of the stock material, the
improvement therein for facilitating the exchange of finished
packages on the driven cantilevered support shaft with new
cores up)on completion of a winding operation; the improve-
ment comprising:
(a) a secondary, non-driven cantilevered support shaft lo-
cated in a first positon in proximity to, but spaced from the
driven support shaft, the secondary support shaft having a
diameter which is substantially equal to the diameter of
the driven support shaft, the secondary support shaft
mounted for movement from the first j)osition thereof to a
second position thereof wherein the secondary support
j shaft and the driven support shaft are in a longitudinal,
end-to-end alignment, and are contiguous;
(b) means for loading a plurality of unused cores onto the
1 secondary support shaft during the winding operation,
while the secondary support shaft is located in the first
position thereof;
(c) means for removing the finished packages from the
driven support shaft upon conclusion of the winding oper-
ation, while the secondary support shaft is located in the
first position thereof;
(d) means for moving the secondary support shaft from the
first position thereof to the second position thereof;
(e) means for conveying the unused cores from the second-
ary support shaft onto the driven support shaft and secur-
ing the cores on the shaft; and
(0 means for moving the secondary support shaft from the
second position thereof to the first position thereof,
whereupon a new winding operation is allowed to com-
mence.
said hold on said plurality of rolling members to allow said
rotating member to rotate independently of said driving
member when said driving member rotates in the other
direction; and
a variable rotation transmitting means for transmitting rota-
tion between said reel hub engaging member and said
rotating member such that the rotation transmissibility
between said reel hub engaging member and said rotating
member increases substantially in inverse proportion to a
decrease of the magnitude of a torque applied to said reel
hub engaging member;
said rotating member having a sliding surface touching and
in sliding contact with said reel hub engaging member
along the rotating axis of said reel hub engaging member
and along the circumferential direction, respectively;
and
said plurality of rolling members being held within the same
plane with said sliding surface by the other of said circum-
ferential surface of said rotating member and said circum-
ferential surface of said driving member and said cam
member when said driving member rotates in said one
direction.
4,391,416
REEL SHAFT DEVICE OF A MAGNETIC RECORDING
TAPE RUNNING APPARATUS
Akira Osanai, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,602
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 55-35826;
Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36990[U]; Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36991[U]; Mar.
21, 1980, 55-36992[U]
Int. C\? B65H 17/02
U.S. a. 242—68.1 17 Qaims
1. A reel shaft device of a magnetic recording tape running
apparatus comprising:
a rotatable reel hub engaging member to be engaged with a
reel hub to rotate therewith;
a rotating member capable of rotating with respect to said
4,391,417
UNCOILER FOR METALLIC STRIP MATERIAL
Robert W. Gronbech, Sheffield, England, assignor to Davy-
Loewy Limited, Sheffield, England
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,866
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 10, 1980,
8011895
Int. C\? B21C 47/16; B65H 75/00
U.S. a. 242—78.6 6 Claims
1. An uncoiler for metallic strip material, comprising:
mandrel means;
a coil of strip material, which is characterized by some degree
of eccentricity, disposed upon said mandrel means;
means for moving said strip material so as to uncoil said strip
material from said mandrel means; and
\
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
157
means interacting with at least one of said eccentrically
mounted coil of strip material disposed upon said mandrel
means, or said mandrel means, for detecting said degree of
eccentricity of said coil of strip material disposed upon said
mandrel means, or the rotational effects of said eccentrically
1. In a spin cast type reel having a longitudinally-movable
center shaft (15) operable to control operation of the reel and
a control spring (54) surrounding said shaft for yieldably hold-
ing the center shaft in one position, a selectively-operable
anti-reverse device (40), an actuator (50) associated with said
center shaft for rotation about the rotation axis of the center
shaft for actuating said anti-reverse device in response to rota-
tion of the center shaft, the improvement comprising: means
(70,80,90,65,66) for yieldably holding said actuator in rotatable
association with said center shaft with a force which is inde-
pendent of the force of said control spring (54).
thereof and projecting into said cylinder through the the bot-
tom end of said cylinder; a braking member comprising a
washer fitting said spool slide shaft within said cylinder and
rotatable as a unit with said spool slide shaft and a non-rotata-
ble washer fitting said spool slide shaft and engaging said
groove of said cylinder; an adjusting sleeve screwed to the
outer end opening of said cylinder so as to be able to move
back and forth relatively to the latter; a spring acting between
the inner bottom surface of said adjusting sleeve and the rear
end surface of said braking member and adapted to press said
braking member to provide a drag braking force, a handle
sleeve coaxially positioned about said adjusting sleeve, said
adjusting sleeve and said handle sleeve together defining two
cooperating members which are circumferentially adjustable
relative to each other to provide a plurality of different ranges
of drag braking force, said adjusting sleeve having a range of
mounted coil of strip material, respectively, as said coil of
strip material and said mandrel means are rotated by said
moving means, and for controlling the speed of said moving
means in response to said degree of eccentricity, or rota-
tional effects, detected.
4,391,418
SILENT, ANTI-REVERSE ACTUATOR MECHANISM
John W. Puryear, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Brunswick Corpora-
tion, Skokie, III.
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,118
Int. a.3 AOIK 89/01
U.S. a. 242—84.2 A 14 Qaims
4,391,419
SPINNING REEL BRAKE
Shinichi Iwama, and Takashi Egasaki, both of Higashikurume,
Japan, assignors to Daiwa Seiko Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,641
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 29, 1980, 55-122524
Int. a.3 AOIK 89/02
U.S. a. 242—84.5 A 4 Qaims
1. A drag adjusting device for a spinning reel comprising: a
cylinder rearwardly projecting from a housing of a spinning
reel and provided at its inner peripheral surface with an axial
groove; a spool slide shaft having a spool fixed to the end
^y- 'g)-'^
movement relative to said cylinder corresponding to each of
said plurality of ranges of drag braking force, one of said
cooperating members being provided with projection means
and the other of said cooperating members being provided
with a plurality of circumferentially spaced recess means,
whereby to permit said adjusting sleeve to be detached from
said handle sleeve when in one circumferential position rela-
tive to said handle sleeve and to be re-attached to said handle
sleeve when in another circumferential position relative to said
handle sleeve, and thus whereby to position said adjusting
sleeve relative to said cylinder and to said spring to provide a
different desired range of drag braking force in said another
circumferential position than in said one circumferential posi-
tion, and cooperating means carried by said cylinder and by
said handle sleeve to limit the rotation of said handle sleeve to
not more than one rotation of said handle sleeve in any one of
said ranges.
4,391,420
EMERGENCY LOCKING MEANS FOR DUAL SPOOL
SAFETY BELT RETRACTOR
Munir J. Ahad, Newhall; William Hollowell, Pacific Palisades;
Akira Tanaka, Norihridge, and Avraham Ziv, Sepulveda, all of
Calif., assignors to American Safety Equipment Corporation,
San Fernando, Calif.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,531
Int. Q.3 A62B 35/02: B65H 75/48
U.S. Q. 242—107.4 A 15 Qaims
1. An improved dual locking pawl emergency locking means
for a dual spool safety belt retractor having first and second
belt storage spools, said spools having first and second ratchet
means respectively for preventing spool rotation when en-
gaged by the locking means comprising the provision of:
an action pawl means for engaging only said first ratchet
means of said first spool;
inertia sensing means for moving said action pawl means into
engagement with said first ratchet wheel in response to
158
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
changes in vehicle inertia of more than a predetermined
amount;
reaction pawl means separate from said action pawl means
and so provided as to react in response to movement of
said action pawl means to engage said second ratchet
wheel of said second spool in response to spool locking
action of said action pawl means; and
connecting means interposed between said action pawl
means and said reaction pawl means for urging said reac-
tion pawl means into engagement with said second ratchet
wheel whereby spool locking movement of said action
pawl means urges said reaction pawl means into locking
engagement with said second ratchet wheel.
position short of said engaged position upon take-up of the
webbing with said latch member remaining disengaged
from said portion integral with said gear train and for
holding said latch member in said disengaged position,
said second guide portion being turned back from a termi-
nal end of said First guide portion and extending generally
circumferentially beyond a starting end of said first guide
portion, and a third guide p)ortion for guiding said latch
member held in said second guide portion to said engaged
position upon draw-out of the webbing, said third guide
portion extending from the terminal end of said second
guide portion to the starting end of said first guide portion.
4^91,422
WEIGHT BALANCED SPOOL CARRIER
Colin McDonald, 20241 SE. 232 St., Maple VaUey, Wash. 98038
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,257
Int. a.3 B65H 49/00, 17/46
U.S. CI. 242—129.6 14 Qaims
4,391,421
RETRACTOR FOR SEAT BELT WITH AN AELEVIATING
DEVICE
Katsumi Naitoh, and Hideo Yanagihara, both of Fujisawa, Ja-
pan, assignors to NSK- Warner K. K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,535
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980,
55/35772[U]
Int. a.3 A62B 35/00; B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242—107.7 6 Qaims
7 2Sy^'
/fC />\
>v
Ljz
lt,A retractor for a seat belt which is provided with a tension
alleviating device, comprising a webbing take-up shaft biased
in webbing take-up direction and rotatably supported on a
base, a gear train consisting of a first gear member mounted on
said take-up shaft for rotation therewith and a second gear
member meshing with said first gear member and rotatably
provided on said base, the second gear member having a
greater number of teeth than the first gear member, a disc with
a cam portion provided for rotation with said second gear
member by frictional engagement therebetween, and a latch
member movable between an engaged position in which it is
engaged with a portion integral with said gear train and pre-
vents rotation of said take-up shaft in the webbing take-up
direction and a non-engaged position in which it is disengaged
from said portion integral with said gear train, said latch mem-
ber being biased toward said engaged position,
said disc with a cam portion having a generally circumferien-
tially extending first guide portion for guiding said latch
member from said engaged position to said disengaged
position upon draw-out of webbing, a second guide por-
tion for guiding said latch member to said disengaged
1. A carrier for a plurality of spools of wire or the like,
adapted to receive and support the ends of a plurality of spool
support shafts which extend laterally across the carrier,
through center openings in the spools, and on which the spools
rotate, said carrier comprising:
a rectangular main frame having first and second ends and
comprising a pair of spaced apart elongated side members,
a cross member at said first end connecting the two side
members together, said first end presenting a first ground
contacting support;
a support stand frame at second end, connecting the two side
members together at such end and extending downwardly
from the main frame to function as a stand at such second
end, and presenting at the its lower end a second ground
contacting support;
a wheel supporting frame depending from a midportion of
the main frame and including ground contacting wheels at
its lower end;
handle means at the second end of the main frame;
journal means carried by the side members of the main
frame, for detachably securing the ends of the spool sup-
port shafts to said side members;
wherein the journal means for at least one of the spool sup-
port shafts is spaced towards the first end of the main
frame from the wheels and the journal means for at least
one other of the spool support shafts is spaced from the
wheels toward the second end of the main frame; and
wherein said carrier has a first dispense position wherein the
first ground contacting support and the wheels contact the
ground and the main frame slopes upwardly from its first
end to its second end, and a second dispense position in
which the second ground contacting support and the
wheels contact the ground and the main frame slopes
downwardly from its first end to its second end.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
159 .
4,391,423
SATELLITE RETRIEVAL SYSTEM
Edwin C. Ptuett; Kem B. Robertson, and Tomas E. Loughead, all
of Huntsville, Ala., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Administrator of the National Aeronau-
tics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C. i
I FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,745 '
I I Int. Q.3 B64G 1/64
U.S. Q. 244—161 5 Qaims
4,391,424
METHOD AND STRUCTURE FOR AIRFOIL THRUST
AND LIFT CONTROL
Otto E. Bartoe, Jr., Boulder, Colo., assignor to Ball Brothers,
Boulder, Colo.
FUed Aug. 3^, 1976, Ser. No. 718,739
Int.\a.3 B64C 21 /OS
U.S. Q. 244—207 3 Qaims
surface of each airfoil and extending span wise across the major
portion of the airfoil, a gate positioned in each outlet and
spanwise pivoted at the middle of the gate for movement to
selectively define rearward and forward oriented apertures
between the edge of the gate and the outlet, means for moving
each gate to define the apertures, and a portion of each said
gate is independently pivoted relative to the remainder of the
gate and a second means for moving each independent portion
of the gate is provided.
1. A satellite retrieval system for employment with a space-
craft comprising:
a cubical first frame adapted to be fixedly attached to a
spacecraft;
a rectangular second frame positioned around said cubical
first frame and including support means for movably
supporting said second frame on said cubical first frame;
a first pair of parallel bars movably mounted on said cubical
first frame for balanced relative movement with respect to
a center line through said cubical first frame and normal to
a plane of said second frame, being movable across said
first frame;
a second pair of parallel bars, orthogonal to said first pair of
parallel bars, movably mounted on said second frame for
balanced relative movement with respect to said center
line, and positioned within said cubical first frame;
first operating means for selectively moving bars of said first
pair of parallel bars toward and away from each other;
second operating means for selectively moving bars of said
second pair of parallel bars toward and away from each
other; and
retracting means including drive means coupled between
said cubical first frame and said second frame for selec-
tively moving said second frame along said center line and
' between extended and retracted positions.
4,391,425
RAILROAD SWITCH HEATER
Henry Keep, Jr., 88 E. Warf Rd., Madison, Conn. 06443
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 107,398, Dec. 26, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 890,637,
Mar. 20, 1978, Pat. No. 4,195,805. This application May 28,
1981, Ser. No. 267,791
Int. Q.3 EOIB 7/24
y.S. Q. 246—428 8 Claims
2. An aircraft comprising: a power source adapted to pro-
duce gases under pressure through a power source exhaust,
airfoUs, plenum chambers defined spanwise through the air-
foUs, ducting means to connect the plenum chambers to at least
a portion of the exhaust of the f>ower source, an outlet commu-
nicating with the plenum chamber defined in the upper leading
JbI^^'i i ' I ' - i ^_L.
iMi^KMK^Li- '\X
^HL
M
Wi^r-^^j.^J
5. A gauge plate unit for heating a rail positioning gauge
plate fastened onto a tie of a railroad switch, said unit compris-
ing a rigid plate member having a substantially fiat base wall to
overlie a surface of the gauge plate adjacent to a displaceable
switch rail end poriion and having depending side walls fasten-
able to opposite sides of said tie under the gauge plate, a layer
of heat insulating material fixed beneath said base wall, and a
sinuously bent length of an electrical heating cable arranged on
and held to said insulating layer so as to be held by said plate
member directly against said surface for heat conduction into
the gauge plate.
4,391,426
SUPPORT STRIP WITH U-SHAPED CROSS-SECHON OF
PLASTIC MATERIAL FOR SUPPORTING CONDUITS,
CABLES AND THE LIKE
Owe Gothberg, Alsatravagen 176, 127 36 Skarholmen, Sweden
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,260
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 8, 1981, 8100077
Int. Q.3 F16L i/00
U.S. Q. 248—49 ' 3 Qaims
3 5 8 16
e
21
104
~~?fr— ^'
r^l-
\-^
■n
X
16 .
"wx
Ir?
.:- 10
■10
5 8 15
1. A suppori strip of plastic material with substantially U-
shaped cross-section for supporting conduits, cables etc. and
comprising a substantially plane bottom (2) and side walls (3),
160
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
characterized in that th6 support strip (1,15) in its bottom
surface at each of its longitudinal outer portions is provided
with a groove (5), which extends along the entire support strip
(1,15) and along its entire length is formed with opposed grip
edges (6,7), that the free outer edge of each side wall (3,16)
along its entire length is formed with a bead (8) constituting in
cross-section almost a whole circle area, the diameter of which
is slightly smaller than the width of the groove (5) and slightly
greater than the distance between the grip edges (6,7), and that
the beads (8) of the support strip (1,15) are located at equal
distance from the bottom (2) of the support strip and in a plane
(x) extending perpendicularly to the bottom (2) and in the
central longitudinal line of the groove (5).
4,391,427
HOLDER FOR A BAR OF SOAP
Samuel U. Foresman, 672 92nd Ave., North, Naples, Fla. 33940
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 212,819
Int. a.3 F16M 11/00
U.S. a. 248—176 4 Qaims
4,391,428
LANCE-TYPE nXTURE SUPPORT AND METHOD OF
I - USE
Fred K. Grimes, Tallahassee, Fla., assignor to Lance Austin
Enterprises, Inc., Tallahassee, Fla.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 321,630, Not. 16, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,008
Int. a.3 F16M 13/00
U.S. a. 248—546 17 Qaims
1. A support for mounting a fixture between a pair of spaced
structural members comprising:
a pair of elongated lances slidably interconnected for rela-
tive longitudinal sliding movement, each of said lances
being shorter than the distance between said structural
members and together forming an adjustable length sup-
port adapted to span the space between said structural
members;
member engaging means at the distal end of each of said
lances for engaging said structural members and support-
ing said lances thereon when said lances are independently
driven longitudinally in opposite directions against said
structural members;
at least one tool-strikable striking element adapted to receive
a longitudinally directed blow from a striking tool; and
striking element coupling means on each of said lances for
coupling said striking element to each lance at a fixed
location intermediate the ends thereof to enable said
lances to be independently driven in opjwsite directions
when said striking element is coupled to each of said
lances independently of the other and is struck with said
tool, whereby said member engaging means are indepen-
dently driven into engagement with said structural mem-
bers.
4,391,429
FORM TIE
John M. Powell, P.O. Box 3200, San Jose, Calif. 95156
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,799
Int. a.3E04G; 7/0«
U.S. a. 249—84 3 Qaims
1. A holder for a bar of soap which permits rapid drying of
the entire surface of a wet bar of soap comprising a base,
four supports mounted on said base, each support having a
notch at its upper extremity, said four notches forming the
four comers of a horizontal rectangle, and a flexible end-
less cord passing around and supported by said four
notches,
said endless cord extending along the bottom and the top of
the rectangle between the bottom and the top, said endless
cord thereby forming a horizontal soap bar supporting
member of small surface area, which enables grasping of
the soap from the sides of the rectangle without interfer-
ence with the cord and which provides substantial support
at the center for the soap as it becomes smaller with use.
104 '04 KO
' 10 ^-^
1. A form tie for use in fixing a pair of form sides in a prese-
lected spaced position with respect to each other at a given
location against shear and transverse forces acting on said form
sides at said given location and for locating, supporting and
maintaining at least one reinforcing rod at a preselected loca-
tion intermediate said form sides, said form tie comprising:
a unitary elongate member of a generally Z-shaped configu-
ration including a pair of generally parallel elongate mem-
bers having first and second end portions, the first end
portion of each parallel, elongate member being posi-
tioned in an opposed, spaced apart relationship with re-
spect to the second end portion of the other parallel elon-
gate member and having a bight formed therein terminat-
ing in a rectilinear brace extending substantially normal to
said parallel, elongate members, and
means for locating, supporting and maintaining at least one
reinforcing rod at said preselected location intermediate
said form sides comprising a second unitary elongate
member formed integrally with said rectilinear tab of said
bight of one of said second end portions and lying substan-
tially in the plane of said generally planar structure, said
second unitary elongate member having a first portion
extending obliquely from said rectilinear tab to said prese-
lected location and terminating in an L-shaped member
adapted to receive said at least one reinforcing rod and
maintain said rod at said preselected location.
July 5, 19M
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
161
I 4,391,430
" HYDRAULIC SERVO CONTROL SPOOL VALVE
Donald M. Miller, Sunnyside, Wash., assignor to Battelle Me-
morial Institute, Richland, Wash.
I Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,146
I I Int Q.3 F16K 47/04. 3/32
U.S. Q. 251—205 10 Qaims
1. A valve for extremely precise variable control of high
pressure, low volume fluid flow of hydraulic liquids, compris-
ing:
a solid sleeve having an inner surface surrounding an open
cavity;
a long narrow slot extending through the sleeve from an
entrance defined by a pair of elongated straight sharp
comer edges formed at the intersection between the
sleeve inner surface and the slot;
said comer edges of the slot being progressively spaced
apart from one another along its length in a linear fashion
from a first closed slot end at which they intersect one
another to a second open slot end;
said slot being formed by a pair of elongated opposed walls
extending through the sleeve and diverging radially out-
wardly from its inner surface;
a spool within the open cavity of the sleeve, said spool
having an outer surface complementary in size and shape
to the inner surface of the sleeve;
a fluid path on the spool, the fluid path extending from an
inlet along the spool to an end wall forming a sharp corner
edge at its intersection with the spool outer surface, said
end wall being transversely positioned across the entrance
of said slot;
and means slidably mounting said spool and sleeve relative
to one another for adjustably locating the position of said
end wall along the entrance of said slot.
connection member having a threaded member protruding
from an opening in one of the connectable pieces, said device
comprising a pressure element positionable so as to thrust
against said one of the connectable pieces, a tension element
positionable on the threaded member and having a wedge
groove, a power wedge accommodated in the wedge groove
and acting against the pressure element thereby producing
tension in the threaded member, a screw drive for the power
wedge disposed on the presure element, the pressure element
being in the form of a hollow body provided with through
grooves arranged coaxially with the wedge groove and ac-
commodating the tension element, the tension element carry-
ing an axially rotatable connecting piece having an axial
threaded bore for fixing the connecting piece on the threaded
member, the pressure element being provided in an area ad-
joining the connecting piece with apertures, walls of the
through grooves arranged coaxially with the wedge groove of
the tension element defining a guide receiving a straight work-
ing surface of the power wedge.
4,391,431
DEVICE FOR TIGHTENING COARSE THREAD
CONNECTIONS
July S. Maximov, ulitsa Lesnaya, 52, kv. 8, Moskovskaya oblast,
poselok Pravda, U.S.S.R.
PCT No. PCT/SU79/00102, § 371 Date Feb. 23, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00075, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 22, 1981
PCT Filed Oct. 29, 1979, Ser. No. 243,901
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Jun. 27, 1979, 2785072
Int. Q.' E21B 19/00
U.S. Q. 254—29 A 16 Qaims
1. A device for tightening a connection member extending
between and interconnec ;ing two connectable pieces, said
4,391,432
WINCH OPERATING HANDLE
Jean F. Baud, 1295, Tannay Vaud, Switzerland
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,521
Int. Q.^ B66D 1/14
U.S. Q. 254—365
8 Qaims
-ri-
1. An improved winch of the type which is useful in tighten-
ing and adjusting ropes, rigging, lines and sheets comprising; a
winch mounting post having a hollow interior and a through
aperture from end to end, means for mounting said post to a
fixed support, a winch member having a through passageway
and being rotatably mounted on the post with the post extend-
ing into the passageway of the winch member, a portion of the
winch member extending beyond the post and having the
surfaces thereof forming part of the passageway with a non-
circular cross-section, the outer surface of the winch member
overlying the non-circular cross-section portion and the post
extending within the passageway, the outer surface of the
winch forming the operable bearing surface for adjusting of
the ropes, riggings, lines and sheets, a crank member having a
shaft portion which has a non-circular cross-section comple-
mentary with the shape of the non-circular portion of the
passageway and interengageable therewith so that meshing of
the shaft with the surfaces forming the non-circular portion of
the passageway and rotation of the shaft causes rotation of the
winch member, a handle member hinged to the upper end of
the shaft portion so as to pivot between an operating position
at right angles with the shaft portion to facilitate rotation of the
shaft portion and winch member and an inoperative stowable
162
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
position projecting from the end of the shaft portion in align-
ment with the axis thereof, said handle portion having a size
and configuration so as to fit through the passageway in the
winch member so that when it is in an inoperative stowed
position the crank member including the handle portion ex-
tends downwardly through the passageway in the winch mem-
ber, the through aperture in the post, and a communicating
opening in the support to its stowed position with only a mini-
mum projection thereabove.
431.435
SUSPENSION DEVICE
Anh T. Pham, Elancourt, France, assignor to Chrysler France,
France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 53,305, Jun. 29, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,295
Oaims priority, application France, Jul. 3, 1978, 78 19797;
May 23, 1979, 79 13128
Int. a.3 F16F 1/54. 13/00
U.S. a. 267—140.1 2 Claims
I 4,391,433
EXTENDABLE TORCH GUIDE
Robert L. Doan, 10362 Vic PL, Garden Grove, Calif. 92642
FUed Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 386,954
Int. a? B23K 7/70
U.S. CW 266—77 17 Qaims
1. A guide for a torch for use in cutting metal plate compris-
ing:
a base member, said base member having a longtudinal
channel therein and magnetic means on one side thereof
for removably attaching said base member to a metal
plate;
an elongate cutting rail at least partially mounted within said
channel in said base member for slidable movement rela-
tive thereto, the ends of said cutting rail being extendable
beyond the ends of said base member;
means for locking said cutting rail relative to said base mem-
I ber to prevent relative movement therebetween; and
an end support member connectable to said ends of said
cutting rail, said end support member having magnetic
means on oiy^side thereof for removable attachment
thereof to sajfd metal plate.
4,391,434
CERAMIC INSERT
Micheal D. LaBate, 115 Hazen Ave., Ellwood City, Pa. 16117
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 123,369, Feb. 21, 1980, Pat. No.
4,262,885. This application Apr, 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,319
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 21,
1 1998, has been disclaimed.
I Int. aj C21B 7/14
U.S. a. 266—1% 5 Qaims
1. The combination of a preformed hot metal runner formed
of refractory material and at least one U-shaped ceramic insert
embedded therein with the ends of the U-shaped insert flush
with the upj)er surfaces of said hot metal runner, a threaded
socket formed in each end of said U-shaped ceramic insert
airanged to receive a threaded fastener therein.
1. In a device for mounting a carried element on a carrying
element in an automotive vehicle or the like and comprising a
first frame member affixed to said carried element, a second
frame member affixed to said carrying element, at least one
resiliently deformable support arranged between said members
so as to define a fluid-tight chamber with said frame members,
said chamber containing an incompressible fluid and being
divided into two portions by a separating partition formed of a
resilient portion affixed to said first frame member and carry-
ing a block member immersed in said fluid which is provided
with at least one orifice through which the fluid is adapted to
pass from one chamber portion of the other chamber portion,
the improvements comprising: said block member carried by
said resilient portion has a certain substantial inertial mass such
that said block member constitutes means for causing said
resilient portion to oscillate substantially following the dis-
placement of said carried element when said carried element
vibrates at a frequency less than a particular frequency result-
ing in a first normal fluid flow pattern through said orifice
between said chamber portions relative to the displacement of
said carried element, and for causing said resilient portion to
oscillate differently from the displacement of said carried
element when said carried element vibrates at a frequency
greater than said particular frequency resulting in a second
fluid flow pattern through said orifice between said chamber
portions relative to the displacement of said carried element
which is substantially inverted relative to said first normal fluid
flow pattern, and wherein a deformable cover is directly se-
cured on said block member for movement therewith to seal-
ingly close the fluid tight chamber and isolate the fluid from
the surrounding medium, and wherein said block member
forms a part of a block assembly which includes a tubular
member which is affixed to said resilient partition so as to
extend centrally therethrough so that end regions thereof
project beyond the surface of said resilient portion, one end
region of said tubular member having said orifice provided
therein, said block member being affixed to an upper end re-
gion of said tubular member, whereby said block member is
supported by said resilient portion through said tubular mem-
ber.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
163
4,391,436 base, each of said clamp members including a body having
RESILIENT MOUNTING portions underlying said flanges, each of said clamp members
Byron L. Ftshbaugh, St. Marys, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear having a post fixed to said body and extending upwardly be-
Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
I Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,399
Int. C1.3 F16F 3/08
U.S. CI. 267—141.1
8 Oaims
tween said flanges of said base, spring means connecting said
clamp members and urging said posts toward abutting relation-
ship, an upstanding support plate means mounted on said base
adjacent to one end, lever means rotatably mounted on said
support plate means, a first link connecting one of said clamp
1. A resilient mounting comprising:
(a) a spacer including an elongated cylindrical portion;
(b) an annular first insulator of elastomeric material includ-
ing an upper and lower portion and having a central bore
extending axially through said upper and lower portions,
the upper portion including a generally cylindrical inner
wall and a generally planar lower end wall, the lower
portion including generally cylindrical outer and inner
walls, the overall diameter of the upper portion being
greater than that of the lower portion, the diameter of the
bore in the upper portion being greater than the diameter
of the bore in the lower portion;
(c) a metallic annulus including a tubular portion joined at
one end to the inner annular edge of a perpendicularly
extending flat disc having a central bore therethrough, the
flat disc of said metallic annulus being bonded to the lower
end wall of the upper portion of the first insulator, the
tubular portion of the metallic annulus being bonded to
the outer cylindrical wall of the lower portion;
(d) a second insulator of elastomeric material of a generally
cylindrical configuration having a central bore extending
axially therethrough, said bore diameter corresponding
approximately to the outside diameter of the tubular por-
tion of the metallic annulus;
(e) a flat disc having a central bore therethrough coaxially
aligned with and bonded to one axial end face of said
second rubber insulator;
(0 the cylindrical portion of said spacer having an outside
diameter greater than the bore diameter of the lower
portion of the first insulator, said cylindrical portion
adapted to be forcibly fitted into the bore of said first
insulator thereby radially compressing the lower portion
of said first insulator between the cylindrical portion of
said spacer and the tubular portion of said metallic annulus
at least 10 percent;
(g) said first and second insulators adapted to be drawn
axially toward one another thereby placing the elasto-
meric material of said first and second insulators in axial
compression during installation of the mount, the amount
of axial compression being limited to a predetermined
amount by the respective overall axial dimensions of the
spacer and undeformed insulators.
4,391,437
DOOR HOLDING CLAMP
William T. Collins, Rte. 4, Box 340, Lillington, N.C. 27546
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,231
Int. a.3 B25B 1/00
U.S. a. 269—254 CS 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for clamping a workpiece in a position so that
work may be performed thereon comprising an elongated
hollow base having a pair of opposed flanges at the top, said
flanges extending inwardly toward each other and defining an
opening, a pair of clamp members slidably mounted on said
members to one side of said lever means, a second link connect-
ing the other clamp member to the other side of said lever
means, and means for rotating said lever means, whereby
movement of said lever means in one direction causes said first
and second link means to move said clamp members in oppo-
site directions against the tension of said spring means and
when said movement of said lever means is relieved said spring
means moves said clamp members toward each other.
4,391,438
PATIENT SUPPORT ATTACHMENT FOR SURGICAL
TABLES
Charles A. Heffington, Jr., 123 E. College St., Murfreesboro,
Tenn. 37130
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,210
Int. a.^ A61G 13/00
U.S. a. 269—328 5 Claims
1. A patient support attachment for an operating table to
facilitate surgery of the spine, the operating table having an
end support portion for the arms, head and shoulders of a
patient in a prone position and having an adjustable generally
level support platform for the legs of a prone patient in a
kneeling position with the support platform and legs spaced
from the adjacent end of the operating table at an elevation
below the level of said end support portion of the table, and the
end support portion of the operating table carrying a pair of
opposite side adjustable swivel clamps, said attachment com-
prising a pair of spaced substantially parallel longitudinally
extending elongated support rods adjustably held in said oppo-
site side swivel clamps of the table and extending for a substan-
tial distance beyond the end support portion of the table in
cantilevered relationship to the table, said support rods being
longitudinally adjustable forwardly and rearwardly in said side
swivel clamps of the table and being swingable upwardly and
downwardly vertically around the transverse axes of the side
swivel clamps and being lockable by such clamps in selected
adjusted positions, a support panel for the buttocks and thighs
of a patient disposed between said support rods in spaced
relationship to said end support portion of the table and above
the level of said support platform for the legs, and another pair
1^
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
of opposite side adjustable swivel clamps carried by said sup-
port panel for the buttocks and thighs and being adjustably
engaged with and bodily supported by said support rods and
also being adjustably engaged with said support panel,
whereby the support panel for the buttocks and thighs may be
moved forwardly or rearwardly along the longitudinal axes of
the support rods, may be rotated in either direction around the
transverse axes of the last-named pair of swivel clamps and
may be shifted in opposite directions on a linear path across the
rotational axis of said support panel as defmed by the last-
named swivel clamps and locked securely in a selected ad-
justed position on the support rods by the last-named swivel
clamps, the body of a patient utilizing the attachment being
substantially unsupported between the end support portion of
the table and the support panel for the buttocks and thighs.
including an individually driven variable air suction
source (19); and
means coupled to said sensor (24) for controlling said vari-
able air suction source (19) responsive to the output signal
from said sensor (24) such that said air suction source
produces increased suction if said sensor output signal
corresponds to no sheet of material picked up or de-
creased suction if said sensor output signal corresponds to
more than one sheet of material picked up.
4,391,439
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CALIBRATION AND 4 391 440
ADJUSTMENT OF INSERTER FOR SHEETED PORTABLE EXERaSING APPARATUS
I MATERIAL Isaac Berger, c/o Ike Berger Enter., 263 W. 38th St., New York,
Lars G. Edstrom, Stockholm, Sweden, assignor to Malmohus J^.Y. 10018
Invest AB, Malmo, Sweden Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,955
Division of Ser. No. 9,953, Feb. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,349,189. This int. Q.^ A63B 21/06
application Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,862 us, a. 272—118
Claims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 7, 1978, 7801396;
Feb. 7, 1978, 7801397; Feb. 7, 1978, 7801398; Feb. 7, 1978, /^
7801399; Jun. 15, 1978, 7806910 "j/
Int. a.3 B65H 7/14. 7/12 ^
U.S. a. 271—90
12 Claims
7 Oaims
1. A portable, body-anchored exercising apparatus, compris-
ing:
1. Method for calibration and adjustment of an inserter
working with air suction for picking up a sheeted or folded
material one at a time from a bundle for insertion in a machine,
comprising:
sensing how many sheets of said material have been picked
up by means of a sensor which transmits different output
signals which correspond respectively to no sheet of the
material picked up, one sheet of material picked up or
several sheets of material picked up;
controlling the suction of the inserier such that the suction is
increased a specific amount if the output signal issued by
the sensor corresponds to no sheet of material picked up,
or the suction is descreased a specific amount if the output
signal issued by the sensor corresponds to more than one
sheet of material picked up; and
adjusting the suction in the inserter after each pick up of the
material until the output signal issued by the sensor corre-
sponds to one sheet of material in the machine.
2. Apparatus for calibration and adjustment of an inserter
working with air suction for picking up a sheeted or folded
material one at a time from a bundle for insertion in a machine,
comprising:
an inserter (5) including means for producing air suction to
pick up a sheeted or folded material one at a time from a
bundle for insertion of the picked up sheeted or folded
materia] into a machine;
a sensor (24) positioned adjacent said inserter (5) and ar-
ranged for transmitting different output signals which
correspond respectively to no sheet of material picked up,
one sheet of material picked up or several sheets of mate-
rial picked up;
said means for producing air suction in said inserter (5)
(a) an erect vertically elongated rigid frame;
(b) a pair of separate elongated, flexible ropes mounted on
and being axially movable along their axes of elongation in
relation to the frame at opposite sides thereof, said ropes
being capable of being pulled by a user for exercise pur-
poses, and said ropes generating a substantially upward
force on the frame when so pulled, each rope of said pair
of ropes having a grasp end which when idle is situated at
approximately mid-body level of an adult user;
(c) separate means for resisting the pulling forces on the
ropes generated by the user;
(a) a pair of separate pulley systems, each pulley system
being operatively interposed between a different resis-
tance means and an associated rope, each pulley system
including at least two vertically spaced pulleys about
which the associated rope is trained, the upper pulley
being rotatably supported by the rigid frame and the
lower pulley being rotatably supported by the associated
rope, the lower pulley supporting the associated resistance
means, whereby the apparatus is provided with a mechan-
ical advantage greater than 1 to 1 in favor of the grasp
ends, the mechanical advantage allowing the user to move
the grasp ends through a distance greater than the distance
through which the associated resistance means moves; and
(e) a base connected to the frame and on which the user rests
his body weight while exercising on the same, said base
exerting a force opposing the force of the pulled ropes,
when the user's weight is applied to said base, said base
being operative for permitting the user to hold the appara-
tus down using his own body weight in any desired posi-
tion while exercising.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
165
4,391,441
EXERCISE APPARATUS I
Luther G. Simjian, 1750 S. Ocean La., Fort Lauderdale, Fla.
33316
Division of Ser. No. 196,849, Oct. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,313,603.
This application Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,173
Int. C\? A63B 23/02
U.S. a. 272—126
5 Claims
powered plungers provided in said guide tubes for propel-
ling said ball through said guide tubes;
selector means for randomly activating either of said pow-
ered plungers; and
means for randomly adjusting the propelling force of said
powered plungers, each of said guide tubes communicat-
ing with said track by way of a respective bore formed in
said rim and blocked by a pivotable arcuate flap biased
into a closed position and displaceable into an open posi-
tion by said ball propelled through said bore.
4,391,442
GAMING APPARATUS
David Levy, 360 W. 55th St., New York, N.Y. 10019
Division of Ser. No. 132,085, Mar. 20, 1980, Pat. No. 4,337,945.
This application Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 345,024
Int. a.3 A63E 5/04
U.S. a. 273—142 E 3 Claims
lit
A
i_
ON
VAlVf
12<t
/2S
ior7\ I ««<ooHn r
RAWOOn
swircMtNfr
VALVC
ftr
1. A gaming apparatus comprising:
a roulette wheel having a circular rim, a downwardly con-
verging frustoconical bowl contained within said rim and
joined thereto below the upper surface of said rim to form
therewith a track for a roulette ball, a rotatable wheel
head centered within said bowl at the bottom thereof and
formed with a plurality of numbered compartments for
receiving said roulette ball;
an automatic roulette ball spinner having a pair of guide
tubes directed oppositely to one another and positioned
along said rim for directing said ball tangentially onto said
track, said guide tubes having a roulette ball magazine
communicating therewith and means including respective
' 4,391,443
EXERCISE APPARATUS
Julian B. Beecroft, Box 57, Port Hope, OnUrio, Canada (L!A
3V9)
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Set. No. 277,123
Int. a.3 A63B 23/02
U.S. a. 272-145 21 Oaims
1. An exercise apparatus comprising:
a stationary support;
a platform mounted upon said support for oscillating rotat-
ing motion about a centrally disposed axis and adapted to
support a person in standing position;
a pair of upstanding posts mounted forward of the perimeter
of said platform and pivotally supported for enabling the
upper end of each post to undergo oscillating motion in a
direction generally toward and away from said platform,
and
means coupling said platform to said posts for causing the
upper ends of said posts to move in opposition relative to
each other toward and away from said platform respon-
sive to oscillating motion imparted to said platform.
-1'i
3. An exercise apparatus for use by a human being, which
comprises:
a ring shaped cushion member, having an axis, dimensioned
and configured to support one side of a human torso in
generally axially aligned relationship with said cushion
member and in shaped relationship to any other side of the
associated human torso;
means for supporting said cushion member in a generally
horizontal position for free rotational movement about the
axis thereof, said cushion member being adapted to be
^ moved rotationally only in lesponse to forces imposed by
the user; and
means for receiving and securing the feet of a user disposed
in axially spaced relationship from said ring shaped cush-
ion member.
4,391,444
ELECTRONIC GAME PROVIDING FORMATION
CHANGES AND METHOD
Eric Bromley, West Simsbury, Conn., assignor to Coleco Indus-
tries, Inc., Hartford, Conn.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,808
Int. CI.' A63F 9/00
U.S. a. 273—94 32 Claims
27. In a method of simulating a sports-action team game, the
steps of:
a. providing a housing;
b. providing a display panel on the upper surface of said
housing that provides a visual simulation of a playing field
of the type on which a ball-type game is played and is
adapted to display symbols in and between side and end
boundary positions on said field in response to electrical
signals applied thereto;
c. providing operational-circuit means in said housing opera-
tively connected to said display panel for generation and
transmission of electrical signals to said display panel to
produce offensive and defensive play symbols on said
simulated playing field, one of said offensive play symbols
166
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
at a time simulating the position of the ball, said operation-
al-circuit means step including:
(i) moving a multiplicity of said offensive play symbols,
including said ball-position symbol, along said playing
field, said multiplicity of offensive play symbols includ-
ing a concurrently movable plurality thereof;
(ii) moving a multiplicity of said defensive play symbols
along said playing field toward said ball-position sym-
bol, movement of said offensive and defensive play
symbols providing play action simulating the action of
said sports-action team game;
(iii) detecting the coincidence of said ball-position symbol
with at least a selected one of said defensive play sym-
bols during at least a portion of a play and terminating
play action upon such detection; and
(iv) monitoring play action to record information con-
cerning the status of said simulated game and for pro-
ducing signals indicative of said status information, said
signals conveying the recorded information to an opera-
tor of said game;
d. providing a control board on said housing that includes a
multiplicity of manually operable control elements con-
necting said control board to said operational-circuit
means for transmission of signals thereto through opera-
tion of said control elements, effecting movement of said
ball-position symbol by said offensive-play-symbol-move-
ment means in response to operation of said control ele-
ments by an operator to effect movement of said ball-posi-
tion symbol through said defensive play symbols to simu-
late advance of the ball, terminating play action by said
detecting means upon the occurrence of said game termi-
nating coincidence;
e. monitoring the position of at least one of said concurrently
movable plurality of offensive play symbols and assigning
prohibited moves thereto based on its monitored position
on said playing field;
f. operating at least one of said manually operable control
elements to transmit signals to said operational-circuit
means to direct the same move to each of said concur-
rently movable plurality of offensive play symbols, includ-
ing a prohibited move to at least one of said concurrently
movable plurality;
g. effecting all of the directed moves of said concurrently
movable plurality except said at least one prohibited
move, thereby changing the formation defined by the
relative positions of said concurrently movable plurality;
h. operating at least one of said manually operable control
elements to transmit signals to said operational-circuit
means to direct a move of said concurrently movable
plurality of offensive play symbols that is not prohibited to
any of them; and
i. effecting said last-mentioned directed moves of all of said
concurrently movable plurality, thereby maintaining the
new formation resulting from said first-mentioned effected
moves.
30. In an electronic apparatus for simulating a sports-action
team game, the combination comprising:
a. a housing;
b. a display panel on the upper surface of said housing pro-
viding a visual simulation of a playing field of the type on
which a game between opposing teams is played, said
display panel having a multiplicity of discrete visual-
image-producing devices arranged along x- and y-axes of
said simulated playing field and adapted to display sym-
bols representing players of opposing teams at a multiplic-
ity of discrete positions along said x- and y-axes on said
playing field in response to electrical signals transmitted
thereto;
c. operational-circuit means in said housing operatively
connected to said display panel for generation and trans-
mission of electrical signals thereto to produce symbols of
said opposing teams on said simulated playing field, at
least one of said teams including at least first and second
symbols;
(i) means for moving a multiplicity of said symbols of said
one team along said playing field, said multiplicity of
symbols including said first and second symbols;
(ii) means for moving a multiplicity of the symbols of the
other team along said playing field toward one of said
symbols of said first team, movement of said symbols of
said two teams providing play action simulating the
action of said sports-action team game; and
(iii) means for monitoring the position of at least one of
said symbols of said first team, means assigning prohib-
ited moves thereto based on its monitored position on
said playing field, and means for preventing said prohib-
ited moves of said at least one symbol by said first team
symbol movement means;
d. a control board on said housing including a multiplicity of
manually operable control elements, said control board
being electrically connected to said operational-circuit
means for transmission of signals to said operational-cir-
cuit means through operation of said control elements,
said control elements including first and second elongated
levers, respectively, associated with said first and second
symbols, said levers being pivotally mounted in said con-
trol board for pivoting from rest positions in which the
longitudinal axes of said levers extend generally perpen-
dicularly to the upper surface of said housing, said pivot-
ing being along two pivotal axes extending generally
perpendicularly to the longitudinal axes of said levers, said
control board further including at least three switches
associated with each of said levers along said pivotal axes
thereof and electrically connected to said operational-cir-
cuit means for transmission of electrical signals thereto to
direct movements of said symbol associated with each of
said levers, pivoting of each of said levers along one piv-
otal axis in first and second directions operating the associ-
ated first and second switches to direct motion of the
associated symbol in first and second directions, respec-
tively, along one axis of said simulated playing field, pivot-
ing of each of said levers in a first direction along the
second pivotal axis thereof operating the associated third
switch to direct motion of the associated symbol in a first
direction along the other of said axes of said playing field,
each actuation of a switch causing only one step of motion
of the associated symbol, each lever and its associated
switches being cooperatively configured and dimensioned
and each lever being pivotally mounted to permit opera-
tion of only one switch at a time by each lever.
4^91,445
LOGICAL SKILL TOY
Gabor Vizeiyi, Pakozdi ter 3., Budapest 1148, Hungary
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,528
Claims priority, application Hungary, Apr. 3, 1980, 802/80
Int. a.3 A63F 9/08
U.S. a. 273—158 4 Claims
1. A logical toy comprising a series of hooks with legs fixed
about the perimeter of a disc, the legs of each of said hooks
being fixed and connected to said disc so that the annular
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
167
closed part of each hook except the first in the series encloses ing head to the ball dispensing position when said tee striking
the legs of the preceding hook adjacent to it to thereby form a portion engages said tee.
I.
4,391,446
GOLF BALL DISPENSER
John Eberle, 2027 - 28th Ave. SW., Calgary, Alberta, Canada
(T2T 1K4)
Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,116
Claims priority, application Canada, Sep. 25, 1979, 336457
Int. a.3 A63B 57/00
U.S. a. 273—201 28 Qaims
1. A golf ball dispenser for use with a fixed tee comprising in
combination a base, a feed tube component mounted upon said
base for pivotal movement in a horizontal plane from a ball
dispensing position adjacent the tee, to a position clear of the
tee and vipe versa, said feed tube component sloping down-
wardly towards the outboard end thereof to feed golf balls by
gravity towards said outboard end, a dispensing head pivotally
secured to said outboard end and being movable from a ball
detent pxisition to a ball dispensing position and vice versa,
means normally urging said head to said ball detent position,
said outboard end of said feed tube component being apertured
in the base thereof to provide a ball dispensing aperture, said
dispensing head being pivotally supported for fore and aft
tipping movement, within said feed tube component adjacent
said ball dispensing aperture, said head including a front wall
and rear wall, said rear wall acting as a ball detent when in said
ball detent position and preventing a ball from passing from
said feed tube component to said aperture, said detent releasing
the front ball in said feed tube component to a position in said
aperture, when said head is moved to said ball dispensing
position, said front wall holding said ball in said ball dispensing
position, said detent engaging between said front ball and the
ball immediately therebehind and thereby releasing said front
ball through said aperture, when said head is moved back to
the ball detent position, means to activate said head including
means spanning said aperture and engaging the associated tee
when said dispenser is moved to the dispensing position, said
last mentioned means including a tee striking portion pivoted
for movement to said front wall of the feed tube and extending
into said aperture, and a dispensing head engaging portion
connected to said tee striking portion, for moving said dispens-
431,447
ELECTRONIC CHESS GAME
Raymond Dudley, 833 S. Cedros, Apt. 24, Solana Beach, Calif.
92075
Filed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,781
Int. a.3 G09B 19/22
U.S. a. 273—238 25 Qaims
trap with said hook; and a closed cord arranged around th^
legs of one of said hooks.
1. An electronic game comprising a playing board defining a
plurality of playing positions, a plurality of playing pieces, at
least some of which are of different types, each piece being
movable between playing positions in accordance with a pre-
determined pattern dependent upon its type, said predeter-
mined pattern being influenced by the locations of other ones
of said pieces, means for encoding each piece according to its
type, means at each position responsive to the encoding means
for detecting the presence and type of a piece located at that
position, and means responsive to the detecting means for
illuminating each position on the board to which such piece
can be moved, the illuminating means being responsive to the
locations of other ones of said pieces.
4,391,448
METHOD OF FLAYING A TWO-PLAYER BOARD GAME
Conrad Hermann, 3rd, 1551 East Walnut La., Philadelphia, Pa.
19138
Division of Ser. No. 967,223, Dec. 17, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,431
Int. CI.3 A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273—243 4 Claims
^rdj
4,4 S-J-,..-^. .,,,.. ^♦-,-._
i . i +.»...-., .4 4 i-l 4--
-^^-t-rti 1 M I 1^^- •
- ♦ T H-| t
ill
1. A method of playing a game for two players which com-
prises the steps of
(A) providing three sets of playing pieces including means
for distinguishing each of these sets from the other two
and providing an equal number of pieces in each set;
(B) providing between the players a rectangular board
marked off into a plurality of equal-sized squares, wherein
(Bi) the two rows of squares half-way between the play-
ers, identifiable as the MID-ZONE have placed
168
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
thereon, beforecommenceinent of play, all the pieces of
one of the three sets, identifiable as the initial or
BOARD set of pieces, one BOARD piece being on
each square of said MID-ZONE, the said equal number
of pieces in each set thus being equal to the number of
squares in the MID-ZONE, and
(B2) in the middle of each player's end of said board there
is a relatively small rectangle of squares, including
several squares in the first line of said player's side,
marked off as a respective HOME BASE accessible
only to said repective player, the remaining squares on
the entire board being accessible at all times to any
playing piece of either player, once said piece has been
placed on the board by means hereinafter set forth;
(C) providing chance means manipulatable by said players
for placing and moving said pieces on said board, said
chance means comprising a device for indicating at ran-
dom a number selected from zero, 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5;
(D) each of said players being provided with one of the
remaining sets of playing pieces, identifiable as his OWN
playing pieces in contrast to the BOARD pieces which
are never possessible by either player;
(E) selecting one of said two players as the one to commence
play, this play being identifiable as the FIRST PLAYER;
(F) manipulating said chance means to determine the num-
I ber of spaces which the FIRST PLAYER may move any
I of the BOARD pieces toward his own HOME Base;
(G) manipulating said chance means to determine the num-
ber of spaces which the SECOND PLAYER may move
I any of the BOARD pieces to his own HOME BASE;
(H) manipulating said chance means to determine the succes-
sive alternate moves of the players who may use the indi-
cium number to (i) move the same or other BOARD
pieces, removing from the Board any BOARD piece
which reaches his HOME BASE and replacing it with
one of his OWN pieces, or (ii) move one of his thus-placed
OWN pieces from his HOME BASE on to the open
board, or (iii) move either a BOARD piece or one of his
OWN pieces in such a manner as to have said two pieces
occupy an identical otherwise unoccupied square, replac-
ing the BOARD piece by another of his off-the-board
OWN pieces (leaving two identical pieces temporarily on
the same square) and removing the BOARD piece from
the board, or (iv) move one of the player's OWN pieces to
the same space already occupied by an opponent's OWN
piece or pieces, removing said opponent's piece or pieces
from the board and placing anywhere in the MID-ZONE
a BOARD piece (From off the board) for each opponent's
thus removed OWN piece, — all of such possible moves
being such that the total number of pieces on the board
remains constant;
(I) and repeating the alternating steps set forth in (H) until
one of the players has the complete set of his OWN pieces
on the board.
4,391,449
,449
(Ta
BOARD GAME
Robert L. Johnson, 3655 Pruneridge, Apt. 261, Santa Clara,
Calif. 95051
I Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,626
' Int. a.3 A63F 3/02
U.S. a. 273—260 11 Qaims
\. A board game comprising:
a playing surface provided with indicia including:
(A) a first plurality of spaced apart parallel lines;
(B) a second plurality of spaced apart parallel lines sub-
stantially perpendicular to said first plurality of lines,
whereby said playing surface is divided into a number
of four-sided spaces;
(C) a plurality of positioning marks located, one each,
within each of said spaces;
(D) a plurality of directive lines located, eight each,
within each of said spaces such that, within each space,
four of said directive lines extend from said positioning
mark to the comers of said space, and the other four of
said directive lines extend from said positioning mark to
the four sides of said space;
(E) directive Une distinguishing means wherein a first
group of said plurality of directive lines have a first
visual appearance, and a second group of said plurality
of directive lines have a second visual appearance;
(F) a plurality of first player pieces, each of which has a
first side having a first distinguishing characteristic, and
a second side having a second distinguishing character-
istic; and
(G) a plurality of second player pieces, each of which has
a first side having a first distinguishing characteristic,
and a second side having a second distinguishing char-
acteristic.
4,391,450
SHAFT SEAL RESISTANT TO ELECTROKINETIC
CORROSION
Theodore R. Beck, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Electrochemical
Technology Corp., Seattle, Wash.
Filed Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,709
Int. Q\? F16J 15/16, 15/34
U.S. a. 277—1 15 Qaims
1. In combination with a shaft, a housing, and means mount-
ing said shaft for rotation within said housing, a shaft seal for
preventing the leakage of liquid between said shaft and said
housing, said shaft seal comprising:
a stationary first annular seal element associated with said shaft
housing;
said shaft extending through said first annular seal element;
a second annular seal element;
means mounting said second seal element on said shaft for
rotation therewith;
each of said seal elements having a respective mating surface;
it^eans for urging said mating surfaces together to provide
rubbing engagement between said mating surfaces during
said rotation;
one of said two seal elements being composed of a material
having a relatively high hardness;
the other of said two seal elements being composed of a mate-
rial having a relatively low hardness which allows the
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
169
harder of the two seal elements to conform the softer seal
element to the harder one;
both of said seal elements being composed of a material which
will not support an electrochemical reaction;
said mounting means for said seal elements and said respective
compositions of the seal elements comprising means for
conforming the mating surface of said other seal element to
the mating surface of said one seal element, on a macro scale,
when said mating surfaces undergo said rubbing engage-
ment, during said rotation;
and means, including the respective composition of each seal
element, for substantially eliminating electrokinetic corro-
sion at said mating surface thereof when the shaft seal is used
to prevent leakage of an electrolytic liquid.
4,391,451
EXPANSIBLE CHUCK ASSEMBLY
Arthur D. Secor, and Jerome G, Secor, both of Toledo, Ohio,
assignors to Great Lakes Industries, Inc., Toledo, Ohio
1 1 Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,109
' ' Int. a.3 B23B 31/40. 5/34. 31/10
MS. a. 279-2 A 14 Qaims
m*ff*ff!rrfv^^m
1. A rotatable expansible chuck assembly for use in web
winding and unwinding operations which comprises a body, a
hermetically sealed chamber in said body, a piston in said
chamber dividing said chamber into two hermetically sealed
spaces, fluid pressure check and bleed valves mounted on said
body connected to said chamber through said body on oppo-
site sides of said piston into respective said spaces, a piston rod
connected to said piston extending therefrom through an aper-
ture in said body, a plurality of inclined plane wedge surfaces
provided on said piston rod where it extends out of said aper-
ture, a plurality of gripping means, each said gripping means
having an inner surface engaging a corresponding said wedge
surface and an outer surface to receive a core for a roll of web
material to be wound or unwound, and a slidable connection
between each said gripping means and said body whereby each
said gripping means is movable generally radially relative to
said body in response to movement of said piston rod, resilient
means retaining said gripping means in said body which is so
arranged and constructed that said gripping means are readily
removable from said body and replaceable by other gripping
means, said valves, said chamber, said piston and said piston
rod being so constructed and arranged that when the outer
surface of said gripping means is engaging a core of material
being wound or unwound under a predetermined tension the
fluid under pressure in said space on the side of said piston
urging said gripping means into engagement with said core is
isolated from any other fluid pressure sources, the fluid in the
other said space is in communication via its bleed valve with
the atmosphere and said engagement due to the net pressure
against said piston is continually sufficient to maintain said
tension irrespective of minor distortions due to movement or
stretching of said core.
4,391,452
CONTROL QRCUIT FOR VEHICLE LEVELING SYSTEM
Taiji Ohmori, Kawagoe, Japan, assignor to Honda Giken Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,777
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 17, 1980, 55-3965
Int. Q.3 B60G 11/26
U.S. Q. 280-6.1 8 Qaims
DETECTIHG
DEVICE
'Sd
iMPLIFIER
?SSl=l>Q^
monostable"' '*
MULTlvieR4T0R
1. A control circuit for a vehicle leveling system to restore a
vehicle height to be within a reference vehicle height range by
operating either a first drive means to raise a vehicle body or
a second drive means to lower the vehicle body when said
vehicle height is out of said reference vehicle height range,
comprising:
a first detecting means for generating a directional signal of
vehicle height change in the form of either a HIGH signal
or a LOW signal;
a second detecting means for generating a command signal
of vehicle height adjustment in the form of either an OFF
signal or an ON signal;
main circuit means for selecting for operation either said first
drive means to raise said vehicle height or said second
drive means to lower said vehicle height in response to
said directional signal, and for determining whether or not
said drive means is to be actuated;
holding circuit means, connected between said second de-
tecting means and said main circuit means, for increasing
the duration of said OFF signal for a predetermined
length of time when said OFF signal appears instanta-
neously, and for transmitting said OFF signal with said
duration to said main circuit means; and
said holding circuit means comprising a monostable multivi-
brator connected so as to receive said command signal
from said second detecting means, and an OR gate con-
nected so as to receive said command signal from said
second detecting means dnd an output from said monosta-
ble multivibrator.
4,391,453
CHILD STROLLER
Dieter Gliiser, Dachau, Fed. Rep, of Germany, assignor to PEG
Perego-Pines Deutschland GmbH, Dachau, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,920
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 4,
1979, 2940302; Apr. 16, 1980, 3014674
Int. Q.^ B62B 9/10
U.S. Q. 280-47.4 25 Qaims
1. A child stroller having a frame (5), a seat (1) formed by at
least one seating surface member (2, 2'), a back rest (3), a
footrest (4), supporting means (17, 18, 19) for disposing said
one seating surface member on said frame relative to said back
rest to support a child in a seated position, adjustment means
(9) for moving said one seating surface member longitudinally
relative to said back rest to provide a usable portion of said seat
170
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
of variable length corresponding to the length of the child's ^^j . ^^p VFH ATpROVIDED WITH A
thigh, and locking means (8. 10) for holding said one seating n^-WHEEL i^^
Nils Fagerstcdt, Espoo, Finland, assignor to Oy Sisu-Auto Ab,
Helsinki, Finland
Filed Noy. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,444
Qaims priority, application Finland, Dec. 14, 1979, 793931
Int. a.3 B62D 53/08
U.S. a. 280—407 9 Qaims
surface member in its adjusted position relative to said back
rest.
I 4 391 454
UTILITY CART WITH DETACHABLE AND REVERSIBLE
SHELVES
Douglas D. Marsh, 1212 Mark Dr.; Arthur E. Feldman, 108 Iwo
St, and John C. Newlin, R.R. #3, all of Auburn, Ind. 46706
I FUed Apr. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 137,388
' Int. d? B62B U/OO
MS. CL 280— 47 J5 ♦ Chums
7 6 e ^ ^
1. A tractor vehicle provided with a fifth-wheel plate, com-
prising a chassis, a beam mounted on said chassis vertically
pivotably on two fulcrums spaced-apart in the transverse di-
rection of said vehicle, and a fifth-wheel plate supported by
said beam, in which the improvement comprises said fulcrums
of said beam being independently displaceable in the longitudi-
nal direction of said vehicle.
I. A utility cart having reversible shelves comprising a pair
of end frames, each having a pair of elongated rigidly con-
nected upright hollow supports which are parallel and spaced
apart, each end frame having an end panel secured to said
upright supports, an orthogonal shelf device detachably se-
cured at the comers to said upright supports: said shelf device
including two parallel flanges on opposite side edges and being
essentially open at the opposite ends thereof, one mounting
bracket secured to each end of each flange and having an
attaching portion projecting angularly inwardly, each attach-
ing portion engaging the respective upright support at a point
within the angle defined by the shelf comers; each support
having at said engagement point a threaded opening through
one side thereof, and one fastener received by an opening in
each attaching portion and being threaded into said threaded
opening for securing said shelf device to said upright supports,
said flanges extending between said pair of end frames and said
panels being juxtaposed with the opposite ends of said shelf
device thereby serving as end closures therefor, said shelf
device also having a bottom formed with two portions angling
downwardly from said two flanges, respectively, and an up-
standing inverted V-shaped wall portion connected at the
lower edges to the inner facing edges of said two bottom
portions, respectively, said wall portion including two back
panels and being provided at each end of one back panel
thereof with an elongated plate like bracket which generally
lies in a plane at right angles to said one back panel, each said
bracket extending into the apex portion of said wall portion
and having an opening for receiving a fastener, and a fastener
extending through an opening in each end panel and into each
said bracket opening for supporting said wall portion with
respect to said end frame.
4,391,456
SKI STICK GRIP
Beat Moor, Meiringen Halteli CH3860, Switzerland
per No. PCr/CH80/00058, § 371 Date Feb. 7, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 22, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02649, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 11, 1980
per Filed May 13, 1980, Ser. No. 233,605
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 7, 1979,
5292/79
Int. C\? A63C 11/22
U.S. CI. 280—821 * Claims
1. A ski stick grip attached to a ski stick having a center
portion, two side portions of substantially equal length extend-
ing from the said center portion at right angles to the longitudi-
nal axis of the ski stick, an upper surface and a lower surface in
which the force of the hand is applied substantially in the
direction of the longitudinal axis of said ski stick, permitting
the movement of the wrist joint substantially parallel to the
movement of the hand and at right angles of the forearm to
increase the force applied by the arm and. the wrist to said
stick;
said ski stick grip enabling the placing of the palm of the
hand on said upper surface;
said lower surface arranged for accommodating the thumb
of the hand, allowing the hand to surround said grip by
forming substantially a fist;
said upper surface being extended outwardly and upwardly;
said lower surface of said ski stick grip curved downwardly;
and
a pommel formed, extending upwardly substantially from
the center portion of said grip;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
171
allowing the force on the ski stick grip to be exerted substan-
tially parallel to the longitudinal axis of the ski stick.
4,391,457
COMBINATION POCKET PAD AND WRITING
INSTRUMENT HOLDER
Paul B. Gassner, 0405 SW. Texas St., Portland, Oreg. 97219
1 1 FUed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,470
Int. C\? B42D 3/06. 3/12
U.S.a.2«l-31 6 Qaims
sions in the end region of the inner wall surfaces of the
two opposing housing segments;
radially outwardly projecting lugs on said gasket means
adjacent to and co-extensive with the enlarged free ends,
wherein the lugs interact with the recess to position the
gasket means within the coupling housing in the closed
position of the housing segments so that the radially outer
side of said sealing line is spaced circumferentially from
the opposed ends of said housing segments and is in
contact with the inner wall surface of one of said seg-
ments;
1. A book-type combination pocket pad and writing instru-
ment holder comprising:
a cover foldable into front and back cover sections along a
hinge portion,
retention means along an inside face of one said cover sec-
tion for retaining a pad of paper sheets,
slip inhibiting means on the outside face of said one cover
section for frictional contact with the material of an open
pocket for resisting gravity-induced sliding movement of
said cover from said pocket yet allowing easy manual
"^ r^"?°.^*' °^ ^''^ cover from said open pocket, said slip
inhibiting means comprising a high friction surface,
spacer means projecting from an inside face of the other said
cover section toward the inside face of the one said cover
section when said sections are folded together to space the
cover sections one from the other, said spacer means
comprising a pair of laterally spaced apart relatively rigid
parallel ribs integral with said other cover section and
spaced inwardly of opposite side edge portions of said
other cover section in positions overlying said pad when
said cover sections are folded together,
said ribs being positioned laterally on opposite sides of a
center portion of said other cover section so as to define
with the inside faces of said cover sections a rigid pocket
therebetween when said cover sections are folded to-
gether for receiving writing instruments clipped to said
other cover section and extending along the inside face
thereof.
a sealing lip formed at axially opposite ends of the interior of
the gasket means, said sealing lip comprising a radially
inwardly extending portion terminating at at least one
enlarged free end of the gasket means in a projection
extending circumferentially from and beyond the gener-
ally planar surface of said enlarged free end, whereby
circumferential retraction of said sealing lip is compen-
sated for to maintain a complete circumferential surface to
seal under internal pressure; and
releasable locking means cooperating with the housing seg-
ments for locking the segments together in the closed
position.
4 391 459
INSTANT hot' WATER DISPENSER
Charles A. Wicke, and Wayne C. Riley, both of Racine, Wis.,
assignors to Emerson Electric Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 233,221
Int. Q.' F16L 47/00
U.S. Q. 285-238 6 Claims
II
4 391 458
PIPE COUPLING WITH GASKET LOCATING MEANS
James Blakeley, Thomhill, Canada, assignor to Blakeley Engi-
neering Limited, Thomhill, Canada
I jFiled Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,921
I I Int. Q.3 F16L 21/06. 41/00
U.S. Q. 285-112 5 ciiams
1. A pipe coupling device comprising
two arcuate housing segments, each having opposable ends
and a continuous inner wall surface, said housing segments
being movable from an open position to a closed position
in which said opposable ends are brought into opposition,
said housing segments thereby defining a generally cylin-
drical coupling housing which is adapted to engage the
pipes to be coupled;
arcuate gasket means of generally C-shaped cross-section
within the coupling housing, said gasket means having
radially enlarged free ends defining substantially planar
surfaces adapted to abut along an axially extending sealing
line;
a recess defined in the closed position of said housing seg-
ments by adjacent radially outwardly extending depres-
1. In a hot water dispenser having an upper tank with a
lower end and a lower tank with an upper end, the improve-
ment wherein:
a. the lower end of the upper tank is formed with a plurality
of outtumed flanges and an external circumferential
groove for receiving an O-ring;
b. the upper end of the lower Unk is formed with a shoulder
for receiving and supporting the lower end of the upper
tank and for forming a seal with the O-ring, a plurality of
gaps for receiving the outtumed flanges of the upper tank,
and a plurality of outtumed flanges between the gaps, one
of the outtumed flanges having at least one small notch
therein; and
c. a retaining ring inserted between the outtumed flanges of
172
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
the upper and lower tanks, the retaining ring having at
least one upturned locking portion that protrudes into the
small notch in the notched flange of the lower tank,
so that the notched flange will deform under internal pres-
sure in the dispenser to release the retaining ring and
release the pressure.
4 391,460
ADJUSTABLE MULTIPLE BOLT LOCKING SYSTEM
Jose D. Bonet, Martin el Humano, 12-6° Valencia, Spain
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,691
Claims priority, application Spain, May 25, 1980, 480.950
Int. a.3 E05C 1/06
U.S. a. 292—37 4 Qaims
i_^
A security lock system comprising a plurality of bolts
operated by a common key and a corresponding multiple strike
for accommodating said bolts; a main carrier including a single
box section forming a lock covering the entire vertical dimen-
sion of the door; said main carrier having at at least one of the
epds thereof means for adjustment in length to the vertical
dimension of the door; means for common operation of the
plurality of bolts; said bolts including bolts in at least one cross
bar, said cross bar being adjustably locatable at any height on
said door; said cross bar and said multiple strike having adjust-
ment means therein for adjusting the lengths thereof.
4,391,461
QUARTER-TURN FASTENER
Florian C. Deibele, Tigard, Oreg., assignor to Tektronix, Inc.,
Beaverton, Oreg.
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,438
Int. a.3 E05C 3/12
U.S. a. 292—204 5 Oaims
positioning boss comprising a projection engagable with a
detent in said panel for establishing a stable position of said
fastener.
4,391,462
ANTI-THEFT LOCKING DEVICE ADAPTABLE TO
CONTAINERS
Guy Loreal, Teteghem, France, assignor to Societe Navale Char-
geurs Delmas-VieUeux, France
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,831
Gaims priority, application France, Aug. 8, 1980, 80 17553
Int. C\? E05C 3/04
U.S. CI. 292—207 4 Qaims
6 5,« />
36 V47
24^ 26
^-Ov* ^ 30/1
v%
34
1. In a container presenting hingedly mounted doors main-
tained in tight-sealing closure position by at least one rotating
vertical rod provided at its ends with locking members engag-
ing fixed stops of the door frame, an anti-theft locking device
which comprises:
a rain-strap opening provided in a front extension of the
container roof in the vicinity of the upper end of said
rotating vertical rod,
a lug-shaped upper extension of the rotating vertical rod
being placed in front of an upper portion of the door frame
and providing, in the closure position of the rotating
vertical rod, a free space in relation with said door frame,
and
a vertically movable plate engaging said rain-strap opening
and moving downwards by gravity to lodge into the free
space between said upper extension of the rotating vertical
rod and said supper portion of the door frame,
whereby the rotating vertical rod can be released to open the
doors only when said movable plate has been raised suffi-
ciently, this upward movement of the movable plate being
normally prevented in any container supporting another,
stacked container, by this other container.
: . A fastener for releasably latching a panel to a cabinet,
comprising:
a generally disc-like one-piece body;
means integrally formed with said body for rotatably mount-
ing said body to said panel;
a lip integrally formed with said body and extending radially
therefrom, said lip being rotatable into latching engage-
I ment with said cabinet; and
a positioning boss integrally formed with said body, said
4,391,463
DOOR CATCH
Enrique Costa Bastart, Calle Mayor de Gracia, 213, Barcelona
13, Spain
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,948
Oaims priority, aoplication Spain, Jun. 16, 1980, 251422[U]
Int. C\? E05C 17/32
U.S. a. 292—263 8 Claims
1. A catch for holding a door closed, comprising two com-
plementary mutually engageable latching means, and respec-
tive mounting means for mounting said latching means to
respective ones of a door and an element adjacent the door so
that the latching means are mutually engageable when the
door is closed; a first one of said mounting means comprising
an extendible link and means for articulating said link to the
door or element, whereby in use the door is partially inwardly
openable to a predetermined extent with the latching means
mutually engaged; the link being displaceable between releas-
able and locked configurations in which the latching means
respectively are and are not mutually disengageable by open-
ing the door; said first mounting means also including an actu-
ating element which is displaceable between actuating and
non-actuating configurations, in the former of which it is actu-
able to displace the link to its releasable configuration, said
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
173
actuating
placeable
element being constructed and arranged to be dis- 4,391,465
in use to its actuating configuration from outside the ASSEMBLY SEPARATING A PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT FROM AN ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Renzo Piano, Paris, France, assignor to Fiat Auto S.p.A., Turin,
Italy
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,136
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 20, 1980, 67794 A/80
Int. C\? B62D 25/08
U.S. a. 296—208
4,391,464
BUMPER FOR MOTOR-VEHICLES AND THE LIKE,
MADE OF PLASTIC MATERIALS, AND HAVING ITS
CROSS SECTION CLOSED BY A REAR REINFORaNG
PART
Maurizio Masotti, Saronno; Antonio Zentile, Paderno Dugnano,
and Pasqualino Cau, Oggiono, all of Italy, assignors to Mon-
tedison S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,299
Oaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 6, 1980, 20385 A/80
Int. a.3 B60R 79/00
U.S. a. 293—120 6 Qaims
1. A bumper for a motor-vehicle having a box-shaped cross-
section, comprising an elongated bumper member made of
plastics material and having an open cross-section substantially
shaped like a "C", said bumper member being closed in the rear
by one removable reinforcing wall comprising a substantially
rectilinear lamina having at each end one enlargement radiused
to the plane of the lamina by means of a slanting plane and
provided with transversal holes for a stable anchoring of the
reinforcing wall to the bumper member and to the motor-vehi-
cle, said reinforcing wall having along its longitudinal borders
first coupling means which are engageable with corresponding
second coupling means provided along the opposite longitudi-
1 nal borders of the bumper member, said first and second cou-
pling means providing a solid joining of the bumper member
and reinforcing wall.
8 Qaims
N-i
partially open door, and to be actuated by closure of the door,
whereby the door is freely inwardly openable with disengage-
ment of the latching means.
8. An assembly of elements having the function of separating
the passenger compartment from the engine compartment of a
motor vehicle, characterized in comprising:
a first panel-shaped element made of a first plastic material,
having a width and a height which are substantially equal
to the width of the bbdywork and to the distance between
the floor and windshield of the passenger compartment,
respectively, the said first element being provided with
fastening means for connecting the said assembly to the
said bodywork,
a second element made of a second plastic material having
mechanical characteristics different from those of the said
first element, the said second element having a width
substantially equal to that of the said bodywork, being
provided with housings for the indicator and control
instruments of the motor vehicle and being arranged to be
fixed to the said first element in a stage prior to the stage
of fastening of the complete assembly on the said body-
work; and
a third element, having U-shaped cross-sections and ar-
ranged to be fixed to the said first element and to form
together with this latter a closed channel communicating
with at least one of the said chambers or channels formed
by the union of the said first element with the said second
element.
4,391,466
WATER CHAIR
Peter A. Smith, 102 Evelyn St., Sylvania 2224, N.S.W., Austra-
lia
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,970
Int. Q.3 A47C 7/02. 7/36
U.S. Q. 297-452 7 Qaims
1. A chair for one or more persons, comprising a frame, a
seating portion and a back supporting portion being defined by
174
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
the frame, the chair back comprising a plurality of cushions
arranged to be partially filled with water, a corresponding
plurality of slings, each sling being attached along an upper
margin of the back supporting portion; each cushion compris-
ing a water impermeable bag carried within a sling, the bag
being partially filled with water, the plurality of cushions being
mounted one above the other to the back supporting portion of
the frame, with the lowermost part of one cushion resting on
the uppermost part of the cushion below it, whereby in use of
the chair said cushion supports and adapts itself to the shape of
the back of said one or more persons.
4^91,467
SYSTEM FOR PRODUONG A UNIFORM RUBBLE BED
FOR IN SITU PROCESSES
Terry R. Galloway, Berkeley, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253,125
Int. C1.3 E21C 41/10
U.S. a. 299—2 14 Claims
'-\7
]. A method of producing in an underground formation a
cavity filled with a bed of uniform rubblized material, compris-
ing:
forming a substantially vertical pilot hole in the underground
formation;
reaming the pilot hole into a cavity, thereby forming fines and
rubblized material; and
drawing a flushing fluid out of the cavity to carry away the
fipes, leaving a bed of rubblized material in the cavity.
I 4,391,468
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING
MINERAL NODULES FROM THE OCEAN FLOOR
Erwin D. Funk, Glen Fails, N.Y., assignor to Kamyr, Inc., Glen
Falls, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 894,433, Apr. 7, 1978,
abandoned. This application Sep. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 72,778
Int C1.3 E02F 5/00
U.S. a. 299—8 19 Qaims
1. A method of recovering mineral nodules of a size range up
to 8" nominal diameter deposited on the ocean floor which
comprises the steps of
pumping a continuous flow of ocean water along a first
confined path extending through an exchange position
within the vicinity of the ocean floor where the mineral
nodules to be recovered are deposited from an ocean
water inlet position out of said ocean vicinity and then
upwardly to a discharge position on a surface vessel,
confining ocean water within a second path within the afore-
said ocean vicinity,
continuously flowing ocean water in said second path by
pumping the same at a pumping position spaced down-
stream from an exchange position therein,
continuously moving from the ocean floor to a separating
position within said ocean vicinity a mixture containing
deposited mineral nodules of up to 8" nominal diameter
and smaller particles forming a part of the ocean floor on
which the mineral nodules were deposited,
continuously separating at said separating position said mix-
ture so as to obtain a supply of separated mineral nodules
up to 8" nominal diameter within ocean water separate
from the remainder of said mixture which contains said
smaller particles,
returning said smaller particles in the remainder of said
mixture to the ocean at a position within said ocean vicin-
ity,
js
continuously feeding the supply of separated mineral nod-
ules to said second path at a feeding position upstream
from the exchange position therein, and
continuously exchanging between the exchange positions
within said first and second paths successive incremental
volumes of ocean water and mineral nodules from said
second path to said first path with comparable successive
incremental volumes of ocean water from said first path to
said second path whereby the mineral nodules within said
second path are removed therefrom upstream of the
pumping position in said second path and moved into said
first path downstream from the pumping position in said
first path for movement in said first path to said discharge
position.
431,469
MINERAL MINING INSTALLATION
Yavier Arsuaga, Madrid, Spain, assignor to Gewerkschaft Eisen-
hutte Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,010
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 31,
1980, 3041101
Int. a.5 E21C 29/02: E21D 2i/04
U.S. a. 299—11 31 Claims
1. A mineral mining installation for use in a steeply-inclined
longwall working, the installation comprising a ladder-shaped
support frame and a plurality of roof support units, the support
frame extending along the longwall working and having a pair
of generally parallel longitudinal beams interconnected by a
plurality of transverse beams, the roof support units being
positioned between the longitudinal beams and being sup-
ported on the transverse beams, each of the longitudinal beams
comprising a plurality of beam sections pivotably connected
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
175
together end-to-end, wherein the support frame comprises a 4,391,471
plurality of detachably connected sub-frames, each of which GUIDES FOR MINERAL MINING MACHINES
Alois Hauscbopp, Weme; Hans-Dieter Schneider, and Christoph
Rassmann, both of Lunen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia, Lunen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,315
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2.
1980,3012884
Int. C1.3 E21C i5/0%
U.S. a. 299-43 31 Qaims
11
s ?o
f
. s
'
^^
' 20
"-""
5
~ 20
16
■^
15
17 -' ' .
'T
n - .
17 '■ '
T
13
^•^
' ..■ '151 « **
11 _ .
17 .
-^
n
f
^
■ 21
23 —
. 20
A IV - "
10
comprises a respective transverse beam and a respective beam
section of each of the longitudinal beams.
4,391,470
METHOD OF, AND APPARATUS FOR, WINNING
MINERAL MATERIAL
Hehnut Langenberg, Lunen; Hans-Theodor Grisebach, Unna,
and Heinz Weinhold, Gelsenkirchen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia,
Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,483
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 14,
1980,3009923
Int. C1.3 E21C 27/24. 35/16
U.S. a. 299-11 22 Claims
U W 13
? ' » It 13 II 13 ,
1. A method of winning mineral material from pillars left
between laterally spaced roadways or galleries by the bord-
and-pUlar mining process, the method comprising the steps of
forming an arcuate longwall face which extends between the
roadways across a plurality of pUlars, and of winning mineral
material in a non-uniform manner from said pUlars using me-
chanical winning means.
3. A guide for mineral mining; said guide comprising means
defining upper and lower chain passages for receiving a chain
used to drive a plough, the defining means including spacers
separating the upper and lower passages, angle plates with
surfaces which form a lower support for the plough and covers
which close off the upper passage and which are pivotable
outwardly from the upper passage to permit across thereto,
wherein the covers have flat upper surfaces which serve to
contact and support a machine and a guide rail for the plough
or machine is formed by projections on the covers delimiting
the upper surfaces.
4 391 472
CORE ELIMINATOR FOR MINING, ROAD WORKING
OR EARTH MOVING MACHINERY
Claude B. Krekeler, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The Cincinnati
Mine Machinery Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
FUed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 197,892
Int a.3 E21C 27/24. 35/18
U.S. a. 299—86 21 Oaims
Mt /7
1. A core eliminator for mining, road working or earth
moving machinery comprising at least a pair of rotatable,
driven drums having a plurality of cutter bits disposed thereon,
said drums being rotatably mounted on a boom strut located
between said drums and between the kerfs formed by said
drums and cutter bits as the machinery operates on the material
being worked by it; at least one bit holder atUched to one of
said drums and having a bit therein normally within the con-
fmes of the kerf formed Iby that drum, said bit holder being
movable on that drum to an extended position so ai to bring
said bit therein beyond the kerf formed by that drum and
176
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
towards the kerf formed by the other drum whereby to destroy
the core which would otherwise form between said kerfs; and
additional means to move said bit holder and bit therein to said
extended position between said kerfs and to retract said bit
holder and bit therein from said extended position, said addi-
tional means comprising a cam.
4^91,473
LINEAR BEARING UNIT
Hiroshi Teramachi, 34-8, Higashi-Tamagawa 2-chome, Seta-
gay a-ku, Tokyo, Japan (158)
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,662
Int. a.3 F16C 29/06
U.S. Q. 308—6 C 8 Claims
38 5?
and extending into the counterbore, said seal housing
having an interior dynamic O-ring sealing the housing to
the bearing sleeve and an exterior static O-ring sealing the
housing to the counterbore.
1. A linear bearing unit essentially comprising a bearing case
having a lower open end and four non-loading ball holes hav-
ing the substantially same inner diameter as the ball diameter,
side covers firmly secured to both end faces of said bearing
case, a track table inserted through a cylindrical inner recess of
the bearing case and a number of balls arranged in line one
after another through four longitudinally extending circular
hollow space between semi-circular concave track grooves on
the cylindrical inner recess of the bearing case and another
corresponding concave track grooves on the track table as
well as through the four non-loading ball holes in the bearing
case, said longitudinally extending circular hollow spaces
being in communication with the non-loading ball holes via
U-shaped concave portions formed on both the side covers,
wherein the bearing case has annular projections at both the
end faces thereof which are located between the non-loading
ball holes and the concave track grooves on the cylindrical
inner recess and further it has a longitudinally extending deep
slit at one side thereof so as to prestress or preload some of the
concave track grooves on the cylindrical inner recess, while
the side covers contain annular grooves corresponding to said
annular projection, U-shaped concave portions and ball guide
tongue portions in communication with the longitudinally
extending circular hollow space at the innermost end of said
U-shaijed concave portions.
4,391,475
COLUMN INSERT BEARING HOUSING
Arthur C. Reph, Cherryville, Pa., assignor to IngersoU-Rand
Company, Woodcliff Lake, N.J.
FUed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,964
Int. CI.3 F16C 23/02
U.S. a. 384—226 7 Qaims
4,391,474
THRUST SHAFT SEAL WITH SLIDABLY MOUNTED
BEARING SLEEVE
Leonard J. Martini, 2801 Ocean Front Walk, F, San Diego,
Calif. 92109
FUed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,334
Int. a.3 F16J 15/26. 15/56; F16C 33/74
U.S. a. 384—152 8 Oaims
1. A seal for a thrust shaft in a body wherein the body has a
bore and a counterbore, comprising:
a bearing sleeve slidably mounted on the shaft, said bearing
sleeve having a static O-ring which seals the interior of the
sleeve to the shaft and a flange which extends into the
counterbore;
means radially flxing the bearing sleeve to the shaft;
a ring-shaped seal housing mounted about the bearing sleeve
1. A column and bearing assembly comprising:
a. a column having a side with an opening and an inside
surface;
b. a shaft in the column; and
c. a guide bearing means disposed in the column to support
the shaft, the guide bearing means comprising:
(1) a removable housing having a size enabling insertion
through the opening in the column and extending into
the column, the housing having a first surface contact-
ing the inside surface of the column;
(2) a wear surface for enclosing and supporting the shaft;
and
(3) a locking means for attaching and receiving the guide
bearing means within the opening to the column.
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
177
ir 43M76
ROLLER BEARING
Richard Negele, Esslingen, and Dieter Pfeifle, FUderstadt, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SKF KugeUagerfab-
riken GmbH, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,641
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 9,
1979, 2932290
Int. C1.3 F16C 33/46
U.S. a. 308—207 R 5 Qaims
-13
ally supported by the inner bearing race by ball bearings so that
as the pinion gear rotates it causes the upper works to rotate
along with the outer race relative to the inner race, an arcuate
beam slidably mounted on the rotatable bed for engagement
with the outer bearing race, means for moving the arcuate
beam into and out of engagement with the outer race, a clamp-
ing latch pivotably mounted on the rotatable bed so that its one
end engages the outer bearing race on the side of the outer race
diametrically opposite the arcuate beam, said arcuate beam and
clamping latch providing engagement with the outer race to
counteract tipping moments of the upper works w^iile at the
same time providing for quick engagement and disengagement
with the outer race. i i
4,391,477
QUICK RELEASE MOUNTING FOR A TURNTABLE
BEARING
James G. Morrow, Sr., Manitowoc, Wis., assignor to The Mani-
towoc Company, Inc., Manitowoc, Wis.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,883
Int. Q.J F16C 19/10
U.S. Q. 308—221 9 Qaims
1. A quick release mounting for a turntable bearing of a load
handling device or the like comprising, in combination, upper
works carried by a rotatable bed, arcuate plates fixedly secured
to the bottom of the rotatable bed, a rotatable outer bearing
race in engagement with the arcuate plates and providing
support fcM- the rotatable bed and upper works, a stationary
inner bearing race fixed to a lower works and having gear teeth
along its iimer circumference, a rotatable pinion gear which
engages said gear teeth, said outer bearing race being rotation-
4,391,478
DRAWER SEAL
Hans C. Grunert, Adelberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Sybron Corporation, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,573
Int. Q.' A47B 77/00, 87/00, 88/00
U.S. Q. 312—320 5 Qaims
1. In a rolling bearing with rolling means guided in a cage
between inner and outer bearing rings, wherein the cage has a
radially extending annular projection on a lateral ring, the
projection extending into a first annular groove of one of the
bearing rings for restraining the cage in one axial direction, the
improvement comprising a second annular groove on the side
of said one bearing ring opposite to said first annular groove,
said first groove receiving said radial projection of said cage,
and a separately formed restraining element inserted in said
groove, said restraining ring being positioned to axially restrain
said cage with respect to said one of said bearing rings in the
axial direction opposite said one axial direction, said one bear-
ing ring having a partial conical shape over which said projec-
tion may be pushed to enable insertion of said cage therein to
facilitate assembly of said cage in said one bearing ring.
15-^3' 14 32
1. In a storage unit comprising a case, a plurality of drawers
arranged in the case in a vertically stacked array, each drawer
having a handle for moving the drawer into and out of the case
including a first handle attached to a first drawer and a second
handle attached to a second drawer stacked immediately
below the first, an improved system for sealing between and
about the vertically stacked drawers comprising:
(a) each of said handles extending substantially across the
full width of its associated drawer and each handle having
an upper portion with a relatively fiat upper surface and a
lower portion;
(b) a flexible seal member carried by and depending from the
lower f>ortion of said first handle, said sealing member
being adapted to contact the flat upper surface of said
second handle along substantially the full width of said
second handle when the drawers associated with said first
and second handles are closed; and
(c) sealing means on said cabinet extending about the periph-
ery of said vertically stacked array of drawers, said sealing
means contacting the upper portion of the upper-most
handle in said drawer array, the lower portion of the
lower-most handle in said drawer array and the side edges
of each handle in said drawer array.
4,391,479
MINIATURE MATRIX PROGRAMMING BOARD
Kenneth R. Wessel, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Sealectro
Corporation, Mamaroneck, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,429 -
Int. Q.3 HOIR 29/00
U.S. Q. 339—18 C 15 Qaims
1. A matrix connector for selectively connecting a cross bar
in a first series of parallel bars with a similar cross bar in a
second series of parallel bars comprising:
(a) an insulator block for supporting both series of parallel
bars, formed with a plurality of spaced cylindrical aper-
178
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
tures connecting two planar surfaces and arranged in two
orthogonal lines;
(b) a first series of elongated conductive bars in parallel
array, each bar in the first series including a strip of con-
ductive material formed with alternate ridges and grooves
along its longitudinal axis and including a plurality of
depending cylindrical sockets having resilient clamping
walls, said sockets positioned in one end of the cylindrical
apertures in the insulator block;
(c) a second series of elongated conductive bars also in
parallel array but perpendicular to the first series, each bar
in the second series including a strip of conductive mate-
I rial formed with alternate ridges and grooves along its
longitudinal axis and including a plurality of depending
cylindrical sockets having resilient clamping walls, said
sockets positioned in the other end of the cylindrical
I apertures in the insulator block;
(d) a first cover plate secured to one side of the insulator
block for covering one series of cross bars, said cover
plate formed with a plurality of apertures positioned in
alignment with the apertures in the insulator block for the
' insertion of connecting pins;
(e) a second cover plate secured to the other side of the
I insulator block for covering the second series of cross
bars, said second cover plate formed with a plurality of
apertures positioned in alignment with the apertures in the
4^91,480
ELECTRICAL TERMINAL
NabU L. Mina, RoseUe, U., assignor to Appleton Electric Com-
pany, Chicago, ni.
FUed Not. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,884
Int a.J HOIR n/QO
U.S. a. 339—32 R 1 Claim
;iM^^'
-60A
'64
1. In combination with an explosionproof electrical recepta-
cle and switch, said receptacle and switch including a faceplate
with a first slot and a second slot therein, one of said slots
arranged to receive a male blade contact in either of two
mutually perpendicular orientations; an improved terminal
block subassembly behind said faceplate and said one slot,
comprising:
a terminal block having a front side and a rear side, an elon-
gate and essentially singular piece of electrically conduc-
tive metal captivated partially within said terminal block
and having a first end protruding from said terminal block
front side and a second end protruding from said terminal
block rear side,
said first end being slotted longitudinally in two mutually
perpendicular planes for receiving said male blade contact
in either of said two orientations,
said second end being a switch contact,
and means between said first end and said second end for
holding said terminal in said terminal block.
insulator block for the insertion of connecting pins, said
second cover plate further including termination holes,
disposed adjacent the side edges thereof, said termination
holes being aligned with apertures in said insulator block
having only one socket of a single conductive bar therein,
said termination holes for the insertion of termination pins,
with the outer surface of said second cover plate further
including a plurality of grooves, each groove being associ-
ated with a termination hole and being contiguous there-
with, each said groove extending away from the associ-
ated termination hole to the side edge of said second cover
plate;
(0 a plurality of conducting connecting pins for insertion
through the apertures in either cover plate to make
contact with a socket in the first series of bars and a socket
in the second series of bars; and
(g) a plurality of termination pins being generally L-shaped
in configuration having first and second legs disposed in
perpendicular relationship, with the diameter of said L-
shaped termination pins substantially conforming to the
depth of said grooves in said second cover plate wherein
one leg of said L-shaped termination pin is receivable in a
termination hole making electrical contact with one
socket of a single conductive bar and with the other leg of
said termination pin being receivable in the associated
groove in such a manner to be flush with the planar outer
surface of said second cover plate.
4,391,481
CHILD-PROOF ELECTRICAL PLUG SHEATH
Theodore A. Golden, 755 W. Big Beaver Rd., Suite 211, Troy,
Mich. 48084
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,198
Int. Q\? HOIR li/44
U.S. a. 339—42 1 Claim
1. A child-proof protective sheath for a conventional electri-
cal plug of the type having a plug body with an electrical wire
extending into and connected within the body, and having
electrical contact prongs extending from the body for insertion
within corresponding openings formed in a wall-type recepta-
cle, comprising:
a thin wall, generally tubular shaped member, formed of a
resilient, rubber-like material, and being of a size to closely
surround and engage the plug body adjacent the prongs
for mounting upon the plug body, and for axially extend-
ing from the plug body for substantially the full length of
the prongs to a free end, so as to encircle the prongs and
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
179
I
form a protective wall which is spaced radially outwardly
of the prongs;
said member being resiliently collapsable and extendable in
its axial direction up>on endwise pressure and release of
endwise pressure, respectively, so that during the time
that the plug prongs are inserted within and removed from
the receptacle openings, the member completely encircles
the space between the plug and receptacle to prevent
child access to exposed portions of the prongs, and simul-
taneously the axial pressure between the contacting por-
tion of the receptacle and the free end of the member
results in endwise collapsing of the member during inser-
tion of the prongs and the release of said pressure, during
removal of the prongs from the openings, results in the
member resiliently extending to its normal length, and the
free end portion of said member at the prongs, being
sufficiently resilient to spread radially outwardly in re-
sponse to the pressure of contacting the receptacle during
insertion of the prongs within the openings for thereby
producing the axial collapse in length in the member;
said member including a roughly bell-shaped end to com-
pletely receive the plug body, and said bell-shaped end
having a central opening through which the plug electri-
cal wire extends, and said bell-shaped end tightly fits
around and against the plug body for frictionally securing
the member upon the plug body; and
said member including a plurality of separate, petal-like
sections each having opposed generally straight edges
connected by a curved end, the edges of each petal-like
section overlapping the edges of adjacent sections, and
said petal-like sections radially bending and spreading
during contact with the receptacle for forming a closed
wall.
4,391,482
SPRING STRIPS FOR CONNECTIONS BETWEEN
PRINTED aRCUTT BOARD
Franz Czeschka, Talstrasse 7, Rechberghausen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany (D7324)
FUed Apr. 23, 1979, Ser. No. 32,126
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 21, 1978,
4318/78
I Int. a.3 HOIR 11/22
U.S. a. 339—59 M 3 Qaims
said insulating retention strip (6) between each of the
contact springs (1), forming chambers (11).
4,391,483
SEALING SLEEVE FOR USE WTTH ELECTRICAL
CONNECTORS
Dominique E. Desourteaux, Epemon, France, assignor to So-
ciete Anonyme Francelco, Suresnes, France
FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,493
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 28, 1980, 80 06963
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/00
U.S. a. 339—94 R 3 Qaims
1. An improved sealing system for use with cooperating
electrical connectors for placing two cables in contact, each of
said cables having an insulator sheath and being inserted in a
lodging in one of said connectors with a resulting space be-
tween the outer diameter of said insulator sheath and the inner
diameter of said electrical connector, said sealing system com-
prising:
(a) an electrical contact having a contact element and a tail
portion, said tail portion being adapted to be crimped onto
one of said cables;
(b) a flexible sealing sleeve molded onto the tail portion of
said electrical contact, said flexible sealing sleeve being in
the form of a cylindrical grommet with a concentric ori-
fice therein, the outer diameter of said grommet being
slightly less than the inner diameter of said lodging, and
the diameter of said orifice being slightly greater than the
outer diameter of said insulator sheath, wherein annular
grooves encircle the outer peripheral surfaces of said
grommet and said orifice, said sealing sleeve being
adapted to seal the said space;
(c) said tail portion comprising means for further securing
said sealing sleeve thereon.
4,391,484
BOX CONNECTOR
WUhelmus T. M. Foederer, Best, Netherlands, assignor to E. I.
Du Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,881
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 26, 1980,
8003708
Int. a.3 HOIR U/i8
U.S. a. 339— 97 P 6 Qaims
1. A spring strip for making electrically conducting, vibra-
tion-stable and gasproof connections between the printed back
wall wiring of through-contacted printed circuit boards, and
the actual contact springs, the latter being combined via an
insulating mount with mutual spacing to strips of at least one
row, and these in turn being surrounded by a housing (10)
placed thereon, characterized in that the individual strips con-
sisting of contact springs (1) and insulating retention strip (6)
clad together;
said insulating strip (6) having lines of weakness formed
between pairs of adjacent contact springs, whereby the
strip can be broken off at any desired number of contact
springs;
said housing (10) having cross pieces (14) that bear against
1. A box connector having insulation piercing contacts,
characterized by a four side wall box made of electrically
conductive sheet material, two corresponding pairs of slots in
opposite side walls containing insulation piercing contacts said
slots extending from the top of the box over a predetermined
180
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
length towards the bottom of said box, each pair of slots termi-
nating in a same level but at a different level with respect to the
other pair of slots, a pair of connecting strips formed adjacent
the bottom edge of said box in opposite side walls, each said
strip initially converging and subsequently extending down-
wardly and adjacent to each other to form a means for mount-
ing in a printed circuit board hole.
function of a control voltage, wherein the intensity of the
modulating electrical field created by the electrodes increases
along said adjacent portions on moving away from the centres
' 4,391,485
IN-LINE FUSE HOLDER FOR MINIATURE PLUG-IN
I FUSE
Aagelo Urani, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to McGraw-Edison Com-
pany, Rolling Meadows, III.
FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,893
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/115. 19/48
U,S. a. 339—191 S 10 Claims
4,391,486
ELECTRICALLY CONTROLLED ELECTRO-OPTICAL
SWITCH AND INTEGRATED OPTICAL CIRCUTT
INCORPORATING SUCH A SWITCH
Michel Papuchon, and Claude Puech, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,616
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 6, 1979, 79 22297
Int a.3 G02B 5/14
U^. a. 350— %.14 8 Qaims
1. An electrically controlled electro-optical switch incorpo-
rating two wave guides formed in an electro-optical material
and electrodes producing an electrical field for modulating the
velocity of the optical radiation propagated by said guides into
adjacent portions in order to effect an energy transfer as a
BIAS SOURCE 3
thereof, the electrical field orientations on either side of said
centres being the same in one switching state and reversed in
the other switching state.
4,391,487
OPTICAL HBER CENTERING DEVICE
Paul Melman, Newton, and W. John Carlsen, Boston, both of
Mass., assignors to GTE Laboratories Incorporated, Wal-
tham, Mass.
FUed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,192
Int. C\? G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 350—96.20 11 Qaims
1. An in-line fuse holder for receiving a miniature, plug-in
fuse having a fusible element coupled between a pair of juxta-
posed, laterally spaced co-planar, parallel generally flat fuse
terminals, said in-line fuse holder including in combination:
a casing of insulative material having rigid wall surfaces, two
clip assemblies mounted within said casing, each for en-
gaging one of said flat fuse terminals of said plug-in fuse,
each said clip assembly including first clip means of elec-
trically conductive material, said first clip means being
generally U shaped with legs of the U forming blades
between which said flat fuse terminals are to be received,
second clip means of resilient material, said second clip
means being generally U shap)ed with the legs of the U
forming blades and dimensioned for cooperating engage-
ment with said first clip means in a tightly fitting overlying
relationship with respect thereto, said second clip means
including a tang extending outwardly from the surface of
each of said blades of said second clip means for engage-
ment with said rigid wall surfaces of said insulative casing,
said tang and said rigid wall surfaces cooperating to in-
crease the gripping force provided by said blades of said
second clip means against the blades of said first clip
means thereby to urge said blades of said first clip means
into low electrical resistance contacting engagement with
said fuse terminals and means extending from said first clip
means for permanent external in-line electrical connection
of said fuse holder.
1. An optical fiber centering device comprising
(a) fiber receiving means having three sections, wherein each
of said three sections is substantially identical to each other,
and wherein each of said sections has a uniform cross-sec-
tional configuration at right angles along a major portion of
its length forming a boundary of fixed perimeter, and
(b) a receiving member having an axial centrosymmetric sur-
face of revolution with respect to a fixed axis, said member
having a cylindrical, concentric recess therewithin for hold-
ing said sections in assembled relationship, wherein said
boundary of one of said sections includes a first portion
adapted to mate with a matable portion of said boundary of
a second of said sections, said boundary of said one of said
sections includes a second portion adapted to mate with a
matable portion of said boundary of a third of said sections,
said boundary of said one of said sections includes a third
portion contiguous to said first portion and said second
portion for engaging an optical fiber along said length, and
said boundary of said one of said sections includes a fourth
portion contiguous to said first portion and said second
portion but not to said third portion for engaging the cylin-
drical wall defined by said concentric recess, wherein said
recess terminates with a planar wall perpendicular to said
axis, and wherein said fourth portion engages said cylindri-
cal wall along a fraction of said fourth portion,
said device being adapted to hold an optical fiber along said
axis.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
181
II 4,391,488
MOUNT DEVICE OF AN INTERCHANGEABLE LENS
Sunao Ishizaka, and Toshiaki Hozumi, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Kogaku K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,356
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1979, 54/115752
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 9, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 G02B 7/02; G03B 7/20
U.S. Q. 350—257 9 Qaims
1 1 4,391,489
LIQUID CRYSTAL MATERIALS CONTAINING
PLEOCHROIC ANTHRAQUINONE DYES
Kenneth J. Harrison, Malvern Link; Edward P. Raynes, Mal-
vern; Frances C. Saunders, Malvern Wells, and David J.
Thompson, Whitefield, all of England, assignors to The Secre-
tary of State for Defence in Her Britannic Majesty's Govern-
ment of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern
Ireland, London, England
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,123
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 29, 1980,
8024761
Int. Q.3 G02F 1/13; C09K 3/U
U.S. Q. 350—349 25 Qaims
1. A material suitable for a guest-host liquid crystal device
comprising a solution of a liquid crystal material and a pleo-
chroic dye wherein the pleochroic dye comprises at least one
compound having a formula:
NHR
wherein R is H or lower alkyl; and each of Ri and R2 indepen-
dently represents alkyl containing between 1 and 10 carbon
atoms.
4,391,490
INTERFACE FOR PROXIMITY COUPLED
ELEp'RO-OPTIC DEVICES
David H. Hartke, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Xerox Corpo-
ration, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,478
Int. Q.3 G02F 1/03
U.S. Q. 350—356 6 Qaims
1. In a lens system comprising an interchangeable lens hav-
ing a mount mountable on a camera having an electric circuit
associated with exposure control and a displaceable actuating
member for correcting said electric circuit so as to be accom-
modated to the focal length of the interchangeable lens
mounted, and a conversion lens having an optical system for
converting the focal length of said interchangeable lens and
mountable between said interchangeable lens and the camera,
the improvement comprising:
a signal member provided on said interchangeable lens pro-
jectedly from one end of said mount and engageable with
said actuating member so as to close said displacement
when said interchangeable lens is mounted on the camera
through said mount, said signal member having an engag-
ing end portion engageable with said actuating member,
said engaging end portion lying at a position determined
relative to said mount for displacing said actuating mem-
ber by an amount proportional to the logarithm of the
focal length of said interchangeable lens; and
a transmission member provided on said conversion lens and
positioned between said signal member and said actuating
member when said conversion lens is mounted, said trans-
mission member being slidable by said signal member by
an amount corresponding to the position of said engaging
end portion and displacing said actuating member by an
amount proportional to the logarithm of said focal length
converted in response to said sliding and the mounting of
said conversion lens onto the camera.
/
1. In an electro-optic device including an electro-optic ele-
ment, a plurality of electrodes for applying encoded data sam-
ples, and means for urging the plurality of electrodes toward a
surface of the electro-optic element, the improvement compris-
ing:
a plurality of conductors applied to said surface of said
electro-optic element, said conductors being aligned in
substantially the same direction as said electrodes.
4,391,491
PASSIVE ELECTRO-OPTIC DISPLAY CELL AND
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING THEREOF
William G. Freer, Saint-Blaise, Switzerland; John C. Vamey,
Staines, England, and John H. Williamson, Neuchatel, Swit-
zerland, assignors to Ebauches Electroniques, S.A., Canton of
Neuchatel, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 160,748
Int. Q.3 G02F 1/13
U.S. Q. 350—341 10 Qaims
1. A passive electro-optic display cell comprising two glass
plates, a frame positioned between the plates and by which the
plates are maintained at a fixed spacing one from the other to
provide an enclosed space surrounded by said frame, a liquid
Km q.G.— 7
182
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
crystal imprisoned within said space, control electrodes re-
spectively carried by said plates on the facing inner sides
thereof and, on the inner side of each electrode, an alignment
layer for alignment of the molecules of an active constituent of
said liquid crystal, said frame and said alignment layers being
composed of polymerizable substances said substances having
been polymerized simultaneously to produce interpolymeriza-
tion thereof resulting in close chemical bonding between said
frame and said alignment layers which thus together form a
wall which completely encloses the liquid crystal and shelters
it from external influences.
4,391,492
THERMALLY ADDRESSED CHOLESTERIC-SMECTIC
LIQUID CRYSTAL DEVICE
Sun Lu, San Jose, and David B. Chung, Santa Clara, both of
Calif., assignors to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
Company, St. Paul, Minn.
I Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,247
I Int. a.3 G02F 1/13
MS. a. 350—351 134 Claims
COLUMN ELECTRODES
TOPSUBSTR/ffE 12 1
LC MATERIAL 1 1
X BOTTOM
7 SUBSTRATE 13
•ROW HEATING ELECTRODES
the second focusing means while maintaining the first
focusing means at a standstill; and
(c) the third step of providing an attachment lens having
length fA in front of said zoom lens system having a lateral
magnification y3, and making the lateral magnification of
the composite lens system of said attachment lens and the
m
17
di6 de dzo d22 dK d26 ds dx
diS dl7,dl9'd21(*3(d25<d21(d29 rf,,
dii
ne rn no ^2
zoom lens zero without moving a lens group in the zoom
lens system,
whereby the product fAx/3 of said lateral magnification (i and
the focal length fA of the attachment lens is longer than the
focal length at the telephotographic end of the zoom lens
system.
4,391,494
APPARATUS FOR PROJECTING A SERIES OF IMAGES
ONTO DIES OF A SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER
Ronald S. Hershel, Albany, Oreg., assignor to General Signal
Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 264,171, May 15, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,536
Int. a.3 G02B 17/08
U.S. a. 350—442 16 Qaims
1. A thermally addressed visual device which provides a
dark image against a lighter background comprising:
A liquid crystal medium including at least one liquid crystal
I cholesteric compound mixed with at least one pleochroic
dye of high order parameter and having dielectric anisot-
ropy, said medium being thermally sensitive and having a
transition between at least two thermal phases, an upper
thermal phase being a cholesteric phase and a lower ther-
mal phase being a smectic phase, said medium having two
possible light modulating states in said smectic phase, a
first light state being normally substantially light absorb-
ing and a second light state being substantially transpar-
ent; and means to apply a sensitizing voltage to address
portions of said medium to develop said second light
transparent state when said medium passes rapidly into
said smectic phase, the remaining portions of said medium
developing said first substantially light absorbing state.
4,391,493
METHOD TO INCREASE FOCAL DISTANCE AT
TELEPHOTOGRAPHIC SIDE OF A ZOOM LENS
SYSTEM
Akira Tajima, Kawasaki, and Sadahiko Tsuji, Yokohama, both
of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed NoY. 15, 1976, Ser. No. 741,789
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 18, 1975, 50/138500
Int. C\? G02B 15/02, 15/16
U.S. a. 350—422 10 Qaims
1. A method of increasing the focal length at the telephoto-
graphic end of a zoom lens sytem, having first focusing means
and second focusing means, and comprising the following
steps:
(a) the step of making the lateral magnification of a zoom
lens system zero with said first focusing means;
(b) the second step of bringing the lateral magnification of
the zoom lens from zero to a definite value j3 by activating
1. A unit magnification, achromatic, anastigmatic optical
projection system of the catadioptric type particularly suited
for use in microlithography, said projection system compris-
ing:
a concave, spherical reflecting surface having an optical axis
and a first center of curvature;
an achromatic lens positioned between said reflecting sur-
face and said first center of curvature, said achromatic
lens comprising a meniscus lens made from a light flint
glass, said meniscus lens having a first convex surface
facing said reflecting surface, said first convex surface
having a second center of curvature on the opposite side
of said first center of curvature from said meniscus lens,
said meniscus lens also having a concave surface facing
away from said reflecting surface, said concave surface
having a third center of curvature on the same side of said
first center of curvature as said meniscus lens;
said achromatic lens also comprising a plano-convex lens
made from a dense flint glass, said plano-convex lens
having a second convex surface facing said concave sur-
face, said second convex surface having a fourth center of
curvature on the same side of said first center of curvature
as said plano-convex lens, said plano-convex lens also
having a first flat surface away from said reflecting sur-
face, said first flat surface being positioned closer to said
second convex surface than either of said third and fourth
centers of curvature; and
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
183
said a chromatic lens further comprising first and second
prisms for coupling light to and from separate fields on
said first flat surface, said prisms being made from a dense
crown glass and having an optical path length such that
the image and object planes of the projection system are
on the opposite side of said second center -of curvature
from said first flat surface, each of said prisms also com-
prising a second flat surface facing one of said image and
object planes, said second flat surfaces being positioned
closer to said first center of curvature than either of said
third and fourth centers of curvature.
4,391,496
ADJUSTMENT DEVICE FOR A PANCRATIC OBJECTIVE
OF A STEREOMICROSCOPE
Albert Schilling, Aalen, and Wolfgang Schob, Oberkochen, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Carl Zeiss-Stiftung,
Oberkochen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,194
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
1980, 8003643[U]
Int. a.3 G02B 15/16
U.S. a. 350—519 4 Qaims
4,391,495
IMAGE DISPLAY SYSTEM
Anthony R. Mazurkewitz, Middlevillage, N.Y., assignor to The
Austin Company, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,622
Int. a.3 G02B 3/08
U.S. Q. 350—452 10 Qaims
1. An optical system for a visual display comprising:
means for projecting a visual image along a central axis;
a first fresnel lens for receiving said visual image, said first
fresnel lens having fresnel grooves facing said means for
projecting;
second and third fresnel lenses forming a liquid doublet first
fresnel lens pair disposed in front of said first fresnel lens,
said first fresnel lens pair having fresnel grooves facing
each other and a liquid disposed therebetween, said liquid
having predetermined indexes of refraction and dispersion
for color correcting the system;
fourth and fifth fresnel lenses forming a second fresnel lens
pair disposed in front of said first fresnel lens pair, said
second fresnel lens pair having fresnel grooves facing each
other;
said first, second, third, fourth and fifth fresnel lens being
centered on said central axis and extending perpendicular
thereto;
said fresnel grooves being comprised of annular facets hav-
ing a slope determined by dz/dr where:
2 =
cA
1 -h N 1 - (/: -I- 1) cV
-I- £>/^ -I- £/* -I- Fr* -I- Gr^^
and C equals the curvature of said annular facets; r equals the
radical position of said facets; K equals a conic constant
determined by the physical characteristics of said lenses;
and D, E, F and G are aspheric terms which determine the
aspheric characteristics of said lenses.
1. An adjustment device for pancratic objectives, particu-
larly for stereomicroscopes, comprising:
first and second lens group holders, said first and second
holders being displaceable differing amounts in the same
direction along the optical axis of said objectives;
a variable-length connecting element coupling said first and
second holders, said connecting element including a first
arm pivotally joined to said first holder, a second arm
pivotally joined to said second holder, said first and sec-
ond arms being pivotally joined to each other to form a
pivot point;
cam follower means disposed at said pivot point of said arms;
external cam means disposed for engagement with said cam
follower means;
means for biasing said first and second holders together and
to bias said cam follower means into engagement with said
cam means; and
means for displacing at least one of said first and second
holders along said optical axis.
4,391,497
APERTURE STOP FOR MICROSCOPE CONDENSERS
Michio Imada, Kodaira, and Masayuki Naito, Mitaka, both of
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,949
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 7, 1979, 54-
168762[U]
Int. Q.3 G02B 21/08
U.S. Q. 350—523 2 Qaii;|p
1. A microscope assembly including a plurality of objectives
of different magnification, a condensor, and an aperture stop
mounted to a lower part of said miqroscope condensor and
comprising a fixed member having an index mark on the outer
surface thereof and having a rotatable stop ring, each of said
plurality of objectives having a unique color marking thereon,
each different from the other and indicative of the respective
184
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
magnifications thereof, said rotatable stop ring of said aperture
stop being provided with a plurality of unique color markings
thereon equal in number to the number of the plurality of
objectives and fixed in predetermined locations on said stop
ring one of each of the unique color markings on said stop ring
being identical in color marking to the unique color marking of
one of the objectives, whereby when a particular objective
having a particular unique color marking is in use, and said
stop ring is positioned such that an identical one of said unique
color markings on said stop ring is opposite the index mark,
that the aperture diameter of said aperture stop corresponds to
the numerical aperture of the particular objective in use.
three-dimensional directions relative to the other of said mod-
ules, said modules having walls constructed of unidirectional
4,391,498
SPECTACLE FRAME
Roy H. Rengstorff, 4844 Austin Rd., Aberdeen Proving Ground,
Md. 21010
Filed Jul. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 59,923
Int. a.3 G02C 5/14. 5/22
U.S. a. 351—121
29
4
y ,N^ 'v^. A^
X
26
26
__K<i^
light-transmitting material and selectively illuminating certain
46 Claims °^ ^^'*^ modules to thereby form a three-dimensional image.
4,391,500
CAMERA WITH EXPOSURE MEASURING SYSTEM
Tokuichi Tsunekawa, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,428
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165550;
Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165551; Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165552; Nov. 25,
1980, 55-165559; Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165560; Feb. 9, 1981,
56-17819
Int. a.3 G03B 7/081, 17/20
U.S. a. 354—31 13 Qaims
1. An eye protective frame comprising:
a. rim means defining a pair of spaced, side-by-side viewing
windows and a bridge therebetween, said bridge adapted
to engage the face of a wearer;
b. temple yoke support means attached to said rim means
both above and below said viewing windows and inboard
of the outer extremities of said rim means opposite said
bridge a distance sufficient to provide for close proximity
to the temple contour of the wearer's head upon support
of said rim means in position on the wearer's face; and
c. securing means connected to said temple yoke support
means for securing the frame to the wearer with said
temple yoke support means in close proximity to the
temple contour of the wearer's head.
I 4,391,499
IMAGE PROJECTOR
William C. Whitlock, III, 1119 Grayland St., Greensboro, N.C.
27408
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,235
Int. a.i G03B 21/00
U.S. a. 353—122 18 Qaims
1. An image projector for displaying three-dimensional
forms comprising: a plurality of three-dimensional modules, at
least one of said modules aligned in each of the three-dimen-
sional directions relative to the other of said modules, said
modules being constructed of unidirectional light-transmitting
material, illuminating means, said illuminating means being
positioned within said modules, transmission means, said trans-
mission means for directing energy to said illuminating means,
and energy input means, said energy input means communicat-
ing with said transmission means whereby illuminating certain
of said modules provides a three-dimensional form.
13. A method of forming a three-dimensional image com-
prising the steps of: providing a plurality of three-dimensional
modules having at least one module aligned in each of the
1. A light measuring system for a camera including:
(a) 1st light measuring means for measuring the brightness of
an object to be photographed in a predetermined area, said
means producing an electrical signal representing the
brightness of the predetermined area of the object;
(b) 2nd light measuring means for measuring the brightness
of the object in a different area from that for said 1st light
measuring means,
said means producing an electrical signal representing the
brightness of the different area of the object from that
for said 1st light measuring means;
(c) measuring pattern setting means;
(d) computing means responsive to the outputs of said 1st
and said 2nd light measuring means,
said means producing a 1st output representing a combina-
tion of the outputs of said 1st and said 2nd light measur-
ing means in a certain adjusted relationship by said light
measuring patterii setting means, and a 2nd output
representing a combination of the outputs of said 1st and
said 2nd light measuring means in a fixed relationship;
(e) comparing means for comparing said 1st and said 2nd
outputs of said computing means with each other,
said means producing a 1st signal when the difference
between the computed outputs is smaller than a prede-
termined value, and a 2nd signal when the difference
July 5, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
185
tWe
between the computed outputs is larger than the prede-
termined value;
(f) exposure control means for controlling exposure in accor-
dance with either one of said 1st and 2nd computed out-
puts; and
(g) control means for applying either one of said 1st and said
2nd computed outputs to said exposure control means,
said means responsive to said 1st signal from said compar-
ing means applying said 1st computed output to said
exposure control means, and responsive to said 2nd
signal from said comprising means applying said 2nd
computed output to said exposure control means.
and transfer to form a plurality of duplicated copies from the
electrostatic latent image formed on the electrostatic charge
retentive member, means for adjusting the development bias
voltage including a manually operable means accessible exter-
nally of the apparatus to enable thef*development bias voltage
to be adjusted during the repeated development and transfer
after the formation of the electrostatic charge latent image to
change the density of the duplicated copies, while the electro-
static charge latent image once formed remains on the charge
retentive member, and means for adjusting the amount of
exposure light before the formation of the electrostatic latent
image, said exposure amount adjusting means and said devel-
4,391,501
CAMERA WITH ATTACHABLE FLASH DEVICE
Karl-Heinz Lange, Bunde, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Balda-Werke Photographishe Gerate und Kunststoff GmbH &
Co., KG, Bunde, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,455
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 5,
1980, 3033463
Int. C1.3 G03B 15/03
U.S. a. 354—149 16 Qaims
Si
1. A camera and attachable flash device in combination,
comprismg:
a camera body including a lens and shutter assembly;
camera on-off means for placing the camera in an opera-
tional or non-operational condition;
a flash device adapted to be mounted on the camera body
and coupled to the lens and shutter assembly, the flash
device including an on-off switch for placing the flash
device in an operational or non-operational condition; and
transfer means coupling said lens and shutter assembly to the
on-off switch of the flash device for operatively setting
the lens and shutter assembly at an appropriate flash set-
ting and for placing the flash device into the off position in
response to the camera on-off means being placed in a
non-operational position.
opment bias voltage adjusting means being coupled to a com-
mon handling member such that, when said common handling
member is operated in one direction, the exposure amount is
decreased and the development bias voltage is decreased and,
when said common handling member is operated in another
direction, the exposure amount is increased and the develop-
ment bias voltage is increased, said common handling member
comprising a common dial rotatably arranged on said housing
and said development bias voltage adjusting means comprising
a variable resistor having a rotating axis coupled to said com-
mon dial by means of a rotating shaft secured to the common
dial.
' 4,391,503
MAGNETIC BRUSH DEVELOPER UNIT FOR
PHOTOCOPIER
Robert J. Pugh, London, England, assignor to Gestetner Manu-
facturing Limited, London, England
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,309
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 2, 1980,
8011042
Int. aJ G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 355—3 DD 9 Qaims
4,391,502
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS HAVING
MEANS FOR ADJUSTING THE REPRODUCTION
PROPERTIES OF SUBSEQUENT COPIES AFTER A
HRST COPY HAS BEEN PRODUCED
Masiyi Nishikawa, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Opti-
cal Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 940,657, Sep. 8, 1978, abandoned. This
application Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,356
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1977, 52-108909
Int. a.^ G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355— 3 DD 2 Qaims
1. An electrophotographic apparatus comprising a housing,
an electrostatic charge retentive member, means for forming
on the charge retentive member an electrostatic charge latent
image, means for developing the electrostatic latent image
while applying a development bias voltage to form a toner
image, means for transferring the toner image to a record
medium, means for successively repeating said development
1. In a magnetic brush developer unit for a photocopier,
comprising:
(a) a developer shell for supporting a magnetic brush of
single component toner in use of the developer unit;
(b) a housing defining a sump below the level of said devel-
oper shell to contain toner for forming a magnetic brush of
toner on said shell;
(c) aperture means to said housing defining a development
zone at which the magnetic brush can project from the
housing;
186
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
(d) a magnetic roller within the develoj)er shell, setting up a
magnetic field around the developer shell;
(e) means operable to drive at least one of the developer shell
and the roller for rotation about a longitudinal axis;
(0 a scraper blade positioned in said housing and directed so
as to remove toner from said developer shell after the
toner has been carried past said development zone on the
developer shell;
(g) a rotatable magnetic member positioned within the hous-
ing below the level of said developer shell; and
(h) means for driving said rotatable magnetic member in use
of the developer unit, for rotation to entrain toner re-
ceived from said scraper blade; the improvement wherein:
(i) said rotatable magnetic member includes magnet means
for magnetically attracting and holding toner on a surface
of said rotatable magnetic member so that a clump of
loosely held toner is formed on the surface of said mag-
netic member, the clump being movable through said
sump along a circular path in contact with the toner in
said sump, to carry said toner upwardly to join a stream of
toner being applied to said developer shell, said toner
being conveyed to a location wherein the magnetic field
around said developer shell magnetically attracts toner
from exterior portions of the clump, thereby avoiding
mechanical agitation and coagulation of said toner.
4,391,504
RECIRCULATING COPY DOCUMENT
Thomas Acquaviva, Penfleld, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,861
Int. CIJ G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 355—3 SH 7 Oaims
ooa I
1. In a precollation copier with a recirculating document
handler in which a set of plural original document sheets is
placed and normally plurally recirculated and copied once per
circulation at the copier imaging station to produce a selected
plural number of precollated copy sheet sets therefrom in a
normal copy sheet output path with a copy fuser, the improve-
ment comprising:
a selectable alternative copy sheet path for feeding copy
sheets from said normal copy sheet output path of said
copier into an input station of said recirculating document
handler;
selectably actuatable copy sheet output path deflector means
for diverting only a first set of copy sheets made from
original document sheets from said normal copy sheet
output path into said alternative copy sheet path to said
recirculating document handler; in which said alternative
copy sheet path extends directly from the fuser of said
copier into said recirculating document handler upon the
actuation of said copy sheet output path deflector means;
selectable non-circulating means in said recirculating docu-
ment handler for automatically ejecting the original docu-
ment sheets from said recirculating document handler
after said original document sheets have been copied only
once, and before said original document sheets are recir-
culated, even though plural copy sets have been selected
to be made therefrom;
and means for automatically plurally recirculating said first
set of copy sheets in said recirculating document handler
in lieu of and as if they were said original document sheets
to copy the remainder of the selected number of plural
copy sets from said first set of copy sheets rather than said
original document sheets.
4,391,505
OVER-PLATEN DOCUMENT REGISTRATION
APPARATUS
Morton Silverberg, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,461
Int. a.3 G03G 15/04
U.S. a. 355—3 R 12 Qaims
,xj, '^■^np—T/:
'' /«PVa —
1. In an original document sheet feeding and registration
apparatus for a copier, in which a document sheet is fed with
a document feeding belt having a diffusely light reflective
surface over a transparent platen imaging station of the copier,
said imaging station having a document illumination exposure
system and a copying lens system under the platen, the im-
provement comprising:
at least one minor spectrally reflective patch on said other-
wise diffusely light reflective surface of said document
belt,
means for feeding the document sheets onto said belt in
synchronism with said spectral patches such that at least
one edge of the document sheet only partially overlies said
patch and a portion of said spectral patch is exposed,
and a photosensor system for detecting an edge of the docu-
ment sheet while the document sheet is over said platen
and within said imaging station and within the field of
view of said lens system, said photosensor system being
optically invisible to said copier,
said photosensor system comprising sensor illumination
means distinct from said exposure illumination system and
photosensor means aimed at a registration ]X)sition on said
platen for detecting changes in the light level from said
sensor illumination means reflected from said spectral
patch,
and wherein said photosensor system detects the arrival of a
document sheet edge at said registration position by sens-
ing the transition in intensity of the reflected illumination
from a spectral patch at said registration position versus
the reflected illumination from a document sheet partially
overlying said spectral patch at said registration position.
4,391,506
DRIVING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
ILLUMINATION TYPE IMAGING SYSTEM
Hiroshi Koide, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,309
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 26, 1980, 55-166341
Int. a.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—8 9 aalms
1. A method of driving a movable imaging system which is
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
187
driven by a first drive source in synchronism with a movable
photoconductive member which is driven by a second drive
source, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) measuring a time period necessary for the photoconduc-
tive member to move a given distance;
(b) comparing the measured time period with a predeter-
mined reference time period to thereby estimate a fluctua-
tion component in the time period of movement of the
photoconductive member in accordance with a result of
the comparison;
2a ?0
(c) presetting or determining a buildup target speed and a
constant target speed during a buildup scanning speed
motion and a constant scanning speed motion of the imag-
ing system in accordance with the estimated fluctuation
component respectively; and
(d) moving the imaging system at the preset buildup and
constant target speeds during buildup and constant scan-
ning speed motions thereof, respectively;
whereby the imaging system is moved in synchronism with
the photoconductive member.
the counter means when the count in the counter means
has a second value, said counter means being constructed
to change its count from the first value to a third value in
response to the first output signal and to change its count
from the second value to a fourth value in response to the
second output signal from the coder means;
30-
ao-
the decoder means being further constructed to produce
control output signals in response to predetermined counts
in the counter means; and
copy operation control means for controlling an operation of
the apparatus in response to the control output signals
from the decoder means.
4,391,508
COUNTER AND TIMING MECHANISM FOR COPYING
APPARATUS
Mitsuo Shibusawa, and Toshiyuki Ogawa, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,980
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 18, 1980, 55-178083
Int. a.' G03G 15/00
U.S. CI. 355—14 CU 6 Qaims
i^n
4,391,507
COPYING MACHINE CONTROL APPARATUS
COMPRISING VARIABLE LENGTH PROGRAM
CONTROL
Goro Mori, and Masaaki Ogura, both of Tokyo, Japan, assign-
ors to Ricoh Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,658
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1980, 55-31764
Int. Q.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. Q. 355—14 R 8 Qaims
1. A copying machine control apparatus comprising:
a moving photoconductive member;
pulse generator means for producing pulses in response to
incremental movements of the photoconductive member;
presettable counter means for counting the pulses;
decoder means for producing set output signals in response
to counts in the counter means;
coder means responsive to the set output signals produced
by the decoder means constructed to apply a first output
signal to the counter means when the count in the counter
means has a first value and apply a second output signal to
1. Electrophotographic copying apparatus comprising:
copy number input means for the desired number of copies
of an original document;
first display means for indicating the set number;
second display means for indicating a copy ready condition
in which the apparatus is ready to perform a copying
operation;
copy starter means for commanding a start of the copying
operation;
timer means for controlling the first display means to auto-
matically return the set number of copies to one if the
copy starter means fails to command the start of a copying
operation during a predetermined period of time after the
number of copies is set by the copy number input means;
and
control means for controlling the copy number input means
to permit the same to set the number of copies even during
a period for which the apparatus stands ready to perform
the copying operation.
188
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,509
ROLLER FUSER APPARATUS IN WHICH COPY SHEET
JAMS ARE MINIMIZED
WiUiani A. Cavagnaro, Fairport, N.Y., assignor to Eastman
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,438
Int. a.5 G03G 15/20
VJS. a. 355—14 FU 7 Qaims
sheets from a source into said paper path, the improvement
comprising:
a pair of normally spaced apart memt)ers;
means for attracting magnetically said members toward one
another so that said pair of members contact and advance
the sheets therebetween along the path with precise con-
trol of the sheets;
dual registration means adapted to stop the sheets forwarded
by said feeder thereby registering and deskewing the
sheets, said dual registration means including immediate
response voice coil actuators with plungers of said actua-
tors acting as registration stops, said members and said
dual registration means being actuated simultaneously
based upon the location of images on said photoreceptor,
said members serving to positively drive the sheets past
the now retracted plungers in synchronism with the im-
ages on said photoreceptor.
7. Apparatus for fusing unfused toner images on copy sheets,
comprising:
first and second rotatable fuser rollers;
drive means for rotating one of said rollers;
expandable bladder means for moving said second roller
between (i) a first position out of engagement with said
first roller, and (ii) a second position in engagement with
said first roller to form a sheet engaging nip for fusing
toner images on copy sheets advanced through said nip;
means for applying pressurized fluid to said bladder means to
expand said bladder means and move said second roller
from said first position to said second position;
means adjacent to said nip for detecting a copy sheet jam in
said nip and for producing a signal when such jam is
detected; and
means responsive to said signal for deflating said bladder
means so as to move said second roller from said second
position to said first position to prevent further driving of
a jammed copy sheet in said nip, said deflating means
including a vacuum source for accelerating the deflation
of said bladder means.
4,391,511
LIGHT EXPOSURE DEVICE AND METHOD
Nobuyuki Akiyama; Yukio Kembo; Yasuo Nakagawa; Susumu
Aiuchi, and Mineo Nomoto, all of Yokohama, Japan, assign-
ors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,193
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 19, 1980, 55-33882;
Aug. 11, 1980, 55-109275; Sep. 26, 1980, 55-132914; Oct. 23,
1980, 55-147539
Int. a.3 G03B 27/52
U.S. a. 355—40 23 Qaims
4,391,510
VOICE COIL ACTUATOR REGISTRATION SYSTEM
Abraham Cberian, Webster, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpora-
tion, Stamford, Conn.
I FUed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,572
I Int. a.3 G03G 15/14. 21/00
U.S. a. 355—3 SH 4 Qaims
1. In a high speed copier having a photoreceptor, an imaging
system for forming images of documents on said photorecep-
tor, a predetermined paper path, and a feeder for forwarding
59c' Cpbocesshg
UNIT
57(17)
57^57, 57L, 5^^
17)
56»-
56h-
56q
56(16)
AIR
SUPPLY
AIR
SUPPLY
■59a
-59b
58d
58e
1. A device for exposing and printing a predetermined pat-
tern on an exposure surface of a substrate, the device compris-
ing:
measuring means for measuring a curvature of the exposed
surface of said substrate,
a chuck including a suction and holding means having a
deformable member for drawing and holding a back sur-
face of said substrate opposite to said exposure surface of
said substrate, and deforming means for imparting a force
to said deformable member and said back surface of said
substrate to deform said substrate,
control means for controlling said deforming means of said
chuck in accordance with the curvature of said exposure
surface of said substrate measured by said measuring
means such that said exposure surface of said substrate
conforms to an image surface of said pattern over an entire
exposure area within a predetermined allowable error,
and
means for carrying and transporting said chuck in a substan-
tially horizontal direction from a substrate deformation
correcting station to an exposure station.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
189
4,391,512
DEVELOPING DEVICE USING MAGNETIC
DEVELOPER
Shunji Nakamura, Kawasaki, and Kozo Arao, Yokohama, both
of Japaa, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 108,058
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 6, 1979, 54-890; Jan.
9, 1979, 54-1634
Int. a.3 G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 355— 3 DD v ^ 9 Qaims
1. A developing device for forming a developed image on an
image bearing member, comprising in combination:
(a) developer holding means having P developer holding
surface adapted to oppose the image bearing member;
(b) means for supplying magnetic developer onto said devel-
oper holding surface;
(c) fixed magnetic field generating means disposed on the
side of said developer holding means opposite to said
developer holding surface; and
(d) magnetic thickness regulating means disposed on the
opposite side of said developer holding means from said
magnetic field generating means and within the influence
of the magnetic field of a magnetic pole of said magnetic
field generating means, said magnetic thickness regulating
means being provided with a tip facing said developer
holding surface and having a width which is smaller than
the width of said magnetic pole of said magnetic field
generating means, said magnetic thickness regulating
means being opposed to said magnetic pole of said mag-
netic field generating means across said developer holding
means to concentrate the magnetic lines of force extend-
ing from said magnetic pole and thereby regulate the
developer layer to a thickness smaller than the gap be-
tween said magnetic thickness regulating means and said
developer holding means.
4,391,513
RANGE nNDING OPTICAL MECHANISM
Makoto Fujiki, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,823
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1979, 54-
179517[U]; Dec. 25, 1979, 54-179518[U]; Dec. 25, 1979, 54-
179519[U]
Int. Q.3 GOIC 3/10; G03B 7/08
U.S. Q. 356—1 6 Qaims
1. A range finding optical mechanism including:
(a) a pair of fixed range finding optical systems each having
an entrance window for introducing therethrough the
light from the subject of range finding, said entrance
windows being spaced a predetermined distance from
each other, said range finding optical systems being
adapted to form object images separately on a predeter-
mined imaging plane, the spacing between said formed
images being variable in accordance with the distance
from said optical systems to the subject;
(b) photoelectric converter means including a plurality of
photosensitive elements arranged in the form of a row on
said imaging plane, said photosensitive elements compris-
ing two sections which together define said row, each of
said sections corresponding to one of said pair of range
finding optical systems, each of said optical systems being
arranged to form an image of the subject on one of said
two sections and said photoelectric converter means gen-
erating electrical signals corresponding to the illumination
distributions of the images so formed; and
(c) a regulating device for said photoelectric converter
means, said regulating device including first regulating
means for displacing said photoelectric converter means
in a plane generally perpendicular to the optical axes of
said pair of range finding optical systems and in a direc-
tion parallel to a line passing through the optical axes of
said pair of range finding optical systems, and second reg-
ulating means for rotatively displacing said photi>electric
converter means in a plane perpendicular to the optical
axes of said pair of range finding optical systems and about
a pivot axis substantially coincident with the center of the
area of one said section of said photosensitive elements of
said photoelectric converter means on which the image of
the subject is formed by one of said range finding optical
systems.
4,391,514
SIDELOOKING LASER ALTIMETER FOR A FLIGHT
SIMULATOR
Larry D. Webster, San Jose, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,224
Int. Q.^ GOIC 3/10; G09B 9/08
U.S. Q. 356—1 11 Qaims
I.V.MOMIOR ?'•,
COMPUTER
1. In a method for determining the altitude of a flight simula-
tor probe moving relative to and above the terrain of a flight
simulator model wherein the imaginary line extending from the
probe in a direction normal to the model is characterized as the
probe plumb line, the steps of:
directing a pencil-like beam of radiation from said probe
onto the model keeping said beam within a plane contain-
ing said probe plumb line to produce a beam spot on said
model;
detecting the location of said beam spot relative to two
orthogonal coordinates with a detector situated remote
from said probe plumb line and having a linear sensitivity
zone optically aligned with said probe plumb line;
varying the angular orientation of the beam within said
190
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
probe plumb line plane and relative to a reference plane so
as to cause said beam spot to impinge on the model site
intersected by said probe plumb line;
determining the angular orientation of the beam relative to
said reference plane; and
utilizing the determined angular orientation of said beam to
determine the altitude of said probe over the terrain of the
model.
4,391,515
OPTICAL TRANSMITTER/RECEIVER APPARATUS
SHARING COMMON OPTICS
Howard M. Forrester, Ridgecrest, and John R. Crisler, China
Lake, both of Calif., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington,
D.C.
1 Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,341 -
I Int. aJ GOIC 3/08
U.S. a. 356—5 1 Claim
M
— •_— . »' ^ 22 20
1. Optical detection apparatus comprising:
means for generating a beam of coherent light;
a discrete optical polarizing component including a plurality
of wedge shaped light transmissive plates arranged in two
groups each group being arranged in a spaced apart stack,
one surface of one of said wedge shaped plates from one of
said groups being positioned to intercept the light from
said coherent light generating means at a predetermined
angle of incidence,
another surface of another of said wedge shaped plates being
arranged to receive incoming light reflected from an
object in an ambiant environment having particular polar-
ization characteristics;
a light detection element;
a lens positioned between said discrete optical component
upon said light detection element; and
means for transmitting light from said coherent light gener-
ating means to said light detecting element, whereby it is
mixed with the coherent light from said discrete optical
component to produce a data signal.
radially through the fiber core and that of the fiber clad-
ding;
(b) measuring the interferogram fringe line shift at a plurality
of points along a fringe line corresponding to a series of
mutually parallel ray chord paths extending through the
core at mutually diverse minimum radial distances from
the core axis; and
(c) sequentially calculating from core peripheral region
inwardly towards the core center that portion of the
measured fringe line shift attributable to discrete differ-
ences in indices of refraction of cylindrical core ring
portions of thicknesses defined by successive minimum
radial distances in the series of ray paths and that of the
cladding.
4,391,517
METHOD OF MEASURING SPLICE LOSS IN OPTICAL
FIBERS
Joseph Zucker, Foster City, and Arthur H. Fitch, Redwood City,
both of Calif., assignors to GTE Automatic Electric Laborato-
ries, Inc., Northlake, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 205,844, Nov. 10, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,360,268. This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,697
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 23,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/84
U.S. a. 356—73.1 13 Qaims
!•> 26
53 , 2bA
35 ' *^^ ' 32B ♦^ ^
4,391,516
METHOD OF DETERMINING AN INDEX OF
REFRACTION PROnLE OF AN OPTICAL FIBER
Luther M. Boggs, Dunwoody, and William B. Gardner, Cham-
blee, both of Ga., assignors to Western Electric Co., Inc., New
York, N.Y. and Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated,
Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Sep. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 941,824
Int. aj GOIN 21/45
U.S. a. 356—73.1 7 Qaims
1. The method of determinig an index of refraction profile of
the core of an optical fiber having a substantially cylindrical
core encased within a surrounding cladding comprising the
steps of:
(a) forming an interferogram with a beam of radiant energy
passing transversely through the optical fiber with the
interferogram having a pattern of mutually spaced inter-
ference fringe lines shifted from a reference line distances
determined by differences between indices of refraction
RADiOMETESi
MEANS 1 30
1. The method of measuring the insertion loss of a splice
between adjacent one ends of first and second optical fibers
comprising the steps of
transmitting reference light in the first fiber;
producing a first measurement Pq of the radiant power of
the light in the first fiber,
producing a second measurement P/j of the radiant power of
only light radiated generally transversely out of the cir-
cumference of only the second fiber in a significant por-
tion of the length thereof that is downstream of the splice
and exhibiting substantial leaky mode radiation as a result
of the occurrence of the splice, for reference light of the
radiant power Pq in the first fiber and incident on the
splice, and
producing an indication of the splice loss from the ratio of
the two measurements.
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
191
4,391,518
DUAL LASER OPTICAL SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR
STUDYING FLUID FLOW
Robert B. Owen, and William K. Witherow, both of Huntsviile,
Ala., assignors to The United States of America as represented
by the Administrator of the National Aeronautics and Space
Administration, Washington, D.C.
I Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,232
I I Int. C1.3 GOirS 27/47
U.S. a. 356—129 6 Oaims
ring-shaped mirror out of the laser oscillator means in such a
manner that the axis of the laser beam and axis of the light are
' ' 4,391,519
AXIS-MONITORING APPARATUS FOR A LASER BEAM
Kouji Kuwabara; Hiroyuki Sugawara, both of Hitachi; To-
shiharu Shirakura, Tokai; Kouji Sasaki, and Satoshi
Takemori, both of Hitachi, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,731
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1979, 54-116195
Int. a.5 GOIB 11/27
U.S. a. 356—153 11 Gaims
1. A laser beam axis-monitoring apparatus, the apparatus
comprising a laser oscillating means for generating a laser
beam, and a light generator means for generating a light for
monitoring an axis of the laser beam, characterized in that
directing means are arranged between the laser oscillator
means and the light generator means for directing the light
from the generator means into the laser oscillator means, said
directing means includes a ring-shaped mirror having an open-
ing at a center thereof, and concave mirror means are disposed
in the laser oscillator means for reflecting the light from the
,1 '^ 2' B '°
22
coincident with both the light and said laser beam from said
laser oscillator means passing through said opening of said
ring-shaped mirror.
1. A method of producing and visualizing simultaneous
images of perpendicular components of refractive index gradi-
ents in transparent substances comprising the steps of:
providing two laser beams, each said beam having a different
wave length;
combining and coUimating said two laser beams into a single
beam containing said two different wave length compo-
nents;
providing a test volume which includes said transparent
substance;
passing said collimated beam through said test volume;
separating said collimated beam into two separate beams
having said different wave lengths;
providing two separate knife edges arranged mutually per-
pendicular to one another;
focusing a first of said separated beams on one of said knife
edges and a second of said beams on the other of said knife
edges;
projecting light allowed to be passed by said knife edges
onto a viewing means; and
producing visual images of mutually perpendicular refrac-
tive index gradients passed by said knife edges on said
viewing means for simultaneous viewing.
4,391,520
TECHNIQUE FOR OPTICAL ALIGNMENT OF A
WORKPIECE
Douglas H. Ziegel, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,350
Int. a.3 GOIB 77/26
U.S. CI. 356—154 21 Qaims
1. A method of aligning a surface of a workpiece with re-
spect to a positioning ring attached to a holder supporting said
workpiece, said holder adapted to rotate said surface, with
respect to said positioning ring, about a first axis, comprising
the steps of:
mounting said holder on an alignment platform adjacent a
positioning block attached thereto for holding said posi-
tioning ring in a predetermined position, said alignment
platform being supported by a table,
exposing said surface to an incident light beam, whereby said
incident beam is reflected from said surface, as a refiected
beam, onto a screen along a path of alignment marks
disposed thereon,
revolving said positioning block, with respect to said align-
ment platform, about said first axis, whereby the point on
said surface where said beam strikes remains substantially
fixed in space, and
rotating said surface about said first axis to change the loca-
tion where said reflected beam strikes said screen,
whereby said surface is properly aligned with respect to
said positioning ring when said refiected beam strikes a
particular location on said screen.
192
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,521
PHOTOMETER HAVING ASYMMETRICAL APERTURE
AND WITH COMPENSATION FOR DIRECTION OF
INaDENCE
Toshihiro Imai, Hachioji, and Toyotaka Yamada, Hino, both of
Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
[ Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,146
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 18, 1979, 54-119832
Int. aj GOIJ J/04
US. a. 356—225 6 Qaims
(34), for guiding a portion of the radiation of said at least one
light source from said input terminals to said radiation mea-
suring means (15), said input terminals being disposed for
receiving radiation from said at least one light source com-
parable with the radiation incident on portions of said at
least one sample respectively adjacent to said input termi-
nals,
wherein, in accordance with the invention, said radiation mea-
suring means (15) comprises,
means (12) for producing a spectral dispersion of radiation
received from said light guiding means and thereby making
spectrally dispersed radiation incident on said radiation
detection means (14), and
means (16) for adjusting said radiation detection means so as to
selectively detect radiation in at least one of a plurality of
spectral regions.
VI -
4,391,523
SCANNABLE DETECTOR SYSTEM FOR ECHELLE
GRATING SPECTROMETERS
Karl J. Hildebrand, Tyngsboro, and John Leeman, Andover,
both of Mass., assignors to Leeman Labs Inc., Tewksbury,
Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 206,445, Nov. 13, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,716
Int. CV GOIJ 3/34, 3/38
U.S. a. 356—328 4 Qaims
1. A photometer comprising a photodetector, a mask having
asymmetrical apertures and arranged before said photodetec-
tor, and a compensation prism arranged in the path of the light
to be incident on said photodetector to compensate for the
asymmetry of the light pencil which passes through said mask
and is incident on said photodetector.
4,391,522
TEST APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING RESISTANCE
TO LIGHT AND WEATHER INFLUENCES
Helmut Schmid, Krefeld; Martin Bock, Duisburg, and Giinther
Kampf, Krefeld, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Original Hanau Heraeus GmbH, Hanau, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,465
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 4,
1979 2940325
Int. a.3 GOIN 77/00; GOIJ 3/38
U.S. a. 356—326 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for determining resistance to light and weather
influences of sample surfaces, said apparatus including, < in
combination, with at least one source of light disposed for
irradiation of said sample surfaces:
fastening means (34) for fastening at least one sample for a
period of time during which radiation from said source is
incident on at least a portion of the surface of said sample,
i radiation measuring means (15) comprising radiation detec-
tion means (14) and radiation indicating means (24; 27,28),
and
light guiding means (1, 2. 3; 29; 8; 9), having a plurality of input
terminals, each in the vicinity of one of said fastening means
1. A scannable detector system for echelle grating spectro-
metric comprising in combination:
a. an echelle diffraction grating for separating radiation
input energy into a spectrum of mixed orders;
b. optical dispersing means for further separating said orders
into a spectral array of discrete monochromatic wave-
length segments;
c. imaging means to image said spectral array in a focal
plane;
d. a first aperture plate positioned in said focal plane, said
plate having a plurality of apertures corresponding to
focal positions of said segments of said array;
e. at least one scannable photodetector positioned behind
said plate to receive and sense any of said wavelength
segments transmitted by said plate;
f means to scan said detector from aperture to aperture to
measure individual wavelength segments in a selected
sequence;
g. a photodetector array mounted behind said first aperture
plate;
h. means to remove said scannable detector from the field of
said plate;
i. a second masking aperture plate having fewer apertures
than said first aperture plate; and
j. mounting means for mounting said second ajjerture plate
between said photodetector array and said first aperture
plate, said mounting means arranged such that said aper-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
193
tures in said second plate align with said apertures in said
first plate.
' ' 4,391,524
METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE QUALITY OF
LIGHT SCATTERING MATERIAL
Edgar F. Steigmeier, Hedingen, and Heinrich Auderset, Horgen,
both of Switzerland, assignors to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,060
Int. a.3 COIN 21/01
U.S. a. 356—338 12 Oaims
U SO
1. The method for determining the quality of a material
having a property of absorbing light to a given penetration
depth comprising the steps of:
(a) exposing one or more regions of said material to a beam
of light of a selected wavelength;
(b) detecting scattered light having an intensity greater than
a threshold intensity from the exposed material to provide
an electrical signal proportional to the intensity of de-
tected scattered light above said threshold intensity;
(c) applying the electrical signal to a visual display device to
control the intensity of a display beam of the device; and
(d) varying said threshold intensity to thereby vary the
intensity of the display beam so as to provide the minimum
intensity of display beam which yields a full display of the
exposed material, wherein the value of the threshold
intensity is a direct measure of the crystalline quality of
the material.
U.S. a. 3!
/Kff/sf ^.f**' :
46
.S4
1. An interferometer comprising:
a beamsplitter member including a surface;
a beamsplitting coating disposed on a first portion of said
beamsplitter member surface for splitting incident light
into a transmitted beam and a reflected beam, said trans-
mitted beam propagating along a first optical path of said
interferometer and said reflected beam propagating along
a second optical path of said interferometer;
a compensator positioned in said first optical path;
a first reflector for reflecting light transmitted by said beam-
splitter;
a second reflector formed by a coating positioned upon a
second portion of said surface of said beamsplitter mem-
ber, such that said second reflector and said beamsplitting
coating are substantially coplanar, said second reflector
for reflecting light from said first reflector;
a retro-reflector for reflecting light transmitted thereto from
said second reflector back toward said second reflector,
said light retracing its optical path back to said beamsplit-
ter;
a third reflector for reflecting light reflected by said beam-
splitter;
a fourth reflector for reflecting light reflected by said third
reflector back to said third reflector and then to said
retroreflector, said retroreflector reflecting light back
toward said third reflector, said light retracing its optical
path back to said beamsplitting coating along said second
optical path, said transmitted beam and said reflected
beam being recombined at said beamsplitting coating.
4,391,526
INTERFEROMETRIC SURFACE CONTOUR
MEASURING ARRANGEMENT
Joseph L. McLaughlin, Marblehead, Mass., assignor to Itek
Corporation, Lexington, Mass.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,426
Int. Q.3 GOIB 11/24
U.S. a. 356—359 23 Qaims
4,391,525
INTERFEROMETER
Robert A. Woodruff, Goleta, Calif., assignor to Ball Corpora-
tion, Muncie, Ind.
Filed Oct. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 83,315
Int. a.3 GOIB 9/02; G02B 27/10
156—346 31 Qaims
1. A method of interferometrically measuring the contour of
a reflective surface, comprising the steps of:
a. projecting a light wave onto the reflective surface such that
a wave is reflected therefrom;
b. interfering the reflected wave with a reference wave to form
a resultant interference pattern;
c. projecting a portion of the resultant interference pattern
onto a recording medium;
d. scanning the reflective surface with the projected wave by
relatively moving the projected wave relative to the reflec-
tive surface; and
e. moving the projected interference pattern relative to the
recording medium synchronously with the scanning of the
reflective surface, whereby the information recorded on the
recording medium is a development of the contour of the
reflective surface.
194
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,527
PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR THE POSITIONING OF AN
OPTICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND A
SPECTACLE FRAME IN RELATION TO EACH OTHER
Jean-Claude Hennequin, Neuilly, France, assignor to Essilor
International, Neuilly, France
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,035
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 23, 1980, 80 01428
Int. a.3 GOIB 11/14: A61B 3/00
US. a. 356—375 11 Oaims
1. A process for positioning an optical measuring instrument
comprising a positioning device and a spectacle frame in rela-
tion to each other, wherein two positioning marks on the
device are arranged in such a way as to define a reference
plane, and that the positioning device and spectacle frame are
moved into a position in which the reference plane and mean
plane of the frame are in a given position in relation to each
other, and by the fact that a semi-transparent mirror is placed
between the frame and each of the positioning marks, each
such mirror, separated from the other mirror, being placed
symmetrically in relation to a median plane of symmetry at
right angles to the reference plane, and forming a plane bisect-
ing the angle formed by the mirrors, and by the fact that the
positioning marks are observed from a point on this bisecting
plane, and that the device and frame are moved in relation to
each other until the reflection of the side outline of the frame
in each of the mirrors coincides with the relevant positioning
mark visible through each mirror.
J42 - 5K -
224
i
230./.. T_: ;_ :
2»„:tti- - -^- X I
h:
i
:rtrci:^tT l
f^
244
250 .
2K ^14 **
US:
»2 -
■:^
: □
'" m
a ^
■1
^Q^
1. A silo system for mixing stored material, comprising:
a mixing silo having a plurality of discharge apertures;
conduit means for conveying material from the discharge
apertures to the receptacle;
a plurality of valve means for controlling material flow, each
of the valve means controlling material flow through a
corresponding one of the discharge apertures;
level sensor means for generating level sensor signals indica-
tive of the material level in the receptacle; and
first means responsive to the level sensor signals for tempo-
rarily opening valve means in a predetermined sequence
when the material level in the receptacle is rising to a first
predetermined point and thereafter keeping all of the
valve means closed until the material level in the recepta-
cle falls to a second predetermined point below the first
predetermined point, said first means additionally com-
prising means for reducing the rate of flow through tem-
. porarily opened valve means when the material level in
the receptacle rises to a third predetermined point be-
tween the first and second predetermined points.
4,391,529
APPARATUS FOR MIXING AND DEGASSING
COMPONENTS OF SYNTHETIC RESINS,
PARTICULARLY THERMO-SETTING SYNTHETIC
RESINS
Wilhelm Hedrich, Ehringshausen; Heinz Krumm, Sinn, and
Erhard Haeuser, Schoeffengrund, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Wilhelm Hedrich Vakuumanlagen GmbH
& Co. KG, Ehringshausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,524
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 12,
1980, 3026492
Int. a.3 BOIF 5/12
U.S. a. 366—266 13 Qaims
I 4,391,528
SILO SYSTEM FOR MIXING STORED MATERIAL
Heinrich Klein-Albenhausen, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Ibau Hamburg Ingenieurgisillschaft Endustreibau
mbH, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 811,618, Jun. 30, 1977. This
application Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,662
Int. a.3 B28C 5/00, 7/04
U.S. a. 366—15 34 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for mixing and degassing components of
synthetic resins, comprising an evacuatable, chamber means
having a top wall, a cylindrical wall structure and a down-
wardly and inwardly tapered conical wall structure and a
bottom wall structure at the lower end thereof, means defining
an opening into said chamber means for facilitating an evacua-
tion of said chamber means, a rotatable worm conveyor cen-
trally arranged in said chamber means and closely surrounded
by an elongated vertically upstanding guide tube, the ends of
which are spaced from the top and bottom walls of said cham-
ber means, securement means for fixedly securing said guide
tube to said chamber means, said guide tube having at its top
end a discharge plate, and including between the lower end of
said guide tube and said conical wall structure of said container
at least one radially extending agitating arm secured to said
worm conveyor at the lower end thereof, the improvement
comprising wherein at least one collecting arm is secured to
and projects radially from said guide tube, said collecting arm
extending above said agitating arm, is spaced a small distance
from said wall structures of said chamber means, and has
means defining a collecting opening which faces in a direction
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
195
opposite the direction of rotation of said agitating arm, and
means defining an opening connecting an interior cavity in said
collecting arm to the interior of said guide tube.
/
4,391,530
ELECTRONIC TIMEPIECE
Takuo Wakabayashi, deceased, late of Saitama, Japan; by
Shigemasa Wakabayashi, legal representative, Nagano, Japan;
Iwao Tahara, Higashiyamato, Japan; Toshiharu Aihara,
Kodaira, Japan; Naoki Takahashi, Fussa, Japan, and Yushin
Matsuo, Chofii, Japan, assignors to Casio Computer Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,515
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1979, 54-126264;
Dec. 6, 1979, 54-158983; Dec. 6, 1979, 54-158986; Dec. 11, 1979,
54-161292; Dec. 11, 1979, 54-161293; Dec. 11, 1979, 54-161294;
Dec. 12, 1979, 54-161813
Int. Q.3 G04B 21/08: GllC 13/00
U.S. Q. 368—63 18 Qaims
4,391,531
ELECTROOPTICAL DISPLAY/LEAD FRAME
SUBASSEMBLY AND TIMEPIECE MODULE
INCLUDING SAME
Dick Yokota, Los Gatos; I>aTid Kuty, Felton, and Malcolm
Kinter, Sunnyvale, all of Calif., assignors to Timex Corpora-
tion, Waterbury, Conn.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,136
Int. d? H05K 5/06
UJS. Q. 368—239 28 Qaims
/
1. An electronic timepiece comprising:
time counter means for counting a reference frequency
signal to form time data;
time display means coupled to said time counter means for
displaying said time data;
first converting means for converting an externally provided
voice sound into voice data;
a semiconductor memory coupled to said first converting
means for storing said voice data;
address assigning means coupled to said semiconductor
memory for sequentially assigning addresses of said semi-
conductor memory;
second converting means coupled to said semiconductor
memory for converting said voice data stored in said
semiconductor memory into a voice signal;
voice reproducing means coupled to said second converting
means for generating a voice sound in accordance with
said voice signal;
externally operable switch means for enabling said semicon-
ductor memory to store said voice data;
voice data writing instructing means coupled to said exter-
nally operable switch means and to said address assigning
means for supplying a writing instruction signal, gener-
ated by operating said externally operable switch means,
to said address assigning means and to said first converting
means to enable storing of said voice data from said first
converting means in said semiconductor memory;
alarm signal generating means coupled to said time counter
means for generating an alarm signal when said time data
coincides with a predetermined alarm time; and
voice readout control means coupled to said alarm signal
generating means for supplying said alarm signal as a
readout instruction signal to said address assigning means
and to said second converting means to enable said second
converting means to convert said voice data stored in said
semiconductor memory into said voice signal so that said
voice reproducing means generates a voice sound corre-
sponding to said voice signal.
«?w.,
1.
ing:
a.
A subassembly for an electronic display device, compris-
a conductive lead frame carrying an integrated circuit
chip and having a plurality of spaced conductor members
each with an inner end connected electrically to said chip
and each with an outer end formed into a resilient contact
finger, the contact fingers being arranged in a preselected
pattern to define an enclosure, and
an electrooptical display having longitudinal edges posi-
tioned within said enclosure, said display having display
electrodes and a plurality of contact terminals connected
to said electrodes and spaced along its edges in such a
pattern that each resilient contact finger of the lead frame
frictionally engages a respective one of the contact termi-
nals when the display is positioned in said enclosure,
thereby establishing electrical connection therebetween
and releasably holding the display between said contact
fingers.
4,391,532
ELECTROMAGNETIC ACOUSTIC TRANSDUCER
Yosbiaki Hara, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Daini Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,161
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53189
Int. Q.' G04C 21/16
U.S. Q. 368—250 11 Qaims
1. In an alarm electronic wristwatch having a watchcase: an
electromagnetic acoustic transducer comprising a base plate
having an upper surface and an undersurface and having a
96
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
plurality of upstanding projections projecting upwardly from
the upper surface, a magnetic core, an excitation coil surround-
ing the magnetic core, a set of permanent magnets, the core,
coil and permanent magnets all being supported by the base
plate, a vibratory plate mounted in spaced relation from the
magnetic core to undergo vibfation in response to the applica-
tion of a drive signal to the excitation coil, a support frame of
generally circular shape extending around the base plate and
having an opening therethrough, a lead substrate comprised of
flexible material mounted on the upper surface of the base plate
and having a lead substrate extension projecting through the
support frame opening and having a plurality of openings
receiving therein respective ones of the base plate projections,
the base plate projections cooperating with the lead substrate
openings to position the lead substrate on the base plate at a
predetermined position, an electrode pattern on the lead sub-
strate, and means electrically connecting at least one of the
terminals of the excitation coil to the electrode pattern for
applying drive signals to the excitation coil; means mounting
the electromagnetic acoustic transducer within the watchcase
with the undersurface of the base plate disposed opposite an
inner surface of the watchcase; and a circuit block connected
to the lead substrate extension projecting through the opening
of the support frame for generating drive signals at pre-
selected alarm times and applying the drive signals to the
electrode pattern to thereby activate the transducer.
thereof, a first packing disposed between said watch case and
bezel, and a second packing disposed between said bezel and
glass, said watch case having an upper receiving portion, an
axially extending inside engaging portion, an annular groove
provided in a lower portion of said axially extending inside
engaging portion, and a lower receiving portion laterally ex-
tending from a lower portion of said annular groove, said bezel
having a peripheral engaging portion for engaging said first
packing, a lower portion opposite said annular groove, a bev-
eled guiding portion at the lower end of said peripheral engag-
ing portion which is positioned lower than the upper edge of
said annular groove, an underside portion laterally extending
from the upper end of said engaging portion which overlaps
and contacts said upper receiving portion of said watch case.
20e
20g
4,391,533
BACK COVER nXING STRUCTURE FOR WRISTWATCH
M asahiko Waki, Tanashi, Japan, assignor to Citizen Watch Co.
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,167
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-21049
Int. CV G04B 37/00
U.S. a. 368—281 5 Qaims
r30d
i^^^D^]
30D 30t)
30a 30a
30D
30b
3ua
30
30c
1. A back cover fixing structure for a wristwatch compris-
ing:
a case band having an inner wall and an outer wall and
having a plurality of projecting portions on said inner
wall, in which said projecting portions project inwardly
toward a center of said case band, each of said inwardly
projecting portions having a screw hole;
a back cover having a plurality of throughholes provided at
positions corresponding to the screw holes of said in-
wardly projecting portions; and
a plurality of screws set in the screw holes of said inwardly
projecting portions through the throughholes of said back
cover for fixing said back cover to said case band.
and an inside annular groove for receiving said second pack-
ing, the upper boundary of said annular groove for receiving
said second packing being spaced from said glass at all times so
as not to contact the upper edge beveled portion, the lower
boundary of said annular groove for said second packing being
extended to the underside of said glass, said bezel being in-
serted from the upper edge of said first packing thereinto, so
that a lower portion of said first packing is expanded into said
annular groove of the watch case, whereby when said bezel is
removed from said watch case, said first packing is held in said
watch case, said glass being downwardly inserted into the
second packing, so that a periphery of the glass dents in said
second packing and that the upper portion of said second
packing presses down on the beveled portion of said upper
edge.
4,391,535
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
AREA OF A THERMAL PRINT MEDIUM THAT IS
EXPOSED BY A THERMAL PRINTER
Roger C. Palmer, Edmonds, Wash., assignor to Intermec Corpo-
ration, Lynnwood, Wash.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,625
Int. a.3 B41J 3/20
U.S. a. 400—120 10 Claims
fUBfrMTF 42
'^^- $l/SS7X4r£ 42
— vv<^^ —
Of swat; 40
mro
T
3frwf£/l/ fi/lSrMZ 42
AA/D&ae4^40
/
'W^
4 391 534
GLASS MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR WATCHES
Osamu Matsumura, and Masataka Matsumoto, both of Tanashi,
Japan, assignors to Citizen Watch Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 114,743, Jan. 24, 1980. This application
Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,840
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 27, 1979, 54-9027[U]
Int. Q\? G04B 39/02
U.S. a. 368—294 7 Oaims
1. A glass mounting structure comprising a watch case, a
bezel, a glass having beveled portions at upper and lower edges
/^£)ir/LOSS
ro /jftrve /a
1. An apparatus for controlling the area of a thermal print
medium that is exposed by a thermal printer, the thermal print
medium being such that any portion thereof is exposed when
its temperature equals or exceeds a predetermined threshold
temperature, the thermal printer including an electrically-resis-
tive thermal print element having a surface that is in good
thermal contact with the thermal print medium and that has an
area equal to the desired exposure area of the thermal print
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
197
medium, the thermal printer further including driver means for
applying an electrical signal having a substantially constant
amplitude to the thermal print element, said apparatus com-
prising:
electrical energy storage means representing the thermal mass
of the thermal print element, said electrical energy storage
means being adapted to provide a first signal whose ampli-
tude is proportional to the instantaneous amount of electrical
energy stored in said electrical energy storage means;
first means for transferring electrical energy into said electrical
energy storage means at a rate proportional to the power
being supplied to the thermal print element by the applica-
tion of said substantially constant amplitude electrical signal
thereto;
second means transferring electrical energy to and from said
electrical energy storage means in relation to the heat trans-
ferred between the thermal print element and the environ-
ment in heat transfer relationship with the thermal print
element, whereby the amplitude of said first signal is propor-
tional to the instantaneous temperature of the thermal print
element;
third means providing a second signal whose amplitude is
related to the threshold temperature of the thermal print
medium; and,
fourth means concurrently enabling the driver means of the
thermal printer and said first means, and concurrently dis-
abling the driver means of the thermal printer and said first
means whenever the amplitude of said first signal exceeds
that of said second signal.
to said layer, said reservoir containing a porous material
impregnated with said coloring material.
' ! 4,391,537
SELECTIVELY ALtERING THE BULK PROPERTIES OF
POLYMER STRUCTURES
William M. Prest, Jr., and Frederick J. Roberts, Jr., both of
Webster, N.Y., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stamford,
Conn.
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,147
Int. a.3 B41J 1/30: B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 400—144.2 18 Qaims
4,391,536
WORD PROCESSOR PRINT WHEEL ASSEMBLY
Michael Miiller, Wadenswil; Herbert Scherrer, Uster, and
Erwin Kagi, Volketswil, all of Switzerland, assignors to Franz
Buttner AG, Zurich, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,307
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 2, 1980,
6608/80 ,
Int. a.3 B41J 1/30. 27/04 I
U.S. a. 400—144.2 10 Claims
1. A method for selectively hardening and toughening the
bulk mass of the character fonts on a polymeric print wheel
without adversely affecting the fiexibility and strength of the
remaining portions of the print wheel which comprises con-
tacting the character fonts of the print wheel with a multifunc-
tional monomer for a time sufficient to diffuse said monomer
into said fonts and irradiating the character fonts with activat-
ing radiation to cause the bulk of the fonts to be hardened and
toughened.
I 4,391,538
SERIAL PRINTER
Hiroshi Miyano, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Alps Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,299
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-100409
Int. a.' B41J 1/30
U.S. a. 400—145.1 12 Qaims
1. A print wheel assembly for a printer of a word processing
machine or the like, comprising:
a type disk formed unitarily with a hub and a peripheral
array of laterally deflectible typefaces connected to said
hub;
an annular color-transfer layer connected to said disk and
overlying said typefaces for juxtaposition with a paper
onto which images of said typefaces are to be transferred
by impact, said transfer layer being provided on a carrier
rotatably mounted on said hub and angularly shiftable
relative to said disk upon rotation thereof to offset succes-
sive points of conuct between said typefaces and the
layer; and
an annular reservoir on said carrier and rotatably mounted
thereby on said disk containing flowable coloring material
I and connected to said layer for transferring said material
1. A type wheel for a serial printer including a disc -shaped
member having a plurality of ap)ertures spaced circumferen-
tially around the outer portion thereof, a plurality of dome
members each covering a respective aperture and formed of a
resilient material enabling each dome member to be deflected
inwardly toward the respective aperture by a snap action
substantially instantaneously upon application of a sufficient
pressing force and then to be returned to its initial position by
its resilience, and a plurality of type elements each connected
with the inner surface of a respective dome member and mov-
able out of the plane of said disc-shaped member upon inner
defiection of the respective dome member.
198
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,539
TAPE-RIBBON PRINTING CARTRIDGE
Thomas P. Connoy, Lino Lakes, Minn., assignor to Kroy Inc.,
St. Paul, Minn.
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,709
Int. a.^ B41J 33/14
U.S. O. 400—208 9 Qaims
1. A printing cartridge for supplying image carrying tape
and printing ribbon to a printing station in a printing apparatus
comprising:
a substantially closed cartridge housing having a pair of side
walls and an edge wall extending about the periphery of
said side walls, said cartridge housing including a tape and
ribbon supply section and an elongated guide section,
rigidly and integrally joined with, and extending out-
wardly from, said tape and ribbon supply section for
guiding said image carrying tape and printing ribbon, one
above the other such that a first flat face of said printing
ribbon is superimposed over a first flat face of said image
carrying tape, from said tape and ribbon supply section
toward the printing station of said printing apparatus;
a supply of image carrying tape disposed within said tape
and ribbon supply section;
a supply of printing ribbon disposed within said tape and
ribbon supply section;
limit means for limiting movement of said image carrying
tape from said tape and ribbon supply section in a gener-
ally forward direction and preventing movement of said
image carrying tape in a rearward direction, said limit
means including a bias resisting member disposed between
and at right angles to said side walls and between a portion
of said image carrying tape and said printing ribbon and
bias means for biasing said image carrying tape against
said bias resisting member, said bias means including a leaf
spring having one end engaging and biasing said image
carrying tape against said bias resisting member.
4,391,540
WFTHIN-LINE COLOR CHANGE PRINTING
Edward C. Dougherty, Dracut, Mass., assignor to Centronics
Data Computer Corporation, Hudson, N.H.
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,483
Int. a.3 B41J 35/14. 35/16
U.S. a. 400—212 8 Qaims
-C
£
d
-ctQ-.
E
h-
^^
printhead is traversed on stationary guide means along a paper-
supporting platen to form characters by driving a printing
element against an inked ribbon interposed between the print-
head and the pap)er, apparatus for shifting the ribbon to bring
different colored portions into alignment with the printing
head, said apparatus comprising:
means for effecting a change of color within a single line
from at least four colors of a multi-color ribbon during
carriage traverse and printing of that line entirely indepen-
dent of the position of the carriage along the line includ-
ing;
a cable extending generally from one end of the platen to the
other;
mounted on said carriage, at least a pair of pulleys over
which said cable passes, at least one of said pulleys being
mounted so as to be movable with respect to the other as
a function of the free length of said cable;
an electromagnetically controlled attachment means for one
end of said cable having first and second states, a change
between said first and second states providing a predeter-
mined change of a first value in the free length of said
cable, said attachment means being fixedly mounted with
respect to said guide means;
a second electromagnetically controlled attachment means
for the other end of said cable also having first and second
states, a change between said first and second states of said
second attachment means providing a predetermined
change of a second value in the free length of said cable,
said second value being different from said first value so
that four different combinations of free length of said
cable can be realized, said second attachment means also
being fixedly mounted with respect to said guide means;
means for variably positioning to at least four positions said
multi-color ribbon of at least four colors between said
printing element and said platen, said multi-color ribbon
being contained in a changeable cassette; and
means coupling said positioning means to said movable
pulley whereby the position of the ribbon with respect to
the printing element can be varied independently of car-
riage position by controlling the states of said attachment
means.
4,391,541
MOSAIC PRINTER AND RIBBON GUIDE THEREFOR
Robert E. Einem, Glendale, Calif., assignor to International
Telephone & Telegraph Corp., New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,677
Int. a.3 B41J 35/06
U.S. a. 400—248 4 Oaims
1. In a printer of the type in which a carriage carrying a
/fS >?<?
1. A printer comprising: a base having a paper support; an
inked ribbon approximately parallel to said paper support;
means to support each end of said inked ribbon lengthwise
thereof over said paper support in a manner to permit a piece
of paper to be inserted between said inked ribbon and said
paper support; a print head having one end with a plurality of
styli with ends in a line extending normal to the lengthwise
direction of said inked ribbon thereacross and with axes normal
to said inked ribbon; means to guide said one end of said print
head over said inked ribbon; and a ribbon guide fixed relative
to said one print head end, said ribbon guide including two
parallel wings, pairs of first and second projections fixed to, at
opposite ends and extending between said wings, said first pair
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
199
of projections defining a central longitudinal slot for threading
said inked ribbon therethrough, said second pair of projections
defining another central longitudinal slot for threading said
inked ribbon therethrough, first and second members extend-
ing transversely of and connecting said wings at longitudinally
spaced positions defining a first transverse slot therebetween,
said print head end being fixed within said first transverse slot
presenting said styli ends approximately flush to the surfaces of
said first and second members closest to said inked ribbon, said
first and second pairs of projections being respectively spaced
longitudinally from said first and second members and defining
respective second and third transverse slots on opposite sides
of said first transverse slot and parallel thereto, said first and
second members having first and second lower surfaces in-
clined downwardly toward said one print head end within, said
first slot, said inked ribbon extending over said first pair of
projections, downwardly through said second transverse slot,
flush to and over said first inclined surface, said print head end,
said second inclined surface, upwardly through said third
transverse slot and over the top of said second pair of projec-
tions.
4,391,543
QUICK DISCONNECT PACK
John W. Elsing, Edina, Minn., assignor to Magnetic Peripherals
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,362
Int. a.3 F16B 1/00
U.S. a. 403—24 15 Qaims
4,391,542
DEVICE FOR THE STEPWISE FEED OF PRINTING
MEDIA IN AN ELECTROMECHANICAL PRINT UNIT
Giinter Baitz, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Nixdorf
Computer AG, Paderbom, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,300
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 15,
1980, 3014430
Int. a.3 B41J 11/50
U.S. Q. 400—605 18 Qaims
_ n
1. Apparatus for connecting a disk pack to a disk drive
comprising:
a hub adaptable for mounting thereon one or more disks; said
hub having a central axis;
a stub axially mounted on said hub;
a spindle mounted on said disk drive and having a central
bore with an open end and a central axis; said central bore
adapted to receive said stub;
an annular groove disposed in said bore and having an upper
shoulder;
at least two recesses disposed in said stub, each having a
lower shoulder;
at least two balls movably disposed in relation to both said
spindle and said stub and movable between two positions,
a first position adapted to allow free movement of said
stub into and out of said bore, and a second position
adapted to capture said at least two balls between said
upper and lower shoulders and prevent said stub from
being withdrawn from said bore;
first biasing means for biasing said balls into said second
position after said stub has been inserted into said bore to
a predetermined extent;
locking means for locking said balls in said second position
against a force tending to withdraw said stub from said
bore;
moving means for moving said balls into said first position to
allow said stub to be withdrawn from said bore; and
restoring force means mounted on said hub and connected to
said stub for providing a force lending to withdraw said
stub from spindle when said stub extends into said bore
said predetermined extent.
1. Fof use with an electromechanical printer (10) of the type
having a print unit in which printing media (55,65) is moved
through the printing unit by a stepping drive roller (12) and in
which a drive take-off means (60,61) is provided down stream
in the direction of printing media movement:
- a single sheet printing media conveyor (15) attached as an
accessor to the printer (10); and
a continuous form printing media conveyor (30) having
drive means (28) attached to the single sheet printing
media conveyor (15) as a further accessory;
a drive belt (21) commonly interconnecting the stepping
drive roller (12), the take-off means (60,61), the single
sheet conveyor (15) and the continuous form conveyor
drive means (28) for synchronous operation in the sahie
feed direction; the take-off means (60,61) having rollers of
such circumference in engagement with the printing
media so as to maintain tension on the printing media
when fed therethrough.
4,391,544
SELF-RETAINED FASTENER
James W. Cadwallader, Lansdale, Pa., assignor to SPS Technol-
ogies, Inc., Jenkintown, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 533,103, Dec. 16, 1974, abandoned.
This application Jun. 22, 1976, Ser. No. 698,669
Int. Q.5 F16B 47/00
U.S. Q. 403—155 8 Qaims
1. A positive lock self-retained fastener assembly for engage-
ment in a workpiece, said fastener assembly comprising:
a pin having a shank and an end segment adjacent said shank
at one end of said pin, said end segment including an
annular groove disposed axially inwardly from said one
end of said pin, said annular groove tapering radially
outwardly from the juncture of said shank and said groove
axially along said pin toward said one end to a shoulder
formed axially inwardly from said one end of said pin; and
a cup-shaped ferrule including collar means formed at the
open end thereof to cooperate with said groove and en-
gage said shoulder, thereby to slideably retain said ferrule
200
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
on said pin end segment, an end wall and a substantially
cylindrical wall segment extending from said end wall and
terminating in said collar means, said ferrule further hav-
ing an axially dis]K>sed slot formed through said collar
means and a portion of said cylindrical wall segment, said
slot having a sufficient length such that said collar means
resiliently returns to its initial configuration after radial
outward expansion thereof over said end segment and
radial inward compression thereof when said ferrule is
-c" -f^''
S£
'>>">" '-r^J
apparatus with the free end of the tubular display member
allows the dog to enter the lock aperture to lock releasably the
tubular display member to the base.
4,391,546
SCREW nXING
Robert C. Lyon, Greater Manchester, England, assignor to
BICC Public Limited Company, London, England
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 223,004
Int. a.3 F16B 7m; F16L 41/00
U.S. a. 403—189 6 Qaims
■sa
inserted in and removed from the workpiece, said ferrule
being movable axially along said end segment between a
first position wherein said collar means is adjacent the
juncture of said shank and said groove and a second posi-
tion wherein said collar means is adjacent said shoulder,
said collar means being compressible in said first position
to operatively allow insertion into and removal of said pin
and said ferrule from the workpiece and being operative in
said second position to retain said fastener in the work-
piece.
4,391,545
RELEASABLE LOCKING CONNECTOR
Anthony S. Zummer, Kenilworth, 111., assignor to Metaport
Corporation, Mass.
FUed Jan. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 117,252
Int. a.^ F16B 7/00
U.S. a. 403—189 6 Qaims
1. A screw fixing comprising a device and a channel, said
device comprising a fitting having walls defining an aperture;
a screw having a screw head and a shank, said shank extending
through the aperture in the fitting; and a nut threaded on the
shank; the screw head and the nut each having a bearing sur-
face directed towards one another, one of said bearing surfaces
having parallel ribs which engage said channel; said channel
comprising a base and two limbs, each limb having at its free
end an inturned flange directed towards the base of the chan-
nel, the flanges defining a slot which is open at both ends, said
screw slidably fitting in said slot with one of the nut and screw
head within the channel beneath the unturned flanges with its
bearing surfaces in contact, at least one of the flanges having
spaced formed teeth in its free edge directed towards the base
of the channel, said teeth interlocking with said parallel ribs of
the bearing surface that engages said channel to prevent said
device from sliding longitudinally in the channel.
rZZZZZZZ)
\< <<< i
-^-^
4,391,547
QUICK RELEASE DOWNHOLE MOTOR COUPLING
G. C. Jackson, Jr., Dallas; Kenneth W. Bramlett, Arlington, and
James G. Dennis, Pottsboro, all of Tex., assignors to Dresser
Industries, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,395
Int. C1.3 F16D I/IO
U.S. a. 403—341 4 Qaims
1. A releasable locking connector for use in a display appara-
tus comprising: an elongated base having one end adapted to
be secured to a member of a display apparatus and the opposite
end being free, a catch aperture formed in said base, a stop on
said base, and a holding strap on said base positioned between
the stop and the catch aperture; a catch mounted on said base,
said catch having a dog movably mounted in said catch aper-
ture and extendable through said catch aperture out beyond
the surface of the base, a resilient beam having said dog
mounted on one end, said beam having the other end in abut-
ment with the stop and a portion between the base and the
strap to hold the beam in position, the distance from the edge
of the beam abutting the stop to the surface of the dog spaced
away from the stop being substantially equal to the distance
from the stop to the edge of the catch aperture spaced away
from the stop, said stop including a holding lip for engagement
with the resilient beam; and a tubular display member mateably
receiving the base, said tubular display member having a lock
aperture positioned a distance from a free end of the tubular
display member equal to the distance between the end of the
base adapted to be secured to a member of a display apparatus
and the catch aperture in the base, and being alignable with the
catch ap>erture to receive lockably the dog, whereby alignment
of the one end of the base secured to a member of a display
1. A quick release shaft coupling assembly for an axially
aligned eccentrically rotating upper and lower drive shafts of
a downhole motor comprising:
a first stud member mounted on said upper shaft and having
downwardly extending clutch dog members defining an
outer downwardly inwardly tapered surface and an axi-
ally extending torque transmitting surface;
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
201
a second stud member mounted on said lower shaft and
having upwardly extending clutch dog members defining
an outer upwardly inwardly tapered surface and an axially
extending torque transmitting surface engaging said like
surface of said upper member whereby the upper and
lower members are mutually engaged along at least a
portion of said axially extending surfaces for transmitting
torque therebetween while being free to move generally
axially relative to each other; and
a collar member encircling the engaging clutch dog mem-
bers throughout the axial extent of such engagement said
collar member having an internal surface tapered radially
inwardly from each end for mating intimate engagement
on at least a portion of the outer tapered surfaces of said
clutch dog members with all axial thrust transmitted be-
tween the opposed shafts being supported through said
tapered engaging surfaces between said collar member
and said clutch dog members and defining thrust transmit-
ting surfaces for the coupling, whereby any wear of the
thrust transmitting surfaces is accommodated by the ta-
pered engagement permitting closer axial positioning
between the respective members so that said intimate
contact of the collar and said members is constantly main-
tained during torque transmitting operation.
4,391,549
EXPANSION JOINT INSERTER FOR CONTINUOUS
CURB LAYING MACHINES
Jesse L. Murray, Yuma, Ariz., assignor to The Tanner Compa-
nies, Phoenix, Ariz.
FUed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,468
Int. Q.3 EOlC 2i/02
U.S. Q. 404—87 5 Claims
^rn^"
G
4 391 548
COUp'tING DEVICE FOR FLOOR MAINTENANCE
MACHINES
Terrance J. Malish, 2520 Red Fox Pass, WiUoughby Hills, Ohio
44094
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,368
Int. a.3 B25G i/00; F16D 1/00
U.S. Q. 403—348 " Claims
2. Apparatus for inserting a piece of expansion joint material
into a curb strip of green cast concrete comprising a slip form
of predetermined length and curb shape underneath which
concrete is to be cast, a slot in said slip form, blade means
adapted to move through said slot perpendicularly to the line
of said slip form and through any cast concrete curbing, a
template attached to one side of said blade for movement
therewith, said template having a pushing surface whose out-
line is the conforming image of the curb surface shape, means
for moving said blade into and out of the slot in said slip form,
and means for pivoting said blade means clockwise on the
insertion stroke and counter-clockwise on the retraction
stroke.
4,391,550
GUNNEL SUPPORT SYSTEM FOR USE WITH A BOAT
LIFT
Henry A. Rutter, Qaremore, Okla., assignor to National Hydro-
Hoist Company, Qaremore, Okla.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,967
Int. Q.' B63C 5/02
U.S. d. 405—7 5 Qaims
1. A coupling device adapted for use with floor maintenance
machines of the type which detachably mounts a brush or pad
holder member for carrying a cleaning element, such as a brush
or the like, which machine includes a drive shaft having a
plurality of integral, drive lugs projecting radially therefrom,
said coupling device comprising a plate member having a
generally circular opening extending therethrough, said open-
ing having a plurality of circumferentially spaced, arcuate
recess portions adapted to receive said drive lugs there-
through, said plate member including a first series of inner
peripheral cam-like ramps which communicate at one end with
said recess portions on one side of said plate member, and a
second series of inner peripheral cam-like ramps communicat-
ing with the opposite ends of said recess portions and on the
opposite side of said plate member, said second series of cam-
like ramps each including multiple tapered surfaces which
terminate in integral, arcuate, segmental web portions disposed
generally axially opposite associated of said first series of cam-
like ramps which ramps and web portions coact for automatic
coupling and de-coupling of said plate member relative to said
drive shaft lugs.
1. In combination with a boat lift of the type having a plural-
ity of opposed floatation tanks affixed to a main structure and
an intermediate horizontally disposed platform extending
therebetween, for receiving and supporting a boat thereon in a
substantially longitudinal alignment with said boat lift; a gun-
nel supporting system which comprises a plurality of paired
stabilizing arms, a crossbeam of each pair of subihzing arms,
said crossbeam being horizontally and transversely disposed
beneath said platform, each pair of stabilizing arms having a
^
1
202
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
first stabilizer arm and a second stabilizer arm being trans-
versely spaced from each other, each stabilizer arm being
vertically disposed and extending through said platform so as
to be pivotally connected to its associated crossbeam, means
for pivotally connecting said stabilizer arm to said crossbeam,
means for maintaining said stabilizer arm in a relative vertical
position, means for pivoting said stabilizer arms toward each
other in a transverse plane thereby engaging the sides of a boat
within said stabilizer arms, and a means providing transverse
adjustment of said stabilizer arms.
4,391,551
SNAKE CLEANABLE FLUID FLOW SYSTEM
Walter C. Belcher, 20221 Melvin, Livonia, Mich. 48152, as-
signor to Walter C. Belcher and Gloria Jeanne Belcher, both
of Livonia, Mich.
Filed Mar. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 126,213
Int. a.3 F16L 45/00
U.S. a. 405—43 12 Qaims
1^ snake cleanable fluid flow system comprising, in combi-
najon, a tee defined by a first passageway having first and
second ends and a second passageway which intersects said
first passageway; a baffie in said tee for deflecting a snake
entering said tee first passageway first end and for defiecting a
snake entering said tee first passageway second end into said
second passageway; an elbow defined by a first passageway
having first and second ends and a second passageway inter-
secting said elbow first passageway and having a cross section
that includes first and second sides; a baffle in said elbow for
deflecting a snake entering said first side of said elbow second
passageway into said elbow first passageway first end and for
deflecting a snake entering said second side of said elbow
second passageway into said elbow first passageway second
end; pipe means for connecting one of said elbow first passage-
way ends to one of said tee first passageway ends whereby a
snake inserted in one side of said elbow second passageway is
deflected by said elbow baffle through said elbow first passage-
way, said one elbow first passageway end, said pipe means and
said one tee first passageway end and is deflected by said tee
baflle into said tee second passageway.
4,391,552
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ELIMINATING
CHAMPAGNE EFFECT IN COMPRESSED AIR ENERGY
STORAGE SYSTEMS
John W. O'Hara, Concord, Calif., assignor to Bechtel Interaa-
tional Corp., San Francisco, Calif.
I Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,893
Int. a.^ B65G 5/00
U.S. a. 405—59 11 Qaims
1. Apparatus for providing a continuous hydrostatic head in
a compressed air energy storage system, said system including
a water reservoir at ground level, an underground water stor-
age cavern, and a fluid path connecting the cavern and the
reservoir, the apparatus comprising:
a generally vertical hydraulic compensating shaft defining at
least a portion of said fluid path and having a central axis
and an upper end fluidly communicating with the reser-
voir;
means for fluidly coupling a lower portion of said shaft to
said cavern; and
at least one pressurized water discharge nozzle disposed
adjacent an inner surface of said shaft at a discharge level
spaced from the reservoir and oriented to discharge a
stream of water into the shaft in a direction which imparts
a rotary motion to a column of water in the shaft so that
air bubbles in the water column collect in the vicinity of
the axis of said shaft and a tubular column of water is
formed which is relatively free of air bubbles and is dis-
posed along walls of the shaft and above the nozzles.
4,391,553
HYDRAULIC CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR AND
METHODS OF CONTROLLING THE OPERATION OF
TUNNELLING APPARATUS
Walter Weirich, Dortmund, and Herbert Heitkamp, Werne,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gewerkschaft
Eisenhutte Westfalia, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,385
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 9,
1980, 3025922
Int. a.3 E21D n/00
U.S. a. 405—141 18 Claims
1. In or for tunnelling apparatus which employs a drive
shield, a concrete-reception space defined rearwardly of the
drive shield to receive concrete, during use, to produce a lining
for the tunnel, the space being delimited at the front end by an
annular member and double-acting hydraulic rams with first
and second working chambers usable to position the annular
member; an improved control system for controlling the oper-
ation of the rams, said system comprising pumping means for
providing hydraulic pressure fluid for charging the working
chambers of rams, said pumping means at least including a
plurality of individual pump units and a main pump and means
for selectively connecting the respective working chambers of
the rams to the pump units and to the main pump, wherein the
first working chamber of each ram receives pressure fluid from
the main pump when the connecting means is set to make the
annular member move up towards the drive shield and the
second working chamber of said ram, which tends to decrease
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
203
in volume when the connecting means is thus set, is connected mixture injected contains a catalyst comprising in combination:
to a respective one of the pump units which then functions as (a) at least one of barium, zirconium, cerium, or a lanthanide,
a brake motor.
4,391,554
MOORING SYSTEM BEARING FOR A TENSIONED LEG
PLATFORM
Darrell L. Jones, Ventura, Calif., assignor to Vetco Offshofe,
Inc., Ventura, Calif.
per No. PCTAJS80/01025, § 371 Date Aug. 22, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 22, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00621, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 4, 1982
PCT Filed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 266,023
Int. a.3 B63B 21/50
U.S. a. 405—224
lOOaims
and (b) at least one of vanadium, manganese, iron, cobalt, or
zinc.
1. A mooring system bearing apparatus for a tensioned leg
platform having a vertical mooring tunnel through which the
tension leg passes comprising: an upper tension leg connecting
means; a lower tension leg connecting means; a universal flexi-
ble connector having an external body rigidly connected to
said upper connector means, an internal body rigidly con-
nected to said lower connector means, and means for conduct-
ing axial forces along the tension leg through the connector
while permitting pivotal motion of the lower tension leg
around the connector; at least one cylindrical elastomeric
bearing having a first side attached to said external body; an
elongated bearing sleeve surrounding said external body and
attached to a second side of said elastomeric bearing, said
sleeve sized and shajsed to conform to the inside of said moor-
ing tunnel.
4,391,556
PROCESS FOR CONSOLIDATING GEOLOGICAL
FORMATIONS
Jacques Burger, Bougival; Charles Bardon, and Qaude Gadelle,
both of Rueil Malmaison, all of France, assignors to Institut
Francais Du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,605
Qalms priority, application France, Dec. 28, 1979, 79 32017
Int. a,' E02D 3/12: E21B 33/138
U.S. a. 405—264 16 Qaims
4,391,555
PROCESS FOR CONSOLIDATING GEOLOGICAL
FORMATIONS
Jacques Burger, Bougival; Charles Bardon, and Claude Gadelle,
both of Rueil-Malmaison, all of France, assignors to Institut
Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,604
Oaims priority, application France, Dec. 28, 1979, 79 32018
Int. C1.3 E02D 3/12; E21B 33/138
U.S. a. 405—264 22 Qaims
2. In a process for consolidating a geological formation
comprising injecting into the formation a liquid organic mix-
ture containing at least one polymerizable chemical com-
pound, and injecting, in situ, at the contact of an oxidizing gas,
to cause reactions starting at the normal temperature of the
formation and leading to the production of a solid product
which consolidates this formation without substantially reduc-
ing its permeability, the improvement wherein the organic
6. In a process for consolidating a geological formation,
comprising injecting into the formation a liquid organic mix-
ture containing at least one polymerizable chemical compound
and a catalyst, and injecting, in situ, an oxidizing gas, to cause
reactions starting at the normal temperature of the formation
and leading to the production of a solid product which consoli-
dates this formation without substantially reducing its permea-
bility, the improvement comprising employing as said catalyst,
in combination: (a) lead and (b) at least one of nickel, copper or
zinc.
204
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,557
RETAINING WALL FOR EARTHEN FORMATIONS AND
METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
William K. Hilfiker, Eureka, Calif.; Harold O. Hiinker, de-
ceased, late of Eureka, Calif, (by Louise E. Hilfiker, execu-
I tor), and William B. Hilfiker, Eureka, Calif., assignors to
Hilfiker Pipe Co., Eureka, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 56,826, Jul. 12, 1979, Pat. No.
4,329,089. This application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,326
Int. a.3 E02D 5/20. 29/02
U.S. a. 405—287 8 Qaims
stantially parallel to said planar face of said support mem-
ber,
said guide means comprising arbor extension means
threaded at one end for screwably engaging the tapped
opening of said arbor and tapped at the other end for
screwably engaging the threaded end of said driving shaft
and bearing means for rotatably supporting said arbor,
>
1. A retaining wall structure comprising: a generally rectan-
gular steel wire tray defmed by an elongate floor section ex-
tending over the length of the tray and a face section of a depth
less than the length of the floor section extending at an angle
relative to the floor section, said tray having longitudinal rods
extending continuously over the length thereof and across said
floor and face sections in spaced, generally parallel relationship
to one another and cross rods welded to and extending trans-
versely across said longitudinal rods in spaced relationship to
one another; a screen disposed in spaced, generally parallel
relationship to the face section to the side thereof from which
the floor section extends, said screen being generally coexten-
sive with the face section; and a concrete face coextensive with
and cast around said face section, said face being disposed
between the mat and face section and being of a thickness
sufficient to extend beyond the side of the face section opposite
that from which the floor section extends whereby the face
section functions to reinforce the face.
I 4,391,558
DRILL JIG
LaRelle T. Perry, 104 30 W. Cut Off, Northboro, Mass. 01532
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,505
Int. a.3 B23B 49/00
U.S. a. 408—110 8 Oaims
1. A portable drill jig for guiding a drill bit to bore holes in
a surface at any preselected compound angle and supporting
said drill bit and a hand drill having a driving shaft with a
threaded end and an arbor for sup|X)rting said drill bit with a
tapped opening for screwably engaging said threaded end for
driving said drill bit comprising;
a frame having bottom surfaces defining a bottom plane for
seating upon said surface;
a support member having a planar face, said support member
being pivotally mounted on said frame for angular dis-
placement in a first plane substantially orthogonal to said
planar face;
guide means for guiding said drill bit being linearly displaced
relative to said frame in a second plane substantially or-
thogonal to said planar face of said support member; and
means for pivotally mounting said guide means on said
support member for angular displacement in a plane sub-
whereby linear displacement of said guide means relative to
said frame with said arbor extension means screwably
engaging said arbor and said drive shaft allows said drill
bit to drill a hole in said surface at any preselected com-
pound angle related to the angular displacement of said
support member in said first plane and the angular dis-
placement of said guide means in said plane substantially
parallel to said planar face of said support member.
4,391,559
PLASTIC FASTENER
Akira Mizusawa, Fujisawa, Japan, assignor to Nifco Inc., To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,230
Int. a.3 F16B 13/04
U.S. a. 411—45 1 Qaim
3o 3
1. A plastic fastener comprising a female member provided
with a flange, a leg extended downwardly from the lower side
of the flange and adapted to permit increase in the outside
diameter of the barrel portion thereof, and an insertion hole
bored longitudinally along the axis of the leg downwardly
from the upper surface of the flange and a male member pro-
vided with a head portion and a shaft portion extended down-
wardly from the lower side of the head portion and adapted to
be inserted into the insertion hole of the female member,
whereby panels put together face to face are brought into tight
union by inserting the leg of the female member into through
holes bored at exactly corresponding position in the panels and
July 5, 19i3
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
205
Subsequently forcibly driving the shaft portion of the male
member into the insertion hole of the female member thereby
keeping the leg in its radially expanded state, which plastic
fastener is characterized by providing on the upper surface of
the flange of the female member and on the lower surface of
the head portion of the male member respectively a plurality of
circumferentially spaced undulating cam surfaces disposed
around the common axis of the two members and matched so
that cam faces are brought into intimate contact at the time of
forced driving of the male member and, at the time of release
of the fast union of the panels, the cam faces are caused to slide
on each other by a rotation of the male member and conse-
quently the head portion of the male member is lifted from the
upper surface of the flange of the female member, the shaft
portion of the male member having thread configurations
formed thereon and at least a p)ortion of the internal wall of the
female member including means to threadingly mate with said
thread configuration to assist in the retraction of the male
member, wherein the flange of the female member has a boss
portion of the shape of a short circular column formed at the
center on the upper surface thereof, an annular fitting recess
formed on the peripheral surface of the boss portion and an
undulated cam face formed in the upper surface encircling the
boss portion, while the head portion of the male member is
formed in the shape of a cap containing a descending rim
capable of embracing said boss portion and has a fitting protu-
berance formed on the inner wall surface of the descending rim
of the cap so as to be matched to the fitting recess and an
undulated cam face formed on the lower surface of the de-
scending rim so as to be matched to the undulated cam face on
the flange, the axial dimension of the fitting recess and the
fitting protuberance being substantially equal so as to be func-
tionally interrelated with the undulating cam faces in that
relative rotary movement between the male and female mem-
bers releases the locking interengagement between said protu-
berance and recess.
4,391,560
LID INFEED FOR SPINNING ROD RESTACKER
Carlos Fardin, Paterson, N.J., assignor to Van Dam Machine
Corporation of America, West Paterson, N.J.
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,217
I Int. a.3 B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 414—107 15 Qaims
1. An assembly for the transfer of container lids from the
end-to-end prone disposition on a conveyor, to a stack thereof
with the lids supported on their rims between at least two
spinning rods rotating about a generally horizontal axis, com-
prising:
A. at least one chute disposed adjacent and extending above
said stack, having an upper and a lower vertical slideway,
I and an intermediate slideway defining a two dimensional
forward incline, said incline in two adjacent perpendicular
planes and at an acute angle with respect to the vertical
dimension, to guide said container lids forward and side-
wise to said stack;
B. at least one pair of side walls associated with said chute
along at least a portion of the lateral periphery thereof, to
guide and retain said container lids as they pass along said
slideways;
C. at least one movable wall disposed with its longitudinal
dimension at an acute angle with respect to the vertical,
and proximate to one of said spinning rods, said movable
wall having a movement complementary with the surface
rotation of the proximate spinning rod, and positioned to
receive and impart surface rotation to the rims of the
descending container lids; and
D. at least one horizontally pivotable gate located forward
of said chute and in a plane generally parallel to said upper
and said intermediate slideways, to retain said container
lids traveling downwardly thereon.
4,391,561
SOLIDS PUMPING APPARATUS
Donald A. Smith, Haddam, Conn., and Bruce M. Pote, Playa del
Rey, Calif., assignors to Combustion Engineering, Inc.,
Windsor, Conn.
per No. PCr/US81/00485, § 371 Date Apr. 13, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 13, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/03615, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 28, 1982
PCT Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 343,688
Int. a.5 B65G 53/48
U.S. CI. 414—218 12 Qaims
1. An apparatus for feeding a granular material into a pres-
surized zone comprising: a stationary hollow cylinder having a
bore; a frustoconical reducing nozzle located at a discharge
end of said cylinder; means for feeding the granular material
into said cylinder at an upstream located of said cylinder; a
rotary feeder screw concentrically located within said cylinder
and having helical flights thereon, said flights having a de-
creasing pitch towards the discharge end; means for rotating
said feed screw at high speeds; said flights having an CD only
slightly less than said bore through a majority of the length of
said feed screw, and having a tapered decreasing CD at the
discharge end, the taper being at least as great as that of said
nozzle; said feed screw being located within said cylinder such
that the radial clearance between the nozzle bore and the
tapered flights is significantly greater than that between the
bore of the cylinder and the flights through the majority of
length, and the tapered flight extending through only a portion
of said nozzle; and a columnar plug rotating with said screw
and concentrically located with said nozzle.
4,391,562
ADJUSTABLE TRAILER DRAWBAR
Randall H. Hetzner, 6750 Holland Rd., Saginaw, Mich. 48601
, Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,734
' Int. a.3 B60P 1/28; B60D 1/14
U.S. a. 414-^183 8 Qaims
1. In a trailer having a frame, ground engaging wheels,
means mounting said wheels on said frame, a trailer bed, and a
drawbar for coupling said frame to a towing vehicle, the im-
provement comprising an anchor member fixed to said frame
206
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
between its forward and rearward ends, said anchor member
having a number of vertically spaced attachment points; means
forming a fulcrum adjacent the forward end of said frame and
on which said drawbar bears, said fulcrum being located at a
level between those of the uppermost and lowermost of said
attachment points thereby enabling said drawbar to rock about
said fulcrum to a selected position in which its rearward end is
at a level above, below, or corresponding to the level of said
fulcrum; hitch means at the forward end of said drawbar for
coupling the latter to said towing vehicle; and anchor means
separably connecting said drawbar at its rearward end to said
anchor member at a selected one of said attachment points, said
.one of said attachment points being so selected that said trailer
bed is substantially horizontal when said drawbar is coupled to
said towing vehicle.
coming visible to an operator when fluid pressure enters a
corresponding indicator panel input thereby indicating to
the operator that the bucket is in either its rollback, level,
or rollout position.
4,391,563
BUCKET POSITION INDICATOR ASSEMBLY
Francis H. Victor, Terre Haute, Ind., assignor to J. L Case
Company, Racine, Wis.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,890
Int. C1.3 B23Q 19/00
U.S. a. 414—698 1 Claim
1. In a front end loader including an elongated main body
having an operator's compartment mounted thereon, a pair of
lift arms pivotally connected to said main body and a bucket
rotatably mounted between said lift arms, said bucket being
rotated by a plural element linkage to various positions during
its work cycle including rollback, level, and rollout positions,
the improvement comprising:
a bucket position indicator assembly including a fluid cylin-
der, a slidable actuator, and an indicator panel, said indica-
tor panel being mounted within said operator's compart-
ment, said fluid cylinder being attached to one of said lift
arms, said actuator comprising a piston which is slidably
mounted within said fluid cylinder and a rod member
connected to said piston and also pivotally attached to one
of said linkage elements for reciprocal movement in re-
sponse to rotational movement by said bucket, said piston
being slidably movable within said fluid cylinder in re-
sponse to rotational movement of said bucket during its
work cycle, said rod member including an interior bore
which is open at one end for permitting fluid pressure to
escape into a sealed fluid chamber formed partially by a
recess in said piston surrounded by sealing means carried
by said piston and partially by said cylinder, and means for
constantly communicating fluid pressure to the other end
of said interior bore;
said fluid cylinder including a plurality of orifices along its
length which are connected by conduits to corresponding
fluid inputs at said indicator panel, said sealed fluid cham-
ber becoming aligned with one of said orifices when said
bucket is in each of the rollback, level, or rollout positions
thereby permitting fluid pressure to be applied to only a
corresponding one of said indicator panel inputs, indicator
members movably mounted within said indicator panel,
said indicator members being movable between non-visi-
ble and visible positions, each indicator member being in
fluid communication with only one of said inputs to said
indicator panel, only one of said indicator members be-
4,391,564
EXHAUST PIPE OF TURBINE
Anatoly V. Garkusha, ulitsa 23 Avgusta, 63, kv. 82, and Vladimir
E. Dobrynin, pereulok Zemovoi, 6/4, kv. 49, both of, Khar-
kov, U.S.S.R.
per No. PCr/SU79/00116, § 371 Date Jul. 27, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 23, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01093, PCT Pub.
Date May 29, 1980
PCT Filed Nov. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 198,108
Qaims priority, application U.S.SJI., Nov. 27, 1978, 2689216
Int. a.3 FOID 25/24, 25/30
U.S. a. 415—126 19 Claims
1. An exhaust pipe for a turbine having a given axial thermal
expansion and a last stage including a runner terminating out-
wardly in blades, comprising:
a housing having walls defining a flow duct;
a baffle in said duct;
said baffle having a side surface in the form of a surface of
revolution and an inlet portion having a radius shorter
than the outer radius of said blades of said runner;
said baffle having the longitudinal axis thereof substantially
coincident with the axis of said turbine; and
guide means mounted in said duct for adjustably supporting
said baflle relative to said housing in a direction axial and
transversal of said axis of said turbine.
4,391,565
NOZZLE GUIDE VANE ASSEMBLIES FOR
TURBOMACHINES
Trevor H. Speak, Gloucestershire, England, assignor to Rolls-
Royce Limited, London, England
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,493
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 31, 1980,
8017888
Int. aj FOID 9/04
U.S. a. 415—189 3 Claims
1. A guide vane assembly for a turbomachine comprising a
plurality of segments, each segment having one or more guide
vanes and each segment being mounted in an outercasing by
means of a pin located in a slot wherein either the slot is pro-
vided in each segment and each pin is carried in the outer
casing or the slot is in the outer casing and each pin is carried
by each segment, each slot being angled to a radial plane rela-
tive to the segment so that, in use, forces due to the gas loads
acting on each segment are reacted by a force exerted by the
pin in a direction normal to the length of the slot, the radially
inward component of the force exerted by each pin and the
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
207
radially outward component of the gas load produces a first 4,391,567
couple on the segment that opposes a second couple produced CORROSION PREVENTING DEVICE FOR A MARINE
PROPELLER
Dominick Ciampolillo, 5300 95th St., N., St. Petersburg, Fla.
33708
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,811
Int. a.3 B63L 1/18
U.S. a. 416—146 R 2 Qaims
on the segment by the tangential component of the gas loads
OTid the tangential component of the force exerted by the pin.
4,391,566
DI#USER AND EXHAUST GAS COLLECTOR
ARRANGEMENT
Tousaku Takamura, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan i
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,381
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 14, 1979, 54-146444
Int. Q.3 FOID 25/30; F04D 29/44
U.S. Q. 415—209 2 Qaims
1. A corrosion preventing device for mounting in sea water
on an electrically conductive propeller shaft supporting a
marine propeller composed of a metal having a first galvanic
potential, the propeller being fastened to the shaft by an electri-
cally conductive propeller nut, and in electrical contact there-
with, comprising:
an annular washer having a generally circular raised rim
about the periphery thereof forming a generally cup-
shaped surface, composed of a metal having a second
galvanic potential not greater than said first galvanic
potential, with a central hole concentric with the circular
axis thereof through which said shaft may fit to enable
electrically conductive mounting proximate to said pro-
peller nut, for serving as an electrolytic cathode of the
device;
a generally torroidal anode having a circular periphery
concentric with said axis, composed of a metal having a
third galvanic potential greater than said first galvanic
potential, cast about said rim on the periphery of said
annular washer and exposed to said sea water, for serving
as an electrolytic, sacrificial anode of the device;
said rim of said annular washer providing centripetal sup-
port to said torroidal anode to prevent the anode from
mechanical disintegration during rotation at high angular
velocities while the anode is in a state of protracted sacrifi-
cial corrosion. I
I «
1. A gas turbine engine comprising a diffuser composed of
inner and outer wall members having a common center axis
and radially spaced apart from each other for forming therebe-
tween a diffuser chamber having an annular cross section and
axially opposite gas inlet and outlet ends, the outer wall mem-
ber having a generally frusto-conical peripheral surface axially
enlarging in diameter from the gas inlet toward the gas outlet
end of the diffuser chamber, a stationary casing structure hous-
ing therein said diffuser to form an exhaust gas collector cham-
ber surrounding said outer wall member and having a gas
discharge end directed substantially perpendicularly to said
common center axis, and a pair of ribs extending arcuately on
the outer peripheral surface of said outer wall member and
curved about said center aixs, wherein each of said ribs has an
outer peripheral end extending with a radius of curvature
which is gradually reduced toward said gas discharge end of
said exhaust collector chamber.
4,391,568
GAS COMPRESSOR
William L. Tenney, Crystal Bay, Minn. 55323
Continuation of Ser. No. 917,185, Jun. 6, 1978, abandoned. This
application Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,011
Int. Q.3 F04B 41/04. 17/00
U.S. Q. 417—237 13 Qaims
1. A system for compressing and delivering partly cooled
gas to a desired location, comprising: a tank for storing com-
pressed gas, a platforni secured to the tank, a conventional air
cooled four-cycle single cylinder internal combustion engine
mounted on the platform, a gas compressor mounted on the
platform whereby the tank, platform, engine, and compressor
form a unit-handled assembly, means drivably connecting said
engine to said gas compressor whereby the engine drives the
gas compressor, said compressor comprising engine compo-
nents of an identical air cooled four-cycle single cylinder inter-
nal combustion engine including a crankcase assembly, a cylin-
der attached to the crankcase assembly, a piston, said cylinder
208
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
having a bore accommodating said piston, crankshaft means
connected to the piston, and blower means connected to the
crankshaft means for moving aspirated air toward the cylinder,
shroud means surrounding the blower means for directing air
toward the cylinder, and compressor components including a
valve assembly mounted on the upper end of said cylinder for
controlling the flow of gas into and out of the bore in response
to movement of the piston therein, head means located in
superposed engagement with said valve assembly, said valve
assembly spacing the head means from said cylinder to form an
open space between the head means and said cylinder to mini-
mize the transfer of heat from the head means to said cylinder,
said head means having a gas inlet port and a compressed gas
fluid respectively, a main discharge passage for pumped fluid,
overspill ducting, and valve means comprising a control valve
controlling the apportionment of the first flow between the
main discharge passage and the overspill ducting as a function
of the delivery pressure of the first flow in a sense to increase
the proportion of the first flow by-passed to the overspill
ducting as said pressure increases and to decrease the propor-
tion of the first flow by-passed to the overspill ducting as said
pressure decreases, a transfer passage through which fluid can
flow from the second delivery passage to join the first flow,
said value means further comprising a transfer valve control-
ling, as a function of the delivery pressure of the first flow, the
apportionment of the second flow between the overspill duct-
ing and said transfer passage, the proportion of the second flow
by-passed to the overspill ducting increasing with increase of
the delivery pressure of the first flow and decreasing with
decrease of the delivery pressure of the first flow.
4,391,570
APPARATUS FOR COOLING A CEILING MOUNTED
FAN MOTOR
Qarence Stutzman, 1429 Reedsburg North, Wooster, Ohio
44691
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,669
Int. C1.3 F04B 77/00, 35/04
U.S. CI. 417—353 8 Qalms
\\\\V\\\\\\<^\\\v^V\\\\\\\\\\\\\\^^^
discharge port in cooperative relationship to said valve assem-
bly for gas flow control, means to connect the head means to
the cylinder and secure the valve assembly therebetween, an
after cooler conduit connected to said head discharge port for
carrying hot compressed gas from said head means to the tank,
said conduit including an arcuate portion disposed in circum-
ambient relation to said blower means in the inlet path of the
aspirated air theretoward, and shield means connected to the
shroud means centrally of said arcuate portion of the conduit in
spaced relation to said shroud means and blower means for
confining said aspirated inlet air flow substantially radially
inwardly over and around said arcuate conduit portion toward
said blower means.
I 431,569
POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT PUMP SYSTEMS
Ian T. Bristow, Higham, and Alec Thornelow, Chatham, both of
England, assignors to Hobourn-Eaton Limited, Rochester,
England
FUed Dec. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 101,791
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 13, 1978,
48271/78
Int. a.3 F04B 47/00
UJS. a. 417—302 21 Qaims
1. An apparatus for cooling a motor having a housing within
which all windings are enclosed, the housing having a substan-
tially cylindrical side and two end plates, each end plate having
bearing means mounted centrally therein, the motor having a
rotatable shaft joumaled in the bearing means, comprising:
annular top cap means in concentrically fixed spatial relation
with one of the end plates, annular bottom cap means in
concentrically rotatable spatial relation with the other of
the end plates, fan means for simultaneously drawing
cooling air through the inner peripheries of said top and
bottom cap means in the vicinity of said bearing means,
across both ends of the housing and the side of the housing
and forceably discharging said air laterally away from the
side of the housing.
1. A positive displacement pump system having first and
second delivery passages for first and second flows of pumped
4,391,571
PUMPING APPARATUS FOR PUMPING LIQUIDS SUCH
AS SLURRYS
Thomas A. Craggs, 49, Pacific Rd., Trentham, Stoke-on-Trent,
Staffordshire, England
per No. PCT/GB79/00163, § 371 Date Jun. 13, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jim. 13, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00867, PCT Pub.
Date May 1, 1980
PCT FUed Oct. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 193,188
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 14, 1978,
40592/78
Int. a.J P04B 77/00
U.S. a. 417—403 12 Qaims
3. Apparatus for use in the pumping of a slurry and compris-
ing a pumping device comprising a cylinder and a piston
July 5, 19S3
I
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
209
mounted therein, and which is operative to cause liquid to be
drawn through an inlet port of the cylinder and expelled
through an outlet port thereof, an operating device comprising
a cylinder and a piston mounted therein, a fluid pressure circuit
which includes a fluid sump, a pump operative to pump fluid
under pressure to the operating device, and valve mechanism
operative to control the admission of fluid under pressure to
•(zK7T7'M>'«- ,.
the operating device, and a connecting member extending
between the piston of the pumping device and the piston of the
operating device, wherein during an initial part of each pump-
ing operation of the apparatus, part of the fluid flowing from
the low pressure side of the fluid pressure circuit is returned
directly to the high pressure side of the fluid pressure circuit,
and part is returned to the sump of the fluid pressure circuit.
come wrapped and unwrapped by said first belt when said
first rotatable circular cylinder is rotated;
(b) a pumping assembly including:
(1) a second rotatable circular cylinder rigidly connected to
said first rotatable circular cylinder of said angular posi-
tion belt valve in a coaxial relationship wherein said plu-
rality of the axial holes included in said first rotatable
circular cylinder extend to said second rotatable circular
cylinder;
(2) a circular cylindrical shell disposed around said second
rotatable circular cylinder in an eccentric relationship;
(3) a plurality of the expanding-contracting chambers dis-
posed intermediate said second rotatable circular cylinder
and said circular cylindrical shell; each of said plurality of
the expanding-contracting chambers including one or
more openings to each of said axial holes and one or more
openings to the cylindrical surface of said circular cylin-
drical shell;
(4) a second belt wrapped around said circular cylindrical
shell over a wrap angle less than 360 degrees; and
(5) second one or more idlers training the path and the wrap
angle of said second belt and maintaining the eccentric
position of said circular cylindrical shell with respect to
said second rotatable circular cylinder wherein the ex-
panding chamber of said plurality of the expanding-con-
tracting chambers takes in the fluid medium through said
one or more openings to the cylindrical surface a(\&ia'~^
first rotatable circular cylinder unwrapped by said m;gt
belt and the contracting chamber of said plurality of the
expanding-contracting chambers discharges the fluid me-
dium through said one or more openings to the cylindrical
surface of said circular cylindrical shell unwrapped by
said second belt when said first and second rotatable
cylinders are rotated.
4,391,572
ANitJULAR POSITION BELT VALVE PUMP
Hyok S. Lew, 7890 Oak St., Arvada, Colo. 80005
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,302
Int. a.3 FOIC J/00, 21/12: F04B 43/12; F16K 3/26
U.S. a. 418—45 3 Qaims
38 IT 31 25 le 39 32 2S 19 40 33 « 27
■\\\'' ■ ^ .'
\\\ _
t4'S~ M^SiV^W^^Sj, 14 20 43
4,391,573
HORIZONTAL ROTARY COMPRESSOR WITH OIL
FORCED BY GAS DISCHARGE INTO CRANKSHAFT
BORE
Hideharu Tanaka, Amagasaki; Koji Ishijima, and Toshihide
Koda, both of Sfaizuoka, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 99,727, Dec. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 4,355,963.
This application Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No, 296,054
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec, 28, 1978, 53-166076;
Jan. 5, 1979, 54-512
Int. a.3 Ft)4C 75/00. 29/02; F16N 7/30. 21/00
U.S; CI. 418—63 2 Qaims
1. An angular position belt valve pump or motor comprising:
(a) an angular position belt valve including:
(1) a first rotatable circular cylinder including a plurality of
axial holes, each of said axial holes having one or more
openings to the cylindrical surface of said first rotatable
circular cylinder; *<
(2) a first belt wrapped around said first rotatable circular
cylinder over a wrap angle less than 360 degrees;
(3) first one or more idlers training the path and the wrap
angle of said first belt; wherein, the plurality of said one or
more openings disposed on said cylindrical surface of said
first rotatable circular cylinder and connected to each of
said plurality of axial holes become cyclically open and
closed as said plurality of said one or more openings be-
1. A horizontal rotary type compressor comprising:
a closed shell; «
a rotary compression unit housed within said closed shell,
said rotary compression unit having a cylinder, a cylinder
head and a frame enclosing both ends of said cylmder, a
piston eccentrically roUtable in said cylinder about an axis
extending horizontally, a crankshaft fitted in said piston
and having a central axial lubrication bore, and a vane
dividing the space defined within said cylinder by said
(
2fO
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
piston, cylinder head and frame into a suction and a com-
pression chamber;
said rotary compression unit further having a refrigerant
discharge port;
a refrigerant gas discharge pipe connected at one end to said
refrigerant gas discharge port and having the other end
below the surface level of lubricant oil accumulated in the
bottom of said closed shell and having the downstream
end closed;
a lubricant oil-gas feed tube having one end opening into said
closed downstream end and having the other end opening
into said central lubrication bore in said crankshaft, a
suction pipe extending downwards into the space where
oil is accumulated in said closed shell and closely adjacent
to the closed end of the closed downstream end of said
refrigerant gas pipe and having the upper end obliquely
cut and with the opening facing downstream in the refrig-
erant gas flow for generating a negative dynamic pressure
due to refrigerant gas flow and facing said one end of said
lubricant oil-gas feed pipe, whereby lubricant oil accumu-
lated in the bottom of said closed shell is supplied to said
lubrication bore in said crankshaft through said refrigerant
gas discharge pipe.
431,575
KITCHEN APPLIANCE FOR MAKING FARINACEOUS
PRODUCTS
Harold Osrow, Dix Hills, N.Y., assignor to Osrow Products
Corp., Old Bethpage, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 5, 1980, Set. No. 184,351
Int. a.3 B29B 1/06
U.S. a. 425—190 21 aaims
4,391,574
ROTARY POSITIVE DISPLACEMENT MECHANISM
Louis W. Medel, Jr., Sylmar, and Yoram Barak, Woodland
Hills, both of Calif., assignors to Helen H. Noga, Los Angeles,
Calif., a part interest
Filed Mar, 13, 1980, Ser. No. 130,191
Int. a.3 FOIC 3/02
U.S. a. 418—195 6 Qaims
1. A rotary positive displacement device having a housing: a
first cylindrical chamber and a second cylindrical chamber in
said housing, a first rotor and a second rotor rotatable within
said first and second chambers, respectively, each said rotor
being rotatable about the same center point, said first rotor
rotating in a plane which is substantially perpendicular to the
plane in which said second rotor rotates; a thrust bearing
within said second chamber upon which said second rotor
rotates; said first rotor comprising a rotor body having a plu-
rality of vanes extending outwardly therefrom; said second
rotor having a rim gear with a plurality of vanes extending
inwardly therefrom, said second rotor vanes being designed
and constructed to create a void space between them, said void
space comprising a center circular space and a plurality of
outer spaces, said center space being of sufficient diameter to
allow said first rotor body to rotate therein; and said outer
spaces being of sufficient size to allow said first rotor vanes to
pass therethrough; said outer spaces being broadly hyperbolic
in ahape; each said vane having a leading and trailing edge, and
each said edge being arcuate in shape and having a knife-like
configuration such that there is substantial continuous meshing
between corresponding said first and said second rotor vanes
during interdigitation when said rotors are rotated in either
direction to reduce fluid backpressure.
QJ
"-'<! Idb 100 ■ 7t
^
1. A kitchen appliance for making farinaceous products such
as spaghetti, fettucini, macaroni, manicotti, lasagna, pizza
crusts, taco shells, bagels, breadsticks and like dough food-
stuffs, comprising:
(a) a housing having a mixing chamber for receiving the
ingredients of a selected farinaceous product to be made,
said housing having a bottom wall;
(b) mixer means for mixing the ingredients, including a mixer
shaft mounted in the mixing chamber for rotation about a
generally horizontal axis of rotation, and at least one mixer
element mounted on the mixer shaft for joint rotation
therewith to mix the ingredients;
(c) an extruding chamber mounted on the housing in axially
spaced relationship with the mixing chamber, said housing
having a discharge outlet and a bottom wall elevated
above the bottom wall of the mixing chamber;
(d) wall means bounding a feed chamber located intermedi-
ate of, and in open communication between, the mixing
chamber and the extruding chamber, said feed chamber
having a raised entry zone located above said axis of
rotation;
(e) stuffer means mounted on the mixer shaft for joint rota-
tion therewith, and operative for raising the mixed ingre-
dients above said axis of rotation, and for feeding the
raised ingredients in metered manner into the raised entry
zone for subsequent passage to the extruding chamber;
(0 extruder means for extruding the mixed ingredients from
the discharge outlet, including an extruder screw mounted
in the extruding chamber for rotation about said axis of
rotation, said extruder screw and said mixer shaft extend-
ing co-linearly along, and being jointly rotatable about,
said same axis of rotation; and
(g) drive means for jointly turning the mixer shaft, the stuffer
means, and the extruder screw simultaneously about said
same axis of rotation in a predetermined circumferential
direction to effect mixing only of the ingredients, and at
the user's option, in the circumferential direction opposite
to the predetermined direction to effect lifting of the
mixed ingredients, depositing of the mixed ingredients into
the raised entry zone in a metered manner, and extrusion
of the farinaceous product to be made through the dis-
charge outlet, said drive means including a reversible
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
211
electrical motor and actuating means for energizing the placement of said molds into and out of said press for the
motor to turn the mixer shaft and the extruder screw in stripping and loading of said molds at different distances from
either one of the predetermined and opposite circumferen-
tial directions,
whereby farinaceous products can be made in the kitchen in •
small-scale quantities.
4,391,576
ROTARY DRUM DOUGH DIVIDER
Donald L. Cummins, Mechanicsville, Va., assignor to AMF
Incorporated, White Plains, N.Y.
1 1 Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,766 said press, whereby the respective molds on any level are offset
Int. a.^ A21C 5/04; B29C l/OO from the respective molds on any other level.
U.S. CI. 425—241 11 aaims
4,391,578
MACHINE FOR THE PRODUCTION OF HOLLOW
ARTICLES IN AT LEAST ONE MULTIPLE MOLD
Lothar Scbaar, Heuerssen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hermann Heye, Obernkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 955,474, Oct. 26, 1978, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 900,770, Apr. 27, 1978,
abandoned. This application Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,891
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 5,
1977. 2720129
Int. C1.3 B29C n/OT, C03B 9/7 9i
U.S. a. 425—525 ' 1 Qaim
1. A piston assembly for a transverse through bore cylinder
with diametrically opposed slots and a pair of ports each
spaced outwardly from opposite ends of the slots in the drum
of a rotary drum dough divider, comprising:
a sleeve removably fixed against movement relative a wall of
said cylinder and equally spaced from the ends of said
cylinder;
said sleeve having a pair of end walls engaging and forming
with the wall of said cylinder a pair of axially spaced
sealed interfaces each between opposite ends of the slots
and a different one of the pair of ports;
a double ended piston having a rod extending through said
sleeve and a head connected to each end of said rod to
reciprocate in said cylinder between two terminal posi-
tions with one of said heads being flush with the surface of
the drum in one terminal position and the other of said
heads being flush with the surface of the drum in the other
terminal position;
said piston rod being formed by two rod portions each being
connected at one end to a different one of said heads; and
the adjacent ends of said rod portions being interfitted and
connected together by means extending through said slots
and being movable axially in said cylinder to reciprocate
j said piston.
^
' ' 4,391,577
INSTALLATIONS FOR THE HANDLING OF MOLDS
ASSOCIATED WITH A TRANSFER PRESS
Juan J. Molina Bonillo, Barcelona, Spain, assignor to G. Siem-
pelkamp GmbH & Co., Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,036
Claims priority, application Spain, Feb. 10, 1981, 499.281
Int. a.^ B29C i/00
U.S. a. 425—338 8 Qaims
1. An apparatus for the handling of the molds of a transfer
type press having a plurality of levels comprising channels
flanking said press at each level thereof for guiding the dis-
1. In a multiple neck mold machine having a pressing station
in which a gob of plastic material fed to each neck mold is
transformed into a parison carried by the respective neck mold,
and also a finish forming station in which each parison is
formed into a hollow article of larger diameter than the pari-
son, a combination comprising an elongated carrier; a first
neck mold mounted in a stationary position on said carrier; a
second neck mold mounted on said carrier and movable in
longitudinal direction of the latter relative to said stationary
neck mold; means for moving said carrier along a predeter-
mined path between said pressing station and said finish form-
ing station; means cooperating with said movable neck mold
for automatically increasing the center distance between said
neck molds in dependence on the movement of said carrier
from said pressing to sa^ finish forming station; said center
distance increasing meSns including stationary cam track
means and cam follower means engaged in said cam track
means and connected to said movable neck mold; and wherein
said means for moving said carrier along said predetermined
path comprises an arm connected at one end to said carrier and
being turnable at the other end about a fixed axis normal to said
arm so as to move said carrier along a circular path, said cam
track means being located radially inwardly of said circular
path and having a first portion concentric with said axis and a
second portion likewise concentric with said axis but of a
different radius than said first portion, and connected at oppo-
site ends to said first portion, said center distance increasing
212
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
means including an operating rod connecting said cam fol-
lower with said movable neck mold.
4^91,579
HOT SPRUE VALVE ASSEMBLY FOR AN INJECTION
MOLDING MACHINE
Rocky V. Morrison, Redondo Beach, Calif., assignor to Discovi-
sion Associates, Costa Mesa, Calif.
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,421
Int. aj B29D 77/00
U.S. a. 425—548 7 Qaims
^
radially outwardly open gate passage for flow of material
from the bore into the mold cavity;
means for controlling movement of said valve member be-
tween a first jKJsition with said dispersion head advanced
at least partiall^ through the mold cavity and said gate
passage aligned with the mold cavity for flow of the
material into the mold cavity, and a second position with
said gate passage retracted from alignment with the mold
cavity and said dispersion head positioned generally
within the mold cavity to mold a central aperture into the
disc prior to solidification of the material within the mold
cavity; and
said second mold half including means for receiving said
disjjersion head when said valve member is in said second
position.
4,391,580
LIQUID FUEL SUPPLY SYSTEM FOR AN
ATOMIZATION BURNER NOZZLE
Dale L. Hunsberger, and Frank L. Harwath, both of Rockford,
111., assignors to Sundstrand Corporation, Rockford, III.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,923
Int. a.5 F23C 11/00; F04C 29/08
U.S. a. 431—1 15 Qaims
y
1. A mold assembly for an injection molding machine, com-
prising:
first and second mold halves movable toward each other to
a closed position defining a disc-shaped mold cavity, and
movable away from each other to an open position allow-
ing a molded disc to be removed from said mold cavity;
a valve body mounted on said first mold half and having a
central opening formed therein;
a valve member carried within the central opening for slid-
ing movement toward and away from the mold cavity,
said valve member including a sprue' bushing having a
central bore formed therein for passage of the material
toward the mold cavity, and a dispersion head cooperat-
ing with said sprue bushing for defining an annular and
radially outwardly open gate passage for flow of material
from the bore into the mold cavity;
means for controlling movement of said valve member be-
tween a first position with said dispersion head advanced
at least partially through the mold cavity and said gate
passage aligned with the mold cavity for flow of the
material into the mold cavity when said first and second
mold halves are in said closed position, and a second
position with said gate passage retracted from alignment
with the mold cavity and said dispersion head positioned
generally within the mold cavity to mold a central aper-
ture into the disc prior to solidification of the material
I I within the mold cavity while said first and second mold
halves are still in said closed position; and
means defining a recess formed in said second mold half for
receiving said dispersion head when said valve member is
in said second position.
6. In an injection molding machine for producing centrally
apertured record discs, a valve assembly for controlling flow
of molten disc-forming material into a disc-shaped mold cav-
ity, comprising:
first and second mold halves movable toward each other to
I I define the mold cavity and movable away from each other
to allow a disc to be removed from the mold cavity;
a valve body secured to said first mold half and having a
I I central opening formed therein;
a valve member carried within the central opening for slid-
ing movement toward and away from the mold cavity,
said valve member including a sprue bushing having a
central bore formed therein for passage of the material
toward the mold cavity, and a dispersion head cooperat-
ing with said sprue bushing for defining an annular and
1. A liquid fuel supply system for an atomization burner
having a nozzle comprising, a fuel pump having a pair of
rotatable gears for pumping fuel from a pump inlet port to a
pressure port with a pressure pulse created each time a tooth of
one gear makes full penetration into the space between a pair of
teeth on the other gear, a passage in said pump, a fluid outlet
from the pump connected to said passage and adapted for
connection to said nozzle, and means for pulsing fluid flow to
the nozzle by alternately connecting said passage to said pres-
sure port at the time of a pressure pulse and to the fuel pump
inlet port with the pressure peak of the pulsed flow being
phased together with said pressure pulse.
4,391,581
FLUID COOLED BURNER STRUCTURE
Lloyd W. Daman, Pemberville, and Donald E. Shamp, Millbury,
both of Ohio, assignors to Libbey-Owens-Ford Company,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,350
Int. a.3 F23D 1W6
U.S. a. 431—160 4 Qaims
1. A fuel burner adapted to extend through an opening in a
wall of the tunnel connecting a port with the checkers of a
regenerative-type glass melting furnace comprising:
a. an elongated fuel supply tube having an open angled end
portion for emitting fuel therefrom;
b. a tubular jacket concentrically surrounding a portion of
said fuel supply tube and extending from said angled end
portion;
c. first and second closure members for closing the ends of
the space between the fuel supply tube and said jacket for
forming a chamber therebetween, said first closure mem-
ber having a first planar portion with an aperture therein
aligned with the open angled end of said fuel supply tube
and extending perpendicularly thereto and a second pla-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
213
nar portion extending perpendicular to a portion of said formation of crusts if the temperature of the charge rises fur-
tubular jacket; ther in contact with the hot inner surface, by a cooling medium
d. a pair of longitudinal vanes oppositely disposed within the anj adjusting the temperature of the inside surface of the kiln
space
>etween said fuel supply tube and said jacket and
extending from said second closure member to a point
adjacent to but spaced from said first closure member; and
. means for circulating a coolant within the chamber of said
jacket.
) I 4,391,582
FUEL NOZZLE WITH CONCENTRIC IGNITOR
Frederick C. Cowan, 82 Cove Rd., Oyster Bay Cove, N.Y. 11771
I , FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,909
I Int. a.3 F23Q 3/00
U.S. a. 431—266
12 Claims
io~
-20
■12 ,24
" -"A
\/\/U\/ / ( / i i /: Z:^ J, J^'TZ
V > V t<' > y ■ ^' / V y V /•"> J J
1. A power arc ignitor comprising:
a fuel nozzle, said nozzle being constructed from concentric
metal tubes spaced by a ceramic insulator body;
a means to terminate the insulator body with a semi-conduc-
tive surface to provide a conductive path across an end of
the insulator body from an outer one of the tubes to an
inner one of the tubes;
means to deliver fuel to the inner one of said tubes to flow
therethrough; and
means to controllably connect a high energy positive poten-
tial to the inner tube and a ground potential to the outer
one of the tubes to originate an electrical arc pulsation
from the inner to the outer of said concentric tubes across
said conductive path at the end of the insulator body.
at the point where it becomes submerged below the charge in
said region so that it is at or up to 50° C. below the temperature
of the charge in said regions thereby controllably dissipating
heat through the lining of the kiln to said cooling medium.
4,391,584
NON-CONTACT INFRARED FABRIC TEMPERATURE
MONITORING
Vernon T. Daniel, Oak Ridge, N.C., assignor to Burlington
Industries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,438
Int. a.3 F27B 9/2H. 9/40; F27D 19/00; GOID 11/24
U.S. CI. 432— 8 12 Qaims
' ' 4,391,583
PROCESS OF THERMALLY TREATING BULK
MATERIALS IN A ROTARY KILN
Harry Serbent, Hanau; Detlev Schlebusch, Wollstadt; Gerhard
Renter, Miinchen-Aschheim, and Wolfram Schnabel, Idstein,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Metallgesellschaft
Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfiirt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,953
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 17,
1980 3039212
Int. a.J F27D 7/00, 23/00; F27B 7/38
U.S. a. 432—4 12 Claims
1. In a process of thermally treating bulk material with hot
gases in a rotary kiln below the melting point of the charge
components in the rotary kiln while cooling the shell and
refractory lining of the kiln, the improvement which comprises
cooling several sections of the rotary kiln in which the charge
is at about the highest permissible temperature in regard to the
1. A method of determining textile web temperatures in a
textile web treating oven utilizing an infrared pyrometer, com-
prising the steps of:
passing an open textile web in a first generally horizontal
direction through a textile oven, the web being disposed
substantially in a horizontal plane;
providing an opening in the textile oven passing from the
exterior into the interior thereof, and adjacent an area
wherein the web passes through the oven;
mounting an infrared pyrometer so that it is in operative
association with the oven opening and so that the pyrome-
ter is disposed at a viewing angle of between about 5'-25*
with respect to the horizontal; and
determining textile web temperatures with the pyrometer.
1032 O.G
-■■J JBJHB'li*P I I I
214
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
431,585
IMETHOD OF OPERATING A CONTINUOUS CERAMIC
KILN
Eric K. Riley, Wombourne; Colin D. Smith, Alsager; Garry J.
Yates, Knutsford, and Norris W. Shepherd, Worksop, all of
England, assignors to Air Products and Chemicals, Inc., Al-
lentown. Pa.
FUed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,811
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 26, 1980,
8010147
Int. a.^ F27B 9/04. 9/40; F26B 3/00
U.S. a. 432—23 6 Oaims
g. X >3 's, ,5 [ iS J ,a ,9 ,m
n nh nn n»n nn|r»r'|nn nn'nmiin'nn
X (Tl M rt; I ,1 Hi V'l !•: :•! :■: ; ' .■ i
1. A method of decarbonizing shaped ceramic articles in an
intermittent push continuous ceramic kiln having a heating and
decarbonizing zone, a firing zone and a cooling zone fitted
with means to sense the concentration of oxygen in the decar-
bonizing zone, said means associated with a control fitted to
oxygen or oxygen enriched air injection means associated with
said decarbonizing zone comprising the steps of:
progressively heating said shaped ceramic articles to about
900° C. in the decarbonizing zone to oxidize organic mat-
ter contained in the articles;
maintaining the oxygen concentration of the decarboniza-
tion zone at a minimum level of 7.5% by volume between
pushes as determined by the equation:
C =
A(\ + X)
where
C is the predetermined level at a point in the decarbonization
zone;
Rl is the throughput of clay ware articles during satisfactory
operation of the kiln without oxygen addition;
A is the average oxygen concentration at said point during
satisfactory operation of the kiln without oxygen addition
at throughput rate Ri;
R2 is the new throughput of clayware articles; and
X is between the limits of SO and ^0.5,
by adding oxygen or oxygen enriched air to the decarboniza-
tion zone;
continuing heating of said shaped ceramic articles until firing
is completed; and
cooling said shaped ceramic articles to ambient temperature.
4,391,586
TWO STAGE FLUID BED REGENERATOR
George N. Brown, Lexington, Va., assignor to Westraco Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 199,583, Oct. 22, 1980, Pat. No. 4,338,198.
This application Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320^8
Int. a.3 F27B 15/00: F23B 5/02
U.S.a.432— 58 7aainis
1. A vertically elongated vessel for the regeneration of wet
spent carbon comprising:
(a) a combustion chamber located at the bottom portion of
the vessel, the combustion chamber having a burner with
fuel and air inlet means associated therewith;
(b) a regeneration zone superimposed over the combustion
chamber and separated therefrom by gas distribution plate
means for maintenance of a fluidized bed within the regen-
eration zone, the regeneration zone having a dried carbon
inlet means and means for withdrawing regenerated car-
bon therefrom;
(c) a drying zone located at the top portion of the elongated
vessel, the drying zone having means for introducing wet
spent carbon therein, dried carbon outlet means and outlet
means for passing a drying zone off gas out from the
vertically elongated vessel;
(d) an incineration zone interposed between the regeneration
zone and the drying zone with inlet means for introducing
the drying zone off gas and outlet means for discharging
incineration zone gaseous effluent, the incineration zone
being circumscribed by the inner wall of a segment of the
elongated vessel, and the incineration zone being contigu-
ous and in open communication with the regeneration
zone whereby heat is radiated to the fluidized bed within
the regeneration zone;
(e) gas distribution means located between the incineration
zone and the drying zone for maintenance of a fluidized
bed within the drying zone;
(0 dry carbon transfer means connecting the dried carbon
outlet means and the dried carbon inlet means of the
regeneration zone; and
(g) off gas transfer means connecting the drying zone off gas
outlet means and the incineration zone inlet means for
introducing the drying zone off gas into the incineration
zone.
4,391,587
SLAB HEATING FURNACE
Tadashi Murakami, and Toshikatsu Klshida, both of Himeji,
Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 134,577, Mar. 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,673
Int. a.^ F27B 9/00; F27D 3/00
U.S. a. 432—121 5 Claims
1. In a heating furnace, the combination of water cooled
tubular skid beams, water cooled posts for supporting said
water cooled skid beams, and a post head on the upper end of
each supporting post and having a trough-shaped receiving
July 5, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
21s
portion receiving a skid beam therein, said trough-shaped 4,391,589
receiving portion having a length in the direction of the length SURGICAL DENTAL ARTICULATOR
Joseph R. Monfiredo, San Diego, and Ronald H. Roth, San
Mateo, both of Calif., assignors to Johnson A Johnson Dental
Products Company, New Brunswick, N.J.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,449
Int. a.3 A61C 11/00
U.S. a. 433—63 8 Claims
of the supported skid beam from two to five times the outer
diameter of said water cooled posts.
4,391,588
DENTAL TREATMENT CHAIR
Takahiro Matsui, Uji, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Morita Seisakusho, Kyoto, Japan
FUed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,824
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1980, 55-
160159[U]
Int. a.3 A61G 15/00; A61C 1/14
U.S. a. 433—33 1 Claim
1. A dental treatment chair having a backrest reclinably
mounted on the seat body supported on a base, said backrest
incorporating therein reeling means for flexible connecting
pipes connected to the instruments of said chair, said chair
characterized in that:
said backrest contains therein a dispensing controller for
compressed air and water to be supplied to each of said
instruments, said dispensing controller comprising:
a distributing block for said compressed air and water;
a manometer coupled to said compressed air; and
air-pressure-operated valves for turning ON and OFF the
compressed air and water, said air-pressure-operated
valve being disposed between said distributing block for
compressed air and water and said flexible pipes for said
instruments;
at least one of said air-pressure-operated valves is a distribut-
ing valve for said compressed air and water;
a plurality of couplings disposed in proximity to said reeling
means for connecting a base end portion of said flexible
pipes to a compressed air and water supply side of said
dispensing controller;
a throttle valve for controlling a flow rate of said com-
pressed air and water provided in at least one of said
couplings; and
a plurality of air passageways branched off and connected
and one water passageway connected to the respective
supply sources of compressed air and water are bundled
by one flexible pipe and introduced from said seat body
side into said backrest.
1. A surgical dental articulator for manipulating a set of
dental casts, each said dental cast mounted to a mounting plate,
comprising:
a frame having frame sections hingedly attached along a
hinge axis, said hinge axis corresponding to the terminal
hinge axis of a patient; and
a pair of means for mounting one said mounting plate and
dental cast therewith to each of said frame sections, said
mounting means including:
means for individually and measurably translating said den-
tal casts parallel to three separate, nominally orthogonal
paths, said translating means including linear graduated
scales so that individual distances translated along said
three paths can be read directly;
means for individually and measureably pivoting said dental
casts about three separate, nominally orthogonal pivot
axes, said pivoting means including angular graduated
scales so that individual angles pivoted about said three
pivot axes can be read directly; and
a first support rigidly mounted to one of said frame sections
and along which a second support mounted perpendicular
to said first support moves along a first path of said three
paths to carry one said dental cast parallel to said first
path, said second support defining a second path of said
three paths for movement of one said dental cast parallel
to said second path;
whereby the dental casts can be individually and measurea-
bly translated along three separate linear paths and piv-
oted around three separate rotational axes.
4,391,590
CARTRIDGE FOR VISCOUS MATERIAL
Emery W. Dougherty, York, Pa., assignor to Dentsply Research
& Development Corp., Milford, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 252,558, Apr. 9, 1981, Pat. No,
4,330,280. This application Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,255
Int. a.3 A61C 5/04
U.S. a. 433—90 2 Claims
1. A miniature capsule-like cartridge adapted to be operated
solely by being mounted upon an ejector-type holder and
comprising in combination, a hollow elongated uniformly
cylindrical body of predetermined length and uniform diame-
ter interiorly and exteriorly and molded from rigid plastic
material, one end of said body being open and formed at the
216
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
extremity thereof with an annular relatively short circular
exterior flange of limited width and adapted to be detachably
mounted within a complementary seat in an ejector type
holder, the opposite end of said body being closed by a hemi-
spherical wall of substantially the same uniform thickness as
said body, a discharge nipple of the same material as the body
and molded integrally therewith and extending from said
closed end of said body at an angle to the axis of said body to
facilitate directing discharge from the cartridge to the interior
of an oral cavity, a piston having sidewalls closely complemen-
tary to the inner walls of said body and inserted into the open
end thereof to form a combination closure and ejecting means
for material when contained in said cartridge, the inner end of
said piston being hemispherical and complementary in shape to
the interior surface of the closed end of said body to effect
ejection of substantially the entire contents of said cartridge
when said piston is fully inserted into said body of the car-
tridge, sealing means comprising a cup-shaped cap removably
connected to the outer end of the discharge nipple on said
body to close said outer end of the nipple to seal the contents
of the cartridge against ingress of ambient atmosphere and/or
any surrounding contaminating matter, and said cap being
color-coded to indicate desired properties of the contents of
the cartridge.
431,591
COMBlisED PATTERN HOLDER AND PATTERN
POSITION INDICATOR
Manny C. Hamburger, 2233 Oregon Ct., St. Louis Park, Minn.
55426
Continuation of Ser. No. 88,795, Oct. 29, 1979, Pat. No.
4,302,192. This application Not. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,980
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 24,
1998, has been disclaimed.
I Int a.3 G09B 19/20
U.S. a. 434—95 6 Qaims
JiP
comprising, in combination: means for visually highlighting
the row of the pattern to be followed and means located on the
visually highlighting means for indicating the position of the
pattern to be followed, with the visually highlighting means
being movable upon the pattern support face of the pattern
support member in a direction generally parallel to the side
edges and between the top and bottom edges, wherein the
visually highlighting means comprises an elongated bar mem-
ber having a first end, a second end, a top edge, a bottom edge,
a first face, and a second face, wherein the pattern position
indicating means comprises, in combination: a series of pattern
positions located on the first face of the elongated bar member;
a first indicator; a second indicator; means for independently
operating the first and second indicators allowing the first and
second indicators to indicate the same pattern position at the
same time in the series of pattern positions or different pattern
positions at the same time in the series of pattern positions and
allowing the first and second indicators to be moved from any
pattern position to any other pattern position without interfer-
ing with or requiring movement of the other indicator, with
the independently operating means comprising: means located
on and cooperating with the elongated member for positioning
the first indicator adjacent the top edge of the elongated mem-
ber for indicating the desired pattern position in the series of
pattern positions, and means located on and cooperating with
the elongated bar member for positioning the second indicator
adjacent the bottom edge of the elongated member for indicat-
ing the desired pattern position in the series of pattern posi-
tions.
1. A device for simultaneously holding a pattern to be fol-
lowed and indicating pattern information, with the pattern to
be followed including several rows, with each of the rows
including a plurality of instructions for performing various
stitches, comprising, in combination: a pattern support member
including a top edge, a bottom edge, a first side edge, a second
side edge, a pattern support face, and a back face, with the
pattern support face allowing the support of the pattern to be
followed thereon; means for holding the pattern to be followed
on the pattern support face of the pattern support member; and
notation means for simultaneously delineating and also for
visually summarizing the pattern position in the pattern to be
followed at a single visual location, with the notation means
4,391,592
HYDRAULIC TRIM-TILT SYSTEM
James M. Hundertmark, Fond du Lac, Wis., assignor to Bruns-
wick Corporation, Skokie, 111.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,733
Int. a.3 F15B 15/22
U.S. a. 440—61 7 Qaims
r--:A V_,.^'
1. A hydraulic system for trimming and tilting an outboard
propulsion unit pivotally mounted on a support member for
mounting on a boat, said hydraulic system comprising:
(A) a first extensible hydraulic piston-cylinder unit pivotally
connected to said propulsion unit and to said support
member;
(B) a second extensible hydraulic piston-cylinder unit con-
nected to one of said propulsion unit and said support
member and having an extensible part engaging the other
of said propulsion unit and said support member, said
second piston-cylinder unit including a cylinder having
closed ends, a piston reciprocably mounted in said cylin-
der, and a piston rod connected to said piston and extend-
ing through one of said closed ends;
(C) a hydraulic pump;
(D) a conduit means hydraulically connecting said first and
second hydraulic piston-cylinder units to said hydraulic
pump to supply said first and second hydraulic piston-cyl-
inder unit with hydraulic fluid; and
(E) a pressure relief means to limit the maximum pressure of
July 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
217
the hydraulic fluid supplied to said first piston-cylinder
nit only when said second piston-cylinder unit has ex-
tended a predetermined amount, said pressure relief means
including a relief valve through said piston and a pilot
operated check valve to prevent flow through said relief
valve except when said second piston-cylinder unit has
extended said predetermined amount.
4,391,593
PROPULSION DRIVE SYSTEMS
Edward Whitworth, R.R. #3, Port Rowan, Ontario, Canada
1 1 Filed Oct. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 83,458
1 1 Int. a.5 B63H 1/14
U.S. a. 440—70 13 Chums
JO « 4? SBJtt 14 *0 * i
1. A propulsion drive system for a boat comprising:
(a) a tunnel inset into the bottom of said boat commencing at
the stem and extending a relatively short distance towards
the bow, said tunnel being cylindrical in shape;
(b) a channel in the bottom of said boat extending in front of
said tunnel and gradually decreasing in size towards the
bow until the channel disappears completely, said channel
being open towards the bottom of the boat and having a
cross-sectional area slightly larger than the outside diame-
ter of the tunnel where the tunnel and the channel meet,
said tunnel having a circular leading edge that is tapered
throughout its circumference from an inner wall to an
outer wall of said tunnel to allow for a smooth transition
between the channel and the tunnel;
(c) a shaft extending from a motor in said boat to a propeller
centred widthwise in said tunnel near said stem, said
propeller having a small diameter relative to the size of
said tunnel, said shaft being enclosed in a suitable log;
(d) means for mounting said log within the tunnel to main-
tain the propeller in the centre;
(e) a converging nozzle mounted along the rear of a trailing
edge of said tunnel;
(0 a suitable rudder mounted to the rear of said converging
nozzle;
(g) said log containing water cooled bearings and holes or
water passages in front of each of said bearings so that
water from the location where the boat is being operated
can come into contact with said bearings;
(h) appropriate passages so that the motor is cooled from
water passing through said holes in said log.
4,391,594
FLEXIBLE COUPLING
Alan J. Hannibal, and Charles H. Parr, both of Fairriew, Pa.,
assignors to Lord Corporation, Erie, Pa.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,260
Int. a.3 F16D 3/56
U.S. CL 464—80 * Claims
1. A coupling for transmitting torque and accommodating
misalignment between a drive member and a driven member,
said coupling having a central axis, comprising:
a pair of rigid hubs encircling said axis at spaced locations
along the length thereof, one of said hubs being connect-
able to said drive member and the other of said hubs being
connectable to said driven member, each of said hubs
having a nonaxisymmetrical shaft extending toward and
spaced from the other of said hubs;
a reinforcing ring encircling said axis at a location along the
length thereof intermediate said hubs;
an elongated tubular connecting member encircling said axis
and extending between said hubs, said connecting member
having relatively small diameter opposite end portions
and a relatively large diameter diaphragm portion dis-
posed therebetween;
said end portions of said connecting member being formed in
situ upon and overlying at least a major portion of the
length of respective ones of said hub shafts, and being
permanently anchored thereto;
said diaphragm portion of said connecting member being
formed in situ about said reinforcing ring and having
opposite sides extending closely adjacent thereto in sub-
stantially perpendicular relationship to said axis and in
substantially parallel relationship to each other;
said portions of said connecting member being formed inte-
grally with each other from, and being defined by, high-
strength nonwoven filaments coated or impregnated with
matrix material and each passing repeatedly along sub-
stantially the entire length of said connecting member;
each of said filaments during each pass thereof along the
length of said connecting member having an end-portion
defining section extending completely about the circum-
ference of one of said hub shafts, and a diaphragm-portion
defining section extending along a geodesic path between
said hub shafts and about the periphery of said reinforcing
ring, and another end-portion defining section extending
completely about the circumference of the other of said
hub shafts, whereby said connecting member immediately
resists rotation of said hubs relative to each other upon
rotation of either of said hubs;
said matrix material associated with said diaphragm-portion
sections of said filaments being flexible to permit misalign-
ment-accommodation flexure of said diaphragm portion
during use of said coupling.
[
4,391,595
VARIABLE SPEED, MULTIPLE COMPONENT PULLEY
Thomas D. Wood; Garry K. Reiss, both of Mt. Vernon, and
Larry L. Overly, Fredericktown, all of Ohio, assignors to The
J. B. Foote Foundry Co., Fredericktown, Ohio
Filed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,002
Int. a.3 F16H 55/52
U.S. a. 474—33 16 Claims
10. A variable speed pulley comprising a shaft, a first outer
pulley component rotatably mounted on said shaft in a substan-
tially fixed position axially of said shaft, a second, outer pulley
component rotatably mounted on said shaft in spaced relation-
ship with respect to said first component and in a substantially
fixed position axially of said shaft, and a third, intermediate
pulley component mounted on said shaft between said outer
pulley components, said third pulley component being slidably
and rotatably mounted on said shaft between said outer pulley
components, each of said outer pulley components having a
truncated, conical portion and a central hub portion extending
218
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
outwardly away from the other outer component, each of said
conical portions having an outer rim and a plurality of gener-
ally radially-extending tines extending from said rim to said
hub portion, said tines forming generally radially-extending
slots therebetween in said conical portion and having exten-
sions extending in spaced relationship toward the other outer
pulley component, said third pulley component having a shal-
low truncated conical portion extending in opposite directions
and a central hub portion, said conical portion of said third
component having an outer rim and a plurality of generally
radially-extending tines extending from said rim of said third
12 ,30
component to said central hub portion of said third component,
said tines of said third component forming generally radially-
extending slots therebetween in said conical portion of said
third component, said slots of said outer components being
wider than corresponding portions of said radially-extending
tines of said third component, said tines of said third compo-
nent being received in said slots of said outer components
when said third component is moved into fully inter-nesting
]X>sitions with respect to said outer components, and said tines
of said third component cooperating with said extensions of
said outer components to cause said three components to rotate
together for all positions of said third component on said shaft.
4,391,596
FOLDER
Rudolf Fischer, Ludwigshafen-Oggersheim, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Albert-Frankenthal AG, Frankenthal, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,349
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 14,
1980, 3030706
Int. a.3 B65H 45/16
U.S. a. 493—425 9 Oaims
1. In a folder adapted for two different cutting formats, one
format cutting sheets of one half plate cylinder circumference
and the second format cutting sheets of full plate cylinder
circumference, said folder comprising a fold jaw cylinder, at
least two transverse paper cutters circumferentially spaced
abdut said folding jaw cylinder and located in a transverse
paper cutting station, each transverse cutter including a folding
blade cylinder having at least one folding blade, each folding
blade cylinder being adapted to cooperate with said fold jaw
cylinder to fold a sheet cut from a web by one of said paper
cutters and for forwarding the sheets to a delivery station,
means for making one of said transverse paper cutters active
one at a time, said fold jaw cylinder having tool support points
circumferentially disposed in equal spaced apart relationship
corresponding to one half the smallest paper size to be cut, fold
jaws removably positioned in certain of said tool support
points cooperating with the folding blades of the active trans-
verse cutter, spaced-apart scissor cutting blades for cutting a
paper web into cut sheets some of which are removably posi-
tioned in tool support points alternating with said fold jaws,
said scissor cutting blades running radially ouutwardly from
said fold jaw cylinder, and a knife cylinder for cutting said
paf>er web in cooperation with said scissor cutting blades of
said fold jaw cylinder to provide a smooth cut to said cut
sheets, said knife cylinder being disposed between said trans-
verse paper cutting station and said delivery station, the cir-
cumference of said paper knife cylinder being equal to at least
the greatest pai>er size to which said web is to be cut, said knife
cylinder being adapted to have removably positioned thereon,
with the same spacing of said scissor cutting blades of said fold
jaw cylinder, further scissor cutting blades for use in coopera-
tion with said scissor cutting blades of said fold jaw cylinder,
whereby the removable fold jaws and scissor cutting blades of
the fold jaw cylinder and the removable scissor cutting blades
of the knife cylinder are removed or installed to cooperate
with the active transverse paper cutter.
4,391,597
HANGER FOR CENTRIFUGE BUCKETS
Alireza Piramoon, Santa Clara, and Rebecca J. Woodruff, San
Mateo, both of Calif., assignors to Beckman Instruments, Inc.,
Fullerton, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 277,800, Jun. 29, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,528
Int. a.3 B04B 9/12
U.S. a. 494—20 1 Claim
22a
1. In a centrifuge rotor having an axis of rotation, a circum-
ferential wall, a plurality of spaced arms radiating from said
axis of rotation and supporting said circumferential wall, a
plurality of buckets mounted one between each arm of said
rotor, each said bucket having two outwardly extending pivot
pins on a common axis, said pivot pins each engaging a hanger
mounted on said rotor, said hanger comprising:
an elongated housing having mounting holes;
said housing having an opening transverse of its longitudinal
axis for receiving a pivot pin of a bucket;
said housing having a longitudinal bore intersecting said
opening;
said longitudinal bore having a counterbore forming a shoul-
der in said longitudinal bore;
a plunger slidably disposed in said longitudinal bore;
a spring disposed in said longitudinal bore, said spring acting
on said plunger and urging said plunger in the direction of
said opening for receiving said pivot pin;
said plunger having a flange, said flange abutting said shoul-
JULY 5, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
der of said longitudinal bore when said plunger is at the
extreme end of its sliding travel, thereby retaining said
plunger captive in said longitudinal bore;
said plunger exerting a clamping force on said pivot pin
when said rotor is at rest preventing said bucket from
rocking when being loaded or unloaded, but not prevent-
ing said bucket from pivoting to a horizontal position
when said rotor is rotating, and not preventing said bucket
from resuming a vertical position when said rotor is
stopped;
an elongated slot intersecting said opening of said hanger at
right angles, said pivot pin movable in said slot when
centrifugal force acting on said bucket and said pin over-
comes said clamping force, and movement of said bucket
and said pin resulting in said bucket being extended radi-
ally outward and engaging said circumferential wall of
said rotor.
219
ary delivery lines into said controller means, said control-
ler means including:
metering means for initially metering flow therethrough
to the patient at a preselected flow rate representing the
desired infusion rate of the secondary fluid;
sensing means for sensing the passage of a predetermined
quantity of fluid equal to the quantity of secondary fluid
which is to be infused;
said metering means subsequently metering flow there-
through at a second preselected flow rate representing
the desired infusion rate of the primary fluid to the
patient; and
a combined fluid delivery line extending from said controller
means to the patient for transferring the fluid metered
through said controller means to the patient for infusion.
4,391,598
INTRAVENOUS DRUG ADDITIVE DELIVERY SYSTEM
WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL
Thomas C. Thompson, McKinney, Tex., assignor to Quest Medi-
cal, Inc., Carrollton, Tex. I
1 1 Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,361 j
1 1 Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—65
21 Qaims 4,391,599
APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A CONTROLLED FLOW
OF INTRAVENOUS FLUID TO A PATIENT
Jon A. Jenkins, Rancho Santa Fe, Calif., assignor to IMED
Corporation, San Diego, Calif.
^ Continuation of Ser. No. 4,464, Jan. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,154
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. CI. 604—118
10
.y
V
_j^i^
CONTROLLER
-26
►TO PATIENT
Ji^
206
206
16 Oaims
1. An apparatus for intravenous addition of a primary and
secondary fluid to a patient comprising:
a primary container for holding the primary fluid;
a secondary container for holding the secondary fluid, the
fluid in said secondary container being elevated above the
fluid in said primary container;
primary and secondary fluid delivery lines extending from
said primary and secondary containers, respectively;
a connector for combining the flow from said primary and
secondary fluid delivery lines;
check valve means for permitting the secondary fluid to
flow through the connector until the secondary container
is empty and subsequently permitting the primary fluid to
flow through the connector; controller means for control-
ling fluid flow to the patient, said connector directing the
fluid flowing therethrough from said primary and second-
1. In combination for introducing fluid to a patient,
flow lines for providing a flow of fluid on a gravitational
basis, the flow lines including an input line and an output
line, I
implementing means having an input for receiving fluid from
the input flow line and having an output for directing fluid
into the output flow line and disposed between the input
and output flow lines and constructed and operative to
pump fluid through the input and output flow lines,
means disposed in a parallel relationship with the implement-
ing means between the input and output lines and includ-
ing means for establishing a fluid-isolated relationship
between the input and the output of the implementing
means and for alleviating the pressure in the output line,
means associated with the flow lines and operatively associ-
ated with the parallel means at the end of the parallel
means communicating with output line for sensing an
obstruction at a relatively low pressure in the output line
in accordance with the pressure of the fluid in the output
line, and
means responsive to the sensing means for discontinuing the
operation of the implementing means when the sensing
means senses an obstruction at a relatively low pressure in
the output flow line.
220
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,600
NONPULSATING IV PUMP AND DISPOSABLE PUMP
CHAMBER
G. Kent Archibald, St Paul, Minn., assignor to AVI, Inc., St.
Paul, Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 19,223, Mar. 9, 1979, Pat No. 4,236,880.
This application Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,055
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 2, 1997,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
VS. a. 604—153 6 Oaims
1. A volumetric infusion pump for pumping fluid from a
source to a patient comprising:
a pump inlet for receiving fluid from the source;
a pump outlet for supplying fluid under pressure to the
patient;
a pump housing having flrst and second cylinders therein;
a flrst pumping chamber including the flrst cylinder, a flrst
piston movable in the flrst cylinder, flrst flexible rolling
diaphragm means between the flrst cylinder and the flrst
piston, a flrst inlet, and a flrst outlet, the flrst pumping
chamber having a variable volume depending upon the
position of the flrst piston in the flrst cylinder;
a second pumping chamber including the second cylinder, a
second piston movable in the second cylinder, second
flexible rolling diaphragm means between the second
cylinder and the second piston, a second inlet connected
to the flrst outlet, and a second outlet connected to the
pump outlet, the second pumping chamber having a vari-
able volume depending upon the position of the second
piston in the second cylinder;
flrst valve means supported by the pump housing for con-
trolling fluid flow between the pump inlet and the first
inlet;
second valve means supf>orted by the puntp housing for
controlling the fluid flow between the flrst outlet and the
second inlet;
drive means for causing motion of the flrst piston in the flrst
cylinder and motion of the second piston in the second
cylinder;
valve control means for controlling the flrst and second
valve means such that one of the flrst and second valve
means is closed at all times; and
wherein the flrst and second flexible diaphragm means, the
pump inlet, and the pump outlet form an integral dispos-
able pump chamber having a sealed main fluid flow pas-
sage between the pump inlet and the pump outlet, so that
fluid is pumped from the pump inlet to the pump outlet
without physically contacting the pump housing, the flrst
and second cylinders, the flrst and second pistons, the flrst
and second valve means, the drive means or the valve
control means.
CHEMICAL
4,391,601
WRmNG PARCHMENT AND METHODS FOR THE
PRODUCnON THEREOF
Shmuel Y. Herman, 65 Hapisga St. Bayit Vegan, Jerusalem,
Israel
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,070
Claims priority, application Israel, Dec. 26, 1980, 61809
Int a.3 C14C 7/00
U.S. CI. 8—94.15 8 Oaims
1. Fine writing parchment made from the skins of turkeys.
4,391,602
PROCESS FOR SMOOTHING AND DRYING WASHED
SHAPED ARTICLES OF MIXED FABRIC
Otto Stichnoth, and Andreas Stichnoth, both of Schiefer Weg 21,
3400 Gottingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 190,078
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 2,
1979, 2939870
Int. a.3 D06B 3/30
U.S. a. 8—149.1 -= 20 Oaims
relative humidity thereof to produce relatively dry
cooler air;
vii. heating said relatively dry cooler air to produce
heated relatively dry air for repeated serial passage
through said drying chamber sections
wherein the steps of element c are performed repetitively and
serially in the order recited.
1. A process for smoothing shaped articles of mixed fabric
having both synthetic and natural flbers, comprising the steps
of:
(a) washing said articles at a flrst temperature;
(b) conveying said washed articles through a heating cham-
ber until said articles are a temperature at least equal to
said flrst temperature and substantially isothermal
throughout;
wherein atmosphere within said heating chamber is maintained
at a substantially uniform wet bulb temperature at least equal to
said flrst temperature by introduction of steam and air therein;
(c) drying said heated washed articles by conveying said
ariicles through a plurality serially disposed drying cham-
ber sections and directing drying air at said articles within
each of said drying chamber sections at sufficient velocity
to agitate said articles and thereby tighten, smooth and
dry said fabric by:
i. introducing a stream of drying air first into the drying
chamber section lastly encountered by said articles
upon conveying through said drying chamber sections
and thereafter serially into said drying chamber sections
in order reverse from that traversed by said articles
during conveyance thereof through said drying cham-
ber sections;
ii. heating said drying air intermediate each of said drying
chamber sections of said plurality;
iii. introducing said stream of heated drying air leaving a
drying chamber section which is first encountered by
said articles during conveyance thereof through said
serially disposed drying chamber sections into said
heating chamber as high humidity heating air by dis-
charging said stream of heated drying air through a
steam environment into said heating chamber;
iv. discharging said high humidity heating air from said
heating chamber
V. removing condensate from said high humidity heating
air;
vi. cooling said high humidity heated thereby reducing
4,391,603
HYDROXYL DERIVATIVES OF BENZALDEHYDE FOR
COLORING KERATIN HBRES IN THE ABSENCE OF
OXIDIZING AGENT
Georges Rosenbaum, Asnieres; Jean F. Grollier, Paris, and Jean
Cotteret, Franconville, all of France, assignors to L'Oreal,
Paris, France
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,514
Oaims priority, application France, Apr. 17, 1980, 80 08645
Int 0.3 A61K 7/13
U.S. O. 8—424 17 Oaims
1. Process for colouring keratin fibres in the absence of an
oxidising agent, which comprises applying thereto at least one
composition containing a cosmetically acceptable medium and
a dyestuff corresponding to the formula:
CHO
(RO),
(I)
(OH)„
in which R denotes a linear or branched lower alkyl group
which is optionally substituted by one or two hydroxyl groups,
n is equal to 1, 2 or 3, m is equal to 0, 1 or 2 such that n-i-m is
equal to 2 or 3, with the proviso that (i) if m is equal to 0 (and
n is equal to 2 or 3), the OH groups occupy the following
positions of the ring:
2
3
4
5
6
OH
OH
OH
OH i
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
OH
and (ii) if m and n both denote 1, the substituents occupy the
following positions of the rings:
2
3
4
5
6
OH
OR
OR
OH
OH
OH
OR
OR
OH
OR
OH
OCH2CH2OH
(3)
OH
1
OCH2CHCH2
'
OHOH
(5)
OH
OC2H5
or a bisulphite adduct thereof.
221
222
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
' 4^91,604 ,
PROCESS FOR DYEING TEXTILE FABRIC:
MECHANICAL TREATMENT TO PROMOTE FOAMING
IN FABRIC BEFORE STEAMING
Hans Schomakers, An den Gassenwiesen 4, 6415 Petersberg,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,353
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 21,
1980, 3039661
Int. a.J D06B 1/08
U.S. a. 8—477 10 Claims
1. A process of dyeing textile fabrics comprising:
(a) wetting a fabric with an unfoamed dyeing solution con-
taining foaming agents;
(b) exposing the wetted fabric to a mechanical treatment
consisting of alternating compression and relief; and
(c) subjecting the wetted, mechanically treated fabric to a
steaming treatment.
\
4,391,605
TEXTILE TREATMENT
Paul G. H. Bakker, Ilkley, England, assignor to Wool Develop-
ment International Limited, London, England
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,118
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 7, 1980,
8025844
Int. a.3 D06M 13/18, 13/46
U.S. a. 8—495 13 aalms
1. A composition for treating textiles which comprises a
quartemary ammonium salt containing a methyl group and
three alkyl or aralkyl groups containing from eight to ten
carbon atoms, and a water soluble polyether.
4,391,606
AZO POLYETHER DYESTUFFS, FORMULATIONS OF
THESE DYESTUFFS, THEIR PREPARATION AND
THEIR USE
Winfried Kruckenberg; Karl H. Schundehiitte, both of Leverku-
sen, and Volker Hederich, Cologne, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 90,374, Nov. 1, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,860
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 22,
1978, 2850662
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
I Int. a.3 C09B 1/00
U.S. a. 8—525 16 Qaims
1. Dyestuff formulation comprising
(a) an azo dyestuff which is free from sulphonic acid groups
and ammoniu(n groups and which contains at least one of
Ri
(a)-0— (A— 0)„— X and — O— CO— N , or
(;8)-0-(A-0)„-C0-N
or
— (A— 0)„— CO— N
Rl
R2
R2
or
(7)-0— CO— N— G— O— (A— 0)„— X ,
R2
wherein
G is selected from the group consisting of C2-C6 alkylene,
j~v_ „, -Tyco-.
A is C2-C6-alkylene,
X is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, Y,
—COY and — CONR1R2,
Y is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, cycloalkyl,
aralkyl, aryl, and substituted alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl and
aryl,
Rl is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and Y,
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
and substituted alkyl, and
n is a number from 1 to 7 and n is at least 2 if X is — COY,
and
(b) an emulsifying polar-nonpolar compound.
4,391,607
DYEING PROCESS AND PRINTING PROCESS USING
REACTIVE DYESTUFFS
Dietrich Hildebrand, Odenthal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,863
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17,
1980, 3027077
Int. a.3 C09B 62/00; D06P 1/38
U.S. a. 8—549 11 Qaims
1. Process for dyeing or printing fibre materials with the aid
of reactive dyestuffs which split off fluoride ions, characterised
in that neutral or acid dyebaths or printing pastes which con-
tain, in addition to the reactive dyestuff and customary auxilia-
ries and solvents, one or more organic and/or inorganic cal-
cium compounds are employed said calcium compounds being
soluble in water or being sparingly soluble in water.
4,391,608
PROCESS FOR THE BENEnaATION OF CARBONOUS
MATERIALS WITH THE AID OF ULTRASOUND
Michael A. Dondelewski, 5354 Fortress Trail, Columbus, Ohio
43230
Continuation of Ser. No. 135,241, Mar. 31, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,536
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/00; C07G 13/00; COIB 31/02
U.S. a. 44—1 SR 7 Qaims
1. A method of treating coal to reduce ash and sulfur content
comprising the steps for:
(a) combining the coal with water and oil to form a slurry,
said oil being a semi-reactive oil containing esters of fatty
acids,
(b) applying ultrasound to said slurry to cause separation of
ash from coal and sulfur including organic sulfur from
coal,
(c) physically separating coal and adhered oil from the
slurry and washing to separate ash and sulfur from the
coal to recover coal with reduced sulfur and ash content.
4,391,609
HYDRODESULFURIZATION OF CHLORINIZED COAL
John J. Kalvinskas, South Pasadena, and Naresh K. Rohatgi,
West Covina, both of Calif., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Administrator of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 315,587
Int. Q.3 ClOL 9/10
U.S. Q. 44—1 SR 8 Qaims
1. A method of desulfurizing coal containing at least 0.2%
sulfur comprising the steps of:
(1) chlorinating the coal by forming a slurry of coal in liquid
JULY 5,
983
CHEMICAL
223
media and bubbling chlorine gas into the slurry to convert
sulfur in the coal into water soluble sulfates;
(2) subjecting the chlorinated coal to a gaseous reducing
agent consisting essentially of hydrogen or a hydrogen
•\ iT"
^ CHLORiNOLrS'S
!rL
MCHLOei'«*TiON
"\ "^
BCOOCTiON
T^
port gas vertically upward into said fluidized bed at a
velocity of between 30 and 70 feet per second;
injecting a mixture of oxygen and steam upwardly into said
bed and about the radial p)eriphery of said particulate and
gas mixture at a velocity of between 50 and 300 feel per
second;
injecting an oxygen lean gaseous medium upwardly into said
bed and about the radial periphery of said oxygen and
steam mixture at a velocity equal to or less than said
oxygen and steam mixture velocity.
don6r gas at a temperature from 500' C. to 700* C. until at
least 70% of the sulfur is removed from the coal and the
chlorine content is below 1%; and
(3) recovering a desulfurized and dechlorinated coal.
4,391,612
GASinCATION OF COAL
Tsuan Y. Chang, Baldwin, N.Y., assignor to The Halcon SD
Group, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,959
Int. Q.5 ClOJ 3/54
U.S. Q. 48—202 2 Qaims
' ' 4,391,610
LIQUID HYDROCARBON FUEL CONTAINING A
CORROSION INHIBITOR, DIALKOXYLATED ALKYL
POLYOXY ALKYL PRIMARY AMINE
Rodney L. Sung, Fishkill; William M. Sweeney, Wappingers
Falls, both of N.Y., and Wheeler C. Crawford, Houston, Tex.,
assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,196
Int. Q.3 ClOL 1/22
U.S. Q. 44—56 20 Qaims
1. A fuel composition for use in internal combustion engines
comprising
(a) a major portion of a fuel containing a hydrocarbon boil-
ing in the gasoline boiling range; and
(b) a minor corrosion-inhibiting amount of, as a corrosion
inhibiting agent, a dialkoxylated alkyl polyalkoxy primary
amine.
4,391,611
GASinCATION SYSTEM
Gaurang B. Haldipur, Hempfield; Richard G. Anderson, Penn
Hills, and Peter Cherish, Bethel Park, all of Pa., assignors to
The United States of America as represented by the United
States Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
, FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,654
I Int. Q.5 ClOJ 3/68
U.S. Q. 48—197 R 10 Claims
<.,
\
L.
1. A method of operating a gasification reactor of the type
wherein solid particulate carbonaceous material, oxygen,
steam and an oxygen lean medium are fed from an injection
means having an upper tip into a vertically disposed vessel
housing a combusting fluidized bed to produce a combustible
product gas and ash, to prevent substantial sintering of said tip,
comprising:
injecting a mixture of said particulate material and a trans-
1. A process for the production of a gaseous effluent rich in
hydrogen and carbon monoxide from coal which comprises
the steps of:
(a) feeding (1) clinker particles and char from the partial
gasification with superheated steam of lime-treated coal in
a gasification zone, and (2) air to a combustor zone operat-
ing at a temperature of 900° C. to 1300° C;
(b) elevating said clinker particles and any "fines" present by
the action of a gaseous stream comprising any excess air
and the gases produced by the total combustion of the
char with air to a clinker separation zone, said fines com-
prising ash resulting from the combustion of said char in
said combustor zone and lime contained in said coal;
(c) separating the thus-elevated particles and fines in the
separation zone into a stream of fines which are suspended
in and carried away by the gaseous stream as solid prod-
uct, and a body of clinker particles deposited from the
gaseous stream;
(d) feeding the deposited clinker particles to the upper por-
tion of said gasification zone while feeding lime-treated
coal and sujjerheated steam into the lower portion of said
gasification zone, the unreacted steam and the gases result-
ing from the gasification of the lime-treated coal maintain-
ing a fluidized bed comprising said lime-treated coal and
the char produced by the partial gasification of the lime-
treated coal, with said clinker particles raining down
through said fluidized bed as a separate phase, the clinker
particles and the steam supplying the heat for the gasifica-
tion reaction to maintain the fluidized bed at a temperature
of 700* C. to 1050* C;
(e) removing the fuel gas generated in the gasification zone
by the partial gasification of the lime-treated coal in the
presence of steam, removing the char from the upper
224
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
portion of the fluidized bed in the gasification zone, re-
moving the clinker particles from the lower portion of the
gasification zone;
(f) passing the clinker and char removed from the gasifica-
tion zone to the combustor zone to provide the feed of
char and clinker particles for step (a);
(g) recovering the fines from the gaseous stream of step (c);
(h) preparing clinker particles from at least some of the fines
recovered in step (g); and
(i) introducing the clinker particles produced in step (h) to
make up for the loss of clinker particles resulting from
attrition.
< 4,391,613
MULTI-STATION DOWNFLOW CENTRIFUGAL
SEPARATION METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
SEPARATING PARTICULATE MATTER FROM GASES
Joseph G. Wilson, Riverside, Conn., assignor to Ingersoll-Rand
Company, Woodcliff Lake, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 210,299, Nov. 25, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 92,343, Nov. 8, 1979, Pat. No.
4,279,624, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 947,173, Sep. 28,
1978, abandoned. This application Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No.
I 322,358
Int. a.5 BOID 45/12
U.S. a. 55—1 22 aaims
1. A method of separating particles from a particle-laden gas
comprising the steps of:
providing a plurality of axially-extending, separating stations
in generally axial alignment at spaced-apart, successively
lower elevations;
in a first of said stations performing the steps of:
(a) swirling the gas with a given centrifugal action, and
immediately thereafter, (b) directing the gas downwardly
through a first plurality of annular channels,
then suddenly changing the direction of the gas and causing
it to suddenly turn inwardly away from each of said chan-
nels, to cause particles of given size^to be separated there-
from and left in said channels,
causing the inwardly-turned gas to flow again in the same
said generally axial direction, and obstructing flow of said
inwardly-turned gas in the opposite axial direction, and
downwardly away from said first station into an interme-
diate region,
removing the separated particles together with a minor,
bleed quantity of the gas from the bottom of the annular
channels in said first station,
flowing the gas downwardly from the intermediate region to
a second of said stations, and in said second station per-
forming the steps of:
swirling the gas downwardly through a second plurality of
annular channels under a more powerful centrifugal ac-
tion than said given centrifugal action, and immediately
thereafter directing the gas to, and conducting it in the
same said generally axial direction through, a second
plurality of annular channels,
then suddenly changing the direction of the gas and causing
it to suddenly turn inwardly away from said second plu-
rality of annular channels, to cause particles smaller in size
than said given sizes to be separated therefrom and left in
said second plurality of channels,
causing the gas which has been turned inwardly from said
second plurality of channels to flow again in the same said
generally axial direction, and obstructing flow thereof in
the opposite axial direction, and downwardly away from
said second station, and
removing the smaller size particles together with a minor,
bleed quantity of the gas from the bottom of the plurality
of annular channels in said second station.
9. An improved, downflow, centrifugal separator apparatus,
for separating particulate matter from particle-laden gas hav-
ing a given velocity and pressure, said apparatus having a
plurality of elongate, vertically-disposed separator units, each
of said units having a vertically-disposed tube which defines a
channel within which to conduct particle-laden gas; first
means within said tube for causing particle-laden gas admitted
into said tube to be (a) centrifugally swirled, and (b) directed
into said channel; an elongate, vertically-disposed vessel en-
closing said separator units, said vessel having an inlet opening,
substantially at an uppermost end thereof, and above said
separator units, for admitting particle-laden gas into said sepa-
rator units and into said tubes thereof, and said vessel having an
outlet opening, substantially at a lowermost end thereof, and
below said separator units, for discharging therethrough parti-
cle-removed gas from said units; said units further having
means for removing separated particles, together with a minor
percentage of gas, from said tubes; a first station, within said
vessel, comprising a first plurality of said separator units
mounted therewithin in parallel relationship; a second station,
within said vessel, comprising a second plurality of separator
units mounted therewithin in parallel relationship; said second
station being spaced apart from said first station, axially of said
vessel; and means intermediate said stations for conducting
particle-separated gas from said first station to said second
station; wherein the improvement is comprised by:
said separator units each having an additional tube posi-
tioned inside said vertically disposed tube so as to define
an annular channel therebetween, and
said first means comprises means for swirling gas with a
given centrifugal action, and directing gas immediately
thereafter into said annular channel to cause flow thereof
in a generally axial direction; wherein
said additional inner tube including slots therein for causing
gas to turn inwardly, from said annular channel, into said
tube;
said additional tube having a hosepiece positioned and ar-
ranged for causing gas turned into said tube from said
channel to be redirected in said same generally axial direc-
tion, and (b) obstructing flow of such turned gas in the
opposite axial direction; and
said first means of said first station comprises means for
swirling gas with a centrifugal action which is less than
the centrifugal action with which said first means of said
second station can swirl gas.
4,391,614
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PREVENTING
LUBRICANT FLOW FROM A VACUUM SOURCE TO A
VACUUM CHAMBER
Walter J. Rozmus, Traverse City, Mich., assignor to Kelsey-
Hayes Company, Romulus, Mich.
FUed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 3214>35
Int. aj B03C 9/00; B65B 31/04
U.S. a. 55—2 2 Claims
1. An assembly comprising; a vacuum chamber (12) having
July 5,
983
CHEMICAL
225
a vacuum outlet duct (14) for connection to a vacuum source
to establish a stream of gas flow from said vacuum chamber
(12) through said outlet duct (14) to a vacuum source, said
assembly further comprising electric field-producing means
(22, 23, 24) for producing an electric field to subject the lubri-
cant entering the vacuum outlet duct (14) from a vacuum
source to the electric field to electrically charge the lubricant
and electrically attract the lubricant back toward a vacuum
source, said electric field-producing means including a pair of
first (22, 23) and second (24) electrodes spaced from one an-
other between said vacuum chamber (12) and a vacuum source
and power means (26, 32) for establishing an electrical poten-
tial between said electrodes, said first electrode (22, 23) being
positioned closer to said vacuum chamber (12) than said sec-
ond electrode (24), said power means establishing a potential so
that the lubricant is charged by said first electrode (22, 23) and
is thereby attracted back to said second electrode (24), and a
magnet (38) positioned and arranged to establish a magnetic
field extending between said electrodes to urge the charged
lubricant toward said second electrode.
2. A method for preventing lubricant from entering a vac-
uum chamber (12) through an outlet duct (14) connected to a
vacuum source comprising the steps of; establishing an electric
field and subjecting the lubricant entering the vacuum outlet
duct (14) from the vacuum source to the electric field to elec-
trically charge the lubricant and electrically attracting the
lubricant back toward the vacuum source, establishing the
electric field by positioning first (22, 23) and second (24) elec-
trodes in spaced relationship to one another between the vac-
uum chamber (12) and the vacuum source, positioning the first
electrode (22, 23) closer to the vacuum chamber (12) than the
second electrode, establishing an electrical potential between
the electrodes so that the lubricant is charged by the first
electrode (22, 23) and is thereby attracted back to the second
electrode (24), establishing a magnetic field between the elec-
trodes (22, 23 and 24) to urge the charged lubricant toward the
second electrode (24).
4,391,615
METHOD FOR FILTERING ATOMIC OR MOLECULAR
CONTAMINANTS FROM A GAS
Nicolaos Iniotakis, Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kemforschungsanlage Jiilich GmbH, Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Division of Ser. No. 56,784, Jul. 11, 1979, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 887,885, Dec. 6, 1977, abandoned. This
application Nov. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,908
Int. a.3 BOID 53/22
U.S. a. 55—16 10 aaims
1. A method of cleaning atomic or molecular contaminating
particles out of a flowing gas by causing said particles to dif-
fusa into a crystalline solid and become absorbed therein,
comprising:
passing the contaminated particles through a cavity in which
are disposed in a predetermined arrangement a plurality of
rigid filter elements occupying a length 1 in the flow direc-
tion of the gas through said cavity,
said filter elements being made of a crystalline material
selected from those having a known sticking probability
for particles of a particular atomic or molecular contami-
nating material to be filtered, according to selection crite-
ria having reference to a preselected filter escape coeffici-
ent 5(1, t) corresponding to a desired filter capability to be
attained, the values of said length 1 and of the hydraulic
free diameter dqjr provided in said cavity with said ar-
rangement of filter elements therein, said length 1 and
diameter d^ydimensioned so that for a particular gas-flow
velocity and a particular mass transfer coefficient, the
product of their quotient Q/dejf) nd the second Stanton
number St' is large enough for attaining said desired filter
capability and the filter coefficient corresponding thereto,
said second Stanton number being the ratio (h/v) of said
mass transfer coefficient to said gas flow velocity, said
selection criteria being:
-► - °a
(a) said crystalline material has a high surface adsorptive
sticking probability and for said contaminant particles on
the surface of said filter elements;
(b) said crystalline material is one for which the desorption
constant {$) regarding said contaminant is sufficiently
small for attaining said described filter capacity;
(c) said crystalline material is one for which the penetration
coefficient (1-/3), and hence also the probability that said
contaminant particles enter into the material and become
irreversibly bound therein rather than remain on the sur-
face is sufficiently large for attaining said desired filter
capability, and
(d) the saturation content (<j)oo) and the diffusion consunt
(D) are sufficiently large for the product
(I - {i)a* Nc
"G.
<i>c
to be smaller than unity, the quantities contributing to said
product being defined as follows:
I
a* = a- 3J63
X103nIT
in cm/sec
A — mass number of the particles
T = temperature of the surface of the filter element in °K.
Ng= concentration of the contaminant particles in the gas in
atoms per cm^.
4,391,616
METHOD OF DEHUMIDIHCATION
Yoshio Imamura, Kyoto, Japan, assignor to Toyo Boseki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,692
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1980, 55-102064
Int. a.^ BOID 53/04
U.S. a. 55—35 21 Claims
1. A method of dehumidification which comprises the steps
of preparing a dehumidifying member composed of active
carbon fiber material, in the form of sheets and bringing air to
be dehumidified into contact with said dehumidifying member
for the dehumidification of air.
20. An air dehumidifying arrangement which comprises a
pair of dehumidifying members axially aligned and roUtably
provided in a spaced relation from each other, each of said
226
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
dehumidifying members being formed by a moisture adsorbing
element which is composed of a corrugated sheet of active
carbon fibers and a flat separate sheet of active carbon fibers
bonded to one surface of said corrugated sheet, and which is
spirally wound to form said dehumidifying member, with air
passage defmed therebetween being arranged in substantially
flow of gas through the condensing-side housing and
passing heated air or hot gases through the air-side hous-
ing at a raised temperature sufflcient to melt the con-
densed and deposited sublimate solids from the heat-pipe
surfaces in said condenser-side housing and removing
molten sublimate therefrom.
A2
the same direction, and a heat exchanging member fixedly
disposed coaxially between said dehumidifying members and
having one portion which allows air to be dehumidified to pass
therethrough and through which cooling medium is passed for
cooling the air to be dehumidified, and another portion for
p)ermitting hot air for dehumidification and regeneration of the
active carbon fibers to pass therethrough.
4,391,618
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE
OF HBERS
Jacques Lecron, Chambery; Maxime Manera, Jacob Bellecom-
bette; Jean-Paul Faure, Chignin-Challes les Eaux, and Jean-
Pierre Renaudin, Cognin, all of France, assignors to Societe
Vetrotex Saint-Gobain, Chambery, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 207,712, Not. 17, 1980, abandoned.
This application May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,903
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 20, 1979, 79 28538
Int. a.3 C03B 37/025
U.S. a. 65—1 36 Qaims
4,391,617
PROCESS FOR THE RECOVERY OF VAPORIZED
SUBLIMATES FROM GAS STREAMS
Peter F. Way, P.O. Box 276, Boxford, Mass. 01921
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 942,616, Sep. 15, 1978, Pat. No.
4,252,772. This application Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,934
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 24,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ BOID 7/00. 59/02; C07D 307/89
U.S. a. 55—82 10 Qaims
1. In a method for recovering sublimate vapors from hot gas
streams as formed in chemical reactions, manufacturing pro-
cesses, storage tank vents or the like, in a heat-pipe exchanger
system operative in a condensing mode and in a melting mode,
said exchanger system comprising a pair of adjacent housings
in which heat-pipe exchanger tubes are mounted horizontally
so that the opposite tube ends extend into each housing, said
pair of housings include an air-side housing through which
cooling or heating fluid such as air or gas may be passed and a
condensing-side housing through which sublimate-laden gas
may be passed, each of said housings including means for
independent flow control of hot and cold exchanger fluid
therethrough, the method comprising the steps of,
passing said hot gas stream through the condensing-side
housing during the condensing mode to cool said gas
stream and condense the contained sublimate vapors as a
solid on the heat-pipe surfaces therein,
simultaneously passing ambient air through the opposite
air-side housing at a rate to remove the heat of cooling and
condensation of said gas stream, and
alternately switching to the melting mode by stopping the
27. A method for drawing attenuable material in attenuable
condition, such as molten glass, into filaments, characterized
by delivering the attenuable material in attenuable condition
downwardly through a bushing the bottom of which has a
plurality of series of bosses defining alveoles, each series com-
prising a multiplicity of bosses, each with a bottom wall having
a plurality of orifices therethrough in communication with an
alveole, and concurrently drawing at least one filament from
each alveole, independently of each other alveole, regardless
of whether or not said material has flooded the bottom surface
of any individual alveole.
4,391,619
AIR NOZZLE APPARATUS FOR USE IN DRAWING
GLASS nBERS
Hiroaki Shono, and Toshiaki Kikuchi, both of Fukushima, Ja-
pan, assignors to Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd., Fukushima, Japan
Filed Sep. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 421,908
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 14, 1981, 56-163647;
Oct. 14, 1981, 56-163648; Oct. 15, 1981, 56-164474; Oct. 15,
1981, 56-164475; Oct. 15, 1981, 56-164476
Int. a.3 C03B 37/025
U.S. CI. 65—12 18 Claims
1. An air nozzle apparatus for directing air flow against the
undersurface of an orifice plate of a glass fiber drawing fore-
hearth, comprising: an air introducing section including a
manifold formed with at least one air supply port; and an air
nozzle section formed with a plurality of nozzle channels
communicating with the manifold, said air nozzle section in-
cluding a plurality of nozzle ribs of substantially the same
shape each having opposed side surfaces and opposed end edge
portions, said plurality of nozzle ribs being arranged to have
their side surfaces located in adjacent relationship to provide a
-1
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
227
nozzle block, said nozzle ribs each being formed on at least one 4,391,621
of the opposed side surfaces with a longitudinally extending METHOD OF MAKING LENSES HAVING A SPHERICAL
Walter P. Siegmund, Woodstock, Conn., assignor to American
Optical Corporation, Southbridge, Mass.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,551
Int. a.3 C03C 15/02. 19/00
U.S. a. 65—31
7 Claims
arar=r.-zr
94
recess which defines one of said plurality of nozzle channels
between t
le adjacent nozzle ribs.
4,391,620
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR APPLYING LUBRICATION
OR SEPARATION LIQUID TO GLASS-FORMING
T| MACHINE
Gerhard Geisel, Biickeburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hermiun Heye, Obemkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
T| Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,137
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1980, 3007512
Int. a.3 C03B 40/02
U.S. a. 65— 26 . 16 Qaims
22a
^^^^^^
1. A method of making lenses comprising the steps of:
assembling a preform of glasses including a rod of lens glass
and a surrounding cladding of leachable glass, said rod
being of greater diametral size than desired of said lenses;
heating and drawing the preform to such a reduced cross-
sectional size as to bring said rod to the diameter desired
of said lenses;
cutting said drawn preform transaxially into a number of
sections of lengths approximately equally the drawn pre-
form diameter;
grinding said sections into spherical configurations of radii
of curvature equalling that desired of at least one face of
each of said lenses;
removing remaining leachable glasses from said sections
whereby rod glasses each having at least one spherical
face comprise said lenses; and
polishing said spherical faces of said lenses at a stage of said
method following said grinding step.
4,391,622
METHOD FOR THE PRECISION/MANUFACTURE OF
GLASS ARTICLES
Cornells L, Alting; Rudolf Brehm, and Jan Haisma, all of Eind-
hoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,738
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, May 28, 1980,
8003050
Int. a.3 C03B 11/08. 40/00
U.S. Q. 65—66 3 Claims
1. A method of an intermittent application of a lubrication or
separation liquid without admixture of a carrier gas on at least
one part of a glass-forming machine prior to its contact with
the processed molten glass, such as shearing blades for shear-
ing gobs off a glass strand, a gravity tube or a chute for guiding
glass gobs, a mold, a mold part or a press plunger, comprising
the steps of momentarily compressing the lubrication or sepa-
ration liquid to a pressure exceeding 100 bar; then atomizing
the compressed liquid; and applying a cone of the atomized
liquid onto said machine part.
1. In a method for precision manufacture of glass articles
molded in a mold or hot-pressed in a die, the improvement
comprises the step of using a mold or die having at least
contact surfaces made from quartz glass or an amorphous SiO:
with upto 7.5% by weight of TiO: with a coefficient of linear
expansion of at most 60x10-* per X., wherein said glass
articles have a substantially higher coefficient of linear expan-
sion.
228
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,623
METHOD FOR MAKING OF SOLID FERTILIZER BY
SEPARATION OF LIQUID MANURE AND DEVICE FOR
CARRYING OUT THIS METHOD
Hemumn Knepper, Olfen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Heinrich Bemhard Brinkmann, Bergkamen-Overberge, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,403
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 22,
1980, 3044022
Int. a.3 C05F 3/00, 3/06
VS. d 71—21 5 Qaims
/
1^'-
i' uJir
tures which comprises applying to the locus of said weeds and
crops a herbicidally effective amount of a compound accord-
ing to claim 1.
4,391,625
DIESTERS OF N-ALKYL SUBSTITUTED AMINO
METHYL FHOSPHONIC ACID USEFUL AS
HERBIODES
William R. Purdum, Maryland Heights, Mo., assignor to Mon-
santo Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,463
Int. a.J AGIN 57/18; CD7F 9/40
VS. a. 71—86 35 Oalms
1. Diesters of N-alkyl substituted amino methyl phosphonic
acid of the formula
H O R|
I H I
Z— N— CH2— P— (O— C— CN)2
R2
wherein Z is
1. In a method of making a solid fertilizer by separation of
liquid manure into a solid phase and a liquid phase by means of
a filter vessel into which the liquid manure is charged, said
filter vessel having a bottom and a top and at least one close-
able discharge opening, the improvement comprising the steps
of immersing the bottom of the filter vessel into a liquid; then
introducing the liquid manure into the filter vessel and leaving
the liquid manure in said vessel in a resting stage until a solid
phase of the manure is collected on the top of the filter vessel
and the liquid phase is collected therebelow; discharging the
liquid phase from the vessel to such an extent that the solid
phase almost reaches the bottom of the filter vessel; interrupt-
ing said discharging step and waiting for a renewed separation
of the solid phase from the liquid phase and for collecting the
solid phase on the top of the vessel and the liquid phase there-
below; and discharging a liquid phase of the manure newly
collected in the filter vessel.
4,391,624
HERBIODALLY ACnVE 2-SUBSTITUTED
5-PHENOXYPHENYLPHOSPHONIC AOD ESTERS
Ludwig Maier, Arlesheim, and Dieter Diirr, Bottmingen, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley,
N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,167, Jan. 31, 1980, Pat. No.
4,322,375. This appUcation Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,228
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 6, 1979,
1147/79
Int a.3 AOIN 57/18; C07F 9/40
VS. a. 71—86 5 Qaims
1. A 2-nitro-5-(2',6'-dichloro-4'-trifIuoromethylphenoxy)-
phenylphosphonic acid derivative of the formula
O
II
— CH2COR
wherein R is lower alkyl; or Z is lower alkynyl or lower alkyl;
Ri is selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower
alkoxy lower alkyl, halo lower alkyl, and phenyl lower alkyl,
and R2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl.
24. A herbicidal method which comprises contacting a plant
with a herbicidally effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
4,391,626
HALOALKYLAMIDE COMPOUNDS AND
HERBICIDAL ANTIDOTE COMPOSITIONS
Jorg Stetten Wolf Reiser, both of Wuppertal, and Wilfried
Faust, Odenthal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,287
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 9,
1980, 3004871
Int. a.3 AOIN 37/00. 37/18; C07C 103/44
V.S. a. 71—88 42 Qaims
1. Haloalkylamide compound of the formula
O
R'— C— N
/
\
R2
(I)
CH— C=N— O— R5
R3 r4
N02
wherein Ri and R2 are Ci-Cs-alkoxy.
2. A method for selectively controlling weeds in crop cul-
wherein
R> is haloalkyl;
R^ is alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl, alkoxyalkyl, alkylthioalkyl,
haloalkyl or alkoximinoalkyl;
R-' is hydrogen or alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
R^ is hydrogen or alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and
R' is hydrogen, alkyl, alkenyl, alkynyl or aralkyl.
32. Herbicidal composition comprising a herbicidally active
compound selected from thiolcarbamates and acetanilide her-
bicides and, as an antidote, an effective amount of a haloalkyla-
mide compound as claimed in claim 1.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
4,391,627
HERBIODAL BENZOTHIOPHENE AND BENZOFURAN
SULFONAMIDES
George Levitt, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 172,997, Jul. 25, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 274,233
Int. Q.J AOIN 43/54; C07D 239/26
U.S. Q. 71—90 35 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
229
(I)
I
I9-
■0
SO2NHCNA
R
w Ri
O— CH— C— Z— A— CCX)R
I II
CH3 o
wherein X is fluorine, chlorine or bromine, Z is oxygen or
sulfur, A is a Ci-C4alkylene bridge which is unsubstituted or
substituted by methyl or ethyl, and R is Ci-C4alkyl.
13. A method of controlling unwanted plant growth which
comprises treating the unwanted plants or the locus thereof
with a herbicidally effective amount of a compound of the
formula I according to claim 1.
wherein
R is H or CH3;
R> is H, CI, Br, NO2, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alkoxy, CO2R2,
C(0)NR3R*, SO2R5 or S02NR6R7;
R2 is C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C4 alkenyl, CH2CH2OCH3,
CH2CH2OC2H5, CH2CH2CH2OCH3 or CH2R^
R3 is C1-C4 alkyl;
R* is H, C1-C4 alkyl or OCH3; or
R3 and R^ can be taken together to form — (CH2)4— ;
R5 is C1-C4 alkyl; ^^
R6 is C1-C3 alkyl or OCH3; .
R7 is C1-C3 alkyl;
R8 is C1-C3 alkyl substituted with 1-3 atoms of F, CI, or Br;
R9 is H, CH3, OCH3, CI, Br or NO2; W is O or S;
A is
^^'
Y>
N — (
^^91,629
2-PYRIDYLOXYACETANILIDES AND THEIR USE AS
HERBICIDES
Masahiro Aya; Junichi Saito; Kazuomi Yasui; Shinzo Kakabu;
Atsumi Kamochi, and Naoko Yamaguchi, all of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nihon Tokushu Noyaku Seizo K.K., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,379
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 28, 1981, 56-10110
Int. Q.' C07D 213/64; AOIN 43/40
U.S. Q. 71—94 11 Qaims
1. A 2-pyridyloxyacetanilide of the formula
<o- -<o)-\ " -<o}-\
O — '
°n:
/
X is H, CH3, OCH3, OC2H5, OCH2CF3, CH2OCH3 or CI;
Y is CH3, OCH3, OC2H5, NH2, NHCH3, N(CH3)2 or SCH3;
Z is N, CH, C— CI, C-Br, C— CN, C-CH3, C— C2H5,
C— CH2CH2CI or C— CH2CH=CH2;
Yl is H, CH3, OCH3 or CI; and
Q is O or CH2;
provided that
(1) when R4 or R^ is OCH3, then R^ or R^ is CH3;
(2) the total number of carbon atoms of either R^ and R^, or
R^ and R^, is less than or equal to 4; and
(3) when X is CI, then Z is CH.
19. A composition for controlling the growth of undesired
vegetation which comprises an effective amount of a com-
pound of claim 1 and at least one of the following: surfactant,
solid or liquid diluent.
X^ ^ N ' ^OCHzCON /-~V
in which I
X is hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4 alkyl or C1-C4 halogenoal-
kyl, ^ ,
R is C1-C4 alkyl;
Y each independently is halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy
or C1-C4 halogenoalkyl, and
n is 0, 1, 2 or 3.
7. A method of combating weeds, comprising applying to
said weeds, or to a habitat thereof, a herbicidally effective
amount of a compound according to claim 1.
1 1 4,391,628
2-[4-(6-HALOQUINOXALINYL-2-OXY)PHENOXY]PRO-
PIONIC ACTD ESTERS
Hermann Rempfler, Ettingen, and Beat Biihner, Binningen, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Qba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley,
N.Y. ji
' FUed Feb. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 346,359
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 16, 1981,
1009/81
Int. Cl.^ C07D 241/44, 241/52; AOIN 43/60
VS. Q. 71—92 19 Claims
1. A 2-[4-(6-Haloquinoxalinyl-2-oxy)phenoxy]propionic acid
ester of the general formula I
4,391,630
CYANO-(4-CYANOPHENYL)METHYL ETHYL ESTER
OF CARBONIC ACID USEFUL AS AN AGENT FOR
SELECnVE CONTROL OF BARNYARD GRASS
Andrew T. Au, Needbam, Mass., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,480
Int. Q.3 AOIN 47/06; C07C 121/75
U.S. Q. 71—105 3 Qaims
1. Cyano-(4-cyanophenyl)methyI ethyl ester of carbonic
acid.
3. A herbicidal composition comprising an inert horticul-
tural carrier and as a herbicide, the compound of claim 1, the
concentration of said herbicide being from 0.0001 to about 50
percent by weight.
230
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
431,631
HERBiaDAL COMPOSITION
Tetsuo Takematsu, Utsunomiya; Takayuki Isogawa, and Yasuya
Sakuraba, both of Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Hodogaya
Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,871
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 6, 1980, 55-155160
Int. a.3 AOIN 37/1%
U.S. a. 71—118 3 Qaims
1. A herbicidal composition which consists essentially of a
benzamide having the formula:
. a a
wherein R represents n — C4H9C) — , C2H5OCH2C) — or n —
C4H9OCH1O— and 3.4-dichloropropionanilide as active in-
gredients in an effective amount for controlling weeds and
an adjuvant.
4,391,633
PROCESS FOR DEPHOSPHORIZATION,
DESULFURIZATION AND DENITRinCATION OF
CHROMIUM-CONTAINING PIG IRON
Takashi Yamauchi; Shigeaki Maruhashi, and Morihiro
Hasegawa, all of Yamaguchi, Japan, assignors to Nisshin Steel
Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,065
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 21, 1980, 55-146351
Int. a.J C21C 7/02
U.S. a. 75—53 11 Qaims
1. A process for dephosphorization, desulfurization and
denitrification of chromium-containing pig iron comprising
contacting the melt of said iron with a slag comprising not less
than 10% and less than 40% of CaO, not less than 5% and not
more than 40% of iron oxides and more than 40% and not
more than 80% of CaF2 in which the contact of Si02 as an
impurity is not more than 10% and the ratio %CaO/%Si02 is
not less than 3.
4,391,632
PROCESS FOR THE SEPARATION OF LEAD FROM A
SULHDIC CONCENTRATE
Olavi A. Aaltonen, Fori; Rolf E. Mahnstrom, Helsinki; Esko O.
Nennes, Turku, and Tapio K. Tuominen, Espoo, all of Finland,
assignors to Outokumpu Oy, Helsinki, Finland
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,211
Oaims priority, application Finland, Apr. 16, 1980, 8Q1214
Int. Q\? C22B U/01
U.S. a. 75—26 7 Qaims
4,391,634
WELDABLE OXIDE DISPERSION STRENGTHENED
ALLOYS
Thomas J. Kelly, Suffem, and Mark L. Robinson, Warwick,
both of N.Y., assignors to Huntington Alloys, Inc.,
Huntington, W. Va.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,036
Int. Q\? QllQ 38/06. 38/18. 38/24. 38/26
U.S. a. 75—124 25 Qaims
1. A weldable refractory-oxide dispersion strengthened alloy
affording oxidation resistance and strength at elevated temper-
atures, said alloy being ferritic and substantially titanium-free
and consisting essentially, by weight, of about 10 to about 40%
chromium, about 1 to about 10% aluminum, a minor amount of
at least one of the additives tantalum, niobium and hafnium and
the balance essentially iron, and said alloy being characterized
on fusion welding by good oxide dispersoid distribution in the
weld zone.
4,391,635
HIGH CR LOW NI TWO-PHASED CAST STAINLESS
STEEL
Shinichi Murakami, Osaka; Toshiaki Morichika, Hirakata;
Hisashi Hiraishi, Yawata, and Hiroyuki Shiokawa, Osaka, all
of Japan, assignors to Kubota, Ltd., Osaka, Japiui
Continuation of Ser. No. 189,335, Sep. 22, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,237
Int. a.3 C22C 38/42. 38/48
U.S. a. 75—125 7 Oaims
1. A process for the separation of lead from a sulfidic con-
centrate using a flash-smelting furnace which has a lower
furnace, a riser pipe connected to the lower furnace for remov-
ing gas from the lower furnace, and a reaction shaft connected
to the lower furnace, said reaction shaft having an upper sec-
tion with means for feeding said concentrate into said upper
section, comprising the steps of feeding a finely-divided con-
centrate, a silicate-high slagging agent, and air or oxygen-
enriched air into said upper section of said reaction shaft in
order to form a suspension and to oxidize the lead to lead
oxide, removing gases via said riser pipe, and withdrawing
melt from said lower furnace for further treatment which
process further comprises feeding the slagging agent at such a
rate that substantially all of the lead oxide reacts with the
slagging agent to produce lead silicate, resulting in a melt in the
form of a slag containing substantially all of the lead silicate in
said lower furnace, withdrawing melt from the lower furnace;
and directing all of the melt withdrawn from the lower furnace
to a reduction furnace in order to reduce the lead silicate to
produce raw lead and a slag low in lead and high in silicate and
separating raw lead from the slag.
• CilAkgmfcm')
Ws7l<gmtan'
'•B(2jOkgmfrm') IV VALUE
OF IMFttCT
:V23k^cm'
IVa5tigTV_Tn'
RANGE OF ELEMENT
y OF THIS INVENTION
1 2 3^56 NOo)
1. A ferrite-austenitic two-phased cast stainless steel having
an impact strength of at least 3 kg-m/cm^ and containing the
following (weight %):
c
less than 0.10%
Si
less than 1.5%
Mn
less than 1.5%
PandS
less than 0.4% each
Cr
22-30%
Ni
3-6%
Mo
0.5-0.9%
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
231
-continued
Cu
Fe
0.4-1.0%
less than 0.1%
0.1-0.24%
balance
1
wherein vklues of Ni equivalent and Cr equivalent are calcu-
lated by the following equations:
Cr eq=Cr%-|-Mo%-l-1.5 Si% -1-0.5 Nb%
Ni eq = Ni%-l-0.5 Mn%-K30 C%
Cr eq/Ni eq being 3 to 4.5 and ferrite content being 50 to 80%.
II 4,391,636 '
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR THE
PRODUCTION OF NODULAR (DUCTILE) CAST IRON
Michael W. Windish, Bridgeton, Mo., assignor to Wintcc Com-
pany, St. Louis, Mo.
1 1 Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,163
1 1 Int. 0.3 C22C 3 7/00; C21C 7/00
U.S. O. 75—130 R 10 Cl«>™s
cationic quaternary ammonium compound has the positive
charge on a single atom and contains
(a) a first member selected from the group consisting of a
/S.y-unsaturated alkyl group, a hydroxyalkyl group having 2
to 6 carbon atoms and mixtures thereof,
(b) a second member comprising a long chain alkyl group
having 12 to 60 carbon atoms and
(c) a third and fourth member selected from a member of group
(a), an aralkyl group, an alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon
atoms and a mixture thereof; and wherein the amount of said
organic cationic quaternary ammonium compound is from
90 to 140 milliequivalents per 100 grams of said clay, 100%
active clay basis.
4,391,638
METHOD FOR RECLAIMING INK WASTE
Gerard A. Fusco, North Brunswick, and Glenn van Lier, Hills-
borough, both of N.J., assignors to J. M. Huber Corporation,
Locust, N.J.
Filed Apr. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 370,884
Int. a.5 C09D 11/02
U.S. O. 106—20 1* Claims
1. A method for reclaiming waste ink contaminated with
solid, fibrous impurities comprising,
diluting said waste ink with ink oil to form an ink mixture;
heating said mixture until the viscosity of said mixture is less
than substantially 60 poise;
thereafter, subjecting said mixture to an angular acceleration
sufficient to separate said solid, fibrous impurities from
said ink mixture to produce a clarified ink; and
blending with said clarified ink sufficient virgin ink to pro-
duce a printing ink having a predetermined rheological
property.
1. A process for the production of ductile cast iron from a
molten base iron which, but for the treatment of said process,
would be a grey cast iron upon solidification, said process
being carried out in a treatment ladle lined with a suitable
refractory material, said ladle having a main chamber therein,
a reaction chamber, and a charging and filling passage leading
from the top of said ladle to said reaction chamber, the latter
being in communication with the lower portion of the main
chamber, said process comprising of the steps of:
charging said reaction chamber with a quantity of a nodula-
rizing agent;
pouring said molten base metal into said reaction chamber
via said charging and filling passage thereby to effect a
reaction between said nodularizing agent and said base
metals;
rapidly establishing a hydrostatic pressure head over said
reaction chamber of sufficient depth thereby to maximize
the recovery of said nodularizing agent in said base metal;
and
permitting said base metal with the dissolved nodularizing
agent therein to flow into said main chamber.
4,391,637
RHEOLOGICAL ADDITIVE FOR NON-AQUEOUS FLUID
SYSTEMS
Wilbur S. Mardis, Trenton, N.J., and Oaude M. Finlayson,
Houston, Tex., assignors to NL Industries, Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,031
Bt. 0.3 C09D 11/00; C08L 91/06; C07F 5/06
U.S. O. 106—20 13 Claims
1. A non-aqueous fluid system which comprises: a non-aque-
ous fluid composition and an organophilic clay rheological
composition which is the reaction product of an organic cati-
onic quaternary ammonium compound and a smectite-type
clay having a cation exchange capacity of at least 75 millie-
quivalents per 100 grams of said clay, wherein said organic
4,391,639
RECORDING LIQUID
Masatsune Kobayashi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 413,989
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 10, 1981, 56-142644
Int. 0.3 C09D 11/02
U.S. O. 106—22 3 Oaims
1. A recording liquid characterized by containing as a dye a
compound represented by the formula
' R2 R3
R,_Q_S02.0-Q-N=N-Q-(3-N=N-Q,
R4 Rs
wherein Ri represents hydrogen or C1-C2 alkyl, R2 and R3
each represent hydrogen, C1-C2 alkyl, or C1-C2 alkoxy, R4
and R5 represent hydrogen or sulfo in salt form with base, and
Qi represents naphthyl substituted by hydroxyl and by sulfo in
salt form with base in water or a mixture of water and a water-
soluble organic solvent.
t
4,391,640
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING OIL-MODinED AND
ROSIN-MODinED PHENOLIC RESIN FOR PRINTING
INKS
Noboru Okoshi; Kin-ichi Kudo, and Shoichi Shimoyama, all of
Chiba, Japan, assignors to Dainippon Ink A Chemicals, Inc.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,021
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 5, 1980, 55-74920
Int. 0.3 C09D 11/06. 11/08
U.S. a. 106-29 1* Claims
1. A process for producing an animal or vegeUble oil-modi-
232
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
fled and rosin-modifled phenolic resin for printing inks, which
comprises:
(I) reacting (a) a resol phenol/formaldehyde initial conden-
sation product, (b) an animal or vegetable oil having an
iodine value of 100 to 210 or containing a hydroxy 1 group,
(c) a rosin and (d) an alcohol; or
(II) reacting the condensation product (a) and the animal or
vegetable oil (b) with a rosin ester obtained by the reac-
tion of the rosin (c) and the alcohol (d).
utilizing the resulting solution in said sealing or cementing
method.
431,641
SINTERED POWDER METAL FRICTION MATERIAL
Herbert W. Lloyd, Monsey, N.Y., assignor to Abex Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 218,316, Dec. 19, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,719
Int. a.3 C08K 3/08. 3/06. 3/04
U.S. Q. 106—36 10 Qaims
1. An iron-base, sintered powder metal friction material for
railroad braking use formed by solid phase sintering and con-
sisting essentially of, by volume, 10-70% carbon in the form of
coke or graphite; 0-2.5% sulfur; 0-10% alumina; 9-40% of a
metal powder additive selected from the group consisting of
copper, manganese, ferrochrome, and chrome carbide com-
pounds; and the balance iron.
4,391,642
^ALKALI METAL SILICATE BINDER COMPOSITIONS
John Stevenson, Sutton Coldfield; Alan Cross, Rubery, and John
G. Anderson, Birmingham, all of England, assignors to Foseco
International Limited, Birmingham, England
per No. PCT/GB80/00019, § 371 Date Oct. 27, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 13, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01768, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 4, 1980
PCT Filed Feb. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 199,927
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 27, 1979,
7906875
Int. a.3 B28B 7/36: C08L 7/00
U.S. CI. 106—38.23 15 Qaims
1. A binder composition in aqueous solution obtained by
mixing 15-47% by weight of an alkali metal silicate and 2-45%
by weight of a substantially water soluble carbohydrate se-
lected from nonosaccharides, disaccharides, polysaccharides
and derivatives thereof and characterised in that it also con-
tains 0.1-10% by weight of a phenolic compound selected
from the group consisting of catechol, resorcinol, quinol, pyro-
gallol, an alkyl derivative of a di- or trihydric phenol, a hy-
droxy benzene dimer or oligomer containing two or more
benzene rings and one or more hydroxyl groups, salicylic acid,
gallic acid and mixtures thereof.
4,391,643
RAPIDLY DISSOLVABLE SILICATES AND METHODS
OF USING THE SAME
Joseph R. Murphey, Duncan, Okla., assignor to Halliburton
Company, Duncan, Okla.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,821
1 Int. a.3 C04B 19/04
U.S. a. 106—74 5 Qaims
4. An improved method of sealing or cementing an earth
formation of the type utilizing a silicate solution prepared at
the site of such sealing or cementing operations from a rapidly
dissolvable partially hydrated powder silicate, the improve-
ment comprising the steps of:
preparing said silicate solution at the earth formation loca-
tion by dissolving a rapidly dissolvable partially hydrated,
powdered silicate having a molar ratio of silicon dioxide
to alkali metal oxide in the r£mge of from about 1.5:1 to
about 3.3:1 and wherein said alkali metal is selected from
the group consisting of sodium, potassium and mixtures
thereof; and
4,391,644
SHAPED ARTICLES MADE FROM EXPANDED
MINERALS
Peter Eckardt, Hofheim am Taunus, and Franz J. Voetz, Cam-
berg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst
Aktiengeseilschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,233
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 27,
1981, 3102542
Int. Q.3 C04B 31/44
U.S. Q. 106—85 5 Qaims
1. Shaped articles made from expanded minerals obtained by
treating a mixture of a hydrophobized expanded mineral and a
calcium aluminate with an aqueous solution of aluminum phos-
phate, and subsequently consolidating it under the action of
pressure and heat; the expanded mineral having been hydro-
phobized with a hydrophobizing agent consisting substantially
of
(a) a fatty amine of the formula
Rl(C)CH2CH2)n— N
/
J
\
R2
R3
in which Ri is C8-C22-alkyl, preferably Ci4-C22-alkyl,
Ci4-C22-alkenyl or C8-C22-alkylphenyl, R2 and R3 each
are hydrogen, Ci-C4-alkyl or C2-C4-alkenyl, phenyl or
benzyl, and n is a number of from 0 to 4;
(b) a fatty acid of the formula
R5CO(OCH2CH2)mOH
or a fatty alcohol of the formula
R6(CX:H2CH2)mOH
in which R5 is C8-C22-alkyl, preferably Ci4-C22-alkyl or
-alkenyl, R6 is C9-C22-alkyl, preferably Ci5-C23-alkyl or
-alkenyl, and m is a number of from 0 to 2; and
(c) a low molecular weight acid.
4,391,645
ADDITIVES FOR CEMENTITIOUS MATERIALS
Alphonso W. Marcellis, Boonton, and Grannis S. Johnson,
Plainfield, both of N.J., assignors to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,263
Int. Q.3 C04B 7/35
U.S. Q. 106—90 17 Claims
1. An additive for cementitious materials comprising:
(a) at least one salt of aromatic sulfonic acid formaldehyde
condensate, and
(b) at least one hydroxy aromatic compound selected from:
OOft
where
X is — OH or — O Cation, a is 1,2 or 3,
Yis
July 5, 1983
q
II
CHEMICAL
233
-continued
— C— OH, — C— OCation, or — C
RO2 (other than Si02)
R2O3 (other than B2O3)
R2O5
F
Other ingredients
0-10
0-20
0-10
0-5
0-2
b is 0, 1. 2 or 3 with the proviso that where a is 1, b is 1, 13- Cement product comprising a cementitious matrix and
R is — H or lower alkyl, S^ass bubbles of claim 1 dispersed in the matrix.
Z is —OH, — O Cation,
GO O
II II II
-C— OH, —C— OCation, or — C— OR',
R' is — H or lower alkyl and c is 0, 1, 2 or 3 and
*■ where!
^ X is —OH or — O Cation, a is 1, 2 or 3, n is a whole number
of 1 to 6 and
R " is -CH3; -CH2CH3; -CH2CH2CH3; -CH2CH2-;
II CH2— CH2— CH2—
CH3— CH2— C— CH2— ; — CH2— C— CH2— ; CH— ;
CH2- CH2- CH2-
CH2— H— C —
I I
CH— H— C—
I I
CH— or H— C—
I
4,391,647
SPACKELING COMPOSITION
Carmine A. Deer, Westfield, and Frank G. Cacossa, Livingston,
both of N.J., assignors to Sand and Sea Corporation, Sarasota,
Fla.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,308
Int. Q.3 C04B 11/10. 11/14. 11/24
U.S. Q. 106—115 9 Qaims
1. An non-leveling asbestos-free joint compound or stucco
composition comprising the following components in the indi-
cated proportions: from about 3 to about 7 parts by weight of
binder selected from the group consisting of latex binder and
polyvinyl alcohol; from about 0.3 to about 1.5 parts by weight
of water retention agent; from about 25 to about 36 parts by
weight of filler selected from the group consisting of calcium
carbonate, calcium sulfate, mica, talc, sericite and mixtures
thereof; and from about 1 to about 5 parts by weight of hollow
silica particles, said hollow silica particles having an average
diameter of from about 25 microns to about 1(X) microns and a
density of from about 0.10 g/cc to about 0.20 g/cc.
H— C—
I
H— C —
I
CH2— H2— C—
CH—
I
CH—
with the proviso that when n does not completely satisfy
all of the bonds of R", the remaining bonds are satisfied
with rrOH.
4,391,646
GLASS BUBBLES OF INCREASED COLLAPSE
STRENGTH
Peter A. Howell, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Minnesota Mining
and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
1 1 FUed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,164
1 1 Int. a.3 C04B 31/02; C03C 13/00
U.S.a. 106— 97 34 Qaims
1. Glass bubbles of average diameter between about 5 and
200 micrometers and average particle density of at least 0.4
gram/cubic centimeter consisting essentially of the following
ingredients in the stated weight-percents:
4,391,648
PARTICULATE PIGMENT COMPOSITIONS
Richard M. Ferrill, Jr., Glens Falls, N.Y., assignor to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,849, Aug. 20, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 966,439, Dec. 4, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,972
Int. Q.5 C09C 1/20. 3/68
U.S. Q. 106—308 M 5 Qaims
1. A solid particulate granular pigment composition which is
readily dispersible in oleoresinous vehicle systems and consists
essentially of from 25 to 95% by weight of at least one pigment;
from 1 to 15% of a cationic surfactant or blend of surfacunts;
and from 5 to 75% of a water-insoluble, non-crystalline, fria-
ble, thermoplastic polyester resin having a hydroxyl value of
75-150 mg. KOH/gram of resin and a Ring and Ball softening
point of from about 65* to 100° C. which polyester resin is the
condensation product of phthalic anhydride, p-tert. butylben-
zoic acid and trimethylol ethane.
SJO2
Alkali metal oxide
Bt2P3
u
60-90
2-20
1-30
0.005-0.5
0-25
4 391 649
PROCESS FOR REGENERATING A STRONGLY AQDIC
CATION EXCHANGE RESIN
Hiroshi Shimizu, Tokyo; Sigeo Sakai, Niiza; Fumihiko Matsuda,
Tokorozawa, and Reiko Matsumoto, Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Japan Organo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,217
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 26, 1980, 55-132988
Int. Q.^ BOIJ 49/00
U.S. Q. m-A6.1 16 Claims
9. A process for regenerating a strongly acidic cation ex-
change resin having polysaccharides and/or proteins deposited
234
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
on surfaces thereof comprising contacting said strongly acidic
cation exchange resin with an enzyme solution whereby each
nil
100
i
§85
i
o
i 80
N Nn* rMin
1 UMd rMin
2 Tr»otn»»fti tiy hydrochloric acid
3 Trtoimtoi by hydrochterouj ocid foitowcd oy
tabia solt couiiificotion trtotmont
4 Trtatm«ni by omytcM-proiMM rmicd ttquid
i Tr«o?fn«nt by omylost
6 Trtatm«nt by prottoM
"%
4,391,651
METHOD OF FORMING A HYPERABRUPT INTERFACE
IN A GaAs SUBSTRATE
Max N. Yoder, Falls Church, Va., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Nayy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,709
Int. C1.3 HOIL 21/263. 21/26. 21/203
U.S. CI. 148—1.5 6 Qaims
O IS 20 25 30
- FruclOM rtcov«ry ratio (%)
of said polysaccharides and/or proteins is removed from the
surfaces of said resin.
4,391,650
I METHOD FOR FABRICATING IMPROVED
COMPLEMENTARY METAL OXIDE SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICES
Robert F. Pfeifer, and Murray L. Tnidei, both of Centerville,
Ohio, assignors to NCR Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,891
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/22. 21/265
U.S. a. 148—1.5 8 Qaims
■•4
' ^,
«xivni of coaipMt*
omorpruoiion
— I — I — 1 — r
60Cr C AN»«AL
. »TO«C PSOf 11.E5
Ainnrp(iu*>9 "■■**'*
D£PTM^ «
1. An improved method of forming, in the fabrication of a
desired PET, a hyperabrupt interface in a GaAs substrate,
wherein said improved method comprises the steps of:
preamorphizing a region of said GaAs substrate to a prede-
termined depth;
implanting donor ions in said preamorphized region to a
depth of 90% of the predetermined depth thereby creating
a retrograde donor ion concentration profile with depth;
and
annealing said GaAs substrate to activate said implanted
donor ions, thereby creating an electrically active region
and an underlying amorphous region in said preamor-
phized region and forming said hyperabrupt interface
therebetween.
1. A process for forming a high packing density CMOS
integrated circuit device from a structure including a body of
a semiconductor material having a first active region of a first
conductivity type, a second active region of a second conduc-
tivity type, and a thin silicon dioxide layer formed on said body
encompassing a gate region within each of said active regions,
said process comprising the steps of:
forming a layer of polysilicon t)ver said thin silicon dioxide
layer;
patterning said polysilicon into gate electrodes correspond-
ing to said first and second active regions;
doping the substrate indep>endently of said gate electrodes to
form the source and drain of a first conductivity type in
said second active region and a source and drain of the
second conductivity type in said first active region such
that said sources and drains are aligned with their corre-
sponding gates;
doping said polysilicon gates with impurities of a single
conductivity type independently of said sources and
drains
whereby said device is free of dopant penetration from said
gates into said substrate through said thin oxide layer.
4,391,652
SURFACE TREATMENT FOR ALUMINUM AND
ALUMINUM ALLOYS
Narayan Das, Westmont, and Joy M. Schaefer, Park Ridge,
both of 111., assignors to Chemical Systems, Inc., Chicago, 111.
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,992
Int. a.3 C23F 7/00
U.S. a. 148—6.15 R 15 Claims
1. An aqueous coating solution for forming a coating on
aluminum and aluminum alloy surfaces consisting essentially of
at least about 0.025 grams/liter of zirconium, at least about
0.050 grams/liter of fluoride ion, at least about 0.025 gramsA
liter of nickel and sufficient acid to adjust the pH to the range
of about 1.2 to about 2.5.
July 5,
983
CHEMICAL
235
4391,653
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG COLD ROLLED STEEL
STRIP HAVING EXCELLENT MECHANICAL
STRENGTH AND USEFUL FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Hiroshi Takechi; Hiroshi Katoh, both of Klsarazu; Kazuo
Koyama, Kimitsu, and Kazuhide Usami, Kisarazu, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,450
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1980, 55/132344
Int. a.' C21D 8/04
U.S. a. 148—12 C 5 Qaims
1. A process for producing a high strength cold rolled steel
strip useful for motor vehicles, comprising the steps of:
preparing a steel slab comprising
0.008 to 0.020% by weight of carbon,
0.01 to 0.45% by weight of manganese,
0.05 to 0.10% by weight of phosphorus,
0.005 to 0.050% by weight of acid-soluble aluminum,
and the balance consisting of iron and unavoidable impuri-
ties in which nitrogen is limited to a content of 40 ppm or
less;
heating said steel slab to a temperature of 1200° C. or less;
hot rolling said heated steel slab at a temperature not lower
than the Ar3 point of said steel;
descaling said resultant hot rolled steel strip;
cold rolling said descaled steel strip at a rolling reduction of
65% or more;
continuously annealing said cold rolled steel strip by heating
it to a temperature of from 700° to 900° C, by soaking the
steel strip for 20 seconds to 3 minutes and by cooling the
steel strip at a cooling rate of from 5° C./sec to 30° C./sec
in the temperature range of 650° C. or more and then, at a
cooling rate of more than 30° C./sec in the temperature
range of below 650° C;
overaging said annealed steel strip at a temperature of from
320° to 450° C. for 1 to 10 minutes;
cooling said overaged steel strip to the ambient temperature,
and;
temper-rolling said cooled steel strip at the ambient tempera-
ture.
4,391,655
- TREATMENT FOR THE ALLEVIATION OF HIGH
TEMPERATURE OXIDATION OF ALUMINUM
Michael E. Thurston; William A. Cassada, III, and Daniel J.
Schardein, all of Richmond, Va., assignors to Reynolds Metals
Company, Richmond, Va.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,484
Int. C\? C21D 1/44
U.S. a. 148—20.6 12 Qaims
1. A method for the control of high temperature oxidation in
aluminum materials to be subjected to solution heat treatment
consisting of exposing the surface of the aluminum material to
an aqueous solution consisting of a transition metal chloride
prior to said solution heat treatment.
4,391,656
ISOTROPIC AND NEARLY ISOTROPIC PERMANENT
MAGNET ALLOYS
Sungho Jin, Gillette, and Thomas H. Tiefel, Rockaway, both of
N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated,
Murray Hill, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 197,970, Oct. 17, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,435.
This application May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374,310
Int. Q.^ HOIF 1/02
U.S. Q. 148—102 3 Qaims
tr(C
nea:-
ZOO
f.UfSS «
_,^
3r.3,
-53
ceso-
^ .^
7="^^^^
-Oi
31
9033-
153-
"'y^
/^-v.
N«t
-o:
■V.
!3C0-
T3B0-
1
ecoo-
100-
^
^
'
0
IS IS
11 l(
19 20
4,391,654
METHOD OF THERMO-CHEMICAL TREATMENT OF
CUTTING TOOLS AND PLASTIC WORKING TOOLS
Jerzy Wyszkowski; Wladyslaw Panasiuk; Stanislaw Koprek,
and Andzei Piechal, all of Warsaw, Poland, assignors to In-
stytut Mechaniki Precyzyjnej, Warsaw, Poland
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,709
Qaims priority, application Poland, Jul. 4, 1980, 225459
Int. Q.3 C23F 7/04
U.S. Q. 148—16.6 4 Qaims
1. A method of thermo-chemically treated cutting tools or
plastic working tools made of high-speed, high-chromium and
ledeburitic steels comprising the steps of
forming an oxide layer on the surfaces of said tools, said
layer having a thickness of being not greater than 6 fim,
and said layer being produced by oxidizing said tools in
steam at a temperature within the range of 520 to 570
degrees Centigrade for 30 to 120 minutes, and
gas nitriding the oxidized tools, for a period of time of at
least 15 minutes in duration, in an atmosphere of dissoci-
ated ammonia at a temperature of 520 to 580 degrees
Centigrade and simultaneously subjecting the oxidized
tools to oxidation, in steam consisting of 5 to 95 percent by
volume of the whole gas atmosphere, during any arbitrary
interval of time occurring during said period whereby the
atmosphere of dissociated ammonia is obtained by dissoci-
ation of ammonia in the presence of steam. ,
1. Method for making a body of a magnetically isotropic or
nearly isotropic permanent magnet alloy, said method com-
prising (1) annealing a metallic body at a temperature in the
range of 800-1200 degrees C, said body comprising an amount
of at least 95 weight percent Fe, Mo, and Ni, Mo being in the
range of 10-40 weight percent of said amount, and Ni being in
the range of 0.5-15 weight percent of said amount, (2) rapidly
cooling said body, and (3) aging said body at a temperature in
the range of 500-800 degrees C. for a time in the range of 5
minutes to 10 hours, whereby magnetic coercivity of said alloy
is in the range of 50-500 oersted, magnetic remanence of said
alloy is in the range of 7000-14000 gauss, and magnetic square-
ness of said alloy is less than 0.9.
I 4,391,657
MANUFACTURE OF NIOBIUM-ALUMINUM
SUPERGGNDL'CriNG MATERIAL
WiUiam L. Feldmann, Bernardsville; John M. Rowell, Berkeley
Heights, and Paul H. Schmidt, Chatham, all of N.J., assignors
to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill,
N.J. ,
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,523
Int. Q.^ HOIL 39/24
U.S. Q. 148—133 13 Qaims
1. Method for making a NbsAI superconducting shaped
article which is sii^rconducting at a temperature which is
greater than or equal to 10 degrees Kelvin,
said method comprising heating a precursor body consisting
essentially of a supporting component and a supported
component,
said supporting component comprising a first element which
is niobium and at least one additional element whose
chemical affinity for oxygen is greater than the chemical
affinity between aluminum an oxygen.
236
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said supported component comprising aluminum oxide, and
heating being at a temperature in the range of from 800 to
1600 degrees Celsius and for a time which is sufficient to
reduce the aluminum oxide and to form an oxide of at least
a portion of said at least one additional element, whereby
- at least a layer consisting essentially of sup>erconducting
niobium-aluminum is formed.
4,391,658
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING SEMICONDUCTOR
SUBSTRATE
Syoiti Kitane; Shigeru Honjo, both of Himeji; Kuniyoshi Ohe,
and Fumio Tobioka, both of Hyogo, all of Japan, assignors to
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kalsha, Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,060
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1980, 55-175305
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/225
U.S. a. 148—188 5 Qaims
4^91,660
COPPER CONTAINING BALLISTIC ADDTnVES
Robert C. Corley, Lancaster, Calif., and Frederick F. Myers, Jr.,
Manassas, Va., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,761
Int. a.^ C06B 45/10
U.S. a. 149—19.9 9 Oaims
1. In a solid propellant formulation composed of a plastic
binder component, a fuel component and an oxidizer compo-
nent, the improvement which comprises the addition of a
minor amount of a copper containing additive selected from
the groups consisting of copper thiocyanate, copper ferrocya-
nide, 2,5-dihydroxy benzoquinone copper (II) polymer, an
N-substituted benzotriazol copper acetate complex, a cop^r
SchifF Base with salicylidene ethylene diamine, copper (II)
[(salicylaldehyde) (2,4-pentanedione)], and tetrachloro u-pjis
dimethyl glyoxamate copper (II)]di copper (II).
ii^
t:
'&.A::^>M,
',/./,../.'/...,
-2'
1. A method for manufacturing a semiconductor substrate
comprising the steps of:
forming on all surfaces of a raw semiconductor substrate an
impurity layer of the same conductivity type as the raw
semiconductor substrate and forming a first insulating film
on the entire impurity layer;
removing those portions of the impurity layer and first insu-
lating film which are formed on one major surface of the
raw semiconductor substrate and finishing the exposed
major surface of the raw semiconductor substrate, thus
providing a mirror surface;
forming a second insulating film on the mirror surface of the
raw semiconductor substrate and on the remaining first
insulating film, forming a protective film on the entire
second insulating film and forming a third insulating film
on the entire protective film, thus providing a laminate;
holding the laminate side by side together with other lami-
nates provided in the same way;
heating the laminates thus held, in an oxidizing atmosphere,
thereby diffusing the impurity from the impurity layers
into the raw semiconductor substrates to form diffusion
layers in the raw semiconductor substrates; and
removing the first insulating film, second insulating film,
protective film and third insulating film from each of the
laminates.
4,391,659
EXPLOSIVE
Jeremy G. B. Smith, Edenvale, South Africa, assignor to AECI
Limited, Johannesburg, South Africa
Filed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,719
Qaims priority, application South Africa, May 26, 1981,
81/3531
Int. a.3 C06B 45/00
U.S. a. 149—2 19 Qaims
1. An emulsion explosive of the water-in-fuel type which has
as its discontinuous phase an oxidizing salt-containing compo-
nent, and as its continuous phase a fuel component which is
immiscible with the discontinuous phase, the continuous phase
comrising at least a proportion of a polymeric dispersion.
4,391,661
CABLE COVERING METHOD USING AN EXPANDABLE
INSULATIVE SLEEVE
Hyman Izraeli, West Caldwell, N.J., assignor to Thomas & Betts
Corporation, Raritan, N.J.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 231,225
Int. a.3 HOIB li/22
U.S. a. 156—49 3 Qaims
1. A method for providing an insulative covering for an
electrical cable comprising the steps of:
(a) selecting an expandable electrically insulative sleeve
member to have relaxed cross-section less than the cross-
section of said cable;
(b) disposing said sleeve member interiorly of an outer mem-
ber of self-sustaining hollow configuration of cross-sec-
tion greater than such cable cross-section and placing said
sleeve member and said outer member in fluid-sealed
relation;
(c) introducing a pressurized fluid medium interiorly of said
sleeve member and thereby expanding said sleeve member
into contiguous relation with said outer member;
(d) terminating the introduction of said pressurized fluid
medium and maintaining the contiguous relation of said
sleeve member and said outer member in the absence of
said pressurized fluid medium;
(e) arranging said sleeve member and said outer member in
circumscribing relation to said cable;
(0 interrupting said fluid-sealed relation of said sleeve mem-
ber and said outer member to permit said sleeve member
to collapse upon said cable; and
(g) removing said outer member from said sleeve member.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
237
4^91,662
METHOD OF AND MEANS FOR PROVIDING AN
EFFECnVE THERMOPLASTIC ADHESIVE
CONNECTION OR SEAL USING THERMOCHROME
DYE
Peter Mauthe, Nen-Ulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hiiti Aktiengesellschaft, Schaan, Liechtenstein
Filed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,507
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 17,
1980, 3047635
Int. Q.3 GOIN il/22; GOIK 11/12
U.S. Q. 156—64 10 Qaims
1. A method of making adhesive connections or seals using
a thermoplastic adhesive where the thermoplastic adhesive
remains at or above the minimum temperature required for
satisfactory moistening the materials to be glued or sealed and
indicating when the temperature of the thermoplastic material
falls below the minimum temperature required for satisfactory
moistening comprising the steps of using a solid thermoplastic
adhesive containing at least one thermochrome dye showing a
color change in the temperature range between the minimum
temperature necessary for satisfactory moistening of the mate-
rials to be glued or sealed by the thermoplastic adhesive and a
temperature approximately 20° above the minimum tempera-
ture at which a satisfactory moistening occurs, and heating the
solid thermoplastic adhesive into a molten state where the
molten thermoplastic is sufficiently viscous and is heated to a
temperature at least approximately 20° above the minimum
temperatOre necessary for satisfactory moistening and noting
any color change in the thermoplastic adhesive indicating that
the thermoplastic adhesive is approaching the minimum tem-
perature necessary for satisfactory moistening.
quence until the surface of the substanceopposite the \
exposed surface is cured. ;
4,391,663
METHOD OF CURING ADHESIVE
Charles G. Hotter, III, 4110 County Line, Carson City, Nev.
89701
Continuation of Ser. No. 213,312, Dec. 5, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,238
Int. Q.3 C03C 27/00
U.S. Q. 156—64 10 Qaims
^'
4,391,664
PROCESS FOR nXING TILES IN POSTTION
Wilhelm Kramer, Linz, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Schmelzbasaltwerk Kalenborn, Dr. Ing. Mauritz KG, Kalen-
bom bei Linz, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,228
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 26,
1980, 3007147
Int. Q.3 E04B 2/00: B05D 5/12
U.S. Q. 156—71 6 Qaims
1. A process for fixing in position on a cement mortar coated
supporting structure wear-resistant lining tiles of ceramic,
fused mineral and metallic material for highly abrasive bulk
material such as coal ores and rock, said process comprising:
cleaning the back side to be coated of each of said tiles,
applying an epoxy-containing coating to the cleaned back
side of said tiles, said epoxy-containing coating having a
thickness of 1.5-2 mm and consisting of a resin mixture
and a curing agent mixed at a ratio of 100 to 17, the curing
temperature for said epoxy-containing coating being in the
range of 290-3 10 K.°,
the resin mixture consisting of
36.9 parts by weight epoxy resin,
25.2 parts by weight of fine sand,
34.9 parts by weight of quartz sand powder,
1 .0 parts by weight of thixotropic agent, and
2.0 parts by weight of conducting carbon stock,
dusting and rolling in the epoxy-containing coated back side
of said tiles a layer of material having an affinity for ce-
ment mortar, the material being selected from the group
consisting of quartz sand, lavalite and broken expanded
clay, with a grain size of 1-3 mm, \ ■
said material being rolled into the epoxy-containing coated
back side of said tiles at a pressure of 1 to 2 N/square mm,
and
following the rolling in of said material, hardening said
epoxy-containing coating, placing and fixing in position
said coated tiles on the cement mortar coated supporting
structure and filling up the spaces between said tiles by a
pointing compound, so as to produce a high shear strength
in said tiles.
5. The process as claimed in claim 1, in which said tiles are
fixed to a cement mortar composition having plastic material
additives that increase water retention, strength and adhesive
properties of the mortar composition.
1. A method of curing a heat curable substance, comprising
the steps of:
positioning a heat sensor adjacent an exposed surface of the
substance for responding to radiation heat energy to gen-
erate a signal representative of the temperature level of
the exposed surface of the substance;
irradiating the exposed surface of the substance and the heat
sensor with radiation heat energy;
removing the radiation heat energy from the substance and
the heat sensor in response to the heat sensor signal when
the signal is representative of the exposed surface reaching
a predetermined maximum temperature level;
allowing the exposed surface of the substance to cool to a
predetermined lower temperature level;
reapplying the radiation heat energy in response to the heat
sensor signal when the signal is representative of the ex-
posed surface of the substance reaching the predetermined
lower temperature level to reheat the exposed surface to
the predetermined maximum temperature level; and
repeating said removing and said reapplying steps in se-
4,391,665
METHOD OF MAKING PILE MATERIAL
Paul B. Mitchell, Jr., 2003 Ravenwood Dr., Collinsville, III.
62234, and Paul B. Mitchell, Box 443, Bryson City, N.C.
28713
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,564
Int. Q.5 B32B 1/00. 5/00; D04H 11/00
U.S. Q. 156—72 6 Qaims
1. A method of making pile material comprising pile strands
or the like arranged in side-by-side relation, and a backing
member bonded to the strands, said method comprising the
steps of:
(a) providing a bundle of pile strands, the strands extending
in side-by-side relation and being held in pressurized en-
gagement with each other by a wrapper surrounding the
strands;
(b) cutting the bundle including the the wrapper into slices,
each slice having a portion of the wrapper thereon;
(c) positioning each slice with the said portion of the wrap-
per thereon in a form having a wall surrounding the slice,
the form being of generally the same sectional shape as the
slice but of slightly larger sectional area than the slice for
238
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
providing a space between the periphery of the slice and
the wall of the form;
(d) removing the said portion of the wrapper from the slice,
thereby allowing the pile strands to expand laterally out-
3
.9
s •
J .5 gL-,-„_4 ,
wardly into engagement with the wall of the form, the
form thus serving to hold the pile strands; and
(e) bonding a backing member to the pile strands on one face
of the slice.
431,666
CONTAINER MANUFACTURING MACHINE
Martin Mueller, Wonder Lake, 111., assignor to Owens-Illinois,
Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,075
Int Q\} B29C 27/20; B32B il/00
U.S. a. 156—84 35 Claims
4,391,667
METHOD OF PREPARING CELLS TO ENABLE ONE
FLUID TO BE AFFECTED BY ANOTHER FLUID
Hakan Vangbo, Jiirfiilla; Bertil Lundin, SoUentima, and Oivind
Moklint, Varby, all of Sweden, assignors to Aktiebolaget Carl
Munters, Sollentura, Sweden
FUed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,807
Claims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 25, 1980, 8003175
Inf. gi.3 B31F 1/20; B32B 3/2%
U.S. a. 156—205 13 Oaims
1. A method of manufacturing a cell of the type having a
plurality of passages therethrough and further of the type in
which one or more fluids may selectively be passed through
the passages, said method comprising the steps of:
forming a plurality of thin membranes from mineral fibres,
said fibres having a filament diameter in the range of about
3 to 20 micrometers and being loosely felted together,
corrugating at least some of the membranes, adjacent mem-
branes being bonded to each other by a bonding agent
whereby the corrugations form with adjacent membranes
the passages of the cell,
adding a fine powder filler to the formed membranes in an
amount which by weight exceeds the weight of said
formed membranes whereby the mineral fibres are embed-
ded with the filler to form therewith a composite member
and to provide said membranes with an increased active
surface area, and
impregnating the formed powder filled member with an
inorganic binder whereby the bound powder filler forms a
load-bearing layer which is cohesive throughout the in-
creased surface area of said membranes and through the
cross-section thereof and whereby said fibres serve as
reinforcement for said composite reinforced member.
1. An apparatus for the manufacture of a container of heat-
shrinkable thermoplastic material comprising sleeve winding
means for forming an open ended sleeve with a liquid impervi-
ous side seam, drum means mounted for rotation about its
longitudinal axis and supporting a plurality of container man-
drels which rotate about their own axis in synchronization
with the rotation of said drum means, means for moving said
sleeve in a longitudinal direction along the surface of said
mandrel means, heat dispensing means positioned adjacent said
drum and mandrel means for heat softening and shrinking at
least a portion of said sleeve into partial conformity with the
container mandrel supporting said sleeve, means for forming a
portion of the heat softened sleeve into a partial end closure for
said container and container removal means for removing said
container from said mandrel.
4,391,668
MIXED OXIDE OXYGEN ELECTRODE
William A. Armstrong, Ottawa, Canada, assignor to Her Maj-
esty the Queen in right of Canada, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,665
Oaims priority, application Canada, Sep. 2, 1980, 360068
Int. a.3 C09J 5/02; C25D 3/12
U.S. a. 156—308.2 9 Qaims
8. A method for the preparation of a nickel/cobalt oxide
impregnated nickel plaque material, comprising the steps of:
(a) providing a substantially oxide-free sintered nickel
plaque material;
(b) dipping the nickel plaque in an aqueous solution of cobalt
nitrate;
(c) drying the cobalt nitrate impregnated plaque so formed;
(d) heat treating at about 200* to 250' C. for about 1 to 8
hours, to form the nickel/cobalt oxide impregnated nickel
plaque material;
(e) covering one side of the plate with a polytetrafiuoroeth-
ylene membrane;
(0 cold pressing the membrane onto the plate;
(g) exposing the other side of the plate to aqueous cobalt
nitrate and polytetrafluoroethylene solution;
(h) drying the plate;
(i) removing the polytetrafluoroethylene covering from said
one side of the plate;
0) heat treating the plate at about 250° C. for about 3 hours,
to form a plate wet-proofed only on said other side of the
plate;
(k) covering the wet-proofed side of the plate with a polytet-
rafluoroethylene membrane; and
(1) hot-pressing the membrane onto the plate.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
239
ir
4,391,669
DEVICE FOR MAKING RECORDING DISC CARTRIDGE
Tohru Yamakawa, Muko, and Kozi Akiyama, Joyo, both of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi Maxell, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,982
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 25, 1980, 55-7914
Int O.^ B32B 31/00; G05G 15/00; B31F 7/00
U.S. O. 156—539 5 Oaims
l*r*-
-'- -11 i> i^ l:. n \ I .- t' t-
31 33 4. 4. 47
u 5
and in turn the heating chips of the first adhering means
are lowered to contact on the liner from above to prelimi-
narily adhere the liner to the cover sheet by a plurality of
spots on the front peripheral edge thereof;
second adhering means for adhering the liner to the cover
sheet by heat melting adhesion around the respective
patterns of the drive shaft insertion hole and the recording
head access hole, said second adhering means including a
plurality of heating chips for adhering the liner on the
- cover sheet on a rear peripheral edge of the liner, said
adhering of the respective patterns of the drive shaft
insertion hole and the recording head access hole and the
adhering of the rear peripheral edge of the liner on the
cover being performed simultaneously;
second transferring means for transferring the cover sheet
with the liner to a position below the second adhering
means after said preliminary adhering is perfected;
third adhering means for adhering the liner to the cover
sheet by heat melting adhesion over a plurality of prede-
termined linear patterns on the liner; and
third transferring means for transferring the cover sheet
with the liner from the second adhering means to the third
adhering means.
4,391,670
LOW ENERGY TMP FURNISH OF IMPROVED
STRENGTH BY OZONATION AND PRESS DRYING
Richard B. Phillips, Tuxedo Park, N.Y., assignor to Interna-
tional Paper Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,295
Int. 0.5 D21F 11/02
U.S. O. 162—12 11 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of linerboard from thermo-
mechanical, high temperature mechanical and semichemical
mechanical pulps comprising:
(a) treating mechanical pulp selected from thermomechani-
cal, semi-chemical mechanical, high temperature mechan-
ical, or mixtures thereof with ozone;
(b) forming a sheet having from about 30% to about 60%
consistency from the ozone treated pulp of step a above;
and
(c) press drying the sheet formed in step b above at high
temperatures and pressure until at least about 10% to
about 15% moisture content is attained.
1. A device for making a magnetic recording disc cartridge
having a cover jacket in the form of an enclosure with a drive
shaft insertion hole and a recording heat access hole defined
therein and a magnetic recording disc which is rotatably en-
closed in the enclosure, said cover jacket being composed of a
cover sheet of a generally elongated rectangular shape with a
liner laid on the surface of the cover sheet, said jacket being
formed by folding the cover sheet with a liner along a line
crossing in a direction of the short side of the cover sheet in
such a manner that both portions of the liner p>ositioned on
both sides of the folded liner are opposed to each other in the
enclosure, said device comprising;
a feed table for placing the cover sheet with the liner
thereon;
first adhering means having a plurality of heating chips for
adhering said liner to the cover sheet by heat melting
adhesion, said heating chips being vertically movably
disposed above the feed table;
first transferring means for transferring the cover sheet with
the liner from an initial position remote from the first
adhering means on the feed table to such a position that a
front peripheral edge portion of the liner is placed below
the heating chips of the first adhering means;
means for reciprocably moving the heating chips in a verti-
cal direction, whereby said cover sheet with the liner is
transferred to such a position that the front peripheral
edge portion of the liner is placed below the heating chips
of the first adhering means by said first transferring means
4,391,671
METHOD OF PRODUCING LIME IN A ROTARY KILN
Mahmoud K. Azarniouch, Montreal West, Canada, assignor to
Pulp and Paper Research Institute of Canada, Pointe Oaire,
Canada
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,504
Int. O.J COIF 11/06
U.S. O. 162—30.1 5 Oaims
■^
r^^
Vis
M tkin
"Hiir 1 I. Ml i.
l:.; fc
1
1. In a method of calcining lime mud or lime stone in a
rotating kiln in which the lime mud or lime stone is fed into the
240
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
cold end of said kiln and is calcined by the heat produced by
burning fossil fuel at the hot end of said kiln, the improvement
which comprises: preparation of biomass residues to produce a
biomass residue substantially free from fmes and suitable for
feeding into said kiln; feeding said prepared biomass residues
into the cold end of said kiln, along with the material to be
calcined; combusting said residues in said kiln, generating heat
in situ in said kiln, whereby the amount of fossil fuel burned to
calcine said material is diminished.
4^91,673
BASEMENTLESS SEPARATOR SYSTEM
Jeffrey B. Duncan, Argyle, and Joseph A. Bolton, Glens Falls,
both of N.Y., assignors to Albany International Corp., Me-
nands, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 123,098, Feb. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,721
Int. a.3 D21F 1/48
U.S. a. 162—217 20 Claims
4,391,672
METHOD USED IN PAPER MAKING FOR TREATMENT
OF A WEAVE
Antti Lehtinen, Jyvaskylii, Finland, assignor to Valmet Oy,
Finland
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,748
Claims priority, application Finland, Mar. 16, 1981, 810812
Int a.3 D21F 7/00
U.S. a. 162—192 15 Qaims
ACOUSTIC
Gine HATCH eo
"ATia^ f
LfQV'O *v
/uo/4Taeios
■PH4S£
I. A method used in paper making for treatment of a weave,
board web, paper, and the like, said method utilizing frequency
radiators arranged in the vicinity of a material to be treated and
coupling hquid between the material to be treated and the
radiators, said method comprising the steps of
arranging frequency radiators on opposite sides of the mate-
rial to be treated, opposite each other, and with a mutual
spacing which is only slightly larger than the thickness of
the material to be treated;
feeding longitudinal acoustic vibrations to said radiators at
the same frequency;
causing said opposed radiators to apply respective acoustic
vibration fields to said material to be treated located be-
tween said radiators, the respective vibration fields having
the same frequency and a phase difference with respect to
each other; and
regulating the phase difference of the vibrations fed to the
opposed radiators to focus the most intensive region of
action of a combination of said fields of vibration in the
thickness direction of the material to be treated.
II. Paper making apparatus for treatment of a weave, board
web, paper, and the like, said apparatus comprising
frequency radiators positioned on opposite sides of a mate-
rial to be treated, opposite each other, and with a mutual
spacing which is only slightly larger than the thickness of
the material to be treated;
a frequency generator having a first terminal electrically
connected to one of said frequency radiators on one side
of said material and a second terminal, said generator
producing longitudinal acoustic vibrations at said first and
second terminals of the same frequency; and
a phase shifter connecting the second terminal of said fre-
quency generator to another of said frequency radiators
on the opposite side of said material for varying the differ-
ence of the vibrations fed to said radiators for focusing the
most intensive area of a field of vibration combinations in
said material in a manner whereby it has an effect upon a
desired area of said material.
I. A basementless separator system for removing liquid from
a liquid/gaseous mixture comprising; a separator including
means for separating the liquid and gas therein, first conduit
means communicating with the separator and with the source
of the liquid/gaseous mixture, second conduit means commu-
nicating with the separator and with vacuum producing means
to draw the liquid/gaseous mixture into the separator and to
remove separated gas from the separator, first valve means on
the separator in alignment with and connected to a liquid
storage tank to open and close a discharge opening for sepa-
rated liquid from the separator to be collected in the storage
tank with the storage tank being subjected to the vacuum
producing means when the first valve is open, second valve
means on the storage tank to open and close a drainage opening
in the tank to control drainage of liquid therefrom, level sens-
ing means on the tank to indicate a predetermined level of
collected liquid stored in the tank, and control means respon-
sive to liquid collection in the tank to open and close the valves
and periodically permitting liquid contained in the tank to
drain under atmospheric conditions while the system is operat-
ing under vacuum and the absolute pressure is less than atmo-
spheric.
II. A method of removing liquid separated from a liquid/-
gaseous mixture by use of a basementless separator system
comprising; passing the liquid/gaseous mixture into a separator
for separating the liquid and gas therein by applying vacuum to
the separator and the source of a liquid/gaseous mixture to
draw the liquid/gaseous mixture into the separator and remove
separated gas from the separator, opening and closing a first
valve at a discharge opening in the separator to control deliv-
ery of separated liquid from the separator to a liquid storage
tank connected therewith for collection therein with the stor-
age tank being subjected to vacuum when the first valve is
open, opening and closing a second valve at a drainage opening
in the storage tank to control drainage of collected liquid
therefrom, sensing the level of liquid in the tank to indicate a
predetermined level of collected liquid in the tank, and con-
trolling the opening and closing of the valves responsive to the
liquid condition in the tank to periodically permitting liquid
contained in the tank to drain under atmospheric conditions
while the system is operating under vacuum and the absolute
pressure is less then atmospheric.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
4,391,674
COKE DELIVERY APPARATUS AND METHOD
Rolf Velmin; Michael S. Kovatch, both of Lakewood, and Gus H.
Mautz, Jr., Westlake, all of Ohio, assignors to Republic Steel
Corporation, Qeveland, Ohio
per No. PCTAJS80/00470, § 371 Date Feb. 17, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 17, 1981
per FUed Apr. 29, 1980, S«r. No. 270,529
Int. a.3 cioB ii/oo, 33/14. 45/02
U.S. a. 201— 41 24aaims
io \
-74
Ah
1. A coke delivery apparatus for use in the transfer of coke
from a coke oven to a quench car comprising;
(a) a movable hood structure adapted for movement when in
use from a fume confining coke delivery position to a
storage position and return;
(b) a chute structure adapted when in use to be moved from
a coke guiding position to a storage position and return,
said chute structure having a guiding pnjrtion for contact-
ing and guiding the coke; and,
(c) a force transmitting structure interconnection assembly
operably connected to each of the structures and adapted
to transmit motion producing forces from one structure to
the other when the one structure is driven from one of its
said positions to the other, the motion of said chute struc-
ture in moving toward its storage position having both
rotational and translational components which dispose
said guiding portion in a position facing away from the
coke qven.
4,391,675
SIEVE PLATES AND DISTILLATION COLUMNS
Malcolm Lynn, Preston, near Hull, and Peter E. May, Keying-
ham, both of England, assignors to BP Chemicals Limited,
London, England
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,324
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 8, 1981,
8100606; Oct. 3, 1981, 8129924
Int. a.3 BOID 3/14
U.S. a. 202—158 10 Claims
■>•
3. A distillation column which is provided with a plurality of
spaced sieve plates, characterised in that the sieve plates are of
polymeric material and are mounted on a central shaft coaxial
with the CO umn, said sieve plate comprising:
241
(a) a circular base p>oriion provided with
(i) a central axial ap)erture adapted to receive the shaft,
(ii) an additional aperture spaced from the central aperture
and capable of receiving a tubular member acting as a
weir and a downcomer, and
(iii) a plurality of perforations such that the perforations
represent in total a free area of between 3 and 20%, the
perforations having a uniform average diameter be-
tween 0.6 and 4.0 mm,
(b) a flexible, fiared-lip portion around the circumference of
the base providing sealing contact with the inner walls of
the column and providing a reservoir for downcoming
liquid, and
(c) means for retaining the plate on the shaft. 1
4,391,676
ARRANGEMENT FOR PASSING A HRST LIQUID
CLOSE TO, BUT WITHOUT MIXING IT WITH A
SECOND LIQUID, FOR EXAMPLE AN ARRANGEMENT
FOR SEA WATER DESALINATION
Finn Torberger, Ornstigen 2, 183 50 Taby, Sweden
per No. Per/SE81/00076, § 371 Date Not. 19, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 19, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02729, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 1, 1981
PCT Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 325,430
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 24, ISWO, 8(M)2233
Int. C1.3 BOID 3/02
U.S. a. 202—173 3 Qaims
102 TO 11 13 12
101-
103
'=kV^.
■Vr
^--
112 132 122
1. An arrangement providing a first liquid to fiow close to a
second liquid but without the liquids being intermixed, for
example for the recovery of freshwater by distillation of sea
water and for the transfer of heat from a relatively warm liquid
to a relatively cold liquid, comprising:
A. a first plurality of plates carrying the first liquid;
B. a second plurality of plates carrying the second liquid, the
second plurality of plates being placed interleaved be-
tween but separated from the first plurality of plates; and
C. separating pieces located between and separating the first
and second plurality of plates from one another, each
separating piece including a frame which receives plate-
shaped mutually plane-parallel partial pieces that include:
1. an outer porous and hydrophobic plastic diaphragm
with void radii dimensioned to prevent the passage of
liquid water through the plastic diaphragm at the hy-
drostatic pressures prevailing in the arrangement while
rendering possible the passage of water vapor,
2. an outer thin plastic foil, and
3. an intermediate distance network located between the
diaphragm and the foil positioned and dimensioned to
maintain an airgap therebetween so that the plastic
diaphram will be supplied constantly with air and will
be free of air depletion or partial filling of liquid,
said frame further being provided in its upper portion with
inflow holes for air to pass to said airgap, and in its lower
portion with outflow holes for water condensed in said airgap.
242
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^1,677
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING SUBSTANTIALLY
SULPHUR-FREE BUTENE-1
Norman Harris, Stockton-on-Tees, England; John F. Flintoff,
Thousand Oaks, Calif., and John W. Kippax, Stockton on
Tees, England, assignors to Davy McKee (Oil & Chemicals)
Limited, London, England
Continuation of Ser, No. 132,293, Mar. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,873
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 21, 1979,
7910010; European Pat. Off., Nov. 28, 1979, 79302707.9
Int. a.^ BOID 3/14
U.S. a. 203—28 13 Qaims
- 3 < if
. 1. A process for the production of a substantially sulphur-
free, butene-1 rich stream suitable for use as a hydroformyla-
tion feedstock from a butene-containing C4 hydrocarbon feed
stream containing a minor amount of at least one sulphurous
component selected from hydrogen sulphide, carbonyl sul-
phide, methyl mercaptan and mixtures of at least one thereof
with at least one higher boiling sulphurous compound, which
comprises providing a desulphurization zone maintained under
desulphurization conditions and containing a charge of at least
one solid desulphurization medium capable of converting to
higher boiling sulphurous compounds at least a portion of the
hydrogen sulphide, carbonyl sulphide, and methyl mercaptan
present in the feed stream and of absorbing or adsorbing sub-
stantially the remainder of any hydrogen sulphide, carbonyl
sulphide and methyl mercaptan present in the feed stream,
contacting the feed stream in the desulphurization zone with
the solid desulphurization medium in the presence of from
about 20 ppm up to about 1000 ppm water, passing thus treated
feed stream, now essentially free from hydrogen sulphide,
carbonyl sulphide and methyl mercaptan, but containing at
least one higher boiling sulphurous compound, said at least one
higher boiling compound having been produced in the desul-
phurization zone, to a distillation zone, recovering as a bottom
product from the distillation zone a butene-2 rich stream con-
taining said at least one higher boiling sulphurous compound,
and recovering as an overhead product from the distillation
zone a substantially sulphur-free, butene-1 rich stream.
4,391,678
METHODS OF MAKING INFRARED DETECTOR ARRAY
COLD SHIELD
Wallace L. Freeman, Woodbridge, Va., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,503
Int. a.5 C25D 5/02. 5/00
U.S. a. 204—15 4 Claims
1. A method of making a cold shield for an infrared detector
array, wherein the array consists of a plurality of detectors and
connecting leads on one side of a substrate, wherein the
method includes the steps of:
(a) coating said detectors, said leads, and one side of said
substrate with a thin subcoat;
(b) depositing a relatively thin metal layer on said subcoat;
(c) electroplating a relatively thick metal on said thin metal
layer;
(d) masking said thick metal layer in accordance with said
COAT AUKAr WITH THIN INSULATtMC SuKOAT
om msulatwc ^notomsist su«co*t
EVA
1 TMM
6*.ecti»oplatc tm(C« metal
later onto tmii* mctal
E
MASH THM MCTAL , ETON
[ HOLES TO uMCOvEK SutCOAT
MASK Thick mctal, etch
THICM ANO THIN METAL LAVENS
TO liNCOVER SUBCOAT
mask thick metal. etck'
ThiCk and thin metal
layers. etch subcoat
REMOVE LMCOVERED SuBCOAT
ELECTROPLATE THICh
METAL LATER ONTO
TMN METAL LATER
[remove uncovered SUBCOA
7
ELECTROPLATE THICK
MCTAL LAYER ONTO
THtN METAL LAYER
REMOVE UNCOVERED SuBCOAT
array and etching through said thick and thin metal layers
to uncover the subcoat over the detectors and at least a
portion of said leads; and
(e) removing the mask.
4,391,679
ELECTROLYTIC BATH AND PROCESS FOR THE
DEPOSITION OF GOLD ALLOY COATINGS
Wolfgang Zilske, and Werner Kuhn, both of Hanau, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfiirt,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,142
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 3,
1980, 3012999
Int. a.3 C25D 3/62
U.S. a. 204—43 G 20 Claims
1. A gold bath suitable for the deposition of high gloss and
ductile gold alloy coatings consisting of either (1) water, potas-
sium cyanoaurate (III), at least one alloying element selected
from the group consisting of cobalt, nickel, indium, zinc, and
cadmium in the form of a water soluble salt together with a
hydrocarbyl amine, an aminocarboxylic acid, or a phosphonic
acid which forms a complex with the alloying element and
20-200 g/1 of sulfuric acid, phosphoric acid, citric acid or a
mixture thereof, or (2) the gold bath (1) together with potas-
sium dihydrogen phosphate, potassium hydrogen sulfate or
potassium citrate, said bath having a pH of less than 3.
4,391,680
PREPARING ALKALI METAL HYDROXIDE BY WATER
SPLITTING AND HYDROLYSIS
Krishnamurthy Mani, Denville, and Frederick P. Chlanda,
Rockaway, both of N.J., assignors to Allied Corporation,
Morris Township, Morris County, N.J.
FUed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,)45
Int. a.3 C25B 1/16. 1/22
U.S. a. 204—98 16 Claims
1. A process which comprises the steps:
(a) introducing aqueous alkali metal chloride solution into
each first compartment between a cation membrane and a
cation side of a bipolar membrane of an electrodialytic
water splitter comprised of alternating cation and bipolar
membranes, said membranes being positioned between an
anode and a cathode,
(b) introducing into each second compartment between a
cation membrane and an anion side of a bipolar membrane
a liquid comprising water,
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
243
(c) passing a direct current through said water splitter
thereby causing acidification of said aqueous alkali metal
chloride solution and basification of said liquid comprising
water and transfer of alkali metal cations from said aque-
ous salt solution to said liquid comprising water,
(d) withdrawing from said second compartments a liquid
comprising aqueous alkali metal hydroxide.
t
la Kb
OHiJ
— Y^
J
v~;7"
u . J
:j'
.^.6c l-i%!
4,391,682
METHOD FOR ELECTROLYTIC PRODUCHON OF
HYDROGEN
Bemd D. Struck, Langerwehe; Robert Junginger, Boblingen, and
Dagmar Boltersdorf, Diiren, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Kemforschungsanlage Jiilich GmbH, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,796
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 11,
1980, 3005032
Int. C1.3 C25B 1/02. 1/22
U.S. Q. 204—104 5 Qaims
CATHOLYTE
5
ELECTROLYTE.^
-IF
(e) withdrawing from said first compartments an acidified
aqueous salt solution comprising between about 0.6 and 13
_ moles HCl per 100 hundred moles alkali metal chloride,
and Jl '
(0 feedmg said acidified salt solution to the anode compart-
ment of a diaphragm or membrane electrolytic cell.
4,391,681
METHOD OF INHIBTHNG FORMATION OF AND
BREAKING OF MERCURY BUTTER IN CHLOR-ALKALI
CELLS
Susan Anderson, Lightwater; David E. Brown, Weybridge; Da-
vid E. Graham, Fleet; Mahmood N. Mahmood, Walton-on-
Thames, and Maurice C. M. Man, London, all of England,
assignors to The British Petroleum Company p.l.c, London,
England
FUed May 13, 1982, Ser. No. 377,606
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 14, 1981,
8114856; Mar. 19, 1982, 8208108
Int. Q.3 C25B 1/16. 1/42
U.S. Q, 204—99 11 Qaims
1. A method of inhibiting the formation of and/or breaking
of preformed mercury butter during electrolysis of alkali metal
brines to produce chlorine and caustic alkali using a flowing
mercury cathode which consists essentially of the following
steps
(a) electrolysis of the brine in a electrolyser,
(b) removal of an alkali metal rich amalgam from the electro-
lyser,
(c) removal of the alkali metal from the rich amalgam in a
denuder,
(d) withdrawal of the amalgam substantially reduced^in
alkali metal content from the denuder, and
(e) recirculation of the amalgam from step (d) into the elec-
trolyser for step (a),
characterised in that an aqueous solution of a surfactant mate-
rial capable of increasing the interfacial tension of the sodium
amalgam-aqueous interface to and/or maintaining the interfa-
cial tension of the sodium amalgam-aqueous interface at a
value of at least 180 dynes/cm is introduced into the amalgram
denuder so as to be in contact with the circulating mercury or
amalgam.
ANOLYTE
1. A process for electrolytic production of hydrogen in
which hydrogen is cathodically evolved and sulfurous acid is
anodically oxidized to sulfuric acid, utilizing an electrolyzer in
which the anode chamber is separated from the cathode cham-
ber by an intermediate chamber which is separated from the
cathode chamber by a qation exchange membrane and from the
anode chamber by a porous diaphragm, in which method a
separating electrolyte i% caused to flow through said intermedi-
ate chamber, and separate anodic and cathodic electrolytes are
caused to flow respectively through the anode and cathode
chambers, said method incorporating the improvement which
consists in that:
in the electrolyte flowing in the anode chamber as well as in
the electrolyte flowing in the cathode chamber, the con-
centration of sulfuric acid of at least 45% is provided, and
the membrane separating the intermediate chamber from the
cathode chamber is constituted of a material obtained by
polymerization of styrol and divinylbenzol in the presence
of polyvinyl chloride and the introduction of SO3H
groups, and has a specific resistance in 55 wt.% sulfuric
acid at 80° C, which is less than 30 ohm/cm.
4,391,683
MASK STRUCTURES FOR PHOTOETCHING
PROCEDURES
Reginald R. Buckley, Summit, and Frederick W. Ostermayer,
Jr., Chatham, both of N.J., assignors to BeU Telephone Labo-
ratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Sep. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 416,495
Int Q.3 C25F 3/12. 3/14
MS. Q. 204— 129J 30 Claims
1. A process for fabricating a device comprising the step of
photoetching a surface where etching rate depends on radia-
tion intensity incident on said surface characterized in that the
Z44
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
mask comprises alternating opaque and transparent areas and improvement comprising the steps of passing the direct current
the mask is imaged onto the surface by an optical system with through the strip to be pickled as a conductor between a uni-
aberrations and diffraction so as to produce radiation intensity
on the surface that varies continuously with position.
4,391,684
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE OF AN ARTICLE
HAVING INTERNAL PASSAGES
John Goddard, Bristol, England, assignor to Rolls-Royce Lim-
ited, London, England
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,782
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 17, 1980,
8023395
Int. a.3 B23P 1/00, 1/10
U.S. a. 204—129.4 6 Oaims
"^
2-^
:^
^\-^' "fc*"^*^'^
^
?* *\A/*
l/l \ 'Z2 i,^ '■» ?/
polar neutral salt pickling bath containing a cathode means an
an acid anolyte bath containing an anode means, said acid
anolyte bath being remote from said pickling bath.
4,391,686
ACTINIC RADIATION CURABLE FORMULATIONS
Henry C. Miller, Laurel, Md., and Dennis D. Howard, Girard,
Pa., assignors to Lord Corporation, Erie, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 180,774, Aug. 25, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 55,240, Jul. 6, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,884
Int. a.3 C08F 8/00
U.S. a. 204—159.15 16 Claims
1. A coating composition comprising
(a) a free radical-polymerizable material selected from the
group consisting of monomers, polymers and mixtures
thereof; and
(b) a photocatalyst system consisting essentially of
(i) as a photosensitizer compound, benzophenone; and
(ii) at least one photoinitiator selected from the group
consisting of organic compounds characterized by the
presence of at least one carbonyl group directly bonded
through a carbon-oxygen bond to a peroxy oxygen
atom.
1. A method of manufacture for a turbine blade having one
or more internal passages therein comprising the steps of:
(a) making parts of the blade which when joined together
complete the article, at least one of the parts having one or
more of the passages at least partially deflned in a surface
thereof which is adapted to confront a matching surface of
another of the parts,
(b) electro-lytically machining at least one of the two sur-
faces which are required to match by passing a linishing
belt containing electrolyte between the two surfaces and
in contact with both surfaces simultaneously, whereby
one acts as a former for machining the other, and passing
an electric current from one part to the other and through
the electrolyte, and
(c) assembling the parts with the matching surfaces in con-
frontation and with the partially formed passages aligned
and joining the surfaces together, thereby creating a hol-
low turbine blade.
4,391,687
PHOTOACnVE MIXTURE OF ACRYLIC MONOMERS
AND CHROMOPHORE-SUBSTTTUTED
HALOMETHYL-1-TRLAZINE
George F. Vesley, Hudson, Wis., assignor to Minnesota Mining
and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 121,404, Feb. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,330,590.
This appUcation Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,655
Int. a.3 C08F 2/50 4/00
U.S. a. 204—159.16 12 aaims
1. A photoactive mixture comprising by weight
(a) 100 parts of a composition or a polymer of 50-100 parts
of acrylic monomer and 0-50 parts of copolymerizable
monoethylenically unsaturated monomer and
(b) 0.01 to 2 parts of a chromophore-substituted halomethyl-
s-triazine of the formula
4,391,685
PROCESS FOR ELECTROLYTICALLY PICKLING STEEL
STRIP MATERIAL
George A. Shepard, Parma, and Philip C. Schillawski, Broad-
view Heights, both of Ohio, assignors to Republic Steel Corpo-
ration, Qeveland, Ohio
I FUed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,430
I Int. a.3 C25F 7/06
UJS. a. 204—145 R 6 Claims
1. In a process for electrolytically pickling a steel strip mate-
rial by subjecting the material to the action of direct current in
a pickling bath which contains at least one neutral salt, the
CI3C
t'Ki-
CI3C
wherein Ri, R2, R3, and R4 are independently hydrogen
or alkoxy groups, and 1 to 3 of Ri, R2. R3. and R4 are
hydrogen.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
245
4,391,688 4,391,689
ELECTROPHORESIS SYSTEM FOR MULTIPLE AUTOMATED ELECTROPHORESIS AND STAINING
AGAROSE SLAB GELS APPARATUS AND METHOD
Oaude Hamelin, Montreal, Canada, assignor to Institut Ar- Tipton L. Golias, Beaumont, Tex., assignor to Helena Laborato-
mand-Frappier, Laval, Canada nes Corporation, Beaumont, Tex.
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,743 Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,162
Int. a.3 BOID 13/02; GOIN 27/26 Int. Q.' BOID 57/02
U.S. a. 204— 180 G 25aaims U.S. Q. 204— 180 G 30 Claims
^
— 7^
■ii 35-
f=
137
^1 es . S7
2. A method for the separation of multiple DNA samples on
four different gel slabs which comprises:
providing first and second spaced apart elongated containers
which can be set in parallel fashion at a variable distance
from one another and each container having an inside and
an outside partition and housing a removable platinum
electrode;
adding a running buffer to each of said containers, said
running buffer to contact said removable platinum elec-
trode;
preparing at least four agarose gel slabs each having a row of
wells formed therein, by pouring an agarose solution
which has been equilibrated at 50° C. over at least four
~ horizontal glass plates over each of which a weil-forming
comb has been placed parallel to the glass plate at a dis-
tance of about 2 mm from the surface of said glass plate;
introducing DNA samples into wells of each agarose gel
slab;
arranging at least two agarose gel slab containing horizontal
plates over said first and second containers by aligning
both ends thereof respectively along the inner partitions of
said first and second vessels;
covering each end of each of said at least two agarose gel
slabs with one edge portion of a sheet of a two-ply paper
wick, and allowing the other edge portion of each sheet of
two-ply paper wick to dip into the respective running
buffer which is present in said first and said second con-
tainer;
disposing a pair of horizontal supporting rods spacedly
above said at least two agarose gel slab containing hori-
zontal plates which are directly arranged over said first
and second containers;
arranging the remaining agarose gel slab containing horizon-
tal plates over said supporting rods substantially in align-
ment with said at least two agarose gel slab containing
horizontal plates;
covering'each end of each of said remaining agarose gel
slabs with one edge portion of a sheet of a six-ply paper
wick, and allowing the other edge portion of each sheet of
six-ply paper wick to dip into the respective running
buffer which is present in said first and said second con-
tainer;
connecting the removable platinum electrodes housed in
each container to a suitable power supply and allowing
electrophoresis to take place, and
visualizing the localized bands produced in said agarose gel
slab.
1. An automated electrophoresis and staining apparatus
comprising a cabinet having an apertured top wall;
an elongated housing spaced within said cabinet having
upright front and rear walls, an end wall, a bottom wall
and a platform between said front and rear walls overiying
said bottom wall with said front and rear walls projecting
above said top wall;
an electrophoresis chamber adapted to contain a buffer
solution mounted upon said platform at one end of said
housing;
and a series of vats mounted upon said platform arranged in
a row and aligned with said chamber, adapted to contain
respectively a liquid stain and a series of processing solu-
tions;
said front and rear walls having transversely aligned longitu-
dinally spaced pairs of notches in and along their upper
edges;
said pairs of notches being over and in alignment with the
centerline of each of said vats and chamber respectively;
a plate holder rack overlying said electrophoresis chamber
including a horizontal frame and at its ends a pair of out-
wardly projecting inverted L-shaped arms respectively
nested in the pair of notches in registry with said chamber;
and adapted for supporting one or a plurality of upright
electrophoresis plates onto which has been applied a sam-
ple for electrophoretic fractionization;
said plates selected from the group consisting of cellulose
acetate, cellulose esters, agarose, acrylamide gel and any
other media suiuble for electrophoresis;
said plate or plates being nested within said chamber within
an electrophoretic circuit between a cathode and anode
for a predetermined period;
and a power operated lift and transfer assembly within said
cabinet outwardly of said front and rear walls adapted to
progressively lift, transfer and lower said plate holder and
plates from said chamber and progressively into each of
said pairs of notches and underlying vaU for a predeter-
mined period successively in a linear stepping motion;
whereby said plates in an upright position are immersed into
the fluids within said vats.
1032 0,G.— 9
246
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,690
APPARATUS FOR MONITORING SO2
CONCENTRATIONS
Ching-Yu Lin, Monroeville, and William M . Hickam, Churchill,
both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Filed Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 181,340
Int. a.' COIN 27/58
U.S. CI. 204—412 1 Claim
4,391,691
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATED POLAROGRAPHIC
OXYGEN GAS SENSOR AND SENSING SYSTEM,
PARTICULARLY FOR AUTOMOTIVE APPLICATION
Ernst Linder, Muhlacher; Helmut Maurer, Horrheim; Klaus
Muller, Tamm, and Franz Rieger, Aalen-Wasseralfingen, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,579
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20.
1980, 3010632
Int. CI.' GOIN 27/56, 27/58
U.S. a. 204—408 15 Claims
. mi
tomwaEJ s- , *
vaiACE —
SOUtCE 7. -J. '/O'lc,
-i)
:oi)PLiiic
UNII
4\
•! -9 -5
-mOlfFE'lENTttL
iMPMflER
1. Apparatus for measuring the SO2 content of a monitored
gas environment, comprising:
a tubular housing means adapted for positioning within a
monitored gas environment having an open end and a
means associated with said open end to enable said moni-
tored gas to enter said tubular housing;
a first solid electrolyte electrochemical cell being positioned
within said housing, said first electrochemical cell devel-
oping an electrical signal indicative of the combination of
the SO2 and the O2 content of said monitored gas environ-
ment, said first solid electrolyte electrochemical cell in-
cluding a sensing electrode exposed to said monitored gas
environment and a reference electrode isolated from said
monitored gas environment, an SO2 reference environ-
ment being maintained in contact with said reference
electrode;
a second solid electrolyte electrochemical cell being posi-
tioned within said tubular housing for developing an elec-
trical signal mdicative of the oxygen content of the moni-
tored gas environment, said second solid electrolyte elec-
trochemical cell including a sensing electrode exposed to
said monitored gas environment and a reference electrode
isolated from said monitored gas environment, an oxygen
reference environment being maintained in contact with
the reference electrode of said second solid electrolyte
electrochemical cell;
monitoring means for measuring electrical signal of said
second solid electrolyte electrochemical cell to provide an
indication of variations in the oxygen content of said
monitored gas environment; and
a reference gas supply means including a source of oxygen
and a source of an inert gas, means for mixing the inert gas
and the oxygen gas and means for adjustably supplying
said gas mixture to the reference electrode of said first
solid electrolyte electrochemical cell to compensate for
changes in the oxygen content of the monitored gas envi-
ronment such that the electrical signal developed by said
first solid electrolyte electrochemical cell is a measure-
ment of the SO2 content of the monitored gas environ-
ment.
1. Temperature and aging compensated polarographic sens-
ing system to determine the oxygen content of gases, especially
exhaust gases from an internal combustion engine comprising
a single solid electrolyte body (1);
a first electrode forming an anode electrode (3), applied to a
first surface portion of said body, and exposed to the
gases;
a second electrode forming a cathode electrode (2) applied
to a second surface portion of the body spaced from said
first surface portion by a first electrolyte body portion
(la);
voltage source means (7) furnishing a voltage, having one
terminal ( — ) connected to one (2) of the electrodes, and
second terminal ( + ) connected to the other one (3) of the
electrodes (2, 3);
means (6) forming a diffusion barrier controlling slccess of
oxygen molecules to the cathode electrode (2);
current sensing nieans (8) measuring the current in an oxy-
gen ion sensing system formed by the voltage source
means (7), the anode electrode (3), the solid electrolyte
body between the first and the second surface portions of
the solid electrolyte body and the cathode electrode (2)
and providing an output indication of limit current flow as
a function of diffusion of oxygen molecules through said
diffusion barrier,
and means for rendering the current independent of aging
effects and temperature, comprising
a third electrode (4) positioned on a third surface portion of
said solid electrolyte body (1) spaced from said one of said
electrodes by a second body p)ortion (lb) and being seri-
ally connected between the other terminal (-f ) of the
voltage source and said other one (3) of the electrodes (2,
3), said further electrode (4) and said second body portion
{lb) of said solid electrolyte body (1) forming an oxygen
ion conductive ohmic resistance which is serially con-
nected between the cathode and anode electrodes (2, 3).
July 5, mi
CHEMICAL
247
' ' 4,391,692
DEVICE FOR THE CHEMICAL OR
ELECTROCHEMICAL SURFACE TREATMENT OR
MATERIAL IN A HEATED LIQUID TREATMENT
MEDIUM, MORE PARTICULARLY A STRIP PICKLING
I PLANT
Walter Mindt, Bendorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Mannesmann Aktiengesellschaft, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 222,987
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 8,
1980, 3000408
Int. a.-'C25D 7/06. 17/02
U.S. a. 204— 206 7 Claims
\, A device for heated liquid treatment of the surface of an
object placed therein, comprising:
a tank having an open top portion, said tank capable of
receiving an object to be treated and a liquid for such
treatment;
a movable lid overlying the opening in said tank;
at least one movable evaporation minimizing cover placed
within said tank and attached to said lid, said at least one
evaporation minimizing cover being so configured as to be
partially immersed in and cover a substantial portion of
the surface of a liquid placed in said tank and to displace
the liquid so as to reduce free space existing between the
surface of the liquid and the underside of said movable lid.
now means for directing gas-lifted catholyte liquor from said
first cell to a de-gassing compartment above said cathodes,
flow means for directing at least a portion of the de-gassed
catholyte to a point below the surface of the catholyte
liquor in the next successive cell while allowing at least a
portion of the de-gassed catholyte to re-enter the cell from
which it came,
flow means for directing gas-lifted catholyte liquor from said
next successive cell and each additional successive cell in
the series thereafter, to a degassing compartment above
the cathodes, at least a portion of the de-gassed catholyte
of each cell being directed to a next successive cell while
allowing at least a portion of the de-gassed catholyte to
re-enter the cell from which it came,
now means for directing de-gassed catholyte liquor from the
last cell of the bank or series, and
flows means for removing cell gasses from the de-gassing
compartment.
4,391,694
APPARATUS IN ELECTRO DEPOSITION PLANTS,
PARTICULARLY FOR USE IN MAKING MASTER
PHONOGRAPH RECORDS
Bengt W. Runsten. Stockholm, Sweden, assignor to AB Europa
Film, Bromma, Sweden
Filed Feb, 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,864
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 16, 1981, 8101046
Int. CI.' C25D 2J/12. 1/10
U.S. a. 204—273 13 Oaims
4,391,693
CHLORINE CELL DESIGN FOR ELECTftOLYTE SERIES
FLOW
John R. Pimlott, Sweeny, Tex., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
1 1 Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,265
1 1 Int. 0.3 C25B 9/00. 15/00
U.S. O. 204—237 12 Oaims
1. Apparatus including: a tub (1) intended for plating electro-
lyte and having an overflow pipe (25) having an open end
within the tub (1) for discharging electrolyte that exceeds a
predetermined level (36), at least one receptacle (12) for anode
material participating in the electro deposition process, and
means (24-30) for circulating and maintaining the level of
the electrolyte in the tub, the receptacle (12) having one
or more openings (18) situated under the liquid level (36)
in the tub, characterized in the receptacle communicates
with an outlet (35) arranged at a level between said open-
ing (18) and the liquid level (36) in the tub (1), said outlet
being in communication with return piping (32,33) for the
electrolyte (2), whereby the liquid level (37) in the recep-
tacle will be below ^hat (36) prevailing in the bath (1), so
that the liquid (2) circulating in the tub (1) partially de-
parts through said opening (18), subsequently to flow
through the anode material (16) and to the outlet (35) in
said receptacle.
1. In a bank or series of chlor-alkali electrolytic cells,
wherein each cell comprises at least one electrode pair sepa-
rated by a cation permselective, substantially hydraulically
impermeable membrane, with means for flowing catholyte
from cell-to-cell sequentially,
the embodiment in which the means for flowing catholyte
from cell-to-cell comprises, in operable combination,
entry means for adding water or dilute caustic to the catho-
lyte portion of a first cell of the bank or series,
4,391,695
COATED METAL ANODE OR THE ELECTROLYTIC
RECOVERY OF METALS
Konrad Koziol, Rothenbach, and Erich Wenk, Nuremberg, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Conradty GmbH Metal-
lelektroden KG, Rothenbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany —
Filed Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,165
Int. O.^ C25B 11/02
U.S. O. 204—286 15 Claims
1. A coated metal anode for the electrolytic recovery of
248
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
metals, the working surface of which is represented by rods
which are arranged in a plane in spaced, parallel relationship to
each other, and which are electrically connected to a current
supply rail, wherein:
said rods lie in a plane with the current supply rail, so as to
create a substantially planar rectangular, surface of the
anode;
said rods being arranged in such a manner that a larger
portion of the area of said rods extends perpendicular to
the arrangement plane assumed by said rods than is con-
gruent with said plane; and
4,391,697
HIGH RATE MAGNETRON SPUTTERING OF HIGH
PERMEABILITY MATERIALS
Charles F. Morrison, Jr., Boulder, Colo., assignor to Vac-Tec
Systems, Inc., Boulder, Colo.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,233
Int. a.3 C23C 15/00
U.S. a. 204—298 19 Qaims
1. Sputtering apparatus comprising
a target of material to be sputtered, said target including at
least first and second elements spaced from one another by
a gap;
an anode;
means for generating an electric field between the anode and
target;
plasma generating means for generating a plasma within said
gap; and
means for generating a trapping magnetic field to confine at
least some of said plasma adjacent the target.
said rods are connected to said current supply rail at one end
face; and
both the electrical and mechanical connection of each rod
with said current supply rail takes place by n^ns of at
least one connecting strip extending parallel to said rod;
and wherein
one marginal region of said connecting strip is connected
with said current supply rail and another marginal region
is connected with said rods.
4,391,696
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HOLDING STYLI
James J. Cowden, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,225
Int. a.3 C25D 7/00, 17/10
U.S. a. 204—297 W 9 Qaims
sa M M
1. An apparatus for holding a plurality of styli in a high-den-
sity configuration during processing comprising:
a holder having a slot with a closed end disposed adjacent a
first surface thereof, said slot having a pair of longitudinal
sides parallel to each other and separated by a distance
greater than the diameter of a stylus but less than twice the
stylus diameter, said holder having a stack of said styli
juxtaposed in two rows oriented along said slot toward
said closed end, and
means attached to said holder at the end of said slot, opposite
the closed end, for exerting a clamping force against the
stylus disposed at the end of said stack of styli, said exert-
ing means adapted to push said styli toward the closed end
of said slot and thereby effectively hold said styli within
said slot.
4,391,698
COALESCER APPARATUS FOR ELECTROSTATICALLY
RESOLVING EMULSIONS
John P. Wagner, Martinsville, N.J., assignor to Exxon Research
and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,872
Int. CI.3 B03C 5/02; ClOG 33/02
U.S. a. 204—302 5 Oaims
/25 , 20
1. A coalescer apparatus for resolving a solids- water-oil
emulsion into its phases comprising,
a reaction vessel;
means to introduce a solids-water-oil emulsion into said
reaction vessel to provide a water-oil interface in said
vessel;
a current carrying electrode below said means for introduc-
ing said emulsion and disposed so that under conditions of
use said current-carrying electrode is adjacent said inter-
face of the phases of said emulsion, said current-carrying
electrode having an inner support member for supporting
an outer flexible plastic tube, said outer flexible plastic
tube surrounding said inner support member and being
concentrically spaced therefrom so as to provide a space
therebetween, and an electrolyte disposed within said
space between said support member and said plastic tube;
a grounding electrode disposed so that under conditions of
use said grounding electrode is in the water phase within
said reaction vessel;
means to remove resolved phases of said emulsion from said
reaction vessel including a solids pump-off tube disposed
so that under conditions of use said solids pump-off tube is
between said current-carrying electrode and said inter-
face.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
249
4,391,699
t!»AL LIQUEFACnON PROCESS
Joel W. Rosenthal, El Cerrito, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 754,198, Dec. 27, 1976, Pat. No.
4,330,389. This appUcation Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,281
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 18,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. C1.3 ClOG 1/00, 1/06
U.S. a. 208—8 LE . . ^ ^""*
1. A process for liquefying coal comprising:
(a) mixing subdivided coal with a solvent to form a coal-sol-
vent slurry;
(b) heating said slurry in a dissolving zone to a temperature
in the range of 750° -900° F. at a pressure above 500 psig
in the presence of added hydrogen to form a first effluent
comprising normally liquid components, non-distillable
oil components, and undissolved solids;
(c) passing at least a portion of said first effluent into a reac-
tion zone, said portion comprising non-distillable oil com-
ponents, and contacting said portion with hydrogen in the
presence of an externally provided hydrogenation catalyst
under hydrogenation conditions, including a temperature
below 800° F. and lower than the temperature in said
dissolving zone;
(d) withdrawing a second effluent from said reaction zone,
i said second effluent comprising normally liquid compo-
I nents and non-distillable oil components; and
(e) recycling at least a portion of said second effluent to step
(a), said recycle portion comprising both normally liquid
components and non-distillable oil components.
4,391,701
PROCESS FOR UPGRADING HEAVY OILS
Jean-Francois Le Page, Rueil Malmalson, and Germain Mar-
tino, Poissy, both of France, assignors to Institut Francais du
Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,675
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 9, 1980, 80 07956
Int. Q.5 ClOL 1/02: F17D 1/17
U.S. Q. 208—370 13 Claims
1. A process for reducing the viscosity of a heavy oil, com-
prising the steps of:
(a) deasphalting at least a portion of the heavy oil, and sepa-
rately recovering a deasphalted heavy oil and asphaltenes;
(b) gasifying at least a portion of said asphaltenes to produce
a synthesis gas;
(c) converting at least a portion of said synthesis gas to a
mixture of alcohols consisting of methanol and at least one
C2-10 alcohol; and
(d) admixing said alcohol mixture with the nondeasphalted
heavy oil portion or with the deasphalted heavy oil or
with a mixture thereof, to produce an oil of lower viscos-
ity.
4,391,702
METHOD FOR CLASSIHCATION OF COALS FOR COKE
PRODUCTION
Shozo Murakami; Hiroaki Yamanaka; Kazuhiro Yokoyama;
Yasuhiro Yone, all of Himeji, and Tokuji Yamaguchi, KiU-
kyushu, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 73,320, Sep. 7, 1979, Pat. No.
4,310,412. This application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,406
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1981, 56-146735
Int. Q.5 B07B 1/26
U.S. Q. 209—10 2 Qaims
4,391,700
PROCESS FOR CONVERTING HEAVY HYDROCARBON
OILS, CONTAINING ASPHALTENES, TO LIGHTER
FRACTIONS
Alain Billon, Orlienas; Jean-Francois Le Page, Rueil Malmai-
son; Jean-Pierre Peries, Mornant, and Jean-Qaude Siman-
doux, Ste. Foy Les Lyon, all of France, assignors to Institut
Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,:?72
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 21, 1980, 80 08959;
Apr. 21, 1980, 80 08960
Int. Q.3 ClOG 47/22. 21/14. 45/08
U.S. Q. 208—86 16 Claims
1. A process for converting an asphaltenic oil to lighter
fractions, which comprises the steps of:
(a) deasphalting the asphaltenic oil with an aliphatic C5.7
hydrocarbon solvent, said deasphalting being effected
under conditions such that the major part of the resins
remains in the deasphalted oil, and recovering the resul-
tant deasphalted oil;
(b) maintaining the deasphalted oil with hydrogen at
440°-530° C. for 1 second to 10 hours, under a pressure of
40 to 140 bars, in a non-catalytic conversion zone;
(c) feeding the product of step (b) with hydrogen into a
catalytic conversion zone at 320°-430° C, under a pres-
sure of 40 to 140 bars, in contact with at least one catalyst
comprising at least one molybdenum compound or tung-
sten compound or a mixture thereof and at least one nickel
compound or cobalt compound or a mixture thereof, and
recovering the resultant hydrocarbon fractions.
1. A method for classifying wet coal for coke production
comprising:
supplying the wet coal into a cylindrical screen arranged in
a casing, rotating and revolving the screen in an almost
vertical position to subject the wet coal to gravity, centrif-
ugal force and vibrating force, blowing a high pressure
gas stream against the outer side of the screen, and verti-
cally moving the blowing position of the gas stream to
clean the screen, while classification is being performed so
as to obtain the under-mesh and over-mesh coal fractions,
and removing adhesions on the inner surface of the casing
by the force of water supplied to the routing screen and
thrown thereby from the outside of the screen after the
supply of wet coal is stopped.
250
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,703
MARINE SEWAGE TREATMENT WITH BIOLOGICAL
FILTER
Gary A. Crosby, New Iberia, La., assignor to Red Fox Indus-
tries, Inc., New Iberia, La.
Continuation of Ser. No. 175,400, Aug. 5, 1980, abandoned. This
application Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 365,889
Int. aj C02F 3/10
U.S. a. 210—151 5 Qaims
1. A marine sewage disposal system for use on boartf a vessel
comprising:
(a) a central aeration chamber having air diffusers supplied
with air from a blower and being positioned to supply air
from the bottom of said chamber upwardly toward the
top, said chamber adapted to receive sludge to a top level
therein;
(b) a pair of biological filters, one positioned to each side of
said aeration chamber and contiguous therewith, to re-
ceive aerated sludge therefrom, said biological filters
having a plurality of buoyant plastic hollow spheres re-
tained in filter tiers on foraminous grating so that as the
liquid flows up through the spherical filter tiers some of
the sludge and entrapped sewage waste solids will sepa-
rate from the liquid by gravity settling and dissolved
oxygen is supplied to bacteria on said biological filters by
liquid convection and oxyen diffusion,
(c) a crossover pipe connecting said filters and being posi-
tioned below the top level of sludge in said aeration cham-
ber; and
(d) a chlorine contact tank connected to receive clarified
liquid from said crossover pipe by a flexible exit pipe to
transfer clarified liquid from the biological filters to the
chlorine tank for treatment with chlorine from a source of
chlorine, prior to discharge.
4,391,704
GAS-EXTRACTION ARRANGEMENT FOR
WASTEWATER SETTLING TANK
Arthur Anderson, Cypress, Calif., assignor to Fischer & Porter
Company, Warminster, Pa.
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,791
Int. a.3 BOID 19/00; C02F 1/20
U.S. CL 210—188
16 Claims
3-b
<P)^
>
1. In combination with a settling tank for a wastewater
treatment, said tank including an inlet line for feeding waste-
water therein, means to remove sludge from the tank and an
outlet zone defined by an effluent trough, at least one side of
which has a weir to permit clarified water to spill into the
trough; and an outlet to remove clarified water from said
trough; an arrangement for preventing noxious gases gener-
ated in the wastewater from being discharged into and fouling
the atmosphere, said arrangement comprising:
A. a hood which is supported over the trough to define a
confined region to capture said gases, said hood having a
side wall which protrudes into the water in said settling
tank at a position spaced from the weir side of the trough,
said side wall protruding into the water to a depth below
the upper edge of the weir to form a scum baffle integral
with the hood; and
B. means to treat the captured gases to render them inactive,
and to prevent the discharge of said noxious gases into the
atmosphere.
4,391,705
BALLASTING DIGESTOR COVERS
Lynn W. Cook, Fruit Heights, and David P. Brown, Salt Lake
City, both of Utah, assignors to Envirotech Corporation, Salt
Lake City, Utah
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,214
Int. a.^ C02F 11/04
U.S. a. 210—218 3 Qaims
1. An apparatus for digesting sludge comprising: a cylindri-
cal tank, a cover adapted to move upwardly and downwardly
within the tank, with the cover having an upright cylindrical
sidewall the lower end thereof adapted to project into the
sludge to form a gas-tight seal therewith and with gas being
stored under the cover above the surface level of the sludge, a
gas outlet at the upper end of the cover, valve means communi-
cating with said outlet for regulating flow of gas from under
the cover, a plurality of separate ballast members mounted to
the interior of said sidewall near the lower end thereof, at least
some of the ballast members each having a cavity formed in the
upper end thereof that extends downwardly into the ballast
member so that the cavity will fill with sludge upon flow of
sludge into the tank and that is adapted to hold a predeter-
mined substantial quantity of sludge therein, whereby when
the volume of gas accumulated under the cover is sufficient to
lift said ballast members partially from the sludge the predeter-
mined total quantity of sludge within the ballast members
effectively increases the total ballasting weight of the ballast
members by a substantial predetermined amount over the
ballasting weight of the members when they are not filled with
sludge.
4,391,706
nLTER ELEMENT SEALING DEVICE FOR HLTER PAN
Richard W. Steinkraus, 5111 Willowbrook La., Lakeland, Fla.
33803
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,074
Int. a.3 BOID 3S/24, 33/34
U.S. a. 210—232 11 aaims
10. A filter pan filter sealing device for sealing the peripheral
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
251
edge of a filter element adjacent the sidewall of a filter pan
comprising:
a peripheral sidewall of the filter pan;
a contour having a plurality of surfaces disposed on said
peripheral sidewall of the filter pan;
a sealing strip having a portion thereof for cooperatively
mating with said contour of said peripheral sidewall;
OEW«'
WASMI^ G
and controllably rotating said screw means to propel and
guide the direction of travel of said basic body across the
water surface;
d. gravity separator means integrally combined with said
collecting chamber for further separating the floating
liquids and the water; and
e. liquid pick-up means in said collecting chamber including
pumping means for pumping up the liquids for pick-up and
ultimate removal of the liquids from the water.
a longitudinally extending member disposed adjacent one
portion of said sealing strip with the peripheral edge of the
filter element disposed adjacent to a second portion of said
sealing strip; and
means for urging said longitudinally extending member
toward said peripheral sidewall enabling said sealing strip
to seal the peripheral edge of the filter element between
said sealing strip and said peripheral sidewall of the filter
pan.
4,391,708
APPARATUS FOR THt SELECTIVE SKIMMING OF A
LIGHT LIQUID LAYER ON A BODY OF WATER
Jean Le Foil. 14. avenue de IKurope. 78160 Mari> Le Roi. and
Henry Benaroya, 41. Boulevard du Commandant Charcot,
^ 92200 Neuilly Sur Seine, both of France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 198,972, Jun. 3, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,633
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 3, 1978, 78 28254
Int. CI.' F02B 15/04
U.S. CI. 210—242.3 9 Claims
ji>".?. r ^ *•■
41
I,
L ' "li?" '•
-X
_. M
— >
■A1
iK
4,391,707
FLOATING. SURFACE LIQUIDS RETRIEVAL SYSTEM
Ellison T. Gordon, Covington, La., assignor to Zolico Interna-
tional, Inc., Covington, La.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 905,383, May 12, 1978, Pat.
No. 4.196.087. This application Mar. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 135,642
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 1, 1997,
has been disclaimed. <
Int. CI.' E02B 15/04
U.S. CI. 210—242.3 10 Claims
1. .Apparatus for removing floating liquid pollutants from a
body of water, comprising; a hull provided with means for
mt>ving it in a predetermined direclion through the body of
water and having two lateral parts, and a vertical central part,
placed between the lateral parts, projecting forwards with
respect to the latter in said predetermined direction and bear-
ing immersed deflector wings part at least of which is located
forward of the lateral parts, said wings being shaped for creat-
ing vortices in the water body, the orientation of said vortices
tending to diminish the divergence of the flow lines in the
vicinity of free water level ahead of said lateral parts due to
movement of the apparatus, said lateral parts and central part
cooperating to define ducts directing a flow of water and
pollutant taken close to the water level to separator means in
said hull. !
1. A buoyant apparatus for collecting liquids floating on the
surface of water, comprising:
a. a basic body having an internal liquid collecting chamber
having flotation means associated therewith for providing
flotation to said body;
b at least three intake port located adjacent to and in com-
munication with said collecting chamber arranged to
allow for the passage of the liquid from the exterior to said
collecting chamber said intake ports being positioned and
spaced at least generally equally about the periphery of
said basic body;
c. at least three floating screw means connected to said basic
body and extending radially out there from a number of
feet for pulling the surface liquids to said intake port
inwardly from a distance many feet away from said basic
body, said floating screw means being likewise positioned
and spaced at least generally equally about the periphery
of said basic body, each said floating screw means having
independently operable drive means for independently
4,391,709
FILTER CAKE CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS
Henry Schmidt, Jr., Hinsdale, III., assignor to Industrial Filter
& Pump Mfg. Co., Cicero, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 113,618, Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned. This
application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,895
Int. CI.' BOID 29/12
U.S. CI. 210—332 10 aaims
10. In a pressure filter, the combination comprising
a filter leaf including a support structure having first and
252
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
second mutually parallel, planar, vertically disposed per-
forate surfaces on opposite sides of a cavity in said leaf,
elastomeric cake control means positioned across the top of
said perforate surfaces and extending laterally therefrom,
a pair of cake compression diaphragm means respectively
disposed in spaced, coplanar relationship with said perfo-
rate surfaces and in spaced relationship with said cake
control means and movable toward said surfaces against
filter cakes deposited on said surfaces during the operation
of said niter, and
said diaphragm means sealably engaging said cake control
means while moving toward said perforate surfaces and
compressing said filter cakes against said perforate sur-
faces.
4,391,710
CYTOCENTRIFUGE
Alan J. Gordon, Liverpool, England, assignor to Shandon South-
em Products Limited, Runcorn, England
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,374
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 15, 1980,
8029732
Int. a.3 BOID ii/22
U.S. O. 210—361 13 Oaims
3. A cytocentrifuge comprising
(a) a rotating carrier; and
(b) a plurality of assemblies mounted on the carrier for
rotation therewith and for removal therefrom as a unit,
each assembly including
(1) a holder comprising a channel member having a web
and a flange, the channel member retaining a slide pro-
viding a receiving surface and a filter card overlying the
slide and providing an absorbent seal thereover,
(2) a sample chamber comprising a tube having an end
flange shaped to be received by the holder in overlying
relationship to the slide and filter card; and
(3) said holder further comprising clamping means
adapted to engage the end flange of the sample chamber
for urging the same towards the web of the channel
member whereby the assembly of sample chamber,
filter card and slide is secured, the clamping means
comprising
(4) a rocking element pivoted to the channel member, the
channel member having two of said flanges and the
roclcing element having lugs extending over the flanges
of the channel member to engage the end flange of the
sample chamber, the rocking member being spring-
loaded for rocking in a direction causing the lugs to
move towards the web of the channel member whereby
a clamping force is produced on the end flange of the
sample chamber.
4,391,711
METHOD OF, AND APPARATUS FOR, EFFECTING
LIQUID-LIQUID CONTACT
Ian D. Jackson; Derek Berry; George A. Rowden, all of Stock-
ton-on-Tees, and Malcolm Dilley, Middlesbrough, all of En-
gland, assignors to Davy McKee (Minerals A Metals) Lim-
ited, Stockton-on-Tees, England
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,591
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 19, 1980,
8009180
Int. a.3 doiD 11 /04
U.S. a. 210—634 13 Oaims
1. A method of effecting liquid-liquid contact between an
aqueous liquid medium and an organic hydrophobic liquid
medium capable of undergoing mass transfer with the aqueous
medium, comprising:
providing a chamber containing a body of each of the aque-
ous and organic liquid media;
agitating the liquid media within a mixing zone in the cham-
ber so as to form a dispersion band which contains a
dispersion of droplets of one of the media dispersed within
the other, the droplets of dispersed medium being of a size
such that upon standing under gravity the dispersion will
substantially completely disengage into two separate liq-
uid layers, the volume ratio of the media in the dispersion
band corresponding substantially to a selected value, and
the mixing zone being disposed within the chamber with a
free space that is devoid of baffles above and/or below the
mixing zone so that there are formed above and below the
dispersion band respectively an upper layer of lighter
medium and a lower layer of heavier medium, at least one
of which layers extends at least partially into the corre-
sponding free space and so that dispersion can freely
re-enter the mixing zone;
supplying at least one of the aqueous and organic liquid
media to the mixing zone at a respective preselected feed
rate;
allowing dispersion freely to re-enter the mixing zone;
allowing disengaged lighter and heavier media to pass from
the dispersion band to the upper and lower layers respec-
tively; and
recovering disengaged lighter and/or heavier medium from
the upper and/or lower layer respectively at a rate in each
case substantially equal to the rate of supply of that me-
dium to the mixing zone, thereby to maintain the volume
ratio of the media in the dispersion band substantially at
the selected value.
7. Apparatus for effecting liquid-liquid contact between an
aqueous liquid medium and an organic hydrophobic liquid
medium capable of undergoing mass transfer with the aqueous
medium, comprising:
a chamber for holding a body of each of the aqueous and
organic liquid media;
agitator means within the chamber for agitating the liquid
media in a mixing zone so as to form a dispersion band
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
253
which contains a dispersion of droplets of one of the
media dispersed within the other, the droplets of dispersed
medium being of a size such that upon standing under
gravity the dispersi in will substantially completely disen-
gage into two separate liquid layers, the mixing zone being
disposed within the chamber with a free space above
and/or below it that is devoid of baffles such that an upper
layer of disengaged lighter medium may form above the
dispersion band whilst a layer of disengaged lower me-
dium may form below the dispersion band with at least
one of these layers extending at least partially into the
corresponding free space and such that dispersion can
freely re-enter the mixing zone;
means for supplying at least one of the aqueous and organic
liquid media to the mixing zone; and
means for recovering from the chamber lighter and/or
heavier medium from the upper and/or lower layer re-
spectively at a rate in each case substantially equal to the
rate of supply of that medium to the mixing zone.
flows from said pure-water outlet to said pure-water stor-
age means, and
(c) dumping said accumulator when said pure-water storage
means has filled to its capacity,
said diverting, said ceasing of said diverting, and said
dumping being effected automatically, in the absence of
any manual operation.
4,391,713
REVERSE OSMOSIS UNIT-DEGASIFIER SYSTEM
Verity C. Smith, Dedham, Mass., assignor to Vaponics Inc.,
Plymouth, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 161,339, Jin. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,883
Int. Q\} BOID il/00, 13/00
U.S. a. 210—652 2 Qaims
4,391,712
REVERSE-OSMOSIS WATER PURIHER APPARATUS
AND METHOD
Truman V. Tyler, and Robert B. Sprague, both of Long Beach,
Calif., assignors to Richard W. Beall, Jr., Manhattan Beach;
Louis J. Favara, Thousand Oaks; Richard L. Gausewitz,
Orange; Richard F. Carr, Orange; Allan Rothenberg, Orange
and Elgin Edwards, Orange, all of, Calif.
1 1 Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,456
1 1 Int. a? BOID 31/00, 13/00
U.S. a. 210—652 7 Qaims
fNTHArtlfO C4US
TREATEO «ATtR« -
2. A method of degasifying water passed through the reverse
osmosis membrane of an RO unit, compnsmg the steps of:
providing a degasifier having an inlet for receiving water to
be degasified and a low pressure chamber for removing
gas from said degasifier;
conveying the output of said RO unit to said degasifier;
providing an educator for producing low pressure in re-
sponse to a flow of liquid under high pressure;
conveying the waste water under high pressure from said
RO unit to said educator to produce low pressure in said
educator in response to the flow of waste water as said
degasifier is receiving said water passed through the RQ
unit; and
connecting said educator to said degasifier low pressure
chamber.
7. A method of maintaining the purity of the water in the
pure-water storage means of a reverse-osmosis water purifica-
tion system of the type which shuts down automatically when
said pure-water storage means has been filled to its capacity by
water emanating from the pure-water outlet of a reverse-osmo-
sis filter unit, and which starts operating automatically when
water is thereafter drawn out of said pure-water storage means,
said method comprising:
(a) diverting to an accumulator a predetermined quantity of
water which emanates from the pure-water outlet of the
reverse-osmosis filter unit following a period of shutdown,
said predetermined quantity being at least about equal to
the pure-Water capacity of said filter unit,
said diverting commencing when water is drawn out of
said pure-water storage means,
(b) ceasing said diverting when said accumulator has re-
ceived said predetermined quantity, so that water then
4,391,714
PROCESS FOR REMOVING MOLYBDENUM FROM
AQUEOUS SALT SOLUTIONS
Eberhard Preisler, Erftstadt; Bernhard Hofmann, Hiirth-Knap-
sack, and Johannes Holzem, Hiith-Gleuel, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 365,989
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 10,
1981, 3114559
Int. a.^ C25G 1/00
U.S. a. 210—670 ^ 10 Claims
1. In the process for removing molybdenum from aqueous
salt solutions by adsorbing it on manganese dioxide, the im-
provement which comprises contacting the salt solution with a
bed of manganese dioxide (Mn02) precipitated electrolytically
and transformed into granular material.
4,391,715
WASTE TREATMENT PROCESS
Colin F. Coates, Northumberland, England, assignor to Sterling
Drug Inc., New York, N.Y,
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,404
Int a.5 C02F 1/72
U.S. a. 210—6% 9 Qaims
1. A process for preventing tar or foam formation in an
aqueous waste conUining diazonium salts, thereby rendering
said waste liquor suitable for disposal or further treatment,
which comprises treating said waste liquor with sulfite ions in
254
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
amount sufTicient to decompose substantially all of the diazo-
nium salts in said waste liquor.
4,391,716
PREFERENTIAL WICKING SYSTEM
H. Michael McCurry, Richmond, Va., assignor to American
Filtrona Corporation, Richmond, Va.
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,300
Int. a.3 BOID 17/02
U.S. a. 210—799 24 Claims
4,391,717
USE OF ISOMERIC FARNESENE
PRODUCr-BY-PROCESS FOR AUGMENTING OR
ENHANCING THE AROMA OF PERFUME
COMPOSITIONS, COLOGNES ANO PERFUMED
ARTICLES
Braja D. Mookherjee, Holmdel; Robert W. Trenkle, Bricktown,
both of N.J.; Bernard J. Chant, Rye, N.Y.; Anton V, Ouwer-
kerk, Livingston, N.J.; Venkatesh Kamath, Red Bank, N.J.,
and Cynthia J. Mussinan, Bricktown, N.J., assignors to Inter-
national Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 292,392, Aug. 13, 1981. This application
May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,534
Int. a.3 D06M Ii/16
U.S. a. 252—8.6 3 Oaims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of the
head space above a dried batch of clothing comprising the step
of adding to the clothing batch prior to drying and during the
washing cycle a drier-added fabric softener article having
previously added thereto an aroma augmenting or enhancing
quantity of a farnesene isomer mixture produced according to
the process of dehydrating a nerolidol isomer mixture contain-
ing nerolidol isomers defined according to the structures:
1. Apparatus for use in an uprght position in separating a
first liquid having a first specific gravity from a second liquid
having a second specific gravity less than said first specific
gravity, said apparatus comprising:
a liquid trap chamber having a liquid-containing portion
including a bottom chamber wall, an upwardly-directed
inlet opening disposed above said liquid-containing por-
tion, an upwardly-directed outlet opening disposed above
said liquid-containing portion, and a top wall with a low-
ermost section separating said inlet and outlet openings;
an inlet passage having a liquid ingress opening disposed at
a level above said bottom wall and below said lowermost
section of said top wall, said inlet passage further includ-
ing weir means disposed at a level above said top and
positioned to spill liquid above a predetermined level in
said inlet passage into the inlet opening of said chamber;
an outlet passage extending generally upward from said
outlet opening of said chamber;"
primer wick means, having top and bottom ends disposed to
transversely fill a portion of said inlet passage, for drawing
liquid upward through said inlet passage from said ingress
opening, wherein the bottom end of said primer wick
means is disposed at a level spaced above said ingress
opening; and
exhaust means disposed at a further level in said outlet pas-
sage for drawing liquid at or above said further level
upward through said outlet passage, wherein said further
level at least as high as the top end of said primer wick.
23. A method for separating a first liquid of known specific
gravity from a second liquid of lesser specific gravity in a tank
wherein the second liquid is supported by surface tension in a
column above said first liquid, said method comprising the
steps of:
drawing liquid from the bottom of said tank upward through
an inlet passage with a primer wick;
flowing liquid from said inlet passage over a weir and into a
liquid trap chamber;
drawing liquid above a predetermined height in said liquid
trap chamber out of said tank; and
establishing a liquid dam of said first liquid in said liquid trap
chamber to block flow communication between said inlet
passage and said predetermined height when the level of
said first liquid in said tank falls to a predetermined level.
OH and
OH
in the presence of a catalyst selected from the group consisting
of potassium acid sulfate and paratoluene sulfonic acid at a
temperature in the range of from 1 10° C. up to 200° C. and at
a pressure in the range of from 1 mm/Hg pressure up to 200
atmospheres pressure, absolute.
4,391,718
SULPHONATED MONO-HYDRIC DIARYL PHENOL
FORMALDEHYDE CONDENSATES, THEIR
PREPARATION, THEIR USE AS DISPERSING AGENTS
AND FORMULATIONS CONTAINING THEM
Gunther Reitz, Cologne; Karlhans Jakobs, Bergisch Gladbach,
and Giinther Boehmke, Leverkusen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,867
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 4,
1980, 3033329
Int. a.3 BOIF n/iO; C08G 8/ IS
U.S. a. 252—8.7 1 Qaim
1. A dispersing agent comprising
(a) an addition product of an aliphatic, araliphatic or alkylar-
omatic alcohol, carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid amide
with 12 to 22 C atoms and 3-8 mols of ethylene oxide,
(b) an addition product of an aliphatic, araliphatic or alkylar-
omatic alcohol, carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid amide
with 12 to 22 C atoms and 9 or more mols of ethylene
oxide, and
(c) a reaction product prepared by sulphonation or sul-
phomethylation and formaldehyde condensation of a
compound of the formula
OH
O^
Ri
Ri
wherein
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
255
Rl represents Ci^-alkyl,
and, optionally, subsequent conversion of the resulting sul-
phonic acid into its salt.
\
Rj
4,391,719
ETHOXYLATED SULFOSUCONATE ADDITIVES FOR
STABILIZING SOLUTIONS OF PETROLEUM
SULFONATES IN HARD BRINE
John J. Meister, Gainesville, Fla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 964,400, Nov. 28, 1978, Pat. No. 4,274,279.
This application Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,185
Int. a.3 E21B 4i/22
U.S. a. 252—8.55 D 6 Qaims
1. An aqueous saline surfactant system suitable for use in
tertiary oil recovery operations consisting essentially of brine,
a petroleum sulfonate present in an amount in a range of about
0.01 to about 15 weight percent, an ethoxylated sulfosuccinate
present in an amount in a range of about 0.01 to about 15
weight percent and a cosurfactant chosen from among the
group consisting of C3 to Ca aliphatic alcohols and present in
an amount in a range of about 1 to about 7 weight percent with
each weight percent based on the weight of water in the sur-
factant system and wherein the ethoxylated sulfosuccinate
derivative is a diester of alpha-sulfosuccinic acid and an ethox-
ylated alcohol, the diester having the formula
HOC4H8— Si— O— Si— C4HgOH
R2 R4
wherein Ri and R3 are methyl or ethyl and R2and R4are linear
alky I groups of up to 20 carbon atoms.
O
O
4,391,721
DISPERSANT VISCOSITY INDEX IMPROVER
COMPRISING REACTION PRODUCT OF A
STYRENE-MALEIC ANHYDRIDE COPOLYMER, AN
ALIPHATIC ALCOHOL AND A TERTIARY AMINO
ALCOHOL
Peter G. Pappas, Downers Grove, III., assignor to Standard Oil
Company (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,600
Int. a.3 ClOM i/n
U.S. a. 252—51.5 A 12 Claims
1. A dispersant viscosity index improving additive composi-
tion, resistant to oxidative thickening and loss of dispersancy,
which composition comprises the reaction product of a sty-
rene-maleic anhydride copolymer, an aliphatic alcohol having
at least 6 carbon atoms and a tertiary amino alkanol, said com-
position having been prepared by substantially esterifying said
copolymer with said aliphatic alcohol to produce a substantial-
ly-esterified copolymer and subsequently transesterifying said
substantially-esterified copolymer with said tertiary amino
alkanol.
Rl(OCH2CH2)mOCCHCH2CO(CH2CH20)„R2
S03©M®
wherein Ri and R2 represent alkyl radicals, which can be
different, containing 3-18 carbon atoms and M is selected from
the group consisting of sodium, lithium, potassium, ammonium
and substituted ammonium; and the ethoxylated alcohol has
the formula
R<OCH2CH2)xOH
wherein R corresponds to Ri or R2, x encompasses all the
values of m and n, and m-|-n is in the general range of from 4
to 100, m or n being at least 1.
4,391,720
BIS(HYDROXYLKYL)DISILOXANES AND LUBRICANT
COMPOSITIONS THEREOF
Chih C. Wang, Hightstown, and Ronald F. Bates, Trenton, both
of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 231,859, Feb. 5, 1981, Pat. No. 4,355,062.
This application Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,502
Int. a.3 ClOM 1/50
U.S. a. 252—49.6 6 Qaims
1. A composition comprising a solution of a methyl alkyl
siloxane lubricant of the formula -.
(CHj)3
CH3 CH3
— SiO— l-SiO SiO-4-Si(CH3)3
Rs R6
4,391,722
WATER-BASED LOW FOAM HYDRAULIC FLUID
EMPLOYING 2-ETHYLHEXANOL DEFOAMER
Ellen S. Schwartz, Warren; Cline A. Tincher, Grosse He, both of
Mich., and Jerrold F. Maxwell, Matteson, III., assignors to
BASF Wyandotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,809
Int. a.3 C09K i/00: ClOM i/04
U.S. a. 252—73 12 Claims
1. A hydraulic fluid concentrate characterized by improved
low-foaming properties comprising water, about 0.15 to 2
percent by weight of 2-ethylhexanol, and conventional hy-
draulic fluid additives wherein said concentrate includes a
thickener and at least one additive selected from the group
consisting of
phosphate esters or salts thereof selected from the group
consisting of
O O
II II
RO— (EO)„— P— OX and R— O— (EO)„— P— (EO)„— OR
OX OX
and mixtures thereof wherein ethylene oxide groups are repre-
sented by EG; R is selected from the group consisting of linear
or branched chain alkyl groups wherein said alkyl groups have
about 6 to 30 carbon atoms or alkylaryl groups wherein the
alkyl groups have about 6 to 30 carbon atoms and X is selected
from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkali or alkaline earth
metal, the residue of ammonia or an amine and mixtures
thereof, and n is a number from 1 to 50;
an alkyldialkanolamide of the formula
wherein R5 and R6 are alkyl groups of 4 to 20 carbon atoms, x
is an integer of 2-4, y is an integer of 0-2 and wherein the sum
of X and y is 4 or less, containing from about 5 percent to about
70 percent by weight of the lubricant of a compound of the
formula
O R2OH
II /
Rl— C— N
\
R2OH
wherein Ri is alkyl of about 4 to about 54 carbon atoms and R2
256
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
is alkyl of about 2 to about 6 carbon atoms, or an alkyldialk-
anolamide prepared by esterifying a dialkanolamine with an
alkyl carboxylic acid and removing water of esterification
wherein said alkyldialkanolamide is derived from a branched
or straight chain, saturated or unsaturated aliphatic dicarbox-
ylic acid having 8 to 54 carbon atoms,
a metal deactivator;
a corrosion inhibitor;
an additional defoamer; ^
water-soluble ethers or esters of ethoxylated C8-C36 ali-
phatic monohydric or polyhydric alcohols or acids,
sulfur compound additives selected from the group consist-
ing of the ammonia, amine or metal salts of 2-mercap-
tobenzothiazole or 5-, 6- and 7-substituted 2-mercaptoben-
zothiazole, and sulfurized molybdenum and antimony
compounds represented by the formula:
II. an effective amount of a bleach release-delaying agent;
said bleach and agent being conti.<ned within a closed water-
insoluble but water-permeable pouch of fibrous material; said
agent consisting of a surfactant selected from the group con-
sisting of peroxyacid compatible synthetic detergents and short
chain fatty acid soaps having carbon chain lengths of from
about 8 to 14, whereby said agent delays the release of said
peroxyacid bleach from said pouch into laundry wash liquor.
\
/
o s
\//
P— s
/
o
M2S202
J2
wherein M is molybdenum or antimony and R is organic and is
selected from the group consisting of C3-C20 alkyl, aryl, alkyl-
aryl radicals and mixtures thereof, and wherein said thickener
is a polyether polyol having a molecular weight of about 1000
to about 40,000 prepared by reacting ethylene oxide or ethyl-
ene oxide and at least one lower alkylene oxide haying 3 to 4
carbon atoms with at least one active hydrogen-containing
compound and at least one alpha-olefm oxide or glycidyl ether
having a carbon chain length of about 1 2 to 1 8 aliphatic carbon
atoms wherein said alpha-olefm oxide or glycidyl ether is
present in the amount of 1 to about 20 percent by weight based
upon the total weight of said thickener.
4,391,724
CONTROLLED RELEASE LAUNDRY BLEACH
PRODUCT
Dennis R. Bacon, Milford, Ohio, assignor to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,422
Int. a.3 CUD 17/04: COIB 15/00
U.S. a. 252—90 10 Oaims
am PQA/ASMDIPIC ACID
m PDA /AS
HI PDA/AOIPIC ACID
¥POA
En PDA/ADIPIC flCID/30AS
inr PQA/ADtPIC AClD/0.5 AS
Z UNPOUCHED PDA/AOIPIC ACID
^nn PDA/ADIPIC ACID/0 AS
4,391,723
CONTROLLED RELEASE LAUNDRY BLEACH
PRODUCT
Dennis R. Bacon, Milford, and Frank P. Bossu, West Chester,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Procter & Gamble Company,
Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,562
Int. a.' CUD n/04; COIB 15/00
U.S. a. 252—90 8 Claims
o «
Tlnwdrtn.)
1. A dry, granular laundry bleach product in a pouch com-
prising:
I. a hydrophobic peroxyacid bleach; and
II. an effective amount of a bleach release agent; said bleach
and agent being contained within a closed water-insoluble
but water-permeable pouch of fibrous material; said agent
consisting of a surfactant selected from the group consist-
ing of peroxyacid compatible synthetic detergents and
short chain fatty acid soaps having carbon chain lengths of
from about 8 to 14, whereby said agent increases the
release of said peroxyacid bleach from said pouch into
laundry wash liquor.
3. The invention of claim 1 wherein said peroxyacid is se-
lected from the group consisting of: peroxydecanoic acid,
peroxydodecanoic acid, and peroxytetradecanoic acid.
O 5
ir 3n(« . KyJiuf ljur>l s.lfjt.
4,391,725
CONTROLLED RELEASE LAUNDRY BLEACH
PRODUCT
Frank P. Bossu, West Chester, Ohio, assignor to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,423
Int. a.3 CUD n/04: COIB 15/00
U.S. a. 252—90 11 Oaims
1. A dry, granular laundry bleach-in-a-pouch product com-
1. A dry, granular laundry bleach product in a pouch com- prising:
prising: La hydrophobic f)eroxyacid bleach,
I a peroxyacid bleach selected from the group consisting of II. a surfactant at level of about 5% to about 60% by weight
hydrotropic acid hydrophilic peroxyacid, bleaches, of the peroxyacid bleach, said surfactant selected from the
'nm«(mJn.)
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
257
group consisting of peroxyacid compatible synthetic de-
tergents and fatty acid soaps, and
III. a water-soluble, peroxyacid compatible acid additive,
said acid having a pKa of from about 2 to about 7,
PDA/AS/ftDIPiC ACID
121 PDfi/AD'PIC aCID/30AS-
ZD7 POA/ADlPiC ACIO/O.SAS
Z UNPOUCHED PDA/AOIPIC ACID
Xm PDA/ADIPIC ACID/0 AS
4,391,727
NON-CAKING BLEACH CONTAINING MOLECULAR
SIEVE ZEOLITE
Qaude L. Bcnz, Belle-Mead, N.J., assignor to Colgate Palmol-
ive Company, New York, N.Y,
Continuation of Ser. No. 185,730, Sep. 11, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 814,033, Jul. 8, 1977,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 640,791, Dec. 15,
1975, abandoned. This application Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,506
Int. Q\} COIB 15/12: C09K i/00: CUD 7/20 7/54
U.S. CI. 252—99 3 Oaims
1. A non-caking bleaching composition comprising: by
weight from 28.5 to 34.9% sodium perborate tetrahydrate;
from 8. 1 to 9.9% sodium carbonate; from 8. 1 to 9.9% sodium
silicate having an Na20:Si02 ratio of about 1:2.35; from 0.9 to
1.1% calcined aluminum silicate clay; from 33.9 to 41.3%
sodium sulfate; from 8.1% to 9.9% of a crystalline, water-
insoluble aluminosilicate molecular sieve 4A zeolite having a
particle size of from 5 to 9 microns, and being in about a 2%
hydrated form; the composition having a moisture content of
about 1.8 to 2.2%.
said pouch consisting of a water-insoluble but water-permeable
fibrous material; whereby said surfactant increases the level of
said bleach released from the pouch into laundry wash liquor;
and whereby said acid additive further increases and acceler-
ates the release of said bleach from the pouch into laundry
wash liquor in the presence of said surfactant.
4,391,726
DETERGENT COMPOSITION CONTAINING LOW
LEVELS OF AMINE OXIDES
Robertus J. C. Koster, Grimbergen, Belgium, assignor to The
Procter &. Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,126
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 28, 1980,
8038306
Int. 0.3 CUD 7/18
U.S. O. 252—99 8 Oairtis
1. A particulate laundry detergent composition having en-
hanced soil release and cleaning properties comprising:
(a) from about 2% to about 25% by weight of a surface-ac-
tive agent selected from the group consisting of anionic,
nonionic, zwitterionic, and ampholytic detergents and
mixtures thereof; and
(b) from 0.25-0.75% of an amine oxide having the formula
4,391,728
PROPYLENE OXIDE ADDUCTS OF TOLUENEDIAMINE
Alexander Korczak, Grosse He, and William W, Levis, Jr.,
Wyandotte, both of Mich., assignors to BASF Wyandotte
Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,298
Int. CI.' C08L 71/02
U.S. O. 252—182 11 Oaims
1. A polyol co^nposition comprising the reaction product
prepared by reacting propylene oxide with toluenediamine in
mole ratios of 4:1 to 9:1 at temperatures greater than 140° C. in
the presence of at least 0.6 part of alkali metal hydroxide per
100 parts of toluenediamine with the proviso that at least 0.8
part of alkali metal hydroxide is used if the toluenediamine is
2,4-toluenediamine or 2,6-toluenediamine, or mixtures thereof.
(RiK
R— N-
^^
O
(Ri)z
■(CH2)„-N-
(0)p
■(Ri)>
4,391,729
METAL OXIDE COMPOSITE CATHODE MATERIAL
FOR HIGH ENERGY DENSITY BATTERIES
Charles C. Liang, Clarence; M. Elizabeth Bolster, East Amherst,
and Robert M. Murphy, Lancaster, all of N.Y., assignors to
Wilson Greatbatch Ltd., Oarence, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 104,384, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. JSo. 4,310,609.
This application Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,891
Int. O.' HOIM 4/04. 6/14
U.S. O. 252—182.1 14 Oaims
1. A method of making a composite cathode comprising at
least one metal oxide, metal or mixtures of metals and metal
oxides in the matrix of a host metal oxide which comprises:
thermally treating by heating above decomposition tempera-
. ture a mixture of a host metal oxide and a thermally de-
composable metal compound of a metal selected from the
group consisting of Groups IB, IIB, IIIB, IVB, VB, VIB,
VIIB and VIII, and
forming the resultant mass into said cathode.
wherein R is an alkyl or alkenylgroup having 10 to 22
carbon atoms, the Ri's which are identical or different are
selected from Cm alkyl, ethylene oxide and propylene
oxide, n is an integer from 1 to about 6, m is an integer
from 0 to about 6, p is 0 or 1, x, y, and z are each 1 for
alkyisubstitueuts, and integers in the range from 1 to 10 for
ethylene oxide or propylene oxide substituents such that
the sum of (x-f-y-l-z) is not greater than 25,
(c) from about 3% to about 50% by weight of a peroxy-
bleach compound; and
(d) from about 1% to about 50% by weight of a detergent
builder;
whereby a 1% aqueous solution of the composition, measured
at 20* C, has a pH in the range from about 8.5 to about 1 1.
4,391,730
NEMATIC LIQUID CRYSTAL COMPOUNDS AND USE
AND DEVICE FOR USING THE SAME
Frank Kuschel; Dietrich Demus, both of Halle; Doris Pfeiffer,
Steinbach, and Hans-Joachim Deutscher, Halle, all of Ger-
man Democratic Rep., assignors to VEB Werk fuer Fem-
sehelektronik Berlin im VEB Kombinat Mikroelektronik,
Berlin, German Democratic Rep.
Continuation of Ser. No. 65,397, Aug. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,567 .
Int. a.5 C09K 3/34: G02F 1/13
U.S. O. 252—299.1 " Oaims
1. A nematic liquid crystal composition for use in electro-op-
tical devices for modulating transmitted or reflected light and
258
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
for the rendition of numerals, symbols and images, comprising
a mixture of at least one compound of formula (A)
N ='
w^herein R' is C„H2« + lO— and R^ is C„H2n+ 1— . where n= 1
tp 12, and at least one compound of formula (B)
nH2m+l—( H VcOO-/Q\-
vhere m=l to 10.
4,391,731
HYDROGENATED NAPHTHALENES
Arthur Boiler, Binningen; Martin Schadt, Seltisberg, and Alois
Viiliger, Basel, all of Switzerland, assignors to Hoffimann-La
Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,676
Gaims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 14, 1980,
6130/80; May 27, 1981, 3482/81
Int. C\J C09K 3/34; C07C 69/753, 121/46
U.S. a. 252—299.62 15 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
R2
I
R'
wherein ring A is saturated or aromatic and a saturated ring A
which may be present is trans-linked with the second ring; R'
is straight-chain alkyl or alkoxy group containing 1 to 1 1 car-
bon atoms; R^ is cyano, an ester group of the formula
O
R
-C— X
^.
n
— C— X— ^ B )— R^
or, when ring A is saturated, additionally a straight-chain
alkoxy group containing 1 to 11 carbon atoms; in the ester
group of formula II ring B is either aromatic, X is oxygen or
sulfur and ¥? is cyano or straight-chain alkyl or alkoxy con-
taining 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or ring B is trans- 1 ,4-di-sub-
stituted cyclohexane, X is oxygen and R^ is cyano or straight-
chain alkyl containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms; and the total
number of carbon atoms in the alkyl and/or alkoxy groups
comprises at most 12.
4,391,732
PHYTOSTEROL BLENDS
Larry D. Landmark, Richfield, Minn., assignor to Henkel Cor-
poration, Minneapolis, Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 584,319, Jun. 6, 1975, Pat. No. 4,218,334.
This application Apr. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 32,988
Int. a.3 BOIF 7 7/i< ;7/i5
U.S. a. 252—356 5 Qaims
1. A blend consisting essentially of from about 10 to 50
percent phytosterol and from about 50 to 90 percent of a mem-
ber selected from the group consisting of free saturated fatty
alcohols having an even number of carbon atoms from 1 2 to 18
in number, said blend being substantially free of triglyceride.
4,391,733
MINERAL TREATMENT AND COMPOSITION
Richard S. Lamar, Littletown, Colo.; Laurence E. Ferreira,
Pacific Palisades, and Robert C. Qoud, Thousand Oaks, both
of Calif., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chi-
cago. III.
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,274
Int. C\? C04B 33/02. 33/04
U.S. a. 252—378 R 19 Claims
wherein ring B is either aromatic, X is oxygen or sulfur and R^
is cyano or straight-chain alkyl or alkoxy containing 1 to 10
carbon atoms, or ring B is trans- 1 ,4-di-substituted cyclohexane,
X is oxygen and R^ is cyano or straight-chain alkyl containing
1 to 10 carbon atoms; and the total number of carbon atoms in
the alkyl and/or alkoxy groups comprises at most 12.
15. A liquid crystal mixture containing at least two compo-
nents, wherein at least one component is a compound of the
formula
R2
wherein ring A is saturated or aromatic and a saturated ring A
which may be present is trans-linked with the second ring; R'
is straight-chain alkyl or alkoxy group containing 1 to 1 1 car-
bon atoms; R^ is cyano, straight-chain alkyl containing 1 to 1 1
carbon atoms, an ester group of the formula
1. A method for treating a phyllosilicate mineral comprising:
(a) forming a slurry comprising up to about 40 weight per-
cent of phyllosilicate mineral particles in an organic liquid
having a dielectric constant less than 35 and in the absence
of a liquid having a dielectric constant of at least 35;
(b) grinding the slurry at a sufficiently low temperature to
avoid substantial loss of the liquid through vaporization
and with sufficient force to form a particulate composite
of the phyllosilicate mineral particles and an organic mate-
rial present in or formed from the organic liquid during
grinding and to fracture the particulate composite and
thereby to produce first particulate composite materials
having a greater specific surface area than the phyllosili-
cate mineral particles from which they were formed; and
(9) separating the first particulate composite materials from
the organic liquid; and
(d) treating the separated first particulate composite materi-
als with a polar fluid having a dielectric constant of at
least 60 to form second particulate composite materials
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
259
having a greater specific surface area than the first partic-
ulate composite materials.
0.1% to about 10% by weight, of a solubilizing agent in the
inert organic liquid, said solubilizing agent selected from the
group consisting of aliphatic and aromatic acids.
4,391,734
MINERAL TREATMENT AND COMPOSITION
Laurence E. 'erreira. Pacific Palisades, Calif.; Richard S. La-
mar, Littletown, Colo., and Ralph J. Bertolacini, Naperville,
111., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago,
111.
1 , FUed Feb. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,275
1 1 Int. a? C04B 33/02, 33/04
U.S. a. 252—378 R 15 Qaims
^»>
30
fcirfMD
4,391,736
ALPHA-OLEnN POLYMERIZATION
Charles E. Capshew. Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,695
Int. a.J C08F 4/02. 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 10 Qaims
1. A method for producing a catalyst comprising
(1) reacting a first component comprising the product of a
reaction between a magnesium dihalid^ and a tetraalkyi
titanate with a second component comprising the product
of a reaction between a substantially anhydrous particu-
late hydroxyl-containing refractory carrier and an or-
ganometal compound of a metal of Group I to V and then
(2) reacting the resulting solid with titanium tetrahalide.
'^ 13 20 ^^ 10
40
1. A method for treating a phyllosilicate mineral comprising:
(a) forming a slurry comprising up to about 40 weight per-
cent of phyllosilicate mineral particles in an organic liquid
having a dielectric constant less than 35 and in the absence
of a liquid having a dielectric constant of at least 35;
(b) grinding the slurry at a sufficiently low temperature to
avoid substantial loss of the liquid through vaporization
and with sufficient force to form a particulate composite
of the phyllosilicate mineral particles and an organic mate-
rial present in or formed from the organic liquid during
grinding and to fracture the particulate composite and
thereby to produce particulate composite materials having
a greater specific surface area than the phyllosilicate min-
eral particles from which they were formed; and
(c) separating the particulate composite materials from the
organic liquid.
4,391,735
CLEANING AND REGENERATING ETHYLENE OXIDE
CATALYSTS
Paul J, Busse, Omaha, Nebr., assignor to InterNorth, Inc.,
Omaha, Nebr.
1 1 Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,207
1 1 Int. C\? BOIJ 23/96. 23/50; C07D 301/10
U.S. a. 252—413 15 Qaims
I. A method for removing alkali metal-containing impurities
from supported silver catalysts which have been used for the
direct oxidation of ethylene to ethylene oxide which comprises
washing the catalyst with a composition which is comprised of
in inert organic liquid and about 0.1% to about 10%, by
weight, of solubilizing agent which is selected from the group
consisting of aliphatic and aromatic acids.
6. A method of regenerating a supported silver catalyst
which has been used for the direct oxidation of ethylene to
ethylene oxide which comprises washing the catalyst to re-
move alkali metal-containing impurities with a composition
comprised of an inert organic liquid and about 0.1% to about
10%, by weight, of a solubilizing agent which is selected from
the group consisting of aliphatic and aromatic acids, and then
applying to the catalyst from 1 to 1000 parts per 1 million parts
of catalyst of cesium, rubidium, or a mixture thereof.
II. In a method for regenerating a supported silver catalyst
which has been used for the direct oxidation of ethylene to
ethylene oxide which comprises washing the catalyst with an
inert organic liquid and then applying to the caulyst from 1 to
1000 parts per 1 million parts of catalyst of cesium, rubidium,
or a mixture thereof, the improvement which comprises re-
moving alkali metal-containing impurities by including about
4,391,737
CATALYSTS FOR RING-OPENING
COPOLYMERIZATION OF CTCLOOLEHNS
Anthony J. Bell, Stow, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear Tire &
Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,635
Int. CI.' C08F 4/62
U.S. a. 252—429 B 4 Qaims
1. A catalyst for a ring-opening copolymerization, consisting
of:
a compound of (a) the reaction product of tungsten hexa-
chloride and a 1.2- or 1,3-dioxy compound selected from
the group consisting of 2,4-pentadione, 2-formylphenol,
l,3-diphenyl-l,3-propanedione, said reaction product
forming a bidentate ligand; and a compound (b) having the
formula R-AICI2 wherein R is an alkyl group having from
2 to 5 carbon atoms, the molar ratio of (b) to (a) ranging
from about 2 to about 6, the amount of said tungsten
chloride to said dioxy compound ranging from 0.9 moles
to about 1.5 moles,
said bidentate ligand causing a more favorable comonomer
reactivity ratio in the ring-opening copolymerization of
Hex COD monomer and a cycioolefin monomer other
than cyclohexene, said cycioolefin having from 4 to 12
carbon atoms and at least one non-conjugated double
bond.
4,391,738
CATALYST FOR OLEHNIC POLYMERIZATION
Arthur W. Langer, Jr., Watchung, N.J., assignor to Exxon
Research and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 790,837, Apr. 25, 1977, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 767,749, Feb. 11,
1977, abandoned. This application Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No.
343,570
Int. Q.3 C08F 4/02 10/00
U.S. Q. 252—429 B 1 Claim
1. An improved catalyst composition adaptable for use in an
alpha-olefin polymerization which consists of:
(a) TiCU supported on MgCb. sai^ TiCU supported on
MgCh prepared by ball milling said TiCU. MgCh and
ethyl benzoate;
(b) diethylaluminum chloride; and
(c) a mono-organomagnesium compound having the for-
mula:
R'MgX
wherein R' is a sec-butyl group and X is selected from the
group consisting of CI. OOC<J), OC15H31. OC2H5, SC12H25
and Os-Bu.
260
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,739
ZEOLITE CATALYSTS MODIHED WITH GROUP lA
METALS
Chin-Chiun Chu, North Brunswick, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 146,951, May 5, 1980, Pat. No.
4,329,533. Tbis application Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 339,960
Qaims priority, application European Pat. Off., Feb. 19, 1981,
81300672.3
Int. a.3 BOIJ 29/28, 27/18
U.S. a. 252—455 Z 11 Qaims
2. A catalyst composition comprising:
a crystalline zeolite material selected from ZSM-5, ZSM-1 1,
ZSM-12, ZSM-23, ZSM-35, ZSM-38 and ZSM-48;
said catalyst composition further comprising at least 0.2S
weight percent of one or more Group lA metals selected
from lithium, potassium, sodium and cesium incorporated
into said composition in the form of a Group lA metal
oxide and at least 0.25 weight percent of phosphorus
incorporated into said composition in the form of an oxide
of phosphorus.
4,391,740
LARGE PORE SHAPED HYDROPROCESSING
CATALYSTS
Kirk R. Gibson, EI Cerrito, Calif., assignor to Chevron Research
Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,588
Int. C\? BOIJ 35/02
U.S. a. 252—470 8 Qaims
1. A catalyst for hydroprocessing heavy hydrocarbonaceous
feedstocks comprising:
elongated extrudates of catalyst, said catalyst having be-
tween 2 and 15 weigh percent of a catalystic metal from
Group VIB and between 0 and 10 weight percent of a
catalystic metal from Group VIII, where said weight
percent is based on the catalytic metal content of the total
catalyst weight, calculated as reduced metal, supported on
refractory inorganic oxide;
said extrudates having oval cross section and a section ex-
tending from the flat surface of the oval;
said extrudate cross section capable of being circumscribed
by a rectangle having a first dimension in the range of
between about 0.0600 inch to about 0.085 inch, a second
dimension, perpendicular to said first dimension in the
range of between 0.030 inch to about 0.065 inch;
said elongated extrudate having a surface area to volume
ratio of less than 95 reciprocal inches.
4,391,742
PASTE COMPOSITION FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE AND SOLDERABLE
STRUCTURES
Wolf-Erhard Steigerwald, Rua de Fez, 731, 4.000 Porto, Portu-
gal; Peter Ambros, Am Wacholderrain 12, 8741 Hihenroth
Ortsteil Leutershausen, and Erich Gatzke, Wilhelm-Busch-
Str. 56, 3260 Rintein, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 928,378, Jun. 23, 1978, Pat. No.
4,248,921. This application Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,365
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 24,
1977, 2728465
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 3, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 HOIB 1/06, 1/02
U.S. Q. 252—512 7 Qaims
1. A paste composition for producing electrically conduc-
tive and solderable structures comprising:
about 12 to 40 percent by weight of an organic curable
polymer binder, wherein the organic polymer binder is a
caprolactam-blocked adduct of isophoronodiisocyanate
and an oxyester of the hydroxyl group;
about 40 to 70 percent by weight of electrically-conducting
particles, formed as platelets or microscopic crystals and
mixtures thereof, wherein the electrically-conducting
particles are metal particles, selected from the group
consisting of silver, gold, nickel, particles from the plati-
num group metals, silver or gold coated copper particles
and mixtures thereof, to render said binder electrically
conducting;
about 5 to 20 percent by weight of metal salt particles, the
metal particles being capable of being dissolved by exter-
nal dissolving agents to render the surface of said compo-
sition porous, wherein the metal salt particles are selected
from the group consisting of copper (II) sulfate, copper (I)
chloride, copper (II) formiate, copper (II) acetate, sodium
chloride, sodium sulfide, lithium chloride, sodium carbon-
ate, silver chloride, silver sulfate, silver nitrate and mix-
tures thereof; and
up to 3 percent by weight of a non-ionic or anionic active
wetting agent, which is capable of floating the metal salt
particles and concentrating said particles at or near the
surface of said paste.
4,391,741
I POLYOXYMETHYLENE COMPOSITION
Junzo Masamoto; Minoni Hamada, both of Kurashiki; Isamu
Suzuki, Kawasaki, and Takeo Yoshida, Kurashiki, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 884,223, Mar. 7, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jun. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 51,417
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1977, 52-25415
Int. Q.3 HOIB 1/06
U.S. Q. 252—511 7 Qaims
1. A composition comprising:
(a) 100 parts by weight of polyoxymethylene,
(b) 4 to 10 parts by weight of electrically conductive carbon
black selected from the group consisting of oil furnace
blacks, furnace blacks and acetylene blacks, and
(c) 10 to 18 parts by weight of low-density polyethylene,
wherein said composition has a surface electrical resis-
tance of 10'^ ohms or less.
4,391,743
COMPOSITION FOR DEPOSITING METALLIC OXIDE
nLM COATINGS
Umio Maeda, Fukuoka; Hirofumi Shoji, Toyama; Yasusuke
Wada, Johanamachi, and Yoshio Horie, Nakago, all of Japan,
assignors to Nippon Soda Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,648
Int. Q.3 HOIB 1/06
U.S. Q. 252—518 1 Qaim
1. A composition to be dissolved in an organic solvent and
applied onto a substrate to deposit a metallic oxide film coating
on the substrate, said composition consisting essentially of 100
parts of an indium compound represented by the formula
In(X)/(Y);„
wherein, for said indium compound X denotes a chelate ring
material selected from the group consisting of acetylacetone,
methyl or ethyl ester of acetoacetic acid, lactic acid, triethanol-
amine, and mixtures thereof; Y denotes an alkoxide material
selected from the group consisting of butyl alcohol, octyl
alcohol, octylene glycol, mono-methylether of ethylene gly-
col, and mixtures thereof; 1 and m are an integer which is 1 or
2 having the relationship of 1-1- m = 3; said indium compound
being one component of the composition, the other component
being from 5 to 20 parts of a tin compound represented by the
formula
Sn(X')2 0rSn(Y');n.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
261
n, for:
wherein, for said tin compound X' denotes a chelate ring mate-
rial selected from the group consisting of acetylacetone,
methyl acetoacetoate, and mixtures thereof; Y' denotes an
alkoxide material selected from the group consisting of butyl
alcohol, oxtyl alcohol, and mixtures thereof; and m' is an inte-
ger which is 2 or 4.
4 391,744
NORBORNYL OXYACETALDEHYDE, ORGANOLEPTIC
USES THEREOF AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING
SAME
Robert P. Belko, Woodbridge; Richard M. Boden, Monmouth
Beach, and Marie R. Hanna, Hazlet, all of N.J., assignors to
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 303,012, Sep. 17, 1981. This application
Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,157
Int. Q.3 A61K 7/46: CUB 9/00
U.S. Q. 2S2— 522 R 1 Claim
tive as a desizing agent at about 100° C. or higher, an anionic
surfactant present in an amount of 0.5% and a non-ionic surfac-
tant selected from the group consisting of alkyl oxalkylates,
alkaryl oxalkylates and fatty acid ethyloxylates present
10-60% with the balance water.
8. A composition for removing starch and starch-containing
sizing materials consisting essentially of an emulsion or disper-
sion of 10-40% of a starch-decomposing aqueous high temper-
ature amylase enzyme, effective as a desizing agent at about
100° C. or higher and 10-60% of a non-ionic surfactant se-
lected from the group consisting of alkylphenol oxalkylate,
oxalkylated fatty alcohols and fatty acid othyloxylate, with the
balance water.
GLC PROFILE FOR EXAMPLE I
1. The process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
consumable material selected from the group consisting of
perfumes and colognes comprising the step of adding to a
perfume or a cologne base an arotna augmenting or enhancing
quantity of the norbornyl oxyacetaldehyde having the struc-
ture:
4,391,746
BLOOD-COAGULATION-PROMOTING PRODUCTS
AND METHODS OF PREPARING THEM
Gautam Mitra, Kensington; Michael H. Coan, El Cerrito, and
Shohachi Wada, Oakland, all of Calif., assignors to Cutter
Laboratories, Inc., Berkeley, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 153,341, May 27, 1980. This application
May 5, 1982, Ser. No. 374,835
Int. Q.3 A61K 35/14, 35/16, 37/02: C07G 7/00
U.S. Q. 260—112 B 39 Qaims
1. A method of producing a blood-coagulation-promoting
preparation substantially free of thrombin from human blood
plasma, which comprises
(a) contacting a human blood plasma fraction containing
coagulation Factors II, VII, IX, and X with an anion
exchanger to adsorb the coagulation Factors on the anion
exchanger,
(b) eluting the adsorbed coagulation Factors from the anion
exchanger,
(c) treating the eluate containing the coagulation Factors to
generate a Factor VIII Inhibitor Bypassing Activity
(FEIBA) substance substantially free of thrombin, and
(d) treating the eluate to stop the generation of a FEIBA
substance.
O^ \
H .
4,391,747
DES ASPARAGINE-3-CALaTONIN
Ronald C. Orlowski, Frankfort, and Jay K. Seyler, Bourbonnais,
both of III., assignors to Armour Pharmaceutical Company,
Tarrytown, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,473
Int. Q.' C07C 103/52
U.S. Q. 260—112.5 T 5 Qaims
1. Des-X^-calcitonin, where X is asparagine wherein the
calcitonin is salmon, havine, porcine, ovine or eel.
4 391 745
DESIZING AGENT AND PROCESS FOR PREPARATION
THEREOF
Maria Denkler, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Frederic
Braun, Vienne, France, assignors to Diamalt Aktiengesell-
schaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 127,968, Mar. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,816
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 9,
1979, 2909396
Int. Q.3 CUD 3/386, 11/00: D06L 1/14, 16/00
U.S. Q. 252 554 ^ Qaims
1. A composition for removing starch and starch-containing
sizing materials comprising an emulsion or dispersion of
10-40% of high temperature aqueous amylase enzyme effec-
4.391,748
PROCESS FOR PREPARING PALATABLE SOYA
PROTEINS AND PRODUCT THUS OBTAINED
Aldo Fcrrero, c/o E. Merck, Postfach 4119, 6100 Darmstadt,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258.847
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 2, 1980, 21735 A/80
Int. Q.^ A23J 1/14
U.S. Q. 260—123.5 ' Claims
1. A process for preparing palaUble soya protein consisting
essentially of baking extruded, textured soya protein, which
has been previously dried so as to contain up to 10% of mois-
ture, at a temperature of 40° C. to 120° C. for 3 to 14 hours
thereby obtaining a product which is per se palauble.
^
262
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,749
METHOD FOR THE PURinCATION OF COLLAGENS
Eva S. Engvail, and Erkki I. Ruoslahti, both of Oiivenhain,
Calif., assignors to La Jolla Cancer Research Foundation, La
Jolla, Calif.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,326
Int. a.3 A61K 35/16: C07G 7/00: COSH 1/06: C09H 1/00
U.S. a. 260—123.7 10 Qaims
1. Affinity matrix material for separating collagen from
other high molecular weight proteinaceous substances com-
prising:
solid chromatographic support material; and
at least one fragment of fibronectin which retains thereupon
collagen binding sites, said fragment having been severed
from other binding sites of intact fibronectin. said frag-
ment being coupled with said solid chromatographic
support material leaving collagen binding sites thereof
exposed to selectively bind collagenous material when
used chromatographically without binding interfering
I high molecular weight non-coUagenous proteinaceous
! substances.
4,391,750
HEAT GELLABLE PROTEIN ISOLATE
Jennifer M. Grealy, Gores Landing, and Terrence J. Maurice,
Colborne, both of Canada, assignors to General Foods Inc.,
Toronto, Canada
I Filed Dec. 22. 1982, Ser. No. 452,035
Int. a.3 A23J 1/12. 1/14
U.S. CI. 260—123.5 27 Qaims
1. An aqueous protein dispersion suitable for heat gelation to
a gel, which comprises a composition dispersed m an aqueous
phase havmg an ionic strength of about 0.3 to about 0.75 molar
and a pH of about 4.5 to about 5.5. said composition compris-
ing at least 70% by weight of a substantially undenatured
vegetable protein isolate and up to about 30% by weight of a
starch, said vegetable protein isolate being one formed by
settling an aqueous dispersion of protein micelles consisting of
homogenous amphiphilic protein moieties.
4,391,752
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
5H-PYRROLO[2,l-C]-[l,4]THIAZEPINE-l,5-DIONES
Roger Crossley, Reading, England, assignor to John Wyeth and
Brother Limited, Maidenhead, England
Division of Ser. No. 236,350, Feb. 20, 1981, Pat. No. 4,349,480.
This application May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,356
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 26, 1980,
8006414
Int. a.3 C07D 513/04
U.S. a. 260—239.3 B 4 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a compound of formula XI
(XI)
R'»-
wherein R' is lower alkyl, R'* and R^ either both represent
hydrogen or together with the carbon atoms to which they are
attached represent a fused benzene ring optionally substituted
by a group selected from hydroxy, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy
and halogen, which comprises selecting a process from the
group consisting of ^
(a) reacting a compound of formula
j 4,391,751
! PHTHALIC ANHYDRIDE DERIVATIVES
Chung-Yuan Lin, Northford, Conn., assignor to The Upjohn
Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,047
Int. a.3 C07D 401/06. 403/06: C08G 69/16
U.S. a. 260—239.3 R 9 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula
O
^'^^'">v^^,i?-^
II
^c„H2„->. r^
x"^
li
o
wherein Q,^in represents alkylene containing from 2 to 6
carbon atoms in the chain separating the valencies, R is an inert
substituent selected from the class consisting of lower-alkyl,
lower-alkoxy, lower-alkenyl, lower-alkenyloxy, lower-alkyl-
mercapto, cyano and trifluoromethyl, and m is an integer from
0 to 3.
5. A compound according to claim 1 wherein CnH2/i is
pentamethylene and m=:0, said compound being 4-(N,N'-pen-
tamethyleneallophanyOphthalic anhydride corresponding to
the formula:
R'
I
R*
D— BrCH2— CH— CO— L— N
(VII)
COCH
substantially free from the L,L isomer, wherein R', R^and
r5 are as defined above with a haloformate ester and a
sulphide of formula XII
Y— SH
(XII)
wherein Y represents hydrogen or an alkali metal, with
the proviso that when Y is hydrogen the reaction is car-
ried out in the presence of base, and cyclising the product
by heating, and
(b) cyclising by heating a compound of formula (XIII)
I
D— BrCH2CHCO— L— N
(XIII)
COS©B®
substantially free of L,L stereoisomer wherein R', R^ and
R 3 are as defined above and B® is a cation.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
263
4,391,753
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CARBOXYLIC
PERACIDS
Nicolas Hardy, Jemeppe-sur-Sambre; Luc Lerot, and Rene
Walraevens, both of Brussels, all of Belgium, assignors to
Propylox, Brussels, Belgium
Division of Ser. No. 24,372, Mar. 27, 1979, Pat. No. 4,267,124.
This application Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,189
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 28, 1978, 78 09199
Int. Q.' C07D 301/14
U.S. Q. 549—525 15 Qaims
4,391,754
ANTHRAQUINONE COMPOUNDS
Andrew H. M. Renfrew, Bury, England, assignor to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 173,351, Jul. 29, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,223
Int. CI.' C07C 97/26. 49/74
U.S. Q. 260—380 4 Claims
1. An anthraquinone compound of the formula:
CHjR
14
' 15
wherein
R' represents an alkyl radical containing from 1 to 20 carbon
atoms;
X is H, NH2 or NHCHi;
one of Y and Z is OH and the other is H. NH2 or NHCH3;
and
one of R2 and RMs H and the one that is ortho to the OH
group is a — CH2R' radical.
1. In it continuous process for the manufacture of an olefin
oxide from an olefin by reaction of the olefin with a carboxylic
peracid comprising:
(a) preparing the carboxylic peracid by reaction, in a reac-
tion mixture, of the corresponding carboxylic acid with
hydrogen peroxide in the presence of a catalyst and in the
presence of an inert organic liquid which is contained in
an organic phase and is a solvent for the peracid and is
capable of forming a heterogeneous azeotrope with water,
said organic liquid having a higher boiling point that that
of the olefin and the olefin oxide, does not form an azeo-
trope with the olefin and the olefin oxide, and of which
the possible azeotropes with the carboxylic acid and the
carboxylic peracid have a higher boiling point than that of
the olefin and the olefin oxide, removing water present in
the reaction mixture by distillation of the water/organic
liquid azeotrope, and maintaining a sufficient amount of
water in the reaction mixture to allow the formation of an
aqueous phase which is separate from the organic phase
which contains the organic liquid and the carboxylic
peracid;
(b) withdrawing part of the reaction mixture of step (a), and
then separating the aqueous phase from the organic phase,
by decantation, of the part of the reaction mixture which
has been withdrawn;
(c) introducing the separated aqueous phase of step (b) into
the reaction mixture of step (a);
(d) reacting an olefin with the carboxylic peracid in the
separated organic phase obtained in step (b) to form a
reaction mixture containing unreacted olefin, olefin oxide,
carboxylic acid and organic liquid;
(e) subjecting the reaction mixture of step (d) to a separation
to obtain unreacted olefin and an organic solution contain-
ing organic liquid, olefin oxide, and carboxylic acid;
(0 distilling the organic solution obtained in step (e) to sepa-
rate the olefin oxide fro\p the carboxylic acid and organic
liquid; and
(g) feeding the separated carboxylic acid and organic liquid
of step (0 to step (a).
4,391,755
STEROID MONOHYDRATES, FORMULATIONS
CONTAINING SAME AND METHOD
Yu-Chang J. Wang, North Brunswick; Diirsch Friedrich, Hope-
well; Richard L. O'Laughlin, North Brunswick, and Thaddeus
Prusik, Roosevelt, all of N.J., assignors to E. R. Squibb &
Sons, Inc., Princeton, N.J.
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,127
Int. CI.- C07J 5/00: A61K 31/56
U.S. CI. 260—397.45 1* Claims
1. A method for forming the monohydrate of a steroid, said
monohydrate having an average particle size of less than about
20 microns, said steroid having the structure
wherein Ri is chlorine, fluorine or hydroxy and R'l is hydro-
gen or Ri and R'l together are =0; R2 is hydrogen or halogen;
R3 is hydrogen, methyl or fluorine; R4 is hydrogen, hydroxy.
O O
II II
alkyl— C—O, aryi- C— O—
or halogen; and R5 and Kb are the same or different and are
hydrogen, alkyl, alkylthio, alkoxy, carboalkoxy, formyl,
O O
11 II
alkyl- C— . alkyl- C— O,
hydroxy, halogen, phenyl or cyano, with the proviso that
when Rj and Rb are different, one of R5 and Kb is hydrogen,
which method includes the steps of micronizing the steroid in
264
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
anhydrous form, introducing the micronized anhydrous ste-
roid into warter to hydrate the steroid to form the correspond-
ing monohydrate and cause crystal growth, reducing the aver-
age particle size of the crystals of hydrated steroid suspended
in water to below about 25 microns to form particles of steroid
monohydrate having a relatively stable crystal size.
4,391,756
ORGANO-MONOVALENT AURUS COMPLEX
CATALYSTS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF OLEHN
OXIDES
Philip L. Kuch, Warrensviile Heights; Daniel R. Herrington,
Chesterland, and Janet M. Eggett, Parma, all of Ohio, assign-
ors to The Standard Oil Company, Qeveland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 912,620, Jun. 5, 1978, abandoned. This
appUcation Dec. 13, 1978, Ser. No. %9,124
Int. a.3 C07F 1/12; BOIJ 31/24. 31/18, 31/26
U.S. a. 260—430 2 Qaims
1. The catalyst complex represented by the empirical for-
mula:
Au^LY I .
t
wherein
L is a neutral coordinating w-acid type ligand; and
Y is a uninegative non-coordinating anion selected from the
group consisting of FjCSOa", BF4~, PF6~, C104~,
AlCU" and picrate.
2. The catalyst complex of claim 1 wherein Y is FaCSOs" or
AICI4-.
4,391,757
ORGANIC ANTIMONY CONTAINING STABILIZER
COMPOSITIONS FOR HALOGENATED POLYMERS
Thomas G. Kugele, and Dennis W. Gilmore, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Carstab Corporation, Reading, Ohio
FUed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,512
Int. CI.3 C09K 15/32
MS. Q. 260—446 4 Gaims
1. A composition comprising:
A. At least one organic antimony compound containing at
least one antimony to sulfur to carbon linkage and being
selected from compounds having the formulas:
(R^rr7Sb-(-SR>)/ (')
and
R„ Y K„ (II)
I \ / \ /
I Sb Sb
I (R>S)„ (Y);c (SR')m
wherein
R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, cyclo-
alkyl, cycloalkenyl, aralkyl, alkaryl, and alkenyl;
R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl, cyclo-
alkyl, cycloalkenyl, aralkyl, alkaryl, alkenyl,
! o -
— (CH2)r— COOR2 and — (CH2)fl— OCR^;
R^ is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or alkoxyal-
kyl;
R3 is alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl or alkenyl;
Y is selected from the group consisting of
00 O
II II II
— S— (CH2),— CO— . — OC— (CH2),— S— (CH2),— CO— ,
-continued
00 o
— D— R-*— D— , — OC— R*— CO— , — S— R4— CO— R*— S— ,
O O
— S— R*— CO— R*- OC— R*— S— ,
O O
. — S— (CH2V— OC— R'*— CO— (CH2);,— S— .
O O
II . II
— S— (CH2)p— OC— r5— CO— (CH2)«— S— ,
I
c=o
I
- o
I
(CH2V
s
I
Sb— (SR')/
R2-y
R2_y— Sb— (SR')/
S
I
(CH2)p
O
I
c=o
o I o
II I II :
— S-(CH2)p— OC-R*-CO-(CH2)|,— S-,
c=o
I
O
I
(CH2)^
S
I
R2_;— Sb— (SR'),
o o
H H
— S— (CH2),— CO— R*— OC— (CH2),— S— ,
— S— (CH2),— CO— R5— OC— (CH2),— s—
o
I
c=o
I
(CH2),
s
I
R2-y— Sb— (SR');
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
26S
-continued
R2-— Sb— (SR')/
S
I
(CH2),
O
c=o
I
o
\
consisting of dimethylurea, urea, alkyl ureas and biuret in an
organic solvent in which said acid acceptor is soluble and in
which the hydrochloride salt of said acid acceptor is insoluble,
separating the acid acceptor hydrochloride from the liquid
phase, recovering methyl isocyanate by distillation from said
liquid phase, and thermally decomposing said acid acceptor
hydrochloride salt to regenerate said acid acceptor.
O
II » II
— S— (CH2),— CO— R*— OC— (CH2),— S—
O
I
C=sO
I
(CH2),
S
I
R2_y— Sb— (SR');
R^ is a kylene, arylene, or alkenylene;
R5 is a trivalent alkyl or aryl radical;
R^ is a tetravelent alkyl or aryl radical;
D is oxygen or sulfur;
i= 1,2 or 3;
j=lor2;
m= 1 or 2 and m'=0 or 1;
n=l or 2 and n'=0 or 1;
x is 0 or 1 with the proviso that when x=0 then m-|-m' = 2
andn+n' = 2, and whenx=l thenm=l, m'=0, n=l and
n'=0;
z is 1, 2 or 3;
a is 2, 3 or 4;
q is 1, 2 or 3; and i
p is 2, 3 or 4;
B. elemental sulfur in an amount from about 0.03% to about
3.0% by weight based on the weight of the organic anti-
mony compound; and
C. in an amount from about 0.5% to about 25% by weight
based on the weight of the organic antimony compound of
at least one 2-mercaptocarboxylic acid selected from com-
pounds having the formula:
r9 (III)
R'O— C— COOH
I
SH
where r' and R'^'' are the same or different and are selected
from hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkaryl, cycloalkyl,
alkenyl, carboxyl,
O R"
— (CH2)rf— C— OR*. — (CH2)e— C— COOH
SH
where R^ is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkaryl, cycloal-
kyl, cycloalkenyl, or alkenyl; R" is hydrogen, alkyl or
aryl; d is 1 to 6 and e is 1 to 10; or R^ and R'O together
form an alicyclic ring.
4,391,758
PROCESS FOR METHYL ISOCYANATE PRODUCnON
Placido M. Spaziante, 7, Via San Michele, 6900 Lugano, Swit-
zerland, and Luigi Giuffre, Via Passo di Fargorida 6, Milan,
Italy
1 1 FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,549
1 1 Int. a.3 C07C 118/00
U.S. a. 260—453 P 18 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of methyl isocyanate com-
prising reacting methylcarbamoyl chloride with about a stoi-
chiometric amount of an acid acceptor selected from the group
4,391,759
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
ORGANOTHIOALDOXIME COMPOUNDS
John K. Chan, Charleston, W. Va., assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,368
Int. C\? C07C 119/18
U.S. a. 260—453.3 22 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an organothioaldoxime com-
pound of the formula:
Rl— C=NOH
S— R2
by the steps of:
(a) reacting an aldoxime of the formula:
RlCH=NOH
or an a-hydroxyiminoketone of the formula:
NOH O
II II
RlC CR3
with an alkaline hypohalite in an acidic medium to form the
corresponding 1-haloaldoxime, said acidic medium comprising
an acid added in an amount of from about 0.5 to about 4.0
equivalents for each mole of alkaline hypohalite used; and
(b) reacting said 1-haloaldoxime with an alkali metal mer-
captide salt of the formula:
R2SM
to form said organothioaldoxime compound, wherein the reac-
tions of said steps (a) and (b) are conducted in an aqueous
medium and wherein M denotes an alkali metal cation and Ri,
R2 and R3 are individually alkyl, alkoxyalkyl, cycloalkyl,
phenyl or phenylalkyl, all of which may be either unsubstituted
or substituted with one or more alkyl, halo, alkoxy, cyano,
nitro or dialkylamino substituents.
4,391,760
S-(TERTIARY ALKYL) ALKYLPHOSPHONOTHIOIC
HALIDES
Mohamed A. Fahmy, Princeton, N.J., assignor to Rhone-
Poulenc Agrochimie, Lyons, France
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,642
Int. a.3 C07F 9/20
U.S. a. 260— 961 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
O X
11/
R— P
\
SR|
wherein R is alkyl of 1 to 8 carbon atoms, Ri is tertiary alkyl
of 4 to 8 carbon atoms and X is halogen.
266
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,761
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF ARYL
PHOSPHONYL COMPOUNDS
Hans-Dieter Block, and Hans Dahmen, both of Cologne, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,871
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 4,
1980, 3025377
Int. a.3 C07F 9/40, 9/53
U.S. a. 260—969 4 Oaims
1. Process for the production of aryl phosphony! compounds
of the general formula
O
.R2
•r3
I
wherein
R' represents a mono- or polynuclear C6-C14 aryl radical,
which can be substituted by chlorine, fluorine or by alkyl,
aryl, alkoxy, aryloxy, alkenyl or cyano radicals,
R2 and R-^, independently of each other represent an alkyl,
alkenyl or aryl radical or a radical of the structure G-R^,
in which R', independently of R', has the same meaning
asR',
by the catalytic rearrangement of aryloxy phosphines of the
general formula II
r'— O— P'
,R2
'R3
II
wherein
R', R2 and R^ have the meanining indicated above, charac-
terized in that the rearrangement is carried out in the
presence of aromatic bromine compounds and a zero-
valent nickel catalyst selected from the group consisting
of elemental nickel, a complex of nickel (o) with a trialkyl
phosphite, a triaryl phosphite, a phosphonous acid ester, a
phosphinous acid ester, a phosphine, phosphorus trifluo-
ride, an isonitrile, an amine, a nitrogen oxide, carbon
monoxide, and a compound of nickel in an oxidation state
higher than zero wherein the nickel is converted to zero-
valent nickel under the reaction conditions.
4,391,762
AERATED DRINKS MACHINE
Robert P. Child, and Barry G. Charles, both of Hampshire,
England, assignors to Thorn Emi Domestic Electrical Appli-
ances Limited, London, England
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,684
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 16, 1981,
8101415
Int. a.3 BOIF 3/04
U.S. a. 261—121 R 4 Claims
1. An appliance for making an aerated beverage, said appli-
ance comprising, in combination:
(a) a casing;
(b) a connection carried by the casing for mounting a con-
tainer of pressurized liquid carbon dioxide;
(c) a housing for a bottle of water carried by said casing;
(d) a nozzle communicating with said connection and ex-
tending downwardly within said housing;
(e) a stopper positioned effective to engage in the neck of a
bottle mounted within said housing;
(0 means for supporting the bottle in the housing so that the
stopper is engaged therein;
(g) a manually operable valve selectively allowing carbon
dioxide to flow from a container mounted on said connec-
tion to said nozzle;
(h) a safety pressure valve connected to the interior of the
bottle when the stopper is engaged in its neck; and
(i) a displacement body associated with said nozzle and
capable of being passed into the neck of the bottle, said
displacement body displacing a significant volume of air
and/or of water, whereby when a bottle partly filled with
water is in position, and the nozzle and displacement body
are therein, the level of the water is such as to leave only
a small volume of air thereabove and around the displace-
ment body.
4,391,763
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
HALOGEN-CONTAINING RESIN PARTICLES OF
LARGER BULK DENSITY COMPRISING MIXING
PARTICLES OF THE RESIN WITH INORGANIC SALTS,
TREATED IN A MIXTURE IN A GASEOUS PHASE AND
SEPARATING THE INORGANIC SALT FROM THE
PRODUCT
Kunihiko Ueno; Akiyasu Ishii; Masazi Hukuda, and Kazuyuki
Nakayama, all of Iwaki, Japan, assignors to Kureha Kagaku
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 223,947
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 11, 1980, 55-1865
Int. C\? B29C 23/00
U.S. a. 264—15 3 Claims
1. A process for the manufacture of spherical particles,
having a heavier bulk specific gravity, of halogen-containing
ethylene resin prepared from at least one monomer selected
from vinylidene fluoride, vinyl fluoride, chlorotrifluoroethyl-
ene, trifluoroethylene, tetrafluoroethylene, vinylchloride, vi-
nylidene chloride and vinyl bromide, said process comprising
in combination of; a step of mixing 100 wt. parts of particles of
the said resin with 20-500 wt. parts of one or more of the
heat-resisting inorganic salts having particle sizes of 0.01-50 ,
which are in the form of stable particles at a temperature
higher than the melting point of said halogen-containing ethyl-
ene resin; a step for heat-treating said mixture in a gaseous
phase at a temperature higher than melting point of the said
resin; and a further step for separating said inorganic salt or
salts from the heat-treated intermediate products.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
267
4,391,764
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE OF IDENTICAL PARTS
DISPLAYING DIFFERENT INDICIA
Egon Edinger, Graefelfing, and Gerd Kohler, Munich, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
I Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,875
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 27,
1980, 3044722
I . Int. a.3 B41M 5/26
U.S. a. 2164—25 8 Qaims
1. In the method of producing identically shaped plastic keys
having different readable indicia on a surface thereof which
comprises the steps of preparing a mixture of a base plastic
material and a filler material, molding the keys by injection
molding with at least a surface portion of the key formed of the
mixture, providing a laser beam, focusing the energy radiation
in the beam, moving the key surface and beam with respect to
one another in a predetermined pattern whereby the beam
plays over the surface in a path corresponding to the desired
readable indicia, the improvement of the filler material being
selected from one of the group of carbon black and graphite,
the beam having sufficient power to combust at least a portion
of the filler material within the plastic key adjacent the surface
without substantial combustion of the base material adjacent
the combusted filler material.
I
4,391,765
MICRoWaVE cured SILICONE ELASTOMERIC FOAM
Chi-long Lee, and Sherwood Spells, both of Midland, Mich.,
assignors to Dow Corning Corporation, Midland, Mich.
Filed Jun. 25, 1982. Ser. No. 392,402
Int. CI.' B29H 5/26
U.S. Q. 264—26 8 Claims
1. A method of drying a stable froth produced from an
aqueous silicone emulsion suitable to provide an elastomeric
product upon removal of the water comprising
(i) mechanically generating a stable froth from a silicone
emulsion comprising 100 parts by weight of anionically
stabilized hydroxyl endblocked polydiorganosiloxane
having an average molecular weight of greater than
10,000, in the form of an aqueous emulsion having a pH in
the range of 9 to 1 1.5 inclusive; at least one part by weight
colloidal silica; an organic tin compound; and water;
adding sufficient anionic or nonionic surfactant and thick-
ener to make the froth stable until the water is removed in
step (ii), and then,
(ii) exposing the stable froth to sufficient microwave energy
to remove the water from the emulsion, thereby forming
an e astomeric cured foam.
(b) separating the solution of the polymer in said solvent
from the micro-organism cell residue,
(c) causing said solution to gel,
(d) subjecting said gel to a non-random deformation process
whereby the bulk of the solvent is expelled from said gel,
and
(e) using at least the bulk of said expelled solvent for extrac-
tion of polymer from a further quantity of the polymer-
containing cells.
4,391,767
COATED POLYESTER FILMS
Gordon E. A. Pears, Welwyn Garden City, England, assignor to
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, Ix)ndon, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 954,772, Oct. 16, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 741,997, No*. 15, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 257,297, May 26,
1972, abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 52,763, Jul. 6,
1970, abandoned. This application Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No.
188,144
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 15, 1969,
35556/69
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 25,
1991, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' DOIF U/04. 11/08
U.S. Q. 264—210.3 9 Claims
1. A process for the production of a synthetic linear polyes-
ter film which comprises melt extruding a substantially amor-
phous polyester film, drawing the film \n the longitudinal
direction, thereafter applying a primer coating comprising a
thermosetting acrylic or methacrylic composition, wherein the
acrylic or methacrylic component is crosslinkable. to one or
both sides of said film, then drawing the coated film in the
transverse direction, and heat setting the biaxially oriented and
coated film, whereby a primer coating of the thermoset acrylic
or methacrylic composition, wherein the acrylic or meth-
acrylic component is thermoset, of thickness of at least 10 ^
inch is obtained, and then recycling the coated film by re-
extruding the same with fresh polyester.
4,391,768
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CURLING LIPS
ABOUT THE OPEN MOUTHS OF STACKED
THERMOPLASTIC CONTAINERS
Albert W. Arends, and Ronald E. Henke, both of Gladwin,
Mich., assignors to Leesona Corporation, Beaverton, Mich.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,888
Int. CI.' B29C 17/00
U.S. Q. 264—285 14 Claims
■^ji, „.. -1
4,391,766
EXTRACTION OF POLY(/3-HYDROXYBUTYRIC ACID)
Peter J. Barham, Bristol, and Alan Selwood, Harrogate, both of
England, assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC,
London, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 174,836, Aug. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,360,488. This application Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,325
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 13, 1979,
7928172; Feb. 12, 1981, 8104312
Int. C\? DOID 5/12
U.S. Q. 264— 210.1 10 Qaims
1. A process for the separation of a polymer containing at
least 50 mole % of /J-hydroxybutyric acid residues in the
polymer chain from micro-organism cells comprising
(a) extracting the polymer from the cells by contacting the
polymer-containing cells with a solvent in which the
polymer is soluble at the extraction temperature but in
which extracted polymer, which has been freshly precipi-
tated and not heated to above 40° C, is not soluble at
temperatures below 25° C, \
1. In rim curling apparatus for curling a turned-in lip about
the open mouth of a flexible walled, annular thermoplastic
container, formed particularly from difficult to curl materials
such as polypropylene, which has a rim which extends radially
outwardly and then axially, and which includes a plurality of
generally cylindrical elongate, thermally conductive, tubular
rotatable rollers, each having a continuous helical groove in its
outer peripheral surface, and each being equi-radially spaced
268
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
from a common central axis to define therebetween an annular
passageway through which a stack of the containers pass with
the rim portions of the containers engaged in the grooves of
the rollers; means within the rollers, in upstream portions
thereof, for heating of the rollers from within and defining an
upstream length constituting a rim heating zone; and means
within the rollers downstream therefrom, and thermally insu-
lated therefrom, for cooling the rollers from within and defin-
ing a downstream length constituting a rim cooling zone; the
improvement wherein: the rollers have portions of different
diameter; the helical grooves in said upstream portions are of a
cross-section to comprise transport sections in reduced diame-
ter portions of the rollers which axially transport the container
via their rims without engaging said peripheral side wall por-
tions of the container; external, axially extending, radiant
heater means are provided circumferentially between the up-
stream portions of said rollers to heat the exposed portions of
the rims radiantly; the helical grooves in said downstream
portions are in portions of said rollers which are of greater
diameter than the upstream portions to engage and cool said
side wall portions of the container; and helical groove portions
of axially decreased width are provided in each roller between
the transporting groove portions and the cooling groove por-
tions to form the rims by turning the rims inwardly, the helical
groove portion of axially decreased width being in portions of
said rollers which are of the same diameter as the portions of
the rollers which include the cooling groove portions.
4,391,770
PROCESS FOR SPINNING AMINO-FORMALDEHYDE
HBERS
Graham E. Martin, Middlesbrough, England, assignor to Impe-
rial Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Filed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,291
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 1, 1980,
8038537
Int. a.3 B29C 25/00
U.S. a. 264—236 8 Qaims
1. A process for the production of fibers from amino-for-
maldehyde resins in which the fibers are formed from a solu-
tion of the resin and cured by heating to a temperature between
100° C. and 300° C, characterised in that the resin solution
contains a catalyst mixture comprising 0.2 to 5% by weight,
based on the resin solids, of ammonium formate and from 10 to
50% by weight, based on the weight of the ammonium for-
mate, of a salt of a non-volatile acid selected from
(i) an ammonium salt of an acid selected from sulphuric,
phosphoric, and nitric acids, and
(ii) a water soluble salt of a metal selected from zinc, magne-
sium, calcium, and aluminum and an acid selected from
nitric, sulphuric, and phosphoric acids.
4,391,769
APPARATUS FOR LOADING UNVULCANIZED TIRES
ON TIRE VULCANIZING MACHINE
Katsumi Ichikawa, Akashi; Itaru Amano, Kobe; Keiji Ozakl,
Takarazuka, and Seiichi Suzuki, Kodaira, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd. and Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe
Seiko Sho, both of Kobe, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,268
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 14, 1980, 55-81167
Int. a.^ B29H 5/02
U.S. a. 264—326 2 Qaims
4,391,771
ARRANGEMENT FOR RETAINING A FUEL ROD IN A
RECONSTITUTABLE FUEL ASSEMBLY
Andrew J. Anthony, TarifMlle, Conn., assignor to Combustion
Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,375
Int. C1.3 G21C i/;a i/n
U.S. a. 376—451 8 Qaims
"A
2. A method for loading an unvulcanized tire on a tire vulca-
nizing machine by holding said unvulcanized tire by a con-
tractly expansible paddle, lifting and oscillating said unvulcan-
ized tire over said machine and thereafter descending and
placing said unvulcanized tire on a mold of said machine which
comprises the steps of:
placing and keeping unvulcanized tires at a plural number of
stand-by stations located on a locus of oscillatory move-
ment of said unvulcanized tire, and
picking up a predetermined unvulcanized tire from said
stand-by stations.
1. A nuclear fuel assembly having a horizontal lower end
fitting, an elongated frame rigidly connected to the lower end
fitting and extending vertically therefrom, the frame including
a plurality of longitudinally spaced apart horizontal grids, each
grid formed from a plurality of interconnected metal strips
defining a multiplicity of openings and h^ing resilient means
projecting laterally into each opening, an^a multiplicity of
longitudinally disposed, parallel fuel rods each passing through
an o|>ening in every grid and maintained in Vertical and hori-
zontal position by the resilient means, the fuel rods formed of
Zircaloy tubes sealed at each end with Zircaloy caps wherein
the improvement comprises:
each fuel rod having a generally cylindrical, stainless steel
tip mechanically joined to the Zircaloy cap, the tip having
an indented retention notch extending between axially
spaced, bevelled surfaces for engaging the resilient means
on the lowermost grid.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
269
' ' 4,391,772
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCHON OF SHAPED PARTS
FROM POWDERS COMPRISING SPHEROIDAL METAL
PARTICLES
Yannick Bonnor; Gerard Raisson, both of Nevers, and Yves
Honnorat, Orsay, all of France, assignors to Creusot-Loire,
Paris, France
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,825
Oaims priority, application France, Nov. 14, 1979, 79 28066
Int. a? B22F 7/00, i/OO; C22C 1/04
U.S. a. 419—23 5 Qaims
1. A process for the production of shaped parts from a pow-
der comprising spheroidal metal particles, comprising the
successive steps of
(a) mixing said powder with from 0.2% to 2% of lubricant of
stearate type;
(b) mixing said powder and said lubricant with from 0.2% to
2% of organic binder of cellulose gum type;
(c) mixing the powder thus obtained with an amount of
water of from 0.2% to 2%;
(d) cold compacting the resulting mixture; and
(e) subjecting said mixture to a two-phase sintering opera-
tion, in an atmosphere which is neutral or reducing with
respect to said mixture, the first phase being effected at a
temperature of from 300° to 500° C. and the second phase
being effected at a temperature which is substantially
higher.
4,391,773
METHOD OF PURIFYING AIR AND NEGATIVE FIELD
GENERATOR
G. Patrick Flanagan, 9989 E. Morrill Way, Tucson, Ariz. 85715
1 1 Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,132
1 1 Int. a.3 A61L 2/00
U.S. CI 422—22 8 Qaims
components of the sample when the carrier is in one of
said positions,
means for discarding said one crucible when the weight of
one of the components therein differs from a predeter-
mined amount,
means for moving successive ones of a plurality of said
crucibles to said station to be charged and to said furnace
to melt the contents of the crucible.
a mold adapted to receive the melted contents of the cruci-
ble to form the sample,
means for transferring said melted contents to said mold and
thereafter discarding the empty crucible, and
control means for activating the means for charging, weigh-
ing, emptying and discarding of said crucibles.
4,391,775
METHOD OF AND SYSTEM FOR DETERMINING
PARTICULAR SPEOES OF CHLORINE IN A WATER
SAMPLE
Calvin O. Huber, Mequon; Karl G. Schick, Whitefish Bay, and
Joel T. Cobum, Milwaukee, all of Wis., assignors to Wiscon-
sin Alumni Research Foundation, Madison, Wis. and Electric
Power Research Institute, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 200,046, Oct. 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,322,215.
This application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328.015
Int. a.' GOIN 27/12. 33/00
U.S. a. 422— 68 3aaims
1. A method of purifying air, comprising the steps of
placing in proximity to said air a capacitor including a pair of
electrodes spaced apart by a solid dielectric material, and
applying between said electrodes an A.C. voltage of at least
about 5000 volts having a frequency of at least twenty
kiloHertz, said voltage being less than the breakdown
voltage across said electrodes.
' ' 4,391,774
AUTOMATIC DEVICE FOR MAKING SAMPLES FOR
ANALYSIS
Jean Dupain, Saint Maur, France, assignor to Societe des Ci-
ments Francais, Guerville, France
I Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,751
Gaims priority, application France, Jun. 27, 1980, 80 14302
Int. C1.5 GOIN 35/00
U.S. a. 422—63 21 Qaims
1. A device for making samples for analysis, comprising:
a furnace,
a weighing station,
a plurality of crucibles,
a pair of carriers movable between first and second positions,
each of said carriers having means for successively charg-
ing one of said crucibles at said station with one of two
1. A system for determining chlorine species from a group
consisting of hypochlorous acid and/or hypochlorite, mono-
chloramine and dichloramine in respective first, second and
third samples of a larger supply of water, said system compris-
ing: means for providing each of said samples at a pH within a
specific range; first container means including a supply of
hydrogen peroxide and second container means including a
supply of potassium iodide; means for transferring from said
first container means to said first water sample a predetermined
amount of hydrogen peroxide such that said first sample is free
of potassium iodide whereby said hypochlorous acid and/or
hypochlorite if present will react with said hydrogen peroxide
270
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
to produce oxygen but said monochloramine and dichloramine
if also present will not react with said hydrogen peroxide to
produce oxygen; means for transferring from said first con-
tainer means to said second water sample a predetermined
amount of hydrogen peroxide and from said second container
means to said second water sample a first predetermined
amount of potassium iodide for causing said monochloramine
and not said dichloramine to react with said hydrogen jserox-
ide and potassium iodide for producing additional oxygen;
means for transferring from said first container means to said
third water sample a predetermined amount of hydrogen per-
oxide and from said second container means to said third water
sample a second predetermined amount of potassium iodide for
causing said dichloramine to react with said hydrogen perox-
ide and said potassium iodide for producing still further oxy-
gen; and means for detecting from each of said sample oxygen
for indicating whether or not any of said chlorine species are
present in said water supply. |
4,391,776
DISSOOATION CHAMBER AND MEASURING CELL
] COMBINATION USEFUL FOR MAKING
MEASUREMENTS
Klaus Braun, Uberlingen-Bambergen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Bodenseewerk Perkin-Elmer & Co. GmbH, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 223,069
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 12,
1980, 3001053
Int. a.5 GOIN 21/76
U.S. a. 422—78 16 aaims
r 1 «-
J — u »
thereof by windows whereby an excitation light beam can
be passed therethrough;
the third bore being closed by a window through which
fluorescence radiation can be observed; and
means, axially resilient and engaged with said tubular part,
for retaining said ground surface thereof in resilient en-
gagement with said ground surface of said measuring cell.
4,391,777
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING BREATH ALCOHOL
Donald G. Hutson, El Cerrito, Calif., assignor to Cal Detect,
Inc., Richmond, Calif.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,121
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/22, 21/62. 27/04
U.S. a. 422— 84 IQaim
1. In combination, a dissociation chamber and measuring cell
useful for observing fluorescence radiation, said combination
comprising:
a heated dissociation chamber adapted to permit hydrides to
be passed therethrough with an inert gas flow, said disso-
ciation chamber including a tubular part surrounded by a
jacket-shaped heater, said tubular part having, on the
outlet side thereof, a ground surface; and
a measuring cell adjacent said tubular part of said dissocia-
tion chamber and located downstream thereof, said cell
being adapted for passing an excitation light beam there-
through and for observing fluorescence radiation occur-
ring therein, said measuring cell being a block-shaped
body and having three mutually perpendicular bores of
which:
the first bore being a through bore communicating on one
side thereof with said tubular part of said dissociation
chamber and on the other side with an outlet, said first
bore having a funnel-shaped ground surface on said one
side thereof, said ground surface being complementary to,
and engaging with, said ground surface of said tubular
part;
the second bore being a through bore closed on both sides
1. Apparatus for analyzing the alcohol content of breath
comprising an inlet line; an inlet line check valve in said inlet
line; a sample inlet conduit communicating with the output
side of said inlet line check valve; an alcohol detector commu-
nicating with said sample inlet conduit; a test line communicat-
ing at one end with said inlet line on the inlet side of the inlet
line check valve and at its other end with a 2-way suction valve
in a pump suction line, said inlet valve being selectively mov-
able between a position at which it completes a connection
between said test line and said pump suction line and a position
at which it completes a connection between said pump suction
line and an atmosphere line; an air pump, the suction side of
which communicates with said suction line; a pressure line
communicating with the pressure side of said pump at one end
and with a 2-way pressure valve at the other; said pressure
valve being selectively movable between a position at which it
communicates with a purge line communicating with the sam-
ple inlet conduit and a position at which it communicates with
an alcohol standard pressure line; an alcohol standard solution
container with a bubbler tube communicating with said alco-
hol standard pressure line; and an alcohol standard sample line
communicating with said alcohol standard solution container
at one end and with an inlet side of a sample line check valve
at the other; the outlet side of said sample line check valve
communicating with the said sample inlet conduit, and said
purge line communicating with said sample inlet conduit be-
tween the said outlet side of the said sample line check valve
and the outlet side of the breath inlet check valve.
4,391,778
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE ANALYSIS OF
MATERIALS BY CHROMATOGRAPHY AND MASS
SPECTROMETRY
Brian D. Andresen, and Kwokei J. Ng, both of Columbus, Ohio,
assignors to The Ohio State University, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 306,942
Int. a.3 GOIN 31/08: HOIJ 27/00
U.S. a. 422—89 3 Claims
1. An apparatus for the analysis of materials by temperature-
programmed gas chromatography and mass spectrometry, said
apparatus comprising:
a gas chromatography column having an outlet;
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
first heating means for progressively increasing the tempera-
ture of said column from a lower temperature to an upper
temperature;
a mass spectrometer having an inlet;
an open-split interface connecting said outlet of said column
to said inlet of said mass spectrometer and;
means of supplying inert gas to said open-interface, | j
the improvement which comprises second heating means for
heating said inert gas and said interface to above said
upper temperature, thereby reducing the instrumental
drift of the base line signal of the total ionization of said
mass spectrometer, said second heating means comprising
a heating block having walls defining an interface channel
4,391,779 I
TEFLON GROUND GLASS ADAPTOR
Robert'^. Miskinis, 9758 Airport Vista Rd., Santee, Calif. 92071
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,361
II Int. CI.' BOIL y 7/00
U.S. Cl! 422— i
-99
271
taneously throughout their respective surface upon initial
contact when seated;
a one-piece retractor nut having a textured outer surface and
. mounted on the threaded portion of the stopper, said nut
dimensioned to engage the rim of the glassware opening
and being smaller in length than said threaded portion;
whereby a slight rotation of the nut will engage the rim of
the glassware opening to apply an axial force on the seated
body portion sufficient to break the seal between said
surfaces enabling the stopper to be lifted freely out of the
opening. ,
4,391,780
CONTAINER FOR SAMPLE TESTING
Michael J. Boris, Yorba Linda, Calif., assignor to Beckman
Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,766
Int. a.' BOIL 3/00
U.S. Cl. 422—102 3 Claims
which accommodates said interface and a gas channel
which intersects said interface channel and through which
gas can be passed into said interface channel, said heating
block being provided with thermostatic control means for
maintaining the temperature of said block substantially
constant during said progressive increase of temperature
of said column, and wherein said means for supplying said
inert gas to said open-split interface comprises a gas sup-
ply line having its one end connected to said open-split
interface, said gas supply line having a helical section
disposed within said gas channel, said helical section in-
creasing the residence time of said ps within said gas
channel and thereby improving the uniformity of tempera-
ture of said gas reaching said open-split interface. ^
7 Claims
1. Apparatus for qomparative testing of a sample substance
comprising:
a unitary structure it)cluding a single row of at least four tubu-
larly shaped compartments joined side by side along said
single row, each said compartment having the same cross
sectional area, each said compartment including an upper
open end and a lower closed end spaced from said upper
open end graduated distances such that at least three of said
compartments define successively increasing or decreasing
volumes as measured from the other of said compartments
which is a control compartment;
a layer of self sealing elastomeric material placed over said
open ends for sealing each said compartment from adjacent
compartments and from the outside atmosphere;
a protective layer positioned between said open ends and said
elastomeric material;
a cover connectable to said compartments adjacent said open
end. said cover and said upper end of said compartments
cooperating to position and compress said elastomeric mate-
rial and said protective layer, said cover including access
openings, one access opening for each compartment, each
said access opening in line with its corresponding open end
such that a probe may be inserted through each said access
opening, said elastomeric material, and said protective layer
to enter said compartment; and
at least one level line on each said compartment, each said level
line being spaced from said open end a predetermined dis-
tance such that at least some of said level lines are spaced
different distances from said lower closed end.
I. W reusable stopper for tapered ground openings in
standard laboratory glassware:
said stopper having a tapered body portion, and a threaded
portion extending from the end of the larger cross-sec-
tional area of the body portion and constructed of a sub-
stantially rigid synthetic resin polymer material;
said tapered body portion having a surface conforming to
the prescribed surface specifications of standard glassware
openings to provide a uniformly sealed connection simul-
! 4,391,781
ELECTRICALLY HEATED VAPOR DISPENSER
Klaas J. van Lit, Amstelveen, Netherlands, assignor to S. C.
Johnson & Son, Inc., Racine, Wis.
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,866
Int. a.J A61L 9/03
U.S. a. 422—125 8 Qaims
1. A device for dispensing a thermally volatilizable sub-
stance, comprising:
'A
272
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a housing;
a heater secured within the housing and having a heating
surface forming a support for a replaceable mat containing
the volatilizable substance;
said housing defining a window over the heating surface and
an access opening adjacent to one end of the heating
surface for removal and/or insertion or replaceable mats;
1 clamp arm secured to the housing, extending over the
window, and terminating in a free end and having means
biasing said clamp arm towards the heating surface to
press a mat thereagainst; and
^epressible lever secured to the housing and upon depression
engageable with the free end of said clamp arm to move
the clamp arm away from the heating surface, thereby to
release a mat to facilitate removal thereof through said
access opening.
4,391,783
PROCESS FOR MAKING ABRASION-RESISTANT
SODIUM TRIPOLYPHOSPHATE
Hans Haas, Swisttal-Strassfeld, and Werner Kowalski, Weilers-
wist-Mettemich, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,023
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 13,
1981, 3109652
Int. a.3 COIB 15/16. 25/26
U.S. a. 423—315 8 Qaims
1. A process for making granular sodium tripolyphosphate
of high abrasion resistance which comprises: spray-drying a
sodium orthophosphate solution or suspension containing
Na20 and P2O5 in essentially the molar ratio required for the
sodium tripolyphosphate in a one-stage spray-drying operation
by means of a nozzle inside a heated spray tower with the
resultant formation of the tripolyphosphate, the orthophos-
phate solution or suspension being sprayed jointly with a solu-
tion of a high molecular weight phosphate of sodium, potas-
sium or ammonium containing between 60 and 73 weight %
P2O5, the proportion of the said solution being 0.005 to 5
weight %, calculated as solid substance and based on the P2O5-
content of the orthophosphate solution or suspension.
4,391,782
IN SITU URANIUM LEACHING USING HIGH
PRESSURE CO2/O2 SYSTEM TO OVERCOME
CHLORIDE ION INHIBITION
Tsoung-Yuan Yan, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,556
Int C\? C22B 60/02
U.S. a. 423—7 14 Claims
9. An improved process for the in situ recovery of uranium
values from a uranium-bearing subterranean formation, having
formation fluids with a sufficient chloride concentration to
substantially inhibit the leaching rate of the uranium value
therein, comprising the steps of:
(a) penetrating the formation with at least one injection well
and at least one production well in communication with
the injection well;
(b) introducing into the formation an aqueous leaching solu-
tion containing an oxidant and carbon dioxide wherein the
carbon dioxide is introduced under sufficient pressure to
substantially improve the uranium-leaching rate and to
give the formation fluids a pH of from about 4.0 to about
5.0;
(c) producing. pregnant leaching solution containing ura-
nium values and having a pH of from about 4.0 to about
5.0; and
(d) passing the produced pregnant leaching solution through
4,391,784
FOAM CONTROL DURING PRODUCTION OF
PHOSPHORIC AOD
Richard N. Hill, Sr., 3412 Polk Ave., and Charles D. B. Hill,
1475 Woodlake Dr., Apt. 182, both of Lakeland, na. 33803
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,850
Int. a.3 COIB 25/16
U.S. a. 423—320 5 Qaims
1. In the production of phosphoric acid comprising the steps:
(a) digesting ground phosphate rock with sulfuric acid and
weak phosphoric acid recycled from Step (d) below to
form a slurry comprising strong phosphoric acid and
byproduct gypsum, and forming a foam on the surface of
the slurry;
(b) passing the slurry to a filtration operation;
(c) separating gypsum from strong phosphoric acid in the
said filtration operation thereby forming a gypsum filter
cake of gypsum crystals;
(d) washing the gypsum filter cake with wash water thereby
forming weak phosphoric acid, and recycling said weak
phosphoric acid to the digestion in Step (a); the improve-
ment comprising
(e) removing foam from the slurry surface;
(0 liquifying the removed foam; and
(g) passing the resultant liquid to the filtration operation;
whereby the said gypsum crystals are caused to be better
suited for filtration, and soluble P2O5 is returned in the
liquified foam.
4,391,785
PREPARATION OF ZSM-12 TYPE ZEOLITES
Edward J. Rosinski, Pedricktown, N.J., and Mae K. Rubin, Bala
Cynwyd, Pa., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,793
Int. a.3 COIB 33/28
U.S. a. 423—329 6 Qaims
1. In a process for manufacturing synthetic zeolite ZSM-12
which process comprises crystallizing an aqueous forming
solution comprising a source of silica and an nitrogenous tem-
plate and recovering said zeolite ZSM-12, the improvement
which comprises utilizing as said nitrogenous template a com-
an ibh exchange resin to recover uranium values there- pound selected from the group consisting of dimethyl pyridin-
from. ium and dimethyl pyrrolidinium halides.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
11
273
4,391,786
RODUCriON OF CALCIUM CARBIDE '
Hans-Joachim Kersting, Frechen; Erhard Wolfnim, Duren;
Willi Portz, and Georg Strauss, both of Erftstadt, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,836
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1980, 3035026
Int. a.3 COIB 31/32
U.S. a. 423—442 6 Qaims
r
4^
'^^^
1. A process for making calcium carbide by reacting an
excess of coke with quicklime in the presence of oxygen in an
oxygen-thermal furnace, which comprises: using precrushed
coal as a starting material for coke and precrushed lime hy-
drate (Ca(OH)2) or precrushed limestone (CaCOs) as a starting
material for quicklime; mixing the precrushed materials, intro-
ducing the resulting mixture into a drying zone and freeing it
therein at 80° to 120° C. from adhering water; introducing the
warm mixture coming from the drying zone, and air, into a
calcining apparatus, the coal constituent being coked and the
lime constituent being simultaneously dehydrated or decarbo-
nized therein at temperatures of 900° to 1400° C; directly
delivering the thermally-pretreated mixture of starting materi-
als with an inherent temperature of 900° to 1000° C. to the
oxygen-thermal furnace and reacting it with oxygen to pro-
duce calcium carbide therein, using the waste heat originating
from the calcining apparatus for the generation of superheated
high pressure steam from boiler feed water; using the super-
heated high pressure steam for operating a turbine, the latter
being used for the liquefaction of air and separation into its
components at low temperature so as to obtain the oxygen
necessary for operation of the oxygen-thermal furnace, and
also for the generation of electrical power, hot low pressure
steam issuing through the turbine's opposite side being intro-
duced at least partially into the drying zone for drying the
mixture of starting materials therein; and taking condensate
obtained in the drying zone therefrom, preheating it by means
of off-gases originating from the oxygen-thermal furnace, and
using it as boiler feed water for the generation of superheated
high pressure steam by means of waste heat originating from
the calcining apparatus.
contacting gaseous methane to a chromium oxide film on
one side of a thin fiydrogen-permeable wall, while concur-
rently dissolving hydrogen into the opposite side, and
heating to form graphite fibers on said first wall side.
4,391,788
STARTING PITCHES FOR CARBON HBERS
Seiichi Uemura, Tokyo; Shunichi Yamamoto; Takao Hirose,
both of Kamakura; Hiroaki Takashima, Kawasaki, and Osamu
Kato, Yokohama; all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Oil Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 366,862
Qalms priority, application Japan, Apr. 13, 1981, 56-54307;
Jul. 27, 1981, 56-116332
Int. a.' DOIF 9/12; ClOC 3/02
U.S. a. 423—447.6 5 Qaims
1. A process for making carbon fibers comprising heat treat-
ing a starting pitch to make a precursor pitch, melt spinning,
infusibilizing, carbonizing or further graphitizing said precur-
sor pitch to obtain carbon fibers wherein the surting pitch is
produced by heat treating at 400°-500° C. under a hydrogen
pressure of at least 20 Kg/cm^.G an oil selected from the group
consisting of (1) a heavy fraction oil (A) boiling at not lower
than 200° C. obtained as a by-product at the time of fluidized
catalytic cracking of petroleum and (2) a mixture of said heavy
fraction oil (A) with a heavy fraction oil (B) boiling at not
lower than 200° C. obtained at the time of steam cracking of
petroleum, the ratio by weight between said heavy fraction oil
(B) to said heavy fraction oil (A) being 1 to 0.1-9.
4,391,789
CARBON BLACK PROCESS
Earl J. Estopinal, Monroe, La., assignor to Columbian Chemi-
cals Company, Tulsa, Okla.
Filed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,534
Int. a.3 COIB 31/02; C09C 1/48
U.S. a. 423— 457 3 Oaims
4,391,787
METHOD FOR GROWING GRAPHITE HBERS
Gary G. Tibbetts, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to General Mo-
tors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 170,282, Jul. 18, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,864
Int. C\? COIB 31/04; DOIF 9/12
U.S. CL 423—447.3 14 Qaims
1. A method for manufacturing graphite fibers by methane
pyrolysis, said method comprising
2
1. A method of making a carbon black product comprising:
forming, in a first zone of a Venturi type carbon black reac-
■\
274
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
tor wherein the first zone is the converging section of the
Venturi type carbon black reactor, combustion gases at a
high temperature having a gradient of increasing turbu-
lence in an axial downstream direction, said turbulence
resulting from the tangential injection of a fuel and a
combustion-supporting gas
injecting, substantially radially into the first zone of the
reactor, a carbon black feedstock at more than one of the
axial gradient positions before the combustion gases reach
maximum turbulence,
cracking the carbon black feedstock into carbon black,
quenching the carbon black reaction in a second zone after
said gases have reached maximum turbulence, and
collecting the carbon black product said product having a
controlled particle size distribution.
4,391,790
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REDUONG THE
AMMONIA CONCENTRATION OF SULFUR RECOVERY
FAOLITY GAS STREAMS
John W. Palm, and Robert L. Reed, both of Tulsa, Okla., assign-
ors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago, III.
I Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,061
' Int. a.^ COIB 77/02
U.S. a. 423—574 R 14 Qaims
1. A process for sulfur recovery comprising:
subjecting a gas stream containing ammonia and hydrogen
sulfide to a partial combustion step in a noncatalytic first
combustion zone to produce a mixture including hydro-
gen sulfide, sulfur dioxide, nitrogen, water, and uncon-
verted ammonia;
introducing the thus-produced water mixture into a Claus
first catalytic reaction zone in which hydrogen sulfide and
sulfur dioxide in the mixture react at a temperature above
the dew point of sulfur to produce a hot effluent stream
Icontaining free sulfur;
separating the thus-produced free sulfur froift the hot efflu-
ent stream to produce a tail gas stream;
forming free sulfur by contacting the tail gas stream with a
catalyst at a temperature such that the preponderance of
free sulfur thus formed is deposited on the catalyst;
siipultaneously depositing ammonium compounds on the
Icatalyst;
removing the thus-deposited free sulfur and ammonium
compounds from the catalyst by passing a hot regenera-
tion gas in contact with the catalyst to produce a regenera-
tion effluent stream comprising free sulfur and ammonia;
and
reducing the concentration of ammonia in at least a portion
lof the regeneration effluent stream to produce a stream
leaner in ammonia, said portion of the regeneration efflu-
ent stream being combusted in a noncatalytic combustion
zone to produce said stream leaner in ammonia.
4,391,791
LOW TEMPERATURE SULFUR RECOVERY
John W. Palm, and Richard Mungen, both of Tulsa, Okla.,
assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago, lU.
Continuation of Ser. No. 252,441, Apr. 9, 1981, abandoned. This
j application Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,229
I Int. a.3 COIB 17/02: F28B 1/02
U.S. a. 423—574 R 15 Qaims
1. A process for removing and recovering vaporized elemen-
tal sulfur from a gas stream, said process comprising:
(a) passing said gas stream through a first cooling zone
maintained at such conditions, including temperature, so
as to effect condensation of elemental sulfur without solid-
ification thereof;
(b) passing said gas stream from said first cooling zone
through a second cooling zone maintained at such condi-
tions, including temp)erature, so as to effect solidification
of elemental sulfur therein;
(c) interchanging conditions of said first cooling zone and
said second cooling zone and directing said gas stream to
flow through said second cooling zone first and then
through said first cooling zone;
(d) interchanging conditions of said first cooling zone and
said second cooling zone and directing said gas stream to
flow through said first cooling zone first then through said
second cooling zone, said steps (c) and (d) being carried
out after at least a significant part of the build-up of ele-
mental sulfur is melted in the zone maintained at conden-
sation conditions but before the build-up in the zone main-
tained at solidification conditions significantly restricts the
flow of said stream.
4,391,792
METHOD FOR OBTAINING PHOTOSTABLE
VALENTINITE AND VALENTINITE THUS OBTAINED
Rene Bloise, Saint Denis en Val; Marcel Lorang, Orleans;
Georges Morizot, Olivet, and Genevieve Boissonnade, Le
Pecq, all of France, assignors to Bureau de Recherches Geolo-
giques et Minieres, Paris, France
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,054
Qaims priority, application France, Aug. 12, 1980, 80 17801
Int. C\? COIB 29/00
U.S. a. 423—617 4 Claims
» x c
so % n
K — «r«
1. Process for the production of photostable valentinite by
basic hydrolysis of antimony trichloride, characterized in that
it consists in effecting the hydrolysis at a temperature between
about 80° and about 100° C. with a weight ratio of H2O to
Sb203 equal to or higher than about 10.
4,391,793
PLANT FOR THERMOCHEMICAL WATER
DISSOCTATION BY SOLAR ENERGY
Friedrich-Karl Boese, Bergisch Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Interatom, Internationale Atomreaktorbau
GmbH, Bergisch-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 119,794
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
1979, 2905206
Int. a.3 COIB 1/02
U.S. Q. 423—648 R 8 Claims
1. In a method of thermochemically producing hydrogen
from water by solar energy, the improvement therein which
comprises forming electromagnetic fields containing within an
otherwise unenclosed space within a plant a substance thermo-
chemically cleavable into two reaction products at a tempera-
ture above 1,100° C, one of said reaction products being react-
able in gasifying apparatus with steam to produce hydrogen
and the substance, concentrating the solar energy in the unen-
closed space, formed by the electromagnetic fields circulating
the reaction products from the space to the gasifying appara-
JULY 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
275
tus, and circulating the substance from the gasifying apparatus
to the space.
7. In a plant for thermochemically producing hydrogen from
water by solar energy, the improvement therein comprising
means for forming electromagnetic fields within an otherwise
unenclosed space within the plant, said space being capable of
containing a substance thermochemically cleavable into two
complete the endothermic reaction within the reaction
vessel and to raise the temperature of the gaseous reac-
reaction products at a temperature above 1,100° C, one of said
reaction products being reactable in gasifying apparatus with
steam to produce hydrogen and said substance, means for
concentrating the solar energy in said space, and means for
circulating said reaction products from said space to said gas-
ifying apparatus and for circulating said substance from said
gasifying apparatus to said space. 1
tion products to allow the recovery of the sensible heat
thereof in said circulating step.
4,391,794
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR HYDROGEN
PRODUCTION
Ludwig Silberring, Wipkingerplatz 7, Ziirich, Switzerland
PCT No. PCT/CH79/00112, § 371 Date Jul. 21, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 13, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01065, PCT Pub.
Date May 29, 1980
per Filed Aug. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 200,491
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 21, 1978,
11935/78
Int. Q.3 COIB 1/13
U.S. a. 423—650 1 Qaim
1. A process for producing hydrogen under pressure by
means of chemical reactions between hydrocarbons and water
vapor with a reduced requirement of hydrocarbons and en-
ergy, said process comprising the steps of:
applying to one end of a reaction vessel a feedstock having
hydrocarbons and water vapor therein;
conducting the feedstock through a plurality of pipes con-
taining a reaction catalyst; and
heating the feedstock to the reaction temperature and sup-
plying heat necessary for an endothermic reaction, said
heating step comprising the steps of:
circulating the products of the endothermic reaction in
heat exchange relationship with the pipes within the
reaction vessel to recover the sensible heat of the reac-
tion products; and
electrically heating the reacting gases in a portion of the
reaction vessel spaced from the one end thereof after
said circulating step and after the reaction has begun to
4,391,795
ASSAY FOR FREE THYROID HORMONE
Samuel R. Pearlman, Union, N.J., assignor to Becton Dickinson
and Company, Paramus, N.J.
Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 131,934
Int. Q.3 GOIN 33/56, 33/58, 33/60
U.S. Q. 424—1 16 Qaims
1. A process for determining free thyroid hormone in a
serum sample, comprising:
introducing a serum sample containing free thyroid hormone
and thyroid hormone bound to serum proteins into a tube
coated with a binder for free thyroid hormone, said binder
having a number of binding sites in excess of that required
to bind all of the free thyroid hormone in the serum sam-
ple, said serum sample containing the free and bound
thyroid hormone being in contact with said binding sites;
incubating said serum sample in said tube to bind free thy-
roid hormone to said binder;
removing from the tube the serum sample which is not
bound to said coated binder;
thereafter introducing into said tube labelled thyroid hor-
mone in an amount in excess of the remaining binding sites
of the coated binder to bind a portion of the labelled
thyroid hormone to the coated binder;
removing from the tube unbound labelled thyroid hormone;
and
276
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
measuring the amount of at least one of the bound and un-
bound labelled thyroid hormone for determining the
amount of free thyroid hormone present in the serum
- sample.
4,391,796
HEPATITIS B TESTING AND GROWTH IN TREE
SHREW AS ANIMAL MODEL
Peter Lorenz, Frankfurt am Main, and Anita Schwaier, Esch-
bom, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Battelle-
Institut e.V., Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 182,490, Aug. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,355,019.
This application Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,399
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 4,
1979, 2935634
Int. aJ A61K 39/29, 47/00; C12Q 1/18. 1/22. 1/70; GOIN
33/54
U.S. a. 424—9 21 Qaims
1. Process for the growth and collection of viral hepatitis
antigen type B from a tree shrew {Tupaia belangeri), which is
used as an animal model, comprising:
(a) infecting said tree shrew with viral hepatitis type B;
(b) performing at least one antibody determination at spe-
cific intervals over a period of about 60 days after infec-
tion of said tree shrew; and
(c) obtaining said viral hepatitis antigen type B from said
infected tree shrew.
said macromolecular material forming an interpenetrating
phase comprising an agglomerate made of a plurality of
clusters of macromolecules that form a network of sub-
stantially contiguous particles in the polymeric matrix,
and
wherein, when the body is placed in the environment, aque-
ous fluid will permeate by diffusion into the polymer
matrix and be absorbed by the biologically active macro-
molecular phase, said matrix having channels communi-
cating between the macromolecular particles and the
surface of said polymer body, whereby the biological!*
active macromolecules are continuously released from the >^
matrix over a prolonged period of time.
4,391,798
NON-IRRITATING DENTIFRICE
Edward A. Tavss, Kendall Park, and Edward Eigen, East Bruns-
wick, both of N.J., assignors to Colgate-Palmolive Company,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 357,918
Int. C1.5 A61K 9/16. 9/18. 7/22
U.S. a. 424—52 10 Claims
1. A substantially non-irritating dentifrice composition of
improved flavor comprising an anionic surfactant, and a water
soluble positively charged partially hydrolyzed protein having
an isoionic point above 7, and a Bloom gel value of zero,
selected from the group consisting of a protein hydrolysate
fraction containing a high concentration of basic amino acids,
and a quaternary derivative of the partially hydrolyzed pro-
tein, in a dental vehicle.
4J91,797
SYSTEMS FOR THE CONTROLLED RELEASE OF
MACROMOLECULES
Moses J. Folkman, Brookline, and Robert S. Langer, Jr., All-
ston, both of Mass., assignors to The Children's Hospital
Medical Center, Boston, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 42,788, May 29, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 756,892, Jan. 5, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,164,560. This application Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No.
291,769
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 14,
I 1996, has been disclaimed.
I Int. a.3 A61K 9/26. 31/74. 37/26
U.S. a. 424—19 20 Claims
1. A therapeutic system for the continuous and controlled
administration of macromolecules, said system being in the
form of a body which is sized and shaped for placement in the
environment of use, comprising a two-phase composition of:
(a) a first phase comprising a biocompatible plastically de-
formable polymeric matrix having an aqueous fluid sorp-
tivity not greater than 50% by weight, the polymer being
insoluble in the environment of use, substantially imper-
meable to the macromolecule, and containing in admix-
ture therewith;
(b) a second phase comprising from about 3 to 90 parts by
weight of an agglomerated, hydrophilic, aqueous fluid-
swellable, aqueous fluid dispersible, biologically active
macromolecular material of molecular weight of at least
1000;
4 391 799
PROTECTIVE GEL COMPOSITION FOR TREATING
WHITE PHOSPHORUS BURN WOUNDS
Arthur D. Mason, Jr.; Avery A. Johnson, Jr., both of San Anto-
nio, Tex., and Charles R. Ritchey, Stillwater, Okla., assignors
to The United States of America as represented by the Secre-
tary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,870, Feb. 15, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,575
Int. CI.' A61K 33/38
U.S. a. 424—132 * Claims
1. A method for treating white phosphorus bum wounds
which comprises applying over the wound surface a coating of
an aqueous gel composition comprising 0.01 to 1% by weight
of a water-soluble silver or copper salt selected from the group
consisting of silver nitrate, silver acetate, silver lactate mono-
hydrate and copper sulfate pentahydrate which will dissolve in
water at a minimum concentration of 0.1% by weight of the
water in the gel and as a matrix therefor, a water-soluble hy-
drogel consisting essentially of about 0.5 to 3% by weight
alkali metal alginate, about 8 to 12% by weight glycerin and
about 82 to 90% by weight water wherein the hydrogel has a
pH in the range of 6.8 to 7.2 and which upon drying forms a
flexible, stretchable, transparent, water-soluble protective film,
non-toxic and adherent to a white phosphorus bum wound
surface to which gel composition is applied, and which allows
for encapsulation and removal of vivid darkened white phos-
phorus particles.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
rrt
" 4,391,800
IMMUNOLOGICALLY ACTIVE PEPTIDYL
DISACCHARIDES AND METHODS OF PREPARATION
Philippe L. Durette, New Providence, and Tsung-Ying Shen,
Westfield, both of N.J., assignors to Merck & Co., Inc., Rah-
way, N.J.
1 1 Filed Apr. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 33,597
1 1 Int. a.3 A61K 37/00; C07C 103/52
U.S. a. 424—177 13 Qaims
1. A 2-amino-2-deoxy-/3-D-glucopyranosyl-(l— <4)-2-amino-
2-deoxy-D-elucose of the general structural formula:
OR5
R4O
R'aO
■OR'5
NHCOR2
or aromatic acyl (2-2 1 C) or substituted acyl (2-2 IC)
wherein the substituent is halogen, alkyl (1-3C), alkoxy
(1-3C), trifluoromethyl, hydroxy, alkanoyloxy (1-3C), —
provided when Rg is loweralkyl, the stereo chemistry at
asymmetric center I can be either D or L; and when Rio
is not H, the stereochemistry at asymmetric center II is L;
the stereochemistry at asymmetric center III is D;
provided further when Ri, R5, R'3, R4, and R'sare each H
and each R2 is CH3, R3 is not H3CCHCOR13 wherein
Rl3 is a dipeptide.
10. A composition having immunostimulatory properties
comprising a compound of claim 1 in an amount effective to
produce an immunostimulatory efl'ect and a pharmaceutically
acceptable carrier.
wherein '
Rl is hydrogen, alkyl (1-7C), substituted alkyl (1-7C)
wherein the substituent is hydroxy, mercapto, alkoxy of
1-3 carbons, alkyl mercapto of 1-3 carbons, hydroxy or
mercapto esterified by an acid of 1-4 carbon atoms, F, CI,
Br, carboxyl, or carboxyl functionally modified by esteri-
fication with an alcohol of 1-3 carbons or by amidation,
phenyl, substituted phenyl wherein the substituent is an
alkyl group of 1-3 carbons, hydroxy, mercapto, hydroxy
or mercapto etherified by an alkyl group of 1-3 carbons,
hydroxy or mercapto esterified by an acid of 1-4 carbons,
alkyldioxy (1-4C), cycloalkyldioxy (5-7C), amino or
trifluoromethyl, benzyl, or substituted benzyl wherein the
substituent is an alkyl group of 1-3 carbons, hydroxy,
mercapto, hydroxy or mercapto etherified by an alkyl
group of 1-3 carbon atoms, hydroxy or mercapto esteri-
fied by an acid of 1-4 carbons, alkyldioxy (1-4C), cycloal-
kyldioxy (5-7C), amino or trifluoromethyl;
R2 is alkyl (1-7C), substituted alkyl (1-7C) wherein the
substituent is hydroxy, mercapto, alkoxy of 1-3 carbons,
alkylmercapto of 1-3 carbons, hydroxy or mercapto ester-
ified by an acid of 1-4 carbon atoms, F, CI, Br, carboxyl,
or carboxyl functionally modified by esterification with an
alcohol of 1-3 carbons or by amidation, phenyl, or substi-
tuted phenyl wherein the substituent is an alkyl group of
1-3 carbons, hydroxy, mercapto, hydroxy or mercapto
etherified by an alkyl group of 1-3 carbon atoms, hydroxy
or mercapto esterified by an acid of 1-4 carbons, alkyl-
dioxy (1-4C), cycloalkyldioxy (5-7C), amino or trifluoro-
methyl and each R2 may be the same group or a different
group;
R3 and R'3 are H or
O R, R,o O R„
Rg— CH— C— N— CH~C— NH— CH— (CH2)2— R12
i
II
III
4,391,801
PLASMA PROTEIN FRACTION SUBSTANTIALLY FREE
OF ACETATE IONS
Paul K. Ng, Hercules, and Michael A. Foumel, Castro Valley,
both of Calif., assignors to Cutter Laboratories, Inc., Berke-
ley, Calif.
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,201
Int. a.' A61K 37/02. 37/04
U.S. a. 424—177 17 Qaims
1. A stable human plasma protein fraction precipitated from
Supematant IV- 1 of the Cohn fractionation scheme as de-
scribed in U.S. Pat. No. 2,958,628 wherein the plasma protein
fraction consists essentially of at least eighty three percent
albumin and no more than seventeen percent alpha and beta
globulin and wherein the acetate ion concentration is about
that ordinarily found in human blood plasma.
4,391,802
METHOD OF TREATING LEUKEMIA OR LEUKEMOID
DISEASES
Tatsuo Suda, Tachikawa; Yoshihei Hirasawa; Sachio Takahashi,
both of Niigata; Etsuko Abe; Kunio Konno, both of Tokyo,
and Tadao Aoki, Niigata, all of Japan, assignors to Chugai
Seiyaku Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,385
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1981, 56-35218
Int. Q.3 AOIN 45/00: A61K 31/59
U.S. Q. 424—236 8 Qaims
50!
o't-
00
2^
wherein
Rg is H or lower alkyl (1-lOC), and provided at least one of
R3 and R'3 is ndt H;
R9 is H, or R9-R10 together is — CH2CH2CH2— ;
Rio is H, alkyl (1-7C) hydroxymethyl, mercaptomethyl,
benzyl, or substituted benzyl wherein the substituent is an
alkyl group of 1-3 carbon atoms, hydroxy, mercapto,
hydroxy or mercapto etherified by an alkyl group of 1-3
carbons, hydroxy or mercapto esterified by an acid of 1-4
' carbons, alkyldioxy (1-4C), cycloalkyldioxy (5-7C),
amino or trifluoromethyl; ~
Rll and R12 each are independently carboxyl, esterified
carboxyl (1-7C), amidated carboxyl, or mono- or di-alkyl
(I-7C) amidated carboxyl;
R4, Rs and R's are the same or different and are H, aliphatic
D U
m.
IBI
25'
0-
5o|
251
i
0'
n
to"
n
_ .r-L^
a
(01
lour?
FRACTION
1. A method for the treatment of leukemia or leukemoid
diseases, comprising administering to a patient having such a
disease an effective amount of a vitamin D derivative with a
hydroxyl group at the la-position.
2. A method according to claim 1 wherein said derivative is
administered in a soft capsule.
1032O,q.— 10
278
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,991,803
ADRENOSTERIOD COMPOSITION AND METHOD FOR
THE TREATMENT OF SHOCK BY INFUSIONAL
THERAPY
Fernando F. Fussi, Fribourg, Switzerland, assignor to Hepar
Industries, Franklin, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 365,867, Apr. 5, 1982,
abandoned. Thi? application May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,749
Int. a? A61K 31/56
VS. CI. 424—239 H Claims
1. A pharmaceutical composition consisting essentially, in
percent by weight, of the folloWing adrenosteroids:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
il4.
15.
16.
17.
18.
1 1-Dehydrocorticost«6ne
Corticosterone ^^
1 l-Deoxy-17-h^oxycorticosterone
Cortisone ,
Hydrocortisone
4-Pregnene-5 and/or 20,21 -did or
trioi-3,ll-dione
4-Pregnene-5,17a,20;3,21-triol or
tetrol-3,ll-dione
4-Pregnene-5, 1 1/3, 1 7a,20/3,2 1 -tetrol-3-one
3a or ^,21-DJhydroxy-5a or ;3-pregnane-
n,20-dione
3a or )3,1 1/3,2 l-Trihydroxy-5a or
^-pregnan-20-one
3a or /3,17,21-Trihydroxy-5a or
/J-pregnan-20-one
3a or i3,17,21-Trihydroxy-5a or
^-pregnane- 1 1 ,20-dione
3a or /3,17,21-Tetrahydroxy-20-oxo-5a or
/3-pregnane
Allopregnane-3/3, 1 7a,20P-2 1 -tetrol
Allopregnane-3/3, 11/3,1 7a,20/3,2 1 -pentol
Deoxycorticosterone
1 8-Hydroxy-deoxycorticosterone
Aldosterone
10.0
±
1.5
18.5
±
2.5
3.0
±
0.5
14.0
±_
2.0
23.0
±
3.5
2.0
±
0.5
2.0
+
0.5
3.0
±
0.5
^5
±
0.5
3.0
±
0.5
2.5
±_
0.5
2.4
±_
0.5
2.5
±
0.5
2.0
±
0.5
2.0
±
0.5
3.0
+
0.5
1.5
±_
0.3
3.0
-¥^
0.5
rated alkyl group, a lower alkoxy-Iower alkyl group, a
lower alkylthio-lower alkyl group, a phenoxy-lower alkyl
group, a phenylthio-lower alkyl group, a mono- or di-
lower alkylamino-lower alkyl group, a lower alkyl group
substituted with a group — N(CH2)« where n is an integer
of 2 to 6, a lower alkylcarbonyl group, phenylcarbonyl
group, a cycloalkyl group, a cycloalkylalkyl group, a
halogenated lower alkyl group, a cyano-lower alkyl
group, a lower alkoxycarbonyl-lower alkyl group, a lower
alkylthiocarbonyl-lower alkyl group, an arylalkyl group,
a lower alkylcarbonyl-lower alkyl group, a phenylcarbo-
nyl-lower alkyl group, naphthyl group, furfuryl group or
phenyl group; the latter phenyl group being unsubstituted
or substituted with a substitutent which is selected from a
halogen atom, nitro group, cyano group and a lower alkyl
group;
X is an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom; and
Y is a straight or branched saturated alkylene group or
unsaturated alkylene group, the saturated alkylene group
being unsubstituted or substituted with a halogen group, a
lower alkoxyl group, cyano group, phenyl group, a halo-
gen-substituted phenyl group, a nitro-substituted phenyl
group, a lower alkyl-substituted phenyl group and/or
trifluoromethyl-substituted phenyl group, and a salt of
said imidazole derivative.
8. A fungicidal composition comprising as the active ingredi-
ent a fungicidally effective amount of an imidazole derivative
as defined in claim 1, or a salt thereof, in association with an
acceptable carrier for the active ingredient.
together with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent.
4,391,804
IMIDAZOLE DERIVATIVES AND FUNGIODAL
COMPOSITION CONTAINING THE SAME
Hiroshi Ohyama, Chigasaki; Ken Merita, Hiratsuka; Takuo
Wada, Hatano, and Masahiko Miyahara, Atsugi, all of Japan,
assignors to Hokko Chemical Industry Company, Ltd., Japan
Filed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,533
Int. a.3 AOIN 55/02, 43/50; C07D 233/61
IJJS. a. 424—245 9 Qaims
1. An imidazole derivative of the general formula
Ri— N=C
\
X— R2
4,391,805
l-(l,3-DIOXOLAN-2-YLMETHYL)-AZOLES, THEIR
SALTS AND THEIR USE
Ernst Blume, Bad Soden am Taunus; Wolfgang Schaper, Frank-
furt am Main; Wolfgang Raether, Dreieich, and Walter Ditt-
mar, Hofheim am Taunus, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,184
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 16,
1980, 3039087
Int. a.3 A61K 31/415; C07D 405/06
U.S. a. 424—246 13 Claims
1. A l-(l,3-dioxolan-2-ylmethyl)-azole of the formula (1)
D— CH2— O
ra
Rn
CH-(CH2)m-Z
I
Ri
a)
and its stereoisomers and its salts with a physiologically ac-
ceptable acid, in which D denotes a l-(l,3-dioxolan-2-ylme-
thyl)-azole radical of the following structure
wherein
Ri is naphthyl g^roup, an arylalkyl group, a cycloalkyl group,
a cycloalkylalkyl group, an alkyl group, a lower alkenyl
group, a lower alkoxy-lower alkyl group, a phenylthio-
lower alkyl group or phenyl group; the phenyl group
being unsubstituteid or substituted with 1 to S substituents
which is or are the same or different from each other and
selected from a halogen atom, nitro group, cyano group, a
lower alkyl group, a lower alkenyl group, a halogenated
lower alkyl group, a lower alkoxyl group, a lower al-
kenyloxy group, a lower alkylthio group, a lower alkylsul-
finyl group, a lower alkylsulfonyl group, a lower alkylcar-
bonyl group, phenyl group, phenoxy group, a halogen-
substituted phenoxy group, phenylthio group, a lower
alkyl-substituted phenylthio group and a nitro-substituted
phenylthio group; R2 is a saturated alkyl group, an unsatu-
r".
A. >
N
1
CH2
X
\
/
c
^y
"•^^
0
0
l_
•1
(D)
in which A denotes nitrogen or methine and X denotes naph-
thyl, thienyl, halogenothienyl or a phenyl group optionally
carrying 1, 2 or 3 substituents, the substituents being identical
or different and denoting halogen, trifluoromethyl, C1-C4
alkyl or C1-C4 alkoxy, and, in formula (I) further, the R„'s,
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
279
independently of one another, denote halogen, trifluoro-
methyl, Ci-Cg alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, C3-C5 alkenyl, C1-C4
alkoxycarbonyl, carboxyl, di-(Ci-C4)alkylaminomethyl or
nitro, n is 0, 1, 2 or 3, or, in the event that n is 2, Rn denotes a
C4H4 radical which, together with the phenyl ring, forms a
naphthyl ring, or, in the event that n is 1, Rn represents a
phenoxy group optionally carrying 1 or 2 substituents, the
substituents being identical or different and denoting halogen,
trifluoromethyl, C1-C4 alkyl, or C1-C4 alkoxy, Ri denotes
hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl or a phenyl group optionally carrying
1 or 2 substituents, the substituents being identical or different
and denoting halogen, trifluoromethyl, nitro, C1-C4 alkyl or
C1-C4 alkoxy, m denotes 0, 1 or 2, and Z denotes either
(a) an amino radical of the formula Z(a)
— N
/
I
\
R2
Z(a)
oxygen or an NH group, r represents 0 or 1 and Rj repre-
sents hydrogen, Ci-C4-alkyl, monohalogenomethyl,
dihalogenomethyl, trihalogenomethyl or a phenyl group
optionally carrying 1 or 2 substituents, the substituents
being identical or different and each denoting halogen,
trifluoromethyl, C1-C4 alkyl, or C1-C4 alkoxy, subject to
the proviso that, in the event that Y represents a sulfur
atom, G denotes an NH group and r denotes the number
1, that, in the event that G represents an oxygen atom and
r represents the number 1, R5 does not denote hydrogen,
and that, in the event that R5 represents monohalogeno-
methyl, dihalogenomethyl or trihalogenomethyl, r de-
notes 0 and Y denotes oxygen.
13. Method of treating patients suffering from mycoses,
protozoa. Gram-positive or Gram-negative bacteria by admin-
istering an effective amount of a compound of formula 1 as
claimed in claim 1.
R3
in which R2 and R3 are identical or different and each
denotes hydrogen, Ci-Cg alkyl, C3-C5 alkenyl, Cs-Cg
cycloalkyl or a phenyl or benzyl group optionally carry-
^ ing 1, 2 or 3 substituents, the substituents being identical or
different and each denoting halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4
alkoxy or trifluoromethyl, or one of the two radicals R2 or
R3 denotes C1-C5 alkanoyl or C1-C4 alkoxycarbonyl, or
(b) a radical of the formula Z(b)
— h
Z(b)
N— R4
in which R4 denotes hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C3-C5 alke-
nyl, hydroxy-(C2-C3)-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy-(C2-C3)-alkyl,
C1-C5 alkanoyl, C2-C5 alkanoylmethyl, C1-C4 alkylsulfo-
nyl, C1-C4 alkyloxycarbonyl, C1-C4 alkyloxycarbonyl-
methyl, mono-(Ci-C4)-alkylaminocarbonylmethyl, di-
(Ci-C4)-alkylaminocarbonylmethyl, aminocarbonylmeth-
yl-, mono-(Ci-C4)alkylaminocarbonyl, di-(Ci-C4)-
alkylaminocarbonyl, Ci-C4-alkylaminothiocarbonyl,
Ci-C4-alkylthiothiocarbonyl, aminocarbonyl, C3-C5-
alkenylaminocarbonyl, or C3-C5-alkenylaminothiocarbo-
nyl, or R4 denotes a phenyl, phenylmethyl, phenylamino-
carbonyl or benzoyl group, each of the phenyl groups
optionally earring 1 or 2 substituents which are identical
or different and denote halogen, trifluoromethyl, C1-C4-
alkyl, or Ci-C4-alkoxy, or
(c) a l-H-imidazol-l-yl, lH-l,2,4-triazol-l-yl, pyrazol-1-yl-,
pyrrolidin-1-yl-, piperidin-1-yl-, morpholin-4-yl, thiomor-
pholin-4-yl, 2,6-dimethylmorpholin-4-yl, 2,6-dimethylthi-
omorpholin-4-yl, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinolin-l-yl or
l,2,3,4-tetrahydroi8oquinolin-2-yl radical, or
(d) an isocyano group of the formula Z(d)
4,391,806
SUBSTITUTED
TETRAHYDROPYRIDAZINO-(l,6-A)BENZIMIDAZOLES
AND USE AS BRONCHODILATORS
Catherine A. Alexander, Indianapolis; Robert J. Cregge, Zions-
ville, and Norton P. Peet, Indianapolis, all of Ind., assignors to
The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,300
Int. C1.3 A61K 31/535. 31/50; C07D 487/04
U.S. a. 424—248.4 5 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
RR'N
X^ ^^
N
.'"^^ ^
wherein — NRR' is (lower alkyl)amino, di(lower alkyl)amino,
1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, methyl- 1-piperidinyl, hexahy-
droazepin-1-yl, 4-methyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-methylhexahydro-
1,4-diazepin-l-yl and 4-morpholinyl; and the pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts of said compound.
5. A method of producing bronchodilation which comprises
administering to a mammal in need thereof an effective amount
of a compound of the formula
N
RR
.O/A
— N=C
or
(e) an isothiocyano group of the formula Z(e)
wherein —NRR' is (lower alkyl)amino, di(lower alkyl)amino,
Z(dr 1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, methyl- 1-piperidinyl, hexahy-
droazepin-1-yl, 4-methyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-methylhexahydro-
1,4-diazepin-l-yl and 4-morpholinyl; and the pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts of said compound.
Z(e)
or
(f) a radical of the general formula Z(0
— NH— C— (G)^— Rj
Z(0
in which Y represents oxygen or sulfur, G represents
4,391,807
6-SUBSTITUTED
TETRAHYDROIMIDAZO[2,l-a]PHTHALAZINES AND
USE AS BRONCHODILATORS
Catherine A. Alexander, Indianapolis; Robert J. Cregge, Zions-
ville, and Norton P. Peet, Indianapolis, all of Ind., assignors to
The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
FUed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,301
Int. a.^ A61K 31/535. 31/50; C07D 487/04
U.S. a. 424—248.4 5 CUdms
1. A compound of the formula:
280
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
RR'N
wherein — NRR' is (lower alkyl)amino, diOower alkyl)-amino,
1-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, methyl- 1-piperidinyl, hexahy-
droazepin-1-yl, 4-methyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-methylhexahydro-
1,4-diazepin-l-yl and 4-morpholinyl; and the pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts of said comf>ound.
5. A method of producing bronchodilation which comprises
administering to a mammal in need thereof an effective amount
of a compound of the formula
4^91,809
METHODS FOR TREATING PSORIASIS
Edward F. Elslager, Ann Arbor, Mich., assignor to Warner-
Lambert Company, Ann Arbor, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 84,944, Oct. 15, 1979, abandoned. This
application Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,596
Int. a.3 A61K 31/505
U.S. a. 424—251 5 Qaims
1. A method for treating psoriasis in mammals which com-
prises administering an antipsoriatic-effective amount of 2,4-
diamino-5-methyl-6-[(3,4,5-trimethoxyanilino)methyI]quinazo-
line, 2,4-diamino-5-chloro-6-[(3,4-dichloroanilino)methyl]-
quinazoline or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof, to a
mammal in need of said treatment.
RR'N
wherein —NRR' is (lower alkyl)amino, di(lower alkyl)-amino,
l-pyrrolidinyl, 1-piperidinyl, methyl- 1-piperidinyl, hexahy-
droazepin-l-yl, 4-methyl-l-piperazinyl, 4-methylhexahydro-
1,4-diazepin-l-yl and 4-morpholinyl; and the pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts of said compound.
4 391 808
5(l-PIPERAZINYL(IMIDAZO(2,l-bl[l,3,5]BENZO-
THIADIAZEPINES
Isidoros Vlattas, Summit, N.J., assignor to Ciba-Geigy Corpora-
tion, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 158,671, Jun. 12, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 259,261
Int. a.3 A61K 31/55; C07D 513/04
UJS. a. 424—250 11 Qaims
1. A 5-dia2acycloalkyl-imidazo[2,l-b][l,3,5]b€nzothidiaze-
pine compound of the formula
N
Ph
\
N=C
N U— R2
N N— R3
\ /
C„H2n
4,391,810
2-METHYL-4-N,N-DIMETHYLCARBAMOYLOXY-6-
AMINO-PYRIMIDINES AND SALTS THEREOF,
PROCESSES FOR PRODUQNG THEM, AND THEIR USE
FOR COMBATING PESTS
Karl Hoegerle; Laurenz Gsell, both of Basel, and Rudolf Wehrli,
Rheinfelden, all of Switzerland, assignors to Oba-Geigy Cor-
poration, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,936
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 6, 1981, 31/81;
Oct. 14, 1981, 6571/81
Int. a.5 C07D 239/47; AOIN 9/22
U.S. a. 424—251 9 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
N
I
C
-^ \
N CH O CH3
I II II /
CHj— C C— O— C— N
% / \
N CH3
wherein each of Ri and R2, when taken independently, is
hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms, cycloalkyl of 3 to 6
carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 5 carbon atoms, or alkynyl of 2
to 5 carbon atoms, or R\ and R2 taken together are alkylene of
2 to 5 carbon atoms.
4 391 811
2-AMINO-6-(PYRIDINYL)-3H-IMIDAZOI4,5.b]PYRI.
DINES AND THEIR CARDIOTONIC USE
George Y. Lesher, Chester J. Opalka, Jr., both of Schodack, and
Donald F. Page, East Greenbush, all of N.Y., assignors to
Sterling Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,777
Int. a.3 C07D 487/04; A61K 31/44
U.S. a. 424—263 10 Qaims
1. A 2-(NB)-3-R-6-PY-5-Q-3H-imidazo[4,5-b]pyridine hav-
ing the formula
wherein one of Ri and R2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or alkanoyl,
halogeno, cyano, carboxy, lower carbalkoxy, carboamoyl,
sulfamoyl, mono- or di-lower alkyl-(carbamoyl or sulfamoyl),
and the other of Ri and R2 is hydrogen, lower alkyl or
halogeno; Ph is 1,2-phenylene, unsubstituted or substituted by
on member selected from lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower
alkylthio, halogeno, trifluoromethyl, sulfamoyl, mono- or
di-lower alkyl-sulfamoyl, each of CmH2m and CnH2n is lower
alkylene separating both nitrogen atoms by 2 carbon atoms;
and R3 is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkanoyl, lower alkoxy-
carbonyl, or lower hydroxyalkyl wherein the hydroxy group is
separated from the nitrogen atom by at least 2 carbon atoms;
the S-oxides; the N-oxides; or a pharmaceutically acceptable
salt thereof
Q N N
N
N
I
R
K
NB
where Q is hydrogen or lower-alkyl, R is lower-alkyl, NB is
amino or dimethylamino, and PY is 4- or 3-pyridinyl or 4- or
3-pyridinyl having one or two lower-alkyl substituents, or
acid-addition salt thereof.
8. The method for increasing cardiac contractility in a pa-
tient requiring such treatment which comprises administering
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
281
orally or' parenterally in a solid or liquid dosage form to such
patient a cardiotonically effective amount of 2-(NB)-3-R-6-PY-
5-Q-3H-imidazo[4,5-b]pyridine or pharmaceutically acceptable
acid-addition salt thereof, where Q is hydrogen or lower-alkyl,
R is lower-alkyl, NB is amino or dimethylamino, and PY is 4-
or 3-pyridinyl or 4- or 3-pyridinyl having one or two lower-
alkyl substituents.
4,391,814
DERIVATIVES OF ANTIPHLOGISTICALLY EFFECTIVE
CARBOXYLIC ACIDS, THEIR PREPARATION AND
MEDIONAL USE
Helmut Vorbriiggen, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Sobering Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Bergkamen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 334,023
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 23,
1980, 3049405
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/76. 43/80. 43/54. 43/50 \
U.S. Q. 424—272 8 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
4,391,812
2-(SUBSTITUTEDPIPERIDYLMETH YD PROPANE
NITRILES AND COMPOSITIONS THEREOF
Richard A. Dybas, Piscataway; Nathaniel Grier, Englewood, and
Bruce E. Witzel, Westfield, all of N.J., assignors to Merck &
Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 228,520, Jan. 26, 1981, Pat. No. 4,342,873,
which is a division of Ser. No. 8,985, Feb. 5, 1979, Pat. No.
4,247,700, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 795,693,
May 11, 1977, abandoned. This application Mar. 24, 1982, Ser.
No. 361,233
I Int. a.3 C07D 211/40
U.S. CI. 424—267 5 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
Rl— C
^
N-(CH2)„
X — CH2
wherein
n is 1;
X is oxygen; and
Rl is of the formula:
.(R"X);„
(R)«
where Z is
R'— CH2— CH— C= N;
R" is hydrogen, Ci-Cig alkyl, benzyl, or phenethyl; R is in the
2-, 3-, or 4-positions and is hydroxy or hydroxyalkyl; R' is
amino, loweralkylamino, or diloweralkylamino; n is an integer
from 1 to 4; m is the integer 0 or at least 1; and X is a suitably
charged anion.
5. A composition containing an antiinflammatory amount of
a compound according to claim 1 along with a suitable phar-
maceutical carrier.
(a)
wherein
R2 is (i) alkanoyl or alkanoyloxy each of 2-6 carbon atoms;
(ii) phenoxy, anilino or 1-naphthylamino; or (iii) phenoxy,
anilino or 1-naphthylamino, each of which is mono- or
di-substituted by halogen, trifluoromethyl, or alkyl of 1-4
carbon atoms;
U is — CH= and
V is a carbon-to-carbon bond or methylene;
or
4,391,813
VAPOR PHASE FUNGiaDAL METHOD
Michael Szkolnik, Geneva, N.Y., assignor to Cornell Research
Foundation, Inc., Ithaca, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 257,039 !
Int. Q.3 AOIN 43/48
U.S. Q. 424—269 7 Qaims
1. A method of protecting plants from fungal attack or
reducing the severity of fungal attach which comprises posi-
tioning a substrate coated or impregnated with l-[[2-(2,4-
dichlorophenyI)-4-ethyl- 1 ,3-dioxolan-2-yl]methyl]- 1 H- 1 ,2,4-
triazole in an amount and in a manner such that va]X)rs of said
triazole cause said protection from or reduction of fungal
activity on the plants.
R|3^
r
R|2
(b)
R|4 N"
I
Rii
wherein
Rl 1 is alkyl of up to 6 carbon atoms, phenyl or phenyl mono-
or di-substituted by chlorine or fluorine;
one of R12, Ri3, and Ru is methylenyl; one or two of R12,
Rl3, and R14 is phenyl or phenyl mono- or di-substituted
by chlorine or fluorine; or one of R12, R13, and Ru is
hydrogen.
282
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,815
CYANOBENZANO[B]PYRANS
John M. Evans, Royden, England, assignor to Beecham Group
Limited, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 79,560, Sep. 27, 1979,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 117,261, Jan. 31, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 970,199, Dec. 18, 1978, Pat. No.
4,251,537, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 776,976, Mar. 14,
1977, abandoned. This appUcation Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No.
198,280
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 2, 1976,
13536/76; Apr. 10, 1976, 33178/76; Oct. 4, 1978, 39303/78; Oct.
20, 1978, 41306/78; Jan. 10, 1979, 7900901
Int. a.3 A61K 31/395: C07D 405/04
U.S. a. 424—274 14 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting of ben-
zo[b]pyran of the formula:
a therapeutically acceptable salt thereof with an organic
or inorganic base.
15. A pharmaceutical composition for preventing or reliev-
ing diabetic complications in a diabetic mammal which com-
prises a compound of claim 1, or a therapeutically acceptable
salt thereof with an organic or inorganic base, and a pharma-
ceutically acceptable carrier.
N=C
4,391,816
N-(NAPHTHALENYLTHIOXOMETHYL)AMINOACID
DERIVATIVES
Kazimir Sestanj, St. Laurent; Nedumparambil A. Abraham,
Dollard des Ormeaux; Francesco Bellini, Mount Royal, and
Adi Treasurywala, Point Qaire, all of Canada, assignors to
Ayerst, McKenna & Harrison Inc., Montreal, Canada
Filed Not. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,304
Claims priority, application Canada, Nov. 2, 1981, 372054
Int. C\? C07C 153/063; A61K 31/65. 31/40
U.S. a. 424—274 19 Claims
1. A compound of formula I
4,391,817
PYRROLO-DIAZEPINE DERIVATIVES AND THEIR
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
Luigi Mariani, and Giorgio Tarda, both of Milan, Italy, assign-
ors to Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,271
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jun. 8, 1981, 22177 A/81
Int. a.3 A61K 31/55: C07D 487/04
U.S. a. 424— 274 , 6 Qaims
1. A pyrrolo[3,4-e][l,4]diazepin-2(lH)-one of the formula
I
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof
wherein R is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, alkanoyl
of up to 8 carbon atoms or benzoyl,
NR1R2 is pyrrolidine, and the depicted cyano group is the
6-position.
13. A method of treating hypertension in a human which
comprises administering thereto an effective amount of a com-
pound according to claim 1.
CH2
wherein R represents methyl, ethyl, propyl, 1-methylethyl,
butyl, 1-methylpropyl, 2-methylpropyl, or 1,1-dimethylethyl,
Ri designates a chlorine or bromine atom or a nitro group, R2
represents hydrogen, methyl, ethyl, propyl, 1-methylethyl,
butyl, l-methylpropyl, 2-methylpropyl, or 1,1-dimethylethyl,
and R3 is hydrogen, chloro, bromo, fluoro, trifluoromethyl or
methoxy.
5. An anticonvulsant and antianxiety pharmaceutical prepa-
ration containing an effective amount of a compound of claim
1 as the active ingredient, along with a suitable pharmaceutical
carrier.
S=C— N(Rl)— CH(R2)— (CH2)„— COOH
wherein
R' is lower alkyl, carboxymethyl, phenyl or phenyl substi-
tuted with a substituent selected from halo, lower alkyl or
lowe alkoxy;
R2 is hydrogen or lower alkyl;
n is the integer O, 1 or 2; or
n is the integer O and R' and R^ form a (CH2)3 bridge to
complete a pyrrolidine ring with the nitrogen and carbon
to which R' and R^ are joined; and
R3 is a halo substituent at position 3, 5, 6 or 7 of the naphtha-
lene ring, or
R^ is two or three substituents on the naphthalene ring se-
lected from the group consisting of 4-lower alkoxy-5-[di(-
lower alkyl)aminosulfonyl] and 3-halo-4-lower alkoxy-5-
[(diOower alkyl)aminosulfonyl];
.with the proviso that when R' is lower alkyl, then R^ is a
halo substituent at position 3, 6 or 7 of the naphthalene
ring or R3 is two or three substituents as defmed herein, or
(I) 4,391,818 I
4-(SUBSTn'UTED
ALKYL)-N-(l,3-DITHIOLAN-2-YLIDENE(ANILINE
Boyd L. Harrison, Cincinnati, and Niall S. Doherty, West Ches-
ter, both of Ohio, assignors to Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals
Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,540
Int. a.3 A61K 31/385: C07D 339/06
U.S. CI. 424—277 10 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
0-"^
R
I
CH-
■(CH2)„-OR'
wherein R is hydrogen or lower alkyl of 1-6 C; R' is hydrogen,
lower alkyl of 1-6 C, or lower alkanoyl of 2-6 C; and n is 0-10;
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof.
9. A method of treating inflammation which comprises
administering to a patient in need thereof an effective amount
of a compound of the formula
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
283
c:>..^L
characterised in that R' is ethoxy or chloro, and R^ is hydro-
gen;
R3is
(CH2)„-OR'
wherein R is hydrogen or lower alkyl of 1-6 C; R' is hydrogen,
lower alkyl of 1-6 C or lower alkanoyl of 2-6 C; and n is 0-10;
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof.
431,819
2,9-DIOXA TRICYCLO [4,3,1,03.'] DECANE COMPOUNDS
AND PROCESS OF MAKING SAME
Peter W. Thies, and Samuel David, both of Hanover, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Kali-Chemie Pharma GmbH, Hano-
ver, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,104
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 14,
1980, 3026579
Int. CV A61K 31/335: C07D 405/06
U.S. Q. 424—278 11 Qaims
1. A 3/3-hydroxy methyl-4a-hydroxy-3/3-alkoxy-2,9-dioxa
tricyclo[4,3,l,0^'^]decane of the formula
and the compounds are in the form of the ( — )( — ) diastere-
oisomers.
4. Insecticidal compositions, characterised in that they com-
prise an insecticidally effective amount of one or more of the
compounds stated in claim 1. incorporated in a suitable ineri
liquid or solid carrier.
9. A method of combatting insect pests, characterised in that
an insecticidally effective amount of a compound or composi-
tion as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 3 or 4 to 8, is applied
to the insects and/or their locus.
H2— OH
OH
in which
Ri indicates an alkoxy group and
R2 indicates 10-methylene or 10/3-methyl.
, 10. A composition of matter for inducing sleep in mammals,
comprising a sleep-inducing amount of a 3/J-hydroxy methyl-
4a-hydroxy-8/3-alkoxy-2,9-dioxa tricyclo[4,3,l,0^''']decane as
defmed in claim 1, and a pharmacologically inert diluent mate-
rial.
11. A method of inducing sleep in mammals, comprising the
step of administering to a mammal a sleep-in-ducing amount of
a compound as defined in claim 1.
4,391,821
7-SUBSTITUTED BENZOPYRANES AND PROCESS FOR
THE PREPARATION THEREOF
Dezso Korbonits; Mihaly Nogradi; Borbala Vermes nee Szluha;
Janos Strelisky; Andras Wolfner; Gergely Heja; Gabor
Kovacz, all of Budapest; Jozsef Szegi, Debaeccen, and Sandor
Virag, Budapest, all of Hungary, assignors to Chinoin Gyo-
gyszer es Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara R.T., Budapest, Hun-
gary
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,573
Qaims priority, application Hungary, Dec. 16, 1980, 3001
Int. Q.' A61K 31/35; C07D 311/22. 311/58
U.S. Q. 424—283 29 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula (I)
' ' 4,391,820
INSECTIODAL ESTER ENANTIOMERS
George Holan, Brighton, and Reimund Walser, Box Hill, both of
Australia, assignors to Commonwealth Scientific and Indus-
trial Research Organization, Australia
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,735
Qaims priority, application Australia, Jun. 13, 1980,
PE)4038/80
Int. Q.^ AOIN 43/16; C07C 69/76; AOIN 37/10
U.S. Q. 424—282 9 Qaims
1. Compounds of the formula la
R2
J y COOR^ F
R.-Zq)— C C-F
\ / H— C C— F
I I
H F
la
O— CH2— CH— (CH2)„— N
OH R2
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition or quaternary
Ci-C4-alkyl ammonium halide, sulfate or phosphate salt
thereof, wherein
Ri and R2areeach hydrogen, Ci to Ce alkyl, hydroxy-alkyl,
alkenyl, cycloalkyl, phenyl-alkyl or dimethoxy-phenyl-
alkyl;
R3 is hydrogen, Ci to C4 alkyl or phenyl;
R4 is hydrogen;
R5 is hydrogen or phenyl; but if R3 is other than phenyl, R4
and R5 together represent a bonding electron pair between
the 2- and 3-positions of the benzopyrane nucleus;
R6 and R7 are each hydrogen or together form an 0x0 group;
and n is 1 to 2, with the proviso that the pyrane ring may
bear only one alkyl or phenyl substituent.
284
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,822
METHOD FOR PREVENTING CATS FROM SHEDDING
TOXOPLASMA OOCYSTS AFTER INFECTION OF SUCH
CATS
Jacob K. Frenkel, Overland Park, Kans., and Donald D. Smith,
Independence, Mo., assignors to Kansas University Endow-
ment Association, Lawrence, Kans.
Filed Jul. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 403,788
Int. a.3 A61K 31/35
U.S. a. 424—283 9 Qaims
1. A method of preventing or minimizing shedding of Toxo-
plasma oocysts by a cat after Toxoplasma infection of such cat,
comprising the steps of administering to the cat, prior to the
onset of oocyst shedding, an effective amount of an agent
selected from the group consisting of monensin and salinomy-
cin, and continuing such administration for a period of time
thereafter sufficient to maintain said prevention or minimiza-
tion.
4,391,823
NOVEL POLYCYCLIC INSECTIODAL ESTERS
Dena L. Boxler, Locltport, N.Y., and Albert C. Chen, East
Brunswick, N.J., assignors to Rhone-Poulenc Agrochimie,
Lyons, France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 122,228, Feb. 19, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,241
Int. a.3 C07C 69/743. 69/747, 69/612; AOIN 53/00
U.S. a. 424—306 45 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula: where R' is
-continued
— CH2
(viii) (ix)
CH2—
(X)
(xi)
— CH2
CH2—
(xii)
(xiii)
Rl— C— O— R2
CH— or
HjC CH3
X X
CH-^
(XV)
(xvi)
wherein X is F, CI, Br or methyl; Y is methyl or CI; Z is F, CI,
Br, CF3, CF3O, CF3S, CHF2, CHF2O, or CHF2S; and R2 is
with the provisos that when R^ is
— CH2
CH2
(iv)
then R' must be
(iii)
— CH2
(iv)
(V)
H3C CH3
July 5, 1983
• 11
and when R^ i
CHEMICAL
285
then R' mbst be
(XV)
4,391,825
N-[[6-(LOWER
ALKOXY)-5-(TRlFLUOROMETHYLTHIO)-l-NAPH-
THALENYL]TH10X0METHYL]-N-(L0WER
ALKYDGLYONES
Francesco Bellini, Mount Royal; Kazimir Sestaiy, St. Laurent,
and Leslie G. Humber, Dollard des Ormeaux, all of Canada,
assignors to Ayerst, McKenna & Harrison Inc., Montreal,
Canada
Filed Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,300
Qaims priority, application Canada, Oct. 15, 1981, 387991
Int. a.' C07C 153/063: A61K 31/165
U.S. a. 424—319 8 Qaims
1. A compound of formula 1
CH— or
H3C CH3
CH—
wherein X' is F, CI or Br, and X, Y and Z are defined as above.
6. An insecticidal composition that comprises a carrier for an
insecticide and an insecticidal amount of a compound of claim
1.
4,391,824
UREYLENEBIS (HYDROXY NAPHTHALENESULFONIC
ACIDS)
Gerald J. Siuta, and Seymour Bernstein, both of New City, N.Y.,
assignors to American Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,736
Int. a.3 A61K 31/185
U.S. Q. 424—315 15 Qaims
1. A method of inhibiting connective tissue destruction in a
warm-blooded animal suffering from connective tissue de-
struction disease which comprises administering to said warm-
blooded animal an effective connective tissue destruction in-
hibiting amount of a compound selected from those of the
formula:
AO3S
NH-
-CO
J2
R^O
S=C— N(R')CH2COOH
(1)
SCF3
wherein R' and R^ each is lower alkyl, or a therapeutically
acceptable salt thereof with an organic or inorganic base.
4. A pharmaceutical composition for preventing or relieving
diabetic complications in a diabetic mammal, which comprises
a compound of claim 1, or a therapeutically acceptable salt
thereof with an organic or inorganic base, and a pharmaceuti-
cally acceptable carrier.
4,391,826
PHENETHANOLAMINES, COMPOSITIONS
CONTAINING THE SAME, AND METHOD FOR
EFFECTING WEIGHT CONTROL
Jack Mills; Klaus K. Schmiegel, and Walter N, Shaw, all of
Indianapolis, Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company, Indi-
anapolis, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 921,670, Jul. 3, 1978,
abandoned. This application Nov. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 96,361
Int. Q.3 AOIN 37/18
U.S. Q. 424—324 20 Qaims
1. A pharmaceutical formulation useful in the control of
weight in obese animals comprising as active principle an
amount effective for controlling weight of an optically active
phenethanolamine of the formula
/==\ OH
r2
I
/ \-CHCH2NH— CHCH2CH2
wherein Ri is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen
and — SO3A; R2 is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen, ortho-S03A, ortho-methyl and meta-methyl; and A is
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and a nontoxic
pharmaceutical! y acceptable cation salt.
wherein:
R2 is hydrogen, methyl or ethyl;
R3 is aminocarbonyl or methylaminocarbonyl;
C is an asymmetric carbon atom having the R absolute
stereochemical configuration;
C is an asymmetric carbon atom when R2 is methyl or ethyl,
** and when asymmetric is of the S absolute stereochemical
configuration; and the non-toxic pharmaceutically accept-
able acid addition salts thereof, in combination with a
suitable pharmaceutical carrier therefor.
286
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^91,827
3-(2-HYDROXY-4-(SUBSnTUTED)PHENYL)-
CYCLOALKANONE AND CYCLOALKANOL ANALGESIC
AGENTS AND INTERMEDIATES THEREFOR
Charles A. Harbert, Waterford; Michael R. Johnson, and Law-
rence S. Melvin, Jr., both of Gales Ferry, ail of Conn., assign-
■ ors to Pfizer Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 185,082, Sep. 8, 1980, Pat. No. 4,306,097,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 926,687, Jul. 25, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 833,102,
Sep. 13, 1977, abandoned. This application Jul. 27, 1981, Ser.
No. 286,809
Int. a.3 A61K 31/12; C07C 49/237
U.S. a. 424—331 36 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting of those
having the formula
ORi
Z— W
O
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of saturated
and unsaturated cycloalkyl moieties selected from the group
consisting of
W is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, pyridyl
and
^.
wherein Wi is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen, fluoro and chloro;
with the provisos that when W is hydrogen, B is other than
hydroxy, Z is alkylene having from seven to eleven car-
bon atoms or — (alkO^— O— (alk2)n— wherein each of
(alki) and (alk2) is alkylene having from one to eleven
carbon atoms with the further proviso that the summation
of carbon atoms in (alki) plus (alk2) is not less than seven
or greater than eleven carbon atoms; and when W is
o
•Wi
or pyridyl, Z is alkylene having from four to seven carbon
atoms or — (alki)m— O— (alk2)n— wherein each of (alki)
and (alk2) is alkylene having from one to seven carbon
atoms with the further proviso that the summation of
carbon atoms in (alki) plus (alk2) is not less than four or
greater than seven carbon atoms;
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of
those compounds wherein Ri is — CO(CH2);jNR5R6 and-
/or W is pyridyl.
21. A pharmaceutical composition in unit dosage form com-
prising a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier or diluent and an
analgesic, tranquilizer, sedative, antiaxiety or anticonvulsant
effective amount of a compound selected from the group con-
sisting of those having the formula
wherein
A when taken alone is hydrogen;
B when taken alone is selected from the group consisting of
hydroxy, hydroxymethyl and alkanoyloxy having from
one to five carbon atoms;
A and B when taken together are selected from the group
consisting of oxo and alkylenedioxy having from two to
four carbon atoms
Ri is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkan-
oyl having from one to five carbon atoms, P(0)(0H)2 and
mono- and disodium and potassium salts thereof,
— CO(CH2)2CC)OH and the sodium and potassium salts
thereof, and — CO(CH2)pNR5R6 wherein p is an integer
from 1 to 4, each of R5 and R6 when taken together with
the nitrogen to which they are attached form a 5- or
6-membered heterocyclic ring (piperidino, pyrrolo, pyr-
rolidino, morpholino and N-alkylpiperazino having from
one to four carbon atoms in the alkyl group);
' R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
having from one to six carbon atoms, alkenyl having from
three to six carbon atoms and phenylalkyl having from
one to two carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety;
R3 is hydrogen;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and
alkyl having from one to six carbon atoms;
Z is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkylene having from four to eleven carbon atoms; and
(b) — (alki)m— O— (alk2)n— wherein each of (alki) and
(alk2) is alkylene having from one to eleven carbon
atoms; each of m and n is 0 or 1; with the provisos that
the summation of carbon atoms in (alki) plus (alk2) is
not less than four or greater than eleven; and at least one
of m and n is 1;
ORi
o
z— w
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of saturated
and unsaturated cycloalkyl moieties selected from the group
consisting of
I2 R3 ^^r R3
I-A
I-B
wherein
A when taken alone is hydrogen;
B when taken alone is selected from the group consisting of
hydroxy, hydroxymethyl and alkanoyloxy having from
one to five carbon atoms;
A and B when taken together are selected from the group
consisting of 0x0 and alkylenedioxy having from two to
four carbon atoms
Rl is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkan-
oyl having from one to five carbon atoms, P(OXOH)2 and
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
287
mono* and disodium and potassium salts thereof,
— CO(CH2)2COOH and the sodium and potassium salts
thereof, and — CO(CH2)pNR5R6 wherein p is an integer
from 1 to 4, each of R5 and Ra when taken together with
the nitrogen to which they are attached form a 5- or
6-membered heterocyclic ring (piperidino, pyrrolo, pyr-
rolidino, morpholmo and N-alkylpiperazino having from
one to four carbon atoms in the alkyl group);
R2 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
having from one to six carbon atoms, alkenyl having from
three to six carbon atoms and phenylalkyl having from
one to two carbon atoms in the alkyl moiety;
R3 is hydrogen;
R4 is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen and
alkyl having from one to six carbon atoms;
Z is selected from the group consisting of
(a) alkylene having from four to eleven carbon atoms; and
(b) — (alki)m— O— (alk2)n— wherein each of (alki) and
(alkj) is alkylene having from one to eleven carbon
atoms; each of m and n is 0 or 1; with the provisos that
the summation of carbon atoms in (alki) plus (alk2) is
not less than four or greater than eleven; and at least one
of m and n is 1;
W is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, pyridyl
and
Wi
o
wherein Wi is selected from the group consisting of hy-
drogen, fluoro and chloro;
with the provisos that when W is hydrogen, Z is alkylene
having from seven to eleven carbon atoms or — (alki-
)^_0— (alk2)n— wherein each of (alki) and (alk2) is
alkylene having from one to eleven carbon atoms with the
further proviso that the summation of carbon atoms in
(alki) plus (alk2) is not less than seven or greater than
eleven carbon atoms; and when W is
^
w,
C4H9^ ^„„^^ ^C4H9
0CH3
wherein R is hydrogen, lower alkyl containing from 1 to 6
carbon atoms or lower alkoxy containing from 1 to 6
carbon atoms.
4. A compound of the structure
C4H9^^^^^^C4H9
UL
OCH3
CH2-CH=CH«J»
6. A method of inhibiting growth of mosquito larvae, which
comprises:
administering to the larvae an effective growth inhibiting
amount of a compound selected from the group consisting
of
(a) compounds of the structure
C4H9
C4H9
OCH3
or pyridyl, Z is alkylene having from four to seven carbon
atoms or — (alki)m— O— (alk2)n— wherein each of (alki)
and (alk2) is alkylene having from one to seven carbon
atoms with the further proviso that the summation of
carbon atoms in (alki) plus (alk2) is not less than four or
greater than seven carbon atoms;
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts of
those compounds wherein Ri is — CO(CH2)pNR5R6 and-
/or W is pyridyl.
wherein R is hydrogen, lower alkyl containing from 1 to 6
carbon atoms or lower alkoxy containing from 1 to 6
carbon atoms, and
(b) compounds of the structure 1
C4H9 ^^^^^ ^♦"9
V^
0CH3
CH2-CH=CH<|>
431,828
DIBUTYLORTHOBENZYLMETHOXYBENZENES AND
DIBUTYLORTHOONNAMYLMETHOXYBENZENES AS
MOSQUITO LARVAE GROWTH INHIBITORS
Leonard Jurd, Berkeley, Calif., assignor to The United Stotes of
America as represented by the Secretary of Agriculture,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Apr. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 370,019
Int a.J AOIN 31/14; C07C 43/205
UA a. 424—340 9 Claims
1. A compound of the structure
4,391,829
DUAL ENZYME DIGESTION FOR A DOG FOOD OF
IMPROVED PALAT ABILITY
Joseph E. Spradlin; Jeffrey D, Morgan, both of Bourbonnaise;
Allan R. Olson, Ashkun, and Joseph P. Howley, Flossmoor,
all of 111., assignors to General Foods Corporation, White
Plains, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,471
Int. a.3 A23K 1/00. 1/18
VJS. a. 426—28 37 Claims
1. A process for preparing a nutritionally-balanced dog food
288
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
having improved palatability, said dog food comprising fat,
protein, carbohydrates, vitamins and minerals and containing
of a weight basis from 20% to 80% farinaceous ingredients and
from 20% to 80% proteinaceous ingredients, including pro-
teinaceous meaty material at from about 25% to about 55% by
weight of the proteinaceous ingredients, said process compris-
ing the steps of:
(a) preparing a farinaceous slurry comprising from about
30% to 70% water and from' about 5% to about 25% of
the total weight of said farinaceous ingredients;
(b) forming a farinaceous reaction product by treating the
farinaceous material in said farinaceous slurry with added
alpha-amylase and protease enzymes in an amount and
under conditions effective to convert at least a portion of
the farinaceous material to a mixture of oligo saccharides
ranging in size from 1 to 10 monomer units, and at least a
portion of the proteinaceous material to a mixture of
peptides ranging in size from 2 to 300 monomer units, and
effective to reduce the viscosity of the slurry by 50%;
(c) preparing a proteinaceous slurry comprising water and a
major portion of the proteinaceous meaty material;
(d) forming a proteinaceous reaction product by treating the
proteinaceous material in the proteinaceous slurry with
protease enzymes in an amount and under conditions
effective to convert at least a portion of the proteinaceous
material to peptides ranging in size from 2 to 300 mono-
mer units and effective to reduce the viscosity of the
slurry by 50%; and
(e) incorporating the farinaceous and proteinaceous reaction
products into a dog food in an amount effective to provide
a significant increase in the palatability of the dog food to
dogs.
19. A process for preparing a nutritionally-balanced dog
food having improved palatability, said dog food comprising
fat, protein, carbohydrates, vitamins and minerals and contain-
ing of a weight basis from 20% to 80% farinaceous ingredients
and from 20% to 80% proteinaceous ingredients, including
proteinaceous meaty material at from about 25% to about 55%
by weight of the proteinaceous ingredients, said process com-
prising* the steps of: *
(a) preparing a farinaceous slurry comprising from about
30% to about 70% water and from about 5% to about
25% of the total weight of said farinaceous ingredients;
(b) forming a farinaceous reaction product by treating said
farinaceous material in the farinaceous slurry with added
alpha-amylase enzyme in an amount and under conditions
effective to convert at least a portion of the farinaceous
material to a mixture of oligosaccharides ranging in size of
from 1 to 10 monomer units and effective to reduce the
viscosity of the slurry by 50%; and thereafter,
(c) admixing a major portion of the proteinaceous meaty
material with said reacted farinaceous slurry to prepare a
combined slurry; thereafter,
(d) forming a reaction product by treating the combined
slurry with proteolytic enzyme in an amount and under
conditions effective to convert at least a portion of the
proteinaceous material to peptides ranging in size from 2
to 300 monomer units; and
(e) incorporating the reaction product of the combined
slurry into dog food in an amount effective to provide a
significant increase in the palatability of the dog food to
dogs.
I 431,830
»RODUCnON OF LIQUID YOGURT STABILIZED
WITH HIGH METHOXYL PECTIN
Geir V. Gudnason, Atlanta; Laurie M . Crowe, Smyrna, and Shin
S. Chang, Stone Mountain, all of Ga., assignors to Coca Cola
Company, Atlanta, Ga.
FUed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,885
Int a.3 A23C 9/12
MS. a. 426—43 7 Claims
1. In a method for preparing a liquid yogurt by inoculating
pasteurized dairy ingredients with a bacterial culture to form a
yogurt curd and homogenizing the curd to form the liquid
yogurt, the improvement which comprises:
mixing the curd with a high methoxyl pectin after the pH of
the curd has become less than 4.6 and before the curd is
homogenized, to form a curd-pectin mixture, the amount
of pectin being from about 0.4% to about 0.7% by weight
relative to the solids content of the mixture, and
passing the mixture through an homogenizing orifice at a
pressure of from about 40 to 1 50 p.sJ. to produce a stabi-
lized liquid yogurt.
4,391,831
ANIMAL FEED COMPOSITION AND METHOD FOR
PRODUCING SAME
Joy E. Knobloch, 113 E. Haven, New Lenox, III. 60451
Filed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,681
Int. a.3 A23K 7/00
U.S. a. 426—93 9 Qaims
1. A method for producing an animal feed comprising con-
tacting particles of base feed material with a mixture compris-
ing an aqueous liquid phase derived from at least one plant and
substantially whole plant matter from said plant to deposit at
least a portion of said plant matter on at least a portion of said
particles and form deposit containing pariicles, and drying said
deposit containing particles to remove at least a portion of said
liquid phase and form dried deposit containing particles having
deposited thereon substantially whole plant matter.
4,391,832
PROCESS FOR MAKING MULTI-LAYER
CREAM-nLLED WAFER BLOCKS
Franz Haas, Sr., Gerstlgasse 25, A-1210 Wien; Franz Haas, Jr.,
Castellezgasse 32, A-1020 Wien, and Johaan Haas, Wiener
Strasse 209-215, A-2104 Spillem, N.6., all of Austria
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. Nd. 274,247
Qaims priority, application Austria, Jun. 18, 1980, 3219/80
Int. a.3 A21D U/00; A23G i/00
U.S. a. 426—275 3 Qaims
1. A process for making multi-layer, filled wafer blocks
having layers of wafer sheets, each wafer sheet having an
upper and lower side, the process comprising the steps of:
(a) applying a coating to the upper side of a first wafer sheet
to form a first coated wafer sheet;
(b) conveying, with a feeder conveyor, the first coated wafer
sheet in a first plane to a stacking point at which stacking
point the first wafer sheet is to be raised into a second
plane which is above the first plane;
(c) separately supplying, simultaneously with said conveying
step, an uncoated covering wafer sheet for each wafer
block, said supplying being carried out such that the cov-
ering wafer sheet is delivered directly into said second
plane at the stacking point without being transported
along the feeder conveyor;
(d) thereafter raising the first coated wafer sheet into the
second plane and, by such raising, attaching the first
coated wafer sheet to the lower side of the uncoated
covering wafer sheet already in the second plane to form
a stack of two wafer sheets, which stack is in a raised
position with respect to the feeder conveyor, said attach-
ing being effected by the contact of the coating of the first
coated wafer sheet with the lower side of the uncoated
covering sheet in the second plane;
(e) forming a completed stack of wafer sheets constituting a
completed wafer block by, if one or more additional layers
are desired, applying a coating to an additional wafer
sheet to form an additional coated wafer sheet; conveying,
with the feeder conveyor, the additional wafer sheet in the
first plane to the stacking point; thereafter raising the
additional coated wafer sheet into the second plane and by
such raising; attaching the additional coated wafer sheet
to the lower side of a wafer sheet at the bottom of the
stack of wafer sheets in the second plane, and repeating
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
289
said steps of applying a coating to an an additional wafer
sheet, conveying the additional coated wafer sheet, raising
the additional coated wafer sheet, and attaching the addi-
tional coated wafer sheet, n minus 3 times, where n is the
number of sheets in the final' stack; and
(0 thereafter removing the completed wafer block from the
stacking point.
soft serve product, thereby producing an extended and
flavored soft serve product.
1 1 4,391,833
METHOD OF MAKING AND USING HEAT RESISTANT
RESIN COATED PAPERBOARD PRODUCT AND
PRODUCT THEREOF
Robert W. Self, and Allan A. WhiUock, both of MobUe, Ala.,
assignors to International Paper Company, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 610,448, Sep. 4, 1975, abandoned. This
application Apr. 24, 1978, Ser. No. 899,238
Int. CI.3 A23L 1/00; A21B i/75,- B32D 27/10; B65D 27/10
U.S. a. 426—523 17 Qaims
4,391,835
METHOD FOR MAKING SIMULATED TOFU
PRODUCTS
Tsutomu Katayama, Izumisano, and Toyohiko Nakanishi,
Nanao, both of Japan, assignors to Fiyi Oil Company, Lim-
ited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,320
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 1, 1979, 54-11054
Int. CI.' A23J i/00; A23L 1/125
U.S. Q. 426—573 8 Qaims
1. A method for making a simulated tofu product which
comprises the steps of preparing a mixture consisting essen-
tially of soybean protein, fish protein, water, edible oil and salt,
wherein the weight ratio of the amount of the fish protein
relative to that of the soybean protein is within the range of
5:95 to 75:25 based on the part-by- weight of the solids thereof,
the amount of the water and that of the edible oil are 5 to 8
parts and 0 to 4 parts by weight, respectively, both being
relative to one part by weight of the total weight of the solids
of the soybean and fish proteins, and wherein the amount of the
salt is present in an amount sufficient to solubilize the fish
protein; mixing the mixture uniformly; and heating the mixture
to temperatures sufficient to coagulate the mixture.
9. A paperboard container for cooking food comprising a
coated paperboard substrate formed into the shape of a con-
tainer, said container comprising:
(a) an inside surface comprising a water impermeable layer
affixed to said paperboard substrate, said water imperme-
able layer comprising a binder with opaque pigment dis-
jjersed therein; and
(b) an outside surface comprising a continuous water perme-
able layer affixed to said paperboard substrate, said water
permeable layer comprising a binder with opaque pigment
dispersed therein, said paperboard container being charac-
terized by the facts that (!) it retains a brightness of at least
70% on its permeable side and at least 50% on its imper-
meable side after exposure to 400° F. for 30 minutes; and
(ii) it will not puff or blister when placed in an oven heated
to 350° F. for 15 minutes.
10. A process for cooking food in a paperboard container
comprising heating food in the container defined by claim 9.
4,391,834
METHOD OF EXTENDING AND FLAVORING ICE MILK
OR CREAM
James T. Fiscella, Ottumwa, Iowa, assignor to TJT Food Flavor-
ing, lac, Ottumwa, Iowa
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 132,872, Mar. 24, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,166
If Int. Q\} A23G 9/021
U.S. Q. 426— 565 11 Qaims
1. A method of extending and flavoring a soft serve product
independently of any heating step, comprising the steps of,
providing in liquid form a soft serve product selected from
the group consisting of ice cream, ice milk and non-dairy
ice cream, said soft serve product having a solids content
of between 25% and 30%,
providing a gelatin mix including sugar, gelatin and flavor-
ing in quantities approximately proportional to 18 grams
gelatin per 170 grams of mix, the non-gelatin portion of
said mix being substantially sugar,
stirring the gelatin mix into cold water in quantities approxi-
mately proportional to six ounces of mix to one gallon of
water, thereby producing a gelatin extender, and
adding said gelatin extender to a liquid soft serve product in
quantities approximately proportional to one gallon of
gelatin extender to between three and four gallons of said
4,391,836
PROCESS FOR PREPARING INSTANT GELLING
STARCHES
Chung-Wai Chiu, Westfield, N.J.. assignor to Natiohal Starch
and Chemical Corporation, Bridgewater, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 176,320, Aug. 8, 1980. This
application May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,348
Int. Q.^ A23L 1/195, 1/187. 1/04, 1/06
U.S. Q. 426—578 14 Qaims
1. A cold-water-dispersible gelling starch, which comprises
a drum-dried and subsequently heat-treated tapioca starch or
potato starch which is characterized by being capable of form-
ing at least a weak gel having a Bloom strength of at least about
70 grams and further characterized by having a reduced peak
or maximum Brabender viscosity within the range of about
1000-4200 B.U. for said tapioca starch or within the range of
2400-4400 B.U. for said potato starch, said viscosity being
measured at 5.5% solids for said tapioca starch or at 5% solids
for said potato starch in a sugar solution at 30° C. over a 30
minute period; said starch being a native starch having a pH of
about 5-12 prior to said drum drying; said drum drying being
carried out at a temperature sufficient to pregelatinize said
starch and render it cold-water-dispersible; and said heat-treat-
ment being carried out at up to 180° C. for a time and at a
temperature and pH sufficient to reduce said peak or maximum
Brabender viscosity to said ranges.
4,391,837
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF A LIQUID,
PASTE OR POWDER WHEY PRODUCT SIMULATIVE
OF A SKIN MILK PRODUCT
Johann Kocher, Salzburg County, Austria, assignor to Aipi
Milchindustrie reg. Gen. m.b.H., Salzburg, Austria
Filed May 30, 1979, Ser. No. 43,699
Qaims priority, application Austria, May 30, 1978, 3909/78
Int. Q.' A23C 27/00
U.S. Q. 426—583 4 Claims
1. The process for the manufacture of a liquid, paste or
powder whey product in which the proportions of protein,
lactose and ash substantially correspond to those in skim milk
and which whey product is suitable as an additive to foodstuffs
and feeds, which comprises the steps of: subjecting whey, as a
starting material, to an ultrafiltration membrane separation to
separate said whey starting material into a permeate fraction
and a retentate fraction in which the volume of said retentate
290
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
fraction is about l/20th of the volume of said whey starting
material and which retentate fraction contains a higher propor-
tion of protein and lower proportions of lactose and ash than
said whey starting material; and then mixing said retentate
fraction with a whey concentrate containing at least 50 wt. %
of solids or dry whey powder, wherein the mixing ratio of (1)
said retentate to (2) said whey concentrate or said dry whey
powder, is about 4:5, calculated as the solids, whereby to
obtain said whey product.
431,838
PROCESS FOR CONTINUOUS FLUIDIZATION OF
SHORTENING
Daniel R. Pate, Strongsville, Ohio, assignor to SCM Corpora-
tion, New Yoric, N.Y.
Filed Not. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 320,860
Int. C\? A23D 5/02
U.S. a. 426—606 22 Oaims
1. A process for the continuous fluidization of a feed mixture
comprising a major amount of a normally liquid base oil and a
minor amount less than about 20% by weight of a normally
solid lipid, said normally solid lipid exhibiting polymorphic
crystalline behavior and having a beta crystal-forming ten-
dency in said base oil, which process comprises: passing a flow
o|^ said feed mixture through a heat exchange zone that is
maintained under substantially anaerobic conditions while
submitting it to a sequence of at least two temperature oscilla-
tions that alternate between (a) a higher temperature which is
above the melting temperature of alpha crystals in the solidify-
ing lipid present but below the melting temperature of beta
crystals in the solidifying lipid present and (b) a lower tempera-
ture which is below the melting temperature of alpha crystals
in the solidifying lipid present but sufficiently high to maintain
the fluency of the materials in process, continuing said temper-
ature oscillations in said zone until a substantial proportion of
said normally solid lipid is transformed into beta crystal form,
and withdrawing the resulting composition from said heat
exchange zone. I
4,391,840
PROCESS FOR PREPARING MEAT PRODUCTS
CONTAINING A PROTEIN EXTENDER WITH
TITANIUM DIOXIDE TRACER
John A. Ederle, St. Louis; Ralph A. Hoer, Ballwin, and George
H. Irwin, Manchester, all of Mo., assignors to Rabton Purina
Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,693
Int. a.3 A23L 1/31
U.S. a. 426—641 6 Oaims
1. A process for preparing natural meat products containing
extruded vegetable protein extender with titanium dioxide
tracer comprising:
a. blending isolated vegetable protein capable of being ren-
dered insoluble and titanium dioxide.
b. hydrating said blend,
c. reacting said hydrated blend under elevated temperature
until said protein is substantially insolubilized thereby
forming a matrix;
d. adding said matrix as flne particles in dried form to a
vegetable protein to form a mixture,
e. hydrating said mixture,
f extruding said hydrated mixture to form a vegetable pro-
tein extender,
g. combining said extender with a natural meat product
whereby the pigmentation of the titanium dioxide does not
detract from the appearance of the combined product.
4,391,841
PASSIVATION OF METALLIC EQUIPMENT SURFACES
IN ELECTROLESS COPPER DEPOSITION PROCESSES
Rudolph J. Zeblisky, Hauppauge, N.Y., assignor to Kollmorgen
Technologies Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 130,451, Mar. 28, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 34,812, Apr. 30, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,801
Int. a.5 C23C 3/02
U.S. a. 427—12 25 Oaims
4,391,839
METHOD OF MODIFYING THE CONFORMATION OF
FOOD AND FEED PROTEINS
Tibor Devenyi; Klara K. Bocsa; Ferenc Kovats; Sandor Pongor;
Gertrud Szabolcsi, and Mihaly Such, all of Budapest, Hun-
gary, assignors to MTA Szegedi Biologiai Kozpont En-
zimologiai Intezete, Budapest, Hungary
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 179,980, Aug. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,645
Oaims priority, application Hungary, Dec. 21, 1979, MA 3255
Int. C\? A23K 1/00
U.S. O. 426—626 5 Oaims
1. A method of modifying the conformation of plant proteins
of cereal, vegetable or oil-seed origin for increasing their bio-
logical utilization, which consists essentially of:
(a) treating said plant protein in dry form with agitation in
gaseous hydrogen chloride for a period of about 1 to 1.5
minutes sufficient to increase the digestibility of said plant
protein without bringing the protein into solution or sus-
pension, said gaseous hydrogen chloride lowers the pH to
a value between 1.7 and 2.3 as measured in a 20% w/v
aqueous suspension; and
(b) raising the pH of said plant protein to a value between 4
and 7 by adding calcium hydroxide, so that the moisture
content of said plant protein is increased up to 50% by
weight. I
1. In a method for electrolessly depositing copper from an
electroless copper deposition solution of known mixed poten-
tial on at least one substrate sensitive to such deposition, the
improvement for rendering the metallic surfaces of plating
equipment in contact with the solution substantially resistant to
electroless copper deposition, comprising:
(1) initially imposing on said metallic plating equipment
surfaces an electrical potential more positive than the
mixed potential of the electroless copper solution but not
substantially more positive than required to render said
equipment surfaces substantially resistant to electroless
copper deposition;
(2) electroless depositing copper on said substrate from said
electroless copper solution; and
(3) while electrolessly depositing copper on said substrate,
adjusting said more positive electrical potential to main-
tain said more positive electrical potential sufficiently
positive to resist electroless copper deposition.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
291
4,391,842
METHOD OF DEVELOPMENT
Raymond W. Huggins, Pittsford, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corpo-
ration, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 86,624, Oct. 19, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,915
Int. 0.3 B05D 1/04, 1/06
U.S. O. 427—14.1 5 Oaims
7\ f ^ (^f-^
consisting essentially of nitrogen prior to the depositing
step.
1. A met nod of developing a latent image recorded on an
image bearing member with an electrically conductive devel-
oper material, including the steps of:
transporting the electrically conductive developer material
into contact with the image bearing member in a develop-
ment zone on a rotating tubular member by generating a
magnetic field to attract the developer material to the
tubular member; and
increasing the intensity of the magnetic field between the
image bearing member and the tubular member to apply a
selected pressure to the developer material to adjust the
electrical conductivity of the developer material to en-
hance solid area latent image development, or decreasing
the intensity of the magnetic field between the image
bearing member and the tubular member to apply a se-
lected pressure to the developer material to adjust the
electrical conductivity of the developer material to en-
hance line latent image development.
4,391,844
METHOD FOR MAKING LININGS AND COATINGS
FROM SOLUBLE CROSS-LINKABLE
PERFLUOROCARBON COPOLYMERS
Stanley K. Baczek; G. Howard McCain, both of Painesville; Leo
L. Benezra, Mentor, and Michael J. Covitch, Cleveland
Heights, all of Ohio, assignors to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,920
Int. O.^ B05D 3/06, 3/02
U.S. O. 427— 44 12 Oaims
1. A method for coating a substrate with a soluabilized
cross-linkable perfluorocarbon copolymer having pendant
sulfonyl halide functional groups and polymerized from at least
two monomers, one such monomer consisting essentially of at
least one fluorinated vinyl compound and the other monomer
consisting essentially of at least one monomer having the struc-
ture:
CF2=CFA. CF2=CFRiA, CF2=CFORiA
with Ri being a bifunctional perfluorinated radical having
between 2 and 25 carbon atoms, which carbon atoms being at
least once interruptable by one or more oxygen atoms and A
being one of sulfonyl fluoride and sulfonyl chloride comprising
the steps of:
dispersing the copolymeric perfluorocarbon in a solvating
dispersion media selected from a group consisting of Halo-
carbon Oil, perfluorooctanic acid, perfluorodecanoic acid,
perfluorotributyl amine, perfluoro-1-methyldecalin, deca-
fluorobipheny], pentafluorophenol and pentafluoroben-
zoic acid, heating the dispersion to a temperature between
about 200° C. and 275* C. whereby substantially all per-
fluorocarbon copolymer solvates;
applying the admixed dispersions to the substrate;
irradiating the applied copolymer to initiate cross-linking;
and
removing the dispersion media using at least one of heat and
vacuum. '
4,391,843
ADHERENT PERFLUORINATED LAYERS
Grzegorz Kaganowicz, Princeton, N.J., and John W. Robinson,
Levittown, Pa., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,905
Int. O.' B05D 3/04, 3/14
U.S. O. 427—41 8 Oaims
4,391,845
METHOD OF MAKING A MEMBRANE SWITCH
Ronald S. Denley, Woodstock, III., assignor to Oak Industries
Inc., Rancho Bernardo, Calif.
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,023
Int. 0.5 HOIH 11/06
U.S. 0. 427— 58 I 4 Oaims
1. In a method for forming a perfluorinated film comprising
the step of depositing a polymeric film on a substrate surface
by subjecting the surface to a glow discharge in the presence of
a precursor comprising a compound selected from the group
consisting of perfluorocycloalkanes, perfluorocycloolefins and
perfluoroalkyl-substituted derivatives thereof;
the improvement which comprises the additional step of
exposing the substrate surface to a glow discharge of a gas
1. In a method of making a component of a membrane switch
in a multiple-pass screen printing process, the membrane
switch being of the type having a substrate, a flexible mem-
brane, a first set of electrical conductors on the substrate, a
second set of electrical conductors on the membrane, the
conductor sets including a plurality of switch sites in facing
relation, and spacer means normally holding the conductor sets
292
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
in spaced, non-contacting relation,<the spacer means including
a plurality of spacer areas on either the membrane or substrate
at locations remote from the first and second sets of electrical
conductors, the improved method comprising the steps of:
(a) forming one of the sets of conductors by screening a
conductive material on the substrate or membrane in a
first screening pass;
(b) forming a first layer of the spacer areas from the conduc-
tive material during the first screening pass;
(c) forming additional layers of the spacer areas by subse-
quent screening passes which deposit material only on the
spacer areas so that the spacer means thickness is greater
than that of the conductors.
outside the limits of 1:3 to 3:1 the tungsten to silicon ratio
will also affect the value of the TCR.
4,391,846
METHOD OF PREPARING
HIGH-TEMPERATURE-STABLE THIN-HLM
I RESISTORS
Leonard S. Raymond, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 27,439, Apr. 5, 1979,
abandoned. This application Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,409
Int. a.3 C23C 11/08
U.S. a. 427-99 9 Qaims
200 400
TCMPCRATURE, •£
1. A chemical vapor deposition method for the preparation
of high temperature stable thin film resistors having a predeter-
mined temperature coefficient of resistance (TCR) and bulk
r^istivity comprising:
placing a substrate having an electrically insulative surface
in a reactor;
flowing a reducing carrier gas through the reactor at a
pressure of about 0.1 to 10 Torr to remove the ambient
gas;
heating the substrate to a controlled temperature between
500° C. and 900° C;
introducing a reactant gas into the flowing carrier gas, the
reactant gas comprising a mixture of at least one decom-
posable compound of tungsten and at least one decompos-
able compound of silicon in a controlled ratio; and
contacting the flowing reactor and carrier gases with the
heated surface of the substrate to decompose the reactant
gas to deposit a thin film of tungsten silicide on the sub-
strate, the controlled ratio of tungsten to silicon in the
reactant gas being in part determinative of the tungsten to
silicon ratio in the thin film which is determinative of the
bulk resistivity and TCR of the film, and the controlled
temperature of the substrate being determinative of the
crystallinity of the film which is determinative of the TCR
of the film, whereby for a tungsten to silicon ratio in the
range of 1:3 to 3:1 a low substrate temperature will pro-
duce an essentially amorphous film having a TCR nearly
equal to 0 ppm/°C. and increasing the substrate tempera-
ture will produce a more crystalline film having a more
positive TCR, and whereby for tungsten to silicon ratios
4,391,847
COATING FOR HALOGEN LAMPS
Rollin G. Brown, Chesterfield, Mo., assignor to Edison Interna-
tional, Inc., Rolling Meadows, 111.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,614
Int. a.3 C03C 17/23: HOIK 1/32
U.S. a. 427—106 12 Qaims
1. A composition for coating the bulb surface of an incandes-
cent lamp, said composition including;
(a) sodium silicate, said sodium silicate comprising silicon
dioxide and sodium oxide in proportion by weight of
approximately 2:1 and
(b) manganese dioxide, said manganese dioxide being finely
4|vided and in proportion by weight with respect to said
sodium silicate in the range between approximately 4:1
and approximately 5:1.
4,391,848
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING MAGNET WIRE
George D. Hilker, Fort Wayne, Ind., assignor to Phelps Dodge
Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 931,314, Aug. 7, 1978. This
application Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,874
Int. CX? B05D 5/12
U.S. CI. 427—118 25 Qaims
^^^=.3-.
""^
1. A method of manufacturing magnet wire or the like in
which a flowable but hardenable material is applied to an
elongated filament to a desired thickness in a single pass
whereby the filament may be drawn, or otherwise formed,
coated and spooled in a continuous operation comprising the
steps of:
a. applying flowable material including less than about 5%
weight solvent on said filament;
b. passing said filament through a stationary die at a speed of
at least about 100 feet per minute, said die having a throat
portion, an entrance opening larger than said throat por-
tion interconnected by a converging interior wall thereby
defining a die cavity between said throat portion and said
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
293
opening and said filament and said wall, said filament in
said throat portion and die cavity being spaced from said
die;
c. at least partially filling said die cavity with said material at
a temjjerature above the melting point thereof;
d. centering said filament in said throat portion solely with
said material in said die cavity;
e. wiping the excess of said flowable material from said
filament leaving an essentially concentric coat of said
material on said filament of a thickness meeting the re-
quirements of ANSI/NEMA Stanijlards Publication No.
MWlOOO-1977.
4,391,849 ^
METAL OXIDE PATTERNS WITH PLANAR SURFACE
Peter G. Bischoff, Cupertino, Calif., assignor to Memorex Cor-
poration, Santa Clara, Calif.
1 1 Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,366
1 1 Int. CV HOIL 21/308
U.S. a. 427—129 7 Qaims
2?
20
1. A niethod of fabricating a magnetic metallic pattern on a
substrate adapted for use with thin film recording heads com-
prising the steps of:
a. forming a continuous, non-conductive, non-magnetic
layer of a first material on said substrate;
b. forming a continuous layer of a second material on said
first material layer, said second material being an anodiza-
ble metal selected to be insoluable in an etchant of said
first material;
c. forming a photoresist layer on said second material layer
in a negative pattern with respect to the desired metallic
pattern;
d. removing the exposed areas of said second material to
expose said first material;
e. plasma etching the exposed areas of said first material to
define a cavity having relatively vertical side walls;
f. removing any remaining portions of said second material
layer;
g. depositing a layer of said second material on said first
material layer such that the thickness of said second mate-
rial on the vertical side walls of said cavity is less than the
thickness of the remainder of said second material layer;
h. soft anodizing said second material layer to a depth suffi-
cient to anodize the portions of said second material
formed on said vertical side walls;
i. dissolving the soft anodized portions of said second mate-
rial such that the portions of said second layer formed on
said side walls of said cavity are fully removed thereby
electrically isolating the portions of said second material
at the bottom of said cavity from the remaining portions of
said second material located on the top of said first mate-
rial;
j. hard anodizing the exposed surface of said portions of said
second material located on the top of said first material:
k. removing the portion of said second material remaining in
the bottom of said cavity;
1. forming a continuous layer of said magnetic metallic mate-
rial by sputtering such that said cavity is filled, and a
relatively thin layer of said metallic material is defined
adjacent the top edges of said cavity;
m. removing the upper surface of said magnetic metallic
material to a depth sufficient to expose said second mate-
rial adjacent the top edges of the cavity; and
dissolving said second material such that said magnetic
metallic material deposited directly thereon is released
from said first material whereby a metallic pattern having
vertical side walls is formed in said cavity, with the top
surface thereof being co-planar with the top surface of the
remaining first material.
4,391,850
RECORD MATERIAL CARRYING A COLOR
DEVELOPER COMPOSITION
Kenneth J. Shanton, Beaconsfield, England, assignor to The
Wiggins Teape Group Limited, England
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,719
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 13, 1980,
8019369
Int. CI.- B41M 5/16. 5/18. 5/22
U.S. CI. 427—150 8 Claims
1. A process for the production of record material carrying
a particulate amorphous hydrated silica/hydrated alumina
composite comprising:
(a) preparing an aqueous mixture comprising dispersed,
precipitated hydrated silica and an aluminum salt;
(b) precipitating hydrated alumina from the aqueous mixture
in the presence of the dispersed, precipitated hydrated
silica thereby yielding an amorphous hydrated silica/hy-
drated alumina composite having a mean alumina content
of at least 7.5% on a dry weight basis of the total weight
of silica and alumina wherein the hydrated alumina is
proportionally greater in the surface region of the com-
posite and wherein the surface area of the composite is less
than 300 m^g-l; '
(c) applying a coating composition incorporating said com-
posite to a substrate; and
(d) drying the coated substrate to produce record material.
4,391,851
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING A MAGNETIC
RECORDING MEDIUM
Yasuyuki Yamada; Goro Akashi; Nobuo Tsuji; Yoshito
Mukaida, and Masaaki Fujiyama, all of Odawara, Japan,
assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,791
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 2, 1981, 56-29741
Int. C\} HOIF 10/02
U.S. CI. 427—130 21 Qaims
1. A process for producing a magnetic recording medium,
comprising the steps of:
providing a non-magnetic support base;
coating a surface of said base with a magnetic coating solu-
tion comprising:
fine ferromagnetic particles;
a binder comprising nitrocellulose, polyol and an isocya-
nate having at least two isocyanato groups; and
a solvent;
evaporating said solvent until said magnetic layer coated on
said base is comprised of 0.3 to 3 wt.^ of the residual
solvent; _
calendering said base; and
drying the calendered base.
294
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,852
PROCESS FOR PREPARING AN ACCEPTOR COATED
SHEET
Mikio Nakamura, and Makoto Miyake, both of Hyogo, Japan,
assignors to Kanzaki Paper Manufacturing Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,532
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 19, 1981, 56-40893
Int. a.3 B41M 3/12
U.S. a. 427—150 4 Qaims
1. In a process for preparing an acceptor coated sheet used in
a pressure sensitive copying system utilizing a color forming
reaction on a base sheet between the color former in the form
of the oily core material encapsulated in microcapsules and the
acceptor in an acceptor layer formed on said base sheet, the
improvement which comprises coating said base sheet with a
composition comprising at least one acceptor and an aqueous
emulsion of an oligomer of a hydrocarbon compound having 3
to 10 carbon atoms in total and selected from the group consist-
ing of liquid polypropylene, polybutadiene, polybutene, poly-
isobutylene, polyisoprene, polypentadiene, polyhexadiene,
oligostyrene, isobutylene-isoprene copolymer, butene-butadi-
ene copolymer, butene-isobutylene copolymer, and mixtures
thereof, said oligimer being liquid at the normal temperature.
4,391,854
METHOD OF MAKING A BEARING MATERIAL
CONTAINING AN ALUMINUM BASE ALLOY
Yoshitsugu Kanda; Minora Kurikawa; Tora Morimoto, and
Kiyoshi Nakanishi, all of Narashino, Japan, assignors to
N.D.C. Co., Ltd., Chiba, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 147,654, May 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,026
Int. a.3 B05D 3/12. 3/02
U.S. a. An— 192 2 Qaims
8,
9b lb
K)
lb
la
9a
4,391,853
METHODS OF MAKING ADHESIVE ARTICLES AND
RESULTING PRODUCTS
David W. Pointon, Sparks, Nev., assignor to The Datak Corpo-
ration, Guttenberg, N.J.
A Filed Dec. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 101,782
Int. a? B41M 3/12: B44C 1/16
U.S. a. 427—152 48 Claims
1. A method of making an aluminum base alloy bearing
material, comprising the stef>s of:
(a) washing one surface of a continuously fed steel strip or
stainless steel strip;
(b) grinding the resulting washed surface of the strip;
(c) spreading on the resulting ground surface of the strip an
aluminum base alloy pxjwder containing from 6.8 to 9.2 wt
% lead and from 0.8 to 1.5 wt % tin, to form an aluminum
base alloy powder on the surface of the strip;
(d) preheating the strip having the aluminum base alloy
powder thereon by the application of heat to the other
surface of the strip to a temperature in the range of from
200° C. to 400° C, in an air atmosphere, without directly
heating the aluminum base alloy;
(e) hot-rolling the preheated strip and the aluminum base
alloy in the air atmosphere between a pair of heated rolls,
each heated up to from 150° C. to 400° C. over the entire
area of the surface thereof, to thereby pressure-bond the
aluminum base alloy powder to the strip to form thereon
a bearing surface layer;
(0 taking up the resulting bearing steel strip into a coil; and
(g) heating the coil in a furnace to sinter the coating at a
temperature of from 250° C. to 500° C.
1. A method of producing an adhesive product including the
steps of providing plural layers on a release surface of a carrier
sheet, one of said layers being initially a non-tacky precursor of
a pressure-sensitive adhesive, and another of said layers being
in contact with the adhesive precursor layer in a common area
extending over only part of said release surface and forming a
non-tacky coherent polymeric film containing a migratory
tackifier for the adhesive precursor layer, said tackifier being
initially present in an amount sufficient to convert the adhesive
precursor layer into a tacky pressure-sensitive adhesive layer
in situ by migration to equilibrium of such amount of the tacki-
fier into so much of the adhesive precursor layer as occupies
said common area, the release surface of the carrier sheet being
of the kind which, when a pressure-sensitive adhesive layer is
formed thereon, forms a bond thereto that is readily peelable
without the assistance of solvents or heat, and which, when a
coherent polymeric film is formed thereon, forms only a weak
bond thereto that is readily releasable without the assistance of
heat or solvents.-
4,391,855
CORROSION RESISTANT COATING AND METHOD
FOR COATING METAL SUBSTRATE
Thurlow Geeck, Hillsdale, Mich., assignor to Depor Industries,
Troy, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 180,900, Aug. 25, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 372,980
Int. CI.3 B05D 3/02
U.S. a. 427—383.7 19 Qaims
11. A method of protecting a metal substrate from corrosion
comprising: applying to at least a portion of the surface of the
substrate a thin and wet film of a liquid composition compris-
ing powdered metal selected from the group consisting essen-
tially of zinc, cadmium, stainless steel, aluminum, and alloys
and blends thereof; said powdered metal having an average
particle size not greater than about 40 microns and a maximum
particle size not greater than about 100 microns; a resin system
at least 80% by weight consisting essentially of a thermoplastic
linear phenoxy resin having a high molecular weight in the
range of about 3,000 to 60,000 and essentially no highly reac-
tive terminal epoxy groups, the balance of said resin system
consisting essentially of formaldehyde, melamine, phenolic,
and triazine resins and blends thereof; the quantity of said resin
system being about 10% to 525% by weight of said powdered
metal; active organic solvent selected from the group consist-
ing essentially of acetone, cellosolve acetate, methyl ethyl
ketone, methyl isobutyl ketone, dimethylformamide, and
blends thereof; inactive organic solvent selected from the
group consisting essentially of aromatic hydrocarbons, alco-
hols, and blends thereof in a quantity equal to about 0. 1 to 0.4
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
295
by weight of said active organic solvent; the total quantity of
said organic solvents being sufficient for the composition to
have a viscosity in the range of about 20 to 280 seconds with a
Ford No. 4 cup; and heating the thin wet film to an elevated
temperature for a sufficient period of time to evaporate the
solvents and thereby tenaciously adhere the film to the sub-
strate as a coating protecting the substrate from corrosion
without heating any portion of the substrate to a temperature
greater than 450° F.
4,391,856
ADHESIVE APPLICATOR AND METHOD FOR
QGARETTE-TO-nLTER ADHESION AND SIMILAR
APPLICATIONS
Donald B. Mclntyre, and Frederic S. Mclntyre, both of Welles-
ley, Mass., assignors to Acumeter Laboratories, Inc., Marl-
borough, Mass.
Divisioi of Ser. No. 69,972, Aug. 27, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,616 |
Int. a.3 B05D 1/26
U.S. a. 427—358 1 Chum
:i.
Ik II
l-X.
CCC'"COC *■ '' c^.
\7
7"
o 0 o o c 0 c o o c r p
and/or decorative coating upon the surface of a substrate,
which comprises the steps of:
(1) applying to the surface a basecoat composition compris-
ing:
(A) a film-forming polymer;
(B) a volatile organic liquid diluent in which the polymer
is dissolved;
(C) polymer microparticles of diameter 0.01 to 10 microns
which are insoluble in the solution of the polymer (A) in
the liquid diluent (B) and are stably dispersed by steric
stabilization therein in a nonflocculated state in an
amount of from 3% to 8% of the aggregate weight of
said film-forming polymer of (A) and said microparti-
cles;
(D) pigment particles also dispersed in the solution of the
film-forming polymer in the liquid diluent;
(2 ) forming a polymer film upon the surface from the com-
position applied in step (1);
(3) applying to the basecoat film so obtained a transparent
topcoat composition comprising:
(E) a film-forming jwlymer; and
(F) a volatile carrier liquid for the polymer; and
(4) forming a second polymer film upon the basecoat film
from the composition applied in step (1).
1. A method of fluid adhesive application, that comprises,
depositing at a predetermined region a plurality of inline
closely transversely spaced, non-overlapping parallel beads of
such adhesive upon a web while drawing the web longitudi-
nally through said region; deflecting the parallel-bead-coated
web upward at an acute angle over an edge just beyond the
region of bead deposition; and controlling the size of the beads
. and degree of upward deflection relative to the speed of draw-
ing of the web to shear the beads at said edge and merge the
same into a uniform, continuous, full adhesive coating trans-
versely across said web.
f
4,391,858
COATING PROCESS
Wolfgang Batzill, Miinster, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Glasurit America, Inc., Detroit, Mich.
1 1 FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,367
1 1 Int. a.' B05D 1/36
U.S. a. 427—407.1 13 Claims
1. A process for the production of a multilayer protective
4,391,859
PROCESS AND A COMPOSITION FOR THE
INSULATION OF SURFACES, AND PRODUCT HEREBY
OBTAINED
Ernst R. Fogelberg, Vallingby, Sweden, assignor to AB Bon-
nierfdretagen, Stockholm, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 242,688, Mar. 11, 1981, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 800,200, May 25, 1977, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 593,661, Jul. 7, 1975, abandoned. This
application Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,679
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jul. 10, 1974, 7409097
Int. a.3 B05D 1/02. 1/12
U.S. a. 427—421 8 Qaims
1 1 4,391,857
AQUEOUS DISPERSION TYPE COATING
COMPOSITIONS WITH AN IMPROVED
VIBRATION-DAMPING CHARACTERISTIC
Koichi Saito, and Osamu Ohara, both of Kurashiki, Japan,
assignors to Kuraray Company, Limited, Kurashiki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 178,592, Aug. 15, 1980, Pat. No.
4,325,858. This application Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,224
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 16, 1979, 54-104708
The pof^on of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 20,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B05D 3/02
U.S. a. 427—385.5 6 Qaims
1. A method of damping the vibration of a structural mem-
ber comprising (1) coating a surface of said structural member
with a layer of an aqueous dispersion comprising, as essential
components thereof, (a) a polyvinyl acetate emulsion, (b) an
ethylene polymer in finely divided particulate or emulsion
state, and (c) a flaky inorganic filler, and (2) then drying the
coated layer.
9*
1. A process for minimizing accumulation of moisture on a
cold surface exposed to humidity conditions which tend to
cause condensation on said surface, which comprises feeding
to the nozzle of a spray head a premixed sprayable coating
composition containing a binder dispersed in a liquid vehicle
having distributed therein water-absorptive granules of heat>-
expanded perlite having a bulk density of about 60-70 kgs/m^>
said composition being characterized in that the water-absorp-
tive character of said granules is not occluded, in that said
binder is either soluble in or physically-dispersible in said liquid
vehicle, and in that it dries to an adherent, water-absorptive,
insulating coating, and spray-coating said surface for the pur-
pose of minimizing the collection of condensation on said
surface with a thin layer of said composition to form said
adherent water-absorptive, insulating coating, said granules
having a particle size of about 0.01 to about 1.5 mm, being
pretreated with a wetting agent, and constituting from 5 to 20
percent by weight of the composition.
296
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,860
DEVICE FOR THE CONTROLLED FEEDING OF
POWDER MATERIAL
Anthony J. Rotolico, Hauppauge; Eduardo Romero, Coram, and
John E. Lyons, Levittown, all of N.Y., assignors to Eutectic
Corporation, Flushing, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 226,756, Jan. 21, 1981. This
I application Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,092
Int. a.' B05D 1/08; B05B 7/14. 7/20
U.S. a. 427—423 17 Qaims
a.
^s
1. The method of supplying powder to a powder-deposition
torch, which comprises selecting two powder-fluidizing sys-
tems each having the ability to selectively control the rate of its
powder assimilation in a flow of carrier gas therethrough,
supplying different gas-fluidizable powders to the respective
systems, increasing the rate of powder assimilation in carrier-
gas flow through one of said systems while decreasing the rate
of powder assimilation in the carrier-gas flow through the
other of said systems, combining the carrier-gas flows after
powder-assimilation therein, and delivering the combined flow
to the torch, the same carrier-gas flow being passed through
the respective systems in succession, whereby the combining
step occurs at passage of the carrier-gas flow through the
second system.
4,391,861
PREFORM OF A THERMOPLASTIC
Oaes T. Nilsson, Loddekopinge, Sweden, assignor to PLM AB,
Malmo, Sweden
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,424
Claims priority, application Sweden, May 29, 1980, 8004003;
c. 10, 1980, 8008653
Int. a.^ B65D 11/16: B29F 1/10: B32B 9/04
VS. a. 428—35 , 10 Oaims
Dei
ing to said part-preforms, at least one of said interfitted part-
preforms being axially stretched, prior to molding, to provide
crystallinity obtained by monoaxial orientation.
1. An expandable preform assembly capable of being blow
molded to a container, said assembly comprising inner and
outer distinct, interfitted part-preforms of tubular shape with
opposite open and closed ends, each of said part-preforms
being constituted of a thermoplastic material capable upon
molding of being joined to the other part-preform to form a
container having inner and outer layers respectively conform-
4,391,862
PASTEURIZABLE THERMOPLASTIC HLM AND
RECEPTACLE THEREFROM
Norman D. Bornstein, Spartanburg, and Johnnie J. Walters,
Greenville, both of S.C., assignors to W. R. Grace & Co.,
Cryovac Division, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 279,904, Jul. 2, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,333
Int. a.3 B65D 85/7Z 65/40; B32B 27/32
U.S. a. 428—35 15 Qaims
1. A multi-layer, heat shrinkable, thermoplastic packaging
film which will produce heat selas having improved seal
strength immediately after initially being heat sealed to itself
comprising:
(a) a first or surface layer consisting essentially of a blend
wherein one constituent of the blend is selected from the
group consisting of propylene homopolymers and copoly-
mers and the other constituent of the blend is selected
from the group consisting of butene-1 homopolymers and
copolymers;
(b) a second layer comprising a polymer selected from the
group consisting of ethylene homoplymers and copoly-
mers, said layer being heat shrinkable;
(c) a third or low gas transmission layer comprising a poly-
mer selected from the group consisting of vinylidene
chloride copolymers and hydrolyzed ethylene-vinyl ace-
tate copolymers; and,
(d) a fourth or outer surface layer comprising a blend se-
lected from the group of blends as specified for the first
layer.
8. A process for making a multi-layer, heat shrinkable, ther-
moplastic packaging film which will produce heat seals having
improved seal strength immediately after being heat sealed to
itself comprising the steps of:
(a) coextruding first and second polymeric layers, the first
layer consisting essentially of a blend selected from the
group consisting of (1) propylene homopolymers and
copolymers and (2) butene-1 polymers and copolymers
and the second layer comprising a polymer selected from
the group consisting of ethylene polymers and copoly-
mers;
(b) irradiating said coextruded layers to a dosage level of at
least 2 MR; and,
(c) after the irradiation step has been completed, joining a
third layer of polymeric material to the second layer and
a fourth layer to the third layer.
4,391,863
PEEL RESISTANT COEXTRUDED SHEET
Laszlo J. Bonis, Swampscott, Mass., assignor to Composite
Container Corporation, Medford, Mass.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,120
Int. a.3 B65D 1/34
U.S. a. 428—35 11 Claims
1. A coextruded sheet comprising
a layer made of acrylonitrile-methyl acrylate copolymer to
provide a gas barrier, rigidity, thermoformability, and
printability,
a structural layer made of polyolefin to provide a moisture
barrier and chemical resistance, and
an intermediate tie layer made of a radial butadiene/styrene
teleblock copolymer having between 60 and 80% butadi-
ene and between 20 and 40% styrene,
whereby said tie layer provides a strong bond between said
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
297
acrylonitrile methyl-acrylate layer and said polyolefin
layer notwithstanding the difference in shrinkage between
said acrylonitrile methyl-acrylate layer and said polyolefin
layer.
^0) /— T-V '^ " -> \
<?/ . -v \ \ . . . . '■' \0
0 20 40 60 80 100
UHtTHAIIC R£Sm m WEISHT)
1. A magnetic recording medium having a substrate coated
with a magnetic layer which comprises a binder and a mag-
netic powder, said binder in the magnetic layer comprising 40
to 70 wt. % of a urethane resin, 15 to 40 wt. % of a thermoset-
ting epoxy resin characterized by its content of epoxide
groups, and 10 to 40 wt. % of a thermoplastic phenoxy resin
characterized by its content of polyhydroxyether groups.
4,391,865
THERMAL DRAPERY CONSTRUCTION
Lillie B. Constance, 753 East St., Woodland, Calif. 95695
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,626
Int. a.3 B32B 15/14, 5/22
U.S. a. 428—74 9 Qaims
1. A thermal drapery construction suitable for use in making
hung draperies comprising:
a decorative flexible drapery fabric; and
a flexible liner assembly means, attached to said drapery
fabric, for thermally lining said drapery fabric comprising:
a first fabric panel having a first metalized surface facing
an inside direction and a second surface facing an out-
side direction;
a second fabric panel disposed adjacent the first panel and
having a first metalized surface facing the outside direc-
tion and a second surface facing the inside direction and
the second surface of the first panel;
a third relatively thick, low density flexible panel situated
between the second surfaces of the first and second
panels, said third panel having a low density to form a
dead air space between said first and second panels;
said first, second and third panels having aligned outer
edges; and
means for binding the aligned outer edges of said first,
second and third panels.
4,391,864
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Akihiko Hosaka; Kiyotaka Okuyama, and Yukihiro Isobe, all of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,677
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 55-35947
Int. a.3 GllB 5/70
U.S. g. 428—64 5 Claims
4,391,866
CUT PILE FABRIC WITH TEXTURIZED LOOPS
Robert C. Pickens, Jr., Gurnee; Reese R. Thomas, Libertyville,
and Ronald Somerville, Gurnee, all of III., assignors to Ozite
Corporation, Libertyville, III.
Continuation of Ser, No. 159,470, Jun. 16, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No, 328,970
Int. a.' B32B 3/02. 33/00
U.S. a. 428—92 12 Qaims
1. A cut pile fabric comprising:
a needled batt of non-woven staple fibers,
texturized loops of stable fibers formed from the staple fibers
of said batt extend outwardly from one surface of the batt,
the texturized loops of fibers are comprised of a plurality of
clusters of loops of fibers with each cluster containing a
plurality of different sized loops of fibers,
backing means on another surface of said batt for securing
fibers of said texturized loops to the fibers of said batt,
a substantial portion of the fibers of said texturized loops
being cut to form cut pile, and
said cut pile being polished and sheared to provide a fabric
with a plush cut pile.
4,391,867
POLYVINYL BUTYRAL INK FORMULATION
Burton N. Derick, Mineralwells, W. Va.; Robert E. Moynihan,
Lowell, Ohio, and Jon W. Wolfe, .Matthews, N.C., assignors
to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 861,568, Dec. 16, 1977, Pat. No. 4,230,775.
This application Feb. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 119,790
Int. Q.3 B32B 3/00. 27/14
U.S. Q. 428—195 2 Qaims
1. In a polyvinyl butyral sheet printed with an ink compris-
ing solvent, dye and unplasticized polyvinyl butyral, the im-
provement wherein the unplasticized polyvinyl butyral in the
ink has a hydroxyl content about from 5 to 50 percent higher
than the hydroxyl content of the polyvinyl butyral sheeting.
T ■
298
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
I 4^91,868
LAMINATION OF POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CAST
nLMS
Harold J. McCarthy, Jr., Mohrsville, Pa., assignor to The Good-
year Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,570
Int. C1.3 B32B 7/02, 27/30
U.S. a. 428—215 3 Claims
4,391,871
MEAT PACKAGING SHROUD
Jack S. Rogers, Spartanburg, and Kenneth H. Sanders, Jones-
ville, both of S.C., assignors to MilUken Research Corpora-
tion, Spartanburg, S.C.
FUed Dec. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 448,306
Int. a.3 B32B 7/00
U.S. a. 428—219 7 aaims
I. A laminated rigid vinyl chloride homopolymer compris-
ing two solution cast films each having a thickness of 0.00762
centimeter and being adhered together with an actinic light
activatable adhesive to give a thickness of essentially 0.01524
centimeter.
.1 I 4,391,869
I ' NONWOVEN nBROUS PRODUCT
John R. Cook, Downers Grove, and William A. James, Tinley
Park, both of III., assignors to Johnson & Johnson Baby
Products Company, New Brunswick, N.J.
I Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,511
' Int. a.^ B32B 7/02
\]JS. a. 428—218 6 Qaims
' L
/
7
14
1. A fabric particularly useful as a wrapping for foodstuffs,
such as meat comprising: a layer of warp knit, weft inserted,
synthetic fabric and a layer of wax coated to both sides of said
layer, said warp knit fabric having a textured polyester contin-
uous filament weft inserted yam and a continuous filament
chain stitch.
4,391,872
HOLLOW WATER-ABSORBING POLYESTER
FILAMENT TEXTILE MATERIAL
Togi Suzuki; Kiyokazu Tsunawakl, both of Matsuyama; Osamu
Wada, Takatsuki, and Akio Kimura, Ashiya, all of Japan,
assignors to Tegin, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 171,335, Jul. 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,361,617.
This application Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,495
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 26, 1979, 54-94189;
Sep. 11, 1979, 54-115730
Int. a.3 D03D 3/00
U.S. a. 428—224 24 Claims
X 3000
1. A low density, resin-bonded, nonwoven fabric consisting
essentially of wet resilient, dry resilient, synthetic, staple fibers,
the fabric having a density less than about 0.06 gm/cc at 0.16
Ib/sq. in. load, and a weight less than about 3 oz/sq. yd.
4^91,870
SPRAY-SUPPRESSION DEVICE
Earle R. Ellis, Pensacola, Fla., assignor to Monsanto Company,
St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365^2
Int. a.J B32B 7/02
lis. a. 428—218 10 Claims
1. A laminated spray-suppression device comprising a non-
woven polyamide fabric core layer encapsulated on each side
with an adhesive layer, a backing layer of high density polyeth-
ylene fusion-bonded to one of the adhesive layers and a grass-
like, three-dimensional layer of low density polyethylene or
polypropylene fusion-bonded to the other adhesive layer.
1. A hollow water-absorbing polyester filament textile mate-
rial, comprising hollow polyester filaments each having at least
one hollow extending in parallel to the longitudinal axis of said
filament, and a number of caves distributed in at least a portion
of the body of said filament and consisting of a number of fine
outside concaves formed in the peripheral surface of said fila-
ment, a number of fine pores formed within the body of said
filament, a number of fine inside concaves formed in the hol-
low surface of said filament, and a number of fine channels
through which said pores are connected to each other, and to
said outside concaves and inside concaves, said outside and
inside concaves and said pores extending approximately in
parallel to the longitudinal axis of said filament, which textile
material has been prepared by the process comprising the steps
of:
(A) preparing core-in-sheath type composite filaments in
each of which (1) a sheath constituent comprises a blend
of (a) a principal polyester component comprising an acid
moiety comprising at least one aromatic dicarboxylic acid
or its ester-forming derivative and a glycol moiety com-
prising at least one alkylene glycol having 2 to 6 carbon
atoms or its ester-forming derivative, with (b) a cave-
JULY 5,
1983
CHEMICAL
299
forming agent which comprises at least one member se-
lected from the group consisting of
(i) copolyesters which comprise a glycol compound moi-
ety, and an aromatic dicarboxylic acid compound moi-
ety and an additional divalent organic sulfonic acid
compound moiety of the formula (11):
R'
SO3M'
-1-Z-R2
(ID
wherein Z represents a member selected from the group
consisting of trivalent aromatic hydrocarbon radicals
and trivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon radicals, M' repre-
sents a member selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen and metal atoms, R' represents an ester-form-
ing organic radical, and R^ represents a member se-
lected from the group consisting of a hydrogen atom
and ester-forming organic radicals;
(ii) phosphorus compounds of the formula (III):
(0)m (HI)
6— P— om2
I
X
wherein R^ represents a monovalent organic radical, X
represents a member selected from the group consisting
of — OR^, wherein R** represents a hydrogen atom or a
monovalent organic radical, — OM^ wherein M^ repre-
sents a metal atom, and a monovalent organic radical,
M^ represents a metal atom, and m represents zero or 1,
and;
(iii) aromatic carboxy-sulfonic acid compounds of the
formula (IV):
^
(IV)
(C00M5)„
S03M*
wherein Y represents a member selected from the group
consisting of a hydrogen atom and ester-forming or-
ganic radicals, M* represents a metal atom, M' repre-
sents a metal atom, and n represents an integer of 1 or 2,
and (2) the core constituent consists of a polymeric
material having a higher degree of alkali solubility than
that of said sheath constituent;
(B) converting said core-in-sheath type composite filaments
into a desired type of textile material; and
(C) removing at least a portion of said cave-forming agent,
the entire core constituent, and a portion of said principal
polyester component from said core-in-sheath typ>e com-
posite filaments in said textile material by treating it with
an alkali aqueous solution.
II 4,391,873
HIGH TEMPERATURE THERMAL INSULATING
COMPOSITE
Gilbert W. Brassell, Golden, Colo., and John Lewis, Jr., Oak
Ridge, Tenn., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,623
Int. a.3 B29C 25/00; B32B 5/12; C04B 29/00
U.S. a. 428—297 7 Qaims
1. A composite comprising:
a first region extending inwardly from a first surface of said
composite and comprising a carbonized polymeric binder,
fibers formed of a refractory material, and a predeter-
mined weight proportion of graphite flakes; and
a second region extending from said first region toward a
second surface of said composite opposed to said first
surface and comprising a carbonized polymeric binder,
fibers formed of a refractory material, and graphite flakes
the weight proportion of which gradually decrea.ses as
distance from said first surface increases.
7. A method for forming a thermal insulating composite,
comprising:
depositing on a support a slurry comprising a mixture of a
polymeric binder precursor, refractory fibers, and graph-
ite flakes, the weight proportion of said graphite flakes in
said slurry being varied as the slurry is deposited on said
support;
polymerizing said polymeric binder precursor in said slurry
deposited on said support; and
carbonizing the polymerized polymeric binder.
4,391,874
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Nobuyuki Vamamoto; Kyoichi Naruo, and Tsutomu Okita, all of
Figinomiya, Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,510
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 19, 1981, 56-23520
Int. a.' B32B 15/08; HOIF 10/00
U.S. CI. 428—336 12 Claims
1. A magnetic recording medium, comprising:
a non-magnetic support base;
a thin magnetic metal film formed on a surface of said non-
magnetic support base; and
a layer of an isocyanic acid ester having the formula
RN=C=0, wherein R is an alky! group.
4,391,875
ASBESTOS PRODUCTS OF IMPROVED PHYSICAL
PROPERTIES HAVING METAL OXIDES ON THE
SURFACES THEREOF
Byeong H. Jo, Horsham, Pa., and Jerry Zucker, Charleston,
S.C, assignors to RM Industrial Products Company, Inc.,
North Charleston, S.C.
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,508
Int. O.^ C03B 37/00; C04B 43/04; D21H 3/66. 5/lH
U.S. CI. 428—378 10 Claims
1. An improved asbestos product, said product consisting
essentially of asbestos fiber and a metal oxide coated on said
fiber and in surface contact therewith, said metal oxide being
selected from the group consisting of iron oxide and chromium
oxide.
5. A method of improving the properties of products made
from asbestos comprising the steps of dividing the asbestos into
fibers, and providing a coating of a metal oxide directly onto
the surface of said fibers, said metal oxide being selected from
the group consisting of chromium oxide and iron oxide.
4,391,876
AQUEOUS PEROXIDE EMULSION FOR USE WITH
GLASS FIBERS
Albert E. Tamosauskas, Pittsburgh, and Chester S. Temple,
McKees Rocks, both of Pa., assignors to PPG Industries, Inc.,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Apr. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 136,645
Int. a.3 B32B 9/00; C08K 3/40
U.S. a. 428—392 15 Qaims
1. An aqueous emulsion of an organic peroxide that is a
liquid at about 20° C. and is insoluble or has limited solubility
in water, wherein the emulsion has improved stability and
dilutability and has an average particle size of around 1.5
microns or less, consisting essentially of:
(a) at least 1 to about 60 percent by weight of said liquid
organic peroxide selected from the group consisting of
300
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
hydroperoxides, a-oxy and a-peroxy hydroperoxides,
dialkyi peroxides, aldehyde and ketone peroxides, diacyl
peroxides, peroxyesters, peroxy acids, peroxydicarbon-
ates, peroxymonocarbonate and perketals,
(b) about 1 to about 1 5 weight percent of a nonionic emulsi-
fier blend having three emulsifiers selected from the group
consisting of polyalkylene glycol ethers, dialkylaryl-
polyether alcohols, and polyoxypropylene-polyoxyethy-
lene condensates, phenoxypolyethoxyethanols, polyethyl-
ene derivatives of fatty acids, partial esters of sorbitol
I anhydrides; ethoxylated alcohols, fatty acids, fatty esters
and oils, alkylphenols; glycerol esters, sucrose esters and
derivatives, monoglycerides and derivatives, and sorbitan
derivatives, polyethoxy phenols, alkyl polyether alcohols,
ethylene oxide alkylated phenol condensation products,
and mixtures thereof wherein one emulsifier has an HLB
in the range of about 6 to about 12 and one emulsifier has
an HLB in the range of about 9 to 15 and one emulsifier
has an HLB in the range of about 12 to about 20 each in
proportions to give an overall HLB level for the emulsi:
fier system in the range of about 9 to about 20, and
(c) the remaining weight percent of the emulsion is water.
4,391,879
GRAVURE PRINTING BASE CYLINDER, AND METHOD
OF ITS MANUFACTURE
Peter Fabian, Freigericht, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Theo
Muller, Wuustwezel, Belgium, assignors to W. C. Heraeus
GmbH, Hanau, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,506
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 12,
1980, 3046757
Int. a.3 B41F 13/08, 35/00
U.S. a. 428—551 15 Qaims
4,391,877
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Fujio Shibata, Komoro; Hiroshi Kawahara, Saku, and Hitoshi
Azegami, Nagano, all of Japan, assignors to TDK Electronics
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,421
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 23, 1981, 56-40464
Int. a.' HOIF 10/02
U.S. a. 428—457 4 Qaims
1. A magnetic recording medium including a substrate hav-
ing a magnetic coating layer thereon, said magnetic coating
layer comprising ferromagnetic particles dispersed in a binder
vehicle, characterized in that the magnetic coating layer con-
tains one or more ketones selected from the compounds ex-
pressed by the general formula
Ri— C— R2,
O
wherein Ri and R2 represent saturated or unsaturated chain
aliphatic radicals, both or either of which have 1 1 to 22 carbon
atoms and may contain hydroxyl, carboxyl or amino groups.
I. Printing base cylinder, for plating in an electrolyte bath,
having
a cylindrical body (1);
and a cover layer (2) thereon which is electrically conduc-
tive, electrochemically active, and inert with respect to
the plating electrolyte,
wherein, in accordance with the invention,
the cover layer (2) comprises
a matrix formed by an oxide of a valve metal;
and particles homogeneously distributed in said matrix com-
prising at least one of the materials selected from the
group consisting of:
a noble metal, iridium; ruthenium.
II. Method of making a gravure printing base cylinder for
use in an electrolyte bath having
a cylinder body (1) and a cover layer (2) applied thereover,
comprising the steps of
settling electrically conductive particles on a film-forming
or valve metal oxide,
which particles are inert with respect to the electrolyte of
the electrolyte bath, to form a cover coating layer sub-
stance;
and, after forming said substance, applying said substance in
powder or granular form, by thermal spraying on the
cylindrical body (1) to thereby form said cover layer (2)
thereon.
I 4,391,878
WET STRENGTH RESINS
John E. Drach, Montgomery County, Pa., assignor to Scott
Paper Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
I I Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,078
I I Int. a.^ B32B 9/00; C08F 222/02, 222/38
U.S. a. 428—479.6
1. A cellulosic fibrous web wherein the cellulose fibers are
chemically modified by a cross-linking reaction with a wet
strength resin comprising a water soluble copolymer com-
prised of (A) a half-acid, half-amide corresponding to the
following general formula:
NH2— C— R— C— OR'
II II
O
o
wherein R' is H and R is a hydrocarbon chain containing a
double bond which has radically polymerized with (B) at least
ofie other ethylenically unsaturated monomer.
4,391,880
RECOVERY OF HEAT AND VAPORIZED MATERIAL
FROM A REACnON EFFLUENT
Utah Tsao, Jersey City, NJ., assignor to The Lummus Com-
pany, Bloomfield, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 48,147, Jun. 13, 1979, Pat. No.
4,243,650, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 870,351,
Jan. 18, 1978, abandoned, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
10 Hflims 25,278, Mar. 29, 1979, abandoned. This appUcation Jan. 2, 1981,
Ser. No. 222,081
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 6, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. aJ BOID 5/00; C07C 120/14
U.S. a. 423—659 4 Claims
1. A process for cooling a gaseous reaction effluent contain-
ing volatized catalyst and withdrawn from a reaction system
employing a solid catalyst, comprising:
contacting the gaseous reaction effluent with solid catalyst
particles by suspending the solid catalyst particles in flow-
ing gaseous reaction effluent to provide dilute phase trans-
port contact, said solid catalyst particles being at a temper-
ature at which vaporized catalyst condenses from the gas
onto the solid catalyst particles, said solid catalyst parti-
JULY 5, 1983
s Dei
CHEMICAL
301
cles' being heated and said gaseous reaction effluent being 4,391,882
cooled by said contact; BATTERY CONNECTING DEVICE
separating gaseous reaction effluent from the solid catalyst Shigeto Saniwatari, Chigasaki, Japan, assignor to Matsushita
particles;
cooling separated solid catalyst particles in a fluidized bed,
said fluidized bed being fluidized by a fluidizing gas, said
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,940
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct.
55/144521[U]
Int. C1.3 HOIM 2/20
U.S. a. 429—% I
particles being cooled in the fluidized bed to a tempera-
ture at which vaporized salt condenses onto the solid
particles, said fluidizing gas being a feed gas to the reac-
tion system and being introduced into the reaction system
subsequent to use thereof as the fluidizing gas; and
employing cooled solid catalyst particles for contacting the
gaseous reaction effluent.
4,391,881
PHOTOGALVANIC CELL
Gerard Folcher, Orsay, and Jacques Paris, Bures sur Yvette,
both of France, assignors to Commissariat a I'Energie Ato-
mique, Paris, France
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,462
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 18, 1980, 80 13543
Int. a.3 HOIM 6/36
U.S. a. 429—111 8 Qaims
1 f I
■^
15' a
1. A photogalvanic cell comprising two electrodes arranged
in a liquid system comprising a first photosensitive constituent,
consisting of the uranyl ion U02^'*" and a second constituent
Ared able to reduce the uranyl ion U02^ "*" when the latter is
brought into an excited state UO22''"* by the absorption of a
photon and which can be transformed into an oxidized type
Aox, the second constitutent Ared being such that the redox
potential of Ared/^ox is below 2.6 V relative to the standard
hydrogen electrode (SHE) wherein the second constituent is a
cation having a redox potential higher than 1 V relative to the
standard hydrogen electrode or an anion selected from the
group consisting of N03~ and SCN~, and the liquid system
comprises a solvent inert with respect to U02~*' and Ared-
8, 1980,
4 Qaims
1. A battery connecting device comprising: at least a connec-
tion terminal constituted by a resilient strip-like member hav-
ing one end soldered to a lead and the other end bent to form
a retainer tab, the intermediate portion of said strip-like mem-
ber being bent resiliently to form a contact portion of said
connecting terminal; and a wall defining a battery accommo-
dating space and having a first slit adapted to permit at least
said retainer tab and said contact portion of said connection
terminal to pass therethrough and a second slit adapted to
permit at least said retainer tab to pass therethrough, said
connection terminal being directly attached to said wall
through said first and second slits in such a manner that said
contact portion appears at the same side of said wall as the
battery while said retainer tab and said end soldered to said
lead appear at the opposite side of said wall to said battery and
that a reactional force is generated to press said contact portion
of said connecting terminal toward said battery.
4,391,883
HOUSING ARRANGEMENT WITH BREAKAWAY
BATTERY ACCESS DOOR
Richard D. Williamson, Fort Lauderdale, and George J. Selinko,
Lighthouse Point, both of Fla., assignors to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,575
Int. Q.^ HOIM 2/10
U.S. Q. 429—97 4 Qaims
1. An improved housing arrangement for housing electrical
components and having a non-destructive, breakaway battery
door, comprising in combination:
a housing having top, bottom, front, back and side walls, said
housing including a cavity for accomodating an associated
cylindrical battery with an opening along one side of said
housing giving access to said battery cavity;
a battery door panel interfitting in said battery cavity open-
ing;
breakaway hinge means with respective portions intercou-
pling the bottom of said door panel and said housing to
permit said door to pivot outwardly at the top thereof.
302
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said door when pivoted outwardly beyond a predeter-
mined distance forcing disengagement of respective per-
sons of said hinge means to non-destructively separate
said door from said housing;
shoulder means mounted on said housing inside said battery
cavity;
a cylindrical wing member integral to the interior side of
said battery door panel into which a cylindrical battery is
placed, said wing member including a door stop means
which engages said shoulder means when said door panel
I is extended outwardly to a predetermined distance; and
latch means, integral with said battery door surface and
operable in a lateral direction to releasably latch said
battery door in said housing.
4^91,885
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING FLUORESCENT
SCREENS OF CATHODE RAY TUBES
Yoshifumi Tomita, and Hiromitsu Nakai, both of Mobara, Ja-
pan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,269
Gaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1981, 56-43919
Int. C1.3 G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—28 7 Qaims
4,391,884
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCnON OF A
PHOTOGRAPHIC COLOR IMAGE BY THE SILVER DYE
BLEACH PROCESS AND SUITABLE COLOR
I PHOTOGRAPHIC MATERIAL THEREFOR
Armin Meyer, Belfaux, and Carlo Boragine, Villars-sur-Glane,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy AG, Basel, Swit-
zerland
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,069
Gaims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 30, 1980,
3344/80
Int. G.3 G03C 7/00
U.S. G. 430—17 14 Gaims
' >
ny.
^S^^^^^^^S
^a aaaaaaaaaaa^
aaaaaaa aaaaa.
laaaaaa aaaa^
1.2)1111
i..:
n
jo.
I ».•!»«
1. A method of manufacturing a fluorescent screen of a
cathode ray tube comprising the steps of:
forming a film of photosensitive sticky substance that exhib-
its stickiness when exposed to light on an inner surface of
a face plate of said tube;
exposing said film to light to render portions thereof sticky;
applying a powdery substance onto said film to cause said
powdery substance to adhere to said portions of the film
rendered sticky;
removing excess powder to form a film pattern of said pow-
dery substance;
causing the substance responsible for stickiness to ooze out
onto said film pattern;
applying another powdery substance onto said film pattern;
and
removing an excess of said another powdery substance, thus
forming said fluorescent screen.
4,391,886
METHINE COLORANT MATERIALS AND THE USE
THEREOF IN ELECTROPHORETIC MIGRATION
IMAGING LAYERS AND PROCESSES
Mark D. Frishberg, and James J. Knitak, Sr., both of Kingsport,
Tenn., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester,
N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 161,705, Jun. 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,304,908.
This application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,574
Int. G.3 G03G 13/00. 5/06
U.S. G. 430—41 19 Gaims
1. An elect rophoretic migration imaging recording method
comprising the steps of:
(a) providing an electrically photosensitive imaging layer
comprising an electrically photosensitive particulate ma-
terial having the following general structure:
A process for the production of a photographic colour
image by the silver dye bleach process, by exposure, silver
developing, dye bleaching, silver bleaching and fixing, and
using a photographic material which contains light-sensitive
silver halide layers and dye layers on a base, which process
comprises exposing image-wise a photographic material,
which has at least one light-sensitive silver halide emulsion
layer, which can contain a diffusion-resistant, bleachable image
dye, and immediately above it, on the side facing the light
source, a silver halide-free layer containing a diffusion-resistant
bleachable image dye, the light-sensitive silver halide emulsion
layer and silver halide-free layer being free from a dye bleach
catalyst and processing the material in a processing bath con-
taining a dye bleach catalyst, to give a colour image, the colour
image being produced exclusively by image dyes present in the
photographic material prior to exposure.
14. The colour images produced by a process according to
claim 1.
'Crx
or
N S
0=^ *=CH— a'
'{Ta
iK)"'
wherein R' is hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, nitro,
halogen, cyano, phenyl, lower alkylsulfonamido or lower
alkoxycarbonyl and A' is a monovalent and A^ is a divalent
residue of an aniline, 1,2,3,4-tetrahydroquinoline, benzomor-
pholine or indoline compound attached to the =rCH — group
by an aromatic ring carbon atom in the position para to the
aromatic amine nitrogen atom,
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
303
(b) applying an electrical field across said layer; and
(c) exposing said layer to an image pattern of electromag-
netic radiation to which said electrically photosensitive
material is photosensitive; and
(d) if necessary, at least partially liquifying said layer before,
during or after exposure and application of the electric
field to permit some migration of said electrically photo-
sensitive material in said layer,
thereby forming a record of the image pattern of electro-
magnetic radiation in said layer.
4,391,887
^hEPARATIONS OF MICRO-ORGANISMS
Jorg Baumgarten; Werner Frommer; Delf Schmidt; Friedrich
Schmidt, all of Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Doug-
las M. Munnecke, Norman, Okla., assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 945,287, Sep. 25, 1978, abandoned. This
application Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,362
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 15,
1977, 2756032 j
Int. G.3 C12P 39/00; C12N 1/36. 1/04. 1/20
U.S. G. 435—42 13 Gaims
1. A process for the production of a storage-stable material
capable of degrading a waste product comprising at least one
of phosphate esters and acrylonitrile, comprising cultivating a
mixed culture of microorganisms capable of growing on the
waste product by feeding in the waste product at a progres-
sively increasing concentration which does not kill the micro-
organisms due to by-product formation, terminating the culti-
vation when the waste product-splitting activity of the culture
has leveled off, separating at least a portion of the now active
mixed culture and repeating the cultivation at least once to
produce a stabilized active mixed culture, treating the stabi-
lized active mixed culture chemically, and then drying to
obtain a storage-stable active mixed culture.
about 25,000 to about 45,000; said first layer capable of
functioning in a dual capacity as a barrier layer to prevent
substantially any leakage of charge from the surface of
said photoconductor and as a bonding layer; a charge
generating layer comprising a dispersion coated layer
formed of at least one diane blue dye containing from
about 2 to about 75 percent by weight of at least one
squarylium dye based upon the total weight of the charge
generating layer, and a charge transport layer comprising
a conventional organic chemical capable of transporting
electrical charges generated by said charge generating
layer in areas of said exposed to said light rays;
(b) exposing the photoconductive element to actinic radia-
tion; and
(c) discharging said surface of the photoconductive element
in an image-wise fashion corresponding to the pattern of
actinic radiation to produce a latent electrostatic image
thereon.
4,391,889
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PHOTOSENSITIVE
MEMBER W ITH BENZIMIDAZOLE RING CONTAINING
HYDRAZONES
Minoni Mabuchi, Tokyo; Kiyoshi Sakai, Mitaka; ' Sbozo
Ishikawa, Sayama; Yigi Egashira, Hino, and Makoto
Kitahara, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,880
Gaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 13, 1980, 55-175250
Int. G.3 G03G 5/04
U.S. G. 430—59 17 Gaims
1. An electrophotographic photosensitive member which
comprises an electrically conductive layer and a layer contain-
ing at least one member of the hydrazone compounds of the
formula:
4,391,888
MULtlLAYERED ORGANIC PHOTOCONDUCHVE
ELEMENT AND PROCESS USING POLYCARBONATE
BARRIER LAYER AND CHARGE GENERATING LAYER
Mike S. H. Chang, Danbury, and Michael F. Berman, Bridge-
port, both of Conn., assignors to Pitney Bowes Inc., Stamford,
Conn.
1 1 Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,401
II Int. G.3 G03G 5/06 '
U.S. G. 430—57 15 Gaims
1. An organic photoconductive element which is extremely
sensitive to exposure to light rays in the near-infrared region of
the spectrum, said element comprising an electroconductive
plastic film support; a first layer on said support comprising at
least one polycarbonate resin having a weight average molecu-
lar weight ranging from about 25,000 to about 45,000, said first
layer capable of functioning in a dual capacity as a barrier layer
to prevent substantially any leakage of charge from the surface
of said photoconductor and as a bonding layer; a charge gener-
ating layer comprising a dispersion coated layer formed of at
least one diane blue dye containing from about 2 to alK>ut 75
percent by weight of at least one squarylium dye based upon
the total weight of the charge generating layer; and a charge
transport layer comprising a conventional organic chemical
capable of transporting electrical charges generated by said
charge generating layer in areas of said element exposed to said
light rays.
9. A method for forming an electrophotographic image
comprising:
(a) electrostatically charging in the dark the surface of an
organic photoconductive element which is extremely
sensitive to exposure to light rays in the near-infrared
region of the spectrum, said element comprising an elec-
troconductive plastic film support; a first layer on said
support comprising at least one polycarbonate resin hav-
ing a weight average molecular weight ranging from
Ri— N— N=CH
R2
C-R4
where Ri, R2 and R3 are selected from the group consisting of
substituted or unsubstituted alkyl, substituted or unsubstituted
aralkyl, and substituted or unsubstituted aryl, and R| and R2
Can not be simultaneously alkyl; and R4 is substituted or unsub-
stituted aryl and a binder.
2. An electrophotographic photosensitive member accord-
ing to claim 1 in which there are a layer containing the hydra-
zone compound and a charge generation layer.
3. An electrophotographic photosensitive member accord-
ing to claim 2 in which the layer containing the hydrazone
compound is a charge transport layer capable of transporting
holes formed in the charge generation layer.
4,391,890
DEVELOPER COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING ALKYL
PYRIDINIUM TOLUENE SULFONATES
Chin H. Lu, Webster, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corporation,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,294
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 3, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. G.' G03G 9/70
U.S. G. 430—110 20 Gaims
1. An electrostatic developer composition comprised of
toner particles and carrier particles, the toner particles being
comprised of resin particles, pigment particles, and from about
0. 1 to about 10 percent based on the weight of the toner parti-
304
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
cles of an alkyl pyridinium toluene sulfonate charge enhancing
additive of the formula:
rD
R
.CH3-/ \-SO3©
wherein R is an alkyl radical containing from about 12 carbon
atoms to about 25 carbon atoms.
4,391,892
MULTIPLE COPY ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC
PROCESS USING DYE SENSITIZED ZnO
Yasushi Kamezaki, Sakai; Eiichi Inoue, Tokyo; Hitoshi Ni*'
shihama, Hirakata; Akira Fushida, Suita, and Joji Matsu-
moto, Neyagawa, all of Japan, assignors to Mita Industrial
Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 174,503, Aug. 1, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,102
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 3, 1979, 54-98686
Int. a.3 G03G n/22. 13/02
U.S. a. 430—126 13 Qaims
4,391,891
DEVELOPING METHOD USING (ALTERNATING
ELECTRIC HELD AND) A DEVELOPER OF THE
I nELD-DEPENDENT TYPE AND AN APPARATUS
THEREFOR
Yasuyuki Tamura, Kawasaki; Junichiro Kanbe, Tokyo; Shuiyi
Nakamura, Kawasaki; Tsutomu Toyono, and Tohru Takaha-
shi, both of Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 124,911, Feb. 26, 1980, abandoned.
This application May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,391
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 5, 1979, 54-25322
Int. a.3 G03G 13/09
U.S. a. 430—120 8 Claims
......
Vlh r
T-T
Vfh I
r
1. A developing method for developing the latent image on
a latent image bearing member, comprising:
forming a layer of one-component developer on a developer
supporting member, wherein said layer has a thickness
which is less than a clearance, at a developing station,
between the image bearing member and the supporting
member, and wherein said developer is selected as having
a volume resistivity which varies with variations in an
electric field to which it is subjected;
conveying said layer of one-component developer to the
developing station;
applying an alternating electric field between said developer
layer supporiing member and said latent image bearing
member at the developing station, whereby said alternat-
ing electric field causes transition of said developer from
said developer supporiing member to both the image and
non-image areas of said latent image bearing member and
back transition of said developer from said latent image
bearing member to said supporiing member; and
reducing the intensity of said alternating electric field to
thereby cause said back transition at least in the non-image
areas and leave a developed image on said latent image
bearing member.
,)niUi.
10
'fa'
>B1
(
-^tS-
■-D
lEf . 5 '01 ^
6 X
3
:F»
1-0 1-L
1. in an electrostatic photographic process comprising sub-
jecting an electrostatic photographic photosensitive plate to
the combination of negative charging, positive charging and
imagewise exposure to form an electrostatic latent image of a
positive polarity, said electrostatic photographic photosensi-
tive plate having such charging characteristics that (a) a photo-
sensitive layer can be positively charged by sequential negative
corona charging and positive corona charging and (b) positive
charging is rendered substantially impossible by irradiation
with light, and then subjecting the so treated photosensitive
plate to positive charging a predetermined number of times,
whereby an electrostatic latent image is formed the predeter-
mined number of times by imagewise exposure conducted
once, an improvement wherein said electrostatic photographic
photosensitive plate comprises an electrically conductive sub-
strate having a surface with a work function smaller than the
work function of ZnO and being selected from the group
consisting of aluminum, zinc, cadmium, lead, indium and tin
and a photoconductive zinc oxide-resin binder dispersion pho-
tosensitive layer comprising a dispersion of photoconductive
zinc oxide having a particle size not larger than 0.53 ^m and a
BET specific surface area of at least 4.6 mVg and a resin binder
having a volume resistivity of at least 10'* fl-cm, in which the
resin binder /zinc oxide mixing weight ratio is larger than 1/10
and smaller than 5/10, said photoconductive layer further
comprising a triphenylmethane basic dyestuff represented by
the following formula:
wherein R] represents a lower alkyl group and R2 represents a
hydrogen atom or a lower alkyl group, in an amount of about
2 to about 3 mg per 10 g of zinc oxide and a silicone oil in an
amount of about 0.02 to about 0.04 mg per 10 g of zinc oxide,
and said photosensitive plate has a memory resistance (R),
defined by the following formula, of at least 90%:
July 5. 1983
CHEMICAL
305
R =
EL
ED
X 100
wherein ED stands for the saturation charge voltage (V) of the
photosensitive layer observed when the photosensitive layer is
stored in the dark for 3 hours and is then subjected to corona
discharge at a voltage of -6 KV and EL stands for the satura-
tion charge voltage (V) of the photosensitive layer observed
when the photosensitive layer is irradiated with light in a light
quantity of 3 X 10' lux.sec, stored in the dark for 1 minute and
then subjected to corona discharge under the same conditions
as described above.
6. An electrostatic photographic process according to claim
1, wherein the photosensitive layer is subjected to alternating
current corona discharge or direct current negative corona
discharge to uniformly charge the photosensitive layer nega-
tively, the so charged photosensitive layer is subjected to
direct current positive corona discharge to uniformly charge
the photosensitive layer positively, and the so positively
charged photosensitive material is subjected to imagewise
exposure to form an electrosta^c latent image in which the
non-exposed area is positively charged and the exposed area is
not substantially charged.
7. An electrostatic photographic reproduction process in
which an electrostatic latent image formed according to the
electrostatic photographic process set forth in claim 6 is devel-
oped with a toner having an electric resistance of at least lO'^
fi-cm and the toner image formed on the photosensitive layer
is transferred onto a transfer sheet and is then fixed.
soluble in organic solvents and substantially non-reactive
with diazo photosensitizers;
b. Separating said precipitated dye substance from its aque-
ous environment; and
c. Substantially uniformally dissolving said separated dye
substance and a diazo photosensitive composition useful in
the reprographic arts in a suitable organic solvent compo-
sition said diazo photosensitive composition being a reac-
tion product of a paradiazo diphenylamine-paraformalde-
hyde condensate with a coupling agent selected from the
group consisting of naphthol sulfonic acids and salts
thereof, sulfoanthranilic acid, N-lower alkyl-5- sulfoan-
thranilic acids, sodium 2,2'-dihydroxy-4,4'-dimethoxy-5-
sulfobenzophenone, and 2-hydroxy-4-methoxy-benzophe-
none-5-sulfonic acid and a trihydrate thereof; and
d. Removing said solvent composition.
9. An article useful in the reprographic arts which comprises
a sheet substrate having uniformly applied on at least one
surface thereof the colored photosensitive compositions pro-
duced by the method of claim 1.
4,391,893
MAGNETIC DEVELOPERS AND PROCESS FOR THEIR
PREPARATION
Dieter Hendriks, Geneva, Switzerland, assignor to Sublistatic
Holding, S.A., Claris, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 948,288, Oct. 2, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 737,371, Nov. 1, 1976,
abandoned. This application Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,100
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 6, 1975,
14347/75; Jan. 30, 1976, 1200/76
Int. a.3 G03G 9/10
U.S. a. 430—137 5 Qaims
1. Process for the preparation of a developer in the form of
virtually spherical particles, wherein a disjjersion in water
containing (A) 3-hydroxyquinophthalone or (B) an anthraqui-
none dyestuff which contains at least (1) two amino substitu-
ents different from one another or (2) one amino and one
hydroxy substituent and which passes into the vapor state at
between 150° and 220° C. under atmospheric conditions, of
magnetic particles and of a coating material consisting of an
aqueous dispersion of a thermoplastic resin or of a mixture of a
thermoplastic resin with a wax or a plasticiser, is sprayed in the
form of fine droplets and then dried in an appropriate stream of
air in a spray dryer apparatus. i
II 4,391,894 I
COLORED PHOTOSENSITIVE COMPOSITION
Ken-ichl Shlmazu, Pleasantville, and Albert Deutsch, Scarsdale,
both of N.Y., assignors to Polychrome Corporation, Yonkers,
N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 919,098, Jun. 20, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 521,433, Nov. 6, 1974,
abandoned. This application Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 298,054
Int. a.3 G03C 1/60. 11/18; G03F 7/00; G03C 1/71
VJS. a. 430—154 9 Qaims
1. A m^hod of providing a substantially uniform colored
photosensitive composition useful in the reprographic ari,
which comprises:
a. Reacting a water soluble basic dye with a water soluble
organic acid or the ammonium or alkali metal salt thereof,
in an aqueous medium to precipitate a dye substance
which is substantially insoluble in water, substantially
4,391,895
DIFFUSION CONTROL LAYERS FOR DIFFUSION
TRANSFER PHOTOGRAPHIC HLM
William C. Schwarzel, Billerica, and Lloyd D. Taylor, Lexing-
ton, both of Mass., assignors to Polaroid Corporation, Cam-
bridge, Mass.
FUed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,031
Int. a.3 G03C 1/76, 1/40. 1/48, 5/54
U.S. Q. 430—215 31 Qaims
1. A diffusion transfer photographic film unit comprising:
a photosensitive element including at least one photosensi-
tized silver halide emulsion layer having an image-dye
forming material associated therewith;
an image-receiving layer;
a means for introducing an alkaline processing composition
within said film unit;
a neutralizing layer; and,
at least one diffusion control layer positioned between inter-
acting components of said film unit;
said diffusion controj layer comprising a urethane |x>lymer
containing a recurrent backbone unit capable of undergo-
ing /3-elimination depolymerization in an alkaline environ-
ment.
4,391,896
MIXTURE OF NONDIFFUSIBLE REDOX
DYE-RELEASERS FOR CURVE SHAPE CONTROL
Thomas O. Maier, and Jack L. Richards, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to E^astman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 20, 1978, Ser. No. 944,113
Int. Q.3 G03C 1/40 1/10 5/54
U.S. Q. 430—223 39 Claims
14. In a photographic assemblage comprising:
(a) a support having thereon at least one photosensitive
silver halide emulsion layer having associated therewith a
first ballasted, nondiffusible, redox, dye-releasing or dye
precursor-releasing compound capable of releasing a dif-
fusible dye or dye precursor;
(b) a dye image-receiving layer; and
(c) an alkaline processing composition and means for dis-
charging same within said assemblage;
said assemblage containing a silver halide developing agent;
the improvement wherein said silver halide emulsion layer has
associated therewith a second ballasted, nondiffusible, redox,
dye-releasing or dye precursor-releasing compound capable of
releasing a diffusible dye or dye precursor, said second com-
pound having a different relative reactivity than said first
compound, the reactivity of the compound which is more-
reactive being at least 1.5 times the reactivity of the compoimd
which is less-reactive.
15. The photographic assemblage of claim 14 wherein each
306
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said ballasted compound has said dye or dye precursor moiety
attached thereto through a sulfonamido group which is alkali-
cleavable upon oxidation.
431,897
DIAZO LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTING PLATE
DEVELOPING PROCESS
Robert F. Gracia, Scituate, Mass., and Howard A. Fromson, 15
Rogues Ridge Rd., Weston, Conn. 06880, assignors to Howard
A. Fromson, Weston, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 85,146, Oct. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,341
Int. a.5 G03F 7/08
U.S. a. 430—302 6 Claims
1. Process for removing unexposed diazo from a litho-
graphic printing plate comprising a silicated aluminum sub-
strate having a hydrophiJic, anionic, negatively charged sur-
face and on and bonded to the substrate, a light sensitive,
cationic, positively charged, water-soluble diazo material
which has been selectively exposed to actinic light in an image
area which comprises contacting the plate after exposure with
a solution consisting essentially of an anionic material in water
in a quantity and for a time sufficient to couple the diazo with
the anionic material and dissolve the coupled product from the
non-image area thereby overcoming the bond between the
diazo and the substrate leaving a clean, hydrophilic non-image
area.
4,391,899
METHOD OF MAKING A HALF-TONE GRAVURE
PRINTING PLATE
Teruo Suzuki, Ageo, Japan, assignor to Toppan Printing Co.,
Ltd., Japan
Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,197
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1980, 55-118712
Int. Q\? G03C 5m
U.S. a. 430—307 2 Claims
<0
P»rc«nug* ot bota m ■ hall -la
potrti** of an eriotnal
4,391,898 *
METHOD OF MAKING A SLEEVE FOR A PRINTING
CYLINDER
Hendricus J. van der Velden, RN Cuyck, Netherlands, assignor
to Stork Screens, B.V., Boxmeer, Netherlands
FUed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,866
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 4, 1980,
8003895
Int. Q\> G03F 7/02
U.S. a. 430—306 8 Claims
1. A method of making a gravure printing plate by using a
planographic or relief half-tone positive comprising the steps
of:
contacting said half-tone positive on a photosensitive film of
low contrast, projecting light on said photosensitive film
and thereafter effecting development thereof to thereby
make a half-tone negative which is inverted relative to
said half-tone positive;
contacting a contact screen on a lith-type photosensitive film
with said negative being used as an original;
forming an image of said half-tone negative on said lith-type
photosensitive film with a camera, the F number of the
diaphragm of the lens of said camera being selected to
make it impossible to resolve the dots of said half-tone
negative at a resolving power (Rl) represented by
Rl =
1
1.22 XF(1 -I- m)
-» V
7. A method of forming a cylindrical sleeve for a printing
cylinder, comprising the steps of disposing a thin-walled cylin-
drical screen about the outer suface of a temporary, rigid,
cylindrical support, said screen defining a pattern of intercon-
nected channels extending to the lateral edges of said surface,
applying a sheet of elastomeric composition which is harden-
able under the influence of radiation about said screen, said
sheet comprising a photopolymer, applying a vacuum to said
channels for removing any accumulated gases between the
outer surface of said support and said sheet, and subjecting said
sheet to a heat treatment for securing said screen and sheet
together by curing, the heat treatment being carried out after
removing said screen and said sheet from said support, and
thereafter closely fitting said secured together screen and sheet
after the heat treatment about a cylindrical core member, and
providing a pattern on the outer surface of said sheet using a
radiation process.
(where Rz, is the resolving power of the lens, X is the wave-
length of photographing light, F is the F number of the dia-
phragm of the lens of said camera, and m is the photographing
magnification) thereby producing an image formed on said
lith-type photosensitive film which is different in at least one
respect as to the shape of at least one dot, the number of screen
lines of said contact screen or a screen angle in comparison
with that of said original half-tone positive;
developing said lith-type photosensitive film to make a new
planographic or relief half-tone positive which is different
in at least one respect as to the number of screen lines, the
screen angle, the magnification and the shape of at least
one dot in comparison with said original half-tone posi-
tive;
effecting the following steps:
exposing said half-tone positive from said lith-type photo-
sensitive film to light in contact with a photosensitive
resist forming material,
correcting an error in gradation of a middle tone portion
between said new half-tone positive and said original
half-tone positive by means of exposing said photosensi-
tive resist forming material to the light so that the dots
of said half-tone positive may be blurred by forming a
spacing between said new half-tone positive and said
photosensitive resist forming material, and
exposing a gravure screen to light in contact with said
photosensitive resist forming material; and
J
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
307
etching a gravure cylinder through said resist on said
cylinder.
4,391,900
PROCESS FOR DEVELOPMENT-PROCESSING SILVER
HALIDE LIGHT-SENSITIVE MATERIAL
Takashi Toyoda; Tadao Shishido, both of Minami-ashigara, and
Teruaki Tsujikawa, Otsu, all of Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo
Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,243
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 13, 1981, 56-3487
Int. a.3 G03C 5/iO
U.S. a. 430—355 19 Qaims
1. A process for development-processing an image wise
exposed silver halide photographic light-sensitive material
comprising processing the material with a developing solution
containing 0. 1 mol/liter or more of sulfite ion and at least one
compound represented by formula (I)
N:
I
N
!N
SM ' '
Rl
(I)
R2
wherein n represents an integer of from 2 to 6; each of Ri and
R2 represents an alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
and M represents hydrogen or an alkali metal atom.
4,391,901
PHOTOSENSITIVITY ENHANCEMENT OF PLZT
CERAMICS BY POSITIVE ION IMPLANTATION
Cecil E. Land, and Paul S. Peercy, both of Albuquerque, N.
Mex., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the United States Department of Energy, Washing-
ton, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 159,318, Jun. 13, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,612
Int. Q.3 G03C 1/00
U.S. Q. 430—495 11 Qaims
1. In a lead lanthanum zirconate titanate (PLZT) ceramic
plate used for a photoferroelectric image storage and display
device, the improvement comprising: the PLZT ceramic hav-
ing a near surface region implanted with positive ions to pro-
vide enhanced photosensitivity of the plate in the near-UV
spectrum, wherein said ions are selected from the group con-
sisting of helium ions, hydrogen ions, argon ions, neon ions,
aluminum ions, chromium ions, and iron ions, and are im-
planted below the surface of said PLZT plate at a depth of
from 0. 1 to 2 microns.
4,391,902
PHOTOGRAPHIC HLM WITH VARIABLE WINDOWS
Robert F. Wilde, 2023 Sheffield, Chicago, III. 60614
I i Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,882
' ' Int. Q.5 G03C i/02
U.S. Q. 430—501 6 Qaims
"\ *r3A
-^
1 Q O D 0 O O nOOODDDDDDDDCOOCOf
i
.16
|0 O/O lOnOnOCOD o/o iDDDOobDODt^
1. A film product comprising at least two elongated film
strips of photosensitive material each divided into a sequence
of longitudinally spaced frames and arranged in face-to-face.
superposed relation with the frames of the strips being longitu-
dinally aligned, one of said film strips having certain of the
frames thereof free of said photosensitive material whereby
light from an image to be photographed is adapted to pass
therethrough for registry on the next adjacent sui>erposed
strip, said strips being wound on a single spool.
4,391,903
IONIC COPOLYMERS IN PHOTOGRAPHIC
LIGHT-SENSITIVE SILVER HALIDE HLMS
Peter K. Sysak, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,738
Int. a.5 G03C 1/72
U.S. Q. 430—629 5 Claims
1. A photographic film comprising a silver halide emulsion
layer superimposed on a support, characterized in that the
binder component of the silver halide emulsion layer consists
essentially of a major amount in parts by weight of gelatin and
a minor amount in parts by weight of a poly(styrene sulfonic
acid-co-maleic acid) salt of the formula:
CH— CH2-
SO3-M +
-CH-
I
CO2
L M +
-CH-
I
CO2
M+ J,
wherein M is an alkali metal, m= 1-3, n = 1, and x = 5-50.
' 4,391,904
TEST STRIP KITS IN IMMUNOASSAYS AND
COMPOSITIONS THEREIN
David J. Litman, Cupertino, and Edwin F. Ullman, Atherton,
both of Calif., assignors to Syva Company, Palo Alto, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 106,620, Dec. 26, 1979, Pat. No.
4,299,916. This application Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,022
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 GOIN ii/54, 21/00. 1/48. 21/06
U.S. Q. 435—7 9 Qaims
1. A kit for use in an immunoassay comprising in combina-
tion:
(a) an insoluble porous surface to which is bound ( 1 ) a mem-
ber of an immunological pair consisting of ligand and
immunoglobulin antiligand and (2) an enzyme;
(b) an enzyme bound to a member of an immunological pair
consisting of ligand and an immunoglobulin antiligand;
and
(c) a leuco dye which undergoes an enzymatically catalyzed
reaction to produce an insoluble dye,
wherein the amount of enzyme bound to said member of an
immunological pair is related to the amount of said mem-
ber of an immunological pair bound to an insoluble surface
in a ratio to substantially optimize the sensitivity of said
immunoassay, wherein said enzyme bound to said porous
surface and said enzyme bound to said member of an
immunological pair are related by the product of one
being the substrate of the other.
6. A method for detecting the presence of an antiligand
analyte in a sample suspected of containing said analyte,
wherein said antiligand analyte is a member of an immunologi-
cal pair (mip) consisting of ligand and homologous antiligand;
said method involving (1) the partitioning in relation to the
amount of analyte in said sample of a first enzyme bound
to a mip — enzyme-bound-mip — between a surface of a
liquid phase, said surface being porous and permitting
approach and binding of enzyme-bound-mip to mip bound
308
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
to said surface— mip-bound-surface — either directly or in
combination with said ligand, where said partitioning is
through the intermediacy of Hgand-antiHgand binding to a
mip-bound-surface to which a second enzyme is bound,
where said second enzyme is related to said first enzyme
by the product of one being the substrate of the other and
I I where said first and second enzymes are oxido reductases;
and (2) the change in concentration of a signal generating
compound associated with said surface, said change in
I I concentration being in relation to the amount of reaction
product produced by said enzyme bound to said surface;
said method comprising:
(a) combining in an aqueous assay medium,
(1) said sample;
(2) mip-bound-surface, wherein substantially all of said
I surface and said mip-bound-surface is uniformly con-
' tacted with said sample;
(3) enzyme-bound-mip; and
(4) the remaining members of the signal producing system,
I which includes a solute system which is capable of
undergoing a catalyzed reaction to produce a product
which results in a change in amount of a signal generat-
ing compound associated with said surface and capable
I of producing a detectible signal;
(b) waiting a sufficient time for enzyme-bound-mip to diffuse
to said surface and at least a portion of said enzyme-
bound-mip to bind to said surface through the intermedi-
acy of ligand-antiligand binding to result in a change in the
amount of signal generating compound associated with
said surface in relation to the amount of analyte in said
sample; and
(C) determining the intensity of said detectible signal at said
surface as a function of the amount of analyte in said
sample.
matrix in amounts and proportions such that the carrjer matrix
is capable of differentiating between concentrations of 2,000
and 5,000 milligrams of glucose per deciliter.
4,391.907
METHOD FOR PRODUONG L-V ALINE BY
FERMENTATION
Hiroshi Matsui; Takayasu Tsuchida, both of Kawasaki, and
Shigeru Nakamori, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to
Ajinomoto Company Incorporated, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,123
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 13, 1979, 54-161974
Int. a.3 C12N 1/20, 15/00: C12P 13/08; C12R 1/185, 1/19
U.S. a. 435—115 11 Claims
1. A method of producing L-valine by fermentation which
comprises culturing in a culture medium an L-valine-produc-
ing microorganism selected from the group consisting oi Esch-
erichia coli NRRL B- 12287 and Escherichia coli NRRL B- 12288
which is obtained by incorporation into a recipient strain of the
genus Escherichia, of a hybrid plasmid having inserted therein
a DNA fragment with genetic information related to L-valine
production which fragment is derived from a donor strain of
the genus Escherichia which is resistant to a valine analogue,
and recovering the L-valine accumulated in the culture me-
dium.
4,391,905
SYSTEM FOR THE DETERMINATION OF GLUCOSE IN
FLUIDS
Robert Bauer, Bristol, Ind., assignor to Miles Laboratories, Inc.,
Elkbart, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 233,928, Feb. 12, 1981, Pat. No. 4,340,669.
I This application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,266
' Int. a.^ GOIN 33/50: C12Q 1/54
U.S. a. 435—14 5 Qaims
1. A method for the semi-quantitative determination of glu-
cose in urine which comprises contacting the urine with a test
strip comprising a bibulous carrier matrix bearing the residue
left by impregenating it with a liquid reagent solution com-
prised of a solvent, glucose oxidase, a peroxidatively active
substance and m-anisidine with subsequent evaporation of the
solvent to leave the dry reagent with the reagent components
being present in the carrier matrix in amounts and proportions
such that the carrier matrix is capable of differentiating be-
tween concentrations of 2,000 and 5,000 milligrams of glucose
per deciliter, and determining the amount of glucose present
from the color change in the reagent.
4,391,908
METHOD FOR PRODUaNG QTRIC AODS
Takeshi Tabuchi, and Matazo Abe, both of Tokyo, Japan, as-
signors to Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 783,740, Dec. 13, 1968, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 735,199, Jun. 7, 1968,
abandoned. This application Jun. 16, 1978, Ser. No. 916,262
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 7, 1967, 52-36391;
Dec. 13, 1967, 52-79802
Int. Ci? C12P 7/48: C12N 1/28: C12R 1/72. 1/73, 1/74
U.S. a. 435—144 3* Claims
1. A method for producing ( -|- )-isocitric acid which com-
prises inoculating a (-l-)-isocitric acid-accumulating and hy-
drocarbon-assimilating strain of a yeast belonging to the genus
Candida in an aqueous culture medium containing at least one
normal paraffin containing 9 to 20 carbon atoms in the mole-
cule as the main carbon source; incubating the culture at a pH
of from about 4 to about 7.5 until (-i-)-isocitric acid is substan-
tially accumulated in the culture broth; and separating the
so-accumulated (-)-)-isocitric acid therefrom.
4,391,906
SYSTEM FOR THE DETERMINATION OF GLUCOSE IN
FLUIDS
Robert Bauer, Bristol, Ind., assignor to Miles Laboratories, Inc.,
Elkhart, Ind.
Dirision of Ser. No. 233,928, Feb. 12, 1981, Pat. No. 4,340,669.
This application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,267
Int. a? GOIN 33/50: C12Q 1/54
U.S. a. 435—14 3 Qaims
1. A test capable of the determination of the presence of
glucose in a liquid test sample which device comprises a carrier
matrix which bears the residue left by impregnating it with a
liquid reagent solution of solvent, glucose oxidase, a peroxida-
tively active substance and m-anisidine with subsequent evapo-
ration of the solvent to leave the dry reagent composition
wherein the reagent components are present in the carrier
4,391,909
MICROCAPSULES CONTAINING VIABLE TISSUE
CELLS
Franklin Lim, Richmond, Va., assignor to Damon Corporation,
Needham Heights, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 24,000, Mar. 28, 1979, Pat. No.
4,352,883, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 953,413,
Oct. 23, 1978, abandoned. This application May 1, 1981, Ser.
No. 259,595
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 5, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? C12N 11/10, 11/04. 5/00
U.S. a. 435—178 12 Claims
5. An artificial organ suitable for implantation in a mamma-
lian body comprising a microcapsule comprising a polysaccha-
ride having acidic groups thereof cross-linked with a polymer
having a molecular weight greater than 3,000, said membrane
being no greater than about 2.0 mm in diameter and containing
one or more viable, healthy, physiologically active living tissue
cells, said microcapsule being impermeable to immune system
proteins but permeable to tissue nutrients and metabolic prod*
ucts produced by the tissue. _
July 5,
983
CHEMICAL
309
4,391,910
PROCESSES FOR PRODUONG THERMOPHILIC
ASPARTASE
Karuo Kimura, Hofu; Kenichiro Takayama, Atsugi; Yutaka
Ado, Machida; Tamotsu Kawamoto, Sagamihara, and Izumi
Masunaga, Fuchu, aU of Japan, assignors to Kyowa Hakko
Kogyo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,494
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 27, 1979, 54-152468
Int. a.3 C12N 9/88: C12P 13/20: C12R 7/07
U.S. a 435-232 4 claims
1. A process for producing thermophilic aspartase which
comprises culturing a thermophilic aspartase producing Bacil-
lus aminogenes having the identifying characterestics of NRRL
B 12061 or Bacillus thermoaminophilus having the identifying
characteristics of NRRL B 12060 in a nutrient medium untU
substantial enzymatic activity is detectable and thereafter iso-
lating said thermophilic aspartase.
mg a shell and a plurality of hollow fibers enclosed in the shell,
said hollow fibers being open at either end outside of the shell
and having a pore diameter of from about 20 A to 10* A,
431,911
PREPARATION OF HERPES SIMPLEX ANTIGEN FOR
THE DIAGNOSIS OF CARONOMA
Giulio Tarro, Naples, Italy, assignor to Depa S.p.A., Italy
Filed Jan. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 115,375
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 18, 1979, 49082 A/79
Int. Q.3 C12N 1/02, 7/02: C12Q 1/00
U.S. Q. 435-239 ,3 c^^^
1. A process for the mdustrial production of a non-virion
antigen of the Herpes simplex virus for the diagnosis of the
epithelial tissue tumors or carcinoma, in which the cells to be
infected by the antigen are prepared starting from the guinea
pig kidneys with the addition to said material of sterile trypsin
and a culture medium consisting of lactoalbumin and calf
serum, comprising the steps of:
(i) growing the cells with a dynamic system inside Spinner
flasks provided with magnetic revolving stirrers rotating
at speeds higher than about 50 r.p.m. and operating at a
temperature of 37" C. and with successive additions of
culture medium, inoculating the so obtained cells with
Herpes simplex virus to with added culture medium, said
infection phase being performed according to a volume
ratio of the virus to the cells equal or higher than 1, but not
higher than 100, the contact between the cells and the
virus being maintained for about 3 hours; and collecting
the antigen which is formed therein;
(ii) purifying the collected antigen, by removing therefrom
all the proteins and impurities which can negatively affect
the tests for the diagnosis; comprising, a first centrifuga-
tion with recovery of the liquid phase from the first cen-
tnfugation step; precipitating the antigen protein and
other proteins, a second centrifugation; diluting the resid-
ual solids from the second contrifugation using a buffer;
purifying said diluted solids by molecular separation using
organic gellified copolymers extraction column, collect-
ing the proteins from the antigen purification on a column
wherein the proteins are separated on the basis of their
different electric charges; eluting said collected proteins
and removing the non-glycosilated proteins by affinity
chromatography on a column; and recovering purified
antigens.
wherein the culture medium passes through the interior of the
hollow fibers and floating animal cells are introduced and are
cultivated in the space between the shell and the hollow fibers.
4,391 913
TEMPERATURE REGULATING SYSTEM FOR THE
CONTROL OF TEMPERATURE IN A ROOM
Erik C. V. Keldmann, Bellinge, Denmark, assignor to Elpan
ApS, Odense, Denmark
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 48,638, Jun. 14, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388^14
Claims priority, application Denmark, May 21, 1979, 2074/79
Int. Q.3 F28F 27/00: GOIK 7/00
U.S.a. 236-36 4ciainM
ALARM
431,912
CELL CULTIVATION METHOD AND FLOATING
ANIMAL CELL CULTURE UNIT FOR THE SAME
Koichi Yoshida, Fiyi, and Fusakazu Hayano, Chigasaki, both of
Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,416
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 18, 1979, 54/118833
Int. Q.3 C12N 5/02: CUM 3/00
U.S. Q. 435-241 10 Claims
1. A method for cultivating floating animal cells comprising
introducing a culture medium into a cell culture unit compris-
I032O.G.— 11
1. A temperature regulating system for controlling the tem-
perature in a room comprising a feeler gauge adapted to con-
trol the supply of energy to a radiator system in the room, said
gauge being adapted to be suspended in a room and comprising
a radiation sensor and a convection sensor for sensing the
radiation and air temperature respectively, and a wireless
transmitter means, said convection sensor being operatively
connected to said transmitter means to control the transmitter
means to emit signals depending on the radiation and air tem-
perature sensed at regular intervals, and a receiver controlling
means for receiving said signals and regulating the supply of
energy to the radiator system, said convection sensor compris-
ing a thermal sensitive member for sensing air temperature and
having properties which change in response to temperature
changes, said radiation sensor comprising a thin-walled hemi-
sphere of good heat-conducting material having a black mat
radiation absorbing surface connected in heat-conducting rela-
tionship with said convection sensor, said transmitter means
comprising a printed circuit including said convection sensor
therein so that signals representing said changed properties are
transmitted by said transmitter means to said receiver, pro-
gramming means in said receiver whereby the desired temper-
ature can be programmed in the receiver, and means to com-
pare said signals with said desired temperature.
310
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5,. 1983
4,391^14
STRENGTHENED GLASS-CERAMIC ARTICLE AND
METHOD
George H. BeaU, Big Flats, N.Y., assignor to Corning Glass
Works, Corning, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,790
Int a.3 C03C i/22. 3/04
VS. a. 501—4 3 Claims
4,391,916
ALKALIFREE GLASS FOR PHOTOETCHING MASK
Keqji Nakagawa, Tokorozawa, and Isao Masuda, Tokyo, both of
Japan, assignors to Hoya Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 351,688
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 14, 1981, 56-126805
Int. a.3 C03C 3/10
U.S. a. 501—62 2 Claims
V
1200 1
CRYSTALS
CRYSTALS
1. A glass-ceramic body composed essentially of two phases,
a crystal phase and a residual glass matrix, the crystal phase
being a lithium aluminosilicate selected from the group of
beta-spodumene solid solution and a stuffed beta-quartz solid
solution having a very low coefficient of thermal expansion,
the residual glass matrix being a borosilicate or a
boroaluminosilicate constituting about 15-30 percent by vol-
ume of the body but being geometrically isolated in some areas
of said body, thereby setting up point compressive stresses in
the crystalline network to develop a transgranular fracture
pattern in said body, and having a coefficient of thermal expan-
sion substantially higher than that of the crystal phase, the two
phases forming a dilatant system wherein the thermal expan-
sion curve of the system has two distinct sections diverging
from a transition temperature in the range of SOO'-TSO* C, the
upper section of the curve being steep and being controlled by
the residual glass phase, and the lower section being essentially
flat and corresponding to the curve of the crystal phase, the
body being chemically composed essentially of, in percent by
weight as calculated on an oxide basis, 60-80% Si02, 14-25%
AI2O3, 2.5-7% Li20, 2-5%, B2O3, 0-2% MgO and/or ZnO,
3-6% Ti02 and/or Zr02 and 0.5-5 mole percent of glass-modi-
fying oxides selected from Na20, K2O and the divalent oxides
CaO, BaO, SnO and PbO, the molar ratio of Al203:Li20 being
greater than unity. ;
>IIOUII10FI>bO(Ml%l
1. An alkali-free glass for a photoetching mask, consisting
essentially of, 55 to 65% Si02, 7 to 1 1% AI2O3, 1 to 1 1% PbO,
7 to 20% CaO, 3 to 13% MgO, 3 to 13% ZnO, 0 to 3% Zr02,
0 to 3% F2, 0 to 5% AS2O3 and 0 to 5% Sb203, wherein all
percents are molar.
4,391,917
ALUMINO-SILICATE REFRACTORY BRICK
David J. Michael, White Oak, and Berhl E. Wishon, Bethel
Park, both of Pa., assignors to Dresser Industries, Inc., Dal-
las Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 200,809, Oct. 27, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 402,008
Int. a.3 C04B 35/18. 35/52
U.S. a. 501—100 1 Claims
1. Carbonaceous bonded refractory shapes comprising from
about 1 to 35%, by weight, carbon and the balance a non-basic
refractory aggregate, said refractory aggregate comprising at
least about 75%, by weight, andalusite, said refractory shapes
being characterized by the absence of substantial shrinkage
after coking at 2000' P., and the absence of muUite.
4,391,915
PREOSION PRESSED OPTICAL COMPONENTS MADE
OF GLASS AND GLASS SUITABLE THEREFOR
Gertraud A. A. Meden-Piesslinger, and Johannes H. P. Van de
Heuvel, both of Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
I I FUed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328>W
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, Oct 22, 1981,
8104778
I Int. C1.J C03C i//6
VS. a. 501—48 * Claims
1. Precision pressed optical components made of glass,
which components are pressed from a glass containing phos-
phorus pentoxide (P2O5), one or more alkali metal oxides and
one or more alkaline earth oxides, characterized in that the
glass consists of in a percentage by weight:
P2O5: 45-55
j AI2O3: 3.5-9
K2O: 5-20
Li20: 0-3
BaO: 8-15
ZnO: 4.5-9
MgO: 0-6
PbO: 0-18
Si02: 0-1
B2O3: 0-3
Ti02: 0-2.
4,391,918
CERAMIC FOAM HLTER AND AQUEOUS SLURRY FOR
MAKING SAME
Jerry W. Brockmeyer, Hendersonville, N.C., assignor to Swiss
Aluminium Ltd., Chippis, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 227,134, Jan. 22, 1981, Pat. No. 4,343,704.
This appUcation Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,400
Int. a.3 C04B 35/02
U.S. a. 501— 127 8 Claims
1. An aqueous slurry for use in preparing a ceramic foam
having the following composition: 55 to 70% AI2O3, 2 to 10%
micron-sized reactive alumina, 1 to 5% montmorillonite and 1
to 10% ceramic fibers.
4,391^)19
ALCOHOL SEPARATION PROCESS
Ian D. Burdett, Charleston, W. Va., assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,098
Int a.^ C07C 27/06. 27/34
VS. a. 518—725 13 Claims
1. A process for separating alkane polyol from a liquid phase
homogeneous mixture obtained from a homogeneous liquid
phase reaction of oxides of carbon and hydrogen to produce
alkane polyol, said liquid phase homogeneous mixture com-
prising alkane polyol, production solvent and catalyst compris-
JULY 5. 1983
CHEMICAL
311
ing rhodium, ruthenium or cobalt as the carbonyl complex,
wherein said production solvent is a solvent for rhodium,
ruthenium or cobalt of the catalyst, said process comprising:
(a) extracting at a temperature of at least about 50* C, alkane
polyol from said liquid phase homogeneous mixture by
contact with an extraction solvent of polyhydric alcohol
having at least four carbon atoms and at least four hy-
droxyl groups, such that two liquid phases are formed,
one phase containing the greater concentration of alkane
polyol and extraction solvent and the other phase contain-
ing the greater concentration of production solvent and
the greater portion of rhodium, ruthenium or cobalt of the
catalyst,
(b) separating phases, and
(c) recovering alkane polyol from the extraction solvent-
containing phase.
4,391,920
POROSE, PULVERFORMIGE POLYMERTEILCHEN
Wolfgang Lange, Obemburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Akzo NV, Amhem, Netherlands
FUed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,675
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 15,
1980, 3026688
Int a.3 C08J 9/26 "
U.S. CL 521—61 14 Claims
1. Process for the production of powdery, porous polymer
particles, characterized by the introduction into a bed of solid-
substance particles at a temperature above the segregating
temperature, of a homogenous mixture having a minimum of
two components, one component therein being a meltable
polymer and the other component a fluid inert to the polymer,
both components forming a binary system which has in its
liquid phase a range of complete miscibility and also a range
with a miscibility gap, by subsequent cooling said mixture to a
temperature below the solidification temperature of the poly-
mer in the mixture, by comminution of the cake-like mass as
obtained and by separation of the polymer substance from the
inert fluid and solid-substance particles.
4,391,921
lELASTOMERIC SILICONE SPONGE
Robert D. Johnson, Charlotte, N.C., assignor to Dow Coming
Corporation, Midland, Mich.
FUed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 391,898
Int a.3 C08J 9/28. 9/30
V.S. a. 521—66 13 Qaims
1. A method comprising '
(a) freezing a silicone emulsion which provides an elasto-
meric product upon removal of the water, having a pH in
the range of 9 to 11.5 inclusive, comprising water, 100
parts by weight of an anionically stabilized hydroxyl
endblocked polydiorganosiloxane having an average mo-
lecular weight of greater than 10,000, an organic tin com-
pound, and at least one part by weight colloidal silica,
long enough to freeze the water and produce a solid fro-
zen article,
(b) thawing the solid frozen article yielding a wet elasto-
meric sponge-like article, and
(c) drying the wet elastomeric sponge-like article until the
water is removed and an elastomeric sponge is obtained.
4,391,922
BLOWING AGENTS AS CURATIVES FOR
ETHYLENE/CARBON MONOXIDE COPOLYMERS
Jerald R. HarreU, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
FUed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,467
Int C1.J C08J 9/70
U.S. a. 521—88 10 Qaims
1. A foamable composition comprising
(a) a copolymer having a melt index of 0.1 to 500 of (i)
ethylene (ii) about 1 to 25 weight percent carbon monox-
ide based on the copolymer (iii) 1 to 75 weight percent
based on the copolymer, of a softening monomer selected
from the group consisting of alkyl acrylates and methacry-
lates having linear or branched alkyl groups of 1 to 18
carbon atoms, vinyl esters of saturated carboxylic acids
having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and vinyl alkyl esters wherein
the alkyl group contains 1 to 18 carbon atoms; and
(b) 2 to 20 weight percent based on the copolymer of a
blowing agent curative selected from the group consisting
of mono- and pxjlyazoformamide compounds, sulfonyl
hydrazide compounds, sulfonyl semicarbazide compounds
and dinitrosomethyleneamine compounds.
4,391,923
LOW DENSITY CLOSED-CELL FOAMED ARTICLES
FROM ETHYLENE COPOLYMERA INYL OR
VINYLIDENE HALIDE BLENDS
John Rys-Sikora, Bel Aire, Md., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
FUed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,449
Int C1.5 C08J 9/06; C08L 81/00
VS. a. 521—96 13 Qaims
1. A crosslinkable foamable composition comprising
(a) 5 to 95 weight percent based on polymer weight of a
copolymer of
(i) ethylene;
(ii) 1 to 60 weight percent based on copolymer of a soften-
ing monomer selected from the group consisting of
unsaturated mono- or dicarboxylic acids of 3-20 carbon
atoms, esters of said unsaturated mono- or dicarboxylic
acids, vinyl esters of saturated carboxylic acids where
the acid group has 2-18 carbon atoms, vinyl alkyl ethers
wherein the aJkyl group has 1-18 carbon atoms, vinyl or
vinylidene halides, acrylonitrile, methacrylonitrile,
norbomene, alpha olefins of 3-12 carbon atoms and
vinyl aromatic compounds; and
(iii) 1 to 30 weight percent based on copolymer of a mem-
ber of the group consisting of carbon monoxide or
sulfur dioxide;
(b) 5 to 95 weight percent based on polymer weight of a
vinyl or vinylidene halide polymer; and
(c) 0.5 to 20 weight percent based on the blend of a chemical
blowing agent
(d) from 0.2 to 5.0 percent based on the blend of a free-radi-
cal crosslinking agent.
4,391,924
HIGH TEMPERATURE THERMOBARRIER
COMPOSITIONS
John R. Uram, Jr., Glendale, Ariz., assignor to Goodyear Aero-
space Corporation, Akron, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 306,261, Sep. 28, 1981, which is
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 232,054, Feb. 5, 1981, Pat No.
4,343,928, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 204,424,
Nov. 6, 1980, Pat No. 4,352,848, and Ser. No. 70,390, Aug, 28,
1979, Pat. No. 4,294,886, said Ser. No. 204,424, is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 70,390,. This appUcation Oct.
22, 1982, Ser. No. 436,105
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 13,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int Q.^ C08G 59/40
V.S. Q. 521—178 23 Claims
1. A high heat-resistant thermobarrier composition, compris-
ing:
a blend having
(a) about 100 parts by weight of an epoxy resin;
(b) from about 5 to about 30 parts by weight of the borox-
ine having the formula
312
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
OR '
I
B— O
/ \
O B— OR
\ /
B-0
I
OR
where R is a group having from 1 to 18 carbon atoms;
(c) from about 1 to about 10 parts by weight of a phenyl
substituted alkyl alcohol, said alkyl alcohol having from
1 to 20 carbon atoms; and
(d) a heat-resistant filler, the amount of said filler being
sufficient to form a thixotropic blend.
4,391,925
SHEAR THICKEMNG WELL CONTROL FLUID
Donald Mintz, Fort Lee, N.J., and Cyrus A. Irani, Monroeville,
Pa., assignors to Exxon Research & Engineering Co., Florham
Park, N J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 79,437, Sep. 27, 1979, abandoned. This
I application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,812
' Int. a.3 C08L 3/34. 5/01; E21B 33/13
U.S. a. 523—130 28 Qaims
1. A shear thickening composite comprising:
(a) a water swellable clay capable of rapidly forming a high
strength gel when mixed with water, said clay being pres-
ent in said composite in sufficient quantity so as to form a
gel having a strength of at least 2000 lb/ 100 ft^;
(b) a first phase comprising water and water soluble poly-
1 mer; and
ic) a second phase comprising oil and surfactant, the water in
!' said first phase being kept separate from said clay by the
intervening second phase, said intervening second phase
remaining intact during low shear pumping of the com-
posite, said intervening second phase rupturing during the
application of high shear to the composite to enable mix-
ing of the water in the first phase and the clay to form the
high strength gel. i
4,391,926
SOIL STABILIZERS AND THEIR PREPARATION
Hubert S. Creyf, Brugge, Belgium, assignor to S.A. PRB n.T.,
Woluwe-St.-Pierre, Belgium
Continuation of Ser. No. 83,710, Oct. 11, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,686
Claims priority, application Belgium, Oct. 11, 1978, 191048
Int. C\? C08L 75/08
UJS. a. 523—132 28 Claims
1. A soil stabilizer in the form of an aqueous composition
which comprises water as a dispersion medium, a dispersed
polyurea polymer, the polyol component of which consists of
one or more polyols with hydrophobic and hydrophilic groups
in a weight ratio between 30/70 and 90/10 and with an average
molecular weight of 1500 to 6000 and a surface active product
selected from the group consisting of: a compound of formula
(CH2CH20)jJl
/
RN— CH2— CH2— N
(CH2CH20)xH (CH2CH20)rH
with X + y + z = 3
wherein R is an alkyl group with 12 to 16 carbon atoms; or a
linear or ramified hydrocarbon sulfonate, optionally contain-
ing ethoxy units; or a compound of formula (II):
RN
\
(CH2CH20),H
(CH2CH20)^
wherein R is an alkyl group with 12 to 16 carbon atoms and
x + y = 1 1, so that the average molecular weight is of the order
of 700, said soil stabilizer being a stable, non-gel dispersion of
particles of said polyurea jwlymer in said water.
4,391,927
ERASABLE INKS CONTAINING THERMOPLASTIC
BLOCK COPOLYMERS
Robert F. Fanner, III, Rockville, Md., assignor to The Gillette
Company, Boston, Mass.
Filed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,307
Int. a.3 C09D 11 /IS; C08K 5/01; C08L 53/00
U.S. a. 523—161 5 Oalms
1. An erasable ink for use in a ball-point writing instrument
consisting essentially of a pigmented organic solvent solution
containing a thermoplastic block copolymer having an ar-
rangement of A (thermoplastic) and B (rubbery) blocks se-
lected from the class consisting of ABA, (AB)nX and (— A-
B) — „; in which said thermoplastic blocks are selected from the
class consisting of styrene, ester and urethane blocks; in which
said rubbery blocks are selected from the class consisting of
butadiene, isoprene and ethylene-butylene blocks; in which the
ratio of said rubbery blocks to said thermoplastic blocks is from
60:40 to 90:10; in which the solubility parameter of said organic
solvent is from about 7 to about 10.5; and containing an effec-
tive amount up to about 10% by weight of said solution of an
additive to increase erasability selected from the class consist-
ing of polybutenes and poly-alpha-methylstyrene.
4,391,928
OPAaFYING POLYMERIC PARTICLE AND USES
Daniel F. Herman, Princeton, and Uno Kruse, East Windsor,
both of N.J., assignors to NL Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,360
Int. a.3 C08L 9/08
U.S. a. 523—201 16 Qaims
1. A latex coating composition of improved opacity and film
characteristics, said coating composition comprising discrete
capsules comprising a solid polymeric core surrounded by a
solid polymeric shell having a Tg less than about 45° C,
wherein the weight ratio of said shell to the total weight of said
capsule ranges from 0.25:1 to 0.5:1.
4,391,929
USEFUL SOLUTIONS OF THE TETRAMETHYLOL
DERIVATIVE OF 4,4'ISO-PROPYLIDENEDIPHENOL
Thomas G. Harris, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to Armstrong World
Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 339,123, Jan. 13, 1980, Pat. No. 4,357,457,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 178,722, Aug. 18,
1980, abandoned. This application Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No.
408,670
Int. a.J C08J 9/32
U.S. a. 523—218 2 Claims
1. A foam produced by heating an acidified mixture of a
solution comprising, in relative proportions, 10 parts by weight
of the tetramethylol derivative of 4,4'iso-propylidenediphenol,
about 15 to about 35 parts by weight water and about 5 to
about 30 parts by weight of ethylene carbonate or propylene
carbonate, with the total parts by weight of water and carbon-
ate ranging from about 40 to about 45 with a surfactant and a
blowing agent.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
313
4,391,930
STABILIZED SUSPENSION OF GLASS BUBBLES IN AN
AQUEOUS DISPERSION OF
TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE POLYMER
Allan H. Olson, Parkersburg, W. Va., assignor to E. I. DuPont
de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 204,956, Nov. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,927
Int. a.3 C08J 9/32
U.S. CI. 523—219 8 Qaims
1. A stabilized suspension of glass bubbles in an aqueous
dispersion of tetrafluoroethylene polymer, which suspension
comprises
(a) water having dispersed therein 45-75% by weight, based
on water, of a tetrafluoroethylene polymer having a melt
viscosity of at least 1 X 10^ poises at 380° C,
(b) 5 to 10% by weight, based on polymer, of a nonionic
surfactant,
(c) 0.1 to 0.5% by weight, based on water and polymer, of a
water-soluble electrolyte, and
(d) 2 to 8% by weight, based on polymer, of glass bubbles
having a density between 0.20 and 0.40 g/ml and an aver-
age size between 20 and 130 micron,
said dispersion having a viscosity between 135 and 300 cps
at25°C.
in a molar ratio of dimethylaminopropylamine to acryloni-
trileof from 1:1 to 0.1:1;
C. recovering a readily invertible water-in-oil emulsion of an
acrylamide-dimethylaminopropyl acrylamide copolymer.
4,391,933
ELECTROPHORETIC COATING OF EPOXY RESINS
FROM NON-AQUEOUS SYSTEMS
Luciano C. Scala, Murrysville, and Louis A. Cargnel, Unity
Township, Westmoreland County, both of Pa., assignors to
Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,101
Int Q.3 C08K 5/07
U.S. Q. 523—454 13 Qaims
1. An emulsion for electrophoretically producing an insulat-
ing coating which comprises:
(a) about 8 to about 20 percent of a solvent as the discontinu-
ous phase;
(b) about 0.5 to about 5 percent of an epoxy resin having an
average molecular weight of at least 2000 dissolved in said
solvent;
(c) about 75 to about 90 percent of a ketone precipitant as the
continuous phase; and
(d) an emulsifier in an amount sufficient to react with the
epoxy and hydroxyl groups in said epoxy resin up to about
900 percent in excess of stoichiometric.
4,391,931
CAPSULES CONTAINING SELF-SETTING
COMPOSITIONS AND THE COMPOSITIONS
Jeffrey G. Haigh, 31 Milton Dr., Newport Pagnell, Buckingham-
shire, and Leslie W. Cheriton, 3 Meadow Way Wing, Leighton
Buzzard, Bedfordshire, both of England
I Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,852
Int. Q.3 C08J 3/00
U.S. Q. 523—318 13 Qaims
1. A capsule containing in separate compartments the inter-
active components of a self-setting composition, one compo-
nent comprising an unhardened resin and the other component
comprising a hardener therefor, the capsule being rupturable
to release the interactive components to intermix them and
form the self-setting composition, at least one of the compo-
nents beig flammable, both free water and hydrated salt being
present, the free water or the hydrated salt or both being
located in at least one of the components prior to the interac-
tion thereof, the concentration of the free water and the hy-
drated salt being sufficient to supress the flame of the flamma-
ble component but still permitting the set composition to have
a strength which exceeds 20 Newtons/mm^.
4,391,932
POLYCATIONIC LATICES OF
DIMETHYLAMINOPROPYL-ACRYLAMIDE, AND
THEIR USE OF AS SLUDGE DEWATERING AGENTS
AND/OR PAPER RETENTION AIDS
Wun T. Tai, Palos Hills, III., assignor to Nalco Chemical Com-
pany, Oak Brook, III.
1 Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,971
Int. Q.3 C08J 3/02
U.S. Q. 523—337 7 Qaims
1. A water-in-oil emulsion of an acrylamide-dimethylamino-
propylacrylamide copolymer having been prepared by the
step>s comprising:
A. forming a water-in-oil emulsion of an acrylamide-
acrylonitrile copolymer, said water-in-oil emulsion con-
taining:
a. 5-60% by weight acrylamide-acrylonitrile copolymer
containing 1-50% by weight acrylonitrile;
b. 20-90% water;
c. 5-75% of an inert hydrophobic organic liquid; and
d. 0.1-21% water-in-oil emulsifying agent;
B. reacting said water-in-oil emulsion of the acrylamide-
acrylonitrile copolymer with dimethylamino-propylamine
4,391,934
DRY TEXTILE WARP SIZE COMPOSITION
David J. Lesley, Greer, and Lawrence C. Davis, Jr., Spartan-
burg, both of S.C., assignors to ABCO Industries, Inc., Roe-
buck, S.C.
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,328
Int. Q.5 C08L 1/28, 3/00
U.S. Q. 524—43 23 Qaims
1. A dry textile warp size composition for yams that contains
synthetic or natural fibrous materials comprising a blend of a
polyester resin, said resin including ionic hydrophilic groups
therein, said resin further being at least substantially saturated,
and in particulate form, and a film former, said blend being at
least water dispersible and the particulate polyester resin in
said blend being at least substantially non-adherent to adjacent
polyester resin particles.
\
4,391,935
FLAME RETARDANT POLYCARBONATE
COMPOSITION
Charles A. Bialous, Evansville; John B. Luce, Mt. Vernon, and
Victor Mark, Evansville, all of Ind., assignors to General
Electric Company, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 9494^64, Oct. 10, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 496,128, Aug. 9, 1974,
abandoned. This application May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260^00
Int. Q.3 C08K 5/45
U.S. Q. 524—82 3 Qaims
1. A composition meeting UL-94 Vo requirements consisting
essentially of (1) a non-halogenated aromatic polycarbonate,
(2) a flame retardant effective amount of an alkali metal or
alkaline earth metal salt of an organic acid of the group
unsubstituted monomeric or polymeric aromatic sulfonic
acids,
monomeric or polymeric aromatic sulfonesulfonic acids,
sulfonic acids of aromatic ketones,
heterocyclic sulfonic acids,
halogenated non-aromatic carboxylic acids,
sulfonic acids of aromatic sulfides,
. monomeric or polymeric aromatic ether sulfonic acids,
aliphatic and olefinic sulfonic acids,
monomeric or polymeric phenol ester sulfonic acids,
unsubstituted or halogenated oxocarbon acids,
sulfonic acids of monomeric and polymeric aromatic carbox-
ylic acids and esters.
314
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
halocycloaliphatic aromatic sulfonic acids,
monomeric or polymeric aromatic amide sulfonic acids,
monomeric or polymeric aromatic sulfonic acids,
(3) and a non-dripping effective amount of an ASTM Type 3
polytetrafluoroethylene.
4^1,936
MOLDING BLENDS
Marion G. Waggoner, Hockessin, Del., assignor to E. L Du Pont
dje Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 208,548, Nov. 20, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 407,244
Int. a.3 C08L 77/02
U.S. a. 524—89 3 Qaims
1. A polyamide molding blend consisting essentially of
(a) at least one polyamide of film-forming molecular weight,
(b) about 1-3 percent by weight of polyamide of carbon
black, and
(c) between about 0.1-2 percent by weight of polyamide of
nigrosine.
4,391,937
COLOR STABLE CHELATED TTTANATE
COMPOSITIONS
James R. Falender, Sanford, and Angelika H. McHale, Midland,
both of Mich., assignors to Dow Coming Corporation, Mid-
land, Mich.
FUed Oct 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,704
I Int. a.J C08L S3/06
U.S. a. 524—119 34 Qaims
1. An elastomeric composition comprising (i) a hydroxy 1
endblocked polydiorganosiloxane, (ii) a silane or mixture of
silanes having an average of from 2.01 to 4 inclusive alkoxy
radicals, and a sufficient amount of a titanium-containing com-
position to yield from 0.1 to 10 parts by weight of chelated
titanium compound based upon 100 parts by weight of the
hydroxyl endblocked polydiorganosiloxane, said elastomeric
composition being stable under conditions excluding moisture
and curable by exposure to moisture, where said tatanium-con-
taining composition comprise the product obtained by mixing,
under conditions which substantially exclude moisture,
(a) a chelated titanium compound having a formula
R^— C— O— 1
It
R*— C
, I
R5— CssO
\
TiZ2
o— c
/ \
\ /
o— c
CCR^h
in which
R3 is a monovalent hydrocarbon radical having from 1 to 18
inclusive carbon atoms,
R* is a monovalent radical selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrocarbon radicals having from 1 to 18 carbon
atoms, and hydrogen,
R5 is a monovalent radical selected from the group consist-
ing of hydrocarbon radicals and aliphatic hydrocar-
bonoxy radicals each having from 1 to 18 inclusive carbon
atoms, and
Z is a radical selected from the group consisting of monova-
lent aliphatic hydrocarbonoxy radicals and monovalent
acyloxy radicals, each having from 1 to 18 inclusive car-
bon atoms; hydroxyl radical; divalent oxygen atoms form-
ing a TiOTi linkage; and when taken together form an
alkanedioxy radical of the formula
(R')2
in which
R^ is a radical selected from the group consisting of hydro-
gen atom and monovalent aliphatic hydrocarbon radicals
having not more than 8 carbon atoms, the total number of
carbon atoms in the alkanedioxy radical is not more than
18, and
(b) from 1 to 100 parts by weight based on 100 parts by
weight of (a), of an additive soluble in the chelated tita-
nium compound and being selected from the group con-
sisting of
(1) an ester of thioalkanoic acid of the formula
o • O
R80C(CH2)aS(CH2)flCOR«
wherein R^ is an alkyl group containing from 1 to 15
inclusive carbon atoms and a is an integer of from 1 to
4 inclusive,
(2),. di-tertiary-butyl phenol containing compounds se-
lected from the group consisting of 2,6-di-tert-butyl-4-
methylphenol, tetrakis[methylene-3-(3',5'-di-tert-
butyl4'-hydroxyphenyl)propionate]methane, octadecyl-
3-(3',5'-di-tert-butyl-4'-hydroxyphenyl)propionate, 4,4'-
methylenebis(2,6-di-tert-butylphenol), 1 ,6-hexamethy-
lene-bis-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxyhydrocinnamate),
and thiodiethylenebis-(3,5-di-tert-butyl-4-hydroxy hy-
drocinnamate),
(3) an organic phosphite selected from the group consist-
ing of the formula
(RlOO)frP(OR")3-4
wherein R''' and R" are selected from the group consisting
of linear or branched alkyl radicals of from 1 to 18 carbon
atoms, and phenyl radical, wherein b is 0 or 1, and the formula
OCH2 CH2O
rI20P C POR'2
\ / \ /
OCH2 CH2O
wherein R'^ is a linear or branched alkyl radical of from
1 to 18 carbon atoms, and
(4) a mixture of (2) and (3), the composition having a color
of less than 13 as determined by the Gardner Color
Scale and being stored under conditions substantially
excluding moisture.
4,391,938
POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE COMPOSITIONS
HAVING IMPROVED CRYSTALLIZATION RATE AND
SURFACE APPEARANCE
Nazir A. Memon, Fallsington, and Cielo S. Myers, Holland, both
of Pa., assignors to Rohm and Haas Company, Philadelphia,
Pa.
FUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,215
Int. a.J C08K 3/40, 5/11: C08G 63/70
U.S. a. 524—270 " CtaiBM
1. Composition comprising polyethylene terephthalate and
from about 1 to about 10% by weight of an additive, based on
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
315
polyethylene terephthalate and additive, said additive being
present to promote crystallization rate and improve surface
appearance, said additive being selected from the group con-
sisting of monomeric esters of citric acid and epoxidized esters
of unsaturated aliphatic carboxylic acids.
" 4,391,939
POLYMER HLM TREATMENT WITH ORGANIC
IMPREGNANT
Gordon P. Hungerford, Palmyra, N.Y., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
I FUed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,029
Int. a.3 B29C 25/00
U.S. Ci. 524—377 9 Claims
1. A self-supporting uniform film consisting essentially of
(a) biaxially-oriented high nitrile addition polymer contain-
ing at least 80% acrylonitrile repeating units; and
(b) dispersed in the polymer triethylene glycol in sufficient
amount to plasticize the polymer and substantially in-
crease film toughness.
4,391,940
FLUOROPOLYMERS WITH SHELL-MODIHED
PARTICLES, AND PROCESSES FOR THEIR
1 1 PREPARATION
JUrgen Kunls, Burghausen; Franz Mayer, and Herbert Fitz, both
of Burgkirchen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 214,464, Dec. 8, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,828
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 12,
1979, 2949907
Int. a.3 C08L 27/18
U.S. a. 524—458 14 Claims
1. Aqueous polymer dispersion containing colloidal particles
of a partially modified tetrafluoroethylene polymer with a
multi-shell particle structure of shells of different composition,
said particles consisting essentially of
(a) a particle core comprising a polymer of 0.05 to 6% by
weight of units of at least one modifying fluoro-olefinic
comonomer of the formulae
(a')
C=C or C=sC
A \ / \
R3 R3 F
Ri
wherein Ri is H, Br or CI; R2 is F or R/, K/ denoting a
perfluoroalkyl radical with 1 to 4 C atoms; and R3 is Ri or
R2;
wherein R/ is a perfluoroalkyl radical with 1 to 4 C atoms
and R/ is F or a perfluoromethyl radical;
R/— O— CF=CF2
(.')
wherein R/ is a perfluoroalkyl radical with 1 to 5 C
atoms; or
R4— O— CF=CF2
(«*)
wherein R4 is a radical XCF2— (CF2)m— in which X is H
or CI and m denotes an integer from 0 to 4, and units of
tetrafluoroethylene, the proportion of the particle core
being 5 to 20% by weight of the total particle,
(b) an inner particle shell, immediately adjacent to the parti-
cle core, of a polymer consisting of tetrafluoroethylene
units, and
(c) an outer particle shell, immediately adjacent to the inner
particle shell, of a polymer comprising 0.1 to 15% by
weight of units of at least one modified, fluoro-olefinic
comonomer of the formulae (a'), (a^), (a^), and (a*), these
formulae being as defined under (a), and units of tetraflu-
oroethylene, the weight ratio of the inner particle shell to
the outer particle shell being 75:25 to 99.5:0.5.
4,391.941
STABILIZED POLYPROPYLENE COMPOSITIONS
George R. Gotten, Lexington, and Avrom I. Medalia, Newton,
both of Mass., assignors to Cabot Corporation, Boston, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 87,744, Oct. 24. 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,706
Int. a.3 C08K 3/04
U.S. a. 524—495 6 Qaims
1. A composition of matter having improved resistance to
the harmful effects of visible and ultraviolet light comprising a
thermally stabilized polypropylene and as a light stabilizer for
the composition a furnace carbon black which has been heat
treated at a temperature of from about 1200° to about 3000* C.
under a non-oxidizing atmosphere, said light stabilizer being
present in amounts of from about 0. 1 to about 2.0 percent by
weight based on the weight of the thermally stabilized poly-
propylene. ,1
CF2WC
\
V
(a2)
R/
r
4,391,942
VIBRATION-INSULATING RUBBER COMPOSITION
Hideo Nakauchi, Yokohama; Shingo Kato, Tokyo, and Yukio
Ando, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Bridgestone Tire
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 366,084
Int. Q.^ C08K 3/04. 5/01
U.S. Q. 524—526 H Claims
1. A vibration-insulating rubber composition comprising:
45 to 75 parts by weight of at least one rubber selected from
the group consisting of natural rubber, isoprene rubber,
butadiene rubber and styrene-butadiene rubber having a
styrene content of about 23%;
40 to 20 parts by weight of a halogenated butyl rubber;
5 to 15 parts by weight of a copolymer having a styrene
content of not less than 50%;
20 to 80 parts by weight of carbon black, based on 100 parts
by weight of the total of the above rubbers and copoly-
mer; and I
3 to 25 parts by weight of an aromatic process oil, based on
100 parts by weight of the total of the above rubbers and
copolymer.
316
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
431,943
UV STABILIZED NYLON 6
Howard A. Scheetz, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to The Polymer
Corporation, Reading, Pa. "
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,713
Int C[J C08K 3/04; C08L 67/00. 77/00
VJS. a. 524—538 2 Claims
1. A UV sUbilized nylon 6, a polymer of caprolactam, con-
taining about 0.5% to 5.0% carbon black, the improvement
comprising the addition of from 5% to 50% by weight of a
polyester elastomer.
Y signifies H or
4,391,944
VINYL CHLORIDE COPOLYMER AND COMPOSITION
CONTAINING THE SAME
Kazumasa Yamane, Kobe; Masahiro Kobayashi, Amagasaki, and
Masaniko Takada, Akashi, all of Japan, assignors to
Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 210,858, Nov. 26, 1980, Pat. No. 4,363,903.
This application Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,470
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 30, 1979, 54-155874;
Dec. 4, 1979, 54-1572%
Int. a.3 C08K 5/09. 5/10. 5/49
U.S. a. 524—548 1 aaim
1. A composition comprising (A) a copolymer prepared by
polymerizing a reaction system comprising a monomeric mix-
ture of (a) vinyl chloride or a mixture of at least 50% by weight
vinyl chloride and a monomer copolymerizable therewith and
(b) 0.001 to 10 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of the
monomeric component (a) of a compound having the follow-
ing general formula:
— C— CH2CH-
II I I
O COOH COOH
CH CH2— CCX)H.
4,391,946
FURAN POLYMER CONCRETE
Denis W. Akerberg, Huntley, and David D. Watson, Barrington,
both of 111., assignors to The Quaker Oats Company, Chicago,
lU.
FUed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,489
Int. C\? C08L 45/00
U.S. a. 524—849 9 Claims
1. A polymer concrete for use in a corrosive environment
comprising a nonalkaline aggregate, a furan binder having a
viscosity less than 15 cps at 25° C. and an acidic catalyst,
wherein said furan binder comprises furfuryl alcohol, a silane
and less than 25 percent by weight based on the weight of the
furan binder of a cross-linking monomer selected from the
group consisting of bis-phenol A, furfural, resorcinol, hydrox-
ymethylfuran, and bis-hydroxymethylfuran.
X-eCH2-CH-)jr(-CH2-CH-)5jr-Y
CH HC
II
CH2
H2C
\
C
/
wherein
X and Y are independently hydrogen, hydroxyl or carboxyl,
n is an integer of 2 to 100 and m is 0 or an integer of 1 to
80,
the polymerization being carried out employing a free-radi-
cal p)olymerization initiator; and
(B) 25 to 200 parts by weight of a plasticizer per 100 parts by
weight of said copolymer, the composition giving a mold-
ing having a compression set of not more than 50% and a
tensile strength of not less than 1.30 kg/mm^.
4,391,945
CHELATE RESIN PREPARED BY REACTING
BUTANE-l,2,3,4-TETRA-CARBOXYLIC AOD OR
ANHYDRIDE WITH POLYETHYLENE POLY AMINE
Fiigio Mashio, and Shiyi Kitamura, both of Kyoto, Japan, assign-
ors to Mitsi Toatsu Inorganic Chemicals, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,789
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 10, 1980, 55-47699
Int. a.3 C08G 69/26
MS. a. 524-600 31 Claims
1. A resin having the formula (I):
0)
X-t-C— CH2-CH CH-CH2-C-NH-(CH2CHz-NH),rf}?iY
N I I . II
O ^OOH COOH O
wherein,
m stands for an integer of 2 to 6 or for a mixture having an
average value of 4 to S,
n stands for a mixture having an average value of 4 to 10,
X stands for —OH or — NH— CH2CH2)mNH2, and
4,391,947
LOW VISCOSITY POLYESTER COATING
COMPOSITIONS
Daniel R. Sassano, MonroeviUe, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,442
Int. a.3 C08L 67/06
U.S. a. 525—11 6 aaims
1. A fluid, thermally stable, solventless, insulating composi-
tion, useful as a dipping and impregnating resin, consisting
essentially of:
(1) 100 parts by weight of a polyester composition consisting
of the admixture of:
(A) about 15 mole % to about 40 mole % of unsaturated
cyclic dicarboxylic acid selected from the group con-
sisting of isophthalic acid, tetrahydrophthalic acid,
endo methylene tetrahydrophthalic acid, their anhy-
drides and their mixtures;
(B) 5 mole % to 20 mole % of an unsaturated aliphatic
dicarboxylic acid;
(C) about 35 mole % to about 60 mole % of neopentyl
glycol as sole aliphatic dihydric alcohol;
(D) 25 mole % to 35 mole % of copolymerizable unsatu-
rated vinyl monomer;
(E) from 0 mole % to about 20 mole % of tris (2 hydroxy
alkyl) isocyanurate, where alkyl is from 2 to 6 carbon
atoms; and
(F) an active, dual inhibiting agent combination consisting
of:
(i) 200 ppm. to 300 ppm. hydroquinone, and
(ii) 60 ppm. to 120 ppm. mono tert butyl hydroquinone
and including an effective amount of solubUizer for
the inhibiting combination; said polyester composi-
tion having a viscosity of from about 500 cps. to
about 1,750 cps. at 25' C; and
(2) from 0 parts to about 10 parts by weight of a melamine-
formaldehyde compound.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
4,391,948
EMULSION/SUSPENSION ASA GRAFT COPOLYMERS
AS FLOW MODIFIERS FOR PVC
John C. Falk, Northhrook, 111., and Mike S. D. Juang, Vancou-
ver, Wash., assignors to Borg-Wamer Chemicals, Inc., Par-
kersburg, W. Va.
I FUed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,423
Int. a.3 C08L 27/06. 51/04
U.S. a. 525—57 2 Claims
1. A composition comprising polyvinyl chloride (PVC) and
an acrylonitrile-styrene-poly(butyl acrylate) (ASA) graft co-
polymer wherein said ASA graft copolymer is prepared by
polymerizing acrylonitrile and styrene monomers in the pres-
ence of an emulsion of poly(butyl acrylate) and from 0. 1 to
about 1.0 parts per 100 parts of graft polymer of a mixture of
polyvinyl pyrrolidone (PVP) and polyvinyl alcohol (PVA) in
the ratio of from about 1 to 4 parts of PVP to about 4 to I parts
of PVA, thereby converting the polymerization system from
an emulsion to a suspension.
317
4,391,952
ANTI-STATIC MATERIAL AND METHOD OF MAKING
THE MATERIAL
WUliam Lybrand, Northridge, Calif., assignor to Bengal, Inc.,
Sepulveda, Calif.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,485
Int. C1.J C09K 3/16
U.S. a. 525—333.7 7 Claims
1. In combination for eliminating static charges by providing
a resistivity of approximately 10^ to 10' ohms,
a polyethylene of high specific gravity,
copper acetate dispersed in the polyethylene in a weight of
approximately 24 grams per 100 pounds of polyethylene,
and
an ethoxylated amine dispersed in the polyethylene in a
weight of approximately 1,044 grams per 100 pounds of
polyethylene.
4,391,949
ASYMMETRIC BLOCK COPOLYMERS AND
CORRESPONDING ADHESIVE FORMULATIONS
David J. St. Qair, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell OU Com-
pany, Houston, Tex.
I FUed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,233
' Int. a.3 C08L 9/00
MS. a. 525—99 17 Claims
1. A block copolymer having the star-shaped, asymmetrical
structure
4,391,953
DIENE RUBBER COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
N,N'-DITHIOFORMANILIDE CROSSLINKERS
Eiichi Morita, Copley, Ohio, assignor to Monsanto Company,
St. Louis, Mo.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,891
— Int. a.3 C08C 19/20
MS. CI. 525—351 7 Qaims
1. A composition comprising diene rubber and a cross-link-
ing amount of a compound of the formula
(A-
B)*Y-C)^
where A is a polymer block of a monoalkenyl arene, B is a
polymer block of a conjugated diene, C is a polymer block of
a conjugated diene, Y is the residue of a multifunctional cou-
pling agent, the sum of x plus z is greater than 6 and less than
about 25, the ratio of x to z is between about 5 to 1 and about
1 to 5, the molecular weight of each block A is between about
3,000 and about 30,000, the molecular weight of each block B
is between about 15,000 and about 100,000, and the molecular
weight of each block C is between about 15,000 and about
100,000.
CHO
I
N— S-
J2
wherein Ri, R2, and R3 are the same or different substituents
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl,
lower alkoxy, chlorine and CF3.
4,391,950
POLYPHENYLENE ETHER COMPOSITION AND
PROCESS FOR PRODUCTION
Glenn D. Coojjer, Delmar, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Pittsfield, Mass.
I Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,534 j
Int. a.J C08G 65/44
U.S. a. 525—132 16 Qaims
1. A thermoplastic composition having improved color
properties, comprising the reaction product of polyphenylene
ether with a minor amount of benzoic anhydride sufficient to
improve the color or the color stability.
4,391,954
THERMOPLASTIC MOLDING COMPOSITION
Steven W. Scott, Evansville, Ind., assignor to General Electric
Company, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 750,512, Dec. 14, 1976, abandoned.
This application Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,142
Int. a.5 C08L 67/02
U.S. a. 525—439 5 Qaims
1. A compatible composition consisting essentially of
(a) a nonhalogenated aromatic polycarbonate derived from
bisphenol-A and
(b) a polyester component consisting of amorphous polyes-
ter solely derived from a cyclohexanedimethanol and a
mixture of iso and terephthalic acids.
4,391,951
NYLON 6 WITH IMPROVED WEAR LIFE
Howard A. Scheetz, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to The Polymer
Corporation, Reading, Pa.
1 1 FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,712
1 1 Int. a.5 C08L 67/02. 77/02
U.S. a. 525—166 4 Qaims
1. A molding composition comprising a melt blend of:
a major weight amount of nylon 6, a polymer of caprolac-
tam, and
2 to 5 weight percent amount of a polyolefin, 2 to 5 weight
percent of a polyfluorocarbon and 5 to 46 weight percent
of a polyester elastomer.
4,391,955
PROCESS FOR CROSSLINKING POLYCARBONATE
RESINS
Hisako Hon, Tokyo; Nobu Kitamura, HIratsuka; Isao
Shirahata, Chigasaki, and Nobuyuki Nakamura, Fujisawa, all
of Japan, assignors to The Funikawa Electric Co., Ltd., To-
kyo, Japan
FUed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,973
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Feb. 5, 1981, 56-16018
Int. a.^ C08L 69/00
U.S. a. 525—462 20 Qaims
1. A process for crosslinking a polycarbonate resin compris-
ing heating a mixture comprising (1) a polycarbonate resin
selected from the group consisting of (i) polycarbonate ob-
Uined (a) by the dehydrochlorination of a dihydroxyphenyl
318
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
alkane with phosgene, or (b) by an ester interchange of a
dihydroxyphenyl alkane with diphenyl carbonate, and (ii) a
polymer composition containing said polycarbonate as a major
component thereof, at a temperature higher than the glass
MEAT TREATMENT TIME
I MIWJTES I
transition point of said polycarbonate resin and (2) an organic
copper compound which is compatible with said polycarbon-
ate resin, the amount of said organic copper compound being
sufficient to catalyze the crosslinking of said polycarbonate
resm.
4,391,956
IMPACT MODIHED NYLON 6
Howard A. Scheetz, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to The Polymer
Corporation, Reading, Pa.
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,714
Int. a.3 C08L 67/02, 77/02
U.S. a. 525—425 2 Qaims
1. A method of improving the impact properties of nylon 6,
a polymer of caprolactam, which comprises melt blending the
nylon with 5% to 50% by weight of a polyester elastomer.
4,391,957
ELASnCIZED ADDITION PRODUCT" BASED ON
, POLYALKYLENE ETHER-POLYOLS AND
I POLYISOCYANATES, PREPARATION AND USE
THEREOF
Wilhelm Becker, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
I Filed Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,791
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 21,
1981, 3128733
Int. a.' C08G 18/38
U.S. a. 525—454 9 Oaims
R R
I R
July 5, 1983
a)
R'— N N— r2
R3>^R4
wherein R is hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 4 C atoms, R'
is
(cl) hydrogen,
(c2) hydroxyalkyl and alkyl having 1 to 12 C atoms in each
case,
(c3) — CH2— R5,
(c4) — CH2— CH2— COOR5.
— CH2— CH2— C=0 or
R5— N— r5
(c5)
(c6) — CH2— CH2— CN
wherein R' represents in each hydroxyalkyl or alkyl hav-
ing up to 8 C atoms, R^ denotes
(c7) alkyl or alkylene having in each case 1 to 12 C atoms or
denotes one of the radicals (c3) to (c6), R^ and R* each
denote hydrogen or alkyl having 1 to 5 C atoms or R^ and
R'* together denote alkylene having 4 to 6 C atoms, and
(d) a hexahydropyrimidine derivative of the general formula
L Ml
N R*
h
wherein R' to R' have the meaning as mentioned under
(c), at least one of each of the substituents R^ to R^ in the
formulae (I) and (II) carrying a hydroxyl group; the ratio
of NCO groups to the OH groups of component (c) and
(d) or a mixture thereof is approximately 1:1.
R^ R'
1. An elasticized addition product comprising
(a) a polyalkylene ether-polyol and -
(b) a polyisocyanate wherein (a) has a molecular weight of
500 to 10,000 and 2 to 6 C atoms in the alkylene radical
and the ratio of the NCO groups in the component (b) to
I |the OH groups in the component (a) is 1,5:1 to 2,5:1, the
addition product thereof is reacted further with a hy-
droxyl compound selected from the group consisting of
(c) an imidazolidine of the formula I
4,391,958
ALDIMINES AND KETIMINES OF
l,3,5-(AMINOMETHYL)BENZENE OR CYCLOHEXANE
AND THEIR USE AS CURING AGENTS FOR EPOXY AND
POYLURETHANE RESINS
Ichiro Minato, Osaka; Koichi Shibata, Ashiya, and Kimiya
Fiyinami, Taluirazuka, all of Japan, assignors to Takeda
Chemical Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,204
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 28, 1980, 55-168377
Int. C\? C08G 18/83. 59/14; C07C 119/06 ^
U.S. a. 525—504 13 Claims
1. A triamine derivative of the general formula:
C3
(CH2NH2)3-»
/
(CH2N=C )„
Y
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
319
■
X is hydrogen or a hydrocarbon radical of 1 to 8 carbon atoms;
Y is a hydrocarbon radical of 1 to 8 carbon atoms; X and Y,
together with their neighboring carbon atom, may form a 5- to
7-membered aliphatic hydrocarbon ring; and n is an integer of
1,2 or 3.
13. An epoxy resin composition containing a triamine deriv-
ative according to claim 1 as a curing agent.
R'— CH— C— r2
wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen
and a straight or branched alkyl having from 1 to 9 carbon
atoms; R^ is selected from the group consisting of an alkoxy
having from 1 to 9 carbon atoms, and an alkyl having from 1 to
9 carbon atoms; X is selected from the group consisting of
hydroxy and R^— CO— , wherein R^ represents an alkyl hav-
ing from 1 to 9 carbon atoms; as said inhibitor of polymer
deposits.
4,391,959
POLYMERIZATION OF ISOBUTYLENE
Karl-Heinz Fauth, Wattenheim; Heinrich Mohr, Frankenthal,
and Wolfgang Immel, Ludwigshafen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continoation-in-part of Ser. No. 238,594, Feb. 26, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,875
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 21,
1980, 3010870
Int. a.3 C08F 4/14
U.S. a. 526— 70 4 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of polyisobutylene by poly-
merizing isobutylene in a polymerization zone which is at from
0° to - 130" C. by means of from 0.01 to 1.0 percent by weight,
based on isobutylene employed, of boron trifluoride catalyst, in
the presence or absence of from 10 to 5,000,ppm, based on the
weight of isobutylene employed, of molecular weight regula-
tors and/or in the presence of from 10 to 5,000 ppm, based on
the weight of isobutylene employed, of a primary or secondary
alcohol as polymerization accelerator, and in the presence of
from 30 to 90 percent by weight, based on isobutylene em-
ployed, of a low-boiling solvent which is inert under the reac-
tion conditions, the solvent vaporized during the polymeriza-
tion being drawn off continuously, liquefied and recycled, in
the liquid state, to the polymerization zone, wherein a boron
trifluoride catalyst which contains less than 0.3 percent by
volume of silicon tetrafluoride is used and the solvent is recy-
cled not less than twice during the continuous polymerization.
4,391,961
PROCESS FOR PREPARING LIGHT COLORED
PETROLEUM RESINS AND RESINS PRODUCED
THEREBY (CS-203)
Augustus B. Small; Vincent L. Hughes, and Francisco M. Be-
nitez, all of Baton Rouge, La., assignors to Exxon Research &
Engineering Co., Florfaam Park, N.J.
FUed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,434
Int. a.3 C08F 2/00. 10/100
U.S. a. 526—76 4 Qaims
1. A process for producing a hydrocarbon resin of improved
color and thermal stability which comprises heat soaking a
petroleum cracking or reforming fraction containing cationi-
cally polymerizable hydrocarbons including from more than
0.5 to 2 weight percent of cyclodienes until the cyclodiene
content is no more than 0.5 weight percent and the piperylene
to cyclopentadiene weight ratio is above at least 50, distilling
said heat soaked petroleum fraction, polymerizing said distilled
petroleum fraction in the presence of an aluminum halide
catalyst and recovering a resin having a Gardner color of no
greater than 4 when measured on a solution of equal weights of
said resin and toluene.
wherein
4,391,960
PROCESS FOR THE POLYMERIZATION OF VINYL
I HALIDE POLYMERS
WUli Heine, and Werner Frey, both of Burghausen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Wacker-Chemie GmbH, Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,483
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3,
1980, 3025171
Int a.' C08F 2/20
VJS. a. 526—74 11 Claims
1. In the process for the polymerization of vinyl halide
polymers comprising polymerizing at least one vinyl halide
and, optionally, other olefmically-unsaturated monomers co-
polymerizable with vinyl halides, in an aqueous dispersion in
the presence of free-radical-forming polymerization initators,
dispersants and, other customary additives, in the presence of
an inhibitor of polymer deposits and recovering said vinyl
halide polymers, the improvement consisting essentially of
adding to the reaction mixture from 10 to 1,000 ppm, based on
the monomers, of at least one carbonyl compound having the
formula:
4,391,962
PROCESS FOR THE SUSPENSION
{CO)POLYMERlZATION OF VINYL CHLORIDE
Petrus H. M. Schreurs, Deventer, and Willem F. Verhelst,
Gorssel, both of Netherlands, assignors to Akzona Incorpo-
rated, AsheviUe, N.C.
FUed No?. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,616
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, No?. 30, 1979,
7908674
Int. C1.3 C08F 2/20 14/06
U.S. a. 526—200 5 Claims
1. An improved process for suspension polymerizing vinyl
chloride in the presence of a radical initiator and at least two
suspension stabilizers wherein the improvement comprises
polymerizing the vinyl chloride in the presence of at least one
primary stabilizer selected from the group consisting of water-
soluble, partially hydrolyzed polyvinyl aceUtes and methyl
hydroxypropyl cellulose and at least one secondary stabilizer
selected from the group consisting of N-alkyl gluconamide
wherein the alkyl group contains from about 16 to about 20
carbon atoms.
±4,391,963
SILOXANE PHOTOSENSmZERS AND
DS FOR THEIR PREPARATION
AkihUco Shirahata, Ichihara, Japan, assignor to Toray SUicone
Company, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 27, 1982, Ser. No. 382,504
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jun. 18, 1981, 56-94130
Int. a.3 C08G 77/04
U.S. a. 528—37 16 Cluxas
1. An organopolysiloxane photosensitizer comprising an
average of at least two siloxane units, of which at least an
average of one siloxane unit per organopolysiloxane molecule
320
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
has the formula QaR^'SiO(4-a-/>)/2> wherein Q denotes a anisotropic in the melt and consists essentially of recurring
benzoin-containing group having the formula units having the structural formulas
OOR^
(R;„'C6H5-m)C(C-R*-)
C6H5_„R„2
R' and R^ each denote, independently, a hydrogen atom, a
halogen atom, a monovalent hydrocarbon group having from
1 to 10 carbon atoms, an alkoxy group, a thioalkoxy group, an
amino group or a dialkylamino group; R^ denotes a hydrogen
atom or a monovalent hydrocarbon group having from 1 to 10
carbon atoms; R* denotes a divalent hydrocarbon group hav-
ing from 2 to 10 carbon atoms; R^ denotes a monovalent hy-
drocarbon group having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms or a halo-
genated monovalent hydrocarbon group; m is an integer of
from 1 to S, n is an integer of from 1 to S, a is an integer of from
1 to 3, b is an integer of from 0 to 2 and a-i-b is an integer of
from 1 to 3.
I I 4,391,964
EMBEDDING MASS OF POLYURETHANE
Gerhard Wick, Obemburg, and Helmut Schuize, Wuppertal,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Akzo NV, Am*
hem, Netherlands
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,140
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 21,
1981, 3106498
Int. a.3 C08L 91/00: C08G 75/75. 75/77
U.S. a. 528—74.5 21 Claims
1. Embedding mass of polyurethane produced on the basis of
castor oil, composed of a polyurethane which has been ob-
tained through reaction of an aromatic diisocyanate with a
mixture of castor oil and trimethylolpropane into an NCO-
group displaying pre-adduct and network polymerization of
the pre-adduct with castor oil or a mixture of castor oil and
trimethylolpropane, in the presence of catalyst, thereby char-
acterized in that the embedding mass contains 7-700 ppm of a
titanium alkylate compound, calculated as elemental titanium.
(l)(a) -C
I I 4,391,965
CURING AGENTS
Hans R. Falkenburg, Haan; Siegfried Krause, Mettmann, and
Robert C. McGuiness, Erkrath, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, London,
England and Hermann Wiederbold G.m.b.H. Corp., Hilden,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,264
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 27,
1980,8034534
Int. a.3 C08G 59/42
U.S. a. 528—112 9 Oaims
1. A coating composition which comprises in admixture
(a) a curing agent which is the reaction product of a polycar-
boxylic acid polyanhydride with a monohydroxy com-
]X>und ROH, wherein R is alkyl, substituted alkyl, or
aralkyl and
(b) a solution of an epoxy resin which is to be cured.
4,391,966
POLYMERS FROM PHENYLTEREPHTHAUC ACID
John F. Harris, Jr., Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 102,040, Dec. 10, 1979, Pat. No.
4,294,955. This appUcation Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,559
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 13,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int Q\? C08G 6i/18
UJS. a. 528—176 9 Claims
1. Fiber forming melt-spinnable polyester that is optically
QHs
or a combination of (a) and up to SO mole percent of
O O
H H
(b) — C— R'— C—
wherein R' is 1 ,4-phenylene, 2,6-naphthylene, 4,4'-bipheny-
lene, or a mixture of any thereof;
(2) (a) — O— R2— O—
wherein R^ is 1,4-phenylene, monochloro-, monophenyl-, or
monoalkyl-l,4-phenylene wherein alkyl contains 1 to 4 carbon
atoms, 2,6-naphthylene, 1 ,4-naphthylene, 4,4'-biphenylene or a
mixture of any thereof, or a combination of (a) and up to 20
mole percent of
(b)
-'^O)-
o—
and
(3) based on the total moles of (1) and (3)^ 25 to 80 mole
percent of
O
I
C-,
-°HO
the recurring diacid units (1) and recurring dioxy units (2)
being present in substantially equimolar amounts.
4,391,967
POLYIMIDES-POLY AMIDES FROM TRICYCLO
[4.2.1.02.5]
NONANE-3,4.DIMETHYL.3,4,7,8.TETRACARBOXYLIC
AOD DIANHYDRIDE AND DICARBOXYLIC ACIDS
Tayseer S. Nimry, Wheaton, and Ellis K. Fields, River Forest,
both of 111., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana),
Chicago, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 254,347, Aug. 19, 1981, Pat
No. 4,358,582. This appUcation Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,017
Int a.i C08G 7i/14
U.S. a. 528—189 8 Claims
1. A polyimide-polyamide comprising the following recur-
ring structure:
— N
wherein R' is the same or different divalent aliphatic, cycloali-
phatic, araliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radicals the term
"R has the same meaning as R' or is an aromatic hydrocarbon
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
321
having from about 6 to about 10 carbon atoms joined directly
or by a suble linkage selected from the group consisting of
— O— , methylene,
O
II
-C-,
fier is at least 37 wt. %, said sulfur cement product having
a softening point ranging up to 116* C.
—SO—, — SO2— or — S— radicals".
4,391,968
PROCESS FOR PREPARING POLYAMIDES HAVING A
MODIHED DYE AFFINITY
Gianfranco Merani, Vercelli, and Giuseppe Anzuino, Novara,
both of Italy, assignors to Montedison S.p.A., Milan, Italy
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,512
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Feb. 28, 1980, 20229 A/80
Int a.3 C08G 69/04. 69/28
U.S. a. 528—321 10 Claims
1. A process for preparing a fiber-forming polyamide having
a modified dye affinity and no affinity for acid dyes and no
affinity for basic dyes, which comprises polymerizing a com-
position of at least one polyamide-forming monomer and 1-45
millimolsAg monomer of a modifier composition consisting
essentially of a mixture of a dicarboxylic acid having the gen-
eral formula
I HOpC— R— COOH (I)
wherein R is a simple or simply substituted aromatic radical
having 6 to 18 carbon atoms, cycloaliphatic radical having 4 to
18 carbon atoms, or an alkylene radical having 1 to 12 carbon
atoums, and
a salt of a sulphonated dicarboxylic acid having the general
formula:
4,391,970
PROCESS FOR PREPARING COLORLESS HYDROXYL
EPIHALOHYDRIN POLYMERS
Yoshihisa Okamoto, Sagamore Hills, Ohio, assignor to The B. F.
Goodrich Company, Akron, Ohio
FUed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,243
Int. a.3 C08G 65/24. 65/28. 65/30
U.S. Q. 528—408 7 Claims
1. In a process for the manufacture of hydroxyl-terminated
polymers which comprises polymerizing an epihalohydrin in
the presence of from about 0.03 part to 15.0 parts by weight of
water or polyol, based on 100 parts by weight of the epihalohy-
drin, and catalytic amounts of a trialkyl oxonium salt of an
HMF6 acid wherein M is an element selected from the group
consisting of phosphorus, arsenic and antimony, the improve-
ment comprising washing the polymer with an aqueous solu-
tion of an alkali metal carbonate, the amount of said metal
carbonate being a molar excess over the amount of said cata-
lyst, at a temperature of greater than 40° C, whereby there is
obtained a clear, colorless, heat stable polymer having a pH of
about 5 to 8.
(S03X)„
HOOC— R— COOH
(II)
wherein R has the meaning specified hereinabove, X is an
alkali or alkaline earth metal or ammonium radical, and n is an
integer from 1 to 4, in which the molar ratio between the salt
of the sulphonated dicarboxylic acid and the dicarboxylic acid,
• (SOsX),
Hd6c— R— COOH/HOOC— R— COOH,
4,391,971
COLOR IMPROVEMENT AND ACETALDEHYDE
REDUCTION IN HIGH MOLECULAR WEIGHT
POLYESTERS
Freddie L. Massey, Uniontown, and Douglas D. Callander,
Akron, both of Ohio, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rub-
ber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,769
Int. a.3 CX)8G 63/70
U.S. a. 528—481 9 Claims
1. The method of treating molten polyester resin which
comprises heating said resin to a temperature of from 230° C.
to about 300' C. and passing said resin through a molecular
sieve.
ranges from 0.01 to 1.
4,391,969
MODIFIED SULFUR CEMENT
WUUam C. McBee, and Thomas A. SulUvan, both of Boulder
City, Ne?., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Department of Commerce, Washington,
D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 196,172, Oct. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,348,313, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 85,450,
Oct 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,311,826. This appUcation May 22,
1 1 1981, Ser. No. 266,484
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 19,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int a.3 C08G 75/16
$28—389 8 Qaims
1. A modified sulfur cement formulation, consisting essen-
tially of:
the polymeric reaction product of sulfur with from 2 to 20
wt. % of a cyclopentadiene oligomer mixture-dicyclopen-
tadiene containing modifier, said cyclopentadiene oligo-
mer mixture being free of dicyclopentadiene, wherein the
cyclopentadiene oligomer mixture content of said modi-
US. Q. «
4,391,972
CONTINUOUS REMOVAL OF RESIDUAL
HYDROCARBONS FROM POLYOLEHNS
Karl Kaiser, Briihl, and Alexander Ohorodnik, Erftstadt, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 950,563, Oct. 12, 1978, abandoned.
This application Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,387
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 19,
1977, 2746909
Int a.3 C08F 6/70
U.S. a. 528—499 9 Claims
1. In a process for freeing polyolefins, selected from the
group consisting of polyethylene and polypropylene made by
catalytic polymerization of alpha-olefins in a hydrocarbon
solvent having 6-1 1 carbon atoms and containing about 10 to
50 weight % residual hydrocarbons, from said residual hydro-
carbons by mixing the hydrocarbon-containing polyolefin with
water, agitating the mixture so as to convert it into a homoge-
neous dispersion containing 10 to 40 weight % of the polyole-
fin, contacting said dispersion countercourrently with steam,
removing an aqueous polyolefin dispersion free from said
hydrocarbons and separating the polyolefin from the water,
the improvement which comprises:
(a) using surfactant-containing water having a surface ten-
sion of 50 to 68 dynes/cm., with respect to air, measured
at 20° C. with said surfactant being ethoxylated stearic
acid;
(b) subsequently introducing the homogeneous dispersion
into the upper portion of a column with at least 5 sieve
plates therein for contacting it with the steam, said sieve
322
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
plates having a free cross-sectional area increasing contin-
uously from the lowermost to uppermost plate by about
3% up to 90% of the plate surface area and being arranged
so as to be spaced from each other as intervals increasing
from the lowermost to the uppermost plate, the interval
between the two upjjermost plates being 10 times the
interval between the two lowermost plates; and
(c) removing the aqueous polyolefin dispersion free from
said hydrocarbons through said column's base portion.
4,391,973
READILY HYDRATABLE CELLULOSE AND
PREPARATION THEREOF
Maraerto M. Cruz, Jr., Pennington, N.J., assignor to Morca,
Inc., Pennington, N.J.
FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,109
Int. C1.3 C08B 7/00
U.S. a. 536—56 9 Oaims
1. The method of producing water-insoluble cellulose parti-
cles that form floc-like slurries when mixed in water which
comprises subjecting a mechanically fibrillated fibrillatable
cellulose precursor to hydrolysis by the use of an aqueous
solution of a non-derivatizing mineral acid and recovering
water-insoluble, highly hydrated, floc-like cellulose particles.
4,391,974
WATER SOLUBLE CEPHADROXYL SALT
Santiago A. Ciriza, and Carlos E. L. Padro, both of Barcelona,
Spain, assignors to Liofilizaciones Esterilizaciones Y Sinthe-
sis S.A., Barcelona, Spain
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,286
Oaims priority, application Spain, Feb. 5, 1980, 488286
Int. a.i C07D 501/20; A61K 31/545
UJS. a. 544->030 1 Claim
1. A water soluble salt of cephadroxyl or 7-[D( — )-alpha-
amino-alpha-(4-hydroxyphenyl)-acetamido]-3-methyl-3-ceph-
em-4-carboxylic acid having the formula:
(I)
.NH2—
CH3
COOH
— (CH2)4— CH— CCX)H
I
NH2
4,391,975
PROCESS FOR 1-OXACEPHEM DERIVATIVES
Saul Wolfe, Kingston, and Chia-Cheng Shaw, Montreal, both of
Canada, assignors to Queen's University at Kingston, Kings-
ton, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 330,838, Dec. 15, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,236
Int. a.3 C07D 498/04
U.S. a. 544—90 13 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a 1-oxacephem derivative of the
formula I
CH2— W— Z
COOR3
in which R4 is hydrogen or a cleavable amino-protecting acyl
group, or R4NH represents phthalimido, R3 is hydrogen or a
cleavable carboxy-protecting group, R^ is hydrogen or me-
thoxy, W is NH, O, or S and Z is selected from lower acyl
groups and from five membered heterocycles containing 1-4
hetero atoms and optionally substituted with loweralkyl,
which comprises treating a compound of the formula II
B2
R4NH-
jl— N
r
Cl
O— Si(Ph)2C Me3
w— z
II
COOR3
in which R4, R3, R2, W and Z are as defined above with fluo-
ride ions, and isolating the corresponding comi)ound of for-
mula 1.
4,391,976
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG ARYLSULFAMATES
Beat Bohner, Binningen, Switzerland, assignor to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,064
Int. a.5 C07D 251/46. 251/42. 239/42. 239/47
U.S. a. 544—211 11 Oaims
1. A process for producing an N-(heterocyclo-amino-car-
bonyl)-arylsulfamate of the formula I
a)
Rr-^ ^V-O— SOr-NH— CO— N— <r'
wherein
Rl is hydrogen, methoxy or Ci-Cs-alkyl,
R2 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, nitro, CF3,
Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy or Ci-C4-alkoxycarbonyl,
R3 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methyl or
Ci-C4-alkoxy,
R4 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, nitro, cyano,
Ci-C4-alkyl, Ci-C4-alkoxy or C|-C4-alkoxycarbonyl,
R5 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, nitro or CF3,
R6 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, Ci-C4-alkyl or
Ci-Q-alkoxy,
X is Ci-C2-alkyl, C|-C3-alkoxy, Ci-C2-alkylthio, methox-
ymethyl, methoxyethyl, CF3 or chlorine.
Julys, 1983
i-C2-a
CHEMICAL
Y is Ci-C2-alkyl, Ci-Cs-alkoxy, Cj-C2-alkylthio, methox-
ymethyl or methoxyethyl, and
Z is the methine group or nitrogen,
which process comprises adding, in an inert organic solvent,
chlorosulfonylisocyanate of the formula III
Cl— SO2— N=C=0
(III)
to an aminpheterocyclic compound of the formula II
HN
Rll
<
(11)
323
IV- 1
N— R^
wherein Ri, X, Y and Z have the meanings defined under the
formula I; and subsequently reacting this mixture, optionally
with the addition of an agent binding hydrogen chloride, with
a phenol of the formula IV
^'s^^"^
^
wherein X is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, lower-alkoxy,
lower-alkyl or trifluoromethyl; Y is hydrogen, fluorine,
chlorine, lower-alkoxy, or lower-alkyl; R^ is oxygen or
sulfur; R^ is hydrogen or lower-alkyl; and one of R* and
R5 is hydrogen and the other is bromine, iodine, cyano,
lower-alkoxycarbonyl or sulfamoyl
in the form of its racemate or its enantiomers, as well as a
pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof
5. A compound of the formula
IV-2
(IV)
wherein R2 and R3 have the meanings given under the formula
I.
wherein X is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, lower-alkoxy,
lower-alkyl or trifluoromethyl; Y is hydrogen, fluorine,
chlorine, lower-alkoxy or lower-alkyl; and one of R* and
R5 is hydrogen and the other is bromine, iodine, cyano,
lower-alkoxycarbonyl or sulfamoyl,
in the form of its racemate or its enantiomers, as well as a
pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof
4,391,977
ADENINE PRODUCnON
Kju H. Shin, Baton Rouge, La., assignor to Ethyl Corporation,
Richmond, Va.
I FUed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,036
' Int. 0.3 C07D 473/34
U.S. O. 544—277 10 Oaims
1. A process for producing adenine which comprises react-
ing hydrogen cyanide with formamide in the presence of an
ammonium salt and a catalytic amount of methyldisulfide at
elevated temperature and pressure.
4,391,978
PHENYL-QUINOLIZIDINES
Rene Imiiof, Gipf-Oberfnck, and EmiUo Kyburz, Reinach, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Hoffinann-La Roche Inc., Nutley,
NJ.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 186,936, Sep. 12, 1980,
abandoned. This appUcation Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,540
Oaims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Apr. 11, 1980,
2784/80; Feb. 3, 1981, 701/81
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 25,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. 0.3 C07D 455/02
U.S. a. 546—138 5 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
4,391,979
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
(2-AMINO-THIAZOL-4YL)-ACETIC AQD
HYDROCHLORIDE
Alfred Huwiler, and Leander Tenud, both of Visp, Switzerland,
assignors to Lonza Ltd., Gampel, Valais, Switzerland
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,489
Oaims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Feb. 18, 1980,
1284/80
Int. a.3 C07D 277/38
U.S. O. 548—194 10 Claims
1. Process for the preparation of (2-aminothiazol-4-yl)-acetic
acid hydrochloride comprising suspending thiourea in water,
adding 4-chloroacetoacetyl chloride, which is dissolved in a
chlorohydrocarbon, to the suspension at a temperature of 5* to
10* C, and then completing the reaction at a temperature of
25* to 30* C, said (2-aminothiazol-4-yl)-acetic acid hydrochlo-
ride being in light-suble form, having a high degree of purity,
and being stable both in solution and as a solid.
J
324
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,980
ARYLOXYMETHYL OXAZOLINIUM DERIVATIVES
Janos Zergenyi, Seltisberg, Switzerland, assignor to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 58,222, Jul. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,294,966.
This application May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,145
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 28, 1978,
8145/78
Int. Q\} C07D 26i/l4
U,S. a. 548—239 7 Oaims
1. An optically active compound of the formula
-C
o
Ari— O— CH2— CH — CH2 — N®— Ri
(HI)
X©
wherein
X© represents the anion of chlorine or bromine, or of sulfu-
ric or phosphoric acid,
Ari represents 1-naphthyl, 3-lower alkylphenyl, 2-lower
alkenylphenyl, 2-lower alkenyloxyphenyl, 4-lower al-
kanoylaminophenyl, 4-(2-lower alkoxyethyl)-phenyl, ben-
zyloxyphenyl or hydroxyphenyl,
Rl represents lower alkyl, phenyl-lower alkyl or phenoxy-
lower alkyl, and
R2 represents lower alkyl, phenyl-lower alkyl or phenyl.
I \ I \ I \ I \
[ j "f '" T \ 1
wherein R is an n-pentyl group and n is 1 or 2.
O
wherein;
R' represents alkoxy or aralkoxy,
R2 represents hydrogen, alkoxy, aralkoxy, alkyl, or aralkyl,
or R' and R^ taken together represent the group — O— CH-
2-0-,
j is an integer having a value of 0 or 1,
R3 represents hydrogen, alkyl, aralkyl, acyl or a protecting
group,
Z' represents a non-reacting electron withdrawing group
which can be readily converted to a carboxyl group,
7} represents a non-reacting electron withdrawing group
which can be readily converted to a carboxyl group or
hydrogen, and
R'O represents hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, substituted aryl, or
aralkyl;
which comprises treating a compound of the formula:
4,391,981
THIO BIS-LACrONE COMPOUNDS DERIVED FROM
N-OCTENYL SUCCINIC ANHYDRIDE
Stanley J. Brois, Westfield, and Antonio Gutierrez, Hamilton
Square, both of N.J., assignors to Exxon Research & Engi-
neering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 167,481, Jul. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 4,302,395,
which is a division of Ser. No. 967,289, Dec. 7, 1978, Pat. No.
4,221,720, which is a division of Ser. No. 806,326, Jun. 13, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,167,514, which is a division of Ser. No. 726,206, Sep.
24, 1976, Pat. No. 4,062,786. This application Jul. 27, 1981, Ser.
I No. 287,136
! Int. a.3 C07D i07/89
U.S, a. 549—252 2 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
R R
I I
CH2 CH CH CH2
\ / \ / \ /
S„
/0R3\
wherein:
R', R2, R3 and j are as previously defined,
Y represents CI, Br, I or a leaving group, and
X represents CI, Br or I;
(A) initially with an alkyl lithium at a temperature of less
than -40° C, and
(B) thereafter with a compound of the formula:
/
C
HC Z2
RlO
wherein:
Z*, Z2 and R'°are as previously defined, followed by warm-
ing to a temperature of between about 0° C. and about
120° C.
4,391,982
INTERMEDIATES FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
PICROPODOPHYLLIN AND RELATED COMPOUNDS
AND PROCESSES FOR THE PREPARATION AND USE
THEREOF
Andrew S. Kende, Pittsford, N.Y.; Dennis P. Curran, Madison,
Wis.; Margaret L. King, Rochester, and Neil A. Feldstein,
Westbury, both of N.Y., assignors to The University of Roch-
ester, Rochester, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 127,436, Mar. 5, 1980, Pat. No. 4,294,763.
This application Mar, 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,279
Int. a.5 C07D 317/44: C07C 69/76
U.S. CI. 549—433 12 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of a compound of the for-
mula:
4,391,983
CARBOXAMIDOESTERS
Thomas Leigh, Alderley Edge, England, assignor to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 803,237, Jun. 3, 1977, abandoned. This
application Jul. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 62,190
Galms priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 16, 1976,
24931/76; Jun. 16, 1976, 24932/76
Int. Q.^ C07C 69/743
U.S. a. 560—124 1 Claim
1. (S)-a-carboxamido-3-(2,2-dichlorovinyloxy)benzyl
( 1 R,3R)-3-(2,2-dichlorovinyl)-2,2-dimethylcyclopropane car-
boxylate.
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
4,391,984
ALKYNYL HALIDE COMPOUNDS AND ALKENYL
ACETATE COMPOUNDS THEREFROM
Toshinobu Ishihara; Akira Yamamoto, and Kenichi Taguchi, all
of Joetsu, Japan, assignors to Schin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,614
Claims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1980, 55-69724;
May 29, 1980, 55-71740
Int. a.3 C07C 67/70
U.S. a. 560—236 4 Claims
1. A method for the preparation of an alkenyl acetate having
the general formula
R— CH=CH— CH2)nOCOCH3
k is
in whieh R is a monovalent hydrocarbon group and n is a
number of 4, 5 or 6, which comprises the steps of
(a) reacting a Grignard reagent represented by the general
formula
RMgX',
in winch R has the same meaning as defined above and X'
is a halogen atom, and an co-halo- 1-bromoalkyne com-
pound represented by the general formula
X— CH2)„C=C— Br,
' in which X and n each have the same meaning as defined
above, to form an alkynyl halide compound having the
general formula
I R— CsC— CH2IHX,
in which R, X and n each have the same meaning as
defined above,
(b) acetylating the alkynyl halide compound to form an
alkynyl acetate compound having the general formula
R— C=C— CH2)„OCOCH3,
in which R and n each have the same meaning as defined
above, and
(c) partially hydrogenating the alkynyl acetate compound in
the presence of a Lindlar catalyst.
325
terephthalic acid, thereby rendering the total production
stream unsaturated in isophthalic acid; and
(c) after reaction, recovering substantially pure terephthalic
acid as a precipitate from said production stream.
4,391,985
PROCESS FOR THE SEPARATION OF ISOPHTHALIC
ACID FROM TEREPHTHALIC ACID
Richard J. Hook, Lexington, S.C, and Mark Rule, Kingsport,
Tenn., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester,
N.Y.
I Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,948
I Int. a.3 C07C 5J/16. 51/42
U.S. a. 562—414 14 Qaims
1. A process for producing a terephthalic acid product of
improved purity, said process comprising the steps of
(a) cooling at least a portion of a hot acetic acid production
stream from which precipitated terephthalic acid has been
removed so as to precipitate at least a portion of the iso-
phthalic acid dissolved therein;
(b) removing the precipitated isophthalic acid and recycling
said production stream to a reactor for the production of
4,391,986
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING
THREO-3-AMINO-2HYDROXYBUTANOYL-AMINOA-
CETIC ACIDS, AS WELL AS NOVEL INTERMEDIATES
THEREFOR AND PROCESS FOR PRODUCING THEM
Hamao Umezawa, Tokyo; Takaaki Aoyagi, Fujisawa; Tadashi
Shirai, Musashino; Rinzo Nishizawa; Masao Suzuki, both of
Tokyo, and Tetsushi Saino, Yono, all of Japan, assignors to
Nippon Kayaku Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 96,693, Nov. 23, 1979, Pat. No. 4,281,180.
This application Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,035
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 25, 1978, 53-145509;
Dec. 13, 1978, 53-153157
Int. a.3 C07C 101/34
U.S. a. 562—444 3 Qaims
1. Threo-3-protected amino-2-hydroxy-4-oxobutanoic acid
or its esters represented by the formula:
OH
I
Rr— C— CH— CH— COOR3
II I
O R2 I
wherein Ri represents naphthyl or a group of the formula
:)^
in which R6 and R7 represent individually hydrogen, halogen,
amino or an amino protected with acyl, lower alkyloxycarbo-
nyl or carbamoyl, hydroxy or hydroxy protected with acyl,
lower alkyloxycarbonyl or carbamoyl, lower alkoxy, lower
alkyl or phenyl group; R2 represents an amino protected with
acyl, lower alkyloxycarbonyl or carbamoyl; and R3 represents
hydrogen, lower alkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, or benzyl.
326
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,391,987
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF AQUEOUS
SODIUM METHIONINATE SOLUTIONS
Manfred Spindler, Herbert Tanner, both of Hanau; Friedhelm
Geiger, Eriensee; Friedrich Bittner, Bad Soden, and Jurgen
Martens, Alzenau, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Degussa Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,473
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
1981, 3105007
Int. a.3 C07C 149/247
U.S. a. 562—559 10 Qaims
I 1. A process for the production of an aqueous sodium meth-
ioninate solution having a low content of sodium^ carbonate
comprising forming a crude aqueous hydrolysis mixture by the
saponification of 5-()3-methylmercaptoethyl)-hydantoin with
1.1 to 6 equivalents of sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate or
a mixture of sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate, cooling
the crude hydrolysis mixture to a temperature below 10° C,
separating off the precipitated sodium carbonate and concen-
trating the sodium methioninate solution remaining to 40 to 65
weight percent.
4,391,990
OXYDEHYDROGENATION OF ISOBUTYRIC AOD AND
ITS LOWER ALKYL ESTERS
Ferdinand A. Ruszala, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Ashland Oil,
Inc., Ashland, Ky.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,354
Int. a.3 C07C 51/377. 57/05, 67/317 69/54
U.S. a. 562—599 3 Qaims
1. A process for the catalytic conversion of isobutyric acid
or a lower alkyl ester thereof to the corresponding a,/3-olefmi-
cally unsaturated derivative by oxydehydrogenation wherein a
catalyst is contacted with a gaseous feed stream containing said
acid or ester and molecular oxygen at a temperature between
about 300° and 500° C. which comprises using as catalyst a
material having the gram-atom empirical formula UjWftQjf
wherein a is 1 to 3. b is 1 to 3, and x is determined by satisfy-
ing the sum of the unshared positive valences of the other
elements shown in the formula.
4,391,988
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF AQUEOUS
SODIUM METHIONINATE SOLUTIONS
Manfred Spindler, Herbert Tanner, both of Hanau; Friedhelm
Geiger, Eriensee; Friedrich Bittner, Bad Soden, and Jurgen
Martens, Alzenau, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Degussa Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,476
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 2,
1981, 3104997
Int aj C07C 149/247
U.S. a. 562—559 6 Qaims
1. A process for the production of an aqueous sodium meth-
ioninate solution having a low content of sodium carbonate
comprising forming a crude aqueous hydrolysis mixture by the
saponification of 5-(;3-methylmercaptoethyl)-hydantoin with
1.1 to 6 equivalents of sodium hydroxide, sodium carbonate, or
a mixture of sodium hydroxide and sodium carbonate, distilling
off water from the crude hydrolysis mixture until the sodium
methioninate content is 40 to 65 weight percent, cooling to a
temperature which is at most room temperature and then
separating off the precipitated sodium carbonate.
4,391,991
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
PARA-FLUOROANILINE
Rudolph F. Mundhenke, North Tonawanda, and Michael J.
Fifolt, Grand Island, both of N.Y., assignors to Occidental
Chemical Corporation, Niagara Falls, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,199
Int. CI.3 C07C 85/00
U.S. a. 564—412 8 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of para-fluoroaniline com-
prising reacting N-phenylhydroxylamine with anhydrous hy-
drogen fluoride at atmospheric pressure and reflux conditions.
4,391,992
N-DENITRATION OF N,2,6-TRINITROANILINES WITH
PHASE TRANSFER CATALYSTS
William A. Daniels, Belle Mead, and Rainer K. Zawadzki,
Hopewell, both of N.J., assignors to American Cyanamid
Company, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 69,451, Aug. 24, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,264
Int. a.3 C07C 85/11. 76/02, 85/24. 85/26. 87/60. 87/62. 79/10.
79/12
U.S. a. 564—441 7 Qaims
1. A process for the N-denitration of a compound of for-
mula:
O2N
4,391,989
OXYDEHYDROGENATION OF ISOBUTYRIC ACTD AND
ITS LOWER ALKYL ESTERS
Chelliah Daniel, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Ashland Oil, Inc.,
Ashland, Ky.
Filed Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,489
Int. a.3 C07C 51/377 57/05. 67/317. 69/54
U.S. a. 562—599 3 Claims
1. In a process for the catalytic conversion of isobutyric acid
or a lower alkyl ester thereof to the corresponding a.B-olefini-
cally unsaturated derivative by oxydehydrogenation wherein a
catalyst is contacted with a gaseous feed stream containing said
acid or ester and molecular oxygen at a temperature between
300° and 550° C; the improvement comprising using as cata-
lyst a material having the gram-atom empirical formula
CrjP*WcModO;t wherein a is 0.01 to 1.0, b is 0.05 to 3.0, c is
0.01 to 3.0, d is 1 to 12.0, and x is determined by satisfying the
sum of the unshared positive valences of the other elements
shown in the formula.
NO2
wherein R is Ci-Cflfclkyl, C4-C6 cycloalkyl, C1-C4 monoha-
loalkyl or C1-C4 alkoxy(C2-C4)alkyl; Y is C1-C4 alkyl, halo-
gen or CF3; X is hydrogen, halogen, C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alk-
oxy, C1-C4 monohaloalkyl or C1-C4 alkoxy(Ci-C4) alkyl;
comprising: reacting the compound with 0.15 to 4.0 molar
amount of a phase transfer catalyst, wherein said catalyst is the
moiety R„' -Q+.Z-, n is an integer of 2,3 or 4; wherein each
R' may be the same or different and is selected from C1-C16
alkyl, C3-C7 cycloalkyl optionally substituted with C1-C3
alkyl, benzyl, substituted benzyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl
and the substitutent is HO, halogen, C1-C3 alkyl, C1-C3 alk-
oxy, Q is N,P,As or S, Z is CI, Br, I, HSO4, CH3SO4, H2PO3
or H2PO4, or said catalyst is macrocyclic ethers, macrobicy-
clic ethers, polyethylene glycols of formula HO— (CH2C-
H2O— )m— CH2CH2OH and m is an integer of 40 to 50, mono
and diesters of orihophosphonic acid with ethylene oxide
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
327
adducts, alkylpyridinium salts or substituted pyrazolium salts;
in the presence of a water-immiscible solvent of ethylene di-
chloride, chloroform, monochlorobenzene or carbon tetra-
chloride; and in the presence of an aqueous solution of an alkali
metal hydroxide or carbonate or ammonium hydroxide in
amounts sufficient to maintain at least pH 7 throughout the
reaction; and wherein the thus-obtained two-phase reaction
mixture is agitated at reflux until the reaction is essentially
complete.
4,391,993
THERMOLYSIS OF TETRAALKYLAMMONIUM
BOROHYDRIDES TO BISCTETRAALKYLAMMONIUM)
DECAHYDRODECABORANES
David C. Sayles, Huntsville, Ala., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Army,
Washington, D.C.
I Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,538
' Int. a.3 C07F 5/02
U.S. a. 568—4 5 Qaims
1. A process for the thermolysis reaction of tetraethylammo-
nium biarohydride to yield bis(tetraalkylammonium) decahy-
drodecaborane which comprises:
(i) combining Et4NBH4 in a mole ratio from about 0.3 to 1.0
with a boron-based solvent Et4NBH3 in a mole ratio from
about 0.2 to 4.0 to form a reaction mixture, (wherein Et is
C2H5), in a thermolysis reactor vessel having a plurality of
outlets for various functions including an outlet for the
introduction of reactants and an inert gas, an outlet
through which the reaction temperature is monitored, and
an outlet for discharging reaction products to a recovery
system, said reactor vessel provided with an immersion oil
heating means for heating including a temperature control
means for controlling the reaction temperature, a means
for maintaining an inert atmosphere of nitrogen over said
reaction mixture, and a temperature measuring means for
measuring temperature of the reaction mixture;
(ii) connecting one of said outlets of said reactor vessel to a
recovery system comprised of a tube member having a
heated tube section on one end to prevent any reflux
action to said reaction vessel, and said tube member hav-
ing an air-cooled condenser section on the other end of
said tube member, said air-cooled condenser section being
connected to a distillate receiver, said distillate receiver
having a discharge outlet that is connected in series with
a 0° C. cooled trap, a — 78° C. cooled trap, a back pressure
regulator, and a wet test gas meter; said cooled traps for
collecting the condensable gases and said wet test gas
meter for measuring the non-condensable gases;
(iii) introducing and maintaining an inert atmosphere of
nitrogen in said reactor vessel and said recovery system;
(iv) heating said reaction mixture while stirring and control-
ling said reacting mixture to maintain a thermolysis tem-
perature between about 175° C. and 186° C. for a reaction
time from about 1 to about 2.5 hours until chemical reac-
tion ceases;
(v) removing said reactor vessel from said immersion oil
heating means, and cooling the residue in said reactor
vessel to room temperature;
(vi) filtering off any remaining triethylamine borane solvent
and recovering the filter cake;
(vii) washing said filter cake with hexane to remove any
additional triethylamine borane; and
(viii) drying said washed filter cake to remove any hexane
adhering to said filter cake to yield {Et4N)2BioHio.
4,391,994
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF ETHERS
Kiyoshi Kogoma, Chiba; Yu Ohashi, Ichihara; Jiro Niizeki,
Chiba; Norio Sone, and Takashi Tobita, both of Ichihara, all
of Japan, assignors to Nisso Petrochemical Industrie Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,930, Jun. 23, 1980,
abandoned. This application Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,781
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 4, 1979, 54/84686
Int. a.3 C07C 41/02
U.S. a. 568—593 6 Qaims
1. A process for the production of glycol diethers. wherein
a chain-type ether compound represented by the formula
R»0-(CH2)m-01„R2
wherein
R' is an alkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
R2 is an alkyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms, phenyl, phenyl
substituted by lower alkyl or lower aikoxy, or aralkyl
consisting of lower alkylene and phenyl,
m is an integer from 1 to 4, and
n is an integer from 0 to 8
and an alkylene oxide compound selected from the group
consisting of compounds represented by the formulas
R3— CH CH2 and CH2— (CH2)/— CH2
\ / \
0 \
o
wherein
R^ is halogen-or non-substituted alkyl having 1 to 5 carbon
atoms or phenyl, and
1 is an integer from 0 to 5
are reacted in the presence of a catalyst prepared by mixing
boron trifiuoride and/or stannic chloride with an active-
hydrogen compound! selected from the group consisting of
water, alcohol carboxylic acid, phenol and sulfonic acid with
the proviso that mercaptan and hydroxamic acid may be in-
cluded in the said active-hydrogen compound when boron
trifiuoride is employed, one equivalent of the said active-
hydrogen compound being mixed with 1 to 5 moles of boron
trifiuoride and/or stannic compound, to form a boron trifiuo-
ride and/or stannic chloride complex therewith, the said cata-
lyst being employed in an amount of from 0.05 to 5 mole
percent of the chain-type ether compound based on boron
trifiuoride and/or stannic chloride, and the molar ratio of the
alkylene oxide compound to the chain-type ether compound is
from 0.5 to 5.
4,391,995
4-PHENOXY-PHENOXY-ALKANE-CARBOXYLIC ACID
DERIVATIVES AND PROCESS FOR THEIR
MANUFACTURE
Helmut Nahm, and Ernold Granzer, both of Kelkheim, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frank-
furt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 179,889, Aug. 20, 1980, Pat. No. 4,301,295,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 905,049, May 11,
1978, Pat. No. 4,238,626, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 542,061, Jan. 17, 1975, abandoned, which is a continuation
of Ser. No. 273,770, Jul. 21, 1972, abandoned. This application
May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,902
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 23,
1971, 2136828
Int. C\? C07C 2/88
U.S. a. 568—637 1 Claim
1. 4-(2,4-dichlorophenoxy)-phenol and the alkali metal phe-
nolates thereof 1
328
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
431,996
l,l.DICHLORO-2^.BIS(HYDROXYPHENYL)ETHYLENE
Oeveland William K. S., Amsterdam; Jimmy L. Webb, Ballston
Lake, and Charles M. Orlando, Glenville, all of N.Y., assign-
ors to General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,727, Feb. 1, 1980,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 919,461, Jun. 27,
1978, Pat. No. 4,221,901, which is a division of Ser. No. 765,654,
Feb. 4, 1977, Fat. No. 4,117,018. This application Nov. 16, 1981,
Ser. No. 321,644
Int. a.3 C07C i9/21
U.S. a. 568—726 1 Claim
1. A dichloride of the formula,
which has a trichloride impurity of the formula
HO
which is present in said dichloride at a concentration of less
than about 1000 ppm.
4,391,998
PRODUCnON OF PARA-ISOPROPYLPHENOL
Margaret M. Wu, Belle Mead, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,425
Int. a.3 C07C 37/14, 39/06
U.S. a. 568—781 9 Qaims
1. A process for selectively alkylating phenol to provide a
high yield of an isopropylphenol product enriched in the para-
isopropyl isomer of isopropylphenol, said process comprising
contacting phenol with a propylating agent selected from
propylene and isopropanol in the presence of a zeolite catalyst
selected from the group consisting of ZSM-5, ZSM-11, ZSM-
23, ZSM-35, ZSM-38 and ZSM-48, under alkylation conditions
which include a temperature within the range of from about
200° C. to 300° C.
4,391,999
3,4,5,6,6-PENTAMETHYL HEXANOL-2 AND ALKYL
HOMOLOGUES THEREOF; PROCESS FOR PREPARING
SAME AND ORGANOLEPTIC USES THEREOF
Richard M. Boden, Ocean, N.J., assignor to International Fla-
vors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 354,389, Mar. 2, 1982, which is
a division of Ser. No. 252,334, Apr. 9, 1981, Pat. No. 4,336,164,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,887, Dec. 4, 1980,
Pat. No. 4,318,934. This application Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No.
399,066
Int. a.3 C07C 31/125; A24B 3/12; CUD 3/50
U.S. a. 568—840 6 Claims
1. At least one compound defined according to the structure:
OH
Ri
4,391,997
ION EXCHANGE CATALYZED BISPHENOL PROCESS
Ashok K. Mendiratta, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General wherein Ri is C1-C3 alkyl.
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,164
Int. a.3 C07C 37/20, 39/16
U.S. a. 568—727 9 Oaims
so'-n^e
Sj 1
^
1 *
P.l^o.p»f* j
1. A process for the preparation of bisphenol-A comprising
reacting phenol and acetone in the presence of a cation ex-
change resin catalyst in a continuous reactor system with
reaction temperature increasing along the reactor or alterna-
tively in a series of reactors operating at progressively increas-
ing temperatures.
4,392,000
STABILIZED COMPOSITIONS OF CHLORINATED
SOLVENTS ^
Andre' Ryckaert, Brussels, and Michel Servais, Kraainem, both
of Belgium, assignors to Solvay & Cie., Brussels, Belgium
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,814
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 23, 1980, 80 22749
Int. Q\? C07C 17/42; CUD 7/50; C23G 5/02
U.S. a. 570—104 17 aaims
1. A stabilized composition containing a chlorinated solvent,
which is stabilized by means of a heterocyclic compound
containing an oxaziridine ring.
' 4,392,001
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF A
CYCLOALKENE THROUGH PARTIAL
HYDROGENATION OF THE CORRESPONDING
AROMATIC HYDROCARBON
Johannes A. Don, Veenendaal, and Joseph J. F. Scholten, Sit-
tard, both of Netherlands, assignors to Stamicarbon, B.V.,
Geleen, Netherlands
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,817
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 31, 1980,
8007111; Sep. 2, 1981, 8104067
Int. a.3 C07C 5/10
U.S. a. 585—269 H Claims
1. In processes for preparing a cycloalkene by partially
hydrogenating the corresponding aromatic hydrocarbon in the
presence of a catalyst, the improvement consisting essentially
in the combination of partially hydrogenating an aromatic
July 5, 1983
CHEMICAL
329
hydrocarbon in the gas-phase in the presence of water vapor
and in the presence of a ruthenium catalyst.
' ' 4,392,002
PROCESS FOR UPGRADING OLEHNIC Q CUTS
Jean Cosyns, Maule; Bernard Juguin; Jean-Francois Le Page,
both of Rueil Malmaison, and Jean Miquel, Paris, all of
France, assignors to Institut Francals du Petrole, Ruell-Mal-
maison, France i
FUed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,828
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 16, 1980, 80 22204
t Int. a? C07C 2/08, 2/58
U.S. a. 585—329 9 Claims
1. A process for upgrading a dried C4 olefinic cut, obtained
from a cracking unit or a steam-cracking unit, substantially
freed of butadiene, and dried, said process comprising the steps
of:
(a) feeding the dried C4 cut to a selective catalytic polymeri-
zation zone in the presence of a polymerization catalyst,
said catalyst being a fluorinated alumina, a boron-alumina
or a silica-alumina, and converting at least 95% of the
isobutene of said olefinic cut, in major part to isobutene
dimers and trimers, while limiting the overall conversions
of the normal butenes of said starting olefinic cut to not
over 3% by weight, the butane and isobutane of said
olefinic cut being substantially unconverted;
(b) feeding the effluent from the polymerization zone to a
hydroisomerization zone, in the presence of hydrogen and
an isomerization catalyst comprising at least one Group
VIII metal deposited on a carrier, and isomerizing the
polymerization effluent under such conditions that at least
90% of the 1-butene of said polymerization effluent is
isomerized to 2-butenes, the percentages of the other
constituents of said effluent remaining substantially un-
changed, the proportions of the normal butenes in the
hydroisomerization effluent at the end of the isomeriza-
tion reaction being at least 92% by weight of 2-butenes
and less than 8% by weight of 1-butene;
(c) fractionating the effiuent from the isomerization zone,
and separately recovering a bottoms poly gasoline frac-
tion comprising, in major part, isobutene dimers and tri-
mers, and an overhead fraction comprising, in major part,
isobutane, butane and butenes; and
(d) feeding the overhead fraction to an alkylation zone,
fractionating the alkylation effluent, and separately recov-
ering an overhead fraction of high saturated C4 hydrocar-
bon content, and an alkylate.
4,392,003
ISOBUTENE BY DEHYDROISOMERIZATION OF
NORMAL BUTANE
Alexander J. Kolombos, Thames Ditton; Qive D. Telford, Ascot,
and Dennis Young, Staines, all of England, assignors to The
British Petroleum Company Limited, London, England
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,429
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 12, 1980,
8019241
Int. a.3 C07C 5/24. 5/32. 5/40
U.S. Q. 585—661 8 Oaims
1. A process for dehydroisomerisation of a hydrocarbon
feedstock containing normal butane to isobutene which com-
prises bringing the feedstock at an elevated temperature into
contact in a single stage with a catalyst composition compris-
ing an element from Group Illa of the Periodic Table or a
compound thereof in combination with a suppwrt of a-value
below 45, said support being a zeolite selected from the group
consisting of an aluminosilicate, a silicalite, a metal tectosili-
cate, and a boralite. 1
4,392,004
REDUCTION OF CYCLOPENTADIENE FROM
ISOPRENE STREAMS
Richard M. D'Sidocky, Ravenna, Ohio, assignor to The Good-
year Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,913
Int. a.3 C07C 7/01. 7/12
U.S. O. 585—820 4 Qaims
1. A process for the removal of small amounts of CPD from
a C-S hydrocarbon stream containing isoprene comprising
contacting said stream with an LHSV value of from 0.5 to 30
and a temperature of from 0° C. to 100° C. with a base on an
activated carbon carrier wherein said base is selected form the
group consisting of KOH, NaOH and KF.
1
ELECTRICAL
4^92,005
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
Raymond F. Mohrman, St Louis, Mo., assignor to Mon-a-
therm, Inc^ St. Louis, Mo.
, FUed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,128
' Int. a.3 HOIL i5/06
U.S. a. 136—235 21 Oaims
Si
J
a thin magnifying lens mounted adjacent the coated member
to focus the Hght rays emitted from the coated member,
a substantially flat member having a plurality of solar cells
mounted and interconnected thereon and positioned at a
predetermined distance from the lens to receive the fo-
cused light rays therefrom for purposes of activation, and,
a one-sided mirror mounted adjacent the solar cells and on
the side opposite the lens to reflect the focussed light
passing through said cells back onto said cells and means
couple to the solar cells to receive the output therefrom.
4,392,007
SOLAR GENERATOR PROVIDING ELECTRICITY AND
HEAT
Gerard Barkats, Mandelieu; Alain Girard, Cros de Cagnes; Jean
Marchal, Peymeinade, and Charles Morel, Le Canpet, all of
France, assignors to Societe Nationale Industritiile Aeros-
patiale, Paris, France \
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,853
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 9, 1980, 80 21595
Int. a.3 HOIL U/04: F24J i/02
U.S. a. 136—248 7 Oaims
I 4,392,006
SOLAR CELL ACTIVATION SYSTEM
Lawrence Apelian, 51 S. Coleman Rd., Centereach, N.Y. 11720
, I FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,280
Int. a.J HOIL il/04
U.S. a. 136-246 8 Claims
«
1. A solar cell activation system comprising:
a substantially flat board-like transparent member having a
coating of a light emitting substance on one surface
thereof to emit light rays therefrom, ,
P^^sp
1. A temperature sensor comprising a pair of dissimilar
metallic conductors electrically insulated one from the other
along the lengths thereof but electrically connected at one of
their ends to form a thermojunction, and a connector compris-
ing an elongate backing strip of dielectric sheet material, the
other ends of the conductors being positioned to extend gener-
ally transversely across one face of the strip and being spaced
apart longitudinally of the strip, and facing strip means on the
backing strip comprising a first facing strip of dielectric mate-
rial on said one face of the backing strip overlying said other
ends of the conductors, said first facing strip having openings
therein exposing bare uninsulated portions of said other ends of
the conductors to provide electrical contacts whereby on
insertion of said connector into a mating connector said
contacts are adapted to be engaged by corresponding contacts
in the mating connector for making respective electrical con-
nections.
i n
1. A solar energy collecting device comprising:
a plurality of photovoltaic cells;
a plurality of heat pipes;
said photovoltaic cells being carried by said heat pipes in
heat transfer relationship therewith; and
a fluid-tight cooling chamber provided with a cold fluid inlet
and hot fluid outlet and enclosing at least said plurality of
heat pipes.
! 4,392,008
COMBINED ELECTRICAL AND THERMAL SOLAR
COLLECTOR
Herbert M. Cullis, Silver Spring, and Reinhard Stamminger,
Gaithersburg, both of Md., assignors to Monegon, Ltd., Gai-
thersburg, Md.
FUed Not. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 320,946
Int. CI.3 HOIL n/04: F24J i/02
U.S. a. 136—248 , 9 Claims
\iB\
3A
:i1
k\\\\^\\-r^^V.\\VA\\V
23
27
•4-3
t^
1. A solar panel assem )ly comprising support means defining
an enclosure, flat solar <»llector plate means mounted in said
enclosure, photovoltaic cell means including at least one thin
semi-conductor wafer n: ounted on said plate means, flow tube
means in the enclosure below said plate means, thin perpendic-
ularly depending heat-conductive web means rigidly connect-
ing said plate means to said flow tube means and being located
I 331
332
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
immediately subjacent said photovoltaic cell means, respective
fluid inlet and outlet header means secured in said enclosure,
and means communicatively connecting said inlet and outlet
header means to opposite ends of said flow tube means,
wherein said flow tube means comprises a plurality of parallel
flow tubes below said plate means, wherein said web means
comprises respective depending thin heat-conducting perpen-
dicularly depending webs connecting said plate means to said
flow tubes, and wherein said photovoltaic cell means includes
a plurality of photovoltaic silicon semi-conductor wafers
mounted on the plate means immediately adjacent to and sub-
stantially centered above the locations of said heat-conducting
webs.
4^92,011
SOLAR CELL STRUCTURE INCORPORATING A NOVEL
SINGLE CRYSTAL SILICON MATERIAL
Jacques I. Pankove, Princeton, and Chung P. Wu, Trenton, both
of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 145,239, Apr. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4,322,253.
This appUcation Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,695
Int a.J HOIL 57/06
U.S. a. 136-261 5 Qaims
46
/^
50
48
40
42
4,392,009
SOLAR POWER MODULE
Joseph D. Napoli, Windham, N.H., assignor to Euon Research
and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,032
Int. a.3 HOIL 31/04
VS. a. 136—251 16 Cla»n>s
1. A mass-produced solar power module, comprising:
an array of current-generating solar cells arranged upon a
substantially flat panel; and
a substantially rigid, easily assembled frame supporting said
solar panel, said frame having spaced-apart side channels
that each interlock with adjacent end sections about said
panel to form a rigid, integral, easily-assembled, support-
ing frame for said panel.
4. A single crystal silicon solar cell comprising:
a body of single crystal silicon having regions of differing
conductivity forming a photovoltaic junction therein, said
body having opposed major surfaces wherein the major
surface which is adapted to be incident to solar radiation
has a region thereunder with sufficient concentration of
hydrogen incorporated therein to have a band gap energy
which is greater than the band gap energy of the single
crystal silicon of said body; and
means for electrically contacting said opposed major sur-
faces.
4,392,012
ELECTRICAL WIRING BOX ARRANGEMENT WITH
ALIGNABLE GROUNDING STRAP
William Nattel, Montreal, Canada, assignor to GTE Sylvania
Canada Limited, Montreal, Canada
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,712
Int. a.3 H02G 3/08
U.S. a. 174—51 7 Qaims
4,392,010
PHOTOVOLTAIC CELLS HAVING CONTACTS AND
METHOD OF APPLYING SAME
Joseph Lindmayer, Bethesda, Md., assignor to Solarex Corpora-
tion, Rockrille, Md.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 3,945, Jan. 16, 1979, Pat. No.
4,297,391. This appUcation Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,380
Int. Q.^ HOIL 31/04. 31/18
U.S. a. 136—256 15 Claims
1. A method of applying an electrically conductive contact
to the surface of a photovoltaic cell, comprising forming a
mixture of aluminum and a solderable soft metal at a tempera-
ture in excess of the alloying temperature of said mixture and
silicon, said metal comprising at least about 10% of said mix-
ture, and spraying said mixture toward said surface at a dis-
tance such that said mixture will contact said surface at a
temperature at which it will alloy with said silicon and thereby
adhere to said surface.
12. A photovoltaic cell having a front surface adapted to
receive and absorb light impinging thereon and a back surface
opposed to said front surface, and an electrical contact cover-
mg at least a portion of at least one of said surfaces, said contact
being comprised of a layer of a mixture of aluminum and at
least about 10% zinc. /
»" ~- ^4-^
1. An electrical wiring box arrangement including in combi-
nation, an electrical wiring box and a grounding member;
said wiring box including:
a wall structure comprising front-to-rear walls and a rear
wall therebetween which together define a chamber
within the box with a forward facing opening for re-
ceiving an electrical wiring device,
said wall structure including support means for seatably
receiving said grounding member and the mounting
yoke of a wiring device mounted in said box chamber,
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
333
said support means including screw retaining means for
retaining the mounting screw of said wiring device,
said wall structure further including first and second re-
taining means for retaining said grounding member
against outward removal from said box in a direction
toward said forward facing opening while permitting
lateral slideable movement of said grounding member;
said grounding member including:
screw receiving means for receiving said wiring device
mounting screw and providing electrical contact be-
tween said mounting screw and said grounding mem-
ber,
means for attaching the ground conductor wire of an
electrical cable,
electrically conductive pathway means between said
screw receiving means and said ground conductor wire
attachment means, and
first and second attaphment means for coacting with said
box wall first and isecond retaining means to attach said
grounding member to said box wall structure;
whereby said grounding member is received and seated on said
box wall support means and retained by said grounding mem-
ber attachment means coacting with said box wall retaining
means to attach said grounding member to said box wall struc-
ture while permitting lateral sliding movement of said ground-
ing member to permit direct alignment of said screw receiving
means of said grounding member and said screw retaining
means of said box wall support member, the mounting screw of
a wiring device mounted in said box chamber passing through
said grounding member screw receiving means making firm
electrical contact with said grounding member, and being
received and retained by said screw retaining means of said box
wall support means.
4,392,014
TELEPHONE CABLE SPLICES
William P. Tnimble, Kanata; Roger C. Finn, and Charles F. C.
Jackson, both of Ottawa, all of Canada,'assignor8 to Northern
Telecom Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,781
Int. a.^ H02G 15/113
U.S. a. 174—92 1 7 Qaims
5. A telecommunications cable splice closure comprising at
least two sheathed cables spliced together by a plurality of
connectors connecting the cables at unsheathed portions
thereof, the connectors being encapsulated in a moisture im-
pervious material, the encapsulated connectors being sur-
rounded by a wrapping film, the wrapped connectors being
closely embraced by a block of closed cell foam plastics, the
foam plastics block being contained within a substantially
cylindrical mold having truncated conical ends surrounding
sheathed portions of the respective cables, the sheathed por-
tions wrapped with an open cell material having a matrix of
threads, said block of foam having a boundary region thereof
within the wrapped open cell material, the boundary region
being relatively more dense than an interior portion of the
foam block. |
4,392,015
CONDENSER-TYPE ELECTRICAL BUSHING WITH
CENTRAL ELECTRODE ALIGNING WEDGING BLOCKS
Robert W. Runnels, Milwaukee, Wis.; Loren B. Wagenaar,
Muncie, Ind.; Louis E. Luke, Mt. Pleasant Township, Dela-
ware County, Ind., and Thomas P. Bresnahan, Muncie, Ind.,
assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,648
Int. a.3 HOIB 17/28
U.S. a. 174—143 I 3 Claims
4,392,013
nNE-PATTERNED THICK FILM CONDUCTOR
STRUCTURE AND MANUFACTURING METHOD
THEREOF
Kaoru Ohmura; Takeo Kimura, and Tetsuhiro Kusunose, all of
Figi, Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kai-
sha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,155
Oaims iwiority, application Japan, Dec. 27, 1979, 54-169266;
Dec. 27, 1979, 54-169267; Dec. 27, 1979, 54-169268; Jan. 25,
1980, 55-6956; Jan. 25, 1980, 55-6958; Aug. 20, 1980, 55-113410;
Aug. 21, 1980, 55-113979
Int. a.3 H05K 1/02
U.S. a. 174—68.5
11 Oaims
E
a.
Circuit density O lines/ mm
(PITCH lOO/im)
-Current density
IDA / dm'
50r
2
=; 0
1 ,^ Current density
/ii lA/dm'
50 ioo~
Conductor width i^mi
1. A fine-patterned thick film conductor structure having
conductors formed on an insulating substrate, said conductors
having a film thickness of 35-200 fim and a circuit density of
no less than S lines/mm.
1. A condenser bushing for electrical apparatus, comprising:
a cylindrical mounting flange having a predetermined inside
diameter;
an upper casing connected to the mounting flange;
a lower casing coaxially positioned with said upper casing;
a central electrode positioned within said upper and said
334
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
lower casings, said electrode being supported by said
upper casing, said electrode supporting said lower casing;
a condenser section wound about said central electrode, said
condenser section having an outside diameter that is
smaller than the inside diameter of said mounting flange;
and
means for centering said condenser section within said
mounting flange, said means including a plurality of tri-
angular wedging blocks, said means being rigidly attached
to said condenser section such that the combination of said
outside diameter of said condenser section and said means
for centering is larger than said inside diameter of said
mounting flange thus preventing said condenser section
and said central electrode from falling into the electrical
apparatus upon mechanical failure of said said upp)er cas-
ing.
4^92,016
AM STEREO CARRIER REINSERTION
Don R. Sauer, San Jose, Calif., assignor to National Semicon-
ductor Corporation, Santa Qara, Calif.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,914
Int. a.3 H04H 5/00
U.S. a. 179—1 GS 5 Claims
tj
Rf
MtlPllflER
JZE
OSCIOATOR
1
IF
AMPLIFIER
-,»CC
AM
DCHCIOR
^v^
-v^v-lFlinRp' WATRIxJ~~^OtJTPUT
PHASE
DCTECTOR
— 1
l-R
1. In an AM stereo radio receiver that employs amplitude
modulation of a carrier signal to transmit the stereo sum signal
and phase modulation of said carrier to transmit the stereo
difference signal and includes a phase demodulator for recov-
ering said stereo difference signal, the improvement compris-
ing:
filter means tuned to said carrier frequency; and
means for coupling said filter means to said receiver
whereby said filter normally receives said carrier signal
and will act to supply said carrier signal to said receiver
during those brief periods of time when said carrier signal
would be lost due to amplitude overmodulation.
4,392,017
TELEPHONE HANDSET LUTING DEVICE
Luis R. Torres, 3505 Fir St., East Chicago, Ind. 46312
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,122
Int. a.3 H04M 15/00
U.S. a. 179—1 HS 13 Qaims
1. A telephone handset lifting device comprising:
an electromagnetic coil;
shaft means formed to extend vertically through said elec-
tromagnetic coil, and horizontally across said coil;
said shaft means being vertically moveable by said electro-
magnetic coil;
structure for supporting said coil and said shaft means;
the end of said horizontally extending shaft means being
formed to support a telephone handset for raising and
lowering said telephone handset;
an electric current circuit connected to said coil for energiz-
ing said coil;
switch means in said electric current circuit operable to open
and close said circuit;
a time sequence means for operating said switch means; and
a plurality of manually of)erable elements on said time se-
quence means arranged thereon to preselect a plurality of
irregular time sequences for operating said switch means
repeatedly during a time cycle.
. 4,392,018
SPEECH SYNTHESIZER WITH SMOOTH LINEAR
INTERPOLATION
Bnlbe Fette, Mesa, Ariz., assignor to Motorola Inc., Schaum-
burg. 111.
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,203
Int. a.3 GIOL 1/00
US. a. 179—1 SM 9 Claims
tXTERlUL .
- I' i:
DATA AVAILABLE
DATA TAKEN
1. In a speech synthesizer including an all-p>ole, multi-stage
lattice filter for reconstructing a plurality N of sp>eech samples
from each set of correlation coefficients and accompanying
excitation signal applied thereto, smooth interpolation appara-
tus comprising:
(a) new parameter storage means for receiving and storing
each new set of correlation coefficients;
(b) old parameter storage means connected to said new
parameter storage means for receiving each of the sets of
correlation coefficients subsequent to the reconstruction
of the N speech samples therefrom; and
(c) circuit means connected to said new and old parameter
storage means for determining the difference between
each new and old correlation coefficient in the new and
old sets, separating the difference into N steps and provid-
ing a correlation coefficient which changes in the N steps
from the old correlation coefficient to the new correlation
coefficient.
4,392,019
SURROUND SOUND SYSTEM
Jonathan Haliiday, Winchester, England, assignor to Indepen-
dent Broadcasting Authority, London, England
FUed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,081
Int. a.' H04S 3/00
U.S. a. 179—1 GQ 10 Claims
1. In a system for transmission and reception of horizontal
surround-sound by modulation of a carrier, wherein the modu-
lating signal contains a monophonic audio signal 2, a subcar-
rier modulated by an audio signal equivalent to the stereo
difference signal A of a stereophonic broadcast, a pilot tone at
half the subcarrier frequency, and a second subcarrier in quad-
rature with the first and modulated by a third audio signal T,
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
the signals £, A and T being defined in terms of the direction
of a sound to be reproduced, the improvement which com-
prises
(a) means for generating the signal 2;
335
Mume S
m
WIKI
rrSTK^
Mil
5 6
(b) means for generating the signal A at a phase angle with
respect to the signal 2 which is selected from an in phase
relationship and a 180° out of phase relationship for all
angular values of elevation and azimuth; and
(c) means for generating the signal T with a phase shift of 90°
with respect to the signals £ and A.
output signals of said first and second switch and decoder
circuit so that the signal component in the output signal of
said first switch and decoder circuit, which component is
a product of the harmonic frequency component of the
subcarrier signal and the stereo composite signal, is can-
celled by the signal component in the output signal of said
second switch and decoder circuit, which component is a
product of the fundamental frequency component of the
switching signal and the stereo composite signal,
characterized in that:
said first switching signal of 1/m frequency (f^co/m) and
said second switching signal of 1/1 frequency (fvo/l) are
produced by said frequency dividing means with the
fixed phase relationship between said first and second
switching signa's.
4,392,020
STEREO DEMODULATION SYSTEM FOR AN FM
I STEREO BROADCAST RECEIVER
Yoshimi Iso; Shigeki Inoue, and Toshifumi Shibuya, all of
Toyokawa, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
i I Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,536
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1980, 55-22793;
Oct 9, 1980, 55-140507
il 11 Int. a.3 H04H 5/00
. a. 179^-1
4,392,021
SECURE FACSIMILE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM USING
TIME-DELAY MODULATION
Matthew W. Slate, Sudbury, Mass., assignor to Technical Com-
munications Corporation, Concord, Mass.
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,819
Int. a.3 H04K 1/06
U.S. a. 179—1.5 R 20 Qaims
U.S.
GE
15 Oaims
IKK J
-"«?
JStf
imia «T
V
ouKvi I,. aay
■Tinn L,""'
';^"
RF Alli(>a
MIXER
.OCiL
05 C.
27
'■
IF
Filter
^ 129
■28 ■■ 1
^ ^^~ DETECTOR
— ,
1
1
_1
■ GDOUTOI
And
kCMom CONTOOLJ^ «2
l>H'HHH:^3WSh "»-
FREO.
Dr/DER
2,1 ?*. a
•^-bECOOER
; ?w. a
Decoder
UaooiT'ON, L.
1 "^TRACTONr
ff
1. A stereo demodulation system for an FM stereo broadcast
receiver in which a signal for switching and decoding a re-
ceived stereo composite signal is produced in a demodulator,
said system comprising:
a voltage controlled oscillator which produces a signal of a
specific frequency (fvco),
frequency dividing means for receiving the output signal of
said voltage controlled oscillator and producing a first
switching signal of 1/m frequency (fvco/m) of said specific
frequency and a second switching signal of 1/1 frequency
(fvco/y) of said specific frequency,
a phase comparator for phase comparing a further frequency
divided signal of said first switching signal with a pilot
signal contained in the received stereo composite signal,
a low pass filter for filtering the output signal of said phase
comparator and feeding back the thus filtered signal to
said voltage controlled oscillator so that said voltage
controlled oscillator, said frequency dividing means, said
phase comparator and said low pass filter constituting a
phase locked loop,
a first switch and decoder circuit for switching and decoding
said stereo composite signal by said 1/m frequency
(fveo/m) signal produced from said frequency dividing
means,
a second switch and decoder circuit for switching and de-
coding said stereo composite signal by an output signal of
1/1 frequency (f»eo/l) of said predetermined frequency
produced from said frequency dividing means, and
an addition/subtraction circuit for adding or subtracting the
1. A system for providing secure transmission of an analog
sourcesignal over an unsecured channel, between a transmit-
ting site and a receiving site, comprising:
at the transmitting site:
means for converting the analog source signal into a se-
quence of digital words each of which represents the
instantaneous value df that signal at a particular sam-
pling time;
means for storing a finite multiplicity of the digiul words;
means for providing a first clocking signal at a first rate;
means for writing the digital words into the storing means
responsive to the first clocking signal;
means for providing a second clocking signal at a second
rate;
means for reading said digital words out of said storing
means responsive to the second clocking signal;
the long-term time average of the periods of the first and
second clocking signals being equal;
at least one of the first and second rates being pseudo-ran-
domly variable, whereby the time between writing a
digital word into the storage means and reading such
digital word from the storage means is pseudo-ran-
domly variable; |
means for converting the digital words read from the
storage means to a frequency-modulated analog signal
for transmission over the unsecured channel; and
at the receiving site:
means for converting the analog signal received over the
unsecured channel into a second sequence of digital
words, each of which represents the instantaneous value
of such analog signal at a particular sampling time;
such means for converting the analog signal into digital
words including means for sampling such analog
signal responsive to the third clocking signal;
means for providing a third clocking signal at a third
rate;
336
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
means for storing a finite multiplicity of the digital
words of the second sequence;
means for writing the digital words into such storing
means responsive to the third clocking signal;
means for providing a fourth clocking signal at a fourth
rate;
means for reading said digital words out of said storing
means responsive to the fourth clocking signal;
said third and fourth rates being selected such that the
time average of the period of each is the same as the
time average of the periods of the first and second
clocking signals;
the further clocking-signal further being selected such that
the time between wrtting a digital word into the storing
means at the trari'smitting site and reading such digital
word from the storing means at the receiving site is
constant; and
means for converting the digital words read from the
storing means at the receiving site to an analog signal
for use at the receiving site.
4,392,022
TELEVISION REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
SELECnVELY CONTROLLING A PLURALITY OF
EXTERNAL APPARATUS
David J. Carlson, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,359
Int. a? H04M 11/08
U.S. a. 179—2 TV 3 Qaims
^'iLf»«o« amwi
1. A television remote control system including a television
receiver and a remote control unit comprising:
keyboard means included in said remote control unit for
entering data of a first type to control various functions of
' ' said television receiver and of a second type correspond-
ing to digits of a telephone number;
encoder means included in said remote control unit for
generating a digitally encoded data signal in accordance
' with said entered data of said first and second types;
a microphone included in said remote control unit for pro-
viding an analog audio signal;
first modulator means included in said remote control unit
for continuously modulating a carrier signal in accordance
with said analog audio signal;
first infrared transmitter means included in said remote
control means for transmitting a selected one of said digi-
tally encoded data signal and said continuously modulated
carrier signal;
switching means included in said remote control means for
selecting said one of said digitally encoded data signal and
said continuously modulated carrier signal;
first infrared receiver means included in said television re-
ceiver for receiving said selected signal transmitted by
said first infrared transmitter means;
decoder means included in said television receiver for de-
coding said received selected signal corresponding to said
digitally encoded data signal to produce first decoded
digital signals according to said entered data of said first
type and to produce second decoded digital signals ac-
cording to said entered data of said second type;
television control means included in said television receiver
for controlling said various functions of said television
receiver in accordance with said entered data of said first
type in response to said first decoded digital signals;
telephone control means included in said television receiver
for generating telephone dialing signals in accordance
with said entered data of said second type in response to
said second decoded digital signals;
first demodulator means included in said television receiver
and responsive to said received selected signal corre-
sponding to said continuously modulated carrier signal for
demodulating said analog audio signals;
telephone interface means included in said television re-
ceiver and to which a telephone line is coupled, for apply-
ing said telephone dialing signals to said telephone line to
dial said telephone number and for applying said demodu-
lated analog audio signals to said telephone line when said
telephone number has been dialed;
second modulator means included in said television receiver
and coupled to said telephone line by said telephone inter-
face means, for modulating a second carrier signal in
accordance with incoming audio signals from said tele-
phone line;
second infrared transmitter means included in said television
receiver for transmitting said modulated second carrier
signal;
second infrared receiver means included in said remote
control unit for receiving said modulated second carrier
signal transmitted by said second infrared transmitter
means;
second demodulator means included in said remote control
unit and responsive to said received modulated second
carrier signal for demodulating said incoming audio sig-
nals; and
sound reproducing means included in said remote control
unit for reproducing sounds in accordance with said de-
modulated incoming audio signals.
4,392,023
OFF-HOOK TELEPHONE SENSING SYSTEM
Michael L. Sears, Redondo Beach, Calif., assignor to Transac-
tion Technology, Inc., Santa Monica, Calif.
FUed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,660
Int. a.3 H04M 11/00
U.S. a. 179—2 DP 6 Claims
'^jM
<;^^^^
iV '^Jj
'/*
V-/0
m*otm
4«
J0
jrrjfAtmfiwe-'
^j:.
V*
t4
1. An off-hook telephone sensing system for use with a voice
and data transmission system wherein the system includes a
transaction terminal coupled to a telephone line for data trans-
JULY 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
337
mission and a standard telephone instrument coupled to the
telephone line for voice transmission, including
an off-hook telephone sensing device coupled to the stan-
dard telephone instrument for detecting the on-hook or
I off-hook condition of the instrument and for providing an
output signal having values in accordance with the on-
hook or off-hook condition of the instrument, and wherein
the off-hook sensing device includes a voltage comparator
having a reference voltage input and a variable voltage
input and with a change in impedance of the standard
telephone instrument between the on-hook and off-hook
conditions controlling the value of the variable voltage
input and with the voltage comparator providing the
output signal in accordance with the change in impedance
of the telephone instrument, and wherein the impedance
of the telephone instrument forms part of a voltage divider
circuit and with the change in impedance of the telephone
instrument providing the variable voltage input to the
voltage comparator,
a switching means having first and second states coupled to
the telephone instrument and r to the telephone line and
with the telephone instrument connected to the telephone
line with the switching means in the first state and with the
telephone instrument disconnected from the telephone
line with the switching means in the second state,
means coupled to the off-hook sensing device and responsive
to the output signal for producing an interrupt signal
when the off-hook sensing device detects the off-hook
condition of the telephone instrument and with the
switching means in the second state, and
means coupled to the switching means and responsive to the
interrupt signal for controlling the switching means from
the second state to the first state after the reception of the
interrupt signal.
means to a voice signal pair line during the commercial
power failure.
4,392,025
CONDENSER MICROPHONE
Junichi Tamamura, Yao; Mamoni Yasuda; Motomi Hosoda,
both of Kashiwara, and Shinichi Saeki, Yao, all of Japan,
assignors to Hosiden Electronics Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,461
Int. a.3 H04R 19/04. 1/22
U.S. a. 179—111 R 1 Claim
BACK CHAMBER
9 5 BACK ELECTRODE
3
4,392,024
ELECTRONIC KEY TELEPHONE SET CTRCUIT FOR
PERMITTING DIALING DURING FAILURE OF
COMMEROAL POWER SUPPLIED TO THE SET
Tsuyoshi Shinoi, Yokohama; Keisuke Mochizuki; Yoshimi
Suzuki, both of Kawasaki; Masani Kudoh, Tokyo, and Watani
Hashimoto, Hyogo, all of Japan, assignors to Nitsuko Lim-
ited, Kawasaki and Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public
Corporation, Tokyo, both of, Japan
I I FUed Dec. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 328,451
aaims pHority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 25, 1980, 55/182790
I Int. C\? H04M 1/23. 1/72
U.S. a. 179^99 R 5 Qaims
S2I
SELECTION L2I
SlOML L22
GENER4T0B LJS
L24
H2t H22M2S
KE'OIAL
TALKING
NETWORK
7 CIRCUIT
6
PLATE
11 12 16 15 8 11a 13
1. A condenser microphone, comprising:
a diaphragm to be vibrated in response to an input sound;
a back electrode, having at least one opening therethrough,
disposed oppositely to said diaphragm;
a circuit assembling plate having one surface only to which
a plurality of electronic circuit elements are attached; and,
a holder for holding said back electrode and said circuit
assembling plate in an orientation where that surface of
said back electrode which is not faced toward said dia-
phragm, is faced toward that surface of said circuit assem-
bling plate to which said electronic circuit elements are
not attached, with a predetermined distance provided
between said back electrode and said circuit assembling
plate, said holder defining a back chamber in a space
between said back electrode and said circuit assembling
plate, said back chamber being closed except for said at
least one opening in said back electrode.
4,392,026
SUBSCRIBER LINE TESTING SYSTEM
Takafumi Kojima; Kenzo Tamaki, both of Yokohama, and Shiro
Yokota, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd. and
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation, both of
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,400
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 8, 1980, 55-139868
Int. a.5 H04B 3/46; H04M 3/30
U.S. CI. 179—175.3 R 13 Claims
^
2. An electronic key telephone set in an electronic key tele-
phone system having a key service unit, which comprises:
two contacts provided for each key in a key dial;
data signal transmitter/receiver circuit means connected
with one of said two contacts of each key;
selection signal generator circuit means connected to the
other of said two contacts of each key to generate a selec-
tion signal corresponding to the key;
means for detecting conmiercial power failure; and
means for connecting said selection signal generator circuit
3. A subscriber line testing system, comprising:
a plurality of subscriber lines;
semiconductor switches each driven by a constant gate
current and selected for leading a desired one of said
subscriber lines for testing;
change-over means for changing over a value of current
338
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
flowing through the subscriber Hne to be tested and intro-
duced through the selected one of said semiconductor
switches;
means for measuring the levels of the current fed through
the selected one of said semiconductor switches and
changed over by said change-over means, respectively.
4^92,027
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING A
UNIFORM SOUND DISTRIBUTION IN AN AIRCRAFT
CABIN
Thomas-Mattaias Bock, Buxtehude, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit
beschraenkter Haftung, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 35,014, May 1, 1979. This
application Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,650
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 5,
1978, 2819615
Int. a.3 H04R 9/04
U.S. a. 179—181 W 7 Qaims
"^ym
said pay telephone means further including a tissue-dis-
pensing opening;
a supply of sanitized tissue;
storage means within said pay telephone means to receive
and hold said supply of sanitized tissue; and
dispensing means within said pay telephone means operably
associated with said coin-receiving means and said supply
of sanitized tissue and operable to force a tissue from said
supply into said opening upon receipt of said signal, and
wherein:
said dispensing means includes an electrically operated ro-
tatable spindle; and
said supply of sanitized tissue includes a roll of sanitized
tissue removably mounted to said spindle.
4,392,029
PUSH BUTTON SWITCH HAVING LATCHING SPRING
ARM MOLDED ON PLASTIC CASING
William J. Schaad, Winnetka; Charles E. Black, III, Mount
Prospect, and Raymond T. Halstead, Wheeling, all of III.,
assignors to Indak Manufacturing Corp.* Northbrook, 111.
FUed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,690
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/20
U.S. a. 200—5 B 8 Qaims
1. A method for the uniform distribution of sound in an
aircraft or spacecraft cabin structure, comprising the following
step: substantially enclosing the cabin space by a plurality of
flexible structural inner wall and ceiling panel members inside
an outer cabin wall, elastically connecting at least certain ones
of said panel members substantially at the edges thereof to said
cabin structure to provide a movable support enabling the
respective panel member to vibrate, centrally connecting an
acoustic drive member of acoustic drive means including said
drive member and a mass, said drive member being movable
relative to said mass, to said certain panel members in such a
manner that the drive member is connected to the respective
panel member intermediate of the panel edges on a surface area
contact, and that the mass of the drive means is rigidly secured
to the same panel member substantially adjacent the edges of
the same panel member, whereby the acoustic drive means are
located between the outer cabin wall and the respective panel
member which may vibrate as an acoustical diaphragm and
whereby the cabin structure with its inner and outer wall forms
a loudspeaker cabinet in which said drive means are located.
4,392,028
PAY TELEPHONE WITH SANITIZED TISSUE
DISPENSER
Richard L. Saxton, 4136 Brown Rd., Indianapolis, Ind. 46226
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,164
Int. a.J H04R 1/12
U.S. a. 179—185 13 Oaims
39G.
1. A push button switch, comprising
first and second parallel push buttons,
a casing having first and second guide means for guiding said
first and second push buttons along parallel closely spaced
paths,
said push buttons being movable between extended and
depressed positions,
resilient means biasing each of said push buttons toward said
extended f>osition,
switching means in said casing and operable by movement of
said first push button,
said casing being molded from a resinous plastic material,
a flexible resilient latching spring arm molded in one piece
with said casing and extending between said flrst and
second push buttons,
cooperative latching elements on said first push button and
said latching spring arm for causing deflection of said
latching spring arm followed by latching of said first push
button in its depressed position,
and cooperative unlatching elements on said second push
button and said arm for deflecting said arm and thereby
causing disengagement of said latching elements in re-
sponse to depression of said second push button.
I. The combination of:
pay telephone means including a telephone with coin-receiv-
ing means operable to issue a signal upon receipt of a coin,
4,392,030
ADJUSTABLE ROTARY SWITCH
Gary L. Buss, Arden, N.C., assignor to CTS Corporation, Elk-
hart, Ind.
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,374
Int. a.J HOIH 21/76
U.S. a. 200—11 R 7 Claims
1. A rotary switch calibrated for accurately selecting any
one of a plurality of combinations of external circuits con-
nected to the switch, the combinations being made in accor-
dance with a predetermined code, said rotary switch compris-
JULY 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
ing a housing having one end open and a housing wall with a
centrally disposed aperture and a noncentrally located opening
therein, an insulating substrate having a plurality of electrical
contact paths for effecting said code and arranged in multiple
concentric rings in the surface thereof, the surfaces of said
contact paths being flush with the surface of said insulating
substrate, a rotor comprising an insulating annular body and
having teeth means for calibration of said switch and located at
a portion of the circumference of said rotor, contactor means
having multiple rake contactors and secured to said rotor for
engaging selected combinations of contact paths in different
ones of said rings whereby rake contactor surface areas engag-
ing said paths remain constant despite wear, shaft means
85 8A 90
4,392,031
JMINUTURE ELECTRICAL SWITCH
Hazen Curtis, III, Andover, Mass., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
I FUed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,325
Int. C1.3 HOIH 15/02
U.S. a. 200—16 R 7 Qaims
339
prising a spring member which is pressed against an anvil
member by action of a cam surface on said slider engaging
a cam-follower surface of said spring member, and said
contact members each including a clip portion by which
they are resiliently held to the edge of said base.
4,392,032
ROTATING PADDLE BIN LEVEL INDICATOR
Donald E. Roach, II, Marysville, Mich., assignor to Berwind
Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,058
Int. a.3 HOIH ii/OO: G08B 21/00
U.S. a. 200—61.21 8 Qaims
mounted in said switch to preclude axial movement thereof
and coupled to said rotor to support and position said rotor in
relationship to said housing and insulating substrate having the
contact paths therein, said shaft means having tool adjustment
means at one end thereof, and a cover secured to said housing
to enclose said open end and having a cover aperture therein,
said shaft means joumalled in said cover aperture, whereby
said tool adjustment means is accessible through said centrally
disposed aperture and said teeth means accessible through said
noncentrally located opening for adjustable positioning of said
rotor and contactor means relatively to said shaft means and
contact paths prior to fixing said rotor to said shaft means to
calibrate said switch and effect precise switching accuracy in
the selection of a combination of said external circuits.
- //
-//
1. Apparatus for indicating the level of material in a storage
bin comprising a hollow enclosure including means for mount-
ing said enclosure to a storage bin, motor means mounted for
limited movement within said enclosure, a paddle operatively
coupled to said motor means and adapted to be disposed for
rotation within said bin, rotation of said paddle being retarded
when material stored in said bin is at a level so as to stallably
engage said paddle, means mounted within said enclosure for
detecting limited movement of said motor means when rota-
tion of said paddle is retarded by material stored in said bin,
and fail safe means operatively connected to said means for
detecting limited movement for indicating a preselected mate-
rial level condition at said means for detecting limited move-
ment in the event of failure at said apparatus independendy of
actual material level relative to said paddle.
4,392,033
CENTRIFUGAL SWITCHING SYSTEM
Francis C. Peterson, St. Charles, 111., assignor to Illinois Tool
Works, Inc., Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,430
Int. Q.3 HOIH i5/10
U.S. Q. 200—80 R 13 Qaims
1. An electrical slide switch of the type having a cover
which leaves exposed one or more sliders for actuating make-
or-break contact members inside the switch, CHARACTER-
IZED IN THAT
said switch comprises under said cover a unitary frame
member having a base which forms a floor and having at
least two partitions extending from said base to form
between them at least one chamber for receiving said
contact members, said partitions being adapted at their
free edges remote from said floor to form a slot for hold-
ing and guiding said sliders, said contact members com-
1. In an actuator responsive to centrifugal forces for actuat-
ing a switching system in a motor assembly, an actuator mem-
ber fixedly mounted on an armature shaft within the motor
assembly, said actuator member comprising a hub section of a
predetermined thickness and axial extent, a generally dome-
like, circumferentially disposed, and substantially continuous
web section extending radially outwardly from and axially in
340
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
one direction relative to said hub section, said dome-like web
section including a generally convex surface with a plurality of
circumferentially spaced weight leg sections emanating from
the outer periphery thereof, each of said weight leg sections
extending axially relative to said axial extent of said hub in said
one direction for a predetermined axial extent, and wherein the
dome-like web includes a plurality of radially extending slots
inwardly directed from the outer periphery of said actuator
member, circumferentially extending means on said actuator
member proximate said outer periphery for actuating a prepo-
sitioned switch mounted within said switching system,
whereby as said armature shaft reaches a predetermined rota-
tional speed said weight leg sections move radially outwardly
causing said dome-like web to snap from a first position to a
second position wherein said circumferentially extending
means actuates said prepositioned switch when said dome-like
web is in said second position.
4^92,035
VACUUM INTERRUPTER
Gerhard Frind, Altamont; James J. Carroll, Clifton Park, and
John H. Van Noy, Ballston Spa, all of N.Y., assignors to
General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,056
Int. aj HOIH 33/66
U.S. a. 200—144 B 22 Claims
4,392,034
ELECTRICAL SWITCH CONSTRUCnON
Frank Payne, KnoxriUe, Tenn., assignor to Robertshaw Controls
Company, Richmond, Va.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 187,498, Sep. 15, 1980, Pat. No.
4357,589. This application Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,004
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 2, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 HOIH 35/34
VJS. a. 200—81.4 12 Qaims
1. In an electrical switch construction having electrical
contact means operated by an axially movable plunger means
of a device carried by said construction, said contact means
comprising a plurality of pairs of cooperating contacts ar-
ranged to have each cooperating pair thereof operated by said
plunger means as said device axially moves said plunger means
in one direction, each said pair of cooperating contacts com-
prising a fixed contact and a movable contact, each movable
contact being snap-acting, each movable contact having a
pivot member pivotally mounted to said construction, a one-
piece substantially U-shaped flexible member having a cross
member and a pair of legs extending from said cross member
and defining pivot means that pivotally mount said pivot mem-
bers to said construction, the improvement wherein said legs
respectively have cam follower means intermediate said pivot
means thereof and said cross member, said plunger means
being axially movable between said legs and having cam means
serially engageable with said follower means to serially flex
said legs and thereby move said pivot means thereof to cause
said pivot members to serially pivot as said plunger means is
axially moved by said device in said one direction.
1. An improved vacuum interrupter, comprising:
(a) an evacuated vessel having a generally cylindrical con-
ductive sidewall;
(b) first and second generally disc-shaped contacts disposed
within said conductive vessel, and spaced inwardly from
said conductive sidewall by at least a first predetermined
distance, , said contacts being substantially aligned with
each other along a contact axis, and defining a mating
interface when abutting each other;
(c) first conductor means projecting externally of said vessel
and being connected to said first contact;
(d) second conductor means projecting externally of said
vessel and being connected to said second contact; *
(e) third conductor means connected to said first conductor
means at a second predetermined distance from said mat-
ing interface on a first side of said mating interface, said
distance being measured in a direction parallel to said
contact axis; and •
(0 fourth conductor means connected to said third conduc-
tor means, said fourth conductor means being disposed
substantially concentrically and symmetrically about said
contact axis, said fourth conductor means running from a
third predetermined distance from said mating interface
on said first side thereof to a fourth predetermined dis-
tance from said mating interface on a second side of said
mating interface, and spaced between fifth and sixth pre-
determined distances from said contact axis said third and
fourth distances being measured in a direction parallel to
said contact axis and said fiffh and sixth dimensions being
measured in a direction perpendicular to said contact axis,
said second and fourth conductor means being parallel to
each other for a finite extent and said fourth conductor
means being oriented so as to carry current in a direction
substantially parallel to said contact axis.
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
341
4,392,036
LOW- VOLTAGE PROTECnVE aRCUIT BREAKER
WITH A FORKED LOCKING LEVER
Werner Troebel, and Martin Bottcher, both of Berlin, Fed, Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Mu-
nich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,769
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 29,
1980, 3033213
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/20
U.S. a. 200—322 6 Oaims
1. A low- voltage circuit breaker comprising a drive lever, an
operating handle to move the drive lever, a drive spring con-
nected to the drive lever to be operated thereby, a toggle
system including two toggle levers and a toggle joint connect-
ing the levers together, a control shaft connected by the toggle
lever system and the drive spring to the drive lever, a movable
contact connected to the control shaft to be moved thereby,
and a fixed contact in the path of movement of the movable
contact to be engaged" thereby, the invention comprising:
a locking lever pivotally mounted on the control shaft and
movable between an "on" position and an "ofT' position;
and
a working surface on the drive lever, the locking lever
comprising a first portion to be engaged by the working
surface, whereby the working surface moves the locking
lever toward its "ofT' position when the handle moves
towards its "off" position, the locking lever comprising a
second poriion to be moved toward engagement with the
toggle joint when the locking lever is moved by the work-
ing surface, the second portion of the locking lever being
spaced from the toggle joint pin when the working surface
of the drive lever first moves the locking lever, whereby
there is play between the second portion of the locking
lever and the toggle joint pin such that the locking lever
can only be pivoted part way and allows only partial
movement of the drive lever and the handle attached
thereto unless the toggle joint pin moves out of the way of
the second portion of the locking lever.
4,392,037
STABILIZED BUTTON FOR AN ELECTRICAL
KEYBOARD
Anthony Fleming, Glasgow, Scotland, assignor to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,689
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 7, 1980,
8018745 1 1
II Int a.3 HOIH 7i/00
U.S. a. 200—340 7 Qaims
1. A keyboard with depressable keys mounted on a base, the
keyboard having apparatus for stabilizing the movement of the
keys along the axes orthogonal to the direction of depression of
the keys comprising:
one or more rigid members, each said member movably
secured at multiple points to said key and movably se-
cured at multiple points to said base, said multiple securing
1032 0
G.— 12
points for said key and said base being along lines main-
taining a parallel relation with one of said axis orthogonal
to the direction of 'key depression, said secured rigid
members stabilizing movement of said keys along the
axes.
4,392,038
SELF-CLEANING MICROWAVE CONVECOON OVEN
William J. Day, Allentown, and Bernard J. Weiss, Borto, both of
Pa., assignors to Raytheon Company, Lexington, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 4,008, Jan. 16, 1979, abandoned. This
application Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 208,229
Int CIJ H05B 6/64
U.S. CI. 219—10.55 D 2 Claims
—V'^
1. A combination microwave and convection heating system
comprising:
an enclosure supplied with microwave energy;
a vapor outlet region in the rear of said enclosure comprising
a plurality of apertures whose maximum dimensions are
substantially less than a half wavelength of said micro-
wave energy;
a blower system positioned outside said enclosure and adja-
cent said vapor outlet region;
an elongated gas ribbon burner having a plurality of substan-
tially parallel ribbons defining rows of ports, said burner
being positioned outside said enclosure beneath said outlet
region, said burner having a fuel-air mixture drawn there-
through by said blower system for providing a flow of
combustion products past said outlet region to said blower
system for circulating said combustion products through
said enclosure; and
said burner comprising means for restricting the height of
the combustion region above said burner to retard ioniza-
tion of vapor in said vapor outlet region, said restricting
342
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
means comprising a longitudinal secondary air source
dividing said burner into two substantially parallel sec-
tions.
I 4^92,039
DIELECTRIC HEATING APPLICATOR
Per O. Risman, Huskvarna, Sweden, assignor to P.O.R. Micro-
trans AB, Huskvama, Sweden
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,537
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 21, 1980, 8000494
Int. a.3 H05B 6/70
U.S. a. 219—10.55 A 5 Claims
1. A dielectric heating applicator for heating an object, said
applicator comprising:
a hollow cylindrical metal body;
a mass of low-loss dielectric material, having a dielectric
constant c'«/, disposed within and in direct contact with
I said body;
coupling means at one side of said body for feeding micro-
wave energy coaxially to said body from a microwave
generator; and
means, including the low-loss dielectric material, for form-
ing a resonator at the frequency of the microwave energy
fed to said body when an object located at another side of
said body is in physical contact with the applicator;
wherein said dielectric constant c'«/ of said dielectric mate-
rial is greater than the dielectric constant c'w of said ob-
ject.
4,392,040
INDUCTION HEATING APPARATUS FOR USE IN
CAUSING NECROSIS OF NEOPLASM
Robert W. Rand, 521 N. Bristol Ave., Los Angeles, Calif. 90049;
Harold D. Snow, 4201 Noble Aye., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91403; David G. Elliott, 737 W. Startlight Hights, La Canada,
Calif. 91011, and Glenn M. Haskins, 3811 Rio Hondo Ave.,
Rosemead, Calif. 91770
; FUed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,727
' Int a.^ H05B 6/44
U.S. a. 219—10.71 7 Claims
//■^ sr»*f4^
&-■
n
^H-
/",
'7
^
-yv
^
x>
series of turns of an electrically non-conductive tube with
a multi-strand conductor extending through its interior,
this conductor being sufficiently small so as to permit a
cooling fluid to be circulated through the interior of the
tube within which it is located,
said coils being located closely adjacent to one another in a
"stack" in which said coils are aligned with one another so
as to be capable of serving as a series of closely coupled
transformer coils,
manifold means connected to the ends of said tubes of said
coils for conveying a cooling fluid through said tubes of
said coils,
a capacitor means connected across the ends of the conduc-
tor in each of said coils and said heating coil so as to
constitute, in combination with the coil to which it is
attached, a tank circuit having a resonant frequency,
said capacitor means all having equal capacitance values,
said tank circuits all having the same resonant frequency,
said power supply means being connected only,to said heat-
ing coil and the tank circuit associated with said heating
coil and capable of supplying power at a frequency which
is the same as the resonant frequency of the tank circuits,
said power supply means being adjustable so that the fre-
quency of the power supplied to the tank circuit to which
it is connected can be adjusted in accordance with any
change in the resonant frequency of said tank circuits.
4,392,041
ELECTHIC DISCHARGE MACHINING APPARATUS
WITH A WIRE-SHAPED ELECTHODE
Takeshi Yatomi, and Yutaka Tanaka, both of Aichi, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
PCT No. PCT'/JP80/00047, § 371 Date Nov. 22, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 21, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02003, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 2, 1980
PCT Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 224,512
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 22, 1979, 54-33577;
Mar. 22, 1979, 54-33578
Int. a.3 B23P 7/0*
U.S. a. 219^^9 W 27 Qaims
S--ii%
1. An induction heating apparatus having an induction heat-
ing coil and a power supply means connected to said heating
coil for supplying electric power to said coil in which the
improvement comprises:
a plurality of diflferent coils which are identical to said heat-
ing coil,
each of said coils being a flat "pancake" coil including a
1. In an electric discharge machine (EDM) apparatus of the
type wherein machining is caused by translating a wire elec-
trode with respect to a workpiece at a machining feed speed
and generating an electric discharge across a gap between said
electrode and workpiece, said machining feed speed being
controlled to maintain a substantially constant voltage across
said gap, said EDM apparatus including means for generating
a machining feed speed signal in accordance with said machin-
ing feed speed, a machining electric source for maintaining
desired machining electrical conditions in accordance with
control signals, and arithmetic means responsive to said ma-
chining feed speed signal for generating said control signals,
the improvement characterized in that said arithmetic means
comprises averaging means responsive to said machining feed
speed signal for generating an averaged signal representing the
average machining feed speed, said arithmetic means generat-
ing said control signals in accordance with said averaged sig-
nal, and said machining electric source changing its electrical
conditions at predetermined intervals as said wire electrode
continuously translates with respect to said workpiece.
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
4,392,042
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR
ELECTHOEROSIVELY WIRE-CUTTING A CONDUCTIVE
WORKPIECE
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
j FUed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,677
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1980, 55-23062;
Feb. 25, 1980, 55-23063
Int. a.3 B23P 1/02
U.S. a. 219—69 W 4 Qaims
343
4,392,043
PULSE GENERATOR
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Researcb
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,744
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 28, 1980, 55/23346
Int. Q\} B23P 1/02
U.S. Q. 219—69 P 8 Qaims
-t
:e
sa
liT
lE
ET
!«.
'3
Ea
...o!
-0 — '
c
I,
-zh
f
'lO II
V ■
.'e<f.S*4
U -S3
IS «
«0 ,
.-if*.
- *
sr
«5
31 32
34
3«
1. In an apparatus for electroerosively wire-cutting an elec-
trically conductive workpiece to form a desired contour
therein. Including supply means for continuously supplying a
water machining medium into a machiniijg gap defined be-
tween the workpiece and a wire electrode supported under
tension across supply and takeup sides and axially displaced
continuously to travel between a pair of machining guide
members while traversing the workpiece, power supply means
for applying a succession of electrical pulses across the ma-
chining gap flushed with the water medium between the work-
piece and the wire electrode to produce time-spaced electrical
discharges through the water medium, thereby electroero-
sively removing material from the workpiece and contouring
feed means for displacing the workpiece relative to the travel-
ing wire electrode transversely to the axis thereof along a
predetermined path to form the desired contour in the work-
piece, the improvement comprising:
ion-exchanger means for controlling the specific resistivity
of the water medium delivered by said supply means to
the machining gap to be in a range between 10^ and 10^
ohm-cm
means for introducing abrasive pariicles into said resistivity-
controlled water medium for delivery in suspension
therein to said machining gap;
collecting means for receiving the mixture of said water
medium and said abrasive particles leaving said machining
gap;
first separator means for separating said collected mixture
into a liquid component and a solid component;
second separator means for separating said solid component
into machining products from said machining gap and
abrasive particles;
means for guiding said liquid component to said ion-ex-
changer means for processing thereby to yield said water
medium of said specific resistivity;
mixing means for introducing said abrasive particles yielded
from said second separator means into said water medium
yielded from said ion-exchanger means; and
conduit means for guiding the mixture of said water medium
and said abrasive particles from said mixing means to said
suppjly means.
1. A pulse generator comprising:
on-time setting means for selectively setting on-times;
a first matrix circuit for producing a first output signal on a
selected output thereof corresponding to a particular
on-time set in said on-time setting means;
off-time setting means, independent of said on-time setting
means, for selectively setting off-times;
a second matrix circuit, independent of said first matrix
circuit, for producing a second output signal on a selected
output thereof corresponding to a particular off-time set in
said off-time setting means;
a clock pulser for producing clock pulses;
a single preset counter means for counting said clock pulses;
and
circuit means for establishing, in said single preset counter
means, first and second levels to be reached by the clock
pulse count in accordance with said first and second out-
put signals, respectively, said circuit means being opera-
ble, upon the count of said counter means in a first mode
reaching said first level, to switch the latter to said second
level and, upon the count of said counter means in a sec-
ond mode reaching said second level, to switch :he latter
to said first level, whereby said circuit means provides an
on-output signal while said preset counter means is in said
first mode and an off-output signal while said preset
counter means is in said second mode.
4,392,044
METHOD FOR DETECTING WHETHER DISSIMILAR
METALS ARE BEING WELDED
Teh P. Wang, North Caldwell, and Ehner J. Korn, Bloom-
field, both of N.J., assignors to Amax Inc., Greenwich,
Conn.
Int. a.3 B23K i//00
U.S. a. 219—118 12 Qaims
1. A method for detecting whether two dissimilar metals are
being welded together comprising the steps of:
a. placing in juxtaposition the edges of two metals that are to
be welded together;
344
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
b. joining said metals by welding;
c. contacting said metals with electrical leads which are
electrically connected to a voltage or current sensing
device at points heat conductively remote from the weld,
while said weld is hot; and
d. detecting whether an electrical signal is present, to reveal
the similarity or dissimilarity of said metals.
4,392,046
ELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR ARC WELDING
EQUIPMENT
Huann-Jang Tzeng, No. 78, Shu-Jen Rd., Pen-Tang Tsuen,
Wu-Feng Hsiang, Taichung Hsien, Taiwan
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,867
Int. a.3 B23K 9/10
U.S. a. 219—130.1 4 Claims
4,392,045
THYRISTOR CONTROLLED WELDING POWER
SUPPLY
Malcolm T. Gilliland, 310 Pine Valley Rd., Marietta, Ga. 30060
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,037
I Int C1.5 B23K 9/10
U.S. a. 219—130.1 8 Qaims
1. An electronic device for arc welding equipment having a
load arc, comprising; a voltage regulating portion, and a con-
trolling portion which controls said voltage regulating portion;
said voltage regulating portion comprising two thyristors
electrically connected to allow a first half cycle of alternating
current to pass through one of the two thyristors and a second
half cycle of said alternating current to pass through the other
of said thyristors under the control of said controlling portion;
said controlling portion comprising a RC circuit havinp, a
capacitor, changeable resistance, a DIAC, and a TRIAC in
electrical connection with said voltage regulating portion such
that the application of alternating current will first charge the
capacitor of said RC circuit to a potential sufficient to trigger
said DIAC which in turn triggers said TRIAC, said TRIAC in
turn causing said thyristors to be alternately rendered conduc-
tive during alternate half-cycles.
1. In a three-phase welding power supply for providing
welding current to a welder wherein said power supply in-
cludes a positive output electrode and a negative output elec-
trode and a three-phase wye connected input source including
a neutral terminal, further including, for each phase of said
three-phase input,
at least one pair of thyristors connected in series between
said positive output electrode and said negative output
electrode;
said pair of thyristors being connected to each other at a
junction point, each of said thyristors including a gate
I terminal;
a conductor connected said phase from said input source to
said junction point;
the improvement comprising: a control means connected to
I said phase for providing triggering pulses to said gate
i terminal in response to the voltage between said phase and
said neutral terminal; and
a holding impedance connecting said positive output elec-
I trpde and said negative output electrode to said neutral
terminal for drawing a holding current through one thy-
ristor of said pair of thyristors subsequent to provision of
one of said triggering pulses until said voltage between
said phase and said neutral terminal substantially returns
to zero.
4,392,047
NON-CONSUMABLE ELECTRODE
David G. Bykhovsky, ulitsa Esenina, 32, korpus 2, kv. 35; Albert
A. Voropaev, ulitsa Manchesterskaya, 12, kv. 40; Evgeny F.
Olennikov, ulitsa Ziny Portnovoi, 1, kv. 80, and Alia V.
Lopatina, prospekt Veteranov, 112, kv. 69, all of Leningrad,
U.S.S.R.
FUed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,464
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., May 14, 1982, 2916099;
May 14, 1982, 2916100 _
Int. Q\? B23K i5/04
U.S. a. 219—145.21 31 Qaims
r'
r
UA
/v|
1. A non-consumable electrode for use in arc and plasma
devices in an inert gas atmosphere, made in the form of a
cylinder with a tip, comprising: a holder and an active portion,
made of a refractory metal with emission admixtures, con-
nected with said holder wherein the outer side surface of the
active portion is exposed to a height exceeding \ of the diame-
ter thereof, whereby conditions for transfer of the material
from the side surface of the active portion to a work surface
thereof are provided.
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
4,392,048
BXECTRICAL CONVERTOR HEATER
Brian Carter, Paris, France, assignor to Societe Prl, Aubervil-
liera, Frtnce
Continuation of Ser. No. 8,340, Jan. 31, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,513
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 1, 1978,
4091/78
Int. a.3 F24H 9/02, 9/20: H05B 3/02
U.S. a. 219—367 - 7 Qaims
jc/r
'''^"
3a 2
■-I
.-•>
it-i^
3c
M
- J
?-s-^
if
^■sb
1. A con vector heater comprising:
a front plate;
a surround spaced around the periphery of said front plate;
an air gap defined between said front plate and said surround
and including a top air gap portion, a bottom air gap
portion and two lateral end air gap portions, said top,
bottom and lateral end air gap portions being of similar
width and said air gap being continuous around the entire
periphery of said front plate;
a back plate connected at the periphery thereof to said sur-
round and spaced from said front plate;
a convection air space defined between said front plate and
said back plate, said convection air space being directly
connected to and opening into the surrounding atmo-
sphere around the entire periphery of said front plate
through said top, bottom and two lateral end air gap
portions;
heat exchanger means disposed in said convection air space
at the bottom thereof for inducing a primary convection
air flow inwardly through said bottom air gap portion at
the bottom of said front plate; upwardly through said
convection air space, and outwardly through said air gap
portion at the top of said front plate, and for causing said
primary convection air flow to induce secondary convec-
tion air flows inwardly through said lateral end air gap
portions, upwardly through said convection air space, and
outwardly through said top air gap portion; and
control means disposed at one of the top comers of said
convection air space, the arrangement being such that the
air flow impinging on said control means includes air from
said secondary air flow entering through said respective
lateral end air gap portion and is cooler than said primary
convection air flow leaving said top air gap portion.
345
4,392,049
CONDENSATION HEATING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Peter D. Bentley, Brighton, and James F. Pollock, Hook, both of
England, assignors to United Kingdom Atomic Energy Au-
thority, London, England
Division of Ser. No. 150,429, May 16, 1980, Pat. No. 4,327,271.
This application Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 286,382
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 18, 1979,
7917469; May 9, 1980, 8015528
Int. a.3 F27D 1 1/00
U.S. O. 219—401 8 Qaims
1. A method of heating an article by the condensation
thereon of a vapour, the method comprising,
(a) placing an article to be heated in a heating chamber;
(b) closing the heating chamber;
(c) reducing the pressure inside the heating chamber;
(d) passing a liquid through a permeable electrically con-
ducting heating matrix outside the heating chamber so as
to produce a vapour from the liquid;
(e) introducing the vapour into the heating chamber so as to
heat the article by the condensation thereon of the vapour,
and I
(0 removing the vapour from the heating chamber after the
article has been heated.
4,392,050
RAPID RESPONSE THERMAL SWITCH FOR ISOLATED
LOAD CONTROL
Otto J. Cousins, Burbank, 111., assignor to Harper- Wyman Com-
pany, Hinsdale, lU.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,660
Int. a.3 H05B 1/02
U.S. Q. 219—491 11 Claims
1. A thermal switch for controlling the energization of a load
in response to a control signal from a controller, said thermal
switch comprising:
a bimetallic actuator;
an electrical heater adjacent said bimetallic actuator;
a first set of contacts movable between open and closed
346
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
positions in response to movement of said bimetallic actu-
ator;
a control circuit including said first set of contacts and said
heater, adapted to be connected to said controller for
energization of said heater with the control signal when
said first set of contacts is in said closed position;
a second set of contacts electrically isolated from said first
set of contacts and being movable between closed and
open positions in response to movement of said bimetallic
actuator;
means responsive to movement of said bimetallic actuator
for operating said second set of contacts between said
closed and open jXKitions;
a load circuit including said second set of contacts, adapted
to be connected to said load and to a power source for
energization of said load once said second set of contacts
is in said closed position;
said bimetallic actuator having a normal position when
unheated, said first set of contacts being closed and said
second set of contacts being open in said normal position;
and
said bimetallic actuator being movable in response to heat
from said energized heater to a position wherein said
second set of contacts closes and in response to additional
heat from continued energization of said heater to a posi-
i tion wherein said first set of contacts opens and said sec-
ond set of contacts remains closed.
432,052
DEVICE FOR CARRYING ELECTRICAL RESISTANCE
ELEMENTS
Bengt Magnusson, Hallstahammar, Sweden, and Hans Giirtler,
Roedennark, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bulten-Kan-
thal AB, Hallstahammar, Sweden
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,898
Int. a.3 H05B 3/06
U.S. a. 219—532 10 Qaims
M ' ^ H^ IJ—^
4,392,051
PARALLEL-TYPE HEATING CABLE
David C. Goss, and Daniel R. Springs, both of San Marcos, Tex.,
assignors to Thennon Manufacturing Company, San Marcos,
Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 188,354, Sep. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,345,368.
This appUcation Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,786
Int. a.5 H05B i/i4
U.S. a. 219—528 10 Claims
9 y V
i. -\'
1. Apparatus replaceably carrying an electrical resistance
element for a furnace, comprising:
a block of ceramic fibrous material,
said electrical resistance element being mounted on said
block and being of serpentine configuration having a
plurality of adjacent generally U-shaped portions defined
by straight shanks and curved segments interconnecting
said straight shanks, the end ones of said U-shaped por-
tions terminating in elongated terminals extending toward
a common side of said block from which said electrical
resistance element is inserted, said U-shaped portions
being arranged to open alternately toward and away from
said common side,
at least one plate-shaped carrying element of electrically
insulative material mechanically fastened in said block and
including a portion protruding from said block, said pro-
truding portion including a plurality of through-passages
into which can be slidably inserted said U-shaped portions
which open toward said common side,
said through-passages each including side wall means and
transverse wall means, said side wall means of each
through-passage being arranged opposite the respective
straight shanks of the associated U-shaped portion to
restrain movement of said electrical resistance element
within its own plane and transversely of the direction of
insertion and removal of said electrical resistance ele-
ment, said transverse wall means extending across the
associated through-passages to prevent removal of said
electrical resistance element from said through-passages
in a direction perpendicular to said plane,
said at least one plate-shaped carrying element being spaced
from the adjacent curved segments of said U-shaped por-
tions.
1. A parallel-type heating cable, comprising:
(a) a first and second bus wire arranged in a spaced apart
essentially parallel relationship for carrying electrical
current;
(b) an electrically resistive heating element arranged essen-
tially parallel to said bus wires for generating joule heat;
(c) a plurality of electrically conductive splices, each of said
splices deformed alternately about said first bus wire and
heating element and said second bus wire and heating
element to establish an alternating series of mechanical-
electrical connections between said first bus wire and
heating element and said second bus wire and heating
element, thereby forming a heating core; said splices me-
chanically maintaining said first and second bus wires and
said heating element in said spaced apart essentially paral-
lel relationship; and
(d) a protective cover encasing said heating core.
4,392,053
OPTICAL PROBE
Karlheinz H. Bockholt, Delavan, Wis., assignor to Western
Publishing Inc., Racine, Wis.
FUed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,037
Int. C1.3 G06K 13/06. 7/10
U.S. a. 235—472 9 Claims
1. A hand-held probe for scanning an optical code compris-
ing:
a length of optically clear material comprised in the shape of
a cylindrical lens having a central axis;
an optically opaque housing supporting said clear material in
axially parallel relationship to the code to be scanned and
defining an opening in a first plane which, in use, is adja-
cent to the code to be scanned;
an optical emitter mounted in said housing and emitting a
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
beam of radiant energy through said clear material to said
opening, said beam being approximately centered relative
to said central axis; and
an electro-optical detector, for producing an electronic
signal proportional to variations in radiant energy re-
ceived, mounted in said housing and receiving radiant
energy through said lens in a sectional area centered rela-
tive to said central axis and directed towards said emitter,
whereby radiant energy from said emitter is focused by said
lens into a line parallel to said central axis and reflected
back through said lens material to said detector.
u;
^-^
^^^
tSi : la
'^
•s s
n
ft *
.-G3
347
said displaying means that is best corrected for astigma-
tism, and
(c) a step for constantly applying direct currents correspond-
ing to those applied for the image area best corrected for
astigmatism in the preceding step to said two quadrupole
lenses. I
4,392,055
BOTTLE FINISH AND CLOSURE COMBINATION WITH
VENTING SLOTS
Ralph H. Whitney, Whitehouse, Ohio, assignor to Owens-
Illinois, Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,887
Int. a.3 B65D 51/16
U.S. a. 215—307 i 8 Qaims
II 4,392,054
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMPENSATING
FOR ASTIGMATISM IN ELECTRON BEAM DEVICES
Takeshi Sato, and Shunichi Suzaki, both of Akishima, Japan,
assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Nichidenshi Technics, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,523
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 16, 1980, 55-50119
Int. a.3 G21K 1/08
U.S. a. 250—307 10 Claims
1. A method for compensating astigmatism in an electron
beam device comprising means for generating an electron
beam, means including a lens system for focussing the electron
beam on a specimen, mtltk for deflecting the beam to cause it
to scan over the specimen and means for detecting a signal
generated by the interaction of the beam and the specimen
surface, an image display means in synchronism with said
scanning deflecting system to which the detected signal is
applied, and an XY type stigmator equipped with two quadru-
pole lenses positioned in said lens system for compensating
astigmatism, said method comprising:
(a) a step for supplying periodically stepwise changed cur-
rents to at least one of said two quadrupole lenses in syn-
chronism with said scanning deflecting means so that
different areas on the image of said display means are
differently corrected for astigmastism,
(b) a step for visually identifying the area on the image of the
^
1/
r
r
r
1. In combination, a unitary molded thermoplastic closure
comprising a disc shaped panel section, an annular skirt de-
pending from the periphery thereof, helical threads formed on
the inside annular surface of said skirt, and circumferentially
spaced, axially extending slots formed through the threads of
said skirt; and a cooperating container comprising an annular
finish terminating in an annular rim, helical threads formed on
the outside annular surface of said finish and cooperating with
said threads on said skirt, means for effecting sealing engage-
ment between said closure and said container finish, and a
plurality of circumferentially spaced axially extending slots
formed in the outside annular threaded surface of said finish, at
least one of said closure slots being alignable with one of said
finish slots by opening rotation of said closure sufficient to
disengage said sealing means and permit venting of said con-
tainer.
4,392,056
CONTROL MARKING DETECTOR
Ronald R. Weyandt, Chesterland, Ohio, assignor to Automated
Packaging Systems, Inc., Twinsburg, Ohio
Filed Xpr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 253,193
Int. a.J GOIJ 1/00: F21V 9/16
U.S. a. 250—339 14 Claims
1. Apparatus for detecting the presence of indicia affixed to
an article of manufacture to coordinate an article control func-
tion with article movement comprising:
(a) radiation responsive means mounted near a web path of
travel to detect radiation from the indicia;
(b) level detection means having a first input coupled to said
radiation responsive means and a second input feedback
coupled to a detection means output to provide a bias
input which causes the detection means output to change
348
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
appreciably only in response to abrupt changes of radia-
tion intensity from the web; and
\i4 i
j^r
I J4J-'
\.
4^92,058
FXECTRON BEAM LITHOGRAPHY
Kenneth C. A. Smith, Cambridge, England, assignor to National
Research Development Corporation, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 114,318, Jan. 22, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,151
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 2, 1979,
7903825
Int a.3 HOIJ 37/00
VJS. a. 250—492.2
14 Claims
(c) means for sensing changes in said detection means output
and for providing a control signal to initiate the control
function.
I 4,392,057
POSmON-SENSmVE RADIATION DETECTOR
Ernest Mathieson; Graham C. Smith, and Philip J. Gilvin, all of
Leicester, England, assignors to National Research Develop-
ment Corporation, London, England
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,989
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 22, 1980,
8005981
Int. a.3 GOIT 1/18
VS. CI. 250—385 9 Qaims
} [^[FLECTION
J_L CONTROL
1. An apparatus for electron beam lithography comprising:
means for presenting a substrate for exposure of a desired
pattern such that each of a plurality of elemental areas of
the substrate is presented in succession for exposure dur-
ing a respective exposure interval at a single location;
a plurality of electron guns, the axes of the guns being rela-
tively inclined for substantial convergence at the substrate, the
guns being independently operable to produce electron beams,
at least a first gun being constructed and arranged to produce
a fine electron beam and at least a second gun being con-
structed and arranged to produce a coarse electron beam;
means for focusing each beam on the surface of the substrate,
deflection means for deflecting the beams across the sur-
face; and
deflection control means operative to cause said deflection
means to produce a portion of (he desired exposure pat-
tern which is required to be highly resolved by the contin-
uous deflection of a fine one of said beams across the
surface and a different portion of the desired exposure
pattern which is required to be less highly resolved by the
• continuous deflection of a coarse one of said beams across
the surface in the elemental area presented dpring said
exposure interval.
1. A position sensitive radiation detector comprising at least
one linear array of discrete collector elements spaced apart
from one another simultaneously to receive radiation at a
plurality of positions defining an extensive radiation-sensitive
region, said linear array comprising two interleaved groups of
collector elements, each group extending over substantially the
whole of said region and comprising elements whose mutual
spacing is non-uniform, that of one group increasing from one
end of said region to the other and that of the other group
decreasing in a complementary manner so that the mutual
spacing of the collective elements of said groups is substan-
tially uniform, output means coupled to each of said collector
elements to generate an output signal when radiation is inci-
dent on the associated collector element, first and second
summing circuit means respectively connected to the output
means associated with one of said groups of collector elements
and ratio-determining circuit means to determine the relative
levels of the summed signals for the two groups of signal
output means.
4,392,059
AUTOMATIC REMOTE CAR STARTER
Tony Nespor, 2515 Glencoe Rd., Baltimore, Md. 21234
I Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,259
' Int. a.3 F02N 11/08
U.S. a. 29C— 38 D 7 Claims
y
i^n -S-
%JTlt^
0-
4'-
_)- n5| ^ iflifttiion
Lt i ii i-i 'I
O lb Maftaf
MMfKMd
.^A
1. A system for remote starting of an engine, comprising:
a. engine starting means which includes:
means for initiating a series of digital pulses;
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
11
means for activating said digital pulse means;
counting means for counting said series of digital pulses
and for translating them into a set of of sequential out-
puts;
means responsive to certain of said outputs for providing
fuel to the engine; and
means responsive to certain of said outputs for providing
power to a starting device for the engine; and
. means controlled by the engine being operated by the
stariing device, said engine controlled means providing
ignition power to the engine and removing power from
said engine stariing means and the starting device.
4,392,060
WIND AND WATER POWER GENERATOR
Jessie T. Ivy, 686 W. Shore Dr., Anacories, Wash. 98221
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,343
Int. C1.3 F03B 13/12
U.S. a. 290—53 1 Claim
0
o
,312
J
-1.-L-L-1-T.LT--V
^316 ^- ^
304
^
z)
~- 306
1. An apparatus for generating electricity from the power of
tides and waves in a body of water, comprising:
a support affixed to the ground near the shore of a body of
water;
a float in the body of water capable of reciprocal motion
under the action of waves and tides;
a rigid actuator arm coupling the motion of the float to the
support;
an electrical generator operatively associated with the float
and support;
a rack and gear assembly coupled between the support and
the generator and capable of converting the reciprocal
motion of the float both upwardly and downwardly into
electrical energy;
wherein the support has a movable rack which is coupled to
a pinion gear on the rigid actuator arm and wherein the
movable rack is coupled through a cable and roller assem-
bly to two ratcheted pairs of gears, so that one pair of
gears operates the generator in response to upward move-
ment of the float and the other pair operates the generator
in response to downward movement of the float.
349
anchor the vessel and maneuvering means to prevent the
vessel from swinging at anchor;
(c) control means to modify the amplitude of the pitching of
the vessel, said control means including at least one hol-
low, vertical air cylinder located at the bow and at the
stem, respectively, of the vessel, said cylinders being
closed at their upper ends;
(d) plural water-tight compartments disposed on at least one
of the decks of the vessel and extending longitudinally of
the vessel, each compartment comprising a conduit for
containment and flow of a drive liquid which moves back
and forth internally of the hull along the length of the
vessel with the frequency of the pitching thereof;
(e) at least one prime mover located in the path of the mov-
ing liquid and adapted to harness the energy from the
moving liquid and convert it to mechanical energy which
can be utilized to drive at least one electric generator, said
prime mover including a rotatable power output shaft;
(0 deflectors located at the extremities of the water-tight
compartments and adapted to reduce the impact of the
moving liquid when the liquid reaches the end of a com-
partment during completion of its downstroke as the
result of the pitching of the vessel; and
(g) longitudinal bulkheads defining and separating parallel
water-tight compartments to prevent lateral flow of the
drive liquid, thereby minimizing listing of the vessel.
4,392,062
FLUID DYNAMIC ENERGY PRODUCING DEVICE
Dale R. Bervig, 10235 Oakmont Cir., Lenexa, Kans. 66215
FUed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,654
Int. a.3 FOIK 25/04: F04F 1/18
U.S. a. 290—54 24 Qaims
4,392,061
APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING THE ENERGY OF WAVE
SWELLS AND WAVES
Yves Dubois, 95, avenue Poincare, 59700 Marcq en Baroeul, and
Francois Y. Dubois, 13, rue de la Poissonnerie, 22100 Dinan,
both of France
I Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,104
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 27, 1981, 81 04375
Int. Q.3 F03B 13/12
U.S. Q. 290—53 13 Qaims
1. Apparatus for utilizing the energy of sea swells and waves,
characterized by the following combination:
(a) a vessel anchored at a place of anchorage and adapted to
float on the surface of and to follow the undulations of the
sea swells at the place of anchorage, said vessel having a
bow, a stem, a hull, an upper deck disposed above the
water intemally of the hull and at least one intermediary
deck located between the upper deck and the bottom of
the hull;
(b) means positioning said vessel to face the sea swells so as
to enable said vessel to pitch and not roll while anchored,
said positioning means including anchoring means to
1. A fluid dynamic device comprising:
(a) a loop having a downcomer leg and a riser leg and
adapted to receive a fluid;
(b) electrical generating means positioned between said legs
and communicating therewith near a lower end thereof
350
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
such that fluid in said downcomer leg may pass through
said generating means into said riser leg, thereby motivat-
ing said generating means to produce power;
(c) injection means for injecting a substance having a rela-
tively lower density than said fluid into said fluid in said
riser leg at a location vertically spaced below the top of
said downcomer leg; and wherein
(d) said riser leg substantially diverges near said injection
means such that the diameter of said riser leg substantially
increases immediately adjacent said injection means.
4^92,064
UNBALLASTING RELAYS
Rosette Albert!, 7 rue Marie Bonaparte, 92 210, Saint-Cloud,
France
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,087
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 25, 1980, 80 01607
Int. a.3 H02J 13/00
U.S. a. 307—39 5 Oaims
4,392,063
TURBINE INSTALLATION COMPRISING A TURBINE
INSTALLED IN A DUCT
Herman A. Lindquist, San Rafael, Calif., assignor to Voest-
Alpine Aktiengesellschaft, Linz, Austria
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,581
Int. C\? F03B 11/02
U.S. a. 290—54 4 Qainis
1. A process for using an electrical network provided with a
modification of the power available to the user by telecontrol
through a control signal emitted in the network to control the
modification of the threshold of the tripping of circuit break-
ers, comprising emitting a signal in the network substantially
simultaneously with the control signal for modification of the
threshold of tripping the circuit breakers, to modify the control
power or operating level of the associated unloading relay.
1. A turbine installation comprising
(a) flow passage-defining means which comprises
(1) two juxtaposed pipelines defining interconnecting
passages spaced apart in an intermediate part of their
length to define a space therebetween, the pipelines
being disposed on opposite sides of an imaginary plane,
(2) an inlet chamber at one end of the pipelines, the inlet
chamber having an outlet communicating with each
one of the interconnecting passages,
(3) a runner chamber at an end of the pipelines opposite
the one end and having an inlet communicating with
each one of the interconnecting passages, and
(4) a cylindrical feed pipe leading from the opposite end of
the pipelines to the runner chamber,
(b) a turbine nmner mounted in the runner chamber for
rotation of a fixed axis, the imaginary plane containing
said axis,
(c) an electric generator disposed outside the flow passage-
defining means,
(d) an output mechanism extending through the space and
operatively connecting the runner to the generator, the
output mechanism comprising
(1) a turbine shaft for rotation on said axis and non-rotata-
ble connected to the runner, the pipelines being com-
posed of a plurality of pipe sections extending substan-
tially parallel to the axis and having a cross-section that
is substantially the same as that part of the cross-section
of the inlet chamber at the outlet which is disposed on
the same side of the plane as the respective pipeline, and
the feed pipe converging to form a junction near the
inlet of the runner chamber,
(e) a carrying tube centered on said axis and radially spaced
from, and surrounding, the turbine shaft, the carrying tube
extending through, and being sealed in, both pipelines
adjacent the junction and the carrying tube protruding
into the space, on the one hand, and the cylindrical feed
pipe, on the other hand, and
(0 a bearing for the turbine shaft mounted in the carrying
tube.
4,392,065
ELECTRONIC aRCUIT FOR ELIMINATING CHATTER
Ralph E. Stiglich, Cedar Crest, N. Mex., assignor to Honeywell
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 275,004
Int. a.3 H03K 17/56
U.S. a. 307—247 A 10 Qaims
BINARY ENCODED INPUT
1. An electronic circuit for eliminating from at least two
input switches the effect of contact bounce, comprising
a first group of a first and a second switch means each hav-
ing two input circuits and one output circuit whereby
upon an identical input signal appearing on said two input
circuits an output signal exists on said output circuit,
first circuit means connecting each of the two input switches
July 5. 1983
ELECTRICAL
351
.)
providing an input signal to one of said two input circuits
of said first and second switch means,
a source of timing pulses connected to the other of said two
input circuits of said first and second switch means,
a second group of a third and fourth switch means each
having two input circuits and one output circuir whereby
upon an identical input signal appearing on said two input
circuits an output signal exists on said output circuit,
second circuit means connecting each of said one output
circuits of said first and second switch means to one of said
input circuits of said third and fourth switch means,
third circuit means connecting said source of timing pulses
to a second of said two input circuits of said third and
fourth switch means,
fifth and sixth switch means having two input circuits and an
output circuit whereby upon an input signal appearing on
each of said two input circuits an output signal exists on
said output circuit,
fourth circuit means connecting said output circuit of said
first and third switch means to one of said input circuits of
said fifth switch means and said output circuit of said
second and fourth switch means to said input circuits of
said sixth switch means,
a seventh switch means having at least three input circuits
and an output circuit whereby upon identical input signals
appearing on all three input circuits, an output signal exists
on said output circuit,
fifth circuit means connecting said output circuits of each of
said fifth and sixth switch means to a first and second input
circuits of said seventh switch means and said source of
timing pulses to a third input circuit of said seventh switch
means,
a third group of an eighth and ninth switch means each
having two input circuits and an output circuit, whereby
upon an identical input signal appearing on each of said
two input circuits an output signal exists on said output
circuit, and
means connecting said output of each of said third and
fourth switch means to one of said input circuits of said
eighth and ninth switch means respectively and said out-
put circuit of said seventh switch means to each of the
other input circuits of said eighth and ninth switch means
to provide an output signal at said output circuits of said
eighth and ninth switch means indicative of the input
signal of the input switches after the contact bounce of the
two input switches has terminated.
connection of the second and third transistors, the improve-
ment comprising
a fifth transistor connected between the power source line
and the first node,
wherein said fifth transistor allows said first node to dis-
charge to said power source line when, after said first
node is charged to a voltage corresponding to an initial
voltage of said power source line, said voltage of said
power source line decreases to a level below a level corre-
sponding to said voltage on said first node,
whereby variations in a time delay provided by said Schmidt
trigger circuit, as a result of the variation in the voluge of
said power source line, may be reduced.
432,067
LOGIC SELECT CTRCUIT
John J. Price, Jr., Mesa, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
FUed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,397 ,
Int. a.3 H03L 5/00: H03K 5/22
U.S. a. 307—475 5 Qaims
4,392,066
SCHMIDT TRIGGER aRCUIT
Hiroshi Hirao, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Fiyitsu Limited,
Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,496
Oaims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 29, 1979, 54/171184
Int a.3 H03K 3/295: H03L 1/00
U.S. a. 307—290 5 Claims
Vec
1. A logic select circuit for providing a multi-level logic
threshold signal at an output thereof, comprising:
first diode means coupled between a first terminal and a first
circuit node;
second diode means coupled between a second terminal at
which is supplied a ground reference potential and a sec-
ond circuit node;
circuit means coupled between said first and second circuit
nodes and to the output of the logic select circuit; and
current source means coupled to said second circuit node for
providing a predetermined current thereto such that a first
logic threshold signal of a first level is produced at the
output of the logic select circuit and second logic thresh-
old signal of a second level is produced when said first
terminal is connected to a sourre of operating potential
supplied to the logic select circuit.
INPUT
I. In a Schmidt trigger circuit which is provided with at
least first, second and third transistors which are series-con-
nected at their respective sources and drains between a power
source line and a ground line, and a fourth transistor which has
its gate connected to a first node at the series connection of the
first and second transistors to apply a feedback current from
the drain of said fourth transistor to a second node at the series
4,392,068
CAPACmVE COMMUTATING nLTER
Kenneth B. WeUes, II, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,157
Int. a? H03K 5/24, 5/26: H03D 13/00
U.S. a. 307—522 10 Claims
1. A commutating filter for detecting the presence of a
waveform substantially at a selected frequency, comprising:
input terminal meai^s for receiving the waveform;
output terminal means;
a differential amplifier having an inverting input, a non-
inverting input and an output connected to said output
terminal means;
a first plurality N, where N is an integer greater than one, of
resistance elements each having a fu^t terminal pnd a
second terminal;
a second plurality 2N -I- 1 of capacitive filter elements;
means responsive to said selected frequency for simulta-
352
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5. 1983
neously connecting, in sequential but overlapping and
cyclical manner, N adjacent ones of said capacitive filter
elements each in series with an associated one of the plu-
rality N of resistance elements to the signal at said input
terminal means to cause D.C. equilibrium voltages to
appear across each of said capacitive filter elements only
when the input terminal waveform has a frequency sub-
stantially equal to the selected frequency;
4^92,070
INSULATED COIL ASSEMBLY AND METHOD OF
MAKING SAME
Joseph J. Zdaniewski, Erie, Pa., assignor to General Electric
Company, Research Triangle Park, N.C.
FUed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,689
Int. a.5 H02K 1/04; HOIB 7/00
U.S. a. 310—49 4 Claims
means for respectively coupling only the greatest positive-
polarity and negative-polarity D.C. equilibrium voltages
established across different ones of the plurality of capaci-
tive filter elements selected ones of the differential ampli-
fier inputs to cause a D.C. voltage of level proportional to
the amplitude of the selected frequency waveform to
appear at said output terminal means.
4,392,069
SEMICONDUCTOR SWTTCH
Masayoshi Suzuki, Hitachiota, and Akio Sagawa, Hitachi, both
of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,180
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 20, 1979, 54-91524
Int. a.3H03K; 7/7Z 17/16
Ui». a. 307—252 A 20 Claims
1. An insulated coil assembly for a field i>ole of a dynamo-
electric machine, said coil assembly comprising; a coil of con-
ductive wire coated with an insulating varnish and arranged to
define a multi-side window for receiving therein a portion of a
field pole, a lapped layer of open-weave glass fiber tape posi-
tioned snuggly around each of the respective sides of said coil
to entirely cover the coil, and a substantially void free, contin-
uous, crack-resistant, thermoset dipping compound that is
thermally stable in a range of temperature from — 50* C. to
150° C, forming a cured solid ringing coating that is generally
uniformly distributed over the surface of the coil and is sup-
ported in a generally uniform thickness by said tape.
4,392,071
GENERATOR FOR UNDERWATER LIGHTING
SYSTEMS
Richard Gauthier, 38 Glen Rd., Morin Heights, Quebec, Canada
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,390
Int. C\? H02K 47/04
U.S. a. 310—113 7 Claims
1. A semiconductor switch comprising:
a thyristor of four semiconductor layers PNPN with three
PN junctions and with anode, cathode and gate elec-
trodes;
a first transistor coupled to said thyristor to short-circuit at
least one PN junction of said thyristor upon saturation of
said first transistor; and
a second transistor provided between the anode side of said
thyristor and the base of said first transistor to cause the
saturation of said first transistor in accordance with a
voltage which is applied to the anode of the thyristor,
wherein three continuous layers with two PN junctions of
said thyristor of the PNPN structure constitute a third
transistor, and further wherein said second transistor has a
three-layer structure having a plane diffused pattern simi-
lar to a plane diffused pattern of said three-layer structure
third transistor.
1. For an underwater lighting system, a low current, low
voltage generator, comprising:
an AC motor having an output shaft extending along a first
axis;
means mounting a magnet foi rotation with said shaft about
said first axis;
said magnet being electrically isolated from said AC motor;
a coil arrangement, comprising an even number of coils,
disposed in a plane perpendicular to said first axis, and
spaced from said magnet, said coil arrangement having a
longitudinal axis which is parallel with said first axis;
said coil arrangement being electrically isolated from said
magnet;
whereby, rotation of said magnet produces an EMF in said
coil arrangement to provide a low current, low voltage
AC output at the output of the coU arrangement.
July 5, 19^3
ELECTRICAL
4,392,072
DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE STATOR HAVING
ARTICULATED AMORPHOUS METAL COMPONENTS
George M. Rosenberry, Hendersonrille, Tenn., assignor to Gen-
eral Electric Company, Fort Wayne, Ind.
I Filed Sep. 13, 1978, Ser. No. 942,009
Int. a? H02K 7/00, 15/12
U.S. a. 319—216 9 Claims
353
4392,074
TRIGGER DEVICE AND PIEZO-IGNITION COUPLER
WITH GALVANIC DECOUPLING
Peter Kleinschmidt, and Valentin Magori, both of Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft,
Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,298
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19,
1980, 3035503; Oct. 28, 1980, 3040530; Oct. 30, 1980, 3040916
Int. a.3 HOIL 41/08
U.S. a. 310—327 22 Claims
1. A dynamoelectric machine stator comprising a coil of
amorphous metal alloy ribbon arranged to form a cylindrical
yoke, a plurality of articulated teeth each separately mounted,
respectively, at arcuately spaced intervals on the inner surface
of said cylinder to define a plurality of axially extending wind-
ing slots between the teeth, each of said teeth comprising a
formed body consisting essentially of amorphous metal parti-
cles and a bonding material for holding the particles in fixed
relationship within said formed body, and holding means com-
prising a bonding material disposed between each tooth and
the yoke for securing the teeth in fixed relation to said yoke.
4,392,073
DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINE STATOR HAVING
CONCENTRIC AMORPHOUS METAL LAMINATIONS
AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
George M. Rosenberry, Jr., Hendersonville, Tenn., assignor to
General Electric Company, Fort Wayne, Ind.
Filed Sep. 15, 1978, Ser. No. 942,852
Int. a.3 H02K 7/00
U.S. a. 310— 7.16 " 11 Qaims
1. A dynamoelectric machine stator comprising a first edge-
wound helix of amorphous metal ribbon arranged with its
adjacent turns stacked on one another to form a first cylinder,
a second edgewound helix of amorphous metal ribbon ar-
ranged with its adjacent turns stacked on one another to form
a second cylinder, each of the turns of said second helix being
frusto-conical in configuration, said second cylinder being
mounted concentrically with the first cylinder.
1. A device for triggering an electronic switch comprising:
a piezo-ignition coupler for supplying a trigger signal to said
electronic switch, said piezo-ignition coupler consisting of
a lamina of piezo-ceramic material,
at least two electrodes disposed on one surface of said
lamina and a like number of counter-electrodes disposed
on the opposite side of said lamina in at least substantial
registry therewith, each of said electrodes and counter-
electrodes having a terminal,
said electrodes on a same surface of said lamina being
spaced from other by an electrically insulating gap
for galvanically decoupling said spaced electrodes,
one electrode on one surface of said lamina and one
counter-electrode in at least substantial registry there-
with on the opposite surface of said lamina forming
an input pair of electrodes, and another electrode on
said one surface of said lamina and another counter-
electrode in at least substantial registry therewith on
the opposite surface of said lamina forming an output
pair of electrodes and being connected to a trigger
electrode of said electronic switch,
said lamina having a shape exhibiting an axis with more
than two-fold rotational symmetry with a resonant
frequency of vibration determined by a single length
dimension of the area of said lamina;
a cladding applied adjacent to said surfaces of said lamina
and covering a portion of each of said terminals, said
cladding consisting of electrically non-conductive mate-
rial and having a modulus of elasticity which is less than
or equal to two tenths of the modulus of elasticity of the
piezo-ceramic material comprising said lamina and said
cladding having a reciprocal mechanical quality factor Q
which is greater than ten; and
control electronics connected to said input pair of electrodes
for generating an alternating current signal having a fre-
quency which is matched to said resonant frequency of
said lamina at a value in the range of 20 kHz to 500 kHz
for inducing a selected radial oscillation mode in said
lamina.
354
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^92,075 4^2,077
GAS DISCHARGE DISPLAY PANEL DEEPLY FILTERED TELEVISION IMAGE DISPLAY
Takeo Kamegaya, Tokyo; Tadahiko Sekigawa, Saitama; Hiroshi Philomena C. Libman, Mt. Prospect, 111., assignor to Zenith
Kurakami, Saitama, and Yoshiro Suzuki, Saitama, all of Ja- Radio Corporation, Gienview, III.
pan, assignors to Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Filed Feb. 14, 1979, Ser. No. ll^Mil
Japan Int. Cl.^ HOIJ 29/30
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,715 U.S. Q. 313—474 8 Qaims
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 21, 1980, 55-52607;
Jun. 30, 1980, 55-89431; Sep. 12, 1980, 55-126923
Int. a.^ HOIJ 67/ij TT r I n
U.S. a. 313— 584 3 Claims I I 1 i I
1. A gas discharge display panel comprising: a front plate; a
rear plate; cathode electrodes arranged on said front plate, said
cathode electrodes having openings forming discharge cells;
and anode electrodes arranged on said rear plate orthogonal to
said cathode electrodes in alignment with said openings in said
cathode electrodes; and
each of said openings in said cathode electrodes being sub-
stantially in the form of a rectangle, the length D2 of one
side of which is deflned by 40 \^=D2 = 500 X^ and
the thickness T of each of said cathode electrodes being
defined by 10 X^^T^lOO X^, where X^ is the mean free
path of electrons in a gas sealed in said display panel.
4,392,076
ATTACHMENT OF BASE TO LAMP UNIT
WiUiam E. Ishler, Lyndhurst; WilUam B. Weber, WUloughby
Hills, and Livio L. Giudici, Novelty, all of Ohio, assignors to
General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,388
Int. a.3 HOIJ 5/48. 5/50
U.S. a. 313—318 6 Qaims
1. A lamp unit comprising a housing and a base positioned
over an end of said housing, and means attaching said base and
housing together comprising a resin material within said base
and said end of the housing, said base and said end of the
housing being contoured to engage said resin so that the resin
mechanically locks together said base and said housing.
1. In a low cost, deeply filtered image display having a
faceplate with a viewing screen including a patterned layer of
phosphor particles dispx)sed contiguous to an inner surface
thereof which, when excited emits light of a predetermined
color, and having means for exciting selected areas of said
layer to produce a luminescent informational image, said image
being subject to loss of contrast caused by reflection of ambient
light from said layer, an improvement comprising a shallow,
random, clumped, discontinuous, open dispersion of contrast-
enhancing particles of pigment having a body color corre-
sponding generally to said predetermined color located di-
rectly on said faceplate beneath said layer and not significantly
admixed with said phosphor particles, the percentage of open
area of said dispersion of pigment particles and the absorption
characteristics thereof being such that said dispersion effi-
ciently filters ambient light at its interface with said layer, first
by absorption of directly incident ambient light, and second by
absorption of ambient light passing through said open disper-
sion and scattering back off said phosphor particles to said
dispersion, said dispersion representing a tolerable impediment
to image light emitted by said phosphor particles due to the
shallowness and openness of said dispersion and its non-absorp-
tion of light of said predetermined color, said dispersion negli-
gibly absorbing electron beam energy due to its location be-
neath said layer, making practicable deep filtration of ambient
light and thus high picture contrast without a disproportion-
ately countervailing loss in picture brightness.
4,392,078
ELECTRON DISCHARGE DEVICE WITH A SPATIALLY
PERIODIC FOCUSED BEAM
Milton L. Noble, Liverpool, and Bryan L. Cleaveland, Baldwins-
ville, both of N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company,
Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 214,917
Int. a.J HOIJ 25/00
U.S. CI. 315—4 10 Qaims
1. In an electron discharge device in which high speed elec-
trons in a beam, subjected to a spatially periodic magnetic field,
pursue helical paths, the deceleration of said electrons produc-
ing electromagnetic energy at a given frequency, the combina-
tion comprising:
(1) a waveguide having a given phase velocity for waves of
said given frequency and a low frequency cut-ofT below
said given frequency.
(2) an electron gun for projecting a beam of electrons along
the axis of said waveguide at a given velocity, the beam
being subject to defocusing forces,
(3) means for producing a circularly polarized transverse
magnetic field extending across the interior of the wave-
guide, the transverse field vector rotating about said
waveguide axis at a given pitch which causes the electrons
in said beam to pursue helical paths about axes parallel to
said waveguide axis and rotating with a pitch equal to that
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
355
of said transverse field but mutually displaced by one-
quarier rotation,
the electron velocities, the spatial periodicity of said helical
paths, and said waveguide parameters being selected to
cause a deceleration of said electrons and an increase of
electromagnetic energy of said given frequency in said
waveguide, and
(4) focusing means for producing a first and a second circu-
larly polarized axial magnetic field, each rotating about
said waveguide axis at a pitch equal to that of said helical
electron paths, said first circularly polarized axial field
having a polarization opposite to that of said second circu-
lariy polarized axial field, the two circularly polarized
axial fields being interwined and disposed at mutually
opposite positions across the axis of the waveguide to
applying the sum signal to the input resonator of the kly-
stron; and
adjusting amplitudes and phases of the tapped signals so that
the tapped signals have equal amplitudes but opposite
phases;
wherein anode voltage is varied until the phase shift in the
klystron changes, and comprising the subsequent step of
selecting the phase of the sum signal so as to provide a
minimum phase-shift variation in the klystron.
2. A device for adjusting a phase shift in an amplification
klystron, comprising an input resonator, an intermediate reso-
nator, an output resonator, and means for transmitting a signal
from the output resonator to the input resonator of said kly-
stron, said means for transmitting comprising a phase shifter, a
signal adder coupled to the phase shifter, the intermediate
resonator and the output resonator, and an additional phase
shifter inserted between the adder and the input resonator to
provide for selection of the phase of an adjusting signal.
cause the maximum axial field at a given axial coordinate
to assume opposite senses at opposite points on the perim-
eter of said waveguide and a zero value on the waveguide
axis, the electrons at said given axial coordinate sharing a
common transverse vectorial velocity, of which those
lying in two sectors oppositely disposed across said axis
are subject to a maximum deflecting force,
the axial field having a rotational sense in relation to that of
said electron paths such that said maximum deflecting
force is inwardly directed for electrons in both sectors,
off-axis electrons in all sectors of said beam being periodi-
cally exposed to said maximum inwardly directed force as
the beam progresses along said axis, whereby all electrons
in said beam experience periodic maximum focusing
forces, and beam impingement on the interior of said
waveguide substantially prevented.
4,392,079
METHOD OF ADJUSTING PHASE SHIFT IN
AMPUnCATION MULTICAVITY KLYSTRON AND
DEVICE THEREFOR
Vitaly 1. Pasmannik, ulitsa Ostrovityanova, 45, korpus 1, kv.
569, Moscow, and Viktor P. Sakl^ov, Leninsky raion, pose-
lok Mosrentgen, 29, kv. 50, Moskovskaya oblast, both of
U.S.S.R.
per No. PCT/SU79/00100, § 371 Date Aug. 12, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 11, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01332, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 26, 1980
PCT Filed Oct. 24, 1979, Ser. No. 201,061
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., Dec. 12, 1978, 2695744
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 25/10
U.S. Q. 315—5.39 2 Qaims
1. A method of adjusting a phase shift in an amplification
multicavity klystron including an input resonator, an interme-
diate resonator and an output resonator, said method compris-
ing the steps of:
tapping a portion of a signal from the output resonator;
Upping a portion of a signal from the intermediate resonator;
adding the signals tapped from the output and intermediate
resonators to obtain a sum signal;
4,392,080
MEANS AND METHOD FOR THE FOCUSING AND
ACCELERATION OF PARALLEL BEAMS OF CHARGED
PARTICLES
Alfred W. Maschke, East Moriches, N.Y., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 23, 1980, Ser. No. 152,461
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 25/10
U.S. Q. 315—5.41 W Qaims
41b
1. A planar array of electrostatic quadrupoles including a
plurality of electrodes suitable for applying strong focusing
forces to a plurality of transversely spaced parallel beams of
charged particles, said array forming a unitary structure.
\ _
I
= 4,392,081
LIGHTING UNTT
Thomas A. Brown, Fulton, and William Peil, North Syracuse,
both of N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company, Syra-
cusc N«Y»
FUed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,855
Int. Q.3 H02K 17/34; H02P 1/54
VJS. Q. 315—46 26 Claims
1. A lighting unit comprising:
A. a dc power supply having two output terminals,
B. a filamentary lamp and an arc lamp,
356
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
C. an operating network comprising:
(1) a transformer having
(a) a core of substantially linear magnetic material form-
ing a first, main magnetic path, aperture means defin-
ing a second magnetic path lying within said main
magnetic path of lower reluctance than said main
magnetic path,
(b) a first and a second power winding coupled to said
I , main magnetic path, current flow in either power
winding generating flux which has one sense in one
segment and an opposing sense in a second segment
of said second magnetic path, and
(c) flux level dependent control means comprising a
primary feedback winding and a secondary feedback
winding passing through said aperture means and
coupled to said second magnetic path,
(2) a normally nonconductive switching transistor con-
nected to intermittently complete a current path
through said primary feedback winding between one
said supply output terminal and a node;
said secondary feedback winding being coupled across
the input electrodes of said transistor for application
4^2,082
PRESSURE-SENSITIVE IGNITION PLUG
Koji Harada, Hitachi, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,108
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. IS, 1980, 55-111665;
Aug. 22, 1980, 55-116064
Int. a.3 HOIT 13/00
U.S. a. 315—55 6 Oaims
230K
r^
I .
U
1. A pressure-sensitive ignition plug comprising an insulator
assembly accommodating a central electrode to which electric
current of a high voltage is applied, a metallic plug body con-
centrically supporting said insulator assembly and provided
with a threaded portion at which said plug body is mounted on
an engine, said plug body having a grounded electrode oppos-
ing to said central electrode to form therebetween a sparking
gap, and a pressure sensing unit incorporated in said plug body
and adapted to sense the internal pressure of a cylinder of said
engine, wherein said pressure sensing unit has an annular form
and is disposed in an annular gap formed between said insulator
assembly and said plug body in such a manner as to be able to
detect a change in the internal pressure of said cylinder
through the displacement of said insulator assembly, said pres-
sure sensing unit having an upwardly projecting signal termi-
nal for transmitting the sensing output, and an amplifier unit
for amplifying the sensing output is detachably connected to
said pressure sensing unit through said signal terminal.
of an initial conduction aiding feedback after transis-
tor turn-on, continuing until one segment of said
magnetic path becomes saturated, and a conduction
inhibiting feedback thereafter, returning said transis-
tor to a nonconductive state after a certain ON time,
(3) a primary power circuit for operating said filamentary
lamp comprising said first power winding and said
filamentary lamp in series, connected between said node
and the other said supply output terminal,
(4) a secondary power circuit for starting and operating
said arc lamp comprising said second power winding
and said arc lamp connected in series between said first
node and said other supply output terminal, said second
power winding providing transformed starting poten-
tials when said primary circuit is active,
(5) current maintenance means connected in circuit with
said power windings for allowing current flow in said
power windings during the transistor OFF time,
(6) switching means responsive to the state of said arc
lamp for inactivating said primary ik}wer circuit when
the arc lamp is warmed up, and
(7) means for repetitively turning on said switching tran-
sistor.
4,392,083
RADIATION SHIELD FOR A CATHODE RAY TUBE
Louis B. Costello, Niles, 111., assignor to Teletype Corporation,
Skokie, lU.
FUed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,217
Int. aj HOIJ 1/52
U.S. a. 315—85 9 Oaims
1. An electromagnetic radiation shield (14) adapted for use
with a cathode ray tube (10) having a neck (16) wherein means
are housed for producing a modulated electron beam deflected
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
357
within the cathode ray tube (10) by a yoke coil (12) which
generates a magnetic field, the radiation shield comprising:
a sleeve (24) of insulating material having inner and outer
surfaces and an inner diameter greater than the outer
diameter of the neck (16) of the cathode ray tube (10) thus
allowing the sleeve (24) to be positioned on the neck (16)
of the tube (10),
a plurality of first, spaced apart, parallel, conductive, elon-
I gated strips of material (30, 32) extending along the inner
surface of the sleeve (24) and bonded to the inner surface
(26, 28) thereof,
I a plurality of spaced apart, parallel, second, conductive,
elongated strips of material (32) extending along a surface
of the sleeve (24) and bonded to the outer surface (28)
thereof, said first conductive strips (30) being offset from
said second conductive strips (32), and
means (40, 42) for electrically connecting one end each of
said first and second conductive strips (30, 32) to a ground
potential, whereby electromagnetic radiation from the
cathode ray tube (10) is highly attenuated and the mag-
netic field generated by the yoke (12) is allowed to pass
through the shield (14) with relatively low attenuation.
4,392,085
DIRECT DRIVE BALLAST WITH DELAYED STARTING
CIRCUIT
William C. Knoll, Turbotiille, and David L. Bay, Muncy, both of
Pa., assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,386
Int. a.5 H05B 37/00. 39/00
U.S. a. 315—173 16 Claims
4,392,084
SUSTAINER aRCUIT FOR PLASMA DISPLAY PANELS
Thomas J. Rebeschi, North Haven, and Mohan L. Kapoor,
Orange, both of Conn., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,292
I Int a.3 H05B 37/00. 41/14; H02J 1/00
U.S. a. 315—169.4 4 Qaims
II
195V
-£CI
CT-r-
Q^ID
=^C3
i ^-^^34.
^^
*^ L ^ M , r
tf
*-J_ ■
'■^*fJ cow I SOi/Wf I I
1. A delayed starting circuit for an electronic ballast system
that includes an inverter for driving a fluorescent lamp, a
primary voltage source, and a secondary voltage source de-
rived from the inverter output signal, said starting circuit
comprising:
a charging resistor coupled between the primary voltage
source and a charge storage capacitor in the secondary
voltage source; i
a voltage divider having an input coupled to the junction of
the charging resistor and the charge storage capacitor;
a semiconductor switching device coupled between an out-
put of the voltage divider and an input of the inverter
whereby the semiconductor switching device remains
non-conductive and the inverter inoperative until the
charge storage capacitor becomes charged so that the
inverter is protected from transients related to the surge of
charge necessarily delivered to the charge storage capaci-
tor subsequent to the energization of the ballast system.
4,392,086
APPARATUS FOR OPERATING A GASEOUS
DISCHARGE LAMP
Katsuyuki Ide; Kempo Ohe, both of Yokohama, and Hisao
Kobayashi, Fujisawa, all of Japan, assignors to Toshiba Elec-
tric Equipment Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,269
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1979, 54/125666
Int. Cl.^ H05B 41/29. 41/36
U.S. a. 315—174 6 Claims
1. A voltage supply circuit for a gaseous discharge display
panel comprising two closely spaced parallel transparent di-
electric plates having respective sets of interior parallel elec-
trodes, one set being orthognal to the other to form a matrix of
closely spaced intersections, a gaseous medium enclosed be-
tween said plates and filling the spaces between said intersec-
tions, a power supply having positive and reference terminals,
a voltage divider network including first, second and third
resistors connected in series between said power supply termi-
nals to provide three predetermined voltage levels for operat-
ing said panel, first, second, and third capacitors connected in
series across said voltage divider, each capacitor being in
parallel with a respective said resistor, a selectively active
shunt circuit switching means connected to said second resis-
tor and capacitor, and means for selectively connecting said
voltage divider network to said panel to provide writing,
erasing and sustaining voltages at selected discrete levels to
selected intersections of said panel.
-r-
L.
1. An apparatus for operating a fluorescent lamp comprising:
an AC power source for producing an AC voltage;
a power control means for controlling the phase angle of the
AC voltage to generate a controlled output voltage dur-
ing a power supply, period in any half cycle of the AC
voltage;
an auxiliary power source for generating an auxiliary volt-
358
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
age during at least a rest period between the power supply
periods;
means for inverting the controlled output voltage and auxil-
iary voltage to a high frequency voltage; and
a fluorescent lamp having a filament, which is energized by
the high frequency voltage wherein said auxiliary voltage
supplied is of such a value that the output of said inverting
means during said rest period is less than the discharge
sustaining voltage of said fluorescent lamp and is sufficient
to supply heating current to said filament.
4,392,087
TWO-WIRE ELECTRONIC DIMMING BALLAST FOR
GASEOUS DISCHARGE LAMPS
Zoltan Zansky, Roseville, Minn., assignor to Honeywell, Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Nov. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,650
Int. a.3 H05B 41/29
U.S. a. 315—219 29 Oaims
nected with the output of said oscillator circuit, and a
secondary winding;
(c) a rectifler circuit connected in series with said secondary
winding;
(d) auxiliary capacitor means connecting said secondary
winding in series with the charging capacitor, whereby
the charging capacitor is buffer charged in accordance
with the capacity of said auxiliary capacitor means;
(e) a light source connected in parallel with the charging
capacitor;
(0 a thyristor for controlling the discharge of the charging
capacitor to cause said light source to flash, said thyristor
being activated under control of said multivibrator; and
(g) resistor means for blocking said oscillator for a desired
time after discharge of the charging capacitor.
1. A two-wire electronic ballast arrangement for one or
more gas discharge lamps dimming comprising:
a source of direct current;
a source of variable square wave electric power;
transistor inverter means adapted to be fed by said source of
variable square wave electric power;
transformer means comprising
at least a first primary winding connected to said inverter
and said source of direct current,
a first secondary winding for supplying power to one or
more gas discharge lamps,
auxiliary secondary windings connected across the heat-
ing filaments of each gas discharge lamp,
said first and said auxiliary secondary windings being
disposed in predetermined spaced relation to said pri-
mary winding and said auxiliary secondary windings
being disposed in predetermined spaced relation to said
first secondary winding such that t"he voltage supplied
to the heating filaments of said one or more gas dis-
charge lamps remain substantially constant during vari-
ation of the voltage to said primary;
tuning capacitor means connected across said first second-
ary winding selected to be in resonance with the leak-
age inductance ot said first secondary winding to pro-
duce tuned sinusoidal input to said one or more lamps.
4,392,089
ISOLATOR FOR USE WITH FREQUENCY RESPONSIVE
SWITCHING aRCUIT
James N. Lester, Rockport, Mass., and Lee A. Prager, Ray-
mond, Me., assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stam-
ford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,205
Int. a.3 H04Q 1/45; H05B 41 /i6
U.S. a. 315—313 20 Qaims
4,392,088
DEVICE FOR CHARGING A CHARGING CAPAOTOR
Julius Hartai, Betzy Kjelsbergsvei 232c, 3000 Drammen, Nor-
way
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,020
Claims priority, application Norway, Jan. 11, 1980, 800064
Int. a.^ H05B 41/34
U.S. a. 315—241 R 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for charging a charging capacitor, comprising
(a) a.c. power supply means including a d.c. source and an
oscillator circuit connected with said d.c. source, said
oscillator circuit comprising a multivibrator and having an
a.c. output;
(b) first transformer means having a primary winding con-
3ft^
— r M
tSxr
1. In a ix)wer control system comprising means for selec-
tively generating a frequency control signal, at least one bal-
lasted load, and frequency responsive switch means connected
to respond to the frequency control signal by switching from a
substantially non-conductive state to a substantially conduc-
tive state to enable the conduction of an AC power signal to
the ballasted load, the improvement comprising:
an isolator connected in series relation with respect to the
frequency responsive switch means and the ballasted load,
which isolator comprises an inductor having high impe-
dance, at least at the frequency of said control signal,
below a saturation current for said inductor so as to suffi-
ciently block any noise signals induced by said ballasted
load which would otherwise cause undesired activation of
said frequency responsive switch means.
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
359
1 1 4,392,090
REMOTE RESPONSIVE TELEVISION RECEIVER
FERRORESONANT POWER SUPPLY
James K. Rinehart; Donald H. Willis, and David W. Luz, all of
Indianapolis, Ind., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
, FUed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 322,062
I Int. a.5 HOIJ 29/70
U.S. a. 315—411 13 aaims
(pE«b't
""Off \'
t
Cy<iOM2
r-r-
J, 'a
I a
■■?v
•94
n
i
' 4* i
33 .V „
Mi 8C *9t
6?f- if
i. A television display system with a regulated power supply
responsive to the state of a remote on/ofl" command signal,
comprising:
a source of first voltage;
a power oscillator coupled to said source for developing an
alternating input voltage of a frequency determined by the
frequency of operation of said oscillator, said oscillator
including a frequency control terminal that controls the
frequency of operation of said oscillator depending upon a
control signal applied to said terminal;
mean* including a self-regulating circuit energized by said
alternating input voltage for producing a regulated supply
voltage;
a load circuit within said television display system energized
by said regulated supply voltage; and
remote control means coupled to said oscillator frequency
control terminal and responsive to said remote on/off
command signal for applying thereto said control signal
such that during the on-state of said command signal said
oscillator operates at a frequency that permits normal
ferroresonant operation of said self-regulating circuit and
during the off-sute of said command signal said oscillator
operates at a different frequency that disables ferroreso-
nant operation of said self-regulating circuit to thereby
substantially deenergize said television display system
load circuit.
means fdr establishing a second current of the motor coupled
with the second of said wheel units, and
means for comparing said first and second currents to pro-
vide in response to a predetermined difference between
the first and second currents a limit signal to control the
"\ 1*
' /Mltl,'.
!.idj ' i;,[
(^
^
_1
i).;nt|
|tim".«'l''»l]
1>IS('SSI.I«»[ I
SSI I ' n'mofl
u
operation of said wheel units in relation to said adhesion
level,
with said control means being responsive to said limit to
decrease said tractive effort request such that the average
motor current is decreased to provide another operation
of the wheel units in accordance with said adhesion level.
4,392,092
OSCILLATING-ARMATURE MOTOR FOR ELECTRIC
DRYSHAVERS AND THE LIKE
GusUv Gassner, Kelkheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Braun Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 959,188, Nov. 7, 1978, abandoned. This
application Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,384
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 2,
1977, 2753749
Int. a.5 H02K iJ/f^
U.S. CI. 318—127 3 aaims
' ' 4,392,091
VEHICLE PROPULSION CONTROL APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Richard D. Roberts, South Park Township, Allegheny County,
and Lester J. Hoffman, Churchill Borough, both of Pa., as-
signors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
1 1 FUed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,693
II Int. a.^ B61C /5/05
U.S. a. 318—52 " Claims
1. In motor control apparatus for a vehicle operative with a
track having an adhesion level and provided with a tractive
effort request signal and having at least two wheel units, with
a different one of a plurality of propulsion motors being cou-
pled with each said wheel unit, the combination of:
control means responsive to the tractive effort request signal
for controlling the propulsion motors to
provide one operation of the wheel units,
means for esublishing a first current of the motor coupled
with a first of said wheel units.
1. A dryshaver, comprising a housing; a cutter block out-
wardly adjacent said housing and including a plurality of
cutter blades; an electric motor mounted in said housing and
comprising at least one respective electrical winding and hav-
ing a pair of stator poles and at least one oscillatory armature
carrying said cutter block and having a pair of armature poles;
an electric current source for energizing said winding so that
said armature is moved between one position in which the
armature poles are closer to said sutor poles and another
position in which said armature poles are farther from the
sutor poles whereby said cutter block is moved by said arma-
360
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
ture between two positions; means for sensing each of said two
positions of the cutter block and thus the positions of the
armature relative to said stator, said position-sensing means
being operative for generating a position signal, and a position-
evaluating circuit means connected to said sensing means and
to said source and responsive to said position signal, said posi-
tion-evaluating circuit means being operative for effecting
energization of said stator winding only when the armature
poles are in said one position.
432,093
ELECTRONIC CONTROL AND REGULATING SYSTEM
Kurt Paule, Stuttgart; Fritz Schadlich; Martin Gerschner, both
of Leinfelden-Echterdingen, and Friedrich Homung, Stutt-
gart, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
per No. PCT/EP80/00038, § 371 Date Jun. 4, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 27, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01085, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 16, 1981
PCT Filed Jun. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 233,587
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 4,
1979, 2940195
Int. a.3 H02K 23/64
VJS. a. 318—245 10 Qaims
1. Electronic control and regulating system for a universal
motor (5) employing phase control, comprising
first and second input terminals (3, 4) connectable to a power
grid supplying alternating current power at a predeter-
mined power grid frequency;
a bilaterally conducting controlled semiconductor switch (6)
having a control electrode (7), the main current carrying
path of said switch being connected with the motor (5) for
controlling current flow at predetermined phase positions
through the motor;
a trigger circuit including a trigger capacitor (13) and a
charge resistor (11; 40, 41) connected to the control elec-
trode (7) of the semiconductor switch;
an inductive current/voltage converter (9) having a current
coil (8) serially connected with the motor (5) and the main
current carrying path of said semiconductor switch (d)
and having a voltage coil (10) inductively coupled to the
current coil;
a resonance circuit (20) including
a resonance capacitor (21) connected to the voltage coil (10)
of the current/voltage converter which has a resonant
frequency of between 0.5 to 0.1 times said predetermined
power grid frequency;
and coupling/decoupling resistance means (14, 18; 30) con-
necting the resonance circuit to the trigger capacitor (13)
and hence to the control electrode of the semiconductor
switch to modify the charge on the trigger capacitor
applied by the charge resistor (11; 40, 41) in dependence
on the voltage of said resonance circuit and hence in
dependence on load current, and hence modify the phase
angle of triggering of the semiconductor switch in depen-
dence on said load current.
432,094
BRUSHLESS D-C MOTOR
Hans Kiihnlein, Nuremberg-Grossgrundlach, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,468
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Sep. 19,
1979, 2937866
Int. a.3 H02K 29/02
U.S. a. 318—254 5 Qaims
-oo I »8l
1. A brushless D-C motor of the type having a permanently
magnetized rotor which has altematingly opposite magnetic
poles at its circumference; a plurality of stator windings ar-
ranged 90° apart with respect to each other; first and second
galvanomagnetic transducers disposed in the motor 90° apart
from each other for producing first and second control signals,
respectively, the control signals being responsive to the p)Osi-
tion of the rotor; a plurality of semiconductive switching de-
vices connected in series with associated ones of the stator
windings, each for controlling a respective stator winding
current, the semiconductive switching devices having conduc-
tive and nonconductive states selectable in response to the
polarity of the first and second control signals; the brushless
D-C motor further comprising:
first and second controlled current generator means each for
controlling current flowing through selected ones of the
semiconductor switching devices which are associated
with stator windings which are arranged 1 80° with respect
to each other, each of said controlled current generator
means having a control input for receiving a respective
one of first and second input signals, and an output for
conducting an output current proportional to said respec-
tive input signal; and
first and second coupling means each having an input for
receiving a respective one of the control signals, and an
output terminal connected to said control input of an
associated one of said controlled current generator means
for providing said respective input signal.
4,392,095
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR GENERATING A
UNIQUE INDEX MARK FROM THE COMMUTATION
SIGNAL OF A D.C. BRUSHLESS MOTOR
Dayid S. Ruxton, Bank Crescent, and Alex D. Stewart, Garden-
den, both of Scotland, assignors to Rodine Limited, Glen-
rothes, Scotland
FUed Jun. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,010
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 30, 1981,
8120092
Int. a.3 H02K 29/02
U.S. Q. 318—254 4 Qaims
1. A method of generating a unique index mark from the
commutation signal of a d.c. brushless motor characterised by,
sensing the commutation signal from the motor, dividing the
frequency of the commutation signal to provide at least
two index signals per revolution,
providing at least one track on the disk surface on which
magnetic signals synchronised to one of the index signals
are stored, said synchronising signals being stored on a
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
361
proportion of said at least one track, the other proportion
of said at least one track being erased, said proportions
being determined by the number of phases of the motor,
and
u
Ci^^QH''
2a.'
7 .:
sensing the synchronising signals on said at least one track
and correlating the synchronising signals with one index
signal to provide a unique index mark, the correlation
providing the same unique index mark every revolution of
the motor.
4,392,097
aRCurr arrangement for the continual
OPERATION MONITORING AND ERROR DIAGNOSIS
OF A STEPPER MOTOR
Jiirgen B. Landrock, Ehningen; Manfred Perske, Sindelfingen,
and Halim S. Tandjung, Gartringen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to International Business Machines Corpora-
tion, Annonk, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,752
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 10,
1979, 2945458
Int. Q.5 H02K 29/04
U.S. Q. 318—696 11 Qaims
f
4,392,096
SECTIONAL X-RAY TABLE HAVING DUAL SERVO
I DRIVES
John P. Gr^jewski, Palmyra, Wis., and Robert J. Loyzim, Hi-
wassee, Va., assignors to General Electric Company, Schenec-
tady, N.Y.
I Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,687
' Int. Q.3 G05B 11/32
U.S. Q. 318—625 7 Qaims
±1
/«>,
CPU
, CAACLr
3om-^\ — - •Sf»£FO
* • OAC
*t/e/fc^vfcc^s5c^
A£3e>^SeSS 43o^
'JU
-^-^]
1^
±1
''^' ' r"
.d3
■'A .^J^'f
~\<S£^^
\
Z3' \ei/rrc^\
oeA-»
1. An X-ray table system comprising:
a base,
an elongated support means mounted to said base for moving
longitudinally,
a reversible support means driving motor (support motor)
and means for coupling the motor to the support means
for moving said support means selectively between a
retracted position and an advanced position and back to a
retracted position, relative to the base,
elongated cradle means mounted to the support means for
moving longitudinally relative to said support means,
a reversible cradle means driving motor (cradle motor) and
means for coupling said motor to the cradle means for
moving said cradle means selectively between a retracted
position and an advanced position and back to a retracted
position relative to said support means,
control means for said motors, said control means being
operative to activate one of said motors to accelerate up to
a constant speed and move the means to which it is cou-
pled to a predetermined position corresponding to the
beginning of a transition zone at said constant speed while
the other of said motors is inactive, and said control means
being operative to decelerate the one motor and acceler-
ate the other motor correspondingly such that at the end
of said transition zone said one motor is stopped and said
other motor is running at constant speed for moving the
means to which it is coupled at constant speed equal to the
formet speed of the other means.
3S. 3S:
c j-_ t I
it'll tojcl
^
L 1'
r-
:i!lfl« CM'IICl
-^>imh
1. A process for the continual operation monitoring and
error diagnosis of a stepper motor controllable at its windings
by a control logic stage and driver stage using stepping pulses
which are phase-shifted relative to each other, comprising the
steps of;
forming signals representative of the respective logical val-
ues of said piiase-shifted stepping pulses;
forming signals through level conversion having logical
values representative of the respective switching states of
said driver stage; and
comparing said signals representative of the respective logi-
cal values of said phase-shifted stepping pulses with said
signals having logical values representative of the respec-
tive switching states of said driver stage whereby absence
of comparison is indicative of error.
4,392,098
RPM SENSOR FOR ELECTRONIC MOTOR BRAKING
Young K. Min, Milwaukee, Wis., assignor to PT Components,
Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 311,842
Int. Q.5 H02P 3/24
U.S. Q. 318—758 9 Qaims
180 .i*
18c
1. An RPM sensor for use with an AC induction motor
having an electronic braking circuit and an electromechanical
brake, said sensor causing said brake to engage said motor
when the motor speed decreases to a predetermined value, said
sensor comprising:
an electronic filter;
362
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
means for connecting said filter to a stator of said motor to
obtain an electrical signal having a frequency proportional
to the speed of said motor;
a frequency-to-voltage converter connected to said filter for
developing an output voltage determined by said motor
speed; and
means for using said converter output voltage to cause said
brake to engage said motor when said output voltage
reaches a predetermined value corresponding to a prede-
termined motor speed.
4^92,100
OPTIMUM EFnaENCY CONTROL SYSTEM
William E. Stanton, Newton; David B. Eisenhaure, HuU, and
Robert D. Drescher, Cambridge, all of Mass., assignors to The
Charles Stark Draper Laboratory, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
FUed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,552
Int. a.3 H02P 5/40
U.S. a. 318—803 3 Claims
^^--
COMMANOeO
TORQUE
L-.iv^E.
ROTOR
SPEED.
UNCONSTRAINED
MIX EFFICIENCY
SLIP FREO
(Tl
TOROUE
EQUIVALENT
CIRCUIT
MOTOR
MODEL
*co«r"
PARA
^TOR
MODEL 1
;COW -
PARA
TOR,
> *- -
T^-
REGION
2
REGION
3
432,099
STARTING SYSTEM FOR BRUSHLESS MOTOR
Masateru Kuniyoshi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 119,520, Feb. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,901
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1979, 54-18727
Int. a.3 H02P 1/26
U.S. a. 318—797 5 Qaims
*0t * UP, VP, WP, 5
■re J uPj vpj *pj \J
, 200
200
ALTERtWTE I
COfOJCTC^h
COWTBOU.ER
~1 ] .t^^OJCTlON
, SPEED
DETECTOR
■2 (CONTROLLER I
1. An optimum efficiency control system for a variable
torque/speed rotary a.c. induction machine comprising:
means for indicating a first fixed slip region in response to
the torque exceeding commanded torque;
means for indicating a second flux saturation region in re-
sponse to the flux exceeding the saturation flux;
means for indicating a third voltage saturation region in
response to the voltage exceeding the saturation voltage;
means, responsive to said means for indicating said first fixed
slip region, for commanding an excitation frequency as a
function of the rotor speed and unconstrained maximum
efficiency slip and for commanding an excitation vol-
tage/current as a function of the actual torque/speed and
commanded torque/speed; responsive to said means for
indicating said second flux saturation region, for com-
manding an excitation frequency as a function of the rotor
speed and slip frequency, and for commanding an excita-
tion voltage/current as a function of the actual flux and
the saturation flux; and response to said means for indicat-
ing said third voltage saturation region for commanding a
saturation voltage as a function of rotor sp>eed and for
commanding excitation frequency as a function of slip
frequency; and
means responsive to said means for commanding, for vary-
ing the frequency and magnitude of the excitation vol-
tage/current supplied to the machine in the three regions
of operation.
1. In a starting system of a brushless motor in a brushless
motor apparatus comprising a first static commutation circuit
including a first controllable thyristor rectifier, a first thyristor
inverter and a first DC reactor inserted in a DC circuit be-
tween said first rectifier and first inverter; a second static
commutation circuit including a second controllable thyristor
rectifier, a second thyristor inverter and a second DC reactor
inserted in a DC circuit between said second rectifier and said
second inverter; a power source transformer for supplying
three-phase AC voltage having a first phase to said first con-
trollable thyristor rectifier and supplying three-phase AC
voltage having a second phase 30 degrees out of phase with
said first phase to said second controllable thyristor rectifier
and a load including a brushless motor having a rotating motor
receiving the outputs of said first and second thyristor invert-
ers; wherein said starting system comprises means for causing
one of said first and second static commutation circuits to
conduct a DC current therethrough and causing the other one
of said first and second static commutation circuits conducting
a DC current therethrough to be concurrently substantially cut
off, for every 30° electrical angle of rotation of the rotor of said
brushless motor at the time of starting said brushless motor.
4,392,101
METHOD OF CHARGING BATTERIES AND
APPARATUS THEREFOR
Darid A. Saar, Timonium, and Richard T. Walter, Baltimore,
both of Md., assignors to Black & Decker Inc., Newark, Del.
Continuation of Ser. No. 911,554, May 31, 1978, abandoned.
This application Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,174
Int. a.3 HOIM 10/44
U.S. a. 320—20 64 Claims
TIME
NICKEL-CADMIUM BATTERY CHARGING CYCLE
I. A method of rapidly and efficiently charging a battery of
the type having characteristic associatal therewith that varies
July 5, 1M3
ELECTRICAL
363
with the state of charge of the battery and in which the charac-
teristic varies with time during charging to exhibit a plurality
of inflection points prior to the battery attaining substantial full
charge, the method comprising the steps of:
supplying electrical energy to the battery for charging
thereof;
monitoring said characteristic drawn by the battery during
charging;
analyzing the variation of said monitored characteristic with
time to determine the occurrence of the last inflection
point exhibited prior to the battery attaining substantial
full charge; and
controlling the supply of electrical energy of the battery on
the basis of the so-determined occurrence.
4,392,103
CURRENT SENSING REGULATOR
Dermot O'Sullivan, Leiderdorp, and Alan Weinberg, Sassen-
heim, both of Netherlands, assignors to Organisation Euro-
peenne de Recherches Spatiales, Paris, France
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,217
Qaims priority, application Belgium, Jun. 10, 1980, 200973
Int. a.5 H02P 13/32
U.S. a. 323—222 6 Claims
4,392,102
LIQUID CRYSTAL INDICATOR
Raymond K. Sugalski, and Charles R. Blake, both of Gainesville,
Fla., assignors to General Electric Company, Gainesville, Fla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 939,356, Sep. 5, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 910,517, May 30,
1978, Pat. No. 4,173,733, which is a continuation of Ser. No.
793,012, May 2, 1977, abandoned. This application Apr. 28,
1981, Ser. No. 258,532
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 6, 1996,
has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? H02J 7/00
U.S. a. 320—48 - 9 Qaims
'BATTERY IS CM6RGING
IF WINEOVK CHANGED
ifPOM ROOM TEMftRATURt
COLOR
J'
WARNING -.K.-.:-;- ••-:.■:.■.■
'•■fi'.-;*.' w?^v'^.^i
.-3i
5-
1. A liquid crystal indicator for indicating the flow of cur-
rent through battery cells in a battery charger for charging,
which includes a liquid crystal indicator label comprising:
a substantially transparent substrate having a front surface
adapted to provide an exterior surface of said indicator
and a back surface on the opposite side thereof;
a liquid crystal material adhered to a predetermined portion
of said back surface of said substrate, said predetermined
portion being less than the surface area of said back sur-
face, said liquid crystal material being adapted to change
color in response to changes in temperature within a
predetermined range;
a black background layer adhered at least behind said liquid
crystal material within the predetermined portion of said
substrate; and
means for attaching the indicator to a desired structure,
said liquid crystal indicator label being mounted to the casing
of the battery charger substantially directly adjacent heat
generating circuit means associated with each battery cell in
the battery charger such that said liquid crystal indicator label
changes color when charging current flows through said heat
generating circuit means to indicate that the associated battery
cell is being charged.
o ?*»**»
L
-tmr-
_ 3
^
rill
1. In an apparatus for the control of an operating parameter
of an installation, said parameter being related to an electric
current feeding a regulation unit including a regulating switch
arranged for being switched between a first non-conducting
logic state and a second conducting logic state in response to a
drive signal, an electric controller operating in conductance
control mode, comprising:
current reference signal generator means connected to be
responsive to a command signal for generating a current
reference signal the amplitude of which is a function of
said command signal, said current reference signal having
a upper control lever and a lower control level;
current sensor means connected to sense said electric cur-
rent and to generate a sensing signal representing said
current;
comparator means connected to compare sai9 current sens-
ing signal to said current reference signal for producing
said drive signal for the regulating switch, said compara-
tor means being further connected to a synchronization
source for accepting synchronization pulses to switch said
drive signal having a first state when the increasing sens-
ing signal is equal to or greater than the lower control
level of the current reference signal and having a second
state when the decreasing current sensing signal is equal to
or lower than the upper control level of the current refer-
ence signal.
I 4,392,104
DIELECTRIC TEST UNIT
James C. Lewis; Jerry W. Miller, both of Abbeville; Qyde D.
Simpson, Calhoun Falls, and Ronald G. Thomasson, Abbeville,
all of S.C., assignors to Automation Industries, Inc., Green-
wich, Conn.
Filed Jul. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 168,437
Int. a.3 GOIR Sl/12
U.S. a. 324— 54 12 Qaims
1. Apparatus for testing the dielectric i/itegrity of an electri-
cally insulated conductor comprising
364
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
(a) a receptacle formed with an opening and having an axis
of rotation,
(b) means for rotating the receptacle about said axis between
first and second positions,
(c) support means within the receptacle for receiving the
insulated conductor through the opening,
(d) a flowable mass of electrically conductive beads within
the receptacle to a level such that in the first position the
insulated conductor held by the support means is above
the bead mass but in the second position said conductor is
immersed with the bead mass, and
(e) circuit means for establishing a voltage potential between
the conductor and mass of beads and for sensing any
electrical current flowing therebetween.
4,392,105
TEST aRcurr for delay measurements on a lsi
CHIP
Mark H. McLeod, Poughkeepsie, N.Y., assignor to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,373
Int. a.3 GOIR n/02, 29/02. 31/28
U.S. CI. 324—57 DE 6 Qaims
«!.
•-'- - .iC* }
^. - t
-_iJ '^llJ
-iimtt \
1. For use on an LSI chip, a circuit for measuring the turn-on
and turn-off delays of a logic circuit on said chip, said measur-
ing circuit comprising:
a first loop capable of producing a first signal, and contain-
ing said logic circuit;
a second loop capable of producing a second signal, and not
containing said logic circuit; and
means for insuring that a first portion of ';ach of said first and
second signals are related to each other in a manner that is
dei>endent upon the turn-on delay of said logic circuit, and
that a second portion of each of said first and second
signals are related to each other in a manner that is dep)en-
dent upon the turn-off delay of said logic circuit.
4,392,106
NON-CONTACT DEVICE FOR MONITORING
ELECTRICAL PULSE SIGNALS
Nikolai I. Yakovlev, ulitsa O. Forsh, 3, kv. 101; Anatoly T.
Smolin, Grazhdansky prospekt, 19, korpus 1, kv. 1; Vastly G.
Kokovikhin, ulitsa Vemosti, 38, korpus 1, kv. 53, and Alexei
A. Kotunov, ulitsa 3 Internatsionala, 57, kv. 46, all of Lenin-
grad, U.S.S.R.
FUed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,047
Int a.3 GOIR 31/02
U.S. a. 324—72.5 2 aaims
a rectifier having an input and output;
a network including an integrator circuit and a differentiat-
ing circuit connected in series, said network having an
input connected to said output of said amplifier and an
output connected to said input of said rectifier; and
an indicator unit having an input connected to said output of
said rectifier.
4,392,107
SWITCHING EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING APPARATUS
Bernard P. Gollomp, Far Rockaway, N.Y., assignor to The
Bendix Corporation, Teterboro, N.J.
Filed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,452
Int. a.3 GOIR 15/12
U.S. a. 324—73 R 11 Qaims
1. A non-contact device for monitoring electrical pulse
signals comprising:
a sensing means responsive to variation with time of the
electromagnetic field produced by the monitored pulse
signal;
an amplifier connected to said sensing means and having an
output;
1. In a testing apparatus for measuring with a plurality of
instruments the response of a unit under test, which unit has a
plurality of test terminals, switching equipment comprising:
a common signal bus;
a plurality of switching networks, each having at least two
active states, in each of its active states said switching net-
works being operable to connect at least one of said plurality
of test terminals to said bus, each of said networks having a
selection input operable to select its states;
a plurality of switching couplers each having a control termi-
nal and each having a switched input connected to a differ-
ent corresponding one of said instruments, each of said
couplers being operable by its control terminal to connect
and disconnect its corresponding one of said instruments to
said common signal bus; and
control means connected to each of said switching networks
and couplers for providing a separate signal to each selection
input and each control terminal, said control means being
operable for each of said test terminals to connect it to at
least one of said instruments through one of said switching
networks, said bus and one of said switching couplers, said
control means being operable to substitute one of said instru-
ments for another so that said common bus can be time
shared.
4,392,108
BROADBAND RADIATION DETECTOR FOR
MICROWAVE AND LOWER FREQUENaES
Samuel Hopfer, Brooklyn. N.Y., assignor to General Microwave
Corporation, Fanningdale, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 883,632, Mar. 6, 1978, Pat. No.
4,207,518. This application Apr. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 143,365
Int. a.3 GOIR 21/10. 19/22
U.S. a. 324—95 6 Qaims
1. A monitor for detecting free-space radiation at radio
frequencies in a broad band of microwave frequencies and in a
broad band of lower frequencies; said monitor comprising:
a resistive strip having a d-c resistance that is substantially
uniform over said radiation frequency range and larger
than the characteristic impedance of free space for inter-
acting with free-space radiation to have r-f currents in-
duced therein in accordance with particular levels of the
intensity of said free-space radiation, said r-f currents for
corresponding radiation intensity levels in said band of
microwave frequencies being substantially constant in
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
365
amplitude with frequency, and said strip having in said
microwave band a reactance small relative to said d-c
resistance;
said strip being characterized by interacting with free-space
radiation in said lower frequency band to produce for
corresponding levels of radiation r-f currents of generally
varying amplitude over said lower frequency band, and
having in said lower band a reactance substantial in magni-
tude relative to said resistance;
4,392,110
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR MONTTORING THE
CONDmON OF DIELECTRIC LIQUID IN ELECTRIC
DISCHARGE MACHINING
Mohamed F. El-Menshawy, Birmingham; Peter A. Woodrow,
Sevenoaks, and Sushantha K. Bhattacharyya, Birmingham, all
of England, assignors to National Research Development
Corporation, London, England
Filed Jun. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 158,813
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 12, 1979,
7920444
Int. a.5 GOIN 27/60
U.S. CI. 324—453 i 15 Qaims
5/,
suPPLy
S3
I CUHIUNT
VOLTAGE ^
CONTROL
a monitonng circuit including a barrier layer device having
a substantial reactance in series with said resistive strip for
converting r-f currents induced in said strip by free-space
radiation to corresponding d-c signals, said monitoring
circuit having means for presenting a resistance in shunt
with the reactance of said barrier layer device, and means
for presenting in shunt with the reactance of said barrier
layer device small and substantial reactance values, re-
spectively, in said microwave and lower frequency bands,
and for varying in reactance with said strip reactance in
said lower frequency band.
62'
45 —
60-
43 47<.
"i r
44 48
-J^
1. A method of monitoring the condition of dielectric liquid
being used in an electrical discharge machining process, com-
prising:
causing at least a portion of the dielectric liquid used in an
electrical discharge machining process to fiow in contact
with two adjacent but separated electrodes, and
at least from time to time, deriving a signal represenUtive of
change in at least one component of the impedance across
the electrodes due to change in condition of said liquid.
4,392,109
STATIC CORRECnON FOR MAGNETOTELLURIC
DATA
Barry N. Warner, Duncanville, Tex., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
I FUed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,920
I Int. a.3 GOIV 3/38
U.S. a. 324—350 2 Claims
4,392,111
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ACCELERATING
CHARGED PARTICLES
Norman Rostoker, Irvine, Calif., assignor to Maxwell Laborato-
ries, Inc., San Diego, Calif.
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,521
Int. a.3 H05H 7/00. 11/00
U.S. a. 328—237 i 18 Qaims
s
O 100-
>-
t l»
>
i .
111
-AJ^ A-
<roOHM-M)
- (3 OMM-M)
SITE LOCATIONS
1. A method for correcting near surface resistive anomalies
in magnetotelluric surveys comprising the steps of:
receiving magnetotelluric survey data curves;
selecting a portion of each curve;
computing an average for said portion of each curve;
I determining a mean value and variance limit for said aver-
I ages;
selecting all curves having said average portion exceeding
said variance limit;
multiplying said selected curves by a ratio of said average of
each curve and said mean value to correct said selected
curves; and
displaying said corrected curves and said curves having said
average portion within said variance limit.
J20
7. A device for accelerating charged particles, each having
predetermined charge e and predetermined mass m, to ultra-
relativistic energies along a path characterized by a radius R
which may be infinite, comprising
means defining an evacuated containment region encom-
passing the path; {
means for providing a magnetic field having field lines sub-
stantially parallel to the path direction;
means for introducing the charged particles having prede-
termined charges at low energy (J)mV2, V being the
average velocity of the particles perpendicular to the
path, into the evacuated containment region;
means for increasing the intensity of the magnetic field
during and after the time the charged particles are intro-
duced into the containment region so as to compress the
charged particles in the containment region in the direc-
tion transverse to the path direction to a density n substan-
tially contained in a region along the path characterized
366
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
by an average radius a, the density n being approximately
related to a beam blow-up time t* in the absence of the
magnetic field by the formula
(cti^=2ir/nre,
c being the velocity of light and te the classical electron
radius, the density n corresponding to a line density N
satisfying the inequality
N>\(a/R){mV^W;
and
means for accelerating the charged particles to ultra-relativ-
istic energies more than about 100 Mev to form a beam
along the path while the loss of charged particles from the
beam occasioned by space charge effects is inhibited, the
time ib being substantially less than the time required to
accelerate the charged particles to ultra-relativistic ener-
gies.
the magnetic field parallel to the path direction inhibiting the
loss of charged particles from the beam due to space
charge effects acting prior to acceleration to ultra-relativ-
istic energies.
to average out offsets in the circuitry and thereby reducing
DC input offset and drift.
432,113
PHASE-LOCKED LOOP INCLUDING NON-LINEAR
PHASE DETECTOR OF THE SAMPLE AND HOLD TYPE
Charles R. Jackson, 1200 - 69th St. N., St. Petersburg, Fla.
22519
FUed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,904
Int. a.3 H03L 7/08
U.S. a. 331—14 4 Claims
4,392,112
LOW DRIFT AMPLinER
Otto H. Schade, Jr., North Caldwell, N.J., assignor to RCA
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Set. No. 300,121
Int. a.3 H03F 3/45. 1/02
U.S. a. 330—252 7 Qaims
16
/
/
''
xTaL
osc
REF
DIVIDER
PHASE
DET
LOOP
FILTER
1 ■
,20
VCD
OUTPUT
/O
(J
^
24
PROGRflWMaBLE
DIVIDER
DIGITAL WORD
(FREO SELECT!
22
-26
EOUT
1. A differential amplifier circuit comprising;
inverting and non-inverting input terminals and an output
terminal;
a differential transistor pair having first and second input termi-
nals and first and second output terminals;
first and second load means;
first means for alternately connecting said first load means to
said first and second output terminals of the differential
transistor pair and concurrently alternately connecting said
second load means to said second and first output terminals
of the differential transistor pair at a first cyclic rate, said
first and second load means and said differential transistor
pair thereby forming a differential amplifier stage, the load
presented to each output terminal of the differential pair
being the time average of the first and second load means;
second means for alternately connecting said inverting input
terminal to the first and second input terminals of the differ-
ential pair and concurrently alternately connecting the non-
inverting input terminal to the second and first input termi-
nals of the differential pair at a second cyclic rate; and
third means alternately connecting the first and second output
terminals of said differential transistor pair to said output
terminal at said second cyclic rate, the alternate connection
of input terminals, output terminals and load means tending
1. Apparatus for automatically compensating for non-linear
variations in the gain characteristics of a multi-channel, single
loop synthesized frequency generator which occur during
tuning from a first frequency channel having a frequency, fi, to
a second frequency channel having a frequency, f2, compris-
ing:
a voltage controlled oscillator (VCO) incorporating a
Varactor tuned resonant circuit and having an input and
an output;
a sample-hold phase detector circuit having an output con-
nected to the input of said VCO;
a feed back loop conductor interconnecting the output of
said VCO to said phase detector to form a phase locked
loop frequency generator, and
gain compensation means interconnected in said phase de-
tector and responsive to the first channel frequency, fi,
and the second channel frequency, f2, for reducing non-
linear variations in loop gain to 0 db when tuning the
frequency generator from fi to f2.
4,392,114
AUDIO DEVICE HAVING A TONE CONTROL
CANCELLING aRCUFT
Sbigeni Yamada, and Kazuya Ohhara, both of Toda, Japan,
assignors to Oarion Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,837
Claims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1980, 55-66396
Int. a.3 H03H 7/01
U.S. a. 333—28 T 5 Claims
1. An audio device comprising:
an equalizer means;
a tone control means having at least bass and treble regulat-
ing means;
an amplifier supplied with outputs from said tone control
means;
a reference control means;
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
367
a first switch for applying input signals directly or through
said equalizer means to said tone control means;
a second switch which connects said bass and treble regulat-
ing means to said tone control means when said input
signals arp directly applied to said tone control means and
receiving a first reflection thereof, and for contributing to
a second reflection thereof;
dummy input surface acoustic transducer means on a second
one of said tracks for also receiving said first reflection
and also contributing to said second reflection;
CQUALIZER
"/
POWEN
AMP
SP
!I
j;l_L
sw,
jrjj »»•'-? ^
■mn
D
disconnects said bass and treble regulating means from
said ton^ control means when said input signals are ap-
plied to said tone control means through said equalizer
means to thereby connect said reference control means to
said tone control means.
II 4,392,115
VOLUME MAGNETOSTATIC WAVE DEVICE
Gerard Volluet, and Pierre Hartemann, both of Paris, France,
assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
FUed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,268
Oaims priority, application France, Apr. 14, 1980, 80 08279
Int. a.^ H03H 9/125, 9/38: H03B 5/00
U.S. a. 333—141 10 Claims
t
primary output surface acoustic transducer means on a third
one of said tracks for receiving said acoustic wave, for
contributing to said first reflection thereof, and for receiv-
ing said second reflection thereof;
and dummy output surface acoustic transducer means on a
fourth one of said tracks for also receiving said acousMc
wave and also contributing to said first reflection thereof
1 i+M
t
r
"L
•
MULTIPHASE CIRCUIT
U
' /b".
/-90"
■
•HV'"
>
J
^G
4,392,117
SWITCHING MAGNET
Christoph Gibas, Neunkirchener Weg 5, 5908 Neunkirchen, and
Michael Miiller, Zum Turm 1, 6683 Spiesen, Elversberg, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,387
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 15,
1980, 3026725
Int. a.' HOIF 3/00
U.S. a. 335— 297 4 Oaims
1. A volume magnetostatic wave device for operating at a
predetermined wavelength provided with at least one micro-
strip transducer at the surface of a wafer of ferrimagnetic
material, wherein said transducer comprises at least one pair of
filament-type conductive elements spaced at a predetermined
interval from each other and having the same length, the termi-
nals of said transducer being connected electrically to the
conductive elements through a polyphase transformer circuit,
the currents which flow through said conductive elements
being equal and in phase quadrature so that the waves pro-
duced by said currents add to each other in one direction and
cancel each other in the other direction.
4,392,116
TRIPLE TRANSIT CANCELLATION
Adrian J. De Vries, Mount ProsF»ect, lU., assignor to Zenith
Radio Corporation, Glenview, lU.
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,247
Int. C\? H03H 9/64. 9/42
U.S. a. 333—194 10 Claims
3. A surface acoustic device comprising:
a substrate with at least four laterally separated tracks;
means acoustically coupling said tracks;
primary input surface acoustic transducer means on fiist
one of said tracks for generating an acoustic wave, for
1. An improved switchi- g magnet structure of the type
including a yoke, an armature and a coil spool having a hollow
cylindrical portion, spaced flange members on the cylindrical
portion and a coil wound around the cylindrical portion,
wherein the improvement comprises
a plurality of U-shaped laminations arranged in bundles,
each said lamination having two legs and an interconnect-
ing portion, the outer comer at the junction of each leg
with the interconnecting portion being beveled at an acute
angle relative to the leg;
means defining guide slots formed on the outwardly facing
surfaces of the flange members for receiving the leg por-
tions of bundles of said laminations to form a yoke, said
slots being axially aligned with each other at opposite ends
of said spool; and
first and second cover plates spaced apart in subsuntially
parallel relationship with each other and with the flange
members and engaging the bundles of laminations forming
said yoke,
each said cover plate having conUct surfaces positioned
to engage said beveled portions of said laminations in
368
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said bundles to restrain said bundles against radial out-
ward movement relative to said core spool.
432,118
THERMAL OVERLOAD RELAY HAVING A N.O. OR N.C.
CONTACT UNIT SELECnVELY ADDABLE IN THE
HELD
Arthur F. Kolb; Arthur J. Franklin, both of Bowling Green, and
Toby I. Miller, Rockfield, all of Ky., assignors to Eaton Cor-
poration, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,121
Int. a.3 HOIH 71/20, 73/22
U.S. a. 337—154 10 Oaims
provide a normally closed switch, and contacts at corre-
spxjnding ends of said contacts strips being subjected to
wiping action upon closing and opening when said
contact actuator is actuated by said arm;
and means for resetting said relay.
4,392,119
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MONITORING THE
ARRIVAL AND DURATION OF STAY OF A VEHICLE AT
A DRIVE-IN WINDOW
Ronn Price, West Chester; Gary Brown, Springboro; Andrew A.
Muraski, Middletown, all of Ohio, and William C. Muraski,
Olathe, Kans., assignors to U.S. Computer Systems, Inc.,
Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,645
Int. a.3 G08B 21/00
U.S. a. 340—38 L 61 Claims
VCMICLE
DETECTOR
_i
TIME BASE
GENERATOR
1. An overload relay for an electrical power supply circuit
comprising in combination;
a relay housing;
a standard switch mounted in said housing and being opera-
ble to open in response to an overload current condition to
protect said circuit;
a rotatable shaft;
a latched trip lever mounted on said shaft operable upon
release to rotate said shaft in a first direction;
means biasing said latched trip lever for rotation in said first
direction;
an overload current responsive element having means nor-
mally latching said trip lever against rotation and compris-
ing means responsive to an overload current in said circuit
for tripping said latch to allow said biasing means to rotate
said trip lever and said shaft in said first direction;
a switch operating lever freely rotatably mounted on said
shaft and having a finger for operating said standard
switch;
means normally biasing said switch operating lever in one
rotary direction to cause said finger to hold said standard
switch normally closed;
a reset member non-rotatably mounted on said shaft and
engaging said switch operating lever to drive the latter in
the other rotary direction against the force of its said
biasing means when said shaft is rotated in said first direc-
tion, in response to said overload trip thereby to release
said standard switch to allow it to reopen;
a slot in said housing for receiving an auxiliary switch;
an auxiliary switch insertable into said slot and removable
therefrom without disassembling said relay;
means to mount said auxiliary switch in said housing slot;
an arm on said switch operating lever for actuating said
auxiliary switch at the end of the trip stroke whereby the
force required at the beginning of the trip stroke is re-
duced;
and said auxiliary switch comprising a switch housing en-
closing first and second spaced-apart resilient contact
strips and a contact actuator, said contact actuator having
an aperture through which one of said contact strips
extends, and a selected one of two interchangeable contact
bias springs, one spring being placed within said aperture
below said one contact strip and the bottom of said aper-
ture to provide a normally open switch, and the other
spring being alternatively placed between the other
contact strip and said switch housing in compression to
Mr"
ALARM
X -
FIRST
ALARM
seooNo
Ai>RM
t I
coo^^^cR
CURRENT
VCwiCLC Time
D.5<>LAY
r—
ttmc base
UCHiCLE PRfSEl
:nt
t f
R
COOWTCR
accumulated
Time
OlSPLAT
K
vCHicue
•• COUNT
Ot SPLAY
14
LOW yoi-TAae oisf«»LE
1. Apparatus for monitoring the arrival and duration of stay
of a motor vehicle at a transaction station associated with a
drive-in business or the like of the type having a building
structure including a vertical wall mounting a drive-in win-
dow, and a vehicle approach lane positioned alongside the
building structure wall, said apparatus comprising:
monitor means producing an electrical signal upon the ar-
rival of a motor vehicle at the transaction station;
means responsive to said electrical signal for timing a dura-
tion of stay commencing with the arrival of the vehicle at
the transaction station; and
means responsive to said timing means for providing a visu-
ally sensible display of said duration of stay.
4,392,120
PATTERN INSPECnON SYSTEM
Kikuo Mita; Masayuki Oyama, both of Yokohama; Takashi
Yoshida, Kawasaki; Masato Nakashima; Katsumi Fi^ihara,
both of Yokohama, and Tadao Nakakuki, Kawasaki, all of
Japan, assignors to A. Aoki & Associates, Tokyo, Japan
PCT No. PCr/JP79/00271, § 371 Date Jun. 30, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 23, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01002, PCT Pub.
Date May 15, 1980
PCT FUed Oct. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 197,345
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 30, 1978, 53-133610;
Nov. 13, 1978, 53-155946[U|; Nov. 28, 1978, 53-146865; Nov. 28,
1978, 53-146870
Int. a.3 G06K 9/00: GOIB 11/02
U.S. a. 382—22 13 Claims
1. A pattern inspection system for inspecting a pattern
formed on a base, the pattern having a body and edges, said
inspection system obtaining information regarding the light
transmission or lack of light transmission through the pattern
by scanning the pattern with a light beam, said inspection
system comprising:
detection means, including means for separately detecting
the body of the pattern and generating body signals repre-
senting the body of the pattern and means for separately
detecting the pattern edges and the angle of the edges with
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
369
respect to a predetermined line and generating edge sig-
nals representing the edge of the pattern;
first memory means having a plurality of memory units,
operatively connected to said pattern body detection
means and said edge detection means, for separately stor-
ing the body signals and the edge signals in separate mem-
ory units of said first memory means, wherein a first of the
plurality of the memory units stores the body signals.
L
"igf
■1-
?1
2%
4,392,121
RECEIVER FOR A.C. ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
SIGNALLING ARRANGEMENT
Frederick M. Gray, Stafford, and Charles G. Leedham, Dove-
ridge, both of England, assignors to The General Electric
Company Limited, London, England
FUed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,209
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 7, 1979,
7942399
Int. a.3 H04B 3/54
U.S. a. 340—310 A 8 Claims
4,392,122
MAGNETICALLY TRIGGERED ON-BOARD ELAPSED
TIME INDICATOR
Redvers A. Hocken, 1195 Persbore Rd., Stirchley, Birmingham,
England
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,399
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 26, 1980,
8020899; Apr. 29, 1981, 8113188
Int. a.5 G08B 27/00
U.S. a. 340— 323 R 17 Qaims
wherein the remaining units of the plurality of memory
units store the edge signals, wherein each of the remaining
units represents the angle of the edge signals stored
therein; and
width measuring means, operatively connected to said first
memory means, for measuring the width of the body of
the pattern between two edges of the pattern by summing
the body signals between the two edges of the pattern.
1. A receiver for use in an a.c. electrical supply signalling
arrangement of the kind wherein infonnation is conveyed as a
pattern of time-spaced voltage reductions impressed on the a.c.
supply voltage waveform, each reduction being for a fraction
of a cycle of the waveform including a voltage zero crossing,
the receiver comprising means for detecting the presence of an
impressed voltage reduction by comparing the integral of the
supply voltage waveform over a period extending over a small
fraction of a cycle ending not later than the voltage zero cross-
ing included in that voltage reduction with the integral over a
corresponding period when no voltage reduction is present.
COIL
3Z
1 AMP
-FILTER
4-Z
SCMtTT
~TUM{S
I TIMER
1
-nSCUNINtTMl
'*4
UMNO
'STA»LE
50
4fl
46
' PISPtAY 1
54— €^=z:
5S— -E==
I TIMER
I 2
—52
1. A system for on-board timing for a vehicle traversing a
predetermined course, said system comprising sensing coil
means adapted to be carried by the vehicle for producing an
electrical signal in response to sensing at least one magnet
located at at least one predetermined position along said
course, on-board timing means and on-board control means
responsive to said sensing coil means for controlling operation
of the timing means to provide a record of the time interval
elapsing between successive or selected electrical signals pro-
duced by said sensing coil means.
4,392,123
SIGNAL-TO-NOISE IMPROVING SYSTEM
Harro Briiggemann, Mount Waverley, Australia, assignor to The
Dindima Group Pty. Ltd., Ringwood, Australia
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,114
Qaims priority, application Australia, Jun. 2, 1980, PE3840;
Dec. 9, 1980, PE6849; Feb. 25, 1981, PE7735
Int. Q.^ H03K 13/02
U.S. Q. 340—347 AD . 5 Qaims
MISE CDDPIMEIlT
(N ItlSJ
IMS aOISE- VOUT
mjiMTMEOus aoiSE^ rn^^v
1. A signal-to-noise improving system comprising, a circuit
input for incoming noisy analogue signals and a circuit input
for digitally stored input signals which have an improved
signal-to-noise ratio provided by the system and which have
been converted to analogue form,
said circuit input and said circuit output being connected to
inputs of an analogue comparator arranged to give an
output signal which signifies that the analogue form of the
digitally stored input signal is either higher or lower in
magnitude than the incoming noisy analogue signal or that
the incoming noisy analogue signal is either higher or
lower in magnitude than the analogue form of the digitally
stored input signal,
said comparator output signal being connected to a signal
incrementor to give a signal output which is the digitally
stored input signal incremented higher or lower by a
number digitally in response to either a higher or lower
signal output from said comparator, said incrementor
370
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
including a controller for controlling the incrementation
of said incrementor according to a predetermined se-
quence based on a prior knowledge of the input noise level
such that upon commencement of said incrementation, the
magnitude of incrementation will be approximately equal
to \1/tt times the root mean square of the input noise
level and said magnitude of incrementation will be divided
by two for each 2^^ incrementations of a digitally stored
input signal where N = 0, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, ... ,
a store for storing in digital form the so incremented digitally
stored input signals, the store output being connected to a
digital-to-analogue converter the output of which is con-
nected to said circuit output,
said comparator, said incrementor, said store and said digi-
tal-to-analogue converter being operative cyclically to
compare the incoming noisy analogue signals with the
analogue form of the digitally stored input signals and to
update the digitally stored input signals by adding or
subtracting a number digitally from the digitally stored
input signals in accordance with the output signal of said
comparator whereby to eventually store signals represen-
tative of the incoming signals with enhanced signal-to-
noise ratio so that said circuit output can provide an out-
put signal of those enhanced digitally stored input signals.
4,392,124
ANALOG-DIGITAL CODER COMPRISING A CHARGE
TRANSFER CODED VOLTAGE GENERATION
Roger Benoit-Gonin; Jean L. Berger, and Jean L. Coutures, all
of Paris, France, assignors to Thomson - CSF, Paris, France
FUed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,051
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 23, 1980, 80 09113
Int. Q\? H03K 13/02
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 10 Qaims
as
Vx-
1 1
Dt.lCt
t3 ~
53 r
-I
do— an.
•^4
\\\ If
I
L_Lj V *
S 1, -
cs —
Ci -
comiiiTiM
'2 .
M
if, •
X-
io'-^n
1. An analog-digital coder comprising charge transfer coded
voltage generator means for determining by successive ap-
proximations coefficients ao . . . an, equal to 0 or 1 of an analog
voltage Vx to be coded with said analog voltage Vx coded in
the form
I Vx I = 00 • V/? + fll
in which VR is a reference voltage; said generator means
including means for carrying out said coding in two stages,
said carrying out means during the first stage for processing
the voltages VR and VRi,
VA
\R
\R
2 +"2.
— T~ + •
. -(- flB •
22
2"
\Ri = aoVR + al •
V/?
+ al
\R
22
-continued
21-1 2'
with i= 1 to k, and k is approximately =(n+ 1)/2; said carrying''
out means for processing during the second stage for process-
ing the voltages VR and VRi with i = n to (n— k), means for
dividing by 2* the processed voltages and for summing said
second processed and divided voltages with the final voltage
VR (k— 1) produced during the first stage.
4,392,125
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM USING
REMOTE MICROPROCESSORS
Hideki Iwata, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Nel-Tecb Develop-
ment, Inc., Portland, Oreg.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,121
Int. a.3 G08B 26/00; H04Q 9/00
U.S. a. 340—518 21 Qaims
U--
■*^ MEMOTE
r uxaiL
1. A communications system comprising:
a local panel and a remote panel connected to the local panel
by a communications line;
the remote panel including remote transmitting means for
selectively transmitting a remote data signal at a first
voltage level and a request signal at a second voltage level
over said communications line to the local panel, the
request signal being transmitted to request permission to
subsequently transmit said remote data signal;
the local panel including local receiving means for receiving
said remote data and request signals on said line, detector
means for distinguishing the request signal from the re-
mote data signal, and local transmitting means for trans-
mitting a local data signal in response to the request signal;
the local data signal including a third voltage level; and
the remote panel including receiving means responsive to
said third voltage level to cease transmitting said request
signal.
4,392,126
COMBINATION BUCKLE AND WAIST ALARM
Luis A. Loyola, 851 W. End Ave., New York, N.Y. 10025
Filed Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 165,270
Int. a.3 G08B 21/00
MS. Q. 340—573 15 Claims
1. An alarm device of the type intended to indicate the
expansion of the waist of a wearer and used in combination
with a belt, said alarm device comprising:
(a) a hollow housing;
(b) a member;
(c) a pair of spaced legs formed integrally with and extend-
ing from said member; said housing having a pair of
spaced apertures for receiving therethrough and into said
housing the free ends of said legs; said member being
exterior to said housing; said apertures being so dimen-
JULY 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
371
sioned that said legs may be pivoted to an acute angle with
respect to axes extending perpendicularly to the housing
and through the center of said apertures;
(d) resilient means within said housing and engaging said
legs for urging said legs into said housing; said resilient
means comprising coiled springs about each of said legs;
AA
00 104 84 12 76 '^*-
, N108 / , f je2'X3e
II6-, \ \ ,il^_
10
432,128
SEWAGE BACK-UP ALARM
Jack W. Young, 5510 E. 20th St., Tucson, Ariz. 85711, and Alvin
G. Krill, 6026 S. Morris Blvd., Tucson, Ariz. 85706
FUed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,323
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 14,
1!)98, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.5 G08B 21/00
U.S. Q. 340—616 i 3 Qaims
/
(e) an alarm;
(0 electrical circuit means for coupling electrical energy to
said alarm upon said legs being pulled outwardly to a
predetermined position with respect to said housing; and
(g) switch means for selectively disconnecting said electrical
circuit means from said alarm.
4,392,127
MOISTURE METERS OF A TYPE ESPEOALLY
SUITABLE FOR ESTIMATING THE MOISTURE
CONTENT OF ORGANIC MATERIALS
Derek E. Steele, 61A Baden Ter., O'Sullivan Beach, South
Australia, Australia (5166)
per No. PCr/AU80/00002, § 371 Date Dec. 10, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02199, PCT Pub.
Date Oct 16, 1980
PCT FUed Apr. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 224,540
Qaims priority, application Australia, Apr. 10, 1979, PD8367
Int. Q.3 G08B 21/00; GOIN 27/04
U.S. Q. 340—604 5 Qaims
1. A grain moisture feeding apparatus, comprising: means to
hold grain under crushing compression within a cell, said cell
containing two electrodes each with a contact face to be in
contact within the cell with crushed grain and conductance
testing means connected to ^he electrodes, said testing means
including a source of substantially constant voltage, a voltage
divider connected across said voltage source, said voluge
divider containing two elements, one of said elements being the
resistance between the two electrodes within the cell and the
other element including a resistor which is selectively adjust-
able among several distinct values a predetermined voltage
level detection means, the junction between the two elements
of said voltage divider being connected to said voltage detec-
tion means, and indicator means connected to the said voltage
level detection means and arranged to indicate whether the
voltage connected across the voltage level detection means is
above or below the said predetermined voltage level.
1. An apparatus for sensing the pressure of sewage backup
conditions in a sewer system, said apparatus comprising in
combination:
(a) connecting means having an interior region and first and
second openings into said interior region, said connecting
means being connected in sealed relationship with a sewer
pipe so that there is a continuous channel from the interior
of said sewer pipe through said first opening into said
interior region, whereby backed up sewage can flow from
said sewer pipe into said interior region;
(b) pop-ofT covering means engaging said connecting means
and responsive to pressure in said interior region caused
by backing up of sewage in said sewage pipe for covering
said second op)ening when the pressure in said interior
chamber is low and popping off of said connecting means
when said sewage backs up in said sewage pipe;
(c) sealing means for scalable engagement with both said
pop-off covering means and a portion of said connecting
means surrounding said second opening to effect an air-
tight, waterproof connection of said pop-off covering
means with said connecting means until the pressure due
to sewage backup in said interior region reaches a prede-
termined level;
(d) first and second electrical conducting means extending
into said interior region from outside of said connecting
means for making electrical contact with sewage backed
up into said interior region, whereby a reduced electrical
resistance between said first and second electrical con-
ducting means is produced as a result of said electrical
contact with said backed up sewage; and
(e) electrical alarm means coupled to said first and second
electrical conducting means for producing an alarm signal
indicating the presence of said backed up sewage in said
interior region.
4,392,129
MULTIPLEXED LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY
Joseph H. Mehaffey, Atlanta, and Aleksander Szlam, Marietta,
both of Ga., assignors to Solid State Systems, Inc., Atlanta,
Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 54,146, Jul. 2, 1979, Pat. No. 4,286,118.
This application Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,230
Int. Q.3 G09G 3/18
U.S. Q. 340—765 2 Claims
1. An improved multiplexed display comprising
a liquid crystal display device including a plurality of seg-
ments and a back plane;
a capacitor connected to each of said segments for temporar-
ily storing a data bit;
each of said segments being connected to one of a plurality
of output terminals of a multiplexer;
1
372
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
said multiplexer including a multiplexer input and addressing
means driven by a clock signal characterized by two states
from a clock for successively connecting said multiplexer
input to said output terminals;
means for connecting said clock signal to said back plane;
data means for providing data bits, one at a time,
said data bits corresponding to a visible output from said
liquid crystal display device; and
switching means connecting said data means and said multi-
plexer input for providing said data bits to said multiplexer
input when said clock signal is in a first state of said two
states and alternately for providing the complement of
said data bits to said multiplexer input when said clock
signal is in a second state of said two states.
4,392,130
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PRESENTATION OF
GRAPHICAL INFORMATION
Jan-Erik Lundstrom, and Ingemar Rudgard, both of Vasteras,
Sweden, assignors to ASEA Aktiebolag, Vasteras, Sweden
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,228
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 16, 1980, 8000346
Int. a.3 G09G 1/16
U.S. a. 340—747 6 Qaims
tion of a particular module relative to the other modules
of a symbol;
input means for selecting symbols desired for display and the
direction in which they are to be written; and
symbol generating means connected in circuit with the input
means, the memory means, and display means, for detect-
ing the correct entry and exit modules for a selected sym-
bol, dependent upon a selected writing direction, and
causing the display of the symbol with its detected entry
module adjacent to an exit module of a precedingly dis-
played symbol.
4,392,131
INTEGRATABLE ACnVATION MODULE FOR PASSIVE
ELECTROOPTICAL DISPLAYS
KarNHeinz Walter, Grafing, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 186,142
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1979, 2939235
Int. C\? G09G 3/00
U.S. a. 340—803 6 Oaims
Adxjiell'
-A-
i
I
^■•r.-
^
S*.I^h'nj fipgfste'
I
I
I
I
I
tylty^:^
ro ""lir"ii9 BB is IB"
8kx.k"g Log
Vonaje Supp
4>^
^
i|i
—
i
4^ ■
¥
y^
^
M
■ti
.^-
L^
&^
L^
1. In a system for generating a display image composed of a
plurality of interconnected symbols, each of which is in turn
composed of a plurality of symbol modules, wherein an entry
module of a symbol is displayed adjacent to an exit module of
a precedingly displayed symbol, the system comprising:
a symbol memory for storing a plurality of preselected fields
which describe each module of a symbol, the field format
for each module including
(a) a first field comprising bits describing the state of
individual pixels constituting the module,
(b) a second field comprising bits indicating in which
display writing directions the module may be an entry
or exit module,
(c) a third field comprising link bits for relating the posi-
1. An activation circuit for a passive electro-optical display
which has electrodes in a matrix of columns and rows which
are to be driven on a time division multiplex basis, comprising:
a shift register for receiving serial data representing informa-
tion to be displayed;
a switching register connected to said shift register for re-
ceiving the data in parallel;
first and second driver groups, including m and n drivers for
connection to the electrodes of the matrix, each driver
respectively connected to said switching register and
including a two-channel analog switch having two switch
positions respectively selected by said switching register
and, depending on its switch position, receiving one signal
or another of a pair of analog signals; and
a pulse generator including six inputs, four outputs, four
select switches which are externally switchable two-chan-
nel analog select switches, and two digital switches con-
nected for operation in synchronism in complementary
switching positions,
four of said six inputs receiving said different voltages, re-
spectively, the two remaining of said six inputs connected,
resjjectively, with the two terminals d.c. voltage source,
two of said four outputs provided to emit the analog signal
pairs to the row electrodes and the two other of said four
outputs provided to emit analog signal pairs for the col-
umn electrodes, said select switches operable to connect a
respective output with two of said inputs in such a manner
that both driver groups receive, independently of one
another, either row signal pairs or column signal pairs.
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
373
4,392,132
WIRELESS SIGNALING SYSTEM
Harry G. Derks, Holland, Mich., assignor to Fleetwood Furni-
ture Company, Zeeland, Mich.
.Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,374
' Int. C\? H04Q 9/16. 9/00
U.S. a. 340—825.14 8 Claims
'10 .«
""»'" P3R-
r<0
1. A signa ing system for indicating status information from
one or more remote locations to a central location comprising:
logic circuit means for generating periodic single frequency
signals including synchronization signals and a plurality of
time intervals for the insertion of data information therein,
wherein each time interval bears a predetermined time
relationship to said synchronization signal and corre-
sponds to an assigned remote unit and wherein each time
interval includes a plurality of discrete data intervals,
at least one remote unit including means for providing status
indicating data signals, said providing means coupled to
said logic circuit means for the insertion of data during a
predetermined data and time interval assigned the remote
unit,
a centrally located unit for receiving said data signals and
including means for displaying one of a plurality of status
conditions of said at least one remote location in response
to said data signals.
control key, the remaining said keys being opening keys, said
lock comprising:
(A) a read only memory for storing a control code corre-
sponding to said key code associated with said control
key;
(B) an erasable memory for storing a set of opening codes;
and
(C) a control circuit which compares the key code of each
key placed in said lock to both said control code and said
opening codes, said control circuit:
(1) opening said lock when said key code of a key placed
in said lock corresponds to any one of said opening
codes; and
(2) changing said set of opening codes stored in said eras-
able memory when said control key and one of said
opening keys are sequentially placed in said lock.
4,392,134
LOCKING DEVICE WITH PROGRAMMABLE KEY
Dieter Lutz, Schweinfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Sach-Systemtechnik GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 43,680, May 30, 1979. This application
May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,186
Claims priirity, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 7,
1978, 2824892
Int. a.' E05B 19/18. 47/00
U.S. a. 340—825.31 20 Claims
t IS I I 15- 1 13
33— *w '^ :'"^^ ' .■"
' ' 4,392,133
ELECTRONIC LOCK WITH CHANGEABLE OPENING
CODE
Sten T. Lundgren, Bruksvagen 6, S-230 47 Akarp, Sweden
per No. PCT/SE80/00159, § 371 Date Feb. 5, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 4, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02711, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 11, 1980
PCT Filed Jun. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 233,607
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 5, 1979, 7904904
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00; E05B 41/00
U.S. a. 340—825.31 16 Oaims
uwcouu
' fPU4t
■er
MBHeen
' iHPur
[cooc
0 I ? J
SHin
cs/sr»
I
I
I
cow
zr
EBMl
m^^
-^
1. An electronic lock of the type which can receive a plural-
ity of electronic keys, each of said electronic keys having a
unique key code associated therewith, one of said keys being a
1032 0.(1
—13
1. Locking device comprising a key and a reading device,
said key comprising a grip portion, a plurality of information
carrier parts mounted on said grip portion, information ele-
ments located in said information carrier parts for determining
the locking code of said key, said information carrier parts
being adjustably positionable relative to one another for ar-
ranging said information elements in a predetermined angular
pattern, said reading device arranged to read the locking code
on said key and to compare the locking code as read with a
predetermined locking code, wherein the improvement com-
prises means for securing said information carrier parts to said
grip portion and providing a common axis extending from said
grip portion about which axis said information carrier parts are
angularly adjustably positionable, and said reading device
includes means for detecting one of the presence or absence of
said information elements in at least a portion of the predeter-
mined positions of the angular pattern, said means for securing
said information carrier parts comprises an axially elongated
member, said information carrier parts comprise annularly
spaced parts encircling said axially elongated member and
arranged one after the other in the axial direction of said axially
elongated member, and at least one said information element
on the periphery of each said information carrier part, each of
said annularly shaped parts has a polygonally shaped interior
surface symmetrical to the axial direction of said axially elon-
gated member and said axially elongated part has a polygo-
nally shaped surface on the exterior thereof complementary to
said polygonally shaped interior surface, and the polygonally
shaped interior surface of said annularly shaped parts extends
for less than half of the axial length of said annularly shaped
374
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
part and the complementary polygonally shaped exterior sur-
face on said axially elongated member for each of said annu-
larly shaped parts extends for the axial length of the polygo-
nally shaped interior surface on said annularly shaped part.
4,392,135
PAGING RECEIVERS
Takashi Ohyagi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,173
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 29, 1979, 54-
134804[U]; Sep. 29, 1979, 54-134806[U]
Int. a.3 H04M 11/02; H04B 1/16
\iS. a. 340—825.44 6 Oaims
coding switch representing the numerical value of the current
setting of that switch, and said arrangement further comprises:
multiplex generator means having a plurality of clock outputs
each connected to said actuating input of a respective coding
switch, said generator means being arranged to produce -a
sequence of pulse signals and to deliver each pulse signal of the
sequence to a respective clock output; a bus bar composed of
a plurality of conductors equal in number to the number of
code outputs of each said coding switch, with each said con-
ductor being connected to a respective coding output of each
said coding switch so that the appearance of a signal at said
actuating input of one said coding switch causes the set of
signals representative of the current setting of that said switch
to appear on said conductors; and signal transmitting means
connected between said bus bar and said memory, said signal
transmitting means comprising adding means having a plural-
ity of data inputs each connected to a respective conductor, a
plurality of stages equal in number to the number of coding
I — tJ-h
I m m MM!
• 1«.. ' 7-^ '
'<
D
[Ol»
1. A paging receiver comprising:
an antenna;
a radio unit for demodulating a radio signal received by said
antenna;
an information setter storing information that designates an
individually assigned call number;
a decoder supplied with the output of said radio unit; and
a plurality of informing devices which make reports to a user
of said receiver in accordance with decoder outputs;
said information setter comprising a first memory device
storing said information designating said individually
assigned call number and information designating the
selection of functional options of said receiver including
the selection of which of said informing devices make
rep>orts to said user; and
said decoder including a second memory device for storing
information stored in said information setter, enabling said
decoder to process the output of said radio unit in accor-
dance with the information stored in said second memory
device.
4,392,136
ORCUIT ARRANGEMENT FOR STORING SIGNAL
VALUES
Werner Albrecht, Markt Bibart; Klaus Fischer, and Gerhard
Griin, both of Nuremberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Licei\^a Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH, Frankfurt am
Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,927
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 31,
1980, 3029033; Jul. 31, 1980, 8020552[U]
Int. a.3 H04Q 9/00: G08C 19/28; H03K 21/36
MS. a. 340—825.56 4 Claims
1. In a circuit arrangement including a plurality of multi-
position data switches and a memory connected for storing, in
respective addressable memory locations, representations of
the positions of the data switches, the improvement wherein
each said data switch is a multi-digit coding switch having an
actuating input and a plurality of code outputs at which appear
a set of signals representative of the setting of said switch upon
appearance of a signal at said actuating input, with successive
settings of each said coding switch having successive numeri-
cal values and the signals appearing at said outputs of each said
switches and each presenting a representation of a selected
numerical value and arranged to add that representation to the
numerical value representation supplied to that stage via said
conductors, and a plurality of data outputs at which appear
representations of the results of such additions; and wherein
said memory has a plurality of data inputs each connected to a
respective data output, and a number of memory locations
equal to the number of said coding switches; each said clock
output is connected to said adding means and to said memory
for causing a pulse signal on a respective clock output to sup-
ply the numerical representation signals then appearing on said
conductors to a respective associated adding stage and to
address a respective associated memory location for storage
therein of the representation then appearing at said data out-
puts; and the selected numerical value representation presented
by each said adding means stage represents a numerical value
which differs from that of every other stage by at least the
number of possible settings of each said coding switch.
432,137
RADAR SYSTEM
Michael J. Intlekofer, Bellevue; Jay R. Hanson, Seattle, and
Thomas E. Lee, Bothell, all of Wash., assignors to Western
Marine Electronics, Inc., Seattle, Wash.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,805
Int. a.3 GOIS 13/00, 13/10; HOIQ 3/00
U.S. a. 343—5 SC 5 Qaims
5. A rotatably mounted scanner unit for a radar having a
directional antenna and a plurality of electronic components
powered by a plurality of diverse supply voltages, said scanner
unit further including a self-contained, multi-voltage power
supply which generates said supply voltage from low-voltage
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
375
power applied to said scanner unit through a pair of conven-
tional low-voltage slip rings, thereby eliminating the need for
a large numlber of slip rings to supply all of said supply volt-
ages.
so as to generate one first weighted sum per Loran C pulse
group;
odd phase code weighting means coupled to said second
plurality of delay line outputs, for weighting said odd
Loran C signal samples according to the respective phase
code of each of said odd samples to generate weighted
odd samples;
second summing means, coupled to said odd phase code
weighting means, for summing the weighted odd samples
so as to generate one second weighted sum p>er Loran C
pulse group;
even pulse interference detecting means, coupled to said first
summing means, for selectively rejecting the even Loran
C samples if the absolute value of the summation of a
predetermined number of first weighted sums exceeds a
predetermined threshold level;
odd pulse interference detecting means, coupled to said
second summing means, for selectively rejecting the odd
Loran C samples, if the absolute value of the summation of
a predetermined number of second weighted sums exceeds
a predetermined threshold level,
whereby the Loran C signal samples affected by said inter-
fering signal are rejected and the remaining samples are
provided output.
4,392,138
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING AND
INHIBITING SIGNALS INTERFERING WITH A LORAN
C SIGNAL
Steven C. Jasper, Schaumburg, and Robert V. Jane, Palos
Heights, both of III., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg,
lU.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,421
' Int. C\? H04B 7/00
U.S. a. 343—103 1 Qaim
4,392,139
AIRCRAFT TELEVISION ANTENNA RECEIVING
SYSTEM
Frank S. Aoyama, Redmond, and Brian P. Stapleton, Seattle,
both of Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle,
Wash.
Filed Dec. 14, 1979, Ser. No. 103,815
Int. a.3 HOIQ 1/28
U.S. a. 343—705 5 Oaims
1. An interference avoidance apparatus for substantially
eliminating the corruptive effects of an interfering signal hav-
ing a frequency nearly synchronized with a Loran C signal
formed by a plurality of even and odd numbered Loran C
pulses including in combination:
receiving means for receiving Loran C signal pulse groups
and said interfering signal;
a single sampling circuit, coupled to said receiving means,
for sampling said Loran C signal at most once per Loran
C pulse at pulse tracking reference points thereof to gener-
ate even and odd numbered Loran C signal samples;
tapped delay line means, coupled to said sampling circuit,
for separating said even numbered Loran C samples from
said odd. numbered Loran C samples, said even Loran C
samples being provided to a first plurality of delay line
outputs and said odd Loran C samples being provided to
a second plurality of delay line outputs;
even phase code weighting means coupled to said first plu-
rality of delay line outputs for weighting said even Loran
C signal samples according to the respective phase code of
each of said even samples to generate weighted even
samples;
first summing means, coupled to said even phase code
weighting means, for summing the weighted even samples
1. In an aircraft vertical fin structure, a television receiving
antenna array comprising:
a first pair of cavity backed slot antennas disposed in a first
major side surface of said vertical fin structure;
a second pair of cavity backed slot antennas disposed in a
second major side surface of said vertical fin structure;
and,
wherein said first pair of cavity backed slot antennas is
disposed in said first major side surface of said vertical fin
structure intermediate the auxiliary spar and front spar of
said vertical fin structure, and said second pair of cavity
backed slot antennas is disposed in said second major side
surface of said vertical fin structure intermediate the auxil-
iary spar and front spar of said vertical fin structure.
376
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,392,140
DUAL CABLE DRIVE ROLLING ARC GIMBAL
Thomas W. Bastian, Fullerton, and John M . Speicher, Upland,
both of Calif., assignors to General Dynamics, Pomona Divi-
sion, Pomona, Calif.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,169
Int. a.3 HOIQ 3/08
U.S. a. 343—765 9 Qaims
1. A cable drive rolling arc gimbal, comprising:
a base having means for attachment to a supporting struc-
ture;
an arcuate, substantially semicircular yoke supported in said
base for rotation about its axis;
a platform having a supporting shaft pivotally mounted in
said yoke for rotation about an axis substantially orthogo-
nal to the axis of rotation of the yoke;
a yoke drive motor and a platform drive motor mounted on
said base and separate yoke and platform cable drive
means separately connecting each of said motors to a
separate one of said yoke and said platform;
said platform cable drive means includes a cable connected
at opposite ends to separate drive pulleys mounted on
opposite ends of said platform supporting shaft; and
said platform drive motor is drivingly connected to said
cable by means of a pulley intermediate to the ends of the
cable.
4,392,141
IMAGE FORMING METHOD
Eiichi Inoue, Tokyo; Yasushi Takatori, Machida, and Masahiro
Hanita, Funabashi, all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Toyko, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 99,889, Dec. 3, 1979, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 902,409, May 3, 1978, abandoned. This
application May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,608
Claims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1977, 52-
56193, 52-56194
Int. a.3 GOID 9/00. 15/10. 15/34
U.S. a. 346— 1.1 12aaims
^
/i
\
HOI
-102
-103
105
of:
1. A high speed image forming method comprising the steps
r:
(a) forming a visible image at high speed in a heat-sensitive
recording medium by imagewise exposing said recording
medium with low energy radiant thermal information to
thereby form said visible image and a non-image portion,
said visible image having a visible contrast with respect to
said non-image portion and being capable of absorbing
radiation rays, the wavelength of which ranges from the
visible to the infrared region; and
(b) irradiating said recording medium with said radiation
rays, whereby said visible image absorbs more radiation
than said non-image portion to thereby selectively in-
crease the optical density of said visible image relative to
the optical density of said non-image portion.
4,392,142
INK JET DROPLET SENSING METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Ned J. Seachman, Penfield, and Edgar E. Price, Webster, both
of N.Y., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,400
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—1.1 11 Qaims
II
> I, »- »/«- i»»- »/«-
^'[ 4i ^i ^1 \
.c
^->
6. In ink jet printing, a method for sensing droplet passage
past a sensing site comprising the steps of:
directing light from two light sources through a region
through which ink droplets pass in flight;
sensing the passage of light through said region; and
determining the positioning of ink droplets in said region by
comparing the intensities of light from said two sources.
4,392,143
RECORD CARRIER FOR ELECTRO-EROSION
PRINTERS
Dietrich J. Bahr, Herrenberg, and Marian Briska, Boblingen, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,632
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 3,
1980, 3033069
Int. a.3 GOID 15/24
U.S. a. 346—135.1 4 Qaims
1. A record carrier for use with print electrodes of electro-
erosion printers, with a gliding and scratching trace-resistant
surface structure of a thin metallic layer provided over a lac-
quer layer on a carrier material, characterized in that
the surface of the lacquer layer (3) and consequently also the
surface of the thin metallic layer (5) are provided with a
multitude of shallow dimples (6) in the micrometer range
which are very small compared with the front surface of
the print electrodes, which are of maximum uniformity,
whose rims are rounded, and which are roughly cup-
shaped and of depth generally lower than their lateral
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
377
dimensions, and whose distance from each other is very
much smaller than the print electrode diameter.
4,392,144
RECORDING UNIT
Hisao Kurata, Toyohashi, Japan, assignor to Keisuke Honda,
Aichi, Japan
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,946
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 1, 1981, 56-98362[U]
Int. a.3 GOID 15/06
U.S. a. 346—139 C 2 Qaims
1. A recording unit comprising an adapter having an adapter
body provided with supports at ends of arms projecting from
both sides of said adapter body and with hook end supports
disposed at the bases of said arms, and a coil support secured to
said adapter body in parallel with said arms; and a recording or
current collecting needle made of a single hard wire member
and formed with a coil through which extends said coil sup-
port, one end of said hard wire member being supported by one
of said supports of said adapter to act as a recording or current
collecting needle and the other end thereof being a hook end
which is hooked on one of said hook end supports.
,^
4,392,146
NON-IMPACT DOT PRINTER
Michele Bovio, Brosso; Pierangelo Bemiti, Chivasso, and Wal-
ter Gillone, Ivrea, all of Italy, assignors to Ing. C. Olivetti A
C, S.p.A., Ivrea, Italy
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,370
Claims priority, application Italy, Mar. 20, 1980, 67417 A/80;
Feb. 2, 1981, 67134 A/81
Int. a.3 GOID 15/08
U.S. Q. 346— 140 R i 13 Qaims
4,392,145
MULTI-LAYER INK JET APPARATUS
Walter R. Parkola, Newtown, Conn., assignor to Exxon Re-
search and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,612
Int. Q.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. Q. 346—140 R 11 Claims
4. An ink jet head for a printer having a movable carriage
and resilient fixing means secured to said carriage, said head
comprising an elongated container for the ink and handling
means fixed on the container to removably mount said con-
tainer on said fixing means by manual pressure, in order to
permit ready replacement of the container when said ink is
exhausted.
4,392,147
APPARATUS FOR SUPPLYING AND REGULATING A
WRITING MEDIUM TO THE WRITING UNIT OF A
WRITING OR DRAWING MACHINE
Hans-Dieter Rosel, Altdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
J. S. Staedtler KG, Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,160
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 30,
1980, 3024678
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. CI. 346—140 R 14 Qaims
1. An ink jet apparatus comprising a plurality of channels,
each of said channels including a chamber, an inlet opening to
said chamber and an ink drop and ejection orifice, the improve-
ment comprising a plurality of layers, each of said layers per-
forming a different function in more than one channel formed
by each said layer, at least one of said plurality of said layers
being located between immediately adjacent orifices in differ-
ent ones of said layers so as to provide a high-density multi-
channel array wherein the spacing between immediately adja-
cent chambers is substantially equal to the spacing between
immediately adjacent orifices.
1. In an apparatus for supplying a liquid writing medium to
the writing unit of a writing or drawing device or the like, a
closed air-tight container for a liquid writing medium having a
bottom, said container having a substantially vertical tube
therein dipping below the surface of writing medium therein, a
writing unit having an ink chamber therein and a writing tip
and connected to said tube in the container by a fiow line, the
bottom of said container disposed in substantially the same
horizontal plane as said writing tip of the writing unit, means
378
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
connected to said container for supplying air under pressure to
the surface of the writing medium within the container, valve
means interconnected between said container and said air
supplying means for regulating the flow of liquid writing me-
dium to the writing unit by supplying writing medium when
the writing unit is operative and interrupting the writing me-
dium when the writing unit is inoperative, the surface area of
the writing medium within the container being considerably
greater than the surface are of the writing medium in the ink
chamber within the writing unit.
4^92,148
MOAT-GUARDED JOSEPHSON DEVICES
Wen H. Chang, Wappingers Falls; Tushar R. Gheewala, York-
town Heights, and Erik P. Harris, Somers, all of N.Y., assign-
ors to International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk,
N.Y.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,862
Int. a.^ HOIL 39/22
U.S. a. 357—5 17 Qaims
FIB 2
^^^m^^-^^^
1. A superconductive circuit, comprising:
a continuous superconducting ground plane located on a
substrate,
a sujserconductive circuit device located near said ground
plane, said device being susceptible to magnetic flux
trapped in said ground plane,
said ground plane being characterized by a cut therein, said
cut extending along a perimeter surrounding said device
and being continuous except for at least one small region
where there is no cut, said small region being a path con-
necting the ground plane within the cut to the ground
- plane external to the cut and providing a path for the flow
of electrical current therethrough.
4,392,149
BIPOLAR TRANSISTOR
Cheng T. Homg; Robert O. Schwenker, both of San Jose, Calif.,
and Paul J. Tsang, Poughkeepsie, N.Y., assignors to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 126,610, Mar. 3, 1980, Pat. No. 4,309,812.
This application Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,705
Int. a.3 HOIL 27/12
U.S. a. 357-49 laaim
1. A planar self-aligned vertical bipolar transistor structure
(FIG. 23), said structure comprising:
a monolithic silicon substrate (1);
a shallow depth silicon epitaxial layer having a substantially
flat exposed top surface, said epitaxial layer having a
thickness of approximately 2 micrometers;
a shallow depth emitter region (FIG. 23, 12) formed in said
expitaxial layer, said emitter region having an exposed
essentially planar surface, said exposed planar surface of
said emitter region being co-planar with said substantially
flat exposed top surface of said epitaxial layer, said emitter
region having a depth of approximately 200 nanometers;
an intrinsic base region (FIG. 23, 19) formed in said epitaxial
layer beneath said emitter region to provide an emitter-
base junction, said emitter-base junction being substan-
tially flat and having a predetermined area, said intrinsic
base region having a depth measured froift beneath said
emitter-base junction of approximately 200 nanometers;
an extrinsic base region (FIG. 23, 17) formed in said epitaxial
layer, said extrinsic base laterally surrounding said emit-
ter, said intrinsic base and emitter-base said junction;
a collector region (FIG, 23, 4) formed in said epitaxial layer
beneath said intrinsic base region to provide a base-collec-
tor junction, said base-collector junction being substan-
tially flat and having an area essentially equal to said
emitter-base junction;
a subcollector region (FIG. 23, 3) contained in said mono-
lithic silicon substrate beneath said collector and having a
lateral extension in a flrst direction;
a collector reach-through region (FIG. 23, 9) laterally dis-
placed in said first direction from said vertical bipolar
transistor, said collector reach-through region extending
from said substantially flat exposed top surface of said
epitaxial layer to said lateral extension of said subcollector
region;
an insulator region (FIG. 23, 6) positioned between said
vertical bipolar transistor and said collector reach-
through region, said insulator region having an upper
essentially planar surface, said upper planar surface of said
insulator means being essentially co-planar with substan-
tially said flat exposed top surface of said epitaxial layer,
said insulator region extending into said subcollector
region and electrically isolating said extrinsic base region
from said collector reach-through region;
an extrinsic base polysilicon extension region (FIG. 23, 18)
contained on said substantially flat exposed top surface of
said epitaxial layer and making intimate physical contact
with said extrinsic base region (FIG. 23, 17) formed in said
epitaxial layer, said extrinsic base polysilicon extension
region having a thickness of 200 to 300 nanometers;
an emitter contact making intimate contact with said emitter
region (FIG. 23, 12); and
a thin layer of insulating material consisting of silicon diox-
ide and silicon nitride and having a thickness of approxi-
mately 0.2 to 0.3 micrometers, said thin layer of insulating
material being positioned between said emitter contact
and said extrinsic base polysilicon contact.
4,392,150
MOS INTEGRATED aRCUTT HAVING REFRACTORY
METAL OR METAL SILIODE INTERCONNECT LAYER
Francis G. Courreges, Sandy, Utah, assignor to National Semi-
conductor Corporation, Santa Qara, Calif.
FUed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,648
Int. a.J HOIL 27/02. 23/48, 29/46
U.S. a. 357—51 2 Qaims
1. A MOS integrated circuit structure with a low resistance
silicide interconnect level comprising:
a semiconductor substrate having a plurality of contact
regions on the surface thereof;
an insulating layer over the surface of said substrate with
openings at said contact regions so as to expose said
contact regions;
a silicide layer on said insulating layer formed into electri-
cally conductive, low resistance, contact region connect-
JULY 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
379
ing circuits, said silicide extending to, but not covering up,
said contact regions; and
semiconductor element to said metallic casing and said
strip-shaped leads.
a polycrystalline silicon layer on top of said silicide, formed
into said connecting circuits, and extending beyond said
silicide layer into said contact regions so as to provide
good ohmic contact with said contact regions.
4,392,152
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
Yutaka Hirano, Atsugj, Japan, assignor to Fujitsu Limited,
Kawasaki, Japan
PCT No. PCr/JP80/00036, § 371 Date Nov. 9, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 31, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01966, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 18, 1980
PCT Filed Feb. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 201,410
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 9, 1979, 54-27303
Int. a.' HOIL 29/40
U.S. a. 357—80 10 Qaims
4,392,151
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE
Shiro Iwatani, Himeji, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 182,404
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 29, 1979, 54-
119769[U]
Int. Q.3 HOIL 23/30. 23/36
I
U.S. Q. 357—72
2 Qaims
34 ^14
1. A semiconductor device comprising:
a semiconductor element including a pair of opposite main
surfaces;
a plurality of solder electrodes for external connection dis-
posed on said semiconductor element, one of said solder
electrodes being disposed on one of said main surfaces of
said semiconductor element, the remaining solder elec-
trodes being disposed in a predetermined pattern on the
other main surface of said semiconductor element;
a metallic casing including a positioning recess and female
fitting means and forming a heat sink;
said semiconductor element being disposed in said position-
ing recess;
a plurality of resilient strip-shaped leads connected at first
ends thereof to respective of said solder electrodes on said
other main surface of said semiconductor element;
an electrically insulating plate formed by molding a heat
resisting, electrically insulating resinous material so that
said plate includes male fitting means capable of being
fitted into said female fitting means in said metallic casing,
intermediate portions of said strip-shaped leads being
buried in said plate, and second ends of said strip-shaped
leads extending externally of said plate; and
a quantity of a resinous material molded within said metallic
casing to encapsulate said semiconductor element with
said casing;
the arrangement being such that said male fitting means on
said electrically insulating plate fit into said female fitting
means in said metallic casing, thereby to fix said electri-
cally insulating plate to said metallic casing and cause said
strip-shaped leads to hold resiliently said semiconductor
element in said positioning recess on said metallic casing,
followed by soldering of said solder electrodes on said
i < ,
I'D
1. A semiconductor device, comprising: an insulating sub-
strate; an integral metalized layer formed on said substrate,
blazing material, a lead wire extending from said semiconduc-
tor element to said metalized layer on which said semiconduc-
tor element is mounted, and a hollow hermetically sealing
member having an inner wall disposed around said semicon-
ductor element, wherein said metalized layer on which said
semiconductor element is bonded by means of said brazing
material and to which said lead wire extends is separated by a
separation area therein into a semiconductor element bonding
area where said semiconductor element is bonded to said met-
alized layer and a lead wire connecting area where said lead
wire is connected to said metalized layer at the inside of said
wall of said sealing member.
4,392,153
COOLED SEMICONDUCTOR POWER MODULE
INCLUDING STRUCTURED STRAIN BUFFERS
WITHOUT DRY INTERFACES
Homer H. Glascock, II, Scotia; Douglas E. Houston, Ballston
Lake; Michael H. McLaughlin, and Harold F. Webster, both
of Scotia, all of N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company,
Schenectady, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 901,792, May 1, 1978. This
application Nov. 6, 1978, Ser. No. 958,100
Int. Q.^ HOIL 25/04. 23/48. 29/44
U.S. Q. 357—82 23 Qaims
1. A cooled electronic semiconductor device for operation
at high power levels with reduced internal stress comprising:
a silicon wafer with at least first and second electrodes on
opposite sides of said wafer;
a first metallic layer atop said first electrode and joined
thereto;
a second metallic layer atop said first metallic layer and
joined thereto;
a first structured copper strain buffer including a bundle of
substantially parallel closely packed strands of copper of
substantially equal length, said first strain buffer having
first and second opposed surfaces, one common end of
said strands being thermo-compression aiffusion bonded
to a first metallic sheet so as to form said first opposed
surface, the remaining second opposed surface of said first
380
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
strain buffer being thermocompression diffusion bonded
to said second metallic layer;
first metallic heat sinking means for providing cooling of
said device thermo-compression diffusion bonded to said
first metallic sheet;
a third metallic layer below said second electrode and joined
thereto;
a fourth metallic layer below said third metallic layer and
joined thereto;
a second structured copper strain buffer including a bundle
20
_ 22 22
22 22
20o
^
^12^
20b
- /
30a
32 32 32 32
of substantially parallel, closely packed, strands of copper
of substantially equal length, said second strain buffer
having third and fourth opposed surfaces, one common
end of said strands being thermo-compression diffusion
bonded to a second metallic sheet so as to form said fourth
opposed surface, the remaining third opposed surface of
said second strain buffer being thermo-compression diffu-
sion bonded to said fourth metallic layer; and
second metallic heat sinking means for providing cooling of
said device thermo-compression diffusion bonded to said
second metallic sheet.
4,392,154
SOLID-STATE COLOR IMAGE SENSOR
Keigu Horii, Ootsu, Japan, assignor to Matsushita Electronics
Corp., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,169
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 17, 1980, 55-82647
Int. a.5 H04N 9/07. 3/15
U.S. a. 358—44 6 Oaims
r—<t>* .
•
^ ♦s ^
'
♦•
*
f
17
T
,^ ? ffl'f;;' f ?:^f ,-
25L_ 1 25 iTdw^.r^z?
27 26
-23
-'.
1. A solid-state image sensor, comprising;
a plurality of transfer electrodes disposed in parallel with
each other on a semiconductor substrate of one conductiv-
ity type;
a plurality of channel stops of the other conductivity type
formed on said semiconductor substrate so as to cross said
transfer electrodes, whereby a photosensor region is
formed;
each element in said photosensor region comprising a prede-
termined number of said transfer electrodes;
one of the transfer electrodes of each element which is
adjacent to other elements being optically shielded; and
means for applying voltages to the transfer electrodes, re-
spectively, of each element in such a way that during the
integration time (i) the potential below one transfer elec-
trode which does not collect signal charges becomes
deeper than the potential below said optically shielded
transfer electrode, (ii) the potential below the adjacent
channel stop becomes deeper than the potential below said
one transfer electrode which does not collect said signal
charges, and (iii) the potential below said one transfer
electrode which does collect said signal charges becomes
deeper than the potential below said adjacent channel
stop.
4,392,155
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR IMAGE
SUBTRACTION IN ORDER TO EXTRACT
NON-COMMON INFORMATION FROM TWO LIGHT
IMAGES
Nairn Konforti, Holon, and Emanuel Marom, Tel Aviv, both of
Israel, assignors to Ramot University Authority for Applied
Research & Industrial Development Ltd., Tel Aviv, Israel
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 216,009
Int. C1.3 H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358—106 16 Qaims
1. The method of image subtraction for extracting non-com-
mon information from two light images, comprising the fol-
lowing steps:
(a) projecting optically two light images simultaneously
from slightly different angles onto a TV camera tube;
(b) spacing said two light images via a grating a predeter-
mined short distance in front of the photosensitive coat-
ing, such that the shadow of the grating interlaces the two
light images on the photo-sensitive coating;
(c) scanning electronically the interlaced light images on the
photosensitive coating;
(d) processing the two images to produce information which
is not common to the two images.
4,392,156
VIDEO KEY EDGE GENERATOR FOR INCREASING
THE SIZE OF AN ASSOOATED BORDER, DROP
SHADOW AND/OR OUTLINE
James F. Duca, Evergreen, and Jerry A. Mollne, Arvada, both of
Colo., assignors to Ampex Corporation, Redwood City, Calif.
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,544
Int. a.3 H04N 5/22
U.S. a. 358—183 11 Claims
1. In a switcher apparatus which receives an input video
signal and generates a selectively switched composite video
signal having selected edge effects about a given background
or insert video signal, the apparatus having delay lines of
selected horizontal line delays and of selected pixel delays
coupled to AND and OR function means to provide selected
combinations of the delay lines commensurate with a desired
edge effect, an improved edge effects generating circuit com-
prising;
feedback loop means integral with the delay lines and in-
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
381
eluding gate means coupled from the loop means back to
the delay lines, wherein the loop means successively feeds
back the input video signal to define a loop video signal
waveform of selectively modified horizontal and vertical
trailing edge; and
T4JH':rFl-::'r|'",,
4,392,157
PATTERN NOISE REDUCTION METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR SOLID STATE IMAGE SENSORS
Enrique Garcia, Sandy Hook, Conn., and Peter L. P. Dillon,
Pittsford, N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Roch-
ester, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,400
Int. a.3 H04N 3/14, 5/30
VJS. a. 358—213 10 Qaims
1. A method of reducing pattern noise in output signals from
kn array of solid state image sensing elements, comprising the
steps of:
(a) operating the array under controlled illumination condi-
I tions to produce a first set of output signals representing
' the responses of the respective sensing elements of sub-
stantially the entire array to the controlled illumination
conditions, said first set of responses forming a statistical
distribution having an average and upper and lower ex-
tremes;
(b) forming, from said first set of output signals, response
adjustment signals representing (1) the locations in the
array of a subset of sensing elements having responses in
the upper and lower extremes of the element response
distribution, and (2) adjustments to the output signals
I produce;] by said subset of sensing elements to move the
individual responses of said subset of elements toward said
average element response;
(c) operating the array under image sensing conditions to
produce a second set of output signals; and
(d) adjusting, in accordance with said individual response
adjustment signals, the separate output signal* in said
second set that were produced by said subset of sensing
elements, to reduce the pattern noise in said second set of
output signals.
4,392,158
INTERLACED SOLID-STATE IMAGING DEVICE
Masakazu Aoki, Kodaira; Haruhisa Ando, Hachioji; Shinya
Ohba; Shoji Hanamura, both of Kokubunji; Iwao Takemoto,
Hinodemachi, and Ryuichi Izawa, Kokubunji, all of Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,461
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1980, 55-54158
Int. a.' H04N 3/14
U.S. a. 358—213 7 Qaims
INTERLACE CKT
42 43 «6
VERT
SHIFT R£6--
switch and multiplier means coupled to the loop means for
selectively applying the modified loop video signal to the
multiplier means to generate a corresponding composite
video signal with the modified horizontal and vertical
trailing edge effect commensurate with the desired edge
effect.
1. In a solid-state imaging device having enhanced dynamic
range and including a plurality of pholodiodes which are ar-
rayed in two dimensions on an identical semiconductor body,
a group of horizontal switching elements and a group of verti-
cal switching elements for gating the signal output from the
photodiodes, and a horizontal scanning circuit and a vertical
scanning circuit which impress scanning pulses having a given
voltage level on the horizontal and vertical switching elements
respectively, and having an interlaced scanning mechanism for
addressing a plurality of vertical scanning lines by means of
interlace switching elements so as to permit horizontal scan-
ning of scanning lines of a plurality of rows; said solid-state
imaging device characterized in that said interlaced scanning
mechanism includes means to restore said voltage level of the
scanning pulses after said level has undergone a voltage drop
due to said interlace switching elements.
4,392,159
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIGITAL VIDEO
SIGNAL PROCESSING
Maurice G. Lemoine, and Leonard A. Pasdera, both of Redwood
City, Calif., assignors to Ampex Corporation, Redwood City,
Calif.
Filed Feb. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 117,428
Int. a.3 H04N 5/76
U.S. Q. 358—319 31 Qaims
1. A method of processing a continuous digital television
information signal for recording by a recording apparatus to
record said digital television information signal, comprising:
supplying successively occurring increments of said digital
television information at a first rate to a plurality of digital
memories wherein said memories are arranged in two
groups, with each group being associated with a separate
information channel;
writing said increments of said digital television information
sequentially into selected memories at said first rate so that
each increment of said digital television information is
written into one of said memories; and
reading increments of digital television information at a
second rate that is slower than said first rate simulta-
382
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
neously from selected memories of each group onto said
associated information channels such that all of said infor-
mation in said memories is read thereon, the selected
second information tracks when said stylus means is
shifted from the correct tracing position;
first FM demodulator circuit means connected to said first
filter means for demodulating the audio information sig-
nal; and
second FM demodulator circuit means connected to said
second filter means for demodulating the video informa-
tion signal.
Ill JW-rpWwK>n»t-* cu»c« txa3 M _f W Ct-K. ^ pj_I- r*t,
memories being read are other than those into which
increments of digital television information are being
written.
4,392,161
RECORDED TAPE, SPEED-CHANGE REPRODUONG
SYSTEM
Yoshihiko Ota, Yokohama, and Yositeru Kosaka, Karaakura,
both of Japan, assignors to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd.,
Yokohama, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 915,760, Jun. 15, 1978, abandoned.
This application Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,010
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 16, 1977, 52-71374
Int. a.^ H04N 5/785
U.S. a. 360—10.3 2 Qaims
4,392,160
PLAYBACK SYSTEM FOR VIDEO DISK HAVING
PLURAL INFORMATION TRACKS
Koichi Minemura, Fukaya, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Mar, 26, 1980, Ser. No. 134,324
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1979, 54-36120;
Mar. 27, 1979, 54-36121
Int. aJ H04N 5/80; GllB 21/10
U.S. Q. 358—327 2 Qaims
CHROMINANCE
INFORMATION
22
23 _i
z\
,5 0011
\lOO'
1. A recorded tape, speed-change reproducing system com-
prising:
tape speed-change transport means for transporting a tape at
a speed V which is represented by the equation
UJMJNANCE AND AUDIO
INFORMATION
,.„(^.
1. A playback system for a video disc which has first and
second information tracks adjacently to each other, an FM
signal frequency-modulated by a video information signal
being recorded on said first information track and an FM signal
frequency-modulated by an audio information signal being
recorded on said second information track in a different fre-
quency band from that for said FM signal on said first informa-
tion track, comprising:
stylus means for simultaneously tracing said first and second
information tracks;
signal detector means coupled to said stylus means for de-
tecting the FM signal frequency-modulated by the audio
information signal and the FM signal frequency-
modulated by the video information signal;
first and second filter means coupled to said signal detector
means for separating the FM signal frequency-modulated
by the audio information signal and the FM signal fre-
quency-modulated by the video information signal in-
cluded in the output signal of said signal detector means
from each other;
first and second rectifying circuit means connected respec-
tively to said first and second filter means;
voltage comparator circuit means connected to said first and
second rectifying circuit means;
tracking compensating means connected to said voltage
comparator circuit means for restoring said stylus means
to a correct tracing position thereof for said first and
wherein Vo is the tape speed for normal reproduction
(and recording); and n is a positive integer, said tape
having a video signal recorded thereon, said tape being
transported past a plurality of rotary video heads having
gaps of mutually different azimuth, angles, said signal
being recorded in parallel video tracks disposed obliquely
relative to the longitudinal tape direction, and an audio
signal recorded by a stationary audio head with an audio
track extending in the longitudinal tape direction;
means for causing a plurality of rotary video heads having
gaps of said mutually different azimuth angles, to scan said
video tracks recorded on said tape when said tape is trav-
elling at any of many different speeds, in order to repro-
duce said recorded video signal;
means for causing said stationary audio head to scan said
audio track on said tape when said tape is travelling at any
of many different speeds, in order to reproduce said re-
corded audio signal;
means for correcting and processing a pitch of said repro-
duced audio signal so that said pitch becomes substantially
equal to the pitch which was originally recorded when
said tape was travelling at a normal speed,
said correcting and processing means comprising:
first and second electric charge transferring element means,
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
4,392,162
DIGITAL VIDEO SIGNAL REPRODUONG APPARATUS
Kaichi Yamamoto, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Sony Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,196
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1979, 54-128338
Int. Q.3 H04N 5/785
U.S. Q. 360---10.3 16 Qaims
,^ JOA J/A J?A
lb M"> 1!B £B
JJ
J4A
RIP
«MP
IC
.yr
^18
Kir
4^C
^^^iJHSHHh
mnK-
avuun
EKUR
TlHt
h
m
m
X
SI J9
w
\ IkKM
•jfarofrl
m
IIMf
jumral
Wru-
hAtt
B-A
J?
-i
,-■«
j9^
cat J.
316.
QtH
01
aofK
6»N
il
1. Apparatus for use in a digital video signal playback device
of the type having a record medium in which identifiable plural
channels of digital video signals are recorded thereon in a like
plurality of tracks, said apparatus comprising: |
plural transducer means associated with said plural channels
for reproducing said digital video signals from said plural-
ity of tracks, each transducer means normally reproducing
a respective, predetermined channel of said digital video
signals;
detecting means for identifying the particular channel of the
383
the number of stages in each of the first and second elec-
tric charge transferring element means being k;
pulse oscillator means for generating first cyclically recur-
ring pulses having a repetitive frequency fo;
first frequency dividing means for receiving said first recur-
ring pulses and for delivering second recurring pulses
having a repetitive frequency fo.n7(n'-|-2) wherein n' is a
positive integer;
second frequency dividing means for dividing the frequency
of said second recurring pulses in a ratio of 1 A;
first switching means responsive to the output of said second
frequency dividing means for supplying said reproduced
audio signal to a selected one of said electric charge trans-
ferring element means when said tape is travelling at a
speed which is different from that used for recording and
to shut off the supply of said reproduced audio signal to
the other non-selected electric charge transferring ele-
ment means;
second switching means responsive to the output of said
second frequency dividing means for delivering an audio
signal read out of said other non-selected electric charge
transferring element means, as an output signal of the
correcting and processing means;
third switching means responsive to the output of said sec-
ond frequency dividing means for supplying said first and
second recurring pulses, as clock pulses, to said other
non-selected and selected electric charge transferring
element means, respectively, at the time of slow-motion
reproduction, and to said selected and other non-selected
electric charge transferring element means, respectively,
at the time of fast-motion reproduction;
said first, second and third switching means for coopera-
tively causing said first and second electric charge trans-
ferring element means to alternately repeat write-in and
read-out in response to the output of said second fre-
quency dividing means; and
feedback means responsive to slow-motion reproduction for
feeding-back an output of the electric charge transferring
element means which is then reading-out to an input of
said element means.
digital video signal reproduced by each of said transducer
means; and
signal interchange means having plural channel outputs and
responsive to said detecting means for diverting digital
video signals that have been reproduced by transducer
means associated with channels different from the chan-
nels of the digital video signals reproduced thereby to the
proper channel outputs as determined by said detecting
means.
4,392,163
MAGNETIC TAPE RECORDING AND/OR
REPRODUaNG APPARATUS WITH AUTOMATIC
HEAD POSITIONING
Albert M. A. Rijckaert; Edmond de Niet, and Jacobus P. Beun,
all of Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,656
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 28, 1979,
7907219
Int. Q.3 GllB 5/43, 21/10
U.S. Q. 360—76 9 Qaims
1. An apparatus for recording and/or reproducing signals in
a plurality of parallel longitudinal tracks on a magnetic tape,
comprising:
a head support,
a magnetic head having a head face adapted to allow move-
ment of a magnetic tape thereacross during operation, and
air gaps which terminate in a scanning portion of the head
face for scanning respective tracks on said magnetic tape,
a positioning system attaching said magnetic head to said
head support for adjustably positioning the magnetic head
relative to said magnetic tape, comprising a first position-
ing means including piezo-electric elements for moving
the head position in a first direction relative to the mag-
netic tape; a second positioning means comprising piezo-
electric elements for pivotally moving said magnetic head
in a second direction relative to the magnetic tape about a
pivotal axis extending substantially perpendicularly to a
plane tangential to said scanning portion of the head face;
and first and second control means for generating and
applying respective control signals to the piezo-electric
elements of the first and second positioning means, said
control signals being representative of the difference be-
tween the instantaneous and the desired position of the
magnetic head relative to the magnetic tape,
characterized in that said first positioning means includes
two piezo-electric elements disposed substantially parallel
to each other and to said pivotal axis, on opposite sides of
the pivotal axis, and arranged for moving the magnetic
head in the width direction of the magnetic tape,
said second positioning means includes at least three piezo-
electric elements each having a longitudinal axis, regu-
larly spaced around said pivotal axis with said longitudinal
axes extending substantially parallel to said pivotal axis,
and
one of said positioning means is connected to the head sup-
port through the other positioning means.
384
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,392,164
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING
THE GAIN OF CIRCUITRY RESPONSIVE TO READ
HEAD OF A MEMORY
Jean Lequien, les Ulis, France, assignor to CII Honeywell Bull,
Paris, France
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,155
Oaims priority, application France, Dec. 19, 1979, 79 31080
Int. a.3 GllB 5/02. 5/09, 21/10
U.S. a. 360—77 18 Qaims
(==
•0 >j '.*s 'Of C:s3.acefl>e'*
ct wieheQC and oos ♦'0".-'>9
n.--£-C
•lE-KhANT^^
„A
magnetic head upon said disc, each said at least one magnetic
head being attached to one end of a different movable arm, the
other end of the movable arm being attached to a carriage for
translating said at least one head radially with respect to said
disc, said mechanism comprising:
a rod corresponding to each said magnetic head, said rod
having:
a first straight section of its length defining an axis of
rotation about which said rod is rotatable;
a second section of its length offset from and parallel to
said first section, said second section rotatable about
said axis through an arc, said arm and said second sec-
tion pressing against one another as said second section
is rotated through at least a portion of said arc, the
tangent to said arc where said arm and second section
press against one another remaining approximately
perpendicular to said arm; and
a third section of its length offset from and parallel to said
first section; and
means at said third section for controllably rotating said rod
about said axis so that said second section is rotated selec-
tively in either direction through said arc, said head being
lifted from said disc when the second section is rotated in
one direction through a portion of said arc and loaded
upon said disc when the second section is rotated in the
opposite direction through a portion of said arc.
1. A circuit for controlling the amplitude of signals read by
a flux change responsive head from a magnetic disc including
plural concentric tracks, each of said tracks including a data
zone and a reference zone, the reference zones of a pair of
abutting tracks having a first axis, the data zones of a pair of
abutting tracks having a second axis, the first axis being dis-
placed from the second axis by approximately one-half the
radial width of a track, the head desirably being positioned so
it is centered on a data zone and straddles a pair of reference
zones, each reference zone including plural cells having mag-
netic flux transitions which cause the head to derive a pair of
opposite polarity pulses as the cells move longitudinally rela-
tive to the head, the amplitude of the pulses being a function of:
(a) the distance separating the head from the disc; (b) the radial
position of the head, and (c) the presence or absence of faults
on the magnetic disc so that a pair of the pulses have a wave-
form approximating a sinusoid with an average value subject to
change from cell to cell, said control circuit comprising means
responsive to the pulses derived by the head as the cells move
longitudinally relative to the head for deriving a first signal
indicative of the deviation from a reference value of the abso-
lute value of the derivative of the pulses, and means for con-
trolling the amplitude of a signal derived from the head as a
data zone moves longitudinally relative to the head in response
to the amplitude of the first signal.
4,392,166
MAGNETORESISTANCE EFFECT TYPE HEAD
Shinzaburo Ishikawa, Hirakata; Kenji Kanai, Neyagawa;
Nobuyuki Kaminaka, Moriguchi, and Tetuo Adachi, Osaka,
all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,408
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1980, S5-23442[U]
Int. C\? GllB 5/30, 5/12, 5/38, 5/20
U.S. CI. 360—113 5 Qaims
4,392,165
HEAD LIFT MECHANISM
Harold T. Wright, San Carlos, Calif., assignor to Disctron, Inc.,
Milpitas, Calif.
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,808
Int. a.3 GllB 5/54, 5/012, 21/22, 21/16
U.S. a. 360—105 8 Qaims
so-.
1. A mechanism for lifting at least one magnetic head from a
rotatable magnetic disc and for gently loading said at least one
1. A magnetoresistance effect type head which comprises:
a casing having a U-shaped cross-section recess in one lateral
surface and extending from one end edge to the other end
edge, the bottom of said recess being a flat surface;
a magnetoresistance effect type head chip and a tape contact
surface member in said recess and positioned against said
flat surface, said head chip and said tape contact surface
member being side by side in a direction across said recess
and each having a tape contact surface portion along the
edge thereof at one end edge of said casing, said tape
contact surface portions having the same cross-sectional
shape and being aligned with each other, said magnetore-
sistance effect type head chip having lead-out terminals on
the edge thereof which faces the other end edge of said
casing;
a terminal plate member in said recess against said flat sur-
face and having one edge abutting the edges of said mag-
netoresistance effect type head chip and said tape contact
surface member which are on the opposite sides from said
tape contact surfacs and having terminal pins extending
therethrough having the ends on the side abutting said
magnetoresistance effect type head chip aligned with said
lead-out terminals thereof; and
a cover plate member in said recess covering said magneto-
JULY 5, 1983
ir
ELECTRICAL
385
resistance effect type head chip, said tape contact surface
member and said terminal plate member.
4,392,167
MAGNETIC HEAD, METHOD OF PRODUCING THE
MAGNETIC HEAD
Hendrik J. M. Joormann, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,112
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 18, 1980,
8003518 ,
I Int. a.3 GllB 5/22, 5/251
U.S. Q. 360—120 5 Qaims
n
1. A rotary head assembly for a magnetic recording and
reproducing device, comprising:
(a) a central stationary shaft having one end thereof securely
joined to a main body of said assembly, and another free
end, said main body comprising a lower housing and a
lowee^cylinder having a cylindrical surface coaxial with
said upper cylinder;
(b) a rotary sleeve disposed within said main body and ex-
tending into said lower cylinder for rotation about the
common axis of said stationary shaft;
(c) an upper cylinder mounted on said rotary sleeve around
the periphery thereof, adjacent one end of said lower
cylinder, and carrying one or more video signal magnetic
recording and reproducing heads, the diameter of said
upper cylinder being substantially equal to the diameter of
said cylindrical surface of said lower cylinder;
(d) a hydraulic bearing means defined by upper portions of
said stationary shaft and said rotary sleeve, and a lubricant
filled in the space between said upper portions of said
stationary shaft and said rotary sleeve;
(e) a lubricant passage defined between lower portions of
said stationary shaft and said rotary sleeve and in commu-
nication with said hydraulic bearing means; and
(0 a magnetic sealing means disposed within said lower
housing at the lower end of said lubricant passage.
4,392,169
MAGNETIC SHIELDING SPRING
Carolus J. Boullart, and Adrianus C. H. J. Liefkens, both of
Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 80,360, Sep. 28, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,867
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Oct. 3, 1978,
7809966
Int. Q.3 GllB 15/60
U.S. Q. 360—130.33 12 Qaims
1. A magnetic head having a core of a magnetizable material
which is interrupted by a gap in which at least one layer of a
substantially non-magnetizable material has been provided,
characterized in that one layer of substantially non-magnetiza-
ble material consists of a mixture of 95-100% of a glass com-
prising 12-20% by weight of AI2O3, 40-48% by weight of
B2O3 and a total of 35-45% by weight of one or more of the
oxides BaO, CaO or SrO and 0-5% by weight of additional
constituents.
4,392,168
ROTARY HEAD ASSEMBLY
Tenio Maruyama, Neyagawa; Takashi Ichiyanagi, Hirakata,
and Ichizo Otoda, Ikeda, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 66,438, Aug. 14, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,579
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 16, 1978, 53-100300
Int. Q.3 GllB 5/10. 21/18
U.S. Q. 360—129 11 Qaims
2" 22,=
20^ ^,23 r ._
1. A magnetic tape cassette comprising a housing having
circumferential walls, one of said walls having an aperture for
admitting a magnetic head connected to a magnetic tape appa-
ratus, tape guiding means for guiding a magnetic tape present
in the cassette past said aperture, tape pressure means disposed
opposite said aperture, a leaf spring arranged to press the tape
pressure means against the tape when a magnetic tape is pres-
ent in the cassette, and means for magnetically shielding a
region in the cassette adjacent said pressure means, characters
ized in that the leaf spring and the means for magnetically
shielding together consist of a unitary element which is a strip
of soft magnetic metal alloy having an amorphous structure.
4,392,170
MAGNETIC RECORDING DISC CARTRIDGE WITH DISC
CLEANING MEANS
Shuhei Okada, Toyonaka, Japan, assignor to Hitachi Maxell,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,891
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 2, 1980, 55/75151[U];
Jun. 2, 1980, 55/75 152[U]
Int Q.^ GllB 23/02
U.S. Q. 360—133 7 Qaims
1. A magnetic recording disc cartridge which comprises a
magnetic recording disc, a cover jacket means having a cham-
ber defined by a pair of opposed sheet members for rotatable
accommodation of the magnetic recording disc, with the sheet
members being provided with central windows on each of the
sheet members for receiving a drive shaft of a recording/repro-
ducing apparatus, at least one elongated head window for
receiving a recording/reproducing head of said apparatus and
at least one small index window defined at the peripheral
portion of the central window on at least one of the sheet
members, at least one cleaning sheet disposed between at least
386
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
one of the sheet members and the corresponding surface of the
magnetic recording disc, said cleaning sheet being made of a
non-woven cloth and having central windows, head windows
and index windows each of which is formed corresponding to
the windows deflned on the sheet members, and thermally
4,392,172
REACTIVE SNUBBER FOR INDUCTIVE LOAD CLAMP
DIODES
James W. B. Foley, Peru, and David J. Osterhout, Adams, both
of Mass., assignors to General Electric Company, Salem, Va.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,526
Int. a.3 H02H 9/04
U.S. a. 361—8 6 Claims
"■; .11 ■
\t
l \
,3-t
~\_
bonding portions for bonding the sheet member and the clean-
ing sheet, said bonding portions being a plurality of dots
formed around the peripheral portion of the central window
along a plurality of lines radially extending from the peripheral
edge of the central window for a predetermined distance.
4,392,171
POWER RELAY WITH ASSISTED COMMUTATION
William P. Komnimpf, Albany, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,763
Int. a.3 HOIH ii/59
U.S. a. 361—5 10 Qaims
1. An improved snubber circuit for use in a power switching
circuit including at least one power switch and power clamp
diode, the switching circuit being of the type responsive to
control signals for connecting and disconnecting an inductive
load from a power source, comprising:
(a) a saturable reactor having a primary winding and a sec-
ondary winding, said primary winding being connected in
series with the clamp diode across the load, the diode
being poled so as to permit continuous load current to
flow when the load is disconnected from the power source
by the power switch; and
(b) a shunt snubber circuit connected across the power
switch, said shunt snubber circuit arranged to supply a
current pulse to said secondary winding in a manner to
force rapid magnetic saturation of said saturable reactor
when the load is disconnected from the power source by
the power switch whereby load current is rapidly trans-
ferred into the clamp diode immediately upon the clamp
diode being forward biased.
4,392,173
CIRCUIT FOR REDUCTNG VOLTAGE STRESS ACROSS A
TRANSFORMER
Michael D. Rubin, Saratoga, Calif., assignor to Ford Aerospace
& Communications Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,344
Int. a.3 H02H 9/04
U.S. a. 361—35 6 Qaims
a^^'joV^-'^
1. Apparatus for forming a current-carrying connection
between an A.C. source and a current-consuming load, respon-
sive to a control signal, comprising:
ix>wer relay means for selectably completing and breaking a
connection between said source and said load responsive
to the respective presence and absence of said control
signal;
means for providing a current-carrying path shunting said
power relay means responsive to a gate signal; and
means for sensing the flow of current through each of said
power relay means and said current-carrying means to
provide said gating signal both (a) at least upon com-
mencement of current flow and (b) for at least one-half
cycle of the source waveform after cessation of current
flow through said power relay means, to prevent forma-
tion of an arc in said power relay means during both
completing and breaking of said connection.
1. A circuit for reducing voltage stress on a first transformer
having a primary and a secondary, wherein a load coupled to
said secondary has a first voltage thereacross, and an output
terminal is connected to said load, to which a second voltage is
applied that is much greater than said first voltage; said circuit
comprising:
at least one additional transformer, so that the total number
of transformers is an integer n, each transformer having a
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
387
primary and a secondary, wherein the primary of the jth
transformer is connected to the secondary of the (j-l)st
transformer for all j such that 2^j^n, and the secondary
of the nth transformer is coupled to said load; and
a voltage dividing network for shifting some of said second
voltage from across said first transformer to across said
additional transformer(s), said voltage dividing network
comprising:
n resistors, with one resistor connected between a primary
and a secondary of each transformer; and
n capacitors, each resistor having a capacitor connected
thereacross;
where RJ(Cj-|-CTj) = Rk(Ck+CTk) for all integers j, k
such that l=j§n and l=k = n, where Rj is the resis-
tance of the jth resistor, Cj is the capacitance of the jth
capacitor, CTj is the interwinding capacitance of the jth
transformer, Rk is the resistance of the kth resistor, Ck
is the capacitance of the kth capacitor, and CTk is the
interwinding capacitance of the kth transformer.
1. In a protection device comprising first and second differ-
ential transformers each having a toroidal magnetic core
through which pass the neutral and phase conductors of an
alternating current distribution circuit, and a secondary wind-
ing, the secondary winding of the first transformer being cou-
pled to the input of a first amplifier followed by a rectifier, a
threshold comparator and a control means suitable for actuat-
ing a circuit breaker, the secondary winding of the second
transformer being coupled to the output of the said first ampli-
fier, the improvement comprising an auxiliary amplifier having
an input and an output, the input of the said auxiliary amplifier
being coupled to the output of the first amplifier and the ojitput
of said auxiUary amplifier being coupled to the secondary
winding of the second differential transformer.
source, a load and a Snubber circuit connected in series, said
GTO thyristor being connected through a current transformer
to a positive terminal of said Snubber circuit at the anode, to a
negative terminal of said Snubber circuit at the cathode and,
between the gate and cathode being supplied a positive gate
current and a negative gate current from a gate current supply
circuit for turning on and off said GTO thyristor, and said
GTO thyristor being operated in such a manner that the supply
of said negative gate current is commenced at a first time point,
a current passage in a region between said anode and cathode
is shrinked from said first time point to a second time point, the
anode current of said GTO thyristor is decreased from said
second time point to a third time point, the anode current is
increased from said third time point to a fourth time point at
which a transient voltage developed by an inductance in said
Snubber circuit is reduced to substantially zero, and said anode
7
4,392,174
LECTRIC PROTECTION DEVICE
Christian Cadet, Taverny; Bernard Dumortier, Montreuil sous
Bois, and Georges Souques, Paris, all of France, assignors to
La Telemecanique Electrique, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 137,923, Apr. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,400
Gaims priority, application France, Apr. 6, 1979, 79 08732
Int. a.3 H02H i/i47
U.S. CI. 361—45 9 Qaims
h Oi
current is decreased again from said fourth time point, wherein
said protection device comprises said current transformer and
a discriminating circuit, said discriminating circuit comprising:
means for receiving an anode current signal from said cur-
rent transformer and a timing signal supplied from said
gate current supply circuit at said first time point,
means for obtaining a changed amount of said anode current
between said third and fourth time points,
means for obtaining a ratio of said changed amount to an
anode current in the vicinity of said first time point includ-
ing said first time point,
means for comparing said ratio with a reference value to
produce a control signal when said ratio is smaller than
said reference value, and
means for supplying said control signal to said gate current
supply circuit, thereby stopping the supply of said positive
gate current to said GTO thyristor.
4,392,176
SELF-CHECKING SAFETY MAT
Femand Kneip, Diekirch, and Ernest Marnach, Colmar-Berg,
both of Luxembourg, assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rub-
ber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,930
Int. C\? HOIH 47/22
U.S. a. 361—160 8 Gaims
4,392,175
PROTECTING DEVICE FOR A GATE TURN-OFF
THYRISTOR
Katsuhiko Takigami, Yokohama, and Minami Takeuchi, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Saiwai, Japan
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,244
Gaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 10, 1979, 54-160168;
Dec. 10, 1979, 54-160169
Int. G.3 H02H i/20
U.S. G. 361—88 8 Gaims
1. A protection device for a gate turn-off (GTO) thyristor
included in a thyristor control circuit which comprises a DC
1. A safety mat for a power driven machine comprising a
supporting plate, yieldable means for supporting said plate at a
388
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
predetermined level in the unloaded condition and permitting
depression of said plate when supporting a person,
a main circuit for the machine, safety means interlocked with
said main circuit disabling operation of the machine if a
person is standing on said mat, self-checking means in-
cluded in said safety means for interrupting said main
circuit to prevent operation of the machine when said
safety means is defective,
said safety means including a switch means activated in
response to movement of said supporting plate between
unloaded and depressed positions, said switch means being
connected to a first relay and a second relay,
said first relay being energized when said plate is in the
unloaded condition and said second relay being energized
when said plate is depressed as by a person standing on
said mat,
said first relay and said second relay having first contacts
which are closed to energize an output relay when said
plate is unloaded and which are open to de-energize said
output relay when said plate is depressed and said output
relay having an output contact in said main circuit for
enabling said circuit upon energization of said output
relay and disabling said circuit upon de-energization of
said output relay,
said first relay and said second relay having second contacts
which are closed to energize a timer relay for actuating a
timer switch when said plate is depressed to provide said
self-checking means,
wherein prior to starting the machine said timer relay is
energized in response to depression of said plate and said
timer switch is closed and held in a closed position for a
predetermined time interval if a component of said safety
means is not defective so that upon return of said plate to
the unloaded position there will be energization of said
first relay and de-energization of said second relay causing
said output relay to be energized and said output contact
closed to enable said main circuit so that the machine may
be operated and wherein prior to starting the machine said
timer relay will not be energized in response to depression
of said plate if a component of said safety means is defec-
tive so that said timer switch will not be closed preventing
energization of said output relay and closing of said output
contact so that operation of the machine is prevented.
4,392,177
TRANSPORTING ROLLER FOR WEBS OF
PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIAL OR THE LIKE
Erwin Geyken, Neubiberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,826
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 28,
1979, 2939473
Int. a.3 H05F 1/00
U.S. a. 361—221 22 Claims
♦o 2.
,.,.... C'ly/f^X-^
-S
ia
member being connected with ground and further comprising
pulverulent silver which is embedded in said plastic material to
thereby rapidly disperse electrostatic charges and prevent
discharges which generate light detrimental to radiation-sensi-
tive articles, said member being in conductive contact with
said end poriions and the quantity of silver in said plastic
material being such that said member has a surface resistance of
at least about 1x10'° ohms.
4,392,178
APPARATUS FOR THE RAPID CONTINUOUS CORONA
POLING OF POLYMERIC HLMS
Peter F. Radice, King of Prussia, Pa., assignor to Pennwalt
Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,463
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 21,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 HOIF 1/02
U.S. a. 361—233 43 Oaims
a 10 52
B 82 10 M
1. Apparatus for continuously enhancing piezoelectric prop-
erties of polymeric film exhibiting such properties comprising
a rotating drum contacting said film for transport thereof
along a defined path,
a corona discharge electrode roller mounted for movement
along circumference of said drum in an oscillating motion
normal to axis of rotation of said rotating drum, said film
having at least one area in constant contact with said
rotating drum and oscillating electrode, and
means for providing continuous corona discharge from said
electrode through said film substantially at said contact
area for poling said film.
4,392,179
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR SEPARATING
ADHERING MEDIA ELECTROSTATICALLY
Alfred M. Nelson, Redondo Beach, Calif., and Houshang
Rasekhi, Convent Station, N.J., assignors to Wang Laborato*
ries. Inc., Lowell, Mass.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,747
Int. C1.3 HOIF 13/00
U.S. a. 361—234 11 Claims
45
1. A device for the guidance and/or transf)ort of flexible
radiation-sensitive articles, particularly for the transport of
x-ray films in the dry region of a processing machine, compris-
ing a shaft having first and second end portions comprising
electrically conductive materials; and a cylindrical article-con-
tacting member coaxially surrounding said shaft so that at least
one of said end portions remains exposed, said member com-
prising a synthetic plastic material selected from the group
consisting of hard polyvinyl chloride, fine crystalline polyam-
ides, polypropylene, polyethylene and mixtures thereof, said
CONTROLLER
25
T
iTTTf^
|F| 96
3^'
.'.^',^■,^■^^ k ■. k ■.■.>.■. r-
-114
if^z
-113
lie
POWER
SUPPLY
-^43
54
119"
1. Apparatus for facilitating separation of a first medium
from a second medium, the first medium being separably dis-
r
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
389
posed proximate to the second medium, the apparatus compris-
ing:
a member having an electrically conductive first layer and
an electrically insulative layer;
the first medium having an image layer disposed for contact
with the second medium and an electrically conductive
second layer disposed for contact with the insulative
layer, the insulative layer being a dielectric positioned
between the first and second conductive layers; and
a voltage source coupled to provide a predetermined poten-
tial difference between said conductive first and second
layers creating an electrostatic force therebetween, at-
tracting the first medium to the member and away from
the second medium for a selected period of time.
4,392,180
SCREEN-PRINTABLE DIELECTRIC COMPOSITION
Kumaran M. Nair, East Amherst, N.Y., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 169,495, Jul. 16, 1980,
abandoned. This application Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,279
Int. Cl.^ C04B i5/46
U.S. a. 361—321 20 Qaims
1. A dielectric powder composition for making hermetic
dielectrics having an insulation resistance (IR) drop of no more
than one order of magnitude after immersion in water at 50° C.
for 10 days consisting essentially of a finely divided admixture
of (a) a substituted perovskite of the formula Bai-jtSrjcTiOs
wherein X is from 0. 1 to 0.9, (b) at least one inorganic dopant
containing an ionic species selected from the cations Bi^ + '
Ca2+Cs' + Fe2+Fe3 + Pb2+Zn2+ and the anion p- and mix-
tures thereof, and (c) a low temperature melting devitrifiable
glass or frit having a specific viscosity (log tj) at the firing
temperature of less than 6 and in which the relative propor-
tions of the components, by weight, are 30-90% (a) 10-35%
(b) and 1-7% (c).
20. An hermetic multilayer capacitor having an insulation
resistance (IR) drop of no more than one order of magnitude
after immersion in water at 50° C. for 10 days and comprising
a first conductor terminal and a plurality of alternating printed
dielectric films and overlying conductor terminals. The dielec-
tric film consisting essentially of (a) a substituted perovskite of
the formula Bai _;tSrxTi03 wherein X is from 0.1 to 0.9, (b) at
least one inorganic dopant containing an ionic species selected
from the cations Bi3+Ca2+Cs' + Fe2+Fe3 + Pb2 + Zn2+ and
the anion F~ and mixtures thereof, and (c) a low temperature
melting devitrifiable glass or frit, the assemblage having been
cofired at below 900° C. to remove the inert liquid therefrom
and to effect liquid phase sintering and cooled to effect devi-
trifcation of the glass or frit having a specific viscosity (log tj)
at the firing temperature of less than 6, and in which the rela-
tive proportions of the components, by weight, are 30-90% (a)
10-35% (b) and 1-7% (c).
fitting flat against an upper surface of the substrate adja-
cent to the aperature;
a plurality of conductive circuit elements formed on the
upper surface of the substrate after the terminals have
been mounted on the substrate so that a contact end por-
tion of each circuit element overlaps and is attached to the
contact head of a selected terminal so as to provide me-
43 A I 47 .H
\-44
4!} Vi"
chanical and electrical connection between the conduc-
tive elements and the associated terminals; and
a second substrate having a plurality of aperatures formed
therein, each aperature of the second substrate being
positioned such that one or more surfaces of the walls of
each aperature make physical contact with the tail section
of a terminal when the second substrate is located against
the flange depending from the first substrate.
4,392,182
ARRANGEMENT FOR SCANNING POINTS IN SPACE
Paul Di Matteo, Huntington, N.Y., assignor to Solid Photogra-
phy, Inc., Melville, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,044
Int. a.3 G03B 15/02 .
U.S. CI. 362—5 6 Qaims
1 MIRROR
3 A00RESSIN6
MIRROR
OL'TPUt ftNGlt BlStCTOR
•'Vs AOORtSSEO
POINT IN SPACt
CAMERA
4,392,181
CIRCUIT BOARD AND CONTACT ASSEMBLIES
Gary D. Jabben, Shreveport, La., assignor to Western Electric
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,748
Int. CI.3 H05K 1/18
U.S. a. 361—401 4 Qaims
1. A circuit board and contact assembly which comprises:
a substrate having a plurality of mounting aperatures formed
therein;
a flange depending from a lower surface of the substrate
along an edge of the substrate;
a plurality of interconnect terminals, each having an elon-
gated body section mounted in an associated aperature
comprising a tail section extending through the aperature
^ and projecting from the lower surface of the substrate a
distance greater than the flange depends from the the
lower surface; and a 90' extending contact head section
1. Arrangement for scanning an addressed point in space,
comprising: a light source; a camera at which light from a light
source is directed; deflector means interposed between said
source and camera and through which light can pass from the
source to the camera; and rotary addressing mirror means in
the path of the light intermediate said deflector means and
camera, so that light from the source is deflected by the ad-
dressing mirror means, from there to the addressed point in
space, and from there via the deflector means and the address-
ing mirror means to the camera.
4,392,183
DEVICE IN CONNECTION WITH CAMERAS
Roland Ostlund, Furuslatten 60, 42700 Billdal, and Rolf Ost-
lund, Tradesvagen 15, 44600 Alvangen, both of Sweden
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,182
Qaims priority, application Sweden, May 30, 1980, 8004046
Int. a.3 G03B 15/02
U.S. a. 362—11 9 Claims
1. A device for supporting a plurality of flashlight units at a
camera having a lens with a lens socket defining a central axis,
said device comprising: a holder, means for attaching said
holder to said lens socket, at least two first arm means con-
nected to said holder at diametrically opposite positions so as
^be pivotable about first axes on opposite sides of said socket
and at right angles to said central axis, said first arm means
having ends remote from said socket, and at least two second
390
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
arm means respectively pivotally connected to said remote
ends so as to be pivotable about second axes, and at least two
cable for supplying energy for an electrically operated
unit such as an instrument or radio; and
flashlight units respectively supported on said second arm
means.
4,392,184
ILLUMINATING METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
CARPENTERS OR MECHANIC'S LEVELS
Owen E. Hearold, and Harvey G. Bennett, both of P.O. Box
1065, Minden, Nev. 89423
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,333
Int. aj F21V 33/00
U.S. a. 362—101 5 Qaims
1. The method of illuminating a carpenter's or mechanic's
level comprising: placing an illuminating device within the
body of a level; and directing light from the illuminating de-
vice in such manner that it enters the leveling fluid through one
end of a vial containing the fluid and travels through the fluid
to the other end.
socket mounted in a wall of said housing and accessible
from a location externally thereof, said socket having
terminals electrically connected to said additional battery.
4,392,186
KEY WITH LIGHT IN HANDLE
Avi Cziment, 6732 de Vimy Ave., Montreal, Quebec, Canada
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,443
Int. C1.3 F21V 33/00
U.S. Q. 362—116 8 Qaims
4,392,185
EXPLOSION-PROOF AND HREDAMP-PROOF
HEADLIGHT
Karl Grossmann, Hiinxe, and Robert Mullejans, Miilheim, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Friemann & Wolf
GmbH, Duisburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
per No. PCr/DE80/00023, § 371 Date Nov. 14, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01944, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 18, 1980
per Filed Mar. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 197,999
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 14,
1979, 2909%5
Int. a.3 F21L 15/14
U.S. a. 362—105 5 Qaims
1. An explosion-proof and firedamp-proof headlamp, e.g. for
mines or the like, comprising in combination:
a headpiece provided with at least one incandescent lamp;
a connecting cable running to said headpiece and including
conductors connected to said incandescent lamp;
a belt-supported battery housing, said battery housing being
formed with a plurality of compartments;
a lamp battery replaceable in one of said compartments, said
housing being provided with circuitry for connecting the
conductors of said cable to said lamp battery;
an additional battery having an intrinsically safe output
circuit received in another compartment of said housing
and electrically isolated from said circuitry and from said
1. A key handle comprising a housing for securement to a
key shaft, said housing having a base and a cover member
defming an internal chamber therebetween, a key shaft reten-
tion cavity deflned between said base and cover member to
removably retain a connecting end of said key shaft, a switch
member formed as a unitary molded part and retained in said
chamber, said switch member having two spaced apart out-
wardly extending flexible arms to bias a flat circular dry cell
battery to a first position in said chamber with a first flat wall
terminal of said battery lying against a contact element which
is in electrical contact with a first terminal of a lamp retainable
in said chamber to direct light outwardly of said housing in the
direction of said key and further maintaining a circumferential
terminal of said battery away from a further contact element in
contact with a second terminal of said lamp, said further
contact element being said connecting end of said key secured
in said housing and centrally aligned between said flexible
arms, said connecting portion having a contact portion spaced
from said battery and a lamp engaging portion in contact with
said second terminal of said lamp, said switch member having
an actuable portion accessible from the exterior of said housing
to displace said battery in its flat horizontal plane against the
biasing force of said flexible guide means whereby said circum-
ferential terminal of said battery is positioned in electrical
contact with said further contact element to cause an electric
current to flow through said lamp and cause it to light.
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
391
4,392,187
COMPUTER CONTROLLED LIGHTING SYSTEM
HAVING AUTOMATICALLY VARIABLE POSITION,
COLOR, INTENSITY AND BEAM DIVERGENCE
James M. Bomhorst, Duncanville, Tex., assignor to Vari-Lite,
Ltd., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,367
Int. a.3 F21P 3/00
U.S. Q. 362—233 27 Qaims
1. A lighting system comprising:
a plurality of light surces for producing directable beams of
light, each said light source pivotally mounted to a sup-
port member;
at least one dichroic filter pivotally mounted for pivotal
motion in each said light beam for transmitting light of a
preselected color, the angle of incidence of the light on
the dichroic filter being variable to alter the saturation and
hue of light transmitted as the dichroic filter is pivoted;
means for pivoting each said dichroic filter;
pivoting means for pivoting each said light source to a prese-
lected position;
controller means for input of information including unique
coded addresses each representing a different selected one
of said light sources and data representing the preselected
position and color of said selected one of said light
sources;
transmitter means for transmitting the information; ■
a communications channel coupled to said transmitter means
for carrying all of said information; and
receiver means coupled at spaced apart locations to said
communications channel and associated with each of said
light sources for receiving the information and reading the
coded addresses, each said receiver means responsive to
only one of coded addresses for reading the positioning
and color data and activating said pivoting means to pivot
said selected one of said light sources to the preselected
position and further controlling said dichroic filter pivot-
ing means to select the desired color of the light beam.
4,392,188
TROUBLE LIGHT ASSEMBLY POSITIONER
Kenneth E. Norris, 61352 Tombstone Dr., Montrose, Colo.
81401
I FUed Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 354,604
I Int. Q.3 F21V 21/26
U.S. Q. 362—269 13 Qaims
1. A trouble light assembly positioner which comprises:
(a) means for resistably rotating the trouble light assembly
about an axis parallel to its longitudinal axis;
(b) means for attaching the resistably rotating means to the
trouble light assembly such that they rotate as an integral
unit; and
(c) a support member which rotatingly engages the resista-
bly rotating means, with the support member horizontal
rotational axis, the trouble light assembly horizontal longi-
tudinal rotational axis and the resistably rotating means
horizontal rotational axis all parallel, with at least part of
the weight of the trouble light assembly transmitted
through the resistably rotating means to the support mem-
ber, with the support member having at least one flat
bearing surface on its periphery which communicates
with a foreign surface to prevent rotation of the support
member, so that the trouble light assembly may be rotated
relative to the support member to any position about the
horizontal rotational axis of the resistably rotating means,
which allows the desired lighting effect.
4,392,189
FRONT LOADING PROJECriON UNIT WITH
THREADED RESILIENT RETENTION MEMBER
Harold L. Hough, Beverly, and Ronald G. Biaisdell, Saugus,
both of Mass., assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stam-
ford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,469
Int. Q.3 F21V 7/00
U.S. Q. 362—306 , 7 Qaims
1. In a projection unit including a glass reflector having a
front concave reflecting portion and a rear neck p>ortion with
an opening therein, an incandescent lamp including an enve-
lope portion and a sealed end adjacent said envelope portion, a
first retention member secured to said sealed end of said lamp
for retaining said lamp therein and aligning said lamp within
said reflector whereby said envelope portion will be positioned
substantially within said front concave reflecting portion and
said sealed end will be positioned substantially within said
opening within said rear neck portion, said first retention mem-
ber removably positioned within said opening and adapted for
being removed through said front concave reflecting portion
of said reflector, and a second retention member for retaining
said first retention member within said opening of said reflec-
tor and permitting removal thereof through said front concave
reflecting portion, the improvement wherein said second re-
tention member comprises:
a resihent member rotatively positioned on an external sur-
face of said first retention member and capable of being
removed therefrom, said rotative member engaging said
rear neck portion of said reflector to effect said retention
of said first retention member within said opening of said
reflector once said first retention member is fully inserted
within said reflector opening, said first retention member
being of substantially boxlike configuration and having
first and second threaded sections on opposite sides
thereof, said resilient member comprising a substantially
annular spring nut threaded on said threaded sections to
provide said retention.
392
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4^92,190
SHADED LAMP FOR READING AND LIKE PURPOSES
Garthop Upton, 1218 Montego, Arroyo Grand£, Calif. 93420
I FUed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,951
Int. a.3 F21V 17/02
U.S. a. 362—281 8 Qaims
frame, said thin, flat, portion providing a force fit in said
space to thereby stabihze support for said candle assembly
^
M
I'
\
\
1
■* /(J
Ki
^
n 1
■y/i
13
/'
M>_
"l
1'
'ft
-«
^
=^*>f
rr
1. A lamp for reading or similar purpose comprising:
a base for supporting a light source therebelow;
a first shade having a shape to surround said light source;
means on said base for supporting said first shade at the
upper end thereof;
said first shade having a first opening therein for permitting
passage of light therethrough from said light source;
a second shade having a shape to surround said first shade;
said second shade having a second opening for permitting
passage of said light therethrough from said first opening;
said second shade adapted for rotational adjustment about
said first shade whereby to cause said opening to vary the
amount of light passing therethrough;
a first shade element extending across the lower end of one
of the above-mentioned shades;
said first shade element having a third opening therein;
a second shade element extending over said first shade ele-
ment;
said second shade element having a fourth opening therein
for passing light therethrough from said third opening;
and
means supporting said second shade element for movement
relative to said first shade element whereby to cause said
third and fourth openings to vary the amount of light
passing therethrough.
432,191
CANDLE ASSEMBLY INCLUDING A WINDOWSILL
STABILIZER
James S. White, Sr., 5931 Westone Rd., Mechanicsville, Va.
23111, assignor to James Sanford White, Sr. and James San-
ford White, Jr., both of Mechanicsville, Va.
FUed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,619
Int. a.3 F21P 1/02
U.S. a. 362—392 8 Claims
1. A candle assembly comprising:
an elongated candle to be normally held at a lower and
thereof in a generally vertical orientation and having a
light-source means mounted at an upper end thereof for
giving off light;
a base member attached to the lower end of the candle to
form a candle/base composite, said base member having a
bottom surface for resting on a generally flat surface and
thereby supporting said candle in said generally vertical
orientation;
a candle-assembly stabilizer engaging said candle/base com-
posite, said candle-assembly subilizer including a thin fiat
means positioned below said basemember bottom surface
for insertion into a space at an interface of a rear edge of
a windowsill and a lower front face of a sash-type window
when said bottom surface of said base is resting on said
windowsill.
4,392,192
LAMP STANDARD ASSEMBLY
Rufus P. Steadman, Rte. 1, Box 333, Middleton, Tenn. 38052
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,129
Int. a.3 F21V 19/02
U.S. a. 362—418 11 Qaims
1. A lamp standard assembly comprising:
(a) a lamp standard including an elongate lower ground-sup-
ported post having an upper lamp-receiving opening, a
lower access opening and an electrical supply means,
(b) a lamp assembly including a head and a stem, the head
including a lamp-carrying means and the stem including
conductor means, the conductor means being operatively
connected between the lamp carrying means and the
electrical supply means, and
(c) pivot means operatively connecting the lamp-carrying
means and the stem to permit relative axial movement
between the lamp-carrying means and said stem so that
the head can be received through the access opening and
pushed longitudinally up the post by the stem and through
the lamp receiving opening.
4,392,193
RECnFYING AND INVERTING APPARATUS
Frank V. Frola, Monroeville, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 1, 1964, Ser. No. 393,695
Int. a.i H02M 7/757
U.S. a. 363—128 11 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for transferring electrical energy between
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
393
a unidirectional potential circuit and an alternating potential
circuit, a pair of unidirectional potential busses adapted to be
connected to the unidirectional potential circuit, a pair of
alternating potential busses adapted to be connected to the
alternating potential circuit, a transformer having first and
second winding parts, said second winding part having first
and second pairs of connections, means connecting said first
winding part to said alternating potential busses, first and
second separately energized current conducting paths con-
necting said first pair of connections of said second winding
I part to said unidirectional potential busses for transfer of en-
ergy from said unidirectional busses to said alternating poten-
tial busses, said first path when conductive being effective to
conduct current between said unidirectional busses in one
direction and through a first portion of said second winding
part in a first direction to thereby induce a potential of a first
polarity in said first winding part, said second path when con-
ductive being effective to conduct current between said unidi-
rectional busses in said one direction and through said first
portion of said second winding part in a direction opposite to
said first direction to thereby induce a potential of a second
polarity in said first winding part, said second polarity being
opposite to said first polarity, third and fourth separately ener-
gized current conducting paths connecting said second pair of
connections of said second winding part to said unidirectional
potential busses for transfer of energy from said alternating
potential busses to said unidirectional potential busses, said
4,392,194
aRCurr arrangement for controlling a
LARGE NUMBER OF PRINTING ELECTRODES FOR
non-mechanical PRINTING
Hans D. Hinz, Tomesch, and Herbert Lobl, Hamburg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,817
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1980, 3007465
Int. C1.3 GOID 15/06
U.S. a. 346—154
11 Gaims
third path when conductive being operable to conduct current
between said unidirectional busses in a second direction
through a second portion of said second winding part, said
fourth path when conductive being operable to conduct cur-
rent between said unidirectional busses in said second direction
through said second portion of said second winding part, the
turns of said winding parts being arranged such that the ratio of
the turns of said first winding part with respect to the turns of
said second winding part which are located between said first
connections is greater than the ratio of the turns of said first
winding part with respect to the turns of said second winding
part which are located between said second connections, and
means rendering said first path conductive solely for a first
predetermined interval of each first half cycle of current flow
through one of said winding parts and thereafter rendering
conductive for the remainder of each of first half cycles of said
current in said one winding part the one of said third and
fourth paths which connects the said second pair of connec-
tions for the flow of current from the most positive one of said
second pair of connections to the most negative one of said
second pair of connections, said last-named means being opera-
ble to render said second path conductive solely for a second
predetermined interval of each second half cycle of the current
flow through said one winding part and thereafter rendering
conductive for the remainder of each of said second half cycle
of said current in said one winding part the other of said third
and fourth paths.
1. A circuit arrangement for controlling a large number of
printing electrodes for the non-mechanical parallel printing of
character elements or image elements, the printing electrodes
being combined to form groups, each of which has a common
switching point, corresponding printing electrodes of each
group being associated with a common voltage amplifier via
electronic control elements, a selected printing electrode being
controlled by the switching of a group switch and an amplifier,
characterized in that a capacitor (C) is connected between the
common switching point (G) of a group of printing electrodes
and the electrical control element (SK) associated with each
printing electrode (BE), the capacitor (C) associated with an
arbitrary printing electrode (BE) being charged to the analog
voltage generated in the associated amplifier (V) by the closing
of the group switch (S) of the relevant group, said voltage
determining the printing effect of the associated printing elec-
trode (BE), the discharging of the capacitor (C) which takes
place after the opening of the group switch (S) during the
printing time for an image element by the associated printing
electrode (BE) being substantially slower than the preceding
charging, the capacitors (C) being group-wise successively
charged to the voltages which are analogous to the informa-
tion to be printed, the time required for the charging of all
capacitors (C) being less than the printing time for one image
element.
4 392 195
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLEDLY
MOVING A MOVABLE ELEMENT
KiyoshI Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,876
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 3, 1979, 54-128229
Int. a.3 G06F 15/46
U.S. a. 364—167 28 Qaims
1. A method of controlledly moving a movable element in a
machine tool having a drive member drivingly coupled to the
movable element, motor means drivingly coupled to the
drive member, and motor driver circuit means for energizing
the motor means to drive the drive member, thereby moving
the movable element, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) applying a sequence of feed signals from a command
source to said motor driver circuit means, thereby ener-
gizing said motor means to achieve a corresponding se-
quence of desired movements of said movable element;
(b) sensing an actual displacement of said movable element
resulting from the application of each of said feed signals
394
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
to said driver circuit means and said motor means to 4,392,197
provide a first signal as a function of said actual displace- PRINT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR A WORD PROCESSING
ment; SYSTEM
(c) sensing said feed signals to provide a sequence of second Robert A. Couper, Sunnyvale, and Bruce S. Denning, San Jose,
signals each as a function of each of said feed signals; both of Calif., assignors to Pitney Bowes Inc., Stamford,
(d) successively memorizing on a memory medium, said first Conn.
signals corresponding to the sequence of said second Filed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,532
signals; Int. Q.^ G06F 3/023. 3/12. 3/14
U.S. a. 364—200
(e) successively reproducing said first signals memorized on
said memory medium corresponding to the sequence of
said second signals while permitting said feed signals to be
issued in sequence from said command source; and
(0 processing said reproduced first signals and said feed
signals to provide a sequence of revised feed signals and
applying said revised feed signals to said driver circuit
means, thereby achieving the desired movements in se-
quence of said movable element.
■ 4,392,196
MULTI-PROCESSOR TIME ALIGNMENT CONTROL
SYSTEM
Raymond R. Glenn, and David Bell, both of Palm Bay, Fla.,
assignors to Harris Corporation, Melbourne, Fla.
I Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,798
Int. a.3 G06F 1/00
U.S. CI. 364—200 22 Qaims
TIME MCRCMENT CONTROL LINE t6
^ ^2Z
2
S
DiJ
.^fH
3X1
-fS
uses pseuoo-TiME line zo
1. A time alignment control system for aligning a plurality of
processors in a multiprocessor system comprising:
first means for generating a pseudo time reference;
second means, coupled to said first means, for establishing a
respective time window for each processor which time
window is based on the master pseudo time reference
generated by said master pseudo time generating means to
which each processor is coupled;
third means at each processor coupled to said second means
for determining whether the time required for each pro-
cessor to execute an instruction is within said time win-
dow, ahead of said time window, or behind said time
window;
fourth means, at each processor and coupled to said third
means, for idling a processor until the time window
catches up with said processor if said processor is ahead of
the time window; and
fifth means, at each processor and coupled to said third
means, for stopping the master pseudo time generating
means if any processor is behind said time window until
said processor enters said time window.
13 Qaims
1. A word processing system, comprising:
(a) a data entry station for entering textual and command
information into said system;
(b) first memory means coupled to said data entry station for
storing said entered textual information in specified loca-
tions;
(c) second memory means coupled to said data entry station
for storing editing information;
(d) processing means, responsive to said command informa-
tion, coupled to said data entry station and said first and
second memory means for transferring into corresponding
locations of said second memory means particular textual
information stored in said specified locations of said first
memory means when said particular textual information is
deleted in response to said command information entered
by said data entry station; and,
(e) printing the means for printing textual information stored
in said first and said second memory means.
4,392,198
METHOD OF PRODUONG MICROADDRESSES AND A
COMPUTER SYSTEM FOR ACHIEVING THE METHOD
Shigeo Shimazaki, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Company, Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 169,472
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 18, 1979, 54-91334
Int. a.5 G06F 9/32
U.S. Q. 364—200 4 Qaims
1. A method of producing microaddresses in a micropro-
grammed computer having a main memory and central pro-
cessing unit, which computer includes a first means for storing
a plurality of microprograms each including at least one micro-
instruction, a second means for producing a selection control
signal; and a third means for producing microaddresses of said
microprograms in accordance with a machine language in-
struction and with said selection-control signal, said third
means having a plurality of regions each including a plurality
of words each including a microaddress as well as the number
of a region to be used next for producing a subsequent mi-
croaddress, said method comprising the steps of:
July 5, 1983
f
ELECTRICAL
395
(a) fetching a machine language instruction from said main
memory;
(b) initializing said selection-control signal;
(c) selecting a microaddress from said third means in accor-
dance with the combination of said machine language
instruction and said selection control signal which as-
sumes an initial value, said microaddress being fed to said
first means for reading out and executing a corresponding
microprogram;
(d) simultaneously with step (c) reading information on the
2
number of a region to be used next from said third means
to change said selection-control signal;
(e) selecting a new microaddress from said third means in
accordance with the combination of said machine lan-
guage instruction %nd the changed selection control sig-
nal, said newly produced microaddress being fed to said
first means for reading out and executing a corresponding
microprogram; and
(0 repeating said steps of (d) to (e) until the microaddresses
of microprograms designated by said machine language
instruction are produced.
r
controllers of said second set being connectable to all of
said user lines; and
a second passive periphery switch for interconnecting all of
the device controllers of said second set to all of said
microcomputers.
4,392,200
CACHED MULTIPROCESSOR SYSTEM WITH
PIPELINE TIMING
Jega A. Arulpragasam, Stow, Mass.; Robert A. Giggi, Merri-
mack, N.H.; Richard F. Lary, Colorado Springs, Colo,, and
Daniel T. Sullivan, Bolton, Mass., assignors to Digital Equip-
ment Corporation, Maynard, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 116,083, Jan. 28, 1980, Pat. No.
4,345,309. This application Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,129
Int. CI.' G06F 9/10
U.S. Q. 364—200 13 Qaims
4,392,199
FAULT-TOLERANT SYSTEM EMPLOYING
I MULTI-MICROCOMPUTERS USING
TWO-OUT-OF-THREE MAJORITY DECISION
Ernst Schmitter; Paul Birzele; Klaus Buchmann; Gerhard Geitz;
Bemhard Will, and Wolfgang Beifuss, all of Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft,
Berlin ^ Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,908 |
Int. Q.3 G06F 11/18
U.S. Q. 364—200 6 Qaims
1. A fault-tolerant system incorporating a plurality of mi-
crocomputers which can mutually substitute for each other
and in which the principle of two-out-of-three decision is
employed for control of the task distribution for the microcom-
puters, comprising:
a partially meshed ring interconnecting said microcomput-
ers;
a plurality of data exchange paths, including data exchange
paths between each two adjacent microcomputers in said
ring and/or between any microcomputer in said ring and
its next-but-one microcomputer;
three device controllers being connected between said ring
and a plurality of periphery lines, whereby data transmis-
sion errors may be resolved by a two-out-of-three major-
ity decision, each of said device controllers being con-
nected to each of said periphery lines;
a passive periphery switch for connecting all of said device
controllers to all of said microcomputers;
a second set of three device controllers being connected
between a plurality of user lines and said ring, each of the
1. A data processing system that provides for the transfer of
information among devices in the data processing system
wherein the devices issue commands which include data sig-
nals and control information, the control information including
code signals that specify the type of information transfer opera-
tion that is to be performed, device identification signals that
identify the device involved in the transfer of information, and
address signals that specify a location in the device to which or
from which the information is to be transferred, said data
processing system comprising:
A. random access memory means (28) for storing informa-
tion in a plurality of addressable storage locations therein,
B. common control means (10) including
i. pipeline resource means comprising a control section
(FIG. 8A) and a dau section (FIG. 8B) for processing
396
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
commands in an ordered pipeline sequence, said re-
source means comprising
a. control input means (352) in the control section for
receiving control information and data input means
(306) in the data section for receiving data signals,
b. associative memory means (20) that includes data
store means (20B) having addressable storage loca-
tions for storing copies of information contained in
said random access memory means, and address tag
store means (20A) for storing memory addresses that
sp)ecify the addressable storage locations in said ran-
dom access memory means that are associated with
the information contained in said dtta store means,
c. tag compare means (162) for determining whether
memory data requested by a command is resident in
said associative memory means,
d. queuing means (176) for receiving commands that
seek to access said random access memory means,
and
e. control output means (163) in the control section for
transmitting control information therefrom and data
output means (163) in the data section for transmit-
ting data signals therefrom,
ii. memory interface means interconnecting the random
access memory means and the common control means
comprising
a. command receiving means (196) for receiving com-
mands that read or write information in said random
access memory means,
b. memory return means (65) for storing information
that is read from or written into said random access
memory means, and
c. memory control means (208) connected to said com-
mand receiving means and said memory return means
for controlling the transfer of information among said
random access memory means (184), said command
receiving means, and said memory return means (65),
and
iii. timing and control means (26) for controlling the oper-
ation of said common control means comprising
a. pipeline timing means for sequencing commands
through successive stages of said pipeline resource
means and being further responsive to said tag com-
pare means for enabling a transfer of data requested
by a command from said associative memory means
to said control output means when data requested by
said command is resident in the associative memory
means, and
b. queuing control means (158) responsive to said tag
compare means for entering a command in said queu-
ing means (176) when data requested by said com-
mand is not resident in said associative memory
means, said queuing control means being further
responsive to the control information in said com-
mand for entering it in said queuing means (176)
when the command seeks to write information in said
random access memory means.
ing a memory request address number identifying the first of
the pair of data words requested, a cache memory comprising;
memory means for storing a selected subset of said data
words stored in said system memory and for supplying the
requested data words to the requesting system elements in
the place of the system memory if the requested data
words are stored in said memory means, said memory
means including an odd memory module for storing said
data words identified by said odd address numbers and an
even memory module for separately storing said data
words identified by said even address numbers;
means for receiving said data words and said associated
addresses from said system memory;
cache data input multiplexer means coupled to said receiving
means for supplying said received data words to said odd
memory module and to said even memory module;
cache address driver means receiving said addresses associ-
ated with said received data words and for controlling
said cache data input multiplexer means to supply to said
odd memory module said transferred data words having
associated odd address numbers and to supply to said even
memory module said transferred data words having asso-
ciated even address numbers;
an odd directory memory for storing said address numbers
identifying said data words stored in said odd memory
module;
432,201
DIAGNOSTIC SUBSYSTEM FOR A CACHE MEMORY
Richard P. Brown, Acton; George J. Barlow, Tewksbury, and
Arthur Peters, Sudbury, all of Mass., assignors to Honeywell
Information Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,855
Int. a.5 G06F li/00. 13/06
U.S. a. 364—200 12 Qaims
1. In a data processing system including a system memory
for addressably storing a plurality of data words identified by
a like plurality of associated odd and even address numbers,
each of the address numbers including a segment portion and
an offset portion, and wherein system elements generate mem-
ory requests for the transfer of a pair of data words identified
by successive address numbers, each memory request includ-
LOWMM
■nil
•UTinEUI
701
LDIIOIC IDTIKK
"»' ^£«
^^
IVUT ■
i»ti :m
LfKll
Elf ■ UK
SINE
iton
Mil STOK
>m wnis
nj
UHli
EHElun
STME
^
lEKli
OOI MTI
am
tiEXtt JlMCJU
MTSIUI
im*ii
nniK
lEm 1 MT<
MTnir Ml
, [It! o»
CiOOOII tmHH
!L[73r
I lEIEli
^ mm'
Mil
Ml
»0
imiK LiOOIIK
^TD
lOCilMS
mwuf
MUlI
an even directory memory for storing said address numbers
identifying said data words stored in said even memory
module;
means coupled to said odd directory memory and said even
directory memory for receiving each of said address num-
bers supplied by said system elements and for comparing
said memory request address number and said next succes-
sive address number to said odd address numbers stored in
said odd directory memory and said even address numbers
stored in said even directory memory to determine if said
data words associated with said memory request address
number and said next successive address number are
stored in said odd or even memory modules;
hit detector circuit means coupled to said receiving and
determining means for generating a full hit signal if both
said memory request and said next successive address
numbers are determined to be stored in said odd and even
dir^tory memories, a partial hit signal if only one of said
memory request and said next successive address numbers
are determined to be stored in said odd and even directory
memories, and a no hit signal if neither said memory
request nor said next successive address numbers is deter-
mined to be stored in said odd and even directory memo-
ries; and
July 5, 19W
ELECTRICAL
397
diagnostic control means for enabling the testing of opera-
tion of said cache memory, said diagnostic control means
including means connected to said data input multiplexer
for inhibiting the storing of a said data word in said odd
memory module or said even memory module and hit
detector override means for controlling the generation of
said full hit signal, said partial hit signal, and said no hit
signal by said hit detector circuit means even when said
memory request or said next successive address number is
determined to be stored in said odd and even directory
memories.
4,392,202
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANTI-SKID BRAKE
CONTROL OF AN AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE
Toshiro Matsuda, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Company, Limited, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,313
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54-129374
Int. C1.3 B60T 8/08; G05D 13/02
U.S. a. 364—426 15 Qaims
20
30
FRICTION
COEFFICIENT
DETERMINING
IMEANS
I MAXIMUW FRICTION
J COEFFICIENT
" DISCRIMINATING
40
, ^
WHEEL
r p.m
SENSOR
:>•
TARGET WHEEL
r p m
DETERMINING
MEANS
dV»0
12. A brake control system for an automotive vehicle for
controlling application and release of brake pressure to a wheel
cylinder to prevent a vehicle from skidding, including:
a first means for detecting wheel r.p.m. and for sequentially
generating in a plurality of operating cycles a first signal
indicative of the detected wheel r.p.m.
a second means for determining a coefficient of friction
between a tire tread and a road surface and for generating
a second signal indicative of the determined coefficient of
friction,
a third means for determining a target wheel r.p.m. and for
generating a third signal indicative of the determined
target wheel r.p.m.,
a fourth means for controlling application and release of
brake pressure to the wheel cylinder operable to release
the brake pressure when the value of said first signal drops
to be equal to or less than the value of said third signal and
a fifth means for detecting presence of a peak of said second
signal in each cycle of skid control operation and for
generating a fourth signal;
said third means being responsive to said fourth signal to
hold a signal value of said first signal in each cycle of skid
control operation for determining a deceleration coeffici-
ent of the wheel r.p.m. based on the held values of said
first signal generated in the current cycle and in an imme-
diately preceding cycle of skid control operation and
further based on an interval between occurrences of said
fourth signal, for determining a ramp signal during the
next cycle of skid control indicative of deceleration of the
target wheel r.p.m. in the next cycle of skid control opera-
. tion and based on the determined deceleration coefficient,
and for determining the target wheel r.p.m. by subtracting
the value of said ramp signal from a value of said first
signal obtained in response to said fourth signal.
13. In an anti-skid brake control system for an automotive
vehicle for controlling application and release of brake pres-
sure to a wheel cylinder to prevent a vehicle from skidding,
which system includes a first means for detecting wheel r.p.m.
and for sequentially generating a first signal indicative of the
detected wheel r.p.m., a second means for determining a fric-
tion coefficient between a tire tread and a road surface and for
generating a second signal indicative of the determined friction
coefficient, a third means for determining a target wheel r.p.m.
and for generating a third signal indicative of the determined
target wheel r.p.m. and a fourth means for controlling applica-
tion and release of brake pressure to the wheel cylinder opera-
ble to release the brake pressure when the value of said first
signal drops to be equal to or less than the value of said third
signal,
a method for determining the target wheel r.p.m. comprising
in combination the steps of:
determining a friction coefficient between a tire tread and a
road surface;
discriminating a peak of said friction coefficient in each
cycle of skid control of>eration and generating a peak
signal responsive to detection of said peak;
holding a value of said first signal at the time of detection of
said peak of said friction coefficient;
measuring an interval between occurrences of said peak
signal;
determining a variation of first signal values in each said
interval;
dividing said variation by the length of said interval to obtain
a deceleration coefficient;
determining a value of a ramp signal based on the obtained
deceleration coefficient; and
subtracting said value of said ramp signal from the value of
said first signal at the time of detecting said peak of said
friction coefficient.
4,392,203
AIRCRAFT COORDINATED TURN WITH LAGGED
ROLL RATE
William C. Fischer, Monroe; Don L. Adams, Fairfield; David J.
Verzella, Guilford, and Stuart C. Wright, Milford, all of
Conn., assignors to United Technologies Corporation, Hart-
ford, Conn.
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,273
Int. a.3 G06F 15/50; G06G ^/78
U.S. a. 364—434 2 Claims
f-,
.T.,..„i
tioLL
0 L
IMTt.ll
BOLL CTtij
-• TBI-' .A.
1 m U. <-' L
^-^^LOr
1. A yaw trim channel of an aircraft automatic fiight control
system that positions the yaw-axis-controlling aerodynamic
surfaces of the aircraft, comprising:
rate means for providing a roll rate signal indicative of roll
rate of the aircraft;
acceleration means for providing a lateral acceleration signal
indicative of lateral acceleration of the aircraft;
yaw trim actuator means responsive to a command input
signal thereto for positioning said aerodynamic surfaces;
and
signal processing means responsive to said rate means and
said acceleration means for providing a yaw command
signal to said actuator means in response to a proportional
function of said lateral acceleration signal, an integral
function of said lateral acceleration signal, and a propor-
tional function of s^d roll rate signal;
characterized by said signal processing means comprising
398
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
means for providing said yaw command signal in response
to 9 lagged function of said roll rate signal.
4,392,205
ELECTRONIC DATA CONTROL IN A NUMBERING
MACHINE
Takakazu Makizuka, Nara, and Sunao Katoh, Yamatokoriyama,
both of Japan, assignors to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka,
Japan
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,986
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 24, 1980, 55-7933;
Jan. 31, 1980, 55-11823; Feb. 6, 1980, 55-13892; Feb. 6, 1980,
55-13893; Feb. 6, 1980, 55-13894 ,
Int. a.3 G06F 5/72
U.S. a. 364—518 15 Qaims
4,392,204
LUMBER MARKING SYSTEM
David F. Prim, 4503 Mt. View, Yakima, Wash. 98901, and Carl
D. Greiff, 1207 N. 23rd Ave., Yakima, Wash. 98902
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,705
Int. a.^G01N 27/22
U.S. a. 364—478 13 Qaims
fg?i8~i
;^^
.^^U- EICOOER; h4 IB ^ ^ ; y'
SKP - '- ^ ' ►r--, i
UP —
PO*cB 3?
'ONTQOt SIGNAL GENERAIOfi ■ ^
Mr:
1 ' "-i '■A.Ji
4-
n
mm
l:
1-
^-
mm- -!'_ ffl^ -.U " '■ — -I
-J^^^V"*'
1. A lumber marking system for accumulating information
about pieces of lumber and marking the lumber with a related
code, said lumber marking system comprising:
conveying means for conveying pieces of lumber on a piece-
by-piece basis;
an operator's console, located adjacent to said conveyor
means, for an operator, observing pieces of lumber con-
veyed by said conveyor means, to generate operator data
signals related to said observations;
dimension means, associated with said conveying means, for
determining the dimensions of pieces of lumber conveyed
by said conveying means and producing related dimension
data signals, said dimension means including length means
for determining the length of said pieces of lumber moved
by said conveying means and producing related length
data signals, said length means including a curtain of
length switches, said dimension means also including
width means for determining the width of said pieces of
lumber moved by said conveyor means and producing
related width data signals, said length and width data
signals forming said dimension data signals;
accumulating means coupled to said operator's console and
said dimension means for accumulating said operator data
signals and said dimension data signals for each piece of
lumber as said pieces of lumber are moved by said con-
veyor means, collating said operator data signals and said
dimension data signals for each piece of lumber and pro-
ducing lumber marking control signals in accordance
• ; therewith; and
marking means, located adjacent said conveying means,
downstream of said operator's console and said dimension
means, and coupled to said accumulating means, for re-
ceiving said lumber marking control signals and marking
said pieces of lumber with a code in accordance with said
lumber marking control signals.
1. A numbering machine for printing a desired sequence of
numbers on a plurality of items comprising:
a digital control system including key input means including
numeral keys and function keys;
a control signal generator for developing control signals in
response to actuation of said function keys;
a print data memory for storing print data in accordance
with said control signals developed by said control signal
generator;
a printer unit for printing a sequence of numbers on a plural-
ity of items;
transfer means for transferring said print data stored in said
print data memory to said printer unit;
print completion detection means for developing a print
completion signal upon completion of each printing oper-
ation performed by said printer unit; and
calculation means for varying said print data stored in said
print data memory and transferred to said printer unit by
a preselected skip number in response to said print com-
pletion signal.
4,392,206
PRINTER
Graham Neathway, Ottawa; Allan Cramp, Stittsville, and Albert
Hum, Nepean, all of Canada, assignors to Mitel Corporation,
Ontario, Canada
FUed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,586
Claims priority, application Canada, Oct. 31, 1979, 338908
Int Q.3 G06F 77/iO
U.S. Q. 364-900 H Q««M
1. A telephone line monitoring system for connection to a
telephone line in which a telephone set is connected compris-
ing-
(a) receiver means for connection to the telephone line, for
receiving and translating called subscriber identifying
dialed digit signals which may be carried by the telephone
line into binary signals,
(b) sensing means connected to the telephone line for sensing
and translating the on or off hook status of the telephone
line into binary signals.
July 5. 1983
ELECTRICAL
399
(c) data bus means for receiving and carrying said binary
signals from the sensing means and the receiver means,
(d) a central processing unit connected to the data bus means
for receiving said binary signal, said central processing
unit having address terminals,
(e) first random access memory means connected to the data
bus means and to said address terminals for storing said
binary signals appearing on the data bus,
(0 a printer control circuit connected to the data bus means
for operating a printer in response to predetermined forms
of binary signals which may appear on the data bus means,
(g) an alphanumeric display connected to the data bus means
for displaying alphanumeric symbols in response to at
least a portion of said predetermined forms of binary
signals which correspond to a predetermined portion of a
complete telephone number,
(h) translating means connected to the data bus means and to
said address terminals comprising an interconnection
matrix for translating binary signals appearing on the data
bus from the receiver means and sensing means into sig-
3:=^>r
PRINTER
CONTROL
8
I PRINTER!-
0=
rceivEpf^ 1/1
R£C£
s
J'line L« -N
CIRCUIT hr—~V,
nals for controlling the central processing unit for causing
it to responsively generate said predetermined forms of
binary signals for operating the printer control circuit and
the display in accordance with the form of its interconnec-
tion matrix, and applying said predetermined forms of
binary signals to the data bus means,
(i) said printer control circuit including means for causing
the printer to print alphanumeric symbols across a line
corresponding to the time and/or said status and/or said
dialed digits as said dialed digit and status signals are
received by the receiver means and the sensing means
from the telephone line, upon receipt of said predeter-
mined forms of said binary signals, wherein the printed
alphanumeric symbols are not visible until the paper is
advanced, and
(j) further means for causing the alphanumeric display to
display said alphanumeric symbols as said dialed digit
signals are received by the receiver means upon receipt of
said predetermined forms of said binary signals wherein
the displaying of the alphanumeric symbols by the alpha-
numeric display is prior to display thereof by the printer.
4,392,207
CARD READER-DATA LINK PROCESSOR
Ronald J. Dockal, San Qemente, Calif., assignor to Burroughs
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,430
Int. aj G06F 3/04
U.S. Q. 364—900 9 Qaims
1. A peripheral controller for interfacing a main host com-
puter to a card/reader mechanism which reads information
from punched data cards for transmittal to said host computer,
said peripheral controller comprising:
(a) common control circuit means including:
(al) control storage means for storing micro-code word
operators, each of said word operators being separately
addressable and being selected by control data transmit-
ted via address multiplexor means from a peripheral
dependent circuit means;
(a2) said address multiplexor means to generate a current
address for said control storage means to select a first
one of said micro-code word operators, said multiplexor
means receiving control data from said peripheral de-
pendent circuit means;
(a3) connection means from said address multiplexor to a
stack register to generate the address of the next forth-
coming micro-code word operator after completion of a
subroutine, said stack register providing an incremented
address to said address multiplexor;
(a4) said stack register means for temporarily holding the
current address of said first one of said micro-code
word operators during subroutine operation and func-
tioning to supply an incremented address to said address
multiplexor means, after completion of said subroutine;
(a5) latching register means connected to the output of
said control storage means to temporarily store and to
convey mirco-code operators to said peripheral depen-
dent circuit means for execution;
(a6) first connection means carrying output data from a
RAM buffer memory storage means and transmitting
through said peripheral dependent circuit means via a
data communication channel to said main host com-
puter;
"'^
Mir i-fmfi/rf/i
'f.
^\
sa:
''y^
■z^
(a?) second connection means connected to said latching
register means for communicating information to said
peripheral dependent circuit means;
(a8) said RAM buffer memory storage means for storing
informational data received from said card/reader
mechanism and for storing control data from said main
host computer, said data being received via said operi-
pheral dependent circuit means, said RAM buffer mem-
ory storage means including:
(i) a first dedicated portion of said memory storage
means for storing raw untranslated data;
(ii) a second dedicated portion of said memory storage
means for storing translated data which has been
formatted by a translation means according to com-
mands from said host computer;
(b) said peripheral dependent circuit means including:
(bl) said data communication channel including:
(i) an output bus connection means from said RAM
buffer storage means to a first receiving means;
(ii) said first receiving means providing an input to a
data multiplexor;
(iii) said data multiplexor functioning to transfer data to
a data latch register;
(iv) said data latch register for temporarily storing data
for output to a first driver means;
(v) said first driver means for transmitting data to a
host-connection means;
400
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
4,392,209
RANDOMLY ACCESSIBLE MEMORY DISPLAY
David E. DeBar, Manassas, Va., assignor to IBM Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,555
Int. a.3 GllC 13/08
U.S. a. 365—110 2 Qaims
1 si/ST>ia-)/4 «i
(vi) said host connection means providing connection to predetermined location and transferring the information
said host computer; to the diagnostic apparatus.
(b2) op-decoder means receiving control data from said
host computer, via said data communication channel,
and functioning to provide output signals to said ad-
dress multiplexor for addressing said control storage
means which functions to send control signals to said
peripheral dependent circuit means;
(b3) peripheral-receiving means for receiving informa-
tional card data from said card/reader mechanism for
transfer to said data multiplexor for subsequent trans-
mittal to said first dedicated portion of said RAM buffer
memory;
(b4) said output bus connection means including:
a first and second output bus for transmittal of data from
said RAM buffer memory storage means, said second
output bus for transferring said RAM output data to
said translation means, and said first output bus for
transferring said RAM output data to said host com-
puter via said data communication channel;
(b5) RAM address register means receiving address data
from said control storage means, and functioning to
adress memory locations in said RAM buffer;
(b6) said translation means for receiving raw untranslated
data from said first dedicated portion of said RAM
I buffer memory storage means and for translating said
raw data into a selected type of translated format for
transfer to said second portion of said RAM buffer j ^ randomly accessible memory display including an elec-
memory storage means for subsequent transmittal to troluminescent panel laminate having a first layer including a
F>i OUT COCIC
I«(t JO -\,,
'\.,
'•ma Locic
luieo ,,
'iiit« '\
.!« •-
~^.
1-,
I?
,11
X
c^
^Iv-^
^<4
^"
\.
^^.
~^i.
V
JSv 'ij_ _«ll,
-^
J.'
CEIl
J!
■lOlIUDE
SHECIOI 12
t susrAii
•j/i II
said host computer.
4,392,208
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM AND DIAGNOSTIC UNIT
James E. Burrows, Stoke on Trent, and Ivan R. Greenaway,
Brierley Hill, both of England, assignors to International juxtaposed X and Y electrodes exceeds a sustaining voltage,
plurality of horizontal X electrodes and a second layer includ-
ing a plurality of vertical Y electrodes, between said first and
second layers there being a layer of electroluminescent mate-
rial, and a layer of photoresistive material, said panel emitting
light at a cell location when the potential difference between
Computers Limited, London, England
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,864
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 19, 1980,
8009306
Int. a.3 G06F 9/06. 11/04
U.S. a. 364—900
COMMUmCATION
1. A data processing system compnsmg: a mam processor
system including a central processor having a writable control
store, the operation of the central processor being controlled
by a microprogram held in the control store; and diagnostic
apparatus connected to receive signals indicative of occur-
rences in the central processor, the diagnostic apparatus com-
prising:
(a) first means coupled to the central processor for produc-
ing a first signal whenever the central processor accesses
a predetermined location in the control store;
(b) second means coupled to the central processor for pro-
ducing a second signal whenever the central processor
writes to the control store;
(c) logic means responsive to the first and second signals for
producing an output signal whenever both the first and
second signals are
each said cell forming a memory element with a first terminal
series-connected with a Y-sustaining AC voltage and a Y
electrode, and a second terminal series-connected with an
X-sustaining AC voltage and an X electrode, the sum of the
peak voltage for said X-sustaining AC voltage and said Y-sus-
7 Oaims taining AC voltage being greater than said sustaining voltage,
wherein the improvement comprises:
a high frequency sinusoidal voltage generator selectively
connected to one of said Y electrodes for providing a
sinusoidal interrogation signal;
a phase detector having a first input connected to said high
frequency sinusoidal voltage generator and a second input
selectively connected to a corresponding one of said X
electrodes;
said phase detector indicating an alteration in the phase of
said high frequency sinusoidal interrogation signal after
transmission through a selected one of said cells in re-
sponse to the altered conductivity of the corresponding
portion of said photoresistive layer due to the light-emit-
ting state of said selected cell;
whereby the stored light-emitting state of a plurality of said
cells on said electroluminescent panel can be accessed.
4,392,210
ONE TRANSISTOR-ONE CAPACITOR MEMORY CELL
Tsiu C. Chan, CarroUton, Tex., assignor to Mostek Corporation,
CarroUton, Tex.
FUed Aug. 28, 1978, Ser. No. 937,272
Int a.3 GllC 11/24
U.S. a. 365—149 5 Claims
1. In an integrated circuit memory of the type including an
, „^.._ _. pr^m."indiiiti'ng"that "the "central array of memory cells fabricated on a semiconductor substrate,
processor has made a write access to said predetermined each cell including a gate-controlled switch and a charge
location; and storage capacitor coupled to said switch, wherein one plate of
(d) means coupled to the control store and responsive to said each charge storage capacitor is formed by a conductive re-
output signal for reading out information held in said gion within said substrate, the improvement comprising a
July 5, 198:
ELECTRICAL
401
sneet ov
conductive sheet overlying the cells of the array and insulated
with respect ^p each conductive substrate region, said conduc-
/■30
tive sheet defining a common plate for each capacitor in the
array.
1. A semiconductor memory device comprising:
a main memory cell matrix;
a redundancy memory cell array which is incorporated with
said main memory cell matrix;
a first decoder means for selecting one memory cell array
parallel to said redundancy memory cell array within said
I main memory cell matrix, in accordance with a first ad-
dress information;
a second decoder means for selecting said redundancy mem-
ory cell array when said first address information corre-
sponds to a memory cell array having a defective cell
- therein;
a switching means for stopping the transmission of a clock
signal for operating said first decoder means when said
first address information corresponds to said memory cell
array having a defective cell therein and said second
decoder means selects said redundancy memory cell ar-
ray; and
a third decoder means for selecting one memory cell array
perpendicular to said redundancy memory cell array,
within said main memory cell matrix and said redundancy
memory cell array, in accordance with a second address
information.
4,392,212
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE WITH
DECODER FOR CHIP SELECnON/WRTTE IN
Kiyoshi Miyasaka, Yokohama, and Mitsuo Higuchi, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Not. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,131
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 12, 1979, 54-146346
Int. a.^ GllC 8/00
U.S. a. 365—230 12 Oaims
4,392,211
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY DEVICE TECHNICAL
nELD
Masao Nakano, Kawasaki; Fumio Baba, Yokohama; Tomio
Nakano, Kawasaki; Yoshihiro Takemae, Yokohama, and
Hirohiko Mochizuki, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu
Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
per No. PCr/JP80/00143, § 371 Date Feb. 25, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 20, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00027, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 8, 1981
PCT Filed Jun. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 243,927
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 25, 1979, 54-79819
Int. a.3 GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 365—200 7 Claims
1. A semiconductor memory device for receiving a plurality
of external selection signals in which a semiconductor memory
chip of said device is selected in accordance with a predeter-
mined combination of the external selection signals, said device
comprising:
a semiconductor memory chip; and
a decoder circuit for receiving said external selection signals
and provided in said semiconductor memory device, said
decoder circuit selecting said semiconductor memory
chip in accordance with a logic corresponding to the
predetermined combination of said external selection
signals, said logic capable of being changed by the user of
said semiconductor memory device.
4,392,213
CURRENT IMPULSE METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
TESTING GEOPHONE STRINGS
Edward J. Kiing, Calgary, Canada, and Eugene D. Bednard,
Houston, Tex., assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston,
Tex.
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 168,956
Int. a.3 GOIV 1/16
U.S. CI. 367—13 6 Qaims
,W],
li
SHOT eUCAK
TO AMPLIFIED oecopoep
11
X II
13
CUXK I - VARUkBLE TlhtER
: — I I I I
SfSfr I- -.—»—, — >■
STASr , -. —
3
CONTItOL
ciocuirs (.
Ill
^ Jg^[ ^ imn] wm\ ' •'■ I ''S^'
n
TO
OtOPHOW
• TO AMPilfiEfi
aeconen
5. An apparatus for obtaining data from which the time
equivalent of the velocity response of a string of geophones
and their associated acquisition system may be determined,
said apparatus comprising:
402
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
an adjustable current source, said source being adjusted to
lift said geophones to a position intermediate their stops;
a clock circuit, said clock circuit supplying a constant fre-
quency signal;
a variable timer, said timer being responsive to said clock to
supply a plurality of timed output signals;
a first switch means responsive to one of the signals from
said timer for coupling said current source to said geo-
phones, said one signal having a duration sufficiently long
to permit said geophones to reach a steady state condition;
a second switch means responsive to a second signal from
said timer for coupling said acquisition system to said
geophones after said current source is decoupled from said
geophones; and
a third switch means responsive to a third signal from said
timer for grounding said acquisition system prior to de-
coupling said current source and removing said ground
prior to said geophones being coupled to said acquisition
system.
4,392^15
PEST CONTROL APPARATUS
Lester B. Hall, Kenmore, N.Y., assignor to Gary Lester Hall,
Kenmore, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 840,536, Oct. 11, 1977, Pat. No.
4,178,578. This application Mar. 17, 1978, Ser. No. 887,601
Int. a? H04B 1/02
U.S. a. 367—139 9 Qaims
<>5 46
i,7 A8
4,392,214
SOUND-MONITORING DEVICE FOR AN INDUSTRIAL
INSTALLATION
Jean Marini, Marly le Roi, and Bernard Audenard, Orgeval,
both of France, assignors to Framatome, Courbevoie, France
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,226
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 12, 1980, 80 03090
Int. a.5 GOIS 5/18; G21C 17/00
U.S. a. 367—127 1 Oaim
1. Sound monitoring device for detecting possible impacts of
stray bodies in an industrial installation, using sound sensors for
waves emitted on impacts of said stray bodies and comprising
(a) first and second acoustic sensors arranged adjacent to the
wall of said installation at two different points the interval
between which is to be monitored; and
(b) a measuring and alarm circuit to which said sensors are
connected, comprising
(i) means for measuring the separation in time between the
reception of the sound waves at said first and second
sensors, respectively; and
(ii) means for comparing said separation with at at least
two sets of two predetermined values corresponding to
the ends of at least two monitoring zones; and
(iii) alarm means which is triggered if said separation in
time falls between two predetermined values corre-
' spending to one of said monitoring zones.
1. Apparatus for generating and radiating ultrasonic sound
waves for the control of pests comprising:
(a) an elongated housing having two ends;
(b) sound generating means carried by said housing adjacent
one end thereof; said sound generating means comprising
transducer means having a natural frequency of oscillation
for providing sound waves when driven by an electrical
signal, said sound waves being in a frequency range nor-
mally inaudible to humans and intolerable by pests such as
rodents and the like, said sound generating means includ-
ing driver means operatively connected to said transducer
means for applying to said transducer means an electrical
signal having a frequency different from the natural fre-
quency of said transducer means thereby causing said
transducer means to provide said output sound waves in a
varying pattern of frequencies with amplitude peaking;
(c) said sound generating means being positioned to direct
said output sound waves outwardly away from said one
end of said housing;
(d) an electrical connector fixed to the other end of said
housing and integral with said housing adapted to be
inserted manually in a standard electrical outlet receptacle
commonly found in buildings and the like, said connector
comprising first and second portions of electrically con-
ductive material on said end of said housing and separated
by insulative material, there being mechanical engage-
ment between said connector and the outlet receptacle to
mechanically support said housing in the outlet;
(e) first and second electrical conductor means for connect-
ing said first and second portions, respectively, of said
connector electrically to said sound generating means; and
(0 said connector when inserted in an outlet providing for
supply of electric current to said sound generating means
and simultaneously providing for mechanical support for
said housing.
4,392,216
INTEGRATED aRCUTT FOR TIMEPIECE
Masuo Tsiyi, Suwa, Japan, assignor to Kabushlki Kaisha Suwa
Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,747
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1979, 54-173312;
Sep. 17, 1980, 55-128794
Int. a.3 G04B 25/00. 1/00
U.S. a. 368—71 6 Claims
1. A circuit for a hybrid timepiece, said timepiece compris-
ing:
timekeeping circuit means including oscillator means for
generating a high frequency standard signal, divider
means for dividing down said high frequency standard
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
403
signal to a lower frequency timekeeping signal, controller
means for shaping signals from said divider means;
an external power supply for powering a portion of the
circuits of said hybrid timepiece;
booster circuit means operating from said power supply for
outputting a boosted voltage at a level exceeding the
voltage of said power supply, another portion of circuits
of said timepiece operating on said boosted voltage;
a liquid crystal display and means for driving said liquid
crystal display, said means for driving said liquid crystal
display operating on said boosted voltage in response to
said lower frequency timekeeping signal;
3
I 4,392,217
DEVICE FOR CONTROLLING CORRECTION
OPERATIONS OF A TIME DISPLAY DEVICE
Nir^ Kumar, Indialantic, Fla., and Marc Mouthon, Cornaux,
Switzerland, assignors to Ebauches Electroniques, S.A., Swit-
zerland
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,459
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 18, 1980,
1291/80
Int. a.3 G04C 9/00
188 3 Oaims
1291/80
U.S. a. 368—1
5> 1 >^ 30
advance a first hour and then to the fast speed for the following
hours.
a step motor driving an analog display;
integrated circuit means for providing driving current pulses
to said step motor in response to said shaped signals from
said divider means, said integrated circuit means for pro-
viding driving current pulses to said step motor including
at least one CMOS transistor pair, the source and drain
terminals of said at least one CMOS transistor pair operat-
ing on said power supply voltage, the gates of said at least
one CMOS transistor pair being driven by signals at said
boosted voltage level.
1. A device for controlling correction operations of a time
display device showing hours and minutes comprising a con-
trol button and means for distinguishing a short depression
from a long depression, depending on the period of actuation
of the control button, means for selecting in the case of a short
depression a minutes correction mode in which the display
advances by one minute for each depression and, in the case of
a long depression, an hours correction mode in which the
display advances by complete hours as long as the depressions
last, and means for defining two different advance speeds, a
slower speed and a faster speed, in the hours correction mode,
and means for passing automatically firstly to the slow speed to
4,392,218
APPARATUS FOR IDENTIFYING A DICTATE STATION
BY PROVIDING AN AUTOMATICALLY GENERATED
SEQUENCE OF SIGNALS AND A MANUALLY ENTERED
SEQUENCE OF SIGNALS
Luther C. Plunkett, Jr., Atlanta, Ga., assignor to Lanier Busi-
ness Products, Inc., Atlanta, Ga.
Division of Ser. No. 352, Jan. 2, 1979, Pat. No. 4,254,307. This
application Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 1%,461
Int. a.3 GllB 19/02. 19/16
U.S. a. 369—29 3 Qaims
I t(IT»0*ltO I 412
tCOOCft
AUTOMAT
ENCOtHR
E
M00« I — -4*
1. In a dictation recording system including a dictate station,
and a recorder selectively operable by said dictate station for
the recording of dictation; the improvement of
a first signal means at said dictate station for automatically
generating a predetermined sequence of first signals com-
prising a first predetermined number of said first signals;
a second signal means at said dictate station selectively
operable by an operator for generating a second predeter-
mined number of second signals as a second sequence of
second signals;
identification means associated with said dictate station for
providing a sequence of identification signals in response
to said predetermined sequence of said first signals and
said second sequence of said second signals; said sequence
of identification signals comprising a third predetermined
number of said identification signals, said third predeter-
mined number being equal to the sum of said first and
second predetermined numbers;
switching means at said recorder responsive to said sequence
of identification signals for providing a transport enable
signal in response to receipt of said third predetermined
number of said identification signals; and
operating means at said recorder responsive to said transport
enable signal for rendering said recorder operable by said
dictate station.
4,392,219
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR RECORDING AND
REPRODUaNG TRACKING INFORMATION
Norio Yokozawa, Fuchu; Wasao Takasugi, Higasfaiyamato; Seyi
Yonezawa, Hachioji, and Kiichi Ueyanagi, Kokubunji, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 43,749, May 30, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,593
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 9, 1978, 53-68793
Int. Q.J GllB 21/10
U.S. Q. 369—44 10 Claims
1. A method for recording and reproducing an information
train in which synchronizing signals are arrayed at predeter-
mined time intervals between the information to be repro-
duced, comprising the steps of recording said information train
in an information track on a recording medium; while record-
ing, wobbling said information track at a frequency which is an
404
y
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
integral number of times the recurrence frequency of said
synchronizing signals and is different in phase by 90° from a
harmonic component of said synchronizing signals; reading
_rL
_rL_
fi --
ated by said pseudo noise code sequence generating means to
produce a second multiplied signal, transmission information
signal supplying means for supplying said transmission infor-
mation signal to said second multiplying means as said input
signal, and means responsive to a transmission spread spectrum
signal -for producing said second spread spectrum signal,
wherein the improvement comprises combining means for
combining said first and said second multiplied signals into said
transmission spread spectrum signal with said low frequency
component rejected from said first multiplied signal.
out by means of read-out means said information train re-
corded in said information track; and controlling the position
of said read-out means relative to said information track on the
basis of the information train read out.
4,392,220
MODEM TO BE COUPLED TO A DIRECTIONAL
[ TRANSMISSION LINE OF AN SS MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION NETWORK
Botaro Hirosaki, and Satoshi Hasegawa, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,163
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 30, 1980, 55-72352;
Jun. 3, 1980, 55-74468; Jun. 3, 1980, 55-74469; Jun. 3, 1980,
55-74470; Nov. 21, 1980, 55-164344; Feb. 3, 1981, 56-14884; Feb.
3, 1981, 56-14885
Int. a.3 H03K n/Ol; H04J 11/00. 13/00
U.S. a. 370—18 26 Oaims
4,392,221
TIME DIVISION MULTIPLEX MODULE FOR USE IN
DIGITAL SWITCHING NETWORK
Truman H. Hesketh, Maidenhead, England, assignor to Plessey
Overseas Limited, Ilford, England
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,367
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 8, 1979,
7931231
Int. a? H04Q 11/04
U.S. a. 370—54 7 Qaims
'Q/P7
«10
72 /t\. I 2*?PN CODE
V I 5t0 CEN
n^RlMI NATION
Lib
D
(> 61
1. A transmitter-receiver for use in a spread spectrum multi-
plex communication network comprising a directional trans-
mission line and a plurality of modems coupled to said trans-
mission line, said transmitter-receiver being comprised by each
of said modems to be responsive to a first spread spectrum
signal received from said transmission line and comprising a
spread spectrum signal into which a first of a plurality of differ-
ent pseudo noise code sequences is modulated by a particular
information signal for reproducing said particular information
signal and to be responsive to a transmission information signal
for supplying said transmission line with a second spread spec-
trum signal comprising a spread spectrum signal into which a
second of said pseudo noise code sequences is modulated by
said transmission information signal, said transmitter-receiver
including reception spread spectrum signal producing means
responsive to said first spread spectrum signal for producing a
reception spread spectrum signal, pseudo noise code sequence
generating means for generating at least one of said different
pseudo noise code sequences as said first and said second
pseudo noise code sequences, first multiplying means for multi-
plying said reception spread spectrum signal by the first
pseudo noise code sequence generated by said pseudo noise
code sequence generating means to produce a first multiplied
signal, low frequency component extracting means for extract-
ing a low frequency component from said first multiplied
signal to produce a low frequency signal, means responsive to
said low frequency signal for producing said particular infor-
mation signal, second multiplying means for multiplying an
input signal by the second pseudo noise code sequence gener-
1. A time-division multiplex switching module for use in a
multi-stage digital network, the module comprising a plurality
of inlet multiplex paths and a pluraUty of outlet multiplex
paths, a plurality of register means, one for each multiplex
input path respectively, a code detector means for detecting
the presence of a mark code on the inlet multiplex paths, and
code generator means for generating either an idle code or a
mark code, in which, when a mark code is detected by the
code detector on a particular inlet multiplex path, a mark
present bit is set in the register means appropriate to the partic-
ular inlet path, whereupon the code generator generates mark
codes which are then transmitted on all free outlets of the
module.
4,392,222
COMBINED aRCUIT AND PACKET SWITCHED
SYSTEM
Sumitoshi Ando, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kokusai Denshin
Denwa Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,205
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 28, 1980, 55-7744
Int. a.^ H04J 3/12
U.S. a. 370—60 3 Qaims
1. A combined circuit and packet switching system coupled
with a plurality of terminals and trunk lines for connecting
each of said terminals to one of the trunk lines with efficient
use of the trunk lines, each of said terminals generating a rela-
tively large amount of information continuously in a forward
direction from the terminal to the switching system and a
relatively small amount of control information relating to said
relatively large amount of information in a backward direction
from the switching system to
(a) a fixed circuit is assigned in one of said trunk lines for -^
forward information generated by said terminal through a
circuit exchange technique; and
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
405
(b) a transmission channel for transmitting said control infor-
mation is provided by packet switching technique
T*C 5*1 TCh for
"FiT^tns
TiMf SWi'CH FOf<
^3-* DOWMWIRD CHANfCLS ^
'tit
wherein plural calls in the backward direction share a
single trunk line simultaneously.
II 4,392,223
DUAL RAIL TIME AND CONTROL UNIT FOR A
T-S-T-DIGITAL SWITCHING SYSTEM
Nathaniel Simmons; Stig Magnusson, both of Phoenix; Sergio E.
Puccini, Scottsdale, all of Ariz.; Donald W. McLaughlin,
Naperville, and David J. Stelte, Lombard, both of III., assign-
ors to GTE Automatic Electric Laboratories, Inc., Northlake,
III.
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,464
Int. CV H04J 3/00
U.S. Q. 370—63 10 Qaims
-t>H>r?t>
-E^HH>*
64.64
SRflCF
T p|^.fg bJ^^c>^fC>]^^^^;i^3-^>*
64 "64
SPaCC
1. In a time-space-time switching system including first and
a second buses, each bus transmitting a plurality of PCM voice
samples to a switching network, said buses connected between
said network and subscriber interface equipment, said switch-
ing network comprising:
first and second space switching means;
first and second originating time switching means, each of
said originating time switching means being operated to
switch said PCM voice samples from said subscriber inter-
face equipment, said first and second originating time
switching means being connected respectively between
said first and second space switching means and said sub-
scriber interface equipment via said first and second buses;
each of said originating time switching means including:
first and second memory means connected to each of said
first and second buses, said first and said second memory
means being interconnected so that said first and said
second memory means are written into simultaneously in
sequential time slots with said PCM samples transmitted
via said buses;
said first and said second memory means further being oper-
ated so that said PCM samples transmitted on said first bus
may be switched to said second space switching means for
subsequent retransmission and alternatively said PCM
samples transmitted on said second bus may be switched
to said first space switching means for subsequent retrans-
mission;
first and second terminating time switching means being
connected respectively between said first and said second
space switching means and said subscriber interface equip-
ment, said first and second terminating time switching
means respectively operated to switch said PCM voice
samples from said first and second space switching means
to said subscriber interface equipment for transmission to
a telephone subscriber;
each of said terminating time switching means including:
first and second memory means connected between each of
said first and second space switching means and said sub-
scriber interface equipment, said first and said second
memory means being interconnected so that said first and
said second memory means are written into simulta-
neously in corresponding time slots for storing said PCM
samples transmitted from said space switching means;
a plurality of buses connected between each of said memory
means of said terminatmg time switching means and said
subscriber interface equipment for transmitting said PCM
samples to said subscriber interface equipment;
gating means connected respectively between said first and
second space switching means and interconnected to each
of said memory means of said first and second terminating
time switching means, each of said gating means being
operated in response to said memory means of said termi-
nating time switching means to transmit said PCM sam-
ples from said first and second space switching means to
said first and second memory means for each of said plu-
rality of PCM samples; and
said first and said second memory means further being capa-
ble of being operated to switch said PCM samples from
said first space switching means through said second
terminating time switching means to said telephone sub-
scriber and alternatively being capable of being operated
to switch said PCM samples from said second space
switching means through said first terminating time
switching means to said telephone subscriber.
4,392,224
SPEECH PATH SWITCHING SYSTEM IN
TIME-DIVISIONAL ELECTRONIC TELEPHONE
SWITCHING SYSTEM
Hiromichi Mori, Kawasaki; Jun Matsumoto, Tama, and
Masanobu Fujioka, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Kokusai
Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,454
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 21, 1979, 54-105520
Int. Q.' H04Q 11/04
U.S. Q. 370—67 1 Claim
1. A speech path switching system in a time divisional elec-
tronic telephone switching system for full availability switch-
ing between an incoming channel in a plurality of incoming
highways and an outgoing channel in a plurality of outgoing
highways comprising:
a plurality of speech path memories each coupled with a
related incoming highway for temporarily storing the
telephone signals to be switched;
each of said sjjeech path memories having a related input
counter for designating the address of a speech path mem-
ory, said input counter being incremented in synchronism
with the frame phase of the corresponding incoming high-
way, the received information on an incoming highway
being stored in an address designated by the instantaneous
content of the input counter in the corresponding speech
path memory;
a plurality of holding memories, each operable to designate
the read out address of a speech path memory to effec-
tively connect an incoming channel to a selected outgoing
channel;
a holding memory being provided for each related outgoing
highway, each holding memory having a corresponding
1032 O.GJ-t-14
406
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
output counter for designating the read out address of the
holding memory;
35-1
36-1
.31-1
^«
IhOLQINGL. PUTPUT U
riMEMORvf" 1 jCOUNTERf- — i (65-1
-,1. CLOCK
GENERilOR
55-1-56-J.-I1
SPEFCH
i PATM
VJ I MEMORY
repeater to a termination, said signal-amplifying telephone
carrier repeater comprising first means responsive only to a
first preselected one of said first carrier signals following its
transmission over said line for producing a first d.c. control
signal whose magnitude varies as a function of the level of just
said first preselected one of said first carrier signals, second
means responsive only to a second preselected one of said first
carrier signals following its transmission over said line for
producing a second d.c. control signal whose magnitude varies
as a function of the level of just said second preselected one of
said first carrier signals, said first and second preselected ones
of the first carrier signals having different frequencies, and
further means under the control of said d.c. control signals for
automatically adjusting the level of each of said second carrier
signals as a function of the cable gauge of said transmission line
and the length of said transmission line between said source
and said repeater to compensate for both the length and the
cable gauge of said transmission line.
4,392,226
MULTIPLE SOURCE CLOCK ENCODED
COMMUNICATIONS ERROR DETECTION CIRCUIT
Donald M. Cook, Poway, Calif., assignor to NCR Corporation,
Dayton, Ohio
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,118
Int. a.^ G06F 11/00
U.S. a. 371—61 6 Claims
the circulation phase of each output counter being indepen-
dently adjustable, the frame phase of each outgoing high-
way being independent from the other outgoing highways
by adjusting each output counter independently.
4,392,225
TELEPHONE CARRIER SYSTEM REPEATER AND
POWER SUPPLY
Donald W. Wortman, Central Islip, N.Y., assignor to Til Corpo-
ration, Lindenhurst, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,725
Int. a.3 H04J 1/10
U.S. a. 370—75 7 Qaims
1. A circuit for detecting an error in a clock signal recovered
from a digital data signal comprising:
(a) means for detecting a transition in the voltage level of the
clock signal, said means comprising first switch means
clocked at a clock rate equal to that of said recovered
clock signal to provide a transition signal indicating
whether said transition has occurred;
(b) gating means to combine an output signal from the
clocked switch means with selected parts of said data
signal; and
(c) second switch means clocked at said clock rate and
connected to the output of the gating means for sensing
the output signal therefrom to provide an error signal if no
transition has occurred within a predetermined time per-
iod.
.m^-ih'
^i^^JLsth^M ;'?^.'i%ll3^
^^S]i^3 Mli^l^4
1. A signal-amplifying telephone carrier repeater adapted to
be connected to a two-conductor transmission line in a plural
channel amplitude modulated telephone carrier system in
which said transmission line has a preselected cable gauge and
is connected to transmit a plurality of first frequency division
multiplexed carrier signals in one direction from a signal
source to the telephone carrier repeater and to transmit a
plurality of second frequency division multiplexed carrier
signals in the opposite direction from the telephone carrier
4 392 227
TERRACED SUBSTRATE SEMICONDUCTOR LASER
Kunio Itoh, Uji; Takashi Sugino; Masaru Wada, both of Takat-
suki, and Hirokazu Shimizu, Toyonaka, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma,
Japan
Filed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,821
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1980, 55-2777;
Feb 5, 1980, 55-13159; Feb. 19, 1980, 55-20256; Mar. 14, 1980,
55-32981; Mar. 19, 1980, 55-35292; Mar. 19, 1980, 55-35293;
Mar. 19, 1980, 55-35296; May 16, 1980, 55-65555
Int. a.' HOIS 3/19
U.S. a. 372-46 15 Oaims
1. In a semiconductor laser:
a terraced-shaped semiconductor substrate havmg a thmner
part and a thicker part with a step inbetween,
a first clad layer which is formed on said substrate and has a
lower part formed on said thinner part, an upper part
formed on said thicker part and a central part formed to
July 5, 198;
ELECTRICAL
407
connect ^id lower part and said upper part, having an
oblique upper face with respect to the principal face of
said substrate and having a larger thickness than those of
said lower part and said upper part,
an active layer formed on said first clad layer and having a
horizontal lower part formed on said lower part of said
first clad layer, a horizontal upper part formed on said
upper part of said first clad layer and an oblique central
region as a lasing region formed on said central part of
II 221 22
said first clad layer and connecting said horizontal lower
part and said horizontal upper part therewith with a lower
bending and an upper bending inbetween, and
a second clad layer formed on said active layer, character-
ized in that
a current injection region of a stripe-shaped pattern is
formed penetrating said second clad layer to contact the
latter at a part above said oblique central region of said
active layer, and to form an ohmic junction with a width
smaller than a width of said oblique central region.
4,392,228
TERRACED SUBSTRATE SEMICONDUCTOR LASER
Takako Okabe, Kusatsu; Kunio Itoh, Uji, and Takashi Sugino,
Takatsuki, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,773
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1980, 55-65554
Int. Q.3 HOIS 3/19
U.S. Q. 372—46
6
.7
5
side faces of said stripe-shaped opening, in a manner to
reach and contact said uppermost layer (12),
a first electrode layer formed to contact to said conduction
layer in said through-opening and
a second electrode formed on the bottom face of said ter-
raced semiconductor substrate.
4,392,229
RING LASER WITH PLASMA STARTER
James W. Hostetler, Thousand Oaks, Calif., assignor to Litton
Systems, Inc., Beverly Hills, Calif.
Filed Dec. IS, 1980, Ser. No. 216,543
Int. Q.3 HOIS 3/08
U.S. Q. 372—94 7 Qaims
10 Qaims
1. In a semiconductor laser:
a terraced semiconductor substrate (9) which has a thicker
part and a thinner part with a step inbetween,
semiconductor layers (10, 11, 12) including an active layer
(11) formed on said terraced semiconductor substrate (9)
in a manner to have an inclined part (111) ranging from
the position above said step to the part shifted to the side
of said thinner part,
an overriding layer (13) having the opposite conductivity
type to that of the uppermost layer (12) of said semicon-
ductor layers (10, 11, 12) and formed on said uppermost
layer (12),
characterized by further comprising:
a last layer (14) having the same conductivity type to that of
the overriding layer (13) formed on the latter layer (13),
said last layer (14) having a stripe-shaped through-opening
(141) at the position which is a shifted position from the
part immediately above said inclined part (111), thereby
exposing a surface of said overriding layer (13) at the
bottom of the through-opening (141),
a conduction region (15) formed at least on the bottom and
1. In combination:
a ring laser, including a resonant cavity enclosing laser gas, at
least one cathode and at least one anode attached to said ring
laser for energizing gain sections of said ring laser when a
voltage is connected between said cathodes and anodes; and
an illumination source illuminating the surfaces of at least one
of said cathodes such that the intensity and spectrum of the
illumination is sufficient to produce photoemission from at
least one of said cathodes.
4,392,230
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE MANUFACTURE
OF SILICON BY CRUCIBLE-FREE ZONE MELTING
Wolfgang Keller, Munich; Hans-Christian Grassmann, Igels-
dorf, and Karl Schmidt, Eriangen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin &
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,752
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 21,
1979, 2938348
Int. Q.3 BOIJ 7/10
U.S. Q. 373—139 7 Qaims
1. Method of producing silicon by crucible-free zone melting
a substantially vertically held silicon rod with which a melting
zone, produced by an induction heating coil which, together
with an oscillating-circuit coil connected in series therewith
and determining the oscillating-circuit frequency and having a
high inductance in comparison with that of the induction
heating coil heating up the rod material, forms the inductive
component of a heating parallel oscillating circuit fed by a
high-frequency generator and has a heating circuit capacitor
408
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
connected in parallel with the heating coil, is passed through
the silicon rod in direction of the rod axis, which comprises
dimensioning the component resonance circuit formed by the
induction heating coil and the heating-circuit capacitor to a
frequency deviating by less than a factor of 2 from the fre-
quency of the high-frequency generator.
4,392^1
SPREAD SPECTRUM FH-MFSK DECODER
Paul S. Henry, Holmdel, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone Labo-
ratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 164,160, Jun. 30, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,472
Int. a.^ H03K 13/01
U.S. a. 375— 80 6aaims
:>,"-
]'■■■•■ "J
nate samples of said I and Q-channel signals in said means
for storing to produce a first summation signal;
means for correlating said digital sequence with the remain-
ing alternate samples in said means for storing to produce
a second summation signal; and
means for combining said first and said second summation
signals to produce a correlation output signal.
4. A method of decoding one of one or more concurrently
received L-length frequency-hopped, Q-level frequency shift
keyed input signals, each input signal being originally formed
by modulating a particular user's L-length frequency-hopping
address sequence with the particular user's message signal
encoded as one of Q possible frequencies, where Q is an integer
characterized in that
the method comprises the steps of:
(a) mixing the frequencies of the particular user's frequency-
hopping address sequence which are in the same band of
Q frequencies as the input signal with the frequencies in
the received input signal which are equal to or above the
corresponding address sequence frequencies in each L-
length sequence for generating a resultant signal compris-
ing difference frequencies within Q baseband frequency
levels;
(b) concurrent with step (a) mixing the frequencies of the
particular user's frequency-hopping address sequence
which are in the next lower band of Q frequencies than the
input signal with the frequencies in the received input
signal for generating difference frequencies within the Q
baseband frequency levels of step (a); and
(c) combining the resultant signals generated in steps (a) and
(b) for generating a demodulated and decoded output
signal.
4,392,233
METHOD OF nLTERING ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVES
AND DUAL CHANNEL AUDIO CODE HLTER
THEREFOR
Ernest M. Laughner, 101 Henry Way, Jeannette, Pa. 15644
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,332
Int. a.3 H04B 15/00
U.S. a. 375—93 10 Claims
4,392,232
SIMPLinED TRANSVERSAL CORRELATOR FOR MSK
AND MSK RELATED WAVEFORMS
Carl F. Andren, Indiatiantic, and William H. Mosley, Jr., St.
Petersburg, both of Fla., assignors to B-Systems, Inc., Dallas,
Tex.
FUed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,490
Int. a.3 H04L 27/06. 27/22: G06F 15/34
U.S. a. 375—86 14 Oalms
1. A transversal correlator for demodulating a phase shift
keyed (PSK) signal, comprising:
means for producing quadrature I -channel and Q-channel
signals derived from said PSK signal;
means for sampling said I-channel and said Q-channel signals
to produce sequential samples;
means for storing a plurality of said samples for each of said
I and Q-channel signals;
means for storing a plurality of bits comprising a selected
digital code sequence;
means for correlating said digital code sequence with alter-
^
4]?tpl
I
5fy
2
•ViAr-l
- + ^
^
*1»
Fkrgt
T 1^
~1 A/a'
,7
1. The method of filtering an original electromagnetic con-
tinuous wave which is broken up into discrete lengths to form
intelligence comprising the steps of, converting the original
broken-up electromagnetic wave into corresponding discrete
lengths of a D.C. voltage signal through the use of a phase-
locked loop circuit, iltilizing said D.C. voltage signal to acti-
vate an audio oscillator and thereby generating a new broken-
up audio wave corresponding to the original wave being fil-
tered, audibly producing said new wave with speaker means,
and simultaneously audibly producing said original wave with
speaker means.
4,392,234
PCM SIGNAL INTERFACE APPARATUS
Rikio Maruta, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,923
Claims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1980, 55-64016
Int. a.3 H04L 7 /OS
U.S. a. 375—118 5 Claims
1. A PCM signal interface apparatus comprising:
a buffer memory into which PCM signals may be asynchro-
nously written and from which said PCM signals may be
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
409
asynchronously read wherein said buffer memory receives
writing clock signals and reading clock signals;
means coupled to said buffer memory for inserting frame
marker s to said PCM signal s upon writing said PCM
signal s into said buffer memory;
means, coupled to said buffer memory for determining if said
frame markers are contained in output signal s from said
buffer memory upon the occurrance of an external read
frame position designating pulse;
means coupled to said buffer memory for resetting the con-
tents of said buffer memory and temporarily stopping
writing clock signals and reading clock signals to said
TRANSMISSION LINE
CODE CONVERTEd 1
RECEPTION PCM
TIMING CKT I
13
BUFFER
CKTl
14
SYSTEM TIMING
CKT«
buffer memory when at least one of said frame markers is
not delivered out at a predetermined time;
means coupled to said buffer memory for resuming said
writing clock signals to said buffer memory upon receipt
of a write frame position designating pulse; and
means coupled to said buffer memory for resuming said
reading clock signals to said buffer memory upon receipt
of said external read frame position designating pulse at a
predetermined time lapse after said resumption of said
writing clock signals;
whereby the data written into said buffer memory can be
read out at a desired frame phase and rate without dupli-
cating and missing data.
<-
1
^ J f ™ ^
tion with respect to saio anode ring, so that after passing
through said focussing and bending means said electron
beam effectively exhibits an elongate cross section having
substantially parallel sides and rounded ends, prior to
impinging upon said anode ring, the long axis of said
elongate cross section pointing toward an axis perpendicu-
lar to the plane containing said anode ring and passing
through the center of said ring; and
a plurality of x-ray detectors configured in a substantially
annular array so as to receive x-ray radiation produced at
said anode ring.
4,392,236
SYSTEM AND METHOD OF MIGRATORY ANIMAL
IDENTinCATION BY FLUORESCENCE
SPECTROSCOPY OF ELEMENT CODED IMPLANTED
TAGS, AND TAGS USED THEREIN
Donald R. Sandstrom, Pullman, and Parrel W. Lytle, Seattle,
both of Wash., assignors to Guardsman Chemicals, Inc.,
Grand Rapids, Mich.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,820
Int. a.3 AOIK 61/00; GOIN 23/22; G06K 7/12
U.S. a. 378—045 52 Claims
'z:^f^
r:
»
' ' 4,392,235
ELECTRONICALLY SCANNED X-RAY TOMOGRAPHY
SYSTEM
John M. Houston, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 66,932, Aug. 16, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,184
Int. a.3 G03B 41/16
U.S. a. 378—10 6 Claims
4lt
— O
c
er
1. The method of identifying the code of an identification tag
implanted for a time in the body of a migratory animal,
wherein the tag code comprises one or more coding elements
including one or more naturally occurring, non-radioactive
higher atomic numbered chemical elements in stable solid form
and each present in the amount of at least about 15 micro-
grams, said method comprising:
(a) irradiating the tag with an X-ray beam at an energy level
higher than the absorption edge of any coding element(s)
in the tag and at an intensity, disregarding absorptive
losses in the animal tissue surrounding the tag, of at least
about 3x lO'O photons/cm^-sec;
(b) masking all but the tag and the animal tissue immediately
surrounding the tag from irradiation by the X-ray beam;
and
(c) determining the extent of fluorescent X-ray radiation
emitted by any coding element(s) in the tag and from such
determination identifying the coding element(s) present in
the tag and thus the code thereof.
1. An x-ray apparatus for use in computed tomography
comprising:
an electrode gun producing an electron beam having sub-
stantially circular cross section; |
an arcuate anode ring;
means to focus and bend said electron beam so that said
beam impinges on said anode ring at selectable points
along its circumference;
an evacuable housing containing said electron gun and said
anode ring;
electromagnetic deflection means disposed adjacent to said
electron beam path, said deflection means being disposed
along at least a portion of said electron beam path between
said anode ring and said focussing and bending means to
oscil atorilly deflect said electron beam in a radial direc-
4,392,237
SCANNING X-RAY INSPECTION SYSTEM
John M. Houston, Schenectody, N.Y., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,161
Int. a? GOIN 23/00
U.S. a. 378—51 10 Claims
1. An x-ray scanning system for generating signals corre-
sponding to x-ray absorption levels in an object comprising:
means for translationally moving said object;
x-ray means for subjecting said object to a substantially flat,
fan-shaped x-ray beam, said beam being in a plane which
does not contain the direction of motion of said object;
410
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
a detector, said detector having a substantially planar power
electrode and a plurality of substantially planar signal
electrodes spaced apart from and parallel to said power
electrode, said signal electrodes being configured so as to
lie in a plane substantially parallel to said power electrode,
said power electrode and said signal electrodes being
parallel to the plane of said fan-shaped x-ray beam and
positioned so that said beam passes between said power
electrode and said signal electrodes, all of said electrodes
being disposed in an x-ray transmissive housing containing
a gaseous detecting medium;
means to impress a voltage on said power electrode relative
to said signal electrodes;
means to sense current passing through each of said signal
electrodes.
4,392,238
ROTARY ANODE FOR AN X-RAY TUBE AND METHOD
OF MANUFACTURING SUCH AN ANODE
Bernhard Lersmacher, Aachen, and Hans Lydtin, Stolberg, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 167,950
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 18,
1979, 2928993
Int. a.3 HOIJ 35/10
U.S. a. 378—144 7 Qaims
<^
6' 1
(b) cutting through the coating at an angle exposing ends of
the crystallographic layers to form a face; and
(c) providing an X-ray generating metallic layer on said face.
4,392,239
X-RAY DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM FOR ANGIOGRAPHIC
X-RAY PHOTOGRAPHIC SERIES
Achim Wilkeos, Langensendelbach-Braeuningshof, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin &
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 150,601, May 16, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,709
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 22,
1979, 2925274
Int. aj GOIK 1/04
U.S. a. 378—146 5 Qaims
» • c
1. An x-ray diagnostic system for the preparation of angio-
graphic x-ray photographic series over an entire area to be
detected corresponding to the course of a contrast medium in
a vessel system, said x-ray diagnostic system comprising a
patient support (1), an x-ray tube (3) having a diaphragm instal-
lation (7) including diaphragm plates for the limitation of the
x-ray beam irradiating the patient, and a cassette changer for
x-ray film cassettes, characterized in that the cassette changer
(4) is a cassette changer having film support means of a total
longitudinal exttnt corresponding to the entire area to be
detected, and that the diaphragm installation (7) comprises a
fixed diaphragm (8) which limits the maximum size of the x-ray
beam (6) to a beam configuration covering said entire area to
be detected and covering said total longitudinal extent of said
cassette changer while the x-ray tube is in a fixed position,
individually adjustable diaphragm plates (9, 10) disposed on
opposed sides of said x-ray beam for defining therebetween a
resultant x-ray beam for irradiating the patient, and means (11,
12) for effecting the individual, independent adjustment of said
diaphragm plates (9, 10) for selectively setting the dimension of
the resultant x-ray beam in the longitudinal direction of the
patient support and for directing the resultant x-ray beam
toward selective resp)ective segments of said total longitudinal
extent of said cassette changer which segments lie in respective
different directions from the x-ray tube requiring correspond-
ing changes in the longitudinal axes of the respective resultant
x-ray beams while said x-ray tube remains in said fixed |X)sition.
1. A rotary anode for an X-ray tube including:
(a) a carbon body;
(b) a pyrolytic graphite coating on the body's surface, hav-
ing a plurality of crystallographic layers extending paral-
lel to said surface, said coating being cut through at an
angle exposing ends of the crystallographic layers to form
a face; and
(c) an X-ray generating metallic layer on said face.
6. A method of manufacturing a rotary anode for an X-ray
tube comprising:
(a) depositing a pyrolytic graphite coating on the surface of
a carbon anode body, said coating having a plurality of
crystallographic layers extending parallel to said surface;
4,392,240
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR SAMPLING RADIATION
FROM X-RAY MACHINES FOR ANALYSIS
Richard Tremblay, Les Saules, and Jean Tremblay, Ste-Foy,
both of Canada, assignors to Ministere Des Affaires Sociales,
Quebec, Canada
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,190
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00; H05G 1/00; GOIT 1/11
U.S. a. 378—207 11 Claims
9. A method of sampling a radiation field emitted from an
X-ray machine for the determination of certain operational
characteristics of said machine, said method comprising:
(i) disposing a cassette container having one or more ther-
JULY 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
411
mo-luminescent crystals supported therein under a respec-
tive filter, each filter having different densities from one
another, said container also having an X-ray sensitive film
supported under a further plurality of filters also having
different densities from one another, '
/n
means operatively coupled for providing power for the
system.
AU
4,392,242
MOBILE COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Tomokazu Kai, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,937
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1980, 55-30127
Int. a.3 H04B 1/00
U.S. a. 455—33
3 Gaims
"if 29 Za ^r-- 27
(ii) operating said machine to produce an X-ray beam over a
predetermined area of said container and for a predeter-
mined exposure time, and
(iii) analyzing said thermo-luminescent crystals and film to
determine said operational characteristics of said machine.
»-«.
■3'
IB
4,392,241
DIGITAL INTERFACE SYSTEM
Dennis P. Hurst, San Diego, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
.Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 258,987
I Int. a.3 H04K 1/00
U.S. a. 455—26
setmrns
0--Q j
"^
'\
a—
1. In a mobile communication system wherein a plurality of
radio zones, each including one radio base station, the base
stations of all radio zones being controlled by a control center
which controls a paging signal and an origination signal of a
3 Claims mobile unit, are arranged to form a service area, and each radio
zone is provided with at least one mobile access channel and a
single mobile paging channel assigned to a radio frequency
common to all radio zones, thus establishing speech channels
for the mobile units, the improvement wherein said at least one
-4«] I \ ' mobile access channel of one radio zone is assigned to a radio
_,-] ^^^ ^ frequency which is different from that assigned to adjacent
' — - — ' radio zones, said control center is provided with means for
}^ „^rt T controlling an origination signal of said mobile unit for select-
_^ ^ I ^ I " ing at least one channel among available channels allocated to
j1^ T a radio base station associated with said mobile unit, circuit
switching means operatively connected to said origination
signal control means for establishing said mobile access chan-
nel and means for broadcasting a channel number of said estab-
lished mobile access channel to all radio zones through said
mobile paging channel; and wherein each mobile is provided
1. A system for interfacing unclassified information and ^^^j^ ^ receiver for receiving said channel number on the mo-
classified information to and from a pair of discrete radio links ^^^^ access channel, means for updating and storing said re-
comprising: ceived channel number and means for sequentially receiving
means for generating and receiving classified and unclassi- ^^^^^ waves transmitted through said stored access channel
fied tactical data; and for comparing intensities of said received radio waves
means for generating and receiving classified and unclassi- from each of said radio zones with each other to select a mobile
fied voice coded data; access channel adapted to send out said origination signal of
means coupled to the tactical data generating and receiving said mobile unit,
means and the voice coded data generating and receiving
SU8MAR1NC SATELITE
lNr3(W»TlC■^
CXCHAt»Ct SrtTEM
means for encrypting information sent therefrom and for
decrypting information sent thereto;
first means coupled to the encrypting and decrypting means,
the tactical data generating and receiving means and the
voice coded data generating and receiving means for
transmitting and receiving information to satellites in the
high frequency spectrum;
means coupled to the encrypting and decrypting means, the
tactical data generating and receiving means and the voice jj.S. Q. 455—74
4,392,243
TRANSCEIVER HAVING INTERPHONE SYSTEM
Shiro Ohhashi; Fumiyoshi Ubusawa; Shoji Iwasaki, and Tet-
suyuki Manaka, all of Toda, Japan, assignors to Clarion Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,570
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 9, 1980, 55-45680
Int. a.3 H04B 1/40
coded data generating and receiving means for transmit-
ting and receiving information in the ultra-high frequency
spectrum;
means for connecting either the tactical data generating and
receiving means or the voice coded data generating and
receiving means to the encrypting and decrypting means;
and
3 Claims
1. A transceiver having an interphone system, comprising:
two microphones;
two audio transducers;
two manually operable switches;
radio transmitter means;
radio receiver means connected to said transducers;
an interphone circuit;
412
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
first and second switch means each responsive to a respec-
tive one of said manually operable switches for selectively
connecting a respective one of said microphones to one of
said interphone circuit and said radio transmitter means;
and
^ TWWSCEiVEB ^
Tii»its*irm» r . . I
MO Rectivw I ' !f^ y-
TRAMSurmd
«H0 MCXIVCR
S«lk
first and second muting means operatively coupling said
interphone circuit to respective ones of said transducers
and responsive to signals output to said transducers by
said radio receiver means for muting output signals from
said interphone circuit.
4,392,244
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION AND RECEPTION
CONTROL SYSTEM
Naomi Yoshizawa, and Akira Terashima, both of Hatano, Japan,
assignors to Pilot Majinenhitsu Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Division of Ser. No. 144,518, Apr. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,323,999.
This application Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,375
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, 55-24105
Int. C1.3 H04B 1/44
U.S. a. 455—79 4 Qaims
/ X
1. In an automatic transmission and reception control system
for a transmitting and receiving device including a vibration
pick-up type microphone for picking up bone-conducted voice
signals, a speaker for hearing received voice sounds, and means
for switching over between transmission and reception; the
improvement comprising means coupled to said microphone
for producing control signals from impact vibrations except
voice signals uttered by a microphone wearer himself, trans-
mitted through his bones and picked up by the microphone,
and that said switching means comprises means responsive to
said signals for alternately switching between transmission and
reception according to the input order in which control signals
are applied.
4,392,245
RADIO TRANSMITTER HAVING AN OUTPUT POWER
CONTROL aRCUIT
Masataka Mitama; Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,477 '
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 10, 1980, 55-1542[U]
Int. Q.3 H04B 7/005
U.S. Q. 455—115 10 Qaims
1. A radio transmitter having a forward power output con-
trol circuit comprising power amplifier means, directional
coupler means coupled to said power amplifier means, detector
means for detecting the forward power output of said direc-
tional coupler means, generator means for generating a differ-
ence voltage responsive to a difference between an output
voltage of said detector means and a reference voltage, power
regulator means for varying the output power for said power
amplifier means in response to the output of said generator
ATT^MijATOR POAE& AVP
*— r««03 I ^^r^^^==^_; ^ comity
6' '■+ ^T" — ^^'^•-^
Htr VOLT -^ j'-' , , ff .- '
■ 5
means, and first means between said directional coupler means
and said detector means for varying the power applied from
said power amplifier means via said directional coupler to said
detector means in response to a control signal, thereby extend-
ing a controllable range for output power of said radio trans-
mitter.
4,392,246
BROADCAST WAVE RECEIVING SYSTEM
Takeharu Niioka, and Isao Kobayashi, both of Yokohama, Ja-
pan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 296,247
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 1, 1980, 55-120952;
Sep. 1, 1980, 55-120955; Sep. 1, 1980, 55-120956; Sep. 1, 1980,
55-120957; Sep. 1, 1980, 55-120958
Int. Q.J H04B 1/26
U.S. Q. 455—158 6 Qaims
35a 35C 3Se
|F|M|-Fr:oiKJyjo| 34
- M ; DftivtsT.
— ' CKT r
T
"FREO
DIV
"OUTPUT
I CKT
K]
1. A broadcast wave receiving system comprising:
a tuner device;
means for storing a plurality of alphanumeric characters;
means for sequentially reading said characters from said
storing means;
means for specifying a received channel call sign presetting
mode;
means for producing a desired call sign data by successively
selecting desired ones of said characters read out by said
reading means;
call sign data storage means for successively storing call sign
data from said call sign data producing means and re-
ceived broadcast wave frequency data corresponding to
said call sign data when said presetting mode is specified;
means for comparing data corresponding to received broad-
cast wave frequencies obtained from said tuner device and
July 5, 198i
ELECTRICAL
413
frequency data stored in said call sign storage means at a
time of reception after said successive data storing;
means for reading out a call sign data from said call sign data
storage means in response to a frequency data coincidence
output of the comparing means; and
means for informing the user of said call sign data.
4,392,247
BROADCAST RECEIVER WITH SEARCH TUNING
Theodonis H. M. van Deursen, Eindhoven, Netherlands, as-
signor to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,365
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, May 29, 1980,
8003087
Int. Q.' H03J 7/00
U.S. Q. 455—161 2 Qaims
HECPT COM)
SC D€T
19
MEMOIR CIRCUIT
spond to tuning data from the same group, that particular
group.
4,392,248
ATTENTION SIGNAL RECEIVER FOR EMERGENCY
BROADCAST SYSTEMS
Calvin Eckels, San Jose, and John James, Los Gatos, both of
Calif., assignors to Time and Frequency Technology, Inc.,
Santa Qara, Calif.
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,611
Int. Q.' H04B 1/26; H03J 7/20
U.S. Q. 455—161 12 Qaims
1. A broadcast receiver including a search tuning circuit
comprising a group selection circuit for selecting from a plural-
ity of groups of tuning data stored in a memory circuit, each
group of tuning data being associated with a given region, a
search action of the search tuning circuit for scanning a se-
lected group of tuning data being initiated when a transmission
which corresponds to a tuning datum from the selected group
provides reception which is too weak, the search action being
terminated when a transmission which corresponds to a tuning
datum from the selected group provides sufficiently strong
reception, characterized in that the receiver further includes an
automatic control circuit comprising means for activating said
group selection circuit to select one of said groups of tuning
data, a transmitter counter, means for initializing said transmit-
ter counter and for activating said search tuning circuit for
scanning said selected group of tuning data for a transmission
that would provide sufficiently strong reception, means for
incrementing said transmitter counter each time a transmission
is accepted and for continuing said scanning by said search
tuning circuit until said entire selected group of tuning data is
scanned, means for causing said group selection circuit to
select said selected group of tuning data if the number of ac-
cepted transmissions in said selected group of tuning data, as
indicated by said transmitter counter, is equal to or exceeds a
predetermined number, and means for reactivating said group
selection circuit to select another one of said plurality of
group>s of tuning data for scanning if the number of accepted
transmissions in said selected group of tuning data, as indicated
by said transmitter counter, is less than said predetermined
number, whereby said automatic control circuit automatically
selects for reception, under the control of said counter, when
this counter has counted a sufficient number of transmissions
which are receivable with sufficient strength and which corre-
- -^
-I-
r n
,zo
-i_t^
A
y,-tw~l
i [^3-'
7. An attention receiver for use in emergency broadcast
systems comprising:
(a) first means for picking up radio frequency signals each
having a carrier modulated by an attention signal;
(b) second means including a first detector for receiving said
radio frequency signals;
(c) oscillating means applying different respective oscillating
frequencies to said first detector for producing an interme-
diate frequency signal modulated by an attention signal;
(d) a scanning circuit connected to said oscillating means to
control the operation thereof to produce continuously and
sequentially different respective oscillating frequencies;
(e) a second detector connected to said second means for
producing an attention audio signal from said intermediate
frequency signal modulated by the attention signal;
(0 alert means for alerting an operator;
(g) a circuit connected to said second detector for operating
said aleri means in response to receiving said attention
audio signal;
(h) a tone decoder connected to said second detector for
detecting said attention audio signal; and
(i) third means including a time delay circuit connected to
said tone decoder and said scanning circuit, said third
means applying a stop scan signal to said scanning circuit
in response to detection of said attention audio signal by
said tone decoder for a period of time in excess of a prede-
termined p)eriod of time to lock in said second means for
reception of one of said attention signal modulated carrier
signals.
4,392,249
ELECTRONIC CHANNEL SELECTION APPARATUS
WITH SURFACE ACOUSTIC WAVE DEVICE
Shigeo Matsuura, and Ikuo Yuki, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,268
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1980, 55-36867
Int. Q.J H04B 1/26: H03J 7/28. 7/26
U.S. Q. 455—164 6 Qaims
1. An electronic channel selection apparatus with a surface
acoustic wave device comprising:
(a) an electronic tuner including a voltage-controlled local
414
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
oscillator which produces an output signal whose output
frequency is variable in response to a control voltage for
controlling the tuning frequency of the tuner;
(b) a surface acoustic wave comb filter at the input terminal
thereof connected to the output terminal of said local
oscillator and producing an output having a comb-shape
output characteristic including a plurality of output peaks
which successively appear at predetermined frequencies;
(c) an amplitude detector for detecting the output of said
surface acoustic wave comb filter;
(d) an amplifier for amplifying the output of said amplitude
detector;
(e) a shaping circuit connected to said amplifier for shaping
the output waveform therefrom;
ration gap of said first and second conductors and extend-
ing oppositely away therefrom and
(0 a presettable counter coupled to said shaping circuit for
counting the number of times that the output level of said
amplitude detector changes at the time of a frequency
sweeping operation of said voltage-controlled local oscil-
lator; and
(g) a sweep circuit connected to said presettable counter for
sweeping the control voltage of said local oscillator up-
wardly toward an upper level and then sweeping the
control voltage downwardly toward a lower level while
checking only during said downward sweep as to whether
or not an AFC voltage detection sinal is present, thereby
selecting a desired channel.
f
a diode mixer interconnecting said conductors for hetero-
dyne modulation product signal generation.
4,392,251
SYMMETRIC MICROWAVE MIXER WITH COPLANAR
DIODE CONNECnON
Ben R. Hallford, Wylie, Tex., assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,412
Int. a.3 H04B 1/26; H03H 7/42
U.S. a. 455—327 24 Qaims
"<i-^.
4,392,250
SYMMETRIC MICROWAVE MIXER
Ben R. Hallford, Wylie, Tex., assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,128
Int. a.3 H04B 1/26
U.S. a. 455—327 33 Qaims
1. Balun coupled microwave mixer circuit layout and struc-
ture comprising:
a dielectric substrate having first and second surfaces;
ground plane means on a first surface of said substrate;
first and second conductors on said first surface of said
substrate extending from said ground plane means
towards each other to a separation gap therebetween;
a transmission line on said second surface of said substrate
for interacting with said first and second conductors to
balun couple a field balanced between said first and sec-
ond conductors across said gap;
third and fourth conductors on said second surface of said
substrate having spaced adjacent ends proximate the sepa-
13. Balun coupled microwave circuit layout and structure
comprising:
a dielectric substrate;
ground plane means on the bottomside of said substrate;
first and second conductors on the bottomside of said substrate
collinearly extending from said ground plane means towards
each other and terminating in respective spaced ends to a
separation gap therebetween;
a transmission line on the topside of said substrate juxtaposed
said first and second conductors for interacting therewith to
balun couple to field balanced between said first and second
conductors across said gap;
a third conductor having a topside section on thejopside of
said substrate and having a linking section extending down
July 5, 1983
ELECTRICAL
41S
through said substrate to a bottomside section on the bot-
tomside of said substrate, said bottomside section having a
facing end proximate the facing ends of said first and second
conductors; and
a diode pair mixer connected to said first and second conduc-
tors and said bottomside section at coplanar connection
points on the bottomside of said substrate for heterodyne
modulation product signal generation.
4,392,252
SIGNAL TRANSMISSION SYSTEM COMPRISING A
MONOLINEARITY PRODUCT PRECORRECTION
DEVICE
Oaude Cluniat, Chatou, France, assignor to L.G.T. Laboratoire
General des Telecommunications, Chatou, France
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,427
Qaims priority, application France, May 14, 1980, 80 10847
Int. Q.3 H04B 1/04; H03F 1/26
U.S. Q. 455—116 5 Qaims
I -"^-O-^i
1. In a signal transmission system having an amplifier power
stage and a device for precorrection of non-linear products
introduced by said amplifier power stage of the system, the
precorrection device comprising:
a signal input coupled through a first power dispatcher to a
principle linear channel and to a subsidiary channel
wherein said subsidiary channel includes a non-linearity
product generator which non-linearity generator com-
prises a second power dispatcher feeding in parallel a
linear amplification channel and a non-linear amplification
chaimel, and a subtractor effecting the difference between
the output signal of said linear amplification channel and
the output signal of said non-linear amplification channel
to generate only non-linearity signals opposite in phase to
said non-linearity products to be corrected;
an output adder connected to the outputs of the principle
channel and the subsidiary channel which outputs a signal
which is the sum of the signal supplied by said two chan-
nels, wherein said principle channel comprises a third
power dispatcher feeding in parallel two third power
dispatcher linear amplification channels similar to the
linear amplification channel of the non-linearity product
generator, and an adder combining the output signals of
said two third power dispatcher linear amplification chan-
nels which adder outputs a signal transmitted to said
output adder, and
a adjusting device for adjusting the amplitude of said non-
linearity products being provided by the output of said
output adder.
reference signal oscillator means providing a reference oscil-
lating signal;
voltage controlled oscillator means having an output provid-
ing an output oscillating signal whose frequency depends
on an error signal applied thereto;
programmable divider means connected to the output of said
voltage controlled oscillator means for providing a divid-
ed-down signal, having a programmable dividing ratio
and having a control terminal for receiving a program-
ming control signal for programming the dividing ratio
thereof;
phase comparator means supplied with said reference oscil-
lating signal and said divided-down signal and an output
providing said error signal in response to the phase differ-
ence therebetween;
data register means supplied with a clock pulse signal and a
selection signal in synchronism with the clock pulse signal
for providing said programming control signal from an
output thereof; and
up/down counter means coupled between the output of said
data register means and the control terminal of said pro-
grammable divider means to latch the programming con-
trol signal therein, and to selectively increment the same
to control the dividing ratio of said programmable divider
means.
4,392,254
MECHANICAL TUNER WITH MICROPHONICS
ELIMINATION QRCUITRY
Lawrence M. Ecklund, Wheaton, 111., assignor to Motorola Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,970
Int. Q.5 H04B 1/26
U.S. Q. 455—173 12 Qaims
i — t ' I •• M
"at"
W 4,392,253
PHASE LOCKED LOOP CIRCUIT
Takaaki Yamada; Yoshio Osakabe, and Yukio Tsuda, all of
Kanagawa, Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 220,112
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1979, 54-170789
Int Q.3 H04B 1/26; H03J 7/28; H03L 7/75
U.S. Q. 455—165 12 Qaims
1. A phase-locked loop circuit comprising:
1. A mechanical receiver tuner with microphonics elimina-
tion circuitry, comprising:
tunable front end receiver means including local oscillator
416
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
means for developing a local oscillator signal having a
frequency which effectively selects a received signal fre-
quency and rejects signals at frequencies substantially
different from said received signal frequency;
mechanical tuning means operative in a tuning mode for
tuning said front end means to a desired signal frequency
in accordance with the iK>sition of at least one mechani-
cally movable tuning element which provides an associ-
ated variable tuning im{>edance having a magnitude deter-
mined in accordance with the position of said movable
tuning element, the local oscillator signal frequency being
determined by and corresponding to the magnitude of said
tuning impedance;
electronic tuning means operative in a locked tuning mode
for maintaining said receiver front end means tuned to a
received signal frequency by developing a control voltage
and utilizing said control voltage to control the frequency
of said local oscillator means such that the tuning of said
front end means tracks the received signal frequency; and
switch means for implementing said tuning mode and utiliz-
ing said movable tuning element to provide a desired
magnitude of said associated variable tuning impedance
for initially selecting a desired received signal frequency,
and for implementing said locked tuning mode while
terminating said tuning mode by subsequently disconnect-
ing said movable tuning element and said associated vari-
able tuning impedance from control of said local oscillator
signal frequency and effectively connecting said elec-
tronic tuning means to substantially control the frequency
of said local oscillator signal, whereby mechanical vibra-
tions during the locked tuning mode which move the
position of the movable tuning element and thereby alter
the magnitude of said associated variable impedance do
not affect the local oscillator signal frequency.
and the other electrode of each of said diodes is in electri-
cal contact with a second metal coating with said second
metal coating extending over a second dielectric placed
on said second support and surrounding said two diodes;
first connecting means in mechanical and electrical contact
with said first metal coating for connecting said local
oscillator module to a D.C. supply means; and
second connecting means in mechanical and electrical
contact with said second metal coating for connecting said
detector means to processing circuits of said receiver.
4,392,256
MECHANICAL REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE FOR A
TELEVISION RECEIVER
Jerry E. Russell, 124 Via B^a, Ventura, Calif. 93003
Filed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,138
Int. a.3 H04B 1/06; H04N 5/44
U.S. a. 455—354 2 Qalms
- 4,392,255
COMPACT SUBHARMONIC MIXER FOR EHF WAVE
RECEIVER USING A SINGLE WAVE GUIDE AND
RECEIVER UTILIZING SUCH A MIXER
Michel Del Giudice, Paris, France, assignor to Thomson-CSF,
Paris, France
FUed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,474
Gaims priority, application France, Jan. 11, 1980, 80 00613
Int. C1.3 H04B 1/26
U.S. O. 455—328 6 Oaims
1. A subharmonic mixer for an extremely high frequency
wave receiver for receiving high frequency waves including a
wideguide carrying the signal to be received, wherein said
waveguide further comprises:
a local oscillator means for producing a signal at one half the
frequency of said received high frequency waves wherein
said local ofcUlator includes a first module having a con-
ductive support, a semiconductor diode with a negative
resistance, wherein one electrode of said diode is in
contact with the support of said first module and wherein
the other electrode is in electrical contact with a metal
coating with said metal coating extending over a dielectric
material placed on the suppori and surrounding said di-
ode;
a detector means including a second module having a second
conductive suppori, two semiconductor diodes mounted
in antiparallel connection, with each of said diodes having
an electrode in electrical contact with said second suppori
1. In combination with a television receiver, said television
receiver having a rotatable volume control shaft, said volume
control shaft being longitudinally movable between a retracted
position and an extended position, with said volume control
shaft in said retracted position said television receiver is inop-
erative, with said volume control shaft in said extended posi-
tion said television receiver is operative, a mechanical remote
control device for moving said volume control shaft, said
device comprising:
a sleeve for snugly receiving said volume control shaft;
a twisted stranded cable secured to said sleeve, said twisted
stranded cable extending a spaced distance from said
television receiver terminating in a free end;
a manually graspable knob assembly attached to said twisted
stranded cable at said free end; and
encasing means covering said twisted stranded cable and a
poriion of said manually graspable knob assembly, said
encasing means being secured against longitudinal move-
ment in respect to said television receiver yet permitting
lateral flexibility of said twisted stranded cable relative to
said television receiver, said twisted stranded cable being
rotatable within said encasing means and also being longi-
tudinally movable relative to said encasing means during
movement of said volume control shaft between said
retracted position and said extended position, said encas-
ing means comprises a cover located about said twisted
stranded cable, said cover being connected to a second
sleeve, said second sleeve having an internal chamber, a
poriion of said manually graspable knob assembly being
located within said internal chamber and being longitudi-
nally movable in respect thereto.
DESIGNS
JULY 5, 1983
V^
269,559 269,561
CONFECTION ON A STICK COMBINED VEST AND BACK PACK
Jose M. Sellares, c/o McCann Erickson SA, Gran Via Carlos Robert L. Scott, 1651 Market St., Suite 202, San Francisco,
III, 136-138 Barcelona, Spain Calif. 94103
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,296 Filed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 398,933
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 7, 1980, Term of patent 14 years
996057 Int. a. D2— 02
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. D2— 184
Int. a. DOl— 0/
U.S. a. Dl— 22
"^
269,562
SURGICAL HOOD
Jacob A. Glassman, 1680 Michigan Ave., Miami Beach, Fla.
33139
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,495
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D02— Oi
U.S. a. D2— 243
269,560
PANTS
Mark T. Sheppard, and Lynda J. Timbers, both of 105 E St.,
Rosevi le, Calif. 95678
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,973
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. HI— 02
U.S. a. D2— 28
269,563
SELF DEFENSE KEY RING
Kent H. M. Lee, 2122 20th St., Santa Monica, Calif. 90405
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 208,053
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 07
U.S. a. D3— 62
417
418
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,564
LUGGAGE
Ted Stark, 60 Eagle Rock Way, Montdair, N.J.
Filed Feb. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 100,811
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— o;
U.S. a. D3— 71
269,567
MUSICAL INSTRUMENT STAND OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Robert A. Lorenzini, P.O. Box 91, Hancock, Mass. 01237
Filed Jim. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,259
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6—99
U.S. a. D6— 29
269,565
SCRUB BRUSH
Sylvia Goldstaub, 5777B Sims Rd., Palm Greens, Delray Beach,
Fla. 33445
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 193,936
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D4— o;
U.S. a. D4— 10
269,568
SOFA
Deborah Nelson, Knoxville, Tenn., assignor to The Berkline
Corporation, Morristown, Tenn.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,816
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— o;
U.S. a. D6— 63
269,566
CHILD'S ROCKER
Eugene Sexton, 118 Kings Dr., Warren, Ohio 44481
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,893
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 0/
U.S. a. D6— 11
269,569
SPOOL AND SPINDLE CHAIR
Michael W. Bowen, 1847 Parr Hwy., Adrian, Mich. 49221
Filed Jan. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,258
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 0/
U.S. a. D6— 75
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
419
II 269,570 269,573
AUXILIARY TOILET PAPER ROLL HOLDER EQUIPMENT ORGANIZER USED PRIMARILY BY
Charles B. O'Keefe, 2579 N. Miller Rd., Scottsdale, Ariz. 85257 BARBERS AND BEAUTiaANS
Division of Ser. No. 84,591, Oct. 15, 1979, Pat. No. Des. Stanley T. Sikora, 1710 Highland Blvd., Hoffman Estates, 111.
263,009. This application Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,964 60195
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,213
II Int. a. D23— 02; D6— 06 Term of patent 14 years
U.S.a.D6-97 Int.a.D06-04
^ U.S. a. D6— 188
269,571
COMBINED CHRISTMAS TREE STAND AND
CONTAINER THEREFOR
Herbert W. Geshwind, 11408 N. 30th Ave., Phoenix, Ariz. 85029
I , Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,092
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 99
U.S. a. D6— 105
[ C
p o o 0 c
269,572
PISTOL RACK
John E. Aspenwall, 1327 Madrid Way, Sandy, Utah 84070
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 205,683
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D06— 0^
U.S. a. D6— 188
269,574
RACK FOR HOLDING BEVERAGE ORDER CHECKS
Robert G. Dougherty, 12375 Dodd Blvd., Rosemount, Minn.
55068
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,834
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D6— 04
U.S. a. D6— 189
420
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,575 269,577
COMBINED PILLOW AND FINGER PUPPETS TABLECXOTH OR THE LIKE
A. Edward Fogarty, and Bonnie R. Fogarty, both of 3513 School Zana J. Wilson, 1625 Mesquito St., Abilene, Tex. 79601
Ave., Sarasota, na. 33579 Filed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,102
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,706 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. O. D6 — 13
Int. a.«6— 09; D21— 07 U.S. Q. D6— 275
U.S. a. D6— 203
269,576
INDUSTRIAL TRAFHC CURTAIN STRIP
Edward S. Robbins, Jr., Rte. 7, Box 322, Florence, Ala. 35630
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,200
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 70
U.S. a. D6— 208.1
269,578
MOLD FOR FORMING FROZEN FOOD PRODUCT
Paul Straubinger, 21-33 28th St., Astoria, N.Y. 11105
Filed Apr. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 143,312
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 04
U.S. a. D7--43
■^
'^_
'>t.
-^
/
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
421
II 269,579 269,581 —
MOLD FOR CONFECTIONERY OR BAKERY PRODUCT CONDIMENT MILL
OR THE LIKE William E. Bounds, 3737 W. 240th St., Torrance, Calif. 90505
Beryl E. Carlomagno, 4120 Stillmeadow Way, Sacramento, Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,306
Calif. 95821 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 351,850 Int. O. D07— 06
1 1 Term of patent 14 years U.S. CI. D7— 53
Int. a. D07— 02
U.S. a. D7— 44
7
-I-
v^i>r^^^M
269,580
CONDIMENT MILL
William E. Bounds, 3737 W. 240th St., Torrance, Calif. 90505
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,297 269,582
Term of patent 14 years CONDIMENT MILL
Int. a. D07— 06 William E. Bounds, 3737 W. 240th St., Torrance, Calif. 90505
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,307
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 06
U.S. a. D7— 53
U.S. a. D7— 53
422
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,583 269,585
CONDIMENT MILL PERCOLATOR
William E. Bounds, 3737 W. 240th St., Torrance, Calif. 90505 Alan A. Phillips, Kewaskiun, Wis., assignor to Dart Industries
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,308 Inc., Northbrook, III.
Term of patent 14 years Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,098
Int. a. Don— 06 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. D7— 53 Int. Q. D07— 02
U.S. a. D7— 321
269,584
CONDIMENT MILL
WiUiam E. Bounds, 3737 W. 240th St., Torrance, Calif. 90505
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,778
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— Od
U.S. a. D7— 53
269,586
DISPOSABLE PAN FOR HEATING AND SERVING FOOD
David F. Allgeyer; Philip P. Johnson, both of Conway, and John
W. Gilliom, Wooster, all of Ark., assignors to UMC Indus-
tries, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 240,800, Mar. 5, 1981. This
application Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,382
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 02
U.S. a. D7— 359
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
423
269,587 269,590
PULL TAB OPENER SNAP LOCK FASTENER
Mark H. Hanslmair, 10037 Culver Blvd., Culver City, Calif. Conny Jansson, Enkoping, Sweden, assignor to AB Bahco Verk-
90230 tyg, Enkoping, Sweden
iFiledMay29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,192 FUed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,507
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Qaims priority, application Sweden, Apr. 18, 1980, 80-0809
Int. CI. D07— 99 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. CI. D8— 40 Int. Q. D8— 0«
U.S. a. D8— 382
269,588
TOOL HANDLE
David Ludwig, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to Allan Air Products,
St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,873
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. DS—05
U.S. a. D8— 107
^
269,589
COMBINED FIXING AND RETAINING CLIP FOR
ELONGATE BODIES
Daiji Nakama, Chigasaki, Japan, assignor to Nifco, Inc., Yoko-
hama, Japan
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,741
Claims priority, application Japan, May 31, 1980, 55-21589
Term of patent 14 years "
Int. CI. D8— 05
U.S. a. D8— 356
269,591
BOTTLE
Henri D'Orleans, Paris, France, assignor to L'Oreal, Clichy,
France
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,573
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 0/
U.S. a. D9— 335
424
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,592 269,594
COMBINED BOTTLE AND CAP BOTTLE OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Michael Barney, Leeds, England, assignor to Lever Brothers William R. Gurolnick, Morton Grove, 111., assignor to Gold
Company, New York, N.Y. Eagle Co., Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 61,139 Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,465
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 30, 1979, Term of patent 14 years
99S336 Int. a. D9— 07
Term of patent 14 years U.S. a. D9— 389
Int. a. D9— 0/
U.S. a. D9— 367
r
xH
269,595 "
BOTTLE
Donald Murray, Succasunna, N.J., assignor to J. L. Prescott
Co., Passaic, N.J.
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,925
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9—01
U.S. a. D9— 413
269,593
CONTAINER FOR LIQUIDS OR THE LIKE
Robert J. Gniodis, Oak Lawn; William T. Franz, Palos Park,
and Edward J. Hayes, Elmhurst, all of 111., assignors to The
Continental Group, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
J Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,663
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 07
U.S. a. D9— 370
269,596
POURING SPOUT ATTACHMENT FOR A PAINT CAN
OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
James C. Fowkes, 6060 Briggs Lake Dr., Brighton, Mich. 48116
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,459
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 46,005, Jun. 6, 1979
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 07
U.S. a. D9— 447
•■ \
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
425
269,597 269,599
' ' LID FOR A CONTAINER SCALE FOR WEIGHING PREOOUS METALS AND THE
Alun Harries, London, England, assignor to Metal Box Limited, LIKE
Reading, England Richard W. Perry, Seekonk, Mass., and Ronald J. Medeiros,
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,933 East Providence, R.I., assignors to Four R's Mfg. Corp., East
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 12, 1980, Providence, R.I.
995299 FUed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,203
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 07 Int. a. DIO— 04
U.S. a. D9— 454 U.S. a. DIO— 87
fczLi
I
269,600
ROUND HOUSEHOLD SCALE
Dana W. Mox, Elk Grove Village, 111., assignor to Tricolor
Corporation, Las Cruces, N. Mex.
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,683
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 04
U.S. a. DIO— 91
269,598
SURVEYORS STAKE
Edward E. Anderson, 9323 Bennet Lake Rd., Fenton, Mich.
48430
I jFiled Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,732
I I Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. DIO— 06
U.S. a. DIO— 66
^
J
269,601
FACE FOR MOTOR VEHICLE AMPERE METER
John L. O'Driscoll, 41 Saranac Ave., Youngstown, Ohio 44505
FUed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,177
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 07
U.S. a. DIO— 125
426
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,602
NOVELTY SCULPTURE
Diana J. Fedora, Rte. 1, Box 178, Sidney, Mont. 59270
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,730
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— 02
U.S. a. Dll— 160
269,604
SLURRY DISPENSER CONTROL CONSOLE
William A. Strong, and Kenneth Church, both of Pine Bluff, Ak.,
assignors to Strong Manufacturing Co., Inc., Pine Bluff, Ark.
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 165,857
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 12
269,605
PROGRAMMABLE CONTROLLER HOUSING
269,603 Salvatore R. Provanzano, Melrose, Mass., and John J. Finne-
WHEEL COVER 8^' ^'•■> Hudson, N.H., assignors to Gould Inc., Rolling
Herbert F. Whitmarsh, High Barnet, England, assignor to Initial Meadows, 111.
Plastics Limited, High Barnet, England f »'«• Oct- 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,593
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,052 Term of patent 14 years
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 8, 1981, ^*- ^- D13— Oi
998377 U.S.a. D13— 12
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 76
U.S. a. D12— 205
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
427
II 269,606 269,609
HEAT SINK OR SIMILAR ARTICLE VIDEO GAME CONTROL UNIT
William D. Jordan, and Howard G. Hinshaw, both of Dallas, Syng N. Kim, Hoffman Estates, 111., assignor to Wico Corpora-
Tex., assignors to Thermalloy Incorporated, Dallas, Tex. tion, Niles, 111.
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,359 Filed Jul. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 394,262
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
II Int.a.D13— Oi Int.a. D13-0i —
U.S. a. DI3-23 US. a. D13-38
1
1
r ■""
269,607
SWITCH FRAME
Shigeo Ohashi, c/o Nihon Kaiheiki Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
5-14 Minamimagome 1-chome, Ohta-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,617
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 10, 1980, 55-047028
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. CI. D13— 32
269,608
VIDEO GAME CONTROL UNIT
Syng N. Kim, Hoffman Estates, 111., assignor to Wico Corpora-
tion, NUes, 111.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,382
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D13— Oi
U.S. a. D13— 38
269,610
AUTOMOBILE STEREO SYSTEM MULTI-CHANNEL
ELECTRONIC CROSS-OVER NETWORK
Hideyuki Matsubara, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Pioneer Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,699
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1980, 55-17999
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D14— 0/
U.S. a. D14— 1
I £
428
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,611
HEADPHONES
Tomonaga Saito, Ichikawa, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,188
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 19, 1981, 56-6436
Term of patent 14 yea'-s
Int. a. D14— o;
U.S. a. D14— 36
269,613
TELEPHONE WFTH FUNCTION KEYS
Donald A. Foggia, Ocean, N.J.; Deepak R. Muzuradar, Boca
Raton, Fla.; Gerhart F. Klaiber, Boca Raton, Fla., and Rolf E.
Schneider, Boca Raton, Fla., assignors to Siemens Corpora-
tion, Iselin, N.J.
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,990
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 58
269,614
CASE FOR TELETYPE INTERFACE
John M. Murphy, Los Gatos, Calif., assignor to CHAT Corpora-
tion, Los Gatos, Calif.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,877
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02
U.S. a. D14— 93
269,612
LARGE TELEPHONE KEYSET WITH DISPLAY
Donald A. Foggia, Ocean, NJ.; Deepak R. Muzumdar, Boca
Raton, Fla.; Gerhart F. Klaiber, Boca Raton, Fla., and Rolf E.
Schneider, Boca Raton, Fla., assignors to Siemens Corpora-
tion, Iselin, N J.
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,985
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D14— 05
U.S.a. D14— 58
269,615
COMBINED AMPLinER AND TUNER
Kazuhiko Nishiyama, Tokyo, and Takao Itoh, Tachikawa, both
of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,089
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 19, 1981, 56-1038
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 05
U.S. a. D14— 96
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
429
269,616
PISTON WORKING nXTURE
James R. Qrum, P.O. Box 1271, St. Charles, Mo. 63301
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,615
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15— 09, D8— 05
U.S. a. D15— 140
269,619
SPECTACLE HOLDER
Stefan Engelmann, 61-38 164th St., Flushing, N.Y. 11365
Division of Ser. No. 16,952, Mar. 2, 1979, Pat. No. Des. 260,527.
This application Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,170
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 06; D6— 99
U.S. a. D16— 129
269,617
RESISTANCE WELDING ELECTRODE
Russell A. Nippert, Delaware, Ohio, assignor to The Nippert
Company, Delaware, Ohio
1 1 Filed Jul. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 165,519
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D15— 09
U.S. a. D15— 144
269,620
AUDIO CONTROL PANEL
Lance Parker, 1467 S. 50 East, Orem, Utah 84057
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,202
-s Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D17— 0/
U.S. a. D17— 1
269,618
COMBINED PHOTOCOPIER, SORTER AND
DOCUMENT FEEDER
Louis J. H. Lucker, Tegelen, Netherlands, assignor to Oce-Ned-
erland B.V., Venlo, Netherlands
Filed Mar. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 128,302
Oaims priority, application Benelux, Sep. 13, 1979, 54043-00
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 05
U.S. a. D16— 30
269,621
GUITAR BOWL
Charles H. Kaman, Prattling Pond Rd., Farmington, Conn.
06032
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,182 '
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D17— 05
U.S. CI. D17— 20
430
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,622 269,624
DRUM ROD ATTACHABLE DRUM KEY HOLDER ELECTRONIC CALCULATOR
Bruce N. Hardy, Elkhart, Ind., assignor to Silver Street, Inc., Keiji Sakata, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Sharp Corporation,
Elkhart, Ind. Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,343 Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,584
Term of patent 14 years Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1981, 56-13009
Int a. Dll— 04: DS—OS Term of patent 14 years
U.S.a.D17-22 Int.a.D18-07
U.S. a. D18— 7
'
II 1
" - - 1
!□□□□□
!□□□□□
□ □aaa
□ □ □ □ al^
269,623
CASH REGISTER OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Shuzo Kato, Hiratsuka, and Satoni Sakama, Isehara, both of
Japan, assignors to NCR Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,588
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 3, 1981, 56-8344; 269,625
Mar. 3, 1981, 56-8345; Mar. 3, 1981, 56-8346; Mar. 3, 1981, HOLDER FOR A RULE BOOK AND SCORE CARD
56-8347 Roy C. Draddy, 9 Dunfries PI., Floreat Park, Western Australia,
Term of patent 14 years Australia
Int. a. D20— 02 Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,282
U.S, a. D18— 4 Qaims priority, application Australia, Aug. 15, 1980, 81803
Term of patent 14 years
,^_,_„ Int. a. D19— 04
I /' ^"^r^^MMii u.s.a. D19— 26
t^
July 5, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
431
269,626 269,628
HOLDER FOR A RULE BOOK AND SCORE CARD CARD-SHUFFLING DEVICE
Roy C. Draddy, 9 Dunfries PI., Floreat Park Western Australia, Leo Willette, and Betty Willette, both of 1823 W. 144th St.,
Australia Gardena, Calif. 90249
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,285 Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 284,655
Claims priority, application Australia, Aug. 15, 1980, 81804 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. G. D21— 07
Int. a. D19— (W U.S. a. D21— 58
U.S. a. D19— 26
269,629
BEAD PUZZLE
Christopher C. Wiggs, 48A Queenstown Rd., London SW8 3RY,
and Christopher J. C. Taylor, Flat 3, 17 Queensgate PI.,
London, SW7, both of England
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,286
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 9, 1981,
1002925
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 0/
U.S. a. D21— 104
269,627
GAME BOARD 269,630
David A. Westell, Box 69792, Station "K", Vancouver, B.C., XCTION TOY
Canada Masaki Mayuzumi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tomy Kogyo Co.,
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No, 224,314 inc., Tokyo, Japan
Term of patent 14 years Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,027
Int. a. D21— 0/ Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 16, 1979, 54-43728
U.S. CI. D^l— 34 Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2\—01
U.S. a. D21— 150
432
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,631
GUN TARGET
Charles R. Dulude, 33 Burnside Ave^ P.O. Box 8301, East
Hartford, Conn. 06108
FUed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,067
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 04
VJS. a. D22— 15
269,633
CHECK VALVE
Allan H. WUIinger, 351 E. 84tli St., New York, N.Y. 10028, and
Tsuyoshi Itakura, Itakura Soki Kabushlkl Kaisha, 17-20,
Unoki 3-Chonie, Ohta-Ku, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,001
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 0/
U.S. a. D23^22
269,634
WATER CLOSET
John D. Inch, Lansdowne, and Arnold Hennessy, Wellington,
both of Canada, assignors to International Water Saver Toi-
lets, Inc., Wellington, Canada
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,096
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 02
U.S. a. D23— 65
269,632
FLYING INSECT TRAP
E. Wayde Roberston, and Tommy R. Watkins, both of Jones-
boro. Ark., assignors to Flintrol Incorporated, Jonesboro,
Ark.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,892
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 06
U.S. a. D22— 19
269,635
FALSE TOOTH
Ehrenfried G. B. Wolf, Rte. 1, Box 143 A, Raymond, Wash.
98577
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 139,784
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— Oi
U.S. a. D24— 33
July 5, \m
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
433
269,636 269,638
FOOT MASSAGER CANDLE BASE
Francis W. MacGregor, New Britain, and Robert H. Bruno, Elam C. Frye, Jr., 4212 Calculus Rd., Dallas, Tex. 75234, and
Avon, both of Conn., assignors to Clairol Incorporated, New David R. Frye, Rte. 8, Box 161C, Longview, Tex. 75602
York, N.Y. FUed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,393
FUed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 180,532 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Term of patent 14 years ' Int. Q. D26— 0/
II Into. D28— Oi U.S.a.D26— 9
U.S. CI. D24— 42
269,639
LUMINAIRE
WUUam R. Eargle, Jr., and Winfried N. Westermann, both of
Vicksburg, Miss., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp.,
Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,898
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D26— 05
U.S. a. D26— 88
269,637
HANDRAIL
Brian ChaUis, 9 Northridge Way, Sandy, Utah 84070
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,292
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D25— o;
U.S. a. D2S— 73
434
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 5, 1983
269,640 269,642
MEDiaNAL TABLET COMBINED AUTO WINDSHIELD DETERGENT
Robert J. H. Hiscock, Crowborougb, England, assignor to Bur- RESERVOIR, COVER AND SCRUBBER/SQUEEGEE
roughs Wellcome Co., Raleigh, N.C. Gary R. Sommers, 18426 Plymouth Dr., Castro Valley, Calif.
FUed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,334 94546
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 27, 1982, Filed Feb. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 118,457
1004834 Yerm of patent 7 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. D7— 05
Int. a. D28— O; U.S. CI. D32-^5
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,641
HOT WAX EPILATION APPLICATOR
Samuel J. Mann, Englewood, N.J., assignor to Inverness Inter-
national Corporation, Englewood, N.J.
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,137
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 05
U.S. a. D28— 10
269,643
TRASH CAN AND LID
Robert G. Hartman, Greensboro, and Clayton J. Am-
mondson, Reidsville, both of N.C, assignors to Zarn, Inc.,
Reidsville, N.C.
Filed Mar 5, 1981, Ser. No. 340,894
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D7— 05
U.S. CI. D34— 7
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 5TH DAY OF JULY, 1983
Note— Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
A. Aoki & Associates: See—
MiU, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshtda. Takashi; Nakashirna
Masato; Fujihara, Katsumi; and Nakakuki, Tadao, 4,392,120, CI
382-22.000.
A. O. Smith Corporation: See—
Pflederer. Fred R., 4,391,301, CI. 138-103.000.
A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker: See— . ,o, ,q, n
Jacobsen, Kjell O.; and Engen, Gudmund, 4,391,197, CI.
102-334.000. ^ . ^ J T
Aaltonen, Olavi A.; Malmstrom, Rolf E.; Nermes, Esko O.; and Tuo-
minen, Tapio K., to Outokumpu Oy. Process for theseparation of
lead from a sulfidic concentrate. 4,391,632, CI. 75-26.000.
AB Bonnierforetagen: See— .. ^.^
Fogelberg, Ernst R., 4,391,859, CI. 427-421.000.
AB Europa Film: See—
Runsten. Bengt W., 4,391,694, CI. 204-273.000.
AB Volvo: See— ./■ ., im iaa r^i
Weiertr. Stig H. A.; and Jamszewski, Grzegorz K., 4,391,164, CI.
74-781.00R. .. ^ , , .in, -.a^ r-i
Abbott. John D. By-pass operated hydraulic check valve. 4,391.2Vt), ci.
137-523.000-
Abbott Laboratories: See— ^ ^ , u ^ loi ma r:
Choudhury, Hrishikesh; and Zaha, Juergen H., 4,391,028, CI.
29-235.000.
ABCO Industries, Inc.: See— ^ , a lat oia r\
Lesley, David J.; and Davis, Lawrence C, Jr., 4,391,934, CI.
524-43.000.
Abe, Etsuko: See— . .. ^ w au c. i,
Suda. Tatsuo; Hirasawa, Yoshihei; Takahashi, Sachio; Abe. Etsuko;
Konno, Kunio; and Aoki, Tadao, 4.391.802, CI. 424-236.000.
^'^tSS Tak^hi; and Abe. Matazo. 4.391.908, CI. 435-144.00a
Abe, Yoshiaki; Kubota, Yutaka; and Sugimoto, Hitoshi, to D'e?!' '^'•''
Co., Ltd. Apparatus for use in starting a diesel engine. 4,391,237, Cl.
123-179.00H.
Abex Corporation: See—
Lloyd, Herbert W., 4,391,641, Cl. 106-36.000.
Abraham, Jeffrey L.; and Banse, Gary D. Ball pitching apparatus.
4,391,264, Cl. 124-50.000.
Abraham, Nedumparambil A.: See— „.,.,-
Sestani, Kazimir; Abraham. Nedumparambil A.; Bellini, Francesco;
and Treasurywala, Adi, 4,391,816. Cl. 424-274.000.
AcquavivB, Thomas, to Xerox Corporation. Recirculating copy docu-
ment. 4,391,504, Cl. 355-3.0SH.
Acumeter Laboratories, Inc.: See-- ., m, <,« ri
Mclntyre, Donald B.; and Mclntyre, Fredenc S., 4,391,856, Cl.
427-358.000.
Adachi, Tetuo; See— .
Ishikawa, Shinzaburo; Kanai, Kenji; Kammaka. Nobuyuki; and
Adachi. Tetuo, 4,392,166, Cl. 360-113.000.
Adams, Don L.: See— . ,, n r. j i „„^
Fischer, William C; Adams, Don L.; Verzella, David J.; and
Wright. Stuart C. 4.392,203, Cl. 364-434^000^ ,,^ ,.^
Adams, Donald L. Check valve for rod out. 4,391,289, Cl 137-15.000.
Adler, Harold A. Animal amusement apparatus. 4,391,224, ci.
1 19-29.000.
'^**°iJmura?KaIii^; Takayama, Kenichiro; Ado. Yutaka; Kawamoto,
Tamotsu; and Masunaga, Izumi, 4,391.910. Cl. 435-232.000.
AECI Limited: See— ^ ^^^
Smith. Jeremy G. B., 4,391.659, Cl. 149-2.000.
Aefa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Geyken, Erwin. 4,392.177, Cl. 361-221.000.
Ahad, Munir J.; Hollowell, William; Tanaka, Akira; and Ziv, Avraham,
to American Safety Equipment Corporation ^"'"^"/y '^X8
means for dual spool safety belt retractor. 4,391.420. Cl. 242-107.40A.
Aihara, Toshiharu: See— . . „. ■ ■
Wakabayashi. Takuo. deceased; Wakabayashi, Shigemasa, legal
reoresenutive; Tahara, Iwao; Aihara, Toshiharu; Takahashi,
Naoki; and Matsuo, Yushin, 4,391.530. Cl. 368-63.000.
Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.: See— , ,„ ,,^
McWhorter, Thomas E., 4.391,128,0.73-38.000. ^ ^^ . .
Riley. Eric K.; Smith. Colin D.; Yates. Garry J.; and Shepherd.
Norris W.. 4.391.585. Cl. 432-23.000.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See— , ,^^ ^^
Asahi, Kiyonobu, 4,391.260. Cl. 123-568.000
Kawai, Shinji; Suzuki. Koichi; and Yamaguchi. Yuji. 4,391,004, Cl.
4-443.000.
Aiuchi, Susumu: See — „ . • w
Akiyama. Nobuyuki; Kembo, Yukio; Nakagawa, Yasuo; Aiuchi,
Susumu; and Nomoto. Mineo, 4,391,511. Cl. 355-40.000.
Ajinomoto Company Incorporated: See—
Matsui. Hiroshi; Tsuchida, Takayasu; and Nakamon, Shigeru,
4,391,907, Cl. 435-115.000.
Akashi, Goro: See— », . ^ v u .
Yamada, Yasuyuki; Akashi, Goro; Tsuji. Nobuo; Mukaida, Yoshito;
and Fujiyama, Masaaki, 4.391,851. Cl. 427-130.000.
Akerberg. Denis W.; and Watson, David D., to Quaker Oats Company.
The. Furan polymer concrete. 4,391,946, Cl. 524-849.000.
'^'"Sakawi Toh7u; and Akiyama, Kozi, 4,391,669, Cl. 156-539.000
Akiyama, Nobuyuki; Kembo. Yukio; Nakagawa, Yasuo; Aiuchi.
Susumu and Nomoto, Mineo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Light exposure device
and method. 4,391,511, Cl. 355-40.000.
Aktiebolaget Bofors: See—
Tidstrom. Filing, 4,391,179, Cl. 89-46.000.
Aktiebolaget Carl Munters: See— ^ • ^ . ,„, ^n r^,
Vangbo, Hakan; Lundin, Bertil; and Moklint, Oivind, 4.391,667, Cl.
156-205.000.
Akzo NV: See— __
Lange, Wolfgang, 4,391,920, Cl. 521-61.000.
Wick. Gerhard; and Schulze, Helmut. 4.391,964. Cl. 528-74.500.
Akzona Incorporated: See—
Schreurs. Petrus H. M.; and Verhelst, Willem F., 4,391,962, Cl.
526-200.000.
Albany International Corp.: See— .^ . . ,„, ^t-, i-i
Duncan, Jeffrey B.; and Bolton, Joseph A., 4,391.673. Cl.
162-217.000. .. ^ ,
Albers, Richard R.. to Passat-Maschinenbau GmbH. Druiil for a contin-
uously operating laundry processing machine. 4,391,108, Cl.
68-143.000.
Albert-Frankenthal AG: See-
Fischer Rudolf. 4,391,596, Cl. 493-425.000.
Alberti, Rosette. Unballasting relays. 4,392,064, Cl. 307-39.000^
Albrecht Werner; Fischer, Klaus; and Grun, Gerhard, to Licentia
Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH. Circuit arrangement for storing signal
values. 4,392,136,0.340-825.560. vi « p .«
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet. Norton P., to
Dow Chemical Company, The. Substituted letrahydropyndazino-
(l,6-A)benzimidazoles and use as bronchodilators. 4,391,80ft, Cl.
424-248 400
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet Norton P.. to
Dow Chemical Company, The. ^-Substituted tetrahydroimidazo[U-
ajphthalazines and use as bronchodilators. 4,391,807, Cl. 424-248.400.
Allen Group Inc., The: See—
Scourtes, George, 4,391,131, Cl. 73-118.000.
Allibert S.A.: See— ,.,,^
Moret, Michel. 4.391.386, Cl. 220-343.000.
Allied Corporation: See— ^ ^ , n ^ lo, t«n r-i
Mani, Krishnamurthy; and Chlanda, Frederick P., 4,391.680, Cl.
204-98.000.
Alpi Milchindustrie reg. Gen. m.b.H.: See—
Kocher. Johann. 4,391.837, O. 426-583.000.
Alps Electric Co.. Ltd.: See—
Miyano. Hiroshi. 4.391.538. O. 400-145.100.
Alting, Comelis L.; Brehm. Rudolf; and Haisma. Jan. to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Method for the precision/manufacture of glass articles.
4.391.622. Cl. 65-66.000.
Amano. Itaru: See— . ., .e ■, c-;;^i.;
Ichikawa. Katsumi; Amano. luru; Ozaki, Keiji; and Suzuki, Seiichi,
4.391.769, Cl. 264-326.000.
'^'" wing, Teh"p.; and Kom, Elmer J., 4,392,044, O. 219-118.000.
Ambros, Peter: See— . ^ . u c^^u
Steigerwald, Wolf-Erhard; Ambros, Peter; and Gatzke, Ench,
4,391,742.0.252-512.000.
Amend. William E.: See—
Studhalter. Walter R.; Amend. William E.; and Helgeson. Nonnan
L, 4,391,102, Cl. 60-649.000.
American Cyanamid Company: See—
Batchelor. Jay A., 4,391,365, Cl. 206-63.300.
Campbell, Jay E.; Reichmann, Richard H.; and Lehmann, Li R...
4,391,402,0.227-121.000. ^ in, ooi r>i
Daniels, William A.; and Zawadzki, Rainer K.. 4,391,992, Cl.
554.441 000
Siuta, Gerald J.; and Bernstein, Seymour, 4,391,824, Cl.
424-315.000.
American Filtrona Corporation: See—
McCurry, H. Michkel, 4,391,716, Cl. 210-799.000.
American Optical Corporation: See—
Siegmund, Walter P., 4,391.621, O. 65-31.000.
PI 1
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
American Safety Equipment Corporation: See —
Ahad, Munir J.; Hollowell, William; Tanaka, Akira; and Ziv,
Avraham, 4.391,420, CI. 242-I07.40A.
AMF Incorporated: See —
Cummins, Donald L., 4.391,576, CI. 425-241.000.
Amigo Sales, Inc.: See —
Paffrath, Edgar C, 4.391,379, CI. 212-187.000.
Ampex Corporation: See —
Duca. James F.; and Moline, Jerry A.. 4,392.156, CI. 358-183.000.
Lemoine, Maurice G.; and Pasdera. Leonard A.. 4.392.159. CI.
358-319.000.
Anderson. Arthur, to Fischer & Porter Company. Gas-extraction ar-
rangement for wastewater settling tank. 4,391,704, CI. 210-188.000.
Anderson, Colin C. Shearing cradle. 4.391.173, CI. 83-424.000.
Anderson, John G.: See —
Stevenson, John; Cross, Alan; and Anderson, John G., 4,391,642,
CI. 106-38.230.
Anderson, Philip A., to Outboard Marine Corporation. CD Ignition
with automatic spark retard. 4,391,236. CI. 123-149.00C.
Anderson, Richard G.: See —
Haldipur, Gaurang B.; Anderson, Richard G.; and Cherish, Peter,
4,391,611, CI. 48-197.00R.
Anderson, Susan; Brown, David E.; Graham, David E.; Mahmood,
Mahmood N.; and Man, Maurice C. M., to British Petroleum Com-
pany p.l.c. The. Method of inhibiting formation of and breaking of
mercury butter in chlor-alkali cells. 4.391.681. CI. 204-99.000.
Ando, Haruhisa: See —
Aoki. Masakazu; Ando, Haruhisa; Ohba, Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto, Iwao; and Izawa. Ryuichi. 4.392.158. CI. 358-213.000.
Ando. Otaro; and Suwaki. Toshitaka, to Olympus Optical Company
Limited. Coeliac cavity ultrasonic diagnosis apparatus. 4,391,282, CI.
128-660.000.
Ando, Sumitoshi, to Kokusai Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd. Combined
circuit and packet switched system. 4,392,222, CI. 370-60.000.
Ando. Yukio: See —
Nakauchi. Hideo; Kato, Shingo; and Ando. Yukio. 4,391.942. CI.
524-526.000.
Andren, Carl F.; and Mosley, William H., Jr., to B-Systems, Inc. Simpli-
fled transversal correlator for MSK and MSK related waveforms.
4,392,232, CI. 375-86.000.
Andresen, Brian D.; and Ng, Kwokei J., to Ohio State University, The.
Method and apparatus for the analysis of materials by chromatogra-
phy and mass spectrometry. 4,391,778, CI. 422-89.000.
Anenson, David, to Champion International Corporation. Code dater
for tray forming apparatus. 4,391,189, CI. 101-36.000.
Anstey, Henry D-: See —
Koning. Richard W.; Meiers, Gerald F.; and Anstey, Henry D.,
4,391,187, CI. 100-88.000.
Anthony, Alfred, to Yankee Metal Products, Inc. Visor picture frame.
4,391,053, CI. 40-152.000.
Anthony, Andrew J., to Combustion Engineering, Inc. Arrangement
for retaining a fuel rod in a reconstituuble fuel assembly. 4,391,771,
CI. 376-451.000.
Anzuino, Giuseppe: See —
Merani. Gianfranco; and Anzuino, Giuseppe, 4,391,968, CI.
528-321.000.
Aoki, Masakazu; Ando, Haruhisa; Ohba, Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto, Iwao; and Izawa, Ryuichi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Interlaced
solid-state imaging device. 4,392,158, CI. 358-213.000.
Aoki, Tadao: See —
Suda, Tatsuo; Hirasawa, Yoshihei; Takahashi, Sachio; Abe, Etsuko;
Konno, Kunio; and Aoki, Tadao, 4,391,802. CI. 424-236.000.
Aoki, Takashi: See —
Nishikawa, Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama. Toshihiko;
Takaoka. Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, 4,391,342. CI.
180-143.000.
Aoyagi. Takaaki: See —
Umezawa. Hamao; Aoyagi. Takaaki; Shirai. Tadashi; Nishizawa.
Rinzo; Suzuki. Masao; and Saino, Tetsushi. 4.391,986. CI.
562-444.000.
Aoyama. Frank S.; and Supleton, Brian P., to Boeing Company, The.
Aircraft television antenna receiving system. 4,392,139, CI.
343-705.000.
Aoyama, Toshihiko: See —
Nishikawa, Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama, Toshihiko;
Takaoka, Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, 4,391,342, CI.
180-143.000.
Apelian, Lawrence. Solar cell activation system. 4,392.006. CI.
136-246.000.
Applcton Electric Company: See —
Mina. Nabil L.. 4,391,480, CI. 339-32.00R.
Ban, Keisuke; and Arai. Takeo. 4,391,161. CI. 74-579.00E.
Arao, Kozo: See —
Nakamura, Shunji; and Arao, Kozo, 4,391,512, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Arcair Company: See —
Moore, Paul E., 4,391.209. CI. 1 10-349.000.
Archibald, G. Kent, to AVI. Inc. Nonpulsating IV pump and disposable
pump chamber. 4,391.600. CI. 604-153.000.
Arends, Albert W.; and Henke, Ronald E., to Leesona Corporation.
Methods and apparatus for curling lips about the open mouths of
stacked thermoplastic containers. 4.391,768, CI. 264-285.000.
Armour Pharmaceutical Company: See —
Orlowski, Ronald C; and Seyler, Jay K., 4,391,747. CI. 260-
1 I2.50T.
Armstrong. William A., to Canada. Her Majesty the Queen in right of.
as represented by the Minister of National Defence. Mixed oxide
oxygen electrode. 4.391.668, CI. 156-308.200.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: See —
Harris, Thomas G., 4,391.929, CI. 523-218.000.
Amdt, Thomas W.: See —
Hall, Benjamin O.; and Amdt, Thomas W., 4,391,361, CI.
198-735.000.
Amett, Samuel E., to Bendix Corporation, The. Multiple position
digital actuator. 4,391,092, CI. 60-39.290.
Arnold. Ronald D.: See-
Baker. Samuel F.; and Arnold. Ronald D.. 4.391.325. CI.
166-208.000.
Arrhenius. Gustaf O.. to Kay Laboratories. Inc. Heat storage material.
4,391,267. CI. 126-400.000.
Arsuaga, Yavier. to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia. Mineral min-
mg installation. 4.391.469. CI. 299-11.000.
Art Cap Company. Inc.: See —
Gallin, Paul G.. 4.390.998. CI. 2-180.000.
Arulpragasam. Jega A.; Giggi, Robert A.; Lary. Richard F.; and Sulli-
van, Daniel T., to Digital Equipment Corporation. Cached multipro-
cessor system with pipeline timing. 4.392.200, CI. 364-200.000.
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Masamoto. Junzo; Hamada, Minoru; Suzuki, Isamu; and Yoshida,
Takeo, 4,391,741, CI. 252-511.000.
Ohmura, Kaoru; Kimura. Takeo; and Kusunose. Tetsuhiro.
4.392.013. CI. 174-68.500.
Yoshida. Koichi; and Hayano. Fusakazu. 4.391.912. CI.
435-241.000.
Asahi, Kiyonobu. to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Fluid pressure
responsive valve device. 4.391.260. CI. 123-568.000.
ASEA Aktiebolag: See—
Lundstrom. Jan-Erik; and Rudgard. Ingemar, 4,392,130, CI.
340-747.000.
Ashland Oil, Inc.: See —
Daniel, Chelliah, 4,391,989, CI. 562-599.000.
Ruszala, Ferdinand A., 4,391,990, CI. 562-599.000.
Astilleros y Talleres del Noroeste, S.A.: See—
Fayren, Jose M., 4,391,332. CI. 166-350.000.
Au, Andrew T.. to Dow Chemical Company. The. Cyano-(4-cyano-
phenyl)methyl ethyl ester of carbonic acid useful as an agent for
selective control of barnyard grass. 4,391,630. CI. 71-105.000.
Aubel. John A., to Borg-Wamer Corporation. Dump delay valve.
4.391.294. CI. 137-493.800.
Audenard. Bernard: See —
Marini. Jean; and Audenard, Bernard, 4,392,214, CI. 367-127.000.
Auderset, Heinrich: See —
Steigmeier, Edgar F.; and Auderset, Heinrich, 4.391,524, CI.
356-338.000. .
Augat Inc.: See —
Hanlon, Richard J.; and Vcttcr, Rudi O. H., 4,391,408, CI. 339-
75.00M.
Auge, Claude, to Etat Francais. Bidirectional dispersible shaped-charge
mine. 4,391,198, CI. 102-401.000.
Aumann, James T., to Christensen, Inc. Drill string safety valves
4,391,328. CI. 166-325.000.
Austin Company, The: See —
Mazurkewitz, Anthony R., 4,391,495, CI. 350-452.000.
Automated Packaging Systems, Inc.: See —
Weyandt, Ronald R., 4,392,056, CI. 250-339.000.
Automation Industries, Inc.: See —
Lewis, James C; Miller, Jerry W.; Simpson, Clyde D.; and
Thomasson, Ronald G., 4,392,104. CI. 324-54.000.
Automotive Products Limited: See —
Burke, John P., 4,391,162, CI. 74-579.00R.
AVI, Inc.: See —
Archibald, G. Kent, 4,391,600, CI. 604-153.000.
Aya, Masahiro; Saito, Junichi; Yasui, Kazuomi; Kakabu, Shinzo; Kamo-
chi, Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko, to Nihon Tokushu Noyaku
Seizo K.K. 2-Pyridyloxyacetanilides and their use as herbicides.
4,391,629, CI. 71-94.000.
Ayerst, McKenna & Harrison Inc.: See —
Bellini, Francesco; Sestanj, Kazimir; and Humber, Leslie G.,
4,391,825, CI. 424-319.000.
Sestanj, Kazimir; Abraham, Nedumparambil A.; Bellini, Francesco;
and Treasurywala, Adi, 4,391,816, CI. 424-274.000.
Azamiouch, Mahmoud K., to Pulp and Paper Research Institute of
Canada. Method of producing lime in a rotary kiln. 4,391,671, CI.
162-30.100.
Azegami, Hitoshi: See —
Shibata, Fujio; Kawahara, Hiroshi; and Azegami, Hitoshi,
4,391,877, CI. 428^57.000.
B. F. Goodrich Company, The: See —
Okamoto, Yoshihisa, 4.391,970. CI. 528-408.000.
B.H.F. (Engineering) Limited: See —
Pack, Ernest A., 4,391,413, CI. 241-99.000.
B-Systems, Inc.: See —
Andren, Carl F.; and Mosley, William H., Jr., 4,392,232, CI.
375-86.000.
B-W Health Products, Inc.: See-
Mitchell, Larry D.; and Keith, Charles W., Jr., 4,391,007, CI.
5-60.000.
Baba, Fumio: See —
Nakano, Masao; Baba, Fumio; Nakano, Tomio; Takemae, Yo-
shihiro; and Mochizuki, Hirohiko, 4,392,211, CI. 365-200.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Babcock-Bau GmbH: See —
Bonnighausen, Manfred, 4.391,070, CI. 52-127.200.
Babiol, Pierre, to Societe Nouvelle de Bouchons Plastiques S.N.B.P
Overscaling caps. 4,391.383, CI. 215-256.000.
Bachler, Anton R. Machine arrangement for forming tracks and/or
levelling surfaces related to cross-country ski trails or downhill ski
slopes. 4,391,051, CI. 37-223.000.
Bacon, Dennis R.; and Bossu, Frank P., to Procter & Gamble Company,
The. Controlled release laundry bleach product. 4.391,723, CI.
252-90.000.
Bacon, Dennis R., to Procter & Gamble Company, The. Controlled
release laundry bleach product. 4,391,724, CI. 252-90.000.
Baczek, Stanley K.; McCain, G. Howard; Benezra, Leo L.; and Co-
vitch, Michael J., to Diamond Shamrock Corporation. Method for
making linings and coatings from soluble cross-linkable perfluorocar-
bon copolymers. 4,391,844, CI. 427-44.000.
Bahr, Dietrich J.; and Briska, Marian, to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation. Record carrier for electro-erosion printers.
4,392,143, CI. 346-135.100.
Bailey, Kenneth I. Aquatic toboggan slide. 4,391,201, CI. 104-70.000.
Bair, Scott S., Ill: See—
Vermillion, Don W.; Gromek, Francis S.; and Bair, Scott S., Ill,
4,391,018, CI. 15-339.000.
Baitz, Gunter, to Nixdorf Computer AG. Device for the stepwise feed
of printing media in an electromechanical print unit. 4,391,542, CI.
400-605.000.
Bajulaz, Roger. Medium distance transport device. 4,391,200, CI.
104-20.000.
Baker, Samuel F.; and Arnold, Ronald D., to Texas Iron Works, Inc.
Liner and hydraulic liner hanger setting arrangement. 4,391,325. CI.
166-208.000.
Bakker, Paul G. H., to Wool Development International Limited.
Textile treatment. 4,391,605, CI. 8-495.000.
Balda-Werke Photograph ishe Gerate und Kunststoff GmbH & Co.,
KG: See—
Lange, Kari-Heinz, 4,391,501, CI. 354-149.000.
Ball Brothers: See—
Bartoe, Otto E., Jr., 4,391,424, CI. 244-207.000.
Ball Corporation: See-
Woodruff, Robert A., 4,391,525, CI. 356-346.000.
Ballard, B. G.: See—
Godbey, John K.; and Ballard, B. G., 4,391,135, CI. 73-155.000.
Ban, Keisuke; and Arai, Takeo, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Connecting rod of internal combustion engine. 4,391,161, CI.
74-579.00E.
Banse, Gary D.: Sec-
Abraham. Jeffrey L.; and Banse. Gary D.. 4.391.264. CI.
124-50.000.
Barak. Yoram: See —
Medel. Louis W.. Jr.; and Barak. Yoram, 4,391,574, CI. 418-195.000.
Bardon, Charles: See —
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, 4,391,555,
CI. 405-264.000.
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, 4,391,556,
CI. 405-264.000.
Barham. Peter J.; and Selwood. Alan, to Imperial Chemical Industries
PLC. Extraction of poly(/3-hydroxybutyric acid). 4,391.766, CI.
264-210.100.
Barkats. Gerard; Girard. Alain; Marchal, Jean; and Morel. Charles, to
Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale. Solar generator provid-
ing electricity and heat. 4,392.007, CI. 136-248.000.
Barlow, George J.: See —
Brown, Richard P.; Barlow, George J.; and Peters, Arthur,
4,392,201. CI. 364-200.000.
Barmag Barmer Maschinenfabrik AG: See —
Lorenz, Hellmut. 4.391,091. CI. 57-340.000.
Barnes. John: See —
Brinton, Michael B. J.; Barnes. John; and Chandler. Peter D..
4.391.239. CI. 123-198.00E.
Barry-Wehmiller Company: See —
Wiggins. Edmund C. 4.391.373. CI. 209-526.000.
Bartoe, Otto E.. Jr., to Ball Brothers. Method and structure for airfoil
thrust and lift control. 4,391,424, CI. 244-207.000.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Fauth, Karl-Heinz; Mohr, Heinrich; and Immel, Wolfgang,
4,391,959, CI. 526-70.000.
BASF Wyandotte Corporation: See—
Korczak, Alexander; and Levis, William W., Jr.. 4,391,728, CI.
252-182.000.
Schwartz, Ellen S.; Tincher, Cline A.; and Maxwell, Jerrold F.,
4,391,722, a. 252-73.000.
Bastian, Thomas W.; and Speicher, John M., to General Dynamics,
Pomona Division. Dual cable drive rolling arc gimbal. 4,392,140, CI.
343-765.000.
Batchelor, Jay A., to American Cyanamid Company. Single dispensing
multiple suture package. 4,391,365, CI. 206-63.300.
Bates, Ronald F.: See-
Wang, Chih C; and Bates, Ronald F., 4,391,720. CI. 252-49.600.
Battelle-Institut e.V.: See—
Lorenz, Peter; and Schwaier. Anita, 4.391.796, CI. 424-9.000.
Battelle Memorial Institute: See—
Miller, Donald M., 4,391,430. CI. 251-205.000.
Batzill, Wolfgang, to Glasurit America, Inc. Coating process. 4.391.858,
CI. 427-407.100.
Baud. Jean F. Winch operating handle. 4.391,432. CI. 254-365.000.
Bauer. Robert, to Miles Laboratories. Inc. System for the determination
of glucose in fluids. 4.391,905, CI. 435-14.000.
Bauer, Robert, to Miles Laboratories. Inc. System for the determination
of glucose in fluids. 4.391,906. CI. 435-14.000.
Baumgarten, Jorg; Frommer, Werner; Schmidt, Delf; Schmidt. Frie-
drich; and Munnecke, Douglas M., to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft.
Preparations of micro-organisms. 4,391,887, CI. 435-42.000.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories Inc.: See —
Czuba, Leonard F.; and Laurin, Dean G., 4.391.029. CI. 29-450.000.
Bay. David L.: See-
Knoll. William C; and Bay. David L.. 4.392.085. CI. 315-173.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Baumgarten, Jorg; Frommer, Werner; Schmidt, Delf; Schmidt,
Friedrich; and Munnecke. Douglas M., 4,391,887, CI. 435-42.000.
Block, Hans-Dieter; and Dahmen, Hans, 4,391,761, CI. 260-969.000.
Hildebrand, Dietrich, 4,391,607, CI. 8-549.000.
Kruckenberg, Winfried; Schundehutte, Karl H.; and Hederich,
Volker, 4,391,606, CI. 8-525.000.
Reitz, Gunther; Jakobs, Karlhans; and Boehmke, Gunther,
4,391,718, CI. 252-8.700.
Stetter, Jorg; Reiser, Wolf; and Faust, Wilfried. 4,391,626, CI.
71-88.000.
Bayne, Roberi T.; and Shireman, Phillip E., to Standard Change-Mak-
ers, Inc. Magnetic ticket dispenser. 4,391,387, CI. 221-13.000.
Beall, George H.; and Coming Glass Works. Strengthened glass-
ceramic article and method. 4,391,914, CI. 501-4.000.
Beall, Richard W., Jr.: See-
Tyler. Truman V.; and Sprague, Robert B.. 4.391,712. CI.
210-652.000. •' •
Beatrice Foods Co.: See-
Harrison, David E.. 4,391,001, CI. 4-236.000.
Bechtel International Corp.; See—
O'Hara, John W., 4,391,552, CI. 405-59.000.
Beck, Theodore R., to Electrochemical Technology Corp. Shaft seal
resistant to electrokinetic corrosion. 4,391,450, CI. 277-1.000.
Becka, Michael M., to International Shoe Machine Corporation. Swing-
able insole rest. 4,391,012, CI. 12-10.500.
Becker, Kunibert: See—
Weirich, Walter; Dettmers, Michael; Becker. Kunibert; and Rosen-
berg, Harry, 4,391,181, CI. 91-29.000.
Becker, Wilhelm, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Elasticized addition
product based on polyalkylene ether-polyols and polyisocyanates,
preparation and use thereof 4.391,957, CI. 525454.000.
Beckman Instruments, Inc.: See-
Boris, Michael J., 4,391,780, CI. 422-102.000.
Piramoon, Alireza; and Woodruff, Rebecca J., 4,391,597, CI.
494-20.000.
Becton, Dickinson and Company: See—
Kagan, Jonathan, 4,391,274. CI. 604-190.000.
Pearlman, Samuel R., 4,391,795, CI. 424-1.000.
Bednard, Eugene D.; See—
Kung, Edward J.; and Bednard. Eugene D., 4,392,213, CI.
367-13.000.
Beecham Group Limited: See-
Evans, John M., 4,391,815, CI. 424-274.000.
Beecroft, Julian B. Exercise apparatus. 4,391,443, CI. 272-145.000.
Beifuss, Wolfgang: See—
Schmitter, Ernst; Birzele, Paul; Buchmann, Klaus; Geitz, Gerhard;
Will, Bemhard; and Beifuss, Wolfgang, 4,392,199, CI.
364-200.000.
Belcher, Gloria Jeanne: See —
Belcher, Walter C, 4,391,551. CI. 405-43.000.
Belcher, Walter C, to Belcher, Walter C; and Belcher, Gloria Jeanne.
Snake cleanable fluid flow system. 4,391,551, CI. 405-43.000.
Beiko, Robert P.; Boden, Richard M.; and Hanna, Marie R., to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Norbomyl oxyaceuldehyde, orga-
noleptic uses thereof and process for preparing same. 4,391,744, CI.
252-522.00R.
BeIko, Robert P.: See—
Sprecker, Mark A.; Hanna. Marie R.; Tokarzewski. Richard J.;
BeIko, Robert P.; Watkins. Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H.,
4,391.284. CI. 131-276.000.
Bell, Anthony J., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The. Caulysu
for ring-opening copolymerization of cyclooleflns. 4,391,737, CI.
252-429.00B.
Bell, David: See-
Glenn, Raymond R.; and Bell, David, 4,392,196, CI. 364-200.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
Boggs, Luther M.; and Gardner, William B., 4,391,516, CI.
356-73.100.
Buckley, Reginald R.; and Ostermayer, Frederick W., Jr.,
4,391,683, CI. 204-129.300.
Curtis, Hazen, III, 4,392,031, CI. 200-16.00R.
Feldmann, William L.; Rowell, John M.; and Schmidt, Paul H..
4,391,657, CI. 148-133.000.
Henry, Paul S., 4,392,231, CI. 375-80.000.
Jin, Sungho; and Tiefel, Thomas H., 4,391,656, CI. 148-102.000.
Bellini, Francesco; Sestanj, Kazimir; and Humber, Leslie G., to Ayerst,
McKenna & Harrison Inc. N-((6-(Lower alkoxy)-5-<trifluoromcthyl-
thio)^ 1 -naphthaleny llthioxomethyl]-N-{lower alkyOglycines.
4,391.825, CI. 424-319.000.
Bellini, Francesco: See—
Sestanj, Kazimir; Abraham, Nedumparambil A.; Bellini, Francesco;
and Treasurywala, Adi, 4,391.816. CI. 424-274.000.
Bcnaroya. Henry: See—
Le Foil, Jean; and Benaroya. Henry, 4.391,708. CI. 210-242.300.
1032O,G.— 15
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Bender, Emit A. Reciprocating drive and reversing mechanism for long
stroke, well pumping unit. 4,391,155, CI. 74-89.200.
Bendix Corporation, The; See —
Amett, Samuel E., 4.391,092, CI. 60-39.290.
Gollomp, Bernard P., 4,392.107. CI. 324-73.00R.
Benezra, Leo L.: See —
Baczek, Stanley K.; McCain, G. Howard; Benezra, Leo L.; and
Covitch, Michael J., 4,391.844, CI. 427-44.000.
Bengal, Inc.: See —
Lybrand, William. 4.391,952, CI. 525-333.700.
Benitez, Francisco M.: See —
Small. Augustus B.; Hughes. Vincent L.; and Benitez, Francisco
M.. 4.391.961. CI. 526-76.000.
Bennett. Harvey G.: See —
Hearold, Owen E.; and Bennett, Harvey G., 4,392,184. CI.
362-101.000.
Benoit-Gonin, Roger; Berger, Jean L.; and Coutures, Jean L.. to
Thomson - CSF. Analog-digital coder comprising a charge transfer
coded voltage generation. 4,392,124, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Benthake, Heinz; Kronert, Curt; and Kunnen, Josef, to Thyssen Indus-
trie AG. Planetary gear assembly. 4,391,163, CI. 74-768.000.
Bentley, Peter D.; and Pollock, James F., to United Kingdom Atomic
Energy Authority. Condensation heating apparatus and method.
4.392.049, CI. 219-401.000.
Benz, Claude L., to Colgate Palmolive Company. Non-caking bleach
containing molecular sieve zeolite. 4,391,727, CI. 252-99.000.
Berger, Isaac. Portable exercising apparatus. 4,391,440, CI. 272-118.000.
Berger, Jean L.: See —
Benoit-Gonin, Roger; Berger, Jean L.; and Coutures, Jean L.,
4,392,124, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Bergmeister, Josef J. Lift-top can opener. 4.391.167. CI. 81-3.46R.
Berman, Michael F.: See —
Chang, Mike S. H.; and Berman, Michael F., 4,391,888, CI.
430-57.000.
Bernstein, Seymour: See —
Siuta, Gerald J.; and Bernstein, Seymour, 4,391,824, CI.
424-315.000.
Berruti, Pierangelo: See —
Bovio, Michele; Berruti, Pierangelo; and Gillone, Walter,
4,392,146, CI. 346-140.00R.
Berry, Derek: See —
Jackson, Ian D.; Berry, Derek; Rowden, George A.; and Dilley,
Malcolm. 4.391.711. CI. 210-634.000.
Bertolacini, Ralph J.: See —
Ferreira, Laurence E.; Lamar, Richard S.; and Bertolacini, Ralph
J., 4,391,734, CI. 252-378.0OR.
Bervig, Dale R. Fluid dynamic producing device. 4,392,062, CI.
290-54.000.
Berwind Corporation: See —
Roach. Donald E., II, 4,392,032, CI. 200-61.210.
Bessho. Hironori, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Method
and apparatus of supplying fuel in electronic control fuel injection
engine. 4,391.243. CI. 123-325.000.
Belts, Robert E., to United States of America, Army. Add-on igniter for
pyrogen type igniter. 4,391.196. CI. 102-202.000.
Beun. Jacobus P.: See —
Rijckaert, Albert M. A.; de Niet. Edmond; and Beun, Jacobus P.,
4.392.163, CI. 360-76.000.
Bhattacharyya, Sushantha K.: See —
El-Menshawy, Mohamed F.; Woodrow, Peter A.; and Bhatta-
charyya, Sushantha K., 4,392.110, CI. 324-453.000.
Bialous, Charles A.; Luce, John B.; and Mark, Victor, to General
Electric Company. Flame retardant polycarbonate composition.
4,391,935, CI. 524-82.000.
Bianchi, Valerio; Ehrentraut, Franz-Josef; and Wobky, Peter, to Bosch
und Pierburg System oHG. Method of operating a combustible
mixture generator of an internal combustion engine and apparatus for
carrying out the method. 4,391,249, CI. 123-438.000.
BICC Public Limited Company: See—
Lyon. Robert C, 4,391,546, CI. 403-189.000.
Billner, Werner; and Bock, Erich, to Schubert & Salzer. Apparatus for
piecing-up a wrap yam. 4,391,089, CI. 57-261.000.
Billon, Alain; Le Page, Jean-Francois; Peries, Jean-Pierre; and Siman-
doux, Jean-Claude, to Institut Francais du Petrole. Process for con-
verting heavy hydrocarbon oils, containing asphaltenes. to lighter
fractions. 4,391,700. CI. 208-86.000.
Bindemagel, Ali; Holthoff, Helmut; and Diel, Hartmut, to Friedrich
Kocks GmbH & Company. Couplings. 4,391,357, CI. 192-94.000.
Biomelktechnik Hoefelmayr & Co.: See —
Hoefelmayr, Tilman; and Maier, Jakob, 4,391,221. CI. 119-14.080.
Biphase Energy Systems: See —
Studhalter. Walter R.; Amend. William E.; and Helgeson. Norman
L., 4.391.102. CI. 60-649.000.
Birkenbach, Eugen J., to International Harvester Co. Rotary hoe
wheel. 4.391.335. CI. 172-540.000.
Birzele, Paul: See —
Schmitter, Ernst; Birzele. Paul; Buchmann. Klaus; Geitz. Gerhard;
Will, Bemhard; and Beifuss, Wolfgang, 4,392.199, CI.
364-200.000.
Bischoff. Peter G.. to Memorex Corporation. Metal oxide patterns with
planar surface. 4.391,849, CI. 427-129.000.
Bittner, Friedrich: See —
Spindler. Manfred; Tanner. Herbert; Geiger. Friedhelm; Bittner.
Friedrich; and Martens. Jurgen, 4,391,987, CI. 562-559.000.
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner,
Friedrich; and Martens. Jurgen. 4,391,988, CI. 562-559.000.
Black, Charles E., Ill: See—
Schaad, William J.; Black, Charles E., Ill; and Halstead, Raymond
T., 4,392,029, CI. 20O-5.00B.
Black & Decker Inc.: See —
Saar, David A.; and Walter. Richard T., 4,392,101. CI. 320-20.000.
Blaisdell. Ronald G.: See —
Hough, Harold L.; and Blaisdell, Ronald G., 4,392,189, CI.
362-306.000.
Blake, Charles R.: See—
Sugalski, Raymond K.; and Blake, Charles R., 4.392,102, CI.
320-48.000.
Blakeley Engineering Limited: See —
Blakeley, James, 4,391,458, CI. 285-112.000.
Blakeley, James, to Blakeley Engineering Limited. Pipe coupling with
gasket locating means. 4,391,458, CI. 285-112.000.
Blanco, Albert. Respirator circuit. 4,391,271, CI. 128-203.120.
Block, Hans-Dieter; and Dahmen, Hans, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for the production of aryl phosphonyl compounds. 4,391,761,
CI. 260-969.000.
Bloise, Rene; Lorang, Marcel; Morizot, Georges; and Boissonnade,
Genevieve, to Bureau de Recherches Geologiques et Minieres.
Method for obtaining photostable valentinite and valentinite thus
obtained. 4.391.792, CI. 423-617.000.
Blume, Ernst; Schaper, Wolfgang; Raether, Wolfgang; and Dittmar,
Walter, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. l-(l,3-Dioxolan-2-ylmethyl)-
azoles, their salts and their use. 4,391,805, CI. 424-246.000.
Bock, Erich: See —
Billner, Werner; and Bock, Erich, 4,391,089, CI. 57-261.000.
Bock, Martin: See —
Schmid, Helmut; Bock. Martin; and Kampf. Gunther. 4,391.522, CI.
356-326.000.
Bock, Thomas-Mathias, to Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft
mit beschraenkter Haftung. Method and apparatus for providing a
uniform sound distribution in an aircraft cabin. 4,392,027, CI. 179-
181.00W.
Bockholt, Karlheinz H., to Western Publishing Inc. Optical probe.
4,392,053, CI. 235-472.000.
Bocsa, Klara K.: See —
Devenyi, Tibor; Bocsa, Klara K.; Kovats, Ferenc; Pongor, Sandor;
Szabolcsi, Gertrud; and Such, Mihaly, 4,391,839, CI. 426-626.000,
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc
3,4,5,6,6-Pentamethyl hexanol-2 and alkyl homologues thereof; pro
cess for preparing same and organoleptic uses thereof 4,391,999, CI
568-840.000.
Boden, Richard M.: See —
BeIko, Robert P.; Boden, Richard M.; and Hanna, Marie R.,
4,391,744, CI. 252-522.00R.
Bodenseewerk Perkin-Elmer & Co. GmbH: See —
Braun. Klaus, 4,391,776, CI. 422-78.000.
Boehmke, Gunther: See —
Reitz, Gunther; Jakobs, Karlhans; and Boehmke, Gunther,
4,391,718, CI. 252-8.700.
Boeing Company, The: See —
Aoyama, Frank S.; and Stapleton, Brian P., 4,392,139, CI.
343-705.000.
Scholz, Klaus H., 4,391,409, CI. 239-265.290.
Boese, Friedrich-Karl, to Interatom, Internationale Atomreaktorbau
GmbH. Plant for thermochemical water dissociation by solar energy.
4,391,793, CI. 423-648.00R.
Boettger, Horst: See —
Engel, Herbert; and Boettger, Horst, 4,391,094, CI. 60-245.000.
Boggs, Luther M.; and Gardner, William B., to Western Electric Co.,
Inc.; and Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Method of
determining an index of refraction profile of an optical fiber.
4,391,516, CI. 356-73.100.
Bohner, Beat, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Process for producing aryl-
sulfamates. 4,391,976, CI. 544-211.000.
Bohner, Beat: See —
Rempfler, Hermann; and Bohner. Beat. 4.391.628. CI. 71-92.000.
Boissonnade, Genevieve: See—
Bloise, Rene; Lorang, Marcel; Morizot, Georges; and Boissonnade,
Genevieve, 4,391,792, CI. 423-617.000.
Boiler, Arthur; Schadt, Martin; and Villiger, Alois, to Hoffmann-La
Roche Inc. Hydrogenated naphthalenes. 4,391,731, CI. 252-299.620.
Bolster, M. Elizabeth: See-
Liang, Charles C; Bolster, M. Elizabeth; and Murphy, Robert M.,
4,391,729, CI. 252-182.100.
Boltersdorf, Dagmar: See —
Struck, Bemd D.; Junginger, Robert; and Boltersdorf, Dagmar,
4.391.682. CI. 204-104.000.
Bolton. Joseph A.: See —
Duncan. Jeffrey B.; and Bolton. Joseph A.. 4,391,673, CI.
162-217.000.
Bolza-Schunemann, Hans-Bemhard, to Koenig & Bauer AG. Recipro-
cal supporting arrangement for contacting cylinders of a printing
unit. 4,391.191, CI. 101-216.000.
Bombardier-Rotax G.m.b.H.: See —
Holzleitner, Johann, 4,391,234, CI. 123-65.00V.
Bonet, Jose D. Adjustable multiple bolt locking system. 4,391,460, CI.
292-37.000.
Bonis. Laszlo J. to Composite Container Corporation. Peel resistant
coextnided sheet. 4.391.863. CI. 428-35.000.
Bonnighausen. Manfred, to Babcock-Bau GmbH. Chimney. 4,391,070,
CI. 52-127.200.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PIS
Bonnor, Yannick; Raisson, Gerard; and Honnorat, Yves, to Creusot-
Loire. Process for the production of shaped parts from powders
comprising spheroidal metal particles. 4,391,772, CI. 419-23.000.
Boragine, Carlo: See —
Meyer, Armin; and Boragine. Carlo. 4,391,884, CI. 430-17.000.
Borg- Warner Chemicals, Inc.: See—
Falk, John C; and Juang, Mike S. D., 4,391,948. CI. 525-57.000.
Borg- Warner Corporation: See —
Aubel. John A., 4,391.294, CI. 137-493.800.
Boris. Michael J., to Beckman Instruments, Inc. Container for sample
testing. 4,391,780, CI. 422-102.000.
Bomancini, Jose C. M., to Forjas Taurus S/A. Retaining means for
revolver cylinders. 4,391,056, CI. 42-62.000.
Bomancini, Jose C. M., to Forjas Taurus S/A. Actuator system for the
return of the trigger in double-action revolvers. 4,391,057, CI.
42-65.000.
Bomhorst, James M., to Vari-Lite, Ltd. Computer controlled lighting
system having automatically variable position, color, intensity and
beam divergence. 4,392,187, CI. 362-233.000.
Bomstein, Norman D.; ?nd Walters, Johnnie J., to W. R. Grace & Co.,
Cryovac Division. Pasteurizable thermoplastic film and receptacle
therefrom. 4,391,862, CI. 428-35.000.
Bosch und Pierburg System oHG: See —
Bianchi. Valerio; Ehrentraut. Franz-Josef; and Wobky. Peter,
4,391,249, CI. 123-438.000.
Bossu, Frank P., to Procter & Gamble Company, The. Controlled
release laundry bleach product. 4,391,725, CI. 252-90.000.
Bossu, Frank P.: See —
Bacon, Dennis R.; and Bossu, Frank P., 4,391,723, CI. 252-90.000.
Bottcher, Martin: See —
Troebel, Wemer; and Bottcher, Martin, 4,392.036, CI. 200-322.000.
Boullart, Carolus J.; and Liefkens, Adrianus C. H. J., to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Magnetic shielding spring. 4,392,169, CI. 360-130.330.
Boverman, Bentsion; and Vodyanitsky, Vilen, to Gerber Garment
Technology, Inc. Apparatus for working on advancing sheet mate-
rial. 4,391,170, CI. 83-71.000.
Bovio, Michele; Berruti, Pierangelo; and Gillone. Walter, to Ing. C.
Olivetti & C. S.p.A. Non-impact dot printer. 4.392.146, CI. 346-
140.00R.
Boxler, Dena L.; and Chen, Albert C, to Rhone-Poulenc Agrochimie.
Novel polycyclic insecticidal esters. 4,391,823, CI. 424-306.000.
Boyadjieff, George I.; and Campbell, Andrew B., to Varco Intema-
tional. Inc. Well casing jack mechanism. 4,391,333, CI. 166-379.000.
BP Chemicals Limited: See —
Lynn, Malcolm; and May, Peter E., 4,391,675, CI. 202-158.000.
Brady, Reginald D. Clothing travel bag. 4,391,396, CI. 224-205.000.
Bralome Resources Limited: See —
Ellett, James R., 4,391,152, CI. 73-863.840.
Bramlett, Kenneth W.: See-
Jackson, G. C, Jr.; Bramlett, Kenneth W.; and Dennis, James G.,
4,391,547, CI. 403-341.000.
Branen, Kenneth E.: See —
Salsky, Jerome; Janis, Patrick K.; and Branen, Kenneth E..
4.391.088. CI. 57-234.000.
Branson. Daniel J.: See —
Mollenkopf. Lloyd C; and Branson, Daniel J., 4,391,073, CI.
52-241.000.
Brassell, Gilbert W.; and Lewis. John. Jr.. to United Sutes of America.
Energy. High temperature thermal insulating composite. 4.391,873,
CI. 428-297.000.
Braun Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Gassner, Gustav, 4,392,092, CI. 318-127.000.
Braun, Frederic: See —
Denkler, Maria; and Braun, Frederic, 4,391,745, CI. 252-554.000.
Braun, Klaus, to Bodenseewerk Perkin-Elmer & Co. GmbH. Dissocia-
tion chamber and measuring cell combination useful for making
measurements. 4,391,776, CI. 422-78.000.
Brechany, Thomas: See —
Slattery, William; Brechany, Thomas; and MacLeod, Colin J.,
4,391,115, CI. 72-131.000.
Brehm, Rudolf: See—
Alting, Cornells L.; Brehm, Rudolf; and Haisma, Jan, 4,391,622, CI.
65-66.000.
Bresnahan, Thomas P.: See —
Runnels, Robert W.; Wagenaar, Loren B.; Luke, Louis E.; and
Bresnahan, Thomas P., 4,392,015, CI. 174-143.000.
Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd.: See —
Ichikawa. Katsumi; Amano, Itaru; Ozaki, Keiji; and Suzuki, Seiichi,
4,391,769, CI. 264-326.000.
Nakauchi, Hideo; Kato, Shingo; and Ando, Yukio, 4,391,942, CI.
524-526.000.
Brinkmann, Heinrich Bemhard: See—
Knepper, Hermann, 4,391,623. CI. 71-21.000.
Brinton. Michael B. J.; Bames, John; and Chandler, Peter D.. to
R.N.L.I. (Trading) Limited. Inversion protection of outboard marine
engines. 4,391,239, CI. 123-198.00E.
Briska, Marian: See —
Bahr, Dietrich J.; and Briska, Marian, 4,392,143, CI. 346-135.100.
Bristow, Ian T.; and Thomelow, Alec, to Hoboum-Eaton Limited.
Positive displacement pump systems. 4,391,569, CI. 417-302.000.
British Petroleum Company Limited. The: See —
Kolombos, Alexander J.; Telford. Clive D.; and Young. Dennis,
4,392,003. CI. 585-661.000.
British Petroleum Company p.l.c. The: See —
Anderson, Susan; Brown, David E.; Graham, David E.; Mahmood,
Mahmood N.; and Man, Maurice C. M., 4,391,681, CI.
204-99.000.
Brockmeyer, Jerry W., to Swiss Aluminium Ltd. Ceramic foam filter
and aqueous slurry for making same. 4,391,918, CI. 501-127.000.
Brody, Aaron L.; Embro, Joseph J.; and Young, William E., to Mead
Corporation, The. Method for providing an inert sterile atmosphere
in an aseptic packaging machine. 4,391,080, CI. 53-426.000.
Brois, Stanley J.; and Gutierrez, Antonio, to Exxon Research & Engi-
neering Co. Thio bis-lactone compounds derived from n-octenyl
succinic anhydride. 4,391,981, CI. 549-252.000.
Bromley, Eric, to Coleco Industries, Inc. Electronic game providing
formation changes and method. 4,391,444, CI. 273-94.000.
Broms, Stig; and Freese, Lennart, to Innovation Aktiebolag. Hydraulic
blocking valve. 4,391,183, CI. 91-461.000.
Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Yamamoto, Yoshikazu; and Yanagi, Toshiaki, 4.391,211, CI.
112-121.120.
Brown. David E.: See —
Anderson. Susan; Brown. David E.; Graham, David E.; Mahmood,
Mahmood N.; and Man, Maurice C. M., 4.391,681, CI.
204-99.000.
Brown, David P.: See —
Cook, Lynn W.; and Brown, David P., 4,391,705, CI. 210-218.000.
Brown, Gary: See —
Price, Ronn; Brown, Gary; Muraski, Andrew A.; and Muraski,
William C, 4,392,119. CI. 340-38.00L.
Brown, George N., to Westvaco Corporation. Two stage fluid bed
regenerator. 4,391,586, CI. 432-58.000.
Brown, Lawrence G. Brake system and apparatus and method therefor.
4,391,352, CI. 188-24.120.
Brown, Mayo E., Jr.: See —
Labbe, Donald E.; and Brown. Mayo E., Jr., 4.391.101. CI.
60-646.000.
Brown. Richard P.; Barlow, George J.; and Peters, Arthur, to Honey-
well Information Systems Inc. Diagnostic subsystem for a cache
memory. 4,392,201, CI. 364-200.000.
Brown, Rollin G., to Edison International, Inc. Coating for halogen
lamps. 4,391,847, CI. 427-106.000.
Brown, Thomas A.; and Peil, William, to General Electric Company.
Lighting unit. 4.392.081. CI. 315-46.000.
Bruensicke, Wilhelm A., to Lockheed Corporation. Device for remov-
ing incendiary matter from the interior of an aircraft. 4,391.017. CI.
15-313.000.
Bruggemann. Harro. to Dindima Group Pty. Ltd., The. Signal-to-noise
improving system. 4,392,123, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Bruner, Robert: See —
Sizemore, Howard; and Bruner, Robert, 4,391,043, CI. 30-330.000.
Brunswick Corporation: See —
Hundertmark, James M., 4,391,592, CI. 440-61.000.
Puryear, John W., 4,391,418, CI. 242-84.20A.
Suerzl, Richard E., 4,391,254, CI. 123-478.000.
Staerzl, Richard E.. 4,391,255, CI. 123-481.000.
Buchmann, Klaus: See —
Schmitter, Ernst; Birzele, Paul; Buchmann, Klaus; Geitz, Gerhard;
Will, Bernhard; and Beifuss, Wolfgang, 4,392,199. CI.
364-200.000.
Buckley. Reginald R.; and Ostermayer. Frederick W., Jr.. to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Mask structures for photo-
etching procedures. 4,391,683, CI. 204-129.300.
Bucksch, Manfred, to Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen AG. Piston-and-
cylinder assembly for hydraulic disk clutch or brake. 4,391,354, CI.
188-71.500.
Bulten-Kanthal AB: See—
Magnusson, Bengt; and Gurtler, Hans, 4,392,052, CI. 219-532.000.
Burdett, Ian D., to Union Carbide Corporation. Alcohol separation
process. 4,391,919, CI. 518-725.000.
Bureau de Recherches Geologiques et Minieres: See—
Bloise, Rene; Lorang, Marcel; Morizot, Georges; and Boissonnade,
Genevieve, 4,391,792, CI. 423-617.000.
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, to Institut
Francais du Petrole. Process for consolidating geological formations.
4,391,555, CI. 405-264.000.
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, to Institut
Francais Du Petrole. Process for consolidating geological forma-
tions. 4,391,556, CI. 405-264.000.
Burke, John P., to Automotive Products Limited. Fluid assisted
booster. 4,391,162, CI. 74-579.00R.
Burlington Industries, Inc.: See —
Daniel, Vernon T., 4,391,584, CI. 432-8.000.
Burnett, George H.; Claflin, Warren E.; Lanzillotti, Harry V.; Lilly, A.
Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and Wayte, Alline
R., to Philip Morris, Incorporated. Smoking article. 4,391,285, CI.
131-364.000.
Burroughs Corporation: See—
Dockal, Ronald J., 4,392,207, CI. 364-900.000.
Fleming, Anthony, 4,392,037, CI. 200-340.000.
Burrows, James E.; and Greenaway. Ivan R., to Intemational Comput-
ers Limited. Dato processing system and diagnostic unit. 4,392,208,
CI. 364-900.000.
Buss, Gary L., to CTS Corporation. AdjusUble roury switch.
4,392,030, CI. 200-1 l.OOR.
Busse, Paul J., to InterNorth, Inc. Cleaning and regenerating ethylene
oxide catalysts. 4,391,735, CI. 252-413.000.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Bykhovsky, David G.; Voropaev, Albert A.; Olennikov, Evgeny F.; Casio Computer Co., Ltd.: See—
and Lopatina. Alia V. Non-consumable electrode. 4.392,047. CI. Wakabayashi. Takuo. deceased; Wakabayashi. Shigemasa. legal
219 145 210 representative; Tahara, Iwao; Aihara, Toshiharu; Takahashi,
Cabot Corporation See— Naoki; and Matsuo, Yushin, 4,391,530, CI. 368-63.000.
Gotten. George R.; and Medalia, Avrom L. 4.391.941, CI. Cassada, William A Ill-See- ^ ^ u a
524-495 000 Thurston, Michael E.; Cassada, William A., Ill; and Schardem,
Cacossa Frank G See^ Daniel J.. 4.391,655, CI. 148-20.600.
Deer Carmine A.; and Cacossa, Frank G.. 4,391.647. CI. Casull. Richard J. Trigger and firing mechanism for bolt action nfle.
106-115 000 4.391.058. CI. 42-69.00A.
Cadet, Christian; Dumortier. Bernard; and Souques, Georges, to La Catalfamo, Giuseppe. Adjustible actuator for plural dispensing devices.
Telemecanique Electrique. Electric protection device. 4.392,174. CI. 4,391,389, CI. 222-135.000.
361-45 000 ^*"' Pasqualino: See —
Cadwallader! James W, to SPS Technologies, Inc. Self-retained fas- ^f?l}i'J:!^''^r^2{ ,^'^^' '^"'°''*°' ""** ^"' '''^"*''"°'
tener 4 391544 CI 403-155 000 4,391,464, CI. 293-120.000.
Cahalan, Patrick T.; and Coury, Arthur J., to Medtronic. Inc. Tape Cavagnaro. William A., to Eastman Kodak Company. Roller fuser
electrode 4 391 278 CI 128-640 000 apparatus in which copy sheet jams are minimized. 4,391.509. CI.
Cal Detect Inc 5«e— 355-14.0FU.
Hutson. Donald G.. 4.391.777. CI. 422-84.000. Centronics Data Computer Corporation: See-
Caledonian Mming Company Limited: See- ^^ Dougherty. Edward C.^391.540, CI. 400-212.000.
Calhoun
starwheel. 4.391.372, CI. 209-523.000
Calkins Manufacturing Company: See —
Carrick, Lawrence K., 4,391,334, CI. 172-326.000.
Callander, Douglas D.: See —
000.
Welter, Albert, 4,391,404, CI. 229-62.500.
Champion Spark Plug Europe S.A.: See —
van den Berg. Johan H.. 4,391.015. CI. 15-250.420.
anaer, L»ougias l».: oee— tv^.,„Io. r» a ioi oil ri Chan, John K., to Union Carbide Corporation. Process for the prepara-
'^^J'c^ ' ^"'•'^**"' ^"S'*" °- '»-39''^^>- CI tio^ of organothioaldoxime compolmds. 4.391.759. CI. 260-*53.300.
^ . - r^'T.^.r-vi-.^ c A^ A » n A o J D .. c ,„« t. f- Chan. Tsiu C, to Mostek Corporation. One transistor-one capacitor
CALZATURIFICIO S.C.A.R.P.A. S.n.c. di Pansotto Francesco & C: ^^^^^^ ^^, ,• 4 392,210. CI. 365-149.000.
See — Chandler Peter D • See
Pansotto. Francesco. 4.391.049. CI. 36-114.000. Brint'on. Michael B. J.; Barnes. John; and Chandler, Peter D.,
Campbell. Andrew B: See— 4 391239 CI 123-198 OOE
Boyadjieff, George I.; and Campbell, Andrew B., 4,391,333, CI. chang, Mike s! H.; and Bennan. Michael F., to Pitney Bowes Inc.
166-379.000. „.Lj.. jiu 11^. Multilayered organic photoconductive element and process using
Campbell. Jay E.; Reichmann. Richard H.; and Lehmann. Li K., to polycarbonate barrier layer and charge generating layer. 4.391,888,
American Cyanamid Company. Surgical stapling control means. Uj 430.57 qoo
4.391.402, CI. 227.121XXXy . ., , . ^ k .k Chang. Shin S.: See-
Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in nght of. as represented by the Gudnason. Geir V.; Crowe. Laurie M.; and Chang, Shin S.,
Minister of National Defence: See— 4.391.830. CI. 426-43.000.
Armstrong. William A., 4.391,668. CI. 156-308.200. Chang, Tsuan Y., to Halcon SD Group. Inc.. The. Gasification of coal.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See— 4,391,612, CI. 48-202.000.
Fujiki, Makoto, 4,391,513, CI. 356-1.000. Chang, Wen H.; Gheewala. Tushar R.; and Harris, Erik P.. to Intema-
Inoue, Eiichi; Takatori. Yasushi; and Haruta, Masahiro. 4.392.141, tional Business Machines Corporation. Moat-guarded Josephson
CI. 346-1.100. devices. 4,392,148, CI. 357-5.000.
Kobayashi, Masatsune. 4.391,639. CI. 106-22.000. chant, Bernard J.: See—
Mabuchi, Minoru; Sakai, Kiyoshi; Ishikawa, Shozo; Egashira, Yuji; Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle, Robert W.; Chant, Bernard J.;
and Kitahara, Makoto, 4,391,889. CI. 430-59.000. Ouwerkerk. Anton V.; Kamath, Venkatesh; and Mussinan, Cyn-
Nakamura, Shunji; and Arao, Kozo, 4,391,512, CI. 355-3.0DD. thia J., 4,391,717, CI. 252-8.600.
Tajima, Akira; and Tsuji, Sadahiko, 4.391.493. CI. 350-422.000. Charbonnier. Simon, to Verdol S.A. Device for pneumatically thread-
Tamura, Yasuyuki; Kanbe, Junichiro; Nakamura. Shunji; Toyono, ing a yam in a double twist spindle. 4.391,090. CI. 57-279.000.
Tsutomu; and Takahashi, Tohru, 4,391,891, CI. 430-120.000. Charles, Barry G.: See—
Tsunekawa, Tokuichi, 4,391,500, CI. 354-31.000. Child, Robert P.; and Charles, Barry G., 4.391,762, CI. 261-
Cantrell, John H., Jr.; and Heyman, Joseph S., to United States of 121.00R.
America, National Aeronautics and Space Administration. Fre- Charles Stark Draper Laboratory, Inc., The: See—
quency tracked gated pulse technique for ultrasonic frequency. Sunton. William E.; Eisenhaure, David B.; and Drescher. Robert
4.391,142. CI. 73-610.000. D., 4.392.100. CI. 318-803.000.
Cap, Heinrich, to PapstMotoren GmbH & Co. KG. Method of tension- Chemical Systems, Inc.: See— .,„..„ ^, ,ao .: ,.0
ing a tape. 4,391,398, CI. 226-4.000. Das, Narayan; and Schaefer, Joy M.. 4,391,652. CI. 148-6. 15R.
Capshew. Charles E.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Alpha-olefin Chen^ Albert C: See— AjA-inf^om
^lymerization. 4.39 1 .736. CI. 252-429.00B. Box er. Dena L ; and Chen. Albert C. 4.39 1 'S^S. CI. 424-306.000
Cargnel Louis A.; See— Chen. Si-Yu. Key-(touch-) controlled gas range. 4,391,265, CI. 126-
^'hUsVS^^ ^' '"*' ^"*"''' ^"*' ^' ''^''•'"' ^^ Chenfn^Abraham. to Xerox Corporation. Voice coil actuator registra-
Carl ^ii Stiftmlg See- tio" *>""«•" 4.391.510, CI. 355-3.0SH.
Schining, Albert; and Schob. Wolfgang, 4.391,496, CI. 350-519.000. ^^'-^i.fpt^G^u^ng B.; Anderson. Richard G.; and Cherish. Peter.
4.391.611. CI. 48-1 97.00R.
Carlsen, W. John: See—
Melman, Paul; and Carlsen. W.John, 4,391.487, CI. 350-96.200. i 1 w «f«.—
Carlson, David J, to RCA Corporation. Television remote control ^''"?,7h^^i'^,ey G.; and Cheriton, Leslie W.. 4.391,931. CI.
system for selectively controlling a plurality of external apparatus. 523-318 000
4.392.022. CI 1 79-2.0TV. Chermey. Dale M.. to Hayssen Manufacturing Company. Control
Carr Richard F: See- Awno ri system for cyclic machines. 4.391.079. CI. 53-396.000.
^y^T^'.^^^*" ^' ^ Sprague. Robert B.. 4.391.712. CI. chevron Research Company: See-
2 10-652.000. ^ ,..„,. ^ o u Gibson. Kirk R., 4.391,740. CI. 252-470.000.
Camck. Lawrence K.. to Calkins Manufactunng Company. Hitch Rosenthal, Joel W. 4.391.699, CI. 208-8.0LE.
assembly. 4,391.334. CI. 172-326.000. Child. Robert P.; and Charles, Barry G., to Thorn Emi Domestic
Carrier Corporation: See— Electrical Appliances Limited. Aerated drinks machine. 4,391,762,
Carroll, Alexander A.; and Hannan. William F.. Ill, 4.391.349, CI. ci. 261-121.00R.
184-6.260. Children's Hospital Medical Center, The: See—
Ciarlei, Joseph A.; Tobin, Curtis L.; and Jennings, William B., Folkman, Moses J.; and Langer, Robert S., Jr.. 4,391,797, CI.
4.391,322. CI. 165-125.000. 424-19.000.
Carroll. Alexander A.; and Hannan. William F.. Ill, to Carrier Corpora- chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara R.T.: See —
tion. Turbomachine lubricating oil system. 4,391,349, CI. 184-6.260. Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi. Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha. Borbala;
Carroll. James J.: See— Strelisky. Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja, Gergely; Kovacz, Ga-
Frind, Gerhard; Carroll, James J.; and Van Noy, John H., bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4,391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
4,392.035, CI. 200-144.00B. Chiquiar-Arias, Marcelo, to Mercantile & Technical Promotions Inc.
Carsub Corporation: See— Non-reusable, disposable syringes. 4.391,273. CI. 604-1 10.000.
Kugele, Thomas G.; and Gilmore, Dennis W., 4,391,757, CI. Chiu, Chung-Wai. to National Starch and Chemical Corporation.
260-446.000. Process for preparing instant gelling surches. 4.391.836, CI.
Carter. Brian, to Societe Prl. Electrical convertor heater. 4,392,048. CI. 426-578.000.
219-367.000. Chiu, Pei-Liang: See-
Carter Lecwood C; and Ncary. Robin P. Paperboard load-supporting Hsu, Yun-Tung. 4.391.020, CI. 16-314.000.
pallet. 4,391,202, CI. 108-51.300. Chlanda, Frederick P.: See-
Casey John A • and Ducasse. Joseph C. V., to Fabcon Incorporated. Mani, Krishnamurthy; and Chlanda, Frederick P.. 4,391,680, CI.
Mill roll. 4.391,026, CI. 29-121.600. 204-98.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
Choudhury. Hrishikesh; and Zaha. Juergen H.. to Abbott Laboratories. Coleco Industries, Inc.: See—
Solventless assembly of flexible tubing to a component. 4.391,028. CI. Bromley, Enc, 4,391,444, CI. 273-94.000.
29-235 000 Colgate Palmolive Company: See —
Christensen Inc See— Benz. Claude L., 4.391.727, CI. 252-99.000.
Aumank. James T.. 4.391.328. CI. 166-325.000. Tav^ Edward A.; and Eigen. Edward 4 391 798 C>; *24-5I000.
Christensen James R See— Collins. William T. Door holding clamp. 4.391.437. CI. 269-254.0CS.
Weber.Henry J; Hoechst. Lonnie D.; Christensen. James R.; and Colortronic Reinhard & Co. KG: See-
Watts. Verrie C, 4,391,344. CI. 180-271.000. Reinhard. Max; and Konimayer, Horst, 4,391,140, CI. 73-432.00R.
Christian, Steve. Perforating device especially adapted for use with Colt Industnw Operating Oirp.: See-
printing machines. 4,391.175. CI. 83-678.000. ^ , Larson, William C. 4,391,245 CI. 123-339.000.
Chrysler France See— Columbian Chemicals Company: See—
Pham, Anh T., 4,391,435, CI. 267-140.100. ^ , Estopinal. Earl J.. 4,391,789, CI 423-457.000.
Chu. Chin-Chiun, to Mobil Oil Corporation. Zeolite catalysts modified Columbus Show Case Company The: See-
with group lA metals. 4,391,739. CI. 252-455.007. ^ Venn.llion, Eugene F 4.39^069, CI. 52-126.400.
Chugai Seiykku Kabushiki Kaisha: See- Combustion Engineenng, Inc, See-
Suda, Tatsuo; Hirasawa. Yoshihei; Takahashi. Sachio; Abe. Etsuko; ^nthony, Andrew J • *.391,77l, CI. 376^51.000. .....^^
Konno Kunio; and Aoki, Tadao, 4,391,802. CI. 424-236.000. ^ Smith, Donald A.; and Pote. Bnice M., 4,391,561. CI. 414-218.000.
r-k,.„« riawiii n . c^^ Commissanat a I Energie Atomique: See-
Chung Dav^a °:-^f- . 30, , ,2 ^ 35„ 35. qqq Folcher, Gerard; and Paris, Jacques. 4,391,881, CI. 429-111.000.
A 1QI nw^i lA* i-)<f¥^ Conn, Andrew r.: See —
4.391.322. er 1M-1Z3.UUU. Johnson. Virgil E.. Jr.; Sundaram. T. R.; and Conn. Andrew F.,
•"""S/r.^jMwS. 544.2M.m /."■•»'■ CK«0-208.000,
Ma?et: Lud^g; and Durr, Dieter. 4.391,624. CI. 71-86.000. " De Carlo. Leonard J.. 4.391.327. CI. 166-307.000.
Rempfler, Hermann; and Bohner, Beat. 4,391,628, CI. 71-92.000,
Vlattas, Isidoros, 4,391,808, CI. 424-250.000.
Zergenyi, Janos, 4,391,980, CI. 548-239.000.
CII Honeywell Bull: See—
Lequien, Jean, 4,392,164, CI. 360-77.000.
Cincinnati Mine Machinery Company, The: See—
Reinert, A. Joe, 4,391,228, CI. 122-28.000.
Conradty GmbH Meiallelektroden KG: See—
Koziol, Konrad; and Wenk, Ench, 4,391,695, CI. 204-286.000.
Constance, Lillie B. Thermal drapery construction. 4,391,865, CI
428-74.000.
Constructors John Brown Limited: See —
Krekeler, Claude B., 4,391,472, CI. 299-86.000.
Shotbolt, Keith, 4,391,331, CI. 166-342.000.
Liofilizaciones Es- Cook, Donald M.. to NCR Corporation. Multiple source clock encoded
Cinza Santiago ^ ; and Padro, Carios E. L . to -"■■"—"- " communications error detection circuit. 4.392.226, CI. 371-61 .000
•/?o',^o7r^ L5»?nf^ cephadroxyl salt. ^^^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^.„.^ ^ ^^ j^^^^^ ^ j^j,„^„ g^^y
4,391.974 CL 544^30.000. Products Company. Nonwoven fibrous product. 4.391.869. CI.
Citizen Watch Co., Ltd.: See— 458 218 000
'^".I'roTrirv?^"' '""^ Matsumoto. Masataka. 4.391.534. CI. cooV Kenneth V; Cunningham. Robert A. Jr.; and Murrin. Horace
«, ^ Ij T^L A lot ^« r-1 ^M ->ai nnn T.. to United States of America. Energy. Ultrasonic probe for in-
Waki. Masahiko. 4.391.533. CI. 368-281.000. specting double-wall tube. 4,391,143, CI. 73-623.000.
Claassen, Peter: See— x,„Ar,tr Cook, Lynn W.; and Brown, David P., to Envirotech Corporation.
'^^TJ','',.?"^^ ^^V.nS^'*'"' ^^"' Zeinnger, Rudolf. B^,',^,f„ jig^stor covers. 4.391,705, CI. 210-218.000.
^'^^I'-^ViP^- o? o A. V 1 * .f ^^^;„„ Coon, Julian B.; Fowler, James C; Payton, Charles E.; and Waters,
Claesson, Dick V., to Saab-Scania Aktiebolag. Arrangement for driving ^.enneth H., to Conoco Inc. Acoustic system to guide a coal seam
a mechanism in an internal combustion engine. 4,JVl,25S, t_i. ^y^ger. 4,391,336, CI. 175-45.000.
123-508.000. Cooper, Glenn D, to General Electnc Company. Polyphenylene ether
Clafiin, Wan-en E.: See- n „ u ,,. v composition and process for production. 4.391,950, CI. 525-132.000.
Burnett. George H.; Claflin, Warren E.^LanzilloUi, Harry V^; Cordova, Samuel; and Spitz, Robert J., to Spitz, Robert J. Automatic
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and ^^^^ j^^^ ^j^^j. 4,391,059, CI. 43-15.000.
Wayte, Alline R., 4,391,285, CI. 131-364.000. Corley, Robert C; and Myers, Frederick F.. Jr., to United Slates of
Clarion Co., Ltd.: See— America, Air Force. Copper containing ballistic additives. 4,391,660,
Ohhashi, Shiro; Ubusawa, Fumiyoshi; Iwasaki, Shoji; and Manaka, q 149-19.900.
Tetsuyuki, 4,392,243, CI. 455-74.000. ^ ,„,,,,„,,,-. ^_ Cornell Research Foundation, Inc.: See—
Yamada, Shigeru; and Ohhara, Kazuya, 4,392,114, CI. 333-28.00T. p^^j, comelis J.; and Milanowski. G. Jan, 4,391,124, CI. 73-
Clark Equipment Company: See— \ ODV.
Malott, Theodore A.; and Wolfe, Robert W., 4.391.158. CI. 74- Szkolnik. Michael. 4.391.813. CI. 424-269.000.
473.00R. . „ _, Coming Glass Works: See-
Weber, Henry J.; Hoechst, Lonnie D.; Chnstensen, James R.; and g^n George H.; and Coming Glass Works, 4,391,914, CI
Watts, Veme C, 4.391.344. CI. 180-271.000. 501-4.000.
Cleaveland. Bryan L.: See— Costa Bastart, Enrique. Door catch. 4,391,463. CI 292-263.000.
Noble, Milton L.; and Cleaveland, Bryan L., 4,392,078, CI. Costello, Louis B., to Teletype Corporation. Radiation shield for a
315-4.000. cathoderay tube. 4,392,083, CI. 315-85.000.
Clesid: See— Costruzioni Meccaniche Lonati S.p.A.: See—
Sylvain. Daniel, 4,391,400, CI. 226-1 13.000. Lonati, Francesco, 4,391,105, CI. 66-138.000.
Cleveland William K. S.; Webb, Jimmy L.; and Orlando, Charles M., to Cosyns, Jean; Juguin, Bernard; Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Miqucl,
General Electric Company. l,l-Dichloro-2,2-bis(hydroxyphenyl- Jean, to Institut Francais du Petrole. Process for upgrading olefinic
)ethylenc. 4,391,996, CI. 568-726.000. C4 cuts. 4,392.002, CI. 585-329.000.
Clinical Data, Inc.: See— Cotten, George R.; and Medalia, Avrom I., to Cabot Corporation.
Stein, Israel M., 4,391,279, CI. 128-643.000. Subilized polypropylene compositions. 4.391,941. CI. 524-495.000.
Cloud, Robert C: See— Cotteret, Jean: See—
Lamar Richard S.; Ferreira. Laurence E.; and Cloud, Robert C, Rosenbaum, Georges; Grollier, Jean F.; and Cotteret, Jean,
4,391.733. CI. 252-378.00R. 4,391,603.0.8-424.000. , «•
Cluniat. Claude, to L.G.T. Laboratoire General des Telecommunica- Couper, Robert A.; and Denning, Bruce S., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Pnnt
tions Signal transmission system comprising a monolinearity product control circuit for a word processing system. 4,392,197, CI.
precon-ectiondevice. 4,392.252. CI. 455-116.000. 364-200.000. . . ^ wr^c
Coan Michael H See— Courreges. Francis G.. to National Semiconductor Corporation. MOb
Mitra Gautam Coan. Michael H.; and Wada. Shohachi, 4.391.746. Integrated circuit having refractory meul or meul silicide intercon-
Cl. 260-112.008. nect layer. 4.392.150. CI. 357-51.005.
Coates. Colin F., to Sterling Drug Inc. Waste treatment process. Coury, Arthur J.: See— , a ,q, -,-,o r'l
4,39i,715. CI. 210-696.000. Cahalan, Patrick T.; and Coury, Arthur J.. 4.391.278, CI.
Cobum Joel T • See 128-640.000.
Huber. Calvin O.; Schick, Karl G.; and Cobum. Joel T.. 4.391.775, Cousins, Otto J., to Harper-Wyman Company^Rapid Tfpotae thennal
CI. 422-68.000. switch for isolated load control. 4,392,050, CI. 219-491.000.
Coca Cola ComiMnv See Coutures, Jean L.: See —
Gudnason Geir V.; Crowe. Laurie M.; and Chang, Shin S., Benoit-Gonin, Roger; Berger, Jean L.; and Coutures, Jean L..
4,391,830,0.426-43.000. ^^^ 4,392.124, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Colbum William A., to Process Development Corporation. Method Covitch, Michael J.: ^e— i ^ i .„^
and™ppkratTfor pulverizing materials by vaculm. comminution. Baczek, Stanley K ; McCain, G. Howard; Benezra. Leo L.; and
4,391,411,0.241-1.000.
1032 CO.— 16
Covitch, Michael'j., 4.391.844. CI. 427-44.000.
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Cowan, Frederick C. Fuel nozzle with concentric ignitor. 4,391,582, CI.
431-266.000.
Cowden, James J., to RCA Corporation. Method and apparatus for
holding styli. 4,391,696, CI. 204-297.00W.
Craggs, Thomas A. Pumping apparatus for pumping liquids such as
slurrys. 4,391,571, CI. 417-403.000.
Cramp, Allan: See —
Neathway, Graham; Cramp, Allan; and Hum, Albert, 4,392,206, CI.
364-900.000.
Crawford, Wheeler C: See-
Sung, Rodney L.; Sweeney, William M.; and Crawford, Wheeler
C, 4,391,610, CI. 44-56.000.
Cregge, Robert J.: See —
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet, Norton P.,
4.391.806, CI. 424-248.400.
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet, Norton P.,
4.391.807, CI. 424-248.400.
Creusot-Loire: See —
Bonnor, Yannick; Raisson, Gerard; and Honnorat, Yves, 4,391,772,
CI. 419-23.000.
Creyf, Hubert S., to S.A. PRB n.v. Soil stabilizers and their preparation.
4,391,926, CI. 523-132.000.
Crisler, John R.: See —
Forrester, Howard M.; and Crisler, John R., 4,391,515, CI.
356-5.000.
Cronan, John M.; Haynes, Joseph M.; and Jones, Darrell D., to Dow
Chemical Company, The. Safety device for ladder access opening to
an elevated platform. 4,391,347, CI. 182-113.000.
Crosby, Gary A., to Red Fox Industries, Inc. Marine sewage treatment
with biological filter. 4,391,703, CI. 210-151.000.
Cross, Alan: See —
Stevenson, John; Cross, Alan; and Anderson, John G., 4,391,642,
CI. 106-38.230.
Crossley, Roger, to John Wyeth and Brother Limited. Process for
preparing 5H-pyrrolo[2,l-c]-[l,4]thiazepine-l,5-diones. 4,391,752, CI.
260-239.308.
Crowe, Laurie M.: See —
Gudnason, Geir V.; Crowe, Laurie M.; and Chang, Shin S.,
4,391,830, CI. 426-43.000.
Cruz, Mamerto M., Jr., to Morca, Inc. Readily hydratable cellulose and
preparation thereof 4,391,973, CI. 536-56.000.
CTS Corporation: See —
Buss, Gary L., 4,392,030, CI. 200-1 l.OOR. -
Cuilis. Herbert M; and Stamminger, Reinhard, to Monegon, Ltd. Com-
bined electrical and thermal solar collector. 4,392,008, CI.
136-248.000.
Cummins, Donald L., to AMF Incorporated. Rotary drum dough
divider. 4,391,576, CI. 425-241.000.
Cunningham, Robert A., Jr.: See —
Cook, Kenneth V.; Cunningham, Robert A., Jr.; and Murrin,
Horace T., 4,391.143, CI. 73-623.000.
Curran, Dennis P.: See —
Kende, Andrew S.; Curran, Dennis P.; King, Margaret L.; and
Feldstein, Neil A., 4,391,982, CI. 549-433.000.
Curtis, Hazen, III, to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated.
Miniature electrical switch. 4,392.031, CI. 200-16.00R.
Cutter Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Mitra, Gautam; Coan, Michael H.; and Wada, Shohachi, 4,391,746,
CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Ng, Paul K.; and Foumel, Michael A., 4,391,801, CI. 424-177.000.
CVI Incorporated: See —
Sarcia, Domenico S., 4,391,103, CI. 62-6.000.
Czeschka, Franz. Spring strips for connections between printed circuit
board. 4,391,482, CI. 339-59.00M.
Cziment, Avi. Key with light in handle. 4,392,186, CI. 362-116.000.
Czuba, Leonard F.; and Laurin, Dean G., to Baxter Travenol Laborato-
ries Inc. Catheter hub assembly. 4,391,029, CI. 29-450.000.
Dahmen, Hans: See —
Block, Hans-Dieter; and Dahmen, Hans, 4,391,761, CI. 260-969.000.
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Gaus, Hermann, 4,391,165, CI. 74-869.000.
Dainippon Ink & Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Okoshi, Noboru; Kudo, Kin-ichi; and Shimoyama, Shoichi,
4,391,640, CI. 106-29.000.
Daiwa Seiko Inc.: See —
Iwama, Shinichi; and Egasaki, Takashi, 4,391,419, CI. 242-84.50A.
Dal-Craft, Inc.: See—
Dalbo, Lorraine E., 4,391,370. CI. 206-574.000.
Dalbo, Lorraine E., to Dal-CraA. Inc. Embroidery project accessory
carrying case. 4,391.370, CI. 206-574.000.
Daman, Lloyd W.; and Shamp, Donald E., to Libbey-Owens-Ford
Company. PHuid cooled burner structure. 4,391,581, CI. 431-160.000.
Damon Corporation: See —
Lim, Franklin, 4.391.909, CI. 435-178.000.
Dan T. Moore Co.: See-
Moore, Dan T., Ill; and Fischer, Michael F., 4,391,384, CI.
220-359.000.
Daniel, Chelliah, to Ashland Oil, Inc. Oxydehydrogenation of isobu-
tyric acid and its lower alkyl esters. 4,391,989, CI. 562-599.000.
Daniel, Vernon T., to Burlington Industries, Inc. Non-contact infrared
fabric temperature monitoring. 4,391,584, CI. 432-8.000.
Daniels, William A.; and Zawadzki, Rainer K., to American Cyanamid
Company. N-Denitration of N,2,6-trinitroanilines with phase transfer
catalysts. 4,391,992, CI. 564-441.000.
Das, Narayan; and Schaefer, Joy M., to Chemical Systems, Inc. Surface
treatment for aluminum and aluminum alloys. 4,391,652, CI. 148-
6.15R.
Data Motion, Incorporated: See —
Seitz, Alan F., 4,391,399, CI. 226-74.000.
Datak Corporation, The: See —
Pointon, David W.. 4,391.853. CI. 427-152.000.
David. Samuel: See —
Thies. Peter W.; and David, Samuel, 4,391,819, CI. 424-278.000.
Davis, Chester A.: See —
Hsiung, Du Y.; Davis, Chester A.; and Nicholson, Harold J.,
4,391,286, CI. 132-7.000.
Davis, Lawrence C, Jr.: See —
Lesley, David J.; and Davis, Lawrence C, Jr., 4,391,934, CI.
524-43.000.
Davis, William R. Cotton press. 4,391.186, CI. 100-7.000.
Davy-Loewy Limited: See —
Gronbech, Robert W.. 4.391.417, CI. 242-78.600.
Davy McKee (Minerals & MeUls) Limited: See-
Jackson. Ian D.; Berry, Derek; Rowden, George A.; and Dilley,
Malcolm, 4,391,711, CI. 210-634.000.
Davy McKee (Oil & Chemicals) Limited: See —
Harris, Norman; Flintoff, John F.; and Kippax, John W.. 4.391,677,
CI. 203-28.000.
Day, William J.; and Weiss, Bernard J., to Raytheon Company. Self-
cleaning microwave convection oven. 4,392,038, CI. 2I9-10.55D.
Deare, Frederick A. Retractable traded cart. 4,391,343, CI.
180-198.000.
DeBar, David E., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Randomly accessible memory display. 4,392,209. CI. 365-110.000.
De Carlo, Leonard J., to Conoco Inc. Solvent foam stimulation of coal
degasification well. 4,391,327, CI. 166-307.000.
Deer, Carmine A.; and Cacossa, Frank G., to Sand and Sea Corpora-
tion. Spackeling composition. 4,391,647, CI. 106-115.000.
Deere & Company: See —
Jacklin, Roger L.. 4.391.157. CI. 74-402.000.
Koning, Richard W.; Meiers, Gerald F.; and Anstey, Henry D.,
4,391,187, CI. 100-88.000.
Rice, Dennis A., 4,391,065, CI. 49-465.000.
Degussa Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Spindler. Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner,
Friedrich; and Martens, Jurgen, 4.391.987, CI. 562-559.000.
Spindler. Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger. Friedhelm; Bittner,
Friedrich; and Martens. Jurgen, 4,391,988, CI. 562-559.000.
Zilske, Wolfgang; and Kuhn, Werner, 4,391,679, CI. 204-43.00G.
Deibele. Florian C., to Tektronix, Inc. Quarter-turn fastener. 4,391.461,
CI. 292-204.000.
Del Giudice, Michel, to Thomson-CSF. Compact subharmonic mixer
for EHF wave receiver using a single wave guide and receiver
utilizing such a mixer. 4,392,255, CI. 455-328.000.
DeLorean, John Z. Dither assisted steering. 4,391,340, CI. 180-79.000.
Demny, Werner, to Friedrich Kocks GmbH & Company. Rolling mills
and methods of rolling. 4,391,117, CI. 72-224.000.
Demura, Takayuki: See —
Sawada, Hiroshi; and Demura, Takayuki, 4,391,256, CI.
123-489.000.
Demus, Dietrich: See —
Kuschel, Frank; Demus, Dietrich; Pfeiffer, Doris; and Deutscher,
Hans-Joachim, 4,391,730, CI. 252-299.100.
de Niet, Edmond: See —
Rijckaert, Albert M. A.; de Niet, Edmond; and Beun, Jacobus P.,
4,392,163, CI. 360-76.000.
Denkler, Maria; and Braun, Frederic, to Diamalt Aktiengesellschaft.
Desizing agent and process for preparation thereof. 4,391,745, CI.
252-554.000.
Denley, Ronald S.. to Oak Industries Inc. Method of making a mem-
brane switch. 4.391,845, CI. 427-58.000.
Denning, Bruce S.: See —
Couper, Robert A.; and Denning, Bruce S., 4,392,197, CI.
364-200.000.
Dennis, James G.: See —
Jackson, G. C, Jr.; Bramlett, Kenneth W.; and Dennis, James G.,
4,391,547, CI. 403-341.000.
Dentsply Research & Development Corp.: See —
Dougherty, Emery W., 4,391,590, CI. 433-90.000.
Depa S.p.A.: See —
Tarro, Giulio, 4,391.911, CI. 435-239.000.
Depor Industries: See —
Geeck, Thurlow, 4,391,855, CI. 427-383.700.
Derick, Burton N.; Moynihan, Robert E.; and Wolfe, Jon W., to Du
Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Polyvinyl butyral ink formu-
lation. 4,391.867, CI. 428-195.000.
Derks. Harry G.. to Fleetwood Furniture Company. Wireless signaling
system. 4,392,132, CI. 340-825.140.
Desourteaux, Dominique E., to Societe Anonyme Francelco. Sealing
sleeve for use with electrical connectors. 4,391,483, CI. 339-94.00R.
Dettmers, Michael: See —
Weirich, Walter; Dettmers, Michael; Becker, Kunibert; and Rosen-
berg, Harry, 4,391,181, CI. 91-29.000.
Deutsch, Albert: See —
Shimazu, Ken-ichi; and Deutsch, Albert, 4,391,894, CI.
430- 1 54.000.
Deutscher, Hans-Joachim: See —
Kuschel, Frank; Demus, Dietrich; Pfeiffer, Doris; and Deutscher,
Hans-Joachim, 4,391,730, CI. 252-299.100.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
Devenyi, Tibor; Bocsa, Klara K.; Kovats, Ferenc; Pongor, Sandor;
Szabolcsi, Gcrtrud; and Such, Mihaly, to MTA Szegedi Biologiai
Kozpont Enzimologiai Intezete. Method of modifying the conforma-
tion of food and feed proteins. 4,391,839, CI. 426-626.000.
De Vries, Adrian J., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Triple transit cancel-
lation. 4,392,116, CI. 333-194.000.
Diamalt Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Denkler, Maria; and Braun, Frederic, 4,391,745, CI. 252-554.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See—
Baczek, Sunley K.; McCain, G. Howard; Benezra, Leo L.; and
Covitch, Michael J., 4,391,844, CI. 427-44.000.
Marcellis, Alphonso W.; and Johnson, Grannis S., 4.391.645. CI.
106-90.000.
Didier-Werke AG.: See—
Jeschke, Peter; and Plath, Jurgen, 4.391,392, CI. 222-598.000.
Diederichs, Rolf, to Krautkramer-Branson, Inc. Ultrasonic test probe.
4,391,144, CI. 73-629.000.
Diel, Hartmut: See— ^ . „ ., -loi i«t
Bindemagel, Ali; Holthoff, Helmut; and Diel, Hartmut, 4,391,357,
CI. 192-94.000. . ^ ^,
Diesch Robert E., to Pako Corporation. Slide mounter with film curl
accommodator. 4,391,082, CI. 53-520.000.
Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd.: See- „ . ^ -,„, ,,-,
Abe, Yoshiaki; Kubota, Yutaka; and Sugimoto. Hitoshi, 4,391,237,
CI. 123-179.00H.
DigiUl Equipment Corporation: See— „ • . . r- j
Arulpragasam, Jega A.; Giggi, Robert A.; Lary, Richard F.; and
Sullivan, Daniel T., 4,392,200, CI. 364-200.000.
Dilley, Malcolm: See— ^ ^ _ .„
Jackson, Ian D.; Berry, Derek; Rowden, George A.; and Dilley,
Malcolm, 4,391,711, CI. 210-634.000.
' Garcta^Enrique; and Dillon, Peter L. P., 4,392,157, CI. 358-213.000.
Di Matteo, Paul, to Solid Photography, Inc. Arrangement for scanning
points in space. 4,392,182, CI. 362-5.000.
Dindima Group Pty. Ltd., The: See—
Bruggemann. Harro, 4.392,123, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Discovision Associates: See —
Morrison, Rocky V., 4,391,579, CI. 425-548.000.
Disctron, Inc.: See— ^
Wright, Harold T., 4,392.165. CI. 360-105.000.
Dittmar, Walter: See—
Blume, Ernst; Schaper, Wolfgang; Raether, Wolfgang; and Ditt-
mar, Walter, 4,391,805, CI. 424-246.000.
Doan, Robert L. Extendable torch guide. 4,391,433, CI. 266-77.000.
Dobrynin, Vladimir E.: See—
Garkusha, Anatoly V.; and Dobrynin, Vladimir E., 4,391,564, CI.
415-126.000. ^ ^ ^ ^ ,. .
Dockal, Ronald J., to Burroughs Corporation. Card reader-data link
processor. 4,392,207, CI. 364-900.000.
Dodge, Paul A. Bowstring release device. 4,391,263, CI. 124-35.00A.
Doherty, Charles H., Ill, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Apparatus for restringing multiple threadhnes. 4,391,086. CI.
57-22.000.
Harrison, Boyd L.; and Doherty, Niall S., 4,391,818, CI.
424-277.000. , . ^,,
Dohshita, Hidetoshi; Ishii, Yoshiya; and Fujitani, Nobuyuki, to Nippon-
denso Co., Ltd. Stopping device for engine supplied with fuel by fuel
injection pump. 4.391,241, CI. 123-198.0DB.
Don, Johannes A.; and Scholten, Joseph J. F., to Stamicarbon, b.v.
Process for the preparation of a cycloalkene through partial hydroge-
nation of the corresponding aromatic hydrocarbon. 4.392,001, CI.
585-269.000. , . . , ^
Dondelewski, Michael A. Process for the beneficiation of carbonous
materials with the aid of ultrasound. 4,391,608, CI. 44-l.OSR.
Dorina Nahmaschinen GmbH: See— ..,,,„ .^
Holl, Helmar; and Kessler, Rolf, 4,391.214, CI. 1 12-269.100.
Dougherty, Edward C, to Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
Within-linc color change printing. 4,391,540, CI. 400-212.000.
Dougherty, Emery W., to Dentsply Research & Development Corp.
Cartndge for viscous material. 4,391,590, CI. 433-90.000.
Dow Chemical Company, The: See— „ k, d
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet, Norton P.,
4.391.806, CI. 424-248.400. „ ,., o
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet, Norton P.,
4.391.807, CI. 424-248.400.
Au, Andrew T., 4,391,630, CI. 71-105.000. ,^ „ r^
Cronan, John M.; Haynes, Joseph M.; and Jones, Darrell U.,
4,391,347, CI. 182-113.000.
Pimlott. John R., 4,391,693, CI. 204-237.000.
Dow Coming Corporation: See—
Falender James R.; and McHale, Angelika H.. 4,391,937, CI.
524-119.000.
Johnson, Robert D., 4,391,921, CI. 521-66.000.
Lee, Chi-long; and Spells, Sherwood, 4.391,765, CI. 264-26.000.
Downes Peter B., to DSH. Comer connector for sliding doors.
4,391.019, CI. 16-105.000. '
Drach, John E., to Scott Paper Company. Wet strength resins.
4.391,878, CI. 428-479.600.
Dragerwerk Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Hinz. Claus-Dieter; and Pastemack, Adalbert, 4,390.997. CI.
2-81 000
Dreier, Ernst; and Spring, Kurt, to Fritz Gegauf Aktiengesellschaft
Bemina-Naehmaschinenfabrik. Needle thread guide device.
4.391.213, CI. 112-246.000.
Drescher, Robert D.; See—
Stanton, William E.; Eisenhaure, David B.; and Drescher. Robert
D, 4.392.100, CI. 318-803.000.
Dresser Industries, Inc.: See—
Greenlee, Donald R., 4,391,326, CI. 166-240.000.
Jackson, G. C, Jr.; Bramlett, Kenneth W.; and Dennis, James G.,
4,391,547, CI. 403-341.000.
Michael, David J; and Wishon. Berhl E., 4,391,917, CI.
501-100.000.
Drinon, Alva C, to Weyerhaeuser Company. Container. 4,391,405, CI.
229-3 l.OOR.
Drost, Comelis J.; and Milanowski, G. Jan, to Cornell Research Foun-
dation, Inc. Electroacoustic transducer calibration method and appa-
ratus. 4,391,124, CI. 73-1. ODV.
DSH: See—
Downes, Peter B., 4,391,019, CI. 16-105.000.
D'Sidocky. Richard M., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The.
Reduction of cyclopentadiene from isoprene streams. 4,392.004, CI.
585-820.000.
Dubois, Francois Y.: See—
Dubois, Yves; and Dubois, Francois Y., 4,392,061, CI. 290-53.000.
Dubois, Yves; and Dubois, Francois Y. Apparatus for utilizing the
energy of wave swells and waves. 4,392,061, CI. 290-53.000.
Duca, James F.; and Moline, Jerry A., to Ampex Corporation. Video
key edge generator for increasing the size of an associated border,
drop shadow and/or outline. 4.392,156, CI. 358-183.000.
Ducasse, Joseph C. V.: See —
Casey, John A.; and Ducasse, Joseph C. V., 4,391,026, CI.
29-121.600.
Dudley, Raymond. Electronic chess game. 4,391,447, CI. 273-238 000.
Dumortier, Bernard: See —
Cadet, Christian; Dumortier, Bernard; and Souques, Georges,
4,392,174, CI. 361-45.000.
Duncan, Jeffrey B.; and Bolton, Joseph A., to Albany International
Corp. Basementless separator system. 4,391,673, CI. 162-217.000.
Dupain, Jean, to Societe des Ciments Francais. Automatic device for
making samples for analysis. 4,391,774, CI. 422-63.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. 1., and Company: See—
Derick, Burton N.; Moynihan, Robert E.; and Wolfe, Jon W.,
4,391,867, CI. 428-195.000.
Doherty, Charles H., Ill, 4,391,086, Ci. 57-22.000.
Foederer, Wilhelmus T. M., 4,391,484, Ci. 339-97.00P.
Harrell, Jerald R., 4,391,922, CI. 521-88.000.
Harris, John F., Jr., 4,391,966, CI. 528-176.000.
Hawkins, William E., 4.391.127, CI. 73-37.700.
Levitt, George, 4.391,627, CI. 71-90.000.
Nair, Kumaran M., 4.392,180, CI. 361-321.000.
Olson, Allan H., 4.391,930, CI. 523-219.000.
Rys-Sikora, John, 4,391,923, CI. 521-96.000.
Sysak, Peter K., 4,391.903, CI. 430-629.000.
Waggoner. Manon G., 4,391,936, CI. 524-89.000.
Durette, Philippe L.; and Shen, Tsung-Ying, to Merck & Co., Inc.
Immunologically active peptidyl disaccharides and methods of prepa-
ration. 4,391,800, CI. 424-177.000.
Durr, Dieter: See — ^^
Maier, Ludwig; and Durr, Dieter, 4,391,624, CI. 71-86.000.
Dursch Friedrich: See— ' „ . j ■
Wang Yu-Chang J.; Dursch Friedrich; O Laughlin, Richard L.;
and Prusik, Thaddeus. 4,391,755, CI. 260-397.450.
Dybas, Richard A.; Grier. Nathaniel; and Witzel, Bruce E.. to Merck &
Co Inc 2-(Substitutedpiperidylmethyl) propane nitriles and compo-
sitions thereof 4,391,812, CI. 424-267.000.
E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc.: See— „ . ^ ,
Wang, Yu-Chang J.; Dursch Friedrich; O Laughlin. Richard L.;
and Prusik, Thaddeus, 4,391.755, CI. 260-397.450.
Eastman Kodak Company: See—
Cavagnaro, William A., 4,391,509, CI. 355-I4.0FU.
Frishberg, Mark D.; and Krutak, James J., Sr., 4,391,886, CI.
Garcia, Enrique; and Dillon, Peter L. P., 4,392,157, CI. 358-213.000
Hook, Richard J.; and Rule, Mark, 4,391,985, CI. 562-414.000.
Maier, Thomas O.; and Richards, Jack L., 4,391,896, CI.
430-223.000.
Eaton Corporation: See —
Kolb, Arthur F.; Franklin, Arthur J.; and Miller, Toby I., 4,392. 118,
CI. 337-154.000.
Ebauches Electroniques, S.A.: See—
Freer William G.; Vamey, John C; and Williamson, John H..
4,391,491, CI. 350-341.000.
Kumar, Niraj; and Mouthon, Marc. 4,392,217, CI. 368-188.000.
Eberle, John. Golf ball dispenser. 4,391,446, CI. 273-201.000.
Eckardt, Peter; and Voetz, Franz J., to Hoechsl Aktiengesellschaft.
Shaped articles made from expanded minerals. 4,391,644, CI.
106-85.000. ^ ^ ,
Eckels, Calvin; and James, John, to Time and Frequency Technology,
Inc Attention signal receiver for emergency broadcast systems.
4,392,248, CI. 455-161.000.
Ecklund, Lawrence M., to Motorola Inc. Mechanical tuner with micro-
phonics elimination circuitry. 4,392,254, CI. 455-173.000.
Ederle John A.; Hoer, Ralph A.; and Irwin, George H., to Ralston
Purina Company. Process for preparing meat products containing a
protein extender with tiunium dioxide tracer. 4,391,840, Ci.
426-641.000. ^ ^, . ,, . .
Edinger Egon; and Kohler, Gerd, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Method of manufacture of identical parts displaying different indicia.
4,391,764, CI. 264-25.000.
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Edison International, Inc.: See —
Brown, Rollin G., 4,391,847, CI. 427-106.000.
Edstrom, Lars G., to Malmohus Invest AB. Method and apparatus for
calibration and adjustment of inserter for sheeted material. 4,391,439,
CI. 271-90.000,
Edwards, Elgin: See —
Tyler, Truman V.; and Sprague, Robert B., 4,391,712, CI.
210-652.000.
Egami, Masafumi: See —
TateBe, Yoshikazu; Egami, Masafumi; and Miyawaki, Toshimitsu,
4,391,231, CI. 123-41.690.
Egami, Tsuneyuki; Kawai, Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi,
Hideki, to Nippon Soken, Inc. Gas flow measuring apparatus.
4,391,132, CI. 73-118.000.
Egasaki, Takashi: See —
Iwama, Shinichi; and Egasaki, Takashi, 4,391,419, CI. 242-84.50A.
Egashira, Yuji: See —
Mabuchi, Minoru; Sakai, Kiyoshi; Ishikawa. Shozo; Egashira, Yuji;
and Kitahara, Makoto, 4,391,889, CI. 430-59.000.
Eggett, Janet M.: See—
Kuch, Philip L.; Herrington, Daniel R.; and Eggett, Janet M.,
4,391,756, CI. 260-430.000.
Eguchi, Yasukata: See —
Tamiya, Yoshimichi; Eguchi, Yasukata; and Makabe, Hachiro,
4,391,212, CI. I12-158.00E.
Eheim, Franz, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Fuel injection pump for internal
combustion engines. 4,391,257, CI. 123-503.000.
Ehrentraut, Franz-Josef: See —
Bianchi, Valerio; Ehrentraut, Franz-Josef; and Wobky, Peter,
4,391,249, CI. 123-438.000.
Eigen, Edward: See —
Tavss, Edward A.; and Eigen, Edward, 4,391,798, CI. 424-52.000.
Einem, Robert E., to International Telephone & Telegraph Corp.
Mosaic printer and ribbon guide therefor. 4,391,541, CI. 400-248.000.
Eisenhaure, David B.: See —
SUnton, William E.; Eisenhaure, David B.; and Drescher, Robert
D., 4,392,100, CI. 318-803.000.
Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.: See—
Huber, Calvin O.; Schick, Karl G.; and Cobum, Joel T., 4,391,775,
CI. 422-68.000.
Electrochemical Technology Corp.: See —
Beck, Theodore R., 4,391,450, CI. 277-1.000.
Eli Lilly and Company: See —
Mills, Jack; Schmiegel, Klaus K.; and Shaw, Walter N., 4,391,826,
CI. 424-324.000.
Ellett, James R., to Bralome Resources Limited. Sampler. 4,391,152, CL
73-863.840.
Elliott, David G.: See-
Rand, Robert W.; Snow, Harold D.; Elliott, David G.; and Haskins,
Glenn M., 4,392,040, CI. 219-10.710.
Ellis, Earle R., to Monsanto Company. Spray-suppression device.
4,391,870, CI. 428-218.000.
El-Menshawy, Mohamed F.; Woodrow, Peter A.; and Bhattacharyya,
Sushantha K., to National Research Development Corporation.
Methods and apparatus for monitoring the condition of dielectric
liquid in electric discharge machining. 4,392,110, CI. 324-453.000.
Elpan ApS: See —
Keldmann, Erik C. V., 4,391,913, CI. 236-36.000.
Elsing, John W., to Magnetic Peripherals Inc. Quick disconnect pack.
4,391,543, CI. 403-24.000.
Elslager, Edward F., to Warner-Lambert Company. Methods for
treating psoriasis. 4,391,809, CI. 424-251.000.
Embro, Joseph J.: See —
Brody, Aaron L.; Embro, Joseph J.; and Young, William E.,
4,391,080, CI. 53-426.000.
Emerson Electric Company: See —
Wicke, Charles A.; and Riley, Wayne C, 4,391,459, CI.
285-238.000.
Emich, Werner, to Friedrich Sanner GmbH & Co. KG. Container
having a safety closure. 4,391,382, CI. 215-213.000.
Engel, Herbert; and Boettger, Horst, to Messerschmitt-Bolkow-Blohm
Gesellschaft mit Beschrankter Haftung. Destructable air inlet cover
for rocket engines. 4,391,094, CI. 60-245.000.
Engen, Gudmund: See —
Jacobscn, Kjell O.; and Engen, Gudmund, 4,391,197, CI.
102-334.000.
Engvall, Eva S.; and Ruoslahti, Erkki I., to La Jolla Cancer Research
Foundation. Method for the purification of collagens. 4,391,749, CI.
260-123.700.
Envirotech Corporation: See —
Cook, Lynn W.; and Brown, David P., 4,391,705, CI. 210-218.000.
Essilor International: See —
Hennequin, Jean-Claude, 4,391,527, CI. 356-375.000.
Estopinal, Earl J., to Columbian Chemicals Company. Carbon black
process. 4,391,789, CI. 423-457.000.
Etat Francais: See —
Auge, Claude, 4,391,198, CI. 102-401.000.
Ethyl Corporation: See —
Shin, Kju H., 4,391,977, CI. 544-277.000.
Eutectic Corporation: See —
Rotolico, Anthony J.; Romero, Eduardo; and Lyons, John E.,
4,391,860, CI. 427-423.000.
Evans, Anthony C, to Kelsey-Hayes Company. Sliding caliper disc
brake. 4.391.355. CI. 188-73.440.
Evans, John M., to Beecham Group Limited. Cyanobenzanofblpyrans.
4,391.815. CI. 424-274.000.
Ex-Cell-O Corporation: See —
Fleury, James C, 4,391,027, CI. 29-157.30B.
Exxon Production Research Co.: See —
Ortloff, John E., 4,391,298, CI. 137-615.000.
Exxon Research & Engineering Co.: See —
Brois, SUnley J.; and Gutierrez, Antonio, 4.391.981, CI.
549-252.000.
Langer, Arthur W., Jr.. 4,391,738, CI. 252-429.00B.
Mintz, Donald; and Irani, Cyrus A., 4,391,925, CI. 523-130.000
Napoli, Joseph D., 4,392,009, CI. 136-251.000.
Parkola, Walter R., 4,392,145, CI. 346-140.00R.
Small, Augustus B.; Hughes, Vincent L.; and Benitez, Francisco
M., 4,391,961, CI. 526-76.000.
Wagner, John P., 4,391,698, CI. 204-302.000.
F. L. Smidth & Co.: See—
Petersen, Helge H., 4,391,207, CI. 110-342.000.
Fabcon Incorporated: See —
Casey, John A.; and Ducasse, Joseph C. V., 4,391,026, CI.
29-121.600.
Fabian, Peter; and Muller, Theo, to W. C. Heraeus GmbH. Gravure
printing base cylinder, and method of its manufacture. 4,391,879, CI
428-551.000.
Fagerstedt, Nils, to Oy Sisu-Auto Ab. Tractor vehicle provided with a
fifth-wheel plate. 4,391,455, CI. 280-407.000.
Fahmy, Mohamed A., to Rhone-Poulenc Agrochimie. S-(Tertiary
alkyl) alkylphosphonothioic halides. 4,391,760. CI. 260-961.000.
Falender, James R.; and McHale, Angelika H., to Dow Coming Corpo-
ration. Color sUble chelated titanate compositions. 4,391,937. CI
524-119.000.
Falk, John C; and Juang. Mike S. D., to Borg- Warner Chemicals, Inc.
Emulsion/suspension ASA graft copolymers as flow modifiers for
PVC. 4,391,948, CI. 525-57.000.
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert C, to
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC; and Hermann Wiederhold
GmbH. Corp. Curing agents. 4,391,965, CI. 528-112.000.
Fankhauser, Franz; van der Zypen, Eugen; and Roussel, Philippe, to
Lasag AG. Method for the surgical treatment of the eye. 4,391,275.
CI. 128-303.100.
Fardin, Carlos, to Van Dam Machine Corporation of America. Lid
infeed for spinning rod restacker. 4,391,560, CI. 414-107.000.
Farmer, Robert F., Ill, to Gillette Company, The. Erasable inks con-
taining thermoplastic block copolymers. 4,391,927, CI. 523-161.000.
Faure, Jean-Paul: See—
Lecron, Jacques; Manera, Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre, 4,391,618, CI. 65-1.000.
Faust, Wilfried: See—
Stetter, Jorg; Reiser, Wolf; and Faust, Wilfried, 4,391,626, CI.
71-88.000.
Fauth, Karl-Heinz; Mohr, Heinrich; and Immel, Wolfgang, to BASF
Aktiengesellschaft. Polymerization of isobutylene. 4,391,959, CI.
526-70.000.
Favara, Louis J.: See —
Tyler, Truman V.; and Sprague, Robert B., 4,391,712, CI.
210-652.000.
Fayren, Jose M., to Astilleros y Talleres del Noroeste, S.A. Offshore
facility for recovery hydrocarbon deposits from deep sea beds.
4,391,332, CI. 166-350.000.
Feldman, Arthur E.: See —
Marsh, Douglas D.; Feldman, Arthur E.; and Newlin, John C,
4.391,454, CI. 280-47.350.
Feldmann, William L.; Rowell, John M.; and Schmidt, Paul H., to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Manufacture of niobium-
aluminum superconducting material. 4,391,657, CI. 148-133.000.
Feldstein, Neil A.: See —
Kende, Andrew S.; Curran, Dennis P.; King, Margaret L.; and
Feldstein, Neil A., 4,391,982, CI. 549-433.000.
Fenner, Gary R.: See—
Gwathney, Kenneth W.; Gann, David L.; Seagraves, Steven G.,
Sr.; Fenner, Gary R.; and Fenner, Gordon H., 4,391,188, CI.
100-229.00A.
Fenner, Gordon H.: See—
Gwathney, Kenneth W.; Gann, David L.; Seagraves, Steven G.,
Sr.; Fenner, Gary R.; and Fenner. Gordon H., 4.391.188. CI.
100-229.00A.
Ferguson, Stewart. Roof or sidewall construction. 4,391,076, CI.
52-553.000.
Ferreira, Laurence E.; Lamar, Richard S.; and Bertolacini, Ralph J., to
Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Mineral treatment and composi-
tion. 4,391,734, CI. 252-378.00R.
Ferreira, Laurence E.: See —
Lamar, Richard S.; Ferreira, Laurence E.; and Cloud, Robert C,
4,391,733, CI. 252-378.0OR.
Ferrero, Aldo. Process for preparing palatable soya proteins and prod-
uct thus obuined. 4,391,748, CI. 260-123.500.
Ferrill, Richard M., Jr., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Particulate pig-
ment compositions. 4,391,648, CI. 106-308.00M.
Fette, Bruce, to Motorola Inc. Speech synthesizer with smooth linear
interpolation. 4,392,018, CI. 179-l.OSM.
Fiat Auto S.p.A.: See-
Piano, Renzo, 4,391,465, CI. 296-208.000.
Fields, Ellis K.: See—
Nimry, Tayseer S.; and Fields, Ellis K.. 4.391.967. CI. 528-189.000.
Fifolt, Michael J.: See—
Mundhenke. Rudolph F.; and Fifolt. Michael J.. 4.391.991. CI.
564-412.000.
JULY 5, 19
11
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Filmyer, Wm. G., to Pioneer De-icing Services, Inc. Wetted salt system
including adjustable timer. 4,391,393, CI. 222-642.000.
Finlayson, Claude M.: See —
Mardis. Wilbur S.; and Finlayson, Claude M., 4.391.637. CI.
106-20.000.
Finn, Roger C: See —
Tnimble, William P.; Finn, Roger C; and Jackson, Charles F. C,
4,392,014. CI. 174-92.000.
Finnegan, Charles C, to LeLasso Corporation. Resilient clamp for
supporting articles. 4,391,376. CI. 211-60.0SK.
Fiscella, James T., to TJT Food Flavoring, Inc. Method of extending
and flavoring ice milk or cream. 4,391,834, CI. 426-565.000.
Fischer, Klaus: See —
Albrecht, Werner; Fischer, Klaus; and Grun, Gerhard, 4,392,136,
CI. 340-825.560.
Fischer, Michael F.: See —
Moore, Dan T., Ill; and Fischer, Michael F., 4,391,384. CI.
220-359.000.
Fischer & Porter Company: See —
Anderson, Arthur, 4,391,704, CI. 210-188.000.
Herzl, Peter J.. 4,391,149, CI. 73-861.250.
Fischer, Rudolf, to Albert-Frankenthal AG. Folder. 4,391,596, CI.
493-425.000.
Fischer, William C; Adams, Don L.; Verzella, David J.; and Wright,
Stuart C, to United Technologies Corporation. Aircraft coordinated
turn with lagged roll rate. 4,392,203, CI. 364-434.000.
Fishbaugh, Byron L., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The.
Resilient mounting. 4.391,436, CI. 267-141.100.
Fisher, Denys. Drawing instrument or apparatus. 4,391,045, CI. 33-
27.00L.
Fitch, Arthur H.: See—
Zucker, Joseph; and Fitch, Arthur H., 4,391.517. CI. 356-73.100.
Fitz, Herbert: See—
Kuhls, Jurgen; Mayer, Franz; and Fitz, Herbert. 4,391,940, CI.
524-458.000.
Flanagan, G. Patrick. Method of purifying air and negative field genera-
tor. 4,391.773, CI. 422-22.000.
Fleetwood Furniture Company: See —
Derks, Han^y G., 4,392,132, CI. 340-825.140.
Fleischer, Henry: See —
Talerico, Joseph M.; and Fleischer, Henry, 4,391,003, CI. 4-415.000.
Fleming, Anthony, to Burroughs Corporation. Stabilized button for an
electrical keyboard. 4,392,037, CI. 200-340.000.
Fletcher Timber Limited: See —
Giess, Hans J., 4,391,077, CI. 52-747.000.
Fleury, James C, to Ex-Cell-O Corporation. Method of making a heal
exchanger assembly. 4,391,027, CI. 29-157.30B,
Flintoff, John F.: See-
Harris, Norman; Flintoff, John F.; and Kippax, John W., 4,391,677,
CI. 203-28.000.
FMC Corporation: See —
Knight, Houston W., 4,391,297, CI. 137-615.000.
Krynock, Robert A., 4,391,374, CI. 209-540.000.
Stanley, Robert C, 4,391,185, CI. 99-489.000.
Foederer, Wilhelmus T. M., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Com-
pany. Box connector. 4,391,484, CI. 339-97.0OP.
Fogarty, A. Edward; and Fogarty, Bonnie R. Musical toy. 4.391,061,
CI. 46-44.000.
Fogarty, Bonnie R.: See —
Fogarty, A. Edward; and Fogarty, Bonnie R., 4,391,061, CI.
46-44.000.
Fogelberg, Ernst R., to AB Bonnierforetagen. Process and a composi-
tion for the insulation of surfaces, and product hereby obtained.
4,391,859, CI. 427-421.000.
Folcher, Gerard; and Paris, Jacques, to Commissariat a I'Energie Ato-
mique. Photogalvanic cell. 4,391,881, CI. 429-111.000.
Foley, James W. B.; and Osterhout, David J., to General Electric
Company. Reactive snubber for inductive load clamp diodes.
4,392,172, CI. 361-8.000.
Folkman, Moses J.; and Langer, Robert S., Jr., to Children's Hospital
Medical Center, The. Systems for the controlled release of macro-
molecules. 4.391.797, CI. 424-19.000.
Ford Aerospace & Communications Corporation: See —
Rubin. Michael D., 4,392,173, CI. 361-35.000.
Ford, Franklin C; Hill, Oilman A.; and Vincent, Coye T. High-velocity
jet and propellant fracture device for gas and oil well production.
4,391,337, CI. 175^.600.
Foresman, Samuel U. Holder for a bar of soap. 4,391,427, CI.
248-176.000.
Forjas Taurus S/A: See —
Bomancini, Jose C. M., 4,391,056, CI. 42-62.000.
Bomancini, Jose C. M., 4,391,057, CI. 42-65.000.
Forrester, Howard M.; and Crisler, John R., to United States of Amer-
ica. Navy. Optical transmitter/receiver apparatus sharing common
optics. 4,391,515, CI. 356-5.000.
Forster, Siegfried; Quell, Peter; and Jaegers, Huber, to Kemforschung-
sanlage Julich GmbH. Fluid-heating apparatus. 4,391,227, CI.
122-16.000.
Foseco International Limited: See —
Stevenson, John; Cross, Alan; and Anderson, John G., 4,391,642.
CI. 106-38.230.
Fourael, Michael A.: See—
Ng, Paul K.; and Foumel, Michael A., 4,391,801, CI. 424-177.000.
Fowler, James C: See —
Coon Julian B.; Fowler, James C; Payton, Charles E.; and Waters,
Kenneth H.. 4,391,336, CI. 175-45.000.
Fox, Austin L., to Molins Limited. Packing machine. 4,391,083, CI.
53-575.000.
Frady, Dale A.; and Frady, David C, to Frontier Homes, Inc. Log wall
construction for log home. 4,391,067, CI. 52-97.000.
Frady, David C: See —
Frady, Dale A.; and Frady. David C, 4,391,067, CI. 52-97.000.
Framatome; See —
Marini, Jean; and Audenard, Bernard, 4.392.214, CI. 367-127.000.
Franklin. Arthur J.: See —
Kolb, Arthur F.; Franklin, Arthur J.; and Miller, Toby I.. 4,392,1 18,
CI. 337-154.000.
Franz Buttner AG: See—
Muller, Michael; Scherrer, Herbert; and Kagi, Erwin, 4,391,536,
CI. 400-144.200.
Franz Plasser Bahnbaumaschinen-Industriegesellschaft m.b.H.: See —
Tlieurer, Josef; Hansmann, Johann; and Riessberger, Klaus,
4,391,134, CI. 73-146.000.
Freeman, Wallace L., to United Stales of America, Army. Methods of
making infrared detector array cold shield. 4,391,678, CI. 204-15.000.
Freer, William G.; Vamey, John C; and Williamson, John H., to
Ebauches Electroniques, S.A. Passive electro-optic display cell and
method of manufacturing thereof 4,391,491, CI. 350-341.000.
Freese, Lennart: See —
Broms, Stig; and Freese, Lennart, 4,391,183, CI. 91-461.000.
Frenkel, Jacob K.; and Smith, Donald D., to Kansas University Endow-
ment Association, Method for preventing cats from shedding Toxo-
plasma oocysts after infection of such cats. 4,391,822, CI. 424-283.000.
Frey, Werner: See—
Kleine, Willi; and Frey, Werner, 4,391,960, CI. 526-74.000.
Fried, Morton. Power saving system which assures room security.
4,391,406, CI. 236-47.000.
Friedrich Kocks GmbH & Company: See —
Bindemagel, All; Holthoff, Helmut; and Diel, Hartmut, 4,391,357.
CI. 192-94.000.
Demny, Werner, 4,391,117, CI. 72-224.000.
Friedrich Sanner GmbH & Co. KG: See —
Emich, Werner, 4,391,382, CI. 215-213.000.
Friemann & Wolf GmbH: See —
Grossmann, Karl; and Mullejans, Robert, 4.392,185, CI.
362-105.000.
Frind, Gerhard; Carroll, James J.; and Van Noy, John H., to General
Electric Company. Vacuum interrupter. 4,392.035. CI. 200-144.00B.
Frishberg, Mark D.; and Krutak, James J., Sr., to Eastman Kodak
Company. Methine colorant materials and the use thereof in electro-
phoretic migration imaging layers and processes. 4,391,886, CI.
430-41.000.
Fritz Gegauf Aktiengesellschaft Bemina-Naehmaschinenfabrik: See —
Dreier, Ernst; and Spnng, Kurt, 4.391,213, CI. 112-246.000.
Frola, Frank V., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Rectifying and invert-
ing apparatus. 4,392,193, CI. 363-128.000.
Frommer, Werner: See—
Baumgarten, Jorg; Frommer, Werner; Schmidt, Delf; Schmidt,
Fnednch; and Munnecke, Douglas M., 4,391,887. CI. 435-42.000.
Fromson, Howard A.: See —
Gracia, Robert F.; and Fromson, Howard A., 4,391,897, CI.
430-302.000.
Frontier Homes, Inc.: See —
Frady, Dale A.; and Frady, David C, 4,391,067, CI. 52-97.000.
Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Matsui, Fujio, 4,391,250, CI. 123-438.000.
Fuji Oil Company, Limited: See —
Katayama, Tsutomu; and Nakanishi, Toyohiko, 4,391,835, CI.
426-573.000.
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.: See—
Toyoda, Takashi; Shishido, Tadao; and Tsujikawa, Teruaki,
4,391,900, CI. 430-355.000.
Yamada, Yasuyuki; Akashi, Goro; Tsuji, Nobuo; Mukaida, Yoshito;
and Fujiyama, Masaaki, 4,391,851, CI. 427-130.000.
Yamamoto, Nobuyuki; Naruo, Kyoichi; and Okiu, Tsutomu,
4,391,874, CI. 428-336.000.
Fujihara, Katsumi: See —
Mita, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshida, Takashi; Nakashima,
Masato; Fujihara, Katsumi; and Nakakuki, Tadao, 4,392,120, CI.
382-22.000.
Fujiki, Makoto, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Range finding optical
mechanism. 4,391,513, CI. 356-1.000.
Fujimura, Akira: See —
Kawabau, Etsuo; Ogura, Masahiko; Takagi, Akinobu; and
Fujimura, Akira, 4,391,246, CI. 123-391.000.
Fujinami, Kimiya: See —
Minato, Ichiro; Shibau, Koichi; and Fujinami, Kimiya, 4,391,958,
CI. 525-504.000.
Fujioka, Masanobu: See —
Mori, Hiromichi; Matsumoto, Jun; and Fujioka, Masanobu,
4,392,224. CI. 370-67.000.
Fujitani, Nobuyuki: See —
Dohshita, Hidetoshi; Ishii. Yoshiya; and Fujiuni. Nobuyuki.
4.391.241. CI. I23-198.0DB.
Fujitsu Limited: See —
Hirano. YuUka. 4,392,152, CI. 357-80.000.
Hirao, Hiroshi, 4,392.066, CI. 307-290.000.
Miyasaka, Kiyoshi; and Higuchi, Mitsuo, 4,392,212, CI.
365-230.000.
Nakano, Masao; Baba, Fumio; Nakano. Tomio; Takemae, Yo-
shihiro; and Mochizuki. Hirohiko. 4.392.211. CI. 365-200.000.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Fujiyama, Masaaki: See —
Yamada, Yasuyuki; Akashi, Goro; Tsuji, Nobuo; Mukaida, Yoshito;
and Fujiyama, Masaaki, 4.391,851, CI. 427-130.000.
Funk, Erwin D., to Kamyr, Inc. Method and apparatus for recovering
mineral nodules from the ocean floor. 4.391,468, CI. 299-8.000.
Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd., The: See-
Won, Hisako; Kitamura, Nobu; Shirahata, Isao; and Nakamura,
Nobuyuki, 4,391,955, CI. 525-462.000.
Fusco. Gerard A.; and van Lier, Glenn, to J. M. Huber Corporation.
Method for reclaiming ink waste. 4.391,638, CI. 106-20.000.
Fushida, Akira: See—
Kamezaki, Yasushi; Inoue, Eiichi; Nishihama, Hitoshi; Fushida,
Akira; and Matsumoto, Joji, 4,391,892, CI. 430-126.000.
Fussi, Fernando F., to Hepar Industries. Adrenosteriod composition
and method for the treatment of shock by infusional therapy.
4,391,803, CI. 424-239.000.
G&D, Inc.: See—
Levi, George W.; and Kanyo, Kalman, 4,391,307, CI. 140-140.000.
G. Siempelkamp GmbH & Co.: See—
Molina Bonillo, Juan J., 4,391,577, CI. 425-338.000.
Gadelle, Claude: See-
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, 4,391,555,
CI. 405-264.000.
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, 4,391,556,
CI. 405-264.000.
Galland, Lesley A.; and Skiver, Bruce W., to J. R. Simplot Company.
Rotary cutting machine. 4,391,172, CI. 83-403.000.
Gallin, Paul G., to Art Cap Company. Inc. Prefabricated cap frame.
4,390.998. CI. 2-180.000.
Galloway, Terry R., to United States of America, Energy. System for
producing a uniform rubble bed for in situ processes. 4,391,467, CI.
299-2.000.
Gallus, Julius P., to Union Oil Company of California. Use of marker
fluid in cementing offshore wells. 4.391.329. CI. 166-336.000.
Gann, David L.; See—
Gwathney, Kenneth W.; Gann. David L.; Seagraves, Steven G.,
Sr.; Fenner, Gary R.; and Fenner, Gordon H., 4,391,188, CI.
106-229.00A.
Garcia. Enrique; and Dillon, Peter L. P., to Eastman Kodak Company.
Pattern noise reduction method and apparatus for solid state image
sensors. 4,392,157, CI. 358-213.000.
Gardner, William B.: See—
Boggs, Luther M.; and Gardner, William B., 4,391,516, CI.
356-73.100.
Garkusha, Anatoly V.; and Dobrynin, Vladimir E. Exhaust pipe of
turbine. 4,391,564, CI. 415-126.000.
Gassner, Gustav, to Braun Aktiengesellschaft. Oscillating-armature
motor for electric dryshavers and the like. 4,392,092, CI. 318-127.000.
Gassner, Paul B. Combination pocket pad and writing instrument
holder. 4,391.457. CI. 281-31.000.
Gatzke, Erich: See —
Steigerwald, Wolf-Erhard; Ambros, Peter; and Gatzke, Erich,
4,391,742, CI. 252-512.000.
Gaus, Hermann, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft. Kick-down shift-
ing mechanism for automatic change-speed transmissions. 4,391,165,
CI. 74-869.000.
Gausewitz, Richard L.: See —
Tyler, Truman V.; and Sprague. Robert B., 4,391,712. CI.
210-652.000.
Gauthier. Richard. Generator for underwater lighting systems.
4.392.071. CI. 310-113.000.
Geeck. Thurlow. to Depor Industries. Corrosion resistant coating and
method for coating metal substrate. 4,391,855, CI. 427-383.700.
Geiger, Friedhelm: See —
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner,
Friedrich; and Martens, Jurgen, 4,391.987, CI. 562-559.000.
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner.
Friedrich; and Martens. Jurgen. 4.391.988. CI. 562-559.000.
Geimaert. Marcel J. Internal-combustion engine with opposed pistons.
4.391.232. CI. 123-5I.OBA.
Geisel. Gerhard, to Heye. Hermann. Method and device for applying
lubrication or separation liquid to glass-forming machine. 4.391.620.
CI. 65-26.000.
Geitz. Gerhard: See —
Schmitter. Ernst; Birzele. Paul; Buchmann, Klaus; Geitz, Gerhard;
Will, Bemhard; and Beifuss, Wolfgang, 4,392,199, CI.
364-200.000.
General Dynamics, Pomona Division: See —
Bastian, Thomas W.; and Speicher, John M., 4,392,140, CI.
343-765.000.
General Electric Company: See—
Bialous, Charles A.; Luce, John B.; and Mark, Victor, 4,391,935,
CI. 524-82.000.
Brown, Thomas A.; and Peil, William, 4,392,081, CI. 315-46.000.
Cleveland William K. S.; Webb, Jimmy L.; and Orlando, Charles
M., 4.391,996, CI. 568-726.000.
Cooper, Glenn D., 4.391.950, CI. 525-132.000.
Foley, James W. B.; and Osterhout, David J., 4,392,172, CI.
361-8.000.
Frind, Gerhard; Carroll. James J.; and Van Noy, John H.,
4,392,035, CI. 200-144.00B.
Glascock, Homer H., II; Houston, Douglas E.; McLaughlin, Mi-
chael H.; and Webster, Harold F., 4,392,153, CI. 357-82.000.
Grajewski, John P.; and Loyzim, Robert J., 4,392,096, CI.
318-625.000.
Gulick, William K.. 4.391,093, CI. 60-39.290.
Houston, John M., 4,392,235, CI. 378-10.000.
Houston, John M., 4,392,237, CI. 378-51.000.
Ishler, William E.; Weber, William B.; and Giudici, Livio L.,
4,392,076, CI. 313-318.000.
Komrumpf, William P., 4,392,171, CI. 361-5.000.
Labbe, Donald E.; and Brown, Mayo E., Jr., 4,391,101, CI.
60-646.000.
Mendiratta, Ashok K., 4,391,997, CI. 568-727.000.
Noble, Milton L.; and Cleaveland, Bryan L., 4,392,078, CI.
315-4.000.
Rosenberry, George M., 4,392,072, CI. 310-216.000.
Rosenberry, George M., Jr., 4,392,073, CI. 310-216.000.
Scott, Steven W., 4,391,954, CI. 525-439.000.
Sugalski, Raymond K.; and Blake, Charles R., 4,392,102, CI.
320-48.000.
Welles, Kenneth B., II, 4,392,068, CI. 307-522.000.
Williams, Raymond L., 4,391,290, CI. 137-81.100.
Zdaniewski, Joseph J., 4,392,070, CI. 310-43.000.
General Electric Company Limited, The: See—
Gray, Frederick M.; and Leedham, Charles G., 4,392,121, CI.
340-3 lO.OOA.
General Foods Corporation: See —
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R; and
Howley, Joseph P., 4,391,829, CI. 426-28.000.
General Foods Inc.: See —
Grealy, Jennifer M.; and Maurice, Terrence J., 4,391,750, CI.
260-123.500.
General Microwave Corporation: See —
Hopfer, Samuel, 4,392,108, CI. 324-95.000. ' •
General Motors Corporation: See —
Tibbetts, Gary G., 4,391,787, CI. 423-447.300.
General Signal Corporation: See —
Hershel, Ronald S., 4,391,494, CI. 350-442.000.
Keenan, John R., 4,391,293, CI. 137-312.000.
Gerber Garment Technology, Inc.: See —
Boverman, Bentsion; and Vodyanitsky, Vilen, 4,391,170, CI.
83-71.000.
Gerber, Heinz J.; and Pearl, David R., 4,391,168, CI. 83-34.000.
Gerber, Heinz J.; and Pearl, David R., to Gerber Garment Technology,
Inc. Method for cutting sheet material with a cutting wheel.
4,391,168, CI. 83-34.000.
Gerschner, Martin: See —
Paule, Kurt; Schadlich, Fritz; Gerschner, Martin; and Homung,
Friedrich, 4,392,093, CI. 318-245.000.
Gestetner Manufacturing Limited: See —
Pugh, Robert J., 4,391,503, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia: See—
Arsuaga, Yavier, 4,391,469, CI. 299-1 1.000.
Hauschopp, Alois; Schneider, Hans-Dieter; and Rassmann, Chris-
toph, 4,391,471, CI. 299-43.000.
Langenberg, Helmut; Grisebach, Hans-Theodor; and Weinhold,
Heinz, 4,391,470, CI. 299-11.000.
Weirich, Walter; Dettmers. Michael; Becker, Kunibert; and Rosen-
berg, Harry, 4,391,181, CI. 91-29.000.
Weirich, Walter; and Heitkamp, Herbert, 4,391,553, CI.
405-141.000.
Geyken, Erwin, to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Transporting
roller for webs of photosensitive material or the like. 4,392,177, CI.
361-221.000.
Gheewala, Tushar R.: See-
Chang. Wen H.; Gheewala. Tushar R.; and Harris, Enk P.,
4,392,148, CI. 357-5.000.
Ghiz, George J.: See—
GoettI, John M., 4,391,005, CI. 4-490.000.
Giasini, Giovanni. Apparatus for joining thin metal strips end-to-end.
4,391,037, CI. 29-716.000.
Gibas, Christoph; and Muller, Michael. Switching magnet. 4,392,117,
CI. 335-297.000.
Gibson, George M. Spiral gyrator for washing machines. 4,391.107, CI.
68-133.000.
Gibson. Kirk R.. to Chevron Research Company. Large pore shaped
hydroprocessing catalysts. 4.391,740, CI. 252-470.000.
Giers: See —
Janssen, Sylvain; and Sequies, Jean, 4,391,145, CI. 73-704.000.
Giess, Hans J., to Fletcher Timber Limited. Method of constructing a
building system. 4,391,077, CI. 52-747.000.
Giggi, Robert A.: See—
Arulpragasam, Jega A.; Giggi, Robert A.; Lary, Richard F.; and
Sullivan, Daniel T., 4,392,200, CI. 364-200.000.
Gill, H. Ross, III, to National Latex Products Co., The. Balloon with
sealing device therefor and method. 4,391,063, CI. 46-90.000.
Gillette Company, The: See-
Farmer, Robert F., Ill, 4,391,927, CI. 523-161.000.
Gilliland, Malcolm T. Thyristor controlled welding power supply.
4,392,045, CI. 219-130.100.
Gillone, Walter: See—
Bovio, Michele; Berruti. Pierangelo; and Gillone, Walter,
4,392,146, CI. 346-140.00R.
Gilmore, Dennis W.: See— .. ,„, ,c^ ^
Kugele, Thomas G.; and Gilmore, Dennis W., 4,391,757, CI.
260446.000.
Gilvin, Philip J: See—
Mathieson, Ernest; Smith, Graham C; and Gilvin, Philip J.,
4,392,057, CI. 250-385.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Girard, Alain: See —
Barkats, Gerard; Girard, Alain; Marchal, Jean; and Morel, Charles,
4,392,007, CI. 136-248.000.
Giudici, Livio L.: See —
Ishler, William E.; Weber, William B.; and Giudici, Livio L.,
4,392,076, CI. 313-318.000.
Giuffre, Luigi: See —
Spaziante, Placido M.; and Giuffre, Luigi, 4,391,758, CI. 260-
453.00P.
Glascock, Homer H., II; Houston, Douglas E.; McLaughlin, Michael
H.; and Webster, Harold F., to General Electric Company. Cooled
semiconductor power module including structured strain buffers
without dry interfaces. 4,392,153, CI. 357-82.000.
Glaser, Dieter, to PEG Perego-Pines Deutschland GmbH. Child
stroller. 4,391,453, CI. 28047.400.
Glasurit America, Inc.: See —
Batzill. Wolfgang. 4.391.858, CI. 427407.100.
Glenn. Raymond R.; and Bell. David, to Harris Corporation. Multi-
processor time alignment control system. 4.392,196, CI. 364-200.000.
Godbey, John K.; and Ballard, B. G., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Auto-
matic liquid level monitor. 4,391,135, CI. 73-155.000.
Goddard, John, to Rolls-Royce Limited. Method of manufacture of an
article having internal passages. 4,391.684. CI. 204-129.400.
GoettI, John M., to Ghiz, George J. Apparatus for cleaning swimming
pools. 4,391,005, CI. 4-490.000.
Golden, Theodore A. Child-proof electrical plug sheath. 4,391,481, CI.
339-42.000.
Goldhammer, Albert. Apparatus for limiting filling height of contain-
ers. 4,391,412, CI. 241-36.000.
Golias, Tipton L., to Helena Laboratories Corporation. Automated
electrophoresis and staining apparatus and method. 4.391.689. CI.
204-180.00G.
Gollomp, Bernard P.. to Bendix Corporation, The. Switching equip-
ment for testing apparatus. 4,392,107, CI. 324-73.00R.
Goodman, Faith L.: See —
Lakin, Willis M.; Goodman, Faith L.; and Savoca, Diane L.,
4,391,064, CI. 46-130.000.
Goodyear Aerospace Corporation: See —
Uram, John R., Jr.. 4.391.924, CI. 521-178.000.
Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The: See-
Bell, Anthony J., 4,391,737, CI. 252-429.00B.
D'Sidocky, Richard M., 4,392,004, CI. 585-820.000.
Fishbaugh, Byron L., 4,391,436, CI. 267-141.100.
Kneip, Femand; and Mamach, Ernest, 4,392,176, CI. 361-160.000.
Massey, Freddie L.; and Callander, Douglas D., 4,391,971, CI.
528-481.000.
Maxey. Frank S., deceased; and Mowdood, Syed K., 4,391,318, CI.
152-359.000.
McCarthy, Harold J., Jr., 4,391,868, CI. 428-215.000.
Gordon, Alan J., to Shandon Southern Products Limited. Cytocentri-
fuge. 4,391,710, CI. 210-361.000.
Gordon, Ellison T., to ZoUco International, Inc. Floating, surface
liquids retrieval system. 4,391,707, CI. 210-242.300.
Gordon, Marvin: See—
Sharpless, Edward N.; Gordon, Marvin; and Lichtenstein, Joseph,
4,391,283, CI. 128-725.000.
Goss, David C; and Springs, Daniel R., to Thermon Manufacturing
Company. Parallel-type heating cable. 4,392,051, CI. 219-528.000.
Gothberg, Owe. Support strip with U-shaped cross-section of plastic
material for supporting conduits, cables and the like. 4,391,426, CI.
248-49.000.
Gotou, MJkio: See —
Hamane, Tokuhito; KinoshiU, Toshio; Kihira, Masafumi; Hamada,
Hitosi; and Gotou, Mikio, 4,391,306, CI. 140-92.100.
Gracia, Robert F.; and Fromson, Howard A., to Fromson, Howard A.
Diazo lithographic printing plate developing process. 4,391,897, CI.
430-302.000.
Graham. David E.: See —
Anderson. Susan; Brown, David E.; Graham, David E.; Mahmood,
Mahmood N.; and Man, Maurice C. M., 4,391,681, CI.
204-99.000.
Grajek, Stanley A.; Hill, Robert S.; and Klaiber, George S., to Wur-
litzer Company, The. Piano soundboard and method of making same.
4,391,177. CI. 84-196.000.
Grajewski, John P.; and Loyzim, Robert J., to General Electric Com-
pany. Sectional X-ray table having dual servo drives. 4,392,096, CI.
318-625.000.
Granzer, Emold: See —
Nahm. Helmut; and Granzer, Emold, 4,391,995, CI. 568-637.000.
Grassmann, Hans-Christian: See —
Keller, Wolfgang; Grassmann, Hans-Christian; and Schmidt, Karl,
4,392,230, CI. 373-139.000.
Gray, Frederick M.; and Leedham, Charles G., to General Electnc
Company Limited, The. Receiver for A.C. electrical supply signal-
ling arrangement. 4,392,121, CI. 340-3 lO.OOA.
Grealy, Jennifer M.; and Maurice, Terrence J., to General Foods Inc.
Heat gellable protein isolate. 4,391,750, CI. 260-123.500.
Great likes Industries, Inc.: See —
Secor, Arthur D.; and Secor, Jerome G., 4,391,451, CI. 279-2.00A.
Green, Albert W.: See-
Perkins, Henry T.; Saunders, Kim D.; and Green, Albert W.,
4,391,136, CI. 73-189.000.
Green, Philip S., to SRI International. Ultrasonic transducer system and
method. 4,391,281, CI. 128-660.000.
Greenaway, Ivan R.: See —
Burrows. James E.; and Greenaway, Ivan R., 4,392,208, CI.
364-900.000.
Greene, Richard A.; and Kennedy. Robert P.. to Western Electric
Company, Inc. Methods and apparatus for preparing the terminated
end of flat cable for connectorization. 4.391,038, CI. 29-829.000.
Greenlee, Donald R., to Dresser Industries, Inc. Stinger assembly for
oil well tool. 4,391,326, CI. 166-240.000.
Greier, Josef; and Pomfret, Colin T., to List, Hans. Air-cooled internal
combustion engine. 4,391,238, CI. I23-I93.00C.
Greiff, Carl D.: See-
Prim, David F.; and Greiff, Carl D., 4,392,204, CI. 364-478.000.
Greive, Aloys; Horstmann, Aloys; and Stupirak, Wilhelm, to Volkmann
GmbH & Co. Twisting apparatus. 4.391.087. CI. 57-58.520.
Grenier, Yves, to R.I.A.T. Appliance designed for the treatment, partic-
ularly in a liquid, of a product like leather and procedure for applying
this appliance. 4,391,109, CI. 69-30.000.
Grier, Nathaniel: See —
Dybas, Richard A.; Grier, Nathaniel; and Witzel, Bruce E.,
4,391,812, CI. 424-267.000.
Grimes, Fred K., to Lance Austin Enterprises, Inc. Lance-type fixture
support and method of use. 4.391.428. CI. 248-546.000.
Grindheim, Earl A., to Rosemount Inc. Parallel T impedance measure-
ment circuit for use with variable impedance sensor. 4,391,146, CI.
73-718.000. c
Grisebach, Hans-Theodor: See —
Langenberg, Helmut; Grisebach, Hans-Theodor; and Weinhold,
Heinz, 4,391,470, CI. 299-11.000.
Grollier, Jean F.: See —
Rosenbaum, Georges; Grollier, Jean F.; and Cotteret, Jean,
4,391,603, CI. 8-424.000.
Gromek. Francis S.: See—
Vermillion. Don W.; Gromek, Francis S.; and Bair, Scott S., Ill,
4,391,018. CI. 15-339.000.
Gronbech, Robert W., to Davy-Loewy Limited. Uncoiler for meullic
strip material. 4,391,417, CI. 242-78.600.
Grossmann. Karl; and Mullejans, Robert, to Friemann & Wolf GmbH.
Explosion-proof and firedamp-proof headlight. 4,392,185, CI.
362-105.000.
Groupement d'Interet Econoique de Recherche et de Developpment
PSA' See
Planteline, Pierte; and Machetel, Roger, 4,391,251, CI. 123-440.000.
Grun, Gerhard: See —
Albrecht, Werner; Fischer, Klaus; and Grun, Gerhard, 4,392,136,
CI. 340-825.560.
Grunert, Hans C, to Sybron Corporation. Drawer seal. 4,391,478, CI.
312-320.000.
Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A.: See —
Mariani, Luigi; and Tarzia, Giorgio, 4,391,817, CI. 424-274.000.
Gsell, Laurenz: See —
Hoegerle, Kari; Gsell, Uurenz; and Wehrii, Rudolf, 4,391,810, CI.
424-251.000.
GTE Automatic Electric Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Simmons. Nathaniel; Magnusson. Stig; Puccini, Sergio E.;
McLaughlin. Donald W.; and Stelte. David J., 4,392,223, CI.
370-63.000.
Zucker, Joseph; and Fitch, Arthur H., 4,391,517, CI. 356-73.100.
GTE Laboratories Incorporated: See—
Melman, Paul; and Carlsen, W. John, 4.391,487. CI. 350-96.200.
GTE Products Corporation; See-
Hough. Harold L.; and Blaisdell. Ronald G., 4,392,189, CI.
362-306.000.
Knoll, William C; and Bay. David L.. 4.392.085. CI. 315-173.000.
Lester. James N.; and Prager. Lee A.. 4.392.089, CI. 315-313.000.
GTE Sylvania Canada Limited: See—
Nattel, William, 4,392,012, CI. 174-51.000.
Guardsman Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Sandstrom, Donald R.; and Lytle, Farrel W.. 4,392,236, CI.
378-045.000.
Gudnason, Geir V.; Crowe, Laurie M.; and Chang, Shin S.. to Coca
Cola Company. Production of liquid yogurt sUbilized with high
methoxyl pectin. 4.391,830, CI. 426-43.000.
Gulf & Western Manufacturing Company: See—
Sellmeyer, Daniel J., 4,391,159, CI. 74-516.000.
Gulick, William K., to General Electric Company. Temperature-
responsive actuator. 4,391,093, CI. 60-39.290.
Gurtler, Hans: See —
Magnusson. Bengt; and Gurtler, Hans, 4,392,052, CI. 219-532.000.
Guthrie. Richard A. Dog leash. 4.391.226, CI. 119-109.000.
Gutierrez, Antonio: See—
Brois, Stanley J.; and Gutierrez, Antonio, 4,391,981, CI.
549-252.000.
Guy, Burlin A., Jr. Snow blower. 4,391,052, CI. 37-236.000.
Gwathney, Kenneth W.; Gann, David L.; Seagraves, Steven G.. Sr.;
Fenner. Gary R.; and Fenner. Gordon H.. to Marathon Equipment
Company. Pin-off and door closure assembly for a sutionary refuse
compactor. 4,391,188, CI. 100-229.00A.
Haas, Franz, Jr.: See— „,,-.,,
Haas, Franz, Sr.; Haas, Franz, Jr.; and Haas, Johaan, 4,391,832, CI.
426-275.000.
Haas, Franz, Sr.; Haas, Franz, Jr.; and Haas, Johaan. Process for making
multi-layer cream-filled wafer blocks. 4.391.832. CI. 426-275.000.
Haas. Hans; and Kowalski, Werner, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for making abrasion-resistant sodium tripolyphosphate.
4,391,783, CI. 423-315.000.
PI 14
-/ •,
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Haas, Johaan: See —
Haas, Franz, Sr.; Haas, Franz, Jr.; and Haas, Johaan, 4,391,832, CI.
426-275.000.
Habegger, Henry L.: See —
Saylor. Arthur D.; and Habegger, Henry L., 4,391,300, CI.
138-99.000.
Habegger International: See —
Saylor, Arthur D.; and Habegger, Henry L., 4,391,300, CI.
138-99.000.
Haeger, Virgil J. Hardware press and punch apparatus. 4,391,358, CI.
192-130.000.
Haeuser, Erhard: See —
Hedrich, Wilhelm; Krumm, Heinz; and Haeuser, Erhard, 4,391,529,
CI. 366-266.000.
Haigh, Jeffrey G.; and Cheriton, Leslie W. Capsules containing self-set-
ting compositions and the compositions. 4,391,931, CI. 523-318.000.
Haisma, Jan: See —
Alting, Comelis L.; Brehm, Rudolf; and Haisma, Jan, 4,391,622, CI.
65-66.000.
Halcon SD Group, Inc., The: See —
Chang, Tsuan Y.. 4,391,612, CI. 48-202.000.
Haldipur, Gaurang B.; Anderson, Richard G.; and Cherish, Peter, to
United States of America, Energy. Gasification system. 4,391,61 1, CI.
48-197.00R.
Hall, Benjamin O.; and Amdt, Thomas W., to Intraco, Inc. Hold-down
apparatus for cable conveyors. 4,391,361, CI. 198-735.000.
Hall, Gary Lester: See —
Hall, Lester B., 4,392,215, CI. 367-139.000.
Hall, Lester B., to Hall, Gary Lester. Pest control apparatus. 4,392,215.
CI. 367-139.000.
Hallford, Ben R., to Rockwell International Corporation. Symmetric
microwave mixer. 4,392,250, CI. 455-327.000.
Hallford, Ben R., to Rockwell International Corporation. Symmetric
microwave mixer with coplanar diode connection. 4,392,251, CI.
455-327.000.
Halliburton Company: See —
Murphey, Joseph R., 4,391,643, CI. 106-74.000.
Halliday, Jonathan, to Independent Broadcasting Authority. Surround
sc :nd system. 4,392,019, CI. 179-l.OGQ.
Halstead, Raymond T.: See —
Schaad, William J.; Black. Charles E., Ill; and Halstead, Raymond
T., 4,392,029, CI. 200-5.00B.
Hamada, Hitosi: See —
Hamane, Tokuhito; Kinoshita, Toshio; Kihira, Masafumi; Hamada,
Hitosi; and Gotou, Mikio, 4,391,306, CI. 140-92.100.
Hamada, Minoru: See —
Masamoto, Junzo; Hamada, Minoru; Suzuki, Isamu; and Yoshida,
Takeo, 4,391,741, CI. 252-511.000.
Hamane, Tokuhito; Kinoshita, Toshio; Kihira, Masafumi; Hamada,
Hitosi; and Gotou, Mikio, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.
Coil winding apparatus. 4,391,306, CI. 140-92.100.
Hamburger, Manny C. Combined pattern holder and pattern position
indicator. 4,391,591, CI. 434-95.000.
Hamelin, Claude, to Institut Armand-Frappier. Electrophoresis system
for multiple agarose slab gels. 4,391,688, CI. 2O4-18O.0OG.
Hamilton, Floyd B.: See —
Mathes, Donovan B.; Hamilton, Floyd B.; and Spreng, Douglas C,
4,391,268, CI. 126-437.000.
Hanamura, Shoji: See —
Aoki, Masakazu; Ando, Haruhisa; Ohba, Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto, Iwao; and Izawa, Ryuichi, 4,392,158, CI. 358-213.000.
Hanlon, Richard J.; and Vetter, Rudi O. H., to Augat Inc. Low inser-
tion force connector. 4,391,408, CI. 339-75.00M.
Hanna, Marie R.: See —
Belko, Robert P.; Boden, Richard M.; and Hanna, Marie R.,
jl391,744, CI. 252-522.00R.
^^Precker, Mark A.; Hanna, Marie R.; Tokarzewski, Richard J.;
^^ Belko, Robert P.; Watkins, Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H.,
4,391,284, CI. 131-276.000.
Hannan, William F., Ill: See —
Carroll, Alexander A.; and Hannan, William F., Ill, 4,391,349, CI.
184-6.260.
Hannibal, Alan J.; and Parr, Charles H., to Lord Corporation. Rexible
coupling. 4,391,594, CI. 464-80.000.
Hansmann, Johann: See —
Theurer, Josef; Hansmann, Johann; and Riessberger, Klaus,
4,391,134, CI. 73-146.000.
Hanson, Jay R.: See —
Intlekofer, Michael J.; Hanson, Jay R.; and Lee, Thomas E.,
4,392,137, CI. 343-5.0SC.
Hara, Kiyoshi: See —
tnoue, Yozo; Ito, Yoji; Hara, Kiyoshi; Usami, Kiyoshi; and Iwata,
Yasuhiro, 4,391,320, CI. 165-2.000.
Hara, Yoshiaki, to Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha. Electromagnetic
acoustic transducer. 4,391,532, CI. 368-250.000.
Harada, Koji, to Hitachi, Ltd. Pressure-sensitive ignition plug.
4,392,082, CI. 315-55.000.
Harada, Nobuhiko: See —
Kawamura, Teniaki; Harada, Nobuhiko; Komatsu, Yukihiko; and
Sakai, Masaru, 4,391,016, CI. 15-302.000.
Harbert, Charles A.; Johnson, Michael R.; and Melvin, Lawrence S.,
Jr., to Pfizer Inc. 3-{2-Hydroxy-4-(substituted)phenyl)-cycloalkanone
and cycloalkanol analgesic agents and intermediates therefor.
4,391,827, CI. 424-331.000.
Hardy, Nicolas; Lerot, Luc; and Walraevens, Rene, to Propylox. Pro-
cess for the manufacture of carboxylic peracids. 4,391,753, CI.
549-525.000.
Harle. Anton. Collecting vessel. 4,391,138, CI. 73-223.000.
Harper-Wyman Company: See —
Cousins, Otto J.. 4,392,050, CI. 219-491.000.
Harrell, Jerald R., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Blow-
ing agents as curatives for ethylene/carbon monoxide copolymers.
4,391,922, CI. 521-88.000.
Harris Corporation: See —
Glenn, Raymond R.; and Bell, David, 4,392,196, CI. 364-200.000.
Harris, Erik P.: See —
Chang, Wen H.; Gheewala, Tushar R.; and Harris, Erik P.,
4,392,148, CI. 357-5.000.
Harris, John F., Jr., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Polymers from phenylterephthalic acid. 4,391,966, CI. 528-176.000.
Harris, Norman; Flintoff, John F.; and Kippax, John W., to Davy
McKee (Oil & Chemicals) Limited. Process for producing substan-
tially sulphur-free butene-1. 4,391,677, CI. 203-28.000.
Harris, Robert H.; Humphrey, Troy G.; and Stimson, John J., Jr., to
Labeco Harvesters, Inc. Grape harvester. 4,391,085, CI. 56-330.000.
Harris, Thomas G., to Armstrong World Industries, Inc. Useful solu-
tions of the tetramethylol derivative of 4,4'iso-propylidenediphenol.
4,391,929, CI. 523-218.000.
Harrison, Boyd L.; and Doherty, Niall S., to Merrell Dow Pharmaceu-
ticals Inc. 4-(Sub$tituted alkyl)-N-(l,3-dithiolan-2-ylidene(aniline.
4,391,818, CI. 424-277.000.
Harrison, David E., to Beatrice Foods Co. Soft toilet seat and hinge
connector. 4,391,001, CI. 4-236.000.
Harrison, Kenneth J.; Raynes, Edward P.; Saunders, Frances C; and
Thompson, David J., to United Kingdom of Great Britain and North-
em Ireland, The Secretary of State for Defence in Her Britannic
Majesty's Government of the. Liquid crystal materials containing
pleochroic anthraquinone dyes. 4,391,489, CI. 350-349.000.
Hartai, Julius. Device for charging a charging capacitor. 4,392,088, CI.
315-241.0OR.
Hartemann, Pierre: See —
Volluet, Gerard; and Hartemann, Pierre, 4,392,115, CI.
333-141.000.
Hartford Fibres, Ltd.: See—
Laird, William F.; and Wood, Kenneth A., 4,391,169, CI. 83-37.000.
Hartke, David H., to Xerox Corporation. Interface for proximity cou-
pled electro-optic devices. 4,391,490, CI. 350-356.000.
Haruta, Masahiro: See —
Inoue, Eiichi; Takatori, Yasushi; and Haruta, Masahiro, 4,392,141,
CI. 346-1.100.
Harwath, Frank L.: See —
Hunsberger, Dale L.; and Harwath, Frank L., 4,391,580, CI.
431-1.000.
Hasegawa, Morihiro: See —
Yamauchi, Takashi; Maruhashi, Shigeaki; and Hasegawa, Morihiro,
4,391,633, CI. 75-53.000.
Hasegawa, Satoshi: See —
Hirosaki, Botaro; and Hasegawa, Satoshi, 4,392,220, CI. 370-18.000.
Hashimoto, Wataru: See —
Shinoi, Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki, Keisuke; Suzuki, Yoshimi; Kudoh,
Masaru; and Hashimoto, Wauru, 4,392,024, CI. 179-99.00R.
Haskins, Glenn M.: See —
Rand, Robert W.; Snow, Harold D.; Elliott, David G.; and Haskins,
Glenn M., 4,392,040, CI. 219-10.710.
Hata, Yoshitaka: See —
Shioyama, Giichi; Hau, Yoshitaka; and Nakajima, Masao,
4,391,247, CI. 123-403.000.
Hauschopp, Alois; Schneider, Hans-Dieter; and Rassmann, Christoph,
to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia. Guides for mineral mining
machines. 4,391,471, CI. 299-43.000.
Hawkins, Brian M.: See —
Schild, Rolf; Melrose, Denis G.; and Hawkins, Brian M., 4,391,009,
CI. 5-453.000.
Hawkins, William E., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Proximity sensor. 4,391,127, CI. 73-37.':00.
Hayano, Fusakazu: See —
Yoshida, Koichi; and Hayano, Fusakazu. 4,391,912, CI.
435-241.000.
Hayata, Naohiro: See —
Inamoto, Jiro; and Hayata, Naohiro, 4,391.314. CI. 152-210.000.
Haynes, Joseph M.: See—
Cronan, John M.; Haynes, Joseph M.; and Jones, Darrell D.,
4,391,347, CI. 182-113.000.
Hayssen Manufacturing Company: See —
Chermey, Dale M., 4,391,079, CI. 53-396.000.
Kovacs, Lloyd, 4,391,081, CI. 53-436.000.
Hearold, Owen E.; and Bennett, Harvey G. Illuminating method and
apparatus for carpenter's or mechanic's levels. 4,392,184, CI.
362-101.000.
Heaslip, Lawrence J.; Hohulin, Alphia L.; and Mitchell, Joseph R., to
Keystone Consolidated Industries, Inc. Apparatus for introducing
elements into molten metal streams and casting in inert atmosphere.
4,391,319, CI. 164-259.000.
Hederich, Volker: See —
Knickenberg, Winfried; Schundehutte, Karl H.; and Hederich,
Volker, 4,391,606, CI. 8-525.000.
Hedrich, Wilhelm; Krumm, Heinz; and Haeuser, Erhard, to Wilhelm
Hedrich Vakuumanlagen GmbH & Co. KG. Apparatus for mixing
and degassing components of synthetic resins, particularly thermo-
setting synthetic resins. 4,391,529, CI. 366-266.000.
JULY 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Heffmgton, Charles A., Jr. Patient support attachment for surgical
Ubles. 4,391,438, CI. 269-328.000.
Heitkamp, Herbert: See —
Weirich, Walter; and Heitkamp, Herbert, 4,391,553, CI.
405-141.000.
Heja, Gergely: See —
Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja. Gergely; Kovacz, Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4.391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
Helena Laboratories Corporation: See —
Golias, Tipton L., 4,391,689. CI. 204-180.00G.
Helene Curtis Industries: See —
Hsiung, Du Y.; Davis, Chester A.; and Nicholson, Harold J.,
4,391,286, CI. 132-7.000.
Helgeson, Norman L.: See —
Studhalter, Walter R.; Amend, William E.; and Helgeson, Norman
L., 4,391,102, CI. 60-649.000.
Hendriks, Dieter, to SublisUtic Holding, S.A. Magnetic developers and
process for their preparation. 4,391,893, CI. 430-137.000.
Henke, Ronald E.: See—
Arends, Albert W.; and Henke. Ronald E., 4,391,768, CI.
264-285.000.
Henkel Corporation: See—
Lundmark, Larry D., 4,391,732, CI. 252-356.000.
Hennequin, Jean-Claude, to Essilor International. Process and device
for the positioning of an optical measuring instrument and a spectacle
frame in relation to each other. 4,391,527, CI. 356-375.000.
Henry, Paul S., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Spread
spectrum FH-MFSK decoder. 4,392.231, CI. 375-80.000.
Hepar Industries: See —
Fussi, Fernando F.. 4.391.803. CI. 424-239.000.
Herman, Daniel F.; and Kruse, Uno, to NL Industries, Inc. Opacifying
polymeric particle and uses. 4,391,928, CI. 523-201.000.
Herman, Shmuel Y. Writing parchment and methods for the production
thereof 4,391,601, CI. 8-94.150.
Hermann, Conrad, 3rd. Method of playing a two-player board game.
4,391,448, CI. 273-243.000.
Hermann Wiederhold G.m.b.H. Corp.:' See—
Falkenburg. Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness. Robert
C. 4.391.965, CI. 528-112.000.
Herrington. Daniel R.: See—
Kuch. Philip L.; Herrington, Daniel R.; and Eggett, Janet M.,
4,391,756. CI. 260-430.000.
Hershel, Ronald S., to General Signal Corporation. Apparatus for
projecting a series of images onto dies of a semiconductor wafer.
4,391,494, CI. 350-442.000.
Herzl, Peter J., to Fischer & Porter Company. Doppler-type ultrasonic
flowmeter. 4,391,149, CI. 73-861.250.
Hesketh, Truman H., to Plessey Overseas Limited. Time division multi-
plex module for use in digital switching network. 4.392,221, CI.
370-54.000.
Hetzner, Randall H. AdjusUble trailer drawbar. 4,391,562, CI.
414-483.000.
Heye, Hermann: See —
Geisel, Gerhard. 4,391,620, CI. 65-26.000.
Schaar, Lothar, 4,391.578, CI. 425-525.000.
Heyman, Joseph S.: See—
Cantrell, John H., Jr.; and Heyman, Joseph S., 4,391,142, CI.
73-610.000.
Hibino, Yutaka: See —
Horikawa, Takahiro; Hibino, Yutaka; and Maki, Seiichi, 4,391,218,
CI. 118-621.000.
Hickam, William M.: See-
Lin, Ching-Yu; and Hickam, William M., 4.391,690, CI.
204-412.000.
Higuchi, Mitsuo: See —
Miyasaka, Kiyoshi; and Higuchi, Mitsuo, 4,392,212. CI.
365-230.000.
Hildebrand, Dietrich, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Dyeing process and
printing process using reactive dyestuffs. 4,391,607, CI. 8-549.000.
Hildebrand, Karl J.; and Leeman, John, to Leeman Labs Inc. Scannable
detector system for echelle grating spectrometers. 4,391,523. CI.
356-328.000.
Hilflker, Harold O.. deceased: See—
Hilfiker. William K.; Hilfiker. Harold O., deceased; and Hilfiker,
William B., 4,391.557, CI. 405-287.000.
Hilflker, Louise E., executor: See—
Hilflker, William K.; Hilfiker. Harold O.. deceased; and Hilfiker.
William B, 4.391,557, CI. 405-287.000.
Hilflker Pipe Co.: See—
Hilflker, William K.; Hilflker, Harold O., deceased; and Hilflker,
William B., 4.391,557, CI. 405-287.000.
Hilflker, WUIiam B.: See—
Hilfiker, William K.; Hilflker, Harold O., deceased; and Hilfiker,
William B., 4,391,557, CI. 405-287.000.
Hilfiker, William K.; Hilflker, Harold O., deceased (by Hilfiker, Louise
E., executor); and Hilfiker, William B.. to Hilfiker Pipe Co. Reuining
wall for earthen formations and method of making the same.
4,391,557, CI. 405-287.000.
Hilker, George D., to Phelps Dodge Industries, Inc. Method for manu-
facturing magnet wire. 4,391,848, CI. 427-118.000.
Hill, Charles D. B.: See-
Hill, Richard N., Sr.; and HUl, Charles D. B., 4,391,784, CI.
423-320.000.
Foam control during
423-320.000.
Hill, Oilman A.: See-
Ford, Franklin C; Hill, Oilman A.; and Vincent, Coye T.,
4,391,337. CI. 175-4.600.
Hill. Richard N.. Sr.; and Hill, Charles D. B.
production of phosphoric acid. 4,391,784, CI.
Hill, Robert S.: See—
Grajek. Stanley A.; Hill, Robert S.; and Klaiber, George S.,
4,391,177, CI. 84-196.000.
Hilti Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Mauthe. Peter. 4.391.662. CI. 156-64.000.
Hinz. Claus-Dieter; and Pasternack. Adalbert, to Dragerwerk Aktien-
gesellschaft. Heat protection garment. 4.390,997. CI. 2-81.000.
Hinz, Hans D.; and Lobl. Herbert, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Circuit
arrangement for controlling a large number of printing electrodes for
non-mechanical printing. 4.392,194, Q. 346-154.000.
Hiraishi. Hisashi: See —
Murakami, Shinichi; Morichika, Toshiaki; Hiraishi, Hisashi; and
Shiokawa, Hiroyuki, 4.391.635. CI. 75-125.000.
Hirano. Yutaka, to Fujitsu Limited. Semiconductor device. 4,392,152,
CI. 357-80.000.
Hirao, Hiroshi, to Fujitsu Limited. Schmidt trigger circuit. 4,392,066,
CI. 307-290.000.
Hirasawa, Yoshihei: See —
Suda, Tatsuo; Hirasawa, Yoshihei; Takahashi, Sachio; Abe, Etsuko;
Konno, Kunio; and Aoki. Tadao, 4,391,802, CI. 424-236.000.
Hirashima, Kenzo: See —
Takemura, Toji; and Hirashima. Kenzo. 4.391.356, CI. 192-84.00C.
Hirata, Isao, to Tokai Metals Company Limited. Foldable cup.
4,391,366. CI. 206-218.000.
Hirosaki. Botaro; and Hasegawa, Satoshi, to Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd.
Modem to be coupled to a directional transmission line of an SS
multiplex communication network. 4,392,220, CI. 370-18.000.
.Hirose, Takao: See —
Uemura, Seiichi; Yamamoto, Shunichi; Hirose, Takao; Takashima.
Hiroaki; and Kato, Osamu. 4.391.788, CI. 423-447.600
Hitachi. Ltd.: See—
Akiyama. Nobuyuki; Kembo. Yukio; Nakagawa. Yasuo; Aiuchi,
Susumu; and Nomoto, Mineo, 4,391,511. CI. 355-40.000.
Aoki. Masakazu; Ando, Haruhisa; Ohba. Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto, Iwao; and Izawa, Ryuichi. 4.392.158. CI. 358-213.000.
Harada, Koji. 4,392,082. CI. 315-55.000.
Iso. Yoshimi; Inoue. Shigeki; and Shibuya. Toshifumi. 4,392.020.
CI. 179-l.OGE.
Kojima. Takafumi; Tamaki. Kenzo; and Yokota. Shiro, 4,392.026.
CI. 179-175.30R.
Kuwabara. Kouji; Sugawara, Hiroyuki; Shirakura. Toshiharu;
Sasaki. Kouji; and Takemori. Satoshi. 4,391.519. CI. 356-153.000.
Matsuura. Shigeo; and Yuki. Ikuo, 4.392.249. CI. 455-164.000.
Suzuki. Masayoshi; and Sagawa. Akio, 4,392,069, CI. 307-252.00A.
Tomita, Yoshifumi; and Nakai. Hiromitsu, 4,391,885, CI.
430-28.000.
Yokozawa, Norio; Takasugi, Wasao; Yonezawa, Seiji; and
Ueyanagi, Kiichi, 4,392,219, CI. 369-44.000.
Hitachi Maxell, Ltd.: See—
Okada, Shuhei, 4,392.170. CI. 360-133.000.
Yamakawa. Tohru; and Akiyama, Kozi. 4.391,669, CI. 156-539.000.
Hoboum-Eaton Limited: See—
Bristow. Ian T.; and Thomelow. Alec, 4,391.569, CI. 417-302.000.
Hocken, Redvers A. Magnetically triggered on-board elapsed time
indicator. 4,392,122, CI. 340-323.00R.
Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd.: See—
Takemauu. Tetsuo; Isogawa, Takayuki; and Sakuraba, Yasuya,
4,391,631, CI. 71-118.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Becker, Wilhelm. 4.391,957, CI. 525-454.000.
Blume, Ernst; Schaper, Wolfgang; Raether, Wolfgang; and Ditt-
mar, Walter, 4,391,805, CI. 424-246.000.
Eckardt, Peter; and Voetz, Franz J., 4,391,644, CI. 106-85.000.
Haas, Hans; and Kowalski, Werner. 4,391,783, CI. 423-315.000.
Kaiser. Karl; and Ohorodnik. Alexander. 4.391.972, CI.
528-499.000.
Kersting, Hans-Joachim; Wolfrum, Erhard; Portz, Willi; and
Strauss, Georg, 4,391,786. CI. 423-442.000.
Kuhls, Jurgen; Mayer, Franz; and Fitz, Herbert, 4,391,940, CI.
524-458.000.
Mehdom. Frank R.; and Seelig. Johann. 4.391,025. CI. 28-289.000.
Nahm. Helmut; and Granzer. Emold. 4,391,995. CI. 568-637.000.
Preisler, Eberhard; Hofmann. Bemhard; and Holzem, Johannes,
4,391,714, CI. 210-670.000.
Hoechst, Lonnie D.: See —
Weber, Henry J.; Hoechst. Lonnie D.; Christensen. James R.; and
Watts, Verne C, 4,391,344. CI. 180-271,000.
Hoefelmayr. Tilman; and Maier. Jakob, to Biomelktechnik Hoefelmayr
& Co. Method for mechanical milk removal. 4,391,221, CI.
119-14.080.
Hoegerle, Karl; Gsell, Laurenz; and Wehrli. Rudolf, to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation. 2-Methyl-4-N,N-dimethylcarbamoyloxy-6-amino-
pyrimidines and salts thereof, processes for producing them, and their
use for combating pests. 4,391,810, CI. 424-251.000.
Hoer, Ralph A.: See—
Ederle, John A.; Hoer, Ralph A.; and Irwin, George H., 4,391,840,
CI. 426-641.000.
Hoffman, Lester J.: See-
Roberts, Richard D.; and Hoffman, Lester J., 4,392,091, CI.
318-52.000.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
HofTmann-La Roche Inc.: See —
Boiler, Arthur; Schadt. Martin; and Villiger, Alois, 4,391,731, CI.
252-299.620.
Imhof, Rene; and Kyburz, Emilio, 4,391,978, CI. 546-138.000.
HofTmann, Rolf, to van Laack, Schmitz & Eltschig GmbH u. Co.
Method for laying shirts, especially men's shirts, for purposes of
wrapping. 4,391,394, CI. 223-37.000.
Hofmann, Bemhard: See —
Preisler, Eberhard; Hofmann, Bemhard; and Holzem, Johannes,
4,391,714, CI. 210-670.000.
Hohulin, Alphia L.: See —
Heaslip, Lawrence J.; Hohulin, Alphia L.; and Mitchell, Joseph R.,
4,391,319, CI. 164-259.000.
Hokko Chemical Industry Company, Ltd.: See—
Ohyama, Hiroshi; Morita, Ken; Wada, Takuo; and Miyahara,
Masahiko, 4,391,804. CI. 424-245.000.
Holan, George; and Walser, Reimund, to Commonwealth Scientific and
Industrial Research Organization. Insecticidal ester enantiomers.
4,391,820, CI. 424-282.000.
Holgersson, Stig L., to Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson. Band-shaped
device for forming a pipe-shaped protection cover. 4,391,303, CI.
138-166.000.
Holl, Helmar; and Kessler, Rolf, to Dorina Nahmaschinen GmbH.
Method and device for forming an overcast seam by means of a
zigzag sewing machine. 4,391,214, CI. 112-269,100.
Holland, Gwendolyn B.; and Holland, John W. Cardboard house for
pets. 4,391,223, CI. 119-19.000.
Holland, John W.: Set-
Holland, Gwendolyn B.; and Holland. John W., 4,391,223, CI.
119-19.000.
Hollier, Joseph H., Jr., to Sutco, Inc. Facilitating the exchange of a
finished package with a new core. 4,391,415, CI. 242-56.900.
Hollowell, William: See —
Ahad, Munir J.; Hollowell, William; Tanaka, Akira; and Ziv.
Avraham, 4,391,420, CI. 242-107.40A.
Holmes, Allen B., to United States of America, Army. Electro fluidic
actuator. 4,391,299, CI. 137-831.000.
Holsman, Henrietu H. Weep screed. 4,391.074, CI. 52-367.000.
Holthoff. Helmut: See—
Bindemagel. Ali; Holthoff, Helmut; and Diel, Hartmut, 4,391,357,
CI. 192-94.000.
Holzem, Johannes: See —
Preisler, Eberhard; Hofmann, Bemhard; and Holzem, Johannes,
4,391,714, CI. 210-670.000.
Holzleitner. Johann, to Bombardier-Rotax G.m.b.H. Intemal combus-
tion engine comprising means for controlling the axial extent of a port
in a cylinder. 4,391,234, CI. 123-65.0OV.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Ban, Keisuke; and Arai, Takeo, 4,391,161, CI. 74-579.00E.
Kawabata, Etsuo; Ogura, Masahiko; Takagi, Akinobu; and
Fujimura, Akira, 4,391,246, CI. 123-391.000.
Nishikawa, Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama, Toshihiko;
Takaoka, Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, 4,391,342, CI.
180-143.000.
Ohmori, Taiji, 4,391,452, CI. 280-6.100.
Honeywell Inc.: See —
Stiglich, Ralph E., 4,392,065, CI. 307-247.00A. ^
Zansky, ZolUn, 4,392,087, CI. 315-219.000.
Honeywell Information Systems Inc.: See-
Brown, Richard P.; Barlow, George J.; and Peters, Arthur,
4,392,201, CI. 364-200.000.
Honjo, Shigeru: See —
Kiune, Syoiti; Honjo, Shigeru; Ohe, Kuniyoshi; and Tobioka,
Fumio, 4,391,658, CI. 148-188.000.
Honnorat, Yves; See —
Bonnor, Yannick; Raisson, Gerard; and Honnorat, Yves, 4,391,772,
CI. 419-23.000.
Hook, Richard J.; and Rule, Mark, to Eastman Kodak Company.
Process for the separation of isophthalic acid from terephthalic acid.
4,391,985, CI. 562-414.000.
Hoose, Demetrius H. Rail car coupler interlock. 4,391,380, CI.
213-76.000.
Hopfer, Samuel, to General Microwave Corporation. Broadband radia-
tion detector for microwave and lower frequencies. 4,392,108, CI.
324-95.000.
Hon, Hisako; Kitamura, Nobu; Shirahata, Isao; and Nakamura,
Nobuyuki, to Furukawa Electric Co., Ltd., The. Process for cross-
linking polycarbonate resins. 4,391,955, CI. 525-462.000.
Horie, Yoshio: See —
Maeda, Umio; Shoji, Hirofumi; Wada, Yasusuke; and Horie,
Yoshio, 4,39 1 ,743, CI. 252-5 1 8.000.
Horii, Kenju, to Matsushiu Electronics Corp. Solid-sute color image
sensor. 4,392,154, CI. 358-44.000.
Horikawa, Takahiro; Hibino, Yutaka; and Maki, Seiichi, to Sumitomo
Electric Industries, Ltd. Method and apparatus for forming corro-
sion-resistant layer and surface electrically conductive layer on cable
and apparatus for practicing same. 4,391,218, CI. 118-621.000.
Homg, Cheng T.; Schwenker, Robert O.; and Tsang, Paul J., to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation. Bipolar transistor.
4.392.149. CI. 357-49.000.
Homung, Friedrich: See —
Paule Kurt- Schadlich, FriU; Gerschner, Martin; and Homung,
Friedrich. 4,392.093. CI. 318-245.000.
Horstmann, Aloys: See— ^ ^ • , „,,. ,
Greive, Aloys; Horstmann, Aloys; and Stupirak, Wilnelm,
4.391,087, CI. 57-58.520.
Horvat, Marian L. Breast support. 4,391.277, CI. 128-492.000.
Hosaka, Akihiko; Okuyama, Kiyotaka; and Isobe, Yukihiro, to TDK
Electronics Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording medium. 4,391,864, CI.
428-64.000.
Hosiden Electronics Co.. Ltd.: See —
Tamamura. Junichi; Yasuda, Mamoni; Hosoda, Motomi; and Saeki,
Shinichi, 4,392,025, CI. 179-1 ll.OOR.
Hosoda, Motomi: See —
Tamamura, Junichi; Yasuda, Mamoru; Hosoda, Motomi; and Saeki,
Shinichi, 4,392.025. CI. 179-1 ll.OOR.
Hosposable Products Inc.: See —
Kronman, Albert F.. 4,391,010, CI. 5-484.000.
Hostetler, James W., to Litton Systems, Inc. Ring laser with plasma
starter. 4,392.229, CI. 372-94.000.
Hough. Harold L.; and Blaisdell. Ronald G.. to GTE Products Corpo-
ration. Front loading projection unit with threaded resilient retention
member. 4,392,189, CI. 362-306.000.
Houston, Douglas E.: See —
Glascock, Homer H., II; Houston, Douglas E.; McLaughlin, Mi-
chael H.; and Webster. Harold F., 4,392,153, CI. 357-82.000.
Houston, Herbert J.: See —
Nigol, Olaf; and Houston, Herbert J., 4,391,125, CI. 73-11.000.
Houston. John M.. to General Electric Company. Electronically
scanned x-ray tomography system. 4.392,235, CI. 378-10.000.
Houston, John M., to General Electric Company. Scanning x-ray
inspection system. 4,392,237, CI. 378-51.000.
Howard, Arthur G. Chemical-mixing and dispensing apparatus.
4,391,390, CI. 222-136.000.
Howard, Dennis D.: See —
Miller, Henry C; and Howard, Dennis D., 4,391,686, CI.
204-159.150.
Howell, Peter A., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
Glass bubbles of increased collapse strength. 4,391,646, CI.
106-97.000.
Howley, Joseph P.: See —
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R.; and
Howley, Joseph P., 4,391,829, CI. 426-28.000.
Hoya Corporation: See —
Nakagawa, Kenji; and Masuda, Isao, 4,391,916, CI. 501-62.000.
Hozumi. Toshiaki: See —
Ishizaka, Sunao; and Hozumi, Toshiaki. 4,391,488, CI. 350-257.000.
Hsiao, James C, to Union Special Corporation. Feed mechanism for
sewing machines. 4,391,216, CI. 112-316.000.
Hsiung, Du Y.; Davis, Chester A.; and Nicholson, Harold J., to Helene
Curtis Industries. Hair conditioning and composition therefor.
4,391,286, CI. 132-7.000.
Hsu, Yun-Tung, to Chiu. Pei-Liang. Gravity return hinge having an
axle rod in an axle sleeve. 4.391,020, CI. 16-314.000.
Huber, Calvin O.; Schick, Kari G.; and Cobum, Joel T., to Wisconsin
Alumni Research Foundation; and Electric Power Research Insti-
tute, Inc. Method of and system for determining particular species of
chlorine in a water sample. 4,391,775, CI. 422-68.000.
Huggins, Raymond W., to Xerox Corporation. Method of development.
4,391,842, CI. 427-14.100.
Hughes, Vincent L.: See —
Small, Augustus B.; Hughes, Vincent L.; and Benitez, Francisco
M., 4,391,961, CI. 526-76.000.
Huhn, Helmut; and Kaiser, Siegfried, to Wolff Walsrode Aktiengesell-
schaft. Coupled tubular casing for foodstuffs. 4,391,302, CI.
138-118.100.
Hukuda, Masazi: See —
Ueno, Kunihiko; Ishii, Akiyasu; Hukuda, Masazi; and Nakayama,
Kazuyuki, 4,391.763. CI. 264-15.000.
Hum. Albert: See—
Neathway. Graham; Cramp, Allan; and Hum, Albert, 4,392,206, CI.
364-900.000.
Humber, Leslie G.: See —
Bellini, Francesco; Sestanj, Kazimir; and Humber, Leslie G..
4,391,825, CI. 424-319.000.
Hume, Ronald W. Apparatus for reconstituting a concentrate.
4,391.291, CI. 137-99.000.
Humphrey, Troy G.: See —
Harris, Robert H.; Humphrey, Troy G.; and Stimson, John J., Jr.,
4,391,085. CI. 56-330.000.
Hundertmark, James M., to Brunswick Corporation. Hydraulic trim-tilt
system. 4,391,592, CI. 440-61.000.
Hungerford, Gordon P., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Polymer film treat-
ment with organic impregnant. 4,391.939. CI. 524-377.000.
Hunsberger, Dale L.; and Harwath, Frank L., to Sundstrand Corpora-
tion. Liquid fuel supply system for an atomization burner nozzle.
4,391,580, CI. 431-1.000.
Huntington Alloys, Inc.: See —
Kelly, Thomas J.; and Robinson, Mark L., 4,391,634, CI.
75-124.000.
Huntleigh Medical Ltd.: See—
Schild, Rolf; Melrose, Denis G.; and Hawkins, Brian M., 4,391,009,
CI. 5-453.000.
Hurst, Dennis P., to United Sutes of America, Navy. Digital interface
system. 4,392,241, CI. 455-26.000.
Hutson, Donald G., to Cal Detect, Inc. Apparatus for measuring breath
alcohol. 4,391,777, CI. 422-84.000.
Hutter, Charles G., III. Method of curing adhesive. 4,391,663, 01.
156-64.000.
Huwiler. Alfred; and Tenud, Leander, to Lonza Ltd. Process for the
\ preparation of (2-amino-thiazol-4yl>-acetic acid hydrochloride.
\ 4,391.979, CI. 548-194.000.
JULY 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Hydronautics, Incorporated: See—
Johnson. Virgil E., Jr.; Sundaram, T. R.; and Conn, Andrew F.,
4,391,339, CI. 175-393.000.
Ibau Hamburg Ingenieurgisillschaft Endustreibau mbH: See-
Klein- Albenhausen, Heinrich, 4,39 1 ,528, CI. 366- 1 5.000.
Ichikawa, Katsumi; Amano, Itaru; Ozaki, Keiji; and Suzuki, Seiichi, to
Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd.; and Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho.
Apparatus for loading unvulcanized tires on tire vulcanizing machine.
4,391,769, CI. 264-326.000.
Ichiyanagi, Takashi: See— j ^ . , l-
Maruyama, Teruo; Ichiyanagi, Takashi; and Otoda, Ichizo,
4,392.168. CI. 360-129.000.
Icking, Friedrich; and Stolte. Friedrich. to Westfalia Separator AG.
Milk meter for measuring the total amount of milk from a cow m the
course ofa milking. 4,391.222. CI. 119-14M7a ... p,_
Ide Katsuyuki; Ohe, Kempo; and Kobayashi, Hisao, to Toshiba Elec-
tric Equipment Corporation. Apparatus for operating a gaseous
discharge lamp. 4,392.086. CI. 315-174.000.
Igarashi. Hideaki: See— »# i,
Kishiraoto, Kenjiro; Igarashi, Hideaki; and Kono, Migaki,
4,391,036, CI. 29-623.200.
lizuka, Haruhiko: See—
Sugasawa, Fukashi; and Iizuka. Haruhiko, 4,391,240, CI. 123-
198.00F.
Illinois Tool Works, Inc.: See—
Peterson, Francis C, 4,392,033. CI. 200-80.00R.
Imada, Michio; and Naito, Masayuki, to 01/1"?"* OPl!'=f,^°,'^ |d!^'
Aperture stop for microscope condensers. 4,391,497, CI. 350-52J.UUU.
Imai, Toshihiro; and Yamada. Toyotaka, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd.
Photometer having asymmetrical aperture and with compensation tor
directionofincidence. 4.391,521,0.356-225.000.
Imamura, Yoshio, to Toyo Boseki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of dehu-
midification. 4,391,616. CI. 55-35.000.
IMED Corporation: See—
Jenkin$!jon A., 4391,599, CI. 604-1 18.000.
Imhof Rene; and Kyburz, Emilio, to HofTmann-La Roche Inc. Phenyl-
quinolizidines. 4,391,978, CI. 546-138.000.
Immel, Wolfgang: See— ...... . , . w^if„o„™
Fauth Kari-Heinz; Mohr, Hemnch; and Immel, Wolfgang,
4.391.959, CI. 526-70.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See—
Barham, Peter J.; and Selwood, Alan, 4,391,766 CI. 264-210.100^
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness, Robert
C, 4,391,965, CI. 528-112.000.
Leigh. Thomas, 4,391,983, CI. 560-124.000.
Martin, Graham E.. 4,391,770, CI. 264-236.000.
Pears, Gordon E. A., 4,391.767, CI. 264-210.300.
Renfrew. Andrew H. M., 4,391,754, CI. 260-380.000.
Inamoto, Jiro; and Hayata, Naohiro. to Sumitomo Electnc Industries,
Ltd and Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd. Snow tire spikes.
4,39i,3'4. CI. 152-210.000.
Indak Manufacturing Corp.: See— ^ o „„^
Schaad, William J.; Black. Charles E., Ill; and Halstead. Raymond
T., 4,392,029, CI. 200-5.00B.
Independent Broadcasting Authority: See—
Halliday, Jonathan, 4.392,019, CI. 179-l.OGQ.
Industrial Dynamics Company, Ltd.: See—
Calhoun, Fredrick L., 4,391,372, CI. 209-523.000.
Industrial Filter & Pump Mfg. Co.; See—
Schmidt, Henry. Jr., 4,391,709. CI. 210-332.000.
Ing. C. Olivetti & C. S.p.A.; See—
Bovio, Michele; Berruti, Pierangelo; and Gillone, Walter,
4,392,146, CI. 346-140.00R.
Ineersoll-Rand Company: See—
Reph. Arthur C, 4,391,475, CI. 384-226.000.
Wilson, Joseph G., 4,391,613, CI. 55-1.000.
Iniotakis, Nicolaos, to Kemforschungsanlage Julich GmbH. Method
for filtering atomic or molecular contaminants from a gas. 4,391,613,
CI. 55-16.000.
^ Innovation Aktiebolag; See—
Broms. Stig; and Freese. Lennart. 4.391,183. CI. 91-461.000.
Inoue, Eiichi; Takatori. Yasushi; and Hajuta Masahiro. to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha. Image forming method. 4,392,141, CI. 346-1. lUU.
Inoue, Eiichi: See — . ■ »- uj
Kamezaki. Yasushi; Inoue, Eiichi; Nishihama, Hitoshi; Fushida,
Akira; and Matsumoto, Joji. 4.391,892, CI. 430-126.000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See—
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4,392,042, CI. 219-69.00W.
Inoue. Kiyoshi. 4.392.043. CI. 219-69.00P.
Inoue. Kiyoshi. 4,392.195, CI. 364-167.000. , „ ^^ ^ ^ .
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Method of and
apparatus for electroerosively wire-cutting a conductive workpiece.
4,392,042, CI. 219-69.00W.
Inoue. Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Pulse genera-
tor. 4,392,043, CI. 219-69.00P. . ^. u a f a
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Method of and
apparatus for controlledly moving a movable element. 4, JVZ, i V3, ci.
364-167.000.
Inoue, Shigeki; See— , „l^ -r i. r a -iot mn
Iso, Yoshimi; Inoue, Shigeki; and Shibuya, Toshifumi, 4,392.020.
CI. 179-l.OGE. .,. ^ J , .
Inoue Yozo; Ito. Yoji; Hara, Kiyoshi; Usami, Kiyoshi; and Iwata,
Yasuhiro, to Nippondenso Co.. Ltd. Method and an apparatus for air
conditioning for vehicles by controlling circulation of inside air and
introduction of outside air. 4.391,320, CI. 165-2.000.
Institut Armand-Frappier; See—
Hamelin, Claude, 4,391,688, CI. 204-180.00G.
Institut Francais du Petrole; See—
Billon, Alain; Le Page, Jean-Francois; Penes, Jean-Pien-e; and
Simandoux, Jean-Claude, 4,391,700, CI. 208-86.000.
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude, 4,391,555.
CI. 405-264.000. ^ ^ ,„, „^
Burger, Jacques; Bardon, Charles; and Gadelle, Claude. 4.391.556.
CI. 405-264.000.
Cosyns. Jean; Juguin, Bernard; Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Mi-
quel, Jean, 4.392.002, CI. 585-329.000.
Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Martino, Germain, 4,391,701, CI.
208-370.000.
Instytut Mechaniki Precyzyjnej; See— , ^ . ,
Wyszkowski, Jerzy; Panasiuk. Wladyslaw; Koprek. Stanislaw; and
Piechal. Andzei. 4,391,654, CI. 148-16.600.
Interatom, Internationale Atomreaktorbau GmbH: See—
Boese, Friedrich-Karl. 4,391,793. CI. 423-648.00R.
Intermec Corporation: See-
Palmer. Roger C. 4.391,535, CI. 400-120.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See—
Bahr, Dietrich J.; and Briska, Marian, 4,392,143, CI. 346-1 35. lOa
Chang. Wen H ; Gheewala, Tushar R.; and Harns, Enk P..
4.392.148. CI. 357-5.000.
DeBar, David E.. 4,392.209. CI. 365-110.000.
Homg. Cheng T.; Schwenker, Robert O ; and Tsang, Paul J ,
4.392.149. CI. 357-49.000. „ , c
Landrock. Jurgen B.; Perske. Manfred; and Tandjung. Halim 5.,
4.392.097, CI. 318-696.000.
McLeod. Mark H.. 4,392,105, CI. 324-57.0DE.
Stuby. Kenneth P., 4,391.034. CI. 29-579.000.
International Computers Limited: See— „ . ,„, ,no /-i
Burrows, James E.; and Greenaway. Ivan R., 4,392,208, Ul.
364-900.000.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See— „ »
Belko. Robert P.; Boden. Richard M.; and Hanna, Mane R .
4.391.744. CI. 252-522.00R.
Boden. Richard M. 4,391.999. CI. 568-840.000.
Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle, Robert W.; Chant. Bernard J.;
Ouwerkerk, Anton V.; Kamath, Venkatesh; and Mussinan. Cyn-
thia J. 4.391.717. CI. 252-8.600.
Sprecker, Mark A.; Hanna, Marie R.; Tokarzewski. Richard J.;
Belko, Robert P.; Watkins, Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H..
4,391.284, CI. 131-276.000.
International Harvester Co.; See—
Birkenbach, Eugen J., 4,391,335, CI. 172-540.000.
Intemational Paper Company: See— ,
Phillips, Richard B., 4,391,670, CI. 162-12.000.
Self. Robert W.; and Whillock. Allan A.. 4.391,833, CI.
426-523.000.
International Shoe Machine Corporation: See—
Becka, Michael M., 4,391,012. CI. 12-10.500.
International Telephone & Telegraph Corp.: See—
Einem. Robert E.. 4,391.541, CI. 400-248.000.
InterNorth, Inc.: See—
Busse, Paul J, 4,391,735, CI. 252-413.000.
Intlekofer, Michael J.; Hanson, Jay R.; and Lee Thomas E;«o Western
Marine Electronics, Inc. Radar system. 4.392,137. CI. 343-5.0SC.
Intraco. Inc.; See— „,
Hall. Benjamin O.; and Amdt. Thomas W., 4.391.361. CI.
198-735.000.
'''"M?mrDonaldflnd Irani. Cyrus A., 4,391,925. CI. 523-130.000.
Irwin, George H.: See— u >, loi o^n
Ederle, John A.; Hoer, Ralph A.; and Irwm, George H., 4,391,840,
CI. 426-641.000. _ ... „ u .
Ishihara, Toshinobu; Yamamoto, Akira; and Taguchi, Kenichi, to
Schin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd. Alkynyl halide compoundsand alke-
nyl acetate compounds therefrom. 4,391,984, CI. 560-236.000.
Ishii, Akiyasu: See— ,^ ^ vi ■ _
Ueno, Kunihiko; Ishii, Akiyasu; Hukuda, Masazi; and Nakayama.
Kazuyuki. 4.391,763, CI. 264-15.000. „ ^ , ,a
Ishii, Koji; Shinmoto, Takahiko; and Maehara Kenso to Ryobi L^.
Plate holding device for offset duplicator. 4,391,193, CI. 101-415.100.
Ishii, Yoshiya; See — . ^ ■ ».i u i.
Dohshita. Hidetoshi; Ishii, Yoshiya; and Fujitani, Nobuyuki,
4,391.241. C1..'123-198.0DB.
^ '■'Tanaka?^Hideharu; Ishijima. Koji; and Koda, Toshihide. 4.391.573.
d. 418-63.000. , ^ , ^ » . .
Ishikawa, Shinzaburo; Kanai. Kenji; Kaminaka. Nobuyuki; and Adachi.
Tetuo to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Magnetoresistance
effect 'type head. 4.392,166. CI. 360-113.000.
Ishikawa. Shozo: See— ., ..
Mabuchi, Minoru; Sakai, Kiyoshi; Ishikawa, Sh^; Egashira, Yuji,
and Kitahara,Makoto, 4.391.889, CI. 430-59XX)0.
Ishizaka, Sunao; and Hozumi, Toshiaki, to Nippon KogakuKJC. Mount
device of an interchangeable lens. 4.391,488. CI. 350-257.000^
Ishler. William E.; Weber, William B.; and Giudici. Livio L. to General
Electric Company. Atuchment of base to lamp umt. 4.392.076. CI.
ISO Yoshimi; Inoue. Shigeki; and Shibuya. Toshifumi. to Hiuchi, Ltd.
Stereo demodulation system for an FM stereo broadcast receiver.
4,392,020, CI. 179-l.OGE.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Isobe, Yukihiro: See —
Hosaka. Akihiko; Okuyama, Kiyotaka; and Isobe, Yukihiro,
4,391,864, CI. 428-64.000.
Isogawa, Takayuki: See —
Takematsu, Tetsuo; Isogawa, Takayuki; and Sakuraba, Yasuya,
4,391,631, CI. 71-118.000.
Itek Corporation: See —
McUughlin, Joseph L., 4,391,526, CI. 356-359.000.
Ito, Shinzo, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for mea-
suring an injection amount from an injection device for use with an
engine. 4,391.133, CI. 73-119.00A.
Ito, Sumio, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronically
controlling, fuel injection method. 4,391,253, CI. 123-478.000.
Ito, Yoji: See —
Inoue, Yozo; Ito, Yoji; Hara, Kiyoshi; Usami, Kiyoshi; and Iwata,
Yasuhiro, 4,391,320, CI. 165-2.000.
Itoh, Kunio; Sugino, Takashi; Wada, Masaru; and Shimizu, Hirokazu, to
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Terraced substrate semicon-
ductor laser. 4,392,227, CI. 372-46.000.
Itoh, Kunio: See —
Okabe, Takako; Itoh, Kunio; and Sugino, Takashi, 4,392,228. CI.
372-46.000.
Ivy, Jessie T. Wind and water power generator. 4,392,060, CI.
290-53.000.
Iwama, Shinichi; and Ega^aki, Takashi, to Daiwa Seiko Inc. Spinning
reel brake. 4,391,419, CI. 242-84.50A.
Iwasaki, Shoji: See —
Ohhashi, Shiro; Ubusawa, Fumiyoshi; Iwasaki, Shoji; and Manaka,
Tetsuyuki, 4,392,243, CI. 455-74.000.
Iwata, Hideici, to Nel-Tech Development, Inc. Multiplex communica-
tion system using remote microprocessors. 4,392,125, CI. 340-518.000.
Iwata, Yasuhiro: See —
Inoue, Yozo; Ito, Yoji; Hara, Kiyoshi; Usami, Kiyoshi; and Iwata,
Yasuhiro, 4,391,320, CI. 165-2.000.
Iwatani, Shiro, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Semiconductor
device. 4,392.151, CI. 357-72.000.
Izawa, Ryuichi: See —
Aoki, Masakazu; Ando, Haruhisa; Ohba, Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto, Iwao; and Izawa, Ryuichi. 4,392,158, CI. 358-213.000.
Izraeli, Hyman, to Thomas & Betts Corporation. Cable covering
method using an expandable insulative sleeve. 4,391,661, CI.
156-49.000.
J. B. Foote Foundry Co., The: See —
Wood, Thomas D.; Reiss, Garry K.; and Overly, Larry L.,
4,391,595, CI. 474-33.000.
J. I. Case Company: See —
Smith. Wayne G.; and Maurer, Herman J.. 4.391,050, CI. 37-
142.00A.
Vietor, Francis H., 4,391,563. CI. 414-698.000.
J. M. Huber Corporation: See —
Fusco. Gerard A.; and van Lier, Glenn, 4,391,638, CI. 106-20.000.
J. R. Simplot Company: See —
Galland, Lesley A.; and Skiver, Bruce W., 4,391,172, CI.
83-403.000.
J. S. Staedtler KG: See—
Rosel, Hans-Dieter, 4,392,147, CI. 346-14O.0OR.
Jabben, Gary D., to Western Electric Company, Inc. Circuit board and
contact assemblies. 4,392,181. CI. 361-401.000.
Jackisch. Rudolph. Internal-combustion engine. 4,391,233, CI. 123-
61.00R.
Jacklin, Roger L., to Deere & Company. Bevel gear and pinion drive
with biased thrust bearing. 4,391,157, CI. 74-402.000.
Jackson, Charles F. C: See —
Trumble, William P.; Finn, Roger C; and Jackson, Charles F. C,
4,392,014, CI. 174-92.000.
Jackson. Charles R. Phase-locked loop including non-linear phase
detector of the sample and hold type. 4.392.1 13, CI. 331-14.000.
Jackson, G. C, Jr.; Bramlett, Kenneth W.; and Dennis, James G., to
Dresser Industries, Inc. Quick release downhole motor coupling.
4,391,547, CI. 403-341.000.
Jackson, Ian D.; Berry, Derek; Rowden, George A.; and Dilley, Mal-
colm, to Davy McKee (Minerals & Metals) Limited. Method of, and
apparatus for, effecting liquid-liquid conUct. 4,391,711. CI.
210-634.000.
Jacobsen, Kjell O.; and Engen, Gudmund. to A/S Raufoss Ammunis-
jonsfabrikker. Smoke cartridge. 4.391.197. CI. 102-334.000.
Jacobson. Gerald D. Tire chain with attaching device. 4,391,315. CI.
152-213.0OA.
Jaegers. Huber: See —
Forster. Siegfried; Quell, Peter; and Jaegers, Huber, 4,391.227. CI.
122-16.000.
Jaggle, Gunther; Peters, Klaus-Jurgen; and Riel, Klaus, to Robert
Bosch GmbH. Fuel injection system. 4,391,252, CI. 123-454.000.
Jakobs, Karlhans: See —
Reitz. Gunther; Jakobs, Karlhans; and Boehmke, Gunther,
4,391,718, CI. 252-8.700.
James, John: See —
Eckels, Calvin; and James, John, 4,392,248, CI. 455-161.000.
James, William A.: See —
Cook, John R.; and James, William A., 4,391,869. CI. 428-218.000.
J&nc Robert V : See
Jasper. Steven C; and Jane. Robert V., 4.392,138, CI. 343-103.000.
Janis, Patrick K.: See —
Salsky, Jerome; Janis, Patrick K.; and Branen, Kenneth E.,
4,391,088, CI. 57-234.000.
Janiszewski, Grzegorz K.: See —
Weiertz, Stig H. A.; and Janiszewski, Grzegorz K., 4,391,164, CI.
74-78 l.OOR.
Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd.: See —
Tamiya, Yoshimichi; Eguchi, Yasukata; and Makabe, Hachiro,
4,391,212, CI. 112-158.00E.
Janssen, Craig R., to Padco, Inc. Finishing tool for smoothing wall-
board tape joints. 4,391,013, CI. 15-210.00R.
Janssen, Sylvain; and Sequies, Jean, to Giers. Fluid-pressure responsive
apparatus. 4,391.145, CI. 73-704.000.
Janssens, Wilhelmus G. E.; and Merges, Heinz, to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Hand-held hair dryer. 4.391,047, CI. 34-97.000.
Japan Organo Co., Ltd.: See —
Shimizu, Hiroshi; Sakai, Sigeo; Matsuda, Fumihiko; and Matsu-
moto, Reiko, 4,391,649, CI. 127-46.200.
Jasper, Steven C; and Jane, Robert V., to Motorola, Inc. Apparatus and
method for detecting and inhibiting signals interfering with a Loran C
signal. 4,392,138. CI. 343-103.000.
Jenkins, Jon A., to IMED Corporation. Apptaratus for providing a
controlled flow of intravenous fluid to a patient. 4,391,599, CI.
604-118.000.
Jennings, William B.: See —
Ciarlei, Joseph A.; Tobin, Curtis L.; and Jennings, William B.,
4,391,322, CI. 165-125.000.
Jensen, Bruno: See —
Nelson, John W.; and Jensen, Bruno, 4,391.151, CI. 73-863.230.
Jeschke, Peter; and Plath, Jurgen, to Didier-Werke A.G. Sliding closure
unit. 4,391,392, CI. 222-598.000.
Jin, Sungho; and Tiefel, Thomas H., to Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated. Isotropic and nearly isotropic permanent magnet
alloys. 4,391,656, CI. 148-102.000.
Jirousek, Norman F.; and Shipitalo, William M., to Towmotor Corpo-
ration. Parking disc brake actuator. 4,391,351, CI. 188-18.00A.
Jo, Byeong H.; and Zucker, Jerry, to RM Industrial Products Com-
pany, Inc. Asbestos products of improved physical properties having
meUl oxides on the surfaces thereof 4,391,875, CI. 428-378.000.
John Wyeth and Brother Limited: See —
Crossley, Roger, 4.391,752, CI. 260-239.30B.
Johnson, Avery A., Jr.: See —
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; and Ritchey,
Charles R., 4,391,799. CI. 424-132.000.
Johnson. Grannis S.: See —
Marcellis. Alphonso W.; and Johnson, Grannis S., 4,391,645, CI.
106-90.000.
Johnson & Johnson Baby Products Company: See —
Cook, John R.; and James, William A., 4,391.869, CI. 428-218.000.
Johnson & Johnson Dental Products Company: See —
Monfredo, Joseph R.; and Roth, Ronald H., 4,391,589. CI.
433-63.000.
Johnson, Michael R.: See —
Harbert, Charles A.; Johnson, Michael R.; and Melvin, Lawrence
S., Jr., 4,391,827, CI. 424-331.000.
Johnson, Robert D., to Dow Coming Corporation. Elastomeric silicone
sponge. 4,391.921, CI. 521-66.000.
Johnson, Robert L. Board game. 4,391,449, CI. 273-260.000.
Johnson, Virgil E., Jr.; Sundaram, T. R.; and Conn, Andrew F., to
Hydronautics, Incorporated. Cavitating liquid jet assisted drill bit and
method for deep-hole drilling. 4,391.339, CI. 175-393.000.
Jones, Darrell D.: See —
Cronan, John M.; Haynes, Joseph M.; and Jones, Darrell D.,
4,391,347, CI. 182-113.000.
Jones, Darrell L., to Vetco Offshore, Inc. Mooring system bearing for
a tensioned leg platform. 4,391,554, CI. 405-224.000.
Joormann, Hendrik J. M., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Magnetic head,
method of producing the magnetic head. 4,392,167, CI. 360-120.000.
Jorgens, Douglas M. One-hand key ring. 4,391,113, CI. 70-459.000.
Joyce Card & Display Co.: See —
Joyce, Robert D., 4,391,375, CI. 211-13.000.
Joyce, Robert D., to Joyce Card & Display Co. Display card and
assembly hanger. 4,391,375. CI. 211-13.000.
Juang, Mike S. D.: See —
Falk, John C; and Juang, Mike S. D., 4.391.948, CI. 525-57.000.
Juguin, Bernard: See —
Cosyns, Jean; Juguin, Bernard; Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Mi-
quel, Jean, 4,392,002, CI. 585-329.000.
Jung, Harald: See —
Schafer, Ewald; and Jung, Harald, 4,391,106, CI. 66-193.000.
Junginger, Robert: See —
Struck, Bemd D.; Junginger, Robert; and Boltersdorf, Dagmar,
4,391,682, CI. 204-104.000.
Jurd, Leonard, to United States of America, Agriculture. Dibutylor-
thobenzylmethoxybenzenes and dibutylorthocinnamylmethoxyben-
zenes as mosquito larvae growth inhibitors. 4,391,828, CI.
424-340.000.
K-V Associates, Inc.: See —
Kerfoot, William B.; and Skinner, Stuart M., Jr., 4,391,137, Q.
73-204.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha: See —
Hara, Yoshiaki, 4,391,532, CI. 368-250.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho: See —
Ichikawa, Katsumi; Amano, Itani; Ozaki, Keiji; and Suzuki, Seiichi,
4,391,769, CI. 264-326.000.
Kawamura, Teruaki; Harada, Nobuhiko; Komatsu, Yukihiko; and
Sakai, Masaru, 4,391,016, CI. 15-302.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Morita Seisakusho: See —
Matsui, Takahiro, 4,391,588, CI. 433-33.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Kabushiki Kaisha Nichidenshi Technics: See —
Sato, Takeshi; and Suzaki. Shunichi, 4,392,054, CI. 250-307.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha: See —
Tsuji, Masuo, 4,392,216, CI. 368-71.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho: See —
Tanaka, Kobun; and Kawaharazaki, Takashi, 4,391,023, CI. 24-
230.0AL.
Kadim, Azriel, to Orlite Engineering Ltd. Ammunition magazine.
4,391,055, CI. 42-50.000.
Kagan, Jonathan, to Becton, Dickinson and Company. Filtered hub
device for aspirating and injecting liquids. 4,391,274, CI. 604-190.000.
Kaganowicz. Grzegorz; and Robinson, John W., to RCA Corporation.
Adherent perfluorinated layers. 4,391,843, CI. 427-41.000.
Kagi, Erwin: See —
Muller, Michael; Scherrer, Herbert; and Kagi, Erwin, 4,391.536,
CI. 400-144.200.
Kai, Tomokazu, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Mobile communication
system. 4,392,242, CI. 455-33.000.
Kaiser, Karl; and Ohorodnik, Alexander, to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft. Continuous removal of residual hydrocarbons from polyole-
fms. 4,391,972, CI. 528-499.000.
Kaiser, Siegfried: See —
Huhn, Helmut; and Kaiser, Siegfried, 4,391,302, CI. 138-118.100.
Kakabu, Shinzo: See —
Aya, Masahiro; Saito, Junichi; Yasui, Kazuomi; Kakabu, Shinzo;
Kamochi, Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko, 4,391,629, CI.
71-94.000.
Kali-Chemie Pharma GmbH: See—
Thies, Peter W.; and David, Samuel. 4,391,819, CI. 424-278.C00.
Kalvinskas, John J.; and Rohatgi, Naresh K., to United States of Amer-
ica, National Aeronautics and Space Administration. Hydrodesulfuri-
zation of chiorinized coal. 4,391,609, CI. 44-l.OSR.
Kamath, Venkatesh: See —
Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle, Robert W.; Chant, Bernard J.;
Ouwerkerk, Anton V.; Kamath, Venkatesh; and Mussinan, Cyn-
thia J., 4,391,717, CI. 252-8.600.
Kamegaya, Takeo; Sekigawa, Tadahiko; Kurakami, Hiroshi; and
Suzuki, Yoshiro, to Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd. Gas dis-
charge display panel. 4,392.075, CI. 313-584.000.
Kamel, Fouad A., to Whitin Roberts Company. Apron drafting system.
4,391,021, CI. 19-253.000.
Kamezaki, Yasushi; Inoue, Eiichi; Nishihama, Hitoshi; Fushida, Akira;
and Matsumoto, Joji, to Mita Industrial Co., Ltd. Multiple copy
electrophotographic process using dye sensitized ZnO. 4,391,892, CI.
430-126.000.
Kaminaka, Nobuyuki: See —
Ishikawa, Shinzaburo; Kanai, Kenji; Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; and
Adachi, Tetuo, 4,392,166, CI. 360-113.000.
Kamochi, Atsumi: See —
Aya, Masahiro; Saito, Junichi; Yasui, Kazuomi; Kakabu, Shinzo;
Kamochi, Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko, 4,391,629, CI.
71-94.000.
Kampf, Gunther: See —
Schmid, Helmut; Bock, Martin; and Kampf, Gunther, 4,391,522, CI.
356-326.000.
Kamyr, Inc.: See —
Funk, Erwin D., 4,391,468, CI. 299-8.000.
Kanai, Kenji: See —
Ishikawa, Shinzaburo; Kanai, Kenji; Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; and
Adachi, Tetuo, 4,392,166, CI. 360-113.000.
Kanazawa, Yukio. Hair cutting device. 4,391,040, CI. 30-201.000.
Kanbe, Junichiro: See —
Tamura, Yasuyuki; Kanbe, Junichiro; Nakamura, Shunji; Toyono,
Tsutomu; and Takahashi, Tohru, 4,391,891, CI. 430-120.000.
Kanda, Yoshitsugu; Kurikawa. Minoru; Morimoto. Toru; and Nakani-
shi, Kiyoshi. to N.D.C. Co., Ltd. Method of making a bearing mate-
rial containing an aluminum base alloy. 4,391,854, CI. 427-192.000.
Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Yamane, Kazumasa; Kobayashi, Masahiro; and Takada. Masaniko,
4,391,944. CI. 524-548.000.
Kansas University Endowment Association: See —
Frenkel. Jacob K.; and Smith, Donald D.. 4,391,822. CI.
424-283.000.
Kanyb. Kalman: See —
Levi. George W.; and Kanyo, Kalman. 4.391,307. CI. 140-140.000.
Kanzaki Paper Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See—
Nakamura, Mikio; and Miyake, Makoto, 4.391,852, CI. 427-150.000.
Kaplan, Jonathan I., to Polaroid Corporation. Electric wire terminal
connecting method. 4,391,039, CI. 29-884.000.
Kapoor, Mohan L.: See —
Rebeschi. Thomas J.; and Kapoor, Mohan L., 4,392,084, CI.
315-169.400.
Karl Kassbohrer Fahrzeugwerke GmbH: See —
Marti, Ernst, 4,39 1 .002, CI. 4-32 1 .000.
Karl Otto Braun KG.: See—
Schafer, Ewald; and Jung, Harald, 4,391,106, CI. 66-193.000.
Kamer & Co AB: See—
Kamer, Franz, 4,391,395, CI. 223-94.000.
Kamer, Franz, to Kamer & Co AB. Clothes hanger. 4,391,395, CI.
223-94.000.
Kauyama, Tsutomu; and Nakanishi, Toyohiko, to Fuji Oil Company,
Limited. Method for making simulated tofu products. 4,391,835, CI.
426-573.000.
Kato, Osamu: See—
Uemura, Seiichi; Yamamoto, Shunichi; Hirose, Takao; Takashima,
Hiroaki; and Kato, Osamu, 4,391,788, CI. 423-447.600.
Kato, Shingo: See —
Nakauchi, Hideo; Kato, Shingo; and Ando, Yukio, 4,391,942, CI
524-526.000.
Katoh, Hiroshi: See —
Takechi, Hiroshi; Katoh, Hiroshi; Koyama, Kazuo; and Usami,
Kazuhide. 4.391.653. CI. 148-12.00C.
Katoh. Sunao: See —
Makizuka. Takakazu; and Katoh, Sunao, 4.392,205, CI. 364-518.000.
Kawabata, Etsuo; Ogura, Masahiko; Takagi, Akinobu; and Fujimura.
Akira, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Throttle optener
device for vehicle engines. 4.391.246. CI. 123-391.000.
Kawahara. Hiroshi: See —
Shibata. Fujio; Kawahara. Hiroshi; and Azegami. Hitoshi.
4.391.877. CI. 428-457.000.
Kawaharazaki, Takashi: See —
Tanaka, Kobun; and Kawaharazaki, Takashi, 4,391,023, CI. 24-
230.0AL. _
Kawai, Hisasi: See —
Egami, Tsuneyuki; Kawai, Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi,
Hideki, 4,391,132, CI. 73-118.000.
Kawai, Shinji; Suzuki, Koichi; and Yamaguchi, Yuji, to Aisin Seiki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Spraying device for use in toilet bowls. 4,391,004,
CI. 4-443.000.
Kawamoto, Tamotsu: See —
Kimura, Kazuo; Takayama, Kenichiro; Ado, Yutaka; Kawamoto,
Tamotsu; and Masunaga, Izumi, 4,391,910, CI. 435-232.000.
Kawamura, Teruaki; Harada, Nobuhiko; Komatsu, Yukihiko; and
Sakai, Masaru, to Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho. Degreasing
apparatus for elongated materials. 4,391.016, CI. 15-302.000.
Kay Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Arrhemus, Gustaf O.. 4,391,267, CI. 126-400.000.
Keathley, Anthony C; Stanton. Howard F.; and Wagle, Mahesh M., to
Tubing Technology, Inc. Shear forming apparatus for elongated
non-rotating metal tubes. 4,391,114, CI. 72-78.000.
Keenan, John R.. to General Signal Corp. Packing for equalizing
reservoir cut-out valve. 4.391.293. CI. 137-312.000.
Keep, Henry, Jr. Railroad switch heater. 4.391.425, CI. 246-428.000.
Keisuke Honda: See —
Kurata, Hisao, 4,392.144. CI. 346-139.00C.
Keith, Charles W.. Jr.: See-
Mitchell. Urry D.; and Keith. Charles W.. Jr., 4.391,007. CI.
5-60.000.
Keldmann, Erik C. V.. to Elpan ApS. Temperature regulating system
for the control of temperature in a room. 4,391,913. CI. 236-36.000.
Keller, Wolfgang; Grassmann, Hans-Christian; and Schmidt. Karl, to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Method and apparatus for the manufac-
ture of silicon by crucible-free zone melting. 4,392,230, CI.
373-139.000.
Kellwood Company: See —
Lawson, J. William; and Matthews. Robert M., 4,390,999. CI.
2-4O9.00O.
Kelly, Thomas J.; and Robinson, Mark L.. to Huntington Alloys, Inc.
Weldable oxide dispersion strengthened alloys. 4,391,634, CI.
75-124.000.
Kelsey-Hayes Company: See-
Evans, Anthony C, 4,391,355, CI. 188-73.440.
Rozmus, Walter J., 4,391,614, CI. 55-2.000.
Kembo, Yukio: See —
Akiyama, Nobuyuki; Kembo, Yukio; Nakagawa, Yasuo; Aiuchi,
Susumu; and Nomoto, Mineo, 4.391,511, CI. 355-40.000.
Kende, Andrew S.; Curran, Dennis P.; King, Margaret L.; and Feld-
stein, Neil A., to University of Rochester, The. Intermediates for the
production of picropodophyllin and related compounds and pro-
cesses for the preparation and use thereof 4.391.982, CI. 549-433.000.
Kennedy, Robert P.: See —
Greene, Richard A.; and Kennedy, Robert P.. 4.391,038, CI.
29-829.000.
Kent, William C, to Western Electric Company, Inc. Apparatus for
applying fluid to articles. 4,391,220, CI. 1 18-707.000.
Kerfoot, William B.; and Skinner. Stuart M., Jr., to K-V Associates, Inc.
Groundwater flow meter. 4,391,137, CI. 73-204.000.
Kemforschungsanlage Julich GmbH: See —
Forster, Siegfried; Quell, Peter; and Jaegers, Huber, 4,391,227, CI.
122-16.000.
Iniotekis, Nicolaos, 4,391,615, CI. 55-16.000.
Struck, Bemd D.; Junginger, Robert; and Boltersdorf, Dagmar,
4,391,682, CI. 204-104.000.
Kersting, Hans-Joachim; Wolfrum, Erhard; Portz, Willi; and Strauss,
Georg, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Production of calcium car-
bide. 4,391,786, CI. 423-442.000.
Hoil, Heimar; and Kessler, Rolf, 4,391,214, CI. 112-269.100.
Keystone Consolidated Industries, Inc.: See —
Heaslip, Lawrence J.; Hohulin, Alphia L.; and Mitchell, Joseph R.,
4,391,319, CI. 164-259.000.
Kiefer, Karl, to TRW Inc. Apparatus and method for installing and
energizing submergible pump in underwater well. 4,391,330, CI.
166-341.000.
Kihira, Masafumi: See —
Hamane, Tokuhito; Kinoshita, Toshio; Kihira, Masafumi; Hamada.
Hitosi; and Gotou, Mikio, 4.391,306, CI. I4O-92.100.
Kikuchi, Toshiaki: See —
Shono, Hiroaki; and Kikuchi, Toshiaki, 4,391,619, CI. 65-12.000.
Kimura, Akio: See —
Suzuki, Togi; Tsunawaki, Kiyokazu; Wada, Osamu; and Kimura,
Akio, 4,391,872, CI. 428-224.000.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Kimura, Kazuo Takayama. Kenichiro; Ado, Yutaka; Kawamoto, Kojima, Takafumi; Tamaki, Kenzo; and Yokota, Shiro, to Hitachi, Ltd.;
Tamotsu and Masunaga, Izumi, to Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co.. Ltd. and Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation. Subscriber
Processes for producing thermophilic aspartase. 4,391,910, CI. line testing system. 4,392,026, CI. 179-175.30R.
4^5 232 000 Kokovikhin, Vasily G.: See—
Kimura Takeo See— Yakovlev, Nikolai I.; Smolin, Anatoly T.: Kokovikhin, Vasily G.;
Ohmura, Kaoru Kimura, Takeo; and Kusunose, Tetsuhiro, and Kotunov, Alexei A., 4,392,106, CI. 324-72.500.
4,392,013, CI. 174-68.500. Kokusai Denshm Denwa Co.. Ltd.: See-
Kine Marearet L See— Ando, Sumitoshi, 4,392,222, CI. 370-60.000.
Kende Andrew S. Curran. Dennis P.; King, Margaret L.; and Mori, Hiromichi; Matsumoto. Jun; and Fujioka, Masanobu,
Feldstein, Neil A.. 4.391.982. CI. 549-433.000. 4,392,224, CI 370-67.000. .„ p„„„
Kinoshiu Toshio See— Kolb, Arthur F.; Franklin, Arthur J.; and Miller, Toby I., to Eaton
Hamiine, Tokuhito; Kinoshita, Toshio; Kihira. Masafumi; Hamada. Corporation. Thermal overload relay having a NO- or RC^onUct
Hitosi- and Gotou. Mikio, 4,391,306, CI. 140-92.100. unit selectively addable in the field. 4,392,118, CI. 337-154.000.
Kinter Malcolm See— Kollmorgen Technologies Corporation: See—
Yokota, Dick; Kuty. David; and Kinter. Malcolm. 4.391.531. CI. Zeblisky. Rudolph J., 4,391,841, CI. 427-12.000.
368-239 000 Kolombos, Alexander J.; Telford, Clive D.; and Young, Dennis, to
Kippax John W See— British Petroleum Company Limited, The. Isobutene by dehydroiso-
Harris. Norman; Flintoff, John F.; and Kippax, John W., 4,391,677, merization of normal butane. 4,392,003, CI. 585-661 .000.
CI 203-28 000 Komatsu, Yukihiko: See—
Kishida. Toshikatsu: See- Kawamura. Teruaki; Harada^^ Nobuhik^Komatsu. Yukihiko; and
Murakami. Tadashi; and Kishida. Toshikatsu, 4,391,587, CI. Sakai, Masaru, 4,391,016, CI. 15-302.000. . » ^
432-121 000 Konforti, Naim; and Marom, Emanuel, to Ramot University Authonty
Kishimoto Keniiro- Igarashi, Hideaki; and Kono, Migaki. to Yuasa for Applied Research & Industrial Development Ltd. Method and
Battery Company Limited. Process for producing sealed lead-acid apparatus for image subtraction in order to extract non-common
battery 4 391 036 CI 29-623 200 information from two light images. 4,392,155, CI. 358-106.000.
Kitahara, Makoto See— Koning, Richard W.; Meiers, Gerald F.; and Anstey, Henry D., to
Mabuchi Minoru Sakai, Kiyoshi; Ishikawa, Shozo; Egashira. Yuji; Deere & Company. Belt-tensioning system for round balers,
and KiUhara, Makoto. 4,391.889. CI. 430-59.000. 4.391.187, CI. 100-88.000.
Kitamura, Nobu- See Konno, Kunio: See —
Hori Hisako Kitamura, Nobu; ShirahaU, Isao; and Nakamura, Suda, Tatsuo; Hirasawa. Yoshihei; Takahashi, Sachio; Abe, Etsuko;
Nobuyuki, 4.391.955. CI. 525-462.000. Konno. Kunio; and Aoki. Tadao. 4.391.802. CI. 424-236.000.
Kitamura. Shuji:'s«—' ' Kono Migaki: See- ,. . v xa v.
Mashio, Fujio; and Kitamura. Shuji, 4.391,945, CI. 524-600.000. Kishimoto, Kenjiro; Igarashi. Hideaki; and Kono. Migaki.
Kitane, Syo'iti; Ho'njo. Shigeru; Ohe. Kuniyoshi; and Tobioka. Fumio, 4,391.036. CI. 29-623.200. , . ^, ■
to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method for manufactur- Konoshima, Katunaga. to Olympus Optical Company Ltd. Cleaning
ing semiconductor substrate. 4,391.658. CI. 148-188.000. apparatus for endoscope. 4,391,287, CI. 134-99.000.
Klaiber George S See— Koprek, Stanislaw: See—
Grajek, Stanley A.; Hill, Robert S.; and Klaiber, George S., Wyszkowski, Jerzy; Panasiuk, Wladyslaw; Koprek, Stanislaw; and
4 391 177 CI 84-196.000. Piechal, Andzei, 4,391,654, CI. 148-16.600.
Klein-Albeiihau'sen. Heinrich, to Ibau Hamburg Ingenieurgisillschaft Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha. Borbala;
Endustreibau mbH. Silo system for mixing stored material. 4,391,528, Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner. Andras; Heja. Gergely; Kovacz. Gabor;
CI 366-15 000 Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, to Chinoin Gyogyszer es Vegyes-
Kleine Willi and Frey, Werner, to Wacker-Chemie GmbH. Process for zeti Termekek Gyara R.T. 7-Substituted benzopyranes and process
the 'polymerization of vinyl halide polymers. 4,391,960, CI. for the preparation thereof 4,391,821, CI. 424-283.000^
526-74000. Korczak, Alexander; and Levis, William W., Jr., to BASF Wyandotte
Kleinschmidt, Peter; and Magori. Valentin, to Siemens Aktiengesell- Corporation. Propylene oxide adducts of toluenediamine. 4,391.728,
schaft. Trigger device and piezo-ignition coupler with galvanic CI. 252-182.000.
decoupling 4 392 074 CI 310-327 0(X). Kom. Elmer J: See —
Kneip. Fernand; and Mamach, Ernest, to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Wang, Teh P.; and Kom, Elmer J., 4,392,044, CI. 219-118.000.
Company, The. Self-checking safety mat. 4.392.176, CI. 361-160.000. Kommayer, Horst: See-
Knepper, Hermann, to Brinkmann, Heinrich Bemhard. Method for Reinhard, Max; and Kommayer, Horst. 4.391.140. CI. 73-432.00R.
making of solid fertilizer by separation of liquid manure and device Kornrumpf, William P., to General Electnc Company. Power relay
for carrying out this method. 4,391.623. CI. 71-21.000. with assisted commutation. 4.392.171. CI. 361-5.000.
Knight. Houston W, to FMC Corporation. Mono-rail boom supported Kosaka, Yositeru: See— ^ -,«-, ,i:, /-i -.^imnn
articulated service line. 4,391,297, CI. 137-615.000. Ota, Yoshihiko; and Kosaka, Yos'teru^ 4,392,161 C1360-10.300.
Knobloch, Joy E. Animal feed composition and method for producing Kosar, Walter F. Water deflector. 4,391,068, CI. 52-97.U00.
same. 4,391,831, CI. 426-93.000. Koski, Erkki, to Valmet OY. Size press with coating pool suppressing
Knoll, William C; and Bay. David L., to GTE Products Corporation. arrangement. 4.391.217, CI. 1 18-405.000.
Direct drive ballast with delayed surting circuit. 4,392.085, CI. Koster, Robertus J. C., to Procter & Gamble Company, The. petergent
315-173.000. composition containing low levels of amine oxides. 4,391,726, CI.
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Saji, Hideo, to Toyou 252-99.000. , j ^ u
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nippondenso Co.. Ltd. Device Kosuge, Hideaki. to Nissan Motor Company, Limit^ Turbo-com-
of controlling the idling speed of an engine. 4.391,244, CI. pound internal combustion engine. 4,391.098. CI. 60-602.00U.
123-339 000 Kotunov, Alexei A.: See —
Kobayashi Hisao See— Yakovlev. Nikolai I.; Smolin, Anatoly T.; Kokovikhin, Vasily G.;
Ide, Katsuyuki; Ohe, Kempo; and Kobayashi, Hisao, 4,392,086, CI. and Kotunov. Alexei A., 4,392,196, CI. 324-72.500.
315-174 000 Kovacs, Lloyd, to Hayssen Manufacturing Company. Method of and
Kobayashi Isao- See— apparatus for forming, filling and sealing packages. 4,391,081, CI.
Niioka. Takehani; and Kobayashi. Isao. 4,392,246, CI. 455- 1 58.000. 53-436.000.
Kobayashi, Masahiro: See— Kovacz, Gabor: See— c i u n k i,
Yamane, Kazumasa; Kobayashi, Masahiro; and Takada. Masaniko, Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha. BorbaJa;
4 391 944 CI 524-548.000. Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja, Gergely; Kovacz, Ga-
Kobayashi, Masatsune, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Recording liquid. bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4,391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
4.391,639, CI. 106-22.000. Kovatch, Michael S: See— _. ^ , ^ _.^^ ^ u ,
Kobelt, Jacob. Fluid actuated positioner. 4,391,182, CI. 91-378.000. Velmin, Rolf; Kovatch, Michael S.; and Mautz, Gus H., Jr..
Kocher, Johann, to Alpi Milchindustrie reg. Gen. m.b.H. Process for 4,391,674, CI. 201-41.000.
themanufactureofaliquid, paste or powder whey product simulative Ko vats, Ferenc: See—
of a skin milk product. 4.391,837, CI. 426-583.000. Devenyi. Tibor; Bocsa, Klara K.; Kovats Ferenc; Pongor, Sandor;
Koda, ToshihiderSee— Szabolcsi, Gertnid; and Such. Mihaly. 4,391.839, CI. 426-626.000.
Tanaka, Hideharu;Ishijima.Koji; and Koda,Toshihide. 4.391.573. Kowalski, Werner See— ..-,„, ,»,,., ^i, ,,cnnn
CI. 418-63.000. Haas. Hans; and Kowalski. Werner. 4,391.783. CI. 423-315.000.
Koenig & Bauer AG: See— Koyama. Kazuo: See— , ... ^. ^ „ j ,,
Bolza-Schunemann, Hans-Bemhard. 4,391.191. CI. 101-216.000. Takechi. Hiroshi; Katoh. Hiroshi; Koyama, Kazuo; and Usami.
Wieland. Erich G, 4.391,192, CI. 101-350.000. Kazuhide, 4,391,653, CI. 148-12.00C. ^ ^„ .. „,.
Kogoma, Kiyoshi Ohashi, Yu; Niizeki, Jiro; Sone. Norio; and Tobita. Koziol. Konrad; and Wenk. Ench. to Conradty GmbH Metallelek-
Takashi. to Nisso Petrochemical Industrie Co.. Ltd. Process for the troden KG. Coated metal anode or the electrolytic recovery of
productionofethers. 4.391,994. CI. 568-593.000. metals. 4.391.695. CI. 204-286.000.
Kohama. Tokio: See— Krakauer. Merrill. Control system for increasing the versatility of an all
Eeami. Tsuneyuki; Kawai. Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi. purpose merchandiser. 4.391.388. CI. 221-76.000.
Hidcki. 4.39 1 . 1 32. CI. 73- 1 1 8.000. Kramer. Wilhelm. to Schmelzbasaltwerk KiUentern. Dr Ing^ .^auntz
Kohler Gerd- See— KG. Process for fixing tiles in position. 4.391.664. CI. 156-71.000.
Edinger. Egon; and Kohler. Gerd. 4,391,764, CI. 264-25.000. Krause, Siegfried: See— . », ^ o w -
Koide Hiroshi to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Driving method and apparatus Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfned; and McGuiness, Robert
for illumination type imaging system. 4,391,506, CI. 355-8.000. C, 4.391.965, CI. 528-1 12.000.
Koine. Richard, to Rheinmetall GmbH. Method and means for control- Krautkramer-Branson. Inc.: See—
ling the firing rate from a machine gun. 4.391.180. CI. 89-129.00R. Diederichs, Rolf, 4,391,144. CI. 73-629.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Kreeger, Elsmcr W.: See— Kusunose, Tetsuhiro: See—
Stahl, Edward L.; and Kreeger. Elsmer W., 4.391.369, CI. Ohmura, Kaoru; Kimura, Takeo; and Kusunose, Tetsuhiro,
206-506.000. 4,392,013, CI. 174-68.500.
Krekeler, Claude B., to Cincinnati Mine Machinery Company, The. Kuty, David: See-
Core eliminator for mining, road working or earth moving machin- Yokota, Dick; Kuty, David; and Kinter, Malcolm, 4,391,531, CI.
ery. 4,391,472, CI. 299-86.000. 368-239.000.
Krempl, Peter W.; Claassen, Peter; and Zeiringer, Rudolf, to List, Hans. Kuwabara. Kouji; Sugawara, Hiroyuki; Shirakura. Toshiharu; Sasaki,
Transducer device for measuring mechanical values on hollow bod- Kouji; and Takemori, Satoshi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Axis-monitonng
ies. 4,391,147, CI. 73-730.000. apparatus for a laser beam. 4,391,519, CI. 356-153.000.
Krikava. James A.: See Kyburz, Emilio: See —
Pesce. Eugene B.; and Krikava. James A., 4,391,230, CI. 123- Imhof, Rene; and Kyburz, Emilio, 4,391,978, CI. 546-138.000.
25.00E. Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Krill, Alvin G.: See^ Kimura, Kazuo; Takayama, Kenichiro; Ado, Yutaka; Kawamoto,
Young, Jack W.; and Krill, Alvin G., 4,392,128. CI. 340-616.000. Tamotsu; and Masunaga, Izumi, 4,391,910, CI. 435-232.000.
Kronert Curt See— L.G.T. Laboratoire General des Telecommunications: See—
Ben'thake, Heinz; Kronert, Curt; and Kunnen, Josef, 4,391,163, CI. Cluniat, Claude, 4,392,252, CI. 455-1 16.000.
74-768 000 La JoUa Cancer Research Foundation: See —
Kronman, Albert F., to Hosposable Products Inc. Disposable draw Engvall, Eva S; and Ruoslahti, Erkki 1. 4,391,749, CI. 260-123.700.
sheet. 4,391,010, CI. 5-484.000. La Telemecanique Electnque: See— , , ^
Kroy Inc ■ See— Cadet, Christian; Dumortier, Bernard; and Souques, Georges,
Connoy, Thomas P., 4,391,539, CI. 400-208.000. 4,392,174 0.361-45.000. ^ ..-,,..„, ,^,..__„
Knickenberg, Winfried; Schundehutte, Karl H.; and Hederich, Volker, LaBate, Micheal D. Ceramic insert. 4,391 434, CI. 266-196.000.
to Bayer Akliengesellschaft. Azo polyether dyestuffs. fonnulations of Labbe, Donald E.; and Brown, Mayo E.. Jr., to General Electnc Com-
these dyestuffs, their preparation and their use. 4,391,606, CI. pany. Attemperator-deaerator condenser. 4,391,101. CI. 60-646.000.
8 525 000 Labeco Harvesters, Inc.: See —
Krtimm, Heinz: See- "Y^o'i n^^?,""^^,^!;,''^' '^'°^ ° ' *"'^ ^"'"'°"' ■'°*'" ^' ^''
Hedrich, Wilhelm; Krumm, Heinz; and Haeuser,Erhard. 4,391,529, . ^ '*'3', .'^^^^^'^^^L^^V .u a .^ m «f^,H P.>,r^ i ,h
C\ 366-266 000 Laird, William F.; and Wood, Kenneth A., to Hartford Fibres, Ltd.
Kr se Uno^ee— Cutter with angular blades and method for cutting rope therewith.
"nennan. Daniel F.; and Kruse, Uno, 4,391,928, CI. 523-201.000. Lak^j'^i-J-.^sJ^" **
•""Fn^Sg, Ma'rk oTand Krutak. James J., Sr., 4,391,886, CI. '^^'ji'^'^.^^^fj^^^^ ^"'^ ^^ ^"' ^''''^'- """"^ ^•
V *2^''^' A .^ x:\An r«r««r«tir,n MPthnH nf and annaratus Lakin, Willis M.; Goodman. Faith L.; and Savoca, Diane L., to Lakin.
Krynock. Robert A., to f^JC Corporation. Method °f and appara^^ Acrobatic toy. 4.391,064. CI. 46-130.000.
for separating elongated articles by lengtl^ 4^^^^^^^ ^ ^l Laurence E.; and Cloud. Robert C, to
Kubo, Seitoku; Kuramochi Koujiro; and Terakura Yukio to Toyota ^ ^ ^ qj, Co^ (Indiana). Mineral treatment and composi-
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Hydraulic fluid pressure control CI. 252 378.00R.
system for an automatic transmission. 4.391,166. CI. 74-869.000. Lamar Richard S.: See—
Kubota. Ltd.: See— . _ . . . • „:„uh: Hi«c»,i. anH Fe'rreira. Laurence E.; Lamar. Richard S.; and Bertolacini, Ralph
Murakami. Shinichi; Monchika. Toshiaki; Hiraishi. Hisashi; and ^ 4 391734 CI 252 378 00R
Shiokawa, Hiroyuki, 4,391,635, CI. 75-125.000. ^^^^^ ^^^v^ Enterprises. Inc.: See-
Kubota. Yutaka: See- . o , „ .„.u: a ,oi i^i Grimes, Fred K., 4,391,428, CI. 248-546.000.
Abe, Yoshiaki; Kubota, Yutaka; and Sugimoto, Hitoshi, 4,391,237, ^^^ ^^^.j ^ ^^^ Peercy. Paul S.. to United Sutes of America,
™- ,'.^^''^^.*^"' r^ 1 o J c ..I .v» .^«:.„„ Energy. Photosensitivity enhancement of PLZT ceramics by positive
Kuch, Phihp L.; Hernngton, Daniel R.; and Eggett, Janet M., to Sun- .^^ implantation. 4.391,901, CI. 43^495.000.
dard Oil Company, The. Organo-monovalentaurus complex catalysts Landrock. Jurgen B.; Perske, Manfred; and Tandjung, Halim S.. to
for the manufacture of olefin oxides. 4,391,756, CI. 260-43U.UUU. International Business Machines Corporation. Circuit arrangement
Kudo, Kin-ichi: See— , ^^. oi. u for the continual operation monitoring and error diagnosis of a step-
Okoshi, Noboru; Kudo, Kin-ichi; and Shimoyama, Shoichi, motor. 4,392.097, CI. 318-696.000.
4,391,640, CI. 106-29.000. Lange, Karl-Heinz, to Balda-Werke Photographishe Gerate und
Kudoh, Masaru: See— .. „ ^ . Kunststoff GmbH & Co , KG. Camera with atuchable flash device.
Shinoi, Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki, Keisuke; Suzuki, Yoshimi; Kudoh, 4,391,501, CI. 354-149.000.
Masaru; and Hashimoto, Wataru, 4,392,024, CI. 179-99.00R. Lange, Wolfgang, to Akzo NV. Porose, pulverformige polymerteilc-
Kugele, Thomas G.; and Gilmore, Dennis W., to Carstab Corporation. hen. 4,391,920, CI. 521-61.000.
Organic antimony containing stabilizer compositions for halogenated Langenberg, Helmut; Grisebach, Hans-Theodor; and Weinhold, Heinz,
polymers. 4,391,757, CI. 260-446.000. ,0 Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia. Method of, and apparatus for,
Kuhls, Jurgen; Mayer, Franz; and Fit7, Herbert, to Hoechst Aktien- winning mineral material. 4,391,470, CI. 299-11.000.
gesellschaft. Fluoropolymers with shell-modified particles, and pro- Langer Arthur W., Jr., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Cau-
cesses for their preparation. 4,391,940, CI. 524-458.000. lyj, for olefinic polymerization. 4.391,738, CI. 252-429.00B.
Kuhn, Werner: See— Langer, Robert S., Jr.: See—
Zilske, Wolfgang; and Kuhn, Werner, 4,391,679, CI. 204-43.00G. Folkman. Moses J.; and Langer. Robert S., Jr., 4,391.797, CI.
Kuhnlein, Hans, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Brushless D-C motor. 424-19.000.
4,392,094, CI. 318-254.000. Lanier Business Products, Inc.: See-
Kumar, Niraj; and Mouthon, Marc, to Ebauches Electroniques, S.A. Plunkett, Luther C, Jr., 4,392,218. CI. 369-29.000.
Device for controlling correction operations of a time display device. Lanzillotti. Harry V.: See—
4.392.217. CI. 368-188.000. Burnett, George H.; Claflin, Warren E.; Lanzillotti, Harry V.;
Kung, Edward J.; and Bednard, Eugene D., to Shell Oil Company. Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and
Current impulse method and apparatus for testing geophone strings. Wayte, Alline R., 4,391,285, CI. 131-364.000.
4,392,213, CI. 367-13.000. Lapointe, Joseph A. Sample splitter. 4,391,359, CI. 193-23.000.
Kuniyoshi, Masateru, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Larson, William C, to Colt Industries Operating Corp. Pressure oper-
Starting system for brushless motor. 4,392,099, CI. 318-797.000. ated three-position throttle stop assembly. 4,391,245. CI. 123-339.000.
Kunnen, Josef: See— Lary, Richard F.: See— „ ^ ^ tt j
Benthake, Heinz; Kronert, Curt; and Kunnen, Josef, 4,391,163, CI. Arulpragasam, Jega A.; Giggi, Robert A.; Lary, Richard F.; and
74-768.000. Sullivan, Daniel T., 4,392,200, CI. 364-200.000.
Kurakami, Hiroshi: See— ^ Lasag AG: See— . „ , ou ,
Kamegaya, Takeo- Sekigawa, Tadahiko; Kurakami, Hiroshi; and Fankhauser, Franz; van der Zypen, Eugen; and Roussel, Phihppe,
Suzuki, Yoshiro. 4.392.075. CI. 313-584.000. 4.391.275. CI. 128-303.100.
Kuramochi. Koujiro: See— Latsch. Reinhard, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Method for closed-loop
Kubo, Seitoku; Kuramochi. Koujiro; and Terakura, Yukio, control of the ignition angle or the composition of the operational
4,391.166, CI. 74-869.000. mixture furnished an internal combustion engine. 4,391,248, CI.
Kuraray Company, Limited: See— 123-425.000. , . , ^. , . „ j
Saito. Koichi; and Ohara. Osamu, 4.391.857, CI. 427-385.500. Laughner, Ernest M. Method of filtering ^«='/^«™'?»«!;c"^,wa7« ''"d
Kurata, Hisao, to Keisuke Honda. Recording unit. 4,392.144. CI. 346- dual channel audio code filter therefor. 4.392.233. CT 375-93.000.
139 OOC Laugier. Yves D, to Technal International S.A. Method of assembling
Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See- two shaped sections with a cotter. 4.391.031. CI. 29-526.00R.
Ueno, Kunihiko; Ishii, Akiyasu; Hukuda. Masazi; and Nakayama, Launn, Dean G.: See- 29-150000
KaTiiuiiki 4 391763 CI 264-15 000 Czuba, Leonard F; and Launn, Dean G., 4,391,02V, CI. 2V-4XJ.0W.
Kurikawa M^ndru Se^- Lawson, J. William; and Matthews, Robert M, to Kcllwood Company.
Kand^ Yoshitsugu; Kurikawa, Minoni; Morimoto, Tom; and Panty hose with body bulge control 4 390 999, CI. 2-409.000.
Nakknishi, Kiyoshi, 4,391.854, CI. 427-192.000. Lazanis, Hanison; and Nelson, James A. Pentoneal catheter. 4,391,276.
Kuschel Frank; Demus, Dietrich; Pfeiffer, Doris; and Deutscher, CI. 604-266.000. , n 1 ^ d a-
Hans-Joachim to VEB Werk fuer Femsehelektronik Berlin im VEB Lecron, Jacques; Manera. Maxime; Faure. Jean-Paul; and Renaudm.
Ko^binat Mikroelektronik. Nematic liquid crystal compounds and Jean-Pierre, to Societe Vetrotex Sajm-Gobain. Proc«s and apparatus
use and device for using the same. 4,391,730, CI. 252-299.100. for the manufacture of fibers. 4.391.618. CI. 65-1.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Lee, Chi-long; and Spells, Sherwood, to Dow Coming Corporation.
Microwave cured silicone elastomeric foam. 4,391,765, CI.
264-26.000.
Lee, Thomas E.: See —
Intlekofer, Michael J.; Hanson, Jay R.; and Lee, Thomas E.,
4,392,137, CI. 343-5.0SC.
Leedham, Charles G.: See —
Gray, Frederick M.; and Leedham, Charles G., 4,392,121, CI.
340-3 lO.OOA.
Leeman, John: See —
Hildebrand, Karl J.; and Leeman, John, 4,391,523, CI. 356-328.000.
Leeman Labs Inc.: See —
Hildebrand, Karl J.; and Leeman, John, 4,391,523, CI. 356-328.000.
Leesona Corporation; See—
Arends, Albert W.; and Henke, Ronald E., 4,391,768. CI.
264-285.000.
LefTers, Arthur J. Stove apparatus. 4,391,266, CI. 126-123.000.
Le Foil, Jean; and Benaroya, Henry. Apparatus for the selective skim-
ming of a light liquid layer on a body of water. 4,391,708, CI.
210-242.300.
Lehmann, Li K.: See —
Campbell, Jay E.; Reichmann, Richard H.; and Lehmann, Li K.,
4,391,402, CI. 227-121.000.
Lehtinen, Antti, to Valmet Oy. Method used in paper making for
treatment of a weave. 4,391,672, CI. 162-192.000.
Leigh, Thomas, to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Carboxamidoest-
ers. 4,391,983, CI. 560-124.000.
LeLasso Corporation: See —
Finnegan, Charles C, 4,391,376, CI. 211-60.0SK.
Lemoine, Maurice G.; and Pasdera, Leonard A., to Ampex Corpora-
tion. Method and apparatus for digital video signal processing.
4,392,159, CI. 358-319.000.
Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Martino, Germain, to Institut Francais du
Petrole. Process for upgradmg heavy oils. 4,391,701, CI. 208-370.000.
Le Page, Jean-Francois: See —
Billon, Alain; Le Page, Jean-Francois; Peries, Jean-Pierre; and
Simandoux, Jean-Claude, 4,391,700, CI. 208-86.000.
Cosyns, Jean; Juguin, Bernard; Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Mi-
quel, Jean, 4,392.002, CI. 585-329.000.
Lepisto, J. George, to Champion International Corporation. Bag filler
spout. 4,391,310, CI. 141-286.000.
Lequien. Jean, to CII Honeywell Bull. Method of and apparatus for
controlling the gain of circuitry responsive to read head of a memory.
4.392.164, CI. 360-77.000.
Lerot, Luc: See —
Hardy, Nicolas; Lerot, Luc; and Walraevens, Rene, 4,391,753. CI.
549-525.000.
Lersmacher, Bemhard; and Lydtin, Hans, to U.S. Philips Corporation.
Rotary anode for an X-ray tube and method of manufacturing such an
anode. 4,392,238, CI. 378-144.000.
Lesher, George Y.; Opalka, Chester J., Jr.; and Page, Donald F., to
Sterling Drug Inc. 2-Amino-6-(pyridinyl)-3H-imidazo[4,5-b]pyri-
dines and their cardiotonic use. 4,391,811, CI. 424-263.000.
Lesley, David J.; and Davis, Lawrence C, Jr., to ABCO Industries, Inc.
Dry textile warp size composition. 4,391,934, CI. 524-43.000.
Lester, James N.; and Prager, Lee A., to GTE Products Corporation.
Isolator for use with frequency responsive switching circuit.
4,392,089, CI. 315-313.000.
Levercom, Warren. Log splitting device. 4,391,311, CI. 144-193.00D.
Levi, George W.; and Kanyo, Kalman, to G&D, Inc. Wire straighten-
ing and cutting mechanism. 4,391,307, CI. 140-140.000.
Levis, William W., Jr.: See —
Korczak, Alexander; and Levis, William W.. Jr.. 4.391.728, CI.
252-182.000.
Levitt, George, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Herbi-
cidal benzothiophene and benzofuran sulfonamides. 4,391,627, CI.
71-90.000.
Levy, David. Gaming apparatus. 4,391,442, CI. 273-142.00E.
Lew, Hyok S. Angular position belt valve pump. 4,391,572, CI.
418-45.000.
Lewis, Frederick M., to Sterling Drug, Inc. Method for controlling
temperatures in the afterburner and combustion hearths of a multiple
hearth furnace. 4,391,208, CI. 110-346.000.
Lewis, James C; Miller, Jerry W.; Simpson, Clyde D.; and Thomasson,
Ronald G., to Automation Industries, Inc. Dielectric test unit.
4,392,104. CI. 324-54.000.
Lewis. John, Jr.: See —
Brassell, Gilbert W.; and Lewis. John. Jr.. 4.391.873. CI.
428-297.000.
Liang. Charles C; Bolster. M. Elizabeth; and Murphy, Robert M., to
Wilson Greatbatch Ltd. Meul oxide composite cathode material for
high energy density batteries. 4,391.729, CI. 252-182.100.
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company: See —
Daman, Lloyd W.; and Shamp, Donald E., 4.391,581, CI.
431-160.000.
Libman. Philomena C. to Zenith Radio Corporation. Deeply filtered
television image display. 4,392,077, CI. 313-474.000.
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH: See —
Albrecht, Werner; Fischer, Klaus; and Grun. Gerhard. 4,392.136,
CI. 340-825.560.
Lichtenstein, Joseph: See —
Sharpless. Edward N.; Gordon. Marvin; and Lichtenstein, Joseph,
4,391,283, CI. 128-725.000.
Liefkens, Adrianus C. H. J.: See —
Boullart, Carolus J.; and Liefkens, Adrianus C. H. J., 4,392,169, CI.
360-130.330.
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.: See—
Burnett, George H.; Claflin, Warren E.; Lanzillotti, Harry V.;
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and
Wayte. Alline R.. 4,391,285, CI. 131-364.000.
Lim, Franklin, to Damon Corporation. Microcapsules containing viable
tissue cells. 4,391,909, CI. 435-178.000.
Lin, Ching-Yu; and Hickam, William M., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Apparatus for monitoring SO2 concentrations. 4,391,690. CI.
204-412.000.
Lin, Chung- Yuan, to Upjohn Company, The. Phthalic anhydride deriv-
atives. 4,391,751, CI. 260-239.30R.
Linder, Ernst; Maurer, Helmut; Muller, Klaus; and Rieger, Franz, to
Robert Bosch GmbH. Temperature compensated polarographic
oxygen gas sensor and sensing system, particularly for automotive
application. 4,391,691, CI. 204-408.000.
Lindmayer, Joseph, to Solarex Corporation. Photovoltaic cells having
contacts and method of applying same. 4,392,010, CI. 136-256.000.
Lindquist, Herman A., to Voest-Alpine Aktiengescllschaft. Turbine
installation comprising a turbine installed in a duct. 4.392,063, CI.
290-54.000.
Liofilizaciones Esterilizaciones Y Sinthesis S.A.: See —
Ciriza, Santiago A.; and Padro, Carlos E. L.. 4.391,974, CI.
544-030.000.
List, Hans: See —
Greier, Josef; and Pomfret, Colin T., 4,391,238, CI. 123-193.00C.
Krempl, Peter W.; Claassen, Peter; and Zeiringer, Rudolf,
4,391,147, CI. 73-730.000.
Litman, David J.; and Ullman, Edwin F., to Syva Company. Test strip
kits in immunoassays and compositions therein. 4,391,904, CI.
435-7.000.
Litton Systems, Inc.: See —
Hostetler, James W.. 4.392.229. CI. 372-94.000.
Lloyd. Herbert W.. to Abex Corporation. Sintered powder metal
friction material. 4.391.641. CI. 106-36.000.
Lobl, Herbert: See —
Hinz. Hans D.; and Lobl, Herbert, 4,392,194, CI. 346-154.000.
Lockheed Corporation: See —
Bniensicke, Wilhelm A., 4,391,017, CI. 15-313.000.
LoefHer, William R.: See—
Tibbals, Edward C, Jr., 4.391.156. CI. 74-336.500.
Lonati. Francesco, to Costruzioni Meccaniche Lonati S.p.A. Yam feed
unit in a single-cylinder circular knitting machine. 4,391,105, CI.
66-138.000.
Lonnstedt, Bo G. Ear muff mounting device. 4,391,000, CI. 2-423.000.
Lonza Ltd.: See —
Huwiler, Alfred; and Tenud, Leander, 4,391,979, CI. 548-194.000.
Lopatina, Alia V.: See —
Bykhovsky, David G.; Voropaev, Albert A.; Olennikov, Evgeny
F.; and Lopatina, Alia V., 4,392,047, CI. 219-145.210.
Lorang, Marcel: See —
Bloise, Rene; Lorang, Marcel; Morizot, Georges; and Boissonnade.
Genevieve. 4.391,792. CI. 423-617.000.
Lord Corporation: See —
Hannibal. Alan J.; and Parr. Charles H.. 4.391.594. CI. 464-80.000.
Miller. Henry C; and Howard. Dennis D., 4.391,686, CI.
204-159.150.
L'Oreal: See —
Rosenbaum, Georges; Grollier, Jean F.; and Cotteret, Jean,
4,391,603, CI. 8-424.000.
Loreal, Guy, to Societe Navale Chargeurs Delmas-Vieljeux. Anti-theft
locking device adaptable to containers. 4,391,462, CI. 292-207.000.
Lorenz, Hellmut, to Barmag Banner Maschinenfabrik AG. False twist-
ing apparatus and method. 4,391,091, CI. 57-340.000.
Lorenz, Peter; and Schwaier, Anita, to Battelle-Institut e.V. Hepatitis B
testing and growth in tree shrew as animal model. 4,391,796, CI.
424-9.000.
Loughead, Tomas E.: See —
Pruett, Edwin C; Robertson, Kem B.; and Loughead, Tomas E.,
4,391.423, CI. 244-161.000.
Loyola. Luis A. Combination buckle and waist alarm. 4.392.126. CI.
340-573.000.
Loyzim, Robert J.: See —
Grajewski, John P.; and Loyzim, Robert J., 4,392,096, CI.
318-625.000.
Lu, Chin H., to Xerox Corporation. Developer compositions containing
alkyl pyridinium toluene sulfonates. 4,391,890, CI. 430-110.000.
Lu, Sun; and Chung, David B., to Minnesota Mining and Manufactur-
ing Company. Thermally addressed cholesteric-smectic liquid crystal
device. 4,391,492, CI. 350-351.000.
Luce, John B.: See —
Bialous, Charles A.; Luce, John B.; and Mark, Victor, 4,391,935,
CI. 524-82.000.
Luke, Louis E.: See —
Runnels, Robert W.; Wagenaar, Loren B.; Luke, Louis E.; and
Bresnahan, Thomas P., 4,392,015, CI. 174-143.000.
Lummus Company, TTie: See —
Tsao, Utah, 4,391,880, CI. 423-659.000.
Lundgren, Sten T. Electronic lock with changeable opening code.
4,392,133, CI. 340-825.310.
Lundin, Bertil: See —
Vangbo, Hakan; Lundin, Bertil; and Moklint, Oivind, 4,391,667, CI.
156-205.000.
Lundmark, Larry D., to Henkel Corporation. Phytosterol blends.
4,391,732. CI. 252-356.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Lundstrom. Jan-Erik; and Rudgard. Ingemar. to ASEA Aktiebolag.
Method and device for presentation of graphical information.
4.392.130. CI. 340-747.000.
Lutz, Dieter, to Sachs- Systemtechnik GmbH. Elastic sole for a shoe
incorporating a spring member. 4.391,048. CI. 36-28.000.
Lutz, Dieter, to Sach-Systemtechnik GmbH. Locking device with
programmable key. 4,392,134, CI. 340-825.310.
Luz, David W.: See—
Rinehart, James K.; Willis, Donald H.; and Luz, David W.,
4,392,090, CI. 315-411.000.
Lybrand, William, to Bengal, Inc. Anti-static material and method of
making the material. 4,391,952, CI. 525-333.700.
Lydtin, Hans: See —
Lersmacher, Bemhard; and Lydtin, Hans, 4,392,238, CI.
378-144.000.
Lyie Development, Inc.: See —
Wendt, Michael, 4,391,171, CI. 83-82.000.
Lynn, Malcolm; and May, Peter E., to BP Chemicals Limited. Sieve
plates and distillation columns. 4,391,675, CI. 202-158.000.
Lyon, Robert C, to BICC Public Limited Company. Screw fixing.
4,391,546, CI. 403-189.000.
Lyons, John E.: See —
Rotolico, Anthony J.; Romero, Eduardo; and Lyons, John E.,
4,391,860, CI. 427-423.000.
Lytle, Farrel W.: See —
Sandstrom, Donald R.; and Lytle, Farrel W., 4.392.236. CI.
378-045.000.
Mabuchi, Minoru; Sakai. Kiyoshi; Ishikawa, Shozo; Egashira, Yuji; and
Kitahara, Makoto, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Electrophotographic
photosensitive member with benzimidazole ring containing hydra-
zones. 4,391,889, CI. 430-59.000.
Machetel, Roger: See —
Planteline, Pierre; and Machetel, Roger, 4,391,251, CI. 123-440.000.
MacLeod, Colin J.: See —
Slattery, William; Brechany, Thomas; and MacLeod, Colin J.,
4,391,115, CI. 72-131.000.
Maeda, Umio; Shoji, Hirofumi; Wada, Yasusuke; and Horie, Yoshio, to
Nippon Soda Company Limited. Composition for depositing metallic
oxide film coatings. 4,391,743, CI. 252-518.000.
Maehara, Kenso: See —
Ishii, Koji; Shinmoto, Takahiko; and Maehara, Kenso, 4,391,193,
CI. 101-415.100.
Magid, Sidney H. Inflatable articles. 4,391,062, CI. 46-88.000.
Magnetic Peripherals Inc.: See —
Elsing, John W., 4.391.543, CI. 403-24.000.
Magnusson, Bengt; and Gurtler, Hans, to Bulten-Kanthal AB. Device
for carrying electrical resistance elements. 4,392,052, CI. 219-532.000.
Magnusson, Stig: See —
Simmons, Nathaniel; Magnusson, Stig; Puccini, Sergio E.;
McLaughlin, Donald W.; and Stelte, David J., 4,392,223, CI.
370-63.000.
Magori, Valentin: See —
Kleinschmidt, Peter; and Magori, Valentin, 4,392,074, CI.
310-327.000.
Mahmood, Mahmood N.: See —
Anderson, Susan; Brown. David E.; Graham, David E.; Mahmood,
Mahmood N.; and Man, Maurice C. M., 4,391,681, CI.
204-99.000.
Maier, Jakob: See —
Hoefelmayr, Tilman; and Maier, Jakob, 4,391,221, CI. 119-14.080.
Maier, Ludwig; and Durr. Dieter, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Herbi-
cidally active 2-substituted 5-phenoxyphenylphosphonic acid esters.
4,391.624, CI. 71-86.000.
Maier. Thomas O.; and Richards. Jack L.. to Eastman Kodak Company.
Mixture of nondiffusible redox dye-releasers for curve shape control.
4.391.896. CI. 430-223.000.
Majkrzak, David S. Vehicle exhaust gas warm-up heater system.
4,391,235, CI. 123-142.50R.
Makabe, Hachiro: See —
Tamiya, Yoshimichi; Eguchi, Yasukata; and Makabe, Hachiro,
4,391,212, CI. 112-158.00E.
Maki, Seiichi: See —
Horikawa. Takahiro; Hibino, Yutaka; and Maki. Seiichi. 4.391.218.
CI. 118-621.000.
Makizuka. Takakazu; and Katoh, Sunao, to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha.
Electronic data control in a numbering machine. 4,392,205, CI.
364-518.000.
Malish, Terrance J. Coupling device for floor maintenance machines.
4,391,548, CI. 403-348.000.
Malmohus Invest AB: See—
Edstrom. Lars G., 4,391,439, CI. 271-90.000. ^ .
Malmstrom, Rolf E.: See —
Aaltonen, Olavi A.; Malmstrom, Rolf E.; Nermes, Esko O.; and
Tuominen, Tapio K., 4,391,632, CI. 75-26.000.
Malott, Theodore A.; and Wolfe, Robert W., to Clark Equipment
Company. Biased transmission control shaft. 4,391,158, CI. 74-
473.00R.
Man, Maurice C. M.: See-
Anderson, Susan; Brown, David E.; Graham, David E.; Mahmood,
Mahmood N.; and Man, Maurice C. M., 4.391.681. CI.
204-99.000.
Manaka. Tetsuyuki: See —
Ohhashi, Shiro; Ubusawa. Fumiyoshi; Iwasaki. Shoji; and Manaka,
Tetsuyuki. 4.392.243. CI. 455-74.000.
Manera. Maxime: See —
Lecron. Jacques; Manera, Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre, 4,391,618, CI. 65-1.000.
Mani, Krishnamurthy; and Chlanda, Frederick P., to Allied Corpora-
tion. Preparing alkali metal hydroxide by water splitting and hydroly-
sis. 4.391,680. CI. 204-98.000.
Manitowoc Company, Inc., The: See —
Morrow. James G.. Sr.. 4.391.477. CI. 308-221.000.
Mannesmann Aktiengescllschaft: See —
Mindt. Walter. 4.391.692. CI. 204-206.000.
Marathon Equipment Company: See —
Gwathney, Kenneth W.; Gann. David L.; Seagraves. Steven G..
Sr.; Fenner. Gary R.; and Fenner. Gordon H.. 4.391,188. CI.
10O-229.00A.
Marcellis. Alphonso W.; and Johnson, Grannis S., to Diamond Sham-
rock Corporation. Additives for cementitious materials. 4.391,645, CI.
106-90.000.
Marchal, Jean: See —
Barkats, Gerard; Girard, Alain; Marchal, Jean; and Morel, Charles,
4,392,007, CI. 136-248.000.
Marcy, Russell A., to Waterbury Companies, Inc. Latching mechanism
for dispenser apparatus. 4,391,111. CI. 70-162.000.
Mardis, Wilbur S.; and Finlayson. Claude M.. to NL Industries. Inc.
Rheological additive for non-aqueous fiuid systems. 4,391,637, CI.
106-20.000.
Mariani, Luigi; and Tarzia, Giorgio, to Gruppo Lepetit S.p.A. Pyrrolo-
diazepine derivatives and their pharmaceutical compositions.
4,391,817, CI. 424-274.000.
Marihi, Jean; and Audenard, Bernard, to Framatome. Sound-monitor-
ing device for an industrial insullation. 4,392,214, CI. 367-127.000.
Mark, Victor: See —
Bialous, Charles A.; Luce, John B.; and Mark, Victor, 4,391,935,
CI. 524-82.000.
Marnach, Ernest: See —
Kneip. Femand; and Mamach, Ernest. 4.392.176. CI. 361-160.000.
Marom. Emanuel: See —
Konforti. Naim; and Marom. Emanuel. 4,392.155. CI. 358-106.000.
Marsh. Douglas D.; Feldman. Arthur E.; and Newlin. John C. Utility
cart with detachable and reversible shelves. 4.391.454. CI. 280-47.350.
Martens, Jurgen: See —
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner.
Friedrich; and Martens, Jurgen, 4,391.987, CI. 562-559.000.
Spindler. Manfred; Tanner. Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner,
Friedrich; and Martens, Jurgen, 4.391.988. CI. 562-559.000.
Marti, Ernst, to Karl Kassbohrer Fahrzeugwerke GmbH. Water-closet
for vehicles, particularly motor coaches. 4,391,002, CI. 4-321.000.
Martin. Graham E.. to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Process for
spinning amino-formaldehyde fibers. 4,391,770, CI. 264-236.000.
Martin, Wayne A., to United States Steel Corporation. Mechanism for
forming a hole through a forged workpiece. 4,391,1 18, CI. 72-356.000.
Martini, Leonard J. Thrust shaft seal with slidably mounted bearing
sleeve. 4,391,474, CI. 384-152.000.
Martino, Germain: See —
Le Page, Jean-Francois; and Martino, Germain, 4,391,701, CI.
208-370.000.
Maruhashi, Shigeaki: See —
Yamauchi, Takashi; Maruhashi, Shigeaki; and Hasegawa, Morihiro,
4,391,633, CI. 75-53.000.
Manila, Rikio, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. PCM Signal interface
apparatus. 4.392,234, CI. 375-118.000.
Maruyama, Teruo; Ichiyanagi, Takashi; and Otoda, Ichizo, to Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Rotary head assembly. 4,392,168,
CI. 360-129.000.
Masamoto, Junzo; Hamada, Minoru; Suzuki, Isamu; and Yoshida.
Takeo, 'o Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Polyoxymethylene
composition. 4,391,741, CI. 252-511.000.
Maschke, Alfred W., to United States of America, Energy. Means and
method for the focusing and acceleration of parallel beams of charged
particles. 4,392,080. CI. 315-5.410.
Mashio, Fujio; and Kitamura, Shuji, to Mitsi Toatsu Inorganic Chemi-
cals, Inc. Chelate resin prepared by reacting butane- 1,2,3, 4-tetra-car-
boxylic acid or anhydride with polyethylene polyamine. 4.391.945.
CI. 524-600.000.
Mashio. Sakae. to Tama Manufacturing Co.. Limited. Control device
for auxiliary members of a vehicle. 4,391,242, CI. I23-I98,OOR
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; and Ritchey, Charlet R .
to United States of America, Army. Protective gel compotition for
treating white phosphorus bum wounds. 4,391,799. CI. 424-132000
Masotti. Maurizio; Zentile. Antonio; and Cau. Pasqualino; to Montedi-
son S.p.A. Bumper for motorvehicles and. the like, made of plaslK
materials. and having its cross section closed by a rear reinforcing
part. 4.391.464, CI. 293-120.000.
Massey, Freddie L.; and Callander, Douglas D., to Goodyear Tire A
Rubber Company, The. Color improvement and acetaldehyde reduc-
tion in high molecular weight polyesters. 4.391,971, CI. 528-481.000.
Mast, Aquila D.: See —
Young, Terry A.; and Mast, Aquila D., 4,391,364, CI. 198-865.000.
Master Addresser Company: See —
Rogers, Ronald A.; Wright, Ansel J.; and Wright, William H.,
4,391,194, CI. 101-471.000.
Masuda, Isao: See—
Nakagawa, Kenji; and Masuda, Isao, 4,391,916, CI. 501-62.000.
Masunaga, Izumi: See —
Kimura, Kazuo; Takayama, Kenichiro; Ado, Yutaka; Kawamoto,
Tamotsu; and Masunaga, Izumi, 4,391,910, CI. 435-232.000.
1032 0.0.-17
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Mathauser, William R. Hand operated hydraulic bicycle brake.
4,391,353. CI. 188-24.120.
Mathes, Donovan B.; Hamilton, Floyd B.; and Spreng, Douglas C, to
Solar Dynamics Inc. Solar water heater control and protection
system. 4,391,268, CI. 126-437.000.
Mathieson, Ernest; Smith, Graham C; and Gilvin, Philip J., to National
Research Development Corporation. Position-sensitive radiation
detector. 4.392,057, CI. 250-385.000.
Matsuda. Fumihiko: See —
Shimizu. Hiroshi; Sakai. Sigeo; Matsuda, Fumihiko; and Matsu-
moto, Reiko, 4.391.649, CI. 127-46.200.
Matsuda, Toshiro, to Nissan Motor Company, Limited. Method and
apparatus for anti-skid brake control of an automotive vehicle.
4,392.202, CI. 364-426.000.
Matsui, Fujio, to Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd. System for detecting the operation of the throttle valve.
4,391,250. CI. 123-438.000.
Matsui. Hiroshi; Tsuchida, Takayasu; and Nakamon. Shigeru, to
Ajinomoto Company Incorporated. Method for producing L-valine
by fermentation. 4,391,907, CI. 435-115.000.
Matsui. Takahiro, to Kabushiki Kaisha Morita Seisakusho. Dental
treatment chair. 4,391.588. CI. 433-33.000.
MaUumoto, Joji: See—
Kamezaki, Yasushi; Inoue, Eiichi; Nishihama. Hitoshi; Fushida,
Akira; and Matsumoto, Joji. 4.391.892, CI. 430-126.000.
Matsumoto. Jun: See —
Mori, Hiromichi; Matsumoto, Jun; and Fujioka, Masanobu,
4,392.224, CI. 370-67.000.
Matsumoto. Masataka: See—
Matsumura. Osamu; and Matsumoto, Masataka, 4,391.534, CI.
368-294.000.
Matsumoto, Reiko: See —
Shimizu, Hiroshi; Sakai, Sigeo; Matsuda, Fumihiko; and Matsu-
moto. Reiko. 4.391,649, CI. 127-46.200.
Matsumura, Osamu; and Matsumoto, Masataka, to Citizen Watch Co.,
Ltd. Glass mounting structure for watches. 4,391,534, CI.
368-294.000.
Matsuo, Yushin: See —
Wakabayashi, Takuo, deceased; Wakabayashi, Shigemasa. legal
representative; Tahara. Iwao; Aihara, Toshiharu; Takahashi,
Naoki; and Matsuo. Yushin, 4,391,530. CI. 368-63.000.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Hamane, Tokuhito; Kinoshita, Toshio; Kihira, Masafumi; Hamada,
Hitosi; and Gotou, Mikio, 4,391.306, CI. 140-92.100.
Ishikawa, Shinzaburo; Kanai, Kenji; Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; and
Adachi, Tetuo, 4.392,166, CI. 360-113.000.
Itoh, Kunio; Sugino. Takashi; Wada, Masaru; and Shimizu,
Hirokazu, 4,392,227. CI. 372-46.000.
Maruyama, Teruo; Ichiyanagi, Takashi; and Otoda, Ichizo,
4,392,168. CI. 360-129.000.
Okabe. Takako; Itoh. Kunio; and Sugino. Takashi, 4,392,228, CI.
372-46.000.
Saruwatari, Shigeto. 4,391.882. CI. 429-96.000.
Shimazaki. Shigeo. 4,392,198, CI. 364-200.000.
Matsushita Electronics Corp.: See—
Horii, Kenju, 4,392,154, CI. 358-44.000.
Matsuura. Shigeo; and Yuki, Ikuo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Electronic channel
selection apparatus with surface acoustic wave device. 4,392,249, CI.
455-164.000.
Matteini, Silvano. Tubular rotary furnace for incinerating refuse and the
like, with inner demountable grid. 4.391,206, CI. 110-246.000.
Matthews, Robert M.: See—
Lawson, J. William; and Matthews, Robert M., 4,390,999, CI.
2-409.000.
Maurer, Helmut: See-
Under. Ernst; Maurer, Helmut; MuUer, Klaus; and Rieger, Franz,
4.391,691. CI. 204-408.000.
Maurer. Herman J.: See-
Smith. Wayne G.; and Maurer, Herman J., 4.391,050, CI. 37-
142.00A.
Maurice, Terrence J.: See—
Grealy, Jennifer M.; and Maurice, Terrence J., 4,391.750. CI.
260-123.500.
Mauthe, Peter, to Hilti Aktiengesellschaft. Method of and means for
providing an effective thermoplastic adhesive connection or seal
using thermochrome dye. 4,391,662, CI. 156-64.000.
Mautz, Gus H.. Jr.: See—
Velmin. Rolf; Kovatch, Michael S.; and Mautz, Gus H., Jr.,
4,391.674. CI. 201-41.000.
Maxey. Frank S., deceased (by Masey, Gertrude, legal representative);
and Mowdood, Syed K., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company. The.
Composite of rubber and metal reinforcement therefor. 4,391,318, CI.
152-359.000.
Maxey, Gertrude, legal representative: See—
Maxey. Frank S.. deceased; and Mowdood. Syed K., 4,391,318, CI.
152-359.000.
Maximov, July S. Device for tightening coarse thread connections.
4.391,431, CI. 254-29.00A.
Maxwell, Jerrold F: See—
Schwartz, Ellen S.; Tincher, Cline A.; and Maxwell, Jerrold F.,
4,391.722, CI. 252-73.000.
Maxwell Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Rostoker, Norman, 4,392,111, CI. 328-237.000.
May. Peter E.: See-
Lynn, Malcolm; and May. Peter E., 4,391.675. CI. 202-158.000.
Mayer, Franz: See —
Kuhls, Jurgen; Mayer, Franz; and Fitz, Herbert, 4,391,940, CI.
524-458.000.
Mazurkewitz, Anthony R., to Austin Company, The. Image display
system. 4,391,495, CI. 350-452.000.
McBee. William C; and Sullivan, Thomas A., to United Sutes of
America. Commerce. Modified sulfur cement. 4,391,969, CI.
528-389.000.
McCain, G. Howard: See—
Baczek, Stanley K.; McCain, G. Howard; Benezra, Leo L.; and
Covitch, Michael J., 4,391,844, CI. 427-44.000.
McCarthy, Harold J.. Jr., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The.
Lamination of polyvinyl chloride cast films. 4,391,868, CI.
428-215.000.
McCurry, H. Michael, to American Filtrona Corporation. Preferential
wicking system. 4,391,716, CI. 210-799.000.
McDonald, Colin. Weight balanced spool carrier. 4,391,422, CI.
242-129.600.
McGraw-Edison Company: See—
Urani, Angelo, 4.391,485, CI. 339-191.00S.
McGuiness, Robert C.: See —
Falkenburg, Hans R.; Krause, Siegfried; and McGuiness. Robert
C, 4,391,965. CI. 528-112.000.
McHale. Angelika H.: See—
Falender, James R.; and McHale, Angelika H., 4.391,937. CI.
524-119.000.
Mclntyre, Donald B.; and Mclntyre, Frederic S., to Acumeter Labora-
tories, Inc. Adhesive applicator and method for cigarette-to-filter
adhesion and similar applications. 4,391,856, CI. 427-358.000.
Mclntyre. Frederic S.: See —
Mclntyre, Donald B.; and Mclntyre. Frederic S.. 4,391,856, CI.
427-358.000.
McLaughlin. Donald W.: See-
Simmons, Nathaniel; Magnusson, Stig; Puccini, Sergio E.;
McUughlin. Donald W.; and Stelte, David J.. 4.392.223. CI.
370-63.000.
McLaughlin. Joseph L.. to Itek Corporation. Interferometric surface
contour measuring arrangement. 4,391,526. CI. 356-359.000.
McLaughlin, Michael H.: See—
Glascock. Homer H.. II; Houston. Douglas E.; McLaughlin. Mi-
chael H.; and Webster, Harold F., 4,392,153. CI. 357-82.000.
McLeod, Mark H.. to International Business Machines Corp. Test
circuit for delay measurements on a LSI chip. 4.392.105, CI. 324-
57.0DE. , ^.,
McWhorter, Thomas E., to Air Products and Chemicals. Inc. Back-dif-
fusion quality control method for barrier treated containers.
4.391,128, CI. 73-38.000.
Mead Corporation, The: See —
Brody, Aaron L.; Embro, Joseph J.; and Young, William E..
4,391,080, CI. 53-426.000.
Medalia. Avrom I.: See— ,„, „^, ^,
Cotten, George R.; and Medalia. Avrom I.. 4,391,941, CI.
524-495.000.
Medel. Louis W., Jr.; and Barak. Yoram, to Noga, Helen H.. a part
interest. Rotary positive displacement mechanism. 4.391.574, CI.
418-195.000.
Meden-Piesslinger, Gertraud A. A.; and Van de Heuvel. Johannes H.
P., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Precision pressed optical components
made of glass and glass suiuble therefor. 4,391,915, CI. 501-48.000.
Medtronic, Inc.: See—
Cahalan. Patrick T.; and Coury, Arthur J.. 4.391,278, CI.
128-640.000.
Mehaffey, Joseph H.; and Szlam, Aleksander. to Solid State Systems.
Inc. Multiplexed liquid crystal display. 4,392,129. CI. 340-765.000.
Mehdom, Frank R.; and Seelig, Johann, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for laying down continuous material. 4,391.025. CI.
28-289.000.
Meiers. Gerald F.: See —
Koning, Richard W.; Meiers, Gerald F.; and Anstey, Henry D.,
4,391,187, CI. 100-88.000.
Meister. John J., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Ethoxylated sulfosuc-
cinate additives for stabilizing solutions of petroleum sulfonates in
hard brine. 4,391,719, CI. 252-8.55D.
Melman, Paul; and Carlsen, W. John, to GTE Laboratones Incorpo-
rated. Optical fiber centering device. 4,391,487, CI. 350-96.200.
Melrose, Denis G.: See —
Schild. Rolf; Melrose. Denis G.; and Hawkins. Brian M., 4,391.009,
CI. 5-453.000.
Melvin. Lawrence S., Jr.: See—
Harbert. Charles A.; Johnson, Michael R.; and Melvin, Lawrence
S.. Jr.. 4.391,827, CI. 424-331.000.
Memon, Nazir A.; and Myers. Cielo S., to Rohm and Haas Company.
Polyethylene terephthalate compositions having improved crystalli-
zation rate and surface appearance. 4,391,938. CI. 524-270.000.
Memorex Corporation: See —
Bischoff, Peter G., 4.391,849. CI. 427-129.000.
Mendiratta, Ashok K.. to General Electric Company. Ion exchange
catalyzed bisphenol process. 4.391,997, CI. 568-727.000.
Merani, Gianfranco; and Anzuino, Giuseppe, to Montedison S.p.A.
Process for preparing polyamides having a modified dye affinity.
4,391,%8. CI. 528-321.000.
Mercantile & Technical Promotions Inc.: See—
Chiquiar-Arias. Marcelo. 4.391.273,0. 604-110.000.
l^Cpr(!*W A. f2f) Iiic ' Si^c
Durette. ' Phiiippe L.; and Shen. Tsung-Ying. 4,391.800. CI.
424-177.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Dybas. Richard A.; Grier, Nathaniel; and Witzel. Bruce E..
4.391,812. CI. 424-267.000.
Merges, Heinz: See —
Janssens, Wilhelmus G. E.; and Merges. Heinz, 4,391.047. CI.
34-97.000.
Merrell Dow Pharmaceuticals Inc.: See-
Harrison. Boyd L.; and Doherty, Niall S., 4,391,818, CI.
424-277.000.
Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit beschraenkter Haft-
ung: See —
Bock, Thomas-Mathias, 4,392,027, CI. 179-181.00W.
Messerschmitt-Bolkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit Beschrankter Haftung:
See—
Engel, Herbert; and Boettger, Horst, 4,391,094, CI. 60-245.000.
Metallgesellschaft Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Serbent, Harry; Schlebusch, Detlev; Reuter, Gerhard; and
Schnabel, Wolfram, 4,391,583. CI. 432-4.060.
Metaport Corporation: See —
Zummer. Anthony S.. 4.391.545. CI. 403-189.000.
Metzler, Hans-Georg, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Pre-setting of
printing machines. 4,391,190. CI. 101-211.000.
Meyer. Armin; and Boragine. Carlo, to Ciba-Geigy AG. Process for the
production of a photographic color image by the silver dye bleach
process and suitable color photographic material therefor. 4,391,884,
CI. 430-17.000.
Michael, David J.; and Wishon, Berhl E., to Dresser Industries, Inc.
Alumino-silicate refractory brick. 4,391,917, CI. 501-100.000
Midway Fishing Tool Co.: See —
Reed, Lehman T., 4,391,324. CI. 166-70.000.
Milanowski, G. Jan: .See —
Drost. Comelis J.; and Milanowski. G. Jan. 4,391,124, CI. 73-
l.ODV.
Miles Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Bauer. Robert, 4,391,905, CI. 435-14.000.
Bauer, Robert, 4.391,906. CI. 435-14.000.
Millar. Frederick W. Security apparatus. 4,391,203. CI. 109-25.000.
Millar, Robert W.. to Orshansky Transmission Corporation. Fast-
response three-way solenoid valve. 4.391,292. CI. 137-269.000.
Miller, Donald M., to Battelle Memorial Institute. Hydraulic servo
control spool valve. 4,391,430. CI. 251-205.000.
Miller, Henry C; and Howard, Dennis D., to Lord Corporation. Ac-
tinic radiation curable formulations. 4,391,686, CI. 204-159.150.
Miller. Jerry W.: See-
Lewis. James C; Miller. Jerry W.; Simpson. Clyde D.; and
Thomasson. Ronald G.. 4,392,104, CI. 324-54.000.
Miller, Roscoe E. Enema apparata improvements relating to double
contrast studies. 4,391,280. CI. 128-654.000.
Miller, Toby I.: See—
Kolb. Arthur F.; Franklin. Arthur J.; and Miller, Toby I.. 4.392,118.
CI. 337-154.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See —
Rogers, Jack S.; and Sanders, Kenneth H., 4.391.871. CI.
428-219.000.
Mills. Jack; Schmiegel, Klaus K.; and Shaw. Walter N.. to Eli Lilly and
Company. Phenethanolamines, compositions containing the same,
and method for effecting weight control. 4.391,826, CI. 424-324.000.
Min, Young K.. to PT Components, Inc. RPM Sensor for electronic
motor braking. 4,392.098, CI. 318-758.000.
Mina. Nabil L., to Appleton Electric Company. Electrical terminal.
4,391,480, CI. 339-32.00R.
Minato, Ichiro; Shibata, Koichi; and Fujinami. Kimiya, to Takeda
Chemical Industries. Ltd. Aldimines and ketimines of 1.3.5-
(aminomethyl)benzene or cyclohexane and their use as curing agents
for epoxy and poylurethane resins. 4,391,958, CI. 525-504.000.
Mindt, Walter, to Mannesmann Aktiengesellschaft. Device for the
chemical or electrochemical surface treatment or material in a heated
liquid treatment medium, more particularly a strip pickling plant.
4,391,692, CI. 204-206.000.
Minemura, Koichi. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Play-
back system for video disk having plural information tracks.
4,392.160, CI. 358-327.000.
Minfttere Des Affaires Sociales: See —
Tremblay, Richard; and Tremblay, Jean, 4,392,240, CI.
378-207.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See —
Howell, Peter A., 4,391,646. CI. 106-97.000.
Lu, Sun; and Chung. David B., 4,391,492, CI. 350-351.000.
Pitzen, James F., 4,391.014. CI. 15-231.000.
Vesley. George F.. 4.391.687. CI. 204-159.160.
Minnetti, Federico, to Officine Minnetti Di Omella Raveggi & C.S.a.s.
Machine for hank drawing and doffing. 4,391,360, CI. 198-412.000.
Mintz, Donald; and Irani, Cyrus A., to Exxon Research & Engineering
Co. Shear thickening well control fluid. 4,391,925, CI. 523-130.000.
Miquel, Jean: See —
Cosyns, Jean; Juguin, Bernard; Le Page. Jean-Francois; and Mi-
quel, Jean. 4.392.002. CI. 585-329.000.
Miskinis. Robert J. Teflon ground glass adaptor. 4.391.779, CI.
422-99.000.
Mita Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Kamezaki, Yasushi; Inoue, Eiichi; Nishihama, Hitoshi; Fushida,
Akira; and Matsumoto. Joji. 4,391,892, CI. 430-126.000.
Mita, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshida, Takashi; Nakashima, Masato;
Fujihara, Katsumi; and Nakakuki, Tadao, to A. Aoki & Associates.
Pattern inspection system. 4,392,120, CI. 382-22.000.
Mitama, Masataka, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Radio transmitter
having an output power control circuit. 4,392,245, CI. 455-115.000.
Mitchell, Ernst K.; and Terry. Richard H.. to Safekeeper Systems. Inc.
Security cabinets for hotel rooms. 4.391,204. CI. 109-39.000.
Mitchell. Joseph R.: See—
Heaslip, Lawrence J.; Hohulin. Alphia L.; and Mitchell. Joseph R..
4.391.319. CI. 164-259.000.
Mitchell. Larry D.; and Keith, Charles W., Jr., to B-W Health Products,
Inc. Multi-position wall spacer. 4,391,007. CI. 5-60.000.
Mitchell, Paul B.: See-
Mitchell. Paul B.. Jr.; and Mitchell, Paul B., 4.391,665, CI.
156-72.000.
Mitchell, Paul B., Jr.; and Mitchell, Paul B. Method of making pile
material. 4.391.665, CI. 156-72.000.
Mitel Corporation: See —
Neathway, Graham; Cramp. Allan; and Hum. Albert, 4,392,206, CI.
364-900.000.
Mitra. Gautam; Coan, Michael H.; and Wada, Shohachi. to Cutter
Laboratories, Inc. Blood-coagulation-promoting products and meth-
ods of preparing them. 4,391,746, CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Mitsi Toatsu Inorganic Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Mashio, Fujio; and Kitamura, Shuji, 4,391,945, CI. 524-600.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Iwatani, Shiro. 4,392,151, CI. 357-72.000.
Tanaka, Hideharu; Ishijima. Koji; and Koda, Toshihide, 4,391,573,
CI. 418-63.000.
Yatomi, Takeshi; and Tanaka, YuUka, 4,392,041, CI. 219-69.00W.
Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
TateBe, Yoshikazu; Egami, Masafumi; and Miyawaki, Toshimitsu.
4.391.231. CI. 123-41.690.
Miyahara, Masahiko: See —
Ohyama, Hiroshi; Morita. Ken; Wada, Takuo; and Miyahara,
Masahiko, 4,391,804. CI. 424-245.000.
Miyake. Makoto: See —
Nakamura, Mikio; and Miyake, Makoto. 4,391,852, CI. 427-150.000.
Miyano, Hiroshi, to Alps Electric Co.. Ltd. Serial printer. 4,391,538. CI.
400-145.100.
Miyasaka. Kiyoshi; and Higuchi. Mitsuo, to Fujitsu Limited. Semicon-
ductor memory device with decoder for chip selection/ write in.
4,392,212, CI. 365-230.000.
Miyawaki, Toshimitsu: See —
TateBe, Yoshikazu; Egami, Masafumi; and Miyawaki, Toshimitsu,
4,391,231, CI. 123-41.690.
Mizusawa, Akira, to Nifco Inc. Plastic fastener. 4,391,559. CI.
411-45.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See — —
Chu, Chin-Chiun, 4,391.739. CI. 252-455.00Z.
Godbey, John K.; and Ballard, B. G., 4.391.135. CI. 73-155.000.
Hungerford, Gordon P., 4,391,939, CI. 524-377.000.
Rosinski, Edward J.; and Rubin. Mae K.. 4.391,785, CI.
423-329.000.
Warner. Barry N.. 4.392,109. CI. 324-350.000.
Wu. Margaret M.. 4,391,998. CI. 568-781.000.
Yan, Tsoung-Yuan, 4,391,782, CI. 423-7.000.
Mochizuki, Hirohiko: See —
Nakano, Masao; Baba, Fumio; Nakano, Tomio; Takemae, Yo-
shihiro; and Mochizuki, Hirohiko. 4,392.211. CI. 365-200.000.
Mochizuki, Keisuke: See —
Shinoi, Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki. Keisuke; Suzuki. Yoshimi; Kudoh.
Masaru; and Hashimoto, WaUni, 4,392,024, CI. 179-99.00R.
Mohr, Heinrich: See —
Fauth. Karl-Heinz; Mohr. Heinrich; and Immel. Wolfgang,
4,391,959, CI. 526-70.000.
Mohrman, Raymond F., to Mon-a-therm, Inc. Temperature sensor.
4,392,005, CI. 136-235.000.
Moklint, Oivind: See —
Vangbo, Hakan; Lundin, Bertil; and Moklint, Oivind, 4,391,667. CI.
156-205.000.
Molina Bonillo, Juan J., to G. Siempelkamp GmbH & Co. Installations
for the handhng of molds associated with a transfer press. 4.391.577.
CI. 425-338.000.
Moline, Jerry A.: See —
Duca, James F.; and Moline. Jerry A.. 4,392,156, CI. 358-183.000.
Molins Limited: See —
Fox. Austin L., 4.391.083. CI. 53-575.000.
Mollenkopf, Lloyd C; and Branson. Daniel J., to Rosemount Office
Systems, Inc. Movable panel assembly. 4,391.073. CI. 52-241.000.
Mon-a-therm. Inc.: See —
Mohrman. Raymond F., 4,392.005, CI. 136-235.000.
Monegon, Ltd.: See —
Cullis, Herbert M; and Summinger, Reinhard, 4,392,008, Q.
136-248.000.
Monfredo, Joseph R.; and Roth, Ronald H., to Johnson & Johnson
Dental Products Company. Surgical dental articulator. 4,391,589, CI.
433-63.000,
Monsanto Company: See —
Ellis, Earle R., 4.391,870. CI. 428-218.000.
Moriu, Eiichi, 4,391.953, CI. 525-351.000.
Purdum, William R., 4,391,625, CI. 71-86.000.
Montedison S.p.A.: See —
Masotti, Maurizio; Zentile, Antonio; and Cau. Pasqualino.
4.391,464, CI. 293-120.000.
Merani, Gianfranco; and Anzuino, Giuseppe, 4,391,968, CI.
528-321.000.
Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle, Robert W.; Chant, Bernard J.; Ouwer-
kerk. Anton V.; Kamath, Venkatesh; and Mussinan, Cynthia J., to
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Use of isomeric famesene
product-by-process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of per-
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
fume compositions, colognes and perfumed articles. 4,391,717, CI.
252-8.600.
Moor, Beat. Ski stick grip. 4.391,456. CI. 280-821.000.
Moore Dan T.. Ill; and Fischer, Michael F., to Dan T. Moore Co.
Automobile body panel hole closure. 4.391.384. CI. 220-359.000.
Moore, John W., to Swan Corporation. The. Window tnm. 4.391.072,
CI. 52-211.000.
Moore. Paul E., to Arcair Company. Exothermic cutting electrode.
4.391,209. CI. 110-349.000.
Morca, Inc.: See—
Cruz, Mamerto M., Jr., 4.391.973, CI. 536-56.000.
Morel, Charles: See— , ^,. ,
Barkats, Gerard; Girard. Alain; Marchal. Jean; and Morel. Charles,
4,392.007. CI. 136-248.000.
Moret. Michel, to Allibert S.A. Handling case with incorporated fold-
able lid. 4.391,386. CI. 220-343.000.
Morey, Norval K. Method and apparatus for burning green wood chips.
4.391,205, CI. 110-224.000.
Morgan. Jeffrey D: S«e— „ ^ ^. »„ n a
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R.; and
Howley. Joseph P., 4,391,829. CI. 426-28.000.
Mori. Goro; and Ogura, Masaaki, to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Copying
machine control apparatus comprising variable length program con-
trol. 4.391,507, CI. 355-14.00R. ^ .
Mori Hiromichi; Matsumoto, Jun; and Fujioka, Masanobu, to K.okusai
Denshin Denwa Co., Ltd. Speech path switching system in time-divi-
sional electronic telephone switching system. 4,392,224, CI.
370-67.000.
Morichika, Toshiaki: See—
Murakami. Shinichi; Morichika, Toshiaki; Hiraishi, Hisashi; and
Shiokawa, Hiroyuki. 4,391,635, CI. 75-125.000.
Morimoto, Toru: See—
Kanda, Yoshitsugu; Kurikawa, Minoru; Monmoto, Tom; and
Nakanishi, Kiyoshi, 4.391.854, CI. 427-192.000.
Morin, Lionel. Safe ammunition for exhibition and target shooting.
4 391,199, CI. 102-444.000.
Morinaga, Masaru, to NSK-Wamer K.K. Buckle device. 4.391,024, CI.
24-230.00A.
Morita, Eiichi, to Monsanto Company. Diene rubber compositions
containing N,N'-dithioformanilide crosslinkers. 4,391,953, CI.
525-351.000.
Morita, Ken: See— _ . ^ ... .
Ohyama, Hiroshi; Morita, Ken; Wada, Takuo; and Miyahara,
Masahiko, 4,391.804. CI. 424-245.000.
Moriya, Michio, to Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd. Structure for
mounting a brake pad abrasion detector. 4,391,350, CI. 188-1.110.
Morizot, Georges: See— j „ . j
Bloise Rene- Lorang, Marcel; Morizot. Georges; and Boissonnade.
Genevieve, 4.391,792, CI. 423-617.000.
Morrison, Charles F., Jr.. to Vac-Tec Systems, Inc. High rate magne-
tron sputtering of high permeability materials. 4,391,697, CI.
204-298.000.
Morrison, Rocky V., to Discovision Associates. Hot sprue valve assem-
bly for an injection molding machine. 4,391,579, CI. 425-548.000.
Morrow, James G., Sr.. to Manitowoc Company. Inc., The. Quick
release mounting for a tumuble bearing. 4,391,477, CI. 308-221.000.
Moshofsky, Jerome F., to Smith, Lawrence M. Surgical stoplers and
staple. 4,391,401, CI. 227-19.000.
Mosley, William H., Jr.: See—
Andren, Carl F.; and Mosley, William H., Jr., 4,392,232, CI.
375-86.000.
Mostek Corporation: See-
Chan, Tsiu C, 4,392,210, CI. 365-149.000.
Motorola Inc.: See —
Ecklund, Uwrence M.. 4,392.254. CI. 455-173.000.
Fette. Bruce. 4.392,018, CI. 179-l.OSM.
Jasper, Steven C; and Jane. Robert V., 4,392,138. CI. 343-103.000.
Price. John J.. Jr.. 4,392,067, CI. 307-475.000.
Williamson, Richard D.; and Selinko, George J., 4,391,883, CI.
429-97.000.
Mouthon, Marc: See—
Kumar, Niraj; and Mouthon, Marc. 4.392,217. CI. 368-188.000.
Mowdood. Syed K.: See—
Maxey. Frank S.. deceased; and Mowdood, Syed K.. 4,391,318, CI.
152-359.000.
Moynihan, Robert E.: See—
Derick. Burton N.; Moynihan. Robert E.; and Wolfe. Jon W..
4.391.867. CI. 428-195.000.
MTA Szegedi Biologiai Kozpont Enzimologiai Intezete: See—
Devenyi. Tibor; Bocsa. Klara K.; Kovats. Ferenc; Pongor, Sandor;
Szabolcsi, Gertrud; and Such. Mihaly, 4,391.839, CI. 426-626.000.
Mueller. Martin, to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Container manufacturing ma-
chine. 4.391.666. CI. 156-84.000.
Mukaida. Yoshito: See—
Yamada, Yasuyuki; Akashi, Goro; Tsuji, Nobuo; Mukaida, Yoshito;
and Fujiyama, Masaaki. 4.391.851. CI. 427-130.000.
Mullejans. Robert: See— . ,„, ,oc /-i
Grossmann. Karl; and Mullejans, Robert, 4,392,185, CI.
362-105.000.
Muller, Klaus: See—
Linder. Ernst; Maurer, Helmut; Muller, Klaus; and Ricger. Franz,
4.391.691, CI. 204-408.000.
Muller. Michael; Scherrer, Herbert; and Kagi. Erwin, to Franz Buttner
AG. Word processor print wheel assembly. 4,391,536, CI.
400-144.200.
^""&bas,'christoph; and Muller, Michael, 4.392.117, CI. 335-297.000.
Muller, Theo: See — „,^
Fabian, Peter; and Muller, Theo, 4,391.879. CI. 428-551.000.
Mundhenke. Rudolph F.; and Fifolt. Michael J., to Occidental Chemi-
cal Corporation. Process for the preparation of para-nuoroaniline.
4.391.991, CI. 564-412.000. .
Munekata, Kenichi; Unno. Kunihiko; and Shimizu. Nonhiko, to
Toyoda Koki Kabushiki Kaisha. Grinding machine with detection
device for useable limit or grinding wheel. 4,391.066, CI. 51-165.870.
'^""palm, JohlTw.; and Mungen. Richard. 4.391.791. CI. 423-574.00R.
Munnecke. Douglas M.: See— ,^ „ o v j.
Baumgarten, Jorg; Frommer. Werner; Schmidt. Delf; Schmidt,
Friedrich; and Munnecke, Douglas M., 4,391,887, CI. 435-42.000.
Murakami, Naoyuki; and Zyo, Hiroshi, to Murakami, Naoyuki. Loud-
speaker. 4,391,346, CI. 181-147.000.
Murakami, Shinichi; Morichika, Toshiaki; Hiraishi, Hisashi; and Shi-
okawa, Hiroyuki, to Kubota, Ltd. High Cr low Ni two-phased cast
stainless steel. 4,391,635, CI. 75-125.000.
Murakami, Shozo; Yamanaka, Hiroaki; Yokoyama, Kazuhiro; Yone,
Yasuhiro; and Yamaguchi, Tokuji. to Nippon Steel Corporation.
Method for classification of coals for coke production. 4,391,702, CI.
209-10.000. ^ , ^
Murakami, Tadashi; and Kishida, Toshikatsu, to Nippon Steel Corpora-
tion. Slab heating furnace. 4,391,587, CI. 432-121.000.
Muraski, Andrew A.: See —
Price, Ronn; Brown, Gary; Muraski. Andrew A.; and Muraski,
William C, 4,392,119, CI. 34O-38.00L.
Muraski, William C: See-
Price, Ronn; Brown, Gary; Muraski, Andrew A.; and Muraski,
WilliamC, 4.392,119. CI. 34O-38.00L.
Murphey. Joseph R., to Halliburton Company. Rapidly dissolvable
silicates and methods of using the same. 4.391.643. CI. 106-74.000.
Murphy. Robert M: See— ,^ „ ^ »,
Liang, Charles C; Bolster, M. Elizabeth; and Murphy, Robert M.,
4,391,729, CI. 252-182.100.
Murray, Jesse L., to Tanner Companies, The. Expansion joint inserter
for continuous curb laying machines. 4,391,549. CI. 404-87.000.
Murrin. Horace T.: See—
Cook. Kenneth V.; Cunningham. Robert A.. Jr.; and Mumn,
Horace T.. 4.391,143. CI. 73-623.000.
Musgrave. Dwight S., to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation. Insu-
lated roof stmcture. 4,391,075, CI. 52-404.000.
Mussinan, Cynthia J.: See—
Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle. Robert W.; Chant. Bernard J.;
Ouwerkerk. Anton V.; Kamath. Venkatesh; and Mussinan, Cyn-
thia J., 4,391,717, CI. 252-8.600.
'^^^Memon°Nkzir A^i and Myers, Cielo S., 4,391,938, CI. 524-270.000.
Myers, Frederick F., Jr.: See— . ^ . ^ ,„, .^n ^
Corley, Robert C; and Myers. Fredenck F.. Jr., 4.391,660, U.
149-19.900. . ,
Myers, John E. Support assembly having releasable lever mountmg for
handle bar. 4.391.160. CI. 74-551.800.
N.D.C. Co.. Ltd.: See—
Kanda, Yoshitsugu; Kurikawa, Minom; Monmoto, Tom; and
Nakanishi, Kiyoshi, 4,391.854. CI. 427-192.000.
Nabisco Brands, Inc.: See—
SpineUi, Louis A., 4,391,362, CI. 198-855.000.
Nahm, Helmut; and Granzer, Emold, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft.
4-Phenoxy-phenoxy-alkane-carboxylic acid denvatives and process
for their manufacture. 4,391,995. CI. 568-637.000.
Nair. Kumaran M.. to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Onnpaiiy.
Screen-prinuble dielectric composition. 4,392.180. CI. 361-321.000.
'^'"^^ad^'Michio; tmi Naito. Masayuki, 4.391.497, CI. 35O-523X)00.
Naitoh. Katsumi; and Yanagihara, Hideo, to NSK-Wamer K.K. Re-
tractor for seat belt with an alleviating device. 4.391,421, CI.
242-107.700. »„ , r
Nakaaawa, Kenji; and Masuda, Isao. to Hoya Corporation. Alkali-tree
glaM for photoetching mask. 4,391,916. CI. 501-62.000.
Nakagawa, Yasuo: See— . • t-
Akiyama. Nobuyuki; Kembo, Yukio; Nakagawa, Yasuo; Aiuchi.
Susumu; and Nomoto. Mineo, 4,391.511. CI. 355-40.000.
Nakai, Hiromitsu: See—
Tomita, Yoshifumi; and Nakai, Hironutsu, 4,391,885, CI.
430-28.000.
Nakajima, Masao: See— ..
Shioyama, Giichi; Hata, Yoshitaka; and Nakajima, Masao,
4,391,247, CI. 123-403.000.
Nakakuki, Tadao: See— ^,.,, .
Miu, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshida, Takashi; Nakashima,
Masato; Fujihara, Katsumi; and Nakakuki, Tadao, 4.392,120, CI.
382-22.000.
Nakamori, Shigem: See— .
MaUui, Hiroshi; Tsuchida, Takayasu; and Nakamon, Shigem,
4,391,907, CI. 435-115.000. ^ ^, ,
Nakamura, Mikio; and Miyake, Makoto, to Kanzaki Paper Manufactur-
ing Co., Ltd. Process for preparing an acceptor coated sheet.
4,391,852, CI. 427-150.000.
Nakamura, Nobuyuki: See —
Hori, Hisako; Kitamura, Nobu; Shirahata, Isao; and Nakamura,
Nobuyuki, 4,391,955, CI. 525-462.000. . . ^ . ^ ,>
Nakamura, Shunji; and Arao. Kozo. to Canon Kabushiki Kawha. De-
veloping device using magnetic developer. 4.391.512. CI. 355-3.0DD.
July X 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
Nakamura, Shunji: See—
Tamura, Yasuyuki; Kanbe. Junichiro; Nakamura, Shunji; Toyono.
Tsutomu; and Takahashi. Tohm. 4.391.891. CI. 430-120.000.
Nakane, Shigem, to Takara Co., Ltd. Toy robot vehicle assembly.
4,391.060, CI. 46-22.000.
Nakanishi, Kiyoshi: See—
Kanda, Yoshitsugu; Kurikawa, Minom; Morimoto, Tom; and
Nakanishi, Kiyoshi. 4.391.854, CI. 427-192.000.
Nakanishi. Toyohiko: See—
KaUyama, Tsutomu; and Nakanishi. Toyohiko, 4,391,835, CI.
426-573.000.
Nakano, Jiro; and Ono, Hironobu, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Method of and apparatus for communicating the operating
condition of an internal combustion engine. 4,391.130. CI. 73-1 17.300.
Nakano. Masao; Baba. Fumio; Nakano. Tomio; Takemae. Yoshihiro;
and Mochizuki. Hirohiko, to Fujitsu Limited. Semiconductor mem-
ory device technical field. 4,392,211. CI. 365-200.000.
Nakano. Tomio: See —
Nakano, Masao; Baba, Fumio; Nakano, Tomio; Takemae, Yo-
shihiro; and Mochizuki, Hirohiko. 4.392.211, CI. 365-200.000.
Nakashima, Masato: See —
Mita, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshida, Takashi; Nakashima,
Masato; Fujihara. Katsumi; and Nakakuki. Tadao. 4,392,120, CI.
382-22.000.
Nakauchi, Hideo; Kato. Shingo; and Ando, Yukio, to Bridgestone Tire
Co., Ltd. Vibration-insulating mbber composition. 4,391.942. CI.
524-526.000.
Nakayama. Kazuyuki: See —
Ueno, Kunihiko; Ishii. Akiyasu; Hukuda. Masazi; and Nakayama,
Kazuyuki, 4.391.763, CI. 264-15.000.
Nakazawa, Sadaham, to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Vehicle cabin heater.
4.391,407, CI. 237- 12. 30B.
Naico Chemical Company: See —
Tai, Wun T., 4,391.932. CI. 523-337.000.
Napoli, Joseph D.. to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Solar
power module. 4,392.009. CI. 136-251.000.
Naruo. Kyoichi: See —
Yamamoto. Nobuyuki; Namo. Kyoichi; and Okita, Tsutomu.
4,391,874, CI. 428-336.000.
National Hydro-Hoist Company: See —
Rutter, Henry A.. 4.391.550. CI. 405-7.000.
National Latex Products Co., The: See —
Gill, H. Ross, III, 4,391.063. CI. 46-90.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See —
El-Menshawy, Mohamed F.; Woodrow, Peter A.; and Bhatta-
charyya. Sushantha K., 4,392,110. CI. 324-453.000.
Mathieson, Ernest; Smith, Graham C; and Gilvin, Philip J.,
4,392,057. CI. 250-385.000.
Sainz. Antonio J.; and Roberts. Victor C. 4.391,148, CI. 73-861.250.
Smith, Kenneth C. A., 4,392,058, CI. 250-492.200.
National Semiconductor Corporation: See —
Courreges, Francis G., 4,392.150. CI. 357-51.000.
Sauer. Don R.. 4.392.016. CI. 179-l.OGS.
National Starch and Chemical Corporation: See —
Chiu. Chung-Wai. 4.391,836. CI. 426-578.000.
Nattel. William, to GTE Sylvania Canada Limited. Electrical wiring
box arrangement with alignable grounding strap. 4,392.012. CI.
174-51.000.
NCR Corporation: See —
Cook. Donald M.. 4,392.226, CI. 371-61.000.
Pfeifer, Robert F.; and Tmdel. Murray L., 4,391,650. CI. 148-1.500.
Neary, Robin P.: See —
Carter, Leewood C; and Neary. Robin P., 4,391,202, CI.
108-51.300.
Neathway. Graham; Cramp. Allan; and Hum. Albert, to Mitel Corpora-
tion. Printer. 4,392,206, CI. 364-900.000.
Negele, Richard; and Pfeifle, Dieter, to SKF Kugellagerfabriken
GmbH. RolleiLbearing. 4,391.476. CI. 3O8-2O7.0OR.
Negishi. Fumio: See —
Ota, Akiho; and Negishi, Fumio, 4.391,381. CI. 215-l.OOC.
Nel-Tech Development, inc.: See —
Iwata, Hideki. 4,392.125, CI. 340-518.000.
Nelson, Alfred M.; and Rasekhi, Houshang, to Wang Laboratories, Inc.
Apparatus and method for separating adhering media electrostati-
cally. 4.392.179. CI. 361-234.000.
Nelson, James A.: See —
Lazarus, Harrison; and Nelson, James A.. 4.391,276. CI.
604-266.000.
Nelson. John W.; and Jensen. Bruno, to PIXE International Corpora-
tion. Circular two-stage air particulate and gas sampler. 4.391.151. CI.
73-863.230.
Nermes. Esko O.: See —
Aaltonen, Olavi A.; Malmstrom, Rolf E.; Nermes. Esko O.; and
Tuominen. Tapio K., 4.391.632, CI. 75-26.000
Nespor, Tony. Automatic remote car starter. 4.392.059, CI. 290-38.00D.
Newlin, John C: See —
Marsh, Douglas D.; Feldman. Arthur E.; and Newlin. John C.
4.391,454. CI. 28047.350.
Neyret. Guy, to Sodex-Magister. Societe d'Exploitation. Piston-type
locks. 4.391.112. CI. 70-364.00A.
Ng. Kwokei J.: See —
Andresen. Brian D.; and Ng. Kwokei J.. 4,391,778, CI. 422-89.000.
Ng, Paul K.; and Foumel, Michael A., to Cutter Laboratories, Inc.
Plasma protein fraction substantially free of acetate ions. 4,391,801.
CI. 424-177.000.
Nicholson. Harold J.: See —
Hsiung. Du Y.; Davis. Chester A.; and Nicholson. Harold J.,
4.391,286, CI. 132-7.000.
Nielsen, Anker J., Jr., to Omco Inc. Barrel lock sleeve. 4,391,110, CI.
70-34.000.
Nienow, John F.: See-
Burnett, George H.; Claflin. Warren E.; Lanzillotti. Harry V.;
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and
Wayte, Alline R., 4,391,285, CI. 131-364.000.
Nifco Inc.: See —
Mizusawa, Akira, 4,391,559. CI. 411-45.000.
Nigol. Olaf; and Houston, Herbert J., to Slater Steel Industries Limited
Method and apparatus for testing and/or adjusting vibration absorber
for suspended cables. 4,391.125. CI. 73-11.000.
Nigrelli. Biagio J., to Nigrelli Corporation. Loading blades for packag-
ing apparatus. 4.391.078. CI. 53-251.000.
Nigrelli Corporation: See—
Nigrelli. Biagio J., 4.391.078. CI. 53-251.000.
Nihon Tokushu Noyaku Seizo K.K.: See—
Aya. Masahiro; Sairo, Junichi; Yasui. Kazuomi; Kakabu. Shinzo;
Kamochi. Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko. 4.391.629. CI.
71-94.000.
Niinomi, Naoyuki; and Watanabe, Kunihiko. to Nippon Gakki Seizo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic musical instrument with musical com-
position fashion selectors. 4,391,176, CI. 84-1.170.
Niioka. Takeharu; and Kobayashi. Isao. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Broadcast wave receiving system. 4.392.246, CI.
455-158.000.
Niizeki, Jiro: See —
Kogoma, Kiyoshi; Ohashi. Yu; Niizeki. Jiro; Sone. Norio; and
Tobita. Takashi. 4.391,994. CI. 568-593.000.
Nilsson, Claes T., to PLM AB. Preform of a thermoplastic. 4,391,861,
CI. 428-35.000.
Nilsson, Gosu. Method and a device for effecting rinsing of an inverted
siphon, which forms part of a sewer. 4,391,288. CI. 137-15.000.
Nimry, Tayseer S.; and Fields. Ellis K., to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana). Polyimides-polyamides from tricyclo [4.2. 1.0^''] nonane-
3,4-dimethyl-3.4.7.8-tetracarboxylic acid dianhydride and dicarbex-
ylic acids. 4,391.967. CI. 528-189.000.
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See —
Hirosaki. Botaro; and Hasegawa. Satoshi, 4,392,220. CI. 370-18.000.
Kai, Tomokazu. 4,392,242, CI. 455-33.000.
Maruta. Rikio. 4,392.234. CI. 375-118.000.
Mitama, Masataka, 4.392.245. CI. 455-115.000.
Ohyagi, Takashi, 4,392.135. CI. 340-825.440.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Niinomi. Naoyuki; and Watanabe, Kunihiko, 4,391,176, CI.
84-1.170.
Nippon Kayaku Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Aoyagi, Takaaki; Shirai, Tadashi; Nishizawa.
Rinzo; Suzuki, Masao; and Saino. Tetsushi. 4.391.986, CI.
562-444.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See —
Ishizaka, Sunao; and Hozumi, Toshiaki, 4,391,488, CI. 350-257.000.
Nippon Oil Co., Ltd.: See—
Uemura, Seiichi; Yamamoto, Shunichi; Hirose. Takao; Takashima,
Hiroaki; and Kato, Osamu, 4.391.788. CI. 423-447.600.
Nippon Soda Company Limited: See —
Maeda, Umio; Shoji. Hirofumi; Wada, Yasusuke; and Hone.
Yoshio. 4.391.743. CI. 252-518.000.
Nippon Soken. Inc.: See —
Egami, Tsuneyuki; Kawai. Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi,
Hideki. 4,391.132. CI. 73-118.000.
Nippon Steel Corporation: See —
Murakami, Shozo; Yamanaka, Hiroaki; Yokoyama. Kazuhiro;
Yone. Yasuhiro; and Yamaguchi, Tokuji, 4,391.702, CI.
209-10.000.
Murakami, Tadashi; and Kishida, Toshikatsu, 4,391.587, CI.
432-121.000.
Takechi, Hiroshi; Katoh. Hiroshi; Koyama. Kazuo; and Usami,
Kazuhide, 4.391,653, CI. 148-12.0OC.
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation: See —
Kojima, Takafumi; Tamaki, Kenzo; and Yokota, Shiro, 4.392,026,
CI. 179-175.30R.
Shinoi, Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki, Keisuke; Suzuki, Yoshimi; Kudoh,
Masaru; and Hashimoto, WaUru, 4,392,024, CI. 179-99.00R. •
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See —
Dohshita, Hidetoshi; Ishii, Yoshiya; and Fujitani, Nobuyuki,.
4,391,241, CI. 123-198.0DB.
Inoue, Yozo; Ito, Yoji; Hara, Kiyoshi; Usami, Kiyoshi; and Iwata,
Yasuhiro, 4,391.320. CI. 165-2.000.
Ito. Shinzo. 4.391.133, CI. 73-1 19.00A.
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Saji, Hideo, 4,391,244,
CI. 123-339.000.
Nishihama, Hitoshi: See —
Kamezaki. Yasushi; Inoue, Eiichi; Nishihama, Hitoshi; Fushida,
Akira; and Matsumoto. Joji. 4,391,892, CI. 430-126.000.
Nishikawa, Masaji, to Olympus Optical Company Limited. Electropho-
tographic apparatus having means for adjusting the reproduction
properties of subsequent copies after a first copy has been produced.
4,391.502, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Nishikawa. Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama. Toshihiko; Taka-
oka, Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, (o Honda Giken
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Steering mechanism for vehicles equipped
with power steering system. 4.391.342, CI. 180-143.000.
PI 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Nishizawa, Rinzo: See—
Umezawa, Hamao; Aoyagi, Takaaki; Shirai, Tadashi; Ntshizawa,
Rinzo; Suzuki, Masao; and Saino, Tetsushi, 4,391,986, CI.
562-444.000.
Nissan Motor Company, Limited: See —
Kosuge, Hideaki, 4,391.098, CI. 60-602.000.
Matsuda, Toshiro, 4,392.202, CI. 364-426.000.
Matsui, Fujio, 4,391.250. CI. 123-438.000.
Nakazawa. Sadaharu, 4,391,407, CI. 237-12.30B.
Shioyama, Giichi; Hata, Yoshitaka; and Nakajima, Masao,
4,391,247, CI. 123-403.000.
Sugasawa, Fukashi; and lizuka, Hanihiko, 4,391,240, CI. 123-
198.00F.
Takahashi. Takao, 4.391.305. CI. 139-435.000.
Takamura. Tousaku. 4,391,566. CI. 415-209.000. _ „, ,^
Takemura, Toji; and Hirashima. Kenzo, 4,391,356, CI. 192-84.00C.
Yamane, Ken; and Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., 4,391,184, CI.
92-100.000.
Nisshin Steel Company, Ltd.: See—
Yamauchi, Takashi; Manihashi, Shigeaki; and Hasegawa, Monhiro,
4,391.633, CI. 75-53.000.
Nisso Petrochemical Industrie Co., Ltd.: See—
KoKoma. Kiyoshi; Ohashi, Yu; Niizeki, Jiro; Sone, Nono; and
Tobita, Takashi, 4,391.994, CI. 568-593.000.
Nitro Nobel AB: See—
Persson. Ingemar P., 4.391,403, CI. 228-107.000.
Nitsuko Limited: See— . . „ l. .y j u
Shinoi. Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki. Keisuke; Suzuki, Yoshmii; Kudoh,
Masaru; and Hashimoto, Wataru, 4,392,024. CI. 179-99.00R.
Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd.: See—
Shono, Hiroaki; and Kikuchi, Toshiaki, 4.391,619, CI. 65-12.000.
Nixdorf Computer AG: See—
Baitz. Gunter. 4.391,542, CI. 400-605.000.
NL Industries, Inc.: See—
Herman. Daniel P.; and Kruse, Uno, 4,391.928, CI. 523-2OLO0O^
Mardis, Wilbur S.; and Finlayson, Claude M., 4,391,637, CI.
106-20.000.
Noble, Milton L.; and Cleaveland, Bryan L., to General Electnc Com-
pany. Electron discharge device with a spatially penodic focused
beam. 4,392,078, CI. 315-4.000.
'^"^MedeK Louis w7h., and Barak. Yoram. 4.391.574, CI. 418-195.000.
Nogradi, Mihaly: See— „ . ,
Korbonits. Dezso; Nogradi. Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner. Andras; Heja, Gergely; Kovacz. Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4.391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
Nomoto, Mineo: See— » . .
Akiyama, Nobuyuki; Kembo. Yukio; Nakagawa, Yasuo; Aiuchi,
Susumu; and Nomoto, Mineo, 4,391,511, CI. 355-40.000.
Norris, Kenneth E. Trouble light assembly positioner. 4,392,188. CI.
362-269.000.
Northern Telecom Limited: See— . , i- /-
Trumble. William P.; Finn. Roger C-, and Jackson, Charles F. C,
4,392,014, CI. 174-92.000.
NSK- Warner K. K: See— . ,„. ^,. ^,
Naitoh, Katsumi; and Yanagihara. Hideo. 4.391,421, CI.
242-107.700.
NSK-Wamer K.K.: See—
Morinaga, Masaru, 4,391.024. CI. 24-230.00A.
Oak Industries Inc.: See —
Denley. Ronald S., 4,391,845, CI. 427-58.000.
Obayashi. Hideki: See—
Egami. Tsuneyuki; Kawai, Hisasi; Kohama, Tokio; and Obayashi,
Hideki, 4,391,132, CI. 73-118.000.
Occidenul Chemical Corporation: See—
Mundhenke, Rudolph F.; and Fifolt, Michael J., 4.391.991. CI.
564-412.000. .. , ,.^
Oda. Kiyoshi, to Yoshida Kogyo K. K. Automatic lock slider for slide
fasteners. 4,391,022, CI. 24-205. 14R.
OfTicine Minnetti Di Omella Raveggi & C.S.a.s.: See—
Minnetti, Federico, 4,391,360, CI. 198-412.000.
Ogawa, Toshiyuki; See—
Shibusawa, Mitsuo; and Ogawa. Toshiyuki, 4.391.508. CI. 355-
14.0CU.
Oeura. Masaaki: See—
Mon. Goro; and Ogura, Masaaki, 4,391,507, CI. 355-14.00R.
Ogura, Masahiko: See —
Kawabata, Etsuo; Ogura, Masahiko; Takagi. Akinobu; and
Fujimura, Akira, 4.391,246, CI. 123-391.000.
O'Hara, John W.. to Bechtel International Corp. Apparatus and method
for eliminating champagne effect in compressed air energy storage
systems. 4,391,552. CI. 405-59.000.
Ohara, Osamu: .See —
Saito, Koichi; and Ohara, Osamu. 4.391.857. CI. 427-385.500.
Ohashi. Yu: See— .. ^ ^,
Kogoma, Kiyoshi; Ohashi. Yu; Niizcki, Jiro; Sone, Nono; and
Tobita. Takashi, 4,391,994. CI. 568-593.000.
Ohba, Shinya: See— ..
Aoki Masakazu; Ando. Hanihisa; Ohba, Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto. Iwao; and Izawa. Ryuichi. 4.392,158. CI. 358-213.000.
ide Katsuyuki; Ohe, Kempo; and Kobayashi, Hisao, 4,392,086, CI.
315-174.000.
Ohe, Kuniyoshi: See— . j t- w l
Kitane, Syoiti; Honjo. Shigeru; Ohe. Kuniyoshi; and Tobioka,
Fumio, 4,391,658, CI. 148-188.000.
Yamada, Shigeru; and Ohhara, Kazuya, 4.392.114. CI. 333-28.00T.
Ohl:iashi, Shiro; Ubusawa. Fumiyoshi; Iwasaki, Shoji; and Manaka.
Tetsuyuki, to Clarion Co., Ltd. Transceiver having interphone sys-
tem. 4,392.243. CI. 455-74.000.
Ohio State University. The: See—
Andresen. Brian D.; and Ng. Kwokei J.. 4.391.778. CI. 422-89.000.
Ohmori, Taiji. to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Control
circuit for vehicle leveling system. 4.391.452. CI. 280-6.100.
Ohmura. Kaoru; Kimura, Takeo; and Kusunose. Tetsuhiro. to Asahi
Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Fine-patterned thick film conductor
structure and manufacturing method thereof. 4.392.013. CI.
174-68.500.
Ohorodnik, Alexander: See—
Kaiser, Karl; and Ohorodnik, Alexander, 4,391,972, CI.
528-499.000.
Ohyagi, Takashi, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Paging receivers.
4,392,135, CI. 340-825.440. _ ^.,
Ohyama, Hiroshi; Morita, Ken; Wada, Takuo; and Miyahara, Masahiko,
to Hokko Chemical Industry Company, Ltd. Imidazole denvatives
and fungicidal composition containing the same. 4,391,804, CI.
424-245.000. ^. ^,
Okabe, Takako; Itoh, Kunio; and Sugino, Takashi, to MatsushiU Elec-
tric Industrial Co., Ltd. Terraced substrate semiconductor laser.
4.392.228, CI. 372-46.000.
Okada, Shuhei, to Hitachi Maxell, Ltd. Magnetic recording disc car-
tridge with disc cleaning means. 4,392.170, CI. 360-133.000.
Okamoto, Yoshihisa, to B. F. Goodrich Company, The. Process for
preparing colorless hydroxyl epihalohydrin polymers. 4,391,970, CI.
528-408.000.
Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.: See—
Kamegaya, Takeo; Sekigawa, Tadahiko; Kurakami, Hiroshi; and
Suzuki, Yoshiro, 4,392,075, CI. 313-584.000.
Okita, Tsutomu: See —
Yamamoto, Nobuyuki; Naruo, Kyoichi; and Okita, Tsutomu,
4.391.874, CI. 428-336.000.
Okoshi. Noboru; Kudo. Kin-ichi; and Shimoyama. Shoichi, to Dainip-
pon Ink & Chemicals. Inc. Process for producing oil-modified and
rosin-modified phenolic resin for printing inks. 4,391,640. CI.
106-29.000.
Okuyama. Kiyotaka: See—
Hosaka. Akihiko; Okuyama, Kiyotaka; and Isobe. Yukihiro,
4.391,864, CI. 428-64.000.
O'Laughlin, Richard L.: See— „. . . ,
Wang, Yu-Chang J.; Dursch Friedrich; O'Laughlin, Richard L.;
and Prusik, Thaddeus, 4.391.755. CI. 260-397.450.
Olennikov, Evgeny F.: See—
Bykhovsky. David G.; Voropaev. Albert A.; Olennikov. Evgeny
F.; and Lopatina. Alia V.. 4,392,047. CI. 219-145.210.
Olson. Allan H.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company. Stobi-
lized suspension of glass bubbles in an aqueous dispersion of tetraflu-
oroethylene polymer. 4.391.930, CI. 523-219.000.
Olson. Allan R: See— _, »„ o j
Spradlin. Joseph E.; Morgan. Jeffrey D.; Olson. Allan R.; and
Howley, Joseph P.. 4.391.829. CI. 426-28.000.
Olympus Optical Company Limited: See— ,.,„,,„ ,,^
Ando, Otaro; and Suwaki, Toshitaka, 4,391,282. CI. 128-660.000.
Imada, Michio; and Naito, Masayuki, 4,391,497. CI. 350-523.00a
Imai, Toshihiro; and Yamada, Toyotaka, 4.391.521. CI. 356-225.000.
Konoshima, Katunaga. 4.391.287. CI. 134-99.000.
Nishikawa. Masaji. 4.391,502. CI. 355-3.0DD.
Osanai, Akira. 4.391.416, CI. 242-68.100.
Omco Inc.: See —
Nielsen, Anker J., Jr., 4,391.110. CI. 70-34.000.
Ono, Hironobu: See — „ .,, ,««
Nakano, Jiro; and Ono, Hironobu, 4,391,130, CI. 73-117.300.
Opalka, Chester J., Jr.: See— ^ ,j c
Lesher, George Y.; Opalka, Chester J., Jr.; and Page, Donald F.,
4,391,811. CI. 424-263.000.
Organisation Europeenne de Recherches Spatiales: See—
O'Sullivan. Dermot; and Weinberg. Alan, 4.392,103. CI.
323-222.000.
Original Hanau Heraeus GmbH: See—
Schmid. Helmut; Bock. Martin; and Kampf, Gunther, 4,391,522, U.
356-326.000.
Oriando. Charles M.: See—
Cleveland William K. S.; Webb, Jimmy L.; and Orlando, Charles
M., 4,391,996, CI. 568-726.000.
Orlite Engineering Ltd.: See—
Kadim, Azriel, 4,391,055, CI. 42-50.000. .
Orlowski, Ronald C; and Seyler, Jay K., to Armour Pharmaceutical
Company. Des asparagine-3-calcitonin. 4,391,747, CI. 260-1 12.50T.
Orshansky Transmission Corporation: See-
Millar. Robert W., 4.391,292, CI. 137-269.000.
Ortloff, John E.. to Exxon Production Research Co. MultUme piggable
fiuid swivel. 4.391.298. CI. 137-615.000.
Osakabe. Yoshio: See— .,„.,,« i
Yamada. Takaaki; Osakabe. Yoshio; and Tsuda, Yukio. 4.392,253,
CI. 455-165.000.
Osanai, Akira, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Reel sj^ff, ^l*^" °ff
magnetic recording tape running apparatus. 4,391,416, CI. 242-68.100.
Osdene, Thomas S.: See— .
Burnett, George H.; Claflin, Warren E.; Lanzillotti, Harry v.;
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and
Wayte, Alline R., 4,391,285, CI. 131-364.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 29
Osrow, Harold, to Osrow Products Corp. Kitchen appliance for making
farinaceous products. 4,391,575, CI. 425-190.000.
Osrow Products Corp.: See —
Osrow. Harold, 4,391,575, CI. 425-190.000.
Osterhout, David J.: See—
Foley, James W. B.; and Osterhout, David J., 4,392,172, CI.
361-8.000.
Ostermayer, Frederick W,, Jr.: See —
Buckley, Reginald R.; and Ostermayer, Frederick W.. Jr..
4.391,683, CI. 204-129.300.
Ostlund. Roland; and Ostlund, Rolf. Device in connection with cam-
eras. 4,392.183, CI. 362-11.000.
Ostlund, Rolf: See—
Ostlund. Roland; and Ostlund. Rolf. 4.392,183. CI. 362-11.000.
O'Sullivan. Dermot; and Weinberg. Alan, to Organisation Europeenne
de Recherches Spatiales. Current sensing regulator. 4.392,103, CI.
323-222.000.
Ota. Akiho; and Negishi. Fumio, to Yoshino Kogyosho Co., Ltd.
Paint-coated bottle. 4,391,381. CI. 215-l.OOC.
Ota, Yoshihiko; and Kosaka, Yositeru. to Victor Company of Japan.
Ltd. Recorded tape, speed-change reproducing system. 4,392,161, CI.
360-10.300.
Otoda, Ichizo: See —
Maruyama, Teruo; Ichiyanagi, Takashi; and Otoda, Ichizo,
4,392,168, CI. 360-129.000.
Outboard Marine Corporation: See —
Anderson, Philip A., 4,391,236, CI. 123-149.00C.
Outokumpu Oy: See —
Aaltonen. Olavi A.; Malmstrom. Rolf E.; Nermes. Esko O.; and
Tuominen, Tapio K., 4.391.632. CI. 75-26.000.
Ouwerkerk, Anton V.: See —
Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle, Robert W.; Chant, Bernard J.;
Ouwerkerk, Anton V.; Kamath, Venkatesh; and Mussinan, Cyn-
thia J., 4,391,717. CI. 252-8.600.
Overly, Larry L.: See —
Wood, Thomas D.; Reiss, Garry K.; and Overly, Larry L.,
4,391,595, CI. 474-33.000.
Owen, Robert B.; and Witherow, William K., to United States of
America, National Aeronautics and Space Administration. Dual laser
optical system and method for studying fiuid flow. 4,391,518, CI.
356-129.000.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation: See —
Musgrave, Dwight S., 4,391,075, CI. 52-404.000.
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See —
Mueller, Martin, 4.391,666. CI. 156-84.000.
Whitney. Ralph H., 4.392,055. CI. 215-307.000.
Oy Sisu-Auto Ab: See —
Fagerstedt. Nils. 4,391.455, CI. 280-407.000.
Oyama, Masayuki: See —
Mita, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshida. Takashi; Nakashima.
Masato; Fujihara. Katsumi; and Nakakuki. Tadao, 4,392,120, CI.
382-22.000.
Ozaki, Keiji: See —
Ichikawa. Katsumi; Amano, Itaru; Ozaki, Keiji; and Suzuki, Seiichi,
4.391,769. CI. 264-326.000.
Ozite Corporation: See —
Pickens, Robert C. Jr.; Thomas. Reese R.; and Somerville. Ronald.
4,391,866, CI. 428-92.000.
P.O.R. Microtrans AB: See—
Risman. Per O., 4,392,039, CI. 219-10.55A.
Pack. Ernest A., to B.H.F. (Engineering) Limited. Apparatus for break-
ing articles. 4,391,413, CI. 241-99.000.
Pddco Inc " Sec
Ja'nssen. Craig R.. 4,391,013, CI. 15-210.00R.
Padro, Carlos E. L.: See —
Ciriza, Santiago A.; and Padro, Carlos E. L.. 4,391,974, CI.
544-030.000.
Paffrath, Edgar C, to Amigo Sales, Inc. Lifting apparatus adapted for
mounting in a vehicle trunk. 4.391.379. CI. 212-187.000.
■ Pagano, Victor H., to United States of America, Army. Logistic vehicle
armor. 4,391,178, CI. 89-36.00H.
Page, Donald F.: See —
Lesher, George Y.; Opalka, Chester J., Jr.; and Page, Donald F.,
4,391,811, CI. 424-263.000.
Pako Corporation: See —
Diesch, Robert E., 4,391,082, CI. 53-520.000.
Palm, John W.; and Reed, Robert L., to Standard Oil Company (Indi-
ana). Method and apparatus for reducing the ammonia concentration
of sulfur recovery facility gas streams. 4,391,790, CI. 423-574.00R.
Palm, John W.; and Mungen. Richard, to Standard Oil Company (Indi-
ana). Low temperature sulfur recovery. 4.391,791, CI. 423-574.00R.
Palmer. Roger C. to Intermec Corporation. Method and apparatus for
controlling the area of a thermal print medium that is exposed by a
thennal printer. 4,391,535, CI. 400-120.000.
Panasiuk, Wladyslaw: See —
Wyszkowski, Jerzy; Panasiuk, Wladyslaw; Koprek, Stanislaw; and
Piechal, Andzei, 4,391,654, CI. 148-16.600.
Pankove, Jacques I.; and Wu, Chung P., to RCA Corporation. Solar
cell structure incorporating a novel single crystal silicon material.
4,392,01 1, CI. 136-261.000.
Pappas, Peter G., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Dispersant
viscosity index improver comprising reaction product of a styrene-
maleic anhydride copolymer, an aliphatic alcohol and a tertiary
amino alcohol. 4,391,721, CI. 252-5 1.50A.
Papst Motoren GmbH & Co. KG: See-
Cap, Hdnrich, 4,391,398. CI. 226-4.000.
Papuchon, Michel; and Puech. Claude, to Thomson-CSF Electrically
controlled electro-optical switch and integrated optical circuit incor-
porating such a switch. 4.391,486, CI. 350-96.140.
Paris, Jacques: See —
Folcher, Gerard; and Paris, Jacques, 4.391,881, CI. 429-111.000.
Parisotto, Francesco, to CALZATURIFICIO SCARPA. S.n.c di
Parisotto Francesco & C. Covering element or tongue for rock-
climbing and similar sport boots. 4,391,049, CI. 36-114,000.
Parkola. Walter R., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Multi-
layer ink jet apparatus. 4,392,145. CI. 346-I40.00R.
Parr, Charles H.: See-
Hannibal. Alan J.; and Parr, Charles H.. 4,391,594, CI. 464-80.000
Pasdera, Leonard A.: See —
Lemoine, Maurice G.; and Pasdera, Leonard A.. 4.392.159. CI.
358-319.000.
Pasmannik. Vitaly I.; and Sakharov, Viktor P Method of adjusting
phase shift in amplification multicavity klystron and device therefor.
4,392.079, CI. 315-5.390.
Passat-Maschinenbau GmbH: See—
Albers, Richard R.. 4,391.108. CI. 68-143.000.
Pastemack. Adalbert: See—
Hinz. Claus-Dieter; and Pastemack. Adalbert, 4.390.997. CI.
2-81.000.
Patashnick. Harvey; and Rupprecht, Georg. Microbalance and method
for measuring the mass of matter susF>ended within a fiuid medium.
4.391,338, CI. 177-2I0.0FP.
Pate, Daniel R., to SCM Corporation. Process for continuous fluidiza-
tion of shortening. 4.391.838. CI. 426-606.000.
Paul, Jim N. Elevatable scaffold. 4,391.345, CI. 182-141.000.
Paule. Kurt; Schadlich. Fritz; G?rschner, Martin; and Hornung, Frie-
drich. to Robert Bosch GmbH. Electronic control and regulating
system. 4.392.093. CI. 318-245.000.
Payne, Frank, to Robertshaw Controls Company. Electrical switch
construction. 4,392,034, CI. 200-81.400.
Payton. Charles E.: See —
Coon. Julian B.; Fowler. James C; Payton, Charles E.; and Waters.
Kenneth H.. 4,391.336. CI. 175-45.000.
Pearl. David R.: See—
Gerber. Heinz J.; and Pearl, David R.. 4.391.168, CI 83-34.000
Pearlman. Samuel R.. to Becton Dickinson and Company. Assay for
free thyroid hormone. 4.391,795, CI. 424-1.000.
Pears, Gordon E. A., to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Coated
polyester films. 4,391.767. CI. 264-210.300.
Peck, Alan M.; Tutt, Kingsley J.; and Walter. Andrew G. N.. to USM
Corporation. Machine adapted for use in the manufacture of shoes.
4,391.011. CI. 12-I.OOB.
Peercy, Paul S.: See —
Land. Cecil E.; and Peercy. Paul S., 4,391,901, CI. 430-495.000.
Peet, Norton P.: See —
Alexander, Catherine A.; Cregge, Robert J.; and Peet, Norton P..
4.391.806. CI. 424-248.400.
Alexander. Catherine A.; Cregge. Robert J.; and Peet. Norton P..
4.391.807. CI. 424-248.400.
PEG Perego-Pines Deutschland GmbH: See —
Glaser, Dieter, 4.391,453. CI. 280-47.400.
Peil, William: See-
Brown, Thomas A.; and Peil. William. 4.392.081. CI. 315-46.00a
Pennwalt Corporation: See —
Radice. Peter F.. 4.392.178. CI. 361-233.000.
Perego. Lucio C. Packing container. 4.391.367. CI. 206-31 5.00R
Peries. Jean-Pierre: See —
Billon, Alain; Le Page. Jean-Francois; Peries, Jean-Pierre; and
Simandoux. Jean-Claude. 4.391.700. CI. 208-86.000.
Perkins. Henry T.; Saunders. Kim D.; and Green, Albert W , to United
Stales of America, Navy. Three-axis current meter. 4,391.136. CI.
73-189.000.
Perry. LaRelle T. Drill jig. 4,391.558. CI. 408-1 10.000.
Perske. Manfred: See—
Landrock, Jurgen B.; Perske. Manfred; and Tandjung. Halim S.,
4,392,097, CI. 318-696.000.
Persson, Ingemar P., to Nitro Nobel AB. Method of explosion-welding
rolling billets intended for package rolling. 4.391,403. CI 228-107.000.
Pesce, Eugene B.; and Krikava. James A. Water-alcohol injection
apparatus for ICE. 4,391.230. CI. I23-25.00E.
Peters. Arthur: See —
Brown, Richard P.; Barlow, George J.; and Peters, Arthur,
4,392.201. CI. 364-200.000.
Peters. Klaus-Jurgen: See —
Jaggle, Gunther; Peters, Klaus-Jurgen; and Riel, Klaus, 4,391,252,
CI. 123-454.000.
Petersen, Helge H.. to F. L. Smidth & Co. Method of conditioning
exhaust gases from coal firing. 4.391.207. CI. 110-342.000.
Petersen, Olfert H., to Slagteriernes Forskningsinstitut. Apparatus for
determining the properties of a material having plastic properties by
determining its density. 4,391,141, CI. 73-433.000.
Peterson, Francis C, to Illinois Tool Works, Inc. Centrifugal switching
system. 4.392,033. CI. 200-80.00R.
Pfeifer. Robert F.; and Trudel. Murray L.. to NCR Corporation.
Method for fabricating improved complementary metal oxide semi-
conductor devices. 4,391.650, CI. 148-1.500.
Pfeiffer, Doris: See —
Kuschel, Frank; Demus, Dietrich; Pfeiffer. Doris; and Deutscher.
Hans-Joachim, 4,391,730, CI. 252-299.100.
Pfeifie, Dieter: See —
Negele, Richard; and Pfeifie, Dieter, 4.391.476. CI. 308-207.00R.
PI 30
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Pfizer Inc.: See —
Harbert, Charles A.; Johnson, Michael R.; and Melvin, Lawrence
S., Jr.. 4.391.827. CI. 424-331.000.
Pflederer. Fred R.. to A. O. Smith Corporation. Hole reinforcement.
4.391,301. CI. 138-103.000.
Pham. Anh T.. to Chrysler France. Suspension device. 4,391.435, CI.
267-140.100.
Phelps Dodge Industries, Inc.: See —
Hilker, George D., 4,39 1 .848. CI. 427- 1 1 8.000.
Philip Morris. Incorporated: See —
Burnett, George H.; Claflin, Warren E.; Lanzillotti, Harry V.;
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and
Wayte, Alline R., 4.391,285, CI. 131-364.000.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See —
Capshew, Charles E., 4,391.736, CI. 252-429.00B.
Meister, John J.. 4,391,719, CI. 252-8.55D.
Phillips, Richard B., to International Paper Company. Low energy
TMP furnish of improved strength by ozonation and press drying.
4,391,670, CI. 162-12.000.
Piano. Renzo. to Fiat Auto S.p.A. Assembly separating a passenger
compartment from an engine compartment. 4,391,465. CI.
296-208.000.
Pickens, Robert C. Jr.; Thomas, Reese R.; and Somerville. Ronald, to
Ozite Corporation. Cut pile fabric with texturized loops. 4,391,866,
CI. 428-92.000.
Piechal, Andrei: See —
Wyszkowski, Jerzy; Panasiuk, Wladyslaw; Koprek, Stanislaw; and
Piechal, Andzei. 4.391.654, CI. 148-16.600.
Pietraschke, Roy. Solar heated grain drying system. 4,391,046. CI.
34-93.000.
Pilot Mannenhitsu Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Yoshizawa, Naomi; and Terashima, Akira. 4.392,244, CI.
455-79.000.
Pimlott, John R., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Chlorine cell
design for electrolyte series flow. 4,391,693, CI. 204-237.000.
Pinckney Molded Plastics, Inc.: See—
Stahl, Edward L.; and Kreeger, Elsmer W., 4,391,369, CI.
206-506.000.
Pioneer De- Icing Services, Inc.: See—
Filmyer, Wm. G.. 4,391,393, CI. 222-642.000.
Piramoon, Alireza; and Woodruff, Rebecca J., to Beckman Instruments,
Inc. Hanger for centrifuge buckets. 4,391,597. CI. 494-20.000.
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See —
Chang, Mike S. H.; and Berman, Michael F., 4,391,888, CI.
430-57.000.
Couper, Robert A.; and Denning, Bruce S., 4,392,197, CI.
364-200.000.
Pitzen, James F., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
Cleaning wiper. 4.391,014, CI. 15-231.000.
PIXE International Corporation: See —
Nelson, John W.; and Jensen, Bruno, 4,391,151, CI. 73-863.230.
Planteline, Pierre; and Machetel, Roger, to Groupement d'Interet
Econoique de Recherche et de Developpment PSA. Electronic
controller for controlling the air/fuel ratio of the mixture supplied to
an internal combustion engine. 4,391,251, CI. 123-440.000.
Plath, Jurgen: See —
Jeschke, Peter; and Plath, Jurgen, 4.391.392. CI. 222-598.000.
Plessey Overseas Limited: See —
Hesketh. Truman H., 4,392,221, CI. 370-54.000.
PLM AB: See—
Nilsson, Claes T., 4,391,861, CI. 428-35.000.
Plunkett, Luther C, Jr., to Lanier Business Products, Inc. Apparatus
for identifying a dictate station by providing an automatically gener-
ated sequence of signals and a manually entered sequence of signals.
4,392,218, CI. 369-29.000.
Pochon, Remy: See —
Polzer, Erich; Ruetz, Gottfried; Schmolz, Hubert; and Pochon,
Remy, 4,391,096, CI. 60-335.000.
Poclain: See —
Jaghon, Daniel, 4,391,341, CI. 18O-9.20R.
Poiiiton, David W., to Datak Corporation, The. Methods of making
adhesive articles and resulting products. 4,391,853, CI. 427-152.000.
Polaroid Corporation: See —
Kaplan, Jonathan I., 4,391,039, CI. 29-884.000.
Schwarzel, William C; and Taylor, Lloyd D., 4,391,895, CI.
430-215.000.
Pollock, James F.: See —
Bentley, Peter D.; and Pollock, James F., 4,392,049, CI.
219-401.000.
Polychrome Corporation: See —
Shimazu, Ken-ichi; and Deutsch, Albert, 4,391,894, CI.
430-154.000.
Polymer Corporation, The: See —
Scheetz, Howard A., 4,391,943, CI. 524-538.000.
Scheetz, Howard A., 4,391,951, CI. 525-166.000.
Scheetz, Howard A., 4,391,956, CI. 525-425.000.
Polzer, Erich; Ruetz, Gottfried; Schmolz, Hubert; and Pochon, Remy,
to Voith Getriebe KG. Hydrodynamic reversing transmission.
4.391,096. CI. 60-335.000.
Pomfret. Colin T.: See—
Greier. Josef; and Pomfret. Colin T.. 4,391.238, CI. 123-193.00C.
Pongor, Sandor: See —
Devenyi. Tibor; Bocsa, Klara K.; Kovats, Ferenc; Pongor. Sandor;
Szabolcsi, Gertrud; and Such, Mihaly, 4.391,839, CI. 426-626.000.
Porter-Bennett. David E.. to Toro Company. The. Powered ground
care implement. 4.391.041, CI. 30-296.00R.
Portz, Willi: See—
Kersting, Hans-Joachim; Wolfrum, Erhard; Portz, Willi; and
Strauss, Georg, 4,391,786, CI. 423-442.000.
Pote, Bruce M.: See —
Smith, Donald A.; and Pote, Bruce M., 4,391,561, CI. 414-218.000.
Powell, John M. Form tie. 4,391,429, CI. 249-84.000.
Powell Manufacturing Company, Inc.: See —
Wilson, Robert W., 4,391,084, CI. 56-27.500.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See—
Tamosauskas, Albert E.; and Temple, Chester S., 4,391,876, CI.
428-392.000.
Prager, Lee A.: See —
Lester, James N.; and Prager, Lee A., 4,392,089, CI. 315-313.000.
Precision Plumbing Products, Inc.: See —
Stipe, Lester E., 4.391.295. CI. 137-522.000.
Preisler, Eberhard; Hofmann, Bemhard; and Holzem, Johannes, to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for removing molybdenum from
aqueous salt solutions. 4,391,714, CI. 210-670.000.
Prest, William M., Jr.; and Roberts, Frederick J., Jr., to Xerox Corpora-
tion. Selectively altering the bulk properties of polymer structures.
4,391,537, CI. 400-144.200.
Price, Edgar E.: See —
Seachman, Ned J.; and Price, Edgar E., 4,392,142, CI. 346-1.100.
Price, John J., Jr., to Motorola, Inc. Logic select circuit. 4,392,067, CI.
307-475.000.
Price, Ronn; Brown, Gary; Muraski, Andrew A.; and Muraski, William
C, to U.S. Computer Systems, Inc. Apparatus and method for moni-
toring the arrival and duration of stay of a vehicle at a drive-in
window. 4,392,119, CI. 34O-38.00L.
Priebe, Fritz, to SMS Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft. Com-
bined hydraulic clamping and rotating saddle device on forging
presses. 4,391,122, CI. 72-481.000.
Prim, David F.; and Greiff, Carl D. Lumber marking system. 4,392,204,
CI. 364-478.000.
Process Development Corporation: See —
Colbum, William A., 4,391,411, CI. 241-1.000.
Procter & Gamble Company, The: See —
Bacon, £>ennis R.; and Bossu, Frank P., 4,391,723, CI. 252-90.000.
Bacon, Dennis R., 4,391,724, CI. 252-90.000.
Bossu, Frank P., 4,391,725, CI. 252-90.000.
Koster, Robertus J. C, 4,391,726, CI. 252-99.000.
Propylox: See —
Hardy, Nicolas; Lerot, Luc; and Walraevens, Rene, 4,391,753, CI.
549-525.000.
Pruett, Edwin C; Robertson, Kem B.; and Loughead, Tomas E., to
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Adminis-
tration. Satellite retrieval system. 4,391,423, CI. 244-161.000.
Prusik, Thaddeus: See —
Wang, Yu-Chang J.; Dursch Friedrich; O'Laughlin, Richard L.;
and Prusik, Thaddeus, 4,391,755, CI. 260-397.450.
PT Components, Inc.: See —
Min, Young K., 4,392,098. CI. 318-758.000.
Puccini. Sergio E.: See-
Simmons. Nathaniel; Magnusson, Stig; Puccini, Sergio E.;
McLaughlin, Donald W.; and Stelte. David J.. 4.392.223, CI.
370-63.000.
Puech. Claude: See—
Papuchon. Michel; and Puech, Claude, 4,391,486, CI. 350-96.140.
Pugh, Robert J., to Gestetner Manufacturing Limited. Magnetic brush
developer unit for photocopier. 4,391,503, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Pulp and Paper Research Institute of Canada: See —
Azamiouch, Mahmoud K., 4,391,671, CI. 162-30.100.
Purdum, William R., to Monsanto Company. Diesters of N-alkyl substi-
tuted amino methyl phosphonic acid useful as herbicides. 4,391,625,
CI. 71-86.000.
Puryear, John W., to Brunswick Corporation. Silent, anti-reverse actua-
tor mechanism. 4.391,418, CI. 242-84.20A.
Quaker Oats Company. The: See —
Akerberg. Denis W.; and Watson, David D., 4,391,946, 01.
524-849.000.
Queen's University at Kingston: Seie —
Wolfe, Saul; and Shaw, Chia-Cheng, 4,391,975, CI. 544-90.000.
Quell, Peter: See—
Forster, Siegfried; Quell, Peter; and Jaegers, Huber, 4,391,227, CI.
122-16.000.
Quest Medical, Inc.: See —
Thompson, Thomas C, 4,391,598, CI. 604-65.000.
R.I.A.T.: See^
Grenier, Yves, 4,391,109, CI. 69-30.000.
R.N. L.I. (Trading) Limited: See—
Brinton, Michael B. J.; Barnes, John; and Chandler, Peter D.,
4,391,239, CI. 123-198.00E.
Radice, Peter F., to Pennwalt Corporation. Apparatus for the rapid
continuous corona poling of polymeric films. 4,392,178, CI.
361-233.000.
Raether, Wolfgang: See —
Blume, Ernst; Schaper, Wolfgang; Raether, Wolfgang; and Ditt-
mar, Walter, 4,391,805, CI. 424-246.000.
Raisson, Gerard: See —
Bonnor, Yannick; Raisson, Gerard; and Honnorat, Yves, 4,391,772,
CI. 419-23.000.
Ralston Purina Company: See —
Ederle, John A.; Hoer, Ralph A.; and Irwin, George H., 4,391,840,
CI. 426-641.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 31
Ramot University Authority for Applied Research & Industrial Devel-
opment Ltd.: See — ^^
Konforti, Nairn; and Marom, Emanuel, 4,392,155, CI. 358-106.000.
Rand, Robert W.; Snow, Harold D.; Elliott, David G.; and Haskms,
Glenn M. Induction heating apparatus for use in causing necrosis of
neoplasm. 4,392,040, CI. 219-10.710.
Rasekhi, Houshang: See—
Nelson, Alfred M.; and Rasekhi, Houshang, 4,392,179, CI.
361-234.000.
Rassmann, Christoph: See— .
Hauschopp, Alois; Schneider, Hans-Dieter; and Rassmann, Chns-
toph, 4,391,471, CI. 299-43.000.
Rausing, Hans, to Tetra Pak Developpement SA. Closing arrangement.
4.391.385. CI. 220-307.000. „ ,. . ,
Raymond, Leonard S.. to United States of America. Energy. Method of
preparing high-temperature-stable thin-film resistors. 4.391,846, CI.
427-99.000.
Raynes, Edward P.: See—
Harrison. Kenneth J.; Raynes, Edward P.; Saunders, Frances C;
and Thompson, David J., 4.391,489, CI. 350-349.000.
Raytheon Company: See—
Day, William J.; and Weiss, Bernard J., 4,392,038, CI. 219-10.55D.
RCA Corporation: See-
Carlson, David J., 4,392,022, CI. 179-2.0TV.
Cowden. James J, 4,391,696, CI. 204-297.00W.
Kaganowicz, Grzegorz; and Robinson, John W., 4,391,843, CI.
427-41.000.
Pankove, Jacques I.; and Wu, Chung P., 4,392,01 1, CI. 136-261.000.
Rinehart, James K.; Willis, Donald H.; and Luz, David W..
4,392,090, CI. 315-411.000.
Schade, Otto H., Jr., 4,392,112, CI. 330-252.000.
Steigmeier, Edgar F.; and Auderset, Heinnch, 4,391,524, CI.
356-338.000. ^
Wang, Chih C; and Bates, Ronald F., 4,391,720, CI. 252-49.600.
Ziegel, Douglas H., 4,391,520, CI. 356-154.000.
Read, Stuart W. Garment. 4,390,996, CI. 2-70.000.
Rebeschi, Thomas J.; and Kapoor, Mohan L., to United States of
America, Army. Sustainer circuit for plasma display panels.
4,392,084, CI. 315-169.400.
Red Fox Industries, Inc.: See-
Crosby, Gary A., 4,391,703, CI. 210-151.000.
Reed, Lehman T., to Midway Fishing Tool Co. Geothermal well head
and actuator assembly. 4,391,324, CI. 166-70.000.
Reed, Robert L.: See-
Palm, John W.; and Reed, Robert L., 4.391,790, CI. 423-574.00R.
Reichmann, Richard H.: See—
Campbell, Jay E.; Reichmann, Richard H.; and Lehmann, Li k.,
4,391,402, CI. 227-121.000.
Reinert, A. Joe, to Conoco Inc. Falling shot heating method and appa-
ratus. 4,391,228, CI. 122-28.000.
Reinhard, Max; and Kornmayer, Horst, to Colortronic Reinhard & Co.
KG Method and apparatus for metering particulate material.
4,391,140, CI. 73-432.00R.
Reiser Wolf: Sec —
Stetter, Jorg; Reiser, Wolf; and Faust, Wilfried, 4,391,626, CI.
71-88.000.
Reiss, Garry K.: See-
Wood, Thomas D.; Reiss, Garry K.; and Overiy, Larry L.,
4,391,595, CI. 474-33.000.
Reiter, Rudolf. Cone crusher. 4,391,414, CI. 241-213.000.
Reitz, Gunther; Jakobs, Karlhans; and Boehmke, Gunther, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. Sulphonated mono-hydric diaryl phenol formal-
dehyde condensates, their preparation, their use as dispersing agents
and formulations containing them. 4,391,718, CI. 252-8.700.
Rempfler, Hermann; and Bohner, Beat, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
2-[4-(6-Haloquinoxalinyl-2-oxy)phenoxy]propionic acid esters.
4,391,628, CI. 71-92.000.
Renaudin, Jean-Pierre: See—
Lecron, Jacques; Manera, Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre, 4,391,618, CI. 65-1.000.
Remfrew, Andrew H. M., to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. An-
thraquinone compounds. 4,391,754, CI. 260-380.000.
Rengstorfr, Roy H. Spectacle frame. 4,391,498, CI. 351-121.000.
Reph Arthur C, to IngersoU-Rand Company. Column insert beanng
housing. 4,391,475, CI. 384-226000.
Republic Steel Corporation: See—
Shepard, George A.; and Schillawski, Philip C. 4,391,685, CI.
204-145.00R. _ ^ u ,
Velmin, Rolf; Kovatch, Michael S.; and Mautz, Gus H., Jr.,
4,391,674, CI. 201-41.000.
Reuter, Gerhard: See— ^ u j ^
Serbent, Harry; Schlebusch, Detlev; Reuter, Gerhard; and
Schnabel, Wolfram, 4,391,583. CI. 432-4.000.
Rey, Thomas J. Electro-acoustic flowmeter. 4.391,150, CI. 73-861.290.
Reynolds Metals Company: See— . ^ ^ a
Thurston, Michael E.; Cassada, William A., Ill; and Schardein,
Daniel J., 4,391,655, CI. 148-20.600.
Rheinmetall GmbH: See—
Koine, Richard, 4,391,180, CI. 89-129.00R.
Rhone-Poulenc Agrochimie: See— . ^,„ o-,-, r^x a-.a iiu.iw\
Boxler Dena L.; and Chen, Albert C, 4,391,823, CI. 424-306.000.
Fahmy, Mohamed A., 4,391,760, CI. 260-961.000.
Rice, Dennis A., to Deere & Company. Cover plate for access opening
4,391,065, CI. 49-465.000.
Richards, Jack L.: See—
Maier, Thomas O.; and Richards, Jack L.. 4,391,896, CI.
430-223.000.
Ricoh Company, Ltd.: See—
Koide, Hiroshi, 4.391,506, CI. 355-8.000.
Mori, Goro; and Ogura, Masaaki, 4,391,507, CI. 355-14.00R.
Shibusawa, Mitsuo; and Ogawa, Toshiyuki, 4,391,508, CI. 355-
14.0CU.
Rieger, Franz: See —
Linder, Ernst; Maurer, Helmut; Muller, Klaus; and Rieger, Franz.
4,391,691, CI. 204-408.000.
Riel, Klaus: See—
Jaggle, Gunther; Peters, Klaus-Jurgen; and Riel, Klaus, 4,391,252,
CI. 123-454.000.
Rieland, Ronald L. Scaffold safety pin. 4,391,348. CI. 182-119.000.
Riessberger, Klaus: See—
Theurer, Josef; Hansmann, Johann; and Riessberger, Klaus,
4,391,134, CI. 73-146.000.
Rijckaert, Albert M. A.; de Niet, Edmond; and Beun, Jacobus P., to
U.S. Philips Corporation. Magnetic tape recording and/or reproduc-
ing apparatus with automatic head positioning. 4,392,163, CI.
360-76.000.
Riley, Eric K.; Smith, Colin D.; Yates, Garry J.; and Shepherd, Noms
W to Air Products and Chemicals, Inc. Method of operating a
continuous ceramic kiln. 4,391.585, CI. 432-23.000.
Riley, Wayne C: See— .,„ ^,
Wicke. Charles A.; and Riley, Wayne C, 4,391,459. CI.
285-238 000.
Rinehart. James K.; Willis, Donald H.; and Luz, David W., to RCA
Corporation. Remote responsive television receiver ferroresonant
power supply. 4,392,090, CI. 315-411.000.
Risman, Per O., to P.O.R. Microtrans AB. Dielectnc heating applica-
tor. 4,392,039, CI. 219-10.55A.
Ritchey, Charles R: See— . „ u
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; and Ritchey,
Charles R., 4,391,799, CI. 424-132.000.
RM Industrial Products Company, Inc.: See-
Jo. Byeong H.; and Zucker, Jerry, 4,391,875. CI. 428-378.000.
Roach, Donald E., II, to Berwind Corporation. Rotating paddle bin
level indicator. 4.392.032, CI. 200-61.210.
Robaldo, Aldo M. Synnge for applying adhesive resin to the junctions
of tennis racket netting. 4,391,391, CI. 222-478.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See—
Eheim, Frahz. 4,391,257. CI. 123-503.000.
Jaggle, Gunther; Peters, Klaus-Jurgen; and Riel, Klaus. 4.39I.25Z.
CI. 123-454.000.
Latsch, Reinhard, 4,391,248, CI. 123-425.000.
Linder, Ernst; Maurer, Helmut; Muller, Klaus; and Rieger. Franz,
4,391,691, CI. 204-408.000.
Paule, Kurt; Schadlich, Fritz; Gerschner, Martin; and Homung,
Friedrich, 4,392,093, CI. 318-245.000.
Schleupen. Richard, 4,391,262, CI. 123-618.000.
van Zanten, Anton, 4,391,126, CI. 73-35.000.
Roberts, Frederick J., Jr.: See- ^ , . , , , . ,q, «,, r-i
Prest, William M., Jr.; and Roberts. Fredenck J., Jr., 4,391,537, CI.
400-144.200.
Roberts, Richard D.; and Hoffman, Lester J., to Westinghouse Electnc
Corp. Vehicle propulsion control apparatus and method. 4.392.091,
CI. 3 i 8-52.000.
° Safiiz. Sonio J.;*aiid Roberts, Victor C. 4.391,148, CI. 73-861.250.
Robertshaw Controls Company: See-
Payne. Frank, 4,392,034, CI. 200-81.400.
Robertson, Kem B.: See— ^ , -r c
Pruett Edwin C; Robertson, Kem B.; and Loughead, Tomas t..
4,391,423, CI. 244-161.000.
Robinson, John W.: See— .. ,„, ci /-i
Kaganowicz, Grzegorz; and Robinson, John W., 4,391.843, ci
427-41.000.
Robinson, Mark L.: See— .... , ,«, ^ia n\
Kelly, Thomas J.; and Robinson, Mark L.. 4,391,634, CI.
75-124.000.
Rockwell International Corporation: See—
Hallford, Ben R., 4,392,250, CI. 455-327.000.
Hallford, Ben R, 4,392,251, CI. 455-327.000. „,„._.
Sutherland, Ray; and Wood, Mark S., 4,391,139, CI. 73-273.000.
'^'^RuxVorSvidsTand Stewart, Alex D., 4.392,095, CI. 318-254,000
Rogers Jack S.; and Sanders, Kenneth H., to Milliken Research Corpo-
ration. Meat packaging shroud. 4,391,871, CI. 428-219.000.
Rogers, Ronald A.; Wnght, Ansel J.; and Wright, William H., to Master
Addresser Company. Method for addressing cards and envelopes
4,391,194, CI. 101-471.000.
Rohatgi, Naresh K.: See— ^ «^ a -Lay lt^ n\ aa.
Kalvinskas, John J.; and Rohatgi, Naresh K., 4.391.609. CI. 44-
l.OSR.
Rohm and Haas Company; See— ■,-,r\nn\
Memon. Nazir A.; and Myers. Cielo S., 4,391,938, CI. 524-270.000.
Rolls-Royce Limited: See—
Goddard, John, 4,391,684, CI. 204-129.400.
Speak, Trevor H., 4,391,565, CI. 415-189.000.
Romero, Eduardo: See— i u c
Rotolico, Anthony J.; Romero, Eduardo; and Lyons, John t.,
4,391,860, CI. 427-423.000.
PI 32
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Rosel, Hans-Dieter, to J. S. Staedtler KG. Apparatus for supplying and
regulating a wnting medium to the writing unit of a writing or
drawmg machine. 4.392,147. CI. 346-14O.00R.
Rosemount Inc.: See —
Grindheim, Earl A.. 4,391,146, CI. 73-718.000.
Rosemount Office Systems, Inc.: See—
Mollenkopf, Lloyd C; and Branson. Daniel J., 4,391,073, CI.
52-241.000.
RTOcnbaum. Georges; Grollier, Jean F.; and Cotteret, Jean, to L'Oreal.
Hydroxyl derivatives of benzaldehyde for coloring keratin fibres in
the absence of oxidizing agent. 4,391,603. CI. 8-424.000.
Rosenberg. Harry: See—
Weirich, Walter; Dettmers, Michael; Becker, Kunibert; and Rosen-
berg. Harry. 4,391.181, CI. 91-29.000.
Rosenberry, George M., to General £lectric Company. Dynamoelec-
tric machine stator having articulated amorphous metal components
4,392,072, CI. 310-216.000.
Rosenberry, George M.. Jr., to General Electric Company. Dynamo-
electric machine stator having concentric amorphous metal lamina-
tions and method of making same. 4.392.073. CI. 310-216.000.
Rosenthal, Joel W., to Chevron Research Company. Coal liquefaction
process. 4.391.699. CI. 208-8.0LE.
Rosinski. Edward J.; and Rubin. Mae K.. to Mobil Oil Corporation
Preparation of ZSM-I2 type zeolites. 4,391,785, CI. 423-329.000.
Rostoker, Norman, to Maxwell Laboratories, Inc. Method and appara-
tus for accelerating charged particles. 4,392,111, CI. 328-237.000.
Roth. Ronald H.: See—
Monfredo. Joseph R.; and Roth, Ronald H., 4,391,589, CI
433-63.000.
Rothenberg, Allan: See-
Tyler, Truman V.; and Sprague. Robert B.. 4,391,712, CI
210-652.000.
Rotolico, Anthony J.; Romero, Eduardo; and Lyons, John E., to Eutec-
tic Corporation. Device for the controlled feeding of powder mate-
rial. 4,391.860. CI. 427-423.000.
Roussel, Philippe: See—
Fankhauser, Franz; van der Zypen, Eugen; and Roussel, Philippe,
4,391.275, CI. 128-303.100.
Rowden. George A.: See-
Jackson. Ian D.; Berry. Derek; Rowden. George A.; and Dillev
Malcolm, 4.391.711, CI. 210-634.000.
Rowell, John M.: See—
Feldmann, William L.; Rowell. John M.; and Schmidt. Paul H
4,391,657. CI. 148-133.000.
Rozmus. Walter J., to Kelsey-Hayes Company. Method and apparatus
for preventing lubricant ttow from a vacuum source to a vacuum
chamber. 4.391,614, CI. 55-2.000.
Rubin, Mae K.: See—
Rosinski, Edward J.; and Rubin, Mae K., 4,391,785 CI
423-329.000. . . . j. v,i.
Rubin, Michael D., to Ford Aerospace & Communications Corpora-
tion. Circuit for reducing voltage stress across a transformer.
4.392.173. CI. 361-35.000.
RUD-Kettenfabrik Rieger & Dietz GmbH u. Co.: See—
Weidler. Erhard A.. 4,391,313, CI. 152-171.000.
Rudgard, Ingemar: See—
and Rudgard. Ingemar, 4,392.130. CI.
Gottfried; Schmolz, Hubert; and Pochon,
Lundstrom, Jan-Erik
340-747.000.
Ruetz, Gottfried: See—
Polzer, Erich; Ruetz
Remy. 4,391,096. CI. 60-335.000.
Rule. Mark: See-
Hook, Richard J.; and Rule. Mark. 4.391.985, CI. 562-414 000
Runnels. Robert W.; Wagenaar. Loren B.; Luke, Louis E.; and Bresna-
han, Thomas P., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Condenser-type
electrical bushing with central electrode aligning wedgini? blocks
4.392,015. CI. 174-143.000. 6 6 "v- >
Runsten, Bengt W.. to AB Europa Film. Apparatus in electro deposi-
tion plants, particulariy for use in making master phonoeraph re-
cords. 4.391.694. CI. 204-273.000.
Ruoslahti. Erkki I.: See—
Engvall. Eva S.; and Ruoslahti. Erkki I., 4,391,749, CI. 260-123.700.
Rupprecht, Georg: See—
Patashnick, Harvey; and Rupprecht, Georg, 4,391,338, CI. 177-
210.0FP.
Russell, Jerry E. Mechanical remote control device for a television
receiver. 4,392,256, CI. 455-354.000.
Ruszala, Ferdinand A., to Ashland Oil, Inc. Oxydehydrogenation of
isobutyric acid and its lower alkyl esters. 4,391,990. CI. 562-599.000.
Rutter, Henry A., to National Hydro-Hoist Company. Gunnel support
system for use with a boat lift. 4.391.550, CI. 4O5-7.000.
Ruxton, David S.; and Stewart, Alex D., to Rodine Limited. Method of
and apparatus for generating a unique index mark from the commuta-
tion signal of a DC. bnishless motor. 4,392,095. CI. 318-254.000
Ryckaert, Andre'; and Servais, Michel, to Solvay & Cie. Stabilized
compositions of chlorinated solvents. 4.392.000, CI. 570-104 000
Ryobi Ltd.: See—
Ishii. Koji; Shinmoto, Takahiko; and Maehara, Kenso 4 391 193
CI. 101-415.100. ..,-.,
Rys-Sikora, John, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Low
density closed-cell foamed articles from ethylene copolymer/vinyl or
vmylidene halide blends. 4,391,923. CI. 521-96.000.
S. C. Johnson & Son, Inc.: See-
van Lit, Klaas J., 4,391,781, CI. 422-125.000.
Saab-Scania Aktiebolag: See —
Claesson, Dick V., 4,391,258, CI. 123-508.000.
Saar, David A.; and Walter, Richard T., to Black & Decker Inc.
Method of charging batteries and apparatus therefor. 4,392,101, CI
320-20.000.
Sach-Systemtechnik GmbH: See—
Lutz, Dieter, 4,392,134, CI. 340-825.310.
Sachs- Systemtechnik GmbH: See—
Lutz, Dieter, 4,391,048, CI. 36-28.000.
Saeki, Shinichi: See—
Tamamura, Junichi; Yasuda, Mamoru; Hosoda, Motomi; and Saeki,
Shinichi, 4,392,025, CI. 179-1 ll.OOR.
Safekeeper Systems, Inc.: See —
Mitchell, Ernst K.; and Terry, Richard H., 4,391,204. CI
109-39.000. . . , . «-i.
Sagawa, Akio: See —
Suzuki, Masayoshi; and Sagawa, Akio, 4,392,069, CI. 307-252.00A
Saino, Tetsushi: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Aoyagi, Takaaki; Shirai, Tadashi; Nishizawa,
Rinzo; Suzuki, Masao; and Saino, Tetsushi, 4,391,986, CI.
562-444.000.
St. Clair, David J., to Shell Oil Company. Asymmetric block copoly-
mers and corresponding adhesive formulations. 4,391,949, CI
525-99.000.
Sainz, Antonio J.; and Roberts, Victor C, to National Research Devel-
opment Corporation. Methods and apparatus for measuring the
cross-sectional area of a duct and the volume flow rate of fluid in the
duct. 4,391,148, CI. 73-861.250.
Saito, Junichi: See —
Aya, Masahiro; Saito, Junichi; Yasui, Kazuomi; Kakabu, Shinzo;
Kamochi, Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko, 4,391,629, CI.
71-94.000.
Saito, Koichi; and Ohara, Osamu, to Kuraray Company, Limited.
Aqueous dispersion type coating compositions with an improved
vibration-damping characteristic. 4.391.857. CI. 427-385.500
Saji, Hideo: See —
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Saji, Hideo, 4,391,244.
CI. 123-339.000.
Sakai, Kiyoshi: See—
Mabuchi, Minoni; Sakai, Kiyoshi; Ishikawa, Shozo; Egashira, Yuji-
and Kitahara, Makoto, 4,391,889, CI. 430-59.000.
Sakai, Masaru: See—
Kawamura, Temaki; Harada, Nobuhiko; Komatsu, Yukihiko; and
Sakai, Masaru, 4,391,016, CI. 15-302.000.
Sakai, Sigeo: See—
Shimizu, Hiroshi; Sakai, Sigeo; Matsuda, Fumihiko; and Matsu-
moto, Reiko, 4,391,649, CI. 127-46.200.
Sakharov, Viktor P.: See—
Pasmannik, Vitaly I.; and Sakharov, Viktor P., 4,392,079. CI
315-5.390.
Sakraida, Gerard J., Jr. Log splitting head. 4,391,312, CI. 144-193.00E.
Sakuraba, Yasuya: See —
Takematsu, Tetsuo; Isogawa, Takayuki; and Sakuraba, Yasuya.
4,391,631, CI. 71-118.000. '
Salsky, Jerome; Janis, Patrick K.; and Branen, Kenneth E., to United
States Tennis Gut Association, Inc. String for sports rackets
4,391,088. CI. 57-234.000.
Salvagnini. Guido, to Salvagnini Transferica S.p.A. Automatic punch-
ing machine. 4,391,123, CI. 72-464.000.
Salvagnini Transferica S.p.A.: See —
Salvagnini, Guido, 4,391,123, CI. 72-464.000.
Sand and Sea Corporation: See —
Deer, Carmine A.; and Cacossa, Frank G., 4,391,647, CI.
106-115.000.
Sanders, Kenneth H.: See —
Rogers, Jack S.; and Sanders, Kenneth H., 4,391,871,- CI.
428-219.000.
Sandstrom, Donald R.; and Lytle, Farrel W., to Guardsman Chemicals,
Inc. System and method of migratory animal identification by fluores-
cence spectroscopy of element coded implanted tags, and tags used
therein. 4,392,236, CI. 378-045.000.
Sansone, Eugene A., to. Singer Company, The. Self compensating
optoelectronic ply and edge detector for sewing machine. 4,391,215,
CI. 112-275.000.
Sarcia, Domenico S., to CVI Incorporated. Fluidic cryogenic refrigera-
tor. 4,391,103, CI. 62-6.000.
Saruwatari, Shigeto, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Battery
connecting device. 4,391,882, CI. 429-96.000.
Sasaki, Kouji: See —
Kuwabara, Kouji; Sugawara, Hiroyuki; Shirakura, Toshiharu;
Sasaki, Kouji; and Takemori, Satoshi. 4,391,519, CI. 356-153.000.
Sassano, Daniel R., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Low viscosity
polyester coating compositions. 4,391,947, CI. 525-11.000.
Sato, Takeshi; and Suzaki, Shunichi. to Kabushiki Kaisha Nichidenshi
Technics. Method and apparatus for compensating for astigmatism in
electron beam devices. 4,392,054, CI. 250-307.000.
Sato, Yoichi: See—
Nishikawa. Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama, Toshihiko-
Takaoka, Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, 4,391,342, Cl!
180-143.000.
Sauer, Don R., to National Semiconductor Corporation. AM Stereo
carrier reinsertion. 4,392,016, Cl. I79-1.0GS.
Saunders, Frances C: See-
Harrison, Kenneth J.; Raynes, Edward P.; Saunders, Frances C-
and Thompson, David J., 4,391,489, CI. 350-349.000.
Saunders, Kim D.: See —
Perkins, Henry T.; Saunders, Kim D.; and Green, Albert W.,
4.391,136, Cl. 73-189.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 33
Savage, Bernard J. Band device for retaining a tire on a wheel rim.
4,391,317, Cl. 152-330.0RF.
Savoca, Diane L.: See —
Lakin, Willis M.; Goodman, Faith L.; and Savoca, Diane L.,
4,391,064, Cl. 46-130.000.
Sawada, Hiroshi; and Demura, Takayuki, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Air-fuel ratio control apparatus. 4,391,256, Cl.
123-489.000.
Saxton, Richard L. Pay telephone with sanitized tissue dispenser.
4,392,028. Cl. 179-185.000.
Sayles. David C, to United States of America, Army. Thermolysis of
tetraalkylammonium borohydrides to bis(tetraalkylammonium)
decahydrodecaboranes. 4,391,993, Cl. 568-4.000.
Saylor, Arthur D.; and Habegger. Henry L.. to Habegger International.
Pipe patching clamp. 4,391,300, Cl. 138-99.000.
Scala, Luciano C; and Cargnel, Louis A., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Electrophoretic coating of epoxy resins from non-aqueous
systems. 4,391,933, Cl. 523-454.000.
Schaad, William J.; Black, Charies E., Ill; and Halstead, Raymond T..
to Indak Manufacturing Corp. Push button switch having latching
spring arm molded on plastic casing. 4.392,029. Cl. 20O-5.00B.
Schaar, Lothar, to Heye, Hermann. Machine for the production of
hollow articles in at least one multiple mold. 4,391,578, Cl.
425-525.000.
Schade, Otto H., Jr., to RCA Corporation. Low drift amplifier.
4,392,112, Cl. 330-252.000.
Schadlich, Fritz: See—
Paule, Kurt; Schadlich, Fritz; Gerschner, Martin; and Homung,
Friedrich, 4,392.093, Cl. 318-245.000.
Schadt, Martin: See—
Boiler, Arthur; Schadt, Martin; and Villiger, Alois, 4,391,731, Cl.
252-299.620.
Schaefer, Joy M.: See-
Das, Narayan; and Schaefer, Joy M., 4,391,652. Cl. 148-6.15R.
Schafer. Ewald; and Jung, Harald, to Karl Otto Braun K.G. Wound
dressing. 4,391,106, Cl. 66-193.000.
Schaming, Edward J. Ionic strip coater. 4,391,219, Cl. 118-630.000.
Schantz, Socrates J., to Schantz & Sons, Inc. Basement water dram
cove. 4,391,071, Cl. 52-169.500.
Schantz & Sons, Inc.: See—
Schantz, Socrates J., 4,391,071, Cl. 52-169.500.
Schaper. Wolfgang: See—
Blume. Ernst; Schaper. Wolfgang; Raether. Wolfgang; and Ditt-
mar, Walter, 4,391.805, Cl. 424-246.000.
Schardein. Daniel J.: See—
Thurston, Michael E.; Cassada, William A., Ill; and Schardein,
Daniel J., 4,391,655, Cl. 148-20.600.
Scheetz, Howard A., to Polymer Corporation, The. UV Stabilized
nylon 6. 4,391,943, Cl. 524-538.000.
Scheetz, Howard A, to Polymer Corporation, The. Nylon 6 with
improved wear life. 4,391,951, Cl. 525-166.000.
Scheetz, Howard A., to Polymer Corporation, The. Impact modified
nylon 6. 4,391,956, Cl. 525-425.000.
Schering Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Vorbruggen, Helmut, 4,391,814, Cl. 424-272.000.
Scherrer, Herbert: See—
Muller, Michael; Scherrer, Herbert; and Kagi, Erwin, 4,391,536,
Cl. 400-144.200.
Schick, Karl G.: See—
Huber, Calvin O.; Schick, Karl G.; and Cobum, Joel T., 4,391,775,
Cl. 422-68.000.
Schild, Rolf; Melrose, Denis G.; and Hawkins, Brian M., to Huntleigh
Medical Ltd. Ventilated body support. 4.391.009. Cl. 5-453.000.
Schillawski, Philip C: See—
Shepard. George A.; and Schillawski. Philip C, 4,391,685, Cl.
204-145.00R.
Schilling, Albert; and Schob, Wolfgang, to Carl Zeiss-Stiftung. Adjust-
ment device for a pancratic objective of a stereomicroscope.
4,391,496, Cl. 350-519.000.
Schin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishihara, Toshinobu; Yamamoto, Akira; and Taguchi, Kenichi,
4,391,984, Cl. 560-236.000.
Schlebusch, Detlev: See—
Serbent, Harry; Schlebusch, Detlev;
Schnabel, Wolfram, 4,391,583, Cl. 432-4,000.
Schleupen, Richard, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Ignition system for an
internal combustion engine. 4,391,262, Cl. 123-618.000.
Schmelzbasaltwerk Kalenbom, Dr. Ing. Mauritz KG: See-
Kramer, Wilhelm, 4.391,664. Cl. 156-71.000.
Schmid, Helmut; Bock, Martin; and Kampf, Gunther. to Original
Hanau Heraeus GmbH. Test apparatus for determining resistance to
light and weather influences. 4,391,522, Cl. 356-326.000.
Schmidt. Delf: See— , o l j
Baumgarten, Jorg; Frommer. Werner; Schmidt. Delf; Schmidt.
Friedrich; and Munnecke, Douglas M., 4,391,887, Cl. 435-42.000.
Schmidt, Friedrich: See— ,, -, u j
Baumgarten, Jorg; Frommer, Werner; Schmidt, Delf; Schmidt,
Friedrich; and Munnecke, Douglas M., 4,391,887, Cl. 435-42.000.
Schmidt, Henry, Jr., to Industrial Filter & Pump Mfg. Co. Filter cake
control method and apparatus. 4,391,709, Cl. 210-332.000.
Schmidt, Karl: See— ,_ .j „ ,
Keller, Wolfgang; Grassmann, Hans-Christian; and Schmidt, Karl,
4,392,230, Cl. 373-139.000.
Schmidt, Paul H.: See— ,. ,. .^ „ , „
Feldmann, William L.; Rowell, John M.; and Schimdt, Paul H..
4,391,657, Cl. 148-133.000.
Reuter, Gerhard; and
Schmiegel, Klaus K.: See —
Mills, Jack; Schmiegel, Klaus K.; and Shaw. Walter N.. 4,391.826,
Cl. 424-324.000.
Schmitter, Ernst; Birzele, Paul; Buchmann, Klaus; Geitz, Gerhard;
Will, Bemhard; and Beifuss, Wolfgang, to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft. Fault-tolerant system employing multi-microcomputers using
two-out-of-three majority decision. 4,392,199. Cl. 364-200.000.
Schmitz, Peter. Apparatus for cutting swivel-bending and press-bend-
ing sheet metal and similar materials. 4,391,119, Cl. 72-384.000.
Schmolz, Hubert: See—
Polzer, Erich; RueU, Gottfried; Schmolz, flubert; and Pochon,
Remy, 4,391,096, Cl. 60-335.000.
Schnabel, Wolfram: See—
Serbent, Harry; Schlebusch, Detlev; Reuter, Gerhard; and
Schnabel, Wolfram, 4,391,583, Cl. 432-4.000.
Schneider, Hans-Dieter: See—
Hauschopp, Alois; Schneider, Hans-Dieter; and Rassmann, Chris-
toph, 4.391.471. Cl. 299-43.000.
Schnier, Erhard. Baffle for heating pipes. 4.391,323, Cl. 165-183.000.
Schob, Wolfgang: See-
Schilling, Albert; and Schob, Wolfgang, 4,391,496, Cl. 350-519.000.
Scholten, Joseph J. F.: See-
Don, Johannes A.; and Scholten, Joseph J. F.. 4,392,001, Cl
585-269.000.
Scholz, Klaus H., to Boeing Company, The. Positioning and control
system for fan thrust reverser cowls in a turbofan engine. 4,391,409,
Cl. 239-265.290.
Schomakers, Hans. Process for dyeing textile fabric: mechanical treat-
ment to promote foaming in fabric before steaming. 4,391,604, Cl.
8-477.000.
Schovee, John R. Method, apparatus and article for forming a picture
frame. 4,391,054, Cl. 40-154.000.
Schreurs, Petrus H. M.; and Verhelst, Willem F., to Akzona Incorpo-
rated. Process for the suspension (CO)polymerization of vinyl chlo-
ride. 4,391,962, Cl. 526-200.000.
Schubert & Salzer: See—
Billner, Werner; and Bock. Erich, 4,391,089. Cl. 57-261.000.
Schulte, Heinz, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Method for manufactur-
ing integrated dynamic RAM one-transistor storage cells. 4,391,032,
Cl. 29-571.000.
Schulze, Helmut: See-
Wick, Gerhard; and Schulze, Helmut, 4,391,964. Cl. 528-74.500.
Schundehutte. Karl H.: See—
Kruckenberg. Winfried; Schundehutte. Kari H.; and Hederich.
Volker. 4.391,606. Cl. 8-525.000.
Schwaier. Anita: See—
Lorenz, Peter; and Schwaier, Anita, 4,391,796, Cl. 424-9.000.
Schwartz, Ellen S.; Tincher, Cline A.; and Maxwell, Jerrold F., to
BASF Wyandotte Corporation. Water-based low fo4m hydraulic
fluid employing 2-ethylhexanol defoamer. 4,391,722, Cl. 252-73.000.
Schwarzel, William C; and Taylor, Lloyd D., to Polaroid Corporation.
Diffusion control layers for diffusion transfer photographic film.
4,391,895. Cl. 430-215.000.
Schwenker. Robert O.: See—
Homg, Cheng T.; Schwenker, Robert O.; and Tsang, Paul J.,
4,392,149, Cl. 357-49.000.
SCM Corporation: See-
Pate. Daniel R., 4.391.838. Cl. 426-606 000.
Scott Paper Company: See—
Drach. John E.. 4.391.878. Cl. 428-479.600.
Scott. Steven W., to General Electric Company. Thermoplastic mold-
ing composition. 4.391.954. Cl. 525-439.000.
Scourtes. George, to Allen Group Inc.. The. Transmission testing
apparatus and method. 4.391.131. Cl. 73-118.000.
Seachman. Ned J.; and Price. Edgar E., to Xerox Corporation. Ink jet
droplet sensing method and apparatus. 4,392,142, Cl. 346-1.100.
Seagraves, Steven G.. Sr.: See —
Gwathney. Kenneth W.; Gann. David L.; Seagraves. Steven G.,
Sr.; Fenner. Gary R.; and Fenner, Gordon H.. 4.391,188. Cl.
100-229.00A.
Sealectro Corporation: See—
Wessel. Kenneth R.. 4,391,479, Cl. 339-18.00C.
Sears. Michael L.. to Transaction Technology. Inc. Off-hook telephone
sensing system. 4.392.023. CI. 179-2.0DP.
Secon, Edward, to Sherwood Corporation, The. Shelving console
furniture. 4,391,378, CI. 211-187.000.
Secor, Arthur D.; and Secor, Jerome G., to Great Lakes Industries, Inc.
Expansible chuck assembly. 4,391,451, Cl. 279-2.0OA.
Secor, Jerome G.: See —
Secor, Arthur D.; and Secor, Jerome G., 4.391.451. Cl. 279-2.00A
Seelig. Johann: See —
Mehdom. Frank R.; and Seelig. Johann, 4,391.025. Cl. 28-289.000
Seggio. Gianfranco. Anti-skid device for vehicle wheels. 4,391.316, Cl.
152-213.0OA.
Seitz Alan F., to Data Motion, Incorporated. Manually assemblable
sheet-feed tractor. 4.391.399. Cl. 226-74.000.
Sekigawa, Tadahiko: See— .. ,. .
Kamegaya, Takeo; Sekigawa. Tadahiko; Kurakami. Hiroshi; and
Suzuki. Yoshiro. 4.392.075. Cl. 313-584.000
Self, Robert W.; and Whillock, Allan A., to International Paper Com-
pany. Method of making and using heat resistant resin coated paper-
board product and product thereof. 4,391,833, Cl. 426-523.000.
Selinko, George J.: See—
Williamson, Richard D.; and Selinko, George J., 4,391,883, Cl
429-97.000.
PI 34
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Sellmeyer, Daniel J., to Gulf & Western Manufacturing Company.
Parking brake actuating device. 4,391,159, CI. 74-516.000.
Sclwood, Alan; See —
Barham, Peter J.; and Selwood, Alan, 4,391,766, CI. 264-210.100.
Sequies, Jean: See —
Janssen, Sylvain; and Sequies, Jean, 4,391,145, CI. 73-704.000.
Serbent, Harry; Schlebusch, Detlev; Reuter, Gerhard; and Schnabel,
Wolfram, to Metailgeseilschaft Aktiengesellschaft. Process of ther-
mally treating bulk materials in a rotary kiln. 4,391,583, CI. 432-4.000.
Servais, Michel: See —
Ryckaert, Andre'; and Servais, Michel. 4,392,000, CI. 570-104.000.
Sestanj, Kazimir; Abraham, Nedumparambil A.; Bellini, Francesco; and
Treasurywala, Adi, to Ayerst, McKenna & Harrison Inc. N-(Naph-
thalenylthioxomethyOaminoacid derivatives. 4,391.816, CI
424-274.000.
Sestanj, Kazimir: See —
Bellini, Francesco; Sestanj, Kazimir; and Humber, Leslie G
4,391,825, CI. 424-319.000.
Seyler, Jay K.: See—
Orlowski, Ronald C; and Seyler, Jay K., 4,391,747, CI. 260-
112.50T.
Shamp, E>onald E.: See —
Daman, Lloyd W.; and Shamp, Donald E., 4,391,581, CI.
4>1- 160.000.
Shandon Southern Products Limited: See —
Gordon, Alan J., 4,391,710, CI. 210-361.000.
Shann, Peter C. Detonation of explosive charges and equipment there-
for. 4,391,195, CI. 102-201.000.
Shanton, Kenneth J., to Wiggins Teape Group Limited, The. Record
material carrying a color . developer composition. 4,391,850, CI.
427-150.000.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Makizuka, Takakazu; and Katoh. Sunao. 4.392,205, CI. 364-518.000.
Sharpless, Edward N.; Gordon, Marvin; and Lichtenstein, Joseph, to
Whitman Medical Corporation. Incentive spirometer. 4,391,283, CI
128-725.000.
Shaw, Chia-Cheng: See—
Wolfe, Saul; and Shaw, Chia-Cheng, 4,391,975, CI. 544-90.000
Shaw, Walter N.: See—
Mills, Jack; Schmiegel, Klaus K.; and Shaw, Walter N., 4,391.826,
CI. 424-324.000.
Shell Oil Company: See —
Kung, Edward J.; and Bednard, Eugene D., 4,392,213, CI
367-13.000.
St. Clair, David J., 4,391,949. CI. 525-99.000.
Shen, Tsung-Ying: See —
Durette, Philippe L.; and Shen, Tsung-Ying. 4,391.800. CI.
424-177.000.
Shepard. George A.; and Schillawski, Philip C, to Republic Steel
Corporation. Process for electrolytically pickling steel strip material.
4,391,685, CI. 204-145.00R. re y
Shepherd, Norris W.: See —
Riley, Eric K.; Smith, Colin D.; Yates, Garry J.; and Shepherd,
Norris W, 4,391.585, CI. 432-23.000.
Sherwood Corporation. The: See—
Secon. Edward. 4.391.378, CI. 211-187.000.
Shibata. Fujio; Kawahara, Hiroshi; and Azegami, Hitoshi, to TDK
Electronics Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording medium. 4,391,877, CI
428-457.000.
Shibata, Koichi: See —
Minato, Ichiro; Shibata, Koichi; and Fujinami, Kimiya, 4.391,958,
CI. 525-504.000.
Shibusawa, Miteuo; and Ogawa, Toshiyuki, to Ricoh Company, Ltd.
Counter and timing mechanism for copying apparatus. 4,391,508, CI.
355-14.0CU.
Shibuya, Toshifumi: See—
Iso, Yoshimi; Inoue, Shigeki; and Shibuya, Toshifumi, 4,392,020.
CI. 179-l.OGE.
Shimazaki, Shigeo, to Matsushiu Electric Industrial Company, Lim-
ited. Method of producing microaddresses and a computer system for
achieving the method. 4,392,198, CI. 364-200.000.
Shimazu, Ken-ichi; and Deutsch, Albert, to Polychrome Corporation.
Colored photosensitive composition. 4,391,894, CI. 430-154.000.
Shimizu, Hirokazu: See —
Itoh, Kunio; Sugino, Takashi; Wada, Masaru; and Shimizu,
Hirokazu, 4,392,227, CI. 372-46.000.
Shimizu, Hiroshi; Sakai, Sigeo; Matsuda, Fumihiko; and Matsumoto.
Reiko, to Japan Organo Co., Ltd. Process for regenerating a strongly
acidic cation exchange resin. 4,391,649, CI. 127-46.200.
Shimizu, Norihiko: See—
Munekata, Kenichi; Unno. Kunihiko; and Shimizu, Norihiko.
4,391.066. CI. 51-165.870.
Shimoyama. Shoichi: See—
Okoshi. Noboru; Kudo. Kin-ichi; and Shimoyama, Shoichi,
4,391.640. CI. 106-29.000.
Shin. Kju H.. to Ethyl Corporation. Adenine production. 4,391.977. CI
544-277.000. . , . v,..
Shinmoto. Takahiko: See—
Ishii, Koji; Shinmoto. Takahiko; and Maehara, Kenso. 4.391.193
CI. 101-415.100.
Shinoi, Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki. Keisuke; Suzuki. Yoshimi; Kudoh,
Masaru; and Hashimoto. Wataru. to Nitsuko Limited; and Nippon
Telegraph & Telephone Public Corporation. Electronic key tele-
phone set circuit for permitting dialing during failure of commercial
power supplied to the set. 4.392,024, CI. 179-99.00R.
Shinozaki, Satoshi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha.
Method of making v-isolation grooves by over-filling with polycrys-
talline silicon of graded conductivity and etching. 4,391,033, CI.
29-576.00W. 6 . . .
Shiokawa, Hiroyuki: See —
Murakami, Shinichi; Morichika. Toshiaki; Hiraishi, Hisashi; and
Shiokawa, Hiroyuki, 4,391,635, CI. 75-125.000.
Shioyama, Giichi; Hata. Yoshitaka; and Nakajima. Masao. to Nissan
Motor Company, Limited. Air flow detection arrangement
4,391,247, CI. 123-403.000.
Shipitalo, William M.: See—
Jirousek, Norman F.; and Shipiulo, William M., 4,391,351, CI
188-18.00A.
Shirahata, Akihiko. to Toray Silicone Company. Ltd. Organopolysilox-
ane photosensitizers and methods for their preparation. 4.391.963. CI
528-37.000.
Shirahata. Isao: See—
Hori. Hisako; KiUmura, Nobu; Shirahata, Isao; and Nakamura.
Nobuyuki. 4.391.955, CI. 525-462.000.
Shirai, Tadashi: See—
Umezawa, Hamao; Aoyagi, Takaaki; Shirai. Tadashi; Nishizawa,
Rinzo; Suzuki, Masao; and Saino, Tetsushi, 4,391,986, CI.
562-444.000.
Shirakura, Toshiharu: See —
Kuwabara, Kouji; Sugawara. Hiroyuki; Shirakura, Toshiharu;
Sasaki, Kouji; and Takemori. Satoshi, 4.391.519. CI. 356-153.000.
Shireman. Phillip E.: See—
Bayne, Robert T.; and Shireman, Phillip E., 4,391,387, CI.
221-13.000.
Shishido, Tadao: See —
Toyoda, Takashi; Shishido, Tadao; and Tsujikawa, Teruaki.
4,391,900, CI. 430-355.000.
Shoji, Hirofumi: See —
Maeda. Umio; Shoji, Hirofumi; Wada, Yasusuke; and Horie,
Yoshio, 4,391,743, CI. 252-518.000.
Shono, Hiroaki; and Kikuchi, Toshiaki, to Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd. Air
nozzle apparatus for use in drawing glass fibers. 4,391,619. CI
65-12.000.
Shotbolt. Keith, to Constructors John Brown Limited. Guides for use in
forming pipe connections and a process of forming pipe connections
4.391.331. CI. 166-342.000.
Sieffert, William G., to Champion International Corporation. Fiber-
board shipping container having laminated spacing members.
4,391,371, CI. 206-597.000.
Siegmund, Walter P., to American Optical Corporation. Method of
making lenses having a spherical face. 4,391,621, CI. 65-31.000.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Edinger, Egon; and Kohler, Gerd, 4,391.764. CI. 264-25.000.
Keller. Wolfgang; Grassmann. Hans-Christian; and Schmidt. Karl.
4.392.230, CI. 373-139.000.
Kleinschmidt, Peter; and Magori, Valentin, 4,392,074, CI.
310-327.000.
Kuhnlein. Hans, 4,392,094, CI. 318-254.000.
Metzler, Hans-Georg, 4,391,190, CI. 101-211.000.
Schmitter, Ernst; Birzele, Paul; Buchmann, Klaus; Geitz, Gerhard;
Will, Bemhard; and Beifuss, Wolfgang, 4,392,199, CI
364-200.000.
Schulte, Heinz. 4.391,032, CI. 29-571.000.
Troebel, Werner; and Bottcher, Martin, 4,392,036, CI. 200-322 000
Walter, Kari-Heinz, 4,392,131, CI. 340-803.000.
Wilkens, Achim, 4,392,239, CI. 378-146.000.
Silberring, Ludwig. Process and apparatus for hydrogen production.
4,391,794, CI. 423-650.000.
Silverberg, Morton, to Xerox Corporation. Over-platen document
registration apparatus. 4,391,505, CI. 355-3.00R.
Simandoux, Jean-Claude: See —
Billon, Alain; Le Page, Jean-Francois; Peries, Jean-Pierre; and
Simandoux, Jean-Claude. 4.391.700. CI. 208-86.000.
Simjian, Luther G. Exercise apparatus. 4,391.441. CI. -272- 126.000.
Simmons. Nathaniel; Magnusson. Stig; Puccini. Sergio E.; McLaughlin,
Donald W.; and Stelte, David J., to GTE Automatic Electric Labora-
tories, Inc. Dual rail time and control unit for a T-S-T-digital switch-
ing system. 4,392,223, CI. 370-63.000.
Simpson, Clyde D.: See —
Lewis, James C; Miller, Jerry W.; Simpson, Clyde D.; and
Thomasson, Ronald G., 4,392,104, CI. 324-54.000.
Singer Company, The: See—
Sansone, Eugene A., 4,391,215, CI. 112-275.000.
Vermillion, Don W.; Gromek, Francis S.; and Bair, Scott S., III.
4,391,018, CI. 15-339.000.
Siuta, Gerald J.; and Bernstein, Seymour, to American Cyanamid
Company. Ureylenebis (hydroxy naphthalenesulfonic acids).
4,391,824, CI. 424-315.000.
Sizemore, Howard; and Bruner, Robert. Knife with removable blades.
4,391,043, CI. 30-330.000.
SKF Kugellagerfabriken GmbH: See—
Negele, Richard; and Pfeifle, Dieter, 4.391.476, CI. 308-207.00R.
Skinner, Stuart M., Jr.: See —
Kerfoot, William B.; and Skinner, Stuart M., Jr., 4,391,137, CI.
73-204.000.
Skiver, Bruce W.: See—
Galland, Lesley A.; and Skiver, Bruce W., 4,391,172, CI.
83-403.000.
Slagteriemes Forskningsinstitut: See—
Petersen, Olfert H., 4,391,141, CI. 73-433.000.
Slate, Matthew W., to Technical Communications Corporation. Secure
facsimile transmission system using time-delay modulation. 4,392,021.
CI. 179-1.50R.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 35
Slater Steel Industries Limited: See—
Nigol, Olaf; and Houston, Herbert J., 4,391,125, CI. 73-11.000.
Slattery, William; Brechany, Thomas; and MacLeod, Colin J., to Cale-
donian Mining Company Limited. Method and apparatus for bending
metal beams. 4,391,115, CI. 72-131.000.
Small, Augustus B.; Hughes, Vincent L.; and Benitez, Francisco M., to
Exxon Research & Engineering Co. Process for pren^ring light
colored petroleum resins and resins produced thereby (CS-203).
4.391,961, CI. 526-76.000.
Smeets, Gerard G. F. Punch press machine with adjustable tool posi-
tioning. 4,391,174, CI. 83-552.000.
Smith. Alfred A. Transfer bench. 4,391,006, CI. 4-559.000.
Smith, Allan L. Sprinkler with transversely mounted splash plate.
4,391,410, CI. 239-498.000.
Smith, Colin D.: See—
Riley, Eric K.; Smith, Colin D.; Yates, Garry J.; and Shepherd,
Norris W., 4,391,585, CI. 432-23.000.
Smith, Derrick A. Closed loop hermetically sealed solar power genera-
tor. 4,391,100, CI. 60-641.110.
Smith, Donald A.; and Pote, Bruce M., to Combustion Engineenng,
Inc. Solids pumping apparatus. 4,391,561, CI. 414-218.000.
Smith, Donald D.: See—
Frenkel, Jacob K.; and Smith, Donald D., 4,391,822, CI.
424-283.000.
Smith, Graham C: See— -
Mathieson, Ernest; Smith, Graham C; and Gilvin, Philip J.,
4,392.057. CI. 250-385.000.
Smith. Jeremy G. B.. to AECI Limited. Explosive. 4,391,659, CI.
149-2.000.
Smith, Kenneth C. A., to National Research Development Corporation.
Electron beam lithography. 4,392,058, CI. 250-492.200.
Smith, Lawrence M.: See —
Moshofcky, Jerome F., 4,391,401, CI. 227-19.000.
Smith, Peter A. Water chair. 4,391.466. CI. 297-452.000.
Smith, Verity C, to Vaponics Inc. Reverse osmosis unit-degasifier
system. 4,391,713. CI. 210-652.000.
Smith, Wayne G.; and Maurer. Herman J., to J. I. Case Company.
Tooth assembly. 4,391,050, CI. 37-142.00A.
Smolin, Anatoly T.: See— ,, ■ ^
Yakovlev, Nikolai I.; Smolin, Anatoly T.; Kokovikhin, Vasily G.;
and Kotunov, Alexei A., 4,392,106, CI. 324-72.500.
SMS Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Priebe, Fritz, 4,391,122, CI. 72-481.000.
Snow, Harold D.: See-
Rand, Robert W.; Snow, Harold D.; Elliott, David G.; and Haskins,
Glenn M., 4,392,040, CI. 219-10.710.
Societe Anonyme Francelco: See —
Desourteaux, Dominique E., 4,391,483, CI. 339-94.00R.
S.A. PRB n.v.: See—
Creyf, Hubert S., 4,391,926, CI. 523-132.000.
Societe des Ciments Francais: See—
Dupain, Jean, 4,391,774, CI. 422-63.000.
Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale: See—
Barkats, Gerard; Girard, Alain; Marchal, Jean; and Morel, Charles,
4,392.007, CI. 136-248.000.
Societe Navale Chargeurs Delmas-Vieljeux: See—
Loreal, Guy, 4,391,462, CI. 292-2O7.0OO.
Societe Nouvelle de Bouchons Plastiques S.N.B.P.: See—
Babiol, Pierre, 4,391,383, CI. 215-256.000.
Societe PrI: See-
Carter, Brian, 4,392,048, CI. 219-367.000.
Societe Vetrotex Saint-Gobain: See—
Lecron, Jacques; Manera, Maxime; Faure, Jean-Paul; and Renau-
din, Jean-Pierre, 4,391,618, CI. 65-1.000.
Sodex-Magister, Societe d'Exploitation: See—
Neyret, Guy, 4,391,112, CI. 70-364.00A.
Solar Dynamics Inc.: See—
Mathes, Donovan B.; Hamilton, Floyd B.; and Spreng, Douglas C,
4,391,268, CI. 126-437.000.
Solarex Corporation: See—
Lindmayer, Joseph, 4,392,010, CI. 136-256.000.
Solid Photography, Inc.: See—
Di Matteo, Paul, 4,392,182, CI. 362-5.000.
Solid Sute Systems, Inc.: See— ,„,,,„ ^,
Mehaffey, Joseph H.; and Szlam, Aleksander, 4,392,129, CI.
340-765.000.
Solvay & Cie.: See —
Ryckaert, Andre'; and Servais, Michel, 4,392,000, CI. 570-104.000.
Somervillc, Ronald: See—
Pickens. Robert C, Jr.; Thomas, Reese R.; and Somerville, Ronald,
4,391,866, CI. 428-92.000.
Sone, Norio: See— . .. „ ^, .
Kogoma, Kiyoshi; Ohashi, Yu; Niizeki, Jiro; Sone, Nono; and
Tobita, Takashi, 4,391,994, CI. 568-593.000.
Sony Corporation: See—
Yamada, Takaaki; Osakabe, Yoshio; and Tsuda, Yukio, 4,392,253,
CI. 455-165.000.
Yamamoto, Kaichi, 4,392,162, CI. 360-10.300.
Sorensen, Jens O. Atmospheric thermal energy conversion utilizing
inflauble pressurized rising conduit. 4,391,099, CI. 60-641.600.
Souques, Georges: See—
Cadet, Christian; Dumortier, Bernard; and Souques, Georges,
4,392,174,0.361-45.000. ^ ,o. •.,< ri
Sparks, Jacob D. Springless nipple waterer valve. 4,391,225, CI.
119-72.500.
Spaziante, Placido M.; and Giuffre, Luigi. Process for methyl isocya-
nate production. 4,391,758. CI. 260-453.00P.
Speak. Trevor H.. to Rolls-Royce Limited. Nozzle guide vane assem-
blies for turbomachines. 4.391.565. CI. 415-189.000.
Speicher. John M.: See—
Bastian, Thomas W.; and Speicher, John M., 4,392,140, CI.
343-765.000.
Spells, Sherwood: See —
Lee, Chi-long; and Spells. Sherwood, 4,391,765, CI. 264-26.000.
Sperry Corporation: See —
Waldrop, T. William, 4,391,363, CI. 198-865.000.
Young, Terry A.; and Mast. Aquila D., 4,391,364, CI. 198-865.000.
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhclm; Bittner, Frie-
drich; and Martens. Jurgen, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft. Process
for the pjoduction of aqueous sodium methioninate solutions.
4.391.987, CI. 562-559.000.
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner, Frie-
drich; and Martens, Jurgen, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft Process
for the production of aqueous sodium methioninate solutions.
4.391.988, CI. 562-559.000.
Spinelli, Louis A., to Nabisco Brands, Inc. Speed controlled infeed
conveyor system. 4,391,362, CI. 198-855.000.
Spitz, Robert J.: See-
Cordova, Samuel; and Spitz, Robert J., 4,391,059, CI. 43-15.000.
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R.; and Howley,
Joseph P., to General Foods Corporation. Dual enzyme digestion for
a dog food of improved palatability. 4,391,829, CI. 426-28.000.
Sprague, Robert B.: See-
Tyler, Truman V.; and Sprague, Robert B., 4,391,712, CI.
210-652.000.
Sprecker, Mark A.; Hanna, Marie R.; Tokarzewski, Richard J.; Belko,
Robert P.; Watkins, Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H.. to International
Flavors &. Fragrances Inc. Use in modifying smoking tobacco aroma
and flavor or mono-oxomethyl substituted polyhydrodime-
thanonaphthalene derivatives. 4,391,284, CI. 131-276.000.
Spreng, Douglas C: See—
Mathes, Donovan B.; Hamilton, Royd B.; and Spreng, Douglas C,
4,391,268, CI. 126-437.000.
Spring, Kurt: See—
Dreier, Enist; and Spring, Kurt, 4,391,213, CI. 112-246.000.
Springs, Daniel R.: See—
Goss, David C; and Springs, Daniel R., 4,392,051, CI. 219-528.000.
SPS Technologies, Inc.: See—
Cadwallader. James W., 4.391,544, CI. 403-155.000.
SRI International: See-
Green, Philip S., 4,391,281, CI. 128-660.000.
Staempfli, Jackie, to Tulcea, S.A. Disposable syringe. 4,391,272. CI.
604-110.000.
Staerzl, Richard E.. to Brunswick Corporation. Atomization compensa-
tion for electronic fuel injection. 4,391,254, CI. 123-478.000.
Suerzl. Richard E., to Brunswick Corporation. Programmed sequential
fuel injection in an internal combustion engine. 4,391,255, CI
123-481.000.
Stahl, Edward L.; and Kreeger, Elsmer W., to Pinckney Molded Plas-
tics, Inc. Four-level stacking container. 4,391,369, CI. 206-506.000
Stamicarbon, B.V.: See—
Don, Johannes A.; and Scholten, Joseph J. F., 4,392,001. CI.
585-269.000.
Stamminger, Reinhard: See—
Cullis, Herbert M; and Stamminger, Reinhard, 4,392,008, CI.
136-248.000.
Standard Change-Makers, Inc.: See—
Bayne, Robert T.; and Shireman, Phillip E., 4,391,387, CI.
221-13.000.
Sundard Oil Company, The: See—
Kuch, Philip L.; Herrington, Daniel R.; and Eggett, Janet M.,
4,391,756, CI. 260-430.000.
Sundard Oil Company (Indiana): See—
Ferreira, Laurence E.; Lamar, Richard S.; and Bertolacini, Ralph
J., 4,391,734, CI. 252-378.00R.
Lamar, Richard S.; Ferreira, Laurence E.; and Cloud. Robert C.
4,391,733, CI. 252-378.00R.
Nimry, Tayseer S.; and Fields, Ellis K., 4,391,967, CI. 528-189.000
Palm, John W.; and Reed, Robert L., 4.391,790, CI. 423-574.00R.
Palm, John W.; and Mungen, Richard, 4,391,791, CI. 423-574.00R
Pappas, Peter G.. 4,391,721, CI. 252-51.50A.
Stanley. Robert C. to FMC Corporation. System for controlling a juice
extraction facility. 4,391,185, CI. 99-489.000.
Stanton, Howard F.: See—
Keathley, Anthony C; Sunton, Howard F.; and Wagle, Mahesh
M.. 4.391.114, CI. 72-78.000.
Stanton, William E.; Eisenhaure, David B.; and Drescher, Robert D., to
Charles Stork Draper Laboratory, Inc., The. Optimum efficiency
control system. 4,392,100, CI. 318-803.000.
Stopleton, Brian P.: See— ,„,.,„ ^,
Aoyama, Frank S.; and Stopleton, Brian P., 4,392,139, CI.
343-705.000.
Steadman, Rufus P. Lamp standard assembly. 4,392,192, CI.
362-418.000. „ . .. ,
Steele, Derek E. Moisture meters of a type especially suitoble for
estimating the moisture content of organic materials. 4,392,127, CI
340-604.000.
Steigerwald, Wolf-Erhard; Ambros, Peter; and Gatzkc, Erich. Paste
composition for the production of electrically conductive and solder-
able structures. 4,391,742, CI. 252-512.000.
PI 36
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Steigmeier, Edgar F.; and Auderset, Heinrich, to RCA Corporation.
Method for determining the quality of hght scattering material.
4.391.524. CI. 356-338.000.
Stein. Israel M., to Clinical Data, Inc. Electrode belt. 4,391.279, CI.
128-643.000.
Steiner Corporation: See —
Steiner. Robert L., 4.391,308. CI. 141-18.000.
Steiner, Robert L.. 4.391,309. CI. 141-18.000.
Steiner. Robert L.. to Steiner Corporation. Soap dispensing system.
4.391.308. CI. 141-18.000.
Steiner, Robert L.. to Steiner Corporation. Soap dispensing system.
4.391.309, CI. 141-18.000.
Steinkraus, Richard W. Filter element sealing device for Alter pan.
4,391.706, CI. 210-232.000.
Stelte. David J.; See-
Simmons. Nathaniel; Magnusson, Stig; Puccini, Sergio E.;
McLaughlin, Donald W.; and Stelte. David J., 4,392.223, CI.
370-63.000.
Sterling Drug Inc.: See —
Coates, Colin F.. 4.391,715. CI. 210-696.000.
Lesher. George Y.; Opalka, Chester J., Jr.; and Page, Donald F..
4.391.811. CI. 424-263.000.
Lewis, Frederick M.. 4,391,208, CI. 110-346.000.
Stetter, Jorg; Reiser. Wolf; and Faust. Wilfried. to Bayer Aktiengesell-
schah. Aloalkylamide compounds and herbicidal antidote composi-
tions. 4.391.626. CI. 71-88.000.
Stevenson, John; Cross, Alan; and Anderson. John C. to Foseco Inter-
national Limited. Alkali metal silicate binder compositions. 4.391.642.
CI. 106-38.230.
Stewart. Alex D.: See—
Ruxton. David S.; and Stewart. Alex D., 4,392,095, CI. 318-254.000.
Stichnoth, Andreas: See —
Stichnoth, Otto; and Stichnoth, Andreas, 4,391.602, CI. 8-149.100.
Stichnoth, Otto; and Stichnoth, Andreas. Process for smoothing and
drying washed shaped articles of mixed fabric. 4.391,602, CI.
8-149.100.
Stiglich. Ralph E.. to Honeywell Inc. Electronic cirr.iit for eliminating
chatter. 4,392,065, CI. 307-247.00A.
Stimson, John J.. Jr.: See —
Harris, Robert H.; Humphrey, Troy G.; and Stimson, John J., Jr..
4.391.085. CI. 56-330.000.
Stipe. Lester E.. to Precision Plumbing Products. Inc. Hot water system
and valve. 4.391,295. CI. 137-522.000.
Stolte, Friedrich: See —
Icking. Friedrich; and Stolte. Friedrich. 4.391.222, CI. 119-14.170.
Stork Screens. B.V.: See —
van der Velden. Hendricus J., 4,391,898, CI. 430-306.000.
Strauss. Georg: See —
Kersting. Hans-Joachim; Wolfrum, Erhard; Portz, Willi; and
Strauss, Georg, 4.391,786. CI. 423-442.000.
Strelisky, Janos: See —
Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja, Gergely; Kovacz. Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag. Sandor. 4,391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
Struck, Bemd D.; Junginger, Robert; and Boltersdorf, Dagmar, to
Kemforschungsanlage Julich GmbH. Method for electrolytic pro-
duction of hydrogen. 4,391.682, CI. 204-104.000.
Stuby, Kenneth P., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Thermally compensated shadow mask. 4,391.034, CI. 29-579.000.
Studhalter, Walter R.; Amend, William E.; and Helgeson, Norman L.,
to Biphase Energy Systems. Fresh water production from power
plant waste heat. 4,391,102, CI. 60-649.000.
Stupirak, Wilhelm: See —
•Greive, Aloys; Horstmann, Aloys; and Stupirak, Wilhelm,
4.391,087. CI. 57-58.520.
Stutzman, Clarence. Apparatus for cooling a ceiling mounted fan mo-
tor. 4,391,570. CI. 417-353.000.
Sublisutic Holding, S.A.: See—
Hendriks, Dieter, 4.391,893, CI. 430-137.000.
Such, Mihaly: See —
Devenyi. Tibor; Bocsa, Klara K.; Kovats, Ferenc; Pongor, Sandor;
Szabolcsi, Gertrud; and Such, Mihaly, 4,391,839, CI. 426-626.000.
Suda, Tatsuo; Hirasawa, Yoshihei; Takahashi, Sachio; Abe, Etsuko;
Konno, Kunio; and Aoki, Tadao, to Chugai Seiyaku Kabushiki
Kaisha. Method of treating leukemia or leukemoid diseases.
4.391.802, CI. 424-236.000.
Sugalski. Raymond K.; and Blake. Charles R.. to General Electric
Company. Liquid crystal indicator. 4.392,102, CI. 320-48.000.
Sugasawa, Fukashi; and lizuka, Haruhiko. to Nissan Motor Company,
Limited. Internal combustion engine. 4.391,240. CI. 123-198.00F.
Sugawara, Hiroyuki: See —
Kuwabara, Kouji; Sugawara, Hiroyuki; Shirakura, Toshiharu;
Sasaki, Kouji; and Takemori, Satoshi. 4,391.519, CI. 356-153.000.
Sugimoto, Hitoshi: See —
Abe. Yoshiaki; Kubota, Yutaka; and Sugimoto, Hitoshi, 4,391.237.
CI. 123-179.00H.
Sugino. Takashi: See —
Itoh, Kunio; Sugino. Takashi; Wada. Masani; and Shimizu.
Hirokazu, 4,392.227. CI. 372-46.000.
Okabe, Takako; Itoh, Kunio; and Sugino, Takashi, 4,392,228, CI.
372-46.000.
Sugisita, Kaneo: See —
Tsunoda, Sachio; and Sugisita, Kaneo. 4,391,097. CI. 60-398.000.
Sullivan, Daniel T.: See —
Arulpragasam, Jega A.; Giggi, Robert A.; Lary, Richard F.; and
Sullivan, Daniel T., 4.392.200, CI. 364-200.000.
Sullivan, Thomas A.: See —
McBee, William C; and Sullivan, Thomas A., 4,391.969. CI.
528-389.000.
Sumitomo Electric Industries, Ltd.: See —
Horikawa, Takahiro; Hibino, Yutaka; and Maki,_Seiichi, 4,391,218,
CI. 118-621.000.
Inamoto, Jiro; and Hayau, Naohiro, 4.391.314, CI. 152-210.000.
Moriya, Michio, 4.391,350. CI. 188-1.110.
Sumitomo Rubber Industries, Ltd.: See —
Inamoto, Jiro; and Hayata, Naohiro. 4,391.314. CI. 152-210.000.
Sundaram, T. R.: See —
Johnson, Virgil E., Jr.; Sundaram, T. R.; and Conn, Andrew F.,
4.391,339, CI. 175-393.000.
Sunderland, Ned E. Cutting apparatus for cutting a non-circular open-
ing. 4.391,042, CI. 30-316.000.
Sundstrand Corporation: See —
Hunsberger, Dale L.; and Harwath. Frank L., 4.391.580, CI.
431-1.000.
Sung. Rodney L.; Sweeney, William M.; and Crawford, Wheeler C, to
Texaco Inc. Liquid hydrocarbon fuel containing a corrosion inhibi-
tor, dialkoxylated alkyl polyoxyalkyi primary amine. 4,391,610, CI.
44-56.000.
Sutco, Inc.: See —
Hollier. Joseph H., Jr., 4,391,415, CI. 242-56.900.
Sutherland, Ray; and Wood, Mark S.. to Rockwell International Corpo-
ration. Plastic water meter main case. 4.391,139. CI. 73-273.000.
Suwaki. Toshitaka: See —
Ando. Otaro; and Suwaki. Toshitaka. 4.391,282. CI. 128-660.000.
Suzaki, Shunichi: See —
Sato, Takeshi; and Suzaki, Shunichi. 4,392,054, CI. 250-307.000.
Suzuki, Isamu: See —
Masamoto, Junzo; Hamada, Minoni; Suzuki, Isamu; and Yoshida,
Takeo. 4.391,741. CI. 252-51 1.000.
Suzuki, Koichi: See —
Kawai, Shinji; Suzuki. Koichi; and Yamaguchi, Yuji, 4.391.004, CI.
4-443.000.
Suzuki, Masao: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Aoyagi, Takaaki; Shirai, Tadashi; Nishizawa,
Rinzo; Suzuki. Masao; and Saino, Tetsushi, 4,391,986. CI.
562-444.000.
Suzuki, Masayoshi; and Sagawa, Akio, to Hitachi, Ltd. Semiconductor
switch. 4,392,069. CI. 307-252.00A.
Suzuki, Seiichi: See —
Ichikawa, Katsumi; Amano, Itaru; Ozaki, Keiji; and Suzuki. Seiichi,
^ 4.391,769, CI. 264-326.000.
Suzuki, Teruo, to Toppan Printing Co., Ltd. Method of making a
half-tone gravure printing plate. 4,391,899, CI. 430-307.000.
Suzuki, Togi; Tsunawaki. Kiyokazu; Wada. Osamu; and Kimura, Akio,
to Teijin, Ltd. Hollow water-absorbing polyester filament textile
material. 4,391.872, CI. 428-224.000.
Suzuki. Yoshimi: See —
Shinoi, Tsuyoshi; Mochizuki, Keisuke; Suzuki. Yoshimi; Kudoh,
Masaru; and Hashimoto. Wataru. 4,392,024, CI. 179-99.00R.
Suzuki, Yoshiro: See —
Kamegaya, Takeo; Sekigawa, Tadahiko; Kurakami. Hiroshi; and
Suzuki. Yoshiro. 4,392,075. CI. 313-584.000.
Swan Corporation, The: See —
Moore, John W., 4,391,072, CI. 52-211.000.
Sweeney, William M.: See —
Sung, Rodney L.; Sweeney, William M.; and Crawford. Wheeler
C, 4,391.610, CI. 44-56.000.
Swiss Aluminium Ltd.: See —
Brockmeyer, Jerry W., 4,391,918, CI. 501-127.000.
Sybron Corporation: See —
Grunert, Hans C, 4,391,478, CI. 312-320.000.
Sylvain, Daniel, to Clesid. Apparatus for storing a variable length of
strip. 4,391.400, CI. 226-113.000.
Sysak. Peter K., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Ionic
copolymers in photographic light-sensitive silver halide films.
4.391.903. CI. 430-629.000.
Syva Company: See —
Litman. David J.; and Ullman, Edwin F., 4,391.904. CI. 435-7.000.
Szabolcsi. Gertrud: See —
Devenyi. Tibor; Bocsa. Klara K.; Kovats. Ferenc; Pongor. Sandor;
Szabolcsi. Gertrud; and Such. Mihaly. 4,391.839, CI. 426-626.000.
Szegi. Jozsef: See —
Korbonits. E>ezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja. Gergely; Kovacz, Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag. Sandor, 4.391,821. CI. 424-283.000.
Szkolnik. Michael, to Cornell Research Foundation, Inc. Vapor phase
fungicidal method. 4,391.813, CI. 424-269.000.
Szlam. Aleksander: See —
Mehaffey. Joseph H.; and Szlam. Aleksander, 4,392,129, CI.
340-765.000.
T. A. Systems, Inc.: See —
Tarunuev. V.. 4,391.121. CI. 72-406.000.
Tabuchi. Takeshi; and Abe, Matazo, to Takeda Chemical Industries,
Ltd. Method for producing citric acids. 4,391.908. CI. 435-144.000.
Taghon. Daniel, to Poclain. Supporting chassis for a working machine,
such as a hydraulic shovel. 4.391.341. CI. 180-9.20R.
Taguchi. Kenichi: See —
Ishihara, Toshinobu; Yamamoto. Akira; and Taguchi, Kenichi,
4.391.984, CI. 560-236.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 37
Tahara, Iwao: See —
Wakabayashi, Takuo, deceased; Wakabayashi. Shigemasa, legal
representative; Tahara. Iwao; Aihara, Toshiharu; Takahashi,
Naoki; and Matsuo, Yushin. 4.391.530, CI. 368-63.000.
Tai. Wun T, to Nalco Chemical Company. Poiycationic latices of
dimethylarainopropyl-acrylamide, and their use of as sludge dewater-
ing agents and/or paper retention aids. 4,391,932, CI. 523-337.000.
Tajima, Akira; and Tsuji. Sadahiko, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Method to increase focal distance at telephotographic side of a zoom
lens system. 4,391,493. CI. 350-422.000.
Takada, Masaniko: See —
Yamane, Kazumasa; Kobayashi, Masahiro; and Takada, Masaniko.
4.391.944. CI. 524-548.000.
Takagi. Akinobu: See —
Kawabata, Etsuo; Ogura, Masahiko; Takagi. Akinobu; and
Fujimura, Akira, 4,391.246, CI. 123-391.000.
Takahashi, Naoki: See —
Wakabayashi, Takuo, deceased; Wakabayashi, Shigemasa, legal
representative; Tahara, Iwao; Aihara. Toshiharu; Takahashi,
Naoki; and Matsuo. Yushin. 4.391,530. CI. 368-63.000.
Takahashi. Sachio: See —
Suda, Tatsuo; Hirasawa, Yoshihei; Takahashi, Sachio; Abe, Etsuko;
Konno, Kunio; and Aoki, Tadao, 4,391,802, CI. 424-236.000.
Takahashi, Takao, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Weft picking device of air
jet type weaving loom. 4,391.305, CI. 139-435.000.
Takahashi. Tohru: See —
Tamura, Yasuyuki; Kanbe. Junichiro; Nakamura. Shunji; Toyono,
Tsutomu; and Takahashi, Tohru. 4.391.891. CI. 430-120.000.
Takamura, Tousaku, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Diffuser and exhaust
gas collector arrangement. 4,391,566, CI. 415-209.000.
Takaoka. Tokuro: See —
Nishikawa, Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama. Toshihiko;
Takaoka. Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, 4,391,342, CI.
180-143.000.
Tal^ara Co Ltd ' SCC
Nakane. Shigeru, 4,391,060, CI. 46-22.000.
Takashima, Hiroaki: See —
Uemura, Seiichi; Yamamoto, Shunichi; Hirose, Takao; Takashima,
Hiroaki; and Kato. Osamu, 4,391.788. CI. 423-447.600.
Takasugi, Wasao: See —
Yokozawa. Norio; Takasugi, Wasao; Yonezawa, Seiji; and
Ueyanagi, Kiichi, 4,392,219. CI. 369-44.000.
Takatori. Yasushi: See —
Inoue. Eiichi; Takatori. Yasushi; and Haruta, Masahiro, 4.392.141,
CI. 346-1.100.
Takayama. Kenichiro: See —
Kimura, Kazuo; Takayama, Kenichiro; Ado. Yutaka; Kawamoto,
Tamotsu; and Masur.aga, Izumi, 4,391.910, CI. 435-232.000.
Takechi, Hiroshi; Katoh, Hiroshi; Koyama, Kazuo; and Usami, Kazu-
hide, to Nippon Steel Corporation. Process for producing cold rolled
steel strip having excellent mechanical strength and useful for motor
vehicles. 4.391,653. CI. 148-12.00C.
Takeda Chemical Industries. Ltd.: See —
Minato, Ichiro; Shibata, Koichi; and Fujinami, Kimiya, 4.391,958,
CI. 525-504.000.
Tabuchi, Takeshi; and Abe, Matazo, 4,391,908, CI. 435-144.000.
Takemae, Yoshihiro: See —
Nakano. Masao; Baba, Fumio; Nakano, Tomio; Takemae. Yo-
shihiro; and Mochizuki. Hirohiko. 4.392,211, CI. 365-200.000.
Takematsu. Tetsuo; Isogawa. Takayuki; and Sakuraba. Yasuya, to
Hodogaya Chemical Co., Ltd. Herbicidal composition. 4.391.631. CI.
71-118.000.
Takemori, Satoshi: See —
Kuwabara. Kouji; Sugawara, Hiroyuki; Shirakura, Toshiharu;
Sasaki, Kouji; and Takemori. Satoshi. 4.391,519, CI. 356-153.000.
Takemoto, Iwao: See —
Aoki, Masakazu; Ando, Haruhisa; Ohba, Shinya; Hanamura, Shoji;
Takemoto, Iwao; and Izawa, Ryuichi, 4,392,158, CI. 358-213.000.
Takemura, Toji; and Hirashima, Kenzo, to Nissan Motor Co. Ltd.
Clutch engageable/disengageable by momentary energization of
solenoid means. 4,391,356, CI 192-84.0OC.
Takeuchi, Minami: See —
Takigami, Katsuhiko; and Takeuchi, Minami. 4.392.175, CI.
361-88.000.
Takigami, Katsuhiko; and Takeuchi. Minami, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Protecting device for a gate turn-off thyristor.
4.392,175, CI. 361-88.000.
Talerico, Joseph M.; and Fleischer, Henry. Water-saving device for use
with toilets. 4,391,003, CI. 4-415.000.
Tama Manufacturing Co.. Limited: See —
Mashio, Sakae. 4,391.242. CI. 123-198.00R.
Tamaki. Kenzo: See —
Kojima, Takafumi; Tamaki, Kenzo; and Yokota, Shiro. 4.392.026.
CI. 179-175.30R.
Tamamura. Junichi; Yasuda. Mamoru; Hosoda, Motomi; and Saeki,
Shinichi. to Hosiden Electronics Co.. Ltd. Condenser microphone.
4.392.025, CI. 179-1 11. OOR.
Tamiya, Yoshimichi; Eguchi, Yasukata; and Makabe, Hachiro. to
Janome Sewing Machine Co.. Ltd. Electronic control sewing ma-
chine. 4.391,212, CI. I12-158.00E.
Tamosauskas, Albert E.; and Temple, Chester S.. to PPG Industries,
Inc. Aqueous peroxide emulsion for use with glass fibers. 4.391.876.
CI. 428-392.000.
Tamura, Yasuyuki; Kanbe. Junichiro; Nakamura, Shunji; Toyono.
Tsutomu; and Takahashi, Tohru. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. E)evel-
oping method using (altematmg electric field and) a developer of the
field-dependent type and an apparatus therefor. 4.391,891, CI.
430-120.000.
Tanaka, Akira: See —
Ahad. Munir J.; Hollowell. William; Tanaka, Akira; and Ziv,
Avraham, 4,391.420. CI. 242-107.40A.
Tanaka, Hideharu; Ishijima, Koji; and Koda. Toshihide, to Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Horizontal rotary compressor with oil
forced by gas discharge into crankshaft bore. 4,391.573, CI.
418-63.000.
Tanaka, Kobun; and Kawaharazaki, Takashi, to Kabushiki Kaisha
Tokai Rika Denki Seisakusho. Buckle arrangement for seat belts.
4.391,023, CI. 24-230.0AL.
Tanaka, Shinichiro: See —
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Saji, Hideo, 4,391,244,
CI. 123-339.000.
Tanaka, Yutaka: See —
Yatomi, Takeshi; and Tanaka. YuUka, 4,392,041, CI. 219-69.00W.
Tandjung, Halim S.: See —
Landrock, Jurgen B.; Perske, Manfred; and Tandjung. Halim S ,
4,392,097, CI. 318-696000.
Tanner Companies, The: See —
Murray. Jesse L.. 4,391,549, CI. 404-87.000.
Tanner, Herbert: See —
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Biitner,
Friedrich; and Martens, Jurgen, 4,391,987, CI. 562-559.000.
Spindler, Manfred; Tanner, Herbert; Geiger, Friedhelm; Bittner,
Friedrich; and Martens, Jurgen, 4.391,988, CI. 562-559.000
Tarro. Giulio, to Depa S.p.A. Preparation of herpes simplex antigen for
the diagnosis of carcinoma. 4,391,911, CI. 435-239.000
Taruntaev, V., to T. A. Systems, Inc. Orbital tool as.sembly for forming
rivet heads. 4,391,121, CI. 72-406.000.
Tarzia, Giorgio: See —
Mariani, Luigi; and Tarzia, Giorgio, 4,391,817. CI. 424-274.000.
TateBe, Yoshikazu; Egami, Masafumi; and Miyawaki, Toshimitsu, to
Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Cylinder head for air-cooled
engines. 4,391,231. CI. 123-41.690.
Tavss. Edward A.; and Eigen, Edward, to Colgate-Palmolive Com-
pany. Non-irnuting dentifrice. 4.391,798, CI. 424-52.000.
Taylor, Lloyd D.: See —
Schwarzel. William C; and Taylor. Lloyd D.. 4,391,895. CI.
430-215.000.
Taylor, Ray A.: See —
Taylor, Ray M.. 4,391,304, CI. 139-100.000.
Taylor. Ray M.. to Taylor. Ray A. Warp tension structure. 4,391,304.
CI. 139-100.000.
Taylor, Robert A., to United States of America, Agriculture. Seg-
mented fiber sampler. 4.391,153. CI. 73-864.410.
Taylor. William D.. Jr. Firewood carrier. 4.391.397. CI. 224-265000
TDK Electronics Co., Ltd.: See—
Hosaka, Akihiko; OkuyaTia, Kiyotaka; and Isobe, Yukihiro,
4.391,864, CI. 428-64.000.'*
Shibata, Fujio; Kawahara, Hiroshi; and Azegami, Hitoshi,
4,391.877. CI. 428-457.000.
Technal International S.A.: See —
Laugier, Yves D., 4,391.031. CI. 29-526.0OR.
Technical Communications Corporation: See —
Slate. Matthew W.. 4,392.021. CI. 179-1. 50R
Teijin. Ltd.: See-
Suzuki. Togi; Tsunawaki. Kiyokazu; Wada, Osamu; and Kimura,
Akio. 4,391,872. CI. 428-224.000.
Tektronix, Inc.: See —
Deibele, Florian C. 4.391,461, CI. 292-204.000.
Telefonaktiebolaget L M Ericsson: See —
Holgersson. Stig L., 4,391,303. CI. 138-166.000.
Teletype Corporation: See —
Costello, Louis B., 4.392,083. CI. 315-85.000.
Telford. Clive D.: See—
Kolombos, Alexander J.; Telford. Clive D.; and Young. Dennis,
4.392.003. CI. 585-661.000.
Temple, Chester S.: See—
Tamosauskas. Albert E.; and Temple, Chester S.. 4,391.876. CI.
428-392.000.
Tencor Instruments: See —
Wheeler. William R., 4,391,044, CI. 33-I74.00P.
Tenney, William L Gas compressor 4.391.568. CI. 417-237.000
Tenud, Leander: See—
Huwiler. Alfred; and Tenud. Leander, 4,391,979, CI. 548-194.000.
Terakura, Yukio: See—
Kubo. Seitoku; Kuramochi. Koujiro; and Terakura. Yukio,
4.391.166. CI. 74-869000.
Teramachi. Hiroshi. Linear beanng unit. 4.391.473, CI. 308-6.00C.
Terashima. Akira: See—
Yoshizawa, Naomi; and Terashima. Akira. 4,392,244. CI.
455-79.000.
Terry, Richard H.: See-
Mitchell. Ernst K.; and Terry, Richard H.. 4.391.204. CI.
109-39.000.
Tetra Pak Developpement SA: See—
Rausing. Hans. 4.391.385. CI. 220-307.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
Sung. Rodney L.; Sweeney. William M.; and Crawford, Wheeler
C. 4.391,610. CI. 44-56.000.
Virk. Kashmir S.. 4,391.095. CI. 60-286.000.
Texas Iron Works. Inc.: See —
Baker. Samuel F.; and Arnold, Ronald D.. 4.391.325. CI.
166-208.000.
PI 38
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Thennon Manufacturing Company: See —
Goss. David C; and Springs. Daniel R., 4.392,051, CI. 219-528.000
Theurer. Josef; Hansmann. Johann; and Riessberger, Klaus, to Franz
Plasser Bahnbaumaschinen-Industriegesellschaft m.b.H. Measuring
apparatus for rail head running surface irregularities. 4,391,134, CI.
73-146.000.
Thies, Peter W.; and David, Samuel, to Kali-Chemie Pharma GmbH.
2.9-Dioxa tricyclo [4,3.1,0^'^] decane compounds and process of
making same. 4.391.819. CI. 424-278.000.
Thomas & Belts Corporation: See —
Izraeli, Hyman, 4.391,661, CI. 156-49.000.
Thomas. Reese R.: See —
Pickens. Robert C. Jr.; Thomas. Reese R.; and Somerville. Ronald,
4.391.866. CI. 428-92.000.
Thomasson. Ronald G.: See-
Lewis, James C; Miller, Jerry W.; Simpson, Clyde D.; and
Thomasson, Ronald G., 4,392,104, CI. 324-54.000.
Thompson, David J.: See —
Harrison, Kenneth J.; Raynes. Edward P.; Saunders. Frances C;
and Thompson. David J., 4.391.489. CI. 350-349.000.
Thompson. Thomas C, to Quest Medical. Inc. Intravenous drug addi-
tive delivery system with electronic control. 4,391,598, CI.
604-65.000.
Thomson - CSF: See —
Benoit-Gonin, Roger; Berger. Jean L.; and Coutures, Jean L.,
4,392,124, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Del Giudice, Michel, 4,392,255, CI. 455-328.000.
Papuchon. Michel; and Puech, Claude. 4.391.486, CI. 350-96.140.
Volluet. Gerard; and Hartemann. Pierre, 4,392,115, CI.
333-141.000.
Thorn Emi Domestic Electrical Appliances Limited: See —
Child, Robert P.; and Charies, Barry G., 4,391,762, CI. 261-
121.00R.
Thomelow. Alec: See —
Bristow. Ian T.; and Thomelow, Alec, 4.391,569. CI. 417-302.000.
Thunberg. Svante. Heat exchanger in plants for ventilating rooms or
buildings. 4.391.321. CI. 165-54.000.
Thurston. Michael E.; Cassada. William A.. Ill; and Schardein. Daniel
J, to Reynolds Metals Company. Treatment for the alleviation of
high temperature oxidation of aluminum. 4,391,655, CI. 148-20.600.
Thyssen Industrie AG: See—
Benthake, Heinz; Kronert, Curt; and Kunnen, Josef, 4,391,163, CI.
74-768.000.
Tibbals, Edward C. Jr.. to Loeffler, William R. Electric motor drive
with infmitely variable speed transmission. 4,391,156, CI. 74-336.500.
Tibbetts, Gary G.. to General Motors Corporation. Method for grow-
ing graphite fibers. 4.391.787. CI. 423-447.300.
Tidstrom. Erling, to Aktiebolaget Bofors. Combat vehicle. 4,391,179.
CI. 89-46.000.
Tiefel, Thomas H.: See —
Jin, Sungho; and Tiefel, Thomas H., 4,391.656, CI. 148-102.000.
Til Corporation: See —
Wortman, Donald W., 4,392,225, CI. 370-75.000.
Time and Frequency Technology, Inc.: See-
Eckels, Calvin; and James, John, 4.392,248, CI. 455-161.000.
Timex Corporation: See—
Yokota, Dick; Kuty. David; and Kinter. Malcolm, 4,391,531, CI.
368-239.000.
Tincher. Cline A.: See-
Schwartz. Ellen S.; Tincher, Cline A.; and Maxwell, Jerrold F.,
4.391,722. CI. 252-73.000.
TJT Food Flavoring. Inc.: See —
Fiscella. James T.. 4.391.834, CI. 426-565.000.
Tobin, Curtis L.: See —
Ciarlei, Joseph A.; Tobin, Curtis L.; and Jennings, William B.,
4,391,322, CI. 165-125.000.
Tobioka, Fumio: See —
Kitane, Syoiti; Honjo. Shigeru; Ohe. Kuniyoshi; and Tobioka.
Fumio. 4,391,658, CI. 148-188.000.
Tobita, Takashi: See —
Kogoma, Kiyoshi; Ohashi, Yu; Niizeki. Jiro; Sone, Norio; and
Tobita, Takashi, 4.391.994. CL 568-593.000.
Tokai Metals Company Limited: See—
Hirata, Isao. 4.391,366, CI. 206-218.000.
Tokarzewski. Richard J.: See—
Sprecker. Mark A.; Hanna. Marie R.; Tokarzewski, Richard J.;
Belko, Robert P.; Watkins, Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H.,
4,391.284. CI. 131-276.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Kitane. Syoiti; Honjo. Shigeru; Ohe, Kuniyoshi; and Tobioka,
Fumio, 4,391,658. CI. 148-188.000.
Kuniyoshi, Masateru, 4,392,099, CI. 318-797.000.
Minemura, Koichi, 4,392,160, CI. 358-327.000.
Niioka, Takeharu; and Kobayashi, Isao, 4,392,246, CI. 455-158.000.
Shinozaki, Satoshi, 4,391,033, CI. 29-576.00W.
Takigami, Katsuhiko; and Takeuchi, Minami, 4,392,175, CI.
361-88.000.
Tsunoda, Sachio; and Sugisita, Kaneo, 4,391,097. CI. 60-398.000.
Tomita, Yoshiaki, to Yamaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha. Carburetor
actuating system for V-engines. 4,391,261, CI. 123-584.000.
Tomita, Yoshifumi; and Nakai, Hiromitsu, to Hitachi, Ltd. Method of
manufacturing fluorescent screens of cathode ray tubes. 4,391,885, CI.
430-28.000.
Tomoe Special Machine Co., Ltd.: See —
Watanabe, Michitoshi, 4,391.210. CI. 112-104.000.
Toppan Printing Co., Ltd.: See —
Suzuki, Teruo. 4,391,899, CI. 430-307.000.
Toray Silicone Company, Ltd.: See —
ShirahaU, Akihiko, 4,391,963, CI. 528-37.000.
Torberger, Finn. Arrangement for passing a first liquid close to, but
without mixing it with a second liquid, for example an arrangement
for sea water desalination. 4,391,676, CI. 202-173.000.
Toro Company, The: See —
Porter-Bennett, David E., 4,391,041, CI. 30-296.00R.
Torres, Luis R. Telephone handset lifting device. 4,392,017, CI. 179-
l.OHS.
Tortella, Michele. Variable speed digging machine provided with a
gearbox having an orienuble drive. 4,391,154, CI. 74-15.400.
Toshiba Electric Equipment Corporation: See—
Ide, Katsuyuki; Ohe. Kempo; and Kobayashi, Hisao, 4,392,086, CI.
315-174.000.
Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko: See—
Nishikawa, Masao; Toshimitsu, Yoshihiko; Aoyama, Toshihiko;
Takaoka, Tokuro; Aoki, Takashi; and Sato, Yoichi, 4,391,342, Cl!
180-143.000.
Towmotor Corporation: See —
Jirousek, Norman F.; and Shipitalo, William M., 4,391,351, CI.
188-18.00A.
Toyo Boseki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Imamura, Yoshio. 4.391,616, CI. 55-35.000.
Toyoda Koki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Munekau, Kenichi; Unno, Kunihiko; and Shimizu, Norihiko.
4,391,066, CI. 51-165.870.
Toyoda. Takashi; Shishido, Tadao; and Tsujikawa, Teruaki. to Fuji
Photo Film Co.. Ltd. Process for development-processing silver
halide light-sensitive material. 4,391,900, CI. 430-355.000.
Toyono. Tsutomu: See —
Tamura. Yasuyuki; Kanbe, Junichiro; Nakamura, Shunji; Toyono,
Tsutomu; and Takahashi, Tohru, 4.391.891, CI. 430-120.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Bessho. Hironori. 4.391,243. CI. 123-325.000.
Ito. Sumio. 4,391.253. CI. 123-478.000.
Kobashi, Mamoru; Tanaka, Shinichiro; and Saji, Hideo, 4.391,244.
CI. 123-339.000.
Kubo. Seitoku; Kuramochi, Koujiro; and Terakura. Yukio.
4,391,166, CI. 74-869.000.
Nakano, Jiro; and Ono, Hironobu, 4,391,130, CI. 73-117.300.
Sawada, Hiroshi; and Demura, Takayuki, 4,391,256, CI.
123-489.000.
Trane Company, The: See—
Wendschlag, James C, 4,391,104, CI. 62-79.000.
Transaction Technology, Inc.: See-
Sears, Michael L.. 4,392,023, CI. 179-2.0DP.
Treasurywala, Adi: See —
Sestanj, Kazimir; Abraham, Nedumparambil A.; Bellini, Francesco;
and Treasurywala, Adi, 4,391,816, CI. 424-274.000.
Tremblay, Jean: See—
Tremblay, Richard; and Tremblay, Jean, 4,392,240, CI
378-207.000.
Tremblay. Richard; and Tremblay, Jean, to Ministere Des Affaires
Sociales. Method and device for sampling radiation from X-ray
machines for analysis. 4.392.240. CI. 378-207.000.
Trenkle. Robert W.: See—
Mookherjee, Braja D.; Trenkle, Robert W.; Chant, Bernard J.;
Ouwerkerk, Anton V.; Kamath, Venkatesh; and Mussinan, Cyn-
thia J., 4,391,717, CI. 252-8.600.
Trevarrow, David. Radial deformation means for cylindrical objects
such as wheels. 4,391,120, CI. 72-403.000.
Trinh, Eugene: See —
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Trinh, Eugene; and Wang, Taylor G., 4,391,129, CI.
73-64.400.
Troebel, Werner; and Bottcher, Martin, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft.
Low-voltage protective circuit breaker with a forked locking lever.
4,392,036. CI. 200-322.000.
Trudel. Murray L.: See —
Pfeifer. Robert F.; and Trudel. Murray L.. 4,391,650, CI. 148-1.500.
Trumble, William P.; Finn, Roger C; and Jackson, Charles F. C, to
Northern Telecom Limited. Telephone cable splices. 4,392,014. CI.
174-92.000.
TRW Inc.: See—
Kiefer, Karl, 4,391,330, CI. 166-341.000.
Tsang, Paul J.: See—
Homg, Cheng T.; Schwenker, Robert O.; and Tsang, Paul J.,
4,392,149, CI. 357-49.000.
Tsao, Utah, to Lummus Company, The. Recovery of heat and vapor-
ized material from a reaction effluent. 4,391,880, CI. 423-659.000.
Tsuchida, Takayasu: See —
Matsui, Hiroshi; Tsuchida. Takayasu; and Nakamori, Shigeru.
4,391,907, CI. 435-115.000.
Tsuda, Yukio: See —
Yamada. Takaaki; Osakabe, Yoshio; and Tsuda, Yukio, 4,392,253.
CI. 455-165.000.
Tsuji, Masuo, to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Integrated circuit
for timepiece. 4,392,216. CI. 368-71.000.
Tsuji, Nobuo: See —
Yamada. Yasuyuki; Akashi, Goro; Tsuji, Nobuo; Mukaida, Yoshito;
and Fujiyama. Masaaki. 4.391,851, CI. 427-130.000.
Tsuji. Sadahiko: See—
Tajima. Akira; and Tsuji. Sadahiko, 4,391.493. CI. 3SO-422.000.
JULY 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 39
Tsujikawa, Teruaki: See —
Toyoda, Takashi; Shishido, Tadao; and Tsujikawa, Teruaki,
4,391,900, CI. 430-355.000.
Tsunawaki, Kiyokazu: See —
Suzuki, Togi; Tsunawaki, Kiyokazu; Wada, Osamu; and Kimura,
Akio, 4.391,872. CI. 428-224.000.
Tsunekawa. Tokuichi. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Camera with expo-
sure measuring system. 4.391.500. CI. 354-31.000.
Tsunoda. Sachio; and Sugisita. Kaneo. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Pumping up hydroelectric power plant. 4,391,097. CI.
60-398.000.
Tubing Technology, Inc.: See —
Keathley, Anthony C; Stanton, Howard F.; and Wagle, Mahesh
M., 4,391,114, CI. 72-78.000.
Tiilccfl T ^V * See
Staempfii. Jackie, 4,391.272, CI. 604-110.000.
Tuominen, Tapio K.: See —
Aaltonen, Olavi A.; Malmstrom. Rolf E.; Nermes. Esko O.; and
Tuominen. Tapio K.. 4.391.632, CI. 75-26.000.
Turner. Larry G. Steam injection apparatus. 4.391,229. CI. 123-25.00B.
Tutt, Kingsley J.: See —
Peck, Alan M.; Tutt, Kingsley J.; and Walter, Andrew G. N.,
4,391,011, CI. 12-l.OOB.
Tyler, Truman V.; and Sprague. Robert B.. to Beall, Richard W.. Jr.;
Favara. Louis J.; Gausewitz. Richard L.; Carr. Richard F.; Rothen-
berg. Allan; and Edwards. Elgin. Reverse-osmosis water purifier
apparatus and method. 4,391.712. CI. 210-652.000.
Tzeng, Huann-Jang. Electronic device for arc welding equipment.
4.392.046, CI. 219-130.100.
Ubusawa, Fumiyoshi: See —
Ohhashi, Shiro; Ubusawa. Fumiyoshi; Iwasaki. Shoji; and Manaka.
Tetsuyuki. 4.392.243, CI. 455-74.000.
Uemura. Sdichi; Yamamoto. Shunichi; Hirose. Takao; Takashima.
Hiroaki; and Kato. Osamu. to Nippon Oil Co.. Ltd. Starting pitches
for carbon fibers. 4,391.788. CI. 423-447.600.
Ueno, Kunihiko; Ishii, Akiyasu; Hukuda, Masazi; and Nakayama.
Kazuyuki, to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Process for
the manufacture of halogen-containing resin particles of larger bulk
density comprising mixing particles of the resin with inorganic salts,
treated in a mixture in a gaseous phase and separating the inorganic
salt from the product. 4.391.763, CI. 264-15.000.
Ueyanagi, Kiichi: See —
Yokozawa. Norio; Takasugi, Wasao; Yonezawa. Seiji; and
Ueyanagi. Kiichi, 4.392.219. CI. 369-44.000.
UUman, Edwin F.: See—
Litman. David J.; and Ullman, Edwin F., 4,391.904. CI. 435-7.000.
Umezawa, Hamao; Aoyagi. Takaaki; Shirai. Tadashi; Nishizawa, Rinzo;
Suzuki. Masao; and Saino. Tetsushi. to Nippon Kayaku Kabushiki
Kaisha. Process for producing threo-3-amino-2-hydroxybutanoyl-
aminoacetic acids, as well as novel intermediates therefor and process
for producing them. 4.391.986. CI. 562-444.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See—
Burdett, Ian D., 4.391.919, CI. 518-725.000.
Chan, John K., 4,391,759, CI. 260-453.300.
Union Oil Company of California: See—
Gallus, Julius P.. 4.391.329. CI. 166-336.000.
Union Special Corporation: See-
Hsiao. James C. 4,391,216. CI. 112-316.000.
United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority: See—
Bentley. Peter D.; and Pollock. James F.. 4,392,049, CI.
219-401.000.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. The Secretary
of State for Defence in Her Briunnic Majesty's Government of the:
See —
Harrison. Kenneth J.; Raynes, Edward P.; Saunders, Frances C;
and Thompson, David J., 4,391,489, CI. 350-349.000.
U.S. Computer Systems, Inc.: See —
Price, Ronn; Brown, Gary; Muraski, Andrew A.; and Muraski.
William C. 4.392.119, CI. 34O-38.00L.
United Sutes of America
Agriculture: See —
Jurd, Leonard, 4,391.828. CI. 424-340.000.
Taylor, Robert A., 4,391,153, CI. 73-864.410.
Air Force: See —
Corley. Robert C; and Myers. Frederick F., Jr., 4.391,660. CI.
149-19.900.
Army: See —
Betts, Robert E.. 4,391,196. CI. 102-202.000.
Freeman. Wallace L.. 4,391.678. CI. 204-15.000.
Holmes, Allen B., 4,391,299, CI. 137-831.000.
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; and Ritchey,
Charles R., 4,391,799, CI. 424-132.000.
Pagano, Victor H., 4,391,178, CI. 89-36.00H.
Rebeschi, Thomas J.; and Kapoor, Mohan L., 4.392.084. CI.
315-169.400.
Saylcs. David C. 4,391.993. CI. 568-4.000.
Commerce: See —
McBee, William C; and Sullivan, Thomas A., 4,391,969. CI.
528-389.000.
Energy: .See —
Brassell, Gilbert W.; and Lewis, John, Jr., 4,391,873. CI.
428-297.000.
Cook. Kenneth V.; Cunningham. Robert A.. Jr.; and Murrin.
Horace T.. 4.391.143. CI. 73-623.000.
Galloway. Ten^ R.. 4.391.467. CI. 299-2.000.
Haldipur. Gaurang B.; Anderson. Richard G.; and Cherish,
Peter, 4,391.611, CI. 48-197.00R.
Land. Cecil E.; and Peercy. Paul S., 4.391.901. CI. 430-495.000.
Maschke, Alfred W.. 4.392.080. CI. 315-5.410.
Raymond. Leonard S.. 4,391.846. CI. 427-99.000.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration; administrator;
with respect to an invention of:
Trinh. Eugene; and Wang. Taylor G. System for monitoring
physical characteristics of fluids. 4.391.129. CI. 73-64.400.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See —
Cantrell. John H.. Jr.; and Heyman. Joseph S.. 4,391,142, CI.
73-610.000.
Kalvinskas, John J.; and Rohatgi, Naresh K.. 4,391,609, CI.
44-l.OSR.
Owen. Robert B.; and Witherow. William K.. 4.391.518. CI.
356-129.000.
Pruett. Edwin C; Robertson. Kem B.; and Loughead. Tomas E..
4.391.423. CI. 244-161.000.
Webster. Urry D.. 4.391.514. CI. 356-1.000.
Nivv* Sec
Forrester, Howard M.; and Crisler, John R., 4,391,515, CI.
356-5.000.
Hurst, Dennis P., 4,392,241, CI. 455-26.000.
Perkins, Henry T.; Saunders. Kim D.; and Green, Albert W.,
4,391.136. CI. 73-189.000.
Yoder. Max N.. 4.391.651. CI. 148-1.500.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See—
Alting. Cornells L.; Brehm. Rudolf; and Haisma. Jan. 4.391.622. CI.
65-66.000.
Boullart. Carolus J.; and LiefVens. Adrianus C. H. J., 4,392,169, CI.
360-130.330.
Hinz. Hans D.; and Lobl. Herbert. 4.392.194. CI. 346-154.000.
Janssens. Wilhelmus G. E.; and Merges. Heinz. 4.391,047. CI.
34-97.000.
Joormann. Hendrik J. M.. 4.392.167. CI. 360-120.000.
Lersmacher. Bemhard; and Lydtin. Hans. 4,392,238, CI.
378-144.000.
Meden-Piesslinger, Gertraud A. A.; and Van de Heuvel, Johannes
H. P., 4,391,915. CI. 501-48.000.
Rijckaert. Albert M. A.; de Niet. Edmond; and Beun. Jacobus P..
4.392,163, CI. 360-76.000.
Van de Bult, Oeike, 4,391,035. CI. 29-603.000.
van Deursen. Theodonis H. M.. 4.392.247. CI. 455-161.000.
United States Steel Corporation: See-
Martin. Wayne A., 4,391,118, CI. 72-356.000.
United Sutes Tennis Gut Association, Inc.; See—
Salsky. Jerome; Janis. Patrick K.; and Branen. Kenneth E..
4.391.088. CI. 57-234.000.
United Technologies Corporation: See-
Fischer. William C; Adams. Don L.; Verzella. David J.; and
Wright, Stuart C. 4.392.203. CI. 364-434.000.
University of Rochester. The: See—
Kende. Andrew S.; Curran. Dennis P.; King, Margaret L.; and
Feldstein. Neil A.. 4.391.982. CI. 549-433.000.
Unno. Kunihiko: See —
Munekata. Kenichi; Unno, Kunihiko; and Shimizu, Norihiko,
4.391.066. CI. 51-165.870.
Upjohn Company, The: See-
Lin, Chung-Yuan. 4.391.751. CI. 260-239.30R.
Upton. Garthop. Shaded lamp for reading and like purposes. 4.392.190.
CI. 362-281.000.
Uragami. Hideaki. Magnetic medical treatment member. 4.391.270. CI.
128-1.300.
Uram. John R.. Jr.. to Goodyear Aerospace Corporation. High temper-
ature thermobarrier compositions. 4.391.924. CI. 521-178.000.
Urani. Angelo. to McGraw-Edison Company. In-line fuse holder for
miniature plug-in fuse. 4.391.485. CI. 339-191.00S.
Urban. Milfred W. Fuel conditioner and method of conditioning fuel to
an internal combustion engine therewith. 4.391,259. CI. 123-557.000.
Usami, Kazuhide: See —
Takechi, Hiroshi; Katoh, Hiroshi; Koyama, Kazuo; and Usami,
Kazuhide. 4.391,653, CI. 148-12.00C.
Usami, Kiyoshi: See —
Inoue, Yozo; Ito, Yoji; Hara. Kiyoshi; Usami. Kiyoshi; and Iwata.
Yasuhiro. 4.391.320, CI. 165-2.000.
USM Corporation: See-
Peck. Alan M.; Tutt, Kingsley J.; and Walter, Andrew G. N.,
4,391,011, CI. 12-l.OOB.
Vac-Tec Systems, Inc.: See-
Morrison. Charles F.. Jr.. 4.391.697. CI. 204-298.000.
Valmet OY: See—
Koski. Erkki. 4.39 1 .2 1 7. CI. 1 1 8-405.000.
Lehtinen. Antti. 4.391,672. CI. 162-192.000.
Van Dam Machine Corporation of America: See —
Fardin. Carlos. 4.391.560. CI. 414-107.000.
van Laack. Schmitz & Eltschig GmbH u. Co.: See-
Hoffmann. Rolf. 4.391.394. CI. 223-37.000.
Van de Bult. Oelke. to U.S. Philips Corporation Method of mounting
a magnetic head unit on a movable carrier. 4.391.035, CI. 29-603.000
Van de Heuvel. Johannes H. P.: See—
Meden-Piesslinger. Gertraud A. A.; and Van de Heuvel. Johannes
H. P., 4.391.915. CI. 501-48.000.
van den Berg. Johan H.. to Champion Spark Plug Europe S.A. Pivot
connection for wiper blades. 4.391.015. CI. 15-250.420.
van der Velden. Hendricus J., to Stork Screens. B. V. Method of making
a sleeve for a printing cylinder. 4.391.898. CI. 430-306.000.
PI 40
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
van dcr Zypen, Eugen: See —
Fankhauser, Franz; van der Zypen, Eugen; and Roussel, Philippe,
4,391.275. CI. 128-303.100.
van Deursen. Theodorus H. M.. to U.S. Philips Corporation. Broadcast
receiver with search tuning. 4,392.247, CI. 455-161.000.
Vangbo, Hakan; Lundin, Bertil; and Moklint, Oivind. to Aktiebolaget
Carl Munters. Method of preparing cells to enable one fluid to be
affected by another fluid. 4,391,667, CI. 156-205.000.
van Lier, Glenn: See —
Fusco, Gerard A.; and van Lier, Glenn, 4,391,638, CI. 106-20.000.
van Lit. Klaas J., to S. C. Johnson & Son, Inc. Electrically heated vapor
dispenser. 4,391,781, CI. 422-125.000.
Van Noy, John H.: See —
Frind. Gerhard; Carroll. James J.; and Van Noy. John H.,
4,392,035, CI. 200-144.00B.
van Zanten, Anton, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Method and apparatus for
detecting engine knock in an internal combustion engine. 4,391,126,
CI. 73-35.000.
Vaponics Inc.: See —
Smith, Verity C, 4,391,713, CI. 210-652.000.
Varco International, Inc.: See —
Boyadjieff, George I.; and Campbell, Andrew B., 4,391,333, CI.
166-379.000.
Vari-Litc L.td ■ S^—
Bomhorst; James M., 4,392,187, CI. 362-233.000.
Vamey, John C: See —
Freer, William G.; Vamey, John C; and Williamson, John H.,
4,391,491, CI. 350-341.000.
VEB Werk fuer Femsehelektronik Berlin im VEB Kombinat Mikro-
elektronik: See —
Kuschel. Frank; Demus, Dietrich; Pfeiffer, Doris; and Deutscher,
Hans-Joachim, 4,391,730, CI. 252-299.100.
Velmin, Rolf; Kovatch, Michael S.; and Mautz, Gus H., Jr., to Republic
Steel Corporation. Coke delivery apparatus and method. 4,391,674,
CI. 201-41.000.
Verdol S.A.: See—
Charbonnier, Simon, 4,391.090, CI. 57-279.000.
Verhelst, Willem F.: See—
Schreurs, Petrus H. M.; and VerheUt, Willem F., 4,391,962, CI.
526-200.000.
Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala: See—
Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja, Gergely; Kovacz, Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4,391,821. CI. 424-283.000.
Vermillion, Don W.; Gromek, Francis S.; and Bair, Scott S., Ill, to
Singer Company. The. Vacuum cleaner with wheel and nozzle height
adjusting mechanism. 4,391,018, CI. 15-339.000.
Vermillion, Eugene F., to Columbus Show Case Company, The. Free
standing wall. 4,39 1 ,069, CI. 52- 1 26.400.
Verzella, David J.: See —
Fischer, William C; Adams, Don L.; Verzella, David J.; and
Wright, Stuart C, 4.392,203, CI. 364-434.000.
Vesley, George F.. to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
Photoactive mixture of acrylic monomers and chromophore-sub-
stituted halomethyl-1-triazine. 4,391,687, CI. 204-159.160.
Vetco Offshore, Inc.: See —
Jones, Darrell L., 4,391,554, CI. 405-224.000.
Vetter, Rudi O. H.: See—
Hanlon, Richard J.; and Vetter, Rudi O. H., 4,391,408, CI. 339-
75.0OM.
Victor Company of Japan, Ltd.: See —
Ota, Yoshihiko; and Kosaka, Yositeru, 4,392,161, CI. 360-10.300.
Vietor, Francis H., to J. I. Case Company. Bucket position indicator
assembly. 4,391,563, CI. 414-698.000.
Villiger, Alois: See —
Boiler. Arthur; Schadt, Martin; and Villiger, Alois, 4,391,731, CI.
252-299.620.
Vincent, Coye T.: See-
Ford, Franklin C; Hill, Oilman A.; and Vincent, Coye T.,
4,391,337, CI. 175-4.600.
Virag, Sandor: See —
Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja. Gergely; Kovacz. Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4,391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
Virk, Kashmir S., to Texaco Inc. Internal combustion engine with
exhaust filter rejuvenation. 4,391,095, CI. 60-286.000.
Vizelyi. Gabor. Logical skill toy. 4,391,445, CI. 273-158.000.
viattas, Isidores, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. 5(1-Piperazinyl-
(imidazo[2,l-bl[l,3,5]benzothiadiazepines. 4,391,808, CI. 424-250.000.
Vock, Manfred H.: See—
Sprecker, Mark A.; Hanna, Marie R.; Tokarzewski, Richard J.;
Belko, Robert P.; Watkins, Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H.,
4,391,284, CI. 131-276.000.
Vodyanitsky, Vilen: See —
Boverman, Bentsion; and Vodyanitsky, Vilen, 4,391,170, CI.
83-71.000.
Voest-Alpine Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Lindquist, Herman A., 4,392,063, C\. 290-54.000.
Voetz, Franz J.: See —
Eckardt, Peter; and Voetz, Franz J., 4,391,644, CI. 106-85.000.
Voith Getriebe KG: See—
Polzer, Erich; RueU, Gottfried; Schmolz, Hubert; and Pochon,
Remy, 4,391,096, CI. 60-335.000.
Volkmann GmbH & Co.: See—
Greive, Aloys; Horstmann, Aloys; and Stupirak, Wilhelm,
4,391,087, CL 57-58.520.
Volluet, Gerard; and Hartemann, Pierre, to Thomson-CSF. Volume
magnetostatic wave device. 4,392,115, CI. 333-141.000.
Vorbruggen, Helmut, to Schering Aktiengesellschaft. Derivatives of
antiphlogistically effective carboxylic acids, their preparation and
medicinal use. 4,391,814, CI. 424-272.000.
Voropaev, Albert A.: See —
Bykhovsky, David G.; Voropaev, Albert A.; Olennikov, Evgeny
F.; and Lopatina, Alia V., 4,392,047, CI. 219-145.210.
W. C. Heraeus GmbH: See-
Fabian, Peter; and Muller, Theo, 4,391,879, CI. 428-551.000.
W. R. Grace & Co., Cryovac Division: See—
Bomstein, Norman D.; and Walters, Johnnie J., 4,391,862, CI.
428-35.000.
Wacker-Chemie GmbH: See—
Kleine, Willi; and Frey, Werner, 4,391,960, CI. 526-74.000.
Wada, Masaru: See —
Itoh, Kunio; Sugino, Takashi; Wada, Masaru; and Shimizu,
Hirokazu, 4,392,227, CI. 372-46.000.
Wada, Osamu: See —
Suzuki, Togi; Tsunawaki, Kiyokazu; Wada, Osamu; and Kimura,
Akio, 4,391,872, CI. 428-224.000.
Wada, Shohachi: See —
Mitra, Gautam; Coan, Michael H.; and Wada, Shohachi, 4,391,746,
CI. 260-1 12.00B.
Wada, Takuo: See —
Ohyama, Hiroshi; Morita, Ken; Wada, Takuo; and Miyahara,
Masahiko, 4.391,804, CI. 424-245.000.
Wada, Yasusuke: See —
Maeda, Umio; Shoji, Hirofumi; Wada, Yasusuke; and Horie,
Yoshio, 4,391,743. CI. 252-518.000.
Wagenaar. Loren B.: See —
Runnels. Robert W.; Wagenaar, Loren B.; Luke, Louis E.; and
Bresnahan, Thomas P., 4.392.015. CI. 174-143.000.
Waggoner. Marion G.. to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Molding blends. 4,391,936, CI. 524-89.000.
Wagle, Mahesh M.: See —
Keathley, Anthony C; Stanton, Howard F.; and Wagle, Mahesh
M, 4,391,114, CI. 72-78.000.
Wagner, John P., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Coalescer
apparatus for electrostatically resolving emulsions. 4,391,698, CI.
204-302.000.
Wakabayashi, Shigemasa, legal representative: See—
Wakabayashi, Takuo, deceased; Wakabayashi, Shigemasa, legal
representative; Tahara, Iwao; Aihara. Toshiharu; Takahashi.
Naoki; and Matsuo. Yushin. 4.391,530, CI. 368-63.000.
Wakabayashi, Takuo, deceased; by Wakabayashi, Shigemasa, legal
represenUtive; Tahara, Iwao; Aihara, Toshiharu; Takahashi, Naoki;
and Matsuo, Yushin, to Casio Computer Co., Ltd. Electronic time-
piece. 4,391,530, CI. 368-63.000.
Waki, Masahiko, to Citizen Watch Co. Ltd. Back cover fixing structure
for wristwatch. 4,391,533, CI. 368-281.000.
Walck, Vernon R. Shock damping face guard strap for football helmets.
4,390,995, CI. 2-9.000.
Waldrop, T. William, to Sperry Corporation. Automatic latch for
unloading auger. 4,391,363, CI. 198-865.000.
Walraevens, Rene: See —
Hardy, Nicolas; Lerot, Luc; and Walraevens, Rene, 4,391,753, CI.
549-525.000.
Walser, Reimund: See —
Holan, George; and Walser, Reimund, 4,391,820, CI. 424-282.000.
Walter. Andrew G. N.: See-
Peck. Alan M.; Tutt, Kingsley J.; and Walter, Andrew G. N.,
4,391,011, CI. 12-l.OOB.
Walter, Karl-Heinz, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Integratable activa-
tion module for passive electrooptical displays. 4,392,131, CI.
340-803.000.
Walter Richard T ' See^
Saar, David A.; and Walter, Richard T., 4,392,101, CI. 320-20.000.
Walters, Johnnie J.: See —
Bomstein, Norman D.; and Walters, Johnnie J., 4,391,862, CI.
428-35.000.
Wang, Chih C; and Bates, Ronald F., to RCA Corporation. Bis(hy-
droxylkyl)disiloxanes and lubricant compositions thereof 4,391,720,
CI. 252-49.600.
Wang Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Nelson, Alfred M.; and Rasekhi, Houshang, 4,392,179, CI.
361-234.000.
Wang, Taylor G.: See —
United States of America, National Aeronautics and Space Admin-
istration; Trinh, Eugene; and Wang, Taylor G., 4,391,129, CI.
73-64.400.
Wang, Teh P.; and Kom, Elmer J., to Amax Inc. Method for detecting
whether dissimilar metals are being welded. 4,392,044, CI.
219-118.000.
Wang, Yu-Chang J.; Dursch Friedrich; O'Laughlin, Richard L.; and
Prusik, Thaddeus, to E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc. Steroid monohy-
drates, formulations containing same and method. 4,391,755, CI.
260-397.450.
Wamer, Barry N., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Static correction for
magnetotelluric data. 4,392,109, CI. 324-350.000.
Warner-Lambert Company: See —
Elslager, Edward F., 4,391,809, CI. 424-251.000.
Washington, Leroy, Jr. Packaging and dispensing system. 4,391,368, CI.
206-484.000.
July 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 41
<;
Watanabe, Kunihiko: See —
Niinomi, Naoyuki; and Watanabe, Kunihiko, 4,391,176, CI.
84-1.170.
Watanabe, Michitoshi, to Tomoe Special Machine Co., Ltd. Tag attach-
ing machine. 4,391,210, CI. 112-104.000.
Waterbury Companies, Inc.: See —
Marcy, Russell A., 4,391,111, CI. 70-162.000.
Waters, Kenneth H.: Sec-
Coon, Julian B.; Fowler, James C; Payton, Charles E.; and Waters,
Kenneth H., 4,391,336, CI. 175-45.000.
Watkins, Hugh: See—
Sprecker, Mark A.; Hanna, Marie R.; Tokarzewski, Richard J.;
Belko, Robert P.; Watkins, Hugh; and Vock, Manfred H.,
4,391,284, CI. 131-276.000.
Watson, David D.: See—
Akerberg, Denis W.; and Watson, David D., 4,391,946, CI.
524-849.000.
Watson, W. Keith R. Controlled solar heating and heat retention of
liquid. 4,391,269, CI. 126-437.000.
Watts, Verne C: See-
Weber, Henry J.; Hoechst, Lonnie D.; Christensen, James R.; and
Watts, Verne C, 4,391,344, CI. 180-271.000.
Way, Peter F. Process for the recovery of vaporized sublimates from
gas streams. 4,391.617. CI. 55-82.000.
Wayte. Alline R.: See—
Bumett, George H.; Claflin, Warren E.; Lanzillotti, Harry V.;
Lilly, A. Clifton, Jr.; Nienow, John F.; Osdene, Thomas S.; and
Wayte, Alhne R., 4,391,285, CI. 131-364.000.
Webb, Jimmy L.: See —
Cleveland William K. S.; Webb, Jimmy L.; and Orlando, Charles
M., 4,391,996, CI. 568-726.000.
Weber, Henry J.; Hoechst, Lonnie D.; Christensen, James R.; and
Watts, Vcme C., to Clark Equipment Company. Loader operator
restraint. 4,391,344, CI. 180-271.000.
Weber, William B.: See—
Ishler, William E.; Weber, William B.; and Giudici, Livio L.,
4,392,076, CI. 313-318.000.
Webster, Harold F.: See—
Glascock. Homer H., II; Houston, Douglas E.; McLaughlin, Mi-
chael H.; and Webster, Harold F., 4,392,153, CI. 357-82.000.
Webster, Larry D.. to United States of America. National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Sidelooking laser altimeter for a flight
simulator. 4.391.514. CI. 356-1.000.
Wehrli, Rudolf: See—
Hoegerie. Karl; Gsell, Laurenz; and Wehrli. Rudolf, 4,391,810, CI.
424-251.000.
Weidler, Erhard A., to RUD-Kettenfabrik Rieger & Dietz GmbH u.
Co. Tire chain. 4,391,313, CI. 152-171.000.
Weidner, Barry. Method of producing a looped strand lacing member
for use in transplanting trees. 4,391,030, CI. 29-509.000.
Weiertz, Stig H. A.; and Janiszewski, Grzegorz K., to AB Volvo.
Overdrive for motor vehicles. 4,391,164, CI. 74-78 l.OOR.
Weinberg, Alan: See —
O'Sullivan, Dermot; and Weinberg. Alan, 4,392,103, CI.
323-222.000.
Weinhold, Heinz: See —
Langenberg. Helmut; Grisebach. Hans-Theodor; and Weinhold,
Heinz, 4.391.470, CI. 299-11.000.
Weirich. Walter; Dettmers. Michael; Becker, Kunibert; and Rosenberg,
Harry, to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte Westfalia. Hydraulic control
systems for mining apparatus. 4,391,181, CI. 91-29.000.
Weirich, Walter; and Heitkamp, Herbert, to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte
Westfalia. Hydraulic control systems for and methods of controlling
the operation of tunnelling apparatus. 4,391,553, CI. 405-141.000.
V^ci&s Bernard J * Sec
bay, WUliam J.; and Weiss, Bernard J., 4,392,038, CI. 219-10.55D.
Welles, Kenneth B., II, to General Electric Company. Capacitive
commutating filter. 4,392,068, CI. 307-522.000.
Welter, Albert, to Champion Intemational Corporation. Sleeve valve
for flexible bags. 4,391,404. CI. 229-62.500.
Wendschlag, James C, to Trane Company, The. Cascade heat pump for
heating water and for cooling or heating a comfort zone. 4,391,104,
CI. 62-79.000.
Wendt, Michael, to Lyle Development, Inc. Trim press including
ejector. 4,391,171, CI. 83-82.000.
Wenk, Erich: See—
Koziol, Konrad; and Wenk, Erich, 4,391,695, CI. 204-286.000.
Wessel. Kenneth R., to Sealectro Corporation. Miniature matrix pro-
gramming board. 4.391.479. CI. 339-18.00C.
Western Electric Co.. Inc.: See —
Boggs. Luther M.; and Gardner. William B.. 4,391,516, CI.
356-73.100.
Greene, Richard A.; and Kennedy, Robert P., 4,391,038, CI.
29-829.000.
Jabben, Gary D., 4,392,181, CI. 361-401.000.
Kent, William C, 4,391,220, CI. 118-707.000.
Westem Marine Electronics, Inc.: See —
Intlekofer, Michael J.; Hanson, Jay R.; and Lee, Thomas E.,
4,392,137, CI. 343-5.0SC.
Westem Publishing Inc.: See —
Bockholt, Karlheinz H., 4,392,053, CI. 235-472.000.
Westfalia Separator AG: See —
Icking, Friedrich; and Stolte, Friedrich, 4,391,222, CI. 119-14.170.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See —
Frola, Frank V., 4.392,193, CI. 363-128.000.
Lin, Ching-Yu; and Hickam, William M.. 4,391,690, CI.
204-412.000.
Roberts. Richard D.; and Hoffman. Lester J.. 4,392,091, CI.
318-52.000.
Runnels, Robert W.; Wagenaar, Loren B.; Luke, Louis E.; and
Bresnahan, Thomas P., 4,392,015, CI. 174-143.000.
Sassano, Daniel R., 4.391,947. CI. 525-11.000.
Scala, Luciano C; and Cargnel, Louis A., 4,391,933, CI.
523-454.000.
Westvaco Corporation: See —
Brown, George N., 4,391.586, CI. 432-58.000.
Weyandt, Ronald R., to Automated Packaging Systems, Inc. Control
marking detector. 4,392,056, CI. 250-339.000.
Weyerhaeuser Company: See —
Drinon, Alva C. 4,391,405, CI. 229-31.00R.
Wheeler, William R., to Tencor Instruments. Metrology instrument for
measuring vertical proflles of integrated circuits and the like.
4,391,044, CI. 33-174.00P.
Whillock, Allan A.: See-
Self, Robert W.; and Whillock, Allan A., 4,391,833. CI.
426-523.000.
White, James S., Sr., to White, James Sanford, Sr.; and White, James
Sanford, Jr. Candle assembly including a windowsill stabilizer.
4,392.191, CI. 362-392.000.
White, James Sanford, Jr.: See —
White, James S., Sr., 4,392,191, CI. 362-392.000.
White, James Sanford, Sr.: See —
White, James S., Sr., 4,392,191, CI. 362-392.000.
Whitin Roberts Company: See —
Kamel, Fouad A., 4,391,021, CI. 19-253.000.
Whitlock, William C, III. Image projector. 4,391,499, CI. 353-122.000
Whitman Medical Corporation: See —
Sharpless. Edward N.; Gordon. Marvin; and Lichtenstein. Joseph,
4,391,283, CI. 128-725.000.
Whitney, Ralph H., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Bottle finish and closure
combination with venting slots. 4,392,055, CI. 215-307.000.
Whitworth, Edward. Propulsion drive systems. 4.391.593. CI.
440-70.000.
Wick. Gerhard; and Schulze, Helmut, to Akzo NV. Embedding mass of
polyurethane. 4.391.964, CI. 528-74.500.
Wicke, Charles A.; and Riley, Wayne C, to Emerson Electric Com-
pany. Instant hot water dispenser. 4.391.459. CI. 285-238.000
Wieland. Erich G., to Koenig & Bauer AG. Bearing arrangement for an
ink fountain in a rotary printing machine. 4,391,192, CI. 101-350.000.
Wiggins, Edmund C, to Barry-Wehmiller Company. Method of and
apparatus for compensating signal drift during container inspection.
4,391,373, CI. 209-526.000.
Wiggins Teape Group Limited, Tlie: See —
Shanton, Kenneth J., 4,391,850, CI. 427-150.000.
Wilde. Robert F. Photographic film with variable windows. 4.391.902.
CI. 430-501.000.
Wilhelm Hedrich Vakuumanlagen GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Hedrich, Wilhelm; Krumm. Heinz; and Haeuser, Erhard, 4,391,529,
CI. 366-266.000.
Wilkens, Achim, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. X-Ray diagnostic
system for angiographic x-ray photographic series. 4,392,239, Q.
378-146.000.
Will. Bemhard: See—
Schmitter, Ernst; Birzele, Paul; Buchmann. Klaus; Geitz. Gerhard;
Will, Bemhard; and Beifuss. Wolfgang, 4,392,199, CI.
364-200.000.
Williams, Raymond L., to General Electric Company. Altitude sensing
control apparatus for a gas turbine engine. 4,391,290, CI. 137-81.100.
Williamson, John H.: See —
Freer, William G.; Vamey, John C; and Williamson, John H.,
4,391,491, CI. 350-341.000.
Williamson, Richard D.; and Selinko, George J., to Motorola, Inc.
Housing arrangement with breakaway battery access door. 4,391,883,
CI. 429-97.000.
Willis, Donald H.: See—
Rinehart, James K.; Willis, Donald H.; and Luz, David W.,
4.392.090. CI. 315-411.000.
Wilson Greatbatch Ltd.: See —
Liang. Charles C; Bolster. M. Elizabeth; and Murphy, Robert M.,
4,391,729, CI. 252-182.100.
Wilson, Joseph G., to Ingersoll-Rand Company. Multi-station down-
flow centrifugal separation method and apparatus for separating
particulate matter from gases. 4.391,613. CI. 55-1.000.
Wilson. Robert W., to Powell Manufacturing Company. Inc. Tobacco
defoliating units with overlapping cutting edges. 4.391.084. CI.
56-27.500.
Windish, Michael W., to Wintec Company. Method of and apparatus
for the production of nodular (ductile) cast iron. 4,391,636, CI. 75-
130.00R.
Wintec Company: See —
Windish, Michael W., 4,391,636, CI. 75-13O.0OR.
Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation: See —
Huber, Calvin O.; Schick, Karl G.; and Cobum, Joel T., 4,391,775.
CI. 422-68.000.
Wishon, Berhl E.: See-
Michael, David J.; and Wishon, Berhl E., 4,391.917. CI.
501-100.000.
Witherow. William K.: See-
Owen. Robert B.; and Witherow, William K., 4,391,518, CI.
356-129.000.
PI 42
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 5, 1983
Witzel. Bruce E.: See—
Dybas, Richard A.; Grier, Nathaniel; and Witzel, Bruce E.,
4,391,812, CI. 424-267.000.
Wobky, Peter: See—
Bianchi, Valerio; Ehrentraut, Franz-Josef; and Wobky, Peter,
4,391,249, CI. 123-438.000.
Wolfe, Jon W.: See—
Derick, Burton N.; Moynihan, Robert E.; and Wolfe, Jon W.,
4,391,867, CI. 428-195.000.
Wolfe, Robert W.: See—
Malott, Theodore A.; and Wolfe, Robert W., 4,391,158, CI. 74-
473.00R.
Wolfe, Saul; and Shaw, Chia-Cheng, to Queen's University at Kingston.
Process for l-oxacephem derivatives. 4,391,975, CI. 544-90.000.
Wolff Walsrode Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Huhn, Helmut; and Kaiser, Siegfried, 4,391,302, CI. 138-118.100.
Wolfner, Andras: See —
Korbonits, Dezso; Nogradi, Mihaly; Vermes nee Szluha, Borbala;
Strelisky, Janos; Wolfner, Andras; Heja, Gergely; Kovacz, Ga-
bor; Szegi, Jozsef; and Virag, Sandor, 4,391,821, CI. 424-283.000.
Wolfnim, Erhard: See —
Kersting, Hans-Joachim; Wolfrum, Erhard; Portz, Willi; and
Strauss, Georg, 4,391,786, CI. 423-442.000.
Wood, Kenneth A.: See-
Laird. William F.; and Wood, Kenneth A., 4,391,169, CI. 83-37.000.
Wood Mark S ■ See
Sutherland, Ray; and Wood, Mark S., 4,391,139, CI. 73-273.000.
Wood, Thomas D.; Reiss, Garry K.; and Overly, Larry L., to J. B.
Foote Foundry Co., The. Variable speed, multiple component pulley.
4,391,595, CI. 474-33.000.
Woodrow, Peter A.: See —
El-Menshawy, Mohamed F.; Woodrow, Peter A.; and Bhatta-
charyya, Sushantha K., 4,392,110, CI. 324-453.000.
Woodruff, Rebecca J.. See —
Piramoon, Alireza; and Woodruff, Rebecca J., 4,391,597, CI.
494-20.000.
Woodruff, Robert A., to Ball Corporation. Interferometer. 4,391,525,
CI. 356-346.000.
Wool Development International Limited: See —
Bakker, Paul G. H., 4,391,605, CI. 8-495.000.
Wortman, Donald W., to Til Corporation. Telephone carrier system
repeater and power supply. 4,392,225, CI. 370-75.000.
Wright, Ansel J.: See-
Rogers, Ronald A.; Wright, Ansel J.; and Wright, William H.,
4.391,194, CI. 101-471.000.
Wright. Harold T., to Disctron. Inc. Head lift mechanism. 4,392,165, CI.
360-105.000.
Wright. Stuart C See—
Fischer. William C; Adams, Don L.; Verzella, David J.; and
Wright, Stuart C. 4.392,203, CI. 364-434.000.
Wright, William H.: See-
Rogers, Ronald A.; Wright. Ansel J.; and Wright, William H.,
4,391,194. CI. 101-471.000.
Wu, Chung P.: See—
Pankove. Jacques I.; and Wu. Chung P., 4,392,01 1. CI. 136-261.000.
Wu, Margaret M.. to Mobil Oil Corporation. Production of para-iso-
propylphenol. 4,391.998, CI. 568-781.000.
Wurlitzer Company, The: See —
Grajek, Stanley A.; Hill, Robert S.; and Klaiber, George S.,
4,391,177, CI. 84-196.000.
Wyszkowski. Jerzy; Panasiuk. Wladyslaw; Koprek. Stanislaw; and
Piechal, Andzei. to Instytut Mechaniki Precyzyjnej. Method of
thermo-chemical treatment of cutting tools and plastic working tools.
4,391.654. CI. 148-16.600.
Xerox Corporation: See —
Acquaviva. Thomas. 4.391.504. CI. 355-3.0SH.
Cherian. Abraham. 4,391,510. CI. 355-3.0SH.
Hartke, David H.. 4.391.490, CI. 350-356.000.
Huggins, Raymond W., 4.391,842. CI. 427-14.100.
Lu, Chin H., 4,391,890, CI. 430-110.000.
Prest, William M., Jr.; and Roberts, Frederick J., Jr.. 4,391,537, CI.
400-144.200.
Seachman, Ned J.; and Price, Edgar E.. 4,392,142, CI. 346-1.100.
Silverberg, Morton, 4,391.505, C\. 355-3.00R.
Yakovlev, Nikolai I.; Smolin, Anatoly T.; Kokovikhin, Vasily G.; and
Kotunov. Alexei A. Non-contact device for monitoring electrical
pulse signals. 4,392,106. CI. 324-72.500.
Yamada. Shigeni; and Ohhara. Kazuya, to Clarion Co.. Ltd. Audio
device having a tone control cancelling circuit. 4.392.114, CI. 333-
28.00T.
Yamada, Takaaki; Osakabe, Yoshio; and Tsuda, Yukio, to Sony Corpo-
ration Phase locked loop circuit. 4,392,253, CI. 455-165.000.
Yamada, Toyotaka: See —
Imai. Toshihiro; and Yamada. Toyotaka, 4.391.521. CI. 356-225.000.
Yamada, Yasuyuki; Akashi. Goro; Tsuji. Nobuo; Mukaida, Yoshito; and
Fujiyama, Masaaki. to Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd. Process for produc-
ing a magnetic recording medium. 4.391,851, CI. 427-130.000.
Yamaguchi, Naoko: See —
Aya, Masahiro; Saito, Junichi; Yasui, Kazuomi; Kakabu, Shinzo;
Kamochi, Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko, 4,391,629, CI.
71-94.000.
Yamaguchi, Tokuji: See —
Murakami, Shozo; Yamanaka, Hiroaki; Yokoyama, Kazuhiro;
Yone. Yasuhiro; and Yamaguchi. Tokuji, 4,391,702, CI.
209-10.000.
Yamaguchi, Yuji: See —
Kawai, Shinji; Suzuki, Koichi; and Yamaguchi, Yuji, 4,391,004, CI.
4-443.000.
Yamaha Hatsudoki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Tomita, Yoshiaki, 4,391,261, CI. 123-584.000.
Yamakawa, Tohru; and Akiyama, Kozi, to Hitachi Maxell, Ltd. Device
for making recording disc cartridge. 4,391,669, CI. 156-539.000.
Yamamoto, Akira: See —
Ishihara, Toshinobu; Yamamoto, Akira; and Taguchi, Kenichi,
4,391,984, CI. 560-236.000.
Yamamoto, Kaichi, to Sony Corporation. Digital video signal repro-
ducing apparatus. 4,392,162, CI. 360-10.300.
Yamamoto, Nobuyuki; Nanio, Kyoichi; and Okita, Tsutomu, to Fuji
Photo Film Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording medium. 4,391,874, CI.
428-336.000.
Yamamoto, Shunichi: See —
Uemura, Seiichi; Yamamoto, Shunichi; Hirose, Takao; Takashima,
Hiroaki; and Kato, Osamu, 4,391.788, CI. 423-447.600.
Yamamoto, Yoshikazu; and Yanagi, Toshiaki, to Brother Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Automatic sewing machine. 4,391,211, CI. 112-121.120.
Yamanaka, Hiroaki: See —
Murakami, Shozo; Yamanaka, Hiroaki; Yokoyama, Kazuhiro;
Yone, Yasuhiro; and Yamaguchi, Tokuji, 4,391,702, CI.
209-10.000.
Yamane. Kazumasa; Kobayashi. Masahiro; and Takada, Masaniko, to
Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Vinyl chloride co-
polymer and composition containing the same. 4,391,944. CI.
524-548.000.
Yamane. Ken; and Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Diaphragm actuator.
4.391,184. CI. 92-100.000.
Yamaoka, David L.: See —
Yamaoka, Don N.; and Yamaoka, David L., 4,391.008. CI. 5-
200.00R.
Yamaoka, Don N.; and Yamaoka, David L. Elements for assembly of
knocked-down waterbed pedestal. 4,391,008, CI. 5-200.00R.
Yamauchi, Takashi; Maruhashi, Shigeaki; and Hasegawa, Morihiro, to
Nisshin Steel Company, Ltd. Process for dephosphorization, desul-
furization and denitrification of chromium-containing pig iron.
4,391,633. CI. 75-53.000.
Yan. Tsoung-Yuan. to Mobil Oil Corporation. In situ uranium leaching
using high pressure CO2/O2 system to overcome chloride ion inhibi-
tion. 4,391,782, CI. 423-7.000.
Yanagi, Toshiaki: See —
Yamamoto, Yoshikazu; and Yanagi, Toshiaki, 4,391,211, CI. ">
112-121.120.
Yanagihara, Hideo: See —
Naitoh, Katsumi; and Yanagihara, Hideo, 4,391,421, CI.
242-107.700.
Yankee Metal Products, Inc.: See —
Anthony, Alfred, 4,391,053, CI. 40-152.000.
Yasuda, Mamoru: See —
Tamamura, Junichi; Yasuda, Mamoru; Hosoda, Motomi; and Saeki,
Shinichi, 4.392,025, CI. 179-1 11. OOR.
Yasui. Kazuomi: See —
Aya, Masahiro; Saito, Junichi; Yasui, Kazuomi; Kakabu, Shinzo;
Kamochi, Atsumi; and Yamaguchi, Naoko. 4,391,629, CI.
71-94.000.
Yates, Garry J.: See —
Riley, Eric K.; Smith, Colin D.; Yates, Garry J.; and Shepherd,
Norris W., 4,391,585. CI. 432-23.000.
Yatomi. Takeshi; and Tanaka, Yutaka. to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha. Electric discharge machining apparatus with a wire-shaped
electrode. 4.392,041, CI. 219-69.00W.
Yoder, Max N.. to United States of America, Navy. Method of forming
a hyperabrupt interface in a GaAs substrate. 4,391,651, CI. 148-1.500.
Yogo, Teruaki. Lace bending apparatus. 4.391.116. CI. 72-168.000.
Yokota, Dick; Kuty, D v'id; and Kinter, Malcolm, to Timex Corpora-
tion. Electrooptical lisplay/lead frame subassembly and timepiece
module including same. 4,391,531, CI. 368-239.000.
Yokota, Shiro: See —
Kojima, Takafumi; Tamaki, Kenzo; and Yokota, Shiro, 4,392,026,
CI. 179-175.30R.
Yokoyama, Kazuhiro: See —
Murakami. Shozo; Yamanaka. Hiroaki; Yokoyama, Kazuhiro;
Yone, Yasuhiro; and Yamaguchi, Tokuji, 4,391,702, CI.
209-10.000.
Yokozawa, Norio; Takasugi, Wasao; Yonezawa. Seiji; and Ueyanagi,
Kiichi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Method and device for recording and repro-
ducing tracking information. 4,392.219. CI. 369-44.000.
Yone, Yasuhiro: .See —
Murakami, Shozo; Yamanaka, Hiroaki; Yokoyama, Kazuhiro;
Yone, Yasuhiro; and Yamaguchi, Tokuji, 4,391,702, CI.
209-10.000.
Yonezawa, Seiji: See —
Yokozawa, Norio; Takasugi, Wasao; Yonezawa, Seiji; and
Ueyanagi, Kiichi, 4,392.219, CI. 369-44.000.
Yoshida Kogyo K. K.: See—
Oda, Kiyoshi, 4,391,022, CI. 24-205. 14R.
Yoshida, Koichi; and Hayano, Fusakazu, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Cell cultivation method and floating animal cell culture
unit for the same. 4,391,912, CI. 435-241.000.
Yoshida, Takashi: .See —
Mita, Kikuo; Oyama, Masayuki; Yoshida, Takashi; Nakashima,
Masato; Fujihara, Katsumi; and Nakakuki, Tadao, 4,392,120, CI.
382-22.000.
JULY 5, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 43
Yoshida. Takeo: See —
Masamoto, Junzo; Hamada, Minoru; Suzuki, Isamu; and Yoshida.
Takeo, 4,391.741. CI. 252-511.000.
Yoshino Kogyosho Co.. Ltd.: See-
Ota, Akiho; and Negishi. Fumio. 4,391,381, CI. 215-l.OOC.
Yoshizawa, Naomi; and Terashima. Akira, to Pilot Mannenhitsu Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Automatic transmission and reception control system.
4,392,244. CI. 455-79.000.
Young. Dennis: See —
Kolombos, Alexander J.; Telford. Clive D.; and Young, Dennis.
4.392,003. CI. 585-661.000.
Young, Jack W.; and Krill. Alvin G. Sewage back-up alarm. 4,392,128,
CI. 340-616.000.
Young. Terry A.; and Mast. Aquila D.. to Sperry Corporation. Auto-
matic latch for unloading auger. 4.391,364. CI. 198-865.000.
Young, William E.: See —
Brody. Aaron L.; Embro, Joseph J.; and Young, William E..
4.391.080, CI. 53-426.000.
Yuasa Battery Company Limited: See —
Kishimoto, Kenjiro; Igarashi. Hideaki; and Kono. Migaki.
4,391.036, CI. 29-623.200.
Yuki, Ikuo: See—
Matsuura, Shigeo; ahd Yuki, Ikuo, 4,392,249, CI. 455-164.000.
Zaha, Juergen H.: See—
Choudhury, Hrishikesh; and Zaha, Juergen H., 4,391,028. CI.
29-235.000.
Zahnradfabrik Friedrichshafen AG: See —
Bucksch, Manfred. 4,391,354, CI. 188-71.500.
Zansky. Zoltan, to Honeywell. Inc. Two-wire electronic dimming
ballast for gaseous discharge lamps. 4,392,087, CI. 315-219.000.
Zawadzki, Rainer K.: See —
Daniels. William A.; and Zawadzki. Rainer K.. 4.391,992, CI.
564-441.000.
Zdaniewski. Joseph J., to General Electric Company. Insulated coil
assembly and method of making same. 4.392,070, CI. 310-43.000.
Zeblisky, Rudolph J., to Kollmorgen Technologies Corporation. Pas-
sivation of metallic equipment surfaces in electroless copper deposi-
tion processes. 4.391.841. CI. 427-12.000.
Zeiringer, Rudolf: See —
KrempI, Peter W.; Claassen. Peter; and Zeiringer. Rudolf.
4.391.147. CI. 73-730.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
De Vries. Adrian J.. 4.392.116. CI. 333-194.000.
Libman. Philomena C. 4.392.077. CI. 313-474.000.
Zentile. Antonio: See —
Masotti. Maurizio; Zentile. Antonio; and Cau. Pasqualino.
4.391.464. CI. 293-120.000.
Zergenyi. Janos. to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Aryloxymethyl ox-
azolinium derivatives. 4.391.980. CI. 548-239.000.
Ziaylek. Theodore. Jr. Knock-down assembly for supporting oxygen
tanks. 4.391.377, CI. 211-71.000.
Ziegel. Douglas H.. to RCA Corporation. Technique for optical align-
ment of a workpiece. 4.391.520. CI. 356-154,000.
Zilske. Wolfgang; and Kuhn. Werner, to Degussa Aktiengesellschaft.
Electrolytic bath and process for the deposition of gold alloy coat-
ings. 4.391.679. CI. 204-43.00G.
Ziv. Avraham: See —
Ahad. Munir J.; Hollowell. William; Tanaka. Akira; and Ziv,
Avraham. 4.391.420, CI. 242-107.40A.
Zollco International. Inc.: See —
Gordon. Ellison T., 4.391.707. CI. 210-242.300.
Zucker. Jerry: See —
Jo. Byeong H.; and Zucker, Jerry. 4.391.875. CI. 428-378.000.
Zucker, Joseph; and Fitch, Arthur H., to GTE Automatic Electric
Laboratories. Inc. Method of measuring splice loss in optical fibers.
4,391,517, CI. 356-73.100.
Zummer. Anthony S., to Metaport Corporation. Releasable locking
connector. 4.391,545, CI. 403-189.000.
Zyo. Hiroshi: See —
Murakami, Naoyuki; and Zyo, Hiroshi, 4,391,346, CI. 181-147.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 5TH DAY OF JULY, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Beecham Group p.l.c: See —
Dowrick, John S.. Re. 31,301. CI. 424-23.000.
Dawson, Ray H.: See-
Moore, John O.; and Dawson, Ray H., Re. 31,297, CI. 239-121.000.
Dowrick, John S., to Beecham Group p.l.c. Intramammary composi-
tions. Re. 31,301, CI. 424-23.000.
Eaton Corporation: See —
Richards, Elmer A., Re. 31,296, CI. 74-339.000.
Herbenar, Edward J., to TRW Inc. Spring shackle assembly.
Re. 31,298, CI. 267-54.00A.
Hoper, Jens: See —
Kessler, Manfred; and Hoper, Jens, Re. 31,299, CI. 204-415.000.
Kessler, Manfred; and Hoper, Jens, to Max Planck Gesellschaft zur
Foerderung der Wissenschaften. Ion-selective electrode device for
polarographic measurement of oxygen. Re. 31,299, CI. 204-415.000.
Max Planck Gesellschaft zur Foerderung der Wissenschaften: See—
Kessler, Manfred; and Hoper, Jens, Re. 31,299. CI. 204-415.000.
Moore, John O.; and Dawson, Ray H.. to Sprayrite Manufacturing Co.
Full coverage recirculating sprayer. Re. 31,297, CI. 239-121.000.
Richards, Elmer A., to Eaton Corporation. Transmi^ion with resil-
iently loaded mainshaft gears. Re. 31,296, CI. 74-339.1900-
Sprayrite Manufacturing Co.: See— ,^ .,. „^
Moore, John O.; and Dawson, Ray H.. Re. 31,297. CI. 239-121.000.
Stambler, Leon. Validation systems for credit card or the like.
Re. 31,302, CI. 340-825.340.
Stauffer Chemical Company: See—
Uhing, Eugene H.; and Toy, Arthur D. F., Re. 31,300, CI. 260-
543.00P.
Toy. Arthur D. F.: See—
Uhing. Eugene H.; and Toy. Arthur D. F., Re. 31.300, CI. 260-
543.00P.
TRW Inc ■ See^
Herbenar. Edward J.. Re. 31.298. CI. 267-54.00A.
Uhing. Eugene H.; and Toy. Arthur D. F., to Suuffer Chemical Com-
pany Process for preparing alkyl- or arylphosphonothioic dihalides.
Re. 31,300, CI. 26O-543.00P.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Christini, Theodore Peter; Eustice. Albert Lawrence; and
Graham. Arthur Hughes, to E. I. du Pont de Nemours and
Company. Method for concomitant particulate diamond deposi-
tion in electroless plating, and the product thereof Bl Re.
29,285. CI. 428-544.
E. 1. du Pont de Nemours and Company: See—
Christini. Theodore Peter; Eustice, Albert Lawrence; and
Graham, Arthur Hughes. Bl Re. 29,285. CI. 428-544.
Stein, Karl-Ulrich, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Regenerating
circuit in the form of a keyed nip-Hop. Bl 3,892,984, CI. 307-
S3a
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Stein, Karl-Ulrich. Bl 3,892,984. CI. 307-530.
Sternberg, Ben K.; Miller, Dale E.; and Bahjat. Dhari S.. to
Conoco. Inc. Electrode prospecting method providing calcula-
ble electromagnetic coupling for the indirect detection of hy-
drocarbon reservoirs. Bl 4,295,096, CI. 324-357.
Conoco, Inc.: See —
Sternberg, Ben K.; Miller, Dale E.; and Bahjat, Dhari S. Bl
4,295,096, CI. 324-357.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
AB Bahco Verktyg: See—
Jansson, Conny, 269,590, CI. D8-382.000.
Allan Air Products: See—
Ludwig, David, 269,588, CI. D8-1O7.O0O.
Allgeyer, David F.; Johnson, Philip P.; and Gilliom, John W., to UMC
Industries. Inc. Disposable pan for heating and serving food. 269.586,
7-5-83. CI. D7-359.0OO.
Ammondson. Clayton J.: See— .„ . ,, ^,
Hartman, Robert G.; and Ammondson. Clayton J.. 269,643, CI.
D34-7.000.
Anderson, Edward E. Surveyor's suke. 269,598, 7-5-83. CI. DIO-
66 000.
Aspenwall. John E. Pistol rack. 269.572. 7-5-83. CI. D6- 188.000.
Barney Michael, to Lever Brothers Company. Combined bottle and
cap. 269.592. 7-5-83. CI. D9-367.0OO.
Berkline Corporation. The: See-
Nelson. Deborah, 269,568. CI. D6-63.000.
Bounds, William E. Condiment mill. 269.580. 7-5-83. CI. D7-53.000.
Bounds, William E. Condiment mill. 269,581, 7-5-83. CI. D7-53.000.
Bounds. William E. Condiment mill. 269,582, 7-5-83. CI. D7-53.000.
Bounds, William E. Condiment mill. 269,583, 7-5-83, CI. D7-53.000.
Bounds, William E. Condiment mill. 269,584, 7-5-83. CI. D7-53.000.
Bowen, Michael W. Spool and spindle chair. 269,569, 7-5-83, CI. D6-
75.000.
Bruno, Robert H: See— ,,„",^ ^, ^,.
MacGregor, Francis W.; and Bruno, Robert H., 269,636. CI. D24-
42.000.
Burroughs Wellcome Co.: See —
Hiscock. Robert J. H.. 269,640, CI. D28-2.000.
Carlomagno, Beryl E. Mold for confectionery or bakery product or the
like. 269.579. 7-5-83, CI. D7-44.000.
Challis, Brian. Handrail. 269,637, 7-5-83, CI. D25-73.000.
CHAT Corporation: See-
Murphy, John M., 269,614, CI. D14-93.000.
"strong, William A.; and Church, Kenneth, 269.604, CI. DI3-I2.000.
Clairol Incorporated: See—
MacGregor. Francis W.; and Bruno, Robert H., 269,636, CI. D24-
42.000.
Continental Group, Inc., The: See—
Gruodis, Robert J.; Franz, William T.; and Hayes, Edward J.,
269,593, CI. D9-370.000.
Crum, James R. Piston working fixture. 269,616, 7-5-83, CI. D15-
140.000.
Dart Industries Inc.: See —
Phillips, Alan A., 269,585, CI. D7-321.000.
D'Orleans, Henri, to L'Oreal. Bottle. 269,591, 7-5-83, CI. D9-335.000.
PI 44
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 45
Dougherty, Robert G. Rack for holding beverage order checks.
269,574, 7-5-83, CI. D6- 189.000.
Draddy, Roy C. Holder for a rule book and score card. 269,625, 7-5-83,
CI. D 19-26.000.
Draddy, Roy C. Holder for a rule book and score card. 269,626, 7-5-83,
CI. D 19-26.000.
Dulude, Charles R. Gun Urget. 269,631, 7-5-83, CI. D22- 15.000.
Eargle. William R.. Jr.; and Westermann. Winfried N.. to Westinghouse
Electric Corp. Luminaire. 269,639. 7-5-83, CI. D26-88.000.
Engelmann, Stefan. Spectacle holder. 269,619, 7-5-83, CI. D16-I29.000.
Fedora, Diana J. Novelty sculpture. 269.602. 7-5-83, CI. Dl 1-160.000.
Finnegan, John J.. Jr.: See—
Provanzano, Salvatore R.; and Finnegan. John J., Jr., 269,605, CI.
D 13- 12.000.
Flintrol Incorporated: See —
Roberston, E. Wayde; and Watkins, Tommy R., 269,632, CI. D22-
19.000.
Fogarty, A. Edward; and Fogarty, Bonnie R. Combined pillow and
finger puppets. 269,575, 7-5-83, CI. D6-203.000.
Fogarty, Bonnie R.: See—
Fogarty, A. Edward; and Fogarty, Bonnie R., 269,575, CI. D6-
203.000.
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.; and
Schneider, Rolf E., to Siemens Corporation. Large telephone keyset
with display. 269,612, 7-5-83, CI. D14-58.000.
Foggia, £>onald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.; and
Schneider, Rolf E., to Siemens Corporation. Telephone with function
keys. 269,613. 7-5-83. CI. D14-58.000.
Four R's Mfg. Corp.: See —
Perry. Richard W.; and Medeiros, Ronald J.. 269.599, CI. DIO-
87.000.
Fowkes, James C. Pouring spout attachment for a paint can or similar
article. 269,596, 7-5-83, CI. D9-447.000.
Franz, William T.: See —
Gruodis, Robert J.; Franz, William T.; and Hayes, Edward J.,
269,593, CI. D9-370.000.
Frye, David R.: See—
Frye, Elam C, Jr.; and Frye. David R., 269,638, CI. D26-9.000.
Frye, Elam C, Jr.; and Frye, David R. Candle base. 269,638, 7-5-83, CI.
D26-9.000.
Geshwind, Herbert W. Combined Christmas tree stand and container
therefor. 269,571, 7-5-83, CI. D6-105.000.
Gilliom, John W.: See—
Allgeyer, David F.; Johnson, Philip P.; and Gilliom, John W.,
269,586, CI. D7-359.000.
Glassman. Jacob A. Surgical hood. 269.562. 7-5-83. CI. D2-243.000.
Gold Eagle Co.: See—
Gurolnick, William R., 269,594, CI. D9-389.000.
Goldstaub, Sylvia. Scrub brush. 269,565, 7-5-83, CI. D4- 10.000.
Gould Inc.: See —
Provanzano, Salvatore R.; and Finnegan, John J., Jr., 269,605, CI.
D 13- 12.000.
Gruodis, Robert J.; Franz, William T.; and Hayes, Edward J., to Conti-
nental Group. Inc., The. Container for liquids or the like. 269,593,
7-5-83, CI. D9-370.000.
Gurolnick,^ William R., to Gold Eagle Co. Bottle or similar article.
269 594 7-5-83 CI D9-389 000
Hanslmair, MarkH. Pull Ub opener. 269,587, 7-5-83, CI. D8-40.000.
Hardy, Bruce N., to Silver Street, Inc. Drum rod attachable drum key
holder. 269,622, 7-5-83, CI. D 17-22.000.
Harries, Alun, to Metal Box Limited. Lid for a container. 269,597,
7-5-83. CI. D9-454.000.
Hartman, Robert G.; and Ammondson, Clayton J., to Zam, Inc. Trash
can and lid. 269,643, 7-5-83, CI. D34-7.000.
Hayes, Edward J.: See —
Gruodis, Robert J.; Franz. William T.; and Hayes. Edward J.,
269,593, CI. D9-370.000.
Hennessy, Arnold: See —
Inch. John D.; and Hennessy. Arnold. 269,634, CI. D23-65.000.
Hinshaw, Howard G.: See —
Jordan, William D.; and Hinshaw. Howard G.. 269.606. CI. DI3-
23.000.
Hiscock. Robert J. H.. to Burroughs Wellcome Co. Medicinal tablet
269.640. 7-5-83, CI. D28-2.000.
HiUchi, Ltd.: See—
Nishiyama, Kazuhiko; and Itoh, Takao, 269,615, CI. D14-96.000.
Inch, John D.; and Hennessy, Arnold, to International Water Saver
Toilets, Inc. Water closet. 269,634, 7-5-83, CI. D23-65.000.
Initial Plastics Limited: See —
Whitmarsh, Herbert F., 269,603, CI. D12-2O5.O0O.
International Water Saver Toilets. Inc.: See-
Inch. John D.; and Hennessy, Arnold. 269,634, CI. D23-65.000.
Inverness International Corporation: See —
Mann, Samuel J., 269,641, CI. D28-10.000.
Itakura, Tsuyoshi: See —
Willinger, Allan H.; and lukura, Tsuyoshi, 269,633, CI. D23-
22.000.
Itoh, Takao: See —
Nishiyama, Kazuhiko; and Itoh, Takao, 269,615, CI. D14-96.000.
J. L. Prescott Co.: See-
Murray, Donald, 269,595, CI. D9-413.000.
Jansson, Conny, to AB Bahco Verktyg. Snap lock fastener. 269,590,
7-5-83. CI. D8-382.000.
Johnson, Philip P.: See—
Allgeyer, David F.; Johnson, Philip P.; and Gilliom, John W.,
269,586, CI. D7-359.000.
Jordan, William D.; and Hinshaw, Howard G., to Thermalloy Incorpo-
rated. Heat sink or similar article. 269.606. 7-5-83. CI. D 1 3-23.000.
Kaman. Charles H. Guitar bowl. 269.621, 7-5-83, CI. D17-20.O00.
Kato, Shuzo; and Sakama. Satoru, to NCR Corporation. Cash register
or similar article. 269,623, 7-5-83, CI. D 18-4.000.
Kim. Syng N.. to Wico Corporation. Video game control unit. 269.608.
7-5-83. CI. D13-38.0OO.
Kim, Syng N., to Wico Corporation. Video game control unit. 269,609.
7-5-83. CI. D13-38.OO0.
Klaiber. Gerhart F.: See—
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,612, CI. D 14-58.000.
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,613, CI. D14-58.000.
Lee, Kent H. M. Self defense key ring. 269,563, 7-5-83, CI. D3-62.000
Lever Brothers Company: See —
Barney. Michael. 269.592, CI. D9-367.000.
L'Oreal: See —
D'Orleans, Henri, 269,591, CI. D9-335.000.
Lorenzini, Robert A. Musical instrument stand or similar article.
269,567, 7-5-83, CI. D6-29.000.
Lucker, Louis J. H., to Oce-Nederland B.V. Combined photocopier,
sorter and document feeder. 269,618, 7-5-83, CI. D 16-30.000.
Ludwig, David, to Allan Air ProducU. Tool handle. 269,588, 7-5-83, CI.
D8-107.000.
MacGregor, Francis W.; and Bruno. Robert H., to Clairol Incorpo-
rated. Foot massager. 269,636, 7-5-83, CI. D24-42.000.
Mann, Samuel J., to Inverness International Corporation. Hot wax
epilation applicator. 269,641, 7-5-83. CI. D28-10.000.
Matsubara. Hideyuki. to Pioneer Kabushiki Kaisha. Automobile stereo
system multi-channel electronic cross-over network. 269.610, 7-5-83,
CI. D14-1.000.
Mayuzumi, Masaki, to Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc. Action toy. 269,630,
7-5-83, CI. D21-1 50.000.
Medeiros, Ronald J.: See —
Perry, Richard W.; and Medeiros, Ronald J., 269,599, CI. DIC-
87.000.
Metal Box Limited: See-
Harries, Alun. 269.597. CI. D9-454.000.
Mox. Dana W.. to Tricolor Corporation. Round household scale.
269,600. 7-5-83. CI. DIO-91.000.
Murphy. John M., to CHAT Corporation. Case for teletype interface.
269,614, 7-5-83, CI. D14-93.000.
Murray. Donald, to J. L. Prescott Co. Bottle. 269,595. 7-5-83, CI.
D9-41 3.000.
Muzumdar, Deepak R.: See —
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,612, CI. D14-58.000.
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,613, CI. D14-58X)00.
Nakama, Daiji, to Nifco. Inc. Combined fixing and retaining clip for
elongate bodies. 269.589. 7-5-83. CI. D8-356.000.
NCR Corporation: See —
Kato, Shuzo; and Sakama, Satoru, 269,623, CI. D 18-4.000.
Nelson, Deborah, to Berkline Corporation, The. Sofa. 269,568. 7-5-83.
CI. D6-63.000.
Nifco. Inc.: See —
Nakama. Daiji. 269,589. CI. D8-356.000.
Nippert Company. The: See —
Nippert. Russell A.. 269.617, CI. D15-144.000.
Nippert, Russell A., to Nippert Company, The. Resistance welding
electrode. 269,617, 7-5-83, CI. D15-144.000.
Nishiyama, Kazuhiko; and Itoh. Takao, to Hitachi, Ltd. Combined
amplifier and tuner. 269,615, 7-5-83, Ci. D 14-96.000.
Oce-Nederland B.V.: See —
Lucker, Louis J. H., 269,618, CI. DI6-3O.O0O.
O'Driscoll, John L. Face for motor vehicle ampere meter. 269,601,
7-5-83, CI. DlO-125.000.
Ohashi, Shigeo. Switch frame. 269,607, 7-5-83, CI. D 1 3-32.000.
O'Keefe, Charles B. Auxiliary toilet paper roll holder. 269,570. 7-5-83,
CI. D6-97.000.
Parker, Lance. Audio control panel. 269,620, 7-5-83, CI. D17-1.000.
Perry, Richard W.; and Medeiros, Ronald J., to Four R's Mfg. Corp.
Scale for weighing precious metals and the like. 269,599, 7-5-83, CI.
DlO-87.000.
Phillips, Alan A., to Dart Industries Inc. Percolator. 269,585, 7-5-83, CI.
P7-32 1.000.
Pioneer Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Matsubara, Hideyuki, 269,610, CI. D 14- 1.000.
Provanzano, Salvatore R.; and Finnegan, John J., Jr., to Gould Inc.
Programmable controller housing. 269,605, 7-5-83, CI. D13-12.000.
Robbins, Edward S., Jr. Industrial traffic curtain strip. 269.576, 7-5-83,
CI. D6-208.100.
Roberston, E. Wayde; and Watkins, Tommy R., to Flintrol Incorpo-
rated. Flying insect trap. 269,632, 7-5-83, CI. D22- 19.000.
Saito, Tomonaga, to Sony Corporation. Headphones. 269,611, 7-5-83,
CI. D14-36.000.
Sakama, Satoru: See —
Kato, Shuzo; and Sakama, Satoru, 269,623, CI. D 18-4.000.
Sakata, Keiji, to Sharp Corporation. Electronic calculator. 269,624,
7-5-83, CI. D18-7.000.
PI 46
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
^•^F'^^/S/ATMuzumdar. Deepak R, Klaiber. Gerhart F.;
iSfd Schneider, Rolf E.. 269.612. CI. pi4-58im
FoKKia, Donald A.; Muzumdar. Deepak R.; Klaiber. Gerhart F.,
^d Schneider, Rolf E.. 269,613. CI. D14-58.(W).
Scott. Robert L. Combined vest and back pack. 269.561. 7-5-8J. ci.
SeJaV^jS^M. Confection on a stick. 269 559. ^fWCj.Dl -22.000.
Sexton. Eugene. Child's rocker. 269,566. 7-5-83. CI. D6-1 1.000.
Sharp Corporation; See —
Sakata. Keiji. 269.624. CI. D18-7.000. ,^o ,^ , , o, r\
Sheppard. Mark T.; and Timbers. Lynda J. Pants. 269,560. 7-5-83, CI.
D2-28.000.
Siemens Corporation: See— . „ ^. ,. /- u - c
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber. Gerhart h.;
and Schneider. Rolf E., 269,612, CI. D14-58.000.
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar. Deepak R.; Klaiber. Gerhart F.;
and Schneider. Rolf E.. 269,613, CI. D14-58.000.
Sikora, Stanley T. Equipment organizer used pnmarily by barbers and
beauticians. 269,573, 7-5-83, CI. D6- 188.000.
Silver Street, Inc.: See-
Hardy, Bruce N.. 269.622. CI. D17-22.0OO.
Sommers, Gary R. Combined auto windshield detergent reservoir,
cover and scrubber/squeegee. 269,642. 7-5-83. CI. D32-45.000.
Sony Corporation: See —
Saito. Tomonaga, 269.611, CI. D14-36.000.
Stark. Ted. Luggage. 269.564. 7-5-83. CI. D3-71.000.
Straubinger, Paul. Mold for forming frozen food product. 269.578.
7-5-83. CI. D7-43.000.
Strong Manufacturing Co., Inc.: See— ,-,ni^f^
Strong, William A.; and Church, Kenneth, 269,604, CI. D 13- 12.000.
Strong, William A.; and Church, Kenneth, to Strong Manufacturing
Co., Inc. Slurry dispenser control console. 269,604, 7-5-83, CI. D13-
12.000.
Taylor, Christopher J. C: See—
Wiggs, Christopher C; and Taylor. Christopher J. C, 269,629, U.
D2 1-104.000.
Thermalloy Incorporated: See-
Jordan, William D.; and Hinshaw, Howard G., 269,606, CI. D13-
23.000.
^""Sieppa^d, Mark T., and Timbers. Lynda J.. 269.560, CI. D2-28.000.
Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc.: See—
Mayuzumi, Masaki, 269,630. CI. D21-150.000.
Tricolor Corporation: See—
Mox. Dana W., 269.600. CI. DlO-91.000.
UMC Industries. Inc.: See—
Allgeyer, David F.; Johnson. Philip P.; and GiUiom, John W.,
269,586, CI. D7-359.000.
Watkins, Tommy R.: See —
Roberston, E. Wayde; and Watkins, Tommy R., 269,632, CI. D27
19.000.
Westell, David A. Game board. 269,627, 7-5-83, CI. D21-34.000.
Westermann, Winfried N.: See—
Eargle, William R., Jr.; and Westermann, Winfned N.. 269,639, CI.
D26-88.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See —
Eargle. William R.. Jr.; and Westermann. Winfried N.. 269,639, CI.
D26-88.O0O.
Whitmarsh, Herbert F., to Initial Plastics Limited. Wheel cover.
269.603, 7-5-83, CI. D 12-205.000.
Wico Corporation: See —
Kim, Syng N., 269,608, CI. D13-38.000.
Kim, Syng N., 269,609, CI. D13-38.0OO.
Wiggs, Christopher C; and Taylor, Christopher J. C. Bead puzzle.
269,629, 7-5-83. CI. D21-104.000.
Willette. Betty: See— __
Willette. Leo; and Willette. Betty, 269,628, CI. D2 1-58.000.
Willette, Leo; and Willette. Betty. Card-shuffling device. 269,628,
7-5-83, CI. D21-58.000. . ,,„.„
Willinger, Allan H.; and Itakura, Tsuyoshi. Check valve. 269,633,
7-5-83, CI. D23-22.0OO. _
Wilson, Zana J. Tablecloth or the like. 269,577, 7-5-83, CI. D6-275.000.
Wolf, Ehrenfried G. B. False tooth. 269,635, 7-5-83, CI. D24-33.000.
Zam, Inc.: See — --•„^^, ^i
Hartman, Robert G.; and Ammondson, Clayton J., 269,643, CI.
D34-7.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Fischer, Arnold W., to Pan-American Plant Company. African Violet
named Pink Lady. 5,065, 7-5-83, CI. 69.000.
Fischer, Arnold W, to Pan-American Plant Company. African Violet
named Big Star. 5,066, 7-5-83, CI. 69.000.
Pan-American Plant Company: See—
pscher, Arnold W., 5,065, CI. 69.000.
_^ischer, Arnold W., 5.066. CI. 69.000.
LIST OF DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS
APPLICANTS TO WHOM
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS WERE ISSUED ON THE 5th DAY OF
JULY, 1983
Published at the request of the applicant or owner in accordance with the Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O. G. 687.
Carr, Timothy W.; Needham. Charles D.; and Villetto. Robert T.. Jr.
Thin layer deposition process. T103,203. 7-5-83, CI. 427-91.000.
Cruickshank, Philip A. Intermediates and process for insecticidal 4-phe-
nyl-2-indanyl esters. T103,205, 7-5-83, CI. 560-124.000.
Dillard, Ewell F.: See—
Frazier, Alva W.; and Dillard, Ewell F., T103.202, CI. 423-321.00R.
Lewis, Harry T.; and Dillard, Ewell F., T103.206. CI. 564-363.000.
Dorrell. Carter E.; Gutscher. Donald E.; and Huffman. Carol J. Process
control display panel. T103.2O4. 7-5-83. CI. 428-42.000.
Frazier, Alva W.; and Dillard, Ewell F. Production of purified strong
wet-process phosphoric acid. T103.202. 7-5-83, CI. 423-321.00R.
Gutscher, Donald E.: See—
Dorrell. Carter E.; Gutscher, Donald E.; and Huffman, Carol J.,
T103,204, CI. 428-42.000.
Huffman, Carol J.: See —
Dorrell, Carter E.; Gutscher. Donald E.; and Huffman. Carol J.,
T103,204, CI. 428-42.000.
Lewis, Harry T.; and Dillard, Ewell F. Production of urea phosphate.
T103,206, 7-5-83, CI. 564-363.000.
Needham, Charles D.: See —
Carr, Timothy W.; Needham, Charles D.; and Villetto, Robert T.,
Jr.. T103,203, CI. 427-91.000.
Robinson. James D. Adjustable recline-control mechanism for furniture
and furniture comprising the mechanism. T103,201, 7-5-83, CI.
297-367.000.
Villetto, Robert T., Jr.: See—
Carr, Timothy W.; Needham. Charles D.; and Villetto, Robert T.,
Jr., T103,203, CI. 427-91.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED JULY 5, 1983
Note.— First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
9
70
81
180
409
423
236
321
415
443
490
559
60
200 R
453
484
94.15
149.1
424
477
495
525
549
CLASS2
4.390.995
4,390,9%
4,390,997
4,390,998
4,390.999
4,391,000
CLASS4
4,391,001
4,391,002
4,391,003
4v391,004
4.391.005
4.391,006
CLASSS
4,391.007
4.391.008
4,391.009
4.391,010
CLASSB __
4,391,601
4,391,602
4,391,603
4,391,604
4,391,605
4,391.606
4.391,607
236
152
154
50
62
65
69 A
15
CLASS 12
1 B 4,391.011
10.S
4,391,012
CLASS IS
210 R
231
250.42
302
313
339
105
314
4,391,013
4,391,014
4,391,015
4.391,016
4,391,017
4,391.018
CLASS 16
4,391.019
4,391.020
CLASS 19
253 4,391,021
CLASS 24
205.14 R 4,391,022
4,391,024
4.391,023
CLASS 2S
289 4,391,025
230 A
230 AL
CLASS 29
121.6
157.3 B
235
450
509
526 R
571
576 W
579
603
623.2
716
829
884
4,391,026
4,391.027
4,391,028
4.391.029
4.391.030
4.391,031
4,391.032
4.391,033
4,391,034
4,391.035
4,391.036
4.391.037
4.391,038
4,391,039
4,391,052
CLASS 40
4,391,053
4,391,054
CLASS 42
4,391,055
4,391,056
4,391,057
4,391.058
CLASS 43
4.391,059
465
CLASS 44
1 SR 4.391,608
4.391.609
4,391,610
CLASS 46
4,391,060
4.391.061
4.391.062
4.391,063
4,391,064
CLASS 48
4,391.611
4,391,612
CLASS 49
4,391,065
56
22
44
88
90
130
197 R
202
12
26
31
66
138
193
133
143
30
4,391,619
4,391,620
4,391,621
4,391,622
CLASS 66
4,391,105
4,391,106
CLASS 68
4,391,107
4.391.108
CLASS 69
4.391.109
26
53
124
125
130 R
CLASS 75
4.391.632
4.391.633
4.391.634
4.391,635
4,391,636
CLASS 51
165.87
97
126.4
127.2
169.5
211
241
367
404
553
747
251
396
426
436
520
575
1
2
16
35
82
4,391,066
CLASS 52
4,391,067
4,391,068
4,391,069
4.391,070
4,391,071
4,391,072
4.391,073
4,391,074
4,391,075
4,391.076
4.391.077
CLASS 53
4.391.078
4.391.079
4,391,080
4,391,081
- 4,391,082
4,391,083
CLASS 55
4,391.613
4.391.614
4.391,615
4,391.616
4,391.617
CLASS 70
34 4.391.110
162 4.391.111
364 A 4,391,112
459 4,391.113
CLASS 71
21 4.391.623
86 4,391,624
4,391,625
88 4.391.626
90 4,391.627
92 4.391.628
94 4,391.629
105 4.391.630
118 4.391.631
CLASS 72
4,391,114
4,391,115
4,391,116
4,391,117
4,391,118
4,391,119
4,391,120
4,391,121
4,391,123
4,391.122
78
131
168
224
356
384
403
406
464
481
CLASS 81
3.46 R 4.391.167
CLASS 83
34 4.391,168
37 4,391,169
71 4,391,170
82 4,391,171
403 4,391.172
424 4,391,173
552 4,391.174
678 4.391.175
CLASS 84
1.17 4.391,176
1% 4,391,177
CLASS 89
36 H 4,391,178
46 4,391,179
129 R 4,391,180
CLASS 91
4,391.181
4,391,182
4.391.183
158 E
246
269.1
275
316
405
621
630
707
4.391.212
4.391.213
4,391.214
4.391,215
4.391.216
CLASS 118
4,391.217
4,391,218
4.391.219
4.391,220
29
378
461
CLASS 119
14.08 4.391,221
14.17 4.391.222
19 4,391.223
29 4,391,224
72.5 4,391,225
109 4.391,226
CLASS 122
16 4,391,227
99
Hi
246
248
251
256
261
CLASS, 134
4.391,287
CLASS 136
4,392.005
4,392,006
4.392,007
4,392,008
4.392,009
4,392,010
4.392,011
CLASS 137
28
4,391,228
CLASS 123
CLASS 73
CLASS 30
201 4,391,040
296 R 4,391,041
316 4,391,042
330 4,391,043
CLASS 33
27 L 4,391,045
174 P 4,391,044
CLASS 34
93 4,391,046
97 4,391,047
CLASS36
28 4,391,048
114 4,391,049
CLASS 37
4.391,050
4,391,051
CLASS 56
27.5 4,391,084
330 4,391,085
CLASS 57
22 4,391,086
4,391,087
58.52
234
261
279
340
4,391,088
4,391,089
4,391,090
4,391,091
142 A
223
CLASS 60
39.29 4,391,092
4,391,093
245 4,391,094
286 4,391.095
335 4.391,096
398 4,391.097
602 4.391,098
641.11 4,391,100
641.6 4,391,099
646 4,391,101
649 4,391.102
CLASS 62
6 4.391.103
79 4.391.104
CLASS 65
I 4.391.618
1 DV
11
35
37.7
38
64.4
117.3
118
119 A
146
155
189
204
223
273
432 R
433
610
623
629
704
718
730
861.25
861.29
863.23
863.84
864.41
4.391.124
4.391,125
4,391,126
4,391,127
4,391,128
4,391,129
4,391,130
4,391,131
4,391,132
4,391,133
4,391,134
4,391,135
4,391,136
4,391,137
4,391,138
4,391,139
4,391,140
4.391,141
4,391,142
4,391,143
4,391,144
4,391,145
4,391,146
4,391,147
4.391,148
4,391,149
4,391,150
4,391.151
4.391.152
4.391.153
CLASS 92
100 4,391,184
CLASS 99
489 4,391,185
CLASS 100
7 4.391.186
88 4.391.187
229 A 4.391.188
CLASS 101
36 4.391.189
211 4.391.190
216 4,391,191
350 4,391,192
415.1 4,391,193
471 4,391,194
CLASS 102
201 4,391,195
202 4,391,196
334 4,391,197
401 4,391,198
444 4,391.199
CLASS 104
20 4,391.200
70 4.391,201
CLASS 74
15.4
89.2
336.5
339
402
473 R
516
551.8
579 E
579 R
768
781 R
869
4.391,154
4.391.155
4.391.156
Re.31.296
4.391.157
4.391,158
4,391,159
4,391,160
4,391,161
4.391,162
4,391,163
4,391,164
4,391,165
4,391,166
CLASS 106
20
22
29
36
38.23
74 ■
85
90
97
lis
308 M
4,391,637
4,391,638
4,391,639
4.391,640
4,391.641
4.391.642
4.391.643
4,391,644
4,391,645
4.391,646
4,391,647
4.391.648
25 8
25 E
41.69
51 BA
61 R
65 V
142.5 R
149 C
179 H
193 C
198 DB
198 E
198 F
198 R
325
339
391
403
425
438
440
454
478
481
489
503
508
557
568
584
618
4.391.229
4,391,230
4,391,231
4,391,232
4,391,233
4,391,234
4,391,235
4,391,236
4,391,237
4.391,238
4,391,241
4.391,239
4,391,240
4,391.242
4,391,243
4.391,244
4.391,245
4,391.246
4.391.247
4.391.248
4.391,249
4,391,250
4,391.251
4.391.252
4.391.253
4.391.254
4.391.255
4.391.256
4,391.257
4,391,258
4,391,259
4.391,260
4,391,261
4,391,262
15
81.1
99
269
312
493.8
522
523
615
831
99
103
118.1
166
100
435
92.1
140
18
286
4.391.288
4.391,289
4,391,290
4,391.291
4,391.292
4,391.293
4.391,294
4.391.295
4,391,296
4.391,297
4.391,298
4.391.299
CLASS 138
4.391.300
4.391.301
4,391.302
4,391.303
CLASS 139
4.391.304
4,391,305
CLASS 140
4,391,306
4.391.307
CLASS 141
4,391.308
4.391.309
4.391,310
CLASS 144
193 D 4,391,311
193 E 4,391,312
CLASS 148
CLASS 108
51.3 4,391,202
CLASS 109
25 4,391,283
39 4.391.204
CLASS 110
224 4.391.205
246 4.391.206
342 4.391.207
346 4.391.208
349 4.391.209
CLASS 112
104 4.391.210
121.12 4,391.211
CLASS 124
35 A 4.391.263
SO 4.391.264
CLASS 126
39 E 4.391.265
123 4.391.266
400 4.391.267
437 4,391.268
4,391.269
CLASS 127
46.2 4,391,649
1.5
6.15 R
12 C
16.6
20.6
102
133
188
4,391,650
4.391,651
4,391,652
4,391.653
4.391,654
4,391,655
4,391,656
4,391,657
4,391,658
CLASS 149
2 4,391.659
19.9 4.391,660
CLASS 152
CLASS 128
1.3
203.12
303.1
492
640
643
654
660
725
4,391,270
4,391,271
4.391,275
4,391,277
4,391,278
4,391,279
4,391,280
4,391.281
4.391.282
4,391,283
CLASS 131
276 4.391,284
364 4,391,285
CLASS 132
7 4,391.286
171
210
213 A"
330 RF
359
4.391,313
4,391,314
4,391.315
4.391,316
4,391,317
4.391.318
49
64
71
72
84
205
308.2
539
12
30.1
192
217
CLASS 156
4,391,661
4.391.662
4.391,663
4.391.664
4.391.665
4.391.666
4.391.667
4.391.668
4,391,669
CLASS 162
4,391,670
4,391.671
4.391.672
4.391,673
CLASS 164
259 4.391.319
CLASS 165
2 4.391.320
PI 47
PI 48
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
54 4,391.321
125 4.391,322
CLASS 203
CLASS 222
455 Z 4.391,739
470 4.391,740
CLASS 296
42 4.391,481
59 M 4,391,482
183 4.391.323
28 4.391,677
135 4.391.389
511 4,391,741
208 4,391,465
75 M 4,391,408
CLASS 166
CLASS 204
136 4,391.390
478 4,391.391
512 4,391,742
518 4 391743
CLASS 297
94 R 4,391,483
97 P 4,391,484
70 4.391.324
15 4.391,678
598 4,391,392
522 R 4.391.744
452 4.391.466
191 S 4.391.485
208 4.391.325
240 4.391.326
307 4.391.327
43 G 4,391,679
98 4,391,680
99 4.391.681
642 4,391,393
CLASS 223
554 4,391,745
CLASS 254
CLASS 299
2 4.391.467
CLASS 340
38 L 4,392.119
325 4.391,328
104 4.391,682
37 4.391,394
29 A 4.391,431
8 4.391.468
310 A 4,392,121
336 4,391,329
129.3 4.391.683
94 4.391,395
365 4,391,432
11 4,391,469
4,391,470
43 4,391,471
86 4,391,472
323 R 4,392,122
341 4.391,330
342 4.391.331
350 4.391.332
129.4 4.391.684
145 R 4.391.685
159.15 4.391.686
CLASS 224
205 4,391.396
265 4.391.397
CLASS 260
112 B 4.391,746
347 AD 4,392,123
4,392,124
518 4.392.125
379 4.391,333
159.16 4.391,687
112.5 T 4,391,747
CLASS 307
573 4.392.126
180 G 4,391,688
CLASS 226
123.5 4.391,748
604 4.392.127
C1.ASS 172
326 4.391.334
4.391.689
206 4.391.692
4 4,391,398
74 4,391,399
4,391,750
123.7 4,391,749
530 81 3.892,984
39 4,392,064
247 A 4,392,065
252 A 4,392,069
290 4,392,066
475 4,392,067
522 4,392,068
616 4.392.128
747 4,392,130
540 4,391.335
237 4.391.693
113 4,391.400
239.3 B 4.391,752
765 4,392,129
a, ASS 174
273 4,391,694
286 4,391.695
CLASS 227
239.3 R 4,391.751
380 4,391,754
803 4.392.131
825.14 4.392.132
51 4.392.012
297 W 4.391.696
19 4.391.401
397.45 4,391,755
825.31 4.392.133
68.5 4.392.013
298 4.391.697
121 4,391,402
430 4,391,756
4.392.134
92 4.392.014
302 4.391.698
CLASS 228
446 4,391,757
CTASS308
825.34 Re.3 1,302
143 4.392.015
408 4.391,691
107 4.391,403
453 P 4,391,758
6 C 4,391,473
825.44 4,392,135
CLASS 17S
412 4.391.690
453.3 4,391,759
207 R 4,391,476
825.56 4,392,136
415 Re.31.299
CLASS 229
543 P Re.3 1,300
221 4,391,477
^^v & f^r^ 4 A^
4.6 4.391,337
45 4,391,336
393 4,391.339
CLASS 206
63.3 4.391.365
31 R 4,391,405
62.5 4,391,404
961 4,391,760
969 4,391,761
CLASS 310
43 4,392,070
CLASS 343
5 SC 4,392,137
103 4,392,138
CLASS 177
218 4,391,366
CLASS 235
CLASS 261
113 4,392,071
705 4,392,139
315 R 4,391,367
472 4 392 053
121 R 4,391,762
216 4,392,072
765 4.392,140
210 FP 4,391,338
484 4,391,368
' ' *• ^ ^*^ y ^yx#«^wf
4.392.073
M^m * y^^^ t^ M ^
CLASS 179
506 4,391.369
574 4.391.370
CLASS 2.%
36 4,391,913
CLASS 264
15 4,391,763
327 4,392,074
CLASS 312
CLASS 346
1.1 4,392,141
1 GE 4.392,020
597 4.391.371
47 4,391,406
25 4,391,764
320 4,391.478
4.392,142
1 GQ 4,392.019
26 4.391,765
135.1 4.392.143
1 OS 4,392.016
CLASS 208
CLASS 237
210.1 4,391,766
CLASS 313
139 C 4.392,144
1 HS 4.392,017
8 LE 4,391,699
12.3 B 4.391,407
210.3 4,391,767
318 4.392.076
140 R 4,392,145
1 SM 4,392.018
86 4,391.700
CLASS 239
236 4,391.770
474 4.392.077
4,392,146
1.5 R 4.392,021
370 4,391.701
^^Lu^kiVkJ aiv^
285 4,391,768
584 4.392 075
4,392,147
2 DP 4,392,023
2 TV 4,392.022
CLASS 209
121 Re.31,297
265.29 4,391.409
326 4,391,769
CLASS 315
154 4,392,194
99 R 4.392.024
10 4,391,702
498 4,391.410
CLASS 266
4 4,392.078
CLASS 350
1 1 1 R 4,392,025
523 4.391.372
CLASS 241
77 4,391.433
5.39 4,392.079
96.14 4,391,486
175.3 R 4,392,026
526 4,391,373
196 4,391.434
5.41 4.392.080
96.20 4,391,487
181 W 4 392 027
540 4.391,374
I 4.391.411
46 4.392.081
257 4,391,488
185 4,392.028
36 4.391.412
CLASS 267
55 4,392,082
341 4,391,491
CLASS 210
99 4.391,413
54 A Re.3 1.298
85 4,392,083
349 4,391,489
CLASS 180
151 4,391,703
213 4.391,414
140.1 4.391,435
169.4 4,392,084
351 4,391,492
9.2 R 4.391,341
188 4,391,704
CLASS 242
141.1 4,391,436
173 4,392,085
356 4,391,490
79 4.391.340
143 4.391,342
218 4,391,705
232 4,391,706
56J 4.391,415
68.1 4,391,416
78.6 4,391,417
84.2 A 4,391.418
84.5 A 4,391,419
CLASS 269
174 4.392,086
219 4,392,087
422 4,391,493
442 4,391.494
198 4.391.343
242.3 4,391,707
254 CS 4,391,437
241 R 4.392.088
452 4,391,495
271 4.391.344
CLASS 181
4,391.708
332 4.391.709
361 4.391,710
634 4,391,711
652 4,391,712
328 4,391,438
CLASS 271
313 4.392.089
411 4.392.090
519 4.391,496
523 4,391,497
147 4,391,346
107.4 A 4,391.420
107.7 4.391.421
90 4,391,439
CLASS 318
52 4,392,091
CLASS 351
121 4,391.498
CLASS 182
129.6 4,391.422
CLASS 272
127 4,392,092
113 4.391,347
119 4.391.348
141 4,391,345
4,391,713
670 4,391,714
696 4,391,715
799 4,391,716
CLASS 244
161 4,391,423
207 4,391,424
118 4,391,440
126 4,391,441
145 4,391,443
245 4,392,093
254 4,392,094
4,392,095
625 4,392,096
CLASS 353
122 4,391,499
CLASS 354
CLASS 184
CLASS 211
CLASS 246
CLASS 273
696 4,392,097
31 4,391,500
6.26 4,391,349
CLASS 188
13 4,391,375
60 SK 4,391,376
71 4,391,377
428 4,391,425
CLASS 248
94 4,391,444
142 E 4.391.442
158 4.391.445
758 4,392,098
797 4,392,099
803 4,392,100
149 4,391,501
CLASS 355
3 DD 4,391,502
1.11 4,391,350
187 4,391,378
49 4,391,426
201 4.391.446
CLASS 320
4,391,503
18 A 4,391,351
176 4,391,427
238 4,391,447
20 4,392.101
4,391,512
24.12 4,391,352
CLASS 212
546 4,391,428
243 4,391,448
48 4.392,102
3 R 4,391,505
4,391,353
71.5 4.391.354
73.44 4.391.355
4,391,379
CLASS 213
CLASS 249
84 4,391,429
260 4,391,449
CLASS 277
CLASS 323
222 4,392,103
3 SH 4,391,504
4,391,510
8 4,391,506
CLASS 192
76 4,391,380
CLASS 250
1 4.391.450
CLASS 324
14 CU 4,391,508
84 C 4.391.356
CLASS 215
307 4.392.054
CLASS 279
357 Bl 4.295.096
14 FU 4,391,509
14 R 4.391.507
94 4.391.357
1 C 4.391,381
339 4.392,056
2 A 4,391.451
54 4,392,104
40 4.391.511
130 4.391.358
213 4.391.382
385 4,392,057
CLASS 280
57 DE 4,392,105
CLASS 193
256 4,391,383
492.2 4,392,058
6.1 4,391,452
47.35 4,391,454
47.4 4,391.453
407 4.391.455
821 4.391.456
72.5 4,392,106
CLA.SS356
23 4,391,359
CLASS 198
307 4,392,055
CLASS 219
CLASS 251
205 4,391,430
73 R 4,392,107
95 4,392,108
350 4,392,109
I 4,391,513
4,391,514
5 4,391,515
412 4.391.360
10.55 A 4,392,039
10.55 D 4,392,038
CLASS 252
453 4,392,110
73.1 4,391.516
4.391.517
129 4.391,518
153 4,391,519
154 4,391,520
225 4,391,521
326 4,391,522
735 4.391.361
10.71 4,392,040
8.55 D 4,391,719
CLASS 281
CLASS 328
855 4,391.362
865 4.391.363
4,391.364
a.ASS200
69 P 4,392.043
69 W 4,392,041
4,392,042
118 4,392,044
8.6 4,391,717
8.7 4,391,718
49.6 4.391,720
51.5 A 4.391,721
73 4,391,722
90 4,391,723
4,391,724
31 4,391.457
CLASS 285
112 4.391.458
237 4,392,111
CLASS 330
252 4,392,112
5 B 4,392,029
11 R 4,392,030
130.1 4,392,045
4,392,046
145.21 4,392,047
238 4.391.459
CLASS 290
CLASS 331
14 4,392,113
328 4,391,523
338 4,391,524
346 4,391.525
359 4,391,526
375 4,391,527
CLASS 357
5 4,392,148
16 R 4,392,031
61.2! 4,392,032
80 R 4,392,033
81.4 4,392,034
144 B 4,392.035
367 4.392.048
401 4.392.049
491 4.392.050
528 4.392.051
532 4.392.052
4,391.725
99 4.391.726
— 4,391.727
182 4.391.728
182.1 4,391,729
38 D 4.392.059
53 4.392,060
4,392,061
54 4,392,062
4,392,063
CLASS 333
28 T 4,392,114
141 4,392,115
194 4,392,116
322 4.392,036
^W A t^r^ ^^L^k
299.1 4,391.730
CLASS .\\<S
49 4,392,149
51 4,392,150
72 4,392,151
80 4,392,152
340 4.392,037
a.ASS 201
CLASS 220
307 4.391.385
343 4,391,386
299.62 4,391,731
356 4,391,732
378 R 4,391.733
CLASS 292
37 4,391,460
204 4,391,461
297 4,392,117
CLASS 337
41 4,391,674
CLASS 202
359 4,391,384
CLASS 221
4.391.734
413 4,391,735
429 B 4,391,736
207 4.391.462
263 4.391.463
154 4,392,118
CLASS 339
82 4,392,153
CLASS 358
158 4.391,675
13 4.391.387
4,391,737
CLASS 293
18 C 4,391,479
44 4,392,154
173 4.391.676
76 4,391.388
4,391,738
120 4.391.464
32 R 4,391.480
106 4,392.155
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
PI 49
183
213
319
327
4,392,156
4,392,157
4,392,158
4,392,159
4,392,160
CLASS 360
76
77
105
113
120
129
130.33
133
S
s
35
45
88
ICO
221
233
234
321
401
S
11
101
lOS
116
233
269
281
306
392
418
54
60
63
67
75
4.392.221
4.392.222
4,392.223
4.392.224
4.392.225
laS 4.392,161
4,392,162
4,392,163
4,392.164
4.392.165
4.392.166
4.392.167
4.392.168
4,392,169
4,392,170
CLASS 361
4,392,171
4,392,172
4,392,173
4,392,174
4.392,175
4,392,176
4,392,177
4,392,178
4,392,179
4,392,180
4,392,181
CLASS 362
4,392,182
4,392,183
4,392,184
4,392,185
4,392,186
4,392,187
4,392,188
4,392,190
4392,189
4392,191
4392,192
CLASS 363
4,392,193
CLASS 371
61 4,392,226
CLASS 372
46 4,392,227
4,392,228
94 4,392,229
CLASS 373
4,392,230
302
353
403
4,391,569
4,391,570
4,391,571
139
80
86
93
118
451
10
51
045
144
146
207
CLASS 418
45 4,391,572
63 4,391,573
195 4,391,574
CLASS 419
4,391,772
128
CLASS 364
167 4,392,195
200 4,392,196
4,392.197
4,392.198
4,392,199
- 4.392.200
4.392.201
426 4,392.202
434 4.392.203
478 4.392.204
518 4.392.205
900 4.392,206
4.392.207
4.392,208
CLASS 365
110 4,392,209
149 4.392,210
200 4,392,211
230 4,392,212
CLASS 366
15 4,391,528
266 4,391,529
CLASS 367
13 4,392,213
127 4,392,214
139 4.392.215
CLASS 368
4.391,530
4,392,216
4,392.217
4.391.531
4.391.532
4.391,533
4.391,534
CLASS 369
4,392,218
4,392,219
CLASS 370
4,392.220
CLASS 375
4.392.231
4.392.232
4.392.233
4.392.234
CLASS 376
4.391.771
CLASS 378
4,392.235
4,392,237
4,392.236
4.392.238
4.392.239
4.392.240
CLASS 382
22 4,392.120
CLASS 384
152 4.391.474
226 4,391,475
CLASS 400
120 4,391.535
144 2 4.391.536
4,391,537
145.1 4,391,538
208 4,391,539
212 4,391,540
248 4,391,541
605 4,391,542
23
22
63
68
78
84
89
99
102
125
CLASS 422
4,391,773
4,391,774
4.391,775
4,391,776
4,391,777
4,391,778
4.391,779
4,391,780
4,391,781
CLASS 423
7
315
320
329
442
447.3
447.6
457
574 R
617
648 R
650
659
4,391,782
4,391,783
4,391.784
4,391.785
4,391,786
4,391.787
4.391.788
4.391,789
4,391,790
4,391,791
4,391,792
4.391.793
4.391,794
4,391,880
CLASS 424
583
606
626
641
12
14.1
41
44
58
99
106
118
129
130
150
152
192
358
383.7
385.5
407.1
421
423
$44
35
64
74
92
195
215
218
CLASS 403
24 4,391.543
155 4,391,544
189 4,391,545
4,391,546
341 4,391,547
348 4,391,548
CLASS 404
87 4,391,549
CLASS 405
4,391,550
4,391,551
4,391,552
4,391,553
4,391,554
4,391,555
4,391.556
4.391.557
63
71
188
239
250
281
294
29
44
18
7
43
59
141
224
264
287
1
9
19
23
52
132
177
236
239
245
246
248.4
250
251
263
267
269
272
274
110
45
107
218
483
698
126
189
209
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
CLASS
146 R
CLASS
237
408
4,391.558
411
4.391.559
414
4.391.560
4.391.561
4,391.562
4,391.563
415
4,391,564
4,391,565
4.391.566
416
4,391,567
417
4,391,568
4.391.795
4.391.796
4,391,797
Re.31,301
4,391,798
4,391,799
4,391,800
4,391,801
4,391,802
4,391,803
4,391,804
4,391,805
4.391.806
4,391,807
4,391,808
4,391,809
4,391,810
4,391,811
4.391.812
4.391.813
4.391.814
4.391,815
4,391,816
4,391,817
277 4,391,818
278 4.391.819
282 4.391.820
283 4.391,821
4.391,822
306 4.391.823
315 4.391,824
319 4,391,825
324 4,391,826
331 4,391,827
340 4,391,828
CLASS 425
190 4,391.575
241 4.391.576
338 4,391,577
525 4,391,578
548 4.391.579
CLASS 426
28 4.391,829
43 4,391,830
93 4,391,831
275 4,391,832
523 4,391,833
565 4.391,834
573 4,391,835
578 4,391,836
4,391,837
4,391.838
4.391.839
4.391,840
CLASS 427
4.391.841
4.391.842
4.391.843
4.391.844
4,391.845
4,391,846
4,391,847
4.391,848
4.391,849'
4,391.851
4.391.850
4,391,852
4,391.853
4,391.854
4,391.856
4.391.855
4.391,857
4,391,858
4,391,859
4,391,860
CLASS 428
Bl Re 29.285
4.391,861
4,391,862
4,391,863
4,391,864
4,391.865
4,391.866
4.391.867
4,391.868
4,391.869
4.391.870
219 4.391.871
224 4.391,872
297 4.391,873
336 4.391.874
378 4.391.875
392 4.391.876
457 4,391,877
479 6 4,391,878
551 4.391,879
CLASS 434
95 4.391,591
CLASS 435
7 4,391,904
14 4,391,905
4,391,906
42 4.391.887
115 4.391.907
144 4,391.908
178 4.391.909
232 4,391,910
239 4,391,911,
241 4,391,912
CLASS 440
61 4.391,592
70 4.391.593
CLASS 455
CLASS 525
26
4.392.241
33
4.392.242
74
4.392.243
79
4,392,244
115
4.392.245
116
4.392,252
158
4,392.246
161
4,392,247
4,392.248
164
4.392.249
165
4.392.253
173
4,392.254
327
4,392.250
4.392.251
328
4,392.255
354
4,392.256
CLASS 464
80
4,391,594
CLASS 474
33
4,391,595
CLASS 493
425
4.391,596
CLASS 494
20
4,391,597
11
57
99
132
166
333.7
351
425
439
454
462
504
70
74
76
200
37
74.5
112
176
189
321
389
408
481
499
56
90
030
211
277
4,391.947
4.391,948
4,391.949
4.391,950
4.391,951
4,391.952
4,391.953
4,391.956
4.391.954
4,391.957
4,391,955
4,391,958
CLASS 526
4,391,959
4,391,960
4,391,961
4,391,962
CLASS 528
4,391,963
4.391.964
4.391,965
4.391.966
4.391,%7
4,39 1,%8
4,391,969
4,391,970
4,391,971
4.391.972
CLASS 536
4,391,973
CLASS 544
4,391,975
4,391,974
4,391,976
. 4,391,977
CLASS 429^
96 4.391,882
97 4,391,883
111 4,391,881
CLASS 430
17
28
41
57_
59
110
120
126
137
154
215
223
302
306
307
355
495
501
629
4,391,884
4,391.885
4.391,886
4.391.888
4.391,889
4,391,890
4,391,891
4,391.892
4,391,893
4.391.894
4.391,895
4,391,8%
4,391,897
4.391,898
4,391,899
4,391,900
4,391,901
4,391,902
4,391,903
4
48
62
100
127
725
CLASS 501
4.391,914
4,391,915
4,391,916
4,391,917
4,391.918
CLASS 518
4,391,919
CLASS 546
138 4,391,978
CLASS 548
194 4,391.979
239 4,391,980
CLASS 549
252 4,391.981
433
525
4,391.982
4,391.753
CLASS 431
1 4,391,580
160 4,391,581
266 4,391,582
CLASS 432
4 4,391,583
8 4.391,584
23 4.391.585
58 4,391,586
121 4,391,587
CLASS 433
33 4,391,588
63 4,391,589
90 4.391,590
CLASS 521
61 4.391.920
66 4,391,921
88 4,391.922
96 4,391,923
178 4,391,924
CLASS 523
130 4.391,925
132 4,391,926
161 4,391.927
201 4.391,928
218 4.391,929
219 4,391,930
318 4,391,931
337 4,391,932
454 4,391.933
CLASS 524
43
82
89
119
270
377
458
495
526
538
548
600
849
4.391,934
4.391.935
4,391,936
4.391,937
4.391,938
4,391,939
4,391,940
4,391.941
4,391,942
4.391,943
4,391.944
4,391,945
4,391,946
CLASS 560
124 4,391.983
236 4,391.984
CLASS 562
414 4,391,985
444 4,391,986
559 4,391.987
4,391.988
599 4,391,?89
4,391,990
CLASS 564
412 4,391,991
441 4,391,992
CLASS 568
4 4,391,993
593 4,391,994
637 4,391,995
726 4,391,996
727 4,391,997
781 4,391.998
840 4,391,999
CLASS 570
104 4,392,000
CLASS 585
269 4,392,001
329 4,392,002
661 4,392,003
820 4.392.004
CLASS604 '
65 4.391.598
110 4,391.272
4.391.273
118 4.391.599
153 4,391,600
190 4,391,274
266 4.391.276
>
PI 50
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
Dl—
D2-
D3—
D4—
D6—
22
28
184
243
62
71
10
11
29
63
75
97
105
188
269,559
269,560
269.561
269,562
269,563
269,564
269,565
269,566
269,567
269,568
269,569
269,570
269,571
269,572
269,573
D7-
189
203
208.1
275
43
44
53
321
359
D8— 40
269,574
269,575
269,576
269.577
269,578
269,579
269,580
269,581
269,582
269,583
269,584
269,585
269,586
269,587
D9—
DIO—
107
356
382
335
367
370
389
413
447
454
66
87
91
125
269.588
269,589
269,590
269,591
269,592
269,593
269,594
269,595
269,596
269.597
269.598
269.599
269.600
269.601
Dll-
D12-
D13-
DH
160
205
12
23
32
38
1
36
58
93
96
269.602
269.603
269,604
269.605
269.606
269.607
269,608
269,609
269,610
269,61 1
269,612
269,613
269,614
269,615
DI5—
DI6—
D17—
D18—
D19-
140
144
30
129
1
20
22
4
7
26
D21— 34
58
104
269,616
269,617
269.618
269,619
269,620
269,621
269,622
269,623
269,624
269,625
269,626
269,627
269,628
269,629
D22—
D23—
D24-
D25—
D26-
D28—
D32-
D34—
150
15
19
22
65
33
42
73
9
88
2
10
45
7
269,630
269,631
269,632
269,633
269,634
269,635
269,636
269,637
269,638
269,639
269,640
269,641
269,642
269,643
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. States, Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
R-
69
5,065
5,066
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
[Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.G. 6877]
297- 367 7103,201
423— 321 R TI03,202
427— 91 T103,203
428-
42 T103,204
560— 124 T 103,205
564— 363 7103,206
{
3.
Alabama ....\\ .~ 1
Alaska :. 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 1 1
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana 18
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
Kentucky 21
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 36
North Carolina 37
North Dakota 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas ». 48
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 58
U.S. Navy 59
(First number in listing denotes location according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Gazette to obtain details
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
PATENTS
01 :
4,391,188
4,391,433
4,392,226
4,391,719
4,392,033
4.391,339
4,391,196
4,391,447
4,392,229
4,391,784
4,392,050
4.391.498
4,391,423
4,391,449
4,392,241
4,391,870
4,392,077
4.391,686
-
4,391,518
4,391,467
4,392,248
4,391,883
4,392,083
4,391,923
4,391,833
4,391,474
4,392,256
4,392,102
4,392.116
4,391,927
4,391,993
4,391,490
08 : 4,391,059
4.392,113
4,392,138
4,392,008
04 :
4.391,005
4,391,492
4,391,307
4,392,196
4,392,254
4,392,010
4,391,226
4,391,514
4,391,411
4,392,217
18 : 4,391,027
4,392,059
4,391.268
4,391,515
4,391,424
4,392,232
4.391.085
4,392,101
4,391,368
4,391,517
4,391,572
13 : 4,391,080
4,391,092
25 : 4,391,011
4,391,549
4,391,525
4,391,697
4,391,370
4.391,266
4,391.039
4,391,773
4,391,531
4,391,733
4,391,516
4,391,280
4.391,101
4,391,846
4,391,541
4,391,873
4,391,830
4,391,367
4,391.103
4,391,924
4,391,552
4,392,156
4,392,(V15
4.391,387
4,391,110
4,392,018
4,391,554
4,392,188
4,392,129
4,391.390
4.391,137
4,392,067
4,391,557
09 : 4,391,053
4,392,218
4,391,454
4,391,150
4,392,128
4,391,574
4.391,111
15 : 4,391,352
4,391,520
4,391,279
4,392,223
4,391,579
4,391,168
16 : 4.391,172
4,391,563
4,391,408
05 :
Re.31,297
4,391.589
4,391,170
17 : 4,391,028
4,391,696
4,391,487
4,391,415
4,391,597
4,391,223
4,391,029
4,391,806
4,391,523
06 :
4,390,995
4,391,599
4,391,365
4,391,064
4,391,807
4,391,526
4,391.006
4,391,609
4,391,378
4,391.071
4,391,826
4,391,540
4,391,008
4,391,660
4,391,399
4,391,177
4.391,848
I 4,391,558
4,391,017
4,391,699
4,391,425
4,391,216
4,391.905
\ 4,391,617
4,391,026
4,391,704
4,391,444
4,391,229
4,391,906
\ 4,391,630
4,391,044
4,391,712
4,391,561
4,391,233
4,391,935
/ — 4,391,713
4,391,074
4,391,734
4,391,613
4,391,236
4,391,954
( 4,391,797
4,391,099
4,391,740
4,391,621
4,391,286
4,392,017
4.391.856
4,391,102
4,391,746
4,391,751
4,391,294
4,392,022
4.391.863
4,391,113
4,391,749
4,391,771
4,391,308
4,392,028
4,391.895
4,391,129
4,391,777
4,391,827
4,391,309
4,392,090
4,391,897
4,391,155
4,391,779
4,391,888
4,391,335
19 : 4,391,050
4,391.941
4,391,167
4,391,780
4,392,084
4,391,371
4,391,065
4,392.021
4,391,208
4,391,801
4.392,145
4,391,480
4,391,157
4,392,031
4,391,224
4,391,828
4,392,157
4,391,545
4,391,187
4.392,089
4,391,230
4,391,849
4,392,203
4,391,580
4.391,225
4,392,100
4,391,267
4,391,865
10 : 4,391,627
4,391,652
4,391,361
4.392,172
4,391,269
4,391,904
4,391,903
4,391,665
4,391,834
4,392,189
4.391,281
4,391,952
4,391,922
4,391.666
20 : 4.391,259
4.392,200
4,391,292
4.392,016
4,391,936
4.391,709
4,391,822
4,392,201
4,391,296
4.392.023
4,391,966
4,391,721
4,392,062
26 : Re.31,296
4,391,297
4.392.040
12 : 4,391,061
4.391,747
21 : 4,391,042
Re 31,298
4,391,300
4,392.063
4,391,100
4,391,829
4,392,118
4,391.043
4,391,324
4,392,111
4,391,151
4,391,831
22 : 4,391,136
4,391,120
4,391,329
4,392,140
4,391,185
4,391.845
4,391,347
4,391.121
4,391,333
4,392,149
4,391,271
4,391,866
4,391,703
4.391,131
4,391,337
4,392,159
4,391,291
4,391,869
4,391,707
4,391,158
4,391,358
4,392,165
4,391.373
4,391,902
4,391,789
4.391,159
4,391,372
4,392,173
4,391,427
4,391,932
4,391,961
4,391,171
4,391,376
4,392,179
4,391,428
4,391,946
4,391,977
4,391,178
4,391,410
4,392,190
4,391,441
4,391,948
4,392,181
4,391,204
4,391,420
4,392,197
4,391,567
4,391,967
23 : 4,391,405
4,391,205
4,391,429
4,392,207
4,391,706
4,392,029
24 : 4,391,299
4,391,245
PI 51
PI 52 GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
4,391,355
4,391,637
4,391,610
4,391,127
4,391,312
4.391.799
4.391,369
4,391,638
4,391,612
4,391,209
4.391.349
4.391.949
4,391,379
4,391,645
4,391,634
4,391,277
4.391.363
4,392,051
4,391,380
4,391,647
4,391,641
4,391,290
4.391.364
4,392,109
4,391,481
4,391,656
4,391,648
4,391,310
4.391.374
4,392,187
4,391.551
4,391,657
4,391,670
4,391,318
4,391,377
4,392,210
4,391,562
4,391,661
4,391,673
4,391,351
4,391,393
4,392,250
4,391,614
4,391,680
4,391,729
4,391,384
4,391,402
4,392,251
4,391,722
4,391,683
4,391,811
4,391,404
4,391,434
49 : 4,391,276
4,391,728
4,391,698
4,391,813
4,391,436
4,391.448
4,391,328
4,391,765
4,391,717
4,391,823
4,391,451
4.391.475
4,391,705
4,391,768
4,391,720
4,391,824
4,391,472
4,391,544
4,392,150
4,391,787
4.391,727
4,391,841
4,391,548
4,391,590
51 : 4,391,034
4,391,809
4,391,738
4,391,842
4,391,570
4,391,594
4,391,142
4,391,855
4,391,739
4,391,860
4,391,581
4.391.611
4,391,285
4,391,937
4,391,744
4,391,890
4,391,595
4.391,690
4,391,397
4,392,032
4,391,755
4,391,894
4,391,608
4,391,782
4,391,576
4,392,132
27 : 4,391,013
4,391,014
4,391,041
4,391,073
4,391,082
4,391,146
4,391,194
4,391,278
4,391,311
4,391,348
4,391,539
4,391,543
4,391,568
4,391,591
4,391,760
4,391,785
4,391,795
4,391,798
4,391,800
4,391,808
4.391,812
4,391,836
4,391,843
4,391,880
4,391,925
4,391,928
4,391,973
4,391,981
4,391,992
4,391,896
4,391,914
4,391,939
4,391,950
4,391,982
4,391,991
4,391,996
4,391,997
4,392,006
4,392,035
4.392.068
4.392.078
4.392,080
4,392,081
4,392,105
4,391,650
4,391,674
4,391,685
4,391,723
4,391,724
4,391,725
4,391,737
4,391,756
4,391,757
4,391,778
4,391,818
4,391,838
4,391,844
4,391,953
4.391,868
4.391,875
4,391,876
4,391,878
4,391,917
4,391,929
4,391,933
4,391,938
4 J9 1,943
4.391.947
4.391.951
4,391,956
4,392,038
4,392,070
4,391,586
4,391,651
4,391,655
4,391,678
4,391,716
4,391,909
4,392,191
4,392,209
53 : 4,391,076
4,391,315
4,391,334
4,391,353
4,391.396
4.391.409
4,391,600
4,391,998
4,392,107
4,391,970
4,392,085
4.391.422
4,391,646
4,391,999
4,392,108
4,391,971
4,392,091
4.391,430
4,391,732
4,392,011
4,392,126
4,391,989
4,392,178
4,391,450
4,392,087
4,392,044
4,392,142
4,391,990
4,392,193
4,391,535
28 : 4,391,001
4,392,112
4,392,148
4,392,004
4,392,233
4,392.060
29 : 4,391,007
4,392,231
4,392,153
4,392,055
44 : 4,391,375
4,392,137
4,391,046
35 : 4,391,901
4,392,171
4,392,056
45 : 4,391,018
4,392.139
4,391,072
4,392,065
4.392,180
4,392,076
4,391,153
4.392.204
4,391,186
36 : Re.31,300
4,392,182
4,392,119
4,391,862
4.392.236
4,391,485
Re.3 1,302
4,392,215
40 : 4,391,228
4,391,871
54 : 4.391.327
4.391,625
4,390,998
4,392,225
4,391,330
4,391,934
4,391.759
4,391,636
4,391,010
4,392,235
4,391,336
4,391,985
4,391,867
4,391,840
4,391,052
4,392,237
4,391,418
4,392,104
4,391,919
4,391,847
4,391,054
37 : 4,390,999
4,391,550
47 : 4,391,086
4,391,930
4,392,005
4,391,095
4,391,021
4,391,643
4,391,143
55 : 4,391,078
31 : 4,391,735
4,391,124
4,391,067
4,391,736
4,391,438
4,391,079
32 : 4,391,663
4,391,293
4,391,084
4,391,790
4,391,886
4,391,081
4,391,853
4,391,322
4,391,156
4,391,791
4,392,034
4,391,104
4,391,969
4,391,338
4,391,437
41 : 4,391,160
4,392,072
4,391,189
4,392,184
4,391,340
4,391,499
4,391.295
4.392,073
4,391,254
33 ; 4,391,012
4,391,406
4,391,584
4.391,401
4,392,192
4,391,255
4,392,009
4,391,440
4,391,918
4.391.457
48 : 4,391,135
4,391,263
34 : 4,391,003
4,391,442
4,391,921
4.391.461
4,391,220
4,391,301
4,391,088
4,391,468
4,392,030
4,391,494
4,391,264
4,391,459
4,391,107
4,391,479
38 : 4,391,235
4,392,125
4,391,289
4,391.477
4,391,108
4,391,495
4,391,344
42 : 4,391,068
4,391,298
4,391,592
4,391,202
4,391,504
39 : 4,391,030
4,391,118
4,391,325
4,391,687
4,391,215
4.391,505
4,391,038
4,391,128
4,391,326
4,391,775
4,391,283
4.391,509
4,391,063
4,391,139
4,391.345
4,392,015
4,391,284
4,391,510
4,391,069
4,391,149
4.391,547
4,392,053
4.391.362
4,391,537
4,391,075
4,391,219
4,391,598
4,392,096
4.391.388
4,391,575
4,391,093
4,391,274
4,391,689
4,392,098
4^391,560
4,391,582
4,391,114
4,391,304
4.391,693
56 : 4,391,058
DESIGN PATENTS
01 :
269,576
269,581
12
269,562
269,599
269.595
269,617
04 :
269,570
269,582
269,565
269,605
269.612
47 :
269,568
269,571
269,583
269,575
26 : 269,569
269.613
48 -
269,577
269,606
05 :
269,586
269,584
17
269,573
269,596
269,641
269,604
269,587
269,593
269,598
269,632
269,614
269,594
27 : 269,574
36
269,578
269,638
06 :
269,560
269,628
269.600
28 : 269,639
269,619
49 :
269,572
269,561
269,642
269.608
29 : 269.588
269,633
269,620
269,563
09 : 269,621
269,609
269.616
37 :
269,643
269,637
269,579
269,631
18
269,622
30 : 269.602
39 :
269,566
53 :
269,635
269,580
269,636
25
269,567
34 : 269.564
269,601
55 :
269,585
DEFENSIVE PUBLICATIONS APPLICATIONS
[Notice of Dec. 16, 1969, 869 O.G. 6877]
01
T 103,202
T 103.206
08
T103.2O4
34
T103,205
36
T 103,203
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFHCE : O— 1983
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST. LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE , , , , ,
I 1 I I I I I I I I II 1 M I I I I I I I I
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
(or) COUNTRY
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
® %
Domestic; @ $
Foreign.
NAME— FIRST, LAST
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
11
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
Q Ramittancc Enclosed (M»ht
chccKs payabit to Supcrin-
tandtnt of Documtntt)
Q Charge to my Deposit
Account No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO:
Superintendent of Documents^
Government Printing Office
Washington. D.C. 20402
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
July 12, 1983 Volume 1032 Number 2
CONTENTS
Page
Patent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1032 OG 12
Reissue Applications Filed 1032 OG 12
Request for Reexamination Filed 1032 OG 12
Trademark Applications and Examination Proceedings;
Trademark Interference, Concurrent Use; Opposition and
Cancellation Proceedings; Trademark Post-Registration
Proceedings; Correction 1032 OG 12
Notice of Availability for Licensing 1032 OG 13
Adverse Decisions in Interference 1032 OG 13
Patent Certificates of Correction 1032 OG 14
Disclaimers 1032 OG 14
Dedication 1032 OG 14
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries 1032 OG 15
Condition of Patent Applications 1032 OG 16
Reexaminations 1032 OG 17
Reissue Patents Granted (31,304) ^35
Plant Patents Granted (5,067) "^39
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,392,257) '♦^l
Chemical (4,392,863) ^^3
Electrical (4,393,267) "^^l
Design Patents Granted (269,644) ^53
Index of Patentees ^1 1
Indices of Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 47
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 51
Designs and Plants PI 54
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) PI 55
Designs and Plants ^1 ^^
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Goveminent
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weeUy.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, S8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, D.C., 20231.
Printing authorized by Section 1 l(a)3 of Title 35, U.S. Code P.T.O.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperatioii Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the OfTicial Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28, 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
. • Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPUCATIONS HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4,034,622, Re. S.N. 493,428, Filed May 10, 1983, CI.
74/501, INFINITELY ADJUSTABLE CABLE-CON-
TROLLED APPARATUS AND METHOD, James R.
Deck, Owner of Record: Caterpillar Tractor Co.. Peoria,
III. Attorney or Agent: Paul S. Lempio, Ex. Gp.: 352
4,226,300, Re. S.N. 486,817, Filed Apr. 20, 1983, CI.
182/2, SELF PROPELLED AND EXTENSIBLE
BOOM LIFT, Rallie P. Rallis, et al., Owner of Record:
Mark Industries, Carson City, Calif.. Attorney or Agent:
Robert R. Thornton, Ex. Gp.: 354
4,257,702, Re. S.N. 475,540, Filed Mar. 15, 1983, CI.
355/71, APPARATUS FOR ASCERTAINING COL-
OR BALANCE OF PHOTOGRAPHIC PRINTING
PAPER, Bertram W. Miller, Owner of Record: Inven-
tor. Attorney or Agent: David G. Parkhurst, Ex. Gp.:
211
4,267,930, Re. S.N. 484,547, FUed Apr. 13, 1983, CI.
209/31, RAISIN SEPARATING DEVICE, Douglas
H. Melkonian, Owner of Record: Inventor. Attorney or
Agent: Louis J. Knobbe, Ex. Gp.: 312
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor esUblished in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aX5)and 1.525(b)).
Des. 256,345, Reexam. No. 90/000,388, Requested:
May 31, 1983, CI. D12/202, TIRE CARRIER FOR A
VAN TYPE VEHICLE, Raywood C. Weiler, Owner
of Record: BMC Products. Chicago, III. Attorney or
Agent: Nathan N. Kraus, Ex. Gp.: 291, Requester: Wil-
liam J. Wade, Long Beach, Calif.
Re. 30,659, Reexam. No. 90/000,386, Requested: June
1, 1983, CI. 401/209, PEN POINTS FOR WRITING
INSTRUMENTS, Nobuyuki Otake, et al.. Owner of
Record: Requester, Attorney or Agent: Parkhurst &
Oliff, Ex. Gp.: 336, Requester: Tokyo Boshi, Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
3,788,284, Reexam. No. 90/000,390, Requested: June
2, 1983, CI. 123/571, FEEDBACK MODULATION
OF EXHAUST GASES IN INTERNAL COMBUS-
TION ENGINES, Conrad O. Gardner, Owner of Rec-
ord: Conrad O. Gardner, West Edmonds, Wash., Attor-
ney or Agent: Morris A. Case, Ex. Gp.: 340, Requester:
Owner
4,019,666, Reexam. No. 90/000,396, Requested: June
6, 1983, CI. 227/119, FASTENER ATTACHING MA-
CHINE HAVING MEANS FOR ORIENTING
CAPS, BUTTONS AND THE LIKE, Jonathan Asa
Foults, Owner of Record: Scovill Mftg. Co., Waterbury,
Conn., Attorney or Agent: Dallett Hoopes, Ex. Gp.: 320
Requester: Rau Fastener Div. of U.S. Industries, Inc.,
Providence, R.I.
4,020,830, Reexam. No. 90/000,395, Requested: June
6, 1983, CI. 128/632, SELECTIVE CHEMICAL SEN-
SITIVE FET TRANSDUCERS, Curtis C. Johnson, et
al., Owner of Record: University of Utah, Salt Lake City,
Utah, Attorney or Agent: Criddle, Thorpe, & Western,
Ex. Gp.: 330, Requester: Leon Home, Arlington, Va.
Department of Commerce
Patent and Trademark Office
37 CFR Part 2
[Docket No. 30428-69]
Trademark Applications and Examination Proceedings;
Trademark Interference, Concurrent Use, Opposition
and Cancellation Proceedings; Trademark
Post-Registration Proceedings; Correction
Agency: Patent and Trademark Office, Conmierce.
Action: Final rule, correction.
Summary: This document corrects a final rule notice ap-
pearing in the Federal Register on May 23, 1983 (48 FR
23122) that amended the Patent and Trademark Office
rules of practice in trademark cases to revise or codify
existing practices, simplify procedures, or establish time
periods for the purpose of facilitating the orderly and
prompt resolution of issues before the Office in several
types of proceedings.
For Further Information Contact* Miss Janet E. Rice by
telephone at (703) 557-3551 or by mail addressed to the
1032 OG 12
July 12, 19
^
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1032 OG 13
Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Attention:
Miss Janet E. Rice, Crystal Square 5, Suite 1008, Wash-
ington, D.C. 20231.
The following corrections are made:
1. On page 23122, third column, line 8, "§1.101"
should read "§2.101".
2. On page 23129, first column, line 11, "(f)" should
read "(fX5)".
3. On page 23129, second column, line 11, the word
"is" should read "in".
4. On page 23131, first column, line 57, "§2.120(cX2)"
should read "§2.122(cX2)".
5. On page 23131, third column, line 35, the word
"deception" should read "exception".
6. On page 23134, second column, line 26, the word
"filing" should read "filings".
7. On page 23135, column 1, in the tenth line after the
heading "§2.96 Issue; burden of proof.", the word "par-
ty" should appear after the word "junior".
8. On page 23135, column 2, line 10, the word "this"
should read "his".
9. On page 23135, column 2, line 22, the word "file"
should read "filed".
10. On page 23135, column 2, line 50, the word "and"
should read "an".
11. On page 23135, column 3, line 30, the comma after
the word "examiner" should be a semicolon.
12. On page 23136, column 1, in the first line after the
heading "§2.113 Notification of cancellation proceed-
ing.", the designation "(a)" should be stricken.
13. On page 23138, column 2, line 58, the "w" in
"when" should be capitalized.
14. On page 23139, column 2, line 22, the 3 asterisks
should be stricken. An additional line should be added
directly below line 22. The new line 23 should consist of
5 asterisks along the center of the line, with four spaces
between each asterisk. The text should then be resumed
on line 24 with what was previously line 23.
15. On page 23140, column 3, line 38, the word "due"
should be inserted after the word "be".
16. On page 23142, column 3, line 6, the "p" in "part"
should be capitalized.
Ij DONALD J. QUIGG,
June 8, 1983. Acting Commissioner of
Patents and Trademarks.
[FR Doc. 83-15831 Filed 6-13-83; 8:45 am]
BILLING CODE 3510-16-M
!
TRAPMENT WITHIN STARCH ADDUCT MA-
TRIX.
SN 6-245,461 (4,382,950). INSECT REPELLANTS.
SN 6-300,784 (4,383,390). METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR HOT-CALLUSING GRAFT
UNIONS.
SN 6-385,204 (4,384,866). PROCESS FOR PRODUC-
ING DURABLE PRESS FABRICS THROUGH
PHOSPHORYLATION.
Environmental Protection Agency
SN 6-149,541 (4,384,843). COMBUSTION METHOD
AND APPARATUS WITH CATALYTIC TUBES. *
Department of Health and Human Services
SN 6-468,776. DRILL GUIDE FOR BONE PLATE
FIXATION
SN 6-491,789. ANTINEOPLASTIC l-HYDROXY-4-
(SUBSTITUTED AMINOALKYL-AMINO) AN-
THRAQUINONES.
SN 6-495,725. MONOCLONAL ANTIBODIES
AGAINST NON SMALL CELL LUNG CANCER.
National SEcimiTY Agency
SN 6-180,075 (4,383,261). METHOD FOR LASER
RECORDING UTILIZING DYNAMIC PRE-
HEATING.
lational Technical Information Serrice
U.S. Government-Owned Inventions
I Notice of A vailability for Licensing
The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in
the U.S. in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex-
peditious commercialization of results of federally funded
research and development. Foreign patents are filed on
selected inventions to extend market coverage for U.S.
companies and may also be available for licensing.
Technical and licensing information on specific inven-
tions may be obtained by writing to:
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
U.S. Department of Commerce
P.O. Box 1423
Springfield, Va. 22151
Please cite the number and title of inventions of inter-
est.
GEORGE KUDRAVETZ,
Program Manager,
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Department of Commerce.
Department of Agriculture
SN 6-202,396 (4,382,813). ENCAPSULATION BY EN-
Adverse Decisions in Interference
In the designated interference involving the indicated
claims of the following patents, final decisions having
been rendered that the respective patentees were not the
first inventors with respect to the claims listed.
Patent No. 3,734,758, Henryk A. Cyba and Allen K.
Sparks, NOVEL FLAME RETARDANT COMPOSI-
TIONS OF MATTER, Interference No. 100,053. decid-
ed Feb. 23, 1983, claim 1.
Patent No. 3,854,888, Gunther Frietzsche and Peter
Krause, DEVICE FOR THE PURIFICATION OF
WASTE GASES OF INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES, Interference No. 100,898, decided Apr. 1,
1983, claims 1 & 3.
Patent No. 3,865,446, Pasquale P. J. Mastronardi,
STORAGE MEANS WITH SHIFTABLE UNITS. In-
terference No. 100,955, decided May 3, 1983, claims 1-6
& 8.
Patent No. 3,884,693, Sigrid Bauer and Helga Sikora,
LIGHT-SENSITIVE TRANSFER MATERIAL, In-
terference No. 99,991, decided Feb. 10, 1982, claims 1,
3-9 & 12.
Patent No. 3,974,931, Thomas G. Moller. BOTTLE
CAP, Interference No. 100,243, decided Apr. 23, 1982,
claim 7.
Patent No. 4,050,508, Bruce S. Buckley, CONTROL-
LABLE HEAT TRANSMISSION PANELS, Interfer-
ence No. 100,232, decided Jan. 21, 1983, claims 16 & 18.
Patent No. 4,060,110, Allen M. Bower, VAPOUR
RECOVERY NOZZLE, Interference No. 100,179, de-
cided Feb. 10, 1983, claims 1 & 2.
Patent No. 4,231,246, Edward J. Gorenc, Ulles E. Fox
and Imre A. Lesko, CRIMPING TOOL FOR TUBU-
LAR-LIKE OBJECTS AND METHOD, Interference
No. 100,853, decided May 13, 1983, claims 1, 6, 11, 12,
13 & 16
Patent No. 4,263,100, Dieter Stalherm and Janos
Bocsanczy, METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RE-
DUCING FINE DUST EMISSION WHILE CHARG-
ING PREDRIED AND PREHEATED COAL INTO
COKE OVENS, Interference No. 100,938, decided Apr.
14, 1983, claims 1, 5 & 6
Patent No. 4,278,599, Gary T. Clark, MONO AZO
DYES FROM (2 .ALKOXY-5 -ALKANOYLAMINO-
ANILINO) ALKOXY OR ARYLOXY AL-
KANES, Interference No. 100,922, decided Apr. 14,
1983, claims 1-3, 5 & 6
NANNIE B. HENRY,
Deputy Clerk.
Board of Patent Interferences.
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correctioii for the Week of July 12, 1983
D. 268,277
3,850,752
4,132,463
4,142,399
4,153,825
4,211,571
4,243,431
4,249,342
4,264,198
4,271,839
4,276,379
4,279,034
4,283,990
4,300,661
4,302,648
4,308,868
4,312,876
4,333,099
4,335,355
4,338,534
4,338,768
4,339,078
4,339,743
4,340,486
4,342,075
4,343,982
4,344,800
4,346,227
4,346,343
4,348,584
4,350,871
4,350,877
4,351,981
4,352,026
4,352,068
4,352,135
4,352,920
4,354,518
4,354,886
4,355,098
4,357,219
4,357,665
4,358,774
4,359,055
4,359,178
4,359,512
4,359,578
4,360,615
4,360,708
4,360,788
4,361,387
4,361,620
4,361,773
4,364,494
4,364,875
4,365,929
4,366,411
4,366,741
4,368,510
4,370,653
4,371,200
4,371,403
4,372,708
4,372,738
4,372,835
4,373,073
4,374,050
4,374,257
4,374,733
4,374,839
4,374,869
4,376,398
4,376,638
4,377,482
4,378,096
4,378,376
4,378,773
4,380,312
4,380,610
4,380,638
4,380,734
4,381,165
4,381,374
4,381,491
4,381,680
4,381,715
4,382,299
4,382,671
4,383,109
4,383,267
4,383,423
Disclaimers
4,10%,029.— Alexander Borzym, Dearborn, Mich. CUT-
OFF DIE SET. Patent dated Aug. 22, 1978. Dis-
claimer filed May 4, 1983, by the assignee, Alpha In-
dustries, Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claim 12 of said pa-
tent.
4,345,234.— 5reven A. Reich. Waterloo, Iowa. MUL-
TIPLE ELEMENT THERMAL ACTUATOR.
Patent dated Aug. 17, 1982. Disclaimer filed Dec. 27,
1982, by the assignee, Deere & Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to all claims of said pa-
tent.
Dedication
3,910,515.— Norbett H. Kaupp, Newark, N.Y. METHOD
FOR ELECTROSTATIC PAPER STRIPPING BY
NEUTRALIZATION OF TRANSFER CHARGE.
Patent dated Mar. 11, 1975. Dedication filed Oct. 21,
1982, by the assignee, Xerox Corp.
Hereby dedicates to the Public the entire remaining
term of said patent.
1032 OG 14
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libranes
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent deposi-
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope
of these collections varies from library to library, rang-
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870,
or earlier, in other libraries.
These patent collections are open to public use and
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers
the publicatkins of the patent classification system (e.g.
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro-
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the
public in gaining effective access to information con-
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
State
Alabama
Arizona
California
Colorado
Delaware
Georgia
Illinois
Louisiana
Name of Library
table following, the collections are organized in patent
number sequence.
Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
in some combination of both. Facilities for making paper
copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general-
ly provided for a fee.
Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
patents at a particular library is advised to contact that
library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as
to avert possible inconvenience.
Telephone Contact
Massachusetts
Michigan
Minnesota
Missouri
Nebraska
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New York
Birmingham Public Library
Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University
Los Angeles Public Library
Sacramento: California State Library
Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse*
Denver Public Library
Newark: University of Delaware
Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Technology
Chicago Public Library
Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University
Boston Public Library
Detroit Public Library
Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center
Kansas City: Linda Hall Library
St. Louis Public Library
North Caro
Ohio
ma
Oklahoma
Pennsylvania
Rhode Island
South Carolina
Tennessee
Texas
Washingtoi
Wisconsin
Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library
Durham: University of New Hampshire Library
Newark Public Library
Albany: New York State Library
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library
New York Public Library (The Research Libraries)
Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University
Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of
Cleveland Public Library
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries
Toledo/Lucas County Public Library
Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library
Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University
Providence Public Library
Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina
Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center
Dallas Public Library
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University
Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington
Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin
Milwaukee Public Library
(205) 254-2555
(602) 965-7607
(213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
(916) 322-4572
(408) 738-5580
(303) 571-2122
(302) 738-2238
(404) 894-4508
(312) 269-2865
(504) 388-2570
(617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
(313) 833-1450
(612) 372-6552
(816) 363-4600
(314) 241-2288 Ext. 214,
Ext. 215
(402)472-3411
(603) 862-1777
(201)733-7814
(518)474-5125
(716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
(212) 930-0850
(919) 737-3280
(513) 369-6936
(216) 623-2870
(614) 422-6286
(419) 255-7055 Ext. 212
(405) 624-6546
(215) 448-1 32 1**
(412) 622-3138
(814) 865-4861
(401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
(803) 792-2372
(901) 528-2957
(214) 749-4176
(713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
(206) 543-0740
(608) 262-6845
(414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries offer CASSIS (Classification And Search Support Information System), which
provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
'Collection organized by subject matter.
••Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.in. and SKX) p.m.
1032 OG 15
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF April 2, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS "
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY. GROUP 110-D. E. TALBERT, Director 1-16-81
Inorganic Compounds; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chemistry; Metallurgy; Metal-
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120— C. E. VAN HORN, Director 11-20-81
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids; Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 14a-J. O. THOMAS. JR., Director 3.1-82
Synthetic Resms; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g.. Coating; Molding;
Ink; Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding, Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and Textile Treating Compositions.
COATING, LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY, GROUP 160-S. N. ZAHARNA, Director 3-09-82
Coating: Processes, Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170—
R. F. WHITE, Director 1-12-82
Fertilizers; Foods; FermenUtion; Analytical Chemistry; Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Maiding; Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation; Preserving; Liquid, Gas,
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS, PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS, GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE, Director 5-22-81
Generation and Utilization; General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 220— KENNETH L. CAGE. Director 3-30-81
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications, Op-
tics; Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices; Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special. Fuel. Explosive and Thermic Composi-
tions; Thermal and Photoelectric Batteries.
INFORMATION TRANSMISSION. STORAGE, AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY, Director 1-05-81
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing, Computation and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240—
G. M. FORLENZA, Director 5-12-81
Receptacles; Bearings; Joint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
Food Treating; Agitoting; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projectors;
Web Feeding; Winding and Reeling; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
Shaft; Impellers; Rotary Fluid Motors.
ELECTRONIC COMPONENT SYSTEMS AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS, Director 8-25-80
Semi-Conductor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring.
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director 1-30-81
Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fine Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310— B. R. GRAY. Director 5-18-81
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding; Dispensing; Fluid Sprin-
kling; Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids; Boats;
Ships; Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATERIAL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS. GROUP 320— STEPHEN G. KUNIN. Director 7-27-81
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling, Combined Machines, Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT, HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT, INFORMATION, GROUP 330-
R. E. AEGERTER, Director 8-27-82
Amusement and Exercising Devices; Projectors; Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Printing; Typewriters; Infor-
mation Dissemination.
HEAT, POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING. GROUP 340— D. J. STOCKING, Director 11-17-80
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing;
Ruid Handling and Control; Lubrication.
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING, GROUP 350-
A. L. SMITH, Director 9-17-80
Building Structures; Racks; Cabinets; Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineering; Earth Drilling; Mining;
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
Ezpiratioo of patents: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during April 1983, except those which may
have had their terms curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, issued after the dates of the range
of numbers indicated below, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provi-
sions of 35 U.S.C. 151. »- K
Pftents Numbers 3,243,822 to 3.248,737. inclusive
Plant Patents Numbers 2,616 to 2,627 inclusive
1032 OG 16
Matter enc
REEXAMINATIONS
JULY 12, 1983
osed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification; matter printed in
italics indicates additions made by reexamination.
iun?Ttj 2,968,164 (104th) across one face to provide a series of parallel open-ended
METHOD OF GENERATING SNOW wire-receiving channels, transversely ridged across the
Alden W. Hanson, 3124 Valley Dr., Midland, Mich. 48640 opposing face to provide a corresponding series of paral-
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,158, Feb. 12, 1982. lei wire-supporting ridges, and containing contact ele-
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 24K>8,164 issued ments extending through said body between said chan-
Jan. 17, 1961, Ser. No. 716,906, Feb. 24, 1958.
U.S.a.62/74 Int a.' F25C ;/70ft- AOIG ;j//oo
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-3 and 5-7 is confirmed.
Claim 4 was previously disclaimed.
1. The method of forming, distributing, and depositing
snow upon a surface, including: mechanically providing a
large volume movement of air at atmospheric pressure,
said movement of air created by a motor-driven propel-
ler, said air having an ambient temperature at or below
about 30 degrees Fahreanheit; and projecting water into
said movement of air in an amount and at a rate such that
substantially all of the water so-introduced is at least
partially crystalized prior to depositing on said surface.
Bl 3,708,779 {105th)
WIRE-SPLiaNG APPARATUS AND METHOD
Dennis J. Enright, St. Paul; Richard D. Kahabka, Bums-
nUe; Donald F. MiUer, St. Paul, aU of Minn., assignors
to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St.
Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-Part of Ser. No. 823,598, May 12, 1969.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,032, Jul. 23, 1981.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,708,779, issued
Jan. 2, 1973, Ser. No. 91,781, No?. 23, 1970.
U.S. a. 339/99 R Int. Q.^ HOIR 13/38. 11/20
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-23 is confirmed.
1. A body member adapted for assembly with coof)er-
ating base and cover members in providing modular con-
nection between corresponding wires of opposing cable-
ends, said body member comprising an elongate insulat-
ing body having opposing faces, transversely grooved
47 4<?
nels and the opposing ridges for making electrical con-
nection between wires supported along substantially the
entire length thereof which lie within said channels and
wires supported along substantially the entire length
thereof which lie on said ridges.
Bl 3,866,100 (106th)
UNIVERSAL MOTOR CONTROL
Daniel P. Palenchar; Wayne H. Uhker; David P. Lock, aU
of Marietta, Ohio, assignors to Kardex Systems, Inc.,
New York
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,215, Jun. 7, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,866,100, issued
Feb. 11, 1975, Ser. No. 365,241, May 30, 1973.
U.S. a. 318/257 Int. Q.^ G05B 11/14
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 2, 3, 5-7, and 9-12 is con-
firmed.
Claims 1, 4 and 8, having been finally determined to be
unpatentable, are cancelled.
[1. A motor control circuit for controlling a motor
having an armature and a series field winding, said motor
control circuit comprising:
a source of full wave rectified AC voltage;
means connecting said armature and said series field
winding in series across said source of voltage, said
means including gating means for selectively con-
necting said source and said armature so that current
may flow through said armature in a first or second
direction;
comparator means responsive to a reference voltage
and feedback signal for producing output pulses each
having a duration proportional to the difference in
magnitude of the signals being compared;
means responsive to said source for applying a refer-
ence voltage to said comparator means;
feedback means responsive to a signal from said motor
representing motor speed for applying a feedback
signal to said comparator means;
1032 OG 17
1032 OG 18
OFHCIAL GAZETTE
logic circuit means including means for selectively gen-
erating a first and second direction command; and,
July 12, 1983
phase controller means responsive to said source, said
comparator, and said direction commands for selec-
tively producing phase control pulses;
said gating means being responsive to said phase con-
trol pulses and said direction commands for selec-
tively connecting said source and said armature. 3
REISSUES
JULY 12, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets [ J appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 3134
MACHINE FOR DRILLING HOLES IN
RIGHT-ANGULAR WORK SURFACES
Yoshlhiro TsuMJi, Komatsu, Japan, assignor to Kabushild Kai-
sha Komatsu Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
Original No. 4,097,175, dated Jun. 27, 1978, Ser. No. 757,057,
Jan. 5, 1977. Application for reissue Jan. 3, 1980, Ser. No.
109,260
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1975, 50-074370
Int. a.i B23B 7/00, 39/14. 41/00
UJS. a 29-27 C 3 Claims
4. In a mac
HD
jhine tool, in combination, a turntable, a crossrail
extending parallel to the surface of said turntable, a carnage
mounted on said crossrail for movement therealong, means for
moving said carriage along said crossrail, a ram mounted on
said carriage for movement toward and away from said turnta-
ble, said ram being furiher movable with said carriage along
said crossrail, means for moving said ram toward and away
from said turntable, a toolhead substantially integrally pro-
vided with a sleeve rotatably supporied at that end of said ram
which is disposed opposite to said turntable, said toolhead
being pivotable relative to said ram about the axis of said sleeve
extending at right angles with said crossrail and parallel to the
surface of said turntable, a first drive shaft within said ram,
means for imparting the rotation of said first drive shaft to said
sleeve and thus for pivoting said toolhead relative to said ram,
a toolholder rotatably supported by said toolhead for rotation
about an axis lying in a plane parallel to said crossrail and at
right angles with the surface of said turntable, a spindle rout-
ably mounted within said sleeve, a second drive shaft within
said ram, means for impariing the rotation of said second drive
shaft to said spindle, means for imparting the rotation of said
spindle to said toolholder, a rotary cutting tool supported by
said toolholder for simultaneous rotation therewith, a turning
tool removably mounted directly on said end of said ram,
locking means adapted to be actuated by said second drive
shaft for securely but releasably locking said turning tool in
position on said ram, and means for rotating said turntable
relative to said turning tool.
UFEPRES
Re. 3135
ifeRVER OF THE ENCAPSULATED TYPE
Harold J. Moran, Trenton, N J., assignor to Switlik Parachute
Company, Inc., Trenton, N J.
Original No. 4^7,758, dated Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 115,982,
Jan. 28, 1980. AppUcation for reissue Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No.
36433
Int a.3 B63C 9/16
U.S. a. 441—123 12 Claims
1. In an inflatable life preserver of the encapsulated type
including an inflatable cell means, said life preserver furiher
including a cover adapted to provide a primary protective
enclosure for the cell means in [an inflated] a collapsed condi-
tion of said means, said cover having flexible, normally con-
nected panels in protective embracing relation to the [in-
flated] collapsed cell means and also having separable fastener
elements on the panels adapted to disengage for separation of
the panels in response to inflation of the cell means, the im-
provement that comprises a protective flap inside the cover
adapted to cooperate with at least one of the panels to provide
an auxiliary enclosure for the cell means in the event of acci-
dental separation of the panels with the cell means in [an
26o 28
38 261)
inflated J a collapsed condition, the panels having inner edges
connected together [to define said open center] and [have]
having outer edges along which the [fastened] fastener ele-
ments are disposed, said flap having an outer edge secured to
the outer edge of said one panel, the flap and said one panel
being substantially coextensive in width with the flap having a
free inner edge overlying and in close proximity to the inner
edge of said one panel.
Re. 3136
COLD ROLLED, DUCHLE, HIGH STRENGTH STEEL
STRIP AND SHEET AND METHOD THEREFOR
James A. Elias, deceased, late of Middletown, Ohio (by June G.
Elias, executrix); John R. Newby, and Marrin B. Pierson,
both of Middletown, Ohio, assignors to Armco Inc., Middle-
town, Oliio
Original No. 4,067,754, dated Jan. 10, 1978, Ser. No. 674,862,
Apr. 8, 1976. Division of Ser. No. 554,158, Feb. 28, 1975, Pat.
No. 3,963,531. Application for reissue May 6, 1981, Ser. No.
260,904
Int a.3 C21D 7/02. 7/14
U.S. a. 148—12 F 7 Qaims
^
It0|.
e
'.MTALIWO 'TeMVCRATUftt T OPCH OHL « KTCU MMtAt.
1. A method of producing cold reduced low carbon steel
strip and sheet stock having a 0.2% offset yield strength of at
least 90 ksi and an elongation in two inches of greater than 10%
435
436
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
in the annealed condition, comprising the steps of providing a
vacuum degassed, fully killed low carbon steel casting consist-
ing essentially of, by weight percent, from 0.02% to about
0. 1 0% carbon, about 0. 1 % to 0.9% manganese, 0.02% to about
0.18% columbium, residual phosphorus, sulfur, silicon, oxygen
and nitrogen, about 0.01% to about 0.08% aluminum, and
balance essentially iron except for incidental impurities, the
columbium being substantially completely combined with
carbon, hot rolling to intermediate gauge, coiling at a tempera-
ture [not higher than] of about lOOO" to about 1300* F., re-
moving hot mill scale, cold reducing to final gauge with a
reduction in thickness of 40% to 70%, and annealing at a
temperature and for a time sufficient to recover ductility but
not recrystallize whereby to obtain an elongation of greater
than 10% with a yield strength of at least 90 ksi.
and up to about 65' C. and the polymer has a number average
molecular weight of about 1.500-8.000 and a weight average
molecular weight of about 6.000-30,000 and a molecular weight
distribution of about 1-5; wherein the composition contains about
0.01-5% by weight, based on the weight of the coating composi-
tion, of an organo metallic drier selected from the group consisting
of cobalt, copper, lead, zirconium, calcium, iron, nickel, tin. zinc
and lithium organo metallic driers and about 0. 1-5% based on
the weight of the polymer, of aluminum metal from an organo
aluminum complex.
Re. 31,307
METHOD FOR PREPARING CLAY-BASED GREASE
COMPOSITIONS
Kenneth A. MacKenzie, Burlington, and Abraham Verhoeff,
Toronto, both of Canada, assignors to Shell Internationale
Research Maatschap, IIJ B.V., The Hague, Netherlands
Original No. 4,122,022, dated Oct. 24, 1978, Ser. No. 815,691,
Jul. 14, 1977. Application for reissue Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No.
192,060
Claims priority, application Canada, Aug. 3, 1976, 258332;
Aug. 3, 1976, 258332
Int. a.' ClOM 1/10. 3/02. 5/02. 7/04 '
U.S. a. 252—28 W Claims
1. In the method for preparing a clay-bearing grease which
comprises mixing an aqueous clay hydrogel and a conjugate
acid surfactant formed from an acid and an organic amine,
which mixture is combined, with mixing, with a major propor-
tion of a lubricating oil to result in a pre-grease phase contain-
ing the oil, clay and surfactant and a water phase; followed by
separating the pre-grease phase from the water phase; the
improvement which comprises:
(a) mixing with the pre-grease, from about 0.1 to about 20
weight percent of an epoxide, based upon the weight of
the pre-grease before or after a dehydration step;
(b) heating the mixture [to a temperature not greater than
250' F.3 to cure the epoxide; and
(c) milling the dried and cured mixture to form a clay-bear-
ing grease.
Re. 31,310
IMPACT RESISTANT VINYL ESTER RESIN AND
PROCESS FOR MAKING SAME
Daniel J. N^jvar, Lake Jackson, Tex., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Original No. 3,892,819, dated Jul. 1, 1975, Ser. No. 343,716,
Mar. 21, 1973. Continuation of Ser. No. 753,395, Dec. 22,
1976, abandoned. Application for reissue Feb. 25, 1980, Ser.
No. 124,055
Int. C\? C08F 283/10: C08G 59/16
U.S. a. 525—531 16 Claims
1. A process for preparing a thermosettable resin having
improved impact resistance in the thermoset state which com-
prises [simultaneously] reacting the epoxide moieties of a
polyepoxide having an average of more than one epoxide
group per molecule with the acid moieties of an unsaturated
monocarboxylic acid and a liquid carboxy terminated polydi-
ene rubber wherein the combined acid equivalents of said
unsaturated acid and said polydiene ranges from about 0.8 to
1.2 equivalents per epoxide equivalent and wherein at least
about 80 percent of said acid equivalents comprises said unsat-
urated acid and the balance between 0.01 and 20 percent com-
prises said polydiene, provided that the polydiene rubber con-
tent is at least about 4 weight percent and wherein said resin is
prepared by the simultaneous reaction of said polyepoxide. said
polydiene rubber and said monocarboxylic acid or by the sequen-
tial reaction wherein said polyepoxide and said polydiene rubber
are reacted followed by addition and reaction of said monocarbox-
ylic acid with the product of that first reaction.
Re. 31,308
Patent Not Issued For This Number
Re. 31,309
HIGH SOLIDS AMBIENT TEMPERATURE CURING
COATINGS OF ACRYLIC-FATTY AOD DRYING OIL
RESINS
Joseph A. Antonelli, Riverton, N J.; Renee J. Kelly, Media, and
Joseph E. McLaughlin, Philadelphia, both of Pa., assignors to
E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Original No. 4,242,243, dated Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 58,662,
Jul. 18, 1979. Application for reissue Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No.
281,201
Int. C\? C08L 25/14. 33/12
U.S. a. 523—459 20 Claims
1. A high solids coating composition comprising a polymer
having a backbone of polymerized monomers selected from
the group consisting of an alkyl methacrylate, an alkyl acry-
late, styrene or mixtures thereof and polymerized hydroxyl
containing monomers selected from the group consisting of a
hydroxyl alkyl acrylate, a hydroxy alkyl methacrylate [of] or
mixtures thereof, wherein the active hydrogen of at least one
pendant hydroxyl group of the backbone is replaced by
O
II
— C— R
where R is the residual of a drying oil fatty acid and wherein
the polymer has a glass transition temperature of at least 20* C.
Re. 31,311
DC FREE ENCODING FOR DATA TRANSMISSION
SYSTEM
Jerry W. MUler, Menio Park, Calif., assignor to Ampex Corpo-
ration, Redwood City, Calif.
Original No. 4,027,335, dated May 31, 1977, Ser. No. 3,191,976.
Application for reissue Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,846
Int. C\? GllB 5/09
U.S. a. 360—40 14 Claims
2£ OCFSCfclW^
1. In a self-clocking transmission system for transmitting
binary data sequentially in successive clocked bit cells of a
transmission channel wherein logical first bit states are nor-
mally transmitted as signal transitions relatively early in [the]
respective bit cells and logical second bit states are normally
transmitted as signal transitions relatively late in respective bit
cells and any [transitions] transition relatively early in a bit
cell following a transition relatively late in the next preceding
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
437
bit cell is suppressed, apparatus for modifying the transmitted
signal to remove any net DC component, said apparatus com- """^'^ i\gnd\ with normal transmission, and means responsive
prising first indicating means responsive to bit states for pro- to said first indicating signal, a current bit and but one next
ducmg at the onset of a sequence of second bit states following
a first bit sUte a first indicating signal indicating any such *"'^ceedmg bit for modifying the transmission of signal transi-
sequence that might introduce a DC component into the trans- tions to eliminate any DC [components] component.
1
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 12, 1^83 ^
Illustrations for plant patents are usually i„ color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,067
ROSE PLANT — MEIMAGARMIC VARIETY
Marie L. Meilland, Antibes, France, assignor to Conard-Pyle
Company, West Grote, Pa.
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,255
Claims priority, appUcation France, Dec. 29, 1980, 2980
Int a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. CI. Plt-11 I ci^
1. A new and distinct variety of Hybrid Tea rose plant,
substantially as illustrated and described, by the fact that:
from the physical standpoint the plant with light green adult
wood has a semi-erect growth habit, forms dark green
shmy leaves, and forms double flowers which are empire
yellow and are edged with an amaranth red flush; and
from the biological standpoint the plant has vigorous and
regular vegetation, an abundant and repeated florescence.
the abUity for its flowers to last a long time and for the
petals to detach cleanly.
5,068
AFRICAN VIOLET NAMED SWAN LAKE
Arnold W. Fischer, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Pan-American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla.
FUed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,316
Int a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Plt.-69 , ci^
1. A new variety of African Violet plant, substantially as
herem shown and described, characterized by its profuse pro-
duction of large, deep pink flowers borne on upright stems to
cluster above the plant foliage.
439
PATENTS
GRANTED JUL. 12, 1983
ERRATA
For
CLASS
089-033
604-202
604-082
123-342
180-217,
128-079,
427-194 .
376-133.
428-355 .
424-074 .
323-355 .
377-056 .
382-022 .,
361-074.,
PATENT NO.
.... 4,392,407
.... 4,392,491
.... 4,392,492
.... 4,392,502
.... 4,392,536
.... 4,392,526
.... 4,392,908
.... 4,392,918
... 4,393,080
... 4,393,086
... 4,393,157
... 4,393,301
... 4,393,366
... 4,393,487
PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,392,257
METHOD OF MAKING DRESSES FOR DOLLS AND THE
LIKE AND PRODUCT OBTAINED BY THIS METHOD
Giulio S. Furga, Via Fatebenefratelli 12, MUan, Italy
FUed Oct. 4, 1979, Ser. No. 82,213
Int. a.5 A41D 1/22; B32B 33/00
U.S. a. 2—105 7 Claims
-^10
7. A aress for a doll or the like, said dress being deHned by
boundaries, said dress comprising two superposed portions of
synthetic fabric, electronic weld lines joining said portions
together located in closely spaced relation to said boundaries
of said dress to simulate sewn seams, and said two portions of
fabric having figures, designs, trimmings or the like, which
define clothing portions such as collars, belts, pockets and the
like, directly woven in said portions of said fabric, for instance,
by a Jacauard system.
parts and right and left rear parts for covering the respective
front and rear of a wearer's right and left hip and thigh,
each said rear part having a top edge, a bottom edge, an
outer edge extending substantially continuously between
said top and bottom edges, a lower inner edge extending
from said bottom edge to a region corresponding to the
sacrum of the wearer and an upper inner edge extending
from the region corresponding to the sacrum to the top
edge,
each said front part having a central portion, a top edge, a
bottom edge, an outer edge extending substantially contin-
uously between said top and bottom edges, a lower inner
edge extending from the bottom edge to the region of the
sacrum of the wearer, said lower inner edge slanting away
from said central portion in the region of the thigh of the
wearer, a concave crotch edge extending from the region
of the sacrum toward said central portion, and an upper
inner edge extending from said crotch edge to said top
edge,
an elongated crotch piece having a multiplicity of sides
including elongated right and left continuous concave
sides converging at one end thereof in an acute angle, the
remainder of said sides forming a crotch piece top,
wherein said right and left front parts have their upper inner
4,392,258
SHADE SHIRT
Michael H. O'NeiU, 1071 41st Ave., Santa Cruz, CaUf. 95062
FUed Dec. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 435,908
Int. a.3 A42B 1/06; A41B 1/00
U.S. a. 2—209.1 1 aaim
1. A convertible article of clothing having a fabric covering
the upper torso in the manner of a T-shirt or sweater and
having a neck opening defining a rear margin and a semistifl"
bill attached to said rear margin of the neck opening whereby
said article of clothing can be worn as a shirt with the bill
depending from the back of the garment or placed over the
head with the bill in front serving as an eyeshade.
4,392,259
TROUSER CONSTRUCTION
Guido Bredo, No. 3, Via di Sant'Eustacchio, 00186 Rome, Italy
FUed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,227
Claims priority, appUcation Italy, Aug. 29, 1979, 50127 A/79;
Mar. 12, 1980, 48145 V80
Int a.' A41D 1/06
UJS. a. 2—227 15 Claims
1. A trouser construction comprising right and left front
edges shaped for complementary construction with said
crotch piece top across the abdomen of the wearer,
said right front and rear parts are joined by a right outer
seam along their outer edges and by a right inseam along
their lower inner edges,
said left front and rear parts are joined by a left outer seam
along their outer edges and by a left inseam along their
lower inner edges,
said right and left rear pwuts are joined by a back seam along
their upper inner edges,
said right front part is joined to said crotch piece by a right
crotch joint along the crotch edge of said right front part
and said right converging side of said crotch piece,
said left front part is joined to said crotch piece by a left
crotch joint along the crotch edge of said left front part
and said left converging side of said crotch piece,
whereby said back seam, said inseams and said crotch joints
converge in the region of the sacrum, said acute angle of
said converging sides of said crotch piece points rear-
wardly and said right and left crotch joints extend along
anatomical lines from said sacrum tor positions on the sides
of the navel of the wearer,
and said right and left front parts have their upper edges
joined with said crotch piece top in complementary con-
nection across the abdomen of the wearer.
441
442
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,260
FLUSHING APPARATUS WITH SELECTIVE QUANTITY
CONTROL
Court M. Bensen, 1250 Ralston St., Reno, Nev. 89503
FUed Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,746
Int a.i E03D 1/14. 3/12
MS. CL 4—324 3 Claims
4,392,261
BABY CRADLE
Loretta C. Ivory, 6263 S. Niagara Way, Englewood, Colo. 80111,
and Frederick D. Hartmann, Aurora, Colo., assignors to
Loretta C. Ivory, Englewood, Colo.
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,805
Int. a.3 A47D 9/00
U.S. a. 5—101
9aainis
ifV.jy
1. An apparatus for selectively dispensing either of two
predetermined quantities of flushing water from the storage
tank of a toilet of the type having an opening in the bottom
thereof through which flushing water passes, a valve member
operable to open and close the opening, the valve member
normally exhibiting a net positive buoyant force in water when
removed from the opening, and upwardly extending means for
operating the valve member by lifting it away from the open-
ing, the apparatus comprising
weight means attached to said valve member for changing
the buoyancy thereof from positive to negative;
motor means coupled to said means for operating, said
motor means being operative, when energized, to exert an
upward force on said means for operating to lift said valve
member away from said opening, to hold said valve mem-
ber in the lifted position against the downward force of
said weight means, and to lower said valve member to its
closed position without regard to the water level in the
storage tank;
housing means for supporting said motor means above the
water in said tank;
timing means for selectively producing energizing signals
for said motor means in pairs to lift and lower said valve
member, the leading edges of the signals in one said pair
being separated by a first time interval and the leading
edges of the signals in a second said pair being separated
by a second, longer time interval; and
manually operable switch means for selecting one of said
signal pairs, thereby selecting the interval said valve mem-
ber is held in the open position.
1. In a cradle for a baby lying in a preselected orientation
wherein the baby's head is nearer a head panel of said cradle,
said cradle further having two longitudinally extending side
panels and a foot panel, said foot panel and head panel are
connected to the side panel, the side panels, foot panel and
head panel are connected along a bottomost edge to a bottom
panel and to each other, the cradle being adapted to rock on a
floor surface, the improvement comprising:
support means for said cradle integral to each of said side
panels and having a longitudinally extending curvilinear
surface for rocking said cradle in a longitudinal plane on
said floor surface, said support means connected to said
cradle, said curvilinear surface being asymmetric with
respect to a transverse plane through a midpoint of the
length of the cradle whereby said baby lies in said cradle
in a head up position relative to the baby's feet when the
cradle is in equilibrium regardless of the longitudinal
position of the baby within said cradle.
432,262
APPARATUS FOR BREEDING QUEEN HONEYBEES
Johann R. Stickler, Klammweg 68, Willendorf, Austria A-2732
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,715
Oaims priority, application Austria, Oct. 17, 1980, 5169/80
Int. a.3 AOIK 47/04, 49/00
U.S. a. 6—9 25 Qaims
5, 16
(19, 20)
1. An apparatus for breeding queen honeybees in cells,
which comprises a breeding frame, a honeycomb cell plate
having a front face and a rear face, the honeycomb cell plate
being affixed to the breeding frame, a multiplicity of tubular
sockets projecting from the rear face of the honeycomb cell
plate, the plate defining a like multiplicity of open cells extend-
ing from the front face through the cell plate, with each cell
aligned with a socket such that an opening is formed extending
completely through the cell plate and socket, and cup-shaped
elements displaceably mounted on the sockets for closing the
cells at the rear face.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
443
4392,263
PORTABLE RESCUE TOOL
Miciiaei i. Amoroso, 210 N. Shoreland, Marion, 111. 62959
Filed Feb. ^, 1981, Ser. No. 230,622
Int. a.3 B25F 7/00
U,S. a. 7'>100 22 Qaims
the first finger including means for engaging both upper and
lower surfaces of the one tab, thereby to provide a fulcrum for
the movement of the lever to bend the one tab upward and the
opposing tab downward.
4,392,265.
METHOD OF MODIFYING THE DYE AFFINITY OF
CELLULOSE HBER-CONTAINING STRUCTURE WITH
BENZENE SULFONYL CHLORIDE
Takahiro Fi^iu, Funabashi; Masao Nakajima, Tokyo, and
Shigeru Okano, Musashino, all of Japan, assignors to Toppan
Printing Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,763
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 15, 1981, 56-92043;
Jun. 19, 1981, 56-94925
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 1, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 C09B 62/00: D06P 5/22
U.S. Q. 8—120 9 Qaims
1. A tool for rescue work comprising:
(a) a body,
(b) a first jaw member having an outer prying and clamping
portion and an inner cutting portion,
(c) a second jaw member having an outer prying and clamp-
ing portion and an inner cutting portion, said second
member being offset from said first member and at least
partially overlapping said first member to provide the
cutting action, and
(d) means connecting said first and second jaw members to
the body for opening and closing said jaw members, the
cutting portion of the jaw members and the prying and
clamping portion of the jaw members being operatively
disposed on the same side of the connection means and
said outer prying and clamping portions of the jaw mem-
bers being interengageable in the closed position to facili-
tate the clamping and prying action and to facilitate use as
a wedge.
4,392,264
COMBINATION TOOL FOR REMOVING AND
REPLAQNG A NUT
James M. Booe, Jr., 7812 E. Vermont St., Indianapolis, Ind.
46219
FUed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,211
Int. a.3 B25B 27/00: B25F 1/04
U.S. Q. 7—138 6 Qaims
MUlUtlltlJ
1. A method of modifying the dye affinity of a cellulose
fiber-containing structure, comprising the steps of treating a
cellulose fiber structure or a mixed structure of a cellulose fiber
and a synthetic fiber with an alkaline agent, coating the struc-
ture with an aqueous emulsion of an acid chloride having the
formula:
SO2CI
o
(wherein X is — H, — NO2, — CH3 or — SO2CI)
and subjecting the coated structure to heat treatment prior to
drying of the emulsion to cause chemical modification.
4,392,266
MOLDED SHANKS
Steven M. LeBaron, Swampscott, Mass., assignor to Bush Uni-
versal, Inc., Wobum, Mass.
FUed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,784
Int. Q.3 A43D 31/00. 21/00
U.S. Q. 12— 146 S 11 Qaims
1. A dombination tool for use in removing and replacing a
nut which is locked on a threaded shaft by a locking member
having bendable locking tobs projecting outwardly therefrom,
the tool comprising an elongated lever having a proximal end
section including a handle, a distal end section including a first
finger for engaging and bending one tab upward upon move-
ment of the lever, and a second finger for engaging and bend-
ing an opposing tab downward, the two fingers being sepa-
rated by an outwardly opening space, and a wrench section
interposed between the two end sections for engaging the nut,
9. A method for forming and applying a shank stiffener on
the bottom of a shoe sole, said stiffener initially being in the
form of an elongate flexible activatable material, the method
comprising:
placing the stiffener material on the bottom of the insole;
supporting a portion of the stiffened material in spaced relation
to the insole;
444
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
efliecting curing of the stiflener material while said portion of
the stiffener material is so supported whereby a part of the
stiffener will cure in contact and conformity with the bottom
of the insole and where a portion of the stiffener will cure in
a spaced relation to the insole.
impacts from said beater when it is moved, said beater
impact members impacting the underside of said flexible
432^7
APPARATUS FOR CONTINUOUSLY PICKLING THE
OUTER SURFACES OF TUBULAR MATERIALS
Yoshiro Tanaka; Hayato Moroi; Yukihiko Komatsu; Kazuo
Akagi; RyHJiro Shitamatsu, all of Shimonoseki, and Tadashi
Nishimura, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki
Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho, Kobe, Japan
FUed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,676
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 12, 1981, 56-
120156[U]
Int. a.^ B08B 9/02
U.S. a. 15—88 6 Gaims
1. An apparatus for continuously pickling the outer surface
of hermetically plugged tubular members comprising:
a plurality of liquid containing tanks which separately con-
tain different pickling liquids and defme through-holes in
respective front and rear walls thereof on at least one
common longitudinal line to permit the successive passage
of the tubular members therethrough;
means for successively feeding the tubular members through
said through-holes and for rotating the tubular materials
around their respective longitudinal axes;
a cleaning tank containing a cleaning liquid; and
a cleaning brush unit positioned upstream of said plurality of
tanks and downstream of said cleaning tank wherein said
cleaning tank further comprises at least one ultrasonic
cleaning oscillator disposed therein and defining sealed
through-holes in the front and rear walls thereof for al-
lowing said tubular members to pass through said cleaning
tank and subsequently to said cleaning brush unit.
4,392,268
CHALKBOARD ERASER CLEANER SYSTEM
Victor M. Bueno, 708 Opelousas Ave., Algiers, La. 70114
FUed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,687
Int a.3 A47L 25/00
\JJS. a. 15—91 9 Claims
1. A chalkboard eraser cleaner, comprising:
an at least generally closed housing having wall portions;
a cylically moveable beater having impact members located
in said container;
drive means associated with said beater for forcefully mov-
ing it; and
flexible mesh netting means supported by said wall portions
and located adjacent to and above said beater for support-
ing the chalkboard eraser while it is being cleaned by
mesh netting means when said beater is forcefully moved
by said drive means.
4,392,269
MOP CARRIER
Masanobu Nishiyama, Higashi; Fusao Kanazawa, Neyagawa;
HisiOi Tanaka, and Tatsuo Nishimura, both of Osaka, all of
Japan, assignors to Duskin Franchise Kabushiki Kaisha and
Kabushiki Kaisha Sunpack, both of Osaka, Japan
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,827
Int. a.5 A46B 17/02; A47L 13/24; B25G 3/04
VS. a. 15—145 3 Claims
1. A mop carrier for removably mounting a mop and/or a
brush to a mop handle;
said mop carrier comprising:
an elongated, continuous resilient blade including a first
portion which at one end leads into a second, arcuate
portion which at one end leads into a third, straight por-
tion which is longer than said first portion and generally
horizontal;
said first portion spacedly overlying said third portion;
means integrally providing an upwardly projecting cylindri-
cal boss upon said first portion distally of said second
portion, said boss having means defining an upwardly
opening socket therein of a diameter to receive a mop
handle lower end, said boss including a lower, barrel
portion provided with a band of external threading, and
being longitudinally split above said barrel portion into a
plurality of angularly adjacent petals;
an internally threaded collar constructed and arranged to
thread onto said boss and to radially inwardly urge said
petals;
means providing a hook outwardly projecting on said sec-
ond portion, said hook being constructed and arranged to
detachably hold a mop loop for removably holding a mop
sleeved on said third portion of said mop carrier resilient
blade; and
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
445
means providing a laterally directed flange means about two
sides and an outer end of said third portion, whereby said
third portion is constructed and arranged to longitudinally
slidingly, removably receive a brush.
movement or lack of movement, and regularity of movement,
can be observed through said window.
4,392,270
SURFACE CLEANING APPARATUS
S. Jim Magee, Coquitlam, Canada, assignor to Magee Enter-
prises Ltd., Coquitlam, Canada
FUed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,255
Claims priority, appUcation Canada, Jun. 9, 1980, 353588
Int. a.3 EOIH 1/08, 1/10
U.S. a. 15—322 16 Claims
4,392,272
TRACK AND PANEL GUIDE FOR SLIDING SHOWER
DOORS OR THE UKE
Abram R. Finkel, Royal Palm Beach, Fla., assignor to KSD
Industries, Inc., Southampton, Pa.
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,859
Int. a.3 A47K 3/14; E05D 13/02
VJS. a. 16—95 R 13 Claims
1. A surface clearing apparatus comprising a vacuum cham-
ber having an open bottom and an upper exhaust port, and high
pressure liquid jet spraying means mounted within the cham-
ber a predetermined height above the bottom thereof, the
spraying means being comprised of a plurality of high pressure
spray heads mounted along one of the front or rear of the
vacuum chamber each adapted to emit a fan shaped spray at an
angle toward the surface to be cleaned and being directed
away from the adjacent front or rear of the chamber coexten-
sive and noninterfering with the spray from an adjacent spray
head, so as to form a substantially ungapped transverse line
across the chamber along said surface.
1. Guide means for shower doors and the like having respec-
tive inner and outer sliding doors comprising: an elongated
lower track member, a planar upper face inclined downwardly
from an outer to an inner edge of said track member, a guide
rail projecting upwardly from said upper face adjacent to said
outer edge, and a partly enclosed horizontally opening guide
channel disposed along the inner edge of said track member,
first guide members coupled to the inner sliding door, said first
guide members having a horizontally extending portion
adapted to project into said guide channel and a terminal
enlargement interengageable with said guide channel to slid-
ably secure the inner sliding door to said lower track member,
and a second guide member associated with the outer sliding
door, said second guide member comprising a downwardly
opening channel adapted to overlie and interengageably re-
ceive said guide rail.
11 432,273
II 432,271 POULTRY PROCESSING APPARATUS
ELECTRIC VACUUM CLEANER WITH WINDOW FOR Horace J. De Long, Garrison Rd., Rte. 6, Box 257A, Macon, Ga.
VIEWING BELT 31201
Arnold L. Sepke, Lake Bloomington, lU., assignor to National Division of Ser. No. 68,204, Aug. 20, 1979, Pat. No. 4,336,633.
Union Electric Corporation, Bloomington, lU. This application Jun. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 393,247
1 FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,715 int Q.^ A22C 21/00
I Int. a.5 A47L 9/00 us. Q. 17—12 8 Claims
U.S. a. 15—339 8 Claims
45 41
1. In a vacuum cleaner having a housing enclosing at least
upwardly a beater brush rotatable about a horizontal axis, a
motor, and a belt transmitting rotary motion from said motor
to said beater brush; the improvement wherein said housing is
opaque for the greater part thereof, and has a transparent
window fixedly mounted therein to enable a portion of said
belt to be viewed from externally of said housing, said belt
having distinctive markings thereon, whereby its speed of
1. Apparatus for processing poultry for use in a poultry
processing line of the type including conveyor means for mov-
ing a plurality of birds suspended in an inverted attitude in
series through a plurality of processing steps, said apparatus
comprising a support frame, a rotary element comprising a pair
of helical, coaxial overlapping bars mounted on a common
axle, said axle rotatably mounted on said support frame, said
pair of helical bars defining an open-ended heUcal path there-
446
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
between for receiving the necks of birds on the conveyor a stationary carrier structure situated horizontally adjacent the
means, and drive means in driving engagement with said axle space occupied by the fiber bales undergoing opening and
for connection to the conveyor means for rotating said helical
bars in response to the movement of the conveyor means and
conveying the necks of the birds.
1--
4,392^4
APPARATUS FOR PULLING-OFF THE SKIN OF SHEEP
CARCASSES IN SLAUGHTERING
Terje Noroy, TronenidTeien 17, N-3550 Gol, Norway
per No. PCr/NO80/00022, § 371 Date Mar. 3, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 3, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00040, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 22, 1981
per FUed Jul. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 247,531
Claims priority, application Norway, Jul. 6, 1979, 792255
iBt a.5 A22B 5/ 16
MS. a. 17—21 8 Claims
1. An apparatus for pulling-off the skin of sheep, lamb or
similar carcasses in connection with slaughtering, comprising
an essentially horizontal drum which is arranged to pull off the
skin during winding thereof on the drum, the drum being
moved along the dorsal side of a vertically suspended carcass
characterized in that the drum (8) has a gradually increasing
diameter from the central portion (20) towards both ends and
a clamping means to affix the skin to the drum at the beginning
of the cycle, said drum being mounted at the free end of a
pivotable beam (3) which is provided with a means (9) for
pivoting movement of the beam during the pulling-off opera-
tion, along and in engagement with the dorsal side of said
carcass and that there is provided a means (24) for rotation of
the drum (8), said drum (8) being rotated synchronously with
the pivoting movement of the beam (3) and with a speed which
is adapted to the pivoting movement of the beam traversing
said dorsal side of said carcass whereby varying amounts of
force at varying angles are exerted on the skin responsive to
the locus of the drum along the carcass, to most effectively and
uniformly carry out the skin removal process with minimal
damage to the skin.
432,275
APPARATUS FOR SUPPORTING nBER BALES
Ferdinand Leifeld, Kempen; Hans-Jiirgen Man, and Rolf
Scheuenmuin, both of Monchen<Gladbach, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Triitzachler GmbH A Co. KG, Monc-
hcn-Gladbach, Fed. Rep. of Gemiany
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,694
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 21,
1980, 3010937
iBt a.5 DOIG 7/06
U.S. a. 19—81 17 Claims
1. In a bale supporting apparatus for stabilizing fiber bales
during ojsening of the fiber bales from the top; the apparatus
including a support element arranged to engage a vertical end
face of a bale and further arranged for stepwise, vertically
downwardly oriented motion as the bale height decreases
during the bale opening process; the improvement comprising
/'/'/^VAV/(^i'AV/^T^x^vAV/^*v/^vA^^<w^^
mounting means for movably securing said support element to
said carrier structure.
4,392,276
nBER SEPARATOR FOR FEEDING A FREED-FIBER
SPINNING UNIT
Roger Gauvain, Buhl, and Michel Kueny, Brunstatt, both of
France, assignors to Societe Alsacienne de Constructions
Mecaniques de Mulhouse, Mulhouse, France
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,988
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 4, 1980, 80 07652
Int. a.3 DOIH 1/12: DOIG 19/10, 15/14
U.S.a. 19— 97 _ 11 Claims
l|2c
/^^.
1. A device for separating individual fibers of a sliver, com-
prising:
means for feeding the sliver;
means adjacent said feeding means for opening the sliver,
comprising a combing and drafting cylinder, said combing
and drafting cylinder being constituted by a shaft having a
stack of disks mounted thereon, the edges of said disks
having teeth or needles for combing the sliver and smooth
portions on the periphery thereof for drafting the sliver,
said disks being relatively angularly offset from one an-
other, a pressure roller in close proximity to said combing
and drafting cylinder;
a guiding means mounted between said feeding means and
said combing and drafting cylinder; and
fiber discharging duct means positioned downstream of said
opening means.
4,392,277
LOCK TONGUE FOR SAFETY BELTS
Manfred Miiller, Delzisau, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,360
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 6,
1980, 3021387
iBt a.3 A44B 11/10
U.S. a. 24—196 6 Claims
1. A lock tongue for a safety belt system, comprising two
passage openings for accommodating a belt strap of the safety
belt system, a central web means for separating the two pas-
sage openings, and clamping means adapted to be attached in
one of the passage openings for clamping the belt strap, the
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
447
clamping means extending along an entire longitudinal exten-
sion of the passage opening so as to rest on both sides in mar-
ginal zones of the lock tongue adjoining narrow sides of the
passage opening so that the clamping means supports the belt
strap extended therearound when the clamping means is in the
passage opening, the belt strap passes through the passage
openings so that the lock tongue is firmly attachable in a cer-
tain location of the belt strap due to a loop around friction
occurring under load, the attachment of the lock tongue is
effected by repeated deflection of the belt strap by the clamp-
4,392,279
SELF-LOCKING TWO-PART FASTENER
Frederic A. Schwager, Manhattan Beach, Calif., assignor to
Mattel, Inc., Hawthorne, Calif.
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,495 —
Int. a.3 A44B 21/00, 1/38; A63H 3/38
U.S. a. 24—221 R
6 Claims
ing means, the clamping means includes a clamping bracket
having a base portion and a head portion, the head portion has
a width wider than a width of the base portion such that the
bracket has an approximately mushroom-shaped cross section,
the base portion is adapted to be inserted into the passage
opening, the width of the base portion is less than the length of
the narrow sides of the passage opening by about three times a
thickness of the belt strap, a width of the head portion corre-
sponds approximately to the length of the narrow sides of the
passage opening, and means are provided for attaching the
clamping bracket to the lock tongue.
4,392,278
FASTENER
Peter R. Mugglestone, Ormond, Australia, assignor to Illinois
Tool Works Inc., Chicago, lU.
FUed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,224
Oaims priority, application AustraUa, Feb. 20, 1980, PE2462
Int. a.5A44B; 7/00
U.S. a. 24— 213 R 8 Claims
2. A self-locking two-part fastener, comprising:
a first fastener part including a first base and a spindle up-
standing from said first base;
a second fastener part including a second base and a hollow
tubular member upstanding from said second base, and
means for locking said hollow tubular member to said spin-
dle and said first base, said locking means including a
resilient stop member on said first base, a cam face on said
spindle, a protuberance extending from said hollow tubu-
lar member and a shoulder provided on the inner wall of
said tubular member, whereby said spindle may be in-
serted into said hollow tubular member and rotated with
respect thereto until said cam face and said shoulder force
said protuberance into locked engagement with said stop
member, said stop member being formed integrally with
said first base and comprising a resilient finger mounted in
an arcuate opening in said first base, said opening being of
greater extend than said finger, whereby said protuber-
ance may be trapped in said opening by the free end of said
finger.
4,392,280
CLEVIS SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
James A. Gavagan, Centerline, Mich., assignor to Irrin Indus-
tries, Inc., Madison Heights, Mich.
FUed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,883
Int. a.3 A44B 11/26
U.S. a. 24— 230 A naaims
1. A reusable fastener of the one-piece push-in type having a
longitudinal axis and laterally extending fronds on a shank to
inhibit withdrawal of the fastener shank when inserted into a
preformed hole, said fastener shank being generally H-shape in
cross-section with opposite side faces and adapted to fit neatly
within a hole into which the fastener is to be fitted, a plurality
of axially spaced fronds on each said opposite side face of the
shank to form two rows of fronds in opposed relationship, said
fronds being resUient and adapted to engage the inner wall of
said hole to resist withdrawal of the fastener therefrom, a head
at one end of the shank, whereby when said fastener is posi-
tioned in said hole said H-shape shank centrally locates said
longitudinal axis of said fastener relative to the central axis of
said hole thereby insuring engagement of both rows of fronds
with said inner wall of said hole.
1. A safety belt buckle comprising a connector tongue
adapted for attachment to a first belt end, a housing having a
base, clevis means mounted within said housing extending,
longitudinally as an aligned tension element on both sides of
said tongue with a transverse closed end adapted for atuch-
ment to a second belt end, alignable apertures in said connector
tongue and both adjacent sides of said clevis means, latch
means extending upwardly from the base through said aper-
tures engaging said tongue and both sides of said clevis means,
resilient means mounted within said housing normally retain-
ing said latch means in engaging position, and exposed manu-
ally actuable means for moving said latch means downwardly
448
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
relative to both clevis and tongue to a position for disengaging
said connector tongue.
4,392,281
RELEASABLE FASTENER
Joseph R. Metz, Ridgefield, and Michael F. Barnes, Sandy
Hook, both of Conn., assignors to Norco, Inc., Ridgefield,
Conn.
FUed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,097
Int. a.3 A43C 11/08: A44B 13/00
U.S. a. 24—230.5 R 13 Qaims
in the path of the tongue and to the open position in which the
latch does not block passage of the tongue in the insertion path,
a manually operated pressure element to move the latch from
the locked position to the open position, spring means retaining
the latch in the open position when the tongue is withdrawn
from the insertion path, and an insertion lock in the belt lock
activated by a pulling force on the plug-in tongue exceeding a
predetermined value to restrain said spring means to permit
withdrawal of the tongue from the insertion path and prevent
renewed insertion after such withdrawal.
.•> (O o'X)' ■aW/'''^
— '^ T^--- - ^
'il-¥;^.'$'
432,282
LOCK FOR SAFETY BELTS
Franz Wier, Goggingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
REPA Feinstanzwerk, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,154
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 4,
1980,3008298
Int a.J A44B 11/16
U.S. a. 24—230 AL 16 Claims
T827 26 9 21
1. Lock for a safety belt comprising a belt lock with spaced
plates defining an insertion path, a plug-in tongue for insertion
in the insertion path, a latch movable transversely to the inser-
tion path to the locked position in which the latch is interposed
4,392,283
GROMMET CLIP
David R. Timmons, Newport Beach, Calif., assignor to Automa-
tion Industries, Inc., Greenwich, Conn.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,641
Int. a.3 A44B 21/00
U.S. a. 24—255 SL 2 Qaims
1. In a reieasable, hook-type fastener, in combination:
(a) a drive shaft,
(b) means for tumably mounting said shaft on equipment
which requires fastening,
(c) an eccentric bushing tumable with said shaft,
(d) a pair of separate and distinct, similarly-shaped spring
hooks disposed side-by-side and substantially in broadside
contact with each other, having looped bearing portions
frictionally and slidably engaged with the eccentric bush-
ing and having laterally-registered coextensive bill por-
tions aligned with each other and directed in the same
direction, and
(e) means separate from said spring hooks and held captive
thereby and disposed adjacent the eccentric bushing, said
means being engageable and movable with said hooks to
continually maintain the same in registration with one
another.
1. In combination with a penetratable web, a grommet clip
for penetrating said web and providing hanger means therefor
comprising:
(a) a flat body having first and second portions adapted to be
brought together along a single fold line thinner than the
remainder of the body in one predetermined overlapping
position,
(b) a connecting hole in the first body portion remote from
the fold line,
(c) a pointed snap-in pin projecting from the second body
portion remote from the fold line for forcibly penetrating
the web and the connecting hole when the body portions
are in said overlapping f>ositions to lock the body portions
together about the penetrated web,
(d) finger guard extension means integral with said first body
portion and projecting outwardly from that side of the flat
body opposite the projecting pin for preventing finger
contact with the pointed pin as the body portions are
locked together about the penetrated web, and
(e) first and second eyelet holes located in the respective
body portions which are aligned to receive suspension
means when the body portions are in said interlocked
overlapped position.
4,392,284
WATCHBAND ENDPIECE WITH CAPTURING BEAD
Joseph R. LePage, Watertown, Conn., assignor to Timez Corpo>
ration, Waterbury, Conn.
FUed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,899
Int. a.3 A44C 5/ IS
U.S. a. 24—265 B 8 Claims
1. In a watch band endpiece construction, the combination
of:
(a) tubular endpiece member having open ends and an access
opening intermediate the ends,
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
449
(b) a resilient capturing bead deposited inside said endpiece
member opposite the access opening therein, and
1. An improved apparatus for commingling multifilament
yam comprising an elongated body having
a straight yam passageway passing through said elongated
body, said yam passageway having an effective diameter
of from about \ inch to 5/16 inches;
at least three orifices substantially equally spaced about the
periphery of said body at substantially the same level, said
orifices having a diameter of from about 0.060 inches to
0.080 inches;
at least two of said orifices having an extended centerline
offset to one side from the radius of a circle of the effective
diameter of a cross section of said yam passageway at the
orifice level and at least one of said orifices centerlines
offset in a direction counter to the said other offset ori-
fices, and so that none of said extended centerlines inter-
sect the center of said effective diameter also provided
that the intersection of the extended centerlines forms a
polygon which must have a side nearer to the center of
said effective diameter than an apex, also provided that
the polygon side must measure greater than 0.1 percent
but less than 7.S percent of the effective diameter, and said
side must be at a distance greater than 0. 1 percent but less
than S.O percent of the effective diameter from the center
of said effective diameter;
said orifices communicating with a source of high pressure
fluid so that any yam passing linearly through said pas-
sageway would have continuous filaments commingled
with one another.
4,392,286
APPARATUS FOR TAKING UP A BUNDLE OF
niAMENTS
Satoshi Yakushyi; Atsushi Yamamoto, both of Matsuyama;
Yukio Kitamura, Kobe, and Nobuo Yoshioka, Iwakuni, aU of
Japan, assignors to Te(jin Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 892,418, Mar. 31, 1978, abandoned.
This application Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,940
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Apr. 5, 1977, 52-38138
Int. a.3 B65H 54/82
U.S. a. 28—289 17 Claims
(c) a connector bar member retained inside said endpiece
member by frictional engagement with said capturing
bead.
4,392,285
DEVICE HAVING YARN PASSAGE OF SPEanED
DIMENSIONS FOR INTERLAONG FILAMENTS OF
I MULTinLAMENT YARN
Wilbur L. Stables, Matoaca; David Pendlebury, Chester;
Anthony M. Saich, Colonial Heights, all of Va., and Maxwell
C. Hamlyn, Cary, N.C., assignors to Allied Corporation,
Morris Township, Morris County, N.J.
FUed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,587
Int. a.J D02J 1/08
U.S. a. 28—276 4 Qaims
1. An apparatus for taking a bundle of filaments from a
supply source thereof in a container, the apparatus including a
rotary member mounted for rotation about a vertical axis and
having a guide passage formed therein, the guide passage
extending from an entrance opening coaxial with the vertical
axis at the top of the rotary member to a discharge opening
displaced downwardly and radially outward from the entrance
opening, means for rotating the rotary member about the verti-
cal axis in a predetermined direction, and an ejector for suck-
ing in a bundle of filaments from a supply source and deliver-
ing the bundle of filaments in a stream of compressed air into
the entrance opening of said guide passage for ejection from
the discharge opening thereof along a spiral locus, wherein the
improvement comprises:
said guide passage of the rotary member including a vertical
upper portion extending from the entrance opening at the
top of the rotary member; and
a lower poriion comprising a gradually spreading passage
having a front wall with respect to the rotational direction
of said rotary member extending from a tuming point at
the lower end of the vertical upper portion to the dis-
charge opening of the guide passage on a peripheral face
of said rotary member and a rear wall extending down-
wardly and outwardly from said tuming point at the
lower end of the vertical upper portion, the position of
said rear wall at said discharge opemng being located
below the position of said front wall at said discharge
opening, the rear wall of said gradually spreading passage
diverging smoothly and continuously from the front wall
with increasing distance in the radial direction such that
said filament-bundle is guided along the rear wall of said
lower portion of the guide passage, whUe said compressed
air stream is discharged along the front wall of said lower
portion of the guide passage, whereby the discharged air
stream is diverted from the path followed by the ejected
bundle of filaments.
450
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,287
QUARTZ RESONATOR PROCESSING SYSTEM
Roswell D. M. Peters, Rustborg, Va., assignor to The United
SUtes of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,771
Int. a? HOIL 41/22
U.S. a. 29— 25 J5 18 Qaims
cylinder, or corresponding points of a counter roll; and a
control for holding the forces exerted by the fluid pressure
medium on the one hand and by the force members on the
other hand substantially in equilibrium, the improvement com-
1. Apparatus for processing quartz crystal resonators in a
relatively high vacuum environment, comprising:
a unitary processing chamber including means for evacuat-
ing said chamber during a multi-step fabrication proce-
dure;
a rotatable resonator component holder, for at least one set
of resonator components including a frame containing a
resonator element, cover means therefore and a separator
element for positioning cover means in spaced-apart rela-
tionship adjacent said frame, said holder being located in
said chamber and removable therefrom;
means for rotating said holder past a plurality of processing
stations;
means located at a first of said plurality of processing sta-
tions for applying a metallization pattern defining elec-
trode means on said resonator element;
means located at a second of said plurality of processing
stations for positioning said cover means on said frame
including an actuator means for moving said cover means
past said separator element and into registration with said
frame; and
' means located at a third of said plurality of processing sta-
tions for sealing said cover means on said frame to provide
a hermetically sealed unit.
prising: force measuring cells inserted between the force mem-
bers and the ends of the crosshead or the corresponding points
of a counter roll, respectively, which cells substantially trans-
mit the entire exerted force; and means for feeding the signal of
said cells to the control.
4,392,288
DEVICE FOR ACTION ON WEBS OF MATERIAL WITH
AT LEAST ONE CYLINDER
Helmut Anstotz, Tbnisvorst; Klaus Kubik, Krefeld, and Heinz
Paulussen, Monchengladbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Eduard Kiisters, Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,457
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28,
1980, 3024570
Int a? B21B 13/14
VJS. a. 29—116 AD 10 Claims
1. In a device for acting on webs of material comprising: at
least one roll, which comprises a revolving hollow cylinder
constituting the working roll circumference; a crosshead going
through the cylinder with spacing on all sides, and against
which the hollow cylinder is braced by means of a fluid pres-
sure medium contained in its interior between the crosshead
and the inside of the hollow cylinder in at least one chamber;
force members which operate in the action plane of the roll and
engage the ends of the crosshead protruding from the hollow
4,392,289
MANUFACTURE OF JEWELRY BY CASTING WFTH
PRESET GEMS
Franck Michaud, Lyons, France, assignor to Charles Hoffert of
America, Inc., Miami, Fla.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,780
Int. a.3 B22C 7/02, 9/04: B22D 79/00
U.S. a. 29—160.6 9 Qaims
1. In the manufacture of an article of jewelry cast in precious
metal by a lost wax procedure and having a seat in which a
gem is preset, the gem having a girdle and the seat having a
sidewall formed with opposing undercut grooves in which
portions of the girdle engage as gem retention means, the
method comprising the steps of molding a wax model having a
seat with a sidewall formed with opposing undercut grooves,
the wax model being formed from a wax having a predeter-
mined resiliency enabling flexing of the sidewall of said seat,
snapping a gem having said girdle into set position in said seat
by application of downward pressure on the gem to resiliently
flex said sidewall permitting portions of the girdle to enter into
engagement with said opposing undercut grooves, mounting
the wax model with the gem set in the seat on a wax tree,
embedding the wax tree in investment material in a flask,
raising the temperature of the flask by predetermined incre-
ments and time intervals to a predetermined temperature to
remove the wax and cure the investment material providing a
mold cavity with the gem suspended therein, injecting molten
precious metal into the mold cavity to form a metal casting in
which the girdle of said suspended gem is engaged by undercut
grooves of the metal casting, cooUng the flask and its contents,
and breaking the investment material after the flask and its
contents cool to remove the precious metal article with the
gem preset in said seat.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
451
4,392490
APPARATUS SEPARATING HYBRID SUBSTRATE
Andrzej J. Krzeptowskl, San Carlos, Calif., assignor to GTE
Automatic Electric Incorporated, Northlake, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 129,508, Mar. 11, 1980, Pat No. 4,327,472.
This appUcation Oct 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,826
Int a.3 B23P 19/04
U.S. a. 29—239 8 Claims
accelerating the rotational velocity of the other roller until the
leading edges of said two stringers are aligned with each other;
said claws being adapted to come out from the spaced sections
of the stringers when the leading edges of the scoop rows of
the stringers are aligned; characterized in that a pair of later-
ally disposed detecting levers are provided to protrude into the
succeeding spaced sections of said stringers as they arrive and
1. Apparatus for separating a leaded hybrid substrate from a
heat conductive carrier plate that it is sitting on, the flat bottom
of the substrate being contiguous with and stuck to the flat top
surface of the plate by semi-liquid solder flux following a
reflow solder operation, comprising:
a work table having a flat top, the flat bottom of the plate
resting on the flat table top;
a stop member in a fixed position on the table top and pro-
jecting a prescribed distance above it that is less than the
thickness of the plate;
first means for producing a first force in one direction in a
plane that is generally parallel to the table top and posi-
tioned above the latter for being applied to a non-leaded
edge of the substrate that is adjacent to a leaded side
thereof rather than to the edge of a plate of a stacked pair
thereof, the first force exerted on the edge of a substrate
moving the plate of a stacked pair thereof against said stop
member for restricting movement of the plate in the one
direction so as to enable separation of the substrate and
plate along the broad contacting surfaces thereof; and
second means for releasing said stop member for allowing
continued movement of the plate, or a flat part resting on
the table top in the position of the plate, in the one direc-
tion when the force exerted on or translated to the plate or
part by said first means and stop member exceeds a pre-
scribed value.
then to come out therefrom; and a detector is provided to
detect the movement of the detecting lever so as to judge
whether the engagement of the pair of stringers is proper and
to produce either a signal to protrude the claw into the spaced
section directly succeeding the detecting lever if the stringer
alignment is proper or a signal to stop operating the feed roller
if said alignment is not proper.
4,392,292
FORMING PROCESS
Ian B. Irons, Reading, England, assignor to Johnson, Matthey h.
Co., Limited, London, England
Filed Jun. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,853
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 6, 1979,
7919705; Jul. 19, 1979, 79/25205
Int a.3 B21D 2<5/OZ- B23P 77/00
U,S. a. 29—421 R 6 Qaims
i^
432,291
METHOD FOR ASSEMBLING SLIDE FASTENER
STRINGERS
Kenichiro lai, Kurobe, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K. K.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,094
Qaims priority, appUcation Japan, Sep. 25, 1980, 55-133479
Int Q.^ B21D 53/50: B29D 5/00
U.S. Q. 29—408 7 Qaims
1. An assembling apparatus for slide fastener stringers com-
prising a pair of laterally disposed feed rollers for feeding a pair
of laterally disposed slide fastener stringers successively each
having spaced sections where there are no scoops in continu-
ous rows of scoops; a binder member fixedly positioned on the
feeding side of said feed rollers for engaging said stringers; a
pair of laterally disposed claws for protruding into the spaced
sections of the stringers and engaging with the leading edges of
scoop rows directly following said spaced sections; a differen-
tial transmission mechanism for retarding the rotational veloc-
ity of the one of said two feed rollers which feeds the leading
stringer with which one of said two claws is engaged while
1. A method for forming couplings or individual sockets
from ductile metal comprising:
(i) inserting into a section of the ductile metal tubing a hol-
low mandrel having a blind end and containing one or
more apertures, each aperature extending from the inte-
rior of the mandrel to the circumferential surface, the
interior of the mandrel containing a plastic filler metal
material;
(ii) holding at least an end portion of said section of tubing in
support means, the end portion containing the mandrel,
the said support means having a supporting surface
adapted to contact substantially the entire periphery of
said end portion and a cavity being provided in said sup-
porting surface, the relative position of the mandrel within
said portion of tubing to said support means being such
that the apertures are substantially in registration with the
cavity,
and
452
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(iii) inserting into the open end of said hollow mandrel a ram
to apply pressure to the said plastic filler metal material,
forcing the said material through said apertures to distend
that portion of said ductile metal tubing in registration
with said cavity into said cavity, the interior or the result-
ing distension being thereby simultaneously provided with
a deposit of plastic filler metal material.
4^92^3
METHOD OF ASSEMBLING COMBINATION SHOCK
ABSORBER AND AIR SPRING
Kiyoshi Yamaguchi, and Naold Makita, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Tokico Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,104
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 8, 1979, 54/129769
Int. a.J B23P 79/00
U.S. a. 29—436 3 Claims
fitting the tubular resilient diaphragm member on the outer
tube of the shock absorber;
securing the other end portion of the resilient diaphragm
member to the outer tube of the shock absorber;
locating the free end of the outer wall portion of resilient
diaphragm member in the cylindrical housing secured to
the piston rod; and
securing the free end of the outer wall portion within the
cylindrical housing by utilizing the retaining ring.
4,392,294
METHOD FOR MAKING POLYOLEHN PIPE
CONNECTOR SLEEVE
Steve Campbell, Manchester, Mo., assignor to Pipe Systems,
Incorporated, Fenton, Mo.
Division of Ser. No. 144,668, Apr. 12, 1980, Pat. No. 4,310,184.
This application Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,568
Int. a.3 B23P 11/02
U.S. a. 29—451 3 Oaims
'56
1. A method of assembling a combination shock absorber
and air spring including a tubular shock absorber having an
outer tube and a piston rod reciprocably projecting from one
end of the outer tube, and an air spring consisting of a resilient
diaphragm member having an outer wall portion connected to
a cylindrical housing secured to the projecting end of the
piston rod, an inner concentric wall portion secured to the
outer tube of the shock absorber, and a rolling wall portion
formed between said inner and outer wall portions, the method
comprising the steps of:
expanding radially outwardly and rolling back one end
portion of a tubular resilient diaphragm member to form
the outer wall portion and the rolling wall portion, while
preventing deformation radially inwardly of the remain-
ing portion of said resilient diaphragm member, said ex-
panding and rolling back of said resilient diaphragm mem-
ber being performed by fitting said resilient diaphragm
member on a mandrel having steppingly increasing outer
diameters, and displacing said resilient diaphragm member
along said mandrel while abutting said one end portion of
said resilient diaphragm member against a surface of said
mandrel and thereby inverting said resilient diaphragm
member;
fitting a retaining ring on the inner surface of the outer wall
portion;
1. A method for press-fitting an open ended tube-like metal-
lic connector sleeve upon a compressible polyolefin pipe end
which comprises performing a mechanical rolling or pressing
operation on the exterior of the connector sleeve to simulta-
neously form an external groove and an underlying registering
rib at a plurality of axially spaced locations along said sleeve to
form a plurality of grooves and ribs axially aligning the con-
nector sleeve having a plurality of circumferentially extending
axially spaced internal ribs with an open ended polyolefin pipe
end having a plurality of external circumferential grooves
axially spaced from one another the same distance as the afore-
mentioned axial spacing of the ribs of said connector sleeve,
the external diameter of said pipe end being slightly greater
than the internal diameter of said connector sleeve, forcefully
moving said pipe end and connector sleeve toward one another
to engage one another and causing said pipe end to be com-
pressed and fitted within said connector sleeve and interfitting
said ribs of the connector sleeve with the grooves of said pipe
end to provide a mating relation and butting the fitted connec-
tor sleeve and pipe end to a like connector sleeve and pipe end
and connecting the same by a sleeve-like coupling having
internal ribs engaging the external grooves in the butted con-
nector sleeves.
4,392,295
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING DRUM
SEAM
Mitsuo Sasai; Kiyozi Tomikawa, and Kazuo Ki^iwara, all of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Nittetsu Steel Drum Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,285
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55/149281;
Dec. 4, 1980, 55/170203; Jan. 9, 1981, 56/1053
Int a.J B21D 39/00: B65D 6/34
MS. a. 29—509 9 Claims
1. A method of forming a drum seam which comprises the
steps of:
fitting a tray-like end plate, having a cylindrical portion
forming an indented shape and an end plate flange formed
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
453
by the edge of the cylindrical portion extending outward
from the edge of the cylindrical portion, into the end of a
cylindrical drum body having a body flange extending
outward from the edge of the cylindrical body perpendic-
ular to the cylindrical axis of the body with said end plate
flange overlapping and extending along and beyond the
body flange;
fitting a seaming chuck having a cylindrical forming face
into the tray-like end plate for holdmg the body and end
plate together with the forming face of the seaming chuck
against the inner surface of said cylindrical portion, and
said seaming chuck having a fillet on the end adjacent the
position where said end plate flange extends from said
cylindrical portion, said fillet having an inclined surface
extending from the forming face outwardly thereof;
rotating said seaming chuck for rotating the end plate and
drum body around the cylindrical axis of the drum body;
and
pressing a seaming roll having a circumferential forming
groove therein opening toward the forming face of said
seaming chuck radially inwardly toward the forming face
of the seaming chuck for engaging the flanges and bending
them over for interlocking them and forming them into a
seam, the bending comprising circularly curving the body
and end plate flanges along a first circular cross-sectional
portion of the forming groove, then further circularly
curving the body and end plate flanges along a second
circular cross-sectional portion of the forming groove
having a smaller radius of curvature than that of the first
circular cross-sectional portion, repeating the two step
curving actions on successively more radially inward
portions of the flanges until the body and end plate flanges
form a seven-fold seam, the inclined surface of the fillet
facing the second circular cross-sectional portion of the
forming groove diagonally across the seam being formed
and supporting the comers of the flanges where they bend
from the drum body and the cylindrical portion, respec-
tively, and finally pressing the formed seam between the
forming face of the seaming chuck and the bottom of the
forming groove in the direction of the radius of the drum.
4,392,296
METHOD OF JOINING TWO METAL MEMBERS
Hisanobu Kanamani; Akira Tohkairin, both of Katsuta; Hideo
Tatsumi, Mito; Naotatsu Asahl, Katsuta, and Mitsuo Hagi-
noya, Ibaraki, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,442
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 5, 1979, 54-129290
Int. C1.3 B21D 39/00; B23P 11/00
U.S. a. 29—520 15 Qaims
1. A method of joining two metal members, each having a
joining surface arranged in such a manner that the joining
surfaces of the two metal members are in spaced juxtaposed
relation, by way of a third metal member comprising the steps
of:
forming an annular groove on each of said joining surfaces
of said two metal members;
inserting a metal ring, of which said third member is com-
prised, in a gap defined between the joining surfaces of
said two metal members; and
applying pressure to said connecting ring to cause part of the
material thereof to flow into said annular groove, to form
a joint; wherein the improvement comprises the steps of:
forming in each of said annular groove, simultaneously with
or after forming said annular groove, at least one annular
angled member having a height h that is substantially
smaller than the depth H of said annular groove in accor-
dance with the relationship iHShg(i)H and being sub--
stantially triangular in shape in axial cross section.
6. A method of joining two metal members, each having a
joining surface, one of said metal members having a higher
deformation resistance than the other, comprising the steps of:
forming an annular groove on the joining surface of the one
of said two metal members having higher deformation
resistance; arranging the two metal members in such a
manner that the joining surfaces of the two metol members
are in juxtaposed relation; and applying pressure to the
other metal member of lower deformation resistance to
cause part of the material thereof to flow into said groove
to form a joint;
wherein the improvement comprises the step of:
forming in said annular groove, simultaneously with or after
forming said annular groove, at least one annular angled
member having a height h that is substantially smaller than
the depth H of said annular groove in accordance with the
relationship JHgh^(J)H and being substantially triangu-
lar in shape in axial cross section.
4,392,297
PROCESS OF MAKING THIN FlUA HIGH EFnOENCY
SOLAR CELLS
Roger G. Little, Bedford, Mass., assignor to Spire Corporation,
Bedford, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 209,541, Nov. 20, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,172
Int. a.5 HOIL 31/18
U.S. a. 29—572 9 Claims
1. A process of forming a high efliciency single-crystal, thin
fdm, homojunction gallium arsenide solar cell on a single-crys-
tal silicon substrate comprising:
(a) forming a single-crystal silicon substrate;
454
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(b) forming a graded transition region on said substrate by
deposition of a thin layer of germanium directly on said
silicon substrate and pulsing said layer with an electron
beam to effectuate thereby zone refining and mixing of
said germanium layer and said silicon substrate;
(c) epitaxially growing a thin gallium arsenide film on said
transition region;
CONTACT GRIO
2*
GRADED TRANSITION
REGION
^Si SUBSTRATE
(d) doping said thin gallium arsenide film with one dopant
species;
(e) forming a homojunction in said thin, doped gallium
arsenide film by introducing therein a second dopant
Sjjecies; and
(0 forming front ohmic contacts on said gallium arsenide
film.
4392,299
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING LOW RESISTANCE
GATES AND INTERCONNECOONS
Joseph M. Shaw, Oranbury, N J., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,493
Int. a? HOIL 21 m5
U.S. a. 29—590 4 Claims
1. A process for forming a low resistance refractory metal
silicide on a substrate comprising the steps of: -
positioning the substrate in a reaction chamber maintained at
a first temperature;
depositing, in a single low pressure chemical vapor deposi-
tion step, a composite of a refractory metal and silicon on
the substrate by simultaneously passing a gaseous mixture
of both a refractory metal carbonyl and silane gas through
the chamber and over the substrate; and
heating the composite in a non-oxidizing atmosphere to a
second temperature, higher than the first temperature, to
form the silicide of the metal.
4,392,298
INTEGRATED aRCUIT DEVICE CONNECnON
PROCESS
Robert A. Barker, Plainfield, and Edith C. Ong, New Provi-
dence, both of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,439
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/28
U.S. a. 29—577 C 4 Qaims
4,392,300
APPLICATOR TOOL FOR LOOSE MINIATURE SPRING
SOCKETS
Timothy B. BUiman, Carlisle, and Jon F. Kautz, Camp Hill, both
of Pa., assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
FUed Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,544
Int. a.3 H05K l/iO
U.S. a. 29—739 2 Oaims
1. The method of forming electrical connections in an inte-
grated circuit device comprising the steps of
preparing an integrated circuit device comprising a silicon
chip which includes a dielectric coating,
providing a two-level photosensitive masking layer over the
dielectric coating of which the first level is sensitive to
ultraviolet light and the second level is sensitive to visible
light,
patterning said masking layer in accordance with the pattern
of openings desired in the dielectric coating to permit
connection therethrough by first irradiating with visible
light and patterning the second level and then irradiating
with ultraviolet light and patterning the second level,
making openings in said coating in accordance with the
pattern by reactive ion etching to provide substantially
vertical sidewalls in the openings,
depositing a conductive layer over the masking layer and in
the openings in the dielectric coating of a thickness sub-
stantially to match the thickness of the dielectric coating,
dissolving the masking layer, thereby lifting off the overiy-
ing portion of the conductive layer, while leaving a plug
portion of the conductive layer in the opening in the
dielectric coating, and
forming over the dielectric coating a conductive layer
which makes low resistance connection to the plug por-
tion.
1. An application tool for picking up a loose miniature spring
socket and inserting it into a hole in a printed circuit board, the
tool comprising:
a. a frame consisting of a handle depending from a elongated
perpendicular member;
b. control means in the handle with trigger means for acti-
vating the control means;
c. a nozzle at the forward end of the perpendicular member;
d. a reciprocating ram mounted in the perpendicular mem-
ber and extending into the nozzle;
e. driving means to drive the ram, said means being con-
trolled by the control means; and
f. means to supply a vacuum to the nozzle so that a socket is
drawn into the nozzle and retained there so that the ram
may be driven forward by the driving means to drive the
socket out of the nozzle and into a hole in a printed circuit
board.
4392,301
DEVICE FOR INSERTING AND REMOVING CIRCUIT
MODULES WITH MULTIPLE LEADS
John S. Hanncs, Lisle, and Robert V. Harrioger, JoUet, both of
Dl., aasignora to Western Electric Company, Inc., New Yoit,
N V
Filed Jon. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,612
Int a.J H05K /i/W. i/iO
UA CL 29—741 1* C|"*™
1. A device for selectively inserting the leads of circuit
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4SS
modules into and withdrawing them from lead-engaging sock-
ets secured to an associated substrate, said device comprising:
a gripping jaw assembly including a support member and a
mutually disposed pair of gripping jaws, means mounting
said jaws pivotally on said support member and spring
means for biasing said jaws in a direction toward each
other, with each of said jaws having a corresponding
notch formed in the inner surface thereof for receiving
and supporting a peripheral edge portion of a circuit
module when positioned between and gripped by said
jaws;
a stationary support assembly including a mutually disposed
pair of sidewall members for receiving the gripping jaw
assembly therebetween, each of said sidewall members
having a downwardly extending finger positioned adja-
cent a different one of said gripping jaws, and being
formed at the lower end thereof to be selectively sup-
ported, on an aligned socket, even when the socket is
positioned beneath the associated jaw, and on an associ-
ated socket-supporting substrate,
means on said sidewall members for engaging the gripping
jaws to hold said gripping jaws against said biasing means
in position adjacent to said fingers, and for linear move-
ment relative to said fingers;
means extending from said jaws for pivoting said jaws away
from said engaging means and against said biasing means
to move said jaw notches away from each other to receive
the peripheral edge at the circuit module; and
an actuable mechanism mounted on said stationary support
assembly, coupled to said gripping jaw assembly, and
having means moveable, in one of two directions, to im-
part precisely controlled linear displacement of said grip-
ping jaws, and a given circuit module when clamped
therebetween, in a related direction relative to said sta-
tionary support assembly while said fingers engage and
hold the sockets.
432,302
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A MOVABLE
CONTACT MEMBER
Shigemasa Saito, Gyoda, Japan, assignor to Fiyi Electric Com-
pany, Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,992
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Dec. 31, 1979, 54-172073
Int a? HOIR 43/02
U.S. a. 29—879 6 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing a movable contact member
formed from a flat spring and a contact tip bonded to it, which
comprises the steps of:
age-hardening to a one-half hard temper a solution-treated
age-hardenable copper alloy that is to be used as the mate-
rial of the flat spring,
grinding the surface of the age-hardened spring material.
3 2 /
applying a rust-preventing film to the spring material, and
bonding the contact tip to the spring material.
4,392,303
ONE-PIECE RAZOR HANDLE
John T. Ciaffone, Bridgeport, Conn., assignor to Warner-Lam-
bert Company, Morris Plains, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 108,742, Dec. 31, 1979, abandoned.
This application Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,263
Int. a.3 B26B 21/52
U.S. a. 30—85 1 Claim
1. In a razor system of the type including a separable blade
cartridge having one or more blades each having a single
cutting edge, said cartridge being formed with ribs having
apertures and a slide, said cartridge being operable dually and
selectively to make a pivotal connection with a handle having
fingers or stub shafts insertable in said apertures and to make a
sliding connection with a handle having a track for engaging
said slide;
an improved plastic handle structure providing an alterna-
tive connection with said blade cartridge: comprising a
pair of flexible arms joined to define a yoke, each yoke
formed with a stub shaft operable to engage a mating
aperture in said cartridge ribs and pads individual to each
arm adjacent each stub shaft cooperating with mating ribs
on said cartridge to block pivoting of the cartridge.
4,392,304
UNIVERSAL MANUAL GRAFTING DEVICE
Laszlo Plesa, Szentendre, Hungary, assignor to Aranykalasz
Mgtsz, Rackeve, Hungary
FUed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,604
Claims priority, appUcation Hungary, May 20, 1980, 1254
InL a.3 AOIG 1/06
U.S. a. 30—178 - 4 Claims
1. A cutting tool for grafting comprising first and second
members pivotally interconnected at a common pivot, each
member including a handle portion on one side of the pivot and
a working portion on the other side, the working portion of the
second member being connected with the handle portion of the
first member via a spring and being also pivotally connected
456
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
with one end of an arm whose other end is pivotally joined housing with said slide means to denote coating thickness as a
with a movable workpiece locating member slidably guided function of the force exerted on said magnet, said slide means
including friction means engageable with a surface of the
housing to hold the slide means in position when released by an
operator of the gauge.
f ^
0
0
4U
f
u
a®'
-a
^
432,306
LETTERGUIDE
George A. Johnstone, P.O. Box 6, Grantham, Q.4347, Australia
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,582
Claims priority, application Australia, Jun. 9, 1980, PE03953
Int. a.J B43L 13/20
VJS. a. 33—174 B 8 Claims
along the length of the working portion of the first member
toward and away from a cutting edge attached to the first
member.
4,392,305
PENOL SHAPED MAGNETIC COATING THICKNESS
GAUGE
Hans Nix, and Herbert Szary, both of Cologne, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Elektro-Physik Hans Nix & Dr. Ing.
E. Steingroever, K.G., Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 263,041
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 8,
1980, 3025783; Jul. 8, 1980, 8018275[U]
Int. a.^ GOIB 7/06
U.S. a. 33—169 F 17 Claims
1. A stencil comprising a substantially rectangular plate and
a comer forming piece wherein the substantially rectangular
plate consists of two regions of substantially equal surface area,
each of said regions having an aperture located substantially
centrally within the region, the substantially rectangular plate
being provided with indication means proximal to its perime-
ter, wherein, at least one comer formed by the intersection of
any two sides of the perimeter of the plate is a radiused comer
and wherein the comer forming piece may be pivotally
mounted on the rectangular plate and has at least one right
angle comer formed on its perimeter such that one of the said
radiused comer(s) of the said plate may have one of the said
right angle comer(s) of the comer forming piece substantially
superimposed thereover so as to form a right angle comer
thereon.
4,392,307
ADJUSTABLE FACE-PLATE TEMPLATE
William Wightman, Jr., 1034 Rimpau Ave.. Corona, Calif. 91720
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,363
Int. a.3 B27G 17/08
U.S. a. 33—197 ^ Claims
1. Magnetic coating-thickness gauge for measuring the
thickness of a non-magnetic coating on a ferromagnetic sub-
strate of the type wherein a permanent magnet is suspended by
spring means for axial movement within a tubular housing
resembling a pencil, said housing being provided with an axi-
ally extending slot, the magnet having a pole surface for
contact with a coating to be measured on said substrate
through an opening at one end of the housing, manually opera-
ble slide means encircling the exterior of the housing for slid-
able movement along the length of the housing in a generally
straight line, connecting means extending through said slot
between the slide means and spring means to permit the slide
means to exert increasing force on said magnet when the slide
means is moved away from said one end of the housing to
dislodge the magnet from said coating and scale means on said
1. An adjustable face-plate template for forming a recess in a
door to receive a door-lock face-plate, the template compris-
ing:
a clamping means defined by a first parallelogram structure
adapted to be clamped to the longitudinal edge of a door;
a first guide means defmed by a second parallelogram struc-
ture, said second parallelogram stmcture being operably
connected to said first parallelogram structure, each struc-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
457
ture thereof being independently adjustable relative to the
other;
a second guide means adjustably mounted to said clamping
means; and
locking means attached to said first guide means to secure
said second parallelogram stmcture in its respective posi-
tion relative to the forming of a specific recess configura-
tion.
4,392,308
LEVEL ROD FOR GRADING
Theodore W. Case, 778 Center St., Wallingford, Conn. 06492
FUed Oct. 16, 1978, Ser. No. 951,600
Int. a.J GOIC 15/06
U.S. a. 33—293 10 Qaims
1. A device for use in grading operations for determining
and visually indicating the depth of cut or fill required to
establish a desired grade level in one place relative to grade
level indicating means positioned in another place, the device
comprising:
an elongated rod having front, rear and side surfaces;
an endless band extending longitudinally around said elon-
gated rod along said front and rear surfaces, said endless
band comprising a first band poriion of a given color and
having a first set of graduations ascending from zero at
one end thereof to a first value at the other end thereof and
a second band poriion of a color clearly distinguishable
from said given color and having a second set of gradua-
tions ascending from zero at one end thereof to a second
value at the opposite end thereof, said one end of said first
band poriion being attached to said one end of said second
band portion and said opposite end of said first band por-
tion being attached to said opposite end of said second
band portion;
mounting means supporting said endless band on said elon-
gated rod and accommodating circumvoiutionary move-
ment therearound; and
a slide mechanism mounted for longitudinal sliding move-
ment on said elongated rod, said slide mechanism compris-
ing clamp means for selectively and alternatively either
securing said slide mechanism to said endless band so as to
prevent relative movement therebetween or releasing said
slide mechanism from said endless band so as to allow
relative movement therebetween, said slide mechanism
while secured to said band being slidable longitudinally to
establish generally horizontal alignment between said
slide mechanism and said indicating means to visually
indicate a length on said endless band between said zero
and one of said graduations, said length corresponding to
the depth of the required cut or fill.
4,392,309
APPARATUS FOR HEAT TREATING A CONTINUOUSLY
MOVING WEB
Alfons Schrader, Remscheid-Lennep, and Waldemar Schreiner,
Winsen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Babcock
Textilmaschinen GmbH, Seevetal, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,974
Claims priority, application Fed. Sep. of Germany, Sep. 29,
1980,3036669
Int. a.3 F26B 13/06
U.S. a. 34—54 8 Qaims
h n
1. An apparatus for heat-treating an elongated textile web,
comprising:
a gas-pervious conveyor belt having a stretch defining a
treatment path having an upstream end and a downstream
end;
means for feeding the web to said upstream end and for
advancing said belt to advance said web toward said
downstream end along said path;
a plurality of upwardly directed lower slot nozzles under-
neath said stretch along said path, said lower nozzles being
generally perpendicular to said path;
a plurality of downwardly directed upper slot nozzles above
said stretch along said path, said lower slot nozzles being
transverse to at least some of said upper slot nozzles;
means for feeding a hot gas alternately to said upper and
lower nozzles; and
a plurality of distribution boxes supporting said stretch and
each formed with two such lower nozzles, some of said
upper nozzles extending generally parallel to said path and
the balance of said upper nozzles extending transverse to
said path.
4,392,310
DRYING APPARATUS
Charles M. Hohman, Granville; Mark A. Propster, Gahanna,
and Stephen Seng, Bladensburg, all of Ohio, assignors to
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
FUed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,968
Int. a.^ F26B 17/32
U.S. a. 34—172 9 Claims
1. A particulate dryer comprising:
(a) a vessel having a gas inlet and outlet and a particulate
inlet and outlet;
(b) at least one porous tray positioned within said vessel and
adapted for horizontal rotation within said vessel, said
tray comprising a plurality of sections, each of said sec-
tions comprising upstanding walls comprising a leading
wall, a trailing wall, an inner wall and an outer wall, said
inner wall, said outer wall, and said trailing wall each
being separate from said leading wall and each fixedly
attached to a porous bottom surface, and a hinged support
affixed to the leading edge of said section, said section
leading edge comprising the bottom pari of said lead wall
and the leading part of said porous bottom surface;
(c) an inward rotatable support and an outer discontinuous
support of said sections; and,
(d) means for rotating said tray within said vessel to sequen-
tially superimpose said sections above the discontinuous
1032O.G.— 19
458
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
portion of said outer support and to pivot said sections, ' 4,392^12
exclusive of said leading wall, downwardly at said discon- OUTSOLE FOR ATHLETIC SHOE
Kevin J. Crowley, Newburyport, Mass., and Channing Souther,
Chesterfield, Mo., assignors to Converse Inc., Wilmington,
Mass.
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,484
Int. a.^ A43C 15/02
U.S. a. 36—67 R
SQaims
t3^
ffommof'mrs
tinuous portion to discharge particulate matter from said
section.
4,392,311
EXPANDABLE OVERSHOE
Warren P. Rudolf, and Susan A. Rudolf, both of 8210 Brandon
Dr., Millersville, Md. 21108
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,764
Int. a.3 A43B 1/10. 11/00
U.S. a. 36—7.3 7 Qaims
1. An overshoe comprising a sole having toe, arch, and heel
portions and an upper secured to said sole, said upper compris-
ing a forward portion extending from about said arch portion
of the sole to the end of the toe and an ankle portion of flexible
material extending from about said arch portion to the end of
the heel portion and upward to below the knee of the wearer,
said ankle portion being divided into front and back sections by
two opposing longitudinal apertures each extending vertically
on either side of said ankle portion from just about said heel
portion to the top of said ankle portion to facilitate putting on
or taking off the overshoe, each of said apertures being adapted
to be closed by respective closure means extending the length
thereof; the back section of said ankle portion being adapted
when the apertures are open to provide means for grasping
said overshoe from the rear further to facilitate pulling it on or
removing it.
£3
1. An outsole for an athletic shoe, comprising:
a substantially planar outsole member having a plurality of
projections therefrom;
said projections including a pluralty of first projections and
a plurality of second projections, said second projections
being longer than said first projections;
each said first projection having a shape characterized by
three identical partially-overlapping frustoconical bodies,
each having a major axis, said major axes being parallel to
each other, said major axes defining the apexes of an
equilateral triangle, said shape including fillet portions
connecting the sides of said identical frustoconical bodies;
each said second projection having a shape characterized by
three partially-overlapping frustoconical bodies of equal
height and unequal volume, two said bodies being smaller
than a third said body, said third body being disposed
between said smaller bodies, each said body having a
major axes, said major axes defining points on an arc, said
shape including fillet portions interconnecting the sides of
said frustoconical bodies, said shape defining a convex
side and a concave side.
4,392,313
SHOE FOR USE WITH A CROSS-COUNTRY SKI
Josef Linecker, Rosengasse 5, A 5230 Mattighofen, Austria
Division of Ser. No. 892,770, Apr. 3, 1978, Pat. No. 4,235,452.
This application Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,698
Claims priority, application Austria, Apr. 13, 1977, 2578/77;
Feb. 9, 1978, 924/78
Int. a.3 A43B 5/04. 13/12
U.S. a. 36—117 20 Qaims
74 75
1. A ski shoe for use with a cross-country ski having a web
projecting from the ski surface and extending in the longitudi-
nal direction of the ski, comprising a sole means of synthetic
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
459
resin, the sole means including a heel portion defining a recess
of V-shaped cross section extending in said direction for en-
gaging the web and thereby holding the heel portion on the ski
against lateral displacement, and upwardly projecting lateral
edges arranged only forwardly of the heel portion.
4,392,315
DESTRUCTION AND DYE RESISTANT TAG; TAGGED
TEXTILE ARTICLE AND METHOD OF IDENTIFYING
TEXTILES SUBJECT TO A DYEING AND nNISHING
PROCESS
William A. Irving, and Robert E. Thornton, Jr., both of Knox-
ville, Tenn., assignors to Standard Knitting Mills, Inc.
Filed Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 338,960
Int. a.J G09F 3/02; B32B 27/06. 27/34; D21D 3/00
U.S. a. 40—27 29 Claims
4,392,314
BOOM AND DIPPER STICK CONSTRUCTION
Allan J. Albrecht, Rothschild, and Richard C. Van Ooyen, Scho-
field, both of Wis., assignors to J. I. Case Company, Racine,
Wis.
PUed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,003
Int. aj E02F 5/02
U.S. a. 37—103 13 Qaims
1. In an earth working vehicle having a self-powered frame
structure, a platform supported on said frame structure, a boom
having a first end pivotally secured to said platform about a
substantially horizontal axis, a dipper stick pivoted intermedi-
ate its ends about a substantially horizontal axis to a second end
of said boom, a material handling attachment pivoted to a first
end of said dipper stick about a substantially horizontal axis, a
first fluid motor means extending between said platform and an
intermediate portion of said boom, a second fluid motor means
extending between an intermediate portion of said boom and a
second end of said dipper stick, and a third fluid motor means
extending between an intermediate portion of said dipf)er stick
and said material handling attachment; an improved boom
construction comprising: a pair of spaced apart outside side
plate assemblies, said outside side plate assemblies having front
and rear connecting ear plates which have first and second
bearing means respectively connected thereto for receipt of
pivot pins to connect same respectively to said platform and
said dipper stick, said side plate assemblies having front and
rear side plates which are secured together in an end to end
abutting relationship and secured between said connecting ear
plates in an end to end abutting relationship, said front side
plates having third bearing means mounted therebetween for
pivotal receipt of said second fluid motor means, said rear side
plates having fourth bearing means mounted therebetween for
pivotal receipt of said first fluid motor means; a top plate
assembly secured between the upper portions of said side plate
assemblies; a bottom plate assembly secured between the lower
portions of said side plate assemblies; an inside rear plate se-
cured between said top plate assembly and said bottom plate
assembly and said rear side plates rearward of said fourth
bearing means; an inside forward plate secured between said
top plate assembly and said bottom plate assembly and said rear
side plates forward of said fourth bearing means; and a pair of
spaced inside center plates secured between said inside rear
plate and said inside forward plate so as to form a box structure
therewith, said fourth bearing means extending through and
secured to said rear side plates and said inside center plates.
1
/ ,20
'«/
7 *
N
t'.
K
\
M
-> o
O
5
o •-
to
1. A method of identifying textile units subject to a chemical
treatment process including dyeing of the unit comprising:
(a) applying color-contrast indicia directly onto an aramid
paper layer of an abrasion and dye resistant tag,
(b) attaching the tag to a textile unit, the
(c) subjecting said textile unit with said tag attached to the
chemical treatment process for dyeing and treating said
unit, said color-contrast indicia remaining visible after
completion of said process and wherein said aramid paper
layer consists essentially of a nonwoven, nonfused com-
mingled mixture of floe of a nonfusable aromatic polyam-
ide and fibrids of a nonfusable aromatic polyamide.
4,392,316
CEILING SUSPENDED PRODUCT DISPLAY
Paul D. Thomas, 208 S. College, McKinney, Tex. 75069
Filed Jan. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 117,108
Int. Q.^ G09F 7/22. 15/00. 1/08; A47G 1/16
U.S. Q. 40— 617 35 Qaims
1. A ceiling suspended product display comprising:
a plurality of display panels having sale product mounted
thereon, each display panel further having at least one
eyelet formed therein;
hinge means pivotally interconnecting said display panels at
460
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
adjacent edges of said display panels, said hinge means
permitting said display to be folded in a compact form for
storage or shipment with said display panels in facing
relationship;
a ceiling hook connected to a ceiling;
suspension means suspending said display panels from said
ceiling hook, said suspension means hieing connected to
said display panels at said eyelets, said suspension means
having swivel means permitting said display panels to
rotate relative to said ceiling hook; and
each of said display panels being pivotal about said hinge
means to unfold said display with the edges of two of said
display panels opposite the hinged edges abutting to form
a multi-sided structure, the sale product being mounted on
the side of each of said display panels facing outward
when said display is unfolded, said display permitting said
display panels to rotate relative to said ceiling hooks to
attract attention, the multi-sided structure maintaining the
product in view continuously during rotation.
4,392,317
SIGN LETTER CONSTRUCTION
Edwin F. Boothman, 117 Marion Dr., Sherwood Park, Alberta,
Canada
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,263
Qaims priority, application Canada, Nov. 10, 1980, 364402
Int. a.3 G09F 7/02
U.S. a. 40—618 6 Claims
1. A sign letter structure, comprising:
a first letter-form member, cut from a generally thin, rigid
sheet material,
a second letter-form member, having an outer profile corre-
sponding to that of the first letter-form member and cut from
a lightweight, rigid sheet material,
a thin, pliable plastic strip material, having a lip on one edge,
such strip material being bent around the periphery of the
letter-form members so as to conform to the outer profile of
those members, the thickness and depth of the lip being such
that it readily deforms at sharp bends in the strip material,
and
securing means for securing the first letter-form member to the
interior side of the strip material at a position abutting the lip
on the one edge thereof and the second letter-forming mem-
ber to the interior side of the strip material near the other
edge thereof, the members being maintained in parallel
spaced relation.
432,318
SAFETY STRAP FOR HANDGUNS
William J. Daniels, 3229 Wallace, Kansas Qty, Mo. 64129
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,363
Int a.3 F41C 27/00
U.S. a. 42—1 LP 10 Claims
1. A safety strap arrangement for a handgun having a gun
body and an exposed hammer that can be cocked to prepare
the gun for firing, said safety strap arrangement comprising:
an elongate flexible strap adapted to be drawn around the
gun body and having opposite ends positionable adjacent
one another when the strap is drawn around the gim body
in a taut condition;
means in a selected portion of said strap providing an open-
ing in the strap adapted to fit over the hammer when same
is cocked and the strap is applied to the gun and drawn
around the gun body, said selected portion of the strap
being located between the hammer and gun body to pre-
vent firing of the hammer when said opening is fitted over
the hammer; and
1 — ^
i
/I
- f
\lv^
L.:.
"^
r
\:yr\ .; ^i
\Q.
\lt
1\\
la 16
O
releasable fastening means for releasably fastening said op-
posite ends of the strap together to maintain the strap on
the gun in a taut condition with said opening of the strap
fitted over the hammer, thereby preventing firing of the
gun until said fastening means is released and the strap is
removed from the gun.
4 392 319
SAFETY DEVICE FOR THE TRIGGER MECHANISM OF
A SHOT-GUN OF THE GAS-PUMP TYPE
Leonardo Ottolini, Brescia, Italy, assignor to Luigi Franchi
S.p.A., Fomaci, Italy
FUed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,084
Claims priority, application Italy, Nov. 10, 1980, 25858 A/80
Int. a.3 F41C U/06
U.S. a. 42—69 B 3 Oaims
1. In a gas-pump-type shot gun having a firing chamber; a
breechblock carrier supporting a breechblock for translational
movement between a first position in which said firing cham-
ber is closed and a second position in which said firing cham-
ber is open; a trigger mechanism; and a stop member defining
lever mounted on a pivot pin carried by a housing of said
trigger-mechanism for pivotal movement about an axis perpen-
dicular to the direction of movement of the breechblock car-
rier between an operative position, in which a free end thereof
bears against said breechblock carrier when said breechblock is
in said first position, and an inoperative position in which said
free end lies out of the path of movement of said carrier,
a safety device for said trigger mechanism comprising a
spring assembly pivotally connected at one end of said
lever and at the opposite end to a fixed point on said shot
gun, such that pivoting a said lever between said operative
position and said inoperative position causes pivoting of
said spring assembly between a first position and a second
position respectively, said spring assembly defining a
straight line of action which in said second position lies on
one side of a straight line joining said fixed point to a point
on said axis of the lever so that the spring assembly biases
the lever towards said inoperative position, and said
straight line of action of the spring assembly coinciding
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
461
with said straight line joining said fixed point to said point
on said axis in the maximum loading condition of said
spring assembly.
of the slot suitable for discharge of the cartridges into a
magazine.
4,392,320
TRIGGER RETAINING AND STABILIZING MEANS
Robert L. HUlberg, 26 Mount Sanford Rd., Cheshire, Conn.
06410, and Frederick F. Stevens, 177 Brett Rd., Fairfield,
Conn. 06430
FUed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,263
Int. a.J F41C 17/00
U.S. a. 42—69 R 11 Claims
4,392,322
DISPOSABLE FLY TR>P
Robert J. Kaveloski, 39663 Balboa, Sterling Heights, Mich.
48078
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,483
Int a.5 AOIM I/IO
U.S. a. 43—118 7 Qaims
1. In a guri having a frame and a trigger supported in assem-
bly in a guideway defined by the frame for reciprocal move-
ment longitudinally of the frame between ready and firing
positions the improvement comprising said frame having a
longitudinally extending guide track communicating with said
guideway and at least one opening communicating with said
guideway and said guide track, said trigger having longitudi-
nally spaced apart guide elements slidably received within said
guide track and retaining said trigger in assembly with said
frame within said guideway, said trigger having an assembly
position relative to said frame wherein one of said guide ele-
ments is aligned with said one opening for movement through
said one opening and said trigger is free to move into and out
of assembled relation with said frame.
' ' 4,392,321
RIMMED CARTRIDGE MAGAZINE LOADER
Jack L. Bosworth, 5674 Kingship Loop, Columbus, Ohio 43229
I FUed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,461
I Int. a.3 F42B 39/06
U.S. a. 42—87 6 Qaims
1. In a fly trap of the type utilizing spaced outer and an inner
arch-shaped walls each having an outer light transmitting
opening closed by a translucent sheet of material, and a base
and fly inlet opening adjacent the base, that improvement
which comprises:
(a) a pair of independent end plates each provided with
spaced outer and an inner confining means extending
inwardly from said plates, and
(b) a disposable central bridging unit of flexible material
between said walls formed of a closed loop shaped to
provide an outer arch confined by said outer confining
means, and to provide an inner arch below and spaced
from the outer arch and confined by said inner confining
means, a portion of said loop below said inner arch being
folded down in a direction opposite to the inner arch to
provide a bottom for said trap with ends open to admit
flies to the inner arch.
1. A rimmed cartridge magazine loader comprising:
parallel elongated members forming a slot for slidably re-
taining cartridges by the rims thereof in the slot formed by
said parallel members,
a portion of said slot formed by said members communicat-
ing with a bulk cartridge reservoir which contains means
for directing the cartridges into said slot whereby the
body of the cartridge can pass from the reservoir through
the slot and the rim of the cartridge is retained by said
elongated members,
a portion of said slot being closed on the back by means
capable of slidably retaining the cartridges in the slot,
said slot having an opening at the end of the closed portion
432,323
TOY WITH TURNABLE ELEMENTS FOR FORMING
GEOMETRIC SHAPES
Emo RubUi, Budapest, Hungary, assignor to PoUtoys Ipari
Szovetkezet, Budapest, Hungary
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,458
Qaims priority, appUcation Hungary, Nov. 18, 1980, 2752/80
Int. Q.' A63H ii/00
U.S. Q. 46—1 R 4 Claims
1. A toy for constructing diflerent geometric shapes com-
prising: a plurality of identical toy elements each comprising an
isoceles right triangular prism having two square side faces and
a quadratic hypotenuse face; means connecting the elements in
a row with side faces of each intermediate identical element
abutting side faces of other identical elements for rotation of
each element about the axis normal to each abutting side face
462
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
and relative to the remaining elements; and means for posi- 4,392,325
tively maintaining each element in any one of four equally SPORTS WHISTLE WITH HNGER GRIP
Eli M. Woronets, 14413 Mansa Dr., U Mirada, Calif. 90638
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 302,982
Int. a.3 A63H 5/00
U.S. a. 46—179 7 Oaims
spaced discrete angular orientations relative to the adjacent
elements.
4,392,324
MOUTH OPERABLE MASK DEVICE
Jeff Harris, Los Angeles; Charles A. Chambers, Burbank, and
Jack M. Horwitz, Los Angeles, all of Calif., assignors to
Minkey Farms Partnership, Los Angeles, Calif., a part inter-
est
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,389
Int. a.J A63H 33/00; A42B 1/18
U.S. a. 46—1 F 1 Qaim
18' 15 19
1. An improved, mouth-blown whistle, comprising:
(a) a hollow body having an air inlet and an air outlet;
(b) cushioning means disposed peripherially about the out-
side of said air inlet to prevent chipping of the user's teeth
as the air inlet end of the whistle is inserted into the user's
mouth to blow said whistle and even while the whistle is
being blown;
(c) a C-shaped finger gripping member secured to the under-
side of said body; and
(d) resilient covering means over said finger gripping mem-
ber and bridging the opening between the open ends of
said C-shaped member, said portion of said resilient cover-
ing means bridging the space bulbously enlarged to fill the
empty space between the two fingers which engage the
finger gripping member thereby creating a frictional grip-
ping action between said resilient covering means and the
two fingers inserted therein to hold the whistle.
4,392,326
PLANT SHELTER
Thomas J. Bona, 34 Howe St., Millbury, Mass. 01527
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,102
Int. C1.3 AOIG 13/00
U.S. a. 47—28 R 13 Qaims
IB '' 10
A
1. A mouth operable mask comprising:
a flexible V-shaped element capable of being inserted into
the wearer's mouth;
at least one brace, attached to one of the legs of said V-
shaped element, which may be gripped by the wearer's
teeth;
an upper mask portion attached to one of the legs of said
V-shaped element and a lower mask portion attached to
the other of the legs of said V-shaped element, whereby
flexing of said V-shaped element produces relative motion
between said upper and lower mask portions;
wherein said V-shaped element includes a flexible hinge
composed of resilient plastic whereby the resiliency of
said hinge biases said V-shaped element in an open posi-
tion; and
a metal element attached to the interior side of one of said
legs of said V-shaped element and being in contact with
the interior side of said other of said legs, wherein said
metal element generates a clicking noise when said V-
shaped element is flexed.
1. Plant shelter, comprising:
(a) a dome-like lower shell having a generally vertical trans-
parent wall with primary apertures which are sufficiently
large to allow passage of bees, and
(b) an upper shell conforming generally to the upper portion
of the lower shell and having a generally vertical transpar-
ent wall which overlaps at least the upper half of the
vertical wall of the lower shell and has primary apertures
which are sufficiently large to allow passage of bees, the
upper and lower shells being held together for relative
sliding movement from a first position at which the aper-
tures of the upper shell are coextensive with the apertures
of the lower shell to allow air and bee movement in and
out of the shelter to a second position at which the aper-
tures of the upper shell are non-coextensive with the
July 12, 19&
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
463
apertures of the lower shell, the upper shell being pro-
vided with a rain-collecting ridge in its upper portion in
the form of a closed figure, said upper shell having sec-
ondary ap>eriures lying within the figure, and the lower
shell having similar secondary apertures for cooperation
with the secondary apertures in the upper shell to drain
rain water from within the ridge to the interior of the
lower shd
4,392,328
CELLULAR MOIST nLM PLANT CULTURE SYSTEM
Fred L. Walker, 55 San Marcos Ct., Salinas, Calif. 93901
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,358
Int. a.3 AOIG 31/00
U.S. a. 47—62 8 Claims
4,392,327
PLANT GROWING UNIT, METHOD AND SYSTEM
Bernard Sanders, Jersey, Channel Islands, assignor to Bonar
Horticulture, Ltd., Dundee, Scotland
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,194
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 20, 1980,
8020224 1 1
Int. a.J AOIG 31/00
U.S. a. 47—59
14 Oaims
;
1. A method for growing plants utilizing a plant growing
system constructed from a sheet of flexible plastic material
folded to provide opposite walls and said opposite walls being
secured along a longitudinal division to form elongated upper
and lower compartments, said upper compartment having an
elongated top portion and constituting a multiple plant root-
ball container open along said top portion for upward growth
of multiple plants in said container, and said lower compart-
ment constituting a reservoir for water, said lower compart-
ment having level restricting means for establishing a maxi-
mum level of water in the reservoir, and means including a
water carrier of flexible capillary material secured along said
longitudinal division and leaving openings from said container
to said reservoir in said lower compartment, said water carrier
extending between said upper and lower compartments, said
method comprising the steps of:
placing multiple plants in a row in said upper compartment
providing said container of said system;
supporting said sheet of flexible plastic material by an elon-
gated member extending along the elongated top portion
of said upper compartment so that said upper and lower
compartments hang below said supported portion;
introducing water into said container onto plants therein and
draining the water through said openings into said lower
compartment providing a reservoir;
establishing a maximum level of water in said reservoir by
said level restricting means and producing an air space
between said water level and the root-balls of said plants
in said container bridged by said water carrier;
venting said air space;
supplying air and water to the root-balls of said plants in said
container from said vented air space and said reservoir in
said lower compartment through said openings and said
water carrier for growing the plants; and
replenishing the water in said lower compartment by intro-
ducing water into said container onto plants therein and
draining water from said container through said openings
to maintain a reservoir of water and a vented air space
above the water level for supply of air and water to the
root-balls of said plants in said container.
1. A moist film plant culture system for growing plants
comprising:
impermeable envelope having top and side wall means con-
fining an air space in which roots of plants can grow, said
envelope means having a seam along at least one edge
thereof,
support means for supporting the root ball of a plant within
said air space,
a first water absorbent matting material of high capillarity
fastened within the envelope and a second water absor-
bent matting material of high capillarity surrounding the
root ball, the surrounded root ball and expanding root
system and the growing plant structure being supported
on said first matting material within said air space,
said envelope being two ply with one ply including a flexible
moisture impermeable outer sheet and a second ply in-
cluding said first matting material, said envelope further
including a plurality of stiff cross ribs to maintain the walls
and top means of the envelope in an elevated position to
maintain said interior air space when the seam is closed,
said flexible envelope being collapsible for shipping the
culture system,
a dry chemical nutrient packet, said packet being formed by
a third water absorbent matting material enclosing a dry
chemical nutrient, said nutrient pack being in contact with
said first water absorbent material and spaced from the
root ball, a nutrient transfer means for transferring nutri-
ent from said packet to said plant structure, said transfer
means including said matting materials, whereby when
said water absorbent materials are wet, dissolved chemi-
cals are leached from said nutrient packet and will migrate
from the chemical packet to the root ball and to all root
bearing surfaces,
means for closing the seam of said envelope around the
individual stems of a plurality of plants whereby the root
balls and growing roots of said plants are surrounded by a
confined pocket of highly humid air within said envelope
and in contact with said water absorbent material and the
leaves and stems of said plant protrude beyond said seams,
and,
a water reservoir spaced from said root ball and from said
chemical packet and located to maintain water in contact
with said first matting material and out of free water
contact with the dry chemical packet.
4,392,329
PIVOTABLE WINDOW MOVED BETWEEN LOCKED
AND OPENED POSITIONS BY MEANS OF A SINGLE
OPERATING HANDLE
Jyuji Suzuki, Sayama, Japan, assignor to Nippon Elumin Sash
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,551
Int. a.5 E05F 9/00
U.S. a. 49—356 15 Claims
1. A window comprising:
a window frame including upper, lower, left, and right frame
members, and defining a plurality of comers and an mner,
464
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
peripheral groove extending around the interior of the
frame;
a window screen;
means connecting the window screen to the window frame
for pivotal movement therewithin between open and
closed positions;
a movable endless belt extending around the interior of the
window frame and including
upper, lower, left, and right sliding members supported by
the window frame for reciprocating movement within the
inner peripheral groove of the frame,
a plurality of rollers connecting ends of adjacent sliding
members to translate reciprocating movement thereof
around the comers of the frame, and
means supported by the frame for guiding movement of the
rollers around the comers of the frame;
locking means including
first means secured to the window screen,
second means supported by the window frame for move-
ment between a locking position, to engage the first means
and securely hold the window screen in the closed posi-
tion, and an unlocking position, disengaged from the first
means, and
link means connecting the second means with the endless
belt to move the second means between the locking and
unlocking positions; and
an operating mechanism connected to the endless belt to
move the endless belt and the second means between the
said locking and unlocking positions, and also connected
to the window screen to move the window screen be-
tween its open and closed positions.
4,392,330
CASEMENT WINDOW
Terry J. Buhr, Pella, Iowa, assignor to Rolscreen Company,
Peila, Iowa
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Set. No. 269,628
Int. a.3 E05D 15/00
U.S. CI. 49—381 5 Qaims
a window sash movably mounted on said frame;
a sash hinge plate mounted on said sash;
a hinge shoe with a channel-travelling flange member;
hinge means for providing pivotal movement of said sash
relative to said hinge shoe, said hinge means being con-
nected to said sashhinge plate and hinge shoe; and
mode-shifting means for shifting of the sash to and from the
vent-egress and wash modes, the mode-shifting means
including a channel-forming slide member secured to the
window frame, the channel-travelling flange of the hinge
shoe being slidably secured to the slide member, and
means for releasably locking the hinge shoe to the slide
member in two positions of the hinge shoe relative to the
slide member, one of the two positions being a vent-egress
position in which the sash is in the vent-egress mode and
the other of the two positions being a wash position in
which the sash is in the wash mode.
432,331
CLAMPABLE APPARATUS FOR GRINDING
SPHERICAL SURFACES
Giinter Schimitzek, An der Reute, 7923 Konigsbronn, and Horst
Reiche, Uhlandstr. 36, 7923 Konigsbronn, Zang, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,585
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 20»
1979, 2937977
Int. a.3 B24B 13/00
U.S. a. 51—55 17 Claims
1. A casement window operable in a vent-egress mode and a
wash mode comprising:
a window frame;
1. Clampable apparatus operable at a heated operating tem-
perature for producing convex and/or concave spherical sur-
faces in workpieces such as optical lenses, comprising
a frame,
a swivel arm substantially in the form of a gantry and
mounted on the frame such that its angle of inclination
relative thereto is adjustable, the swivel arm including
two support portions having an axle extending therebe-
tween,
a rocker arm pivotally and adjustably mounted on the axle,
the swivel arm and rocker arm being adjustably locatable
and securable in a selective adjustment position,
a spindle sleeve housing axially displaceably mounted on the
rocker arm and having a tool spindle for carrying a ma-
chine tool and being received in the housing and mounted
for rotation about a tool spindle axis of rotation lying in a
tool spindle plane, which plane is normal to the axle, in
any adjustment position of the swivel arm and rocker arm,
a workpiece spindle for supporting a workpiece to be ma-
chined by the machine tool and being arranged at the
frame such that the machine tool and workpiece are locat-
able in the plane of the axis of rotation of the tool spindle,
and
a pair of clamping devices for retaining the swivel arm and
rocker arm in any such adjustment position,
said clamping devices being substantially identical and sym-
metrically disposed relative to the axis of rotation of the
tool spindle so as to be substantially mirror images of one
another, each clamping device having two cooperating
members which are clampingly embraceable by frictional
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
465
engagement with one another, one such member being
mounted on the swivel arm and the other such member
being mounted on the rocker arm, one of the members of
each clamping device being arranged for operative dis-
placement to a heated operating temperature displacement
location relative to the arm on which it is mounted, when
the apparatus is at its corresponding heated operating
temperature, for operative engagement at such displace-
ment location with the other member of such clamping
device, whereby to prevent lateral deviation of the rocker
arm and in turn of the tool spindle axis of rotation from the
tool spindle plane.
V
Ira^r
P
e-f
-9e'
-68
.4f
1. In an ice skate sharpening fixture having opposed jaws for
retaining an ice skate therein, and follower means on said
fixture, the ice skate having longitudinally curved blade clamp
lips engaging the ice skate blade and an equivalent center
location on the blade, and the fixture having a fixed centerline
relative to the fixture follower means,
the improvement comprising separate blade clamp lip locat-
ing means adjacent at least one jaw and equidistant from
the fixture centerline, each of said separate blade clamp lip
locating means not extending in^ direction parallel to jaw
clamping movement beyond the clamping surface of the
jaw thereadjacent upon clamping an ice skate in said
fixture, and said separate blade clamp lip locating means
positioned to engage at least one of the blade clamp lips
equidistant from the equivalent center location on the
blade and adjacent the exposed portion of the blade.
relatively rigid material and having an outer surface for engag-
ing said workpiece, a concentrically arranged through opening
and opposite side surface portions extending between said
outer surface and said through opening and arranged for en-
gagement with said surfaces of said groove, said outer surface
having a diameter exceeding said maximum diameter, said
4,392,332
ICE SKATE SHARPENER
Glenn Sakcriska, Ypsilanti, Mich., assignor to Canadian Skate
Contours, Ltd., Mississauga, Canada
Continuation of Ser. No. 70,408, Aug. 27, 1979, Pat. No.
4,294,043, which is a division of Ser. No. 869,696, Jan. 16, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,172,343. which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
745,362, Nov. 26, 1976, Pat. No. 4,069,620. This application Jun.
II 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,794
' ' Int. d? B24B 9/04
U.S. a. 51—92 BS 3 Claims
4,392,333
GUIDE WHEELS FOR BELT GRINDER
Walter N. Welsch, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignor to Dynabrade,
Inc^ Tonawanda, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,096
Int. C\? B24B 23/06
U.S. a. 51—170 EB 5 Claims
1. Guide means for an abrading device of the type having an
endless abrasive belt trained over a contact wheel supported
for rotation about an axis, said guide means including wheel
means for guiding said contact wheel relative to the surface of
a workpiece engaged by said belt while passing over said
contact wheel, said wheel means defining an annularly extend-
ing groove disposed concentrically of said axis and bounded by
radially outwardly divergent surfaces, said groove being char-
acterized as having a maximum diameter and a minimum diam-
eter, said wheel means being adjustable to selectively vary the
width of said groove in a direction aligned with said axis; and
a tire received within said groove, said tire being formed of a
through opening having a diameter less than said maximum
diameter, while exceeding said minimum diameter by an
amount permitting displacement of said tire transversely of
said axis incident to engagement of said outer surface with said
workpiece, characterized in that said width of said groove
determines the extent of said displacements of said tire.
4,392,334
FLUID DISPERSING APPARATUS FOR USE IN
PRODUaNG OPHTHALMIC LENSES
Joseph Tusinski, and Phillip D. Hill, both of Muskogee, Okla.,
assignors to Cobum Optical Industries, Inc., Muskogee, Okla.
FUed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,376
Int. a.3 B24B 57/00. 55/02
U.S. a. 51—263 5 Claims
1. A fluid dispersing apparatus operable for use in ophthal-
mic lens producing machines and the like, said fluid disf>ersing
apparatus comprising:
a dispersing member having,
a landing surface operable to be positioned at
an angle with respect to a free flowing column of fluid,
and
an extension strip extending away from said landing surfce
in an intended direction of flow of the fluid at an obtuse
angle with respect to said landing surface, said exten-
sion strip being fashioned with an arcuate front edge
portion when viewed in a plan perspective, and being
curved away from the intended direction of travel of
the sheet of fluid away from said landing surface exten-
sion strip; and
means connected to said dispersing member for operably
mounting said dispersing member u|X>n a machine adja-
cent to a source of generally columnar flowing fluid.
466
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,335
FLEXIBLE CEMENTmOUS COATINGS
Robert B. Heiman, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Astro-Steel
Grip International, Inc., San Francisco, Calif.
FUed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 368,211
Int. a.3 EOlC 15/00; B05D 3/00; B32B 13/04
VS. a. 52—309.17 19 Claims
tions, and a stiffener means affixed to said elongated recessed
portion to resist pulling forces on said strap member.
4,392,337
APPARATUS FOR ATTACHMENT OF CARRIER SHEET
TO CONTAINERS
Kunio Hara, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Nifco, Inc., Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Dec. 18, 1979, Ser. No. 104,926
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 18, 1978, 53-154881
Int. C1.3 B65B 27/04
U.S. a. 53—48
2Qainis
1. A flexible cementitious overlayer for installation over the
unsealed surface of a base material comprising, in combination:
a hardened underlayer of adhesive of a kind to which a
combination of Portland cement and polymeric resin will
adhere and which has the quality of penetrating and bond-
ing to unsealed base material surfaces;
a layer of hardened cementitious material comprising a
mixture of polymeric resins and hydrolyzed Portland
cement overlying and bonded to said underlayer of adhe-
sive; and
an overlayer of epoxy adhesive paint overlying said layer of
hardened cementitious material.
2. The invention defined in claim 1 which further comprises
a layer of metal screening embedded in said layer of hardened
cementitious material.
3. The invention defined in claim 2 which further comprises
fastening means in the form of mechanical fasteners extending
through said metal screening and through said adhesive under-
1. An apparatus for the attachment of a carrier sheet to
containers wherein the carrier sheet containing openings of a
diameter smaller than the diameter at the peripheral edges of
the containers and permitting insertion therethrough of the
containers is attached below the peripheral edges of the con-
tainers by causing the circumferential p)ortions surrounding the
openings in the carrier sheet to be forcibly expanded out-
wardly to be passed over the peripheral edges, which appara-
layer for mechanically fastening said metal screening to a base tus comprises: vertical funnel members for carrying said car-
material.
4,392,336
DRYWALL CONSTRUCTION AND ARTICLE OF
MANUFACTURE THEREFOR
Jack L. Ganssle, 29567 Fountainwood, Agoura Hills, Calif.
91301
FUed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,611
Int. Cl.^ E04B 2/00
U.S. a. 52—417 1 Claim
rier sheet each having an upper portion of a diameter smaller
than the diameter of the openings in the carrier sheet and a
funnel-shaped portion having an intermediate portion of a
diameter substantially equal to the diameter of the openings
and a lower large diameter leading end portion engageable
with the peripheral edge of the container positioned below the
funnel, each of the funnel members containing slits cut in the
axial direction upwardly from the lower end of the large diam-
eter portion thereof to permit the large diameter portion to be
contracted in the radial directions; sleeve members each hav-
ing an upper end and a lower edge and containing an inner
space large enough to embrace therein the funnel member
wholly and slits cut in the axial direction in the wall defining
the inner space upwardly from said edge thereof to divide the
wall and enable said edge of the opening to be expanded in the
radial directions over said funnel leading end portion thereby
pushing said carrier sheet over the containers, the edge of the
opening in a normal condition having a diameter smaller than
the largest diameter of the large diameter portion of the funnel
member and contracting members each disposed concenrtri-
cally between the funnel member and the sleeve member,
1. An article of manufacture, for use in molding wallboard slidably mounted relative to both the aforementioned mem-
panels between studs, which comprises: an elongated substan- bers, so that the leading end thereof is moved into contact with
tially rigid unitary strap member having elongated end por- the funnel-shaped portion of the funnel member and, through
tions which are substantially co-planar with respect to each the medium of the funnel-shaped portion, contract the leading
other, an elongated recessed portion centrally located between end of the funnel member to a diameter smaller than the diame-
said end portions, said elongated co-planar end portions ex- ter of the opening in the carrier sheet to permit mounting of
tending inwardly of said studs for a substantial distance and said carrier sheet on the funnel; a bottom plate member which
said elongated recessed portion therebetween extending for a stabilizes the apparatus and supports the containers to be pack-
distance of about 5-9 inches in length, and substantially less aged, said sleeve members being fastened at their upper ends to
than the distance between studs, predrilled openings defined a sleeve support member positioned above the bottom plate
within the ends of each of said elongated co-planar end por- member, the funnel members pass through said sleeve support
July 12. 1983
f
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
467
member at an end portion opposite said leading end thereof
and penetrate the sleeve members to the portions thereof hav-
ing a diameter substantially equal to the diameter of the open-
ings in the carrier sheet, the funnel members and the sleeve
members are interposed to stop means each adapted to enable
the funnel member to be slid in the axial direction only up-
wardly from the position which the funnel member has
reached in the penetration of the sleeve member, the contract-
ing members pass through the sleeve support member and are
fastened to an actuating member disposed at a prescribed dis-
tance from the sleeve support member, and the actuating mem-
ber is supported in a manner slideable in the direction of the
sleeve support member; the actuating member to which the
contracting members are fastened being separated by the pre-
scribed distance from the sleeve support means through the
medium of intervening spring means; a member for holding the
sleeve support member at a height such that the sleeves sup-
ported by the sleeve support member face downwardly toward
the bottom plate member and the leading ends of the funnel
members engage with the peripheral edges of containers, hinge
means allowing the sleeve support member to rotate upwardly
away from the bottom plate member and relative to the hold-
ing member, a stop member to prevent the sleeve support
member from rotating in the downward direction, energizing
means for supporting the holding member at its original posi-
tion corresponding to the aforementioned height at which the
sleeve support member is supported and, after the holding
member has been vertically lowered, relative to the bottom
plate member, from the original position in conjunction with
the sleeve support member, imparting to the holding member
an energizing force capable of returning the holding member
to the original position, means actuated, upon an upward rota-
tion of the sleeve support member, to come into engagement
with the actuating member having the contracting member
fastened thereto and press the actuating member against the
sleeve support member.
4,392,338
PACKETS AND THE MANUFACTURE THEREOF
Austin L. Fox, London, England, assignor to Molins Limited,
London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 956,159, Oct. 31, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 775,023, Oct. 7, 1977,
abandoned. This application Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,614
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 15, 1976,
10324/76; Nor. 8, 1977, 46491/77
Int. a.3 B65B 11/48; B65D 5/66. 85/10
U.S. a. 53—462 4 Qaims
J^3l»
■?4
— S'
IS
e4-~
22
}i
-n -' r-
!3—
41—^ I
£0
I
a
a
ti
\S"
es
2^
■U
.Ml
1. A method of erecting a one-piece blank made of a single
layer of material of substantially rectangular configuration cut
and scored for folding about contents to form a hinged lid
packet having a lid portion hinged to a body portion;
(a) wherein said blank comprises:
1. a central portion extending from the top to the bottom
of said blank and divided by at least six parallel spaced-
apart transverse foldable scored lines into, consecu-
tively from the top to the bottom of said blank, a panel,
a front wall, a bottom wall and a rear wall for forming
said body portion and a rear wall, a top wall and a front
wall for forming said lid portion, the combined length
of said panel and front wall of said body portion being
substantially the same as the combined length of said
rear walls of said body and lid portions; and
2. an outer portion at each of the left and right sides of said
central portion, each outer portion comprising a side
flap foldably attached to said panel, an outer flap fold-
ably attached to said front wall of said body portion,
said side flap having a top edge facing away from said
outer flap, an inner flap foldably attached to said rear
wall of said body portion, the length of said inner flap of
said body portion being greater than the length of said
outer flap of said body portion, an inner flap foldably
attached to said rear wall of said lid portion and an
outer flap foldably attached to said front wall of said lid
portion, the bottom edge of said inner flap of said lid
portion being coextensive with a straight line coexten-
sive with the foldable scored line between said top wall
and rear wall of said lid portion, and the top edge of said
inner flap of said lid portion being spaced from said
bottom edge thereof, the length of said outer flap of said
lid portion being greater than the length of said inner
flap of said lid portion;
3. the relative dimensions of said inner flap of said lid
portion and said side flap of said body portion of each of
said outer portions being such that the distance of said
top edge of said inner flap of said lid portion from a
straight line coextensive with the foldable scored line
between said rear wall and bottom wall of said body
portion, said distance being measured parallel to the
fold line between said inner flap and said rear wall of
said body portion, is at least as great as the distance of
said top edge of said side flap of said body portion from
a straight line coextensive with the foldable scored line
between said front wall and bottom wall of said body
portion, said distance being measured parallel to the
fold line between said outer flap and said front wall of
said body portion, at corresponding locations along the
entire lengths of said top edge of said inner flap of said
lid portion and said top edge of said side flap of said
body portion;
(b) said method comprising the following steps in the recited
order:
1. forming said rear wall, bottom wall, front wall, panel
and inner flaps of said body portion and said rear wall,
top wall, front wall and inner flaps of said lid portion
about said contents;
2. folding each of said side flaps of said body portion and
securing said side flaps of said body portion to the
respective inner flaps of said body portion with said lid
portion in closed position;
3. then folding each of said outer flaps of said body and lid
portions and securing said outer flaps of said body and
lid portions to the respective inner flaps of said body
and lid portions with said lid portion maintained in
closed position, whereby said top edge of each said side
flap of said body portion and the respective top edge of
said inner flap of said lid portion confront each other
along their entire lengths, and said side flap of said body
portion does not overlap said inner flap of said lid por-
tion, said relative dimensions of said respective inner
flaps of said lid portion and said side flaps of said body
portion assuring that said side flaps of said body portion
do not intervene between and are not secured to said
inner and outer flaps of said lid portion during said
folding and said securing of the resp>ective body and lid
portions.
468
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,339
CROP WINDROWING MACHINE HAVING DOUBLE
WINDROW-FORMING ATTACHMENT
Marc A. Berlivet, and Abel A. J. Guerineau, both of Coex,
France, assignors to Hesston Corporation, Hesston, Kans.
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,814
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 26, 1980, 80 25099
Int. a.3 AOID 57/iO
U.S. a. 56-192 5 Qaims
4,392,340
YARN MONITOR FOR TWO-YARN CABLING OR
TWISTING MACHINE
Aloys Horstmann, Greven; Heinz Eckholt, Miinster, and Rein-
hard Veltel, Everswinkel, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Volkmann GmbH A Co., Krefeid, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,024
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 28,
1979, 2939435
Int. a.3 DOIH 1/24. 13/16
U.S. a. 57—83 8 Qaims
mf>w»»>»»/»ww»>/»»w?^??>fi?/>>.i
1. A machine for harvesting crops comprising:
a mobile frame;
crop severing means carried by said frame at the normally
forward extremity of the latter;
means for coupling said frame to a vehicle in such manner
that the crop severing means is located in laterally offset
relationship to the path of travel of the vehicle;
means for converging the severed crop centrally of the cut
taken by the severing means and for discharging the con-
verged crop rearwardly into a centrally disposed wind-
row behind the frame; and
selectively operable double windrow forming mechanism
carried by the frame,
said mechanism including a transverse conveyor and means
for selectively positioning said conveyor in a location
behind the severing means to intercept the centrally con-
verged and rearwardly discharged crop before the latter
forms a windrow on the ground,
said conveyor having a discharge end disposed for discharg-
ing crop laterally outboard of the cut taken by said sever-
ing means and into the path of travel of said vehicle be-
hind the latter when said conveyor is in its said crop
intercepting location whereby to permit formation of a
second windrow adjacently alongside of a first windrow
prepared during the next preceding pass of the machine
with said conveyor positioned out of its said crop inter-
cepting location,
said severing means being mounted on said frame for move-
ment between a raised, transport position and a lowered,
working position,
said severing means being provided with a fluid pressure
operated power unit for effecting said raising and lower-
ing of the severing means,
said power device for the conveyor being fluid pressure
operated and being coupled in parallel fluid flow relation-
ship with said power unit of the severing means,
said power device further being responsive to a lower pres-
sure force than said j>ower unit whereby to permit raising
of the conveyor out of said crop intercepting location
thereof without raising said severing means when the
power unit and the power device are both pressurized.
1. A method of operating a textile machine comprising the
steps of:
feeding two primary yams under relatively low longitudinal
tension from respective yam supplies to a combining
location;
combining said primary yams at said location;
feeding the combined yams from said location under rela-
tively high longitudinal tension to a takeup station;
continuously monitoring the tension in said combined yams
between said location and said takeup station;
generating an output when the tension in said combined
yams drops from said high tension below a predetermined
level at least equal to said relatively low tension as a result
of breakage of one of said primary yams;
interrupting the feeds of said yams when said output is
generated, said yams being fed and longitudinally ten-
sioned by being wound up on a takeup element at said
takeup station, said yams being combined by being wound
together; and
spinning one of said primary yams about the respective
supply as a balloon upstream of said location, said tension
being monitored by:
passing said combined yams over a roller forming a deflect-
ing element between said location and station,
urging said deflecting element in a direction increasing the
length of the path of. said combined yams between said
location and said station, and
detecting the position of said element to determine the ten-
sion in said combined yams by the release of a member
acting upon said element.
4,392,341
TWISTING MACHINE
Werner Grill, Kempten, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Saurer-AUma GmbH, Kempten, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 18, 1982, Ser. No. 379,413
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 21,
1981, 8115081[U]
Int. C\? DOIH 1/02. 13/04
UJS. a. 57—90 7 Claims
1. In a machine for twisting several filament yam strands
wrapped on spools, including a creel for supporting the spools.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
469
syne
a delivery syistem which includes several feed rollers, a first
thread guide supported along the thread path between the
spools and the delivery system for movement back and forth in
directions parallel to the axes of the feed rollers and having a
guideway for each of the yam strands, thread-guiding means
following the delivery system, a rotatable spindle for support-
ing a winding bobbin, a second thread guide arranged along an
extension of the axis of the spindle and having a respective
guide eyelet
or each yam strand, and a third thread guide
which follows the second thread guide and has an opening
through which all yam strands are guided together, the im-
provement comprising wherein the first thread guide is a first
guide roller which has a circumferential guide groove for each
yarn strand and is freely rotatable about an axis which extends
generally parallel to the feed roller axes, and wherein the
thread-guiding means includes a second guide roller which is
supported for rotational and axial movement with respect to an
axis generally parallel to the feed roller axes and which has a
circumferential guide groove for each yam strand.
controlling the speed of cage rotation responsive to said moni-
toring such that centrifugal force due to rotation of the cage
and feed reels is maintained approximately constant at a
maximum safe value.
4,392,343
FRICTION SPINNING APPARATUS
Alan Parker, 7 Darvel Qose, Breigbtmet, Bolton, Lancashire;
William M. Famhill, 335 Colne Rd., Burnley, Lancashire, and
Douglas O. Clough, 26 Parkwood Dr., Rawtenstall, Rossen-
dale, Lancashire, all of England
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,955
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 8, 1980,
8032417
Int. a.J DOIH 7/882
U.S. a. 57—401 6 Qairas
4,392,342
CABLE STRANDING APPARATUS AND METHOD OF
OPERATING IT
Johan F. R. Meger, Zaandam, Netherlands, assignor to N.K.F.
Groep B.V., R^jswijk, Netherlands
FUed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,430
Oaims priority, application Netherlands, May 14, 1980,
8002786
Int. a.3 D07B 3/06, 7/06
U.S. a. 57—264 11 Claims
1. A method of manufacturing a stranded product, compris-
ing: 1 1
mounting a plurality of feed reels, each containing material
wound thereon, in a feed cage,
rotating the feed cage about an axis,
controlling the speed of the cage rotation,
pulling the material from the feed reels through a stranding
device, and
winding the stranded product onto a take-up reel,
characterized in that said rotating and controlling steps com-
prise:
directing an energy beam past said feed reels such that inter-
mption of the beam by the charge of the material on a feed
reel is a function of the size of the charge;
monitoring the charge on a feed reel by sensing the beam
energy which passes the reel without interruption; and
1. Apparatus for open end spinning of yams comprising two
bodies of rotation each defining a surface and arranged such
that the surfaces lie closely adjacent at a line of closest ap-
proach so as to define between them an elongate throat which
narrows toward the line of closest approach, at least one of the
surfaces being perforated, means defining a slot adjacent said at
least one surface, suction means for drawing air through that
portion of the surface delineated by the slot, a feed duct for
feeding fibres into the throat, the feed duct terminating within
the throat and adjacent the line in an elongate mouth substan-
tially parallel to the line and spaced from the line a distance less
than the radius of curvature of each of the bodies and including
two surfaces each lying along a respective side of the mouth
and arranged closely adjacent to a respective body surface and
each being curved in a direction away from the mouth so as to
follow the curvature of the adjacent portion of body surface
and be separated therefrom by a gap distance of at most 0.5
mm., means for rotating each of the bodies about a respective
axis so as to twist the fibres in the area into a yam, and means
for withdrawing the yam from the area.
470
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,344
CHAIN-LINK CABLE CARRIER
Edmund A. Gordon, deceased, late of Philadelphia, Pa. (by
Alvina A. Gordon, and Emma C. Cnudde Administratrices),
and by John Yaecker, Administrator, North Wales,, Pa.,
assignors to Central Safety Equipment Company, Burlington,
N.J.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,080
Int. a.3 F16G 13/16
U.S. a. 59—78.1 7 Oaims
"1,
1. A chain-link type of cable carrier suitable for holding
electrical cables, wires, hoses or the like, comprising:
a plurality of links pivotally connected to each other end-to-
end in a series chain;
each of said links being of integral tubular plastic construc-
tion, having a substantially rectangular cross-section at
least adjacent its opposite ends to form a box having open
ends, and comprising pivot means adjacent each of said
opposite ends thereof for providing pivotal connection of
each link to immediately adjacent links in said chain;
one end of each of said links being narrower than its other
wider end and the top and bottom of each link having
recesses therein adjacent said other end for receiving
between its side walls said narrower end of the adjacent
link;
said pivot means of each said link being positioned adjacent
but inboard of said opposite end thereof, the pivot axes of
said pivot means extending at right angles to said side
walls so that when said each link is pivoted about one of
its pivot axes in one sense with respect to the immediately
adjacent link into which it extends, its pivoting is limited
by abutment of the top of said narrower end of each said
link against the recessed top of the adjacent link, with the
top surfaces of said each link and said adjacent link aligned
with each other;
said pivot means comprising stop means for limiting pivoting
of said each link with respect to said immediately adjacent
link in the opposite sense at a predetermined angular
position to define the minumum permitted radius of curva-
ture of said carrier along its longitudinal axis; and
said links when pivoted toward said predetermined angular
position producing an opening between the top surfaces of
adjacent links.
4,392,345
BYPASS CONTROL SYSTEM
Carl H. Geary, Jr., Greensburg, Pa., assignor to Elliott Turbo-
machinery Co., Inc., Jeannette, Pa.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,942
Int. a.^ F02G i/OO: B65D 75/00: BOIJ H/U
U.S. a. 60—39.02 21 Claims
1. A bypass control system for protecting a power recovery
expander comprising:
a power recovery expander;
a flrst fluid path for supplying combustion gas which is
subject to containing large amounts of particulates to said
expander as a motive fluid;
first valve means for controlling the flow of gas in said flrst
fluid path;
a second fluid path connected to said flrst fluid path for
bypassing said expander;
second valve means for controlling the flow of gas in said
second fluid path;
means for determining the particulate concentration in said
Throttle w*lv£
HYDRAULIC VAlvC
ACTUATOR
combustion gas in said first fluid path and for generating a
signal indicative thereof; and
means for fully opening said second valve means in response
to said signal when said signal represents a predetermined
particulate level so as to prevent said particulates from
passing through said expander.
4,392,346
COGENERATION PROCESS USING AUGMENTED
BRAYTON CYCLE
Allen H. Fink, Des Plaines, 111., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 171,225, Jul. 22, 1980, Pat. No.
4,338,788. This application Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 234,070
Int. a.3 F02C 6/00
U.S. a. 60—39.04 9 Qaims
.ZL
f9'tOI9um Rtfisttf-'
'X
'r^
"-N
5^1
- r'
^
Compititta 4''
^' r^
yfifi
/"
£1
•^
r"
^
.JlL.
^^ — ^:,
Co% G9»9rat<''$ Tm^.mt
1. A power producing cycle which comprised the steps of:
(a) heating a feed air stream having a pressure above IS psig
and a temperature above 65° C. by indirect heat exchange
against at least a portion of a hereinafter characterized
turbine effluent stream and thereby heating the feed air
stream to a temperature above 370° C;
(b) admixing the feed air stream and a high temperature gas
stream and forming a power gas stream;
(c) heating a second air stream in a combustion zone;
(d) admixing said second air stream after heating with said
high temperature gas stream prior to passage into a herein-
after characterized turbine;
(e) depressurizing the power gas stream in a turbine and
thereby producing the turbine effluent stream; and
(0 cooling the turbine effluent stream by indirect heat ex-
change against the feed air stream of step (a).
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
471
4,392,347
GAS TURBINE ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Everett W. Shows, Lake Orion, Mich., assignor to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,524
Int. Q\? F02C i/26, 9/20
U.S. a. 60—39.27 3 Qaims
openings therein that extend from said flat surface outwardly
to ducts, said openings in said rocket nozzle flange and said
1. In a gas turbine engine having an operating range between
idle and full power and including a combustor, a compressor
adapted to supply pressurized air at a variable compressor
discharge pressure proportional to engine power to said com-
bustor for fuel combustion within said combustor, a fuel supply
apparatus operative to supply a metered quantity of powdered
combustible fuel, and nozzle means at said combustor for
dispersing a mixture of said powdered fuel and air into said
combustor for combustion therein, the improvement compris-
ing, an air pump driven independently of said compressor
having an inlet and a discharge wherefrom a stream of air is
provided at a pump discharge pressure proportional to pump
inlet flow area, means connecting said pump discharge to said
nozzle means so that said airstream is dispersed by said nozzle
means into said combustor, means connecting said fuel supply
apparatus to said pump discharge so that said metered quantity
of powdered fuel is entrained in said airstream at said pump
discharge pressure and delivered thereby to said nozzle means
for dispersal into said combustor, inlet restricting valve means
at said pump inlet operative to restrict pump inlet flow area
thereby to control said pump discharge pressure, and control
means connected to said valve means responsive to said com-
pressor discharge pressure and to said pump discharge pressure
to operate said Valve means so that said pump discharge pres-
sure varies directly with said compressor discharge pressure
and is maintained in excess of said compressor discharge pres-
sure by a constant preselected amount in at least a portion of
the operating range of said gas turbine engine.
passages in said motor flange being in communication with
each other.
4,392,349
SPACED APART WAVE GENERATOR FLOAT ARRAY
Glenn E. Hagen, 13342 Dwyer Blvd., New Orleans, La. 70129
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 169,509
Int. a.3 P03B 13/12
U.S. a. 60—500 2 Qaims
4,392,348
DEVICE FOR BLEEDING MOTOR GASES THRU
MOTOR POLE PIECE
Jerry J. Wesson, Winter Park, Fla., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,138
Int. Q.3 F02K 9/80
U.S. Q. 60—229 6 Qaims
1. A rocket motor case having a motor flange connected at
one end of the rocket case and said flange having a flat surface
means with a multiplicity of passages opening from the interior
of said rocket motor case through said flat surface means, a
rocket nozzle flange having a flat surface and means securing
said rocket nozzle flange flat surface to said motor flange flat
• surface means, said rocket nozzle flange having a plurality of
1. An apparatus floating in a fluid that exhibits wave motion,
comprising:
a plurality of adjoining Hagen arrays;
each of said Hagen arrays consisting of a plurality of floating
elements, each of said elements being sized to be maxi-
mally responsive to a different wave length of said wave
motion;
each element of said array being separated from the same
sized element of an adjoining array by approximately
one-half the specific wave length to which said elements
are sized to be maximally responsive.
4,392,350
STIRLING ENGINE POWER CONTROL AND MOTION
CONVERSION MECHANISM
David T. Marks, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to Mechanical
Technology Incorporation, Latham, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,665
Int. Q.3 F02G 1/06
U.S. Q. 60—518 9 Qaims
1. A power control/motion conversion device for a Stirling
engine having a plurality of pistons for moving a working gas
cyclically through a closed working space containing a heater,
regenerator and cooler which creates a pressure wave in the
gas in the working space, and for moving under the influence
of the pressure wave to produce reciprocating output power,
the reciprocating output power being converted hereby to
rotary output power of a shaft mounted in the engine crank-
case on an axis lying perpendicular to the axes of the pistons.
472
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
said power control comprising a plurality of control mecha-
nisms, each including:
a power lever having a cam follower on one end and a
bearing surface against which the piston operatively bears;
a cam mounted on said shaft in contact with said cam fol-
lower;
a pivot at the other end of said power lever for pivoully
mounting said lever in said crankcase to swing in a plane
perpendicular to said shaft and containing said piston axis;
and
means for moving said pivot in said plane laterally with
respect to said shaft to change the lever arm between said
can follower and the point at which said piston opera-
tively bears on said lever bearing surface, and thereby
change the stroke of said piston and the force of said cam
follower on said cam.
4,392,351
MULTI-CYLINDER STIRLING ENGINE
George J. Doundoulakis, 2498 Kayron La., North Bellmore,
N.Y. 11710
Filed Feb. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 124,518
Int. a.5 F02G 1/04
XJJS. a. 60—526 6 Claims
working fluid at the working temperature and reducing
the temperature thereof to produce work;
a bidirectional regenerator connected to an output of said
rotary expansion chamber means for carrying the working
fluid in a flrst path and further reducing the temperature
thereof;
a low temperature heat exchanger connected to said regen-
erator for receiving the working fluid and still further
reducing the temperature thereof;
rotary compressor chamber means connected to said low
temperature heat exchanger for receiving the working
fluid from said low temperature heat exchanger and com-
pressing it to a working pressure, said rotary compressor
chamber means having an output connected to said regen-
erator;
said regenerator receiving the working fluid from said com-
pressor means output and carrying it in a second path in
counter current flow relationship with said first path to
heat the working fluid from said compressor means and
cool the working fluid from said rotary expansion cham-
ber means;
said high temperature heat exchanger connected to said
regenerator for receiving the heated working fluid;
said rotary expansion chamber means being connected to
said rotary compressor chamber means, said rotary expan-
sion chamber means and said rotary compressor chamber
means having a common rotating shaft on which the work
produced is applied and,
said regenerator comprising an insulating housing, a heat
conductive dividing wall extending in said insulating
housing dividing said housing into first and second paral-
lel passages, and a plurality of heat conducting fins extend-
ing normally from said dividing wall forming said first and
said second parallel passages, the working fluid moving in
said first passage in said first path and in said second
passage in said second path.
4,392,352
APPARATUS FOR REGULATING TURBOCHARGERS
AND INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES ASSOCIATED
THEREWITH
Gerhard Stumpp, Stuttgart, and Wolf Wessel, Oberriexingen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 40,795, May 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,758
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 27,
1978, 2823255
Int. a.J F02B 37/12
U.S. a. 60—602 2 Claims
-"-:^-,
1. A multi-cylinder Stirling cycle engine comprising:
heater means for heating a working fluid to a working tem-
perature;
a high temperature heat exchanger associated with said
heater means for carrying the working fluid past said
heater means to bring the working fluid to the working
temperature;
rotary expansion chamber means having an input connected
to said high temperature heat exchanger for receiving the
1. A regulator and anti-overload apparatus for turbochargers
for use with an internal combustion engine comprising an air
intake manifold, an exhaust tube, an exhaust turbocharger, said
turbocharger including a turbine wheel and a compressor
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
473
element, said turbine wheel being disposed in said exhaust tube
of said engine and said compressor element of said turbo-
charger being disposed in said intake manifold for delivering
combustion air to the engine at increased pressure, an exhaust
bypass line that bypasses said turbocharger; said anti-overload
apparatus further including an exhaust gas flow control means
which in accordance with turbocharger-engine parameters
controls flow of partial quantities of exhaust gas through said
exhaust bypass line, an air flow rate meter which produces an
output value dependent on the flow of air through the air
intake manifold, an rpm meter which produces an output value
dependent on the rpm of said internal combustion engine, a
curve generator to which said output value of said rpm meter
is delivered, said curve generator generating a set-point air
quantity (Q»//) which corresponds to the particular engine rpm
at that time, an electronic regulator having an input which
input is connected to the output of said curve generator which
delivers said generated set-point air quantity thereto and to the
output of said air flow rate meter producing a control signal
corresponding to a deviation of the output value of said air
flow rate meter from said set-point, said electronic regulator
producing an output which is connected to said exhaust gas
flow control means for controlling partial quantities of exhaust
gas through said exhaust bypass line.
4,392,354
CONSTANT PRESSURE AIR STORAGE INSTALLATION
WITH WATER SUPPLY FOR GAS TURBINE POWER
PLANTS
Alfred Schwarzenbach, Wettingen, Switzerland, assignor to
BBC Brown, Boveri A Company Limited, Baden, Switzerland
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,097
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 5, 1979,
10786/79
Int. a.3 P02C 9/14
U.S. a. 60—727 2 Qaims
4,392,353
METHOD OF RECOVERING EXHAUST GAS FROM
BOILER IN ELECTRICAL POWER GENERATING
DEVICE USING COMBUSTIBLE MATERIAL AS FUEL
AND APPARATUS FOR PERFORMING SUCH METHOD
Kyoichi Shibuya, Matsudo, and Tomomi Ihara, Narashino, both
of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Semento Kabushiki Kaisha,
Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP81/00028, § 371 Date Oct. 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 30, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02257, PCT Pub.
Date Aug. 20, 1981
PCT Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 308,531
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 15, 1980, 55-016535
Int. CI.3 POIK 15/00; F27B 15/00
U.S. a. 60—657 8 Qaims
1. A constant pressure air storage installation having a water
supply for gas turbine power plants containing a gas turbine,
comprising:
a subterranean cavern;
an air compressor;
an electric motor for driving the air compressor indepen-
dently of the gas turbine;
said subterranean cavern serving for the storage of com-
pressed air delivered by the air compressor;
connection lines extending between the cavern and the air
compressor and the gas turbine;
a compensation basin;
a riser tube connecting the compensation basin with the
cavern; and
means for regulating the throughflow resistance within the
riser tube in dependency upon a course as function of time
of a pressure drop arising within the cavern, in order to
safeguard against unintentional outflow of water out of
the cavern and through the riser tube, to thereby prevent
blow-out of water from the cavern due to the action of the
compressed air in the cavern.
1. Apparatus for recovering exhaust gas which comprises a
powder raw material sintering device and a thermal electric
power generating device, said sintering device comprising a
preheat section, a calcining section and a cooling section, said
electric power generating device comprising a boiler, a heat
exchange water pipe passing through said boiler, a turbine and
an electric power generator, and the exhaust gas outlet of said
boiler being connected to said preheat section of said sintering
device through an exhaust gas conduit.
4,392,355
COMBUSTION LINER
Albert J. Verdouw, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to General Mo-
tors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed No?. 13, 1%9, Ser. No. 876,254
Int. a.' F23R 3/00
U.S. a. 60—752 3 Qaims
1. A combustion liner for a gas turbine engine combustion
chamber or the like, the liner being of a type dividing an air
space, from which combustion air is supplied, from a combus-
tion space in which air and combustion products flow longitu-
dinally of the liner to a combustion products outlet, the liner
including a wall dividing the air space from the combustion
space: the wall comprising, in combination, a forward wall
section and a rearward wall section; the rearward wall section
including a portion overlapping and outwardly spaced from
the forward wall section, the forward wall section including a
poriion overlapping and inwardly spaced from the rearward
wall section, the said portions defining between them an inlet
474
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
from the air space to the combustion space for cooling air to
flow along the rearward wall section for film cooling of the
rearward wall section; the said wall portions defining combus-
tion air holes extending through the said wall portions for flow
= J
transverse to the cooling air flow; barrier means blocking the
cooli;ig air inlet downstream of the combustion air holes; and
auxiliary co^'.ing air inlets defined by and extending through
the rearward wall section into the cooling air inlet immediately
downstream of the barrier means.
4,392,356
MAGNETIC HEAT PUMPING
Gerald V. Brown, Lakewood, Ohio, assignor to The United
States of America as represetited by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 829,319, Aug. 31, 1977, abandoned.
This application Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,868
Int. a.J F25B 21/02
U.S. a. 62—3 7 Qaims
4,392,357
METHOD AND MEANS CONTROLLING DEFROST
CYCLES OF A COOLING UNIT
Brian D. Kinsey, and Steven W. Smock, both of Indianapolis,
Ind., assignors to Emhart Industries, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,870
Int. a.J F25D 21/06
U.S. a. 62—153 7 Claims
/
/
1. A control system for controlling defrost cycles of a cool-
ing unit comprising:
(a) defrost means,
(b) cam means, constant speed drive means coupled to said
cam means, and switch means responsive to said cam
means controlling electrical current to said defrost means,
and
(c) monitoring means coupled to said cam means and respon-
sive to an opening and closing of a door of said cooling
unit to intermittently advance said cam means so as to
shorien time lengths between defrost cycles comprising a
ratchet having a section void of teeth to prevent advance-
ment of the ratchet during a defrost mode of operation,
means coupling said ratchet to said cam means, and a pawl
engaging said door and said ratchet to advance same in
response to an opening of said door.
4,392,358
APPARATUS AND METHOD OF DETECHNG FAILURE
IN A REFRIGERATOR DEFROST SYSTEM
Frederick E. Hicks, Louisville, Ky., assignor to General Electric
Company, Louisville, Ky.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,302
Int. a.3 F25D 21/06
U.S. a. 62—155 6 Qaims
1. A magnetic heat pump comprising:
a working component which is essentially a single ferromag-
netic or ferrimagnetic material selected from the group
consisting of rare earth elements and intermetallic com-
pounds and alloys containing rare earth elements;
means for subjecting said component successively to a mag-
netic field to first, second, third and fourth strengths, and
then back to said first strength; and,
means for changing said element successively from a first to
a second temperature, then to a third temperature; then to
a fourth temperature; and then back to said first tempera-
ture, said first, second, third and fourth temperatures
coinciding with said first, second, third and fourth
strengths of said magnetic field.
1. The method of detecting defrost circuit failure in a refrig-
erating system having a refrigerating mode and a defrosting
mode including an evaporator with an electric resistance
heater in heat transfer relationship with the evaporator com-
prising:
energizing the heater periodically to initiate the defrost
mode by actuating a normally open defrost initiation
switch responsive to a timer,
de-energizing the heater responsive to a normally closed
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
475
defrost terminating thermostat switch opening at a prede-
termined elevated temperature,
periodically sensing for voltage across the normally open
defrost initiation switch and generating a signal when
voltage in the heater circuit is interrupted,
storing the multiple voltage signals generated in a memory
bank over a predetermined period of time,
clearing the memory bank each time the defrost terminating
thermostat switch closes, and
actuating an alarm when the voltage in the heater circuit is
interrupted for the predetermined period of time.
1 1 4,392,359
DIRECT EXPANSION SOLAR COLLECTOR-HEAT
PUMP SYSTEM
James L. FVanklin, Richland, Wash., assignor to Sigma Re-
search, Inc., Richland, Wash.
Continuation of Ser. No. 857,569, Dec. 5, 1977, abandoned. This
application Feb. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 120,227
Int. a.3 F25B 27/00. 13/00
U.S. a. 62—235.1 1 Qaim
107
109.
1. A combined solar collector-heat pump heating system
comprising at least one metallic surface member lying in a
substantially vertical plane and secured to the exterior wall of
a building, said metallic surface member comprising a plurality
of long narrow parallel metal plates exposed directly to the
ambient atmosphere and positioned to directly receive solar
radiation, each plate comprising a main surface member ex-
tending horizontally, a tube extending longitudinally of said
main surface member, in direct heat exchange relation there-
with, a first flange extending longitudinally along a first edge
of said main surface member and making an acute angle with
the rear face of said main surface member, a second flange
extending longitudinally along a second edge of said main
surface member and extending rearwardly therefrom, and a
footpiece extending from the rear edge of said second flange
and lying substantially in a common vertical plane with said
first flange, said footpiece being bent forwardly to form a
U-shaped hook member, the footpiece of each plate being
secured to the exterior wall of said building and the first flange
of one plate being gripped in the hook member of an adjacent
plate, said plates forming the exterior siding of said building,
said tubes being joined together so as to form a conduit means,
a compressor, an inlet line connecting a first end of said con-
duit means with the suction side of said compressor, a con-
denser means for extracting heat from said condenser, an outlet
line connecting the high pressure side of said compressor with
a first end of said condenser, a return line connecting a second
end of said condenser with a second end of said conduit means,
a restriction means in said return line, and a working fluid
filling said conduit means, inlet line, compressor, outlet line,
condenser, and return line, said working fluid having a boiling
point such that it is vaporized in said conduit means and con-
densed in said condenser.
4,392,360
STRIP CURTAIN FOR DISPLAY TYPE
REFRIGERATORS
Kenneth N. Gidge, and Henry J. Richard, both of Nashua, N.H.,
assignors to BSL Corporation, Nashua, N.H.
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,462
Int. C\J A47F 3/04
U.S. a. 62—249 7 Qaims
1. A closure for disposition across the opening of a display
refrigerator, comprising:
a plurality of strips extending over said opening;
first fastening means attached to at least certain of the strips
on a given surface thereof for mounting the strips in prox-
imity to the opening;
second fastening means attached to the refrigerator in prox-
imity to an edge of the opening for reciprocally mating
with and engaging the first fastening means on at least
certain of the strips to releasably mount at least certain of
the strips directly to the refrigerator in a substantially
sidewise adjacent relationship to at least partially cover
the opening; and
third fastening means attached to at least certain of the strips
on a second given surface different from said first given
surface for reciprocally mating with and engaging said
first fastening means of an adjacent strip to releasably
mount said strips together in a substantially superimposed
stacked relationship to at least temporarily uncover at
least a portion of the opening, thereby to allow at least
certain of the strips to be attached to outer faces of certain
other strips to facilitate loading and unloading of the
refrigerator while maintaining the strips in locations con-
venient to the opening for rapid assembly and disassembly
of the closure.
4,392^61
SELF-CONTAINED ICE CREAM APPARATUS
Alfredo Cavalli, Via Galileo Galilei 9, Pessano Con Bornago
(Milano), Italy
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,874
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 30, 1980, 22480 A/80;
Jul. 10, 1980, 23366 A/80; Dec. 2, 1980, 26354 A/80; Jan. 19,
1981. 19198 A/81
Int. Q.' A23G 9/00
U.S. Q. 62—343 45 Qaims
1. A self contained apparatus for making an ice cream type
mixture from a plurality of ingredients therefor comprising a
mixing chamber having a base wall and a side wall with respect
thereto, refrigeration means for controllably cooling the inte-
rior of said chamber, blade means rotatably mountable in said
mixing chamber for rotation about an axis of said chamber, and
means for controll;«bly rotatably driving said blade means
within said chamber about said axis, said blade means compris-
ing means for scraping said side and base walls for forcing said
ingredients from said side wall toward said axis and upwardly
476
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
away from said base wall and for forcing said ingredients from
said axis toward said side wall and downwardly toward said
base wall as said blade means rotates about said axis for stirring
and intermixing said ice cream ingredients throughout said
chamber interior, said blade means being configured and dis-
4^2,363
SLIDE FASTENER STRINGER WITH VENT HOLES
Yoshio Matsuda, Nyuzen, Japan, assignor to Yoshida Kogyo K.
K., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,309
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 27, 1979, 54-
163930[U]
Int a.3 D04B 23/08
U.S. a. 66—193 6 Claims
posed for substantially continually transporting the warmer
portions of the mixture toward the colder areas thereof and the
colder portions of the mixture toward the warmer areas
thereof during the rotation of said blade means for providing a
substantially uniform temperature gradient for substantially the
entire resultant ice cream mixture.
4,392,362
MICRO MINIATURE REFRIGERATORS
William A. Little, Palo Alto, Calif., assignor to The Board of
Trustees of the Leiand Stanford Junior University, Stanford,
Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 23,245, Mar. 23, 1979,
abandoned. This application May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,688
Int. C\? F25B 19/00
U.S. a. 62—514 R 26 Claims
1. A venting slide fastener stringer comprising:
(a) a warp-knit stringer tape including a pair of longitudinal
warp-knit webs spaced transversely from each other, with
a longitudinal wale-free region therebetween, and having
a pair of marginal wales, respectively, confronting each
other across said wale-free region, and a connecting
thread having portions laid only in said marginal wales
and substantially parallel adjacent portions all spaced
longitudinally of and extending transversely across said
wale-free region in a direction substantially perpendicular
to said marginal wales, thereby defming a plurality of
substantially rectangular vent holes longitudinally along
said wale-free region, each of said webs comprising foun-
dation threads constituting a plurality of wales juxtaposed
across said each web, said marginal wales being composed
of threads that are more rigid than said foundation
threads; and
(b) a row of coupling elements mounted on one of said webs
remotely from said wale-free region.
4,392,364
FLAT BED KNITTING MACHINE
Roger F. N. Curry, 46, Oeveland Sq., London, W.2, England
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,603
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 13, ISWO,
8008567
Int. a.3 D04B 7/00
U.S. a. 66—60 H 8 Qaims
1. A compact refrigerator comprising a plurality of plate or
platelike members all of materials having substantially the same
coefficient of thermal expansion, means bonding said members
together in sealed pressure-tight surface contact into a lami-
nated structure and means forming in said structure a low-tem-
perature chamber connected with input and output fluid ports
by respective supply and return fluid passages, said supply
passage being adapted for conducting incoming highly com-
pressed gas and including a capillary or porous section leading
into the cooling chamber whereby the incoming high-pressure
gas is allowed to expand and reduce in temperature before
entering said chamber, and said return passage having a section
extending substantially coextensively in heat exchange relation
adjacent at least part of said supply passage, and means
whereby said chamber may be in heat exchange contact with a
device to be cooled.
1. A flat bed knitting machine comprising a flat elongate bed
on which is retained a plurality of parallel, latchable, needles
equally spaced along the length of the bed and each movable
relative to the bed in a direction lengthwise of the needles and
transverse of the bed length, a carriage slidably mounted on
the bed for movement transversely of the needles, and a nee-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
477
die-engaging cam plate releasably located in a recess in an
upper surface of the carriage and retained in the recess, the
carriage having a handle gripped by the user of the machine to
transverse the carriage back and forth along the length of the
bed.
4,392,365
APPARATUS FOR TREATING TEXTILE MATERIAL FOR
CONTINUOUS LENGTH
Mitsuyasu Miyamoto, Itami; Osamu Ishimani, Matsubara, and
Nobuyoshi Fukube, Takatsuki, all of Japan, assignors to
Hisaka Works, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 213,615, Dec. 5, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 84,072, Oct. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,320
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 18, 1978, 53-127265;
Feb. 24, 1979, 54-23235
Int. a.3 D06B 3/28 -^
U.S. CI. 68—19 8 Oaims
1. An apparatus for treating a textile material in a continuous
loop form, comprising a circular treating passageway com-
prised of a laterally elongated bath for allowing transient resi-
dence of the textile material while transferring the textile mate-
rial in a zigzag form in a treating liquor, the level of said treat-
ing liquor being kept below half of the depth of the residence
bath, a section for jetting the treating liquor connected to an
outlet portion of the residence bath, and a passageway located
generally below the bath for transferring the textile material
along with a rapid flow of the treating liquid and having an
outlet end connected to an inlet portion of the bath and an inlet
end connected to an outlet portion of the treating liquor jetting
section, at least one port for intaking the treating liquor pro-
vided in the bath, a suction pipe communicating with the port,
a pump connected to the suction pipe for discharging treating
hquor to the treating liquor jetting section and a heat ex-
changer downstream of the pump, characterized in that the
residence bath is inclined so as to gradually increase the depth
of the treating liquor in the advancing direction of the textile
material, a baffle plate provided at the inlet portion of the bath
above the level of the treating liquor at a prescribed interval of
distance from the outlet end of the transfer passageway dis-
posed so that the textile material strikes against the baffle plate
above the level of the treating liquor in the bath, and a perfo-
rated plate is provided, with an inclination, below the baffle
plate and on to which the textile material is deflected by the
baffle plate for smooth advancement of the textile material.
— 4,392,366
FLOW CONTROLLER
Thomas E. Godfrey, Moore, S.C, assignor to Milliken Research
Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
I j FUed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,410
' ' Int. a.3 D06B 1/02
U.S. a. 68—205 R 11 Qaims
1. Apparatus for applying non-Newtonian fluids moving
material comprising: means for conveying the material in a
pre-determined path of travel, liquid application means
mounted above the path of travel of the material having a row
of outlets positioned each having a discharge axis to discharge
a corresponding row of generally parallel streams downwardly
toward the path of travel of the material, manifold means
supplying non-Newtonian fluid under pressure to said row of
outlets, means to supply non-Newtonian fluid to said manifold
means, fluid deflecting means having discharge axes positioned
on one side of said row of outlets so that discharge axes of said
fluid deflecting means intersect the discharge axes of the out-
lets for selectively deflecting the streams of liquid from said
outlets away from the path of travel of the material, and a
liquid collection chamber positioned on the other side of the
discharge axes of the row of outlets from said deflecting means,
said liquid collection chamber having an opening extending
along the row of outlets for receiving the deflected liquid
streams to prevent their contact with the moving material,
control means operably associated with said means to supply
non-Newtonian fluid to control the flow of non-Newtonian
fluid from said manifold means and flow rate sensing means
operably associated with said manifold means to sense the
pressure of the fluid being supplied to said outlets to automati-
cally control the action of said control means to control the
fluid flow rate from said outlets.
4,392,367
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR THE ROLLING OF
STRIP METAL
Wilfried Bald, Hilchenbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jul. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 167,015
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 10,
1979, 2927769
Int. 0.3 B21B 37/10. 27/06
U.S. O. 72—12 13 Claims
0C-. BCNC LOSTqOl
a, I AOll UNO ..ONTaOL
1. A method of operating a plane rolling line comprising a
multiplicity of cold rolling stands, each having a pair of work-
ing rolls defining a gap, said gap being traversed by a strip of
steel or nonferrous metal with said strip passmg through a
478
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
penultimate stand and a last stand in succession prior to emerg-
ing from said line, the rolls of each stand being cooled by
respective arrays of nozzles training coolant on the surfaces of
said rolls, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) monitoring deviations from planarity of said strip at a
location downstream of said last stand in the direction of
movement of said strip through said line and across said
strip, said deviations having a maximum value;
(b) proportionally controlling coolant flow through nozzles
of said last stand exclusively in response to measured
planarity deviation values up to a threshold planarity
deviation less than said maximum deviation in a sense
tending to reduce the measured deviations; and
(c) additionally controlling the nozzles of at least said penul-
timate stand in response to the measured deviation values
only upon the measured deviation values exceeding said
threshold, said threshold planarity deviation correspond-
ing to substantially 30% of said maximum value, the con-
trol of the flow of coolant being effected by directing
coolant only along the upstream side on the surface of the
rolls of the last stand and by directing coolant on both the
upstream and downstream sides of the rolls of the other
stands.
6. In a cold-rolling line for the cold reduction of steel or
nonferrous metal strip, wherein said strip is passed in succes-
sion between working rolls of a multiplicity of rolling stands
and respective arrays of nozzles at each of said stands train
coolant onto surfaces of the respective rolls, said strip passing
through a penultimate stand and a last stand prior to emer-
gence from said line, the improvement comprising:
(a) means for monitoring the planarity of said strip down-
stream of said last stand in the direction of movement of
said strip for producing signals representing deviations
from planarity at locations across said strip;
(b) means responsive to said signals for controlling the noz-
zles of said last stand exclusively upon the detection of
planarity deviations up to a threshold value of substan-
tially 30% of the maximum deviation of planarity; and
(c) means automatically responsive to said signals for addi-
tionally controlling the nozzles of said penultimate stand
upon the measured planarity deviation exceeding said
threshold value, the means responsive to said signals being
constructed and arranged to conirolledly cool the rolls of
said penultimate and last stands so as to reduce the mea-
sured deviation, said means responsive to said signals
including a proportional controller, said nozzles being
provided only on the upstream side of said last but.on both
the upstream and the downstream sides of the other stands
of said line.
teristic of an electrical control current fed to said pressure
regulating means, said apparatus being characterized by:
(A) a plurality of elongated, laterally spaced apart position
conductors, one for each of a plurality of positions of said
component, all extending substantially in one direction;
(B) a plurality of elongated, laterally spaced apart pressure
value conductors, one for each of a plurality of magni-
tudes of said pressure and each extending transversely to
all of said position conductors but out of contact with
them to be electrically connectable to any selected one of
said position conductors by means of a readily disconnect-
able connector;
(C) input current means normally connected with all of said
pressure value conductors for feeding an input current to
all of them that has a magnitude for each of them which is
different from that of the input current fed to the others
and which, for each, corresponds to a unique magnitude
of said pressure;
4,392,368
ARRANGEMENT FOR PRESSES
Hans Folkesson, Trollhattan, and Ulf Uberg, Gothenburg, both
of Sweden, assignors to Saab-Scania Aktiebolag, Linkoping,
Sweden
per No. PCr/SE79/00093, § 371 Date Dec. 17, 1980, § 102(e)
Date No?. 24, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02239, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 30, 1980
per Filed Apr. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 216,998
Int. aj B21D 22/12
U.S. a. 72—63 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for a sheet metal forming press wherein there is
at least one component which moves in .'elation to another part
of the press during a forming operation and is controlled in its
movements by hydraulic fluid under pressure, said apparatus
providing for control of the pressure of said hydraulic fluid in
accordance with a predetermined but readily alterable pro-
gram of relationships between position of said component and
magnitude of said pressure, and said apparatus comprising a
position transducer that produces a position output which
varies in dependence upon the position of said component and
pressure regulating means for changing the magnitude of said
pressure in corresf)ondence with changes in value of a charac-
(D) circuit control means comprising:
(1) a decoder connected with said position transducer to
receive said position output therefrom, and
(2) means under the control of said decoder for establish-
ing each of said position conductors selectably and
alternatively in a state of connection with said pressure
regulating means or in a state of disconnection there-
from and whereby the position conductor for the exist-
ing position of said component is established in one of
said states and all of the others are maintained in the
other of said states; and
(E) electrical circuit means for so connecting all of said
pressure value conductors with said pressure regulating
means as to feed to the latter a control current having a
value that substantially corresponds to the magnitude of
the input current fed to a pressure value conductor con-
nected with the position conductor that is in its said one
state.
4,392,369
DIAGONAL ROLLING OF HOLLOW STOCK -
Detlef Ramdohr, Krefeld; Walter Knauf; Karl-Heinz Brensing,
both of Diisseldorf, and Rolf Kiimmerling, Essen, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Mannesmann Aktiengesell-
schaft, Dtisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,178
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 1,
1980, 3013127
Int. a.3 B21B 19/06
U.S. a. 72—96 3 Claims
1. In a diagonal rolling mill for stretching seamless hollows,
using at least two rolls of overall truncated configuration.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
479
being arranged in a common plane of rolling transverse to an
axis of rolling and having obliquely disposed axes, further
being oriented so that a smaller end of each of the rolls faces
the oncoming hollow, the improvement comprising, in combi-
nation, each of the rolls having:
a first annular, radially projecting working shoulder, pro-
jecting from the conical smaller end;
a second, larger, annular, radially projecting working shoul-
der;
« r
an annular recess between the shoulders and a conical sur-
face as transition from the recess to the second shoulder;
and
a circular cylindrical mandrel rod for coaction with the
rolls, wherein said first shoulder urges material of the
hollow against the mandrel for reducing the wall thick-
ness of the hollow and stretching same, said recess receiv-
ing material radially displaced because of the stretching,
the second shoulder further stretching the hollow, all in
coaction with the cylindrical mandrel.
' I 4,392,370
TWO-HIGH ROLLING STAND FOR BAR AND/OR WIRE
ROLLING MILL
Per-Olof Strandell, Bockstigen 3, 183 51 Taby, Sweden
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,593
Claims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 23, 1979, 7908779
Int a.3 B21B 31/02
U.S. a. 72—201 13 Claims
20
32
29
11
rl - ':
J
-
1
19
32
29
ij
1. A two-high rolling stand for use in a plurality of stands
constituting a rolling mill comprising a roll package having a
pair of rolls with axial directions arranged in parallel, said roll
package including bearing devices and housing therefor op>era-
ble to su|qx>rt said rolls within said stand, end members ar-
ranged to exeri force on said roll package, each of said end
members having a roll gap adjustment means associated there-
with for exerting force between said rolls, a pair of side plates
arranged to contact said end members on either side thereof
along a pair of planes parallel to the axial direction of said pair
of rolls, said side plates releasably engaged with said end mem-
bers and arranged to take up the roll forces exerted by said roll
package, and said side plates having the main extension planes
thereof substantially in parallel with a plane passing through
the center lines of said pair of rolls.
4,392,371
METHOD OF PLATE ROLLING AND EQUIPMENT
THEREFOR
Taketo Okumura; Taiji Tsukabara; Takashi Mikuriya; Hideki
Watanabe, and Katsutoshi Katada, all of Chiba, Japan, assign-
ors to Kawasaki Steel Corporation, Kobe, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 167,122, Jul. 9, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 414,838
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 13, 1979, 54-89567
Int. a.3 B21B 1/02
U.S. a. 72—231 4 Claims
LENGTH or fJATEO'AL
to BE POLirO
1
vwDTm Of MAIEPUU.
. TO BE BOllEO
S'ZiNG ROLLING
tXOECTiON
BBQOOSiOE ROLLING
DIRECTION
» -•
I S I ■' < ROLLING 0*ieCTlON
ir*--* ., , PL4TE ROLUNO
I • OF T,c INVENTION
ROLL'NG WiOTm
I K)
4 ~
FiMOl BOLL'fW) DIRECTION 1
- ft
' I
ROLLING LENGTH
ROLl/HG
*iD"h
1. A method for manufacturing a heavy plate having no side
crop portions bulging outwardly by rolling a rectangular slab,
comprising the steps of:
rolling said slab in the longitudinal direction thereof;
rolling said slab in the lateral direction perpendicular to the
longitudinal direction of said slab;
rolling opposite end portions of said slab by upper and lower
rolls in said lateral direction of said slab with a gap be-
tween said upper and lower rolls being tapered toward
axially outer directions of said upper and lower rolls so
that said end portions are bevelled, whereby each comer
of said end portions projects outwardly; and
forming said heavy plate by rolling said slab having bevelled
end portions in said longitudinal direction of said slab.
4,392,372
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FLANGING TUBE
ENDS
Alexander Brodsky, and Richard J. Qark, both of Auckland,
New Zealand, assignors to Fisber & Paykel Limited, Auck-
land, New Zealand
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,272
Qaims priority, application New Zealand, Mar. 3, 1980,
193022
Int. a.i B21D 7/04. 51/18
U.S. a. 72—311 11 Qaims
1. A method of flanging one end of a thin metal tube com-
prising the steps of mounting a sheet metal tube on a carriage,
clamping the tube to the carriage, placing complementary
pivotal inner and outer forming tools with parts thereof in
contact with the inner and outer surfaces respectively of one
end p>ortion of said tube, the inner forming tools being pivotal
on an inner frame and the outer forming tools being pivotal on
an outer carriage, and forming a radially inwardly directed
flange on said one end portion by pivotally moving the inner
and outer forming tools with said tube end portion between
them to displace said one end portion radially inwardly and
form ribs thereon, and moving the pivot axes of said forming
tools relatively to each other in a direction parallel to the tube
axis and slidingly with respect to said one end portion during
480
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
the formation of said flange and ribs to produce said flange
having a cross-sectional shape which includes two sets of
oppositely directed ribs the sides of which increase in depth
from the tube wall towards the tube center.
7. Apparatus for flanging and ribbing one end of a thin metal
tube comprising a frame, a plurality of rod members extending
between the ends of said frame and along an axis of said frame,
an outer carriage slidable on said rod members, a plurality of
radially extending circumferentially spaced outer forming
tools pivotally mounted on said outer carriage so as to be
substantially radially pivotal through substantially 90°, an
intermediate carriage slidable on said rod members, clamping
means on said intermediate carriage to clamp a tube to be
flanged thereon with the tube axis oriented parallel to said axis
of said frame, a plurality of radially extending circumferen-
single anvil surface from a third position to a fourth posi-
tion for forming a second bend in the piece of sheet metal
tially spaced inner forming tools pivotally mounted on said
intermediate carriage for substantially radially pivotal move-
ment through substantially 90*, means to cause said outer
forming tools to pivot through said substantially 90", and force
supplying means operatively connected to said inner and outer
formmg tools to move said inner and outer forming tools with
respect to said frame and each other in a manner such that a
radially inwardly directed flange on one end of said tube dis-
posed between said forming tools is formed, said flange having
a width less than the radius of the tube and a cross-sectional
shape in the form of a series of two sets of oppositely directed
ribs the sides of which increase in depth from the tube wall
towards the tube center, said force supplying means including
means to displace the pivotal axes of said tools with respect to
each other in a direction parallel to the frame axis during
formation of the flange.
to complete the S shap>ed formation in the pieoe of sheet
metal.
4,392,374
TRANSDUCER COUPLING APPARATUS FOR
INHOMOGENEITY DETECTOR
Leonard N. Liebermann, La Jolla, Calif., assignor to Tif Instru-
ments, Inc., Miami, Fla.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,257 —
Int. a.3 COIN 29/02
U.S. a. 73—19 6 Qaims
432,373
FORMING MEANS
Richard J. Clark, Auckland, New Zealand, assignor to Fisher &
Paykel Limited, Auckland, New Zealand
FUed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,421
Claims priority, application New Zealand, Jul. 27, 1979,
191145
Int a.3 B21D U/04
U.S. a. 72—321 2 Claims
1. A sheet bending apparatus for forming a substantially S
shaped formation in a piece of sheet metal comprising
clamping means for holding the piece of sheet metal;
a single surface shaped to provide a first bend in the piece of
sheet metal;
a first forming means rotatable about an axis between a first
position and a second position for bending the sheet metal
to conform to a portion of said single anvil surface to form
a first, 180* bend in the piece of sheet metal; and
a second forming means linearly displaceable towards said
1. In a detector for detecting inhomogeneities in fluid flow-
ing through a conduit including electro-mechanical transducer
assemblies disposed on the wall of such conduit in an acousti-
cally coupled relationship with substantially all acoustic cou-
pling occurring through such conduit and means for sensing
variations in a driving signal supplied to a transducer on one of
said transducer assemblies caused by such inhomogeneities, the
improvement comprising:
an acoustically conductive coupling member for coupling a
transducer to such conduit; said coupling member includ-
ing;
a first portion configured with a surface for contacting such
conduit wall over an area sufficient to transmit mechanical
energy between the member and such conduit wall; and .
a second portion spaced apart from such conduit wall upon
which a transducer is mounted;
said first and second portions being partially acoustically
coupled together to form a mechanical filter means for
mechanically filtering out undesirable oscillations result-
ing from vibrational modes of the conduit and coupling
member system in which acoustic energy travels primarily
in the conduit, rather than in the fluid.
July
2, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
481
4 J92 175
ROTATIONAL ANGLE DETECTING APPARATUS
Osamu EguchI, Ai^jo; Mltsutoshi Hattori, Okazaki, and Takat-
nigu Hanaoka, Kariya, aU of Japan, assignors to Nippondenso
Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,551
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 30, 1980, 55-9779
Int. a.3 GOIM 79/00; G08C 19/04
U.S. a 73-118 2 Claims
mterval of a borehole, the borehole being filled with a substan-
tially mcompressible fluid capable of flow between the test
mterval and the surrounding formation, the steps comprising
developmg a pressure differential between the test interval
and the surrounding formation for inducing flow therebe-
tween,
arranging a variable volume device in communication with
the test interval, and
varying the effective volume of the variable volume device
in order to limit pressure variation in the test interval and
minimize system compliance efl^ects while simultaneously
momtonng selected flow conditions within the test inter-
val, operation of the variable volume device being regu-
lated m order to maintain substantially constant pressure
within the test interval.
1. A rotational angle detecting apparatus comprising:
a throttle valve rotatably mounted in a throttle body;
a yoke made of a magnetical material and fixed to a shaft of
said throttle valve;
a pair of permanent magnets so fixed to said yoke with a
space, to generate a parallel magnetic field in said space-
and
magnetic sensing means adjustably mounted in a support in .
said space to generate an electrical output in response to
an angular displacement of said permanent magnets with
respect to said magnetic sensing means, said magnetic
sensing means including a ferromagnetic metal magneto-
resistance element whose electric resistance varies in
dependence on changes of an angle formed by a direction
of the magnetic field and a direction of a current flowing
therethrough.
432,377
EARLY GAS DETECHON SYSTEM FOR A DRILL STEM
TEST
E. Edward Rankin, Fort Worth, Tex., assignor to Gearhart
Industries, Inc., Fort Worth, Tex.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,947
Int. C\? E21B 47/00
U.S. a. 73-155 , ci^^
432,376
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MONTTORING
11 BOREHOLE CONDTnONS
Peter L. Ugus, OUvenhain; Edward W. Peterson, Del Mar, and
William O. Hicks, San Diego, all of Calif., assignors to S-
Cubed, San Diego, Calif.
1 1 FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,622
1 1 Int. Q\? E21B 47/10
U.S. a. 73-155 35 ctainw
^Ti^
-ao
1. In a method for monitoring flow conditions within a test
I. In a method for providing concurrent surface indication
of earth formation characteristics during drill stem testing, the
method including the steps of running in on a drill string a
releasable packer and a bypass sub having a bore for sealingly
receiving a wireline tool and a bypass passage means permit-
tmg formation fluid flow around the wireline tool, then selec-
tively opening and closing the bypass passage means with the
wirelme tool sealed in the bore and the packer set to selectively
shut in and allow formation fluid flow to the surface while
concurrently providing to the surface through the wireline
formation flowing and shut in characteristics sensed by the
wireline tool, the improvement comprising:
providing for the wireline tool, sensing means for sensing the
gas content of the formation fluid and providing a concur-
rent indication to the surface;
providing a reversing valve means for communicating a well
annulus with the interior of the drill string while the wireline
instrument is located downhole;
stopping the flow of formation fluid should the sensing means
indicate the possibility of a gas flow rate above a selected
safe minimum; then
reversing circulating annulus fluid from the annulus down
through the reversing valve means and up the drill string to
remove formation fluid from the drill string; then
removing the wireline tool.
482
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392^78
CAPACITANCE MEASURING APPARATUS
Brian E. Pitches, Lothian; Robert M. S. Murray, Edinburgh,
and Douglas J. Rogers, Midlothian, all of Scotland, assignors
to 501 Ferranti Limited, Hellinwood, England
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,885
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 1, 1979,
7930387
Int. a.J GOIF 2i/26; GOIR 27/26
\}&. a. 73—304 C 8 Qaims
be examined and receives reflected ultrasonic waves therefrom
for obtaining a tomogram of said acoustic field, said ultrasonic
diagnostic equipment including:
first and second channels having phased arrays of different
adjustable focal sections
means for alternatively operating said first and second chan-
nels during the reception of said reflected ultrasonic
waves, and
switch means for adjusting the focal sections of the phased
array of each of said first and second channels when the
other of said first and second channels is in operation
receiving said reflected waves from said acoustic field
whereby tomograms of high revolution are obtained with-
out being influenced by spike noise due to adjustments in
the focal sections of the phased arrays.
3 -3
4,392,379
ULTRASONIC DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT
Keiki Yamaguchi, Musashino, Japan, assignor to Yokogawa
Electric Works, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,849
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 12, 1980, 55-15887
Int. a.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. a. 73—626 4 Qaims
^7 pMAseo
4,392,380
HIGH TEMPERATURE PRESSURE COUPLED
ULTRASONIC WAVEGUIDE
Michael J. Caines, Forest Park, 111., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the United States Depart-
ment of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,354
Int. Q.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. Q. 73—644 7 Qaims
1. Capacitance measuring apparatus which includes a vari-
able capacitor and a first reference capacitor, means for gener-
ating a periodic voltage waveform for application directly to
the variable capacitor and means for generating the periodic
waveform in inverted form to the reference capacitor, an
integrator, switching means for connecting the variable capaci-
tor and the reference capacitor sequentially to the input of the
integrator, comparison means for comparing the output of the
integrator with a reference level, control means responsive to
the output of the comparison means to control a sequence of
operation of the switching means and to deliver an output
pulse train, and output means responsive to the output pulse
train to determine the capacitance of the variable capacitor
relative to that of the reference capacitor.
1. A device for ultrasonically monitoring the characteristics
of a material comprising:
a threaded waveguide;
a transducer coupled to one end of the waveguide;
a treated copper foil positioned between the material and the
other end of the waveguide, wherein the treatment of said
treated foil comprises annealing and polishing to render
the foil soft and smooth;
an adjustable holding fixture for positioning the waveguide
against the foil and against the material; and
force compensating means for maintaining substantially
constant pressure against the waveguide and against the
material during creep of said fixture wherein said force
compensating means is positioned far enough away from
the material so as not to be exposed to temperatures of
such a high level as to cause relaxation of said force com-
pensating means.
1. In an ultrasonic diagnostic equipment having an ultrasonic
transducer which emits ultrasonic pulses to an acoustic field to
4,392,381
DRIVER BAR ASSEMBLY
Robert W. Martin, West Covina, Calif., assignor to Kimball
. Industries, Inc., Monrovia, Calif.
FUed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,333
Int. Q.3 B06B 7/00, i/00
U.S. Q. 73—663 21 Qaims
1. Driver bar assembly comprising a bar element and a re-
tainer element separably connected thereto; said bar element
having a normally vertically disposed base attachable to a
pivotally mounted shaker head and a normally horizontally
disposed flange adapted to lie in a common plane with and
spaced from a slip plate to be driven by said shaker head; said
retainer element having first bracket means in which said bar
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
483
element flange is bracketable, and second bracket means in
which said slip plate is bracketable opposite said bar element
flange, whereby said flange and slip plate spacing is bridged in
vibration transmitting relation between said shaker head and
said slip plate; said retainer element being separable from said
slip plate and said bar element flange without relative move-
ment of said slip plate and shaker head, said bar element and
shaker head being freely angularly movable relative to said slip
plate in the separated condition of said retainer element and
said bar element.
4,392,382
LINEARIZED ELECTRONIC CAPACITIVE PRESSURE
1 1 TRANSDUCER
Donald O. Myers, Carpentersville, III., assignor to Motorola
Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,888
Int. Q.3 GOIL 19/04, 19/12
U.S. Q. 73—708 12 Qaims
_Ji"
1. A linearized electronic pressure transducer operative over
a range of temperature comprising:
first means for providing a first analog signal having a mag-
nitude varying as a predetermined function of sensed
pressure;
non-linear circuit means coupled to said first means for
recieving a signal therefrom and in response thereto effec-
tively providing an analog control signal having a magni-
tude varying as a predetermined non-linear function of
said first analog signal magnitude;
output circuit means coupled to both said first means and
said non-linear circuit means for receiving both said ana-
log control signal and said first analog signal and provid-
ing an ouput signal having a magnitude varying as a sub-
stantially linear function of sensed pressure, said output
circuit means utilizing said control signal magnitude to
modify the magnitude variation provided by said first
analog signal to produce said linearly varying output
signal; and
temperature compensation means operatively coupled to
said output circuit means for providing temperature com-
pensation for said output signal and thereby providing a
substantially linear variation of said output signal as a
function of pressure over a range of temperature.
4,392,383
DISTANCE-FREQUENCY TRANSDUCER
Hans Bauerlen; Thomas Pfendler, both of Gerlingen, and Ber-
thold Wocher, Leonberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,783
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1980, 3011594; Oct. 7, 1980, 3037802
Int. Q.3 GOIL 9/12: HOIG 7/00
U.S. Q. 73—724 10 Qaims
I
rUTL
. I
1. Pressure transducer comprising
an RC oscillator circuit including
a measuring capacitor having a capacitance (C) varying in
dependence on pressure, and determining the frequency of
the RC oscillator circuit, said capacitor having
a fixed electrode (El) and a movable electrode (E2);
wherein the fixed electrode comprises a layer of electrically
conductive material surrounding a central area which
comprises non-conductive material (100),
and wherein the movable electrode comprises a metallic,
corrugated membrane (M) having a surface facing said
fixed electrode, said membrane (M) forming a pressure
pick-up (D) and being movable relative to said fixed elec-
trode (El) as a function of pressure applied thereon.
4,392,384
MEASURING INSTRUMENT WITH AUTOMATIC
LOADING AND AN AUTOMATIC CYCLE, FOR
STUDYING THE TENSILE CHARACTERISTICS OF
HBRES
Jean-Pierre Yquel, Colombes, France, assignor to L'Oreal,
Paris, France
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,833
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 22, 1980, 80 20331
Int. Q.3 GOIN 3/08
U.S. Q. 73—830 19 Qaims
«:TT
1. In a measuring instrument for measuring the deformations
of and tensile forces in a sample fibre or analogous material
when subjecting the sample to a longitudinal tensile stress and
484
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
which comprises a frame, a tensioning means carried on the vortex generating member disposed in said one conduit portion
frame and including a movable element to be associated with perpendicularly to the direction of flow of the fluid to generate
one, movable, end of the sample and a force detector also the Karman vortex street downstream thereof, a vortex detec-
carried on the frame and including means to be associated with ^QJ disposed on said one conduit portion and directing an
the other, fixed, end of the sample, the improvement in that the ultrasonic wave perpendicularly across the Karman vortex
said instrument comprises a feed plate; a plurality of pairs of j.jj.ggj ^^ receiving the ultrasonic wave to detect the number
sample blocks with the sample blocks of each pair being pro- ^^ ^^^.^ ^^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^ ^^^^^ generated in a unit
vided with means firmly to hold opposite ends of a sample to
time, said vortex detecting generating an ultrasonic wave of
be tested; a sample loader provided with means to receive a ... . ♦b.^.^
plurality of said pairs of sample blocks stacked with the sam- the type which, unless preventive measures are taken, tends to
pies earned thereby parallel one with the other, said sample generate a standing wave at the receivmg side of said one
loader having a discharge axis perpendicular to the direction of conduit portion, and a sound absorbing material only on the
extent of said samples and being held fixed relative to the frame inner wall of said one conduit portion at least along the portion
with the extent of the stack perpendicular to said feed plate; a where the ultrasonic waves exist for preventing the generation
feed device capable of pushing a pair of sample blocks perpen- of a standing wave due to reflection of the said ultrasonic
dicularly to a plane formed by the samples in the loader while waves, whereby the flow rate of said fluid flowing through
said pair of sample blocks is carried by the feed plate from an sajj plurality of conduit portions can be determined from
initial position located in line with the loader, with simulta- measuring the flow rate of the portion of said fluid flowing
neous translational movement of the two sample blocks to a through said one of said conduit portions.
loaded position; two clamps one of which is fixed and coop)er-
ates with the force detector while the other cooperates with
the movable element of the tensioning means, said sample
blocks in their loaded position being received in said clamps,
the said feed device being retractable to its initial position to
engage a new pair of sample blocks carried by the feed plate;
control means for triggering the operation of the tensioning
means when the sample blocks are in position in the said
clamps; one measuring means, associated with the force detec-
tor, providing the value of the tensile force applied to the
sample; other measuring means, associated with the movable
element of the tensioning means, providing the value of the
elongation of the sample; and means for returning the tension-
ing means to an initial position after its movable element has ♦,392,3»o
been subjected to sufficient translational movement for the
FLOW RATE METER
m^ureXenrsaid f^ed'devTce'teTn^oii^rabie^^ '^![^J^*^'':.'°?.5!!!L'IT^1^1^^^^^^
a new pair of sample blocks into the clamps, to cause the
previous two sample blocks to be driven out from the said
clamps.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stutt-
gart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,811
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 11,
1980, 3042448
4,392,385 Int. Q.' GOIF 1/28
FLOW METER UTILIZING KARMAN VORTEX STREET U.S. Q. 73—861.76 9 Claims
Kuniteni Okuda; Teruki Fukami, both of Tokyo; Yoshiaki
Asayama, Himeji; Shunichi Wada, Himeji, and Masami
Kabuto, Himeji, all of Japan, assignors to Oval Engineering -< ;
Co., Ltd. and Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, both of
Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 956,599, Oct. 30, 1978, abandoned. This
application Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,387
Gaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 4, 1977, 52-
148024[U]; Jan. 12, 1978, 53-80067[U]; Sep. 7, 1978, 53-
123314[U1; Sep. 20, 1978, 53-129325[U]
Int. a.' GOIF 1/32
U.S. a. 73—861.23 1 Claim
1. A flow rate meter having a housing, said housing having
a flow conduit in which a measuring body is disposed, said
measuring body pivotable about a bearing shaft mounted in
said housing counter to a restoring force, said measuring body
being arranged to pivot in accordance with a quantity of me-
dium flowing therethrough, said flow rate meter further hav-
ing a damping body pivotable about said bearing shaft so as to
define a damping chamber with respect to said flow conduit,
said flow rate meter being intended in particular for measuring
a quantity of air aspirated via an air intake tube by an internal
combustion engine, characterized in that said measuring body
and said damping body are rigidly coupled to one another by
means of at least one crosspiece, said measuring body and said
' .... „ _ . . J damping body comprising flow rate elements, one of said flow
1. A flow meter utilizing a Karman vortex street and com- ^^ * .■,■:, . j .u v...u ^^r..,iA^ ««
prising a conduit with a rectangular cross-sectional profile and ^^^e elements bemg directly connected with a hub P ov.d^ on
Srvidll into at least two parallel conduit portions through said beanng shaft m a rotationally fixed mamier. said hoi^g
which a fluid to be measured flows, said at least two parallel further being provided with a wall extendmg arcuately about
conduit portions being substantially identical in transverse said hub, and said wall and said hub provide therebetween a
cross-sectional shape to each other, a laminar flow producing leakage gap terminating at one end outside said dampmg cham-
means in the upstream end of one of said conduit portions, a ber downstream of said measuring body.
^
sr^
^ >-■
;3
I*/ (t-rjiffi.1
July 12,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
483
y. 4,392,387
SAMPLING DEVICE FOR ANALYZING GAS WITH
HIGH DUST CONTENT
Naoe Izumi, Mie, Japan, assignor to NGK Insulators, Ltd.,
Nagoya, Japan *
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 253,918
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 28, 1980, 55-
58448[U]
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/24
U.S. O. 73—863.21 5 Claims
1. A sampling device for analyzing gas with a high dust
content, comprising a generally closed housing (2), a gas suc-
tion tube (3) of a large diameter connected to an upper portion
of the housing so as to lead the gas with the high dust content
into the inside of the housing, an air-jet nozzle (4) disposed in
said gas suction tube (3) in the proximity of joint between said
tube (3) and said housing (2), said nozzle (4) facing tube wall (6)
of said gas suction tube (3) and being directed toward inlet
opening (5) thereof, a water supply conduit (7) connected to a
top portion of said housing (2) so as to supply water for wash-
ing the gas with the high dust content led into the housing (2),
a screen (9) disposed at a lower portion of said housing (2), a
water sump (11) connected to a bottom portion of said housing
(2) through a pipe (10), and a washed-gas passage (12) having
one end thereof connected to said pipe (10) and an opposite end
thereof communicated with outside of the sampling device.
1 1 4,392,388
GAS SAMPLER FOR AEROSOL ATMOSPHERE
James E. Bauerle, Plum Borough, Pa., assignor to Westingtaouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,208
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/26
U.S. O. 73—863.23 3 Oaims
t?^¥^!^5^^
1. A sampler for gathering a sample of a gas from an environ-
ment containing an aerosol of tramp material in said gas which
comprises:
(a) a purge gas source;
(b) a barrier having ports between two surfaces thereof, said
ports adapted to permit back-diffusion of said sample of a
gas therethrough, by virtue of said ports being of a size
which is larger in diameter than one mean free path of
molecules of said sample gas;
(c) a sampler probe supporting said barrier such that a first
surface of said surfaces of said barrier is presented to said
environment and said sampler probe further defining a
chamber with said barrier adapted to receive and channel
flow of purge gas from said purge gas source over a sec-
ond surface of said surfaces of said barrier such that a
portion of the said purge gas flow passes through said
ports in said barrier thereby inhibiting clogging of said
ports by said aerosol of tramp material in said gas and the
remaining portion of the purge gas flow gathers such
amount of sample gas in said chamber as has back-diffused
through said ports across said barrier; and
(d) an analyzer adapted to receive the purge gas flow from
said sampler probe, the purge gas flow containing addi-
tionally such amount of the sample of said gas as has
back-diffused across said barrier.
4,392,389
SAMPLING TUBE HAVING CLOSING CAPS
Wolfgang Eckstein, Sereetz; Horst Rabenecker, Klein Parin,
and Jiirgen Behnke, Lubeck, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Dragerwerk Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,078
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 7,
1980, 3037826
Int. a.5 GOIN 1/00: B65D 21/02, 85/20; BOIL 3/12
U.S. a. 73—864.91 3 Claims
1. An improved sampling tube arrangement of the type
having an elongated sampling tube with closing caps made of
an elastic plastic adapted to be received upon and close the
ends of the sampling tube, comprising a plurality of the closing
caps, webs connecting adjacent closing caps to form a string of
closing caps, each of said webs being severable between adja-
cent closing caps, reconnecting means for reconnecting two
adjacent closing caps to each other, said reconnecting means
including a plug-in connection comprising a male part pro-
vided on one side of the closing cap and a fitting female part
adapted to fittingly receive the male part of an adjacent con-
necting cap provided on the other side of the closing cap, and
each cap having an area intermediate said sides for labeling.
4,392,390
SHIELDING APPARATUS FOR LINEAR ACTUATOR
James C. Johnson, Charlotte, N.C., assignor to Duff-Norton
Company, Charlotte, N.C.
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,183
Int. a.3 F16H 27/02
U.S. a. 74—89.15 7 Claims
1. In a linear actuator of the type having a housing and a
reciprocable member disposed in and projecting from said
housing for reciprocating linear movement relative thereto,
said housing having vent means for admitting to and exhaust-
ing from said housing ambient air responsive to fluctuations in
the volumetric capacity of said housing resulting from the
relative reciprocal movement of said reciprocable member
respectively out of and into said housing, the improvement
486
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12. 1983
comprising means for shielding said vent means to prevent
entrance of airborne debris and excess moisture into said hous-
ing while permitting unrestricted operational airflow through
exhausted through said vent means from said housing upon
decreases in the volumetric capacity of said housing resulting
from reciprocal movement of said reciprocable member into
said housing and for coptractionally expelling contained air
through said vent means into said housing upon increases in the
volumetric capacity of said housing resulting from reciprocal
movement of said reciprocable member out of said housing,
whereby a controlled predetermined volume of air may be
constantly contained within and maintained in equilibrium
between said housing and said bladder means to facilitate
unrestricted operation of said linear actuator while preventing
entrance thereinto of external airborne debris and excess mois-
ture.
4,392,391
MULTISPEED REVERSIBLE POWER SHIFT
TRANSMISSION
James J. Jameson, and John M. Beeson, both of Coffeyville,
Kans., assignors to Cooper Industries, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,817
Int. a.3 F16H 3/08
U.S. a. 74—333 1 Qaim
said vent means, said shielding means including bladder means
sealably affixed externally to said housing surrounding said
vent means for expansionally receiving and containing air
1. A multispeed constant mesh gear transmission including
an input shaft and an output shaft, said transmission being
operable to provide six speed ratios between said input shaft
and said output shaft in one direction of rotation of said output
shaft and three speed ratios between said input shaft and said
output shaft in the opposite direction of rotation of said output
shaft, said transmission comprising:
an input gear drivenly connected to said input shaft and
rotatable about an input axis;
a first clutch set including a first directional clutch and a first
speed change clutch drivingly engageable with each other
and disposed about a first axis spaced from said input axis;
a second clutch set including a second directional clutch and
a second speed change clutch drivingly engageable with
each other and disposed about a second axis spaced from
said first axis and said input axis
a third clutch set including a third directional clutch and a
third speed change clutch drivingly engageable with each
other and disposed about a third axis spaced form a said
input, first, and second axes;
first, second and third gears disposed for rotation about said
about said first, second, and third axes, respectively, and
respectively engageable through said respective first,
second and third clutch sets with fourth, fifth and sixth
gears disposed for rotation about first, second and third
axes, respectively;
a seventh gear fixed to said fifth gear for rotation about said
second axis;
said first gear being meshed with said third gear, said fourth
gear being meshed with said fifth gear, said seventh gear
being meshed with said sixth gear, and said second gear
being meshed with said first gear.
July 12,, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
487
eighth and ninth gears meshed with each other and respec-
tively associated with said first and second clutch sets for
drivingly interconnecting said first gear with said fifth and
seventh gears through said first directional clutch and said
second speed change clutch;
a tenth gear associated with said third clutch set and meshed
with said ninth gear for drivingly interconnecting said
first gear with said sixth gear through said first directional
clutch and said third speed change clutch;
an output gear drivingly connected to said output shaft and
mounted for rotation about an output axis spaced from
said third axis, said output gear being meshed with said
sixth gear,
said input axis, said third axis and said output axis lying in a
common plane, and said second and third axes lying in a
common plane intersecting the plane of said input, third
and output axes.
4,392,392
ELECTRICALLY-OPERATED ROLLER DOOR
OPERATING MECHANISM
Milan Perisic, Woodforde; Warwick J. Lumbers, and John A.
Bone, both of Holden Hill, ail of Australia, assignors to Auto-
matic Rollers Doors Australia Pty., Ltd., Adelaide, Australia
Filed Nov. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 203,902
Oaims priority, application Australia, Nov. 8, 1979, PE1255
Int. a.3 F16H 35/00; E06B 9/08
U,S. a. 74—626 14 Qaims
^6 ^B
1. A driving mechanism for coiling a flexible curtain there-
about comprising:
(a) a transverse shaft;
(b) first and second drum wheels mounted for rotation about
the axis of said shaft at axially spaced apart locations;
(c) a reversible electric motor fixedly mounted on the side of
said first drum wheel facing said second drum wheel
between the center and the rim of said drum wheel to
bodily rotate about the axis of said shaft with rotation of
said first drum wheel;
(d) a reduction gear mechanism affixed to and operatively
associated with said motor with a drive shaft projecting
through said first drum wheel at a location between the
axis of said drum wheel and the rim of said drum wheel
and terminating in a drive pinion positioned on the oppo-
site side of said first drum wheel;
(e) a ring gear in meshing engagement with said pinion
mounted adjacent said opposite side of said first drum
wheel, said ring gear having its axis concentric with the
axis of said shaft; and
(0 locking means to prevent rotation of said ring gear.
4,392,393
DUAL ENGINE DRIVE
Loren N. Montgomery, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,634
Int. a J F16H 37/06. 47/00
U.S. CI. 74—661 4 Claims
1. In a vehicle including a pair of synchronously operated
engines each producing individual peak torque at substantially
identical individual peak torque engine speeds, combining gear
means between said pair of engines operative to combine the
torque output of said pair of engines, said pair of engines pro-
ducing combined engine peak torque at combined engine peak
torque speed substantially equal to said individual peak torque
engine speeds, and a torque converter the input torque absorp-
tion capacity of which at zero speed ratio and input speed
substantially equal to said combined engine peak torque speed
equals said combined engine peak torque, the combination
comprising, selectively engageable direct drive means between
said combining gear means and said torque converter operative
to deliver to said torque converter combined engine torque at
combined engine speed, selectively engageable reduction gear
means between one engine of said pair of engines and said
torque converter having a preselected gear ratio operative at a
speed input equal to said individual peak torque engine speed
and a torque input equal to said individual peak torque to
reduce speed to a lower speed output whereat the correspond-
ing higher torque output substantially equals the torque capac-
ity of said torque converter at zero speed ratio when the torque
converter input speed equals said lower output speed, and
means operative to effect selective engagement of one said
reduction gear means and said direct drive means.
4,392,394
ENGINE-GEAR ARRANGEMENT FOR VEHICLES, IN
PARTICULAR PASSENGER CARS
Peter Hofbauer; Romanus Scholz; Paulus Heidemeyer, all of
Wolfsburg, and Frank Zimmermann, Braunschweig, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Volkswagenwerk Aktien-
gesellschaft, Wolfsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,803
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 7,
1979, 2944928
Int. a.3 F16H 37/08
U.S. Q. 74—689 8 Claims
1. A system for driving a motor vehicle with an infinitely
variable belt gear comprising:
an engine transversely positioned to the longitudinal direc-
tion of said vehicle;
first and second drive cone pulleys for transmitting the
rotational force of said engine;
clutch means for coupling said engine to said drive cone
pulleys;
first and second output cone pulleys drivingly connected to
said first and second drive cone pulleys;
a planetary gear drive with a sun gear, a ring gear, and a
planetary gear carrier carrying planet gears, said sun gear
being driven by said first and second output cone pulleys;
a differential gear coaxially positioned to said planetary gear
488
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
drive for driving the axles of said vehicle with a drive gear 4,3923%
coupling said differential gear with said planetary gear FINAL DRIVE ASSEMBLY FOR VEHICLES
(jrive; Yoshito Sato, Hirakata, and Tomoyuki Takahashi, Yawata, both
a hollow shaft concentric with an output shaft of said differ- of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho,
ential gear drivingly disposed between said sun gear and ^'*'''^°' ''*'*^,^ c a loen c^ m
said output cone pulleys; ^ . .*^'!^ ^P* f' ™' ^'' ^°' "*'"7, ,„. ^
*'*'■'' Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1979, 54-
124623[U]
Int. a.3 F16H 3/44. 1/28
' U.S. a. 74—785 2 Qaims
J5- 2t
first controllable clutch means for selectively engaging said
drive gear and said ring gear or said drive gear and said
planetary gear carrier;
a stationary housing; and
second controllable clutch means for selectively coupling
said housing to said ring gear or said housing to said
planetary gear carrier.
4,392,395
INnNITELY VARIABLE TRANSMISSION
John M. Clarke, Dunlap, 111., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor
Co., Peoria, 111.
FUed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,273
Int. a.3 F16H 37/06
U.S. a. 74—690 18 Claims
1. A device for transmitting power from a prime mover
comprising:
first (16), second (25) and third (14) rotary power shafts;
a first fixed ratio gear pair (15,B) connecting said first rotary
power shaft (16) to the prime mover;
a second fixed ratio gear pair (24,A) connecting said second
rotary power shaft (25) to the prime mover;
means (12) for transmitting power to said third rotary power
shaft (14) from said first (16) and second (25) rotary power
shafts including means (18,54) for selectively transmitting
power at either the speed of said first rotary power shaft
(16) or the speed of said second rotary power shaft (25)
and for infinitely varying the speed of said third rotary
power shaft (14) to vary within a range bounded by the
speeds of said first (16) and second (25) rotary power
shafts; and
means for changing one of said engaged gear pairs (15,24)
with a different ratio gear pair during zero torque condi-
tions while said other engaged gear pair (24, 15) transmits
power to said third power shaft (14).
1. A final drive assembly for a vehicle, comprising:
a housing;
an input pinion gear rotatably supported by said housing;
a hollow sun gear shaft rotatably supported by said housing,
said hollow sun gear shaft having an open center portion;
a final drive gear fixedly mounted on said sun gear shaft;
an intermediate gear shaft having first and second intermedi-
ate gears mounted thereon, said first intermediate gear
being in mesh with said input pinion gear and said second
intermediate gear being in mesh with said final drive gear;
a planetary reduction gear group having a sun gear, a plural-
ity of planet gears, a carrier and a ring gear, said sun gear
being fixedly mounted on said sun gear shaft, said ring
gear being radially and axially fixed to said housing, said
planet gears being rotatably mounted on said carrier, said
carrier being rotatably mounted on only said sun gear
shaft, a bearing means mounted between said carrier and
said hollow sun gear shaft restricting axial play and pre-
venting radial play;
a sprocket rotatably mounted on said housing;
hollow torque tube means fixedly secured to said sprocket
and rotatably mounted only on said sun gear shaft, said
hollow torque tube means having a center portion open to
said open center portion of said sun gear shaft; J»nd
means for coupling said hollow torque tube means with said
carrier in such a manner as to allow slight play in axial and
circumferential direction therebetween.
4,392,397
METHOD OF PRODUCING A DRAWING DIE
Adrianus R. C. Engelfnet; Adriaan J. G. Op Het Veld, and
Theodorus J. P. Van Vucht, all of Eindhoven, Netherlands,
assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jun. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 161,197
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 25, 1979,
7904922
Int. a.J B23P 15/24; B21C 3/02
U.S. a. 76—107 A 4 Claims
1. A method of producing a wire-drawing die comprising
the steps of:
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
489
providing a metal annulus having a bore; and
clamping a core directly in the bore of the annulus, said core
consisting of a hard, wear-resistant material; characterized
in that:
4,392,398
WIRE TRIMMER
Jerzy Hoffman, 204 Washington Blvd., Santa Monica, Calif.
90406
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,401
Int. a.3 H02G 1/12
U.S. a. 81—9.51 4 Qaims
\
16 30
y 34 26o
4,392,399
DRUM-TYPE WIRE SHEAR
Ewald Wyzgol; Hans-Jiirgen Rasehom, and Gerhard Pechau, all
of Magdeburg, German Democratic Rep., assignors to VEB
Schwermaschinen-Kombinat "ERNST THALMANN" Mag-
deburg, Magdeburg, German Democratic Rep.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 266,097
Int. a.^ B23D 25//2
U.S. a. 83—106 10 Qaims
the annulus consists of a metal alloy which can be strength-
ened by a heat treatment; and
the method further comprises the step of increasing the
ulitmate strength of the annulus by a heat treatment, while
clamping the core therein.
1. In a wire trimming machine having a motor and a rotat-
able shaft rotated by said motor, a trimmer comprising:
a cylindrical trunk with a first cylindrical bore in one end
thereof coaxial with the longitudinal axis thereof, a second
cylindrical bore in the other end thereof coaxial with said
longitudinal axis and just large enough to receive said
shaft, a transverse third cylindrical bore on one side of
said trunk ending at said longitudinal axis, and a transverse
fourth cylindrical bore on the opposite side of said trunk
prallel to and eccentric of said third bore and ending at
said longitudinal axis, said longitudinal axis being coplanar
with the longitudinal axes of said transverse bores;
a pair of arcuate fiange portions disposed centrally and
circumferentially about said trunk and opposite each
other, the ends of said flange portions terminating in paral-
lel planes which are tangent to and which define opposite
parallel sides of said trunk;
a slot in said one side of said trunk extending through both
said arcuate flanges and from the circumference to the
center of said trunk, said slot forming an acute angle with
said longitudinal axis of said trunk; and
a cutting member disposed in one end of said slot and having
a beveled cutting edge located at the inner termination of
said first bore.
1. An apparatus for cutting through a continuously longitu-
dinally moving wire, said apparatus comprising:
a pair of cutter drums centered on and rotatable about re-
^ spective generally parallel axes and having respective
radially outwardly open generally helical wire grooves of
substantially the same pitch but opposite hand, said drums
being radially relatively closely spaced and defining a nip;
a guide element fixed rotationally on one of said drums and
formed with a helical guide groove of the same hand and
pitch and centered on the same axis as the respective wire
groove but axially offset therefrom;
a cutter blade in at least one of said wire grooves adjacent
one axial end thereof;
drive means for jointly and synchronously rotating said
drums at substantially the same peripheral speed;
a swingable guide tube directed generally tangentially at said
nip and having a downstream end closely juxtaposed with
said drums at said nip, said wire passing through said tube;
a follower fixed to and at a fixed axial spacing from said
downstream end and displaceable between an entrainment
position engaging in said guide groove and an unengaged
position out of said guide groove; and
means for displacing said follower into said entrainment
position and simultaneously urging said guide tube at-
tached thereto axially along said nip.
4,392,400
TRIMMING AND PIERONG APPARATUS
Masani Sasagawa, Sayama; Tatsuo Umeda, Tokorozawa, and
Mamoni Kushima, Kawagoe, all of Japan, assignors to Honda
Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,110
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1980, 55-23236
Int. Q.3 B26F 1/40
U.S. Q. 83—185 7 Qaims
1. A trimming and piercing apparatus comprising a fixed die
provided with a work mounting surface and a piercing bore
opened in said work mounting surface, a movable die displace-
able toward and away from said fixed die, a pair of movable
blades and a pair of fixed blades mounted in a spaced opposite
relation on said movable die and said fixed die, respectively, so
that said movable blades are engageable with said fixed blades
when said movable die is moved toward said fixed die, a cam
slide slidably mounted on said movable die, a piercing punch
fixed to said cam slide, and a cam driver mounted on said fixed
1032 O.G.— 20
490
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
die for driving said cam slide to move along said movable die 4,392,402
toward said fixed die to place said piercing punch into fitting APPARATUS FOR SEVERING RUNNING PAPER WEBS
OR THE LIKE
Harald Rann, Norderstedt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
E.C.H. Will (GmbH & Co.), Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 144,029, Apr. 28, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,104
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 31,
1979, 2922164
Int. a.} B26D 1/62
U.S. a. 83— 345 naaims
engagement with said piercing bore in said fixed die as said
movable die is displaced toward said fixed die.
4,392,401
APPARATUS FOR STAGGERED CUTTING OF PLANAR
WORKPIECES
Wilfried Ess, Schwarzach, Austria, assignor to Schelling A Co.,
Schwarzach, Austria
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,368
Claims priority, application Austria, May 21, 1980, 2725/80
Int. a.3 B27B 5/06
U.S. a. 83—219 4 Qaims
1. Apparatus for cutting planar workpieces comprising: saw
means movable through a cutting stroke in a substantially
horizontal direction; first table means on one side of said saw
means; second table means on the opposite side of said saw
means; adjustable alignment means for aligning on said first
table means planar workpieces to be cut by said saw means;
first feeding means including a plurality of individual clamping
devices which are selectively operable to selectively individu-
ally engage planar workpieces on said first table means to feed
said workpieces through a cutting operation relative to said
means, with cut parts of said planar workpieces being thereby
deposited on said second table means; pivot means on said
second table means for turning said cut parts of said planar
workpieces relative to said saw means; second feeding means
for feeding said cut parts of said planar workpieces through
said saw means with parts thereof being deposited back on said
first table means; and roller means on said first table means
including first roller devices operable to allow planar work-
pieces deposited thereon to move in one direction and second
roller devices operable to allow planar workpieces deposited
thereon to move in another direction transverse to said first
direction; said first and said second roller devices being verti-
cally displaceable relative to each other.
1. In an apparatus for subdividing at least one running paper
web or the like into discrete sheets by severing the web during
lengthwise transport along a predetermined path, the combina-
tion of a rotary holder disposed at one side of said path; a
flexible knife having an inner portion and an elongated cutting
edge remote from said inner portion, extending transversely of
said path and arranged to sever the web once during each
revolution of said holder; and means for adjustably securing
said knife to said holder, including first retainer means recessed
into said holder at one side of said knife and arranged to urge
said inner portion of the knife against said holder, and second
retainer means comprising a row of discrete retainers disposed
at the other side of said knife, said row extending in substantial
parallelism with the axis of said holder and each of said retain-
ers being at least in linear contact with said other side of said
knife, as considered in the axial direction of said holder, the
neighboring retainers of said row being closely adjacent to
each other and engaging said other side of the knife intermedi-
ate said inner portion and said cutting edge, said securing
means further including means for moving said retainers rela-
tive to said knife and substantially radially of said holder to
thereby move the loci of engagement between said retainers
and said other side of the knife substantially radially of said
holder with attendant flexing of the knife and resulting change
in the position of said cutting edge with respect to said holder.
432,403
PORTABLE PALLET APPARATUS
Troy E. Martindale, Jr., Reynoldsburgh, Ohio, assignor to The
B. F. Goodrich Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,615
Int. a.3 B23D 31/00
U.S. a. 83—418 6 Qaims
1. A portable pallet nail shearing apparatus having a support
frame with wheels thereon for movement to a work area, a
platform mounted above said support frame, power means
interconnecting said platform to said support frame and opera-
tive to selectively raise or lower said platform relative to said
support frame a predetermimed distance, guide means
mounted between said platform and said supjxjrt frame to
maintain vertical alignment therebetween, support means
mounted on said platform for movement therewith, said sup-
port means has a cross brace with a pair of guide sleeves
mounted thereon, each of said sleeves having a guide rod
slidably received therein, a pair of laterally spaced tool holders
mounted on said support means for pivotal movement toward
and away from each other along a horizontal plane, power
operated means mounted on said support means and opera-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
491
tively connected to said guide rods, said guide rods pivotably
connected to said tool holders for pivoting said spaced tool
holders upon actuation of said power actuating means, and
^=^ ^
each tool holder having a plurality of cutting tools that are
moveable into and out of intermeshing engagement for shear-
ing operation.
432,404
CUTONG HEAD FOR GLASS CUTTING MACHINE
Norbert Schwarzenberg; Heinz Ueberwolf, both of Herzogen-
rath, and Jakob Kaesmacher, Stolberg-Buesbach, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Saint-Gobain Vitrage, France
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225.783
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 21,
1980, 3002071
Int. a.3 C03B 33/02. 33/10; B26D 3/08
U.S. a. 83—886 8 Qaims
"1 '•-^A' '1
1. A cutting head for use in a glass cutting machine compris-
ing a cylinder, a piston adapted for movement in the cylinder
in one direction in response to pressure from a source acting on
an upper face, the movement of the piston being in opposition
to means exerting a continuous force on the piston lower face
tending to move the piston in the opposite direction, a rod
connected at one end to the piston lower face, a cutting tool
mounted on the rod at the other end to provide a cut in a glass
blank along a prescribed path, means communicatingthe
source of pressure to the cylinder for moving the piston in the
one direction thereby to locate the cutting tool in a working
position at a cutting plane, and means suppressing the pressure
from the source acting on the pistion upper face and enabling
rapid movement of the piston in the opposite direction under
control of the force exerting means should the cutting tool
move further in the one direction from the working position.
432,405
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROCESSING TONE
SIGNALS IN ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS
Reinhard Franz, Tulpenstrasse 15, D-5401 Emmelshausen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, and Wilfried ENttmar, Halsenbach, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Reinhard Franz, Emmel-
shausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,960
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 21,
1980, 3006495
Int. a.3 GIOH 1/02
U.S. a. 84—1.24 16 Claims
Mkfi KIUL CWVEKTlfl
:^.
gitrmmi^
1. Apparatus for processing tone signals which are to be
transmitted with a variable delay in an electronic musical
instrument, especially in an electronic organ, comprising:
(a) means for supplying tone signals;
(b) a memory having input and output means and n storage
locations;
(c) first transducer means for converting the amplitude of
each supplied tone signal into digital values and for trans-
mitting such values to said memory, said first transducer
means being connected with said input means;
(d) addressing means including means for repeatedly count-
ing to n, and means for effecting cyclical memorization of
the digital values at locations which are selected in accor-
dance with a first function, said effecting means compris-
ing means for generating said first function, and said ad-
dressing means further including means for recovering
digital values from said locations in accordance with at
least one second function which differs from said first
function in dependence on time, said recovering means
comprising means for generating said second function,
and said second function generating means including
means for deriving said second function from said first
function, said second function generating means also in-
cluding means for generating an analog function, and
transducer means for converting said analog function into
a digital function; and
(e) additional transducer means for converting the digital
values recovered by said recovering means into analog
values and for consolidating such analog values into pro-
cessed tone signals, said additional transducer means being
connected with said output means.
492
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4392,406
SWITCHED CAPACITOR SINE WAVE GENERATOR
AND KEYER
Gary R. Fritz, Ferdinand, Ind., assignor to Kimball Interna-
tional, Inc., Jasper, Ind.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,984
Int a.3 GIOH 1/02
U.S. a. 84—1.26 33 Claims
54 i2
14
30
24
L. c""*
c. 6
—
MTTC«(|
MkCCr
M COUIT
OfCOOC "CM
\
mnTMH
COWHTEt
V. c«riw)L
L.«CS
36 "
2 "
Itiillll tt.ttinttt
IIIIIM
M k.<
^% 2
m
3^ * *
8 20
il6
-8
COllE
(to
iiSr
4h*TMM mOOHAM ROM
CIO" ;
: : : M >*
=:'o., ^0
-
...
.Mi.
C4MLI
» ; ■•M*<.t *
-
46 : 4e
40 42
9u*l cmML %-mMl • *•**
-
TO ■<
Jt#uts
4
1. In an electronic musical instrument, a waveform and
envelope generation circuit comprising:
means for producing a keying signal for calling forth a de-
sired musical waveform, said keying signal comprising a
DC voltage level,
envelope generator means responsive to said keying signal
for producing on an output an envelope waveform, said
envelope generator means having an input connected to
said keying signal and an output and charge pump means
for incrementally transferring the DC voltage level on
said input to said output as a plurality of increasing or
decreasing discrete amplitude levels under the control of a
first clocking signal connected to said envelope generator
means, said charge pump means including a charge storing
^ means for accumulating discrete units of charge to pro-
duce said discrete amplitude levels,
tone generator means having an input operatively connected
to the envelope generator means output and responsive to
the envelope waveform for producing on a further output
a cyclic musical waveform having an envelope following
the envelope waveform, said tone generator means com-
prising second charge pump means for repetitively and
incrementally generating a complete cycle of the musical
waveform under the control of a second clocking signal
wherein each cycle of the musical waveform has an ampli-
tude determined by the envelope waveform said second
charge pump means including a charge storing means for
accumulating discrete units of charge to produce time
sequential discrete amplitude levels that together form a
cycle of said waveform.
sliding engagement of said magazine with said machine
gun; __
a receiver in said machine gun;
cantilevered means on said magazine for holding and posi-
tioning said leading round, which includes;
a first cantilevered means for guiding a nose portion of
said leading round and a second cantilevered means for
guiding a butt portion of said leading round;
a resilient hold down means engaging said leading round
and operative to resist displacement thereof from its
position in said first and second cantilevered means;
said cantilevered means and said leading round being in-
serted to said loading position by said sliding engagement;
a feed pawl movable between first and second positions in
said receiver;
said feed pawl in its first position being engageable with said
leading round in its loading position; and
said feed pawl being operative when moving from its first to
its second position to displace said leading round from its
loading position to its charging position.
432,408
RECORDER TRAINING DEVICE
Manji Suzuki, 443, Ryoke-machi, Hamamatsu-shi, Shizuoka-
ken, Japan
FUed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,823
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 1, 1980, 55-89630
Int. a.3 GIOD 7/00
LI.S. a. 84—380 C 3 Claims
4,392,407
MACHINE GUN AMMUNITION LOADING SYSTEM
Clifford E. LaFever, Mission Viejo, and John H. Peck, Fountain
Valley, both of Calif., assignors to The United States of Amer-
ica as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington,
D.C.
FUed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 2%,737
Int. C\? F41D 10/14
U.S. a. 89—33 BB 6 Claims
1. A machine gun ammunition loading system comprising:
a machine gun having a loading |x>sition and a charging
position;
a magazine for containing belted rounds including a leading
round;
mating means on said magazine and said machine gun for
1. A musical recorder training device comprising:
a recorder body having a plurality of tone-controlling open-
ings;
a plurality of electrode pairs, the electrodes of each elec-
trode pair being disposed on opposite sides of a respective
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
493
tone-controlling opening such that closure of a tone-con-
trolling opening with a finger tip provides an electric
current path between a respective electrode pair through
that finger tip, the electrodes in each pair being positively
fixed relative to one another;
a plurality of terminals, at least one terminal being provided
for each electrode pair and at least one additional termi-
nal;
a plurality of metal conductors secured substantially along
their entire lengths to said recorder body, each conductor
extending between a respective terminal and one elec-
trode in a respective electrode pair;
a further metal conductor secured substantially along its
entire length to said recorder body, said further conductor
extending between said additional terminal and the other
electrodes of said electrode pairs;
a plurality of electric lamps; and
circuit means connecting each of said electric lamps to a
respective terminal of said plurality of terminals for selec-
tively energizing each lamp as a function of the open and
closed condition of each tone-controlling opening, respec-
tively;
wherein said tone-controlling openings are circular holes
and wherein each electrode extends arcuately and sub-
stantially concentrically about a portion of respective
tone-controlling openings.
4,392,409
SYSTEM FOR TRANSCRIBING ANALOG SIGNALS,
PARTICULARLY MUSICAL NOTES, HAVING
CHARACTERISTIC FREQUENCIES AND DURATIONS
INTO CORRESPONDING VISIBLE INDIOA
Peter Coad, Jr., La Habra, Calif., and David E. Wilensky, Em-
porin, Kans., assignors to The Way International, New Knox-
ville, Ohio
Filed Dec. 7, 1979, Ser. No. 101,102
Int. C\? GOID 9/40; G09B 15/02: GlOG 3/04
U.S.a.84— 462 27 Qaims
««*»»
II
UULOtn
UOIU
COHItfWI
rusr
amni
mmt
-4- — ,
matt
— an
tmuot
mm
ami
1. A system for translating a series of analog signals having
characteristic frequencies and durations into written indicia
representing said signals, said system comprising:
means for converting said analog signals into a correspond-
ing series of electrical signals having corresponding char-
acteristic frequencies and durations;
means for generating a series of digital signals corresponding
to said electrical signals, said series of digital signals re-
flecting the characteristic frequencies of said correspond-
ing analog signals and for counting the number of digital
signals occuring in said latter series during successive time
intervals of predetermined length to produce counts hav-
ing values corresponding to the frequencies and durations
of said analog signals;
means for producing a series of indicia codes from the counts
produced by said generating and counting means, said
series of indicia codes corresponding to said series of
digital signals, each of said indicia codes also representing
both the frequency and the duration of a corresponding
one of said analog signals; and
means for printing indicia representing said indicia codes on
a record medium, said printing indicia identifying both the
frequency and the duration of corresponding ones of said
analog signals.
I
4,392,410
ULTRASONIC LOADING OF EXTRUDABLE PLASTIC
BONDED EXPLOSIVES
Robert R. Durrell, Columbia, Md., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,644
Int. a.3 C06B 21/00
U.S. a. 86—1 R 9 Qaims
,T0 FRtQOtNrv
. CONVtRTiR
1. A method for loading extrudable plastic bonded explo-
sives into long small diameter orifices contained in a warhead
initiation system comprising pressurizing the loading system
With an inert gas at pressures in the range of 1000 to 2000 psi
and providing ultrasonic vibrations on the loading system in
the range of from 20K H^ to 30K H,.
4,392,411
LAUNCH FOR CARRYING AND LAUNCHING FLYING
BODIES, IN PARTICULAR FOR AIRCRAFT
Bemd Minkler, Oberteuringen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Domier GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,618
Int. Q.3 F41F 7/00
U.S. Q. 89—1.819 5 Claims
1. In a launch for carrying and launching flying bodies, in
particular for aircraft, with guide devices in the form of guide
rails and guide claws engaging said rails and bearing the flying
body,
the improvement comprising
(a) means whereby the guide claws can be adjusted together
with the flying body relative to the aircraft-fixed launch in
the direction of flight within the guide rails and also rela-
tive to the flying body they carry in the direction of the
flying body tail,
(b) detachable, positive connection means and frictional
connection means between the guide claws and the flying
body, and
(c) braking means for the guide claws at the launch.
494
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,412
GASEOUS BLAST REDUCER
Edward M. Schmidt, Forest Hill, and George D. Kahl, Aber-
deen, both of Md., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington,
D.C.
FUed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,220
Int. a.^ F41F n/12
U.S. a. 89—14 D 5 aaims
12 24 26
1. Apparatus for reducing blast from an explosive source
which includes:
a gun barrel having a muzzle;
means for supplying a gas, which includes a pressurized
container containing said gas;
means for containing said gas in the vicinity of said source
whereby the blast is forced to propagate through said gas
before reaching ambient air which includes:
an inflatable membrane; and
. means for securing said inflatable membrane over said muz-
zle; and
means for releasing said gas into said means for containing.
4,392,413
MUZZLE ATTACHMENT FOR A HREARM BARREL
Mack W. Gwinn, Jr., Levant, Me., assignor to Firepower, Inc.,
Hancock, Me.
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,148
Int. C\} F41C 21/18
U.S. a. 89—14 C 1 Qaim
»5?/^6V«»-'?^8?'',^
first large chamber within a rearward region thereof and
within the vicinity of the vertical axial plane of said tubu-
lar member for venting the gases of said firearm from said
flrst large chamber in a vertically upwardly and out-
wardly mode as a result of each bore of each aperture
intersecting the longitudinal axis of said tubular member
whereby a downwardly directed reaction is impressed
upon said muzzle attachment and said firearm so as to
arrest the natural climb of said firearm and muzzle attach-
ment when said firearm is fired;
the forwardmost end of said tubular member having a sub-
stantially truncated conical configuration;
aperture means defined within the central axial and p>eriph-
eral p>ortions of said baffle means for providing fluidic
communication between said first large chamber and said
second smaller chamber, the annular portion of said baffle
means defined between said central and peripheral aper-
ture means serving as means for interfering with the flow
of gases from said first large chamber to said second
smaller chamber and thereby provide a reaction surface
for said gases whereby a forward force for counteracting
the natural recoil of said firearm is impressed upon said
firearm and muzzle attachment, said peripheral gas flow
from said first chamber to said second chamber impinging
upon said truncated surfaces of said forwardmost end of
said tubular muzzle attachment whereby said truncated
surfaces also serve as reaction means for said gases
whereby an additional forward force for counteracting
said natural recoil of said firearm is impressed upon said
muzzle attachment and said firearm;
rib means defined within the upper and lower wall surfaces
of said tubular member defining said second forwardly
disposed chamber for defining slot means within the side-
walls of said tubular member attachment such that the net
venting effect of said gases from said forward chamber is
upwardly and outwardly whereby a net downwardly
directed reaction force is impressed upon said muzzle
attachment and said firearm so as to arrest the natural
climb of said firearm and said muzzle attachment when
said firearm is fired; and
forwardly and outwardly directed slot means defined within
the downstream end of said first larger chamber sidewall
portions for venting said gases from said first larger cham-
ber so as to intercept said gases vented from said second
smaller chamber through said sidewall slot means and
causing all of said gases to flow forwardly away from the
muzzle end portion of said firearm barrel and thereby
substantially reduce the noise level perceived by the per-
son firing said firearm.
4,392,414
AMMUNITION BELT
Richard Koine, Ratingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Rheinmetall GmbH, Duesseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,410
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 13,
1980, 3005256
Int. a.3 F42B 39/08
U.S. a. 89—35 R 2 Claims
1. A muzzle attachment for a firearm having a barrel with a
muzzle end portion, comprising:
a tubular member;
baflle means disposed within said tubular member for defin-
ing a first large rearwardly disposed chamber and a sec-
ond smaller forwardly dis]X)sed chamber; 1. An improved ammunition belt for automatic barrel weap-
aperture means defined within the upper wall portion of said ons, in particular machine cannons, wherein the belt comprises
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
495
a plurality of belt members each of which is adapted to accom-
modate an ammunition unit therein and which includes flexible
retention means mounted on the belt for maintaining the am-
munition units in operative position thereon and which in-
cludes means for interaction with the ammunition belt feed
means of the automatic barrel weapon, the improvement com-
prising
(a) each belt member comprises ammunition holding means
for detachably holding an ammunition unit in operative
position in said belt member; and at least one strap pivot-
ally connected to the ammunition holding means by means
of a first pivotal connection;
(b) each of said straps having an opening passing there-
through which is spaced from the first pivotal connection
between said strap and said holding means;
(c) the means for interaction with the ammunition belt feed
means being disposed on said ammunition holding means
and at the first pivotal connection connecting the holding
means and the strap;
(d) the opening in said strap is adapted to form part of a
second pivotal connection connecting said strap and the
ammunition holding means of the next following belt
member, said second pivotal connection also forming part
of said means for interaction with the ammunition belt
feed means;
(e) a pair of straps is pivotally connected to opposite ends of
said ammunition holding means to form said first pivotal
connection; said means for interaction with the ammuni-
tion belt feed means being formed by pin-like projections
at said second pivotal connection on said holding means
and said first pivotal connection; and
(0 said opening has an arcuate configuration the center of
curvature of which coincides with the axis of the first
pivotal connection.
4,392,415
CONTROL FOR DEAD ENGINE LOWER
Kurt B. Melocik, Mazon, III., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor
Co., Peoria, 111.
per No. PCrAJS80/01704, § 371 Date Dec. 19, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 19, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/02230, PCT Pub.
Date Jul. 8, 1982
PCT Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 273,889
Int. a.3 F16K il/l22
U.S. a. 91—461 2 Qaims
1. In a fiuid system (10) having a fluid source (12), a tank
(38), an actuator (28) having a first end (30) and a second load
supporting end (32); a pilot operated control valve (14) having
first and second ends (66,70) and being connected to said
source (12) and said actuator (28); a source of pilot fluid (62);
a pilot control valve (48) connected to said source of pilot fluid
(62) and said first and second ends (66,70) of the pilot operated
control valve (14) and movable between at least one operating
position and a float position; a make-up valve (42) connected
between the first end (30) of the actuator (28) and the main
control valve (14), a vent line (74) connected to the make-up
valve (42) and the pilot control valve (48) and being in commu-
nication with the tank (38) at the float position (D) of the pilot
control valve (62); the improvement comprising:
means (79) for communicating the second load supporting
end (32) of the actuator (28) to the tank (38) only through
said vent line (74) and said pilot control valve (48) in
response to loss of said source of pilot fluid (62) and said
pilot control valve (48) being moved to said float position
(D) so that the second load supporting end (32) can be
vented to the tank (38) at a controlled rate regardless of
the pressure of the fluid in the second load supporting end.
4,392,416
SWASH-PLATE TYPE COMPRESSOR HAVING LOW
NOISE THRUST BEARINGS
Yutaka Ishizuka, Konan, Japan, assignor to Diesel Kiki Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,008
Claims priority, application Japan, May 10, 1980, 55-61935
Int. a.3 P04B 1/16. 1/18
U.S. CI. 92—71 10 Qaims
13 9 7 J ? 1»B 30' He n ?1 19 ' J '»o
1. In a swash-plate type compressor including: a pair of
cylinder blocks combined together in axial alignment, said
combined cylinder blocks each having an axial hole extending
along an axis thereof and a plurality of cylinder bores axially
extending therethrough in circumferentially spaced relation; a
drive shaft inserted in said axial holes of said cylinder blocks; a
plurality of pistons slidably received within respective ones of
said cylinder bores; and a swash plate engaging with said
pistons and rigidly fitted at a boss thereof on said drive shaft,
said boss having opposite end faces, each of said opposite end
faces being substantially flat and extending substantially
straight and substantially radially of said drive shaft over a
substantially whole area thereof, said combined cylinder
blocks having a pair of central seating portions facing opposite
said end faces of said boss of said swash plate, said central
seating portions having end faces facing said end faces of said
boss, each of said end faces of said central seating portions
being substantially flat and extending substantially straight and
substantially radially of said drive shaft over a substantially
whole area thereof, said axial holes of said cylinder blocks
opening in end faces of respective ones of said central seating
portions facing said swash plate;
the improvement comprising a pair of thrust bearings ar-
ranged at opposite ends of said swash plate for supporting
thrust loads caused by said swash plate, said pair of thrust
bearings each comprising:
a plurality of seats, each seat being in the form of a blind
hole, said seats being formed in the substantially flat end
face of a corresponding one of said central seating por-
tions and arranged around a corresponding one of said
axial holes and in circumferentially spaced relation; and
a plurality of bearing members corresponding in number to
said seats, said bearing members each having no fluid
passage formed therein and each having one end portion
thereof slidably fitted in a corresponding one of said seats;
said seats each having a hole shape corresponding to the
shape of said one end portion of a corresponding one of
said bearing members for receiving a corresponding one
of said bearing members therein;
496
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
said bearing members each having another formed with an
end face being substantially planar over a substantially
whole area thereof such that said substantially planar end
faces of said another ends of said bearing members have
no recess formed therein, said bearing members each
having said substantially planar end face thereof disposed
in slidable contact with an associated end face of said boss
of said swash plate along a substantially whole area
thereof; and
said end faces of said boss of said swash plate being slightly
spaced by said bearing members from said opposite end
faces of said central seating portions of said combined
cylinder blocks.
4,392,417
VARIABLE DEAD BAND PRESSURE CONTROL
SYSTEM
James R. Johannsen, Minnetonka, Minn., assignor to McQuay-
Perfex Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 34,869, Apr. 30, 1979, Pat. No. 4,257,318.
This application Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,016
Int. a.3 B64D 13/00
U.S. a. 98—1.5 3 aaims
vessel, in a manner so as to gently agitate said homogene-
ous mass without the need for mechanical agitation means;
(c) steam injector means disposed within said vessel for
injecting steam interiorly thereof to uniformly raise the
temperature of the homogeneous mass, said means being
fixedly disposed intermediate the homogeneous mass and
comprising:
(1) a steam chamber having a steam inlet and side walls
provided with a plurality of steam outlet passages ar-
ranged to eject steam outwardly in a direction toward
the homogeneous mass; and
(2) steam deflection means disposed within said steam
chamber proximate said steam inlet for deflecting steam
toward the outlet passages provided in said side walls;
and
(d) sensor means cooperatively associated with said steam
injector means for sensing the temperature of the homoge-
neous mass and stopping the flow of steam into said vessel
when a predetermined temperature is reached.
9. An apparatus for cooking food products comprising:
(a) a vessel for containing a homogeneous mass comprising
the product to be cooked immersed in a liquid;
^SA 400'
isr^
turret
VANE
»CTU*TO«
u
-L.
44
JO
'f^W^
CALIWATION
CIRCUIT
1. A control system for controlling the return air blower of
an air distribution system including a supply blower which
may operate at varying air flow rates, for maintaining proper
relative airflow of the return blower in response to the airflow
of the supply blower, comprising:
means responsive to the supply air flow for producing a
signal indicative thereof;
means responsive to the return air flow for producing a
signal indicative thereof;
actuator means operatively connected for controlling the air
flow of said return blower;
comparison means operatively connected to provide control
signals to said actuator in response to received supply and
return air flow signals, to control return air flow to follow
supply air flow;
calibration means connecting said supply air flow signal and
said return air flow signal to said comparison means, said
calibration means including adjustable means for indepen-
dent adjustment of high and low air flow rate settings of
said actuator corresponding to high and low air flow
settings of said supply blower; and
said comparison means including a variable dead band con-
troller for providing said control signals to said actuator
when the calibrated supply and return air flow signals
applied thereto differ by more than a predetermined dead
band, and including means for narrowing the dead band to
rebalance the system according to the supply air flow and
for widening the dead band to prevent excessive system
hunting or oscillation.
4,392,418
COOKING APPARATUS
James A. Jimenez, Temple City, Calif., assignor to Electra Food
Machinery, Inc., El Monte, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 619,837, Oct. 6, 1975,
abandoned. This application Nov. 7, 1977, Ser. No. 849,400
Int. C\? A47J 27/04
U.S. a. 99—330 14 Qaims
1. An apparatus for cooking food products comprising:
(a) a vessel for containing a homogeneous mass comprising
the product to be cooked immersed in a liquid;
(b) pump means for circulating the liquid throughout said
(b) pump means for circulating the liquid throughout said
vessel to gently agitate said homogeneous mass without
the necessity for mechanical agitation means;
(c) a hollow housing disposed within said vessel;
(d) a steam chamber fixedly mounted within said hollow
housing centrally of said homogeneous mass, said steam
chamber having a steam inlet and side walls provided with
a plurality of steam outlet passageways;
(e) means disposed within said steam chamber for deflecting
steam through said steam outlet passageways to uniformly
heat the liquid comprising a part of said homogeneous
mass; and
(0 means for sensing the temperature of the homogeneous
mass and stopping the flow of steam to said steam inlet of
said steam chamber when a predetermined temperature is
reached.
12. The apparatus as defined in claim 9 including means
disposed with said hollow housing for removably covering a
portion of the outlet passageways formed in said steam cham-
ber.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
497
4,392,419
CdOKING AND SMOKING APPARATUS
Weldon D. Bonny, R.D. 1, Dalton, Pa. 18414
Filed Mar. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 133,795
Int. a.3 A47J 37/04
U.S. CI. 99—339 14 Qaims
/
1. A cooking and smoking apparatus comprising a housing
enclosing a cooking and smoking space and having an upper
portion and a lower portion, a perforated shelf inside said
housing in said upper portion for supporting goods to be
cooked or smoked, a first opening in said upper portion of said
housing for the egress of smoke therefrom, a second opening in
said lower portion of said housing, a fire box including an
enclosed drawer selectively slideable in and out of said second
opening and having a transverse cross section substantially
complemental to said second opening, said drawer having a
flat horizontal uninterrupted top surface defining an uninter-
rupted planar cover completely covering said drawer for clos-
ing the top of said drawer and providing a cooking surface, an
openable and closeable front access door for said drawer, a
damper means in communication with the interior of said
firebox for controlling the size and intensity of the fire therein,
and an exit passageway through said drawer remote from said
front access door and said top surface to conduct heat and
smoke from the interior of said firebox into the interior of said
housing even while said drawer is partially moved outwardly
of said second opening of said lower portion of said housing,
said planar cover serving as a second cooking means when said
drawer is moved to any of its outward positions.
1. In a recirculating hot oil cooking assembly for animal and
vegetable product pieces,
an elongated pan assembly having front, rear, bottom, and
side walls for containing a volume of hot oil flowing
between a product entry zone located near said front wall
and adapted to receive said product pieces in raw form
and a product exit zone located near said rear wall and
adapted to discharge said product pieces after cooking;
a sump formed in the bottom of said pan near said product
exit zone for withdrawing oil from said pan assembly;
an inlet header assembly for supplying hot oil to said pan
assembly at said product entry zone including an inlet feed
jet extending substantially across said front wall of said
pan assembly underneath the surface of said volume of oil
to supply a substantially uniform stream of oil at a substan-
tial velocity across a surface region of said product entry
zone;
a pump and heat exchanger assembly coupled between said
sump and said inlet header for recirculating reheated oil
therebetween to establish said flowing volume of hot oil in
said pan assembly; and
flow directing means mounted adjacent said product entry
zone of said pan assembly for repetitively altering the
localized flow direction of said volume of hot oil to reduce
recirculating eddy currents in said oil in said product
entry zone, said flow directing means comprising a plural-
ity of fin means positioned at spaced preselected non-nor-
mal orientations behind the product entry zone and mov-
able so as to achieve said repetitively alternating localized
flow of said hot oil while reducing eddy currents in said
oil, said flow directing means additionally including
means to repetetively move said fins for such purpose,
whereby improved movement of said product pieces
away from said product entry zone towards said product
exit zone is produced to reduce clumping of raw product
pieces in said product entry zone.
4,392,421
RICE HULLING AND SORTING DEVICE
Noriyuki Yano, Kochi; Satoni Yahashi, Nangoku; Kanzo
Shimazaki, Nangoku; Mitsuaki Nakazawa, Nangoku, and
Takashi Yamamoto, Nangoku, all of Japan, assignors to Seirei
Industry Company Limited, Okayama and Yanma Agricul-
tural Equipment Company Limited, Osaki, both of, Japan
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,453
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1980, 55-121472;
Mar. 27, 1980, 55-39975; Mar. 27, 1980, 55-39976; Mar. 27,
1980, 55-41023; Mar. 27, 1980, 55-41025; Mar. 27, 1980,
55-41026; Mar. 27, 1980, 55-41032
Int. C\? B02B 3/04, 7/02
U.S. a. 99—524 8 Qaims
4,392,420
REORCULATING HOT OIL COOKING APPARATUS
Andrew A. Caridis, Foster City, and Qark K. Benson, Milibrae,
both of Calif., assignors to Heat & Control, Inc., So. San
Francisco, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 222,1 H, Jan. 5, 1981, abandoned. This
application Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,337
Int. a.3 A47J 37/12
U.S. a. 99—406 19 Qaims
JO e It £ » ?i
7. In a rice hulling and sorting machine, the combination
including:
horizontally disposed sorting cylinder means arranged for
rotation about its longitudinal axis;
fixed trough means extending generally horizontally along
the length of the interior of said sorting cylinder means;
the interior surface of said sorting cylinder means being
provided with a multitude of generally radially inwardly
facing recesses, each of said recesses being of a size to
temp)orarily trap therein a single grain of unpolished rice
when disposed in a lower portion of its circumferential
path of movement and to discharge said trapped grain of
rice into said trough means when disposed m an upper
portion of said movement;
said trough means including an adjusting plate extending in
the longitudinal direction of the trough means and up-
wardly from one side thereof, the lower margin of said
498
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
plate being pivotally mounted for adjusting the angle of
inclination of the plate.
4,392,422
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING LIQUID FROM A
SUSPENSION
Sven Hakansson, Vasterhaninge, Sweden, assignor to Axel John-
son Engineering AB, Nynaeshamn, Sweden
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,994
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 25, 1980, 8004701
Int. aj B30B 9/24
U.S. a. 100—118 5 Qaims
(r2) from said rotational supporting point to a contact
point at which said lever member acts as the push rod
operating part, said armature is mounted on said lever
member having the distance ri to said operating part at a
position corresponding to said distance (L) so that the
equivalent mass of said lever member with said armature
mounted thereto is minimized.
(9-©.
1. Apparatus for removing liquid from a suspension compris-
ing a pair of continuous webs movable over a portion of their
length along a common path having an upstream end for intro-
ducing the suspension between the webs, a first pressing sec-
tion including at least a first press drum about a portion of
which the pair of webs pass, a second pressing section located
downstream from the first pressing section and comprising a
second press drum and pressure means for applying pressure to
the outer web relative to the second press drum, outlet means
located downstream from the second pressing section for
removing a relative dried suspension material, and means for
separating one of the pair of webs from the other web of the
pair downstream of the first pressure section and prior to the
second pressure section, the other web of the pair passing as
the outer web to carry the suspension material around a por-
tion of the second press drum to the outlet means.
4,392,423
PRINTING HAMMER DRIVING APPARATUS
Isao Nakigima, Iwamamachi; Koji Tagusari; Kenji Okuna, both
of Sbimoinayoshi; Tom Hayama, Kashiwa; Kazue Takahashi,
Shimoinayoshi; Michihiro Watanabe, Sbimoinayoshi, and
Sumihisa Kotani, Shimoinayoshi, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi, Ltd. and Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd., both of Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 7,982, Jan. 1, 1979, abandoned.
This application May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,318
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 8, 1978, 53-12398;
Mar. 29, 1978, 53-35481
Int. a.J B41J 9/02
U.S. a. 101-93.48 2 Claims
1. A printing hammer driving apparatus capable of high
speed printing, comprising:
a lever member made of a light-weight non-magnetic mate-
rial, said lever member having a base end used as a rota-
tional supporting point and another end thereof used as a
push rod operating part to drive a printing hammer,
an armature mounted to project from an intermediate part of
said lever member in a direction of rotation of said lever
member about said supporting point, and
an electromagnet including at least a core and an exciting
coil wound on said core, said core of said electromagnet
having at least two magnetic pole faces which are opposed
to said armature with gaps therebetween, wherein for a
given ratio of a distance (L) from the rotational supporting
point of said lever member to said armature to a distance
4,392,424
BELT PRINTING MECHANISM HAVING IMPROVED
CATCH MECHANISM FOR DETENTING POSITIONING
WHEEL
Kurt Schrotz, Hirschhorn, and Richard Schwobel, Rothenberg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Esselte Pendaflex
Corporation, Garden City, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,222
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 16,
1980, 3034923
Int. a.3 B41J 1/60
VJS. a. 101—111 5 Qaims
<^-:=^^
1. In a belt printing mechanism having a plurality of parallel
continuous type belts which on their exterior surface carry
print types and which extend around an adjusting wheel and a
plurality of respective star wheels where the star wheels are
rotatable about a shaft and where each star wheel has four
comers, and spring tongues for preventing free rotation of the
star wheels which are held under tension against the star
wheels to hold the latter in predetermined detent positions
where the spring tongues touch at least two separated points of
the perimeter located between two adjacent comers of the star
wheels, the improvement wherein for each star wheel only one
spring-tongue is provided whose plane with respect to the
plane in which its associated star wheel rotates about the shaft
is an acute angle.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
499
4,392,425
RETRACTABLE INK STAMP
John P. Capezzuto, Cambridge, and Lewis H. Johnson, Mans-
field, both of Mass., assignors to Dennison Manufacturing
Company, Framingham, Mass.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,992
Int. a.3 B41K 1/50 1/56
U.S. a. 101—327 9 Qaims
towards and from said doctor blade to close or open communi-
cation between said at least one opening and at least some of
1. A retractable ink stamp comprising:
a handle,
an ink stamp housing slideably mounted to one end of the
handle, and
a retractable ink stamp assembly located substantially within
the ink stamp housing, said ink stamp assembly comprising
an ink stamp matrix having a thickness in a range between
about I inch to 1 inch and a total volume of at least 0.06
cubic inches, said stamp matrix constructed of a nonelasto-
meric polymer foam having an open cell structure, an
average pore diameter of between about 36 to 44 microns
and a pore volume of about 25 to 45 percent of the total
matrix volume, the polymer foam selected from the group
consisting of polyethylene, polypropylene, poly vinylchlo-
ride and polyvinyl/fluoride, and means for self-retracting
the ink stamp matrix, said means comprised of a member
having at least one fold circumferentially within its sur-
face to produce a bellows effect within the member as the
handle is depressed, said means interconnecting the stamp
matrix and said handle so that as the handle is depressed,
the housing and handle slide towards each other causing a
minor portion of the matrix to extend beyond the open end
of said ink stamp housing, and as said handle is released,
said self-retracting means causes the ink matrix to with-
draw into the interior of the stamp housing.
said chambers to provide a required dosing of ink received by
said roller.
4,392,427
INK FOUNTAIN FOR PRINTING MACHINES
Erich G. Wieland, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Koenig & Bauer AG, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,849
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10,
1980, 3033996
Int. Q.' B41F 31/04: B41L 27/06
U.S. Q. 101—365 1 Qaim
4,392,426
|NK-APPLYING ARRANGEMENT
Regina Wege, Leipzig, German Democratic Rep., assignor to
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Leipzig, Leip-
zig, German Democratic Rep.
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,176
Qaims priority, application German Democratic Rep., Apr.
15, 1980, 220444
Int. Q.3 B41F 31/04, 31/06, 31/08
U.S. Q. 101—363 13 Qaims
1. An ink-applying device, particularly for a printing ma-
chine, comprising a funnel-shaped ink reservoir having at least
one opening through which ink is discharged and including a
wall formed with a doctor blade in the region of said opening,
a rotary pick-up roller positioned in the proximity of said
opening to receive ink therefrom, said pick-up roller including
at least one longitudinally extending row of ink dosing cham-
bers formed in a circumferential surface thereof; and movable
means, said movable means including a plurality of sliding
members adapted to slide along said circumferential surface
1. An ink fountain for use in printing machines, said ink
fountain comprising:
an ink fountain roller plunging into said ink fountain;
a plurality of individually operable ink metering elements
pivotably positioned laterally side by side in a longitudinal
gap in an ink fountain bottom portion of said ink fountain,
each of said ink metering elements being provided with a
pivotable arm which passes through a vertical opening in
said longitudinal gap;
a fiat, elastic sealing strip rigidly secured to, and leakproofly
connected with, rear parts of all of said ink metering
elements and a tail surface of said ink fountain;
an elastic sealing cord extending along the length of all said
ink metering elements and being disposed between a left
guiding surface of said longitudinal gap and vertical sur-
faces of said ink metering elements immediately facing
said left guiding surface; and
elastic sealing membranes sealingly engaging each of said
pivotable arms and said bottom about each of said vertical
500
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
openings, said elastic sealing strip, said elastic sealing
cord, and said elastic sealing membranes cooperating with
said longitudinal gap to defme a sealed, lubricant filled
chamber, said ink metering elements, with the exception
of ink guiding surfaces having ink metering extensions
which project into the ink fountain, being completely
disposed in said sealed, lubricant filled chamber.
4,392,428
INK FOUNTAIN FOR PRINTING MACHINES
Erich G. Wieland, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Koenig & Bauer AG, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,852
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10,
1980, 3033997
Int. a.3 B41F 31/04: B41L 27/06
U.S. a. 101—365 4 Qaims
mote control device with a servo system actuating doctor
blade support elements, comprising a servo system including
a set point providing section;
a control system connected to the servo system and pro-
vided at its inputs and outputs with multiplexers includ-
ing
a servo drive;
a motor control circuit;
a process control unit coordinating with the right sequence
the motor control unit successively on the input and out-
put side to the servo system;
1. An ink fountain for use in printing machines, said ink
fountain comprising: an ink fountain roller plunging into said
ink fountain; a plurality of ink metering elements provided
laterally side by side in an ink fountain bottom of said ink
fountain to form an adjustable ink metering slot in cooperation
with a peripheral surface of said ink fountain roller; said ink
fountain bottom having a longitudinal gap which is axially
parallel to said ink fountain roller and having a parallelogram-
shaped cross section, a base surface of said longitudinal gap
extending parallel to a bottom surface of said ink fountain
bottom, a left guiding surface of said gap and said bottom
surface forming at their abutting edge a common pivoting edge
for said ink metering elements and enclosing an angle less than
or equal to 90°; and a right guiding surface in said longitudinal
gap; each of said ink metering elements being individually
operable, being rigidly secured to a pivotable arm and being
capable of pivoting around said pivoting edge; and wherein
portions of the periphery of said ink metering elements which
are disposed in said longitudinal gap are in contact with said
guiding surfaces.
SnitJJ » 37 X M
» 2t Ml i 21 1
13 7 14 31 J3 38 -tp 30 2)
28 in
S 22 a 21t Z3 32 li 29 Figl
a first computing circuit preceding the motor control unit;
a difference forming unit having input and output con-
nected to the process control unit and having its output
connected to the first computing circuit;
a switching means connected to the difference forming
unit and connected to an input multiplexer of the con-
trol system; and
a second computing circuit connected to the motor con-
trol unit and to the switching means.
4,392,430
BASE-LOCK TYPE FONT HOLDER FOR IMPRINTING
APPARATUS
Burton L. Siegal, Skokie, III., assignor to Kiwi Coders Corpora-
tion, Wheeling, III.
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,445
Int. aj B41F 27/00
U.S. a. 101—381 19 Qaims
4,392,429
MULTIPLICATIVE ADJUSTMENT PROVISION AT AN
INK FEED REMOTE CONTROL DEVICE
Karl-Heinz Fbrster, Dresden, and Hans Johne, Radebeul, both
of German Democratic Rep., assignors to Veb Kombinat
Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Leipzig, Leipzig, German
Democratic Rep.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,091
Oalms priority, application German Democratic Rep., Dec.
12, 1980, 226000
Int. a.3 B41F 31/04
U.S. O. 101—365 2 Claims
1. A multiplicative adjustment provision at an ink feed re-
1. A base-lock type-font holder for use with an imprinting
device comprising a body having an outwardly opening cavity
of generally rectangular configuration and a peripheral rim
surrounding said cavity, a plurality of base-lock segments each
having at least a pair of transverse passages and arranged in
parallel rows within said cavity with said passages thereof
aligned coaxially, said rows of segments defining parallel type-
font holding grooves, a pair of spaced passageways formed in
each of a pair of opposite poriions of said peripheral rim, screw
means engaged through said passageways and passages of said
segments, said screw means having a head portion at one end,
said head portion being of a configuration defining opposite
side surfaces, means carried by said screw means for clamping
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
501
said segments tightly upon rotation of said screw means in one
direction for securing the type-font within said holding
grooves and in the opposite direction for releasing same, a
connecting bore formed in one of said rim portions communi-
cating between said adjacent passageways and resilient means
within said connecting bore in bearing relationship with a
facing side surface of said head portion of said screw means
with force sufficient to bias said screw means against non-
manipulated rotation particularly in said opposite direction.
4,392,431
METHOD TO MAINTAIN SMOOTH RUNNING OF INK
METERING ELEMENTS IN INK FOUNTAINS OF
PRINTING MACHINES
Erich G. Wieland, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Koenig & Bauer AG, Wiirzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,848
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10,
1980, 3033995
Int. Q.3 B41F 31/04; B41L 27/06
U.S. Q. 101—426 4 Qaims
1. A method of maintaining smooth running of individually
adjustable ink metering elements of an ink fountain having an
ink fountain roller in a printing machine wherein a plurality of
said ink metering elements are disposed laterally side by side in
a row in a bottom portion of said ink fountain parallel to an axis
of rotation of said ink fountain roller, said method comprising
the steps of: supplying a lubricant through a longitudinal bore-
hole formed in each said ink metering element; and
pressing said lubricant from said longitudinal borehole in
each said metering element into the space between front
sides of immediately adjacent ones of said ink metering
elements whereby ink and dirt particles are excluded from
said spaces between adjacent ones of said ink metering
elements thereby maintaining smooth running of said
elements.
resulting from the burning of said propellant charge, to
push the simulator into the air,
(b) propellant charge means attached to said container to
propel said container into the air,
(c) ignition means for igniting said propellant charge.
/n
(d) burster charge means disposed within said container to
shatter said frangible container to disseminate said readily
dispersable substance in air, and
(e) detonating means associated with said burster charge
means for detonating said burster charge.
4,392,433
RAILWAY MAINTENANCE MACHINE
Qifford A. Nyland, Prior Lake, Minn., assignor to Railroad
Service, Inc., Lakeville, Minn.
Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,016
Int. Q.3 EOIB 29/10
U.S. Q. 104—9 5 Qaims
4,392,432
AtR BURST MUNITIONS SIMULATOR
Walter J. Fenrick; Robert H. Chesney, and Paul A. Mast, all of
Medicine Hat, Canada, assignors to Her Mtyesty the Queen
in right of Canada, as represented by the Minister of National
Defence, Canada
I Filed Feb. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 125,630
Qaims priority, application Canada, Jul. 19, 1979, 331921
Int. Q.3 F42B 13/44
U.S. Q. 102—334 5 Qaims
1. An air-burst munitions simulator for disseminating a
readily dispersable substance in air, comprising
(a) payload container means of a suitable frangible plastics
material adapted to contain a readily dispersable sub-
stance, said payload container means including a convex
obturator which when positioned in a barrel of a launcher
defines a confined airspace to collect a cushion of gases
1. A device for removing old railroad ties from beneath an
elevated length of track and inserting new ties in place of those
removed, comprising:
(a) a working member including
(i) a removing arm having first and second ends and a
plurality of tie engagement elements at said second end,
said removing arm disposed for movement generally
about said first end; and
(ii) an inserting arm having first and second ends and a tie
502
OFFICIAL GAZETI E
July 12, 1983
lifting lip mounted at said second end of said inserting
arm generally perpendicular thereto, said inserting arm
fixed relative to said removing arm and spaced angu-
larly therefrom for movement generally about its said
first end; and
(b) means for imparting rotational movement to said work-
ing member with said arms moving generally about their
said first ends.
4,392,435
TRANSPORT APPARATUS
Brian R. Moody, Darwen; Duncan B. Lowe, Mobberley, and
Derek W. Lowe, Southport, ail of England, assignors to
United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority, London, England
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,723
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 3, 1979,
7927231
Int. a.J B61B 13/08. 13/10
U.S. a. 104—284 5 Qaims
4,392,434
TURBULENT WATERWAY
Dierk Diirwald, and Karl-Ernst Kaufmann, both of Wetter, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Mannesmann Demag AG,
Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,192
Int. a.>A63G 21/18; B65G 17/06
U.S. a. 104—70 5 Qaims
1. In a turbulent waterway having boats guided in a water
trough extending between an uphill starting point and a down-
hill terminus water basin,
(a) a chain conveyor means having a series of links extending
on a slope between said starting point and said terminus
water basin and adapted to travel upwardly therebetween,
said chain conveyor means being substantially comprised
of alternating vertically and horizontally oriented chain
links, each of which has rounded edges;
(b) the underside of said boats being provided along their
length with at least one lengthwise extending locking bar
means with transverse grooves adapted to mesh with the
horizontally oriented chain links of said chain conveyor;
(c) said chain conveyor means, when moving at a selected
speed, serving to initially, upon contact between said
chain conveyor means and said locking bar means, pull
said boat at a speed less than said selected speed until said
boat accelerates to said selected speed whereupon said
chain conveyor means meshes with said locking bar
means; and
(d) sliding support means for supporting said chain links for
sliding therealong, said sliding support means having a
vertically oriented groove for guiding said vertically
oriented chain links such that said horizontally oriented
chain links mesh with said transverse grooves of said
locking bar means.
1. An apparatus for transporting toxic or radioactive articles
comprising an enclosed passageway defining a path of travel
for the articles, at least one work station positioned along and
communicating with said passageway intermediate its ends, a
movable drive unit located outside the passageway, a juxta-
posed slave unit within the passageway forming a carrier for an
article movable in unison with the drive unit, electromagnet
means on the drive unit to couple the drive unit to the slave
unit for movement, control means for maintaining the slave
unit magnetically suspended within the passageway and at a
desired position relative to the drive unit upon energization of
the electromagnet means, a barrier of magnetically transparent
material extending along the passageway and positioned be-
tween the drive unit and the slave unit to physically isolate the
drive unit from the slave unit and to protect the drive unit from
contamination within the passageway arising from the toxic or
radioactive articles whereby to permit ready access to the
drive unit for maintenance and the like operations.
4,392,436
KNOCKDOWN METAL TABLE
Raywood C. Weiier, Fontana, Calif., assignor to BMC Products,
Chicago, III.
FUed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,295
Int. a.3 A47B 1/04, 13/18. 91/00
U.S. a. 108—81 8 Oaims
1. In combination a generally rectangular table and an auxil-
iary component removably attached thereto, said table includ-
ing a horizontal member having depending flanges forming a
plurality of comers, and a plurality of legs each being defined
by four sides with adjacent sides being perpendicular so that
said legs are generally square shaped in cross section, a diago-
nal connecting member at each of said comers, each of said
diagonal connecting members having threaded means, a screw
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
503
member received in each of said threaded means, said screw
members being adjustable relative to said legs, a U-shaped
member diagonally positioned and engaged by each of said
screw members with spaced sides of each of said U-shaped
members engaging the innermost right angle comer of one of
said legs and adapted to apply pressure against said leg to hold
said leg in one of said comers formed by said depending
flanges, said screw members when retracted permitting re-
moval of said legs, said auxiliary component including a pair of
spaced attaching means each having a flat portion with each
such portion being adapted to be received between a corre-
sponding one of said legs and flanges before the screw member
is adjusted to secure said leg to one of said comers formed by
said depending flanges.
4,392,437
FOLDABLE TABLE WITH FOLDABLE SUPPORT
FRAME
John D. Wallace, 18 Cranbury Neck Rd., Cranbury, N.J. 08512
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,880
Int. a.3 A47B 3/00
U.S. a. 108—112 8 Qaims
pands are in said folded conflguration to a support posi-
tion in which said second end of said first bar member is
received within said first C-shaped channel portion of said
second assembly so that said first bar member spans be-
tween said first and second subassemblies when said pan-
els are in said unfolded configuration; and means for piv-
otably attaching said first end of said second bar member
within said second C-shaped channel portion of one of
said first and second subassemblies so that said second bar
member may be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to
said plane of the respective one of said first and second
panels from a storage position when said panels are in said
folded configuration to a support position in which said
second end of said second bar member is received within
said second C-shaped channel portion of the other one of
said first and second subassemblies so that said second bar
member spans between said first and second subassemblies
when said panels are in said unfolded configuration.
A D
4,392,438
COAL TRANSPORT SYSTEM
James L. Dooley, Santa Monica, Calif., assignor to R
Associates, Marina del Rey, Calif.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,911
Int. a.3 F23K 3/02
U.S. a. 110—106 R 13 Qaims
i.-'-rri I
1. A foldable assembly comprising:
first and second substantially planar and rectangular panels
each having respective first and second short sides and
respective first and second long sides;
means for foldably joining said first and second panels so
that said panels may be selectively placed in a folded
configuration or in an unfolded configuration in which
their planes are substantially coplanar;
said means for foldably joining said first and second panels
joining said panels so that said second long side of said
first panel is joined to said first long side of said second
panel, said first short sides are in substantial alignment and
said second short sides are in substantial alignment;
a first subassembly attached to said first panel proximate said
first long side hereof;
a second subassembly attached to said second panel proxi-
mate said second long side hereof;
said first subassembly having first and second channel por-
tions each with a generally C-shaped cross-section proxi-
mate said first and second short sides, respectively, of said
first panel;
said second subassembly having first and second channel
portions each with a generally C-shaped cross-section
proximate said first and second short sides, respectively,
of said second panel;
first and second bar members each having first and second
ends; means for pivotably attaching said first end of said
first bar member within said first C-shaped channel por-
tion of said first subassembly so that said first bar member
may be rotated in a plane substantially parallel to said
plane of said first panel from a storage position when said
1. An economical system for transporting coal from a first
location where coal is abundant and inexpensive to a utilization
point, as a non-explosive particulate suspension in gas compris-
ing:
means for forming coal gas from coal at said first location;
means for pulverizing coal into very fine particles at said
first location;
an extended length conduit more than one mile in length
extending from said first location to said utilization point;
means for compressing said coal gas at said first location;
means for supplying said coal particles and the pressurized
coal gas to said conduit with the coal particles suspended
in said coal gas to form a non-explosive two phase system;
means for collecting and utilizing both said coal particles
and said coal gas at the other end of said extended conduit;
and
means for maintaining said coal particles in suspension in
said coal gas as the suspension passes through the conduit,
said means for maintaining said coal particles in suspension
including means for rotating the suspension as it passes
along the length of said conduit comprising vanes
mounted within said conduit and oriented at an angle with
respect to the longitudinal axis of said conduit.
504
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,439
PNEUMATIC TRANSPORT DEVICE PARTICULARLY
FOR SINGLE-SEED SEED DRILL
Paul Herriau, Cambrai, France, assignor to Societe
SOGEFINA, Societe de Gestion Financiere Annoricaine,
Paris, France
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,365
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 31, 1980, 80 07190
Int. a.^ AOIC 7/04. 7/20
U.S. a. 111—34 2 Oaims
1. In a pneumatic transport apparatus particularly for single-
seed drills, comprising an inlet tube (10) into which the seeds
are introduced one by one, an annular passage (13) of conver-
gent form for air under pressure about the end of the inlet tube
(10) and a tubular passage (14) whose one end communicates
with said annular passage and whose other end is connected to
a pneumatic transport tube (17); the improvement comprising
downstream and at a small distance from the neck of the annu-
lar passage (13) of convergent form, a plurality of openings
(18) communicating between the tubular passage (14) and the
atmosphere and diverging downstream at an acute angle from
the axis of said tubular passage (14), the total cross-sectional
area of said openings (18) corresponding to about i to J of the
cross-sectional area of said tubular passage (14), whereby the
pressure is decreased downstream from said openings (18).
4,392,440
MULTI-STITCH CAM NEEDLE BAR SHIFTER FOR
TUFTING MACHINES
Gary L. Ingram, Ooltewah, Tenn., assignor to Spencer Wright
Industries, Inc., Chattanooga, Tenn.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,800
Int. a.3 D05C 15/00
U.S. a. 112—79 A 10 Qaims
1. In a tufting machine having a reciprocating needle bar
carrying a plurality of needles spaced transversely across the
machine and adapted to penetrate a base material moving
longitudinally across a support plate thereof to insert a plural-
ity of stitches upon each penetration of the base material,
mounting means for mounting said needle bar for transverse
movement relatively to the base material, a rotatably mounted
cam having stitch pattern information for directing the move-
ment of the needle bar, follower means responsive to the stitch
pattern information on said cam, means connecting said fol-
lower means to said needle bar for selectively shifting said
needle bar transversely in accordance with the stitch pattern
information on said cam, and cam drive means for rotatably
driving said cam, said cam drive means comprising an index
drive having input means continuously driveable through a
repetitive cycle and output means driven by the input means
during only an index portion of the cycle of the input means
and being stationary during the remainder of the cycle of the
input means, means for driving said input means in time rela-
tionship with the reciprocation of the needle bar such that said
input means and said needle bar have a common cycle, and
means operatively connecting said output means to said cam
for rotatably driving said cam intermittently to stop the rota-
tion of said cam at least during a portion of the time the needles
are within the base material.
4,392,441
SEWING MACHINE WITH BUTTONHOLE STITCHING
MECHANISM
Yasukata Eguchi, Kunitachi, Japan, assignor to Janome Sewing
Machine Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 249,664
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-
41583[U]
Int. a.3 D05B 3/06
U.S. a. 112-158 B 3 Claims
34 II 10 9 10 9 K) 9 10 9 D E 8 31
35 6 6 6b 6 606 6c 6 6 6„ 30 37 36
1. In a sewing machine having a machine housing and a
stitch-producing arrangement mounted on the machine hous-
ing and including a feeding device operative for selectively
feeding the material to be sewn in a selected one of two opp)0-
site feeding directions, a needle reciprocable through the mate-
rial being sewn and swingable transversely of the feeding
directions, and a drive operatively connectable to the feeding
device and to the needle and operative for operating the same,
a stitch pattern control arrangement comprising, in combina-
tion, a plurality of pattern cams mounted on said machine
housing for rotation about an axis; means for rotating said
pattern cams in dependence on the operation of said drive; a
pattern selecting device including a plurality of operator-con-
trolled pattern selecting elements mounted on said machine
housing for movement between operative and inoperative
positions, and a plurality of cam followers operatively con-
nected to the respective pattern selecting elements to engage
the respectively associated pattern cams in said operative
position, and disengage the same from said pattern cams in the
inoperative position, of the respective pattern selecting ele-
ment; means for holding said pattern selecting elements in said
operative positions until released; feed adjusting means opera-
tively connected to said feeding device and operative for
changing the feeding direction and for discontinuing the feed-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SOS
ing operation of the feeding device in dependence on which of
said pattern selecting elements is in said operative position
thereof; and operator-controlled needle-swing amplitude ad-
justing means movable from a first to a second predetermined
position and operative for displacing said needle to a predeter-
mined position and for causing said holding means to release
the respective pattern selecting element then held thereby for
return to said inoperative position thereof during such move-
ment, said amplitude adjusting means including a cam movable
between said first and second predetermined positions, and a
control arm tracing said cam and operatively connected to said
needle to displace the same into said predetermined position
thereof during said movement of said cam from said first to
said second predetermined position thereof.
SEW
4,392,442
NG MACHINE WITH A CYCLIC PATTERN
STITCHING DEVICE
Yasuro Sano, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Janome Sewing Ma-
chine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,593
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 6, 1980, 55/12812
Int. CV D05B 69/22. 3/02
U.S. Q. 112—275 1 Qaim
means (42, 35, 41, 50, 28) manually operated to move the actu-
ating means (57) between the inoperative position and the
operative position; switch operating means (39, 46, 13, 11, 18,
7) operated in association with the operating means to turn on
the microswitch (26) when said actuating means (57) is moved
to the operative position by the operating means; and releasing
means (8, 10, 21) operated in association with the blocking
element (55), when the blocking element blocks the rotation of
the stop cam (3), to release said switch operating means (7) to
thereby turn off the microswitch (26).
4,392,443
ELECTRO-PNEUMATIC HYDRAULIC CONTROL
SYSTEMS
Michael De Marco, Middletown, R.I., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,404
Int. Q.J F42B 19/01; B63H 1/14
U.S. Q. 114—20 R 9 Qaims
1. A sewing machine, comprising an upper drive shaft (1)
rotated to vertically reciprocate a needle to penetrate a fabric
to be sewn for producing stitches thereon; a machine drive
motor energized by operation of a microswitch (26) to rotate
the upper drive shaft; a stop cam (3) secured to the upper drive
shaft for rotation therewith: a blocking element (55) movable
between an inoperative position in which the blocking element
(55) is located out of the rotation path of the stop cam (3) and
an operative position in which the blocking element (55) is
located in the rotation path of the stop cam (3) to block the
latter; a clutch mechanism normally connecting the upper
drive shaft (1) to the machine drive motor and being operated
to disconnect the upper drive shaft from the machine drive
motor when the blocking element blocks the rotation of the
stopper cam; a plurality of pattern cams rotated by the upper
drive shaft (1) at a predetermined speed and being selectively
connected to the needle to control the lateral movement
thereof; cycle stitch control cam means (60) rotated by the
upper drive shaft (1) at the same speed with the pattern cams;
control means (64) cooperating with the cycle stitch control
cam means (60) and moved by the latter between a first posi-
tion for maintaining the blocking element (55) in the inojjera-
tive position and a second position for displacing the blocking
element into the operative position at a predetermined angular
position of the cycle stitch control cam means (60), said control
means (64) including actuating means (57) which is moved in
association with the control means and is movable between an
inoperative position in which said actuating means (57) discon-
nects said control means (60) from the blocking means (55) and
an operative position in which said actuating means (57) con-
nects said control means to the blocking means (55); operating
taCTl».»TIC "C
- ron BOIL
CONTRa
1. A speed control system comprising:
speed detection transducer means (146) for converting the
velocity of water flowing through said speed detection
transducer means to a corresponding DC voltage;
a speed selection potentiometer (148) for providing a refer-
ence DC voltage;
comparator means (150 and 152) for receiving said corre-
sponding DC voltage and said reference DC voltage, said
comparator means having two output terminals for pro-
viding an error signal to a selected one of said two output
terminals, said selected one being determined by the com-
parative magnitude of said corresponding DC voltage and
said reference DC voltage;
first (160) and second (158) valves connected to be operated
if said reference DC voltage should be larger in magnitude
than said corresponding DC voltage;
third (170) and fourth (168) valves connected to be operated
if said corresponding DC voltage should be larger in
magnitude than said reference DC voltage;
first (62) and second (90) pistons hydraulically connected to
said respective first (160) and second (158) valves and said
first (62) and second (90) pistons hydraulically connected
to said respective third (170) and fourth (168) valves;
negative hydraulic pressure means connected to said first
(160) and second (158) valves for providing negative
pressure to said first (62) and second (90) pistons upon
operation of said respective first (160) and second (158)
valves;
positive hydraulic pressure means connected to said third
(170) and fourth (168) valves for providing positive hy-
draulic pressure to said first (62) and second (90) pistons
upon operation of said respective third (170) and fourth
(168) valves; and
first and second impeller rotation means connected respec-
tively to said first (62) and second (90) pistons for being
506
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
rotated at an increase speed in unison upon negative hy-
draulic pressure being applied to said first (62) and second
(90) pistons, and for being rotated at a decreased speed in
unison upon positive hydraulic pressure being applied to
said first (62) and second (90) pistons.
4,392,444
HIGH STABILITY TRIMARAN
Lars G. Andersson, Lufttrycksgatan 3 BV, S-417 40 Goteborg,
Sweden
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,877
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 10, 1980, 7906031
Int. aj B63H 35/00
U.S. a. 114—39 10 Qaims
forward flexible member which is supplied with gas from at
least one gas inlet, the improvement comprising:
stabilizing, load-carrying catamaran-like sidehulls beginning
at a forward portion of and extending downward from the
hull and having keels extending substantially parallel to
each other rearwardly from said forward portion of said
hull to a point at which they begin to diverge, said gas
1. A trimaran comprising: an elongated main hull, a star-
board hull, and a port hull, the starboard and port hulls dis-
posed on opposite sides of said main hull and parallel thereto;
a mast; stays extending between said mast and said main hull
for stabilizing the position of said mast with respect to said
main hull; and means for operatively attaching said starboard
and port hull to said main hull, for operatively attaching said
mast to said main hull, and for operatively attaching said mast
to said starboard and port hulls, so that the angle of inclination
of said main hull is minimized and so that the trimaran is self-
righting; said means for operatively attaching said starboard
and port hulls to said main hull comprising means for pivotally
mounting each of said starboard and port hulls to said main
hull along a side of said main hull so that said starboard and
port hulls are pivotal about an axis generally parallel to the
direction of elongation of said main hull; said means for opera-
tively attaching said mast to said main hull comprising means
for pivotally mounting said mast to said main hull so that it is
pivotal about an axis substantially parallel to the axes about
which said starboard and port hulls are pivotal; and said means
for operatively attaching said mast to said starboard and port
hulls comprising shroud means.
4,392,445
FLEXIBLE BOW AIR RIDE BOAT HULL
Donald E. Burg, Miami, Fla., assignor to Paulette Renee Burg;
Sheri Renee Burg; Daniel Earl Burg and Nicole Renee Burg,
all of Miami, Fla., part interest to each
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 207,789, Nov. 17, 1980,
abandoned, Ser. No. 69,771, Aug. 27, 1979, abandoned, Ser. No.
818,303, Jul. 25, 1977, Pat. No. 4,165,703, and Ser. No. 737,403,
Not. 1, 1976, abandoned. This application Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No.
269,908
Int. a.3 B63B 1/38
U.S. a. 114—67 A 20 Claims
1. In an improved boat hull that is partially supported by a
pressurized gas lifting surface including a recess in an under-
side of the hull, which recess is supplied with pressurized gas
from at least one powered gas supply source through at least
one gas inlet connected to said recess, and having a gas sealing
sealing forward flexible member extending between and
substantially to said point of divergence of said substan-
tially parallel portions of said side hull keels; and
at least one fixed substantially rigid aft gas sealing bow
member extending over a major portion of recess width,
said bow member including at least one surface in part
curvilinear and at least partially comprising at least one
inverted V structure.
4,392,446
PEDESTAL MOUNT AUTOPILOT
Gerardus H. Vander Eyken, Longbranch, and James J. Thoman,
Mississauga, both of Canada, assignors to Cinkel Industries,
Ltd., Mississauga, Canada
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,464
Int. a.3 B63H 25/04
U.S. a. 114-144 R 17 Qaims
1. An electromechanical arrangement for use in an autopilot
for yachts comprising a directional indicator, positionable
sensing means associated with said directional indicator for
determining movement thereof relative to said sensing means,
electrical drive means controlled by said sensing means includ-
ing an electrical motor and a transmission, said electrical drive
means providing the input for said transmission with the output
of said transmission connected to a mechanical drive means for
engaging the steering system of such yacht and means associ-
ated with said sensing means and said mechanical drive means
for moving said sensing means relative to said directional
indicator in response to movement of said mechanical drive
means, and clutch means to allow selective engagement and
disengagement of said electrical motor from such steering
system, wherein said means associated with said sensing means
is in constant communication with such steering system.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
507
4,392,447
OFFSHORE MOORING SYSTEM
Hermann Kaps, Bremen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Howaldtwerke • Deutsche Werft Aktiengesellschaft Hamburg
und Kiel, Kiel and LGA Gastechnik GmbH, Remagen, both of.
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,333
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 22,
1980, 3031717
Int. a? B63B 21/20
U.S. a. 114—230
10 Claims
1. An offshore mooring system for seagoing vessels compris-
ing in combination:
(a) an offshore tower comprising a turnable tower head at its
upper end above the waterline and a jib on the tower head,
(b) a mooring hawser of predetermined length both ends of
said mooring hawser being fastened to a collar means
capable of rotary movement around the upper end of the
offshore tower, said mooring hawser being suspended
beneath the jib,
(c) a mooring bitt on the forecastle of a vessel which is to be
moored,
(d) mechanical means for automatically spreading open and
holding said mooring hawser open to form a wide loop
above the height of the bitt of the vessel when the vessel
has approached the tower, and for lowering the spread
open loop of said mooring hawser over the bitt thereby
capturing the bitt by the loop, wherein said mechanical
means for spreading open and holding the mooring haw-
ser comprises spreader blocks for retaining the mooring
hawser and for spreading it open to a loop, said spreader
blocks being movable by spreader lines connected to the
spreader blocks, said system including means to wind and
unwind said spreader lines.
I 4,392,448
SKI BOAT
Robert L. Shirley, MaryviUe, Tenn., assignor to Master Craft
Boat Company, Maryville, Tenn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 13,618, Feb. 21, 1979, Pat. No.
4,263,866, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 824,968, Aug. 15,
1977, abandoned. This application Jul. 25, 1980, Ser. No.
I 172,159
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 28,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J B63B 1/18
U.S. a. 114—271 10 Qaims
1. A ski boat for producing a relatively small, well-defined
wake and a relatively smooth working table, comprising an
elongated hull having a keel section generally V-shaped in
cross section, the angle of the "V" increasing towards the stem
of the hull, a chine panel at each of the outboard edges of said
keel section, said chine panels extending from a forward por-
tion of the hull to the stem, each of said chine panels defining
an acute angle with the horizontal towards the forward end of
the boat which angle decreases to provide a chine panel which
is generally horizontal at the stem, a transom at the stem of the
hull, said transom being bowed outwardly, an orienting panel
of narrow width following the line of said transom, said orient-
ing panel inclining downwardly from said V-shaped keel sec-
tion and chine panels to said transom, and a pair of secondary
chines mounted upon said keel section, each of said secondary
chines being located on opposing sides of said V-shaped keel
section and being parallel to the centerline of said V-shaped
keel section and following the contour of said keel section.
4,392,449
BELOW DECK ENCLOSURE FOR PRESSURIZED,
HEAVIER THAN AIR GAS
Bruce F. Dining, R.F.D. #1, Exeter, N.H. 03833
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,564
Int. a.3 B63B 11/00
U.S. Q. 114—343 4 Qaims
1. An enclosure for volatile or flammable heavier than air
gases stored as fluids under pressure in cannisters on a marine
vessel comprising:
a scalable housing having an opening on one side thereof;
a removable ltd covering the opening of said housing;
means cooperating with said lid and housing for sealing the
lid and housing together thereby to define a sealed interior
of said housing;
support means within said housing for maintaining said
cannisters in a predetermined orientation within the sealed
interior of said housing;
means adapted to mount said housing to a substantially
vertical bulkhead of a vessel thereby to maintain said
cannisters in an upright condition;
sump means disposed on the bottom of said housing in a
depressed portion thereof whereby said sump means is at
the vertically lowest point of said housing when bulkhead
mounted; and
free flow conduit means for venting said sump vertically
downward to a point extemal of said vessel above the
water line and below said sump means whereby the sealed
interior of said housing, extemal of the cannisters therein,
is vented downward to the exterior of said housing for
free flow exhaust of heavier than air gases from said hous-
ing to the exterior of said vessel.
508
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,450
DEVICE FOR SPREADING MONOLAYERED FILMS
Donald L. Preyo, 907 Linden Ave^ Winnetka, 111. 60093
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 234,011, Feb. 12, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 185,020,
Sep. 8, 1980, Pat. No. 4,359,013. This application Feb. 12, 1982,
Ser. No. 348,209
Int a.i BOSC 17/10
U.S. a. 118—120 18 Oaims
1. A spreader for forming a monolayered film on a slide or
the like from a fluid placed on the slide, the spreader being
movable in a longitudinal direction along the length of the
slide, said slide being held by a supporting surface comprising:
(a) a support having an upper surface and a lower surface;
(b) a bar extending in a transverse direction and down-
wardly along said lower surface of said support, said bar
including:
(i) first and second sloped surfaces extending upwardly
and in the longitudinal direction from the bottom of the
bar toward said support, the first sloped surface com-
prising the forward end of the bar and the second sloped
surface comprising the rear end of the bar;
(ii) a flat section formed at aij angle to the lower end of
said first sloped surface such that said flat section en-
gages said slide or the like; and
(iii) a cutaway section adjacent to said flat section and
formed at an angle to the lower end of said second
^ sloped surface such that the top of said cutaway section
is in close proximity with and is parallel to the slide on
which the film is to be formed; and
(c) means extending downwardly from either side of said
cutaway section for maintaining the flat section in contact
with a slide and the top of the cutaway section in close
proximity with and parallel to the slide whereby as the
spreader is placed over a droplet of fluid on the slide, the
fluid can diffuse between the cutaway section and the slide
so that the monolayered film can be formed as the
spreader is moved in the forward direction over the slide.
(a) first means for forming a low-resistivity base metal
contact on the substrate;
(b) second means for forming a transient A-B-type, thin-film
homojunction on the base metal contact by simultaneous
elemental evaporation of the constituent elements of the
ternary semiconductor material, said second means in-
cluding:
(i) means for monitoring the ratio of two of the constituent
metallic elements of the ternary semiconductor material
being evaporatively formed on the base metal contact;
(ii) means for establishing an initial ratio of the two con-
stituent metallic elements being monitored so that the
evaporation stream of elements being deposited on the
base metal contact is slightly enriched by a slight excess
of one metallic elemental constituent as compared to the
stoichiometric condition of the ternary semiconductor
material so as to permit formation of a first region of
low resistivity semiconductor material on the base
metal contact; and,
(iii) means for adjusting the ratio of the two constituent
elements being monitored during simultaneous elemen-
tal evaporation thereof so that the evaporative stream of
elements being deposited on the first region of low
resistivity semiconductor material contains a slight
deficiency of the one metallic elemental constituent as
compared to the stoichiometric condition of the ternary
semiconductor material so as to permit formation of a
second region of relatively high-resistivity transient
semiconductor material on the first region of low resis-
tivity semiconductor material, thereby forming a tran-
sient A-B-type homojunction; and,
(c) third means for forming a low resistivity, thin-film layer
of said second semiconductor material on the transient
A-B-type homojunction with such layer in face-to-face
contact with the second region of the transient homojunc-
tion and having a p-type or n-type state corresponding to
the transient state of the high resistivity region; so that
upon elemental interdiffusion of the elemental constituents
formed on the substrate by said second and third means,
the second region of relatively high resistivity transient
semiconductor material is permitted to evolve into a rela-
tively high resistivity region of semiconductor material
having a p-type or n-type state corresponding to the state
of the first region of low resistivity semiconductor mate-
rial to thereby form a thin-film, A-B-type, heterojunction.
4,392,451
APPARATUS FOR FORMING THIN-HLM
HETEROJUNCTION SOLAR CELLS EMPLOYING
MATERIALS SELECTED FROM THE CLASS OF Mll-Vh
CHALCOPYRITE COMPOUNDS
Reid A. Mickelsen, Beilevue, and Wen S. Chen, Seattle, both of
Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
Division of Ser. No. 221,761, Dec. 31, 1980, Pat. No. 4,335,266.
This application Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 278,343
Int. C1.3 C23C 13/10
U.S. a. 118—690 7 Oaims
K t-T
UKUUH njMKM
urn , MS »
SO •
1. Apparatus for forming a photovoltaic light-to-electrical
energy transducer of the type comprising a thin-film, A-B-type
heterojunction formed on a substrate from a first ternary semi-
conductor material and a second semiconductor material,
comprising, in combination:
4,392,452
EVAPORATION DEVICE
Kazuhisa Taketoshi, Sagamihara, and Chihaya Ogusu, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Nippon Hoso Kyokai, Tokyo,
Japan
Division of Ser. No. 213,016, Dec. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,352,834.
This application Apr. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 372,389
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1979, 54-168076
Int. a.3 C23C 13/12
U.S. a. 118—723 10 Claims
1. An apparatus wherein a film consisting of a compound
presenting a semiconductor characteristics or a solid solution
thereof is deposited on a substrate in an atmosphere of an
atomic state gas selected from a group consisting of hydrogen
gas, oxygen gas and nitrogen gas with a partial pressure of
1 X lO"-* Torr or less said apparatus comprising:
a vacuum container having a gas introduction path for intro-
ducing a gas selected from a group consisting of hydrogen
gas, oxygen gas and nitrogen gas to said vacuum container
and a gas exhaust path connected to a gas exhausting
equipment for controlling a gas pressure and a vacuum
condition in said vacuum container,
a discharging means disposed in said vacuum container and
having a cathode with a heating power source and an
anode to which a voltage is applied with respect to said
cathode for producing said atomic state gas by activating
JULY 12l 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
509
said gas by a discharge between said cathode and said
anode,
an evaporation source disposed in said vacuum container for
accommodating evaporation material and having an evap-
oration heater for heating said evaporation material,
a hot wall disposed in said vacuum container and having a
hollow cylindrical body having a lower end opening for
receiving a vapor evaporated from said evaporation
source, an upper end opening being opposite to said lower
end opening in a direction apart from said evaporation
source, and an inner surface at least on which a resistive
film is deposited so that the resistive film is heated by an
electric power supplied across both ends of said resistive
film, and
a substrate mounting member for mounting said substrate on
said upper end opening of said hot wall on which said
vapor evaporated from said evaporation source is depos-
ited.
4,392,453
MOLECULAR BEAM CONVERTERS FOR VACUUM
COATING SYSTEMS
Paul E. Luscher, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to Varian Associ-
ates, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
1 1 Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,288
1 1 Int. a.3 C23C 13/08
U.S. a. 118—726 32 Oaims
34 32
L-h7
1. A molecular beam converter for use in a vacuum system
for coating a substrate, said molecular beam converter com-
prising:
a body having an impingement surface generally facing said
substrate;
a heating means to enable said impingement surface to be
maintained at a designated temperature;
a molecular source for forming and directing an incident
molecular beam onto said impingement surface;
impingement of said incident molecular beam on said im-
pingement surface maintained at said designated tempera-
ture causing a converted molecular beam to flow from
said surface;
said impingement surface and said molecular source in com-
bination being configured to largely avoid impingement
on said surface by molecular species in said converted
molecular beam;
said impingement surface and said molecular source in com-
bination being configured and positioned to direct said
converted molecular beam generally toward said sub-
strate.
4,392,454
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR REARING SHRIMP
Charles Dugan, Goulds, and Timothy Dugan, Homestead, both,
Fla., assignors to Farm Fresh Shrimp Corporation, Fort Lau-
derdale, Fla.
Division of Ser. No. 925,793, Jul. 18, 1978, Pat. No. 4,249,480.
This application Oct. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 199,209
Int. 0.3 AOIK 61/00
U.S. O. 119—2 1 Claim
1. An Artemia collector for collecting Artemia contained in
a flowing medium, said collector comprising:
an upper portion for receiving said flowing medium, said
upper portion having aperture means therein for permit-
ting passage of said flowing medium into said upper por-
tion and having an inner wall for guiding said flowing
medium;
intake means coupled to said aperture means for directing
said flowing medium through said aperture means and
along said inner wall;
frame means including first leg means attached at one end to
said upper portion and slanting inwardly toward one
another, and second leg means attached at one end to said
upper portion and extending downwardly therefrom for
supporting said collector;
mesh means for permitting passage of said flowing medium
while retaining said Artemia, said mesh means being dis-
posed within said first leg means and extending from said
upper portion to the lower ends of said first leg means;
and sleeve means attached to said lower ends of said first leg
means and to said mesh means.
4,392,455
HEAT-SINK WATER HEATER
Raymond C. Jarvis, Millers Falls Rd., Turners Falls, Mass.
01376
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,044
Int. 0.5 F22B 33/00
U.S. O. 122—20 A 6 Oaims
1. A water heater comprising:
510
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(a) a heat sink module having a relatively flat surface and a
passage for fluid flow;
(b) said passage having an inlet connectable to a water
source and a discharge connectable to a hot water line;
(c) means for attaching said module to an external wall of a
stove to transfer heat from the stove to water flowing
through the passage wherein said flat surface of said mod-
ule is disposed substantially parallel to said external stove
wall, and,
(d) adjustment means for selectively moving said module
away from or closer to said external stove wall to regulate
the amount of heat transferred from the stove to the mod-
ule and thereby control the water temperature produced
by the heater.
4,392,456
PREVENTION OF FOULING IN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES AND THEIR EXHAUST
SYSTEMS AND IMPROVED GASOLINE
COMPOSITIONS
Robert E. Davis, Hinsdale, III., assignor to BASF Aktiengesell-
schaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,012
Int. a.3 P02B 77/04
U.S. a. 123—1 A 18 Qaims
plurality comprising conventional fuel powered cylinders
and a conventional fuel powered piston located in each of
said conventional cylinders; and
(c) an electrically powered piston located in each of the
remaining cylinders.
4,392,458
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH DOUBLE
OSCILLATING PISTONS
Henry E. Gummeringer, 13107 Marble, NE., Albuquerque, N.
Mex. 87112
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,120
Int. a.J F02B 5im
U.S. a. 123—18 R 3 Oaims
1. A process for operating gasoline engines with spark plug
ignition which use a gasoline fuel containing methylcyclopen-
tadienyl manganese tricarbonyl which comprises:
using as the gasoline fuel for said engines a gasoline contain-
ing methylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl as an
octane improver but containing no additives which in-
clude sodium or barium compounds; whereby fouling of
the spark plugs with glass-like deposits formed from the
oxidation reaction products of sodium and/or barium and
manganese is avoided.
4,392,457
COMBUSTION AND ELECTRIC ENGINE
Jesse J. Martin, 4871 Milville-Reily Rd., Hamilton, Ohio 45013
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,718
Int. a.3 F02B 75/00
U.S. a. 123—1 R 13 Oaims
1. A combination internal combustion and electric engine
comprising:
(a) a predetermined plurality of cylinders;
(b) a number of said cylinders less than said predetermined
1. An oscillating piston internal combustion engine compris-
ing:
a. a housing forming within a plurality of working chambers,
and pivotally sup]}orting between adjacent working
chambers an oscillating piston, so that each side of each
oscillating piston operates in one of the working cham-
bers, and each said working chamber having therein a
standard spark plug, and a fuel injection port, and an air
input port and an exhaust port; and
each side of each oscillating piston liaving a cam arm
having an irregular nearly circular shaped cam surface,
and a cam gear having an irregular exterior cam surface
with a plurality of lobes, and said cam gear having
means for engaging a drive shaft, and
whereby when a combustible mixture is exploded in one
working chamber on one side of an oscillating piston,
the expanding gases from said explosion drive that side
of the oscillating piston toward the cam gear, and the
other side of the oscillating piston, having been ex-
hausted and recharged with fresh air compresses the air
therein and receives fuel by injection, and
wherein each side of the oscillating piston as it travels
toward the cam gear near the limits of its travel exposes
air input ports and exhaust ports, and
an air input blower which blows fresh air into the working
chamber through the air input port and an exhaust
blower which removes exhaust gases from the working
chamber through the exhaust port, and
wherein the housing between the working chambers and
between the pistons has mounted therein a spring
loaded oiler wick, and
wherein the exhaust blower and the air input blower are
driven from the driveshaft, and
wherein the injection of fuel and the ignition spark for
each working chamber are timed.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
Sll
4,392,459
FOUR STROKE THERMAL ENGINE CAPABLE OF
TEMPORARY BOOST
Jean-Louis Chareire, Levallois, France, assignor to Societe
Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale, Paris, France
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,868
Oaims priority, application France, Feb. 18, 1981, 81 03201
Int. 0.3 F02B 69/06, 41/00; FOIL 9/02. 1/34
U.S. O. 123—21 7 Oaims
1. In a thermal engine assembly provided with inlet and
exhaust valves and with a system for controlling said engine
comprising a computer which regulates opening and closure of
said valves and which imposes on the engine an operation close
to the one corresponding to minimum specific fuel consump-
tion, said engine is essentially of the four-stroke cycle type, said
system comprises means adapted to detect overloads of the
engine and means adapted to cause the engine to operate ex-
ceptionally, in two-stroke mode, these latter means being actu-
ated by said detection means when the detected overload
exceeds a predetermined threshold so that the engine in that
case passes to two-stroke operation, four-stroke operation
being resumed as soon as the overload has disappeared.
4,392,460
PARALLEL INHERENTLY BALANCED ROTARY VALVE
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Thomas V. Williams, 415 Dreshertown Rd., Fort Washington,
Pa. 19034
Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 132,606
Int. O.J FOIL 7/00
U.S. O. 123—80 BB 13 Oaims
1. An internal combustion engine comprising
a first plurality of cylinders, each cylinder comprising a
head, a piston, an inlet port and an exhaust port;
a second plurality of cylinders, each cylinder comprising a
head, a piston, an inlet port and an exhaust port;
a first rotary fuel valve adjacent to said first plurality of
cylinders and a second rotary valve adjacent to the said
second plurality of cylinders,
each valve having a valve member mounted for rotation
about an axis parallel to its adjacent cylinders for feed-
ing a fuel-air mixture to each said cylinder,
each valve member having a fuel-air passage terminating
in an outlet port for rotating alignment with a cylinder
head of one of its adjacent cylinders for feeding a fuel-
air mixture into each said cylinder inlet port,
each valve member having an exhaust passage terminating
in an exhaust inlet port for rotating alignment with a
cylinder head of another adjacent cylinder for exhaust-
ing gases from the said cylinder exhaust port;
crankshaft means coupled to said pistons for rotation
relative to the cylinders, the crankshaft means compris-
ing first and second crankshafts, at least one piston from
each of the said first and second pluralities of cylinders
being connected to each crankshaft;
a fuel injector means communicating with each fuel-air
passage in all rotary positions of each valve member to
feed a fuel-air mixture into each fuel-air passage;
drive means for rotating the valve members continuously
about their respective longitudinal axes; and
gear means connected to rotate simultaneously the first and
second rotary valves,
the said gear means being adapted to rotate the first and
second rotary valves in opposite directions.
4,392,461
ROCKER ARM ADAPTER FOR ALTERING CAM
PROHLE OF EXHAUST VALVE
Richard Rotondo, 3804 Highcrest Rd., St. Anthony Village,
Minn. 55421
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,728
Int. 0.3 FOIL 1/34. 1/24
US. O. 123—90.16 16 Oaims
sa -ft JO
1. In combination with a rocker arm having first and second
ends and mounted for pivoting movement between first and
second positions and about a pivot intermediate the ends,
wherein the second end engages a valve stem of a valve of an
automobile engine and the rocker arm overcomes a bias urging
the valve to a closed position and opens the valve as it moves
from its first position to its second position, and a push rod
engaging the first end to pivot the rocker arm from its first to
its second position as the push rod moves longitudinally; a
fluidic delay device, comprising means formed in the rocker
arm at one end thereof, said means including a piston disposed
for movement into and out of a cavity formed in said one end
and engaged by one of the valve stem and push rod, and means
512
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
for precluding movement of said piston into said cavity beyond
various positions, wherein said piston moves into said cavity to
different of said positions, depending upon the speed of longi-
tudinal movement of the push rod, as the rocker arm is urged
from its first position to its second position, said means for
precluding movement of said piston comprising a manifold
member mounted in said cavity to define an exterior chamber
in which said piston moves, and a plurality of interior cham-
bers having different volumes, said member having formed
therethrough an infiow passageway communicating with said
exterior chamber and dividing into a plurality of outflow chan-
nels, each of said channels entering into a different of said
interior chambers; a fluid filling said exterior chamber, said
inflow passageway, said outfiow channels, and said interior
chambers; and means responsive to said speed of longitudinal
movement of the push rod for channeling the bulk of fluid flow
in said inflow passageway induced by movement of said piston
into said exterior chamber, into a different of said outflow
channels. ^
4,392,462
INVERTED BUCKET TAPPET WITH SEAL
Kenneth W. Lesher, Wheaton, III., assignor to Stanadyne, Inc.,
Windsor, Conn.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,266
Int. a.^ FOIL 1/24
U.S. a. 123—90.55
3 Oaims
iSfi
t4fi
/^/ U'l^f
1. In a self-compensating hydraulic lash adjuster, a cup-
shaped follower, a body supported thereon, a spacer attached
to said follower and supporting said body, said spacer, body
and follower defining a fluid reservoir, a piston assembly posi-
tioned within said body and defining a compression chamber
therewith, check valve controlled passage means between said
reservoir and compression chamber,
a fluid passage in said follower opening into said reservoir,
and a somewhat L-shaped elastomeric seal seated upon
said spacer and masking said fluid passage, the upright
portion of said L-shaped elastomeric seal functioning to
admit hydraulic engine fluid through said passage to said
fluid reservoir, to block the reverse flow through said
passage from said reservoir, and to seal against the leakage
of fluid from said reservoir between said spacer and fol-
lower, the base of said L-shaped elastomeric seal being
seated upon and supported by said spacer.
4,392,463
DIESEL ENGINE HAVING A DUAL LUBRICATION
SYSTEM
Seishi Yasuhara, Yokosuka, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,216
Int. a.3 POIM 7/00
U.S. a. 123—196 M 2 Claims
1. A method of lubricating the working parts of a diesel
engine equipped with an exhaust gas recirculation system, said
working parts including a valve train whose lubricant is sub-
stantially prevented from being exposed to exhaust gases and
other working parts whose lubricant may be exposed to ex-
haust gases, said method comprising:
lubricating the engine working parts except for the valve
train with diesel fuel;
36 30^26^ ^°
using the diesel fuel after the same has served as a lubricant
for fuel for the engine; and
lubricating the valve train with a separate lubrication sys-
tem.
4,392,464
CYLINDER HEAD OIL DISTRIBUTION SYSTEM FOR
CERTAIN HARLEY-DAVIDSON MOTORCYCLE
ENGINES
Kenneth E. Woodward, 3911 E. Weldon Ave., Phoenix, Ariz.
85018, and Terry L. Zeiger, 1517 E. Dolphin, Mesa, Ariz.
85204
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,802
Int. a.5 POIM 1/00
U.S. a. 123—196 R 4 Qaims
ip^ -,.
1. An improved oil distribution apparatus for distributing oil
through the front and rear cylinder heads of a HARLEY-
DAVIDSON twin cylinder V-type motorcycle engine having
said front cylinder inclined at a 45° angle relative to said rear
cylinder and having only a single threaded oil outlet from the
crankcase thereof, said rear cylinder head having a threaded
oil inlet disposed in a lower portion of said rear cylinder head,
said rear cylinder head also having a threaded oil outlet dis-
posed in a front side of said rear cylinder head, said front
cylinder head having a threaded oil inlet disposed on a rear
side of said front cylinder head, said apparatus comprising in
combination:
(a) a tubular Y fitting means having a first tubular extension
with a threaded portion for threaded sealing engagement
with said crankcase oil outlet;
(b) a first oil tube external to said front and rear cylinders
having an upper fitting sealably attached to an upper end
thereof for threaded, sealing engagement with said oil
inlet of said rear cylinder head;
(c) a first fitting for removable, scalable, connecting of the
lower end of said first oil tube to a sernnd tubular exten-
sion of said Y fitting means;
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
513
(d) a second oil tube external to said front and rear cylinders;
(e) a second fitting for removable, scalable, connecting of the
lower end of said second oil tube to a third tubular exten-
sion of said Y fitting means;
(0 a third" fitting for removable, scalable, connecting of the
upper end of said second tube to said oil inlet of said front
cylinder head; and
(g) a threaded plug for scaling closed said oil outlet for said
rear cylinder head.
4,392,465
SELF-IGNITING INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
WITH A ROTATIONALLY SYMMETRICAL PISTON
TROUGH
Gerhard Wolters, Gaggenau, and Wilhelm Wagner, Stuttgart,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Daimler-Benz
Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,028
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 9,
1980, 3025943; Apr. 22, 1981, 3115933
Int. a.^ F02B 19/08
U.S. a. 123—263 4 Qaims
» V
1. Self-igniting internal combustion engine with a rotation-
ally symmetrical piston trough exhibiting in cross section a flat
bottom well rounded at the rim and conical sidewalls, and
wherein the inlet opening is smaller than the largest diameter
of the piston trough, and with an injection nozzle injecting
into the piston trough so that the walls are wetted, charac-
terized by the combination of the following features:
(a) the diameter of the inlet opening is about 0.35-0.43 times
the piston diameter, and the total depth of the piston
trough is about 0.6-0.8 times the diameter of the inlet
opening;
(b) the angle of conicity of the sidewalls is about 7-15°;
(c) a continuously extending, projecting annular bead
formed, in cross section, by two bead flanks converging
approximately at a right angle is provided in the transition
zone between the sidewall and the bottom, the annular
bead flank of this annular bead facing the inlet opening
lying, in cross section, approximately in parallel to the
piston crown, and the continuously extending rim of this
annular bead extending in parallel to the piston crown;
(d) the axial spacing of the plane of the annular bead flank
from the bottom of the piston trough corresponds approx-
imately to 12-33% of the total depth of the piston trough;
(e) the diameter of at least one annular bead flank corre-
sponds approximately to 0.9-1.1 times the diameter of the
inlet opening;
(0 the annular bead flank facing the bottom of the piston
trough passes over, in cross section, with a radius of about
22-35% of the total depth into the bottom and the annular
bead flank facing the inlet opening passes over, in cross
section, with a radius of about 2-5 mm into the sidewall;
(g) the injection nozzle, arranged eccentrically to the piston
trough but still within the inlet opening thereof, directs its
jets onto the sidewall of the piston trough in such a way
that the point of impingement of the injection jets lies
axially approximately in the center between the annular
bead lim and the piston crown.
4,392,466
FUEL SYSTEM FOR ENGINES
Dorian F. Mowbray, Bumham, and Boaz A. Jarrett, London,
both of England, assignors to Lucas Industries Limited, Bir-
mingham, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 111,469, Jan. 11, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 386,273
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct 5, 1979,
7934620
Int. a.3 P02B 3/00: F02M 41/00
U.S. a. 123—299 3 Qaims
1. A direct injection type fuel system for supplying fuel to a
compression ignition engine comprising inwardly opening type
nozzles which are mounted on the associated engine to direct
fuel into the combustion chambers of the engine respectively,
electromagnetically operable pumps for supplying fuel under
pressure to the nozzles respectively, and change over valves
associated with the pumps respectively, each valve having a
connection to the associated pump and a pair of outlets, first
conduit means connecting a first one of said outlets to the
associated nozzle and second conduit means connecting said
first conduit means to the second one of the pair of outlets of
another of said change over valves, said valves being operable
so that when fuel is supplied to a particular nozzle the fuel
which is supplied to that nozzle is derived from the pump
associated with that nozzle when the fuel required is equal to
or less than one-half the maximum amount required by that
nozzle and can be supplemented by fuel supplied to that nozzle
simultaneously with the fuel supplied thereto by the pump
associated with that nozzle by a pump associated with another
of said nozzles when the fuel required is greater than one-half
the maximum amount required by that nozzle.
4,392,467
METHOD FOR OPERATING FUEL INJECTOR IN A
COMPUTER CONTROLLED FUEL INJECTION TYPE
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Hideo Miyagi, Okazaki; Toshio Suematsu, Toyota; Jiro
Nakano, Okazaki, and Hironobu Ono, Toyota, all of Japan,
assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota,
Japan
Filed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,313
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-127090
Int. Q.3 P02D 5/00
U.S. Q. 123—325 2 Claims
1. Method for controlling the operation of a fuel injector in
a computer controlled fuel injection internal combustion en-
gine, which engine is provided with a system for maintaining a
predetermined idling rotational speed N/rin accordance with
the temperature of the engine and with a system for controlling
the operation of the fuel injector during the deceleration condi-
tion of the engine so that the injector is de-energized when the
rotational speed is higher than Ncur and injector is energized
when the rotational speed is lower than N/jjw, said method
comprising the steps of:
storing in the computer values of Nf in accordance with the
temperature of the engine;
514
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
detecting the temperature of the engine;
reading out the value of N/r corresponding to the detected
temperature;
calculating, as the value of Ncut, the product of a constant
lu o
z "
a
z
lU
u. O
o "
a
Ui
if o
Si ~
-I
5 _
o
o: o
4,392,469
RPM REGULATING DEVICE FOR THE FUEL
INJECTION SYSTEM OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Wolf Wessel, Oberriexingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,079
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 10,
1980, 3038293
Int. a.3 P02M 39/00
U.S. a. 123—387 7 Claims
-30'C 80'C
TEMPERATURE OF COOLANT (T)
positive value ai larger than 1.0 and the read out value of
Nf, and;
calculating, as the value of t^RTN< a product of constant
positive value ai larger than 1.0 but less than ai and the
read out value of N/r.
4,392,468
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
IDLING SPEED OF AN ENGINE
Mamoru Kobashi, Aicbi, and HiroshI Itch, Nagoya, both of
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Toyota, Japan
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,854
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1981, 56-8140;
Jan. 23, 1981, 56-8146; Jan. 23, 1981, 56-8148
Int. a.J F02D 11/10
U.S. a. 123—339 10 Qaims
1. A method of controlling the idling speed of an engine
comprising a main intake passage, a throttle valve arranged in
the main intake passage, a bypass passage branched off from
the main intake passage upstream of the throttle valve and
connected to the main intake passage downstream of the throt-
tle valve, a control valve arranged in the bypass passage, and
a stepper motor actuating the control valve for controlling the
amount of air flowing within the bypass passage, said method
comprising the steps of:
detecting a step position of the stepper motor;
obtaining the mean value of the step position over a prede-
termined time;
calculating the lower limit of the step position, said lower
limit being obtained by subtracting a predetermined step
number from said mean value of the step position; and
stopping the stepper motor from rotating in a direction
wherein the control valve closes when the step position of
the stepper motor reaches said lower limit.
u
1. In a fuel injection apparatus for internal combustion en-
gines, including: a fuel supply pump; a housing defming an
inner chamber into which fuel is delivered by the fuel supply
pump; a fuel injection pump delivering fuel from the inner
chamber to the engine; an rpm regulator having an adjustable
governor member; adjustable lever means associated with said
governor member for initial setting thereof; a work chamber
disposed in said governor member communicating via a throt-
tle with said inner chamber; bore means provided within said
governor member in communication with said work chamber;
and an hydraulic setting mechanism which varies the moment
of fuel delivery by the fuel injection pump as a function of
pressure in the inner chamber, the improvement comprising:
a control line connects said bore means with a fuel supply
tank; said control line is furiher provided with a magnetic
valve to control fuel flow; said magnetic valve is furiher
connected to an electronic control device; and said elec-
tronic control device includes at least one sensor for mea-
suring at least one operational characteristic of the inter-
nal combustion engine.
4,392,470
TEMPERATURE RESPONSIVE OPEN/CLOSED LOOP
SWITCHING FOR LAMBDA CONTROL
Dieter Giinther, Murr; Richard Bertsch, Asperg; Siegfried
Bottcher, Remseck; Herbert Arnold, Eberdingen; Hans
Schniirle, Walheim, and Michael Horbelt, Schwieberdingen,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,757
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28,
1980, 3024606
Int. a.3 F02B 33/00
U.S. a. 123—440 3 Claims
1. A lambda regulating device for the composition of the
operating mixture being combusted in an internal combustion
engine comprising, an exhaust gas probe producing an output
signal and being applied to said lambda regulating device for
correcting the operating mixture composition, a means supply-
ing a temperature signal a means for deactivating and activat-
ing said lambda regulating device in accordance with the
evaluation of said temperature signal, a threshold switch hav-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SIS
ing two inputs connected to said lambda regulating device, one
of said inputs being responsive to said temperature signal, a
threshold value generating means responsive to said threshold
switch, and a switchover means controllable in accordance
"■'■•••■•'"""^
■n .5
with a position of a throttle valve of said engine for switching
said threshold switch between a low and a high value with
respect to said temperature signal, said switchover means being
reversible up to the point where the higher value has been
attained.
4,392,471
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
AIR-FUEL RATIO IN AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
1 1 ENGINE
Hideo Miyagi, and Jiro Nakano, both of Okazaki, Japan, assign-
ors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota,
Japan
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 296,241
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 1, 1980, 55-119830
Int. a? F02B 3/00
U.S. a. 123—489 22 Qaims
II
LOSED-LOOP CONTROL
UNDER THE RRST \
OPERATING CONDITION '
CLOSED -LOOP CONTROL
JNDER THE FIRST ]
OPERATING CONDITION I
f (A/F)
1. An air-fuel ratio control method of an internal combustion
engine, comprising the steps of:
detecting the concentration of a predetermined component
in the exhaust gas in the engine;
detecting the operating condition of the engine to discrimi-
nate whether or not the engine is in a predetermined first
operating condition;
calculating an air-fuel ratio correction coefficient depending
upon said detected concentration, when the engine is in
the first operating condition;
holding an air-fuel ratio correction coefficient to a value,
when the engine is not in the first operating condition;
detecting the operating condition of the engine to discrimi-
nate whether or not the engine is in a predetermined
second operating condition which is included within said
first operating condition;
calculating an average value of said calculated air-fuel ratio
correction coefficient only when the engine is in the sec-
ond operating condition; and
correcting the amount of fuel supplied to the engine in ac-
cordance with said air-fuel ratio correction coefficient,
said correcting being performed by a closed-loop control
when the engine is in the first ojjerating condition and
performed by an open-loop control when the engine is not
in the first operating condition, an initial value of the
air-fuel ratio correction coefficient when said fuel correc-
tion changes from open-loop control to closed-loop con-
trol being determined according to said calculated aver-
age value.
12. Apparatus for controlling the air-fuel ratio in an internal
combustion engine, comprising:
means for detecting the concentration of a predetermined
component in the exhaust gas in said engine;
means for detecting the operating condition of said engine to
discriminate whether or not the engine is in a predeter-
mined first operating condition;
means for detecting the operating condition of said engine to
discriminate whether or not said engine is in a predeter-
mined second operating condition which is included
within said first operating condition;
processing means, responsive to said concentration detecting
means, said first operating condition correcting means and
said second operating condition correcting means, said
processing means for (1) determining an air-fuel ratio
correction coefficient depending upon said detected con-
centration, when the engine is in the first operating condi-
tion; (2) holding an air-fuel ratio correction coefficient to
a value, when the engine is not in the first operating condi-
tion; and (3) determining an average value of said calcu-
lated air-fuel ratio correction coefficient only when the
engine is in said second operating condition, said average
value being employed to control said air-fuel ratio when
said fuel correction changes from open-loop control to
closed-loop control; and
means for correcting the amount of fuel supplied to the
engine in accordance with said air-fuel ratio correction
coefficient.
4,392,472
INDUCTION SYSTEM FOR SUPERCHARGED ENGINE
Robert C. Merritt, Corning, N.Y., and Gerald L. Terwilliger,
Wixom, Mich., assignors to Eaton Corporation, Qeveland,
Ohio
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,304
Int. Q.3 F02D 23/00: F02B 33/44
U.S. Q. 123—564 39 Qaims
/Zf
XtJ
vCV
1. In an induction system adapted to supply combustion air
to an expansible chamber of an engine including a super-
charger having an inlet and an outlet; the system including first
and second air flow paths connected in parallel, the first path
adapted to deliver unsupercharged air to the chamber, and the
second path adapted to deliver air to the supercharger inlet and
from the supercharger outlet to the chamber, the improvement
comprising:
a recirculation path adapted to deliver air from the super-
charger outlet back to the supercharger inlet; and
valve means movable between first and second positions for
controlling the air flow in said paths, said valve means
operative in said first position to allow air flow to the
chamber via the first path and to allow air flow in said
recirculation path from the supercharger outlet back to
the supercharger inlet, and said valve means operative in
said second position to allow supercharged air flow to the
chamber via the second path and to block air flow in the
first and recirculation paths.
516
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,473
IGNITION COIL FOR AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINE
Mitsukuni Tsutsui, Naka, and Takashi Yoshinari, Katsuta, both
of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,661
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 22, 1979, 54-151670
Int. a.3 F02P 3/06
U.S. a. 123—635 12 Qaims
I. An ignition coil for an internal combustion engine for
producing high voltage signals to spark plugs of the internal
combustion engine, the ignition coil comprising at least one
primary coil to which primary current signals are supplied in
sychronism with a rotational speed of the internal combustion
engine, a secondary coil electromagnetically coupled to said at
least one primary coil for producing high voltage signals in
response to the primary current signals, high voltage terminals
for enabling a connection of the secondary coil with the spark
plugs, high voltage diodes disposed between the secondary
coil and the high voltage terminals, means for electrically
connecting the secondary coil to the high voltage diodes, a
case means formed at least in part from an insulating material
having the high voltage terminals mounted thereon and ac-
commodating the high voltage diodes therein in a manner so as
to be insulated with respect to each other, and a synthetic resin
for enveloping the primary and secondary coils and integrally
joining the case to said primary and secondary coils.
II. An ignition coil for an internal combustion engine for
producing high voltage signals synchronized with a rotational
speed of the engine to spark plugs of the engine, the ignition
coil comprising at least one primary coil, at least one secondary
coil coupled to said primary coil, high voltage terminals for
enabling connection of the secondary coil with the spark plus,
high voltage diodes disposed between the secondary coil and
the high voltage terminals, a case made of a synthetic resin
having concentric inner and outer walls and a bottom wall
bridging said inner and outer walls at one end portion thereof
so as to form a first center hollow cylinder extending inside
said inner wall and a space for accommodating the secondary
coil between said inner and outer walls, terminal means at-
tached to said outer wall of said case having one end connected
electrically with a coil end of the secondary coil and a second
end electrically connected with said high voltage diodes, a
bobbin adapted to be inserted in said first center hollow cylin-
der and formed with a second center hollow cylinder extend-
ing in an axial direction thereof, the primary coil being wound
on said bobbin, a resin composite impregnating around said
bobbin and said case, and a magnetic core disposed in said
second center hollow cylinder, said synthetic resin case being
integrally molded with said high voltage diodes and said high
voltage terminals.
4,392,474
ELECTRONIC IGNITION SYSTEM
Willy Minner, Schwaigern, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Licentia Fatent-Verwaltungs-GmbH, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,395
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 25,
1980, 3015939
Int. a.3 F02P 3/00, 3/04, 5/04
U.S. a. 123-644 7 Oaims
,."^"
1. An electronic ignition system comprising: an ignition coil
having a primary winding and a secondary winding; means
defining a spark gap in series with said secondary winding; a
primary transistor and a current limiting circuit in the circuit of
said primary winding; a further transistor connected to be
controlled by a control signal and connected in front of said
primary transistor for controlling said primary transistor, said
further transistor presenting a current path; a resistor network
in the current path of said further transistor; and means con-
nected to said further transistor and said resistor network for
deriving pulses whose width represents the residence time of
maximum current through said primary winding from the
voltage curve at said resistor network and wherein said further
transistor and said resistor network constitute means for caus-
ing said further transistor to operate in its saturation region
when there is a rise in current in said primary winding and for
producing a jump in voltage to a constant maximum value at
said resistor network when the current in said primary winding
is limited to its maximum value by said current limiting circuit.
4,392,475
BOWSTRING RELEASE DEVICE
James D. Fletcher, P.O. Box 218, Bodfish, Calif. 93205
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,890
Int. a.3 F41C 79/00. 5/00
U.S. a. 124—35 A 2 Oaims
1. An improved mechanical bowstring release device com-
prising, in combination:
a. a hollow housing having a space therein;
b. a link positioned in said space;
c. a bowstring retainer pivotably secured in said space in said
housing and including a retaining end extending through
an opening in said housing when said retainer is in a
locked bowstring-drawing first position, said retaining
end being movable to an unlocked bowstring-releasing
second position, said retainer also including a coupling
end; and,
d. trigger means for locking said retainer in said first position
and for urging said retainer into said unlocked second
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
517
position to release said bowstring, said trigger means
including:
i. coupling means comprising a slot in said retainer cou-
pling end with a bearing point in said slot and a wheel
rotatably secured to the front end of said link and releas-
ably engageable with said bearing point,
ii. said link being pivotably secured to and extending
longitudinally of said housing in said space, the front
portion of said link being engaged with said coupling
means, the rear portion of said link defining a rear-
wardly facing receptacle,
iii. a trigger arm extending outwardly of said housing
3At
1 1 4,392,476
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PLAONG
IDENTIFYING INDICIA ON THE SURFACE OF
PRECIOUS STONES INCLUDING DIAMONDS
Herbert D. Gresser, Plainview; George Kaplan, Port Chester,
and Joseph Nussenbaum, New York, all of N.Y., assignors to
Lazare Kaplan & Sons, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 220,195
Int. C\? B28D J/00
U.S. Q. 125—30 R 52 Qalms
* ,_a^ ^^*., ^"., <"., >*^*v^^'^•g^>5<">'N. ,»
■l\
w
j 3 _^ |i "'.
~n
1. A method for providing an identifying indicium to a
diamond comprising:
applying a laser beam to a surface of said diamond;
and controlling said laser beam to enable said laser beam to
inscribe into said diamond surface an indicium including:
intermittently moving said laser beam to successive positions
on said diamond surface along a path corresponding to
said indicium, said beam at each position covering a
diamond surface area overlapping the diamond surface
area covered by the beam at the immediately preceding
position on said indicium;
and adjusting the laser beam power to graphitize and in-
scribe said diamond surface at each of said f>ositions.
throDgh an opening therein and pivotably secured in
said space behind said link, the front portion of said
trigger arm extending into said receptacle, and,
iv. an automatic locking spring disposed in said space
generally laterally against the portion of said trigger
arm which is forward of the pivot point of said arm, said
spring urging said front portion of said trigger arm
against said link to move said coupling means to a posi-
tion to cause said retainer to move into said first locked
position, whereby movement of said trigger arm against
said spring is necessary to urge said link and coupling
means to move said retainer to said second unlocked
position to effect instant release of said bowstring.
4,392,477
SOLID FUEL BURNING STOVE
Orley J. Milligan, 2319 Crater Lake Ave., Medford, Oreg.
97501
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,633
Int. a.3 F24C 1/14
U.S. a. 126—77 6 Qaims
147 ,44
5 -r^ ' me
y^ — ^
i* " -0-6 »« iS-'
1. A heater including a firebox for receiving and burning
solid fuel therein, said firebox including a lower wall, a pair of
spaced upstanding opposite side walls, a top wall extending
between said side walls, a forwardly opening semi-cylindrical
rear wall extending between said top and lower walls and
between said opposite side walls and combustion air inlet
manifold means into which a combustion air inlet means opens,
said firebox including a forward portion in which a hollow
peripheral frame is mounted, said frame extending peripherally
about at least a majority of the inside periphery of the forward
portion of said firebox, said combustion air manifold means
including a portion thereof opening into the interior of said
frame, said frame including air curtain forming air outlet open-
ings formed therein and spaced peripherally thereabout open-
ing inwardly of the corresponding peripheral portion of said
frame, a door assembly removably closing the forward portion
of said firebox, said door having a heat resistant transparent
window therein, said air curtain forming outlets openings
being disposed closely rearward of said window and being
operative to discharge a curtain of combustion air across the
inner surface of said window.
4,392,478
PORTABLE HEAT ORCULATION MEANS
Hugh J. Black, 39 lowana Ave., Trenton, N.J. 08638
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,692
Int. a.3 F24C 15/20: F24H 3/02
U.S. a. 126—84 12 Qaims
1. A portable heat circulation means, particularly adapted to
be placed upon heaters such as kerosene heaters, comprising:
(a) a plenum housing means defining a plenum chamber
therein and adapted to be positionable upon a heater, said
plenum housing means defining a plenum intake means
therein to receive warm air to be gathered within said
plenum chamber, said plenum housing further comprising:
1. a plenum wall means extending about said plenum
chamber and defining a plurality of hot air apertures
518
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
therethrough establishing fluid flow communication
between said plenum chamber and the external environ-
ment; and
2. a plenum top means extending over said plenum wall
means to deflne said plenum chamber therebelow, said
plenum top means being generally convex in an up-
wardly facing direction to provide:
a. a convex convection surface thereabove;
b. a main housing means fixedly secured above said
plenum housing means and deflning a cool air inlet
adjacent said convex convection surface, said main
vv!/.
housing means deflning a cool air chamber therein,
said main housing means and said plenum housing
means deflning a main outlet means therebetween,
said main housing means deflning a cool air inlet
means therein; and
c. a blower means located within said main housing
means and being operative to draw air inwardly
through said cool air inlet means into said cool air
chamber and outwardly through said cool air outlet
means along said convex convection surface for heat-
ing thereof and out through said main outlet means
into the surrounding environment.
r 4^92,479
FUEL LOADER
Eugene V. Stair, Rte. 1, Caddo, Okla. 74729
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 266,123
Int. a.3 F23J 7/00
U.S. a. 126—242
5 Claims
1. A fuel loader adapted for loading fuel into a stove having
a frame with a firebox disposed in the frame, a grate being
supported in the firebox adapted to support fuel within the
firebox and a firebox opening being provided through the
frame providing access to the firebox and the grate disposed
therein, the fuel loader comprising:
a base having a first end, a second end, a first side and a
second side, the base having a supporting surface sized
and adapted for supporting the fuel to be loaded into the
stove flrebox and a portion of the base being disposable
through the flrebox opening and into the flrebox; and
a handle assembly connected to the base, the handle assem-
bly being grippable by an individual for manually maneu-
vering a portion of the base near the second end of the
base through the flrebox opening and into the flrebox for
loading the fuel supported thereon into the flrebox; com-
prising:
an end handle connected to the base, one end of the end
handle being connected to the base generally near the
flrst side of the base and the opposite end of the end
handle being connected to the base generally near the
second side of the base, the end handle extending a
distance generally from the flrst end of the base; and
an upper handle, one end of the upper handle being con-
nected to the base generally near the first side of the
base and the opposite end of the upper handle being
connected to the base generally near the second side of
the base, the upper handle extending a distance gener-
ally above the supporting surface of the base and a
portion of the upper handle extending generally over
the supporting surface of the base generally between the
first and the second sides of the base, the upj)er handle
being connected to the base at a position spaced a dis-
tance from the first end of the base and spaced a dis-
tance from the second end of the base to facilitate the
balancing of the fuel loader with the fuel supported
generally on the supporting surface of the base; and
stop means connected to the base and extending a distance
therefrom, the stop means being positioned for engag-
ing a portion of the frame of the stove to position the
fuel loader in a loading position wherein a portion of the
base with the fuel supported thereon extends into the
flrebox and generally above the grate.
4,392,480
HEAT STORAGE AND DELIVERY APPARATUS
Wayne Vautrin, Rte. #2, Park Rapids, Minn. 56470
Continuation of Ser. No. 242,895, Mar. 12, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jan. 28, 1982, Set. No. 393,066
Int. a.3 F24H 7/00: F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126-400 10 Claims
/
1. A heat storage apparatus, comprising:
a rectangular shaped cabinet,
delivery and return passages in said cabinet, said passages
being adapted to be connected in communicating relation
with a heat generator to fwrmit heated air to be circulated
between the heat generator and cabinet,
an inlet and an outlet in said cabinet intercommunicating the
interior of the cabinet with the exterior, said inlet being
connected in communicating relation with said return
passage,
heat collecting chamber means in said cabinet, a plurality of
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
519
vertically disposed elongate heat storage rods positioned
in said heat collecting chamber means and arranged in side
by side relation with respect to each other,
a charging blower in said cabinet being operable when ener-
gized to cause heated air to be drawn from the heat gener-
ator into the delivery passage of the cabinet,
flrst valve means between the delivery passage and said heat
collecting chamber and being operable when said charg-
ing blower is energized to cause heated air drawn from the
heat generator into the delivery passage into said heat
collecting chamber over said rods and thereafter into the
return passage for return to the heat generator whereby
heat exchange action occurs between the heated air and
heat storage rods so that heat is stored in the latter,
a diffuser member in said heat collecting chamber being
operable to cause the air directed into the heat collecting
chamber from the charging blower to be uniformly dis-
tributed over the heat storage rods,
a delivery blower in said cabinet spaced from said charging
blower, and when energized causing external unheated air
to be drawn into the cabinet through the inlet into said
return passage,
air control means between the delivery blower and the heat
collecting chamber being operable when the delivery
blower is energized to direct the unheated air through the
heat collecting chamber and over the heat storage rods
whereby the air will be heated and then directed by the
delivery blower through the outlet into the exterior,
and control means including the circuitry arranged in con-
trolling relation with respect to said charging and delivery
blowers, flrst temperature responsive means in said cir-
cuitry being operable in response to the temperature
within the heat generator reaching a predetermined mag-
nitude to energize the charging blower to direct heated air
from the heat generator into the heat collecting chamber,
additional heat responsive means in said circuitry being
operable to energize the delivery blower when the tem-
perature within the collecting chamber reaches a prede-
termined temperature and when the external temperature
outside the cabinet reaches a predetermined temperature
to cause outside unheated air to be directed into the inlet
over the heat storage rods to heat the air, and thereafter,
discharge the heated air to the exterior.
II 4,392,481
SOLAR COLLECTOR APPARATUS HAVING
INCREASED ENERGY REJECTION DURING
STAGNATION
Stanley W. Moore, Los Alamos, N. Mex., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,493
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—418 1 Claim
NO FLOW COLLAPSED CONDITION
FILM GLAZING IN CONTACT
WITH ABSORBER
Co
' Vh^lV\J}J\J\l\}\J\}\J\J\r^
16 ^H
INSULATION
1. An apparatus for temperature limiting a solar collector
comprising:
an absorber;
a layer of insulation disposed beneath said absorber;
glazing disposed over said absorber, said absorber and said
glazing being constructable from materials incapable of
withstanding temperatures above about 180* F. for an
extended period of time, said glazing comprising the top-
most layer of said apparatus and said glazing being heat
mirror coated to give it a low e inner surface to eliminate
radiation and convection resistance during stagnation
periods; and
means for spacing said glazing away from said absorber
during operation of said collector and for bringing said
glazing substantially in contact with said absorber during
stagnation to substantially increase energy convected and
re-emitted from said collector, thereby maintaining a
temperature below about 180° within the said apparatus
during stagnation.
4,392,482
SOLAR HEATING PANEL ARRANGEMENT
Moo K. Chang, 11979 Iowa St., Los Angeles, Calif. 90025
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 73,644, Sep. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,346
Claims priority, application Rep. of Korea, Aug. 2, 1979,
372/1979
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—440 24 Oaims
1. A solar heating panel arrangement comprising:
a plurality of spherical lenses for transmitting and focusing
incident solar radiation;
fluid passage means having upper and lower boundary por-
tions deflning a series of relatively thin hemispherical fluid
passages concentric with said lenses, respectively, said
upper boundary portions being in heat transfer proximity
to fluid flowing through the passages and having upper
surfaces which include the focal points of the lenses for
incident solar radiation of various directions; and
means for reflecting solar radiation onto the lenses for trans-
mission to the upper boundary portions, said reflecting
means including a plurality of multifaceted reflective
structures each comprising three planar reflective por-
tions arranged vertically about a portion of one of the
lenses;
such that solar radiation is focused at a plurality of locations
on each of said upper boundary portions to heat said fluid,
one of said locations representing radiation directly inci-
dent on the corresponding lens and the other location or
locations representing radiation reflected onto the lens by
said reflecting means.
520
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,483 4,392,485
SOLAR COLLECTOR MEANS ENDOSCOPE
Robert H. Koenig, 21 Harrington PI., Huntington Hills, N.Y. Siegfried Hiltebrandt, Knittlingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
11746
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,303
Int. aj F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—450
V
^'Pt^^^^tI
.i-
signor to Richard Wolf GmbH, Knittlingen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,029
7 Claims Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 17,
1981, 8104329[U]
Int. a.3 A61B 1/06
U.S. a. 128—6 2 Qaims
•29 ,14 fc Ba,. lb SB 2b 9b
1. Solar collector means comprising:
a modular rigid structure having a web portion,
lower support means connected to the web portion,
upper support means connected to the web portion,
a clear corrugated member mounted on the upper support
members, the web portion, the upper support members
and the clear member forming a trap, said structure being
a unitary molded piece with said upper support means
being chosen to nest with said clear corrugated fiberglass,
whereby when the structure is mounted on an inclined roof
it forms an air passage between the web and the roof and
with the clear member facing the sun, the air in the air
passage below the web will be heated and flow up through
the air passage.
4,392,484
BUILT-IN SOLAR PANEL
Michael J. Aloi, 1743 S. Tuxedo, and Kevin J. Hancock, II, 8713
Los Olivas Ct., both of Stockton, Calif. 95204
Division of Ser. No. 102,616, Dec. 11, 1979, Pat. No. 4,273,108.
This application Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,287
Int. aj F24J 3/02
UJS. Q. 126—450 4 Qaims
-fr
J"
-H0y
1. Endoscope having an external shaft through which passes
a guide channel for receiving instruments, a fibre light conduc-
tor and an optic, the proximal part of said optic being turned
away from one side of the proximal part of the shaft, and in
which the inner diameter of the shaft is at least 9.7 mm but
maximal 10.4 mm, wherein the guide channel for receiving
instruments of one kind for the treatment of the abdomen and
also separate instruments of another kind for fixing clips or
elastic rings onto an internal organ is characterized with a
diameter of 70-75% of the shaft diameter for receiving both
kinds of instruments, and a second channel for receiving an
optic having a diameter of 20-25% of the shaft diameter so that
together the instrument channel and optic channel occupy
about 95% of the internal diameter of said shaft.
4,392,486
COMBINATION VANITY SCREEN AND PATIENT
SUPPORT COUCH EXTENSION
Bayard G. Gardineer, Skillman, and James A. Heringes, Day-
ton, both of N.J., assignors to Technicare Corporation, Solon,
Ohio
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,092
Int. a.3 A61F 5/00
U.S. a. 128—68
10 Qaims
1. A method of installing a solar panel comprising cutting
rafters and sheeting to provide an opening substantially the
dimensions of the panel, affixing a panel frame to the rafters,
providing a step portion on an upper inner periphery of the
panel frame, providing upper and lower conduits within the
frame and interconnecting the conduits with tubes, deploying
a frame lower portion on the step portion, placing a transpar-
ent panel thereover and affixing an upper frame portion
thereto.
1. A combination vanity screen and patient support couch
extension for use in combination with a primary patient sup-
port couch comprising:
a support panel having an upper transverse edge;
an extension panel having:
(i) a base section including a first transverse edge and a
second transverse edge removed from said transverse
edge and disposed in confronting relationship to said
upper transverse edge of said support panel; and,
(ii) having a body section attached to said base section and
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
521
projecting beyond said second transverse edge and
overlapping said support panel;
a hinge connecting said support panel upper transverse edge
to said extension panel base section second transverse
edge, said hinge permitting said extension panel to be
rotated from a first position, in generally coplanar align-
ment with said support panel to act as a vanity screen, to
an extension position generally transverse to said support
panel in generally coplanar alignment with said primary
patient support couch, to act as an extension therefor;
selectably engageable locking means cooperatively disposed
on said support panel and said extension panel for locking
said support and extension panels together in a generally
coplanar alignment; and,
support means cooperatively disposed on said primary pa-
tient support couch and the first transverse edge of said
extension panel for supporting said second panel in gener-
ally coplanar alignment with the patient support surface of
said primary patient support couch.
4,392,487
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FOOT
II STABILIZATION
Allen J. Seiner, and Marc D. Seiner, both of 13320 Riverside Dr.
#216, both of Sherman Oaks, Calif. 91423
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,811
Int. Q.3 A61F 3/00
U.S. Q. 128—80 H
1. Apparatus for stabilizing the foot to control gait, compris-
ing:
a sleeve formed from an elongated sheet of material having
opposite ends that can be releasably fastened together, the
opposite ends of said sheet being adjustable relative to one
another uf)on fastening for adjusting the circumference of
said sleeve, said sleeve having at least limited elasticity in
the circumferential direction;
gripping means included on the inside surface of said sleeve
for gripping the foot and anchoring said sleeve thereto;
an elongated strap connected at a first end to said sleeve; and
means for adjustably and releasably connecting a second end
of said strap to said sleeve,
said sleeve being sufficiently inelastic in the lateral direction,
and said strap being sufficiently inelastic in the longitudi-
nal direction, to exert resistive forces to restrain the mo-
tions of the foot to prevent excessive pronation when said
sleeve is fastened around and anchored to the foot at the
mid part of the arch and when said strap is wrapped
around the foot and tightened to said sleeve in a pre-
scribed manner.
diate, and last, obtusely angled bell cranks which are substan-
tially identical replications, said bell cranks each having a
fulcrum approximately at the intersection of first and second
limbs, which limbs are oriented in like fashion along the length
of said chain, with said first limbs of adjacent bell cranks over-
lapping and having, each separately, a slot therethrough adja-
cent the end distal from said fulcrum; each fulcrum, with the
exception of that of said first bell crank, having an axle which
is constrained to be guided within said slot of the overlapping
M 4,392,488
I JOINT SPLINT
Peter Will, Wiener Strasse 78, 6100 Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,388
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 27,
1980, 3020083
Int. Q.J A61F 3/00. 5/00
U.S. Q. 128—80 R 5 Qaims
1. A splint for the support of joints for orthop>edic and surgi-
cal purposes, comprising: a chain of first, at least one interme-
adjacent first limb; each said second limb, excepting that of
said first bell crank, having one end of a crosslink pivotally
connected adjacent the end distal from said fulcrum; the other
end of said crosslink being pivotally connected to said axle of
the preceding adjacent bell crank in said chain, such that when
said first limbs are aligned said chain has a first length and
when said first limbs are misaligned by flexing said chain, said
chain changes to a second length; and attachment means con-
nected to said first and last bell cranks for securing said splint
on both sides of a joint in an extremity of a patient.
4,392,489
ABDUCTION PILLOW
Bill L. Wagner, Sr., Fullerton, Calif., assignor to Bio Qinic
Company, San Bernardino, Calif.
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,381
Int. Q.3 A61F 5/37: A47G 9/00
U.S. Q. 128—80 A 17 Qaims
1. In abduction apparatus including a resilient deformable
pillow having a pair of generally oppositely facing elongated
exterior surfaces skew to one another and means for retaining
a leg of a human patient respectively against one of said out-
wardly facing surfaces so that the patient's leg is substantially
laterally immovable independently of said pillow, the improve-
ment comprising:
a. a passageway extending through said pillow in a direction
generally parallel with said elongated exterior surfaces
and perpendicular to the direction of elongation thereof;
b. elongated flexible binding means extending from respec-
tive ends of the passageway and having length in excess of
length of said passageway by an amount sufficient for
overlapping respective ends thereof around one leg of a
patient contacting one of said elongated surfaces of said
pillow, and having a central portion residing slidably
within and frictionally engaged by said passageway, said
binding means being slidably removeable from said pas-
1032 O.G.r^Zl
522
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
sageway upon application to one end of said binding
means of tensile force sufficient to overcome said fric-
tional engagement of said binding means by said passage-
way;
c. pressure-sensitive fastening means at one end of said bind-
ing means;
d. receptor means at an end of said binder means remote said
fastening means for holding said fastening means upon
hand application of said fastening means against said re-
ceptor means;
wherein said binding means is resident within said passageway
with binding means extremities extending from either end
thereof.
tube being adapted to receive a cartridge on the interior of said
body portion, a cylinder having a cylinder body portion coaxi-
ally positioned about said hollow body portion of said injector
tube, the opposite end of said cylinder having a reduced diame-
ter opening defining a stop, a piston having a piston head
4,392,490
MULTIPLE OUTLET CONNECTING MEANS FOR
SELF-CONTAINED POSITIVE PRESSURE OR DEMAND
REGULATED BREATHING APPARATUS
Glen R. Mattingly, 950 E. Lockwood St., and Joseph A. Quin-
tanares, 650 W. 1st PI., both of Mesa, Ariz. 85201
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,750
Int. a.^ A62B 7/04
\i&. a. \l!i— 10121 2 Claims
2 4 7a 5 14 13 15 ,11
8 9 17 12
engageable with the bottom of the cartridge, said piston being
insertable in said cylinder at an end of said cylinder spaced
from said opposite end of said cylinder, said piston having a
stepped diameter which is restrained by said stop whereby to
limit the movement of said piston when said stepped diameter
of said piston engages said stop.
4,392,492
APPARATUS FOR STORING AND DISPENSING LIQUID
DOUCHE
Ernest Pick, Cos Cob, Conn., assignor to The Purdue Frederick
Company, Norwalk, Conn.
FUed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,254
iBt a.3 A61M 7/02
U.S. CI. 604—82 12 Claims
1. A control means for a self-contained breathing apparatus
comprising:
means for receiving air under pressure from a pressure regu-
lator,
said means comprising an inlet port and at least two outlet
ports,
said inlet port comprising means for direct connection with
an outlet port of said regulator,
each of said outlet ports of said control means comprising a
connector means for connection with the end of a hose
provided for transmitting air under pressure to a face mask
of the breathing apparatus,
a detachably mounted plug removably connected to said
connector means of one of said outlet ports of said control
means for selectively closing the associated outlet pori,
said outlet ports each comprising a cylinder extending out-
wardly thereof,
a plurality of holes extending around and through the pe-
riphery of each of the cylinders, and
said connector means being mounted on said control means
at a point spaced from the end of the associated cylinder.
4,392,491
INJECTOR
Mitsuo Takasugi, Yokohama, and Ajoshio Okuyama, Tokyo,
both of Japan, assignors to Colpo Company Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,198
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Aug. 5, 1980, 55-106806
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
VJS. CL 604—202 5 Claims
1. An injector comprising an injection needle means, an
injector tube comprising a neck portion and a hollow body
portion open at the end thereof opposite said neck portion, said
needle means being detachably secured to said neck portion of
said injector tube, said hollow body portion of said injector
1. Disposable apparatus for storing and dispensing the con-
stituents of a medicated douche solution, comprising:
a sealed bottle containing a predetermined amount of dilu-
ent, said bottle including a main axially extending portion
and an integral substantially cylindrical connecting por-
tion angularly extending from said main portion, said
connecting portion being formed with a closure wall
having means associated therewith for defming an open-
ing therein having a diameter which is substantially equal
to or less than a certain maximum value and which is
substantially equal to or greater than a certain minimum
value;
a sealed unitary packette formed of a vinylidene chloride
copolymer material containing a unit dose of liquid
douche concentrate, said packette including a container
portion defining an interior volume in which said unit
dose of liquid douche concentrate is contained and a
dispenser portion integral with said container portion and
being constituted by an elongated substantially tubular
stem having a substantially constant transverse cross-sec-
tion throughout its length whose major dimension equals
said minimMin value of said bottle opening diameter, said
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
523
tubular stem communicating at one end thereof with the
interior of said container portion and having a separable
integral terminal tip portion, said packette being openable
through separation of said terminal tip portion from said
dispenser portion, said tubular stem having a length
greater than a certain value and an inner diameter smaller
than a certain value such that upon opening said packette
and inverting the same so that its open end faces down-
wardly, said tubular stem constitutes means for preventing
the douche concentrate from freely flowing out of said
packette under the effect of surface tension forces created
between said stem and douche concentrate, said dispenser
portion being insertable through said bottle opening so as
to extend to a significant extent into the interior thereof so
that the concentrate can be dispensed without spillage into
the diluent by squeezing said container portion; and
an elongate nozzle having a connecting portion adapted to
be connected to said connecting portion of said bottle
after said concentrate has been dispensed into the diluent.
21. An exchangeable, marking symbol program carrier for
animal tattooing apparatus having a plurality of hollow needles
arranged in a matrix capable of forming marking symbols from
combinations of selected ones of said needles and having an
operating means for inserting needles in the tissue of the animal
to be marked and injecting contrasting fluid therein, said pro-
gram carrier comprising:
a member exchangeably mountable in the apparatus and
having a plurality of fluid channels arranged in a marking
symbol pattern and forming an animal marking symbol,
each of said fluid channels being separately alignable with
one of said selected ones of the needles when the program
carrier is mounted in the apparatus for providing a fluid
path for the contrasting fluid to the selected ones of the
needles; and
a reservior for the contrasting fluid formed as an integral
unit with said member for providing contrasting fluid to
said fluid channels of said member.
432,494
UGATURE TYING INSTRUMENT
Richard L. Ashby, 290 Crestmont Dr., Oakland, CaUf. 94619
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 12,004, Feb. 14, 1979,
abandoned. This appUcation Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,104
Int. aj A61B 17/12
UJS. a. 128—326
5 Claims
4,392,493
TATTOOING APPARATUS
Halbe J. Niemeyer, Assen, Netherlands, assignor to DawsonviUe
Corp., N.V., Curacao, Netherlands AntUles
FUed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,462
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 6, 1979,
7906689 1 1
Int. a.' A61D 7/00
VS. a. 128rr316 35 Oaims
12A-
1. An improvement in ligature tying instrument comprising
a hemostat-like plier in which grasping jaw members are flexi-
bly pivoted together intermediate their ends; means for releas-
ably securing said jaws in grasping position on a ligature wire;
wherein the improvement comprises a balanced and substan-
tially symmetrical instrument having one handle member
extended as a polygonal rod rigidly fixed in the long axis
of the instrument for purposes of spinning the instrument
about a longitudinal centerline, when said instrument is
locked in the grasping position;
wherein the grasping face of the jaw members is concave
except right at the tip, such that closure of the jaws tends
to force the grasped wires toward the long axis of the
instrument for purposes of centering the wires and main-
taining their central position during the twisting, tucking
and breaking process.
4,392,495
APPARATUS FOR AND METHOD OF SUTURING
TISSUE
Jon. H. Bayers, 2935 BecheUi Ln., Suite C, Redding Calif.
96001
FUed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,030
Int a.i A61B 17/04
U.S. CI. 128—334 R 7 Claims
1. A method of suturing severed tissue comprising: ^
a. passing a first flexible, tubular suture through the tissue;
b. collapsing at least a portion of said flexible, tubular suture;
c. simultaneously opening said collapsed portion of said first,
flexible, tubular suture and introducing a second suture
through said first, flexible, tubular suture; and
d. fastening said second suture in relation to the tissue.
524
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,496
NEUROMUSCULAR STIMULATOR
David J. Stanton, Anoka, Minn., assignor to Medtronic, Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,558
Int. a.3 A61N 1/36
VJS. a. 128—423 W 12 Claims
1. A muscle stimulator comprising, in combination:
oscillator means for producing a periodic output signal at a
predetermined repetition rate;
rate control means coupled to said oscillator means for
altering the repetition rate of said oscillator means;
inverter means, coupled to receive the output of said oscilla-
tor means, for producing a periodic output signal having a
polarity opposite to that of the periodic output signal
produced by said oscillator means;
treatment timer means for generating a first logic signal after
a predetermined treatment time interval;
treatment timer control means coupled to said treatment
timer means for establishing the predetermined treatment
time of said treatment timer means;
cycler means for repetitively producing a second logic signal
which remains at a first logic level for a predetermined
"on" time int'*rval and a second logic level for a predeter-
mined "ofT' time interval;
first cycler control means completed to said cycler means
for setting the predetermined "on" time interval of said
cycler means;
second cycler control means coupled to said cycler means
for setting the predetermined "ofT' time interval of said
cycler means;
external switch means;
plug means operatively connected to said external switch
means;
accessory jack means constructed and arranged for receiv-
ing said plug means and for providing a third logic signal
when said plug means is inserted in said jack means and
said external switch means is in a particular condition or
when said plug is not inserted in said jack;
momentary contact switch means for producing a fourth
logic signal when said momentary on switch means is
actuated;
first and second ramp generator circuit means connected to
receive said first, second, third and fourth logic signals
and for producing first and second output ramp signals
changing from a first to a second level at first and second
predetermined rates, subsequent to receipt of either of said
first, second, third or fourth logic signals;
first and second ramp generator control means coupled
respectively to said first and second ramp generator cir-
cuit means for independently altering the rate of change of
the output ramp signals of said first and second ramp
generator circuit means;
first pulse width circuit means coupled to receive the ramp
signal from said first ramp generator circuit means and to
receive the periodic output signal from said oscillator
means and for producing a fixed amplitude pulse signal
having a pulse width increasing at a rate proportional to
the rate of change of the ramp signal from said first ramp
generator circuit means at the predetermined repetition
rate of said oscillator means until the output signal of said
second ramp generator circuit means reaches the second
level and the pulse width of the pulse signal reaches a
predetermined pulse width;
second pulse width circuit means coupled to receive the
ramp signal from said second ramp generator circuit
means and to receive the inverted periodic output signal
of said inverter means and for producing a fixed amplitude
pulse signal having a pulse width increasing at the rate of
change of said ramp from said second ramp generator
circuit means at the predetermined repetition rate of said
oscillator means until the output signal of said second
ramp generator circuit means reaches the second level and
the pulse width of the pulse signal reaches a predeter-
mined pulse width;
first and second output circuit means connected to receive
the pulse outputs of said first and second pulse width
circuit means respectively and for producing a balanced
biphasic constant current output signal; and
first and second output circuit control means for adjusting
the current amplitude of the output pulses of said first and
second output circuits resp)ectively.
4,392,497
ERYTHROCYTE SEDIMENTATION RATE APPARATUS
AND METHOD
Rahmat U. Ghaussy, 15300 W. Nine Mile Rd., Southfield, Mich.
48075
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,134
Int. a.^ GOIN 33/48
U.S. a. 128—637 7 Qaims
1. Erthrocyte sedimentation rate apparatus for use with a
direct flow needle assembly having a hollow tubular body
including a smooth cylindrical first bore opening through one
end of the body, and an elongated hollow tubular needle
mounted in fixed position at the other end of the body and
extending through said other end and coaxially into said first
bore, the needle having one sharp end exposed within said bore
and another sharp end exposed externally of said body, said
erythrocyte sedimentation rate apparatus comprising an axially
elongated transparent generally cylindrical ESR specimen
tube having a main body portion and a diametrically enlarged
portion at one end, said tube having a generally cylindrical
blind second bore opening through said one end, said main
body portion having a uniform interior cross section through-
out its length, a penetrable elastomeric stopper received within
said one end and sealing said tube, said cylindrical stopper
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
525
having an integral diametrically enlarged and generally cylin-
drical flange exposed externally of said tube and projecting
beyond the periphery of said tube, said fiange having a diame-
ter substantially equal to the diameter of said first bore, the
space within said tube being substantially evacuated, and rack
means for supporting said ESR specimen tube in axially verti-
cal position and having a horizontally disposed base and a
panel supported on and extending vertically upwardly from
said base, a clip mounted on said panel for engaging and releas-
ably retaining said main body portion, and an upwardly open-
ing generally cylindrical aperture in said base in axially vertical
alignment with said clip, said aperture having a diameter sub-
stantially equal to the diameter of said cylindrical fiange.
4,392,498
APPARATUS INTENDED FOR CLASSIFYING THE
QUANTITY OF A FATTY PRODUCT FOUND ON THE
SKIN SURFACE
Jean-Luc M. Leveque, Montfermeil, and Gilbert J. Gras, Aul-
nay-sous-Bois, both of France, assignors to L'Oreal, Paris,
France
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,489
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 9, 1980, 80 07961
Int. a.3 A61B 5/00
U.S. a. 128—665 14 Qaims
1. Apparatus for the classification of the skin of a living
subject into n predetermined classes where n is an integer
greater than one, the said classification being effected accord-
ing to the quantity of fatty product carried by the said skin,
such apparatus comprising:
(a) a translucent element having two surfaces of which one
surface is to be applied under predetermined conditions on
skin to be examined;
(b) frame means to hold said translucent element in a prede-
termined position;
(c) a luminous flux emitter arranged to irradiate said translu-
cent element in said predetermined position;
(d) a luminous flux receiver positioned to receive luminous
flux from said irradiated translucent element in said prede-
termined position;
(e) means for supplying (n— I) predetermined threshold
voltage values;
(0 means for comparing the output of the flux receiver with
said (n— I) predetermined voltage values; and
(g) display means responsive to said comparing means to
produce display of at least one of n possible luminous
indications representing the said n classes.
4,392,499
ADAPTOR FOR FACTLITATING BLOOD SAMPLING
PROCEDURES
Eric R. Towse, 647 74 St., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11209
Continuation of Ser. No. 50,601, Jun. 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,261
Int. a.3 A61B 5/14
U.S. a. 128—764 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for facilitating both intravenous and blood-
sampling procedures, comprising:
evacuated tube means for collecting a blood sample;
needle means operatively connected with said tube means
for supplying said blood sample thereto;
an adaptor releasably connected with said needle means for
transferring said blood sample from a catheter to said
needle means; and
a flexible intravenous catheter having a socket means inte-
grally bound therewith, said socket means constructed to
separably receive said adaptor to form a temporary con-
nection with said catheter so as to be able to withdraw
blood from a mammalian blood vessel and said socket
I I
means being readily connectable to a source of intrave-
nous fluid when said adaptor is not connected to said
catheter;
whereby said catheter may be utilized to perform both said
blood-sampling and intravenous-feeding procedures with-
out removing said catheter from a blood vessel such that
intravenous feeding takes place at the blood-sampling site.
4,392,500
GRAIN COMBINE WITH IMPROVED STRAW WALKER
Howard E. Houle, 720 Adams St., Anoka, Minn. 55303
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,443
Int. a.3 AOIF 12/30
U.S. a. 130—26 5 Oaims
f , —
1. A straw walker for a grain combine comprising in combi-
nation a housing having a top and side walls, a plurality of
parallel generally horizontally disposed straw walkers each
having parallel side walls and upwardly directed teeth facing
the same direction for carrying straw longitudinally through
the housing, a plurality of parallel substantially identical crank
shafts mounted for rotation upon the grain combine below the
straw walker and generally at right angles thereto each crank
shaft having the same number of throws, bearings on the lower
aspect of each of the straw walkers and each of the bearings
being mounted upon one throw of the crank shaft adjacent
thereto, each of the crank shafts is built up from separate pieces
comprising a plurality of parallel crank arms bored at each end
to receive a crank throw pin or crank shaft pin, the latter being
joumaled for rotation upon said grain combine and said crank
526
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
throw pins being journaled within the bearings on the straw
walkers, fasteners securing the pins rigidly within the bores in
the crank arms, said fasteners comprise fastener means estab-
lishing the angular orientation between the pins and the crank
arms to precisely position the throws at uniformly spaced
locations and retaining means secured between the arms and
the pins locking the pins in position, synchronizing drive means
connected between the crank shafts for rotating the crank
shafts in the same direction and at the same speed and motive
power means operatively connected to the crank shafts for
imparting rotation thereto.
terfly valve towards a closed position, whereby lifting of the
drivers foot from the accelerator pedal causes relaxing of said
first spring means to the limit permitted by said limit means and
movement of the butterfly valve to its closed position by said
second spring means, a cam, cam follower mean mounted on
said second movable member and urged into engagement with
said cam by the action of said first spring means so as to limit
432,501
METHOD OF PROCESSING FRESH TOBACCO LEAVES
Richard P. Newton, Prospect; Patrick H. Harper, LouisvUle,
both of Ky.; Vernon L. Geiss, Georgetown, Ind., and John N.
Jewell, Loaisrille, Ky., assignors to Brown A Williamson
Tobacco Corporation, Louisville, Ky.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,189
Int. a.3 A24B 3/00. 3/18. 3/10. 7/00
VJS. a. 131—300 11 Claims
J
1
H
1
20
2b
1
r
\
—
u
3b
30
3c
1
u
4a
4b
— ^
r
\
U A.
r^ r^
5o
5b
5c
5d
r ^
V ^ ,
1
6
1. A method for processing freshly harvested tobacco hav-
ing from 65% to 90% moisture comprising the steps of:
(a) reducing the particle size of the harvested tobacco into a
preselected size; and
(b) drying the tobacco, said steps being completed without
the natural curing of the tobacco.
opening of the butterfly valve in accordance with the position
of said cam, a servo-motor drivingly connected to said cam,
and said cam being shaped to provide a desired non-linear
relationship between butterfly valve opening and displacement
of the cam by the servo-motor, and control means for the ,
servo-motor operating to displace the cam to a position depen-
dent on at least one vehicle operating parameter.
4,392,503
VANITY CASE
Nobuhisa Watanabe, Sekimachi, Japan, assignor to Yoshida
Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,953
Int. a.i A45D 33/00
U.S. a. 132—83 R 5 Qaims
^ < >^> >
x^
12
4,392,502
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE THROTTLE
CONTROL
Paul Weston, Solibull, England, assignor to Lucas Industries
Limited, Birmingham, England
FUed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,384
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 30, 1980,
8003183
Int a.J P02D 9/00: B60K 31/00
VS. a. 123—342 12 Qaims
1. An internal combustion engine throttle control compris-
ing an accelerator pedal, a butterfly valve and linkage means
connecting the accelerator pedal to the butterfly valve and
including a first movable member coupled to the accelerator
pedal, a second movable member coupled to the butterfly
valve, first spring means connecting the first movable member
to the second movable member whereby depression of the
accelerator stresses said first spring means to tend to open the
butterfly valve, mechanical limit means restricting relative
motion of the ends of said first spring means as said first spring
means is relaxed, second spring means acting to urge the but-
1. A synthetic resin-made vanity case comprising;
a receptacle member for containing a cosmetic material;
a cover member hinged with said receptacle member at the
rear end thereof;
a first latching member integrally formed with said cover
member;
a second latching member integrally formed with said recep-
tacle member for engagement with said first latching
member by snap action when said receptacle member is
closed by said cover member; and
an unlatch member disposed in either one of said receptacle
member and said cover member;
wherein said unlatch member is housed in a recess substan-
tially of rectangle formed in a marginal portion of either
one of said cover member and said receptacle member;
said unlatch member has its one end formed as a free end
extending upwardly and the other end retained in said
recess; and the free end of said unlatch member is ar-
ranged to lie closely adjacent to a marginal portion of the
other of said receptacle member and said cover member in
the position of said receptacle member being closed and
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
527
also arranged to move inwardly about the other end of
said unlatch member to apply force in a direction in which
to separate said cover member from said receptacle mem-
ber, thereby releasing the engagement of between said
first and second latching member when said unlatch mem-
ber is pushed inwardly.
4,392,504
STACKING CYLINDER FOR USE IN A COIN HANDLING
MACHINE
Hideshi Sentoku, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Laurel Bank Ma-
chine Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 165,718
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 6, 1979, 54-93801[U];
Jul. 6. 1979, 54-93802[U]
Int. a.3 G07D 9/06
U.S. a. 133—1 A 4 Qaims
1. A stacking cylinder for use in a coin handling machine
wherein coins are introduced into the stacking cylinder and
stacked therein, said stacking cylinder comprising:
a cylinder body having a cylindrical recess formed therein;
and
a resilient metal sheet rolled into generally cylindrical form
and inserted into the cylindrical recess formed inside the
cylinder body, the rolled sheet being rigidly retained
within the recess due to resiliency of the metal sheet so
that coins are movable into and out of said stacking cylin-
der past said rolled sheet, said resilient metal sheet having
a chevron shaped edge positioned inside the rolled sheet.
4,392,505
COIN PAYOUT ASSEMBLY
Robert T. Maloney, Creve Coeur, and Carl L. Vogt, St. Louis,
both of Mo., assignors to Coin Acceptors, Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
FUed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,273
Int a.3 G07D 9/04
U.S. a. 133—4 A 11 Qaims
means being movable to a first position for receiving a
coin and to a second position for discharging the coin,
(b) coin-selecting means operatively connected to each coin-
handling means,
(c) coin-selecting means operatively and selectively con-
nected to the coin-actuating means and to each of the
coin-handling means,
(d) drive means operatively connected to the coin selecting
means and selectively connected to the coin-actuating
means for moving each coin-handling means to the first
and second position,
(e) the coin-actuating means including:
1. a plurality of actuating arms, each actuating arm being
operatively connected to one of the coin-handling
means, and
2. guide means engaging and guiding each of the actuating
arms,
(0 the drive means selectively engages each of the actuating
arms for moving the arm and its associated coin-handling
means,
(g) each of the actuating arms including a guide pin,
(h) the guide means including a plurality of guide slots, each
guide slot receiving the guide pin of one of the actuating
arms, and
(i) the drive means including a drive link selectively con-
nectible with any one of the actuating arms by the coin-
selecting means, the drive means moving the drive link
and the selectively connectible actuating arm for moving
the associated coin-handling means.
4,392,506
APPARATUS FOR CONVEYING TUBULAR MATERIALS
IN PICKLING FAaLITIES OF THE SAME
Yoshiro Tanaka; Hayato Moroi; Yukihiko Komatsu; Kazuo
Akagi; Ryiyiro Shitamatsu, all of Shimonoseki, and Tadashi
Nishimura, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Kabushiki
Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho, Kobe, Japan
FUed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,670
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 12, 1981, 56-
120155[U]
Int Q.3 B08B 3/04
U.S. Q. 134—46 11 Claims
1. A coin payout assembly, comprising:
(a) a plurality of coin-handling means, each coin-handling
1. An apparatus for conveying tubular members in pickling
facihties for the same, said pickling facilities including a plural-
ity of treatment liquid tanks disposed in series, said apparatus
comprising:
a pair of guide rails arranged respectively in the direction of
the arrangement of the tanks and along corresponding
sides of the tanks;
a travelling car reciprocably disposed on the guide rails;
at least one pair of tube-supporting hooks mounted on the
travelling car and spaced in the widthwise direction rela-
tive to the guide rails;
elevating means operatively connected with the travelling
car for moving each of the tube-supporting hooks up-
wardly and downwardly;
swivel drive means operatively connected with the travel-
ling car for turning each of the tube-supporting hooks
between a position parallel to the lengthwise direction of
528
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
the rails and a position perpendicular to the lengthwise
direction of the rails; /
a horizontal position detector for stopping and starting the
travelling car at a position corresponding to each of the
treatment liquid tanks;
a vertical position detector for sensing the position of each of
the tube-supporting hooks at locations both below and
above the liquid level in each of the treatment liquid tanks;
and
means for interlockingly connecting the vertical position
detector and said elevating means.
4^92,507
TWO-STAGE PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE
Robert S. Harris, Connersville, Ind., assignor to Stant Inc.,
ConnersTille, Ind.
FUed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,918
Int. a.3 F16K 17 /i6
U.S. a. 137—38 3 Claims
1. A two-stage valve adapted for use in a vehicle fuel line to
provide protection against discharge of fuel during and after
roll-over, comprising a housing with inlet and outlet openings
in the upper and lower portions of the housing as disposed for
normal operation, two axially disposed ball check valves
within the housing having their seats facing in the direction of
the outlet opening, the lower ball being loaded upward toward
its seat with an expansion-biased spring, the upper ball being
loaded upward toward its seat by an expansion-biased spring
resting upon the lower ball, the lower ball being larger than the
upper ball and the upper spring having a lower spring force
than the lower spring.
4,392,508
PROPORTIONAL MIXING SYSTEM WITH WATER
MOTOR DRIVE
Thomas G. Switail, Wheeling, 111., assignor to Ryco Graphic
Manufacturing, Inc., Wheeling, HI.
FUed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,446
Int a? F16K 79/00
U.S. a. 137—99
7 Claims
mnr until ft^nv
mi/rMuT'
1. A proporiional mixing system with liquid motor drive
comprising
a reversing switch and valve assembly having a reversing
switch means alternately movable from a first position to
a second position, said reversing switch means including a
reciprocating reversing member, shift means associated
with said reversing member and movable thereby, and
valve means including a reversing vane operatively con-
nected to said reversing switch means capable of moving
from a first position to a second position, said reversing
vane linked to said shift means and being rotatable
through a limited arc, said valve means including opposite
port means, said valve means reversing vane being mov-
able in response to said reversing switch means to alter-
nately open and close said opposite port means, said valve
means further including a liquid inlet and outlet opening
to said reversing vane,
said shift means comprising a hollow, spring retainer struc-
ture and opposite keeper means, said reversing switch
means including latching and releasing means adapted to
alternately catch and release opposite keeper means, said
reversing member movable back and forth through said
shift means and capable of driving said shift means in a
reciprocating path, opposite trip means carried on said
reversing member and positioned to contact and alter-
nately move opposite latching and releasing means, and
spring shifter means retained within said spring retainer
structure and positioned for compression contact by oppo-
site trip means, said spring shifter capable of alternately
compressing and releasing at contact a trip means with a
latching and releasing means to drive said shift means to
an opposite position for latch engagement by an opposite
keeper means,
a liquid motor associated with said reversing switch and
valve assembly and having a piston cylinder opening at
opposite sides to said valve port means, a main piston
movable within said cylinder, and a main piston shaft
secured to said main piston movable therewith,
actuating arm means linking said main piston shaft and said
reversing member whereby said reversing member moves
in response to main piston shaft motion,
at least one metering pump actuated by movement of said
main piston shaft and being linked thereto by pump ram
arm means, said metering pump having a piston rod,
whereby volumes of first liquid will be siphoned and
pumped therethrough in predetermined quantities and
said system will be automatically driven by the first liquid
entering the said inlet of said valve means and introduced
to alternate sides of said liquid motor piston with said
liquid being alternately expunged at the opposite port
means to subsequently exit the valve means at said outlet
opening, and said expunged first liquid and a second liquid
pumped by said metering pump in predetermined propor-
tions can be directed to be subsequently mixed.
4,392,509
FURNACE VALVE
Michael Siddall, Pooraka, Australia, assignor to Sidchrome
(S.E. Asia) Limited, Hong Kong
FUed May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 151,473
Claims priority, application Australia, May 23, 1979, PD8920
Int. a.3 F16K 49/00
U.S. a. 137—340 8 Claims
1. A valve for controlling the rate of discharge of a melt
from a furnace, comprising:
a water cooled sleeve having an inner tubular wall and an
outer wall, a water cooling space between the inner and
outer walls, and conduit connection means forming inlet
and outlet ports to said water cooling space,
a carbon member carried by the sleeve and having a flow
passage extending therethrough, said carbon member
being a liner having a stem portion which is contained
within the sleeve and an enlarged head which abuts the
July 12,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
529
outer end of the sleeve and forms substantially the termi-
nal end of the flow passage, and
"X.''
•^
•J •
r-^->-."
1?^^:l
-£•><
a shutter, and guide means controlling the shutter for move-
ment across the outer face of said enlarged head to control
the effective discharge area of said flow passage.
' ' 4,392,510
CONTROL VALVE FOR VISCOUS MATERIAL PUMPS
Horst Heckmann, Sprockhovel, and Werner Nawroth, Waltrop,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Friedrich W.
Schwing, GmbH, Heme, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 236,568, Feb. 20, 1981, abandoned.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 429,020
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 21,
1980, 3006542
Int. a.3 F16K 27/04, 3/00
U.S. CI. 137—454.2 5 Qaims
4,392,511
PRESSURE REGULATOR
Bemd Schopper, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,548, Feb. 14, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282^2
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1979, 2911886
Int. a.}F16K 17/26
U.S. a. 137—493.2 23 Qaims
6 «,
1. A control valve for viscous material pumps comprising:
a flat housing (2) having a pair of generally parallel exterior
surfaces, said housing having a pair of laterally spaced
viscous material channels (3, 4) extending therethrough
normal to said exterior surfaces, said housing being
formed of two parts (5, 6) abutting along a joinder plane
lying parallel to said exterior surfaces;
a valve slide in said housing having a valve plate (10) fas-
tened to valve rod (11) for reciprocal movement within
said housing across one or the other of said channels for
controlling the movement of material through said chan-
nels; and
a wear shell (9) mounted in said valve housing and contain-
ing said valve plate with said valve rod extending there-
from, said wear shell being formed of a pair of generally
similar halves (7, 8) divided along a central plane (46)
lying normal to the movement of said valve slide, said
wear shell halves being assemblable to form said wear
shell by threading them on opposite ends of said valve rod
(11), said wear shell being formed for permitting the recip-
rocal movement of said valve slide and having a pair of
openings aligned with said channels, said wear shell being
retained in said housing by locking engagement with the
interior of said housing and having annular projections
(39, 40) around said openings extending into said channels
(3, 4) for lining same.
1. A pressure regulator comprising:
a housing;
an inlet chamber disposed in said housing;
an outlet chamber disposed in said housing;
a plunger valve disposed in said housing; between said inlet
chamber and said outlet chamber, said plunger valve
being opened when input pressure is lower than a prede-
termined switching pressure and being closed against an
opening force when the pressure in said outlet chamber
exceeds said switching pressure;
a non-return valve disposed in said housing which opens
against a closing force when a pressure reduction in said
inlet chamber relative to the pressure in said outlet cham-
ber occurs, said non-return valve being in the form of a
sealing lip disposed on a movable part of said plunger
valve in a manner such that when said plunger valve is
closed said sealing lip is situated in said inlet chamber and
closes a channel which leads through a valve plunger and
a valve body of said plunger valve to said outlet chamber;
and
a sealing plate fastened to said valve body annularly enclos-
ing said valve plunger, said sealing plate cooperating with
an annular valve seat disposed between said inlet and
outlet chambers in a recess of said housing, said annular
valve seat being an interchangeable insert disposed in said
recess.
432,512
RELIEF VALVE
Bruce K. Kreeley, Bristol, Pa., assignor to The Singer Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,167
Int. a.5F16K 17/06
U.S. a. 137—496 5 Oaims
1. A gas pressure relief valve comprising:
a resilient diaphragm having a first side, a second side, and a
central opening, said diaphragm being formed with an
annular sealing lip about the central opening on the first
side thereof;
a body member including a central seat, an inlet to a source
of gas to be pressure relieved, and a continuous shoulder
adapted to contact the periphery of the first side of said
diaphragm;
a top member including an outlet for relieved gas and a
continuous shoulder adapted to contact the periphery of
the second side of said diaphragm opposite the shoulder of
said body member;
means for connecting said body member to said top member
so that the periphery of said diaphragm is maintained
530
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
sealingly engaged between the shoulders of said body and
top members;
a plate having a central opening, said plate being disposed
adjacent the second side of said diaphragm with the cen-
tral opening of the plate being aligned with the central
opening of the diaphragm; and
a compression spring positioned intermediate said plate and
said top member to provide a biasing force to said dia-
phragm through said plate to force said sealing lip in
sealing engagement with said seat, said biasing force being
sufficient so that said sealing lip remains sealingly engaged
26--
with said seat when the gas pressure at the inlet is below
a predetermined value;
said compression spring being helically wound, said plate
being formed with an island region in its central opening
connected to the plate by relatively slender spokes which
do not substantially block said central opening, said island
region having an upstanding wall on the side of the plate
opposite the side disposed adjacent said diaphragm, a first
end of said spring being fitted around said wall, said top
member being formed with an internal hollow cylindrical
projection, and the second end of said spring being fitted
inside said projection.
4,392,513
QUICK DISCONNECT SAFETY COUPLING
Reuel C. Parrish, P.O. Box 1846, Enid, Okla. 73701
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,837
Int. a.i F16L 37/28
U.S. a. 137—614.01 13 Qaims
1. A quick disconnect safety coupling comprising:
an open-ended female tubular section having radial openings
through the wall thereof adjacent its open end;
cam lever pins on the female section adjacent the openings;
a tubular male section sealingly engageable with the female
section and having a cam groove in the outer periphery
thereof positioned for alignment with said openings when
the male and female sections are engaged;
valve means in said sections for closing each of said sections
when the sections are disengaged from each other, and
opening the sections to fluid flow through both sections
when the sections are engaged; and
a quick disconnect latching subassembly on the male section
and releasably engaging the cam lever pins and cam
grooves, said latching subassembly including:
axially slidable means mounted on said male section for
axial movement on said male section toward and away
from said female section; and
link means extending from said axially slidable means to a
location adjacent said cam lever pins, said link means
comprising:
a pull link pivotally connected to said ring;
a crank link pivotally connected to said pull link; and
a cam lever having a first end pivotally connected to the
crank link and a second end releasably connected to
one of said cam lever pins and engaging said cam
groove.
4,392,514
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR PREOSION GAS
MIXING
Max F. Farley, Marietta, and Laughton T. Fine, Cincinnati, both
of Ohio, assignors to Queue Systems, Inc., Parkersburg, W.
Va.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,199
Int. a.3 G05D 11/13
U.S. a. 137—624.2 22 Oaims
KH—^
j^ ^^dai¥Aier£^
1. A precision gas mixing apparatus of the type which mixes
plural gases in desired proportions by sequentially permitting
each gas to flow for selected time durations, which time dura-
tions are related to such desired proportions, said system com-
prising:
plural nonpressure-regulated input gas flow lines, each hav-
ing an electrically controllable on/off flow control device
connected in series therewith; and
a gas flow rate control means including a serially connected
gas pressure regulator and gas flowmeter fluid connected
in common to each of said on/off flow control devices for
supplying any one of said plural gases at a desired preset
gas flow rate whenever the respectively corresponding
on/off flow control device is turned on.
4,392,515
WEAVING LOOM WITH A WAVING SHED HAVING AN
IMPROVED FRAME
Albert Moessinger, Vaud, Switzerland
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,237
Oaims priority, application France, Feb. 21, 1980, 80 04125
Int. a.3 D03C 13/00: D03D 47/26
U.S. a. 139—55.1 13 Oaims
1. A weaving loom having a waving shed comprising:
propelling means for introducing and propelling a weft
thread into the shed wherein the weft thread is inserted by
unwinding a specific length of thread from one side of the
loom;
a plurality of frame means wherein each frame means in-
cludes:
a width to extend throughout the width of a cloth to be
woven.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
531
heddle holder rods, bars, and supports wherein the oppo-
site ends of said bars are moveably connected to oppo-
site ends of said supports at points aligned with the axes
of said heddle holder rods;
stationary guides adapted to direct said supports in their
reciprocating cycle to restrict lateral motion of each
frame;
controls adapted to permit each end of each frame to pro-
ceed through its reciprocating cycle independantly of the
opposite end; and
a reed for pushing each pick of inserted weft thread.
Douglas D.
I. In a weaving machine having a frame, a top leno warp
beam and a bottom ground warp beam, and a positive-motion
dobby, the combination comprising:
easer-beam means overlying the top beam warp threads at
the juncture of their vertical and their horizontal run;
crank arm means mounting said easer-bar means to the frame
for rocking movement toward and away from the top
beam warp threads to respectively increase and decrease
the tension in the top beam warp threads; and
mechanical means devoid of spring means mounted to the
frame and connecting said easer-bar mounting means to
the dobby for positively rocking said easer bar toward and
away from the top beam warp threads in response to
predetermined movements of the dobby.
432,517
WEFT PICKING METHOD AND DEVICE FOR
CARRYING OUT SAME
Takao Takahashi, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,325
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1979, 54-168171
Int. 0.3 D03D 47/30
U.S. O. 139—435 12 Oaims
KM »t.
X
GRASPING
DEVICE
MAIN
N0Z2LE
AUXILIARY
NOZZLES
m^-l o^e^ \^>:-:>m%
IOo~ lOc
I0«~ lOf
I0»- 10 1
4,392,516
DRIVE FOR LOOM EASER BAR
,'Goodnough, Burlington, N.C., assignor to Burlington
Industries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
Filed Jan. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,552
Int. 0.5 D03D 49/00: D03C 7/00
U.S. O. 139^115 5 Oaims
6Cf
aa
«)•
2«cr VXT 36tf
1. A method of weft picking in an air jet loom of the type
wherein a weft yam projected by an air jet from a weft insert-
ing nozzle is carried through a weft guide channel to pick the
weft yam into the shed of warp yams by air jets from a plural-
ity of auxiliary nozzles, said method comprising the steps of:
controlling the ejection of air jets from said auxiliary nozzles
in a manner to simultaneously commence the air jet ejec-
tions from all said auxiliary nozzles prior to the time the
weft yam from said weft inserting nozzle reaches the
auxiliary nozzle closest to said weft inserting nozzle, main-
taining the air jet ejections from all said auxiliary nozzles
for a selected time interval, and thereafter successively
stopping the air jet ejections from the respective auxiliary
nozzles in the order of the weft yam passing by said auxil-
iary nozzles.
4,392,518
FENCE WIRE WINDER
Iran H. Stant, 2003 Indiana Ave., Connersville, Ind. 47331
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,120
Int. 0.5 B21F 7/00
U.S. O. 140—119 4 Claims
1. A fence wire winder for twisting together two strands of
wire comprises:
a single-piece handle member having two opposing surfaces
and defining a clearance aperture therethrough;
a wire-receiving spindle member extending through said
clearance aperture such that a different portion of said
spindle member outwardly extends from each of said two
opposing surfaces of the handle member, said spindle
member defining a circumferential groove and including a
longitudinal wire-receiving channel and a transverse wire-
receiving channel;
first means for retaining said spindle member within said
532
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
clearance aperture while permitting rotation of said han-
dle member relative to said spindle member said first
means including a flat washer of a "C" configuration
having its interior edges cooperatively disposed about said
circumferential groove in said spindle and a retaining
thimble placed over and secured to the end of said spindle
member and extending over said flat washer; and
second means disposed on one side of said handle member
for locking said handle member to said spindle member
when said handle member is turned in a first direction of
rotation and for permitting free turning of said handle
member relative to said spindle member when said handle
member is turned in a second direction of rotation which
is opposite to said first direction of rotation.
4,392,519
KNIFE PITCH CONTROL FOR VENEER LATHE
Harry B. Calvert, Longwood, Fla., assignor to Calvert Manufac-
turing, Inc., Longwood, Fla.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,872
Int. a.3 B27L 5/02
U.S. a. 144—212 — 12 Qaims
1. In a veneer lathe having power spindle means for rotating
a wood block on the spindle axis, a knife carriage disposed for
movement transversely of said spindle axis, and a backup roll
positioned in timed relation with the knife carriage, the combi-
nation comprising:
(a) A knife support rockably mounted on said carriage;
(b) a knife carried by said support for movement laterally of
the spindle axis;
(c) means for clamping said knife in said support;
(d) means defining a laterally unsupported portion of said
knife intermediate the ends thereof;
(e) sensor means disposed in engagement with the unsup-
ported portion of the knife for sensing the lateral deflec-
tion thereof; and
(0 said sensor means being adapted to generate a signal
corresponding to said lateral deflection in amplitude and
direction.
4,392,520
LOG BUILDING CONSTRUCTION
Ronald A. Wrightman, P.O. Box 268, Minden, Ontario, Canada
KOM 2K0
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,516
Int. a.3 B27B 1/02
U.S. a. 144—363 5 Claims
4. A method of notching the end of a log at an upper edge
and at a lower edge to make a dove-tail formation for a log
building by the steps of:
projecting the log longitudinally of itself onto a cradle, and
arresting the projection of the log to cause a free end of
the log to project a predetermined amount beyond the
cradle;
clamping the log so positioned in the cradle;
moving the cradle in a direction transversely of the direction
of the longitudinal axis of the log for operative engage-
ment by four saw blades which are mounted in predeter-
mined relation to the path of the cradle to notch the upper
edge of the log and the lower edge of the log whereby to
form a dove-tail configuration;
each of the notches being defined by a side formed by a
transverse cut and by a side formed by a longitudinal cut
that intersects the transverse cut at a comer;
the comer of one notch being inclined a predetermined
angle to the comer of the other notch and said log being
rotated about its longitudinal axis through said predeter-
mined angle between making the transverse cut of one
notch and making the transverse cut of the other notch to
incline the corners of said notches at said predetermined
angle as aforesaid.
4,392,521
SIMPLinED ADJUSTABLE TIRE CHAIN
Victor S. Giannone, 7 Fox Hill Rd., Peekskill, N.Y. 10566
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 315,960, Oct. 28, 1981. This
application Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,416
Int. C1.3 B60C 27/00. 27/06, 27/10
U.S. a. 152—218 16 Oaims
1. An adjustable size tire chain structure comprising
a plurality of metal cross chains each having an end link at
each end,
an inboard rope connector for interconnection with the
inboard ends of said cross chains,
an outboard rope connector for interconnection with the
outboard ends of said cross chains,
a combined rope to cross chain connecting link and rope
clamping ring and rope connector adjustment device
provided at each end of each cross chain for connection to
said inboard and outboard rope connectors,
each of said connecting links comprising
a substantially V-shaped wire body with a loop formed at
each end of the V,
said wire body being connected to the associated cross chain
end by linking through the end link at the bottom of the V,
said loops each being engaged with the associated one of
said rope connectors by at least pariially surrounding the
rope connector.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
533
both of said loops being dimensioned and arranged to par-
tially surround and slidably engage said rope,
each of said slidably engaged loops being open sufficiently to
permit the rope to be slipped out of and into said loop,
a set of at least three collars clamped to said rope at spaced
positions upon said rope in the vicinity of each of said
connecting links with at least two of the three collars
positioned between the loops of the associated connecting
link,
each of said collars being sufficiently large to prevent the
portion of the rope to which the collar is clamped from
sliding through either of said slidably engaged loops, one
of the outer ones of said collars and the middle one of said
collars being spaced apart to respectively fit between said
loops and to fit in closely spaced relationship to the inner
sides of said two loops to prevent longitudinal movement
of said rope with respect to said link when the section of
rope between said loops is straight, the other outer one of
said collars being operable when positioned inside the
adjacent loop of said link in conjunction with the. position-
ing of the first outer collar inside the other loop to shorten
the rope by forming a loop of rope between said loops of
said link.
TiRi;
4,392,522
WITH OPEN CELL FOAM INSERT FOR
REDUCING NOISE
Oskar Bschorr, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit beschraenk-
ter Haftung, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,883
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 16,
1979, 2946273
Int. a.3 B60C 75/00
U.S. O. 152—341 5 Oaims
body having an inner surface defining an inner tire volume,
noise absorbing means in the form of an open cell foam mate-
rial inside only a portion of said inner tire volume, means
securing said noise absorbing open cell foam material to por-
tions of said inner surface of said tire body, said noise absorbing
material having a given size and a large surface area relative to
its given size, said large surface area with the open cells being
sufficient to substantially avoid noise level amplification or
space resonance amplification in said tire volume, and wherein
said securing means for said noise absorbing means comprise at
least one, preferably a plurality of noise absorbing relatively
flat connecting members, both surfaces of which are covered
with said open cell foam material to hold said large surface
area of open cells substantially out of contact with said inner
tire surface, said flat members having at least one edge con-
nected to said inner tire surface for securing the open cell foam
material inside the tire while leaving both sides of said flat
connecting member substantially exposed to the air inside the
tire.
432,523
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
LEVEL OF A MOLTEN METAL SURFACE IN
CONTINUOUS CASTING MOULDS
Manfred Beller, Illerrieden, and Hans Wiedenmann, Vohringen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Wieland-Werke
A.G., Metallwerke, Ulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,883
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1979, 2951097
Int. 0.3 B22D 11/16: GOIN 27/72
U.S. O. 164—453 20 Oaims
A U
9 9
® .
4
i
1. A wheel tire not having a run-flat ability, comprising a tire
1. A process for controlling the level of a molten metal level
in a continuous casting mold comprising the steps: (a) provid-
ing a continuous casting mold, (b) providing a probe in the
vicinity of the mold for sensing the metal level, said probe
being associated with a compensating coil, said probe and
compensating coil being in coupling relation with two second-
ary receiver coils, all said coils being spatially separated from
the mold, said secondary receiver coils being arranged to
provide a voltage difference therebetween, (c) generating a
high frequency altemating magnetic field to induce voltages in
said secondary receiver coils, (d) filling the mold with molten
metal until reaching a required level in said mold, thereby
creating a voltage difference in said secondary receiver coils,
(e) balancing the voltage in said secondary receiver coils to
reduce the voltage difference to zero, and (0 controlling the
pouring of the metal into the mold to maintain the voltage
difference at zero.
534
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,524
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING A TUBE CORE FROM
AND INSERTING SAME INTO A HEAT EXCHANGER
Ludwig Bauch, Kirchweg 7, 8079 Egweil, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,061
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 10,
1980,3046467
Int. a.' F28F 9/00
U.S. a. 165—76 14 Qaims
1. In combination with a heat exchanger having a horizon-
tally elongated and longitudinally removable tube bundle, an
apparatus comprising:
an elongated vehicular base provided with wheels and capa-
ble of rolling on the ground in a predetermined direction
longitudinal of said base;
an upright vertically telescoping column supported on said
base and deflning an upright axis;
an elongated support to one side of the upper end of said
column and deflning a horizontal axis;
means for rotating said support about said upright axis,
whereby said horizontal axis can be parallel or transverse
to said elongated base;
a carriage displaceable axially along said support and
adapted to engage the end of said bundle; and
means for displacing said carriage axially along said suppori
when engaged with said bundle to displace said bundle
along said suppori.
4,392,525
APPARATUS FOR SECURING A WIRE TO A GRILLE
Raymond D. O'Mara, Mallory; Michael E. Smorol, Syracuse,
and Curtis L. Tobin, Chittenango, all of N.Y., assignors to
Carrier Corporation, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 202,983
Int. a.5 F28F U/U, 9/24
UJS. a. 165—125 5 Claims
1. A heat exchange unit including a heat exchanger which
comprises:
a fan orifice,
a fan powered by an electric motor for coacting with the fan
oriflce for circulating a heat transfer medium through the
heat exchanger of the heat exchange unit,
a grille covering the fan orifice to allow heat transfer me-
dium to flow therethrough while preventing foreign ob-
jects from being inseried therein, said grille including a
portion extending from the fan motor to the fan orifice,
an electrical ]X)wer source entering the heat exchange unit a
distance from the electric motor,
at least one electricity carrying conductor connecting the
electric motor to the power source, and
a wire guide extending between the fan oriflce and the elec-
tric motor, said wire guide coacting with the portion of
the grille extending from the fan motor to the fan oriflce to
deflne a cavity wherein the conductor connected to the
electric motor is secured.
4,392,526
CONCENTRIC TUBE HEAT EXCHANGER WITH
SPACER
Manfred Hage, Ulm-Wiblingen; Hans Demuth, Vohringen, and
Otto Junker, Gerlenhofen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Wieland Werke AG, Ulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,085
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 8,
1980, 3017574
Int. a.' F28D 7/W
U.S. 0. 165—154 10 Oainis
1. A heat exchanger comprising an outer tube, at least one
substantially concentric inner tube having an outer surface, a
fln radially extending from the outer surface of the inner tube
and having a height less than the distance between the inner
and outer tubes, said fln being formed around the inner tube
and extending therealong in turns, spacers being provided
between each of the tubes, each spacer having a tubular sleeve
which bears against the outer surface fln of the inner tube and
at least three circumferentially, substantially equi-spaced, ra-
dial supporting elements supporting the outer tube inner wall,
said tubular sleeve having at least one retaining member engag-
ing in the groove between adjacent fln turns.
4,392,527
WATER WELL DEVELOPING SYSTEM
Ernest D. Hauk, and William C. Addison, both of Yucca Valley,
Calif., assignors to Hawk Industries, Inc., Signal Hill, C&lif.
FUed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 239,895
Int. a.J E21B 43/112
VJS. a. 166—55.2 5 Claims
1. Well forming and clean-out apparatus comprising
a string of drill pipe adapted to be lowered into a well casing,
a fluid operated tool carried by said drill pipe string and
adapted to be operated within the well casing by fluid trans-
mitted through the drill pipe string, and
well clean-out means connected to and between said tool and
drill pipe string and including
a clean-out body,
a plurality of clean-out ports in said body for transmitting
pressurized fluid from said drill pipe string to the interior
of a casing in which said well clean-out means is posi-
tioned,
passage means in said body for transmitting pressurized fluid
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
535
to said tool, said passage means including closure means
for blocking said clean-out ports,
means for shifting said closure means to unblock said ports,
means responsive to said closure means for simultaneously
releasing fluid from said tool,
said closure means comprising a valve spool assembly
slidably mounted in said body, said passage means in-
cluding a valve spool passage formed in said valve spool
assembly, said means for shifting said closure means
comprising means for blocking an end of said valve
spool passage,
said valve spKiol assembly comprising a valve spool
piston slidably mounted in said body between a first
4,392,528
SWABBING CUP CONSTRUCTION FOR SWABBING AN
OIL WELL PIPE
Robert C. Paulson, 2110 E. Shawnee Ave., Muskogee, Okla.
74401
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,011
Int. a.3 E21B 37/ W. 43/18
U.S. a. 166—153 9 Qaims
i.
/<-■
19 I7d
1. In an oil well swabbing tool for raising a mixture of liquids
and particulate matter such as sand from an oil well pipe in
which said tool comprises a cylindrical mandrel, a swabbing
cup construction for mounting on said mandrel, said cup con-
struction comprising first and second elements adjustably
secured together, said first element comprising a rigid cylindri-
cal member having an internal diameter substantially equal to
the outer diameter of said mandrel for slidably mounting said
cylindrical member on said mandrel, said first element further
comprising an elastomeric material annular member molded
circumferentially about one end portion of said cylindrical
member, at least the other end portion of said cylindrical mem-
ber being externally threaded, said annular member having
leading and trailing surfaces extending radially outwardly and
axially toward said other end portion of said cylindrical mem-
ber, said trailing surface of said annular member further having
the shape of the surface of a frustrum, the maximum diameter
of said annular member being substantially equal to the inner
diameter of said oil well pipe, said second element comprising
a substantially rigid ring member internally threaded with
threads complimentary to the threads on said other end portion
of said cylindrical member, said ring member having radially
extending leading and trailing surfaces, said leading surface of
said ring member further extending in an axial direction
toward said trailing surface thereof and being generally shaped
as the surface of a frustrum, the maximum diameter of said ring
member being substantially less than the maximum diameter of
said annular member, said ring member being threaded on said
other end portion of said cylindrical member with said leading
surface of said ring member directed toward surface engage-
ment with said trailing surface of said annular member, and the
surface of a frustrum shape of said leading surface of said ring
member relative to the surface of a frustrum shape of said
trailing surface of said annular member providing increasing
radial expansion of said annular member upon progressively
greater threading movement of said ring member on said cylin-
drical member toward and against said annular member.
position in which it blocks said clean-out ports and a
second position in which the clean-out ports are
unblocked, said valve spool passage having an upper
end open to an upper end of said body, said means for
blocking an end of said passage comprising a ball
adapted to seat upon said open upper end of said
valve spool passage,
said means for releasing fluid from said tool comprising a
body relief port in said clean-out body and a valve spool
stem having a passage connected to said piston and
communicating with said tool, said stem having a relief
port positioned to communicate with said stem passage
and said body relief port.
4,392,529
METHOD OF CLEANING A WELL AND APPARATUS
THEREOF
Maurel R. Burwell, 4877 Arbor St., SW., Canton, Ohio 44710
Filed Not. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,750
Int. Q.5 E21B 37/00
U.S. Q. 166—255 18 Qaims
1. An improved method of cleaning a well including the
steps of:
(a) sealing the well casing to form a generally air«|ight enclo-
sure therein;
(b) forming a vacuum within the well casing enclosure by
pumping the air therefrom to raise a column of water
within the well casing enclosure to a predetermined
height;
(c) destroying the vacuum formed in the well casing encio-
536
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
sure causing the raised water column to drop downwardly
forcing the water out through inlet openings adjacent the
bottom of the well casing and into the surrounding strata
to remove encrustations and obstructions blocking the
inlet openings; and
n
4,392,530
METHOD OF IMPROVED OIL RECOVERY BY
SIMULTANEOUS INJECTION OF STEAM AND WATER
Aziz S. Odeh, Dallas, and Billy J. Dotson, Grand Prairie, both
of Tex., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,329
Int. a.3 E21B 43/24
U.S. a. 166—269 1 Qaim
"v %;'vv^v<' vjf v/v:-^" '<!fK!fX^\y^,.^ ^'
-L^'
!TT'3"V —
-^
-U
1. A method for recovering heavy oil from a subterranean
permeable, heavy oil-containing formation penetrated by at
least one injection well and at least one spaced apart produc-
tion well, said injection well containing at least two separate
flow paths, the first path in fluid communication with the
upper portion of the formation and the second path in fluid
communication with the lower portion of the formation, and
said production well in fluid communication with the lower
portion of the formation, comprising:
a. injecting steam into the lower portion of the formation via
the second flow path of the injection well, said steam
passing through the formation, displacing oil and reducing
the oil's viscosity;
b. injecting unheated water into the upper portion of the
formation via the first flow path of the injection well
subsequent to the period of steam injection into the lower
portion of the formation and prior to steam breakthrough
to impede the upward flow of steam and divert it to previ-
ously unswept paths resulting in a higher vertical sweep
efficiency to scavenge heat from the steam and become a
hot water drive displacing oil reduced in viscosity from
lower regions in the formation; and
c. recovering oil from the lower portion of the formation via
said production well.
4,392,531
EARTH STORAGE STRUCTURAL ENERGY SYSTEM
AND PROCESS FOR CONSTRUCT'ING A THERMAL
STORAGE WELL
Joe J. Ippolito, 13110 Lamplight Village Ave., Austin, Tex.
78758
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,910
Int. a.3 E21B 33/138. 41/00; F28D 15/00; F28F 21/00
U.S. a. 166—278 40 Qaims
(d) repeating the raising and lowering of the column of
water in the well casing enclosure by creating a vacuum
therein and destroying the same to clean the well casing
openings and surrounding strata.
1. An earth coupled structural energy system comprising:
an energy distribution system for selectively applying ther-
mal energy within a building structure;
earth storage means for communicating thermal energy with
the earth, the earth storage means having a substantially
moisture impervious integrated earth interface, thereby
maintaining substantial thermal conductive moisture
within the earth storage means, yet providing conduction
to the earth at the integrated earth interface, the inte-
grated earth interface generally deflning an earth interface
surface area;
fluid transport means disposed within the earth storage
means for circulating a thermal transfer fluid through the
earth storage means;
the fluid transport means having an interface with the earth
storage means, the fluid transport means interface deflning
a surface surrounded in spaced-apart relationship to the
earth interface surface area;
means for maintaining a high thermal conductivity at the
fluid transport means interface; and
means for thermally communicating with the thermal trans-
fer fluid to effect thermal changes in the energy distribu-
tion system;
the earth storage means having a high thermal permeability,
whereby thermal energy is readily conducted between the
earth and the fluid transport means with minimal thermal
radiation.
35. The process for constructing a thermal storage well
comprising the steps of:
drilling a well;
circulating mud through the hole to establish a Alter cake;
running a thermal transfer conduit in the hole;
running a drill string within the hole while circulating mud;
measuring moisture loss from the well; and
reverse circulating a sand/gravel slurry through the thermal
transfer conduit to establish an intermediate particulate
mass extending adjacent to the Alter cake.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
537
4,392,532
MINIMUM TEMPERATURE CORRECT'ION METHOD
FOR LOCATING AND SETTING GAS-LIFT VALVES
Ivan J. Raggio, 2412 Yorktown, #297, Houston, Tex. 77056
Continuation of Ser. No. 17,441, Mar. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,085
Int. a.J E21B 43/00. 43/12
U.S. CI. 166—372 5 Qaims
• I I
^ I (MM) "
\:
V«LVE M,3
Depth
P.i® L
1. A method of spacing and pressure setting gas-lift valves of
a gas-lift production system according to the production char-
acteristics of liquid producing wells, said method comprising:
establishing the spacing of the various gas-lift valves relative
to the surface;
establishing the reopening pressure settings of said gas-lift
valves; and
correcting the spacing and reopening pressures of said gas-
lift valves to accommodate the lowest temperature that
could be encountered at any one of the valves while lifting
from a lower valve.
additional portions of the conveyed remaining mixture other
than roots to be separated therefrom and returned to the Aeld;
a third conveyor means mounted on said frame and having a
receiving station spaced beneath the discharge end of said
second conveyor means; a fourth conveyor means mounted on
said frame and having a receiving station spaced beneath the
discharge end of said second conveyor means, said third and
fourth conveyor means being in substantially parallel relation
and conveying in substantially the same direction; light emit-
ting means mounted on said frame adjacent the discharge end
of said second conveyor means for directing a plurality of light
beams on the remaining mixture as it is being discharged from
the second conveyor means; sensor means mounted on said
frame adjacent the discharge end of said second conveyor
means for sensing the light reflected from the discharged re-
maining mixture and generating signals therefrom, said gener-
ated signals being compared to a deAned threshold signal level
representing a root; signal responsive deflector means mounted
on said frame and disposed between the discharge end of said
second conveyor means and the receiving stations of said third
and fourth conveyor means, said deflector means in response
to predetermined signals from said sensor means passively
causing detected roots to be directed in a random arrangement
onto the third conveyor means receiving station while the
remainder of the mixture is caused to be directed in a random
arrangement onto the fourth conveyor means receiving sta-
tion; a manual sorting station mounted on said frame adjacent
said third and fourth conveyor means whereby undetected
roots on said fourth conveyor means are manually transferred
to said third conveyor means; and a root collection station
mounted on said frame adjacent the discharge end of said third
conveyor means.
4,392,533 4,392,534
ROOT CROP HARVESTER COMPOSITE NOZZLE FOR EARTH BORING AND
Carl E. Bittle, Turlock, Calif., assignor to Universal Foods BORE ENLARGING BITS
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis. £45^1^ Miida, Ichikawa, Japan, assignor to Tsukamoto Seiki
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,810 Co., Ltd.. Tokyo, Japan
1 1 Int. CI.3 AOID 17/00. 33/08. 91/02 pj,^ ^ug.^, 1981, Ser. No. 292,183
U.S. a. 171—14 11 Qaims cXmms priority, application Japan, Aug. 23, 1980,
55/119692[U]; Dec. 25. 1980, 55/182902
Int. Q.' E21B 10/18
U.S. Q. 175—340
IQaim
1. An apparatus for mechanically harvesting from a Aeld a
tuberous root crop subsequent to the latter having been up-
rooted, said apparatus comprising a frame movable in a for-
ward direction across the field and having a front end provided
with means for simultaneously collecting a mixture of roots,
dirt clods and other debris as the frame moves in a forward
direction; a Arst conveyor means mounted on said frame for
receiving in a random arrangement the collected mixture and
moving same rearwardly and upwardly from the frame front
end and simultaneously therewith causing portions of the
conveyed mixture other than roots to be initially separated
from the remainder of the mixture and returned to the Aeld; a
second conveyor means mounted on said frame and adjacent
the rear end of said first conveyor means for receiving in a
random arrangement the remaining mixture discharged from
the Arst conveyor means, said second conveyor means moving
the discharged remaining mixture away from the rear end of
the Arst conveyor means and simultaneously therewith causing
1. A complex nozzle for a drill bit and bore enlarging bit of
the type having a plurality of rotary cutters provided at the
lower end of the bit body, which composite nozzle comprises:
a ceramic member in the shape of a water discharge nozzle
provided above the rotary cutters; said ceramic member
having a mouth, a circumferential wall surrounding said
mouth and a bottom surface, said mouth opening through
said bottom surface;
a reinforcing metal ring Atted around the circumferential
wall of said ceramic member to prevent damage thereto;
and
a reinforcing metal plate having a central aperture overlying
said mouth, bonded to said bottom surface so as to com-
pletely overlay said bottom surface to provide said ce-
ramic member with impact resistance.
538
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,535
ZERO-POINT ADJUSTING METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC
WEIGHING APPARATUS
Kanihiko Fii^ii; Yukihiro Hirosaki, both of Mishinu; Yoshihisa
Nishiyama, Shimizn Sontoh, and Koichiro Sato, Mishima, all
of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Electric Co^ Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 117,786, Feb. 1, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,340
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 6, 1979, 54-13110
Int a.3 GOIG 11/04
MS. a. 177—1 6 Claims
connected between rear ends of said two members, said
rear axle bearing member supporting a rear axle for said
rear wheels;
at least one rear cushion unit;
said rear cushion unit being interposed between said frame
structure and said swing arm; and
said rear axle bearing member being disposed substantially
centrally between said rear wheels and having the length
dimension thereof extending substantially in the trans-
verse direction of said vehicle.
Vf SENSOR
^ SENSOR
^
PRINTER
V3
SENSOR
r
LABEUN6
V2
LDADCEU.
SCALE
4 r
1. An automatic weighing method, comprising the steps of:
moving the object to be weighed on three consecutive con-
veyers;
sensing the presence or absence of the object on each of the
three conveyers;
controlling the first conveyer in accordance with the pres-
ence of the object on the second conveyer to prevent the
passage of additional objects onto the second conveyer
when the object is present on the second conveyer;
weighing the second conveyer while said object is absent
from the second conveyer and producing a first weight
signal by means of a load cell;
weighing the second conveyer and said object while said
object is present on the second conveyer and producing a
second weight signal by means of a load cell;
storing a zero point weight on the basis of the first weight
signal as an indication of the tare weight of the second
conveyer;
setting the weight of the object into a register on the basis of
the second weight signal and the zero point weight; and,
labeling said object with the weight label while present on
the third conveyer.
4,392,537
WEIGHBRIDGE AND METHOD OF PRODUCING FT
OUe G. Lundborg, Malmo, Sweden, assignor to AB Bofors
Elektronik, Bofors, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE80/00149, § 371 Date Jun. 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 15, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01197, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 30, 1981
PCT FUed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 274,203
Int. a,3 GOIG 19/02
U.S. a. 177—134 8 Claims
432,536
VEHICLE
Kazuhiro Iwai, Iruma; Hiroshi Enomoto, Oimachi; Akito
Enokimoto, Asaka, and Yoshitaka Kato, Wako, all of Japan,
assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
FUed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,434
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 14, 1980, 55-17130;
Feb. 19, 1980, 55-20159[U]
Int. a.3 B62K 11/02. 25/04
U.S. a. 180—217 10 Claims
22b
23
1. A vehicle with at least one front wheel and two rear
wheels, comprising:
a frame structure;
a swing arm having two members extending rearwardly
from said frame structure and a rear axle bearing member
SaTIa
12 6 5b
4 10 1117
8 IS 16
1. A weighbridge, comprising a cast concrete slab (1) and
having supporting beams (5) resting upon transmitter members
(6) wherein said supporting beams (5) being disposed as longi-
tudinal beams of a metal frame consisting of said longitudinal
beams interconnected by transverse beams, said metal frame
supporting a preferably corrugated bottom metal sheet (12) of
said concrete slab (1), that said concrete slab being in cast
connection with said frame (5, 7) on the upper side of the metal
bottom sheet and surrounded by a metal edge lining connected
to the frame, and that the edge lining (3) is bounded at the top
by a T-beam (8, 9), secured to the web (9) of which a metal
sheet (10) is disposed at the tops of the beams.
432,538
ADJUSTABLE HANDLE ASSEMBLY FOR
WALK-BEHIND GARDEN IMPLEMENT
Ceroid G. Goertzen, St. Anne, 111., assignor to Roper Corpora-
tion, Kankakee, 111.
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,521
Int. a.3 B62D 51/04
U.S. a. 180-19 R 12 Claims
1. In a v/alk-behind garden implement, the combination
comprising a horizontally extending frame including a base
member, ground engaging wheels for supporting the frame, a
unitary handle extending upwardly and rearwardly from said
base member and having a lower end and an upper guiding end
for manual guidance of the implement, a yoke of hollow con-
struction interposed between the lower end of the handle and
the base member and connected to them by respective handle
and base pivot connections, the handle pivot connection hav-
ing a horizontal axis for angular elevation of the handle with
respect to the frame and said base pivot connection having a
vertical axis for azimuthal swing of the handle with respect to
the frame, a first latching means defining an arcuately arranged
set of spaced recesses at the lower end of the handle for hold-
ing the handle rigidly at a selected elevation, a second latching
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
539
means defming an arcuately arranged set of spaced recesses in
the base member for holding the handle rigidly at a selected
azimuth, the latching means including separate latching mem-
bers arranged alongside one another within the yoke and mov-
able into simultaneous register with respective sets of recesses,
means interposed between the latching members for biasing the
.1--^
432,540
POWER STEERING DEVICE FOR A VEHICLE
Abe Michio, Kasugai, and Maeda Naoyuki, Inuyama, both of
Japan, assignors to Tokai TRW A Co., Ltd., Japan
FUed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,612
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 16, 1980, 55-96967
Int. a? B62D 5/06
U.S. a. 180—142 12 Qaims
latching members in opposite directions into latching position,
and means including a manually of>erated releasing member
coupled to the said latch members for overcoming the force of
bias and for temporarily disengaging the latching members
thereby permitting the handle to be manually adjusted with
respect to the frame to a more convenient elevation and azi-
muth.
4,392,539
INSTRUMENT PANEL WITH A YIELDABLE METER
1 1 CASING
Takayuki Pujii, Saitama, and Hitoshi Suda, Kamifukuoka, both
of Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,941
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 17, 1979, 54-
174450[U1
Int. a.3 B60R 21/04
U.S. a. 180—90 8 Qaims
!c 2f
7. An apparatus for operating a power steering motor and
turning a steerable vehicle wheel in response to rotation of a
steering wheel, said apparatus comprising a pump, an electric
motor connected with said pump for driving said pump to
supply hydraulic fiuid to the power steering motor, a vehicle
speed sensor, a steering wheel rotation sensor, said steering
wheel rotation sensor including means for sensing variations in
a characteristic of the fiow of fiuid from said pump, and con-
trol means connected with said electric motor means, vehicle
speed sensor and steering wheel rotation sensor for varying the
angular velocity at which said electric motor means drives said
pump, said control means including means for causing said
electric motor means to drive said pump at an angular velocity
which varies as an inverse function of vehicle speed in re-
s|X)nse to a variation in the sensed characteristic of the How of
fiuid from said pump.
4,392,541
VEHICLE CONVERTIBLE FROM A TRICYCLE TWO
WHEEL DRIVE TO A FOUR WHEEL FOUR WHEEL
DRIVE
John Barchard, Crystal Lake, 111., assignor to Spyder Sales &
Service, Inc., Needville, Tex.
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,513
Int. a.3 B62D 61/012
U.S. G. 180—209 2 Qaims
1. An instrument panel for vehicles, comprising:
an instrument panel base mounted on a vehicle body;
a substantially trough-shaped meter casing mounted on said
instrument panel base;
at least one stay disposed in said trough-shaped meter casing;
said meter casing being provided with bosses extending
inwardly within said trough-shaped meter casing toward
said instrument panel base;
said stay including a pair of leg portions substantially angu-
larly inclined relative to a principal direction of impacts
against said meter casing;
said meter casing being fastened to said instrument panel
base by said at least one stay at fastening portions of said
meter casing defined by said bosses; and
said angularly inclined leg portions of said stay being
adapted to buckle when said meter casing is subjected to
impacting forces.
"-(C^
1. A vehicle of the tricycle wheel type in which transversely
spaced apart wheels are located in the front of the vehicle and
are rotatably driven to effect propulsion and steering of the
vehicle, a caster wheel located generally centrally of the vehi-
cle at the rear thereof, auxiliary wheels mounted on the rear of
said vehicle and one spaced transversely outwardly on each
side of said caster wheel, means moving said auxiliary wheels
generally vertically relative to said vehicle so that they may be
either spaced above the caster wheel or below the caster
wheel, and means rotatably driving said auxiliary wheels there-
540
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
upon optionally having a two wheel drive tricycle vehicle or a
four wheel drive vehicle, said means moving said auxiliary
wheels generally vertically including a cylinder and piston
means for extending and/or retracting said auxiliary wheels,
and means for generally vertically guiding said wheels com-
prising a generally vertically fixed square tube and a square
piston-like member telescoped within the bottom of said square
tube.
4392,542
DEVICE FOR PREVENTING DISPLACEMENT OF AN
ENGINE IN A MOTORCYCLE
Yasuaki Aiba, Sakado, Japan, assignor to Honda Giken Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,554
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 9, 1981, 56/1488[U]
Int. a J B60K lJ/04. 5/12
U.S. a. 180—228 8 Qaims
1. A device for preventing displacement of an engine in a
motorcycle which includes an engine, a body frame, a driving
chain transmitting an output of said engine to a rear wheel, and
a plurality of brackets fixed to said body frame for mounting
said engine thereon by a plurality of mounting bolts, said
mounting bolts being supported by said brackets and extending
along a transverse direction of said motorcycle, and said en-
gine being formed with holes to allow extension of said mount-
ing bolts, comprising;
(a) a pair of rigid tubular members fitted about each of said
mounting bolts, a member of said pair positioned adjacent
to each end of said bolts, said tubular members having one
end provided with a flange which defines a pair of stops
abuttable on an inner peripheral surface of said holes, and
(b) a generally cylindrical anti-vibratory rubber member
encircling each of said tubular members and secured
thereto.
4,392,543
HYDROSTATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL
Norman O. Buckhouse, Kansasville, Wis.; Aaron A. Stevens,
Spring Hill, and Randall K. Lawrence, Fairview, both of
Tenn., assignors to The Murray Ohio Manufacturing Co.,
Brentwood, Tenn.
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,624
Int. C\? B60K 20/00
U.S. a. 180—272 11 Qaims
1. A speed control assembly for a motor or engine compris-
ing:
a speed control lever;
a shaft for mounting said speed control lever for movement
about a given axis;
means operatively connected to said shaft for effecting speed
control of a motor or engine in response to rotation of said
shaft;
means for latching said speed control lever in an infinite
number of positions to which it is moved by pivotal move-
ment thereof about said axis, said latching means compris-
ing an annular electromagnet disposed in a plane perpen-
dicular to said shaft axis of rotation, and a disc mounted on
said shaft for rotation therewith and disposed in a plane
perpendicular to said shaft axis of rotation and adjacent
said electromagnet, so that said electromagnet when ener-
gized exerts a latching force on said disc to hold it in
place;
means for mounting said speed control lever for movement
in a mode different from said pivotal movement thereof
about said axis; and
■^s
electrical switch means connected in series with said electro-
magnet and responsive to movement of said speed control
lever in said different mode for effecting de-energization
of said electromagnet, and therefore unlatching of said
control lever for pivotal movement about said axis, when
said control lever is moved in said different mode.
4,392,544
CONTROLLER FOR ELECTRIC TRACTION MOTOR
Guy L. Dilno, Plainwell, Mich., assignor to Qark Equipment
Company, Buchanan, Mich.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,284
Int. a.3 B60L 3/02
U.S. a. 180—273 8 Qaims
1. A controller for use in a vehicle having an electric traction
motor with forward and reverse drive means,
a controller housing,
control means adapted to be actuated for selecting forward
and reverse drive,
an actuator sjjool mounted in said housing and adapted for
axial movement to neutral, forward and reverse positions,
cam means on said spool for selectively actuating said con-
trol means,
a manually actuable selector member movable to neutral,
forward or reverse positions and being operatively cou-
pled with said actuator spool for axial movement thereof
to corresponding positions for selective actuation of the
control means by said cam means,
detent means coacting between said spool and said housing
for holding said spool in said forward or reverse position,
bias means continuously urging said spool toward said neu-
tral position,
release means for releasing said detent means whereby said
spool and said selector member are returned to said neu-
tral position by said bias means.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
541
and condition responsive means for actuating said release
means.
' 4,392,545
ENGINE MOUNTING STRUCTURE FOR AN
AUTOMOBILE BODY
Hayathugu Harasaki, and Wataru Tsutagawa, both of Hiro-
shima, Japan, assignors to Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroshima,
Japan
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,594
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 12, 1980, 55-
49733[U]
Int. Q.3 B62P 21/12
U.S. Q. 180—294 9 Qaims
1. An automobile body including a front body section
formed with an engine compartment, frame means provided in
a lower portion of the engine compartment for mounting an
engine, said frame means including a rear section secured to
the body and extending forwardly into the engine compart-
ment, and a front section having a front end portion removably
attached through resilient means to the body and a rear end
portion removably attached through second resilient means to
the rear section, said engine being mounted on the front section
of the frame means, suspension arms being swingably attached
to the rear section, whereby said engine can be removed from
the body together with the front section of the frame means.
1 1 4,392,546
SUSPENDED OPERATOR STATION
Ross K. Brown, Cedar Falls; Raymond D. Thompson, Waterloo;
Terrill W. Woods; Darrell L. Wright, both of Cedar Falls, all
of Iowa; James M. Conner, Old Greenwich, Conn.; William E.
Crookes, Waldwick, N.J., and William F. Purcell, New York,
both of N.Y., assignors to Deere & Company, Moline, III.
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,986
Int. Q.3 B62D 33/06
U.S. Q. 180—326 22 Qaims
22. A suspended operator station comprising the combina-
tion of:
a cab having a windshield and a floor at fixed locations;
a height adjustable support mounted on the cab floor;
a platform mounted on the height adjustable support;
at least one control coupled to the platform;
a seat mounted on the platform;
ting adjustable fore-aft movement of the seat relative to
the at least one control;
the height adjustable support positioning the platform and
thereby the seat to dispose an operator at a desired loca-
tion relative to the cab windshield and the means for
permitting adjustable fore-aft movement of the seat posi-
tioning the seat at a desired location relative to the at least
one control; and
an attenuator assembly disposed between the platform and
the cab fioor and operative to permit limited, attenuated
movement of the platform and the included seat and at
least one control relative to the height adjustable support
substantially exclusively in a generally horizontal plane.
4,392,547
HEARING AID EARMOLDS
Lawrence K. Baker, Kane St., Box 818, Gate City, Va. 24251
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,502
Int. Q.3 H04R 25/00
U.S. Q. 181—135 6 Qaims
1. A hearing aid earmold for amplifying selected sound
frequencies including a resonant chamber characterized as
comprising at least two interconnected chamber sections, a
first (25) of which is adapted to extend into the ear canal of the
user, and a second (24) of which is disposed generally trans-
versely of the first section and along an axis discontinuous
therewith, the cross-sectional area of the interface between
said two sections being not significantly less than that of said
second section along a portion thereof adjacent to said inter-
face, the resonant frequency of said chamber being a function
of the combined lengths of said two sections.
4,392,548
SPEAKER ENCLOSURE AND METHOD OF
PRODUCING SAME
Gary C. Bailey, Burbank, Calif., assignor to Engineering Devel-
opment Company, Burbank, Calif.
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,471
Int. Q.3 H04R 1/20
U.S. Q. 181—156 9 Qaims
1. An improved speaker enclosure for re-radiating biphase
sound radiating from a speaker supported and enclosed therein.
means coupled between the seat and the platform for permit- comprising speaker mounting and enclosing means for combin-
542
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
ing and re-radiating back and front of speaker sound in a prede-
termined radiation pattern, back of speaker sound re-radiating
means comprised of compliant material, said sound re-radiating
means comprising a plurality of substantially airtight panels,
connectable to a speaker so as to extend about and enclose the
speaker in substantially airtight relationship, each panel includ-
ing a high audio frequency wavefront transmitting portion, and
means for elastically sealing and securing the plurality of pan-
els to each other.
432,549
BOILER NOISE SUPPRESSOR
Stanistaw Wrobel, and Ryszard Wegrzyn, both of GUwice, Po-
land, assignors to instytut Chemii Nieorganicznej, Gliwice,
Poland
Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,446
Claims priority, application Poland, Mar. 10, 1981, 230087
Int. a.3 POIN 7/00
U.S. a. 181—239 . 5 Qaims
4,392,550
SCAFFOLDING ARRANGEMENT
Gaetan G. Bergeron, P.O. Box 1324, Assiniboia, Saskatchewan,
Canada
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,328
Int. C\? E04G ///& i/04
U.S. a. 182—82 7 Claims
1. A scaffold structure comprising:
(a) a pair of vertical posts;
(b) a pair of brackets, said brackets being slidably mounted
on respective ones of said posts and each having a strut
projecting therefrom to support a platform;
(c) means to lock the brackets on the respective posts at
various selected vertical positions; and
(d) support secured to each post adjacent the lower end
thereof such that the bottom end of the post is out of
contact with the ground, each said support comprising a
pair of legs offset from one another in a first plane wherein
said plane is offset from the post and means rigidly con-
necting each of said legs to the post associated therewith,
said connecting means comprising an upper and lower
pair of rigid members connected at one end to an open
ended box section in which the post is securely fastened
and at the other end rigidly secured to said legs.
4,392,551
DOSING DEVICE FOR FEEDING LUBRICANT TO
FRICTION COUPLES
Viktor P. Buryakov, ulitsa generala Karpenko, 6, kv. 24, Niko-
laev; Gennady M. Ivanov, ulitsa 26 Bakinskikh komissarov, 8,
korpus 4, kv. 40, Moscow; Mikhail I. Kislik, ulitsa Kosmonav-
tov, 82, kv. 8, Nikolaev; Payel M. Kurgansky, ulitsa Kos-
monavtOT, 73, kv. 13, Nikolaev; Mark B. Shmotkin, ulitsa B.
Morskaya, 17, kv. 2, Nikolaev, and Eduard V. Eikhenvald,
ulitsa Pljuschikha, 42, kv. 122, Moscow, aU of U.S.S.R.
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,685
Int. a.3 F16N 25/02
U.S. a. 184—7 D 16 Qaims
turn
r r r
ar
1. A noise suppressor for exhaust steam from high-pressure
industrial-pxjwer boilers comprising a cylinder with sound
deadener packing and with a truss attached to the cover of an
inlet flange by means of brackets spaced from the cover and
with a clearance, a perforated expansion nozzle, a pipe system
of several hundreds of pipes, a {perforated outlet nozzle of an
included angle of the cone, at least one truss with a clearance
mounted on a collar of an inlet nozzle and preferably inside the
nozzle and wherein the ratio of the diameter of an outer cylin-
der to the diameter of the inlet flange in the cover is from 3 to
S, the ratio of the length of a perforated outlet nozzle to the
diameter or said outer cylinder is at least 1, with the ratio of the
length of the perforated expansion nozzle to the diameter of
the inlet flange being at least 12.
-\B
1. A dosing device for feeding a lubricant to friction couples,
comprising:
a valveless head section;
a plurality of distributing sections;
a valveless end section, said sections being successively
interconnected in the direction of the lubricant flow;
a central supply duct provided in said valveless head section;
each said distributing section having its respective housing;
a through-going cylindrical chamber made in said housing of
each said distributing section;
a distributing slide valve with reduced-diameter relieved
areas, accommodated for reciprocation in said through
cylindrical chamber made in said housing of each said
distributing section;
two closures closing from the ends each said through cylin-
drical chamber, limiting the reciprocation of said respec-
JULY 12, 1983
tr
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
543
tive distributing slide valve and defining therewith two
respective metering-out end chambers, each one of said
two metering-out end chambers communicating with one
of the relieved areas of said distributing slide valve of the
preceding upstream one of said distributing sections in the
direction of the lubricant flow;
a central through-going duct made in said housing of each
said distributing section, extending normally to the axis of
said cyUndrical through chamber and intersecting it;
outlet ducts made in said housing of each said distributing
section;
the inlets of said outlet ducts connected to said through
cylindrical chamber made in said housing of each respec-
tive one of said distributing sections;
the outlets of said outlet ducts adapted to supply the lubri-
cant to the friction couples, opening onto the external
lateral surface of said housing of each resjsective one of
said distributing sections;
means for rotating one of said distributing slide valves about
the axis thereof through a predetermined angle and for
retaining it in the thus rotated position, mounted on one of
~"' said distributing slide valves and provided in at least one
of said distributing sections;
other outlet ducts made in said housing of said at least one
section accommodating said distributing slide valve pro-
vided with said means for rotating it through a predeter-
mined angle and retaining it in the thus rotated position;
the inlets of said other outlet ducts belonging to a single
plane and being uniformly angularly spaced about the
perimeter of the cross-section of the wall of said through
cylindrical chamber, with the geometric axes of said inlets
dividing the circumference of the cross-section of said
cylindrical chamber into predetermined angles; the outlets
of said other outlet ducts belonging to a single plane nor-
mal to the axis of said through cylindrical chamber and
opening onto the lateral surfaces of said distributing sec-
tion;
two distributing passages made each in the shoulder portion
of at least one of said distributing slide valves provided
with said means for rotating it through a predetermined
angle and for retaining it in the thus rotated position,
facing the respective one of said two metering-out end
chambers, the inlet of each one of said distributing pas-
sages communicating with the relieved area of said re-
spective slide valve, and the outlet of each one of said two
distributing passages opening onto the external surface of
the shoulder poriion of said respective distributing slide
valve; said outlet of one of said distributing passages com-
municating with one of said inlets of said outlets ducts in
the extreme position of reciprocation of said respective
slide valve, while said outlet of the other one of said
distributing passages is accommodated intermediate said
inlets of said outlet ducts in the same aforementioned
position of said respective distributing slide valve; means
for monitoring the axial and angular positions of said
distributing slide valve, mounted on one of said distribut-
ing sections and operatively connected with said distribut-
ing slide valve.
wardly opening coffer, said base panel including shoulder
portions extending upwardly into said coffer and disposed in
longitudinal fashion along said side wall, lattice means dis-
posed in said coffer for attenuating and arresting wave motion
in and spattering from liquid contained in said coffer, said
4,392,552
DRAIN PAN FOR RADIATORS AND COOLING
SYSTEMS
Joshua Partridge, 4020 Harlan St., Emeryville, Calif. 94608
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104,009, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No.
4,315,561. This appUcation Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,091
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 16,
I j 1999, has been disclaimed.
I I Int. Q\? F16N 31/00; B65D 1/24
U.S. Q. 184—106 10 Claims
1. A drain receptacle for receiving effluent from a vehicle,
comprising a pan having a base panel, a plurality of sidewalls
extending upwardly from the perimeter of said base panel and
formed integrally therewith, said side walls extending continu-
ously abou^ said base panel and defming therewith an up-
lattice means impinging on and supported by said shoulder
portions, wherein said base panel includes a plurality of cor-
ners, and a plurality of upwardly extending concave wall
members, each disposed at one of said comers and extending
between the sidewalls converging thereat.
4,392,553
TWO HAND SCANNING CHECK-OUT COUNTER
Stephen W. Foster, North Java, N.Y., assignor to Almor Corpo-
ration, Femdale, Mich.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,958
Int. CI.3 A47F 9/04
U.S. a. 186—61 1 Claim
1. A supermarket-type check-out counter comprising:
a relatively narrow, elongated, forward unloading module
having an endless conveyor belt forming an upper, mer-
chandise conveying surface for automatically moving
goods from the forward end towards the rear end of the
forward module;
a flat plate-like surface located rearwardly of the conveyor
belt at the rear end of the forward module for forming a
continuation of the module conveying surface;
an indicia scanning means located at the flat plate-like sur-
face for sensing indicia imprinted upon goods which are
slid over the flat surface, said scanning means arranged
below said flat plate-like surface for scanning through a
window-like area in said flat surface;
a relatively wide, rear bagging module, spaced a consider-
able distance rearwardly of the forward module, with the
central longitudinal axes of the modules being in align-
ment, so that both opposite sides of the rear module extend
transversely a greater distance than the corresponding
sides of the forward module;
the upper surface of the rear module forming a merchandise
receiving surface for use in placing goods located thereon
into bags;
a pair of transversely spaced apart, elongated, side conveyor
surfaces bridging the space between the forward and rear
modules and with the opposite ends of said conveyor
surfaces opening into their adjacent module ends, said side
conveyors each being formed of an endless conveyor belt
mounted upon a support frame means for providing con-
544
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
tinuously moving upper belt surfaces for automatically
conveying goods to the bagging module merchandise
receiving surface;
at least one of said side conveyor surfaces being hingedly
connected to one module and releasably secured to the
opposite module so that it may be manually movable out
of normal position for providing ingress and egress for a
check-out operator who is normally positioned in the
space between the modules" and side conveyor surfaces;
and the longitudinal axis of each of said side belts being
transversely offset relative to the longitudinal axis of the
unloading module belt, so that only a portion of the for-
ward areas of each side belt transversely overlaps the
adjacent side portion of the flat plate-like surface;
whereby goods unloaded by the customer upon the forward
module conveyor belt are moved rearwardly to the opera-
tor who, using both hands, slides the goods across the flat
surface for scanning the indicia, and then rearwardly and
sidewardly upon either of the two side conveyor surfaces,
along which surfaces the goods are moved to the rear
module merchandise receiving surface for subsequent
placement into bags.
4,392,554
LIFT MAST ASSEMBLY
James W. Russey, Chardon, Ohio, assignor to Towmotor Corpo-
ration, Mentor, Ohio
PCT No. PCT/US81/01422, § 371 Date Oct. 23, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO83/01434, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 28, 1983
per Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 322,301
Int. a.3 B66B 9/20
U.S. a. 187—9 E 21 aaims
upper guide bearing (88) and between said upper (88) and
lower (80) guide bearings;
said movable upright (52) being elevationally movable a first
preselected distance, between a lowered position and an
intermediate position, at which one of said first and second
spaced apart elongate flanges (66,68) of the movable up-
right (52) is contactably engaged with the intermediate
guide bearing (98) and said first and second spaced apart
elongate fianges (66,68) of the movable upright (52) are
free from contact with said upper guide bearing (88); and
said movable upright (52) being elevationally movable a
second preselected distance, between said intermediate
position and a fully raised position, at which one of said
first and second spaced apart elongate flanges (66,68) of
said movable upright (52) is contactably engaged with the
upper guide bearing (88) and both of the first and second
spaced apart elongate flanges (66,68) of the movable up-
right (52) are free from contact with the intermediate
guide bearing (98).
4,392,555
FALL PROTECTION DEVICE
J. Nigel Ellis, 306 Country Qub Dr., Wilmington, Del. 19803
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,205
Int. a.3 B65H 59/14
U.S. a. 188—65.1 2 aaims
1. In a lift mast assembly (10) having a fixed upright (42) and
a movable upright (52) mounted on said fixed upright (42) and
elevationally movable relative thereto, said fixed upright (42)
having first (60) and second (62) spaced apart elongate flanges
and an upper (92) end portion, said movable upright (52) hav-
ing first (66) and second (68) spaced apart elongate flanges and
a lower (78) end portion, said movable upright (52) having a
lower guide bearing (80) mounted on the lower end portion
(78) thereof and contactably engaged with one of the first and
second spaced apart flanges (60,62) of said fixed upright (42),
and said f xed upright (42) having an upper guide bearing (88)
mounted on the upper end portion (92) thereof; the improve-
ment comprising:
an intermediate guide bearing (98) mounted on said fixed
upright (42) at the upper end portion (92) thereof at a
preselected elevationally spaced distance ("D") from said
1. In a fall protection safety device comprising:
(1) an elongated tubular housing having an upper open end,
a lower open end, and an elongate volume therebetween;
(2) an upper end guide block having a centrally located
opening therein, said upper end guide block being secured
to said upper open end of the housing;
(3) a lower end guide block having a centrally located open-
ing therein, said lower end guide block being secured to
said lower end of the housing, said upper and lower end
guide block openings defining a central passageway
through which a safety line may be threaded;
(4) a wedging ring having a centrally located conical bore,
said wedging ring being secured within the elongate vol-
ume;
(5) an axially movable line-gripping means for gripping a
safety line upon movement upwardly within the conical
bore of the wedging ring, said axially movable line-grip-
ping means being associated with an axially movable
piston having a centrally located opening and an outer
surface adjacent to and circumscribed by the inner surface
of said elongate tubular housing; and,
(6) moving means for moving the axially movable piston and
the associated line-gripping means upwardly within the
conical bore of the wedging ring;
the improvement which comprises:
(7) a serrated outer piston surface on said axially movable
piston; and,
(8) a plurality of openings spaced apart from and around the
centrally located opening of said lower end guide.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
545
432,556
ACTUATOR LOCKING DEVICE
Edward J. Deutsch, Bellmore, N.Y., assignor to Arkwin Indus-
tries, Inc, Westbury, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 936,788, Aug. 25, 1978, Pat. No. 4,240,332.
This application Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,419
Int. C1.3 FOIB 25/26
U.S. a. 188—67 5 Qaims
1. A device for locking a fluid pressure actuator in the ex-
tend position and unlocking it from such f>osition by actuating
detents, comprising cage means, a pair of rollers retained
within said cage means, said rollers including elongated cylin-
drical members parallel and contiguous one another, said rol-
lers retained by said cage means in alignment normal to the
axial center line of the actuator, an unlocking rod extending
from one end of said cage means along said actuator center
line, a rod extension extending from the opposite end of said
cage means along said actuator center line, sealing means on
said unlocking rod and said rod extension, means on said un-
locking rod retaining one end of an axially positioned spring,
said spring normally urging said unlocking rod, cage means,
rollers and rod extension in an extended direction along said
actuator center line with said actuator in an extend position
whereby said rollers urge said detents into a locked condition,
and said rod extension having a diameter at its sealing means
greater than that of said unlocking rod at its sealing means.
4,392,557
MECHANICAL ACTUATING DEVICE FOR A SPOT-TYPE
DISC BRAKE
Helmut Franke, Wehrheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,907
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 20,
1979, 2946853
Int. a.3 F16D 65/52, 65/16
U.S. a. 188—71.9 48 Qaims
1. A mechanical actuating device for a spot-type disc brake
comprising:
a brake caliper embracing the outer periphery of a brake
disc; said caliper including at least one axial cylindrical
bore;
a hollow substantially cylindrical brake piston diposed in
said axial bore acting on one brake shoe of said disc brake;
an actuating spindle disposed coaxial ly in said brake piston
and adapted to be turned around its axis by an actuating
means coupled thereto;
an actuating nut disposed coaxially in said brake piston
between said brake piston and said actuating spindle and in
a cooperating relationship with said actuating spindle, said
actuating nut having on a portion of the outer surface
thereof a first thread engaging a second thread associated
with said brake piston, said actuating nut being secured to
prevent rotation thereof by a rotation-preventing means;
and
an automatic brake clearance adjusting device for said brake
piston mcluding said first and second threads and a clutch
device coupled to said spindle to accomplish an axial
adjustment of said brake piston when a predetetermined
nominal brake clearance has been exceeded upon actua-
tion of said disc brake.
4,392,558
ACTUATOR MECHANISMS FOR VEHICLE BRAKES
Helmut Heibel, Moschheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Lucas Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,706
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 22, 1980,
8013192
Int a.3 F16D 65/iO
U.S. a. 188—72.7 10 Oaims
1. An actuator mechanism for a vehicle brake, comprising an
axially rotatable actuator shaft and an actuator member which,
in use, can be moved to actuate a brake, the actuator shaft and
actuator member being interconnected by an assembly which
comprises a first fast thread and a second fast thread, said first
thread having a greater pitch angle than said second thread and
having an operative connection with said actuator member to,
in use, move the actuator member to take up any slack until
friction surfaces of a brake interengage, said second thread
having an operative connection with said actuator member to,
in use, subsequently move the actuator member to apply the
brake, a spring being coiled around the actuator shaft, one end
of the spring being keyed to the shaft and the other end of the
spring abutting a projection from an annular member, the
annular member being mounted coaxially with the actuator
shaft, a toothed disc mounted coaxially and non-rotatably on
said actuator shaft being connected by a pin abutment to the
annular member, the outer periphery of said annular member
engaging with a fixed outer annular member by said first fast
thread.
4,392,559
DISC BRAKE HAVING SLIDABLY MOUNTED CALIPER
WITH FRICTION PAD SUPPORTING MEMBER
PROVIDED THEREON
Harumi Oshima, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Tokico Ltd.,
Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,208
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 16, 1980, 55-
19013[U]; Feb. 16, 1980, 55-19014
Int. Cl.i F16D 55/224. 65/04
U.S. a. 188—73.32 5 Oaims
1. A disc brake mountable on a stationary member integral
with a non-rotatable part of a vehicle and having spaced apart
546
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
arm portions, each arm portion having a horizontally extend-
ing guide and suppwrt surface and a vertically extending sup-
port and torque receiving surface, said disc brake being used
for braking rotation of a rotatable disc and comprising:
a caliper having limb portions and being adapted to be slid-
ably mounted on the stationary member which is integral
with a non-rotatable part of a vehicle;
a pair of friction pads, each friction pad having downwardly
facing guide surfaces positionable in contact with the
horizontally extending guide and support surfaces of said
arm portions of said stationary member and a torque
transmitting surface for transmitting braking torque to the
vertically extending support and torque receiving surfaces
of said arm portions of said stationary member;
a brake actuator provided in one limb portion of the caliper
for pressing one friction pad against one surface of the
rotatable disc; and
a pad supporting member provided on the calijser for sup-
porting said friction pads on the caliper when the caliper
and friction pads are not mounted on the stationary mem-
ber, and, when the disc brake is mounted on the stationary
member, the relationship between the friction pads and
said pad supporting member being such that:
the friction pads are slidably guided and supported on the
horizontally-extending guide and support surfaces of the
stationary member so that braking torque on the friction
pads is directly transmitted to the vertically extending
support and torque receiving surfaces of the stationary
member; and
said pad supporting member is free from contact with the
friction pads so that any braking force applied to the pads
is transmitted only between the friction pads and station-
ary member.
4,392,560
DISC BRAKE WITH A CALIPER SUPPORTED BY SLIDE
PINS
Kei Nakasu; Shigeni Ichikawa; Toshihiko Tanaka, all of Toyota,
and Mitsuo Ikeda, Chtryu, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kalsha and Aisin Seiki Kabushiki
Kaisha, both of Aichi, Japan
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,321
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 2, 1980, 55-92954[U]
Int. a.3 F16D 65/09
U.S. a. 188— 73J4 16 Claims
1. A disc brake comprising:
a disc rotor;
a pair of pad assemblies disposed on opposite first and sec-
ond sides of said disc rotor;
a stationary torque receiving member including First and
second plate portions disposed on said First and second
sides of the disc rotor respectively and supporting said
pair of pad assemblies slidably in a direction parallel to the
axis of rotation of said disc rotor, said torque receiving
member further including a pair of connecting portions
connecting said plate portions across the outer periphery
of said disc rotor;
a caliper including a fluid pressure cylinder portion facing
one of said pad assemblies disposed on said First side of the
disc rotor, a reaction portion facing the other of said pad
assemblies disposed on said second side of the disc rotor,
and a bridge portion connecting said cylinder portion and
said reaction portion, said caliper straddling said pair of
pad assemblies, said plate portions of the torque receiving
member and said disc rotor for urging said pad assemblies
onto opposite surfaces of said disc rotor on said First and
second sides; and
First, second, third and fourth slide pins supporting said
caliper slidably along said axis of rotation and partly Fitted
in First, second, third and fourth Fit-bores respectively, said
First and second slide pins extending from said flrst plate
portion axially outwardly of said disc rotor and said third
and fourth slide pins extending from said second plate
portion axially outwardly of said disc rotor, said flrst and
third slide pins being disposed co-axially with each other
and constituting a flrst pair, said second and fourth slide
pins being disposed co-axially with each other and consti-
tuting a second pair, each one of at least said flrst pair of
slide pins including a sleeve and a bolt, said bolt being
Fixed at one end thereof to the respective one of said First
and second plate portions and having at the other end
thereof an easily accessible head engageable with a
wrench tool to remove said bolt to pivot said caliper about
said second pair of slide pins for replacement of said pad
assemblies, at least one of said flrst and second slide pins
acting as a main slide pin which chiefly controls orienta-
tion of said caliper relative to said torque receiving mem-
ber and the remaining slide pins each acting as an auxiliary
slide pin which has less caliper orientation capability than
said main pin.
4,392,561
DISC BRAKE
Mamoni Watanabe, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Watanabe Engi-
neering Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 160,235
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 28, 1979, 54-88653[U]
Int. a.3 F16D 65/00
U.S. a. 188—73.36 4 Qaims
23b
23b
23b
1. A disc brake having a structure for supporting flrst and
second friction pads mounted on backing plates, comprising a
caliper body including a bridge section extending over a disc
and flrst and second arm sections depending on either side of
said pads, each arm section having a torque receiving portion
with a horizontal shoulder, and a pad spring for resiliently
holding the upper portions of the friction pads to come in
pressure contact with the sliding plane of the disc, said friction
pad backing plates comprising supports resting on said shoul-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
547
ders and means for contacting said spring, each said contacting
means comprising at least one upwardly extending projection
deflning a non-centered side wall, said pad spring comprising a
generally H-shaped, in plan view, unitary leaf spring having a
longitudinal central body portion spanning said disc and said
flrst and second pads, said central body portion being down-
wardly bent to form a depending longitudinal rib, and a pair of
oppositely outwardly extending arms at each end of said cen-
tral body portion, each arm terminating in a depending Finger,
said flngers being resiliently caused to engage flxedly with the
inner side walls of said bridge section, and said rib being kept
in contact with at least said side wall of said projection posi-
tioned on the side out of which the disc rotates, whereby said
friction pads are held under pressure against the torque-receiv-
ing portions of a bracket, located out of which the disc rotates,
and are forced in the direction of the rotating shaft of the disc.
4,392,562
LIMITED BEND MALLEABLE PENILE PROSTHESIS
John H. Burton, Minnetonka, and Michael A. Mikulich, St.
Paul, both of Minn., assignors to American Medical Systems,
Inc., St. Louis Park, Minn.
1 1 Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,288
' ' Int. a.3 A61F 5/00
U.S. 0. 128—79 11 Claims
i^S
1. A prosthesis adapted to be implanted in a penis, compris-
ing:
at least one elongate, malleable element adapted to be selec-
tively conformed to a desired shape,
an elongate, bend-limiting means positioned in cooperative
juxtaposition with said malleable element, along at least a
portion of its length said bend-limiting means having a
plurality of adjacent elements which engage each other
when a predetermined bending radius is reached as the
prosthesis is bent, to limit the bending thereof; and,
an elongate, physiologically inert envelope covering said
bend-limiting member and said malleable element.
said positions about said funnel cylindrical section com-
prising;
a flange Fixed to said chute and extending partially around
and normal to said funnel cylindrical section to move
around said funnel with said chute as it is rotated; and
brake mechanism Fixed to said funnel and including clamp-
ing means to squeeze said flange when said brake mecha-
nism is energized thereby stopping and holding said chute
in any selected horizontal position to which it is rotated.
432,564
TOTAL SALES SUMMING DEVICE FOR A VENDING
MACHINE
Yukichi Hayashi, Sakado, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kalsha
Nippon Coinco, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,462
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 14, 1980, 55-16965;
Mar. 18, 1980, 55-33506[U]
Int. a.J G07F 5/22
U.S. a. 194—1 N 11 Claims
„' n III
W'nwnTBr
"1
* 'TJ
^
1
amc€t>
Of ^
c
'VI i'-
'}
rs
s5
J ,
^^
M
Joi t|ai)=,-< 8
*^— 4
II 4,392,563 ^
BRAKE MECHANISM FOR MATERIAL HANDLING
SYSTEM
Lee Holman, 505 Cuesta Dr., Aptos, Calif. 95003
Continuation of Ser. No. 136,178, Mar. 31, 1980, abandoned.
This appUcation Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,182
Int. C1.3 B65G 11/00
U.S. a. 193—10 1 Qaim
1. An unloading system for a cement carrying truck wherein
cement is carried in a drum and emptied therefrom through a
rear opening, said unloading system comprising:
a dispensing funnel supported on said trunk and comprising
a vertically extending cylindrical section positioned to
receive and transport cement from said drum rear open-
ing;
an elongated chute for carrying cement from said funnel;
means supporting one end of said chute in a position to
receive cement from said funnel with the chute being
rotatable in a generally horizontal plane about the cylin-
drical section of said funnel and to the rear of said truck;
and
energizeable brake means for locking said chute in any of
' t -^lid I "IP .Jp'
;-;>j|s:'J|; ^Oa".-
••«>i^
LAm ]
1. A total sales summing device for a vending machine,
which vending machine includes counter means for cumula-
tively adding amounts of deposited coins and subtracting a
vend price of a vended article and an amount of a paid out coin
to obtain a balance of the amount of the deposited coins, char-
acterized in that said summing device comprises:
flrst means for detecting increment and decrement in the bal-
ance of the deposited coins obtained by said counter means;
second means for conducting count-up or count-down in ac-
cordance with the increment or decrement in the balance of
the deposited coins upon the detection by said flrst means;
and
third means for substantially prohibiting counting by said
second means of decrement of the balance if the decrement
has been caused by subtraction for collecting a vend price;
a sales amount being obtained by said second means by count-
ing up and down only increment and decrement in the bal-
ance caused by deposition and paying out of a coin.
548
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,565
HOLDING DEVICE FOR A HOLLOW BODY WITH AN
OPEN END AND A PIVOTAL HANDLE FOR PRINTING
THEREON IN A PRINTING MACHINE
Karl Strauch, Kifchlengern, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Werner Kammann Maschinenfabrik GmbH, Bunde, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,503
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 8,
1980, 3033736
Int. C1.3 B65G 17/32
U.S. a. 198—378 22 Qaims
. t
1. A holding device for a hollow body which is open at a
first end and which is provided with a handle mounted pivot-
ally thereon, to be printed upon in a rotary printing machine,
the handle having an apex region which in the course of piv-
otal movement about its mounting on the hollow body experi-
ences a change in its distance from the axis of the hollow body,
the holding device comprising at least one shaft and a rotatable
mounting member carried by the shaft, for holding a said
hollow body, wherein at an end which is towards the shaft, the
mounting member is provided with at least one locking mem-
ber which is movable with respect to said hollow body carried
by the mounting member and which is adapted to be brought
into engagement with said apex region of the handle, thereby
defming an operative locking position, and wherein the locking
member is adapted to be moved from its locking position into
another position in which it lies out of the arcuate path of
movement described by the said apex region in the course of
pivotal movement of the handle, and wherein a support mem-
ber is arranged to rotate with the mounting member and carries
the locking member and in the operative position of the lock-
ing member serves as an abutment for said apex region and
aligns same relative to the locking member.
members connected between adjacent pairs of channel ribs
terminating in edges at each side of the cage extending longitu-
dinally of the cage; baflle walls extending downwardly in-
wardly longitudinally of the cage from said upper curved wall
edges; an endless belt conveyor extending longitudinally
below the baffle walls from one cage end to a conveyor dis-
charge end at the other end of the cage; a chain extending
along each track member for movement in an endless orbit of
travel along said track means; means for moving said chains in
either direction in said orbit of travel; a series of buckets pivot-
ally mounted on said chains at spaced intervals extending
between each adjacent pair of chains; the buckets in one series
being mounted in staggered locations with respect to the buck-
ets in the next adjacent series of buckets; and means for releas-
ing material scooped by the buckets from each bucket as it
moves upward along one side of the cage past an upper cage
curved wall edge.
4,392,567
FEEDER OF BULK MATERIALS
Vladimir P. Glebov, ulitsa adm. Makarova 43, korpus 1, kv. 76;
Georgy V. Krivtsov, Bakuninskaya ulitsa, 77, kv. 28; Jury V.
Danchenkov, ulitsa Lesteva, 15, Kkorpus 2, kv. 57, all of
Moscow; Sergei A. Khukhry, ulitsa Studencheskaya, 11, kv.
34, and Sergei G. Schepotin, ulitsa Gogolya, 17, kv. 37, both of
Syzran, all of U.S.S.R.
FUed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,013
Int. a.3 B65G 47/04
U.S. Q. 198—544 13 Qaims
4,392,566
BULK MATERIAL HANDLING AND RECLAIMING
EQUIPMENT
William H. Tschantz, Canton, Ohio, assignor to Quadracast,
Inc., Canton, Ohio
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,029
Int. Q\? B65G 17/36
U.S. a. 198—509 10 Qaims
1. Reclaimer construction for reclaiming bulk material from
mounds thereof in storage areas of the type in which the
mounds extend in rectilinearly or arcuately formed mounds of
stacked bulk material; including frame means having spaced
upright end support members; a cage extending longitudinally
between and supported on said end support members; means
for moving the frame means and cage in either direction later-
ally of the cage toward a mound of stacked bulk material; the
cage including channel track means having members extending
at spaced intervals endlessly around the cage and defming the
periphery of the cage; said spaced track members being formed
by channel ribs opening outwardly and extending semicircu-
larly around at least the lower portion of the cage; curved wall
V
t
I , 1
@^
S
jpi =^^
A1ZJ>/
T,
1. A feeder of bulk materials comprising:
a conveyor; a batcher having a case separated into at least
three sections positioned above the conveyor; a band
encompassed within each said section serving to transfer
bulk material; shafts positioned in said sections for driving
said bands; drive means for driving a shaft of one of said
bands in one of said sections in a first direction and for
driving shafts of bands in others of stud sections in a direc-
tion opposite said first direction, with said section using
said band moving in said first direction being arranged
between said sections using said bands moving in the
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
549
opposite direction of movement, said drive means mclud-
ing a common drive for all shafts of bands moving in the
same direction of movement, said common drives having
output shafts coupled with shafts of said sections through
clutches serving for coupling and uncoupling of said
drives and said shafts; receiver tube means adapted for
receiving bulk material disposed in a top part of said case
of said batcher and for supplying the received bulk mate-
rial to said sections; and outlet tube means located in a
bottom part of said case of said batcher above said con-
veyor so that bulk material is supplied from said batcher
throue
1 said outlet tube means to said conveyor.
4,392,568
LIVE ROLLER CONVEYOR
Harold L. Tumbough, St. Louis, and Charles W. Wemtz, Fergu-
son, both of Mo., assignors to Alvey Inc., St. Louis, Mo.
Continuation of Ser. No. 917,788, Jun. 22, 1978, abandoned.
This application Dec. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 102,270
Int. Q.3 B65G 13/06
U.S. Q. 198—781 5 Qaims
1. A roller conveyor comprising: a plurality of spaced apart
and generally parallel article supporting rollers forming an
article conveying path; drive means in said conveyor beneath
said plurahty of rollers and normally engaged therewith to
drive said rollers collectively and thereby move articles along
the conveying path; expansible chamber brake means in said
conveyor spaced from a predetermined group of said rollers,
said predetermined group of rollers occupying a length of the
conveying path sufficient to support articles spanning a dis-
tance substantially equal in length to said expansible chamber
brake means; a source of fluid pressure; article sensing means in
said conveying path in position for sensing article movement
along said conveying path down stream from the location of
said expansible chamber brake means; and timing means oper-
ated by said article sensing means and connected to said source
of fiuid pressure and to said expansible chamber brake means,
said timing means being operable following the passage of a
predetermined time period in the determination by said sensing
means of an interruption in the article movement therebeyond
for applying fluid pressure to said expansible chamber brake
means to raise said predetermined group of rollers away from
said drive means and thereby interrupt the article conveying
drive imparted to said predetermined group of rollers after said
predetermined time period has passed for stopping article
movement beyond said predetermined group of rollers, said
fluid pressure applying means being inoperable to supply the
fluid pressure to said expansible chamber brake means to raise
said rollers away from engagement with said drive means upon
article movement out of jKJsition in which the presence thereof
is determined by said sensing means prior to the expiration of
said predetermined time period.
4,392,569
SOFT CONTACT LENS ASEPTICIZING CASE
Leo E. Shoup, 125 N. Mt. Vernon St., Prescott, Ariz. 86301
Continuation of Ser. No. 30,188, Jun. 6, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,598
Int. a.3 B65D H5/00; B08B 3/10; B65D 85/38: A45C 11/04;
A61F 9/00
U.S. Q. 206—5.1 5 Qaims
1. A soft contact lens asepticizing case comprising:
(a) a base member having a surface containing two spaced
central raised portions for receiving a contact lens thereon
and an upstanding wall member surrounding each said
central portion, said wall member having a height greater
than the height of said central portion whereby the addi-
tion of fluid to said base member enables the central por-
tion to be covered with fluid;
(b) sealing cap means for engaging each wall member and
establishing a fluid-tight contact therewith;
(c) means contained on each sealing cap means for permit-
ting the attachment of an internal guide thereto; and
(d) flexible internal guide means for attachment to each of
said cap means, said guide means extending downwardly
from said cap means to each central raised portion of said
base member for maintaining a soft contact lens thereon,
said guide means being spaced from said lens and contain-
ing at least one fluid passage therein to permit fluid to
contact said lens.
4,392,570
AQUARIUM NET ASSEMBLY AND PACKAGING
THEREFORE
Allan H. Willinger, Englewood, N.J., assignor to Willinger Bros.
Inc., Englewood, N.J.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,221
Int. Q.3 B65D 69/00
U.S. Q. 206—231 1 Claim
1. An aquarium net assembly comprising an aquarium net
including a frame mounted netting sack and an elongated wand
extending from said frame, a suspension bracket mounted on
said wand for movement along the longitudinal axis of said
wand for rotation about the axis said suspension bracket, com-
prising a sleeve frictionally engaged about said wand and an
arm extending from said sleeve, said arm terminating in a
downwardly extending lip in combination with a flat bag-like
enclosure for said assembly within which said frame mounted
net and said bracket is received, said bracket being disposed
adjacent to the frame and having its arm in alignment with the
plane of the frame thus constituting a flat packaged fish net
assembly. —
550
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,571
DEVICE FOR DISPLAYING AND MARKING FOODS OR
THE LIKE
Trude-Helga Heidt-Cizerle, Bertholdstrasse 17, D7518 Bretten
1, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 129,891, Mar. 13, 1980, abandoned.
This application Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 319,965
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 17,
1979, 2910649
Int a.3 B65D 1/34
U.S. a. 206—557 16 Oaims
means and cooperating with said integrally formed means;
and
means attachable to said channel means cooperating with
said integrally formed means and engaging said providing
means for supporting the front wheel of a small-wheeled
bicycle;
said attachable means comprising a rod member having a
straight portion abutting said channel means, a hook por-
tion spaced inwardly toward said channel means, and an
elevated portion extending out of a plane containing the
straight portion and the hook portion, and including an
inclined portion and a U-Shaped hook portion engaging
said providing means whereby when the rack is mounted
on a vertical surface the small-wheeled bicycle is totally
suspended by its front wheel.
1. Device for displaying and marking articles such as foods
or the like comprising a flat rectangular tray (10) having a
horizontally extending edge (11), and provided with a holder
for receiving said tray, said holder having a carrying handle,
characterized in that said holder (20, 22) is constructed in the
shape of a flat rectangular frame which forms a receptacle for
depositing said tray (10) with said edge resting on said rectan-
gular frame; that said frame has the same cross-sectional shape
on all sides; that a handle member (30) is attached to one side
of said frame and projects toward the opposite side of said
frame over said tray (10), the distance of said handle member
above said frame and tray increasing toward said opposite side,
and that to the free end portion of said handle (30) a marking
plate (40) is connected or connectable to said handle, said
marking plate (40) positioned in a manner such that it can be
viewed from the side of the frame opposite the side of said
frame that has said handle (30) attached thereto.
4,392,573
TIE ROPE COMPENSATION ARRANGEMENT
Karl M. Gyomrey, Belmont, England, assignor to Coles Cranes
Limited
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,307
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 17, 1879,
7928798
Int. C\? B66C 23/04
U.S. a. 212—230 7 Claims
4,392,572
BICYCLE STORAGE RACK
Walter Bernard, 4800 South Lake Park Ave., Chicago, III. 60615
FUed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,256
Int. a.J A47F 7/04
U.S. a. 211—19 8 Oaims
1. A storage rack for storing a small-wheeled bicycle on a
vertical surface comprising;
means deflning a channel for receiving a bicycle tire;
means integrally formed with said channel means for sup-
porting a front wheel of a bicycle;
means for providing lateral stability to the front wheel of the
bicycle, said providing means connected to said channel
1. A telescopic strut jib crane comprising:
a crane base,
a turntable pivotally mounted to said base,
a jib mounted to said turntable so as to be able to elevate or
lower about a pivot at the base of the jib,
said jib comprising at least three telescopic sections, each
section telescoping one within the next adjacent telescopic
station said sections comprising an outer section, at least
one intermediate section and a base section, telescope
means for extending telescopically jib sections from said
base section,
support pulley means mounted to said turntable to the rear
of said jib, tie rope means of fixed length,
said rope means passing from an anchorage at the head of
said intermediate section to and around first extension
pulley means at the base of said outer section to and
around second extension pulley means at the head of said
outer section to and around said support pulley means to
and around third extension pulley means at the head of
said intermediate section down said intermediate section
and around fourth extension pulley means at the base of
said intermediate section and to the head of the adjacent
lower section,
whereby each said section is supported by said rope means
from said support pulley means.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
SSI
432,574
TOWER CRANE
Karel H. A. Theyskens, Burgemeester Geyskensstraat 4, B
3950 Beringen, Belgium
FUed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,125
Claims priority, application Belgium, Apr. 18, 1980, 58514
Int. a.} B66C 23/64
generally horizontally and having means including an exten-
sion elbow having an angle of less than 90* to receive a rigid
pipe section extending inboard of the car; an end cock located
outboard of said swivel and having an end cock flange portion
abutting said swivel flange portion; means holding said swivel
and said end cock in assembly and supported by said support
MS. a. 212—225
3 Claims
1. Tower crane comprising:
a pylon,
a telescopic jib which comprises at least two jib parts slid-
able relative to each other, namely a foot part fastened to
said pylon and a slidable point part, which parts each have
a runway extending along the lengthwise direction
thereof,
a crab mounted on the jib and movable on each runway,
means to lock both said jib parts relative to one another,
a winch mounted adjacent to the foot part of the jib,
a cable pulley mounted on the end removed from the pylon
of the jib point part,
at least one cable pulley mounted on the end lying on the
pylon side of the jib point part,
two cable pulleys mounted on the end removed from the
pylon of the jib foot part,
a cable pulley mounted on the end lying on the pylon side of
the jib foot part,
a stop mounted on the foot part for stopping the movement
of the travelling crab in the direction of the pylon,
a stop mounted on the point part for stopping the movement
of the travelling crab in the direction of the jib end re-
moved from the pylon, and,
a cable for sliding said jib in and out as well as for traversing
said travelling crab over the jib,
said cable comprising two cable portions so connected to the
winch that when one cable portion is wound up the other
is unwound, both portions being connected to the travel-
ling crab, one cable portion running from the crab over
the cable pulley at that end removed from the pylon, of
the jib point part to the winch, while the other cable
portion runs from the crab over the cable pulley at that
end lying on the pylon side, of the jib foot part, but there-
after runs back away from said pylon to one of the cable
pulleys which are mounted on that end removed from the
pylon, of said jib foot part, round said pulley back toward
the pylon, over said cable pulley on that end facing the
pylon of the jib point part, thereafter again away from the
pylon, and finally over the second cable pulley which is
mounted at that end removed from the pylon, of the jib
foot part, back towards the pylon and to the winch.
11
4,392,575
SWIVEL ASSEMBLY FOR END COCK
Thomas B. Baker, and Richard J. Mandrell, both of St. Charles,
Mo., assignors to ACF Industries, Incorporated, New York,
N.Y.
1 1 Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,626
' ' Int. a.3 B61G 5/08: F16L 3/16
U.S. a. 213—76 5 Qaims
1. A trainline connection assembly comprising: a support
plate adapted to be rigidly attached to an end portion of the
car; said plate including a slot; a swivel having a swivel flange
portion engaging said plate and a swivel extension portion
extending through said slot; said extension being freely rotat-
able about said swivel flange portion; said swivel having a
hollow center portion; said swivel extension portion extending
plate; said end cock including a handle extending outboard of
said end cock; said end cock including glad hand connecting
means including a glad hand elbow of less than 90° for receiv-
ing a flexible portion of the train line; said handle and said glad
hand connecting means located within AAR clearance re-
quirements for railway cars.
4,392,576
MULTILAYERED CONTAINER INCLUDING A LAYER
OF MICROCRIMPED METALLIC FOIL
Richard F. Berger, Huntington; Greg Pardes, New York, and
Bernard R. Gerber, Jamaica, all of N.Y., assignors to The
Reseal Container Corporation of America, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,244
Int. a.3 B65D 23/02
U.S. a. 215—1 C 10 Oaims
i/^
1. A container blow molded from a multilayered wall pre-
form comprising a wall structure forming a closed end, an
oppositely disposed open end, and side walls extending be-
tween the closed end and the open end, said wall structure
comprising a continuous multilayered wall forming said closed
end and said side walls to at least adjacent the open end, said
multilayered wall having an inner surface deflning the inner
surface of the container and an outer surface deflning the outer
surface of the container, said multilayered wall comprising at
least one layer of an expanded plastics material and at least one
layer of an expanded at least two-directionally microcrimped
metallic foil with the metallic foil in surface contact with said
plastics material layer wherein during blow molding of the
preform said multilayered wall is expanded from the preform
state into the desired container conflguration.
552
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4^2,577
GLASS VIAL WITH DIAGONAL CUT LINE
Hideyuki M aekawa, Osaka; ShiAJi Hiramoto, Kobe; Kozo Itaya,
Sakai; Kokichi Sato, Habikino, and Hirotaka Nishida,
Ibaraki, all of Japan, assignors to Shionogi & Co., Ltd. and
Taisei Kako Co., Ltd., both of Osaka, Japan
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 253,018
Int. a.J A61J 7/00
U.S. a. 215—32 6 Claims
1. A glass vial having a main body, a branch pipe portion and
an intermediate neck portion disposed therebetween, said neck
portion containing indentation portions which are off-set rela-
tive to each other and a cut line provided at the intermediate
neck portion for cutting the branch pipe portion of the vial
from said main body thereof, said cut line being diagonally
oriented with resjject to a horizontal reference line which is
normal to the central axis of the main body of the vial, said
diagonal orientation of the cut line being positioned by con-
necting the innermost portions of said ofT-set indentations with
said cut line.
4,392,578
STOPPER APPARATUS FOR CONTENT
CONTAMINATION PREVENTION
Beverly A. Fipp; Bernard E. Fipp, both of 7728 Hidden Valley
Ct., and John L. Haller, 7249 Carrizo Dr., all of La Jolla,
Calif. 92037
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 190,569, Sep. 25, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 893,876, Apr. 6,
1978, abandoned. This application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No.
313,833
Int. a.3 B65D 39/12
U.S. a. 215—231 5 Claims
1. An improved stopper apparatus for content contamination
prevention for a container having an opening, said container
being partially filled with a gaseous contaminant and partially
filled with a liquid substance which is to be protected from
contamination by said contaminant, said stopper apparatus
comprising:
(a) stopper plug;
(b) a means for securing such stopper plug to said container
opening;
(c) a bladder removably fixed to the bottom of said stopper
plug wherey said bladder is positioned within said con-
tainer when said stopper plug is secured within said con-
tainer opening;
(d) said stopper plug includes a means for inflating said
bladder, a means for venting said gaseous contaminants
when said stopper plug is secured in said container open-
ing, said inflating means including a means for deflating
said bladder, in combination with;
(e) a means for depositing a protective gas into said container
when said stopper plug is secured in said container open-
ing;
(0 said means for venting including a one-way check valve
permitting the expulsion of the gaseous contaminant, said
means for inflating said bladder including a tube member
extending into said bladder connected to a one-way check
valve permitting said bladder to be filled and preventing
the filled bladder from exhausting its contents.
4,392,579
CLOSURE WITH DOMED PORTION
Albert R. Uhlig, Toledo, and Long F. Chang, Sylvania, both of
Ohio, assignors to Owens-Illinois, Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,394
Int. a.3 B65D 51/16
U.S. a. 215—253 6 Qaims
1. A thermoplastic closure for a container, said container
having a threaded finish terminating in an annular rim, said rim
defining an opening into said container and having an upper
rim portion, a lower rim portion and a top rim portion, said
closure comprising:
an annular internally threaded skirt portion operative to
engage said container threads;
a unitary top portion extending upwardly from said annular
skirt portion and closing the top of the closure;
a first and second sealing means depending from said top
portion, said first sealing means including an annular seal-
ing member depending downwardly from said top portion
and operative to engage the upper rim portion on the
inside surface of said finish and said second sealing means
including an annular sealing member depending down-
wardly from said top portion and operative to engage the
lower rim portion on the outside surface of said finish; and
at least one vent port disposed on said top portion radially
between said first and second sealing means.
4,392,580
CLOSURE CAP
Charles S. Ochs, Lancaster, Ohio, assignor to Anchor Hocking
Corporation, Lancaster, Ohio
FUed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,610
Int. a.3 B65D 41/04
UJS. a. 215—332 14 Claims
1. In a closure cap having a metal shell with a cover and a
depending skirt and having a fiowed-in plastisol sealing gasket
and inwardly projecting lugs formed on the bottom of the skirt
for engaging lugs on a container the improvement comprising
said cap skirt having a tapered upper portion extending down-
wardly and outwardly to the top of a generally cylindrical
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
553
lower skirt portion, said sealing gasket being positioned in a
downwardly facing channel extending radially outwardly to
the top of said tapered sicirt portion and said tapered upper
portion having a radial dimension approximately equal to the
radial width of the cap lugs and a vertical dimension greater
than half the skirt height.
4,392,581
CONTAINER CLOSURE HAVING A LINER AND
METHOD FOR ITS PRODUCTION
Junichi Itsubo, Hiratsuka; Fumio Mori, Yokohama, and Hideki
Sato, Hiratsuka, all of Japan, assignors to Japan Crown Cork
Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 395,910
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 9, 1981, 56/106252
Int. a.3 B65D 53/00. 53/04
U.S. a. 215—348 8 Qaims
1. A container closure having a sealing liner comprising a
vinyl chloride-type resin, said liner being composed of a com-
position comprising 100 parts by weight of the vinyl chloride-
type resin and 35 to 200 parts by weight of a mixed fatty acid
ester of glycerin derived from glycerin, at least one saturated
or unsaturated fatty acid component having an even number of
carbon atoms between 6 and 24 and at least one acetic and/or
butyric acid component.
4,392,582
RETORTABLE BONDED CAN
Yoichi Kitamura, and Hisashi Hotta, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Toyo Seikan Kaisha Limited, Japan
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,945
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 26, 1980, 55-69012
Int. a.3 B65D 25/14, 25/34; B32B 15/08, 27/38
U.S. Q. 220—75 1 Qaim
1. A retortable bonded can made of an electrolytic chromic
acid treated steel sheet wherein at least a part of the can body
is composed of a steel sheet having on at least one surface
thereof a metallic chromium layer, a chromium oxide layer and
an organic lacquer film layer arranged in this order from the
steel sheet surface and at least a part of the seaming portion of
the can body is bonded with an organic adhesive, character-
ized in that
(1) the amounts of the metallic chromium layer and the
chromium oxide layer deposited are 70-130 mg/m^ and
5-30 mg/m^, respectively, as metallic chromium; the
amount of alkali-soluble chromium in these layers after
heating at 210° C. for 10 minutes is not more than 12
mg/m^ and not more than 70% by weight of the amount
of the deposited chromium oxide before heating; the area
of thickness unevenness of the chromium oxide is not
more than 10%; and the amount of metal exposed, ex-
pressed as the amount of copper deposited, is not more
than 30 rag/dm^,
(2) the organic lacquer film layer is a baked and cured film of
a mixed lacquer composed of 70 to 85 parts by weight of
an epoxy resin having a number average molecular weight
of 2900 to 3750 and derived from epichlorohydrin and
bisphenol A and 30 to 15 parts by weight of a resol-type
phenolic resin, the total amount of these resins being 100
parts by weight; the phenolic resin is obtained by reacting
a mixed phenol composed of 5 to 20% by weight of a
monohydric phenol and 95 to 80% by weight of bisphenol
A with an aldehyde in the presence of ammonia and has
such a molecular weight distribution that the proportion
of a high-molecular-weight portion having 3 or more rings
is 60 to 70% by weight and the proportion of a low-
molecular-weight portion having 2 or less rings is 40 to
30% by weight; and the baked and cured film contains 83
to 87 parts by weight of the epoxy resin and 17 to 13 parts
by weight of the phenolic resin based on 100 parts by
weight of the epoxy resin and the phenolic resin com-
bined, and
(3) the adhesive is a linear polyamide adhesive.
4,392,583
CAP AND VALVE ASSEMBLY
Tom C. Wong, Saginaw, Mich., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,682
Int. a.3 B65D 51/16
U.S. Q. 220—202 i Oaim
\
1. A cap assembly for a liquid reservoir subjected to mechan-
ical vibrations of randon frequencies and amplitudes; said cap
assembly comprising a substantially cup-shaped cover mem-
ber, latching means for securing the cover member to the
reservoir, and a central stem portion integral with said cover
extending into the reservoir when said cap assembly is placed
on the reservoir; a flexible valve member adjacent the interior
surface of the cover member and including an annular sealing
portion contacting the reservoir and cover member, and a
diaphragm portion disposed between the annular seal portion
and said central stem and cooperating with the cover to form
an air chamber means which expands and contracts in response
to the mechanical vibrations of random frequencies and ampli-
tudes; inlet air passage means in said cover member for com-
municating air from atmosphere to said air chamber means
during expansion thereof; outlet air passage means between
said stem portion and said valve member for communicating
air from said air chamber means to the interior of said reser-
voir; said inlet passage means having greater resistance to air
flow than said outlet passage during contraction of said air
chamber means such that pulsating air flow into said reservoir
minimizes liquid leakage therefrom; and spring means com-
pressed between said latching means and said central stem for
transmitting a force through said cover to aid the sealing at the
annular sealing portion and to establish the at rest volume of
the air chamber means.
1032 O.G.-r22
554
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,584
VENT CAP FOR A CONTAINER ACCOMMODATING
HYDRAULIC FLUIDS
Ludwig Bauer, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,413
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 30,
1979, 2943747
Int. a.3 B65D 51/16
U.S. a. 220—374 36 Oaims
17 4?
continue to move in said first direction beyond said peel-back
edge and thus to separate from said liner, the improvement
which comprises striking a blow against the non-adhesive face
of each successive label in the vicinity of the leading edge
1. A vent cap for closing and venting an opening of a con-
tainer for hydraulic operating means located on the ambient-air
side,
said opening comprising an aperture with edges for connect-
ing the interior of the container with the ambient air,
having a lid-shaped part with a peripheral wall and a base-
shaped part of the cap, where the base-shaped part of the
cap is inserted within the peripheral wall of the lid-shaped
part of the cap and has ring-shaped sealing means for the
sealing of the opening disposed centrally with respect to a
central axis, and
where one of the parts of the cap is provided with fastening
means for the detachable securing of the fitting position of
the vent cap at the opening of the container and both parts
of the cap have corresponding central mounting supports
for the mutual mounting,
with said mounting supports fastening the parts of the cap
essentially immovably with respect to one another in the
direction of the central axis,
characterized in that
the lid-shaped part of the cap has a journal located radially
on the inside with respect to the central axis, and
the base-shaped part of the cap has a hub resting on the
journal,
with the hub being provided with a central ring-shaped
receiving groove contacting said edges which is separated
from the fastening means, for said sealing ring means
engaging said edges, and
both parts of the cap in fitting direction, by means of their
joumal-hub-mounting, being mounted so that they can be
rotated freely with respect to one another.
thereof, such blow being sufficiently sharp to enhance such
tendency to the point where there is accomplished the separa-
tion of labels which would otherwise resist such tendency and
fail to separate.
4,392,586
APPARATUS FOR SECURING CARTONS ON THE TOP
OF ARTICLES CARRIED IN A CASE
Thomas S. Hartness, and Thomas P. Hartness, both of Green-
ville, S.C, assignors to Hartness International, Inc., Green-
ville, S.C.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,194
Int. a.3 B65G 59/06: B65B 17/02
U.S. CI. 221—210 7 Qaims
4,392,585
STAR TRIP LABEL STRIPPER
Charles F. Reed, Madison, and Charles M, Morrow, Painesville,
both of Ohio, assignors to Avery International Corporation,
Pasadena, Calif.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,111
Int. CI.^ B65H 5/28
U.S. a. 221—1 10 Qaims
1. In a method of dispensing a succession of adhesive labels
from a web of liner material to which the labels are temporar-
ily adhered by feeding the liner with the labels thereon along a
liner infeed path which leads along a first direction to a peel-
back edge at a dispensing station, with the liner contacting the
peel-back edge and the succession of labels each spaced from
the peel-back edge by the thickness of the liner, and drawing
the liner under tension over the peel-back edge and away
therefrom along a liner outfeed path which leads from said
peel-back edge in a second direction that is divergent from said
first direction to thereby impose on the labels a tendency to
1. An apparatus for feeding cartons in succession from a
stack of cartons, spaced openings provided in a main body
portion of said carton for receiving articles, and a space pro-
vided between said main body portions of said cartons when
carried in said stack, said apparatus comprising:
a support plate;
a plurality of picker fingers carried on said support plate;
outwardly extending projections carried adjacent a top
portion of said picker fingers;
means for selectively moving said support plate to and from
said stack of cartons for inserting said plurality of picker
fingers adjacent said openings in at least the last carton of
said stack of cartons allowing said outwardly extending
projections to be inserted in the space between said last
carton and the next to the last carton and for separating
said last carton from the remainder of said stack of car-
tons;
a pivotal means supporting each of said outwardly extending
projections; and
means for shifting said pivotal means moving said projec-
tions laterally of said fingers for inserting said projections
between said last carton and said next to said last carton
prior to removing said last carton from said stack,
whereby said cartons are successively removed from said
stack when said support plate is moved from said stack of
cartons.
July 12,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
555
4,392 587
APPLICATOR FOR GRANULAR MATERIAL
W. John Bourne, P.O. Box 1333, Kindcrsley, Saskatchewan,
Canada (SOL-ISO)
Continuation of Ser. No. 876,252, Feb. 9, 1978, abandoned. ThU
application Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,074
Gaims priority, application Canada, Jan. 9, 1978, 294541
Int. a.3 GOIF 13/00
U.S. a. 222-63 1 Qaim
1. An applicator to be used on a vehicle for metering and
discharging granular agricultural material, comprising:
a hopper for holding the granular material, said hopper
having a base containing a plurality of orifices therein
whereby the granular material may fall through each of
said orifices by the action of gravity, said plurality of
orifices being disposed in a line;
a rotatable shaft positioned below said orifices parallel to the
line of said orifices in the vertical plane defined by said
orifices;
a plurality of metering wheels mounted on said shaft for
rotation with said shaft in planes perpendicular to the axis
of rotation of said shaft, each said wheel being vertically
aligned with one of said orifices with the center of said
wheel coinciding with the axis of rotation of said shaft
whereby the uppermost point on the periphery of each
said wheel is vertically aligned with one of said orifices;
the uppermost point on the periphery of each said wheel
forming a predetermined clearance with its orifice so that,
given the dimensions and surface roughness of said
wheels, the size of each said orifice, and the characteristics
of the granular material, the granular material is dis-
charged from between said hopper base and the periphery
of each said wheel only when each said wheel is rotating
and the rate of discharge depends only on the speed of
rotation of said shaft and said wheels whereby the output
of granular material is a linear function of the speed of
rotation of said shaft and said wheels;
a downwardly disposed collector tube positioned below
each said wheel for receiving the granular material dis-
charged from between said hopper base and said wheel
and for conducting the granular material to a spreader
means, each said collector tube having a funnel forming
the top end of said tube into which the granular material
spills and a discharge end; /
a motor for rotating said shaft and said wheels;
means for setting the speed of said motor and thereby the
speed of rotation of said shaft and said wheels;
electric control means for automatically regulating said
motor to maintain said shaft and said wheels at the set
speed, said control means including means for constantly
monitoring the speed of said motor and adjustment means
for varyingthe electric input to said motor in accordance
with the signals received from said monitoring means;
and,
means for forward and rearward positioning of said dis-
charge ends of said collector tubes, said collector tube
positioning means comprising a horizontally disposed
cross bar connected to said collector tubes adjacent said
discharge ends and means cooperating with said cross bar
for pivoting said cross bar and thereby said discharge ends
of said collector tubes with respect to said hopper.
4 392 588
NOZZLE ASSEMBLY FOR COLD DRINK
MERCHANDISER
Frank T. Scalera, Maplewood, N.J., assignor to Rowe Interna-
tional, Inc., Whippany, N.J.
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,482
Int. aj G07F 13/06
U.S. a. 222-129.4 n Qaims
1. In a drink machine for selectively delivering one of a
plurality of beverages each having a principal constituent and
a selected flavoring constituent to a cup positioned at a deliv-
ery location at which the cup is accessible to a customer,
apparatus including a unitary body formed with a base and a
centrally located guide extending upwardly from said base,
said guide formed with a bore having a longitudinal axis ex-
tending generally perpendicular to said base, said base having
a plurality of holes therethrough outside said guide and cir-
cumferentially spaced around said axis, said body being formed
with a wall extending upwardly from said base in the region of
said holes to an upper rim, the inner surface of said wall in-
clined outwardly from said base toward said rim, a plurality of
grooves in said inner surface extending from said rim respec-
tively into said holes, a plurality of elongated syrup nozzles,
each of said nozzles having a central passage with a longitudi-
nal axis, an external surface with a generally circular cross-sec-
tional shape and a positioning shoulder formed along the
length thereof, each of said grooves having a generally semi-
circular cross-sectional shape whereby each of said grooves is
adapted to receive one of said nozzles with the shoulder
thereof in engagement with said rim to position said nozzle
along the length of said groove, a plurality of retainers, means
for releaseably securing said retainers to said body with the
retainers in engagement with parts of said nozzles outside said
grooves to retain said nozzles in said grooves, a beverage
principal constituent supply fitting having a passage with a
longitudinal axis and a shoulder and adapted to be received in
said guide with the guide axis generally coincidental with the
fitting axis and with said shoulder in engagement with the
upper end of said guide, said body being formed with an ice
chute suppori and means mounting said body in said machine
at a position adjacent to said delivery location with said nozzle
axes intersecting said fitting axis at a predetermined point
above a cup at said delivery location.
SS6
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,589
MULTIPLE-TUBE DISPENSER
Wolf-Dietrich Herald, Hechendorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to ESPE Fabrik Phannazeutisclier Preparate GmbH,
Seefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,447
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 11,
1980, 3005008
Int a.3 B67D 5/42
U.S. a. 222—137 9 Claims
bent away from said bottle neck to form a soft, yielding sup-
porting area, and the overall height of the supporting finger is
less than the overall height of the bottle neck and dropping
spout.
m
4,392,591
APPARATUS FOR METERING SEMI-FLOWABLE
MATERIAL
Arthur L. Fassauer, Canyon, Tex., assignor to Geosource Inc.,
Houston, Tex.
FUed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,645
Int. a.3 BplF 7/24
U.S. a. 222—227 60 Claims
1. A multiple-tube dispenser comprising
(a) a body including at least two parallel cylinders, each
having a discharge opening at a front end thereof, a piston
slidably disposed in each cylinder, and a web portion of
flexible material interconnecting said cylinders and having
a first bore;
(b) pressing means including a head portion with a second
bore, and a number of plungers equal to the number of said
cylinders, said plungers being interconnected by said head
portion, and each having a front end for engaging an
associated one of said pistons; and
(c) a threaded spindle extending through said second bore
and engaging said first bore for causing simultaneous
movement of said pistons relative to said cylinders;
(d) said first and second bores having first and second slots,
respectively, extending in a direction transverse to the axis
of said spindle for permitting said spindle to be inserted
into, and removed from, said first and second bores along
said transverse direction, the width of said first slot being
smaller than the outer diameter of said spindle.
4,392,590
EYE DROP DISPENSING BOTTLE
Ernest Hofmann-Igl, Kampen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Basottaerm GmbH, Biberach an der Riss, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,606
Claims priority, appUcation Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 16,
1979,2946366
Int. a.5 A61M 7/00
U.S. a. 222—174 1 Claim
1. In an eye drop dispensing bottle made of elastically de-
formable plastic comprising a hollow body defining a cavity
for containment of the product to be dispensed, a bottle neck
extending upwardly from said hollow body and terminating in
a dropping spout, said dropping spout and said bottle neck
being in fluid communication with said hollow body, and a
supporting finger extending upwardly from said hollow body
and spaced from said bottle neck, the improvement which
resides in that the supporting finger is made of soft-elastically
yielding material, the upper end of said supporting finger is
1. An apparatus for metering semi-flowable material, com-
prising:
a hopper for receiving a mass of semi-flowable material, said
hopper having a bottom opening therein;
means for bottom unloading the semi-flowable material from
the hopper and delivering said material in loosened condi-
tion and at a substantially reduced and controlled head
pressure and density into an aeration and conditioning
zone;
means for aerating and conditioning the loosened semi-flow-
able material to prevent the material from compacting and
bridging and to place the semi-flowable material in a state
of substantially constant density, said aerating and condi-
tioning means including
a stationary pressure plate supported in the bottom open-
ing of the hopper and having a plurality of holes there-
through,
an upper hub rotatably mounted above the stationary
pressure plate and having at least one arm extending
outward therefrom,
a lower hub rotatably mounted below the stationary pres-
sure plate and having at least one arm extending out-
ward therefrom, and
a plurality of substantially vertical probes extending
downward from the bottom surface of the stationary
pressure plate;
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
557
means for bottom unloading the semi-flowable material from
the aeration and conditioning means and maintaining the
material in a substantially constant density state for volu-
metric delivery into a distributing zone; and
means for distributing the semi-flowable material without
inducing packing and bridging of the material for delivery
by gravitational action into a collection hopper.
tubular main part, said thrust wall is moved by control
means;
said tubular main part, end wall and thrust wall form a
compartment for receiving a given quantity of coffee
powder, through an inlet in one of the side panels, and
4,392,592
FOOD DISPENSING GUN
Norman D. Sullivan, 251 Donald Dr., HoUister, Calif. 95023
FUed Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,773
Int. a.3 GOIF 11/02
VJS. a. 222—288
7 0aims
forcing it out through said end by means of the thrust wall,
wherein on the two walls facing the compartment, the
thrust wall is fitted with two lips facing the compartment,
hinged to each other so as to form a V and each held
firmly, by elastic means, against the respective walls of the
two walls of the tubular main part so as to scrape it clean.
1. A dispensing device for dispensing condiment in partially
liquid form comprising:
a housing including a handle section and an elongated dis-
pensing section;
means in said housing defining a chamber having a discharge
opening, said chamber being disposed in said dispensing
section near one end thereof, and said discharge opening
being located at said one end, said chamber defining
means including an abutment member at the end of the
chamber opposite said discharge opening;
a plunger mounted for reciprocation in said chamber;
spacer means disposed in said chamber between said abut-
ment member and said plunger to limit the movement of
said plunger toward said abutment member and thereby
determine the condiment receiving volume of said cham-
ber;
means for delivering a charge of condiment into that portion
of the chamber located between said plunger and the
discharge opening; and
means for actuating said plunger to discharge substantially
all of the condiment contained within said chamber.
432,594
WATERING CAN
James B. Swett, Altamonte Springs, Fla., and Ann A. Arnold,
Atlanta, Ga., assignors to Dart Industries Inc., Northbrook,
lU.
FUed Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,605
Int. a.3 B67D 3/00
U.S. a. 222—530 4 Claims
L/M " ,54 "•
S f
1
!
1
1
1
J
1 1 4,392,593
COFFEE POWDER METERING DEVICE FOR COFFEE
VENDING MACHINES
Carlo D. M^jer, Caronno PertuseUa, Italy, assignor to Rhea
Vendors S.r.1., Caronno PertuseUa, Italy
FUed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,680
Qaims priority, appUcation Italy, Mar. 27, 1980, 20957 A/80
Int. a.3 B65D 88/54
VS. CI. 222—305 7 Claims
1. Coffee powder metering device for coffee vending ma-
chines comprising in a structure:
a tubular main part, formed by two opposite side panels and
two walls, perpendicular to said side panels;
an end wall for closing off one end of the tubular main part,
opened by power means;
a thrust wall inside said tubular main part, opposite the end
wall and set at an adjustable distance from said end of the
1. A receptacle for retaining and selectively dispensing
liquid, said receptacle including a bottom and surrounding side
wall terminating in an upper edge defining a fluid receivmg
interior with an open top, said side wall including one vertical
segment having a projecting and laterally outwardly directed
and upwardly opening discharge spout adjacent the upper
open top of the fluid receiving interior, said side wall having a
second vertical segment remote from said one segment and
having a handle member projecting therefrom, said second
segment incorporating a discharge opening from the recepta-
cle interior below and in alignment with said handle member,
said handle member extending vertically from said discharge
opening to approximately the upper edge of the side wall, a
flexible conduit in communication with and extending from
said discharge opening, said handle member having a slot
defined therein and extending along the vertical height of the
handle member for removable engagement of the conduit in a
recessed position therein from the discharge opening to the
upper edge of the side wall, a cover member overlying and
removably engagable with the upper edge of the side wall, said
cover member including recess means therein for accommo-
dating said flexible conduit, said cover member further includ-
558
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
ing holding means positioned thereon for selectively receiving
a portion of said conduit and holding said conduit within said
cover member recess means and said handle member slot.
4,392,595
APPARATUS FOR DISPENSING PARTICULATE
MATERIAL
Eric Staniforth, Macclesfield, England, assignor to Sisis Equip-
ment (Macclesfield) Limited, Macclesfield, England
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,446
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 3, 1980,
7934272
Int. a.3 B65G 27/n
U.S. a. 222—619 7 Qaims
aligned axially with respect to each said tubular member at
another of said work stations, said stretching means being
adapted to clamp said hosiery article between said stretching
means and said first open end of each said tubular member and
to stretch said toe seam in a direction parallel to the length of
said hosiery article; removal means, said removal means being
adjacent to a third one of said work stations and comprising
means to urge said hosiery article along each said tubular
member towards said first open end of each said tubular mem-
ber, and compressed air means to supply compressed air to
urge said hosiery article through the interior of said tubular
member and through said second open end of said tubular
1. Apparatus for spreading particulate material comprising a
frame; a hopper supported by the frame, the hopper having a
wall in which is provided a lower gravity feed outlet aperture;
an adjustable gate forming part of said hopper wall for control-
ling the size of said feed outlet aperture; a feed platform form-
ing a base of said hopper and extending away from the feed
outlet aperture to define a material discharge edge that re-
ceives material from said hopper through said outlet aperture;
means for reciprocating the feed platform with respect to said
aperture while maintaining constant the distance between said
feed platform and said adjustable gate, said means for recipro-
cating including means for moving the material discharge edge
of said feed platform relatively slow in one direction away
from the outlet aperture and means for moving the feed plat-
form relatively fast in the opposite direction; the particulate
material being dispensed from said hopper through said outlet
aperture onto said feed platform, the feed platform carrying
the material therewith as it moves in said one direction and
being movable with respect to the material as it moves in the
opposite direction.
member, said removal means comprising cylinder means
mounted adjacent said third one of said work stations parallel
to each said tubular member, and friction pad means coupled to
said cylinder means and adapted to be driven toward said first
open end of each said tubular member in contact with said
hosiery article and each said tubular member by said cylinder
means, each said tubular member further comprising a sheave
member encircling said second open end of each said tubular
member, said rotation means comprising a V-belt mounted
adjacent said turret and adapted to releasably engage and
rotate said sheave member of each said tubular member at said
one of said work stations.
4,392,597
BICYCLE RACK
Hubert L. Traugh, 307 E. Exchange, Owosso, Mich. 48867
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 279,717, Jul. 2, 1981,
abandoned. This application Feb. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 345,199
Int. a.^ B60R 19/02
U.S. a. 224—42.13 22 Qaims
4,392,596
HOSIERY TRIMMING APPARATUS
James D. Painter, 2140 Lois St., SE., Qeveland, Tenn. 37311
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,594
Int. Q\? A41H 4i/02
U.S. Q. 223—43 6 Qaims
1. An apparatus for trimming unfinished threads and flatten-
ing a toe seam in a hosiery article comprising: a plurality of
elongated tubular members, each said tubular member being
hollow and having first and second open ends, each said tubu-
lar member being adapted to receive on its exterior a hosiery
article with a toe portion of said hosiery article covering said
first open end of said tubular member, a turret, each said tubu-
lar member being movably mounted adjacent said second open
end to said turret, said turret being rotatably driven so that
each said tubular member arrives at a plurality of work sta-
tions; shear means, said shear means being adjustably placed
adjacent one of said work stations so that said hosiery article
on said tubular member will expose unfinished threads to said
shear means, rotation means, said rotation means being adapted
to rotate each said tubular member when each said tubular
member arrives at said one of said work stations adjacent said
shear means; stretching means, said stretching means being
1. A bicycle rack particularly adapted for use with an exteri-
orly mounted spare tire on an automotive vehicle, said rack
comprising, in combination, a horizontally disposed support
section and a vertically disposed base section, means connect-
ing said support section and said base section together, said
support section being of generally U-shaped configuration and
including a pair of laterally spaced, horizontally extending
arms and a transverse portion extending between said arms in
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
559
vertically spaced relationship with respect thereto, said base
section including a horizontally extending member disposed in
horizontally spaced relationship with respect to said transverse
portion of said support section whereby a portion of a tire may
be received therebetween, said base section also including a
pair of oppositely angularly disposed members each having
one end portion thereof connected to said support section.
4,392,598
CONVERTIBLE BACKPACK CHAIR
John F. Dixon, 425 California St., Suite 2600, San Francisco,
Calif. 94104
Filed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,750
Int. Q.3 A45F i/lO
U.S. Q. 224—155 10 Qaims
1. A convertible backpack chair comprising:
(a) two parallel rigid panels spaced apart, defining side, top,
bottom and end surfaces of a generally rectangular storage
volume contained therebetween;
(b) a pack bag comprising at least one compartment located
within said storage volume and supported between said
rigid side panels by support means;
(c) a pair of shoulder straps for supporting the pack on the
shoulders of the user, the straps being provided on the
bottom surface of said storage volume;
(d) lumbar support means, provided on the same surface as
said shoulder straps; and
(e) a collapsible chair portion and seat portion provided on
the opposite surface, said collapsible chair portion com-
prising:
(i) a generally U-shaped chair back frame,
(ii) a pair of arm rests, one end of each arm rest being
pivotally attached to said chair back frame and the
other end of each being pivotally attached to said rigid
side panels,
(Hi) a pair of hinge straps, one end of each being pivotally
attached near the ends of said chair back frame and the
other end of each being pivotally attached to said rigid
side panels, and
(iv) a back support panel attached to said chair back
frame.
said first and said second carriages and moveable in parallelism
with a second axis at a right angle to said first axis, there being
a drawer space between said carriages during building, fasten-
ing guns, first and second sets of shiftable gun holders carrying
said guns and disposed on right and left sides of the drawer
space, there being a third axis disposed at a right angle to said
first axis and also at a right angle to said second axis, the gun
holders each being spaced apart with respect to other gun
holders of the same set substantially along lines parallel to said
third axis, the gun holders being moveably mounted on the
carriages for movement in directions parallel to said third axis
whereby three dimensional adjustment of the position of each
of the guns is possible, means for supporting said drawer front
in a horizontal position, said machine having means for press-
ing said vertical drawer side pieces downwardly against said
^*o; 2M)u
—m
drawer front when said drawer front is in said horizontal
position, said vertical drawer side pieces being ' upstanding
from said drawer front when pressed by said means for press-
ing, said fastening guns comprising right and left fastening guns
having their noses closely adjacent right and left outer sides
respectively of the drawer side pieces when said drawer side
pieces are upstanding from the drawer front, said guns each
fastening in at least a partially horizontal direction, said drawer
bottom being inserted between the means for pressing, be-
tween said fastening guns and between said drawer side pieces
whereby the drawer bottom is insertable vertically down-
wardly when said means for pressing presses the vertical side
pieces downwardly against the drawer front and the noses of
the fastening guns are closely adjacent the outer sides of the
drawer side pieces.
4,392,600
APPARATUS FOR MAKING PALLETS
Ronald J. Billett, Sunnyvale, and Veikko K. Viitanen, San Jose,
both of Calif., assignors to FMC Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,426
Int. Q\} B27F 7/02: B42D i/00
U.S. Q. 227—50 12 Qaims
4,392,599
DRAWER BUILDING SYSTEM HAVING FASTENING
J GUNS
B. Carson Rlussell, 8137 Chateau Dr., Cherry Bluffs Estate, Egg
Harbor, Wis. 54209
Filed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,728
Int. Q.3 B27M i/24; B31B li/60
U.S. Q. 227—40 1 Qaim
1. A building machine in combination with a vertically
oriented drawer, said drawer comprising a drawer front, two
vertical drawer side pieces, a drawer bottom and a drawer
back, said machine comprising first and second carriages
mounted on a frame in a manner for relative movement with
respect to each other so as to be closer or farther from each
other, said relative movement being along a first axis, primary
and secondary sub-carriages movably mounted respectively on
1. An apparatus for making pallets comprised of spaced
parallel stringers and several deckboards nailed to opposite
sides of the stringers in spaced parallel relation and at right
angles with the stringers, said apparatus comprising:
means located at a nailing station for consecutively nailing
deckboards to a plurality of spaced parallel stringers;
means for intermittently conveying said plurality of spaced
parallel stringers from a loading station forwardly toward
the nailing station and thereafter in stepped relation
S60
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
through the naiUng station to permit deckboards to be
consecutively nailed to the stringers to form a half-pallet;
and
means for inverting the half-pallet assembly so that deck-
boards may be nailed to the other sides of the stringers of
the half-pallet assembly, said inverting means including
means for releasably and firmly grasping one end of the
half-pallet assembly, means for rotaubly mounting said
grasping means to said means for conveying the stringers
to permit the grasping means to rotate the half-pallet
assembly about an axis that is transverse to its direction of
travel as the half-pallet assembly, and means that engage
the free opposite end of the half-pallet assembly for pivot-
ing the half-pallet assembly 1 80° about said transverse axis
of rotation as said grasping means is moved by said con-
veying means.
4^2,602
METHOD OF MAKING SANDWICH STRUCTURES BY
SUPERPLASTIC FORMING AND DIFFUSION BONDING
Vene L. Darby, Redondo Beach, Calif., assignor to Rockwell
Interaational Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,570
Int. a.3 B23K 20/18
U.S. a. 228—118 4 Qaims
4392,601
TWO-SHIFT AUTOMATIC ASSEMBLING APPARATUS
Tsuneo Fujikawa, Ebina, and Haruyoshi Takagishi, Yamato,
both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited,
Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,543
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1979, 54-122831;
Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136438
Int. a.3 B23K 27/04
U.S. a. 228—4.1 8 aaims
1. A method of forming a sandwich structure from a plural-
ity of workpieces comprising:
(a) stacking said plurality of workpieces, each of said work-
pieces having two opposed principal surfaces;
(b) coating at least one of said principal surfaces with a
maskant;
(c) removing said maskant from portions of said at least one
coated principal surface that is not to be diffusion bonded;
(d) etching said portions of said at least one coated surface
where the maskant has been removed to a depth equal to
the thickness of said stopoff material to be applied;
(e) applying a stopoff material to said portions where said
maskant has been removed;
(0 removing said remaining maskant from at least one coated
principal surface;
(g) placing said workpieces in a die assembly under coordi-
nated temperature-pressure-time conditions;
(h) maintaining said conditions for sufficient time to product
diffusion bonding of selected portions of said workpieces;
and,
(i) superplastic forming at least a portion of at least one of
said workpieces.
1. A two-shift automatic assembling apparatus for selec-
tively assembling at least one component member to an incom-
plete work of a first model or at least one component member
to an incomplete work of a second model during each cycle of
operation of the apparatus, comprising:
a frame structure for accomodating at least a portion of one of
said incomplete works of the first and second models there-
within and for permitting each of the incomplete works to be
conveyed in a longitudinal direction therethrough, and
a base structure supported on said frame structure and having
two parallel opposite faces, said base structure being rotat-
able between two diametrically opposite angular positions
about an axis fixed with respect to said frame structure and
substantially parallel with said two faces of the base struc-
ture and with said longitudinal direction, and two sets of
assembling fixtures detachably mounted on said two faces,
respectively, of the base structure, each set of said assem-
bling fixtures including work gauge means adapted to hold
each of said incomplete works in a predetermined position
with respect to said frame structure, carrier means adapted
to carry each of said component members from the outside
of said frame structure into a predetermined position within
the frame structure, and parts gauge means adapted to trans-
fer the component member from said predetermined position
thereof into a predetermined ready-for-assembly position
with respect to the work held in position by said work gauge
means.
4,392,603
PREPARATION OF PIPE ENDS FOR SOLID PHASE
WELDING
Jean La Force, P.O. Box C, Inverness, Calif. 94937, assignor to
Carl Stringer, Pearland; Stringer Oil & Gas Co., San Angelo,
both of, Tex.; Jean La Force, Inverness, Calif, and Carl
Thomas Stringer, Pearland, Tex., a part interest to each
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,279
Int. C\? B23K 5/08. 20/14
U.S. a. 228—196 2 Oaims
HEAT
1. The method of solid phase welding adjacent ends of axi-
ally aligned large diameter metal pipes in which the confront-
ing faces of the respective pipe sections are brought into con-
tiguous confronting relationship with ambient atmopsheric
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
561
conditions prevailing within the pipe bores, and in which heat
by means of external flame burner is applied substantially
uniformly around the entire outer periphery of the abutting
pipe ends while axial pressure is applied to said sections urging
said faces towards each other, the improvement comprising
sealing the ambient atmosphere within the pipe bores from the
general area of the confronting faces by forming of at least one
of said faces whereby the confronting faces are in continuous
contact only along and adjacent the entire circumferential
extent of the inner bore surfaces of the respective pipes and the
confronting faces are spaced from each other other than at the
bore surfaces to provide a circumferential gap in adjacent
confronting relation to said heating flames, whereby the ambi-
ent air oxygen is excluded from said gap and no significant
oxidation of the metal will take place thereat.
4,392,604
PANEL WELDING SYSTEM
Stanley L. Sears, Seattle, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Com-
pany, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,863
Int. a.3 B23K 37/02. 37/04
U.S. a. 228— 212 20aaims
^_^
1. A welding apparatus for automatically or semi-automati-
cally welding butt seams to join abutting edges of flat work-
pieces, comprising in combination:
a workpiece supporting bed including vacuum means for
releasably holding down the workpieces flat against the
bed;
carriage supporting means overlying said bed;
traveling carriage means cooperating with said carriage
support means for controlled travel in a plane overlying
said bed;
a welding torch and workpiece positioning roller head as-
sembly mounted on said carriage means for traveling
therewith relative to said bed, said head assembly com-
prising:
truck support means fixedly mounted on said carriage
means;
truck means coupled to and cooperating with said truck
support means for movement of said truck means toward
and away from said workpiece supporting bed;
means for controllably moving said truck means relative to
said truck support means between a retracted position
spaced from said bed and an operative position proximate
said bed;
welding torch means mounted on said truck means so as to
be disposed for traveling therewith relative to said bed
and so that said torch means can be guided along a seam
between abutting edges of workpieces held by said bed to
form a butt weld therealong;
and a plurality of down pressure roller means mounted on
said truck means for rolling contact with workpieces
supported on said bed when said torch means is guided
along a seam, said down pressure roller means including a
leading set of down pressure rollers disposed at a predeter-
mined distance in advance of said torch means, and further
including a trailing set of down pressure rollers disposed
at a predetermined distance behind said torch means with
respect to the direction of travel, said leading and trailing
sets of down pressure rollers being sized and said predeter-
mined distances selected so as to contact and apply down
pressure to the workpieces at locations distributed over a
predetermined, localized traveling zone of welding heat
induced distortion on the workpieces, said traveling zone
extending ahead and behind and laterally of said welding
torch means; and
wherein said plurality of down pressure roller means com-
prise a plurality of roller support means for mounting said
leading and trailing sets of rollers so as to be indepen-
dently movable toward and away from said truck means,
and a plurality of biasing means for reacting against said
truck means so as to independently urge said leading set
and trailing set of rollers downwardly toward said bed
and workpieces thereon when said truck means is moved
from said retracted position to said operative position.
15. A method of automatically or semi-automatically weld-
ing an elongate stiffener to a substantially flat workpiece,
comprising the steps of:
holding such workpiece down against a supporting bed by
developing a suction force on the underside of the work-
piece;
controllably guiding a welding torch, down pressure and
steering roller supporting head assembly along a predeter-
mined stiffener attachment line on an upwardly facing
surface of the workpiece so as to form a fillet weld along
a lengthwise edge portion of a stiffener that is in contact
with said workpiece surface;
exerting an initial down pressure on the stiffener in advance
of the forming of said fillet weld by a leading down pres-
sure roller mounted on said head assembly;
laterally steering the stiffener, also in advance of the forming
of said fillet weld by exerting inwardly opposing side pressure
on the stiffener with laterally movable steering rollers disposed
downstream of the leading down pressure roller; and,
exerting a final down pressure on the stiffener at a location
adjacent to the |X)int of formation of the fillet weld by a
trailing down pressure roller mounted on said head assem-
bly.
4,392,605
PACKAGE
Erik Backman, Gothenburg, Sweden, assignor to AB Volvo,
Gothenburg, Sweden
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,457
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jul. 22, 1980, 8005301
Int. a.^ B65D 5/38, 13/06
U.S. a. 229—19 10 Qaims
0 1^ 9 5 7
S i li } <T }! }< IB
X
^ V'
K I X X n
1. An adjustable, relockable package, comprising:
first and second package parts displaceable axially from one
another for opening and closing the package and for ad-
justing the size of the package to an article to be packaged
therein;
the first package part having at least a first wall and the
562
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
second package part having at least a second wall, the first
and second walls being slidably disposed adjacent one
another;
the first and second walls having a plurality of cuts, the cuts
defining a plurality of locking elements and forming abut-
ment edges, transverse to the displacement directions,
when any of the locking elements of the first and second
parts are together pressed into a locking position, in which
the pressed-in locking elements in the first package part
engage abutment edges of the second package part result-
ing from locking elements of the second package part
being pressed in; and,
one of the first and second walls having an extended series of
the cuts, uniformly spaced from one another, and the
other of the first and second walls having at least four of
the cuts, spaced from one another by whole number multi-
ples, including one, of the uniform spacing of the extended
series of cuts, whereby said first and second package parts
can be locked together in the same axial position by the
displacement inwardly of any one of three adjacent lock-
ing elements.
4,392,606
PRE-BANDED BULK PACK CONTAINER
Edwin A. Fremion, Cleveland, Tenn., assignor to Westvaco
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,555
Int. a.5 B65D 19/06. 19/20
VJS. CI. 229—23 R 6 Qaims
30-
lock tabs, the panels of said first pair having medial lock
slots near said first fold line; and
inner flaps integral along third transverse fold lines with the
panels of a second pair and along fourth transverse fold
lines with second tab strips having second outward lock
tabs, said inner flaps having center slots terminating near -
said fourth transverse fold lines.
Z3.\
80 77.8, fc4 49 "^/"/''^''^'M v" 41,
'58
-3'»
V>\
115-, ^ *
sg' 87
■ ' no
» u 9
H
lit
20
SO that when said inner flaps are folded in the same direction
on said third and fourth transverse fold lines said second
lock tabs are received in said lock slots of said first pair of
panels to pass outward therethrough,
and when said outer flaps are then folded in the same direc-
tion on said first and second transverse fold lines, said
central slots of said first tab strips receive said second tab
strips, and said first lock tabs are received in said center
slots of said inner flaps to pass inwardly therethrough.
4,392,608
THERMALLY RESPONSIVE FLUID AND ELECTRICAL
SWITCH AND CONTROL SYSTEM
Brian J. Blades, Norton, Mass., assignor to Texas Instruments
Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Dec. 3, 1979, Ser. No. 99,295
Int. aj G05D 23/10
U.S. a. 236—48 R 7 Qaims
1. A bulk pack container adapted to be supported by a pallet
or the like comprising, in combination, a body portion and a
pair of first and second end caps, said body portion comprising
side walls formed from a pair of rectangular wall forming
blanks of material that are unsecured with respect to one an-
other, said blanks having coterminous upjjer and lower edges
and unsecured ends and being scored to provide at least four
panels, said blanks being nested and interleaved with like pan-
els overlapping one another so that the ends of each respective
blank are separated from one another by a comer of the other
resp)ective blank to form a reinforced structure, and at least
two bands of strapping material arranged around the outer
periphery of said body portion in the knocked down condition,
said bands being adapted to restrain the side walls and keep the
side walls from bulging outwardly when the container is filled.
4,392,607
CARTON WITH INTEGRAL CLOSURES
Dayid Perkins, Jr., Des Moines, Iowa, assignor to Corrugated
Drum Systems, Inc., Cedar Rapids, Iowa
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 220,764, Dec. 29, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,869
Int. a.3 B65D 5/10
U.S. a. 229—39 R 4 Claims
1. A carton having an integral self-locking end closure,
comprising, in combination:
a carton body having pairs of opposite panels integral along
longitudinal fold lines;
outer flaps integral along first transverse fold lines with the
panels of a first pair and along second transverse fold lines
with first tab strips having central slots and first outward
1. A thermally responsive fluid and electrical switch com-
prising
a first thermally conductive metal housing means having an
open-ended well therein,
a second housing means having an open-ended well and
having port means opening into the well, the second hous-
ing means being secured to the first housing means so that
the wells cooperate to form a switch chamber therebe-
tween,
electrical terminal means extending into the switch chamber,
thermally responsive means also disposed in the switch
chamber in close heat-transfer relation to the first housing
means for movement in response to selected changes in
temperature,
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
563
valve means also disposed in the switch chamber actuable by
movement of the thermally responsive means for regulat-
ing fluid flow in the port means in accordance with said
changes in temperature, and
electrical contact means also disf>osed in the switch chamber
actuable with the valve means for regulating electrical
current flow in the terminal means in accordance with
said selected changes in temperature.
4,392,610
HEAT SCAVENGER
John F. Moskal, Box 266, Naigemoy, Md. 20662
Filed Apr. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 136,673
Int. CIJ F24B 7/00
U.S. a. 237—5 S
4,392,609
PORTABLE PREHEATING SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Eugene E. Conterio, 445 Hillcrest Dr., Wilmette, 111. 60091
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,558
Int. a.3 B60H 1/02
U.S. a. 237—12.3 C 1 Qaim
1. A portable preheating apparatus for internal combustion
engines comprising:
(a) a portable cabinet-like housing internally compartmental-
lized by a plurality of horizontally disposed parallel
shelves,
(b) a liquid reservoir in one of said compartments,
(c) a heating chamber housing heating coils for heating
liquid in said reservoir as well as liquid in the engine to be
preheated, in another of said compartments,
(d) a pump common to said reservoir and said heating coils
in yet another of said compartments,
(e) said pump having an inlet and an outlet each in communi-
cation with said liquid reservoir and said heating coils as
well as the engine to be preheated,
(0 a series of pipe conduits within said housing connecting
said inlet and said outlet of said pump to said heating coils,
said liquid reservoir, and the engine to be preheated,
(g) a series of valves interposed in said pipe conduits con-
necting said inlet and said outlet of said pump to said
heating coils completing a course for recycling of the fluid
by said reservoir between said liquid reservoir and said
heating coils,
(h) a second series of valves interposed in said pipe conduits
connecting said inlet and said outlet of said pump to said
heating coils and said liquid reservoir and the engine to be
heated completing a course of circulation of the liquid by
said pump between said heating coils and said reservoir
and the engine to be heated, and
(i) a third series of valves interposed in said pipe conduits
connecting said inlet and said outlet of said pump to said
heating coils and the engine to be heated completing a
course of recycling of the liquid by said pump between
said heating coils and the engine to be heated.
5 Claims
3 1%^--?%
1
■^TirT
1 iliiiimn ■■»«"■»■■»" It*
1. For use with an existing heating system including a fur-
nace having an air intake for admitting cold air into the fur-
nace, air outlet means for distributing air exiting from said
furnace, and a flue pipe defining an exhaust path to the ambient
of undesired combustion gases, a portable readily detachable
heat scavenger comprising:
means for absorbing heat from said flue pipe;
heat exchange coil means for radiating heat located in said
cold air downstream of said air intake;
a reservoir tank mounted externally of said furnace;
means for interconnecting said absorbing means, said coil
means and said reservoir tank;
said reservoir tank, said absorbing means, said coil means
and all of said interconnecting means containing heat
exchange fluid;
pump means for moving said fluid through said intercon-
necting means;
said interconnecting means including restrictor means, posi-
tioned downstream of said coil means, for maintaining
flow of said fluid therefrom at a constant rate, said restric-
tor means being chosen so that the time of travel of said
fluid through said coil means is maximized, said restrictor
means further being positioned upstream of said reservoir
tank and discharging directly thereinto;
said absorbing means including inner and outer concentric
shell members, said inner member being in direct contact
with said combustion gases, as well as in line with, and
concentrically secured to said flue pipe, said inner and
outer members defining therebetween a chamber through
which said heat exchange fluid flows.
4,392,611
SPRAYER CONTROL SYSTEM
Wesley J. Bachman, and Robert C. Funk, both of Auburn, III.,
assignors to Dickey-John Corporation, Auburn, 111.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,147
Int. a.5 AOIM 7/00; B05B 9/06
US. a. 239—74 2J Qaims
1. An automatic control system for a vehicular liquid sprayer
which pumps liquid at a desired pressure to a plurality of
nozzles which dispense liquid at a desired volume per unit area
application rate, said application rate being a function of prede-
termined properties of said vehicular liquid sprayer and of the
liquid, said control system comprising: pressure sensing means
for sensing the instantaneous pressure of the liquid supplied to
said nozzles and for producing a corresponding pressure elec-
trical signal, means for measuring the ground speed of said
vehicular liquid sprayer and for producing a corresponding
ground speed electrical signal, control circuit means for re-
ceiving said pressure signal and said ground speed signal,
operator accessible control means for delivering to said control
circuit means input electrical signals corresponding to a de-
564
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983 ^
sired application rate, to the number of nozzles associated with
said vehicular liquid sprayer and to the nozzle spacing, said
control circuit means being responsive to said pressure signal,
said ground speed signal and said input signals for calculating
a desired pressure of the liquid supplied to said nozzles neces-
sary to achieve said desired application rate and for calculating
the difference between said desired pressure and said instanta-
neous pressure and producing a first output control signal of a
magnitude corresponding to the difference between said de-
sired pressure and said instantaneous pressure and a second
output control signal corresponding to the sign of said differ-
ence, duty cycle control means for converting said first output
control signal to a cyclical control signal of a fixed period
whose duty cycle varies in proportion to the magnitude of said
first output control signal and pressure control means respon-
sive to said cyclical control signal and to said second output
control signal for varying said instantaneous pressure in the
amount and direction necessary to equal said desired pressure
to thereby achieve and thereafter maintain said desired applica-
tion rate.
4,392,612
ELECTROMAGNETIC UNIT FUEL INJECTOR
John I. Deckard, Grand Rapids, and Robert D. Straub, Livonia,
both of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corporation,
Detroit, Mich.
Filed Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,267
Int. a.3 F02M 55/00, 51/00
U.S. a. 239—88 2 Qaims
1. An electromagnetic unit fuel injector including a housing
means having a fuel passage means connectable at one end to a
source of fuel for the ingress or egress of fuel at a suitable
supply pressure, a supply chamber and a spill chamber posi-
tioned in spaced apart relationship to each other and in flow
communication with said fuel passage means, a pressure relief
passage interconnecting said chambers and a valve stem guide
bore extending between said chambers with a conical valve
seat encircling said guide bore at the spill chamber end thereof;
a pump cylinder means in said housing means; an externally
actuated plunger reciprocable in said cylinder means to define
therewith a pump chamber open at one end for the discharge
of fuel during a pump stroke and for fuel intake during a suc-
tion stroke of said plunger; said housing means including a
valve body having a spray outlet as one end thereof for the
discharge of fuel; an injection valve means movable in said
valve body to control flow from said spray outlet, a discharge
passage means connecting said pump chamber to said spray
outlet; and a solenoid actuated, poppet valve controlled pas-
sage means for effecting flow communication between said
pump chamber and said fuel supply chamber and including a
solenoid actuated poppet valve having a head with a stem
extending therefrom journaled in said valve guide bore for
reciprocable movement whereby said head is movable be-
tween an opened position and a closed position relative to said
valve seat, said stem having a reduced diameter stem portion
next adjacent said head which defines with said valve stem
guide bore an annulus portion of said valve controlled passage
means; and, a solenoid means operatively connected to said
housing means, said solenoid means inCtuding an armature and
a spring positioned in said supply chamber and operatively
connected to said poppet valve with said spring positioned to
normally bias said poppet valve to said open position.
4,392,613
DISCHARGE GAP CLEANING DEVICE
Hart F. Graff, and Karl T. Bagdal, both of Middletown, Ohio,
assignors to Armco Inc., Middletown, Ohio
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,676
Int. a.J B05B 15/02
U.S. a. 239—115 10 Qaims
J7
H
li
m
a
1. A device for cleaning the discharge gap of a jet nozzle of
the type used in conjunction with a web coating line and con-
stituting an elongated nozzle structure located in close proxim-
ity to the coated web and extending transversely of said coated
web with its ends extending beyond the edges of said coated
web and its discharge gap also extending transversely of said
coated web and being of a length greater than the width of said
coated web, said cleaning means comprising a body member,
means to shiftably mount said body member in a path of travel
extending parallel to and along the length of said jet nozzle, a
clean-out blade on said body member, said clean-out blade
having a free end extending into said jet nozzle discharge gap
and remaining there at all times, and means to shift said body
member back and forth along said path of travel, said cleaning
means being located at one end or the other of said discharge
gap when not being shifted along said path of travel.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
565
4,392,614
PORTABLE PAINT SPRAYER
Hugh F. Groth, Brecksville, and John D. Vogel, Sagamore Hills,
both of Ohio, assignors to The Wooster Brush Company,
Wooster, Ohio
.Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,635
1 1 Int. a.3 B05B i/08
U.S. a. 239L-215 60 Qaims
1. A portable pump spraying device comprising a container
for the liquid to be sprayed, a sprayer housing connected to
said container, said housing containing a spray chamber having
a vertically oriented spray discharge slot, a vertically oriented
spinner disc in said spray chamber, pump means for pumping
the liquid to be sprayed from said container onto said spinner
disc, said pump means including a lower generally vertical
pump tube portion extending into said container, a conveyor
screw coaxially and rotatably disposed within said lower pump
tube portion, and an upper pump tube portion having a right
angle bend extending generally perpendicular to the spinner
disc axis, drive means for rotating said spinner disc, and a
flexible torsion-resistant transmission shaft drivingly axially
connecting said spinner disc and said conveyor screw through
said upper and lower pump tube portions, said upper pump
tube portion having a delivery orifice opening toward the face
of said spinner disc for delivering the pumped liquid onto said
spinner disc, the rotation of said spinner disc being operative
by centrifugal force to form a spray from the liquid delivered
thereto and impel a portion of the spray through said spray
discharge sk>t,
4,392,615
VIOL EXHAUST NOZZLE WITH VEER FLAP
EXTENSION
William M. Madden, Palm Springs, Fla., assignor to United
Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262^7
Int. C1.3 P02K 1/12
U.S. CI. 239—265.37 7 Claims
1. A two<dimensional variable area exhaust nozzle assembly
for a gas turbine engine having forward and vertical thrust
capability including:
convergent/divergent variable position exhaust nozzle
means including exhaust duct means having opposed side
walls, and movable upper and lower flap means disposed
between said side walls, said exhaust duct means and
upper and lower flap means defining a converging-
/diverging exhaust gas flow path, said upper flap means
including a downstream flap having an exhaust gas expan-
sion surface and a fore and an aft edge, said aft edge being
movable from a first to a second forward thrust position in
a circular arc about a fixed axis parallel to said aft edge;
deflector hood means rotatable in a circular arc about said
fixed axis between a plurality of stowed positions wherein
it is above said upper flap means external to the gas flow
path and a deployed position downstream of said upper
flap means in said gas flow path to deflect exhaust gases in
a downward direction, said hood means having rear edge
parallel to said downstream flap aft edge;
a veer flap having a front edge, a rear edge, and a gas direct-
ing surface, said veer flap being pivotally connected at its
front edge to said hood means rear edge and, during for-
ward thrust operation of said nozzle assembly, extending
in a generally downstream direction;
first actuation means operatively connected to said conver-
■ gent/divergent nozzle means, to said hood means, and to
said veer flap for positioning said convergent/divergent
nozzle means, said hood means, and said veer flap, includ-
ing control means for rotating said hood means to continu-
ously maintain the position of said front edge of said veer
flap adjacent said aft edge of said downstream flap during
forward thrust operation of said nozzle assembly, wherein
during forward thrust operation said gas directing surface
of said veer flap acts as an extension of said downstream
flap expansion surface.
4,392,616
SELF-PERFORATING DRIP IRRIGATION DEVICE
Donald O. Olson, 5885 Dartmouth St., Chula VisU, Calif. 92010
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,157
Int. a.3 B05B 15/06. 15/00
U.S. a. 239—271 3 Qaims
1. In an emitter adapted for attachment to a conduit of
yieldable, flexible material in a drip irrigation system, said
emitter comprising a housing having inlet and outlet means and
means within the housing forming a tortuous fluid path for
reducing fluid pressure between said inlet and outlet means,
said inlet means comprising:
an inlet fitting extending from said housing having a tubular
shank portion with a central passage which connects with
said tortuous fluid path;
a frusto-conical barb portion integral with said shank portion
and spaced below an outer surface of said emitter housing
from which said shank portion extends, said barb portion
having an upper end with a diameter greater than said
shank portion, at least one opening in said barb portion
forming a passage through said inlet fitting to said central
passage of said shank portion; and
a rigid cylindrical end portion extending from the smaller,
lower end of said barb poriion having a substantially flat
566
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
end face forming a well defined peripheral edge, the
length of said cylindrical end portion and its said periph-
eral edge serving to sever the wall of a said conduit to
remove a portion of conduit material and thereby form a
circular opening therein when the emitter with said inlet
fitting is attached to the conduit by being pressed against
it.
flow to the nozzle; the housing defining together with the head
a chamber from which liquid is led into said passage within the
head and thence to the nozzle; an axle passing transversely
through the width of the head to support the head for pivotal
movement relative to the housing about a generally horizontal
axis so as to provide adjustment of the angular elevation or
depression of the head; the frusto-spherical surfce of the head
4,392,617
SPRAY HEAD APPARATUS
Peter Bakos; Russell E. Darrow, both of Endicott; Joseph
Funari, Vestal, and Diane L. Redpath, Endicott, all of N.Y.,
assignors to Interaational Business Machines Corporation,
Annonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,025
Int. a.^ B05B J/26
VS. a. 239—290 5 Qaims
1. Non-electrostatic spray head apparatus for spraying a
layer of photoresist material on the surface of a predetermined
circuitizable workpiece, said layer being subsequently finalized
as a photoresist mask for coacting with said surface to circuit-
ize said workpiece, said apparatus comprising:
nozzle means having at least one discharge orifice for dis-
charging a predetermined fluid of said material,
a non-electrically connected springlike member having plu-
ral coils compressively housed within said nozzle means,
said coils having a longitudinal first axis, said member
having a longitudinal elongated vibratile extension inte-
gral with an end coil of said springlike member, said exten-
sion having a longitudinal center second axis and being
disposed in said hollow tip and protruding outwardly
from said orifice to discharge said photoresist fluid from
said orifice as a hollow-shaped stream, said first and sec-
ond axes being colinear, said fluid being discharged from
said orifice along said extension, and a source of pressur-
ized propellant for providing said pressurized projiellant
external to said orifice to intercept the discharged said
fluid, said hollow-shaped stream of said discharged fluid
coacting with said intercepting propellant to vibrate said
extension transverse to said longitudinal center axis, the
vibrations of said extension in combination with said inter-
cepting propellant and said hollow-shaped stream coact-
ing to atomize said fluid into a spray having a uniform
distribution characteristic to apply said layer with a sub-
stantially uniform thickness on said surface.
4,392,618
LIQUID-PROJECTING MONITOR
John L. Evans, Camberley, and Kuldip Bains, Slough, both of
England, assignors to Chubb Fire Security Limited, Middle-
sex, England
FUed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,305
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 13, 1980,
8008524
Int a.3 B05B 1/26
U.S. a. 239—461 8 Qaims
1. A liquid-projecting monitor comprising a housing, and a
head for carrying a nozzle; the head having a frusto-spherical
external surface and having a passage within the head for liquid
tas
forming a sliding seal against the housing to maintain the afore-
said chamber liquid-tight throughout the permitted range of
said pivotal movement; a body extending transversely across
the interior of the head to enclose said axle and to define in part
the confines of said passage; and the head being so configured
that the cross-sectional area of said passage within the head
which is available for liquid flow is at least approximately
constant throughout the length of said pressure.
4,392,619
AUTOMATIC ROLL-UP DEVICE FOR A SAFETY BELT
Artur Fbhl, Schorndorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
REPA Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,179
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 13,
1980, 3009701
Int. a.3 A62B i5/02: B65H 75/48
U.S. a. TAl—VSn.! ll aalms
1. Automatic roll-up device and belt arresting device for
retarding movement of a safety belt of a vehicle and for arrest-
ing movement of the safety belt, which comprises a housing for
the roll-up device, a rotatable belt roller shaft mounted in the
housing, a belt roller on which the belt is wound mounted on
the belt roller shaft, a retarding mechanism for retarding un-
winding of the belt comprising a control disc with control
teeth at its periphery freely rotatable relative to the belt roller
shaft, a vehicle sensitive actuating sensor which is actuated
when the vehicle exceeds a permissible acceleration or deceler-
ation for impeding rotation of the control disc by contact with
said control teeth, a spring supported by the control disc,
driver means rotatable with the belt roller shaft which, after
rotation of said control disc is impeded, rotates against the
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
567
force of said spring around a predetermined angular path to
retard movement of the belt while permitting withdrawal of
the belt, outer teeth affixed to the housing around the control
disc, and a belt sensitive actuating sensor in the form of an
inertial mass carried by the control disc for impeding rotation
of the control disc by contact with said outer teeth, a belt
arresting device through which the belt from said roll-up
device passes, and arresting means in said belt arresting device
to arrest the belt upon change in movement of the belt there-
through due to retarding the belt by the retarding mechanism.
4,392,620
EMERGENCY LOCKING RETRACTOR FOR A VEHICLE
OCCUPANT RESTRAINT BELT
Juichiro Takada, 3-12-1 Shinmachi, Setagayaku, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,890
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 2, 1980, 55-72737;
Jun. 2, 1980, 55-72738
Int. Q.3 A62B 35/02; B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242—107.4 A 5 Qaims
— 10
1. An emergency locking retractor for a vehicle occupant
restraint belt including a frame, a belt reel having a shaft
mounted fcM- rotation in the frame, a rewinding spring urging
the reel shaft to rotate in a direction to wind the belt onto the
reel and a reel locking mechanism located adjacent a side
portion of the frame characterized in that the locking mecha-
nism comprises a circular row of equally spaced apari first
locking ratchet teeth on the outer face of said side portion of
the frame and disposed concentrically to the axis of rotation of
the reel shaft, a flange affixed on a reel shaft portion located
outwardly of said frame side portion, an inner disc received on
said shaft portion outwardly of the flange for limited axial
movement toward and away from the flange and having a row
of second locking ratchet teeth engageable with the first lock-
ing ratchet teeth upon movement of the inner disc toward the
frame, an inertia spring engaging the inner disc and urging it in
a direction away from the flange, an outer disc received on said
shaft portion outwardly of the inner disc and retained thereon
against movement in a direction axially of the shaft away from
the frame, coacting cam elements on the inner and outer discs
adapted to cam the inner disc toward the frame upon rotation
of one of the discs relative to the other, one of the discs being
coupled to the shaft for rotation conjointly therewith and the
other disc being rotatably carried on said shaft portion and
having an inertia that causes it to lag the rotation of the disc
that rotates with the shaft so that the inner disc is thereupon
shifted toward the frame by the cam elements, and the flange
having lugs received in corresponding slots in the inner disc
and adapted to lock the reel shaft to the inner disc when the
inner disc is locked to the frame by the locking ratchet teeth.
4,392,621
DIRECTIONAL CONTROL OF ENGINE EXHAUST
THRUST VECTOR IN A STOL-TYPE AIRCRAFT
Hermann Viets, 144 Scenery Dr., Morgantown, W. Va. 26505
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,695
Int. a.' B64C 21/08
U.S. a. 244—12.5 9 Oaims
i
/
—60
-«4
(
hi
52
1. In a short takeoff and landing aircraft having at least one
wing and a jet engine mounted above and forward of the wing
so as to blow its exhaust stream over an upper surface of the
wing, a method of controlling the direction of the thrust vector
of the engine exhaust stream, comprising the steps of:
(a) deflecting the exhaust stream of said engine over said
upper surface of the wing and toward the ground by
Coanda effect attachment of said exhaust stream to said
upper surface, said deflecting of the exhaust stream in-
creasing the vertical component and decreasing the hori-
zontal component of the thrust vector of said engine
exhaust stream and thereby increasing lift of said aircraft;
and
(b) controllably detaching said exhaust stream from said
upper surface by introducing a flow of air between said
exhaust stream and said upper surface at selected ones of
a plurality of successive locations, spaced apart along said
upper surface of said wing directly behind said engine and
aligned in a series between the same and a rear edge of said
wing, for varying the position, starting from a region of
said upper surface near said rear edge of said wing and
remote from said engine and progressing forwardly along
said upper surface toward said engine, at which said ex-
haust stream becomes detached from said upper surface,
said detaching of said exhaust stream increasing the hori-
zontal component and decreasing the vertical component
of the thrust vector of said engine exhaust stream and
thereby increasing forward acceleration of said aircraft.
4,392,622
COMBINED BEAM SUPPORT FOR LANDING GEAR
John R. McCIaflin, Kent, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Com-
pany, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,772
Int. a.3 B64C 25/10
U.S. a. 244—102 A 14 Qaims
1. In an aircraft, an improved landing gear mount compris-
ing:
an aircraft body frame;
a wing spar extending laterally outwardly from said body
frame;
a cantilever beam projecting rearwardly from the wing spar
and extending inwardly towards the body frame;
568
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
a landing gear support beam positioned rearwardly of the
wing spar and extending between the cantilever beam and
the body frame;
means connecting the inboard end of said landing gear sup-
port beam to the body frame including a First pin connec-
tion;
a second pin connection between the outboard end of the
landing gear support beam and the cantilever beam, said
second pin connection being spaced both rearwardly and
towards the body frame from said wing spar;
a landing gear including a main strut, wheel means at the
lower erjd of the main strut, and a trunnion at the upper
end of the main strut;
a forward bearing for the trunnion mounted on the wing
spar; and
an aft bearing for the trunnion mounted on the landing gear
support beam.
4,392,623
FUSED CONNECTION ADAPTED TO FAIL UNDER
DIFFERENT OVERLOADS ACTING IN DIFFERENT
DIRECTIONS
Victor A. Munsen, Seattle, and John R. Mcaaflin, Kent, both of
Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Set. No. 218,957
Int. a.3 B64C 25/10
U.S. a. 244-102 R 21 Qaims
1. A fused single pin connection between two structural
members, comprising:
connector plate means separate from said structural mem-
bers;
a main attach pin connecting said connector plate means to
one of said structural members; and
a pair of shear pins connecting said connector plate means to
the other structural member, with the shear pins being
positioned such that differences in the direction of applied
load on the connector plate means changes the load distri-
bution to the two shear pins.
15. In an aircraft, a generally horizontally extending land-
ing gear beam for supporting the rear end of a landing gear
trunnion, said beam including pivot pin means connecting its
inboard end to a body frame portion of an aircraft and its outer
end to a wing frame means, and the improvement comprising
a fused single pin connection between the outboard end of
said beam and the wing frame means, comprising:
connector plate means;
a main attach pin connecting said connector plate means to
the outboard end of said beam; and
a pair of shear pins connecting said connector plate means
to the wing frame means with the shear pins being sized
and positioned relating to each other and the main attach
pin such that before failing the connection can withstand
a substantially larger load in a generally horizontal direc-
tion than in a generally vertical direction.
4,392,624
IMPLANTED BOUNDARY LAYER TRIP
Robert J. Myer, Rancho Palos Verdes, Calif., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Air Force, Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,094
Int. a.3 B64G 1/58
U.S. a. 244—158 A 6 Qaims
1. A re-entry nose cone comprising a first and a second
element; said first element being composed of a first carbon-
carbon composite ablative material having a recess in the
forwardmost portion; and said second element including a pair
of components, one of the components of said pair of compo-
nents being in the form of an implant positioned in said recess
and being composed of a second carbon-carbon composite
ablative material characterized by having a different density
than that charactrerized by said first ablative material, and a
surface roughness greater than that of said first ablative mate-
rial, the other component of said pair of components forming a
forward cap section for said implant and being composed of a
third carbon-carbon composite ablative material characterized
by having a density and surface roughness^imilar to that char-
acterized by said first ablative material; whereby said nose
cone exhibits a symmetrical erosion profile during its re-entry
regime.
4,392,625
aRCUIT ARRANGEMENT FOR A TRACK aRCUIT
WITH MULTIPLE SIGNAL SOURCES
Oldrich Poupe, Zilina, Czechoslovakia, assignor to Vysoka skola
dopravy a spojov, Zilina, Czechoslovakia
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,594
Claims priority, application Czechoslovakia, Apr. 4, 1980,
2339-80
Int. a.3 B61L 21/06
U.S. a. 246—34 CT 4 Claims
&^
7A ^
,6B
#=
4)
8B
— 7Bh
'=mm
1. A circuit arrangement for determining the presence of a
rail vehicle on a section of track having at least two rails, said
circuit arrangement comprising a main signal transmitter cou-
pled to said rails for introducing a main signal thereon, a cross
impedance shunting said rails, an additional transmitter for
supplying an auxiliary signal and a main receiver for receiving
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
569^
the signals from said main and additional transmitters, said
additional transmitter and said main receiver being connected
in series with respect to the track of the main signal and being
positioned along said track section, with said cross impedance,
at a first information point located at a predetermined distance
from said main transmitter, whereby the presence of a rail
vehicle on said track section additionally shunts said rails
thereby reducing the level of said main signal which is then
indicated by said receiver.
II ' 4,392,626
VFTAL PROTECnON ARRANGEMENT FOR RAILROAD
TRACK CIRCUITS
Robert D. Pascoe, Upper St. Clair Township, Allegheny County,
Pa., assignor to American Standard Inc., Swissvale, Pa.
, I Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,619
1 1 Int. a.3 B61L 21/06. 25/00
U.S. a. 246—34 R 6 Oaims
1
IT ,
"l
[•«
ST
J ""^
1. A vital protection arrangement for alternating current
track circuits in an electrified railroad with propulsion current
return through the rails, each track circuit including a receiver
at one end for registering the occupancy condition of the
corresponding track section in accordance with the presence
or absence of track current of selected characteristics, compris-
ing,
(a) a transformer having a primary, secondary, and third
winding with said secondary winding coupled to said
track circuit receiver,
(b) a fuse having a preselected capacity coupled in series
with said primary winding to the track section rails for
receiving the current flowing in said rails, and
(c) a capacitor connected across said third winding and
having a selected value to resonate with said primary
winding at the track circuit frequency,
(d) said primary-capacitor resonant circuit network present-
ing a high parallel impedance at track circuit frequency,
for passing track circuit current through said secondary
winding to said receiver without exceeding the capacity
of said fuse, and a low impedance at other frequencies, and
(e) said fuse interrupting the circuit network to said receiver
when propulsion current fiowing in said primary winding
exceeds the preselected capacity of said fuse.
4,392,627
' ' DISMANTLEABLE BOAT CRADLE
Frederik H. van den Broek, 48 Willem Klooslaan, Hillegom,
Netherlands
1 1 Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,588
II Int. a.3 F16M ; 7/00
U.S. a. 248—176 15 Qaims
1. A boat cradle, comprising:
a frame having the form of a closed rectangle and being
constructed from profile sections which define the four
sides of the rectangle, the four sides of the rectangle meet-
ing at four comers of the frame;
at least two of the comers of the frame, a respective coupling
being provided; each coupling comprising a first tube
section for receiving the profile section located at a first
side of the frame, a second tube section for receiving the
profile section located at a second side of the frame which
side is perpendicular to the first side of the frame, and a
third tube section extending upright from the frame;
at least one of the first and the second tube sections being
open at its both opposite ends for enabling the respective
profile section received in that tube section to be passed
completely through that tube section as the position of
that tube section is adjusted along that profile section, and
the first tube section being adjustable along the respective
profile section received therein;
an upright supported by the third tube section and having a
support head thereon for supporting thereon a keel of a
boat.
4,392,628
CONCEALED ACCESS FURNITURE
Frederick C. Hadfield, 5225 Hollister, Houston, Tex. 77040, and
Marvin R, McElroy, 25240 F.M. 2978, Houston, Tex. 77375
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,490
Int. a.3 A47B 96/06
U.S. a. 248—202.1 4 Claims
•0
1. A system for mounting a rotatable frame member with
resf)ect to a vertical wall member comprising:
an elongated, rectangularly shaped frame member having
vertical side walls and horizontal top and bottom walls
where the side edges of said walls define at least one
forward edge surface lying in a vertical plane,
a vertical axis extending through said top and bottom walls
and being parallel to the vertical plane defined by said
forward edge surface,
a forward vertical wall member,
upper and lower horizontal support members attached to
said forward vertical wall member,
first plate members respectively attached to said upper sup-
port member and said top wall of said frame member, and
second plate members respectively attached to said lower
support member and said bottom wall of said frame mem-
bers,
rotational means on each of said plate members aligned with
respect to said vertical axis for permitting rotation of said
570
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
frame member for at least 180* about said vertical axis
while providing vertical stability for said frame member,
said rotational means having means for locking said plate
members relative to one another at 180* positions, said
locking means being operative upon horizontal movement
of said plate members on said frame member relative to
the plate members on said support members.
4^92,629
MOUNTING SYSTEM
Brian L. Dallman, P.O. Box 248, Second & Elm, Hudson, Wis.
54016
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,290
Int. a.3 A47B 96/06
U.S. a. 248—205 R 5 Qaims
(b) means for mounting said tray-like member in a generally
horizontal position projecting from back to front of said
soap holder and with said base part surface facing up-
wardly,
(c) push means located closely above said base part surface
of said tray-like member,
(d) means mounting said push means for reciprocating
movement between a rest position at the back of said
tray-like member and the front thereof, and
(e) actuating means located below said tray-like member and
adapted to move said push means,
(0 said actuating means being operable to advance said push
means towards said front of said tray to dispense said bar
of soap from said front thereof, whereby said bar can be
delivered into the palm of a user's hand operating said
actuating means.
4,392,631
SUB-SURFACE SAFETY GATE VALVE
Jack J. DeWald, 7323 W. Roadway, New Orleans, La. 70124
Filed Jul. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 61,076
Int. aJ F16K 31/16
U.S. a. 251—58 15 Claims
1. A mounting system comprising:
(a) a support rack having upright members and a horizontal
shelf supported thereby, wherein a hook member is at-
tached to the upper portion of said upright members, and
(b) a rack fastener which is adapted to be fastened to a
support surface, wherein said rack fastener includes a
horizontally disposed member which is adapted to engage
and support said hook member of said support rack,
wherein said horizontally disposed member spans substan-
tially the full width of said support rack.
4,392,630
SOAP HOLDERS
Hussain A. Moontasir, 2 High Park Rd., Kew Gardens, Surrey,
England
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,326
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 12, 1979,
7935597
Int. a.J A47K 5/08
U.S. CI. 248—309 R 6 Qaims
1. A soap holder comprising, in combination:
(a) a tray-like member having a base part for holding a bar of
soap on one surface thereof.
.^5^.
ffljfi!!'!: i^ai^f, ]
1. A high pressure gate valve apparatus comprising:
a. an elongated valve body having a longitudinal axis provid-
ing a flow conveying cylindrxal longitudinal bore having
an axis parallel to the axis of said body;
b. a gate valving member movable within the confines of
said valve body at generally right angles to and intersect-
ing said flow conveying bore and having a flow opening
corresponding in size to said bore, said gate valving mem-
ber being movable within said valve body between open
flow and closed flow positions, with said valve body bore
and said flow opening substantially aligning in said open
flow position;
c. a pair of spaced generally parallel cylindrical drive cham-
bers in said valve body, said flow conveying bore being
generally between and parallel to said pair of spaced drive
chambers;
d. a pair of powered cylindrical operator shafts, each mov-
ably mounted respectively within one of said pair of drive
chambers, each of said shafts being smaller in diameter
than said chambers;
e. drive piston means mounted on each end portion of said
operator shafts for sealably engaging said chambers at the
end portions of said shafts;
f. a pair of gear structures associated respectively with and
engagedly driven respectively by said pair of operator
shafts, each of said driven gear structures operating said
gate valving member between said open flow and said
closed flow positions responsive to their own powered
movement within said drive chambers; and
g. attachment means for attachment of a hydraulic power
source to at least one end portion of each of said pair of
drive chambers, said attachment means hydraulically
communicating with said drive chambers to move said
piston means and said attached operator shafts.
July 12, 983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
571
4,392,632
ELECTROMAGNETIC VALVE WITH A PLUG MEMBER
COMPRISING A PERMANENT MAGNET
Theodor Gost, Berlin, and Kurt Binder, Stuttgart, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,822
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 10,
1980, 3026133
Int. a.^ F16K 3 1/08
U.S. a. 251—65 9 Oaims
1. An electromagnetic valve capable of being put into either
of two positions by a pulse of current and requiring no flow of
current to maintain it in either of said positions, comprising:
first and second cup cores (1,2) each having a reentrant axial
pole portion, said cores being mounted facing each other
co-axially with their rims joining each other to enclose a
cavity, said re-entrant pole portions respectively having
'inner end faces facing each other across said cavity, said
second cup core (2) having an axial bore passing through
the re-entrant pole portion of said second cup core and
extending to the exterior and having a valve seat provided
with a seat surface in the shape of a surface of revolution
coaxial with said cores and located in the internal orifice
of said bore adjacent to said cavity; said cavity having at
least one duct connection (9,10) to the exterior in addition
to said bore;
a valve plug constituted by a body comprising a permanent
magnet and having a closure surface facing said valve seat
permitting engagement therewith and disengagement
therefrom by axial movement of said plug, said plug being
contained in said cavity in a manner permitting movement
over a limited path in the axial direction of said cavity, at
one end of which path said plug abuts said valve seat and
closes said orifice of said bore, said magnet being magne-
tized in said axial direction;
first and second windings (3,4) respectively located in said
first and second cup cores (1,2), surrounding the respec-
tive re-entrant pole portions of said cores and electrically
connected together in circuit so that energization of said
circuit with current flow in either direction will produce
like magnetic poles at said end faces of the respective
re-entrant pole portions of said cores;
means for applying a pulse of current, selectively in either
direction, by said circuit, to said windings (3,4), and
a ferromagnetic ring (5) having its periphery in contact with
the rim portion of at least one of said cup cores (1,2) and
extending inwards across said cavity, at a location axially
intermediate of said end faces of said re-entrant pole por-
tions of said cores, to such an extent as to provide an inner
aperture of said ring, of which the inner surface is closely
adjacent to the periphery of said plug, for completing a
magnetic circuit path for said permanent magnet of said
plug when said plug is at either end of its axial path of
movement in said cavity and for at least assisting in con-
straining said plug to move only axially in said cavity.
4,392,633
VALVE STRUCTURE HAVING MOVABLE SEAT MEANS
Denzal W. Van Winkle, 411 Yorkchester, Houston, Tex. 77079
Filed Oct. 29, 1979, Ser, No. 89,180
Int. a.3 F16K 25/00. 31/12
U.S. a. 251—122 13 Oaims
1. In a needle valve having a body with fluid passage means
therein, the invention comprising:
a. a valve stem rotatably and sealably carried by the body
and having a tapered, annular closure surface thereon;
b. longitudinally movable seat means in the body passage
means for receiving said closure surface to close off the
passage means, said seat means rotatable by said valve
stem when said closure surface engages said seat means
during opening and closing of the valve to reduce wear
and galling between the seat means and the closure sur-
face;
c. seal means sealing between said seat means and passage
means; and
d. said seal means responsive to fluid pressure in the body
passage means to urge said seat means longitudinally in the
passage means toward said closure surface to form a
tighter seal in response to pressure in the passage means in
the body.
4,392,634
ELECTROMAGNETIC VALVE
Toshio Kita, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Fujikin International,
Inc., Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,320
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 4, 1980, 55-12829
Int. 0.5 F16K 31/06: HOIF 7/12
U.S. O. 251—129 3 Oaims
1. An electromagnetic valve comprising:
a valve case having a fluid inlet, a fluid outlet and a channel
holding the inlet in communication with the outlet, the
channel being provided with a valve seat,
a valve stem having a closing member for blocking the
channel by contact with the valve seat,
a movable core suppnarting the valve stem movably to bring
the closing member into or out of contact with the valve
seat,
a spring biasing the valve stem in a direction to bring the
closing member into contact with the valve seat,
a support comprising a hollow cylindrical portion and an
attaching portion fixed to the valve case for supporting
the movable core movably,
a stationary core aligned with the movable core,
an exciting coil surrounding the movable core and the sta-
tionary core, and
a shading coil provided on an end surface of the stationary
core which surface is opposed to the movable core,
the stationary core having a small diameter at the end
thereof provided with the shading coil.
572
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
the cylindrical portion of the support extending toward the
stationary core,
the cylindrical portion being integrally formed with a disk
portion in contact with the end surface of the stationary
core and a projecting edge covering the periphery of the
small-diameter end of the stationary core,
the small-diameter end fitting in the projecting edge with the
forward end of the projecting edge welded to the station-
ary core.
4,392,635
ROTARY POWER COUPLING AND PLANETARY GEAR
WINCH
Dan C. Muessel, Danvers, and Nubar Hagopian, Boston, both of
Mass., assignors to Rule Industries, Inc., Gloucester, Mass.
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,654
Int. a.3 B66D 1/22; F16D 3/04
U.S. a. 254—344 20 Gaims
coaxially from and substantially parallel to said driving
member and comprising a pair of flat radial driven surfaces
lying on a diameter of the axis of rotation thereof, said diam-
eter being displaced by about 90° from the diameter defined
by said driving surfaces of said driving member;
a coupling plate interposed between said driving and driven
members, said coupling plate comprising a pair each of flat
driven and driving surfaces corresponding to and in torque-
transmitting, flush bearing contact with each of said pairs of
flat radial driving and driven surfaces, respectively of said
rotatable driving and driven members;
one or the other of the pair of flat radial driving surfaces of the
driving member or the corresponding pair of flat driven
surfaces of said coupling plate and one or the other of the
pair of flat radial driven surfaces of said driven member or
the corresponding pair of flat driving surfaces of said cou-
pling plate each extending centrally at least somewhat be-
yond the bearing surface in flush contact therewith, thereby
to allow sliding eccentric displacement of the coupling plate
relative to the axes of rotation of said driving and driven
members.
11. A planetary gear winch comprising
a prime mover,
a planetary gear train having at least one planetary gear speed
reduction stage, said prime mover being coaxially connected
to the rotary power input of said gear train,
a winch drum, and
a rotary mechanical coupling between said gear train and said
winch drum, said coupling comprising:
a rotatable driving member connected to the rotary power
output of said gear train, said member being rotatable on
a plane substantially normal to the axis of rotation of said
output and comprising a pair of flat, radial driving sur-
faces lying on a diameter of said axis of rotation;
a rotatable driven member connected to said winch drum,
said driven member being spaced substantially coaxially
from and substantially parallel to said driving member and
comprising a pair of flat radial driven surfaces lying on a
diameter of the axis of rotation thereof, said diameter
being displaced by about 90° from the diameter defined by
said driving surfaces of said driving member;
a coupling plate interposed between said driving and driven
members, said coupling plate comprising a pair each of flat
driven and driving surfaces corresponding to and in
torque-transmitting, flush bearing contact with each of
said pairs of flat radial driving and driven surfaces, respec-
tively, of said rotatable driving and driven members;
one or the other of the pair of flat radial driving surfaces of
the driving member or the corresponding pair of flat
driven surfaces of said coupling plate and one or the other
of the pair of flat radial driven surfaces of said driven
member or the corresponding pair of flat driving surfaces
of said coupling plate each extending centrally at least
somewhat beyond the bearing surface in flush contact
therewith, thereby to allow sliding eccentric displacement
of the coupling plate relative to the axis of rotation of said
driving and driven members and to thereby accommodate
eccentric displacement of the axis of rotation of said
winch drum relative to that of said rotary power output.
1. A rotary mechanical coupling comprising:
a rotatable driving member adapted for connection to a
sources of rotary mechanical power, said member being
rotatable on a plane substantially normal to the axis of rota-
tion of said source and comprising a pair of flat, radial driv-
ing surfaces lying on a diameter of said axis of rotation;
a rotatable driven member adapted for connection to a rotary
power user, said driven member being spaced substantially
4,392,636
APPARATUS FOR DEGASSING MOLTEN METAL
Joseph A. CInmpner, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to Swiss Alumin-
imn Ltd^ Chippis, Switzerland
FUed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,759
Int a.3 C21C 5/4H
UJS. a. 266—218 11 CUdms
1. An apparatus for use in the degassing of molten metal
which comprises:
a chamber having an inner elongated sidewall portion, an
outer elongated sidewall portion and a central axis;
metal inlet means positioned at a first height and tangentially
located with respect to said chamber for tangentially
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
573
,y.
introducing molten metal into said chamber such that said
molten metal swirlingly flows from said molten metal inlet
down through said chamber;
metal outlet means positioned at a second height below said
first height for removing molten metal from said chamber;
and
4,392,638
VEHICLE SUSPENSION DEVICE
Tetsuo Kato, Yokohama, Japan, and Naoki Makita, Southfleld,
Mich., assignors to Tokico Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,601
Int a.J F16F 9/m
U.S. a. 267—64.24 7 Claims
at least two fluxing gas inlet means mounted in said first
inner elongated sidewall portion below said first height at
different radial distances from said central axis of said
chamber for introducing fluxing gas into said chamber.
4,392,637
METALLURGICAL MELTING APPARATUS WITH A
BLOW-NOZZLE OR BURNER CAPABLE OF
SWIVELLING IN DIFFERENT DIRECTIONS
Ralph Weber, Sao Paulo, Brazil; Bernt Rollinger; Michael NagI,
both of Baden-Baden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Bernhard
Rinner, Kehl am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Korf-Stahl AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany and Voest-Alpine AG,
Austria
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,903
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 12,
1980, 3034520
Int. a.3 C21B 7/16
U.S. a. 266—265 12 Qaims
1. A vehicle suspension device comprising;
a hydraulic damper including a cylinder and a piston rod
extending outwardly of one end of said cylinder;
a cylindrical housing mounted on said one end of said cylin-
der and surrounding a part of the outer circumference of
said cylinder;
_a cylindrical support member having a closed end attached
to the extending end of said piston rod;
a flexible tubular wall member having a first end connected
to said support member and a second end connected to
said housing, said wall member, said housing and said
support member defining an air chamber; and
means for enabling said housing to rotate relative to said
cylinder about a longitudinal axis of said damper, and
thereby for preventing twisting of said wall member, said
means comprising a bearing supporting said housing on
said cylinder.
4,392,639
DAMPER SUPPORT FOR ENGINE MOUNTS
Keizo Konishi, Inuyama, Japan, assignor to Tokai Rubber In-
dustries Ltd., Komaki, Japan
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,902
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 11, 1980, 55-47553
Int. a.3 F16F 9/04
U.S. a. 267—140.1 10 Qaims
1. A metallurgical melting apparatus, in which sponge iron is
melted to form liquid pig iron and reduction gas is produced
from feed coal and oxygen-bearing gas, comprising a blow-
nozzle mounted in the side-wall of said apparatus above the
level of the melt capable of swivelling in different directions
and having at least one tube, a nozzle-head (12) attached to said
tube (6), having a spherical surfaced calotte (13) a forward
ring-seat (14) anchored to the side-wall (1) of the melting
apparatus sealingly contacting a forward surface of the calotte
(13), and a rear ring-seat (15) contacting a rear surface of the
calotte (13) which thrusts the callotte forward towards the
forward rmg-seat (14).
1. A damper support comprising: at least one confined cham-
ber and a pump chamber defined by two mounting fixtures and
by an elastic member hermetically connecting said two mount-
ing fixtures, said pump chamber being operative to effect a
pumping action in response to the vibrations of at least one of
said mounting fixtures; means for providing communications
between said pump chamber and the atmosphere and between
said pump chamber and said confined chamber, respectively;
574
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
and check valve means mounted in said communication means,
respectively.
4,392,640
VIBRATION ABSORBER FOR AN AUTOMOTIVE
VEHICLE
Toshihiko Kakimoto, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser, No. 253,570
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 21, 1980, 55-52664
Int. a.^ F16F 1/38
U.S. a. 267—141.2 4 Qaims
through said opening, said drawbar terminating at one end in a
laterally extending foot of such width as to pass through the
space between said edges and of such length as to engage a
surface of a single one of said members adjacent such space,
said opening in said bridge having a length greater than the
i6
I5b(l5l
1. A vibration absorber adapted t6 be disposed between the
body and the power unit of an automotive vehicle, comprising:
(a) a spool-shaped body having an inner cylinder with a pair
of axially spaced plate members fixedly joined thereto;
(b) an outer cylinder having a diameter larger than that of
said inner cylinder and being disposed concentrically with
said inner cylinder; and
(c) a rubber member, having: (i) a tubular portion which is
fixed to the interior of said outer cylinder, (ii) an arm
which is fixed to said inner cylinder and which extends
radially therefrom in opposite directions to said tubular
portion, said arm having radially intermediate portions
with axial dimensions greater than that of the remainder of
the arm but less than the axial spacing between said plate
members, said arm being further provided with a pair of
radially outer portions having axial dimensions less than
that of the remaining portions of the arm; and (iii) a pair of
diametrically opposed projections extending inwardly
» from the tubular portion in a direction substantially per-
pendicular to the radial disposition of said arm with the
inner ends of said projections being spaced from said arm,
. said rubber member being adapted to deform in a way
such that when said spool-shaped body vibrates radially in
directions transverse to that of said arm, said arm is de-
formed in a shear mode prior to contacting said projec-
tions and said projections are deformed in a compression
mode when contacted by said arm, and when said spool-
shaped body vibrates in the axial direction, said arm is
— deformed in a shear mode prior to contacting said plate
members, and in a compression mode when said radially
intermediate portions contact said plate members;
whereby multistep elasticity characteristics can be obtained
in both the radial and axial vibration directions of said
spool-shaped body.
4,392,641
ALIGNMENT TOOL
Timothy C. Dearman, P.O. Box 937, Pearland, Tex. 77581
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 302,970
Int. a.3 B25B 5/14
U.S. a. 269—49 7 Oaims
1. A welding tool for use in positioning in predetermined
locations spaced apart, confronting edges of two members to
be welded together, said tool comprising a body having two
legs adapted to straddle the space between said edges and a
bridge joining said legs, said bridge having an opening therein
extending from adjacent the middle of said bridge toward one
of said legs and said opening terminating closer to said one leg
than to the other of said legs; a drawbar slidably extending
»
(
4
8~i 35
_I3
b»
, y
1
- «
,c;— ^- •, 3
"^pfm
thickness of said drawbar; and means carried by said drawbar
for moving said drawbar relatively to said body in a direction
to enable said foot to engage such surface of said one of said
members and displace such member relatively to the other of
said members in the direction of said bridge. _
4,392,642
WORKPIECE POSITIONING TABLE WITH AIR
BEARING PADS
Anwar Chitayat, Plainview, N.Y., assignor to Anorad Corpora-
tion, Hauppauge, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,930
Int. a.3 B23Q 1/02
U.S. a. 269—73 4 Qaims
1. A workpiece positioning table of the type having at least
one table and at least one plurality of spaced apart air bearing
pads for supporting said at least one table above a horizontal
surface, comprising:
a source of pressurized air;
an air pressure regulator operative to receive said pressur-
ized air and to regulate its output air pressure to a substan-
tially constant air pressure;
a plurality of flow control valves each of which receives said
substantially constant air pressure and feeds air pressure to
one of said at least one plurality of air bearing pads; and
means for independently adjusting a constant flow of air
through each of said flow control valves in said plurality
of flow control valves to independently control a height
of a lift above said horizontal surface developed by each
of said air bearing pads.
July 12,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
575
4,392,643
MAGNETIC HOLD DOWN TOOL
Gary P. Campeau, Southfield Township, Oakland County,
Mich., assignor to Suburban Tool, Inc., Birmingham, Mich.
j Filed Mar. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 134,541
Int. a.3 B23Q 3/02
U.S. Q. 269—136 5 Claims
/^
1$ I' ijlTi'IF
/
26
V^-
\s
liiiiiiii
H.
•31
^13
T m
i'^J K^n : I'"' i//'
1. Apparatus for clamping a workpiece comprising:
a pair of opposed jaws for engaging the workpiece;
first and second means for mounting said jaws for recipro-
cating movement toward and away from each other be-
tween an open release position and a closed clamping
position;
first and second spaced apart cam follower means respec-
tively coupled with said first and second mounting means;
cam means for displacing said cam follower means;
means for selectively adjusting the distance between said
jaws when the latter are in said closed clamping position
thereof, including means for mounting one of said first and
second cam follower means for movement toward and
away from the other of said first and second cam follower
means, and
means for limiting the magnitude of force transferred from
said cam means through at least one of said first and sec-
ond cam follower means to said jaws to a predetermined
level thereof, regardless of the distance between said jaws.
4,392.645
HEAD SUPPORT AND HALO JIG
Thomas R. Westphal, 143B E. Frederick St., Lancaster, Pa.
17602
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,007
Int. a.5 A61G 13/00
U.S. a. 269—328 2 Oaims
1. The combination with a vise having a pair of jaws, of a
pair of workpiece hold down tools, characterized in that:
(a) each of said hold down tools includes an elongated body
having a front end surface for engagement with a work-
piece, a flat bottom surface perpendicular to the front end
surface, and a rear end surface for mounting against the
clamping face of a vise jaw;
(b) the rear end surface of each body is formed on a plane
that is non-parallel with the body front end surface by an
inwardly directed acute angle; and,
(c) magnet means is fixedly mounted on the rear end surface
of each body for releasably retaining each hold down tool
on the clamping face of one of the pair of vise jaws in a self
retaining manner at a selective level relative to a work-
piece to be held between the pair of vise jaws, whereby
when the vise jaws are moved to a position to clamp said
workpiece the front ends of the hold down tools engage
said workpiece with a line contact and exert a downward
holding pressure on said workpiece.
4,392,644
TUBE CUTTING APPARATUS
John J. Boraym, 4820 Schoolbell La., Birmingham, Mich. 48010
Continuation of Ser. No. 119,241, Feb. 7, 1980, Pat. No.
4,294,147. This application Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,298
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 13,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B23D 21/00. 25/04 .
U.S. a. 269—157 8 Qaims
1. A head support and halo locating jig for use in attaching
a halo band to the head of a patient positioned with neck and
head extending off the end of a patient support means, compris-
ing:
a base means resting on the floor below the patient's neck
and head;
a pillar means movably attached and clamped to the base
means and extending vertically upward to the region just
below the patient's head;
a head support cradle pivotably attached to permit move-
ment in only a single vertical plane and clamped to the top
of the pillar means; and
a halo locating system adjustably clamped to the pillar inde-
pendent of the head support cradle attachment means,
including at least two clamped swivel adjustments inde-
pendent of the head support cradle adjustment, and hold-
ing the halo band in a stable, predetermined position rela-
tive to the head support means.
4,392,646
SPREADING MACHINE CUTTER BOX AND CLAMP
ASSEMBLY
Conrad A. Costigan, Richmond Hill, N.Y., assignor to Spreading
Machine Exchange, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,822
Int. a.J B65H 29/46
U.S. a. 270—30 10 Qaims
1. A sheet material spreading machine comprising a carriage
mounted for movement along a table surface and carrying a
supply of sheet material to be deposited in superimposed layers
on said table surface, with each layer of sheet material depos-
576
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
ited in an operative run of said carriage in opposite directions
along said table surface,
a cutter box and clamp assembly carried by said carriage and
adapted to cut off the layer of sheet material deposited on
the table surface at one end of each operative run of said
carriage, said cutter box and clamp assembly comprising:
an elongated support member mounted on said machine
carriage and extending transversely thereof,
a cutter frame movably mounted on said support member,
guide means on said support member for guiding movement
of said cutter frame in opposite directions along said sup-
port member,
drive means on said support member for moving said cutter
frame along said guide means,
a circular cutter member rotatably mounted for free rotation
on said cutter frame in a vertical position and having an
edge p>ortion,
a pressure bar mounted on said support member in a horizon-
tally-disposed position and having a solid impermeable
planar surface underlying said cutter member wherein the
sheet material passes between said cutter member and said
planar surface and is pressed into engagement with said
planar surface by said edge portion along a cutting line,
biasing means mounted on said support member and adapted
to urge said pressure bar into firm engagement with said
cutter member, said cutter member rotating at a speed
such that said edge portion moves in a substantially non-
slipping relationship with the sheet material to thereby
cause said cutter member to score the sheet material fed
between said cutter member and said pressure bar under
rolling action of said cutter member against said pressure
bar as said cutter member is carried by said cutter frame
along said support member, and
clamp means disposed to clamp said sheet material to said
pressure bar, adjacent to the path of travel of said cutter
member.
432,647
FLOOR HOCKEY CAROM CORNER
William J. Golebieski, 300 Stoneybrooke Dr., Cheswick, Pa.
15024
FUed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,867
Int CI.5 A63B 71/02
U.S. a. 272—3 6 Claims
1. A carom comer for an indoor floor game, said comer
comprising, in combination
first and second frame members, each of said frame members
having a chamfered end whereby said frame members
may be joined to form a right angle,
hinge means joining said frame members,
said frame members further having in the vicinity of their
ends remote from said hinge arcuately shaped recessed
portions,
a panel member of flexible material and arcuate shape, and
means securing the ends of said panel to said remote ends of
said frame members.
4,392,648
THEATRICAL TRANSPORTATION APPARATUS
Peter S. Foy, 4345 Topaz St., Las Vegas, Nev. 89121
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,925
Int. a.3 A63J 5/12
U.S. a. 272—24 6 Qaims
i7''-T-/n
I 35 33 33 Jo/
J3 34
41
1. A theatrical personnel transportation apparatus for posi-
tioning a performer in a vertical viewing plane having a por-
tion thereof exposed to a viewing audience comprising:
an elongated stationary monorail lying in the vertical view-
ing plane out of view of the audience;
said monorail having an upper track and a lower track ex-
tending between the opposite ends of said monorail;
a first movable carriage carried on said upper track and a
second movable carriage carried on said lower track
whereby both of said carriages being adapted to move
between the opposite ends of said tracks respectively;
a first pulley system having a plurality of pulley wheels and
a line trained over said wheels wherein the opposite ends
of said line are connected to the respective opposite ends
of said carriage so that said carriage may be selectively
moved along said upper track;
a second pulley system having a first pair of pulley wheels
carried on said first carriage and a line trained over said
pair of pulley wheels having its opposite ends fixly se-
cured to said monorail whereby said second carriage
moves in a direction opposite to the direction of move-
ment of said first carriage and at twice the speed; and
a third pulley system having a second pair of pulley wheels
disposed so that one pulley wheel is mounted on said first
carriage and the other pulley wheel of the pair is mounted
on said second carriage and a line trained over said second
pair of pulley wheels wherein the opposite ends of said
line are connected to a wind-up drum and to the per-
former respectively whereby the performer is supported
in mid-air from said monorail so that the performer may
be maneuvered vertically and laterally within the vertical
viewing plane exposed to the audience in response to
movement of said first and second carriages respectively.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
577
4,392,649
HAND, WRIST AND FOREARM EXEROSING DEVICE
Dan Chapman, 1107 E. Teresa, Sapulpa, Okla. 74066
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,030
Int. a.3 A63B 21/00
U.S. a. 272—67 3 Qaims
ing surface by moving into and at least partially blocking
said aperture of said hood.
I St
It
I
2
A<
4,392,651
ELECTRONIC LOGIC GAME
Alfred E. Hall, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Sigalos & Levine, P.C,
Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 190,612, Sep. 25, 1980, Pat. No. 4,350,340.
This application Jul. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 395,133
Int. a.3 A63F 9/06
U.S. a. 273—153 R 8 Qaims
1. A hand, wrist and forearm exercising apparatus adapted to
be removably mounted on a supjHjrt structure and comprising
elongated continuous roller means to be grasped about the
outer periphery by the hands of the user for twisting thereof
about its own longitudinal axis, clamping means secured to the
opposite ends of the roller means for suspending the roller
means therebetween and securing said roller means to said
support structure, and tensioning means operably connected
with the roller means and disposed in the proximity of one end
thereof, said tensioning means comprising a sleeve means se-
cured in the proximity of one end of the roller means, friction
belt means disposed around at least a portion of the outer
periphery of the sleeve means, and means operably connected
directly to the friction belt means for adjusting the tension of
the belt for providing substantially any desired resistance to the
twisting motion for an effective exercising of the hands, and
wrist and forearm of the user.
4,392,650
TENNIS TRAINING AID
Carl W. Hilton, Muskegon, Mich., assignor to Return on Invest-
ment Corporation, Muskegon, Mich.
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,168
I Int. a.5 A63B 61/00
U.S. CI. 273—29 A 14 Claims
1. A training aid primarily adapted for use in training a tennis
player to properly orientate the head and to concentrate on the
tennis ball, said aid comprising:
a hood having a pair of spaced side panels defining an aper-
ture through which the user must view;
a band secured to said hood, said band adapted to support
the hood on the head of the user and in a position so that
the user must look through said aperture, said hood di-
mensioned to limit the peripheral vision of the user; and
indicator means secured to said hood adjacent said aperture
for visually indicating when the user moves his head and
eyes from a normal horizontal position relative to a play-
€\P<^,gQ^
Q.0Q.DQO
O
o
0 ~^»
o
ooo
o
0OOOOOOQPOOe ••„0
1. An electronic logic game comprising:
a. a simulated electronic balance scale,
b. a plurality of units to be symbolically weighed, one of
which units differs from the others electronically by in-
cluding a first magnet to represent said unit being lighter
than the other units or first and second magnets to repre-
sent said unit being heavier than the other units and se-
lected ones of which units may be symbolically positioned
on said simulated balance scale,
means associated with said simulated balance scale for
detecting said different unit when symbolically positioned
on said simulated balance scale, and
. circuit means coupled to said detecting means for repre-
senting said scale to be balanced or unbalanced in a prede-
termined direction according to said state of said different
unit whereby said different unit may be logically discov-
ered in a predetermined number of said electronic scale
balance or unbalance representations.
c.
432,652
TARGET COMPRISING A RESILIENT MATERIAL
COATED WITH THERMOLUMINESCENT MATERIAL
Lindsay C. Knight, Albury, Australia, and Robert A. Cottis,
Stockport, England, assignors to Australasian Training Aids
Pty. Ltd., Albury, Australia
Continuation of Ser. No. 43,486, May 29, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,819
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 26, 1978,
23483/78
Int. a.5 F41J 5/00. 9/14
U.S. a. 273—358 4 Claims
1. A target comprising a support member adapted to be
penetrated by projectiles, said support member being formed
from a resilient material which is not destroyed when a projec-
tile passes therethrough and which locally increases in temper-
578
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
ature as it is penetrated by said projectile, a coating of thermo- entire length thereof, the length of said second tubular member
lummescent matenal on said support member which is opera- being greater than the length of said first tubular member.
4,392,653
GAME APPARATUS
James W. Blume, Sr., 1851 Glatt, Arnold, Mo. 63010
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,752
Int. a.5 A63B 63/04. 63/08
U.S. a. 273—400
13 Oaims
10. A method of playing a game comprising providing a base
member having side walls extending upwardly therefrom
around the perimeter thereof, an opening positioned near the
center of said base member spaced from said side walls, provid-
ing a tubular member extending upwardly from said base mem-
ber and having a central cavity that registers with said opening
forming a target, providing a receiving member insertable
through said tubular member for increasing the height of the
target, said receiving member having a central cavity for re-
ceiving playing pieces tossed therein, providing a plurality of
playing pieces of a size to be thrown into the central cavity of
said receiving member, tossing a predetermined number of said
playing pieces from a predetermined distance from the base
member toward the target with the intention of having them
enter the center cavity of said receiving member, and scoring
the value of selected ones of playing pieces tossed based upon
the position of said playing pieces when they come to rest
relative to said target.
12. A game apparatus for playing a toss type skill game, said
apparatus forming a target area for the game and comprising
an open topped container defined by a bottom wall and a
peripherial wall extending upwardly from around the bottom
wall, a hole through the bottom wall at a location spaced from
the peripherial wall, a first tubular member positioned extend-
ing upwardly from the bottom wall through said hole, said first
tubular member having an open upper side forming a target for
receiving objects thrown at the apparatus, said first tubular
member having an outer cross sectional size and shape to
match the shape of the hole through the bottom wall whereby
said tubular member can be moved through the hole in the
bottom wall of said container, means on said first tubular mem-
ber adjacent one end thereof movable into engagement with
the bottom wall of said container to limit movement thereof
through said hole, and a second tubular member positioned for
movement through said first tubular member and along the
4,392,654
ARROW FLETCHING
Richard F. Carella, 35572 Strathcona, Mount Oemens, Mich
48043
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,167
Int. a.3 F41B 5/02
U.S. a. 273-423 15 Qaims
/■«0
ble to luminesce in the area adjacent the position at which the
projectile passes through the target.
11. An arrow including a shaft having front and rear ends
and a plurality of fietchings mounted on the rear end spaced
circumferentially about the shaft from each other, each fletch-
ing being of a unitary plastic construction comprising: a foot
mounted on the rear end of the arrow shaft and having front
and rear ends; a flexible vane that projects radially from the
foot; the vane having a front end that projects radially
throughout the extent thereof; and the vane having a rear end
including an inner portion that projects radially from the foot
and an outer portion having a continuously curved shape over
a major portion of the radially projecting height thereof from
the foot, said curved shape of the vane being inclined inwardly
toward the foot in a rearward direction to define a pocket for
restricting air flow such that the vane flexes to moderate drag
in response to wind changes.
4,392,655
HIGH-PRESSURE SEAL WITH CONTROLLED
DEFLECTION UNDER PRESSURE
John H. Olsen, Vashon, and Robert S. Pritchard, Seattle, both of
Wash., assignors to Flow Industries, Inc., So. Kent, Wash.
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,980
Int. a.3 F16J 15/48. 15/40
U.S. a. 277—1 21 Qaims
1. A seal for a shaft extending between high pressure and
low pressure regions, comprising: a seal body for surround-
ing said shaft with a gap of predetermined configuration be-
tween said seal body and said shaft under non-pressurized
conditions and extending from said high pressure region to
said low pressure region, the exterior of said seal body being
subjected to the fluid pressure within said high pressure re-
gion acting radially thereon; and means for controlling the ra-
dial compressive deformation of said seal body along the
length thereof to provide a predetermined clearance between
said seal body and said shaft under pressurized conditions to
control leakage of said high-pressure fluid.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
579
4,392,656
AIR-COOLED SEALING RINGS FOR THE WHEELS OF
GAS TURBINES
Jacques P. H. Tirole, Sevres; Claude M. Mons, Savigny Le
Temple, and Roland R. Spinat, Bretigny sur Orge, all of
France, assignors to Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construc-
tion de Moteurs d' Aviation, "S.N.E.C.M.A.", Paris, France
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,036
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 26, 1979, 79 26666
Int. a.3 FOID 11/08: F02F 11/00
U.S. a. 277—53 7 Qaims
ber to said second member across the movable space therebe-
tween, said sealing structure comprising:
a frustoconical Belleville spring (17,117);
an annular support spring (18,118) defining an arcuate cross
section having an end (19,119) connected to an outer portion
of the Belleville spring and an opposite end (20,120) seal-
ingly mounted to said first member (11,111), the spring
constants of said Belleville (17,117) and support springs
(18,118) being preselected to cumulatively cause a biasing
sealing force developed thereby to continuously increase
with an increase in deflection of said springs over the range
of variable spacing between said members (11,111,12) not-
withstanding a decrease in the sealing force developed by
the Belleville spring alone over a portion of the range of
increasing deflection; and
a seal element (21,121) fixed to said Belleville spring and hav-
ing a lip portion (22,122) urged into dynamic sealing engage-
ment with said second member (12) by said cumulative
continuously increasing biasing action of said spring.
1. An assembly including a cooled sealing ring for the bladed
wheel of a gas turbine of the type comprising successively
from the periphery toward the axis:
an annular support surrounding the wheel,
a first annular layer designated the "cooling layer" attached
to the inner surface of said annular support and made of a
materia] permeable to air,
cooling air inlet means at the upstream region of said cooling
layer, downstream exhaust means and deflectors in said
cooling layer, said cooling layer being of a material
whereby it serves as a reserve wear layer;
a thin, separating layer radially inwardly of said cooling
layer, said separating layer being permeable to air with its
permeability decreasing from upstream to downstream;
and
a wear layer adjacent the ends of the wheel blades and made
of a material capable of being abraded by said blades and
being traversed radially by the air from the cooling layer
passing through the separating layer.
1 1 4,392,657
BELLEVILLE SPRING LOADED SEAL
Robert D. Roley, Peoria, III., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor
Co., Peoria, III.
PCT No. PCrAJS80/00164, § 371 Date Feb. 19, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 19, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02455, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 3, 1981
per Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 151,841
Int. a.3 F16J 15/32. 15/34
U.S. a. 277—95 16 Qaims
1. In a joint having a first member (11,111) and a second
member (12) variably spaced adjacent said first member, an
improved sealing structure (10,110) for sealing said first mem-
4,392,658
SKATE BLADE
Harry W. Redmond, and Raymond V. Jeannotte, both of Lang-
ley, Canada, assignors to Norjay Services, Ltd., Langley,
Canada
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,228
Int. Q.5 A63C 1/30
U.S. Q. 280—11.18 34 Qaims
31-..
-53 /
H| 103 '301
^301
301 203
^ 20
32
201 A
1. An elongated skate blade for an ice skate, said blade com-
prising:
(a) a first acute-angled cutting edge formed longitudinally on
one side of said blade for providing cutting engagement
with an ice surface;
(b) a second acute-angled cutting edge formed longitudi-
nally on the opposite side of said blade for providing
cutting engagement with the ice surface; and,
(c) a generally downwardly facing longitudinally extending
bottom surface extending transversely from said first
cutting edge to said second cutting edge, said bottom
surface including:
(i) a first longitudinally extending edge face rising up-
wardly and inwardly from said first cutting edge;
(ii) a second longitudinally extending edge face nsing
upwardly and inwardly from said second cutting edge;
and,
(iii) a longitudinally extending middle face centrally dis-
posed between said first and second edge faces and
merging substantially smoothly therewith, said middle
face having a substantially flat profile in transverse
cross-section for at least one-third of the distance from
the transverse centre of the blade to each side of the
blade.
580
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,659
TWO-WHEELED ROLLER SKATE
Koichi Yoshimoto, Kobe, Japan, assignor to Hanshin Sogyo Co^
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,895
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 25, 1980, 55-
168513[U]
lntCL^A63C 17/06
VS. a. 280— 11J3 1 Claim
and a vertical means, said horizontal means being fixedly
attached at one end thereof to an upper portion of said
vertical means to provide an open area below said hori-
zontal means;
means for mounting a lower end of said vertical means to
said vehicle for pivotal movement of said safety bar trans-
verse to said entryway;
said mounting means comprising vertically extending mem-
bers having holes for cooperating with holes in said verti-
cal means;
wherein said vertical means comprises two spaced vertical
elements, each of said vertical elements being mounted to
one of said vertically extending members for pivotal
movement; and
means for latching said bar to retain it in a position across
said entryway.
1. A two-wheeled roller skate comprising:
(a) a base plate having first and second vertical openings
extending therethrough;
(b) a pair of suspension arms extending longitudinally of said
base plate and generally parallel thereto;
(c) each of said suspension arms having a first end swingably
connected to said base plate, a downwardly bent interme-
diate portion, and a second end, and having a skate roller
connected to said second end:
(d) first bolt means extending through said first and second
openings for swingably supporting said suspension arms;
(e) second bolt means extending horizontally through said
bent portion of each suspension arm for pivotably sup-
porting the suspension arms on said base plate;
(0 each of said first and second vertical openings in said base
plate being larger at the bottom end thereof than at the top
end thereof to accommodate pivoting movement of said
suspension arms about said second bolt means; and
(g) a toe base portion at one end of said base plate and a heel
base portion at the other end of said base plate, said toe
base portion being connected to said base plate by said
second bolt means, and said heel base portion being con-
nected to said base plate by said second bolt means.
4,392,660
SAFETY BAR
James V. Mason, Rte. 1 Box 370, and Mancii C. Fisher, Rte. 1,
both of Lake Toxaway, N.C. 28747
FUed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,505
Int. C1.3 B60N 5/00: B60R 21/10
U.S. a. 280—751 8 Oaims
432,661
SUPPLY APPARATUS TO PROVIDE ELECTRICITY TO
MOTOR-DRIVEN APPLIANCES, ESPEOALLY LAWN
EDGE TRIMMERS, DRIVEN WITH ELECTRIC MOTORS
Max Langenstein, Miihlweg 1, 7928 lUertissen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,732
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 22,
1979, 7926920[U]
Int. a.3 B62B 15/00: HOIM 2/10
U.S. a. 280—12 M 4 Oaims
passage
1. A safety device for preventing inadvertent
through the entryway of a vehicle comprising:
a generally inverted L-shaped safety bar consisting of a
horizontal means adapted to extend across said entryway,
1. An electrical supply apparatus for hand-tools or the like,
comprising:
an upright housing having a downwardly convex bottom
elongated in one direction to form a runner extending in
said direction, said housing being formed with a handle at
its upper end, said housing having an outwardly open
annular recess above said runner, said bottom having a
greater curvature in a veriical median plane in said direc-
tion than transversely to said plane, said housing being
formed with an opening in said plane and in said recess at
a level not substantially above the center of gravity of the
apparatus;
a battery in said housing;
a cable running to said battery extending out of said housing
through said opening for connecting the apparatus to a
hand-tool or the like, said cable being adapted to be coiled
in said recess; and
cable-tension relief means connecting said cable to said
housing.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
581
1 1 4,392,662
DEVICE FOR FAOLITATING PARTICULARLY THE
LOADING AND UNLOADING OF CONTAINERS ETC.
FROM VEHICLES ETC.
Norbert Hoglinger, Via Stazione, 34, 1-Caldaro (Bozen), Italy
FUed Jwi. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,259
Claims priority, application Italy, Jul. 10, 1980, 4829 A/80
Int. a.3 B60P 1/64
U.S. a. 280— 43J3 1 Oaim
a central part thereof are pivotally connected through a cross
connecting member to be vertically rotatable in relation to
each other, wherein each wheel is individually resiliently sus-
pended at a rear part of the respective thill member, and
wherein a seat supporting cart member is separately resiliently
supported by the cart frame.
^.|
"^
7b
4.
4,392,664
FRONT FORK OF MOTORCYCLE
Takayoshi Tsuchiya, and Masami Matsuo, both of Iwata, Japan,
assignors to Showa Manufacturing Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,398
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 4, 1980, 55-153810
Int. a.3 B62K 25/08
U.S. a. 280—276 8 Claims
^
4
6a
4,392,663
TRAINING CART
Giista Forslund, S-780 45 Bjorbo, Sweden
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,671
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 19, 1980, 8004594
Int. 0.3 B62C 1/08
U.S. O.280— 68 . 10 Oaims
=^^
1. A two-wheeled cart for training trotters, wherein the cart
frame comprises two longitudinal rigid thUl members, which at
1. A container structure comprising, in combination: a bot-
tom wall; an upstanding front wall; an upstanding rear wall; an
opposed pair of upstanding side walls; a first pair of like tele-
scopic leg assemblies vertically mounted upon the exterior
surface of said rear wall in spaced parallel relationship with
one another, each leg assembly being inwardly displaced from
a comer-deflning junction of a respective side wall and said
rear wall by an amount substantially less than its spacing from
the other leg assembly; a second pair of like telescopic leg
assemblies, each of which is vertically mounted upon the exte-
rior surface of a respective side wall and is rearwardly equidis-
tant from said front wall by an amount leaving said container
structure with a substantial cantilever portion terminating in
said front wall; a first set of swivel casters mounted directly on
said bottom wall forwardly of said first pair of telescopic leg
assemblies and proximate thereto; a second set of swivel casters
mounted directly on said bottom wall within the cantilever
portion of said container structure; and a respective swivel
caster mounted on the lower end of the leg of each telescopic
leg assembly; the arrangement being such that, with the legs of
the telescopic leg assemblies initially extended, one can roll
said container structure along a horizontal base surface to
position said cantilever portion over a stationary parallel ele-
vated surface, then retract the legs of said second pair of tele-
scopic leg assemblies to lower said cantilever f>ortion and
obtain rolling support thereof on said elevated surface by said
second set of swivel casters, thereafter forwardly roll said
container structure until said first set of swivel casters is posi-
tioned over said elevated surface, and finally retract the legs of
said first pair of telescopic leg assemblies to obtain rolling
support of the rear end of the container structure on said ele-
vated surface by said first set of swivel casters, thereby to
facilitate completion of the loading of the container structure
onto said elevated surface.
era.
1. A front fork assembly for use on a motorcycle, compris-
ing: a fork pipe; a bottom casing slidably fitting the lower
portion of said fork pipe and having means for connection to
the axle of the front motorcycle wheel, said bottom casing
having its inside filled with oil; a seat pipe anchored at the
bottom portion of said bottom casing and having its upper end
slidably fitted in said fork pipe; a valve seat slidably fitted in an
oil passage for providing communication between the inside
and outside of said iseat pipe and supported by a spring; a
plunger having a valve disposed to face said valve seat for
opening and closing said oil passage; and coaction means for
effecting coaction between said plunger and a braking mecha-
nism.
4,392,665
BOAT DOLLY
Toby D. MUler, 616 S. Lee St., Garrett, Ind. 46738, and James
A. MUler, 204 E. Diamond, Kendallville, Ind. 46755
FUed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,434
Int a.3 B60P 3/10
U.S. O. 280— 414.2 10 Oaims
1. A boat dolly having first and second ends comprising:
cradle frame means for receiving and supporting the stem
portion of a boat,
a pair of transversely spaced-apart wheels operativcly
mounted to said cradle frame means;
flexible supporting and propelling means, comprising two
582
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
transversely spaced apart ropes secured at one end to said
cradle frame means and extending longitudinally for-
wardly of the underside of the hull of a boat on said frame
means for both supporting the bow portion of said boat
and propelling said boat and said boat dolly as a unit in
response to a pulling force exerted on the other end
thereof,
said frame means having front and rear portions and includ-
ing two spaced longitudinal frame members and two
spaced cross frame members secured thereto, transversely
spaced eyelets depending from said frame means and
receiving said ropes therethrough thereby spacing said
ropes apart,
an upright strut device hingedly mounted on the rear portion
of said frame means for pivotal movement about a trans-
verse axis between first and second positions, in said first
position said strut device being upright and in said second
f>osition said strut device being folded onto said frame
means,
said strut device including two elongated substantially paral-
lel and spaced apart struts each being provided with a
laterally extending elongated stub, a hinge bar hingedly
mounted on the rear portion of said frame means for
swinging movement about a transverse axis parallel to the
axis of said hinge bar, said hinge bar being hollow and
telescopically receiving said stubs within the opposite end
portions thereof,
means for releaseably locking said stubs and hinge bar to-
gether in adjusted telescoped position; and
said wheels being carried on the lower ends of said struts,
respectively.
the boot and boot plate can pivot about a lateral axis of said
ski.
4,392,666
INTEGRAL SKI BINDING
Paul C. Ramer, Golden, Colo., assignor to Alpine Research, Inc.,
Golden, Colo.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,424
Int. a.3 A63C 9/02
U.S. a. 280—614 9 Oaims
4,392,667
VEHICLE SUSPENSION SYSTEM
Horacio Shakespear, West Bloomfield, Mich., assignor to Gen-
eral Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,729
Int. a.3 B60G i/00
U.S. a. 280—690 3 Oaims
„J a-
1. In an independent suspension system for a vehicle having
a body member, a pair of laterally spaced road wheels, a pair of
laterally spaced control arms disposed on said body member
for independent pivotal movement in jounce and rebound
directions from a central position about respective ones of a
pair of pivot axes disposed in a transverse vertical plane of said
body member, a pair of spindle support members each adapted
to rotatably support a respective one of said road wheels, and
hinge means connecting a first portion of each of said spindle
support members to respective ones of said control arms for
pivotal movement about generally longitudinal axes defined by
said respective ones of said control arms so that each of said
spindle support member first portions moves in a plane perpen-
dicular to a corresponding one of said pivot axes during jounce
and rebound deflections of corresponding ones of said road
wheels, the improvement comprising, a pair of laterally ex-
tending control means disposed between said body member
and respective ones of said spindle support members operative
to constrain a second portion of each of said spindle support
members spaced vertically above corresponding ones of said
first portions to move laterally along an arc of finite radius
during jounce and rebound deflections of said road wheels.
4,392,668
SHOCK-ABSORBING WHEEL SUSPENSION ASSEMBLY
Lawrence K. MulhoUand, 416 Mara St., Ventura, Calif. 93004
FUed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,485
Int. Q\} B60G 11/18
U.S. a. 280—721 11 Qaims
1. A boot-boot plate binding for releasably connecting a foot
of a skier to a ski comprising in combination:
a toe piece mounted on said ski including retention means
extending laterally of said ski;
a boot plate having a block portion and semirigid elongated
member means extending longitudinally of said ski, said
elongated member means having connection means on for-
ward ends thereof for releasable and pivotable connection to
said retention means;
a boot being conformable to and adapted to retain the foot of
said skier, said boot being fixedly connectable to said boot
plate at selected locations for movement therewith whereby
1. An improved torsionally shock-absorbing wheel suspen-
sion assembly, said assembly comprising, in combination:
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
583
a. a rigid yoke having a generally upwardly extending neck
and a pair of downwardly diverging hollow tubular
sleeves connected to the lower end of said neck, both of
said sleeves being directed either rearwardly or forwardly
relative to said neck;
b. a pair of flexible torsion resilient lever support arms, the
upper ends of which extend into said sleeves, the elon-
gated middle portions of which are generally parallel to
each other and extend downwardly and in the same rear-
ward or forward direction as said sleeves relative to said
neck and the lower ends of which arms are angled to
approximate each other in an about horizontal plane; and
c. a wheel disposed between said lower ends with a central
hub which receives and holds said lower ends of said arms
in a fixed position relative to said hub» whereby upward
deflection of said wheel exerts flexing and torquing of said
flexible torsionally resilient arms to effect effective shock
absorption by said assembly.
4,392,670
PIVOTED STEERING COLUMN FOR LIFT TRUCK
Donald L. Schultz, Georgetown, Ky., assignor to Clark Equip-
ment Company, Buchanan, Mich.
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 238,889
Int. C1.5 B62D 1/16
U.S. a. 280—775 2 Claims
4,392,669
CAB FOR LIFT TRUCK WITH SWING OUT
WINDSHIELD
Robert P. Martin, Jr., 12576 Lake Ave., Lakewood, Ohio 44107
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,333
Int. a.3 B62D 1/18
U.S. a. 280—775 9 Qaims
1. In combination a lift truck having a mast at its front end
and a steering wheel disposed rearwardly of the mast and
movably mounted for displacement along a path from a rear-
ward operational position to a temporary forward clearance
position, a cab having a structure for protecting a driver seated
rearwardly of the op)erational position of the steering wheel,
said cab structure including a forward face having a wind-
shield, the forward face extending in a plane generally upright
and from side to side of the truck, said forward cab face includ-
ing a movable panel carrying said windshield, generally verti-
cal hinge means on said cab structure supporting said movable
panel for pivotal movement about a generally vertical axis
between a normal position and an extended position, said mov-
able panel in said normal position having a portion proximate
to said steering wheel extending across said path and in said
extended position having said proximate portion disposed
forwardly of said steering wheel clearance position, whereby
said steering wheel is free of obstruction by said panel in its
movement from said operational position to said clearance
position, the hinge means being so constructed and disposed to
cause said movable panel to swing between said normal posi-
tion and extended position without interference with the mast
when the mast is in a generally vertical position.
1. A narrow profile adjustable steering column assembly for
lift trucks and the like comprising,
a lower fixed mounting assembly including an upwardly
opening first housing,
an upper steering column assembly pivoted about a trans-
verse axis on said lower fixed mounting assembly and
including a steering post and a power steering unit for
energizing a remote power steer wheel to steer the lift
truck,
a pre-pressurized gas cylinder actuator located in said first
housing and pivotally connected between said upper and
lower assemblies continuously urging said upper assembly
to a forward tilted non-operative position,
a locking cylinder located in said first housing and pivotally
connected between said upper and lower assemblies for
holding said upper assembly in a locked operative posi-
tion,
a second housing surrounding said upper steering column
assembly,
said second housing being of approximately the same width
as the said first housing and the two housings jointly
providing a narrow profile minimizing the interference
with the operator's view past the steering column assem-
bly, and
an operator control member mounted on said second hous-
ing and connected internally of both said housings for
unlocking said locking cylinder to allow said cylinder
actuator to tilt said upper assembly to said non-operative
position.
4,392,671
SECURING DEVICE FOR THE SAFETY BELT OF A
RESTRAINING SYSTEM
Artur Fohl, Schomdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,427
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 14,
1980, 3001090
Int. Q.} B60R 21/00
U.S. Q. 280—802 7 Qaims
1. A restraining system for motor vehicles, especially a
passive restraining system, with a safety belt and a securing
584
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12. 1983
device for the safety belt, comprising a seat belt for restraining
a person in a seat of the vehicle, a slider track disposed in the
vehicle with one end of said seat belt slideable in the slider
track, a movable securing element for locking said one end of
the seat belt at the end of the track, spring means with a force
sufficient to urge said movable securing element in the path of
the belt end in the slider track but of insufficient force to
prevent the belt end from sliding into and away from the end
of the track, an inertial mass sensor in which the inertial mass
is activated at the occurrence of an acceleration or a tilting
force which exceeds a predetermined value, said activation
being movement of said inertial mass in the direct path of
movement of said movable securing element without moving it
to block movement of the securing element retaining it in
locked position to lock said belt end.
4,392,672
WEBBING RETRACTOR
Toshimasa Yamamoto; Maraoru Mori, both of Okazaki, and
Eiichi Kinaga, Toyota, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jido-
sha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha and Kabushiki-Kaisha Tokai-
Rika-Denki-Seisakusho, both of Aichi, Japan
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,454
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 29, 1979, 54-
165206[U]
Int. a.J B60R 21/02
U.S. a. 280—803 9 Oaims
ing path of the vehicle door for preventing said ratchet
wheel from rotating in the windup direction of the web-
bing when the vehicle door is closed.
4,392,673
SEATBELT SYSTEM
Ichiro Suzuki, Nagoya; Jun Yasumatsu, Toyota; Yoshikazu
Imai, Toyota, and Masanao Motonami, Toyota, all of Japan,
assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi,
Japan
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,831
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 5, 1979, 54-
138763[U]
Int. a.3 B60R 21/02
U.S. O. 280—804 10 Oaims
1. A seatbelt system for an automotive vehicle having a door
and an occupant restraining webbing, said seatbelt system
comprising:
a raised door arm structure on the inside of the door, said
arm structure protruding inwardly and extending approxi-
mately from one end of the door to the other end thereof;
a longitudinally extending slit defined through the undersur-
face of said arm structure; and
belt guide means in said arm structure, said belt guide means
being movable longitudinally within said arm structure
and guiding said webbing through said slit from within
said arm structure, whereby at least a part of said webbing
guided by said belt guide means is out of sight from above
and under said arm structure.
4,392,674
ICE SKATE SCABBARD
Marc A. Evon, 4070 Kennedy Dr. E., Windsor, Ontario, Canada
(N9G 1X8)
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 89,542, Oct. 29, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,398
Oaims priority, application Canada, Apr. 2, 1979, 324614
Int. 0.3 A63C i/12
U.S. O. 280—825 8 Oaims
9. A webbing retractor for winding an occupant restraining
webbing in a seatbelt system for protecting an occupant in an
emergency of a vehicle, comprising:
(a) a frame secured to a center pillar of the vehicle;
(b) a takeup shaft pivotally supported on said frame for
winding one end of said occupant restraining webbing;
(c) a first spiral spring secured at one end thereof to said
takeup shaft;
(d) a ratchet wheel pivotally supported on said frame and
secured thereto with the other end of said first spiral
spring;
(e) a second spiral spring being stronger in bias than said first
spiral spring, secured at one end thereof to said ratchet
wheel and secured at the other end thereof to said frame;
and
(0 a locking device, part of which is disposed within a mov-
1. An ice skate scabbard comprising, in combination:
(a) two generally identical halves arranged for engaging
respective ends of an ice skate blade to provide protective
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S8S
cover of both said ends and of a substantial portion of the
runner part thereof;
(b) each of said halves comprising longitudinal, normally
horizontal channel means for receiving said runner part,
each respective channel means merging at a first end of
the respective half with an upwardly turned first end
portion, a second end portion of each half being generally
straight, each second end portion having a step-on outer
surface and two exterior side walls, and a face wall facing
away from the respective first end and adapted to abut
against the face wall of the other half, each side wall
having an elongate groove-like depression extending gen-
erally parallel with said step-on surface;
(c) a pair of generally identical tension springs, each an-
chored, at a first anchor point, to one of said halves, and,
at a second anchor point, to the other one of said halves;
(d) said anchor points being each generally coincident with
the respective groove-like depression, and being spaced
from the respective face wall;
(e) said springs being each coextensive with and received in
the respective groove-like depressions of the two halves at
the respective sides of the scabbard;
(0 said springs being under tension when said face walls abut
against each other,
whereby the face walls abutting against each other, the
grooves, and the springs co-operate to maintain alignment of
the two halves.
4,392,675
CHECKBOOK COMPRISING ALTERNATE CHECK
BLANKS AND CHECK STUBS
Albert C. Winiarski, Nazareth, Pa., assignor to Christmas Oub,
Easton, Pa.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,346
Int. 0.3 B41L 1/24
U.S. O. 282—23 R 1 Oaim
il
JOHN H 3UINAN
WM P£NIU HIGHWAY
EASTON, PA
ANT SAVINGS BANK
SROOKLTN BRANCH
NEW TOflK, NE* TOOK
5600-0776
No 0003
TMSITCH
WLMCt
ocnaiT
OeXJCTlCN
fSi'D
■:&L0O>iO7 7Li: o?i<, i <)■.•-
"^mmmmm^
NOT NCGOTiABLE
1. A checkbook comprising a cover, alternate check blanks,
and check stubs of equal width, said check blanks removably
attached and said check stubs fixedly attached at their left-
hand end to said cover and to a backing material which extends
beyond the right-hand edge of said check blanks and check
stubs a distance approximately equal to the width of said check
blanks, said check blanks being provided with indicia to ac-
commodate the date, payee, the amount of the check in nu-
meric and language form and the payor's signature, as well as
optional information, said check stubs being provided with a
pressure sensitive coating thereon, optional information on
each said check stub duplicating said optional information on
said check blank positioned immediately above said check
stub, a darkened area immediately below the indicia for said
payor's signature on the check blank immediately above said
check stub, whereby said payor's signature is rendered illegible
on said check stub, and indicia identifying and providing space
for, in descending order, balance forward, the numeric amount
of the check immediately above said check stub, the balance,
deposit, deduction and balance forward, and a blank area on
said check stub immediately below the indicia on said check
blank immediately above said check stub accommodating the
date, payor, and amount of said check in language form, a
plurality of check ordering forms of the same size as said check
blanks for ordering individual truncated checks retained by the
financial institution on which said checks are drawn, remov-
ably attached at their left-hand end to said cover, each said
form having indicia to accommodate multiple truncated check
orders, said upper side of said backing material being provided
with indicia for a check register and said backing material
being folded at the right-hand edge of said check blanks,
whereby said backing material may be readily inserted be-
tween a check stub and the check blank thereunder so as to
prevent writing from appearing on other check stubs thereun-
der while a check blank and check stub above said backing
material is being filled in.
4,392,676
HOSE HANDLING DEVICE
Robert T. Jones, Morrisville, Pa., and Martin B. Harrison,
Trenton, N.J., assignors to Goodall Rubber Company, Tren-
ton, N.J.
FUed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 350,812
Int. 0.3 F16L i/OO, 27/00, 11/00
U.S. O. 285—61 8 Oaima
1. A hose handling device comprising:
a fitting adapted to be secured to one end of a hose having a
peripheral groove in its exterior surface;
a ring mounted in said groove for relative rotational move-
ment with respect to said fitting; and
an eye adapted to be engaged by a hook fixedly secured to
said ring.
4,392,677
CONNECTING DEVICE FOR PNEUMATIC APPARATUS
Pierre Hardouin, Nanterre, France, assignor to La Telemeca-
nique Electrique, France
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,963
Oaims priority, application France, Nov. 30, 1979, 79 29821
Int. 0.3 F16L i9/00
U.S. O. 285—137 R 5 Oaims
1. In a connecting device for pneumatic bases each having
two opposed parallel coupling faces provided with orifices to
be associated, and a support face perpendicular to the former
and adapted to receive a removable pneumatic switching com-
1032 O.G.— 23
586
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12. 1983
ponent, two opposed coupling faces of two adjacent bases
being applied one against the other by means of screws the axes
of which are inclined with respect to these faces, and which
each have a threaded end cooperating with a nut situated in a
housing of one of the bases, a head opposite to this end bearing
on a shoulder of an adjacent base, and an intermediate portion
placed in two channel portions one in extension of the other,
these portions being situated respectively between the com-
mon plane of two coupling faces at which they op)en, and
respectively the nut and the shoulder, the improvement which
comprises the nut is constituted by an element which pivots
about an axis parallel to said coupling faces and which is placed
in a base of a first portion of channel opening at the support
face, the length of the screw being such that its head is dis-
posed below said support face when its axis is perpendicular to
the latter, and said head is pressed on a shoulder disposed in a
second portion of channel opening at the support face of an
adjacent base and in the vicinity of said support face, when the
axis of the screw is inclined, two screws being respectively
placed in two parallel planes between which open the orifices
to be connected.
pieceparts being joined by sUding a swaging die over the out-
side of said collar which die uniformly extrudes the metal of
said collar and reduces the outside diameter and the collar wall
thickness of the first piecepart as said die slides from said
compression relief end toward said one end of said collar, said
first and second interlocking means mating and meshing to-
gether in close and intimate metal-to-metal contact when said
collar is reduced in diameter by the extruding metal of said
collar, said annular interlocking means on said collar initially
pivoting and canting into the annular interlocking member on
said second piecepart means responsive to sliding of said swag-
ing die and thereafter forming said intimate contact.
4^92,679
BEEHIVE CLAMPING AND TRANSFER DEVICE
Walter P. Barnes, 671 Hemlock St., Macon, Ga. 31201, and
Carlo Emilio, Jr., 4070 Atwood Dr., Macon, Ga. 31204
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,759
Int. a.^ AOIK 51/00; B66C 1/16
U.S. a. 294—15 12 Qaims
432,678
END FimNGS FOR FLEXIBLE HOSES
Rudolph A. Adamczyk, Ludlow, Mass., assignor to Titeflex
Corporation, Springfield, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 49,645, Jun. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,341
Int. a.3 F16L 33/20
U.S. a. 285—256 3 Claims
lO Ad c
"22!///^^/////^
26
1. An end fitting for flexible polytetrafluoroethylene hoses,
said end fitting being made of two integral metal piecepart
means, a first of said piecepart means having an initial cylindri-
cal form of a collar means having a first and substantially
annular interlocking shoulder means of relatively small inside
diameter formed around an internal surface near one end
thereof, said collar having a smooth and unbroken inside diam-
eter extending from said annular shoulder means throughout a
middle region of said collar with a second inside diameter
which is larger than said small inside diameter, said inside
diameter of said middle region snugly receiving the outside
diameter of said hose, a compression relief end region on an
opposite end of said collar having an inside diameter which is
larger than the second inside diameter, said end region having
an inside diameter which is larger than the outside diameter of
said hose, a tapered region joining said end region and said
middle region, and said second piecepart means being in the
form of an insert means having a second and substantially
annular interlocking groove means formed around an external
surface thereof, said second piecepart having an abutment wall
on one side of said annular groove interlocking means, the
second piecepart means having an end on the opposite side of
said second annular groove interlocking means with an outside
diameter which slips into the inside diameter of said hose, a
series of annular serrations formed along the length of said one
side, each annular serration having a vertical wall on a side
nearest said second annular interlocking means, each serration
having a sloping surface beginning at the top of said vertical
wall and tapering downwardly with a progressively smaller
outside diameter to the root of the vertical wall on the adjacent
serration, the middle region of said collar means being reduced
in diameter to capture said flexible hose between said collar
and the serrated end of said second piecepart means which
slips into said hose, said collar sliding over said hose until said
one end comes into contact with said abutment wall, said two
1. A device for securely maintaining beehive elements to-
gether during transit, including top and bottom elements with
a hive body element therebetween, comprising:
a clamp for each of at least two respective opposite sides of
the beehive, each clamp including;
a pair of hooks for respectively hooking onto the top and
bottom beehive elements;
a chain connected to one of the hooks; and
a tumbuckle interconnecting the chain to the other hook,
the tumbuckle of each clamp being adjustable to securely
clamp the beehive elements together and prevent relative
movement therebetween; and
said hooks respectively hooking onto the top beehive ele-
ment on each clamped side include a lift mounting portion
engageable with lift means for lifting said beehive ele-
ments during transit thereof.
4,392,680
SPREADER SAFETY DEVICE
Hunter Wolfe, 121 Yardley Ave., Fallsington, Pa. 19054
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 110,815, Jan. 10, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 353,943
Int. a.3 B66C 1/34; F16G 11/00
U.S. a. 294—78 R 5 Claims
1. A safety collar for use in combination with a plurality of
spreader cables having object gripping members disposed on
their terminal ends:
said safety collar being formed as an annular member formed
as generally truncated cones flaring outwardly towards
both ends, said safety collar being freely slideable over
said plurality of cables but sized sufficiently small so that
it will not pass over said object gripping members;
a jamb block centrally disposed in said safety collar, said
jamb block having a plurality of openings corresponding
in ntunber to the number of said cables, each of said open-
ings having a diameter of sufficient size to permit said
cables to freely slide therethrough; and
upon the separation of said plurality of cables, when said
JULY 12, I9i
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
587
gripping means are attached to an object, said safety collar
being urged upwardly along said cables and when said
gripping members are not attached to an object, said
collar being urged downwardly by the action of gravity to
prevent said cables and said gripping members from
swinging.
4,392,681
ROTATING BODY SYMPATHETIC VIBRATION
I ABSORBER
Erwin Raquet, Witten, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Fried,
Krupp Huttenwerke AG, Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,810
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 2,
1979, 2922585
Int. a.3 B60B 77/00, F16F 15/22; F16H 55/14
U.S. a. 295—7 4 Qaims
ses of the vibrations of the individual plates differ, in such
a manner, with respect to one another, that the damping
material is distorted as strongly as possible within its
elastic limit.
4,392,682
EXPANSIBLE AND RETRACTABLE VEHICLE BODY
Kasper Norkus, Jr., 10930 S. Harlem Ave., Worth, III. 60482
Filed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,883
Int. a.3 B62D 33/08
U.S. a. 296—26 15 Qaims
3. An expansible and contractable trailer body which com-
prises a lower main body with a bottom floor, upright side and
front end walls, a rear doorway and an open top, a roof top
body telescoped over the open top of the lower body, means
raising and lowering said top body on said lower body, an
overhead door closing said doorway, and telescoped door
guiding tracks on said top and lower bodies whereby said door
will close the entire doorway regardless of variations in the
height thereof caused by the raising and lowering of said top
body.
4,392,683
RETRACTABLE ASHTRAY, PARTICULARLY FOR
MOTOR VEHICLES
Alberto Bassi, Turin, Italy, assignor to ITW Fastex Italia S.p.A.,
Turin, Italy
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,275
Qaims priority, application Italy, Sep. 8, 1980, 24538 A/80
Int. Q.^ B60M 3/12
VS. Q. 296—37.9 5 Claims
1. A vibration absorber for damping the determining reso-
nance vibrations of rotating bodies through creating sympathe-
tic vibrations to sympathetically dampen the wheel vibrations,
in particular rail wheels, comprising:
several plates forming a unit which establish a mass;
intermediate layers of compressible damping material sepa-
rating said plates from each other so that said damping
material is compressed during vibration of said plates;
means connecting said plates with the rotating body at at
least one point; so that the plates vibrate like the tines of a
tuning fork and a vibration nodal point is established at
said connecting means and
an intermediate layer of damping material between said
plates over a large remaining area thereof and coupled by
connecting means to the rotating body;
the geometric dimensions of said plates and said intermediate
layers and the Shore hardness of said damping material of
the intermediate layers are selected such that all plates
oscillate at substantially the same natural frequency of the
rotating body to be damped, and the amplitudes and pha-
1. A retractable ashtray, particularly for motor vehicles,
characterized in that its release mechanism is integrally made
of plastic material and comprises a first and a second wall
hinged to each other along a common edge by a thinning of
their thickness at said edge, and a third wall integral with said
second wall and opposite thereto, said third wall bearing a pin
588
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
on which an idle pawl is mounted, said flrst wall having arcu-
ate guide ribs thereon which are concentric to the hinge axis,
and are intended to guide the pawl during relative movements
of the two walls hinged to each other when the ashtray is
moved from its retracted out-of-use position to its extracted
in-use position and vice versa, and to provide a stop abutment
for the pawl at said two ashtray positions as well as a hook, and
said second wall also bearing a hook intended to engage said
hook of said first wall, a spring being interposed between said
first and said third wall which urges said two hooks toward
engagement.
4^2,685
COMBINED LAWN CHAIR AND TABLE RECLINER
Franz X. Leonhart, 8385 Harburg, near 8385 Pilsting, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 228,160
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 28,
1980, 3002926
Int. a.3 A47B 85/02: A47C 7/50
U.S. a. 297—119 3 Claims
23 30 28 ,30
432,684
VEHICLE BODY STRUCTURE
Seikichi Yoshitsugu, Sayama, and Minoni Shimatsu, Koganei,
both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company Limited,
Yokohama, Japan
Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,031
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, 55-27020
Int. a.^ B62D 25/02
U.S. a. 296—185 3 Oaims
1. An adjustable recliner chair with a footrest, comprising a
pair of longitudinally extending spaced side members (1) hav-
ing inwardly facing inner surfaces forming a base frame, an
adjustable chair assembly (10,15) connected to one end of said
side members, a footrest portion (23), vertically adjustable
means (24-32) connected with said side members in front of
said chair assembly and with said footrest portion, two longitu-
dinal spaced grooves (20,21) on each inner surface extending
from substantially in front of said chair assembly to adjacent
the opposite end of said side members (1), a cross groove (22)
connecting the two longitudinal spaced grooves in front of the
ends thereof adjacent said opposite end of the side members,
said vertically adjustable means (24-32) having lower ends,
and pivot studs (31,32) protruding from the lower ends of said
vertically adjustable means and engaged in said grooves on the
inner surfaces, whereby said vertically adjustable means are
longitudinally displaceable on said side members for vertically
adjusting said footrest portion to form a raised table.
1. A vehicle body structure, comprising:
a pair of rear wheel housing each having inner and outer
housing half portions, and inner and outer flange portions
respectively extending radially outwardly from the outer
circumference of said housing half portions, said inner and
outer flange portions being integral with said housing half
portions and connected to each other for forming in com-
bination said rear wheel housing; said outer flange portion
being bent in a lateral direction of said rear wheel housing;
a pair of rear pillar inner panels each having a lower end'
portion connected to each of said outer flange portions;
and
a pair of side sills extending in parallel with each other and
projecting forwardly from said rear wheel housings, re-
spectively, each of said side sills having inner and outer
side sill half portions, and inner and outer flange portions
respectively extending upwardly from the upper ends of
said side sill half portions, said inner and outer flange
portions being integral with said side sill half portions and
connected to each other for forming in combination said
side sill, said inner and outer flange portions of said side
sill extending in longitudinal directions of said side sill to
be bent in a lateral direction of said side sill in longitudinal
alignment with said inner flange portion of said rear wheel
housing for sandwiching said inner flange portion of said
rear wheel housing therebetween.
4,392,686
ADJUSTABLE OFFICE CHAIR
Herbert Beer, Wendelstein, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Steifensand Sitzmobel- und Tischfabrik, Inh., Fed. Rep. of
Germany
per No. PCT/EP80/00042, § 371 Date Mar. 4, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 4, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00044, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 22, 1981
PCT Filed Jul. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 243,951
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 6,
1979, 2927377
Int. a.3 A47C 1/027
U.S. a. 297—376 7 Qaims
1. Seating furniture, in particular an adjustable office chair.
July 12, 19
!f
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
589
with a support structure flxedly attached to a foot stand, a seat
carrier and a back rest, wherein at least the inclination of two
of the aforementioned parts is variable with respect to each
other and may be immobilized in the position desired by means
of plates, separated by intermediate shims, and locked by fric-
tion, wherein the frictional lock is established with the aid of a
clamp bolt and the plates are equipped each with an elongated
hole surrounding the clamp bolt, wherein further a relative
displacement occurs between the plates and the intermediate
shims on the one hand and the clamp bolt on the other, during
establishment and release of a clamping position, and wherein
further an actuating lever capable of being moved by a spring
assembly into a position corresponding to the clamped posi-
tion, is provided, characterized in that the spring assembly
consists of plate springs surrounding the clamp bolt, said spring
assembly is supported between a thrust bearing of the clamp
bolt on a first side and one of the parts to be adjusted with
respect to each other and clamped against each other on a
second side, thereby acting through said thrust bearing directly
on the clamp bolt and displacing the latter into the clamping
position, actuation of the lever moves the clamp bolt, by direct
action through said thrust bearing, against the springs, from the
clamping position into the release position.
4,392,687
LIFTING AND TILTING TRAILER
Denis O'Conneil, Mallow, Ireland, assignor to Institute for
Industrial Research & Standards, Dublin, Ireland
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,360
Oaims priority, application Ireland, May 21, 1980, 1053/80;
Apr. 8, 1981, 792/81
1 1 Int. a.3 B60P ]/34
U.S. a. 298-L5 12 Claims
4,392,688
CROP OR PRODUCT CARRIER
James A. E. S. Mclntyre, Wythall EsUte, Wythall, Walford,
Ross-on-Wye, Herefordshire HR9 5SD, England
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,812
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 4, 1980,
8025368
Int. Q.' B60P 1/16
U.S. Q. 298—22 R 6 Qaims
y\
1. A crop or product carrier comprising a container having
side walls, end walls and a base, at least one fluid powered ram
forming part of a lifting and lowering mechanism enabling the
base to be raised and to be lowered progressively with respect
to the side walls and end walls as the crop or product quantity
increases within the container, a pivot at one end of the con-
tainer enabling the base, side walls and end walls to pivot about
said one end to tip the container for unloading, the end wall at
said one end of the container being operable to provide an
outlet opening for discharge of the crop or product during
unloading, locking means for securing the base in the lowered
position within the container, the means for raising and lower-
ing the base also acting to tip the container about the pivot for
unloading when the locking means secures the base in the
lowered position.
4,392,689
PAVEMENT MILLING APPARATUS
Robert H. Moore, 231 Hamlet St., Los Angeles, Calif. 90042,
and Larry O. Engels, 90564 Link Dr., Eugene, Oreg. 97402
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,710
Int. Q.J E21C 47/00
U.S. Q. 299—39 14 Qaims
f»
1. A trailer comprising:
a container;
a pair of co-operating scissors lifts laterally spaced apari for
reception of the container therebetween, each scissors lift
comprising a first and second support arm pivotally con-
nected intermediate their ends to define a scissors pivot;
means for moving the support arms relative to each other to
of>erate the scissors lift;
a pair of wheel axles, the wheel axles being respectively
connected to the first support arms at their rear ends;
a mounting means for pivotal connection of the front end of
the first arms to the container, the mounting means defin-
ing longitudinally spaced apart tilt and lift pivot positions
for the container relative to the scissors pivot; and
engagement means adjacent the rear end of the second arms
to slidably engage the container, the engagement means
being disengageable from the container when the first
arms are in the tilt position.
1. In equipment for removing pavement, the combination
comprising
(a) a vehicle adapted to be driven over the pavement,
(b) milling rotor means and drive means therefor, the milling
rotor means including cutters projecting at the periphery
of the rotor means for cutting the pavement as the rotor
means is driven in rotation, and
(c) structure on the vehicle carrying the milling rotor means
for adjustable bodily displacement relative to the vehicle
and to selected positions wherein vehicle weight is ex-
590
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
erted downwardly on the milling rotor means during
cutting of pavement,
(d) the vehicle being oriented for generally longitudinally
forward or rearward travel, said rotor means including
two rotors at the same side of the vehicle and generally in
alignment with one another forwardly and rearwardly,
(e) said structure including first actuator means operatively
connected with the rotor means to displace the rotor
means generally downwardly relative to the vehicle,
(0 said structure including linkage means suspending the
rotor means for downward and forward swinging in re-
sponse to said operation of the first actuator means,
(g) said structure including primary member means respec-
tively suspending the rotor means for adjustable lateral
displacement relative to the vehicle, and at the same side
thereof,
(h) and second actuator means operatively connected with
said primary member means to effect said adjustable lat-
eral displacement thereof relative to the vehicle.
4,392,690
QUICK RELEASE WHEEL MOUNT
Raymond A. Anderson, 360 Capital Ave., Battle Creek, Mich.
49017
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 242,015
Int. a.3 B60B 37/00
U.S. a. 301—121 6 Gaims
1. A quick release attachment for the wheels of collapsible
chairs comprising:
a body member attachable to the frame of a chair in place of
a wheel axle,
an axle element having one end removably extendable
through the existing axle hole of the frame and into said
body member and having an annular groove adjacent said
one end arranged to be located within said body member
when the latter is attached to said frame,
a lock support member having an externally threaded end
engagable in a tapped hole provided therefor in said body
member in transversely intersecting relation to the groove
in said axle element,
a lock pin slidably positioned in said support member and
extending through the opposite end of said support mem-
ber,
a spring in said support member biasing one end of said pin
into said groove in said axle element,
a finger grip element connected to said lock pin externally of
said support member,
said axle element having a head on the opposite end thereof
from said body member engagable with one one end of a
wheel of the wheelchair,
said axle element further defining an external groove spaced
from said head and adapted to receive a snap ring to
retainingly engage the opposite end of a hub positioned
against said head.
432,691
DUAL-aRCUTT PRESSURE CONTROL VALVES
Bernd Schopper, Frankfurt am Main; Derek Lowe, Glashuetten;
Hans-Dieter Reinartz, Frankfurt am Main, and Peter Tan-
dler, Falkenstein, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,250
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1980, 3002135
Int. a.3 B60T 11/34
U.S. a. 303—6 C 21 Qaims
1. A dual-circuit pressure control valve comprising:
two control pistons disposed in a housing in a parallel side-
by-side relationship, each of said two pistons being associ-
ated with a different one of two brake circuits; and
an arrangement associated with said housing to apply a
preloading force to each of said two pistons such that,
upon failure of one of said two circuits, said preloading
force on that one of said two pistons associated with the
other of said two circuits is increased, said arrangement
including
a spring disposed adjacent at least one of said two pistons
to generate said two preloading forces,
means disposed in an operative relationship with said
spring and at least one of said two pistons to apply each
of said two preloading force to a different one of said
two pistons, and
a carrier bridge coupled to and in contact with each of
said two pistons in a non-tilting manner to allow a slight
relative movement between said two pistons when both
of said circuits are operative to adjust the position of
said means to enable synchronizing each point of appli-
cation of said two preloading forces.
4,392,692
SEAT SUPPORT SLIDE TRACK STRUCTURE
Ignaz Vogel, Kleinsteinbacherstr.42, Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of
Germany (7500)
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,515
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 31,
1980, 3029127
Int. a.3 F16C 29/10; F16B 7/10, 21/12
U.S. O. 308—6 R 9 Qaims
1. A slide track structure especially for supporting passenger
seats in different positions, said slide track structure comprising
two tracks movable relative to each other in longitudinal direc-
tion and having opposed surfaces; guide strips disposed on the
surfaces of said tracks facing each other; elastomer support
means disposed between at least one of said guide strips and the
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S91
associated track for resiliently supporting said guide strip on
said track, said guide strips being wavoi to define therebe-
tween a passage of essentially circular cross-section, and at
least two balk disposed in said passage for supporting one of
said tracks on the other, said one track being a square tube and
the other being a U-track received within said square tube so as
to engage said guide strips, said elastomer support means, said
balls and the other U-track enclosed within said square track to
prevent rattling when no load is supported by said slide track
structure, said square tube having at least one slot formed in its
bottom side and said U-track having connected thereto a
mounting base, which extends through said slot in said square
tube to permit movement of said square tube relative to said
U-track when said mounting base is mounted on a support
structure.
4,392,693
REDUNDANT ACOVE ELECTROMAGNETIC BEARING
Helmut Habermann, and Maurice Brunet, both of Vernon,
France, assignors to Societe Europenne de Propulsion, Ver-
non, France
Hied Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,265
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 9, 1981, 81 04646
Int. Q.3 F16C 39/00
U.S. Q. 308—10 6 Qaims
i*: .,
I
— ^+f-'J
4,392,694
CENTER BEARING BRACKET
James T. Reynolds, Toledo, Ohio, assignor to Dana Corporation,
Toledo, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 17,402, Mar. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Not. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,358
Int. Q.3 F16C 27/06
U.S. Q. 308—184 R 7 Qaims
Uj
1. A redundant active electromagnetic bearing for support-
ing a movable member, comprising:
a first set of electromagnet coils wound on an armature
having double-pole parts and a second set of electromag-
net coils would on said armature, a first and a second
detection device for sensing the position of the movable
member, a first control circuit connected to said first
detection device and capable of being connected to said
first set of coils for controlling the supply of said first set
of coils in response to signals delivered by the first detec-
tion device in order to keep the movable member in a
predetermined position, a second control circuit con-
nected to said second detection device and capable of
being connected to said second set of coils for controlling
the supply of said second set of coils in response to signals
delivered by the second detection device in order to keep
the movable member in a predetermined position, and
switch-over means being provided for connecting either
the first set of coils with the first control circuit or the
second set of coils with the second control circuit in
response to a control signal, wherein the first and the
second sets of coils are so placed on said armature that on
each double-pole part of said armature are wound one coil
of the first set and one coil of the second set and that the
successive coils of the first set are all wound in the same
direction whereas the coils of the second set which dupli-
cate the coils of the first set are alternately wound in the
same direction and in opposite directions with respect to
the corresponding coils of the first set.
1. A center bearing assembly for resiliently supporting from
a rigid support a driven shaft which may be subjected to radial
forces and to axial forces in at least one predetermined direc-
tion comprising a bearing having a rotatable inner race engag-
ing said shaft, a non-rotatable outer race and a plurality of
bearing elements between said inner and outer races, a resilient
buslyng mounting said outer race, said bushing having first and
second sides and an outer edge, a bracket engaging at least a
portion of said outer edge and having integral lips engaging
said sides adjacent said outer edge, said integral lips retaining
said bushing in said bracket, means for mounting said bracket
on said rigid support, said bracket further having a flange
positioned from said bushing side a predetermined small spac-
ing, said bushing side being unrestrained adjacent said flange,
whereby during normal operation said bushing side is spaced
from said flange and drive train vibrations are not transmitted
to said flange and whereby upon axial movement of such shaft,
said bushing side is free to move through such spacing and
against said flange to limit axial movement of such shaft.
4,392,695
BEARING
Maurice E. Miller, Stratton, Nebr., assignor to Miller Manufac-
turing Company, Grand Island, Nebr.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,240
Int a.3 F16C 33/78
U.S. Q. 308—187.2 8 Qaims
1. A bearing, comprising,
an inner bearing ring having a central opening for receiving
a shaft therein, said inner ring having inner and outer
surfaces and opposite sides,
an outer bearing ring spaced from said inner ring and having
inner and outer surfaces and opposite sides,
a plurality of spaced apart ball bearings between said inner
and outer bearing rings,
a first ring-shaped seal between said inner and outer bearing
rings at one side thereof,
a second ring-shaped seal between said inner and outer
bearing rings at the other side thereof,
592
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
said first and second seals embracing and frictionally engag-
ing the outer surface of said inner bearing ring,
a first ring-shaped shroud cap secured to said outer bearing
ring at one side thereof and embracing said first seal, said
first shroud cap and said outer bearing ring defining a first
annular groove,
a second ring-shaped shroud cap secured to said outer bear-
ing ring at the other side thereof and embracing said
second seal, said second shroud cap and said outer bearing
ring defining a second annular groove,
and a compressible sealant material in said first and second
grooves,
said sealant material substantially filling said grooves and
being compressible against said shroud cap to prevent dust
from entering the interior of the bearing between said first
and second seal means and said bearing rings.
4,392,696
DRAWERS
Leon G, Litchfield, and Terence Hardy, both of Helper, England,
assignors to L.B. (Plastics) Limited, Belper, England
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,090
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 2, 1979,
7938123
lot a.' A47B 88/00
U.S. a. 312—330 R 13 Qaims
extending longitudinally of said body near the outer edges
thereof, and along the entire length of said body;
an opening in said body between said bosses near one end
thereof for receiving a fastener to secure the drawer stop
to said drawer and provide a pivot axis for said drawer
stop;
said drawer stop being rotatable about said axis with only
the curved portions of said bosses engaging the drawer
surface whereby said drawer stop can be snuggly affixed
to said drawer without loosening said drawer stop when it
is rotated between the operative drawer stopping position
and the inoperative drawer removal position.
4,392,698
INDUSTRIAL CRANE WITH ROTARY ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR
Lex A. Mellott, Warfordburg, Pa., assignor to JLG Industries
Inc., McConnellsburg, Pa.
FUed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,389
Int. a.3 HOIR 39/02
U.S. a. 339—10 12 Qaims
1. A drawer having longitudinal tracks in the opposite side
walls thereof, a pair of members mounted one at each of the
rear comers of the drawer and moveable between extended
and retracted positions, said members being arranged to extend
across the rear ends of the respective tracks in their operative
positions and being arranged to retract clear of the rear ends of
the tracks in their inoperative positions, and rotary actuating
means accessible from within the drawer and operable to effect
movement of said members between said positions, said actuat-
ing means comprising a stud device having a head adapted to
seat against the inner surface of the rear wall of the drawer and
provided with a formation engageable by an actuating member
or tool to enable rotation of the actuating device from within
the drawer, a body portion rotatably received in an aperture in
said rear wall, and an eccentric pin projecting from said body
portion into engagement with the associated member to impari
sliding movement thereto on rotation of said stud device, and
said actuating means incorporating over-centre locking means
operable to retain said members in their extended operative
positions until released by rotation of the actuating means.
4,392,697
DRAWER STOP
WiUlam L. Konsens, 1736 KadweU Way, El C^on, Calif. 92021
FUed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,882
Int a.3 A47B 88/00
UJS. a. 312—348 2 Claims
1. A one piece drawer stop for preventing accidental re-
moval of a drawer from a drawer receptacle, comprising:
a substantially flat body of relatively stiff material with some
resiliency, including a pair of elongated curved bosses
1. A vehicle comprising:
(a) a chassis, an upper works, means mounting the upper
works for rotation on the chassis about a vertical axis, and
means for rotating said upper works,
(b) cylindrical electrical connector means for tranferring
electrical energy between a fixed element and a rotary
element and including a fixed part, a rotary part, and
axially spaced conductor bands and contacts on said parts,
(c) means mounting said connector means on said chassis
remote from the axis of rotation of the upper works,
(d) means for rotating said rotary part of said connector
means from said upper works,
(e) flexible electrical conductors extending through a hollow
shaft and coimected to said connector means and to elec-
trical means on said upper works.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
593
4,392,699
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
Bemhard Weingartner, Feldkirch, Austria, assignor to Neutrik
Aktiengeseilschaft, Liechtenstein
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,660
Claims priority, application Austria, Mar. 19, 1980, 1496/80
Int. a.i HOIR 13/652
U.S. a. 339—14 P 11 Qaims
1 ' '-"'.^
— ""• ' ^ I,
20 6 7
13 IV
1. An electrical connector assembly particularly adapted for
attachment to the chassis of an appliance comprising: a housing
defining a generally longitudinal axis; an insertion piece having
therein electrical contact means for effecting desired electrical
connection, said insertion piece being received within said
housing from one end thereof; flange means on one end of said
insertion piece adapted to engage said housing to act as a stop
member when said insertion piece is placed within said hous-
ing; a slotted recess extending transversely to said longitudinal
axis defined in said insertion piece a distance from said flange
means; a locking lug pivotally mounted within said recess; a
bore extending through said insertion piece into cooperative
relationship with said locking lug to enable a tool to be inserted
therein for engagement with said locking lug; engagement
means on said locking lug adapted to enable said locking lug to
be engaged by said tool to pivot said locking lug between a
locking position to effect locking engagement between said
insertion piece and said housing and a nonlocking position
releasing said locking engagement; and shoulder means defined
on the interior of said housing and spaced from said one end
thereof an interval corresponding to the distance between said
slotted recess and said flange means, said shoulder means being
adapted to be engaged by said locking lug when said locking
lug is in said locking position.
4,392,700
CAM ACTUATED ZERO INSERTION FORCE
MOTHER/DAUGHTER BOARD CONNECTOR
Robert L. Showman, Hershey, and Robert N. Weber, Hummels-
town, both of Pa., assignors to AMP Incorporated, Harris-
burg, Pa.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,332
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/629
U.S. a. 339—17 M 13 Oaims
1. A zero insertion force connector assembly for mounting a
daughter circuit board on a mother circuit board comprising:
a receptacle having a housing defining an elongated daugh-
ter board receiving cavity with a closed bottom, a carrier
block movably mounted in said cavity, cam means
mounted in said housing and adapted to move said carrier
block with respect to the bottom of said cavity, a plurality
of first terminals fixedly mounted in the bottom of said
cavity, each said first terminal having a pin portion ex-
tending through the bottom and a blade portion extending
into said cavity, a like plurality of second terminals
mounted in said carrier block each having one end in
constant wiping engagement with a respective blade por-
tion of a respective first terminal, and an opposite second
end adapted to make wiping engagement with a contact of
said daughter board.
4,392,701
TAP CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
Charles H. Weidler, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to AMP Incorpo-
rated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 170,199, Jul. 16, 1980. This
application Not. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,346
Int. a.3 HOIR 11/32. 13/512
U.S. Q. 339—17 R 8 Claims
1. A tap connector assembly for making tap connections to
selected conductors in a multi-conductor cable, the tap con-
nector assembly being of the type comprising first and second
standard cable connectors, each cable connector comprising
an insulating housing having a mating face and a rearward
face, a plurality of cable connector terminals in the housing,
the cable connector terminals being arranged in two parallel
rows which extend between the endwalls of the housing, the
cable connectors being in spaced-apart back-to-back relation-
ship with their rearward faces in opposed relationship, the
corresponding cable connector terminals in the first and sec-
ond cable connectors being connected to each other by first
conductors which extend between, and have their ends con-
nected to, the corresponding cable connector terminals, at least
one modular jack, a selected plurality of the first conductors
being connected intermediate their ends to jack conductors in
594
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
the modular jack, the tap connector assembly being character-
ized in that:
the standard cable connectors are located along the opposite
side edges of a circuit board, the first conductors being
wires which extend across one surface of the circuit
board,
a plurality of insulation displacement terminals are mounted
in the circuit board, each insulation displacement terminal
having at least one wire connecting portion having a
wire-receiving slot therein and having a solder post ex-
tending from the wire connecting portion, the wire con-
necting portion extending normally from the one surface
of the circuit board and the solder posts extending
through holes in the circuit board and from the other
surface of the circuit board,
the modular jack being mounted on the one surface of the
circuit board adjacent to one of the end edges thereof, the
jack conductors having solder post portions extending
from the housing in the modular jack through holes in the
circuit board and beyond the other surface of the circuit
board, a plurality of circuit
board conductors which extend between the solder post
portions of the jack conductors and the solder post por-
tions of the insulation displacement terminals, the circuit
board conductors being soldered to the post portions, and
the selected first conductors having intermediate portions
thereof inserted into the wire receiving slots of the insula-
tion displacement terminals whereby,
upon coupling standard cable connectors on the ends of cable
sections to the first and second standard cable connectors in
the tap connector assembly and thereafter plugging a modular
plug on the end of a tap cable into the modular jack, the con-
ductors in the tap cable are connected to preselected cable
conductors.
4,392,702
SHORTING JUMPER
William B. Walkup, Southboro, Mass., assignor to Ark-les Cor-
poration, Watertown, Mass.
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,435
Int. aj HOIR 31/08
U.S. a. 339—19 2 Qaims
S '>C
1. A jumper adapted to electrically connect adjacent ones of
an array of uninsulated conductive substantially rigid vertical
pins, said jumjjer being formed of resilient, electrically conduc-
tive sheet material and comprising
a generally vertical plate portion having a free upper length-
wise edge and two generally vertical side edges,
a pin-retaining spring portion integrally connected length-
wise to said plate portion and comprising
two cooperating pin-gripping portions each having a
length adapted to span at least the greater part of two
adjacent pins to be connected, a first said pin-gripping
portion being integrally connected lengthwise with said
plate portion remote from its said free upper edge, the
second said pin-gripping portion being spaced width-
wise from said first pin-gripping portion, a neck portion
having a length adapted to pass between two adjacent
pins to be connected, said neck portion being integrally
connected lengthwise to each said pin-gripping portion.
said jumper further providing position stabilizing means
comprising two arms,
each said arm being integrally connected to a said side
edge of said plate portion and bent toward said second
pin-gripping portion at an angle of about ninety degrees
to said plate portion,
said arms being lengthwise spaced apart by a spacing
adapted to clear the outer surfaces of two adjacent pins
to be connected,
said arms extending widthwise from at least about the inner
surface of said first pin-gripping portion to at least the
junction of said second pin-gripping portion and said neck
portion,
whereby said arms stabilize said jumper to resist tilting
thereof and to prevent shorting other adjacent conductive
pins.
4,392,703
ELECTRICAL CONDUCTOR HAVING AN INTEGRAL
ELECTRICAL CONTACT
James R. Hall, Bainbridge, and William P. Whallon, Jr., Una-
dilla, both of N.Y., assignors to The Bendix Corporation,
Southfield, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 90,198, Nov. 1, 1979, abandoned, which is a
division of Ser. No. 890,339, Mar. 27, 1978, Pat. No. 4,206,958.
This application Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,134
Int. a.^ HOIR 13/28, 11/11
U.S. a. 339—49 R 6 Qaims
1. An electrical cable assembly of the type having wire
strands formed into a bundle for releasable connection to an-
other electrical contact formed of a bundle of wires having
angled ends, comprising:
a plurality of elongated electrical conductors (500) cf the
type consisting of a strand (510) of conductive material
surrounded by dielectric material (520), each strand hav-
ing a conductive end portion (540) thereof exposed to
extend from the dielectric material, the dielectric material
otherwise electrically insulating each of the conductive
strands (510) from one another;
protective means (572) medially disposed about the plurality
of electrical conductors (500) for securing the electrical
conductors into a multi-conductor cable, an insulated end
portion (512) of each electrical conductor (500) containing
its exposed conductive end portion (540) extending from
said protective means;
a cable-like assembly (500A) comprising the insulated end
portions (512) of the electrical conductors (500) being
gathered together; and
a sleeve (550) secured about said cable-like assembly, the
exposed conductive end portions (540) so assembled form-
ing a mateable bundle extending forwardly from the
sleeve in axially aligned, parallel relation, the end of each
conductive strand being acutely angled for mating, said
angled ends of said strands and said mateable bundles
being so configured that said mateable bundle and said
another contact can be aligned along their axes and moved
into releasable intermingled connection with the angled
ends of each bundle entering the other bundle.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
595
4,392,704
LOW INSERTION FORCE PRINTED ORCUIT CARD
CONNECTOR
Warren W. Porter, Escondido, Calif., assignor to NCR Corpora-
tion, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,100
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/62
U.S. a. 339—75 MP 9 Qaims
4. A printed circuit board connector of the end entry type
comprising:
an insulated base defining an elongated opening;
a series of resilient pins mounted in said insulated base and
deflectable at one end within said insulated base, said
series of pins positioned along said elongated opening;
a carrier slidably mounted to said insulated base within said
defined elongated opening, said carrier defining a slot for
receiving the edge portion of a printed circuit board;
a series of individual passageways through said insulated
base and said carrier, one end of each said passageways
connecting to a corresponding one of said resilient pins,
the other end of said passageways corresponding to an
associated edge connector on a printed circuit board; and
a series of floating conductors, one each positioned in a
passageway with one end of each conductor connectable
to an associated resilient pin and the other end connect-
able to a respective edge contact on a printed circuit board
when the printed circuit board is inserted in said carrier
and said carrier is slid into said insulated base; and
biasing means connected between said insulated base and
said carrier for sliding said carrier to an unloaded position
when the printed circuit board is removed, and for main-
taining said carrier in a loaded position when the printed
circuit board is inserted in said connector.
4,392,705
ZERO INSERTION FORCE CONNECTOR SYSTEM
Howard W. Andrews, Jr., Hershey; Timothy B. Biilman, Car-
lisle, and Robert F. Cobaugh, Elizabethtown, all of Pa., as-
signors to AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,333
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/029
U.S. a. 339—75 MP 2 Qaims
1. A connector system for electrically connecting a circuit
card to a circuit board, comprising:
a. an elongated lower member made from insulating material
and having a plurality of spaced apart passages extending
vertically therethrough, said passages being arranged in a
line running lengthwise of the lower member;
b. a plurality of conductive contact elements positioned in
the passages with the elements having an upper contact
surface extending above the top surface of the lower
member and a lower end extending below said member for
insertion into a printed circuit board for making electrical
contact with conductive traces thereon;
c. an elongated upper member made from insulating material
and having an elongated rib depending from and extend-
ing lengthwise of the underside thereof with the rib hav-
ing a plurality of spaced apart lateral openings along one
side, further said member having a plurality of passages
extending vertically therethrough and into the rib inter-
secting the lateral openings therein, said upper member
further having means on the upper surface thereof for
securing a circuit card thereto with the card being on an
edge and parallel to the passages, said upper member
being received onto the top surface of the lower member
with the lateral openings being in registration with the
upper contact surfaces;
a plurality of conductive contact elements positioned in
the passages in the upper member and having card engag-
ing contact surfaces extending above the top surface
thereof for engaging conductive traces on a card which
may be positioned thereon and further having lower
contact surfaces positioned in the lateral openings in the
rib;
camming means mounted on the lower member for mov-
ing the upper member laterally on the top surface of the
lower member whereupon the
upper contact surfaces are received in the lateral openings to
engage and electrically contact the lower contact surfaces
positioned therein.
e.
4,392,706
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR WITH LATCHING MEANS
Robert W. Baker, Kenton; Leonard J. Owen, Watford, and
Reginald J. Simmons, South Harrow, all of England, assignors
to AMP Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser, No. 256,650
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 2, 1980,
8014610; Oct. 7, 1980, 8032282
Int. Q.' HOIR 13/629
U.S. Q. 339—91 R 7 Qaims
1. An electrical connector assembly comprising two housing
parts each containing one or more terminals, the housing parts
and terminals being such that the housing parts can be mated
thereby to mate the terminals contained therein, the housing
parts having interengaging latching members which provide a
force which assists in mating of the two housing parts, and
which serve to secure the housing parts together in their mated
condition, the latching members compnsing on one housing
596
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
part a ramp or ramps on each of two opposite sides of the
housing part, and on the other housing part a resihent cantile-
ver arm on each of two opposite sides of said other housing
part, each arm carrying a projection adapted and arranged to
ride over a ramp on the one housing part as the two housing
parts are mated, the ramps on the one housing part and the
projections on the arms of the other housing part having coop-
erating surfaces which engage when the housing parts are fully
mated, to prevent unmating of the housing parts, in which the
ramps are supported on the one housing part such that deflec-
tion of the arms of the other housing part towards the one
housing part when the housing parts are mated disengages the
cooperating surfaces of the ramps and projections and enables
the housing parts to be unmated without further deformation
of the arms, with the projections on the arms of the other
housing part passing under the ramps on the one housing part,
whereby the projections offer no resistance to unmating of the
housing parts.
pair including aperture means for receiving a terminal
post screw;
(c) first terminal means located on each of said fixed contacts
for electrically connecting a conductor of said security
system electrical circuit directly thereto, said first terminal
means being located on said third side of said contact
carrying member;
(d) means for mounting said contact carrying member on a
mounting surface, alternatively with said third side ex-
tending away from said mounting surface or with said
third side spaced apart from said mounting surface;
(e) a contact housing including a first side thereof and defin-
ing a plurality of contact exposing apertures located on
said first side thereof in spaced apart relationship;
(0 means for mounting said contact housing on a surface;
(g) a plurality of bifurcated spring contacts each including a
pair of resiliently flexible convexly arcuate contact points,
each contact point having a generally "U"-shaped portion
and a free end, said free end being located within said
contact housing;
(h) supporting means, included in said contact housing, for
holding each said bifurcated spring contact with said
"U"-shaped portion of each contact point protruding
outwardly from said housing through a respective one of
said contact exposing apertures to contact a respective
one of said contact surfaces; and
(i) second terminal means located on each said bifurcated
spring contact for electrically connecting a conductor of
said security system electrical circuit directly thereto.
4,392,707
TAKE-OFF CONNECTOR FOR SECURITY CIRCUIT
Thomas J. Holce, Portland, and Charles M. Huckins, Tigard,
both of Oreg., assignors to Sentroi, Inc., Portland, Oreg.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,572
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/54: G08B 13/08
U.S. a. 339—125 R 8 Claims
4,392,708
ELECTRICAL JACK
James R. Bailey, Chicago, and Kurt Lutzenberger, Arlington
Heights, both of 111., assignors to Switchcraft, Inc., Chicago,
lU.
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,788
Int. a.3 HOIR 13/50. 17/18
U.S. a. 339—182 R 6 Oaims
1. A take-off connector for use in a security system electrical
circuit for connecting a stationary conductor of said security
system circuit with a conductor of said circuit which is carried
on a movable object such as a slidable window and the like,
said take-off connector comprising:
(a) a contact carrying member having at least two mutually
perpendicular sides and a third side and defining a plural-
ity of recesses located in one of said mutually perpendicu-
lar sides for receiving the resjjective ones of a plurality of
fixed contacts, said contact carrying member including a
contact mounting element defining a contact attachment
aperture;
(b) a plurality of fixed contacts located spaced apart from
one another on said contact carrying member, each of said
fixed contacts including a contact surface associated with
and located substantially flush with at least two of said
mutually perpendicular sides of said contact carrying
member and each of said fixed contacts comprising an
elongate strip of conductive material including a plurality
of inwardly directed angles defining a plurality of inter-
connected segments including said contact surfaces, a pair
of said segments being arranged to fit on opposite sides of
said contact mounting element and each segment of said
1. An electrical jack, comprising:
(a) a housing of insulating material having integral walls,
including a front wall, forming a cavity, said front wall
having an axially extending dielectric collar member with
a passageway for guiding a stem of a jack plug into said
cavity;
(b) at least one spring contact electrode disposed within said
housing cavity adapted to engage a portion of the jack
plug stem when such stem is inserted into the cavity to
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
597
establish electrical contact between such electrode and
such portion of the jack plug; and
(c) an electrical contactor electrode having an aperture
formed in a mounting portion thereof disposed around the
dielectric collar member outside the housing and having a
finger electrode protruding across the front wall of the
housing into the cavity to electrically contact a different
portion of the jack plug.
said holographic element having said broad bandwidth of
operation.
4,392,709
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING HOLOGRAPHIC
ELEMENTS FOR HBER AND INTEGRATED OPTIC
SYSTEMS
Joseph L. Homer, Cambridge, and Jacques E. Ludman, West-
ford, both of Mass., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 201,860
Int. a.3 G03H 1/04
U.S. a. 350—3.83 1 Qaim
\
4,392,710
OPTICAL APPARATUS
Philip J. Rogers, Owyd, Wales, assignor to Pilkington P. E.
Limited, England
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,160
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 22, 1979,
7940482
Int. a.3 G02B 23/02
U.S. a. 350—505 32 Oaims
12 9
12 V 10
1. Optical apparatus for providing both eyes of an observer
with a view of a single object comprising a catadioptric lens
system and a pair of telescopes for viewing the image produced
by that system, each of said telescopes comprising optical
elements spaced from each other and from the catadioptric lens
system by a medium which is neither solid nor liquid, there
being means to fold the light path through each telescope so as
to provide an exit pupil separation that is adequate for normal
two eye viewing.
1. An improved method of manufacturing a reflective holo-
graphic element for fiber and integrated optic systems in order
to substantially eliminate speckle pattern problems, comprising
the steps of:
(a) providing a photosensitive medium of sufficient thickness
to achieve a high diffraction efficiency of approximately
80% and a broad bandwidth of operation of approxi-
mately ±15% about a central wavelength;
(b) providing a spatially and temporally coherent beam of
electromagnetic radiation adjacent said photosensitive
medium;
(c) dividing said beam of electromagnetic radiation into a
first beam following a first path of preselected length and
a second beam following a second path of preselected
length;
(d) placing reflecting elements in at least one of said paths in
order to make said predetermined lengths of said first path
and said second path substantially equal;
(e) optically aligning said first beam path and said second
beam path so that said first beam and said second beam
impinge with each other on opposite sides of said photo-
sensitive medium and interfere therein;
(0 placing a lens within each of said first and said second
beam paths adjacent said photosensitive medium in order
to form a spherically converging wavefront within said
first beam path and a spherically diverging wavefront
within said second beam path;
(g) maintaining an angular relationship between said diverg-
ing beam and said converging beam so as to produce low
reflection losses while obtaining substantially high disper-
sion throughout the interference region within said photo-
sensitive medium;
(h) maintaining identical polarization in said first and said
second beams; and
(i) processing said photosensitive medium in order to form
432,711
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR RENDERING VISIBLE
CHARGE IMAGES
Roland Moraw, and Giinther Schadlich, both of Wiesbaden, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft,
Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,720
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1980, 3012253
Int. a.5 G02F 1/29
U.S. a. 350—361 11 Claims
1. A process for rendering visible an electrostatic charge
image by deforming the surface of a liquid having a resistivity
of between 10* and 10'* ohm-cm and a polarizability of be-
tween about 5-10~2* and 20- 10 ~ 2* cm^ and being present in a
thickness of 10 to 100 ^m on one of a metallic and dielectric
support into a reversible, optically readable relief image, com-
prising the steps of positioning the electrostatic charge image
producing the relief image — during the period in which the
charge image is made visible— at a distance of about 10 to 1,000
^m from the surface of the liquid without contacting said
liquid.
598
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
-July 12, 1983
432,712
LIGHT DISTRIBUTOR
Takeshi Ozeld, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura Elec-
tric Co., Ltd., Kawasaki, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 888,358, Mar. 20, 1978, abandoned.
This application Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 201,987
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 23, 1977, 52-31032;
Apr. 8, 1977, 52-39552
Int. a.3 G02B 5/172
U.S. a. 350—96.16 7 Oaims
1. A light distibutor comprising a plurality of optical fibers
with each of said optical fibers having a core located therein
that is encapsulated by an individual cladding; said light dis-
tributor having a tapered light mixing section in which the
cladding of adjacent optical fibers remain intact when said
optical fibers, held firmly together in a juxtapositional relation-
ship, are thermally fused together to form said tapered light
mixing section, said optical fibers being subjected to tensile
stresses during said thermal fusion; said optical fibers being
thermally fused only in the region of said tapered light mixing
section; whereby a light distributor is formed which distributes
optical signals with a small loss of input optical energy.
432,713
ARRANGEMENT FOR ALIGNEDLY COUPLING TWO
COATED LIGHT-CONDUCnVE HBERS
Hans Piter, Cologne, and Klaus Serapins, Berg. Gladbach-
Refrath, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Felten &
Guilleaume Carlswerk AG, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 890,192, Mar. 27, 1978, Pat. No. 4,223,979.
This application Oct. 29, 1979, Ser, No. 89,107
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 31,
1977, 2714327; Apr. 13, 1977, 2716222
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 23,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 G02B 7/26
U.S. a. 350—96.21 14 Qaims
1. An apparatus for aligning and coupling two coated light-
conductive fibers, comprising a first guide member having a
channel to support a first fiber to be coupled to a second fiber,
a second guide member having a channel to support an end of
the second fiber, said channel including a first section of a
relatively large diameter, an intermediate section of a rela-
tively small diameter to receive a stripped end portion of the
second fiber and a third section coordinated to the diameter of
the coated light-conductive second fiber; at least three clamp-
ing rods inserted into a space provided in said first guide mem-
ber and partially extending into said first section of said second
guide member, said clamping rods being arranged to engage
the abutted stripped end portions of said fibers; a protective
socket surrounding said second guide member and having an
opening at one end thereof to receive said second coated light-
conductive fiber, said protective socket having a recess com-
municating with said opening and a resilient O-ring inserted
into said recess to yieldably engage said second coated light-
conductive fiber when it is inserted into said third section of
the channel formed in the second guide member; and deflect-
able means encompassing said clamping rods to maintain said
clamping rods in clamping contact with said stripped end
portions, said deflectable means being positioned on said
clamping rods substantially at the middle thereof, said second
guide member being connected to the first guide member and
arranged to connect the channel formed in the first guide
member to the channel formed in the second guide member
thereby providing radial forces for pressing said deflectable
means inwardly into contact with said clamping rods to hold
said stripped end portions in aligned and abutting position.
4,392,714
OVERHEAD POWER CABLE HAVING LIGHT
CONDUCTING HBERS ARRANGED IN ITS INTERIOR
Siegfried Briiggendieck, Radevormwald; Karl-Heinz Nolting,
Cologne; Friedrich Krahn, and Gerhard Olejak, both of Ber-
gisch Gladbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to UJS.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,347
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 24,
1980,3015732
Int. Q\? G02B 5/172
U.S. a. 350— 96J3 2 Qaims
1. An overhead power cable for simultaneously transmitting
electrical energy and data signals, said cable comprising:
at least two light-conducting fibers, each fiber being pro-
vided with a mantle of synthetic resin;
at least one strength member, said light-conducting fibers
being stranded with or around the strength member to
produce a core having a strand length and strand diame-
ter, the strand length being from 5 to 15 times the strand
diameter;
a band of synthetic resin provided around the core;
a sheath of synthetic resin provided around the band of
synthetic resin;
a seamless metal sheath provided around the sheath of syn-
thetic resin; and
at least one layer of electrically conductive wires provided
around the seamless metal sheath.
4,392,715
OPTICAL nBER
Hans-UIrich Bonewitz, Hammersbach; Albert Muhlich, Frank-
furt, and Karlheinz Rau, Hanau, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Heraeus Quarzschmelze GmbH, Hanau, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,088
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 27,
1979, 2907650
Int Q\? G02B 5/172
U.S. a. 350—96.33 11 Oaims
1. In an optical fiber having a core consisting essentially of
vitreous silica, said core having jacket of plastic which is opti-
cally effective at least on a length of 10 m reckoned from the
light input end of the fiber and which has a refractive index nji/
which is smaller than that of the core, the improvement
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
S99
wherein said core consists essentially of an inner portion and an
outer portion, which are integral with one another and differ
with respect of their refractive indices, said outer portion
consisting essentially of vitreous silica having a refractive
index next which is smaller than the refractive index t^k. of the
remaining inner portion but greater than the refractive index
432,717
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY DEVICE
Yoshimichi Shibuya, and Masami Takahashi, both of Mobara,
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,289
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1980, 55-5673
Int. a.^ G02F 1/li
U.S. a. 350—334 4 Claims
/~iOb
lOb
xiM of said jacket, said vitreous silica of said core consisting
essentially of synthetic vitreous silica made from silicon ha-
lides, the OH-content of said synthetic vitreous silica amount-
ing to less than 10 ppm, and wherein nex/lies in the range from
"iS^— (n/f— n^)-(0.25 to 0.8), the thickness of said outer portion
amounts between 0.8 \im to 8 fxm and the thickness of said
inner portion is greater than the thickness of said outer portion.
4,392,716
MECHANISM TO MAINTAIN CONSTANT BODY TUBE
LENGTH OF BINOCULAR MICROSCOPE
Tsutomu Shimizu, Hanno, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan _
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,219
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-
53894[U]
Int. a.3 G02B 21/20, 27/10
U.S. a. 350—145
5 Oaims
1. A liquid crystal display device comprising a pair of oppos-
ing upper and lower substrates having a liquid crystal filled
therebetween and coupled to each other through an electri-
cally insulative sealing material at the peripheral portions
thereof, said upper and lower substrates being provided with
upper and lower electrode patterns including wiring conduc-
tors on respective surfaces facing oppositely to each other, the
wiring conductors of said upper and lower electrode patterns
having cross-over portions which overlap each other between
said upper and lower substrates, wherein at least a part of the
cross-over portions of the wiring conductors of said upper and
lower electrode patterns is disposed within an effective display
region of said liquid crystal display device enclosed by said
sealing material, and each of the cross-over portions of the
wiring conductors of said upper and lower electrode patterns
disposed within said effective display region has a width
smaller than that of the remaining portion of the respective
wiring conductors.
4,392,718
RESISTIVE ELECTRODE LCD AND VOLTAGE SUPPLY
MEANS
John M. Morrison, Edinburgh, Scotland, assignor to Ferranti
Limited (now Ferranti pic), Cheadle, England
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,499
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 12, 1980,
8001093
Int. C\? G02F 1/13
U.S. O. 350—336 6 Oaims
1. A mechanism to maintain a constant body tube length of
a binocular microscope having a casing with two outer frames
mounted thereon in a slidable manner in a width direction of
the microscope, two ocular sleeves carried by said outer
frames in a manner slidable in an axial direction thereof, oppo-
sitely slanted linear cam grooves bored on said casing with
angles of 45° relative to said axial direction, and pins connected
to said ocular sleeves and fitted in said linear cam grooves
respectively, said ocular sleeves being adapted to slide axially
relative to the outer frames in response to symmetrical width-
wise sliding of said outer frames relative to the casing so as to
maintain said body tube length constant; said mechanism com-
prising slots bored through said outer frames so as to extend in
the axial direction thereof and to slidably receive said pins
connected to said ocular sleeves, and resilient means disposed
between said casing and said ocular sleeves so as to apply axial
forces to said two ocular sleeves in opposite directions.
3
1
V
1.
•
A
I
- .J...
1. A display device which includes a pair of spaced elec-
trodes each having a resistance characteristic such that a po-
tential gradient may be developed across the electrode, a pair
of terminals on each electrode located such that the potential
gradients developed across the two electrodes extend at an
angle to one another, a liquid crystal material located between
the two electrodes and being of a type which becomes opaque
when an electric field is applied across it, voltage supply means
600
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
operable to apply an alternating potential across each pair of
terminals, such that the two potentials are of the same fre-
quency and are out of phase with one another by an angle
which determines the form of the display and in which the
voltage supply means are arranged to provide, across each
electrode, a constant voltage and include means for varying
the potential of each terminal with respect to a reference jx)-
tential.
432,720
ELECTROCHROMIC DISPLAY CELL
Qaude Ganguillet, Neuchatel; Yves Ruedin, Saint-Blaise, and
Michel Sailin, Neuchatel, all of Switzerland, assignors to
Ebauches, S.A., Canton of Neuchate, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,203
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 17, 1979,
11182/79
Int. a.3 G02F 1/17
U.S. a. 350—357 2 Qaims
5 U
4,392,719
IMAGE FORMING METHOD AND APPARATUS
Sohichi Sekimoto, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Fuji Xerox Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 169,079
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 19, 1979, 54-91005
Int. a.J G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 350—342 2 Qaims
^ 0 I
n
19
..^-^^^6 ..
;-GI
:^
1. A system for forming an image onto a photosensitive
recording medium comprising:
a memory liquid crystal cell having a layer of nematic-cho-
lesteric phase transition type memory liquid crystals, a
photoconductive layer disposed adjacent said memory
liquid crystal layer, and transparent electrodes sandwich-
ing said memory liquid crystal layer and said photocon-
ductive layer;
means for projecting an optical image onto said memory
liquid crystal cell comprising first means to project a
positive original optical image on said memory liquid
crystal cell for recording as a latent image and second
means for projecting a negative original optical image
either onto said memory liquid crystal cell as a latent
image or onto said photosensitive recording medium with-
out forming a latent image;
means for applying a predetermined voltage to said memory
liquid crystal cell to determine the polarity of an image
recorded thereon; wherein said means for applying a
predetermined voltage comprises, a voltage source and
circuit means for applying a bias voltage from said source
having a polarity determined by whether the original
image is a positive or negative original optical image
means for projecting an optical image from said memory
liquid crystal cell to said photosensitive recording medium
comprising a light source, a first lens, a half-silvered mir-
ror positioned to direct light from said light source fo-
cused through said first lens onto the surface of said mem-
ory liquid crystal cell, and a second lens receiving light
transmitted through said half-silvered mirror and focusing
it onto said photosensitive recording medium.
eb ,JjJf
6a
jS^
^^TTTW
1. An electrochromic display cell comprising a substantially
flat substrate, an electrode disposed on said substrate, an elec-
trochromic material disposed on a portion of said electrode, a
cover having a substantially flat peripheral portion, an ionic
conductor disposed between said substrate and said cover,
annular soldering means for sealing said peripheral portion of
said cover to said substrate, and a protective frame disposed in
tight contact with said substrate and said cover and disposed
tightly separating said soldering means and said ionic conduc-
tor in order to prevent chemical reaction therebetween.
4,392,721
ELECTROCHROMIC CELL HAVING A MIXED SOLID
ION-CONDUCTING LAYER
Robert D. Giglia, Rye, N.Y., and Gottfried Haacke, New Ca-
naan, Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,871
Int. Q.3 G02F 1/17
U.S. Q. 350—357 3 Qaims
1. An electrochromic device comprising a layer of inorganic
electrochromic material having one of its surfaces in ion-con-
ductive contact with a surface of a single ion-conductive insu-
lating layer which consists essentially of a codeposited mixture
of SiO and Cr203, with those two layers disposed between two
electrode surfaces with means for passing electric current in
reversible directions through the two layers for alternate col-
oration and erasing of the electrochromic layer wherein the
ratio of Cr203 to SiO in said codeposited mixture is the equiva-
lent of a ratio in the range from 2.5 to 50 m/x film thickness of
Cr203 to 160 m/i, film thickness of SiO.
4,392,722
PRISM POLARIZER
Masataka Shirasaki, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Fujitsu Lim-
ited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,877
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 9, 1980, 55-63659[U]
Int. Q.J G02B 5/04: G02F 1/09, 1/29
U.S. Q. 350—375 16 Qaims
1. A prism polarizer for separating an incident light beam
having P-polarization and S-polarization light rays, compris-
ing:
a pair of anisotropic crystal prisms, wherein each prism has
a boundary surface, the boundary surface of a first prism
of said pair faced to the boundary surface of the second
prism, thus defining a facing plane;
wherein each comprises a crystal which has an optical axis
and an optical characteristic such that the difference be-
tween the square of the refractive index for light rays
July 12, 1983
f
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
601
having a polarization plane parallel to the optical axis, and
the square of the refractive index for light rays having a
polarization plane perpendicular to the optical axis, is
larger than 1;
the angle of incidence of a beam, exiting one of said prisms,
upon the boundary surface of said beam-exiting prism
being equal to the Brewster angle for the refractive index
for the P-polarization rays.
-
II
7
/R
-A
5 r\,
l^
?
. T
\i 4
*
ij
1^
r
1
N
\
■ I 1
/T
1 '
r
^i.
1^1
•t. _
of sight of said aiming device and a color filter disc including
a number of different color filters and provided with external
gearing and an operating ring mounted rotatably around said
housing and provided with internal gearing in engagement
with the gearing of said filter disc, and said filter disc being
rotatably supported by rollers disposed in an area opposite the
area of engagement of said gearings so as to permit operation
thereof, all three rotatable operating rings, the color filter disc
operating ring, the polarizing filter support lever operating
ring and the iris diaphragm operating ring being disposed
axially closely adjacent one another and rotatably around said
housing.
so that the P-polarization rays are transmitted through said
boundary surface of said beam-exiting prism, while the
S-polarization rays are totally reflected at said boundary
surface of said beam-exiting prism, thereby said mcident
beam being separated into two polarized beams, and
wherein each prism is formed so that each of said two sepa-
rated polarized beams is totally reflected within each
respective prism and the separated polarized beams exit
said respective prisms parallel with each other.
4,392,723
' AIMING DEVICE
Walter Gehmann, Karlstrasse 40, Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many 7500
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,606
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 8,
1980, 3004635
Int. Q.3 F41G l/!4
U.S. Q. 350^-407 7 Qaims
16 3
12 "n 11 J,
" '' 50 33
4,392,724
LENS SYSTEM CAPABLE OF SHORT DISTANCE
PHOTOGRAPHY
Yoshinari Hamanishi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku
K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,011
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 31, 1980, 55/10704
Int. Q.3 G02B 9/64, 15/14
U.S. Q. 350—163 10 Qaims
1. An aimmg device comprising: a tubular support housing;
an adjustable iris diaphragm arranged in said housing at one
end thereof and forming an eyepiece, said diaphragm consist-
ing of an axially slotted sleeve forming ribs which are bent
inwardly at their free ends, said inwardly bent free ends over-
laying each other scale-like and being received in a conical
opening in said housing; a rotatable operating ring threaded
onto said housing and engaging said slotted sleeve for axially
forcing said sleeve with its free ends into said conical opening
for causing inward deflection of said free ends for adjustment
of the opening of said eyepiece; a polarizing filter structure also
mounted in said housing and consisting of two adjacent polar-
izing discs rotatably mounted relative to each other by 90°,
each being supported on an operating lever, the first one being
linked to said housing, and a polarizing filter control ring
rotatably supported on said housing and having the end of the
second polarizing filter operating level linked thereto for rotat-
ing said polarizing filters relative to each other, said filter
control ring further having means for engaging the first operat-
ing lever for pivoting said lever to move the filters out of line
Lj? . ,, L34
1. A lens system capable of continuously effecting infinity
photography to high magnification proximity photography,
comprising:
a convergent lens group which is a first group positioned
most adjacent to the object side;
a convergent lens group which is a second group positioned
rearwardly of said first group;
a divergent lens group which is a third group positioned
rearwardly of said second group; and
a diaphragm provided between said first group and said
third group;
said first group and said second group being movable toward
the object side relative to said third group while enlarging
the spacing between said first and second groups when
focusing is effected from infinity to a short distance, and
the diaphragm being movable with the second group.
4,392,725
DEVICE FOR BLIND SPOT DELINEATION
Larry A. Sheingom, 3139 Tennyson St., NW., Washington, D.C.
20015
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 966,793, Dec. 5, 1978,
abandoned. This application Feb. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 124,101
Int. Q.J A61B 3/02
U.S. Q. 351—224 4 Qaims
1. A self-contained, solid state device, with no moving parts,
that determines visual field defects, comprising:
(a) a surface with lamps mounted therein connected to cir-
cuitry which automatically turns on the lamps during
testing,
(b) a spring return push button switch that the patient de-
presses upon observing a lighted lamp on said surface
connected to circuitry which determines when the patient
responds to or does not respond to a lighted lamp and
stores the information in memory,
(c) circuitry which reads and processes the stored informa-
tion connected to circuitry which routes the output when
602
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
the memory is read to lamps corresponding to the lamps
which were presented to the patient, and not responded to
by the patient.
(d) circuitry which determines when the test is complete and
(e) a pxjwer supply which supplies power to drive the cir-
cuitry of the device.
4,392,726
AUTOMATIC FOCUS CONTROL SYSTEM FOR VIDEO
CAMERA WITH IMPROVED POSITION DETECTING
APPARATUS
Kenji Kimura, Tachikawa, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,918
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1980, 55-79742
Int. a.3 G03B 7m
U.S. a. 354—25 17 Qaims
direction exceeds by said predetermined amount a point at
which said detection signal takes said extreme value;
said third means including activating means coupled to said
moving means for actuating said moving means during a
given predetermined period of time which corresponds to
said predetermined amount of said relative distance varia-
tion in said second direction.
4,392,727
CAMERA EXPOSURE CONTROL DEVICES WITH
SMOOTHING aRCUIT
Masayoshi Sahara, Sennan; Masaaki Nakai, Nara; Tokuji
Ishida, Daito, and Hiroshi Hosomizu, Sakai, all of Japan,
assignors to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,096
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 20, 1980, 55-131099
Int. a.3 G03B 7/085, 7/089
U.S. a. 354—43 5 Qaims
1. A focus control apparatus adapted to a camera including
a lens system, image pickup means for providing a video signal
disposed on the optical axis of the lens system, and moving
means for varying a relative distance between a light receiving
surface of the image pickup means and the lens system so that
an object is focussed onto the light receiving surface, said
relative distance being varied in a first direction or a second
direction which is opposite to said first direction, comprising:
first means coupled to said image pickup means including
means for providing a detection signal which includes
higher frequency components of the video signal pro-
vided by said image pickup means; and means for varying
the level of said detection signal according to said relative
distance between said light receiving surface and said lens
system;
second means coupled to said first means and to said moving
means for fixing said relative distance when said detection
signal substantially takes an extreme value; and
third means coupled to said second means and to said mov-
ing means for causing a predetermined amount of the
relative distance variation in said second direction when
the relative distance variation is effected in said first direc-
tion and when the relative distance variation in said first
1. A camera exposure control circuit, comprising:
a photoelectric circuit including a photoelectric element to
receive light from an object to be photographed through
the camera diaphragm aperiure for generating a voltage
output as a function of a brightness of an object to be
photographed;
a control circuit for controlling the camera exposure in
accordance with said voltage output including a compari-
son circuit for comparing said voltage output, at the time
when the diaphragm aperture is being stopped-down, with
a given voltage level, and providing an inveried output
when said voltage output attains a specified relationship
with said given voltage level, and further including means
for stopping the stopping-down operation of the dia-
phragm in response to said inveried output; and
a smoothing circuit connected between said photoelectric
circuit and said control circuit and having a smaller charg-
ing time constant than the discharging time constant
thereof.
4,392,728
CAMERA WITH FOCAL-PLANE SHUTTER HAVING
CONTRAST CONTROL
Muneaki Yoshida, No. 2635, Kawaguchi Cho, Hachioji Oty,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 1,619, Jan. 8, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 381,944
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 11, 1978, 53-1653
Int. a.3 G03B 7/08
U.S. a. 354—49 7 Claims
1. In a camera comprising a focal-plane shutter having a
front curtain and a rear curtain for measuring reflected light
from the front curtain surface to determine a proper exposure,
the improvement wherein the front curtain has a center portion
thereof formed into a low reflection portion for measuring
reflected light with the start of the front curtain and a rear end
portion being at least formed into a high reflection portion as
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
603
compared with the center portion in the running direction of
the front certain means for delaying, running of said rear
5f .^". #" ^W:^^.^J^i
4,392,730
MOTOR DRIVEN REWIND DEVICE FOR CAMERA '
Tomonori Iwashita, Fuchu, and Hidehiko Fukahori, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,526
Oalms priority, application Japan, Nov. 22, 1980, 55-
168020[U]; Nov. 25, 1980, 55-165541
Int. a.3 G03B 1/12
U.S. a. 354—173 8 Qaims
: 4^ 5 - 4.
curtain until the measured light reaches a predetermined inte-
gral value to control contrast.
4,392,729
MOVABLE REFLECTING MIRROR FOR SINGLE LENS
REFLEX CAMERA
Katsuhiko Tsunefuji, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus
Optical Company Ltd., Japan
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,826
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 18, 1980, 55-
165833[U]
Int. Q.3 G03B 19/12: G02B 27/14
U.S. Q. 354-152 8 Qaims
1. A camera comprising:
(A) picture-taking optics including a lens for transmitting
picture-taking light along and around a first optical axis
which is the lens axis and onto a film plane of said camera;
(B) viewfinder optics; and
(C) a mirror movable between a first position wherein said
mirror is at an angle with respect to said first optical axis,
intercepts picture-taking light transmitted by said picture-
taking optics before it reaches said film plane and reflects
said picture-taking light toward said viewfinder optics and
a second position wherein said mirror is removed from
said first optical axis and permits said picture-taking light
to reach said film plane, said mirror including:
(1) an optically transmissive member having a front sur-
face and a rear surface which are partially reflective;
(2) reflefcting means disposed on said front surface of said
member for reflecting substantially all of the picture-
taking light incident thereon; and
(3) light transmitting openings formed in said reflecting
means, the size and spacing of said light transmitting
openings being selected such that picture-taking light,
which is generally concentrated around the first optical
axis by the picture-taking optics, but which also is dis-
persed around the first optical axis, is transmitted
through said openings and some of the transmitted light
is reflected by said rear surface of said member while
none of that reflected light refracts through said front
surface of said member toward said viewfinder optics
and the size of the openings is also selected so that
diffracting phenomena are avoided.
o^^
- r « . sii
( .'< Ml V) ji,
1. A motor driven rewind device for a camera comprising:
an electric motor;
switching means, for controlling current supply to said
electric motor;
rewind means, driven to move by said motor to rewind a
film;
a rewind control member, for changing over said switching
means;
a lock member, locking said rewind control member in an
initial position and a rewind mode position; and
a lock release member, controlling said lock member.
4,392,731
PHOTOGRAPHIC HLM CARTRIDGE ASSEMBLIES
WITH REMOVABLE HLTERS
Roger S. Van Heyningen, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,575
Int. Q.3 G03B 77/26
U.S. Q. 354—180 6 Qaims
1. A film cartridge assembly adapted to be received for
exposure in cameras of two types, one of said types having a
predetermined exposure characteristic and the other of said
types having exposure characteristic other than the predeter-
mined exposure characteristics, said cartridge assembly com-
prising:
a cartridge body;
photographic film in said cartridge body having a photo-
graphic characteristic matching the predetermined expo-
sure characteristic of the one camera type;
604
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
a filter carried by said cartridge body so as to be in the
ex|X)sure light path to the film, said filter being adapted to
compensate for the non-matching exposure characteristic
of the other type of cameras; and
means cooperative only with cameras of said one type of
assuring removal of said filter from the light path of such
cameras before film in the assembly is exposed by the
camera.
4,392,732
FOLDING CAMERA WITH VIEWHNDER HAVING
INDEPENDENTLY MOUNTED OPTICAL ELEMENTS
Donate F. Pizzuti, Lynnfield, Mass., assignor to Polaroid Cor-
poration, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,980
Int. a.3G03B 17/04, 13/02
U.S. a. 354—187 7 Qaims
1. A folding camera including a self-erecting and folding
viewfinder, said camera comprising:
a base housing section including means for supporting a film
unit at a film plane within said base section;
a lens housing section mounting an objective lens and a front
viewfinder lens, said lens housing section being pivotally
coupled to said base section adjacent one end thereof for
movement between an upstanding operative erected posi-
tion and a folded storage position wherein it is folded back
over said base housing section in overlying relation to at
l^ast a portion of said film plane;
a njirror assembly including a mirror pivotally coupled to
said base section, adjacent an opposite end thereof, for
movement between an operative erected position for
refiecting image-forming light rays from said lens onto
said film plane to expose a film unit thereat and a folded
storage position overlying at least a portion of said film
plane;
a foldable bellows coupled to said base and lens housing
sections and said mirror assembly for movement between
an erected position for light shielding the exposure optical
path extending between said objective lens, mirror and
film plane, and a flat storage position wherein at least a
portion of said bellows overlies said film plane;
a cover housing section, having an aperture therein, pivot-
ally coupled to said base section adjacent said opposite
end thereof for movement between an erected position
providing clearance for said lens housing, mirror assembly
and bellows to assume their respective erected positions
and a folded storage position overlying said base section
and protectively covering said folded lens housing sec-
tion, mirror assembly and bellows;
first erecting means interconnecting said lens and cover
housing sections for coordinated movement between their
respective erected and storage positions;
second erecting means interconnecting said lens housing
section and said mirror assembly for coordinated move-
ment between their respective erected and storage posi-
tions;
a rear viewfinder lens pivotally mounted on said base hous-
ing section for movement between an upstanding opera-
tive erected position, wherein said rear lens is in optical
alignment with said erected front lens to form a view-
finder having a viewing path that extends through said
aperture in said erected cover section for viewing and
framing a scene in the field of view of said objective lens,
and a folded storage position wherein said rear viewfinder
lens is folded down in overlying relation to said base
housing section; and
third erecting means responsive to movement of said cover
housing section from its said storage position to its said
erected position for effecting movement of said rear view-
finder lens from its said storage position to its said erected
position and also responsive to movement of said cover
section from its said erected position to its said storage
position for effecting movement of said rear viewfinder
lens from its said erected position to its said storage posi-
tion.
4,392,733
INTERVALS TIMER FOR CAMERAS
Norio Beppu, Sennan, and Akira Fujii, Osaka, both of Japan,
assignors to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,950
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 7, 1980, 55-93752;
Aug. 7, 1980, 55-93753
Int. C\? G03B 17/38. 17/18: H03K 1/153
U.S. a. 354—266 7 Qaims
46 ' 50,
24 26 22 pL>l.r»
^30
28 16
8 4
1. Interval timer for periodically providing a camera with a
release signal to control the photographing operation thereof
by carrying out one exposure cycle and a successive automatic
film winding operation in response to each release signal from
the interval timer, comprising:
means for periodically producing a release signal;
means for setting the interval between the occurrence of the
successive release signals;
first and second terminals to be connected with the camera,
the release signal being transmitted to the camera through
said first terminal;
means responsive to a first reply signal at said second termi-
nal transmitted from the camera for examining the timing
of the arrival of the first reply signal to said second termi-
nal to determine whether or not the examined timing falls
into a predetermined condition for controlling the opera-
tion of said means for producing, and including means for
measuring a period from the transmission of the release
signal to the arrival of the first reply signal; and
means responsive to said examining means for interrupting
said producing means from producing the release signal
when the examined timing falls into the predetermined
condition, said predetermined condition being that said
measured period is longer than a predetermined time
period.
4,392,734
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC CAMERA
John D. Plumadore, Westfield, Mass., assignor to Photon
Chroma, Inc., Westfield, Mass.
Filed Apr. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 144,782
Int. C\? G03G 15/10
U.S. CI. 355—3 R 3 Gaims
1. Camera for making frame-mounted slide transparencies
7ULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
605
adapted for projection in a slide projector using electrophoto- first guide surface being at the forward end portion of the
graphic film carried on a foldable, planar slide frame, said scraping member and having a length of at least 2.0 mm in the
camera comprising reversible drive means for carrying the direction of transport of the developer and has a cross-sec-
frame-mounted film into and out of said camera along a pro- tjonal shape in the direction of transport of the developer
cessing track for a single imaging cycle, including an imaging ^jjj^.j, j^ j^ jj,g f^^^ of a circular arc having approximately the
path and a development path, which are co-extensive, but m ^^^ curvature as the peripheral surface of said sleeve for
opposite directions, said imagmg path includmg a corona unit ■ ^^e developer along the first guide surface immedi-
for electncally chargmg said film while the film .s movmg ...i/ft^f^hedevelopTr is scraped off the peripheral surface of
thereby and mcudmg a corona wire disposed transversely to -"=•? -'i*^' ' '^" v^ ,,,... u i <■ ^f.k„
the paih of movement of the film, and an exposure chamber the sleeve in a direction parallel to the penpheral sur ace of the
spaced along said imaging path from the corona unit for the sleeve by the magnetic action due to the rotation of the mag-
imaging of said film, said development path including a toner netic roller and at a speed higher than the speed of transport of
head disposed between the corona unit and exposure chamber, the developer on the peripheral surface of the sleeve, the
a means for controlling the operation of said drive means to second guide surface extending from said first guide surface in
a direction away from the peripheral surface of the sleeve for
guiding the developer along the first guide surface away from
the peripheral surface of the sleeve.
r'
/
A--X
i'^'
r-i
m\i
m-
►•>w.^»»> *>yi
L
carry the frame-mounted film toward said exposure chamber
into registry therewith and for reversing the direction of drive
means to withdraw the imaged film along said development
path, means for supplying liquid toner to the toner head for
developing the imaged film and means for supplying positive
air pressure being directed to impinge against the toned surface
of the film, said control means including means for sensing
positions of the frame during its movement along said track
and for selectively energizing the corona unit before imaging
and then the toner supply means and air supply means during
development of the film after imaging, a bias electrode dis-
posed adjacent said toner head and means for biasing said
electrode to a first voltage during pre-exposure passage of said
film thereby and to a second substantially lower voltage during
passage of said film thereby after exposure within the camera.
4,392,736
ELECTRONIC COPYING APPARATUS FOR FORMING
MULTIPLE IMAGES ON A SINGLE SHEET
Chosin Nakamine, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,522
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55/99370
Int. a.J G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—3 R 4 Claims
4,392,735
MAGNETIC BRUSH DEVELOPING APPARATUS
Tateki Oka, Toyokawa, Japan, assignor to Minolta Camera
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,564
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1980, 55-78414[U]
Int. a.3 G03G 15/09
U.S. a. 355—3 DD
3 Qaims
1. A magnetic brush developing apparatus comprising: a
developing sleeve rotatably driven in a specified direction; a
magnetic roller provided within the developing sleeve and
rotatably driven at a high speed in the same direction as the
direction of rotation of the developing sleeve for conveying a
magnetic developer on the peripheral surface of the develop-
ing sleeve in a direction opposite to the direction of rotation of
the developing sleeve; and a scraping member of non-magnetic
material and having a forward end pressed in contact with the
peripheral surface of the developing sleeve for scraping the
developer off the peripheral surface of the developing sleeve
and having a first guide surface and a second guide surface, the
1. An electronic copying apparatus comprising:
document holding means for holding a document to be
copied at a given position,
light source means for exposing said document while being
held,
scanning means for optically scanning said document by
relatively moving said document holding means and said
light source means,
latent image forming means which receives light reflected
from said scanning means on a rotating photosensitive
medium and forms a latent image of said document on said
photosensitive medium,
developing means for developing said latent image to form a
toner image,
transfer means for transferring said toner image onto a sheet
of copy paper, and
fixing means for fixing said toner image transferred onto said
copy paper,
wherein said scanning means includes means for scanning
said document a plurality of times intermittently; said
latent image forming means includes means for forming a
plurality of latent images of said document on said photo-
sensitive medium in a continuous manner so that every
latent image is displaced on said photosensitive medium
for every scanning; and said transferring means includes
means for transferring a plurality of said toner images of
said document formed on said photosensitive medium
onto a single sheet of copy paper.
606
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4^92,737
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC COPYING APPARATUS
Mas^ji Nishikawa, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Opti-
cal Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,098
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 2, 1980, 55-169826
Int. a.3 G03G 15/00
VJS. a. 355—3 R 7 Claims
end portion which is remote from said transfer means and a
second end portion which is near said transfer means, said
first end portion being pivotable to allow the setting, in
accordance with the thickness of the transfer material, of the
distance between the second end portion and the informa-
tion recording element at the image transfer station;
driving means, engaged with each of said guiding members
adjacent the second end portion thereof, for moving only the
second end portions away from the recording element,
wherein each guiding member, when said feeding means is
not in operation, is away from the information recording
element; and
biasing means for applying resilient tension to the transfer
material to ensure that the transfer material is spaced apart
from the information recording element when said driving
means moves said guiding members away from the informa-
tion recording element.
1. An electrophotographic copying apparatus including a
photosensitive member which includes a conductive layer
carrying a sequential lamination of a first photoconductive
layer which is sensitive to visible light and a second photosen-
sitive layer which is sensitive to ultraviolet radiation and serves
as an insulator to the visible light, said photosensitive member
on which is formed an electrostatic latent image being repeat-
edly conveyed to a developing station and a transfer station in
sequential fashion to produce a plurality of copies with said
electrostatic latent image which has been formed thereon, the
apparatus characterized by provision of neutralizing means for
an irradiation of the conductive layer with visible light and
ultraviolet rays to neutralize charge on an area beyond image
scope of the photosensitive member, said neutralizing means
being disposed upstream of the developing station and down-
stream of the transfer station, as viewed with regard to a direc-
tion of the conveyance of the photosensitive member.
432,738
IMAGE TRANSFER DEVICE
Hitoshi Fujino, Yokohama; Masanobu Kanoto, and Hiroo
IchihashI, both of Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continaation of Ser. No. 89,454, Oct. 30, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,367
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 10, 1978, 53-138439;
Dec. 26, 1978, 53-164148
lut. a.3 G03G 15/14
XiJS. a. 355—3 TR 2 Qaims
4392,739
ELECTROMECHANICALLY OPERATED FUSER ROLL
CLOSURE
Leon C. Brown, Boulder County, Colo.; Jesse L. Campbell, Pima
County, Ariz.; Uscoe J. Fitts, Fujisawa, Japan, and Willard L.
Gudgel, Boulder County, Colo., assignors to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 145,084, Apr. 30, 1980, Pat. No.
4363,549. This application Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,682
Int. a.3 G03G 15/20
U.S. a. 355—3 FU 14 Qaims
1. An image transfer device for transferring an image from
an information recording element, said device comprising:
means for transferring an image from the information record-
ing element to a transfer material, at an image transfer sta-
tion;
means for feeding the transfer material to said transfer means;
symmetrically arranged transfer material guiding members
extending along a transfer material path, each having a first
1. A xerographic toner flxing apparatus comprising:
substantially parallel first and second cylindrical fuser rol-
lers;
biasing means for maintaining the peripheral surfaces of said
fuser rollers in an open position;
a rotatable cam;
means for rotating said cam;
means for serially feeding sheets between the peripheral
surfaces of said fuser rollers in synchronization with the
rotation of said cam, said cam having a contour for main-
taining said fuser rollers in a closed position for sheets of
a predetermined sheet length; a linkage mechanism cou-
pling said cam to at least one of said fuser rollers, said
linkage mechanism including:
an electromechanically oi>erated latch,
an electrical control means for selectively energizing said
electromechanically operated latch, and
means for shifting the peripheral surfaces of said fuser rollers
between open and closed positions when said electrome-
chanically operated latch is energized and for retaining
said fuser rollers in an open position when said electrome-
chanically operated latch is deenergized.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
607
4,392,740
PAPER TRANSPORT CONTROL DEVICE FOR USE IN
MECHANICAL ARRANGEMENT INCLUDING MANUAL
PAPER FEEDING MECHANISM
Masazumi Ito, Toyokawa, and Kenji Shibazaki, Aichi, both of
Japan, assignors to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,275
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1980, 55/49829;
Feb. 27, 1981, 56/29109
Int. Q.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. Q. 355—14 SH 8 Qaims
PW4, L^
)Wi-
jVM,
'hi.
I3a SW2 13
4(M2) 3
SW3
-^ CLilCLz)
-SW5
' - - -30
22
1. A paper transport control device comprising:
a paper transport device for transporting paper;
a manual paper feeding mechanism for manually feeding
paper into said paper transport device;
a manual paper feed detecting device for detecting the man-
ually fed paper in the vicinity of a manual paper feeding
inlet;
an operational start commanding means for starting opera-
tions of said manual paper feeding mechanism and said
paper transport device in response to detection of a lead-
ing edge of said paper by said manual paper feed detecting
device;
a paper presence judging means for judging the presence or
absence of said paper at a predetermined time at which
said paper has been transported in response to operations
of said manual pajjer feeding mechanism but has not yet
passed through said manual paper feed detecting device;
and
a control means for causing at least one of said operations
performed during transport of said paper in said paper
transport device to be inoperative if a judgement has been
made by said paper presence judging means that said
paper is absent.
4,392,741
IMAGE FORMING APPARATUS
Tsuneki Inuzuka, Machida; Koichi Murakami, Tokyo; Kenji
Kurita, Mitaka, and Hisashi Sakamaki, Yokohama, all of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 68,483, Aug. 21, 1979, Pat. No. 4,315,685.
This application Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,017
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 24, 1978, 53-103044;
Aug. 24, 1978, 53-103048; Aug. 24, 1978, 53-103050; Aug. 31,
1978, 53-106736; Sep. 1, 1978, 53-107094
Int. Q.3 G03G 15/28
U.S. Q. 355—14 R 7 Qaims
1. A copying apparatus comprising: means for forming an
image on a copy medium including a movable component,
first detecting means for detecting a first position of the
movable component,
first control means for returning the movable component to
the first position corresponding to the first detecting
means when the component is out of the first position
before the copying operation starts,
second detecting means for detecting a second position,
different from the first position, after the copying opera-
tion is started, and
second control means for stopping the copying operation in
response to the second detecting means when the compo-
nent fails to move to the second position.
4,392,742
LIQUID DEVELOPER COPIER CLEANING SYSTEM
INCORPORATING RESILIENT CLOSED-CELL
CLEANING ROLLER
Benzion Landa, Edmonton, Canada, assignor to Savin Corpora-
tion, Valhalla, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 9, 1978, Ser. No. 959,324
Int. Q.J G03G 21/00. 15/10
U.S. Q. 355—15 2 Qaims
1. Apparatus for removing liquid from a wet surface includ-
ing in combination a roller comprising a body of resilient
material formed with cells over the surface of said roller which
are open to the external environment and isolated from the
interior of said body, means mounting said roller with the
surface of said body in engagement with said wet surface,
means for rotating said roller to cause the action of said surface
cells to remove liquid from said wet surface, and means remote
from said wet surface for deforming said surface cells to force
the liquid therefrom, said deforming means having an edge in
contact with said roller, said edge having a radius of curvature
comparable with the size of said surface cells.
4,392,743
DISC nLM ADVANCE ASSEMBLY
Richard D. Anderson, Maple Grove, Minn., assignor to Pako
Corporation, Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,926
InL Q.3 G03B 27/62
U.S. Q. 355—75 29 Qaims
1. A film advance assembly for use in a photographic printer
for advancing a selected film frame of a disc-like film unit on a
disc film holder to a print position defined by an optical center
at a print gate aperture, the film advance assembly comprising:
a base;
608
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
a ratchet wheel rotatably attached to the base and having a
plurahty of ratchet teeth;
gear train means rotatably attached to the base for rotatably
connecting the ratchet wheel with the disc film holder;
the shield machine and said succeeding pipe relative to
said scheduled central axis of the tunnel to be constructed.
j"^^
means for rotationally indexing the ratchet wheel in a first
angular direction to bring the selected film frame to the
print position at the print gate aperture; and
means for engaging the ratchet wheel forcing the ratchet
wheel to move in a second angular direction when the film
frame has been rotationally indexed past the print position.
4,392,744
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING
ANGULAR AND TRANSVERSAL DISPLACEMENTS OF
SHIELD MACHINE AND SUCCEEDING PIPE
Tetsuro Tatsuhama, Takarazuka, and Masao Okabe, Sendai,
both of Japan, :<jsignors to Okumura Corporation, Osaka,
Japan
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,337
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54/130349
Int. a.3 GOIB 11/27; E21C 44/00
U.S. a. 356—153 4 Claims
77 3
4,392,745
TILT HEAD CAMERA FOR INTERFEROMETRIC
ANALYSIS OF TIRES
Forrest S. Wright, and Ted R. Zimmerman, both of Rochester,
Mich., assignors to Industrial Holographies, Inc., Auburn
Heights, Mich.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,403
Int. C\? GOIB 9/25
U.S. a. 356—348 8 Qaims
1. A method of determining angular and transversal dis-
placements of a shield machine and a succeeding pipe relative
to a predetermined scheduled central axis of a tunnel to be
constructed by pipe-jacking tunneling comprising,
(a) providing on the shield machine a first light emitter
which emits rearwardly a light beam along the central
longitudinal axis of the shielf machine and a reference
position on said axis of the shield machine,
(b) projecting said light beam to a pair of targets each having
a scale and provided in a succeeding pipe and spaced from
each other by a pre-determined distance along the central
longitudinal axis of said succeeding pipe to form light
spots on the targets,
(c) projecting to said pair of targets a light beam emitted
from a second light emitter along said scheduled central
axis of the tunnel to be constructed to form further light
spots on the targets, said second light emitter being lo-
cated at the rear portion of the tunnel, and
(d) reading said light spots and said further light spots on
each targets on the respective scales and measuring a
distance from said reference position to one of said targets
to determine the angular and transversal displacements of
1. An interferometric camera comprising, in combination:
a base;
a coherent light source fixedly supported relative to the base;
a housing pivotably supported relative to the base about a
pivot axis;
a film support mechanism mounted on the housing; and
a series of optical elements positioned to receive a beam of
light projected by said coherent light source and to direct
the beam along the pivot axis of the housing and thence into
said housing, at least certain of the optical elements being
supported on the housing for pivotal motion therewith, said
series of optical elements being operative to direct at least a
portion of the light beam outwardly from said housing to
illuminate an object to be analyzed, whereby the housing
may be positionally adjusted relative to the base along said
pivot axis to interferometrically analyze surfaces having a
variety of inclinations relative to the housing.
4,392,746
PORTABLE PHOTOMETER
Graham A. W. Rook, London, and Colin H. Cameron, Chatham,
both of England, assignors to Portalab Instruments Limited,
London, England
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,530
Int. C1.3 GOIN 21/27
U.S. a. 356—409 5 Qaims
1. A photometer for measuring the transmission properties
of a fluid contained in a container having a transparent bottom,
said photometer comprising:
a monochromatic light source of a fixed wavelength;
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
609
a source of direct current connected to said monochromatic
light source;
a collimator assembly for said light source to form a colli-
mated, narrow beam of light;
a moveable tubular member having a base containing said
light source and said collimator assembly;
a locating member arranged to contact the top of the con-
tainer and to thereby locate the end of the tubular member
at a predetermined position with respect to the transparent
bottom of said container;
a photodetector device positioned beneath said container
and arranged to receive said collimated, narrow beam of
light.
a gear train cooperating with said motor means to drive a
display; and
a frame plate supporting said rotor and said gear train, said
MOS integrated circuit and said driving coil being
positioned in approximately opposite positions on said
frameplate, and said gear train being positioned be-
tween said MOS integrated circuit and
said driving coil;
a battery positioned on one side of said frame plate, the area
of said movement being substantially equal to the area of
said battery;
4,392,747
DISPLAY DEVICE STRUCTURE
Akio Kumada, Kokubunji; Takahiko Ihochi, Koganei; Makoto
Homma, Hamuramachi, and Masashi Tanaka, Koganei, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,976
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1979, 54-136404
Int. a? G04C 23/02. 21/16
U.S. a. 368—88 13 Claims
f^
■r~7--
u\
T~
23 16 17 aD e 18
1. A display device structure comprising an electrically
conductive casing; a display panel placed in the casing; a trans-
parent covering and vibrating plate member having its periph-
eral portion carried on the casing and being on a front side of
the display panel; a transparent piezoelectric plate and a pair of
transparent electrodes sandwiching the piezoelectric plate, the
piezoelectric plate and electrodes being secured to and integral
with the covering and vibrating plate member so that mechani-
cal force produced by the piezoelectric plate is effectively
transmitted to the plate member, wherein an elastic and electri-
cally conductive member is provided between the peripheral
portion of the plate member and the casing; and a double layer
including a frame-like blind layer and an electrically conduc-
tive frame-like layer, the frame-like blind layer being in contact
with the peripheral portion of the plate member and the electri-
cally conductive frame-like layer being in electrical contact
with the casing.
__ 4,392,748
QUARTZ CRYSTAL WATCH
Masahito Yoshino, Suwa, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Suwa Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed No?. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,730
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 6, 1979, 54-143580
I ; Int. a.3 G04C 23/02; G04B 37/00
U.S. a. 368—88 28 Qaims
1. A quartz crystal watch comprising:
a movement, said movement including:
vibrator means providing a standard frequency signal;
a MOS integrated circuit having electronic circuit means
for operating on said standard frequency signal and
outputting signals for driving motor means;
motor means for converting said output signals from said
electronic circuit means into mechanical motion, said
motor means including a permanent magnet rotor,
plate-type stator, and driving coil, said rotor, stator and
coi not overlapping one another;
an insulating plate positioned between said battery and said
one side of said frame plate, said vibrator means, circuit
means, motor means and gear train being positioned on the
other side of said frame plate, said battery being positioned
to overlap said driving coil, said MOS integrated circuit
and said gear train; and
a battery lead plate for connecting said battery with said
MOS integrated circuit, at least a part of said lead plate
being positioned in contacting opposition with an outer
peripery portion of said battery, said battery lead plate
supporting said battery relative to said movement and said
frame plate.
610
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,749
INSTRUMENT FOR DETERMINING COINQDENCE
AND ELAPSE TIME BETWEEN INDEPENDENT
SOURCES OF RANDOM SEQUENTIAL EVENTS
James I. Clemmons, Jr., Newport News, Va., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Administrator
of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,191
Int. a.3 G04F 8/00; G04B 47/00
U.S. a. 368—118 7 aaims
case having at least one rotatable pointer, a dial face in the case
over which said at least one pointer sweeps about an axis, a
glass connected to said case and covering said dial face and at
least one pointer, at least one illuminator in the case for illumi-
nating the dial face and at least one pointer, and a ring with a
face carrying at least one marking rotatably mounted about the
axis of said at least one pointer under said glass, said ring face
facing said glass to be illuminated by said illuminator along
with said dial face and at least one pointer, said ring face being
conically inclined toward the axis and away from said glass.
37 71
4,392,751
DAMPED BEARING DEVICE
Michiaki Ida, Chiyodamura; Noriaki Hagiwara, Amimachi;
Naoyoshi Yamago, Tamarimura; Masahiro Yoshioka,
Sakuramura, and Katsuaki Kikuchi, Tsuchiura, all of Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,658
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1980, 55/74264
Int. a.3 F16C 27/02, 32/06
U.S. a. 384—99 3 Qaims
1. An instrument for determining coincidence between a
primary external source of pulses and one or more other exter-
nal sources of pulses comprising:
means receiving said primary external source of pulses for
generating a start pulse, a reset pulse and a coincidence
aperture pulse each time a primary external source pulse is
received;
means receiving said coincidence aperture pulse and the
pulses from said other external sources of pulses for pro-
ducing a coincidence pulse each time a pulse from said
other external sources of pulses coincides with said coinci-
dence aperture pulse; and
means receiving said start pulses, said reset pulses and said
coincidence pulses for measuring the time intervals be-
tween coincidences.
4,392,750
CLOCK WITH ROTATABLE RING
Eduard Mettler, Liestal, Switzerland, assignor to Revue Thom-
men AG, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,390
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 23,
1980, 8011102[U]
Int. a.' GOID 11/28
U.S. a. 368—228 18 Qaims
3. In a damped bearing device having a housing, a bearing
which supp>orts a rotary shaft, a resilient bearing support by
which said bearing is supported on said housing, and a fluid
film damper formed between said housing and the outer pe-
ripheral surface of said bearing, so that the vibration generated
in the bearing and the shaft system is damped by said fluid film
damper and by said resilient bearing support,
the improvement comprising means provided in said fluid
film damper and adapted for adjusting the damping coeffi-
cient thereof, wherein said means for adjusting the damp-
ing coefficient of said fluid damper is adapted for variably
adjusting both the fluid film gap in said fluid film damper
and the area of action of the fluid film of said fluid film
damper, and wherein said means for adjusting the damp-
ing coefficient of said fluid film damper includes
a bearing having a tapered outer peripheral surface on which
the fluid film acts, said tapered outer peripheral surface
having recesses formed therein; and
a bearing back-up member having a tapered inner peripheral
surface opposing to said tapered outer surface of said
bearing, said tapered inner j)eripheral surface having re-
cesses formed therein, said bearing back-up member being
supported in said housing in such a manner as to be able to
move in the axial direction and to turn in the circumferen-
tial direction.
1. A clock comprising, a case, a clockwork mounted in said
4,392,752
OIL SEAL FOR BEARINGS OF TURBOCHARGER
Masami Shimizu, Chiba, and Juiyi Yasunobe, Okuwa, both of
Japan, assignors to Ishikawiyima-Harima Jukogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,700
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 19, 1980, 55-
117288[U]
Int. Q.J F16C 33/74
UJS. Q. 384—135 1 Qaim
1. In a turbocharger comprising a casing, operating means
such as a turbine and a blower within spaced casing parts
respectively, a rotary shaft within the casing on the ends of
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
611
which the operating means are respectively mounted, spaced
bearings for the shaft which are respectively inboard the two
operating means, an oil chamber between the bearings, and
an oil seal for preventing leakage of oil from the oil chamber
to the casing part of an operating means, comprising
(a), an oil slinger mounted on the shaft between an operat-
ing means casing part and the adjacent bearing, and
having two axially spaced frusto-conical oil slinger
surfaces each of which diverges toward the adjacent
bearing and the oil chamber, the diameter of the surface
adjacent the bearing being greater than that of the
surface adjacent the operating means,
(b). each oil slinger surface having an annular groove.
wherein said mounting member is made of die cast alumi-
num alloy and has a radially-extending mounting flange;
(3) support means for supporting said bearing member inside
said mounting member;
(4) a lubricant-impregnated wicking material, impregnated
with aluminum bearing oil, located inside said bearing
assembly and in said radial aperture of the bearing mem-
ber, said portion located in said radial aperture being
adapted to contact said rotatable shaft; and,
(5) cap means for retaining said lubricant-impregnated wick-
ing material inside said bearing assembly.
4,392,754
MAGNETIC DOT MATRIX PRINTING METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Robert Adler, Northfield, 111., assignor to Extel Corporation,
Northbrook, III.
FUed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,716
Int Q.' B41J 3/12. 27/16. 3/16
U.S. Q. 400—119 48 Qaims
(c). two seal plates connected to the casing, each of which
is aligned with one of the oil slinger surfaces and has an
opening surrounding the surface, the surface defining
each opening being parallel to and spaced outwardly
from the adjacent frusto-conical surface of the oil
slinger, thereby forming between each oil slinger sur-
face and the surrounding seal plate a frusto-conical
space which diverges toward the adjacent bearing and
the oil chamber, and
(d). a seal ring mounted on the frusto-conical surrounding
surface of each seal plate and positioned within the
annular groove in the adjacent oil slinger surface.
4,392,753
CARTRIDGE BEARING ASSEMBLY
Martin L. Abel, Franklin, Mich., assignor to Permawick Bearing
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 81,614, Oct. 3, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,098
Int. a.3 F16C 77/02
U.S. Q. 384—136 12 Qaims
1. A bearing assembly for supporting a rotatable shaft to be
joumaled in the bearing assembly, comprising:
(1) a separate nonporous bearing member made of die cast
aluminum alloy having a central bore sized to receive the
rotatable shaft in a bearing relationship, said bearing mem-
ber having a spherical shape and having a radial aperture
extending from its central bore to its outer surface;
(2) a mounting member wherein said mounting member has
an outer surface which is at least partially cylindrical and
an inner surface which is at least partially cylindrical and
1. A method of magnetic dot matrix printing, for printing a
character text, character-by-character, on a sheet of non-mag-
netic paper, comprising the following steps in sequence:
A. positioning a sheet of non-magnetic paper on a platen of
erasable permanent magnet material with the platen
aligned with a portion of the paper comprising a location
for a line of text;
B. moving a magnetic recording head, comprising a plurality
of electromagnets having magnetizing poles correspond-
ing to a group of character matrix dots, along a print path
transversing the text line location, in closely spaced rela-
tion to one platen surface;
C. magnetizing dot-size portions of the platen in accordance
with predetermined patterns constituting magnetic images
of the characters for a line of text by selectively energizing
the electromagnets for limited intervals during step B;
D. developing visible images of the data characters on the
paper by applying limited quantities of a magnetic toner to
the exposed surface of the paper overiying the platen
generally concurrently with formation of the magnetic
images in step C; and
E. fixing the visible toner images on the paper.
26. A magnetic dot matrix printer for printing a data charac-
ter text, character-by-character, on a sheet of non-magnetic
paper, comprising:
an elongated strip platen of erasable permanent magnet
material;
means for positioning a sheet of non-magnetic paper on one
surface of the platen with the platen extending across the
paper in alignment with a portion of the paper comprising
a location for a line of text;
carriage means reciprocally movable along a print path
adjacent the platen, from one end of the text-line location
to the other and back again;
magnetic recording head means, mounted on the carriage
means and comprising a plurality of electromagnets hav-
ing magnetizing poles corresponding to a group of charac-
ter matrix dots disposed in closely spaced proximity to one
platen surface, for magnetizing dot-size portions of the
612
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
platen in accordance with predetennined patterns consti-
tuting magnetic images of the characters for a line of text
by selective energization of the electromagnets during
movement of the carriage;
magnetic toner dispensing means, mounted on the carriage
means, for applying limited quantities of a magnetic toner
to the exposed surface of the paper overlying the platen
generally concurrently with formation of the aforesaid
magnetic images to develop visible images on the paper;
fixing means for fixing the visible toner images on the paper
to complete printing of a line of text; and
magnetic erasing means, mounted on the carriage means, for
erasing the magnetic images from the platen in prepara-
tion for printing a further line of text.
4,392,755
MAGNETIC DOT MATRIX PRINTING
Patricio E. Donoso, Streamwood, 111., assignor to Extel Corpora-
tion, Northbrook, 111.
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,649
Int. a.^ B41J 3/12. 27/16, 3/16
liJS. a. 400—119 22 Qaims
tuting magnetic images of the characters for a line of text by
selective energization of the electromagnets;
magnetic toner dispensing means for applying limited quanti-
ties of a magnetic toner to the exjxKed surface of the paper
overlying the platen to develop visible images, correspond-
ing to the magnetic images, on the paper; and
magnetic erasing means for erasing the magnetic images from
the platen in preparation for printing a further line of text;
the improvement comprising:
platen displacement means for displacing the platen, in a direc-
tion generally transverse to the paper surface, between a
print position engaging the paper and an inactive position,
the displacement between the two platen positions being
sufficient to preclude substantial magnetic attraction be-
tween the magnetic images and the visible toner images
when the platen is in its inactive position;
line feed means for advancing the paper, in a direction substan-
tially parallel to the paper surface, to move the visible toner
images to a fixing p>osition displaced from the platen print
position; and
fixing means for fixing the visible toner images on the paper,
while at the fixing {)osition, to complete printing of a line of
text on the paper.
4,392,756
SERIAL PRINTING APPARATUS
Hyun C. Lee, Seoul, Rep. of Korea, assignor to Gold Star Com-
pany, Ltd., Seoul, Rep. of Korea
FUed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,898
Claims priority, application Rep. of Korea, Dec. 31, 1979,
79/7894[lJ]
Int. a.5 B41J 1/30
U.S. CI. 400—144.2 3 Claims
1. In a method of magnetic dot matrix printing, for printing
a character text on a sheet of non-magnetic paper, comprising
the following steps in sequence:
A. positioning a sheet of non-magnetic paper on a platen of
permanent magnet material with the platen in a predeter-
mined print position;
B. magnetizing dot size portions of the platen in accordance
with predetermined patterns constituting magnetic images of
the data characters for a line of text; and
C. developing visible images of the characters on the paper by
applying limited quantities of a magnetic toner to the ex-
posed surface of the paper overlying the platen;
the improvement comprising the following additional steps:
D. displacing the platen from its print position, away from the
paf>er, in a direction generally transverse to the surface of
the paper, through a distance sufficient to preclude substan-
tial magnetic attraction between the magnetic images and
the toner comprising the developed visible images;
E. advancing the paper, in a direction substantially parallel to
the paper surface, by at least one line space, to move the
visible toner images to a fixing position clear of the printing
position of the platen after step D; and
F. fixing the visible toner images on the paper at the fixing
position.
13. In a magnetic dot matrix printer for printing a character
text on a sheet of non-magnetic paper, of the kind comprising:
an elongaged strip platen of permanent magnet material;
means for positioning a sheet of non-magnetic paper on one
surface of the platen with the platen extending across the
paper in alignment with a portion of the paper comprising a
location for a line of text;
magnetic recording means, comprising a plurality of' electro-
magnets having magnetizing poles corresponding to a group
of character matrix dots, for magnetizing dot size portions of
the platen in accordance with predetermined patterns consti-
11 13
1. A printing apparatus comprising:
a printwheel with a hub and spokes extending therefrom,
each of said spokes having at least two different types of
character slugs thereon;
first drive means attached to the printwheel for rotating said
printwheel;
shifting means attached to said first drive means for shifting
said printwheel and said first drive means up or down with
rotational motion to place a selected character slug at a
desired printing position; said shifting means including:
a latchbase having a first and a second end;
a hinge connected to said first end of said latchbase;
a slot positioned in said latchbase near said second end of
said latchbase;
a spring having a first and a second end, positioned in said
slot, said first end of said spring being attached to one
end of said slot;
a movable springbar connected to said second end of said
spring; and
a crank pin positioned in said slot, and attached to said
springbar, said crank pin being for driving said latch-
base by sliding along said slot; and
second drive means for driving said shifting means.
July 12, 1*3
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
613
4,392,757
BACKLASH AND RUNOUT COMPENSATOR FOR LEAD
SCREW DRIVES
Clifford M. Denny, Lexington, Ky., and Charles W. Wampler,
II, Harrisonburg, Va., assignors to International Business
Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
FUed May 22, 1980, Ser. No. 152,206
Int. a.3 B41J 19/20
U.S. a. 400ii328 21 Oaims
i'iC6i
"'.. ,_-!l« « ^ H
1. Drive apparatus for a work member, said apparatus com-
prising:
a lead screw having threads thereon, and motor means for
effecting bi-directional rotation of said lead screw;
first and second laterally spaced apart threaded followers on
said lead screw, first biasing means intermediate said
threaded followers for biasing said threaded followers
against opposite flanks of said threads of said lead screw to
thereby inhibit backlash intermediate said followers; and
second biasing means intermediate said work member and at
least one of said followers for effecting coupling between
said work member and said followers while controlling
backlash therebetween.
4,392,758
UNDERSCORE ERASE
Dayid J. Bowles, Winchester, Ky.; Douglas E. Qancy, Austin,
Tex.; Carl F. Johnson, Lexington, Ky., and Danny M. Neal,
Austin, Tex., assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 908,314, May 22, 1978, abandoned.
This application Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,878
Int. a.3 B41J 29/16
U.S. a. 400—697.1 1 Qaim
1. A method of erasing characters of a width greater than an
underscore and said underscore on a typewriter having print-
ing means for selecting and printing proportionally spaced
characters of varying widths, said characters including an
underscore;
said printing means operable to print sequentially in response
to commands from a keyboard and including means for
erasing said characters and underscores;
said typewriter having electronic controls and proportional
escapement capabilities and responsive to electronic com-
mands;
said method comprising the steps of:
generating codes indicative of said keyboard commands
and characters;
providing an alterable memory means including means for
storing said codes indicative of said keyboard com-
mands and said characters;
storing said codes in said memory means in response to
said keyboard commands;
actuating said printing means to effect selection and print-
ing of said characters and underscores in accordance
with said generated codes;
moving said printing means in a forward direction, in
response to said keyboard commands and in accordance
with the amount of distance for selected ones of said
keyboard commands in accordance with predetermined
amounts of width of said characters associated with said
keyboard commands;
altering said codes stored in said memory means upon the
printing of an underscore, to indicate the existance of an
underscore;
generating an erase signal to initiate an erase sequence of
operations comprising:
reading said codes stored in said alterable memory means
in reverse order of storage in response to said erase
signal;
determining whether a character represented by said code
is underscored;
commanding a reverse movement of said printing means;
determining the width of movement associated with said
codes stored individually in reverse order of storing in
said memory means in response to said erase signal;
determining the width of movement associated with said
underscore where said altered codes represents an un-
derscored character in response to said erase signal;
determining the least width of movement associated with
said underscore and said character which is represented
by said altered code;
moving said printing means in reverse direction in re-
sponse to said commanding a reverse movement, a
width of movement determining as said least width;
obliterating said underscore;
determining the excess of width of movement associated
with the character represented by said code over the
width of movement associated with said underscore, if
any,
moving said printing means in reverse direction a width
equal to said excess of width;
obliterating the remainder of said underscore;
obliterating said character represented by said altered
code, whereby characters having a proportionally
spaced relation to other characters, wider than the
width of an underscore may be erased along with the
underscore without leaving residual portions of said
underscore.
4,392,759
QUICK DISCONNECT MECHANISM FOR SHAFTS
Paul M. Cook, South Burlington, Vt., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Burlington, Vt.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,459
Int. CI.5 B25G 3/00: F16D 1/00; F16G 11/00
U.S. a. 403—11 3 Claims
1. A quick disconnect mechanism for the transmission of
torsional power between two concentric shafts, comprising:
a first shaft having a first longitudinal axis;
a second shaft in operable engagement with said first shaft
and having a second longitudinal axis which is coaxial
with said first longitudinal axis;
collar means interengaged with and carried by said second
shaft and having relative longitudinal and torsional dis-
placement with respect thereto;
614
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
first spring means interengaged with and carried by said
collar means and said second shaft which biases said collar
means to a first longitudinal disposition with respect to
said second shaft;
said collar means and said second shaft having first cam and
cam follower means in mutual engagement for converting
4,392,761
ROTARY MACHINING TOOLS WITH SIDE COOLANT
DELIVERY
Otto Eckle, Loechgau, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Komet
Stahlhalter- und Werkzeugfabrik Robert Breuning GmbH,
Besigheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,039
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 13,
1980, 8012959[U1
Int. a.3 B23B 27/10. 51/06. 5/22. 5/34
U.S. CL 408—59 18 Qaims
torsional movement of said collar means with respect to
said second shaft to longitudinal movement of said collar
means with respect to said second shaft against the bias of
said first spring means and thus translate said collar means
to a second longitudinal disposition with respect to said
second shaft.
4,392,760
SURFACE FLOW AIR CONVEYOR WITH PLENUM
M0UNTE!D fan WHEEL
Rudolph E. Futer, Oakland, Calif., assignor to Futerized Sys-
tems, Inc., Hayward, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 239,366, Mar. 2, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 80,076, Sep. 28, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 386,512
Int. a.3 B65G 51/02
VS. a. 406—88 2 Oaims
1. An air conveyor for elevating and moving objects longitu-
dinally along said conveyor comprising:
a. an elongated conveyor member formed with a plurality of
directional slit orifices extending substantially evenly
spaced there along and substantially the entire length of
said elongated conveyor member;
b. an elongated plenum having a bottom wall and sidewalls
immediately adjacent to and co-extensive and communi-
cating with said conveyor member and having upstream
and downstream ends and formed with a circular supply-
air inlet opening in one of said sidewalls having a diameter
less than the width of said sidewall;
c. a high performance wheel fan member for pressurizing
said plenum totally enclosed within said plenum member
and mounted in communication with said supply-air inlet
opening.
1. An arrangement for supplying a cooling medium to a
rotating metal-machining cutting tool provided with cooling
medium ducts which communicate with cooling medium bores
provided in a cylindrical shank thereof, including a cooling
medium supply ring which is supported on and sealed with
respect to said cylindrical shank of said tool, can be connected
radially outwardly by releasable coupling means with station-
ary cooling medium supply means and is connected radially
inwardly by an annular duct with said cooling medium bores in
said shank of said tool, said shank of said tool being receivable
in a drive spindle rotatably supported in a housing, said releas-
able coupling means including a coupling head which is sup-
ported near said cooling medium supply ring, is in permanent
communication with said supply means and has an outlet bore
extending substantially radially with respect to the axis of
rotation of said tool shank into a generally radially inwardly
facing first sealing surface thereof, and wherein said cooling
medium supply ring has a second sealing surface which coop-
erates with and is arranged to sealingly engage said first sealing
surface and in which is provided a substantially radially ex-
tending inlet bore connected to said annular duct, the improve-
ment comprising wherein said cooling medium supply ring is
rotatably supported on said tool shank and has a radially pro-
jecting coupling piece which has thereon said second sealing
surface; wherein both said first and second sealing surfaces are
substantially flat; wherein said first sealing surface is inclined,
in the circumferential direction of said cooling medium supply
ring at an acute angle of from 2° to 10* with respect to a line
tangent to a circle which is concentric with the axis of said tool
shank, which tangent line extends through said outlet bore
approximately perpendicular thereto, wherein the distance
between said first sealing surface and the axis of said tool shank
decreases progressively in the direction of rotation of said tool;
wherein said first sealing surface, in the general direction of the
axis of said tool shank, diverges in a direction toward a free end
of said tool at an acute angle of from 0* to 10% inclusive; and
wherein said second sealing surface has substantially the same
inclination as said first sealing surface.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
615
4,392,762
LOCKING WEB FTITING WITH SWIVEL
Charles F. Crissy, and Paul M. Holmes, both of Jackson, Mich.,
assignors to Aeroquip Corporation, Jackson, Mich.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,028
Int. a.' A44B 21/00; B60P 7/06: B61D 45/00
U.S. a. 410—116 8 Qaims
said inner edge thereof extending from the associated outer
side, a keeper plate having a web receiving opening defined
therein, an inner edge, and a third latch tab defined upon said
keeper plate inner edge, said keeper plate having a wider web
receiving opening than that of said side plates and being dis-
posed between said side plates' inner sides, a web inserted
through said side and keepcT plates web receiving openings
defining a loop, an abutment defined upon said keeper plate
extending from the plane thereof adapted to engage a side plate
inner edge when said side and keeper plates are in parallel
engaged relationship, and a U shaped anchor having leg por-
tions interconnected by a convex base extending through said
side plates' anchor receiving openings loosely supporting said
side plates on said base in a predetermined manner whereby
said plates swivel with respect to said anchor, said leg portions
including aligned first and second sets of projections for affix-
ing said anchor to a support member through an opening, said
latch tabs being disposed adjacent each other and adjacent said
first set of projections.
1. A releasable fitting for web straps wherein the fitting is
mounted within an opening defined in a support member hav-
ing a locking dimension and a wall thickness compnsmg, in
combination, a pair of substantially flat side plates each having
a web receiving opening, an anchor receiving opening, an
inner edge, an outer side and an inner side, a latch tab defined
upon each side plate adjacent said inner edge thereof and
transversely disposed to the plane of the associated side plate
extending from said outer side thereof, a substantially flat
keeper plate having a web receiving opening defined therein,
an inner edge, and a third latch tab defined upon said keeper
plate inner edge, said keeper plate having a wider web receiv-
ing opening than that of said side plates and being interposed
between said side plates' inner sides, a web inserted through
said web receiving openings of said side and keeper plates
defining a loop, an abutment defined on said keeper plate
extending from the plane thereof adapted to abut against a side
plate inner edge when said side and keeper plates are in parallel
engaged relationship, and a U shaped anchor having an arcuate
base loosely extending through said side plates' anchor receiv-
ing openings whereby said side plates swivel thereon and are
oriented to said anchor base in a predetermined manner, said
arcuate base including leg portions each having first and sec-
ond edges defined thereon extending transversely to the length
of said base, a first projection defined upon each leg portion
first edge extending therefrom and a second projection defined
upon each leg portion second edge extending therefrom, said
first and second projections defined upon a common leg por-
tion being in substantial alignment and said first and second
projections being in alignment, respectively, said first projec-
tions being of greater length than said second projections and
the spacing between said first and second leg portion edges
being less than the locking dimension of the support member
opening whereby said first projections can be inserted into the
opening by tilting the anchor, displacing the anchor in the
direction of said first edges and then inserting said second
projections into the opening, said side plates swiveling upon
said anchor base and said latch tabs extending into the opening
at all swivel positions of said plates preventing sufficient dis-
placement of said anchor within the opening to remove said
second projections therefrom, said wide keeper plate web
receiving opening permitting displacement of said keeper plate
to selectively remove said third latch tob from the opening
permitting removal of said anchor therefrom.
5. A releasable fitting for web straps comprising, in combina-
tion, a pair of side plates each having a web receiving opening,
an anchor receiving opening, an inner edge, an outer side and
an inner side, a latch tab defined upon each side plate adjacent
4,392,763
DEVICE FOR USE WITH A TOGGLE BOLT
Russell L. Brown, 1620 Kingsbury La., Oklahoma City, Okla.
73116
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 178,830
Int. a.3 F16B 27/00
U.S. Q. 411—342 4 Qaims
1. A securing device for fastening to a securing member of
predetermined thickness through a hole of predetermined size
in said securing member, comprising:
a threaded bolt of predetermined diameter;
a toggle threadable to said bolt having a pair of spring
opened wings for expanding and bridging said hole and
thereby anchoring said bolt to said securing member as
said toggle is threadably tightened by said bolt against said
securing member;
a spool for extending about said bolt in said hole in said
securing member having a supportive axial length approx-
imately equal to said predetermined thickness of said
securing member for supporting said toggle as it is thread-
ably tightened against said securing member to prevent
said toggle from crushing said securing member, said
spool having an axial opening through which said bolt can
closely extend and a radial periphery for closely fitting
within said hole in said securing member such that said
bolt is radially fixed in said hole when said spool extends
about said bolt in said hole;
a cantilever guide leg for orienting and guiding said toggle
with respect to said securing member as said toggle is
threadably tightened against said securing member, said
guide leg freely extending axially from the radial periph-
ery of said spool such that said bolt extends parallel to said
guide leg and such that said toggle is fixedly oriented
between said guide leg and said bolt when said spool is
positioned in said hole in said securing member and said
bolt extends through said opening in said spool and said
toggle is threadedly tightened against said securing mem-
ber by said bolt;
means for fixedly orienting said spool in said hole of said
securing member such that said toggle is oriented with
616
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
respect to said securing member as said toggle is thread-
edly tightened against said securing member when said
spool is fixedly oriented in said hole; and
means for changing the radial size of said spool such that said
spool can be adjusted to fit securing members having holes
of differing sizes, including a bushing which can be con-
nected about the periphery of said spool.
2. A support and orienUtion device for use with a conven-
tional toggle bolt for fastening to a securing member such as a
wall through a hole of predetermined size in said securing
member, said toggle bolt being of the type having:
a threaded bolt of predetermined diameter;
a toggle threadable to said bolt having a pair of spring
opened wings for expanding and bridging said hole and
thereby anchoring said bolt to said securing member as
said toggle is threadably tightened by said bolt against said
securing member;
said support and orientation device comprising:
a spool assembly means for radially supporting said bolt
within said hole, axially supporting said toggle to pre-
vent crushing of said support member as said toggle is
tightened against said support member, and guiding said
toggle to a predetermined orientation with respect to
said support member as said toggle is tightened by said
bolt, said spool assembly means being removable from
and attachable to said toggle bolt so that said toggle bolt
can be used conventionally without said spool assembly
means, said spool assembly including:
a molded plastic spool for extending about said bolt in said
hole in said securing member having a supportive axial
length approximately equal to said predetermined thick-
-. ness of said securing member for supporting said toggle
as it is threadably tightened against said securing mem-
ber to prevent said toggle from crushing said securing
member, said sp>ool having a cylindrical axial opening
through which said bolt can closely extend and a radial
periphery for closely fitting within said hole in said
securing member such that said bolt is radially fixed in
said hole when said spool extends about said bolt in said
hole;
a single cantilever guide leg for orienting and guiding said
toggle with respect to said securing member as said
toggle is threadably tightened against said securing
member, said guide leg freely extending axially from the
radial periphery of said spool such that said bolt extends
parallel to said guide leg and such that said toggle is
fixedly oriented between said guide leg and said bolt
when said spool is positioned in said hole in said secur-
ing member and said bolt extends through said opening
in said spool and said toggle is threaded! y tightened
against said securing member by said bolt;
means for fixedly orienting said spool in said hole of said
securing member such that said toggle is oriented with
respect to said securing member as said toggle is thread-
ed! y tightened against said securing member when said
spool is fixedly oriented in said hole; and
means for changing the supportive axial length of said
spool such that the length of said spool can be adjusted
to fit securing members of differing thicknesses, com-
prising at least one disc which connected to an axial end
of said spool.
to a frustoconical necking surface by a first in-turned radius, an
inner cylindrical sizing surface joined to said frustoconical
necking surface by an out-turned radius, said sizing surface
terminating in a second in-turned radius; and said center ring
having an outer cylindrical sizing surface terminating in a third
in-turned radius; positioning said outer cylindrical sizing sur-
face in telescoped radially opposing relation to said guide
surface and said necking surface with said third in-tumed
radius generally radially opposing said out-turned radius; and
with said neck-in ring and said center ring in said telescoped
radially opposing relation effecting relative telescoping thereof
with a free end of a container body with the container body
being guided into engagement with said first in-tumed radius
and said frustoconical necking surface and being radially in-
wardly shaped thereby until a free edge of the container body
is generally overlapping said out-turned radius and said third
in-tumed radius; and then while retaining said center ring
stationary relative to the container body continuing the tele-
scoping of said neck-in ring and the container body until said
second in-tumed radius opposes said third in-tumed radius to
define on the container body a cylindrical end portion of re-
duced radius terminating in an in-tumed terminal portion for
facilitating the starting of the cylindrical end portion into
telescoped relation with another container component.
4,392,765
ANGLE STACKING AND INVERTING DEVICE
Dale S. Barton, Leetonia, and Richard M. Heck, Columbiana,
both of Ohio, assignors to Riise Engineering Company, Inc.,
North Lima, Ohio
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,082
Int. a.3 B65G 57/081, 57/18
U.S. a. 414—30 4 Claims
4,392,764
NECKED-IN CONTAINER BODY AND APPARATUS FOR
AND METHOD OF FORMING SAME
Charles S. Kubis, Weston, Conn., and John Walter, Evergreen
Park, 111., assignors to Continental Can Company, Inc., Stam-
ford. Conn.
FUed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,685
Int. a.5 B21D 51/26
U.S. a. 413—69 8 Oaims
1. A method of necking-in a container body comprising the
steps of providing a neck-in ring and a center ring; said neck-in
ring having an inner generally cylindrical guide surface joined
1. An improvement in a device that groups and stacks
lengths of ferro-magnetic material, said device having a first
conveyor with a plurality of spaced material engaging portions
on which said lengths of material are positioned, stops at one
July 12, 1983
r
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
617
end thereof, groups of link chain conveyors arranged with
their adjacent ends in overlapping side by side relation, one of
said chain link conveyors being movable vertically between a
first position below the material engaging portion of said first
conveyor to a second position above the surface of the material
engaging portion of said first conveyor, and one of said chain
link conveyors positioned transversely of said first conveyor
between said spaced material engaging portion thereof for
moving said lengths of material sidewardly from said first
conveyor to selected stations, the improvement comprising a
handling mechanism adjacent said stations arranged to magnet-
ically pick up said material at said stations and deposit it in a
predetermined position, said handling mechanism comprising a
device selectively engagable with the upper and lower surfaces
of said material and movable in an arcuate path between said
selected stations and said predetermined position and means
for moving said device and energizing and de-energizing the
same.
4,392,766
AUTOMATIC FEEDING APPARATUS
Thomas O. Blunt, Louisville, Ky., assignor to General Electric
Company, Louisville, Ky.
IFiled Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,223
Int. a.3 B65G 59/04: B65H 3/16
U.S. CI. 414—113 6 Qaims
1. Automatic feeding apparatus for transferring magnetiz-
able work pieces to a work station comprising:
a robot having a work arm pivoted about a point and having
a work piece pick-up end movable through a segment of a
sphere with vertical movement of the work arm about the
pivot point scribing an arc, said work arm having means to
pick up, hold and release a work piece;
a work piece stacking assembly including:
a base for holding a vertical stack of magnetizable work
pieces;
a vertical butt plate above the base curved correspond-
ingly to the arc scribed by the vertical movement of the
work arm;
magnet means operable to magnetize the work pieces
through the vertical curved butt plate to set up a repel-
ling force between the work pieces to vertically sepa-
rate the work pieces in the upper portion of the stack
and urge the separated work pieces against the vertical
curved butt plate, and
a work station for receiving the work piece located within
the sphere segment through which the work piece
pick-up arm end of the robot is movable.
4,392,767
STORAGE APPARATUS INCLUDING CONVEYOR
MEANS
Klaus Ischebeck, EUsabethstrasse 20, 4503 Dissen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,399
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 21,
1980, 3010884
Int. a.3 B65G 7/06
U.S. a. 414—136 14 Claims
1. Storage apparatus for articles capable of being retrieved
comprising at least one conveyor means disposed generally on
a plurality of planes located one above the other, said con-
veyor means being arranged in a generally sinuous manner in
each plane with the conveyor means in each plane comprising
a plurality of joined loops each having generallly U-shaped
portions and generally straight portions with said straight
portions being disposed side-by-side in generally parallel array.
_V^
^^^^
_i . I *»
7\ (r\ (F\ rP^ f^ r^ r7^
U
jmm'm'i^^^
i: + *'-
"T
a receiving station means for receiving articles and transferring
said articles to said conveyor means, and take-off means for
taking off articles from said conveyor means, said take-off
means being arranged within at least one of said U-shaped
portions for taking off articles from said conveyor means as
said article is disposed in said at least one U-shaped portion of
said conveyor means.
4,392,768
INTERMEDIATE STORAGE BAKING TINS
Pieter Van Capelleveen, Zeist, Netherlands, assignor to Gebr.
van Capelleveen B.V., Utrecht, Netherlands
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,040
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 28, 1979,
7907258
Int. a.3 B65G 1/06
U.S. CI. 414—278 4 Qaims
jn
1 "c^
tr
3^3 (
1. Apparatus for storing a plurality of different types of
baking tins comprising: a baking tin supply conveyor; a baking
tin discharge conveyor spaced from and having a portion
generally parallel to a portion of said supply conveyor; a plu-
rality of storage racks arranged side-by-side between said
portions of said conveyors, each storage rack having a supply
end facing said supply conveyor and a discharge end facing
said discharge conveyor and each storage rack including a
plurality of horizontal carriers extending from the supply end
to the discharge end of the respective rack, the carriers of each
rack having a length sufficient to receive a horizontal row of
baking tins and being arranged one above another in vertically
spaced-apart relationship; and transfer means for removing
1032 O.G.— 24
618
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
baking tins from said supply conveyor, delivering the removed
baking tins to the supply ends of said carriers in a manner to
form horizontal rows of baking tins on said carriers, removing
baking tins from the discharge ends of said carriers and deliver-
ing the so-removed baking tins to said discharge conveyor, said
transfer means including a first endless conveyor located be-
tween said supply conveyor and the supply ends of said racks,
said first conveyor having an upwardly movable run and a
downwardly movable run, said runs having baking tin pickup
and releasing means projecting therefrom and said upwardly
movable run facing said supply conveyor, said transfer means
further including a second endless conveyor located between
said discharge conveyor and the discharge ends of said racks,
said second conveyor having an upwardly movable run and a
downwardly movable run, said runs having baking tin pickup
and relea"ng means projecting therefrom and said down-
wardly movable run facing said discharge conveyor, said first
and second conveyors being movable parallel to their respec-
tive racks so as to be positionable adjacent an end of any de-
sired rack.
432,769
HEAVY DUTY MOBILE LOADING STRUCTURE AND
SYSTEM
Sterling W. Lowery, 6013 Pollard Dr., Richmond, Va. 23226
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,639
Int. a.3 B65G 67/04
U.S. a. 414—397 16 Claims
lengths of pipe from a horizontal pipe rack, transporting the
pipe linearly from the pipe rack to apparatus doing work on
the lengths of pipe and returning the worked pipe to the pipe
rack, said pipe handling mechanism comprising:
a base structure;
a pipe elevation frame;
first elevator means being a plurality of elevator leg struc-
tures being pivotally interconnected at the lower extremi-
ties thereof to said base and pivotally interconnected at
the upper extremities thereof to said pipe elevation frame;
first power means for selectively and controllably moving
said elevator leg structures and causing selective raising .
and lowering of said pipe elevation frame relative to said
base structure;
a plurality of angulated pipe transfer rollers being rotatably
supported by said pipe elevation frame and adapted, when
rotated, to impart spiral linear movement of pipe sup-
ported thereby;
means for imparting controlled rotation to at least one of
said angulated pipe transfer rollers;
pipe alignment and support roller means;
second elevator means being pivotal support means pivot-
ally interconnected at the lower extremities thereof to said
pipe eleva'ion frame and pivotally interconnected at the
upper extremities thereof to said pipe alignment and sup-
port roller means;
second power means for controllably moving said pipe
alignment and work support means;
control means selectively actuating said first and second
power means to elevate pipe from a pipe rack to a selected
elevation, transfer the pij)e linearly to accomplish working
thereof, elevate said pipe alignment and support roller
means to provide rotatable support for said pipe and re-
tract said pipe transfer rollers from contact with said pipe
during working of said pipe.
1. A heavy duty truck loading means carried on a mobile
transporter for receiving material pushed by the blade of a
bulldozer means onto the loading means for loading into a
truck, comprising: a self-propelled carrier, a ramp means
adapted to receive material bulldozed onto said ramp means, a
support on said carrier upon which said ramp means is mov-
ably mounted, a dump means carried by a support on said
carrier to hold said dump means above the truck to be loaded,
said ramp and dump means being independent elements having
powered means operative to raise and lower said ramp and
dump means independently one with respect to the other for
positioning the ramp means to receive material that is bull-
dozed thereonto and position said dump means to receive
material from said ramp and empty the material into said truck
positioned under said dump means.
4,392,770
PIPE HANDLING APPARATUS
Dale J. Castille, P.O. Box 2697, Lafayette, La. 70502
FUed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,070
Int. a.3 B65G 39/02
\5S, a. 414-432
^^^^.
4,392,771
LIFT SAFETY SWITCH SYSTEM
Raymond L. Smalley, Carey, Ohio, assignor to REB Manufac-
turing, Inc., Carey, Ohio
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,613
Int. a.3 B60P 1/46
U.S. a. 414—545 3 Qaims
HYMAULIC PUMP AND
15 Claims
1. A pipe handling mechanism for selectively transporting
1. In a fluid-operated lift comprising:
(A) a frame,
(B) a platform vertically foldable and vertically movable
relative to said frame,
(C) a fluid-operated reciprocating motor comprising a cylin-
der and a piston in said cylinder, said motor being con-
nected between said platform and said frame for moving
said platform to and from a vertical folded to a horizontal
position and to and from its highest horizontal position to
its lowest horizontal position.
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
619
(D) a source of power comprising an electric motor for
operating said reciprocating motor,
(E) an electric circuit and manually operated switch means
for controlling said electric motor for controlling said
reciprocating motor intermediate the limits of travel of
said platform relative to said frame, and
(F) a limit switch means for stopping the operation of said
reciprocating motor when said platform is in its highest
horizontal position between its limits of travel in a hori-
zontal position, and manual switch means for overriding
said limit switch to fold said platform into its vertical
position;
the improvement comprising:
(1) vertical slot means between said cylinder and said frame
for supporting said reciprocating motor and said platform
in said frame,
(2) microswitch means mounted on said frame adjacent said
reciprocating motor,
(3) cam means on said cylinder for operating said micro-
switch means when said reciprocating motor is raised in
said vertical slot means caused by an obstruction in the
downward path of movement of said platform from its
vertical folded position through is highest horizontal
position to its lowest horizontal position, and
(4) means responsive to the operation of said microswitch
means for controlling said reciprocating motor to discon-
tinue further downward movement of said reciprocating
motor.
4,392,772
LOAD LIFTING CARRIAGE HAVING SIDE SHIFT
ADJUSTABLE FORKS
Jerry L. Reeves, Dallas, Oreg., assignor to Towmotor Corpora-
tion, Mentor, Ohio
PCT No. PCT/US80/00380, § 371 Date Apr. 7, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 7, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02885, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 15, 1981
PCT Filed Apr. 7, 1980, Ser No. 245,239
Int. a.3 B66F 9/06
U.S. a. 414—667 13 Qaims
3. In a load lifting carriage (12) having upper and lower
spaced apart substantially horizontal rails (24,26), a pair of
opposite spaced apart sides (28,30) and a vertical centerline,
first and second forks (18,16) each being mounted on said rails
(24,26) and movable along said rails (24,26), and first and sec-
ond extensibly movable independently operable cylinders
(32,34) each being connected to said carriage (12); the im-
provement comprising:
first means (44) for selectively coupling said first cylinder
(32) to said first fork (18) at a first location longitudinally
relative to said first cylinder (32), at which said first fork
is movable in response to movement of said first cylinder
along said rails (24,26) between said centerline and a loca-
tion closely adjacent one of said sides (28,30), and for
coupling said first cylinder (32) to said first fork (18) at a
second location longitudinally relative to said first cylin-
der (32) and spaced from said first location, at which said
first fork is movable in response to movement of said first
cylinder along said rails (24,26) between a location spaced
a greater distance from said one side (28,30) to a location
past said centerline; and
second means (46) for coupling said second cylinder (34) to
said second fork (16) at a third location longitudinally
relative to said second cylinder (34), at which said second
fork (16) is movable in response to movement of said
second cylinder (34) along said rails (24,26) between said
centerline and a location closely adjacent the other of said
sides, and for coupling said second cylinder (34) to said
second fork (16) at a fourth location longitudinally rela-
tive to said second cylinder (34) and spaced from said
third location, at which said second fork (16) is movable in
response to movement of said second cylinder (34) along
said rails (24,26) between a location spaced a greater
distance from the other side (28) to a location past said
centerline.
4,392,773
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY WITH SHIFTABLE FORKS
Richard J. Johannson, Dallas, Oreg., assignor to Towmotor
Corporation, Mentor, Ohio
PCT No. PCr/US80/01265, § 371 Date Sep. 22, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 22, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO82/00997, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 1, 1982
PCT Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 261,105
Int. a.3 B66F 9/12
U.S. a. 414—667 9 Qaims
1. In a load lifting apparatus (10) having a generally verti-
cally oriented mast assembly (12) and a carriage assembly (16)
having an upper generally horizontal member (20) and a lower
generally horizontal member (22) and being mounted to and
translatable along said mast assembly (12), a side shifter (24)
having upper (26) and lower (28) generally horizontal bars
connected together and being mounted to and laterally trans-
latable along said members (20 and 22), and a generally "L"
shaped tine (36) having a generally vertical leg (38) having a
top end portion (40) and a bottom end portion (42) and a
generally horizontal leg (44) being associated with said side
shifter (24), the improvement comprising:
a roller bracket (17) connected to said generally horizontal
members (20 and 22) and rollably mounted on said mast
assembly (12);
means (52) for mounting said top end portion (40) of said
vertical leg (38) for transferring substantially only hori-
zonal forces from said tine (36) to said upper bar (26);
means (64) for mounting said bottom end portion (42) of said
leg (38) for transferring vertical forces directly from said
bottom end portion (42) of said vertical leg (38) of said tine
(36) to said lower bar (28); and
means (71) for maintaining said lower bar (28) from moving
laterally away from said lower member (22), said means
(71) being free from interference with relative longitudinal
movement between said lower bar (28) and said lower
member (22), said maintaining means (71) having a bracket
(74) and being connected to said roller bracket (17), said
620
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
bracket having a finger and said lower bar (28) having a
channel (70), said channel (70) extending longitudinally
along said lower bar (28) and said finger (76) extending
into said channel (70).
4^92,774
CLAM BUCKET ATTACHMENT
Dolphus W. Thomas, Jr., Rte. 1, Box 637, Bastrop, La. 71220
FUed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,400
Int. a.3 B66C 3/06: E02F 3/44
U.S. a. 414—726 8 Claims
lower member having a plurality of tines extending forwardly
from a block, each of said tines being rectangular in cross-sec-
tion over their entire length up to their forward ends, the
forward ends of each of said tines being curved upwardly from
the bottom surface of said tines to the top surface of said tines,
a handle portion extending rearwardly from said block, and a
single upper member having a flat planar grasper correspond-
ing in size to the said plurality of tines positioned substantially
parallel to said upper surface of each of said plurality of tines
with a handle portion extending rearwardly therefrom, the
1. A clam bucket attachment for mounting on the crowd of
a backhoe, comprising:
(a) A cable boom having a flange means at one end for
attachment to the crowd, said cable boom extending from
the end of the crowd;
(b) a front sheave rotatably carried by the free end of said
cable boom and a rear sheave spaced from said front
sheave and rotatably carried by said cable boom forward
of said flange means;
(c) a bucket support carried by said cable boom and further
comprising a pair of pivot brackets in spaced, generally
parallel relationship extending from said cable boom; a
pivot bracket plate connecting said pivot brackets; a first
collar upward standing from said pivot bracket plate
between said pivot brackets; a bucket support plate be-
neath and adjacent said pivot bracket plate for carrying a
clam bucket; a second collar attached to said bucket sup-
port plate and extending upwardly and concentrically
through said first collar; and a support cap secured to the
top of said second collar above said first collar, whereby
said bucket support plate and said second collar are rotat-
- able with respect to said pivot bracket plate and said first
collar, and the clam bucket is rotatable with respect to said
cable boom; and
(d) a cable having one end secured to the piston of a hydrau-
lic cylinder attached to the crowd of the backhoe, said
cable wound around said front sheave and said rear sheave
and through said support cap, said first and second collar
and said bucket support plate, and the opposite end of said
cable secured to the clam bucket, whereby extension and
retraction of the hydraulic cylinder opens and closes the
clam bucket, respectively.
rearward end of the handle of said lower member being pivot-
ally attached to the rearward end of the handle of said upper
member to form said end-effector whereby the tines on the
lower member of said end-effector can be inserted into the
compliant table surface and moved under the workpiece, the
grasper on the upper member of said end-effector being pivot-
able downward to firmly grasp the workpiece thereby allow-
ing the workpiece to be picked up for transportation to a
different location without disturbing the original orientation of
the workpiece.
4,392,776
ROBOTIC MANIPULATOR STRUCTURE
Lanson Y. Shum, Salem Township, Westmoreland County, Pa.,
assignor to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,153
Int. a.3 B25J 3/00
U.S. a. 414—744 R ^ Claims
4392,775
FLAT WORKPIECE PICKUP
Gerald E. Ennis, Grand Prairie, Tex., and Mario Colombo, Jr.,
St. Louis County, Mo., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
FUed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,693
Int. a.3 B66F 79/00
U.S. a. 414—729 5 Claims
1. In combination, a compliant table surface for supporting a
flat workpiece thereon, said compliant table surface compris-
ing a rigid base member and a plurality of veriical upstanding
closely spaced bristle-like elements affixed at the lower ends
thereof to said rigid base member, the free upper ends of said
bristle-like elements forming a level work surface; and an
end-effector for firmly grasping said workpiece for transporta-
tion to a different location, said end-effector comprising a
1. A robotic manipulator structure comprising:
a base supporting first and second independently operable
motorized drive means;
a first generally hollow arm rotatably supported by said base
and means for driving said first arm from said first drive
means for rotation through one planar space;
a second arm having one end routably carried, by the end of
said first arm opposite said base, for rotation through
another planar space, parallel to and translationally dis-
placed from said first planar space; and
means coupled said second drive means to drive said second
arm independently of said first arm, said coupling means
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
621
extending from said base through said first arm to said one
end of said second arm;
said driving means for said first arm includes a hollow shaft
rotatably supported from said base and fixed at its one end
to said first arm and having, at its other end, driven means
coupled to said first drive means; and
said coupling means for said second arm includes a shaft
concentrically and rotatably disposed within said first
hollow shaft, said second shaft being hollow and defining-
an interiorly open space, and having at its one end toothed
gearing coupled by toothed linking means through said
first arm to drive said second arm, and at the other end of
said second shaft driven means coupled to said second
drive means.
secondary primary pressure duct and wherein said
secondary impeller connects said secondary impeller
chamber only to said secondary pressure duct.
4,392,777
PUMP OR BLOWER, IN PARTICULAR FOR HEATING
AND AIR-CONDITIONING SYSTEMS
Herbert Hiittlin, Lorracher Strasse 14, D-7853 Steinen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 223,989
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1980, 3002210
Int. a.3 B23B 47/00
U.S. CI. 415—131 8 Oaims
U 36 20 50 W
1. A pump or blower, in particular for heating and air-condi-
tioning systems, comprising:
(a) a casing, said casing having
i. a primary impeller chamber;
ii. a secondary impeller chamber;
iii. a primary suction duct constantly connected to said
primary impeller chamber;
iv. first and second primary pressure ducts adapted for
connection to said primary impeller chamber;
V. a secondary suction duct constantly connected to said
secondary impeller chamber;
vi. first and second seconary pressure ducts adapted for
connection to said secondary impeller chamber;
vii. said second primary pressure duct being constantly
connected to said first primary pressure duct;
(b) a pair of impellers mounted on a common shaft in said
casing, said pair of impellers comprising:
i. a primary impeller in said primary impeller chamber;
and I
ii. a secondary impeller in said secondary impeller cham-
ber; and
(c) shifting means for shifting said pair of impellers between
i. a first end position in which said primary impeller con-
nects said primary impeller chamber only to said first
primary pressure duct and wherein said secondary
impeller connects said secondary impeller chamber
only to said first secondary pressure duct and
ii. a second end position in which said primary impeller
connects said primary impeller chamber only to said
4,392,778
DOUBLE FLOW REHEAT DIAPHRAGM
John M. Hess, Scotia, N.Y., assignor to General Electric Com-
pany, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,894
Int a.3 FOID 9/04
U.S. a. 415—139 15 Qaims
1. An inner web of a diaphragm for use in a double flow
section of a steam turbine having a rotor shaft with a plurality
of bucket wheels affixed thereto, said wheels rotate about the
axis of said shaft between a plurality of stationary nozzle rings
formed by curved partitions, said web comprising:
a first cylindrical shell formed in two joinable halves for
surrounding a portion of said rotor shaft, said first shell
having at least two circular grooves along the inner pe-
riphery thereof for holding steam packing material in
close proximity to said rotor shaft, said first shell also
having a surface around the outer periphery of a first end
thereof for attachment of curved partitions;
a second cylindrical shell formed in two joinable halves for
surrounding the second end of said first shell, said second
end being displaced along said axis from said first end, and
said second shell also having a surface around the outer
periphery thereof for attachment of curved partitions; and
means for holding said second shell in a relatively fixed
position around said first shell but permitting limited axial
movement between said first and said second shell.
4,392,779
MARINE DRIVE WATER PUMP
James L. Bloemers, Fond du Lac; James M. Schick, Omro;
Michael E. Frazzell, Neenah, and Michael A. Karls, Hilbert,
all of Wis., assignors to Brunswick Corporation, Skokie, 111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 146,528, May 5, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,508
Int. aj F04D 5/00. 29/42
U.S. a. 415—141 5 Claims
1. In a marine drive having a water cooled engine rotating a
drive shaft and having a cooling water intake, the improved
water pump comprising:
(a) a base plate mounted in said marine drive, said base plate
having an eccentrically positioned drive shaft of)ening and
a water inlet opening into the cooling water intake,
(b) a cup-shaped impeller housing formed of deformed sheet
metal having an end wall and a peripheral wall, said end
wall having an eccentrically positioned drive shaft open-
ing and a water outlet,
(c) an impeller positioned in said impeller housing for pro-
pelling water received at said water inlet out said water
outlet, said impeller having a central hub coupled to the
drive shaft and a plurality of flexible impeller vanes ex-
tending outwardly from said central hub into contact with
the peripheral wall of said impeller housing, and
(d) a shroud formed of deformed sheet metal fitting over said
622
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
impeller housing to embrace the end wall and peripheral
wall of said housing, said shroud being secured to said
base plate, said shroud forming an arcuate collecting
a--
4^92,781
HIGH PERFORMANCE BLADE FOR HELICOPTER
ROTOR
Rene' L. Mouille, Aix-en-Provence; Jacques R. Gailot, Sausset-
les-Pins, and Jean-Marc E. Pouradier, Port-Saint-Louis-du-
Rhone, all of France, assignors to Societe Nationale Indus-
trielle Aerospatiale, Paris, France
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,348
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 25, 1980, 80 06577
Int. a.3 B64C 27/46
U.S. a. 416—223 R 5 Claims
^^
chamber between the shroud and the impeller housing to
connect said outlet with a water discharge opening for
said pump angularly displaced from said water outlet
about the axis of the drive shaft.
4,392,780
WIND POWERING OF TURBINE HAVING VARIABLE
PITCH VANES
John R. Taft, 27 Mouton Rd., Duxbury, Mass. 02332
Filed Apr. 11, 1978, Ser. No. 895,355
Int. a.3 F03D 3/00
UJS. a. 416—17 8 Qaims
WtHO DIRECTION
1. A high performance blade for a helicopter rotor having a
hub, comprising:
at one end of said blade, an end profile disposed perpendicu-
lariy to the leading edge of the blade;
at the other end of said blade, means for fastening said blade
to said hub;
a root profile located between said end profile and said other
end,
said end profile and said root profile defining along the
major part of the span of the blade an aerodynamic surface
produced by profiles of substantially constant chord,
each profile having a radius of maximum curvature Ro at the
leading edge defined approximately by the expression
Ro=1.7 Ce^max, in which C represents the chord and
Cmax the maximum relative thickness of the profile, and a
point of minimum curvature positioned on the lower
surface at a distance from the leading edge approximately
equal to 20% of the length of the chord of said profile,
said aerodynamic surface having an aerodynamic twist
which increases linearly from said end profile to a maxi-
mum at said root profile, said twist then being reversed to
become zero at said opposite end of the blade,
the angle of twist formed by a zero lift chord of the end
profile of said aerodynamic surface and a plane of refer-
ence passing through the centre of the hub of the rotor
being positive and not more than 0.3 degrees,
the difference between the angles of twist of the root profile
and of the end profile being 6°-8°, and
the distance separating said end profile from said root profile
being at least equal to 70% of the length of the blade.
1. A windmill apparatus comprising,
a shaft rotatable about its axis,
vanes connected to said shaft and rotatable therewith,
each said vane being rotatable about a vane axis parallel to
said shaft axis,
each said vane including a flexible sheet adapted to form a
curved surface under wind pressure,
and camming means adapted to control the orientation of
said vanes about said vane axes that is related only to the
position of a respective vane about said shaft as said vanes
' rotate about said shaft axis, for orienting said vanes to go
through reaching, nmning, beating, jibing and tacking
modes,
whereby said camming means receives impulses from the
jibe mode of said vanes to help position said camming
means for the apparent wind acting on said vanes.
4,392,782
LIQUID LEVEL CONTROLLER
Andrew Kuehn, III, St. Paul, Minn., and Edwin G. Hoefs, Dal-
las, Tex., assignors to Comact Pump Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
FUed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,669
Int. a? F04B 49/06
U.S. a. 417—36 13 Claims
1. Apparatus for controlling the level of a contained liquid
by initiating and discontinuing operation of a liquid transfer
means mounted to withdraw liquid from the containment, said
apparatus comprising:
a high side thermistor operable in a self heating mode and
positionable in said containment at a level substantially
equal to the highest level of liquid desired to be permitted
therein;
a low side thermistor operable in a self heating mode and
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
623
positionable in said containment at a level substantially
equal to the lowest level of liquid desired to be permitted
therein;
means for flowing a substantially constant current across
said thermistors, whereby when a thermistor operating in
a self-heating mode is immersed in liquid it dissipates heat
more rapidly than when unimmersed, thus increasing in
resistance, and proportionally increasing the voltage drop
thereacross above that obtained when a thermistor is
unimmersed;
means for comparing the voltage drops across said thermis-
tors with at least one reference voltage intermediate in
value between the voltage drop across unimmersed and
immersed thermistors and generating output signals which
are a function of said comparison; and
means responsive to said output signals for switching said
liquid transfer means on when said voltage drops across
both thermistors are high, indicating that said high side
thermistor is immersed* for continuing liquid transfer
when said voltage drop across said high side thermistor is
low and said voltage drop across said low side comparator
is high, indicative of a liquid level between the highest and
■ lowest desired levels, and for switching the liquid transfer
means off when said voltage drops are both low, indicat-
ing that said low side thermistor is unimmersed.
tween the highest and lowest desired levels, and switching
the liquid transfer means off when said voltage drops are
both low, indicating that said low side thermistor is unim-
mersed.
8. A methoid for controlling the level of a contained liquid by
initiating and discontinuing operation of a liquid transfer means
mounted to withdraw liquid from the containment, said appa-
ratus comprising:
positioning a high side thermistor operable in a self heating
mode in said containment at a level substantially equal to
the highest level of liquid desired to be permitted therein;
positioning a low side thermistor operable in a self heating
mode in said containment at a level substantially equal to
the lowest level of liquid desired to be permitted therein;
flowing a substantially constant current across said thermis-
tors, where by when a thermistor operating in a self-heat-
ing mode is immersed in liquid it dissipates heat more
rapidly than when unimmersed, thus increasing in resis-
tance, and proportionally increasing the voltage drop
thereacross above that obtained when a thermistor is
unimmersed;
comparing the voltage drops across said thermistors with a
reference voltage intermediate in value between the volt-
age drop across unimmersed and immersed thermistors
and generating signals which are a function of said com-
parison; and
switching the said liquid transfer means on when said volt-
age drops across both thermistors are high, indicating that
said high side thermistor is immersed, continuing liquid
transfer when said voltage drop across said high side
thermistor is low and said voltage drop across said low
side comparator is high, indicative of a liquid level be-
4,392,783
LIQUID RING PUMP EMPLOYING DISCHARGED
PUMPING LIQUID FOR DISCHARGE PORT CONTROL
Charles M. Jozepaitis, Bridgeport, Conn., assignor to The Nash
Engineering Company, Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,577
Int. a.5 P04C 79/00
U.S. CI. 417—68 1 Qaim
1. In a liquid ring pump having a bladed rotor eccentrically
mounted for rotation in an annular housing supplied with a
quantity of pumping liquid, the rotor producing an annular
ring of circulating pumping liquid in the housing when rotated
and cooperating with the ring of pumping liquid to convey gas
from an intake zone to a compression zone having a higher
pressure than the intake zone, the improvement comprising:
a first discharge port portion in the housing communicating
with a first relatively low pressure portion of the compres-
sion zone;
a second discharge port portion in the housing communicat-
ing with a second relatively high pressure portion of the
compression zone;
a discharge chamber communicating with the first and sec-
ond discharge port portions for directing a flow of pump-
ing liquid discharged from the second discharge port
portion transversely over the first discharge port portion
to substantially prevent gas from entering the compression
zone via the first discharge port portion when the pressure
in the first portion of the compression zone is less than the
gas pressure in the discharge chamber, the discharge
chamber being shaped to make use of the kinetic energy of
the pumping liquid discharged from the second discharge
port portion to induce a substantially continuous recircu-
lation of pumping liquid in the discharge chamber, the
path of recirculation being (1) circumferentially away
from the second discharge port portion in the direction of
rotor rotation, (2) radially outward from the second dis-
charge port portion and circumferentially in the direction
opposite the direction of rotor rotation, (3) radially in-
ward after passing both the second and first discharge port
portions, and (4) circumferentially over the first discharge
port portion in the direction of rotor rotation;,
baffle means disposed in the discharge chamber for promot-
ing recirculation of the pumping liquid in the discharge
chamber; and
a gas discharge outlet communicating with a portion of the
discharge chamber bounded by the recirculating pumping
liquid for allowing gas to exit from the discharge chamber
without interfering with the recirculation of pumping
liquid in the discharge chamber.
624
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,784
VALVE ARRANGEMENT FOR VENTING CONDUITS
AND PUMPING SYSTEM INCLUDING THE SAME
Nabil Hanafi, Urach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Pum-
penfabrik Urach, Urach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Scr. No. 309,123
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 28,
1980, 3040478
Int. a.3 F04B 9/10
U.S. a. 417—103 14 Qaims
-8"
the windmill formed to be disposed in the wind and dis-
placeable thereby in accordance with wind velocity.
4,392,786
ELECTROMAGNETIC INDUCTION PUMP
Jury F. Merenkov, ulitsa Starykh bolshevikov, 84, korpus 2, kv.
30; Vladimir D. Egorov, ulitsa Krasnoflottsev, 28, kv. 6; Val-
entin G. Stepanov, ulitsa Malysheva, 107, korpus 1, kv. 28,
and Igor V. Popkov, ulitsa 8 Marta, 150, kv. 30, all of Sverd-
lovsk, U.S.S.R.
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,668
Int. a.3 H02K 44/02
U.S. a. 417—50 12 Claims
1. A pumping system for delivering a liquid developing gas
or vapor, comprising a plurality of pump units each having a
reciprocating pumping element operating at different phases, a
working space formed with a gas or vapor collecting zone and
a liquid discharging zone, a suction conduit with a suction
valve, a pressure conduit with a delivery valve which is ar-
ranged in the liquid discharge zone, a venting conduit con-
nected between the gas and vapor collecting zone of one pump
unit and the liquid discharge zone of the subsequent pump unit,
and a valve arrangement provided in each venting conduit for
controlling the discharge of the gas or vapor from the collect-
ing zone in response to the pressure difference between said
working spaces.
Don
U.S
4,392,785
PUMP CONTROL SYSTEM FOR WINDMILLS
E. Avery, 45-437 Akimala St., Honolulu, Hi. 96744
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,897
Int. C\? FMB 49/00
a. 417—218 21 Oaims
1. In a windmill having a wind driven reciprocating element
operating a piston pump, a control system comprising
lever means interposed between said reciprocating element
and said pump for varying the length of stroke of the
piston in said pump,
and control means responsive to the velocity of the wind to
operate said lever means to vary the length of stroke and
hence the effective displacement of said pump in accor-
dance with available wind energy,
said control means having a sensing member separate from
1. An electromagnetic induction pump comprising:
an op)en magnetic circuit;
an excitation winding provided on said magnetic circuit;
a source of alternating current connected to said excitation
winding;
a duct for the flow of an electrically conductive liquid being
pumped and situated in the air gap of said magnetic cir-
cuit;
a means for electric continuity positioned outside of said air
gap and embracing portions of said magnetic circuit at an
outlet end of said duct relative to the direction of flow,
and providing a path for the electric current induced in
said conductive liquid to flow outside said air gap of said
magnetic circuit, which means is in electrical contact with
said conductive liquid and partially embraces said mag-
netic circuit;
at least portions of said magnetic circuit adjoining said duct
having a length 1, in the direction of the liquid flow, which
is deflned by the expression:
^2V
2/or>Ao6)
where
or = the specific conductivity of the conductive liquid being
pumped;
Ho = the magnetic permeability of the conductive liquid
being pumped; and
o>=the angular frequency of the alternating current source
feeding the excitation winding,
and provides a nearly exponential decrease of the magnetic
induction in said duct along the length I, in the direction of the
liquid flow, to the value determined by the given length I.
4,392,787
DIAPHRAGM PUMP
Adolf Notta, Youngstown, N.Y., assignor to Wetrok Inc.,
Niagara Falls, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,830
Int. C\? F04B 1/18. 35/02
U.S. a. 417—269 4 Claiins
1. In a diaphragm pump of the type having a pump housing,
a piston reciprocal within said housing, cam means operatively
engaging said piston for reciprocating the same, a diaphragm
disposed between said piston and a pumping chamber within
said housing, a plunger stem secured to said diaphragm by
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
62S
screw means rotatable relative to said stem, said piston having
a bore and said plunger stem having an end portion extending
into said bore, said stem end portion defming a surface slidably
engaging the wall of said bore, the improvement comprising:
(a) said engaging surface of said plunger stem end portion and
^^23^:1^^^^
'~t
the wall of said piston bore coacting to prevent relative
rotation therebetween upon rotation of said screw means
relative to said stem to disengage said stem from said dia-
phragm, and
(b) means constraining said piston against rotation upon such
rotation of said screw means.
arranged on one side thereof facing said valve plate, said First
chamber being located radially outwardly for temporarily
storing high pressure fluid being discharged from said com-
pressor, said second chamber being located radially inwardly
for temporarily storing low pressure fluid being sucked into
said compressor, said partition member further defining a third
chamber on an opposite side thereof remote from said valve
plate, said fluid suction port opening in said third chamber, said
third chamber communicating with said second chamber
through a hole formed substantially centrally through said
partition member for allowing suction fluid to pass there-
through before being fed to said second chamber: a pair of
guide members circumferentially extending and arranged
within said first chamber, said guide members defining, respec-
tively, a first oil collecting chamber and a second oil collecting
chamber located at peripheral portions of said first chamber
and opening toward said fluid discharge port; first pas^ge
means communicating said first and second oil collecting
chambers with said through hole of said cylinder block for
guiding oil to said through hole; a guide wall arranged within
said third chamber and defining a suction fluid passage spirally
extending from said fluid suction port to said central hole of
said "partition member, said guide wall further defining a third
oil collecting chamber at a peripheral portion of said third
chamber, said guide wall having a hole formed therein through
which oil is introduced into said third oil collecting chamber
from said suction fluid passage; and second passage means
communicating said third oil collectiPf chamber with said oil
sump for guiding oil to said oil sump.
4,392,788
SWASH-PLATE TYPE COMPRESSOR HAVING OIL
SEPARATING FUNCTION
Tenio Nakamura, and Umetarou lino, both of Konan, Japan,
assignors to Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,874
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 15, 1980, 55-112327;
Aug. 15, 1980, 55-112328
Int. a.3 F04B 1/18
U.S. a. 417—269 ^ 9 Qaims
na 1 4 i> it> 18 fTf] f=^
15 13 "3 ;3 10 n 'Hc'lTb 3 'u,| 1 I I 16
1. A swash-plate type compressor which comprises: a cylin-
der block horizontally disposed and having a through hole
extending along an axis thereof and an oil sump formed at a
bottom thereof; a cylinder head mounted at one end of said
cylinder block and having a fluid suction pori and a fluid
discharge port located on top thereof; a valve plate interposed
between said cylinder block and said cylinder head; a drive
shaft rotatably fitted in said through hole of said cylinder
block; a partition member arranged within said cylinder head
and axially dividing the interior thereof, said partition member
defining a first chamber and a second chamber concentrically
4,392,789
HERMETICALLY SEALED MOTOR-COMPRESSOR
UNIT FOR REFRIGERATORS
Alfi-edo Bar, Pavia, Italy, assignor to Necchi Societa per Azioni.
Pavia, Italy
FUed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,766
Qaims priority, application Italy, Feb. 20, 1980, 42904 A/80
Int. C1.3 P04B 39/06
U.S. a. 417—312 3 Claims
n !) 50 js r 1
1. A hermetically sealed motor-compressor unit for refriger-
ators, of vertical axis, comprising a container for said motor
compressor unit defining a sump for the gravitational collec-
tion of oil therein and a motor compressor unit positioned
within said container, said compressor unit comprising a casing
defining a plate, a cylinder, silencer portions positioned at the
end of said cylinder below said plate, upper support means
extending upwardly from said plate, perimetral walls extend-
ing upwardly along a portion of the plate and lower support
means extending downwardly from the plate supporting said
motor compressor in said container; an electric motor sup-
ported on said upper support means; spherical caps fastened to
said silencer portions to form silencers; a cylinder head defin-
ing a suction chamber and delivery chamber interconnected to
said silencers; a vertical shaft and a lubricating member dis-
posed on the lower end of said shaft and immersed in said
sump.
626
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,790
COUPLING SYSTEM FOR SUBMERGIBLE PUMP
Tomoyuki Shibata, Yokohama; Mituhito Nakayama, and Kiyo-
shi Ouchi, both of Fiuisawa, all of Japan, assignors to Ebara
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 162,646
Int. a.5 P04B 47/00; F16L 27/08
U.S. CL 417—360 3 Claims
8 17
an input passageway,
an exit passageway, and
a passageway network between the input passageway and
the exit passageway;
a first diaphragm bifurcating the pumping chamber for de-
fining a first pumping chamber section for receiving the
pumped fluid and a second pumping chamber section for
receiving the first pumping fluid,
variable pressure means for intermittently varying the pres-
sure of the first pumping fluid for alternately increasing
the volume of the second pumping chamber section to
increase the pressure applied against the pumped fluid and
expel it from the first pumping chamber section and de-
creasing the volume of the second pumping chamber
section to decrease the pressure applied against the
pumped fluid and draw it into the first pumping chamber
section;
a first valve positioned between the input passageway and
the passageway network and responsive to the pressure of
the pumped fluid in the first pumping chamber section;
1. A coupling system for detachably coupling a submergible
pump to the lower end of a discharge conduit disposed in
water, said system comprising:
a first flange attached to the lower end of said conduit held
stationary relative to the bottom of the water, the flange
having a first mating surface and a pair of cylindrical rods
provided on said first flange relative to said first mating
surface and extending horizontally from said first flange in
opposite directions, respectively;
a second flange attached to the discharge end of said pump
and having a second mating surface;
a single guide rail formed of an angle bar extending verti-
cally and secured at its lower end to said first flange, said
rail being provided with two planar sliding portions meet-
ing at an apex line at the outwardly facing surfaces along
the length thereof, said apex line being on a side of said rail
opposite said pump;
an arm attached to said second flange and including a pair of
hook members extending beyond and relative to said
second mating surface from the pump side, and a guide
means formed on said arm and matable with said two
portions of said guide rail so as to be guided by said rail
during descending and ascending of said pump, each of
said pair of hook members having a downwardly extend-
ing tapered surface, wherein, during descending of said
pump, each of said tapered surfaces engages one of said
pair of rods with a line contact therebetween, said rods
and tapered surfaces being constructed such that said rods
remain in contact with said tapered surfaces upon the
mating of said first and second mating surfaces,
wherein said guide means do not extend to said apex line
when said arm and rail are operatively engaged.
'^^-
432,791
PRESSURE PUMPING AND PRIMING PUMP
APPARATUS
Harold Mandroian, 2137 Los Amigos, U Canada, Calif. 91001
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,412
Int. C\? F04B 43/10
U.S. a. 417—379 10 Claims
1. A pumping apparatus for moving a pumped fluid from a
reservoir to a destination in response to variations in the pres-
sure of a first pumping fluid and for being selectively primed in
response to externally impressed variations in the pressure of a
second pumping fluid comprising:
a pump member having
an input port for receiving pumped fluid from the reser-
voir,
an exit port for expelling pumped fluid to the destination,
a pumping chamber,
a priming-damping chamber.
73'
PI
*» iV .'3^ ( '30
'^^
**
i^S
.3?
i?
'txl
^^-—'^^
1 I 1 ^ 9-?
7^
7e
a second valve positioned in the passageway network for
being responsive to the pressure of the pumped fluid in the
first pumping chamber section, the first valve being
opened when the second valve closes and the first valve
being closed when the second valve opens;
a third valve coupled between the exit passageway and the
second valve in the passageway network for preventing
pumped fluid flow through the pump member in response
to a pressure head at the input or exit ports, the third valve
coupled for closing at least one of the first, second, or
third valves in response to the head pressure at the input
and exit ports;
a second diaphragm bifurcating the priming-damping cham-
ber to define a first priming chamber section for receiving
the pumped fluid and a second priming chamber section
for receiving the second pumping fluid, the first priming
chamber section being interconnected to the passageway
network between the second and third valves whereby the
pressure of the pumped fluid in the exit passageway is
altered in response to deflections of the second dia-
phragm.
4,392 792
LINEAL MULTI-CYLINDER HYDRAULIC PUMPING
UNIT FOR WELLS
George L. Rogers, P.O. Box A-1, Norwood Farms Rd., York
Harbor, Me. 03911
FUed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,859
Int. a.3 F04B 47/04, 47/14
U.S. a. 417—400 41 Claims
1. A pumping unit for reciprocating the rod of a downhole
pump for pumping fluid from a well, comprising:
a frame;
a plurality of pressure responsive expansion members cou-
pled together in sequence, each of said expansion members
being capable of expanding and contracting to produce a
linear reciprocating movement,
gravity centering means connected to said frame and to a
first one of said sequence of expansion members for sus-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
627
pending said sequence of expansion members to provide
gravity centered alignment thereof over the well; and
control means coupled to at least one of said expansion
members for selectively providing pressurized fluid
thereto in order to selectively expand or contract said
expansion member;
end surfaces defined on the cam followers, said end surfaces
and the stop rings being shaped so that the axial setting of said
stop rings will determine the extent of outward movement of
the plungers during the time fuel is supplied to the bores
thereby to determine the amount of fuel supplied at each deliv-
ery stroke of the apparatus, characterized in that the axial
spacing between the end surfaces of at least one of said cam
followers is arranged to be smaller than the axial spacing of the
end of the other cam follower or followers whereby in use, at
the end of the filling strokes of the plungers at least one plunger
will be further from the axis of rotation of the distributor
member than the other or others so that it will be moved
inwardly to efl"ect delivery of fuel before the other plunger or
plungers.
a last one of said sequence of expansion members being
connected to the rod of the downhole pump, whereby the
total amount of reciprocating movement imparted to the
pump rod is equal to the sum of the individual reciprocat-
ing linear movements of each of said reciprocating mem-
bers being selectively expanded or contracted.
p
.0 1
j/9
//(
b)
x
i,a
1.4
C^t
20 )
4,392,794
PERISTALTIC PUMP
Arthur Foxcroft, P.O. Box 217, Trenton, Ontario, Canada
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,271
Int. Q\} F04B 4i/14
U.S. a. 417—475 1 Claim
4,392,793
FUEL PUMPING APPARATUS
Dorian F. Mowbray, Burnham, England, assignor to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,791
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 5, 1980,
8039035 1
I Int. C1.3 F04B 19/22, 29/00
U.S. a. 417—462 2 Qaims
(XII
1. A liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying
fuel to an internal combustion engine and comprising a rotary
distributor member located in a housing, bores formed in the
distributor member and plungers therein, cam followers lo-
cated at the outer ends of the plungers respectively for engage-
ment with cam lobes formed up)on the internal peripheral
surface of an annular cam ring surrounding the distributor
member, means for feeding fuel to the bores to effect outward
movement of the plungers and followers, passage means for
conveying fuel from the bores to outlets in the housing, a pair
of stop rings positioned in the housing so as to be contacted by
1. A peristaltic pump comprising,
(a) a housing having a front end and a back end, an annular
recess formed in the front end of the housing and extend-
ing circumferentially about a first axis, said annular recess
having a uniform arcuate cross-sectional configuration
along its length and a pair of radially spaced side edges at
the front end of the housing, first and second passages
opening through the housing from the recess to the back
end of the housing at circumferentially spaced intervals
about the housing,
(b) first and second conduits each having; a back wall shaped
to conform to the cross-sectional configuration of the
recess and a flexible front wall extending transversely
across the back wall, an input end and an output end, said
conduits being mounted in said annular recess at circum-
ferentially spaced intervals with the input end and output
end of the first conduit extending through said first and
second passages respectively, and the input end and out-
put end of the second conduit extending through said
second and first passages, respectively, the back wall of
each conduit being supported within the recess and the
flexible front wall of each conduit extending in a first
plane which is perpendicular to the first axis, said conduits
each having side flanges which are secured to said housing
holding said front wall taut
(c) a pumping member comprising;
(i) a rotor mounted for rotation about said first axis,
(ii) three rollers mounted on said rotor at uniformly spaced
circumferential intervals about said first axis each for
rotation about a radially directed axis, each roller having
a profile adapted to mate with the arcuate cross-sectional
configuration of the recess, said pumping member being
mounted with said rollers extending into the recess to an
628
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
extent sufficient to stretch the front wall of the conduits
into engagement with the back wall thereby to form trans-
versely extending occlusions in each conduit,
(d) drive means engaging said rotor to rotatably drive it
about said first axis to cause successively formed occlu-
sions to move along each conduit from the input end to
the output end tb effect pumping in use.
4,392,796
VALVE CONTROLLED REVERSIBLE PUMP WITH
ANTICAVITATION MEANS
Herbert E. Lindtreit, Centerport, N.Y., assignor to Sid Harvey,
Inc., Valley Stream, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 952,308, Oct. 18, 1978, Pat. No.
4,247,267. This application Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 194,973
Int. a.3 F04C 2/W. 15/02
U.S. a. 418—32 10 Qaims
4,392,795
WEAR RESISTANT ROTOR SLOTS FOR VANE-TYPE
PUMPS OR MOTORS
Larry C. Smith, New Berlin, Wis., assignor to Rexnord Inc.,
Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,954
Int. a.3 FOIC 21/00
U.S. CI. 418—31 15 Qaims
KQ^^
^^
^<3>
/
^\.
y
1. In a rotor for a vane-type fluid pump or motor, said rotor
comprising a toroid having a plurality of planar slots trans-
verse to the circumference thereof; each said slot extending
across the entire width of said rotor and through said circum-
ference to form a pair of upper edges at the intersection of said
slot and said circumference, said slot being for the receipt of a
vane complementary to said slot, said vane having side sur-
faces and a lower edge and a total depth V in said transverse
direction, and being disposed for reciprocation in a direction
slightly oblique to said transverse direction in said slot between
a retracted position and an extended position, said vane in
operation having a range of travel T between the maximum
positions of retraction and extension in said transverse direc-
tion, and a maximum extension of X beyond said rotor circum-
ference, and having a side in sliding contact with one of said
upper edges; the improvement to said rotor which comprises:
a side wall configuration in said slots including an upper
portion having a width slightly greater than the width of
said vane and opening into said circumference, and also
including an undercut portion having a width greater than
the width of said slot upper portion;
a lower edge formed within each said slot on a side wall
thereof at the Junction of said undercut portion and said
upper portion of said slot;
said upper portion of said slot having a depth N in said
transverse direction, and said undercut portion having a
depth W in said transverse direction;
wherein W is greater than T, and V is greater than X^plus N;
the width of said undercut portion relative to the width of
said upper portion being such that sliding contact between
each said slot and its respective obliquely reciprocating
vane occurs substantially only on a said one upper edge
and said lower edge of said slot and the side surfaces of
said vane, while contact between said lower edge of said
vane and the sides of said slot is substantially prevented.
1. A rotary pump apparatus adapted to be driven in either
direction of rotation and to deliver liquid from the same deliv-
ery port for either direction of rotation, comprising:
a. a drive shaft adapted to be rotated in either direction;
b. a pair of meshing gears;
c. a single inlet port communicating with the spaces between
the teeth of both gears at their points of widest separation;
and
d. two outlet ports respectively located adjacent each of the
two possible points of initial engorgement of the teeth and
connected to said delivery port;
wherein the improvement comprises:
e. means effectively blocking liquid flow from a filled space
at said inlet port toward a following evacuated space, said
means preventing withdrawal of liquid from the filled
space and subsequent cavitation, said blocking means
comprising said inlet port, which is narrower than each
tooth of each gear, so that each filled space is sealed from
the inlet port by the following tooth before the next space
to be filled registers with the port.
4,392,797
DEVICE FOR LUBRICATING A ROTARY PISTON AIR
PUMP
Max Ruf, Neckarsulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Audi
NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft, Neckarsulm, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 197,815
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 23,
1979, 2942696
Int. a.3 P04C 18/10. 29/02
U.S. O. 418—91 4 Oaims
'* 22 H li
1. A device for lubricating a rotary piston air pump sup-
ported and driven by an engine having a housing penetrated by
at least one oil return conduit, said pump comprising; a station-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
629
ary axel connected to said housing and having an eccentric
with a peripheral surface, a rotary casing rotatably mounted on
said axle and accommodating a rotor rotatably mounted on the
peripheral surface of said eccentric, said casing and rotor
together deflning variable volume working chambers, suction
and discharge recesses in the peripheral surface of the eccen-
tric, said recesses communicating with suction and discharge
conduits within said axle, said axle further comprising an oil
supply conduit open to said peripheral surface in a laterally
offset position with respect to said recesses, said oil supply
conduit continuing in a pipe which has an oil scoop extending
into said oil return conduit for catching returning oil and
delivering it through the pipe and the oil supply conduit to said
peripheral surface.
' ' 4,392,798
GEAR PUMP OR MOTOR WITH LOW PRESSURE
BEARING LUBRICATION
Charles J. Bowden, Battle Creek, Mich., assignor to General
Signal Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 251,003
Int. a.3 F04C 29/02. 2/18; F03C 2/08
U.S. Q. 418—102 15 Qaims
1. An improved rotary gear apparatus comprising:
a housing having low pressure and high pressure chamber;
a pair of shafts mounted for rotation in said housing on
bearings supported by said housing;
a pair of gears, one mounted on each of said shafts, said gears
having teeth intermeshing at a zone between said low
pressure chamber and said high pressure chamber, said
teeth sequentially defining initially contracting and then
expanding volumes therebetween as said gears intermesh
in said zone;
means mounted on each side of said gears for receiving fluid
only from a first adjacent one of said bearings on one side
of said gears, for passing said fluid directly into one of said
expanding volumes and for passing fluid from said low
pressure chamber only to a second adjacent one of said
bearings on the same side of said gears; and
means for receiving fluid only from said second adjacent
bearing and directing said fluid only into said first adja-
cent bearing.
the space into two regions which provide a low pressure re-
gion and a high pressure region during operation; wherein:
said filler piece means includes at least one filler piece float-
ingly mounted within said space and having portions
capable of coming into sliding engagement with tooth
crests of said pinion and tooth crests of said internal gear
respectively in a portion of said space where the distance
between the tooth crests of the pinion and the tooth crests
0^12
^^^4j
Tc
of the internal gear is reduced toward said low pressure
region; and
said internal gear pump motor further comprises a stopper
pin secured to said housing operative to engage one end of
said filler piece on the side of said low pressure region for
restricting the circumferential movement of the filler
piece toward the low pressure region, and spring means
associated with said housing for urging said filler piece
toward said low pressure region.
4,392,800
PRESS FOR PULVERULENT MATERIALS
Gennaro Apuzzo, Napoli, Italy, assignor to Merisinter S.p.A.,
Arzano, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 150,574, May 16, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 35,470, Apr. 25, 1979,
abandoned. This application Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,586
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jul. 24, 1978, 50446 A/78
Int. Cl.^ B30B 11/02
U.S. CI. 425—78 4 Qaims
4,392,799
INTERNAL GEAR PUMP MOTOR
Michio Shikano, and Shuzi Kitagawa, both of Toyama, Japan,
assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Fiyikoshi, Toyama, Japan
FUed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,068
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 17, 1979, 54-162704
Int. Q.3 F04C 15/04, 1/06
U.S. Q. 418—169 10 Claims
1. An internal gear pump motor comprising: a housing; a
pinion rotatably supported in said housing; an internal gear
rotatably supported in said housing and meshing with said
pinion in said housing; and filler piece means located in a space
defined between said pinion and said internal gear for dividing
1. In a pe&s for compressing pulverulent materials into
concave-shaped or convex-shaped articles including a press
frame, a die carrying plate, a plurality of upper and lower
punches, support means for carrying the upper and lower
punches and control means for controlling the displacement of
the upper and lower punches, a combination comprising: first
piston-cylinder means for controlling the displacement of said
die carrying plate; second piston-cylinder means fastened to
said frame and supporting said die plate; lever means arranged
above said die carrying plate and having one end portion
630
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
pivoted to said frame and an opjxjsite other end portion; slider
means slidable on said opposite end portion and abutting on
said die carrying plate, said first piston-cylinder means acting
on said other end pwrtion of said lever means to exert thereon
a pressure dep>ending on the distance of said slider means from
said other end portion of said lever means; first support means
for each of said lower punches; third piston-cylinder means
fastened to said frame for controlling said first support means;
adjustable stop elements for limiting the displacemen range of
said die carrying plate and said first supporting means; second
support means for supporting the upf)er punches control means
provided within said second supports means and operative for
controlling the displacement of the upper punches, said upper
and lower punches being concentrically arranged relative to
each other; a movable core arranged within said upper and
lower punches; a core rod supporting said core; third support
means for said core rod, fourth piston-cylinder means for
controlling the displacement of said third support means and
having a lower end connected to said core rod; and adjustable
stop elements for limiting the displacement range of said core
rod.
4,392,801
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING CHEESE
PRODUCT
Matthew Meyer, 1001 E. 17th St., Marshfield, Wis. 54449
Division of Ser. No. 48,525, Jun. 13, 1979, Pat. No. 4,288,465.
This application Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,508
Int. a.3 B29F 3/02. 3/08
U.S. a. 425—71 10 Qaims
1. Apparatus for manufacturing a cheese product having a
longitudinal fibrous property comprising:
an extruder for extruding a continuous strand of cheese with
a horizontal movement component along a path;
cooling means downstream of said extruder in said path for
. receiving the strand from said extruder for cooling the
strand to establish structural integrity in the strand;
means for applying longitudinal tension to the strand after it
leaves said cooling means to induce a longitudinal fibrous
property into the strand, said tension applying means
comprising a pair of rotating drums arranged in a horizon-
tal plane in tandem in the direction of the cheese extrusion
path to provide a forward drum and a rearward drum, said
tension applying means further including drive means for
rotating said drums in opposite rotary directions so that
the upper portion of the rearward drum presents a surface
moving in the same direction as the horizontal movement
component of the strand and the upper portion of the
forward drum presents a surface moving in the opposite
direction, said drums forming a serpentine path for the
strand in which the cheese strand proceeds initially
au'ound said rearward drum and thereafter around said
forward drum;
a vat containing a cooling fluid for cooling the strand, said
drums of said tension applying means being at least par-
tially immersed in the cooling fluid for delivering the
strand to the cooling fluid; and
tension maintaining means for said strand, said tension main-
taining means being so positioned with respect to said
tension applying means and said fluid containing vat as to
maintain tension on the strand in the vat.
4,392,802
APPARATUS FOR BLOW MOLDING AND
CONDmONING SYNTHETIC RESIN CONTAINERS
Andrea Bortolotti, and Mauro Bettucchi, both of Bologna, Italy,
assignors to Automa S.p.A., Bologna, Italy
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,776
Qaims priority, application Italy, Not. 14, 1980, 3569 A/80;
Oct. 16, 1981, 3551 A/81
Int. C1.3 B29C 77/07
U.S. a. 425—107 9 Claims
152 it 3o 1^ Ao
1. Improved apparatus for blow molding and conditioning
synthetic resin containers, of the type comprising: at least one
extruder, fed with granules of a predetermined synthetic resin,
from the extrusion head of which, that points downwards and
defines an extrusion station, issues in an unbroken fashion a
tubular element made of the said synthetic resin; two end walls,
able to slide supported and guided by first support means, to
which are locked in a removable fashion and in opposite posi-
tion, corresponding permanent molds which, when in the
closed position, jointly define a vacuum forming mold whose
upper part is provided with a mouth that communicates with
the outside and whose inside part contains the profile of a
corresponding container; means for operating the said end
walls, the actuation and deactuation of which constitute, for
the aforementioned permanent molds, the said position of
closure and an open position, respectively; means for synchro-
nizing, in opposite directions, the translation of the said end
walls; a saddle that carries the aforementioned support means
and slides on rectilineal guides perpendicular to the translation
direction of the said end walls, the inclination of the said guides
being such as to decrease the elevation of the said end walls,
starting at the said extrusion station; means for driving the said
saddle between the said extrusion station and a blow molding
station; means for shearing the said tubular element, the lower
part of which is stably held under restraint in the vacuum
forming mold at the time the said permanent molds are in the
position of closure, in consequence of the translation of the said
end walls from the extrusion station to the blow molding sta-
tion; at least one nozzle, connected to a source of compressed
air, movable vertically, positioned at the said blow molding
station and destined to be hermetically inserted into the mouth
of the said vacuum forming mold; gripping means, integral
with the said end walls, destined to hook onto the contoiner
hanging on the said nozzle, to release the said container from
the said nozzle, and to deposit the said container on a suitable
conveyor; means for controlling the said operating means,
destined to actuate and deactuate them compatibly with the
positioning of the said end walls at the extrusion station and at
the blow molding station, respectively, in the latter case at a
time subsequent to the insertion of compressed air into the said
vacuum forming mold; a tubular shaft that at least partially
houses in the inside thereof the aforementioned operating
means; a coupling sleeve fixed to the center of said shaft, said
coupling sleeve being positional above and integral with said
saddle; at least two bushes coupled to said shaft in a way
whereby they are able to slide, said two bushes being posi-
tioned bilaterally to said coupling sleeve and each of said
bushes being locked to one of two end walls; fixing means for
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
631
locking said two bushes to said two end walls; means for lock-
ing one to the other, the coupling means and the said shaft,
destined to prevent any rotation of the latter with respect to
the axis thereof; and means for coupling one to the other in a
sliding fashion and in the direction parallel to the axis of the
said shaft, each end wall and the said saddle, destined to pre-
vent any rotation of the said end wall with respect to the axis
of the said shaft.
4,392,803
STICK CONFECTION EXTRACTION APPARATUS
Stephen D. Cross; Elmer F. Frost, Jr., and David N. Anderson,
all of Lakeland, Fla., assignors to FMC Corporation, Chicago,
111.
Continuation of Ser. No. 146,844, May 5, 1980, abandoned. This
appUcation Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,987
Int. a.3 B28B 5/00
U.S. a. 425— 126 S 17 Qaims
/-""TL.
O ze 42 112-
J\M,
intrinsic viscosity of the particulate resin in advance of particu-
late resin flow from said chamber to said extruder.
12. Apparatus for increasing the intrinsic viscosity of PET,
said apparatus comprising a particulate PET supply source, a
receptacle for receiving particulate PET having an increased
intrinsic viscosity, a supply line between said supply source
and said receptacle, a housing defining a chamber for receiving
Q. 42S^1
and temporarily storing PET particles, heater means for heat-
ing the temporarily stored PET particles in isolated relation
along said supply line within said chamber to effect a solid
stating reaction of the PET particles flowing in said chamber
to raise the intrinsic viscosity of the particulate PET before the
PET particles are discharged from said chamber into said
receptacle, and gaseous flow means connected to said chamber
for removing the products of condensation polymerization.
1. An apparatus for simultaneously extracting several stick
confections from a row of mold cups of an apparatus for pro-
ducing the stick confections and for transferring the extracted
confections to a receiving area, each confection including a
body of confection material and a stick projecting upwardly
therefrom and from the mold cup in which it is formed, said
extracting and transferring apparatus comprising: a plurality of
extractor bar assemblies, each extractor bar assembly including
separate gripper units depending therefrom in a row extending
longitudinally of the extractor bar assembly, each gripper unit
including means for releasably engaging a stick of a confection,
means for conveying the extractor bar assemblies from above
the extraction area where the confections are to be extracted
from mold cups in which they are formed to a receiving area,
means at said extraction area for lowering an extractor bar
assembly to cause the gripper units to engage the sticks of
confections within the mold cups and for thereafter elevating
the extractor bar assembly so that it may be conveyed by said
conveying means, means at said receiving area for causing said
gripper units to release the sticks, and means operatively en-
gageable with said gripper units between said extraction area
and said receiving area for rotating said gripper units each
through a selected angle.
4,392,805
CENTRIFUGAL CASTING APPARATUS
Oleg L. Golyak, Rusanovskaya naberezhnaya, 24/15, kv. 100;
Leonty A. Golyak, Kolomievsky pereulok, 13/23, ky. 44, and
Ivan R. Stepurenko, ulitsa Petra Zaporoshtsa, 13-B, kv. 18, all
of Kiev, U.S.S.R.
_ Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,703
Int. Q.3 B29C 5/04
U.S. Q. 425—206 14 Qaims
4,392,804
SOLID STATING
Joan C. Pushee, Amherst; leuan L. Harry, Nashua; Martin H.
Beck, Brookline, and Suppayan M. Krishnakumar, Nashua,
all of N.H., assignors to The Continental Group, Inc., Stam-
ford, Conn.
FUed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,283
Int. Q.3 B29B 3/00
U.S. Q. 42*^174.8 E 15 Qaims
1. An injection molding system comprising a particulate
PET supply source, an extruder, and an injection mold, a
supply line between said supply source and said extruder, a
housing defining a chamber in which the particulate resin is
temporarily stored in isolated condition along said supply line,
and means associated with said chamber for effecting solid
stating of particulate PET flowing in said housing to raise the
1. A centrifugal casting apparatus for casting from a melt
comprising:
a mold mounted for rotation about the vertical axis thereof
and having a bottom provided with a through co-axial
opening having vertical walls;
a member having a helicoidally shaped surface, co-axially
mounted within said mold for preventing shrink heads
formation and having a lower portion extending through
said opening outwardly and downwardly of said mold
bottom, said member being adapted to be immersed into
said melt for cleaning its surface from slag;
a rotation drive connected with said mold and said member;
and
a vertical motion drive connected with said mold and said
member.
632
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,806
EJECTING ICE-CREAM SCOOP
Laurent Houle, 371 • 2iid St., East, La Sarre, Quebec, Canada
(J9Z 2H8)
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,358
Claims priority, application Canada, Oct. 20, \98(k, 362684
Int. a.3 B29C 7/00; A23P 1/00
U.S. a. 425—286 5 Claims
1. An ice-cream scoop comprising a generally semi-spherical
bowl, a handle having one end portion fastened to said bowl,
said bowl having a top rim, a bottom opening and a slot com-
municating with said bottom opening and extending to said
rim, said handle having a portion adjacent said bowl formed
with a cavity opening at the top and at the bottom of said
handle and communicating with said slot, said slot being in
alignment with said handle, an ejector pivotally mounted on
the handle about a pivotal axis transverse to said handle and
adjacent the bowl and comprising an arcuate tongue conform-
ing to the interior and exterior surfaces of the bowl and to the
shape of said bottom opening and of said slot, so that, when
said tongue is bottomed in the bowl, it fills said bottom opening
and said slot and is substantially flush with both the interior
and exterior surfaces of the bowl, said ejector further including
a lever arm rigid with said tongue and extending into said
cavity, said lever arm having a portion extending on the oppo-
site side of said tongue relative to the pivotal axis of said ejec-
tor, said portion exposed and accessible through the top and
through the bottom of said handle, whereby downward man-
ual pressure exerted on said portion from the top of said han-
dle, will cause lifting of said tongue away from the bowl bot-
tom, and upward manual pressure exerted on said portion from
the bottom of said handle, will pivot said tongue to bottomed
p)Osition in said bowl.
4,392,807
APPARATUS FOR CLOSING TUBES
Donald J. Greenspan, 235 Pavilion Ave., Riverside, N.J. 08075
Continuation of Ser. No. 96,339, Nov. 21, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 965,511, Dec. 1, 1978, Pat. No.
4,219,525, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 770,786, Feb. 22,
1977, abandoned. This application May 11, 1981, Ser. No.
262,698
Int. a.J B29C 24/00
U.S. CI. 425—393 51 Qaims
"^^'-'^"■'■^■^ -'—^ v-:i^^=5^^^;^>-;- # v*^-^-\^
xjj.La-fjj/ MjTHT'
relative to said mandrel to collapse the end of said tube to
be closed;
a mold adapted to cooperate with said sleeve and said man-
drel for closing the collapsed end of said tube to form said
bottom;
means for heating said mandi%l ^vithout heating said mold;
and
means for controlling the relative position of said sleeve and
said mandrel such that the end of said first portion of said
mandrel is substantially aligned with the end of said sleeve
during said heating prior to movement of said sleeve with
respect to said mandrel.
4392,808
SPINNERET ORIFICE CROSS-SECTIONS
Bobby M. Phillips, Kingsport, Tenn., assignor to Eastman
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,571
Int a.^ B29H 7/18
U.S. a. 425—464 24 Oaims
18
X- >
II <- ^\-
X.o
1. A spinneret defining at least one spinneret orifice the
planar cross-section of which defines an elongated slot having
a plurality of wing member bar slots intersecting with said
elongated slot at spaced intervals along the axial length
thereof; and
multiple intersecting body section bar slots intersecting with
said elongated slot and intersecting with each of the other
multiple intersecting body section bar slots at said elon-
gated slot.
4,392,809
METHOD AND PLANT FOR RECOVERING HEAT FROM
SMOKE GASES
Lars A. Tieberg, Sju Blommors grand 3, Fagersta, Sweden
S-773 00, and Stig G. Carlqvist, Sanekullavagen 43, Malmo,
Sweden
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,618
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 19, 1980, 8002144
Int. a.3 F23D 11/44
UJS. a. 431—11 9 Qaims
27 I I 26
WVW VW^
26^
JO
21 '•Aj' 22
25
1. Apparatus for manufacturing a plastic tube having a bot-
tom from an open-ended tube without using additional material
for forming the bottom comprising:
a mandrel for extending longitudinally into said tube and
supporting said tube thereon, said mandrel comprising a
first portion and a second portion, said second portion
extending inwardly ^aaid first portion to form the end of
said mandrel;
a sleeve surrounding said mandrel with a space therebe-
t^K^eefi for rcoetvifig said tube, said sleeve adapted to move
^7-rr2,
1. A method of recovering heat from smoke gases in a com-
bustion plant comprising the steps of compressing air for com-
bustion to a first intermediate pressure in a first compressor,
then compressing the air to a second higher pressure in a
second compressor, passing the air at said second higher pres-
sure to a combustion chamber, burning a combustible fuel
containing water in the presence of said air at said second
July 12, 1913
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
633
higher pressure in the combustion chamber to produce smoke
gases containing water vapor at substantially said second
higher pressure, passing said smoke gases at said second higher
pressure through a first turbine to drive the turbine and reduce
the pressure of said smoke gases to a second intermediate
pressure, said first turbine being connected to said second
compressor for driving the same, thereafter condensing water
vapor in said smoke gases at said second intermediate pressure
to regain the heat of vaporazation of the water vapor in the
smoke gases, and then passing said smoke gases through a
second turbine to drive the turbine and reduce the pressure of
said smoke gases to atmospheric pressure, said second turbine
being connected to said first compressor for driving the same.
4,392,810
OIL BURNER
John D. Bears, Belle River, and Kenneth R. D. Emery, Wood
Islands, both of Canada, assignors to Ener-Tech Heating
Systems Inc., Prince Edward Island, Canada
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,752
Claims priority, application Canada, Jan. 29, 1980, 344575
Int. a.3 F23N 7/00
U.S. a. 431—37 10 Qaims
1. An oil burner feed system comprising first pump means
connected in a line between an oil storage tank and an inlet of
an oil heater, an oil supply line having an inlet connected to an
outlet of the oil heater and an outlet connected to a burner
nozzle, a purge line having an inlet adjacent the point of con-
nection between the nozzle and the oil supply line and in
constant open communication with both the nozzle and the
outlet of the oil supply line, second pump means connected in
the purge line and an inlet of the oil heater, valve means in the
purge line and control circuitry arranged to open the valve
means on start-up of the feed system for a predetermined time
interval whereby during the predetermined time interval oil is
circulated through the oil supply line from the oil heater and
through the purge line back to the heater.
4,392,811
GASIFYING DEVICE FOR LIQUID FUEL BURNER
Takao Ito, Saiyo, Japan, assignor to Dainichi Kogyo Co., Ltd.,
Shirone, Japan
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,432
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 16, 1980, 55-018867
Int. a.3 F23N 7/00; F23D 11/44
U.S. CI. 431—37 8 Qaims
1. A gasified liquid fuel combustion apparatus for supplying
a gaseous mixture of air and a gasified liquid fuel ejected from
a nozzle to a burner for combustion, said apparatus including a
gasifying device comprising:
(a) a gasifier including two concentric tubes having front
and rear ends and defining a chamber and sealed at least at
the rear end thereof and having a concentric inner tube
disposed therein, said gasifier and inner tube being in
sealed communicating relation with a nozzle head pro-
vided concentrically with and at the front end of said
inner tube, said nozzle head including a nozzle;
(b) a valve rod provided in said inner tube and having at its
front end a valve needle cooperable with said nozzle;
(c) a movable core provided at the rear end of said valve
rod;
(d) a solenoid provided at the rear end of said inner tube and
operable to move said movable core;
(e) an electric heater provided in a concentric space between
said gasifyer and said inner tube;
(0 a fuel delivery pipe connected to the lower rear end of
said gasifier and adapted to deliver fuel to the rear end of
said gasifier chamber;
(g) means causing said fuel to travel in a helical path around
and along said chamber from its rear end to its front end;
and
(h) means connecting the front end of said gasifier chamber
to said nozzle.
4,392,812
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR GASIFIED LIQUID FUEL
COMBUSTION APPARATUS
Hisao Yoshii, Sanjo, Japan, assignor to Dainichi Kogyo Co.,
Ltd., Shirone, Japan
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,154
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-43557
Int. a.3 F23N 5/00
U.S. Q. 431—73 8 Qaims
1. A gasified liquid fuel combustion apparatus in which a
gasified fuel is emitted from a nozzle having a valve needle
actuated by a solenoid and is mixed with combustion air and
the fuel-air gaseous mixture thus obtained is supplied to a
burner for combustion, comprising a power supply; a solenoid
control circuit including a timer circuit adapted to operate
upon closing of a power switch; a contact switch adapted to
open in response to said timer circuit; a voltage reducing trans-
former powered from said power supply through said power
switch; a first rectifying circuit and a second rectifying circuit
connected to said solenoid; said first rectifying circuit receiv-
ing from said power supply through said contact switch a
voltage higher than but of the same phase as the voltage sup-
plied from said power supply to said second rectifying circuit;
said second rectifying circuit receiving a lower voltage from
the secondary side of said voltage reducing transformer; said
first and second rectifying circuits being connected to a com-
mon output line to provide a high DC output voluge until said
contact switch is opened but to provide a low DC output
voltage thereafter, thereby controlling said solenoid through
said solenoid control circuit.
634
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,813
COMBUSTION APPLIANCE WITH SAFETY DEVICE
Eiichi Tanaka, Yamatokoriyama; Noboru Ishibasi, Nabari, and
Shojiro Inoue, Nara, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,874
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1979, 54-106343
Int. a.3 F23N 5/00
U.S. a. 431—76 5 Qaims
spaced positions above the upper surface of said f>orous
base, said transducers being connected together to pro-
vide a signal which is dependent upon the difference in the
temperatures at said vertically spaced positions;
power-actuated means arranged to receive said signal and to
actuate said adjustable valve in accordance with the signal
received; and,
second conduit means disposed in the upper part of said bed,
but beneath the upper surface of the mass of refractory
particles when fluidized, for admitting a gas into said
upper part of the bed, said second conduit means being
connected to supply pipes which extend at least in part
downwardly into the container from the upper end
thereof without passing through the wall of the container
at positions below the level of said upper surface of the
mass of refractory particles when fluidized.
1. A combustion appliance with a safety device therein,
comprising a combustor composed of an inner flame cylinder
with a plurality of small holes therein, a red-heat cylinder
disposed on the outer side of said inner flame cylinder, an outer
cylinder disposed on the outer side of said red-heat cylinder,
and means for supplying combustable fuel between the inner
flame cylinder and the red-heat cylinder, an oxygen sensor
disposed in the flame rear flow of said combustor and in a
position where the air excess ratio of said flames varies substan-
tially depending on the amount of air available to combust fuel
from said fuel supplying means, and a fuel feed cutting-ofF
means for cutting off fuel supplied by said fuel supplying means
with the output of said oxygen sensor, said oxygen sensor
comprising a partial oxygen pressure sensitive oxygen sensor
having a pair of spaced electrodes, the resistance between
which varies with the partial oxygen pressure being detected.
4,392,814
FLUIDIZED BED
Brian Harding, West Bromwich, England, assignor to Can-Eng
Holdings Limited, Niagara Falls, Canada
Filed Jun. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 156,530
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 8, 1979,
7919979; Jul. 9, 1979, 7923683
Int. a.3 F23D 19/02
U.S. a. 431—170 5 Qaims
1. A fluidized bed having a container for containing a mass
of refractory particles, a porous base, conduit means for sup-
plying a fluidizing medium to the underside of said porous base
from which said medium will flow through the porous base
and into the mass of refractory particles, an adjustable valve
for the conduit means and means, disposed above said porous
base, for supplying heat to the mass of refractory particles, the
fluidized bed comprising:
a pair of temperature transducers disposed at vertically
4,392,815
BURNER FOR BOTTOM nRED FURNACE
Minoni Matsuzaki; Toshiei Kawauchi, both of Chiba; Tsugio
Murakami, Ichibara, and Hideo Kishira, Chiba, all of Japan,
assignors to Kawasaki Steel Corporation, Kobe, Japan
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,911
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 17, 1980, 55-97938
Int. a.3 F23C 5/08
U.S. a. 431—175 6 Qaims
\T*0*
1. A burner for a bottom flred, ingot heating furnace having
a burner port through the bottom of said furnace, and compris-
ing:
a gas header centrally disposed relative to a central axis of
said burner port such that air is supplied to said burner
port around said header;
plural gas nozzles arranged atop of and in communication
with said header and equi-angularly arranged about said
burner port central axis, each of said nozzles comprising a
generally vertical conduit portion terminating in a head
cover portion having a nozzle jxjrt such that gas is sup-
plied to said burner pori from said nozzle port along a
direction generally deflneable by a gas supply axis inter-
secting a plane perpendicular to said central axis at an
angle, said gas supply axis being generally tangential to a
circle contained within said plane and having a radius
extending from said central axis to an apex of said angle;
and
said head cover portion comprising a shield for the top of
said conduit portion and said nozzle port, such that arti-
cles falling from said furnace are prevented from clogging
said nozzle port;
whereby said gas is caused to flow helically and diffuse and
mix with said air to provide a short flame.
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
635
4,392,816
WASTE GAS INQNERATOR
Elmer M. Berlie, and John D. Smart, both of Alberta, Canada,
assignors to Western Research and Development, Calgary,
Canada
nied Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,553
Int. Q.3 F23D 13/20
U.S. Q. 431—202 7 Claims
shrouds having a generally cylindrical shape with a larger
diameter than the casing and a plurality of openings com-
prising vertical slots spaced around the wind shrouds,
air access at the lower end of the casing within the lower
wind shroud, the access having a restriction means to limit
air entry and cause turbulent air flow in the casing,
fuel gas entry at the lower end of the casing,
waste gas supply system within the casing having preheating
means for preheating the waste gases with combustion of
fuel gas and air and having means for causing turbulence
of the waste gases, and
waste gas entry into the casing at a location where the fuel
gas and air have commenced combustion.
1. A waste gas incinerator comprising, an upright refractory
lined, genera ly cylindrical casing, forming a combustion
chamber and heat sink, having an open upper end and a lower
end,
an- upper wind shroud adjacent the open upper end and a
lower wind shroud adjacent the lower end, both wind
shrouds having a generally cylindrical shape with a larger
diameter than the casing and a plurality of openings com-
prising vertical slots spaced around the wind shrouds,
air access at the lower end of the casing within the lower
wind shroud, the access having a restriction means to limit
air entry and cause turbulent air flow in the casing,
and waste gas entry to the casing.
4,392,818
MULTIPLE HEAT RECUPERATION BURNER SYSTEM
AND METHOD
Joachim Wiinning, Bergstrasse 20, D-7250 Leonberg 7, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,832
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 8,
1980, 3017618
Int. Q.3 F23D 11/44
U.S. Q. 431—215 13 Qaims
4,392,817
WASTE GAS INONERATOR WITH ADDED FUEL GAS
Elmer M. Berlie; John D. Smart, and Michael J. Zelensky, all of
Alberta, Canada, assignors to Western Research & Develop-
ment, Calgary, Canada
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,554
Int. Q.3 F23D 13/20
U.S. Q. 431—202 9 Qaims
i
I-
1. A waste gas incinerator for burning waste gases with
additional fuel gas, comprising
an upright refractory lined generally cylindrical casing
forming a combustion chamber and heat sink, having an
open upper end and a lower end,
an upper wind shroud adjacent the open upper end and a
lower wind shroud adjacent the lower end, both wind
3. Burner system having =
a burner tube (4) adapted to receive a combustion fuel;
a first heat exchanger-recuperator (12) positioned to sur-
round said burner tube and having an inlet air duct (8) and
a combustion exhaust gas duct (14);
air inlet means (9, 10) furnishing combustion air to said inlet
air duct and for supplying combustion air to the burner;
exhaust gas conduit means (18, 20) in flow communication
with said combustion exhaust gas duct, said first heat
exchanger-recuperator preheating air for combustion by
the burner by heat exchange with exhaust gases,
and comprising an additional or auxiliary heat exchanger
(25) positioned immediately adjacent to, and downstream
of, said first heat exchanger-recuperator (12) to receive
combustion exhaust gases from the combustion exhaust
gas duct (14) of the first heat exchanger, said additional or
auxiliary heat exchanger including means (26) in form of a
ring-shaped structure (26), concentric with said first heat
exchanger-recuperator (12) for confining a heat carrier
medium and for cooling the exhaust gases flowing past
said additional or auxiliary heat exchanger (25) prior to
entry into the exhaust gas conduit means to a predeter-
mined exhaust temperature.
636
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,819
PRELIMINARY HEATING APPARATUS FOR TORCH
LAMP
Byorg R. Ahn, Room 706, Daekyo Apt-1,1-892 Yoido-Dong,
Seoul, Rep. of Korea
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,522
Claims priority, application Rep. of Korea, Feb. 22, 1980,
1083/80[U]
Int a.5 F23D n/44
U.S. a. 431—231 1 Qaim
burning chamber having a burning nozzle, passage means
leading from the respective storage means to said burning
nozzle, means for initially injecting conventional heating oil
through said burner nozzle to effect a temperature of a prede-
termined value, means for conveying at least some heat to the
refuse oil preliminary to its injection through said burning
nozzle whereby the refuse oil is readily combustible upon
ejection through said burning nozzle, means for maintaining
each of said storage means in sealed relation from the other,
notwithstanding the separated schedule of fuel flow from the
respective storage means to said burning nozzle whereby no
waste oil is permitted to enter the conventional heating oil
storage means nor is conventional heating oil permitted to flow
into the waste oil storage means; a timer means adapted to
provide initial heating by providing a supply from said conven-
1. Torch lamp comprising a fuel container for receiving fuel
therein, evaporation means mounted on the outside of said fuel
container and receiving fuel from said fuel container, a fuel
valve connected to said evaporation means for controlling the
fuel passing through said evaporation means, a compressor
mounted on the outside of said fuel container for supplying
compressed air to said fuel container, whereby compressed air
in said fuel container is operable to force the fuel in said fuel
container out through said evaporation means, said compressor
having an elongated section functioning as a handle for han-
dling the torch, a pouring hole in said fuel container for supply-
ing fuel to said fuel container, preliminary heating means re-
movably mounted in said pouring hole, said preliminary heat-
ing means being positioned for heating said evaporating means
prior to operating the lamp to evaporate fuel, said preliminary
heating means comprising a body disposed in said pouring
hole, a supply pipe connected at one end to said body and
extending downwardly therefrom into said fuel container, said
supply pipe having at least one bottom orifice opening into the
inside of said fuel container for receiving fuel from the inside of
said fuel container and at least one upper orifice opening into
the inside of said fuel container for receiving compressed air
from the inside of said fuel container, said preliminary heating
means further comprising an adjusting valve for regulating fuel
and air through said supply pipe, a spouting pipe connected to
said body and having an opening adjacent to said evaporation
means so that when said adjusting valve is opened, fuel under
pressure flows from said bottom orifice located in said fuel
container and compressed air under pressure flows from said
upper orifice located in said fuel container into said supply pipe
to said body and thence through said open adjusting valve to
exit through said spouting pipe, and ignition means mounted on
said body for igniting the fuel at the spouting pipe such that
burning fuel from said spouting pipe thereby heats the evapo-
ratmg means until the evaporating means is sufficiently heated
to suppori combustion of fuel supplied by way of said fuel
valve.
4,392,820
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING WASTE
OIL
Werner G. Niederholtmeyer, 7804 Fritz Rd., Fort Wayne, Ind.
46802
FUed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,827
Int CI.i F23G 5/12
VJS. a. 431—284 7 Claims
1. An apparatus for burning a combination of conventional
heating oil and refuse oil, comprising storage means for the
conventional heating oil and storage means for the refuse oil, a
tional heating oil storage means solely, means for thereafter
discontinuing said supply and providing for a flow only from
said refuse oil storage means whereby during the initial heat-up
time of the burning chamber there is utilized fuel from the
conventional heating oil storage means and thereafter from the
refuse oil storage means which serves as the primary fuel
medium; remotely controlled solenoid operative valves in the
passage means from at least one of said storage means, means
for effecting the opening and closing of said solenoid operative
valves whereby supply of oil to said nozzle is effective from
only one of said storage means; a supply pump in each of the
passage means for said conventional heating oil and refuse oil
respectively, a motor associated with each of said pumps, and
additional control valve means responsive to said timer for
effectively isolating the respective storage means one from the
other to prevent admixture of said oils in the respective means.
4,392,821
CALONING FURNACE WITH GAS-PERMEABLE WALL
STRUCTURE
Erwin FiissI, Zurich, and Norbert Berger, Thalwil, both of Swit-
zerland, assignors to Maerz Ofenbau AG, Zurich, Switzerland
FUed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,561
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 14, 1980,
7665/80
Int. a.3 F27D 1/08; F27B 3/24; F23M 5/02
U.S. a. 432—96 4 Claims
1. A regenerative shaft kiln for burning limestone or similar
raw materials comprising: wall means formed of refractory
material defining a kiln interior; burner means including at least
one burner located in said kiln interior, said at least one burner
having a burner opening arranged within said kiln at a distance
from said wall means; an outer metallic shell surrounding said
wall means on the outer side thereof and spaced therefrom in
order to define an annular gap between said outer metalic shell
and said wall means; and means for supplying a compressed
gaseous medium into said gap between said outer metallic shell
and said wall means; said wall means consisting essentially of
refractory bricks having formed therein grooves in at least one
lateral wall of said bricks, said grooves being formed to extend
from an outer side of said bricks to an inner side thereof in
JULY 12, 191 [J
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
637
order thereby to form said wall means to be gas-permeable at 4,392,823
least in the region of said burner opening, said grooves being METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR INDIRECTLY
thus formed to extend completely through said wall means in DRYING AND PREHEATING HNE MATERIAL
Heinrich Weber, Recklinghausen; Kurt Lorenz, Hattingen, and
Horst Dungs, Heme, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Firma Carl Still Gmbb & Co. KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,4%
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1980, 3034952; Feb. 27, 1981, 3107407
Int. a.3 F27B 7/70
U.S. a. 432—114 18 Oaims
flow communication between said gap and the interior of said
furnace thereby effecting flow of said compressed gaseous
medium therethrough.
4,392,822
SYSTEM FOR BURNING HNE-GRAINED MATERIAL,
PARTICULARLY FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
CEMENT CLINKERS
Kunibert Brachthauser, Bergisch Gladbach, and Horst Herchen-
bach, Troisdorf, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 63,102, Aug. 2, 1979, Pat. No. 4,298,393.
This application Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,810
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 2,
1978 2833744
Int. a.3 F27B 7/02; F27D 11/00; H05B 11/00; F27B 7/36
U.S. a. 432—106 9 Qaims
1. An apparatus for drying and preheating fine material,
comprising:
an outer rotary drum defining a space therein;
drum drive means connected to said rotary drum for rotat-
ing said rotary drum;
a plurality of heating tubes extending through and closed
with respect to the space of said rotary drum, a pair of
heads connected to opposite ends of said rotary drum for
rotatably receiving said rotary drum with said heating
tubes connected between said pair of heads;
feed means connected at one end of said rotary drum for
supplying moist fine material to said rotary dum;
discharge means at an opposite end of said rotary drum for
the removal of dried and preheated fine material from said
rotary drum;
vapor takeoff means connected to said rotary drum the top
and at both opposite ends of said rotary drum for remov-
ing vapor, from the moist material, out of said rotary
drum; and
a return line connected between said discharge means and
said feed means, at a location outside said rotary drum
space, for recycling a portion of the preheated and dried
find material to said rotary drum with said moist fine
material.
1. In an apparatus for manufacturing calcined mineral prod-
ucts such as cement clinker from raw meal comprising a system
including a raw meal preheater, a calciner, a rotary tubular
kiln, and a clinker cooler in sequence, the improvement which
comprises: {
means for introducing a fossil fuel into said rotary kiln in an
amount substantially less than the overall thermal energy
supplied to said system,
heat generator means acting on the contents of said kiln and
producing no exhaust gases therein, and
a bypass hne connected to said rotary kiln to withdraw
exhaust gases from said kiln created by the combustion of
said fossil fuel.
4,392,824
SYSTEM FOR IMPROVING THE FLOW OF GASES TO A
COMBUSTION CHAMBER OF A COKE OVEN OR THE
LIKE
Carl-Heinz Struck, Bochum, and Ralf Schumacher, Hagen, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dr. C. Otto & Comp.
G.m.b.H., Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,152
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct 8,
1980, 3037950
Int Q.3 F27D 17/00; ClOB 1/06
U.S. Q. 432—180 14 Qaims
1. An industrial gas-fired system such as a coke oven, said
system including a heating flue and ducts having a vertical
portion and an obliquely-rising duct portion for conducting a
flow of combustion gases into said heating flue, recuperative
waste-heat recovery means receiving waste gases for preheat-
ing said combustion gases which comprise air when heating by
combustion of rich gas and comprise air and lean gas when
heating by combustion of lean gas, said combustion gases being
introduced through said ducts from outlets of said waste-heat
638
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
recovery means into a heating flue, said system including the
combination therewith of wedge-shaped refractory bricks each
having at least one oblique surface, each brick being supported
within a vertical portion of a duct and having vertical bores,
the vertical portion of each duct having an increased diameter
and extending to the base of the flue, each brick having a
1^*
covering the first strap to ensure that said interengage-
ment is maintained.
rectangular cross section with vertical sides abutting the inner
walls of the duct so that the said oblique surface extends at the
bottom of the brick toward the mouth of the obliquely-rising
duct portion, the sum of the cross-sectional areas of said cylin-
drical bores being within the range of 0.75 to 1.5 times the
cross section of the gas-flow portion of the obliquely-rising
duct portion.
4,392,825
STRAPPING
Irvin S. DeWoskin, St. Louis County, Mo., assignor to Ortho-
band Company, Inc., Barnhart, Mo.
FUed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,673
Int. a.3 A61C 7/00
U.S. a. 433—5 27 Qaims
Z9 3
t
r
"4liS
'^/<«3'
Tlf jL >t 1 I i / I ■^
Ir], -|3^tf^
44.
4,392,826
PALATAL ARCH BAR WITH COMBINATION LOCKING
DEVICE AND ELASTIC ANCHOR
Robert A. Goshgarian, 2634 Grand Ave., Waukegan, III. 60085
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,676
Int. a.5 A61C 7/00
U.S. a. 433—7 5 Qaims
1. In an orthodontic appliance for applying rotating, expand-
ing, contracting, intruding, and/or torquing forces to a pair of
opposed molars in the upper arch of a person, wherein the
appliance includes lingual tubes mounted lingually on said
molars with mesiodistally extending openings therethrough,
and a palatal arch bar having doubled-over ends received
mesially by said lingual tubes, the improvement being in means
for locking the arch bar to the lingual tubes, which locking
means includes a U-shaped locking bar extending from each of
the doubled-over ends and over the distal ends of the lingual
tubes to prevent removal of said ends from the tubes.
4,392,827
SELF-CONTAINED ROOT CANAL HEATED
CONDENSER DENTAL INSTRUMENT
Howard Martin, 909 Pershing Dr., Silver Spring, Md. 20910
Filed Nov. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,069
Int. a.3 A61C i/00
U.S. a. 433—32 8 Qaims
1. Strapping having:
tensioning means comprising a flrst strap adapted to be
pulled for developing a tension force;
a second substantially nonstretchable strap including an
inner strip and an outer strip on one face constituting the
outside face of the inner strip, said outer strip having
openings therein spaced at intervals longitudinally of the
strip and extending between the side edges of the strip;
and
cooperable fastening means on the flrst strap and on the
outside face of the inner strip of the second strap,
said flrst strap being adapted to be inserted between the inner
and outer strips of the second strap and pulled to develop
the desired tension force, said cooperable fastening means
comprising a multiplicity of fastening elements projecting
from either the first strap or the inner strip of the second
strap, the other having a plush-like surface for interen-
gagement with said fastening elements thereby to secure
the flrst and second straps together with said tensioning
means applying said tension force,
said fastening elements and plush-like surface being adapted
to be held apart as the flrst strap is inserted between the
inner and outer strips of the second strap by an elongate
blade inserted between the first strap and the inner strip of
the second strap, said blade being removable to permit
interengagement of said fastening elements and said plush-
like surface for securing the flrst and second straps to-
gether, the outer strip of the second strap at least partially
1. A self-contained root canal heated condenser dental in-
strument, comprising:
a handle means, said handle means being hollow, said hollow
handle means having an aperture at one end and being
open at the opposite end, said handle means having a
removable closure means for said open end;
a power source means, said power source means being af-
flxed inside said hollow handle means;
a dental tool means, said dental tool means being used for
filling root canal cavities, said dental tool means having a
first end and a second end thereof, said first end being
tapered, flexible, and having a memory, said first end
being capable of spreading and condensing root canal
filling material, said dental tool means being capable of
being heated in order to heat said root canal fllling mate-
rial to cause it to be workable, said dental tool means being
heated by a heating element means, said heating element
means being folded upon itself to form a return loop con-
flguration of two legs, said heating element means at the
apex of said return loop being further conflgured into said
taper;
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
639
an insulating means, said insulating means being located and
placed within said dental tool means and between said two
legs of said return loop, said insulating means insulating
each said leg electrically from the other leg;
a coating material, said coating material being applied on
said tapered portion of said heating element, said coating
material preventing said root canal fllling material from
adhering thereto;
a heat transmission means, said heat transmission means
being affixed inside said hollow handle means adjacent to
said aperture therein, said heat transmission means being
electrically connected to said power source means, said
dental tool means having said second end thereof inserted
through said aperture in said handle means and into said
heat transmission means, said heat transmission means
drawing power from said power source means and in turn
heating said first end of said dental tool means through
said hearting element means.
substrate textured exterior surface without any intermedi-
ate interface composition therebetween, said porcelain
layer having an exterior of prescribed configuration to
provide a desired occlusal surface.
4,392,828
METHOD FOR RESTORING A TOOTH
Lars E. M. Ehmford, 31 Sanekullavagen, 217 14 Malmo, Swe-
den
Continuation of Ser. No. 777,909, Mar. 15, 1977, abandoned.
This application Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,636
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 16, 1976, 7603313
Int. a.3 A61K 6/08
4,392,830
BODY COORDINATION TRAINING AID
Norman Salzman, 10508 Gainsborough Rd., Potomac, Md.
20854, and Edward Wellner, 4028 Hunt Rd., Fairfax, Va.
22031
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,496
Int. a.3 A63B (59/i6
U.S. CI. 433—217
1 Claim U.S. a. 434— 258
11 Claims
1. A method of restoring a tooth which comprises applying
thereto a dental composite comprising a particulate glass filler
comprising a rigid and porous three-dimensional network of
glass fibers produced by fusing together by heating the fibers
having a diameter of less than 4 microns at a temperature
sufficient to cause melting and complete fusion of substantially
all of the individual glass fibers at their points of contact, the
porosity of which is substantially continuous throughout the
network, and mixed in an organic hardening resin; and allow-
ing sufficient time for the hardening thereof.
4,392,829
METAL-PORCELAIN DENTAL RESTORATION AND
METHOD OF MAKING
Asami Tanaka, 9307 North Lavergne, Skokie, III. 60077
I Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,682
Int. a.3 A61C 5/OS, 5/10
U.S. a. 433—222 15 Claims
1. A baked metal-porcelain dental restoration for mounting
on a patient's shaped tooth base said restoration comprising:
(a) an interior substrate of non-cast semi-precious alloy of
soft, swageable thin metal foil for mounting on the shaped
tooth base, said substrate having a textured exterior sur-
face substantially free from surface coatings and an inte-
rior surface configuration that conforms substantially to
the exterior configuration of said tooth base; and
(b) a body porcelain layer chemically bonded directly to the
1. A body coordination training aid, comprising:
an audio oscillator;
a power source for said audio oscillator;
a first electrode;
a second electrode;
said first and second electrodes configured to make electri-
cal contact when said user's head and shoulder are in a
predetermined relative orientation;
means to electrically contact said audio oscillator to said
p)ower source via said first and second electrodes;
a mounting means for adjustably holding said first electrode
and adapted to be mounted to the user's head; and
a rigid, flexible, non-conducting mounting strip for support-
ing said mounting means, said audio oscillator, and said
power source.
4,392,831
ORRERY
Fritz Schubert, 1144 Trevor Dr., Lakeview Heights, Kelowna,
British Columbia, Canada (VIZ 2J8)
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,781
Int. a.3 G09B 27/02
U.S. a. 434—291 7 Claims
1. An orrery comprising: __
(a) a frame;
(b) a plurality of concentric hollow tubes rotatably mounted
on said frame, each having first and second ends, the first
and second ends of each of said tubes extending axially
640
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
beyond first and second ends respectively of its outwardly
adjacent tube;
(c) a plurality of supports connected at inner ends thereof to
the first end of respective tubes, so as to extend radially
outward therefrom a distance increasing from said supjwrt
connected to the innermost of said tubes to said support
connected to the outermost of said tubes;
(d) a plurality of planetary representations representing a
plurality of inner planets and a plurality of outer planets
connected to respective supports remote from said tubes
so as to be rotated about said tubes when said tubes are
rotated;
(e) first set of circular gears connected to the second end of
respective ones of said tubes which rotate planetary repre-
sentations of inner planets;
(f) a second set of circular gears connected to the second end
of respective ones of said tubes which rotate planetary
representations of outer planets;
(g) first and second spaced apart axles mounted on said
frame parallel to said tubes;
(h) third and fourth sets of circular gears rotatably mounted
on said first axle, each gear of said third set being adjacent
and connected to a corresponding gear of the fourth set so
as to rotate the latter when the former is rotated, and each
gear of the fourth set engaging a corresponding gear of
the second set of gears;
(i) fifth and sixth sets of circular gears rotatably mounted on
said second axle, each gear of said fifth set being adjacent
and connected to a corresponding one of the sixth set of
gears so as to rotate the latter when the former is rotated,
and each gear of the sixth set engaging a corresponding
one of said third set of gears;
(j) a third axle rotatably mounted on said frame parallel to
said tubes;
(k) seventh and eighth sets of circular gears mounted on said
third axle to rotate therewith, each gear of said seventh set
of gears engaging a corresponding one of said first set of
gears, and each gear of said eighth set of gears engaging a
corresponding one of said fifth set of gears;
(1) means connected to said third axle for rotating said third
axle;
each gear in said sets of gears being dimensioned so as to rotate
said tubes at relative rotational velocities corresponding to the
relative rotational velocities of the planets represented by the
planetary representations.
4,392,832
STEERING AND PROPULSION SYSTEM FOR MARINE
USE
Carl E. Moberg, P.O. Box 1828, Seattle, Wash. 98111
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,075
Int. a.' B63H 22/02, 3/08
UJS. a. 440—49 10 Claims
1. A marine propulsion device comprising:
prime mover drive means,
marine propeller means, and
means for supplying power to said propeller means in selec-
tively variable amounts, including: a differential gearing
unit including a power input drive shaft drivingly con-
nected to said drive means, oppositely extending output
driven shafts, gear means for differentially driving said
output shafts from said power input shaft, and means for
drivingly connecting said propeller mean3 to one of said
output shafts; suid
brake means for selectively applying braking pressure to the
other of said output shafts,
whereby power to said propeller means will be applied in
direct proportion to the braking pressure applied by said
brake means.
8. An adjustable pitch propeller comprising:
a rotatable propeller shaft;
drive means to rotate the propeller shaft;
means for lubricating the drive means with a lubricating
fluid;
propeller blade means; -
means for mounting said propeller blade means on said
propeller shaft for rotation therewith, said mounting
means including means forming a fluid pressure cylinder
therein;
said propeller blade means including piston means affixed
thereto and located in said cylinder,
a source of selectively variable fluid pressure acting on said
piston means comprising
a bore in the propeller shaft in fluid communication with the
cylinder and with the lubricating means, and
means to selectively pressurize the lubricating fluid; and
cam and follower means acting between said piston means
and said fluid pressure cylinder for rotating said piston
relative to said cylinder during linear displacement
thereof.
4,392,833
COMBINED SINGLE AND DOUBLE WATER SKI TOW
BAR
Gary N. Hayden, 5479 Mill Creek Blvd., Youngstown, Ohio
44512
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,480
Int. a.3 Ad3C 15/06
U.S. a. 441—69 1 Claim
1. An improvement in a water ski tow device comprising a
tow rope for attachment at one end to a towing boat, said tow
rope having four separate sections at its opposite end and a tow
bar for a skier attached to said four sections of the tow rope,
said tow bar comprising a pair of elongated body members,
each having first and second ends, means on said first ends
detachably joined to one another so as to position said elon-
gated body members in end to end assembled relation, detach-
able members on the outer opposite second ends of said elon-
JULY 12, 19W
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
641
gated body members, said improvement comprising means
attaching said four end sections of said tow rope to said elon-
gated body members and said detachable members respec-
tively, said means comprising two of said four sections of said
tow rope being attached to said detachable members and two
of said four sections of said tow rope being attached to said
4,392,835
SLICER DISCONNECT
Ehtisham U. A. Siddiqui; James L. Wenzel, and John L. Butter-
field, all of Erie, Pa., assignors to General Electric Company,
Burlington, Vt.
FUed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 239,017
Int. a.3 F16D 9/00
U.S. CI. 464—32 6 Qaims
outer opposite second ends of said elongated body members
adjacent said detachable members, said detachable members
when detached from said outer opposite second ends of said
elongated body members being engagable with said means on
said first ends of said elongated body members whereby two
tow bars, each having two of said four sections of said tow
rope attached to its ends may be formed from said tow bar.
4,392,834
METHOD FOR AGING A CATHODE OF A
CATHODE-RAY TUBE
Edgar M. Snuth, Millersvilie, Pa., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,772
Int. C1.3 HOIJ 9/44
U.S. a. 445—6 2 Qaims
' KMEI)
VIEW A-A
%
1. A shaft quick disconnect mechanism for intercoupling a
high-speed driving shaft and a driven shaft, comprising:
a coupling shaft having an axis of rotation and its one end
fixed against torsional relative movement with said driv-
ing shaft and its other end fixed against torsional relative
movement with said driven shaft, and having a tubular
intermediate portion of thin annular cross-section;
means for severing said coupling shaft at said intermediate
portion thereof including:
slicing means having an edge portion and having a first
disposition whereat said edge portion is spaced from
said tubular intermediate portion and a second dispo-
sition whereat said edge portion is in tangential abut-
ment with the periphery of said tubular intermediate
portion;
detent means having a first disposition whereat it engages
said slicing means and retains said slicing means in its
first, spaced disposition and a second disposition
whereat it is disengaged from said slicing means;
biasing means coupled to said slicing means for translating
said slicing means, effective after said detent means has
moved from its first, engaged disposition to its second,
disengaged disposition, from said first, spaced dispo-
sition to said second, tangential abutment disposition,
whereat said edge portion is in biased engagement with
said tubular intermediate portion and as said driving
shaft turns said coupling shaft said edg^ portion rubs
against said tubular intermediate portion to provide a
frictional force which provides localized heating of said
tubular intermediate portion to cause plastic deforma-
tion and rupture of said tubular intermediate portion.
1. A method of aging a cathode of an evacuated cathode-ray
tube having an electron gun for generating at least one electron
beam, said electron gun including a heater, a cathode, a control
electrode, a screen electrode and a focus electrode, said
method comprising the steps of:
interconnecting said cathode and said focus electrode,
applying a first potential to said heater,
applying a second potential to said cathode and said focus
electrode,
applying a third potential, more positive than said second
potential, to said control electrode,
applying a fourth potential to said screen electrode, _^
sensing a change in said fourth potential,
generating a control signal from said sensed change in said
fourth potential,
using said control signal to vary said first potential to said
heater, and
terminating said aging process when said control signal
causes a predetermined value of said first potential to be
achieved.
4,392,836
DEVICE FOR CONNECTING SPEEDOMETER TO
FLEXIBLE SHAFT
Noboru Sugawara, Ageo, Japan, assignor to Kanto Seiki Co.,
Ltd., Saitama, Japan
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,160
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1980, 55-
69627[U]
Int. Q.3 F16B 21/00: F16C 1/06; F16D 1/00
U.S. Q. 464—52 3 Qaims
1. An assembly comprising a speedometer, a flexible shaft,
and a device for connecting said flexible shaft to said speedom-
eter, said speedometer including an axially extending stem with
an outer circumferential surface, an annular groove formed in
and extending around said circumferential surface, a rotating
shaft extending through said stem, said flexible shaft includes
an axially extending inner shaft, said inner shaft is coupled to
and rotates said rotating shaft, said device comprises a connect-
ing tube formed of a synthetic resin, said connecting tube
includes a front tube part positioned around said stem, said
front tube part having a pair of diametrically opposite piercing
642
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
holes, a rear tube part positioned around said flexible shaft, said
front tube part having a larger diameter than said rear tube
part, and a tapered tube part extending between and intercon-
necting said front and rear tube parts with the axes of said
front, ta(>ered, and rear tube parts disposed in axial alignment,
a lever formed integrally with said connecting tube at the
location of the connection of said tapered tube part to said
front tube part, said lever connected to said connecting tube by
a thin walled hinge part and said lever being pivotally displace-
able between a first position standing upwardly from said
connecting tube and a second position pivoted downwardly
toward and extending in the axial direction of said front tube
part, a U-shaped arm extending transversely of and formed
being fixedly joined to an end of an element from the other of
said pairs so that said elements form a unitary rectangular
arrangement with the two elements of each of said pairs lo-
cated on opposite sides thereof, said flex member having cor-
ners which are the comers of said rectangular arrangement,
means fixing said driving member to diagonally opposite ones
of said comers of said fiex member, and means fixing said
driven member to the remaining diagonally opposite ones of
said comers of said flex member, said flex member being con-
nected to said driving and driven members in such manner that
when said driving and driven members rotate and transmit
torque in said one direction of rotation the thinner two of said
flex elements are in tension and the thicker two of said flex
elements are in compression.
integrally with said lever at a location between the opposite
ends of said arm, the opposite ends of said U-shaped arm being
elastically deformable toward and away from one another,
each of said opposite ends has a claw extending toward said
claw on the other said oppxjsite end, said U-shaped arm is
dimensioned to fit around said front tube part and is displace-
able with said lever from the first position where it is spaced
from said front tube part into the second position where it fits
partly around the outside surface of said front part and initially
said claws deform outwardly away from one another and then
said claws engage into said piercing holes with the inner ends
of said claws engaging into said annular groove formed in the
circumferential surface of said stem when said front tube part
fits over said stem.
4,392,838
SEALING BOOT FOR UNIVERSAL JOINT
Hans-Heinrich Welschof, Rodenbach, and Karl Damian,
Rodgau, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Lohr &
Bromkamp GmbH, Offenbach am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,444
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 13,
1980, 3009639
Int. a.3 F16D 3/84
U.S. a. 464—175 8 Qaims
4,392,837
ROTARY DRIVE COUPLING
Charles J. Wirth, West Granby, Conn., assignor to Kamatics
Corporation, Bloomfield, Conn.
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,695
Int. Cl.^ F16D 3/62
U.S. a. 464—69 6 Qaims
1. In a sealing boot for a universal joint including a pair of
terminal portions each engaged, respectively, with different
parts of said universal joint to provide a protective seal for said
joint, the improvement wherein at least one of said terminal
portions comprises annular collar means arranged in sealed
engagement with one of said different respective parts of said
joint, channel means defined between said collar means and
said one joint part for enabling fluid flow therethrough be-
tween the interior and exterior or joint portions sealed by said
sealing boot and resilient check valve means located on one
side of said channel means, said resilient check valve means
being normally in sealing engagement with said one joint part
to prevent fluid flow through said channel means with the
level of fluid pressure within said channel means operating to
resiliently release said resilient check valve means from said
sealing engagement to enable fluid flow through said channel
means.
1. A flexible coupling for use in applications wherein more
torque is to be transmitted in one direction of rotation than the
other, said coupling comprising a driving member rotatable
about a first axis, a driven member rotatable about a second
axis generally colinear with said first axis, and a flex member
located substantially in a plane generally perpendicular to said
first and second axes, said flex member consisting of a first pair
and a second pair of elongated flex elements all of which
elements are of generally rectangular cross-section throughout
the major portion of their lengths, each of said elements having
two ends and each element of each of said pairs being of sub-
stantially the same length and cross-section as the other ele-
ment of its pair, the two elements of said first pair having a
thickness substantially different from that of the two said ele-
ments of said second pair, each end of each of said elements
4,392,839
DRIVE SHAFT CONSTRUCTION
Erich Aucktor, Offenbach am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Lohr & Bromkamp GmbH, Offenbach am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,446
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 11,
1980, 3009277
Int. a.3 F16C 3/00
U.S. a. 464—183 2 Qaims
1. In a drive shaft construction for transmitting power in an
automotive vehicle including an integral hollow tubular shaft
having a pair of end portions formed with a splined configura-
JULY 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
643
tion adapted for receiving driving joints, the improvement
which comprises:
that said tubular shaft is formed with a portion intermediate
said end portions having an outer diameter greater than
the outer diameter of said end portions;
that the wall thickness of said intermediate portion is be-
tween i and 1/15 of said outer diameter of said intermedi-
ate portion; and
12 l 1 5
4,392,841
GUIDE SPROCKET WHEEL, MORE PARTICULARLY
FOR THE GEAR SHIFT DEVICES OF BICYCLES AND
THE LIKE
Henri Juy, Dijon, France, assignor to Le Simplex, France
Filed Jun. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 161,399
Oaims priority, application France, Jun. 26, 1979, 79 17272
Int. a.' F16H 55/30. 11/08: B62M 9/12
U.S. CI. 474—156 7 Qaims
that said tubular shaft includes two transition portions ex-
tending respectively between said intermediate portion
and each of said end portions, said transition portions
being formed as stepped configurations each including at
least two steps and each having a wall thickness which
increases from said larger-diameter intermediate portion
to said smaller-diameter end portions.
4,392,840
BELT TENSIONER
Mijo Radocaj, Massillon, Ohio, assignor to Dyneer Corporation,
Canton, Ohio
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,290
Int. a.3 F16H 7/00. 7/10
U.S. a. 474—117 11 Qaims
1. A guide sprocket wheel adapted for engagement with the
rolls of a chain, comprising a plurality of teeth corresponding
to the pitch of the chain to be engaged, the tops of the teeth
being chamfered or bevelled on the periphery and on the
lateral faces of the wheel; wherein on the lateral faces of the
wheel, the angles formed on the tops of the teeth and on the
side of the recesses between the teeth are cut ofT by further
bevels around the profile of the teeth, gradually reducing the
thickness of the teeth from the base to the tops thereof; the
bevels extending between a central peripheral bevel to the
bottom of the recesses between two successive teeth such that
the thickness of the wheel is not modified at the bottom of the
recesses of the teeth.
4,392,842
TOOTHED POSITIVE DRIVE POWER TRANSMISSION
BELT WITH A FABRIC REINFORCEMENT SUSPENDED
WITHIN THE BELT TEETH
William A. Skura, Naugatuck, and Thaddeus F. Cathey, Wood-
bury, both of Conn., assignors to Uniroyal, Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 195,725
Int. a.^ F16G 1/28
U.S. a. 474—205 13 Qaims
1. An improved belt tensioner construction for tensioning an
endless drive belt of the drive system for vehicle accessories,
said construction including:
(a) shaft means adapted to-be mounted in a fixed position
adjacent the drive belt;
(b) pulley means movably mounted with respect to the shaft
means and movable in a belt tensioning direction for ten-
sioning engagement with the drive belt;
(c) torsional spring means telescopically mounted on the
shaft means for biasing the pulley means in the belt ten-
sioning direction; and
(d) clutch means telescopically mounted on the shaft means
within the torsional spring means and operatively engaged
with the pulley means and the shaft means for permitting
movement of the pulley means in the belt tensioning direc-
tion and for restraining movement of the pulley means in
a direction opposite to the belt tensioning direction.
1. A positive drive belt for operation with toothed pulleys
comprising an elastomeric body, a reinforcing tensile member
imbedded in said body, teeth on at least one surface of said
body said teeth having tip regions spaced from said reinforcing
member and said teeth separated by land areas, a flexible cov-
ering on the outer surface of the belt teeth and land areas and
a curvilinear shaped suspended reinforcing means within each
tooth separated from the outer surface of the tooth and from
the outer surface of the land areas by a curvilinear shaped
cushion layer of elastomeric material, said cushion layer hav-
ing a thickness varying gradually between a first given thick-
ness in the region of the land areas to a second substantially
greater given thickness in the tip regions whereby the outer
surface of the belt is free to flex as the belt engages its pulleys
644
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
while the inner portion of the belt teeth are structurally rein-
forced against tooth shear.
4,392,843
METAL BELT
Geoffrey N. Smit, Rancho Palos Verdes, Calif., assignor to U.S. O. 494—1
Borg-Warner Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,300
Int. a.3 F16G 5/18
U.S. a. 474—245 5 Oaims
4,392,845
DISCHARGE NOZZLE FOR CENTRIFUGAL
SEPARATOR DRUMS
Hubert Gunnewig, Oelde, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Westfalia Separator AG, Oelde, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,920
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 3,
1981, 3103531
Int. CIJ B04B 1/10
1 Claim
1. An endless metal chain belt adapted for use in connecting
pulleys in a pulley drive system wherein each pulley is con-
structed of a pair of flanges, said belt comprising:
a plurality of sets of links, each set of which is interleaved
with the next adjacent sets of linlcs;
pivot means joining the next adjacent sets of links to form an
endless chain and to permit articulation thereof; and
metal drive blocks, each having a central window bounded
by a bottom, top and sides, and each surrounding a set of
links;
each drive block means being located between and generally
spaced from the next adjacent pivot means;
each drive block means being frictionally positioned and
secured to its set of links.
4,392,844
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CORRECTING STACK
LEAN IN A ZIGZAG FOLDED WEB
James B. Fulk, Saratoga, Calif.; Jerry L. McKeefry, Pulaski,
Wis.; George F. Schuning, DePere, Wis., and John J. Bradley,
Green Bay, Wis., assignors to Paper Converting Machine
Company, Green Bay, Wis.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,796
Int. a? B65H 43/16
U.S. a. 493—399 16 Qaims
1. In a method for correcting stack lean in a zig-zag folded
continuous web having selected longitudinally spaced lines of
transverse perforation and a fold at each said selected line, the
steps of feeding a web through a means for transversely perfo-
rating the web while the web is under tension, and applying a
cyclically varying additional force to the web for the purpose
of changing the longitudinal length between said selected lines
as the web passes through the perforating means, the duration
of said cycle of said force extending at least over the web
length between three folds.
1. In a centrifugal separator drum with continuous discharge
for the removal by centrifugal force of a concentrate from a
peripheral portion of a separating chamber, having at least one
discharge nozzle being disposed in an outer wall of the drum at
a smaller drum diameter than that of the peripheral portion of
the separating chamber, at least one discharge nozzle being
rotatably inserted in the drum wall and sealed by a sealing ring
and having an inlet orifice, a discharge orifice and a locking
projection which engages a corresponding recess in the drum
wall for the fastening of the discharge nozzle, the improvement
wherein the discharge nozzle comprises an additional, eccen-
trically disposed projection opposite the locking projection for
the limiting movement of the discharge nozzle in the drum
wall and wherein the center of gravity of the discharge nozzle
lies in this projection, whereby under the action of the centrifu-
gal force when the drum is rotating the center of gravity estab-
lishes itself on a center-of-gravity axis extending radially from
the drum axis and, wherein the discharge orifice is disposed at
90° from the center-of-gravity axis and opposite the direction
of drum rotation.
4,392,846
CENTRIFUGE APPARATUS
John Novoselac, Aurora, Colo., and Dale L. Churcher, Johan-
nesburg, South Africa, assignors to Joy Manufacturing Com-
pany, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,389
Int. a.3 B04B 1/10
U.S. a. 494—40 . 7 Claims
1. A centrifuge comprising:
July 12, 198,
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
645
an elongated shaft member rotatable about the longitudinal
central axis thereof;
a bowl member having formed sections rigidly secured to
axially spaced portions of said shaft member, respectively,
said formed sections extending radially outwardly of and
circumferentially encompassing said central axis to form a
chamber in conjunction with said shaft member,
said formed sections having a discharge opening of a fixed
axial configuration between radially outer peripheral
portions of said formed sections for discharging a centri-
fuged material,
means for introducing a slurry into said bowl member,
said bowl member having means for discharging an effluent
constituent of said slurry,
a ring structure encompassing the radially outermost extent
of said peripheral portions at least a portion of which
includes a resilient member forming one side of the mate-
rial flow path from said discharge opening,
actuator means having relatively movable parts with one of
said parts being secured to one of said formed sections and
the other of said parts being cooperable with the resilient
portion of said ring structure to displace at least a portion
of said ring structure with respect to said radially outer-
most extent, and
said actuator means being selectively and independently
operable to move said other of said parts and displace at
least said portion of said ring structure to selectively and
independently open and close said discharge opening.
4,392,847
INJECTION AND MONITORING SYSTEM
Douglass G. Whitney, 2518 W. Wesley Rd., and John K. Martin,
III, 2837 Ridge Wood Cir., both of Atlanta, Ga. 30327
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 1,091, Jan. 8, 1979, Pat. No.
4,273,122, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 964,953, Nov.
30, 1978, Pat. No. 4,235,234, which is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 741,528, Nov. 12, 1976, Pat. No. 4,150,672. This
application May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,964
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—118 9 Qaims
1. A system for injecting fluid into a patient and monitoring
the blood pressure of the patient comprising:
injector means carrying the fluid to be injected, said injector
defining a fluid outlet therefrom and including expelling
means for alternatively and successively discharging fluid
for injection out of said fluid outlet for a first prescribed
period of time and stopping the discharge of fluid out of
said fluid outlet for a second prescribed period of time,
display means, and rate indicator means operatively asso-
ciated with said expelling means for generating an output
indicative of the rate of fluid injection connected to said
display means for visually displaying the rate at which the
fluid is being injected;
delivery tube means connected to said fluid outlet and
adapted to be connected to the vascular system of the
patient so that the fluid discharged from said fluid outlet
will be injected into the vascular system of the patient;
a blood pressure monitor including transducer means having
an inlet connected to said delivery tube means between
said fluid outlet on said injector means and the patient so
that said transducer means is in communication both with
the vascular system of the patient through said delivery
tube means and with said fluid outlet from said injector
means for providing an output indicative of the pressure in
said delivery tube means, said monitor further including
pressure detector means responsive to the output of said
transducer means to generate outputs indicative of the
maximum and minimum pressures within said delivery
tube means over a prescribed period of time; and
mounting means for selectively and removably mounting
said blood pressure monitor on said injector means, said
mounting means including connector means constructed
and arranged so that, as an incident to the mounting of
said monitor on said injector means, said connector means
operatively connects the output of said pressure detector
means in said blood pressure monitor to said display means
in said injector means whereby said display means in said
injector means automatically visually displays the output
of said pressure detector means which is indicative of the
maximum and minimum pressures in said delivery tube
means so that, while the discharge of fluid from said fluid
outlet in said injector means is stopped, the pressures in
said delivery tube means and displayed on said display
means is the patient's systolic and diastolic blood pressure.
4,392,848
CATHETERIZATION
Donald S. Lucas; Roger L. Stone, both of Fairfield, and Eugene
R. Cooper, Cincinnati, all of Ohio, assignors to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jun. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 51,477
Int. C1.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604-53 20 Qaims
1. A method for catheterization with lowered risk of nosoco-
mial infection by achieving microbial inhibition at and around
the placement site of catheters and the like used in the bodies
of humans and lower animals, comprising: inserting into the
body of a human or lower animal in need of such treatment a
catheter, or the like, said catheter comprising: a liquid reser-
voir of antimicrobial agent; a delivery means for transporting
liquid materials, said delivery means being in the form of a
tube; at least part of the portion of said tube which contacts the
body comprising a carboxylic acid-permeable polymer, said
polymer being in contact with both the environment external
to said catheter and with said reservoir of antimicrobial agent
flowing within the lumen of said catheter; said reservoir of
antimicrobial agent comprising an aqueous solution containing
at least a minimum lethal concentration of a straight chain
carboxylic acid or carboxylic acid salt having from 4 to 9
carbon atoms.
4,392,849
INFUSION PUMP CONTROLLER
John H. Petre, and Delos M. Cosgrove, both of Qeveland Hts.,
Ohio, assignors to The Qeveland Qinic Foundation, Qeve-
land, Ohio
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,516
Int. Q.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. Q. 604—66 W Claims
1. A medication introduction rate control system compris-
ing:
646
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
a blood pressure monitor for monitoring a patient's blood
pressure;
an analog to digital converter operatively connected with
the monitor for producing digital monitor signals which
are indicative of the patient's blood pressure;
a computer means for deriving from the monitor signals a
rate control signal which indicates a rate of medication
introduction, the computer means being operatively con-
nected with the analog to digital converter the computer
means including:
comparing means for comparing the monitor signals with
a preselected blood pressure level;
rate of change means for periodically determining a rate of
change of the monitor signals; and
•LOOD
> sum
niMSUKE
SCLfCTO*
t--t-r
— S DIGITAL
uj
RCSPOMSC
3C1£CT0R
_3 AOORCSS
■ oecoocR
rL
Aopness BUS
sn
C-
-h-
MTt
uraATE
(FAST)
-JO
STiNovr
LOttC
ICOIITIIOL
M
x_
•ATE.
COUNT.
-, LATCH.
■>n onivtn
-"MANUAL
— AUTO
-t SELECT
' COUNT
1 rouTwr}-'^— 1
•UfTENS r ; ^
n«»TEY,
l.wanualI
■^-\ «ATt
^-^SCl£CT I
^— 1 INFUSION
PUMP
incremental rate selection means for adjusting the rate con-
trol signal in preselected increments which preselected
increments are independent of a magnitude of a difference
between the monitor signals and the preselected blood
pressure level, the incremental rate selection means being
ojjeratively connected with the comparing means and the
rate of change means, whereby the rate control signal is
adjusted incrementally in response to the monitor signal
and the preselected blood pressure level comparison and
in response to the periodic rate of change determination;
a latch means for temporarily storing the rate control signal,
the latch means being operatively connected with the
computer means.
portion of said second container and permit in part the inter-
mixing of the material therein with the contents of said first
container by an inward movement of said flexible end wall,
and subsequently, the opposing diaphragm portion of said
second closure will be pierced by another piercing member
and the contents of both containers will flow through and
out of said second container by means of said other piercing
member.
432,851
IN-LINE TRANSFER UNIT
Alien M. Elias, Mundelein, 111., assignor to Abbott Laboratories,
North Chicago, 111.
Filed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,200
Int. a.3 A61J 1/00
U.S. a. 604—82 14 Claims
4,392,850
IN-LINE TRANSFER UNIT
Allen M. Elias, Mundelein, and Joseph N. Genese, Waukegan,
both of III., assignors to Abbott Laboratories, North Chicago,
lU.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,194
Int. a.3 A61J 1/00
U.S. a. 604—82 16 Oaims
1. An in-line transfer unit for mixing a sterile fluid material
from a first container into a second container with the contents
of both containers to be subsequently delivered through said
second container, said unit comprising;
a container having opposing passageways for storing a fluid
material to be transferred;
first and second closures sealing the passageways in said con-
tainer, said closures defined in part by pierceable diaphragm
portions;
a transfer member having a passage therethrough with a pierc-
ing end on one end and a diaphragm piercing portion on the
other end;
retentive movement means operatively associated with said
first closure and said transfer member to permit sufficient
movement of said transfer member so that said piercing
portion thereof can pierce said diaphragm of said first clo-
sure; and
a flexible end wall defining a portion of said second closure;
so that when the piercing end of the transfer member is in fluid
communication with said first container, said diaphragm
piercing portion can be moved to pierce said diaphragm
1. An in-line transfer unit for mixing a sterile fluid material
from a first container into a second container with the contents
of both containers to be subsequently delivered through said
second container, said unit comprising;
a container having opposing passageways for storing a fluid
material to be transferred;
first and second closures sealing the passageways in said
container, said closures defined in part by pierceable dia-
phragm portions;
a transfer member having a passage therethrough with a
piercing end on one end and a diaphragm piercing portion
on the other end;
July 12, 19
If
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
647
retentive movement means operatively associated with said
first closure and said transfer member to permit sufficient
movement of said transfer member so that said piercing
portion thereof can pierce said diaphragm of said first
closure;
so that when the piercing end of the transfer member is in
fluid communication with said first container, said dia-
phragm piercing portion can be moved to pierce said
diaphragm portion of said sc ;ond container and permit
intermixing of the material therein with the contents of
said first container, and subsequently, the opposing dia-
phragm portion of said second closure will be pierced by
another piercing member and the contents of both con-
tainers will flow through and out of said second container
by means of said other piercing member.
be affixed around said incision, said surface normally cov-
ered by a removable strippable sheet
and a hollow support tube of said self-supporting plastic, and of
predetermined length, sealingly connected to the distal end
4,392,852
TAMPER-ALERTING HYPODERMIC SYRINGE
Ida M. Butterfield, Santa Maria, Calif., assignor to Butterfield
Group, Santa Maria, Calif.
FUed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,926
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—111 4 Qaims
1. An improvement for use in a hypodermic syringe of the
type having a drive piston slidably mounted in a tubular mem-
ber, said improvement comprising:
a piece of easily abradable material mounted on the drive
piston for motion with the drive piston and urged radially
outward by the drive piston against the inside surface of
the tubular member; and,
a rough area on the inside surface of the tubular member in
the form of a strip extending lengthwise of the tubular
member, whereby as the drive piston is advanced within
the tubular member said piece of easily abradable material
rubs on said rough area causing particles of the easily
abradable material to become securely lodged on said
rough area where their presence provides a relatively
permanent indication of the extent to which the drive
piston has been advanced.
' ' 4,392,853
STERILE ASSEMBLY FOR PROTECTING AND
FASTENING AN INDWELLING DEVICE
Rudolph Muto, 24 Williams St., Andover, Mass. 01810
FUed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,000
n Int. C1.3 A61M 5/00. 25/02
U.S. a. 604l!-171 11 Claims
1. A sterile assembly for protecting an elongated indwelling
device having a proximal end, for insertion in an incision in the
human body, and a distal end, for connection to a medical
device outside the human body, said assembly comprising:
an elongated, tubular sheath of sterile, impervious, limp, flexi-
ble, plastic substantially co-extensive in length with said
indwelling device and having a proximal end and a distal
end;
an elongated, bell shaped dome of self-supporting plastic seal-
ingly affixed to the proximal end of said sheath: said dome
being shaped and dimensioned to cover said incision and
keep the incision and indwelling device free of contamina-
tion with air and having an annular base flange with a skin
contacting, surface covered by a layer of adhesive adapted to
of said sheath, said tube having an axial bore which tapers
from its outer end in a progressively reduced diameter to its
inner end for slidably fitting and sealing the conventional
nub on said indwelling device.
4,392,854
DEVICE FOR FIXING CATHETERS OR THE LIKE
Bernhard Ibach, Briiderstrasse 52, 5630 Remscheid, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,181
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00, 25/00
U.S. a. 604—174 5 aaims
1. A device for fixing catheters or the like on the surface of
a body, comprising a curved plate having an axis of curvature
adapted for alignment substantially normal to said body, said
curved plate extending less than 180° about said axis'of curva-
ture; and a plurality of legs attached to said curved plate, each
of said legs extending at an acute angle relative to said axis of
curvature and each of said legs having a foot portion adapted
for adhesion to said body and a raised portion attached to said
curved plate, to suppwrt said curved plate at a spaced-apart
position from said body.
4,392,855
CATHETER
Dimitrios G. Oreopoulos, 10 Ladywood Dr., Rexdale, Ontario,
and Gabor Zellerman, 566-590 Richmond Street West, Tor-
onto, Ontario, both of Canada
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 253,948
Int. a.5 A61M 25/00
U.S. a. 604—175 1 Claim
1. A permanent peritoneal catheter of flexible tubing comr-
pising a continuous flexible tube having a perforate peritoneum
section, a subcutaneous section and an exterior section;
648
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
said peritoneum section having flexible locating discs of
inert plastics material extending therefrom;
the peritoneum section having a circumferentially extending
bead of inert material adjacent the subcutaneous section
and a Hbrous peritoneum cuff outwardly of and close to
the bead;
said fibrous peritoneum cuff having a fibrous disc extending
radially therefrom;
said fibrous peritoneum cuff and fibrous disc being close to
said bead as aforesaid whereby to cooperate with said
bead to hold a jjeritoneum membrane therebetween and
form a seal at the peritoneum membrane in use;
the subcutaneous section having means for sealing the cathe-
ter at the outer skin.
4,392,856
VASCULAR PUNCTURE STABILIZER niTING FOR
FACILITATING WITHDRAWAL
Joseph Lichtenstein, Colonia, N.J., assignor to Whitman Medi-
cal Corporation, Gark, N.J.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,481
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—177 16 Qalms
substantially co-planar relation when said stabilizing mem-
ber is in an unflexed second position;
gripping means defined in said first position of said stabiliz-
ing member for securing said holder in contact with and
extending along said support region to preclude all rela-
tive movement between said holder and said stabilizing
member; and
retaining means defined in said second position of said stabi-
lizing member for retaining said holder in contact with
and extending along said support region to preclude all
relative movement between said holder and said stabiliz-
ing member except movement parallel to said longitudinal
axis.
4,392,857
TUBE HOLDER
Anthony V. Beran, 1472 La Loma Dr., Santa Ana, Calif. 92705
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,698
Int. aj A61M 25/02
U.S. a. 604—179 10 aainis
1. A fitting for use in performing a vascular puncture by a
blood vessel-entering element and for positionally stabilizing
the blood vessel-entering element in situ after the vascular
puncture, said fitting comprising:
a holder for said blood vessel-entering element, said holder
including an elongate member having a longitudinal axis
extending substantially parallel to said blood vessel-enter-
ing element;
a stabilizing member having top and bottom surfaces, a
longitudinally-extending support region on said first sur-
face, and first and second wing-like members extending in
opposite direction transversely from said support region,
said stabilizing member being flexible about said support
region to define a first flexed position in which parts of the
wing-like members at said top surface are brought into
contact, said wing-like members normally residing in
1. A tube clamp comprising:
a clamp base including a lengthwise surface adapted to lie
disposed against a section of the length of a tube;
a U-shaped strap retainer fixed to the base at one side of said
lengthwise surface, the arms of the U-shape extending
substantially parallel said surface;
a strap fixed at one end to said base at the other side of said
lengthwise surface;
complementally formed conformations on at least one side
of said strap and one arm of said U-shaped strap retainer,
the separation of said arms being such that said strap may
be inserted sidewise between the arms of the strap retainer
when said conformations are aligned and may not be
inserted endwise between the arms without retraction of
one of said conformations;
the width of said strap being less than the length of at least
one of said arms of the U-shaped strap retainer; and
a projection extending from one arm toward the other of
said U-shaped strap retainer at a point near the upper end
of said one arm, the degree of extension being such as to
preclude sidewise insertion of the strap between said arms,
and sidewise removal, unless the arms of the U-shaped
strap retainer are separated beyond their separation in
relaxed condition.
4,392,858
WOUND DRAINAGE DEVICE
Robert D. George, Lake St. Louis, and Georgio di Palma, St.
Peters, both of Mo., assignors to Sherwood Medical Company,
St Louis, Mo.
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,702
Int. a.J A61M 7/00
U.S. a. 604—187 19 Claims
1. A patient wound drainage device comprising manually
operable wound suction pump means for connection with a
catheter disposed adjacent a body wound of a patient for
removing and collecting drainage liquid from the body wound,
said pump means including a resilient, at least partially collaps-
ible drainage receptacle, a pump inlet port connected to said
July 12, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
649
receptacle means for connection said pump inlet port to a
catheter so that said receptacle can receive drainage liquid
from the body wound, and a pump outlet port connected to
said receptacle for discharging drainage liquid therefrom, said
receptacle being hand squeezable and releasable for producing
a suction force at said pump inlet port, a one-way valve con-
nected in series with said pump inlet port to prevent drainage
liquid flow from said receptacle to the catheter, a fluid drain-
age storage bag including a pair of pliable sheet material mem-
bers in face-to-face relation forming the sidewalls of the bag, a
other end of the sleeve, the two ends of the collapsible sleeve
being reciprocable relative to one another in the direction of
the length of the needle and being resiliently biased in the
extended position, whereby, in use, when an injection is ef-
fected by placing said other end of the sleeve against the injec-
tion site and applying pressure to the injection device in a
direction towards the injection site, the pxaint of the needle
moves through the wall means and the sterilizing means into
the injection site as the sleeve collapses under the applied
pressure and subsequently moves back through the wall means
and the sterilizing means as the sleeve rcassumes its extended
position on release of said pressure.
4,392,860
DISPOSABLE WOUND DRAINAGE DEVICE
Charles M. Huck, Oldwick; John E. Studer, Flemington, both of
N.J., and Philip H. Sauer, Indian Rocks Beach, Fla., assignors
to Howmedica, Inc., New York, N.V.
Continuation of Ser. No. 2,610, Jan. II, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,571
Int. a.i A61M ;/oo
U.S. CI. 604—212 14 Qaims
bag inlet port connected to the upper end portion of said bag,
fluid connector means for connecting said pump outlet port
with said bag inlet so that drainage liquid can be pumped from
said receptacle into said bag by hand squeezing said receptacle,
releasable connection means for connecting said receptacle to
said bag in side-by-side relation with the sidewalls of said bag
and receptacle in facing adjacent relation and with said recep-
tacle between the upper and lower ends of said bag, and means
for securing said bag, with said receptacle connected thereto,
to the patient.
4,392,859
ntMENTS FOR INJECTION DEVICES
Hugh R. Dent, Malmesbury, England, assignor to Sterimatic
Holdings Limited, Tortola, British Virgin Isls.
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,775
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 29, 1980,
8024765; Sep. 25, 1980, 8030985
Int. a.3 A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—198 17 Qaims
1. A sterilizing fitment for an injection device of the kind in
which injection liquid is delivered through a hollow needle,
the fitment being provided to sterilize the needle prior to its
application to the site of injection and again on withdrawal of
the needle from the site of injection, which fitment comprises
a collapsible sleeve comprising two telescoping tubes for sur-
rounding the needle, means at one end of the sleeve on one of
said tubes for attaching the sleeve to a needle support of the
injection device, wall means at the other end of the sleeve on
the other of said tubes closing off said other end so as to en-
close the needle, and sterilizing means in the vicinity of said
1. A device for removal of exudate from a wound compris-
ing:
a. a housing having a first end and a second end, side walls
and end walls at each of the first and the second ends, said
housing defining a generally enclosed chamber, each end
having an opening for communicating with said chamber;
. a collapsible passive non-elastic member means expand-
able to its original extended state having a peripheral edge
and being both airtight and watertight, said passive mem-
ber means being disposed within the housing and sealingly
connected at its periphery adjacent proximal to the second
end of the housing so as to separate the interior of the
housing chamber into a first chamber portion communi-
cating with said first end wall opening and a second cham-
ber portion communicating with said second end wall
opening, said passive member means being configured and
dimensioned such that when it is substantially expanded
toward the first end wall it substantially conforms to the
configuration of the inside of the side walls of the housing;
and
. bellows means disposed outside of the walls of said hous-
ing and coupled to the second end wall opening for de-
creasing the pressure within said second chamber portion
solely by said means so as to draw and collapse the passive
member means toward the second end of the housing such
that the volume of the first chamber portion is increased
and a negative pressure is created therein.
1032 CO.— 25
650
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,861
TWO-PLY HBROUS FACTNG MATERIAL
George A. M. Butterworth, Western Springs, and Frank J.
Fillwalk, Oak Lawn, both of III., assignors to Johnson &
Johnson Baby Products Company, New Brunswick, N.J.
FUed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,809
Int. a.5 A61F 13/16; B32B 7/06. 21/02, 21/10
U.S. a. 604—366 27 Claims
^
10
1. A high loft, low density, nonwoven, fibrous two-ply
facing material for an absorbent product such as a diaper
which comprises a first outer layer of irregularly arranged
intersecting, overlapping, mechanically interengaged, loosely
assembled natural wood pulp fibers defining interstices there-
between, and a second inner layer of similarly disposed fibers
in contact with said outer layer at an interface between said
two layers, said inner layer including intermixed natural wood
pulp fibers and thermoplastic synthetic wood pulp fibers, said
synthetic wood pulp fibers having a length and denier gener-
ally similar to natural wood pulp fibers, said inner layer con-
taining generally in the range of about 10 percent to about 30
percent by weight of synthetic wood pulp fibers and said
synthetic wood pulp fibers being present at the boundary
surface of said inner layer adjacent said interface in a quantity
sufficient to occupy no mpre than about 6 percent of the area
occupied by exposed fiber segments contained in said inner
layer at its said boundary surface, said synthetic wood pulp
fibers having a melting point lower than the melting point, or
degradation temperature, of the other fibers in said two-ply
facing material, fiber segments extending from either of said
fibrous layers across said interface between the two layers and
into the interstices between the fibers of the other layer being
substantially limited to outer end portions of such fibers, said
synthetic wood pulp fibers in said inner layer having been heat
fused in the absence of pressure in contact with other fibers in
said layer to form a fiber structure of sufficient wet strength
and integrity to be self-supporting in both dry and wet condi-
tion without any additional binder, the fibers in each of said
two layers being bonded with one another and with fibers in
the other layer by a water soluble adhesive binder to provide
sufficient mechanical integrity throughout said two-ply facing
material to allow normal handling of the dry material as a
whole, and to help provide, together with the already existing
mechanical interengagement of whole fibers in said outer
layer, sufficient mechanical integrity in said outer layer to
avoid disintegration of said outer layer when the bond between
said two layers is weakened by dissolving out only a portion of
said water soluble binder and is then ruptured by pulling said
two layers apart, so that the dry, unsoiled two-ply facing
material can be subjected to normal handling without damage
to the material, and after use, the facing material and any solid
waste matter deposited thereon can be immersed in water for a
time, swirled around in the water to dissolve out only a portion
of said water soluble binder, and pulled apart into two layers as
above described, to produce a self-supporting, inner fibrous
layer to be discarded separately from the outer layer, and a
separate assemblage of substantially all said natural wood pulp
fibers that were originally in said outer layer, which assem-
blage of fibers together with any residue of said solid waste
matter not rinsed away by said swirling action can be flushed
down a waste disposal system, where after the dissolving out of
said water soluble binder is completed the assemblage will
disintegrate into a multiplicity of separate individual fibers or
small clumps of fibers.
11. The two-ply facing material of claim 1 which is superim-
posed on an absorbent fibrous batt to form an absorbent prod-
uct.
12. The absorbent product of claim 11 which is superim-
posed on and attached to a liquid impermeable backing sheet to
form a disposable infant's diaper.
15. In a diaper structure comprising a facing layer, an adsor-
bent batt and an impervious backing layer in which said facing
layer and said backing sheet are outermost layers and said batt
is positioned between said facing layer and said backing sheet,
the improvement wherein said facing layer comprises the high
loft, low density, nonwoven fibrous material of claim 1.
16. A method of producing a high loft, low density nonwo-
ven, fibrous two-ply facing material for an absorbent product,
such as a diaper, which comprises:
bringing together a first outer layer of irregularly arranged,
intersecting, overlapping, mechanically interengaged,
loosely assembled, natural wood pulp fibers defining inter-
stices therebetween, and a second inner layer of similarly
disposed fibers including intermixed natural wood pulp
fibers and thermoplastic synthetic wood pulp fibers, said
synthetic wood pulp fibers having a length and denier
generally similar to natural wood pulp fibers, said second
layer containing generally in the range of about 10 percent
to about 30 percent by weight of thermoplastic synthetic
wood pulp fibers, and said synthetic wood pulp fibers
being present at the boundary surface of said second layer
adjacent said first layer in a quantity sufficient to occupy
no more than about 6 percent of the area occupied by the
exposed fiber segments contained in said second layer at
its said boundary surface, said synthetic wood pulp fibers
having a melting point lower than the melting point of the
other fibers in said two layers;
applying heat in the absence of pressure to said two fibrous
layers thus brought together, to fuse at least some of said
synthetic wood pulp fibers to each other and to some of
said other fibers within said second layer to form a self-
supporting fibrous structure in said second layer;
introducing a water soluble adhesive binder into said two
fibrous layers and at the interface where said two layers
have been brought together as described; and
drying and curing said binder to produce a facing material
with sufficient mechanical integrity to allow normal han-
dling of said facing material, and in addition, help provide,
together with the already existing mechanical engagement
of whole fibers in said first layer, sufficient mechanical
integrity in said first layer to prevent its disintegration
when the bond between said two layers is ruptured to
produce delamination of the two layers after only a por-
tion of said water soluble adhesive binder has been dis-
solved out of the facing material and delaminating forces
have been applied to the two layers.
4,392,862
ABSORPTIVE DEVICE
Mario S. Marsan, Cincinnati, Ohio, and Edward W. Hartwell,
Lawrenceburg, Ind., assignors to The Procter A Gamble Com-
pany, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,821
Int. C\? A61F 13/16
U.S. a. 604—366 12 Claims
1. An absorptive device comprising a facing element, a fluid
permeable support element, an absorbent pad, and an impervi-
ous backsheet wherein said facing element comprises a fluid
permeable, unbonded web of hydrophobic thermoplastic fi-
JULY 12, 198i
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
651
bers, said fibers being from about 3 to about 1 5 denier; said web
being formed without the use of bonding agents and having a chemical adhesive bonding to form an assembly and said as-
density of from about 0.0002 to about 0.02 g/cc; wherein said
facing element is affixed to said support element in spaced sembly is superimposed on said absorbent pad which is super-
apart regions of bonding by means selected from the group
consisting of thermal bonding, hot melt adhesive bonding, and imposed on said backsheet.
CHEMICAL
4,392,863
METHOD OF UNIFORMLY DYEING HIGH
TEMPERATURE HEAT SET POLYESTER YARN
John C. Kaufmann, and Ronald S. Lenox, both of Lancaster, Pa.,
assignors to Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,759
Int. a.3 D06P 5/00; B29C 25/00
U.S. a. 8—400 4 Qaims
1. A method of pre-treating a plurality of otherwise identical
polyester yams that have different heat histories, to enable said
yams to be dyed uniformly, which method comprises measur-
ing the pre-melt crystallization temperatures of each polyester
yarn and thereafter heat treating each yarn at temperatures
that vary by no more than 5° C. and that are at least the same
as or higher than the highest measured pre-melt crystallization
temperature.
1-30 carbon atoms and are selected from the group con-
sisting of alkylene, alkenylene, alkarylene, aralkylene,
cycloalkylene, and arylene groups, and a and b are each an
integer 1-2, and a plus b is less than four.
4,392,864
STABILIZED ROMANOWSKY STAIN SOLUTION
Elaine A. Helfrich, and Kin F. Yip, both of Elkhart, Ind., assign-
ors to Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart, Ind.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,390
I Int. a.3 C09B 44/00: COIN I/OO
U.S. a. 8—506 * Claims
1. A method for the preparation of a Romanowsky-type
stain solution having improved stability characteristics which
comprises dissolving in methanol a mixture of Methylene Blue,
Azure A, Azure B, Azure C or a combination of these azure
dyes and the free acid of Eosin Y in such amounts that the
resulting solution exhibits spectrophotometric absorption of at
least 230 optical density units at 645 nm and 128 optical density
units at 525 nm.
4,392,867
AMINO CORROSION INHIBITOR FOR ALCOHOLS
Rodney L. Sung, Fishkill, and William M. Sweeney, Wappingers
Falls, both of N.Y., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains,
N.Y.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No, 330,107
Int. aJ ClOL 1/22
U.S. a. 44—53 20 Qaims
1. A composition comprising:
(i) a water-soluble alcohol; and
(ii) an effective corrosion-inhibiting amount, as corrosion
inhibiting additive, of an amine having the formula:
[R(OR)„la-NH3-a
wherein R contains 4-30 carbon atoms and is selected
from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkaryl, aral-
kyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl groups and R' is a divalent hy-
drocarbon group containing 1-30 carbon atoms and is
selected from the group consisting of alkylene, alkeny-
lene, alkarylene, aralkylene, cycloalkylene, and arylene
groups, n is an integer 2-30, and a is an integer 1-3.
4,392,865
HYDRbCARBON-WATER FUELS, EMULSIONS,
SLURRIES AND OTHER PARTICULATE MIXTURES
Aristid V. Grosse, Haverford, and Norman H. Cherry, Philadel-
phia, both of Pa., assignors to Lanko, Inc., Philadelphia, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 771,272, Feb. 23, 1977,
abandoned. This application Jan. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 112,507
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/32; COIL 1/14
U.S. a. 44—51 26 Claims
1. In a mixture of water and a substance selected from the
group consisting of oil and gasoline, the improvement compris-
ing maintaining the stability of such mixture with reference to
separation into continuous phases, through the addition thereto
of a relatively low molecular weight hydrophilic-lipophilic
agent and a high molecular weight swellable material, having
a molecular weight of at least 500,000.
4,392,866
^ ETHERAMINE CORROSION INHIBITOR FOR
ALCOHOLS
Rodney L. Sung, Fishkill; George J. Sidote, Hopewell Junction,
and William M. Sweeney, Wappingers Falls, all of N.Y.,
assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,532
Int. C1.3 ClOL 1/22
U.S. a. 44—53 22 Qaims
1. A composition comprising
(i) a water-soluble alcohol; and
(ii) as corrosion inhibiting additive an effective corrosion-
inhibiting amount of an amine having the formula
4,392,868
GASOLINE FUEL EXTENDER FORMULATION
Fred W. Teckmeyer, 158 Delaware Dr., Coraopolis, Pa. 15108,
and George K. Dorn, 1606 W. 15th St., Beaver Falls, Pa.
15010
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 173,915, Jul. 31, 1980,
abandoned. This application Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,352
Int. Cl.J ClOL 1/18
U.S. a. 44—56 11 Qaims
1. A homogenous combustion engine fuel formulation for
blending with and use in commercial gasoline as an extender
therefor in proportions of not greater than 50 parts by volume
with respect thereto that is characterized by the stability of its
alcohol content in the presence of water and its miscibility
with and practicability for interchangeable usage with com-
mercial gasoline; said formulation consisting essentially of
naptha Z within a range of not less than about 6 to not more
than about 10 parts by volume, about 1 part by volume of
ethanol and about i to 1 i parts by volume of a higher alcohol
of the class consisting of anhydrous isopropyl and or N propyl
alcohol, wherein the specific gravity of the ingredients of the
formulation is not substantially greater than the gasoline to
which it is to be added, wherein the premixed solution of
ingredients is less soluble in water than ethanol, itself, and
wherein its ingredients in the defined proportions as an exten-
der for commercial gasoline have a substantially full phase
stability therein.
(ROR%— N— (R"NH2)t
I Hi-a-b
wherein R contains 1-30 carbon atoms and is selected
from the group consisting of alkyl, alkenyl, alkaryl, aral-
kyl, cycloalkyl, and aryl groups and R' and R" are the
same or different divalent hydrocarbon group containing
4,392,869
HIGH TURNDOWN PARTIAL OXIDATION PROCESS
Charles P. Marion, Mamaroneck; Albert Brent, Huntington;
George N. Richter, San Marino; William B. Crouch, Chap-
paqua; Edward T. Child, Tarrytown, all of N.Y., and Blake
Reynolds, Riverside, Conn., assignors to Texaco Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 167,876, Jul. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,351,645,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 107,215, Dec. 26,
1979, Pat. No. 4,338,099. This application Jun. 10, 1981, Ser.
No. 272,415
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 28,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 ClOJ 3/46
U.S. Q. 48—197 R 5 Qaims
1. A method for controlling the partial oxidation of a first
653
654
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
reactant stream comprising a pumpable carbonaceous fuel
slurry stream and a second reactant stream comprising a free-
oxygen containing gas in the reaction zone of a gas generator
comprising:
(1) introducing said first and second reactant streams into the
reaction zone of a vertical free-flow noncatalytic refrac-
tory lined synthesis gas generator where said partial oxi-
dation reaction takes place by way of a two-section burner
mounted downward through an inlet port in the top of
said gas generator and comprising central and annular
sections with first and second fluid passage means in said
central section and third and fourth fluid passage means in
said annular section, a separate inlet means connected to
each of said separate passage means, said burner having
connected respectively to the two separate inlet means in
the central section of said burner two separate feedlines 1
and 3 and having connected respectively to the two sepa-
rate inlet means in the annular section of said burner two
separate feedlines 2 and 4; wherein one feedstream of
carbonaceous fuel slurry is passed through either the first
or second fluid passage means in the central section of the
burner and/or simultaneously another feedstream of car-
bonaceous fuel slurry is passed through the third or fourth
fluid passage means in the annular section, and a separate
feedstream of free-oxygen containing gas and if necessary
a separate feedstream of steam are simultaneously passed
through the unoccupied fluid passage means in each of the
central and/or annular sections of said burner which are
associated with the fluid passage means through which the
stream(s) of carbonaceous fuel slurry are passing, said
burner discharging into said reaction zone; and wherein
2s''!f23
'a
fiair ffcoeoat
coMmaiLef f^
TKilMSM/Trnf,
4S-
/ ^^ JJ,
SMlB ^ .
fPte-anveM i3i&\'
synmfS'S fAS fc«ov;r^
first reactant stream flowing through feedlines 1 and 2 and
that portion of the second reactant stream flowing
through feedlines 3 and 4 and providing to a separate
control means signals a, d and b, e corresponding respec-
tively to the actual flow rates of the portions of said first
and second reactant streams flowing in feedlines 1, 2 and
3, 4; and
(3) comparing in said separate control means said actual flow
rate signals a, d, b and e with manual or automatically
computed input signals representing the desired flow rate
or set point for each of the reactant streams in the four
feedlines and providing corresponding adjustment signals
c and f to separate speed controlled positive displacement
pumps in feedlines 1 and 2 respectively, and signals h and
j to flow control valves in feedlines 3 and 4 respectively,
and thereby controlling the flow rates of said portions of
first and second reactant streams flowing in said four
feedlines in accordance with the respective desired flow
rate or set point of each, to maintain in the reaction zone
an atomic ratio of oxygen to carbon in the range of about
0.5-1.95.
4,392,870
VAPOR RECOVERY UNIT PERFORMANCE TEST
ANALYZER AND METHOD
Anibole B. Chieffo; Howard K. Davis, both of Wilmington, Del.,
and Joyce A. Rizzo, West Chester, Pa., assignors to Sun Oil
Company of Pennsylvania, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,144
Int. CI.J BOID 53/04
U.S. a. 55—20 4 Qaims
the central section of said burner includes a central con-
duit, said central conduit being closed at the upstream end
and having a unobstructed downstream circular exit ori-
fice at the tip of the burner; said annular section being
bounded by*an outer conduit coaxial and concentric with
said central conduit along its length and in spaced rela-
tionship therewith and forming an annular passage there-
between, said annular passage being closed at the up-
stream end and having an unobstructed downstream annu-
lar exit orifice at the tip of the burner and wherein the
central longitudinal axis of the annular passage is parallel
to the central longitudinal axis of the burner throughout
its length; said first passage means comprising a central
bunch of tubes passing through the closed end of said
central conduit and making a gaslight seal therewith, and
wherein the downstream ends of said central bunch of
tubes are retracted upstream from the burner face a dis-
tance of about 0 to 12 times the minimum diameter of the
central conduit exit orifice at the tip of the burner; said
second passage means comprising the space between the
inside wall of said central conduit and the outside surfaces
of the central bunch of tubes; said third passage means
comprising an annular bunch of tubes passing through the
closed end of said annular passage and making a gas tight
seal therewith, and wherein the downstream ends of said
annular bunch of tubes are retracted upstream from the
burner face a distance of about 0 to 12 times the minimum
width of the annular exit orifice at the tip of the burner;
and said fourth passage means comprising the space be-
tween the inside wall of the outer conduit and the outside
surfaces of the annular bunch of tubes;
(2) separately sensing the flow rates for that portion of the
1. A performance test analyzer for determining loss of hy-
drocarbons to the atmosphere when a tank truck or similar
vehicle is filled with volatile hydrocarbons and wherein vapors
of said hydrocarbons present during said filling operation are
adsorbed in a first and second parallel charcoal bed operating
alternately so that one bed is regenerated under vacuum while
the other is adsorbing hydrocarbon vapors, comprising in
combination:
(a) temperature sensing means in each of the stacks of said
beds,
(b) a first flowmeter probe adapted to be inserted in the stack
of said first charcoal bed,
(c) a second flowmeter probe adapted to be inserted in the
stack of said second charcoal bed,
(d) a first flow amplifier and a second flow amplifier to
enable the signal derived from said corresponding probe
in a stack being tested to be fed into a first counter, the
output of said counter reflecting the volume of gaseous
flow in said stack under test as sensed by said respective
first and second flowmeter probes,
(e) switching means in combination with first valving means
effecting the cycling of said charcoal beds which switch-
ing means inactivate said first or second flow amplifier
during the cycling of a corresponding first or second bed
from regeneration to adsorption,
(0 exhaust sample lines from each of said stacks leading to
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
655
second valving means so as to enable gases from the stack
being tested to be fed to hydrocarbon analyzing means for
determining said hydrocarbons as propane concentration,
whereby said hydrocarbon concentration, as propane, in
each of said stacks at the time of test may be calculated
from the parameters of (1) the barometric pressure at the
test site, (2) the volume of gas from the stack being mea-
sured, (3) the measured stack temperature, and (4) the data
from the analyzing means, and
(g) electronic multiplier and integrator means to obtain the
sum of said flow amplifier signal and said hydrocarbon
analyzer means signal over the testing period, said sum
being fed to a second counter to indicate the total flow
integrated volume of hydrocarbon (as propane) in the
exhaust of said stacks during the test period.
4 392 871
COMBUSTION PROCESS WITH WASTE GAS
1 1 PURinCATION
Goran Almlof, Skattegarden 123, S-582 41 Linkbping, and Peter
Hagqvlst, Nprrsviingen lA, S-582 47 Linkbping, both of Swe-
den I
Continuatioi of Ser. No. 195,922, Oct. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 409,327
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 16, 1979, 7908565
Int. a.3 BOID 47/05
U.S. CI. 55—23 3 Qaims
-^g
19 20
2-^CS^ -^
^ '^ ■
3
r
a_Ml
1. A combustion process which provides an exhaust gas free
of water vapor and other desirable contaminants, such as sul-
phur compounds, heavy metals and the like, including the steps
of:
compressing air to be used for combustion,
burning fuel with the compressed combustion air in a com-
bustion chamber,
directing the exhaust gases from the combustion chamber to
an expansion means, and
expanding the heated exhaust gases in the expansion means
to cause rapid cooling to a temperature of at least below
zero degrees Celsius and drop in pressure of the exhaust
gases to condense water vapor contained therein and to
precipitate the undesirable contaminants. _
4,392,872
AIR BLEEDER VALVE FOR WATERBED MATTRESSES
Charles P. Hall, Muir Beach, and John B. Johenning, Beverly
Hills, both of Calif., assignors to Monterey Manufacturing,
Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
FUed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,864
Int. a.5 BOID 79/00
U.S. Q. 55—36 ♦ ^"™*
1. A method for bleeding air from the waterbed mattress
having a fill spout comprising the steps of:
(a) selecting an air bleeder valve comprising:
(i) an elongated, hollow tubular body having first and
second ends and corresponding first and second end
portions wherein at least the first end portion is adapted
to snugly fit into the fill spout of a waterbed mattress;
(ii) a porous water barrier in the tubular body for prevent-
ing water from splashing out of the mattress when
bleeding air from the mattress, the water barrier being
constituted of a non-water absorbing material, the bar-
rier not acting as a wick for water and being sufficiently
porous that when wet, air can pass through the barrier;
and
(iii) a check valve at the second end of the tubular body
for allowing air to pass out of the body through the
second end and for preventing air from passing into the
body through the second end;
(b) placing the bleeder valve into the fill spout so that at least
the first end portion of the tubular body is snugly fit into
the fill spout; and
(c) subsequently causing air in the mattress to pass to the fill
spout and out the bleeder valve, wherein water is pre-
vented from splashing out of the mattress by the water
barrier and air is prevented from passing from the atmo-
sphere into the mattress by the valve.
4,392,873
CONTINUOUS VAPOR PHASE CHROMATOGRAPHY
Francis R. Brockington, 4016 MacGregor Dr., Columbia, S.C.
29206
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,964
Int. Q.' BOID l5/0i
U.S. Q. 55—67 ^ Claims
1. A chromatographic process in which both the gas phase
and the liquid/solid phase are mobile and traversing in oppos-
ing directions through a common column which has one or
more thermal gradients impressed lengthwise across it, and in
which a mixture to be chromotograph is continuously intro-
duced, partitioned and collected as fractions from the gas
phase where:
A. The said thermal gradients are formed by simuluneously
heating a section of the column and cooling another sec-
tion through the use of heat exchangers;
B. The said liquid/solid phase moves in direction in the
column toward increasing column temperatures;
C. The said gas phase moves in a direction opposite the
liquid/solid phase and toward increasing column tempera-
tures;
D. The said mixture to be chromatographed is introduced to
the column at the lower temperature end of the column
and at a metered rate;
The said fractions of the mixture are collected through the
use of ducts which are dispersed along and intersect with
the column, and said ducts are fitted with condensers and
gas flow control devices.
656
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,874
DEGASSIFYING AND MIXING APPARATUS FOR
LIQUIDS
Samuel T. Yamauchi, Fountain Valley, Calif., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Administrator
of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Not. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,082
Int. a.3 BOID 19/00
MS. a. 55—194 6 Oaims
1. Liquid degassifying apparatus comprising: a vacuum tight
vessel for containment of liquid to be subjected to continuous
degassing operations, the level of said liquid within said vessel
producing a first liquid volume therein, the remainder of the
volume of said vessel comprising a second volume; a header
assembly within said second volume, said header assembly
including a stacked, spaced plurality of axially narrow orifices,
each of said orifices extending generally circumferentially
about the axis of said header assembly to produce a plurality of
cascades of spaced generally concentric, conical, liquid films
into said first volume and means for adjusting the thickness of
the liquid films; a first means including a liquid input and
manifold for said header assembly, said manifold being formed
of a generally cylindrical body having a generally axial cavity
therein, and a liquid passage connecting each of said orifices to
said liquid manifold; a second means for circulating said liquid
from said first volume to said header assembly liquid input; and
a third means for partially evacuating said second volume.
4,392,875
SMOG ELIMINATOR
Roberto V. Cells, Goodrich Village, Marikina, Philippines
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 347,949
Int. a.3 BOID 47/00
U.S. a. 55—228 2 Claims
si*
23 ,
_I2
*~f
r
-♦
t
-J -J
ff=
\M
14-
^'^^^sS^css
'^:.. -. fi
' ■■♦■
17 — "-
a--
1
J
. k
22 «•
1. A device for eliminating carbon pariiculates from smoke
using continuous, recirculating, pressure water sprays in a
uniquely designed spray booth which is mounted on a smoke
stack and means for cleaning the recirculating pressure water,
which comprises:
(a) a spray booth means comprising two conical sections
joined at the bases thereof, the upper section being con-
nected in a leak -proof way to the upper section of a smoke
stack and the lower section being connected in a leak-
proof way to the lower section of a smoke stack;
(b) a conical deflector means, centrally mounted by a mount-
ing means within said spray booth means, having an up-
wardly directed veriex and a base diameter greater than
the diameter of the lower section of said smoke stack;
(c) a spray means comprising a multiplicity of spray nozzels
mounted around the inner circumference of the lower
conical section of the spray booth means, adjacent to the
juncture of the bases of the upper conical section and the
lower conical section, and directed to spray above said
conical deflector means within the upper conical section,
whereby sprayed recirculating pressure water encounters
rising smoke first as sprayed upward and second as de-
flected downward on striking the inside wall of the upper
conical section of said spray booth;
(d) a water collecting means comprising the lower section of
the smoke stack being connected to the lower conical
section in a leak-proof way such that the upper-most edge
of said smoke stack section protrudes into the spray booth
means to form an annular water collecting gutter;
(e) a gravity drain means comprising a pipe mounted at the
lowest edge of the lower conical section such that water in
the water collecting means will drain through said pipe by
gravity;
(0 an open water tank partially filled with sand and divided
into two compartments by a partial vertical wall, said
vertical wall being mounted so as to prevent flow from
one compartment to the other except at the base thereof
along the bottom of the open water tank;
(g) a recirculation pump; and
(h) a pressurized recirculation water reservoir; whereby,
smoke containing carbon particulates in the smoke stack
rising into the spray booth means has particulates re-
moved therefrom by entrainment in pressured water
sprayed into the upper part of said spray booth means, the
washed smoke thereafter rising into the upper section of
the smoke stack while the pressurized water containing
carbon particulates drops onto the conical deflector means
and is deflected into the water collecting means, from
which said water drains through the gravity drain means
into the first compartment of the open water tank, passing
through the sand filling and under the vertical wall into
the second compartment of the open water tank by grav-
ity, the majority of the carbon particulates being removed
in the sand filling, being drawn into the recirculation
pump, pumped into the pressurized recirculation water
reservoir, and returned to the spray booth means through
the spray means.
4,392,876
nLTER PACKING
Klaus Schmidt, Kaiserslautem, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Firma Carl Freudenberg, Weinheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,574
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Sep. 15, 1980,
80105531
Int. a.5 BOID 39/14
VJS. a. 55—524 5 Claims
1. A filter packing comprising a composite of electrostati-
cally spray formed microfibers alone or in combination with
one or more porous carrier layers, wherein the microfibers
comprise a nonporous fiber core surrounded by a foamed
coating layer containing open cell pores which extend through
July 12, 19$3
CHEMICAL
657
the foam coating in a substantially perpendicular direction to
the surface, the cross section distribution of pores being sub-
■'•^W^
stantially uniform and the foamed coating and the fiber core
being made of the same polymer composition.
4,392,877
CONSTRAINT CONTROL OF A FRACTIONAL
DISTILLATION PROCESS
Gary L. Funk, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to PluUips Petroleum
Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,333
j Int. a.3 BOID 3/42
U.S. a. 62—37 7 Qaims
the difference between said fourth signal and said fifth
signal, wherein said sixth signal is scaled so as to be repre-
sentative of the speed of said compressor required to
maintain the magnitude of said fourth signal substantially
equal to the magnitude of fifth signal;
means for establishing a seventh signal representative of the
actual discharge pressure for said compressor;
means for establishing an eighth signal representative of the
minimum allowable discharge pressure for said compres-
sor;
means for comparing said seventh signal and said eighth
signal and for establishing a ninth signal which is respon-
sive to the difference between said seventh signal and said
eighth signal, wherein said ninth signal is scaled so as to be
representative of the sp)eed of said compressor required to
maintain the magnitude of said seventh signal substantially
equal to the magnitude of said eighth signal;
high select means;
means enabling provision of said third signal, said sixth
signal and said ninth signal as inputs to high select means,
wherein the one of said third, sixth and ninth signals repre-
senting the highest speed of said compressor is selected by
high select means and is provided as a tenth signal from
said high select means; and
means for controlling the speed of said compressor in re-
sponse to said tenth signal.
4,392,878
GLASS HBER FORMING UNIT
Kiwamu Okuma; Tsunehiro Haga; Masao Kizara; Keiji Otaki,
and Ayahiro Hirai, all of Koriyama, Japan, assignors to Nitto
Boseki Co., Ltd., Fukushima, Japan
Filed Dec. 14, 1961, Ser. No. 330,261
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 19, 1980, 5.^/180207
Int. C1.J C03B 37/04
U.S. a. 65—6 4 Claims
1. Apparatus comprising:
a fractional distillation column having a reboiler associated
therewith;
means for providing a feed stream containing components to
be separated to said fractional column;
a compressor having a suction inlet and a discharge outlet;
means for providing an overhead stream from said fractional
distillation column to the suction inlet of said compressor;
first control valve;
means for providing fluid from the discharge outlet of said
compressor through said first control valve to said re-
boiler to thereby supply heat to said fractional distillation
column;
means for establishing a first signal representative of the
actual position of said first control valve;
means for establishing a second signal representative of the
desired position of said first control valve;
means for comparing said first signal and said second signal
and for establishing a third signal which is responsive to
the difference between said first signal and said second
signal, wherein said third signal is scaled so as to be repre-
sentative of the speed of said compressor required to
maintain said first signal substantially equal to said second
signal;
means for establishing a fourth signal representative of the
actual suction pressure for said compressor;
means for establishing a fifth signal representative of the
maximum allowable suction pressure for said compressor;
means for comparing said fourth signal and said fifth signal
and for establishing a sixth signal which is responsive to
± V ,;
3. In a method of forming glass fiber in a unit including a
hollow-cylinder-shaped rotating spinner having (a) a bottom,
(b) a surrounding wall having upper and lower outer surfaces
and with a number of molten glass projecting orifices where
the molten glass projects from each orifice such that a transi-
tion cone of the glass is formed with its base at the orifice and
primary filaments of the glass extending from the apex of the
conci and (c) an upper annular flange extending inwardly from
the upper edge of said surrounding wall; and an attenuating
blast burner with jet flame orifices for attenuating primary
filaments formed at the tips of transition cones of molten glass
projecting from said rotating spinner into secondary filaments
where the jet flame comprises an inner cone of flame sur-
rounded by an outer cone of flame, the speed of the inner flame
being greater than that of the outer flame, the improvement
comprising
directing each jet flame from each jet flame orifice, so that
(1) the inner cone of flame (a) contacts said primary fila-
ments to attenuate them into the glass fibers due to the
high speed of this flame and (b) does not contact said
transition cones sufficiently to break them even though
658
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
the speed thereof is sufficient to do so and (2) the outer
cone of flame is in substantial contact with only the lower
outer surface of said surrounding wall of said hollow-cyl-
inder-shaped rotating spinner where the speed of said
outer cone of flame is such as to not break said transition
cones, and
jetting a flame in a direction which is along the prolongation
of said upper annular flange and which is in parallel with
the surface of said upper annular flange, said flame from
said heating burner heating said rotating spinner in such a
manner that said flame goes along at least the upper sur-
face of said upper annular flange to transmit heat to at
least a comer where said upper annular flange of said
hollow-cylinder-shaped rotating spinner and said sur-
rounding wall meet such that the heat supplied to the
upper surface of the surrounding wall by the heating
burner and the heat supplied to the lower surface thereof
by said outer cone of flame results in a substantially uni-
form temperature of the surrounding wall to thereby
enhance fiber glass uniformity.
4,392,880
GLASSWARE FORMING APPARATUS WITH BLOW
MOLD SPRAY MEANS
Francis A. Dahms, Tariffville, Conn., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries, Inc., Farmington, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 179,381, Aug. 18, 1980, Pat. No. 4,339,264.
This application May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,847
Int. a.^ C03B 9/i«, 40/02
U.S. a. 65—170 ♦ Claims
4 392 879
METHOD OF FORMINGGLASS nBERS WHILE
MONITORING A PROCESS CONDITION IN A SPINNER
Kunthiko Takeuchi, Newark, and James S. Belt, Utica, both of
Ohio, assignors to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation,
Toledo, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 304,775, Sep. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,920
Int. a.3 C03B 37/04
U.S. a. 65—6
17 Qaims
1. The method for the manufacture of mineral fibers com-
prising supplying molten mineral material to the interior of a
spinner having an orificed sidewall, and routing said spinner to
cause said molten mineral material to pass through the sidewall
orifices to form mineral fibers, wherein the improvement com-
prises monitoring a process condition with a sensing means,
said sensing means being mounted for rotation with said spin-
ner, and transmitting a signal from a wireless transmitter
mounted for rotation with said spinner to a receiver spaced
apart from said transmitter, said signal being responsive to the
sensed process condition.
1. In a glassware forming apparatus having a neck ring arm,
at least one neck ring assembly mounted on said arm, a blank
mold arm having at least one blank mold mounted thereon,
means for moving said blank mold arm between a first position
wherein said blank mold is in a position mating with said neck
ring assembly for the formation of a parison, and a second
position wherein said blank mold is down and swung away
from the axis of the neck ring assembly, at least one split blow
mold mounted beneath said neck ring arm, said split blow mold
having blow mold segments pivotable toward and away from
each other, the improvement comprising nozzle means
mounted on said blank mold arm for directing a spray of lubri-
cant to said blow mold segments when they are positioned
away from each other, and means providing a supply of lubri-
cant to said nozzle means when said blank mold arm is in said
first positions, the opening of said blank mold being above the
spray of lubricant.
4,392,881
PROCESS FOR COMPOSTING DECAYING MATERIAL
OF ORGANIC WASTE AND/OR SEWAGE SLUDGE IN
TWO PROCESSING STEPS
Franz Kneer, Eschenburg-Eibelshausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Gebriider Weiss KG, DiUenburg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,065
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 1,
1980, 3024813
Int. a.3 C02F 11/16
U.S. a. 71—9 5 Qaims
1. A process for compositing decaying material selected
from the group consisting of organic waste or sewage sludge in
two processing steps comprising:
(a) treating the decaying material to achieve a decayable
C/N ratio and then continuously and countercurrently
aerating the decaying material in the first processing step
so as to decay the material both anaerobically and aerobi-
cally, wherein the decaying material is brought into a first
vessel from above and discharged from the bottom in such
a manner, that each particle of the column of material
consisting of decaying material passes through the first
vessel within 7 to 14 days and the column of material is
aerated countercurrently and continuously from below in
such a manner that difi"erent heat layers and oxygen layers
are formed within the column of material and thereby
support a specific distribution of aerobic or anaerobic
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
659
bacteria throughout said column which effect decaying
and render it biologically active; and
(b) directly introducing this continuously aerated material to
the second processing step by transferring the biologically
active material from the first vessel to a second vessel
''i II i»
U _
19 10 ^
which is closed to the atmosphere at a rate such that it
passes through the second vessel within 14 to 20 days and
is aerated discontinuously during this time at intervals in
such a manner that only aerobic processes take place in
the column of material present to mature the decaying
material in said second vessel.
N-N-BIS(
R* R'
(I)
r3 ; — ^ R'
CH— CO— N^ ^N— CO— CH
R* R2
wherein
R' is methyl or chlorine;
R2 is chlorine;
R' is methyl or chlorine;
R* is chlorine;
R' is hydrogen or alkyl with 1 or 2 carbon atoms;
R^ is hydrogen or alkyl with 1 or 2 carbon atoms; and
Q is an alkylene chain which has 2 or 3 carbon atoms and can
be mono-substituted by methyl.
4,392,882
ALOACYD-DIAZA-CYCLOALKANES FOR
PROTECTING PLANTS FROM HERBICIDE DAMAGE
Hans-Jochem Riebel, Wuppertal; Ludwig Eue, Leverkusen, and
Wilfried Faust, Odenthal, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,412
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26,
1979, 2930452
Int. C1.3 AOID 25/n
U.S. a. 71—92 15 Claims
1. Method for protecting maize from damage by herbicidally
active acetanilides of the formula
4,392,883
HERBICIDAL COMPOSITION AND PROCESS
Shinichi lori; Ikuo Kiyiwara, both of Shizuoka, and Kazuo
Jikihara, Niiza, all of Japan, assignors to Kumiai Chemical
Industry Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,093
Int. Q\? AOIN 4i/64. 37/00
U.S. a. 71—93 4 Qaims
1. A herbicidal composition for inhibiting growth of smart-
weed, goosefoot and barnyardgrass consisting essentially of an
effective amount of a mixture of a thiocarbamate derivative of
the general formula:
CH2— R
CO— CH2— Z
wherein
R represients pyrazol-1-yl -or pyrazol-1-yl substituted by
halogen or alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
X and Y are identical or different and represent alkyl with 1
to 4 carbon atoms,
Z represents chlorine and
n represents 0,1 or 2, and herbicidally active acid addition
salts and metal salt complexes thereof, which comprises
applying to the plants or their habitat an antidotally effec-
tive amount of N,N'-bis-(haloacyl)-diazacycloalkane com-
pound of the formula
I
CH2SC— N
/
\
CzHs
C2H5
wherein one of X and Y represents a hydrogen atom and the
other is a chlorine atom, and 4-amino-3-methyl-6-phenyl- 1,2,4-
triazin-5(4H)-one of the formula:
U
in a ratio of 1:1 to 4:1 by weight as active ingredients.
(VI)
4,392,884 _
HERBICIDE COMPOSITIONS
Ferenc M. Pallos, Walnut Creek; Mervin E. Brokke, Moraga,
and Duane R. Ameklev, Sunnyvale, all of Calif., assignors to
Stauffer Chemical Company, Westport, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 930,967, Aug. 4, 1978, Pat. No. 4,269,618,
which is a division of Ser. No. 208,041, Dec. 9, 1971, Pat. No.
4,137,070, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 134,868,
Apr. 16, 1971, abandoned. This application May 7, 1980, Ser.
No. 147,434
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 3, 1994,
\ has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 AOIN 37/02. 37/18
U.S. Q. 71—100 140 Cbums
1. A herbicidal composition comprising a non-phytotoxic,
antidotally effect amount of an active herbicidal thiolcarba-
mate compound and an antidote therefor corresponding to the
formula:
660
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
o
R— C— N'
^R2
wherein R is haloalkyl having 1 to 6 carbon atoms inclusive;
Ri and R2 can be the same or different and can be selected from
the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl having 1 to 12 carbon
atoms inclusive, haloalkyl having 1 to 12 carbon atoms inclu-
sive, alkenyl having 2 to 12 carbon atoms inclusive, haloalke-
nyl having 2 to 12 carbon atoms inclusive, alkynyl having 2 to
12 carbon atoms inclusive, hydroxyalkyl having 2 to 12 carbon
atoms inclusive, hydroxyhaloalkyl having 2 to 12 carbon atoms
inclusive, cycloalkyl having 3 to 6 carbon atoms inclusive,
alkylcycloalkyl having 4 to 8 carbon atoms inclusive, alkoxyal-
kyl having 2 to 20 carbon atoms inclusive and cycloalkenyl
having 3 to 6 carbon atoms inclusive; provided that when Ri is
hydrogen R2 is other than hydrogen; said antidote compound
being antidotally active with said thiolcarbamate herbicide
compound wherein said compound is present in an amount
varying between about 0.001 to 30 parts by weight for each
part by weight of the active thiolcarbamate herbicide com-
pound.
4^92,886
METHOD OF RECOVERING CO-RICH EXHAUST GAS
IN REnNING OF METAL
Mikio Kodaka; Hitoshi Morishita; H^ime Bada, and Fumio
Sudo, all of Chiba, Japan, assignors to Kawasaki Steel Corpo-
ration, Kobe, Japan
per No. PCT/JP81/00039, § 371 Date Oct. 22, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 22, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02429, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 3, 1981
PCT Filed Feb. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 313,951
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, 55-23964
Int. a.3 C21C 5/34. 5/36
U.S. a. 75—52 7 Qaims
1. A method of recovering CO-rich exhaust gas in refining of
metal, comprising blowing granular limestone together with a
carrier gas into a molten iron having a carbon concentration of
at least 0.3% and kept in a metal-refining vessel through a
tuyere located beneath the bath surface to generate CO, and
recovering the CO-containing exhaust gas in an exhaust gas-
recovering apparatus.
4,392,887
METHOD OF DESULFURIZING AN IRON MELT
Jean Goedert, Luxembourg, Luxembourg, assignor to Arbed
S.A., Luxembourg, Luxembourg
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,450
Int. a.3 C21C 7/02
U.S. a. 75—58 6 Qaims
4,392,885
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING A
DIRECriONED SUSPENSION SPRAY OF A
PULVEROUS MATERIAL AND A REACHON GAS
Launo L. Lilja, and Valto J. Makitalo, both of Pori, Finland,
assignors to Outokumpu Oy, Helsinki, Finland
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,301
Qaims priority, application Finland, Dec. 30, 1980, 804053
Int. Q.3 C22B ]/}0
U.S. Q. 75—26 9 Qaims
1. A method of forming a directioned and controlled suspen-
sion spray of a pulverous material and a reaction gas by causing
the pulverous material to flow into a reaction chamber and by
directing a flow of the reaction gas evenly around the flow of
pulverous material, comprising dividing the uninterrupted
reaction-gas flow into at least three partial flows and then
deflecting the direction of the partial flows 30° -90' so as to be
substantially parallel to the central axis of the reaction cham-
ber, the velocity of the partial flows being simultaneously
increased, causing the partial reaction-gas flows thus formed,
with minimal pressure losses, to discharge as an annular flow
encircling the flow of pulverous material fed from inside the
flow, which is caused to discharge in the reaction chamber and
to mix effectively with this reaction-gas flow, which is not
rotated as a whole, in order to produce a turbulent but con-
trolled suspension spray necessary for the reactions.
1. A method of desulfurizing an iron melt comprising the
steps of:
(a) forming a bath in a ladle having an upper surface free
from slag;
(b) covering said surface with 1 to 2 kg. of lime per ton of
melt;
(c) covering said ladle;
(d) independently of the covering of said surface with lime,
deoxidizing said melt to a maximum oxygen concentration
of about 35 parts per million; and
(e) independently of the covering of said surface with lime,
blowing a desulfurizing mixture with an inert gas through
an immersion lance into said melt at an average depth of
about ISOO mm below said surface, said mixture consisting
substantially of 50 to 98% lime, at least 1% Al up to 30%
aluminum and at least 1% CaF2 up to 20% calcium fluo-
ride.
4,392,888
METAL TREATMENT SYSTEM
Charles E. Eckert, Plum Boro, and Ronald E. Miller, Murrys-
Tiile, both of Pa., assignors to Aluminum Company of Amer-
ica, Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,529
Int. Q.J C22B 21/06
U.S. Q. 75—68 R 38 Claims
1. In a process for treating molten metal wherein said metal
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
661
is contacted with halogen values from a gas containing a halo-
carbon the improvement comprising contacting said halocar-
— CCIi />
_^1^--1--
bon with an oxidizer under conditions to oxidize carbon con-
stituent thereof prior to introducing said halogen values into
the molten metal.
4,392,889
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR RECOVERING
SILVER AND PLASTIC FROM USED FILM
Kenneth M. Grout, Littleton, N.H., assignor to Kenmartin De-
velopment, Inc., Littleton, N.H.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,981
Int. Q.5 C22B ll/OO: B29H 19/00; C08J 1/00
U.S. Q. 75—97 A 10 Qaims
1. The nJethod of recovering silver and polyester from pho-
tographic film of the type comprising a polyester base having
a surface coating which provides adhesion for a silver emulsion
layer on said surface coating, said method comprising:
(a) passing the film through a bath of a material which will
attack the silver emulsion layer until it separates from the
film and deposits as a sludge in said bath;
(b) removing said sludge from said bath;
(c) separating the solid silver containing particles of said
sludge from the liquid portion of said sludge,
(d) passing the film, cleansed of said silver emulsion, through
a second bath of a material which will attack and remove
said surface coating from said polyester base;
(e) restraining said film from having any portion of its sur-
face coming into contact with any other film surface
throughout its travel through said baths, whereby any
agglomeration of film is avoided; and
(0 removing said cleansed polyester from said second bath;
(g) whereby said silver containing particles and said
cleansed polyester constitute the desired valuable recov-
ery products.
5. An apparatus for recovering silver and polyester from a
photographic film of the type having a polyester base having a
surface coating which provides adhesion for a silver emulsion
layer on said surface coating, comprising:
(a) a bath of a material which will attock and remove the
silver emulsion layer from said film,
(b) means for feeding said film into said bath;
(c) means for guiding said film through said bath along a
path of sufficient length so that the time of travel through
said bath is sufficient to cause said bath to substantially
completely remove said emulsion from said film and de-
posit it as a sludge in said tank;
(d) means for removing said sludge from said tank and for
separating the solid silver containing particles of said
sludge from its liquid portion, whereby said separated
solid particles may be used as a valuable recovery prod-
uct;
(e) a second bath of a material which will attack and remove
said surface coating from said polyester base;
(0 means for feeding said film, cleansed of said silver emul-
sion, into said second bath;
(g) means for guiding said film through said second bath
along a path of sufficient length to cause said bath to
substantially completely remove said surface coating from
said polyester base;
(h) means for leading said polyester base, cleansed of said
surface coating, out of said second bath as a second valu-
able recovery product;
(i) each of said guiding means being constructed and adapted
to restrain said film from coming into contact with any
other film surface, whereby agglomeration of said film is
prevented.
4,392,890
CEMENT CLINKER PRODUCTION
Jean-Pierre Henin, La Madelaine, and Gerard Ghestem, Santes,
both of France, assignors to Fives-Cail Babcock, Paris, France
Filed Mar. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 354,347
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 6, 1981, 81 04475
Int. Q.5 C04B 7/02
U.S. Q. 106—100 12 Qaims
1. A method of producing cement clinker from cold, dry,
finely divided raw material, which comprises the steps of
(a) causing hot flue gases to flow in a first direction out of a
rotary kiln having an axis,
(b) suspending a major portion of the finely divided raw
material in the hot flue gases until the raw material has
been preheated and at least partially decarbonized,
(c) introducing the preheated and at least partially decarbo-
nized raw material into the kiln, and
(d) pneumatically injecting a fraction of the cold, dry, finely
divided raw material into an end of the kiln and counter-
currently to said first direction approximately parallel to
the axis of the kiln to form a dust cloud of the raw material
occupying substantially the entire cross section of the kiln
at said end, the end being upstream with respect to a
second direction of flow of the raw material into the kiln.
4,392,891
DISHWASHER SOIL COLLECTING QRCUIT
Theodore F. Meyers, Troy, Ohio, assignor to Hobart Corpora-
tion, Troy, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 165,467, Jul. 2, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 974,342,
Dec. 29, 1978, abandoned. This application No?. 9, 1981, Ser.
No. 319,831
. Int. Q.3 B08B 3/02. 7/04
U.S. Q. 134—10 23 Qaims
21. A method of washing soiled food ware supported on
racks in a chamber of a dishwasher, comprising the steps of:
filling a sump at the bottom of said chamber with a wash
solution, thereby initiating a soil collecting cycle;
spraying said food ware and flushing soil therefrom to said
sump by pumping said solution under pressure from said
sump through spray arms with a recirculating pump,
thereby forming a soil laden solution in said sump;
ingesting said soil laden solution from said sump during said
soil collecting cycle and passing said soil laden solution
through a soil collecting circuit independent of said recir-
culating pump;
filtering soil particles from said soil laden solution in said
662
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
circuit to collect and retain said filtered particles within circuit, and thereafter irradiating a predetermined amount of
said circuit thereby preventing reentrance of said filtered X-ray to a surface of said semiconductor device of said inte-
particles into said chamber during said soil collecting
cycle and returning supernatant from said circuit for recir-
culation by said spray arms; and
-«
^I
-t4
upon completion of said soil collecting cycle, emptying said
circuit of collected soil particles into said sump for drain- grated circuit to alter said electrical characteric measured in
ing the solution and said soil particles therefrom. said test.
4,392,892
PROCESS FOR SEPARATING HYDROCARBONS FROM
PARTICULATE SOLIDS
Fritz Wagner, Stiickheim; Walter Lindorfer, Kassel; Wilhelm
Jahn-Held, SUufenberg, and Walther Schulz, Vecbta, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Wintershall Aktiengesell-
schaft, Kasel and Gesellschaft fur Biotechnologische For-
schung, Braunschweig-Stockheim, both of. Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Ser. No. 82,631, Oct. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
appUcation Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 307,092
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 6,
1978, 2843685
Int. C\? B08B 3/08
U.S. CI. 134—25.1 11 Claims
1. A process for separating oils or petroleum hydrocarbons
from solid or solid/liquid mixtures thereof with particles of
soil, sand or petroleum processing residues, which comprises
the steps of (a) mixing said oil-containing mixture with an
aqueous solution or dispersion of a crude extract of microbially
produced glycolipids to form a slurry, said extract being ob-
tained by a method consisting essentially of the steps of extract-
ing a microbial culture solution with a solvent for glycolipids
and evaporating the solvent from the extract; and (b) adding
water, an aqueous salt solution or sea water to the slurry in an
amount sufficient to cause a rapid rising of an oil phase from an
aqueous phase; and (c) separating the oil phase from the aque-
ous phase, whereby said particles are rendered substantially
oil-free.
4,392,894
SUPERALLOY PROPERTIES THROUGH STRESS
MODIHED GAMMA PRIME MORPHOLOGY
David D. Pearson, West Hartford; Frank D. Lemkey, Glaston-
bury, and Bernard H. Kear, Madison, all of Conn., assignors
to United Technologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 177,047, Aug. 11, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,328,045, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
973,193, Dec. 26, 1978, abandoned, which is a
. continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 913,131, Jun. 6, 1978,
abandoned. This application Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,137
Int. C\? C22F 1/10
U.S. a. 148—2 13 aaims
lOsXtf
NVENTION
PRETBtATtP
• ISMBS H0dT,30l>S'
4,392 893
METHOD FOR CONTROLLING CHARACTERISTICS OF
A SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED CIRCUIT BY X-RAY
BOMBARDMENT
Nguyen T. Du, Hatogaya, and Akihlde Asao, Ohita, both of
Japan, assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas,
Tex.
FUed Not. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,178
Int. a? HOIL 21/265: BOIJ 77/00
U.S. a. 148—1.5 6 Qaims
1. A method for manufacturing a semiconductor integrated
circuit to provide a specific value of an electrical characteris-
tic, comprising the steps of preparing a silicon substrate for said
integrated circuit having a substrate resistivity of no more than
ion. cm at least at a portion of said substrate, forming a semi-
conductor device at an area including said portion of said
substrate, testing said electrical characteristic of said integrated
1. A method for producing a high strength nickel superalloy
article of the type having a gamma-gamma prime microstruc-
ture including the steps of:
(a) providing a homogeneous single crystal article of a gamma-
gamma prime type alloy in which both the gamma and
gamma prime phases are saturated in refractory elements, in
which the gamma prime phase has a lattice parameter which
is at least 0.1% smaller than the lattice parameter of the
gamma phase, and in which (ai equilibrium) the gamma
prime phase is present in from 30-75 volume percent;
(b) heating the article to a temperature between the gamma
prime solvus and the incipient melting temperature so as to
dissolve the gamma prime phase into solid solution;
(c) cooling the article at a rate sufficient to effectively suppress
growth of the gamma prime phase;
(d) applying a stress along an axis to the article while simulta-
neously heating it to a temperature at which growth of the
gamma prime phase will occur;
whereby the gamma prime phase grows in an oriented manner
and the resultant microstructure is exceptionally resistant to
creep along the axis of stress application during aging.
7. A nickel base gamma-gamma prime superalloy article
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
663
adapted to resist stresses at elevated temperatures along a
principal axis which comprises:
a microstructure comprised of a gamma phase matrix contain-
ing aligned rods of the gamma prime phase oriented substan-
tially parallel to the principle axis, with the spacing between
adjacent g^mma prime lamellae being less than about 0.5
micron; 1
said gamma and gamma prime phases being substantially satu-
rated with refractory elements, said gamma prime phase
having a lattice parameter which is at least 0.1% smaller
than the gamma phase lattice parameter, and said gamma
prime phase being present in an amount of from 30 to about
75 volume percent.
4,392,897
MANUFACTURING PROCESS FOR CHANNEL SEAL
Fox J. Herrington, Holcomb, N.Y., assignor to Mobil Oil Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,814
Int. a? B29C 24/00; B65D 33/24
U.S. a. 156-66 32 Qaims
4,392,895
RAMJET FUEL
Russell Reed, Jr.; George W. Burdette; Gary W. Meyers, and
William R. Vuono, all of Ridgecrest, Calif., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Navy, Washington, D.C.
f Ued Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,159
Int. CI.3 C06B 45/10
-19.3 11 Claims
1. A solid ramjet fuel composition comprising a functionally
terminated fluorocarbon prepolymer, a functionally termi-
nated polybutadiene prepolymer, a curative cross-linking com-
pound for both prepolymers, and metallic fuel.
J"
U.S. a. 149—
4,392,8%
METHOD OF PRODUONG A GYPSUM PLASTER
BOARD
Syoji Sakakibara, Nagoya, Japan, assignor to Sakakibara San-
gyo Kabushikl Kaisha, Nagoya, Japan
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,183
Int. a.3 B32B 31/06, 13/08
U.S. a. 156—39 12 Qaims
line aucTW
AOMNO UWllSTIRRINO)
"STAHCM
(*K)OT io-»*rt.
BASED OM MATIR)
AOOINC AMViOLVTIC
(ABOUT 01-OSWT%
BASED ON STAflCHl
'tCATINC UP TO . ,
— TEl»t»AlU«Of.'
OECOIPOSrTlON
(ABOUT«-90"C)
.imiNC ENZTW (STWRIMGI _ST»RCM
teWrTtVATINC ACEnTruntNO PASTE
, WATER)
(a»ouio>-iiiwt» """"'
on starch)
-TEMRERATUREOr
0ECOMPOS..1ON '^°;;7jf,
(ABOUT S-10M1N)
tauEna
25. A method of attaching a channel shaped adhesive strip
having ribs along each side and an adhesive layer between said
ribs to a plastic film comprising:
moving a web of said film past a coextruding assembly;
extruding a channel shaped strip of thermoplastic onto said
moving web;
applying a layer of adhesive between the ribs of said strip;
and
maintaining a temperature differential between said molten
thermoplastic and said moving web so that said extruded
thermoplastic channel strip adheres to said moving web
upon contact and thereafter cools to set said extruded
thermoplastic channel strip in said channel profile with
said adhesive between the ribs of said strip.
4,392,898
DEVICE FOR ENCLOSING OBJECTS
Kenneth B. Pithouse, Swindon, England, and Christopher J.
Swinmurn, Cupertino, Calif., assignors to Raychem Limited,
London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 259,286, Apr. 30, 1981, abandoned.
This application Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 364,086
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 3, 1980,
8014923; Sep. 13, 1980, 8029663
Int. a.3 B29C 27/00: B32B 31/00; A61F 13/02; H02G 13/06
U.S. a. 156—85 22 Qaims
1. Method of producing a gypsum plaster board comprising
the steps of:
(a) preparing a starch paste wherein starch is added into
water with stirring to form milk of starch, into which an
amylolytic enzyme is added, and heated with stirring until
the decomposition temperature of said starch is reached,
and then the heating operation is stopped at a point of DH
0.1-10 and an enzyme deactivating agent is added and
stirred with water;
(b) mixing said starch paste with a raw material of a gypsum
core member containing calcined gypsum, reinforcing
agent and weight reducing agent as well as water to pre-
pare a gypsum slurry;
(c) producing a gypsum plaster board wherein said gypsum
slurry is poured between porous sheets such as paper
boards and molded to a predetermined thickness by a
molding device, then said gypsum slurry is set by hydra-
tion at room temperature and dried at about 50*-200* C. so
as to evaporate excessive moisture therein.
1. A device for enclosing at least part of an object, which
comprises:
a dimensionally heat-recoverable cover;
adhesive means coated on at least part of the cover for
retaining the cover in position during heat recovery of the
cover;
sealant means covering the adhesive means for preventing
the adhesive means from adhering to the article and at
least a portion of the sealant means being separable from
the adhesive means; and
whereby upon separation of the sealant means, the adhesive
means may adhere to the object with the cover enclosing
at least part of the object.
18. A method of enclosing at least part of an object by means
of a device as set forth in claim 1, which comprises the steps of:
664
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(a) positioning the cover about the object so that one portion
of the cover can overUe another part thereof;
(b) peeling a portion of the sealant means from the said
portion of the adhesive means to allow the adhesive means
to adhere to a surface of the object;
(c) causing the said portion to overlie the other part of the
cover so that the portion is bonded thereby by the adhe-
sive means; and
(d) heating the cover to cause recovery thereof.
4,392,899
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING
VEHICLE TIRES
Giorgio Bertoido, Arese, Italy, assignor to Societa Pneumatici
Pirelli S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Set. No. 311,601
Qaims priority, application Italy, Oct. 15, 1980, 25340 A/80
Int. a.3 B29H 77/20
U.S. a. 156—127 10 Qaims
and by a second expandable drum (11) with sectors (13), for
shaping the annular structure and for supporting said shaped
annular structure during its assembling with the tread band,
said comb-shaped drum having its teeth (14) off-set with the
sectors of the expandable drum when said building drum is in
the state of assembled unity, the sectors of said second drum
being radially expandable through the void spaces in between
the teeth of the comb-shaped drum from inside towards the
outside of said comb, said apparatus also comprising means to
axially slide said comb-shaped drum from and towards said
expandable drum, bringing said two drums alternatively axially
separated, in a position of no mutual interference, and joined
together in assembled unity,
the improvement wherein means are provided for allowing
and for causing the comb-shaped drum to rotate indepen-
dently in direction and speed with respect to the expand-
able drum, and centering means for aligning the teeth of
said comb-shaped drum in off-set relationship with the
sectors of the expandable drum, all said means acting
when said drums are axially separated from each other.
1. In a process for manufacturing tires which comprise a
carcass, an annular reinforcing structure, and a tread-band
which process comprises the steps of:
(a) preparing a carcass of a first tire in a cylindrical form on
a first expandable drum;
(a) building an annular reinforcing structure for the first tire
on a hollow drum having a comb-shaped surface;
(c) expanding the sectors of a second expandable drum,
between void spaces of the comb, from an inner position
to an outer position of the comb, thereby shaping and
supporting the annular reinforcing structure only with the
sectors;
(d) slipping the comb-shaped drum from the drum-with-sec-
tors;
(e) applying a tread-band on the annular structure while it is
supported by the sectors of the second drum;
(0 transferring the annular reinforcing structure and the
tread-band from the second to the first expandable drum;
(g) expanding the first expandable drum to impart a final
toroidal shape to the tire; and
(h) removing said tire from said first expandable drum;
the improvement which comprises the additional steps of
(i) building the annular reinforcing structure of a second tire
on the comb-shaped drum in a slipped position from the
sectors after step (d);
preparing a carcass of a second tire in a cylindrical form on
said first expandable drum after completion of step (h);
(j) transferring, after step (0. the annular reinforcing struc-
ture of the second tire while supported by the comb-
shaped drum around the sectors of the second drum; and
(k) repeating steps (c) to (h).
3. In an apparatus for making a vehicle tire having a carcass,
a tread band, and an annular reinforcing structure disposed
between the carcass and the tread band, said apparatus com-
prising a building drum, axially separable into two distinct
parts and recomposable into an assembled unity, for manufac-
turing and shaping said annular reinforcing structure and for
assembling it with said tread band, said two distinct parts being
respectively constituted by a first cylindrical, hollow, comb-
shaped drum (11), for manufacturing said annular structure.
4,392,900
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR APPLYING A PATCH
Qarence H. Helbing, 485 Tailholt La., Shelbyville, Ind. 46176
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,489
Int. a.3 B32B 31/12
U.S. CI. 156—153 10 Qaims
1. A method for applying a patch having an elastomeric
mounting surface on a battery case or the like, the battery case
comprising a polypropylene surface area, the method compris-
ing the steps of:
a. abrading the polypropylene surface area of the battery
case sufficiently to remove a surface layer and expose the
underlying surface of the battery case;
b. applying hydrogen peroxide to the exposed, underiying
surface of the battery case;
c. after step b., applying a layer of cyanoacry late adhesive
to the exposed, underiying surface of the battery case;
and
d. positioning the patch with the elastomeric mounting
surface against the adhesive.
4,392,901
REFLECTIVE GARMENT AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURING SAME
Vincent S. Pernicano, 2833 Railroad St., Boyne Falls, Mich.
49713, and Michael R. Wright, 24297 Ridgeview Dr., Far-
mington Hills, Mich. 48018
Division of Ser, No. 198,926, Oct. 20, 1980, abandoned, which is
a division of Ser. No. 60,466, Jul. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,248,500.
This application Feb. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 350,333
Int. a.3 B32B 31/00; C09J 7/00
U.S. a. 156—155 1 Claim
1. A method of making a reflective heat transfer combination
including the steps of; applying a tacky mixture of tack wax
and mineral spirits in a carrier layer over a paper substrate
capable of absorbing the carrier layer when melted in response
to heat, disposing a layer of glass beads over the carrier layer,
forcing the glass beads into the carrier layer and against the
substrate while allowing portions of the beads to be exposed
above the carrier layer, applying a liquid binder layer around
the beads and over the carrier layer, drying the binder layer,
applying a liquid reflective coat over the binder layer and
covering the beads, applying powdered adhesive over the
reflective coat while the reflective coat is liquid, and drying
the reflective coat and applying the heat transfer combination
July 12, 19S3
CHEMICAL
665
to an article by placing the coating with the powdered adhe- 4,392,903 ^^,„
sive therein against the article and applying heat and pressure PROCESS ^^^IJ^^^^JJ^gJ ™^j^^'^^'^"'^^
Tadakazu Endo, Ohtsu; Hirotsugu Suzuki, Tokyo, and Masanori
Takahashi, Kyoto, all of Japan, assignors to Toray Industries,
Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 146,078, May 2, 1980, Pat. No. 4,320,166.
This application Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,377
Int. a.3 B32B 3/28
U.S. CI. 156—167 5 Qaims
/<?BiNDiP
-^REFLECTOR
./:
^ARRttP
/ T
^' '' ■?:=>''^^." v:/»
to activate fHe powdered adhesive whereby the adhesive re-
sponds to heat and melts and bonds to the article.
1. A process for producing a thermal insulating non woven
bulky product the steps which comprise
(a) spinning the filaments of a synthetic polymer under fluid
pressure,
(b) releasing the spun filaments together with fluid at high
velocity for crimping and separating,
(c) crimping and separating the filaments,
(d) spraying the crimped and separated filaments with a
binder,
(e) spreading out and accumulating the separated filaments
into layers, and
(0 heating the layered filaments to the final product.
4,392,902
METHOD FOR PRODUCING A SIEVE BELT OF
THERMOSETTABLE SYNTHETIC RESIN HELICES FOR
A PAPERMAKING MACHINE
Johannes Lcfferts, Enschede, Netherlands, assignor to Steg
Siebtechnik GmbH, Ahaus-Alstatte, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 111,497, Jan. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 4,346,138.
This application Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 362,039
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 23, 1979,
7903176; Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 21, 1979, 2938221
Int. a.3 B32B 5/00: D04H 3/02
U.S. a. 156—161 5 Qaims
1. A method for producing a sieve belt characterized by the
following method steps:
(a) meshing helices of thermosettable synthetic resin filament
by inserting the windings of one helix between the windings
of an adjacent helix so that the overlapping windings form a
channel, the meshed helices being free of bias,
(b) passing a pintle-filament into said channel,
(c) extending the thus-formed sieve belt by applying longitudi-
nal tension, and
(d) thermosetting the sieve belt in said extended condition.
4,392,904
SCULPTURED LAMP BASE
Gregory A. Van Pelt, 634 Wenonah Ave., Oak Park, III. 60304
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,009
Int. a.' B65H 81/00
U.S. a. 156—194 3 Claims
1. In a method for the production of sculptured lamp bases,
the steps comprising: winding a pre-slit strip of single wall
corrugated cardboard around a central core threaded or other-
wise designed for the attachment of lamp hardware to form a
tightly wound spiral of a certain diameter; positioning said
spiral on a mold comprising a plurality of ribs radiating around
a vertical axis coincident with said central core; distending said
spiral downwardly along said mold beginning with the center-
most position of said spiral; tautly shaping the distended spiral
to conform with the shape of the mold; applying glue to the
molded spiral to the inner surfaces thereof and about the cen-
tral core and the outermost edge of the spiral; repeating the
prior steps to form a mating molded spiral; gluing the bottom
666
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
of the first molded spiral to the top of the mating spiral; and together to form a continuous assembly of joined fasteners,
coatmg the completed lamp base with glue. successively stretching the filament sections of said fasteners!
4 392Q05
METHOD OF TRANSFERRING DESIGNS ONTO
ARTICXES
Mary G. Boyd, Framingham, and Donald R. Smith, Dover, both
of Mass., assignors to Dennison Manufacturing Company,
Framingham, Mass.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,589
Int. aj B32B 31/00; B65C 9/25: C09J 5/06
U.S. a. 156—235 38 Qaims
♦
M^
1. A process for transferring a film laminate to an article
from a support member, wherein the film laminate comprises a
resinous coating layer in contact with said support member, an
ink layer, and a protective coating layer, said resinous coating
layer comprised of a film forming component which is the
polymerization product of a diamine with a dimerized fatty
acid, said process comprising the steps of:
(a) heating the support member to a first temperature above
the melting point of the resinous coating layer,
(b) heating the surface of a resilient transfer pad to a second
temperature lower than said first temperature,
(c) pressing the heated transfer pad against the film laminate
to transfer the laminate thereto,
(d) pressing the film laminate against the article so that the
resinous coating layer contacts the article, and
(e) withdrawing the transfer pad from the article so that the
pad separates from the film laminate, which remains in
adhesive conUct with the article.
4 392 906
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR
MANUFACTURING FASTENER ASSEMBLIES
Saburo Hara, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Toska Co., Ltd.; Japan
Bano'k Co., Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan and Ben Qements &
Sons, Inc., Hackensack, N.J.
FUed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,523
Int a.3 B32B 31/ J8. 31/26
U^. a. 156-250 SCUdms
1. A method of manufacturing a continuous assembly of
fasteners, each said fastener including a head section and a bar
section joined together by a filament section comprising the
steps of successively punching individual fasteners out of a
sheet of synthetic resin material, successively delivering said
fasteners in a downward direction so that said fasteners are
laminated in a continuous stack of fasteners, heating the bar
sections of said fasteners so that said bar sections are fused
and delivering said stacked, joined and stretched fasteners in a
continuous assembly.
4 392 907
METHOD FOR PRODUaNG RECORDING HEAD
Yoshiaki Shirato, Yokohama; Yasushi Takatori, Sagamihara;
Toshitami Hara, Tokyo; Yukuo Nishimura, Sagamihara, and
Michiko Takahashi, Higashi Ohizumi, all of Japan, assignors
to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 133,317, Mar. 24, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,411
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1979, 54-36040;
Mar. 27, 1979, 54-36042; Mar. 29, 1979, 54-37385; Mar. 29.
1979, 54-37389
Int. a.3 B32B 31/18; GOID 15/16
U.S. a. 156-252 17 Qaims
1. A method for producing a recording head for ejecting a
recording liquid in an action chamber from an orifice con-
nected with said action chamber in a state of small droplets and
depositing at least a part of said droplets onto a recording
surface to achieve recording, said method comprising a step X'
for forming a member a' having a perforation for constituting
said action chamber by forming a curable resin layer on a
surface of a first sub-member, forming a groove on said surface
bearing said resin layer and curing said resin layer while said
surface bearing said resin layer is maintained in contact with a
second sub-member thereby adjoining said sub-members, a step
Y' of adjoining an end aperture of said perforation to another
member b' constituting an intermediate supply chamber of said
liquid, and a step Z' of attaching to member a' another member
c' for forming an opening in the vicinity of the other end
aperture of said perforation.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
667
II 4,392,908
PROCESS FOR MAKING ABSORBENT ARTICLES
Roger B. Dehnel, Shambrook, England, assignor to Lever Broth-
ers Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,864
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 25, 1980,
8002624
Int. C1.5 B32B 31/00; C09J 5/00; B22F 3/00
U.S. a. 427—194 5 Qaims
1. A process for manufacturing a water-absorbent article in
which particles of a water-swellable polymer are fixed to a
water-absorbent substrate, which process comprises:
1. forming on the surface of the water-swellable particles a
coating of a thermoplastic adhesive resin to form coated
particles;
2. locating the coated particles in their unswollen and dry
state on or within the water-absorbent substrate also in the
dry state; and
3. applying heat to soften the thermoplastic coating of the
particles and pressing the particles and substrate to cause
the particles to be bound to the substrate.
432,910
WEB ALIGNING PROCESS AND APPARATUS
Masateru Tokuno, Nishinomiya; Yoshinori Ishii, Yao. and
Hidetoshi Hoshiyama, Ibaragi, all of Japan, assignors to
Rengo Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,340
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 2, 1980, 55-138517
Int. a.5 B65H 25/26
U.S. a. 156—361 5 Claims
U SM 17
21
— Uc,r7 r^jv" r*;^"
290 no g «lb 29b 30b II 4Sb j 6 lAa
^M„
M <ta g lib a 22 19 S3c S3b
4,392,909
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR PRODUONG
MULTILAYER PRINTED aRCUIT BOARDS
Hans Bohn, Schopfloch; Wolfgang Stein, Freudenstadt; Peter
Bernsau, Wittlensweiler, and Fred Staubitzer, Domstetten, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Biirkle GmbH
A Co., FreudensUdt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,722
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 2,
1980, 3032931
Int. C\? C09J 5/10
U.S. a. 156—306.9 6 Qaims
— fer
1. An apparatus for aligning at least two running webs to be
glued together with each other in the production of corrugated
fiberboard, said apparatus comprising:
two web position detectors provided adjacent to a gluing
station for detecting the lateral positions of the respective
webs,
a computing means for combining the signals from said web
position detectors to generate a difference signal propor-
tional to the difference therebetween,
web moving means disposed at a position at a predetermined
distance upstream of the detection f>oint for correcting
any lateral displacement of one web in relation to the
other,
a moved distance detector means for generating a signal
proportional to the distance for which the web has been
moved by said web moving means,
READY signal generator means for generating a first
READY signal from when the web corrected has run at
least for said predetermined distance after the last correc-
tion of displacement and generating a second READY
signal at least from when a spliced point has passed the
detection point after splicing of one web to the other web,
and
a timing controller which in the presence of said first
READY signal gives a timing signal until the signal from
said moved distance detector means becomes equal to said
difference signal,
said web moving means operating while it receives said
timing signal and said second READY signal.
1. A method of assembling a plurality of printed circuit
boards into a permanently bonded multilayer circuit board
stock, the method comprising the steps of
stacking printed circuit boards in alternation with bonding
layers of thermosetting resin-based plastic to form multi-
layer stacks;
heating a first multilayer stack under compression in a first
panel press to a curing temperature at which the material
of the bonding layers undergoes a curing process;
precooling the first multilayer stack under compression in
the first panel press to a transfer temperature which lies
between the curing temperature and the ambient tempera-
ture;
transferring the precooled first multilayer stack from the
first panel press to a second panel press;
loading a second multilayer stack in the first panel press; and
aftercooling the transferred multilayer stack under compres-
sion in the second panel press to a temperature in the
vicinity of the ambient temperature, while heating the
second multilayer stack in the first panel press as afore-
said.
4,392,911
APPARATUS FOR SEALING CARTONS
Lawrence W. Ulrich, and Connie W. Walker, both of Boling-
brook. 111., assignors to Durable Packaging Corporation, Chi-
cago, 111.
FUed May 12, 1982, Ser. No. 377,336
Int. Q.' B31F 1/00
U.S. Q. 156-468 38 Claims
1. Apparatus of the type used for sealing the foldable fiaps of
cartons; said apparatus including a frame structure, a sealing
head assembly mounted to said frame structure, and at least
one longitudinally extending side arm assembly mounted to
said frame structure; said frame structure comprising: a pair of
entrance leg members positioned in a common transverse
vertical plane and a pair of exit leg members positioned in a
common transverse vertical plane spaced from the plane of
said entrance leg members, said entrance leg members and said
exit leg members including a front leg member and a rear leg
member; an entrance cross support member extending between
the upper portions of said entrance leg members and an exit
cross support member extending between the upper portions of
said exit leg members, said entrance cross support member and
said exit cross support member being formed with upwardly
extending open channel portions; and means secured to said
side arm assembly for slidable receipt within said channel
668
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
portions of said entrance cross support member and said exit
cross support member so as to permit selective transverse
^-^
movement of said side arm assembly above said channel por-
tions.
4,392,912
BOBBIN CHANGER FOR JOINING SUCCESSIVE REELS
OF WEB OF THE CIGARETTE INDUSTRY
John K. Horsley, High Wycombe, England, assignor to Molins
Limited, London, England
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,284
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 15, 1980,
8012336
Int. a.3 B65H 19/14, 19/18. 19/20
U.S. a. 156—504 13 Qaims
\^Y
4U
^■1
^t
34
■«
4 J
.34 I
u
^
m
U-A
m
'29 -26 '27
12. A bobbin changer comprising a splicing device for join-
ing the leading end of the web on each new reel to the web on
the expiring reel; at least two cradles for receiving and sup-
porting reels of the web during use, each having means for
locating the end of the web of a new reel in readiness for
splicing, the locating means including an upwardly-extending
arm which carries a cross-bar including means for releasably
holding the end of the web on each new reel in the position
needed for splicing, and means for movably supporting each of
the cradles whereby each cradle in turn can be moved from a
standby position to an operative position aligned with the
splicing device in preparation for a splicing operation; the
splicing device including a fixed member having suction ports
for gripping the expiring web, once it has stopped, in prepara-
tion for splicing, and an opposed movable member, said mov-
able member and an opposed portion of said fixed member
being set at a level below the cross-bar of each cradle, the
leading end portion of a new reel being moved into a position
between the fixed and movable members when the cradle
carrying that reel is moved to the operative position splicing
being effected by movement of the movable member towards
the fixed member, the splicing device further including a knife
arranged to cut the expiring web below the suction ports to
remove the tail end, the arrangement being such that, after the
tail end of expiring web has been cut by the knife, the means
moving the cradles is arranged to operate to bring the new web
to a position between the old web and the movable member,
whereby movement of the movable member towards the fixed
member will press the two webs together and effect a joint by
means of adhesive carried by the new web, for example, in the
form of double-sided adhesive tape.
4,392,913
LABELLING APPARATUS
Peter J. Baumli, 213 Carrington Rd., Coogee, New South Wales,
Australia
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,311
Claims priority, application Australia, Jun. 23, 1980,
PE4157/80
Int. a.3 B32B 35/00
U.S. a. 156—584 11 Qaims
1. A programmable platen for a label applying system com-
prising a top plate, a bottom plate and a dividing plate therebe-
tween defining two gas chambers, a predetermined arrange-
ment of through bores extending in alignment through said
three plates and a plurality of removable valving pins adapted
to fit said through bores; each of said chambers being adapted
to be coupled to a source of positive or negative gas pressure
and wherein the surface of the platen at each valving pin
location is subject to positive and/or negative pressure depend-
ing upon the form of valving pin fitted in each through bore in
accordance with a predetermined program for arranging said
valving pins; each valving pin extending between at least two ,
of said plates and having gas sealing means between said pin
and at least two of said plates.
4,392,914
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING MASK FOR COLOR
CRT
Shigeo Takenaka; Eiji Kamohara, and Kazuyuki Seino, all of
Fukaya, Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 413,896
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 10, 1981, 56-141739
Int. U? B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. a. 156—633 9 Qaims
1. A method for manufacturing a mask for a color CRT in
which a plurality of flat mask members each of which has a
number of apertures in an effective area thereof are formed,
and the plurality of mask members are fixed at predetermined
distances with the apertures thereof being aligned with each
other, comprising the steps of:
bringing into tight contact and fixing in position at least parts
of said effective areas which have said apertures of said
flat mask members with an insulator interposed between
peripheral portions surrounding said effective areas of said
plurality of flat mask members;
July 12, 198$
CHEMICAL
669
press forming said plurality of flat mask members to provide
a predetermined radius of curvature thereto; and
fixing said effective areas in position at said predetermined
distances after shifting apart said plurality of mask mem
bers.
4,392,915
WAFER SUPPORT SYSTEM
John Zajac, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Eaton Corporation,
Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,625
Int. Q.3 HOIL 21/306; B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. Q. 156—643 13 Qaims
9. A method of operating a plasma etcher comprising posi-
tioning one or more wafers on an electrode within the vacuum
chamber of said plasma etcher, directing a flow of a first gas
into said vacuum chamber above said one or more wafers at a
first predetermined volume flow, and selectively directing a
second gas into said vacuum chamber through said electrode
toward the one or more wafers positioned thereon at a second
predetermined volume flow to alternately support said one or
more wafers on a cushion of said second gas and then allow
said one or more wafers to come to rest in engagement with
said electrode.
(a) preparing a dope by dissolving chitin, an alkylated chitin
or an acetylated chitin in a solvent,
(b) spinning the dope through a spinning nozzle into a coag-
ulating bath to form fibers,
(c) chopping the fibers into staples,
(d) dispersing the staples of the fibers in water to make a
fiber suspension, and
(e) subjecting the fiber suspension to sheet making, in which
the fibers formed in the step (b) are subsequently kept wet
with water throughout down to the step (e).
2. A method for the preparation of a paper from once dried
fibers of a regenerated chitinous material of chitin, an alkylated
chitin or an acetylated chitin by subjecting a fiber suspension of
the chitinous fiber to sheet making without the use of a binder
material which comprises contacting the once dried chitinous
fibers with a hydrogen-bond forming agent and rinsing the
thus treated chitinous fibers with water subsequently keeping
the fibers wet with water down to the step of the sheet making.
4 392 917
AMPHOTERIC WATER-IN-OIL SELF-INVERTING
POLYMER EMULSION
SUnley A. Lipowski, Livingston, and John J. Miskel, Jr., Mend-
ham, both of N.J., assignors to Diamond Shamrock Corpora-
tion, Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 84,986, Oct. 15, 1979, Pat. No. 4,330,450.
This application Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,175
Int. CI.' D21H 3/38
U.S. Q. 162—168.1 10 Claims
1. In pulp and papermaking processes, the improvement
which comprises adding to pulp an effective amount of
an amphoteric water-in-oil self-inverting polymer emulsion
having
(a) from about 10 to about 50 parts by weight of a polymer
selected from the group consisting of
(1) a copolymer having from about 30 to about 99 parts
by weight of a water soluble nonionic vinyl monomer
and from about 1 to about 70 parts by weight of a
water soluble amphoteric vinyl monomer, and
(2) a terpolymer having from about 30 to 98 parts by
weight of a water soluble nonionic vinyl monomer,
from about 1 to about 35 parts by weight of a water
soluble anionic vinyl monomer and from about 1 to
about 35 parts by weight of a water soluble cationic
vinyl monomer,
(b) from about 10 to about 50 parts by weight of water.
(c) from about 5 to about 50 parts by weight of a hydro-
phobic liquid,
(d) from about 2 to about 25 parts by weight of a water-m-
oil emulsifying agent, and
(e) from about 1 to about 15 parts by weight of an invert-
ing surfactant
wherein the polymer is in the aqueous phase to improve
drainage of the pulp.
4,392,916
PAPER-MAKING PROCESS WITH REGENERATED
CHITIN nBERS
Masashi Nishiyama, Kanonji; Yoshinari Kobayashi, Kagawa;
Seiichi Tokura, and Norio Nishi, both of Sapporo, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Director-General of the Agency of Industrial
Science and Technology, Tokyo and President of Hokkaido
University, Hokkaido, both of, Japan
Continurtion-iR»part of Ser. No. 235,588, Feb. 18, 1981,
abandoned. This application Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,636
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 17, 1980, 55-82258
Int. Q.3 D21H 5/12
U.S. Q. 162-157.1 * Claims
1. A method for the preparation of a paper composed of
chitinous fibers without the use of a binder material which
comprises the steps of
4,392,918
TOROIDAL nELD COIL TORQUE STRUCTURE
Albert L. Gaines, West Simsbury, Conn., assignor to Combus-
tion Engineering, Inc., Windsor, Conn.
Filed Jul. 25, 1979, Ser. No. 60,555
Int. Q.' G21B 1/00
U.S. Q. 376-133 10 Qaims
1. In a fusion reactor of the Tokamak-type that employs a
toroidal magnetic field for purposes of efl^ecting the confine-
ment of the plasma therewithin, the fusion reactor includmg a
multiplicity of toroidal field coils operable to produce said
toroidal magnetic field, the improvement comprising a torque
structure for providing support for the multiplicity of toroidal
field coils, said torque structure forming a frame structure
operable to enable torque loads acting on the toroidal field
coils to be equilibrated as close to the area of force application
as possible, said torque structure comprising:
670
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
a. a membrane shell positioned in surrounding relation to the
toroidal field coils and operative to substantially enclose
the toroidal field coils therewithin, said membrane shell
including a multiplicity of membrane sections intercon-
nected one to another so as to collectively effect the
enclosure of the toroidal field coils, each of said multiplic-
ity of membrane sections including a first segment, a
second segment and a third segment, said first segment
being operative to define a plane, said second segment
having one end thereof affixed to one end of said first
segment, said second segment having the other end
thereof spaced outwardly away from said first segment
and inclined at an angle in a first direction from the plane
of said first segment, said third segment having one end
thereof affixed to the other end of said first segment, said
third segment having the other end thereof spaced out-
wardly away from said first segment and inclined at an
angle in a second direction from the plane of said first
segment, said first segment having an opening formed
therein to provide access to the interior of the fusion
reactor; and
b. an intercoil structure including a multiplicity of intercoil
sections, each of said multiplicity of intercoil sections
interposed between an adjoining pair of toroidal field
coils, each of said multiplicity of intercoil sections being
cooperatively associated with a corresponding one of said
multiplicity of membrane sections, each of said multiplic-
ity of intercoil sections including a first spacer wedge and
a second spacer wedge, said first spacer wedge and said
second spacer wedge each being affixed to the corre-
sponding one of said multiplicity of membrane sections
such that said first spacer wedge and said second spacer
wedge are locat^rd in spaced relation one to another and
on opposite sides of the opening formed in said first seg-
ment of the corresponding one of said multiplicity of
membrane sections.
4,392,919
CHARGING APPARATUS FOR COKE COOLING
CHAMBERS
Manfred Galow, and Horst Joseph, both of Essen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Didier Engineering GmbH, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,381
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1980, 3011575
Int. a.3 ClOB 39/02. 39/12
VS. a. 202—228 10 Oaims
1. In combination an apparatus for the dry cooling of coke
including a dry coke cooling chamber and a charging opening
in said chamber wherein hot coke is transferred by means of a
coke bucket to said cooling chamber, charging apparatus for
charging said coke cooling chamber with said hot coke com-
prising:
an enclosure including a roof, a bottom and sides, said enclo-
sure encompassing at least an upper portion of said cool-
ing chamber such that the charging opening of the cooling
chamber extends into the enclosure, said enclosure being
essentially gastight when sealed,
means for selectively opening and sealably closing an open-
ing in said enclosure permitting access of said coke bucket
to the interior of the enclosure, and sealing of said enclo-
sure when said bucket is in the interior thereof for charg-
ing said coke to said cooling chamber,
transport means for shuttling said coke bucket into and out
of said enclosure and to said coke cooling chamber for
charging said coke to said cooling chamber,
exhaust gas treatment means for evacuating said enclosure of
emissions generated by the charging of the cooling cham-
ber and for controlling release of said emissions to the
atmosphere, and
gas feed means connected to said enclosure for supplying
inert gas to the interior of the enclosure.
4,392,920
METHOD OF FORMING OXIDE COATINGS
Glen E. McDonald, Strongsville, Ohio, assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,152
Int. a.5 C25D 5/50; C25B 1/02
U.S. a. 204—37 R 7 Oaims
1. In a method of covering a substrate with a black metal
oxide film from an electroplating bath containing about 270
grams per liter of cobalt sulfate, about 37 grams per liter of
cobalt chloride, and about 30 grams per liter of boric acid
having a pH in the range between about 1.5 and about 4.5 at a
temperature between about 45° C. and about 60° C. to form a
coating that is highly absorbing, the improvement comprising
the steps of
adding an oxidizing agent to said bath,
placing a metal substrate in said electroplating bath to form
a cathode,
electrodepositing a compound of cobalt from said bath onto
said substrate at said cathode by passing a current of about
400 amps per square meter of substrate therethrough in
the presence of said oxidizing agent thereby forming an
oxide coating containing hydrated cobalt oxides, and
contacting said coated substrate with water having a temper-
ature substantially at the boiling point.
4,392,921
COMPOSITION AND PROCESS FOR
ELECTROPLATING WHITE PALLADIUM
Kathleen B. Miscioscio, Bayside, N.Y., and Paul T. Smith,
Pascoag, R.I., assignors to Occidental Chemical Corporation,
Warren, Mich.
FUed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,318
Int 0.3 C25D 3/50
U.S. O. 204—47 2 Claims
1. A stable aqueous electroplating bath suitable for obtaining
thin, white deposits of palladium metal which consists essen-
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
671
tially of a bath soluble source of pure palladium metal, free of
alloying elen»ents, which source is present in amounts suffi-
cient to provide from about 0. 1 to about 20 g/1 palladium in the
bath, from about 30 to about 120 g/1 of a bath soluble ammo-
^^HM^us j»0rtrK/r am, a*»
COOH
wherein R' is as defined above in the presence of a lower fatty
acid.
unreieM^TM mmm
nium conductivity salt, a sufficient amount of ammonium hy-
droxide to adjust and maintain the pH in the bath of from about
8 to 10 and a buffer selected from ammonium biborate and
sodium tetraborate to maintain the pH within said range.
4,392,924
PROCESS FOR CONTROLLING THE PERMEABILITY
OF DIAPHRAGMS IN THE PREPARATION OF
POLYVALENT METALS BY ELECTROLYSIS AND AN
ELECTROLYSIS CELL FOR CARRYING OUT THE
PROCESS
Marcel Armand, Meylan, France, assignor to Pechiney Ugine
Kuhlmann, Paris, France
Filed Oct. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 313,229
Oaims priority, application France, Nov. 27, 1980, 80 25504
Int. 0.3 C25C 3/26. 3/28. 3/34. 7/06
U.S. O. 204—64 T 4 Oaims
4,392,922
TRIVALENT CHROMIUM ELECTROLYTE AND
PROCESS EMPLOYING VANADIUM REDUONG
r AGENT
Thaddeus W. Tomaszewski, Dearborn, Mich., assignor to Occi-
dental Chemical Corporation, Warren, Mich.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,406
Int. 0.3 C25D 3/06
U.S. O. 204—51 35 Oaims
1. An aqueous acidic trivalent chromium electrolyte con-
taining trivalent chromium ions, a complexing agent for main-
taining the trivalent chromium ions in solution, halide ions,
ammonium ions, hydrogen ions to provide a pH on the acid
side, and a reducing agent comprising vanadiums ions present
in at least an amount effective to maintain the concentration of
hexavalent chromium ions at a level which is not in excess of
0.4 grams/liter.
Ticl4
4,392,923
PROCESS FOR PREPARING
THIAZOLINOZETIDINONE DERIVATIVES
Sigeru Torii, Akaiwa; Hideo Tanaka, Okayama; Junzo Nokami,
Okayama; Michio Sasaoka, Okayama; Norio Saito, Itano, and
Takashi Shiroi, Okayama, all of Japan, assignors to Otsuka
Kagaku Yakuhin Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
FUed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,505
Int. 0.3 C25C 1/00: C07D 99/10
U.S. O. 204—59 R H Claims
1. A process for preparing a thiazolinoazetidinone derivative
represented by the formula
wherein R' represents aralkyl group or aryloxymethyl group
and R2 represents acyl group, the process comprising electro-
lyzing a compound of the formula
1. A process for controlling the permeability of the dia-
phragm of an electrolysis cell for the preparation of a metal
selected from the group consisting of Ti, Zr, Hf, V, Nb and Ta,
from an electrolyte based on molten metal halides, the dia-
phragm being coated with a deposit of the metal to be pro-
duced, characterised in that said control is provided by a de-
posit growth or re-dissolution process which is controlled in
dependence on the voltage drop in the electrolyte impregnat-
ing the diaphragm, or a measured variable linked to said volt-
age drop.
4 392 925
ELECTRODE ARRANGEMENT IN A CELL FOR
MANUFACTURE OF ALUMINUM FROM MOLTEN,
SALTS
Hanspeter Alder, Flurlingen, and Eugen Schalch, Neuhausen,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Swiss Aluminium Ltd., Chip-
pis, Switzerland
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,891
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 14, 1980,
3873/80
Int. O.' C25C 3/08
U.S. O. 204-67 28 Claims
1. An electrolytic cell for use in the production of aluminum
comprising:
a pot having a floor and sidewalls;
a melt of liquid aluminum within said pot on said floor;
a molten electrolyte within said pot on said melt of liquid
aluminum;
at least one anode within said pot projecting into said molten
electrolyte such that the top surface of said melt of liquid
672
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
aluminum is a distance d from the active bottom surface of
said at least one anode; and
insulating means within said pot in said melt of liquid alumi-
num for reducing the surface area of said melt of liquid
voltage or increasing the inter-electrode distance of an
aluminum electrolytic cell.
aluminum in direct contact with said molten electrolyte
such that the total surface area of said melt of liquid alumi-
num exposed to said molten electrolyte is from about
10-90% the active surface area of said at least one anode.
4,392,926
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUCTION OF
ALUMINUM
Teruto Ohta, and Yoshio Kinoshita, both of Chiba, Japan, as-
signors to Showa Aluminum Industries K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,347
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 30, 1980, 55-71549;
Jul. 4, 1980, 55-90557
Int. a.3 C25C i/06, 3/08. 3/14
U.S. a. 204—67 15 Qaims
20
^9
f
!0
^
r— .
1
11 I
.7 I
15
16 14 17
-18
1. A process for the production of aluminum comprising the
steps of:
forming in a cell body an electrolytic bath in which alumina
is dissolved in a fused fluoride salt bath mainly composed
of cryolite;
conducting a current from a self-baking type carbon anode,
which is located above said cell body, to said cell body
serving also as a cathode, thereby simultaneously con-
ducting the baking of unbaked carbonaceous raw material
in the carbon anode and the electrolytic reduction of
alumina;
maintaining the immersion of said carbon anode in the elec-
trolytic bath above the molten aluminum which is formed
on the cell body as a result of electrolysis;
feeding alumina in accordance with the decrease in the
alumina concentration of the electrolytic bath;
introducing a gas to the lower surface of said carbon anode
which is in contact with the electrolytic bath via at least
one aperture passing in an essentially vertical direction
through the carbon anode; and
intermittently introducing the gas from said at least one
aperture to the lower surface of the carbon anode during
normal operation of the cell when the alumina concentra-
tion is higher than a critical alumina concentration so that
an anode effect is not generated, thereby reducing the cell
4,392,927
NOVEL ELECTRODE
Peter Fabian, Freigericht, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Theo
Muller, Wuustwezel, Belgium, assignors to Heraeus Elek-
troden GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 349,839
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 21,
1981, 3106587
Int. a.3 C25B 1/34. 11/04. 11/08. 11/10
U.S. a. 204—98 32 Claims
1. A composite electrode comprising an electroconductive
base with an electrolyte inert, electroconductive electrocata-
lytic layer applied by thermal spraying, the said layer being a
powder of a matrix material selected from the group consisting
of oxides, nitrides, phosphides, silicides, borides and carbides
of a metal selected from the group consisting of boren, valve
metals and iron group metals having uniformly admixed there-
with electrocatalytically active particles of a different metal
selected from the group consisting of platinum group metals
and iron group metals and oxides thereof with a particle size
smaller by at least one order of magnitude of the matrix parti-
cles.
4,392,928
METHOD OF DOPING A SEMICONDUCTOR
Chiang Y. Yang, Miller Place, N.Y., and Robert A. Rapp, Co-
lumbus, Ohio, assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the United States Department of Energy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 342,683
Int. a.3 C25D 5/00
U.S. a. 204— 130 , 8 Qaims
1. A method for doping semiconductor material with a
chosen impurity comprising the steps of:
(a) establishing an interface between a solid semiconductor
and a solid electrolyte, forming a semiconductor/elec-
trolyte cell, said solid electrolyte being an ionic conductor
of said impurity and said semiconductor and said electro-
lyte being jointly chosen so that any compound formed
from said semiconductor and said impurity will have a
free energy of formation no lower than the free energy of
formation of said electrolyte; and,
(b) establishing a potential across said interface, said poten-
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
673
tial being chosen so as to allow diffusion of impurity ions
from sa d electrolyte into said semiconductor.
4,392,929
PREPARATION OF
BIS-(l-BROMO-2,3,3-TRICHLORO-2-PROPENYL)
ETHER
Junichi Saito, and Toyohiko Kume, both of Tokyo, Japan, as-
signors to Nihon Tokushu Noyaku Seizo K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 110,051, Jan. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4,317,937.
This application Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,443
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 24, 1979, 54-6015
Int. Q.3 BOIJ 19/12
U.S. Q. 204—158 HA 4 Qaims
1. A process for producing bis-(l-bromo-2,3,3-trichloro-2-
propenyl) ether, comprising reacting bis-(2,3,3-trichloro-2-
propenyl) ether of the formula
CI
I
(Cl2C=C— CH2)20
with bromine under irradiation with light.
4,392,930
PHOTOPOLYMERIZABLE RESINS
Roderick D. Hathaway, Cambridge; Edward Irving, Burwell,
and John S. Waterhouse, Cherry Hinton, all of England,
assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,894
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 9, 1981,
8121172; Apr. 3, 1982, 8209955
Int. Q.3 C08F 8/00. 2/46
U.S. Q. 204—159.14 9 Qaims
1. A photopolymerizable resin of the formula
CH2=
li
=CC004-R'*— OOC— R'^—
Rio
COOJrCH2CHCH2— R"-^"'
OH
•CH2CHCH2— R'2— CH2CHCH2— R" —
OH OH
c
R" and e R'^ groups each represent a group of the for-
mula
R»5
R'5
1
1
N
N-
\
/
CO
R'5
■R*— N
\
CO
/
Risn
I
N
DC
jt
where
R^ represents a divalent aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, or arali-
phatic radical of 1 to 8 carbon atoms,
c denotes zero or 1, and
each R'5 denotes an alkyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms or
each pair of R" conjointly represents a group of formula
— CH2CH2— , — C(R'<'R'7)CO-.
— CH2CH— .
I
CHj
— CH2CH2CH2— , or —COCO—, wherein R'^and R'^
each denote a hydrogen atom or a straight or branched
alkyl group of up to 9 carbon atoms or R'*" and R'^ may
together denote tetramethyiene, pentamethylene, methyl-
pentamethylene, or hexamethylene.
8. A method of F>olymerising a resin according to claim 1
which comprises subjecting a layer of the resin on a support to
actinic radiation.
9. The method of claim 8 in which the resin has been applied
to the support in water-borne form.
4,392,931
REACTIVE DEPOSITION METHOD AND APPARATUS
Shmuel Maniv, and William D. Westwood, both of Nepean,
Canada, assignors to Northern Telecom Limited, Montreal,
Canada
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,402
Int. Q.3 C23C 15/00
U.S. Q. 204—192 R 11 Qaims
2
CH2CHCH2i-OOC— R'^— COOR'VOOCC=CH2
R">
where
b represents zero or 1,
e is an integer of average value at least 1,
each R'^ denotes a hydrogen atom or a methyl group,
each R" represents the organic divalent residue of a com-
pound having two glycidyl groups directly attached to an
atom or atoms of oxygen, nitrogen, or sulfur, after re-
moval of the said two glycidyl groups,
each R'2 represents the divalent residue of a dihydric alco-
hol, a dihydric phenol, a saturated dicarboxylic acid of 2
to 8 carbon atoms, or a compound containing two groups
selected from amide groups and imide groups, after re-
moval of two terminal hydrogen atoms attached to an
oxygen or nitrogen atom or atoms,
each R'^ denotes an alkylene group of 1 to 6 carbon atoms,
an alkenylene group of 2 to 10 carbon atoms, an arylene
group of 6 to 10 carbon atoms, or a cycloalkylene or
cycloalkenylene group of 5 to 8 carbon atoms,
each R'"* denotes a divalent aliphatic, cycloaliphatic, or
araliphatic group of 2 to 8 carbon atoms,
with the proviso that at least 25% of the total of the (e-l- 1)
1. Thin film deposition apparatus for reactively sputter de-
positing a film, the apparatus comprising a substrate, a target,
means for directing sputtered target material towards the
substrate, means for directing reactive gas at a present flow
rate to the substrate, an apertured barrier containing a series of
vertical slots intermediate the target and the substrate to limit
passage of the reactive gas to the target and to control the rate
at which target material reaches the substrate, whereby at said
preset reactive gas flow rate to fix the composition of a film
reactively deposited from the target material and the reactive
gas;
and a mounting arrangement comprising a carousel having a
control axis extending in the same direction as the longitu-
dinal extent of said slots, said substrate being contained on
said mounting arrangement whereby rotation of said
mounting arrangement causes a deposition area of said
substrate to move past said slots to ensure uniform deposi-
tion over said deposition area.
674
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4^92,932
METHOD FOR OBTAINING UNIFORM ETCH BY
MODULATING BIAS ON EXTENSION MEMBER
AROUND RADIO FREQUENCY ETCH TABLE
David J. Harra, Santa Cruz, Calif., assignor to Varian Associ-
ates, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Noy. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,386
Int. a.^ C23C 15/00; C23F 1/00
U.S. a. 204—192 E 8 Claims
make it an ancxie, wherein said metal oxide is capable of being
reduced through an oxidase reaction and oxidized electro-
chemically through contact with the electron collector; said
system further comprising a means for applying a constant
potential between said enzyme electrode and said reference
electrode and comprising a means for measuring the variation
of current flowing between the enzyme electrode and the
counter electrode when the system is used to measure the
concentration of a substrate as a result of said electrochemical
reaction, said measured current corresponding to said concen-
tration of enzyme to be measured.
■34 35
4,392,934
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR REPLAONG
CATHODES
Jean F. Viellefont, Herenthout, and Robert P. L. Dierckxsens,
Olen, both of Belgium, assignors to Metallurgie Hoboken-
Overpelt, Brussels, Belgium
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,031
Claims priority, application Luxembourg, Jul. 21, 1980, 82645
Int. a.' C25D 17/08; C25C 7/08; C25D 17/04, 17/06
U.S. a. 204—198 8 Qaims
1. A method for obtaining a uniform etch on a semiconduc-
tor wafer being etched on an RF etch table in a plasma etch
system, comprising,
placing said semiconductor wafer on said RF etch table, said
table having an extension member positioned adjacent its
periphery, said extension member being electrically con-
ductive and being insulated from the structures surround-
ing said table,
generating a plasma above said etch table to thereby etch the
surface of said wafer,
protecting the surface of said extension member from ions
extracted from said plasma to prevent the generation of
unwanted metallic impurities, applying a bias potential to
said extension member whereby the sheath of said plasma
generated above said etch table is extended beyond the
- periphery of said etch table and above at least a portion of
said extension member, and
modulating said bias potential so as to produce a more uni-
form overall etch on said semiconductor wafer.
4,392,933
ELECTROCHEMICAL MEASURING APPARATUS
COMPRISING ENZYME ELECTRODE
Kenichi Nakamura, Hirakata; Shiro Nankai, Neyagawa, and
Takashi lijima, Hirakata, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 90,068, Oct. 31, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,609
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 31, 1978, 53-134784
Int. a.3 C12Q 1/00. 1/26
U.S. a. 204—403 1 Claim
1. An electrochemical measuring system for measuring the
concentration of a substrate in solution comprising a counter
electrode connected to a reference electrode and a solid state
enzyme electrode, said solid state enzyme electrode compris-
ing an electron collector, a metal oxide in intimate contact with
the electron collector and an oxidase immobilized onto said
metal oxide, said electron collector connected to means which
/^
/
/' /
f
i
3.
i
i.
».
1
i
i
i
3.
i
A
1
^9 9--
vL^Q
::3-»
t
f
V-^----'^
-0_ — .
.1
h-^^ '
1
i. _-
1. A process for replacing the cathodes of rectangular cells
in an electrolytic plant in which said cells are positioned side
by side in rows perpendicular to the longitudinal axes of the
cells, each cell having a plurality of sequentially numbered
cathodes suspended vertically at equal distance from one an-
other and perpendicular to the longitudinal axes of the cells,
wherein cathodes having an electrolytic deposit thereon are
removed from said cells and replaced with cathodes from
which said electrolytic deposit has been removed, comprising
the steps of:
(a) lifting a first subgroup comprising the even-numbered
cathodes from a first cell and simultaneously lifting a
second subgroup comprising the odd-numbered cathodes
from a second, adjacent cell while maintaining the orienta-
tion and disposition of said even-numbered and odd-num-
bered cathodes, thereby obtaining two subgroups of cath-
odes offset from one another along the longitudinal axes of
said first and second cells over a distance equal to the
distance between two adjacent cathodes;
(b) conveying said subgroups to a stripping installation while
moving said subgroups perpendicular to the longitudinal
axes of said cells until a collinear unstripped set of cath-
odes is formed from said even-numbered and odd-num-
bered subgroups, said stripping installation having an
entry for cathodes having an electrolytic deposit thereon
to be stripped and an exit for stripped cathodes;
(c) placing said collinear unstripped set of cathodes at the
entry of said stripping installation;
(d) lifting a collinear stripped set of cathodes from the exit of
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
675
said stripping installation, said collinear stripped set hav-
ing sequentially numbered stripped cathodes equal in
number, orientation and disposition to said collinear un-
stripped set;
(e) conveying said collinear stripped set of cathodes to two
adjacent cells while separating said collinear stripped set
into a third subgroup comprising the even-numbered
. cathodes and a fourth subgroup comprising the odd-num-
. bered cathodes of said collinear stripped set, said separat-
ing achieved by moving said third and fourth subgroup
perpendicular to the longitudinal axes of said cells until
said third and fourth subgroups are in the same relative
position as the first and second subgroups of said first and
second cells, respectively; and
(f) simultaneously placing the cathodes of said third and
fourth subgroups in two adjacent cells, from which the
respective even-numbered and odd-numbered cathodes
have been removed, in the positions from which a first and
a second subgroup have been removed.
4,392,936
DEVICE FOR THE GALVANIC DEPOSTHON OF
ALUMINUM
Klaus Stoeger, Nuremberg; Siegfried Birkle, Hikhstadt an der
Aisch, and Johann Gehring, Spardorf, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A
Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,567
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 23,
1980, 3023405
Int. a.3 C25D/ 7/20
U.S. a. 204—213 17 Claims
4,392,935
DISTRIBUTED FORCE INDEXING SYSTEM
Syed A. Husain, San Jose, Calif., assignor to National Semicon-
ductor Corporation, Santa Clara, Calif.
I j Filed Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 426,509
' Int. a.3 C25D 17/00
U.S. CI. 204—206 5 Qaims
so -28 '52 ,S4 26 33 31 3Q,
if a
'«i^^S^
^lf^e^2^
SCOUENCC
TIMINC
PLATING
HEM)
1. In a plating system that intermittently advances a web of
material through plating heads that plate metal onto the web,
an indexing system for intermittently moving the web compris-
ing in combination:
shuttle means adapted for movement back and forth along-
side said web;
hole engaging means connected to said shuttle means in a
position to engage holes in said web;
web grasping means operable to grasp said web over a dis-
tributed area so as to avoid concentrations of force at any
one spot, said grasping means also connected to said shut-
tle means so as to move therewith and with said hole
engaging means;
shuttle moving means operable to move said shuttle with
varying degrees of force; and
sequencing means connected to control said moving means
so as to apply a gentle force to the shuttle when the engag-
ing means is engaging a hole and a greater force to the
shuttle after the grasping means has grasped the web.
1. Apparatus for the galvanic deposition of aluminum from
aprotic, organoaluminum electrolytes which are free of oxy-
gen and water, comprising a galvanizing globe which is clos-
able so as to be gas-tight, an electrolyte container which is in
spaced, adjacent relationship to said galvanizing globe and is
closable so as to be gas-tight, said globe and said container
being connected to one another via a closable, tubular inter-
connecting means which is rotatable about its longitudinal axis
together with said globe and said container, and which is also
counter-currently pivotable about an axis of rotation passing
between said globe and said container to such an extent that a
liquid electrolyte is flowable from said container through said
tubular interconnecting means into said globe and vice versa.
4,392,937
ELECTROLYSIS CELL
Helmut Schmitt; Wolfgang Strewe, both of Dortmund, and Hel-
muth Schurig, Holzwickede, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Uhde GmbH, Dortmund, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 372,099
Int. Q.3 C25B 9/04
U.S. Q. 204—269 6 Qaims
1. An electrolysis cell consisting of a housing with one inlet
676
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
and one outlet for the electrolyte passing through the cell, said
housing accommodating monopolar electrodes, each electrode
consisting of a number of parallel plates fixed to a common
carrier element, the electrodes being arranged in a staggered
pattern so that the plates of one polarity extend into the gaps
formed by the plates of the opposite polarity and at least one
median electrode stack of one polarity with central electric
power input is arranged between two electrode stacks of the
other polarity, characterized in that the median electrode stack
consists of a plurality of electrode plates and a power input
plate of a length substantially equal to said plurality of elec-
trode plates and a width substantially equal to that of the cell;
said electrode plates being welded along one longitudinal side
to said power input plate in a toothed pattern and said power
input plate being joined to one side of wall of said cell housing
and being provided with at least one power input connection.
4,392,938
RADIO FREQUENCY ETCH TABLE WITH BIASED
EXTENSION MEMBER
Dayid J. Harra, Santa Cruz, and Frederick T. Turner, Sunny-
vale, both of Calif., assignors to Varian Associates, Inc., Palo
Alto, Calif.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,385
Int. a.3 C23C 15/00
U.S. a. 204—298 11 Qaims
v^^^^:^-^m^:^::'-^t--
envelope, an anode and a flat cathode comprising a target in
contact with a backing plate behind which means are provided
to form a magnetic field near the target in the envelope, char-
acterized in that the edge of the target is held against the edge
of an aperture in the envelope in a gas-tight manner, said back-
ing plate comprising a number of channels which communicate
with the contact face of the target, the backing plate being held
against the target by means of a vacuum in said channels.
1. An RF etch table for uniformly etching a semiconductor
wafer by sputtering, comprising,
a table structure adapted to receive and hold a generally
circular semiconductor wafer to be subjected to sputter
etching;
an RF power supply electrically connected to said table
structure;
an extension member positioned adjacent the periphery of
said table, said extension rhember being electrically
conductive and being insulated from other conductive
members;
a bias power supply means for applying an electrical poten-
tial to said extension member whereby the plasma gener-
ated above said table structure extends horizontally be-
yond the periphery of said etch table and above at least a
|X>rtion of said extension member; and
a shielding member placed over said extension member, but
not in electrical communication with said extension mem-
ber, whereby said biased extension member is protected
from unwanted sputtering to thereby avoid metallic con-
tamination of said semiconductor wafer.
4,392,940
COAL-OIL SLURRY PREPARATION
John C. Tao, Perkiomenville, Pa., assignor to International Coal
Refining Company, Allentown, Pa.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,690
Int. a.3 ClOG 1/00; ClOL 1/32
U.S. a. 208—8 LE 12 Claims
1. A process for producing a pumpable coal/oil slurry prod-
uct, useful as a liquid fuel, from pulverized sulfur-containing
coal which comprises the steps of:
(1) subjecting said pulverized coal to gravity separation to
provide
(a) a highest density refuse portion comprising the major
portion of the ash and sulfur content of the coal feed,
(b) a middlings coal portion of lower ash and sulfur con-
tent than said high density portion, and
(c) a deep-cleaned lowest density coal portion having a
sulfur content of less than about 1%;
(2) subjecting said highest density refuse portion to gasifica-
tion by partial combustion in oxygen
(a) thereby obtaining a crude gas product comprising
hydrogen, oxides of carban, hydrogen sulfide and
steam, thereafter
(b) subjecting said crude gas product to a water gas shift
reaction in the presence of steam and over sulfur-resist-
ant catalyst, to convert contained carbon monoxide to
carbon dioxide with accompanying further production
of hydrogen, and
(c) removing said carbon dioxide and hydrogen sulfide
from the products of said shift reaction to recover a
purified hydrogen-rich gas;
(3) introducing said middlings coal portion into a liquefac-
tion zone and treating the same with a coal derived sol-
vent and with said purified hydrogen-rich gas under con-
ditions of elevated temperature and pressure, thereby
effecting liquefaction of said middlings coal portion to
produce a coal derived, benzene soluble hydrocarbon oil
distillate;
(4) slurrying said deep-cleaned coal portion of lowest den-
sity from step (1) with said coal derived hydrocarbon oil
of step (3) to provide said coal/oil slurry product.
4,392,939
MAGNETRON CATHODE SPUTTERING SYSTEM
Jacobus E. Crombeen; Petnis W. H. M. Crooymans, and Jan
Visser, all of Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Phil-
ips Corporation, New York^ N.Y.
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,948
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 5, 1982,
8200902
Int. C\? C23C 15/00
MS. CI. 204—298 4 Claims
1. A magnetron cathode sputtering system comprising, in an
432,941
RECOVERY OF BITUMEN FROM TAR SANDS SLUDGE
USING ADDITIONAL WATER
Robert B. Roth, Woodlyn, and Walter H. Seitzer, West Chester,
both of Pa., assignors to Suncor, Inc., Toronto, Canada
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,616
Claims priority, application Canada, Jul. 28, 1980, 357137
Int. C\? ClOG 1/00
U.S. a. 208—11 LE 3 Claims
1. The method of recovering bitumen from a sludge obtained
from a retention pond containing tailings from the water ex-
traction of tar sands, which comprises diluting the sludge with
water, wherein the dilution range is between about 1 part
water to 10 parts sludge and about 2 parts water to one part
sludge, subjecting the diluted sludge to high-shear agitation
and aeration, wherein during the high-shear agitation the di-
luted sludge is experiencing a Reynolds Number in excess of
10,000 and settling the resulting sludge to obtain an upper
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
677
bitumen-containing froth layer and a lower sludge layer re-
duced in bitumen content, whereby the recovery of bitumen is
greater than that obtained with aeration and mixing with mild
agitation or with aeration alone or with agitation alone.
4,392,942
MODIHED STAGED TURBULENT BED PROCESS FOR
RETORTING CARBON CONTAINING SOLIDS
P. Henrik Wallman, Berkeley, and Byron G. Spars, Mill Valley,
both of Calif., assignors to Chevron Research Company, San
Francisco, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 187,858, Sep. 17, 1980. This
application Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,297
Int. a.3 ClOG 7/00
U.S. a. 208—11 R 13 Qaims
vide substantially complete pyrolysis of said carbon con-
taining solids;
passing a second stripping gas through the second retort
zone to strip hydrocarbonaceous vapors from the retorted
solids;
withdrawing exhausted first stripping gas from the top of
said first retort zone;
withdrawing exhausted second stripping gas and hydrocar-
bonaceous vapors from said second retort zone; and
withdrawing heat transfer particles and retorted solids from
said second retort zone.
4,392,943
PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR WITHDRAWING SOLID
PARTICLES AND INTRODUONG A LIQUID CHARGE
AT THE LOWER PORTION OF A CONTACT ZONE
Jean-Paul Euzen, Ecully; Yves Jacquin, Sevres, both of France,
and Hugo Van Landeghem, deceased, late of Oytier Saint
Oblas, France by Renate Van Landeghem-Heynderickx,
executor, assignors to Institut Francais du Petroie, Rueil-
Malmaison, France
Filed Apr. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 373,183
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 29, 1981, 81 08761
Int. a.3 ClOB 31/02, 31/12
U.S. a. 208—152 16 Claims
—1
— 3
ei:
13. A continuous process for retorting a particulate carbon
containing solid which comprises:
passing heat transfer particles at an elevated temperature and
raw carbon containing solid downwardly through a first
retort zone;
passing a first stripping gas upwardly through said first
retort zone;
maintaining the size of the heat transfer particles and the size
of the particles of raw carbon containing solid such that a
portion of the raw carbon containing solid are fluidized,
and a portion of the particles of raw carbon containing
solid and at least a portion of the heat transfer particles are
nonfluidized in said first retort zone;
substantially limiting gross vertical backmixing and slugging
of the particles within the first retort zone by passing said
downwardly moving particles through a plurality of baf-
fles in said first retort zone;
providing sufficient residence time in the first retort zone for
the heavier nonfluidized particles of carbon containing
solid to be substantially heated to retorting temperatures;
passing said heat transfer particles and said heated carbon
containing solid particles from the bottom of said first
retort zone to a second, non-fluidized, retort zone;
maintaining the particles of carbon containing solid in said
second retort zone for a residence time sufficient to pro-
1. In a process for introducing into a reaction zone, contain-
ing catalyst particles, a fluid charge consisting essentially of at
least one liquid and one gas of high hydrogen content, said
zone having substantially an elongate and substantially vertical
cylindrical shape, with the catalyst particles being introduced
at the upper part of said reaction zone and progressively with-
drawn from the lower part of the reaction zone after progres-
sing downwardly through said reaction zone, with the fluid
charge being introduced at least partly in the lower part of said
reaction zone and withdrawn from the upper part thereof after
progressing upwardly through said reaction zone, and wherein
the catalyst particles are withdrawn from the lower end of at
least one flared zone having the shape of an inverted cone or
pyramid with the top thereof turned downwardly, the average
angle between the axis of the cone or pyramid and one of the
cone generatrices or one of the pyramid solid angles being
from 10°-80°, the downwardly turned top having at least one
opening of a size sufficient for discharging the catalyst parti-
cles, and the walls of said flared zone being substantially and
regularly discontinuous by having at least a plurality of regu-
larly spaced openings of a sufficient small size to prevent the
catalyst particles from passing through said walls, but suffi-
ciently large enough to permit passage, through said openings,
of an upward stream of at least a part of the fluid charge, the
improvement wherein at least a portion of the fluid charge is
injected in the lower part of said reaction zone through a main
pipe which is subdivided into a plurality of pipes arranged
substantially vertically inside the reaction zone, and each of
said pipes having orifices at the ends thereof, said onfices being
located either above said walls or below said walls of said
cone, or one or more orifices located above and one or more
orifices located below said walls, with each orifice being lo-
cated at a distance from said walls of said one at least equal to
the average size of the catalyst particles fed into the reaction
678
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
zone and at most equal to about 500 times the average size of
said catalyst particles.
6. In an apparatus for carrying out a process for withdraw-
ing solid particles and introducing a liquid charge at the lowest
portion of a contact zone, comprising a reactor (1), first intro-
ducing means (2) for introducing fresh catalyst at the upper
part of the reactor, first discharge means for discharging used
catalyst at the lower part of said reactor, with said first dis-
charge means comprising at least one withdrawal funnel (4) of
an inverted conical or pyramidal shape, with the angle be-
tween the axis of the cone or of the pyramid with one of the
generatrices of the cone or one of the solid angles of the
pyramid being 10°-80° and with the top of the cone or pyramid
oriented downwardly, at least one opening (5) sufficiently
large for permitting discharge of used catalyst from the reac-
tor, and located at said downwardly oriented top, second
introducing means (8) for introducing a fluid charge at the
lower part of the reactor and second discharge means (10) for
discharging a treated fluid charge from the upper part of the
reactor, the walls of said withdrawing funnel (4) having perfo-
rations (6) substantially distributed over the surface of said
funnel, with the size of said perforations being sufficiently
small to prevent the passage of catalyst particles through said
walls, but sufficiently large to provide for passage through said
walls of an upward stream of at least a portion of a fiuid charge
introduced into the apparatus, the improvement wherein said
second introducing means (8) for introducing the fiuid charge
comprises a plurality of substantially vertical ducts (9) pro-
vided with orifices (11) for introducing at least a portion of the
fluid charge, said orifices being located either above or below,
or both above and below said walls of said cone or pyramid,
and at a distance from said walls of said cone or pyramid at
least equal to the average size of catalyst particles to be intro-
duced and at most equal to about 10 cm.
dewatering the water-in-oil emulsion to recover said oil
therefrom, and
recovering an aqueous sodium medium containing at least a
major proportion of said sodium hydroxide from said
emulsion inversion and dewatering steps.
4,392,944
ALKALI RECYCLE PROCESS FOR RECOVERY OF
HEAVY OILS AND BITUMENS
Michael A. Kessick, Edmonton, Canada, assignor to Research
Council of Alberta, Edmonton, Canada
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 157,935
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 8, 1979,
7919999
Int. CI.3 ClOG 33/04
U.S. a. 208—188 11 aaims
"1 Co lOMIj
4,392,945
TWO-STAGE HYDROREFINING PROCESS
Kent A. Howard, and Duane A. Goetsch, both of Baton Rouge,
La., assignors to Exxon Research and Engineering Co., Flor-
ham Park, N.J.
Filed Feb. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 346,173
Int. CI.5 ClOG 45/06, 45/08
U.S. a. 208—210 11 Claims
1. A two-stage hydrorefining process which comprises:
(a) contacting a sulfur-containing heavy hydrocarbonaceous
oil feed comprising at least about 0.30 wt. % of an organic
sulfur compound selected from the group consisting of
dibenzothiophene, dibenzothiophene derivatives, substi-
tuted dibenzothiophene and mixtures thereof, with hydro-
gen in the presence of a nickel-containing hydrorefining
catalyst in a first hydrorefining stage maintained at hydro-
refining conditions, including a temperature ranging from
about 600° to 850° F. and a total pressure ranging from
about 60 to 3500 psig, to produce a first hydrorefining
stage effluent, including a partially hydrodesulfurized oil,
hydrogen sulfide and ammonia;
(b) removing at least a portion of said hydrogen sulfide and
said ammonia from said first hydrorefining stage effluent;
(c) contacting at least a portion of the resulting hydrorefin-
ing stage effluent, including said partially hydrodesulfu-
rized oil, with hydrogen in the presence of a cobalt-con-
taining hydrorefining catalyst in a second hydrorefining
stage to produce a hydrocarbonaceous oil having a lower
sulfur content than the sulfur content of the partially
desulfurized oil of said first hydrorefining stage, and
(d) recovering a hydrorefined oil having a lower content of
said organic sulfur compound than said oil feed of step (a).
/ r n^
( tMUlSKW I I
'-TlSePABAIONr^
4,392,946
HYDRODESULFURIZATION OF HYDROCARBONS
WITH FLUORIDED PLATINUM
John H. Estes, Wappingers Falls, and Sheldon Herbstman,
Spring Valley, both of N.Y., assignors to Texaco Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330,108
Int. a.3 ClOG 45/10
U.S. a. 208—217 15 Qalms
1. A process for the hydrogen desulfurization of a hydrocar-
bon fraction comprising olefinic, aromatic and sulfur com-
pounds comprising the step of contacting said hydrocarbon
fraction with hydrogen gas and a fluorided platinum catalyst in
the presence of an oxygen-containing hydrogenation modera-
tor selected from the group consisting of water, and oxygen-
containing materials which are hydrogenatable to water and
whose hydrogenation products will not poison the platinum
catalyst, said hydrogenation moderator being present in a
quantity sufficient to minimize the saturation of the olefinic and
aromatic compounds by the hydrogen gas and the fluorided
catalyst.
1. A process for the recovery of oil, which comprises:
contacting a crude oil having an API gravity value of less
than 25° C. and containing groups capable of forming
surfactants with water containing at least sufficient so-
dium hydroxide to provide a pH of the water of at least
about 11 so as to form an oil-in-water emulsion having a
concentration of about 10 to about 60 wt. % of the crude
oil,
contacting said oil-in-water emulsion with slaked lime in an
amount of about 0.02 to about 1 wt. % of the oil in said
oil-in-water emulsion and sufficient to invert said oil-in-
water emulsion to form a water-in-oil emulsion,
4,392,947
INTEGRATED REHNING PROCESS
Costandi A. Audeh, Princeton, and Saverio G. Greco, Princeton
Junction, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
FUed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,047
Int. a.5 ClOG 79/00, 19/02. 19/08. 45/00
U.S. a. 208—229 12 Claims
1. A method for refining a hydrocarbon distillate fraction
having sulfur-containing compounds comprising:
washing said distillate fraction with a first aqueous alkaline
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
679
solution to remove acidic materials and mercaptans that
form soluble and easily removable alkaline metal mercap-
tides;
treating the distillate fraction resulting from said washing
with a [^thalocyanine catalyst in the presence of a second
aqueous alkaline solution and oxygen so that the mercapto
compounds contained in said fraction are oxidized to form
innocuous disulfides;
incinerating spent alkaline solution resulting from said wash-
ing in the presence of oxygen and introducing a sufficient
amount of sulfur-containing gas to convert the alkaline
material to the corresponding sulfate.
1 1 4,392,948
PROCESS FOR REMOVING THE NITROGEN
IMPURITIES FROM A HYDROCARBON MIXTURE
Guy F. S. Debande, Brussels, Belgium, assignor to Laboflna,
S.A., Brussels, Belgium
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 155,722, Jun. 2, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,408
Qaims priority, application Luxenabourg, Jul. 6, 1979, 81472
Int. a.3 ClOG 31/08. 17/06
U.S. a. 208—254 R 14 Qaims
1. A process for removing nitrogen impurities from a mix-
ture of liquid hydrocarbons containing polymerizable unsatu-
rated hydrocarbons, which process comprises the steps of:
continuously introducing a dilute aqueous acid solution into
a low volume mixer, said solution having an acid concen-
tration of from 0.01 to 5 volume percent;
continuously introducing the mixture of liquid hydrocarbons
into said mixer, the volume ratio of the amount of liquid
hydrocarbons to the amount of aqueous acid solution
being from about 0.3 to about 13;
forming in the mixer an emulsion of the hydrocarbons in said
aqueous acid solution by mixing during a period of time
not exceeding 2 seconds the acid solution and the hydro-
carbons, thereby extracting the major part of the nitrogen
impurities;
withdrawing the resultant emulsion into a decantation zone
where the emulsion breaks and phase separation occurs;
recovering the hydrocarbon phase containing not more than
2 ppm of basic nitrogen impurities from the decantation
zone;
recycling from 80 to 95% by volume of the used aqueous
acid solution phase to the low volume mixer;
withdrawing the remainder of said used aqueous acid solu-
tion phase as a purge; and
adding a sufficient volume of fresh acid solution in order to
maintain in the low volume mixer the volume ratio of the
liquid hydrocarbon mixture to the aqueous acid solution at
its initial value, the concentration of said fresh acid solu-
tion being such that the pH of the aqueous acid solution i$
from about 0.1 to about 1.5.
selected from the group consisting of water, steam and
combinations thereof into said rotating drum thereby
forming an oil sand slurry containing dispersed bitumen
particles
(c) causing said slurry to come into contact with the inner
surface and protrusions of said drum as it rotates such that
»>J K— •
^.y'
dispersed bitumen particles adhere to the oleophilic por-
tion of said surfaces and unite to form coatings thereon
and which slough off back into said slurry in the form of
larger dispersed bitumen phase particles, and
(d) removing said slurry containing said larger bitumen
particles from said drum for subsequent separation of
bitumen phase from the continuous aqueous phase.
4,392,950
CENTRIFUGAL TYPE CLEANER
James P. Beery, Springfield, Ohio, assignor to The Bauer Bros.
Co., Springfield, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 827,066, Aug. 23, 1977, abandoned.
This application Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,471
Int. a.3 B04C 5/14
U.S. a. 209—211 11 Claims
4,392,949
CONDITIONING DRUM FOR SLURRIES AND
EMULSIONS
Jan Kniyer, 4643-82 Ave., Edmonton, Alberta, Canada (T6B
2L9)
Filed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,001
Qaims priority, application Canada, Aug. 15, 1979, 333831
Int. a.3 B03B 1/00. 5/56; B03D 3/06; ClOG 1/04
U.S. Q. 209—5 31 Qaims
1. A method for producing a slurry from mined oil sand
consisting of a dispersed bitumen phase and a continuous aque-
ous phase and increasing the particles size of dispersed bitumen
phase particles in said slurry which comprises the steps of
(a) introducing an oil sand into a generally horizontal rotat-
ing drum having protrusions extending inwardly from the
interior thereof wherein at least a portion of said interior
and inwardly extending protrusions have oleophilic sur-
faces,
(b) introducing concurrently with the oil sand a member
1. Apparatus for centrifugally separating and/or cleaning
the solids content of a fiber pulp slurry comprising means
defining an axially extended separating chamber including, at
one end of said chamber, inlet means for introducing a pulp
slurry in a vortex type flow pattern and a first axial outlet, said
chamber means further comprising a bounding wall surface
including a portion tapering toward a second axial outlet at an
end opposite said one end of said chamber, a further outlet
comprising an annular opening interrupting said Upering por-
tion of said bounding wall surface, means defining a generally
planar annular surface facing said one end of said chamber and
presenting an obstruction to a substantial segment of said vor-
tex flow and defining an edge portion of said annular opening
remote from said one end, the inner diameter of said annular
surface comprising a resumption of said tapering portion of
said bounding wall surface and the outer diameter of said
annular surface being at least as large as the diameter of said
bounding wall surface as it tapers to said annular opening.
680
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
432,951
SCREEN nLTER
Toshiyuki Omori, and Kunihiro Abe, both of Kitakyushu, Japan,
assignors to Kao Soap Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,393
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1979, 54-106526;
Not. 10, 1980, 55-158552
Int. a.3 BOID 33/14
U.S. a. 209—307 12 Oaims
— ^^i" ■'^
^ ^/-f
-/y
^^^.„....
1. A screen filter comprising:
a plurality of rollers arranged in parallel, spaced relationship;
carriers positioned between said rollers with the axes of said
carriers parallel to the axes of said rollers;
a wire extending past and wound spirally over said rollers and
engaging the surfaces of said carriers; and
driving means for engaging at least one of said rollers for
driving said wire, including means for periodically alternat-
ing, in a predetermined time cycle, the direction of driving
of said wire to effectively prevent clogging thereof.
path of movement from a fully extended position to a first
folded position which correspond to said first and second
positions, respectively, of said rake and a lower stop means
mounted in the path of movement of said foldable lever assem-
bly, said lower stop means for engaging and moving said fold-
able lever assembly from said first folded position to an inter-
mediate folded position at the end of the downward movement
of said carriage and before said lever assembly reaches said
fully extended position with said rake being retained in said
second position of disengagement during downward move-
ment of said carriage and being pivoted by the change of
position of said lever assembly into a partially engaged position
until said lever assembly is moved to said fully extended posi-
tion, a stop member means mounted near the lowermost point
of travel of said lever assembly for engaging and pivoting said
lever assembly to its fully extended position only during up-
ward movement and after commencement of upward move-
ment of said carriage and after said lever assembly has been
moved into said intermediate folded position by said lower
stop means, said stop member means also for providing that
movement of said rake into said first position of engagement
with said screen is only completed after commencement of
upward movement of said carriage and said rake is positively
retained in the position of engagement with said screen while
said lever assembly is in said fully extended position.
4,392,952
BAR SCREEN WITH SCREEN CLEANER FOR WASTE
WATER TREATMENT INSTALLATIONS
Leonhard Fechter, Kulmbach, and Hubert Jung, Hadamar, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Passavant-Werke Mi-
chelbacher Huette, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,883
Int. a.3 C02C 1/22
U.S. a. 210—159 4 Qaims
4,392,953
AQUARIUM FILTRATION APPARATUS
Douglas P. Cornelius, Brooklyn Park, and Charles G. Erickson,
Anoka, both of Minn., assignors to Cornelius Products Inc.,
Brooklyn Center, Minn.
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,072
Int. a.J E04H 3/20; BOID 35/02
U.S. a. 210—169 1 aaim
!(///////////
1. In a bar screen with a screen cleaner for waste water
treatment installations, embodying a carriage cooperating with
means for movement upwardly and downwardly in guides
extending parallel to said screen, a rake for cleaning said screen
pivotally connected to said carriage by pivot arms with said
rake being pivotable by means of said pivot arms between a
first position of engagement with said screen and a second
position of disengagement with and spaced from said screen, a
foldable lever assembly pivotally connected to said carriage
and pivotally connected to said pivot arms and movable in a
,-4 ^^'
1. A power driven cleaning device for an aquarium tank
having a rim, comprising:
(a) a body adapted to be suspended in the tank on the rim of
the tank, and including an impeller housing portion and a
filter housing portion, for both extending into the tank;
(b) a motor supported on said body above the rim;
(c) an impeller rotatably supported in said impeller housing
portion and having a drive connection with said motor;
(d) said filter housing portion having a shallow rectangular
nest open along its longer sides and flatwise receptive of a
flat sheet of filter media;
(e) a removable cover for fixedly holding said filter media in
place, said cover being rectangular and having a flat mar-
ginal portion corresponding in length and width to said
longer sides of said nest and disposed in said nest for
engaging one side of the flat filter media at its periphery;
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
681
(0 a plurality of spring clips embracing the edge portions of 4,392,955
said cover and said filter housing portion; LIQUID TREATMENT APPARATUS
(g) means on said cover and said body defining a flow pas- Alfonse J. Soriente, Gillette, N.J., assignor to Ecodyne Corpora-
sage leading from a water inlet through said filter media,
to said itnpeller, to a water outlet.
5 Qaims
tion, Union, N.J.
Filed Dec. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 107,007
Int. Q\} BOID 19/04: C02B l/W
U.S. Q. 210—195.4
4,392,954
SEWAGE VENTILATING BASIN
Hans Bertschinger, Diibendorf, and Alfred Scherler, Reidholz,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Locher & Cie. AG, Zurich
and Cellulose Attisholz AG., Luterach, both of, Switzerland
Filed Feb. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 11,890
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 16, 1978,
1717/78 I
' Int. Q.3 C02F 3/22
U.S. Q. 210—195.3 7 Qaims
16 10 32 26 Si-, 29 10 31^34
7. A sewage ventilating basin for use in a sewage treatment
plant, comprising:
a vertically elongated sewage container;
at least one substantially cylindrical tube connecting the
upper, or surface-water, zone of said elongated container
with the bottom, or deepest-water, zone of said container;
pump means for producing a downwardly directed flow in
each said tube in order to maintain sewage circulation in
the container when in use;
gas introduction means, disposed in an upper part of each
said tube, for introducing fine bubbles of air or oxygen
thereinto, said gas introduction means comprising at least
one downwardly directed tapered wall portion in a the
form of a venturi tube, and an air and/or oxygen inlet
connecting piece terminating in said upper part of said
tube whereby, due to the suction effect caused by the
injection principle, the air and/or oxygen is introduced
into the flow within said tube adjacent said venturi;
residual sludge recycling means for recycling residual sludge
to said sewage ventilating basin, said residual sludge recy-
cling means comprising a second venturi-shaped tapered
wall portion in said upper part of said elongated tube, and
residual sludge introduction means including a residual
sludge line terminating in said upper part of said tube
adjacent said second venturi-shaped Upered wall portion
whereby residual sludge is caused to be sucked into the
flow within said tube; and
control means for maintaining the flow velocity of the sew-
age, in each said tube directly below said upper part
thereof, higher than the uplift velocity of the gas bubbles
suspended in the flow at the same point, when in use.
1032 0.<ti.— 26
1. Liquid treating apparatus comprising:
A. a tank having a treated liquid outlet adjacent its upper end
and a settled solids outlet adjacent its bottom, a rotatable
rake adjacent the bottom of said tank for moving settled
solids toward said settled solids outlet, and power-driven
vertical shaft means coaxial with the center of said tank
connected to said rake for rotating said rake;
B. a generally circular, open-ended vertical updraft tube of
predetermined diameter surrounding and coaxial with said
shaft means, the lower end of said tube terminating above
*"" said rake, the upper end of said tube terminating below the
upper surface of the liquid in said tank, an upwardly di-
rected untreated liquid inlet nozzle within said tube,
means connecting said nozzle to a pressurized source of
untreated liquid for causing such untreated liquid from
said nozzle to flow rapidly up and out of said upper end of
said tube and thereby to draw settled solids into said lower
end of said tube and through said tube where such solids
mix with such untreated liquid;
C. generally circular baffle means surrounding and coaxial
with said tube, the upper end of said baffle means extend-
ing above the upper surface of the liquid in said tank, and
the lower end of said baffle means terminating above said
lower end of said tube, said baffle means defining a solids
mixing and recirculation zone in said tank surrounding
said tube; and
D. means for controlling the amount of settled solids drawn
upwardly into said tube comprising a substantially flat
circular disc coaxial with said tube, said disc being con-
structed and arranged so that it is always positioned above
and entirely outside of said tube in the flow path of liquid
leaving said tube upper end, said shaft means passing
through the center of said disc, and means outside of said
tube for moving said disc vertically toward and away
from said tube upper end, whereby the upward flow of
settled solids in said tube is controlled by the vertical
position of said disc outside of said tube.
4,392,956
ENCAPSULATED FRAME TYPE HLTER PRESS
George P. Vogel, Kingston, N.Y., assignor to SUvo Industries,
Inc., Kingston, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,219
Int. Q.3 BOID 25/14
U.S. Q. 210—224 8 Claims
1. An encapsulated frame-type filter press, said press includ-
ing an upwardly opening tank having interconnected opposite
side and end walls, a first stationary filter head mounted in one
end of said tank, a second movable head mounted in the other
end of said tank and adjustably shiftable toward and away from
said first head, a plurality of alternating filter panels and filter
682
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
frames releasably clamped between said heads, said first head
including inlet and outlet passages formed therethrough for
inlet and outlet flow of fluid to be filtered to and from said
filter panels and frames, a downwardly opening cover for said
tank including interconnected opposite side and end walls, the
lower marginal set of edges of said cover side and end walls
and the upper marginal set of edges of said tank side and end
walls being positionable in juxtaposed relation for closing said
tank, support means swingably supporting said cover from said
tank for forward and downward swinging of said cover into
position closing said tank and upward and rearward swinging
of said cover toward and an open position with said cover
upwardly and rearwardly displaced relative to said tank and
disposed in a forwardly and downwardly opening attitude, one
third position the blades are again in vertical pairs, either in the
same or in different pairs from the original position.
4,392,958
METHOD AND STRUCTURE FOR SEALING TUBULAR
nLTER ELEMENTS
Gary C. Ganzi, Lexington, and Charles T. Paul, Westford, both
of Mass., assignors to Millipore Corporation, Bedford, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 121,561, Feb. 14, 1980. This application
Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,803
Int. a.3 BOID 27/06
U.S. a. 210—493.2 7 Qaims
of said sets of edges including seal means for forming at least a
generally fluid-tight seal with the other set of edges when said
cover is in the closed position, said support means including a
lift frame pivotably supported from said tank for oscillation
relative thereto about a first horizontal axis extending longitu-
dinally of said tank and stationary relative to said tank and
frame, means supporting said cover from said frame for slight
limited oscillation relative thereto about a second horizontal
axis extending longitudinally of said tank, said end walls of said
tank including generally isoclinal trapezoidal-shaped upper
extensions and said end walls of said cover including comple-
mentary similar shape and size downwardly opening recesses
in which said extensions are received when said cover is
closed.
1. In a tubular filter element comprising a pleated micropo-
rous membrane disposed for fluid flow therethrough from its
upstream side to its downstream side and having its ends sealed
in solidified liquid sealer, the improvement wherein each end
of the membrane on its upstream side includes a barrier strip of
non-porous pleated film, one portion of the strip being joined
fluid-tight to the membrane and the other portion being free
from the membrane to permit relative movement therebe-
tween, the solidified sealer terminating on the other portion of
the film and sealing fluid-tight to the film and downstream side
of the membrane, whereby the membrane may flex away from
a portion of the strip in response to upstream pressure.
to
4,392,957
ANTI-POLLUTION EQUIPMENT
Michael G. Webb, Wootton Bridge, England, assignor
Vikoma International Limited, Isle of Wight, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 125,515, Feb. 28, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 281,932
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 6, 1979,
7907834
Int. a.^ BOID 77/00
U.S. a. 210—241 4 Claims
1. A device suitable for recovering viscous material derived
from petroleum comprises a plurality of pairs of blades, each
blade being pivotally mounted at either end, and the pivots on
at least one end being connected to an actuating rod or rods, so
that the position of the pivots can be moved substantially at
right angles to the width of the blades, the blades and rods
being arranged to operate in such a manner that in a first
position, the pairs of blades are in a vertical position, adjacent
to one another but remote from other pairs, in a second posi-
tion the blades form a series of V-shaped containers and in a
4,392,959
PROCESS FOR STERILIZATION AND REMOVAL OF
INORGANIC SALTS FROM A WATER STREAM
Dudley W. Coillet, 319 Trapelo Rd., Belmont, Mass. 02178
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,869
Int. a.3 BOID li/02
U.S. a. 210—638 31 Qaims
1. A process for the desalination of unpotable feedwater
comprising the steps of:
(a) decarbonating said feedwater by adding sodium hydrox-
ide to said feedwater in a quantity sufficient to raise the
pH level to at least about 9.5 but no greater than 1 1 to
thereby convert substantially bicarbonate to carbonate
and to precipitate said carbonate substantially as calcium
carbonate in a sludge and a supernatant saline stream;
(b) separating the thus-formed sludge from the supernatant
saline stream in a clarifier;
(c) subjecting the separated supernatant saline stream to first
stage reverse osmosis across a membrane to produce a first
stage permeate stream and a first stage sodium chloride
brine stream, whereby multivalent cations at least are
subsUntially rejected into the latter and a portion of the
monovalent cations and of the water from the saline feed
are preferentially retained as first stage permeate; and
July 12, 19fe3
CHEMICAL
683
(d) subjecting the first stage permeate stream to second stage
reverse osmosis to form a second stage permeate stream of
ioo-»
1 Tmcufiiio st.>w»
4,392,%1
MAGNESIUM ALUMINATE ANION EXCHANGERS
John M. Lee, and William C. Bauman, both of Lake Jackson,
Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Co., Midland, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 183,907, Sep. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,326,%1, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 71,920,
Aug. 31, 1980, Pat. No. 4,243,555, which is a division of Ser. No.
939,544, Sep. 5, 1978, Pat. No. 4,183,900, which is a division of
Ser. No. 812,542, Jul. 5, 1977, Pat. No. 4,116,857. This
application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,717
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 27,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q\? BOIJ 41/02
U.S. a. 210—679 7 Qaims
1. A method for removing negative-valent ions or radicals
from aqueous medium, said method comprising
contacting said aqueous medium with crystalline Mg(OH)2.
.nAl(OH)3.mH20, where n is a value of from about 1 to
about 2 and m is a value of zero or more, and
- where the crystalline Mg(OH)2.nAl(OH)3.mH20 is sup-
ported by a substrate,
thereby exchanging OH ions in the said crystalline material
with the said negative-valence ions or radicals.
4,392,962
PROCESS FOR SEPARATING METALS FROM
AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS
Klaus Lehr, Hiirth-Knapsack; Gero Heymer; Christian May,
both of Erftstadt, and Hermann Klein, Hiirth, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,736
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 13,
1980, 3042724
Int. CI.' C02F 1/62
U.S. Q. 210—688 9 Qaims
1. A process for separating a seminoble or noble metal, from
an aqueous solution having a compound of a said metal dis-
solved therein, which comprises: passing said solution through
a column subdivided into a plurality of zones, a lower zone
containing a layer of active carbon particles having a size of
0.01 to 10 mm and an upper zone containing a layer of granular
red phosphorus having a size of 0.01 to 10 mm.
potable water and a second stage sodium chloride brine
stream.
4,392,960
PROCESS FOR THE REMOVAL OF UREA FROM
AQUEOUS SOLUTIONS
Menahem A. Kraus; Moshe A. Frommer, both of Rehovot; Mara
Nemas, Neve Monoson, and Rodika Gutman, Kiryat Sharet,
all of Israel, assignors to A. T. Ramot Plastics, Ltd., Tel-Aviv,
Israel
Filed Jan. 27, 1976, Ser. No. 652,812
Qaims priority, application Israel, Jan. 27, 1975, 46510; Jul.
15, 1975, 47709
Int. Q.3 BOID li/00
U.S. Q. 210—651 1 Claim
1. A process for the removal of urea from an aqueous solu-
tion containing same, wherein a removal equivalent to a rejec-
tion of at least 60% from a urea concentration of 5,000 ppm
and at 600 psi operating pressure is achieved, which comprises
subjecting the solution to reverse osmosis through a polymeric
membrane produced from a polymer obuined by the polymer-
ization of m-phenylenediamine, 3,3'-diamino-N,N',N"-triphe-
nyl phosphoric triamide and isophthaloyl chloride.
4,392,963
RESORCINOL OR PHLOROGLUCINOL
CONDENSATION PRODUCT FOR AQUEOUS MIXTURE
PURIFICATION
Horst Perl; Dietmar Nussbaumer, both of Gottingen; Horst
Kliiver, Dransfeld, and Hans Beer, Gottingen, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Sartorius GmbH, Gottingen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,957
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 26,
1980, 3011739
Int. Q.3 C02C 5/02: BOID 15/00
U.S. Q. 210—692 16 Qaims
1. A process for removing urea, ammonia, phenols and
formaldehyde from an aqueous liquid, comprising:
contacting said aqueous liquid with an incompletely con-
densed phenol/aldehyde resin having a large surface area,
said incompletely condensed phenol/aldehyde resin com-
prising a condensation product of an aldehyde and resor-
cinol or phloroglucinol, said incompletely condensed
phenol/aldehyde resin having free methylol groups in the
ortho-position relative to the phenol hydroxyl group.
684
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,964
COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD FOR THICKENING
AQUEOUS BRINES
Roy F. House, Houston, and Lonnie D. Hoover, Chappell Hill,
both of Tex., assignors to NL Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
FUed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,286
Int. CIJ C09K 7/02; E21B 43/00
U.S. a. 252—8.5 C 12 Qaims
1. A well servicing fluid comprising:
an aqueous brine having a density of at least 1 1.7 ppg; and
a polymeric composition comprising from about 5 to about
30% by weight of hydroxyethyl cellulose, at least about
40% by weight of isopropanol, and from about 3 to about
40% by weight of an aqueous liquid, wherein said isopro-
panol, when uniformly mixed with said hydroxyethyl
cellulose in a weight ratio of hydroxyethyl cellulose to
organic liquid of 1:2, produces a mixture with free liquid
present after remaining quiescent for one week at ambient
temperature in a sealed container.
4,392,965
LAUNDRY SOFTENER ANTISTATIC COMPOSITION
Fred E. Woodward, 200 Churchill Rd., West Palm Beach, Fla.
33405, and Alice P. Hudson, 728 W. Kalmia Dr., Lake Park,
Fla. 33403
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,169
Int. a.3 D06M 13/46; CUD 1/52. 3/26. 3/28
U.S. a. 252—8.8 13 Qaims
1. A laundry softener-antistatic composition which is a
water insoluble organic salt of carboxylate anions and quater-
nary ammonium cations of the structure
Rl— N— R3
I
R4
O
II
OC— R5
wherein Ri and R2 are straight or branched chain alkyl or
alkenyl containing 12 to 22 carbon atoms and may be the
same or different, and R3 and R4 are methyl, ethyl, or
propyl; R5 is
(a) straight or branched chain alkyl or alkenyl containing
10 to 22 carbon atoms, or
OH
I
CH3(CH2)„CH-(CH2)„-
wherein n +m is about 7 to 19, or
(b)
(c)
Re— Y— C— Z—
wherein R(, is straight or branched chain alkyl or alke-
nyl containing 10 to 26 carbon atoms; Y is O, NH, or S,
and Z is — CH=CH— , — CH2— CH2— ,
wherein X is O or NH, R7 is straight or branched chain
alkenyl or alkyl containing 8 to 18 carbon atoms, and
Rg is straight or branched chain alkyl or alkenyl con-
taining 10 to 22 carbon atoms; or
Rio
'N
-1 +
I II
CH2CH2NHC— R9
u.
1 0C-R5
wherein R9 is straight or branched chain alkyl or alkenyl
containing 11 to 21 carbon atoms; Rio is methyl, ethyl, or
propyl; and R5 is as described above.
4,392,966
MOLYBDENUM-ZINC DIALKYLDITHIOPHOSPHATES
AS LUBRICANT ADDITIVES
Raymond C. Schlicht, Fishkill, N.Y., assignor to Texaco Inc.,
White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,570
Int. a.3 ClOM 1/54. 1/48
U.S. a. 252—32.7 E n Qaims
1. An oil soluble lubricant additive having the generic for-
mula:
ZnMo20;c[S2P(OR)2]^
wherein x=0-3; y = 6 to 12 and R is a straight-chained or
branched hydrocarbyl group having from 3 to 30 carbon atoms
or a mixture of at least two such hydrocarbyl groups where
each group can have values ranging from 1 to 99 molar per-
cents and whose sum equals 100.
4,392,967
PROCESS FOR CONTINUOUSLY MANUFACTURING
LUBRICATING GREASE
A. Gordon Alexander, Samia, Canada, assignor to Exxon Re-
search and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Aug. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 291,944
Int. Q.3 ClOM 5/14
U.S. Q. 252—41 19 Qaims
1. In the process of manufacturing a lubricating grease
wherein thickener reactants, lubricating base oil and additives
are combined, dispersed, reacted, dehydrated and homoge-
nized to form the grease the improvement wherein the grease
is continuously manufactured comprising:
(a) introducing thickener reactants and lubricating oil into
selected locations of a screw process unit which contains
a series of adjacent, longitudinally connected barrel sec-
tions for performing different operative steps and houses a
rotating screw device traversing the interior of the barrel
sections and having separate elements along its length to
perform desired operations;
(b) mixing and conveying said reactants and lubricating oil
along said process unit through the adjacent barrel sec-
tions by continuous operation of said rotating screw to
form a feed mixture;
(c) controlling the temperature of said mixture while it is
being conveyed through said process unit by use of vari-
ous heat exchange means which are located in or adjacent
each barrel to aid in carrying out the operative steps of
dispersion, reaction, dehydration and homogenization;
(d) venting water resulting from the dehydration of the feed
mixture at selected barrel discharge points in said process
unit;
(e) homogenizing the formed grease by continued rotation of
said screw device; and
(0 removing the finished lubricating grease from the end
barrel section of said screw process unit.
July 12, 19^3
CHEMICAL
685
4,392,968
METAL DEACTIVATOR AND COMPOSTHON
CONTAINING SAME
Noboni Ishida, Sagamihara, and Hanimichi Watanabe, Yoko-
hama, both of Japan, assignors to Nippon Oil Company, Lim-
ited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,343
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 13, 1980, 55-110391;
Aug. 13, 1980, 55-110392
Int. Q.3 ClOM 1/32
U.S. Q. 252—51.5 R 7 Qaims
1. A metal deactivator comprising at least one member
selected from the group consisting of compounds represented
by the formula
and R9 are each an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms
and n is an integer of 0 to 4.
I
I
and compounds represented by the formula
II
4,392,969
ALKYLATED 5,6,7,8-TETRAHYDRONAPHTHALENOLS
AS ANTIOXIDANTS IN LUBRICATING OILS AND
GREASES
Bruce E. Firth, Elk Grove, III., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,707
Int. Q.3 ClOM 1/20
U.S. Q. 252—52 R H Qaims
1. A composition comprising a lubricating oil or grease
containing from about 5 ppm to about 5% by weight of an
additive selected from the group consisting of dialkyl- and
trialkyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthalenols, and the dehydrocy-
clization products of said trialkyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaph-
thalenols, wherein each alkyl group contains from 3 to about
16 carbon atoms.
6. The method of inhibiting oxidation in lubricating oils and
greases comprising adding thereto an oxidation inhibiting
amount of an additive selected from the group consisting of
dialkyl- and trialkyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthalenols, and the
dehydrocyclization products of said trialkyl-5,6,7,8-tetrahy-
dronaphthalenols, wherein each alkyl group contains from 3 to
about 16 carbon atoms.
wherein R4, R5 and Re are each independently a hydrogen
atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl
group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having
5 to 12 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon
atoms, an aralkyl group having 7 to 9 carbon atoms, or a group
represented by the formula R70(R80)nR9 where R7 is a hydro-
gen atom or an alkyl group having 1- to 20 carbon atoms, Rg
and R9 are each an alkylene group having 2 or 3 carbon atoms
and n is an integer of 0 to 4.
5. A composition comprising an oil selected from the group
consisting of mineral oils and synthetic oils, said mineral oils
and synthetic oils having a kinematic viscosity ranging from 10
to 10,000 cSt (40° C.) and a viscosity index ranging from 80 to
250, and 0.001% to 10.0% by weight, based on the total weight
of the composition, of at least one member selected from the
group consisting of compounds represented by the formula
I
4,392,970
PIEZOELECTRIC CERAMICS
Hiromu Ouchi, Toyonaka; Masamitsu Nishida, Osaka, and
Kazunori Numata, Moriguchi, all of Japan, assignors to Mat-
sushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 49,%9, Jun. 19, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 671,980, Mar. 30, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 495,127, Aug. 5,
1974, abandoned. This application Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,530
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep, 4, 1973, 48-100041
Int. Q.3 C04B 35/49
U.S. Q. 252—62.9 6 Qaims
1. A piezoelectric ceramic composition exhibiting high su-
bility of resonant frequency with respect to temperature over
the range of -40° C. to 80° C. comprising a solid solution of a
material selected from thfc area bound by lines connecting
points A, B, C. D, E and F of the triangular diagram of FIG.
2, wherein A, B, C, D, E and F respectively have the following
formulae:
A: Pb(Sni/3Sb2/3)o.OlTio.75Zro.2403
B: Pb(Sni/3Sb2/3)o.oiTio (wZr,, yoO^
C: Pb(Sni/3Sb2/3)o.09Tio.oiZro.9o03
D: Fb(Sni/3Sb2/3)o.5oTio.oiZro,4903
E: Pb(Sni/3Sb2/3)o.5oTio.495Zro.o0503
F: Pb(Sni/3Sb2/3)0 25Tio.745Zro.00503 .
and compounds represented by the formula
II
wherein R4, R5 and R6 are each independently a hydrogen
atom, an alkyl group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, an alkenyl
group having 2 to 20 carbon atoms, a cycloalkyl group having
5 to 12 carbon atoms, an aryl group having 6 to 10 carbon
atoms, an aralkyl group having 7 to 9 carbon atoms, or a group
represented by the formula R70(R80)/.R9 where R7 is a hydro-
gen atom or an alkyl group having I to 20 carbon atoms, Rg
4,392,971
HEAT STORAGE MATERIAL
Hiroshi Kimura, and Junjiro Kai, both of Amagasaki, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,172
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1981, 56-69619
Int. Q.3 C09K 5/06; F24H 7/00; F24J 3/02
U.S. Q. 252—70 3 Qaims
1. A heat storage material which comprises a composition of
CaCl2.6H20 modified for preventing a crysullization of
CaCl2.4H20 and 0.01 to 3 wt.% of at least one compound
selected from the group consisting of KCl, RbCl, NaCl, NaF,
NaMgFs, NaYF4, NaYsFioand NaThF6.
686
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,972
ALUMINUM-CORROSION INHIBITIVE HEAT
TRANSFER FLUID
Paul H. Mohr, Chappaqua, and William N. Matulewicz, Mont-
gomery, both of N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,614
Int. a.3 C23F 11/14, 11/12
U.S. a. 252—75 34 Qaims
1. An aluminum corrosion inhibitor composition concentrate
comprising;
(a) an alcohol or mixtures of water and alcohol, and
(b) a polymerizable-acid graft copolymer comprising an
unsaturated grafting acid and having a percent acid graft
of between about 1% and 60% and a base polymer consist-
ing of a poly(oxyalkylene) compound of the formula:
R"(OCnH2/j)zOR')a wherein R' and R" are members se-
lected from the group consisting of a hydrocarbon radical,
a hydrogen atom or an acyl radical, a is an integer having
a value of 1 to about 4, n has a value of 2 to 4 inclusive, z
is an integer having a value of from 4 to 800 inclusive, said
base polymer having a molecular weight of between about
200 and about 10,000,
and wherein the amount of component (b) is between greater
than about 0.05 wt. % and about 20 wt. % based on the total
amount of component (a) plus component (b) in said concen-
trate.
4,392,973
METHOD FOR TRANSMITTING POWER BY TRACTION
UTILIZING BORATE ESTERS AS TRACTION FLUIDS
AND A DEVICE FOR USING THE METHOD
Anthony J. Moore, Camberley, and Howard B. Silver, Esher,
both of England, assignors to The British Petroleum Company
Limited, London, England
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,013
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 18, 1980,
8009018
Int. a.3 C09K 5/00: ClOM 3/20
U.S. a. 252—78.1 6 Qaims
1. A method of transmitting power by traction wherein a
traction fluid transmits the torque between rolling elements of
a drive mechanism, comprises introducing between rolling
elements of a drive mechanism a traction fluid consisting essen-
tially of a borate ester having the general formula:
R2— O
R3— O
\
1
/
B— O— Ri
where Ri is a saturated or unsaturated mono-cyclic hydro-
carbyl group which from 1 to 5 side groups having from 1 to
20 carbon atoms, and R2 and R3 are the same or different cyclic
hydrocarbyl groups as deflned for Ri or alkyl groups with
from 1 to 20 carbon atoms.
4,392,974
LOW-PHOSPHATE DETERGENT BUILDER SALT
MIXTURE AND PROCESS OF WASHING
Klaus Hachmann, Hilden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien, Dusseldorf-Hol-
thausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 97,135
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 2,
1978, 2852285
Int. a.3 C02F 1/42; CUD 3/06. 3/12, 3/20
VJS. a. 252—99 10 Qaims
1. A builder salt mixture for washing, rinsing and cleansing
agent compositions consisting essentially of:
(a) from 50% to 75% by weight of at least one water-insolu-
ble, finely-divided, synthetic, crystalline alkali metal alu-
minosilicate containing at least some combined water and
having primary particles in the size range of from 50;x to
0.01 fi and a calcium binding power of from 50 to 200 mg
CaO/gm of anhydrous active substance when measured at
22° C. by the Calcium Binding Power Test Method set out
in the specification and the formula on the anhydrous basis
0.7-1.5 Me20.Al203. 1.3-4.0 Si02
where Me is an alkali metal,
(b) from 20% to 35% by weight of at least one carboxyme-
thylor.ysuccinate selected from the group consisting of
sodium carboxymethyloxysuccinate and potassium car-
boxymethyloxysuccinate, and
(c) from 8% to 15% by weight, based on the anhydrous salt,
of a tripolyphosphate selected from the group consisting
of sodium tripolyphosphate and potassium tripolyphos-
phate.
3. A washing, rinsing and cleansing agent composition com-
prising builder salts, tensides, wash alkalies, and optionally
other conventional additives for washing, rinsing and cleans-
ing agent compositions wherein
(A) said builder salts are present in an amount of from 25%
to 60% by weight and consist of a builder salt mixture
consisting essentially of:
(a) from 50% to 75% by weight of at least one water-
insoluble, fmely-divided, synthetic, crystalline alkali
metal aluminosilicate containing at least some combined
water and having primary particles in the size range of
from 50fi to 0.01 ^. and a calcium binding power of from
50 to 200 mg CaO/gm of anhydrous active substance
when measured at 22° C. by the Calcium Binding
Power Test Method set out in the specification and the
formula on the anhydrous basis
0.7-1.5 Me20.Al203.1. 3-4.0 Si02
where Me is an alkali metal,
(b) from 20% to 35% by weight of at least one carboxyme-
thyloxysuccinate selected from the group consisting of
sodium carboxymethyloxysuccinate and potassium car-
boxymethyloxysuccinate, and
(c) from 8% to 15% by weight, based on the anhydorus
salt, of a tripolyphosphate selected from the group
consisting of sodium tripolyphosphate and potassium
tripolyphosphate,
(B) said tensides are present in an amount of 5% to 20%,
(C) said wash alkalies are present in an amount of from 0 to
8% by weight of sodium silicate and from 0 to 10% by
weight of other wash alkalies,
(D) said other conventional additives include from 0 to 30%
by weight of sodium perborate-tetrahydrate, from 0 to 1%
of organic nitrogen containing or phosphorus-containing
sequestering agent and from 1 % to 30% by weight of soil
suspension agents, optical brighteners, enzymes, biocides,
fabric softeners, dyes and perfumes, sodium sulfate and
water,
with the proviso that the amount of said tripolyphosphate
component (c) in said washing, rinsing and cleansing agent
composition does not exceed 5% by weight.
4,392,975
ACnVATING COMPOSITION FOR BLEACHING WITH
PEROXIDE PRODUCTS
Jacques Tourdot, Paris, and Henry Carron, Pantin, both of
France, assignors to L'Air Liquide Societe Anonyme pour
I'Etude et I'ExploiUtion des Procedes, Paris, France
FUed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,586
Claims priority, application France, Apr. 9, 1981, 81 07107
Int. a.3 CUD 7/18. 7/36
U.S. a. 252—99 20 Claims
1. In an activating composition for bleaching fibers with
peroxide products, containing an activator of the cyanamide
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
687
type or a derivative thereof, the improvement wherein the
composition further contains a ternary protective mixture for
protecting the fibers against the injurious effect of the cyana-
mide compound or derivative, said protective mixture com-
prising a finely divided magnesium silicate powder, a seques-
tering agent of the acetic type and a sequestering agent of the
phosphonic type.
4,392,976
ENHANCING OR AUGMENTING THE AROMA OF
DETERGENTS USING MIXTURES INCLUDING
4-METHYL-3-CYCLOHEXENE-1-CARBOXYLIC ACID
Nicholas Calderone, Laurel Hollow, N.Y,; Hugh Watkins, Lin-
croft, and Takao Yoshida, West Long Branch, both of N.J.,
assignors to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 316,238, Oct. 29, 1981, which is a division
of Ser. No. 299,211, Sep. 3, 1981. This application Jun. 24, 1982,
Ser. No. 391,590
Int. a.3 CUD 3/50
U.S. a. 252—174.11 2 Qaims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
solid or liquid anionic, cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic deter-
gent comprising the step of adding to a solid or liquid anionic,
cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic detergent base, an aroma
augmenting or enhancing quantity of a mixture of chemical
compounds comprising:
A. the compound having the structure:
6 carbon atoms and having a first dissociation stage K
value of >10-^ selected from the group consisting of
alkanoic acids, hydroxy substituted alkanoic acids, alkane
polycarboxylic acids and hydroxy substituted alkane poly-
carboxylic acids,
(b) from 5% to 12% by weight of glycerol,
(c) from 1% to 5% by weight of a low-sudsing nonionic
tenside,
(d) from 0 to 5% by weight of customary additives selected
from the group consisting of odorants, dyes, dissolving
intermediaries and corrosion inhibitors,
(e) from 0 to 30% by weight of a water-miscible alkanol
having from 2 to 4 carbon atoms, and
(0 the remainder to 100% by weight of water, where the
amount of water is at least 25% by weight,
based on the total weight of the composition.
OH and
B. at least one compound selected from the group consisting
of compounds having the structures:
4,392,978
SELECTIVE AROMATIC NITRATION
Ronald L. Elsenbaumer, Morristown, and Edel Wasserman,
Summit, both of N.J., assignors to Allied Corporation, Morris
Township, Morris County, N.J.
Filed Dec. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 107,235
Int. a.' C09K 3/00; C07B 11/00; C07D 323/00
U.S. CI. 252—182 10 Qaims
1. A reagent for selective aromatic nitration which com-
prises a complex of a nitronium containing substance and at
least a catalytic amount of a macrocyclic polyether in the
presence of a solvent selected from the group consisting of
CH2CI2, CHCI3, SO2, CH3NO2, CH3CN, (CH2)4S02, CS2and
polyhaloalkanes having 1 to 8 carbons.
O— R'
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of t-butyl
and t-amyl and R' is selected from the group consisting of
methyl, ethyl, propyl, allyl and methallyl.
4 392,977
LIQUID CLEANING AND MAINTENANCE
COMPOSITION ESPECIALLY FOR DISHWASHERS
Tbeodor Altenschopfer, Dusseldorf, and Klaus Schumann, Erk-
rath, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Henkel
Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien, Dusseldorf-Holthausen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan, 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,145
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 26,
1980, 3002789
Int. a.3 CUD 1/72. 7/50
U.S. Q. 252—174.19 <» Claims
1. A liquid, aqueous or aqueous-alcoholic cleaning and main-
tenance composition, especially for dishwashers, consisting
essentially of:
(a) from 12% to 25% by weight of an acid havmg from 2 to
4,392,979
MAGNESIUM ALUMINATE ANION EXCHANGERS
John M. Lee, and William C. Bauman, both of Lake Jackson,
Tex., assignors to Dow Chemical Co., Midland, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 183,907, Sep. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,326,961,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 71,920, Aug. 31. 1980,
Pat. No. 4,243,555, which is a division of Ser. No. 939,544, Sep.
5, 1978, Pat. No. 4,183,900, which is a division of Ser. No.
812,542, Jul. 5, 1977, Pat. No. 4,116,857. This application Mar.
22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,716
Int. Q.5 BOIJ 41/02: COIF 7/02
U.S. Q. 252—184 27 Qaims
1. Crystalline magnesium aluminates conforming generally
to the empirical formula
MgAa''Z6''77Al(OH)>mH20
where
A and Z represent negative-valence ions or radicals selected
from the group comprising hydroxyl, halide. inorganic
acid, and organic acid,
n is a value of from about 1 to about 2,
V is a negative valence of 1, 2, or 3,
a is a value of from zero to 2,
b is a value of from zero to 2,
with (va)-(-(vb) equal to 2, and with m being a value of zero
or more.
688
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,392,980
TRANSITION METAL ALUMINATES
John M. Lee, and William C. Bauman, both of Lake Jackson,
Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Co., Midland, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 183,908, Sep. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,333,846,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 939,545, Sep. 5, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,221,767, which is a division of Ser. No. 812,534, Jul.
5, 1977, Pat. No. 4,116,856, and a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 95.692, Nov. 19, 1979, which is a division of Ser. No.
939,545, Sep. 5, 1978, Pat. No. 4,221,767, which is a division of
Ser. No. 812,534, Jul. 5, 1977, Pat. No. 4,166,856, and a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 95,691, Nov. 19, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 939,545,
Sep. 5, 1978, Pat. No. 4,221,767, which is a division of Ser. No.
812,534, Jul. 5, 1977, Pat. No. 4,166,856. This application Mar.
29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,690
Int. a.3 BOID 15/04
U.S. a. 252—184 14 Qaims
1. Crystalline transition metal aluminates conforming gener-
ally to the formula
MAa''Zi''.nAI(OH)3.inH20
where M is at least one divalent transition metal selected
from the group comprising Cu, Zn, Mn, Fe, Co, and Ni,
where AZ represents negative valence ions or radicals,
n is a value of from about 1 to about 4,
v is a negative valence of 1, 2, or 3,
a and b are each values of from zero to 2,
with (va) + (vb) equal to 2, and
with m being a value of zero or more.
and (3) as extender, a substantial portion of an N-aIkyI-2-pyr-
rolidone having the general formula:
4,392,981
PARTIAL OXIDATION WITH RECYCLE OF
RECOVERED CARBON
Roger J. Corbeels, Wappingers Falls, and Charles G. Sengen-
berger, Poughkeepsie, both of N.Y., assignors to Texaco Inc.,
White Plains, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,376, Aug. 18, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,367
Int. C[J ClOJ 3/46
U.S. a. 252—373 4 Oalms
1. In a process for the gasification of a finely divided solid
fuel entrained in a fluid medium which comprises subjecting a
finely divided solid fuel ground so that at least 95% passes
through a 14 mesh sieve to partial oxidation to produce a gas
comprising carbon monoxide and hydrogen and containing
carbon and ash bearing entrained particles and recycling said
entrained particles to the partial oxidation step wherein the
improvement comprises removing the entrained particles in a
liquid quench medium, settling the carbon rich portion of said
particles in said liquid medium, rejecting particles larger than
about 0.84 mm from the settled particles and comminuting the
remaining particles, subjecting the comminuted particles to
froth notation and recycling only the carbon rich float fraction
to the partial oxidation step.
4,392,982
EXTENDED BIODEGRADABLE DYE PENETRANT
COMPOSITION
Orlando G. Molina, Westminster, Calif., assignor to Rockwell
International Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,183
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/88; C09C 3/00; BOIN 33/00
U.S. a. 252—408.1 17 Qaims
1. A biodegradable liquid dye penetrant composition for use
in nondestructive testing for detecting cracks and other defects
in the surface of an object, comprising (I) a nonionic surfactant
consisting essentially of an oxyalkylated aliphatic alcohol or
mixtures thereof, formed of an aliphatic primary or secondary
alcohol carrying ethoxy or propoxy groups, or mixtures
thereof (2) a small amount of a dye soluble in said surfactant
H2C-
H2C
■CH2
c=o
\ /
N
I
R
where R is an alkyl group containing from 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
4,392,983
TRANSITION METAL COMPOSITION, PRODUCTION
AND USE
Angus J. Hartshorn, Runcorn, and Eric Jones, Tarporley, both
of England, assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC,
London, England
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,526
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 21, 1980,
8023814; May 6, 1981, 8113834
Int. aj C08F 4/02. 4/44, 4/70
U.S. a. 252—429 B 12 Qaims
1. A process for the production of a transition metal compo-
sition which process comprises spraying a material which
comprises a hot single phase liquid and cooling the spray so
formed so as to obtain essentially spheroidal particles charac-
terised in that the said single phase liquid has a composition
represented by the general formula:
MmXpTY.nZ
(I)
where
M, where present, represents at least one metal of Groups lb,
Ila, Illb, Vila, VIII or the lanthanide series of the Peri-
odic Table,
X, where present, represents at least one anion,
T represents at least one transition metal of Groups IVA,
VA or VIA of the Periodic Table,
Y represents at least one of the following atoms or groups:
halide, oxyhalide, amino, alkoxide, thioalkoxide, carboxyl-
ate or sulphonate in an amount to satisfy the valency
which T has in the composition,
Z, where present, represents at least one melt-producing
compound which, on heating with the transition metal
compound TY, forms a single phase liquid,
m is zero or a number less than 100;
n is zero or a number less than 8 (m-l-one); and
p IS
m X (valency of A/)
(valency of JT)
4,392,984
OLEFIN OLIGOMERIZATION CATALYSTS AND A
PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION
Heinz Engelbach; Werner Steigleiter, both of Limburgerhof, and
Helmut Glietenberg, Ludwigshafen, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to BASF Aktiengeseilschaft, Ludwigshafen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,624
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 18,
1980, 3014950
Int. C1.3 BOIJ 21/02. 21/06. 23/18. 27/18
U.S. a. 252—432 4 Claims
1. A catalyst for olefin oligomerization, whose active mate-
rial has the empirical formula
AP04.[P205.(H20)„)„.(XY)i,
I
where A is boron, antimony, bismuth or 3 equivalents of tita-
nium or mixtures thereof, X is NH4® or an alkali metal cation
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
689
and/or one equivalent of an alkaline earth metal cation, or
mixtures thereof Y is one equivalent of an anion, a is 0.02-0.2,
b is 0-^.05 and n is 1-3.
II
4,392,985
HYDROCARBON CONVERSION CATALYST AND
METHOD OF PREPARATION
William S. Millman, Brea, Calif., assignor to Union Oil Com-
pany of California, Brea, Calif.
Filpd Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,022
I Int. a.3 BOIJ 27/14
U.S. a. 252—4^5 21 Qaims
1. A catalytic composition prepared by the method compris-
ing the steps of (1) impregnating support particles with an
aqueous impregnating solution comprising dissolved cobalt,
phosphorus, and at least 17 weight percent of Group VIE
metal components, calculated as the trioxides, and wherein
said dissolved phosphorus, calculated as P, is in a weight ratio
to the Group VIB metal trioxide of about 0.01 to about 0.5, said
solution having a pH less than about 1 .0 and being character-
ized by a maximum extinction coefficient in the ultraviolet
spectrum of about 0^7 x 10^ to 1.8x10* liters/cm.moles of
Group VIB metal, and (2) activating the impregnated support
particles.
4,392,986
CATALYST FOR CARBOXYLIC ANHYDRIDE
PRODUCTTION
Tai-Cheng Yang, Mahwah; Krishna K. Rao, Paterson, and I-Der
Huang, Upper Saddle River, all of N.J., assignors to Exxon
Research &. Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 309,725, Oct. 8, 1981, which is
a continuation of Ser. No. 202,262, Oct. 30, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,543
Int. a.3 BOIJ 27/14
U.S. a. 252—435 31 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a catalyst composition comprising
vanadium, phosphorus and oxygen capable of catalyzing the
oxidation of hydrocarbons comprising:
(1) reacting in the presence of a liquid organic media, a
vanadium containing compound present in said liquid
organic media as a heterogeneous suspension and a phos-
phorus containing compound, in a manner and under
conditions sufficient to form in said liquid organic media a
heterogeneous vanadium-phosphorus-oxygen containing
first catalyst precursor composition having an atomic
ratio of phosphorus to vanadium of from about 0.5:1 to
about 2:1, and an average vanadium valence of from about
3.9 to about 4.7;
(2) separating said first catalyst precursor composition from
said liquid organic media;
(3) treating said first catalyst precursor composition with at
least one part by weight liquid water per part by weight
first catalyst precursor composition at a temperature of at
least about 30° C. for a period of at least about 0.5 hour to
form a second vanadium-phosphorus-oxygen catalyst
precursor composition;
(4) separating said second catalyst precursor composition
from said water; and
(5) activating said second catalyst precursor composition in
an atmosphere which excludes the presence of air alone
therein.
4,392,987
ALUMINA St^HEROIDS WITH CONTROLLED SMALL
PARTICLE SIZE AND A PROCESS FOR PRODUCING
J I THEM
e, Rockville, and Jose E. Herrera, EUicott City,
both of Md., assignors to W. R. Grace &. Co., New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,781
Int. a.3 BOIJ 35/08
U.S. a. 252—448 17 Qalms
1. A process for producing small spheroidal alumina parti-
cles in the size range of about 0.01 mm. to about 3.0 mm.
comprising providing a slurry of an alumina and an acidic
aqueous medium, spraying the slurry with an immiscible spray-
ing fluid under nonatomizing conditions, aging the particles
and drying and calcining the particles to produce alumina
spheroids of small diameter.
4,392,988
METHOD OF PRODUONG STABLE ALUMINA
Jesse C. Dobson, La Jolla, and Richard W. Knight, Jr., Escon-
dido, both of Calif., assignors to GA Technologies Inc., San
Diego, Calif.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,230
Int. a.3 BOIJ 21/12, 20/08
U.S. a. 252—455 R 10 Qaims
1. A method of treating activated alumina to impart in-
creased chemical stability and heat resistance thereto compris-
ing
soaking activated alumina in silicone liquid to impregnate
said activated alumina therewith,
draining excess silicone liquid from said activated alumina,
and
heating said silicone liquid impregnated activated alumina in
an oxygen-free atmosphere to between about 350° C. and
about 11(X)° C. to leave a silica residue infused in the
crystallite structure resulting in a silica-alumina phase
over the internal and external structure of said alumina.
2. A method according to claim 1 in which said activated
alumina having said silica residue is further heated in the pres-
ence of oxygen to bum off carbon residue at a temperature
below the a-phase conversion temperature of activated alu-
mina.
4,392,989
ZINC-GALLIUM ZEOLITE
Yung F. Chu, and Arthur W. Chester, both of Cherry Hill, N.J.,
assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,280
Int. a.i BOIJ 29/30
U.S. a. 252—455 Z 6 Qaims
1. A catalyst composition comprising by weight between
about 0. 1 and about 2 percent of gallium, between about 0.05
and about 8 percent of zinc, and a crystalline zeolite character-
ized by a constraint index within the approximate range of 1 to
12, and a silica to alumina ratio of at least 12.
3. The catalyst composition of claim 1 wherein said catalyst
is composited with a porous matrix material in a proportion of
between about 1 and about 90 percent by weight of catalyst
composition in the dry composite.
4,392,990
HEATING SILICA GEL IN INERT ATMOSPHERE
BEFORE ACTIVATION
Donald R. Witt, Barilesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Barilesville, Okla.
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,937
Int. a.3 BOIJ 21/06. 23/26
U.S. a. 252—458 24 Oaims
1. A process comprising:
forming a silica hydrogel;
aging said hydrogel for a time of at least one hour;
treating the thus aged hydrogel with a volatile normally liquid
saturated aliphatic alcohol having a solubility in water of less
than 6 grams per 1(X) grams of water to convert said hydro-
gel to a xerogel;
subjecting the thus formed xerogel to a heat treatment in an
inert atmosphere at an elevated temperature; and
activating the thus heat treated xerogel, said xerogel also con-
taining chromium, in an oxygen-containing ambient for a
time sufficient to activate same.
690
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
3. A method according to claim 1 wherein said alcohol is a
Cj or C6 alcohol.
5. A method according to claim 1 wherein said inert atmo-
sphere comprises nitrogen and wherein said heat treatment in
said nitrogen is carried out for a time within the range of 15
minutes to 1 hour at a temperature within the range of 800° to
1600° F.
4,392,993
ALICYCLIC UNSATURATED COMPOUNDS, THEIR
PREPARATION AND USE OF SAME AS PERFUME .
INGREDIENTS
Alan F. Thomas, Borex/VD, and Ferdinand Naf, Geneva, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Firmenich, SA, Switzerland
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,269
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 22, 1980,
6342/80
Int. a.3 A61K 7/46; CUB 9/00
U.S. a. 252—522 R 7 Qaims
1. A compound of formula
4,392,991
METHOD OF MAKING a-HEMATTTE CATALYST
Lymperios N. Yannopoulos, Churchill, and Joseph F. Pierre,
West Deer, both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric
Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,807
Int. a.5 SOU 21/04, 23/74
U.S. a. 252—466 J 4 Claims
1. A method of making an alpha hematite catalyst compris-
ing
(A) forming a mixture of ferric oxide and an mert metal
oxide support;
(B) placing said mixture in a reaction vessel;
(C) heating said mixture to a temperature of 900° to 1,000°
C;
(D) passing a hydrogen halide gas over said mixture,
whereby said ferric oxide forms a ferric halide which
reacts with water vapor to reform ferric oxide as alpha
hematite in said mixture.
4,392,992
CHROMIUM-SILICON-NITROGEN RESISTOR
MATERIAL
Wayne M. Paulson, Paradise Valley, and David W. Hughes,
Mesa, both of Ariz., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg,
lU.
FUed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,130
Int. a? HOIB 1/06
U.S. a. 252—512 3 Claims
CREATE
INSULATING
REGION
J!T
SUBSTOATE/BASE
IWTO PQOCESS
RESISTIVE
LAYER
7~n
APPLY
INTERCONNECTS/
CONTACTS
■^775
ANNEAL
RESISTIVE
LAYER
rn
PATTERN
RESISTIVE
LAYER
>Ply 1 I
ACTS/ I t
CONNECTS I I
APPl
CONT _ _
IN1EHC0NNEC
,1 -J-i.
I PASSIVATE I
W -.J _
.-t-'jV.t:
, SCMICONOOCTOH '
CONTACT I
ANNEAL I
SUBSEQUENT
PROCESS
STEPS
(D
possessing a methyl group attached to the carbon atom at
position 3 or 4 of the ring and one double bond in one of the
positions of the carbonyl side chain as indicated by the dotted
line.
4,392,994
CORROSION INHIBITOR FOR CELLULOSIC
INSULATION
Anthony P. Wagener, Park Forest, 111., assignor to The Sherwin-
Williams Company, Oeveland, Ohio
Filed Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 202,031
Int. C\? C09K 3/00: C23F U/00
U.S. a. 252—602 11 Claims
1. A process for limiting the corrosive nature of cellulosic
insulation which has been treated with a fire-retardant compo-
sition, by applying to the insulation an effective amount of an
aqueous corrosion inhibiting solution which comprises:
(a) about 1.0 to about 99 parts water;
(b) about 0.01 to about 10 parts of at least one amine or alkali
metal salt of an aromatic triazole;
(c) about 1 to about 99 parts of at least one amine or alkali
metal salt of an organic phosphate ester acid; wherein the
acid is selected from the group of acids having the formu-
las:
RO(CH2CH20)„ O RO(CH2CH20);, O
P or P
HO OH RO(CH2CH20)y
OH
wherein R is alkyl from 1 to about 20 carbons or alkylaryl
from 7 to about 30 carbons, or aryl; n is an integer from 1
to 50, X is an integer from 1 to 50 and y is an integer from
1 to 50.
1. A resistor material comprising Cr, Si, and nitrogen in
atomic percent proportions in the range 5% to 75% Cr, 5% to
85% Si, and 1% to 60% nitrogen.
4,392,995
MOLTEN TIN REPROCESSING OF SPENT NUCLEAR
FUEL ELEMENTS
Richard A. Heckman, Castro Valley, Calif., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,242
Int. C\? G21C 19/48
MS. a. 252—627 7 Claims
1. A method for reprocessing spent nuclear fuel in an appara-
tus having liquid tin dispersed within a containment vessel, and
a solid plug of tin and nitride precipitates disposed within said
containment vessel to interface with and support said liquid tin
therein, comprising:
July 12, 19^^
CHEMICAL
691
feeding spent nuclear fuel into said containment vessel;
immersing said spent nuclear fuel in said liquid tin under an
atmosphere of nitrogen, resulting in the formation of
nitride precipitates from said nuclear fuel, whereby said
nitride precipitates are dispersed throughout said liquid
tin;
solidifying a layer of liquid tin and nitride precipitates which
interfaces with said plug, to thereby integrate said layer
with said plug;
melting an end portion of said plug remote from an end of
said plug which interfaces with molten tin, whereby said
melted end portion may be removed, while leaving a
sufficient amount of said plug solidified to provide support
for said liquid tin and nitride precipitates remaining in said
containment vessel; and
removing said melted portion of said plug from said contain-
ment vessel.
1
4,392,996
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
BIOLOGICALLY ACTIVE PEPTIDE ANALOGUES
Ludwig A. Sternberger, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to The Uni-
versity of Rochester, Rochester, N.Y.
Hied Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,910
Int. C\? C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 260—112 R 5 Qaims
1. A process for obtaining a neuropeptide analogue from
brain or other organ of the body comprising adding a neuro-
peptide to brain or other organ of the body, the neuropeptide
being present in an amount sufficient to displace the neuropep-
tide analogue from brain or other organ of the body, and
isolating the neuropeptide analogue.
4,392,997
ANTIGENIC PEPTIDE COMPOUNDS
Erwin Goldberg, Evanston, 111., assignor to Northwestern Uni-
versity, Evanston, 111.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 280,295, Jul. 6, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 389,040
Int. a.3 C07C 103/52
U.S. O. 260—112.5 R 6 Qaims
1. The antigenic peptide compounds arranged in a sequence
from N-terminal to C-terminal amino acids selected from the
class consisting of:
(a) Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val— Pro—
Glu — Asp — Lys
(b) Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val— Pro —
Glu — Asp — Lys — Leu
(c) Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val— Pro —
Glu — Asp — Lys — Leu— Ser
(d) Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val— Pro —
Glu— Asp— Lys— Leu— Ser— Arg
(e) Cys— Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val —
Pro— Glu— Asp— Lys
(0 Cys— Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val —
Pro — Glu — Asp — Lys — Leu
(g) Cys— Glu— Gin— Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val —
Pro— Glu— Asp— Lys— Leu— Ser, and
(h) Cys— Glu— Gln'Leu— He— Gin— Asn— Leu— Val —
Pro— Glu— Asp— Lys— Leu— Ser— Arg
wherein Gly represents glycine, and Glu, Gin, Leu, He, Asn,
Val, Pro, Asp, Lys, Ser, Arg, and Cys, respectively represent
the L-amino acid forms of glutamic acid, glutamine, leucine,
isoleucine, asparagine, valine, proline, aspartic acid, lysine,
serine, arginine, and cysteine.
4,392,998
ONE POT DIAZOTIZATION, COUPLING AND
QUATERNIZATION OF AMINOTRIAZOLES
Hans-Peter Kiihithau, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,490
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 11,
1980, 3009267
Int. CI.' C07C 107/00: C09B 43/00
U.S. CI. 260—146 R 6 Qaims
1. In the preparation of a quaternized dyestufTof the formula
N
,N_
N'
.N=N— K + X
'R'
in which
R' and R^ each is a Ci- to C4-alkyl or alkenyl radical, or a
Ci-C4-alkyl or alkenyl radical substituted by halogen,
hydroxyl, cyano, Ci- to C4-alkoxy, C\- to C4-alkoxycar-
bonyl, Ci-C3-alkylcarbonyloxy, aminocarbonyl, phe-
noxy, benzyloxy, benzoyloxy, mono- or di-(Ci to C2-
alkyl)-amino, mono- or di-(Ci- to C2-alkyl)-aminocarbo-
nyl, phenylalkyloxy, phenoxycarbonyloxy or
phenylaminocarbonyloxy; a benzyl, a- or /3-phenethyl or
a-, /3- or y-phenylpropyl radical; or a benzyl, a- or yS-
phenylethyl or a-, /3- or y-phenylpropyl radical substi-
tuted by Ci- to C4-alkyl or by any of the substituents set
forth in connection with alkyl;
R3 is hydrogen; a Ci- to C4-alkyl radical; a C|- to C4-alkyl
radical substituted as in R' and R^; a cyclohexyl, phenyl,
naphthyl, benzyl, a- or /3-phenylethyl or a-, /3- or y-
phenylpropyl radical; or a cyclohexyl, phenyl, naphthyl,
benzyl, a- or /3-phenylethyI or a-, /3- or y-phenylpropyl
radical substituted by Ci to C4-alkyl or by any of the
substituents set forth in connection with alkyl;
K is the radical of a coupling component HK, and X is an
anion.
wherein an aminotriazole of the formula
N
R'^W
.N.
■NH2
*H
is diazotized and coupled to a coupling component HK to form
an intermediate dyestuff of the formula
692
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
N
.N=N— K
R3^N-
,N.
H
and the intermediate dyestuff is quaternized with an alkylating
or aralkylating agent capable of providing the radicals R' and
R2 in a medium also providing the anion X~, the improvement
which comprises effecting the coupling at a pH of 4 to 6 and
thereafter, without isolation of the intermediate dyestuff, ef-
fecting the quaternization.
4,392,999
MONOAZO PIGMENTS CONTAINING
HYDROXYNAPHTHOYLAMINOBENZIMIDAZOLONE
RADICAL
Rolf Miiller, Aesch; Armand Roueche, Bottmingen; Paul Miiller,
Basel, and Karl Ronco, Richen, all of Switzerland, assignors to
Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 147,817, May 8, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 911,002, May 30, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,229,344. This application Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,807
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 3, 1977,
6868/77
Int. Ci.^ C09B 29/36: C09B 43/12: D06P 1/52. 1/649
U.S. a. 260—157 3 Claims
1. A monoazo pigment corresponding to the formula
N=N
4,393,001
INTERMEDIATES FOR PRODUCTION OF
1,1-DIOXOPENICILLANOYLOXYMETHYL
6-(2-AMINO-2-PHENYLACETAMIDO)PENICILLANATES
Vytautas J. Jasys, New London, Conn., assignor to Pfizer Inc.,
New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 246,456, Mar. 23, 1981, abandoned. This
application Sep. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 427,215
Int. a.3 C07D 499/32
U.S. a. 260—239.1 10 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
O O
\ /
S CH3
CH3
c — o
II
o
H5C2C)OC
OH
CONH
c=o
wherein Xe is hydrogen or methyl.
O
O
II
CHCNH
/- " — \
CH3
CH3
CH2
c — o
o
wherein
Rl is H or OH;
Y and Z are each CI, Br or I, or Y is H and Z is CI, Br or I
and
Q is N3 or NHCO2CH2C6H4R'* where R'* is H, CI, Br, NO2,
CH3 or OCH3.
4,393,002
c-CAPROLACTAM BLOCKED DIISOCYANATES
Jonas Weiss, Port Chester, and Raymond Seltzer, New City,
both of N.Y., assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley,
N.Y.
Filed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 360,031
Int. a.^ C07D 210/00
U.S. a. 260—239.3 R 3 Qaims
1. A c-caprolactam-blocked diisocyanate isomeric mixture
corresponding to the formula
4,393,000
CYCLIZATION PROCESS FOR PRODUONG
AZIRIDINE-2-CARBOXYLIC ACID OR ITS SALTS
Ryuichi Mita, Kawasaki; Chojiro Higuchi, Kamakura; Toshio
Kato, Kawasaki; Nobuyuki Kawashima; Akihiro Yamaguchi,
both of Kamakura; Shosuke Nagai, Yokohama, and Takao
Takano, Fujisawa, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsui Toatsu
Chemicals, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,728
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1979, 54/160351;
Dec. 25, 1979, 54/167681; Jan. 16, 1980, 55/2566
Int. aj C07D 203/02, 203/08
U.S. a. 260—239 E 13 Qaims
1. A process for producing aziridine-2-carboxylic acid salt
which comprises a step wherein an a-halogeno-/3-aminopro-
pionitrile-containing reaction mixture obtained by reacting an
a,;3-dihalogenopropionitrile or an a-halogenoacrylonitrile
with ammonia in water, an organic solvent or a mixture of
water and an organic solvent at a temperature of —40° to 30°
C, is treated with an alkali or alkaline earth metal hydroxide.
O,
O
II
■NH— C— N
V / CH3 CH3 \ /
.0
said mixture comprising from about 10 to 80% of the 5-isomer
and from about 90 to 10% of the 6-isomer.
4,393,003
/3-LACTAMASE INHIBITORS
Dennis D. Keith, Montclair, John P. Tengi, Cedar Grove, and
Manfred Weigele, North Caldwell, all of N.J., assignors to
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,106
Int. Q.3 C07D 499/00; A61K 31/425
U.S. Q. 260—245.2 R 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
693
.rt-
o o
. \
^^.
I1IICH3
CO2H
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
4,393,004 —
3-[(a.SUBSTITUTED-BENZYL]-2,3,DIHYDRO-
THIAZOLO[3,2-A][l,3]DIAZACYCLAN-3-OL
DERIVATIVES
Andrew S. Tomcufcik, Old Tappan; William B. Wright, Jr.,
Woodcliff Lake, both of N.J., and Joseph W. Marsico, Jr.,
Pearl River, N.Y., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 206,803, Nov. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,734.
This application Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,118
Int. CV C07D 513/04
U.S. Q. 260—245.5 26 Qaims
1. A compound selected from those of the formula:
wherein Ri is hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, bromo, alkyl having
from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon
atoms; R2 is hydrogen or
wherein Ri is hydrogen, fluoro, chloro, bromo, alkyl having
from 1 to 3 carbon atoms or alkoxy having from 1 to 3 carbon
atoms; R2 is hydrogen or
/ \
wherein R] is as hereinbefore defined; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl
having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a moiety selected from the
group consisting of those of the formulae:
-o - -*-^
Rl
Rl
wherein Ri and R2 are as hereinbefore defined, and Q is
— (CH2)3 — , as well as the pharmaceutically acceptable salts
thereof.
4,393,005
CATIONIC PHTHALOCYANINE DYES
Manfred Patsch, Wachenheim; Manfred Ruske, Ludwigshafen,
and Erwin Hahn, Heidelberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Rheinland-Pfalz, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 357,808
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 21,
1981, 3111199
Int. Q.3 C09B 47/04
U.S. Q. 260—245.73 9 Qaims
1. A cationic phthalocyanine dye of the formula
wherein Ri is as hereinbefore defined; R3 is hydrogen, alkyl
having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or a moiety selected from the
group consisting of those of the formulae:
/
Pc
(CH2— N— C— (CH)rN
K I I \
R' R^ R^
O
/
R2
o
/
R2
(CH2-N-C-(-CHfe^N-R3)„ (XO),.
R' R* r5
(S03©);,(M®);,
where Pc is an (n + m + p)-valent radical of a phthalocyanine,
R' is hydrogen or Ci-C4-alkyl, R^and R^ independently of one
another are Ci-Cn-alkyl, C2-C4-hydroxyalkyl, C5-C8-
wherein Ri and R2 are as hereinbefore defined, and Q is a cycloalkyi, benzyl, phenyl or tolyl, or
divalent moiety selected from the group consisting of those of
the formulae:
— (CH2)2— and — CH=CH—
as well as the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof
20. A compound selected from those of the formula:
— N
\
R2
rs
694
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
is a pyrrolidine, imidazole, 2-ethyl-4-methyliinidazole, mor-
pholine, piperazine or N'— Ci-C4-alkylpiperazine radical, or is
-continued
— N
N— (CH)i— C— NHR'.
NR1R2
O NR3R7
wherein each of Ri and R2 independently represents hydrogen,
.. ..„<-^^ .t.!r,^i_j alkyl or cycloalkyl, R3 represents hydrogen or alkyl, R4 repre-
R4 is hydrogen or methyl, R5.sC,-C,2-alkylC2-C4-hydroxy- ^^^^ ^,^y,^^^ ^^ cycloalkylene, R5 and R6 represents alkyl.
alkyl, chlorine-substituted C2-C4-hydroxyalkyl or benzyl, X© ^^y, ^^ ^^^,^y, ^^ represents alkyl, aralkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl.
is one equivalent of an anion, M® is one equivalent of a cation,
z is a 1 or 2, p is 0 or 1, m is 0 or 1 and n is 1, 2, 3 or 4, and
l<(m + n)<4.
and An represents an anion which comprises the steps of, (1)
reacting in an aprotic solvent at temperatures of 80° to 150° C,
an a-nitro-anthraquinone (A) of the formula II
4,393,006
DIAZIDOSULFONYL-N-SUBSTITUTED ANILINE
Charles E. Hoyle, and Ronald S. Lenox, both of Lancaster, Pa.,
assignors to Armstrong World Industries, Inc., Lancaster, Pa.
Filed Jul. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 396,016
Int. a.3 C07C 161/00
U.S. a. 260—349 8 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula
NO2
* (ID
with an amine of the formula
H— N— R
S02N3
wherein R represents C1-C15 alkyl, C2-C15 unsaturated alkyl,
C3-C15 cycloalkyl, aryl or a heterocyclic radical.
0 Wj
I
0
-COO-
11
0
©
0 Ml, 0 •"! ° "*'
Oft 0 mrnzn 0 I
© © " ©
0 ■••i*** *"
1. A process for the manufacture of quatemized anthraqui-
none or anthraquinone of the formula I
NR1R2
R5
N— R4— N— R6
I I
R3 R7
(I)
An©
or
hn;
,Ri
'R2
to give 1-amino-anthraquinone (B), wherein Ri and R2 have
the meaning given above, (2) halogenating said compound (B)
by diluting the reaction mixture with a protic solvent and
introducing a bromine/methanol mixture at —20° to +70° C.
to give l-amino-4-bromo-anthraquinone (C), (3) condensing
said compound (C) after neutralization with a diamine of the
formula
4,393,007
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
ANTHRAQUINONE COMPOUNDS
Martin Priester, Domach, and Peter Loew, Miinchenstein, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy AG, Basel, Switzer-
land
Continuation of Ser. No. 946,281, Sep. 25, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 812,284, Jul. 1, 1977,
abandoned. This application Jan. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 115,815
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 7, 1976,
8701/76; Jul. 7, 1976, 8702/76
Int. a.3 C07C 97/24
U.S. a. 260—378 13 Qaims
V
HN— R4— N— R6
I
R3
or with an amine of the formula HN-R3R7 at 60* to 100° C. in
presence of a heavy metal salt to give 1 ,4-diamino-anthraqui-
none (D), wherein R3, R4, R5. R6 and R7 have the meaning
given above, and (4) optionally subsequently quatemizing said
compound (D) to give the corresponding quatemized anthra-
quinone, and carrying out the reaction steps (1) to (4) or (1) to
(3) in one single operation without isolation of the intermedi-
ates (B), (C) and (D) or (B) and (C).
4,393,008
2-CYANO-2-(3-PHENOXY-PHENYL)-PROPIONIC AOD
AMIDE AND PREPARATION THEREOF
Endre Palosi; Gergely Heja; Dezsb Korbonits, , assignors to
Chinoin Gyogyszer Es Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara Rt, Buda-
pest, Hungary
Division of Ser. No. 105,988, Dec. 21, 1979, Pat. No. 4,304,930.
This application Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,194
Claims priority, application Hungary, Dec. 29, 1978, CI 1894;
Oct. 25, 1979, a 1979
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 8, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07C 121/78
U.S. a. 260—465 D ^ Claims
1. A process for the preparation of 2-cyano-2-(3-phenoxy-
phenyl)-propionic acid amide which comprises the steps of:
(a) reacting m-phenoxy-benzyl cyanide with a Ct to C6
dialkyl carbonate in the presence of a basic catalyst to
July 12, 198:
CHEMICAL
695
obtain a 2-cyano-2-(3-phenoxy-phenyl)-acetic acid Ci to
C6 alkyl ester;
(b) methylating the 2-cyano-2-(3-phenoxy-phenyl)-acetic
acid C\ to C6 alkyl ester to yield a 2-(3-phenoxy-phenyl)-2-
cyano-propionic acid Ci to €5 alkyl ester; and
(c) reacting the 2-(3-phenoxy-phenyl)-2-cyano-propionic
acid Ci to C6 alkyl ester with a compound suitable for the
introduction of an amino group into the molecule to yield
the desired product.
7. 2-cyano-2-(3-phenoxy-phenyl)-propionic acid amide.
comprising reacting a compound of the formula:
(RO)2P©M®
with a compound of the formula:
" 4,393,009
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF AROMATIC
DICARBOXYLIC \CID DICHLORIDES
Dieter Freitag; Ludwig Bottenbruch, and Claus Wulff, all of
Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,898
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 3,
1979, 2926736
Int. C1.3 C07C 51/60
U.S. a. 260—544 K 2 Qaims
1. A process for preparing an aromatic dicarboxylic acid
dichloride which comprises reacting at least one aromatic
dicarboxylic acid selected from the group consisting of iso-
phthalic acid and terephthalic acid in one stage with phosgene
in the presence of a solvent or diluent and at a temperature of
110° to 180° C. in the presence of 0.2 to 3% by weight, based
on said aromatic dicarboxylic acid, of an N-alkylpiperidine,
N-alkyl-pyrrolidine or N-alkyl-morpholine, each said alkyl
moiety having
to 6 carbon atoms.
1. A method
of making a compound having the formula
00
II II
(RO)2PCF2P(OR')2
(R'0)2PCF2X
wherein R and R' are alkyl from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, M is
alkali metal and X is halogen selected from the group consist-
ing of chlorine, bromine and iodine.
4,393,010
NUCLEOSIDIC PHOSPHORYLATING AGENT AND
METHODS
Roberto Crea, Burlingame, Calif., assignor to Genentech, Inc.,
South San Francisco, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 107,055, Dec. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,310,662.
This application Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,689
Int. aj C07F 9/02
U.S. a. 260— 940 3 Qaims
1. A compound of structure
O
II
R— P— CI
I
OCH2CH2CN
where R is a base labile phenyloxy protecting group.
2. A compound according to claim 1 wherein R is selected
from the group consisting of p-chlorophenyloxy, o-chloro-
phenyloxy, 2,4-dichlorophenyloxy, p-nitrophenyloxy and p-
methoxyphenyloxy groups.
^4,393,011
METHOD FOR THE PREPARATION OF
FLUORINE-CONTAINING PHOSPHONATES AND
1 1 PHOSPHONIC AODS
Donald J. BuHon, Iowa City, Iowa, and Richard M. Flynn,
Bethesda, Md., assignors to University of Iowa Research
Foundation, Iowa City, Iowa
Division of Ser. No. 143,995, Apr. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,330,486.
This application Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,481
Int. a.3 C07F 9/32
U.S. a. 260—970 1 Claim
4,393,012
TEMPERATURE-RESPONSIVE CONTROL DEVICE FOR
CARBURETOR
Takashi Kato, Mishima, and Masahani Hayakawa, Tokai, both
of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kai-
sha, Aichi, Japan
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,081
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 9, 1981, 56-32529
Int. a.3 F02M 1/12
U.S. a. 261—39 A 5 Qaims
,1 >• it i>
^-Y .i" . ..
1. A temperature-responsive control device for carburetor
having a case attached to said carburetor, a heat-generating
body disposed in said case, a thermo-wax disposed to oppose to
said heat-generating body across a heat-mass and an actuating
rod connected to said thermo-wax, wherein the improvement
comprises that the portion of said heat-mass opposing and
contacting said heat-generating body is protruded in an annu-
lar form.
4,393,013
VAPOR MASS FLOW CONTROL SYSTEM
Joseph C. McMenamin, Fresno, Calif., assignor to J. C. Schu-
macher Company, Oceanside, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 151,741, May 20, 1970, abandoned.
This appUcation Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,360
Int. Q.3 BOIF 3/04
U.S. Q. 261—64 B 9 Qaims
1. A method for improving the accuracy in supplying a
continuous uniform mass flow of vaporized material from a
chemical vapor delivery system which includes a container
partially filled with material to be vaporized and applied to a
vapor using system, said container being at substantially atmo-
spheric pressure, means for ducting a carrier gas through said
material to transport said vaporized material, a valve for con-
trolling the flow of said carrier gas to said container, and means
for controlling the temperature of the material in said con-
tainer, said method comprising:
sensing the relatively small deviation from nominal atmo-
spheric pressure of the total gaseous pressure in said con-
696
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
697
tainer, which includes pressure variations therein caused
by conditions downstream from the container;
generating a signal utilizing said pressure deviation;
transmitting said signal to said flow control valve, said signal
adjusting said flow control valve to control the carrier gas
flow to provide said continuous, uniform mass flow of said
vaporized material with reduced error in said mass flow
which would otherwise be caused by said pressure devia-
tion.
5. A chemical vapor delivery system comprising:
a bubbler container for holding a quantity of high purity
liquid to be vaporized and applied to a using system, said
container being at substantially atmospheric pressure;
means for transporting a carrier gas through said liquid to
transj)ort the vaporized material to the using system;
means for sensing the carrier gas flow rate;
valve means for controlling the flow of said carrier gas;
CAPQ\ttf GAS
INPUT ~
^-^ — I n
TtMP _ (
0WTR01.LEB I , I
means for sensing and controlling the temperature of said
liquid;
means for sensing the total gaseous pressure in said container
which includes pressure variations therein caused by con-
ditions downstream from the container; and
controller means connected to receive the sensed carrier gas
flow rate, the sensed temperature and the sensed pressure
and to compare said sensed pressure with a reference
pressure to provide a pressure differential indicative of a
relatively small deviation from atmospheric pressure, said
controller utilizing said pressure differential for reducing
error in the mass flow rate of vapor which would other-
wise be caused by said pressure deviation and producing a
signal for controlling said carrier gas flow control valve
means in a manner to produce a continuous, uniform mass
flow of said vaporized liquid to said using system.
4,393,014
METHOD OF CASTING EXPLOSIVE CHARGE WITH
HIGH SOLIDS CONTENT
George E. Ziegler, Sparta, N.J., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,946
Int. a.3 C06B 21/00
VS. a. 264—3 R 9 Qaims
1. A method of casting an explosive charge of trinitrotoluene
containing a high percentage of solid particles insoluble therein
in a mold comprising:
adding said solid particles to said mold;
adding an appropriate quantity of said trinitrotoluene to said
mold over said solid particles;
heating said mold with said solid particles and said trinitro-
toluene contained therein whereby said trinitrotoluene is
liquefied and diffuses into said solid particles;
drawing a vacuum in said mold whereby release of air from
said explosive charge is encouraged; and
continuing the heating and drawing steps simultaneously for
a long enough time to complete the diffusion and air
release.
4,393,015
PROCESS OF PRODUCING URETHANE-MODinED
POLYISOCYANURATE FOAMS
Hiroshi Kaneda, Higashimurayama; Katsuhiko Arai, Kodaira;
Akira Suzuki, Hidaka, and Takashi Ohashi, Iruma, all of
Japan, assignors to Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,154
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 16, 1981, 56-3760
Int. a.^ C08G 18/14. 18/48, 18/18. 18/22
U.S. a. 264—51 20 Qaims
1. A process of producing urethane-modified polyisocyanu-
rate foams by reacting an organic f)olyisocyanate with a polyol
in the presence of a catalyst, a blowing agent and a surfactant
to form a urethane-modified polyisocyanurate foam, wherein
(1) said polyol is at least one poly(oxyalkylene-oxyethylene)-
polyether polyol having at least two functional groups
and containing from about 10 to about 50% by weight of
ethylene oxide;
(2) the molecular weight of said polyol is within a range of
about 500 to about 1500 when said polyol is used singly,
and the average molecular weight M of said polyols is
within a range from about 500 to about 2500 and is repre-
sented by the formula
_ M\A\ + M2A1 +
M =
A\ + Ai -\- . . .
wherein Mi, M2, ... are molecular weights of said polyols, and
A), A2, ... are quantities thereof in parts by weight, when
more than one said polyols are used in the form of a mixture;
(3) said polyol is used in an equivalent ratio to organic poly-
isocyanate of about 0.05:1 to about 0.5:1; and
(4) said catalyst is an alkali metal salt of a carboxylic acid or
combination thereof with a tertiary amino compound.
4,393,016
PROCESS FOR PRODUaNG PLATE-LIKE
POLYSTYRENE RESIN FOAM
Hiroyuki Akiyama; Hideo Hatakeyama, both of Hiratsuka;
Nobuyoshi Shimoyashiki, Isehara; Yoshiaki Momose, Hirat-
suka, and Fusao Imai, Kamakura, all of Japan, assignors to
Japan Styrene Paper Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,172
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 1, 1980, 55/119856
Int. C\? 264 DIG. 5: B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—53 4 Qaims
1. In a process for producing a plate-like polystyrene resin
foam which comprises extruding a molten mixture consisting
of a polystyrene resin and a volatile blowing agent by an ex-
truder into a zone having a lower pressure than the inside of
the extruder; the improvement wherein said volatile blowing
agent is a mixture consisting of dichlorodifluoromethane, ethyl
chloride and methyl chloride in which dichlorodifluorometh-
ane accounts for 50 to 70% by weight of the mixture and the
remainder consists of ethyl chloride and methyl chloride and
the amount of ethyl chloride is at least 30% by weight based on
the total amount of ethyl chloride and methyl chloride; and
wherein said volatile blowing agent is present in said molten
mixture in a proportion of 8 to 17 parts by weight per 100 parts
by weight of the polystyrene resin component.
' ' 4,393,017
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR MAKING FOAMED
1 1 RESIN PRODUCTS
Hueng T. Kim, Avon Lake, and Sam D. Nehmey, Lorain, both of
Ohio, assignors to The B. F. Goodrich Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 274,997
Int. CV B29D 27/00: B29F ^00: BOIF 15/02
U.S. Q. 264—53 9 Clai™*
1. Method for extruding a cellular resin product comprising
charging resin into an extruder disposed horizontally, convey-
ing the resin through the extruder by means of a feed screw
disposed in the extruder, melting the resin as it is conveyed
through the extruder, introducing a blowing agent into the
resin through a conduit in a plurality of streams along a verti-
cal plane through said resin and extruding the mixture of the
resin and the blowing agent into a zone of lower pressure
whereupon the blowing agent expands to form numerous cells
in the resm.
e. advancing a stripper means through the mold wherein the
stripper means frictionally engages the inner surfaces of
the two parallel walls and removes the concrete block
from the mold.
4,393,019
METHOD OF PRESSING RECONSTITUTED
LIGNOCELLULOSIC MATERIALS
Robert L. Geimer, Verona, Wis., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the SecreUry of Agriculture,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 326,086
Int. CI.' B29J 5/02
U.S. CI. 264—83 8 ^a'""*
« <IZfc 2»
4,393,018
METHOD FOR MAKING A CONCRETE BLOCK
William L. Harbaugh, Westmoreland County, and Raymond S.
_.jetana, Butler County, both of Pa., assignors to Burrell
Construction & Supply Co., New Kensington, Pa.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,941
Int. Q.5 F26B 3/00
U.S. CI. 264—82 18 Claims
1. A method for making metal fiber reinforced concrete
block having a pair of opposite parallel surfaces in which the
deviation from parallel throughout the spacing of the surfaces
is not greater than plus or minus 0.032 inches and when in-
stalled in a crib configuration the crib develops 3,000 PSI
compressive strength comprising:
a. providing a mold having two parallel, aligned, spaced
apart inner face walls wherein the deviation from the
parallel alignment of the inner face walls of the mold is not
greater than plus or minus 0.032 inches;
b. providing a mix as follows:
(1) commencing with aggregates;
(2) adding metal fibers to the aggregates and mixing them
with the aggregates; and
(3) then adding cement to the aggregates and metal fibers;
c. adding water to the mix and forming a mixture;
d. filling a mold with the mixture and compacting it in the
mold to form the concrete block; and
1. A method of producing a panel or the like from a mat
formed of lignocellulosic material and a thermosetting resin
binder in a press including a pair of heated platens wherein
each platen has apertures opening to one surface thereof which
is adjacent to the other platen, the improvement comprising
the steps of:
a. compressing the mat between the apertured platens to a
density of less than about 26 to 28 pounds per cubic foot;
b. introducing saturated steam into the mat through aper-
tures of both apertured platens and simultaneously further
compressing the mat between the apertured platens at a
rate such that a mat centerline temperature of at least 212°
F. is reached before the mat achieves a density of from 34
to 36 pounds per cubic foot and permitting the steam to
escape through the edges of the mat;
c. continue compressing the mat between the apertured
platens while maintaining the steam flow, until a desired
final mat density is reached;
d. continue steaming the mat for a length of time sufficient
for the mat to reach a maximum centerline temperature;
and
e. maintaining the mat between the apertured platens for a
length of time sufficient to cure the thermosetting resin
binder.
698
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393,020
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING A
HBER-REINFORCED THERMOPLASTIC MOLDED
ARTICLE
George S. Li, Macedonia; John F. Jones, Cuyaboga Falls, and
William M. Giffen, Jr., Hudson, all of Ohio, assignors to The
Standard Oil Company, Cleveland, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 106,064, Dec. 20, 1979, abandoned.
This application Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 313,015
Int. a.3 B29D 3/02
U.S. a. 264—108 14 Oaims
1. The method for manufacturing a molded article from a
fiber-reinforced thermoplastic resin comprising
(A) copolymerizing at least two vinyl monomers in the
presence of fibers which are unidirectionally disposed to
produce a resin-fiber composite composed of from about
60 to 95% by weight of fibers and correspondingly from
about 5 to 40% by weight of resin, and
(B) compression molding the substantially oriented resin-
fiber composite at a suitable temperature and pressure to
form said molded article.
4,393,021
METHOD FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF GRANULAR
GRIT FOR USE AS ABRASIVES
Gustav Eisenberg, Hanover, and Giinter Bigorajski, Gehrden,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Vereinigte Schmir-
gel und Maschinen-Fabriken AG, Hannover-Hainholz, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,983
Int. a.3 B02C 4/14
U.S. a. 264—143 6 Qaims
1. A method of producing granular grit particles each in-
cluding several individual grits comprises the steps of
mixing the grits with a binding medium, and a filler to form
a pasty mass,
pressing the mass through a mesh by relative rolling motion
to form extruded lengths of the mass,
heating the extruded lengths to harden them, and
pressing the hardened lengths through a mesh by relative
rolling action to form the said required granular grit parti-
cles.
4,393,022
ERASER AND PROCESS FOR ITS MANUFACTURE
Werner Handl, Altdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to J. S.
Staedtler, Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 100,959, Dec. 6, 1979, abandoned, which is
a division of Ser. No. 67,001, Aug. 16, 1979, Pat. No. 4,335,033.
This application Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,923
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 25,
1978, 2837159
Int. C\? B29C 17/14
U.S. a. 264—148 2 Claims
1. A method for the manufacture of an eraser based on
polyvinyl chloride or polyvinyl chloride copolymer compris-
ing preparing a polyvinyl chloride plastisol or polyvinyl chlo-
ride-copolymer plastisol in connection with unvulcanized
synthetic or natural rubber, wherein first a pourable or flow-
able homogeneous substance is produced from mixing the
polyvinyl chloride plastisol or polyvinyl chloride-copolymer
plastisol and the rubber, and this substance is then fed into an
extruder which has varying temperature ranges which increase
from approximately 90° to 135° C. and from whose nozzle the
cured or vulcanized eraser strand emerges and is cut into
usable eraser size pieces after passing through a cooling zone.
4,393,023
METHOD FOR PREPARING A PARISON AND
TRANSFERRING IT TO A MOLDING MACHINE
Peter T. Schurman, Woodbridge, Conn., assignor to The Plastic
Forming Company, Inc., Woodbridge, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 115,944, Jan. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,340,345.
This application Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,921
Int. C\? B29C 17/07. 17/16
U.S. a. 264—150 10 Qaims
H
- ^1
- ^- J. ^i
1. A method of preparing a parison that is continuously
extruded in an extrusion direction from an extrusion head and
for transferring sections of said parison to a stationary molding
machine mounted at a location laterally displaced from and
below said extrusion head, said method comprising the steps
of:
grasping and sealing said parison at one location on its
length;
stretching said parison, while being extruded, in said extru-
sion direction by moving said one location away from said
extrusion head at a controlled rate;
releasing said one location of said parison;
grasping and sealing said parison, after being stretched, at a
second location on its length intermediate said one loca-
tion and said extrusion head;
grasping and sealing said parison at a third location interme-
diate said second location and said one location to define
a parison section between said one and third locations;
transferring said parison section transversely away from said
extrusion head to sever said parison section from said
parison between said second and said third locations; and
delivering said parison section, in a direction generally paral-
lel to said extrusion direction, to said molding machine.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
699
" 4,393,024
METHOD OF PRODUaNG A RACKET FRAME
Chin-San You, No. 3, Lane 1019, Fong-Shih Rd., Fong Yuan
City, Taiwan
Filed Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,312
Int. C1.3 B29C 17/08: B29D 3/02
U.S. a. 264—162 8 Cl«"™s
1. A method for making a racket frame comprising the steps
of preparing two elongated strip members each including two
racket handle portions and a racket head portion intermediate
said racket handle portions and defining an elongated mold
cavity section extending throughout its length, placing a ther-
mosetting resin composition and fibres for reinforcing into the
mold cavity sections, bringing said two strip members together
in face-to-face relation with the mold cavity sections thereof m
opposing relation to each other to form a structural member
defining an elongated mold cavity containing said thermoset-
ting resin composition and fibres, bending said strip members
to form a shape of a racket frame, curing said thermosetting
resin composition, and removing the strip members which
comprise said structural member after curing.
electrical conducting material having first and second
zones,
(c) locating said instrument in said flow path and exposing it
to said fluid so that the temperature of the second zone
depends on said temperature and rate of flow of said
cooling fluid more than the temperature of the first zone
depends on the temperature and rate of flow of said cool-
ing fluid,
(d) passing an electrical current, for calibration purposes,
through said electrical conducting material to supply heat
to both of said zones with the first zone rising in tempera-
ture more than the second zone due to cooling effect of
said cooling fluid on said second zone,
(e) measuring the temperature difference between said first
and second zones to calibrate the instrument,
(0 placing the instrument parallel to and adjacent said elon-
gated fuel elements,
(g) passing a cooling fluid past the instrument while it is
adjacent said elongated fuel elements,
(h) the step of passing a cooling fluid past the instrument for
calibration purposes as aforesaid involving fluid cooling
conditions substantially identical to those characterizing
the cooling fluid that is passed by the instrument while it
is adjacent to the elongated fuel elements, and
(i) measuring the temperature difl"erence between said two
zones while the instrument is adjacent the elongated fuel
elements with cooling fluid flowing past the same and
without said electrical current flowing, whereby in view
of the previous calibration of the instrument with said
flow of current the output of the elongated fuel elements
may be determined.
4,393,025
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE
POWER DISTRIBUTION IN NUCLEAR REACTOR
CORES
Robert H. Leyse, 11114 Whisperwood La., Rockville, Md. 20852
Continuation of Ser. No. 913,977, Jun. 7, 1978, abandoned. This
application Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,741
' Int. a.3 G21C 77/00
U.S. CI. 376-247 28 Oaims
4,393,026
COMPOUNDS CONTAINING SULFUR AND AMINO
GROUPS
Neil E. S. Thompson, Creve Coeur; Derek Redmore, Webster
Groves; Bemardus A. Oude Alink, St. Louis, and Benjamin T.
Outlaw, Webster Groves, all of Mo., assignors to Peti-olite
Corporation, St. Louis, Mo.
Division of Ser. No. 161,198, Jun. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,332,%7.
This application Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,048
Int. a.3 C23F 11/04
U.S. a. 422—12 ^ ^«""*
1. A process for inhibiting corrosion which is charactenzed
by treating a metal with a composition containing
H
O
II H
R,-SCH-CHC-N-(-CH2lT=rjN-Rj,
II
R2 R3
[R,-S]„-fCH2-CH-C-N-jf-CH2^r-5N-j-
R2
■or
17. The method of monitoring elongated fuel elements,
which emit gamma rays, of a nuclear reactor core, comprising:
(a) providing a flow path for the flow of a cooling fluid to be
used for calibration purposes, and passing said cooling
fluid along said flow path for calibration purposes,
(b) providing an elongated instrument element including
11 H H
R,-SCH-C-N-(-CH2-)nN-R4
I
R2
where Ri is a hydrocarbon group, R2. R3 are H or alky I, R4,
R5 are H, alkyl. alkanol. or — alkylene N)„H, n, m or p are one
or more, or mixtures thereof.
700
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4 393 027
PROCESS FOR ERECTING AROTOR ASSEMBLY FOR A
ROTARY EXTRACTOR AND APPARATUS THEREFOR
Donald A. Gessler, 5702 Crestmont Ave., Verona, Pa. 15147
FUed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,190
Int. a.3 BOID 11/02
U.S. a. 422—269 5 Oaims
4,393,029
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF AN IRON-FREE
CHRONIUM (III) COMPOUND
Seppo O. Heimala; Stig E. Hultholm, both of Pori, and Frans H.
Tuovinen, Ulvila, all of Finland, assignors to Outokumpu Oy,
Helsinki, Finland
Filed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 286,038
Qaims priority, application Finland, Aug. 5, 1980, 802445
Int. C1.3 COIG 37/00
U.S. a. 423—55 4 Claims
1. In a rotary solvent extractor including a vessel having a
vertically-disposed rotor from which there is radially-disposed
a plurality of cells arranged in a circumferential manner on a
generally horizontal plane wherein each of said cells is dis-
posed between radially-extending upper and lower support
beams members mounted to said vertically-disposed rotor and
wherein each cell is open at the top and provided with a hinged
screen bottom door member, an improved cell assembly,
which comprises:
side wall members having a cell surface and a side wall mount-
ing surface, said side wall mounting surface having upper
and lower prefabricated horizontally-disposed mounting
elements, said mounting elements being positioned and af-
fixed to said upper and lower support beam members, re-
spectively, said cell surface of said side wall members being
provided with prefabricated upper and lower inner and
outer positioning bar elements;
an inner wall member having a cell surface and disposed be-
tween said side wall members with respect to said upper and
lower inner positioning bar elements thereof;
an outer side wall member having a cell surface and disposed
between said side wall members with respect to said upper
and lower outer positioning bar elements; and
a gable cap means disposed over paired side wall members of
adjacent cells to direct liquid flow into respective cells
thereof.
crystollizotwi
calalylc
(nwtol po«dtf|
CiDM
ICr-Cflntamns
Inclw^
"PSir
■4tclrol]rsis
tophragmo all
Aanolfti
Fe-precipitatioR
T—l
optionol port
!eSOin»iO
inSOl
1. A process for the leaching of a chromium raw material
and the precipitation of a substantially iron-free chromium
(III) compound at an elevated temperature and pressure from
an acidic aqueous solution which contains iron and chromium,
comprising leaching the chromium raw material and precipi-
tating the chromium compound substantially in the same auto-
clave vessel, which vessel has leaching and precipitation zones
separated from each other only by partition walls, whereby
solution can pass from one zone to another zone by overflow-
ing said walls; adding a finely divided additive selected from
the group consisting of zinc, iron, chromium, manganese and a
mixture of two or more members of the group to the precipita-
tion zone in an amount sufficient to provide at least 2 g/1 of
bivalent chromium in the solution and to neutralize the acid
present in the solution, the precipitation being carried out at a
pH between 0.5 and 2.2 by addition of the additive and the
temperature being from about 110' to 300° C, whereby the
pressure is that which results from treating said solution at such
temperature in an autoclave.
433,028
METHOD OF REMOVING URANIUM FROM A SLURRY
CONTAINING MOLYBDENUM
Thomas J. Crossley, Littleton, Colo., assignor to Wyoming
Mineral Corporation, Lakewood, Colo.
FUed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,175
Int. C\? COIG 43/00
U.S. a. 423—15 6 Qaims
1. A method of separating uranium from molybdenum con-
taminated with said uranium comprising:
(1) preparing an aqueous slurry of said uranium contami-
nated molybdenum which comprises calcium, about 40 to
about 60% of a water-insoluble molybdate, and about 0. 1
to about 0.6% uranium calculated as UsOg;
(2) raising and maintaining the pH of said slurry about 10
with an alkali metal hydroxide;
(3) adding sufficient carbonate ion to said slurry to precipi-
tate calcium carbonate and calcium uranate; and
(4) separating said precipitated calcium carbonate and cal-
cium uranate from the liquid portion of said slurry, which
contains said molybdenum.
4,393,030
UPGRADING OF PHOSPHATE ORE
John B. Sardisco, and Dysart E. Holcomb, both of Shreveport,
La., assignors to Pennzoil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 338,998
Int. C\? COIF 1/00: COIB 15/16. 25/26
U.S. a. 423—167 2 Qaims
1. A method for upgrading unground low grade phosphate
ore to remove slimes therefrom and provide a phosphate ore
suitable for acidulation which comprises the steps of:
(a) contacting unground phosphate ore with phosphoric acid
having a concentration of about 1 to 20 weight percent in
an amount of about 2 to 10 parts of phosphoric acid per
part of phosphate ore in a desliming unit to form a suspen-
sion containing the slimes and the phosphate ore;
(b) removing the suspension to a solids separator and sepa-
rating phosphate ore slurry solids from the suspension
containing the slimes;
(c) passing the phosphate ore to a grinding unit and grinding
the phosphate ore solids in the presence of a weak phos-
phoric acid solution to provide a phosphate rock slurry
suitable for acidulation;
(d) removing the suspension containing the slimes and floc-
culating the slime solids to cause precipitation of the slime
solids and provide separation between the slime solids and
the phosphoric acid process liquids;
(e) removing the resulting mixture to separation means and
separating the slime solids from the process liquids;
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
701
(0 recycling at least a portion of the process liquids to the
desliming unit and at least a portion to the grinding unit;
(g) removing the slime solids and reacting with weak phos-
phoric acid to acidulate finely divided phosphate rock
contained therein and form a reaction mixture;
(h) removing the reaction mixture to a separation device and
separating the slime solids from the process liquids;
(i) washing the slime solids with water, combining the wash
water with the process liquids and recycling to be com-
bined with the process liquids recovered from the separa-
tor in step (e); and
(j) recovering the slime solids which contain P2O5 values.
residual slimes, in a second crystallizer, there being suffi-
cient calcium in the said remaining portion to neutralize
the SO3 content contained in the mixture from the first
crystallizer and form a slurry containing calcium sulfate
and phosphoric acid;
(e) removing the resulting slurry, passing to a separator and
separating the calcium sulfate solids from the phosphoric
acid solution; and
(g) recovering the phosphoric acid.
4,393,031
PROCESS FOR EpnaENTLY REMOVING OXIDES OF
I NITROGEN FROM EXHAUST GAS
Werner Htenke, P.O. Box 51932 Oil Center Station, Lafayette,
U. 70501
Continuation of Ser. No. 13,892, Feb. 22, 1979, abandoned, and
a continuation of Ser. No. 149,281, May 12, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,824
Int. Q.3 BOIJ 8/00: COIB 21/00
U.S. Q. 423—239 - 5 Qaims
1. A process for the removal of nitrogen oxides from a hot
waste gas of a temperature of at least 420° F. and containing
nitrogen oxides, comprising:
dividing the waste gas into a first, second and third portion;
passing said third portion through a cooling loop;
adding a methane containing gas mixture to said second
portion so as to convert part of said second portion into at
least the amount of ammonia required for stoichiometric
reaction with the nitrogen oxides in the waste gas;
combining said first, third and ammonia containing second
portion;
thoroughly mixing said combination until said combination
~ is substantially thermally and compositionally homogene-
ous by passing said combination through a static mixing
element; and
passing the thoroughly mixed combination over a catalyst
that catalyzes the reduction of nitrogen oxides to gaseous
nitrogen in the presence of ammonia.
4,393,033
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF AMMONIUM
SULFAMATE
Adolf Metzger, Wiesbaden; Rolf Konrad, Steinbach, and Rein-
hold Graser, Frankfurt am Main, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,236
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1980, 3048057
Int. C\? COIB 21/093. 21/086
U.S. Q. 423—388
8 Qaims
4,393,032
PRODUCTION OF PHOSPHORIC ACID AND
ADDITIONAL PRODUCTS FROM PHOSPHATE ORE
Erhart K- Drechsel, Montgomery, Tex.; Dysart E. Holcomb, and
John B. Sardisco, both of Shreveport, La., assignors to Penn-
zoil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 338,999
Int. C\? COIB 25/16. 15/16. 25/26
U.S. Q. 423—320 55 Qaims
1. A process for the production of phosphoric acid from
deslimed phosphate ore which comprises the steps of:
(a) contacting said deslimed phosphate ore with a sufficient
amount of a phosphoric acid solution in an acidulator to
solubilize said phosphate ore and convert at least a portion
of the calcium contained in the ore so as to form a solution
of monocalcium phosphate in phosphoric acid containing
sand solids and residual slimes;
(b) passing said solution through a separator to remove the
sand solids from the solution of monocalcium phosphate
in phosphoric acid and dividing the solution into two
portions, said solution still containing residual slimes;
(c) contacting one of said portions which still contains resid-
ual slimes, with sufficient sulfuric acid in a first crystallizer
to convert all the incoming calcium equivalent to the
calcium in the ore to calcium sulfate, and wherein the
sulfuric acid is added to the said portion at a sufficient rate
to maintain a total SO3 content in the first crystallizer
solution of about 1.5 to 4.0 wt.% and form a mixture
containing phosphoric acid and calcium sulfate;
(d) reacting the mixture from the first crystallizer with the
remaining portion of the said solution which still contains
1. A process for the continuous preparation of ammonium
sulfamate, starting from ammonia and sulfur trioxide, by intro-
ducing liquid sulfur trioxide and liquid ammonia in a molar
ratio NH3/SO3 greater than 2.0:1 into a pressure reactor con-
taining the reaction product in a molten state, excess ammonia
being removed continuously from the reactor and the liquid
sulfur trioxide being introduced into the melt, which comprises
introducing the liquid ammonia onto the surface of the melt.
4 393 034
ENERGY EFnCIENT PROCESS FOR THE
PRODUCTION OF CARBON BLACK
Norman L. Smith, Columbus, Ohio, assignor to Ashland Oil,
Inc., Ashland, Ky.
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,173
Int. C\? COIB 31/02: C09C 1/48
U S Q. 423—450 ^ Qaims
1. A method of operating an elongated, generally cylindrical
reactor having an upstream and downstream end for the pro-
duction of carbon black by the furnace process wherein the
combustible gases generated a pyrolytically dissociating a
carbon black producing feedstock are cyclically utilized as the
fuel for effecting the dissociation reaction, which composes:
introducing a hydrocarbon fuel together with a 25-75%
stoichiometrical excess of oxidant gas containing at least
70 volumetric percent oxygen into the upstream end of
said reactor and substantially completely burning the fuel
to provide a turbulent mixture of combustion gases;
injecting a normally liquid aromatic-rich hydrocarbon feed-
702
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
stock into said turbulent mixture of combustion gases and
burning said feedstock to the extent provided by the pres-
ence of free oxygen in the combustion gases while essen-
tially simultaneously effecting the pyrolytical dissociation
of the unoxidized portion of the feedstock to generate a
carbon black aerosol;
quenching the pyrolysis reaction and discharging the aerosol
from the downstream end of the reactor whence the car-
bon black is recovered by filtration;
continuously maintaining the production of carbon black in
the manner above defined until steady state conditions are
attained; and
thereupon recycling a portion of the filtered reactor gaseous
effluent substantially free of condensible gases to the reac-
tor in lieu of the hydrocarbon fuel utilized in attaining
steady state conditions, said effluent being introduced at a
rate adapted to provide a combustion temperature of
about that associated with the burning of the initially
introduced hydrocarbon fuel while continuing to intro-
duce a 25-75% stoichiometrical excess of the oxidant gas
for burning said filtered gaseous effluent.
water to cause the same to react in the presence of excess
water in accordance with the equation:
SO2 + CI2 + 2H2C)— 2HC1 + H2SO4
to form an aqueous mixture of hydrochloric acid and
sulphuric acid, and
cooling said reaction zone sufficiently to maintain the reac-
tants in said reaction zone at a temperature below the
boiling point of water during said reaction,
said reaction zone being defined by a packed tower, to
which said chlorine and sulphur dioxide are directly fed
and to which said water is fed in admixture with cooled
recycled mixed acid, a hot mixed acid stream of hydro-
chloric acid and sulphuric acid is removed from the
packed tower and passed through a heat exchanger to
which a cool heat exchange medium also is passed in order
to cool the hot mixed acid, a proportion of the cooled
mixed acid is recovered as a product stream, and the
remainder of the cooled mixed acid is recycled to the
reaction zone in said admixture with said water.
4,393,035
CHLORINE DIOXIDE PRODUCTION USING MIXED
HYDROCHLORIC AND SULFURIC ACID FEED
Maurice C. J. Fredette, Mississauga, Canada, assignor to ERCO
Industries Limited, Islington, Canada
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,518
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 17, 1980,
8036835
Int. aJ COIB 11/02. 7/01. 17/74
U.S. a. 423—478 22 Qaims
4,393,036
PRODUCTION OF MIXED SULFURIC AND
HYDROCHLORIC ACID FEED AND CHLORINE
DIOXIDE GENERATION THEREWITH
Maurice C. J. Fredette, Mississauga, Canada, assignor to ERCO
Industries Limited, Islington, Canada
Filed Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 319,971
Int. a.3 COIB 7/01. 11/02. 17/74
U.S. a. 423—478 9 Qaims
H,0|/*(— i^C<, /Afi
HEAI EXCMWMn
1. In a process for the production of chlorine dioxide
wherein chlorine dioxide and chlorine are formed in gaseous
admixture with steam from an aqueous acid reaction medium
to which are fed sodium chlorate, hydrochloric acid and sul-
phuric acid, and optionally sodium chloride, which is main-
tained at its boiling point under subatmospheric pressure and
from which sodium sulphate precipitates as a by-product,
chlorine dioxide solution is formed from the gaseous admix-
ture, hydrochloric acid and sulphuric acid are formed by reac-
tion of sulphur dioxide, chlorine and water in a reaction zone,
and the hydrochloric acid and sulphuric acid are forwarded to
the reaction medium, the improvement which comprises cool-
ing said reaction zone sufficiently to maintain the reactants in
said reaction zone at a temperature below the boiling point of
water during said reaction, said cooling being achieved, at least
in part, by effecting said reaction of sulphur dioxide, chlorine
and water in a cooled falling film absorber in which the water
forms the falling film and having integral cooling passages
through which a cool heat exchange medium flows out of fiuid
flow communication with but in heat exchange with the falling
film.
16. A method for the production of hydrochloric acid and
sulphuric acid, which comprises:
separately feeding chlorine, sulphur dioxide and water to a
reaction zone,
intimately contacting said chlorine, sulphur dioxide and
4sOi/U,/AK
1. A process for the production of chlorine dioxide, which
comprises:
reacting sodium chlorate with chloride ions and hydrogen ions
in an aqueous acid reaction medium having a total acid
normality of about 2 to about 4.8 normal to form chlorine
dioxide and chlorine, said chloride ions being provided by
hydrochloric acid alone or by hydrochloric acid and sodium
chloride and said hydrogen ions being provided by sulphuric
acid and said hydrochloric acid,
maintaining said reaction medium at its boiling point at a tem-
perature below that above which substantial decomposition
of chlorine dioxide occurs while applying a subatmospheric
pressure to a first reaction zone containing said reaction
medium to form steam in a volume ratio of steam to chlorine
dioxide of about 4:1 to about 10:1,
depositing anhydrous neutral sodium sulphate from the reac-
tion medium and removing the same from said first reaction
zone,
removing a gaseous mixture of chlorine dioxide, chlorine and
steam from said first reaction zone and forming an aqueous
solution of said chlorine dioxide therefrom, said aqueous
solution of chlorine dioxide also containing part of said
chlorine,
forwarding the chlorine not dissolved in said chlorine dioxide
solution at substantially atmospheric pressure and in admix-
ture with air to a second reaction zone to which sulphur
dioxide and water, along with additional chlorine, if neces-
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
703
sary, are fed for reaction between said chlorine, sulphur
dioxide and water in the presence of excess chlorine to form
an aqueous mixture of hydrochloric acid and sulphuric acid,
venting unreacted chlorine and said air from said second reac-
tion zone, controlling the partial pressure of said unreacted
chlorine vented from said second reaction zone to a value in
the range of about 150 to about 550 mm Hg to provide
sufficient of said excess chlorine in said second reaction zone
to form said aqueous mixture of hydrochloric acid and sul-
phuric acid having a total acid normality of about 6 to about
14 normal and from which dissolved sulphur dioxide is
absent, and
forwarding said aqueous mixture of hydrochloric acid and
sulphuric acid to said reaction medium and forwarding such
additional quantities of hydrogen ions, chloride ions and
sulphate ions to said reaction medium as are required by the
stoichiometry of the reactions occurring in the reaction
medium.
6. A process for the production of hydrochloric acid and
sulphuric acid, which comprises:
separately feeding chlorine, sulphur dioxide and water to a
reaction zone;
intimately contacting said chlorine, sulphur dioxide and water
in the presence of air and excess chlorine and water and
reacting the same in accordance with the equation:
S02-f CI2 -f- 2H20->2HC1 -I- H2SO4
to form an aqueous mixture of hydrochloric acid and sul-
phuric acid,
venting unreacted chlorine and said air from said reaction
zone, controlling the partial pressure of said unreacted chlo-
rine vented from said reaction zone to a value in the range of
about 150 to about 550 mm Hg to provide sufficient of said
excess chlorine in said reaction zone to form said aqueous
mixture of hydrochloric acid and sulphuric acid having a
total acid normality of about 6 to about 14 normal and from
which dissolved sulphur dioxide is absent, and
removing the sulphur dioxide-free aqueous mixture of hydro-
chloric acid and sulphuric acid from the reaction zone.
of said solution regenerating means are substantially impaired,
said reconditioning method comprising the steps of:
(a) contacting said sulfur-feeding bacteria in said solution
with a bactericidal agent selected from the group consist-
ing of water-soluble phenols, the water-soluble salts and
hydrates of phenols and the mixtures thereof to destroy
substantially all of said sulfur-feeding bacteria; and
(b) contacting said sulfur particles in said solution with a
surfactant to remove a sufficient number of destroyed
sulfur-feeding bacteria from surfaces of said sulfur parti-
cles to enable said particles to agglomerate in said sulfur
removal means.
4,393,037
METHOD FOR RECONDITIONING
BACTERIA-CONTAMINATED HYDROGEN SULHDE
I! REMOVING SYSTEMS
Dennis D. Delaney, Placentia, and Donald M. Fenton, Anaheim,
both of Calif., assignors to Union Oil Company of California,
Brea, Calif.
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,070
' Int. a.3 BOID 53/34; COIB 17/04. 17/14
U.S. a. 423—573 R 1' Claims
4,393,038
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE PRODUCTION
Hsiang-ning Sun, Media; John J. Leonard, Springfield, and
Harold Shalit, Bala Cynwyd, all of Pa., assignors to Atlantic
Richfield Company, Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Oct. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 312,060
Int. a.' COIB 15/02
U.S. a. 423—584 3 Qaims
1. A method of preparing aqueous solution of hydrogen
peroxide which method consists of:
providing a slightly acidic aqueous solution conuining ions
tending to stabilize hydrogen peroxide and substantially
free from ions catalyzing the decomposition of hydrogen
peroxide;
dissolving oxygen in said aqueous solution; positioning a first
surface of a predominantly palladium membrane metallic
structure in contact with said aqueous solution containing
dissolved oxygen;
controlling the pressure of a hydrogen stream so that hydro-
gen is supplied to the surface opposite said first surface of
said metallic structure at a rate at least equal to the diffu-
sion rate of hydrogen through said membrane;
controlling the temperature of said aqueous solution and said
metallic structure to be within the range from 10*-150° C,
whereby the hydrogen diffusing to said first surface sur-
face of said membrane reacts with dissolved oxygen to
form a reaction mixture consisting of hydrogen peroxide
and water plus said aqueous solution;
directing a stream of said reaction mixture to a recovery
zone appropriate for the recovery of the thus produced
hydrogen peroxide.
4,393,039
COOLING BY CONVERSION OF PARA TO
ORTHO-HYDROGEN
Allan Sherman, Lanbam, Md., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Administrator of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,075
Int. a.3 COIB 7/00
U.S. a. 423—648 R 9 Qaims
1. A method for reconditioning a hydrogen sulfide gas re-
moval system employing a washing solution in which hydro-
gen sulfide is reacted to form elemental sulfur and which has
means for agglomerating said particles to enable sulfur re-
moval from said solution and means for regenerating said
solution for reuse, after said system and said solution have
become contaminated with living, sulfur-feeding bacteria to an
extent that normal operations of said sulfur removal means and
of:
20 «0 60 BO 100 'ZO 1*0 iSO iSCi 200
TEWtRATtIHE ('lO
1. A hydrogen vapor cooling process, comprising the steps
generating a vapor having a high para-hydrogen composi-
tion;
transferring heat from a heat source to said vapor to cool
said heat source; accelerating the conversion of said vapor
704
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
from a high para-hydrogen composition to a mixture of
para-hydrogen and ortho-hydrogen by passing said vapor
through a layer of a catalyst selected from the group
consisting of metal hydride gels of iron, nickel or copper;
transferring heat from a second heat source to said vapor to
cool s^d heat source.
4,393,040
IN- VITRO DIAGNOSTIC METHOD FOR DETECTION OF
ACETYLSALICYLIC ACID INGESTION
Alberto F. Lopapa, and Theodore D. Hall, both of Los Angeles,
Calif., assignors to Lopapa Institute, Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 246,993
Int. a.3 GOIN 33/56, 33/58, 33/60
U.S. a. 424—1 8 Oaims
1. An in-vitro diagnostic method for detecting acetylsali-
cylic acid ingestion by a patient by utilizing radioimmunoassay
procedure, the method comprising the steps of:
(a) derivatizing acetylsalicylic acid with a protein moiety, said
derivatizing procedure being effected in a molar ratio of
about 1 mole of protein to at least 30 moles of acetylsalicylic
acid;
(b) coupling the acetylsalicylic acid derivatized protein ob-
tained from step (a) with a water insoluble solid matrix, said
coupling being effected with a coupling agent having a
reactive group selected from the group consisting of amino
groups, hydroxyl groups, nitro groups, halo groups, amido
groups, carboxylic groups and mixtures thereof;
(c) obtaining a sample of serum from a patient suspected of
having ingested acetylsalicylic acid;
(d) lyophilizing said serum including any antibodies specific to
acetylsalicylic acid to concentrate said serum to a solid
phase;
(e) diluting said lyophilized serum to from about 100 to about
1,000 times the serum's original concentration;
(0 incubating said solid matrix coupled with the acetylsalicylic
acid derivatized protein with said concentrated serum for a
sufficient period of time to allow any antibodies specific to
acetylsalicylic acid to attach to said solid matrix coupled
with the acetylsalicylic acid derivatized protein, said incuba-
tion occurring for a period of at least 24 hours at a tempera-
ture of from about 4° C. to about 42° C;
(g) thereafter, incubating said solid matrix bound with specific
antibodies present with radioactively labelled antibodies
specific to acetylsalicylic acid derivatized protein obtained
from a test animal for a sufficient period of time to allow
binding between said labelled antibodies and said solid ma-
trix obtained from step (0;
(h) separating the solid matrix from the liquid phase;
(i) and measuring radiation emitted from at least one of the
separated phases.
4,393,041
HBRIN BINDER/CARRIER FOR ACTIVE
BIOCHEMICAL AGENTS
Ross G. Brown; David R. Bright, and Robert D. Williams, all of
Terre Haute, Ind., assignors to International Minerals &
Chemical Corp., Terre Haute, Ind. and International Minerals
& Chemical Corp., Terre Haute, Ind.
Filed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 143,709
Int. a.3 A61K 9/24
U.S. a. 424—19 7 Oaims
1. In a method of administering an active biochemical agent
to a living animal over a controlled period of time by subcuta-
neously implanting in said animal a pellet comprising said
active biochemical agent and a biocompatible excipient com-
prising bovine fibrin, said active biochemical agent being se-
lected from the group consisting of hormones, steroids, estra-
diol compounds and anabolic agents for promoting growth and
feed efficiency in said living animal.
4,393,042
ULTRA HIGH-FOAM DENTIFRICE
Orlando A. Battista, 3725 Fox HoUow Rd., Fort Worth, Tex.
76109
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 176,013, Aug. 7, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,394
Int. aj A61K 9/16
U.S. a. 424—49 8 Claims
1. In the art of cleaning teeth with a regular or electric
toothbrush the improvement which consists essentially of the
step of using the toothbrush with a heavy-bodied astringent
dentifrice resembling, in texture, whipped cream, which
sweeps up and physically holds, or which entraps mouth bac-
teria, food particles and gum line debris which can be subse-
quently flushed out of the mouth with water, the dentifrice
comprising essentially water and a non-toxic, alkaline soap, the
soap constituting at least about 25 percent up to about 50
percent of the weight of the dentifrice and being further char-
acterized in producing a high viscosity, stable foam having a
pH of at least about 7.5, the foam consisting of a multiplicity of
firm, discrete bubbles which entrap and physically hold and,
upon flushing with water, carry away mouth bacteria, food
particles and gum line debris on and adjacent the surfaces of
and crevices between the teeth.
4,393,043
SOLUTIONS CONTAINING AT LEAST ONE ESSENTIAL
FATTY ACID AND VEGETABLE OIL, AND COSMETIC
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THESE SOLUTIONS
Constantin Koulbanis; Arlette Zabotto, both of Paris; Jacqueline
Griat, Ablon, and Jean Charrier, Chevilly-Larue, all of
France, assignors to Societe Anonyme dite L'Oreal, Paris,
France
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,093
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 25, 1980, 80 01681
Int. a.3 A61K 7/42
U.S. a. 424—59 4 Qaims
1. A cosmetic composition which comprises an oxidation-
stable solution of 0.5 to 20% of an essential fatty acid or a
mixture of essential fatty acids in a vegetable oil, said essential
fatty acid or acids being selected from the group consisting of
linoleic acid or an isomer thereof, a conjugated linoleic acid or
an isomer thereof, a-linolenic acid or an isomer thereof, y-lino-
lenic acid or an isomer thereof, and arachidonic acid or an
isomer thereof, and said vegetable oil being jojoba oil in an
amount of about 80% to about 99.5% by weight of said solu-
tion.
4,393,044
STEROID ESTER, AND COSMETICS AND OINTMENTS
CONTAINING THE SAME
Atsunobu Takada, Yokohama, and Yuzo Higaki, Machida, both
of Japan, assignors to The Nisshin Oil Mills Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,847
Claims priority, application Japan, May 29, 1980, 55/71708;
Jun. 10, 1980, 55-78156
Int. C1.3 A61K 7/42. 7/02, 7/025
U.S. a. 424—59 51 Claims
1. A cosmetic comprising a cosmetic ingredient and a steroid
ester obtained by reacting at least one steroid component
which is a trimethylsteroid or a mixture comprising said trime-
thylsteroid, and wherein the trimethylsteroid is dihydrolanos-
terol, lanosterol, dihydroagnosterol, agnosterol, cycloartanol,
cycloartenol, 2,4-methylenecyloartanol, cyclolaudenol, cyclo-
branol, isocholesterol or a mixture thereof, with at least one
carboxylic acid-based component selected from the group
consisting of free a-branched carboxylic acids having a general
formula
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
705
R'— CH— COOH
(where R ' is an alkyl group having at least two carbon atoms,
and R^ is an alkyl group having at least four carbon atoms) and
reactive derivatives of said a-branched carboxylic acid which
are acid halides or anhydrides, said cosmetic is a creamy cos-
metic for the skin including a cold cream, a nutritive cream,
and a cleansing cream, a stick cosmetic for the skin including a
lipstick and an eyeshadow, a pasty cosmetic for the hair includ-
ing a pomade, or a liquefied or emulsified cosmetic for the hair
including a hair dresser and a hair rinse.
4,393,045
COSMETIC COMPOSITION
Esther G. Henderson, and Inger V. Mallet, both of 2521 Main
St., Baton Rouge, La. 70802
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,111
Int. a.3 AOIN 63/02; A61K 35/12
U.S. a. 424—95 6 Qaims
1. A curative, cosmetic composition formed by intimately
admixing the extrudate of a citric acid containing fruit with the
inner lining of a mollusk shell, said composition having healing
properties on a variety of skin afflictions when applied topi-
cally to humans.
(6) Infrared absorption spectrum: As shown in FIG. 2 (by
KBr tablet method)
(7) Solubility invarious solvents: Readily soluble in acetic
acid and dimethylsulfoxide, substantially soluble in metha-
nol and ethanol, and hardly soluble in water, chlorofoem,
acetone, ethyl acetate and ethyl ether
(8) Color reaction: Positive in ninhydrin reaction, Ehrlich
reaction and isatine reaction, and negative in Sakaguchi
reaction, Pauly reaction and anisidine reaction.
(9) Nature: Neutral
(10) Color and appearance: Colorless powder
(11) Amino acids constituents: Lysine, aspartic acid, threo-
nine, serine, proline, glycine, leucine, trypsine and other 3
amino acids (each one molecule thereoO
(12) Rf value: 0.23 [by silica gel thin layer chromatography
using as silica gel plate Art. 5721 (Merck AG., Germany)
and a solvent system of n-butanol/acetic acid/water
(12:3:5)].
3. A process for producing the substance claimed in claim 1,
which process comprises the steps of culturing a microorgan-
ism selected from Cytophaga BMP 694-N3 (PERM P-4846;
NRRL B-12109) and mutants thereof capable of producing the
said substance in a culture medium under aerobic conditions to
accumulate the said substance in the cultured broths and re-
covering the said substance therefrom.
4,393,046
COMBINATION OF THIOPEPTIN AND OTHER
RELATED SULFUR-CONTAINING CYCLIC
POLYPEPTIDE ANTIBIOTICS WITH RUMEN-ACTIVE
DIIMIDES TO IMPROVE RUMINANT FEED
EFFiaENCY
Francis P. Baylis, Greenbrook, N.J., and Gary E. Smith, Vale,
Oreg., assignors to Merck &. Co., Inc., Rafaway, N.J.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,806
Int. a.3 A23K 1/16, 1/17; A61K 31/40. 47/00
U.S. a. 424—117 4 Qaims
1. An orally administered synergistic combination useful for
increasing the feed efficiency of ruminants which comprises a
finished feed product and a synergistic combination of from
0.0001% to 0.01% by weight of thiopeptin with from 0.0001%
to 0.02% by weight of a pyromellitic diimide compound se-
lected from the group consisting of
(a) pyromellitic diimide;
(b) (N-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyromellitic diimide; and
(c) N,N'-bis-(2-hydroxyethyl)pyromellitic diimide.
4,393,048
PROTECTIVE GEL COMPOSITION FOR WOUNDS
Arthur D. Mason, Jr.; Avery A. Johnson, Jr., both of San Anto-
nio; Harrel L. Walker, Sutherland Springs; Eleanor G.
Bowler, San Antonio, all of Tex., and Charles R. Ritchey,
Stillwater, Okla., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington,
D.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,868, Feb. 15, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,574
Int. a.^ A61K 33/38
U.S. a. 424—132 • 13 Qaims
1. A gel composition, having use as a wound dressing, com-
prising a water-soluble hydrogel consisting essentially of about
0.5 to 3% by weight of alkali metal alginate, about 8 to 12% by
weight glycerine and about 82 to 90% by weight water
wherein said hydrogel has a pH in the range of 6.8 to 7.2 and
which upon drying forms a flexible, stretchable, transparent
water-soluble protective film, nontoxic and adherent to a
wound surface to which said gel comp>osition is applied for
protection.
4,393,047
ANTIBIOTIC CYTOPHAGIN AND A PROCESS FOR
PRODUaNG THE SAME
Hamao Umezawa; Tomio Takeuchi, both of Tokyo, and Hiroshi
Nakano, Machida, all of Japan, assignors to Microbiochemi-
cal Research Foundation, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 131,344, Mar. 18, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,489
Int. a.3 A61K 35/00; C12P 1/04. 21/00; C12R 1/01
U.S. a. 424—118 4 Qaims
1. A substance having antibiotic activity, designated as cyto-
phagin, \yhich is stable in the form of colorless powder and
which possesses the following physico-chemical properties:
(1) Elemental analysis: H: 6.94%, C: 47.22%, N: 13.21%
(2) Molecular weight: 1,000 to 1,500 [determined by gel
filtration]
(3) Melting point: Browning at about 210° C. and decompos-
ing with foaming at about 220° C.
(4) Specific rotation: [a]i^^= +5° (c= 1 in DMSO)
(5) Ultraviolet absorption spectrum: As shown in PIG. 1
(c=25 ^g/ml in methanol)
4,393,049
TREATMENT FOR OBESITY
David F. Horrobin, Montreal, Canada, assignor to Efamol Lim-
ited, London, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 89,293, Oct. 30, 1979, Pat. No.
4,302,477, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 4,924, Jan.
19, 1979, Pat. No. 4,373,763. This application Jun. 10, 1981, Ser.
No. 272,082
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 23, 1978,
2642/78; Feb. 7, 1978, 4921/78; Apr. 19, 1978, 15481/78; Aug.
17, 1978, 33682/78; Oct. 24, 1978, 41761/78
Int. C1.3 A61K 33/30. 31/315, 31/20, 31/33
U.S. a. 424—145 14 Qaims
1. A method of treating obesity comprising administering to
a person suffering therefrom an effective amount of y-linolenic
acid or physiologically functional derivative thereof and/or
dihomo-y-linolenic acid or physiologically functional deriva-
tive thereof
706
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393,050
ANALOGS OF EXTENDED N-TERMINAL
SOMATOSTATIN
WyUe W. Vale, Jr.; Jean E. F. Rivier, both of La JoIIa, and
Marvin R. Brown, Del Mar, all of Calif., assignors to The Salk
Institute for Biological Studies, San Diego, Calif.
FUed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,878
Int. a.5 A61K il/QO: C07C lOi/52
U.S. a. 424—177 1^ Qaims
1. A pharmaceutical composition for decreasing gastric acid
secretion comprising an effective amount of an analog of SS-28
having the formula:
H-Ser-Ala-Asn-Ser-Asn-Pro-Ala-Leu-Ala-Pro-Arg-Glu-Arg-
Lys- Ala-Gly-Cys-R i s-R i9-Phe-Phe-D-Trp-Lys-Thr-R25-
R26-R27-R28-OH
wherein Rig is Lys or des Rig. Ri9 is Asn or des R19, R25 is Phe
or Tyr, R26 is Thr or des R26, R27 is Ser or D— Ser and R2g is
D— Cys or Cys, or a nontoxic addition salt thereof, and a
pharmaceutically acceptable liquid or solid carrier therefor.
4,393,051
l.N(AMINOPOLYHYDROXYALKYL)AMINOGLYCO-
SIDE ANTIBIOTICS AND METHOD OF USE
Peter Stadler, Haan; Karl G. Metzger, Wuppertal; Eckart Voss,
Cologne; Uwe Petersen, Leverkusen, and Hans-Joachim
Zeiler, Velbert, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 155,896
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 19,
1979, 2924659
Int. Q\> A61K ilPh C07H 15/22
U.S. a. 424—180 12 Qaims
1. A compound which is a pseudotrisaccharide of the for-
mula
-continued
CH3 CH3
CH2NR1 CH2OH H-C-NHRi
O
NHR2
NHR2
NHR2
H3C
CH2NHR1 CH2NHR1 H-C-NHRi
o J- o i- o
NHR2 NHR2 NHR2
CH3 CH3
CH2NHR1 HO— C— H
Y denotes a radical of the formula
NHR3U
X— O
NHR4
W O— Y
CH3
6'CH2— NHRi RiHN— CH
Rl CH3
H3C— N— CH
NHR2
NHR2
NHR2
HO
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof, in h3C^
which
X denotes a radical of the formulae
OH
U and V both denote hydrogen atoms, or one denotes a
hydrogen atom and one denotes a hydroxyl group and
W and Z both denote hydrogen atoms, or one denotes a
hydrogen atom and one denotes a hydroxyl group, or
Z denotes NHR6 and
W denotes a hydrogen atom, and
Rl, R2, R3. R4. R5 and ^6 independently of one another
denote a hydrogen atom or an amino-polyhydroxyalkyl
radical derived from an amino sugar which is optionally
N-protected and optionally carries Ci-C4-alkyl, carbox-
ylic acid acyl or Ci-C6-alkylidene radicals on one or more
OH-groups, at least one of the radicals Ri to R5 bemg
other than hydrogen.
10. A method of combating bacterial diseases in warm-
blooded animals which comprises administering to the animals
an antibacterially effective amount of an active compound
according to claim 1 either alone or in admixture with a diluent
or in the form of a medicament.
July 12, 198S
CHEMICAL
707
4,393,052
ANTITUMOR ANTHRACYCLINE GLYCOSIDES, THEIR
PREPARATION, INTERMEDIATES THEREFOR, AND
COMPOSITIONS AND USE THEREOF
Alberto Bargiotti, Milan; Giuseppe Cassinelli, Voghera; Sergio
Penco, Milan; Federico Arcamone, Nerviano, and Annamaria
Casazza, Milan, all of Italy, assignors to Farmitalia Carlo
Erba S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,058
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 1, 1980,
8035195
Int. a.3 A61K iim; C07H 15/22
U.S. a. 424—180 10 Claims
1. An anthracycline glycoside of the formula 1:
CH3
CH2
O
CH3I |i CH3^,
CH3
HO
(!)
COCH2R1
OH
H OR)
in which Ri is H or CH3— CH2— CO.
4. A pharmaceutical composition comprising as the active
ingredient a thiolic derivative according to claim 1 in an
amount effective to have an erythromycin activity together
with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
wherein Ri is hydrogen or hydroxy; R2 is hydrogen or trifluo-
roacetyl; R3 is methyl, hydroxymethyl, aminomethyl or tri-
fluoroacetylaminomethyl; and R4 is hydrogen or hydroxy,
with the proviso that when R4 is hydroxy, R3 is aminomethyl;
or R3 and R4 together form methylene, and pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salts thereof —
10. A method of inhibiting the growth of P388 ascitic leuke-
mia comprising administering to a mammal afflicted therewith,
a therapeutically effective amount of a compound according to
claim 1.
4,393,054
METHOD OF TREATING CARDIAC ARRHYTHMIA
Harry R. Allen, Texas Township, Kalamazoo County, Mich.,
assignor to The Upjohn Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed May 19, 1982, Ser. No. 379,528
Int. Cl.^ A61K n/7l: C07H 15/16
U.S. a. 424—180 3 Qaims
1. The method for the treatment of cardiac arrhythmia in a
patient which comprises administering a pharmaceutical car-
rier and a cardiac arrhythmia inhibiting quantity of a com-
pound of the formula
4,393,053
THIOLIC DERIVATIVES OR ERYTHROMYCIN HAVING
THERAPEUTIC ACTIVITY AND PHARMACEUTICAL
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
Jacques Gonella, Zollikon, Switzerland, assignor to Refarmed
S.A., Zollikon, Switzerland
Filed Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 344,961
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 2, 1981, 82 00821
Int. C1.3 A61K il/71; C07H 17 /OS wherein R is
U.S. CI. 424—180 7 Claims
1. Thiolic derivatives of erythromycin and of the propionic
ester of erythromycin having the formula
R— X
(1)
wherein R is the radical of thenoyl alpha-mercaptopropionylg-
lycine
CH3— CH— CO— NH— CH2— COO(-)
31-n
HO OH
II Rl is H, Ci-Cg-alkyl; Rn is OH, OCH3, halogen (CI, Br. I),
and X is the radical oferythromycin or of 3'-propionic ester of -SCH2CH2OH, -SCH2CH2CH2OH, SCH3; R12 is CH3.
erythromycin having the formula CH2CH3, — CH2CH2OH,
708
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
— CH2CH20C(
■"<}■
OH
or the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts thereof.
4,393,055
HYDROXYALKYL ETHER DERIVATIVES OF RUTIN
POLY(H)SULFATE AND METHOD OF USE
Vijay G. Nair, New York, N.Y.; Joseph P. Joseph, Montvale,
N.J., and Seymour Bernstein, New City, N.Y., assignors to
American Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 373,958
Int. Cl.^ A61K 31/70: C07H U/00
U.S. a. 424—180 35 Qaims
11. A method of inhibiting the complement system in a body
fluid which comprises subjecting said body fluid to the action
of an effective complement inhibiting amount of a compound
of the formula:
O— (A-0)„— R
0-(A— 0)„— R
RO— A— O
OR OR
H OR
wherein A is C1-C5 alkyldiyl; n is an integer zero or one; R is
SO3B; Ri is hydrogen or SO3B; and B is a pharmaceutically
acceptable salt cation, wherein the salt forming moiety is se-
lected from the group alkali metal, alkaline earth metal, ammo-
nia and substituted ammonia selected from the group C1-C6
trialkylamine, piperidine, pyrazine, C2-C6 alkanolamine and
C3-C6 cycloalkylamine.
„«» ,^ «.«.'■» i" ■■»■■<»««'•»•"" ~ " *"
OR3
(1)
R2O
CHO
CH3
wherein Ri and R2 may be the same or different substituents
and represent a hydrogen atom or an acyl group and R3 repre-
sents a hydrogen atom, an acyl group or a tetronitrose repre-
sented by the formula (2)
CH3
(2)
NH.CO2CH3
CH3
NO2
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
2. A pharmaceutical composition for eliciting an antibacte-
rial response comprising a pharmaceutical carrier and, as an
active ingredient, an antibacterially efl^ective amount of the
composition of matter of claim 1.
4,393,056
ANTIBIOTICS TETRONOLIDE COMPOUNDS AND
PROCESS FOR PRODUCTION THEREOF
Fusao Tomita; Tatsuya Tamaoki; Kunikatsu Shirahata, all of
Machida; Mas^i Kasai, Fiyisawa; Noriaki Hirayama, Ma-
chida; Makoto Morimoto, Numazu, all of Japan, and
Masanori Fukui, Chicago, 111., assignors to Kyowa Hakko
Kogyo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,377
GaJms priority, application Japan, Jun. 14, 1980, 55-80482
Int. a.J A61K 31/71: C07G 11/00
U.S. a. 424—181 2 Qaims
1. A composition of matter having an antibacterial activity
which is represented by the formula (1)
4,393,057
PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS
Walter Boguth, Riehen, Switzerland, and Georges Hirth, Hu-
ningue, France, assignors to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc., Nutley,
N J
Divteion of Ser. No. 228,792, Jan. 27, 1981, Pat. No. 4,339,447.
This application Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,400
Qaims priority, appUcation Switzerland, Feb. 7, 1980, 983/80
Int. Q.3 A61K 31/625
U.S. Q. 424—229 "^ CMaa
1. A pharmaceutical preparation comprising an effective
amount of a pharmaceutically active sulphonamide and a sol-
vent containing a glycerol lower-alkyl ether selected from
glycerol 1-methyl ether, glycerol 1-ethyl ether, glycerol 1,3-
dimethyl ether and glycerol, 1,2-dimethyl ether, said glycerol
lower-alkyl ether and said solvent being present in an amount
sufficient to dissolve said active ingredient.
July 12, 1980
CHEMICAL
709
433,058
CEPHALOSPORIN COMPOUNDS
Osamu Makabe, Tokyo; Yasushi Murai, Yokosuka; Tuneo
Okonogi; Masahiro Onodera, both of Yokohama; Yoshiyuki
Koyama, Naka, and Takashi Yoshida, Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Meiji Seika Kaisha, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,417
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 18, 1979, 54-118788
Int. Q.3 C07D 501/36: A61K 31/545
U.S. Q. 424—246 3 Qaims
1. A cephalosporin compound of the formula (I)
(I)
CONH—
— CH— CONH— I 1^ ^
Lssjj^ Jl - COOH
wherein Ri represents a methoxy group or a 3,4-dimethox-
ybenzyloxy group; R2 represents a methoxy group; R3 repre-
sents a hydrogen atom; R4 represents a hydroxyl group; and
R5 represents
N-
A
■N N-
•N
N-
■N
II
,N;
N N
I I
13 CH2— S03Na CH2— COOH
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
C-CONH-p-,^ ' ^
R* is amino or protected amino and
' R^ is lower alkanesulfonyl or arenesulfonyl, and pharmaceu-
tically acceptable salt thereof.
4,393,060
ISOCYANURIC AOD DERIVATIVES, METHOD OF
PREPARATION, THERAPEUTIC COMPOSITIONS
WITH A CYTOSTATIC ACTION AND THERAPEUTIC
METHOD
Herbert Fischer; Manfred Budnowski, and Ulrich Zeidler, all of
Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Henkel Kom-
manditgesellschaft auf Aktien, Dusseldorf-Holthausen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,908
Qaims priority, application Austria, Oct. 8, 1979, 6552/79
Int. Q.3 A61K 31/53, 31/535: C07D 251/32. 413/08
U.S. Q. 424—248.5 10 Qaims
1. A cytostatic composition consisting essentially of a cyto-
statically effective amount of at least one N-substituted-
diglycidyl-isocyanurate having the formula:
4,393,059
CEPHEM COMPOUNDS
Takao Takaya, Kawanishi; Hisashi Takasugi, Kohamanishi;
Kiyoshi Tsuji, Osaka, and Toshiyuki Chiba, Nara, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Company, Limited,
Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 886,340, Mar. 14, 1978. This application
Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,639
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 14, 1977,
10699/77; Jul. 12, 1977, 29245/77; Oct. 11, 1977, 42315/77;
Jan. 3, 1978, 75/78
Int. Q.' C07D 501/20: A61K 31/545
U.S. Q. 424—246 8 Qaims
1. A syn compound of the formula:
R
I
Rl 0=C'
c=o
Rl
I
CH2 C— CH2— N^ ^N— CH2— C CH2
O II O
o
wherein R has from 1 to 15 carbon atoms, which R is a hydro-
carbon-containing radical selected from the group consisting
of alkyl, aryl, aralkyl, alkaryl, cycloalkyl, and unsaturated
derivatives thereof, which R may be further substituted by:
heterocycles selected from the group consisting of prperidine,
hexamethylenimine, morpholine, benzthiazol-2-ylthio and
benzimidazol-2-ylthio, and further substituents on said R se-
lected from the group consisting of halogen, hydroxyl, amino,
N-substituted amino having the formula:
— NHR2 and — NR2R3
wherein R2 and R3 together have a total of no more than 8
carbon atoms and are members selected from the group con-
sisting of alkyl and alkyl substituted by hydroxy, halogen and
alkoxy, mercapto, alkylmercapto, alkylmercapto substituted
by hydroxy, halogen and alkoxy, arylmercapto, alkylsulfoxyl,
arylsulfoxyl, alkoxy, aryloxy and alkanoyloxy and aroyloxy,
and Rl represents a member selected from the group consisting
of hydrogen and alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and a
pharmaceutically acceptable carrier therefor.
wherein
R2 is hydrogen or an aliphatic hydrocarbon which may be
substituted with halogen, carboxy or pharmaceutically
acceptable esterified carboxy,
R5 is carboxy or pharmaceutically acceptable esterified
carboxy.
4,393,061
ANESTHETIC-ANTIPRURITIC MORPHOLINE
COMPOUNDS, COMPOSITIONS AND USE
Cheng-Sein Yu, Kaohsiung, Taiwan, assignor to Stiefel Labora-
tories, Inc., Coral Gables, Fla.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,572
Int. C\? C07D 295/08: A61K 31/535
U.S. Q. 424—248.58 6 Qaims
1. A compound selected from the group consisting of the
free base of the formula:
r
/Q\-ch20— /Q V0CH2CH2CH2N Q o
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof.
710
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
6. A topical pharmaceutical composition comprising a com-
pound according to claim 1 in an amount sufficient to produce
a topical anesthetic -antipruritic effect, in combination with a
carrier which is pharmaceutically acceptable for topical appli-
cation.
4,393,062
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD
FOR THE PRODUCTION OF AN
ANTI-INFLAMMATORY EFFECT
David R. Brittain, and Robin Wood, both of Macclesfield, En-
gland, assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, Lon-
don, England
Division of Ser. No. 964,725, Nov. 29, 1978, Pat. No. 4,251,528.
This application Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,211
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 29, 1977,
54142/77
Int. a.3 C07D 2i7/32: A61K n/495
U.S. a. 424—250 5 Oaims
1. A pharmaceutical composition suitable for use in produc-
ing an anti-inflammatory effect in a warm-blooded animal
which comprises a compound of the formula:
4,393,064
PROCESS AND COMPOSITION FOR TREATMENT OF
LEUKEML\ AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING THE
SAME
Joseph I. DeGraw, Jr., Sunnyvale, Calif., and Francis M. Sirot-
nak. New York, N.Y., assignors to SRI International, Menlo
Park, Calif, and Sloan Kettering Institute for Cancer Re-
search, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 664,213, Mar. 5, 1976,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 761,152, Jan. 21, 1977, abandoned, and
Ser. No. 883,627, Mar. 6, 1978, abandoned. This application Sep.
17, 1979, Ser. No. 75,913
Int. a.3 A61K 31/505
U.S. Q. 424—251 18 Claims
1. A pharmaceutical composition in tablet form for treating
leukemia or an ascites tumor comprising an amount within the
range from about 0.1 to about 500 mg of 10-deazaminopterin
per tablet therapeutically effective to ameliorate leukemia or
the ascites tumor, together with a pharmaceutically acceptable
nontoxic carrier or diluent therefor.
CH2CO.R'
I
R5
'CH2— / A \-R*
R2 r3
wherein R ' is hydroxy, R^ is fluoro, R^ and R' are hydrogen
and R* is chloro, bromo or iodo; or R^ and R' are hydrogen,
and R^ and R^ are each independently chloro, bromo or iodo;
and in either case R^, R^ and R^ are hydrogen and X is oxygen;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable base-addition salt thereof;
together with a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
4,393,065
ANIMAL FEED AND PROCESS
Melvin J. DeGeeter; John M. McCall, both of Kalamazoo, and
Dirk L. Teagarden, Portage, all of Mich., assignors to The
Upjohn Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,943, Jun. 23, 1980, Pat. No.
4,316,901, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,944, Jun.
23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,307,093, and a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 161,945, Jun. 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,282,228, and a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,946, Jun. 23, 1980, Pat. No.
4,315,930, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,976, Jun.
23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,308,271. This application Apr. 14, 1981, Ser.
No. 249,762
Int. a.3 A61K 31/505, 27/00. 31/54, 31/53
U.S. a. 424—251 2 Qaims
1. A process for obtaining increased meat, milk, egg or wool
production in healthy animals comprising the administration to
a healthy animal a long acting comp>osition containing an
effective amount of a compound of the formula
H
1
R4
4,393,063
TREATMENT FOR GASTRIC LESIONS
Salvador E. Moncada, West Wickham, England, assignor to
Burroughs Wellcome Co., Research Triangle Park, N.C.
Division of Ser. No. 907,355, May 18, 1978, Pat. No. 4,337,254.
This application Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,853
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 23, 1977,
35261/77
Int. a.3 A61K 31/34. 31/44. 31/52. 31/505
U.S. a. 424—251 4 Qaims
1. A method for prophylaxis and/or treatment of a gastric
lesion in a mammal, which comprises simultaneously or se-
quentially internally administering 1 part by weight of (a) a
compound selected from the group consisting of prostacyclin,
dihydroprostacyclin, and their pharmaceutically acceptable
salts, in an amount insufficient to cause vasodilation, and 1 to
200 parts by weight of (b) a phosphodiesterase inhibitor se-
lected from the group consisting of theophylline, 3-isobutyl-I-
methyl xanthine, dipyridamole, a pharmaceutically acceptable
salt of theophylline, a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of
dipyridamole, and a pharmaceutically acceptable salt of 3-
isobutyl-1 -methyl xanthine.
X Y
Y
N
/ \
R3 R2
wherein
X is N;
Y is CR5;
R is alkyl of from 1 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, including
isomeric forms thereof;
Rl is R or
— N
\
H
R«
R2 and R3 are the same or different and are hydrogen, pro-
vided that R2 and R3 are not both hydrogen, R, cycloalkyl
of from 3 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, alkyl substituted
cycloalkyl of the formula
-@HR7)n,
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
711
alkenyl of from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, including
isomeric forms thereof, aralkyl wherein
Ar is phenyl or substituted phenyl wherein 1 or 2 hydrogens
are replaced with chlorine, fluorine, bromine, iodine, R,
— OR, or CF3, and the substituents can be the same or
different, and alkyl is from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, inclusive,
including isomeric forms thereof; and P2 and R3 taken
together with — N < is a heterocyclic moiety of from 3 to
8, inclusive, ring atoms and 1 or 2 hetero atoms selected
from the group consisting of nitrogen, oxygen or sulfur or
a substituted heterocyclic moiety wherein 0, 1, 2, or 3 of
the carbon atoms of the heterocycle are substituted with
R;
R4 is hydro|gen,
O
II
— c— o— r,
alkenyl of from 2 to 8 carbon atoms, inclusive, including
isomeric forms thereof, cycloalkyl of from 3 to 7 carbon
atoms, inclusive, or lower acyl wherein acyl is up to and
including 5 carbon atoms;
R5 is hydrogen, R, bromo or chloro;
R6 is hydrogen.
O
II
— c— o— r
or lower acyl; ^ -
R7 is hydrogen or alkyl of from 1 to 5 carbon atoms, inclu-
sive, including isomeric forms thereof;
n is an integer of from 2 to 7, inclusive, said composition
being in the form of an implant, bolus, or sterile injectable.
4,393,066
METHOD FOR TREATMENT OF HERPETIC LESIONS
David M. Garrett, 5711 39th St., Groves, Tex. 77619, and
Wallace R. Robin, 114 6th Ave., Nederland, Tex. 77627
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 271,039
Int. a.5 A61K 31/505
U.S. a. 424—251 1 Claim
1. A method of treating herpetic lesions comprising the
topical administration to the lesion site and surrounding tissue
area of a patient suffering from said lesions of an amount of
folic acid effective for treating said lesions.
Ri N
(CH2)„OCSR
in which R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, wherein alkyl is a
group containing up to 20 carbon atoms chlorophenyl or chlo-
robenzyl, R| is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and n is 1, 2, or 3.
67. A method of repelling insects from a locus to be pro-
tected therefrom, comprising applying to said locus an effec-
tive insect repelling amount of a compound having the formula
(CH2)„OCSR
in which R is alkyl, cycloalkyl, aralkyl, wherein alkyl is a
group containing up to 20 carbon atoms chlorophenyl or chlo-
robenzyl, Rj is hydrogen or lower alkyl, and n is I, 2, or 3.
4,393,069
8-ARYLALKYL-3-PHENYL-3-NORTROPANOLS AND
SALTS THEREOF
Adolf Langbein, Gau-Algesheim; Herbert Merz; Rainer Sobotta,
both of Ingelheim am Rhein; Rudolf Bauer, Wiesbaden; Hans
M. Jennewein, Walluf, and Joachim Mierau, Mainz, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to C. H. Boehringer Sohn,
Ingelheim am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,680
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 4,
1980, 3045688
Int. Q.^ C07D 401/02: A61K 31/46
U.S. Q. 424—265 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
Ar— X— CH2— CH2— CH2— N
4,393,067
NICOTINOYL ESTERS FOR ANALGESIC AND
ANTI-INFLAMMATORY TREATMENT
Alberto Reiner, Como, Italy, assignor to D and D Sri, Milan,
Italy
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 225,978, Jan. 19, 1981,
abandoned. This application Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,029
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jan. 19, 1980, 19354 A/80
Int. Q.3 A61K 31/435; C07D 213/62
U.S. Q. 424—256 6 Qaims
1. A method for the treatment of inflammation in a patient in
need of such treatment, said method comprising administering
to said patient a therapeutically effective amount of the nicoti-
noyl ester of (3-4)-0-isoproylidene pyridoxine.
4,393,068
PYRIDYLALKYL THIOCARBONATES AS INSECT
REPELLENTS
Rayman Y. Wong, 3411 Lowell Ave., Richmond, Calif. 94804
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 337,039
Int. Q.3 AOIN 43/40: C07D 213/46
U.S. Q. 424—263 84 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula
OH
wherein
Ar is
^..ri.ri^^.
Rl is hydrogen, fluorine, bromine, methyl or methoxy;
X is =CO, =CH— CN, =CH— OH, — 0-, — S— ,
— NH— ,
=c^\
or
CN
=c.-r\-.
and
712
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
R is hydrogen, 4-fluoro, 4-chloro, 4-trifluoromethyl, 3-tri-
fluoromethyl, 3-trifluoromethyl-4-chloro, 4-inethyl or
4-methoxy;
or a non-toxic, pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salt
thereof.
4,393,070
DIHYDROPYRIDINE DERIVATIVE, AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION COMPRISING
THE SAME
Yoshinari Sato, Takaishi, and Tsutomu Teraji, Osaka, both of
Japan, assignors to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 70,098, Aug. 27, 1979, Pat. No. 4,307,103.
This application Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,047
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 8, 1978,
36132/78
Int. a.3 C07D 213/55: A61K 31/44
U.S. a. 424—266 7 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
4,393,072
THIENYLBENZOIC ACID DERIVATIVES
Wulf Merkel; Dieter Bormann; Dieter Mania, all of Kelkbeim,
and Roman Muschaweck, Frankfurt am Main, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frank-
furt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. is a continuation of Ser. No. 94,059,
NoY. 14, 1979, abandoned. This application Sep. 16, 1982, Ser.
No. 418,649
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 16,
1978 2849646
Int. a.3 A61K 31/38: C07D 333/24
U.S. a. 424—275 9 Qaims
1. A thienylbenzoic acid compound of the formula
NH-(CH2)„-R'
COOR^
r2ooc
H2NO2S
or a pharmaceutical! y acceptable salt thereof with an acid or
base wherein,
Rl is phenyl, thienyl, furyl, or is phenyl, thienyl or furyl
substituted by halogen, — CF3, — CH3, or — OCH3;
R2 is hydrogen, halogen, or — CH3;
R3 is hydrogen, alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or
benzyl; and
n is 1 or 2.
COOR^
wherein
R' is cyano or trifluoromethyl,
R2 is [N-lower alkyl-N-mono- or dihalophenyl(lower)alkyl-
]amino(lower)alkyl;
R3 and R* are each lower alkyl, and
R5 is formyl, di(lower) alkoxymethyl or hydroxymethyl, and
pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
7. A pharmaceutical composition for treatment of hypertfn-
sion comprising, as an active ingredient, an effective amount of
the compound of claim 1, in association with a nontoxic, phar-
maceutically acceptable carrier or excipient.
4,393,073
PHARMACEUTICAL PREPARATIONS
Walter Boguth, Riehen, and Georges Hirth, Huningue, both of
France, assignors to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 228,792, Jan. 27, 1981, Pat. No. 4,339,447.
This application Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,621
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 7, 1980, 983/80
Int. a.3 A61U 31/07, 31/12. 31/33. 31/355
U.S. a. 424—284 6 Claims
1. A pharmaceutical preparation comprising an effective
amount of a vitamin selected from the group consisting of
vitamin A acetate, vitamin Ki and vitamin E and a solvent
containing a glycerol lower-alkyl ether selected from glycerol
1 -methyl ether, glycerol 1 -ethyl ether, glycerol 1,3-dimethyl
ether and glycerol, 1,2-dimethyl ether, said glycerol lower-
alkyl ether and said solvent being present in an amount suffi-
cient to dissolve said active ingredient.
4,393,071
METHOD OF TREATING GASTRIC, MAMMARY, LUNG
AND UTERUS TUMORS
Naoharu Fujii, No. 6-10, Jingumae 3-chome, Shibuya-ku, Tokyo,
and Noboru lijima. No. 2-1, Kyobashi, Chuo-ku, Tokyo, both
of Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 14,428, Feb. 23, 1979,
abandoned, and continuation of Ser. No. 559,018, Mar. 17,
1975, abandoned. This application Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No.
241.308
Int. a? A61K 31/40. 31/555
U.S. a. 424—274 8 Qaims
1. A method of treating in an animal body malignant tumors
selected from the group consisting of gastric tumor, mammary
tumor, lung tumor, and uterus tumor, comprising the step of
daily administering to the animal body of between 5 to 100 mg.
of protoporphyrin.
r
4,393,074
FLUORINATED CARBAMATE INSECTIODES
William J. Middleton, Chadds Ford, Pa., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 139,797, Apr. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,323,578,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 65,485, Sep. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,476
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/08: C07C 119/18: AOIN 37/52
U.S. a. 424—285 ' Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
CF3_
>
O
II
>=N-0— C— N— S„(0);„R
R^S CH3
wherein
July 12, \9l.
CHEMICAL
713
o
R is — N— C— OR , — CH2CHSNCOR' or
CH3
O
II
R5
I
R* CH3
R6
I
O
II
o
II
— N— C— O— N=C— (CH2)— C=N— O— C— N— S— N— C— OR'
CH3
where
R' is
CH3 CH3
O
CH3
CH3
wherein R' is methyl or methoxy, or the two R' groups
jointly represent — CH=CH— CH=CH— ,
X is — CH=CH— or — C=C— ,
Y' is hydrogen, carboxyl, cyano, C2-4 alkanoyloxy, ben-
zoyloxy or — COZ in which Z is amino or mono- or
di-CM alkylamino,
m is zero or an integer of 1 to 3,
n is zero or an integer of 1 to 10,
n' is an integer of 1 to 5,
k is an integer of 1 to 3, and
when k is 2 or 3, n' is optionally variable within the range of
1 to 5 in each occurrence of the — X — (CH2)n' group,
with the proviso that there are 8-15 carbon atoms in series
between the quinone ring and Y',
or its hydroquinone form,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
14. A method for suppressing the production of SRS-A in a
mammal in need thereof, which comprises administering to
said mammal an effective amount of a compound of the for-
mula:
R2 is Ci-Cfc alkyl; C3-C6 alkenyl, or
^.
4,393,075
QUINONE COMPOUNDS AND THEIR USE IN
SUPPRESSING THE PRODUCTION OF SRS-A IN
MAMMALS
Shinji Terao, Toyonaka; Mitsuru Shiraishi, Suita, and Yoshitaka
Maki, Kyoto, all of Japan, assignors to Takeda Chemical
Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 248,042
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 14, 1980, 55-49433;
Apr. 30, 1980, 55-58464; Dec. 27, 1980, 55-186622
Int a.3 A61K 31/12. 31/275: C07C 50/00
U.S. a. 424—304 14 Qaims
7. A compound of the formula:
I032O.G.--27
(CH2)„-f-X-(CH2)„irY'
(CH2)„-t-X-(CH2)„-JrY'
CH3
R-* is H;
n is 1 or 2;
m is 0 or 1
p is 0, 1 or 2;
R^or R^are independently H, C1-C4 alkyl, phenyl or phenyl
substituted with one atom of F, CI, Br or CH3;
provided that when:
(1) R is
O
II
— CH2CH— SNCOR',
L I
R* CH3
n must be 1;
(2) n is 2, m must be 0.
4. An insecticide composition consisting essentially of a
surfactant, diluent, and an effective amount of a compound of
claim 1.
wherein R' is methyl or methoxy, or the two R' groups
jointly represent — CH=CH— CH=CH— .
X is — CH=CH— or — C=C— ,
Y' is hydrogen, hydroxyl, carboxyl, cyano. C2-4 al-
kanoyloxy, benzoyloxy or — COZ in which Z is amino or
mono- or di-Ci^ alkylamino,
m is zero or an integer of 1 to 3,
n is zero or an integer of 1 to 10,
n' is an integer of 1 to 5,
k is an integer of 1 to 3, and
when k is 2 or 3, n' is optionally variable within the range of
1 to 5 in each occurrence of the — X — (CH2)«' group,
or its hydroquinone form,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof
4,393,076
ANTI-INFLAMMATORY AND ANALGESIC GEL
COMPOSITION
Kanji Noda, Chikushino; Akira Nakagawa; Tetsuya Yamagata,
both of Tosu, and Hiroyuki Ide, Fukuoka, all of Japan, assign-
ors to Hisamitsu Pharmaceutical Co., Inc., Tosu, Japan
Continuation-in-part bf Ser. No. 260,633, May 5, 1981,
abandoned. This application Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,887
Claims priority, application Japan, May 14, 1980, 55/65066;
May 14, 1980, 55/65067
Int. a.' A61K 31/19
U.S. a. 424—317 15 Qaims
1. An anti-inflammatory and analgesic gel composition com-
prising, by weight, 0.5-10% of ketoprofen as the effective
ingredient, 2-40% of a glycol selected from the group consist-
ing of propylene glycol, butylene glycol, polyethylene glycol,
polypropylene glycol, polyethylene glycol dodecyl ether and
glycerine, 20-55% of water, up to 60% of a lower alcohol
selected from the group consisting of ethanol, denatured etha-
nol, propanol and isopropanol, 0.5-5% of a gelling agent se-
lected from the group consisting of carboxyvinyl polymers,
hydroxycellulose, methylcellulose, carboxymethyiceilulose,
hydroxypropylcellulose and alginic acid-propylene glycol
ester and 0.1-3% of a neutralizing agent selected from the
group consisting of triethanolamine, diethylamine, triethylam-
ine, diisopropylamine and diisopropanolamine.
714
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,077
l-METHYLENE-1-PHENYLGUANIDINE COMPOUNDS
George H. EKiuglas, Malveni, and Henry F. Campbell, Lansdale,
both of Pa., assignors to William H. Rorer, Inc., Fort Wash-
ington, Pa.
FUed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 280,072
Int. a.3 A61K 31/155; C07C 129/08
U.S. a. 424—326 4 Qaims
1. A method for ganglionic blocking which comprises ad-
ministering an effective amount of a compound of the formula
N— R3
R3-Y
and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof, wherein
Xi and X2 each represent a member selected from the group
consisting of hydrogen, halo, trifluoromethyl, acyl, alkyl,
hydroxy, alkoxy and amino,
Rl, R2, and R3 each represent a member selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl and lower
alkenyl and
R represents a member selected from the group consisting of
cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl and aryl,
also, R3 and either Ri or R2 can constitute a methylene
bridge, — (CH2)2— or — (CH2)3— , resulting in the forma-
tion of a five- or six-membered ring.
CH— X— CH3
wherein
X is CO or CHOH;
Y is CO;
the dotted line represents a double bond which is present or
absent;
Rl is hydrogen or methyl;
R2 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methyl, trifluo-
romethyl, methoxyl, hydroxy! or nitro; and
R3 is phenyl unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 substitu-
ents selected from the group consisting of fluorine, chlo-
rine, bromine, methyl, ethyl, methoxyl, ethoxyl, hydroxyl,
trifluoromethyl, nitro, methylthio or methylsulphonyl;
in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
2. A method of treating inflammation in humans and animals
which comprises administering to a human or animal in need
thereof an anti-inflammatory amount of a compound of the
formula
R3-Y.
4,393,078
BUPROPION AND ETHANOL
Anthony W. Peck, Bromley, England, assignor to Burroughs
Wellcome Co., Research Triangle Park, N.C.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,354
Int. a.3 A61K 31/135
U.S. a. 424—330 9 Qaims
1. A method of reversing the impaired mental alertness
effects of ethanol in a human, which comprises administering
to a human who has consumed alcohol an effective, non-toxic
amount of the compound of formula (I)
(I)
CH3
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof to
reverse the mental alertness effects of ethanol in the human.
433,079
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSmONS
William G. Cole, Twickenham; Alexander C. Goudie, Harlow,
and Carl J. Rose, London, all of England, assignors to Bee-
cham Group Limited, United Kingdom
Division of Ser. No. 599,638, Jun. 20, 1975, Pat No. 4,062,978.
This appUcation Dec. 15, 1976, Ser. No. 750,684
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 4, 1974,
29651/74
lat a.J A61K 31/12: C07C 49/248
U.S. a. 424—331 14 Claims
1. A pharmaceutical composition useful for the treatment of
inflammation in humans and animals which comprises an anti-
inflammatory amount of a compound of the formula
CH— X— CH3
wherein
X is CO or CHOH;
Y is CO;
the dotted line represents a double bond which is present or
absent;
Rl is hydrogen or methyl;
R2 is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methyl, trifluo-
romethyl, methoxyl, hydroxyl or nitro; and
R3 is phenyl unsubstituted or substituted by 1 or 2 substitu-
ents selected from the group consisting of fluorine, chlo-
rine, bromine, methyl, ethyl, methoxyl, ethoxyl, hydroxyl,
trifluoromethyl, nitro, methylthio or methylsulphonyl;
in combination with a pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4,393,080
ADHESIVE COMPOSmONS
John M. Pawelchak, East Windsor, James L. Chen, East Bruns-
wick; John G. Cryan, East Brunswick, and Anthony L. LaVia,
East Brunswick, all of N.J., assignors to E. R. Squibb & Sons,
Inc., Princeton, N.J.
FUed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,284
Int. a.3 C09J 7/02; B32B 9/00
U.S. a. 428—355 31 Claims
15. A skin barrier comprising an adhesive layer having a thin
continuous or discontinuous polymeric film laminated to one
surface of the adhesive, said adhesive comprising a substan-
tially homogeneous mixture on a percent weight basis of from
about 30% to about 70% of a pressure sensitive viscous adhe-
sive material and an optional thermoplastic elastomer said
pressure sensitive adhesive material selected from the group
consisting of natural rubber, silicone rubber, acrylonitrile rub-
ber, polyurethane rubber, and polyisobutylenes and said op-
tional thermoplastic elastomer selected from the group consist-
ing of medium molecular weight polyisobutylenes, butyl rub-
ber, and styrene copolymers and from about 3% to 60% by
weight of one or more natural or synthetic polymers capable of
developing elastomeric properties when hydrated selected
July 12, 198:
CHEMICAL
715
from the group consisting of gluten and long chain polymers of
methyl vinyl ether/maleic acid.
ruminal fluid by the regenerant action of saliva entering
the rumen during rumination.
433,081
METHYL 3-ACETAMIDO-2-(5-METHOXY.INDOL-3-YL)
PROPANOATE AND HYPOTENSIVE USE THEREOF
Robert N. Schut, Edwardsburg, Mich.; Max E. Safdy, Elkhart,
Ind., and Enrique Hong, Cerro San Francisco, Mexico, assign-
ors to Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart, Ind.
Filed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,638
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 11,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K 31/405; C07D 209/20
U.S. a. 424—274 2 Qaims
1. Methyl 3-acetamido-2-(5-methoxyindol-3-yl) propanoate
of the formula:
CH3O
CO2CH3 O
I II
CHCH2NHC— CH3.
433,083
METHOD FOR PRODUCING GRAPE MUST AND WINE
Masazumi Watanabe, Kashiwa; Mikio Uehara, Noda; Yoshimi
Shimazu, Noda; Jiro Ishiyama, Noda, and Motohiko Kato,
Noda, all of Japan, assignors to Kikkoman Corporation, Noda,
Japan
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,497
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1980, 55-91749; Jul.
8, 1980, 55-92285
Int. a.^ C12G 1/02; C12P 7/20
U.S. a. 426—15 7 Claims
1. A noble botrytized grape must enriched in glycerol con-
tent to about 6% (w/v) or more obtained by adding a com-
pound selected from the group consisting of cyclic-3',5'-adeny-
lic acid; an alkali metal salt of cyclic-3',5'-adenylic acid; an
alkaline earth metal salt of cyclic-3',5'-adenylic acid; N^O^-
dibutyl-cyclic-3',5'-adenylic acid and N*-butylestercyclic-3',5'-
adenylic acid to a grape must and fermenting the grape must
aerobically with mycelia of Botrytis cinerea.
2. A method of treating hypertension in a individual requir-
ing such treatment which comprises administering to such
individual an anti-hypertensively effective amount of a com-
pound of the formula:
CO2CH3 O
I II
•CHCH2NHC— CH3.
"*CO
H
4,393,082
ION EXCHANGE MATERIALS TO INCREASE
CONSUMPTION OF NON-PROTEIN NITROGEN BY
RUMINANTS
Joe L. White, Lafayette, and Alvin J. Ohb-ogge, West Lafayette,
both of Ind., assignors to Purdue Research Foundation, West
Lafayette, Ind.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 715,973, Aug. 19, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 89,579,
Not. 16, 1970, abandoned. This application Jul. 5, 1977, Ser. No.
812,797
Int. a.3 A23K 1/22
U.S. a. 426—2 19 Claims
1. A method for feeding ruminants urea or biuret as a non-
4,393,084
BREAD MIX AND PROCESS
Seymour Pomper, Stamford, and Glenn D. LaBaw, Greenwich,
both of Conn., assignors to Nabisco Brands, Inc., Parsippany,
N.J.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,703
Int. a.5 A21D 8/00. 10/00
U.S. a. 426—19 26 Qaims
1. A process for preparing bread which comprises: mixing
water with a dry bread mix to form a dough, the dry mix
comprising flour, from 1.5 to 2.5% quick-leavening active dry
yeast, and from 0.1 to 0.75% of a dough conditioner selected
from the group consisting of calcium stearoyl-2-Iactylate,
sodium stearoyl-2-lactylate, and mixtures of these, all percent-
ages based on the weight of the dry mix; shaping the dough
into units for baking; proofing the shaped units for from about
30 to about 45 minutes; and baking.
4,393,085
ENZYME DIGESTION FOR A DOG FOOD OF
IMPROVED PALATABILITY
Joseph E. Spradlin; Jeffrey D. Morgan, both of Bourbonnaise;
Allan R. Olson, Ashkun, and Joseph P. Howley, Flossmoor,
all of III., assignors to General Foods Corporation, White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,473
Int. aj A23K 1/00. 1/18
U.S. a. 426—28 17 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a nutritionally-balanced dog food
protein nitroen (NPN) compound and for mitigating the toxic j^avjng improved palatability, said dog food comprising fat,
effects of high ammonium ion content in ruminal fluid pro- protein, carbohydrates, vitamins and minerals and containing
duced by decomposition of said NPN compound to ammonia of a weight basis from 20% to 80% farinaceous ingredients and
in the rumen during post-feeding fermentation and conversion fjo^, 20% to 80% proteinaceous ingredients, including pro-
to protein amino acids, which comprises: teinaceous meaty material at from about 25% to about 55% by
(a) introducing into the rumen at least one foraminous bolus vveight of the proteinaceous ingredients, said process compris-
xjontaining a crystalline alumino silicate cation exchange jng the steps of:
material in an amount sufficient to substantially reduce the
ammonium ion content of the ruminal fluid during said
post-feeding fermentation and decomposition of said NPN
compound, said bolus being of sufficient size, weight,
and/or shape to remain in the rumen,
(b) maintaining said bolus in the rumen during a large num-
ber of digestive cycles, and
(c) feeding said ruminant urea or biuret, the resulting ammo-
nium ions formed in the post-feeding fermentaion and
decomposition of said NPN compound being partially
exchanged onto the cation exchange material to substan-
tially reduce the ammonium ion content of the ruminal
fluid, and thereafter being gradually released into the
(a) preparing a slurry comprising water, from about 5% to
about 25% of the total weight of said farinaceous ingredi-
ents, and a major portion of the proteinaceous meaty
material;
(b) forming a reaction product by treating said slurry with
added alpha-amylase and added protease enzymes in an
amount and under conditions effective to convert at least
a portion of the farinaceous material to a mixture of oligo
saccharides ranging in size from 1 to 10 monomer units,
and at least a jxjrtion of the proteinaceous material to a
mixture of peptides ranging in size from 2 to 300 monomer
units, and effective to reduce the viscosity of the slurry by
50%; and thereafter.
716
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(c) incorporating the reaction product of the slurry into a
dog food in an amount effective to provide a significant
increase in the palatability of the dog food to dogs.
said mixture becomes sterihzed without damage to said
container.
4,393,086
DIETARY PRODUCT CONTAINING GLUCOMANNAN
POWDER AND METHOD FOR PREPARING
Yoshinari Masuyama, No. 5-19- 19, Higashi Gotanda, Shinaga-
wa-Ku, Tokyo, Japan 141
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 96,160, Nov. 20, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,382
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 19, 1979, 54-134156
Int. a.3 A23L J /SO
U.S. a. 426—74 3 Qaims
1. A dietary powder composition in the form of a tablet
which comprises 20 to 50 parts by weight of glucomannan
powder having an average particle size of 100 to 200 mesh, 5 to
10 parts by weight of beef bone dust containing marrow and
having an average particle size of 100 and 200 mesh, and 20 to
50 parts by weight of lactose powder having an average parti-
cle size of 80 to 150 mesh.
4,393,087
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A FLOATING
AQUATIC FOOD PELLET
Richard D. Sullins, Manchester, Mo., and Kent J. Lanter, Mill-
stadt, 111., assignors to Ralston Purina Company, St. Louis,
Mo.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,882
Int. a.3 A23K 1/175
UJS. a. 426—74 29 Claims
1. A process for the production of a floating aquatic food
pellet comprising:
(a) forming a first mixture of proteinaceous and farinaceous
materials with fat and sufficient expanded grain particles
to provide floatability for said pellets;
(b) separately forming a hardenable carbohydrate matrix and
combining said matrix with said first mixture,
(c) pelleting the combined matrix and mixture by the appli-
cation of heat and pressure with the matrix preventing
compaction of the expanded grain particles to and form a
floating aquatic food pellet with good structural integrity
in water.
4,393,089
MICROBIAL HETEROPOLYSACCHARIDE
Roger B. Cox, Reading, and David C. Steer, Wirral, both of
England, assignors to Lever Brothers Company, New York,
N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 166,220, Jul. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4,329,448.
This application Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,510
Qalms priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 10, 1979,
7924040; Dec. 20, 1979, 7943878
Int. a.3 A23L 1/04. 1/24
U.S. a. 426—573 6 Qaims
1. An edible composition comprising a thickening or sus-
pending amount of Biopolymer PS 87 wherein said Biopoly-
mer PS 87 is a heteropolysaccharide which comprises from 40
to 45% by weight of glucose, from 10 to 20% by weight galac-
tose, from 25 to 30% by weight mannose, from 16 to 13% by
weight glucuronic acid and from 0 to 1.5% by weight fucose,
a 1% by weight solution of said Bioj)olymer PS 87 having
pseudoplastic properties, a consistency at 20° C. of at least 1 50
poise and a yield stress value at 20° C. of at least 30 dynes/cm^.
4,393,088
STERILIZING PROCESS FOR FOODS BY APPLYING
MICROWAVES THERETO
Osamu Matsusaka, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi
Monsanto Chemical Company, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,621
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 26, 1979, 54-123660
Int. C\? A23L 3/ 10; B65B 55/16
U.S. a. 426—234 7 aaims
1. A sterilizing process for a food mixture by applying mi-
crowaves thereto, comprising the sequential steps of:
placing a solid food material into a container which is capa-
ble of transmitting microwaves therethrough; then
feeding a liquid material having an elevated temperature
close to the temperature that said mixture is to be heated
to and 80° C. to 100° C. higher than that of said solid food
material into said container; whereby said container is
completely filled with the mixture of said solid and liquid
food materials;
hermetically sealing said container before said mixture of
said solid and liquid food materials reaches an equilibrium
temf)erature thereof to thereby allow for some contraction
on cooling before applying the next step; and
applying microwaves under ambient pressure to said con-
tainer before said mixture reaches an equilibrium tempera-
ture to raise the temperature of the mixture of said solid
and said liquid materials in said sealed container to a
sterilizing temperature of from 70° to 105° C, whereby
4,393,090
BEEF PRODUCT FOR COOKING ON A VERTICAL
ROTISSERIE
James H. Coroneos, 11335 Frederick Rd., West Friendship, Md.
21043
Continuation of Ser. No. 166,481, Jul. 7, 1980, abandoned, which
is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 917,077, Jun. 19, 1978, Pat.
No. 4,245,373. This application May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,360
Int. a.3 A23L 1/31
U.S. a. 426—646 1 Qaim
1. A beef product for cooking on a vertical rotisserie com-
prising ingredients which are listed in the order of predomi-
nance in the following percentages of the total product:
beef, 75.5 percent;
water, 9.0 percent;
onions, 7.5 percent;
textured vegetable protein, 4.5 percent;
salt, 1.5 percent;
paprika, 1.5 percent; and
spices, 0.5 percent;
said beef product prepared from said ingredients by the process
comprising; cutting beef into small pieces and grinding said
pieces in a mechanical grinder, regrinding the ground meat
a second time;
preparing a mixture of the additive ingredients comprising, the
water, onions, textured vegetable protein, salt, paprika, and
spices;
spreading the ground beef on a working surface and introduc-
ing the mixture of additive ingredients evenly over the
ground beef, kneading the combination of ground beef and
the additive ingredients until the additive ingredients are
thoroughly and evenly mixed throughout the ground beef;
placing the prepared mixture of ground beef and additive
ingredients into a cylindrical mold and mechanically com-
pressing the mixture in the mold to squeeze out substantially
all of the entrapped air within the mixture, said compressing
of the mixture in the mold providing a concave top surface
which is necessary to permit subsequent expansion of the
meat mixture to an essentially flat top surface when the
compressive force is subsequently removed, said compress-
ing of the meat mixture in said mold forming said meat
mixture into an integrated unit comparable to an original
meat mass, said flat surface being necessary for subsequent
cooking of a plurality of molded meat units;
while the compressed mixture is still under pressure in the
mold, inserting a hollow plastics skewer sleeve through a
center guide opening in center of said mold and into the
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
717
center of the compressed mixture, using a solid mandrel to
force the skewer sleeve into place;
removing the mandrel, leaving the skewer sleeve in place in
the compressed mixture, removing the compression force
from the mixture in the mold, removing the mold, the highly
compressed molded unit of prepared beef being solid and
unitary in form;
wrapping the molded unit carefully in suitable wrapping means
and transporting the molded unit on a support means to a
freezer means;
when frozen, the molded unit, separately or in conjunction
with other molded units, is ready and easily handable for
placing on a vertical rotisserie and is ready for cooking, said
hollow plastics skewer sleeve providing a preformed aper-
ture for a skewer which could not otherwise be inserted
through a frozen meat unit; and
when cooking said product placing at least one frozen molded
unit on a vertical rotisserie skewer by passing said skewer
through said skewer sleeve in the center of said frozen
molded unit, placing said skewer, with said molded unit
thereon, on the vertical rotisserie and cooking, said flat top
surface facilitating and accommodating the addition of other
molded units on said skewer in a similar manner, a plurality
of molded units thereby being capable of being cooked on a
vertical rotisserie at the same time.
4 393 092
METHOD FOR CONTROLLING THE CONDUCTIVITY
OF POLYIMIDE RLMS AND IMPROVED DEVICES
UTILIZING THE METHOD
Graham P. Gill, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, 111.
Filed Mar. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 357,375
Int. CI.5 B05D 3/06. 5/12
U.S. a. 427—38 20 Qaims
SU8S'»»'E
SU85Tl!«'f
irBO"
IFOOH
PHCVIOUS
PBCHOUS
peocrss'
peoct5S>
, , r«ppiY p
4,393,091
METHOD OF VACUUM DEPOSITING A LAYER ON A
PLASTIC FILM SUBSTRATE
Koichi Shinohara, Kobe, and Takashi Fujita, Kawanishi, both of
Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Kadoma, Japan
Filed Jun, 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,119
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 10, 1980, 55-78593;
Jun. 10, 1980, 55-78609
Int. a.3 B05D 3/00. 3/06
U.S. a. 427—13 5 Claims
PBOCCSSING
5. In a process for fabricating electronic devices utilizing a
pattern of conductor regions in contact with a polymer layer,
wherein portions of said polymer layer have been exposed to
energetic particles, the improvement comprising, thereafter
exposing said portions of said polymer layer to a low energy
gaseous plasma.
•"■""1
b
? ?
n le
^<3
4,393,093
PREPARATION OF HIGH GAMMA (a)PHASE
POLY(VINYLIDENE FLUORIDE) PIEZOELECTRIC
MATERIALS
Oliver S. Sprout, Jr., Glenside, Pa., assignor to Pennwalt Corpo-
ration, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,823
Int. CI.' B05D 5/12
U.S. a. 427—40 7 Claims
1. A method of vacuum depositing a layer on a plastic film
prior to winding the film comprising the steps of:
transporting the film along a metal surface which is movable
with the film, said metal surface being grounded and
which metal serves to control the temperature of the film
in contact therewith by conducting heat away from said
film;
rendering said fijm in an electret state with a surface poten-
tial higher than 150 V, prior to or at the same time as the
film contacts the metal surface, whereby said film is elec-
~^ trostatically attracted to said metal surface, thereby in-
creasing the efficiency of the heat conduction between the
film and the metal surface;
depositing a material on the portion of said film which is
opposite the portion in contact with said metal surface;
and
neutralizing the surface potential of said film so as to render
it into a non-electret state after said deposition step and
prior to winding the film.
mmui (■-'
1. A process for increasing the piezoelectric activity of a
vinylidene fluoride polymer containing an a crystalline phase
and having an a//3 ratio of at least about 0.05 comprising
treating the polymer with a glow discharge at reduced pres-
sure to convert a portion of the a crystalline phase to y crystal-
line phase and then poling the polymer in an electric field.
718
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393,094
STABILIZATION OF ELECTRON BEAM CURABLE
COMPOSITIONS FOR IMPROVED EXTERIOR
DURABILITY
David L. Garrett, Jr., Southfield, and Joseph C. Cassatta, Tay-
lor, both of Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Company, Dear-
bom, Mich.
FUed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,946
Int. a.3 B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 427-44 *9 Claims
1. A coating composition polymerizable by low dosage
ionizing radiation, which comprises an organic resin/monomer
mixture of:
(A) between about 97 and about 3 weight percent alpha-beta
olefinically unsaturated organic resin containing between
about 0.5 and about 5 vinyl unsaturation units per 1000
units molecular weight of said resin; and
(B) between about 3 and about 97 weight percent vinyl
monomers polymerizable with said resin upon exposure to
radiation, said vinyl monomers including N-vinyl-2-pyr-
rolidone in an amount of between about 3 and about 20
weight percent based on the total weight of (A) and (B);
and
(C) about 0.5 to about 5.0 parts each per 100 parts of the total
of said organic resin and said monomer of:
(i) benzotriazole selected from the group consisting of
compounds having the formula:
HO Ri
a>^
R2
wherein Ri or R2 = H or an alkyl group of C1-C25; and
(ii) hindered amine selected from the group consisting of
amine having the formula:
0
II
o— c-
(CH3)2
-(CH2)8-
O
II
-c— o
N
I
R
(CHih (CH3)2
N
I
R
(CH3)2
rolidone which is included in said composition in an
amount of between about 3 and about 20 weight percent
based on the total weight of (A) and (B); and
(C) about 0.5 to about 5.0 parts each per 100 parts of the total
of said organic resin and said monomer of:
(i) benzotriazole selected from the group consisting of
compounds having the formula:
where Ri or R2=H or an alkyl group of C1-C25; and
(ii) hindered amine selected from the group consisting of
amines having the formula:
(CH3)2
(CH2)8-
(CH3)2 (CH3)2
O
II
-c— o
N
I
R
(CH3)2
wherein R = H or methyl.
4,393,095
CHEMICAL VAPOR DEPOSITION OF VANADIUM
OXIDE COATINGS
Charles B. Greenberg, Murrysville, Pa., assignor to PPG Indus-
tries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,257
Int. a.3 B05D 5/12. 3/02; C03C 17/245
U.S. a. 427—87 17 Qaims
wherein R = H or methyl.
32. A method for coating a substrate, the coating composi-
tion polymerizable by low dosage ionizing radiation, which
comprises:
(A) applying a first coating composition comprising up to
about 60 weight percent pigment to the surface of a pre-
pared substrate;
(B) curing said first coating composition by exposure to an
electron beam until an adherent dry coating is formed;
(C) applying a second coating composition comprising 0-10
weight percent pigment to the coated surface of said
substrate; and
(D) curing said second coating composition by exposure to
an electron beam until an adherent dry coating is formed;
wherein said first coating composition and said second coating
composition comprises an organic resin/monomer mixture of:
(A) between about 97 and about 3 weight percent alpha-beta
olefinically unsaturated organic resin containing between
about 0.5 and about 5 vinyl unsaturation units per 1000
units molecular weight of said resin; and
(B) between about 3 and about 97 weight percent vinyl
monomers polymerizable with said resin upon exposure to
radiation, said vinyl monomers comprising N-vinyl-2-pyr-
10 12 14 16 I' 2a 22
MVELENGTH (KICRONS)
1. A method for the chemical vapor deposition of vanadium
oxide films comprising the steps of:
a. heating a glass substrate to a sufficient temperature to
convert a vanadium compound to vanadium oxide;
b. vaporizing a liquid vanadium compound;
c. contacting a surface of said heated glass substrate with the
vapor of said vanadium compound to deposit a vanadium
oxide film on the glass surface.
July 12, 198: 1
CHEMICAL
719
4,393,096
ALUMINUM-COPPER ALLOY EVAPORATED HLMS
WITH LOW VIA RESISTANCE
Joseph J. Gajda, Wappingers Falls, N.Y., assignor to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 321,833, Nov. 16, 1981,
abandoned. This application Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,174
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/285
U.S. a. 427—90 4 Qaims
1. A method of fabricating thin film interconnected meUlli-
zation on a dielectric coated integrated circuit substrate having
ohmic contact via openings through said dielectric to elements
of said circuit, comprising:
forming a vacuum environment about said substrate;
heating said substrate in said vacuum environment to between
about 180° C. to about 200° C. to condition said substrate for
deposition of first level metallization film;
discontinuing said heating and coincidently initiating evapora-
tion of said first level metallization to deposit, during cooling
of said substrate, a first aluminum-copper metal film over
said dielectric and in said ohmic contact via openings;
defining in said first metallization film a predetermined inter-
connection pattern to said circuit elements;
depositing a dielectric layer over said first metallization level
and said dielectric coating;
forming a second pattern of via openings in said dielectric layer
to expose selected portions of said first metallization pattern;
dry etching to sputter clean said exposed first level metalliza-
tion pattern and said dielectric layer in an inert atmosphere
and at ambient temperatures;
initiating evaporation of a second level aluminum-copper film
at ambient temperatures over said dielectric layer and in said
second vias and
coincidentally initiating heating of said substrate to a tempera-
ture in the range of about 150° C. to about 200° C. over the
deposition time of said evaporation of said second level
metallization.
Si3N4 matrix and codeposited carbon uniformly distributed in
said matrix, having an electrical conductivity o- of a formula
o- = oroexp(-E/2kT)
wherein ctoK an electrical conductivity at 0° K., E is a value of
0.02-0.06 eV, k is the Boltzmann constant and T is an absolute
temperature, a carbon content of about 0.2-10% by weight, an
electrical conductivity a of about lO^^ to 10- ' fl- ' cm- ' at
a temperature from ambient to about 900° C, a density of about
2.7 to 3.0 g/cm^, a thermal conductivity of about 0.004-0.010
cal/cm-secK at ambient temperature, a specific heat of about
0.16 cal/gK at ambient temperature, a thermal diffusivity of
about 0.010-0.022 cmVsec at ambient temperature, and a
micro Vickers hardness of about 2,500-3,500 kg/mm^ (100 g
load) at ambient temperature by chemical vapor deposition
process, which comprises reacting SiCU as silicon source gas,
a nitrogen source gas and a hydrogen source gas with a carbon
source gas at a deposition condition df a deposition tempera-
ture of about 1,100° to 1,300° C. under a reduced total pressure
of about 30-70 mmHg in a reaction furnace to deposit the
Si3N4-C series amorphous material on a surface of a substrate
selected from the group consisting of graphite, silicon carbide
and silicon nitride, the substrate being heated to said deposition
temperature.
4,393,098
PROCESS FOR DEVELOPING A COATING HLM ON A
HEATED GLASS SHEET
Wilbur G. Stinson, Southgate; Lawrence J. Schwei, Ypsilanti,
and Sandy T. S. Vong, Ann Arbor, all of Mich., assignors to
Ford Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
per No. PCrAJS82/01036, § 371 Date Jul. 29, 1982, § 102(e)
Date Jul. 29, 1982
PCT Filed Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 425,195
Int. a.^ B05D 1/12; C03C 17/23
U.S. CI. 427—168 7 Qaims
JO
4^
rn
I
i
J
3-^^)-Mp) — ^
/S ^^ /<^ '-9
4 393,097
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE SI3N4-C SERIES
AMORPHOUS MATERIAL AND A METHOD OF
1 1 PRODUCING THE SAME
Toshio Hiral, 4-91, Takamori 3-Chome, and Takashi Goto,
2-12-304, Kuromatsu 3-Chome, both of Izumi, Japan
Filed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,168
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 24, 1979, 54-93942
Int. a.3 B05D 1/12; C23C 11/00; B32B 9/04
U.S. a. 427—94 1* Claims
1. A process for developing a coating film on a surface of a
sheet of glass, the sheet of glass being at a temperature in a
range of 510°-625° C, which process is characterized by the
step of:
engaging the surface of the heated glass sheet with a spray
powder composition which comprises a plurality of hol-
low, generally spherical particles, each particle generally
being formed from heat decomposable, organo-metallic
salts of at least two metals.
Floti Utm S, CU Hntnar
Gas Pun fur V ^ /?,
Htttm
NH3
Gas
V Gmphitt Hwctar
\ Sutstm
'*' -'' ' „
SiCtt 'Mt'CjHt DouUt ruM
Gas Natna
1. A method of producing massive and pure Si3N4-C series
amorphous material composed of a deposited amorphous
4,393,099
METHOD FOR WINDING VULCANIZABLE TAPE
Alfio Deregibus, Padua, Italy, assignor to The Goodyear Tire &
Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 32,629, Apr. 23, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 841,786, Oct. 13, 1977, Pat. No.
4,177,755. This appUcation Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,177
Oaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 5, 1977, 23159 A/77
Int. a.3 B05D 1/36, 3/12
U.S. CI. 427 177 ^ Claims
1. A method, for the formation of a tape having raw vulcan-
izable rubber exposed at one major face of the tape and fabric
720
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
exposed at the other major face of the tape, which comprises
the steps of:
(i) entraining the tape about successive spaced guide rollers
such that the portion of tape lying between the rollers is
substantially horizonul and has said one major face of raw
vulcanisable rubber exposed upwardly;
(ii) depositing downwardly onto said upwardly exposed
substantially horizontal major face of said tape portion a
layer of zinc stearate powder to provide a powder-bearing
face on which some of said powder is secured by tackiness
0
i»t
«J mc
^:§\ I
1
22
m T
24i
2«
of the rubber to serve as an anti-adherent, whereas other
of said powder remains loose on said upwardly exposed
face;
(iii) causing said tape as it leaves the downstream one of said
guide rollers to have a portion of its length passing up-
wardly at an inclination, and
(iv) acting with a rotary brush, disposed at an intermediate
position along the upwardly inclined portion of tape, on
said powder-bearing face for removing from said face that
powder which remains loose on said face.
4^93,101
DIETHYNYLBENZENE-ETHYNYLPYRENE
COPOLYMERS
Norman Bilow, Encino, Calif., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 307,345, Sep. 30, 1981, Pat. No. 4,369,297.
This application Jun. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 387,580
Int. C\? B05D 3/02
LI.S. a. 427—228 1 Claim
1. A method for the production of a resinous impregnated
carbon-carbon composite ablative material which comprises
the steps of (1) forming an interwoven graphite fiber structure,
(2) impregnating said structure with a matrix resinous precur-
sor composed of a polymerizable mixture of diethynylbenzene
and ethynylpyrene, (3) heating said impregnated structure at a
temperature and for a period of time sufficient to effect the
copolymerization of said mixture (4) further heating said poly-
merized structure at a temperature, pressure and period of time
sufficient to pyrolyze said structure (5) graphitizing said pyro-
Hzed structure and (6) recovering the resulting carbon-carbon
composite structure.
4,393,100
METHOD OF COATING A FUSED SILICA ENVELOPE
Ralph M. Potter, Pepper Pike, Ohio, assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 107,253, Dec. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,339,686.
This application Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,462
Int. a? B05D 5/12
U.S. a. 427—181 1 Claim
1. A method of applying a coating of fiber like shaped parti-
cles selected from the group consisting of refractory metal
oxides, oxynitrides, and nitrides or mixtures thereof to the
interior surface of a fused silica envelope comprising:
an initial heating of said envelope above red heat to assure
surface cleanliness and dryness;
coating a quantity of said film like shaped particles with an
ultrafine, reactive powder that sinters or melts when
strongly heated;
mulling said coated fiber like shaped particles into a viscous
solution having a solvent and a solute wherein said solute
is an acceptable binder, said mulling resulting in suspen-
sion of said coated fiber like shaped particles in said solu-
tion;
applying said suspension to said envelope interior;
vaporizing said solvent;
removing said binder by heating said envelope; and
applying additional heat to said envelope to fuse said powder
to said fiber like shaped particles and thereby bind said
fiber like shaped particles to each other and cause adhe-
sion of said fiber like shaped particles to said envelope.
4,393,102
NET FINISHING COMPOSITION AND PROCESS FOR
USING SAME
Richard J. Guglielmo, Sr., 140 Walnut St., Northvale, N.J.
07647
Filed Mar. 20, 1978, Ser. No. 888,373
Int. C\? B05D 5/00, 1/18; C08K 5/07; C08L 27/06
U.S. a. 427— 243 14 Qaims
1. A concentrate solution for preparing a net finishing solu-
tion for treating a net substrate to improve the physical proper-
ties thereof which comprises:
a solution of a low molecular weight, high acetate content,
vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer; a monomeric
plasticizer and a polymeric plasticizer in a solvent system,
said copolymer having a molecular weight of from 20,000
to 65,000 and having an acetate content of from about 10
to about 20 percent by weight, said monomeric and poly-
meric plasticizers being present in an amount of from
about 40 to 60 parts per 100 parts of said copolymer, the
ratio of said monomeric plasticizer to said polymeric
plasticizer being in the range of from 1:1 to 3:1, said sol-
vent system being present in an amount to effect a solids
content of said concentrate solution of between about 45
to 55 percent by weight.
9. A process for treating a net substrate formed of a synthetic
material to improve the physical properties thereof, which
comprises:
(a) coating said net substrate with a net finishing solution
comprised of a low molecular weight, high acetate con-
tent vinyl chloride-vinyl acetate copolymer, a monomeric
plasticizer and a polymeric plasticizer in a solvent system,
said copolymer having a molecular weight of from 20,000
to 65,000 and having an acetate content of from about 10
to about 20 percent by weight, said monomeric and poly-
meric plasticizers being present in an amount of from
about 40 to 60 parts per 100 parts of said copolymer, the
ratio of said monomeric plasticizer to said polymeric
plasticizer being in range of from 1:1 to 3:1, said solvent
system including ketones and being present in an amount
to result in a solids content of from 20 to 40 percent by
weight of said net finishing solutions; and
(b) drying said coated net substrate.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
721
4,393,103
ERASABLE DENSE PAPER AND IMPROVED METHOD
OF MANUFACTURING
William G. Louden, c/o Louden and Company, Erwinna, Pa.
18920
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,104
Int. a.3 B05D 3/02; B32B 23/08. 27/10
U.S. a. 427—391 15 Qaims
1. A process for manufacturing dense paper comprising the
steps, performed in the following sequence, of:
advancing a web of paper having a dry uncalendered density
in a range of between about 7 to about 14 Ibs./mil.;
applying to the advancing web an aqueous dispersion con-
taining a blend of a rigid polymeric material and an inor-
ganic filler, said blend consisting essentially of from about
35 to about 90% of said polymeric material, from about 10
to about 65% of said inorganic filler, and an organic com-
pound of tin in a range of about 0.10% to about 2.0%, said
percentages being by weight based on the non-tin portion
of the weight of the blend, said rigid polymeric material
having a glass transition temperature in a range of be-
tween about 15 to about 60° C.;
removing the excess dispersion from said web; and
heating said web after the excess dispersion has been re-
moved to fuse said blend to said web so that the resulting
paper comprises in a range of between about 8.5% to
about 50%, by weight of the blend, said weight being
based on the dry weight of the web.
13. The process according to claim 1 wherein said polymeric
material of said blend is selected from the group of materials
consisting of polyvinyl acetate, polyacrylate, and polyvinyl
chloride.
4,393,104
TABLE PLACEMAT
Helen M. Fink, 8 Indian Dawn, Wayland, Mass. 01778, assignor
to Helen M. Fink, Hastings-on-Hudson, N.Y.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,705
Int. aj A47G 23/00; B65D 65/02
U.S. CI. 428—7 7 Claims
1. A placemat of a type placed on a tabletop for organizing
a table setting, the placemat comprising:
rigid support means for defining a predetermined shape of
the placemat, said rigid support means being formed of a
substantially flat, rigid material having a perdetermined
thickness and respective first and second surfaces ar-
ranged parallel to the tabletop, said first surface facing
away from the tabletop and having a predetermined sur-
face area, said second surface facing toward the tabletop;
first cover means removable attached to said rigid support
means, said first cover means being formed of a flexible
material having a surface area greater than said predeter-
mined surface area of said first surface of said rigid sup-
port means, said first cover means being arranged over
said first surface of said rigid support means so as to have
an extending portion of said first cover means which
extends beyond said predetermined shape of the placemat,
said extending portion of said first cover means being
drawn around said predetermined thickness of said rigid
support means so as to cover at least partially said second
surface of said rigid support means, said extending portion
thereby being interposed between said rigid support
means and the tabletop when the placemat is placed
thereon;
first cover holding means on said extending portion of said
first cover means for maintaining said extending portion
over said second surface of said rigid support means;
second cover means removably arranged over a predeter-
mined portion of said first cover means, said second cover
means being formed of a flexible material having a graphi-
cal pattern thereon, said graphical pattern having a select-
able one of a perdetermined significance and a comple-
mentary coordinated design with that of said first cover;
and
second cover holding means formed of an elastomeric mate-
rial for applying a tensile force to said second cover means
and thereby holding said second cover means over said
predetermined portion of said first cover means, said
second cover holding means being arranged to be inter-
posed between said rigid support means and the tabletop
when the placemat is placed thereon.
4,393.105
METHOD OF FABRICATING A THERMAL PANE
WINDOW AND PRODUCT
Wallace S. Kreisman, Maiden, Mass., assignor to Spire Corpora-
tion, Bedford, Mass.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,641
Int. Cl.^ E06B 3/24
U.S. a. 428—34 6 Qaims
r^
1. A method of fabricating a thermal pane window compris-
ing:
(a) providing an assembly of at least two panes of glass in
spaced parallel relation to each other so as to define a
space therebetween and separated all around the edges by
a metal spacer frame;
(b) inserting a spacer electrode within said metal spacer
frame;
(c) roll bonding said assembly all around said edges by con-
currently applying heat and pressure to one point at a time
along said edges while passing an electric current across
the glass-metal, glass interfaces at said one point, said
pressure being applied to said one point being about 1000
p.s.i., said roll bonding said assembly hermetically sealing
said space between said panes of glass;
(d) evacuating said hermetically sealed space to about one
torr or less; and
(e) sealing off said evacuated space.
6. A thermal pane window exhibiting no corrosion and
condensation characteristics despite prolonged use comprising:
(a) at least two panes of glass in parallel spaced relation to
one another and separated by a thin metal spacer frame
said spaces offset from the edges of said panes of glass
along opposed interfaces formed between said spacer
frame and said panes of glass, said spacer frame being
electrostatically sealed to said panes of glass along said
opposed interfaces hermetically sealing the space between
said panes, said metal spacer frame being formed of alumi-
num alloy, and a plastic material disposed in and occupy-
ing the space between said panes of glass outwardly of
said thin metal spacer frame toward the edges of said
panes of glass, said plastic material provides structural
strength and rigidity to said thermal pane window; and
722
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(b) a low heat-transfer gas devoid of oxygen and moisture drawing the multi-layer parison in the circumferential direc-
contained within said space, said low heat-transfer gas tionby blowing the thickness of the copolymer layer being 1 to
being selected from the group including argon, krypton, 30;i and that of the heat-moldable orientable thermoplastic
and Freon R-12. polymer layer being 3 to 700^i.
4,393,106
LAMINATED PLASTIC CONTAINER AND PROCESS
FOR PREPARATION THEREOF
Yoshitsugu Manihashi, Yokohama; Isao Tanikawa, Ayase;
Sadao Hirata, Yokohama; Jinichi Yazaki, Tokyo, and
Kozaburo Sakano, Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Toyo
Seikan Kaisha Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 28, 1981. Ser. No. 315,952
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 31, 1980, 55-152243;
Oct. 31, 1980, 55-152245
Int. a.3 B65D 23/00: B32B 31/00: B29D 9/04: B05D 1/36
U.S. a. 428—35 16 Qaims
4,393,107
COMPOSITE LABEL WEB
William A. Jenkins, Dayton, Ohio, assignor to Monarch Mark-
ing Systems, Inc., Dayton, Ohio
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,817
Int. a.3 B32B 3/10. 3/16
U.S. a. 428—42 26 Qaims
"■ ^l.J)43
J-
; «?, 36] 43
38L[-'J^^39LE
1. A laminated plastic container in the form of a bottle, the
wall of which comprises a substrate formed of a melt-moldable
plastic material, a coating layer formed on at least one surface
of the substrate, said coating layer being composed of a co-
polymer consisting essentially of 99 to 70% by weight of vinyl-
idene chloride and 1 to 30% by weight of at least one acrylic
or methacrylic monomer and further including up to 100 parts
by weight of at least one member selected from other ethyleni-
cally unsaturated monomers per 100 parts by weight of the
total amount of said two monomers, said copolymer having an
oxygen permeation coefficient of less than 9x10^''*
cc.cm/cm^.sec.cmHg as measured at a temperature of 20° C.
and a relative humidity of 100% and a water vapor permeabil-
ity coefficient of less than 3x lO-^g.cm/m^.day as determined
according to the method of JIS Z-0208, and a protecting sur-
face layer of a film-forming synthetic resin other than a vinyli-
dene chloride resin having an Izod impact strength of at least
1.1 kg/cm^ as measured at 5° C. according to the method of
ASTM D-256, said protecting surface layer being formed by
coating an aqueous latex or organic solvent solution of the
synthetic resin on the surface of the coating layer of the vinyli-
dene chloride copolymer, the weight per unit inner volume of
said substrate being in the range of from 0.001 to 5 g/ml, said
coating layer of the vinylidene chloride copolymer having a
thickness of 1 to 30fi; and said protecting surface layer having
a thickness of 3 to 700fi.
16. A process for the preparation of laminated plastic con-
tainers, which comprises coating an aqueous latex or organic
solvent solution of a copolymer consisting essentially of 99 to
70% by weight of vinylidene chloride and 1 to 30% by weight
of at least one acrylic or methacrylic monomer and further
including up to 100 parts by weight of at least one member
selected from other ethylenically unsaturated monomers per
100 parts by weight of the total amount of said two monomers
on at least one surface of a preform composed of a heat-molda-
ble, orientable thermoplastic polymer, injecting or extruding a
heat-moldable, orientable thermoplastic polymer on the coated
surface of the preform to form a multi-layer parison, and draw-
ing the multi-layer parison in the axial direction under such
temperature conditions that molecular oriention is caused in at
least one of the thermoplastic polymer on the inner surface side
and the thermoplastic polymer on the outer surface side, while
44/37 45
?4
1. A composite label web for use in a label dispensing appa-
ratus, the composite web comprising: a longitudinally extend-
ing carrier web, a series of labels releasably adhered by a
coating of pressure sensitive adhesive to the carrier web, the
composite web being wound into a roll and having an outer
free end, longitudinally spaced groups of cuts in the carrier
web, at least some groups of cuts including a single latepl cut
at a leading location with respect to the outer free end of the
composite web and a single lateral cut at a trailing location
with respect to the outer free end of the carrier web, a gener-
ally longitudinal cut converging toward the respective end
portions of the lateral cuts, the lateral cut of each group iX the
leading location and the respective longitudinal cut making an
obtuse angle and the lateral cut of each group at the trailing
location and the respective longitudinal cut making an acute
angle, and wherein each lateral cut of said some groups is
disposed on only one side of the respective longitudinal cut.
2. A composite label web for use in a label dispensing appa-
ratus, the composite web comprising: a longitudinally extend-
ing carrier web, a series of labels rreleasably adhered by a
coating of pressure sensitive adhesive to the carrier web, the
composite web being wound into a roll and having an outer
free end, longitudinally spaced groups of cuts in the carrier
web, at least some groups of cuts including two and only two
lateral cuts, one lateral cut being at a leading location with
respect to the outer free end of the composite web and the
other lateral cut being at a trailing location with respect to the
outer free end of the web, a generally longitudinal cut con-
verging toward the respective end portions of the lateral cuts,
the lateral cut of each said group at the leading location and the
respective longitudinal cut making an obtuse angle, the lateral
cut of each said group at the trailing location and the respec-
tive longitudinal cut making an acute angle, and wherein each
lateral cut is disposed at one side of the respective longitudinal
cut.
23. A composite label web for use in lateral dispensing appa-
ratus, the composite label web comprising: a longitudinally
extending carrier web, a series of labels releasably adhered by
a coating of pressure sensitive adhesive to the carrier web, the
composite web being wound into a roll and having an outer
free end, longitudinally spaced groups of cuts in the carrier
web, the groups being disposed closely adjacent one side edge
of the carrier web, each group including a generally longitudi-
nally extending cut and at least one lateral cut, the longitudinal
cut having a leading location with respect to the outer free end
of the composite web, a said lateral cut converging from the
outer free end of the composite web toward the leading loca-
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
723
tion of the longitudinal cut of the respective group, all the
lateral cuts of each group being disposed on the side of the
respective longitudinal cut away from the adjacent side edge of
the carrier web, wherein each longitudinal cut has a trailing
location with respect to the outer free end of the composite
web, and each group of cuts includes a lateral cut converging
from the outer free end of the composite web toward the
trailing location of the respective longitudinal cut, wherein the
lateral cuts o
each group are parallel.
4,393,108
SIMULATED CERAMIC TILE
John C. Barker, Cowansville, and Ivan P. McLaughlin, Dunham,
both of Canada, assignors to J. J. Barker Company Limited,
Canada
Continuation of Ser. No. 52,008, Jun. 25, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 808,662, Jun. 21,
1977, Pat. No. 4,169,907, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 550,875, Feb. 19, 1975, abandoned. This application Jul. 13,
1981, Ser. No. 340,992
Qaims priority, application Canada, Nov. 15, 1974, 213914
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 2, 1996,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B32B 3/00. 3/10
U.S. Q. 428—44 15 Qaims
1. A decorative simulated ceramic tile comprising a substrate
having a surface coated with an under-coat effective to pro-
vide a coloured, printable base; an inked layer comprising a
layer of coloured ink lines of a silicone-containing ink forming
a printed pattern on said printable base, said printed pattern
being clearly visible; and a colouring pigment-containing top
coat of a hard resinous, substantially silicone-free film-forming
material, said top coat containing about 1% to about 4% by
weight of said pigment; said top coat having a variable height
thickness defining a contour of valleys, hills, and plains,
wherein the intensity of colour in the top coat varies with the
variation in the contour, the valleys having a top coat thickness
less than 1 mil and occurring over said ink lines such that the
colour of the ink is not obscured, and the hills lying adjacent
said ink lines, said colour in the top coat providing a contrast
with the colour in the under-coat and with the colour in the
printed pattern, the silicone content of said inked layer being
sufficient to repel said top coat to create the ceramic effect
without deleteriously affecting the adherence of said top coat.
5. A panel defining a plurality of decorative simulated ce-
ramic tiles comprising a substrate having a surface coated with
an under-coat effective to provide a coloured, printable base; a
printed ink layer comprisng a layer of coloured ink lines of
silicone-containing ink defining a plurality of individual com-
plete designs on said printable base, each of said designs being
associated with a defined rectangular area, said layer of ink
lines being clearly visible; and a colouring pigment-containing
top coat of a hard resinous, substantially silicone-free film-
forming material, said top coat containing about 1% to about
4% by weight of said pigment; said top coat having a variable
depth and defining a contour of valleys, hills, and plains,
wherein the intensity of colour in the top coat varies with the
variation in the contour; the valleys having a top coat thickness
less 1 mil and occurring over said ink lines such that the colour
of the ink is not obscured, and the hills lying adjacent said ink
lines; said colour in the top coat providing a contrast with the
colour in the under-coat and with the colour in the printed
pattern, the silicone content of said inked layer being sufficient
to repel said top coat to create the ceramic effect without
deleteriously affecting the adherence of said top coat.
4,393,109
EXTRUDED HN-TYPE WEATHERSTRIP
Gerald Kessler, 302 McQurg Rd. at Sourthern Blvd., Box 389,
Youngstown, Ohio 44501
Filed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,912
Int. Q.' B32B 1/04, 27/06
U.S. Q. 428—119 16 Claims
1. An integrally extruded resilient all plastic fin-type weath-
erstrip comprising an elongated longitudinal substrate from
which integrally projects vertically therefrom at least one thin,
flexible, deformable, wavy S-configured fin member, said at
least one fin member being unslit along the length thereof.
4,393,110
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Kazumasa Fukuda, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to TDK Electronics
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 341,052
Int. a.3 B32B 3/00
U.S. Q. 428—173 2 Qaims
D
L 3.
H
1. In a magnetic recording medium having a high density of
magnetic recording including a non-magnetic substrate having
fine holes in a direction of thickness and a magnetic material
filled in said fine holes, an improvement wherein said fine holes
have a diameter ranging from 200 Angstroms to 5000 Ang-
stroms and a depth ranging from 2000 Angstroms to 5 microns
at a ratio of depth to diameter of substantially 10.
4,393,111
FABRICATION OF CONDUCTOR-CLAD COMPOSITES
USING MOLDING COMPOUNDS AND TECHNIQUES
Theodore H. Klein, Livingston, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,821, Feb. 15, 1980, Pat. No.
4,323,421. This application Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,689
Int. C\? B32B 3/10: H05K 1/00
U.S. Q. 428—195 4 Qaims
1. A molded composite, upon which a circuit of conductive
material is defined, formed from a composition comprising:
resin, 60-80 parts by weight; cross-linking monomer which
forms a three dimensional network with the polymeric portion
of the resin formulation, 0.5-60 parts by weight; low profile
additive, 15-40 parts by weight; catalyst, 0.5-3 parts by
weight; filler, 100-200 parts by weight; viscosity control agent.
724
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
0-5 parts by weight; and reinforcement, 20-250 parts by
weight.
i-CH— CH^
(III)
4,393,112
TRANSFER POWDER MARKING METHOD USING A
CORE-SHELL POWDER COMPRISING A PIGMENT,
SOLVENT-INSOLUBLE POLYESTER RESIN AND A
VOLATILE HALOGENATED HYDROCARBON
INSOLUBLE INGREDIENT
Satoru Honjo, Asaka; Yasuaki Yuyama; Masakazu Iwasa, both
of Odawara, and Kazuo Imanishi, Saga, all of Japan, assignors
to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 46,278, Jun. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,317
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 7, 1978, 53-68639
Int. a.' B32B J/76. 27/00
U.S. a. 428-207 22 Qaims
wherein R" represents a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group
having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, and R^ represents a hydrogen
atom, an alkyl or alkenyl group having 1 to 20 carbon
atoms, or a phenyl group which may be substituted by an
alkyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; and
•tCH2-C=C-CH2i-
R* R^
(11-2)
22
I
T
Z}
1. In a marking process which comprises transfer of a pattern
of a powder of a marking agent across a wide air gap between
a metal member to be marked in a marking pattern and an
image-holding member and solvent-fixing said powder, the
improvement wherein said powder has a particle diameter of
about 20 to 200 fim and comprises a pigment, a fixing solvent-
soluble polyester resin, and from 15 to 70% by volume of the
marking agent of a volatile halogenated hydrocarbon-insoluble
ingredient, wherein said powder comprises a core and a shell
portion wherein said core consists of said volatile halogenated
hydrocarbon-insoluble ingredient.
4,393,113
NOVEL SILICON-CONTAINING COPOLYMER,
ULTRATHIN SOLID MEMBRANE COMPOSED OF SAID
COPOLYMER, USE OF SAID SOLID MEMBRANE FOR
CONCENTRATING A SPEaHED GAS IN A GASEOUS
MIXTURE, AND PROCESS FOR PRODUONG SAID
SOLID MEMBRANE
Kiyoshi Sugie; Takeyoshi Yamada, and Teizo Yamaji, all of
Iwakuni, Japan, assignors to Teitin Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,128
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 5, 1980, 55-74860;
Apr. 20, 1981, 56-58443
Int. a.3 BOID U/00: C08F 2iOm
U.S. a. 428—220 13 Qaims
1. An ultrathin solid membrane capable of producing a
concentrated gas from a mixture of two or more gases, espe-
cially for obtaining an oxygen-enriched gas from a gaseous
mixture containing oxygen gas, said solid membrane having a
thickness of from about 50 to about 3,000 A and being com-
posed substantially of a film-forming silicon-containing co-
polymer consisting substantially of
(a) at least one recurring unit of the following formula
-fCH2— CH^ R' ^^
CH2— Si— r2
wherein R', R2 and R^ are identical or different, and each
represents an alkyl group having 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or
a phenyl group which may be substituted by an alkyl
group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and
(b) at least one additional recurring unit selected from recur-
ring units of the formula (II-l) and (II-2):
wherein R^ and R'' are identical or different, and each
represents a hydrogen atom, a chlorine atom, or a methyl
group,
the proportion of said recurring unit of formula (1) being about
5 to about 95 mole% based on the total recurring units of the
silicon-containing copolymer and said silicon-containing co-
polymer having an inherent viscosity, measured at 25° C. for a
solution of 0.5 g of the copolymer in 100 cc of cyclohexane, of
about 0.5 to about 4.0.
11. The solid membrane of claim 1 which is earned on a
porous sheet-like material.
12. A composite film membrane comprising a porous sheet-
like material supporting thereon a laminate of the ultrathin
solid membrane of claim 1 and another solid membrane able to
separate gases, said laminate having a total thickness in the
range of about 50 to about 5,000 A.
4,393,114
MEAT PACKAGING MATERIAL
Ralph Gillespie, Spartanburg, S.C, assignor to Milliken Re-
search Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed Dec. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 448,307
Int. C\? B32B 7/00
U.S. Q. 428—252 ^ Qaims
^
10
>y
14
1 A fabric particularly useful as a wrapping for foodstuffs,
such as meat comprising: a layer of warp knit, weft inserted
synthetic fabric and a layer of wax coated to both sides of said
layer.
4,393,115
MULTILAYERED POLYPROPYLENE FILM
Toshiya Yoshii, Ohtsu; Satoru Nakura, Kusatsu, and Masatsugi
Murakami, Moriyama, aU of Japan, assignors to Toray Indus-
tries, Tokyo
FUed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,380
Claims priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-100228
Int. Q.3 B32B 5/16, 27/32
U.S. Q. 428-323 ^, 20 Qaims
1 A multilayered polypropylene film capable of being
readily cut by hand and having a surface which is capable of
accepting writing or drawing thereon, which compnses a
biaxially oriented polypropylene layer and a polypropylene
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
725
layer uniaxially oriented in the direction of its width, and
laminated upon at least one surface of said laminated film a
propylene-ethylene block copolymer layer stretched uniaxially
or biaxially.
1. A soft permeable material having on at least one face
thereof a coating of a substance having latent adhesive capac-
ity to form a treated material, said substance containing a
pre-polymer and which under normal conditions is stable but is
activated by heat alone at a temperature above about 80° C. to
undergo a chemical reaction and act as an adhesive forming a
strong permanent bond, whereby said treated material may be
shaped by applying mechanical compressive force so as to
impart the desired shape thereto under the application of said
heat such that the latent adhesive substance is activated and
cured to the extent necessary to hold said treated material in
the desired shape, wherein said treated material can be stored
for several months, and wherein the substance is substantially
non-tacky prior to being activated but is irreversibly converted
to a strong adhesive after activation and curing.
packaging spool so that the surface of the adhesive coating
contacts the second side of said substrate;
the improvement wherein said adhesive coating is applied as
a substantially solvent-free hot-melt coating, said adhesive
coating is caused to solidify by positive cooling applied to
the unspooled web, wherein said cooling is controlled so
4,393,116
SHAPED MATERIALS
Derek P. Taylor, Essington, near Wolverhampton, England,
assignor to Fastbac Research Limited, West Midlands, United
Kingdom
Filed Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,236
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 24, 1979,
7925655 1 1
' ' Int. Q.3 C09J 7/02. 5/02
U.S. Q. 428—343 22 Qaims
in
4,393,117
HOT MELT TRANSFER COATING PROCESS AND
PRODUCTS
George O. Strieker, Midlothian; Karl H. Teumer, Chicago, and
Ronald C. Groenendal, Oak Forest, all of III., assignors to
Ludlow Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,581
Int. Q.3 C09J 7/04: B05D 3/12. 5/10
U.S. Q. 428—352 9 Qaims
1. In a process for placing a releasable pressure-sensitive
adhesive coating on an unspooled web which is being un-
wound from a supply spool and which comprises a first side
having a first release coating having relatively high peel
strength with respect to said adhesive coating, and a second
side having a second release coating having relatively low peel
strength affinity with respect to said adhesive coating, and
thereupon spooling the resulting adhesive-coated web onto a
that moisture condensation on the web is substantially
avoided, and wherein the entire supply spool-to-packag-
ing spool travel time of said web is a period of about 0.5 to
5 seconds.
4,393,118
METHOD OF PREPARING A DARK BODY PHOSPHOR
Harry L. Marshall, and Alan R. Schwartz, both of Towanda, Pa.,
assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,330
Int. Q.' B05D 5/06. 5/12
U.S. Q. 428—403 8 Qaims
1. A method of making pigmented phosphor comprising the
steps of: preparing an aqueous suspension of phosphor particles
and finely powdered carbon; adding colloidal silica to the
suspension; agitating the suspension; removing the liquid and
drying the phosphor particles.
4,393,119
ARTICLE COATED WITH AQUEOUS DISPERSION OF
FLUOROPOLYMERS IN COMBINATION WITH
EPOXY-TYPE nLM FORMERS
Thomas P. Concannon, Newtown Square, Pa., assignor to E. I.
Du Pont de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 279,162, Jun. 30, 1981, Pat. No. 4,335,030.
This application Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,304
Int. Q.3 B32B 27/38
U.S. Q. 428—413 30 Qaims
1. An article coated with a cured coating of an aqueous
coating composition having a dispersed phase which consists
essentially of:
(A) 90 to 10% by weight, based on the weight of (A) plus
(B), of the reaction product of:
(1) at least 50%, based on the weight of (1) plus (2). of an
epoxy resin containing, on the average, two terminal
1,2-epoxy groups per molecule and having an epoxy
equivalent weight of 750-50(X);
(2) a carboxyl-functional polymer in an amount sufficient
to provide at least 2.50 equivalents of carboxyl groups,
when the source of the carboxyl group is a mono-protic
acid, and at least 4.0 equivalents of carboxyl groups,
when the source of such groups is a diprotic acid, per
equivalent of 1,2-epoxy groups in the epoxy resin, said
polymer having a weight average molecular weight
(determined by light scattering) of about
10,000-160,000 and an acid number of 200-500;
(3) an aqueous solution of at least 1.50 equivalents of a
tertiary amine per equivalent of 1,2-epoxy groups in the
726
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
epoxy resin, said tertiary amine being selected from the
group consisting of R1R2R3N, pyridine, N-methylpyr-
role, N-methyl piperidine, N-methyl pyrrolidine, N-
methyl morpholine, and mixtures thereof and wherein
Ri and R2 are substituted or unsubstituted monovalent
alkyl groups containing one or two carbon atoms in the
alky] portion and R3 is a substituted or unsubstituted
monovalent alky! group containing 1-4 carbon atoms;
and
(4) 10-90% of the amount required for stoichiometric
reaction with the carboxyl-functional polymer of (2), of
at least one primary, secondary or tertiary amine or
monofunctional quaternary ammonium hydroxide, such
that the pH of the reaction product of (A) is greater
than 8.5;
Y being at least about 6+0.75 (2^, where Y is the
milliequivalent of carboxyl groups neutralized by
primary, secondary or tertiary amine or monofunc-
tional quaternary ammonium hydroxide per 100
grams of acid polymer plus epoxy, and X is the epoxy
equivalent weight divided by 1000;
and wherein for increasing ratios of carboxyl groups to
1 ,2-epoxy groups, the amount of amine is increased to
keep the carboxyl-functional polymer water dispers-
ible;
(B) 10-90% by weight, based on the weight of (A) plus (B),
of a fluorocarbon polymer; and
(C) optionally, up to 20% by weight, based on the weight of
(A), of a nitrogen or phenolic crosslinking agent.
weight percent propylene glycol or butanediol, and 40-48
weight percent isophthalic acid component.
3. A coating composition comprising
(A) a linear thermosettable polyester resin based upon 10-20
weight percent cyclohexanedimethanol, 10-16 weight per-
cent adipic acid, 12-16 weight percent neopentyl glycol,
12-16 weight percent propylene glycol or butanediol, and
40-48 weight percent isophthalic acid component,
(B) between about 10 weight percent and about 20 weight
percent on resin solids of an aminoplast,
(C) between about 0.1 and about 1 weight percent on resin
solids of an acid catalyst, and
(D) an inert organic solvent in an amount sufficient to provide
a solids content of between about 50 weight percent and
about 75 weight percent.
4,393,120
PLASTIC COATED WFTH GOLDEN EVAPORATED HLM
Hanihisa Watai, Kariya; Hiroyuki Furuta, Kounan, and Akira
Kawamoto, Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to Yuken Industry
Co., Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 294,030
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 26, 1980, 55-134739;
Jan. 27, 1981, 56-10510
Int. a.3 B32B 27/08, 33/00
U.S. a. 428—457 4 Claims
4,393,122
CLAD STEEL PLATES
Akira Takayasu, 5-1 Horita-dor, Mizuho-ku, Nagoya-shi, Aichi
467, Japan
PCT No. PCr/JP80/00044, § 371 Date Dec. 18, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 8, 1980, PCT Pub. No, WO80/02246, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 30, 1980
PCT Filed Mar. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 224,537
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 18, 1979, 54-
52585[U]
Int. C1.3 B32B 3/30
U.S. CI. 428—594 1 Claim
1. A clad steel plate produced by sandwiching a thin copper
sheet and a stainless steel net between a steel plate and an
anticorrosive metal plate and locally bonding them to each
other by welding.
4,393,123
FUEL CELL TEMPERATURE CONTROL ASSEMBLY
Matthew A. Lambrech, Sherman, Conn., assignor to Energy
Research Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,374
Int. a.3 HOIM 8/04
U.S. a. 429—24 15 Qaims
1. In a plastic article coated with a golden color evaporated
metal film and comprising a plastic substrate, a primary coating
layer provided on said substrate, a golden color evaporated
metal film provided on said primary coating layer and an outer
coating layer provided on said golden color evaporated metal
film, the improvement wherein said golden color evaporated
metal film isaCu-Sn-Al alloy composed of 5-15 wt.% Al, 3-
20 wt.% Sn, less than 6 wt.% impurities and the balance 75-90
wt.%Cu.
4,393,121
POLYESTER COIL COATING
Michael A. Tobias, Bridgewater, and Conrad L. Lynch, Me-
tuchen, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
FUed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,518
Int. a.3 B32B 15/08; C08G 63/16; C08L 67/02
U.S. a. 428—458 8 Qaims
1. A linear thermosettable polyester resin based upon 10-20
weight percent cyclohexanedimethanol, 10-16 weight percent
adipic acid, 12-16 weight percent neopentyl glycol, 12-16
1. An assembly for use in controlling the temperature of a
fuel cell having input and output ports for receiving supply gas
and discharging exhaust gas, said assembly comprising:
an outer valve member including first, second, and third
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
727
ports, said first and second ports being spaced and adapted
to receive supply gas at first and second temperatures,
respectively, said first temperature being higher than said
second temperature, said third port being displaced from
said first and second pxjrts and being adapted to connect to
said input port of said fuel cell;
an inner valve cylinder having an input coupling port and an
output coupling port, said inner valve member being
movably mounted in said outer valve member such that
said input coupling port in the position of said first and
second ports overlaps said first and second ports, respec-
tively, and such that said output coupling port communi-
cates with said third port;
and means for sealing said first and second ports from said
third port such that coupling between said first and second
ports and said third port occurs only through said input
and output coupling ports.
4,393,126
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING IN-LINE
HOLOGRAM LENS
Chiaki Kojima, Yokohama; Kayoko Hasegawa, Kamakura, and
Kosuke Miyahara, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Sony
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,728
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 14, 1980, 55-63795
Int. a.' G03C 5/00; G02B 5/32
U.S. Q. 430—2 5 Qaims
4,393,124
SOLID ELECTROLYTES STRENGTHENED BY METAL
DISPERSIONS
Robert J. Lauf, and Chester S. Morgan, both of Oak Ridge,
Tenn., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the United States Department of Energy, Washing-
ton, D.C.
■ Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,739
I Int. CV HOIM 4/36
U.S. Q. 429—104 7 Qaims
1. In a secondary battery, a solid electrolyte comprising:
an ion-conductive sodium beta-alumina ceramic material;
and 1 1
a discontinlious metal phase dispersed throughout said ce-
ramic material and selected from the group consisting of
Pt, Cr, Fe, Co, Ni, Nb and alloys and mixtures thereof
4,393,125
BATTERY CATHODES
Paul M. Skiarstad, Wayzata; Arthur J. Coury, St. Paul, and
Darrel F. Untereker, Cedar, all of Minn., assignors to Med-
tronic, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
filed Apr. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 142,662
I Int. CV HOIM 10/40
U.S. Q. 42^-105 1 Claim
U I
ri.
Ml'' ^ ""^
. - ^
KB.")
:^
■III
1
INI
1. A method of producing an inline hologram lens, compris-
ing the steps of:
producing a coherent diffracted wave beam by diffraction
means;
producing a coherent spherical wave beam by objective lens
means separate from said diffraction means;
providing said diffracted wave beam perpendicularly inci-
dent on a photo-sensitive layer as a reference wave beam;
simultaneously providing said spherical wave beam perpen-
dicularly incident on said photo-sensitive layer as a subject
wave beam through said diffraction means; and
developing said photo-sensitive layer to produce said inline
hologram lens.
4,393,127
STRUCTURE WITH A SILICON BODY HAVING
THROUGH OPENINGS
Johann Greschner, Pliezhausen; Georg Kraus, Wildberg, and
Gerhard E. Schmid, Leinfelden-Echterdingen, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,268
Qaims priority, application European Pat. Off., Sep. 19, 1980,
80105618.5
Int. Q.^ HOIL 21/306
U.S. Q. 430—5 13 Clainw
1. An io<fine cathode for batteries, the cathode comprising a
liquid/solid composition, the liquid portion being saturated
with dissolved iodine and including an organic donor com-
plexed with at least part of the iodine and further including an
additional component of styrene copolymerized with a vinyl-
pyridine donor, the solid portion of the cathode consisting
essentially of iodine.
1. A structure for modifying energetic radiation comprising
a silicon body having a through hole defining a passage for said
728
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12. 1983
energetic radiation; and a layer of heavy metal silicide cover-
ing the surface of said silicon body, whereby said metal silicide
layer maintains good adherence to said silicon body under
thermal stress, and said metal silicide layer absorbs said ener-
getic radiation except in said defmed passage by way of said
through hole.
4,393,128
LIGHT-SENSITIVE LITHOGRAPHIC PRINTING PLATE
PRECURSOR
Keisuke Shiba; Sho Nakao, and Tadao Toyama, all of Shizuoka,
Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa,
Japan
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,421
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1980, 55-124358
Int. a.3 G03C 1/76
U.S. a. 430—273 11 Qaims
1. A light-sensitive lithographic printing plate precursor
comprising an aluminum support having an aluminum oxide
film on the surface thereof and having formed thereon a silver
halide-containing light-sensitive layer, wherein the mean
weight of said aluminum oxide film is at least 1 g/m^, and at
least one layer on said support contains a heterocyclic mer-
capto compound and the total amount of said compound is at
least 1 millimol per mol of silver halide sufficient to prevent the
formation of spots during the process of making a printing
plate from said light sensitive lithographic printing plate pre-
cursor.
4,393,129
METHOD OF STRESS-FREE DEVELOPMENT OF
IRRADIATED POLYMETHYLMETACRYLATE
Walter Glashauser, Munich, and Grigore-Vlad Ghica, Eben-
hausen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,094
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 16,
1980, 3039110
Int. a.3 G03C 5/iO
U.S. a. 430—296 5 Qaims
1. A method of generating stress-free structures in x-ray
sensitive or electron beam-sensitive resist layers or films com-
prising polymethylmethacrylate material so as to achieve a
very high aspect ratio after proper irradiation; comprising
irradiating a select pattern of x-rays or electron beams onto
a relatively thick resist layer comprising said polymethyl-
methacrylate material; and
developing said exposed resist layer with a developer com-
posed of a mixture of a material selected from the glycol
ether group, a material selected from the primary amine
group, a material selected from the aqueous group, and a
material selected from the azine group.
from over said regions of the wafer to define windows in
the material through which the regions are exposed,
wherein the semiconductor wafer includes a plurality of
field-effect transistor devices, each of which includes a
gate region corresponding to a different one of the regions
to be exposed through the encapsulant, said method fur-
ther comprising the step of applying a chemical sensitive
membrane system into each of the windows defined in the
photoresist material to adhere to the sides of the windows
and cover the corresponding exposed regions.
4,393,131
METHOD FOR CAPTIVATING A SUBSTRATE WITHIN A
HOLDER
Jeffery A. Whalin, Miami Lakes; Charles W. Shanley, Planta-
tion; Michael N. Scansaroli, Pembroke Pines, all of Fla., and
Lawrence N. Dworsky, Northbrook, III., assignors to Motor-
ola, Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,938
Int. a.3 G03C 5/00
U.S. CI. 430—320 24 Oaims
4,393,130
SYSTEM FOR ENCAPSULATION OF SEMICONDUCTOR
CHIPS
Nelson Ho, West Valley, and Jiri Kratochvil, Sandy, both of
Utah, assignors to Critikon, Inc., Tampa, Fla.
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,732
Int. a.^ G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—313 5 Qaims
1. A method of encapsulating at least a portion of a semicon-
ductor wafer having a plurality of regions which are to be
exposed through the encapsulant, said method comprising the
steps of
laminating one or more sheets of dry film photoresist mate-
rial onto a surface of the wafer,
aligning a photomask with the wafer so that a predetermined
light-transmitting pattern of the mask coincides with cer-
tain areas of the wafer surface,
directing light onto the photomask and through the light-
transmitting pattern of the mask onto the wafer, and
developing the photoresist material to remove the material
1. A method of captivating a substrate within a holder for
photolithographic processing comprising the steps of:
placing a substrate having two opposed major surfaces
within a holder, said holder having two opposed major
surfaces and at least one aperture appropriately dimen-
sioned for accepting said substrate;
laminating a dry film photopolymer resist to at least one
surface of said holder and said substrate, thereby captivat-
ing said substrate within the aperture of said holder;
polymerizing said resist in desired areas including at least
one uninterrupted area extending from one surface of said
holder to a corresponding surface of said substrate;
removing resist in the undesired areas, thereby leaving a
retaining tab of resist in at least one uninterrupted area
extending from one surface of said holder to one surface of
said substrate.
19. A substrate processed in accordance with the method of
claim 1. -^
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
729
4,393,132
PHOTOGRAPHIC RECORDING MATERIAL WITH
ARYLAZOCYANOACETIC ESTER DYE RELEASERS
Giinther Schenk; Peter Bergthaller, both of Cologne; Gerhard
Wolfrum, Leverkusen, and Rudolf Stolzenburg, Duesseldorf,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Agfa-Gevaert Ak-
tiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,076
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 30,
1981, 3117243
Int. a.' G03C 5/54. 7/00. 1/10. 1/40
U.S. O. 430—562 2 Qaims
1. In a color photographic recording material for the pro-
duction of colored images by the dye diffusion transfer pro-
cess, comprising at least one photosensitive silver halide emul-
sion layer and associated thereto a nondiffusing color-provid-
ing compound, capable of releasing under the conditions of
alkaline development and as a function of the development oT
the silver halide emulsion layer, a diffusible azo dye which can
complex with metal ions, the improvement according to which
the released azo dye in one of its tautomeric forms corresponds
to the following general formula II
(II)
4,393,134
STANDARD BLOOD RLTER PAPER FOR USE IN
DIAGNOSIS OF HISTIDINEMIA
Akira Yano, Tokorozawa; Yoshitada Saito, Oomiya, and Yasu-
shi Kasahara, Tama, all of Japan, assignors to Fujizoki Phar-
maceutical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,096
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 7, 1981, 56-158629
Int. a.^ C12Q 7/00. GOIN 33/68
U.S. CI. 435—29 7 Claims
1. A standard blood filter paper for measuring the concentra-
tion of histidine in the blood, comprising:
a piece of filter paper, and
a blood material, infiltrated in said filter paper, containing a
known concentration of histidine and at least one salt
selected from the group consisting of a dithionite, a disul-
fite and a bisulfite in an amount effective to preserve said
histidine.
wherein
Rl represents alkyl, alkenyl or cycloalkyl having up to 8
carbon atoms,
Z represents a radical required for completing a benzene oi
naphthalene ring; and
L represents a substituent having a group which results from
the splitting from a carrier radical.
4,393,135
METHOD FOR PRODUCING L-GLUTAMIC ACID BY
FERMENTATION
Takayasu Tsuchida, Kawasaki, and Shigeru Nakamori, Yoko-
hama, both of Japan, assignors to Ajinomoto Company Incor-
porated, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,245
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 10, 1979, 54-160117;
Feb. 23, 1980, 55-22062
Int. CI.' C12N 1/20 15/00: C12P 13/14: C12R 1/185
U.S. a. 435—110 16 Claims
1. A method of producing L-glutamic acid by fermentation
which comprises culturing in a culture medium an L-glutamic
acid producing microorganism which is obtamed by incorpo-
rating a hybrid plasmid havmg inserted therein a DNA frag-
ment with genetic information controlling L-glutamic acid
production, said fragment being derived from a donor strain of
the genus Escherichia which is capable of producing L-
glutamic acid, into a recipient strain of the genus Escherichia,
wherein said L-glutamic acid producing microorganism is the
transformant NRRL B- 12286. NRRL B- 12299, NRRL B-
12300, NRRL B-12301, or NRRL B-12302.
4 393 133
HUMAN HEPATOMA DERIVED CELL LINE, PROCESS
FOR PREPARATION THEREOF, AND USES THEREFOR
Barbara B. Knowles, West Chester, and David P. Aden, Phila-
delphia, both of Pa., assignors to The Wistar Institute of
Anatomy and Biology, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Jun. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 158,685
Int. a.3 C12N 7/00. 7/02. 5/00: CUP 21/00: C12Q 1/68
U.S. CI. 435—6 9 Claims
1. A process for assessing the metabolic conversion of chem-
icals and drugs considered to be potential carcinogens and
mutagens, which comprises:
(a) maintaining a culture of a human hepatic cell line selected
from the group consisting of the cell lines designated Hep
3B and Hep G2 in a nutrient medium,
(b) exposing said cell line to the chemical or drug to be
tested,
(c) analyzing said culture for the presence of metabolites of
said chemical or drug, and
(d) introducing said metabolites to cultures of other mamma-
lian cells to determine their mutagenic capabilities.
4. A process for isolation of hepatitis B virus surface antigen
for use as a vaccine which comprises:
(a) maintaining a human hepatic cell line, designated Hep
3B, which contains the hepatitis B virus genome in nutri-
ent culture medium,
(b) recovenng the supernatant fluid from said culture, and
(c) purifying the hepatitis B virus surface antigen in said
supernatant fluid for use as a vaccine.
4,393,136
BACTERIAL ETHANOL PRODUCTION
Peter S. J. Cheetham, Reading, England, assignor to Talres
Development (N.A.) N.V., Netherlands Antilles
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,293
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 8, 1980,
8022243
Int. a.^ C12D 7/06
U.S. a. 435—161 1* Qaims
1. A process for producing ethanol, wherem a carbohydrate
is converted by immobilized cells of an ethanol-producing
bacterium into ethanol, said carbohydrate being presented to
said cells in a medium which is nutntionally madequate for
growth of said cells by lacking at least one factor required
therefor.
4 393 137
CLONING PLASMID FOR STREPTOMYCES
Jack J. Manis, Portage, and Sarah K. Highlander, Oshtemo
Township, Kalamazoo County, both of Mich., assignors to The
Upjohn Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,425
Int. Q.3 C12N 75/00. 7/20. 7/00; C12R 7/^65
U.S. Q. 435—172 5 Qaims
4. A process for cloning plasmid pUC1061 into a suitable
host of the genus Streptomyces which comprises:
730
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(a) digestion of pUC6 DNA with restriction endonuclease
Xhol to obtain fragmented linear plasmid DNA;
Xho I •*»" "'
_yP»U II
P>u II >
^Xho I
~*Bcll
(b) ligating the largest fragment of said plasmid DNA to
obtain plasmid pUC1061; and,
(c) transforming said plasmid into said suitable host.
4,393,138
METHOD FOR DISINFECTING IMMOBILIZED
ENZYMES
Jean-Luc A. G. Baret, Moret, France, assignor to Coming Glass
Works, Coming, N.Y.
Filed Noy. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,099
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 12, 1979, 79 30598
Int. a.3 C12N 11/14, 11/00. 9/38. 9/92
U.S. a. 435—176 4 Qaims
1. A method for disinfecting immobilized enzymes which
comprises contacting the immobilized enzymes with a dilute
aqueous solution of at least one substituted diethylenetriamine
at a concentration and for a period of time which is sufficient
to substantially kill the contaminating microorganisms without
significant deleterious effects on the immobilized enzymes, in
which the enzymes are selected from the group consisting of
lactase and glucose isomerase, the enzymes are immobilized on
an inorganic support, and the substituted diethylenetriamine is
selected from the group consisting of dioctyldiethylenetria-
mine and a mixture of dioctyldiethylenetriamine and trioctyl-
diethylenetriamine.
433,140
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF THE HIGHLY
PURE ENZYME KALLIKREIN FROM SWINE
PANCREAS EXTRACTS
Herauun Schutt, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Geraumy, assignor to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Gerauuy
FUed Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 339,017
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 31,
1981, 3103257
Int. a.3 C12N 9/64
US. a. 435—226 5 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of pure kallikrein, which
comprises adjusting an organ extract containing kallikrein to a
conductivity of 2 to 6 mS cm- ' at a pH value of 5 to 8, bring-
ing the organ extract thus prepared into contact with an ion
exchanger in batch form or column form, eluting the kallikrein
by continuously or discontinuously increasing the ionic
strength by means of a mono- or divalent alkali metal salt or
alkaline earth metal salt or by lowering the pH value and
subsequently purifying the eluate by affinity chromatography
on BPTl covalently bonded to a carrier and then desorbing
from the BPTl-carrier at a pH value of 4.0 to 5.0.
4,393,141
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR EXAMINING URINE FOR
PARTICULATE CONSTITUENTS
Gert Schlueter, Liederbach, and Wilhelm Schuster, Frankfurt
am Main, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Battelle-
Institut e.V., Frankfiirt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 352,070
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 4,
1981, 3108133
Int. a.3 GOIN 33/48. 31/06
U.S. a. 436—63 7 Qaims
4,393,139
PROCESS FOR THE SELECTIVE SEPARATION OF
ENDOPROTEASES
Jiirgen Schrenk, Weilheim, and Peter Wunderwald, Haun-
shofen, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Boehringer
Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim-Waldhof, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,467
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 10,
1980, 3034043
Int. Q.i C12N 9/50. 9/48. 9/60
U.S. Q. 435—219 5 Qaims
1. Process for the selective separation of endoproteases from
aqueous solutions, which process comprises treating an aque-
ous solution containing proteases with a complex, present in
the solid phase, of alpha2-macroglobulin with a divalent metal
selected from zinc, cobalt, nickel and copper, and then separat-
ing off the solid phase containing endoprotease inhibited by
alpha2-macroglobulin.
4. Device for carrying out the method of examining urine for
particulate constituents, the device consists essentially of (a) a
urine collector, and (b) a detachable filter cartridge, which is
affixed to said collector, said filter cartridge containing, as
filter material, synthetic fibers that are soluble in alcohol or in
aqueous alcohol, after the urine has passed through the filter,
and after the collector has been removed, a liquid-tight con-
nection is establishable between one opening of the filter car-
tridge and a storage vessel and the other opening is closable in
a liquid-tight manner.
4,393,142
ASSAY METHOD AND REAGENT FOR THE
DETERMINATION OF CHLORIDE
Thomas W. Stephens, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to American
Monitor Corporation, Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,331
Int. Q.3 GOIN 33/52. 33/84
U.S. Q. 436—125 8 Claims
4. A method for the determination of chloride in a protein-
containing fluid, comprising the steps of:
July 12, 19i83
CHEMICAL
731
(a) combining a sample of said fluid with a reagent to form a
solution, said reagent comprising:
(i) 2,4,6-tripyridyl-s-triazine,
(ii) mercuric ions,
(iii) ferrous ions,
(iv) at least one salt selected from the group consisting of
sodium sulfate, manganese sulfate, magnesium sulfate, and
cupric sulfate; and
(v) a buffer selected from the group consisting of sulfuric
acid and toluene sulfonate;
(b) measuring the absorbance of said solution; and
(c) comparing the absorbance of said solution with the absor-
bance obtained on solutions containing known amounts of
chloride.
J
4 393 143
AMORPHOUS REFRACTORY SETTABLE AT LOW
TEMPERATURES
Satora Yoshinaka, Okayama; Masao Fushida, Bizen, and Tat-
suzi Kimoto, Okayama, all of Japan, assignors to Tsurumi
Synthetic Refractories Co., Ltd., Japan
I Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,299
Int. Q.3 C04B 35/52
U.S. Q. 501—89 5 Qaims
1. An amorphous refractory which is settable at low temper-
atures consisting essentially of a dry mixture of refractory
material, silicon powder in an amount of 0.5 to 5% by weight
based on the whole amount of the refractory and serving as a
sintering agent, and a phosphate glass powder in an amount of
0.5 to 3% by weight based on the whole amount of the refrac-
tory and serving as a sintering and setting agent, the refractory
being usable in the form of a powder.
I I 4 393 144
METHOD FOR PRODUaNG METHANOL
Masaru Ichikawa, Yamato, Japan, assignor to Sagami Chemical
Research Center, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 77,223, Sep. 29, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,168
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 20, 1978, 53-114538
Int. CV C07C 27/06, 29/15, 31/04
U.S. Q. 518—715 3 Qaims
1. A method for producing methanol which comprises react-
ing a gas containing a carbon oxide and hydrogen in the pres-
ence of a catalyst consisting essentially of palladium supported
on at least one oxide of metal selected from the group consist-
ing of yttrium oxide, lanthanum oxide and neodymium oxide.
4 393 145 '
ANIONIC ION EXCHANGE RESINS WITH
CHOLESTEROL-DECREASING PROPERTIES
Hans N. Zemp, Lugano, Switzerland, assignor to EUblissement
Texcontor, Vaduz, Liechtenstein
Continuation of Ser. No. 35,091, May 1, 1979, abandoned. This
application Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,146
I Int. Q.3 BOIJ 41/12
U.S. Q. 521-38 »* Claims
1. An anionic ion exchange resin prepared from monomers
of the group consisting of non-toxic styrene, acrylic or epoxy
compounds, cross-linked through divinylbenzene and contain-
ing methylamino and methylammonium groups, which resin
has strong cholesterol-decreasing properties, an apparent den-
sity in water of 0.18 to 0.20 g of dry material/ml and a water
absorption capacity of 69 to 73% by weight of the polymer
weight wherein the amount of cross-linking agent when the
monomer is styrene is not substantially less than 1.5% by
weight and not substantially more than 2.5% by weight, when
the monomer is an acrylic is not substantially less than 10% by
weight and not substantially more than 12% by weight and
when the monomer is an epoxy is not substantially less than 3%
by weight and not substantially more than 4% by weight, said
weight ratios being calculated on the combined weight of the
monomer and of the cross-linking agent.
4 393 146
HRE RETARDANT nNEP ARTICULATE EXPANDABLE
STYRENE POLYMERS
Josef K. Rigler, Recklinghausen; Ekkehard Wienhofer, Marl;
Horst Leithauser, Marl, and Karl Trukenbrod, Marl, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Chemische Werkc Hiils
AG, Marl, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,070
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 5,
1981, 3122342
Int. Q.5 C08J 9/20 9/22
U.S. Q. 521—56 6 Qaims
1. In a process for the preparation of shaped bodies based on
expanded styrene or a mixture thereof with at least one mono-
mer copolymerizable therewith, the addition of an expanding
agent and a five retardant organic halogen compound, pre-
forming of the resulting expandable particles, ageing of the
formed particles, and molding thereof in a pressure resistant
mold, the improvement comprising: carrying out the polymeri-
zation in the presence of about 0.0001 to 0.1 percent by weight
based on the weight of said styrene or mixture thereof of esters
of aliphatic dicarboxylic acids and aliphatic epoxy alcohols,
said esters having at least 11 carbon atoms and said esters
soluble in said monomers and comonomers.
4 393,147
EXPANDABLE POLYMERIC STYRENE PARTICLES
Richard A. Schwarz, Big Spring, Tex., assignor to Cosden Tech-
nology, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Nov. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 443,309
Int. Q.' C08J 9/18
U.S. Q. 521—60 6 Claims
1. An expandable polymeric styrene particle having incorpo-
rated therein a blowing agent and a from about 0.1% to about
1.0% of ethylene-bis-stearamide and a from about 1% to about
1.5% of dibromoethyldibromocyclohexane. all percentages
being based upon the weight of the polymeric styrene.
4 393 148
REACTION OF TALKYLHYDRAZINIUM SALTS AND
OGRANIC PEROXIDES TO FOAM UNSATURATED
POLYESTER RESINS
Ernest R. Kamens, Tonawanda, N.Y., assignor to Pennwalt
Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 431,545
Int. Q.5 C08J 9/10
U.S. Q. 521—93 " Claims
1. A foamable and curable composition comprising an ad-
mixture of an unsaturated polyester and a polymerizable unsat-
urated monomer or polymethylmethacrylate and a polymeriz-
able unsaturated monomer, a peroxide, at least one transition
metal salt promoter where at least one of the metals is selected
from group consisting of iron and copper, and a t-alkylhy-
drazinium salt blowing agent.
4 393 149
METHOD OF PREPARING POLYURETHANE FOAMS
USING IMIDAZOLINES AS CATALYSTS
Paul E. Eckler, Terre Haute, Ind., assignor to Angus Chemical
Company, Northbrook, III.
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,719
Int. Q.3 C08G 18/18
U.S. Q. 521—129 ♦ Claims
1. A method of catalyzing the curing of polyurethane foams
formed by reacting a polyol with a diisocyanate in the presence
of a blowing agent and a catalyst comprising using as the
catalyst a compound of the formula
732
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
R«
R2
1
1
R-
-c—
1
-c-
1
■H
N
N-
-R
^
. /
C
1
k*
where R can be hydrogen, methyl, ethyl or R'*C02CH2— : R'
can be hydrogen, methyl, ethyl or R'*C02CH2— ; R^ can be
hydrogen or an alkyl group of 1-3 carbon atoms; R^ can be
alkyl of 1-4 carbon atoms or phenyl, and R^can be hydrogen,
alkyl or alkenyl of 1-17 carbon atoms.
4,393,151
STABLE SUSPENSIONS OF WATER-SOLUBLE
POLYMERS AND THEIR MANUFACTURE
Francois Dawans, Bougival; Daniel Binet, Rueil Malmaison;
Norbert Kohler, Lc Chesnay, and Quang Dang Vu, Paris, all
of France, assignors to Institut Francais du Petrole, Rueil-
Malmaison, France
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,322
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 15, 1980, 80 15586
Int. Cl.^ C08J 3/08: C08K 5/07. 5/09; C08L 5/00
U.S. a. 523—130 22 Qaims
1. A stable anhydrous suspension of a water-soluble poly-
mer, consisting essentially of solid particles of at least one
water-soluble polymer suspended in (a) a liquid hydrocarbon
medium, non-solvent for the water-soluble polymer, said liquid
hydrocarbon medium comprising at least one aliphatic or
aromatic hydrocarbon, the proportions being 40 to 150 parts
by weight of said water-soluble polymer per 100 parts by
weight of said liquid hydrocarbon medium, said stable anhy-
drous suspension further comprising per 100 parts by weight of
said liquid hydrocarbon medium, from 0. 1 to 5 parts by weight
of (b) at least one thickening agent selected from the alkali or
alkaline-earth metal salts of fatty acids having 6-33 carbon
atoms.
21. In an enhanced oil recovery process comprising flooding
an oil field by injecting an aqueous solution in an injection well
so as to displace the oil from the underground rock formation
into the production well, the improvement comprising adding
to the aqueous solution the stable suspension of a water-soluble
polymer as defined by claim 1.
4,393,152
OXIDATIVELY COUPLED COLD-SET BINDERS
Charles E. Seeney, Brazil; John F. Kraemer, Terre Haute, both
of Ind., and Nancy C. Varnum, Kingsvilie, Mo., assignors to
International Minerals & Chemicals Corp., Terre Haute, Ind.
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,718
Int. a.3 C08L 77/00
U.S. a. 523—139 16 Qalms
1. A foundry composition adaptable to forming cores and
molds comprising a foundry aggregate, a binder therefor poly-
merizable by contact with oxygen, an amine and a metal salt
catalyst, the binder being a disubstituted phenol represented by
the formula
4,393,150
ADHESIVE BANDAGE MATERIAL
Stanley Kresner, 100 Moree Loop, #19, Winter Springs, Fla.
32708
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,807
Int. a.i C08K 3/ JO. 5/05
U.S. a. 523— 111 4 Claims
1. An adhesive bandage material adapted to be formed into
sheet material and applied to a bandage cloth comprising:
a blend of 20-35% by weight of polyisobutylene and polybu-
tene;
5-15% by weight of butyl rubber;
1-10% by weight of reinforcing fibers of aromatic polyam-
ide fibers;
i-4% by weight of zinc oxide;
talc filler material; and
ethyl alcohol to thereby form a viscous material capable of
being formed in a sheet for attachment to bandage cloth.
OH
R2
Rl
o
where R' and R2 can be lower alkyl, methoxy, halide or
phenyl.
4,393,153
IMPACT MODinED GLASS/MINERAL REINFORCED
POLYESTER BLENDS
Leonard R. Hepp, Evansville, Ind., assignor to General Electric
Company, Pittsneld, Mass.
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,947
Int. a.^ C08L 25/70, 67/02
U.S. CI. 533—201 10 Claims
1. In a thermoplastic composition comprising
(a) a polyester composition comprising:
(i) a major proportion of a poly(l,4-butylene tereph-
thalate)resin or a copolyester thereof with a minor
amount of an aliphatic or aromatic dicarboxylic acid or
an aliphatic polyol and
(ii) a minor proportion of a poIy(ethylene terephthalate
resin);
(b) an impact improving amount of a core-shell resin having
a rubbery core surrounded by a grafted acrylic shell; and
(c) an effective reinforcing amount of a combination com-
prising approximately equal weights of mica and glass
fibers, the improvement which comprises providing not
substantially less than about 2.6 and not substantially more
than about 4 parts by weight of poly(l,4-butylene tere-
phthalate) resin component (a) (i) per 1 part by weight of
said impact improving acrylic resin component (b).
4,393,154
CURABLE LONG HBER LOADED RUBBER
COMPOSITION AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Keith A. Tyler, and Sidney R. Fix, both of Lincoln, Nebr., as-
signors to The Goodyear Tire &. Rubber Company, Akron,
Ohio
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,702
Int. a.^ C08F 36/02; C08L 27/00
U.S. a. 524—12 4 Qaims
1. An improved curable chopped fiber loaded rubber com-
position consisting essentially of a blend of about 5 to 50 per-
cent by weight of chopped fibers of about 0.4 centimeters up to
about 1.3 centimeters long, about 95 to 50 percent by weight of
particulate unvulcanized rubber being capable of passing a 6
mesh U.S. Standard screen.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
733
4,393,155
ENHANCED VISCOSITY MAINTENANCE AND
DEMULSIBILITY IN ASPHALT EMULSIONS
William R. Garrett, Jr., Catlettsburg, Ky., assignor to Ashland
Oil, Inc., Ashland, Ky.
Filed Aug. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 408,368
Int. CV C08K 3/20
U.S. CI. 524—60 10 aaims
1. Asphalt emulsions having demulsibility values of at least
about 60%, and viscosity maintenance values of at least about
20 to about 400 Saybolt Furol Seconds over about 240 hours at
65°± 10° C. comprising in combination; water, asphalt of pene-
tration in the range of from about 75 to about 300 mm/10,
emulsifying agents compatible with said asphalt, and from
about 0.05 to about 1.0 percent by weight based on the total
weight of said emulsion of an acrylic polymer having molecu-
lar weight of above about 1,000,000.
governing the intensity of the direct current magnetic field,
said control circuit comprising a rectifying bridge connecting
the alternative field coil to the direct field coil to accomplish a
self-control of said variable inductor.
4,393,156
HYDROLYTICALLY STABLE
~ POLYESTER-CARBONATE COMPOSITIONS
Kenneth F. Miller, Mt. Vernon, Ind., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,351
I Int. C1.3 C08L 69/00, 83/06
U.S. a. 52-1—114 65 Claims
1. An aromatic polyester-carbonate composition having
improved hydrolytic stability comprising in admixture an
aromatic polyester-carbonate resin and a stabilizing amount of
at least one hydrolytic stabilizer selected from the class consist-
ing of epoxy silanes and epoxy siloxanes.
4,393,157
VARIABLE INDUCTOR
Gerald Roberge, Repentigny, and Andre Doyon, Boucherville,
both of Canada, assignors to Hydro Quebec, Montreal, Can-
ada
Filed Dec. 5, 1978, Ser. No. 966,555
Claims priority, application Canada, Oct. 20, 1978, 313821
Int. C1.3H01F7 7/06
U.S. CI. 323—355 20 Claims
4,393,158
HYDROLYTICALLY STABLE POLYCARBONATE
COMPOSITIONS
Kenneth F. Miller, Mt. Vernon, Ind., assignor to General Elec-
tric Company, Mt. Vernon, Ind.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,639
Int. a.3 C08L 69/00
U.S. a. 524—114 12 Qaims
1. An aromatic polycarbonate composition exhibiting im-
proved hydrolytic stability comprising in admixture an end-
capped aromatic polycarbonate resin and a hydrolytically
stabilizing amount of at least one stabilizing compound of the
formula
Z„Si(R3)4-„
wherein
n is an integer from 1 to 3 inclusive;
R-^ is independently selected from hydrogen, alkyl radicals;
substituted alkyl radicals; alkenyl radicals; cycloalkyl
radicals; aryl radicals; alkaryl radicals; aralkyl radicals;
divalent organic radicals which together with the silicon
atom form a cyclic structure, said organic radicals being
selected from divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon
radicals and divalent saturated aliphatic organic radicals
containing carbon and oxygen atoms in the ring structure;
OR'* radicals wherein R* is selected from hydrogen, alkyl
" radicals, substituted alkyl radicals, alkenyl radicals, aryl
radicals, aralkyl radicals, alkaryl radicals, cycloalkyl radi-
cals; — R^OR** radicals wherein R^ is a divalent saturated
aliphatic hydrocarbon radical or a divalent aromatic hy-
drocarbon radical; —COOR* radicals; —OOCR'* radicals;
— R5COOR* radicals; — R^OOCR* radicals; and poly-
ether radicals.
Z is of the formula
I ll_J__i:,^J
1. A variable inductor comprising a first closed magnetic
circuit, formed of an anisotropic material through which fiows
an alternative magnetic field; a second closed magnetic circuit,
also formed of an anisotropic material, through which circu-
lates an adjustable direct current magnetic field; said first and
second magnetic circuits being mounted with respect to one
another so as to define at least two common magnetic spaces in
which the respective alternative and direct magnetic fields are
orthogonally superimposed to orient the magnetic dipoles in
said common spaces following a direction predetermined by
the intensity of said direct current magnetic field of the second
circuit and thus to control the permeability of said second
magnetic circuit to said alternative field, a coil being wound
around the anisotropic material of said first magnetic circuit
and a coil being wound around the anisotropic core of said
second magnetic circuit and connected to a control circuit
r27 O R'*
\ / \ /
r26 C C R'^
\ / \ /
C C
rz/ ^c C^ ^r20
R24^ I I ^R2'
r23 r22
wherein:
(i) R'* through R^'' are independently selected from the
class consisting of hydrogen; alkyl radicals; substituted
alkyl radicals; alkenyl radicals; aryl radicals; alkaryl
radicals; aralkyl radicals; OR^^ radicals wherein R" is
selected from the class consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
radicals, substituted alkyl radicals, alkenyl radicals, aryl
radicals, alkaryl radicals, and aralkyl radicals; — R^"
oOR2^ radicals wherein R^° is a divalent saturated ali-
phatic hydrocarbon radical or a divalent aromatic hy-
drocarbon radical; — COOR" radicals; — OOCR"
radicals; -RJOOOCR^' radicals; -R30COOR29 radi-
cals; OR^' radicals wherein R^' is selected from the
class consisting of oxirane ring containing saturated
aliphatic hydrocarbon radicals and oxirane ring con-
taining aliphatic-aromatic hydrocarbon radicals; — R^"
oOOCR^l radicals; and — R^OCOOR^' radicals; with
the proviso that
(ii) one of R'^ through R^' is selected from the class con-
sisting of divalent saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon radi-
cals; divalent aromatic hydrocarbon radicals; 13
734
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
0R32_ radicals wherein R32 is selected from divalent
saturated aliphatic hydrocarbon radicals and divalent
aromatic hydrocarbon radicals; — R30or32_ radicals;
— 00CR32_ radicals; — C00R32_ radicals; — R3-
oOOCR32_ radicals; and — R30coOR32— radicals.
433,159
ANTI-STATIC MATERIAL AND METHOD OF MAKING
THE MATERIAL
William Lybrand, Northridge, Calif., assignor to Bengal, Inc.,
Sepulveda, Calif.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,470
Int. a.3 C09K 3/16
U.S. a. 524-243 31 Qaims
1. In combination for eliminating static charges by providing
resistivities in the range of approximately 10^ to 10' ohms,
polypropylene
a salt in which the positive ion is selected from a group
consisting of copper, silver, tin, iron, calcium and iridium,
the salt being mixed in the polypropylene in the range of
approximately 0.005% to 0.01% by weight, and
ethoxylated amines mixed in the polypropylene in the range
of approximately 2.0% to 2.7% by weight.
4,393,162
POLY AMIDES AND COPOLYAMIDES COMPRISING
-M-DKP-AMINOPHENOXY) ETHANE MOIETIES
Edward E. Paschke, Wheaton, and C. Bruce Petty-Weeks, Na-
perville, both of 111., assignors to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana), Chicago, 111.
FUed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,119
Int. a? C08G 69/32. 69/40
U.S. a. 524-606 30 Qaims
1. A polyamide comprising the following recurring struc-
ture:
- -NH-/ Q VoCHzCHzO-^ Q
O ON
II II
NHC— R— C-
/
wherein R is a divalent aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon
radical or an aromatic hydrocarbon radical containing from 6
to 10 carbon atoms joined directly or by a stable linkage se-
lected from the group consisting of — O— , methylene
O
■C-,
4,393,160
AQUEOUS DEVELOPABLE POLYCOLEHN SULFONE)
TERPOLYMERS
Thomas R. Pampalone, Belle Mead, N.J., assignor to RCA
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 219,517, Dec. 23, 1980, Pat. No. 4,341,861.
This application Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,107
Int. a.3 C08G 75/22
U.S. a. 524-360 7 Qai„,s
1. A positive electron beam resist terpolymer comprising a
monomer component and sulfur in a 1 : 1 molar ratio, said mon-
omer component being comprised of from about 70 mole per-
cent to about 93 mole percent of 3-methylcyclopentene and
from about 7 mole percent to about 30 mole percent of 2-cyclo-
pentene-1 -acetic acid.
—SO — , — SO2— and S radicals.
4,393,161
HIGH IMPACT, HIGH MODULUS REINFORCED
AROMATIC CARBONATE POLYMERIC MIXTURES
Petnis C. A. M. Van Abeelen, Gilze, and Hans de Munck, Huyb-
ergen, both of Netherlands, assignors to General Electric
Company, Pittsfield, Mass.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,710
Int. 0.i C08L 69/00. 25/04
U.S. a. 524-506 7 Qaims
1. A high impact strength, high modulus thermoplastic
composition comprising an intimate admixture of:
(a) an aromatic carbonate polymer or copolymer;
(b) a polystyrene resin, the total weight of (a) plus (b) being
from about 35 to about 95 parts of the composition;
(c) from about 5 to about 65 parts by weight of a pristine
fibrous reinforcing agent; and
(d) from about 0.05 to about 4 parts by weight of a hydrogen
siloxane comprising units of the formula:
/'R
I
Si— O-
I
/R
\
•Si— O-
I
4,393,163
METHOD FOR STABILIZING AN ACRYLAMIDE
POLYMER IN A PETROLEUM RECOVERY PROCESS
Shoichi Kanda, and Gengiro Kawamura, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Nitto Chemical Industry, Co., Ltd., To-
kyo, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 970,022, Dec. 14, 1978,
abandoned. This application Dec. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 101,672
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 14, 1977, 52-149330;
Nov. 6, 1978, 53-136440; U.S.S.R., Dec. 18, 1978, 2701054
Int. a.3 C08K 5/45
U.S. a. 524—608 1 Claim
1. An aqueous solution of an acrylamide polymer stabilized
for use in a petroleum recovery process comprising a partially
hydrolyzed polyacrylamide, water, and a stabilizing effective
amount of 2-mercaptobenzoimidazole or a water-soluble salt
thereof having the general formula
CSX
/m
. wherein Ri, R2, R3 and lUeach represents a hydrogen atom or
wherem R is hydrogen, Ci-Cio alkyl, phenyl or a mixture a lower alkyl group, and X represents a hydrogen atom, an
thereof, and n plus m is at least about 4. alkali metal atom or an ammonium group.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
735
' ' 4,393,164
TRANSPARENT IMPACT-RESISTANT MOLDING
MATERIAL
Graham E. McKee, Weinheim; Franz Haaf, Bad Durkheim;
Juergen Hambrecht, Heidelberg; Klaus Benker, Neustadt;
Rudolf Stephan, Ludwigshafen, and Hans Breuer, Battenberg,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesell-
schaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,407
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 4,
1981, 3113627
Int. a.3 C08L 51/04. 33/12. 25/12
U.S. CI. 525— 83 4 Qaims
1. Transparent, impact resistant molding material which can
be processed above 200° C. without recognizable yellowing
and odor development, consisting of a mixture of
(A) 15 to 70 parts by weight of a methylmethacrylate poly-
mer containing 90 to 100 percent by weight of a methyl-
methacrylate and 10 to 0 percent by weight of an alkyla-
crylate having 1 carbon atom to 8 carbon atoms in the
alkyl radical,
(B) 10 to 50 parts by weight of a styrene/acrylonitrile co-
polymer containing 78 to 88 parts by weight styrene and
22 to 12 parts by weight acrylonitrile,
(C) 20 to 50 parts by weight of a copolymerized graft poly-
mer mixture and
(D) additives in an amount from 0 to 20 percent by weight
relative to the total of components A, B and C wherein the
parts by weight of A, B and C total 100 and where the
difference between the refractory index of component C
and the refractive index of the mixture of components A,
B and D is less than 0.005,
wherein the copolymerized graft polymer mixture C is pro-
duced by grafting
(Ci) 50 to 80 percent by weight relative to the copolymer-
ized graft polymer C of a diene elastomeric grafting base
having a glass temperature below — 20° C. with
(C2) 20 to 50 percent by weight consisting of of the follow-
ing components as a mixture or in sequence:
(C21) 40 to 100 parts by weight of one or more methacry-
lates of Ci-Cg alkanols and
(C22) 0 to 60 parts by weight of styrene or an alkylstyrene
having up to 12 carbon atoms.
made of a nonaromatic methylene group or methine
group; and
(B) 50 to It) wt.% of a nonfunctional radical polymerizable
monomer mixture consisting of (a) a radical polymerizable
monomer having in one molecule at least one functional
group selected from the group consisting of a carboxyl
group, an acid anhydride group, an alcoholic hydroxyl
group, an alkoxymethyl-substituted acid amide group of
the formula
O
H
— C— NHCH2OR
(R is an alkyl group of Ci to C4) and an amino group of the
formula — NR1R2 (Ri and R2 are each an alkyl group of
Ci to Cg) and an ethylenic double bond, and (b) a radical
polymerizable monomer having one epoxy ring and one
ethylenic double bond in one molecule.
3. A polymer composition according to claim 1 wherein the
saturated polymer is a saturated polyester prepared from a
saturated divalent alcohol and a saturated dibasic acid.
4,393,165
POLYMER COMPOSITIONS
Takashi Sasaki, Takasaki; Miyuki Hagiwara, Maebashi; Fumio
Hosoi, Fujioka, and Tohru Takagi, Hiratsuka, all of Japan,
assignors to Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,974
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 12, 1981, 56-126458
Int. Q.3 C08G 63/76: C08L 67/00
U.S. Q. 525—10 12 Qaims
1. A polymer composition which consists essentially of:
(A) 90 to 50 wt.% of a saturated polymer having in one
molecule (1) at least two groups of at least one type se-
lected from the group consisting of an epoxy group of the
formula
— CR CH2
\ /
O
(R is nydrogen or methyl), an alcoholic or phenolic hy-
droxyl group and an alkoxymethyl-substituted acid amide
group of the formula
O
II
— C— NHCH2OR
(R isl^ alkyl group of Ci to C4) and (2) a repeating unit
4,393,166
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
POLYADDITION PRODUCTS OF ISOCYANATES AND
DENATURED BIOMASSES, THEIR USE AS REACTIVE
HLLERS AND AS PLANT NUTRIENTS AND A PROCESS
FOR THE PRODUCTION OF SHEETS OR SHAPED
ARTICLES USING THE POLYADDTTION PRODUCTS
Artur ReischI, and Kuno Wagner, both of Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverku-
sen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,859
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 21,
1979, 2920525
Int. Q.3 C08G 83/00: C05F 11/00: C08K 11/00: B29J 5/00
U.S. Q. 525—27 17 Qaims
I. A process for the production of denatured polyaddition
products of biomasses and isocyanates, comprising reacting
(A) from 5 to 98%, by weight, based on (A)-t-(B), of a
biomass based on microorganisms or derivative and de-
compxjsition products thereof with
(B) from 95 to 2%, by weight, based on (A)-i-(B), of a com-
pound containing isocyanate groups, at temperatures of at
least 50° C. with complete denaturing of component (A).
II. The process of claim 1, wherein said biomass is an aque-
ous or dried sludge from industrial or communal purification
plants which were optionally subjected to aerobic or anaerobic
digestion.
4,393,167
POLYMER BLENDS CONTAINING POLYMER OF
/3-HYDROXYBUTYRlC ACID AND CHLORINE OR
NITRILE GROUP CONTAINING POLYMER
Paul A. Holmes, Middlesbrough; Frank M. Willmouth, Royston,
and Alan B. Newton, Welwyn Garden City, all of England,
assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, London,
England
FUed Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,127
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 18, 1980,
8036967
Int. Q.' C08L 67/04. 27/06. 33/18
U.S. Q. 525—64 20 Qaims
1. A polymer blend comprising (i) 0.2 to 95% by weight of
a j8-hydroxybutyric acid polymer of molecular weight above
50,000 and containing 100 to 50 mole % of /3-hydroxybutyric
acid residues and correspondingly 0-50 mole % of /3-hydroxy-
valeric acid residues in the polymer chain, and (ii) an organic
polymer containing at least 25% by weight of chlorine and/or
nitrile groups.
736
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,168
BLENDS OF POLYETHERIMIDES AND RUBBER
MODIHED VINYL AROMATIC POLYMERS
Harold F. Giles, Jr., Cheshire, Mass., and Dwain M. White,
Schenectady, N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company,
Pittsfield, Mass.
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,261
Int. C1.3 C08L 79/08
U.S. a. 525—66 12 Qaims
1. A composition comprising a blend of (a) a rubber modified
vinyl aromatic polymer and (b) a polyetherimide.
4,393,170
POLYMERIC BLENDS
John R. Haws, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 145,091, Apr. 30, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 286,097
Int. a.3 C08L 5i/00
UJS. a. 525—89 6 Qaims
1. A composition of matter that is a blend of polymers com-
prising:
(a) a block copolymer of lactone with a comonomer chosen
from the group consisting of (1) conjugated diene, (2)
monovinylarene, and (3) both conjugated diene and
monovinylarene,
(b) acrylic ester polymer,
(c) coumarone-indene resin, and
(d) conjugated diene-monovinylarene teleblock copolymer
represented by the general formula (A— B— )„Y wherein
A represents a block of polymerized monovinylarene
monomer, B represents a block of polymerized conju-
gated diene units or alternatively a random or random
tapered block copolymer of conjugated diene and
monovinylarene monomers, Y is the residual unit from a
polyfunctional coupling agent or a poly functional initiat-
ing species and n has a value from 2 to 6.
4,393,169
MOLDABLE RESIN COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING
POLYCARBONATE STYRENE POLYMER AND THREE
PHASE GRAFT POLYMER
Takeshi Moriwaki, Sakai, and Shinji Tokuhara, Himeji, both of
Japan, assignors to Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., Sakai,
Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,629
Int. a.3 C08L 25/04, 69/00. 51/00
U.S. a. 525—67 6 Qaims
1. A thermoplastic moldable resin composition, the resin
components of which consist essentially of a blend of
I. 100 parts by weight of a mixture comprising
(A) from 95 to 5 parts by weight of an aromatic vinyl poly-
mer, and
(B) from 5 to 95 parts by weight of thermoplastic polycar-
bonate resin, and --
II. from 1 to 20 parts by weight of
(C) a three-stage polymer produced by three, sequential,
emulsion polymerization stages, wherein
(1) in the first emulsion polymerization stage, a mixture of
(a) from 50 to 100 percent by weight of first, aromatic,
vinyl monomer, (b) from 0 to 50 percent by weight of
second, vinyl monomer different from said first mono-
mer and copolymerizable therewith and (c) from 0 to 10
percent by weight of a multifunctional bridge-forming
monomer, is emulsion polymerized to obtain a first
stage polymer,
(2) in the second emulsion polymerization stage, a mixture
of (a) said first stage polymer and (b) a monomer mix-
ture of (i) from 50 to 100 percent by weight of butadi-
ene, (ii) from 0 to 50 percent by weight of a third, vinyl
monomer copolymerizable with said butadiene, and (iii)
from 0 to 1 percent by weight of a multifunctional
bridge-forming monomer, is emulsion polymerized to
obtain a second stage polymer, and
(3) in the third emulsion polymerization stage, a mixture of
(a) said second stage polymer and (b) a monomer mix-
ture of (i) from 50 to 100 percent by weight of an alkyl
methacrylate having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in the alkyl
group, (ii) from 0 to 50 percent by weight of a fourth,
vinyl monomer different from said alkyl methacrylate
and copolymerizable therewith, and (iii) from 0 to 10
■ percent by weight of a multifunctional bridge-forming
monomer, is emulsion polymerized.
4,393,171
PROCESS FOR PREPARING RUBBERY POLYMER
REINFORCED STYRENIC RESINS
William J. I. Bracke, Hamme, and Emmanuel Lanza, Waterloo,
both of Belgium, assignors to Labofina, S.A., Brussels, Bel-
gium
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,414
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 1, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.^ C08F 257/02
U.S. Q. 525—309 43 Qaims
1. A process for continuous preparation of a rubbery poly-
mer material reinforced styrenic resin comprising the steps of:
a. adding a monomer material selected from the group con-
sisting of alkyl esters of acrylic acid, alkyl esters of meth-
acrylic acid and mixtures thereof, together with a poly-
functional cross-hnking agent to a first solution of a copol-
ymeric matrix of a styrenic compound and an acrylonitrile
compound in an inert solvent, whereby there is formed a
second solution of monomer material, polyfunctional
cross-linking agent and said copolymeric matrix in said
inert solvent;
b. continuously charging said second solution into a poly-
merization zone and subjecting said second solution in said
polymerization zone to mass polymerization conditions to
polymerize said monomer material whereby there is
formed in situ a cross-linked rubbery material dispersed in
said copolymeric matrix;
c. continuously withdrawing the reaction mixture from said
polymerization zone and continuously charging the with-
drawn mixture into a devolatilization zone to remove the
inert solvent and any residual monomer material, and
d. recovering a rubbery polymer material reinforced sty-
renic resin wherein the rubbery material formed in situ is
highly dispersed in the copolymer matrix.
4,393,172
HIGH-NOTCHED-IMP ACT CORE-SHELL POLYMERS
HAVING IMPROVED WEATHER RESISTANCE
Christian Lindner, Cologne; Karl-Heinz Ott, Leverkusen, and
Alfred Pischtschan, Kuerten, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 235,096, Feb. 17, 1981,
abandoned. This application Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,569
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 23,
1980, 3006804
Int. Q.3 C08L 51/04; C08F 279/02. 265/04
U.S. Q. 525—310 6 Qaims
1. Particulate graft polymer comprising
(a) a core which is a crosslinked homopolymer of a conju-
gated diene or a copolymer thereof with up to 10% by
weight of copolymerized styrene or acrylonitrile and
having a gel content of more than 50%,
(b) a first shell which is a crosslinked rubber formed by
polymerizing a monomer mixture consisting of at least one
acrylic acid alkyl ester having 1 to 8 carbon atoms in the
alkyl moiety and 0.05 to 10% by weight, based on the
weight of (b), of a crosslinking polyfunctional monomer
and
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
737
(c) a second shell of a polymer of at least one resin-forming
monomer selected from the group consisting of a-methyl
styrene; styrene, acrylonitrile and methyl methacrylate.
4,393,173
COMPLEXES OF N-METHYLOLACRYLAMIDES WITH
POLYALKOXYLATES AND POLYMERIZATION TO
UNGELLEDPOLY(N-METHYLOLACRYLAMIDES)
Wiley E. Daniels, Easton, and Dennis J. Nagy, Allentown, both
of Pa., assignors to Air Products and Chemicals, Inc., Allen-
town, Pa.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,732
Int. Q.3 C08L 33/24; C08G 69/48
U.S. Q. 525—329.4 17 Qaims
MELTING POINTS Of NMA-IGEPAL COMPLEXES
» -
70 •
Mumtif £0 uf*iT$ Ptn CHtm
xin NMAHCEPALCOUPLCKES
O O IGEPAL SURFikCTMITS
Rl O
I II
R— CH=C— C— NH— CH2OH
wherein R is hydrogen, lower alkyl (C1-C4), isopropenyl, or
phenyl radical and Ri is hydrogen or methyl radical and (2) a
polyalkoxylate substance having at least a portion of its struc-
ture represented by (alkylene oxide)^, wherein x is an integer
greater than one, the complex containing at least about x mole-
cules of the N-methylol monomer per molecule of polyalkoxy-
late.
NR
I
CO
I
CH3
NH
I
HCO
4,393,175
PROCESS FOR THE CONTINUOUS DIAZOTIZATION
OF WATER-SOLUBLE POLYMERIC AMINES
Phillip J. Brock, Sunnyvale, and Daniel J. Dawson, Los Altos,
both of Calif., assignors to Dynapol, Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,621
Int. aj C08F 8/30
U.S. Q. 525—377 6 Qaims
1. A composition of matter comprising a complex consisting
essentially of (1) an N-methylol monomer of the following
general formula:
wherein R is a lower alkyl to form pendant amine units which
comprises contacting said polymer in liquid phase with aque-
ous strong base at elevated temperature for a time effective to
hydrolyze said amide units to amine units.
. TO HOLD'NIi TANK
OR COUPLING li£«CTUW
1. In a process of diazotizing a polymeric aromatic amine
wherein a solution of the polymeric amine is admixed with a
solution of nitrite ion, the improvement comprising continu-
ously feeding said solutions to a turbulent reaction zone at a
combined liquid fiow rate of not less than one reaction zone
volume per minute and continuously withdrawing the result-
ing reaction product to maintain the reaction zone liquid vol-
ume.
4,393,176
ANTI-STATIC MATERIAL AND METHOD OF MAKING
THE MATERIAL
William Lybrand, Northridge, Calif., assignor to Bengal, Inc.,
Sepulveda, Calif.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,471
Int. Q.3 C09K 3/16
U.S. Q. 525—379 20 Claims
1. In combination for eliminating static charges by providing
a resistivity in the range of approximately 10" to 10'^ ohms,
a first material selected from a group selected from a group
consisting of polystyrene and modified styrenes, and
ethoxylated amines mixed with the first material in a range
of approximately four percent (4%) to twelve percent
(12%) by weight.
4,393,174
BASE HYDROLYSIS OF PENDANT AMIDE POLYMERS
Daniel J. Dawson, Los Altos, and Phillip J. Brock, Sunnyvale,
both of Calif., assignors to Dynapol, Palo Alto, Calif.
1 1 Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,614
' Int. CV C08F 8/12
U.S. Q. 525—369 10 Qaims
1. The process of treating a polymer having recurring pen-
dant amidp units having a structure selected from among
— , — (CH— CH2)— . and — (CH— CH3)—
4,393,177
THERMOSETTING RESIN COMPOSITION, PROCESS
FOR PREPARATION THEREOF AND CURED PRODUCT
THEREOF
Takeo Ishii; Masatsugu Ogata, both of Hitachi, and Toshikazu
Narahara, Tokai, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,617
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1980, 55/29810;
Mar. 12, 1980, 55/30354; Mar. 12, 1980, 55/30355
Int. Q.' C08F 283/04; C08G 73/16; C08L 79/08
U.S. Q. 525—422 24 Qaims
1. A thermosetting resin composition which comprises an
admixture consisting of tri-allylisocyanurate, a polymaleimide
represented by the following general formula:
738
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
CH2
CH2
(as) formaldehyde or compounds which spht ofT formalde-
hyde;
(33) secondary amines having at least two hydroxyalkyl group;
and
(m) dialkylamines or dialkoxyalkylamines which do not con-
tain free hydroxy! groups; or from the components:
(ai) and (a2) with (as) and (as);
(ai) with (as) and (as);
(a2) with (as) and (as);
(ai) with (as), (as), and (a4); or
(32) with (as), (as), and (34); and copper complex bound with
said reaction product to form said metal complex compound.
wherein n is a number of at least 1, and a thermoplastic resin,
the amount of said thermoplastic resin is 1 to 20 parts by
weight per 100 parts by weight of said polymaleimide and said
tri-allylisocyanurate, said thermoplastic resin having a glass
transition temperature lower than the curing temperatures of
other components in said admixture and the amount of said
tri-allylisocyanurate is 3 to 300 parts by weight per 100 parts by
weight of the polymaleimide.
4,393,178
FAST CRYSTALLIZING POLYESTER COMPOSITIONS
Roger M. H. Legras, Hannut; Jean-Jacques E. R. G. Biebuyck,
Rixensart, and Jean P. Mercier, Kessel-Lo, all of Belgium,
assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, London,
England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 159,916, Jun. 16, 1980,
abandoned. This application Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,382
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 19, 1979,
7921321
Int. a.3 C08F 283/00: C08G 63/76; C08L 63/00
U.S. a. 525—437 11 Claims
1. A fast crystallising polyester composition obtained by
reacting a polyester which pHslyester comprises at least 90 mole
% of residues of ethylene terephthalate with an ionisable metal
salt of an organic compound having at least one acidic proton
and at least one aromatic ring in which the ionisable metal salt
is one which, when present in polyethylene terephthalate at a
concentration of 1% by weight, will:
(a) give a difference in the crystallisation peak temperatures
(AT = Tc-Tn) of at least 100° measured by differential
scanning calorimetry on heating (Tn) and on cooling (Tc)
using heating and cooling rates of 10° C./minute, and
(b) has a melt degradation value (K value) measured in
polyethylene terephthalate according to the method given
in Makromol Chem 179, 2201-2209 (1978) of less than 60.
4,393,180
CURING AGENTS FOR EPOXIDE RESINS AND
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
Christopher M. Andrews, Cambridge, England, assignor to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,468
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 30, 1981,
8120142
Int. a.3 C08L 67/00, 61/06
U.S. a. 525—504 10 Qaims
1. Compositions for curing epoxide resins and activated by
water, said compositions comprising
(a) a silamine of the formula
r2 .
R3— Si— NH-
R5 1
I
■R' — NH— Si— NH
/
R2
II
-R>— NH— Si— r3
where
either m represents 1, in which case R' represents the diva-
lent residue of an aromatic, aliphatic, araliphatic, or cyclo-
aliphatic diprimary amine after removal of the two pri-
mary amino groups and n represents zero or an integer of
from 1 to 10, or m represents 2, in which case R' repre-
sents the trivalent residue of an aliphatic triprimary amine
after removal of the three primary amino groups and n
represents zero, and
R^, R^ R^ R', and R^ which may be the same or different,
each represent an alkyl group of I to 8 carbon atoms or an
aryl group of 6 to 10 carbon atoms, and
(b) as accelerator, a substantially anhydrous organic acid or
a substantially anhydrous phenol.
4,393,179
SYNTHETIC RESIN
Karl Hoppe, and Udo Strauss, both of Miinster, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to BASF Farben & Fasem A.G., Ham-
burg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,109
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 1,
1980, 3045251
Int. a.3 C08L 63/00. 61/34
U.S. a. 525—490 21 Qaims
1. A synthetic resin in the form of a metal complex com-
pound comprising a reaction product of:
(a) Mannich bases which are free from epoxide groups; with
(b) epoxide resins; wherein aliphatic hydroxy groups originat-
ing from (a), (b), or a mixture thereof are at least partially
converted into urethane groups by reaction with partially
blocked isocyanate, said Mannich base (a) formed from
components selected from:
(ai) condensed phenols which are free from ether groups and
contain at least two aromatic rings and at least two phenolic
hydroxy] groups;
(a2) condensed phenols which contain other groups and con-
tain at least two aromatic rings and at least two phenolic
hydroxy! groups;
4,393,181
POLYFUNCnONAL PHENOLIC-MELAMINE EPOXY
RESIN CURING AGENTS
Roy A. Allen, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Company,
Houston, Tex.
Filed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,974
Int. Q.^ C08L 61/00: C08G 59/14: C08F 283/00
U.S. Q. 525—504 9 Qaims
1. An epoxy resin curing agent prepared by reacting a poly-
hydric phenol with an amino-triazine having the general for-
mula
Rl— O— CH2— N— CH2— O— R2
A
R3— O— CH2 N N CH2— O— R4
\ I II /
N— C C— N
/ \ / \
Rj— O— CH2 N CH2— O— R6
wherein Ri, R2, R3, R4, Rs and R6 are the same or different
alkyl radicals of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, said polyhydric phenol
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
739
and amino-triazine being reacted in an amount to provide at
least two i^enolic hydroxyl groups to one alkoxy group.
5. A heat curable composition, especially suitable for pow-
der coating applications, comprising:
(a) at least one normally solid epoxy resin containing at least
one vicinal epoxy group,
(b) a curable amount of a curing agent prepared as in claim
1, and
(c) an alkaline epoxy curing agent accelerator.
alkyl or aryl groups having up to 12 carbon atoms, as an anion-
ic-polymerization inhibitor.
4,393,182
OLEHN POLYMERIZATION PROCESS WITH NOVEL
SUPPORTED TITANIUM CATALYST COMPOSITIONS
Brian L. Goodall; Adrianus A. van der Nat, and Willem Sjard(jn,
all of Amsterdam, Netherlands, assignors to Shell Oil Com-
pany, Houston, Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 143,578, Apr. 25, 1980, Pat. No.
4,329,253. This application Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,649
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 17, 1979,
7917240 1 1
II. Int. C\? C08F 4/02, 10/00
U.S. Q. 526—125 21 Qaims
1. Process for the polymerization of alpha-monoolefms
which comprises contacting the monomers to be polymerized
with a catalyst composition comprising an organoaluminum
compound, a selectivity control agent, or an at least partial
reaction product of those two components, and a titanium-con-
taining catalyst compxanent obtained by:
i contacting with a halohydrocarbon in liquid phase a solid
reaction product comprising a magnesium halide in which
the atomic ratio of halogen to magnesium is at least 1.2:1,
a titanium halide and an electron donor;
ii optionally washing the resulting solid with an inert diluent
to remove liquid remaining from the contacting step;
iii contacting the resulting solid with a halide of tetravalent
titanium in liquid phase; and
iv washing the resulting solid with an inert diluent to remove
residual unreacted titanium compound;
and recovering the resulting olefin polymer.
' ' 4,393,183
2-CYANOACRYLATE ADHESIVE COMPOSITION
Kaoni Kimura, Kuroishi, and Kyoji Sugiura, Nagoya, both of
Japan, assignors to Toagosei Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,918
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 16, 1980, 55-176502
Int. Q.3 C08F 20/42. 120/42
U.S. Q. 526—245 11 Qaims
1 . An adhesive composition which comprises 2-cyanoacry-
late and at least one compound selected from the group con-
sisting of the following compounds:
|{|l— CH2OH, CHOH or R2— COH;
R2 R3
(2) Rl— CHO or Rl— CHO hydrate;
(»)
Rl
R2
\
c
/
Rl.
C=Oor
R2
\
<
C=sO hydrate;
4,393,184
LENS HAVING A HIGH REFRACHVE INDEX WITH A
LOW DISPERSION
Niro Tanimi; Shigeo Komiya, both of Akishima, and Mitsuo
Sugimura, Fussa, all of Japan, assignors to Hoya Lens Corpo-
ration, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,354
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 15, 1980, 55/175779
Int. Q.3 C08F 18/16
U.S. Q. 526—261 2 Qaims
1. A lens having a low dispersion and a high refractive index,
comprising a copolymer of at least one polyfunctional allyl
monomer selected from the group consisting of diallylorthoph-
thalate, diallylisophthalate, diallylterephthalate, diallylchlo-
rendate, triallylcyanurate and triallylisocyanurate with at least
one monomer of the formula
X
I
CH2=C— COO-tCH2
in which
X is H, CHs or CI,
Y is H, CHs, C2HS, n-CsH7, iso-CsH?. OCH3, C6H11. CI, Br,
CH2CI, CH2Br, CbHs, CH2C6HS or SCHs,
m is 0, 1 or 2, and
n is 0, 2, 3, 4 or 5,
the polyfunctional ally! monomer comprising about 70 to 90%
of the copolymer by weight, at most about 10% by weight of
the polyfunctional allyl monomer comprising a trifunctional
allyl monomer.
(3)
(4) pentafluorophenol;
(5) hexachloroacetone or hexachloroacetone hydrate; and
(6) chloral or chloral hydrate
wherein Rt is a fluorinated alkyl or aryl group having up to 12
carbon atoms, and R2 and R3 are fluorinated or non-fluorinated
4,393,185
THERMALLY POLYMERIZABLE MIXTURES AND
PROCESSES FOR THE THERMALLY-INITIATED
POLYMERIZATION OF CATIONICALLY
POLYMERIZABLE COMPOUNDS
Godwin Berner, Rheinfelden, and Rudolf Kirchmayr, Aesch,
both of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation,
Ardsley, N.Y.
FUed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,801
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 2, 1981,
3599/81
Int. Q.' C08G 77/04
U.S. Q. 528—27 5 Qaims
1. A thermally polymerisable mixture which comprises
(A) one or more cationally polymerisable compounds,
(B) a quaternary ammonium salt of an aromatic-heterocyclic
compound which contains 1 or 2 N-atoms, and of a com-
plex halide anion selected from the series consisting of
BF4©, PF6©, SbF6©, SbFs(OH)e or AsFa©,
(C) a thermal radical former selected from one of the follow-
ing classes
(Ci) diary! ethane derivatives of the formula I
Rl Rl (D
I I
Ar— C— C— At
wherein Ar is phenyl, naphthyl or phenyl which is
substituted by Ci-C4alkyl or chlorine, R' is OH, Ci-C-
4a!koxy, _0— CO— R^ or — Osi(R*XR'XR'). wherein
R3 is Ci-Csalky! or phenyl, and each of R*, R' and R*
independently of the other is Ci-C^alkyl or phenyl, and
R2 is Ci-C4alkyl, cyclohexyl or Ar, -
740
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(Ci) an oligomeric compound of the Formula II
i
R2 R2 R*
I I I
■O— C— C— O— Si-
I I L
Ar Ar R'
(ID
wherein m is 2 to 20,
(C3) an organic peroxide compound or
(C4) a quinone, and
(D) optionally further additives.
4 393 186
THERMOPLASTIC POLYURETHANES PREPARED BY
REACTING POLYISOCYANATE, POLYESTER POLYOL,
CYCLOALIPHATIC DIOL AND A MONOFUNCTIONAL
CHAIN-TERMINATING COMPOUND
Dennis J, Damico, and Vincent J. Pascarella, both of Erie, Pa.,
assignors to Lord Corporation, Erie, Pa*
Continuation of Ser. No. 153,558, May 27, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 50,070, Jun. 19, 1979, Pat. No.
4,250,274. This application Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 2%,629
Int. a.3 C08G 18/30
U.S. a. 528—49 10 Claims
1. A heat-resistant, thermoplastic polyurethane substantially
free of reactive isocyanate and hydroxyl groups comprising
the reaction product of
(a) at least one polyisocyanate having at least two reactive
isocyanate groups;
(b) at least one polyester polyol having at least two hy-
droxyl groups;
(c) at least one cycloaliphatic diol chain-extending agent;
and
(d) at least one monofunctional isocyanate-reactive chain-
terminating compound;
said polyisocyanate being present in an excess amount with
respect to said polyester polyol and said cycloaliphatic,
diol;
said monofunctional isocyanate-reactive compound being
present in an amount sufficient to ensure reaction of excess
isocyanate groups;
said polyester polyol having been prepared from the reac-
tion of
(i) at least one saturated acyclic, cyclic or aromatic mono-
meric or polymeric polyol having at least two hydroxyl
groups;
(ii) from 30 to 100 mole present terephthalic acid; and
(iii) from 70 to 0 mole percent of at least one saturated or
unsaturated acyclic, cyclic or aromatic carboxylic acid,
other than terephthalic acid, having at least two car-
boxyl groups;
said polyurethane having a molecular weight of at least
20,000.
in diacrylates, triacrylates or tetra acrylates and acrylate moi-
eties which esterify alkane or polyether diol, triol or tetrol
residues, which residues are linked as urethanes to the polyure-
thane structures; said coating also having urea groups linking
the polyurethane structures; and wherein on an equivalent
basis the ratio of double bond crossIinkages:urethane group
crosslinkages joining polyurethane structures, formed by triol
or tetrol residues, is between 1.0 and 2.5; where the number of
equivalents of double bond crosslinkage in the coating is taken
as being equal to the number of equivalents of carbon-carbon
double bond in the uncured coating composition, and the
number of equivalents of urethane crosslinkage in the coating
is taken as being equal to the number of equivalents of hy-
droxyl group provided by the triols and the tetrols in the
uncured coating composition; and in said coating the content
of urethane groups in the main polyurethane chains amounts
on an equivalent weight basis to about 40% up to no more than
70% of the total of urethane groups in the main polymer chains
plus urethane crosslinkages plus urea groups present in said
coating; the content of urethane group crosslinkages, formed
from triol or tetrol residues, amounts to between about 20 and
about 40 equivalent weight percent of said total of main chain
urethane groups, urethane crosslinkages and urea groups and
the content of urea groups in said coating amounts to between
about 5 to about 25 equivalent percent of the total of said
urethane main chain groups, urethane crosslinkages and urea
groups and calculated as weight of unreacted isocyanate
groups available for conversion to urea groups, amounts to
about 0.5 to about 5 percent by weight of said coating; and in
said coating, the vinyl groups other than those of acrylate
groups incorporated by urethane links in the polyurethane
structures, are combined via double bond linkages with each
other and with said acrylate groups incorporated in the poly-
urethane structures.
4,393,188
THERMOSETHNG PREPOLYMER FROM
POLYFUNCTIONAL MALEIMIDE AND BIS
MALEIMIDE
Akio Takahashi, Hitachiohta; Motoyo Wajima, Hitachi; Ritsuro
Tada, Mito; Hirosada Morishita, Hitachi; Yutaka Mizuno,
Shimodate; Shunya Yokozawa, Oyama, and Kenji Tsukanishi,
Shimodate, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi Chemical Com-
pany, Ltd., Japan
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,746
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 14, 1980, 55-18094
Int. a.^ C08G 59/06; G08G 59/08
U.S. a. 528— 88 8 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a thermosetting maleimide pre-
polymer, which comprises reacting (A) a polyfunctional malei-
mide compound obtained by the dehydration reaction of an
amide acid formed from maleic anhydride and a polyamine
prepared by the condensation of aniline with formaldehyde
and represented by the formula (1)
4,393,187
STAIN RESISTANT, ABRASION RESISTANT
POLYURETHANE COATING COMPOSITION,
SUBSTRATE COATED THEREWITH AND PRODUCTION
THEREOF
Joseph Boba, Fort Lee, and Robert P. Conger, Park Ridge, both
of N.J., assignors to Congoleum Corporation, Kearny, N.J.
Filed Oct. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 391,7%
Int. a? C08G 18/62
U.S. a. 528—60 8 Claims
1. Homogeneous, unitary, crosslinked polyurethane coating
on a substrate wherein the nitrogen atoms of the polyurethane
structures are joined to alicyclic rings or to straight aliphatic
chains and the crosslinkages consist essentially of crosslinks
between polyurethane structures, via isocyanate residues and
triol or tetrol residues forming in combination, urethane group
crosslinkages in the polyurethane structures; and crosslinks
between polyurethane structures, deriving from double bonds
(1)
wherein n is in the range of from 0.1 to 3.0, (B) at least one
bis-maleimide selected from the group consisting of N,N'-m-
phenylene-bis-maleimide, N,N'-p-phenylene-bis-maleimide,
N,N'-4,4'-diphenylmethane-bis-maleimide, N,N'-4,4'-diphenyl-
ether-bis-maleimide, N,N'-methylene-bis(3-chloro-p-
phenylene>bis-maleimide, N,N'-4,4'-diphenylsulfone-bis-
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
741
maleimide, N,N'-m-xylene-bis-maleimide and N,N'-4,4'-
diphenylcyclohexane-bis-maleimide, (C) at least one diamine
selected from the group consisting of m-phenylenediamine,
p-phenylenediamine, 4,4'-diaminodiphenylmethane, 2,2'-bis(4-
aminophenyl)propane, benzidine, 4,4'-diaminodiphenylsul-
fone, bis(4-aminophenyl)methylphosphine oxide, bis(4-amino-
phenyOphenylphosphine oxide, bis(4-aminophenyl)methyla-
mine, 1,5-diaminonaphthalene, m-xylylenediamine, p-
xylylenediamine, 4,4'-diaminobenzophenone, 4,4'-diaminoazo-
benzene, bis(4-aminophenyI)phenylmethane, l,l-bis(4-amino-
phenyl)cyclohexane, 1 , 1 -bis(4-amino-3-methylphenyl)cy-
clohexane, 2,5-bis(m-aminophenyl)-l,3,4-oxadiazole, 2,5-bis(p-
aminophenyl)- 1 ,3,4-oxadiazole, 2,5-bis(m-aminopheny 1)-
thiazolo(4,5-d)thiazole, 5,5'-di(m-aminophenyl)-2,2'-bis( 1 ,3,4-
oxadiazolyl), 4,4'-diaminodiphenyl ether, 4,4'-bis(p-amino-
phenyl)-2,2'-dithiazole, m-bis(4-p-aminophenyl-2-thiazolyl)-
benzene, 4,4'-diaminobenzanilide, 4,4'-diaminophenyI benzo-
ate, N,N'-bis(4-aminobenzyl)-p-phenylenediamine and 4,4'-
methylenebis(2-chloroaniline), wherein the weight proportion
of said polyfunctional maleimide compound (A) relative to the
total of said polyfunctional maleimide compound (A) and said
at least one bis-maleimide (B) is 3 to 80%, and the molar ratio
of the total of said polyfunctional maleimide compound (A)
and said at least one bis-maleimide (B) relative to said at least
one diamine (C) is 1:2 to 1.0.1, said process further comprising
a reaction with (D) at least one 1,2-epoxy compound which,
when polymeric, has a weight average molecular weight of up
to 5,000, and the process comprising the reaction between (A),
(B), (C) and (D) being performed in one or more stages, pro-
vided that in any stage involving a reaction in which said at
least one 1,2-epoxy compound (D) participates, the reaction is
effected at a temperature of 50° to 145° C. for a period of time
of 5 to 240 minutes and that in any stage involving a reaction
in which said at least one 1,2-epoxy compound (D) does not
participate, the reaction is effected at a temperature of 70° to
180° C. for a period of time of 5 to 240 minutes, and wherein
the weight proportion of said at least one 1,2-epoxy compound
(D) relative to the total of said polyfunctional maleimide com-
pound (A), said at least one bis-maleimide (B), said at least one
diamine (C) and said at least one 1,2-epoxy compound (D) is 5
to 80%.
4,393,189
METHOD OF PREPARING A PHENOLIC ALDEHYDE
RESIN AND RESIN COMPOSITION FOR AN ADHESIVE
SYSTEM TO BE APPLIED TO GLASS HBERS
Mikhail M. Girgis, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 163,355, Jun. 26, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 956,473, Oct. 30,
1978, Pat. No. 4,314,050. This application Nov. 16, 1981, Ser.
No. 321,971
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 2,. 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a? C08G 8/22
U.S. a. 528—155 6 Claims
1. An improved flexible and tough resorcinolic or resor-
cinolic and phenolic aldehyde resin, comprising a thermoplas-
tic, water soluble, resorcinol or resorcinol and a phenolic
aldehyde resin that is a mixture of polymers having trimer
polymer and dimer polymer and no higher non-water soluble
oligomers produced by:
a. reacting to less than 100 percent completion a resorcinol
or resorcinol and phenolic compound with an aldehyde in
an amount of aldehyde to resorcinol or aldehyde to mix-
ture of resorcinol and phenolic compound in mole ratio in
the range of about 0.8 to about 1.5 and at a pH in the range
of about 3.5 to about 5.5 to limit formation of resorcinol
and phenolic alcohols and for a period of time equivalent
to a period of time in the range of about 3 hours to about
10 hours at a temperature in the range of about 55° P. (13°
C.) to about 90° F. (32° C.) to produce a resinous polymer
mixture along with unreacted resorcinol, or resorcinol
and phenolic compound and aldehyde in the polymer
mixture, and
b. continuing the resin reaction at a pH maintained above 7
to about 7.5 at a temperature in the range of 55° F. (13° C.)
to 90° F. (32° C.) when the residence time is in the range
of 0.5 hours to about 10 hours thereby producing a ther-
moplastic, water soluble, resorcinolic or resorcinolic and
phenolic aldehyde resin mixture with improved flexibility
and with toughness, since it has a substantial amount of
trimer and dimer polymers without any higher oligomers
and has only slight cross-linking and is capable of further
reaction.
4,393,190
CARBONATE COPOLYMERS PREPARED FROM IMIDE
REACTANTS
John A. Tyrell, and Gary L. Freimiller, both of Mt. Vernon,
Ind., assignors to General Electric Company, Mt. Vernon,
Ind.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,998
Int. a.' C08G 63/62. 63/68. 73/10. 73/16
U.S. a. 528—170 22 Qaims
1. An endcapped polymer composition comprised of the
reaction product of:
(i) a dihydric phenol;
(ii) a carbonate precursor; and
(iii) at least one imide selected from the group consisting of
imides in chain terminating effective amount represented,
by the general formula
and imides in quantities of from about 1 to about 85 mole
percent based on the amount of dihydric phenol repre-
sented by the general formula
R' R'
R' R'
OH
R' R'
wherein each R is independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl radicals, alkoxy radicals, and halogen radicals, and
wherein each R' is independently selected from hydrogen,
alkyl radicals, alkoxy radicals, and halogen radicals with
the proviso that at least one imide compound of the first
formula is employed.
4,393,191
PREPARATION OF AROMATIC POLYESTERS BY
DIRECT SELF-CONDENSATION OF AROMATIC
HYDROXY ACIDS
Anthony J. East, Madison, N.J., assignor to Celanese Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,992
Int. Q.^ C08G 63/10
U.S. Q. 528—207 11 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a wholly aromatic polyester
comprising reacting at least one hydroxynaphthoic acid em-
ployed in an amount ranging from about 10 to 90 mole percent
and at least one hydroxybenzoic acid in an amount from about
742
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
10 to 90 mole percent in the presence of a catalytic amount of
a metallic compound selected from the group consisting of a
Group IV or V metal salt, oxide and organometallic derivative
under polymerization reaction conditions.
4^93,192
CRYSTALLINE COPOLYMERS PREPARED FROM
N,N'-TEREPHTHALOYLDI-BETA-ALANINE AND A
GLYCOL
Benedict S. Curatolo, Maple Heights, and Gerald P. Coffey,
Lyndhurst, both of Ohio, assignors to The Standard Oil Com-
pany, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Dec. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 451,998
Int. aJ C08G 69/08. 69/44
U.S. a. 528— 292 18 Qaims
1. Novel water insoluble polyamide esters of the general
formula:
O HO / V OHO
II I II /r\\ " ' "
C-R-N— C-/ (J W C— N— R-C— O-R— O
164* C, and about 166° C, and at a temperature deviation
tolerance of about ± 1' C. for said second temperature;
(c) pumping the first and second melts at about the melt
temperatures by respective first and second gear pumps to
a mixing zone through respective first and second essen-
tially straight conveyor tube systems, each respectively at
substantially the same temperature as said first and second
melts and having an angle of incline to the horizontal
plane of a maximum of about 10°, each conveyor tube
having a volume at least one-third greater than the
volume-conveying capacity of the gear pump to which
said tube is coupled;
(d) combining and mixing the melts in a mixing zone main-
taining between about 170° C. and about 175° C. to initiate
a polymerization reaction;
(e) injecting the melt from the mixing zone into a mold for
the molded article to form the article with attendant re-
lease of gas; and
(0 returning at least part of the released gas to at least one of
the mixing vessels by the conveyor tube systems.
[ R'— O ](i0O-xO
where each R and R' independently are a divalent aliphatic,
alicyclic or aromatic radical;
X is a number of 0 to 100 and represents the percentage of the
polyamide ester chain structure containing the following
unit:
O HO
II I II
C— R— N— C
r 1
OH O
II I II
C— N— R— C— O— R— O
4,393,193
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING MOLDED ARTICLES
FROM POLYLACTAMS BY ACnVATED ANIONIC
POLYMERIZATION OF MEDIUM LACTAMS
Werner Hartmann, Immenstaad, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Harwe AG, Zurich, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 811,057, Jun. 29, 1977, Pat. No.
4,233,433, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 579,620,
May 21, 1975, abandoned. This application Sep. 15, 1980, Ser.
No. 187,152
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 11,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.3 C08G 69/18
U.S. CI. 528—326 1 Qaim
1. A homogeneous molded polylauric lactam article free of
bubble formations and shrink holes and which does not show a
melting point and disintegrates into crumbs when heated to a
temperature from approximately 220° C. to 280° C. prepared
by a process involving activated anionic polymerization and
which comprises:
(a) adding to a first lactam melt contained in a first vessel at
least one polymerization catalyst for the lactam with
agitation and maintaining the mixture of the lactam melt
and added catalyst under agitation and protected by an
inert gas at a first temperature in the range from about
167.5° C. and about 169.5° C, and at a temperature devia-
tion tolerance of about ± 1° C. for said first temperature;
(b) adding, following the addition of the catalyst to the first
lactam melt, at least one activator for the polymerization
of the lactam to a second lactam melt under agitation and
maintaining the mixture of the second lactam melt and
activator stirred and protected by an inert gas at a second
temperature which is lower than the temperature of the
first melt and within a temperature range of from about
4,393,194
SUBSTITUTED-QUATERPHENYLENE POLYAMIDE
Russell A. Gaudiana, Merrimack, N.H., and Palaiyur S.
Kalyanaraman, Chalfont, Pa., assignors to Polaroid Corpora-
tion, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,180
Int. a.3 C08G 69/32
U.S. a. 528—348 57 Qaims
1. A rigid rod-like film- or fiber-forming polymer compris-
ing recurring units of the formula
40 /OR N R'1
II fll I 111
C— A — |-C— N— B-f-N— j-
wherein A is a divalent radical and B is a divalent radical or B
represents a single bond; R and R' are each hydrogen, alkyl,
aryl, alkaryl or aralkyl; and c is zero or one; and wherein, when
c is one, at least one of A and B is a divalent substituted-quater-
phenylene radical having the formula:
where each U is a substituent other than hydrogen, each W is
hydrogen or a substituent other than hydrogen, each p is an
integer from 1 to 3, each X is hydrogen or a substituent other
than hydrogen and each r is an integer from 1 to 4, said U, Wp
and Xr substitution being sufficient to provide the aromatic
nuclei of said radical with a non-coplanar molecular configura-
tion with respect to each other; and wherein, when c is zero, A
is a divalent substituted-quaterphenylene radical having the
aforesaid formula.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
743
4,393,195
CURABLE CYANATE ESTER/ ACRYLIC EPOXY ESTER
COMPOSITION
Mono Gaku, Showamachi; Nobuyuki Ikeguchi, Tokyo, and
Satoshi Ayano, Ninomiya, all of Japan, assignors to Mit-
subishi Gas Chemical Company, Inc., Tokyo, Japan ,
Filed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,510
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 8, 1979, 54-100929
Int. aj C08G 83/00. 73/12
U.S. a. 528—361 8 Qaims
1. A curable resin composition consisting essentially of
(a) at least one cyanate ester compound selected from the
group consisting of:
(1) a polyfunctional aromatic cyanate ester monomer .
having the formula:
R-(-0-CsN);„
wherein m is 2 to 5 and R is an aromatic organic group,
the cyanate groups being bonded to an aromatic ring of
said aromatic organic group,
(2) a homoprepolymer of one or more polyfunction aro-
matic cyanate ester monomers of (1), and
(3) a coprepolymer of (1) and an amine; and
(b) at least one compound, said compound being selected
from the group consisting of acrylic epoxy esters and
methacrylic epoxy esters represented by the formula:
Xi O O «)
I II / \
tH2=C— C— O— R— C CH3
x2 y}
wherein X' is hydrogen or methyl, each of X^ and X^ is
hydrogen, methyl or ethyl, or when together X^ and X^
represent alkylene having 3-5 carbon atoms, R is hydro-
carbon or substituted hydrocarbon having 1-16 carbon
atoms, homoprepolymers of one or more acrylic epoxy
esters, homoprepolymers of one or more methacrylic
epoxy esters, coprepolymers of acrylic epoxy esters and
methacrylic epoxy esters and mixtures thereof; said com-
position including a mixture of components (a) and (b), a
preliminary reaction product of components (a) and (b),
or the combination of said mixture and said preliminary
reaction product.
4,393,197
ARYLENE SULRDE POLYMER PREPARATION
James T. Edmonds, Jr., Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesrille, Okla.
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,276
Int. a.3 C08G 75/14
U.S. a. 528—388 10 Claims
1. A method for producing polymers comprising:
(a) contacting at polymerization conditions a reaction mix-
ture consisting essentially of:
(1) at least one polyhalo-substituted aromatic compound.
(2) at least one organic amide,
(3) at least one alkali metal carbonate,
(4) H2S, and
(5) water in an amount up to 5 weight percent of the total
of the other reaction mixture components, and
(b) maintaining said reaction mixture at polymerization
conditions for a time sufficient to produce polymer.
"D E O R R' 0"|
I I II I I II
C=C— C=C— C— N— N— CH—
I >
. D' E' J
I
4,393,196
POLYMERS CONTAINING RECURRING UNITS FROM
DIENOIC ACID
Howard G. Rogers, Weston, Mass.; Russell A. Gaudiana, Merri-
mack, N.H.; Jeannette S. Manello, Lawrenceville, N.J., and
Ronald A. Sahatjian, Lexington, Mass., assignors to Polaroid
Corporation, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 238,057
I Int. CI.3 C08G 69/26. 73/08
U.S. CI. 528—363 13 Qaims
1. A film- or fiber-forming polymer comprising recurring
units of the formula
4,393,198
COPOLYMERS FROM OCTAFLUORONAPHTHALENE
Madeline S. Toy, Palo Alto, and Roger S. Stringham, Woodside,
both of Calif., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Air Force, Washington,
D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 182,562, Aug. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4^21,359.
This application Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,347
Int. Q.' C08G 65/00
U.S. Q. 528—397 2 Qaims
1. As a compound, the copolymer having the formula
O.
O
,CF2
OCF2O-
wherein n is an integer of from 2 to 30.
wherein each of D, D', E and E' is hydrogen, alkyl or substitut-
ed-alkyl and each of R and R' is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkaryl
or aralkyl.
4,393,199
CATIONIC POLYMERIZATION
Gerald E. Manser, Cupertino, Calif., assignor to S R I Interna-
tional, Menio Park, Calif.
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,935
Int. Q.' C08G 65/10. 65/18. 65/20: C07C 43/11
U.S. Q. 528—408 8 Qaims
1. A method of polymerizing a monomer which is capable of
cationic polymerization which comprises:
(a) providing a monomer capable of cationic polymerization
(b) providing a preinitiator precursor and a catalyst, the
catalyst being effective to cause cationic polymerization
of monomers, the preinitiator precursor bemg such that it
will form an adduct with the catalyst which in turn will
form an initiating species with the monomer which will
undergo chain extension with a further quantity of the
monomer,
(c) forming a mixture of the catalyst and preinitator precur-
sor or separately forming an adduct of the catalyst and
preinitiator precursor,
(d) bringing such mixture or preformed adduct into contact
with a quantity of the monomer in the proportion of one
mol of adduct to n mols of monomer, n being a relatively
small number, the quantity of adduct considerably exceed-
ing the quantity required for catalysis, and
(e) causing polymerization to proceed to substantial comple-
tion, thereby producing a polymer of low polydispersity
consisting predominantly of n mer units derived from the
744
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
monomer and one unit derived from the preinitiator pre-
cursor.
4^93,200
18 a-GLYCYRRHIZINIC ACID AND SALT THEREOF
Akira Miyashita, Yokohama; Kenzo Okada, Tokyo, and Takashi
Kuramoto, Onomichi, all of Japan, assignors to Maruzen
Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,880
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 9, 1980, 55/580; Feb.
29, 1980, 55/24023
Int. a? C07H 15/20
U.S. a. 536—18.1 4 Qaims
1. 18 a-glycyrrhizinic acid having the structural formula.
H3C^ COOH
CH3
CTC AAG TTA TGT GGA GTT CTA GGA CTT AGA
CTT ATG GAT GGA ACA TGG GTC GCG ATG CAA
ACA TCA AAT GAA ACC AAA TGG TGC CCT CCC
GAT CAG TTG GTG AAC CTG CAC GAC TTT CGC
TCA GAC GAA ATT GAG CAC CTT GTT GTA GAG
GAG TTG GTC AGG AAG AGA GAG GAG TGT CTG
GAT GCA CTA GAG TCC ATC ATG ACA ACC AAG
TCA GTG AGT TTC AGA CGT CTC AGT CAT TTA
AGA AAA CTT GTC CCT GGG TTT GGA AAA GCA
TAT ACC ATA TTC AAC AAG ACC TTG ATG GAA
GCC GAT GCT CAC TAC AAG TCA GTC AGA ACT
TGG AAT GAG ATC CTC CCT TCA AAA GGG TGT
TTA AGA GTT GGG GGG AGG TGT CAT CCT CAT
GTG AAC GGG GTG TTT TTC AAT GGT ATA ATA
TTA GGA CCT GAC GGC AAT GTC TTA ATC CCA
GAG ATG CAA TCA TCC CTC CTC CAG CAA CAT
ATG GAG TTG TTG GAA TCC TCG GTT ATC CCC
CTT GTG CAC CCC CTG GCA GAC CCG TCT ACC
GTT TTC AAG GAC GGT GAC GAG GCT GAG GAT
TTT GTT GAA GTT CAC CTT CCC GAT GTG CAC
AAT CAG GTC TCA GGA GTT GAC TTG GGT CTC
CCG AAC TGG GGG AAG TAT GTA TTA CTG AGT
GCA GGG GCC CTG ACT GCC TTG ATG TTG ATA
ATT TTC CTG ATG ACA TGT TGT AGA AGA GTC
AAT CGA TCA GAA CCT ACG CAA CAC AAT CTC
AGA GGG ACA GGG AGG GAG GTG TCA GTC ACT
CCC CAA AGC GGG AAG ATC ATA TCT TCA TGG
GAA TCA CAC AAG AGT GGG GGT GAG ACC AGA
CTG TGA.
HO
OH
and sahs thereof.
COOH
OH
4,393,201
DNA WHICH CODES FOR GLYCOPROTEIN OF
ERASTRAIN RABIES VIRUS
Peter J. Curtis, Berwyn, and William H. Wunner, Devon, both
of Pa., assignors to The Wistar Institute, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Nov. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,315
Int. a.i C07H 2J/04: A61K 39/205
U.S. a. 536—27 1 Claim
1. The single strand DNA that codes for the glycoprotein of
ERA-strain rabies virus beginning with an initiation codon
(ATG) and ending with a termination codon (TGA), and
having the nucleotide sequence as follows: ATG GTT CCT
CAG GCT CTC CTG TTT GTA CCC CTT CTG GTT
TTT CCA TTG TGT TTT GGG AAA TTC CCT ATT
TAC ACG ATA CTA GAC AAG CTT GGT CCC TGG
AGC CCG ATT GAC ATA CAT CAC CTC AGC TGC
CCA AAC AAT TTG GTA GTG GAG GAC GAA GGA
TGC ACC AAC CTG TCA GGG TTC TCC TAC ATG
GAA CTT AAA GTT GGA TAC ATC TTA GCC ATA
AAA ATG AAC GGG TTC ACT TGC ACA GGC GTT
GTG ACG GAG GCT GAA ACC TAC ACT AAC TTC
GTT GGT TAT GTC ACA ACC ACG TTC AAA AGA
AAG CAT TTC CGC CCA ACA CCA GAT GCA TGT
AGA GCC GCG TAC AAC TGG AAG ATG GCC GGT
GAC CCC AGA TAT GAA GAG TCT CTA CAC AAT
CCG TAC CCT GAC TAC CGC TGG CTT CGA ACT
GTA AAA ACC ACC AAG GAG TCT CTC GTT ATC
ATA TCT CCA AGT GTA GCA GAT TTG GAC CCA
TAT GAC AGA TCC CTT CAC TCG AGG GTC TTC
CCT AGC GGG AAG TGC TCA GGA GTA GCG GTG
TCT TCT ACC TAC TGC TCC ACT AAC CAC GAT
TAC ACC ATT TGG ATG CCC GAG AAT CCG AGA
CTA GGG ATG TCT TGT GAC ATT TTT ACC AAT
AGT AGA GGG AAG AGA GCA TCC AAA GGG AGT
GAG ACT TGC GGC TTT GTA GAT GAA AGA GGC
CTA TAT AAG TCT TTA AAA GGA GCA TGC AAA
4,393,202
METHOD FOR DEWATERING STARCH SLURRIES
CONTAINING SWOLLEN STARCH GRANULES
RESULTING FROM TREATMENT WITH CATIONIC
REAGENTS
William F. Breuninger, Greenwood, Ind., assignor to National
Starch and Chemical Corporation, Bridgewater, N.J.
Filed Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,987
Int. aJ C08B 31/00. 31/02. 31/08
U.S. a. 536—102 6 Qaims
1. In a process for dewatering starch conversion products
containing swollen starch granules resulting from treatment
with cationic reagents, the improvement which comprises
adding to the starch slurry a water soluble anionic polymer,
thereby increasing the production rate and yield while reduc-
ing suspended solids in the effluent.
433,203
PROCESS OF PREPARING ALKYLPOLYSACCHARIDES
Mark H. K. Mao, Cincinnati; Larry E. Miller, Madeira, and
John M. Weeman, Oncinnati, all of Ohio, assignors to The
Procter & Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,693
Int. CI.3 C07G 3/00; C07H 7/00,- C08B 37/00
U.S. a. 536—124 5 Claims
1. In the process of removing fatty alcohol containing from
about 12 to about 18 carbon atoms from a mixture of said
alcohol with an alkyl polysaccharide wherein saccharide chain
length is greater than one on the average and less than about 20
the improvement of heating the mixture under vacuum in a
thin film evaporator wherein the thin film evaporator provides,
in operation, a Reynolds number of at least about 20,000 and a
film thickness of less than about 10 mm and the temperature is
from about 120° C. to about 200° C. and the vacuum is from
about 0. 1 to about 20 mm of mercury so that no more than
about 2% of said fatty alcohol remains.
II
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
745
4,393,204
3-[[5.(4-CHLOROPHENYL)FURFURYLIDENE]AMINO]-
5-(SUBSTITUTED)-2-OXAZOLIDINONES
Stanford S. Pelosi, Jr., Norwich, N.Y., assignor to Norwich
Eaton Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Norwich, N.Y.
Filed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,823
Int. C1.3 C07D 413/12
U.S. a. 542—420 3 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
CI
Jl— CH=N— N
_^
HCI
CH2X
wherein X represents 4-morpholinyl or 1-pyrroIidinyl. ^
4,393,205
CEPHAJ^IRINE ESTERS AND SALTS THEREOF
Marco Falciani, and Renato Broggi, both of Milan, Italy, assign-
ors to Dobfar S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,945
Qaims priority, application Italy, Mar. 14, 1980, 20666 A/80
Int. Q.3 C07D 501/34
U.S. Q. 544^28 3 Qaims
1. Cephapirine esters having the formula
4,393,207
ALKOXYALKYLAMINOTRIAZINE
TRANS-ETHERinCATION PRODUCTS
Rainer Hummerich, Ludwigshafen; Wolfram Weiss, Mutter-
stadt; Franz Merger, Frankenthal; Guenther Inunel, Wein-
helm; Hans-Joachim Kraus, Ludwigshafen, and Karl-Qemens
Peters, Bad Durkheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,586
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 4,
1980, 3025352
Int. Q.^ C07D 251/70. 251/18
U.S. Q. 544—196 5 Qaims
1. An alkoxyalkylaminotriazine trans-etherification product
suitable for use in baking finishes or acid-hardening finishes,
which is obtained by reacting an alkoxyalkylaminotriazine of
the formula (I)
X 0)
N N
\ A A /*
N N N
B B
where X is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 15 carbon atoms, phenyl,
alkylphenyl, where alkyl is of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, or
■S>
(I)
5(— CH2— CONH,^^^ ^ S
U 1
O ^T^ CH2OCOCH3
COOR
wherein R is
-CH20COC(CH3)3.
4,393,206
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF
2,3-DIHYDRO-4H-l,4-BENZOTHIAZINES
Paul Uhrhan, Odenthal, and Edmund Krauthausen, Cologne,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktien-
gesellschaft, Leverkttsen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,221
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 24,
1981, 3111487
Int. Q.3 C07D 279/16
VJS. Q. 544—51 6 Claims
I. A process for the production of 2,3-dihydro-4H-l,4-ben-
zothiazines, characterised in that 2-(2-hydroxyalkyl)-thioani-
lines are cyclised using phosphorous acid with the release of
water.
— N
/
i
\
B
A and B are identical or different and each is hydrogen, alkyl
of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 3 to IS carbon atoms or
— CH— OR',
I
R
and R and R' are identical or different and each is hydrogen or
alkyl of 1 to 9 carbon atoms, with from 0. 1 to 6 moles, per mole
of alkoxyalkylaminotriazine, of a ;3-hydroxyaldehyde of the
general formula (II)
R'" (II)
HO— CH— C— CHO
I I
R" R""
where R", R'" and R"" are identical or different and each is
hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 5 carbon atoms or R'" and R""
together with the a-carbon atom form a cyclopentane or cy-
clohexane ring, and R'" or R"" can also be hydroxyalkyi of 1
to 4 carbon atoms and R"" can also be phenyl, in the presence
of an acidic catalyst, and removing the alcohol resulting from
the trans-etherification.
4,393,208
5-METHYL-2-TRIFLUOROMETHYLINDOLO[24-
bJQUINOXALINE
Robert J. Alaimo, Norwich, N.Y., assignor to Norwich Eaton
Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Norwich, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,899
Int. Q.3 C07D 487/04; A61K 31/495
VJS. Q. 544—343 1 Claim
1. The compound 5-methyl-2-trinuoromethylindolo[2,3-
b]quinoxaline.
1032 O.G.rr28
746
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393,209
DECAPRENYLAMINE DERIVATIVES
Yoshiyuki Tahara, Ohi; Hiroyasu Koyama, Ageo; Yasuhiro
Komatsu, Niiza; Reiko Kubota, Tokyo, and Toshihiro Takaha-
shi, Ohi, all of Japan, assignors to Nisshin Flour Milling Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed No?. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,326
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 19, 1979, 54/148822
Int. a.3 C07D 211/06. 295/02. 239/20. 277/22
U.S. a. 544—404 4 Qaims
1. A compound of the general formula
. CH3
H-(-CH2— C=CH— CH2^TtrN J^
wherein R, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which it
is attached, is
piperazino or morphoHno, and the pharmaceutically accept-
able acid addition salts thereof.
CH3
— N N-(-CH2— CH=C— CH2-tlTrH,
\ /
4,393,211
PREPARATION OF AROMATIC SULFOHALIDES
Peter Tonne, Neustadt, and Hagen Jaedicke, Ludwigshafen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktien-
gesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov, 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,334
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1981, 3107700
Int. C1.3 C07D 215/36; C07C 143/70
U.S. a. 546—153 10 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of an aromatic sulfohalide
by reacting an aqueous solution, containing a hydrogen halide,
of an aromatic diazonium halide with sulfur dioxide, which
process comprises:
(a) reacting
(1) an aqueous solution which does not dissolve sulfur
dioxide, said solution essentially containing the hydro-
gen halide HX of a diazonium salt which is derived
from the corresponding aromatic amine and the halogen
X of the desired sulfohalide, with
(2) sulfur dioxide in the presence of an inert organic sol-
vent which dissolves the sulfur dioxide but which is
immiscible or only partially miscible with water;
(b) decomposing the diazonium salt, simultaneously or sub-
sequently, by means of a catalyst for diazonium salt de-
composition; and
(c) treating the resulting reaction mixture, or the organic
phase thereof after removal of the aqueous phase, with an
oxidizing agent.
and the acid addition salts thereof, i
4,393,210
l(2H)-ISOQUINOLONE COMPOUNDS AND ACID
ADDITION SALTS THEREOF
Shigeo Senda, Gifu; Eiichi Katho, Aza-nishimachi; Osamu Oh-
tani, Minokamo; Hidekazu Miyake, and Khosuke Fujiwara,
both of Tokushima, all of Japan, assignors to Seiyaku Co.,
Ltd., Aichi and Taiho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, both
of, Japan
Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,188
Int. a.3 C07D 217/14; A61K 31/47
U.S. a. 546—141 5 Qaims
1. l(2H)-lsoquinolone compounds represented by the for-
mula (1) —
4,393,212
CERTAIN NICOTINIC ACID ESTERS AND
CORRESPONDING NICOTINONITRILES
John J. Baldwin, and Gerald S. Ponticello, both of Lansdale,
Pa., assignors to Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 7,092, Jan. 29, 1979, Pat. No. 4,279,913,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 866,961, Jan. 4, 1978,
abandoned. This application May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,335
Int. C\? C07D 213/55
U.S. Q. 546—286 2 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
a)
N— z— n;
,R2
'R3
wherein Y represents hydrogen, chlorine or a methoxy group,
Z represents a straight chain or branched chain divalent satu-
rated aliphatic hydrocarbon group having 2 to 4 carbon atoms,
Rl represents a cyano group, a lower alkoxycarbonyl group, a
carbamoyl group, N-alkylcarbamoyl having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms in the alkyl moiety, N,N-dialkylcarbamoyl having 1 to 4
carbon atoms in each alkyl moiety, 4-methylpiperazinocarbo-
nyl or morpholinocarbonyl, a phenyl group or halophenyl or
alkoxyphenyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in the alkoxy moiety,
R2 represents hydrogen or a lower alkyl group, R3 represents
a lower alkyl group, or R2 and R3 can form, when taken to-
gether with nitrogen atom to which they are attached, pyr-
rolidino, piperidino, 4-methylpiperazino, 4-hydroxyethyl-
wherein R3 is COOC2H5 or CN and R5 is CH2Br, CHBr2 or
CBr3.
4,393,213
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG 6-PHENOXYPICOLINIC
ALDEHYDES
Kiyomi Ozawa, and Shigeru Ishii, both of Funabashi, Japan,
assignors to Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,228
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1981, 56-3224;
Jul. 6, 1981, 56-105294
Int. C\? C07D 213/64
U.S. Q. 546—298 16 Qaims
1. A process for producing 6-phenoxypicolinic aldehydes,
which comprises reacting a 2-halogeno-6-phenoxypyridine
represented by the general formula I:
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
747
^Kx "ri
^*^ O N '
where X is a halogen atom, Y is independently an alkyl group
of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an alkoxyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms,
an alkoxyl group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms substituted by a halo-
gen atom, an alkylthio group of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, a trifluo-
romethyl group, a fluorine atom or a chlorine atom, Z is a
hydrogen atom or a fluorine atom, said magnesium metal being
in an amount of from 1 to 2 equivalents to said 2-halogeno-6-
phenoxypyridine, and n is an integer of 0 to 2, with magnesium
metal, and then with a formylating reagent.
4,393,214
PREPARATION OF
2-CHLORO-5-TRIFLUOROMETHYLPYRIDINE AND
2-CHLORO-5-PERCHLOROFLUOROMETHYLPYRI.
DINES
Norman L. Roberts, Walton, and Graham Whitaker, Frodsham,
both of England, assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries
PLC, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 143,479, Apr. 22, 1980, Pat. No.
4,288,600, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 95,678,
Nov. 19, 1979, abandoned. This application Mar. 13, 1981, Ser.
No. 243,428
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 7, 1978,
47583/78
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 8, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
I Int. Q.3 C07D 213/26
U.S. Q. 546—345 4 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of 2,6-dichloro-3-tri-
fluoromethylpyridine which consists essentially of vaporizing
3-trinuoromethylpyridine and chlorinating the vaporized 3-tri-
fluoromethylpyridine by contacting the same in the vapour
phase with gaseous chlorine at a temperature in the range from
400° C. to 500* C. using at least one mole of chlorine per mole
of 3-trifluoromethylpyridine.
4,393,215
CLEAVAGE OF DIALKOXYKETOXIME
Milorad M. Rogic, Whippany, and Bryce C. Oxenrider, Florham
Park, both of N.J., assignors to Allied Corporation, Morris
~ Township, Morris County, N.J.
jFiled Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,754
Int. Q.3 C07D 277/05
U.S. Q. 548—125 6 Qaims
1. A process of cleaving a dialkoxyketoxime which com-
prises reacting in the liquid phase a dialkoxyketoxime of the
formula:
OY
R— C— OZ
I
R— C=NOH
wherein Y and Z are each independently linear or branched
alkyl and R and R' are each independently linear or branched
alkyl or are together — (CH2)/i— where n is an integer from 3
to 10, with a halogen selected from elemental chlorine and
elemental bromine in the presence of a base and at least an
equimolar amount of water under conditions forming a prod-
uct selected from the group consisting of an oximinohalide of
the formula:
O
II
R— C— OZ
R— C=NOH
I
X
where R, R' and Z' are as defined above and X is CI or Br; a
nitrile oxide of the formula:
R— C— OZ
R— C=N-
->o
a furoxan of the formula:
O
II
R— C— OZ
R— C=N >0
\
O
/
R— C=N
R— C— OZ
II
O
and mixtures thereof.
4,393,216
METHOD OF PRODUCING
AMINOBENZIMIDAZOLONES
Tsuneaki Hirashima; Toshiyuki Miyata, both of Sakai; Yo-
shikazu Yamamoto, Ikeda, and Mitsuyuki Kato, Neyagawa,
all of Japan, assignors to Showa Chemical Co., Ltd. and Osaka
Municipal Government, both of, Japan
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,619
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 30, 1980, 55-187383
Int. Q.3 C07D 235/26
U.S. Q. 548—305 13 Qaims
1. A method of producing S-aminobenzimidazolones which
comprises reacting a 2,4-dinitroaniline with carbon monoxide
in a solvent in the presence of selenium, a base selected from
the group consisting of tertiary amines, N,N-dialkylamides and
inorganic bases selected from the group consisting of hydrox-
ides, oxides, carbonates, bicarbonates and sulfides or alkali
metals and alkaline earth metals, and water, said 2,4-dinitroani-
line containing no additional substituents or only containing
substituents which are substantially inert in the reaction.
4,393,217
SUBSTITUTED PHENYL-5-AMINOPYRAZOLES
John P. Dusza, and Jay D. Albright, both of Nanuet, N.Y.,
assignors to American Cyanamid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,606
Int. Q.3 C07D 231/38
U.S. Q. 548—362 3 Claims
1. The compound 5-amino-N-benzyl-l-methyl-4-
pyrazolecarboxamide.
748
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393,218
2,2,4,5,5-PENTAMETHYL-3-FORMYL-A3.PYRROLINE
AND THE PREPARATION THEREOF
Silvestro Costanzi, S. Guiliano Mi; Francesco Tessarolo, Monza,
and Maurizio BnineUi, Milan, all of Italy, assignors to Anic,
S.p.A., Palermo, Italy
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 149,511, May 13, 1980,
abandoned. This application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,753
Qaims priority, application Italy, May 29, 1979, 23080 A/79
Int. a.J C07D 207/24
U.S. a. 548—530 3 Claims
1. The compound, 2,2,4,5,5-pentamethyl-3-formyl-A3-pyrro-
line.
2. A process for the preparation of the compound of claim 1
which comprises reacting di-tert-propargylamine at a pH equal
to or less than 3 in an environment comprising from 60 to 65%
of sulfuric acid, based on the total solution, at a temperature of
between 120' and 135' C.
3. A process for the preparation of the compound of claim 1
which comprises reacting di-tert-propargylamine at a pH equal
to or less than 3 in an environment comprising between 45 and
50% of sulfuric acid and between 0.6 and 0.7% of mercury
oxide, based on the total solution, at a temperature between
100° and 115° C.
4,393,221
PROCESS TO PRODUCE HEXAHYDRONAPHTHACENE
DERIVATIVES
Michael J. Broadhurst, Baldock; Cedric H. Hassall, Welwyn,
and Gareth J. Thomas, Luton, all of England, assignors to
Hoffinann-La Roche Inc., Nutley, N^I.
Division of Ser. No. 111,348, Jan. 11, 1980, Pat. No. 4,316,985.
This appUcation Nov. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,172
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 16, 1979,
7901537; Jul. 26, 1979, 7926151
Int. a.3 C07C 50/22; C07D 317/72, 339/06
U.S. a. 549—39 3 Qaims
1. A process for the manufacture of compounds of the gen-
eral formula
4,393,219
SALT OF CHLORHEXIDINE
Koji Inoue, Osaka; Nobukatsu Sato, Nara, and Takashi Tamura,
Takatsuki, all of Japan, assignors to Maruishi Pharmaceutical
Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,892
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 30, 1981, 56-47043
Int. a.J C07D 207/28
U.S. a. 548—534 1 Qaim
1. Chlorhexidine-di-2-pyrrolidone-5-carboxylate.
wherein one of R' and R^ represents a hydrogen atom and the
other represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy group or R'
and R2 together represent an ethylene ketal or ethylene thio
ketal group, R^ represents a hydrogen atom or a hydroxy or
lower alkanoyloxy group and R* represents a lower alkyl or
lowr alkoxycarbonyl or benzyloxycarbonyl group or a group
of the formula
R5 R* •
\ /
— C— CH2— X
wherein R' and R* together form an oxo group or an ethylene
ketal or ethylene thio ketal group and X represents a hydrogen
atom or a hydroxy or lower alkanoyloxy group,
which comprises
(a) eliminating 2 mols of the lower alkane carboxylic acid
. R^H from a compound of the general formula
4393,220
2-ALKENYL AND 2-ALKYNYL SUCCINIC ACID
N-(3,5.DICHLOROPHENYL)IMIDES
Norman Haberie, Munich; Otto Eberie, Ottobrunn, and Walter
Hafner, Furth, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Consortium fUr elektrochemische Industrie GmbH, Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,323
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 9,
1980, 3013566
Int. a? AOIN 37/32; C07D 207/40
U.S. a. 548—545 2 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
CI
O
II
C— CH— R2
\^=/ C— CH— CH2— A— Ri
CI
in which
A denotes the — CH=CH— or — CVC— group and
Rl and R2 represent hydrogen or methyl.
II
wherein R', R^, R' and R* have the significance given
eariier in this claim and R'' represents a lower alkanoyloxy
group,
by heating or treatment with an alkali metal hydroxide.
4,393,222
TRICYCLO[6.4.0.02'^]
DODECANE-3,6-DIPHENYL-l,8,4,5-TETRACARBOXYUC
ACID DIANHYDRIDES
Tayseer S. Nimry, Wheaton, and Ellis K. Fields, River Forest,
both of 111., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana),
Chicago, 111.
Division of Ser. No. 294,348, Aug. 19, 1981, Pat. No. 4,358,580.
This appUcation Jan. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 386,888
Int. a.3 C07D 493/04
VJS. a. 549—234 1 Claim
1. As a composition of matter the dianhydrides of the follow-
ing structure:
July 12, 198;
CHEMICAL
749
wherein Z is either hydrogen or benzene radical.
4,393,223
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF MACROCYCLIC
ESTERS AND LACTONES UTILIZING MIXED METAL
CATALYSTS
Eugene G. Harris, West Chester, Ohio, assignor to Emery In-
dustries, Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 73,755, Sep. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,727
Int. a.3 C07D 3J3/00, 313/18. 321/04, 321/08, 321/12. 321/00,
323/00
U.S. a. 549—266 8 Claims
1. A process for the production of macrocyclic compounds
having 8 to 20 carbon atoms in the ring and selected from the
group consisting of
O O
II II
-C— R— C— O-
■OR"^
:C— R— C— O— I
■eoR'^j 1
pR'"— C— O— I
o
N
CR"— CO— I
eOR"-^
[Al-rp-(-C,
r « 1
,H2m-)-Rl]3 0r AI-OCR2 3
pR2 1
M-f-0(C;„H2mi-RiLorM
wherein Ri, R2 and m are the same as defined above, M is
lithium, sodium, potassium or magnesium and y is 1 when
M is lithium, sodium or pnstassium, and 2 when M is mag-
nesium.
4,393,224
TELOMERIZATION OF BUTADIENE AND CARBON
DIOXIDE
James A. Daniels, Frodsham, England, assignor to Imperial
Chemical Industries Pic, London, England
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,914
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 20, 1980,
8033740
Int. a.3 C07D 309/32
U.S. Q. 549—273 12 Claims
1. A process for the manufacture of 2-ethylidenehept-6-en-5-
olide which comprises reacting in a liquid medium 1,3-butadi-
ene with carbon dioxide in the presence of
(a) a palladium complex catalyst which is a complex of
palladium with a phosphorus (111) compound or pyridine
or a substituted pyridine, and
(b) a tertiary amine having a pKa value in the range 10 to 14.
4,393,225
AI-77 COMPOUNDS AND PHARMACEUTICALLY
ACCEPTABLE SALTS THEREOF
Hiroshi Hayashi; Yukiji Shimojima; Takashi Shirai; Torao
Ishida, all of Fuji, and Mitsuru Shibukawa, Yokohama, all of
Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 167,581
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1979, 54-86892;
May 12, 1980, 55-61685
Int. a.3 C07D 311/76
U.S. a. 549—289 5 Claims
1. An Al-77 compound of the formula (1) or (11):
ORi O
where R' is a bivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon radical having 1
to 16 carbon atoms, R" is a saturated bivalent aliphatic hydro-
carbon radical having from 2 to 12 carbon atoms, R'" is a
bivalent aliphatic hydrocarbon radical having 6 to 18 carbon
atoms and x is an integer from 1 to 4 by thermal depolymeriza-
tion of the corresponding linear polyester which comprises
heating the polyester at a temperature from 200° C. to AQO' C.
and pressure less than 50 mm Hg. in the presence of 0.01% to
20% by weight, based on the polyester, of a mixed metal cata-
lyst comprising:
(a) an aluminum alkoxide or aluminum carboxylate corre-
sponding to the formula
(I)
(II)
OH CONHR7
where m is an integer from 1 to 22, Ri is hydrogen, an
alkoxy or polyalkoxy radical having from 1 to 16 carbon
atoms and R2 is an alkyl group having from 2 to 22 carbon
atoms, phenyl or substituted phenyl having 7 to 20 carbon
atoms; and
(b) from 0.05 to 8 moles, per mole of (a), of an alkali metal or
magnesium alkoxide or carboxylate corresponding to the Rj, R3 and R5 are each H, R', — CH2R. or —COR;
formula R6 is H or R;
wherein:
X is NR6 or O;
Y is NHR5 or combines with Z to provide a link for bonding C
andC;
Z is H or combines with Y to provide a link for bonding C and
C;
750
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
R? is H, R or CH2R;
R is a hydrocarbon group consisting of a straight or branched
alkyl group of Ci to Cn containing from 0 to 3 double bonds
or triple bonds, an aromatic group of C6 to Cjo, a bridged
hydrocarbon group of C7 to C lo, a cycloalkyl group of C3 to
Cs and an arylaliphatic group having a C6 to Cio aromatic
group on a Ci to C5 aliphatic group, wherein the above
hydrocarbons can be substituted with halogen, 0x0, car-
boxyl, hydroxyl, a straight or branched aliphatic group of
Ci to C5 containing from 0 to 3 double bonds or triple bonds,
an aromatic group of Ce to Cio, a cycloalkyl group of C3 to
Cg, an aromatic-aliphatic group of C7 to Cu, alkoxy of Ci to
C5, thioalkoxyl or Ci to C5, carboalkoxy of C2 to C6, acyl of
Ci to C6 or acyloxy of C2 to Ce;
R' is the same as R exclusive of those groups wherein unsatu-
rated carbon or tertiary carbon is directly bonded to O or N;
R4 is H or combines with T2 to provide a link for bonding C
and O in a lactone ring; and
T2 is OH or combines with R4 to provide a link for bonding C
and O in a lactone ring;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof with hydrohalo-
genic acid, phosphoric acid, sulfuric acid, oxalic acid, maleic
acid or an organic sulfonic acid.
RiO
RiO
IIIA
wherein the two Ri groups together form an alkylene group of
1 to 3 carbon atoms, R2 is an alkyl group of 1 to about 8 carbon
atoms, a cycloalkyl group of 3 to about 7 carbon atoms or a
phenyl group, and each R3 independently is an alkyl group of
1 to 3 carbon atoms.
21. A cis 2-alkyl-S,6-dialkoxyindane-l-trialkylammonium
salt of Formula IVA
4,393,226
COMPOUNDS AND METHODS FOR CHANGING
CALaUM METABOLISM WITHIN THE CELLS OF A
MAMMAL
Donald T. Witiak, Mount Vernon, and Ralf G. Rahwan, Colum-
bus, both of Ohio, assignors to The Ohio State University
Research Foundation, Columbus, Ohio
FUed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,008
Int. a.3 C07D 317/44: A61K 31/36
U.S. a. 549—433 30 Qaims
R|0
RiO
IVA
wherein the two Ri groups together form an alkylene group of
1 to 3 carbon atoms, R2 is an alkyl group of 1 to about 8 carbon
atoms, a cycloalkyl group of 3 to about 7 carbon atoms or a
phenyl group, each R3 independently is an alkyl group of 1 to
3 carbon atoms and X~ is an anion.
:B:^^
/ \
4,393,227
PROCESS FOR DECHLORINATING ORGANIC
COMPOUNDS
Edward N. Squire, Glen Mills, Pa., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,060
Int. a.3C07Di7 7/;0
U.S. a. 549—455 18 Claims
1. A process for dechlorinating an organic compound se-
lected from the group consisting of
1. A 2-alkyl-5,6-dialkoxyindene-l-trialkylammonium salt of
Formula II
RiO
RjO
II
wherein the two Rfs together form an alkylene group of 1 to
3 carbon atoms, R2 is an alkyl group of 1 to about 8 carbon
atoms, a cycloalkyl group of 3 to about 7 carbon atoms or a
phenyl group, each R3 independently is an alkyl group of 1 to
3 carbon atoms and X~ is an anion.
11. A cis 2-alkyl-5,6-dialkoxy-l-dimethylaminoindane of
Formula IIIA
CI
I
Y— C-
Cl
I
-c— z
o o
\ /
where each of Y and Z independently is hydrogen, chlorine or
fluorine, provided at least one of Y and Z is fluorine; and each
of R3 and R* independently is hydrogen, fluorine or trifluoro-
methyl to the ethylenically unsaturated compound,
said process comprising contacting the organic chlorine-
containing compound with at least a stoichiometric
amount of metallic magnesium, a mercury based promoter
selected from water-soluble mercury salts and metallic
mercury, and iodine in the presence of tetrahydrofuran at
a temperature from about room temperature to at least the
boiling point of tetrahydrofuran at the operating pressure;
with a proviso that magnesium amalgam can be used in lieu
of magnesium and the mercury-based promoter.
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
751
4,393,228
EPOXYSUCaNIC AOD DERIVATIVES
Jiro Sawada, Kodaira; Kazunori Hanada; Masahani Tamai, both
of Ageo; Shigeo Morimoto, Saitama, and Sadafumi Omura,
Ageo, all of Japan, assignors to Taisho Pharmaceutical Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 22, 1978, Ser. No. 880,180
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 3, 1977, 52-23092;
Mar. 4, 1977, 52-23536; Mar. 4, 1977, 52-23537
Int. CV C07D 303/48. 407/12. 411/12. 407/02
U.S. a. 549—549 14 Claims
1. Trans-epoxysuccinic acid derivatives represented by the
general formula
or silicon tetrahalide in the presence of a catalyst and a cata-
lytic amount of a hydrosilane reaction promoter at an elevated
temperature to produce a redistribution product containing
halogen-rich disilanes and dialkyldihalosilane.
O
/
)
\
H
I
C— COR'
C— cor2
I
H
4,393,230
METHOD OF PREPARING ETHYL SILICATE
William A. Crocker, Corvallis, and Duane L. Hug, Albany, both
of Oreg., assignors to Teledyne Industries, Inc., Albany, Oreg.
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,554
Int. a.3 C07F 7/08. 7/18
U.S. a. 556—457 5 Claims
1. A method of continuously producing ethyl silicate, having
a predetermined percentage of silica content, in high yields
from the reactants silicon tetrachloride, ethanol and water
comprising adjusting the flowrate of the reactants to the reac-
tor in relation to fluctuations in the temperature of the reaction
in the reactor.
wherein
(1) R' and R^' are each R^ wherein R' is — O— A'— R*.
— Q— a2— R5 or — OCH2— R^ wherein A' is alkylene
containing zero to 4 carbon atoms or said alkylene substi-
tuted with methyl, R^ is cycloalkyl containing 3 to 10
carbon atoms, or said cycloalkyl substituted with one to 3
halogen or methyl, A^ is alkylene containing 2 or 3 carbon
atoms, or alkenylene containing 2 or 3 carbon atoms, R' is
phenyl, R^ is furyl, tetrahydrofuryl, thienyl, naphthyl,
naphthyl substituted with one or two halogen or methyl,
phenyl substituted with one to three halogen, methyl,
methoxy, methylenedioxy or trifluoromethyl, or cy-
cloalkenyl containing 5 to 8 carbon atoms, or
(2) R' is hydroxy, R' or R'', and R^ is hydroxy or R^ wherein
R3 is as defined above, R^ is alkoxy containing one to 12
carbon atoms, allyloxy, propargyloxy, phenoxy or ben-
zyloxy, and R^ is an amino acid residue represented by the
general formula
_NH— A^— COR^
wherein A^ is methylene, ethylene, trimethylene, alkyl-
idene containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms or said alkyl idene
substituted with one to 3 hydroxy-, methyl, thiol,
methylthio, benzylthio, phenyl, phenyl substituted with hy-
droxy or halogen, indazolyl, imidazolyl, — COR'° or
— NHR" wherein R'^ is amino or — GR'^ wherein R'^ is
hydrogen, alkyl containing one to 5 carbon atoms, benzyl or an
alkali metal cation, and R" is hydrogen, formyl, alkoxycar-
bonyl containing 2 to 5 carbon atoms, benzyloxycarbonyl,
methoxybenzyloxycarbonyl, tosyl, guanyl, or guanyl substi-
tuted by nitro, and R' is amino or — OR'^ wherein R'Ms
hydrogen, alkyl containing one to 5 carbon atoms, benzyl or an
alkali metal cation, with the proviso that R' is neither hydroxy,
alkoxy containing one to 12 carbon atoms, nor phenoxy when
R2 is hydroxy, and salts thereof when R' or R2 is hydroxy.
4,393,231
FLUORINE-CONTAINING PHENYL BENZOATE
COMPOUNDS, AND THEIR PRODUCTION AND USE
Susumu Misaki, Minoo; Masahiro Suefuji, Settsu; Tamio
Mitote, Kawanishi, and Naotake Matsumura, Itami, all of
Japan, assignors to Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 75,686, Sep. 14, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,128
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1978, 53/115447;
Nov. 21, 1978, 53/144571
Int. a.5 C09K 3/34: C02F 1/13: C07C 69/635. 121/60. 121/75.
79/12. 79/35
U.S. a. 560—73 1 Qaim
1. A fluorine-containing phenyl benzoate compound of the
formula:
wherein R is a C6-C8 alkoxy group and X is a trifluoromethyl
group.
4,393,232
PREPARATION OF 3-BROMO-4-FLUORO-BENZOIC
ACID
Fritz Maurer, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,827
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19,
1980, 3035355
Int. a.3 C07C 51/29
U.S. a. 562—419 5 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of 3-bromo-4-fluorobenzoic
acid of the formula
/ \
4,393,229
REDISTRIBUTION OF POLYSILANES IN HIGH
BOILING RESIDUES
Alan Ritzer, Sand Lake; Abraham L. H^ar, Scotia; Harry R.
McEntee, Waterford, and Ray W. Shade, Qiflon Park, all of
N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company, Waterford,
N.Y.
Filed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,601
Int. a.3 C07F 7/08
U.S. a. 556—430 34 Qaims
1. A process for treating alkyl-rich disilane-containing resi-
dues, comprising contacting the residue with alkyltrihalosilane
■CO— OH
Br
comprising reacting fluorobenzene of the formula
'-0
with acetyl chloride in the presence of an acylation catalyst at
752
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
a temperature from about 0* to 100° C, without isolation
reacting the reaction mixture thereby obtained with bromine at
a temperature from about 50° to 150° C, separating the result-
ing bromination product and without purification reacting it
with hypochlorite solution at a temperature between about 0°
and 100° C.
4,393,233
PREPARATION OF
P^l,l-DIMETHYL-2-HYDROXYETHYL)BENZOICAaD
Herbert K. Reimschuessel, Morristown, and Bruce T. DeBona,
Madison, both of N.J., assignors to Allied Corporation, Mor-
ris Township, Morris County, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 153,361, May 27, 1980, Pat, No. 4,310,655.
This application Jan. l\ 1982, Ser. No. 337,900
Int. a.3 C07C 65/00
U.S. a. 562—473 2 Qaims
1. Process for production of (p-l,l-dimethyl-2-hydroxye-
thyl)benzoic acid comprising the steps:
(a) Brominating isobutyric acid;
(b) Condensing the resulting alpha-bromoisobutyric acid
with benzene;
(c) Brominating the resulting dimethylphenylacetic acid;
(d) Reducing the carboxyl group of the brominated acid
obtained in step (c) to form p-( 1,1 -dimethyl- 1-hydroxye-
thyl)bromobenzene;
(e) Replacing the bromine atom in the product obtained in
step (d) by the cyano group;
(0 Converting the cyano group in the product of step (e) to
the carboxyl group.
4,393,235
PROCESS FOR PRODUONG
P-HYDROXYPHENYL/ ACETIC AOD
Alan Mitchell, Macclesfield, and Thomas Bailey, Bramhall, both
of England, assignors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC,
London, England
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,925
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 11, 1980,
8019155
Int. a.3 C07C 65/01
U.S. a. 562—478 5 Qaims
1. A process for the manufacture of p-hydroxyphenylacetic
acid which comprises reducing p-hydroxymandelic acid with a
stannous salt under acidic conditions, the reduction being
carried out in aqueous solution in the presence of a mineral
acid at a temperature of up to 100° C.
4,393,236
PRODUCnON OF NONHYGROSCOPIC SALTS OF
4-HYDROXYBUTYRIC ACID
Joseph Klosa, Janickestrasse 13, D-1000 BerUn 37, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,419
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17,
1980, 3027390; Nov. 20, 1980, 3049869
Int. a.3 C07C 59/00
U.S. a. 562— 579 21 Qaims
1. Waterfree calcium-4-hydroxybutyrate of the formula
Ca(COOCH2CH2CH20H)2.
4,393,234
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
3-HYDROXYBENZOIC AOD
Heinz U. Blank, Odenthal; Eike Gabel, Bergisch-Gladbach;
Ernst Goldschmitt, Dormagen, and Werner Mentzel, Cologne,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesell-
schaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed May 17, 1982, Ser. No. 378,922
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 4,
1981, 3122260; Jun. 4, 1981, 3122264
Int. C\? C07C 65/04
U.S. a. 562-475 28 Qaims
1. In a process for the preparation of 3-hydroxybenzoic acid
by contacting 3-sulphobenzoic acid with an alkali metal hy-
droxide at an elevated temperature, the improvement which
comprises:
(A) employing a technical 3-sulphobenzoic acid mixture
containing sulphuric acid and/or sulphur trioxide, which
technical mixture contains at least 75% by weight of
3-sulphobenzoic acid, relative to the total organic constit-
uents present, and not more than 35% by weight of sul-
phuric acid and/or SO3, relative to the total mass;
(B) the technical mixture is contacted with mixing at an
elevated temperature with sufficient 50 to 100% strength
by weight alkali metal hydroxide, the remaining 50 to 0%
by weight consisting essentially of water, such that 2.5 to
8 mols of alkali meul hydroxide are present per mol of
3-sulphobenzoic acid, after neutralization of the sulphuric
acid and all of the sulpho and carboxyl groups;
(C) the resultant alkaline reaction mixture is reacted at a
temperature in the range of 220° to 450* C. under a pres-
sure of 1 to 120 bars; and
(D) the alkaline reaction mixture so obtained is acidified
with a mineral acid to a pH value less than 4 and 3-
hydroxy benzoic acid is recovered at a temperature in the
range of -5° to -t- 40° C.
4,393,237
POLYOXYALKYLENEPOLYACRYLAMIDES
Ernest L. Yeakey, Houston, and Lewis W. Watts, Jr., Austin,
both of Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,906
Int. Q.3 C07C 103/153
U.S. Q. 564—153 3 Qaims
I. A mixture of compounds of the formula
He
I
CH2-K>CH2CH(CH3H-,NH-(-COC(CH3) = CHjlb
Hf
I
CHjCHzCCHj+OCHzCHCCHjH-yNH-KrOCCCHj) = CHjlc
CHz+OCHzCHCCHjH-^NH+COCCCHj) = CHjld
wherein x -i- y + z has an average value of 3 to 30; b, c , d are 0 or
1; provided, if b=0. eis I and conversely e is 0 if b=l; ifc=0,
f is 1 and conversely f is 0 if c=l; if d=0,g is 1 and conversely
g is 0 if d= 1 ; provided, further, at least one of b, c and d must
be I.
4,393,238
METHOD FOR THE PRODUCHON OF BLOCKED
ISOCYANATES
Hans-Georg Zengel, Kleinwallstadt, and Manfred Bergfeld,
Erienbach, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Akzo
NV, Amhem, Netherlands
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 265,321
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1980, 3019491
Int. C\? C07C 131/00-
U.S. Q. 564—255 4 Qaim$
1. Method for the production of blocked isocyanates of the
general formula
R' R'
\ /
Cs=N— O— C— N— R— N— C— O— N=C
/ HI I " \„.,
R" O H H O R"
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
753
in which R, R' and R" represent an aliphatic, cycloaliphatic or sulfur dihalide with an aromatic reaciant compound of the
aromatic hydrocarbon group, whereby R' and R" can be the structural formula
same or different, and when R' is an aromatic group, R" can
also be a hydrogen atom, comprising reacting terephthalic
dialdoxime, isophthalic dialdoxime or an aliphatic, cycloali-
phatic or aromatic ketoxime or an aromatic aldoxime of the
general formula
R2 Ri
:NOH
4,393,239
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF POLYARYL
AMINES HAVING METHYLENE BRIDGES
Efim Biller, Ziirich, Switzerland, assignor to Elprochine AG,
Zurich, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 2,812, Jan. 11, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 847,650, Nov. 1, 1977, abandoned.
This application Apr. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 140,914
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 6, 1976,
14012/76
Int. Q.3 C07C 85/08
U.S. Q. 564—331 4 Qaims
1. In a process for the preparation of polyaryl amines having
methylene bridges from arylamines and formaldehyde in the
presence of acids wherein 0.25-1.3 mol of formaldehyde per
mol of arylamine is added in a first mixing step in the presence
of 0.85-1.01 mol of acid, the improvement which comprises
adding at least 0.1 mol of free arylamine before the formed
compounds of the anhydroformaldehyde aniline type are no-
ticeably rearranged into benzyl anilines, then reacting the
reaction mixture at temperatures between 30° and 70° C. to
form benzyl anilines and, finally, converting the resulting
precondensate at temperatures between 70° and 120° C. into
polyamines having methylene bridges.
4,393,240
Ok*TICALLY ACnVE PHOSPHINES
John K. Stille, c/o Polymer Sciences Corporation, 330 Madison
Ave., New York, N.Y. 10017
I FUed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,220
' Int. Q.3 C07F 9/50. 15/00
U.S. Q. 568—13 6 Qaims
1. (R)- 1 ,2-bis(dipfienylphosphino)-3-benzyloxypropane.
Q'
in the presence of 10-100 Mol% sodium-, potassium- or calci-
um-hydroxide, relative to the ketoxime or aldoxime used, with
the sodium-, potassium- or calcium-salt of a bis-N-chloramide
of the general formula
a— NH— CO— R— CO— NH— CI
in water or a mixture of water and an aprotic solvent, at tem-
peratures in the range between 20° and 100* C.
wherein Ri, R2, R3 and R4, which can be the same or different,
represent hydrogen or a lower alkyl, and Z is — OR5 with R5
representing an alkyl having from 1 to 8 carbon atoms or a
phenyl.
4 393 242
PROCESS FOR PREPARING METHYLVANILLYL
KETONE FROM ISOEUGENOL
Meyer Sletzinger, North Plainfield, N.J., assignor to Merck A
Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 79,748, Sep. 28, 1979, Pat. No. 4,337,360.
This application Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,623
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 29,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 C07C 45/52
U.S. Q. 568—322 6 Qaims
I. A through process for preparing methylvanillyl ketone
which comprises:
(1) direct oxidation of an unprotected isoeugenol in an aque-
ous solution of an organic acid to obtain a reaction mixture
containing unprotected isoeugenol glycol as an intermedi-
ate therein; said organic acid being selected from the
group consisting of formic acid, acetic acid, propionic
acid, trichloroacetic acid, or trifiuoroacetic acid;
(2) heating said reaction mixture at a temperature of about
25*-100° C. with an aqueous solution of a strong acid in an
inert solvent; said strong acid being selected from the
group consisting of sulfuric acid, alkyl or aryl sulfonic
acid, hydrobromic acid, hydrochloric acid, or phosphoric
acid; and,
(3) recovering methylvanillyl ketone directly from said
acid-treated reaction mixture without isolating said unpro-
tected isoeugenol glycol intermediate.
4,393,243
CAROTENOID INTERMEDIATE BY AN OXIDATION
PROCESS
Bruno Lohri, Kaiseraugst, Switzerland, assignor to Hoffmann-
La Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
FUed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,574
Int. Q.3 C07C 45/34
U.S. Q. 568—344 19 Qaims
1. A process for the manufacture of 3,5,5-trimethyl-4-[(E)-3-
oxo-l-butenyl]-2-cyclohexen-l-one of the formula
which process comprises oxidizing a-ionone of the formula
U
4,393,241
SYNTHESIS OF ALKOXY AND PHENOXY
SUBSTITUTED ARYL SULFIDES
Harry T. Hanson, Millbum, N.J., and John B. Sapp, Jr., Hous-
ton, Tex., assignors to Celanese Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,337
Int. Q.J C07C 149/32
U.S. Q. 568—49 17 Qaims
1. A process for the synthesis of a alkoxy or phenoxy substi-
tuted aryl sulfide comprising reacting in the presence of a
catalytic amoimt of an alkali metal tetrafluoroborate catalyst a in a reaction mixture containing concentrated acetic acid with
754
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
oxygen or an oxygen-containing gas in the presence of a cobalt
acetate/bromide catalyst.
4,393,244
METHOD AND THE MANUFACTURE OF CYCLIC
MONO AND/OR DIKETONES FROM CYCLIC MONO
OR SESQUI TERPENES BY CATALYTIC OXIDATION
Sumit Bhaduri, and Madan M. Mahandni, both of Maharashtra,
India, assignors to Indian Explosives Limited, Calcutta, India
FUed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,280
Int. a.3 C07C 45/34
U.S. a. 568—360 10 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of cyclic mono and/or
diketones which comprises reacting a cyclic mono or ses-
quiterpenoid hydrocarbon containing at least one unsubsti-
tuted methylene group adjacent to a double bond with oxygen
or an oxygen containing gas in the presence of a catalyst se-
lected from the group consisting of compounds of the formu-
las:
M;„(L2)nX^O),
where
L2 is 2,2'-bipyridyl or 1,10-orthophenanonthroline, and ei-
ther
(a) M is Cu, m = 2, X is I, Br or CI, p=2, q=0; or
(b) M is Cu, m= 1, n= 1, X is NO2, p=2 and q=0; or
(c) M is Mo, m= 1, n= 1, X = Br, p=2 and q=2;
R'LsCl
where
L is triphenylphosphine;
4,393,245
MUSK-LIKE SCENTS AND THEIR MANUFACTURE
Werner Hoffman, Neuhofen; Karl von Fraunberg, Bobenheim,
and Manfred Baumann, Mannheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 812,153, Jul. 1, 1977, abandoned. This
application Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,597
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 9,
1976, 2630835
Int. a.3 C07C 49/547. 49/307
U.S. a. 568—375 1 Claim
1. The compound 1 -acetyl- 1-cyclododecene having a musk-
like scent of the formula
O
N
\_
M
(CH2)x
N
^
where
M is Co, X = 2 to 3 and Ri and R2 which may be the same or
different represent methyl, ethyl, propyl, trifluoromethyl,
phenyl or benzyl; and
M(0)m[(RiC0)CH(C0R2)]„
where
Ri and R2 which may be the same or different represent
methyl, ethyl, n-propyl, trifluoromethyl, phenyl or ben-
zyl, and
(a) M is V, m= 1, n=2, or
(b) M is Mo, m=2, n = 2, or
(c) M is Co, m=o, n = 2, or
(d) M is Co, m=o, n = 2, or
(e) M is Mn, m=o, n = 2, or
(0 M is Cu, m=o, n = 2, or
(g) M is Rh, m=o, n = 3, or
(h) M is Fe, m=o, n=3.
CH3
4,393,246
PROCESS FOR BROMINATING SIDE CHAIN OF
M-PHENOXYTOLUENE
Masashige Kubo, Tokuyama; Mitsuaki Yoshimitsu, and Kanzi
Katsuragawa, both of Shin-nanyo, all of Japan, assignors to
Toyo Soda Manufacturing Co., Ltd., Yamaguchi, Japan
FUed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,448
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 21, 1980, 55-163360
Int. a.3 C07C 41/22
U.S. a. 568—639 5 Oaims
1. In a process for brominating a side chain of m-phenoxytol-
uene with a polyhalogenated ethane having the formula
w z
I I
Br— C— C— Br
I I
X Y
wherein W and Z respectively represent CI or Br and X and Y
respectively represent CI, Br or H, as a brominating agent, the
improvement consisting of carrying out said bromination in the
liquid phase in the presence of an amorphous carbon.
4,393,247
NORBORNYL ETHERS
Mark A. Sprecker, Sea Bright, N.J., assignor to International
Flavors A Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 280,274, Jul. 6, 1981,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 200,012, Oct. 23,
1980, Pat. No. 4,311,861. This application Dec. 29, 1981, Ser.
No. 335,561
Int. a.3 C07C 43/188
U.S. a. 568—665 5 Qaims
1. A composition of matter consisting essentially of at least
one compound having a structure selected from the group
consisting of:
and
wherein "R" in each of the compounds is the same and repre-
sents hydroxy ethyl or methoxy ethyl.
JULY 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
755
4,393,248
FLAME RETARDED HALOGENATED POLYOL
Stanley R. Sandler, Springfield, and Joseph M. Bohen, King of
Prussia, both of Pa., assignors to Pennwalt Corporation,
Philadelphia, Pa.
FUed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,699
Int. a.3 C07C 43/10. 43/12; C08G 18/00. 18/14
U.S. a. 568—676 8 Qaims
1. A flame retardant polyol of the formula
R-{-(OCH2CHCH2)flOCH2CHCH2CX3]6
M OH X'
wherein
a is an integer of 0 or 1, with the proviso that
when a is 0, b is an integer of 1 to 8, R is selected from the
group consisting of a substituted linear or branched alkyl
of 2 to 12 carbons and a substituted cyclic alkyl of 3 to 12
carbons; X is selected from the group consisting of F, CI,
and Br; and X' is selected from the group consisting of H,
F, CI, and Br; whereby the substituent is selected from the
group consisting of at least 1 hydroxyl groups, and
when a is 1, b is an integer of 1 to 8, R is selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen, a substituted linear or
branched alkyl of 2 to 12 carbons and a substituted cyclic
alkyl of 3 to 12 carbons; X is selected from the group
consisting of F, CI, and Br; and X' is selected from the
group consisting of H, F, CI, and Br; whereby the substitu-
ent is selected from the group consisting of at least 1
hydroxyl groups.
4,393,249
PROCESS FOR REMOVING ALKYNES FROM C4
HYDROCARBON MIXTURES
Albert Heuvelsland, Heikant; Fritz F. F. Jann, Temeuzen, both
of Netherlands, and Greet de Block-Martens, Stekene, Bel-
gium, assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
FUed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,288
Int. a.3 C07C 41/08. 7/00
U.S. a. 568—688 21 Oaims
1. A process comprising contacting an alkyne with a C1-C4
monohydric alcohol or mixture thereof under reaction condi-
tions to form an ether, said reactive process occurring in the
presence of a catalytic amount of a cation-exchange resin
having a plurality of pendant sulfonate groups with silver
metal counterions.
4,393,250
PROCESS FOR PRODUQNG ALCOHOLS AND ETHERS
Klaus Gottlieb, Herdecke-Ende; Hartmut Bruderreck, Gelsen-
kirchen-Buer, and Friedel-Heinrich Wehmeier, Bottrop-
KirchheUen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Veba
Oel AG, Gelsenkirchen-Buer, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,804
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 28,
1981, 3116779
Int. 0.3 C07C 41/06. 37/72
U.S. O. 568—697 23 Oaims
1. A process for producing isopropyl tert-butyl ether from a
mixture of light hydrocarbons containing propane and butane
comprising:
(a) separating from said mixture of light hydrocarbons a
propane fraction and a butane fraction containing at least
n-butan^
(b) isomerizing at least a portion of said n-butane in said
butane fraction from step (a) whereby a hydrocarbon
mixture containing at least n-butane and isobutane is
formed;
(c) catalytically dehydrogenating said isobutane in said hy-
drocarbon mixture from step (b) whereby a hydrocarbon
mixture containing at least isobutene is produced;
(d) catalytically dehydrogenating said propane in said pro-
pane fraction from step (a) whereby a hydrocarbon mix-
ture containing at least propene is produced;
(e) reacting said propene in said hydrocarbon mixture from
step (d) with water, whereby a mixture containing hydro-
carbons and isopropyl alcohol is formed;
(0 reacting said isopropyl alcohol from step (e) with at least
part of said isobutene in said hydrocarbon mixture from
step (c) whereby a mixture containing hydrocarbons and
isopropyl tert-butyl ether is formed;
(g) recycling said hydrocarbons in said hydrocarbon mixture
from step (e) to step (d);
(h) recycling said hydrocarbons in said hydrocarbon mixture
from step (0 to step (c); and
(i) recovering at least said isopropyl tert-butyl ether.
4,393,251
PREPARATION OF PROPANEDIOLS USING A
COPPER-AND ZINC CONTAINING HYDROGENATION
CATALYST
Franz J. Broecker, Ludwigshafen; Leopold Hupfer, Friedel-
sheim; Franz Merger, Frankenthal; Ernest Miesen, Ludwigs-
hafen; Juergen Paetsch, Wachenheim, and Guenter Zirker,
Ludwigshafen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Division of Ser. No. 274,486, Jun. 17, 1981. This application
Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,380
Int. 0.3 C07C 31/20, 33/26. 31/27. 41/26
U.S. O. 568—811 9 Oaims
1. In a process for the preparation of a propanediol of the
formula
R I
I
HOH2C— C— CH2— OH
R
where the R's may be identical or different and each is an
aliphatic, araliphatic or aromatic radical, or the two R's to-
gether with the adjacent carbon atom are members of an ali-
cyclic ring, by hydrogenating a hydroxypropionaldehyde of
the formula
R II
I
HOH2C— C— CHO
R
where R has the above meanings, in the presence of a copper-
containing hydrogenation catalyst, the improvement which
comprises:
carrying out the hydrogenation in the liquid phase with a
hydrogenation catalyst which has been obtained by pre-
756
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
cipitating copper and zinc in a ratio of from 0.6 to 3 atoms
of copper per atom of zinc from a solution of their com-
pounds in the presence of a carbonate at a pH of from 6.9
to 8, and decomposing the resulting mixed crystals of the
formula
Cui.5.3Zni.2,5(CO3)i.2(OH)4.6.(H2O)0.1
at from 200° to 500° C, introducing into said catalyst
during its preparation at least one metal additive selected
from the group consisting of chromium, calcium, magne-
sium and aluminum in an amount of up to 10 percent by
weight, based on the total catalyst.
4,393,254
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF ALKYLENE
GLYCOLS
Fred L. Johnson, Jr., and Lewis W. Watts, Jr., both of Austiii,
Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,412
Int. a.3 C07C 29/10
U.S. a. 568—867 8 Qaims
1. A process for the production of alkylene glycol which
comprises contacting water and an alkylene oxide in the pres-
ence of a heterogeneous catalyst comprising a partially amine-
neutralized sulfonic acid resin wherein the mole ratio of alkyl-
ene oxide to water ranges from about 2 to about 10, the temper-
ature of reaction ranges from about 100° to 200° C. and the
reaction pressure ranges from about 200 to 400 psi.
4,393,252
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING ETHYLENE GLYCOL
John Kollar, W'yckoff, N.J., assignor to Redox Technologies,
Inc., Wyckoff, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 286,721, Jul. 28, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 183,537, Sep. 2, 1980,
Pat. No. 4,337,371. This application Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No.
362,433
Int. a.3 C07C 31/20
U.S. a. 568—852 26 Oaims
1. In a process for producing ethylene glycol by reacting
methanol and an organic peroxide, said peroxide having the
formula R — O — O — Ri wherein R and Ri each is an alkyl or
aralkyl group containing from 3 to 12 carbon atoms, the im-
provement comprising adding to the reactants a basic material
in an amount sufficient to reduce the hydrogen ions that are
being formed in the reaction without unduly reducing the
ethylene glycol production due to by-product formation.
8. In a process for producing ethylene glycol by reacting
methanol, an organic peroxide and formaldehyde in the pres-
ence of water, said organic peroxide having the formula
R — O — O — Ri, wherein R and R\ each is an alkyl or aralkyl
group containing 3 to 12 carbon atoms, the improvement com-
prising adding to the reactants, a basic material in an amount
sufficient to reduce the hydrogen ions that are being formed in
the reaction without unduly reducing the ethylene glycol
production due to by-product formation.
4,393,253
HYDROXYLATION OF OLEHNS
Robert C. Michaelson, Waldwick, and Richard G. Austin, Ridge-
wood, both of N.J., assignors to Exxon Research & Engineer-
ing Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 209,789, Nov. 24, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,314,088. This application Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,099
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 2, 1999,
• has been disclaimed.
Int. aj C07C 29/03. 33/20; C07D 307/77; C07C 59/105
U.S. a. 568—860 10 Qaims
1. A process for hydroxy lating olefins which comprises
reacting at least one olefinic compound having at least one
ethylenic unsaturation with water and at least one organic
hydroperoxide in the presence of a catalyst composition under
conditions and in a manner sufficient to convert at least one of
said ethylenic unsaturation to its corresponding diol said cata-
lyst composition comprising:
(a) Osmium tetroxide; and
(b) at least one co-catalyst selected from the group consist-
ing of alkali metal halide, alkaline earth metal halide,
hydrogen halide, quaternary hydrocarbyl phosphonium
halide, halogen, and transition metal halide said transition
metal being selected from the group consisting of Fe, Co,
Ni, Cu, V, Cr, Mn, Sc, Ti, Mo. Ru, Rh, Pd and W.
4,393,255
CATALYTIC CONVERSION
Thomas O. Mitchell, Trenton, and Darrell D. Whitehurst, Titus-
ville, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 110,436, Jan. 7, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 973,658,
Dec. 27, 1978, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 819,026, Jul. 25, 1977, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 681,883, Apr. 30, 1976,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 443,557,
Feb. 19, 1974, Pat. No. 3,980,583. This application Dec. 10,
1981, Ser. No. 329,481
Int. a.3 C07C 29/00, 33/22
U.S. a. 568—902 18 Qaims
1. A process for the conversion of a feedstock comprising
carbon monoxide, hydrogen, and alcohol of from 1 to about 20
carbon atoms per molecule to product comprising an alcohol
having a higher boiling point than said feedstock alcohol and
an olefin which comprises contacting said feedstock under
conversion conditions including a temperature of from about
100° C. to about 400* C, a pressure of from about 0.1 atmo-
sphere to about 10,000 atmospheres, a contact time of from
about 1 second to about 100 hours and a hydrogen/carbon
monoxide mole ratio of from about 0.2 to about 5 with a cata-
lyst comprised of a substrate of a porous refractory oxide
having surface hydroxy! groups, a minimum surface area of
about 10 m^/g and pores with a minimum pore diameter of
about S Angstrom Units, said substrate being modified by at
least one amine functional member, containing the element
silicon, coordinated to a metal function of a transition metal
selected from the group consisting of Group VIII metals of the
Periodic Table of Elements, said amine functional member
acting as a bridging member between said substrate and said
metal function, as a ligand covalently bonded to said substrate.
4,393,256
HYDRATION OF OLEHNS
Robert J. Schmidt, Rolling Meadows, III., assignor to UOP Inc.,
Des Plaines, III.
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 332,042
Int. Q.3 C07C 29/06. 29/00. 31/08, 31/10
U.S. Q. 568—907 11 Qaims
1. A process for the hydration of an olefinic hydrocarbon
which comprises:
(a) esterifying said olefinic hydrocarbon with a concentrated
inorganic acid at esterification conditions in an esterifica-
tion zone to produce alkyl salts of said acid;
(b) hydrolyzing said alkyl salts of said acid by treatment with
water at hydration conditions in a hydration zone to form
an alcohol and ether hydrolysis product containing recon-
stituted inorganic acid;
(c) stripping away alcohol and ether hydrolysis product
from said reconstituted inorganic acid and removing said
reconstituted inorganic acid from said alcohol and ether
hydrolysis product;
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
757
(d) separating said alcohol from said ether of said hydrolysis
product in a separation zone at separation conditions to
form a product alcohol stream and an ether stream;
(e) thermally decomposing said ether in a decomposition
zone maintained at a temperature in the range of from
about 500° C. to about 750° C. and a pressure in the range
of from subatmospheric to about 1 500 psi to produce an
olefinic hydrocarbon and an additional amount of product
alcohol;
(0 recovering said additional amount of product alcohol;
and
(g) recycling at least a portion of said olefinic hydrocarbon
produced in thermal decomposition step (e) to said esteri-
fication as a part of said olefinic hydrocarbon.
4,393,257
PROCESS FOR PREPARING BENZOTRIFLUORIDE
AND ITS DERIVATIVES
Tsuneo Nakagawa; Uji Hiramatsu, and Toshihide Honda, all of
Osaka, Japan, assignors to Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 859,755, Dec. 12, 1977. This
application Jun. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 50,211
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 27, 1976, 51-159033;
Italy, Dec. 15, 1977, 30726 A/77; Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec.
16, 1977, 2756235; France, Dec. 27, 1977, 77 39362
Int. Q.3 C07C 17/20
U.S. Q. 570—145 6 Qaims
1. A process for preparing benzotrifluoride derivatives
which comprises contacting a benzotrichloride compound of
the formula: i
CCI3
wherein Ri, R2 and R3 are each hydrogen, trichloromethyl,
nitro, cyano or halogen but wherein all of Ri, R2 and R3 are
not hydrogen at the same time and when one of Ri, R2 and R3
is nitro, each of the other two is not nitro, with hydrogen
fluoride in the absence of any catalyst in the gaseous phase and
in the presence of chlorine at an elevated temperature.
4,393^58
l-CYCLOHEXYL-2-CYCLOHEXYLPHENYLETHANE
DERIVATIVES
Hisato Sato, Tokyo; Haruyoshi Takatsu, Kodaira; Yutaka
Fujita, Yokohama; Masayuki Tazume; Kiyohumi Takeuchi,
both of Urawa, and Hiroyuki Ohnishi, Kawagoe, all of Japan,
assignors to Dainippon Mk & Chemicals Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 386,994
Int. Q.3 C07C 13/18, 13/28
UJS. Q. 585—25 8 Qaims
•0
Eto
a.
T
■ MIXED LiauiOCRrSTtLS
CONTAINING COMPOUND OF
THE PRIOR »RT
((6) '(NO 8)]
- MIXED LIOUIO CRYSTALS
CONTAINING COMPOUND OF
THE INVENTION
[(Bl< (NO]))
WEIGHT PERCENT OF (NOBI BASED
(BI-flNOt) OR (NO.SI BASED ON (Bl« (N03)
1. A l-cyclohexyl-2-cyclohexylphenylethane derivative of
the following general formula
Ri-
H _ H
-|^^^^^^CH2CH2-^j^-|^:C;^^^;^ R2
H H
wherein Ri and R2, independently from each other, represent
a linear alkyl group having 1 to 7 carbon atoms.
4,393,259
PROCESS FOR CONVERSION OF PROPANE OR
BUTANE TO GASOLINE
Dennis J. Ward, South Barrington, and Bipin V. Vora, Elk
Grove Village, both of III., assignors to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 121,353, Feb. 14, 1980, Pat. No.
4,293,722, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 163,763, Jun.
27, 1980, Pat. No. 4,304,948. This application Aug. 5, 1981, Ser.
No. 290,031
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 8, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.J C07C 2/08
U.S. Q. 585—315 5 Claims
'^
ra'«'f''f Ot^ft'tt""''" /»"• C»tt'f'-< f #■#•■•••''*■ /«"*
1. A hydrocarbon conversion process which comprises the
steps of:
758
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12. 1983
(a) passing a feed stream comprising a butane and a hereinaf-
ter characterized recycle stream into a dehydrogenation
zone operated at butane dehydrogenation conditions and
thereby forming a dehydrogenation zone effluent stream
comprising hydrogen, a butane and a butylene;
(b) passing the entire dehydrogenation zone effluent stream
into a catalytic condensation zone operated at conditions
which effect the conversion of butylene into Cg hydrocar-
bons and thereby forming a catalytic condensation zone
effluent stream which comprises hydrogen, a butane and
Cg hydrocarbons; and,
(c) separating the catalytic condensation zone effluent
stream into a vent gas stream comprising hydrogen, said
recycle stream, which comprises hydrogen and a butane,
and a product stream which comprises Cg hydrocarbons.
index within the approximate range of 1 to 12, said zeolite
being 2 sm-12.
4,393.260
PREPARATION OF CYCLOHEXENYL COMPOUNDS
Louis J. Velenyi, Lyndhurst; Serge R. Dolhyj, Parma, and An-
drew S. Knipa, Twinsburg, all of Ohio, assignors to The Stan-
dard Oil Company, Oeveland, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 174,463, Aug. 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,319,066.
This application Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,703
Int. C1.3 C07C 1/20. 1/32. 1/00
U.S. a. 585—357 7 Oaims
1. A process for preparing a cyclohexenyl compound, the
process comprising contacting a corresponding cyclohexyl
carboxylic acid with a decarboxylation catalyst of the formula:
UaWyOx
where
M is a combination of copi>er and molybdenum;
M' is at least one of sodium, potassium, cesium, tin and
bismuth;
a is a number of about 0.1 to 1;
b is a number of about 0.01 to 0.5 and
X is the number of oxygen atoms determined by the valence
requirement of the other elements present.
4393,261
HYDROCARBON RESIN AND PROCESS FOR
PREPARATION
Robert P. Allen, Longview, Tex., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 421,632
Int. a.3 C07C 3/18
U.S. a. 585—422 12 Oaims
10. A process for preparing a liquid hydrocarbon resin hav-
ing a Gardner color of about 2 or less and a viscosity of about
1,500 cp. at 38' C. to about 10,000 cp. at 38° C. comprising
polymerizing a mixture of xylene and norbomene with a Frie-
del-Crafts catalyst at a temperature of about 60° C. to about
170° C. for a period of from 1 to 4 hours and hydrogenating to
provide a water white liquid hydrocarbon resin.
4,393,262
PRODUCnON OF ISOPROPYLBENZENE
Warren W. Kaeding, Westfield, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 14, 1978, Ser. No. 969,626
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 22,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07C 63/34; BOIJ 29/06
U.S. a. 585—467 10 Oaims
1. A process for the propylation of benzene with selective
production of isopropylbenzene, said process comprising con-
tacting mixtures of benzene and propylene with a crystalline
zeolite catalyst at a temperature of between about 100° C. and
the critical temperature, and a pressure of between about lO'
N/m^ and 6x 10^ N/m^, said zeolite being characterized by a
silica/alumina mole ratio of at least about 12 and a constraint
4,393,263
TERTIARY-BUTYLSTYRENE PRODUCnON
Glen F. Cnun, Odessa, Tex., and Samuel J. Paton, Wilaya
D'Oran, Algeria, assignors to El Paso Products Company,
Odessa, Tex.
FUed Jan. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 116,659
Int. a.3 C07C 5/48
U.S. a. 585—443 6 Claims
1. A process for the production of tertiary-butylstyrene
under oxydehydrogenation conditions which comprises con-
tacting a feed mixture of tertiary-butylethylbenzene and oxy-
gen at a temperature in the range between about 350° C. and
650° C. with a coprecipitated aluminum-calcium-silicon-tung-
sten phosphate catalyst, wherein the aluminumicalcium:-
silicon:tungsten elements, respectively, are present in the cata-
lyst in an atomic ratio of about 1-12:1-12:0.2-5:2-20, and
wherein the conversion selectivity to tertiary-butylstyrene is at
least 80 mole percent, and the conversion selectivity to dialke-
nylbenzenes is essentially zero mole percent.
4,393,264
CONTINUOUS NON-CATALYTIC PYROLYSIS OF
AQUEOUS SLURRY OF OXYGEN-CONTAINING
DERIVATIVES OF BENZENE AND TOLUENE
John K. Allen, St. Charles, and Gerard C. Lammers, Oswego,
both of III., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana),
Chicago, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 86,451, Oct. 19, 1979,
abandoned. This application Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,086
Int. a.5 C07C 1/20
U.S. a. 585—469 10 Claims
1. A continuous method of non-catalytic pyrolysis of a solid
mixture comprising aldehydo-, keto, carboxy-, aldehydo-and-
carboxy-, keto-and-carboxy-, and methylol-and-carboxy-, sub-
stituted benzenes and toluenes to decarboxylate and decarbo-
nylate such mixture which comprises adding a suspension of
comminuted solid mixture of said substituted benzenes and
toluenes in water, but without an externally added catalyst, to
a bed of inert, non-catalytic particulated solids which can be
fluidized, expanded or made ebullient with the flow of a gas
through said bed wherein said bed is heated to a temperature of
at least 700° C. and the gas stimulating said movement of the
particles in the bed is nitrogen, air, or a mixture of nitrogen and
air, or a mixture of air and oxygen gas, or oxygen gas alone or
in admixture with steam.
4,393,265
LIGHT MONOOLEnNS FROM METHANOL AND/OR
DIMETHYL ETHER
Cristobal Bonifaz, Chadds Ford, Pa., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
FUed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,604
Int. C\? CD7C 1/24. 1/20; BOIJ 29/38. 29/06
U.S. a. 585—639 15 Qaims
1. Process of preparing hydrocarbons rich in light monoole-
fins by:
(a) activating a hydrogen-exchanged aluminosilicate catalyst
having a silica to alumina ratio of less than 12 by treating
with steam at a temperature of at least 400° C;
(b) contacting the steam-activated catalyst in a reaction
zone, at a temperature of about 350° to about 600° C, with
a gas stream consisting essentially of dimethyl ether or a
mixture of methanol and dimethyl ether, as reactant, and
sufficient water such that the mole ratio of water to ether
in the reaction zone is at least 0.3, at a pressure of about 0.2
to about 30 atmospheres (about 20 to about 3000 kPa), and
at a weight hourly space velocity (WHSV) of greater than
about 0.5 h~ ' , to convert at least 85 wt.% of the reactant
to hydrocarbons comprising at least 50 wt.% ethylene and
July 12, 1983
CHEMICAL
759
propylene, said 85% conversion being achieved before the
contacting has exceeded 1 g of reactant per g of catalyst,
until the catalyst is spent; and
(c) regenerating the spent catalyst with a mixture comprising
steam and oxygen at a temperature of at least 400° C.
tuted pyridine content of at least about 3.3 wt.% based on
said zeolite, thereby selectively adsorbing substantially all
J, 433,266
SEPARATION OF PARA-XYLENE
WiUiam Smolin, FishkUl, N.Y., assignor to Texaco Inc., White
Plains, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 152,865, May 23, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,351,981. This application Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,448
Int. a.3 C07C 7/13
U.S. a. 585—828 22 aaims
1. The process for separating para-xylene from a feed mix-
ture containing C-8 aromatic hydrocarbon including para-
xylene which comprises
contacting said feed mixture with, as an adsorbent, a pyri-
dine or substituted pyridine-containing sodium Y zeolite,
said sodium Y zeolite being characterized by a ratio of
silicon to aluminum of 1.5-2.1 and by a pyridine or substi-
ETMYLBtWEME
OBTMO 1
'3 ,
l4
1 TOLUENC » PvBlDiNC
u
■
1
ADSORPTION
7
i DISTILLATION
H
tol
?4
DiSTlLLfiTiON
0IST.LL4TI0N
TOLUENE a PYRIDINE
22 -^ 21 *
PflRA-(»K
i
TOLUtNE a PTWlDiNC
?6 -- ?^
c-e
t
u€N£ ft PrROK
of said C-8 aromatic hydrocarbon to the subsUntial exclu-
sion of para-xylene; and
recovering said para-xylene.
ELECTRICAL
4^93^7
METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE EITICIENCY OF A
SOLAR CELL AND AN IMPROVED CADMIUM
SULnDE/COPPER SULHDE PHOTOVOLTAIC CELL
Terry M. Peterson, El Cerrito, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 267,324, May 26, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,799
Int. a.3 HOIL 31/06. 31/18
U.S. a. 136—260 8 Claims
1. A method of fabricating a solar cell, comprising:
(a) fabricating a layer of CdS on a conductive substrate and
forming an ohmic contact thereto;
(b) fabricating a Cu^S layer on said layer of CdS;
(c) rinsing the device of the previous steps (a) and (b) in an
aqueous acid rinse having a pH less than about pH 3;
(d) curing the device of step (c) in H2at an elevated tempera-
ture; and
(e) fabricating an electrical contact to said copper-contain-
ing layer.
surface as said tip is moved over said surface and transmit-
ting a pulse induced in said tip by passage of said linear
wavefronts of said elastic surface waves; and
chronometric means connected to said excitation means and
to said stylus for measuring the time taken by the elastic
waves to reach the stylus of said two directions and thus
the position of said stylus.
4,393,269
METHOD AND APPARATUS INCORPORATING A
ONE-WAY SEQUENCE FOR TRANSACTION AND
IDENTITY VERinCATION
Alan G. Konheim, Yorktown Heights; Stephen M. Matyas, and
Carl H. Meyer, both of Kingston, all of N.Y., assignors to
Internationa] Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,494
Int. a.3 H04L 9/00
U.S. a. 178—22.08 24 Qaims
4,393,268
MARKING SYSTEM USING ELASTIC SURFACE WAVES
Richard Gnedj; Eugene Dieulesaint, and Daniel Royer, all of
Paris, France, assignors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,325
Qaims priority, application France, May 23, 1980, 80 11551
Int. a.3 G08C 21/00
U.S. a. 178—18 9 Qaims
1. A marking system using elastic surface waves comprising:
a substrate for the surface propagation of linear wavefronts
of said waves along a free surface in two separate direc-
tions with the vibratory energy propagating perpendicu-
larly to said linear wavefronts, and having an uneven area
with a depth significantly less than the wavelength of said
elastic surface waves;
an electro-mechanical transducer coupled to said substrate
for producing said waves;
excitation means connected to said transducer means for
supplying pulses to excite said transducer means;
a stylus having a tip adapted for movement over said surface
in contact therewith including a member for feeding a
marking substance to said tip to leave a mark on said
12. A method for verifying the content of a message and the
identity of the sender, said method comprising two participants
(USER A and USER B) first exchanging a contract containing
two finite sequences of keyed-reference-signatures:
KSSAkA,\)KSSAkA,l), ■■ ■
KSSAkB,\)KSSAkB,l), ■ ■ ■
wherein the j'* reference signature KSS^k^rJ) of USER X is
the r'* or final term in the j'* keyed-signature-sequence
KSSdkx,i)KSS)(kxi j) KSSAkx.j)
whose terms are defined and related as follows: the initial
element
KSS(i(.kx.j)
of the j"' sequence is derived from USER X's (secret) key Vx
and the index j specifying the keyed-signature-sequence by
means of the rule
KSS(ikx.j)=DES}kxJ+kx}
where DES denotes the Data Encryption Standard and
wherein each succeeding element KSSXkjrj) with i = 1, 2, . . .
, r of the j'* keyed-signature-sequence is derived from the
immediately preceding element KSS,_i(kjr,j) by a known
algorithm f according to the rule
KSS/ikA.j)=AliSSi-i(kA.j)
761
762
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
to transmit signed data to USER B, USER A, appending to
DATA a number s of signatures
DATA.SIGo.SIGi SIGs-i
the t'* signature SIGr where t =0, 1, . . . , s— 1 being the element
in position pi
KSSp/ikA.NUM,)
in USER A's NUM/* keyed-signature-sequence
KSSf^kA.NUM,\KSS\(k4.NUM,)
,KSSAkA.NUM,)
the position prof the t'* signature SIG/ being determined by the
rank of the data
Po.pi.
.Pi-i
USER A determining the rank of data to produce a sequence
of s numbers
Po.pl.
.pj-i
each term being an integer having one of the values 0, 1, . . . ,
r— 1. The value of the t'* term p, depends on DATA through
a predetermined cryptographic protocol,
USER B, upon receipt of the signed message
DA TA.SlGoSIGi SlGs- 1
independently determining the rank of DATA,
po.pi. .pi-l
USER B then deriving presumptive values for the s reference
elements by computing the appropriate successor reference
signatures for each of the s appended signatures; as defined
by:
r — po'* successor of SIGq
r— pi'* successor of SIGi
r — pi_ i'* successor of SIGj- 1
USER B comparing the computed successor reference ele-
ments to the corresponding reference signatures in the previ-
ously exchanged contract, and
USER B accepting the transaction if and only if there is com-
plete agreement.
4,393,270
CONTROLLING PERCEIVED SOUND SOURCE
DIRECTION
Johannes C. M . van den Berg, Kleibroek 14, Castricum, Nether-
lands
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 964,372, Nov. 28, 1978. This
application May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 153,903
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 28, 1977,
7713076
Int. a.3 H04R 3/00. 5/00
U.S. a. 179—1 D 6 Oaims
MtCROPHONE
2
PROCESSOR UNIT
5 '-'-
3
EQUALIZER
1. A method of generating and processing electrical signals
indicative of sound so that upon conversion of such signals into
sounds and audition of such sounds by a normal human lis-
tener, such listener will perceive such sounds as emanating in
preselected directions of perception from the listener, said
method comprising the steps of:
(a) generating a plurality of signals each respectively from
one of a plurality of directional microphones, each such
microphone being predominantly responsive to sounds
impinging on it in a unique one of a plurality of prese-
lected directions of reception; and
(b) separately modulating each said electrical signal with a
unique modulating signal indicative of a different one of
said preselected directions of perception so that during
such modulation different amplitude adjustments will be
applied to different components of said signal, such adjust-
ments varying with frequency in a manner corresponding
to the variation of amplitude response with frequency of
the normal human auditory system for sounds impinging
on a listener from such one direction.
4,393,271
METHOD FOR SELECTIVELY DISPLAYING A
PLURALITY OF INFORMATION
Hiroshi Fujinami, Bloomfield Hills, Mich., and Takashi
Yamada, Anjo, Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.,
Kariya, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 3,935, Jan. 16, 1979. This application
Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 181,903
Int. a.3 GIOL 7/00
U.S. a. 179—1 SM 1 Qaim
AM n<
DATE
rmia
RPM
KM
SUN
MON TUE
WED
Lli
li^Ei
B
tmu
FRI SAT
1. A method for selectively displaying on a single display
unit in a vehicle a value of any one of time, a plurality of
calendar data and a plurality of vehicle operating condition
data in response to voice commands associated with said types
of data comprising the steps of:
preliminarily associating a unique signal pattern with each of
said calendar data and vehicle operating condition data;
generating signals indicative of the time, each of said calen-
dar data and each of said vehicle operating condition data;
displaying initially the time on said single display unit until
any voiced command is received;
receiving a voice command by a microphone to produce
voice signals corresponding to said voiced command;
matching a signal pattern of said voice signals with said
unique signal pattern preliminarily associated with one of
said plurality of calendar data and said plurality of vehicle
operating condition data;
further displaying in place of said initial displaying step a
value of one of signals generated by said signal generating
step and selected by said matching step on said single
display unit;
limiting the display of a value of one of said calendar data of
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
763
lesser importance to a predetermined period of time to
resume the display of the time thereafter; and
continuing the display of a value of one of said vehicle
operating condition data of greater importance than said
calendar data by said further displaying step and the re-
sumed display of the time until another voiced command
is received by said receiving step.
clock regeneration circuit comprises a phase search circuit
having a cyclic counting device coupled to the pilot regenera-
tion circuit for dividing at least a portion of the transmitter
characterization signal into discrete phase steps determined by
the periods of the pilot signal and also having a coincidence
circuit connected to the cyclic counting device and to the
demodulator for allotting phase steps to at least a portion of the
pulse edges in the transmitter characterization signal, a storage
4,393,272
SOUND SYNTHESIZER
Fumitada Ttakura, Houya, and Noboru Sugamura, Inima, both
of Japan, assignors to Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Public
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,782
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 3, 1979, 54-128365
I Int. a.3 GIOL 7/00
U.S. a. 179—1 SA 27 Qaims
1. A sound synthesizer comprising:
a sound source signal source for generating a sound source
signal;
a control parameter source for delivering control parameters
a,, b, (i=l, 2, 3. . . ) for controlling the characteristic of a
synthesis filter, said control parameters a,, b, being expressed
by a,= —2 cos a>;and b,— — 2 cos 6, where a),and d,are LSP
parameters and 0<d\<o)\<d2<oi2<Bi ■ ■ ■ <'t; and
all-pole type synthesis filter means for synthesizing a sound
signal under the control of said control parameters, said
all-pole type synthesis filter means comprising: feedback
adder means one input of which is supplied with said sound
source signal, and first and second feedback means the input
side of each of which is supplied with the output from said
synthesis filter means and the output of each of which is
supplied to another input of said feedback adder means
thereby to provide first and second feedback loops, said first
and second feedback means respectively including in the
feedback paths thereof first cascade operating second-order
filter means expressed by (1 -i-a/Z + Z^) and second cascade
operating second-order filter means expressed by
(l-|-b/Z-|-Z2) where Z represents unit time delay means.
FM-
4,393,273
•RECEIVER WITH TRANSMITTER
CHARACTERIZATION
Theodoor A. C. M. Qaasen; Gerardus C. M. Gielis; Johan M.
Schmidt, and Harry B. Schoonheym, all of Eindhoven, Neth-
erlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
I Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,561
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jan. 31, 1980,
8000607
I Int. a.' H04H 5/00
U.S. a. 179—1 GD 12 Qaims
1. A clock regeneration circuit for an FM-receiver with
transmitter characterization having a tuning unit connected to
an aerial input and to which there are connected one after the
other, an IF-amplifier, an FM-detector, a demodulation circuit
for demodulating a discrete transmitter characterization signal,
a decoding device for decoding the discrete transmitter char-
acterization signal and a signal processing unit, also comprising
a pilot regeneration circuit connected to the FM-detector for
regenerating a stereo pilot signal, characterized in that the
r
circuit for storing the information about the phase steps and a
phase selection circuit connected to the storage circuit for
selecting the phase step in which, statistically, the greatest
number of pulse edges occur in the transmitter characterization
signal, the clock regeneration circuit also comprising a divider
which has a setting input coupled to the phase selection circuit,
a signal input to the pilot regeneration circuit and a signal
output to an output of the clock regeneration circuit.
4,393,274
AM STEREO RECEIVER
Yukihiko Miyamoto, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Trio Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,839
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1980, 55-
117754[U]
Int. CIJ H04H 5/00
U.S. a. 179—1 GS 2 Claims
1. An AM stereo receiver comprising:
an RF AM tuner for selecting and converting an RF AM
stereo signal of an AM-PM or AM-FM system into an IF
AM stereo signal;
764
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
an IF AM signal amplifier for amplifying the IF AM stereo
signal from the RF AM tuner;
a frequency multiplier for frequency multiplying the IF AM
stereo signal from the IF AM signal amplifier to obtain a
frequency-multiplied IF AM stereo signal having a fre-
quency higher than the maximum frequency of a signal
handled by the RF AM tuner;
A limiter for amplitude limiting the frequency-multiplied IF
AM stereo signal from the frequency multiplier to obtain
a frequency-multiplied IF PM or FM difference signal;
L
RF
ruNER
U^
L
5
6
FREO '
MULTIPUEH
LlMirER
OEM.
^
4,393,276
FOURIER MASKING ANALOG SIGNAL SECURE
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Raymond Steele, Hazlet, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone Labo-
ratories. Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,627
Int. a.3 H04K 9/00
U.S. a. 179—1.5 R 11 Claims
Tl.
r^~LJir[isrur lis
1 [r1j*i!!_7! n
Jl'
• " (.nam
a PM or FM demodulator for phase or frequency modulat-
ing the frequency-multiplied IF PM or FM difference
signal from the limiter to obtain a difference signal;
an AM demodulator for amplitude demodulating the IF AM
stereo signal from the IF AM signal amplifier to obtain a
sum signal; and
a matrix circuit for deriving a right signal and a left signal
from the difference signal from the PM or FM demodula-
tor and the sum signal from the AM demodulator.
4,393,275
HEARING AID WITH CONTROLLABLE WIDE RANGE
OF FREQUENCY RESPONSE
Stanley Feldman, Evanston, and Gary Koch, Arlington Heights,
both of 111., assignors to Beltone Electronics Corporation,
Chicago, III.
FUed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,009
Int. a.3 H04M 1/00
U.S. a. 179—1 VL - 5 Qaims
1. A hearing aid having' a wide range of frequency response,
comprising:
microphone input means responsive to sound waves for
generating an electrical signal representative of the sound
waves;
high pass filter means for filtering said electrical signal, said
high pass filter means generating a first signal representa-
tive of the high frequency portions of said electrical sig-
nal;
low pass filter means receiving both said electrical signal and
said second signal, said low pass filter means generating a
second signal representative of the amplitude subtraction
of said last named signals;
proportioning means combining a selected amplitude por-
tion of said first signal with a selected amplitude portion of
said second signal for generating an output signal, said
proportioning means minimizing frequency effects in said
output signals in the frequency range where said high pass
filter means and low pass filter means overlap,
control means connected to said proportioning means and
manually adjustable for controlling the selected amplitude
portions of said first and said second signals; and
output means responsive to said output signal for enhancing
the hearing of sound waves by a wearer of the hearing aid.
1. In a secure communication system for analog communica-
tion signals:
a scrambling arrangement (10) capable of receiving as an
input a time domain analog message communication signal
(xa(t)) and producing as an output signal a secure time
domain analog communication signal (x^t)) related to said
input message signal, and
a descrambling arrangement (20) capable of receiving as an
input said secure time domain analog communication
signal produced by said scrambling arrangement and
transforming said secure signal back into said input time
domain analog message communication signal
characterized in that
the scrambling arrangement includes:
a Fourier transform processor (12) capable of generating
as an output a Fourier transform frequency domain
signal (Xa(n)) related to the input time domain analog
message communication signal;
scrambling means (14) capable of encoding said Fourier
transform frequency domain signal produced by said
Fourier transform processor to produce as an output a
secure Fourier transform frequency domain signal
(Xi(n)); and
an inverse Fourier transform processor (16) capable of
transforming said secure Fourier transform frequency
domain signal produced by said scrambling means into
the secure time domain analog communication signal
(X5(t)); and
the descrambling arrangement includes:
a Fourier transform processor (22) capable of receiving as
an input said secure time domain analog communication
signal produced by said scrambling arrangement and
generating as an output a secure Fourier transform
frequency domain signal (Xj(n)) corresponding to said
secure Fourier transform frequency domain signal pro-
duced by said scrambling means;
descrambling means (24) capable of decoding said secure
Fourier transform frequency domain signal produced
by said descrambling arrangement Fourier transform
processor to produce as an output a Fourier transform
frequency domain signal (Xa(n)) corresponding to said
Fourier transform frequency domain signal produced
by said scrambling arrangement Fourier transform
processor; and
an inverse Fourier transform processor (26) capable of
transforming said Fourier transform frequency domain
signal produced by said descrambling means into the
time domain analog message communication signal
(Mt)).
July 12,
983
ELECTRICAL
76S
4 393,277 ~~
lEMOTE TUNER CONTROL SYSTEM
Peter D. Besen; Don H. Shulsinger, both of Arlington, Mass.,
and Stuart D. Goldberg, New York, N.Y., assignors to Selecta-
station. Inc., New York, N.Y.
I FUed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,138
I Int a.3 H04M 11/00
U.S. a. 179^2 A 15 Claims
1. A remote tuner control system for responding to com-
mand signals generated by a user transmitted on a full-duplex
communication channel comprising: tone decoder means cou-
pled to said communication channel for conversion of pushbut-
ton telephone tones generated by a user to binary numeric data;
tuner means for reception of local audio broadcast radio sig-
nals; speech generator means for generating audio speech
command menus and command acknowledgements; output
selector means coupled to said tuner means and to said speech
generator means for selection of audio information returned to
the user; input/output interface means coupled to said tuner
means and output selector means, said input/output interface
means being adapted to control reception frequency of said
tuner means and output selection of said output selector means;
and processor means coupled to said input/output interface
means, said speech generator means and said toner decoder
means, said processor means being adapted to receive said
binary numerical data from said tone decoder means and con-
trol said input/output interface means and said speech genera-
tor means in response to said binary numeric data from said
tone decoder means.
4,393,278
TELEPHONE SECURITY SYSTEM
AUan M. Miyoshi, 6493 EUenview Ave., Canoga Park, Calif.
91307
I FUed Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 181,993
' Int. a.3 H04M 3/38
U.S. a. 179—84 C 3 Claims
1. An apparatus interposed between a telephone subscriber
outlet and a telephone, comprising:
input means including ring detector means connected to the
outlet and including a first switch, the detector means
responding to incoming ring signals and being connected
for closing the switch, the first switch being included in a
circuit which, when completed, provides a through-con-
nection from the subscriber outlet to the telephone, the
circuit and through-connection being, however, not yet
completed when the first switch is closed, the circuit
requires for completion that the first switch be closed as a
preparation for such completion;
means connected to be responsive to the closing of the
switch and being connected to the outlet upon closing of
the switch to be effective across the outlet for establishing
impedance conditions equivalent to answering a phone so
that ring signals arriving at the outlet will stop;
signal-detecting means connected to the circuit as prepared
by said first switch closing and being responsive to dial
signals received through the outlet after closing of the first
switch and after the ring signals have stopped;
logic circuit means connected to the signal -detecting means
to determine agreement between a sequence of the dial
signals representing a dialed-in number and a preset num-
ber;
output means including a ring generator and a second switch
T*^[:^gij[|]
operated by the logic circuit means to complete a connec-
tion from said circuit as prepared by the first switch clos-
ing, to the ring generator and causing the ring generator to
generate ringing signals for the telephone when said logic
circuit has detected said agreement; and
means for completing the through-connection of the circuit
as prepared, to extend between the outlet and the tele-
phone following an actual answering of the telephone by
a person.
433,279
DIGITAL DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM HAVING
FREQUENCY OR PHASE MODULATED DATA
CARRYING SIGNALS TO PROVIDE SUPERVISORY
CHANNEL
Peter Cochrane, and James A. Kitchen, both of Ipswich, En-
gland, assignors to The Post Office, England
FUed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,107
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 16, 1980,
8019610
Int. a.3 H04B 3/46
U.S. CI. 179—175.31 R 16 Claims
23 10 26
BAIA
III -
MUK
15-^F
iim_
23 23 10
34
euarte
/22
25 r —
■«ff
•32
til
29
1. A digital data transmission system having send and re-
ceive equipment at terminal stations connected by a digital
data communication link which includes one or more repeat-
ers, wherein the send equipment includes means for frequency
or phase modulating the occurrence timing of digital data
carrying signals being transmitted along the link with addi-
tional information, and the or each repeater includes means for
demodulating said frequency or phase modulation thus provid-
ing said additional information thereat, said modulation pro-
viding a supervisory channel by means of which the repeaters
can be addressed and interrogated while simultaneously com-
municating said digital data carrying signals over said link.
766
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,280
ELECTRICAL SWITCHING ARRANGEMENT
Masayosi Iwata, Hashima, and Hanimi Douke, Komaki, both of
Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika Denki
Seisakusho, Aichi, Japan
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,196
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1979, 54-
155141[U]
Int. a.J HOIH 9/00
U.S. a. 200—4 8 Claims
4,393,281
DIP SWITCH
Hiroyuki Ohmori, Tokyo; Hiroshi Uchimura, Chiba, and Yuzo
Mikage, Funabashi, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu Kyu
Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 94,488, Nov. 15, 1979,
abandoned. This application Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,977
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 20, 1S>79, 54-
53103[U]
Int. a.3 HOIH 15/02
U.S. a. 200—16 D 9 Oaims
260
26d 26e
f-O
246
24b
1. An electrical switching arrangement for use in a motor
vehicle or the like, said arrangement comprising:
a support frame;
a lever support member pivotally mounted on said support
frame for pivotal movement about a first support axis;
a hollow control lever member pivotally mounted with respect
to said lever support member for pivotal movement about a
second support axis extending in a direction different from
that of said first support axis;
a control shaft extending coaxially through the hollow interior
of said control lever member and rotatable with respect
thereto about the longitudinal axis thereof;
a first actuating member connected to said control lever mem-
ber;
a second actuating member connected to said control shaft;
switching means mounted on said support frame and including:
a switch base;
a plurality of switch elements disposed on said switch base;
a second sliding member mounted for sliding movement in a
predetermined first direction;
a first sliding member carried by said second sliding member
for movement therewith in said first direction, said first
sliding member being mounted for sliding movement with
respect to said second sliding member in a second direc-
tion extending approximately at a right angle to said first
direction;
a plurality of cam actuators mounted for movement with
respect to said switch base for selective opening and clos-
ing of said switch elements; and
cam means on said first sliding member for selectively dis-
placing said cam actuators with respect to said switch
base; and
connecting means for connecting said second sliding member
to one of said first and second actuating members and for
connecting said first sliding member to the other of said first
and second actuating members, such that upon selective
pivoting movement of said control lever member about said
second support axis and rotational movement of said control
shaft about said longitudinal axis, said first sliding member is
moved in said second direction independently of said second
sliding member, or said first sliding member is moved in said
first direction with said second sliding member, thereby to
displace selectively said cam actuators for opening and
closing selected of said switch elements.
20c
20c
22a(24fl) 20
1. A dual inline package switch assembly containing one or
more separated electrical switches, comprising:
(a) an insulating housing having a base and a cover enclosing
an interior space, at least one switch positioned in said
interior space, said cover having a top wall with at least
one elongated slit extending into said interior space in
alignment with said switch;
(b) said switch including at least one pair of switch contacts
having a first fixed arm extending on said base from one
side of said housing, a second fixed arm extending on said
base from the other side of said housing to face the free
end of said first arm, and legs integral with and extending
from each arm from the respective sides of said housing
for insertion into electrical circuit openings, each arm
being flat in a common plane and engaged against said
base;
(c) said switch further including at least one actuating means
movably positioned within said interior space and having
an operating stub positioned in said slit of said housing and
having a resilient conductive bridging strip for selectively
breaking and making an electrical connection between
said fixed arms with movement of said actuating means,
said actuating means being displaceable onto said housing
base for sliding movement thereon and said bridging strip
having inwardly curved rounded end portions to maintain
constant the pressure between said resilient conductive
bridging strip and said fixed arms; and
(d) said slit of said housing having a center neck whose
width is slightly smaller than the diameter of said opera-
tion stub of said actuating means for detenting movement
of said actuating means.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
767
4,393,282
ELkCTRODE FOR IGNITION SYSTEMS
Werner Griinwald, Gerlingen; Ernst Zebender, Althengstett;
Karl-Hennann Friese, Leonberg; Jiirgen Schmatz, Ludwigs-
burg; Hans Neu, Vaihingen; Kuno Kimer, Gerlingen, and
Bemd Schumacher, Vaihingen-Aurich, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 75,906, Sep. 17, 1979,
abandoned. This application Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,170
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 26,
1978, 2846590
Int. C\? HOIH 79/00
U.S. O. 200—19 R 25 Oaims
13 U
5. Electrical interference suppressed spark apparatus, partic-
ularly distributor for an internal combustion engine, to provide
a spark across a spark gap, comprising
a first electrode (11, 21, 31, 41);
and a second electrode (16, 26, 27, 37, 44, 46, 54, 56) sepa-
rated from said first electrode by said spark gap, said
second electrode having an end part adjacent said spark
gap, and wherein at least said end part has a minimum
resistance per unit length of at least 400 ohms per millime-
ter.
1. A jack, comprising:
a jack case having a first opening for receiving a plug and a
second opening for receiving a switch case;
a contact strip attached to an inner surface of the jack case,
the contact strip being resiliently urged into a first position
engageable by the plug on inseriion thereof, the plug
engaging and moving the contact strip to a second posi-
tion, the contact strip having a free end portion, carried
thereupon, disposed adjacent the second opening in the
jack case; and,
a switch case, having a self-contained switch mechanism
therein, removably fitted into the second opening, the
switch mechanism having electrical contacts and a mov-
able member adapted to open and close the contacts, the
movable member being engaged by the free end portion of
the contact strip, opening and closing the contacts in
response to insertion and removal of the plug.
4,393,284
DIRECT-CURRENT ELECTRIC SWITCH
Marc Rivollet, and Pierre Monzer, both of Oyonnax, France,
assignors to Etablissements Fernand Berchet, Oyonnax,
France
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,755
Qaims priority, application France, Nov. 21, 1980, 80 25023
Int. a.3 F21V 2i/04
U.S. a. 200—60 11 Qaims
4,393,283
JACK WITH PLUG ACTUATED SLIDE SWITCH
Toru Masuda, Higashi-Osaka, Japan, assignor to Hosiden Elec-
tronics Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,945
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 10, 1980, 55-
48956[U]
Int. Q.3 HOIA 3i/30; HOIH 9/02
U.S. Q. 200—51.09 5 Qaims
oaocmiunni
amcmtumi
1. An electric switch for electrically connecting a direct-cur-
rent source such as a cell, a battery, or a storage battery, to a
load on a direct-current which is produced from the direct-cur-
rent source, comprising an insulating, semi-rigid, integral piece
of plastic covered with a conducting layer, said integral piece
of plastic comprising:
a first blade provided with a means for making electrical
contact between a first pole of the direct-current source
and the load, said first blade also being provided with an
electrical break to current passage along the length of the
first blade;
a second blade which is parallel to the first blade and is
arranged on an opposite side of the direct-current source
from the first blade, said second blade being provided with
a means to make electrical contact to the load wherein
said second blade acts as a flexure member for said means
to make electrical contact;
a means for keeping the direct-current source located be-
tween said first and second blades, said keeping means
being attached to the first and second blades; and
a connecting blade capable of absorbing shock energy and
dimensional variation of said direct-current source, said
connecting blade being joined to the bases of said first and
second blades while being in electncal contact with a
second pole of the direct-current source.
768
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393^5
TRANSMISSION SWITCH ARRANGEMENT FOR A
POWER TRANSMISSION RESPONSIVE TO SHIITING
OF GEAR POSITION
Kazuyoshi Hiraiwa, Yokohama, and Saburo Yamasaki,
Fiyisawa, both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.,
Yokohama, Japan
FUed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,699
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 6, 1980, 55-58578
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/06
U.S. a. 200—61.88 12 Qaims
ing an insulating member for containing a movable contact and
a stationary contact, the improvement which comprises:
a coating of a greasy compound of a water repellent material
provided on the outer surface of said insulating member;
an insulating tube of a water repellent and heat shrinkable
material provided on said coating of the greasy com-
pound; and
insulating rings between said coating of the greasy com-
pound and said insulating tube.
^dJ
4,393,286
VACUUM QRCUrr BREAKERS
Kunihiko Takagi, Tama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Aug. 15, 1979, Ser. No. 66,772
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 24, 1978, 53-102273;
Aug. 24, 1978, 53-102274
lot a.5 HOIH 33/66
U.S. a. 200—144 B 3 Qaims
4,393,287
ARC SUPPRESSING MEANS FOR CURRENT LIMITING
ORCUIT BREAKERS
Kunimitsu Nakano, Osaka, Japan, a.ssignor to Matsushita Elec-
tric Works, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 185,802
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1979, 54-
129722[U]
Int. Q.^ HOIH 33/08. 9/34
U.S. Q. 200—144 R 10 Qaims
5. A transmission switch arrangement for detecting a trans-
mission gear position to produce a gear position signal indica-
tive of the transmission gear position in a power transmission,
comprising:
a transmission housing;
a switch box secured to said transmission housing;
a striking rod connecting a shift lever and a transmission
gear assembly for shifting operation of the transmission
gear position in response to operation of said shift lever,
said striking rod extending in substantially parallel rela-
tionship with the internal periphery of said switch box and
movable in relation thereto;
a movable switch member secured on said striking rod for
cooperation with a transmission gear shifting mechanism
and disposed within said switch box, said movable switch
member including a movable contact which opposes the
internal periphery of the switch box; and
stationary contacts secured on the internal periphery of said
switch box at locations facing said movable contact, said
stationary contacts being arranged at locations respec-
tively corresponding to each respective transmission gear
position.
9 ■
1. In a vacuum circuit breaker having a vacuum bulb includ-
^ 54 5ID 52 51 53 ^
1. An arc suppressing means for current limiting circuit
breakers comprising a base made of an insulative material for
mounting a circuit breaker; a movable contactor pivoted to be
rockable at one end having a movable contact; means for
manually operating said movable contactor; means electrically
connecting a load side terminal to the movable contactor;
means for tripping a contact closing position of the movable
contactor in response to an excess short-circuiting current; an
arc suppressing chamber provided in said base so as to receive
adjacent an end wall thereof at least said rockable end of the
movable contactor; a fixed contactor mounted to the base and
including a part having a fixed contact positioned to contact
with said movable contact in said contact closing ix)sition
adjacent said one end wall of said arc suppressing chamber,
said part of said fixed contactor extending substantially in a
direction parallel to the movable contactor along the one end
wall of the arc suppressing chamber; a first arc running plate
extended along a surface of the arc suppressing chamber which
is perpendicular to said one end wall surface of the chamber
and including means for electrically connecting said first arc
running plate to said extended part of the fixed contactor; a
second arc running plate disposed substantially in parallel to
said first arc running plate and electrically connected to the
movable contactor; and a deion grid disposed between said
first and second arc running plates and arranged within the arc
suppressing chamber with entrance ends of respective gaps
directed to the one end wall of the arc suppressing chamber
and with terminating the ends directed to the other end wall of
the chamber, wherein said first arc running plate has a begin-
ning end at said one end wall of the arc suppressing chamber,
and said means for electrically connecting the first arc running
plate to the fixed contactor is connected to said beginning end
of the first arc running plate perpendicular to the first arc
running plate and in substantially parallel relation to the mov-
able contactor, said movable contact engaging said fixed
contact adjacent the end of said connecting means that is
remote from said beginning end of said first arc running plate
to thereby render an excess short-circuiting current path on the
side of the fixed contactor to be substantially maximum.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
769
4,393,288
aRCurr breaker
Harold E. Belttary, Rio Piedras, P.R., assignor to GTE Prod-
ucts Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,574
Int. Q.3 HOIH 33/08, 33/10
U.S. Q. 200—144 R 9 Qaims
433,289
aRCurr breaker
Aime J. Grenier, North Attleboro, Mass., assignor to Texas
Instruments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 878,957, Feb. 17, 1978, Ser. No.
755,514, Dec. 30, 1976. This application Aug. 6, 1979, Ser. No.
64,453
Int. Q.3 HOIH 33/08, 9/30
U.S. Q. 200—147 R 4 Qaims
1. In a circuit breaker including two electroconductive
elements between which an arc may form, a molded insulated
housing having a pair of opposing interior surfaces with each
of said surfaces having an opposing formed recess extending
along and close to the arc-path between said electroconductive
elements, at least one of said electroconductive elements being
supported from said molded housing, said molded housing
being rigid and possessed of sufficient structural strength to be
self-supporting, the improvement comprising the combination
of
a pair of composition sheets, each said sheet residing along-
side a respective said opposing surface and held in place
within a respective said formed recess, said composition
sheets including material comprising a water-insoluble
binder and an arc suppressing substance selected from the
class consisting of the oxides and hydrates of aluminum
and magnesium, said binder constituting at least ten per-
cent of the composition; and
a channel for providing electric arc cooling and quenching
within said circuit breaker comprising an integral, gener-
ally U-shaped member forming a base and opposing side
walls having a length from one end to an opposite end,
said one end of said opposing side walls having extending
widths thereby providing a pair of enlarged side wall
surfaces for engaging with and being held by said compo-
sition sheets, each of said one end and said opposite end of
said base being formed with an extending tab for engaging
a molded feature of an interior surface of said molded
housing, whereby said extending tabs and said composi-
tion sheets are adapted to space said channel away from
said interior surfaces of said molded housing, thereby
exposing surfaces of said channel not in contact with said
sheets, said base having an arrangement of venting holes
therein, and wherein
said composition sheets physically contact said extending
widths of said channel but physically do not engage a
majority of said length of said channel
whereby said composition sheets, in addition to having arc
suppression characteristics, also support said channel
away from said molded housing, thereby helping exhaust
gases produced during arcing to vent both through said
venting holes and along said exposing surfaces of said
channel, said sheets further insulating said channel ther-
mally from said housing.
r
Z.
u5^
S.
/t'
48
1. A contact system for a circuit breaker comprising a pair of
first electrical contacts which are dis]X)sed in spaced relation to
each other in a common plane, and an electrically conductive
contact arm having bifurcations at one end which are spaced
apart along a line to be simultaneously engaged with the re-
spective first contacts, said arm having an intermediate arm
portion which extends parallel to said line to electrically con-
nect the bifurcations to each other at a location closely adja-
cent to said one arm end, said arm having an additional portion
extending from said intermediate arm portion to an opposite
end of the arm, and said arm having said opposite end pivotally
mounted on an axis which extends parallel to said line for
pivoting the bifurcations in a first arc around said axis in side-
by-side relation to each other and for pivoting said intermedi-
ate arm portion around said axis in a second arc spaced radially
inward from the first arc, said arm bei .g pivotable for moving
the bifurcations between a closed circuit position in which the
bifurcations lie in said plane engaging the first contacts and an
open circuit position in which the bifurcations are moved out
of said plane away from the respective first contacts, and said
intermediate arm portion being located so that said intermedi-
ate arm portion is disposed in said plane at one side and radially
inward from said line closely adjacent to said first contacts as
the arm is moved into and out of said closed circuit position
and so that electrical current flowing in said bifurcations and in
said intermediate arm portion during said circuit opening and
closing defiects electrical arcs formed between the bifurcations
and contacts during said circuit opening and closing in a direc-
tion away from the contacts and away from the contact arm.
4,393,290
PUFFER-TYPE GAS BLAST SWITCH
Giinter Mitteibach, Kassel; Giinter Horstmann, Gudensberg;
Werner Heiss, Kassel; Dietrich Hoffmann, Kassel-Kirchdit-
mold; Giinter Siebrecht; Karl Kriechbaum, both of Kassel, and
Giinter Rapp, Kassel-B, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Licentia Patent- Verwaltungs-GmbH, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Mar. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 128,897
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 9,
1979, 2909264; Mar. 9, 1979, 2909270; Oct. 22, 1979, 2942624;
Oct. 22, 1979, 2942625; Oct. 22, 1979, 2942626; Oct. 22, 1979,
2942627
Int. Q.3 HOIH 33/88
U.S. Q. 200—148 A 12 Claims
1. In a puffer-type gas blast circuit interrupter switch includ-
ing means defining two separable power current conducting
contacts between which an arc is created upon contact separa-
tion, a nozzle of insulating material disposed for directing a
stream of gas against such arc, means including a stationary
770
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
piston and a movable cylinder defining a compressor operable
by separation movement of the contacts to supply a mass of gas
under pressure to the nozzle, a cylindrical member surround-
ing the region in which such arc is created and the nozzle, a
shield member forming part of the nozzle, shaped to corre-
spond with the cylindrical member and slidingly engaging the
cylindrical member for guiding movement of the nozzle rela-
tive to the cylindrical member, and means deflning an inter-
ruptable rated current conducting path in parallel with the
power current conducting contacts, the rated current conduct-
ing path being interruptable before separation of the power
current conducting contacts, the improvement wherein said
rated current conducting path means comprise two stationary
contact pieces spaced from one another and a contact bridging
member mounted on said cylinder for connecting said station-
ary contact pieces together when said switch is closed.
4,393,291
GAS BLAST INTERRUPTERS
John S. Stewart, West Bridgford, and Stanislaw M. Gonek, Long
Eaton, both of England, assignors to Brush Switchgear Lim-
ited, England
FUed Aug. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 180,340
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 12, 1979,
7935551
Int. a.3 HOIN n/70
U.S. a. 200—148 R 8 Oaims
tubular end on which two sets of contact formations are
provided in an axially spaced apart relationship, said second
electrode being slidably engaged by both of said sets of
contact formations when said electrodes are in said closed
position, and disengaging from one of said sets of contact
formations before becoming disengaged from the other set
of contact formations during movement of said contacts
from said closed position towards said open position;
(b) means operative to move said first and second electrodes
between a closed position in which said electrodes are in
mutual electrical engagement and an open position in which
said electrodes are mutually separated, movement of said
electrodes from said closed position toward said open posi-
tion causing an arc to be drawn therebetween;
(c) a tubular housing having an interior in which said first
electrode is disposed;
(d) a guide surrounding said tubular housing, said guide and
said tubular housing defining therebetween an annular
chamber into which pressurized gas is supplied upon move-
ment of said electrodes from said closed position toward said
open position;
(e) means defining a first insulating orifice in said tubular hous-
ing through which said second electrode substantially seal-
ingly passes when said electrodes are in said closed position,
said second electrode passing out of the first insulating ori-
fice during movement of said electrodes toward said open
position thereby premitting said pressurized gas from the
annular chamber to flow through the first insulating orifice
into said interior of said tubular housing in a direction essen-
tially along said arc; and
(0 means defining a second insulating orifice in said guide
through which said second electrode also substantially seal-
ingly passes when said electrodes are in said closed position,
said second electrode passing out of the second insulating
orifice during movement of said electrodes towards said
open position thereby permitting said pressurized gas from
the annular chamber to flow through the second insulating
orifice in a direction opposed to the direction of gas flow
through the first insulating orifice, the first and second insu-
lating orifices being co-axial and of essentially the same size.
1. A gas-blast type interrupter comprising:
(a) first and second electrodes, said first electrode having a
4,393,292
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR ELECTRICAL
DISCHARGE MACHINING A SMALL AND DEEP HOLE
INTO OR THROUGH A WORKPIECE
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
\ Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,423
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 17, 1979, 55-98266;
Aug. 30, 1979, 54-110552; Aug. 31, 1979, 54-111427; Nov. 6,
1979, 54-144117; Nov. 29, 1979, 54-155107; Dec. 27, 1979,
54-172587
Int. a.3 B23P im
U.S. a. 219—69 M 33 Claims
1. A method of electrical discharge machining a small and
deep hole having a diameter of 1 mm or less and a depth to
diameter ratio of at least 5 into or through a workpiece, the
method comprising the steps of: juxtaposing a thin and elon-
gated tubular electrode with the workpiece across a machining
gap; supplying a water machining fluid through the tubular
electrode into the machining gap at a pressure of at least 20
kg/cm^; applying a series of electrical machining pulses be-
tween the tubular electrode and the workpiece to cause time-
JULY 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
771
spaced electrical discharges through the machining gap the main body to electrically insulate the shaft, the arm, and
thereby removing material from the workpiece; and advancing the power conductor means from the main body.
l3o
,1 Tl2 J^J^tgSJ'f"
"1^
8 9Y
#
4,393,294
ELECTRON BEAM WORKING APPARATUS FOR
CYLINDRICAL MEMBERS
Michitsune Shima; Seiichi lida, both of Kobe; Shiso Kihara,
Akashi; Masaharu Minami, Kobe; Toshikazu Shimoyama,
Kobe; Genta Takano, Kobe, and Akira Kato, Hiroshima, all of
Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 30,877, Apr. 17, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,927
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 17, 1978, 53-65088
Int. a.' B23K 15/00
U.S. a. 219—121 EC 2 Qaims
the tubular electrode in its longitudinal direction relatively into
the workpiece.
4,393,293
'RESISTANCE WELDING MACHINE
Nobuyoshi Inoue, and Tomomi Kishi, both of Toyotashi, Japan,
assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,171
Claims priority, application Japan, May 13, 1980, 55-
064460[U]
Int. a.3 B23K 11/ 10
U.S. a. 219—90 5 Qaims
1. A resistance welding machine comprising: a first elec-
trode; a second electrode pivotally movable toward and away
from the first electrode to engage work therebetween to sup-
ply electric resistance welding current to the work; a main
body supporting the fifst electrode; an electrically conductive
arm pivotally supported on the main body and supporting the
second electrode and making electrical contact therewith to
conduct the welding current; a conductive shaft extending
through the body; power conductor means rigidly connected
to the shaft, said shaft being non-rotably held in the body;
conductive bushing means inserted in the arm and making
good electrical contact therewith to conduct the welding
current, said bushing means being rotatably mounted on the
shaft and comprising an inner surface defined by regions of
cylindrical curvature closely conforming to the surface of the
shaft rotatably supporting the bushing means to make good
electrical contact therewith to permit the welding current to
flow therethrough and to furnish rotational mechanical sup-
port for the arm around the shaft, the inner surface of the
bushing comprising a plurality of recesses spaced therearound
to receive powdered material generated by rotational rubbing
of the inner surface of the bushing on the shaft and lubricant to
entrap the powdered material in the recesses; and hollow
cylindrical and annular radial insulating means surrounding the
shaft axial y outward of the bushing and between the shaft and
i. 's
»jf-
-28
^,
1. An electron beam apparatus for weldmg a pair of cylindri-
cal workpieces having inner and outer surfaces and stacked
one on the other and abutting along a circular line around the
periphery thereof, said apparatus comprising:
two disk-shaped partition plates having inflatable annular
seal members disposed along the respective outer periph-
eral edges thereof, which partition plates are adapted to be
placed inside the pair of cylindrical workpieces with one
above and the other below the circular line wherein the
workpieces abut with said seal members pressed against
the inner peripheral surfaces of the pair of cylindrical
workpieces to define a first vacuum chamber surrounded
by said two partition plates and the inner peripheral sur-
faces of the pair of cylindrical workpieces;
two annular fixed chamber wall members having inflatable
annular seal members disposed along the respective inner
peripheral surfaces thereof, which chamber wall members
are adapted to be placed outside the pair of cylindrical
workpieces with one above and the other below the circu-
lar line wherein the workpieces abut with said seal mem-
bers pressed against the outer peripheral surfaces of the
pair of cylindrical workpieces;
an annular rotary chamber wall member rotatably mounted
around said two annular fixed chamber wall members and
a seal member on the rotary chamber wall members adja-
cent the upper one of said partition plates and a seal mem-
ber on the rotary chamber wall members adjacent the
lower one of said partition plates, said seal members being
in sliding sealing contact with said fixed chamber wall
members to thereby form a second vacuum chamber
surrounded by the outer peripheral surfaces of said cylin-
drical workpieces, said two annular fixed chamber wall
members and the inner peripheral surface of said rotary
chamber wall member; vacuum means disposed outside
said chamber wall members and connected to said vacuum
chambers; pressure fluid means outside the workpieces
and connected to said seal members for supplying pressure
fluid thereto; and
an electron gun on said rotary chamber wall member level
with the circular line wherein the workpieces abut for
directing an electron beam against the circular line
772
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
wherein the workpieces abut so that electron beam weld-
ing can be carried out along the circular line wherein the
workpieces abut while said rotary chamber wall member
is being rotated with respect to the cylindrical work-
pieces.
4,393,295
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ENGRAVING WITH
AN ELECTRON BEAM
Siegfried Beisswenger; Wolfgang Boppel, both of Preetz, and
Dieter Grieger, Kiel, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Ing. Rudolf Hell GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,869
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 24,
1979, 2947444
Int. a.3 B23K 15/00
U.S. a. 219—121 EJ - 6 Oaims
dynamtc ftxusmg
eofitroi
vacuum punp
cutting zone in a direction of movement with the move-
ment of said metallic strip and in the opposite direction;
(d) a thermal cutting device containing at least one plasma
torch, said cutting device mounted on said carriage and
adapted to travel in a direction transverse to the direction
of movement of said metallic strip;
(e) an endless roller conveyor having an upper run for sup-
porting said metallic strip in the cutting zone, said roller
conveyor adapted to move in said cutting zone in the same
direction as said metallic strip, each roller of said roller
conveyor including an inner cavity deflned by a periph-
eral surface for supporting said metallic strip and opposed
side walls, and a plurality of apertures formed in said side
walls providing a communicating path from the exterior
of each said roller to its inner cavity for entry of a cooling
liquid, said apertures arranged in a position in said side
walls to retain a volume of cooling liquid within said inner
cavity providing a measure of cooling during movement
of each roll along said upper run;
(0 a tank filled with a cooling liquid, each said roller of said
roller conveyor moving through said tank for entry of said
cooling liquid through said aperiures into said inner cavity
thereby to mix with and thereby reduce the temperature
of the cooling liquid therein and to cool the peripheral
surface and side walls of each said roller before moving
toward said upper run; and
(g) an evacuation zone for the cut metallic pieces.
1. An electron beam engraving method for the fast, succes-
sive generation of depressions of different sizes in the surface of
a workpiece, whereby the different depressions are generated
by means of the different influence of the electron beam, com-
prising the steps of directing the beam on the workpiece, and
defocusing said beam on the workpiece in the periods between
the generation of the individual depressions while maintaining
the electron beam on the workpiece during said periods be-
tween the generation of depressions such that cutting does not
occur.
4,393,296
APPARATUS FOR THE CONTINUOUS MANUFACTURE
OF METALLIC ANODES FROM MOLTEN METAL
John M. A. Dompas, Olen, Belgium, assignor to Metallurgie
Hoboken-Overpelt, Brussels, Belgium
Division of Ser. No. 957,445, Nov. 3, 1978, abandoned. This
application Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,612
Claims priority, application Luxembourg, Nov. 16, 1977,
78531; Jun. 21, 1978, 79853
Int. a.3 B23K 7/02, 9/00
U.S. a. 219—121 PC 13 Qaims
4,393,297
METHOD FOR THE ARC CUTTING OF METAL
Juhani Niinivaara, Elimaki, Finland, assignor to Osmo Asonen,
Finland
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,510
Int. a.3 B23K 9/00. 35/00
U.S. a. 219—137 R 11 Qaims
1. In a method for arc cutting of metal, in which method an
electric arc is formed between the metal and a cutting torch,
1. An apparatus for cutting a moving metallic strip into and the cutting is achieved by simultaneously blowing gas into
uniform pieces along a predetermined profile, comprising: the cut; the improvement comprising injection of a paste
(a) a frame; through the torch into the region of the arc, said paste contain-
(b) a cutting zone; ing a finely-divided electrically conducting substance mixed
(c) a carriage mounted on said frame above said moving with a carrier, so that the aforesaid finely-divided substance
metallic strip, said carriage adapted to move within said acts as an electrode which causes the electric arc to be struck.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
773
433,298
LIQUID COOLING FOR A WELDING TORCH
John G. Frantzreb, Sr., Peoria, 111., assignor to Caterpillar
Tractor Co., Peoria, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 973,048, Dec. 7, 1978,
abandoned. This application Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,132
Int. a.3 B23K 9/16
U.S. a. 219—137.62 7 Qaims
..y'^^^j;^'^
1. In a welding torch (10) having a body (12) and an elec-
trode pathway (16), said body (12) having a contact tip assem-
bly (14) and first and second end portions (24,36), said contact
tip assembly (14) being positioned at said first end portion (24)
of said body (12), said electrode pathway (16) passing through
said contact tip assembly (14), the improvement comprising:
said body (12) having a central axis (60) and walls (62,63,64)
defining a central chamber (58), said central chamber (58)
having a periphery (66) and being symmetrical about said
central axis (60);
an expansion element (44) defined by a surface (50) and
positioned for receiving a flow of liquid and controllably
initiating a flow of gas in said central chamber (58) in
response to gasification of said liquid at said expansion
element (44), said surface (50) defining an aperture (52)
symmetrical about said central axis (60) and through
which said central axis (60) passes and opening through a
wall (64) of said body (12) into said central chamber (58)
immediately adjacent said contact tip assembly (14);
vent means (69) for controllably maintaining a preselected
flow of gas from said central chamber (58) to a location
spaced from said first end portion (24) of said body (12);
and
means (46) for controllably delivering a preselected amount
of liquid onto said expansion element (44), said means (46)
including a delivery orifice (48) positioned in said central
chamber (58) and spaced a preselected distance (D) from
said periphery (66) of said central chamber (58) at the
opening of said aperture (52) onto said wall (64) and ori-
ented for directing said delivered liquid through said
central chamber (58) into said aperture (52) to a prese-
lected location on said expansion element (44).
4,393,299
ELECTRIC RADIANT HEATER UNTT FOR A GLASS
CERAMIC TOP COOKER
Joseph A. McWilliams, Droitwich, England, assignor to Micro-
pore International Limited, Droitwich, England
FUed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,634
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nor. 17, 1980,
8036864 II
1 1 Int. C1.J H05B 3/68
U.S. a. 219-446 6 Qaims
1. An electric radiant heater unit for a glass ceramic top
cooker, the heater unit comprising:
a base layer of electrical and thermal insulating material;
at least first and second bare heater elements positioned on
said base layer and arranged such that said second heater
element extends substantially entirely around the periph-
ery of said first heater element;
means to connect said heater elements to a power source;
means for energising said first heater element independently
of said second heater element;
a dividing wall of thermal insulating material positioned on
said base layer and arranged between said first and second
heater elements for keeping heat within said dividing wall;
and
a peripheral wall of thermal insulating material positioned
on said base layer and surrounding said second heater
element for keeping heat within said peripheral wall,
wherein said second heater element has an electrical resis-
tance and said first heater element has an electrical resis-
tance such that, in use of the heater unit, the electrical
power fed to said second heater element and to said first
heater element per unit surface area of the heater unit
enclosed by the peripheral wall is greater than the electri-
cal power fed to said first heater element f>er unit surface
area of that part of the heater unit enclosed by the dividing
wall.
4,393,300
HEATING CONTROL SYSTEM
Gary R. Proctor, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,056
Int. a.3 H05B 1/02
U.S. a. 219—497 9 Claims
1. A temperature detecting heating control system compris-
ing:
a temperature sensor;
a first voltage comparator means having an output terminal
and two input terminals;
first means for coupling said temperature sensor to one input
terminal of said first comparator means;
a second voltage comparator means having an output termi-
nal and two input terminals;
second means for coupling said temperature sensor to one
input of said second comparator means;
means for generating a pair of dependently variable refer-
ence voltages, one of said reference voltages representing
a variable set point temperature and being coupled to the
other input terminal of said first comparator means, the
774
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
other of said reference voltages representing a warning
temperature, which is a predetermined number of degrees
less than said set point temperature, and being coupled to
the other input terminal of said second comparator means;
current switching semiconductor means coupled to the
output terminal of said first comparator means for control-
ling heating power in response to the temperature of said
sensor reaching said set point temperature;
alarm means for producing a tonal alarm signal; and
means for controlling said alarm means in response to the
temperature of said sensor, said means for controlling
including means for causing said alarm means to produce
an intermittent alarm signal in response to the temperature
of said sensor being between said warning temperature
and said set point temperature and a constant alarm signal
for a predetermined period of time in response to the
temperature of said sensor reaching said set point tempera-
ture,
said means for causing including third voltage comparator
means having two input terminals and an output terminal
coupled to control said alarm means,
said means for causing also including low frequency oscilla-
tor means coupled between said second comparator means
output terminal and one input terminal of said third com-
parator means for intermittently activating said alarm
means and having disabling means coupled to said first
comparator means output terminal for disabling said oscil-
lator means when said temperature of said sensor reaches
said set point temperature,
said means for causing also including gate means for en-
abling activation of said alarm means only when the tem-
perature of said sensor is between said warning tempera-
ture and said set point temperature,
said means for causing further including means coupled to
said third comparator means other input terminal for
maintaining activation of said alarm means for said prede-
termined time period after the temperature of said sensor
reaches said set point temperature.
4,393,301
SERIAL-TO-PARALLEL CONVERTER
Gordon D. Svendsen, Belmont, Calif., assignor to Ampex Corpo-
ration, Redwood City, Calif.
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,632
Int. a.3 G06F 5/04
U.S. a. 377—56 11 Qaims
pulse, said counter means coupled to be reset by said
parallel clock pulse;
(c) a decoder means having an input for receiving said count
provided by said counter means and having a plurality of
separate outputs each coupled to provide a separate out-
put signal in response to each count and synchronously
therewith;
(d) a plurality of output storage means each having a sepa-
rate data input enable terminal coupled to one separate
output of said decoder means and each having a separate
data output terminal, said plurality of output storage
means having interconnected data input terminals for
receiving simultaneously said serial data bits and having
interconnected data output enable terminals for receiving
simultaneously said parallel clock pulse, respectively,
each said output storage means being coupled to store one
particular serial data bit received thereby coincidently
with a particular separate output signal from said decoder
means and said plurality of output storage means being
coupled to apply simultaneously said stored data bits to
said separate outputs in form of a parallel output word in
response to and synchronously with receiving said parallel
clock pulse.
4,393,302
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR READING PUNCHED
CARDS
Rolf L. Hofmann, Basel, Switzerland, assignor to Advanced
Card Systems, Ltd., Basil, Switzerland
FUed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,599
Int. a.3 G06K 7/076
U.S. a. 235—474 13 Qaims
JIIIIMIIlll^^
Uread register^
1. A serial-to-parallel converter receiving respectively serial
clock pulses, serial data bits synchronous with the serial clock
pulses, a selected number of consecutive serial data bits form-
ing a serial input word, said converter further receiving serial
word synchronizing pulses synchronous with said serial input
words, said converter comprising in combination:
(a) a means for receiving said serial word synchronizing
pulses and generating a parallel clock pulse in response to
an integer number of serial word synchronizing pulses and
synchronously therewith;
(b) a counter means having an input for receiving said serial
clock pulses and an output for synchronously providing a
respective count in response to each received serial clock
1. A method for reading punched cards having holes ar-
ranged in rows and columns, comprising the steps of:
(a) gravity feeding a card to a reading station, along a path
parallel to the rows of perforations of the card,
(b) measuring the period of time Ato between the passage of
the leading edge of the card and the passage of a particular
hole, at a sensing position in the reading station,
(c) measuring the period of time At^ between the passages of
the leading and trailing edges, respectively, of said hole
and,
(d) computing ratio At^/Atn for determining the position of
the column comprising said hole.
433,303
INTRACAVITY PHASE FRONT AND POWER CONTROL
James M. Spinhime, Jupiter, Fla., assignor to United Technolo-
gies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,875
Int a.3 GOIJ 1/20
U.S. a. 250—201 4 Claims
1. An adaptive optical resonator comprising:
an optical gain medium;
means for exciting optical radiation within said gain me-
dium;
reflective means, including a deformable mirror, disposed
July 12, 1983
r
ELECTRICAL
775
about said optical gain medium to form an unstable optical
resonator for said radiation; and
feedback means, responsive to a portion of said outcoupled
radiation, for controlling said deformable mirror, charac-
terized in that:
said deformable mirror has a first region reflecting radiation
within said resonator and a second region reflecting radia-
tion oot of said resonator;
said feedback means includes means for focusing a portion of
said outcoupled radiation to a plurality of feedback focal
4,393,305
METHOD OF TUBE WALL THICKNESS
MEASUREMENT
Masami Shimizu, and Asao Monno, both of Kawasaki, Japan,
assignors to Fuji Electric Company, Ltd., Japan
Filed Sep. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 190,800
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 26, 1979, 54-122642
Int. C1.J GOIN 23/00
U.S. CI. 250—358.1 10 Oaims
■>
"J.
points, a first detector responsive to a first fraction of said
portion of said outcoupled radiation falling within a pre-
determined aperture centered on one of said feedback
focal points and connected to means for controlling said
first region to maximize the power of said first fraction of
radiation impinging on said first detector, and a second
detector responsive to a second fraction of that portion of
said outcoupled radiation directed at another of said feed-
back focal points and connected to means for controlling
said second region of said deformable mirror to adjust the
wave front of said outcoupled radiation.
4,393,304
GAS ANALYZER OF THE FLUID MODULATION TYPE
Kozo Ishida, and Hiroji Kohsaka, both of Kyoto, Japan, assign-
ors to Horiba, Ltd., Kyoto, Japan
1 1 Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,739
Claims iklority, application Japan, Mar. 1, 1980, 55-27076
Int. C1.3 GOIJ 1/00
U.S. a. 250—343 10 Oaims
1. In a gas analyzer of the fluid modulation type and includ-
ing at least one cell, means for alternatively introducing a
sample gas to be analyzed and a reference gas into said cell,
detector means for analyzing a property of said sample gas, and
means for alternately discharging said sample gas and said
reference gas from said cell, the improvement comprising:
a critical flow device located in said discharging means; and
pump means, located in said discharging means, for operat-
ing said critical flow device under conditions of critical
gas flow and for thereby maintaining said gas passing
through said critical flow device and said cell at a constant
flow rate.
1. A method of measuring values of single thickness of the
wall of a tube having an axis comprising the steps of:
selecting at least four distinct measuring points within a
sectional area of said tube wall, said sectional area being
on a plane which is not parallel to the longitudinal axis of
the tube;
selecting at least five radiation beam paths such that each of
the paths passes through two of such measuring points and
so that each of at least four measuring points is at an
intersection of at least two different beam paths, so that at
least two of said measuring points are on an intersection of
more than two beam paths;
transmitting at least one radiation beam of known intensity
along said paths;
detecting the intensities of said transmitted radiation beams,
after having passed through said measuring points, to
derive detected values each of which is indicative of a
dual compound thickness of the tube wall;
processing said detected values to determine said radial
thickness values of said wall, by solving a set of simulta-
neous equations so that at least two values of radial thick-
ness are obtained for the particular measuring points hav-
ing more than two measuring beam paths passing there-
through, and by mathematically obtaining the most proba-
ble value of solution for the radial thickness at each of
those particular measuring points, wherein said most
probable values of solution are used as the values of single
radial thickness of the tube wall at said measuring points;
and
wherein the number of measuring points and arrangement of
beam paths are selected so that said set of simultaneous
equations are solvable.
4,393,306
RADIATION DETECTOR
Brent T. Fultz, Berkeley, Calif., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the United States Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,276
Int. a.5 GOIT 1/18; HOI J 47/00
U.S. a. 250—374 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for detecting ionizing radiation comprising:
a cathode which includes electrically conductive walls
forming an annular chamber with a radially inner side and
a radially outer side;
an anode extending in substantially a circle within said
chamber;
a quantity of gas lying in said chamber; and
776
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
means for establishing an electrical potential between said
cathode and anode;
73 '
"/
42 v^
^ —
Icot^MTce
y^"^^^
^---iJiL
24 _^
1
SV'--
y>N'
HV
-t 1
^r\ . -|«fc/^ i
44-
^ /
^Sfe-
i
.<.<4w:
Jo
v>
!£.
2o
'5o
4,393,308
HIGH CURRENT ELECTRON SOURCE
Klaus Anger, Munich; Juergen Frosien, Berlin; Burkhard
Lischke; Erich Plies, both of Munich, and Klaus Tonar, Ber-
lin, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,881
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20,
1980, 3010815
Int. a.3 HOI J 37/00
U.S. a. 250—396 R 6 Qaims
said anode positioned so it lies closer to the radially inner
side than the radially outer side of the cathode chamber.
-i^CPF,
433,307
NEUTRON DETECTORS
Shinichi Nozaki, Yokohama; Ichiro Tai, Tokyo, and Shimpey
Shirayama, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,613
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 15, 1979, 54-148189
Int. CIJ GOIT 3/00
U.S. a. 250—390 2 Claims
1. In a neutron detector of the type comprising an ionization
chamber provided with an anode electrode and a cathode
electrode for detecting neutron flux injected into said ioniza-
tion chamber and a guide cable connected to said ionization
chamber, said guide cable comprising a central conductor
arranged within and coaxially with said cable and connected to
one of said anode electrode and cathode electrode for deriving
ionization current created by said neutron flux out of said
ionization chamber, and an outer conductor extending coaxi-
ally with said central conductor and insulated therefrom, said
outer conductor being connected to the other one of said
anode and cathode electrodes, said outer conductor being
electrically connected to a casing of said ionization chamber,
the improvement which comprises an intermediate annular
conductor arranged coaxially with and between said central
and outer conductors of said cable and insulated therefrom,
and upper and lower annular conductors embedded in insulat-
ing members disposed between said anode and cathode elec-
trodes for supporting said one of the anode and cathode elec-
trodes which is connected to said central conductor, said upper
and lower annular conductors being electrically connected
together and said upper annular conductor being connected to
said intermediate annular conductor of said guide cable.
1. In a high current electron source having a narrow energy
band and having a beam generating system including a cath-
ode, a plurality of focusing electrodes, and a deflection system
and an illumination lens disposed after said anode in the direc-
tion of electron beam travel, the improvement comprising:
one of said focusing electrodes being disposed between said
cathode and said anode and consisting of non-movable
means for generating an octupole effect on said electron
beam, said means selectively varying the size of said cross-
over and the orientation of said cross-over in a plane
perpendicular to said electron beam.
4,393,309
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING THE
OBJECTIVE LENS IN A SCANNING ELECTRON
MICROSCOPE OR THE LIKE
Setsuo Norioka, Akishimashi, Japan, assignor to JEOL Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,009
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1980, 55-126812
Int. a.3 G21K 1/08. 5/10: HOIJ 3/14
U.S. a. 250—396 R 2 Qaims
W~T\
20
Ltt.S
WSWtB
1
>
D/A
LOaviBTER
COnrtOL
•
A/D
CWWSBTta
UMTMltiK
■
A/D
COH»i>Tt,R
-
7 AiiS
CtHfTBDUH
)
1 '
r-r
9
'
J( Al'l
y-Ajiis
1. A method for controlling the excitation current of the
objective lens in a scanning electron microscope or the like
comprising:
(a) a step for storing data which specify the relation between
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
777
the excitation current (I) of the object lens and the focus-
ing distance (D) of the objective lens;
(b) a step for focusing the beam upon the specimen by vary-
ing the objective lens excitation current while observing
the specimen image; and memorizing the initial focusing
distance (Do) corresponding to the objective lens excita-
tion current determined by focusing;
(c) a step for detecting the change in the focusing distance
(AD) due to the specimen shift relative to the initial focus-
ing distance (Do) along the optical axis of the objective
lens after the said focusing operation;
(d) a step for reading out the excitation current correspond-
ing to the focusing distance (Do -I- AD) from the data
stored in step (a); and
(e) a step for supplying the objective lens with the excitation
current read out in step (d).
4,393,310
METHOD OF AND DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING A
SHAPED-ELECTRON-BEAM WORKING DEVICE
Eberhard Hahn, 9, Pestalozzistrasse, Jena, District of Gera,
German Democratic Rep.
Filed Jan. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 502
Qaims priority, application German Democratic Rep., Jan.
19, 1978, 01203296
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 37/26
U.S. CI. 250—398 5 Qaims
H a 0 *
o I o »
ences visible at the format edges of four adjacent edges of
the zero-format for format adjustment where the zero-for-
mat is the cross-section of the beam in the currentless state
of the format deflection system,
imaging of the aperiure diaphragm and cyclic format varia-
tion, phase shifted in x, y-direction, and subsequent cor-
rection of the pupil displacement occuring in the course
thereof, for pupil adjustment,
imaging of the target plane and cyclic positioning of the
format with simultaneous format variation, and correction
of the distance error visible at the format edges for format
calibration.
4,393,311
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SURFACE
CHARACTERIZATION AND PROCESS CONTROL
UTILIZING RADIATION FROM DESORBED
PARTICLES
Leonard C. Feldman, Berkeley Heights; Joseph S. Kraus, Stir-
ling; Norman H. Tolk, Mendham; Morton M. Traum, Warren,
and John C. Tully, Berkeley Heights, all of N.J., assignors to
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 159,167, Jun. 13, 1980. This application
May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,702
Int. Q.3 GOIN 23/22; HOIJ 37/26
U.S. Q. 250—459.1 43 Qaims
sO '^
1. A method of adjusting a shaped-electron-beam working
device in which a first angular aperture is imaged onto the
plane of a second angular aperture completing each other such
that a rectangularly shaped beam results which is demagnified
via an objective into a target plane and which is positioned
therein through an x, y-deflection system, and in which a
crossover of said shaped-electron-beam working device is
imaged into the tilt plane of a format deflection system for
format variation and from there onto the plane of an aperture
diaphragm (entrance pupil) of said objective, adjustments of
the pupil, of the beam format and of a beam format calibration
being performed comprising in time sequence the steps of
displaying the electron beam shape image in the target plane
on a screen,
displaying the image of the entrance pupil on the screen,
checking the images of said beam shape and said entrance
pupil, and in the event of misalignments from an adjusted
state prevailing
the following adjustment steps are performed:
imaging the aperture diaphragm and focusing of the pupil
onto the plane of the aperture diaphragm for pre-adjust-
ment of the pupil,
imaging of the target plane and cyclically positioning of a
zero-format in x, y-deflection direction in the target plane
in the step width of the zero-format and correcting the
wedge error (non-parallel opposing sides), the parallelo-
gram error, the distance error, and the brightness difler-
1. Method for analyzing a solid surface comprising
(a) exposing at least part of the surface to a beam of probe
radiation of intensity and energy such that the exposed
surface area remains solid;
(b) detecting responsive characteristic electromagnetic radi-
ation in the infrared, visible, or UV part of the spectrum
emitted by excited particles desorbed from the surface;
characterized in that
(c) the probe radiation consists of low-momentum radiation,
"low-momentum radiation" being radiation that transfers
negligible linear momentum to particles in the surface.
4,393,312
VARIABLE-SPOT SCANNING IN AN ELECTRON BEAM
EXPOSURE SYSTEM
Robert J. Collier, New Providence, and Michael G. R. Thomson,
Berkeley Heights, both of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 655,427, Feb. 5, 1976, abandoned. This
application Nov. 29, 1977, Ser. No. 855,608
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 37/00
U.S. Q. 250—492.2 25 Qaims
1. A method for achieving variable-spot-size scanning of an
electron beam in a lithographic exposure system adapted to
fabricate microminiature devices, said method comprising the
steps ot
directing an image of a single electron-beam-illuminated
aperiure onto a mask plate which has a single aperiure
therethrough,
and successively controlling the registration of said image
with respect to said second-mentioned mask plate aperture
1032 O.G.~29
778
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
during said scanning to establish plural different cross-sec- 4,393,314
tional configurations of the beam that is transmitted ORCXJIT ARRANGEMENT FOR THE GENERATION OF
A SAWTOOTH VOLTAGE
Dieter Kunze, Kaltenkirchen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,774
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 6,
1979, 2949066
Int. a.3 H03K 4/08
U.S. a. 307—228 13 Qaims
through said second-mentioned mask plate aperture
thereby to selectively define variable spot sizes during said
scanning.
' 4,393,313
WIDTH DETECTOR SYSTEM
James D. Calkins, Oak Brook Terrace; Eugene E. Bushong,
Bensenville, and Lee R. Schuck, Buffalo Grove, all of HI.,
assignors to Binks Industries, Inc., Wood Dale, III.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,738
Int. CI.' GOIN 21/86
U.S. CI. 250—560 9 Claims
'M^
■t*^
4'
A^.
Upm
1. A widjh detector system for constantly monitoring and
measuring the width of moving elongated strip materials,
comprising: a pair of carriages, one movably mounted adjacent
each lateral edge of a strip of material to be measured; a pair of
sensor means mounted, one on each carriage, for movement
therewith along parallel paths transversely of the elongated
axis of said strip material; each sensor means comprising a light
source and a photo sensitive cell disposed on opposite faces of
said strip material and productive of signals propxjrtional to the
intensity of light received by said cell; a pair of drive means,
one for bidirectionally moving each carriage and sensor means;
a pair of pulse generators, one operatively driven by each drive
means, and operable to generate positive and negative output
signals dependent on the direction of travel of said carriages
along said paths; control means responsive to signals from each
sensor means for controlling its associated said drive means
whereby to cause each sensor means to independently follow
an adjacent edge of said material, and measurement means
responsive to the combined output signals of said generators
for constantly monitoring the distances of said sensor means
from a fixed datum including means for totalizing said dis-
tances whereby to determine the measured distance between
said sensor means representing the width of said material.
1. Circuit arrangement for the generation of a sawtooth
voltage at a capacitor, which is charged by a first current, until
a first threshold voltage is reached, and is discharged by a
second current, until a second threshold voltage is reached
comprising:
a source of synchronization signals,
means for changing the direction and/or the intensity of the
direct current supplied to the capacitor at the instant the
threshold voltage is reached, whereby the differences
between the first and the second threshold voltage as well
as the charge and the discharge current determine the
natural frequency of the sawtooth voltage generated, and
a synchronization signal detector and means for switching
said circuit from said natural frequency under the influ-
ence of said synchronization signal detector for establish-
ing the presence of said synchronization signal, whereby
at least one of the two capacitor charge switching instants
can be determined by synchronization signals supplied
having a substantially constant nominal repetition fre-
quency, the sawtooth voltage being thus synchronizable
by said synchronization signals, and whereby said natural
frequency is given substantially the nominal value in the
absence of synchronization signals, said synchronization
signal detector being implemented as a coincidence circuit
to which a signal corresponding to a determined time
interval, of the sawtooth voltage and a signal correspond-
ing to a determined time interval of the incoming synchro-
nous signal are supplied and which on coincidence of
these two signals supplies a signal to a switching stage for
switching the natural frequency of the sawtooth circuit
arrangement from a value corresponding at least substan-
tially to the nominal frequency to a lower value.
4,393,315
HIGH-GAIN STABILIZED CONVERTER
Tedd K. Stickel, Chalfont, and Stephen A. Ransom, Huntingdon
Valley, both of Pa., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,898
Int. C1.3 H03K 5/00. 19/092
U.S. a. 307—264 13 Claims
1. A high-gain level converter for employing emitter cou-
pled logic (ECL) source signals as an input to gallium arsenide
(Ga As) logic circuitry, comprising:
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
779
a first plurality of Ga As level shifting diodes couplable to
said ECL source signals,
an input node line coupled to the output of said first plurality
of diodes,
a voltage source,
a Ga As differential amplifier of the type comprising at least
three transistors arranged as an active input transistor, a
reference input transistor and a current source transistor
couplable to said voltage source,
said input node line being connected to the gate of said input
transistor of said differential amplifier.
(c) turn off control winding means acting only on said high
permeability core.
a voltage divider having an intermediate voltage tap whose
output voltage is approximately equal to the mid-point
switching voltage of said ECL source signals,
a second plurality of Ga As level shifting diodes having an
input coupled to said intermediate voltage tap of said
voltage divider,
an output node line coupled to the output of said second
plurality of diodes, and
said output node line being connected to the gate of said
reference input transistor to provide an inverted output at
the drain of said reference input transistor to provide a Ga
As output voltage line compatible with the input voltage
swings required for Ga As logic circuitry.
4,393,316
TRANSISTOR DRIVE CIRCUIT -
Harold J. Brown, Lorain, Ohio, assignor to Reliance Electric
Co., Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,603
Int. a.3 H03K 3/45, 3/33
U.S. a. 307—270 16 Qaims
1 ,
0
? 1 20
1-^
LU
^'1
O
:1
"ih^
12 22 1-^i ^ I
1. A bipolar transistor drive and control circuit comprising:
(a) a DC charge means directly coupled to said transistor for
providing a source of charge for turn off of said transistor;
(b) a transformer having both a high permeability magnetic
core and a low permeability linear magnetic core said
transformer also having input and output drive current
means said input drive means receiving a drive current
signal and said output drive means being connected to
both said charge means and said transistor; and
4,393,317
MAGNETICALLY CONTROLLABLE ELECTRONIC
SWITCH
Wolfgang Radziwill, Aachen; Giinter Doring, Wiirselen, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Hans Steinbusch, Schaesberg,
Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,103
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 2,
1979, 2939917
Int. a.' H03K 3/26
U.S. a. 307—309 16 Oaims
• •• • •
-, St
• • • • ■
"Mf -1.
V)
■ H*
.1 I..I
T- 1 ll." ~
'■-1 in
•- •
!•% ^% I'"
•
•1.'^
i- '\\')
. t.
• K".i
« 4. .
♦ •
« . . i
1. A magnetically controllable integrated circuit electronic
switch comprising, a Hall element exhibiting an offset corre-
sponding to a magnetic field having a value Bo and adapted to
be controlled by a magnetic field having a component B nor-
mal to the Hall element, first and second electric supply input
terminals and an output terminal, first and second electric
switching paths coupled between the first and second supply
input terminals and the output terminal, respectively, with
each of said switching paths exhibiting a threshold (AB/2)^0.
and means including said Hail element for controlling said first
and second switching paths so that exposure of the Hall ele-
ment to said magnetic field with said normal component B
causes the first switching path to be closed if B>Bo + (AB/2)
and the second switching path to be closed if B<Bo-(AB/2),
and wherein the first and second switching paths are both open
if |B-Bo| «AB/2)xr, wherein 0<«<1 and T is a factor
taking into account the transition between open and closed
conditions of said switching paths.
4,393,318
SAMPLE AND HOLD CIRCUIT
Masayuki Takahashi, Utsunomiya; Kunihiko Goto, Kawasaki;
Hisami Tanaka, Yokohama, and Michinobu Ohhata, Kawa-
saki, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki,
Japan
Filed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,949
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 1, 1979, 54/68552
Int. a.' H03K ] 7/687; GllC 27/02
U.S. a. 307—353 10 Qaims
1. A sample and hold circuit, for holding a sampled input
voltage, comprising:
an input terminal;
an output terminal;
a first field-effect transistor, connected between said input
terminal and said output terminal, for sampling an input
voltage applied to said input terminal;
means for applying a first control voltage to the gate of said
first field-effect transistor for selectively switching said
780
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
first field-effect transistor between conductive and non-
conductive states,
a holding capacitor, connected to said output terminal, for
holding said sampled input voltage;
means operatively connected to the gate of said first transis-
tor for receiving and inverting the first control voltage
and outputting the inverted voltage as a second control
voltage;
a second field-effect transistor having a source and drain
commonly connected to said output terminal and a gate
connected to said inverting means and receiving said
second control voltage for selectively switching said
extended direction and to take up any last motion between
the second thrust bearing and the rotor.
rnr
second field-effect transistor between non-conductive and
conductive states, relative to the conductive and non-con-
ductive states, respectively, of said first field-effect transis-
tor, wherein the sum of the capacitance between the gate
and source plus the capacitance between the gate and the
drain of said second field-effect transistor is approximately
equal to the capacitance between the gate and the source
of said first field-effect transistor, and the area of the
channel region, defined by multiplying the channel length
L times the channel width W, of said second field-effect
transistor is approximately equal to half of the area of the
channel region of said first field-effect transistor.
4,393,320
PERMANENT MAGNET ROTOR
Gordon K. Anderson, Tustin, Calif., assignor to Carrier Corpora-
tion, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,703
Int. C\? H02K 21/12
U.S. a. 310—156 3 Qaims
4,393,319
ELECTRIC MOTOR POWERED ACTUATOR
Gustavus P. Bock, Bellbrook, Ohio, assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
_ Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,199
Int. a.3 H02K 7/06
U.S. a. 310—80 8 Claims
wzi
1. An electric motor powered actuator comprising in combi-
nation;
a shaft axially movable between an extended and stopped
position and varying retracted positions,
a motor rotor telescoped on said shaft and in threaded rela-
tion therewith to position the shaft in accord with rotation
of the rotor,
a first thrust bearing effective to oppose movement of the
rotor in the retraction direction when the shaft is in ex-
tended and stopped position,
a second thrust bearing, one side of which engages said
rotor, effective to oppose movement of the rotor in the
extended direction, and
resilient means effective to exert a resilient expanding force
between the shaft and an opposite side of said second
thrust bearing to aid the motor in moving the shaft in the
1. A permanent magnet rotor comprising:
an electrically conductive, non-magnetic housing including
an annular front plate and an annular back plate, and
defining a central, rotor axis;
an inner ring secured within the housing between the front
and back plates and annularly extending around the rotor
axis;
a plurality of permanent magnets supported within the hous-
ing and circumferentially spaced around the inner ring;
an outer ring secured within the housing between the front
and back plates and circumferentially extending around
the permanent magnets, and including a plurality of outer
ring segments;
wherein the front and back plates, the permanent magnets,
and the outer ring define a plurality of pockets;
electrically non-conductive filler material filling each of the
pockets;
a plurality of electrically conductive, non-magnetic damper
plates located radially outward of the filler material, en-
gaging the front and back plates, and engaging and ex-
tending between adjacent outer ring segments; and
means securing the damper plates within the housing and
including:
a plurality of front rivets, each front rivet being integral with
one of said damper plates, extending forward therefrom,
through the front plate and including a front head portion
located forward of and overlaying a portion of the front
plate, and
a plurality of back rivets, each back rivet being integral with
one of said damper plates, extending rearward therefrom,
through the back plate and including a back head portion
located rearward of and overlaying a portion of the back
plate.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
781
4,393,321
SURFACE ACOUSTIC WAVE TRANSDUCER
Alexandr S. Bagdasarian, ulitsa Popova, 10, kv. 12, Moskoys-
kaya oblast, Fryazino; Jury V. Gulyaev, ulitsa Baikalskaya,
23, kv. 29; Vladimir N. Fedorets, Ryazansky prospekt, 95,
korpus 4, kv. 66, both of Moscow, and Anatoly M. Kmita,
prospekt Mira, 22, kv. 231, Moskovskaya oblast, Fryazino, all
of U.S.S.R.
per No. PCT/SU80/00147, § 371 Date May 28, 1981, § 102(e)
Date May 22, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00939, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 2, 1981
PCT Filed Aug. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 269,019
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., Sep. 28, 1979, 2821084
Int. C\? HOIL 41/10
U.S. a. 310—313 B 5 Claims
4,393,322
IMAGE INTENSinER FACEPLATE
Walter P. Siegmund, Woodstock, Conn., assignor to Warner
Lambert Technologies, Inc., Southbridge, Mass.
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,317
Int. a.3 HOIJ 43/28
U.S. a. 313—544 4 Qaims
1. An interdigital surface acoustic wave transducer compris-
ing a substrate of a material in which surface acoustic waves
may be propagated and at least two rows of electrodes are laid
down on the substrate, a main row of said rows comprising a
first group of electrodes arranged in parallel with one another
and connected electrically to a first current-conducting pad,
and a second group of electrodes arranged in parallel with said
electrodes of said first group, said electrodes of said first group
being positioned in corresponding spaces between adjacent
electrodes of the second group so that overlap regions of the
electrodes of the groups are formed, said overlap regions
having a constant length, said electrodes of said second group
being connected to a second current-conducting pad, a second
rovy positioned between said main row and said second cur-
rent-conducting pad and comprising a first group of electrodes
arranged in parallel with one another and electrically con-
nected to said second current-conducting pad, and also com-
prising a second group of electrodes arranged in parallel with
said electrodes of said first group in said second row and ar-
ranged between the electrodes of said first group in a manner
such that at least some of the electrodes of said first and second
groups of the second row form overlap regions of a variable
length, said length being determined by a given impulse re-
sponse of the transducer, said electrodes of said second group
of said second row being coupled conductively and in a direct
way to the corresponding electrodes of the second group of
the main row, wherein the improvement comprises the sub-
strate comprising at least first and second areas, the first area
having and the second area having no piezoelectric properties,
the main row having electrodes arranged on the first area of
the substrate having piezoelectric properties, and the second
row having electrodes arranged on the second area of the
substrate having no piezoelectric properties.
1. A faceplate for an image intensifier comprising the fused
assembly of:
a central glass plate having a finished edge;
a ring of light-absorbing glass extending about said edge of
said central plate; and
an outer annular supporting fiange of glass.
4,393,323
FLUORESCENT LAMP SHIELD
Fritz Hiibner, Zeeland, Mich., assignor to Plascore, Inc., Zee-
land, Mich.
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,965
Int. CI.' HOIJ 5/16: HOIK 1/28
U.S. CI. 313—110 5 Qaims
V.
1. An assembly for shielding a fiuorescent light tube, com-
prising:
an elongated plastic, tubular shield having an inner periph-
eral surface;
an elongated, one-piece expanded metal tubular shaped heat
sink positioned within the shield and adjacent the inner
782
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
peripheral surface of the shield, said heat sink defining a the discharge space there is a mercury amalgam present on or
plurality of rows of apertures; and adjacent to a wall portion which is not in but is accessible to
a pair of end caps positioned one at each end of said shield,
said end caps including means for receiving the ends of
said shield to support the assembly about the light tube. ,
4,393,324
SPARK PLUG WITH A SPHERE-LIKE METAL CENTER
ELECTRODE AND MANUFACTURING PROCESS
THEREOF
Kanemitsu Nishio, Komaki; Shunichi Takagi, Tajimi, and
Yasuhiko Suzuki, Nagoya, ail of Japan, assignors to NGK
Spark Plug Co., Nagoya, Japan
Filed Sep, 10, 1980, Ser. No, 185,956
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1979, 54-118046
Int. CI.' HOIT 13/20, 13/32
U.S. CI. 313—133 25 Claims
1. A spark plug comprising a refractory insulator with a
center bore having a bottom end provided with a small end
bore being smaller than the remainder of the center bore and a
discharge center electrode fixed to said small end bore by
means of pressing a metallic sphere having a higher melting
point than a sealing temperature of a conductive sealing glass
in said small end bore.
4,393,325
LOW-PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOR DISCHARGE
LAMP WITH MERCURY AMALGAM
Auke G. van der Kooi, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to U.S.
Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,692
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Aug. 15, 1979.
7906203
Int. CI.' HOIJ 61/28. 61/30
U.S. CI. 313— 552 3 Claims
1. A low-pressure mercury vapor discharge lamp compris-
ing a hollow glass inner member which is closely surrounded
with a discharge-tight fit by a predominantly cylindrical, glass
outer member, one end of each member being closed, the two
members being sealed together in a gas-tight manner at their
ends, the lamp also comprising two electrodes between which
a discharge takes place during operation, said discharge being
present in a discharge space between the electrodes formed by
a groove in the wall of at least one of the members and by the
wall portions of the other member, located opposite this
groove, characterized in that intermediate the sealed edge and
thedischarge space via a channel defined by facing surfaces of
the two members.
4,393,326
DC PLASMA DISPLAY PANEL
Takeo Kamegaya, Tokyo, and Satoshi Watanabe, Saitama, both
of Japan, assignors to Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,379
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 22, 1980, 55-21789;
Feb. 22, 1980, 55/21790; Jan. 12, 1981, 56/2838
Int. CI.' HOIJ 61/06
U.S. CI. 313— 582 11 Claims
XcZ^:j^I</^^J^^-
H~IU y bLJO
1. A DC plasma display panel comprising first and second
substrates defining a gas chamber therebetween; an ionizable
gaseous medium within said chamber; an anode layer formed
onto said first substrate; a cathode layer formed onto said
second substrate; an emitter layer formed onto said cathode
layer; said cathode layer, said emitter layer, and said anode
layer being disposed within said chamber for ionizing said
gaseous medium; said emitter layer being formed onto said
cathode layer by plasma spray coating.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
783
4,393,327
ELECTRIC SPARK TYPE LIGHT SOURCE FOR
PRODUCING LIGHT FOR SPECTROSCOPIC ANALYSIS
John P. Walters, and Steven G. Barnhart, both of Madison,
Wis., assignors to Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation,
Madison, Wis.
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,894
Int. a.' H05B 7/20: GOIJ 3/30
U.S. a. 315H-241 R 33 Qaims
4
p k-^^j'',,"^",^ 6A-E I JlNTEGa«TO«l -jMEA-.ut s ,
ifiER/vTOR
1. An electric spark type light source for producing light for
spectroscopic analysis, comprising
an analytical spark gap,
an energy storage capacitor,
a charging and discharging circuit for alternately charging
said capacitor and causing said capacitor to discharge
across said spark gap to produce sparks which generate
light for spectroscopic analysis,
said circuit including at least one inductance coil for causing
the discharge current through said spark gap to be oscilla-
tory and pulsating in waveform,
said circuit including rectifier means for causing the dis-
charge current through said spark gap to have at least a
unidirectional component,
and time gate pulse generating means for deriving time gate
pulses from said circuit with said time gate pulses synchro-
nized with the oscillatory pulsating waveform of the spark
gap current for use in selecting repetitive segments of the
light from said sparks for use in spectroscopic analysis.
4,393,328
HOT CATHODE, ITS PRODUCTION PROCESS AND
ELECTRON TUBE INCORPORATING SUCH A
1 1 CATHODE
Arvind Shroff, and Pierre Palluel, both of Paris, France, assign-
ors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,176
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 9, 1979, 79 27715
Int. CI.' HOIJ 1/14
U.S. CI. 313—346 R 4 Claims
1. A process for producing a cathode formed from a matrix
of a fritted powder metal impregnated with a barium com-
pound, and a heating filament associated with said matrix,
wherein the matrix is formed from a mixture of two metals,
tungsten and another high work function refractory metal, and
wherein the matrix is covered with a high work function re-
fractory metal film, comprising the following successive
stages:
(a) mixing powders of tungsten and another high work
function refractory metal
(b) pressing the mixture between 7 and 10 t/cm^
(c) prefritting under hydrogen ^t between 1100° and 1300°
CB for approximately 12 h
(d) fritting in vacuo at a temperature between 1^50 and
(e) impregnation with calcium and barium aluminates
(0 elimination of the excess aluminate present on the surface
by a chemical process
(g) deposition of the high work function refractory metal
film.
4.393,329
ARTICLE OF MANUFACTURE FOR PROJECTION
TELEVISION SYSTEM
Stanley E. I^ehnert, Addison, III., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glen view. III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 110,413, Jan. 7, 1980, Pat. No.
4,274,110. This application May 29, 1980, Ser. No. 154,197
Int. CI.' HOIJ 29/86
U.S. CI. 313—477 R 10 Claims
162
183
2;(A
1. For use in a projection television system, an article of
manufacture comprising a cathode ray picture tube having a
face panel with a rearwardly extending skirt and a window for
receiving a cathodoluminescent imaging screen, said tube
having a seal land which defines a plane whose normal makes
a non-zero acute angle with respect to the axis of said window
4,393,330
METHOD FOR EFFECTIVELY CONTACTING
MANGANESE-ACTIVATED ZINC SILICATE PHOSPHOR
WITH ANTIMONY OXIDE DURING PHOSPHOR
COATING, AND RESULTING LAMP
Henry Skwirut, Verona, and Robert G. Young, Nutley, both of
N.J., assignors to North American Philips Electric Corp.,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,494
Int. CI.' HOIJ 61/48: B05D 1/38. 7/22
U.S. CI. 313—487 25 Claims
1. A fluorescent lamp having a predetermined correlated
color temperature and combined high efficacy and good color
rendition, said lamp cc^mprising a sealed elongated light-trans-
mitting envelope having electrodes operatively positioned
therein proximate the ends thereof and enclosing a discharge-
sustaining filling comprising mercury and a small charge of
inert ionizable starting gas which when energized generates a
discharge comprising ultraviolet radiations and a limited pro-
portion of visible radiations, phosphor means comprising a
predetermined amount of a first phosphor layer carried on the
inner surface of said envelope and a predetermined amount of
a second phosphor layer coated on and carried on said first
phosphor layer so that said second phosphor layer is positioned
nearer to said discharge than said first phosphor layer;
said first phosphor layer principally comprising finely di-
vided apatite-structured calcium halophosphate activated
784
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
by predetermined proportions of antimony and manga-
nese, said first phosphor layer when excited by said dis-
charge, emitting visible radiations of a color which ap-
proximates said predetermined correlated color tempera-
ture of said lamp, said first phosphor layer having been
applied in predetermined amount by flowing over the
envelope interior surface a phosphor coating paint com-
prising a liquid vehicle and organic binder having said first
phosphor suspended therein as a slurry, said coating paint
also including a small predetermined amount of finely
divided antimony oxide, and said applied coating paint
having been lehred at a temperature sufficient to volatilize
the organic binder therefrom but insufficient to volatilize
more than a minor proportion of said antimony oxide; and
said second phosphor layer substantially comprising a mix-
ture of predetermined amounts and relative proportions of
finely divided narrow-band blue-emitting phosphor acti-
vated by divalent europium having an emission substan-
tially confined to the wavelength range of from 430 nm to
inner surface being a red-emitting phosphor coating and
the luster filter coating on said outer surface being an
orange luster whose transmittance at 400 nm is about 40%,
at 500 nm is about 60%, and at 600 nm is about 70%,
whereby said lamp radiates light having a color similar to
that of an incandescent lamp with a color temperature of
about 2,800° K.
>'-14
4,393,332
GYROTRON TRANSVERSE ENERGY EQUALIZER
Robert S. Symons, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to Varian Associ-
ates, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,497 .
Int. a.3 HOIJ 25/00
U.S. a. 315—4 7 Qaims
485 nm, finely divided green-emitting phosphor compris-
ing manganese-activated zinc silicate, and finely divided
red-orange-emitting trivalent-europium-activated yttrium
oxide, the predetermined amounts and relative propor-
tions of said mixed phosphors comprising said second
phosphor layer when excited by said discharge emitting
visible radiations of a color which approximates said pre-
determined correlated color temperature of said lamp,
said second phosphor layer having been applied in prede-
termined amount by flowing over said lehred first phos-
phor layer a second phosphor coating paint comprising a
liquid vehicle and organic binder having said phosphors of
said second layer mixed and suspended therein as a slurry,
and said second layer applied coating paint having been
lehred at a temperature sufficient to drive organic binder
therefrom and also sufficient to volatilize an appreciable
portion of residual antimony oxide in said first phosphor
layer to cause said volatilized antimony oxide to contact
said manganese-activated zinc silicate.
_H
4,393,331
HIGH PRESSURE MERCURY VAPOR DISCHARGE
LAMP WITH OUTER BULB
Alexander Dobrusskin, Taufkirchen; Lutz Klein, Scheuring, and
Giinter Woizan, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Patent-Treuhand-Gesellschaft fUr elektrische Gliih-
lampen mbH, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,071
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 16,
1980, 8010444[U]
Int. a.3 HOIJ 1/62, 61/40
U.S. a. 313—489 3 Qaims
1. An improved high pressure mercury vapor discharge
lamp comprising an inner arc tube which radiates light with
electric leads attached thereto surrounded by an outer trans-
parent bulb, the inner surface of said outer bulb being coated
with a phosphor coating and the outer surface of said outer
bulb being coated with a luster filter coating,
the improvement comprising said phosphor coating on said
1. A gyrotron electron tube comprising:
means for generating a beam of electrons parallel to an axis;
and
periodic means for causing all electrons in said beam to gain
approximately the same transverse energy, said periodic
means including means for generating a steady field compo-
nent perpendicular to said axis whose direction rotates about
said axis as a periodic function of distance along said axis.
4. A method for operating a gyrotron electron tube compris-
ing means for forming a beam of electrons parallel to an axis,
said method comprising the steps of applying a steady periodic
field component perpendicular to said axis whose direction
rotates about said axis as a periodic function of distance along
said axis, and correlating the strength and axial length of said
periodic field so that all electrons in said beam at different
initial distances from said axis acquire approximately the same
transverse energy.
4,393,333
MICROWAVE PLASMA ION SOURCE
Noriyuki Sakudo, Ohme; Katsumi Tokiquchi, Hachioji; Hidemi
Koike, Tokorozawa; Ichiro Kanomata, Fuchu, and Humihiko
Nakashima, Katsuta, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 215,064
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 10, 1979, 54-
169847[U]
Int. Q.^ HOIJ 7/24; H05B il/26
U.S. Q. 315—111.81 6 Qaims
1. A microwave plasma ion source comprising a source for
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
785
generating microwaves, a waveguide connected to said source
for propagating the microwaves, a discharge chamber pro-
vided in an end portion of said waveguide to form a plasma
therein by applying an electric field generated by the micro-
waves admitted thereinto and a magnetic field to a discharge
gas introduced thereinto, ion extraction electrodes provided
adjacent to said discharge chamber so as to extract ions from
the plasma, a solenoid provided on the low- voltage side of said
ion extraction electrodes so as to form the magnetic field in
said discharge chamber, and a high-permeability member ar-
ranged adjacent to slaid waveguide on the microwave admis-
sion side of said discharge chamber for permitting the micro-
waves to be propagated freely and for setting the shape of the
magnetic field.
4,393,334
ELECTRON ACCELERATION IN lONIZABLE GAS
David Glaser, 1918 Raymond Dr., Northbrook, III. 60062
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,972
I Int. Q.3 H05B 41/16; HOIJ 61/62
U.S. Q. 315—167 18 Qaims
said electrons must pass as they travel from said cathode
to said anode, and
the minimum dimension of said holes being less than the
Debye length of the gaseous atmosphere in which they are
located.
4,393,335
ELECTRONIC FLASH DEVICE
Shinji Hirata, Toyonaka, and Hirohiko Ina, Kobe, both of Ja-
pan, assignors to West Electric Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,301
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 28, 1980, 55-
59007[U]; May 30, 1980, 55-75659[U]
Int. Q.' H05B 41/i2
U.S. Q. 315—241 P 3 Claims
1. In a gas-discharge device of the type having a generally
planar cathode for emitting electrons and a generally planar
anode for accelerating said electrons toward a luminescent
target, said anode and said cathode being mutually parallel and
the space between said cathode and said anode containing an
ionizable gaseous atmosphere, the combination comprising
a plurality of planar electron-transmissive accelerator elec-
trodes mounted in spaced parallel relationship between
said cathode and said anode,
insulator means insulating said electrodes from one another
and from said cathode and said anode, and permitting said
electrons to pass as they travel from said cathode toward
said target, and
means connecting to said electrodes voltages which are
respectively positive relative to the voltage level of said
cathode, which voltages increase in value from the one of
said electrodes which is closest to said target,
the voltage difference between adjacent ones of said acceler-
ator electrodes being less than the ionization voltage and
the surface breakdown voltage therebetween,
said electron-transmissive accelerator electrodes are respec-
tively provided with a plurality of holes through which
'OC-DC CONVERTER
5
-6
12-X
i TRIGGER
^ CIRCUIT
"5
1^
~i3 ~. r ?
'-<§) I
23
i i ! 1
z
<->U
ujQ:
1. An electronic fiash device comprising
(a) a DC-DC converter which includes an npn type oscilla-
tion transistor and an oscillation transformer and which
steps up a voltage across a low-voltage power source,
(b) a main flash capacitor charged by said DC-DC con-
verter,
(c) a flash lamp which is connected across said main flash
capacitor and which establishes a discharge-flash loop
with said main flash capacitor,
(d) a trigger circuit which includes a trigger capacitor con-
nected in parallel with said main flash capacitor and which
excites said flash lamp,
(e) a diode whose anode is connected to the high-voltage-
side terminal of said main flash capacitor,
(0 an auxiliary flash capacitor which is adapted to be
charged through said diode by said DC-DC converter,
(g) a silicon controlled rectifier means which is connected
across said diode in the opposite direction and which
establishes a discharge loop of said auxiliary flash capaci-
tor,
(h) a control circuit which is connected across said low-volt-
age power source and which controls the application of
the gate signal to said silicon controlled rectifier means,
said control circuit comprising:
(1) a drive circuit for delivering the gate signal to said
silicon controlled rectifier means,
(2) a switching element which is connected across said
low-voltage power source through a resistor and which
is adapted to short-circuit the gate of said silicon con-
trolled rectifier means, and
(3) a switching element control circuit for controlling said
switching element, and
(i) a detection circuit which is adapted to control said con-
trol circuit in response to the exposure conditions.
4,393,336
REGULATION OF THE EHT VOLTAGE OF A CRT
Terrance C. Schmidt, Waterloo, Canada, assignor to Elec-
trohome Limited, Kitchener, Canada
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,262
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 23, 1980,
8041238
Int. Q.5 HOIJ 29/70
U.S. Q. 315—387 1 Qaim
1. In combination with a cathode ray tube having an anode;
786
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
means for deriving and supplying EHT to said anode other
than via horizontal deflection circuitry that supplies deflection
current to the horizontal deflection coil for said cathode ray
tube, said deriving and supplying means including a tuned
flyback transformer producing flyback pulses; a voltage con-
trolled oscillator; means for deriving an error signal indicative
of a change in EHT both above and below a predetermined
magnitude; means supplying said error signal to said voltage
l5 — JTRiPil
TB*i«5fOR««Hp||C
4,393,338
VEHICLE PROPULSION MOTOR CONTROL
APPARATUS
Stanley W. Jones, McMurray, and James H. Franz, Jr., Mur-
rysville, both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric
Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,852
Int. C1.3 H02P 3/00
U.S. a. 318—86 5 Claims
l.>. i<. I.,y 1 .
controlled oscillator to decrease the frequency of the output
signal thereof in response to a decrease in EHT and to increase
the frequency of the output signal thereof in response to an
increase in EHT; and means utilizing said output signal to
control the operation of said flyback transformer in such a way
that the magnitude of said flyback pulses are increased in
response to a decrease in EHT and decreased in response to an
increase in EHT.
4,393,337
SWITCHING CIRCUIT
Tamgi Nagai, Kawasaki, and Takeshi Matsushita, Sagamihara,
both of Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 22,306
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 25, 1978, 53-34356
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/70: HOIL 29/74
U.S. a. 315—408 10 Qaims
X"
9a^ ^^
IS
10. A horizontal deflection circuit for a television system
comprising: a deflection coil; a fly-back transformer; a damper
diode; a resonant capacitor; said deflection coil, fly-back trans-
former, damper diode and resonant capacitor being connected
together and constituting a load; a horizontal oscillator pro-
ducing a repetitive signal having flrst and second voltage
levels; a switching circuit having an input terminal and first
and second load terminals; said load being connected to said
first and second load terminals; said switching circuit including
a first three-junction gate-controlled switch having a first gate,
a first anode and a first cathode and a second three-junction
gate-controlled switch having a second gate, a second anode
and a second cathode; said first gate being connected to said
input terminal; said second cathode being connected to said
first load terminal; said first and second anodes being con-
nected to said second load terminal; said first cathode being
connected to said second gate; means responsive to said first
and second voltage levels for applying positive and negative
signals to said input terminal; said first and second gate-con-
trolled switches having ON and OFF conditions; and delay
means for delaying a change of said second gate-controlled
switch from said ON to said OFF condition until said first
gate-controlled switch has completed a change from said ON
to said OFF condition.
1. In control apparatus for a plurality of direct current mo-
tors operative with a voltage source and an effort request
signal for determining one of a power mode of operation and a
brake mode of operation for said motors, with each of said
motors having an armature and a field, the combination of:
circuit means having first and second terminals and a first
circuit including the armature and field of a first motor
and a second circuit including the armature and the field
of a second motor connected between said first and sec-
ond terminals, said circuit means having third and fourth
terminals and a third circuit including the first motor
armature and the second motor field and a fourth circuit
including the first motor field and the second motor arma-
ture connected between said third and fourth terminals,
first switch means connected with said voltage source and
controlling the current through said first and second cir-
cuits to establish said power mode, and
second switch means connected to control the current
through said third and fourth circuits to establish the
brake mode,
with the first switch means including a power diode con-
nected to be conductive in a first direction and provided
to conduct power mode current through the first and
second motor armatures in said first direction, and with
the second switch means including a brake diode con-
nected to be conductive in a second direction and pro-
vided to conduct brake mode current through the first and
second motor armatures in said second direction.
4,393,339
MOTOR APPARATUS
Kenji Kimura, Tachikawa, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,496
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 7, 1980, 55-28692
Int. a.3 H02K 29/00
U.S. a. 318—254 10 Qaims
1. A motor apparatus comprising:
a motor including a rotor;
detection means coupled to said motor for providing a de-
tection signals corresponding to a position of said rotor;
converter means coupled to said detection means for provid-
ing multiphase pulse signals by slicing off said detection
signal at a predetermined threshold level, said multiphase
July 12, 1W3
ELECTRICAL
787
pulse signals being either high or low in level and over-
lapped with one another in the high level thereof; and
changing means coupled to said converter means for chang-
ing said threshold level;
♦ v»0
^50
ZDI03
S t«
4,393,341
WINDSHIELD CLEANING SYSTEM
James C. Byrne, Farmington Hills, Mich., assignor to Gulf A
Western Manufacturing Company, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,495
Int. OJ H02P 5/00
U.S. Q. 318—443 20 Claims
e \ » ,»• »
:58
46
soo
^26
-t^i-!i'
I 1 - J AMP U »- ujor » _i- •
J«MI>
.V44
C4
^yj-\ — •
(4
wherein the rotation speed of said rotor is controlled in
accordance with said threshold level.
4,393,340
MOTOR SPEED CONTROL DEVICE
Teruo Iwasama, and Hitomi Tojiki, both of Hachioji, Japan,
assignors to Olympus Optical Company Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,378
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1980, 55/78503
Int. CI.' H02P 5/16
U.S. Q. 318—301 4 Claims
;^-
(Mj
19 18
J-
17 15
reiF
w
KOTOnAioe
*-«>
1. A windshield cleaning system comprising drivable wind-
shield cleaing means including blade means and wash fluid
pump means, first and second motor means for respectively
driving said blade means and said pump means, motor control
circuit means including power supply means and manually
positionable means for connecting said motor means across
said power supply means for providing a selected one of a
plurality of selectable driving modes for said drivable means,
said modes including a wash mode in which both said first and
second motor means are connected across said power supply,
said blade means and said pump means in said wash mode each
having a corresponding operating period, said motor control
circuit means including timing means operable in said wash
mode for determining the duration of said operating period for
said pump means independent of said operating period for said
blade means in said wash mode, and means for adjusting said
timing means for varying said duration of said operating period
of said pump means in said wash mode.
1. A motor speed control device, comprising:
means for generating pulse output corresponding to the
revolution speed of the motor;
means for generating saw-tooth output in synchronization
with the pulse output;
means for generating reference voltage;
a current mirror load differential amplifier including a first
amplifier element having a first current mirror circuit
connected as load and supplied with the saw-tooth wave
output and a second amplifier element having a second
current mirror circuit connected as load and supplied with
the reference voltage, and supplying current to the first or
second current mirror circuit corresponding to the result
of comparing the reference voltage with the saw-tooth
wave output;
an integrating circuit to be charged or discharged by the
charging current flowing through one of the first and
second current mirror circuits and the discharging current
flowing through the other of both current mirror circuits;
and
means for driving the motor by output of the integrating
circuiit,
4,393,342
DOOR OPERATION CONTROL APPARATUS
Shigeru Matsuoka; Takeshi Tokunaga; Seiji Vonekura; Koji
Yamauchi, and Mitsuo Suzuki, all of Hitachi, Japan, assign-
ors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 329,046
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1980, 55-174593
Int. CI.' G05B 5/00
U.S. CI. 318—467 12 Qaims
I
Ji3
3M
-}
•So-
4~ f jrj
*= Bui W-.
5I> ■
309
3aD
38 »
~J^.
u
soi I
'?* R«
33?' I. sj! I
^y.
1. A door operation control system comprising a door oper-
ating device including a driving unit for driving a door and
connector means for connecting said driving unit to said door,
and a control unit for issuing a predetermined command signal
to said door operating device to control movement of said
788
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
door, said control unit comprising counter means for counting
the time of door operation, section detector means for counting
the time of door movement from one end to the other end of a
specified section of travel thereof, memory means for storing
the count detected by said section detector means, means for
producing a comparison reference value which is determined
as a function of said count stored in said memory means, and
means for comparing said count detected by said counter
means with said comparison reference value and providing a
command signal in the form of a door operating condition
control signal to said door operating device when the count
thereof exceeds said comparison reference value.
433,343
POSITION ADJUSTING DRIVE UNIT
Wolfgang Angersbach, Darmstadt, and Karl-Heinz Meier, Zeil-
hard, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Quick-Rotan
Elektromotoren GmbH, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 167,325
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 25,
1979, 2930228
Int. a? G05B 1/06
U.S. a. 318—640 5 Oaims
1. A position adjusting drive unit for a rotary shaft of a
machine, particularly a sewing machine, comprising a driving
electrical motor having an adjustable rotary speed; an electri-
cal speed regulating circuit for said motor; an electrical angu-
lar position adjusting circuit for the rotary shaft of the ma-
chine; said circuits including means for generating signals
corresponding to desired values of the rotary speed and of the
angular position and to actual values of the rotary speed and of
the angular position; a common circuit board detachably con-
nected to the motor, said board supporting and interconnecting
the electrical and mechanical component parts of said circuits;
said means for generating electrical signals including a plural-
ity of light barriers controlled by a stop plate having stop
apertures arranged according to a code for generating a digital
code of the desired value signals; and electrooptical signal
generating-and-receiving means arranged in a modular unit;
said modular unit including a plurality of light-emitting diodes
arranged at different levels in a pack, a corresponding plurality
of photo-transistors arranged at corresponding levels and at a
spaced relationship from said light-emitting diodes, an interme-
diate partition extending in a part of the space between said
diodes and phototransistors and having a free edge stepped
according to the levels of said diodes, a stop plate slidable in
the remaining interspace between said diodes and said photo-
transistors and having one edge thereof stepped in a comple-
mentary fashion relative to the stepped edge of said intermedi-
ate partition to provide adjustable stop af>eriures, and further
including fixed stop apertures arranged at the level of respec-
tive steps; and said means for generating the desired value
electrical signals including at least one light barrier controlled
by a stop plate.
4,393,344
SQUIRREL CAGE INDUCTION MOTORS
Geoffrey E. Whellams, 3 Spruce Ave., Greenstead, Colchester,
Essex, England
Division of Ser. No. 14,114, Feb. 22, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 168,684
Int. a.3 H02P 3/24
U.S. a. 318—759 10 Oaims
1. A squirrel cage motor of the single phase running type and
control means therefor, which motor comprises a rotor and a
stator, said rotor being arranged in the form of a core and a
cage built up of two conductor end rings and conductor bars
connecting said end rings, and said stator comprising a stator
core carrying primary and secondary windings, in which
motor at least one of said two conductor end rings of the rotor
is provided with at least two gaps diametrically opposed to
each other to divide said one end ring into at least two separate
portions, said gaps serving an insulating sections between the
separate end ring portions, and said control means comprising
supply means to feed a single phase alternating current supply
to said primary stator winding, switch means in series with said
secondary stator winding and selectively operable between a
run position and a stop position, a capacitor connected be-
tween the switch means and the alternating current supply
means so as to be arranged in series with said secondary wind-
ing when said switch means is in the run position so that alter-
nating current thereby flowing through the primary and sec-
ondary windings generates 'a polyphase field, and full wave
rectifier means also connected between the switch means and
the alternating current supply means so as to be arranged in
series with said secondary winding when said switch means is
in the stop position whereby direct current thereby flowing
through the secondary winding causes the rotor to stop at an
angular position determined by the disposition of said gaps in
said one end ring.
4,393,345
aRCurr for damping hunting by electric
MACHINES
Kurt Fork, Neunkirchen; Wolfgang Kaufhold; Wolfgang Meusel,
both of Erlangen, and Hermann Waldmann, Weiher, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,685
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 12,
1979, 2945599
Int. O.J H02H 7/06; H02P 9/00
U.S. O. 322—19 10 Oaims
1. A circuit for damping hunting oscillations of a controlled
electric synchronous machine of the type having a rotor and a
stator, the circuit being of the type which determines the
hunting oscillation and combines a phase-shifted oscillation
correction signal with a control signal of the circuit, the circuit
further comprising:
identification circuit means for producing a flrst signal hav-
ing a frequency which corresponds to a frequency of the
hunting oscillation and a second signal having said fre-
quency and shifted in phase by 90° with respect to said
first signal;
phase shift means for forming the phase-shifted oscillation
correction signal, said phase-shifted oscillation correction
July 12, 1^83
ELECTRICAL
789
signal being shifted in phase with respect to said first and
second signals by a selectable amount, said first and sec-
SMOOT>«« fXTER
ond signals being combined with one another in accor-
dance with their respective amplitudes.
input and for supplying and controlling bias current to
said first linearizing diode; and
third impedance means coupled between said output and
said diode bias input for maintaining bias to said first
means when said output approaches open circuit output
impedance conditions.
4,393,347
COMMON MODE VOLTAGE REJECTION aRCUIT
Norman G. Looper, San Diego, Calif., assignor to Action Instru-
ments Co. Inc., San Diego, Calif.
Filed Aug. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 175,800
Int. 0.3 GOIR 1/30; H03F 3/68
U.S. O. 324— 126 ^ 3 Oaims
' ' 4,393,346
VOLTAGE CONTROLLED RESISTOR
Ronald R. Jones, Phoenix, Ariz., assignor to Circuit Research
Labs, Tempe, Ariz.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,546
Int. a.3 G05F 1/46
U.S. O. 323—280 11 Oaims
FW PEAK
OCreCTOR
ATTaCK . RELEASC
INTEGRATOR a
BUFFER DRIVER
1. A voltage controlled resistor circuit, comprising:
an operational transconductance amplifier having an invert-
ing input, a non-inverting input adpated to be coupled to
a first source of supply voltage, a diode bias input, a bias
input for receiving a gain control current, first and second
power supply terminals adapted to .be coupled to second
and third supply voltages, respectively, and an output for
exibiting a high output impedance when the gain control
current is substantially zero, said output impedance de-
creasing as said gain control current increases, said opera-
tional transconductance amplifier having first and second
linearizing diodes each having an anode coupled to said
diode bias input, said first linearizing diodt having a cath-
ode coupled to said inverting input and said second linear-
izing diode having a cathode coupled to said non-invert-
ing input;
first means coupled, to said output for providing a low impe-
dance buffered output;
first impedance means coupled to said diode bias input for
producing current flow through said first and second
linearizing diodes;
second impedance means coupled to said low impedance
buffered output for providing feedback to said inverting
1. In an electrical apparatus for measuring minute differen-
tial voltage levels between a first low-source-impedance signal
applied to the apparatus positive input terminal and a second
low-source-impedance signal applied to the apparatus negative
input terminal in the presence of substantial common-mode
voltages in reference to earth, wherein said apparatus has
balanced high input impedances between each of said terminals
and the apparatus zero-reference point, and wherein said zero-
reference point is isolated from earth,
an improvement for limiting the effect of any unbalance
^ between the input-path impedances of said signals which
comprises:
a low-impedance shunt across each of the input terminals
and the apparatus zero-reference point; and
a high-impedance shunt between the apparatus zero-refer-
ence point and earth;
wherein the value of said low-impedance shunt in relation to
the high-impedance shunt is selected so as to attenuate the
common-mode voltages without reducing the terminal
input impedances in relation to the signal source-imped-
ances to a point where the measurement error due to the
signal source impedance is likely to be equal or greater
than the measurement error due to the effect of the com-
mon-mode voltages in the absence of said low-impedance
and high-impedance shunts.
4,393,348
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING
MINORITY CARRIER DIFFUSION LENGTH IN
SEMICONDUCT'ORS
Bernard Goldstein; Joseph Dresner, both of Princeton, and
Daniel J. Szostak, Mercerville, all of N.J., assignors to RCA
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,575
Int. aj GOIR 31/26
U.S. O. 324— 158 R 13 Claims
1. An apparatus for determining the minority carrier diffu-
sion length of a sample of semiconductor material, the sample
having two major surfaces, one of the surfaces arranged for
illumination and the other surface shielded from illumination
comprising:
(a) means for illuminating a portion of the one major surface
of the sample with steady d.c. monochromatic light that is
of a selected wavelength to provide a d.c. surface photo-
voltage (d.c. SPY);
(b) vibrating means positioned adjacent said illuminated
790
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
surface for providing an alternating electrical signal repre-
senting said d.c. SPV on the sample;
(c) electronic servo means responsive to said alternating
electrical signal for automatically providing a nulling
potential equal to said d.c. SPV; and
"'^
-«
toci-i« 1 ' ,m
4,393,350
METHOD FOR RAPIDLY DETECTING SUBTERRANEAN
TUNNELS BY DETECTING A NON-NULL VALUE OF A
RESULTANT HORIZONTAL MAGNETIC HELD
COMPONENT
Peder M. Hansen; John G. Hoffman; Elwin W. Seeley, and
Wesley A. Andrew, all of San Diego, Calif., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 31,721, Apr. 20, 1979, Pat. No. 4,290,020.
This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,754
Int. a.3 GOIV 3/08
U.S. a. 324—334 2 Qaims
^ MAGNETIC FrELO
"^ HtCEfV'NG P0»tlft—
(d) means for providing a signal representing the illumina-
tion incident upon the sample by detecting a portion of
said illuminating light.
MAGftfTiC FIELD REC [
HOBIZ0NT4L I
FERRiTE LOOP
ANTENNA
4,393,349
ASYMMETRICAL SQUID
Max B. Burbank, Maple Ridge; Randy K. Lomnes; Jiri Vrba,
both of Port Coquitlam, and Alistair A. Fife, Coquitlam, all of
Canada, assignors to Her Majesty the Queen in right of Can-
ada, as represented by the Minister of National Defence,
Ottawa, Canada
Filed May 21, 1980, Ser. No. 151,815
Qaims priority, application Canada, Jul. 26, 1979, 332608
Int. a.i GOIR 33/02; H03K 3/38
U.S. a. 324—248 4 Qaims
1. A SQUID device for magnetic field measurements com-
prising a tubular body of superconducting material, said body
being truncated longitudinally to provide a flat surface; a hole
having a longitudinal axis which is coaxial with the longitudi-
nal axis of said body; a slot having a longitudinal axis parallel
with said longitudinal axis of said body and joining said hole
and said flat surface; a coil of superconducting wire having
ends centrally affixed to said flat surface and directly adjacent
said slot, wherein the inductance of said coil is difFerent than
the inductance of said hole; and wherein a weak link is located
in said slot adjacent said flat surface.
1. A method for rapidly detecting subterranean tunnels using
primary magnetic fields generated by electrical conductors
placed on the earth's surface in a manner such that the conduc-
tors are parallel and the lenghts thereof are several times
greater than the distance separating them comprising the steps
of:
generating two separate ac primary magnetic fields at a
predetermined frequency in a manner that the resultant
horizontal component of the magnetic fields along a prese-
lected line on the earth's surface is a null when the sur-
rounding region is characterized with homogeneous elec-
tromagnetic properties;
measuring said resultant horizontal component of the mag-
netic fields along said preselected line; and detecting the
occurrence of a nonnull measurement as an indication of
the location of a subterranean tunnel.
4,393,351
OFFSET COMPENSATION FOR SWITCHED
CAPACITOR INTEGRATORS
Roubik Gregorian, Santa Clara, and Glenn Wegner, San Jose,
both of Calif., assignors to American Microsystems, Inc.,
Santa Clara, Calif.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,387
Int. a.3 G06G 7/18: H03K 5/00; H03F 1/02
U.S. a. 328—127 6 Oaims
1. An integrator containing an integrator input terminal and
an integrator output terminal comprising:
an operational amplifier having an inverting input lead, a
non-inverting input lead, and an output lead, said opera-
tional amplifier producing an offset voltage on said output
lead;
a first switch means responsive to a first phase of a signal
having two phases, said first switch means connected
between said inverting input lead and said output lead;
a first capacitor, having a capacitance Ci, having a first and
a second plate, said first plate connected to said inverting
input lead of said operational amplifier;
a second switch means, responsive to a second phase of said
signal having two phases, said second switch means con-
JULY 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
791
nected between said second plate of said first capacitor
and said output lead of said operational amplifier;
a second capacitor, having capacitance value a2C|, having a
first and a second plate, said first plate connected to said
inverting input lead of said operational amplifier;
third switch means, responsive to said second phase, said
switch means connected between said second plate of said
second capacitor and said output lead of said operational
amplifier;
a fourth switch means, responsive to said first phase, said
fourth switch means connected between said second plate
of said second capacitor and a voltage reference; and
fourth sample-and-hold circuits to be strobed first, fourth,
third and second, respectively.
switched capacitor means connected between said inverting
input lead and said integrator input terminal, said switched
capacitor means serving as a resistor equivalent and in-
cluding a third capacitor having a first and a second plate,
said third capacitor having capacitance a\C\;
whereby the effect of said offset voltage on the integrator
output voltage available on saiJ output terminal is elimi-
nated by the simultaneous integration of said input voltage
and said offset voltage during the period when said first
clock phase is low and said second clock phase is high.
4,393,353
NEGATIVE FEEDBACK AMPLIFYING CIRCUIT
HAVING VOLTAGE NEGATIVE FEEDBACK AND
CURRENT NEGATIVE FEEDBACK CIRCUITS
Hiroyasu Minagawa, Yamato, Japan, assignor to Victor Com-
pany of Japan, Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,355
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1979, 54-
134344[U]
Int. a.' H03F 1/32
U.S. a. 330— 102 6 Qaims
' ' 4,393,352
SAMPLE-AND-HOLD HYBRID ACTIVE RC RLTER
Gerald T. Voipe, Stamford; Leonard S. Laskoski, Bridgeport;
Ralph J. Amodeo, Bethel; William J. Swanson, Danbury, and
Jerome D. Gottesman, Norwalk, all of Conn., assignors to The
Perkin-Elmer Corporation, Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Sep. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 188,429 ^
Int. a.3 H03D 1/02
U.S. Q. 329—50 6 Qaims
1. A circuit for eliminating a variable carrier frequency from
an input data signal, comprising in combination,
filter means automatically tunable to provide a variable
frequency reject band comprising first, second, third and
fourth sample-and-hold circuits connected in tandem,
input means providing said input data signal to said first
sample-and-hold circuit,
first means automatically tuning said filter means to vary the
frequency reject band in accordance with variations in the
carrier frequency to eliminate the carrier frequency from
the input data signal,
said first means comprising strobe pulse generating means,
said strobe pulse generating means including second means
causing the period of the strobe pulses to vary proportion-
ately to variations in the carrier frequency,
third means connecting said strobe pulse generator means to
said filter means to cause said first, second, third and
"* ifO |R2
1. A negative feedback amplifying circuit comprising:
(a) an amplifier having positive and negative inputs. The
output of said amplifier being coupled to a load compris-
ing a speaker;
(b) a resistor connected in series with said speaker;
(c) a voltage negative feedback circuit for feeding back the
output voltage of said amplifier to the negative input of
said amplifier; and
(d).a current negative feedback circuit for feeding back a
signal, which is a function of the potential difference
between both the ends of said resistor, to the negative
input of said amplifier, said voltage negative feedback
circuit having a frequency selection characteristic having
a dip at a specific frequency which is equal to the mini-
mum resonance frequency due to the mechanical impe-
dance of said speaker, and said current negative feedback
circuit having a frequency selection characteristic having
a peak at said specific frequency.
4,393,354
CROSSOVER CIRCUIT FOR USE IN AUTOMATIC GAIN
CONTROL SYSTEMS
Michael McGinn, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,605
Int. Cl.^ H03G 3/30
U.S. Q. 330—280 18 Qaims
1. Circuit for providing output voltages indicative of the
level of an applied input signal, comprising:
first circuit loop means which is responsive to the magnitude
792
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
of the input signal being less than that of a reference bias
signal supplied to said first circuit loop means for provid-
ing an output indicative of the level of the input signal,
said first circuit loop means being rendered nonresponsive
when the magnitude of the input signal exceeds a thresh-
old level set by said reference bias signal such that the
output therefrom remains substantially constant; and
second circuit loop means coupled with said first circuit loop
means which is rendered responsive by said first circuit
loop means becoming nonresponsive for providing an
output indicative of the level of the input signal.
charge coupled device having a plurality of charge storage
cells each of said first charge storage capacity with its input
connected to one output terminal of said output line and its
output connected to the other output terminal of said output
line, a pulse generator producing "n" phase related pulse trains
at a certain frequency and supplying inputs to said cells of said
second charge coupled device to move charges therethrough,
a first non-directional coupling element coupled to an interme-
diate storage cell of said first charge coupled device, a second
non-directional coupling element coupled to an intermediate
storage cell of said second charge coupled device, a third
4,393,355
OPERATIONAL AMPLIRER
William F. Davis, Tempe, and Stuart B. Shacter, Mesa, both of
Ariz., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, 111.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,085
Int. a.3 H03F 3/04. 1/34
U.S. a. 330—294 3 Qaims
■"i^
rl2
18
11
,V0UT
14
26^ 24
22
1. An operational amplifier having an output stage, said
operational amplifier comprising:
an input stage for generating a drive signal;
first means coupled to said input stage and responsive to said
drive signal for generating first and second currents, said
first means comprising a transistor having first and second
collectors;
follower transistor means coupled to said first means and
having an input driven by said first current, said follower
transistor means having emitter and collector terminals,
and having a base terminal coupled to said first collector;
a gain transistor coupled to said follower transistor means
and responsive to said first and second currents, said gain
transistor having base, emitter and collector terminals,
said base terminal coupled to the emitter of said follower
transistor and to said second collector, said emitter termi-
nal adapted to be coupled to ground and said collector
terminal coupled to the input of said output stage; and
a capacitor having a first terminal coupled to said first col-
lector and a second terminal coupled to the collector of
said gain transistor.
4,393,356
FILTER CIRCUIT FOR ELECTRIC WAVES
Friedrich L. Kuenemund, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Siemens Aktiengeseilschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 630,932, Nov. 11, 1975, abandoned.
This application May 21, 1980, Ser. No. 151,772
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 12,
1974, 2453669
Int. a.3 H03H 11/04, 17/00
U.S. a. 333—165 6 Qaims
1. An electrical filter comprising, input and output lines
having pairs of input and output terminals, a first charge cou-
pled device having a plurality of charge storage cells each of a
first charge storage capacity with its input connected to one
input terminal of said input line and its output connected to the
other input terminal of said input line, a pulse generator pro-
ducing "n" phase related pulse trains at a certain frequency and
supplying inputs to said charge storage cells of said first charge
coupled device to move charges therethrough, a second
charge coupled device having a plurality of charge storage
cells of different or the same storage capacity as the storage
cells of said first and second charge coupled devices with its
output connected to its input, a pulse generator producing "n"
phase related pulse trains at a certain frequency and supplying
inputs to said cells of said third charge coupled device to move
charges therethrough, one of the storage cells of said third
charge coupled device coupled to said first non-directional
coupling element and another of the storage cells of said third
charge coupled device coupled to said second non-directional
coupling element.
4,393,357
HIGH SPEED TRANSIENT RECORDER SYSTEMS
Thomas E. Linnenbrink, Winnetka, and David A. Gradl, Des
Plaines, both of III., assignors to Q-Dot, Inc., Des Plaines, III.
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,292
Int. C\? GllC 27/00; HOIL 29/78; GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 333—165 12 Qaims
Hf-^
1. An integrated circuit device for recording transient data
signals comprising,
charge transfer channel means for providing a plurality of
charge potential wells at a plurality of sampling sites
disposed along a charge transfer channel, and for transfer-
ring charge carrier packets along said channel,
an electrical transient data signal transmission line means
disposed at least in part along said transfer channel means
at said sampling sites, for receiving an electrical transient
data signal to be recorded and for propagating said electri-
cal transient data signal successively to each of said plural-
ity of sampling sites such that said electrical transient data
signal propagated thereon is distributed along said trans-
mission line means to apply the electric field of said tran-
sient data signal distributed thereon to charge carriers at
each respective sampling site, and
means for transferring and isolating charge carriers at a
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
793
selected sampling time when a transient data signal to be
recorded is distributed along said transmission line at each
of said charge potential wells in response to the transient
data signal potential provided by said transmission line
means at each of said respective sampling sites to thereby
provide charge packets of charge carriers disposed along
said charge transfer channel which record said electrical
transient data signal.
4,393,358
SURFACE WAVE ACOUSTIC DEVICE WITH
COMPENSATION FOR DIFFRACTION EFFECTS
Adrian J. De Vries, Mount Prospect, III., assignor to Zenith
Radio Corporation, Glenview, III.
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,331
Int. a.3 H03H 9/145, 9/64, 9/42
U.S. Q. 333—194 12 Qaims
1. A surface wave acoustic device adapted to be employed in
an environment where it receives a surface acoustic signal
including a desired frequency component having wave fronts
substantially parallel to a selected direction and an undesired
frequency component having wave fronts at a substantial angle
to said selected direction, said device comprising:
a primary array and a secondary array of finger pairs, each
of said pairs having respective lengths interdigitated with
each other whereby to function as respective elemental
electro-acoustic transducers;
said interdigitated lengths of said finger pairs of said primary
array being oriented substantially parallel to said selected
direction, and those of said secondary array being oriented
substantially parallel to said wave fronts of said undesired
frequency component;
and an electrical circuit including means electrically con-
necting said primary and secondary arrays so that their
instantaneous outputs add phasorially;
said secondary array being positioned relative to said pri-
mary array so as to be substantially in electrical phase
opposition thereto whereby the response of said second-
ary array to said undesired frequency component tends to
compensate for the response of said primary array thereto.
4,393,359
ELECTROMAGNETIC RELAY
Gary W. Schreiner, Sterling; Merle L. Kemp, Jr., Prophetstown,
both of III., and Edward A. Chernoff, Brookville, N.Y., assign-
ors to Products Unlimited Corp., Sterling, III.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,323
Int. Q.3 HOIH 51/08
U.S. Q. 335—128 5 Qalms
1. An electromagnetic relay comprising in combination,
an insulating base member,
an electromagnetic coil mounted on said base member,
an armature means pivotally mounted to said base member
with one end portion movable between upper and lower
positions in response to the energization and denergization
of said coil,
spring means biasing said armature into one of said positions,
a contact carrier post affixed to said one end portion of said
armature and extending upwardly therefrom,
first and second contacts mounted to said base on opposite
sides of said armature,
a lower contact carrier blade slidably mounted on said post
and carrying a pair of contacts adapted to respectively
engage said first and second contacts when said armature
is in said lower position.
first and second upstanding abutment guide means integral
with said base member and respectively disposed on oppo-
site sides of said armature for limiting lateral movement
thereof and for limiting rotational movement of said lower
contact carrier blade.
first and second contact carrier brackets mounted to said
base and respectively carrying third and fourth contacts in
spaced, vertical ahgnment with said first and second
contacts,
an upper contact carrier blade slidably mounted on said post
and carrying a pair of upper contacts adapted to respec-
tively engage said third and fourth contacts when said
armature is in said upper position, and
a compression spring compressed between said upper and
lower contact carrier blades to urge said blades in mutu-
ally spaced apart relationship.
4,393,360
ELECTRICAL SWITCH STRUCTURE
Kaneyasu Arakawa, and Shigeo Mizuno, both of Nagoya, Japan,
assignors to Kabushiki-Kaisha Tokai-Rika-Denki-Seisakusho,
Aichi, Japan
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 268,092
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 27, 1980, 55-
72003[U]
Int. Q.3 HOIH 9/20
U.S. Q. 335—164 5 Qaims
1. An electrical switch comprising:
a lever rotatably mounted in a case for movement between a
neutral position and an actuated position,
a switch member positioned in said case comprising a pair of
normally open contacts,
means on said lever to close said contacts when said lever
moves to said actuated position,
latch means to hold said lever in said actuated position com-
prising a first, central detent portion and at least one other
detent portion juxtaposed to said first portion,
spring biased roller means carried by said lever to engage
said first detent portion when the lever is in said neutral
|X>sition and to engage said other detent portion when in
said actuated position, and
794
OFFICIAL GAZETTE -
July 12, 1983
solenoid means to move said latch means to return said lever 4,393,362
from said actuated position to said neutral position when ELECTROMAGNETIC INDICATOR HAVING A ROTOR
DISPOSABLE IN DISCRETE POSITIONS
Alfred Skrobisch, Commack, N.Y., assignor to The Staver Com-
pany, Inc., Bay Shore, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,309
Int. a.^ HOIF 7/08, 7/14
U.S. a. 335—272 10 Oaims
required to return said contacts to said normally open
condition.
4,393,361
VARIABLE MAGNETICALLY BIASED LINEARITY
CONTROL
Stanley K. Hortun, McHenry, III., assignor to Prem Magnetics,
Inc., McHenry, III.
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,817
Int. a.' HOIF 1/00
U.S. a. 335—212 5 Qaims
1. A variable magnetically biased linearity coil assembly for
use such as with a cathode ray tube display device, comprising,
in combination, an essentially I-shaped core, a coil wound on
said core, a first permanent magnet stationarily mounted adja-
cent one end of said I-shaped core, a second permanent magnet
mounted adjacent the opposite end of said core, said first and
second magnets providing a magnetic field having fiux lines
extending through said core, a non-magnetizable support
mounted adjacent said one end of said core, a cylindrically
shaped element having a magnetized substantially flat surface
thereon mounted on said support in spaced relation to said core
and said magnets with said magnetized flat surface facing said
core and said magnet, a mounting shaft extending outwardly
from said support in a direction transverse to the axis of said
I-shaped core for mounting said element in rotatable relation to
said core and said magnets, and rotatable adjustment of said
element selectively adjusting the magnetic strength of said
second magnet to thereby provide an adjustable linearity coil.
38 KJ!
H
K
H
1. An indicator device having two stable positions compris-
ing:
a stator having a stationary elongated reversable polarity
permanent magnet core;
means for reversing polarity of said permanent magnet core;
a rotor carried by said stator and having a magnet disposed
adjacent to said core, said rotor being turnable angularly
on an axis perpendicular to said elongated core from one
of said stable positions to the second of said stable posi-
tions upon reversing polarity of said permanent magnet
core;
said magnet having two magnetic poles each of which is
located on the same side of a diameter of said rotor which
diameter passes through said elongated core at each of
said stable positions so that reversing polarity of said core
will produce reverse turning movements of said magnet;
and
stop means carried by said stator and rotor and arranged for
selective engagement so that rotation of said rotor is
stopped at one of said stable positions in its angular move-
ment where both of said poles are spaced from said core
with one of said poles closest to said core attracted mag-
netically to said core while said stop means prevent rota-
tion and vibratory movements of said rotor.
4,393,363
MAGNET BASE FOR TOOL
Hiroshi Iwasaki, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Fuju Jiko Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,442
Int. Q\? HOIF 7/20
U.S. a. 335—288 6 Qaims
II 13 12
20
18 b
18
•t^? s-^-.- I
18 a
13 22 21
\.
1. A magnet base for a tool comprising: a cylindrical ferrite
magnet having N and S poles respectively on both sides of a
plane including the central axis of said magnet; a yoke having
a cylindrical hole in which said magnet is rotatably fitted, said
yoke being made up of two parts which are respectively posi-
tioned on opposite sides of a plane in parallel with the central
axis of said hole, said two parts being joined together with a
non-magnetic-permeable metal material; and a handle unit
engaged with said magnet, said handle unit having a handle on
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
795
the outside thereof to turn said magnet, which magnet base
comprises:
said cylindrical ferrite magnet having a sectional area sub-
stantially filling said cylindrical hole formed by said yoke;
said two parts of said yoke being fabricated from a magnetic
metal material;
a stopper protruded from the inner surface of said cylindri-
cal hole;
a cut formed in the peripheral portion of said handle unit in
such a manner that said cut is engaged with said stopper as
said handle unit turns;
said magnet base being placed in "oft" state when said cut is
engaged with said stopper by turning said handle unit in
one direction, and said magnet base being placed in "on"
state by turning said handle unit in the opposite direction
to engage said cut with said stopper; wherein
said stopper is so positioned that, when said cut is engaged
with said stopper by turning said handle unit in said oppo-
site direction, attraction takes place between said yoke and
said magnet to push said cut against said stopper.
4,393,364
COIL ELEMENT
Takayuki Suda, Kisakata, and Koichi Yasuda, Nishime, both of
Japan, assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,456
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1980, 55-
132248[U]
Int. Cl.^ HOIF 15/02, 15/10
U.S. CI. 336—65 4 Claims
f
•^
1. A coil element comprising a drum-shaped ferrite core on
which a coil is wound, magnetic members each made of a
magnetic and electrically conductive metal and formed so as to
fit to the outer surface of said drum-shaped ferrite core and
spaced from each other so as to be electrically insulated from
each other, and connection terminals forming a part of said
magnetic members connected to the ends of said coil.
' ' 4,393,365
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR FORECASTING AND
WARNING ON AUTOMOTIVE ABNORMALITIES
Nobuo Kondo, Anjo; Masanori Naganoma; Hitoshi Hibi, both of
Kariya; Tetsuo Fujii, Toyohashi, and Kunihiko Suzuki, Ka-
riya, all of Japan, assignors to Nippondenso Co., Ltd., Kariya,
Japan
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,710
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 7, 1980, 55-92924
Int. a.' B60Q 5/00
U.S. a. 340—57 10 Claims
1. An automotive abnormality forecasting and warning
method comprising the steps of:
detecting the condition of an inspection item of the automo-
bile and generating a detection signal according to said
condition;
generating an alarm display and a voice alarm on said abnor-
mal item in response to a decision that said detection signal
has exceeded a predetermined value;
calculating the change rate of said detection signal when said
detection signal is smaller than the predetermined value;
and
1LJP 3
*tKJU»#^T»
.- * %<«nR J mi
. ^WM '^.4
A2 i
a^
J^n A'CHAT.*' Mjr
forecasting an abnormality and displaying an alarm on the
basis of the trend of deterioration of the inspection item by
the use of said change rate and said detection signal.
4,393,366
ROTATING BEAM OCULAR IDENTIFICATION
APPARATUS AND METHOD
Robert B. Hill, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Eye-D Development
II Ltd., Portland, Oreg.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,150
Int. C\J G06K 9/00: A61B 3/10
U.S. CI. 382—2 26 Claims
• i. «• M an M Kf .^1. -M -M n •« .M i.9 ;«• ^s*
■^l * I
Ik
70
Y^ t'tvifv^y^^^'^^^^
1. Apparatus for recording an identification pattern from the
fundus of an eye, comprising:
(a) a light source operable to produce a substantially colum-
nar source beam of light;
(b) beam directing means for directing at least a portion of
the source beam into the eye from a plurality of sequential
angularly divergent positions, the light substantially fo-
cusing on the fundus of the eye and being refiected in part
out of the eye forming a refiected beam;
(c) detector means for sequentially sensing the amount of
light in the refiected beam at each angularly divergent
position of the source beam; and
(d) means for recording the amounts of light thus sensed to
form an identification pattern.
796
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4,393,367
DIGITAL COMPANDOR HAVING NONLINEAR
COMPANDING CHARACTERISTICS
RikJo Manita, and Atsushi Tomozawa, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 934,985, Aug. 18, 1978. This application
Aug. 24, 1979, Ser. No. 69,384
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 22, 1977, 52-100927
Int. a.5 H04L 3/00
U.S. a. 340—347 DD 2 Qaims
,~
01
02
a»
e|M)04
05
0«
1. A digital compandor for converting linear code signal into
a nonlinear code signal, said linear code having a polarity bit
which is representative of the polarity of each sample value of
the original analog signal and a plurality of absolute value bits
which are representative of the absolute value of the sample,
said nonlinear code having said polarity bit, a plurality of
segment bits which identify one of a predetermined number of
segments to which said sample value of the original signal
belongs and mantissa bits which are indicative of the position
of said sample value in said segment, said compandor compris-
ing: a plurality of input terminal means for receiving said linear
code signal; a first read-only memory means addressable by a
first bit group including a predetermined plurality of bits
among said absolute value bits for memorizing a first segment
bit decision rule and a first mantissa bit decision rule by which
said plurality of segment bits and said plurality of mantissa bits
are respectively determined responsive to said first bit group; a
second read-only memory means addressable by a second bit
group including another plurality of bits among said absolute
bits and having some bits in common with said first bit group
for memorizing a second segment bit decision rule and a sec-
ond mantissa bit decision rule by which said plurality of seg-
ment bits and said plurality of mantissa bits are respectively
determined responsive to said second bit group; and means for
selecting said first or second read-only memory means resjxjn-
sive to selected bits of said first bit group.
4,393,368
MULTTTHRESHOLD A/D CONVERTER UTILIZING
ERROR AMPLIHERS
Eriing E. Rasmussen, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Motorola Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
FUed May 16, 1980, Ser. No. 150,502
Int. a.3 H03K 13/02
U.S. a. 340—347 AD 20 Qaims
1. A multithreshold A/D converter comprising:
a plurality of primary comparison means each for comparing
a selected threshold reference voltage level with a given
analog input signal level; and
a plurality of error amplifiers each of said error amplifiers
coupled to a threshold reference voltage level intermedi-
ate those threshold reference levels utilized by adjacent
pairs of said plurality of comparison means, a selected one
of said error amplifiers outputting a signal differential of
P
SAMPLE AND
HOLD
r, 10^
»V,.-.
-Vr-
<.Sf^.^-^^^
t3
T
E-IS
E-4
C-3
E-3
C-2
E-2
C-l
E-l
F^l>^
UJ
r u
z
14
n
zWq
19^
92M
<<
UJ
l/>
ODQ
(/)0
_IU
z
18'
17-
rrrr-
'lsb '
frrr;
MSB
said intermediate threshold reference voltage level and
said given analog input signal level.
4,393,369
FLOATING-POINT A/D AND D/A CONVERTER
Kirk E. Davies, San Diego, Calif., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,985
Int. Q.3 H03K 13/02
U.S. Q. 340—347 AD 2 Qaims
..vZ-
n
i
^-J^H^
FLOATING
POINT
PROCESSING
-. ^
MULTIPLYING
p/A CONVERTER,
RCCR of MAGNITUDE
CURRENT SOURCE
MULTIPLYING
0/A CONVERTER
MANTISSA
CURRENT SOURCE
c=
1. An apparatus for producing digital signals indicative of a
floating decimal point representation of widely ranging input
analog signals in a delta modulation servo loop comprising: -
a serially connected resistor coupled to receive the input
analog signals for assuring that the input analog signal is
an input analog current signal;
an operational amplifier having a resistive feedback loop to
produce a positive voltage and negative voltage coupled
to the serially connected resistor for comparing the analog
current signal with a derived reference signal to produce
the negative voltage if the analog current signal exceeds
the derived reference siangl and the positive voltage if the
analog current signal is less than the derived reference
signal, the derived reference current is subtracted from
the input signal current therefore resulting in small cur-
rents and voltages for the system to operate on;
an inverter circuit coupled to the operational amplifier for
generating a logic signal representative of a positive volt-
age and a logic signal representative of a negative voltage;
an interconnected floating point processing unit and micro-
processor coupled to the inverter circuit for providing a
first group of digital signals indicative of the mantissa and
a second group of digital signals indicative of the order of
magnitude;
a first high speed multiplying digital-to-analog converter
coupled to a reference potential source and coupled to the
providing means for converting the first group of mantissa
digital signals to a mantissa component of the derived
reference signal;
a second high speed multiplying digital-to-analog converter
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
797
coupled to a reference potential source and coupled to the
interconnected floating point processing unit and micro-
processor for converting the second group of order of
magnitude digital signals to an order of magnitude compo-
^ nent of the derived reference signal;
means coupled to the first and second high speed multiply-
ing digital-to-analog converters for multiplying the man-
tissa component and the order of magnitude component
into the derived reference signal and for feeding the de-
rived reference signal and input analog current signal to
the comparing means;
means coupled to receive the first and second groups of
digital signals for passing them to user components;
means for feeding in a current signal to the operational
amplifier when the widely ranging input analog signals are
current signals; and
means for amplifying and inverting the derived reference
current coupled between the outputs of the first and sec-
ond high speed multiplying digital-to-analog converters
and operational amplifier.
4,393,371
ANALOGUE TO DIGITAL SIGNAL CONVERSION AND
STORAGE SYSTEM
Peter J. Morgan-Smith, Hatfield, England, assignor to Morgan-
Smith Electronics Ltd., Hatfield Herts., England
Continuation of Ser. No. 45,604, Jun. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,232
Int. a.3 H03K 13/02
U.S. Q. 340—347 AD H Qaims
«N»LOOUf ,
■ VE OFFSET
MONOSTABlE
OSCILLATQO
-+
M >JENABU
UP/DOWf,
UATCM
DATA OUTPUTS
1- An analogue-to-digital signal conversion and storage
4 393 370 system including means for sampling the analogue signal at
DIGITAL TO ANALOG CONVERTER USING MATRIX OF successive time intervals and producing at each sample a digi-
CURRENT SOURCES *^' ^'S"^'- '^^ interval between successive samples being de-
Kyuichi Hareyama, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Pendent upon the rate of change of amplitude of the analogue
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,711
Int. CV H03K 13/02
U.S. Q. 340—347 DA
signal during said time interval, timing means for determining
the time interval between successive samples, storage means
including a data buffer to which data from the system is sup-
13 Qaims plied and from which data is applied to a recording means, the
speed at which data is stored in the recording means being
variable, and means for producing a control signal for adjust-
ing said speed in response to the amount of data stored in the
buffer, said signal being arranged to prevent overload of the
buffer.
4,393,372
PARALLEL ANALOG-TO-DIGITAL CONVERTER
Wolfgang Hoehn, Kirchzarten, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,295
Int. Q.3 H03K 13/02
U.S. Q. 340—347 AD 2 Qaims
..^
1. A semiconductor circuit comprising an output terminal; a
plurality of current switch cells arrayed in a plurality of rows
and columns, each of said cells including a current terminal, a
current source and switch means coupled between the current
terminal and current source and generating a current at the
current terminal when selected; means for connecting the
current terminals of said cells to said output terminal in com-
mon; means for receiving a plurality of digital signals; first
means responsive to a first part of said digital signals for select-
ing a number of rows in accordance with said first part of said
digital, and second means responsive to a second part of said
digital signals for selecting the columns, whereby a number of 1. In a parallel analog-to-digital converter with p = 2''— 1
cells corresponding to the value of said digital signals are comparators, where r is the number of bits of the (r-(-l)-bit
simultaneously selected and currents from the selected cells are converter output signal diminished by 1, and the analog signal
derived at said output terminal. is applied to either the noninverting or inverting input of each
798
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
comparator and the other of said comparator inputs being
connected consecutively to the taps of a resistive voltage
divider consisting of equal-value resistors and having a refer-
ence voltage (Ur) applied thereto, wherein the analog signal is
shifted by AU = Ur/2''+' for the duration of every second
clock period of the converter clock signal, and wherein the
comparator outputs are connected to a digital encoder fol-
lowed by a buffer memory, wherein the improvement com-
prises:
a pair of transistors having their emitters connected;
a resistor connected between the collectors of the two tran-
sistors, with the analog signal being applied to the appro-
priate comparator inputs through said resistor;
a constant current source disposed in the emitter path of the
pair of transistors, the base of one of the transistors being
supplied with a fixed potential, and the base of the other
transistor being fed with a clock signal having one-half the
frequency of the converter clock signal, the value of the
resistor being chosen in accordance with the equation
R = AU/I-=2-<''+') Ur/I, where I is the strength of the
constant current source; and
an exclusive-OR gate having inputs being provided with the
least significant bit at the output of the digital encoder and
the corresponding bit at the output of the buffer memory,
whereby the gate output provides a signal that functions
as the least significant bit of the output signal of the paral-
lel analog-to-digital converter.
4,393,373
PIEZOELECTRIC AUDIBLE SOUND GENERATOR
Michihiro Torii, Hamamatsu; Kohei Hirukawa, Kosai; Hiroshi
Urata, Aichi, and Shinichi Suzuki, Hamamatsu, all of Japan,
assignors to Fuji Electrochemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,743
Int. Cl.^ G08B 3/00: HOIL 41/04
U.S. a. 340—384 E 5 Claims
; RT
'I ;
os;
Xi
l|R.
•
♦
♦
|R.
^Rl2
>* "'s ;
• <l
• 1
Ci
02
;
04 •
«.
oe
\
V ,
• AVt
i *>■
> RK)
JD'
— ~
—
— " (
vc
4,393,374
LOW POWER SIREN
Bojan Bandelj, Skofja Loka, Yugoslavia, assignor to ISKRA-
SOZD elektrokovinske industrije n.sol.o., Ljubljana, Yugo-
slavia
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,842
Claims priority, application Yugoslavia, Mar. 24, 1980,
816/80
Int. a.^ G08B 3/00; GIOK 7/04
U.S. a. 340—405 5 Qaims
1. A low power siren comprising:
a first casing;
a motor disposed in said first casing and having an output
shaft protruding from said first casing;
a second casing having an inlet end defining a nozzle for
admitting air into the interior thereof, said walls, and
openings formed in the side walls for egress of air from the
interior of said second casing;
means for interconnecting said first and said second casings;
and
a rotor disposed in said second casing, said rotor having a
hub connected to said shaft, a plurality of air cutters hav-
ing circumferentially extending portions extending around
the periphery of said rotor, and ribs merging with said air
cutters for directly connecting central portions of the
circumferentially extending portions of the air cutters
with said hub whereby air drawn into said second casing
through said nozzle by rotation of said rotor passes said air
cutters generating noise and exits said ' second casing
through said side wall openings, said air cutters and said
ribs being positioned on one surface of said rotor and a
plurality of low ribs extending outwardly from an op-
posed surface of said rotor, said low ribs being equally
circumferentially spaced around the periphery of said
rotor and contributing to the noise generated by rotation
of said rotor.
1. A piezoelectric audible sound generator comprising:
a self oscillator including a piezoelectric transducer which
includes inherent equivalent capacitance between first and
second electrodes thereof, amplifier means connected to
said first and second electrodes for driving said piezoelec-
tric transducer to oscillate at a predetermined frequency
and in a predetermined phase, said amplifier means includ-
ing inherent bias resistance therein which when combined
with said inherent capacitance, produces a phase shift
between the driving frequency of said amplifier and the
frequency of oscillation of said transducer, and a feedback
circuit for transferring a feedback signal from a third
electrode of said piezoelectric transducer to said amplifier
means, and
phase compensator means interposed between said third
electrode and said feedback circuit for adjusting the phase
shift such that said feedback signal from said third elec-
trode is 170°- 190° out of phase relative to a signal from
said driving electrode.
4,393,375
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR COPYING APPARATUS
Masamichi Sugiura, Toyokawa, and Kenji Shibazaki, Aichi, both
of Japan, assignors to Minolta Camera Co., Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,592
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 15, 1979, 54-148633
Int. aj G06F 9/06; G03B 27/34
U.S. a. 340—700 16 Qaims
1. In a reproduction machine for producing paper copies of
original documents having the capacity of providing discrete
operating features such as providing one or more copies, vary-
ing the magnification of a copy, changing the size of the copy
paper and changing the image density, the improvement in-
cluding a control system comprising:
an information display member;
means for sequentially displaying an identification of dis-
crete operating features of the reproduction machine on
the same display member;
memory means for storing a predetermined set of first com-
mand signals for each discrete operating feature;
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
799
operator controlled input means for selectively generating
second input command signals relative to specific operat-
ing features;
means for coordinating a particular operating feature that is
identified on the display member with a specific second
input command signal;
means for storing the specific second input command signals,
and
21 22 23 24 25
17
1 1 III / LfiZTvi, 'iilSSa- 2
till
PAPER SIZE
f^
EJ i^M^PimJiMjmm
means for altering the predetermined set of first command
signals by replacing any individual predetermined first
command signal with a corresponding operator generated
second input command signal to subsequently cause the
reproduction machine to be activated in response to the
predetermined set of first command signals as altered by
the operator generated second input command signals.
4,393,376
TELETEXT INTERFACE FOR DIGITAL STORAGE
MEDIUM HAVING SYNTHETIC VIDEO GENERATOR
William L. Thomas, Northbrook, III., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glenview, 111.
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,293
Int. CV G09G 1/16
U.S. a. 340-717 12 Claims
I COM
■ cownsiOM
BOM
'7.
faft»' AMD
«0M
1. An interface circuit for use with a television receiver and
means storing a plurality of digitally encoded signals each
representing a selected text/graphics character intended for
transmission as a corresponding video signal during the active
scanning lines of a standard television signal comprising:
means converting each of said digitally encoded signals to a
teletext encoded signal representing a corresponding
text/graphics character;
means arranging said teletext encoded signals in a plurality
of standard teletext formatted data rows;
means inserting in time multiplexed manner each of said
teletext formatted data rows in a respective teletext line of
said television signal;
means amplitude modulating said television signal including
said video signal and said teletext lines on a television
channel RF carrier; and
means for coupling said modulated television signal to the
antenna terminals of said television receiver, whereby a
television receiver having a built-in teletext type decoder
is operable in response to said teletext formatted data rows
for displaying said selected text/graphics characters in a
relatively high quality form and a standard television
receiver is operable in response to the video signal com-
prising said active scanning lines for displaying said text/-
graphics characters in a poorer quality form.
4,393,377
CIRCUIT FOR CONTROLLING INFORMATION ON A
DISPLAY
Robert A. Couper, Sunnyvale; John K. Frediani, Santa Cruz, and
Terrance L. Lillie, Palo Alto, all of Calif., assignors to Pitney
Bowes Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 177,322
Int. Cl.^ G06F 3/153
U.S. CI. 340-731 14 Qaims
1. A circuit for cont4-olling the display of characters on a
display, said characters being selected from a preselected set of
characters in response to character signal information, com-
prising:
(a) a character latch for latching character information, said
character latch energized by said character signal informa-
tion;
(b) a row counter energized by line synchronization signal
information;
(c) means comprising a first and a second character generator
which stores an output of visual representational informa-
tion regarding the characters in said set, said first and said
second character generator coupled to said character latch
and said row counter, so that said character information and
the row count define the output of said generators;
(d) width generator means for storage and output of width
information regarding the width of the characters in said set
coupled to said character latch so that said character infor-
mation defines the width output;
(e) a first parallel input/serial output shift register and a second
parallel input/serial output shift register for generating first
and second serial outputs respectively, said first shift register
input coupled to said first character generator output and
said second shift register input coupled to said second char-
acter generator output;
(0 synchronizer means coupled to said first and said second
shift registers for generating synchronized video-output
signals corresponding to the bit by bit interleaving of said
serial output signals for applications to said display, whereby
a predetermined visual representation corresponding to a
horizontal segment of the characters defined by said charac-
ter information is displayed on a line of said display;
(g) a width counter means, coupled to be energized by said
width generator means, for generating an output signal
indicating that the character width has been scanned, said
output signal from said counter means coupled to said char-
acter latch and said synchronizer means to initiate latching
800
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
of new character signal information and display of the next
character.
4,393,378
GENERATION OF A LIGHT INTENSITY CONTROL
SIGNAL
Petter Danielsen, Schwerte, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Tor
Moen, Oslo, Norway, assignors to Tandberg Data A/S, Nor-
way
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,372
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 29,
1980, 3036737
Int. a.3 G06F 3/14
U.S. a. 340—744 6 Qaims
^
^
play update means for loading display data into said shift regis-
ter means, display refresh means including data inversion
means for recirculating data stored in said shift register means,
switch means for selectively operating said update and refresh
means, clock means for shifting data stored in said shift register
means and means synchronized to the clock means for transfer-
ring the bit parallel data from said shift register to be displayed
as a stationary image on said LCD.
4,393,380
LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY SYSTEMS
Minoni Hosokawa; Masayuki Ikeda, and Satoru Yazawa, all of
Suwa, Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Scikosha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 28, 1980, Ser. No. 153,973
Claims priority, application Japan, May 28, 1979, 54-65914;
May 28, 1979, 54-65915
Int. a.^ G09G 3/36
U.S. a. 340—805 18 Oaims
1. A system for generation of a light intensity control signal
for a video amplifier of a data display device connected with a
video signal on a video signal line and a pulse generator by
which characters are displayed by use of horizontal bright
lines, vertical rows of bright points, and also blanks, compris-
ing: a converter means connected with the video amplifier for
providing a light intensity control signal with differentiatable
analog output values to the video amplifier; a detector device
means connected with the video signal line and the converter
means for identification of a signal sequence associated with a
line, a point or a blank; and said detector device means includ-
ing first delay means for delaying the video signal by two clock
pulse periods of clock pulses of said pulse generator, and com-
parator means for providing to the converter means a signal
increasing the light intensity only upon recognition of a por-
tion of the video signal which corresponds to a bright point
arranged between two directly adjacent blanks.
4,393,379
NON-MULTIPLEXED LCD DRIVE aRCUIT
John P. Berting, 13 Fleetwood Rd., Newark, N.J. 07106, and
James K. Kroeger, 319 Radel Ter., South Orange, N.J. 07079
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 243,973
Int. a? G09G 3/36
U.S. a. 340—784 7 Qaims
^
Slim SMifT RCGsna simi I / 4
Ml/ OM
maiatm cua
aunt
1. A liquid crystal display (LCD) drive circuit using recircu-
lating shift register means for generating bit parallel output
data to be applied to an LCD for display as a stationary image
by repetitively recirculating a number of bits corresponding to
a number of stages of said register means and, upon completion
of each recirculation of bits, transferring the contents of said
register means to said LCD, the drive circuit comprising dis-
^ 1
mm:.-.,
l^fe-i
I seo9ce
1. A liquid crystal display circuit comprising:
a plurality of liquid crystal picture elements, said picture
elements being arranged in a fixed pattern, each picture
element having a picture element electrode and an op-
posed common electrode, the common electrodes of all
said picture elements being connected to a common poten-
tial;
means for selecting picture elements for display of an image
signal, each said picture element electrode being con-
nected to said means for selecting;
a plurality of capacitors, one capacitor associated with each
said picture element, one terminal of each said capacitor
being coupled to the picture element electrode of the
associated picture element, the other terminal of said
capacitor being coupled to one of a plurality of common
capacitor electrodes, a plurality of said capacitors being
connected to every common capacitor electrode;
voltage means, said voltage means being adapted to output a
plurality of voltage levels, said voltage levels changing
periodically, said common capacitor electrodes and said
commonly connected capacitor terminals being con-
nected periodically to the output of said voltage means,
said changing voltage levels at said common capacitor
electrodes providing an AC voltage on said picture ele-
ment electrodes relative to said common picture elec-
- trodes at said common potential.
4,393,381
TRANSFER BUS MATRIX
Lewis J. Seiden, Tappan, N.Y., assignor to T-Bar Incorporated,
Wilton, Conn.
FUed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,064
Int. a.3 H04J 6/00; H04Q 9/00
U.S. a. 340—825.83 20 Claims
1. A transfer bus matrix switching system for connecting
selected input ports to selected output ports whereby multiple
signals may be sequentially carried by the bus comprising:
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
801
a bidirectional transmission line transfer bus providing a
common parallel multi-line channel for all signals;
a plurality of input bidirectional channels connected to the
bus by individual gate means providing input ports;
a plurality of output bidirectional channels connected to the
bus by individual gate means providing output ports; and
' $TMC IMTRICCHTI M VIOL MATIKXaW
control means independent of the bus and input and output
ports for selectively activating an input port and at least
one output port contemporaneously and sequentially con-
necting such selected ports via the transfer bus.
4,393,382
DIRECTION nNDING AND RANGING SYSTEM FOR
I LOCATING SCANNING EMITTERS
William R. Jones, Kent, Wash., assignor to The Boeing Com-
pany, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 144,166
Int. Q\? GOIS n/00, 3/48
U.S. a. 343—112 D 17 Qaims
*^ roim-/ e
1. An Apparatus for passively locating a distant scanning
source of radiant energy transmission, comprising:
first, second and third receiving devices arranged in a spatial
array that forms a triangle in which said devices are lo-
cated at the apexes of said triangle having a side desig-
nated AB between said first and second receiving devices,
a side AC between said first and third receiving devices
and a side BC between said second and third receiving
devices, wherein the lengths of said sides are Us, Uc. IflC.
respectively and the interior angles at the apexes are a
associated with said first device, /3 associated with said
second device and y associated with said third device,
each of said devices being responsive to the receipt of said
radiant energy transmission to produce an electrical signal
representative thereof such that when said array is ori-
ented generally coplanar with a scan sweep of said trans-
mission, the resulting electrical signals from at least two
differently constituted pairs of said devices have a measur-
able time differential;
time differential signal processing means coupled to said
devices for producing at least first and second time differ-
ential signals representing said measurable time differen-
tials associated with said two differently constituted pairs
of devices; and
at least a first angle of arrival processor means having inputs
coupled to receive said first and second time differential
signals and having an output, said first angle of arrival
processor means producing at said output a first signal
representing a first angular direction at which said trans-
mission arrives at said array measured as the following
function of said first and second time differential signals
which are respectively represented by \ab and \.bc
<J>I (/■'«• tAB. IBC) = tan
Ub ibccx 0
'AB 1«C
- ctn^
wherein <t>i is an angle referenced to the side of said triangle
designated AB and represents said first angular direction.
4,393,383
MOBILE ANTENNA MOUNTING ASSEMBLY
Koji Yamashita, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,062
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 16, 1979,
54/15976G[U]; Nov. 16, 1979, 54/159761[U]
Int. a.3 HOIQ 1/32. 1/10
U.S. a. 343—903 5 Qaims
1. A mobile antenna mount comprising a telescoping antenna
means, upper and lower hemispherical bushing means having
at least a bottom portion for positioning above and below a
body panel for supporting said antenna, a bore extending
through said bushing means with sufficient angular clearance
to enable an adjustment of said antenna position on said panel,
flexible coupling means between said antenna and said bushing
means to enable a deflection of said antenna responsive to a
mechanical force acting upon said antenna, flexible co-axial
cable means free of contact pressure directly extending from
the bottom of said telescoping antenna means for conveying
signals between said antenna and equipment associated there-
with, and an elongated encasing means extendmg downwardly
from said lower hemispherical bushing for receiving said tele-
scoping antenna when in a retracted position, said coaxial cable
being movable within said encasing means to enable said an-
802
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
tenna to telescope between an extended and a retracted posi-
tion.
4,393,384
INK PRINTHEAD DROPLET EJECTING TECHNIQUE
Edmond L. Kyser, Portola Valley, Calif., assignor to System
Industries Inc., Milpitas, Calif.
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 271,015
Int. aj GOID 15/16
U.S. a. 346—1.1 2 Qaims
pendent upon the pulse width — pulse amplitude product
of said pulsed excitation signal; and
signal generating means for generating said pulsed excitation
signal and for varying the pulse width — pulse amplitude
product of said signal, and thus the ink drop velocity, in
accordance with the desired ink drop print pattern and
with the presence or absence of an immediately preceding
ink drop.
4,393,386
INK JET PRINTING APPARATUS
Peter C. Di Giulio, Fairfield, Conn., assignor to Pitney Bowes
Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,339
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18, 5/26
U.S. a. 346—75 10 Qaims
1. A method of ejecting a controlled droplet of ink from the
nozzle of an ink jet printhead, wherein the nozzle is connected
to an enclosed chamber, comprising the steps of:
suddenly reducing the volume in said chamber to accelerate
the ink in said nozzle to the desired velocity;
suddenly increasing the volume in said chamber;
immediately reducing the volume in said chamber an
amount less than in said first volume reduction step in a
manner to maintain said ink at the desired velocity; and
increasing the volume in said chamber to eject a droplet of
ink, whereby the volume of ink in said droplet is a func-
tion of the duration of said second volume reduction step.
O^^gKjr^ Ir^^r
^■<" j ^Vjr^^saog \^ lb
4,393,385
CONTROLLABLE INK DROP VELOCITY TYPE INK-JET
PRINTER
Koichiro Jinnai, Kawasaki; Masanori Horike, Yokohama;
Kyuhachiro Iwasaki, Fujisawa, and Yutaka Kodama, Tokyo,
all of Japan, assignors to Ricoh Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 48,170, Jun. 13, 1979, Pat. No.
4,313,123. This application Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,630
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 21, 1978, 53-74172
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 26,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' GOID 15/18
U.S. CI. 346—75 1 Claim
- -1 _ti!SiI«l!2U5J!!S!«!aUL.Q5.iFU/iL
1. A deflection type ink-jet printer, comprising:
an ink drop generator for ejecting a stream of ink drops;
means for supplying ink to said generator;
velocity modulation means mounted on said generator for
varying the velocity of ink-drops ejected from said gener-
ator in accordance with the pulse width — pulse amplitude
product of a pulsed excitation signal;
means for charging the ink drops ejected from said genera-
tor;
means for deflecting the ink drops charged by said charging
means, the amount of deflection being dependent upon the
velocity with which said ink drops are ejected from said
generator, the amount of deflection therefore being de-
1. A computer controlled ink jet apparatus for printing a
sequence of sheets with relative movement in a first direction
between an ink jet apparatus and the sheets comprising:
an array of ink jet heads disposed to each eject ink drops
onto the relatively moving sheets, said ink jet heads each
having a plurality of ink ejecting orifices and being posi-
tioned along said first direction and displaced laterally
relative to one another and to said first direction to print
different lines of images on the sheets;
means for generating image signals representative of the ink
drops to be ejected by the ink jet heads for the formation
of lines of images on the sheets during relative motion
between the sheets and the ink jet heads;
storage means for storing image signals for respective ones
of said ink jet heads in the array;
means for generating sheet signals, each representative of
the arrival of a sheet at a location having a known distance
from the ink jet heads in the array; and
means responsive to the sheet signals for applying said stored
image signals to respective Inkjet heads for their actuation
in a predetermined timed relationship selected to print
lines of fmages on each sheet from the array of ink jet
heads at desired sheet locations.
4,393,387
BEAM RECORDING APPARATUS EFFECTING THE
RECORDING BY A PLURALITY OF BEAMS
Takashi Kitamura, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 184,146
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1979, 54-118246;
Jan. 10, 1980, 55-1571; Jan. 24, 1980, 55-7224; Jan. 24, 1980,
55-7231; Jun. 19, 1980, 55-83064; Jun. 24, 1980, 55-85574
Int. C1.3 GOID 15/4
U.S. CI. 346—108 6 Oaims
1. Beam recording apparatus for recording with a plurality
of beams, said apparatus comprising:
beam generating means for generating a plurality of beams
modulated with recording signals;
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
803
beam defiecting means for defiectmg the beams generated nably arranged to correspond to a latent magnetic image on a
by said beam generating means; surface of a magnetic medium to a receiving medium, the
beam irradiated means irradiated with the plurality of beams combination comprising means for establishing at least a first
defiected by said beam deflecting means; and pretransfer force of attraction (f,) including dectrostatic and
magnetic field forces between the toner and the magnetic
medium and drive means for effecting relatively high speed.
>
eljtrical scroALNfe "1 n n Hyo wn.i LnrLr
LICLIID DROPLET
Dlf'i^TER R
-IP-
-to-
O O C
O C
ro
O O
1. A liquid droplet projection apparatus comprising a liquid
droplet ejection nozzle, a liquid supply tank, an electro-
mechanical transducer section, interposed between said liquid
supply tank and said liquid droplet ejection nozzle, for chang-
ing its volume in accordance with an electrical signal applied
thereto to cause liquid droplets to be ejected from said liquid
droplet ejection nozzle, and liquid droplet diameter corrector
means in which when the pattern of said electrical signal ap-
plied to said electro-mechanical transducer section has an
interruption period longer than a predetermined duration and
at least three successive electrical signals are generated follow-
ing said interruption period, said correction means changes at
least selected one of the amplitude and width of the second one
of said successive electrical signals to produce a corrected
electrical signal which is larger in the selected one of the
amplitude and width as compared with the corresponding one
of the amplitude and width of the others of said electrical
signals.
4,393,389
MAGNETIC TONER TRANSFER METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Houshang Rasekhi, Convent Station, N.J., and Alfred M. Nel-
son, Redondo Beach, Calif., assignors to Wang Laboratories,
Inc., Lowell, Mass.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,526
Int. a.' GOID 15/06: G03G 15/16
U.S. a. 346—153.1 17 Qaims
10. A relatively high speed magnetic printing apparatus
providing letter quality transfer of toner particles predetermi-
■r-,*
i- 1
<5 47 , , .
41 i \ V- *'
I -Hi!
?5 '
:i-L
43
/
Hf
optical means for directing the beams generated by said
beam generating means to said beam irradiated means; and
rotating means for rotating said optical means and said beam
generating means as a single unit to vary the inclination of
the beams with respect to said beam irradiated means.
■A-
i |-
49 / -■>■ =
I t-<l >«GM
/■ ' • -BUS
u
4,393.388
LIQUID DROPLET PROJECTION APPARATUS
Yasumasa Matsuda, Hitachi; Kyoji Mukumoto, Katsuta; Syoji
Sagae, Hitachiota, and Masatoshi Kasahara, Hitachi, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd. and Hitachi, Ltd.,
both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No, 242,185
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1980, 55-29177
I Int. a.' G03B 15/18
U.S. a. 346—140 R . 3 Claims
generally perpendicular relative approaching and separating,
variable movement between the magnetic and receiving medi-
ums according to the relationship that the maximum force (f:)
exerted on the toner particles by air currents created by such
movement is less than the force (f|) for any instantaneous
separation between the magnetic and receiving mediums.
4,393,390
ELECTROSTATIC PRINTER
Kenji Aoki; Mitsuhiro Goto, and Teiji Miura, all of Suwa, Ja-
pan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha, Nagano,
Japan
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,149
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1979. 54-126085;
Sep. 28, 1979, 54-126086; Sep. 28, 1979, 54-126088
Int. a.' GOID 15/06
U.S. CI. 346—155 35 Qaims
1. An electrostatic printer for printing on an electrostatic
recording medium comprising an elongated electrode and a
back electrode spaced from said elongated electrode to define
a gap therebetween and adapted to permit the passage of said
electrostatic recording medium in said gap in a predetermined
direction, a gap-reducing member disposed in said gap and
extending essentially transverse to the predetermined direction
of passage of said recording medium, said gap-reducing mem-
ber being spaced from said back electrode to permit the pas-
sage of said recording medium therebetween, said recording
medium and said gap-reducing member being out of contact
with said elongated electrode, said gap-reducing member ef-
fectively reducing said gap at a point on said elongated elec-
trode, means for displacing said elongated electrode relative to
said back electrode so that said point on said elongated elec-
804
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
trode then defining said efTectively reduced gap is displaced
laterally of said direction of passage of said electrostatic re-
cording medium in response to the displacement of ^id elon-
gated electrode, and means for selectively applying a voltage
between said elongated electrode and said back electrode for
effecting printing on said electrostatic recording medium in
registration with the point on said elongated electrode then
defming said effectively reduced gap.
4^93,391
POWER MOS TRANSISTOR WITH A PLURALITY OF
LONGITUDINAL GROOVES TO INCREASE CHANNEL
CONDUCTING AREA
Richard A. Blanchard, Los Altos Hills, Calif., assignor to Super-
tex, Inc., Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Jan. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,778
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/78
U.S. a. 357—23 5 Qaims
44-
3
54
e^i'
-4C
44
-4C-
48
4C
1. A Semiconductor device comprising in combination:
a substrate having a substantially plane first major surface;
first and second spaced regions of a first conductivity typ>e
formed in said surface;
a third region of a second conductivity type opposite said
first conductivity type between said first and said second
regions at said surface;
a plurality of spaced groove regions in said major surface,
said groove regions being separated by portions of said
substrate coplanar with said first major surface, and said
grooves extending into each of said first, second, and third
regions;
a thin insulating layer over said third region both in said
grooves and across surface portions coplanar with said
first major surface; and
gate means over said insulating layer for controlling a con-
ductive surface channel between said first and second
regions in said grooves and at said first major surface.
4,393,392
HYBRID TRANSISTOR
Raymond L. Hale, Torrance, Calif., assignor to Power Hybrids,
Incorporated, Torrance, Calif.
FUed Jun. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 162,124
Int a.3 HOIL 2i/02. 27/02. 23/48
UJS. a. 357—74 21 Claims
7. A transistor package having an operating range of fre-
quencies, including:
a body member;
a plurality of metallized elements disf)osed on the body
member in spaced relationship to one another and defining
terminals including an input terminal, an output pad and a
reference area;
a transistor die disposed on the body member and defining a
transistor and having at least one input electrode con-
nected to the input terminal and at least one reference
electrode connected to the reference area,
the transistor die and the metallized elements being con-
structed and disposed relative to one another on the body
member to define an equivalent output circuit having a
capacitive reactance;
first means disposed on the body member in contiguous but
spaced relationship to the metallized elements to define a
capacitance; and
T
r-
I \ y: . ■ .-tr
/■
iM>
./<* \
ta
^^£H5^#%H35#id
^f;Ef;ffiK5E?e5BQCI
■ ilgil iFiilll II il 1' Jl L' 1) t
■^ — s
■j/s
■ja)4
^
\ \ \ i
/■JW
second means including a plurality of wires disposed on the
body member and connected electrically to the first means
and the metallized element defining the output pad to
define an inductance in series with the capacitance,
the first means and the second means being constructed to
provide a resonance with the capacitive reactance in the
equivalent output circuit at a particular frequency depen-
dent upon the operating range of frequencies,
the wires in the plurality being connected at one end to the
first means and at the other end to the metallized element
defining the output pad, the different wires in the plurality
being distributed along such metallized element at their
connections to such metallized element and being dis-
posed in transverse relationship to one another.
4,393,393
LASER DIODE WITH DOUBLE SIDED HEAT SINK
Louis B. Allen, Jr., Florissant; Herbert G. Koenig, Jr., St.
Charles; Robert A. Stacy, Chesterfield, and Danny D. Meyer,
St. Louis, all of Mo., assignors to McDonnell Douglas Corpo-
ration, Long Beach, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 65,918, Aug. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,832
Int. a.3 HOIL 23/02, 23/48. 29/44
U.S. a. 357—81 9 Qaims
1. A heat sink mounted laser diode including:
first and second flat mounting plates of a predetermined
outer shape, each mounting plate having a solder pad of
predetermined shape thereon, at least one of said mount-
ing plates being relatively thin;
a laser diode soldered between said first and second mount-
ing plates to said solder pads; and
a least one flexible, electrically insulating spacer having heat
activated adhesive properties positioned between said
mounting plates, a predetermined outer shape similar to
said predetermined outer shape of said mounting plates
and a cutout adjacent said solder pads so said solder pads
are not appreciably covered by said spacer, said adhesive
July 12, 1983
\r
ELECTRICAL
803
retaining said spacer to said mounting plates, the thickness
of said diode plus said solder connecting solder pads, and
/8 62 If
IZ ^AS
the thickness of said adhesive spacer being equal whereby
there is relatively little mechanical strain applied to said
diode.
' ' 4,393,394
TELEVISION IMAGE POSITIONING AND COMBINING
SYSTEM
Reginald F.H. McCoy, 1354 NE. 31st PI., Gainesville, Fla.
32601
I Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,525
' Int. a.3 H04N 9/535
U.S. a. 358—22 13 Qaims
1. Apparatus for use with equipment producing a first televi-
sion image, originating from a first television camera capable
of being pointed in a variable direction so as to view differing
parts of a foreground scene, said apparatus having the capabil-
ity of producing a second television image formed by combina-
tion of parts of a pair of further images originating from a pair
of further television cameras pointing in fixed directions so as
to view different parts of a background scene, with horizon-
tally displaced overlapping fields of view, said second televi-
sion image moving coincident with, and corresponding to,
horizontal motion of said first television image arising from
change in the direction of viewing of said first television cam-
era, in such manner that said first television image and said
second television image may subsequently be combined, by the
method of chroma-key, being known art, to form a combined
image, said combined image then having the appearance of
having been viewed by said first television camera, the position
of objects porirayed in said combined image undergoing dis-
placement in accordance with the horizontal motions of said
first television camera, said displacement applying equally to
that part of said combined image deriving from said first televi-
sion camera capable of being pointed in a variable direction,
and to that pari of said combined image deriving from said
second television image itself being derived from said further
television cameras pointing in fixed directions, comprising:
a. means for sensing the direction of viewing of said first
television camera, comprising a backing surface placed
behind those parts of said foreground scene viewed by
said first television camera, said backing surface having
areas of a first color and an area of a second color different
from said first color such as to cause said first television
camera to generate two distinct and different values of its
electrical output, the boundaries between said areas of said
first color and said area of said second color being vertical
lines, said boundaries performing the function of markers,
the positions of said markers in the image formed by said
first television camera being dependent on the direction of
viewing of said first television camera,
b. marker detector means for detecting transitions between
said distinct and different values of said electrical output
generated by said first television camera when viewing
said first color and said second color, thereby detecting
said markers,
c. means for determining the positions within the image
originating from said first television camera at which said
transitions corresponding to said markers occur, and
thereby producing indication of the direction of viewing
of said first television camera,
d. displacement generator means for generating displace-
ments of the positions of said pair of further images origi-
nating from said pair of further television cameras, con-
sisting of means for accepting a first reference signal hav-
ing synchronizing pulses in accordance with standard
television practice; means for generating a second refer-
ence signal likewise having synchronizing pulses in accor-
dance with standard television practice; and means for
effecting a controllable variable time delay between the
synchronizing pulses of said second reference signal and
the synchronizing pulses of said first reference signal,
e. means for generating a pair of further reference signals
also having synchronizing pulses in accordance with stan-
dard television practice,
f means for effecting individually changeable time delays
between the synchronizing pulses of said pair of further
reference signals and the synchronizing pulses of said
second reference signal,
g. means for supplying to each camera of said pair of further
television cameras a timing signal, being a distinct one of
said pair of further reference signals, in such manner that
the timing of the synchronizing pulses of said timing signal
controls the time at which said camera generates the
electrical output signals corresp>onding to specific points
in the scene viewed by said camera,
h. means for controlling said controllable variable time delay
between the synchronizing pulses of said second reference
signal and the synchronizing pulses of said first reference
signal by an amount dependent on the direction of view-
ing of said first television camera derived from the detec-
tion of the positions of said markers in the output of said
first television camera, said amount being such that the
variation in said time delay so produced results in a varia-
tion in the timing of the video output signals derived from
said pair of further television cameras equal to the varia-
tion in the timing of the occurrence of said markers in the
video output signal of said first television camera;
whereby a displacement in the timing of said markers
resulting from a motion of said first television camera will
cause an equal displacement in the timing of the video
output signals from said pair of further television cameras,
i. means for setting said individually changeable time delays
between the synchronizing pulses of said pair of further
reference signals and the synchronizing pulses of said
second reference signal such that the timings of each
distinct one of said pair of further reference signals sup-
plied to each one of said pair of further television cameras
are such that, there being a first object viewed by the first
one of said pair of further television cameras, being that
camera placed to the left of the second one of said pair of
further television cameras, said pair of further television
cameras having horizontally overlapping fields of view,
said first object being so positioned as to produce a video
signal output from said first one of said pair of further
television cameras at a time corresponding to the time of
scanning of a part of the field of view close to the right
806
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
side of the limit of the field of view of said first one of said
pair of further television cameras, said first object being
viewed by said second one of said pair of further television
cameras then producing a video signal output from said
second one of said pair of further television cameras at a
time coincident with the time of production of the corre-
sponding video signal output due to said first object from
the first one of said pair of further television cameras; and
conversely a second object being viewed close to the left
limit of the field of view of said second one of said pair of
further television cameras producing a video signal output
coincident in time with the video signal output produced
said second object when viewed by said first one of said
pair of further television cameras; whereby said pair of
further television cameras may have overlapping fields of
view and the timings of said timing signals controlling the
scannings of each of said pair of further television cameras
may be so set that objects simultaneously appearing in the
fields of view of both of said pair of further television
cameras will produce video signal outputs coincident in
time,
j. means for generating a switch control signal so timed as to
occur during the time of overlap of the fields of view of
said pair of further television cameras such that said
switch control signal will occur during the simultaneous
presence of the video output signals from said first and
second objects, both being viewed by both of said pair of
further television cameras, in the video outputs of both of
said pair of further television cameras, the timing of said
switch control signal being directly related to the timings
of said pair of further reference signals, said timings being
set by way of said means for setting said individually
changeable time delays such as to produce time coinci-
dence of the video output signals from said pair of further
television cameras deriving from objects within the over-
lapping fields of view of said pair of further television
cameras, such as said first object and said second object,
said switch control signal therefore being derivable from
said pair of further reference signals by detection of the
time of overlapping of the images of said pair of further
television cameras; additionally means being provided to
cause said switch control signal to be reset to its initial
condition during the synchronizing pulses of said first
reference signal; whereby the output of said first one of
said pair of further television cameras will be selected
following said synchronizing pulses of said first reference
signal, being coincident with the start of scanning of a
standard television display device on which the output of
the system may be viewed, and
k. means for switching between the video signal outputs of
said pair of further television cameras controlled by said
switch control signal such that only one of said video
signal outputs is selected at any one time, the selection
being performed at those times at which the video signal
outputs from a single object appearing in the fields of view
of both of said pair of further television cameras are coin-
cident in time; whereby a single continuous video output
signal corresponding to a field of view part of which is
derived from one, and the remainder from the other, of
said pair of further television cameras, may be derived.
ducing first and second relatively inverse-phase output
signals;
first and second modulator switches coupled to said phase
splitter and to an output terminal of the modulator for
alternately coupling said first and second inverse-phase
output signals to said output terminal of said modulator at
a carrier rate for creating a carrier suppressed by an
amount dependent upon the equality of the amplitude of
said first and second inverse-phase output signals,
whereby inequality during the black level interval reduces
said suppression;
wherein the improvement further comprises:
first and second sample-and-hold circuits, each coupled to
said phase splitter for sampling one of said first and second
s
-1 ;«
. 'tl.,.
ran.
inverse-phase output signals for generating first and sec-
ond sample signals, respectively, indicative of the value of
said first and second inverse-phase signals, respectively,
during said black interval;
differential amplifier means coupled to said first and second
sample-and-hold circuits and responsive to the difference
between said first and second sample signals for generat-
ing a control signal indicative of said difference; and
coupling means coupled to the output of said differential
amplifier means and to said phase splitter for forming a
degenerative feedback loop for reducing said difference
between said first and second sample signals for improv-
ing the equality of the amplitudes of said first and second
inverse-phase signals for improving the suppression of said
modulator during black intervals.
4,393,396
VIDEO SIGNAL PROCESSING CIRCUIT FOR NOISE
REDUCTION
Johannes G. Raven, Eindhoven, and Marinus C. W. Van Buul,
Breda, both of Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 288,250
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Aug. 20, 1980,
8004696; Jan. 27, 1981, 8100361
Int. a.^ H04N 5/2/, 9/5i5
U.S. a. 358—36 5 Qaims
4,393,395
BALANCED MODULATOR WITH FEEDBACK
STABILIZATION OF CARRIER BALANCE
Joseph F. Hacke, Blackwood, and Lucas J. Bazin, Vincentown,
both of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,226
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 26, 1981,
8102283
Int. C1.3 H04N 9/50
U.S. a. 358—23 11 Claims
1. An improved suppressed-carrier balanced modulator for a 1. A video signal processmg circuit compnsmg a separation
video signal including a black-level interval comprising: circuit having two outputs for providing separately a high-fre-
a phase splitter coupled to receive the video signal for pro- • quency and a low-frequency signal component from an input
July 12, 11983
f
ELECTRICAL
807
video signal to be processed and a noise suppression circuit
which operates on one of the separated video signal compo-
nents received from said separation circuit, characterized in
that the noise suppression circuit is coupled to the low-fre-
quency signal component output of said separation circuit and
comprises a comb filter having a delay circuit and a combining
circuit, an output signal of said delay circuit being added to
said low-frequency video signal component in said combining
circuit.
2. A video signal processing circuit as claimed in claim 1,
characterized in that, for processing video signals containing
color information for a color picture to be displayed as a result
of the video signal, said video signal processing circuit further
comprises means, coupled to the high-frequency signal compo-
nent output of said separation circuit, for providing the color
information contained in the high-frequency signal component
of the video signal, and a further noise suppression circuit,
having a variable transfer circuit therein, coupled to the output
of said color information means, and said noise suppression
circuit, coupled to the low-frequency signal component output
of said separation circuit, further comprises a movement detec-
tor, an output of which is coupled to said variable transfer
circuit in said further noise suppression circuit for controlling
the transfer factor thereof
4,393,397
TELEVISION GHOST SIGNAL DETECTOR WITH
COLOR BURST PHASE DELAY CONTROL
David D. Holmes, Chesterfield, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
1 1 Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,838
I Int. CI.' H04N 5/21
U.S. a. 358—36 9 Claims
a variab
put;
means, c
the input of said delay line, and means for applying said
control signal to said controlling means for controlling
said variable delay line in response to the phase relation-
ship of said delayed burst signal component and its ghost
signal component.
4,393,398
APPARATUS FOR SIMULATING COLOR PRINTING
PROCESS
Satoru Horiguchi, Saitama; Takeshi Sasaoka, Kawasaki; Koichi
Shimane, Kawasaki; Shigeru Mogi, Kawasaki; Tsuguo Yagu-
chi, Kawasaki, and Kazuhiko Sano, Kawasaki, all of Japan,
assignors to Dai Nippon Printing Co., Ltd. and Ikegami Tsu-
shinki Co., Ltd., both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 18. 1981, Ser. No. 264,421
Claims priority, application Japan, May 20. 1980, 55-65933
Int. a.' G03F 3/00; H04N 9/535
U.S. a. 358—76 17 Qaims
1. In a te evision receiver, including a source of video signals
subject to contamination by ghost signals, said video signals
including a signal interval suitable for use as a training signal
interval, including a color burst signal component; a television
ghost signal detector system comprising:
e delay line having a signal input and a signal out-
oupled to said variable delay line, for controlling
the signal delay exhibited by said delay line between its
input and its output;
means, coupled to said signal input of said variable delay
line, for applying said video signals to said delay line input
during said training signal interval; and
a tracking circuit having inputs coupled to the input and the
output of said variable delay line, and an output coupled
to said controlling means, and responsive to the appear-
ance of a delayed burst signal component at the output of
said delay line and to the appearance of a ghost of said
burst signal component at the input of said delay line when
a ghost signal is present, a phase detector means having
inputs coupled to the input and output of said delay line
for developing a control signal representative of the phase
relationship of said delayed burst signal component at the
output of said delay line and its ghost signal component at
."VS* JO-4JI
30
* j(j-SA ^ott.tmn •
rv fr
.^•n .,
-••^ _«,
jfr:firJ
1. An apparatus for simulating a color printing process
wherein first, second, third and fourth color separation films
formed from a color original are displayed as a color image,
comprising:
a scanner unit including
a film setting stage for supporting said first, second, third
and fourth color separation films in a side-by-side rela-
tion;
a first fiying spot scanner tube for said first and second
color separation films and a second flying spot scanner
tube for said third and fourth color separation films;
a lens system for projecting a raster image of the screen of
said first fiying spot scanner tube onto said first and
second color separation films and a raster image of the
screen of said second fiying spot scanner tube onto said
third and fourth color separation films; and
a photomultiplier for each of said color separation films,
each of said photomultipliers generating a signal corre-
sponding to a subtractive primary color signal;
control means coupled to said scanning unit for gamma-cor-
recting said subtractive primary color signals;
color reproduction process means coupled to said control
means for converting said gamma-corrected subtractive
primary color signals to additive primary color signals;
and
a color monitor unit for receiving said displaying said addi-
tive primary color signals, said color monitor unit includ-
ing
a color cathode ray tube having green, blue and red light-
emitting phosphor elements for exhibiting a color re-
production characteristic wherein the coordinates of
the green-emitting phosphor elements are approxi-
mately X = 0.2, Y = 0.67 on the chromaticity diagram,
the red-emitting and blue-emitting phosphor elements
cooperating with said green-emitting phosphor ele-
ments to substantially completely reproduce the print-
ing colors; and
driving means for driving said color cathode ray tube at a
resolution of between approximately 2. 1 and 3 lines per
millimeter.
808
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July i2, 1983
43339
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PARTIAL
ELECTRONIC RETOUCHING OF COLORS
Uwe Gast, Rammsee; Eberhard Hennig, Ascheberg; Dieter
Preuss; Heinz Taudt, both of Kiel, and Klaus Wellendorf,
Heikendorf, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dr.
-Ing. Rudolf Hell GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
per No. PCT/DE80/00070, § 371 Date Jan. 18, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 8, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02607, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 27, 1980
PCT Filed May 17, 1980, Ser. No. 229,584
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 18,
1979, 2920058
Int. a.^ H04N 1/46
U.S. a. 358—80 31 Qaims
4,393,400
3-D TV SYSTEMS
Hiroshi Ikushima, Hirakata; Takaaki Baba, Nishinomlya;
Takayuki Sagishima, Suita, and Masanobu Tanaka, Hirakata,
all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
FUed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,520
Claims priority, application Japan, May 29, 1980, 55-72267
Int. a.5 H04N 9/58
U.S. a. 358—92 3 Claims
LIOMT
CONTROL
LEVCR
MeOH* It ^■^
CONTROi
LMIT
«i«8f II
/ :• ' : [ \ ^ I . 1 I
-I ., L ^^^-^--^
oarTATUNHUv
RETOUCH QENCaATOA
COAflCCnON VALUE QCH-
KTfS
1. The method for the partial electronic retouching of colors
in color images, in which color signals obtained by point-by-
point and trichromatic scanning of color originals are digitized
and the digital color values of the individual color components
are stored in a storage medium, and in which the stored color
values are corrected by color correction values, so as to obtain
retouched colors comprising the steps of:
(a) deflning color increments values (AY, AM, AC, AK) for
said individual color components, said color increment
values respectively representing the smallest amount of
correction for said color values (Y, M, C, K) per retouch-
ing step;
(b) selecting a positive or negative direction of retouching;
(c) identifying the pairs of locus-coordinates of the image
points to be retouched in the color image by marking the
locationally allocated points in a coordinate identification
device (digitizer) with a marking means of said device,
such as a coordinate pen cursor;
(d) during coordinate identification simultaneously deter-
mining the desired retouch strength for each image point
to be retouched by generating a retouch factor (r) for each
identified pair of locus-coordinates with said marking
means, guiding said marking means similar to a retouch
brush over that area of the coordinate identification de-
vice which corresponds to the area of the color image to
be retouched, said retouch factor (r) representing a plural-
ity of color increment values which are to be summed or
to be subtracted at each image point which is to be re-
touched;
(e) generating correction values (Y/j, M^, G/j, Kr) for each
image point which is to be retouched by multiplying the
retouch factor (r) with the individual color increment
values;
and
(0 correcting said color values (Y, M, C, K) of the image
points which are to be retouched by adding for positive
retouching and subtracting for negative retouching said
corresjxjnding correction values (Y/j, Mr, Cr, Kr) of
said image f>oints in order to obtain corrected color values
(Y', M', C, K') representing the retouched colors in said
color image. _
1. A 3-D TV viewing system comprising: a single image
display device;
a set of vertical and horizontal deflection circuits for display-
ing an image on said display device;
a pair of spectacle devices corresponding to human eyes and
comprising a light shutter that passes and shuts off light
and is synchronized to an image displaying period in said
display device;
a signal distributor for discriminating a left and a right image
signal from a video signal consisting of two direction
image signals;
a pair of memory devices corresponding to a left and a right
image for writing into and reading out of a composite
image signal transmitted from said distributor;
a signal-selector for selecting a left or a right image signal
from a composite electrical image signal inputted from
each of said pair of memory devices and for sending each
image to said display device;
a synchronizing signal-separating circuit for separating an
image pick-up signal which is synchronized to a vertical
and a horizontal display signal;
a timing circuit having input terminals which are operatively
connected to said synchronizing signal separator and (b)
said discriminator, and having output terminals which are
connected to (c) said vertical deflecting circuit, (d) said
horizontal deflecting circuit, (e) said pair of spectacle
devices, (0 said signal distributor, (g) one of said pair of
memory devices used for a left image, (h) one of said pair
of memory devices used for a right image, and (i) said
signal selector said timing circuit generating, from a syn-
chronizing separating signal and a discriminating signal
Pj, (a) a vertical-synchronously separated signal Py which
is to be fed to said veriical deflecting circuit so as to
multiply a sweeping frequency of said vertical deflecting
circuit by m times an image pick-up frequency, wherein m
is a positive integer which is greater than 1 (b) a horizon-
tal-synchronously separated signal P^ which is to be fed
to said horizontal deflecting circuit so as to multiply a
sweeping frequency in said horizontal deflecting circuit
by m times an image pick-up frequency, (c) a trigger signal
Pd whose period is one m-th of an image pick-up period
which is to be fed to said spectacles whereby human eyes
are capable of fusing said left and right images in the time
period which is twice a display period of said display
device so as to obtain a stereoscopic view, (d) a composite
signal P/ which is to be fed to said signal distributor so as
to respectively distribute each left and right image signal
to each of said pair of memory devices, (e) trigger signals
each having a period the same as that of said discriminat-
ing signal to be fed to said pair of memory devices which
are capable of supplying each left and right image signal m
times to said signal selector, and (0 a further trigger signal
whose period is one m-th of said image pick-up period
July 12, 19
11
ELECTRICAL
809
which is to be fed to said signal selector so as to repeatedly
display the same single left or right image m times in said
single display device.
II
4,393,401
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DIMENSIONALLY
MEASURING ARTICLES
Donald L. Gorenflo, and William D. Noblit, III, both of Marion,
Ohio, assignors to The Fairchild Engineering Company, Mar-
ion, Ohio
FUed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,319
Int. a.3 H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358—107 8 Qaims
. r'
*^'i r~" *
1. Apparatus for measuring a dimension of an article com-
prising a table for holding the article, a reference scale adjacent
the table, a plurality of reference points on the scale, each
reference point having a different code sequence to represent a
different position on the scale, video camera means directed at
each end of the distance to be measured and the reference
scale, video digitizer means connected to the camera means
and fixing the relative positions of one end of the distance to be
measured from a reference point in digital form for each cam-
era means, and computing means receiving the output of the
digitizing means and computing therefrom the dimension of
the article.
4,393,402
SUBTRACnON FLUOROSCOPY METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Gary S. Keyes, Hartland; Jean-Pierre J. Georges, Waukesha,
and Dennis G. DallaPiazza, Oconomowoc, all of Wis., assign-
ors to General Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,314
Int. Q.^ H04N 5/32
U.S. Q. 358—111 8 Qaims
"-1
USER
^•ERfACf
n
\*/Rlk.F ABC'J'O BLS
MEMcn
L '- ^
iTO
pL_ I
<^.
OAv POWER 1 I
SJPPLV •*
1. A method of producing visible images by integrating
difference images that are obtained by subtracting images
acquired in pairs that result from exposing a subject to alter-
nate low and high energy x-ray beams including the steps of:
projecting an x-ray beam having one energy and an x-ray
beam having another energy through a subject in quick
succession to produce a sequential pair of x-ray images.
converting the x-ray images in sequence to television frames
comprised of lines of analog video signals,
converting said analog video signals to digital pixel signals
each representing a picture element in an image frame,
storing the digital pixel signals for a frame at one energy in
one digital memory and transferring the pixel signals out
of said one memory in phase with corresponding digital
pixel signals for the succeeding current frame at the other
energy while simultaneously storing the pixel signals for
the current frame in another memory and concurrently
combining the pixel signals for the stored and current
frames to yield difference digital pixel signals for a frame
representative of the difference between the consecutive
x-ray images,
next transferring the digital pixel signals for the frame at said
other energy out of the second memory in phase with
corresponding digital pixel signals for the current frame at
the one energy while simultaneously storing the signals
for the last-mentioned current frame at the one energy in
the one memory and concurrently combining the pixel
signals for the stored and current frames to yield differ-
ence digital pixel signals for a frame representative of the
difference between the consecutive low and high energy
x-ray images,
feeding the difference digital pixel signals for the first sub-
tracted image in a series to be integrated to a third digital
memory as the difference image signals are produced,
transferring the digital pixel signals out of said third memory
for being combined with corresponding diflierence digital
signals for the next frame and feeding back the combined
signals to the locations in the third memory out of which
corresponding difference digital pixel signals were trans-
ferred, and
then converting the integrated digital pixel signals in the
third memory to analog video signals for displaying the
integrated difference image.
4,393,403
ROTATING DIAPHRAGM FOR A DYNAMIC PICK-UP
DEVICE HAVING A PYROELECTRIC LAYER
Hans P. Geis, and Holger Helber, both of Bremen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,215
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 18,
1980, 3035240
Int. aj H04N 5/33
U.S. Q. 358—113 8 Qaims
1. A rotating diaphragm for a pickup device having a pyro-
electric target, in operation said diaphragm rotating about an
axis and periodically interrupting thermal radiation which is
incident on the pyroelectric target, characterized in that said
diaphragm comprises:
an electrically insulating material; and
a layer of electrically conductive material on the electrically
insulating material, said electrically conductive layer
being in the form of a pattern of electrically conductive
1032 O.G.— 30
810
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
tracks in which substantially no eddy currents are gener-
ated on rotation of the diaphragm in a magnetic field.
4,393,404
SPEOAL SERVICES TELETEXT COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEM
Charles M. Cox, BufTalo Grove, and William L. Thomas, North-
brook, both of III., assignors to Zenith Radio Corporation,
Glenview, III.
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,510
Int. a.^ H04N 7/00, 7/08 .
U.S. a. 358—147 6 Qaims
1. In a teletext communications system including a transmit-
ter cyclically transmitting a plurality of teletext encoded data
rows a selected number of which define a data page, the first
data row of each data page comprising a page-header data row
characterized by a page number address code for enabling
acquisition of the remaining data rows of the respective data
page by each of a plurality of standard teletext decoders, the
improvement comprising:
means cooperating with said teletext transmitter for insert-
ing at least one additional page-header formatted data row
in said cyclical transmission, said additional page-header
formatted data rows each including selected encoded data
and a page number address code adapted for preventing
acquisition thereof by said plurality of standard teletext
decoders; and
at least one data decoder comprising means adapted for
receiving said cyclical transmission, means responsive to
the page number address code of a received additional
page-header formatted data row for acquiring only said
additional page-header formatted data row and means
comprising a single data row memory for storing the data
encoded in said acquired additional page-header format-
ted data row.
ing display means including picture elements arranged in a
matrix of lines and columns, and connected to line driver and
column driver circuits respectively so as to be individually
selectable in both line and column directions, and wherein
display is made by selecting lines and columns successively, the
improvement therein comprising:
a voltage controlled oscillator circuit, said oscillator circuit
producing a shift clock signal applied to said column
driver circuits for selecting individual columns in succes-
sion;
first frequency divider means for dividing down an output
frequency signal from said oscillator circuit, the output of
said first frequency divider means being a clock signal
applied to said line driver circuits for selecting individual
lines in succession;
phase comparison means, said comparison means determin-
ing the difference in phase of a output of said first fre-
quency divider means with the phase of a horizontal syn-
chronizing signal, said horizontal synchronizing signal
being a portion of a television signal transmission, an
output of said comparison means being fed back to said
oscillator circuit, said feedback being in proportion to said
phase difference, said oscillator circuit being adapted to
adjust the output frequency of oscillation in response to
said phase difference signal, said adjustment causing said
phase difference to approach zero, said clock signals being
synchronized with said horizontal synchronizing signal;
a second frequency divider means, said second frequency
divider means further dividing the output signal from said
first frequency divider, the output of said second fre-
quency divider means being applied to said line driver
circuits so as to provide vertical synchronization of pic-
ture frames in said television transmission.
4,393,405
SYNCHRONIZING ORCUIT FOR MATRIX TELEVISION
SET
Masayuki Ikeda, Suwa, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Suwa Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,192
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 22, 1980, 55-116278
Int. a.3 H04N 5/04, 5/08
U.S. a. 358—153 13 Qaims
4,393,406
CIRCUIT FOR MODIFYING THE GRADATION OF
PICTURES PRODUCED BY VIDEO SIGNALS
Klaus Lehmann, Miihital, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,447
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 26,
1980, 3016242
Int. C\? H04N 5/14
U.S. a. 358—160 3 Qaims
^->
1. In a synchronizing circuit for a matrix television set hav-
1. A circuit for modifying the gradation of pictures pro-
duced with video signals, comprising:
a first resistance (2) interposed between a source (1) of said
video signals and an output terminal (4) for supplying
video signals to picture producing apparatus;
an inverting keyable amplifier (5) having its input connected
to said output terminal (4) and its keying input (12) con-
nected so as to enable said amplifier only during blanking
intervals of said video signals, said amplifier having a
connection to a fixed reference potential and being consti-
tuted so as to provide a current at its output (6) of a polar-
ity dependent on whether said potential of said output
terminal (4) exceeds or is less than said reference potential;
a capacitor (7) connected to said output (6) of said amplifier
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
811
(5) for charging or discharging by output current of said
amplifier (5) and for storing charge while said amplifier is
disabled,
a diode (3) and an impedance converter (8,9,10,11) con-
nected between said output terminal (4) and said output
(6) of said amplifier in such a way that said diode is inter-
posed between said output terminal (4) and said impe-
dance converter and is poled so as to be conductive while
the portion of said video signal between blanking intervals
is provided by said video signal source (1), said impedance
converter serving to cause the charging or discharging of
said capacitor (7) to continue during video blanking inter-
vals until the potential of said output terminal is substan-
tially the same as said reference potential, and
means (15) for assuring that said diode remains conducting
even when said output terminal is at said reference poten-
tial,
whereby substantially a voltage fraction of said video signals
is made available at said output terminal (4) which fraction
is determined by the ratio of the forward resistance of said
diode to the sum of said diode forward resistance and said
first resistance, while the temperature dependence of said
diode forward resistance is compensated, at least for the
black level of said video signal, during each blanking
interval.
1 1 4,393,407
CONTOUR CORRECTING APPARATUS FOR VIDEO
SIGNALS
Yoshikazu Yokomizo, Kawagoe, Japan, assignor to Canon (Cabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,445
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 7, 1979, 54-143972
Int. a.3 H04N 5/14
U.S. a. 358—166 35 Qaims
videofrequency means for processing the signals delivered by
the detectors, wherein the optical elements which are driven in
rotation consist of an afocal system comprising at least two
cylindrical optical elements driven together in rotation about
0' ..
1
1
4. *"
^1
^
J
t^
'^
^
^\^ 4
z\
an axis which is perpendicular to the plane of their generator-
lines and defines the optic axis of the device, and wherein the
array of detectors comprises a plurality of detectors extending
radially from said perpendicular axis, one of said detectors
being centered on said axis.
1. A contour correcting apparatus for video signals, com-
prising:
differentiating means for differentiating an input video signal
to produce a differentiated waveform;
delay means for delaying said differentiated waveform
and said video signal for a predetermined time period to
produce a delayed differentiated waveform and delayed
video signal;
inverting means for phase inverting said differentiated
waveform to produce a phase inverted differentiated
waveform; and
combining means for combining said phase inverted dif-
ferentiated waveform, said delayed differentiated wave-
form and said delayed video signal.
4,393,408
OPTOELECTRONIC DEVICE FOR ROTARY SCANNING
OF VIDEOFREQUENCY IMAGES
Jean L. Beck; Jean F. le Bars; Yves A. Emmanuelli, and Denis
Bargues, all of Paris, France, assignors to Thomson-CSF,
Paris, France
FUed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,382
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 17, 1980, 80 22275
Int. Q.3 H04N i/06, 3/14
U.S. Q. 358—205 16 Qaims
1. An optoelectronic device for scanning videofrequency
images comprising optical elements driven in rotation so as to
produce an image scan, an optical element for focusing on a
detection system comprising at least one array of detectors and
4,393,409
FOCUSING APPARATUS FOR IMAGE PICKUP DEVICE
Kenji Kimura, Tachikawa, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,917
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 30, 1980, 55-71476
Int. Q.' H04N 5/26
U.S. Q. 358—227 12 Qaims
<\i
»-^
«0
1. A focusing apparatus for an image pickup device compris-
ing:
(a) an image pickup;
(b) focusing means for carrying out focus adjustment for said
image pickup;
(c) zooming means coupled to said focusing means for carry-
ing out zoom adjustment for said image pickup;
(d) first detection means coupled to said zooming means for
supplying zoom data corresponding to the extent of zoom
adjustment carried out by said zooming means;
812
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
(e) drive means for actuating said focusing means in accor-
dance with said zoom data;
said focusing means, zooming means, first detection means
and drive means jointly comprising a servo loop for carry-
ing out a prescribed adjustment of the focus in accordance
with the extent of zoom adjustment carried out by said
zooming means; and
(0 second detection means coupled to said focusing means
for providing focus data corresponding to the extent of
focus adjustment carried out by said focusing means, said
focus data being used as a control target of said servo
loop;
said second detection means including a screen which is
connected to said focusing means and whose light trans-
mittance varies with the extent of focus adjustment, and a
photoelectric converter coupled to said screen for issuing
focus data corresponding to the amount of light transmit-
ted through said screen.
4,393,410
MULTIPLE CAMERA AUTOMATIC DIGITIZER AND
METHOD
Warren J. Ridge, and Dennis C. Roberts, both of Scottsdale,
Ariz., assignors to Wespac, San Diego, Calif.
Filed Not. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,233
Int. a.3 H04N 1/10
U.S. a. 358—285 32 Claims
ment point being referenced to the boundary of said docu-
ment plane;
(0 computing a second plurality of skew corrected coordi-
nates of said third alignment point from said second group
of camera coordinates of said third alignment ]X)int and
said camera coordinates of said fourth alignment point,
said second plurality of skew corrected coordinates of said
third alignment point being referenced to a boundary of a
skew coorected plane of said second video camera;
(g) operating said second video camera to effect producing
of camera coordinates of a general point in the field of
view of said second video camera, said general point being
a point of the item to be digitized;
(h) computing skew corrected coordinates of said general
point from said camera coordinates of said general point
and said second plurality of skew corrected coordinates of
said third alignment point, said skew corrected coordi-
nates of said general point being referenced to said third
alignment point;
(i) computing skew corrected, offset corrected coordinates
of said general point from said skew corrected coordinates
of said general point and said skew corrected, offset cor-
rected coordinates of said third alignment point, said skew
corrected, offset corrected coordinates of said general
point being referenced to said boundary of said document
plane;
(j) outputting said skew corrected, offset corrected coordi-
nates of said general point as a digitized value representing
the location of said general point on said document.
4,393,411
LASER READ- WRITE SYSTEM FOR THE PRODUCTION
OF ENGRAVINGS
Richard E. Amtower, Laguna Niguel, Calif., assignor to Ameri>
can Hoechst Corporation, Somerville, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 522,103, Nov. 8, 1974, abandoned. This
application Jan. 10, 1977, Ser. No. 758,250
Int. a.^ H04N 1/42
U.S. a. 358—302 3 Oaims
1. A method of digitizing an item, said method comprising
the steps of:
(a) operating a first video camera to effect producing camera
coordinates of first and second alignment points in the
field of view of said first video camera and to effect pro-
ducing a first plurality of camera coordinates of a third
alignment point, said third alignment point also being in
the field of view of a second video camera;
(b) operating said second video camera to effect producing a
second group of camera coordinates of said third align-
ment point, and to effect producing camera coordinates of
a fourth alignment point in the field of view of said second
video camera;
(c) computing skew corrected coordinates of said first align-
ment point from said camera coordinates of said first and
second alignment points, said skew corrected coordinates
of said first alignment point being referenced to a bound-
ary of a skew corrected camera plane of said first video
camera;
(d) computing a first plurality of skew corrected coordinates
of said third alignment point from said camera coordinates
of said third alignment point and said skew corrected
coordinates of said first alignment point, said skew cor-
rected coordinates of said third alignment point being
referenced to said first alignment point;
(e) computing skew corrected, offset corrected coordinates
of said third alignment point from both said skew cor-
rected coordinates of said third alignment point and an
offset number representing the distance of a boundary of a
document plane to the boundary of said skew corrected
camera plane of said first video camera, said skew cor-
rected, offset corrected coordinates of said third align-
1. In a system for forming an image of an object on a writing
surface: means for producing a reading beam and a writing
beam for scanning of the object and the writing surface respec-
tively, modulator means for varying the intensity of the writ-
ing beam, beam combiner means for directing the reading
beam and the modulated writing beam generally together with
a small divergence along a common path, beam separator
means including a deflector positioned between the diverging
beams with first and second surfaces for reflecting the respec-
tive beams toward the object and the writing surface, a reflec-
tor for reflecting one of the diverging beams back toward the
other before the beams impinge upon the surfaces of the deflec-
tor, scanning means positioned along the common path for
diverting the combined beams across a predetermined portion
of the path to effect synchronous scanning of the object and
the writing surface by the separated beams, and means respon-
sive to energy received from the object as it is scanned by the
reading beam for conditioning the modulator means to vary
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
813
the intensity of the writing beam to form an image of the object
on the writing surface.
' ' 433,412
AUTOMATIC CHROMA LEVEL CONTROL aRCUIT
FOR COMPENSATING BOTH SLOW AND RAPID
CHROMA LEVEL CHANGES
Mitsushige Tatami, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpo-
ration, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,452
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 25, 1979, 54-94404
Int. a.^ H04N 9/49
U.S. a. 358—318 9 Gaims
T — ]'<■<■ n Ph°'^^ H'lM mM," r~
DO . I S4«r
1. An automatic chroma control circuit for compensating
rapid and slow chroma level changes of chrominance signals
reproduced from a video tape recorder, comprising:
means for deriving color burst signals which are representa-
tive of levels for said reproduced chrominance signals;
means connected to said color burst signal deriving means
for detecting relatively rapid changes in the envelope
level of the reproduced chrominance signals;
means connected to said color burst signal deriving means
for detecting relatively slow changes in envelope level of
the reproduced chrominance signals;
means for generating a chrominance level control signal by
combining outputs of said means for detecting rapid level
changes and means for detecting slow level changes of the
reproduced chrominance signals; and
means for controlling amplitudes of said reproduced chromi-
nance signals in response to said control signal derived
from said chrominance level control signal generating
means.
periods of said information signals, write-in means for writing
individual periods of said information signals into said main
memory at a rate synchronized with said periodic information
signals, and read-out means for reading out said individual
periods of said information signals from said main memory at a
reference read-out rate, said velocity error compensator com-
prising velocity error detecting means for detecting a velocity
error in each period of said information signals and for produc-
ing a velocity error signal representative thereof; velocity
error storage means for storing the velocity error signals asso-
ciated with a plurality of said periods of information signals;
velocity error read-out means for reading out from said veloc-
ity error storage means simultaneously the velocity error sig-
nal associated with the period of information signals then read
out from said main memory and the velocity error signals
associated with at lest the preceding and next-following peri-
ods of information signals read out from said main memory;
combining means for combining the simultaneously read out
velocity error signals to produce a velocity error-correction
signal as a function of the simultaneously read out velocity
error signals, said combining means including means for pro-
ducing a gradient signal representing the gradient between the
velocity error signals associated with said preceding and next-
following periods of information signals, means for adjusting
an offset in said gradient signal, means for summing the offset-
adjusted gradient signal and said velocity error signal associ-
ated with the period of information signals then read out from
said main memory and means for integrating the summed
signals to produce said velocity rror-correction signal; and
means for modulating said reference read-out rate in accor-
dance with said velocity error-correction signal.
I-RCK
30 '
CNiO«\AOw-Ol)<tt- Cltly^
1. A velocity error compensator for use in a time base cor-
rector of the type which corrects time base errors in periodic
information signals having a main memory for storing plural
4,393,413
VELOOTV error COMPENSATOR FOR TIME BASE
ERROR CORRECTIONS OF PERIODIC INFORMATION
SIGNALS
Shinji Kaneko, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,855
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 18, 1980, 55-34615
Int. Cl.^ H04N 9/44. 9/46; GllB 5/43; H04N 5/78
U.S. CI. 358—326 17 Qaims
4,393,414
HORIZONTAL-RATE PHASE-CHANGE OF TV PIXEL
DISTRIBUTION AMONG MULTIPLE RECORDER
TRACKS FOR DROPOUT CONCEALMENT
Glenn A. Reitmeier, Trenton, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,925
Int. aj H04N 5/92
U.S. CI. 358—336 7 Qaims
HI —I, I, T5O, T, IstijOjl,, liIst,OiT„I,Ij(l,\, I, I, IjO, ^,Ii^ll^s'^^ <) l5»i»j'iili'60rV
un ^<ii!i(0,'(,i,i»««'i. t.i<'.Oi loll '.»!%> '?i!'«0!'ii«'«'>i'(< i.i.dii.'bii'dSi'n
iwn ^r, I,T, 0,t„I,TsO, V r, l,»5Q, <,l5T„0jV r, l,T,o,t„l,io(i,^ », I, tjt.ijIjiaDiV
TR]i^l,UHil,t,i,t,o,ii,-t,l,\(l,T,l,r,(i,i, ».l,t,(i,T5l,r,j,Vi ',l,',ii,<,l,>.«iV
L»t #1
iDf #?
LIK #5
M •«
1. A television signal processing apparatus for processing
signals for recording time-sampled television signals on a mul-
titrack recording medium, said processing apparatus compris-
ing:
controllable pixel distributing means coupled to the source
of television signals and to the multitrack recording me-
dium for distributing pixels among the tracks;
pixel-rate related control signal generating means coupled to
said controllable pixel distributing means and to a source
of pixel-rate clock signals associated with said source of
video signals for generating pixel-rate control signals for
controlling said controllable pixel distributing means for
distributing time-segmented pixels received in time se-
quence cyclically to each track in turn whereby a dropout
. in a single track having a duration of less than one line
allows estimation of the value of the dropped-out pixels
but a dropout in a single track having a duration greater
than one horizontal line drops out sufficient data so esti-
mation from adjacent pixels is no longer possible; and
line-rate-related control signal generating means coupled to
a source of line-rate signals associated with said source of
television signals and with said controllable pixel distrib-
814
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
uting means for generating horizontal-line-rate control
signals for controlling said controllable pixel distributing
means for progressively changing the phase of said cycli-
cal distribution of time-sequential pixels among said tracks
at a rate which is the horizontal line rate divided by
(N-i- 1), where N represents the number of horizontal lines
in the spatial pixel distribution of the raster which occur
between identical line pixel patterns, whereby a dropout
of one track for a time duration in excess of one horizontal
line does not drop out spatially adjacent pixels whereby
extimation of the value of the dropped-out pixels may be
made from spatially adjacent pixels.
4,393,415
TIME CHANGING SYSTEM FOR VTR
Robert N. Hurst, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,436
Int. a.3 H04N 5/78: GllB 15/46
U.S. a. 360—9.1 10 Qaims
TO Kmita 8I1S 34
> III FICWE I
-n<B(MC
KSIIIfD
ouuTm
HtCISTEH
1. A method for controlling the playback speed of a video
tape recorder to conform to a selected speed different from a
recording speed, said method comprising generating a signal
having a frequency in accordance with said selected playback
speed, applying said signal as a reference signal to a servo
circuit, providing an output signal from said servo circuit for
control of said playback speed to conform to said selected
speed, whereby a reproduced video signal recorded in accor-
dance with a frame rate no longer conforms to said frame rate,
and converting the reproduced video signal to conform to a
selected frame rate, said generating step comprising calculat-
ing the quotient of a normal playback time of a length of video
tape to a desired playback time for said length, and controlling
the frequency of an oscillator in accordance with said quotient.
4,393,416
TRACKING SYSTEM FOR A VIDEOTAPE RECORDER
Akihiro Takeuchi, Ikoma; Masaaki Kobayashi, Kawanishi, and
Kiyoji Fujisawa, Nara, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,043
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 9, 1980, 55-94424
Int. a.3 GllB 21/10
U.S. a. 360—10.2 3 Qaims
1. A tracking system for a video recorder/reproducer em-
ploying a record medium having tracks for recording video
signals and control signals which are representative of the
record position of said video signals, said system comprising:
a transducing means for reproducing video signals recorded
along said track on said record medium;
a positionable means with said transducing means mounted
at a location thereon, said positionable means being mov-
able at said location for displacing position of said trans-
ducing means;
a control signal reproducing means for reproducing said
control signals recorded along said track on said record
medium;
a means for dividing interval of said control signals, said
dividing means developing sub-control signals whose
number is representative of the transported length of said
record medium;
a rotation phase detector for detecting the rotating phase of
said transducing means and for providing an output signal
corresponding thereto;
an operational means for developing a displacement pattern
signal which is representative of the location of said video
track recorded on said record medium relative to said
transducing means by using said control signals, said sub-
control signals, and said output signal from said rotating
phase detector; and
a means for supplying said displacement pattern signal to
said positionable means, wherein said operational means
comprises: (1) a still pattern generator for developing a
still pattern signal whose value is zero at a beginning of
scanning of said transducing means and whose value cor-
responds to one track pitch at an end of scanning of said
KEF O'SC
' "'*'• I Circuit
lCapsTA^^
1 CONTROL l»-l
1 CIRCUIT I
REPftOO I
35.- J SPEED I
ICOWTRQlI
transducing means, (2) a counter unit for counting said
sub-control signals and for generating bias signals and (3)
an adder which adds the output signals of said still pattern
generator and the output of said counter developing said
displacing pattern signal; and wherein
said counter unit comprises: (1) a first counter which is reset
by said control signals and counts said sub-control signals,
(2) a second counter which is preset to a predetermined
value m when an output signal of said first counter be-
comes larger than m and which counts said sub-control
signals, and (3) a third counter comprising two separate
counters, each of which is preset to an output signal of
said second counter at a predetermined time and which
counts said sub-control signals, outputs of said third
counter comprising two separate counters being applied
to said adder, whereby said transducing means is capable
of tracking properly on said recorded video track at an
arbitrary transporting speed of said record medium.
4,393,417
TRACKING SYSTEM
Masaaki Kobayashi, Kawanishi; Akihiro Takeuchi, Ikoma, and
Kiyoji Fujisawa, Nara, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 156,194, Jun. 3, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,599
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 4, 1979, 54-70313;
Oct. 4, 1979, 54-128689; Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53260
Int. a.3 H04N 5/78; GllB 21/10
U.S. Q. 360—10.3 5 Qaims
1. A tracking system for video recorders/reproducers em-
ploying a record medium having tracks for recording video
signals and for recording control signals which are representa-
tive of the record position of said video signals, said system
comprising:
a transducing means for reproducing video signals recorded
along said track on said record medium;
a positionable means having said transducing means
mounted at a location thereon, said positionable means
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
815
being movable at said location for displacing the position
of said transducing means;
a control signal reproducing means for reproducing said
control signals recorded along at least one of said tracks
on said record medium;
a means for dividing the interval of said control signals, said
dividing means generating sub-control signals which are
representative of the transported length of said record
medium;
a rotating phase detector for detecting the rotating phase of
said transducing means;
4,393,418
TIME BASE ERROR CORRECTION SYSTEM
Kenji Kimura, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 1%,352
Int. Q.^ H04N 5/795
U.S. CL360— 22 -2 Qaims
62 71
72 y
132
arte- ~-
Si ' ^". ' ■■'■ • — I— "J' I /5
•tiI3„,T> ^»"^9'lr^^-rJ*^
-cp-
78 y
-i_J
IT
1. A device for recording and reproducing a video signal,
comprising means for converting an incoming video signal into
a plurality of signal channels, a plurality of magnetic heads for
recording and reproducing said signal channels in association
with a magnetic tape, first means for superimposing a pulse-like
signal in the vicinity of the back porch of the incoming video
signal, means for reconverting the plurality of signal channels
to provide a reproduced video signal, second means for sepa-
rating the superimposed pulse-like signal from the reproduced
video signal, generator means for providing a horizontal syn-
chronizing signal to be added to the reproduced video signal,
third means for detecting relative phase fluctuation between
the separated pulse-like signal and the horizontal synchroniz-
ing signal, and fourth means for controlling the phase of said
horizontal synchronizing signal by the output of said third
means and adding the horizontal synchronizing signal to said
reproduced video signal.
an operational means for generating a displacement pattern
signal which is representative of the location of said video
track recorded on said record medium with respect to said
transducing means by using the output of said control
signal reproducing means, said sub-control signals, and the
output of said rotating phase detector; and
a means for supplying said displacement pattern signal to
said positionable means, whereby said transducing means
is capable of tracking properly on said recorded video
track regardless of the transporting speed of said record
medium.
4,393,419
SYNCHRONIZING SIGNAL DETECTION PROTECTIVE
CIRCUIT
Takao Aral, Yokohama; Takashi Hoshino, Fujisawa, and
Masaharu Kobayashi, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,379
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 26, 1980, 55-132927
Int. CI.' H04N 5/04: GllB 27/10
U.S. Q. 360—37.1 5 Qaims
iM oruY
CIRCUIT
SnC SlGML
. CiTE
C'fiCUlT
S>NC SCNH
. SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
29
17
>-2l
[Time owe
5IGNA1.
SWITCHING
1 ClKCUi-
-r
61 %i Time
■ 0«TE
cmcuiT
23
25
OIS^S TME
GATE
CIRCUIT
1. A synchronizing signal detection protective circuit for
detecting a synchronizing signal on a recording medium with
information to be recorded and the synchronizing signal being
consecutively recorded thereon, comprising:
a first time gate circuit for generating a first time gate signal
at a first predetermined time before an expected occur-
rence of said synchronizing signal;
a second time gate circuit for generating a second time gate
signal at a second predetermined time before said ex-
pected occurrence of said synchronizing signal, said sec-
ond predetermined time occurring before said first prede-
termined time;
a time gate signal switching circuit connected to said first
and second time gate circuits and adapted to generate
selectively one of said first time gate signal and second
time gate signal;
a synchronizing signal gate circuit connected to said time
gate signal switching circuit and adapted to control the
gating time for detecting said synchronizing signal in
response to one of said first and second time gate signals;
a compensatory synchronizing signal generating circuit for
generating a compensatory synchronizing signal; and
a synchronizing signal switching circuit which conducts the
synchronizing signal when said synchronizing signal has
been detected by said synchronizing signal gate circuit in
response to either one of said first and second time gate
signals, and conducts said compensatory synchronizing
signal when the synchronizing signal has not been de-
tected by said synchronizing signal gate circuit in response
to said first time gate signal.
4,393,420
TAPE RUN SPEED-CHANGING ORCUIT
Yoshio Tomizawa, Tama, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 16, 1980. Ser. No. 160,085
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 26, 1979, 54-80333
Int. a.3 GllB 15/44
U.S. Q. 360—73 5 Qaims
1. ^ tape run speed-changing circuit for a tape recorder
816
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
having recording, playback, cue and review modes of opera-
tion, which comprises:
a motor selectively driveable at a speed conforming to any
of at least fist and second different tape run speeds for the
recording or playback mode of the tape recorder and also
selectively driveable at a respective different cue or re-
view tape run speed matching each of said at least first and
second tape run speeds of said recording or playback
mode during operation in said cue or review mode of the
taf>e recorder, said first and second tape run speeds of said
recording or playback mode and said respective different
cue or review tape run speeds being all different from each
other, said cue or review tape run speeds being higher
than said recording or playback tape run speeds, said first
and second tape run speeds bearing respective ratios with
the cue or review tape run speeds which respectively
correspond to said first and second tape run speeds;
a first settable tape run speed-changing means coupled to
said motor for setting any of said different tape run speed
for said cue or review mode; and
a second settable tape run speed-changing means coupled to
said motor and to said first tape run speed changing means
<!-■
30
28
=43
T
for setting either of said first and second tape run speeds
for said recording or playback mode different from said
tape run speeds for said cue and review modes, and for
setting the tape run speed for said recording or playback
mode interlockingly with the operation of said first tape
run speed-changing means such that said first tape run
speed-changing means is responsive to settings of said first
second tape run speed-changing means; and
means coupled to said first and second tape run speed-chang-
ing means for controlling said motor such that when said
second tape run speed-changing means sets said first tape
run speed for said recording or playback mode, then said
first tape run speed-changing means sets a first tape run
speed for said cue or review mode different from said first
tape run speed of said recording or playback mode; and
when said second tape run speed-changing means sets said
second tape run speed for said recording or playback
mode, then said first tape run speed-changing means sets a
second tape run speed for said cue or review mode differ-
ent from said first and second tape run speeds of said
recording or playback mode and also different from said
first tape run speed of said cue or review mode.
433,421
RAPID STEPPING OF A MOVING RECORDED MEDIUM
George S. 2^rbalas, Cherry Hill, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,055
Int. a.3 GllB 19/26
U.S. a. 360—73 8 Oaims
1. A replay system for use with a recorded medium, said
system comprising a medium driving means for initially mov-
ing said recorded medium at its normal velocity, input means
for receiving an external reference clock, and
control means coupled to said driving means and to said
input means for receiving an external reference clock for
changing the velocity of the recorded medium from the
normal replay velocity during a first interval and immedi-
ately thereafter changing the velocity of the recorded
medium back to the normal replay velocity during a sec-
U
fufriofl
'"^^^^^T^pi^rrt
■omumtfitMCKi
•iMPUKtiociii (wimV
ond interval of equal duration with said first interval to
thereby temporarily step the velocity of the recorded
medium relative the normal playback velocity within
specific reference clock and position increments.
4,393,422
DEVICE FOR DRIVING MAGNETIC TAPE
Nobuyoshi Yokobori, Osaka; Masashi Urayama, Neyagawa;
Hiroshi Okamoto, Yao, and Yoshiaki Igarashi, Ikomashi, all
of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,296
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 2, 1980, 55-43956
Int. 9.3 GllB 15/52, 19/28
U.S. a. 360—73 1 Qaim
-T4CM0METER
1. A device for intermittently driving a magnetic tape com-
prising:
a capstan for driving said magnetic tape;
a motor directly connected to said capstan for driving the
capstan;
a tachometer for detecting the rotating speed of said motor
and producing an output;
a speed control means having a settable speed means for
setting a desired motor speed and into which the output
from said tachometer is fed back for enabling said speed
control means to sense when said motor is rotating at the
desired motor speed;
an intermittent drive control means for supplying a trigger-
ing signal to trigger said settable speed means to cause said
settable speed means to operate said speed control means
for accelerating said motor to the desired motor speed and
driving it at said speed, said intermittent drive control
means including means for generating said triggering
signal in response to a speed setting signal and a head
switch signal; and
means for detecting a control signal recorded on said mag-
netic tape while said motor is being driven at said desired
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
817
speed and connected to said intermittent drive control
means;
said intermittent drive control means further having means
responsive to the detection of said control signal for dis-
continuing said triggering signal after the passage of a
predetermined period of time for causing said settable
speed means to decelerate the driving of said motor from
said desired motor speed, whereby the position of said
magnetic tape relative to the p)osition of the recorded
control pulse at the end of the deceleration by said speed
control means is constant.
4,393,423
ENDLESS LOOP TAPE MAGAZINE, AND A
RECORDING AND/OR PLAYBACK MACHINE
UTILIZING THE MAGAZINE
Alfred H. Moris, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Minnesota Mining
and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Division of Ser. No. 27,312, Apr. 5, 1979, Pat. No. 4,293,882,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 820,250, Jul. 29, 1977,
abandoned. This application May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,311
Int. Q.3 GllB 15/00
U.S. a. 360—93 2 Claims
,10
\'r'i
1. In combination:
a magazine comprising:
a housing comprising a cylindrical hub having a central
opening and a slot extending axially across the full
width of the hub and communicating with said central
opening, and first and second spaced opposed flanges
extending radially outwardly from said hub; and
an endless length of strip material having a major portion
wrapped about said hub between said flanges and a
minor portion extending from the innermost wrap of the
coil through said slot, partially across said central open-
ing and around the side surface of the coil to the outer-
most wrap of the coil;
said flanges being spaced by a dimension exceeding the
width of said strip material in the range of about 0.025
inch to about 0.05 inch to provide a space between the
coil and the flanges, which space allows shifting of said
coil axially along said hub;
a recording and/or playback machine comprising:
means defining a station for releasably receiving said
magazine;
drive means having members within said central opening
of the magazine received in said station and in driving
engagement with said minor portion of said strip mate-
rial for pulling said strip material through said slot from
said innermost wrap with the edges of said strip material
between said drive mechanism and said hub generally
coplanar with the edges of said coil;
a transducer pKJsitioned within said central opening of the
magazine received in said station and said strip material
between said drive mechanism and the slot in said hub;
and
means within said central opening of the magazine re-
ceived in said station for guiding said strip material in a
precise predetermined path along said transducer;
said means for defining a station being adapted to position
said magazine so that the spacing between said flanges
will afford axial shifting of said coil to align the edges of
said coil with the edges of the strip material along said
means for guiding to compensate for misalignment of
said magazine with said means for receiving and dimen-
sional irregularities in said magazine.
4,393,424
PRESSURE ARM ASSEMBLY FOR DISC RECORDERS
Mohan P. Vidwans, Saline, Mich., assignor to Sycor, Inc., Ann
Arbor, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 50,704, Jun. 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,587
Int. a.' GllB 5/54. 25/04
U.S. a. 360—105 19 Qaims
,«i
■0^
r:
-—)
1. A pressure arm assembly adapted for use in a data re-
corder of the type including a base, a diskette holder pivotally
mounted to the base, a head support assembly carrying at least
one head thereon and being adjustably mounted on the re-
corder to move the head into and out of operation contact with
a disc medium positioned within the holder, and drive means
engaging the head support for translating the head support and
hence the head along the disc medium, said pressure arm as-
sembly comprising:
a bracket adapted to be secured to the base of the data re-
corder;
a pressure arm;
means for pivotally connecting said pressure arm to said
bracket and for permitting a portion of said pressure arm
to rotate towards and away from the head support assem-
bly;
resilient mechancial means for biasing the pressure arm
towards the head support assembly; and
a release member carried by the bracket and being movable
with respect to said pressure arm, said release member
having a first position wherein said release member abuts
said pressure arm and holds the pressure arm away from
said head support assembly against the bias of said resilient
mechanical means, and a second position wherein said
release member disengages said pressure arm upon inser-
tion of a diskette into the diskette holder, thereby permit-
ting said resilient mechanical means to move said pressure
arm into engagement with the head support assembly and
force the head into operative contact with the disc me-
dium.
4,393,425
LINEAR HEAD ACTUATOR
Harold T. Wright, San Carlos, Calif., assignor to Disctron, Inc.,
Milpitas, Calif.
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,809
Int. a.3 GllB 5/54, 21/24
U.S. a. 360—105 6 Claims
1. An actuator for translating at least one magnetic head
comprising:
a moveable carriage element carrying said at least one mag-
818
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
netic head having two parallel sides, a closed end and an
open end, said carriage element being generally U-shaped
and carrying bearing means located along the outside of
each of said two parallel sides;
a stationary first guide rod adjacent and parallel to a first of
said two parallel sides of said moveable carriage element
cooperating with said bearing means located along said
first of said two parallel sides;
a second guide rod adjacent and parallel to the second of
said two parallel sides of said moveable carriage element
cooperating with said bearing means located along said
second of said two parallel sides, said second guide rod
being non-moveable in a direction along its length, said
carriage element being moveable linearly on said bearing
means along said guide rods;
biasing means spaced from said moveable carriage for forc-
ing said second guide rod against said bearing means
located along said second of two parallel sides;
an electrical coil mounted across said open end of said move-
able carriage element, said coil oriented in a plane gener-
jwA
ally perpendicular to the parallel sides of the moveable
carriage element; and
a stationary magnet structure jwsitioned between said sta-
tionary first guide rod and said second guide rod, said
stationary magnet structure having a first member extend-
ing within said coil and between said parallel sides of said
moveable carriage element, said coil being moveable
along almost the entire length of said first member, said
stationary magnet structure having at least one other
member in addition to said first member extending outside
said coil parallel to said first member and connected to
said first member at one end, said members defining a
magnetic flux path with a magnetic flux gap therebetween
in which said coil is located so that when current passes
through said coil, magnetic flux crossing said gap will
cause said coil to experience a force, said force causing
said coil to move along said first member extending within
said coil, the direction of movement of said coil depending
on the direction of said current in said coil, thereby mov-
ing said moveable carriage element along said guide rods.
means for biasing said pin into contact with a cam surface of
said cam,
means for rotating said cam about said axis, whereby rota-
tion of said cam causes said pin, said head base and said
head to move along said path,
first and second movable plates reciprocatable in a first
direction transverse to said path,
means for selectively moving said first plate into intersection
with said path at a first position along said path, and
•i 23
I '9 .„_
13 !?
means for selectively moving said second plate into intersec-
tion with said path at a second position, spaced from said
first position, along said path, whereby either said cam,
said first plate or said second plate can selectively restrain
said pin in one of three positions along said path, so that
said head can be selectively restrained in three positions
relative to said tape.
4,393,427
MULTICHANNEL MAGNETIC HEAD
Yoshifumi Sakurai, Minoo, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 220,197
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 18, 1980, 55-4303
Int. a.3 GllB 5/38. 5/12. 5/22
U.S. a. 360—112 7 Qaims
4,393,426
TAPE RECORDER HEAD ADJUSTING MECHANISM
Yasuyuki Nakanishi, Nagaokakyo, Japan, assignor to Mit-
subishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 260,989
Claims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1980, 55/65728
Int. a.3 GllB 5/54. 21/22
U.S. a. 360—105 3 Qaims
1. A tape recorder head adjusting mechanism comprising:
a movable pin constrained for reciprocation along a path,
means for intersecting a recording tape with said path,
a head base including means for moving said head base with
said pin,
a head fixed to said head base, whereby said head is movable
towards and away from said recording tape along said
path,
a cam rotatable about an axis transverse to said path.
1. A multichannel magnetic head means comprising:
magnetic circuit means including a gap for detecting a mag-
netic flux and adapted to lead said magnetic flux;
an amorphous magnetic thin film held in said gap and con-
sisting essentially of an alloy containing a rare earth ele-
ment and a transition metal, said thin film having a single
pair of current terminals and a plurality of Hall voltage
terminals;
said amorphous thin film being arranged such that its surface
is positioned substantially normal to the direction of the
magnetic flux to be detected, and the composition ratio of
said rare earth element is selected to be within a range of
from about 10 to about 40 atomic percent so that said
amorphous thin film has a magnetic anisotropy in a direc-
tion substantially normal to the surface thereof;
current leading means connected to said single pair of cur-
rent terminals for leading a biasing current of said thin film
along said gap;
the spacing between adjacent ones of said Hall voltage
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
819
i
terminal^ for outputting said Hall voltage being more than
about four times the width of said amorphous thin film so
that crosstalk between channels due to domain wall mo-
tion is substantially eliminated;
said magnetic circuit means comprising a first ferromagnetic
block and a second ferromagnetic block, each of said first
and second ferromagnetic blocks having one or more
ferromagnetic shielding portions which are sandwiched
between non-magnetic portions arranged on said magnetic
circuit means, said magnetic circuit means of said first
ferromagnetic block being face to face with said magnetic
circuit means of said second ferromagnetic block, and said
first and second ferromagnetic blocks holding said amor-
phous magnetic thin film therebetween; and
voltage outputting means connected to said Hall voltage
terminals for outputting a Hall voltage for each channel
correspjonding to said magnetic flux, said voltage output-
ting means being provided in the corresponding number
to the channels of said head and extending parallel to the
direction in which said biasing current flows.
imately parallel to a line which passes through said mag-
netic gap and said remote gap.
4,393,429
SUPERCONDUCTIVE COIL SYSTEM WITH
PROTECTING DEVICE
Naoki Maki, Tokai; Seiji Numata; Kiyoshi Yamaguchi, both of
Ibaraki, and Heroe Yamamoto, Tokai, all of Japan, assignors
to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,375
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 24, 1980, 55/53618
Int. a.' H03K 3/38
U.S. CI. 361—19 7 Qaims
4,393,428
MAGNETIC HEAD
Masayuki F'ujimura, Qiichibu, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo and Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha,
Saitama, both of, Japan
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No, 229,934
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 12, 1980, 55-16454
Int. CI.' GllB 5/20
U.S. Q. 360—123 5 Claims
12
I. A superconductive coil system comprising: a supercon-
ductive coil adapted to be energized when in a normal running
operation by an energizing power source; and a protecting
device connected in parallel with said superconductive coil for
absorbing a portion of the magnetic energy of said supercon-
ductive coil when in the quenching operation of said supercon-
ductive coil,
wherein said protecting device includes: a unidirectional
current gate device for allowing a coil current to flow
only in the same direction as that of the normal running
operation when in the quenching operation of said super-
conductive coil; and a d.c. motor connected in series with
said unidirectional current gate device.
1. A magnetic head comprising:
first and second core segments together defining a confront-
ing surface along which a recording medium may travel in
confronting relation;
said first core segment being made of a high permeability
substance and being formed with a first portion defining a
section of said confronting surface and a first end surface
facing toward an axis which is perpendicular to said con-
fronting surface, said first core segment further being
formed with a second portion disposed remote from said
confronting surface and having a second end surface also
facing toward said axis, said first core segment forming a
part of a magnetic circuit;
a coil wound about said first core segment in the region of
said second portion; and
said second core segment being made of a high permeability
substance and being disposed substantially in abutting
relation with said first core segment to form a magnetic
gap having one boundary defined by said first end surface
and to form a remote gap having one boundary defined by
said second end surface, said second core segment being
asymetrical relative to said first core segment about a line
which passes through said magnetic gap and said remote
gap and forming another part of said magnetic circuit, said
second core segment further being formed with a unitary
projecting portion, projecting away from said axis, of
shape and size to compensate for said coil wound on said
first core segment and thus to provide for a magnetic
balance line generated in said magnetic head to be approx-
4,393,430
MULTI-PHASE FAILURE DETECTOR
Jack H. Hughes, 4812 Lone Hill Rd., Chattanooga, Tenn. 37416
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,190
Int. CI.' H02H 3/24
U.S. CI. 361—92 11 Claims
1. A protective system for electrical loads connected in delta
or wye configuration by a plurality of power phase lines to an
AC polyphase power supply, comprising rectifier means cou-
pled to each of said power phase lines for establishing rectified
phase currents that are time spaced in response to failure in at
least one of the power phase lines, a source of DC voltage,
means connecting said source to the rectifier means for inser-
tion of a signal current only between the rectified phase cur-
rents that are time spaced and detector means connected to the
rectifier means for sensing said inserted signal current between
the phase currents that are time spaced reflecting said failure in
at least one of the power phase lines.
820
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
4^93,431
OVERCURRENT RELAY ORCUIT
Clyde Gilker, S. MHwaukee, Wis., assignor to McGraw-Edison
Company, Roiling Meadows, III.
Filed Apr. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 142,880
Int. a.3 H02H 9/02
U.S. a. 361—97 13 Oaims
1. An overcurrent relay circuit comprising:
a relay trip coil to be energized when the AC current in a
line being monitored exceeds a predetermined magnitude;
a current transformer to produce a signal proportional to the
current in the line being monitored;
a rectifier to produce a DC signal from the output of said
current transformer;
a test resistor across which a voltage indicative of the magni-
tude of the current in the line being monitored is devel-
oped by the output of said rectifier;
a minimum trip circuit responsive to the voltage developed
across said test resistor to produce an output signal repre-
sentative of the magnitude of the current in the line being
monitored, after the magnitude of such current exceeds a
predetermined level;
a time-current characteristic circuit responsive to the output
signal of said minimum trip circuit to initiate energization
of said relay trip coil with a time delay dependent upon
the extent to which the magnitude of the current in the
line being monitored exceeds the predetermined level
including, a first RC timing circuit having a first timing
capacitor and a first timing resistor with fixed capacitance
and resistance values respectively, a first pair of opera-
tional amplifiers connected in an inverse feedback config-
uration between said first timing capacitor and said first
timing resistor, and a first variable resistor connected to
permit adjustment of the effective capacitance of said first
timing capacitor upon changing the resistance of said first
variable resistor; and
a power supply circuit in series with said test resistor to
provide energizing power for said relay trip coil, said
minimum trip circuit and said time-current characteristic
circuit from the output of said rectifier.
4,393,432
SAFETY DEVICE FOR A CONDUCHNG PATH IN A
LOAD DEVICE
Dieter Neuhaus, Sulzbach; Gerhard Sohner, Remshalden; Wal-
ter Ruf, Komtal-Munchingen; Erich Jesse, Marbach, and
Helmut Roth, Stuttgart, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 872,139, Jan. 25, 1978, abandoned. This
application Feb. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 123,150
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 27,
1977, 2703255; Oct. 27, 1977, 2748267
Int. Q\} H02H i/00, 7/20
U.S. a. 361-104 8 Qaims
device, each device having at least two terminal connections
and a ground connection, one of the terminal connections of
the current supply device being connected to its ground con-
nection, one of the terminal connections of the user device
being connected to its ground connection, the other terminal
connection of the user device being connected to a load ele-
ment in the user device, a diode means in series with said load
element between said other terminal of said user device and
said load element; said load element also being connected to
the ground connected terminal connection, of the user device
said two terminal connections of both devices being engage-
able to produce a current flow, and a safety device within the
user device connected between the ground connected terminal
connection of the user device and the ground connection of the
user device whereby during correct polarization of said user
device, no current flows through said safety device, and during
incorrect polarization of said user device said safety device
operates to isolate said user device ground connection from
said ground connected terminal connection.
4,393,433
OVERVOLTAGE PROTECTOR FOR TELEPHONE LINES
James E. Anderson, Almonte; John D. Lee, Manotick, and
Frederick C. Livermore, Stittsville, all of Canada, assignors to
Northern Telecom Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,005
Int. d? H02H 9/06
U.S. a. 361—119 18 Qaims
/7 la 15 15 n /6
1. An overvoltage protector comprising:
a tubular housing of dielectric material:
two electrodes in said housing, said electrodes each having
an inner end surface, said inner end surfaces being in
mutual opposition; said inner end surface of at least one of
said electrodes comprising a central portion, an annular
groove extending around said central portion, and an
outer annular portion extending around said annular
groove;
a dielectric layer extending across said central portion and at
least partly into said annular groove, said dielectric layer
being clamped between the juxtaposed central portions of
said electrodes;
means for making electrical connections to said electrodes,
wherein said outer annular portion is spaced from the
corresponding opposed inner surface of the other of said
electrodes to form a spark gap therebetween, said spark
gap being substantially aligned laterally with the plane of
said dielectric layer.
1. In combination with a user device and a current supply
4,393,434
CAPACITANCE HUMIDITY SENSOR
Yoshio Imai, No. 3-36-3, Horinouchi, Suginami-Ku, Tokyo;
Yoichi Nabeta, Machida, and Tadao Inuzuka, Kawasaki, all of
Japan, assignors to Yoshio Imai, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,586
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 16, 1980, 55-176504
Int. a.J HOIG 7/00
U.S. a. 361—286 5 Qaims
1. A capacitance humidity sensor which comprises a non-
conductive base plate, electrodes oppositely arranged on the
July 12, iJis
ELECTRICAL
821
base plate, a metal compound membrane formed by ion-plating
independently on the electrodes, said metal compound mem-
brane being roughened at its surface by plasma etching and
4,393,436
CHASSIS ASSEMBLY
Shigekata Sugiura, and Susumu Kanno, both of Soma, Japan,
assignors to Alps Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 174,225
paims priority, application Japan, Aug. 4, 1979, 54-
107958[U]
Int. Q.3 H05K 5/04
U.S. Q. 361—380 6 Qaims
1^
being active to the humidity, and a moisture permeable metal
skin formed on the roughened surface of the metal compound
membrane.
. ; 7
-la
1 1 4,393,435
REPAIRABLE FLUORESCENT LAMP BALLAST
Robert J. Petrina, Anaheim, Calif., assignor to Bruce Industries,
Inc., Gardena, Calif.
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,899
Int. Q.3 H05K 7/20
U.S. Q. 361—377 14 Qaims
6' 10 'A 8
1. A chassis assembly for electric components, comprising:
a main chassis made of a metallic material and having a
plurality of recesses projecting outwardly from the bot-
tom wall thereof, each of said recesses being provided
with an aperture formed centrally therein; and
a sub-chassis carrying at least one electric part and having
means including metallic legs adapted to be inserted into
respective ones of said apertures with said legs being
projected exteriorly through said apertures of said reces-
ses so that said legs can be soldered to the outside of said
main chassis for securing said sub-chassis within said main
chassis.
4,393,437
COOLING MEANS FOR CIRCUIT ASSEMBLIES EACH
INCLUDING HOLLOW STRUCTURES SPACED APART
IN A CONTAINER
Melvyn R. Bell, Crossgates, and Charles D. Thomson,
Edinburgh, both of Scotland, assignors to Ferranti Limited,
Cheadle, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 92,454, Nov. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,095
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 11, 1978,
44145/78
Int. Q.3 H05K 7/20
U.S. Q. 361—383 15 Qaims
1. A repairable ballast for fluorescent lamps, the ballast
including at least one transformer, ballast coil means and ca-
pacitor means, and a support and mounting structure, compris-
ing:
a metal, frame-like housing;
a metal cover on the housing and defining therewith a com-
plete enclosure;
a printed circuit board having a plurality of sockets, the
transformer, the coil means, and the capacitor means
being provided with pins and being removably inserted
respectively in the sockets of the plurality, the circuit
board being mounted to the housing, becoming thereby
part of said enclosure;
threaded means for additionally releasably securing the
transformer and the coil means to the enclosure;
supplemental releasable means disposed for holding the
capacitor means in place;
thermal conduction means in physical engagement with the
coil means and the transformer, and in physical and releas-
able engagement with the surface portion of a meullic
part of the enclosure; and
the coil means, the capacitor means, and the transformer
being directly removable upon release of the threaded
means by unplugging them from the board, the enclosure
not being filled with any potting material.
1. A circuit assembly having a plurality of subassembly units,
each subassembly unit having a planar substrate, with constitu-
ent components of the circuit assembly being mounted on the
substrates, the plurality of subassembly units being connected
together to complete the required circuit, the circuit assembly
also having a plurality of identical, substantially enclosed,
hollow structures, the substrate of each subassembly unit con-
sidered individually comprising at least part of a wall of a
substantially enclosed hollow structure, at least one substrate
822
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
being included in each such structure, the constituent plurality
of structures being mounted spaced apart from each other
within an at least substantially enclosed container, one other
wall of each structure providing part of a closure wall for the
container, the container closure wall defming passages com-
municating with the interiors of the structures, the other con-
tainer walls defming at least one further passage communicat-
ing with the regions within the container surrounding the
structures, the walls of the structures within the container
defming holes communicating with both the interiors of the
structures and the regions within the container surrounding the
structures, and there being provided a supply of cooling fluid
connected to at least one passage defined by a container wall,
there being a fiow of cooling fluid through the container,
between the interiors of the hollow structures and the regions
within the container surrounding the structures, the arrange-
ment being such that the holes defined by the walls of the
hollow structures within the container cause the cooling fluid
to flow directly over said components of the circuit assembly
which are spaced from the holes and which generate heat, each
of the hollow structures having a plurality of spaced, readily
removable portions providing the holes when removed for the
flow of cooling fluid between the regions within the container
surrounding the hollow structures, and within each hollow
structure.
4,393,438
PORCELAIN COATED METAL BOARDS HAVING
INTERCONNECTIONS BETWEEN THE FACE AND
REVERSE SURFACES THEREOF
Robert L. Schelhorn, Cinnaminson, N.J., assignor to RCA Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 133,255, Mar. 24, 1980, Pat. No, 4,328,614.
This application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,435
Int. CL^ H05K 1/18
U.S. a. 361—401 1 Qaim
ting element, the reflector adapted to replace the housing and
enable the lantern to operate as a spotlight, comprising:
(a) a shell disposed about the light-emitting element, the shell
having a light-reflective inner surface;
(b) openings in the shell to permit the ingress and egress of
cooling air;
(c) a window secured to the open side of the shell; and
(d) a handle attached to the lantern by which the lantern can
be readily maneuvered, the handle being positioned on
that side of the shell opposite the window.
4,393,440
COVER ASSEMBLY FOR AIRPORT GUIDANCE LIGHT
Jacques L. Yperman, Kraainhem, Belgium, assignor to Societe
Anonyme des Etablissements Adrien de Backer, Brussels,
Belgium
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,278
Int. C\? F21V 7/00
U.S. a. 362—309 3 Qaims
IK 18x 15
1. A porcelain coated metal board of a given thickness com-
prised of, in combination, a metal core having defined therein
an aperture of a predetermined cross-sectional size, a connec-
tor having a length sufficient to extend through at least the
entire thickness of said board and having a cross-sectional size
less than said predetermined cross-sectional size of the aper-
ture, a glass sealing member and first and second porcelain
layers, said metal core being positioned between said porcelain
layers, said connector being positioned within said aperture in
a spaced apart relationship from the edges of the aperture and
being oriented so as to extend through the entire thickness of
said board, said glass sealing member being formed in the
ajjerture between the connector and the edges of the aperture
thereby holding said connector in said position relative to the
metal core and said first and second layers of porcelain being
formed about said connector in a flat configuration.
4,393,439
CONVERTIBLE LANTERN AND REFLECTOR
THEREFOR
Harry E. James Jr., 75 Forbes Rd., Bedford, Ohio 44146
Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,307
Int. a.3F21V7 7/00
U.S. a. 362—182 11 Claims
1. A reflector for use with a portable lantern having a base
portion, a light-emitting element positioned above the base
portion, and a translucent housing surrounding the light-emit-
19 16 \U 30
1. A cover assembly for an airport runway guidance light,
comprising a cover having a plurality of holes for securement
on top of a light base, said cover having a central top portion
formed with at least one window for the exit light beam and an
upwardly inclined ramp in front of said at least one aperture;
and
optical system means comprising a light source and at least
one lens means hermetically mounted in said at least one
window for the exit light beam,
said lens means having a central refracting portion end two
lateral total reflecting portions,
the central refracting portion being formed with a first sur-
face with double curvature towards the light source with
flat upper and lower faces and a second surface with
double curvature on its outer side with flat upper and
lower faces,
the lateral total reflecting portions being each formed with
indentations protruding towards the light source in sym-
metric relation with respect to the optical axis of the exit
light beam, each indentation having a curved face towards
the light source, an inclined planar face transversal to the
optical axis, and flat upper and lower faces, and each of
said lateral portions having each a planar surface extend-
ing perpendicular to the optical axis on the outer side of
the lens.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
823
4,393,441
HIGH VOLTAGE POWER SUPPLY
Harald A. Enge, 26 Prince Ave., Winchester, Mass. 01980
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,483
t Int. a? H02M 7/10
means of each of said stages being selected to be substan-
tially equal;
the center-string terminal of the bridge rectifier means of the
final stage providing a second DC output terminal.
U.S. a. 363—61
14 Claims
4,393,442
PROCEDURE AND MEANS FOR MONITORING
CURRENT DATA IN A THYRISTOR-CONTROLLED
DIRECT CURRENT DRIVE
Matti Kahkipuro, Hyvinkaii, Finland, assignor to Elevator
GmbH, Barr, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,767
Oaims priority, application Finland, Dec. 28, 1979, 794076
Int. a.'H02M 7/17
U.S. a. 363—70 4 Qaims
I ; ■ . '8 - ■ . :i
% \ ^' i i s -^
1. A power supply for producing a DC output voltage com-
prising
a plurality of serially-connected voltage producing stages
including a first stage, a final stage, and intermediate
stages therebetween, each of said stages including
bridge rectifier means having first and second side-string
terminals and first and second center-string terminals;
a first circuit having series-connected, side-string capaci-
tance and inductance means;
a second circuit having series-connected, side-string ca-
pacitance and inductance means; and
center-string capacitance means connected between said
center-string terminals;
an AC input voltage source, having a pair of output termi-
nals for supplying an AC voltage having a substantially
square wave shape;
the first circuit of said first stage connected between one of
the output terminals of said AC input voltage source and
the fir^ side-string terminal of the first stage bridge recti-
fier means;
the second circuit of said first stage connected between the
other of the output terminals of said AC input voltage
source and the second side-string terminal of the first stage
bridge rectifier means;
the first center-string terminal of the bridge rectifier means
of said first stage being connected to a first DC output
terminal;
the first circuit of each successive stage connected between
the first side-string terminal of its bridge rectifier means
and the first side-string terminal of the bridge rectifier
means of the preceding stage;
the second circuit of each successive stage being connected
between the second side-string terminal of its bridge recti-
fier means and the second side-string terminal of the
bridge rectifier means of the preceding stage;
center-string inductance means connected from the first
center-string terminal of the bridge rectifier means of each
successive stage to the second center-string terminal of the
bridge rectifier means of the preceding stage and from the
first center-string terminal of said first stage to the first
DC output terminal;
the product of the values of the inductance means and the
capacitance means of said first and second circuits of each
of said stages and the product of the values of the center-
string capacitance means and the center-string inductance
39
K ' 20 o
□ 2. ^P
21
22
" 13
40 r 25V: 28 ib
•^' '■ tX ^ : y a 31 ZJ A37
29 J 3D 33 : „
*N
3S.
0 26 27 ♦'^V 4, y,^ 32-- 34
1. A method of monitoring current data in a thyristor con-
trolled direct current drive circuit, comprising the steps of:
applying three phase A.C. current to terminals R, S. T con-
nected to inputs of a pair of parallel thyristor bridges; applying
a D.C. current output to a DC. motor electrically in circuit as
a load; applying AC. current to current sensing transformers
in parallel relation to thyristor bridge inputs connected to three
rectifying diodes and having D.C. output terminated across a
resistor; feeding rectified A.C. to a current controller con-
nected to an igniter unit, causing said igniter unit to fire said
thyristors in proper timing sequence through action of said
igniter unit, whereby the output D.C. current of said thyristor
bridges exhibit proper amplitude and polarity, causing said
D.C. motor to operate; feeding voltage generated across said
resistor to an operational amplifier and feeding its output to a
time delay circuit; directing the output voltage of said delay
circuit to an emergency stop circuit, employing a relay having
associated contacts responsive to said output voltage,
whereby, a zero voltage condition in excess of a predetermined
time, energizes said relay causing said contacts to close and
indicate a stop condition.
4,393,443
MEMORY MAPPING SYSTEM
John Lewis, Tigard, Oreg., assignor to Tektronix, Inc., Beaver-
ton, Oreg.
Filed May 20, 1980, Ser. No. 151,541
Int. a.' G06F 9/36
U.S. a. 364—200 10 Qaims
1. A memory mapping system comprising:
a first address bus portion having a first set of n lines and a
second set of x lines, for receiving logical address informa-
tion;
a second address bus portion for providing physical address
information to main memory means of a computer, said
second address bus portion having a first set of N lines,
where N is greater than n, and a second set of x lines
connected to the second set of x lines of the first address
bus portion;
random access memory means having n input lines con-
824
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
nected to the first set of n lines of the first address bus
portion and N output lines connected to the first set of N
lines of the second address bus portion, said random ac-
cess memory means having a plurality of memory regions
which are individually selectable for connection to said n
input lines and to said N output lines, and each memory
region being operative, when selected, to transform infor-
writing successively received data words of the next and
each subsequently received group of data words into the
successively occurring available word location levels as
they occur in the predetermined sequence of N memories,
during the concurrent reading therefrom, of the data
words of the immediately preceding given group of data
words.
LQtDOkTA
IS 3 .
M«>
cownKL
REGSTER
in BTS-^. ■
LOWQATA
-ZOO
—
(nonjarrs
RAM MAP
PROCESSOR
[ '
1 1
! i _.^
S ; (NfflBITS
3' I f^^nnoeee
MAIN
ICMORT
ACOH
BUS
^--.-««—
-— -Jf] BUS 8
ESS •
» (n.i)
STS
mation provided on said n input into information on said N
output lines; and
a control register having input means for receiving data and
output means at which said data is made available and
operatively connected to the random access memory
means for utilizing said data to select which one of the
plurality of memory regions is connected to said n input
lines and to said N output lines.
4,393,444
MEMORY ADDRESSING aRCUIT FOR CONVERTING
SEQUENTIAL INPUT DATA TO INTERLEAVED
OUTPUT DATA SEQUENCE USING MULTIPLE
MEMORIES
Leonard Weinberg, Haddonfield, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,694
Int. a.3 G06F 7/00; GOIS 7/44
U.S. a. 364—200 8 Qaims
I»IIU«»
miwsiii'fc "tjisf 5
«->IIUtie!9 0f«AWE
Pasts F0« t»CH
TMKSIIII-EO PjLSf
ii,» iicewm
BftKtli EKH ifilWr
•DWfSS
A,» Nct itm%i
»,» Kwn iisfo
I, • lOIKI lOOIIIOII
III KKOIlT uStD
tSWUSWHC COWKIl lumilNC
"fXODi lOWtSSIKC CiKCjiI
PlMMflER C0liei*l«1KMS
I, », ««|0 N
fSMUSHiNC IKCIKMfNIIIi,)
!„-i)"[i(C['IIR i;l
«-«tii pmxfssiNC iNitwi
—121
_i^
CCKPUIfNUAaMSSIAfil
•Bin liil)[>BDIIII n]
« ■ n-li fOBD
T
—122
••MMEIIV
«tW«S JSIO
V^»
(mil tWD LEAL LXumt^Y" f'^
•n-uwii «>i irfc!« Of -m\t„ mciSKii
COHPIJI! KtKWt'l
COmAININC ■
* I11I-
/I26
*^^TOti}
-Jl
•I?'
HfllOSt ,
FUNCTIOIIAL DIAGIiAM OF ENTIRE SYSTFM
"■«i!« psocFsanc KirwAi
n • n Ih IWC IH [ACN pnoasswc IllUlim
1. A system for converting sequentially received data words,
in the form of successive groups of data words, into an inter-
leaved output data word sequence, with each group of re-
ceived data words consisting of T successive series of R data
words, said system comprising:
N memories each having W word location levels, where
WN^TR;
first logic means for writing successively received data
words of any given group of data words into word loca-
tion levels of successive ones of said N memories in a
predetermined sequence such that successive data words
are not written into the same memory;
means for reading from said memories every R'* data word
of said given group of data words written into said memo-
ries to leave an available word location level in each
instance where a data word was read therefrom; and
said first logic means comprising other logic means for
4 393 445
INFORMATION-SIGNAL RECORDING APPARATUS
EMPLOYING RECORD VOLUME ORIENTED
IDENTinCATION SIGNALS
Charles A. Milligan, St. David; Edwin R. Videki, II, and Win-
ston F. Yates, both of Tucson, all of Ariz., assignors to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,172
Int. CV G06F 13/04; GllB 15/18
U.S. a. 364-200 3 Qaims
1. A record storage subsystem having a plurality of address-
able signal recorder apparatus, each of said signal recorder
apparatus capable of mounting a record volume for transduc-
ing operations hereinafter referred to as a mounted record
volume, transducing means in each said signal recorder appara-
tus and being relatively movable with respect to said record
volume for enabling transducing operations, a buffer memory
connected to all of said signal recorder apparatus for buffering
signals to and from said signal recorder apparatus, said buffer
memory being connectable to a signal source-sink means,
the improvement comprising:
a channel block counter means for each said signal record
apparatus for counting block of said signals transferred
between said signal source-sink means and said buffer
memory,
a device block counter means for all of said signal re-
corder apparatus for counting blocks of said signals
transferred between said buffer memory and said signal
recorder apparatus, respectively,
PRV means in each said signal recorder apparatus for
indicating present relative physical location of said
mounted record volume and said transducing means,
and
means connected to said buffer memory for storing the
count in a given one of said block counter means and
said PRV means in said buffer memory in a predeter-
mined addressable location of said buffer memory such
that the stored block of signals is logically contiguous
with said predetermined addressable locations, respec-
tively.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
82S
1 1 4,393,446
ROUTINE TIMER FOR COMPUTER SYSTEMS
George P. Gurr, Phoeniz, Ariz., and Robert M. Hardy, Scotia,
N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company, Schenectady,
N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 67,996, Aug. 20, 1979,
abandoned. This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,122
Int. a.3 G06F 11/30
U.S. a. 364—200 26 Qaims
'UT£B I
- I PEHiPhERAlS
u
R I • 5T4TUS I
ROuTfNE T1ME«
-+
14. A computer system for providing real-time servicing to
a plurality of hardware devices comprising:
a main computer forprocessing a plurality of prepro-
grammed routines for servicing respective ones of said
hardware devices;
a main memory coupled to said main computer to exchange
data back and forth;
a routine timer located outside said main computer for simul-
taneously processing event timers called for by said pre-
programmed routines run in said main computer simulta-
neously, said routine timer comprising means for monitor-
ing said main computer during processing of said plurality
of routines to detect predetermined memory access associ-
ated with said routines being processed;
input/output control means for sequencing the transfer of
data containing the length of an event timer called for by
a specific routine from said main memory to said input-
/output control means and for providing signals indicative
of event timer termination of a specific event timer to said
main memory;
data analysis control means for processing information pro-
vided by said input/output control means by decrement-
ing each event timer by a predetermined time segment and
informing said input/output control when an event timer
has terminated; and
means to control transfer of information between said input-
/output control means and said data analysis control
means.
4,393,447
METHOD AND A ORCUIT FOR CONTROLLING THE
PRESSURE IN WHEEL BRAKE CYLINDERS OF
FLUID-OPERATED VEHICULAR BRAKES
Heinz Loreck, Moedling, Austria, assignor to ill Industries,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,405
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 21,
1979,2951756 _
Int. a.3 B60T 8/02
U.S. Q. 364—426 8 Oaims
1. In a method for controlling pressure in a wheel brake
cylinder by a control pulse train proportional to acceleration
or deceleration of an associated wheel controlling an outlet
valve coupled to said cylinder, an improvement comprising the
steps of:
monitoring said control pulse train during each control
cycle;
generating at least one opening pulse for coupling to said
^HEEL ^°
OtCELERATlON*-
PULSES iZ'L
WHEEL ACCELfRAfiON
PULSES
JT_run_r-un
Vrac ''miN
10 OUTLET
VALVE
outlet valve whenever, after a first predetermined time
interval, said pulse train is absent; and
stopping the generation of said opening pulse immediately
upon re-occurrence of said pulse train.
4,393,448
NAVIGATIONAL PLOTTING SYSTEM
Thomas J. Dunn, Ocean Bluffs; Donald G. Yuniskis, Jr., Arling-
ton; Gabor L. Szakacs, West Roxbury, and Nghia V. Nguyen,
Westwood, all of Mass., assignors to Epsco Incorporated,
Westwood, Mass.
Filed Feb. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 121,651
Int. a.3 G06F 15/50; GOIS 5/14
U.S. a. 364—449 16 Qaims
12. A plotting system for use on board a vehicle in which
said plotter is provided with navigation signals from a receiver
at said vehicle comprising:
means for generating pen positioning signals in accordance
with navigation signals from said receiver, said pen posi-
tioning signals being in the form of drive pulses;
an X/Y plotter having a moveable pen, a charting surface
and stepping motor means coupled to said drive pulses for
positioning said pen;
at least one counter coupled to said drive pulses for keeping
track of the effective position of said pen by virtue of the
count thereof;
means for increasing the rate of said drive pulses to said
counter when the position dictated by said pen positioning
signals indicate a pen move within the off-chart area; and,
means for interrupting the coupling of said drive pulses to
said stepping motor means when the effective position of
said pen is off-chart, said interrupting means including an
off-chart counter, means for coupling said drive pulses to
said off-chart counter when said pen reaches a predeter-
mined edge of said charting surface such that when said
pen reaches an edge of said charting surface, said pen
stops and the drive pulses are diverted to said off-chart
counter, and means responsive to a predetermined count
of said off-chart counter for controlling said coupling
means to remove said drive pulses from said off-chart
826
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
counter and to apply said drive pulses to said stepping wire perpendicular to the x and y directions to cut the material,
motor means. the translational movement of the reciprocating wire coupled
4,393,449
NUMERICALLY CONTROLLED MACHINE TOOL
Koichi Takeda, Takarazuka, and Yoshiro Sasano, Yawata, both
of Japan, assignors to Daihatsu Motor Co., Ltd. and Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., both of Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,654
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 14, 1979, 54-75241;
Oct. 2, 1979, 54-127594
Int. a.3 G05B 19/42
U.S. a. 364—474 3 Qaims
1. A numerically controlled lathe comprising a control
means including an operation panel having key switch means
arranged thereon, said key switch means inputting data on the
fmished shape and finished dimensions of a workpiece and on
the machining conditions thereof including spindle rpm and
feed rate, said control means, on receiving said input data,
automatically preparing a machining program; a tool rest
means, movable longitudinally and transversely in the lathe
with respect to a reference point in the lathe, tool rest arrival
detecting means for turning on when said tool rest arrives at
predetermined positions located longitudinally and trans-
versely in the lathe and at the same time emitting signals indi-
cating the arrival, and tool rest position detecting means for
emitting a series of equispaced signals in accordance with the
longitudinal or transverse movement of said tool rest, wherein
said machining reference point corresponds to the position of
said tool rest when said tool rest position detecting means emits
a signal for the first time after said tool rest arrival detecting
means has been turned on, said control means controlling the
amount and direction of movement of said tool rest means,
thereby controlling the lathe to automatically process a work-
piece to a desired shape, wherein said control means includes
indicating means for indicating in conversational language, the
kinds and sequence of numerical values to be inputted into and
control means, and said key switch means includes function
keys for designating a shape to be machined, and numerical
keys for inputting specific numerical values in accordance with
the output of said indicating means.
with the indexing serving to contour the easily-machinable
material to form a complex three-dimensional shape.
4,393,451
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING TOTAL
LIQUID VOLUME FLOW
Leiand W. Barker, Kingsport, Tenn., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,386
Int. g.3 GOIF 7/00
U.S. a. 364—510 8 Qaims
4,393,450
THREE-DIMENSIONAL MODEL-MAKING SYSTEM
Robert B. Jerard, Lebanon, N.H., assignor to Trustees of Dart-
month College, Hanover, N.H.
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,264
Int. C\? G06F 15/46
U.S. a. 364—474 29 Qaims
1. A three-dimensional model-making machine to form a
model of predetermined shape from an easily machinable mate-
rial, that comprises: a wire under tension; means for effecting
translational positional changes in the wire in the x and y
directions; means to receive said easily machinable material
and operable to effect rotary indexing positional orientation of
the material; and means to effect reciprocating motion of the
1. The method of determining total volume flow of a liquid
in a partially full cylindrical pipe, the method comprising
measuring at a predetermined location along the length of
said cylindrical pipe the average fluid velocity of the
liquid flowing through said cylindrical pipe by making
measurements at intervals transversely across the flow of
liquid in the cylindrical pipe and determining therefrom
said average fluid velocity and generating an electrical
output signal representative of this measurement;
measuring the depth of liquid at said predetermined location
in said cylindrical pipe and generating an electrical signal
representative of this measurement; and
feeding the electrical output signals from said average fluid
velocity and from said depth of liquid measurements to a
programmable digital microcomputer and thereby calcu-
lating the total volume flow of said liquid by solving the
following equation:
Flow = 1.68 NT^I -2^ - I (^ - D)\d(1R - D)
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
827
-continued
0.075 (-5^-2- y ^ 0,045 [-4-2- y )]) f,.3/sec
wherein the terms are defined as
dp = proportional to the average velocity of flowing fluid
R = radius of pipe
R = radius of pipe
D = depth of the liquid
4,393,452
METHOD OF REPRODUCING A PICTURE HAVING
IMPROVED RESOLUTION
Keiji Sekigawa, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 155,179
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 2, 1979, 54-69040
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 6, 1999,
1 1 has been disclaimed.
I ' Int. a.3 G06F 15/20: H04N 5/14
U.S. CI. 364—514 1 Claim
iNPUl
nc T jRE
~rtfi SS 5l( Vi iL
' __J ■ CISC- I
PlCTUlt
OuTPjT I stGNAl
CIRCUIT
TMBESHOLDn
q<i = ayQw>i-ai-Q\l+avQ\i^a\Q\b
where qi through qg are the calculated density levels of
said picture elements of said 3x3 matrix, Qi through Qi6
are the density levels of said picture elements in said 2x2
sub-matrix and of said picture elements surrounding said
2x2 sub-matrix and are expressed in multi-base quantiza-
tion, and ai through a^ are the weight factors for said
minute picture elements, with ai-(-2a2-f-a3= I, l2n,-¥-
2m= I and 4a5=l.
4,393,453
REGION INFORMATION PROCESSING SYSTEM
Akira Nakano, 13-13, Mita 2-Chome, Meguro-ku, Tokyo-to,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 45,261, Jun. 4, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 915,185,
Jun. 14, 1978, abandoned. This application Apr. 28, 1981, Ser.
No. 258,276
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1977, 52-72978
Int. aj G06F 15/20
U.S. a. 364—514 11 Qaims
1. A method of reproducing a picture including half-tones
through estimation with binary outputs, wherein said picture is
divided into a predetermined number of picture elements defin-
ing a matrix and each picture element within said matrix is
assigned a density level, comprising the steps of:
subdividing said matrix of picture elemtns into plural 2x2
sub-matrices;
converting each 2x2 sub-matrix into a higher resolution
3x3 sub-matrix of picture elements, comprising,
calculating density levels for each of said picture elements in
said 3x3 sub-matrix according to predetermined equa-
tions including weight factors for each of the density
levels of said picture elements in the 2 x 2 sub-matrix and
those of the picture elements surrounding said 2x2 sub-
matrix;
comparing the calculated density levels with respective
predetermined threshold levels, thereby to determine an
output level of each picture element of each of said 3x3
sub-matrices is black or white in dependence on whether
or not the calculated density levels exceed the predeter-
mined threshold levels, and
reproducing said picture based on the respective output
levels of each of said picture elements of each of said 3x3
matrices determined in said comparing step; in which said
predetermined equations are
q2 = <'iQ2 + af,Qi + a^-Qe+ 04-07
gi = arQi + a \Qi + ayQi + 02-0%
q4 = a6Qi + a4Qiy+a(,Q9 + a4Q]o
qi=qiQ(,+<'5-Ql+ayQ\Q+a5-Q\\
!
g(,=a4Qi+atQi+a4-Q\]+af,-Q\2
gi-arQ9 + ayQ\o+aiQ\i-\-a2QH
qi=a4Q\o+a4Q\\+a(,Q\4 + af,Qii
^
sfCTKJN I
,
L^ It
I DTViCl I DCVtCC
1
1
— -r-
.-*..l
sun VI »*«&
' OtVICf
' .
1
1. A region information processing system for processing
information concerning a plurality of objective regions in a
field to produce information concerning at least one synthetic
region to be formed by combining by synthesis the information
concerning each of the objective regions being provided by
external region information source means, the region informa-
tion processing system comprising:
(a) subfield designating means for sequentially designating
subfields each constituting part of the field, by providing,
one at a time, subfield designating data,
(b) a plurality of surveying means each associated with a
corresponding one of the regions and each responsive to
the subfield designating data for examining the region
information source means to produce local data of the
subfield being designated concerning the associated re-
gion, the local data including at least region flag data
indicating whether or not the subfield is inside the bound-
ary of the associated region, and
(c) synthesizing means responsive to the local data of the
subfield concerning the objective regions for producing
local data of the synthetic region including at least region
flag data indicating whether or not the subfield being
designated is inside the synthetic region, said synthesizing
means judging whether or not the local data of the sub-
field concerning the objective regions satisfy a predeter-
mined condition to determine depending on the result of
the judgement, the significance of the region flag data of
the synthetic region.
828
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,454
ELECTRONIC PARCEL REGISTER
John H. Soderberg, Monroe, N.Y., assignor to Pitney Bowes
Inc., Stamford, Conn.
FUed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,875
Int. a.3 G06K 15/00
VS. a. 364—518 19 Claims
position, said unitary print assembly means being operative to
mark an adjacent record medium, printer drive means opera-
tive during the formation of a character to selectively move
said unitary print assembly means along said elongated mount-
ing means between spaced points in said first path, said printer
drive means including movable cam means mounted to contact
said unitary print assembly means, said cam means operating to
move said unitary print assembly means in said first path and
bias means mounted to engage and bias said unitary print
assembly means toward and into engagement with said mov-
able cam means, record medium drive means mounted upon
said support means and operative to position a record medium
relative to said unitary print assembly means for marking
thereby, said record medium drive means operating during the
formation of a character to move said record medium in a
second path transverse to the first path of movement of said
unitary print assembly means.
1. A parcel register having a data entry and display key-
board, an accounting module, and a printing module, which
printing module includes means for controlling a first set of
print wheels that are operative to print a value upon a tape and
a second set of wheels that has means for printing a series of
consecutive numbers of successive tapes, comprising: a first
microprocessor for controlling data entry and display of said
keyboard, a second microprocessor for controlling arithmetic
operations in said accounting module, and a third microproces-
sor for controlling the operation of said printing module in
accordance with instructions from said second microproces-
sor, said printing module having means responsive to an input
into said keyboard for selecting a first value to be printed on a
first tape by said first set of print wheels and means for printing
a number from sequence of numbers on said first tape by said
second set of print wheels and means for selecting a second
value for printing upon a second tape and for inhibiting said
series sequence means of said second set of print wheels caus-
ing said second set of print wheels to print on said second tape
the same number from a sequence of numbers as printed on said
first tajse.
4,393,456
DIGITAL nLTER BANK
Thomas G. Marshall, Jr., Princeton, N.J., assignor to Bell Tele-
phone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,194
Int. a.3 G06F 15/31
U.S. a. 364—724 5 Qaims
4,393,455
MODULAR ELECTRONIC MEASURING AND PRINTING
UNIT
Alec T. Douglas, and James S. Havers, both of St. Johnsbury,
Vt., assignors to Colt Industries Operating Corp., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 174,279
Int. a.3 B41J 3/12; G06K 15/10
U.S. a. 364—519 28 Qaims
J!%
1. A moving dot matrix printer for forming alpha and nu-
meric characters on a recording medium comprising support
means, elongated mounting means mounted upon said support
means, a unitary print assembly means mounted upon said
elongated mounting means for movement in a first path along
said elongated mounting means between a start and a stop
SECTIM 14
,« , .?
■^
Y-^>-dni?-
^^-^^^hrfi^^^-y^^
.40 4?
1. A digital filter bank of the type including a discrete trans-
form means connected to a polyphase network comprising at
least one complementary pair of first and second digital filters,
characterized in that each of said filters comprises:
a single input which provides a filter input signal during the
course of a present sampling period;
at least a first output which during the present sampling
period gives a first output signal value independent of the
present sampling period filter input singal and dependent
on the filter input signal of a previous sample period;
a second output which during the present sampling period
gives an output signal value dependent in general on the
value of the present filter input signal and
a shift register which for the present sampling period re-
ceives a register input signal dependent on the present
filter input signal, said shift register including a first set of
stages comprising a first stage and every other one of a
plurality of successive stages and including a second set of
stages comprising a second stage and every other one of
said plurality of successive stages, said first filter output
being accumulated from weighted values of said first set
of stages and said second filter output being accumulated
from the weighted value of said register input signal and
weighted values of said second set of stages.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
829
4,393,457
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEQUENONG
ADDRESSES OF A FAST FOURIER TRANSFORM
ARRAY
Bernard J. New, Los Gatos, Calif., assignor to Advanced Micro
Devices, Inc., Sunnyvale, Calif.
I Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,676
I Int. a.5 G06F 15/34
U.S. a. 364—726 13 Qalms
'->
TLe-TLj
TRANSFOBM
LE^GTM
:0UNTER 56 , LATCH
62
j^lT COUP
"H^FFT COMP
■fi»ooo/fvFN,K=ai
AOOHESS SELECT ^8
ASe-ASj ~
ADDRESS Output
Off SET INPUT)
1. For use in a digital signal processor, an intergrated circuit
apparatus operative in response to signals from clock means,
said clock means establishing a clock cycle, for generating
signals representative of nonconsecutive sequence of output
position values for data addresses according to a preselected
pattern in order to read and write related data of an array in
digital memory means, said apparatus comprising:
first counting means for sequentially generating consecutive
signals representing control values;
second counting means for sequentially generating consecu-
tive signals representing binary seed values;
means coupled to said first counting means and to said sec-
ond counting means for inserting at least one preselected
binary value signal in a preselected bit position of each
seed value signal at each clock signal, said preselected bit
place position determined by a control value signal, in
order to generate in a nonconsecutive value sequence said
output position value signals.
4,393,458
DATA RECOVERY METHOD AND APPARATUS USING
VARIABLE WINDOW
Anthony K. Fung, Fountain Valley, Calif., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 118,882
Int. aJ G06F 7/28
U.S. a. 364—900 13 Qaims
SERIAL 9I»_J
STREAM )N SYMC
MASTER CLOMH '•°°"^
from a serialized bit stream wherein an information encoding
scheme is employed having transitions indicative of defined
state amplitude deviations capable of occurring at two distin-
guishable positions relative to synchronizable bit cell timing
units of nominally constant duration, said method comprising
the steps of:
providing a plurality of transition detection windows of
nominally constant duration, said transition detection
windows being of first and second types, each of said
transition detection windows being nominally synchro-
nized to the center of a corresponding bit cell timing unit;
selectively expanding or contracting selected ones of said
transition detection windows of said first type relative to
the corresponding bit cell timing unit such that said transi-
tion detection windows of said first type tend to center at
time locations of expected occurrence of state amplitude
deviations representing a first value; and
selectively expanding or contracting said transition detec-
tion windows of said second type adjacent to said selected
ones of said transition detection windows of said first type
such that said transmission detection windows of said
second type tend to center at time locations of expected
occurrences of state amplitude deviations representing a
second value.
4,393,459
STATUS REPORTING WITH ANOLLARY DATA
John D. Huntley, and Raymond L. Parsons, both of Tucson,
Ariz., assignors to International Business Machines Corp.,
Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,544
Int. a.3 G06F 13/00. 15/16
U.S. a. 364—900 1 Oaim
1 — ^
rIZS
.131
130
III
PORT
BUFFER
CIRCUITS
ACCESS
CONTROL
\
\
MEMORY
ADDRESS
CIRCUITS
115 .
132 \
134 -■
33
PORT
BUFFER
CIRCUITS
•
MEMORY
DATA
Flow
—
MEMORY
1
_
t/^
- IZ€
-124
• '^..,
1. A method for recovering encoded digital information
120
1. A data storage control for enabling verifiable controlled
access to a data storage unit, comprising:
(a) a plurality of access port means coupled to said data
storage unit for enabling access thereto for the storage and
retrieval of data signals;
(b) an access control coupled to each of said access port
means for controlling said access such that one and only
one of said access port means accesses the data storage
unit at a given instant and said access control having a
register for storing a busy access-indicating control signal
with access identification signals for indicating which of
said access port means has current access rights to said
data storage unit when and only when said busy control
signal indicates a busy state;
(c) access means in said access control and coupled to said
register for storing and retrieving signals therein and
further coupled to all of said access port means for receiv-
ing access requests for accessing said data storage unit via
the respective access port means and for setting said regis-
ter in accordance with said received access requests such
that said busy control signal is set on a given access re-
quest being received, together with an appropriate access
identification signal and for denying access to a first access
port means supplying an access request whenever said
busy access signal indicates a busy state and the access
identification signal does not correspond to said first ac-
cess port means, read status means in said access control
and coupled to said register for storing and retrieving
830
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
signals therein and to all of said access port means for
enabling any of said access port means to read the signal
contents of said register for monitoring access status of
said data storage unit independent of any of said access
requests such that an access port means currently having
access to said data storage unit can verify that access and
any other access port means not currently having access
to said data storage units can monitor another port's ac-
cess status for ensuring data integrity, read and set means
in said access control and being coupled to said register
for storing and retrieving signals therefrom and coupled
to all of said access port means for receiving a read and set
signal from any of said access port means for sensing the
busy access signal and access identification signals stored
in said register and being responsive to a received read and
set signal and to said busy signal indicating a not busy
signal to set the busy signal to the busy state and setting an
access identification signal in said register corresponding
to the access port means supplying such read and set
command whereby access to the data storage unit can be
established independent of other access requests, reset
control means in said access control coupled to said regis-
ter and to all of said access port means for being respon-
sive to a reset command received from any of said access
port means and being responsive to said reset command to
reset the contents of said registers to a not busy state and
erasing all of said access identification signals irrespective
of the current stored signals in said register whereby any
of said access port means can reset the access control for
facilitating access thereto, and free resource control
means in said access control coupled to said register for
storing signals therein and retrieving signals in said regis-
ter and to all of said access port means for receiving a free
resource command from any of said access port means and
being responsive to said received free resource command
to compare the access port means supplying said free
resource command with the presently stored access identi-
fication signal and if equal to reset the busy signal along
with the access identification signal to zero, otherwise
indicating an error state; and
(d) means in said access control connected to the register for
comparing said busy signal with said access identification
signal and indicating an error in said access control when-
ever any of said access identification signals are indicating
which of said access port means has current access rights
when said busy control signal is set to a non-busy state.
ing the second words, the output means comprising a
plurality of output devices; and
switching means actuated to select at least one of the plural-
ity of output devices within the output means and to
permit said output means to develop the second words.
4,393,461 .
COMMUNICATIONS SUBSYSTEM HAVING A
SELF-LATCHING DATA MONITOR AND STORAGE
DEVICE
Thomas O. Holtey, Newton; Steven S. Noyes, Boylston, and
Daniel G. Peters, Billerica, ail of Mass., assignors to Honey-
well Information Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass.
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 194,311
Int. a.3 G06F 3/05
U.S. a. 364—900 6 Qaims
4,393,460
SIMULTANEOUS ELECTRONIC TRANSLATION
DEVICE
Sigeaki Masuzawa, Nara, and Yoshiro Kiliara,
Yamatol(oriyama, both of Japan, assignors to Sharp Kabu-
shilci Kaisha, Osalia, Japan
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,610
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 14, 1979, 54-118569
Int. a.J G06F 15/38
U.S. a. 364—900 9 Qaims
1. An electronic dictionary and language interpreter device
wherein first words represented in a first language selected
from a plurality of languages are entered to obtain second
words represented in a second language selected from the
plurality of languages, said second words being equivalent to
the first words, said device comprising:
selection means for selecting the first language and the sec-
ond language;
reader means for reading the first words and for entering the
first words in the first language;
recognizing means responsive to said reader means for rec-
ognizing the first words;
translation means responsive to the recognizing means for
translating the first words into the second words in the
second language;
output means responsive to the translation means for provid-
1. In combination with a plurality of communication lines
and a data processing system comprising a system bus, at least
one central processing unit (CPU), one main memory, one
peripheral controller and a communication subsystem, each
individually coupled to said system bus, said communication
subsystem including a communications controller and further
including a modem, a dialing unit, a touch tone receiver, and a
cathode ray tube display (CRT), each coupled to said commu-
nications controller, said modem, said dialing unit, and said
touch tone receiver also coupled to said communication lines,
said communications controller comprising:
(a) an address bus;
(b) a data bus;
(c) a microprocessor coupled to said address bus and data
bus;
(d) universal synchronous receive transmit (USRT) means
coupled to said data bus for transmitting data to and re-
ceiving data from said typical communication devices;
(e) baud rate generation means coupled to said data bus and
said USRT for specifying the baud rate for transmission of
said data for each of said typical communication devices
directly connected to said communication subsystem and
to indicate to said USRT the baud rate for transmission of
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
831
said aata to each of said typical communication device^
which are external to said communication subsystem;
(0 latching register means also coupled to said address bus,
said microprocessor, said USRT means and said data bus
for storing a plurality of signals received from said micro-
processor and generating a direct connect mode signal, a
clear to send signal and a bit oriented protocol (BOP)
mode signal;
said USRT means being responsive to said direct connect
mode signal for selecting a baud rate signal from said
baud rate generation means for establishing the trans-
mission rate of said data for said each of said typical
communication devices directly connected to said com-
munication subsystem;
said USRT means being responsive to said clear to send
mode signal for transmitting said data to a selected one
of said typical communication devices; and
said USRT means being responsive to said BOP mode
signal for establishing said data transmission between
said USRT and said selected one of said typical commu-
nication devices in a BOP mode.
4,393,462
ELECTRONIC TRANSLATOR WITH MEANS FOR
PRONOUNCING INPUT WORDS AND TRANSLATED
WORDS
Akira Tanimoto, Kashihara; Tosaku Nakanishi, Nara, and
Shigenobu Yanagiuchi, Tenri, all of Japan, assignors to Sharp
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,445
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 24, 1979, 54-137922;
Oct. 25, 1979, 54-138383
Int. a.3 G06F 15/38
U.S. CI. 364—900 6 Qaims
.11 Q>lH J '
B^
[this rS THE OiSn
i'H'H!'yM>i#';
S
,'H.S S THE EGG '
r " (T. ^ *- »' '' *^ '
^'oT; - <^
fL- «] * <!) ! r.t^L u sat
;0. DESK : ^
1 &
Si y ji a^-]
ATX ,~:r~*
.0. "<« ._i : pj
'cfr
■ #
wo'ce
information related to a translated sentence corresponding
to said first sentence; and
voice synthesizer means for providing an audible output of
said verbal information related to the translated sentence
and responsive to entry of each of the first words by the
input means for addressing said second memory means for
retrieving particular verbal information corresponding to
each first word entered and for providing an audible
output of each first word entered.
4,393,463
INSERTION OF CHARACT^ER SET CHANGE CODES IN
AN ALTERED TEXT STREAM
John A. Aiken, Jr., Round Rock, Tex., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Not. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,784
Int. a.' G06F 7/00
U.S. a. 364—900 8 Oaims
Gp
FtTCM DOliiMtlllT M/CS ^
'AST. I,,-, .ln^mT'
1±
1 latent D4T* BLOttl
_-, V.
1 wt /I
( «tTu(»l»^
f"^' ;•-"!)
■ fit T-C«
|tt>/C<
st**Tiii6 Ota
ZJ
Zl3
[«..
en DATA BLjOCa
ISS
1. An electronic translator device wherein first words repre-
sented in a first language are entered to obtain second words
represented in a second language equivalent to the first words,
comprising:
input means for entering the first words;
first memory means for storing a plurality of words repre-
sented in the first language;
second memory means for storing a plurality of items of
verbal information corresponding to the plurality of
words stored in said first memory means;
third memory means for storing a plurality of sentences
comprised of words stored in said first memory means;
fourth memory means for storing a plurality of items of
verbal information related to translated sentences, repre-
sented in the second language, corresponding to the plu-
rality of sentences stored in said third memory means;
translation means responsive to entry of the first words by
said input means for addressing said first, third and fourth
memory means for translating a first sentence comprised
of said first words and stored in said third memory means
and for retrieving from said fourth memory means verbal
rMEBT sec ro« fWiWC 1 tto
lntt.cTio» «B/cs n
1. In a text processing system where a text stream is stored
and different character sets are selectable for insertion or dele-
tion within the text stream, a method for altering said text
stream, comprising the steps of:
displaying said text stream to an operator;
identifying a block of selected text to be inserted or deleted
from said text stream at a selected location, said identifica-
tion in response to operator commands;
determining the character set for the preceding text in said
text stream immediately before the selected location and
for the following text in said text stream immediately after
the selected location;
altering said text stream by inserting or deleting said block of
selected text;
comparing the character set for the preceding text, the
following text and the selected text to be inserted or de-
leted; and
inserting character set change codes in the altered text
stream when said comparison indicates a character set
mismatch.
832
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,464
CHIP TOPOGRAPHY FOR INTEGRATED aRCUIT
COMMUNICATION CONTROLLER
George W. Knapp, Cambridge, and Bernard B. Spaulding, The
Plains, both of Ohio, assignors to NCR Corporation, Dayton,
Ohio
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,975
Int. a.3 G06F 13/00; HOIL 25/00
U.S. a. 364—900 14 Oaims
1. An integrated circuit chip for use in a data processing
system which includes a processor and a plurality of remote
devices in which the processor generates a plurality of first and
second control signals for use in transmitting data bits to a
remote device, said circuit chip comprising in combination:
a plurality of input and output transmission channels con-
nected to said remote devices over which data bits are
transmitted between the processor and the remote device;
first storage means connected to the processor for storing
data bits received from the processor;
second storage means for storing the first and second control
signals received from the processor for generating third
control signals selecting a first or second clock frequency,
a fourth control signal selecting the number of data bits to
be transmitted and a timing control signal;
means connected to said second storage means for generat-
ing a plurality of clock signals at a first or second timing
frequency in accordance with the third control signals
received from said second storage means;
control means for transmitting the data bits stored in said
first storage means and the generated clock signals over
said output transmission channels to the remote devices;
said integrated circuit chip having first, second, third and
fourth sequentially located edges;
said transmission channels being located adjacent said third
edge;
said first storage means being located substantially closer to
said third edge than to said first edge;
said signal generating means being located substantially
closer to said first edge than to said third edge;
said second storage means being located substantially closer
to said second edge than to said fourth edge; and
said control means being located substantially closer to said
first edge than to said third edge.
4,393,465
DIGITAL DEVICE FOR TIME-MULTIPLEXING
MULTIPLE TASKS
Hanan Potash, La Jolla, Calif., assignor to Burroughs Corpora-
tion, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,717
Int. C1.3 G06F 3/04
U.S. CI. 364—900 10 Qaims
"J—
26
'3
30
^. ''*" r^
EXEOjU
lOCiC
JNtT
??B - *
-1-4- --220 i^^f '
W BCSPONM
MfSSkOF
1. A digital device for time multiplexing the execution of
multiple tasks, each of said tasks being defined by a sequence of
control words in a control memory in said device, at least one
control word in each sequence causing an output message to be
sent on output lines in said device, said at least one output
message calling for a response message to be received on input
lines in said device; wherein the improvement comprises:
means for sending control signals representative of respec-
tive resume addresses along with each of said output
messages that are sent on said output lines;
means for suspending the execution of each task for which a
said resume address is sent and for executing another task
in lieu thereof;
means for receiving on said input lines said response mes-
sages that are called for by said sent output messages along
with said corresponding respective control signals; and
means for resuming the execution of a previously suspended
task following the receipt of a response message by exe-
cuting control words in said control memory beginning at
the resume address that is represented by the received
control signals.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
833
4,393,466
METHOD OF ANALYZING PARTICLES IN A DILUTE
FLUID SAMPLE
Fred H. Deindoerfer, Northridge; Sherman E. DeForest, En-
cinitas, and Gunner Bolz, Del Mar, all of Calif., assignors to
International Remote Imaging Systems, Chatsworth, Calif.
FUed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,418
Int. a.3 G06F 15/42
U.S. a. 364—415 11 Claims
1. A method of displaying electronically concentrated mi-
croscopic particles, from a dilute biological fluid sample con-
taining said particles, comprising:
distributing said fluid sample over an extended area with
substantially no particle overlapping other particles;
forming a plurality of optical still images of said sample over
said area, with each optical image representing a different
portions of said area;
converting each of said optical still images to an electronic
image;
compositing the images of the different particles from said
electronic images to form one resultant electronic image;
processing the resultant image; and
displaying said processed image,
whereby said processed image is an image of electronically
concentrated microscopic particles.
4,393,467
LOCKUP CONTROLLING SYSTEM FOR VARIABLE
SPEED, AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION
Nobuaki Mild; Mutsumi Kawamoto, both of Nagoya; Kazuhiko
Shibata, Ai^yo; Tsuyoshi Yoshida, Toyota, and Hiroyuki
Amano, Chiryu, all of Japan, assignors to Aisin- Warner Kabu-
shiki Kaisha and Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha, both of, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 181,537
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 1, 1979, 54-111927;
Sep. 1, 1979, 54-111928; Sep. 1, 1979, 54-111929
Int. a.3 G06F 15/20; B60K 41/08
U.S. a. 364—424.1 33 Claims
1. A lockup controlling system for an automatic, variable
speed transmission including a directly coupled clutch and a
hydraulic circuit including a fluid path switching means and
solenoid valve means which causes the engagement and disen-
gagement of the directly coupled clutch comprising:
first means for sensing an operating condition of the trans-
mission and for producing a first signal in accordance
therewith;
second means for sensing an operating condition of an en-
gine to which the transmission is coupled and for produc-
ing a second signal in accordance therewith;
solenoid driver means for selectively energizing or deener-
gizing the solenoid valve means in response to a solenoid
control signal; and
electronic control means including means for storing refer-
ence data in the form of one of the operating condition of
the transmission and the operating condition of the engine,
addressed by the form of the other of the operating condi-
tion of the transmission and the operating condition of the
engine, and indicative of boundaries between regions
where a lockup operation of the transmission is advanta-
geous and regions where the lockup is advantageously
terminated, said reference data being provided for a plu-
rality of speed stages; means for reading said first and
second signals; means for reading out reference data ad-
dressed by one of said first and second signals and compar-
ing the other of said first and second signals with the
read-out reference data to provide a solenoid control
signal for energizing or deenergizing the solenoid valve
means.
4,393,468
BIT SLICE MICROPROGRAMMABLE PROCESSOR FOR
SIGNAL PROCESSING APPLICATIONS
Bernard J. New, Los Gatos, Calif., assignor to Advanced Micro
Devices, Inc., Sunnyvale, Calif.
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,675
Int. a.3 G06F 13/00
U.S. Q. 364—736 11 Qaims
_ T I ■-*-••*■ 4-' MUX M
•^i ,Mo »5- ,.fyr ifois
lOb
8?^»ltGl6g ^ „
-"t;'!#.iuii:,
. 08
— CTJsf,.
9 1« «(^c :tHO)
•rt>stort
1. An integrated circuit device for processing digital data in
response to instruction signals in connection with a digital
memory means and multiplier means, said device comprising:
a plurality of storage registers for storing said data;
an arithmetic logic unit for performing preselectable arith-
metic and logic operations on said data in response to said
instruction signals;
first means for selectively coupling said digital memory
means and preselectable ones of said storage registers for
moving data between said memory means and said prese-
lected storage registers in response to said instruction
signals;
second means for selectively coupling preselectable ones of
said storage registers and said arithmetic logic unit to said
834
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
multiplier means for moving data from said preselected
storage registers and said arithmetic logic unit to said
multiplier means in response to said instruction signals;
third means for selectively coupling said multiplier means to
preselectable ones of said storage register means and said
arithmetic logic unit for moving data from said multiplier
means to said preselected storage registers and said arith-
metic logic means in response to said instruction signals;
and
fourth means for selectively coupling preselectable ones of
said storage registers for moving data through said prese-
lected storage registers in response to said instruction
signals,
wherein said first, second, third and fourth selective cou-
pling means and said arithmetic logic unit are simulta-
neously operable in response to said instruction signals.
4,393,470
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE COUNTING AND
MANAGEMENT OF ASYNCHRONOUS EVENTS
EMITTED BY PERIPHERAL DEVICES IN A DATA
PROCESSING SYSTEM
Pierre V. L. Miard, Noisy le Grand, France, assignor to Com-
pagnie Internationale pour ITnfonnatique Cii-Honeywell Bull
(Societe Anonyme), Paris, France
Filed Not. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,726
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 19, 1979, 79 28422
Int. a.3 G06F 3/00
U.S. a. 364—200 18 Qaims
"j;:'
2__J 5 10
:f-~f
V V ^ • -.- L i J
4,393,469
PROCESS CONTROL APPARATUS
Raymond T. G. Boute, Destelbergen, Belgium, assignor to Inter-
national Standard Electric Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 830,505, Sep. 6, 1977, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 670,327, Mar. 25, 1976. This application
Oct. 2, 1978, Ser. No. 947,386
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 1, 1975,
7503820
Int. a.3 G06F 9/06
U.S. a. 364—900 5 Qaims
DATA
SELECTOR
CONTflCX UNIT
1. A method for managing asynchronous messages emitted
by peripheral devices in a data processing system of the type
including a central processing system, a plurality of peripheral
devices, and a microprogrammed input-output controller for
controlling data transfer between the peripheral devices and
the central processing system, said method comprising the
steps of: signalling to the input-output controller each asyn-
chronous message emitted by a peripheral device; forming in
the input-output controller an event message intended for
informing the central processing system of the asynchronous
message; and accessing a transmitted events counter assigned
to the particular peripheral device and comparing the content
of this transmitted events counter with the content of a bound-
ary register assigned to the particular peripheral device and
containing a limit value; and, if the content of the accessed
transmitted events counter is less than the content of the as-
signed boundary register, then placing the event message in a
primary waiting queue where event messages wait for action
by the central processing system, and incrementing by one the
content of the accessed transmitted events counter; or, if the
content of the accessed transmitted events counter is equal to
or greater than the content of the assigned boundary register,
then placing the event message in a secondary waiting queue
where the event message remains so long as the content of the
accessed transmitted events counter is equal to or greater than
the content of the assigned boundary register.
1. A process control apparatus including a memory for
storing a program of instructions and a control unit, said con-
trol unit including an input circuit having a plurality of inputs
for receiving signals representing the condition of said plural-
ity of inputs, said control unit adapted to perform a selected
one of said instructions in reading the input condition signal of
a selected input to provide a value for a selected one of a
plurality of outputs, the output variables each being related to
the condition of said inputs of predetermined relationship and
said control unit further including an output circuit with a
plurality of outputs via which said plurality of output variables
can be set and read, wherein said memory comprises storage
for a first set of single type instructions, each such instruction
correlated with the address of an input to be read and means in
said control unit for deriving from the condition of said input
read the address of a next following instruction from among at
least two instructions of said program.
4,393,471
MEMORY CELL ARRANGEMENT FOR A STATIC
MEMORY
Cornells M. Hart, and Jan Lohstroh, both of Eindhoven, Nether-
lands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,816
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Nov. 15, 1S>79,
7908340
Int. a.3 GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—154 6 Qaims
1. A memory-cell arrangement for a static memory, realized
in integrated circuit technology, which is provided with a
number of control lines for writing, reading and retaining the
memory information in the cell, which cell comprises two
cross-coupled transistors which are connected to the control
lines, characterized in that the cell is connected to at most
three control lines, at least one control line being connected to
the collector of the one transistor of the cell via a first diode
and to the collector of the other transistor of the cell via the
series connection of a resistor and a second diode, said diodes
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
835
having an exponential current-voltage characteristic with the
expoenent (qV)/(mkT), where q represents the elementary
4,393,473
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY PRESET aRCUITRY
Roger V. Rufford, Redwood City, Calif., assignor to Fairchild
Camera & Instrument Corp., Mountain View, Calif.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,893
Int. a.' GllC 7/00. 11/40
U.S. a. 365—190 — 6 Qaims
charge, V the voltage, k Boltzmann's constant, T the absolute
temperature and m a constant greater than 1.
4,393,472
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY CIRCUIT
Hiroshi Shimada, Tokyo, and Keizo Aoyama, Yamato, both of
Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,803
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 27, 1979, 54-169187
Int. CV GllC 7/00, 11/40
U.S. Q. 365—190 6 Claims
LEFT
CELL
;roup
IMLl
buLx A2 A3 A4
lAoX6iKAZHAj)vi4)
' ADWk
Right
MEMORT
CELL
fBOUR
IWRl
1. A semiconductor memory circuit comprising:
a right memory cell group and a left memory cell group,
each having a plurality of rows and columns correspond-
ing to word lines and bit lines, respectively;
a plurality of word decoders respectively connected to
corresponding ones of said rows, said word decoders
being connected between the right and left memory cell
groups and receiving row address signals specifying a
word Hne within the memory cell group to be selected;
and
a plurality of column decoders correspondingly connected
to respective ones of said columns for receiving column
address signals specifying the bit within the memory cell
group to be selected;
a plurality of right memory cell group selection and drive
gates operatively connected between respective ones of
said word decoders and respective ones of said rows
connected to said right memory cell group;
a plurality of left memory cell group selection and drive
gates operatively connected between respective ones of
said word decoders and respective ones of said rows
connected to said left memory cell group; and
discriminating means for discriminating whether the mem-
ory cell to be selected is located in the right or left mem-
ory cell group, for providing an output responsive to said
discriminating means, and for controlling the right and left
memory cell group selection and drive gates in accor-
dance with the output of said discriminating means.
I««i I
f>S _/?^-
[ ,00 v* C" v°
^ >»* i^H >-tt
ACSCT INPUT
BUFFER
f->^
1. Circuitry for presetting a bipolar random access memory,
said memory including a plurality of memory cells in a matrix
of columns and rows, each of said plurality of cells including a
bistable flip-flop with each of the inverters of said flip-flop
having first and second emitters, the first emitters of all mem-
ory cells in each row of said matrix being coupled together and
to a bottom word line terminating in a first grounded current
source, the second emitters of all memory cells in each column
being coupled to one of a plurality of bit line pairs, each bit line
inset pairs being terminated in a second grounded current
source, each of said bit line pairs being coupled to a bit line
clamping circuit, said memory presetting circuitry comprising:
reset signal input circuitry for producing a high output
signal during operation of said memory and a low output
signal for presetting said memory;
first circuit means interposed between each bottom word
line and its respective first grounded current source, and
responsive to said low output signal for breaking the
circuit between said word line and its current source and
for applying Vcc to each of said word lines;
second circuit means coupled between each bit line clamp-
ing circuit and its respective power source, said second
circuit means responsive to said low output signal for
disabling said clamping circuit;
third circuit means coupled to each bit line in each pair of
said plurality of bit line pairs, said third circuit means
responsive to said low output signal for drawing current
from said bit line; and
read/write control means interposed between each bft line
and a positive voltage source for selectively applying said
positive voltage to one bit line in each of said pairs.
836
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,474
EPROM AND RAM CELL LAYOUT WITH EQUAL PITCH
FOR USE IN FAULT TOLERANT MEMORY DEVICE OR
THE LIKE
David J. McEIroy, Houston, Tex., assignor to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 88,709, Oct. 26, 1979. This application
Feb. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 120,429
Int. a.3 GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—200 12 Oaims
I!
«HiiKu
I i 1 -'■'
cell in a nonvolatile semiconductor memory device formed of
an array of rows and columns of memory cells comprising:
one or more reference memory cells;
a reference voltage supply connected to said reference mem-
ory cells, wherein said reference voltage is greater than
the threshold voltage and less than the storage voltage of
said memory cells;
a plurality of differential sense amplifiers;
means for selectively coupling each column of memory cells
to one input of a corresponding one of said plurality of
differential sense amplifiers; and
means for selectively coupling one or more of said reference
memory cells to the other input of each of said plurality of
differential sense amplifiers, wherein the output of the
selected differential sense amplifier is related to the stor-
age capability of a selected memory cell.
4,393,476
RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY DUAL WORD LINE
RECOVERY aRCUITRY
Warren R. Ong, Cupertino, Calif., assignor to Fairchild Camera
& Instrument Corp., Mountain View, Calif.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,767
Int. a.3 GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—203 7 Qaims
1. A fault tolerant semiconductor memory device formed in
a face of a semiconductor body comprising: a data memory
array at said face composed of rows and columns of read/write
memory cells, and a plurality programmable cells laid out at
said face in rows of the same pitch as and aligned with said
rows of the data memory array, each of the programmable
cells being individually programmed to retain indefinitely an
indication of a faulty cell present in the aligned row of memory
cells, and at least one row of redundant cells for replacing one
of said rows of memory cells containing a faulty cell in re-
sponse to the programmable cell for such row being pro-
grammed.
TO ■•
^ ""^
. 4,393,475
NON-VOLATILE SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY AND
THE TESTING METHOD FOR THE SAME
Norihisa Kitagawa, and Eisaburo Iwamoto, both of Tokyo, Ja-
pan, assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas,
Tex.
Filed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 229,027
Int. a.3 GllC 11/40
VJS. a. 365—201 3 Gaims
r4 i5 14 15 If 3 19
ChO""""!! [3
J ii i - 1 1 Tn
T'TT'T' ^T ' , ■
o P]--o Dj
HC > HC > hC >
I>^
!L~2i '[~2< '.
''■'''' S7 '^ — W
OUT. OUT,.
1. A system for determining the storage capability of each
1. Discharge circuitry for rapidly discharging each of a
plurality of electrical conductors when the voltage thereon
drops from a first selected voltage level through a mid-state
transition toward a second voltage level, said circuitry com-
prising:
a plurality of first transistors each coupled in series with a
resistance element being one of said plurality of conduc-
tors and a first current source conductor common to the
emitters of all of said first transistors;
control circuitry coupled to the base of each of said plurality
of first transistors and to its respective electrical conduc-
tor, said control circuitry applying to said base a voltage
of one y/be below the voltage on said respective conduc-
tor, the particular first transistor of said plurality that
receives the highest base voltage from its control circuitry
establishing the voltage level on said first current source
conductor and the emitter of each of said plurality of first
transistors;
a plurality of second transistors each coupled between one of
said plurality of conductors and a second current source
conductor common to the emitters of all of said second
transistors, the base of each of said second transistors
being coupled to the collector of a corresponding one of
said first transistors, the particular second transistor of
said plurality that receives the highest base voltage estab-
lishing the voltage level on said second current source
conductor and the emitters of each of said plurality of
second transistors.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
837
4,393,477
TEMPERATURE RESPONSIVE REFRESH CONTROL
CIRCUIT
Tatsunori Murotani, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,465
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 11, 1979, 54-160554
Int. a.3 GllC 7/00; H03K 3/282
U.S. a. 365—222 6 Qaims
1. A memory circuit comprising a memory cell array includ-
ing a plurality of memory cells, each of said memory cells
storing data in a dynamic manner; an oscillator for generating
an oscillation signal having a frequency characteristic with a
positive temperature coefficient, said oscillator including a first
terminal receiving a first potential, a second terminal receiving
a second potential, an output terminal from which said oscilla-
tion signal is derived, first to third nodes, a first resistor made
of polycrystalline silicon and coupled between said first termi-
nal and said first node, a second resistor made of polycrystal-
line silicon and coupled between said first terminal and said
second node, a first capacitor coupled between said first node
and said second terminal, a second capacitor coupled between
said second node and said second terminal, a first field effect
transistor coupled beteen said first node and said second termi-
nal and having a gate coupled to said third node, a second field
effect transistor coupled between said second node and said
second terminal and having a gate coupled to said first node, a
third field effect transistor coupled between said third node
and said second terminal and having a gate coupled to said
second node, a fourth field effect transistor coupled between
said first terminal and said third node, a third capacitor cou-
pled between said third node and a gate of said fourth transis-
tor, a fifth field effect transistor coupled between said first
terminal and the gate of said fourth transistor and having a gate
coupled to said first terminal, and means for connecting said
third node to said output terminal; and refresh means respon-
sive to said oscillation signal for operatively refreshing at least
one of said memory cells.
4,393,478
MONOLITHICALLY INTEGRATED SEMICONDUCTOR
MEMORY WITH DUMMY AND CHARGE
EQUALIZATION CELLS
Dieter Kantz, Munich, and Eugen Seher, Grafenau, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft,
Berlin and Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,344
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 31,
1980, 3029108
Int. a.3 GllC 7/00. 7/06
U.S. a. 365—210 6 Qaims
1. MonoUthically integrated semiconductor memory having
a matrix formed of identical information storage cells arranged
in rows and columns in the form of single-transistor storage
cells, a respective comparator and a dummy cell, likewise
provided by a single-transistor storage cell, being operatively
associated either with each matrix column or each matrix row,
comprising a respective second single-transistor storage cell
provided as a charge equalization cell and identical, at least
with respect to storage capacity with the dummy cell and
operatively associated with each of the dummy cells, each of
said charge equalization cells respectively having a drive bal-
anced relative to the drive of the dummy cell operatively
associated therewith so that, in a first phase triggered by the
respective dummy cell having been addressed by an addressing
signal, the dummy cell storage capacity is charged and the
charging state of the storage capacity of the respective charge
equalization cell is set so that the charging state in said charge
equalization cell corresponds to the signal inverse to said ad-
DL WL,
AL
)F
VL,
I Hi
*00
WR,
OR
BL,
I
LV.
1) -L
i,(R)
MffiS
'ss
i
'^m
dressing signal effecting the charging of the dummy cell, so
that, in a second operating phase, the storage capacity of the
dummy cell and the storage capacity of said charge equaliza-
tion cell are connected in parallel for charge equalization, and
so that, in a third operating phase, the respective storage ca-
pacities of the dummy cell and said charge equalization cell are
again separated by driving the comparator from the dummy
cell.
4,393,479
METHOD FOR ERASING DATA OF A NON-VOLATILE
SEMICONDUCTOR MEMORY INTEGRATED ORCUIT
Nguyen T. Du, Hatogaya, and Akihide Asao, Ohita, both of
Japan, assignors to Texas Instruments Incorporated, Dallas,
Tex.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,179
Int. a.3 GllC 13/00
U.S. a. 365—218 3 Qaims
o o a o 5 5 a th a'
msyr^OAL
.13
1. A method for erasing data of a floating-gate non-volatile
semiconductor memory integrated circuit comprising the steps
of writing data into memory cells of said memory integrated
circuit by selectively charging the floating gates thereof and
Erasing such data by irradiating an X-ray beam at a wavelength
of 0.23 to 10 A to a dosage of approximately 10* to 10^ Rads to
said memory cells through a plastic package.
4,393,480
ADDRESS BUFFER ORCUTT
Hiroshi Shimada, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Figitsu Limited,
Kawasaki, Japan
FUed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,197
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 16, 1980, 55-18018
Int. Ci} GllC 11/40
U.S. Q. 365—227 13 Claims
1. An address buffer circuit, having an active period which
has high and low levels and having a standby period, which
generates a pair of complementary output signals correspond-
ing to an address input signal, comprising:
buffer circuit means for buffering the address input signal;
means, operatively connected to said buffer circuit means,
for suspending power consumption by said address buffer
838
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
circuit when in the stand-by period responsive to an exter-
nal signal;
output means, operatively connected to said buffer circuit
means, having a par of output terminals for outputting said
pair of complementary output signals; and
copying data in at least one of said nonvolatile memory
cells to its corresponding said volatile cell.
vcc
♦L *u
-*[T4 p*[T5
II
12
01, n-
4,393,482
SHIFT REGISTER
Kunihiro Yamada, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 204,923
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 8, 1979, 54-144838;
Nov. 8, 1979, 54-144839
Int. a.3 GllC 8/00
U.S. O. 365—236 5 Qaims
short circuit means, operatively connected between said pair
of output terminals of said output means, for forcing the
potential of said pair of output terminals to a same poten-
tial between the high and low levels of said address buffer
circuit in the active period by electrically connecting said
pair of output terminals in said stand-by period.
4,393,481
NONVOLATILE STATIC RANDOM ACCESS MEMORY
SYSTEM
William H. Owen, Mountain View; Richard T. Simko, Los
Altos, and Wallace E. Tchon, Sunnyvale, all of Calif., assign-
ors to Xicor, Inc., Milpitas, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 71,499, Aug. 31, 1979, Pat. No.
4,263,644. This application Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,131
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 21,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? GllC 13/00
U.S. a. 365—228 10 Qaims
ft-rn-.-u:.--'..'
•^' I,
i ■ f t ■
ni'.nr.nr. ;
a. «. » » >. I.I,
'mAu^'^
1. A shift register of the type capable of performing shift
operations by changing the access of a random access memory
comprising:
a random access memory having a memory capacity of 2*
words,
where 2* = n and n is the number of steps required for said
shift register;
a k-bit counter adapted to perform a counting operation
when a clock pulse is input thereof an then to input, via a
k-bit operation unit, the count output to said random
access memory as an address for writing an input data in
said random access memory; and wherein
said k-bit operation unit is adapted to perform an operation
with respect to said count output of said k-bit counter and
the address of desired shifted data and then to output the
operated result as an address for reading said shifted data
from said random access memory, whereby high speed
reading operation of said shifted data is attained.
DtcoafU
■^
->
li
1-t*
■.iHf-;
"1 'I
1. A nonvolatile electrically-alterable integrated circuit
memory device comprising:
means for receiving a low level power supply for powering
said device;
memory array means comprising a plurality of volatile mem-
ory cells for storing of data in binary form and a plurality
of nonvolatile memory cells for nonvolatile storing of data
in binary form;
store means responsive to a store command signal for copy-
ing the present data state of each said volatile memory cell
into a corresponding said nonvolatile memory cell, said
store means including high voltage generator means re-
sponsive to said store command signal for utilizing said
low level power supply for generating a high voltage
pulse signal and for coupling said pulse signal to each said
nonvolatile memory cell, thereby effecting said copying
of data; and
recall means responsive to a recall command signal for
4,393,483
TEST SET FOR A DIRECTIONAL COMMAND ACTIVE
SONOBUOY SYSTEM (DICASS)
David C. Hammond, Hatboro; Stephen M. Elchenko, Pipers-
ville; John M. Tralies, Norristown; Peter W. Verburgt, Perka-
sie, and Leon R. Robinson, Morrisville, all of Pa., assignors to
The United States of America as represented by the Secretary
of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,000
Int. a.3 H04B 17/00
U.S. CI. 367—13 1 Claim
MICROnCHE APPENDIX INCLUDED
(2 Microfiche, 100 Pages)
1. An apparatus for testing an active target-detecting sono-
buoy system comprising:
downlink means for categorizing the modulation of a first
radio frequency carrier signal thereby producing digital
data indicative of the frequency and pulse width of the
modulation;
uplink means coupled to said downlink means for generating
a second radio frequency carrier signal modulated by
simulated target and environmental information;
controller means interconnected between said downlink and
uplink means and containing a stored program for auto-
matically analyzing said digital data to validate frequency
and pulse width of the modulation in accordance with
July 12,, 1983
ELECTRICAL
839
specified parameters and for producing an output signal
indicative of the analysis results;
peripheral input means connected to said controller means
for providing instructional information related to opera-
tional parameters of the system; and
peripheral output means connected to said controller means
for displaying instructional information related to the
operation of the system and the output signal of said con-
troller means.
4,393,484
METHOD OF STACKING SEISMIC DATA
David J. Buchanan, Burton-on-Trent; Richard Davis, Ashby-de-
la-Zouch, and Peter J. Jackson, Boundary, Nr. Burton-on-
Trent, all of England, assignors to Coal Industry (Patents)
Limited, London, England
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,321
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 19. 1979,
7936413
Int. C1.3 GOIV 1/36, 1/20
U.S. a. 367—23 7 Claims
A X| C
1. A met
V
C
thod of stacking seismological data to identify a fault
in a geological seam including the steps of arranging shots and
detectors in a seam or the surrounding strata, firing the shots
sequentially and detecting any reflections thereof with the
detectors, and selecting from the seismic traces those having a
common reflection point, wherein a target is divided into a
number of equal length segments and each trace is assigned to
the segment which contains the point at which reflections
would occur, traces belonging to the same line segment being
stacked after applying a move out correction according to the
formula:
/^=xi2+x22-»-2aciJC2Cos 2e-(-4L2+4L(xi-JC2) Sin
e
in which P is the distance travelled by seismic signal emanating
at a shot, reflecting at a point on a reflector where specular
reflection occurs, and being received at a detector;
d is the angle between shot-detector line and the reflector;
L is the length of a line extending perpendicularly from the
reflector to a point of origin on the shot-detector line;
X] is the distance between the shot and the point of origin;
X2 is the distance between the detector and the point of
origin.
4,393,485
APPARATUS FOR COMPILING AND MONFTORING
SUBTERRANEAN WELL-TEST DATA
Raymond L. Redden, Sacramento, Calif., assignor to Baker
International Corporation, Orange, Calif.
Filed May 2, 1980, Ser. No. 146,734
Int. a.5 GOIV 1/40, 1/22
U.S. a. 367—25 28 Qaims
p,2
SYSTEM
TRANSDUCERS
AC POWER
Supply
MONITOR
f
BOTTOM
HOLE
TRANSDUCERS
•■■ FILTER
«, CIRCUITS
do
t ,22
DATA I \^ RECORD/'
•■ ACQuiSll.ON f« '^ PRINT
SYSTEM SYSTEM
' — Tao :—
3.2 -^ .^ —
10
CLOCK
CIRCUIT
1
EDIT
SYSTEM
,24
36
;30
34
1. An apparatus for compiling and monitoring data during
the testing of a subterranean well having a plurality of trans-
ducers for generating signals representing production charac-
teristics of the well, including at least one transducer posi-
tioned at the surface of the well for generating a surface pro-
duction characteristic signal representing at least one of well-
head pressure, wellhead temperature, gas temperature, oil
temperature, gas differential pressure, static separator pressure,
oil flow and water flow, comprising: means connected to the
transducers for periodically storing values of the transducer
signals; means connected to said means for storing for reading
said stored value of said one surface transducer signal to gener-
ate a value for an additional operating characteristic of the
well; means connected to said means for storing and said means
for generating said additional operating characteristic value for
generating a plurality of output signals representing said stored
values and said additional operating characteristic value; a
power supply connected to power the transducers; means
connected to said power supply for generating a voltage level
signal representing the magnitude of the power supply output
voltage; and means for comparing said voltage level signal
with predetermined upper and lower voltage limits to generate
a power fluctuation signal when said voltage level signal is
outside said voltage limits.
4,393,486
\;ETH0D FOR INTERPRETING WELL LOG RECORDS
TO YIELD INDICATIONS OF GAS/OIL IN AN EARTH
FORMATION SUCH AS A SANDSTONE, LIMESTONE,
OR DOLOSTONE
Don D. Thompson, Corona Del Mar; Robert J. S. Brown, Fuller-
ton, and Richard J. Range, Anaheim, all of Calif., assignors to
Chevron Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 82,382, Oct. 5, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,702
Int. C\? GOIV 1/36, 1/30
U.S. Q. 367—73 12 Claims
1. Method for resolving events of an acoustic log of a first
840
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
well associated with at least a selected zone of an earth forma-
tion so as to determine gas/oil fractions therein by creating
synthetic gas/oil-indicating characteristics from brine-
saturated petrophysical parameters corresponding to said se-
lected zone of interest at a second well, including P-wave
velocity, bulk density and porosity, with or without mineralog-
ical inputs, as a function of gas/oil saturation, temperature and
pressure (depth), but without shear-wave velocity inputs, com-
prising the steps of:
(a) selecting a lithology for said second well at said selected
zone of interest from a group comprising sandstone, lime-
stone and dolostone:
(b) from brine-saturated bulk and shear moduli (Kw* and
Gw*) calculated from empirical equations including true
brine-satuated P-wave values (Pw*) of a sample which
corresponds to said zone of interest based on well logging
or geologic data, and estimated frame modulus values
(Ka) of said zone of interest, predicting a plurality of bulk
moduli (K*) with gas/oil present in said zone of interest in
preselected amounts:
pending portion having a slanting surface; said slanting
surfaces serving to center said stylus arm within said
cartridge housing; and
m
P«»>«Tms INCLUOOK! >»•« • MTUMTED »««
OMO BULK MOtXJtl. fRAMC MODULUS UtD P-W«Wt
MOOULLS VALUES . PKEDtCT SVNTmETIC ACOUSTIC
WW*M£TEW 1NCLU0WG VELOCITIES *S * fUNCTOW
or *W OIL / GAS SATL«ATION IN A PARTICULAR
suesuRTACE ttnmomxm
IHCRCIKNT FOR A MCW
OIL /GAS SATURAnON
COMRARt THE RREOCTED SYWTMmC ACOUSTIC
PARAMETERS WITH SttRLAR flELD ACOUtRCO OATA
_j SO AS TO PREDICT PRESENCE AND AMOUNTS Of
I t/UC OR. /GAS SATUNATION IN TiC SURSURFACC
eilVlRO»«»T Of WTIRtST
(c) predicting a multiplicity of P-wave moduli of said zone
with gas/oil present (Pgas/oil*) in said preselected
amounts based on the relationship
Pgas/oil' = ^gas/oi/* + (4/3)G»,*
where Pgas/oil* is a multiplicity of predicted P-wave moduli
with gas/oil present in said preselected amounts; Kgas/oil* is
a plurality of predicted bulk moduli of said zone with gas/oil
present in said preselected amounts; Gw* is the brine-saturated
shear modulus of said zone;
(d) predicting from acoustic velocities within said zone
calculated from step (c) as a function of different gas/oil
gravities and saturations, synthetic acoustic values based
on a relationship involving variation of said values as a
function of different gas/oil gravities and saturations; and
(e) comparing said synthetic values indexed to different
gas/oil gravities and/or saturations with actual field-pro-
duced values produced from said acoustic log to predict
amounts of gas/oil in said zone of interest.
(F) an actuating member slidably mounted on said cartridge
guide rails; said actuating member being equipped with a
wedge-shaped portion which engages said retaining An-
gers to spread them apart when said actuating member is
advanced.
4,393,488
EXPLORATION SYSTEM AND METHOD OF
DETERMINING ELASTIC PARAMETERS AND
SUBSURFACE SHAPE OF AN EARTH FORMATION SO
AS TO INDICATE LIKELIHOOD OF THE FORMATION
BEING AN ORE, MARKER ROCK, ECONOMIC
MINERAL OR THE LIKE
Gary S. Gassaway; Henry J. Richgels, both of San Rafael, and
James I. Foster, Novato, all of Calif., assignors to Chevron
Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 952,887, Oct. 8, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 238,503, Feb. 26,
1981, abandoned. This application Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,607
Int. a.3 GOIV 1/30
U.S. a. 367—75 8 Qaims
eCNERATE AMPLITUDE -vt- TIME
ft HORIZONTAL COORDINATE TAOS
FOR EACH SUB-DETECTOR V.T.R
AT EACH DETECTOR STATION
OCNERATE A S - DIMENSIONAL
HOOOORAPH
4,393,487
STYLUS CARTRIDGE
Paul J. Straub, Jr., Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,550
Int. a.3 GllB 3/58
VS. a. 369—74 10 Oalms
5. A stylus cartridge comprising:
(A) a stylus;
(B) a stylus arm having said stylus disposed at one end
thereof;
(C) a cartridge housing; said cartridge housing being pro-
vided with a pair of guide rails;
(D) means for flexibly supporting the other end of said stylus
arm in said cartridge housing;
(E) a pair of oppositely-disposed, integrally-molded flexural
retaining Angers for supporting said stylus arm in a raised
position within the confines of said cartridge housing;
each of said retaining Angers being equipped with a de-
OISPLAY EACH HOOOeRAPH ft
IDENTIFY V^ ft V, COMPONENTS
1. Method of accurately determining shape and elastic pa-
rameters of an earth formation to identify ore, marker rocks,
economic minerals or the like, using a refraction exploration
Aeld system including a series of detectors, positioned along a
line or survey at inline positions Xi, X2, . • . X„ and at least one
seismic source located adjacent to said detectors for producing
a seismic wave for travel through said formation:
(a) generating a seismic wave at a Arst sourcepoint location
adjacent said series of detectors;
(b) after said wave undergoes refraction, detecting arrival of
a refracted wave at said series of detectors at said inline
offset positions, to obtain a Arst set of traces associated
with said offset positions Xi, X2, . . . Xn;
(c) repeating steps (a) and (b) by generating a second wave
at a second sourcepoint adjacent to inline position Xq of
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
841
said detector positions, and detecting said refracted wave
to obtain a second set of traces;
(d) advancing said series of detectors a selected number of
inline positions or fractions thereof and repeating steps (a),
(b) and (c) above to obtain additional sets of traces, but in
which said additional sets of traces are associated with
more than two inline positions overlapping common inline
positions of said Arst and second sets of traces;
(e) distinguishing arrival times of shear waves from com-
pressional waves by means of a three-dimensional isomet-
ric hodograph generated by a computer-dominated pro-
cess; and
(0 depicting representations of arrival times of at least one
segment of (i) shear waves and (ii) compressional waves as
a function of inline position whereby shape of said earth
formation as well as elastic parameters indicative of likeli-
hood of said formation being an ore, marker rock, eco-
nomic mineral, and the like, are provided.
4,393,489
AUDIO PROCESSOR FOR SINGLE, CHANNEL,
MATRIXED TWO-CHANNEL AND UN-MATRIXED
TWO-CHANNEL SIGNALS
Gopi N. Mehrotra, Carmel, Ind., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
nied Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,776
Int. a.3 GllB 3/74. 27/36; H04N 5/76: H04H 5/00
U.S. a. 369—86 6 Qaims
^ r V OUT TO Ti j(T
r COWIHO UDIO
'lVT*? afm -80
1. Apparatus for processing an audio FM input signal con-
veying audio information in single-channel, matrixed two-
channel or un-matrixed two-channel form, comprising:
signal processing means including Arst and second FM de-
modulator means having input means for receiving said
audio FM input signal and output means for providing
respective Arst and second audio signals, SI and S2, and
having Arst and second defect detector means coupled to
respective ones of said demodulator means for providing
respective Arst and second audio defect indicating signals;
audio matrix means for receiving said audio signals and
being responsive to a Arst condition of a Arst control
signal supplied thereto for assuming a Arst operating mode
for producing at a Arst output terminal a Arst output signal
S3 proportional to the sum of said audio signals and for
producing at a second output terminal a second output
signal, S4, proportional to the difference of said audio
signals, said audio matrix means being responsive to a
second condition of said Arst control signal for assuming a
second operating mode wherein each of said Arst and
second output signals at said Arst and second output termi-
nals is proportional to said sum of said audio signals;
audio muting means for coupling said Arst and second audio
signals to said audio matrix means and being responsive to
Arst and second muting signals supplied thereto for mut-
ing respective ones of said Arst and second audio signals;
control means for producing said Arst control signal and a
second control signal, said control signals being represen-
tative of selected processing modes of said apparatus, said
control means being coupled to apply said Arst control
signal to said matrix means for controlling the operating
mode thereof; and
logic means for combining said Arst control signal and said
Arst defect indicating signal to form said muting signal and
for combining said second control signal and said second
defect indicating signal to form said second muting signal.
4,393,490
DIGITAL TELECOMMUNICATIONS SWITCHES
NETWORK WITH IN-BUILT FAULT IDENTIHCATION
Ernest Culiey, Broadstone, England, assignor to The Plessey
Company pic, Ilford, England and The Plessey Company pic,
Ilford, England
Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,136
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 10, 1979,
7927857
Int. a.3 H04J 3/14; H04Q 11/04
U.S. a. 370—13 3 Qaims
"»
OLT
-^^
TS
ss
J I
DIG TiL SH'TCM
WAINT*NE*(CE
R-jltiHF^
1. A telecommunications exchange switching network in-
cluding time and space switching stages in which each time
and space switching stage includes connection control stores
arranged to be cyclically read in cross-office slot order to
provide the speech path connection information for each cross-
ofAce slot and each control store includes checking means
arranged to check the authenticity of the connection speciAed
by the control store at each cross-office slot and each switch-
ing stage includes fault pattern injection means arranged to be
activated, in the event that said checking means detects an
error, to inject a characteristic pattern, which is a corrupted
speech sample and is indicative of the identity of the switching
store, into the speech path defined by the connection control
store in a particular slot.
4,393,491
AUTOMATIC SELF-TEST SYSTEM FOR A DIGITAL
MULTIPLEXED TELECOMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Robert L. Ashlock, Diamond Bar, Carl E. Gabrielson, Santa
Ana; Douglas P. Kerr, Irvine; David J. Rasmussen, Riverside;
Theodore M. Stump, Costa Mesa, and Charles W. Thode,
Tustin, all of Calif., assignors to Anaconda-Ericsson, Green-
which. Conn.
FUed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,300
Int. a.3 H04J 3/00
VS. a. 370—13 34 Claims
1. A maintenance circuit for a digital multiplexed communi-
cation system having a central office terminal and a remote
terminal with a plurality of digital-to-analog and analog-to-
digital line card interface circuits including audio line drivers
and receivers for individual telephone lines, said maintenance
1032 O.G..— 31
842
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
circuit located in said remote terminal to automatically test
said line card interface circuits whenever they are idle, com-
prising:
a data bus coupled to said line card interface circuits for
carrying digital data;
a generator means coupled to said data bus for generating a
plurality of words of digital test data;
a detector means coupled to said data bus for detecting test
data and for generating an output signal; and
PCH blAtN BUS
Tt SMM
LIMC * AND
CCMTULVriCC
TtBMINAl.
SPA**
e AND
CtNTBAt Of FiCt
eeJMiNAL
BiKitAR cooe
means to automatically, continuously determine which said
line card interface circuits are idle and for causing said
generator means to send said digital test data to said idle
line card interface circuits and for causing said detector
means to be coupled to said idle line card interface circuits
to detect the presence of digital test data after it has been
converted to analog form and then back to digital form by
said idle line card interface circuits.
4,393,492
DIGITAL SUBSCRIBER CARRIER SYSTEM INCLUDING
DROP TERMINALS AND BYPASS AND LOOPBACK
MEANS AND ALARM INDICATION MEANS
Larry D. Bishop, Colleyville, Tex., assignor to Reliance Electric
Co., Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,797
Int. a.3 H04J 3/08. 3/14
U.S. a. 370—15 29 Claims
termined format a regularly recurring bit in a predeter-
mined one of said frames for at least said channel associ-
ated with said at least one subscriber and inserting therein
a preselected value; and
(ii) means responsive to said information signal when said
signal is in said second format with said preselected bit
value for transmitting said signal in said first format in
serial fashion on said medium;
(b) remote terminal alarm means including:
(i) means responsive to said signal in said medium for con-
verting said signal to said second format;
(ii) conditioning means having an output responsive to said
signal in said second format for changing said value in said
regularly recurring bit to a value opposite to said value
inserted in said central office alarm means said means
operating not to change said value upon the occurrence of
at least one of a predetermined fault condition in said
system; and
(iii) means connected to said conditioning means output for
transmitting said signal in said first format in serial fashion;
and
(c) means included in said central office means responsive to
said signal in said first format received from said medium for
converting said signal to said second format and in response
thereto for comparing the value of said received bit to the
value of said second format transmitted bit and for generat-
ing an alarm signal when said values are the same.
27. In an N channel digital subscriber carrier system having
a central office and at least one remote terminal for serving at
least one of said subscribers connected thereto by a transmis-
sion medium and in which information signals are transmitted
on said medium in a first predetermined format which is di-
vided into a predetermined repetitive number of frames each of
which is divided into N channels each having a predetermined
number of bits, each of said N channels being associated with
a respective one of said subscribers, an alarm system compris-
ing:
(a) central ofHce alarm means including:
(i) means for identifying when said signal is in a second
predetermined format which is related to said first prede-
4,393,493
AUTOMATIC PROTECTION APPARATUS FOR SPAN
LINES EMPLOYED IN HIGH SPEED DIGITAL SYSTEMS
Allan K. Edwards, Raleigh, N.C., assignor to International Tele-
phone and Telegraph Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,133
Int. a.3 H04J 3/12, 3/14
U.S. a. 370—16 24 Claims
22. A method of providing a control code for use in commu-
nicating control information from a near end telecommunica-
tion location to a far end location which locations are in com-
munication via a digital transmission line, carrying digital data,
encompassing a plurality of sequential data frames each having
a predetermined number of binary bits, with at least one bit in
each frame indicative of a parity bit for conventionally deter-
mining whether ones of said data bits in said frame are even in
number or odd in number, comprising the steps of:
intentionally modifying said parity bit in successive frames to
provide cyclical codes each code manifesting a separate
control status;
responding to said parity bit as modified to provide said code
to enable performing a control function as specified by said
code.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
843
4,393,494
TRANSCEIVER FOR FULL-DUPLEX TRANSMISSION
OF DIGTTAL SIGNALS OVER A COMMON LINE
Piero Belforte, Turin, and Renzo Bortignon, Borgara Torinese,
both of Italy, assignors to Cselt Centro Studi e Laboratori
Telecomunicazioni S.p.A., Turin, Italy
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,009
Qaims priority, application Italy, Oct. 4, 1979, 68914 A/79
Int. a.3 H04B 1/56: H04L 5/14
U.S. a. 370—27 7 Qaims
tion, port means for transmitting onto and receiving from
certain of the telephone lines first port signals representing
voice data and for transmitting and receiving second port
signals representing voice data signals and supervisory data
signals, the telephony system further comprising communica-
tions linkage means connected to the port means for conveying
the second port signals in a predetermined format, the im-
provement of interfacing means comprising:
A. encoding means connected to the input/output bus means
for encoding signals representing supervisory data signals
in response to commands from the call processing means.
*-A 'i ' 1
1. A transceiver inserted between a signal source and a line
with at least one ungrounded conductor designed for two-way
transmission of digital signals, said conductor being provided
with a terminating impedance having a proximal end and a
distal end as seen from said signal source, comprising:
a first pair of emitter-coupled twin transistors with respec-
tive first bases, with an inverting and a noninverting first
output connected to respective first collectors thereof and
with a first input circuit including ? connection from one
of said first bases to said conductor at s?id proximal end
for picking up an outgoing signal originating at said signal
source;
a second pair of emitter-coupled twin transistors with re-
spective second bases, with an inverting and a noninvert-
ing second output connected to respective second collec-
tors thereof and with a second input circuit including a
connection from one of said second bases to said conduc-
tor at said distal end for picking up a mixture of said
outgoing signal with an incoming signal, said first invert-
ing output being directly connected to said second nonin-
verting output at a first junction, said first noninverting
output being directly connected to said second inverting
output at a second junction, said first and second pairs
having a gain ratio substantially suppressing said outgoing
signal at said junctions; and
a differential amplifier with inputs respectively connected to
said junctions and with an output connected to a signal
receiver.
' ' 4,393,495
MESSAGE TRANSLATION ARRANGEMENT FOR
TELEPHONY SYSTEM WITH ROMOTE PORT GROUPS
Edgar R. Cray, Altamonte Springs; Russell R. Davis, Seminole
County; Maynard K. Knapp, Altamonte Springs; Glenn L.
Richards; Bernard H. Root, both of Longwood, and William
W. Woodruff, Winter Springs, all of Fla., assignors to Strom-
berg-Carlson Corporation, Tampa, Fla.
I Filed Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 204,114
' Int. d? H04J 3/12; H04Q 3/54
U.S. a. 370—56 38 Qaims
1. In a telephony system for selectively interconnecting
telephone calls among a plurality of telephone lines that in-
cludes, at a first location, a plurality of port group highway
means for receiving and transmitting signals that represent
voice data and signals in a first format that represent supervi-
sory data, and call processing means including a digital data
processor and an input/output bus means for selectively inter-
connecting the plurality of port group highway means in re-
sponse to certain of a plurality of commands interpreted by the
digital data processor, said telephony system including, at a
second location that is physically remote from the first loca-
B. transfer means connected to a selected port group high-
way means, the communications linkage means and said
encoding means for converting signals between the format
of the signals at the port group highway means and said
encoding means and the formal of the signals on the com-
munications linkage means, and
C. message generating means connected to said transfer
means and to the input/output bus means for transmitting
messages to the call processing means in response to cer-
tain signals representing supervisory data signals received
in said transfer means from the communications linkage
means.
4,393,4%
METHOD FOR FEEDING CALL PROGRESS TONES
INTO CONFERENCE CONNECTIONS
Rolf Zeitraeg, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Sie-
mens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin &. Munich, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,676
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 12,
1980, 3005162
Int. Q.3 H04M 3/56
U.S. Q. 370—62 1 Qaim
1. In a method for feeding call progress tones into confer-
ence connections in a pulse code modulation (PCM) time-divi-
sion multiplex switching system, in which PCM code words
are repetitively supplied by conference subscribers, sum code
words are formed from the PCM code words and said PCM
code words are intermediately stored in one half of a first
conference memory, in which a plurality of different partial
sum code words are formed by subtracting from a sum code
word a respective different one of the supplied PCM code
words, said partial sum code words being intermediately
stored in a second conference memory before transmission of
those partial sum code words to each subscriber, such partial
sum code word containing only the code words supplied by
the other conference subscribers, and in which the above steps
are performed for subsequently-arriving PCM words with
respect to a second half of the first conference memory and the
conference memory halves alternately so perform the above
steps at each new receipt of PCM code words, the improve-
ment comprising the steps of:
in addition to forming the sum code words, forming call
844
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
progress tone sum code words, by adding code words
stored in the memory halves to respective call progress
tone code words;
intermediately storing the sum code words and respective
call progress tone sum code words; and
terminal (SDO-(m+ 1)) of the (m+ l)th port means (103-
(m+ 1)) to said input terminal (SDI-m) of the m th port
means (103-m) for all n said port means (103-1 to 103-n)
according to said order of interconnection.
Mill
fifqtster
It
Mult.pld
4,393,498
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR TESTING SYSTEMS
THAT COMMUNICATE OVER DIGITAL BUSES BY
TRANSMITTING AND RECEIVING SIGNALS IN THE
FORM OF STANDARDIZED MULTI-BIT BINARY
ENCODED WORDS
Tee-Squant-Nee Jackson, Seattle; Paul M. Vernon, Redmond,
and David A. Schoen, Bothell, all of Wash., assignors to The
Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,371
Int. a.J G06F 11/00
U.S. a. 371—20 8 Qaims
J4
I KeYoaupMm
fleqister
selectively forming partial sum code words by subtracting a
PCM code word pertaining to a particular subscriber from
either the intermediately stored sum code words or the
respective call progress tone sum code words on the basis
of call progress criteria.
4,393,497
LOOP SWITCHING SYSTEM
Richard F. Cantwell, Jr., Boulder, Colo., assignor to Bell Tele-
phone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
FUed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,469
Int. a.3 H04J 3/08: H04Q 11/04
U.S. a. 370—89 15 Qaims
102,
SKu'lli
lOOf
UNCIH
ADlUSTiH
lOJ-n,
/10?-n
INttRF«Ct
lllTt»f»Ct
soon
lOJIni'll;
lOSWl) U»if!H! MHn'ir
HSliiltn H-
imtBtACi I—
1. A communication system for serially interconnecting n
communication circuits (Tl-Tm, ST(n — m)-Stn) comprising:
n port means (103-1 to 103-n), each having an input (SDI-i)
and an output terminal (SDO-i), associated on a one-to-
one basis with said n communication circuits (Tl-Tm,
ST(n — m)-STn) for interfacing said n communication
circuits (Tl-Tn, ST(n — m)-STn) to said communication
system;
control means (101) for establishing an order of interconnec-
tion for all of said n port means; and
interconnection means (100) connected to said input (SDI-i)
and said output (SDO-i) terminals of all of said n port
means (103-1 to 103-n) and responsive to said control
means (101) for carrying data messages from said output
or
_L
Tx TtsriiaiDsj
'"■40
1. A test apparatus for testing systems that communicate by
transmission and/or reception of transmit and/or receive
words, respectively, in which such words are organized in a
predetermined multiple bit format, comprising:
computer means including a memory;
data entry means for entering into the memory of said com-
puter means the content of a first multi-bit transmit word
in either engineering notation or in binary encoded nota-
tion;
said computer means further including engineering to binary
conversion processing means for accepting and convert-
ing the content of a transmit word in said memory when
entered in said engineering notation, into said binary en-
coded notation;
a first transmit port;
transmit circuit means responsive to said computer means
for formatting and transmitting said first transmit word in
binary notation from said first transmit port;
receiving circuit means for receiving a multiple bit receive
word in binary notation, said receiving circuit means
including means responsive to said computer means for
receiving and storing said receive word in binary notation
in said memory of said computer means;
said computer means further having binary to engineering
conversion processing means for converting the context
of said first transmit word to engineering notation when
entered into said memory in binary notation, and for
converting the receive word, as received in binary nota-
tion, to engineering notation;
a display device responsive to display control signals for
displaying alphanumeric symbols; and,
said computer means including a first display control pro-
cessing means for generating display control signals that
cause said display device to concurrently display the
contents of the first transmit word both in engineering and
binary notations, and said computer means including a
second display control processing means for generating
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
845
display control signals that cause said display device to
concurrently display the contents of the received word
both in binary and engineering notations.
4,393,499
ADAPTIVE SIGNAL QUALITY MEASUREMENT
oRcurr FOR psk and fsk demodulators
Randall G. Evans, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Ford Aerospace
A Communications Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,800
Int. a? H04B n/00: H04L 1/20
U.S. CI. 371—5 8 Claims
_.^ ,1 TENTHS
JlilrNtk JELCMENT
(a) reading out the flag data for one of the data units from the
bubble memory with the processor;
(b) modifying the flag data for the one of the data units with
the processor to indicate that a modification of the one of
the data units is underway;
(c) writing the flag data back into the bubble memory with
the processor;
(d) reading, modifying and writing the one of the data units
stored in the bubble memory with the processor;
(e) reading out the flag data for the one of the data units with
the processor;
(0 modifying the flag data for the one of the data units with
the processor to indicate that the modification is com-
pleted;
(g) writing the flag data into the bubble memory with the
processor;
(h) reading out the flag data from the bubble memory for all
of the data units with the processor; and
(i) testing the flag data for all of the data units with the
processor to determine if all modifications have been
completed, thereby determining if the power failure has
occurred during modification of the data units.
{ATE MEMORY 80 rWit i 'j'WUl<riO» OVERf 0<r
1. A circuit for measuring the signal quality of an antipodal
stream of data bits comprising:
connected to said data stream, means for generating, at the
same frequency as the bit frequency of said data stream,
several different repetitive patterns of pulses, each pattern
having a deadband region and an error region;
connected to said data stream and to said generating means,
means for combining said stream with one of said patterns
so that bits from said stream can be observed to fall within
either of said regions by virtue of observing means con-
nected to said combining means.
4,393,500
METHOD OF MODIFYING DATA STORED IN
NON-VOLATILE MEMORY AND TESTING FOR POWER
FAILURE OCCURRING DURING MODinCATION
Ryoji Imazeki, Hachioji, and Michiya Inoue, Hino, both of
Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Fanuc Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 179,840
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 4, 1979, 54-113260
Int. a.3 G06F 11/ 10; GllC 29/00
U.S. Q. 371—13 3 Qaims
SEOuE*«Cf
ARtA I-
Bi AN"
3. A method of modifying data units and testing for a power
failure that occurs during modifications using flag data stored
in a bubble memory with a processor, comprising the steps of:
4,393,501
LINE PROTOCOL FOR COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Richard A. Kellogg, Syracuse; John B. May, Liverpool, and
Brian C. Johnson, Syracuse, all of N.Y., assignors to General
Electric Company, Somersworth, N.H.
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,205
Int. Q.3 G06F 11/10
U.S. Q. 371—33 10 Qaims
1. A method of serially transferring digital signal informa-
tion items, between a master processing unit and a slave pro-
cessing unit, each functioning as a sending unit and a receiving
unit, comprising the stejjs of:
(a) sending, from said master processing unit and receiving
at said slave processing unit, a clock signal having a prede-
termined bit rate;
(b) sending from a sending unit and receiving at a receiving
unit; a prescribed number of information items in bit serial-
ized form, each information item being preceded by a
clock signal, whereby the information items are sent and
received at the bit rate of said clock signal; and
(c) sending from the receiving unit and receiving at the
sending unit, after the prescribed number of information
items have been received at the receiving unit, an ac-
knowledgment signal representative of the receipt of the
prescribed number of information items.
846
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,502
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR COMMUNICATING
DIGITAL INFORMATION WORDS BY
ERROR-CORRECTION ENCODING
Masato Tanaka; Shunsuke Furukawa; Ikuo Iwamoto, and To-
shitada Doi, all of Sony Corp., 6-7-35, Kitashinagawa,
Shinagawa-Ku, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,625
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54-130310
Int. a.3 G06F 11/10
U.S. a. 371—40 43 Qaims
/• /i3 - . -f
bt*CS)OkK,
/
4A
t
1
1 IH
t
~T
N
1
1
1
P— •
;
5
^
1
M
(*»M)
-J
M
L
1. A method of communicating a sequence of digital infor-
mation words, comprising the steps of: separating said informa-
tion words into a sequence of odd information words and a
sequence of even information words; time-displacing the sepa-
rated odd and even information words from each other by a
predetermined amount; encoding said odd information words
in an error-correcting code; separately encoding said even
information words in an error-correcting code; combining said
encoded time-displaced odd and even information words into a
transmission block; and transmitting said transmission block.
4,393,503
CAVITY LENGTH CONTROL SYSTEM FOR A
MULTILINE HEL
Albert W. Angelbeck, Glastonbury, and Gary E. Palma, Rocky
Hills, both of Conn., assignors to United Technologies Corpo-
ration, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,518
Int. a.^ HOIS 3/10
U.S. a. 372-20 4 Qaims
-/y/
fCfSfffVC£
seiM
^-f/y
' J
.w
J-JV
sjr
1. An apparatus for controlling the cavity length of an injec-
tion locked laser comprising:
(a) means for generating a master oscillator beam;
(b) means for generating a frequency-shifted beam there-
from, having at least two lines shifted in frequency from
corresponding lines in said master oscillator beam by first
and second predetermined frequencies;
(c) means for transmitting a portion of said master oscillator
beam as a reference beam, along a predetermined refer-
ence path length;
(d) a resonant optical cavity comprising a gain medium,
means for transporting a portion of said master oscillator
beam about a cavity path length passing through said gain
medium, and cavity length means for varying said cavity
path length;
(e) means for coupling said portion of said master oscillator
beam into said optical cavity, and for coupling an ampli-
fied beam out of said cavity along an amplified beam path,
including said cavity path, having a variable length sub-
stantially equal to said predetermined reference path
length and path length means for varying said variable
length;
(0 path length control means, responsive to said frequency-
shifted beam, said reference beam and said amplified
beam, for forming a signal for equalizing said predeter-
mined reference path length and said variable length,
coupled to said path length means;
(g) cavity length control means, responsive to said frequen-
cy-shifted beam, said reference beam and said amplified
beam, for generating a signal for controlling said cavity
path length, further comprising:
(i) means for generating detected signals, at said first and
second frequencies, from a reference detector respon-
sive to said frequency-shifted beam and said reference
beam and from an output detector responsive to said
frequency-shifted beam to said amplified beam;
(ii) means for mixing said detected signals at said first
frequency from both said detectors to form a first fine
error signal, means for further mixing said signals at said
second frequency from both said detectors to form a
second fine error signal;
(iii) means for homodyning the detected signal from said
reference detector to form a reference beat signal, hav-
ing a beat frequency equal to the difference of said first
and second frequencies, means for homodyning the
signal from said output detector, to form an output beat
signal at said beat frequency;
(iv) means for mixing said reference beat signal and said
output beat signal to form a coarse error signal; and
(v) means for combining said first and second fine error
signals with said coarse error signal in a predetermined
manner to form a cavity length error signal for control-
ling said cavity length means.
4,393,504
HIGH POWER SEMICONDUCTOR LASER
Dan Botez, Mt. Holly, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,511
Int. a.3 HOIL 3/19
U.S. a. 372—45 8 Qaims
1. In a semiconductor laser having a pair of end faces at least
one of which is partially transparent to light and comprising a
substrate having a pair of opposed major surfaces, with a pair
of spaced, substantially parallel grooves in a first major surface
with a land therebetween; a first confinement layer overlying
the first major surface of the substrate and the surfaces of the
grooves; an active layer overlying the first confinement layer;
a second confinement layer overlying the active layer; and first
and second electrical contacts overlying portions of the second
confinement layer and the second major surface respectively;
wherein the substrate and the first confinement layer are of one
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
847
conductivity type and the second confinement layer is of the
opposite conductivity type and wherein the index of refraction
of the active layer at the wavelength of light emitted by the
laser is greater than that of the first and second confinement
layers; 1 1
the improvement which comprises a pair of spaced, substan-
tially parallel anti-guiding regions on both sides of that
jxjrtion of the second confinement layer over the land and
extending a distance through the second confinement
layer from a surface thereof towards, but not intersecting,
the active layer, and having an index of refraction at said
wavelength which is greater than that of the second con-
finement layer.
4,393,505
GAS DISCHARGE LASER HAVING A BUFFER GAS OF
NEON
Theodore S. Fahlen, San Jose, Calif., assignor to GTE Sylvania
Incorporated, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 927,428, Jul. 24, 1978, abandoned. This
application Nov. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 371,637
Int. a.^ HOIS 3/22
U.S. a. 372—57 4 Qaims
gettering substance in contact with the gas mixture contained
within said laser, said substance having high sorbitivity to
hydrogen gas at room temperature and decreasing sorbitivity
to hydrogen gas with increasing temperature, further compris-
ing a housing consisting of nickel-plated aluminum members,
the surfaces thereof being passivated with a nickel oxide coat-
ing.
10. In an assembled sealed-off RF excited CO2 waveguide
laser of the type having a gas mixture contained within said
laser the improvement comprising cellulose contained within
said assembled laser in contact with the gas mixture, said cellu-
lose specially prepared to ensure high sorbitivity to water
vapor at room temperature and decreasing sorbitivity to water
vapor with increasing temperature to absorb water vapor
evolved by the gas mixture.
4.393,507
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR CHARGING LIME
INTO AN ELECTRIC ARC FURNACE
Ronald E. Miller; James E. O'Hara, and Arthur E. Rola, all of
Jackson, Mich., assignors to Quanex Corporation, South
Lyon, Mich.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,500
Int. a.^ F27D 3/10, 3/ It
U.S. a. 373—81 14 Qaims
1. In an excimer laser comprising a chamber, spaced elec-
trodes in said chamber defining a discharge zone therebetween,
a source of d-c power, energy storage capacitor means electri-
cally connected to said electrodes and to said source and
adapted to be charged by the latter, switch means electrically
connected between said capacitor means and said electrodes
and operable to apply the charge voltage of said capacitor
means across said electrodes, a lasing gas mixture in said cham-
ber having a lasing gas selected from the group consisting of
Ar and F2, Xe and F2, Xe and Br2, Hg and Br2, Hg and CI2, Xe
and CI2 and Kr and F2, said electrodes producing an electric
discharge in said gas in said zone when said switch means is
actuated whereby to convert said gas mixture to ArP, XeF,
XeBr. HgBr, HgCl, XeCl and KrF, respectively, and optical
means aligned with said discharge zone defining a laser cavity,
the improvement consisting of
a buffer gas of Ne in said mixture.
=^=?^
4,393,506
SEALED-OFF RF EXOTED CO2 LASERS AND METHOD
OF MANUFACTURING SUCH LASERS
Peter Laakmann, and Katherine D. laakmann, both of Laguna
Niguel, Calif., assignors to Walwel, Inc., San Juan Capistrano,
CaUf.
I Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,576
' Int. a.3 HOIS 3/22. 3/03
U.S. a. 372—59 11 Qaims
1. A method of constructing a sealed-off RF excited CO2
waveguide laser comprising the steps of:
selecting aluminum structural members suitable for con-
struction of a waveguide laser housing,
nickel-plating said aluminum structural members,
placing said structural members in a passivation solution
until all exposed surfaces are covered by an oxidized
coating, and
subjecting said structural members to a temperature of at
least 100 degrees Centigrade and a vacuum of at least
IQ-* Torr for a period of at least 72 hours.
9. A sealed-off RF excited CO2 waveguide laser including a
11. In an electric arc furnace having a shell with a top having
a plurality of electrode ports therein through each of which an
electrode projects downwardly into the interior of the shell for
drawing an arc with a charge of metal to be melted therein and
of the type in which fumes are evacuated from the interior of
said shell, the improvement comprising an inlet port through
said shell at a location laterally displaced from and outwardly
of said electrode ports, a nozzle carried by said furnace and
constructed and arranged to be disposed in registry with said
inlet port, said nozzle being constructed and arranged for
movement to a first position wherein said nozzle is in registra-
tion with said inlet port for discharging particulate matter in a
gas stream into said shell and to a second position spaced from
said first position and wherein said top shields said nozzle from
heat within said shell, said nozzle having a cross sectional
shape, cross-sectional dimensions, an axial direction and an
orientation which are constructed and arranged to direct par-
ticulate matter discharged therefrom in a gas stream through
said inlet port and generally toward the center of the upper
surface of the charge of metal in said shell without any substan-
tial portion of the particulate matter impinging directly on any
of the electrodes, and a cover movable to open and closed
positions to effectively close said inlet port when said nozzle is
in said second position and to open said inlet port when said
nozzle is in said first position.
848
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
433,508
SYSTEM FOR LOCALLY TESTING A MODEM
EMPLOYING FREQUENCY SHIFT KEYING
Robert Boudault, Limours, France, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,580
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 23, 1980, 80 13867
Int a.J H04B 3/46
U.S. a. 375—9 5 Claims
time varying air conductivity caused by the gamma radiation
associated with a nuclear detonation comprising the steps of:
enclosing a space, said space including said source of ionizing
radiation;
dividing said space into a first space, a second space and a third
space;
separating said first space from said second space by a first gas
impermeable, radiation permeable barrier;
separating said second space from said third space by a second
gas impermeable, radiation permeable barrier;
providing a guided wave structure adjacent to said second gas
impermeable, radiation permeable barrier;
introducing a selected non-ionizing gas into said second space;
and
pulsing said guided wave structure with a high voltage pulser.
4,393,510
REACTOR FOR PRODUCOON OF U-233
Linton W. Lang, Richland, Wash., and Robert L. Stetson,
Moraga, Calif., assignors to Pacific Nuclear Fuels, Inc., Rich-
land, Wash.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 318,039, Jul. 20, 1973,
abandoned. This appUcation Jul. 1, 1976, Ser. No. 701,806
Int. a.3 G21C i/22
U.S. a. 376—172 2 Claims
1. A system for locally testing a modem employing fre-
quency shift keying and being coupled to a two-wire transmis-
sion line, the two frequencies transmitted by the modem being
lower than the two received frequencies and being produced
by a modulator, in the form of multivibrator controlled by the
data and connected to a transmission filter, the test system
comprising means for looping the modem at the transmission
line side in response to a test control signal, characterized in
that said modulator comprises means for causing said modula-
tor to produce, in response to said test control signal, two test
frequencies, said two test frequencies being the respective
products of said two frequencies transmitted by said modem
multiplied by a multiplying factor, said multiplying factor
being substantially equal to the ratio between the average
values of said two received frequencies and said two frequen-
cies transmitted by said modem, and said transmission filter
comprises means for changing, in response to said test control
signal, the transfer characteristics of said transmission filter in
order that said two test frequencies may be transmitted there-
through.
4,393,509
SOURCE-REGION ELECTROMAGNETIC PULSE
SIMULATOR
George Merkel, Springfield, Va., and William D. Scharf, Silver
Spring, Md., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,737
Int. a.3 G21G 3/04
U.S. a. 376—156 19 Claims
t 1
1. A method of simulating, in conjunction with a source of
ionizing radiation, intense pulsed electromagnetic fields and
1. A light water nuclear power reactor utilizing fertile tho-
rium and fissionable uranium fuel of 2 to 3 percent enrichment
in combination in a blanket and core respectively for produc-
ing U-233 wherein the U-232 content in the irradiated thorium
is minimized and in which said produced U-233 is recycled,
comprising:
a pressure vessel container;
a central core member positioned in said vessel and compris-
ing a plurality of fuel elements having fissionable uranium
fuel positioned therein;
a core baffle positioned around the periphery of said central
core forming a part thereof and comprising a plurality of
fuel elements having fertile thorium fuel positioned
therein, said core baffle defining the outer periphery of the
core;
a core barrel fixedly positioned in said vessel and surround-
ing said core baffle;
the fuel elements in said central core member and said core
baffle each comprising
a central section of fissionable uranium oxide pellets,
outer sections of hollow thin-walled thorium oxide pellets,
plenum sections interposed between said inner and outer
sections,
spring and spacer means positioned within said plenum
sections,
a moderating material positioned on at least one side of each
of said plenum sections,
cladding enclosing said pellets;
a first set of fuel elements surrounding said central core
member and positioned between said core baffle and said
core barrel in spaced relation thereto and having only
fertile thorium fuel positioned therein;
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
849
a second set of fuel elements surrounding said core barrel in
spaced relation thereto and having only fertile thorium
fuel positioned therein;
a thermal shield fixedly positioned in said vessel and sur-
rounding said second set of fuel elements;
each of the fuel elements in said first and second sets com-
prising a plurality of stacked thorium oxide pellets within
a cladding wherein all of said thorium oxide pellets are
hollow, said hollow thorium oxide pellets having inner
diameters which vary axially from a maximum at the
radial center of the fuel element to a minimum at each end
of the fiiel element;
means for supplying a flow of coolant through said vessel;
the U-232 content in the total uranium present in said reactor
averaging less than 10 parts per million, said total uranium
including U-233 which has been reprocessed and recycled
from irradiated thorium.
4,393,511
OUTER ROTATION BEARING FOR X-RAY TUBE
Richard A. Jens, Milwaukee, Wis., assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,909
Int. a.3 HOIJ 35/10
U.S. Q. 378—128 4 Qaims
4,393,512
HYPER-nLTER-FLUORESCER SPECTROMETER FOR
X-RAYS ABOVE 120 KEV
Ching L. Wang, Livermore, Calif., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the United States Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
FUed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281.141
Int. a.J GOIN 23/22
U.S. CI. 378—156 9 Claims
1. A rotating anode x-ray tube, comprising:
an envelope;
a stationary stem member passing through a wall of said
envelope and having a first part outside said envelope for
receiving an external electrical connection and a second
part extending exially into said envelope;
a rotatable tubular member within said envelope and coaxial
with said stem member second part, said tubular member
having first and second axially separated parts disposed
about the second part of said stem member;
an x-ray target anode supp>orted by an axially disposed stud
having a first end fixed to said tubular member second part
and a second end fixed to said anode;
rotor means for rotating said anode;
a front bearing for rotatably supporting the second part of
said tubular member on said stem member second part
while resisting conduction of heat between them, compris-
ing a first bearing portion fixed to said stem member
second part, a second bearing portion nonrotatably fixed
within said tubular member second part with clearance
between them to reduce thermal conduction, and first ball
means between said first and second bearing portions; and
a rear bearing separated from said rotor assembly by said
front bearing for rotatably supporting the first part of said
tubular member on said stem member second part, com-
prising a third bearing portion fixed to said stem member
second part, a fourth bearing portion fixed within said
tubular member first part, and second ball means between
said third and fourth bearing portions, with good thermal
and electrical contact from said tubular member, via said
fourth bearing portion, second ball means, and third bear-
ing portion, to said stem member second part;
whereby heat from said target anode is preferentially con-
ducted between said tubular member and said stem via
said rear bearing.
.COLLfM<kToe 50
PEEFllTEK \0-
'\r~i
10
a POST FILTER 30^
COtUMATOR 40-^^^
OETECTOR 60'
1. In a spectrometer system to provide measurements of
x-rays, wherein these x-rays emitted from a source are trans-
mitted through a pre-filter, directed by a first collimator to a
fiuorescer, re-emitted from the fiuorescer as K-fluorescence
lines toward a post-filter and directed again by a second colli-
mator to an x-ray detector, the improvement which comprises:
said pre-filter for transmitting x-rays, having a predeter-
mined absorption edge;
said post-filter for transmitting x-rays to said detector, hav-
ing a predetermined absorption edge which is more than
the absorption edge of said pre-filter; and
said fiuorescer for emitting K-fiuorescence lines toward said
post-filter, having a predetermined absorption edge sub-
stantially equal to the absorption edge of said post-filter.
4,393,513
INPUT SIGNAL LEVEL CONTROL DEVICE FOR
RECEIVER
Tomoshisa Yokogawa, and Shintaro Gomi, both of Saitama,
Japan, assignors to Pioneer Electric Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,543
Claims priority, application Japan, May 19, 1980, 55-
68535[U]
Int. a.3 H04B 1/16: H03G 3/30
U.S. a. 455—243 8 Claims
vat Ik
4. An input signal level control device for a receiver receiv-
ing an input signal having a particular electric field strength,
comprising: an input signal source; an attenuating means for
attenuating a level of said input signal; an amplifier means for
amplifying said attenuated input signal; a signal processing
means for processing said amplified signal; and a control means
receiving said processed signal, said control means activating
said attenuating means when said electric field strength of said
input signal reaches a first level and controlling said amplifying
means when said electric field strength of said input signal
reaches a second level greater than said first level, said control
means having a first transistor coupled with a second transis-
tor, said attenuating means being activated by an output of said
850
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
first transistor and said amplifier means being controlled by an
output of said second transistor.
for receiving, directly without regeneration, electromagnetic
waves from a plurality of other ones of said individual proces-
4^93,514
SUPERREGENERATIVE RECEIVER
Yoshikazu Minakuchi, Neyagawa; Toshio Abiko, Ibaragi, and
Hiromitsu Inoue, Soraku, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu-
shita Electric Works, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,355
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 15, 1979, 54-163078
Int. a.3 H04B 1/16
U.S. a. 455—336 9 Qaims
4,393,515
PROCESSOR ARRANGEMENT
Frederick B. de Neunuuui, Rayleigh, England, assignor to The
Marconi Company Limited, Chelmsford, England
FUed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,136
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 5, 1980,
8003814
Int a.} H04B 9/00
VJS. Q. 455—606 19 Claims
1. A processor arrangement including a plurality of individ-
ual processors mounted within a common chamber, each said
individual processor comprising means for freely radiating
electromagnetic waves, directly without regeneration, to a
plurality of other ones of said individual processors, and means
having an omnidirectional receiving characteristic disposed
sors, with data communication between said individual proces-
sors being by means of the radiated electromagnetic waves.
4,393,516
DATA TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND METHOD
Abdallah M. Itani, Ballston Spa, N.Y., assignor to Electric
Power Research Institute, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Mar. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 19,114
Int. a.3 H04B 9/00
U.S. O. 455—608 19 Oaims
8. A superregenerative receiver comprising:
quenching oscillator means for converting a received signal
into a low frequency signal, said quenching oscillator
means including a transistor,
oscillation condition modification means for modifying at
least one parameter of said transistor to vary the efficiency
of said quenching oscillator means;
control means responsive to a control output of said quench-
ing oscillator means for controlling said oscillation condi-
tion modification means in order to optimize said transis-
tor parameter in order to maximize the efficiency of said
quenching oscillator means by placing said oscillator
means into an optimum oscillation condition,
said oscillation condition modification means being respon-
sive to said control means to digitally vary said parameter
in a first direction until the operation of said quenching
oscillation means ceases, said oscillation condition modifi-
cation means varying said parameter in a direction oppo-
site said first direction by a predetermined amount to
establish said optimum operating condition.
~*^ REGISTCfi — »^
0 TO A
CONVEBTEH
1. A data transmission system for transferring digital infor-
mation which has been converted to a multiframe format of
serial bits over a single optical cable, said multiframe format
including sequential data frames each containing a sequence of
bits having a predetermined bit frequency wherein the total
number of said bits in each said data frame includes a predeter-
mined number of data bits containing the digital information,
the system including an optical encoder for converting the bits
into a single optical signal for transfer by way of the optical
cable and an optical decoder for receiving the optical signal
and reproducing the bits, and means for retrieving the digital
information from said data bits, comprising: clock means in-
cluding a phase locked loop incorporating a variable oscillator
outputting a clock signal having a frequency substantially
equal to said bit frequency and means responding to said bits
and said clock signal to produce a predetermined phase rela-
tionship between said clock signal and said bits, and frame
decoder means for selecting said data bits from the sequence of
bits in each said data frame using said clock signal, said clock
means including means for sensing the duration of said data
frames, and frame interval means for determining measured
frame intervals using said clock signal, said clock means com-
paring said measured frame intervals and the sensed duration
of said data frames and adjusting said variable oscillator to
make said measured frame intervals substantially equal in
length to said data frames and to produce said predetermined
phase relationship.
July 12, 1983
ELECTRICAL
851
' ' 4,393,517
PULSE CODE MODULATION OF LASER PULSE TAIL
Rudolph G. Baser, Wall, N.J.; Gregory R. Osche, Acton, Mass.;
Neal T. Nomiyama, Reston, and Robert S. Rohde, Springfield,
both of Va., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
FUed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,276
Int. a.3 H04B 9/00
U.S. O. 455—608 8 Oaims
^a-m
'COWS itmmom J^
-» ( Jitliir 'imoHi-
jLlillHI •••tOMC A10
portion that is transmitted through the beam splitter
wherein said train of high voltage pulses pulse code modu-
late said tail portion while selectively leaving said gain
switched spike unmodulated said spike being used for
ranging; and
mirror and output optical means for transmitting the pulse
code modulated data to a receiving station.
4,393,518
OPTICAL COMMUNICATION ARRANGEMENT
Bruce E. Briley, Countryside, III., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,514
Int. a.3 H04B 9/00
U.S. a. 455—617 9 Claims
1. A system for pulse code modulating the tail portions of a
train of pulsed laser beams to provide coded messages for
information transfer, said system comprising:
linearly polarized CO2 TEA laser activated by a trigger
pulse generator to produce a train of output laser beam
gain switched spikes with tail portions therefrom;
telescoping optics for demagnifying the output laser beam;
a beam splitter positioned at the output of said telescoping
optics in optical alignment with said linearly polarized
CO2 TEA laser and said telescoping optics, said beam
splitter placed at the Brewster's angle to simultaneously
reflect a portion of each output laser beam gain switched
spike and tail poriion while transmitting the remainder
therethrough;
an electrooptics Pockels Cell modulator means in optical
alignment with said beam splitter to directly receive the
laser beam gain switched spike and tail portions transmit-
ted through said beam splitter;
an electronic modulating circuit that receives the reflected
poriion of the output laser beam gain switched spike and
tail poriion onto a timing detector and after a time delay
by said timing detector produces a train of coded pulse
words of said tail portion that is applied to a high voltage
pulse power supply wherein a train of high voltage pulses
produced at the repetition rate of said train of coded pulse
words are applied to said electrooptics Pockels Cell mod-
ulator means simultaneously with the arrival of the tail
1. An optical transmission arrangement adapted to compen-
sate for harmonic frequency distortion, comprising:
transmitter means responsive to an electrical analog input
signal having a positive and a negative portion for gener-
ating first and second analog optical signals each having
harmonic frequency components equivalent to those of
the other of said optical signals and representative of said
positive and negative portions, respectively;
receiver means; and
optical waveguide means for guiding said first and second
optical signals from said transmitter means to said receiver
means;
said receiver means for combining said first and second
optical signals and canceling certain of said equivalent
harmonic frequency components to generate an electrical
analog output signal representative of said input signal and
having harmonic frequency components representative of
only particular ones of said harmonic frequency compo-
nents of said optical signals
DESIGN PATENTS
GRANTED JUL. 12, 1983
ERRATA
For
CLASS
D07-311
PATENT NO.
269,680
DESIGNS
JULY 12, 1983
269,644
CAKE
Donate De Pascalis, Via Bisalta 7, Turin, Italy
FUed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,114
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Doi— o;
U.S. a. Dl— 15
269,647
CASE FOR A TYPEWRITER
Angelo M. La Barbers, Liverpool, N.Y., assignor to SCM Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
FUed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,721
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 02
U.S. a. D3— 72
269,645
FORMAL MEN'S SUIT
Jerry L. Cameron, 919 Mason St., LaGrange, Ga. 30240
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,046
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D2— 02
U.S. a. D2— 29
269,646 269,648
LINEN BAG STORAGE CONTAINER
Beatrice K. Schaer, 41 Woifpit Ave., P.O. Box 26, Norwalk, Donald Wilcox, 165 Pearl St., Seymour, Conn. 06483, and No-
Conn 06851 "»»'« Zambrano, 86 Alps Rd., Branford, Conn. 06405
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,390 FUed Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 211,396
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3-0/ Int. CI. 03-02
U.S. a. D3-71 U.S. a. D3-73
r.^
853
854
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,649 269,651
BROOM HEAD SEAT
David A. Jones, Kettering, Ohio; Yasuhiro Koshido, Blooming- Dorothy L. Blowers, Los Angeles, Calif., assignor to Pacific
dale, and Daniel A. Maust, Winfield, both of 111., assignors to Furniture Manufacturing Co., Compton, Calif.
The Drackett Company, Cincinnati, Ohio FUed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,154
Filed Not. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 210,893 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. D6— 07
Int. a. D4— 07 U.S. Q. D6— 47
U.S. a. D4— 03
269,652
DUAL AIRCRAFT SEAT
Eric J. McKean, Lugamo, and David P. Downey, Five Dock,
both of Australia, assignors to Qantas Airways Limited, Aus-
tralia
Filed Mar. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 130,081
Oaims priority, application Australia, Sep. 13, 1979, 78993
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 07
U.S. a. D6— 48
269,650
PAINT ROLLER FRAME
Philip J. Allison, Saint John, Canada, assignor to T. S. Simms &
Co. Limited, Saint John, Canada ^
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,929
Oaims priority, application Canada, Dec. 29, 1980, 29-12-80-1
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D8— 05; D4—04
UJS. a. D4— 38.1
269,653
ARM CHAIR
Didier Deconinck, Seyssins, France, assignor to Allibert SJL^
Grenoble, France
FUed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,509
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6--07
U.S. a. D6— 56
July 12, 19^3
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
855
269,654 269,656
CHAIR COMBINED MAIL AND KEY RACK OR THE LIKE
Mike T. Oaman, New York, N.Y., assignor to Lewittes Furni- James B. Swett, Altamonte Springs, Fla., and David G. Bragin,
ture Enterprises, Inc., New York, N.Y. Brooklyn, N.Y., assignors to Dart Industries Inc., North-
^iled Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,443 brook. III.
Term of patent 14 years , Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,533
Int. CI. D6— 07 Term of patent 14 years
U.S. CI. D6— 57 Int. CI. D6— 06
U.S. a. D6— 130
f(
269,657
STORAGE TRAY FOR ATTACHMENT BENEATH A
SHELF
William D. Taylor, Wooster, Ohio, assignor to Rubbermaid
Incorporated, Wooster, Ohio
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,926
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 0<J
U.S. a. D6— 199
269,655
CHAIR
Mike T. Oaman, 475 Park Ave., New York, N.Y. 10022
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,455
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 07
U.S. a. D6— 57
269,658
INFANT WRAPPING BLANKET
Marta Bor, 10521 • 128 St., Edmonton, Alberta, Canada T5N
1W3
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,187
Claims priority, application Canada, May 6, 1980, 06-05-80-5
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 7i
U.S. a. D6— 267
856
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,659 269,661
COMBINED GOBLET AND DRINKING TUBE HOOK
Richard D. HoUoway, 40 Elsham Rd., London, W.14, England Ruediger Einhorn, Katonab, N.Y., assignor to Coats A Oark,
Filed Apr. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 364,773 Inc.
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 15, 1981, Filed Apr. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 143,021
1003007 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. DS—08
Int. a. D07— 0/ U.S. a. D8— 367
U.S. a. D7--11
269,662
YEAST THERMOMETER
James N. Ottaway, 1090 Madison La., Salinas, Calif. 93907
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,847
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 04
U.S. CI. DIO— 57
C^)
269,660
ROASTING RACK
Robert M. Powers, Grand Rapids, Mich., assignor to Amway
Corporation, Ada, Mich.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,410
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D07— 02
U.S. a. D7— 409
269,663
POLE LEVEL
Gary E. Smith, and Edward D. Parks, both of 21060 Meekland
Ave., Hayward, Calif. 94541
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,353
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. DIO— 04
U.S. a. DIO— 69
July 12, 198;
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
857
269,664 269,666
ELECTRONIC MARKER FOR BURIED UTILITIES TIRE CHAIN FOR SLIP PREVENTION OF VEHICI.E
Barry M. Marks, Austin, Tex., assignor to A.P.C. Industries, Kare Espedalen, Grenseveien 5, N-3290 Stavern, Norway
Inc., Austin, Tex. Filed Mar. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 129,377
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,088 Oaims priority, application Norway, Sep. 20, 1979, 60038
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. a. DIO— 05 ^ Int. Q. D12— 76
U.S. a. DIO— 104 '' U.S. a. D12— 154
269,665
MOBILE
Harold Lehr, 307 E. 92nd St., New York, N.Y. 10028
FUed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,577
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
" Int. a. Dl 1—02
U,S. a. Dll— 141
269,667
AUTOMOBILE ROOF TOP CARRIER
Don R. Taylor, 1423 Ruffner St., Birmingham, Mich. 48008, and
Edward J. Prentice, 959 Loma Verde, Palo Alto, Calif. 94303
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,219
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D12— /6
U.S. a. D12— 157
269,668
BOARDSAILING BOARD
Henry H. Schweitzer, 317 Beirut, Pacific Palisades, Calif. 90272
Continuation of Ser. No. 730,872, Oct. 8, 1976. This application
Apr. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 34,044
Term of patent 14 vears
Int. a. D12— 06
U.S. a. D12— 303
<\
8S8
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,669 269,671
AIRPLANE END FRAME FOR A SERVOMOTOR
John P. Hancock, Marietta, and RoUo G. Smethers, Jr., Atlanta, John J. Horsting, South Bend, Ind., assignor to The Bendiz
both of Ga., assignors to Lockheed Corporation, Burbank, Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Calif. FUed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,896
FUed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,722 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. O. D13— 07
Int. a. D12— 07 U.S. Q. D13— 1
U.S. a. D12— 332
269,672
TRAY FOR A BATTERY "
Samuel M. Seltzer, and Saul Dennison, both of Livingston, N.J.,
assignors to Allison Corporation, Livingston, N.J.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,510
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D13— 02
U.S. a. D13— 10
269,670
BACKING PLATE FOR SERVOMOTOR DIAPHRAGM
Keith H. Fulmer, Mishawaka, and Oswald O. Kytta, South
Bend, both of Ind., assignors to The Bendix Corporation,
Southfield, Mich.
Filed Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,308
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— o;
U.S. a. D13— 1
269,673
VARIABLE CABLE CONNECTOR INTERFACE FOR
DATA PROCESSING EQUIPMENT
Hans O. Johansson, Lidingo; Hans G. Nilsson, Solna, and Louis
Jemberg, Nacka, all of Sweden, assignors to Svea Data Com-
munication A Computer Aktiebolag, Solna, Sweden
Filed Sep. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 79,920
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 28, 1979, 798/79
Term of patent 3} years
Int. a. D13— Oi, D14— 0/
U.S. a. D13— 24
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
859
269,674
TELEPHONE
Takeshi Hirota, and Toshihiro Inagi, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Kanda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225,336
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 18, 1980, 55-38234
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
I ' Int. a. D14— OJ
U.S. a. D14— 53
269,676
TELEVISION RECEIVER
Akira Takahashi, Tokyo; Noritaka Segawa, Koganei, and Takei-
chi Obata, Hino, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,096
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1981, 56-1901
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 80
>
269,675
TELEPHONE BUSY LAMP HELD CONSOLE
Donald A. Foggia, Ocean, N.J.; Deepak R. Muzumdar, Boca
Raton, Fla.; Gerhart F. Klaiber, Boca Raton, Fla., and Rolf E.
Schneider, Boca Raton, Fla., assignors to Siemens Corpora-
tion, Iselin, N.J.
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,984
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 58
269,677
TELEVISION RECEIVER
Taisuke Kashima; Shigeki Gushiken, both of Tokyo; Kazuyuki
Tsuburaya, Kodaira, and Yasusuke Seki, Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,097
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55-44536
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 80
860
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,678 269,680
COMPUTER BEVERAGE DISPENSER OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Beiuamin F. Cooper, San Francisco, and Paul D. Major, Emery- Achille Prandelli, Concesio, Italy, assignor to Ottopran S.r.l.,
ville, both of Calif., assignors to Micromation, Inc., San Fran- Collebeato, Italy
Cisco, Calif. Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,075
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,183 Qaims priority, application Italy, Dec. 23, 1980, 7092/80[U]
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02 Int. Q. DIS— 08
U.S. a. D14— 102 U.S. a. d7— 311
269,681
ROBOT ARM
Alfred H. Morser, and Robert C. Watson, both of Cincinnati,
Ohio, assignors to Cincinnati Milacron Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,304
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D15— 99
U.S. a. D15— 199
269,679
ELECTRONIC COMPUTER
Shinichi Morooka, Osaka, Japan, assignor to Sharp Corpora-
tion, Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 219,589
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 9, 1980, 55-27761
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02
U.S. a. D14— 106
269,682
nELD MICROSCOPE
Kenichi Yokota, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Swift Instruments,
Inc., Boston, Mass.
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,636
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D16— 06
U.S. a. D16— 131
'
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
861
269,683
ELECTRIC SHEET MUSIC PAGE TURNER
Bruce E. Barbour, 41-37 52nd St., Woodside, N.Y. 11377
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 242,063
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. a. D17— 99
U.S. a. D17— 99
269,686
ELECTRONIC GAME CASING
Per O. Hoel, 11 Hesperus Cir., Magnolia, Mass. 01930
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,978
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D21— 0/
U.S. CI. D21— 13
'T*^~
269,684
WRITING INSTRUMENT OR SIMILAR ARTICLE
Richard Luntz, P.O. Box 24234, Lyndhurst, Ohio 44924
FUed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,495
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 06
U.S. CI. D19^7
269,687
ANIMATED FIGURE RING TOY
Shinroku Nakao, Yokohama; Yoshiyasu Ishii, and Hiroaki Mat-
suda, both of Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Combi Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 291,641
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 17, 1981, 56-6081
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 0/
U.S. a. D21— 59
1 ' uw 1"^
269,685 269,688
DESK NAME PLATE SPINNING TOY
Kenneth R. Lansdowne, 550 Bright St., San Francisco, Calif. Lester V. Molenaar, P.O. Box 777, Willmar, Minn. 56201
94132 Filed Not. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 207,760
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,298 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years I"*- CI- 021—07
Int.Q.D20-0i U.S.a.D21-95
U.S. a. D20— 15
862
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,689 269,692
TOY VEHICXE TENNIS PRACTICE NET
Tetsuo Ohkado, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tomy Kogyo Co., Tsugio Hirabayashi, Tokyo, and Michio Nakai, Ebina, both of
Inc., Japan Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,885 Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,184
Claims priority, application Japan, May 15, 1980, 55-19081 Oaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 19, 1980, 55-24586
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 07 Int. Q. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 128 U.S. CI. D21— 200
IH^- -^
l^^^^^s
269,693
269,690 MORTAR
TOY MASK RESEMBLING A CHICKEN BEAK John J. Dobias, 1212 Sumach Dr., Windsor, Ontario, Canada
Jeff Harris, 1910 Westridge Rd., Los Angeles, Calif. 90049; N8S 2S4
Jack Horwitz, 3533 Moore St., Los Angeles, Calif. 90066, and Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,432
Charles Chambers, 935 N. Rose St., Burbank, Calif. 91505 Term of patent 14 years
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,179 Int. Q. D22— 07
Term of patent 14 years U.S. Q. D22 — 3
Int. a. D21— 07
U.S. a. D21— 190
269,691
PORTABLE EXERaSE STAND
Richard Omstein, 46 Hawthorne Rd., Garden Oty, N.Y. 11530,
and Jerry Vassilatos, 214 Ridge Rd., New City, N.Y. 10956
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,485
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 02
U.S. a. D21— 191
269,694
REEL FOR nSHING OR THE LIKE
Seiji Myojo, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Shimano Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,028
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 05
U.S. a. D22— 25
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
863
269,695 269,698
ROOM DEODORIZER DISPENSER STOVE
William J. O'Neil, Jr., Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The Drack- Donald A. Crawford, Box 153, SmelterriUe, Id. 83868
ett Company, Cincinnati, Ohio FUed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,474
FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,819 Term of patent 14 years
II Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. D23— Oi
1 1 Int. a. D23—04 U.S. Q. D23— 97
U.S. a. D23— 150
S 4
269,696
CAP FOR A FAUCET HANDLE
James E. Niemann, Louisrille, Ky., assignor to American Stan-
dard Inc., New York, N.Y.
nied Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,538
Term of patent 14 years
I Int. CI. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 28
269,697
SPRINKLER SYSTEM CONTROL HOUSING
Cleve A. Graham, Port Hueneme; Craig R. Tisserat, Alta Loma,
and Enric C. Mendoza, Walnut, all of Calif., assignors to
Clemar Manufacturing Corp., Azusa, Calif.
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,404
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
II Int.a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 38
269,699
AIR FRESHENER CONTAINER
Timothy J. May, Hilbert, and Darid W. Wendt, Madison, both
of Wis., assignors to The Coca-Cola Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,221
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 04
VJS. a. D23— 150
864
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,700 269,702
VENTILATOR MICROVETTE ASSEMBLY
Elwin E. Peirce, 3890 Monroe Ave. Northeast, and Arthur L. Osmo Suovaniemi; Pertti Ekholm, both of Helsinki; Esko Kau-
Waltz, 4415 - 75th A?e. Southeast, both of Salem, Oreg. 97301
Filed Dec. 4, 1978, Ser. No. 966,137
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 04
U.S. a. D23— 151
lumen, Espoo, and Aarre Kukka, Helsinki, all of Finland,
assignors to Kommandiittiyhtio Finnpipette Osmo A.
Suovaniemi, Finland
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 201,327
Qaims priority, application Finland, Apr. 28, 1980, 332/80
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 99
U.S. a. D24— 8
269,701
FULL BODY WEIGHT TRACTION DEVICE
Jack V. Miller, Sierra Madre, Calif., assignor to Gravity Guid-
ance, Inc., Pasadena, Calif.
Filed May 10, 1982, Ser. No. 376,512
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 0/
U.S. a. D24— 03
269,703
PIPETTOR
Bernard Parker, Westport, Conn., assignor to Baker Instru-
ments Corp., Bethlehem, Pa.
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,530
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. UTA—Ol, 02
U.S. a. D24— 8
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
86S
1 1 269,704
BASE FOR A FALSE TOOTH
Ehrenfried G. B. Wolf, Rte. 1, Box 143 A, Raymond, Wash.
98577
FUed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 139,785
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. CI. D24— 05
U.S. a. D24— 33
269,707
DECORATIVE SLAT ASSEMBLY FOR A SUSPENDED
CEILING OR THE LIKE
Jacques G. L. Thual, Paris, France, assignor to Hunter Douglas
International N.V., Willemstad, Netherlands Antilles
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,300
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 23, 1980, 803288
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D25— 07
U.S. a. D25— 88
269,705
FALSE TOOTH
Ehrenfried G. B. Wolf, Rte. 1, Box 143 A, Raymond, Wash.
98577
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 139,787
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. a. D24— Oi
U.S. a. D24— 33
269,706
DISPENSING CONTAINER FOR PHARMACEUTICAL
DILUENTS
Brian C. Green, Vernon Hills, III., assignor to Baxter Travenol
Laboratories, Inc., Deerfield, 111.
Rled Nov. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 203,567
, , Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. a. D24— 02, 04; D9—01
U.S. a. D24— 63
269,708
DECORATIVE SLAT ASSEMBLY FOR A SUSPENDED
CEILING OR THE LIKE
Jacques G. L. Thual, Paris, France, assignor to Hunter Douglas
International N.V., Curacao, Netherlands Antilles
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,301
Gaims priority, application France, Oct. 23, 1980, 803288
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D25— 07
U.S. a. D25— 88
866
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,709
DECORATIVE SLAT ASSEMBLY FOR A SUSPENDED
CEILING OR THE UKE
Jacques G. L. Thual, Paris, France, assignor to Hunter Douglas
International N.V., Curacao, Netherlands Antilles
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,517
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 23, 1980, 803288
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D25— 07
U.S. a. D25— 89
269,711
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,033
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000024
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 07
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,712
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline & French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,057
Term of patent 14 years —
Int. a. D28— 07
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,710
aCAR AND OGARETTE nLTER PERFORATOR
Rafael Torrebianca Cervantes, Malaga, Spain, assignor to The
Westbury Foundation, Andorra and Dispositivos Reductores
de Tabaco, S.A. (Sodire), Spain
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,382
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D27— 99
U.S. a. D27— 51
269,713
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline & French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,156
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000198
Term of patent 14 years
Int a. D28— 07
VJS. a. D28— 2
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
867
II 269,714
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline & French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,157
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000199
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
II Int. a. D28— 07
U.S. CI. D28— 2
269,716
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,189
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000201
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 07
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,715
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden Oty,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,158
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 4, 1980,
997904
Term of patent 14 years
Int. O. D28— 07
U.S. O. D28<-2
269,717
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Smith Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Gar-
den Oty, England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,190
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000200
Term of patent 14 years
Int. O. D25— 07
U.S. O. D28— 2
868
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,718
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden Oty,
England
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,191
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000202
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 0/
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,720
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Toyey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,193
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000205
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 0/
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,721
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,194
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000206
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— o;
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,719
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,192
Claims priority, appUcation United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1981,
1000203
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— o;
U.S. a. D28— 2
269,722
PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Herpenden, England, assignor to Smith
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City,
England
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,195
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 28, 1981,
1000715
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 0/
U.S. a. D28— 2
July 12, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
869
269,723 269,725
"PHARMACEUTICAL TABLET LITTERBIN
Geoffrey D. Tovey, Harpenden, England, assignor to Smith Brian G. Cooke, Templestowe, and James R. Burgin, East Brigh-
Kline A French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Garden City, ton, both of Australia, assignors to Overseas Corporation,
England Australia
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,196 FUed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,161
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D28— 07 Int. Q. D7— 05
U.S. a. D28->2 U.S. CI. D34— 06
f
269,726
269,724 HREPLACE WOOD CARRIER
TWIN BLADE RAZOR Arlen Skille, Hayward, Wis., assignor to Bill Johnson and Gary
David O. Chase, and Martin Maloney, both of Skaneateles, Rogstad, both of Hayward, Wis.
N.Y., assignors to American Safety Razor Company, Verona, f"''e<* Oct- 8, 1980, Ser. No. 194,970
Yg^ Term of patent 14 years
FUed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,726 Int. Q. D12— 02
I , Term of patent 14 years ^.S. Q. D34— 24
1 1 Int. a. D28— Oi
U.S. a. D28— 46
'* 1 1 1 A
¥=^
870
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 12, 1983
269,727
SHEET OF PLASTIC MATERIAL
Jarl-Erik Jo^ Vaasa, Finland, assignor to Oy Wiik A Hoglund
Ab, Finland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 926,295, Jul. 20, 1978,
abandoned. Tbis application Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,422
Claims priority, application Finland, Jan. 20, 1978, 44/78
Term of patent 14 years
' Int. a. DOS— 06
VJS. a. D92— 1.1
269,728
BRACKET FOR COIN CHANGE HOLDER
Charles Ohanian, 16 Whites PI., Watertown, Mass. 02172
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 225,057
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D31— 00
U.S. a. D99— 34
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 12th DAY OF JULY, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
A. T. Ramot Plastics, Ltd.: See—
Kraus, Menahem A.; Frommer, Moshe A.; Nemas, Mara; and
Gutman. Rodika, 4,392,960, CI. 210-651.000.
AB Bofors Elektronik: See—
Lundborg, Olle G., 4,392,537, CI. 177-134.000.
AB Volvo: See—
Backman, Erik, 4,392,605, CI. 229-19.000.
Abbott Laboratories: See —
Elias, Allen M.; and Genese, Joseph N., 4,392,850, CI. 604-82.000.
Elias, Allen M., 4,392,851, CI. 604-82.000.
Abe, Kunihiro: See —
Omori, Toshiyuki; and Abe, Kunihiro, 4,392,951, CI. 209-307.000.
Abel, Martin L., to Permawick Bearing Corporation. Cartridge bearing
assembly. 4,392,753, CI. 384-136.000.
Abiko, Toshio: See —
Minakuchi, Yoshikazu; Abiko, Toshio; and Inoue, Hiromitsu,
4,393,514, CI. 455-336.000.
ACF Industries, Incorporated: See —
Baker, Thomas B.; and Mandrell, Richard J., 4,392,575, CI.
213-76.000.
Action Instruments Co. Inc.: See —
Looper, Norman G., 4,393,347, CI. 324-126.000.
Adamczyk, Rudolph A., to Titeflex Corporation. End fittings for
flexible hoses. 4,392,678, CI. 285-256.000.
Addison, William C: See —
Hauk, Ernest D.; and Addison, William C, 4,392,527, CI.
166-55.200.
Aden, David P.: See —
Knowles, Barbara B.; and Aden, David P., 4,393,133, CI. 435-6.000.
Adier, Robert, to Extel Corporation. Magnetic dot matrix printing
method and apparatus. 4,392,754, CI. 400-119.000.
Advanced Card Systems, Ltd.: See —
Hofmann, Rolf L., 4,393,302, CI. 235-474.000.
Advanced Micro Devices, Inc.: See —
New, Bernard J., 4,393,457, CI. 364-726.000.
New, Bernard J., 4,393,468, CI. 364-736.000.
Aeroquip Corporation: See —
Crissy, Charles F.; and Holmes, Paul M., 4,392,762, CI. 410-1 16.000.
Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Schenk, Gunther; Bergthaller, Peter; Wolfrum, Gerhard; and
Stolzenburg, Rudolf, 4,393,132, CI. 430-562.000.
Ahn, Byorg R. Preliminary heating apparatus for torch lamp. 4,392,819,
CI. 431-231.000.
Aiba, Yasuaki, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Device for
preventing displacement of an engine in a motorcycle. 4,392,542, CI.
180-228.000.
Aiken, John A., Jr., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Insertion of character set change codes in an altered text stream.
4.393,463, CI. 364-900.000.
Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Daniels, Wiley E.; and Nagy, Dennis J., 4,393,173, CI. 525-329.400.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Miki, Nobuaki; Kawamoto, Mutsumi; Shibata, Kazuhiko; Yoshida,
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki, 4,393,467, CI. 364-424.100.
Nakasu, Kei; Ichikawa, Shigeru; Tanaka, Toshihiko; and Ikeda,
Mitsuo, 4,392,560, CI. 188-73.340.
Aisin- Warner Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Miki, Nobuaki; Kawamoto, Mutsumi; Shibata, Kazuhiko; Yoshida,
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki, 4,393,467, CI. 364-424.100.
Ajinomoto Company Incorporated: See —
Tsuchida, Takayasu; and Nakamori, Shigeru, 4,393,135, CI.
435-110.000.
Akagi, Kazuo: See —
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,267,
CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi,-4,392,506,
CI. 134-46.000.
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Hatakeyama, Hideo; Shimoyashiki, Nobuyoshi;
Momose, Yo^iaki; and Imai, Fusao, to Japan Styrene Paper Corpo-
ration. Process for producing plate-like polystyrene resin foam.
4,393,016, CI. 264-53.000.
Akzo NV: See—
Zengel, Hans-Georg; and Bergfeld, Manfred, 4,393,238, CI.
564-255.000.
Alaimo, Robert J., to Norwich Eaton Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 5-Methyl-
2-trinuoromethylindolo[2,3-b]quinoxaline. 4,393,208, CI. 544-343.000.
Albrecht, Allan J.; and Van Ooyen, Richard C, to J. I. Case Company.
Boom and dipper stick construction. 4,392,314, CI. 37-103.000.
Albright, Jay D.: See—
Dusza, John P.; and Albright, Jay D., 4,393,217, CI. 548-362.000.
Alder, Hanspeter; and Schalch, Eugen, to Swiss Aluminium Ltd. Elec-
trode arrangement in a cell for manufacture of aluminum from molten
salts. 4,392,925, CI. 204-67.000.
Alexander, A. Gordon, to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Pro-
cess for continuously manufacturing lubricating grease. 4,392,967, CI.
252-41.000.
Allen, Harry R., to Upjohn Company, The. Method of treating cardiac
arrhythmia. 4.393,054, CI. 424-180.000.
Allen, John K.; and Lammers, Gerard C, to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana). Continuous non-catalytic pyrolysis of aqueous slurry of
oxygen-containing derivatives of benzene and toluene. 4,393.264, CI.
585-469.000.
Allen, Louis B., Jr.; Koenig, Herbert G., Jr.; Stacy, Robert A.; and
Meyer, Danny D., to McDonnell Douglas Corporation. Laser diode
with double sided heat sink. 4,393,393, CI. 357-81.000.
Allen, Robert P., to Eastman Kodak Company. Hydrocarbon resin and
process for preparation. 4,393,261, CI. 585-422.000.
Allen, Roy A., to Shell Oil Company. Polyfunctional phenolic-mela-
mine epoxy resin curing agents. 4,393,181, CI. 525-504.000.
Allied CorjMjration: See —
Elsenbaumer. Ronald L.; and Wasserman, Edel, 4,392,978, CI.
252-182.000.
Reimschuessel, Herbert K.; and DeBona, Bruce T., 4,393,233. CI.
562-473.000.
Rogic, Milorad M.; and Oxenrider, Bryce C, 4,393,215, CI.
548-125.000.
Stables, Wilbur L.; Pendlebury, David; Saich, Anthony M.; and
Hamlyn, Maxwell C, 4,392,285, CI. 28-276.000.
Almlof, Goran; and Hagqvist, Peter. Combustion process with waste
gas purification. 4,392,871, CI. 55-23.000.
Almor Corporation: See —
Foster, Stephen W., 4,392,553, CI. 186-61.000.
Aloi, Michael J.; and Hancock, Kevin J., II. Built-in solar panel.
4,392,484, CI. 126-450.000.
Alpine Research, Inc.: See —
Ramer, Paul C, 4,392,666, CI. 280-614.000.
Alps Electric Co., Ltd.: See —
Sugiura, Shigekata; and Kanno, Susumu, 4,393,436. CI. 361-380.000.
Altenschopfer, Theodor; and Schumann. Klaus, to Henkel Kommandit-
gesellschaft Auf Aktien. Liquid cleaning and maintenance composi-
tion especially for dishwashers. 4,392,977, CI. 252-174.190.
Aluminum Company of America: See —
Eckert, Charles E.; and Miller, Ronald E., 4,392,888, CI. 75-68.00R.
Alvey Inc.: See —
Turnbough, Harold L.; and Werntz, Charles W., 4,392,568, CI.
198-781.000.
Amano, Hiroyuki: See —
Miki, Nobuaki; Kawamoto, Mutsumi; Shibata, Kazuhiko; Yoshida,
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki, 4,393,467, CI. 364-424.100.
American Cyanamid Company: See —
Dusza, John P.; and Albright, Jay D., 4,393,217, CI. 548-362.000.
Giglia, Robert D.; and Haacke, Gottfried, 4,392,721, CI.
350-357.000.
Nair, Vijay G.; Joseph, Joseph P.; and Bernstein, Seymour,
4,393,055, CI. 424-180.000.
Tomcufcik, Andrew S.; Wright, William B., Jr.; and Marsico,
Joseph W.. Jr., 4,393,004, CI. 260-245.500.
American Hoechst Corporation: See —
Amtower, Richard E., 4,393,41 1, CI. 358-302.000.
American Medical Systems, Inc.; See —
Burton, John H.; and Mikulich, Michael A., 4,392,562, CI.
128-79.000.
American Microsystems, Inc.: See —
Gregorian, Roubik; and Wegner, Glenn, 4,393,351, CI. 328-127.000.
American Monitor Corporation: See —
Stephens, Thomas W., 4,393,142, CI. 436-125.000.
American Standard Inc.: See —
Pascoe, Robert D., 4,392,626, CI. 246-34.00R.
Amodeo, Ralph J.: See —
Voipe, Gerald T.; Laskoski, Leonard S.; Amodeo, Ralph J.; Swan-
son, William J.; and Gottesman, Jerome D., 4,393,352, CI.
329-50.000.
Amoroso, Michael J. Portable rescue tool. 4,392,263, CI. 7-100.000.
AMP Incorporated: See —
Andrews, Howard W., Jr.; Billman, Timothy B.; and Cobaugh,
Robert F., 4,392,705, CI. 339-75.0MP.
Baker, Robert W.; Owen, Leonard J.; and Simmons, Reginald 1.,
4 392 706 CI. 339-91. OOR
Billman, Timothy B.; and Kautz, Jon F., 4,392,300, CI. 29-739.000.
Showman, Robert L.; and Weber, Robert N., 4,392,700, CI. 339-
17.00M.
Weidler, Charies H., 4,392,701, CI. 339-I7.00R.
1032 O.G.— 32
PI 1
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Ampex Corporation: See —
Svendsen. Gordon D., 4,393.301, CI. 377-56.000.
Amtower, Richard E., to American Hoechst Corporation. Laser read-
write system for the production of engravings. 4,393,411, CI.
358-302.000.
Anaconda-Ericsson: See —
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Carl E.; Kerr, Douglas P.; Ras-
mussen, David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W.,
4,393,491, CI. 370-13.000.
Anchor Hocking Corporation: See—
Ochs, Charles S., 4,392,580, CI. 215-332.000.
Anderson, David N.: See —
Cross, Stephen D.; Frost, Elmer F., Jr.; and Anderson, David N.,
4,392,803, CI. 425-126.0OS.
Anderson, Gordon K., to Carrier Corporation. Permanent magnet
rotor. 4,393,320, CI. 310-156.000.
Anderson, James E.; Lee, John D.; and Livermore, Frederick C, to
Northern Telecom Limited. Overvoltage protector for telephone
lines. 4,393,433. CI. 361-119.000.
Anderson, Raymond A. Quick release wheel mount. 4,392,690, CI.
301-121.000.
Anderson, Richard D., to Pako Corporation. Disc film advance assem-
bly. 4,392,743, CI. 355-75.000.
Andersson, Lars G. High stability trimaran. 4,392,444, CI. 114-39.000.
Andrew, Wesley A.: See —
Hansen. Peder M.; Hoffman, John G.; Seeley, Elwin W.; and
Andrew, Wesley A., 4,393,350, CI. 324-334.000.
Andrews, Christopher M., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Curing agents
for epoxide resins and compositions containing them. 4,393,180, CI.
525-504.000.
Andrews, Howard W., Jr.; Billman, Timothy B.; and Cobaugh, Robert
F., to AMP Incorporated. Zero insertion force connector system.
4,392,705, CI. 339-75.0MP.
Angelbeck, Albert W.; and Palma, Gary E., to United Technologies
Corporation. Cavity length control system for a multiline HEL.
4,393,503, CI. 372-20.000.
Anger, Klaus; Frosien, Juergen; Lischke, Burkhard; Plies, Erich; and
Tonar, Klaus, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. High current electron
source. 4,393,308, CI. 250-396.00R.
Angersbach, Wolfgang; and Meier, Karl-Heinz, to Quick-Rotan Elek-
tromotoren GmbH. Position adjusting drive unit. 4,393,343, CI.
318-640.000.
Angus Chemical Company: See —
Eckler. Paul E., 4,393,149, CI. 521-129.000.
Anic, S.p.A.: See —
Costanzi, Silvestro; Tessarolo, Francesco; and Brunelli, Maurizio,
4,393,218, CI. 548-530.000.
Anorad Corporation: See —
Chitayat, Anwar, 4.392,642, CI. 269-73.000.
Anstotz, Helmut; Kubik, Klaus; and Paulussen, Heinz, to Kusters,
Eduard. Device for action on webs of material with at least one
cylinder. 4,392,288. CI. 29-116.0AD.
Aoki. Kenji; Goto. Mitsuhiro; and Miura, Teiji. to Kabushiki Kaisha
Suwa Seikosha. Electrostatic printer. 4,393,390, CI. 346-155.000.
Aoyama, Keizo: See —
Shimada, Hiroshi; and Aoyama, Keizo, 4,393,472, CI. 365-190.000.
Apuzzo, Gennaro, to Merisinter S.p.A. Press for pulverulent materials.
4,392,800, CI. 425-78.000.
Arai, Katsuhiko: See —
Kaneda, Hiroshi; Arai, Katsuhiko; Suzuki, Akira; and Ohashi,
Takashi, 4,393,015, CI. 264-51.000.
Arai, Takao; Hoshino. Takashi; and Kobayashi. Masaharu. to Hitachi.
Ltd. Synchronizing signal detection protective circuit. 4,393,419, CI.
360-37.100.
Arakawa. Kaneyasu; and Mizuno. Shigeo. to Kabushiki-Kaisha Tokai-
Rika-Denki-Seisakusho. Electrical switch structure. 4,393,360, CI.
335-164.000.
Aranykalasz Mgtsz: See —
Plesa, Laszlo, 4.392.304. CI. 30-178.000.
i'Vrbcd S /^ ' Sec
Goedert. Jean. 4.392,887, CI. 75-58.000.
Arcamone, Federico: See —
Bargiotti, Alberto; Cassinelli, Giuseppe; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone,
Federico; and Casazza, Annamaria. 4,393.052, CI. 424-180.000.
Ark-les Corporation: See—
Walkup. William B.. 4.392,702. Q. 339-19.000.
Arkwin Industries, Inc.: See—
Deutsch, Edward J., 4,392,556, CI. 188-67.000.
Armand, Marcel, to Pechiney Uginc Kuhlmann. Process for controlling
the permeability of diaphragms in the preparation of polyvalent
metals by electrolysis and an electrolysis cell for carrying out the
process. 4,392,924, CI. 204-64.00T.
Armco Inc.: See —
Graff, Hart F.; and Bagdal. Karl T.. 4.392,613, CI. 239-115.000.
Armstrong World Industries, Inc.: See —
Hoyle, Charles E.; and Lenox, Ronald S., 4,393,006, CI.
260-349.000.
Kaufmann, John C; and Lenox, Ronald S., 4,392,863, CI. 8-400.000.
Ameklev, Duane R.: See—
Pallos, Ferenc M.; Brokke, Mervin E.; and Ameklev, Duane R..
4.392,884, CI. 71-100.000.
Arnold. Ann A.: See —
Swett, James B.; and Arnold, Ann A., 4,392,594, CI. 222-530.000.
Arnold, Herbert: See —
Gunther, Dieter; Bertsch, Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold,
Herbert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt, Michael, 4,392,470, CI.
123-440.000.
Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Hayashi, Hiroshi; Shimojima, Yukiji; Shirai, Takashi; Ishida,
Torao; and Shibukawa, Mitsuru, 4,393,225, CI. 549-289.000.
Asahi, Naotatsu: See —
Kanamaru, Hisanobu; Tohkairin, Akira; Tatsumi. Hideo; Asahi.
Naotatsu; and Haginoya. Mitsuo. 4.392.296. CI. 29-520.000.
Asao. Akihide: See —
Du. Nguyen T.; and Asao. Akihide. 4.392,893. CI. 148-1.500.
Du. Nguyen T.; and Asao. Akihide. 4,393,479, CI. 365-218.000.
Asayama, Yoshiaki: See —
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,392,385, CI. 73-861.230.
Ashby, Richard L. Ligature tying instrument. 4,392,494, CI.
128-326.000.
Ashland Oil, Inc.: See —
Garrett, William R., Jr., 4,393,155, CI. 524-60.000.
Smith, Norman L., 4,393,034, CI. 423-450.000.
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Carl E.; Kerr, Douglas P.; Rasmussen,
David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W., to Anacon-
da-Ericsson. Automatic self-test system for a digital multiplexed
telecommunication system. 4,393,491, CI. 370-13.000.
Asonen, Osmo: See —
Niinivaara, Juhani, 4,393,297, CI. 219-137.00R.
Astro-Steel Grip International, Inc.: See —
Heiman, Robert B., 4,392,335, CI. 52-309.170.
Atlantic Richfield Company: See —
Sun, Hsiang-ning; Leonard, John J.; and Shalit, Harold, 4,393,038,
CI. 423-584.000.
Aucktor, Erich, to Lohr & Bromkamp GmbH. Drive shaft construc-
tion. 4,392,839, CI. 464-183.000.
Audeh. Cosundi A.; and Greco. Saverio G.. to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Integrated refining process. 4.392.947. CI. 208-229.000.
Audi NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Ruf, Max. 4.392.797. CI. 418-91.000.
Austin, Richard G.: See —
Michaelson, Robert C; and Austin, Richard G., 4,393,253, CI.
568-860.000.
Australasian Training Aids Pty. Ltd.: See —
Knight, Lindsay C; and Cottis, Robert A., 4,392,652, CI.
273-358.000.
Automa S.p.A.: See —
Bortolotti, Andrea; and Bettucchi, Mauro, 4,392,802, CI.
425-107.000.
Automatic Rollers Doors Australia Pty., Ltd.: See —
Perisic, Milan; Lumbers, Warwick J.; and Bone, John A., 4,392,392,
CI. 74-626.000.
Automation Industries, Inc.: See —
Timmons, David R., 4,392,283, CI. 24-255.0SL.
Avery, Don E. Pump control system for windmills. 4,392,785, CI.
417-218.000.
Avery International Corporation: See —
Reed, Charles F.; and Morrow, Charles M., 4,392,585, CI.
221-1.000.
Axel Johnson Engineering AB: See —
Hakansson, Sven, 4,392,422, CI. 100-118.000.
Ayano, Satoshi: See —
Gaku, Morio; Ikeguchi, Nobuyuki; and Ayano, Satoshi, 4,393,195,
CI. 528-361.000.
B. F. Goodrich Company, The: See —
Kim, Hueng T.; and Nehmey, Sam D., 4,393,017, CI. 264-53.000.
Martindale, Troy E., Jr., 4,392,403, CI. 83-418.000.
Baba, Takaaki: See —
Ikushima, Hiroshi; Baba, Takaaki; Sagishima, Takayuki; and Ta-
naka, Masanobu, 4,393,400, CI. 358-92.000.
Babcock Textilmaschinen GmbH: See —
Schrader, Alfons; and Schreiner, Waldemar. 4,392,309, CI.
34-54.000.
Bachman, Wesley J.; and Funk, Robert C, to Dickey-john Corporation.
Sprayer control system. 4,392,611, CI. 239-74.000.
Backman, Erik, to AB Volvo. Package. 4,392,605, CI. 229-19.000.
Bada, Hajime: See —
Kodaka, Mikio; Morishita, Hitoshi; Bada, Hajime; and Sudo,
Fumio, 4,392,886, CI. 75-52.000.
Bagdal, Karl T.: See-
Graff, Hart F.; and Bagdal, Karl T., 4,392,613, CI. 239-115.000.
Bagdasarian, Alexandr S.; Gulyaev, Jury V.; Fedorets, Vladimir N.;
and Kmiu. Anatoly M. Surface acoustic wave transducer. 4,393,321,
CI. 3I0-313.00B.
Bailey, Gary C, to Engineering Development Company. Speaker
enclosure and method of producing same. 4,392,548. CI. 181-156.000.
Bailey, James R.; and Lutzenberger, Kurt, to Switchcraft, Inc. Electri-
cal jack. 4,392,708, CI. 339-182.00R.
Bailey, Thomas: See —
Mitchell, Alan; and Bailey, Thomas, 4,393,235, CI. 562-478.000.
Bains, Kuldip: See —
Evans, John L.; and Bains, Kuldip, 4,392,618, CI. 239-461.000.
Baker International Corporation: See —
Redden, Raymond L., 4,393,485, CI. 367-25.000.
Baker, Uwrence K. Hearing aid earmolds. 4,392,547, CI. 181-135.000.
Baker, Robert W.; Owen, Leonard J.; and Simmons, Reginald J., to
AMP Incorporated. Electrical connector with latching means.
4,392,706, CI. 339-9 l.OOR.
JULY 12, 198!
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
Baker, Thomas B.; and Mandrell, Richard J., to ACF Industries, Incor-
porated. Swivel assembly for end cock. 4,392,575, CI. 213-76.000.
Bakos, Peter; Darrow, Russell E.; Funari, Joseph; and Redpath, Diane
L., to International Business Machines Corporation. Spray head
apparatus. 4,392,617, CI. 239-290.000.
Bald, Wilfried, to Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft. Process and
apparatus for the rolling of strip metal. 4.392.367, CI. 72-12.000.
. Baldwin, John J.; and Ponticello, Gerald S., to Merck & Co.. Inc.
Certain nicotinic acid esters and corresponding nicotinonitriles.
4.393.212, CI. 546-286.000.
Bandelj, Bojan, to ISKRA-SOZD elektrokovinske industrije n.sol.o.
Low power siren. 4,393,374, CI. 340-405.000.
Bar, Alfredo, to Necchi Societa per Azioni. Hermetically sealed motor-
compressor unit for refrigerators. 4,392,789, CI. 417-312.000.
Barchard, John, to Spyder Sales & Service, Inc. Vehicle convertible
from a tricycle two wheel drive to a four wheel four wheel drive.
4,392,541, CI. 180-209.000.
Baret, Jean-Luc A. G., to Coming Glass Works. Method for disinfect-
ing immobilized enzymes. 4,393,138, CI. 435-176.000.
Bargiotti, Alberto; Cassinelli, Giuseppe; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone,
Federico; and Casazza, Annamaria, to Farmitalia Carlo Erba S.p.A.
Antitumor anthracycline glycosides, their preparation, intermediates
therefor, and compositions and use thereof 4,393,052, CI.
424-180.000.
Bargues, Denis: See-
Beck, Jean L.; le Bars, Jean F.; Emmanuelli, Yves A.; and Bargues,
Denis, 4,393,408, CI. 358-205.000.
Barker, John C; and McLaughlin, Ivan P., to J. J. Barker Company
Limited. Simulated ceramic tile. 4.393.108, CI. 428-44.000.
Barker. Leland W.. to Eastman Kodak Company. Method and appara-
tus for measuring total liquid volume flow. 4.393,451. CI. 364-510.000.
Barker. Robert A.; and Ong. Edith C. to Bell Telephone Laboratories.
Incorporated. Integrateid circuit device connection process.
4,392,298, CI. 29-577.00C.
Barnes, Michael F.: See —
Metz, Joseph R.; and Barnes, Michael F., 4,392,281, CI. 24-230.50R.
Barnes, Walter P.; and Emilio, Carlo, Jr. Beehive clamping and transfer
device. 4,392,679, CI. 294-15.000.
Bamhart, Steven G.: See-
Walters, John P.; and Bamhart, Steven G., 4,393,327, CI. 315-
24 l.OOR.
Barton, Dale S.; and Heck, Richard M., to Riise Engineering Company,
Inc. Angle stacking and inverting device. 4,392,765, CI. 414-30.000.
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Broecker, Franz J.; Hupfer, Leopold; Merger, Franz; Miesen,
Ernest; Paetsch, Juergen; and Zirker, Guenter, 4,393,251, CI.
568-811.000.
Davis, Robert E., 4,392,456, CI. 123-l.OOA.
Engelbach, Heinz; Steigleiter, Werner; and Glietenberg, Helmut,
4.392.984. CI. 252-432.000.
Hoffman, Werner; von Fraunberg, Karl; and Baumann, Manfred,
4,393,245, CI. 568-375.000.
Hummerich, Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger, Franz; Immel,
Guenther; Kraus, Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-Clemens,
4,393,207, CI. 544-196.000.
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker,
Klaus; Stephan, Rudolf; and Breuer, Hans, 4,393,164, CI.
- 525-83.000.
Patsch, Manfred; Ruske, Manfred; and Hahn, Erwin, 4,393,005, CI.
260-245.730.
Tonne, Peter; and Jaedicke, Hagen, 4,393,211, CI. 546-153.000.
BASF Farben & Fasem AG.: See—
Hoppe, Karl; and Strauss, Udo, 4,393,179, CI. 525-490.000.
Basotherm GmbH: See —
[ Hofmann-Igl, Ernest, 4,392,590, CI. 222-174.000.
Bassi, Alberto, to ITW Fastex Italia S.p.A. Retracuble ashtray, particu-
larly for motor vehicles. 4,392,683, CI. 296-37.900.
Battelle-Institut e.V.: See—
Schlueter, Gert; and Schuster, Wilhelm, 4,393,141, CI. 436-63.000.
Battista, Orlando A. Ultra high-foam dentifrice. 4,393,042, CI.
424-49.000.
Bauch, Ludwig. Apparatus for removing a tube core from and inserting
same into a heat exchanger. 4,392,524, CI. 165-76.000.
Bauer Bros. Co., The: See —
Beery, James P., 4,392,950, CI. 209-211.000.
Bauer, Ludwig, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft. Vent cap for a
container accommodating hydraulic fluids. 4,392,584, CI.
220-374.000.
Bauer, Rudolf: See—
Langbein, Adolf; Merz, Herbert; Sobotta. Rainer; Bauer, Rudolf;
Jennewein. Hans M.; and Mierau. Joachim. 4.393.069. CI.
424-265.000.
Bauerle. James E.. to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Gas sampler for
aerosol atmosphere. 4,392,388, CI. 73-863.230.
Bauerlen, Hans; Pfendler, Thomas; and Wocher, Berthold, to Robert
Bosch GmbH. Distance-frequency transducer. 4,392,383, CI.
73-724.000.
Bauman, William C: See —
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, 4,392,961, CI. 210-679.000.
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, 4,392,979, CI. 252-184.000.
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, 4,392,980, CI. 252-184.000.
Baumann, Manfred: See —
Hoffman, Wemer; von Fraunberg, Karl; and Baumann, Manfred,
4,393,245, CI. 568-375.000.
Baumli, Peter J. Labelling apparatus. 4,392,913, CI. 156-584.000.
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Blank, Heinz U.; Gabel, Eike; Goldschmitt, Emst; and Mentzel,
Wemer, 4,393,234, CI. 562-475.000.
FreiUg, Dieter; Bottenbruch, Ludwig; and Wulff, Claus, 4,393,009,
CI. 260-544.00K.
Kuhlthau, Hans-Peter, 4,392,998. CI. 26O-146.00R.
Lindner, Christian; Ott, Karl-Heinz; and Pischtschan, Alfred,
4,393,172, CI. 525-310.000.
Maurer, Fritz, 4,393,232, CI. 562-419.000.
Reischl, Artur; and Wagner, Kuno, 4,393,166, CI. 525-27.000.
Riebel, Hans-Jochem; Eue, Ludwig; and Faust, Wilfried, 4,392,882,
CI. 71-92.000.
Schutt, Hermann, 4,393,140, CI. 435-226.000.
Stadler. Peter; Metzger, Karl G.; Voss, Eckart; Petersen, Uwe; and
Zeiler, Hans-Joachim, 4,393.051, CI. 424-180.000.
Uhrhan, Paul; and Krauthausen, Edmund, 4,393,206, CI.
544-51.000.
Bayers, Jon. H. Apparatus for and method of suturing tissue. 4,392,495,
CI. I28-334.0OR.
Baylis, Francis P.; and Smith, Gary E., to Merck & Co., Inc. Combina-
tion of thiop«ptin and other related sulfur-containing cyclic polypep-
tide antibiotics with rumen-active diimides to improve ruminant feed
efficiency. 4,393,046. CI. 424-117.000.
Bazin, Lucas J.: See —
Hacke. Joseph F.; and Bazin, Lucas J., 4,393,395. CI. 358-23.000.
BBC Brown. Boveri & Company Limited: See—
Schwarzenbach. Alfred. 4.392.354. CI. 60-727.000.
Bears. John D.; and Emery, Kenneth R. D., to Ener-Tech Heating
Systems Inc. Oil bumer. 4,392,810, CI. 431-37.000.
Beck, Jean L.; le Bars, Jean F.; Emmanuelli, Yves A.; and Bargues,
Denis, to Thomson-CSF. Optoelectronic device for rotary scanning
of videofrequency images. 4,393,408, CI. 358-205.000.
Beck, Martin H.: See—
Pushee, Joan C; Harry, leuan L.; Beck, Martin H.; and Krishnaku-
mar, Suppayan M.. 4.392.804. CI. 425-174.80E.
Beecham Group Limited: See —
Cole. William G.; Goudie, Alexander C; and Rose, Carl J.,
4,393,079, CI. 424-331.000.
Beer, Hans: See —
Perl, Horst; Nussbaumer. Dietmar; Kluver. Horst; and Beer. Hans.
4.392.963. CI. 210-692.000.
Beer. Herbert, to Steifensand Sitzmobel- und Tischfabrik. Inh. Adjust-
able office chair. 4.392.686. CI. 297-376.000.
Beery. James P.. to Bauer Bros. Co.. The. Centrifugal type cleaner.
4.392.950. CI. 209-211.000.
Beeson. John M.: See-
Jameson. James J.; and Beeson. John M.. 4,392.391. CI. 74-333.000.
Behnke. Jurgen: See-
Eckstein, Wolfgang; Rabenecker, Horst; and Behnke, Jurgen.
4.392.389. CI. 73-864.910.
Beisswenger. Siegfried; Boppel. Wolfgang; and Grieger. Dieter, to Ing.
Rudolf Hell GmbH. Apparatus and method for engraving with an
electron beam. 4.393.295. CI. 219-121.0EJ.
Belforte, Piero; and Bortignon, Renzo, to Cselt Centro Studi e
Laboratori Telecomunicazioni S.p.A. Transceiver for full-duplex
transmission of digital signals over a common line. 4,393.494. CI.
370-27.000.
Bell. Melvyn R.; and Thomson, Charles D., to Ferranti Limited. Cool-
ing means for circuit assemblies each including hollow structures
spaced apart in a container. 4,393,437. CI. 361-383.000.
Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated: See —
Barker. Robert A.; and Ong. Edith C. 4.392.298. CI. 29-577.00C.
Briley. Bruce E.. 4.393.518. CI. 455-617.000.
Cantwell. Richard F.. Jr.. 4,393.497. CI. 370-89.000.
Collier. Robert J.; and Thomson. Michael G. R.. 4.393.312. CI.
250-492.200.
Feldman. Leonard C; Kraus. Joseph S.; Tolk. Norman H.; Traum.
Morton M.; and Tully. John C. 4.393,311, CI. 250-459.100.
Klein, Theodore H.. 4,393,111, CI. 428-195.000.
Marshall, Thomas G., Jr., 4,393,456, CI. 364-724.000.
Steele, Raymond, 4,393,276, CI. 179-1.50R.
Beller, Manfred; and Wiedenmann, Hans, to Wjeland-Werke AG..
Metallwerke. Process and apparatus for controlling the level of a
molten metal surface in continuous casting moulds. 4.392.523. CI.
164-453.000.
Belt. James S.: See —
Takeuchi. Kunthiko; and Belt, James S., 4,392,879, CI. 65-6.000.
Beltone Electronics Corporation: See —
Feldman. Stanley; and Koch. Gary, 4,393,275, CI. 179-l.OVL.
Belttary, Harold E., to GTE Products Corporation. Circuit breaker.
4,393,288, CI. 200-144.00R.
Ben Clements & Sons, Inc.: See —
Hara. Saburo. 4.392.906. CI. 156-250.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See —
Hall, James R.; and Whallon, William P., Jr^ 4,392,703, CI. 339-
49.00R.
Bengal, Inc.: See —
Lybrand, William. 4,393,159, CI. 524-243.000.
Lybrand, William, 4,393,176, CI. 525-379.000.
Benker, Klaus: See —
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker,
Klaus; Stephan. Rudolf; and Breuer. Hans. 4.393.164. CI.
525-83.000.
Bensen, Court. Flushing apparatus with selective quantity control.
4,392.260. CI. 4-324.000.
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Benson, Clark K.: See—
Caridis. Andrew A.; and Benson, Clark K., 4,392,420, CI.
99-406.000.
Beppu, Norio; and Fujii, Akira, to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha.
Intervals timer for cameras. 4,392.733, CI. 354-266.000.
Beran, Anthony V. Tube holder. 4,392,857, CI. 604-179.000.
Berger, Norbert: See —
FussI, Erwin; and Berger. Norbert, 4,392,821, CI. 432-96.000.
Berger, Richard P.; Pardes, Greg; and Gerber. Bernard R.. to Reseal
Container Corporation of America, The. Multilayered container
including a layer of microcrimped metallic foil. 4,392,576, CI. 215-
l.OOC.
Bergeron, Gaetan G. Scaffolding arrangement. 4,392,550, CI.
182-82.000.
Bergfeld, Manfred: See —
Zengel, Hans-Georg; and Bergfeld, Manfred, 4,393,238, CI.
564-255.000.
Bergthaller, Peter: See—
Schenk, Gunther; Bergthaller, Peter; Wolfrum, Gerhard; and
Stolzenburg, Rudolf, 4,393,132, CI. 430-562.000.
Beriie, Elmer M.; and Smart, John D., to Western Research and Devel-
opment. Waste gas incinerator. 4,392,816, CI. 431-202.000.
Beriie. Elmer M.; Smart, John D.; and Zelensky, Michael J., to Western
Research & Development. Waste gas incinerator with added fuel gas.
4.392.817, CI. 431-202.000.
Berlivet, Marc A.; and Guerineau. Abel A. J., to Hesston Corporation.
Crop windrowing machine having double windrow-forming attach-
ment. 4,392,339, CI. 56-192.000.
Bernard, Walter. Bicycle storage rack. 4,392.572, CI. 211-19.000.
Bemer, Godwin; and Kirchmayr, Rudolf, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
Thermally polymerizable mixtures and processes for the thermally-
initiated polymerization of cationically polymerizable compounds.
4,393,185, CI. 528-27.000.
Bernsau, Peter: See —
Bohn, Hans; Stein, Wolfgang; Bernsau, Peter; and Staubitzer, Fred,
4,392.909, CI. 156-306.900.
Bernstein, Seymour: See—
Nair, Vijay G.; Joseph, Joseph P.; and Bernstein, Seymour,
4,393,055, CI. 424-180.000.
Berting, John P.; and Kroeger. James K. Non-multiplexed LCD drive
circuit. 4,393,379, CI. 340-784.000.
Bertoldo. Giorgio, to Societa Pneumatici Pirelli S.p.A. Process and
apparatus for manufacturing vehicle tires. 4.392,899. CI. 156-127.000.
Bertsch, Richard: See—
Gunther. Dieter; Bertsch. Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold,
Herbert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt, Michael, 4,392,470, CI.
123-440.000.
Bertschinger, Hans; and Scherler, Alfred, to Locher & Cie. AG; and
Cellulose Attisholz AG. Sewage ventilating basin. 4,392,954, CI.
210-195.300.
Besen. Peter D.; Shulsinger. Don H.; and Goldberg, Stuart D., to
Selectastation, Inc. Remote tuner control system. 4,393,277, CI.
179-2.00A.
Bettucchi, Mauro: See —
Bortolotti, Andrea; and Bettucchi, Mauro, 4,392,802, CI.
425-107.000.
Bhaduri, Sumit; and Mahandru, Madan M., to Indian Explosives Lim-
ited. Method and the manufacture of cyclic mono and/or diketones
from cyclic mono or sesqui terpenes by catalytic oxidation. 4,393,244,
CI. 568-360.000.
Biebuyck, Jean-Jacques E. R. G.: See —
Legras. Roger M. H.; Biebuyck, Jean-Jacques E. R. G.; and Mer-
cier, Jean P., 4,393,178, CI. 525-437.000.
Bigorajski, Gunter: See —
Eisenberg, Gustav; and Bigorajski, Gunter, 4,393,021, CI.
264-143.000.
Biller, Efim, to Elprochine AG. Process for the preparation of polyaryl
amines having methylene bridges. 4,393,239, CI. 564-331.000.
Billett, Ronald J.; and ViiUnen, Veikko K., to FMC Corporation.
Apparatus for making pallets. 4,392,600, CI. 227-50.000.
Billman, Timothy B.; and Kautz, Jon F., to AMP Incorporated. Appli-
cator tool for loose miniature spring sockets. 4.392,300, CI.
29-739.000.
Billman, Timothy B.: See —
Andrews, Howard W., Jr.; Billman, Timothy B.; and Cobaugh.
Robert F., 4.392.705. CI. 339-75.0MP.
Bilow. Norman, to United Sutes of America, Air Force. Diethynylben-
zene-ethynylpyrene copolymers. 4,393,101, CI. 427-228.000.
Binder, Kurt: See—
Gast, Theodor; and Binder, Kurt, 4,392,632. CI. 251-65.000.
Binet, Daniel: See —
C>awans, Francois; Binet, Daniel; Kohler, Norbert; and Dang Vu.
Quang. 4.393,151, CI. 523-130.000.
Binks Industries, Inc.: See—
Calkms, James D.; Bushong, Eugene E.; and Schuck, Lee R.,
4,393,313, CI. 250-560.000.
Bio Clinic Company: See —
Wagner, Bill L.. Sr., 4,392,489, CI. 128-80.00A.
Birkle. Siegfried: See—
Stoeger, Klaus; Birkle, Siegfried; and Gehring, Johann, 4,392,936,
CI. 204-213.000.
Bishop, Larry D., to Reliance Electric Co. Digital subscriber carrier
system including drop terminals and bypass and loopback means and
alarm indication means. 4,393,492, CI. 370-15.000.
Bittle, Carl E., to Universal Foods Corporation. Root crop harvester.
4,392,533. CI. 171-14.000.
Black, Hugh J. Portable heat circulation means. 4,392,478, CI.
126-84.000.
Blades, Brian J., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Thermally respon-
sive fluid and electrical switch and control system. 4,392,608, CI.
236-48.00R.
Blanchard. Richard A., to Supertex, Inc. Power MOS transistor with a
plurality of longitudinal grooves to increase channel conducting area.
4.393,391, CI. 357-23.000.
Blank, Heinz U.; Gabel, Eike; Goldschmitt, Ernst; and Mentzel, Wer-
ner, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation of
3-hydroxybenzoic acid. 4,393,234, CI. 562-475.000.
Bloemers, James L.; Schiek, James M.; Frazzell. Michael E.; and Karls,
Michael A., to Brunswick Corporation. Marine drive water pump.
4,392,779, CI. 415-141.000.
Blume, James W., Sr. Game apparatus. 4,392,653, CI. 273-400.000.
Blunt, Thomas O., to General Electric Company. Automatic feeding
apparatus. 4,392,766, CI. 414-113.000.
BMC Products: See—
Weiler, Raywood C, 4,392,436, CI. 108-81.000.
Boba, Joseph; and Conger, Robert P., to Congoleum Corporation. Stain
resisunt, abrasion resistant polyurethane coating composition, sub-
strate coated therewith and production thereof. 4,393,187, CI.
528-60.000.
Bock, Gustavus P., to General Motors Corporation. Electric motor
powered actuator. 4,393.319, CI. 310-80.000.
Boehringer Mannheim GmbH: See —
Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, 4,393,139, CI.
435-219.000.
Boeing Company, The: See —
Jackson, Tee-Squant-Nee; Vernon, Paul M.; and Schoen, David A.,
4,393,498, CI. 371-20.000.
Jones, William R., 4,393,382, CI. 343-1 12.00D.
McClaflin, John R., 4,392,622, CI. 244-102.00A.
Mickelsen, Reid A.; and Chen, Wen S., 4,392,451, CI. 118-690.000.
Munsen, Victor A.; and McClaflin, John R., 4,392,623, CI. 244-
102.00R.
Sears, Stanley L., 4,392,604, CI. 228-212.000.
Boguth, Walter; and Hirth, Georges, to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.
Pharmaceutical preparations. 4,393,057, CI. 424-229.000.
Boguth, Walter; and Hirth, Georges, to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.
Pharmaceutical preparations. 4,393,073, CI. 424-284.000.
Bohen, Joseph M.: See —
Sandler, SUnley R.; and Bohen, Joseph M., 4,393,248, CI.
568-676.000.
Bohn, Hans; Stein, Wolfgang; Bernsau, Peter; and Staubitzer, Fred, to
Robert Burkle GmbH & Co. Method and device for producing
multilayer printed circuit boards. 4,392,909, CI. 156-306.900.
Bolz, Gunner: See —
Deindoerfer, Fred H.; DeForest, Sherman E.; and Bolz, Gunner,
4,393,466, CI. 364-415.000.
Bonar Horticulture, Ltd.: See —
Sanders, Bernard, 4,392,327, CI. 47-59.000.
Bone, John A.: See —
Perisic, Milan; Lumbers, Warwick J.; and Bone, John A., 4,392,392,
CI. 74-626.000.
Bonewitz, Hans-Ulrich; Muhlich, Albert; and Rau, Karlheinz, to Hera-
eus Quarzschmeize GmbH. Optical fiber. 4,392,715, CI. 350-96.330.
Bonifaz, Cristobal, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Light
monoolefins from methanol and/or dimethyl ether. 4,393,265, CI.
585-639.000.
Bonny, Weldon D. Cooking and smoking apparatus. 4,392,419, CI.
99-339.000.
Booe, James M, Jr. Combination tool for removing and replacing a nut.
4.392.264. CI. 7-138.000.
Boothman. Edwin F. Sign letter construction. 4,392,317, CI. 40-618.000.
Boppel, Wolfgang: See —
Beisswenger, Siegfried; Boppel. Wolfgang; and Grieger, Dieter.
4,393,295, CI. 219-121.0EJ.
Borg- Warner Corporation: See —
Smit, Geoffrey N., 4,392,843, CI. 474-245.000.
Boria, Thomas J. Plant shelter. 4,392,326, CI. 47-28.00R.
Bormann, Dieter: See —
Merkel, Wulf; Bormann, Dieter; Mania, Dieter; and Muschaweck,
Roman, 4,393,072, CI. 424-275.000.
Bortignon, Renzo: See —
Belforte, Piero; and Bortignon, Renzo, 4.393,494, CI. 370-27.000.
Bortolotti, Andrea; and Bettucchi, Mauro. to Automa S.p.A. Apparatus
for blow molding and conditioning synthetic resin containers.
4,392,802, CI. 425-107.000.
Borzym, John J. Tube cutting apparatus. 4,392,644, CI. 269-157.000.
Bosworth, Jack L. Rimmed cartridge magazine loader. 4,392,321, CI.
42-87.000.
Botez, Dan, to RCA Corporation. High power semiconductor laser.
4,393,504, CI. 372-45.000.
Bottcher, Siegfried: See—
Gunther, Dieter; Bertsch, Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold,
Herbert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt, Michael, 4,392,470, CI.
123-440.000.
Bottenbruch, Ludwig: See —
Freitag, Dieter; Bottenbruch, Ludwig; and Wulff, Claus, 4,393,009,
CI 26O-544.0OK.
Boudault, Robert, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Slystem for locally
testing a modem employing frequency shift keying. 4,393,508, CI.
375-9.000.
Bourne, W. John. Applicator for granular material. 4,392,587, CI.
222-63.000.
July 12, 19
11
LIST OF PATENTEES
PIS
Boute. Raymond T. G.. to International Standard Electric Corporation.
Process control apparatus. 4,393,469, CI. 364-900.000.
Bowden. Charles J., to General Signal Corporation. Gear pump or
motor with low pressure bearing lubrication. 4,392,798, CI.
418-102.000.
Bowler, Eleanor G.: See —
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; Walker, Harrel L.;
Bowler, Eleanor G.; and Ritchey, Charles R., 4,393,048. CI.
424-132.000.
Bowles. David J.; Clancy, Douglas E.; Johnson, Carl F.; and Neal,
Danny M., to International Business Machines Corporation. Under-
score erase. 4,392,758, CI. 400-697.100.
Boyd, Mary G.; and Smith, Donald R., to Dennison Manufacturing
Company. Method of transferring designs onto articles. 4,392,905, CI.
156-235.000.
Brachthauser. Kunibert; and Herchenbach. Horst. to Klockner-Hum-
boldt-Deutz AG. System for burning fine-grained material, particu-
larly for the manufacture of cement clinkers. 4.392,822. CI.
432-106.000.
Bracke. William J. I.; and Lanza, Emmanuel, to Labofina, S.A. Process
for preparing rubbery polymer reinforced styrenic resins. 4,393.171.
CI. 525-309.000.
Bradley, John J.: See —
Fulk. James B.; McKeefry, Jerry L.; Schuning. George F.; and
Bradley. John J., 4,392,844, CI. 493-399.000.
Bredo, Guido. Trouser construction. 4,392,259, CI. 2-227.000.
Brensing, Karl-Heinz: See^~
Ramdohr, Detlef; Knauf, Walter; Brensing. Karl-Heinz; and Kum-
merling. Rolf. 4,392,369, CI. 72-96.000.
Brent, Albert: See-
Marion. Charles P.; Brent, Albert; Richter, George N.; Crouch.
William B.; Child. Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,392,869,
CI. 48-197.00R.
Breuer, Hans: See —
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker.
Klaus; Stephan, Rudolf; and Breuer, Hans. 4,393.164, CI.
525-83.000.
Breuninger, William F., to National Starch and Chemical Corporation.
Method for dewatering starch slurries containing swollen starch
granules resulting from treatment with cationic reagents. 4,393,202,
CI. 536-102.000. —
Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd.: See—
Kaneda, Hiroshi; Arai. Katsuhiko; Suzuki. Akira; and Ohashi,
Takashi. 4,393,015, CI. 264-51.000.
Bright. David R.: See-
Brown. Ross G.; Bright, David R.; and Williams, Robert D.,
4,393,041, CI. 424-19.000.
Briley, Bruce E., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Optical
communication arrangement. 4,393,518, CI. 455-617.000.
British Petroleum Company Limited, The: See —
Moore, Anthony J.; and Silver. Howard B.. 4.392.973, CI.
252-78.100.
Brittain. David R.; and Wood. Robin, to Imperial Chemical Industries
PLC. Pharmaceutical compositions and method for the production of
an anti-inflammatory effect. 4,393.062. CI. 424-250.000.
Broadhurst. Michael J.; Hassall. Cedric H.; and Thomas. Gareth J., to
HofTmann-La Roche Inc. Process to produce hexahydronaphthacene
derivatives. 4,393,221. CI. 549-39.000.
Brock. Phillip J.; and Dawson, Daniel J., to Dynapol. Process for the
continuous diazotization of water-soluble polymeric amines.
4,393,175, CI. 525-377.000.
Brock, Phillip J.: See—
Dawson, Daniel J.; and Brock. Phillip J.. 4.393.174. CI.
525-369.000.
Brockington, Francis R. Continuous vapor phase chromatography.
4,392,873, CL 55-67.000.
Brodsky, Alexander; and Clark, Richard J., to Fisher & Paykel Limited.
Method and apparatus for flanging tube ends. 4,392,372, CI.
72-311.000.
Broecker, Franz J.; Hupfer. Leopold; Merger. Franz; Miesen. Ernest;
Paetsch, Juergen; and Zirker, Guenter. to BASF Aktiengesellschaft.
Preparation of propanediols using a copper-and zinc containing
hydrogenation catalyst. 4,393,251. CI. 568-811.000.
Broggi, Renato: See —
Falciani, Marco; and Broggi, Renato, 4,393,205, CI. 544-28.000.
Brokke, Mervin E.: See —
Pallos, Ferenc M.; Brokke, Mervin E.; and Ameklev, Duane R..
4.392,884. CI. 71-100.000.
Brown, Gerald V., to United States of America, National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Magnetic heat pumping. 4,392,356, CI.
62-3.000.
Brown, Harold J., to Reliance Electric Co. Transistor drive circuit.
4,393,316, CI. 307-270.000.
Brown, Leon C; Campbell, Jesse L.; Fitts, Uscoe J.; and Gudgel.
Willard L., to International Business Machines Corporation. Electro-
mechanically operated fuser roll closure. 4,392,739, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Brown, Marvin R.: See —
Vale, Wylie W., Jr.; Rivier, Jean E. F.; and Brown. Marvin R.,
4,393,050. CI. 424-177.000.
Brown, Robert J. S.: See-
Thompson, Don D.; Brown, Robert J. S.; and Runge, Richard J.,
4,393,486. CI. 367-73.000.
Brown, Ross G.; Bright, David R.; and Williams, Robert D.. to Interna-
tional Minerals & Chemical Corp.; and International Minerals &
Chemical Corp. Fibrin binder/carrier for active biochemical agents.
4,393,041, CI. 424-19.000.
Brown, Ross K.; Thompson, Raymond D.; Woods, Terrill W.; Wright.
Darrell L.; Conner. James M.; Crookes. William E.; and Purcell.
William F.. to Deere & Company. Suspended operator station.
4.392.546, CI. 180-326.000.
Brown, Russell L. Device for use with a toggle bolt. 4,392,763. CI.
411-342.000.
Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation: See-
Newton, Richard P.; Harper, Patrick H.; Geiss, Vernon L.; and
Jewell, John N., 4,392,501, CI. 131-300.000.
Bruce Industries, Inc.: See —
Petrina, Robert J., 4.393.435. CI. 361-377.000.
Bruderreck. Hartmut: See-
Gottlieb. Klaus; Bruderreck, Hartmut; and Wehmeier, Friedel-
Heinrich. 4,393,250, CI. 568-697.000.
Bruggendieck, Siegfried; Nolting, Karl-Heinz; Krahn, Friedrich; and
Olejak, Gerhard, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Overhead power cable
having light conducting fibers arranged in its interior. 4,392,714, CI.
350-96.230.
Brunelli, Maurizio: See —
Costanzi. Silvestro; Tessarolo. Francesco; and Brunelli. Maurizio.
4,393.218, CI. 548-530.000.
Brunet. Maurice: See —
Habermann, Helmut; and Brunet, Maurice, 4.392,693, CI.
308-10.000.
Brunswick Corporation: See —
Bloemers. James L.; Schiek, James M.; Frazzell. Michael E.; and
Karls, Michael A.. 4.392,779, CI. 415-141.000.
Brush Switchgear Limited: See —
Stewart. John S.; and Gonek. Stanislaw M.. 4,393,291, CI. 200-
148.00R.
Bschorr, Oskar. to Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit
beschraenkter Haftung. Tire with open cell foam insert for reducing
noise. 4,392,522, CI. 152-341.000.
BSL Corporation: See—
Gidge, Kenneth N.; and Richard, Henry J., 4,392,360. CI.
62-249.000.
Buchanan. David J.; Davis. Richard; and Jackson, Peter J., to Coal
Industry (Patents) Limited. Method of stacking seismic data.
4.393.484. CI. 367-23.000.
Buckhouse, Norman O.; Stevens, Aaron A.; and Lawrence, Randall K.,
to Murray Ohio Manufacturing Co., The. Hydrosutic transmission
control. 4.392.543, CI. 180-272.000.
Budnowski, Manfred: See —
Fischer, Herbert; Budnowski, Manfred; and Zeidler, Ulrich,
4,393,060, CI. 424-248.500.
Bueno, Victor M. Chalkboard eraser cleaner system. 4,392.268. CI.
15-91.000.
Buhr, Terry J., to Rolscreen Company. Casement window. 4,392,330,
CI. 49-381.000.
Burbank, Max B.; Lomnes, Randy K.; Vrba, Jiri; and Fife, Alistair A.,
to Canada. Her Majesty the Queen in right of, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence. Asymmetrical SQUID. 4.393,349. CI.
324-248.000.
Burdette. George W.: See —
Reed, Russell, Jr.; Burdette, George W.; Meyers, Gary W.; and
Vuono. William R., 4,392.895. CI. 149-19.300.
Burg, Daniel Earl: See —
Burg. Donald E.. 4.392,445, CI. 1 14-67.00A.
Burg, Donald E., to Burg, Paulette Renee; Burg. Sheri Renee; Burg,
Daniel Earl; and Burg. Nicole Renee. part interest to each. Flexible
bow air ride boat hull. 4.392.445, CI. 114-67.00A.
Burg, Nicole Renee: See-
Burg. Donald E.. 4,392,445, CI. 114-67.00A.
Burg, Paulette Renee: See-
Burg. Donald E.. 4.392.445. CI. 1 14-67.00A.
Burg. Sheri Renee: See —
Burg, Donald E., 4,392,445, CI. 114-67.00A.
Burlington Industries, Inc.: See—
Goodnough, Douglas D.. 4.392.516. CI. 139-115.000.
Burrell Construction & Supply Co.: See —
Harbaugh. William L.; and Smetana. Raymond S., 4,393,018, CI.
264-82.000.
Burroughs Corporation: See —
Potash, Hanan, 4,393,465, CI. 364-900.000.
Burroughs Wellcome Co.: See —
Moncada, Salvador E., 4,393,063. CI. 424-251.000.
Peck. Anthony W., 4.393.078. CI. 424-330.000.
Burton, Donald J.; and Flynn, Richard M., to University of Iowa
Research Foundation. Method for the preparation of fluorine-con-
taining phosphonates and phosphonic acids. 4,393,011, CI.
260-970.000.
Burton, John H.; and Mikulich, Michael A., to American Medical
Systems, Inc. Limited bend malleable penile prosthesis. 4,392,562, CI.
128-79.000.
Burwell, Maurel R. Method of cleaning a well and apparatus thereof
4,392,529, CI. 166-255.000.
Buryakov, Viktor P.; Ivanov, Gennady M.; Kislik, Mikhail I.; Kur-
gansky, Pavel M.; Shmotkin, Mark B.; and Eikhenvald, Eduard V.
Dosing device for feeding lubricant to friction couples. 4,392.551. CI.
184-7.00D.
Buser, Rudolph G.; Osche. Gregory R.; Nomiyama, Neal T.; and
Rohde. Robert S.. to United States of America, Army. Pulse code
modulation of laser pulse tail. 4,393,517, CI. 455-608.000.
Bush Universal, Inc.: See —
LeBaron, Steven M., 4,392.266, CI. 12-146.008.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Bushong, Eugene E.: See —
Calkins, James D.; Bushong, Eugene E.; and Schuck, Lee R.,
4.393,313, CI. 250-560.000.
ButterTield Group: See —
Butterfield, Ida M., 4,392,852. CI. 604-1 1 1.000.
ButterTield, Ida M., to Butterfield Group. Tamper-alerting hypodermic
syringe. 4,392,852, CI. 604-111.000.
Butterfield, John L.: See—
Siddiqui, Ehtisham U. A.; Wenzel, James L.; and Butterfield, John
L., 4,392,835. CI. 464-32.000.
Butterworth. George A. M.; and Fillwalk, Frank J., to Johnson &
Johnson Baby Products Company. Two-ply fibrous facing material.
4,392,861, CI. 604-366.000.
Byrne, James C. to Gulf & Western Manufacturing Company. Wind-
shield cleaning system. 4,393,341, CI. 318-443.000.
C. H. Boehringer Sohn: See —
Langbein, Adolf; Merz, Herbert; Sobotta, Rainer; Bauer, Rudolf;
Jennewein, Hans M.; and Mierau, Joachim, 4,393,069, CI.
424-265.000.
Caines, Michael J., to United Sutes of America, Energy. High tempera-
ture pressure coupled ultrasonic waveguide. 4,392,380, CI.
73-644.000.
Calderone, Nicholas; Watkins, Hugh; and Yoshida, Takao, to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Enhancing or augmenting the
aroma of detergents using mixtures including 4-methyl-3-cyclohex-
ene-1-carboxylic acid. 4,392,976, CI. 252-174.110
Calkins, James D.; Bushong, Eugene E.; and Schuck, Lee R., to Binks
Industries, Inc. Width detector system. 4,393,313, CI. 250-560.000.
Calvert, Harry B., to Calvert Manufacturing, Inc. Knife pitch control
for veneer lathe. 4.392,519, CI. 144-212.000.
Calvert Manufacturing, Inc.: See —
Calvert, Harry B.. 4,392,519. CI. 144-212.000.
Cameron. Colin H.: See —
Rook, Graham A. W.; and Cameron, Colin H., 4,392,746, CI.
356-409.000.
Campbell, Henry F.: See —
Douglas, George H.; and Campbell, Henry F., 4,393,077, CI.
424-326.000.
Campbell, Jesse L.: See —
Brown, Leon C; Campbell, Jesse L.; Fitts, Uscoe J.; and Gudgel,
Willard L., 4,392,739. CI. 355-3.0FU.
Campbell, Steve, to Pipe Systems, Incorporated. Method for making
polyolefin pipe connector sleeve. 4,392.294, CI. 29-451.000.
Campeau, Gary P., to Suburban Tool, Inc. Magnetic hold down tool.
4,392,643, CI. 269-136.000.
Can-Eng Holdings Limited: See —
Harding, Brian, 4,392,814, CI. 431-170.000.
Canada, Her Majesty the Queen in right of, as represented by the
Minister of National Defence: See —
Burbank, Max B.; Lomnes, Randy K.; Vrba, Jiri; and Fife, Alistair
A., 4,393,349, CI. 324-248.000.
Fenrick, Walter J.; Chesney, Robert H.; and Mast, Paul A.,
4,392,432, CI. 102-334.000.
Canadian Skate Contours, Ltd.: See —
Sakcriska, Glenn, 4,392,332, CI. 51-92.0BS.
Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Fujimura, Masayuki, 4,393,428, CI. 360-123.000.
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Fujimura, Masayuki, 4,393,428, CI. 360-123.000.
Fujino, Hitoshi; Kanoto, Masanobu; and Ichihashi, Hiroo,
4,392,738, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Inuzuka, Tsuneki; Murakami, Koichi; Kurita, Kenji; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi, 4,392,741, CI. 355-I4.00R.
Iwashita, Tomonori; and Fukahori, Hidehiko, 4,392,730, CI.
354-173.000.
Kitamura, Takashi, 4,393,387, CI. 346-108.000.
Shirato, Yoshiaki; Takatori, Yasushi; Hara, Toshitami; Nishimura,
Yukuo; and Takahashi, Michiko, 4,392,907, CI. 156-252.000.
Yokomizo, Yoshikazu, 4,393,407, CI. 358-166.000.
Cantwell, Richard F., Jr., to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorpo-
rated. Loop switching system. 4,393,497, CI. 370-89.000.
Capezzuto, John P.; and Johnson, Lewis H., to Dennison Manufactur-
ing Company. Retractable ink stamp. 4,392,425, CI. 101-327.000.
Carella, Richard F. Arrow fletching. 4,392,654, CI. 273-423.000.
Caridis, Andrew A.; and Benson, Clark K., to Heat & Control. Inc.
Recirculating hot oil cooking apparatus. 4.392,420, CI. 99-406.000.
Carl Freudenb«rg, Firma: See —
Schmidt, Klaus, 4,392,876, CI. 55-524.000.
Carl Still Gmbh & Co. KG, Firma: See-
Weber. Heinrich; Lorenz, Kurt; and Dungs, Horst, 4,392,823, CI.
432-114.000.
Carlqvist, Stig G.: See —
Tieberg, Urs A.; and Carlqvist, Stig G., 4,392,809, CI. 431-11.000.
Carrier Corporation: See —
Anderson, Gordon K., 4,393,320, CI. 310-156.000.
O'Mara, Raymond D.; Smorol, Michael E.; and Tobin, Curtis L.,
4,392,525, CI. 165-125.000.
Carron, Henry: See —
Tourdot, Jacques; and Carron, Henry, 4,392,975, CI. 252-99.000.
Casazza, Annamaria: See —
Bargiotti, Alberto; Cassinelli, Giuseppe; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone,
Federico; and Casazza, Annamaria, 4,393,052, CI. 424-180.000.
Case, Theodore W. Level rod for grading. 4,392,308, CI. 33-293.000.
Cassatta, Joseph C: See —
Garrett, David L., Jr.; and Cassatta, Joseph C, 4,393,094, CI.
427-44.000.
Cassinelli, Giuseppe: See —
Bargiotti, Alberto; Cassinelli, Giuseppe; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone,
Federico; and Casazza, Annamaria, 4,393,052, CI. 424-180.000.
Castille, Dale J. Pipe handling apparatus. 4,392,770, CI. 414-432.000.
Caterpillar Tractor Co.: See —
Clarke, John M., 4,392,395, CI. 74-690.000.
Frantzreb, John G., Sr., 4,393,298, CI. 219-137.620
Melocik, Kurt B., 4,392,415, CI. 91-461.000.
Roley, Robert D., 4,392,657, CI. 277-95.000.
Cathey, Thaddeus F.: See —
Skura, William A.; and Cathey, Thaddeus F., 4,392,842, CI.
474-205.000.
Cavalli, Alfredo. Self-contained ice cream apparatus. 4,392,361, CI.
62-343.000.
Celanese Corporation: See —
East. Anthony J., 4,393,191, CI. 528-207.000.
Hanson, Harry T.; and Sapp, John B., Jr., 4,393,241, CI. 568-49.000.
Cells, Roberto V. Smog eliminator. 4,392,875, CI. 55-228.000.
Cellulose Attisholz AG.: See—
Bertschinger, Hans; and Scherler, Alfred, 4,392,954, Q.
210-195.300.
Central Safety Equipment Company: See —
Gordon, Edmund A., deceased; and Yaecker, John, Administrator,
4,392,344, CI. 59-78.100.
Chambers, Charles A.: See —
Harris, Jeff; Chambers, Charles A.; and Horwitz, Jack M.,
4,392,324, CI. 46-l.OOF.
Chang, Long F.: See —
Uhlig, Albert R.; and Chang, Long F., 4,392,579, CI. 215-253.000.
Chang, Moo K. Solar heating panel arrangement. 4,392,482, CI.
126-440.000.
Chapman, Dan. Hand, wrist and forearm exercising device. 4,392,649,
CI. 272-67.000.
Chareire, Jean-Louis, to Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale.
Four stroke thermal engine capable of temporary boost. 4,392,459,
CI. 123-21.000.
Charles HofTert of America, Inc.: See —
Michaud, Franck, 4,392,289, CI. 29-160.600.
Charrier, Jean: See —
Koulbanis, Constantin; Zabotto, Arlette; Gnat, Jacqueline; and
Charrier, Jean, 4,393,043, CI. 424-59.000.
Cheetham, Peter S. J., to Talres Development (N.A.) N.V. Bacterial
ethanol production. 4,393,136, CI. 435-161.000.
Chemische Werke Huls AG: See—
Rigler, Josef K.; Wienhofer, Ekkehard; Leithauser, Horst; and
Trukenbrod, Karl, 4,393,146, CI. 521-56.000.
Chen, James L.: See —
Pawelchak, John M.; Chen, James L.; Cryan, John G.; and La Via,
Anthony L., 4,393,080, CI. 428-355.000.
Chen, Wen S.: See—
Mickelsen, Reid A.; and Chen, Wen S., 4,392,451, CI. 118-690.000.
Chemoff, Edward A.: See —
Schreiner, Gary W.; Kemp, Merle L., Jr.; and Chemoff, Edward
A., 4,393,359, CI. 335-128.000.
Cherry, Norman H.: See —
Grosse, Aristid V.; and Cherry, Norman H., 4,392,865, CI.
44-51.000.
Chesney, Robert H.: See —
Fenrick, Walter J.; Chesney, Robert H.; and Mast, Paul A.,
4,392,432, CI. 102-334.000.
Chester, Arthur W.: See—
Chu, Yung F.; and Chester, Arthur W., 4,392,989, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Chevron Research Company: See —
Gassaway, Gary S.; Richgels, Henry J.; and Foster, James I.,
4,393,488, CI. 367-75.000.
Peterson, Terry M., 4,393,267, CI. 136-260.000.
Thompson, Don D.; Brown, Robert J. S.; and Runge, Richard J.,
4,393,486, CI. 367-73.000.
Wallman, P. Henrik; and Spars, Byron G., 4,392,942, CI. 208-
ll.OOR.
Chiba, Toshiyuki: See —
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Tsuji, Kiyoshi; and Chiba,
Toshiyuki, 4,393,059, CI. 424-246.000.
Chieflb, Anibole B.; Davis, Howard K.; and Rizzo, Joyce A., to Sun CHI
Company of Pennsylvania. Vapor recovery unit performance test
analyzer and method. 4,392,870, CI. 55-20.000.
Child, Edward T.: See-
Marion, Charles P.; Brent, Albert; Richter, George N.; Crouch,
William B.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,392,869,
CI. 48-197.00R.
Chinoin Gyogyszer Es Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara Rt: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszio; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Chitayat, Anwar, to Anorad Corporation. Workpiece positioning table
with air bearing pads. 4,392,642, CI. 269-73.000.
Christmas Club: See—
Winiarski, Albert C, 4,392,675, CI. 282-23.00R.
Chu, Yung F.; and Chester, Arthur W., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Zinc-gallium zeolite. 4,392,989, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Chubb Fire Security Limited: See —
Evans, John L.; and Bains, Kuldip, 4,392,618, CI. 239-461.000.
Churcher, Dale L.: See —
Novoselac, John; and Churcher, Dale L., 4,392,846, CI. 494-40.000.
July 12, 198;
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
Ciaffone, John T., to Warner-Lambert Company. One-piece razor
handle. 4,392,303, CI. 30-85.000.
Ciba-Geigy AG: See —
Priester, Martin; and Loew, Peter, 4,393,007, CI. 260-378.000.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See —
Andrews, Christopher M., 4,393,180, CI. 525-504.000.
Bemer, Godwin; and Kirchmayr, Rudolf, 4,393, 1 85, CI. 528-27.000.
Hathaway, Roderick D.; Irving, Edward; and Waterhouse, John S.,
4,392,930, CI. 204-159.140.
Muller, Rolf; Roueche, Armand; Muller, Paul; and Ronco, Karl,
4,392,999, CI. 260-157.000.
Weiss, Jonas; and Seltzer, Raymond, 4,393,002, CI. 260-239.30R.
Cinkel Industries, Ltd.: See —
Vander Eyken, Gerardus H.; and Thoman, James J., 4,392,446, CI.
114-144.00R,
Circuit Research Labs: See —
Jones, Ronald R., 4,393,346, CI. 323-280.000.
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; Gielis, Gerardus C. M.; Schmidt, Johan
M.; and Schoonheijm, Harry B., to U.S. Philips Corporation. FM-
Receiver with transmitter characterization. 4,393,273, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Clancy, Douglas E.: See —
Bowles, David J.; Clancy, Douglas E.; Johnson, Carl F.; and Neal,
Danny M. 4,392,758, CI. 400-697.100.
Clark Equipment Company: See —
Dilno, Guy L., 4,392,544, CI. 180-273.000.
Schultz, Donald L., 4,392,670, CI. 280-775.000.
Clark, Richard J., to Fisher & Paykel Limited. Forming means.
4,392,373, CI. 72-321.000.
Clark. Richard J.: See—
Brodsky. Alexander; and Clark. Richard J., 4,392,372, CI.
72-311.000.
Clarke, John M., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Infinitely variable transmis-
sion. 4,392,395. CI. 74-690.000.
Clemmons, James I., Jr., to United States of America, National Aero-
nautics and Space Administration. Instrument for determining coinci-
dence and elapse time between independent sources of random se-
quential events. 4,392,749, CI. 368-1 18.000.
Cleveland Clinic Foundation, The: See —
Petre, John H.; and Cosgrove, Delos M., 4,392,849, CI. 604-66.000.
Clough, Douglas O.: See-
Parker, Alan; Famhill, William M.; and Clough, Douglas O.,
4,392,343, CI. 57-401.000.
Clumpner, Joseph A., to Swiss Aluminium Ltd. Apparatus for degas-
sing molten metal. 4,392,636, CI. 266-218.000.
Coad, Peter, Jr.; and Wilensky, David E., to Way International, The.
System for transcribing analog signals, particularly musical notes,
having characteristic frequencies and durations into corresponding
visible indicia. 4,392,409, CI. 84-462.000.
Coal Industry (Patents) Limited: See —
Buchanan, David J.; Davis, Richard; and Jackson, Peter J.,
4,393,484, CI. 367-23.000.
Cobaugh, Robert F.: See-
Andrews, Howard W., Jr.; Billman, Timothy B.; and Cobaugh,
Robert F., 4,392,705, CI. 339-75.0MP.
Cobum Optical Industries, Inc.: See —
Tusinski, Joseph; and Hill, Phillip D., 4,392,334, CI. 51-263.000.
Cochrane, Peter; and Kitchen, James A., to Post Office, The. Digital
data transmission system having frequency or phase modulated data
carrying signals to provide supervisory channel. 4,393,279, CI. 179-
175.31R.
Coffey, Gerald P.: See—
Curatolo, Benedict S.; and Coffey, Gerald P., 4,393,192, CI.
528-292.000.
Coillet, Dudley W. Process for sterilization and removal of inorganic
salts from a water stream. 4,392,959, CI. 210-638.000.
Coin Acceptors, Inc.: See —
Maloney, Robert T.; and Vogt, Carl L., 4,392,505, CI. 133-4.00A.
Cole, William G.; Goudie, Alexander C; and Rose, Carl J., to Beecham
Group Limited. Pharmaceutical compositions. 4,393,079, CI.
424-331.000.
Coles Cranes Limited: See —
Gyomrey, Karl M., 4,392,573, CI. 212-230.000.
Collier, Robert J.; and Thomson, Michael G. R., to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated. Variable-spot scanning in an electron
beam exposure system. 4,393,312, CI. 250-492.200.
Colombo, Mario, Jr.: See —
Ennis, Gerald E.; and Colombo, Mario, Jr., 4,392,775, CI.
414-729.000.
Colpo Company Limited: See —
Takasugi, Mitsuo; and Okuyama, Ajoshio, 4,392,491, CI.
604-202.000.
Colt Industries Operating Corp.: See-
Douglas, Alec T.; and Havers, James S., 4,393,455, CI. 364-519.000.
Comact Pump Corporation: See —
Kuehn. Andrew, III; and Hoefs, Edwin G., 4,392,782, CI.
417-36.000.
Combustion Engineering, Inc.: See —
Gaines, Albert L., 4,392,918, CI. 376-133.000.
Compagnie Internationale pour I'lnformatique Cii-Honeywell Bull
(Societe AnMiyme): See —
Miard, Pierre V. L., 4,393,470, CI. 364-200.000.
Concannon, Thomas P., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Article coated with aqueous dispersion of fluoropolymers in combi-
nation with epoxy-type film formers. 4,393,119, CI. 428-413.000.
Conger, Robert P.: See—
Boba. Joseph; and Conger, Robert P., 4,393,187, CI. 528-60.000.
Congoleum Corporation: See —
Boba, Joseph; and Conger, Robert P., 4,393,187, CI. 528-60.000.
Conner, James M.: See —
Brown, Ross K.; Thompson, Raymond D.; Woods, Terrill W.;
Wright, Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes, William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546. CI. 180-326.000.
Consortium fur elektrochemische Industrie GmbH: See —
Haberle. Norman; Eberle, Otto; and Hafner, Walter. 4,393,220, CI.
548-545.000.
Conterio. Eugene E. Portable preheating system for internal combus-
tion engines. 4.392.609. CI. 237-12.30C.
Continental Can Company. Inc.: See —
Kubis. Charles S.; and Walter, John. 4.392.764, CI. 413-69.000.
Continental Group, Inc.. The: See —
Pushee. Joan C; Harry, leuan L.; Beck, Martin H.; and Krishnaku-
mar, Suppayan M., 4,392,804, CI. 425-174.80E
Converse Inc.: See—
Crowley. Kevin J.; and Souther. Channing, 4,392,312, CI. 36-
67.00R.
Cook, Paul M., to General Electric Company. Quick disconnect mecha-
nism for shafts. 4,392.759. CI. 403-11.000.
Cooper, Eugene R.: See —
Lucas, Donald S.; Stone, Roger L.; and Cooper, Eugene R.,
4,392,848. CI. 604-53.000.
Coojjer Industries. Inc.: See —
Jameson. James J.; and Beeson, John M.. 4,392,391, CI. 74-333.000.
Corbeels, Roger J.; and Sengenberger, Charles G., to Texaco Inc.
Partial oxidation with recycle of recovered carbon. 4.392.981. CI.
252-373.000.
Cornelius, Douglas P.; and Erickson, Charles G.. to Cornelius Products
Inc. Aquarium filtration apparatus. 4.392,953, CI. 210-169.000.
Cornelius Products Inc.: See-
Cornelius, Douglas P.; and Erickson, Charles G.. 4.392,953, CI.
210-169.000.
Coming Glass Works: See —
Baret, Jean-Luc A. G., 4,393,138, CI. 435-176.000.
Coroneos, James H. Beef product for cooking on a vertical rotisserie.
4,393,090, CI. 426-646.000.
Corrugated Drum Systems, Inc.: See —
Perkins, David, Jr., 4,392,607, CI. 229-39.00R.
Cosden Technology, Inc.: See —
Schwarz, Richard A., 4,393,147, CI. 521-60.000.
Cosgrove, Delos M.: See—
Petre, John H.; and Cosgrove, Delos M.. 4.392,849. CI. 604-66.000.
Costanzi, Silvestro; Tessarolo, Francesco; and Brunelli, Maurizio, to
Anic, S.p.A. 2,2,4,5, 5-Pentamethyl-3-formyl-A^-pyrroline and the
preparation thereof 4.393.218, CI. 548-530.000.
Costigan, Conrad A., to Spreading Machine Exchange, Inc. Spreading
machine cutter box and clamp assembly 4,392.646, CI. 270-30 000.
Cottis, Robert A.: See-
Knight, Lindsay C; and Cottis, Robert A., 4,392,652, CI.
273-358.000.
Couper, Robert A.; Frediani, John K.; and Lillie, Terrance L., to Pitney
Bowes Inc. Circuit for controlling information on a display.
4,393,377, CI. 340-731.000.
Coury, Arthur J.: See —
Skarstad, Paul M.; Coury, Arthur J.; and Untereker, Darrel F
4,393,125, CI. 429-105.000.
Cox, Charles M.; and Thomas William L., to Zenith Radio Corporation
Special services teletext communications system. 4,393,404, CI
358-147.000.
Cox, Roger B.; and Steer, David C, to Lever Brothers Company
Microbial heteropolysaccharide. 4,393,089, CI. 426-573.000.
Cray, Edgar R.; Davis, Russell R.; Knapp, Maynard K.; Richards,
Glenn L.; Root, Bemard H.; and Woodruff, William W , to Strom
berg-Carlson Corporation. Message translation arrangement for
telephony system with romote port groups. 4,393,495, CI 370-56.000.
Crea, Roberto, to Genentech, Inc. Nucleosidic phosphorylating agent
and methods. 4,393,010, CI. 260-940.000.
Crissy, Charles F.; and Holmes, Paul M., to Aeroquip Corporation.
Locking web fitting with swivel. 4,392,762, CI. 410-116.000.
Critikon, Inc.: See—
Ho, Nelson; and Kratochvil, Jiri, 4.393,130, CI. 430-313.000
Crocker, William A.; and Hug, Duane L., to Teledyne Industries, Inc.
Method of preparing ethyl silicate. 4,393,230, CI. 556-457.000.
Crombeen, Jacobus E.; Crooymans, Petrus W. H. M.; and Visser, Jan,
to U.S. Philips Corporation. Magnetron cathode sputtering system.
4,392,939, CI. 204-298.000.
Crookes, William E.: See —
Brown, Ross K.; Thompson, Raymond D.; Woods, Terrill W.;
Wright, Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes, William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546, CI. 180-326.000.
Crooymans, Petrus W. H. M.: See—
Crombeen, Jacobus E.; Crooymans, Petrus W. H. M.; and Visser,
Jan, 4,392,939, CI. 204-298.000.
Cross, Stephen D.; Frost, Elmer F., Jr.; and Anderson. David N.. to
FMC Corporation. Stick confection extraction apparatus. 4.392.803.
CI. 425-126.00S.
Crossley. Thomas J., to Wyoming Mineral Corporation. Method of
removing uranium from a slurry containing molybdenum. 4.393.028,
CI. 423-15.000.
Crouch, William B.: See —
Marion, Charles P.; Brent, Albert; Richter, George N.; Crouch,
William B.; Child. Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,392,869,
CI. 48-197.00R.
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Crowley, Kevin J.; and Souther. Channing, to Converse Inc. Outsole
for athletic shoe. 4,392.312, CI. 36-67.00R.
Crum, Glen F.; and Paton, Samuel J., to El Paso Products Company.
Tertiary-butylstyrene production. 4,393.263. CI. 585-443.000.
Cryan. John G.: See —
Pawelchak. John M.; Chen, James L.; Cryan. John G.; and LaVia,
Anthony L., 4.393.080. CI. 428-355.000.
Cselt Centro Studi e Laboratori Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.: See—
Belforte. Piero; and Bortignon. Renzo. 4.393,494. CI. 370-27.000.
Cser. Judit: See —
Palosi. Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits. Dezso; Kiss. Pal; Guczi.
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Culley, Ernest, to Plessey Company pic. The; and Plessey Company
pic, The. Digital telecommunications switches network with in-built
fault identification. 4,393,490, CI. 370-13.000.
Curatolo, Benedict S.; and Coffey, Gerald P., to Standard Oil Com-
pany, The. Crystalline copolymers prepared from N.N'-tereph-
thaloyldi-beu-alanine and a glycol. 4,393.192. CI. 528-292.000.
Curry, Roger F. N. Flat bed knitting machine. 4.392,364, CI. 66-60.00H.
Curtis, Peter J.; and Wunner, William H.. to Wistar Institute, The.
DNA Which codes for glycoprotein of era-strain rabies virus.
4,393.201. CI. 536-27.000.
D and D Sri: See-
Reiner, Alberto, 4,393.067, CI. 424-256.000.
Dahms, Francis A., to Emhart Industries. Inc. Glassware forming
apparatus with blow mold spray means. 4,392,880. CI. 65-170.000.
Dai Nippon Printing Co., Ltd.: See—
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane, Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4,393,398, CI.
358-76.000.
Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See —
Moriwaki, Takeshi; and Tokuhara, Shinji, 4,393,169, CI.
525-67.000.
Daihatsu Motor Co., Ltd.: See —
Takeda, Koichi; and Sasano, Yoshiro, 4.393.449. CI. 364-474.000.
Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See —
Misaki. Susumu; Suefuji, Masahiro; Mitote, Tamio; and Matsumura,
Naotake. 4,393,231, CI. 560-73.000.
Nakagawa, Tsuneo; Hiramatsu, Uji; and Honda, Toshihide,
4.393.257, CI. 570-145.000.
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Bauer, Ludwig, 4,392.584. CI. 220-374.000.
Muller, Manfred. 4.392.277, CI. 24-196.000.
Wolters, Gerhard; and Wagner, Wilhelm, 4,392,465, CI.
123-263.000.
Dainichi Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See —
Ito, Takao, 4,392,811, CI. 431-37.000.
Yoshii, Hisao, 4,392,812. CI. 431-73.000.
Dainippon Mk & Chemicals Inc.: See —
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu, Haruyoshi; Fujita, Yutaka; Tazume,
Masayuki; Takeuchi, Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi, Hiroyuki,
4.393.258, CI. 585-25.000.
DallaPiazza, Dennis G.: See —
Keyes, Gary S.; Georges, Jean-Pierre J.; and DallaPiazza, Dennis
G, 4,393,402, CI. 358-111.000.
Dallman, Brian L. Mounting system. 4,392,629, CI. 248-205.00R.
Damian, Karl: See —
Welschof. Hans-Heinrich; and Damian, Karl. 4.392.838. CI.
464-175.000.
Damico, Dennis J.; and Pascarella, Vincent J., to Lord Corporation.
Thermoplastic polyurethanes prepared by reacting polyisocyanate.
polyester p)olyol. cycloaliphatic diol and a monofunctional chain-ter-
minating compound. 4.393.186. CI. 528-49.000.
Dana Corporation: See —
Reynolds. James T.. 4.392.694. CI. 308-184.00R.
Danchenkov. Jury V.; See —
Glebov, Vladimir P.; Krivtsov, Georgy V.; Danchenkov, Jury V.;
Khukhry, Sergei A.; and Schepotin, Sergei G., 4,392,567, CI.
198-544.000.
Dang Vu, Quang: See —
Dawans, Francois; Binet, Daniel; Kohler, Norbert; and Dang Vu,
Quang, 4,393,151, CI. 523-130.000.
Daniels, James A., to Imperial Chemical Industries Pic. Telomerization
of butadiene and carbon dioxide. 4.393.224. CI. 549-273.000.
Daniels, Wiley E.; and Nagy. Dennis J., to Air Products and Chemicals.
Inc. Complexes of N-methylolacrylamides with polyalkoxylates and
polymerization to ungelled poly(N-methylolacrylamides). 4.393.173.
CI. 525-329.400.
Daniels, William J. Safety strap for handguns. 4.392.318. CI. 42-l.OLP.
Danielsen. Petter; and Moen, Tor, to Tandberg Data A/S. Generation
of a light intensity control signal. 4,393,378, CI. 340-744.000.
Darby. Vene L., to Rockwell International Corporation. Method of
making sandwich structures by superpUstic forming and diffusion
bondmg. 4.392.602. CI. 228-118.000.
Darrow, Russell E.: See —
Bakos, Peter; Darrow, Russell E.; Funari. Joseph; and Redpath.
Diane L., 4.392.617, CI. 239-290.000.
Dart Industries Inc.: See —
Swett. James B.; and Arnold. Ann A.. 4.392.594. CI. 222-530.000.
Dartmouth College. Trustees of: See —
Jerard. Robert B.. 4.393.450, CI. 364-474.000.
Davies, Kirk E., to United States of America, Navy. Floating-point
A/D and D/A converter. 4,393,369, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Davis, Howard K.: See —
Chieffo, Anibole B.; Davis, Howard K.; and Rizzo, Joyce A.,
4,392,870, CI. 55-20.000.
Davis, Richard: See —
Buchanan, David J.; Davis, Richard; and Jackson, Peter J.,
4,393,484, CI. 367-23.000.
Davis, Robert E., to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Prevention of fouling in
internal combustion engines and their exhaust systems and improved
gasoline compositions. 4,392,456, CI. 123-l.OOA.
Davis, Russell R.: See-
Cray, Edgar R.; Davis, Russell R.; Knapp, Maynard K.; Richards,
Glenn L.; Root, Bernard H.; and Woodruff, William W.,
4,393,495, CI. 370-56.000.
Davis, William F.; and Shacter, Stuart B., to Motorola, Inc. Operational
amplifier. 4,393,355, CI. 330-294.000.
Dawans, Francois; Binet, Daniel; Kohler, Norbert; and Dang Vu,
Quang, to Institut Francais du Petrole. Stable suspensions of water-
soluble polymers and their manufacture. 4,393,151, CI. 523-130.000.
Dawson, Daniel J.; and Brock, Phillip J., to Dynapol. Base hydrolysis
of pendant amide polymers. 4,393,174, CI. 525-369.000.
Dawson, Daniel J.: See —
Brock, Phillip J.; and Dawson, Daniel J., 4,393,175, CI.
525-377.000.
Dawsonville Corp., N.V.: See —
Niemeijer, Halbe J., 4,392,493, CI. 128-316.000.
Dearman, Timothy C. Alignment tool. 4,392.641. CI. 269-49.000.
Debande. Guy F. S.. to Labofma. S.A. Process for removing the nitro-
gen impurities from a hydrocarbon mixture. 4,392,948, CI. 208-
254.00R.
de Block-Martens, Greet: See —
Heuvelsland, Albert; Jann, Fritz F. F.;'and de Block-Martens,
Greet, 4,393,249, CI. 568-688.000.
DeBona, Bruce T.: See —
Reimschuessel, Herbert K.; and DeBona, Bruce T., 4,393,233, CI.
562-473.000.
Deckard. John I.; and Straub. Robert D., to General Motors Corpora-
tion. Electromagnetic unit fuel injector. 4.392.612, CI. 239-88.000.
Deere & Company: See —
Brown, Ross K.; Thompson. Raymond D.; Woods, Terrill W.;
Wright, Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes, William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546, CI. 180-326.000.
DeForest. Sherman E.: See —
Deindoerfer, Fred H.; DeForest, Sherman E.; and Bolz. Gunner,
4,393,466, CI. 364-415.000.
DeGeeter, Melvin J.; McCall, John M.; and Teagarden. Dirk L., to
Upjohn Company, The. Animal feed and process. 4,393,065, CI.
424-251.000.
DeGraw, Joseph I., Jr.; and Sirotnak. Francis M.. to SRI International;
and Sloan Kettering Institute for Cancer Research. Process and
composition for treatment of leukemia and process for preparing the
same. 4,393,064, CI. 424-251.000.
Dehnel, Roger B., to Lever Brothers Company. Process for making
absorbent articles. 4,392.908. CI. 427-194.000.
Deindoerfer. Fred H.; DeForest, Sherman E.; and Bolz, Gunner, to
International Remote Imaging Systems. Method of analyzing parti-
cles in a dilute fluid sample. 4.393,466, CI. 364-415.000.
Delaney, Dennis D.; and Fenton. Donald M., to Union Oil Company of
California. Method for reconditioning bacteria-contaminated hydro-
gen sulfide removing systems. 4,393,037, CI. 423-573.00R.
De Long, Horace J. Poultry processing apparatus. 4,392,273, CI.
17-12.000.
De Marco, Michael, to United States of America, Navy. Electro-
pneumatic hydraulic control systems. 4,392,443, CI. 1 14-20.00R.
de Munck, Hans: See —
Van Abeelen. Petrus C. A. M.; and de Munck. Hans. 4,393,161, CI.
524-506.000.
Demuth, Hans: See—
Hage, Manfred; Demuth, Hans; and Junker, Otto, 4,392,526, CI.
165-154.000.
de Neumann, Frederick B., to Marconi Company Limited. The. Proces-
sor arrangement. 4,393.515. CI. 455-606.000.
Dennison Manufacturing Company: See —
Boyd. Mary G.; and Smith. Donald R., 4,392,905, CI. 156-235.000.
Capezzuto, John P.; and Johnson, Lewis H., 4,392,425, CI.
101-327.000:
Denny, Clifford M.; and Wampler, Charles W., II, to International
Business Machines Corporation. Backlash and runout compensator
for lead screw drives. 4,392,757, CI. 400-328.000.
Dent, Hugh R., to Sterimatic Holdings Limited. Fitments for injection
devices. 4,392,859, CI. 604-198.000.
Deregibus, Alfio, to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The. Method
for winding vulcanizable tape. 4,393,099, CI. 427-177.000.
Deutsch, Edward J., to Arkwin Industries, Inc. Actuator locking
device. 4,392,556, CI. 188-67.000.
De Vries, Adrian J., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Surface wave acous-
tic device with compensation for diffraction effects. 4,393,358, CI.
333-194.000.
DeWald, Jack J. Sub-surface safety gate valve. 4,392,631, CI.
251-58.000.
DeWoskin, Irvin S., to Orthoband Company, Inc. Strapping. 4,392,825,
CI. 433-5.000.
Diamond Shamrock Corporation: See —
Lipowski, Stanley A.; and Miskel, John J., Jr., 4,392,917, CI.
162-168.100.
July 12, 19M
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
Dickey-john Corporation: See—
Bachman, Wesley J.; and Funk, Robert C, 4,392,611, CI.
239-74.000.
Didier Engineering GmbH: See—
Galow, Manfred; and Joseph, Horst, 4,392,919, CI. 202-228.000.
Dierckxsens, Robert P. L.: See —
Viellefont, Jean F.; and Dierckxsens, Robert P. L., 4,392.934, CI.
204-198.000.
Diesel Xiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Ishizuka, Yutaka, 4,392,416, CI. 92-71.000.
Nakamura. Teruo; and lino, Umetarou, 4,392,788, CI. 417-269.000.
Dieulesaint, Eugene: See—
Guedj, Richard; Dieulesaint, Eugene; and Royer. Daniel,
4.393,268, CI. 178-18.000.
Di Giulio, Peter C, to Pitney Bowes Inc. Ink jet printing apparatus.
4,393,386, CI. 346-75.000.
Dilno, Guy L., to Clark Equipment Company. Controller for electric
traction motor. 4,392,544. CI. 180-273.000.
Dining, Bruce F. Below deck enclosure for pressurized, heavier than air
gas. 4,392,449, CI. 114-343.000.
di Palma. Georgio: See —
George, Robert D.; and di Palma, Georgio, 4,392.858. CI.
604-187.000.
Director-General of the Agency of Industrial Science and Technology:
See —
Nishiyama. Masashi; Kobayashi. Yoshinari; Tokura. Seiichi; and
Nishi. Norio, 4,392,916. CI. 162-157.100.
Disctron, Inc.: See —
Wright, Harold T., 4,393.425, CI. 360-105.000.
Dittmar, Wilfried: See-
Franz, Reinhard; and Dittmar. Wilfried. 4.3<»2,405. CI. 84-1,240.
Dixon, John F. Convertible backpack chair. 4,392,598, CI. 224-155.000.
Dobfar S.p.A.: See —
Falciani, Marco; and Broggi, Renato. 4,393,205, CI. 544-28.000.
Dobrusskin, Alexander; Klein, Lutz; and Woizan. Gunter. to Patent-
Treuhand-Gesellschaft fur elektrische Gluhlampen mbH. High pres-
sure mercury vapor discharge lamp with outer bulb. 4,393,331, CI.
313-489.000.
Dobson, Jesse C; and Knight, Richard W., Jr.. to GA Technologies
Inc. Method of producing stable alumina. 4,392.988, CI. 252-455.00R.
Dr. C. Otto & Comp. GmbH.: See-
Struck, Carl-Heinz; and Schumacher. Ra'.f. 4,392,824, CI.
432-180.000.
Dr. -Ing. Rudolf Hell GmbH: See—
Gast, Uwe; Hennig, Eberhard; Preuss, Dieter; Taudt, Heinz; and
Wellendorf, Klaus, 4,393,399, CI. 358-80.000.
Doi, Toshitada: See —
Tanaka, Masato; Furukawa, Shunsuke; Iwamoto. Ikuo; and Doi.
Toshitada, 4.393,502, CI. 371-40.000.
Dolhyj. Serge R.: See —
Velenyi. Louis J.; Dolhyj, Serge R.; and Krupa. Andrew S..
4,393,260, CI. 585-357.000.
Dompas, John M. A., to Metallurgie Hoboken-Overpelt. Apparatus for
the continuous manufacture of metallic anodes from molten metal.
4,393,296, CI. 219-121.0PC.
Donoso, Patricio E., to Extel Corporation. Magnetic dot matrix print-
ing. 4,392,755, CI. 400.H9.000.
Dooley, James L., to R & D Associates. Coal transport system.
4,392.438, CI. 110-106.00R.
Doring, Gunter: See —
Radziwill, Wolfgang; Doring. Gunter; and Steinbusch, Hans.
4,393.317, CI. 307-309.000.
Dom, George K.: See —
Teckmeyer. Fred W.; and Dorn. George K.. 4,392,868, CI.
44-56.000.
Dornier GmbH: See —
Minkler, Bemd, 4.392.4 1 1 . CI. 89- 1 . 8 1 9.
Dotson, Billy J.: See—
Odeh, Aziz S.; and Dotson, Billy J., 4,392.530. CI. 166-269.000.
Douglas, Alec T.; and Havers, James S., to Colt Industries Operating
Corp. Modular electronic measuring and printing unit. 4,393,455, CI.
364-519.000.
Douglas, George H.; and Campbell, Henry F., to William H. Rorer,
Inc. 1-Methylene-l-phenylguanidine compounds. 4,393,077. CI.
424-326.000.
Douke, Harumi: See —
Iwata. Masayosi; and Douke. Harumi. 4.393,280. CI. 200-4.000.
Doundoulakis, George J. Multi-cylinder Stirling engine. 4.392.351. CI.
60-526.000.
Dow Chemical Company. The: See —
Heuvelsland, Albert; Jann, Fritz F. F.; and de Block-Martens,
Greet, 4.393.249, CI. 568-688.000.
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C. 4,392.961. CI. 210-679.000.
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C. 4.392.979. CI. 252-184.000.
Lee. John M.; and Bauman. William C. 4,392.980. CI. 252-184.000.
Doyon. Andre: See —
Roberge. Gerald; and Doyon. Andre, 4,393.157. CI. 323-355.000.
Dragerwerk Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Eckstein. Wolfgang; Rabenecker, Horst; and Behnke, Jurgen,
4,392.389. CI. 73-864.910.
Drechsel. Erhart K.; Holcomb. Dysart E.; and Sardisco. John B., to
Pennzoil Company. Production of phosphoric acid and additional
products from phosphate ore. 4,393,032, CI. 423-320.000.
Dresner. Joseph: See —
Goldstein, Bernard; Dresner. Joseph; and Szostak, Daniel J.,
4,393,348. CI. 324-1 58.00R.
Du. Nguyen T.; and Asao. Akihide, to Texas Instruments Incorporated.
Method for controlling characteristics of a semiconductor integrated
by X-ray bombardment. 4,392.893. CI. 148-1.500.
Du, Nguyen T.; and Asao, Akihide, to Texas Instruments Incorporated.
Method for erasing data of a non-volatile semiconductor memory
integrated circuit. 4,393,479. CI. 365-218.000.
Duff-Norton Company: See —
Johnson, James C, 4,392.390, CI. 74-89.150.
Dugan, Charles; and Dugan, Timothy, to Farm Fresh Shrimp Corpora-
tion. Apparatus and method for rearing shrimp. 4,392.454, CI.
119-2.000.
Dugan, Timothy: See—
Dugan. Charles; and Dugan, Timothy, 4.392,454, CI. 119-2.000.
Dungs, Horst: See —
Weber, Heinrich; Lorenz, Kurt; and Dungs. Horst, 4J92,823, CI.
432-114.000.
Dunn, Thomas J.; Yuniskis, Donald G., Jr.; Szakacs, Gabor L.; and
Nguyen. Nghia V.. to Epsco Incorporated. Navigational plotting
system. 4,393,448. CI. 364-449.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company: See —
Bonifaz, Cristobal, 4,393.265, CI. 585-639.000.
Concannon, Thomas P., 4,393,119. CI. 428-413.000.
Middleton, William J.. 4,393,074. CI. 424-285.000.
Squire. Edward N., 4,393,227. CI. 549-455.000.
Durable Packaging Corporation: See—
Ulrich. Lawrence W.; and Walker, Connie W.. 4,392.911, CI.
156-468.000.
Durrell, Robert R., to United States of America, Navy. Ultrasonic
loading of extrudable plastic bonded explosives. 4,392,410, CI. 86-
■l.OOR.
Durwald, Dierk; and Kaufmann, Karl-Ernst, to Mannesmann Demag
AG. Turbulent waterway. 4.392.434, CI. 104-70.000.
Duskin Franchise Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Nishiyama. Masanobu; Kanazawa, Fusao; Tanaka, Hisaji; and
Nishimura, Tatsuo, 4,392,269, CI. 15-145.000.
Dusza, John P.; and Albright, Jay D., to American Cyanamid Com-
pany. Substituted phenyl-5-aminopyrazoles. 4.393.217. CI.
548-362.000.
Dworsky, Lawrence N.: See —
Whalin, Jeffery A.; Shanley, Charles W.; Scansaroli, Michael N.;
and Dworsky, Lawrence N., 4.393,131, CI. 430-320.000.
Dynabrade, Inc.: See —
Welsch, Walter N., 4.392.333. CI. 51-170.0EB.
Dynapol: See —
Brock. Phillip J.; and Dawson. Daniel J., 4,393,175, CI.
525-377.000.
Dawson, Daniel J.; and Brock, Phillip J.. 4.393,174, CI.
525-369.000.
Dyneer Corporation: See —
Radocaj, Mijo. 4,392,840, CI. 474-1 17.000.
E.C.H. Will (GmbH & Co.): See—
Rann, Harald. 4.392,402, CI. 83-345.000.
E. R. Squibb & Sons, Inc.: See —
Pawelchak, John M.; Chen, James L.; Cryan, John G.; and LaVia,
Anthony L.. 4.393.080, CI. 428-355.000.
East, Anthony J., to Celanese Corporation. Preparation of aromatic
polyesters by direct self-condensation of aromatic hydroxy acids.
4,393,191, CI. 528-207.000.
Eastman Kodak Company: See —
Allen, Robert P., 4.393.261. CI. 585-422.000.
Barker, Leiand W,, 4,393,451, CI. 364-510.000.
Phillips, Bobby M., 4.392,808. CI. 425-464.000.
Van Heyningen, Roger S., 4,392,731, CI. 354-180.000.
Eaton Corporation: See—
Merritt, Robert C; and Terwilliger, Gerald L.. 4.392.472, CI.
123-564.000.
Zajac, John. 4,392,915. CI. 156-643.000.
Ebara Corporation: See —
Shibata. Tomoyuki; Nakayama, Mituhito; and Ouchi. Kiyoshi.
4.392.790. CI. 417-360.000.
Ebauches. S.A.: See —
Ganguillet. Claude; Ruedin. Yves; and Sallin. Michel. 4.392.720. CI.
350-357.000.
Eberle, Otto: See—
Haberle, Norman; Eberle, Otto; and Hafner, Walter, 4,393,220, CI.
548-545.000.
Eckert, Charles E.; and Miller. Ronald E.. to Aluminum Company of
America. Metal treatment system. 4.392,888, CI. 75-68.00R.
Eckholt, Heinz: See —
Horstmann, Aloys; Eckholt, Heinz; and Veltel, Reinhard,
4.392,340, CI. 57-83.000
Eckle. Otto, to Komet Stahlhalter- und Werkzeugfabrik Robert Breun-
ing GmbH. Rotary machining tools with side coolant delivery.
4,392,761, CI. 408-59.000.
Eckler, Paul E., to Angus Chemical Company. Method of preparing
polyurethane foams using imidazolines as catalysts. 4,393,149, CI.
521-129.000.
Eckstein, Wolfgang; Rabenecker. Horst; and Behnke. Jurgen, to Dra-
gerwerk Aktiengesellschaft. Sampling tube having closing caps.
4,392.389, CI. 73-864.910.
Ecodyne Corporation: See —
Soriente, Alfonse J., 4.392,955, CI. 210-195.400.
Edmonds, James T., Jr., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Arylene
sulfide polymer preparation. 4,393.197, CI. 528-388 000.
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Edwards. Allan K., to International Telephone and Telegraph Corpora-
tion. Automatic protection apparatus for span lines employed in high
speed digital systems. 4.393,493. CI. 370-16.000.
Efamol Limited: See —
Horrobin. David F., 4.393.049. CI. 424-145.000.
Egorov, Vladimir D.: See —
Merenkov, Jury F.; Egorov, Vladimir D.; Stepanov, Valentin G.;
and Popkov, Igor V., 4,392,786. CI. 417-50.000.
Eguchi, Osamu; Hattori. Mitsutoshi; and Hanaoka, Takatsugu, to Nip-
pondenso Co.. Ltd. Rotational angle detecting apparatus. 4,392,375.
CI. 73-118.000.
Eguchi. Yasukata. to Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd. Sewing ma-
chine with buttonhole stitching mechanism 4,392.441. CI. 112-
158.00B.
Ehrnford. Lars E. M. Method for restoring a tooth. 4.392,828, CI.
433-217.000.
Eikhenvald. Eduard V.: See—
Buryakov. Viktor P.; Ivanov, Gennady M.; Kislik, Mikhail I.;
Kurgansky, Pavel M.; Shmotkin, Mark B.; and Eikhenvald.
Eduard V,, 4,392,551, CI. 184-7.00D.
Eisenberg, Gustav; and Bigorajski, Gunter, to Vereinigte Schmirgel
und Maschinen-Fabriken AG. Method for the manufacture of granu-
lar grit for use as abrasives. 4,393,021, CI. 264-143.000.
El Paso Products Company: See —
Crum, Glen F.; and Paton, Samuel J.. 4,393.263. CI. 585-443,000.
Elchenko. Stephen M.: See —
Hammond, David C; Elchenko. Stephen M.; Tralies, John M.;
Verburgt, Peter W.; and Robinson. Leon R., 4.393,483, CI.
367-13.000.
Electra Food Machinery, Inc.: See —
Jimenez, James A., 4,392.418, CI 99-330.000.
Electric Power Research Institute. Inc.: See —
Itani, Abdallah M., 4,393.516, CI. 455-608.000.
Electrohome Limited: See-
Schmidt, Terrance C. 4.393,336, CI. 315-387.000.
Elektro-Physik Hans Nix & Dr. Ing. E. Steingroever, KG.: See-
Nix, Hans; and Szary, Herbert. 4.392.305. CI. 33-169.00F.
Elevator GmbH: See —
Kahkipuro. Matti. 4,393,442, CI. 363-70.000.
Elias, Allen M.; and Genese, Joseph N., to Abbott Laboratories. In-line
transfer unit. 4,392,850, CI. 604-82.000.
Elias, Allen M., to Abbott Laboratories. In-line transfer unit. 4,392.851,
CI. 604-82.000.
Elliott Turbomachinery Co.. Inc.: See —
Geary. Carl H., Jr., 4,392.345. CI. 60-39.020.
Ellis. J. Nigel. Fall protection device. 4.392,555. CI. 188-65.100.
Elprochine AG: See —
Biller, Efim, 4,393.239. CI. 564-331.000.
Elsenbaumer, Ronald L.; and Wasserman, Edel, to Allied Corporation.
Selective aromatic nitration. 4,392.978, CI. 252-182.000.
Emery Industries, Inc.: See —
Harris. Eugene G., 4.393.223, CI. 549-266.000.
Emery. Kenneth R. D.: See-
Bears, John D.; and Emery, Kenneth R. D., 4,392,810, CI.
431-37.000.
Emhart Industries, Inc.: See —
Dahms, Francis A,, 4,392.880. CI. 65-170.000.
Kinsey. Brian D.; and Smock. Steven W., 4.392.357. CI. 62-153.000.
Proctor, Gary R.. 4,393,300, CI. 219-497.000.
Emilio. Carlo. Jr.: See —
Barnes. Walter P.; and Emilio. Carlo, Jr., 4.392,679, CI. 294-15.000.
Emmanuelli. Yves A.: See —
Beck, Jean L.; le Bars, Jean F.; Emmanuelli, Yves A.; and Bargues,
Denis, 4,393,408, CI. 358-205.000.
Endo, Tadakazu; Suzuki, Hirotsugu; and Takahashi, Masanori, to
Toray Industries, Inc. Process for making a thermal-insulating non-
woven bulky product. 4.392.903. CI. 156-167.000.
Ener-Tech Heating Systems Inc.: See —
Bears. John D.; and Emery. Kenneth R. D., 4,392,810, CI.
431-37.000.
Energy Research Corporation: See —
Lambrech, Matthew A., 4,393.123, CI. 429-24.000.
Enge, Harald A. High voltage power supply. 4.393,441, CI. 363-61.000.
Engeibach, Heinz; Steigleiter, Werner; and Glietenberg, Helmut, to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Olefin oligomerization catalysts and a
process for their preparation. 4,392,984, CI. 252-432.000.
Engelfriet, Adrianus R. C; Op Het Veld. Adriaan J. G.; and Van
Vucht. Theodorus J. P.. to U.S. Philips Corporation. Method of
producing a drawing die. 4.392.397. CI. 76-107.00A.
Engels. Larry O.: See-
Moore. Robert H.; and Engels. Larry O.. 4.392.689. CI. 299-39.000.
Engineering Development Company: See —
Bailey, Gary C, 4,392.548. CI. 181-156.000.
Ennis. Gerald E.; and Colombo, Mario, Jr., to United Sutes of Amer-
ica, Air Force. Rat workpiece pickup. 4,392.775. CI. 414-729.000.
Enokimoto. Akito: See —
Iwai. Kazuhiro; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Enokimoto, Akito; and Kato.
Yoshitaka. 4,392,536, CI. 180-217.000.
Enomoto. Hiroshi: See —
Iwai, Kazuhiro; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Enokimoto. Akito; and Kato,
Yoshitaka, 4,392,536. CI. 180-217.000.
Epsco Incorporated: See —
Dunn. Thomas J.; Yuniskis. Donald G., Jr.; Szakacs. Gabor L.; and
Nguyen. Nghia V., 4.393.448, CI. 364-449.000.
ERCO Industries Limited: See—
Fredette, Maurice C. J., 4.393,035, CI. 423-478.000.
Fredette, Maurice C. J., 4.393,036. CI. 423-478.000.
Erickson, Charles G.: See —
Cornelius. Douglas P.; and Erickson, Charles G., 4,392,953, CI.
210-169.000.
ESPE Fabrik Pharmazeutischer Preparate GmbH: See —
Herold, Wolf-Dietrich, 4.392,589, CI. 222-137.000.
Ess, Wilfried. to Schelling & Co. Apparatus for staggered cutting of
planar workpieces. 4.392,401, CI. 83-219.000.
Esselte Pendaflex Corporation: See —
Schrotz, Kurt; and Schwobel, Richard, 4,392,424, CI. 101-111.000.
Estes. John H.; and Herbstman. Sheldon, to Texaco Inc. Hydrodesulfu-
rization of hydrocarbons with fluorided platinum. 4,392,946, CI.
208-217.000.
Etablissement Texcontor: See —
Zemp. Hans N.. 4,393.145. CI. 521-38.000.
Etablissements Fernand Berchet: See —
Rivollet. Marc; and Monzer. Pierre, 4.393,284. CI. 200-60.000.
Eue. Ludwig: See —
Riebel, Hans-Jochem; Eue, Ludwig; and Faust, Wilfried, 4,392,882,
CI. 71-92.000.
Euzen, Jean-Paul; Jacquin, Yves; and Van Landeghem, Hugo, deceased
(by Van Landeghem-Heynderickx, Renate, executor), to Institut
Francais du Petrole. Process and device for withdrawing solid parti-
cles and introducing a liquid charge at the lower portion of a contact
zone. 4,392,943, CI. 208-152.000.
Evans, John L.; and Bains, Kuldip. to Chubb Fire Security Limited.
Liquid-projecting monitor. 4,392.618. CI. 239-461.000.
Evans, Randall G., to Ford Aerospace & Communications Corporation.
Adaptive signal quality measurement circuit for PSK and FSK de-
modulators. 4.393.499. CI. 371-5.000.
Evon. Marc A. Ice skate scabbard. 4,392,674, CI. 280-825.000.
Extel Corporation: See —
Adler. Robert. 4,392.754. CI. 400-119.000.
Donoso, Patricio E.. 4,392.755, CI. 400-119.000.
Exxon Research and Engineering Co.: See —
Alexander, A. Gordon. 4.392,967. CI. 252-41.000.
Howard. Kent A.; and Goetsch, Duane A.. 4.392.945, CI.
208-210.000.
Michaelson. Robert C; and Austin, Richard G., 4.393,253, CI.
568-860.000.
Yang. Tai-Cheng; Rao. Krishna K.; and Huang. I-Der. 4.392.986,
CI. 252-435.000.
Eye-D Development II Ltd.: See —
Hill. Robert B., 4.393.366, CI. 382-2.000.
Fabian, Peter; and Muller, Theo, to Heraeus Elektroden GmbH. Novel
electrode. 4,392,927, CI. 204-98.000.
Fahlen. Theodore S., to GTE Sylvania Incorporated. Gas discharge
laser having a buffer gas of neon. 4.393.505, CI. 372-57.000.
Fairchild Camera & Instrument Corp.: See —
Ong. Warren R., 4.393.476, CI. 365-203.000.
Rufford, Roger V., 4.393,473. CI. 365-190.000.
Fairchild Engineering Company. The: See —
Gorenflo. Donald L.; and Noblit. William D.. Ill, 4,393,401, CI.
358-107.000.
Falciani. Marco; and Broggi. Renato, to Dobfar S.p.A. Cephapirine
esters and salts thereof. 4,393.205. CI. 544-28.000.
Farley. Max F.; and Fine. Laughton T.. to Queue Systems. Inc. Appara-
tus and method for precision gas mixing. 4,392.514, CI. 137-624.200.
Farm Fresh Shrimp Corporation: See—
Dugan. Charles; and Dugan. Timothy. 4.392.454. CI. 119-2.000.
Farmitalia Carlo Erba S.p.A.: See—
Bargiotti, Alberto; Cassinelli. Giuseppe; Penco. Sergio; Arcamone,
Federico; and Casazza. Annamaria, 4.393.052, CI. 424-180.000.
Famhill. William M.: See —
Parker. Alan; Famhill, William M.; and Clough, Douglas O.,
4.392,343. CI. 57-401.000.
Fassauer. Arthur L.. to Geosource Inc. Apparatus for metering semi-
nowable material. 4.392.591, CI. 222-227.000.
Fastbac Research Limited: See —
Taylor. Derek P., 4.393.1 16. CI. 428-343.000.
Faust, Wilfried: See —
Riebel. Hans-Jochem; Eue. Ludwig; and Faust, Wilfried. 4,392,882.
CI. 71-92.000.
Fechter, Leonhard; and Jung, Hubert, to Passavant-Werke Michel-
bacher Huette. Bar screen with screen cleaner for waste water treat-
ment installations. 4.392.952. CI. 210-159.000.
Fedorets, Vladimir N.: See —
Bagdasarian. Alexandr S.; Gulyaev, Jury V.; Fedorets, Vladimir
N.; and Kmiu. Anatoly M.. 4.393.321. CI. 310-313.00B.
Feldman. Leonard C; Kraus. Joseph S.; Tolk, Norman H.; Traum,
Morton M.; and Tully, John C, to Bell Telephone Laboratories.
Incorporated. Method and apparatus for surface characterization and
process control utilizing radiation from desorbed particles. 4.393.31 1,-
CI. 250-459.100.
Feldman, Stanley; and Koch, Gary, to Beltone Electronics Corpora-
tion. Hearing aid with controllable wide range of frequency response.
4,393,275, CI. 179-l.OVL.
Felten & Guilleaume Carlswerk AG: See-
Piter. Hans; and Serapins, Klaus, 4.392,713, CI. 350-96.210.
Fenrick. Walter J.; Chesney. Robert H.; and Mast, Paul A., to Canada,
Her Majesty the Queen in right of. as represented by the Minister of
National Defence. Air burst munitions simulator. 4,392.432, CI.
102-334.000.
Fenton. Donald M.: See —
Delaney. Dennis D.; and Fenton, Donald M., 4,393,037, CI. 423-
573.00R.
July 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
Ferranti Limited: See —
Bell, Melvyn R.; and Thomson, Charles D., 4,393,437. CI.
361-383.000.
Ferranti Limited (now Ferranti pic): See-
Morrison, John M.. 4.392,718, CI. 350-336.000.
Fields, Ellis K.: See—
Nimry. Tayseer S.; and Fields, Ellis K., 4,393,222, CI. 549-234.000.
Fife, Alistair A.: See —
Burbank, Max B.; Lomnes, Randy K.; Vrba, Jiri; and Fife, Alistair
A., 4,393,349. CI. 324-248.000.
Fillwalk. Frank J.: See—
Butterworth, George A. M.; and Fillwalk, Frank J., 4,392,861, CI.
604-366.000.
Fine, Laughton T.: See —
Fariey, Max F.; and Fine, Laughton T.. 4.392.514. CI. 137-624.200.
Fink, Allen H.. to UOP Inc. Cogeneration process using augmented
Brayton cycle. 4,392,346. CI. 60-39.040.
Fink. Helen M., to Fink, Helen M. Table placemat. 4,393,104, CI.
428-7.000.
Finkel, Abram R.. to KSD Industries, Inc. Track and panel guide for
sliding shower doors or the like. 4,392,272, CI. 16-95.00R.
Fipp. Bernard E.: See —
Fipp, Beverly A.; Fipp. Bernard E.; and Haller, John L., 4.392.578.
CI. 215-231.000.
Fipp, Beverly A.; Fipp, Bernard E.; and Haller. John L. Stopper appa-
ratus for content contamination prevention. 4.392,578. CI.
215-231.000.
Firepower. Inc.: See —
Gwinn, Mack W., Jr.. 4,392,413, CI. 89-14.00C.
Firmenich, SA: See —
Thomas. Alan F.; and Naf. Ferdinand. 4.392.993. CI. 252-522.00R.
Firth, Bruce E., to UOP Inc. Alkylated 5,6,7,8-tetrahydronaphthalenols
as antioxidants in lubricating oils and greases. 4,392,969, CI. 252-
52.00R.
Fischer, Herbert; Budnowski, Manfred; and Zeidler, Ulrich, to Henkel
Kommanditgesellschaft auf Aktien. Isocyanuric acid derivatives,
method of preparation, therapeutic compositions with a cytostatic
action and therapeutic method. 4.393.060. CI. 424-248.500.
Fisher, Mancil C: See —
Mason. James V.; and Fisher, Mancil C, 4,392,660. CI. 280-75 1 .000.
Fisher & Paykd Limited: See —
Brodsky. Alexander; and Clark. Richard J., 4,392,372, CI.
72-311.000.
Clark. Richard J., 4,392,373, CI. 72-321.000.
Fitts, Uscoe J.: See —
Brown. Leon C; Campbell, Jesse L.; Fitts, Uscoe J.; and Gudgel,
Willard L., 4,392.739. CI. 355-3.0FU.
Fives-Cail Babcock: See —
Henin, Jean-Pierre; and Ghestem, Gerard, 4,392,890, CI.
106-100.000.
Fix, Sidney R.: See —
Tyler. Keith A.; and Fix. Sidney R., 4,393,154, CI. 524-12.000.
Fletcher, James D. Bowstring release device. 4,392.475. CI. 124-35.00A.
Flow Industries. Inc.: See —
Olsen, John H.; and Pritchard. Robert S.. 4,392,655, CI. 277-1.000.
Flynn, Richard M.: See —
Burton, Donald J.; and Flynn. Richard M.. 4,393,011. CI.
260-970.000.
FMC Corporation: See —
Billett, Ronald J.; and Viitanen. Veikko K.. 4,392,600, CI.
227-50.000.
Cross, Stephen D.; Frost. Elmer F., Jr.; and Anderson. David N..
4,392,803. CI. 425-126.00S.
Fohl, Artur, to REPA Feinstanzwerk GmbH. Automatic roll-up device
for a safety belt. 4.392,619, CI. 242-107.200.
Fohl, Artur, to Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH. Securing device for the
safety belt of a restraining system. 4,392,671. CI. 280-802.000.
Folkesson, Hans; and Uberg, Ulf, to Saab-Scania Aktiebolag. Arrange-
ment for presses. 4,392,368, CI. 72-63.000.
Ford Aerospace & Communications Corporation: See —
Evans. Randall G.. 4.393.499, CI. 371-5.000.
Ford Motor Company; See —
Garrett, David L., Jr.; and Cassatta, Joseph C, 4,393,094, CI.
427-44.000.
Stinson, Wilbur G.; Schwei. Lawrence J.; and Vong, Sandy T. S.,
4,393.098, CI. 427-168.000.
Fork. Kurt; Kaufhold, Wolfgang; Meusel. Wolfgang; and Waldmann.
Hermann, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Circuit for damping hunt-
ing by electric machines. 4,393,345, CI. 322-19.000.
Forslund. Gosta. Training cart. 4,392,663, CI. 280-68.000.
Forster, Karl-Hcinz; and Johne, Hans, to Veb Kombinat Polygraph
"Werner Lamberz" Leipzig. Multiplicative adjustment provision at
an ink feed remote control device. 4.392.429. CI. 101-365.000.
Foster, James I.: See—
Gassaway, Gary S.; Richgels, Henry J.; and Foster. James I..
4,393.488, CI. 367-75.000.
Foster. Stephen W.. to Almor Corporation. Two hand scanning check-
out counter. 4,392,553, CI. 186-61.000.
Fox, Austin L., to Molins Limited. Packets and the manufacture
thereof. 4,392.338. CI. 53-462.000.
Foxcroft, Arthur. Peristaltic pump. 4.392,794. CI. 417-475.000.
Foy, Peter S. Theatrical transportation apparatus. 4,392,648, CI.
272-24.000.
Franke, Helmut, to ITT Industries, Inc. Mechanical actuating device
for a spot-type disc brake. 4.392.557, CI. 188-71.900.
Franklin. James L., to Sigma Research. Inc. Direct expansion solar
collector-heat pump system. 4,392.359. CI. 62-235.100.
Frantzreb, John G.. Sr.. to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Liquid cooling for a
welding torch. 4.393,298. CI. 219-137.620.
Franz, James H., Jr.: See —
Jones. Stanley W.; and Franz. James H.. Jr., 4,393,338, CI.
318-86.000.
Franz, Reinhard; and Dittmar, Wilfried, to Franz, Reinhard. Method
and apparatus for processing tone signals in electronic musical instru-
ments. 4,392,405. CI. 84-1.240.
Frazzell, Michael E.: See —
Bloemers. James L.; Schick. James M.; Frazzell. Michael E.; and
Karls, Michael A . 4.392.779. CI. 415-141,000
Fredette. Maurice C. J., to ERCO Industries Limited. Chlorine dioxide
production using mixed hydrochloric and sulfuric acid feed.
4.393,035. CI. 423-478.000.
Fredette. Maurice C. J., to ERCO Industries Limited Production of
mixed sulfuric and hydrochloric acid feed and chlorine dioxide
generation therewith. 4.393.036, CI. 423-478.000.
Frediani, John K.: See —
Couper, Robert A.; Frediani, John K.; and Lillie, Terrance L..
4.393.377. CI. 340-731.000.
Freimiller. Gary L.: See —
Tyrell. John A.; and Freimiller, Gary L., 4,393.190, CI.
528-170.000.
Freitag, Dieter; Bottenbruch, Ludwig; and Wulff, Claus, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation of aromatic dicarbox-
ylic acid dichlondes. 4,393,009, CI. 260-544.00K.
Fremion, Edwin A., to Westvaco Corporation. Pre-banded bulk pack
container. 4,392,606, CI. 229-23.00R.
Fried, Krupp Huttenwerke AG: See —
Raquet, Erwin. 4,392,681. CI. 295-7.000.
Friedrich W. Schwing, GmbH: See —
Heckmann, Horst; and Nawroth, Werner, 4,392.510, CI.
137-454.200.
Friese, Karl-Hermann: See —
Grunwald. Werner; Zehender. Ernst; Friese. Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz. Jurgen; Neu. Hans; Kirner. Kuno; and Schumacher.
Bernd. 4.393.282. CI. 200-19.00R.
Fritz, Gary R., to Kimball International, Inc. Switched capacitor sine
wave generator and keyer. 4.392.406. CI. 84-1.260.
Frommer, Moshe A.: See —
Kraus, Menahem A.; Frommer, Moshe A.; Nemas, Mara; and
Gutman. Rodika. 4.392,960. CI. 210-651.000
Frosien, Juergen: See —
Anger, Klaus; Frosien, Juergen; Lischke, Burkhard; Plies, Erich;
and Tonar. Klaus. 4.393,308. CI. 250-396.00R.
Frost. Elmer F.. Jr.: See-
Cross, Stephen D.; Frost, Elmer F., Jr.; and Anderson, David N.,
4,392.803. CI. 425-126.00S.
Fuji Electric Company. Ltd.: See —
Saito. Shigemasa. 4.392.302. CI. 29-879.000.
Shimizu. Masami; and Monno. Asao, 4.393,305, CI. 250-358.100.
Fuji Electrochemical Co., Ltd.: See—
Torii. Michihiro; Hirukawa. Kohei; Urata. Hiroshi; and Suzuki.
Shinichi, 4.393.373. CI. 340-384.00E.
Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd.: See—
Honjo. Satoru; Yuyama. Yasuaki; lwa.sa. Masakazu; and Imanishi,
Kazuo, 4.393.1 12. CI, 428-207 000
Shiba, Keisuke; Nakao. Sho; and Toyama. Tadao. 4,393,128. CI.
430-273.000.
Fuji Xerox Co.. Ltd.: See —
Sekimoto. Sohichi, 4.392,719. CI. 350-342.000.
Fujii, Akira: See—
Beppu. Norio; and Fujii, Akira. 4.392.733. CI. 354-266.000.
Fujii. Kunihiko; Hirosaki. Yukihiro; Nishiyama. Yoshihisa; and Sato.
Koichiro. to Tokyo Electric Co.. Ltd. Zero-point adjusting method
for automatic weighing apparatus. 4.392.535, CI. 177-1. (XX).
Fujii, Naoharu; and lijima, Noboru. Method of treating gastric, mam-
mary, lung and uterus tumors. 4.393.071. CI. 424-274.000.
Fujii. Takayuki; and Suda, Hitoshi. to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Instrument panel with a yieldable meter casing. 4.392.539, CI.
180-90.000.
Fujii. Tetsuo: See —
Kondo, Nobuo; Naganoma. Masanori; Hibi. Hitoshi; Fujii. Tetsuo;
and Suzuki. Kunihiko. 4.393.365. CI. 340-57.000.
Fujikawa. Tsuneo; and Takagishi. Haruyoshi. to Nissan Motor Com-
pany. Limited. Two-shift automatic assembling apparatus. 4.392.601.
CI. 228-4.100.
Fujikin International, Inc.: See —
Kita, Toshio, 4,392,634. CI. 251-129.000.
Fujimura, Masayuki. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha; and Canon Denshi
Kabushiki Kaisha. Magnetic head. 4.393.428. CI. 360-123.000.
Fujinami, Hiroshi; and Yamada, Takashi, to Nippondenso Co., Ltd.
Method for selectively displaying a plurality of information.
4.393.271. CI. 179-l.OSM.
Fujino, Hitoshi; Kanoto. Masanobu; and Ichihashi, Hiroo. to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha. Image transfer device. 4.392.738, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Fujisawa. Kiyoji: See —
Kobayashi, Masaaki; Takeuchi. Akihiro; and Fujisawa, Kiyoji,
4,393,417. CI. 360-10.300.
Takeuchi. Akihiro; Kobayashi, Masaaki; and Fujisawa, Kiyoji,
4,393,416. CI. 360-10.200.
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See —
Sato. Yoshinari; and Teraji. Tsutomu. 4.393.070. CI. 424-266.000.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Tsuji, Kiyoshi; and Chiba,
Toshiyuki, 4.393,059, CI. 424-246.000.
Fujita, Takashi: See —
Shinohara, Koichi; and Fujita, Takashi, 4,393,091. CI. 427-13.000.
Fujita, Yutaka: See —
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu. Haruyoshi; Fujita. Yutaka: Tazume,
Masayuki; Takeuchi, Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi, Hiroyuki,
4,393,258, CI. 585-25.000.
Fujitsu Fanuc Limited: See —
Imazeki, Ryoji; and Inoue, Michiya, 4,393,500, CI. 371-13.000.
Fujitsu Limited: See —
Shimada, Hiroshi; and Aoyama, Keizo, 4,393,472. CI. 365-190.000.
Shimada, Hiroshi, 4,393,480, CI. 365-227.000.
Shirasaki, Masataka, 4,392,722, CI. 350-375.000.
Takahashi, Masayuki; Goto, Kunihiko; Tanaka, Hisami; and Oh-
hata, Michinobu, 4,393,318, CI. 307-353.000.
Fujiu, Takahiro; Nakajima, Masao; and Okano, Shigeru, to Toppan
Printing Co., Ltd. Method of modifying the dye affinity of cellulose
fiber-containing structure with benzene sulfonyl chloride. 4,392,265,
CI. 8-120.000.
Fujiwara, Khosuke: See —
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; Ohtani, Osamu; Miyake, Hidekazu;
and Fujiwara, Khosuke, 4,393,210, CI. 546-141.000.
Fujizoki Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See —
Yano, Akira; Saito, Yoshitada; and Kasahara, Yasushi, 4,393.134.
CI. 435-29.000.
Fuju Jiko Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Iwasaki, Hiroshi, 4,393,363, CI. 335-288.000.
Fukahon. Hidehiko: See —
Iwashita, Tomonori; and Fukahori, Hidehiko, 4,392,730, CI.
354-173.000.
Fukami, Teruki: See —
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,392,385, CI. 73-861.230.
Fukube, Nobuyoshi: S«e—
Miyamoto, Mitsuyasu; Ishimaru, Osamu; and Fukube, Nobuyoshi,
4,392,365, CI. 68-19.000.
Fukuda, Kazumasa, to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording
medium. 4,393,110, CI. 428-173.000.
Fukui, Masanori: See —
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki, Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai,
Masaji; Hirayama, Noriaki; Morimoto, Makoto; and Fukui,
Masanori, 4,393,056, CI. 424-181.000.
Fulk, James B.; McKeefry, Jerry L.; Schuning, George F.; and Bradley.
John J., to Paper Converting Machine Company. Method and appa-
ratus for correcting stack lean in a zig-zag folded web. 4,392.844, CI.
493-399.000.
Fultz, Brent T., to United States of America, Energy. Radiation detec-
tor. 4,393,306, CI. 250-374.000.
Funari, Joseph: See —
Bakos, Peter; Darrow, Russell E.; Funari. Joseph; and Redpath,
Diane L., 4,392,617, CI. 239-290.000.
Fung, Anthony K., to Sperry Corporation. Data recovery method and
apparatus using variable window. 4,393,458. CI. 364-900.000.
Funk, Gary L., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Constraint control of a
fractional distillation process. 4,392,877, CI. 62-37.000.
Funk, Robert C: See —
Bachman, Wesley J.; and Funk, Robert C, 4,392,611. CI.
239-74.000.
Furga. Giulio S. Method of making dresses for dolls and the like and
product obtained by this method. 4.392.257. CI. 2-105.000.
Furukawa. Shunsuke: See —
Tanaka. Masato; Furukawa, Shunsuke; Iwamoto, Ikuo; and Doi.
Toshitada, 4,393,502, CI. 371-40.000.
Furuta, Hiroyuki: See —
Watai, Haruhisa; Furuta, Hiroyuki; and Kawamoto. Akira.
4.393,120. CI. 428-457.000.
Fushida. Masao: See —
Yoshinaka. Satoru; Fushida. Masao; and Kimoto'. Tatsuzi,
4,393,143. CI. 501-89.000.
Fussl. Erwin; and Berger. Norbert. to Maerz Ofenbau AG. Calcining
furnace with gas-permeable wall structure. 4.392,821. CI. 432-96.000.
Futer. Rudolph E.. to Futerized Systems. Inc. Surface flow air con-
veyor with plenum mounted fan wheel. 4.392,760, CI. 406-88.000.
Futerized Systems, Inc.: See —
Futer, Rudolph E., 4,392,760, CI. 406-88.000.
GA Technologies Inc.: See —
Dobson, Jesse C; and Knight, Richard W., Jr., 4.392,988. CI.
252-455.00R.
Gabel. Eike: See —
Blank. Heinz U.; Gabel, Eike; Goldschmitt, Ernst; and Mentzel,
Werner, 4,393,234, CI. 562-475.000.
Gabrielson, Carl E.: See —
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Carl E.; Kerr. Douglas P.; Ras-
mussen. David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W.,
4,393.491. CI. 370-13.000.
Gaines, Albert L.. to Combustion Engineering. Inc. Toroidal field coil
torque structure. 4.392.918. CI. 376-133.000.
Gajda, Joseph J., to International Business Machines Corporation.
Aluminum<opper alloy evaporated films with low via resistance.
4.393.096. CI. 427-90.000.
Gaku. Morio; Ikeguchi. Nobuyuki; and Ayano. Satoshi. to Mitsubishi
Gas Chemical Company, Inc. Curable cyanate ester/acrylic epoxy
ester composition. 4,393.195. CI. 528-361.000.
Gallot, Jacques R.: See —
Mouille, Rene' L.; Gallot, Jacques R.; and Pouradier, Jean-Marc E.,
4,392,781. CI. 416-223.00R.
Galow. Manfred; and Joseph. Horst. to Didier Engineering GmbH.
Charging apparatus for coke cooling chambers. 4.392.919. CI.
202-228.000.
Ganguillet. Claude; Ruedin, Yves; and Sallin. Michel, to Ebauches, S.A.
Electrochromic display cell. 4,392,720, CI. 350-357.000.
Ganssle, Jack L. Drywall construction and article of manufacture
therefor. 4,392,336, CI. 52-417.000.
Ganzi, Gary C; and Paul. Charles T., to Millipore Corporation
Method and structure for sealing tubular filter elements. 4,392,958
CI. 210-493.200.
Gardineer, Bayard G.; and Heringes, James A., to Technicare Corpora
tion. Combination vanity screen and patient support couch extension
4,392,486, CI. 128-68.000.
Garrett, David L., Jr.; and Cassatta, Joseph C, to Ford Motor Com
pany. Stabilization of electron beam curable compositions for im
proved exterior durability. 4,393,094, CI. 427-44.000.
Garrett, David M.; and Robin, Wallace R. Method for treatment of
herpetic lesions. 4,393,066, CI. 424-251.000.
Garrett, William R., Jr., to Ashland Oil, Inc. Enhanced viscosity main-
tenance and demulsibility in asphalt emulsions. 4,393,155, CI.
524-60.000.
Gassaway, Gary S.; Richgels, Henry J.; and Foster, James I., to Chev-
ron Research Company. Exploration system and method of determin-
ing elastic parameters and subsurface shape of an earth formation so
as to indicate likelihood of the formation being an ore. marker rock,
economic mineral or the like. 4,393.488, CI. 367-75.000.
Gast, Theodor; and Binder, Kurt, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Electromag-
netic valve with a plug member comprising a p>ermanent magnet.
4,392,632, CI. 251-65.000.
Gast, Uwe; Hennig, Eberhard; Preuss, Dieter; Taudt, Heinz; and Wel-
lendorf, Klaus, to Dr. -Ing. Rudolf Hell GmbH. Method and appara-
tus for partial electronic retouching of colors. 4.393.399. CI.
358-80.000.
Gaudiana, Russell A.; and Kalyanaraman, Palaiyur S.. to Polaroid
Corporation. Substituted-quaterphenylene polyamide. 4.393.194. CI.
528-348.000.
Gaudiana, Russell A.: See —
Rogers, Howard G.; Gaudiana, Russell A.; Manello, Jeannette S.;
and Sahatjian, Ronald A., 4,393,196, CI. 528-363.000.
Gauvain, Roger; and Kueny, Michel, to Societe Alsacienne de Con-
structions Mecaniques de Mulhouse. Fiber separator for feeding a
freed-fiber spinning unit. 4,392,276, CI. 19-97.000.
Gavagan, James A., to Irvin Industries, Inc. Clevis safety belt buckle.
4,392,280, CI. 24-230.00A.
Gearhart Industries, Inc.: See —
Rankin, E. Edward, 4,392,377, CI. 73-155.000.
Geary, Cari H., Jr., to Elliott Turbomachinery Co., Inc. Bypass control
system. 4,392,345, CI. 60-39.020.
Gebr. van Capelleveen B.V.: See —
Van Capelleveen, Pieter, 4,392,768, CI. 414-278.000.
Gebruder Weiss KG: See —
Kneer, Franz, 4,392,881, CI. 71-9.000.
Gehmann, Walter. Aiming device. 4.392.723, CI. 350-407.000.
Gehring, Johann: See —
Stoeger, Klaus; Birkle, Siegfried; and Gehring, Johann, 4,392,936,
CI. 204-213.000.
Geimer, Robert L., to United States of America, Agriculture. Method
of pressing reconstituted lignocellulosic materials. 4,393,019, CI.
264-83.000.
Geis, Hans P.; and Helber, Holger, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Rout-
ing diaphragm for a dynamic pick-up device having a pyroelectric
layer. 4,393,403, CI. 358-113.000.
Geiss, Vernon L.: See —
Newton, Richard P.; Harper, Patrick H.; Geiss, Vernon L.; and
Jewell, John N., 4,392,501, CI. 131-300.000.
Genentech, Inc.: See —
Crea, Roberto, 4,393,010. CI. 260-940.000.
General Electric'Company: See-
Blunt, Thomas O., 4,392,766, CI. 414-113.000.
Cook, Paul M., 4,392,759, CI. 403-11.000.
Giles, Harold F., Jr.; and White, Dwain M., 4,393,168, CI.
525-66.000.
Gurr, George P.; and Hardy, Robert M., 4,393,446, CI. 364-200.000.
Hepp, Leonard R., 4,393,153, CI. 523-201.000.
Hess, John M., 4,392,778, CI. 415-139.000.
Hicks, Frederick E., 4,392,358, CI. 62-155.000.
Jens, Richard A., 4,393,511, CI. 378-128.00C.
Kellogg, Richard A.; May, John B.; and Johnson, Brian C,
4,393,501, CI. 371-33.000.
Keyes, Gary S.; Georges, Jean-Pierre J.; and DallaPiazza, Dennis
G., 4,393,402, CI. 358-111.000.
Miller, Kenneth F., 4,393,156, CI. 524-114.000.
Miller, Kenneth F., 4,393,158, CI. 524-114.000.
Potter, Ralph M., 4,393,100, CI. 427-181.000.
Ritzer, Alan; Hajjar, Abraham L.; McEntee, Harry R.; and Shade,
Ray W., 4,393,229, CI. 556-430.000.
Siddiqui, Ehtisham U. A.; Wenzel. James L.; and Butterfield. John
L 4 392 835 CI 464-32.000.
Tyre'll.' John A.; and Freimiller. Gary L., 4,393,190, CI.
528-170.000.
Van Abeelen, Petrus C. A. M.; and de Munck, Hans, 4,393,161, CI.
524-506.000.
July 12, 19 53
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
General Foods Corporation; See —
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson. Allan R.; and
Howley, Joseph P., 4,393,085, CI. 426-28.000.
General Motors Corporation: See —
Bock, Gustavus P., 4,393,319, CI. 310-80.000.
Deckard, John I.; and Straub, Robert D., 4.392.612. CI. 239-88.000.
Montgomery, Loren N., 4,392,393, CI. 74-661.000.
Shakespear, Horacio, 4,392,667, CI. 280-690.000.
Shows, Everett W., 4,392,347, CI. 60-39.270.
Verdouw, Albert J., 4,392,355, CI. 60-752.000.
Wong, Tom C, 4,392,583, CI. 220-202.000.
General Signal Corporation: See —
Bowden, Charles J., 4,392,798, CI. 418-102.000.
Genese, Joseph N.: See —
Elias, Allen M.; and Genese. Joseph N., 4,392,850, CI. 604-82.000.
George, Robert D.; and di Palma, Georgio, to Sherwood Medical
Company. Wound drainage device. 4,392,858, CI. 604-187.000.
Georges, Jean-Pierre J.: See —
Keyes, Gary S.; Georges, Jean-Pierre J.; and DallaPiazza, Dennis
G., 4,393,402, CI. 358-111.000.
Geosource Inc.: See —
Fassauer, Arthur L., 4,392,591, CI. 222-227.000.
Gerber, Bernard R.: See —
Berger, Richard F.; Pardes, Greg; and Gerber, Bernard R.,
4,392,576. CI. 2 15-1. OOC.
Gesellschaft fur Biotechnologische Forschung: See —
Wagner, Fritz; Lindorfer, Walter; Jahn-Held. Wilheim; and Schulz,
Walther. 4,392.892. CI. 134-25.100.
Gessler, Donald A. Process for erecting a rotor assembly for a rotary
extractor and apparatus therefor. 4.393,027. CI. 422-269.000.
Ghaussy, Rahmat U. Erythrocyte sedimentation rate apparatus and
method. 4,392,497, CI. 128-637.000.
Ghestem, Gerard: See—
Henin, Jean-Pierre; and Ghestem, Gerard, 4,392,890, CI.
106-100.000.
Ghica, Grigore-Vlad: See —
Glashauser, Walter; and Ghica, Grigore-Vlad, 4,393,129, CI.
430-296.000.
Giannone, Victor S. Simplified adjustable tire chain. 4,392,521, CI.
152-218.000.
Gidge, Kenneth N.; and Richard, Henry J., to BSL Corporation. Strip
curtain for display type refrigerators. 4,392,360, CI. 62-249.000.
Gielis, Gerardus C. M.: See —
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; Gielis, Gerardus C. M.; Schmidt,
Johan M.; and Schoonheijm, Harry B., 4,393,273, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Giffen, William M., Jr.: See-
Li, George S.; Jones, John F.; and Giffen, William M., Jr.,
4.393.020. CI. 2tK 108.000.
Giglia, Robert D.; and Haacke. Gottfried, to American Cyanamid
Company. Electrochromic cell having a mixed solid ion-conducting
layer. 4.392.721. CI. 350-357.000.
Giles, Harold F., Jr.; and White, Dwain M., to General Electric Com-
pany. Blends of polyetherimides and rubber modified vinyl aromatic
polymers. 4.393,168, CI. 525-66.000.
Gilker, Clyde, to McGraw-Edison Company. Overcurrent relay cir-
cuit. 4,393,431, CI. 361-97.000.
Gill. Graham P., to Motorola, Inc. Method for controlling the conduc-
tivity of polyimide films and improved devices utilizing the method.
4,393,092, CI. 427-38.000.
Gillespie, Ralph, to Milliken Research Corporation. Meat packaging
material. 4.393,114, CI. 428-252.000.
Girgis, Mikhail M., to PPG Industries, Inc. Method of preparing a
phenolic aldehyde resin and resin composition for an adhesive system
to be applied to glass fibers. 4.393,189, CI. 528-155.000.
Glaser, David. Electron acceleration in ionizable gas. 4,393,334, CI.
315-167.000.
Glashauser, Walter; and Ghica, Grigore-Vlad, to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft. Method of stress-free development of irradiated polymethyl-
metacrylate. 4,393,129, CI. 430-296.000.
Glebov. Vladimir P.; Krivtsov, Georgy V.; Danchenkov, Jury V.;
Khukhry, Sergei A.; and Schepotin, Sergei G. Feeder of bulk materi-
als. 4,392,567, CI. 198-544.000.
Glietenberg, Helmut: See —
Engelbach, Heinz; Steigleiter, Werner; and Glietenberg, Helmut.
4,392,984. CI. 252-432.000.
Godfrey. Thomas E.. to Milliken Research Corporation. Flow control-
ler. 4.392,366, CI. 68-205.00R.
Goedert, Jean, to Arbed S.A. Method of desulfurizing an iron melt.
4,392,887, CI. 75-58.000.
Goertzen, Gerold G., to Roper Corporation. Adjustable handle assem-
bly for walk-behind garden implement. 4,392,538, CI. 180-19.00R.
Goetsch, Duane A.: See —
Howard, Kent A.; and Goetsch, Duane A., 4,392,945, CI.
208-210.000.
Gold Star Company, Ltd.: See-
Lee, Hyun C, 4,392,756, CI. 400-144.200.
Goldberg, Erwin, to Northwestern University. Antigenic peptide
compounds. 4,392,997, CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Goldberg, Stuart D.: See—
Besen, Peter D.; Shulsinger, Don H.; and Goldberg, Stuart D.,
4,393,277, CI. 179-2.00A.
Goldschmitt, Ernst: See-
Blank, Heinz U.; Gabel, Eike; Goldschmitt, Ernst; and Mentzel,
Werner, 4,393,234, CI. 562-475.000.
Goldstein, Bernard; Dresner, Joseph; and Szostak. Daniel J., to RCA
Corporation. Method and apparatus for determining minority carrier
diffusion length in semiconductors. 4.393.348. CI. 324-158.00R.
Golebieski. William J. Floor hockey carom comer. 4.392.647. CI.
272-3.000.
Golyak, Leonty A.: See —
Golyak. Oleg L.; Golyak. Leonty A.; and Stepurenko. Ivan R.,
4.392.805. CI. 425-206.000.
Golyak. Oleg L.; Golyak. Leonty A.; and Stepurenko, Ivan R. Centrifu-
gal casting apparatus. 4,392.805, CI. 425-206.000.
Gomi, Shintaro: See —
Yokogawa, Tomoshisa; and Gomi, Shintaro, 4,393,513, CI.
455-243.000.
Gonek, Stanislaw M.: See —
Stewart, John S.; and Gonek, Stanislaw M., 4,393,291, CI. 200-
148.0OR.
Gonella, Jacques, to Refarmed S.A. Thiolic derivatives or erythromy-
cin having therapeutic activity and pharmaceutical compositions
containing them. 4.393,053, CI. 424-180.000.
Goodall, Brian L.; van der Nat. Adrianus A.; and Sjardijn, Willem, to
Shell Oil Company. Olefin polymerization process with novel sup-
ported titanium catalyst compositions. 4,393,182, CI. 526-125.000.
Goodall Rubber Company: See —
Jones, Robert T.; and Harrison, Martin B., 4,392,676, CI.
285-61.000.
Goodnough, Douglas D., to Burlington Industries, Inc. Drive for loom
easer bar. 4,392,516, CI. 139-115.000.
Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The: See—
Deregibus, Alfio, 4,393,099, CI. 427-177.000.
Tyler, Keith A.; and Fix, Sidney R.. 4,393,154, CI. 524-12.000.
Gordon, Alvina A., and Emma C. Cnudde Administratrices: See —
Gordon, Edmund A., deceased; and Yaecker, John, Administrator,
4,392,344. CI. 59-78.100.
Gordon, Edmund A., deceased (by Gordon, Alvina A., and Emma C.
Cnudde Administratrices); and by Yaecker, John. Administrator, to
Central Safety Equipment Company. Chain-link cable carrier.
4,392,344, CI. 59-78.100.
Gorenflo, Donald L.; and Noblit. William D., Ill, to Fairchild Engi-
neering Company, The. Method and apparatus for dimensionally
measuring articles. 4,393,401. CI. 358-107.000.
Goshgarian. Robert A. -Palatal arch bar with combination locking
device and elastic anchor. 4.392.826, CI. 433-7.000.
Goto, Kunihiko: See —
Takahashi, Masayuki; Goto, Kunihiko; Tanaka, Hisami; and Oh-
hata, Michinobu. 4,393,318, CI. 307-353.000.
Goto, Mitsuhiro: See—
Aoki, Kenji; Goto, Mitsuhiro; and Miura, Teiji, 4,393,390, CI.
346-155.000.
Goto, Takashi: See —
Hirai, Toshio; and Goto, Takashi, 4,393,097. CI. 427-94.000.
Gottesman. Jerome D.: See —
Voipe, Gerald T.; Laskoski, Leonard S.; Amodeo. Ralph J.; Swan-
son. William J.; and Gottesman, Jerome D., 4,393.352. CI
329-50.000.
Gottlieb, Klaus; Bruderreck, Hartmut; and Wehmeier, Friedel-Hein-
rich, to Veba Oel AG. Process for producing alcohols and ethers.
4,393,250, CI. 568-697.000.
Goudie, Alexander C: See-
Cole. William G.; Goudie, Alexander C; and Rose, Carl J.,
4,393,079. CI. 424-331.000.
Gradl. David A.: See—
Linnenbnnk, Thomas E.; and Gradl, David A., 4,393,357, CI.
333-165.000.
Graff, Hart F.; and Bagdal, Karl T., to Armco Inc. Discharge gap
cleaning device. 4,392,613, CI. 239-115.000.
Gras, Gilbert J.: See—
Leveque, Jean-Luc M.; and Gras, Gilbert J.. 4,392.498. CI.
128-665.000.
Graser, Reinhold: See —
Metzger, Adolf; Konrad. Rolf; and Graser, Reinhold, 4,393,033, CI.
423-388.000.
Greco. Saverio G.: See —
Audeh, Costandi A.; and Greco, Saverio G., 4,392,947, CI.
208-229.000.
Greenberg, Charles B., to PPG Industries, Inc. Chemical vapor deposi-
tion of vanadium oxide coatings. 4,393,095, CI 427-87.000.
Greenspan, Donald J. Apparatus for closing tubes. 4,392,807, Cl.-
425-393.000.
Gregorian, Roubik; and Wegner, Glenn, to American Microsystems,
Inc. Offset compensation for switched capacitor integrators.
4,393,351, CI. 328-127.000.
Grenier, Aime J., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Circuit breaker.
4,393,289, CI. 200-147.00R.
Greschner, Johann; Kraus, Georg; and Schmid, Gerhard E., to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation. Structure with a silicon body
having through openmgs. 4,393.127, CI. 430-5.000.
Gresser, Herbert D.; Kaplan, George; and Nussenbaum, Joseph, to
Lazare Kaplan & Sons, Inc. Method and apparatus for placing identi-
fying indicia on the surface of precious stones including diamonds.
4,392,476, CI. 125-30.00R.
Griat, Jacqueline: See—
Koulbanis, Constantin; Zabotto, Arlette; Griat. Jacqueline; and
Charrier, Jean, 4,393,043, CI. 424-59.000.
Grieger, Dieter: See —
Beisswenger, Siegfried; Boppel, Wolfgang; and Grieger, Dieter,
4,393,295, CI. 219-121.0EJ.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Grill, Werner, to Saurer-Allma GmbH. Twisting machine. 4,392,341,
CI. 57-90.000.
Groenendal, Ronald C See —
Strieker, George O.; Teumer, Karl H.; and Groenendal, Ronald C,
4,393,117,0.428-352.000.
Grosse, Aristid V.; and Cherry, Norman H., to Lanko, Inc. Hydrocar-
bon-water fuels, emulsions, slurries and other particulate mixtures.
4,392,865, CI. 44-51.000.
Groth, Hugh F.; and Vogel, John D., to Wooster Brush Company, The.
Portable paint sprayer. 4,392,614, CI. 239-215.000.
Grout, Kenneth M., to Kenmartin Development, Inc. Method and
apparatus for recovering silver and plastic from used film. 4,392,889,
CI. 75-97.0OA.
Grunwald, Werner; Zehender. Ernst; Friese, Karl-Hermann; Schmatz,
Jurgen; Neu, Hans; Kirner, Kuno; and Schumacher, Bemd, to Robert
Bosch GmbH. Electrode for ignition systems. 4,393,282, CI. 200-
19.00R.
GTE Automatic Electric Incorporated: See—
Krzeptowski, Andrzej J., 4,392,290, CI. 29-239.000.
GTE Products Corporation; See —
Belttary. Harold E., 4,393,288, CI. 200-I44.00R.
Marshall, Harry L.; and Schwartz, Alan R.. 4,393,118, CI.
428-403.000.
GTE Sylvania Incorporated: See —
Fahlen, Theodore S., 4,393,505, CI. 372-57.000.
Guczi, Csaba: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Gudgel, Willard L.: See-
Brown, Leon C; Campbell, Jesse L.; Fitts, Uscoe J.; and Gudgel,
Willard L., 4,392.739, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Guedj, Richard; Dieulesaint, Eugene; and Royer, Daniel, to Thomson-
CSF. Marking system using elastic surface waves. 4,393,268, CI.
178-18.000.
Guerineau. Abel A. J.: See —
Beriivet, Marc A.; and Guerineau, Abel A. J., 4.392,339, CI.
56-192.000.
Guglielmo, Richard J., Sr. Net finishing composition and process for
using same. 4,393,102, CI. 427-243.000.
Gulf & Western Manufacturing Company: See —
Byrne, James C, 4,393,341, CI. 318-443.000.
Gulyaev, Jury V.: See —
Bagdasarian, Alexandr S.; Gulyaev, Jury V.; Fedorets, Vladimir
N.; and Kmita, Anatoly M., 4,393,321, CI. 310-3I3.00B.
Gummeringer, Henry E. Internal combustion engine with double oscil-
lating pistons. 4,392,458, CI. 123-I8.0OR.
Gunnewig, Hubert, to Westfalia Separator AG. Discharge nozzle for
centrifugal separator drums. 4,392,845, CI. 494-1.000.
Gunther, Dieter; Bertsch, Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold, Her-
bert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt, Michael, to Robert Bosch GmbH.
Temperature responsive open/closed loop switching for lambda
control. 4,392,470, CI. 123-440.000.
Gurr, George P.; and Hardy, Robert M., to General Electric Company.
Routine timer for computer systems. 4,393,446, CI. 364-200.000.
Gutman, Rodika: See —
Kraus. Menahem A ; Frommer, Moshe A.; Nemas, Mara; and
Gutman, Rodika, 4,392,960, CI. 210-651.000.
Gwinn, Mack W., Jr., to Firepower, Inc. Muzzle attachment for a
firearm barrel. 4,392,413, CI. 89-14.0OC.
Gyomrey, Karl M., to Coles Cranes Limited. Tie rope compensation
arrangement. 4,392,573, CI. 212-230.000.
Haacke, Gottfried: See —
Giglia, Robert D.; and Haacke. Gottfried, 4,392,721, CI.
350-357.000.
Haaf, Franz: See —
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf.
Klaus; Stephan, Rudolf;
525-83.000.
Haberle, Norman; Eberle, Otto; and Hafner. Walter, to Consortium fur
elektrochemische Industrie GmbH. 2-Alkenyl and 2-alkynyl succinic
acid N-(3.5-dichlorophenyl)imides. 4,393,220, CI. 548-545.000.
Habermann, Helmut; and Brunet, Maurice, to Societe Europenne de
Propulsion. Redundant active electromagnetic bearing. 4,392,693, CI.
308-10.000.
Hachmann, Klaus, to Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien.
Low-phosphate detergent builder salt mixture and process of wash-
ing. 4,392,974, CI. 252-99.000.
Hacke, Joseph F.; and Bazin, Lucas J., to RCA Corporation. Balanced
modulator with feedback stabilization of carrier balance. 4,393,395,
CI. 358-23.000.
Hadfleld, Frederick C; and McElroy, Marvin R. Concealed access
furniture. 4,392,628, CI. 248-202.100.
Hafner, Walter: See—
Haberle, Norman; Eberle, Otto; and Hafner, Walter, 4,393,220, CI.
548-545.000.
Haga, Tsunehiro: See —
Okuma, Kiwamu; Haga, Tsunehiro; Kizara, Masao; Otaki, Keiji;
and Hirai, Ayahiro, 4,392,878, CI. 65-6.000.
Hage, Manfred; Demuth, Hans; and Junker. Otto, to Wieland Werke
AG. Concentric tube heat exchanger with spacer. 4,392,526, CI.
165-154.000.
Hagen, Glenn E. Spaced apart wave generator float array. 4,392,349,
CI. 60-500.000.
Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker.
and Breuer. Hans, 4,393.164, CI.
P., Jr., to Bendix Corporation,
an integral electrical contact.
Haginoya, Mitsuo: See —
Kanamaru, Hisanobu; Tohkairin, Akira; Tatsumi, Hideo; Asahi,
Naotatsu; and Haginoya, Mitsuo, 4,392,2%, CI. 29-520.000.
Hagiwara, Miyuki: See —
Sasaki, Takashi; Hagiwara, Miyuki; Hosoi, Fumio; and Takagi,
Tohru, 4,393,165, CI. 525-10.000.
Hagiwara, Noriaki: See —
Ida, Michiaki; Hagiwara, Noriaki; Yamago, Naoyoshi; Yoshioka.
Masahiro; and Kikuchi, Katsuaki, 4,392,751, CI. 384-99.000.
Hagopian, Nubar: See —
Muessel, Dan C; and Hagopian, Nubar, 4,392,635, CI. 254-344.000.
Hagqvist, Peter: See—
Almlof, Goran; and Hagqvist, Peter, 4,392,871, CI. 55-23.000.
Hahn. Eberhard. Method of and device for adjusting a shaped-electron-
beam working device. 4.393.310, CI. 250-398.000.
Hahn, Erwin: See —
Patsch, Manfred; Ruske, Manfred; and Hahn, Erwin, 4,393,005, CI.
260-245.730.
Hajjar, Abraham L.: See —
Ritzer, Alan; Hajjar, Abraham L.; McEntee, Harry R.; and Shade,
Ray W., 4,393,229, CI. 556-430.000.
Hakansson, Sven, to Axel Johnson Engineering AB. Apparatus for
removing liquid from a suspension. 4,392,422, CI. 100-118.000.
Hale, Raymond L., to Power Hybrids, Incorporated. Hybrid transistor.
4,393,392, CI. 357-74.000.
Hall, Alfred E., to Sigalos & Levine, P.C. Electronic logic game.
4,392,651, CI. 273-153.00R.
Hall, Charles P.; and Johenning, John B., to Monterey Manufacturing,
Inc. Air bleeder valve for waterbed mattresses. 4,392,872, CI.
55-36.000.
Hall, James R.; and Whallon, William
The. Electrical conductor having
4,392,703, CI. 339-49.0OR.
Hall, Theodore D.: See—
Lopapa, Alberto F.; and Hall, Theodore D., 4,393,040, CI.
424-1.000.
Haller, John L.: See —
Fipp, Beverly A.; Fipp, Bernard E.; and Haller, John L., 4,392,578,
CI. 215-231.000.
Hamanishi, Yoshinari. to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Lens system capable of
short distance photography. 4.392,724, CI. 350-163.000.
Hambrecht, Juergen: See—
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker.
' Klaus; Stephan. Rudolf; and Breuer, Hans, 4,393,164, CI.
525-83.000.
Hamlyn. Maxwell C: See —
Stables, Wilbur L.; Pendlebury, David; Saich, Anthony M.; and
Hamlyn, Maxwell C, 4,392,285, CI. 28-276.000.
Hammond, David C; Elchenko, Stephen M.; Tralies, John M.; Ver-
burgt, Peter W.; and Robinson, Leon R., to United States of America,
Navy. Test set for a directional command active sonobuoy system
(DICASS). 4,393,483, CI. 367-13.000.
Hanada, Kazunori: See —
Sawada, Jiro; Hanada, Kazunori; Tamai, Masaharu; Morimoto,
Shigeo; and Omura, Sadafumi, 4,393,228, CI. 549-549.000.
Hanafi, Nabil, to Pumpenfabrik Urach. Valve arrangement for venting
conduits and pumping system including the same. 4,392,784, CI.
417-103.000.
Hanaoka, Takatsugu: See —
Eguchi, Osamu; Hattori, Mitsutoshi; and Hanaoka, Takatsugu,
4,392,375, CI. 73-118.000.
Hancock, Kevin J., II: See —
Aloi, Michael J.; and Hancock, Kevin J., II, 4,392,484, CI.
126-450.000.
Handl, Werner, to Staedtler, J. S. Eraser and process for its manufac-
ture. 4,393,022, CI. 264-148.000.
Hannes, John S.; and Harringer, Robert V., to Western Electric Com-
pany, Inc. Device for inserting and removing circuit modules with
multiple leads. 4,392,301, CI. 29-741.000.
Hansen, Peder M.; Hoffman, John G.; Seeley, Elwin W.; and Andrew,
Wesley A., to United States of America, Navy. Method for rapidly
detecting subterranean tunnels by detecting a non-null value of a
resultant horizontal magnetic field component. 4,393,350, CI.
324-334.000.
Hanshin Sogyo Co., Ltd.: See —
Yoshimoto, Koichi, 4.392,659, CI. 280-11.230.
Hanson. Harry t.; and Sapp, John B., Jr., to Celanese Corporation.
Synthesis of alkoxy and phenoxy substituted aryl sulfides. 4,393,241,
CI. 568-49.000.
Hara, Kunio, to Nifco, Inc. Apparatus for attachment of carrier sheet to
containers. 4,392,337, CI. 53-48.000.
Hara, Saburo, to Toska Co., Ltd.; Japan Bano'k Co., Ltd.; and Ben
Clements & Sons, Inc. Method of and apparatus for manufacturing
fastener assemblies. 4,392,906, CI. 156-250.000.
Hara. Toshitami: See —
Shirato, Yoshiaki; Takatori, Yasushi; Hara, Toshitami; Nishimura,
Yukuo; and Takahashi, Michiko, 4,392,907, CI. 156-252.000.
Harasaki, Hayathugu; and Tsutagawa, Wataru, to Toyo Kogyo Co.,
Ltd. Engine mounting structure for an automobile body. 4,392,545,
CI. 180-294.000.
Harbaugh, William L.; and Smetana, Raymond S., to Burrell Construc-
tion & Supply Co. Method for making a concrete block. 4,393,018, CI.
264-82.000.
Harding, Brian, to Can-Eng Holdings Limited. Fluidized bed.
4,392,814. CI. 431-170.000.
July 12, 19
tl
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
Hardouin, Pierre, to La Telemecanique Electrique. Connecting device
for pneumatic apparatus. 4,392,677, CI. 285-137.00R.
Hardy, Robert M.: See-
Gun. George P.; and Hardy, Robert M., 4,393,446. CI. 364-200.000.
Hardy, Terence: See —
Litchfield, Leon G.; and Hardy, Terence, 4,392,696, CI. 312-
33O.0OR.
Hareyama, Kyuichi, to Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd. Digital to analog
converter using matrix of current sources. 4.393.370. CI. 340-
347.0DA.
Harper, Patrick H.: See —
Newton, Richard P.; Harper, Patrick H.; Geiss, Vernon L.; and
Jewell. John N.. 4.392,501, CI. 131-300.000.
Harra, David J., to Varian Associates, Inc. Method for obtaining uni-
form etch by modulating bias on extension member around radio
frequency etch table. 4,392,932, CI. 2O4-192.0OE.
Harra. David J.; and Turner. Frederick T.. to Varian Associates. Inc.
Radio frequency etch table with biased extension member. 4,392,938,
CI. 204-298.000.
Harringer, Robert V.: See—
Hannes, John S.; and Harringer, Robert V., 4,392,301, CI.
29-741.000.
Harris, Eugene G., to Emery Industries, Inc. Process for the production
of macrocyclic esters and lactones utilizing mixed metal catalysts.
4,393,223, CI. 549-266.000.
Harris, Jeff; Chambers, Charies A.; and Horwitz, Jack M., to Minkey
Farms Partnership. Mouth operable mask device. 4,392,324, CI.
46-1. OOF.
Harris, Robert S., to Stant Inc. Two-stage pressure relief valve.
4,392,507, a. 137-38.000.
Harrison, Martin B.: See —
Jones, Robert T.; and Harrison, Martin B.. 4,392,676. CI.
285-61.000.
Harry. leuan L.: See —
Pushee, Joan C; Harry, leuan L.; Beck, Martin H.; and Krishnaku-
mar, Suppayan M., 4,392,804, CI. 425-174.80E.
Hart, Cornelis M.; and Lohstroh, Jan, to U.S. Philips Corporation.
Memory cell arrangement for a static memory. 4,393,471, CI.
365-154.000.
Hartmann, Frederick D.: See —
Ivory, Loretta C; and Hartmann, Frederick D., 4,392,261, CI.
5-101.000.
Hartmann, Werner, to Harwe AG. Process for producing molded
articles from polylactams by activated anionic polymerization of
medium lactams. 4,393.193, CI. 528-326.000.
Hartness International, Inc.: See —
Hartness, Thomas S.; and Hartness, Thomas P., 4,392,586, CI.
221-210.000.
Hartness, Thomas P.: See —
Hartness, Thomas S.; and Hartness, Thomas P., 4,392,586, CI.
221-210.000.
Hartness, Thomas S.; and Hartness, Thomas P., to Hartness Interna-
tional, Inc. Apparatus for securing cartons on the top of articles
carried in a case. 4,392,586, CI. 221-210.000.
Hartshorn, Angus J.; and Jones, Eric, to Imperial Chemical Industries
PLC. Transition metal composition, production and use. 4.392.983.
CI. 252-429.00B.
Hartwell, Edward W.: See—
Marsan, Mario S.; and Hartwell, Edward W., 4,392,862, CI.
604-366.000.
H^rwc i'V^j' Sec
Hartmann, Werner, 4,393,193, CI. 528-326.000.
Hasegawa, Kayoko: See —
Kojima, Chiaki; Hasegawa, Kayoko; and Miyahara, Kosuke,
4,393,126, CI. 430-2.000.
Hassall, Cedric H.: See—
Broadhurst, Michael J.; Hassall, Cedric H.; and Thomas, Gareth J.,
4,393,221, CI. 549-39.000.
Hatakeyama. Hideo: See —
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Hatakeyama, Hideo:
shi; Momose, Yoshiaki; and Imai,
264-53.000. ^
Hathaway, Roderick D.; Irving, Edward; and Waterhouse, John S., to
Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Photopolymenzable resins. 4,392,930, CI.
204-159.140.
Hattori, Mitsutoshi: See—
Eguchi, Osamu; Hattori. Mitsutoshi; and Hanaoka, Takatsugu,
4,392,375, CI. 73-118.000.
Hauk, Ernest D.; and Addison, William C. to
Water well developing system. 4.392,527. CI.
Havers, James S.: See —
Douglas, Alec T.; and Havers, James S., 4,393,455, CI. 364-519.000.
Hawk Industries, Inc.: See —
Hauk, Ernest D.; and Addison, William C, 4,392,527, CI.
166-55.200.
Haws, John R., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Polymeric blends.
4,393,170, CI. 525-89.000.
Hayakawa, Masaharu: See —
Kato, Takashi; and Hayakawa, Masaharu, 4,393,012, CI. 261-
39.00A.
Hayama, Toru: See —
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Toru;
Takahashi, Kazue; Watanabe, Michihiro; and Kotani, Sumihisa.
4.392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Hayashi, Hiroshi; Shimojima, Yukiji; Shirai, Takashi; Ishida, Torao; and
Shibukawa. Mitsuru, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. AI-77
Hawk Industries,
166-55.200.
Inc.
Compounds and pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof 4,393,225,
CI. 549-289.000.
Hayashi, Yukichi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Nippon Coinco. Total sales
summing device for a vending machine. 4.392,564, CI. 194-I.OON.
Hayden, Gary N. Combined single and double water ski tow bar.
4,392,833. CI. 441-69.000.
Heat & Control, Inc.: See—
Caridis, Andrew A.; and Benson. Clark K.. 4.392.420. CI.
99-406.000.
Heck, Richard M.: See —
Barton, Dale S.; and Heck, Richard M.. 4.392.765. CI. 414-30.000.
Heckman, Richard A., to United States of America, Energy. Molten tin
reprocessing of spent nuclear fuel elements. 4.392.995. CI.
252-627.000.
Heckmann. Horst; and Nawroth. Werner, to Friedrich W. Schwing.
GmbH. Control valve for viscous material pumps. 4.392.510, CI.
137-454.200.
Heibel. Helmut, to Lucas Industries Limited. Actuator mechanisms for
vehicle brakes. 4.392.558. CI. 188-72.700.
Heidemeyer. Paul us: See—
Hofbauer, Peter; Scholz, Romanus; Heidemeyer, Paulus; and Zim-
mermann. Frank, 4.392.394. CI. 74-689.000.
Heidt-Cizerle, Trude-Helga. Device for displaying and marking foods
or the like. 4.392.571. CI. 206-557.000.
Heimala, Seppo O.; Hultholm. Stig E.; and Tuovinen. Frans H.. to
Outokumpu Oy. Process for the production of an iron-free chronium
(III) compound. 4.393.029. CI. 423-55.000.
Heiman. Robert B., to Astro-Steel Grip International, Inc. Flexible
cementitious coatings. 4,392.335. CI. 52-309.170.
Heiss, Werner: See —
Mittelbach, Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss. Werner; Hoffmann.
Dietrich; Siebrecht, Gunter; Kriechbaum, Karl; and Rapp, Gun-
ter. 4.393.290. CI. 2OO-148.0OA.
Heja. Gergely: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser. Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky. Laszlo; and Szomor. Maria. 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Helber, Holger: See—
Geis, Hans P.; and Helber. Holger, 4.393,403. CI. 358-113.000.
Helbing. Clarence H. Method and apparatus for applying a patch.
4.392,900, CI. 156-153.000.
Helfrich, Elaine A.; and Yip, Kin F., to Miles Laboratories, Inc. Stabi-
lized Romanowsky stain solution. 4.392,864, CI. 8-506.000.
Henderson, Esther G.; and Mallet, Inger V. Cosmetic composition.
4,393.045, CI. 424-95.000.
Henin, Jean-Pierre; and Ghestem. Gerard, to Fives-Cail Babcock.
Cement clinker production. 4.392,890. CI. 106-100.000.
Henke, Werner. Process for efficiently removing oxides of nitrogen
from exhaust gas. 4,393.031. CI. 423-239.000.
Henkel Kommanditgesellschaft Auf Aktien: See—
Altenschopfer, Theodor; and Schumann. Klaus. 4.392,977, CI.
252-174.190.
Fischer, Herbert; Budnowski. Manfred; and Zeidler. Ulrich.
4.393.060. CI. 424-248.500.
Hachmann. Klaus, 4.392,974, CI. 252-99.000.
Hennig, Eberhard: See —
Gast, Uwe; Hennig. Eberhard; Preuss. Dieter; Taudt, Heinz; and
Wellendorf. Klaus. 4.393.399. CI. 358-80.000.
Hepp. Leonard R.. to General Electric Company. Impact modified
glass/mineral reinforced polyester blends. 4.393,153, CI. 523-201.000.
Heraeus Elektroden GmbH: See-
Fabian, Peter; and Muller, Theo, 4,392,927, CI. 204-98.000.
Heraeus Quarzschmelze GmbH: See —
Bonewitz, Hans-Ulrich; Muhlich. Albert; and Rau. Karlheinz,
4,392.715, CI. 350-96.330.
Herbstman, Sheldon: See—
Herbstman, Sheldon, 4.392,946, CI.
Shimoyashiki. Nobuyo-
Fusao, 4,393,016, CI.
and Herchenbach, Horst, 4,392,822, CI.
and Heringes, James A., 4,392,486. CI.
Estes. John H.; and
208-217.000.
Herchenbach. Horst: See —
Brachthauser. Kunibert;
432-106.000.
Heringes. James A.: See —
Gardineer. Bayard G.:
128-68.000.
Herold. Wolf-Dietrich, to ESPE Fabrik Pharmazeutischer Preparate
GmbH. Multiple-tube dispenser. 4.392.589. CI. 222-137 000.
Herrera. Jose E.: See—
Laine. Norman R.; and Herrera. Jose E., 4.392.987. CI. 252-448.000.
Herriau. Paul, to Societe SOGEFINA. Societe de Gestion Financiere
Armoricaine. Pneumatic transport device particularly for single-seed
seed drill. 4,392,439, CI. 1 1 1-34.000.
Herrington, Fox J., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Manufacturing process
for channel seal. 4,392,897, CI. 156-66.000.
Hess, John M., to General Electric Company. Double flow reheat
diaphragm. 4,392,778. CI. 415-139.000.
Hesston Corporation: See—
Beriivet, Marc A.; and Guerineau, Abel A. J., 4,392,339. CI.
56-192.000.
Heuvelsland. Albert; Jann. Fritz F. F.; and de Block-Martens, Greet, to
Dow Chemical Company. The. Process for removing alkynes from
C4 hydrocarbon mixtures. 4,393,249. CI. 568-688.000. ^
Heymer, Gero: See—
Lehr. Klaus; Heymer, Gero; May, Christian; and Klein. Hermann.
4,392,962, CI. 210-688.000.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Hibi, Hitoshi: See—
Kondo, Nobuo; Naganoma, Masanori; Hibi, Hitoshi; Fujii, Tetsuo;
and Suzuki, Kunihiko, 4,393.365, CI. 340-57.000.
Hicks, Frederick E., to General Electric Company. Apparatus and
method of detecting failure in a refrigerator defrost system. 4,392,358,
CI. 62-155.000.
Hicks, William O.: See—
Lagus, Peter L.; Peterson, Edward W.; and Hicks, William O.,
4,392.376, CI. 73-155.000.
Higaki, Yuzo: See —
Takada. Atsunobu; and Higaki, Yuzo, 4,393,044, CI. 424-59.000.
Highlander, Sarah K.: See-
Minis. Jack J.; and Highlander. Sarah K.. 4.393.137. CI.
435-172.000.
Higuchi, Chojiro: See —
Mita, Ryuichi; Higuchi, Chojiro; Kato. Toshio; Kawashima.
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi. Akihiro; Nagai. Shosuke; and Takano.
Takao. 4.393.000. CI. 260-239.00E.
Hill. Phillip D.: See—
Tusinski. Joseph; and Hill, Phillip D., 4,392,334, CI. 51-263.000.
Hill, Robert B., to Eye-D Development II Ltd. Rotating beam ocular
identification apparatus and method. 4,393,366, CI. 382-2.000.
Hillberg, Robert L.; and Stevens, Frederick F. Trigger retainmg and
stabilizing means. 4,392,320, CI. 42-69.00R.
Hiltebrandt, Siegfried, to Richard Wolf GmbH. Endoscope. 4,392,485,
CI. 128-6.000.
Hilton, Carl W., to Return on Investment Corporation. Tennis training
aid. 4,392.650, CI. 273-29.00A.
Hirai. Ayahiro: See —
Okuma, Kiwamu; Haga, Tsunehiro; Kizara, Masao; Otaki, Keiji;
and Hirai, Ayahiro, 4,392,878. CI. 65-6.000.
Hirai, Toshio; and Goto, Takashi. Electrically conductive Si3N4-C
series amorphous material and a method of producing the same.
4,393,097. CI. 427-94.000.
Hiraiwa, Kazuyoshi; and Yamasaki, Saburo, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.
Transmission switch arrangement for a power transmission respon-
sive to shifting of gear position. 4,393,285, CI. 200-61.880.
Hiramatsu, Uji: See —
Nakagawa. Tsuneo; Hiramatsu, Uji; and Honda, Toshihide,
4,393,257, CI. 570-145.000.
Hiramoto, Shinji: See —
Maekawa, Hideyuki; Hiramoto, Shinji; Itaya, Kozo; Sato, Kokichi;
and Nishida, Hirotaka, 4,392,577, CI. 215-32.000.
Hirashima, Tsuneaki; Miyata, Toshiyuki; Yamamoto, Yoshikazu; and
Kato, Mitsuyuki, to Showa Chemical Co., Ltd.; and Osaka Municipal
Government. Method of producing aminobenzimidazolones.
4,393,216, CI. 548-305.000.
Hirata, Sadao: See—
Maruhashi, Yoshitsugu; Tanikawa, Isao; Hirata, Sadao; Yazaki,
Jinichi; and Sakano, Kozaburo, 4,393,106, CI. 428-35.000.
Hirata, Shinji; and Ina, Hirohiko, to West Electric Co., Ltd. Electronic
flash device. 4,393,335, CI. 3 15-241. OOP.
Hirayama, Noriaki: See —
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki, Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai,
Masaji; Hirayama, Noriaki; Morimoto, Makoto; and Fukui,
Masanori, 4,393,056, CI. 424-181.000.
Hirosaki, Yukihiro: See —
Fujii, Kunihiko; Hirosaki, Yukihiro; Nishiyama, Yoshihisa; and
Sato, Koichiro, 4,392.535. CI. 177-1.000.
Hirth. Georges: See —
Boguth. Walter; and Hirth. Georges. 4.393.057. CI. 424-229.000.
Boguth, Walter; and Hirth. Georges, 4,393,073, CI. 424-284.000.
Hirukawa, Kohei: See —
Torii, Michihiro; Hirukawa, Kohei; Urata, Hiroshi; and Suzuki,
Shinichi, 4,393,373, CI. 340-384.00E.
Hisaka Works, Ltd.: See-
Miyamoto, Mitsuyasu; Ishimaru, Osamu; and Fukube, Nobuyoshi,
4,392,365, CI. 68-19.000.
Hisamitsu Pharmaceutical Co., Inc.: See—
Noda, Kanji; Nakagawa, Akira; Yamagata, Tetsuya; and Ide,
Hiroyuki. 4,393,076, CI. 424-317.000.
Hitachi Chemical Company, Ltd.: See—
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Morishita,
Hirosada; Mizuno, Yutaka; Yokozawa, Shunya; and Tsukanishi,
Kenji. 4.393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Hitachi Koki Co.. Ltd.: See—
Matsuda, Yasumasa; Mukumoto, Kyoji; Sagae, Syoji and
Kasahara, Masatoshi, 4,393,388, CI. 346-140.00R.
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Tom;
Takahashi, Kazue; Watanabe, Michihiro; and KoUni, Sumihisa,
4,392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Hitachi, Ltd.: See—
Arai, Takao; Hoshino, Takashi; and Kobayashi, Masahani,
4,393,419, CI. 360-37.100.
Ida, Michiaki; Hagiwara, Noriaki; Yamago, Naoyoshi; Yoshioka,
Masahiro; and Kikuchi, Katsuaki, 4,392,751, CI. 384-99.000.
Ishii, Takeo; Ogata, Masatsugu; and Narahara, Toshikazu,
4,393,177, CI. 525-422.000.
Kanamaru, Hisanobu; Tohkairin, Akira; Tatsumi, Hideo; Asahi,
Naoutsu; and Haginoya, Mitsuo, 4,392,296, CI. 29-520.000.
Kumada, Akio; Ihochi, Takahiko; Homma, Makoto; and Tanaka,
Masashi, 4,392,747, CI. 368-88.000.
Maki, Naoki; Numata, Seiji; Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Yamamoto,
Heroe, 4,393,429, CI. 361-19.000.
Matsuda, Yasumasa; Mukumoto, Kyoji; Sagae, Syoji and
Kasahara, Masatoshi, 4,393,388, CI. 346-140.00R.
Matsuoka, Shigeru; Tokunaga, Takeshi; Yonekura, Seiji; Yamau-
chi, Koji; and Suzuki, Mitsuo, 4,393,342, CI. 318-467.000.
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Toru;
Takahashi, Kaztie; Watanabe, Michihiro; and Kotani, Sumihisa,
4,392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Sakudo, Noriyuki; Tokiquchi, Katsumi; Koike, Hidemi; Kanomata,
Ichiro; and Nakashima, Humihiko. 4.393,333. CI. 315-111.810.
Shibuya, Yoshimichi; and Takahashi, Masami, 4,392,717, CI.
350-334.000.
Tsutsui, Mitsukuni; and Yoshinari, Takashi, 4,392,473, CI.
123-635.000.
Ho, Nelson; and Kratochvil, Jiri, to Critikon, Inc. System for encapsula-
tion of semiconductor chips. 4,393,130, CI. 430-313.000.
Hobart Corporation: See —
Meyers, Theodore F., 4,392,891, CI. 134-10.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Lehr, Klaus; Heymer, Gero; May, Christian; and Klein, Hermann,
4,392,962, CI. 210-688.000.
Merkel, Wulf; Bormann, Dieter; Mania, Dieter; and Muschaweck,
Roman, 4,393,072, CI. 424-275.000.
Metzger, Adolf; Konrad, Rolf; and Graser, Reinhold, 4,393,033, CI.
423-388.000.
Moraw, Roland; and Schadlich, Gunther, 4,392,711, CI.
350-361.000.
Hoefs, Edwin G.: See —
Kuehn, Andrew, III; and Hoefs, Edwin G., 4,392,782, CI.
417-36.000.
Hoehn, Wolfgang, to ITT Industries, Inc. Parallel analog-to-digital
converter. 4,393,372, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Hofbauer, Peter; Scholz, Romanus; Heidemeyer, Paulus; and Zimmer-
mann, Frank, to Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft. Engine-gear
arrangement for vehicles, in particular passenger cars. 4,392,394, CI.
74-689.000.
Hoffman, Jerzy. Wire trimmer. 4,392,398, CI. 81-9.510.
Hoffman, John G.: See —
Hansen, Peder M.; Hoffman, John G.; Seeley, Elwin W.; and
Andrew, Wesley A., 4,393,350, CI. 324-334.000.
Hoffman, Werner; von Fraunberg, Karl; and Baumann, Manfred, to
BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Musk-like scents and their manufacture.
4,393,245, CI. 568-375.000.
Hoffmann, Dietrich: See —
Mittelbach, Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss, Werner; Hoffmann,
Dietrich; Siebrecht, Gunter; Kriechbaum, Karl; and Rapp, Gun-
ter, 4,393,290. CI. 20O-148.00A.
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See —
Boguth, Walter; and Hirth, Georges, 4,393,057, CI. 424-229.000.
Boguth, Walter; and Hirth, Georges. 4,393,073. CI. 424-284.000.
Broadhurst. Michael J.; Hassall, Cedric H.; and Thomas, Gareth J.,
4,393,221, CI. 549-39.000.
Keith. Dennis D.; Tengi, John P.; and Weigele. Manfred. 4.393.003.
CI. 260-245.20R.
Lohri. Bruno. 4.393,243, CI. 568-344.000.
Hofmann-Igl, Ernest, to Basotherm GmbH. Eye drop dispensing botTle.
4.392.590. CI. 222-174.000.
Hofmann. Rolf L., to Advanced Card Systems, Ltd. Apparatus and
method for reading punched cards. 4,393,302, CI. 235-474.000.
Hoglinger, Norbert. Device for facilitating particularly the loading and
unloading of containers etc. from vehicles etc. 4,392,662, CI.
280-43.230.
Hohman, Charles M.; Propster, Mark A.; and Seng, Stephen, to Owens-
Corning Fiberglas Corporation. Drying apparatus. 4,392,310, CI.
34-172.000.
Hokkaido University, President of: See —
Nishiyama, Masashi; Kobayashi, Yoshinari; Tokura, Seiichi; and
Nishi, Norio, 4,392,916, CI. 162-157.100.
Holce, Thomas J.; and Huckins, Charles M., to Sentrol, Inc. Take-off
connector for security circuit. 4,392,707, CI. 339-125.00R.
Holcomb, Dysart E.: See —
Drechsel, Erhart K.; Holcomb, Dysart E.; and Sardisco, John B.,
4,393,032. CI. 423-320.000.
Sardisco. John B.; and Holcomb. Dysart E.. 4.393,030, CI.
423-167.000.
Holman, Lee. Brake mechanism for material handling system.
4,392,563, CI. 193-10.000.
Holmes, David D., to RCA Corporation. Television ghost signal detec-
tor with color burst phase delay control. 4,393,397, CI. 358-36.000.
Holmes, Paul A.; Willmouth, Frank M.; and Newton, Alan B., to
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Polymer blends containing poly-
mer of /3-hydroxybutyric acid and chlorine or nitrile group contain-
ing polymer. 4,393,167, CI. 525-64.000.
Holmes, Paul M.: See—
Crissy, Charles F.; and Holmes, Paul M., 4,392,762, CI. 410-1 16.000.
Holtey, Thomas O.; Noyes, Steven S.; and Peters, Daniel G., to Honey-
well Information Systems Inc. Communications subsystem having a
self-latching data monitor and storage device. 4.393.461. CI.
364-900.000.
Homma. Makoto: See —
Kumada. Akio; Ihochi. Takahiko; Homma, Makoto; and Tanaka,
Masashi, 4,392,747, CI. 368-88.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Aiba, Yasuaki, 4,392,542, CI. 180-228.000.
Fujii. Takayuki; and Suda, Hitoshi, 4,392,539, CI. 180-90.000.
Iwai, Kazuhiro; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Enokimoto, Akito; and Kato,
Yoshitaka, 4,392.536, CI. 180-217.000.
Sasagawa. Masaru; Umeda. Tatsuo; and Kushima. Mamoni,
4,392,400, CI. 83-185.000.
July 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Honda. Toshihide: See —
Nakagawa, Tsuneo; Hiramatsu. Uji; aiid Honda. Toshihide.
4.393,257. CI. 570-145.000.
Honeywell Information Systems Inc.: See —
Holtey, Thomas O.; Noyes, Steven S.; and Peters, Daniel G.,
4,393.461, CI. 364-900.000.
Hong, Enrique: See^
Schut, Robert N.; Safdy, Max E.; and Hong, Enrique, 4,393,081, CI.
424-274.000.
Honjo, Satoru; Yuyama, Yasuaki; Iwasa. Masakazu; and Imanishi.
Kazuo. to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Transfer powder marking
method using a core-shell powder comprising a pigment, solvent-
insoluble polyester resin and a volatile halogenated hydrocarbon
insoluble ingredient. 4,393,112, CI. 428-207.000.
Hoover, Lontiie D.: See —
House, Roy F.; and Hoover, Lonnie D., 4,392,964, CI. 252-8.50C.
Hoppe, Karl; and Strauss, Udo, to BASF Farben & Fasem A.G. Syn-
thetic resin. 4,393,179, CI. 525-490.000.
Horbelt, Michael: See —
Gunther. Dieter; Bertsch, Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold,
Herbert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt. Michael, 4,392,470, CI.
123-440.000.
Horiba. Ltd.: See —
Ishida. Kozo; and Kohsaka, Hiroji. 4,393.304, CI. 250-343.000.
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane. Koichi; Mogi, Shigeru;
Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, to Dai Nippon Printing Co..
Ltd.; and Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd. Apparatus for simulating color
printing process. 4,393,398, CI. 358-76.000.
Horike, Masanori: See —
Jinnai, Koichiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; and
Kodama, Yutaka, 4,393,385, CI. 346-75.000.
Horner, Joseph L.; and Ludman, Jacques E., to United States of Amer-
ica, Air Force. Method of manufacturing holographic elements for
fiber and integrated optic systems. 4,392,709, CI. 350-3.830.
Horrobin, David F., to Efamol Limited. Treatment for obesity.
4.393.049. CI. 424-145.000.
Horsley. John K., to Molins Limited. Bobbin changer for joining suc-
cessive reels of web of the cigarette industry. 4.392.912. CI.
156-504.000.
Horstmann. Aloys; Eckholt, Heinz; and Veltel, Reinhard, to Volkmann
GmbH & Co. Yam monitor for two-yarn cabling or twisting ma-
chine. 4,392,340, CI. 57-83.000.
Horstmann, Gunter: See —
Mittelbach, Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss, Werner; Hoffmann.
Dietrich; Siebrecht. Gunter; Kriechbaum. Karl; and Rapp, Gun-
ter, 4,393,290, CI. 200-148.00A.
Horton, Stanley K., to Prem Magnetics, Inc. Variable magnetically
biased linearity control. 4,393,361, CI. 335-212.000.
Horwitz, Jack M.: See —
Harris, Jeff; Chambers. Charles A.; and Horwitz. Jack M.,
4,392,324, CI. 46-1. OOF.
Hoshino, Takashi: See —
Arai, Takao; Hoshino, Takashi; and Kobayashi, Masaharu,
4,393,419, CI. 360-37.100.
Hoshiyama, Hidetoshi: See —
Tokuno, Masateru; Ishii, Yoshinori; and Hoshiyama, Hidetoshi,
4,392,910, CI. 156-361.000.
Hosiden Electronics Co., Ltd.: See —
Masuda, Toru, 4,393,283, CI. 200-51.090.
Hosoi, Fumio: See —
Sasaki, Takashi; Hagiwara, Miyuki; Hosoi, Fumio; and Takagi,
Tohru. 4,393,165, CI. 525-10.000.
Hosokawa, Minoru; Ikeda, Masayuki; and Yazawa, Satoru, to Kabu-
shiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Liquid crystal display systems.
4,393,380, CI. 340-805.000.
Hosomizu, Hiroshi: See —
Sahara, Masayoshi; Nakai. Masaaki; Ishida. Tokuji; and Hosomizu.
Hiroshi, 4,392,727, CI. 354-43.000.
Hotta, Hisashi: See—
Kitamura. Yoichi; and Hotta, Hisashi, 4,392,582, CI. 220-75.000.
Houle, Howard E. Grain combine with improved straw walker.
4.392,500, CI. 130-26.000.
Houle, Laurent. Ejecting ice-cream scoop. 4,392,806, CI. 425-286.000.
House, Roy F.; and Hoover, Lonnie D., to NL Industries, Inc. Compo-
sitions and method for thickening aqueous brines. 4,392,964, CI.
252-8.50C.
Howaldtwerke - Deutsche Werft Aktiengesellschaft Hamburg und
Kiel: See—
Kaps, Hermann, 4,392,447, CI. 114-230.000.
Howard, Kent A.; and Goetsch, Duane A., to Exxon Research and
Engineering Co. Two-sUge hydrorefining process. 4,392,945, CI.
208-210.000.
Howley, Joseph P.: See—
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan. Jeffrey D.; Olson. Allan R.; and
Howley, Joseph P., 4,393,085, CI. 426-28.000.
Howmedica, Inc.: See —
Huck, Charles M.; Studer, John E.; and Sauer, Philip H., 4,392,860,
CI. 604-212.000.
Hoya Lens Corporation: See —
Tarumi, Niro; Komiya, Shigeo; and Sugimura, Mitsuo, 4,393,184,
CI. 526-261.000.
Hoyle, Charles E.; and Lenox, Ronald S., to Armstrong World Indus-
tries, Inc. Diazidosulfonyl-N-substituted aniline. 4,393,006, CI.
260-349.000.
Huang. I-Der: See —
Yang. Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang, I-Der. 4,392,986,
CI. 252-435.000.
Hubner, Fritz, to Plascore, Inc. Fluorescent lamp shield. 4,393.323. CI.
313-110.000.
Huck, Charles M.; Studer. John E.; and Sauer. Philip H., to How-
medica, Inc. Disposable wound drainage device. 4,392,860, CI.
604-212.000.
Huckins, Charles M.: See —
Holce. Thomas J.; and Huckins. Charles M.. 4.392,707, CI. 339-
125.00R.
Hudson, Alice P.: See —
Woodward, Fred E.; and Hudson. Alice P.. 4,392.965, CI.
252-8.800.
Hug. Duane L.: See —
Crocker. William A.; and Hug. Duane L., 4.393.230. CI.
556-457.000.
Hughes, David W,: See —
Paulson. Wayne M.; and Hughes. David W.. 4.392.992. CI.
252-512.000.
Hughes. Jack H. Multi-phase failure detector. 4,393,430, CI. 361-92.000.
Hultholm, Stig E.: See—
Heimala, Seppo O.; Hultholm. Stig E.; and Tuovinen. Frans H.,
4,393.029, CI. 423-55.000.
Hummerich, Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger. Franz; Immel, Gu-
enther; Kraus. Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-CIemens, to BASF
Aktiengesellschaft. Alkoxyalkylaminotriazine trans-etherification
products. 4,393,207, CI. 544-196.000.
Huntley, John D.; and Parsons. Raymond L., to International Business
Machines Corp. Status reporting with ancillary data. 4,393.459. CI.
364-900.000.
Hupfer. Leopold: See —
Broecker, Franz J.; Hupfer, Leopold; Merger. Franz; Miesen,
Ernest; Paetsch. Juergen; and Zirker. Guenter. 4,393,251, CI.
568-811.000.
Hurst, Robert N., to RCA Corporation. Time changing system for
VTR. 4,393,415, CI. 360-9.100.
Husain, Syed A., to National Semiconductor Corporation. Distributed
force indexing system. 4,392,935. CI. 204-206.000.
Huttlin, Herbert. Pump or blower, in particular for heating and air-con-
ditioning systems. 4,392,777, CI. 415-131.000.
Hydro Quebec: See—
Roberge. Gerald; and Doyon, Andre, 4,393,157. CI. 323-355.000.
lai, Kenichiro, to Yoshida Kogyo K. K. Method for assembling slide
fastener stringers. 4,392.291, CI. 29-408.000.
Ibach, Bemhard. Device for fixing catheters or the like. 4,392,854, CI.
604-174.000.
Ichihashi, Hiroo: See —
Fujino, Hitoshi; Kanoto. Masanobu; and Ichihashi, Hiroo,
4,392,738, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Ichikawa, Masaru, to Sagami Chemical Research Center Method for
producing methanol. 4,393,144, CI. 518-715.000.
Ichikawa, Shigeru: See—
Nakasu, Kei; Ichikawa, Shigeru; Tanaka, Toshihiko; and Ikeda,
Mitsuo, 4,392,560, CI. 188-73.340.
Ida, Michiaki; Hagiwara, Noriaki; Yamago, Naoyoshi; Yoshioka.
Masahiro; and Kikuchi, Katsuaki, to Hiuchi, Ltd. Damped bearing
device. 4,392,751, CI. 384-99.000.
Ide, Hiroyuki: See —
Noda, Kanji; Nakagawa. Akira; Yamagata, Tetsuya; and Ide,
Hiroyuki, 4,393,076, CI. 424-317.000.
Igarashi. Yoshiaki: See —
Yokobori, Nobuyoshi; Urayama, Masashi; Okamoto, Hiroshi; and
Igarashi, Yoshiaki, 4,393,422. CI. 360-73.000.
Ihara, Tomomi: See—
Shibuya, Kyoichi; and Ihara, Tomomi, 4,392,353, CI. 60-657.000.
Ihochi, Takahiko: See—
Kumada, Akio; Ihochi, Takahiko; Homma, Makoto; and Tanaka,
Masashi, 4,392,747, CI. 368-88.000.
lida, Seiichi: See —
Shima. Michitsune; lida, Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami, Masaharu;
Shimoyama. Toshikazu; Takano. Genu; and Kato. Akira.
4,393,294. CI. 2I9-12I.0EC.
lijima. Noboru: See —
Fujii, Naoharu; and lijima, Noboru, 4,393,071, CI. 424-274.000.
lijima, Takashi: See —
Nakamura, Kenichi; Nankai, Shiro; and lijima, Takashi, 4,392,933,
CI. 204-403.000.
lino, Umetarou: See —
Nakamura, Teruo; and lino, Umetarou, 4,392,788, CI. 417-269.000.
Ikeda, Masayuki, to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Synchronizing
circuit for matrix television set. 4,393,405, CI. 358-153.000.
Ikeda, Masayuki: See —
Hosokawa, Minoru; Ikeda, Masayuki; and Yazawa, Satoru,
4,393,380, CI. 340-805.000.
Ikeda, Mitsuo: See —
Nakasu, Kei; Ichikawa, Shigeru; Tanaka, Toshihiko; and Ikeda,
Mitsuo, 4,392,560, CI. 188-73.340.
Ikegami Tsushinki Co., Ltd.: See —
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane, Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4,393,398, CI.
358-76.000.
Ikeguchi, Nobuyuki: See—
Gaku, Morio; Ikeguchi, Nobuyuki; and Ayano, Satoshi, 4,393,195,
CI. 528-361.000.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Ikushima, Hiroshi; Baba, Takaaki; Sagishima, Takayuki; and Tanaka.
Masanobu, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. 3-D TV Sys-
tems. 4,393,400, CI. 358-92.000.
Illinois Tool Works Inc.: See —
Mugglestone, Peter R., 4,392,278. CI. 24-213.00R.
Imai, Fusao: See —
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Hatakeyama, Hideo; Shimoyashiki, Nobuyo-
shi; Momose, Yoshiaki; and Imai, Fusao, 4,393,016, CI.
264-53.000.
Imai, Yoshikazu: See —
Suzuki. Ichiro; Yasumatsu, Jun; Imai, Yoshikazu; and Motonami,
Masanao, 4,392.673. CI. 280-804.000.
Imai. Yoshio; Nabeta. Yoichi; and Inuzuka, Tadao. to Imai. Yoshio.
Capaciunce humidity sensor. 4,393,434, CI. 361-286.000.
Imanishi, Kazuo: See —
Honjo, Satoni; Yuyama, Yasuaki; Iwasa, Masakazu; and Imanishi,
Kazuo, 4.393.112, CI. 428-207.000.
Imazeki. Ryoji; and Inoue. Michiya. to Fujitsu Fanuc Limited. Method
of modifying data stored in non-volatile memory and testing for
power failure occurring during modification. 4,393,500, CI.
371-13.000.
Immel, Guenther: See —
Hummerich, Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger, Franz; Immel,
Guenther; Kraus, Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-Clemens,
4,393,207, CI. 544-196.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See —
Brittain, David R.; and Wood, Robin, 4,393,062. CI. 424-250.000.
Daniels, James A.. 4,393,224, CI. 549-273.000.
Hartshorn, Angus J.; and Jones, Eric. 4,392.983, CI. 252-429.00B.
Holmes, Paul A.; Willmouth, Frank M.; and Newton, Alan B..
4,393.167, CI. 525-64.000.
Legras, Roger M. H.; Biebuyck. Jean-Jacques E. R. G.; and Mer-
cier. Jean P., 4.393.178. CI. 525-437.000.
Mitchell. Alan; and Bailey. Thomas. 4,393,235, CI. 562-478.000.
Roberts, Norman L.; and Whitaker, Graham, 4,393,214, CI.
546-345.000.
Ina, Hirohiko: See —
Hirata, Shinji; and Ina, Hirohiko, 4.393,335, CI. 315-241.00P.
Indian Explosives Limited: See —
Bhaduri, Sumit; and Mahandru, Madan M.. 4.393.244, CI.
568-360.000.
Industrial Holographies, Inc.: See —
Wright, Forrest S.; and Zimmerman, Ted R., 4,392,745, CI.
356-348.000.
Ing. Rudolf Hell GmbH: See—
Beisswenger, Siegfried; Boppel, Wolfgang; and Grieger, Dieter,
4,393,295, CI 219-121.0EJ.
Ingram, Gary L., to Spencer Wright Industries, Inc. Multi-stitch cam
needle bar shifter for tufting machines. 4.392,440, CI. 112-79.00A.
Inoue, Hiromitsu: See —
Minakuchi, Yoshikazu; Abiko, Toshio; and Inoue, Hiromitsu,
4,393,514, CI. 455-336.000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See —
Inoue, Kiyoshi, 4.393,292, CI. 219-69.00M.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. Method of and
apparatus for electrical discharge machining a small and deep hole
into or through a workpiece. 4,393,292, CI. 219-69.00M.
Inoue, Koji; Sato, Nobukatsu; and Tamura. Takashi. to Maruishi Phar-
maceutical Co.. Ltd. Salt of chlorhexidine. 4,393.219, CI. 548-534.000.
Inoue, Michiya: See —
Imazeki, Ryoji; and Inoue, Michiya. 4.393.500. CI. 371-13.000.
Inoue. Nobuyoshi; and Kishi. Tomomi. to Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki
Kaisha. ResisUnce welding machine. 4,393,293, CI. 219-90.000.
Inoue, Shojiro: See —
Tanaka, Eiichi; Ishibasi, Noboru; and Inoue, Shojiro, 4,392,813, CI.
431-76.000.
Institut Francais du Petrole: See —
Dawans, Francois; Binet, Daniel; Kohler, Norbert; and Dang Vu,
Quang, 4,393,151. CI. 523-130.000,
Euzen, Jean-Paul; Jacquin. Yves; and Van Landeghem. Hugo,
deceased, 4,392,943, CI. 208-152.000.
Institute for Industrial Research & Standards: See—
O'Connell. Denis. 4.392,687, CI. 298-5.000.
Instytut Chemii Nieorganicznej: See —
Wrobel, Stanislaw; and Wegrzyn, Ryszard. 4,392,549, CI.
181-239.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See —
Aiken. John A., Jr., 4.393.463, CI. 364-900.000.
Bakos, Peter; Darrow, Russell E.; Funari, Joseph; and Redpath,
Diane L., 4,392,617. CI. 239-290.000.
Bowles. David J.; Clancy, Douglas E.; Johnson, Carl F.; and Neal,
Danny M., 4,392,758, CI. 400-697.100.
Brown, Leon C; Campbell, Jesse L.; Fitts, Uscoe J.; and Gudgel,
Willard L., 4,392.739, CI. 355-3.0FU.
Denny, Clifford M.; and Wampler, Charles W., II, 4,392,757, CI.
400-328.000.
Gajda, Joseph J., 4,393,096, CI. 427-90.000.
Greschner, Johann; Kraus. Georg; and Schmid. Gerhard E.,
4,393.127. CI. 430-5.000.
Huntley, John D.; and Parsons, Raymond L., 4,393,459, CI.
364-900.000.
Konheim, Alan G.; Matyas, Stephen M.; and Meyer, Carl H.,
4,393,269, CI. 178-22.080.
Milligan, Charles A.; Videki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F.,
4,393,445, CI. 364-200.000.
International Coal Refining Company: See —
Tao, John C, 4,392,940, CI. 208-8.0LE.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.: See —
Calderone, Nicholas; Watkins, Hugh; and Yoshida, Takao,
4,392,976. CI. 252-174.110.
Sprecker, Mark A., 4,393,247, CI. 568-665.000.
International Minerals & Chemical Corp.: See —
Brown, Ross G.; Bright, David R.; and Williams, Robert D.,
4,393,041, CI. 424-19.000.
Brown, Ross G.; Bright, David R.; and Williams, Robert D.,
4,393.041, CI. 424-19.000.
International Minerals & Chemicals Corp.: See —
Seeney, Charles E.; Kraemer. John F.; and Vamum, Nancy C,
4,393,152, CI. 523-139.000.
International Remote Imaging Systems: See —
Deindoerfer. Fred H.; DeForest. Sherman E.; and Bolz. Gunner,
4,393,466, CI. 364-415.000.
International Standard Electric Corporation: See —
Boute, Raymond T. G., 4,393,469, CI. 364-900.000.
International Telephone and Telegraph Corporation: See —
Edwards, Allan K.. 4,393,493. CI. 370-16.000.
Inuzuka, Tadao: See —
Imai, Yoshio; Nabeta, Yoichi; and Inuzuka. Tadao. 4,393,434, CI.
361-286.000.
Inuzuka, Tsuneki; Murakami, Koichi; Kurita, Kenji; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Image forming apparatus.
4,392,741. CI. 355-14.00R.
lori, Shinichi; Kajiwara. Ikuo; and Jikihara. Kazuo, to Kumiai Chemical
Industry Co. Ltd. Herbicidal composition and process. 4,392,883, CI.
71-93.000.
Ippolito, Joe J. Earth storage structural energy system and process for
constructing a thermal storage well. 4,392,531, CI. 166-278.000.
Irons, Ian B., to Johnson, Matthey & Co., Limited. Forming process.
4,392,292. CI. 29-42 l.OOR.
Irvin Industries, Inc.: See —
Gavagan, James A., 4,392,280, CI. 24-230.00A.
Irving, Edward: See —
Hathaway, Roderick D.; Irving, Edward; and Waterhouse, John S.,
4,392,930, CI. 204-159.140. ,
Irving, William A.; and Thornton, Robert E., Jr., to Standard Knitting
Mills, Inc. Destruction and dye resistant tag; tagged textile article and
method of identifying textiles subject to a dyeing and finishing pro-
cess. 4,392,315, CI. 40-27.000.
Ischebeck, Klaus. Storage apparatus including conveyor means.
4,392,767, CI. 414-136.000.
Ishibasi, Noboru: See —
Tanaka, Eiichi; Ishibasi, Noboru; and Inoue, Shojiro, 4,392,813, CI.
431-76.000.
Ishida, Kozo; and Kohsaka. Hiroji. to Horiba, Ltd. Gas analyzer of the
fluid modulation type. 4,393,304, CI. 250-343.000.
Ishida, Noboru; and Watanabe, Harumichi, to Nippon Oil Company,
Limited. Metal deactivator and composition containing same.
4,392.968. CI. 252-5 1.50R.
Ishida. Tokuji: See —
Sahara. Masayoshi; Nakai, Masaaki; Ishida, Tokuji; and Hosomizu,
Hiroshi, 4,392,727, CI. 354-43.000.
Ishida, Torao: See —
Hayashi, Hiroshi; Shimojima, Yukiji; Shirai, Takashi; Ishida,
Torao; and Shibukawa, Mitsuru, 4,393,225, CI. 549-289.000.
Ishii, Shigeru: See —
Ozawa, Kiyomi; and Ishii, Shigeru, 4,393,213, CI. 546-298.000.
Ishii, Takeo; Ogata, Masatsugu; and Narahara, Toshikazu, to Hitachi,
Ltd. TTiermosetting resin composition, process for preparation
thereof and cured product thereof 4,393,177. CI. 525-422.000.
Ishii. Yoshinori: See —
Tokuno. Masateru; Ishii, Yoshinori; and Hoshiyama, Hidetoshi,
4,392,910, CI. 156-361.000.
Ishikawajima-Harima Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Shimizu, Masami; and Yasunobe, Junji, 4,392,752. CI. 384-135.000.
Ishimaru. Osamu: See —
Miyamoto. Mitsuyasu; Ishimaru, Osamu; and Fukube, Nobuyoshi,
4,392.365, CI. 68-19.000.
Ishiyama, Jiro: See —
Watanabe, Masazumi; Uehara, Mikio; Shimazu, Yoshimi; Ishiyama,
Jiro; and Kato. Motohiko. 4.393.083. CI. 426-15.000.
Ishizuka, Yutaka, to Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd. Swash-plate type compressor
having low noise thrust bearings. 4,392.416. CI. 92-71.000.
ISKRA-SOZD elektrokovinske industrije n.sol.o.: See —
Bandelj, Bojan, 4,393,374. CI. 34O405.000.
Itakura, Fumitada; and Sugamura, Noboru, to Nippon Telegraph and
Telephone Public Corporation. Sound synthesizer. 4,393,272, CI.
179-l.OSA.
Itani, Abdallah M., to Electric Power Research Institute, Inc. Data
transmission system and method. 4,393,516, CI. 455-608.000.
Itaya, Kozo: See —
Maekawa. Hideyuki; Hiramoto. Shinji; Itaya. Kozo; Sato. Kokichi;
and Nishida. Hirotaka, 4.392,577, CI. 215-32.000.
Ito, Masazumi; and Shibazaki, Kenji, to Minolta Camera Kabushiki
Kaisha. Paper transport control device for use in mechanical arrange-
ment including manual pap>er feeding mechanism. 4,392,740, CI.
355-14.0SH.
Ito, Takao, to Dainichi Kogyo Co., Ltd. Gasifying device for liquid fuel
burner. 4.392.8 1 1 . CI. 43 1-37.000.
Itoh, Hiroshi: See —
Kobashi. Mamoni; and Itoh. Hiroshi. 4.392.468. CI. 123-339.000.
July 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Itsubo, Junichi; Mori, Fumio; and Sato. Hideki. to Japan Crown Cork
Co. Ltd. Container closure having a liner and method for its produc-
tion. 4.392,581. CI. 215-348.000.
ITT Industries, Inc.: See —
Franke, Helmut, 4,392.557, CI. 188-71.900.
Hoehn. Wolfgang, 4,393,372, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Loreck. Heinz. 4,393,447, CI. 364-426.000.
_ Schopper, Bemd. 4,392.51 1, CI. 137-493.200.
Schopper, Bemd; Lowe, Derek; Reinartz, Hans-Dieter; and Tan-
dler, Peter, 4,392,691, CI. 303-6.00C.
ITW Fastex Italia S.p.A.: See—
Bassi, Alberto, 4,392,683, CI. 296-37.900.
Ivanov, Gennady M.: See —
Buryakov, Viktor P.; Ivanov, Gennady M.; Kislik, Mikhail I.;
Kurgansky, Pavel M.; Shmotkin, Mark B.; and Eikhenvald,
Eduard V., 4,392,551, CI. 184-7.00D.
Ivory, Loretta C; and Hartmann, Frederick D., to Ivory, Loretta C.
Baby cradle. 4,392,261, CI. 5-101.000.
Iwai, Kazuhiro; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Enokimoto, Akito; and Kato, Yo-
shitaka, to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Vehicle.
4.392,536, CI. 180-217.000.
Iwamoto, Eisaburo: See —
Kitagawa, Norihisa; and Iwamoto, Eisaburo, 4,393,475, CI.
365-201.000.
Iwamoto, Ikuo: See —
Tanaka, Masato; Furukawa, Shunsuke; Iwamoto, Ikuo; and Doi,
Toshitada. 4.393.502. CI. 371-40.000.
Iwasa, Masakazu: See —
Honjo, Satoru; Yuyama, Yasuaki; Iwasa, Masakazu; and Imanishi,
Kazuo, 4,393,1 12, CI. 428-207.000.
Iwasaki, Hiroshi, to Fuju Jiko Kabushiki Kaisha. Magnet base for tool.
4,393,363, CI. 335-288.000.
Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro: See —
Jinnai, Koichiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; and
Kodama. Yutaka, 4,393,385, CI. 346-75.000.
Iwasama, Tenio; and Tojiki, Hitomi, to Olympus Optical Company
Limited. Motor speed control device. 4.393.340. CI. 318-301.000.
Iwashita, Tomonori; and Fukahori, Hidehiko, to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha. Motor driven rewind device for camera. 4,392,730, CI.
354-173.000.
Iwata, Masayosi; and Douke, Harumi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Tokai Rika
Denki Seisakusho. Electrical switching arrangement. 4,393,280, CI.
200-4.000.
Izumi, Naoe, to NGK Insulators, Ltd. Sampling device for analyzing
gas with high dust content. 4,392,387. CI. 73-863.210.
J. C. Schumacher Company: See —
McMenamin. Joseph C. 4,393,013, CI. 261-64.00B.
J. I. Case Company: See —
Albrecht, Allan J.; and Van Ooyen, Richard C. 4,392,314, CI.
37-103.000.
J. J. Barker Company Limited: See —
Barker. John C; and McLaughlin. Ivan P.. 4.393.108. CI.
428-44.000.
Jackson, Peter J.: See —
Buchanan, David J.; Davis. Richard; and Jackson. Peter J..
4.393.484. CI. 367-23.000.
Jackson. Tee-Squant-Nee; Vernon. Paul M.; and Schoen. David A., to
Boeing Company. The. Method and apparatus for testing systems
that communicate over digital buses by transmitting and receiving
signals in the form of standardized multi-bit binary encoded words.
4.393.498. CI. 371-20.000.
Jacquin, Yves: See —
Euzen, Jean-Paul; Jacquin, Yves; and Van Landeghem, Hugo,
deceased, 4,392,943, CI. 208-152.000.
Jaedicke, Hagen: See —
Tonne, Peter; and Jaedicke, Hagen, 4,393,211, CI. 546-153.000.
Jahn-Held, Wilhelm: See-
Wagner, Fritz; Lindorfer, Walter; Jahn-Held, Wilhelm; and Schulz,
Walther, 4,392,892, CI. 134-25.100.
James Jr., Harry E. Convertible lantern and reflector therefor.
4,393,439, CI. 362-182.000.
Jameson, James J.; and Beeson, John M., to Cooper Industries, Inc.
Multispeed reversible power shift transmission. 4,392,391, CI.
74-333.000.
Jann, Fritz F. F.: See —
Heuvelsland, Albert; Jann, Fritz F. F.; and de Block-Martens,
Greet, 4,393.249, CI. 568-688.000.
Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd.: See —
Eguchi. Yasukata. 4.392.441. CI. 112-158.00B.
Sano. Yasuro. 4.392,442. CI. 112-275.000.
Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute: See —
Sasaki. Takashi; Hagiwara, Miyuki; Hosoi, Fumio; and Takagi,
Tohru, 4,393,165, CI. 525-10.000.
Japan Bano'k Co., Ltd.: See —
Hara, Saburo, 4.392.906. CI. 156-250.000.
Japan Crown Cork Co. Ltd.: See —
Itsubo. Junichi; Mori. Fumio; and Sato. Hideki. 4,392.581, CI.
215-348.000.
Japan Styrene Paper Corporation: See—
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Hatakeyama, Hideo; Shimoyashiki, Nobuyo-
shi; Momose, Yoshiaki; and Imai, Fusao, 4,393,016, CI.
264-53.000.
Jarrett, Boaz A.: See—
Mowbray, Dorian F.; and Jarrett, Boaz A., 4,39/ ;.... CI.
123-299.000.
Jarvis, Raymond C. Heat-sink water heater. 4,392.455. CI. K: "''' .OA.
Jasys, Vytautas J., to Pfizer Inc. Intermediates for production of 1.1-
dioxopenicillanoyloxymethyl 6-(2-amino-2-phenylacetamido)penicil-
lanates. 4,393.001. CI. 260-239.100.
Jeannotte, Raymond V.: See —
Redmond. Harry W.; and Jeannotte, Raymond V.. 4,392,658, CI.
280-11.180.
Jenkins, William A., to Monarch Marking Systems. Inc. Composite
label web. 4.393.107. CI. 428-42.000.
Jennewein, Hans M.: See —
Langbein, Adolf; Merz, Herbert; Sobotta, Rainer; Bauer, Rudolf;
Jennewein, Hans M.; and Mierau, Joachim, 4,393,069, CI.
424-265.000.
Jens, Richard A., to General Electric Company. Outer rotation bearing
for x-ray tube. 4.393,511, CI. 378-128.000.
JEOL Ltd.: See—
Norioka. Setsuo. 4.393.309, CI. 25O-396.0OR.
Jerard, Robert B., to Dartmouth College, Trustees of Three-dimen-
sional model-making system. 4,393,450, CI. 364-474.000.
Jesse, Erich: See —
Neuhaus, Dieter; Sohner, Gerhard; Ruf, Waller; Jesse, Erich; and
Roth, Helmut, 4,393,432, CI. 361-104.000.
Jewell, John N.: See-
Newton, Richard P.; Harper, Patrick H.; Geiss, Vernon L.; and
Jewell, John N., 4,392,501, CI. 131-300.000.
Jikihara, Kazuo: See —
Ion, Shinichi; Kajiwara, Ikuo; and Jikihara, Kazuu, 4,392,883, CI.
71-93.000.
Jimenez, James A., to Electra Food Machinery, Inc. Cooking appara-
tus. 4,392,418, CI. 99-330.000.
Jinnai, Koichiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; and Kodama,
Yutaka, to Ricoh Co., Ltd. Controllable ink drop velocity type ink-jet
printer. 4,393,385, CI. 346-75.000.
JLG Industries Inc.: See—
Mellott, Lex A., 4,392,698, CI. 339-10.000.
Johannsen, James R., to McQuay-Perfex Inc. Variable dead band pres-
sure control system. 4,392,417, CI. 98-1.500.
Johannson, Richard J., to Towmotor Corporation. Carriage assembly
with shiftable forks. 4,392,773, CI. 414-667.000
Johenning, John B.: See —
Hall, Charles P.; and Johenning, John B., 4,392,872, CI. 55-36.000.
Johne, Hans: See —
Forster, Kari-Heinz; and Johne, Hans, 4,392.429, CI. 101-365.000.
Johnson, Avery A., Jr.: See —
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; Walker, Harrel L.;
Bowler, Eleanor G.; and Ritchey, Charles R., 4,393,048, CI.
424-132.000.
Johnson, Brian C: See —
Kellogg. Richard A.; May, John B.; and Johnson, Brian C,
4,393,501, CI. 371-33.000.
Johnson, Carl F.: See —
Bowles, David J.; Clancy, Douglas E.; Johnson, Carl F.; and Neal,
Danny M., 4,392,758, CI. 400-697.100.
Johnson, Fred L., Jr.; and Watts, Lewis W., Jr., to Texaco Inc. Process
for the production of alkylene glycols. 4,393,254, CI 568-867 000.
Johnson, James C, to Duff-Norton Company. Shielding apparatus for
linear actuator. 4,392,390, CI. 74-89.150.
Johnson & Johnson Baby Products Company: See —
Butterworth, George A. M.; and Fillwalk, Frank J., 4,392,861, CI.
604-366.000.
Johnson, Lewis H.: See —
Capezzuto, John P.; and Johnson, Lewis H., 4,392,425, CI.
101-327.000.
Johnson, Matthey & Co., Limited: See —
Irons, Ian B., 4,392,292, CI. 29-42 l.OOR.
Johnstone, George A. Letterguide. 4.392,306, CI. 33-174.00B.
Jones, Eric: See —
Hartshorn, Angus J.; and Jones, Eric, 4,392,983, CI. 252-429.00B.
Jones, John F.: See —
Li, George S.; Jones, John F.; and Giffen, William M., Jr.,
4,393,020, CI. 264-108.000.
Jones, Robert T.; and Harnson, Martin B., to Goodall Rubber Com-
pany. Hose handling device. 4,392,676, CI. 285-61.000.
Jones, Ronald R., to Circuit Research Labs. Voltage controlled resistor.
4,393,346, CI. 323-280.000.
Jones, Sunley W.; and Franz, James H., Jr., to Westinghouse Electric
Corp. Vehicle propulsion motor control apparatus. 4,393,338, CI.
318-86.000.
Jones, William R., to Boeing Company, The. Direction finding and
ranging system for locating scanning emitters. 4,393,382, CI. 343-
112.00D.
Joseph, Horst: See—
Galow, Manfred; and Joseph, Horst, 4,392,919, CI. 202-228.000.
Joseph, Joseph P.: See —
Nair, Vijay G.; Joseph, Joseph P.; and Berr.stein, Seymour,
4,393,055, CI. 424-180.000.
Joy Manufacturing Company: See —
Novoselac, John; and Churcher, Dale L., 4,392.846. CI. 494-40.000.
Jozepaitis. Charles M., to Nash Engineering Company. The Liquid ring
pump employing discharged pumping liquid for discharge port con-
trol. 4,392,783, CI. 417-68.000.
Jung, Hubert: See —
Fechter, Leonhard; and Jung, Hubert, 4,392,952, CI. 210-159.000.
Junker, Otto: See—
■ Hage, Manfred; Demuth, Hans; and Junker, Otto, 4,392,526, CI.
165-154.000.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Juy, Henri, to Le Simplex. Guide sprocket wheel, more particularly for
the gear shift devices of bicycles and the like. 4,392,841, CI.
474-156.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Fujikoshi: See —
Shikano, Michio; and Kitagawa, Shuzi, 4,392,799, CI. 418-169.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho: See—
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,267,
CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo: Shitamatsu, RyujUo; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,50(5,
CI. 134-46.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho: See-
Sato, Yoshito; and Takahashi, Tomoyuki, 4,392,396, CI. 74-785.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Nippon Coinco: See—
Hayashi, Yukichi, 4,392,564, CI. 194-1. OON.
Kabushiki Kaisha Sunpack: See —
Nishiyama, Masanobu; Kanazawa, Fusao; Tanaka, Hisaji; and
Nishimura, Tatsuo, 4,392,269, CI. 15-145.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha: See —
Aoki, Kenji; Goto, Mitsuhiro; and Miura, Teiji, 4,393,390, CI.
346-155.000.
Hosokawa, Minora; Ikeda, Masayuki; and Yazawa, Satoru,
4,393,380, CI. 340-805.000.
Ikeda. Masayuki, 4,393,405. CI. 358-153.000.
Yoshino, Masahito, 4,392,748, CI. 368-88.000.
Kabushiki-Kaisha Tokai-Rika-Denki-Seisakusho; See—
Arakawa, Kaneyasu; and Mizuno, Shigeo, 4,393,360, CI.
335-164.000.
Iwata, Masayosi; and Douke, Harumi, 4,393,280, CI. 200-4.000.
Yamamoto, Toshimasa; Mori, Mamoru; and Kinaga, Eiichi,
4,392,672, CI. 280-803.000.
Kabuto, Masami: See —
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4.392.385, CI. 73-861.230.
Kaeding, Warren W.. to Mobil Oil Corporation. Production of isopro-
pylbenzene. 4,393,262. CI. 585-467.000.
Kaesmacher. Jakob: See —
Schwarzenberg, Norbert; Ueberwolf, Heinz; and Kaesmacher,
Jakob, 4,392,404, CI. 83-886.000.
Kahkipuro, Matti, to Elevator GmbH. Procedure and means for moni-
toring current data in a thyristor-controlled direct current drive.
4,393,442, CI. 363-70.000.
Kahl, George D.: See —
Schmidt, Edward M.; and Kahl. George D., 4,392,412, CI. 89-
14.00D.
Kai, Junjiro: See —
Kimura, Hiroshi; and Kai, Junjiro, 4,392,971, CI. 252-70.000.
Kajiwara, Ikuo: See —
lori, Shinichi; Kajiwara, Ikuo; and Jikihara. Kazuo, 4,392,883, CI.
71-93.000.
Kajiwara, Kazuo: See—
Sasai, Mitsuo; Tomikawa, Kiyozi; and Kajiwara, Kazuo, 4,392,295,
CI. 29-509.000.
Kakimoto, Toshihiko, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Vibration absorber for
an automotive vehicle. 4,392,640, CI. 267-141.200.
Kallay, Tamas: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszio; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Kalyanaraman, Palaiyur S.: See —
Gaudiana, Russell A.; and Kalyanaraman, Palaiyur S., 4,393,194,
CI. 528-348.000.
Kamatics Corporation: See —
Wirth, Charles J., 4.392.837. CI. 464-69.000.
Kamegaya. Takeo; and Watanabe, Satoshi, to Okaya Electric Industries
Co., Ltd. DC Plasma display panel. 4,393,326, CI. 313-582.000.
Kamens, Ernest R., to Pennwalt Corporation. Reaction of t-alkylhy-
drazinium salts and ogranic peroxides to foam unsaturated polyester
resins. 4.393,148, CI. 521-93.000.
Kamohara, Eiji: See —
Takenaka, Shigeo; Kamohara, Eiji; and Seino, Kazuyuki, 4,392,914,
CI. 156-633.000.
Kanamaru, Hisanobu; Tohkairin, Akira; Tatsumi, Hideo; Asahi, Nao-
tatsu; and Haginoya. Mitsuo. to Hitachi, Ltd. Method of joining two
metal members. 4.392,296, CI. 29-520.000.
Kanazawa, Fusao: See —
Nishiyama. Masanobu; Kanazawa, Fusao; Tanaka, Hisaji; and
Nishimura, Tatsuo, 4,392,269, CI. 15-145.000.
Kanda, Shoichi; and Kawamura, Gengiro. to Nitto Chemical Industry.
Co., Ltd. Method for stabilizing an acrylamide polymer in a petro-
leum recovery process. 4,393,163, CI. 524-608.000.
Kaneda, Hiroshi; Arai, Katsuhiko; Suzuki, Akira; and Ohashi, Takashi,
to Bridgestone Tire Co., Ltd. Process of producing urethane-modi-
fied polyisocyanurate foams. 4,393,015, CI. 264-51.000.
Kaneko, Shinji, to Sony Corporation. Velocity error compensator for
time base error corrections of periodic information signals. 4,393,413,
CI. 358-326.000.
Kanno, Susumu: See —
Sugiura, Shigekata; and Kanno, Susumu, 4,393,436, CI. 361-380.000.
Kanomata, Ichiro: See —
Sakudo, Noriyuki; Tokiquchi, Katsumi; Koike, Hidemi; Kanomata.
Ichiro; and Nakashima, Humihiko, 4,393,333, CI. 315-111.810.
Kanoto, Masanobu: See —
Fujino, Hitoshi; Kanoto, Masanobu; and Ichihashi, Hiroo,
4,392,738, CI. 355-3.0TR.
Kanto Seiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Sugawara, Noboru, 4,392.836, CI. 464-52.000.
Kantz, Dieter; and Seher. Eugen, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Mono-
lithically integrated semiconductor memory with dummy and charge
equalization cells. 4.393.478. CI. 365-210.000.
Kao Soap Co. Ltd.: See —
Omori. Toshiyuki; and Abe. Kunihiro, 4,392,951, CI. 209-307.000.
Kaplan, George: See —
Gresser, Herbert D.; Kaplan, George; and Nussenbaum, Joseph,
4,392.476, CI. 125-30.00R.
Kaps, Hermann, to Howaldtwerke - Deutsche Werft Aktiengesellschaft
Hamburg und Kiel; and LGA Gastechnik GmbH. Offshore mooring
system. 4.392.447, CI. 1 14-230.000.
Karls, Michael A.: See —
Bloemers, James L.; Schick, James M.; Frazzell. Michael E.; and
Karls, Michael A., 4,392,779, CI. 415-141.000.
Kasahara, Masatoshi: See —
Matsuda, Yasumasa; Mukumoto, Kyoji; Sagae, Syoji; and
Kasahara, Masatoshi, 4,393,388, CI. 346-140.00R.
Kasahara, Yasushi: See —
Yano, Akira; Saito, Yoshitada; and Kasahara, Yasushi, 4,393,134,
CI. 435-29,000. _
Kasai, Masaji: See —
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki, Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai.
Masaji; Hirayama. Noriaki; Morimoto. Makoto; and Fukui,
Masanori, 4.393.056, CI. 424-181.000.
Katada, Katsutoshi: See —
Okumura, Taketo; Tsukahara, Taiji; Mikuriya, Takashi; Watanabe,
Hideki; and Katada, Katsutoshi, 4,392,371, CI. 72-231.000.
Katho, Eiichi: See —
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; Ohtani, Osamu; Miyake, Hidekazu;
and Fujiwara, Khosuke, 4,393,210, CI. 546-141.000.
Kato, Akira: See —
Shima, Michitsune; lida, Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami, Masaharu;
Shimoyama, Toshikazu; Takano, Genta; and Kato. Akira,
4,393,294, CI. 219-121.0EC.
Kato, Mitsuyuki: See —
Hirashima, Tsuneaki; Miyata, Toshiyuki; Yamamoto, Yoshikazu;
and Kato, Mitsuyuki, 4,393,216, CI. 548-305.000.
Kato, Motohiko: See —
Watanabe, Masazumi; Uehara, Mikio; Shimazu, Yoshimi; Ishiyama,
Jiro; and Kato, Motohiko, 4,393,083, CI. 426-15.000.
Kato, Takashi; and Hayakawa, Masaharu, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha. Temperature-responsive control device for carbu-
retor. 4,393,012, CI. 261-39.00A.
Kato, Tetsuo; and Makita, Naoki, to Tokico Ltd. Vehicle suspension
device. 4,392,638, CI. 267-64.240.
Kato, Toshio: See —
Mita, Ryuichi; Higuchi, Chojiro; Kato. Toshio; Kawashima.
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano,
Takao, 4,393,000, CI. 260-239.00E.
Kato, Yoshitaka: See—
Iwai, Kazuhiro; Enomoto, Hiroshi; Enokimoto, Akito; and Kato,
Yoshitaka, 4,392,536, CI. 180-217.000.
Katsuragawa, Kanzi: See —
Kubo, Masashige; Yoshimitsu. Mitsuaki; and Katsuragawa. Kanzi,
4,393,246, CI. 568-639.000.
Kaufhold, Wolfgang: See-
Fork, Kurt; Kaufhold, Wolfgang; Meusel, Wolfgang; and Wald-
mann, Hermann, 4,393,345, CI. 322-19.000.
Kaufmann, John C; and Lenox, Ronald S., to Armstrong World Indus-
tries, Inc. Method of uniformly dyeing high temperature heat set
polyester yam. 4,392,863, CI. 8-400.000.
Kaufmann, Karl-Ernst: See —
Durwald, Dierk; and Kaufmann, Karl-Ernst, 4,392,434, CI.
104-70.000.
Kautz, Jon F.: See —
Billman, Timothy B.; and Kautz, Jon F., 4,392,300, CI. 29-739.000.
Kaveloski, Robert J. Disposable fly trap. 4,392,322, CI. 43-118.000.
Kawamoto, Akira: See —
Watai, Haruhisa; Furuta, Hiroyuki; and Kawamoto, Akira,
4,393,120, CI. 428-457.000.
Kawamoto, Mutsumi: See —
Miki, Nobuaki; Kawamoto, Mutsumi; Shibata, Kazuhiko; Yoshida,
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki, 4,393,467, CI. 364-424.100.
Kawamura, Gengiro: See —
Kanda, Shoichi; and Kawamura, Gengiro, 4,393,163, CI.
524-608.000.
Kawasaki Steel Corporation: See —
Kodaka, Mikio; Morishita, Hitoshi; Bada, Hajime; and Sudo,
Fumio. 4,392,886, CI. 75-52.000.
Matsuzaki, Minoru; Kawauchi, Toshiei; Murakami, Tsugio; and
Kishira, Hideo, 4,392.815, CI. 431-175.000.
Okumura, Taketo; Tsukahara, Taiji; Mikuriya, Takashi; Watanabe,
Hideki; and Katada, Katsutoshi, 4,392,371, CI. 72-231.000.
Kawashima, Nobuyuki: See —
Mita, Ryuichi; Higuchi, Chojiro; Kato, Toshio; Kawashima,
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano,
Takao, 4,393,000, CI. 260-239.00E.
Kawauchi, Toshiei: -See —
Matsuzaki, Minoru; Kawauchi, Toshiei; Murakami, Tsugio; and
Kishira, Hideo, 4,392,815, CI. 431-175.000.
July 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Kear, Bernard H.: See-
Pearson, David D.; Lemkey, Frank D.; and Kear, Bernard H.,
4,392,894, CI. 148-2.000.
Keith, Dennis D.; Tengi, John P.; and Weigele, Manfred, to Hoffmann-
La Roche Inc. /J-Lactamase inhibitors. 4.393,003, CI. 260-245.20R.
Kellogg, Richard A.; May, John B.; and Johnson, Brian C, to General
Electric Company. Line protocol for communication system.
4,393,501, CI. 371-33.000.
Kemp, Merle L., Jr.: See —
Schreiner, Gary W.; Kemp, Merle L., Jr.; and Chemoff, Edward
A., 4,393,359, CI. 335-128.000.
Kenmartin Development, Inc.: See-
Grout, Kenneth M., 4,392,889, CI. 75-97.00A.
Kerr, Douglas P.: See—
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Cari E.; Kerr, Douglas P.; Ras-
mussen, David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W..
4.393.491. CI. 370-13.000.
Kessick, Michael A., to Research Council of Alberta. Alkali recycle
process for recovery of heavy oils and bitumens. 4,392,944, CI.
208-188.000.
Kessler, Gerald. Extruded fin-type weatherstrip. 4,393,109, CI.
428-119.000.
Keyes, Gary S.; Georges, Jean-Pierre J.; and DallaPiazza, Dennis G., to
General Electric Company. Subtraction fluoroscopy method and
apparatus. 4,393,402, CI. 358-111.000.
Khukhry, Sergei A.: See—
Glebov, Vladimir P.; Krivtsov, Georgy V.; Danchenkov, Jury V.;
Khukhry, Sergei A.; and Schepotin, Sergei G., 4,392,567, CI.
198-544.000.
Kihara, Shiso: See—
Shima, Michitsune; lida, Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami, Masaharu;
Shimoyama, Toshikazu; Takano, Genta; and Kato, Akira,
4,393,294, CI. 219-121.0EC.
Kihara, Yoshiro: See—
Masuzawa, Sigeaki; and Kihara, Yoshiro, 4,393,460, CI.
364-900.000.
Kikkoman Corporation: See—
Watanabe, Masazumi; Uehara, Mikio; Shimazu, Yoshimi; Ishiyama,
Jiro; and Kato, Motohiko, 4,393,083, CI. 426-15.000.
Kikuchi, Katsuaki: See-
Ida, Michiaki; Hagiwara, Noriaki; Yamago, Naoyoshi; Yoshioka,
Masahiro; and Kikuchi, Katsuaki, 4,392,751, CI. 384-99.000.
Kim, Hueng T.; and Nehmey, Sam D., to B. F. Goodrich Company,
The. Apparatus and method for making foamed resin products.
4,393,017, CI. 264-53.000.
Kimball Industries, Inc.: See-
Martin, Robert W., 4.392.381, CI. 73-663.000.
Kimball International. Inc.: See —
Fritz, Gary R., 4,392,406, CI. 84-1.260.
Kimoto, Tatsuzi: See—
Yoshinaka, Satoru; Fushida, Masao; and Kimoto, Tatsuzi,
4,393,143, CI. 501-89.000.
Kimura, Hiroshi; and Kai, Junjiro, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha. Heat storage material. 4,392,971. CI. 252-70.000.
Kimura, Kaoru; and Sugiura, Kyoji, to Toagosei Chemical Industry
Co., Ltd. 2-Cyanoacrylate adhesive composition. 4,393,183, CI.
526-245.000.
Kimura, Kenji, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Automatic focus control
system for video camera with improved position detecting apparatus.
4,392,726, CI. 354-25.000.
Kimura, Kenji, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Motor apparatus.
4,393,339, CI. 318-254.000.
Kimura, Kenji, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Focusing apparatus for
image pickup device. 4,393,409, CI. 358-227.000.
Kimura, Kenji, to Olympus Optical Company Limited. Time base error
correction system. 4,393,418, CI. 360-22.000.
Kinaga, Eiichi: See —
Yamamoto, Toshimasa; Mori, Mamoru; and Kinaga, Eiichi,
4,392,672, CI. 280-803.000.
Kinoshita, Yoshio: See —
Ohta, Teruto; and Kinoshita, Yoshio, 4,392,926, CI. 204-67.000.
Kinsey, Brian D.; and Smock, Steven W., to Emhart Industries, Inc.
Method and means controlling defrost cycles of a cooling unit.
4,392,357, Q. 62-153.000.
Kirchmayr, Rudolf: See —
Bemer, Godwin; and Kirchmayr, Rudolf, 4,393,185, CI. 528-27.000.
Kimer, Kuno: See —
Grunwald, Werner; Zehender, Ernst; Friese, Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz, Jurgen; Neu, Hans; Kirner, Kuno; and Schumacher,
Bemd, 4,393,282. CI. 200-19.00R.
Kishi, Tomomi: See —
Inoue, Nobuyoshi; and Kishi. Tomomi, 4,393,293, CI. 219-90.000.
Kishira, Hideo: See—
Matsuzaki, Minoru; Kawauchi, Toshiei; Murakami, Tsugio; and
Kishira. Hideo, 4,392.815, CI. 431-175.000.
Kislik, Mikhail I.: See—
Buryakov. Viktor P.; Ivanov, Gennady M.; Kislik, Mikhail I.;
Kurgansky, Pavel M.; Shmotkin, Mark B.; and Eikhenvald,
Eduard V., 4,392,551, CI. 184-7.00D.
Kiss, Pal: See—
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszio; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Kita, Toshio, to Fujikin International, Inc. Electromagnetic valve.
4,392,634, CI. 251-129.000.
Kitagawa, Norihisa; and Iwamoto. Eisaburo. to Texas Instruments
Incorporated. Non-volatile semiconductor memory and the testing
method for the same. 4.393.475. CI. 365-201.000.
Kitagawa, Shuzi: See —
Shikano, Michio; and Kitagawa, Shuzi, 4,392,799, CI. 418-169.000.
Kitamura, Takashi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Beam recording appa-
ratus effecting the recording by a plurality of beams. 4.393,387. CI.
346-108.000.
Kitamura. Yoichi; and Hotta. Hisashi, to Toyo Seikan Kaisha Limited.
Retortable bonded can. 4.392.582. CI. 220-75.000.
Kitamura, Yukio: See —
Yakushiji. Satoshi; Yamamoto, Atsushi; Kitamura, Yukio; and
Yoshioka, Nobuo, 4,392,286, CI. 28-289.000.
Kitchen, James A.; See —
Cochrane, Peter; and Kitchen, James A., 4.393.279. CI. 179-
175.31R.
Kiwi Coders Corporation: See —
Siegal, Burton L., 4.392,430, CI. 101-381.000.
Kizara, Masao; See—
Okuma, Kiwamu; Haga. Tsunehiro; Kizara. Masao; Otaki. Keiji;
and Hirai. Ayahiro. 4,392,878, CI. 65-6.000.
Klein, Hermann: See—
Lehr. Klaus; Heymer, Gero; May, Christian; and Klein, Hermann,
4.392.962, CI. 210-688.000.
Klein, Lutz: See—
Dobrusskin, Alexander; Klein, Lutz; and Woizan, Gunter,
4,393,331, CI. 313-489.000.
Klein, Theodore H.. to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated.
Fabrication of conductor-clad composites using molding compounds
and techniques. 4,393.111, CI. 428-195.000.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG: See—
Brachthauser. Kunibert; and Herchenbach, Horst, 4.392,822, CI.
432-106.000.
Klosa, Joseph. Production of nonhygroscopic salts of 4-hydroxybutyric
acid. 4.393,236, CI. 562-579.000.
Kluver, Horst: See-
Perl, Horst; Nussbaumer, Dietmar; Kluver, Horst; and Beer, Hans,
4.392.963, CI. 210-692.000.
Kmita, Anatoly M.: See—
Bagdasarian. Alexandr S.; Gulyaev. Jury V.; Fedorets, Vladimir
N.; and Kmita. Anatoly M.. 4,393.321. CI. 31O-313.0OB.
Knapp, George W.; and Spaulding, Bernard B.. to NCR Corporation.
Chip topography for integrated circuit communication controller.
4,393,464. CI. 364-900.000.
Knapp. Maynard K.: See-
Cray. Edgar R.; Davis. Russell R.; Knapp. Maynard K.; Richards,
Glenn L.; Root, Bernard H., and Woodruff, William W.,
4.393,495, CI. 370-56.000.
Knauf, Walter: See—
Ramdohr, Detlef; Knauf, Walter; Brensing, Karl-Heinz; and Kum-
merling, Rolf, 4.392,369. CI. 72-96.000.
Kneer. Franz, to Gebruder Weiss KG. Process for composting decay-
ing material of organic waste and/or sewage sludge in two processing
steps. 4.392.881, CI. 71-9.000.
Knetsch, Manfred; and Romann, Peter, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Flow
rate meter. 4,392,386, CI. 73-861.760.
Knight. Lindsay C; and Cottis. Robert A., to Australasian Training
Aids Pfy. Ltd. Target comprising a resilient material coated with
thermoluminescent material. 4,392,652, CI. 273-358.000.
Knight, Richard W., Jr.: See—
Dobson, Jesse C; and Knight, Richard W., Jr., 4,392,988, CI.
252-455.00R.
Knowles, Barbara B.; and Aden, David P., to Wistar Institute of Anat-
omy and Biology, The. Human hepatoma derived cell line, process
for preparation thereof, and uses therefor. 4.393.133. CI. 435-6.000.
Kobashi, Mamoru; and Itoh. Hiroshi. to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Method and apparatus for controlling the idling speed of
an engine. 4,392.468. CI. 123-339.000.
Kobayashi, Masaaki; Takeuchi. Akihiro; and Fujisawa. Kiyoji. to Mat-
sushita Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Tracking system. 4,393,417. CI.
360-10.300.
Kobayashi, Masaaki: See —
Takeuchi, Akihiro; Kobayashi, Masaaki; and Fujisawa, Kiyoji,
4,393,416, CI. 360-10.200.
Kobayashi, Masaharu: See —
Arai, Takao; Hoshino, Takashi; and Kobayashi, Masaharu,
4.393,419, CI. 360-37.100.
Kobayashi, Yoshinari: See —
Nishiyama, Masashi; Kobayashi, Yoshinari; Tokura, Seiichi; and
Nishi, Norio, 4,392,916, CI. 162-157.100.
Koch, Gary: See—
Feldman, Stanley; and Koch, Gary, 4,393,275, CI. 179-l.OVL.
Kodaka, Mikio; MorishiU. Hitoshi; Bada. Hajime; and Sudo, Fumio, to
Kawasaki Steel Corporation. Method of recovering CO-rich exhaust
gas in refining of meUl. 4.392.886. CI. 75-52.000.
Kodama. Yutaka: See —
Jinnai, Koichiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; and
Kodama, Yutaka, 4,393,385, CI. 346-75.000.
Koenig & Bauer AG: See —
Wieland, Erich G., 4,392,427, CI. 101-365.000.
Wieland, Erich G., 4,392,428, CI. 101-365.000.
Wieland, Erich G., 4.392,431. CI. 101-426.000.
Koenig, Herbert G., Jr.: See-
Allen, Louis B., Jr.; Koenig, Herbert G., Jr.; Stacy. Robert A.; and
Meyer, Danny D., 4,393,393, CI. 357-81.000.
Koenig, Robert H. Solar collector means. 4,392,483, CI. 126-450.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Kohler, Norbert: See—
Dawans, Francois; Binet, Daniel; Kohler, Norbert; and Dang Vu,
Quang. 4.393,151, CI. 523-130.000.
Kohsaka, Hiroji: See —
Ishida, Kozo; and Kohsaka, Hiroji. 4,393,304, CI. 250-343.000.
Koike, Hidemi: See —
Sakudo. Noriyuki; Tokiquchi. Katsumi; Koike. Hidemi; Kanomata,
Ichiro; and Nakashima. Humihiko. 4,393,333, CI. 315-111.810.
Koine, Richard, to Rheinmetall GmbH. Ammunition belt. 4,392,414, CI.
89-35.00R.
Kojima, Chiaki; Hasegawa, Kayoko; and Miyahara, Kosuke, to Sony
Corporation. Method for manufacturing in-line hologram lens.
4,393,126, CI. 430-2.000.
Kollar. John, to Redox Technologies, Inc. Process for producing ethyl-
ene glycol. 4,393,252, CI. 568-852.000. _
Komatsu. Yasuhiro: See —
Tahara. Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro;
Kubota. Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4,393,209, CI.
544-404.000.
Komatsu, Yukihiko: See —
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,267,
CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi. 4.392.S(>S.
CI. 134-46.000.
Komet Stahlhalter- und Werkzeugfabrik Robert Breuning GmbH:
Eckle, Otto. 4.392,761, CI. 408-59.000.
Komiya, Shigeo: See —
Tarumi, Niro; Komiya, Shigeo; and Sugimura, Mitsuo. 4.393.184.
CI. 526-261.000.
Kondo. Nobuo; Naganoma. Masanori; Hibi. Hitoshi; Fujii. Tetsuo; and
Suzuki, Kunihiko, to Nippondenso Co.. Ltd. Method and system for
forecasting and warning on automotive abnormalities. 4.393,365. CI.
340-57,000.
Konheim. Alan G.; Matyas. Stephen M.; and Meyer, Carl H., to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation. Method and apparatus
incorporating a one-way sequence for transaction and identity verifi-
cation. 4,393,269. CI. 178-22.080.
Konishi. Keizo. to Tokai Rubber Industries Ltd. Damper suppori for
engine mounts. 4,392,639. CI. 267-140.100.
Konrad, Rolf: See—
Metzger. Adolf; Konrad. Rolf; and Graser. Reinhold, 4,393.033. CI.
423-388.000.
Korbonits, Dezso: See —
Palosi, Endre: Heja, Gergely; Korbonits. Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda. Ida; Szabo. Gabor; Kallay. Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor. Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Korf-Stahl AG: See-
Weber. Ralph; Rollinger. Bemt; Nagl. Michael; and Rinner. Bern-
hard. 4.392.637, CI. 266-265.000.
Kotani, Sumihisa: See —
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama. Toru;
Takahashi. Kazue; Watanabe. Michihiro; and Kotani. Sumihisa,
4,392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Koulbanis, Constantin; Zabotto. Arlette; Griat. Jacqueline; and Char-
rier, Jean, to Societe Anonyme dite L'Oreal. Solutions containing at
least one essential fatty acid and vegetable oil, and cosmetic composi-
tions containing these solutions. 4,393,043. CI. 424-59.000.
Kousens. William L. Drawer stop. 4.392.697, CI. 312-348.000.
Koyama, Hiroyasu: See —
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro;
Kubota, Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4,393,209, CI.
544-404.000.
Koyama, Yoshiyuki: See—
Makabe, Osamu; Murai, Yasushi; Okonogi. Tuneo; Onodera,
Masahiro; Koyama. Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida. Takashi. 4,393,058,
CI. 424-246.000.
Kraemer. John F.: See —
Seeney. Charles E.; Kraemer. John F.; and Vamum. Nancy C,
4.393,152. CI. 523-139.000.
Krahn. Friedrich: See—
Bruggendieck. Siegfried; Nolting. Karl-Heinz; Krahn, Friedrich;
and Olejak, Gerhard, 4,392,714, CI. 350-96.230.
Kratochvil, Jiri: See —
Ho. Nelson; and Kratochvil, Jiri, 4,393,130, CI. 430-313.000.
Kraus, Georg: See —
Greschner, Johann; Kraus, Georg; and Schmid, Gerhard E.,
4,393.127. CI. 430-5.000.
Kraus. Hans-Joachim: See —
Hummerich. Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger. Franz; Immel.
Guenther; Kraus. Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-Clemens,
4.393.207. CI. 544-196.000.
Kraus, Joseph S.: See —
Feldman. Leonard C; Kraus. Joseph S.; Tolk. Norman H.; Traum
Morton M.; and Tully. John C. 4.393,311. CI. 250-459.100.
Kraus, Menahem A.; Frommer, Moshe A.; Nemas. Mara; and Gutman,
Rodika, to A. T. Ramot Plastics. Ltd. Process for the removal of urea
from aqueous solutions. 4.392.960. CI. 210-651.000.
Krauthausen, Edmund: See —
Uhrhan. Paul; and Krauthausen, Edmund, 4,393,206, CI.
544-51.000.
Kreeley, Bruce K., to Singer Company, The. Relief valve. 4,392,512.
CI. 137-496.000.
Kreisman. Wallace S.. to Spire Corporation. Method of fabricating a
thermal pane window and product. 4.393.105. CI. 428-34.000.
Kresner. Stanley. Adhesive bandage material. 4.393.150. CI.
523-111.000.
Kriechbaum, Karl: See —
Mittelbach. Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss. Werner; Hoffmann.
Dietrich; Siebrecht. Gunter; Kriechbaum. Karl; and Rapp. Gun-
ter. 4,393.290. CI. 200-148.00A.
Krishnakumar. Suppayan M.: See —
Pushee. Joan C; Harry. leuan L.; Beck. Martin H.; and Krishnaku-
mar. Suppayan M., 4,392.804. CI. 425-174.80E.
Krivtsov, Georgy V.: See —
Glebov. Vladimir P.; Krivtsov. Georgy V.; Danchenkov. Jury V.;
Khukhry, Sergei A.; and Schepotin, Sergei G., 4,392,567, CI.
198-544.000.
Kroeger. James K.: See—
Berting. John P.; and Kroeger. James K., 4,393,379, CI.
340-784.000.
Krupa, Andrew S.: See —
Velenyi, Louis J.; Dolhyj, Serge R.; and Krupa, Andrew S.,
4,393,260, CI. 585-357.000.
Kruyer, Jan. Conditioning drum for slurries and emulsions. 4,392,949,
CI. 209-5.000.
Krzeptowski, Andrzej J., to GTE Automatic Electric Incorporated.
Apparatus separating hybrid substrate. 4,392,290, CI. 29-239.000.
KSD Industries. Inc.: See —
Finkel. Abram R.. 4.392.272. CI. 16-95.00R.
Kubik. Klaus: See—
Anstotz. Helmut; Kubik. Klaus; and Paulussen. Heinz. 4.392,288.
CI. 29-116.0AD.
Kubis, Charles S.; and Walter, John, to Continental Can Company. Inc.
Necked-in container body and apparatus for and method of forming
same. 4,392.764. CI. 413-69.000.
Kubo. Masashige; Yoshimitsu. Mitsuaki; and Katsuragawa, Kanzi. to
Toyo Soda Manufacturing Co.. Ltd. Process for brominating side
chain of m-phenoxytoluene. 4.393.246. CI. 568-639.000.
Kubota. Reiko: See—
Tahara. Yoshiyuki; Koyama. Hiroyasu; Komatsu. Yasuhiro;
Kubota. Reiko; and Takahashi. Toshihiro. 4,393.209. CI.
544-404.000.
Kuehn. Andrew. Ill; and Hoefs, Edwin G., to Comact Pump Corpora-
tion. Liquid level controller. 4.392,782, CI. 417-36.000.
Kuenemund. Friedrich L., to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Filter circuit
for electric waves. 4,393,356, CI. 333-165.000.
Kueny, Michel: See —
Gauvain, Roger; and Kueny. Michel. 4.392,276. CI. 19-97.000.
Kuhlthau. Hans-Peter, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. One pot diazotiza-
tion. coupling and quatemization of aminotriazoles. 4.392.998. CI.
26O-146.0OR.
Kumada. Akio; Ihochi. Takahiko; Homma, Makoto; and Tanaka, Masa-
shi, to Hitachi. Ltd. Display device structure. 4,392,747, CI.
368-88.000.
Kume, Toyohiko: See —
Saito, Junichi; and Kume, Toyohiko. 4.392.929. CI. 204-158.0HA.
Kumiai Chemical Industry Co. Ltd.: See —
lori, Shinichi; Kajiwara, Ikuo; and Jikihara. Kazuo. 4.392,883. CI.
71-93.000.
Kummerling. Rolf: See —
Ramdohr. Detlef; Knauf. Walter; Brensing, Kari-Heinz; and Kum-
merling, Rolf. 4.392.369, CI. 72-96.000.
Kunze. Dieter, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Circuit arrangement for the
generation of a sawtooth voltage. 4.393.314, CI. 307-228.000.
Kuramoto. Takashi: See —
Miyashita. Akira; Okada. Kenzo; and Kuramoto. Takashi.
4,393.200. CI. 536-18.100.
Kurgansky. Pavel M.: See —
Buryakov. Viktor P.; Ivanov. Gennady M.; Kislik. Mikhail I.;
Kurgansky, Pavel M.; Shmotkin, Mark B.; and Eikhenvald,
Eduard V.. 4.392.551. CI. 184-7.00D.
Kurita. Kenji: See —
Inuzuka, Tsuneki; Murakami, Koichi; Kurita, Kenji; and Sakamaki.
Hisashi. 4.392.741. CI. 355-14.00R.
Kushima. Mamoru: See —
Sasagawa, Masaru; Umeda, Tatsuo; and Kushima. Mamoru.
4.392,400. CI. 83-185.000.
Kusters, Eduard: See —
Anstotz. Helmut; Kubik. Klaus; and Paulussen. Heinz, 4,392,288,
CI. 29-116.0AD.
Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki. Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai,
Masaji; Hirayama, Noriaki; Morimoto. Makoto; and Fukui.
Masanori. 4,393,056. CI. 424-181.000.
Kyser. Edmond L.. to System Industries Inc. Ink printhead droplet
ejecting technique. 4,393.384. CI. 346-1.100.
L.B. (Plastics) Limited: See—
Litchfield. Leon G.; and Hardy, Terence, 4,392,696, CI. 312-
330.00R.
La Telemecanique Electrique: See —
Hardouin. Pierre. 4,392,677, CI. 285-137.00R.
Laakmann, Katherine D.: See —
Laakmann, Peter; and Laakmann, Katherine D.. 4,393,506. CI.
372-59.000.
Laakmann, Peter; and Laakmann, Katherine D., to Walwel, Inc.
Sealed-off RF excited CO2 lasers and method of manufacturing such
lasers. 4,393,506. CI. 372-59.000.
July 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
LaBaw, Glenn D.: See—
Pomper. Seymour; and LaBaw, Glenn D.. 4.393.084. CI.
426-19.000.
Laboftna. S.A.: See —
Bracke, William J. I.; and Lanza. Emmanuel. 4,393.171, CI.
525-309.000.
Debande, Guy F. S.. 4.392.948. CI. 208-254.00R.
LaFever. Clifford E.; and Peck, John H.. to United States of America.
Army. Machine gun ammunition loading system. 4.392.407. CI. 89-
33.0BB
La Force. Jean, to Stringer. Carl; Stringer Oil & Gas Co.; La Force.
Jean; and Stringer. Carl Thomas, a part interest to each. Preparation
of pipe ends for solid phase welding. 4.392.603. CI. 228-196.000.
Lagus, Peter L.; Peterson. Edward W.; and Hicks, William O.. to
S-Cubed. Method and apparatus for monitoring borehole conditions.
4.392.376. CI. 73-155.000.
Laine. Norman R.; and Herrera. Jose E.. to W. R. Grace & Co. Alumina
spheroids with controlled small particle size and a process for pro-
ducing them. 4.392.987. CI. 252-448.000.
L'Air Liquide Societe Anonyme pour I'Etude et I'Exploitation des
Procedes: See —
Tourdot. Jacques; and Carron. Henry, 4.392.975. CI. 252-99.000.
Lambrech, Matthew A., to Energy Research Corporation. Fuel cell
temperature control assembly. 4,393,123, CI. 429-24.000.
Lammers, Gerard C: See —
Allen. John K.; and Lammers. Gerard C. 4.393.264. CI.
585-469.000.
Landa. Benzion, to Savin Corporation. Liquid developer copier clean-
ing system incorporating resilient closed-cell cleaning roller.
4.392.742. CI. 355-15.000.
Lang. Linton W.; and Stetson. Robert L., to Pacific Nuclear Fuels. Inc.
Reactor for production of U-233. 4,393,510, CI. 376-172.000.
Langbein, Adolf; Merz. Herbert; Sobotta. Rainer; Bauer. Rudolf; Jen-
newein, Hans M.; and Mierau, Joachim, to C. H. Boehringer Sohn.
8-Arylalkyl-3-phenyl-3-nortropanols and salts thereof 4.393.069. CI.
424-265.000.
Langenstein, Max. Supply apparatus to provide electricity to motor-
driven appliances, especially lawn edge trimmers, driven with elec-
tric motors. 4.392,661, CI. 280-12.00M.
Lanko, Inc.: See—
Grosse, Aristid V.; and Cherry, Norman H., 4,392.865. CI.
44-51.000.
Lanter. Kent J.: See —
Sullins. Richard D.; and Lanter, Kent J., 4,393,087, CI. 426-74.000.
Lanza, Emmanuel: See —
Bracke. William J. I.; and Lanza. Emmanuel, 4,393.171. CI.
525-309.000.
Laskoski, Leonard S.: See—
Voipe, Gerald T.; Laskoski, Leonard S.; Amodeo, Ralph J.; Swan-
son, William J.; and Gottesman, Jerome D.. 4.393.352, CI.
329-50.000.
Lauf. Robert J.; and Morgan. Chester S.. to United States of America.
Energy. Solid electrolytes strengthened by metal dispersions.
4.393.124, CI. 429-104.000.
Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd.: See—
Sentoku. Hideshi. 4.392.504, CI. 133-l.OOA.
LaVia, Anthony L.: See —
Pawelchak, John M.; Chen. James L.; Cryan. John G.; and LaVia,
Anthony L., 4,393,080, CI. 428-355.000.
Lawrence, Randall K.: See —
Buckhouse, Norman O.; Stevens, Aaron A.; and Lawrence, Ran-
dall K.. 4,392,543, CI. 180-272.000.
Lazare Kaplan & Sons, Inc.: See —
Gresser, Herbert D.; Kaplan, George; and Nussenbaum, Joseph,
4,392,476. CI. 125-30.00R.
Le Simplex: See —
Juy. Henri. 4.392.841. CI. 474-156.000.
LeBaron, Steven M.. to Bush Universal, Inc. Molded shanks. 4.392.266.
CI. 12-146.00S.
le Bars, Jean F.: See —
Beck, Jean L.; le Bars. Jean F.; Emmanuelli. Yves A.; and Bargues.
Denis. 4,393,408. CI. 358-205.000.
Ledniczky, Laszlo: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo. Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Lee, Hyun C, to Gold Star Company, Ltd. Serial printing apparatus.
4.392.756, CI. 400-144.200.
Lee, John D.: See-
Anderson. James E.; Lee. John D.; and Livermore. Frederick C,
4,393.433. CI. 361-119.000.
Lee. John M.; and Bauman, William C. to Dow Chemical Co.. The.
Magnesium aluminate anion exchangers. 4.392.961. CI. 210-679.000.
Lee. John M.; and Bauman. William C. to Dow Chemical Co. Magne-
sium aluminate anion exchangers. 4.392.979, CI. 252-184.000.
Lee, John M.; and Bauman, William C, to Dow Chemical Co., The.
Transition metal aluminates. 4,392,980, CI. 252-184.000.
Lefferts, Johannes, to Steg Siebtechnik GmbH. Method for producing
a sieve belt of thermosettable synthetic resin helices for a papermak-
ing machine. 4,392.902, CI. 156-161.000.
Legras, Roger M. H.; Biebuyck. Jean-Jacques E. R. G.; and Mercier.
Jean P., to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC. Fast crystallizing
polyester compositions. 4,393.178. CI. 525-437.000.
Lehmann. Klaus, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Circuit for modifying the
gradation of pictures produced by video signals. 4.393.406. CI.
358-160.000.
Lehnert. Stanley E., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Article of manufac-
ture for projection television system. 4,393,329, CI. 313-477.00R.
Lehr. Klaus; Heymer, Gero; May, Christian; and Klein. Hermann, to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for separating metals from
aqueous solutions. 4,392,962, CI. 210-688.000.
Leifeld, Ferdinand; Marx, Hans-Jurgen; and Scheuermann, Rolf, to
Trutzschler GmbH & Co. KG. Apparatus for supporting fiber bales.
4.392.275. CI. 19-81.000.
Leithauser, Horst: See —
Rigler, Josef K.; Wienhofer, Ekkehard; Leithauser, Horst; and
Trukenbrod, Karl, 4,393,146, CI. 521-56.000.
Leland Stanford Junior University. The Board of Trustees of the: See —
Little, William A.. 4.392,362, CI. 62-514.00R.
Lemkey, Frank D.: See —
Pearson, David D.; Lemkey, Frank D.; and Kear, Bernard H.,
4,392,894, CI. 148-2.000.
Lenox. Ronald S.: See —
Hoyle. Charles E.; and Lenox. Ronald S.. 4,393.006. CI.
260-349.000.
Kaufmann. John C; and Lenox. Ronald S.. 4.392.863. CI 8-400.000.
Leonard. John J.: See —
Sun, Msiang-ning; Leonard, John J.; and Shalit, Harold. 4.393,038.
CI. 423-584.000.
Leonhart. Franz X. Combined lawn chair and table recliner. 4.392,685,
CI. 297-119.000.
LePage. Joseph R.. to Timex Corporation. Watchband endpicce with
capturing bead. 4.392,284, CI. 24-265.00B.
Lesher, Kenneth W., to Stanadyne, Inc. Inverted bucket tappet with
seal. 4,392.462, CI. 123-90.550.
Leveque, Jean-Luc M.; and Gras, Gilbert J., to L'Oreal. Apparatus
intended for classifying the quantity of a fatty product found on the
skin surface. 4,392,498. CI. 128-665.000.
Lever Brothers Company: See-
Cox. Roger B.; and Steer. David C, 4.393,089, CI 426-573.000.
Dehnel. Roger B.. 4,392,908, CI. 427-194.000.
Lewis. John, to Tektronix, Inc. Memory mapping system. 4,393,443, CI.
364-200.000.
Leyse. Robert H. Method of and apparatus for measuring the power
distribution in nuclear reactor cores. 4,393,025, CI. 376-247.000.
LGA Gastechnik GmbH: See—
Kaps, Hermann. 4,392,447, CI. 1 14-230.000.
Li, George S.; Jones, John F.; and Giffen, William M., Jr.. to Standard
Oil Company, The. Method for manufacturing a fiber-reinforced
thermoplastic molded article. 4.393,020, CI. 264-108.000.
Licentia Patent- Verwaltungs-GmbH: See—
Minner, Willy, 4,392.474. CI. 123-644.000.
Mittelbach. Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss, Werner; Hoffmann.
Dietrich; Siebrecht, Gunter; Kriechbaum, Karl; and Rapp, Gun-
ter, 4,393,290, CI. 200-148.00A.
Lichtenstein, Joseph, to Whitman Medical Corporation. Vascular
puncture stabilizer fitting for facilitating withdrawal. 4,392,856. CI.
604-177.000.
Liebermann. Leonard N., to Tif Instruments. Inc. Transducer coupling
apparatus for inhomogeneity detector. 4.392.374. CI. 73-19.000.
Lilja. Launo L.; and Makitalo, Valto J., to Outokumpu Oy. Method and
apparatus for forming a directioned suspension spray of a pulverous
material and a reaction gas. 4.392.885. CI. 75-26.000.
Lillie. Terrance L.: See —
Couper. Robert A.; Frediani, John K.; and Lillie, Terrance L.,
4.393,377, CI. 340-731.000.
Lindner, Christian; Ott, Karl-Heinz; and Pischtschan, Alfred, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. High-notched-impact core-shell polymers having
improved weather resistance. 4.393,172. CI. 525-310.000.
Lindorfer. Walter: See —
Wagner, Fritz; Lindorfer, Walter; Jahn-Held. Wilhelm; and Schulz.
Walther, 4.392,892, CI 134-25.100.
Lindtveit. Herbert E., to Sid Harvey, Inc. Valve controlled reversible
pump with anticavitation means. 4,392,796, CI. 418-32.000.
Linecker, Josef Shoe for use with a cross-country ski. 4,392.313. CI.
36-117.000.
Linnenbrink, Thomas E.; and Gradl. David A., to Q-Dot. Inc. High
speed transient recorder systems. 4.393.357. CI. 333-165.000.
Lipowski. Stanley A.; and Miskel. John J., Jr., to Diamond Shamrock
Corporation. Amphoteric water-in-oil self-inverting polymer emul-
sion. 4,392.917, CI. 162-168.100.
Lischke, Burkhard: See-
Anger, Klaus; Frosien, Juergen; Lischke, Burkhard; Plies, Erich;
and Tonar, Klaus, 4.393,308, CI. 250-396.00R.
Litchfield. Leon G.; and Hardy, Terence, to LB. (Plastics) Limited.
Drawers. 4.392.696. CI. 312-330.00R.
Little, Roger G., lo Spire Corporation. Process of making thin film high
efficiency solar cells. 4,392,297, CI. 29-572.000.
Little, William A., to Leland Stanford Junior University, The Board of
Trustees of the. Micro miniature refrigerators. 4.392.362, CI. 62-
514.0OR.
Livermore. Frederick C: See-
Anderson. James E.; Lee. John D.; and Livermore. Fredenck C,
4,393.433, CI. 361-119.000.
Locher & Cie. AG: See—
Bertschinger. Hans; and Scherler. Alfred. 4.392,954, CI.
210-195.300.
Loew, Peter: See —
Priester. Martin; and Loew, Peter, 4.393,007. CI. 260-378.000.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Lohr & Bromkamp GmbH: See —
Aucktor. Erich. 4.392,839, CI. 464-183.000.
Welschof, Hans-Heinrich; and Damian, Karl, 4,392,838, CI.
464-175.000.
Lohri, Bruno, to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Carotenoid intermediate by
an oxidation process. 4,393,243. CI. 568-344.000.
Lohstroh, Jan: See —
Hart, Comelis M.; and Lohstroh. Jan, 4,393.471. CI. 365-154.000.
Lomnes, Randy K.: See —
Burbank, Max B.; Lomnes, Randy K.; Vrba. Jiri; and Fife, Alistair
A., 4.393,349. CI. 324-248.000.
Looper, Norman G., to Action Instruments Co. Inc. Common mode
voltage rejection circuit. 4,393,347, CI. 324-126.000.
Lopapa, Alberto F.; and Hall, Theodore D., to Lopapa Institute. Inc.
In-vitro diagnostic method for detection of acetylsalicylic acid inges-
tion. 4,393,040, CI. 424-1.000.
Lopapa Institute, Inc.: See —
Lopapa, Alberto F.; and Hall, Theodore D., 4,393,040, CI.
424-1.000.
Lord Corporation: See —
Damico, Dennis J.; and Pascarella, Vincent J., 4,393,186, CI.
528-49.000.
L'Oreal: See —
Leveque, Jean-Luc M.; and Gras, Gilbert J., 4,392.498. CI.
128-665.000.
Yquel, Jean-Pierre, 4,392,384, CI. 73-830.000.
Loreck, Heinz, to ITT Industries, Inc. Method and a circuit for control-
ling the pressure in wheel brake cylinders of fluid-operated vehicular
brakes. 4,393.447, CI. 364-426.000.
Lorenz, Kurt: See —
Weber, Heinrich; Lorenz, Kurt; and Dungs, Horst, 4,392,823, CI.
432-114.000.
Louden, William G. Erasable dense paper and improved method of
manufacturing. 4,393,103, CI. 427-391.000.
Lowe, Derek: See —
Schopper, Bernd; Lowe, Derek; Reinartz, Hans-Dieter; and Tan-
dler, Peter, 4,392,691, CI. 303-6.00C.
Lowe, Derek W.; See —
Moody. Brian R.; Lowe. Duncan B.; and Lowe. Derek W..
4.392.435. CI. 104-284.000.
Lowe. Duncan B.: See —
Moody, Brian R.; Lowe, Duncan B.; and Lowe, Derek W.,
4,392,435, CI. 104-284.000.
Lowery, Sterling W. Heavy duty mobile loading structure and system.
4,392.769, CI. 414-397.000.
Lucas. Donald S.; Stone. Roger L.; and Cooper. Eugene R., to Procter
& Gamble Company, The. Catheterization. 4,392.848. CI. 604-53.000.
Lucas Industries Limited: See —
Heibel. Helmut, 4,392,558, CI. 188-72.700.
Mowbray, Dorian F.; and Jarrett, Boaz A., 4.392,466, CI.
123-299.000.
Mowbray, Dorian F., 4.392,793, CI. 417-462.000.
Weston. Paul, 4,392.502, CI. 123-342.000.
Ludlow Corporation: See —
Strieker, George O.; Teumer, Karl H.; and Groenendal, Ronald C,
4.393.117, CI. 428-352.000.
Ludman, Jacques E.: See —
Homer, Joseph L.; and Ludman. Jacques E., 4,392,709, CI.
350-3.830.
Luigi Franchi S.p.A.: See —
Ottolini, Leonardo, 4,392,319, CI. 42-69.00B.
Lumbers. Warwick J.: See —
Perisic. Milan; Lumbers. Warwick J.; and Bone. John A.. 4,392,392,
CI. 74-626.000.
Lundborg, Olle G., to AB Bofors Elektronik. Weighbridge and method
of producing it. 4,392,537, CI. 177-134.000.
Luscher, Paul E., to Varian Associates, Inc. Molecular beam converters
for vacuum coating systems. 4,392.453. CI. 1 18-726.000.
Lutzenberger, Kurt: See —
Bailey. James R.; and Lutzenberger. Kurt. 4.392.708. CI. 339-
182.00R.
Lybrand. William, to Bengal. Inc. Anti-static material and method of
making the material. 4.393.159. CI. 524-243.000.
Lybrand, William, to Bengal. Inc. Anti-static material and method of
making the material. 4.393,176, CI. 525-379.000.
Lynch, Conrad L.: See —
Tobias, Michael A.; and Lynch, Conrad L., 4,393,121, CI.
428-458.000.
Madden, William M., to United Technologies Corporation. Viol ex-
haust nozzle with veer flap extension. 4,392,615, CI. 239-265.370.
Maekawa, Hideyuki; Hiramoto. Shinji; Itaya. Kozo; Sato. Kokichi; and
Nishida, Hirotaka, to Shionogi & Co., Ltd.; and Taisei Kako Co., Ltd.
Glass vial with diagonal cut line. 4,392,577. CI. 215-32.000.
Maerz Ofenbau AG: See —
Fussl. Erwin; and Berger. Norbert. 4.392.821, CI. 432-96.000.
Magee Enterprises Ltd.: See —
Magee, S. Jim, 4,392,270, CI. 15-322.000.
Magee, S. Jim, to Magee Enterprises Ltd. Surface cleaning apparatus.
4,392.270. CI. 15-322.000.
Mahandru. Madan M.: See —
Bhaduri, Sumit; and Mahandru. Madan M.. 4,393,244, CI.
568-360.000.
Majer, Carlo D., to Rhea Vendors S.r.l. Coffee powder metering device
for coffee vending machines. 4,392,593, CI. 222-305.000.
Makabe. Osamu; Murai. Yasushi; Okonogi. Tuneo; Onodera. Masahiro;
Koyama, Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida, Takashi, to Meiji Seika Kaisha,
Ltd. Cephalosporin compounds. 4,393,058, CI. 424-246.000.
Maki, Naoki; Numata, Seiji; Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Yamamoto,
Heroe, to Hitachi, Ltd. Superconductive coil system with protecting
device. 4,393,429, CI. 361-19.000.
Maki. Yoshitaka: See —
Terao. Shinji; Shiraishi, Mitsuru; and Maki, Yoshitaka, 4,393,075,
CI. 424-304.000.
Makita, Naoki: See —
Kato, Tetsuo; and Makita, Naoki. 4.392,638. CI. 267-64.240.
Yamaguchi. Kiyoshi; and Makita. Naoki. 4.392,293, CI. 29-436.000.
Makitalo, Valto J.: See—
Lilja, Launo L.; and Makitalo, Valto J., 4,392,885, CI. 75-26.000.
Mallet, Inger V.: St-^—
Henderson, Esther G.; and Mallet. Inger V.. 4.393.045. CI.
424-95.000.
Maloney. Robert T.; and Vogt, Carl L.. to Coin Acceptors, Inc. Coin
payout assembly. 4.392.505. CI. 133-4.00A.
Mandrell. Richard J.: See —
Baker. Thomas B.; and Mandrell, Richard J., 4.392.575, CI.
213-76.000.
Mandroian, Harold. Pressure pumping and priming pump apparatus.
4.392,791, CI. 417-379.000.
Manello. Jeannette S.: See-
Rogers, Howard G.; Gaudiana, Russell A.; Manello, Jeannette S.;
and Sahatjian, Ronald A., 4,393,196, CI. 528-363.000.
Mania, Dieter: See —
Merkel, Wulf; Bormann, Dieter; Mania, Dieter; and Muschaweck,
Roman, 4,393.072. CI. 424-275.000.
Manis. Jack J.; and Highlander, Sarah K., to Upjohn Company, The.
Cloning plasmid for streptomyces. 4,393,137, CI. 435-172.000.
Maniv, Shmuel; and Westwood, William D., to Northern Telecom
Limited. Reactive deposition method and apparatus. 4,392,931, CI.
204-192.00R.
Mannesmann Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Ramdohr, Detlef; Knauf, Walter; Brensing, Karl-Heinz; and Kum-
merling, Rolf, 4,392,369, CI. 72-96.000.
Mannesmann Demag AG: See —
Durwald. Dierk; and Kaufmann, Karl-Ernst. 4.392.434, CI.
104-70.000.
Manser, Gerald E., to S R I International. Cationic polymerization.
4.393.199. CI. 528-408.000.
Mao. Mark H. K.; Miller. Larry E.; and Weeman, John M., to Procter
& Gamble Company. The. Process of preparing alkylpolysaccha-
rides. 4.393.203. CI. 536-124.000.
Marconi Company Limited, The: See —
de Neumann, Frederick B., 4,393,515, CI. 455-606.000.
Marion, Charles P.; Brent, Albert; Richter, George N.; Crouch, Wil-
liam B.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, to Texaco Inc. High
turndown pariial oxidation process. 4,392,869, CI. 48-197.00R.
Marks, David T., to Mechanical Technology Incorporation. Stirling
engine power control and motion conversion mechanism. 4,392,350,
CI. 60-518.000.
Marsan. Mario S.; and Hartwell, Edward W., to Procter & Gamble
Company, The. Absorptive device. 4.392,862, CI. 604-366.000.
Marshall, Harry L.; and Schwartz, Alan R., to GTE Products Corpora-
tion. Method of preparing a dark body phosphor. 4,393,118, CI.
428-403.000.
Marshall, Thomas G., Jr., to Bel! Telephone Laboratories, Incorpo-
rated. Digital filter bank. 4,393,456, CI. 364-724.000.
Marsico, Joseph W., Jr.: See —
Tomcufcik, Andrew S.; Wright, William B., Jr.; and Marsico,
Joseph W., Jr., 4,393,004, CI. 260-245.500.
Martin, Howard. Self-contained root canal heated condenser dental
instrument. 4,392,827, CI. 433-32.000.
Martin, Jesse J. Combustion and electric engine. 4,392,457, CI. 123-
l.OOR.
Martin, John K., Ill: See-
Whitney. Douglass G.; and Martin. John K., Ill, 4,392,847, CI.
604-118.000.
Martin, Robert P., Jr. Cab for lift truck with swing out windshield.
4,392,669. CI. 280-775.000.
Martin. Roberi W.. to Kimball Industries. Inc. Driver bar assembly.
4.392.381. CI. 73-663.000.
Martindale. Troy E.. Jr., to B. F. Goodrich Company, The. Portable
pallet apparatus. 4,392,403, CI. 83-418.000.
Maruhashi, Yoshitsugu; Tanikawa. Isao; Hirata, Sadao; Yazaki, Jinichi;
and Sakano, Kozaburo, to Toyo Seikan Kaisha Ltd. Laminated
plastic container and process for preparation thereof 4,393,106, CI.
428-35.000.
Maruishi Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See —
Inoue, Koji; Sato, Nobukatsu; and Tamura, Takashi, 4,393,219, CI.
548-534.000.
Maruta, Rikio; and Tomozawa, Atsushi, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.
Digital compandor having nonlinear companding characteristics.
4,393,367, CI. 34O-347.0DD.
Maruzen Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Miyashita, Akira; Okada, Kenzo; and Kuramoto, Takashi,
4,393,200, CI. 536-18.100.
Marx, Hans-Jurgen: See —
Leifeld, Ferdinand; Marx, Hans-Jurgen; and Scheuermann, Rolf,
4,392,275, CI. 19-81.000.
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; Walker, Harrel L.;
Bowler, Eleanor G.; and Ritchey, Charles R., to United States of
July 12, 1985
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
America, Army. Protective gel composition for wounds. 4,393,048,
CI. 424-132.000.
Mason, James V.; and Fisher, Mancil C. Safety bar. 4,392,660, CI.
280-751.000.
Mast, Paul A.: See —
Fenrick, Walter J.; Chesney, Robert H.; and Mast. Paul A.,
4,392,432, CI. 102-334.000.
Master Craft Boat Company: See-
Shirley, Robert L., 4,392,448, CI. 114-271.000.
Masuda, Toru, to Hosiden Electronics Co., Ltd. Jack with plug actu-
ated slide switch. 4.393.283. CI. 200-51.090.
Masuyama. Yoshinari. Dietary product containing glucomannan pow-
der and method for preparing. 4.393,086. CI. 426-74.000.
Masuzawa, Sigeaki; and Kihara, Yoshiro. to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha.
Simultaneous electronic translation device. 4,393,460, CI.
364-900.000.
Matsu Kyu Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Ohmori, Hiroyuki; Uchimura, Hiroshi; and Mikage, Yuzo,
4,393,281, CI. 200-16.00D.
Matsuda, Yasumasa; Mukumoto, Kyoji; Sagae, Syoji; and Kasahara,
Masatoshi, to Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd.; and Hitachi. Ltd. Liquid drop-
let projection apparatus. 4.393.388, CI. 346-140.00R.
Matsuda, Yoshio, to Yoshida Kogyo K. K. Slide fastener stringer with
vent holes. 4,392,363, CI. 66-193.000.
Matsumura, Naotake: See —
Misaki, Susumu; Suefuji, Masahiro; Mitote, Tamio; and Matsumura,
Naotake, 4,393.231, CI. 560-73.000.
Matsuo. Masami: See—
Tsuchiya. Takayoshi; and Matsuo, Masami, 4,392,664, CI.
280-276.000.
Matsuoka, Shigeru; Tokunaga, Takeshi; Yonekura, Seiji; Yamauchi,
Koji; and Suzuki, Mitsuo, to Hitachi, Ltd. Door operation control
apparatus. 4.393,342, CI. 318-467.000.
Matsusaka. Osamu, to Mitsubishi Monsanto Chemical Company. Steril-
izing process for foods by applying microwaves thereto. 4,393,088,
CI. 426-234.000.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See—
Ikushima, Hiroshi; Baba, Takaaki; Sagishima, Takayuki; and Ta-
naka, Masanobu, 4,393,400, CI. 358-92.000.
Kobayashi. Masaaki; Takeuchi. Akihiro; and Fujisawa. Kiyoji.
4.393,417, CI. 360-10.300.
Nakamura, Kenichi; Nankai, Shiro; and lijima, Takashi. 4,392,933,
CI. 204-403.000.
Ouchi, Hiromu; Nishida, Masamitsu; and Numata, Kazunori,
4,392,970, CI. 252-62.900.
Shinohara, Koichi; and Fujita, Takashi, 4,393,091, CI. 427-13.000.
Takeda, Koichi; and Sasano, Yoshiro, 4.393.449. CI. 364-474.000.
Takeuchi. Akihiro; Kobayashi. Masaaki; and Fujisawa, Kiyoji,
4.393.416. CI. 360-10.200.
Tanaka. Eiichi; Ishibasi. Noboru; and Inoue. Shojiro, 4.392.813. CI.
431-76.000.
Yokobori. Nobuyoshi; Urayama. Masashi; Okamoto, Hiroshi; and
Igarashi, Yoshiaki, 4,393,422. CI. 360-73.000.
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd.: See—
Minakuchi, Yoshikazu; Abiko, Toshio; and Inoue, Hiromitsu,
4,393,514. CI. 455-336.000.
Nakano. Kunimitsu, 4.393.287. CI. 200-144.00R.
Matsushita. Takeshi: See—
Nagai. Tamiji; and Matsushita. Takeshi, 4,393,337, CI. 315-408.000.
Matsuzaki, Minoru; Kawauchi, Toshiei; Murakami, Tsugio; and Ki-
shira, Hideo, to Kawasaki Steel Corporation. Burner for bottom fired
furnace. 4,392,815, CI. 431-175.000.
Mattel, Inc.: See —
Schwager, Frederic A., 4,392,279, CI. 24-22 l.OOR.
Mattingly, Glen R.; and Quintanares, Joseph A. Multiple outlet con-
necting means for self-contained positive pressure or demand regu-
lated breathing apparatus. 4,392,490, CI. 128-202.270.
Matulewicz, William N.: See —
Mohr, Paul H.; and Matulewicz, William N., 4,392,972, CI.
252-75.000.
Matyas, Stephen M.: See —
Konheim, Alan G.; Matyas, Stephen M.; and Meyer, Carl H.,
4,393,269, CI. 178-22.080.
Maurer, Fritz, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Preparation of 3-bromo-4-
ttuoro-benzoic acid. 4,393,232, CI. 562-419.000.
May, Christian; See —
Lehr, Klaus; Heymer, Gero; May, Christian; and Klein, Hermann,
4.392,962. CI. 210-688.000.
May. John B.: Siee-
Kellogg. Richard A.; May. John B.; and Johnson. Brian C.
4.393.501. CI. 371-33.000.
McCall. John M.: See—
DeGeeter. Melvin J.; McCall, John M.; and Teagarden. Dirk L..
4.393.065. CI. 424-251.000.
McClaflin, John R., to Boeing Company, The. Combined beam support
for landing gear. 4,392,622, CI. 244-102.00A.
McClaflin, John R.: See—
Munsen, Victor A.; and McClaflin, John R., 4,392,623, CI. 244-
102.00R.
McCoy, Reginald F.H. Television image positioning and combining
system. 4,393,394, CI. 358-22.000.
McDonald, Glen E., to United States of America, National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Method of forming oxide coatings.
4,392,920, CI. 204-37.00R.
McDonnell Douglas Corporation: See-
Allen, Louis B., Jr.; Koenig, Herbert G., Jr.; Stacy, Robert A.; and
Meyer, Danny D., 4,393,393, CI. 357-81.000.
McElroy, David J., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. EPROM and
RAM cell layout with equal pitch for use in fault tolerant memory
device or the like. 4,393,474, CI. 365-200.000.
McElroy, Marvin R.: See —
Hadfield, Frederick C; and McElroy, Marvin R., 4,392,628, CI.
248-202.100.
McEntee, Harry R.: See —
Ritzer, Alan; Hajjar, Abraham L.; McEntee, Harry R.; and Shade,
Ray W., 4,393,229, CI. 556-430.000.
McGinn, Michael, to Motorola, Inc. Crossover circuit for use in auto-
matic gain control systems. 4,393,354, CI. 330-280.000.
McGraw-Edison Company: See —
Gilker, Clyde, 4,393,431, CI. 361-97.000.
Mclntyre, James A. E. S. Crop or product carrier. 4,392,688, CI. 298-
22.0OR.
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker, Klaus;
Stephan, Rudolf; and Breuer, Hans, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft.
Transparent impact-resisunt molding matenal. 4,393,164. CI.
525-83.000.
McKeefry. Jerry L : See —
Fulk. James B.; McKeefry, Jerry L.; Schuning, George F.; and
Bradley, John J., 4,392,844, CI. 493-399.000.
McLaughlin, Ivan P.: See —
Barker, John C; and McLaughlin, Ivan P., 4,393,108, CI.
428-44.000.
McMenamin, Joseph C, to J. C. Schumacher Company. Vapor mass
now control system. 4.393,013, CI. 261-64.00B.
McQuay-Perfex Inc.: See —
Johannsen, James R., 4,392,417, CI. 98-1.500.
McWilliams, Joseph A., to Micropore International Limited. Electric
radiant heater unit for a glass ceramic top cooker. 4,393,299, CI.
219-446.000.
Mechanical Technology Incorporation: See —
Marks, David T.. 4,392,350, CI. 60-518.000.
Medtronic, Inc.: See —
Skarstad, Paul M.; Coury. Arthur J.; and Untereker, Darrel F..
4.393.125. CI. 429-105.000.
Stanton. David J.. 4.392.496. CI. I28-423.00W.
Mehrotra. Gopi N.. to RCA Corporation. Audio processor for single,
channel, matrixed two-channel and un-matrixed two-channel signals.
4.393.489. CI. 369-86.000.
Meier, Karl-Heinz: See—
Angersbach, Wolfgang; and Meier, Karl-Heinz, 4,393,343, CI.
318-640.000.
Meijer, Johan F. R., to N.K.F. Groep B.V. Cable stranding apparatus
and method of operating it. 4,392,342, CI. 57-264.000.
Meiji Seika Kaisha, Ltd.: See —
Makabe, Osamu; Murai, Yasushi; Okonogi, Tuneo; Onodera.
Masahiro; Koyama. Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida. Takashi. 4,393.058.
CI. 424-246.000.
Mellott, Lex A., to JLG Industries Inc. Industnal crane with rotary
electrical connector. 4.392,698. CI. 339-10.000.
Melocik. Kurt B., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Control for dead engine
lower. 4,392,415, CI. 91-461.000.
Mentzel, Werner: See —
Blank, Heinz U.; Gabel, Eike; Goldschmitt, Ernst; and Mentzel,
Werner, 4,393,234, CI. 562-475.000.
Mercier, Jean P.: See —
Legras, Roger M. H.; Biebuyck, Jean-Jacques E. R. G.; and Mer-
cier, Jean P., 4,393,178, CI. 525-437.000.
Merck & Co., Inc.: See —
Baldwin, John J.; and Ponticello, Gerald S., 4.393.212. CI.
546-286.000.
Baylis. Francis P.; and Smith. Gary E., 4,393,046, CI. 424-117.000.
Sletzinger, Meyer, 4,393,242, CI. 568-322.000.
Merenkov, Jury F.; Egorov, Vladimir D.; Stepanov, Valentin G.; and
Popkov, Igor V. Electromagnetic induction pump. 4.392.786. CI.
417-50.000.
Merger. Franz: See —
Broecker, Franz J.; Hupfer. Leopold; Merger. Franz; Miesen.
Ernest; Paetsch, Juergen; and Zirker, Guenter, 4,393,251, CI.
568-811.000.
Hummerich, Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger, Franz; Immel.
Guenther; Kraus, Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-Clemens,
4,393,207, CI. 544-196.000.
Merisinter S.p.A.: See —
Apuzzo, Gennaro, 4,392,800, CI. 425-78.000.
Merkel, George; and Scharf. William D.. to United States of America.
Army. Source-region electromagnetic pulse simulator. 4.393.509. CI.
376-156.000.
Merkel. Wulf; Bormann. Dieter; Mania. Dieter; and Muschaweck.
Roman, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Thienylbenzoic acid deriva-
tives. 4.393.072. CI. 424-275.000.
Merritt. Robert C; and Terwilliger. Gerald L.. to Eaton Corporation.
Induction system for supercharged engine. 4.392.472. CI. 123-564.000.
Merz. Herbert: See —
Langbein. Adolf; Merz. Herbert; Sobotta. Rainer; Bauer. Rudolf;
Jennewein. Hans M.; and Mierau. Joachim. 4,393,069, CI.
424-265.000.
Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit beschraenkter Haft-
ung: See —
Bschorr. Oskar. 4.392.522. CI. 152-341.000.
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12. 1983
Meullurgie Hoboken-Overpelt: See—
Dompas. John M. A.. 4.393,296. CI. 219-121.0PC.
Viellefont, Jean F.; and Dierckxsens. Robert P. L., 4,392,934. CI.
204-198.000.
Mettler. Eduard, to Revue Thommen AG. Clock with rotatable ring.
4.392,750, CI. 368-228.000.
Metz, Joseph R.; and Bames, Michael F., to Norco, Inc. Releasable
fastener. 4,392,281, CI. 24-230.50R.
Metzger, Adolf; Konrad, Rolf; and Graser, Reinhold, to Hoechst Ak-
tiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation of ammonium sulfamate.
4,393,033. CI. 423-388.000.
Metzger, Karl G.: See—
Sudler, Peter; Metzger, Karl G.; Voss, Eckart; Petersen, Uwe; and
Zeiler. Hans- Joachim, 4,393,051, CI. 424-180.000.
Meusel, Wolfgang: See —
Fork, Kurt; Kaufhold, Wolfgang; Meusel, Wolfgang; and Wald-
mann, Hermann, 4,393,345, CI. 322-19.000.
Meyer, Carl H.: See—
Konheim, Alan G.; Matyas, Stephen M.; and Meyer, Carl H.,
4,393,269, CI. 178-22.080.
Meyer, Danny D.: See —
Allen, Louis B., Jr.; Koenig, Herbert G., Jr.; Stacy, Robert A.; and
Meyer, Danny D., 4,393,393, CI. 357-81.000.
Meyer, Matthew. Apparatus for manufacturing cheese product.
4,392,801, CI. 425-71.000.
Meyers, Gary W.: See —
Reed, Russell, Jr.; Burdette, George W.; Meyers, Gary W.; and
Vuono, William R., 4,392,895, CI. 149-19.300.
Meyers, Theodore F., to Hobart Corporation. Dishwasher soil collect-
ing circuit. 4,392,891, CI. 134-10000.
Miard, Pierre V. L., to Compagnie Internationale pour I'lnformatique
Cii-Honeywell Bull (Societe Anonyme). Method and device for the
counting and management of asynchronous events emitted by periph-
eral devices in a data processing system. 4,393,470, CI. 364-200.000.
Michaeison, Robert C; and Austin, Richard G., to Exxon Research &
Engineering Co. Hydroxylation of olefins. 4,393,253, CI. 568-860.000.
Michaud, Franck, to Charles Hoffert of America. Inc. Manufacture of
jewelry by casting with preset gems. 4,392,289, CI. 29-160.600.
Michio, Abe; and Naoyuki, Maeda, to Tokai TRW & Co., Ltd. Power
steering device for a vehicle. 4,392,540, CI. 180-142.000.
Mickelsen, Reid A.; and Chen, Wen S., to Boeing Company, The.
Apparatus for forming thin-film heterojunction solar cells employing
materials selected from the class of I-III-VI2 chalcopyrite com-
pounds. 4,392,451, CI. 118-690.000.
Microbiochemical Research Foundation: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Takeuchi, Tomio; and Nakano, Hiroshi,
4,393,047, CI. 424-118.000.
Micropore International Limited: See —
Mc Williams, Joseph A.. 4,393,299, CI. 219-446.000.
Middleton, William J., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Fluorinated carbamate insecticides. 4,393,074, CI. 424-285.000.
Mierau, Joachim: See —
Langbein, Adolf; Merz, Herbert; Sobotu, Rainer; Bauer, Rudolf;
Jennewein, Hans M.; and Mierau, Joachim, 4,393,069, CI.
424-265.000.
Miesen, Ernest: See —
Broecker, Franz J.; Hupfer, Leopold; Merger, Franz; Miesen,
Ernest; Paetsch, Juergen; and Zirker, Guenter, 4,393,251, CI.
568-811.000.
Miida, Eishiro. to Tsukamoto Seiki Co., Ltd. Composite nozzle for
earth boring and bore enlarging bits. 4,392,534, CI. 175-340.000.
Mikage, Yuzo: See —
Ohmori, Hiroyuki; Uchimura, Hiroshi; and Mikage. Yuzo.
4.393,281, CI. 200-16.00D.
Miki. Nobuaki; Kawamoto, Mutsumi; Shibata, Kazuhiko; Yoshida,
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki, to Aisin- Warner Kabushiki Kaisha;
and Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Lockup controlling system for
variable speed, automatic transmission. 4,393,467, CI. 364-424.100.
Mikulich, Michael A.: See-
Burton, John H.; and Mikulich, Michael A., 4,392.562, CI.
128-79.000.
Mikuriya, Takashi: See —
Okumura, Taketo; Tsukahara. Taiji; Mikuriya, Takashi; Watanabe,
Hideki; and Katada. Katsutoshi. 4.392.371. CI. 72-231.000.
Miles Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Helfrich, Elaine A.; and Yip, Kin F., 4,392,864, CI. 8-506.000.
Schut, Robert N.; Safdy. Max E.; and Hong, Enrique, 4,393.081. CI.
424-274.000.
Miller, James A.: See —
Miller, Toby D ; and Miller, James A., 4,392,665, CI. 280-414.200.
Miller, Kenneth F., to General Electric Company. Hydrolytically
stable polyester-carbonate compositions. 4,393,156, CI. 524-114.000.
Miller, Kenneth F., to General Electric Company. Hydrolytically
suble polycarbonate compositions. 4,393,158, CI. 524-114.000.
Miller, Larry E.: See —
Mao, Mark H. K.; Miller, Larry E.; and Weeman, John M.,
4,393,203, CI. 536-124.000.
Miller Manufacturing Company: See —
Miller, Maurice E., 4,392,695, CI. 308-187 200.
Miller, Maurice E., to Miller Manufacturing Company. Bearing.
4,392,695, CI. 308-187.200.
Miller, Ronald E.; O'Hara, James E.; and Rola, Arthur E., to Quanex
Corporation. Method and apparatus for charging lime into an electric
arc furnace. 4,393,507. CI. 373-81.000.
Miller, Ronald E.: See—
Eckert, Charles E.; and Miller, Ronald E., 4,392,888, CI. 75-68.00R.
Miller, Toby D.; and Miller, James A. Boat dolly. 4,392,665, CI.
280-414.200.
Milligan, Charles A.; Videki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F., to
International Business Machines Corporation. Information-signal
recording apparatus employing record volume oriented identification
signals. 4,393,445, CI. 364-200.000.
Milligan, Orley J. Solid fuel burning stove. 4,392,477, CI. 126-77.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See —
Gillespie, Ralph, 4,393,114. CI. 428-252.000.
Godfrey, Thomas E., 4,392,366, CI. 68-2O5.0OR.
Millipore Corporation: See —
Ganzi, Gary C; and Paul, Charles T., 4,392,958, CI. 210-493.200.
Millman, William S., to Union Oil Company of California. Hydrocar-
bon conversion catalyst and method of preparation. 4,392,985, CI.
252-435.000.
Minagawa, Hiroyasu, to Victor Company of Japan, Ltd. Negative
feedback amplifying circuit having voltage negative feedback and
current negative feedback circuits. 4,393,353, CI. 330-102.000.
Minakuchi, Yoshikazu; Abiko, Toshio; and Inoue, Hiromitsu, to Matsu-
shita Electric Works, Ltd. Superregenerative receiver. 4,393,514, CI.
455-336.000.
Minami, Masaharu: See —
Shima. Michitsune; lida, Seiichi; Kihara. Shiso; Minami, Masaharu;
Shimoyama, Toshikazu; Takano, Genta; and Kato, Akira,
4,393,294, CI. 219-121.0EC.
Minkey Farms Partnership: See —
Harris, Jeff; Chambers, Charles A.; and Horwitz, Jack M.,
4,392,324, CI. 46-1. OOF.
Minkler, Bernd, to Domier GmbH. Launch for carrying and launching
flying bodies, in particular for aircraft. 4,392,411, CI. 89-1.819.
Minner, Willy, to Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH. Electronic
ignition system. 4,392,474, CI. 123-644.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See —
Moris, Alfred H., 4,393,423, CI. 360-93.000.
Minolta Camera Co., Ltd.: See —
Sugiura, Masamichi; and Shibazaki, Kenji. 4,393,375, CI.
340-700.000.
Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Beppu, Norio; and Fujii, Akira, 4,392,733, CI. 354-266.000.
Ito, Masazumi; and Shibazaki, Kenji, 4,392,740, CI. 355-14.0SH.
Oka, Tateki, 4,392,735, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Sahara, Masayoshi; Nakai, Masaaki; Ishida, Tokuji; and Hosomizu,
Hiroshi, 4,392,727, CI. 354-43.000.
Misaki, Susumu; Suefuji, Masahiro; Mitote, Tamio; and Matsumura,
Naotake, to Daikin Kogyo Co., Ltd. Fluorine-containing phenyl
benzoate compounds, and their production and use. 4,393,231, CI.
560-73.000.
Miscioscio, Kathleen B.; and Smith, Paul T., to Occidental Chemical
Corporation. Composition and process for electroplating white palla-
dium. 4,392,921, CI. 204-47.000.
Miskel, John J., Jr.: See —
Lipowski, Stanley A.; and Miskel. John J., Jr., 4,392.917. CI.
162-168.100.
Mita. Ryuichi; Higuchi, Chojiro; Kato, Toshio; Kawashima, Nobuyuki;
Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano, Takao, to Mitsui
Toatsu Chemicals, Inc. Cyclization process for producing aziridine-2-
carboxylic acid or its salts. 4,393,000, CI. 260-239.00E.
Mitchell, Alan; and Bailey, Thomas, to Imperial Chemical Industries
PLC. Process for producing p-hydroxyphenyl/acetic acid. 4,393,235,
CI. 562-478.000.
Mitchell, Thomas O.; and Whitehurst, Darrell D., to Mobil Oil Corpo-
ration. Catalytic conversion. 4,393,255, CI. 568-902.000.
Mitote, Tamio: See —
Misaki, Susumu; Suefuji, Masahiro; Mitote, Tamio; and Matsumura,
Naotake, 4,393,231, CI. 560-73.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kimura, Hiroshi; and Kai, Junjiro, 4,392,971, CI. 252-70.000.
Nakanishi, Yasuyuki, 4,393,426, CI. 360-105.000.
Okuda, Kuniteni; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,392,385, CI. 73-861.230.
Mitsubishi Gas Chemical Company, Inc.: See —
Gaku, Morio; Ikeguchi, Nobuyuki; and Ayano, Satoshi, 4,393,195,
CI. 528-361.000.
Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Shima, Michitsune; lida, Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami. Masaharu;
Shimoyama, Toshikazu; Takano, Genta; and Kato, Akira,
4,393,294, CI. 2I9-121.0EC.
Mitsubishi Monsanto Chemical Company: See —
Matsusaka, Osamu, 4,393,088, CI. 426-234.000.
Mitsui Toatsu Chemicals, Inc.: See —
Mita, Ryuichi; Higuchi, Chojiro; Kato, Toshio; Kawashima,
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano,
Takao, 4,393,000, CI. 260-239.00E.
Mittelbach, Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss, Werner; Hoffmann,
Dietrich; Siebrecht, Gunter; Kriechbaum, Karl; and Rapp, Gunter, to
Licentia Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH. Puffer-type gas blast switch.
4,393,290, CI. 200-148.00A.
Miura. Teiji: See —
Aoki. Kenji; Goto. Mitsuhiro; and Miura, Teiji, 4,393,390, CI.
346-155.000.
Miyagi. Hideo; Suematsu. Toshio; Nakano, Jiro; and Ono, Hironobu, to
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Method for operating fuel
injector in a computer controlled fuel injection type internal combus-
tion engine. 4,392,467, CI. 123-325.000.
July 12, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
Miyagi, Hideo; and Nakano, Jiro, to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Method and apparatus for controlling the air-fuel ratio in an
internal combustion engine. 4,392,471, CI. 123-489.000.
Miyahara, Kosuke: See —
Kojima, Chiaki; Hasegawa, Kayoko; and Miyahara, Kosuke,
4,393,126, CI. 430-2.000.
Miyake. Hidekazu: See—
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; Ohtani, Osamu; Miyake, Hidekazu;
and Fujiwara, Khosuke, 4,393,210, CI. 546-141.000.
Miyamoto, Mitsuyasu; Ishimaru, Osamu; and Fukube, Nobuyoshi, to
Hisaka Works, Ltd. Apparatus for treating textile material for contin-
uous length. 4.392,365, CI. 68-19.000.
Miyamoto, Yukihiko, to Trio Kabushiki Kaisha. AM Stereo receiver.
4,393,274, CI. 179-l.OGS.
Miyashita, Akira; Okada, Kenzo; and Kuramoto, Takashi, to Maruzen
Kasei Kabushiki Kaisha. 18 a-Glycyrrhizinic acid and salt thereof
4,393,200, CI. 536-18.100.
Miyata, Toshiyuki: See —
Hirashima, Tsuneaki; Miyata, Toshiyuki; Yamamoto, Yoshikazu;
and Kato, Mitsuyuki, 4,393,216, CI. 548-305.000.
Miyoshi, Allan M. Telephone security system. 4,393,278, CI. 179-
84.00C.
Mizuno, Shigeo: See —
Arakawa, Kaneyasu; and Mizuno, Shigeo, 4,393,360, CI.
335-164.000.
Mizuno, Yutaka: See —
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Morishita,
Hirosada; Mizuno, Yutaka; Yokozawa, Shunya; and Tsukanishi,
Kenji, 4,393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Moberg, Carl E. Steering and propulsion system for marine use.
4,392,832, CI. 440-49.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: 5^^ —
Audeh, Costandi A.; and Greco, Saverio G., 4.392,947, CI.
208-229.000.
Chu, Yung F.; and Chester, Arthur W., 4,392,989, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Herrington, Fox J., 4,392,897, CI. 156-66.000.
Kaeding, Warren W., 4,393,262, CI. 585-467.000.
Mitchell, Thomas O.; and Whitehurst, Darrell D., 4,393,255, CI.
568-902.000.
Odeh, Aziz S.; and Dotson, Billy J., 4,392,530, CI. 166-269.000.
Tobias, Michael A.; and Lynch, Conrad L., 4,393,121, CI.
428-458.000.
Moen, Tor: See —
Danielsen, Petter; and Moen, Tor, 4.393.378, CI. 340-744.000.
Moessinger, Albert. Weaving loom with a waving shed having an
improved frame. 4,392,515, CI. 139-55.100.
Mogi, Shigeru: See —
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane, Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4,393,398, CI.
358-76.000.
Mohr, Paul H.; and Matulewicz, William N., to Union Carbide Corpo-
ration. Aluminum-corrosion inhibitive heat transfer fluid. 4,392,972,
CI. 252-75.000.
Molina, Orlando G., to Rockwell International Corporation. Extended
biodegradable dye penetrant composition. 4,392,982, CI. 252-408.100.
Molins Limited: See —
Fox, Austin L., 4,392,338, CI. 53-462.000.
Horsley, John K., 4,392,912, CI. 156-504.000.
Momose, Yoshiaki: See —
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Hatakeyama, Hideo; Shimoyashiki, Nobuyo-
shi; Momose, Yoshiaki; and Imai, F-usao, 4,393,016. CI.
264-53.000.
Monarch Marking Systems, Inc.: See —
Jenkins, William A., 4,393,107, CI. 428-42.000.
Moncada, Salvador E., to Burroughs Wellcome Co. Treatment for
gastric lesions. 4,393,063, CI. 424-251.000.
Monno, Asao: See —
Shimizu, Masami; and Monno, Asao, 4,393,305, CI. 250-358.100.
Mons, Claude M.: See —
Tirole, Jacques P. H.; Mons, Claude M.; and Spinat, Roland R.,
4,392,656, CI. 277-53.000.
Monterey Manufacturing, Inc.: See-
Hall, Charles P.; and Johenning, John B., 4,392,872, CI. 55-36.000.
Montgomery, Loren N., to General Motors Corporation. Dual engine
drive. 4,392.393, CI. 74-661.000.
Monzer. Pierre: See —
Rivollet. Marc; and Monzer, Pierre, 4,393,284, CI. 200-60.000.
Moody, Brian R.; Lowe. Duncan B.; and Lowe. Derek W., to United
Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority. Transport apparatus. 4,392.435,
CI. 104-284.000.
Moontasir, Hussain A. Soap holders. 4,392,630. CI. 248-309.00R.
Moore. Anthony J.; and Silver. Howard B., to British Petroleum Com-
pany Limited, The. Method for transmitting power by traction utiliz-
ing borate esters as traction fluids and a device for using the method.
4,392,973, CI. 252-78.100.
Moore, Robert H.; and Engels, Larry O. Pavement milling apparatus.
4,392.689, CI. 299-39.000.
Moore. Stanley W., to United Sutes of America, Energy. Solar collec-
tor apparatus having increased energy rejection during sugnation.
4,392,481, CI. 126-418.000.
Moraw, Roland; and Schadlich, Gunther, to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft. Process and apparatus for rendering visible charge images.
4,392,711, CI. 350-361.000.
Morgan, Chester S.: See —
Lauf. Robert J.; and Morgan, Chester S., 4,393,124, CI. 429-104.000.
Morgan, Jeffrey D.: See —
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R.; and
Howley, Joseph P., 4,393,085, CI. 426-28.000.
Morgan-Smith Electronics Ltd.: See —
Morgan-Smith, Peter J., 4,393.371, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Morgan-Smith, Peter J., to Morgan-Smith Electronics Ltd. Analogue
to digital signal conversion and storage system. 4,393,371, CI. 340-
347.0AD.
Mori, Fumio: See —
Itsubo, Junichi; Mori, Fumio; and Sato, Hideki, 4.392,581, CI.
215-348.000.
Mori, Mamoru: See —
Yamamoto, Toshimasa; Mon, Mamoru; and Kin»ga. Eiichi,
4,392,672, CI. 280-803.000.
Morimoto, Makoto: See—
Tomita. Fusao; Tamaoki. Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai,
Masaji; Hirayama. Noriaki; Morimoto, Makoto; and Fukui,
Masanori, 4.393.056. CI. 424-181.000.
Morimoto, Shigeo: See —
Sawada. Jiro; Hanada, Kazunori; Tamai, Masaharu; Morimoto.
Shigeo; and Omura, Sadafumi, 4,393,228, CI. 549-549.000
Moris, Alfred H., to Minnesota Mining and Manufactunng Company
Endless loop tape magazine, and a recording and/or playback ma-
chine utilizing the magazine. 4,393,423, CI. 360-93.000.
Morishita, Hirosada: See —
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima. Motoyo; Tada. Ritsuro; Morishita.
Hirosada; Mizuno. Yutaka; Yokozawa. Shunya; and Tsukanishi,
Kenji, 4.393.188, CI. 528-88.000.
Morishita, Hitoshi: See —
Kodaka, Mikio; Morishita, Hitoshi; Bada, Hajime; and Sudo,
Fumio, 4,392,886, CI. 75-52.000.
Moriwaki, Takeshi; and Tokuhara, Shinji, to Daicel Chemical indus-
tries, Ltd. Moldable resin compositions containing polycarbonate
styrene polymer and three phase graft polymer. 4,393.169, CI.
525-67.000.
Moroi, Hayato: See —
Tanaka, Yoshiro: Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,267,
CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,506,
CI. 134-46.000.
Morrison, John M., to Ferranti Limited (now Ferranti pic). Resistive
electrode LCD and voltage supply means. 4,392,718, CI. 350-336.000.
Morrow, Charles M.: See —
Reed, Charles F; and Morrow, Charles M., 4,392,585. CI.
221-1.000.
Moskal, John F. Heat scavenger. 4.392,610. CI. 237-5.00S.
Motonami, Masanao: See —
Suzuki. Ichiro; Yasumatsu. Jun; Imai, Yoshikazu; and Motonami,
Masanao, 4,392,673, CI. 280-804.000.
Motorola, Inc.: See —
Davis, William F.; and Shacter, Stuart B.. 4,393,355, CI.
330-294.000.
Gill, Graham P., 4,393,092, CI. 427-38.000.
McGinn, Michael, 4,393,354, CI. 330-280.000.
Myers, Donald O., 4,392,382, CI. 73-708.000.
Paulson, Wayne M.; and Hughes, David W., 4,392,992, CI.
252-512.000.
Rasmussen. Eriing E.. 4,393,368, CI. 34O-347.0AD.
Whalin, Jeffery A.; Shanley, Charles W.; Scansaroli, Michael N.;
and Dworsky, Lawrence N., 4,393,131, CI. 430-320.000.
Mouille, Rene' L.; Gallot, Jacques R.; and Pouradier, Jean-Marc E., to
Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale. High performance blade
for helicopter rotor. 4,392,781, CI. 416-223.00R.
Mowbray, Dorian F.; and Jarrett, Boaz A., to Lucas Industries Limited.
Fuel system for engines. 4,392,466, CI. 123-299.000.
Mowbray, Dorian F., to Lucas Industries Limited. Fuel pumping
apparatus. 4,392,793, CI. 417-462.000.
Muessel, Dan C; and Hagopian, Nubar, to Rule Industnes, Inc. Roury
power coupling and planetary gear winch. 4,392,635, CI. 254-344.000.
Mugglestone, Peter R., to Illinois Tool Works Inc. Fastener. 4,392,278,
CI 24-213.00R.
Muhlich, Albert: See —
Bonewitz, Hans-Ulrich; Muhlich, Albert; and Rau, Karlheinz,
4,392,715, CI. 350-96.330.
Mukumoto, Kyoji: See —
Matsuda, Yasumasa; Mukumoto, Kyoji; Sagae, Syoji; and
Kasahara, Masatoshi, 4,393,388, CI. 346-140.00R.
Mulholland, Lawrence K Shock-absorbing wheel suspension assembly.
4,392,668, CI. 280-721.000.
Muller, Manfred, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft. Lock tongue for
safety bells. 4,392,277, CI. 24-196.000.
Muller, Paul: See—
Muller, Rolf; Roueche, Armand; Muller. Paul; and Ronco, Karl,
4,392,999, CI. 260-157.000.
Muller, Rolf; Roueche, Armand; Muller, Paul; and Ronco, Karl, to
Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Monoazo pigments containing hydrox-
ynaphthoylamino benzimidazolone radical. 4,392,999, CI.
260-157.000.
Muller, Theo: See —
Fabian, Peter; and Muller, Theo, 4,392,927, CI 204-98.000.
Munsen, Victor A.; and McClaflin, John R., to Boeing Company, The.
Fused connection adapted to fail under different overloads acting in
different directions. 4,392,623, CI. 244-I02.00R.
PI 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Murai, Yasushi: See —
Makabe, Osamu; Murai, Yasushi; Okonogi, Tuneo; Onodera,
Masahiro; Koyama, Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida, Takashi, 4,393,058,
CI. 424-246.000.
Murakami, Koichi: See —
Inuzuka, Tsuneki; Murakami, Koichi; Kurita, Kenji; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi, 4,392,741, CI. 355-14.00R.
Murakami, Masatsugi: See —
Yoshii, Toshiya; Nakura, Satoru; and Murakami, Masatsugi,
4,393,115, CI. 428-323.000.
Murakami, Tsugio: See —
Matsuzaki, Minoru; Kawauchi, Toshiei; Murakami, Tsugio; and
Kishira, Hideo, 4,392,815, CI. 431-175.000.
Murotani, Tatsunori, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Temperature respon-
sive refresh control circuit. 4,393,477, CI. 365-222.000.
Murray Ohio Manufacturing Co., The: See —
Buckhouse, Norman O.; Stevens, Aaron A.; and Lawrence, Ran-
dall K.. 4,392,543, CI. 180-272.000.
Murray, Robert M. S.: See —
Pitches, Brian E.; Murray, Robert M. S.; and Rogers, Douglas J.,
4,392,378, CI. 73-304.00C.
Muschaweck, Roman: See —
Merkel, Wulf; Bormann, Dieter; Mania, Dieter; and Muschaweck,
Roman, 4,393,072, CI. 424-275.000.
Muto, Rudolph. Sterile assembly for protecting and fastening an in-
dwelling device. 4,392,853, CI. 604-171.000.
Myer, Robert J., to United States of America, Air Force. Implanted
boundary layer trip. 4,392,624, CI. 244-158.00A.
Myers, Donald O., to Motorola Inc. Linearized electronic capacitive
pressure transducer. 4,392,382, CI. 73-708.000.
N.K..F. Groep B.V.: See—
Meijer, Johan F. R., 4,392,342, CI. 57-264.000.
Nabeta, Yoichi: See —
Imai, Yoshio; Nabeta, Yoichi; and Inuzuka, Tadao, 4,393,434, CI.
361-286.000.
Nabisco Brands, Inc.: See —
Pomper, Seymour; and LaBaw, Glenn D., 4,393,084, CI.
426-19.000.
Naf, Ferdinand: See —
Thomas, Alan F.; and Naf, Ferdinand, 4.392,993, CI. 252-522.00R.
Nagai, Shosuke: See —
Miu, Ryuichi; Higuchi. Chojiro; Kato, Toshio; Kawashima,
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano,
Takao, 4,393,000, CI. 260-239.00E.
Nagai, Tamiji; and Matsushita, Takeshi, to Sony Corporation. Switch-
ing circuit. 4,393,337, CI. 315-408.000.
Naganoma, Masanori: See —
Kondo, Nobuo; Naganoma, Masanori; Hibi, Hitoshi; Fujii, Tetsuo;
and Suzuki, Kunihiko, 4,393,365, CI. 340-57.000.
NagI, Michael: See —
Weber, Ralph; Rollinger, Bemt; Nagl, Michael; and Rinner, Bern-
hard, 4,392,637, CI. 266-265.000.
Nagy, Dennis J.: See —
Daniels, Wiley E.; and Nagy, Dennis J., 4,393,173, CI. 525-329.400.
Nair, Vijay G.; Joseph, Joseph P.; and Bernstein, Seymour, to American
Cyanamid Company. Hydroxyalkyl ether derivatives of rutin po-
ly(H-)sulfate and method of use. 4,393,055, CI. 424-180.000.
Nakagawa, Akira: See —
Noda, Kanji; Nakagawa, Akira; Yamagata, Tetsuya; and Ide,
Hiroyuki, 4,393,076, CI. 424-317.000.
Nakagawa, Tsuneo; Hiramatsu, Uji; and Honda, Toshihide, to Daikin
Kogyo Co., Ltd. Process for preparing benzotrifluoride and its deriv-
atives. 4,393,257, CI. 570-145.000.
Nakai, Masaaki: See —
Sahara, Masayoshi; Nakai, Masaaki; Ishida, Tokuji; and Hosomizu,
Hiroshi, 4,392,727, CI. 354-43.000.
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Toru; Takaha-
shi, Kazue; Watanabe, Michihiro; and Kotani, Sumihisa, to Hitachi,
Ltd.; and Hitachi Koki Co., Ltd. Printing hammer driving apparatus.
4,392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Nakajima, Masao: See —
Fujiu, Takahiro; Nakajima, Masao; and Okano, Shigeru, 4,392,265,
CI. 8-120.000.
Nakamine, Chosin, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Elec-
tronic copying apparatus for forming multiple images on a single
sheet. 4,392,736, CI. 355-3.00R.
Nakamori, Shigeru: See —
Tsuchida, Takayasu; and Nakamori, Shigeru, 4,393,135, CI.
435-110.000.
Nakamura, Kenichi; Nankai, Shiro; and lijima, Takashi, to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Electrochemical measuring apparatus
comprising enzyme electrode. 4,392,933, CI. 204-403.000.
Nakamura, Teruo; and lino, Umetarou, to Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd. Swash-
plate type compressor having oil separating function. 4,392,788, CI.
417-269.000.
Nakanishi, Tosaku: See —
Tanimoto, Akira; Nakanishi, Tosaku; and Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu,
4,393,462. CI. 364-900.000.
Nakanishi. Yasuyuki, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Tape
recorder head adjusting mechanism. 4,393,426, CI. 360-105.000.
Nakano. Akira. Region information processing system. 4,393,453, CI.
364-514.000.
Nakano, Hiroshi: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Takeuchi, Tomio; and Nakano, Hiroshi,
4,393,047, CI. 424-118.000.
Nakano, Jiro: See —
Miyagi, Hideo; Suematsu, Toshio; Nakano, Jiro; and Ono,
Hironobu, 4,392,467, CI. 123-325.000.
Miyagi, Hideo; and Nakano, Jiro, 4,392.471, CI. 123-489.000.
Nakano. Kunimitsu, to Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. Arc suppress-
ing means for current limiting circuit breakers. 4,393,287, CI. 200-
144.00R.
Nakao, Sho: See —
Shiba, Keisuke; Nakao, Sho; and Toyama, Tadao, 4,393,128, CI.
430-273.000.
Nakashima. Humihiko: See —
Sakudo. Noriyuki; Tokiquchi, Katsumi; Koike, Hidemi; Kanomata,
Ichiro; and Nakashima, Humihiko, 4,393,333, CI. 315-111.810.
Nakasu, Kei; Ichikawa, Shigeru; Tanaka, Toshihiko; and Ikeda, Mitsuo,
to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Aisin Seiki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Disc brake with a caliper supported by slide pins.
4,392,560, CI. 188-73.340.
Nakayama, Mituhito: See —
ShibaU, Tomoyuki; Nakayama, Mituhito; and Ouchi, Kiyoshi,
4,392,790, CI. 417-360.000.
Nakazawa, Mitsuaki: See—
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi, Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa,
Mitsuaki; and Yamamoto, Takashi, 4,392,421, CI. 99-524.000.
Nakura, Satoru: See —
Yoshii, Toshiya; Nakura, Satoru; and Murakami, Masatsugi,
4,393,115, CI. 428-323.000.
Nankai, Shiro: See —
Nakamura, Kenichi; Nankai, Shiro; and lijima, Takashi, 4,392,933,
CI. 204-403.000.
Naoyuki, Maeda: See —
Michio, Abe; and Naoyuki, Maeda, 4,392,540, CI. 180-142.000.
Narahara, Toshikazu: See —
Ishii, Takeo; Ogata, Masatsugu; and Narahara, Toshikazu,
4,393,177, CI. 525-422.000.
Nash Engineering Company, The: See —
Jozepaitis, Charles M., 4,392,783, CI. 417-68.000.
National Semiconductor Corporation: See —
Husain, Syed A., 4,392,935, CI. 204-206.000.
National Starch and Chemical Corporation: See—
Breuninger, William F., 4.393.202, CI. 536-102.000.
National Union Electric Corporation: See —
Sepke. Arnold L., 4,392.271, CI. 15-339.000.
Nawroth. Werner: See —
Heckmann. Horst; and Nawroth. Werner. 4.392.510. CI.
137-454.200.
NCR Corporation: See —
Knapp, George W.; and Spaulding, Bernard B., 4,393.464. CI.
364-900.000.
Porter, Warren W.. 4.392.704. CI. 339-75.0MP.
Neal, Danny M.: See —
Bowles. David J.; Clancy. Douglas E.; Johnson, Carl F.; and Neal,
Danny M., 4,392.758. CI. 400-697.100.
Necchi Societa per Azioni: See —
Bar. Alfredo. 4.392,789, CI. 417-312.000.
Nehmey, Sam D.: See —
Kim, Hueng T.; and Nehmey, Sam D., 4,393,017, CI. 264-53.000.
Nelson, Alfred M.: See —
Rasekhi, Houshang; and Nelson, Alfred M.. 4.393.389, CI.
346-153.100.
Nemas, Mara: See —
Kraus, Menahem A.; Frommer, Moshe A.; Nemas, Mara; and
Gutman, Rodika, 4,392.960, CI. 210-651.000.
Neu, Hans: See —
Grunwald, Werner; Zehender, Ernst; Friese, Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz, Jurgen; Neu. Hans; Kimer, Kuno; and Schumacher.
Bemd. 4,393.282. CI. 200-19.00R.
Neuhaus. Dieter; Sohner. Gerhard; Ruf, Walter; Jesse. Erich; and Roth.
Helmut, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Safety device for a conducting path
in a load device. 4,393.432, CI. 361-104.000.
Neutrik Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Weingartner, Bemhard, 4.392.699. CI. 339-14.0OP.
New. Bernard J., to Advanced Micro Devices. Inc. Method and appara-
tus for sequencing addresses of a fast Fourier transform array.
4,393.457. CI. 364-726.000.
New, Bernard J., to Advanced Micro Devices, Inc. Bit slice micropro-
grammable processor for signal processing applications. 4,393,468,
CI. 364-736.000.
Newton, Alan B.: See —
Holmes, Paul A.; Willmouth, Frank M.; and Newton, Alan B.,
4,393,167, CI. 525-64.000.
Newton, Richard P.; Harper, Patrick H.; Geiss, Vernon L.; and Jewell,
John N., to Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation. Method of
processing fresh tobacco leaves. 4,392,501, CI. 131-300.000.
NGK Insulators, Ltd.: See—
Izumi, Naoe, 4,392,387, CI. 73-863.210.
NGK Spark Plug Co.: See—
Nisfiio, Kanemitsu; Takagi, Shunichi; and Suzuki, Yasuhiko,
4,393,324, CI. 313-133.000.
Nguyen, Nghia V.: See —
Dunn, Thomas J.; Yuniskis, Donald G.. Jr.; Szakacs. Gabor L.; and
Nguyen. Nghia V.. 4,393,448, CI. 364-449.000.
Niederholtmeyer, Werner G. Process and apparatus for utilizing waste
oil. 4,392,820, CI. 431-284.000.
Niemeijer, Halbe J., to Dawsonville Corp., N.V. Tattooing apparatus.
4.392.493. CI. 128-316.000.
July 12, 19i:
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 29
Nifco, Inc.: See —
Hara, Kunio, 4,392,337, CI. 53-48.000.
Nihon Tokushu Noyaku Seizo K.K.: See —
Saito, Junichi; and Kume, Toyohiko, 4,392,929, CI. 204-158.0HA.
Niinivaara, Juhani, to Asonen, Osmo. Method for the arc cutting of
meul. 4,393,297, CI. 219-137.00R.
Nimry, Tayseer S.; and Fields, Ellis K., to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana). Tricyclo[6.4.0.0^'']dodecane-3,6-diphenyl-l,8,4,5-tetracar-
boxylic acid dianhydrides. 4,393,222, CI. 549-234.000.
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Hareyama, Kyuichi, 4,393,370, CI. 34O-347.0DA.
Maruta, Rikio; and Tomozawa, Atsushi, 4,393,367, CI. 340-
347.0DD.
Murotani, Tatsunori, 4,393,477, CI. 365-222.000.
Yamashiu, Koji, 4,393,383, CI. 343-903.000.
Nippon Elumin Sash Co., Ltd.: See —
Suzuki, Jyuji, 4,392,329, CI. 49-356.000.
Nippon Hoso Kyokai: See —
Taketoshi, Kazuhisa; and Ogusu, Chihaya, 4,392,452, CI.
118-723.000.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See —
Hamanishi, Yoshinari, 4,392,724, CI. 350-163.000.
Nippon Oil Company, Limited: See —
Ishida, Noboru; and Watanabe, Harumichi, 4,392,968, CI. 252-
51.50R.
Nippon Telegraph and Telephone Public Corporation: See—
Itakura, Fumitada; and Sugamura, Noboru, 4,393,272, CI. 179-
l.OSA.
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See —
Eguchi, Osamu; Hattori, Mitsutoshi; and Hanaoka, Takatsugu,
4,392,375, CI. 73-118.000.
Fujinami, Hiroshi; and Yamada, Takashi, 4,393,271, CI. 179-l.OSM.
Kondo, Nobuo; Naganoma, Masanori; Hibi, Hitoshi; Fujii, Tetsuo;
and Suzuki, Kunihiko, 4,393,365, CI. 340-57.000.
Nishi, Norio: See—
Nishiyama, Masashi; Kobayashi, Yoshinari; Tokura, Seiichi; and
Nishi, Norio, 4,392,916, CI. 162-157.100.
Nishida, Hirotaka: See —
Maekawa, Hideyuki; Hiramoto, Shinji; Itaya, Kozo; Sato, Kokichi;
and Nishida, Hirotaka. 4.392.577, CI. 215-32.000.
Nishida, Masamitsu: See —
Ouchi. Hiromu; Nishida. Masamitsu; and Numata, Kazunori,
4,392,970, CI. 252-62.900.
Nishikawa, Masaji, to Olympus Optical Co. Ltd. Electrophotographic
copying apparatus. 4.392.737. CI. 355-3.00R.
Nishimura, Tadashi: See —
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,267,
CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,506,
CI. 134-46.000.
Nishimura, Tatsuo: See —
Nishiyama, Masanobu; Kanazawa, Fusao; Tanaka, Hisaji; and
Nishimura, Tatsuo, 4,392,269, CI. 15-145.000.
Nishimura, Yukuo: See —
Shirato, Yoshiaki; Takatori, Yasushi; Hara. Toshitami; Nishimura.
Yukuo; and Takahashi, Michiko, 4,392,907, CI. 156-252.000.
Nishio, Kanemitsu; Takagi, Shunichi; and Suzuki, Yasuhiko, to NGK
Spark Plug Co. Spark plug with a sphere-like metal center electrode
and manufacturing process thereof. 4,393,324, CI. 313-133.000.
Nishiyama, Masanobu; Kanazawa, Fusao; Tanaka, Hisaji; and Ni-
shimura, Tatsuo, to Duskin Franchise Kabushiki Kaisha; and Kabu-
shiki Kaisha Sunpack. Mop carrier. 4,392,269, CI. 15-145.000.
Nishiyama, Masashi; Kobayashi, Yoshinari; Tokura, Seiichi; and Nishi,
Norio, to Director-General of the Agency of Industrial Science and
Technology; and Hokkaido University. President of Paper-making
process with regenerated chitin fibers. 4.392.916, CI. 162-157.100.
Nishiyama, Yoshihisa: See—
Fujii, Kunihiko; Hirosaki, Yukihiro; Nishiyama, Yoshihisa; and
Sato, Koichiro, 4,392,535, CI. 177-1.000.
Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See —
Ozawa, Kiyomi; and Ishii, Shigeru, 4,393,213, CI. 546-298.000.
Nissan Motor Company, Limited: See—
Fujikawa, Tsuneo; and Takagishi, Haruyoshi, 4,392,601, CI.
228-4.100.
Hiraiwa, Kazuyoshi; and Yamasaki, Saburo, 4,393,285, CI.
200-61.880.
Kakimoto, Toshihiko, 4,392,640, CI. 267-141.200.
Takahashi. Takao, 4,392,517, CI. 139-435.000.
Yasuhara, Seishi, 4,392,463, CI. 123-196.00M.
Yoshitsugu, Seikichi; and Shimatsu, Minoru, 4,392,684, CI.
296-185.000.
Nisshin Rour Milling Co., Ltd.: See—
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro;
Kubota, Reiko; and Takahashi, Toshihiro, 4,393,209, CI.
544-404.000.
Nisshin Oil Mills Limited, The: See—
Takada, Atsunobu; and Higaki, Yuzo, 4,393,044, CI. 424-59.000.
Nittetsu Steel Drum Co., Ltd.: See—
Sasai. Mitsuo; Tomikawa, Kiyozi; and Kajiwara, Kazuo, 4,392,295,
CI. 29-509.000.
Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd.: S«—
Okuma, Kiwamu; Haga, Tsunehiro; Kizara, Masao; Otaki, Keiji;
and Hirai, Ayahiro. 4.392,878. CI. 65-6.000.
Nitto Chemical Industry, Co., Ltd.: See—
Kanda, Shoichi; and Kawamuia, Gengiro, 4,393,163, CI.
524-608.000.
Nix, Hans; and Szary, Herbert, to Elektro-Physik Hans Nix & Dr. Ing.
E. Steingroever, K.G. Pencil shaped magnetic coating thickness
gauge. 4,392,305, CI. 33-169.0OF.
NL Industries, Inc.: See —
House, Roy F.; and Hoover, Lonnie D., 4.392.964, CI. 252-8.50C.
Noblit, William D., Ill: See—
Gorenno. Donald L.; and Noblit, William D., Ill, 4,393,401. CI.
358-107.000.
Noda, Kanji; Nakagawa, Akira; Yamagata, Tetsuya; and Ide, Hiroyuki,
to Hisamitsu Pharmaceutical Co., Inc. Anti-inflammatory and analge-
sic gel composition. 4,393,076. CI. 424-317.000.
Nokami. Junzo: See —
Torii. Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Sasaoka, Michio;
Saito, Norio; and Shiroi, Takashi, 4,392,923. CI. 204-59.00R.
Nolting, Karl-Heinz: See —
Bruggendieck. Siegfried; Nolting, Karl-Heinz; Krahn, Friedrich;
and Olejak, Gerhard, 4,392,714. CI. 350-96.230.
Nomiyama. Neal T.: See —
Buser, Rudolph G.; Osche, Gregory R.; Nomiyama, Neal T.; and
Rohde. Robert S.. 4,393.517, CI. 455-608.000.
Norco. Inc.: See —
Metz. Joseph R.; and Barnes. Michael F , 4,392,281. CI. 24-230.50R
Norioka. Setsuo, to JEOL Ltd. Method and apparatus for controlling
the objective lens in a scanning electron microscope or the like.
4.393,309. CI. 250-396.00R.
Norjay Services, Ltd.: See —
Redmond. Harry W.; and Jeannotte, Raymond V., 4,392,658, CI.
280-11.180.
Norkus. Kasper, Jr. Expansible and retractable vehicle body. 4,392,682,
CI. 296-26.000.
Noroy, Terje. Apparatus for pulling-off the skin of sheep carcasses in
slaughtering. 4,392,274, CI. 17-21.000.
North American Philips Electric Corp.: See—
Skwirut, Henry; and Young, Robert G., 4,393.330. CI. 313-487.000.
Northern Telecom Limited: See-
Anderson. James E.; Lee. John D.; and Livermore. Frederick C.
4.393.433. CI. 361-119.000.
Maniv. Shmuel; and Westwood. William D., 4,392.931. CI. 204-
192.0OR.
Northwestern University: See-
Goldberg. Erwin. 4.392.997. CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Norwich Eaton Pharmaceuticals. Inc.: See —
Alaimo. Robert J.. 4.393,208, CI. 544-343.000.
Pelosi, Stanford S., Jr.. 4,393,204, CI. 542-420.000.
Notta. Adolf, to Wetrok Inc. Diaphragm pump. 4,392,787, CI.
417-269.000.
Novoselac, John; and Churcher, Dale L., to Joy Manufacturing Com-
pany. Centrifuge apparatus. 4,392,846, CI. 494-40.000
Noyes. Steven S.: See —
Holtey. Thomas O.; Noyes. Steven S.; and Peters. Daniel G.,
4.393.461. CI. 364-900.000.
Nozaki. Shinichi; Tai. Ichiro; and Shirayama, Shimpey. to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Neutron detectors. 4,393,307, CI.
250-390.000.
Numata, Kazunori: See —
Ouchi, Hiromu; Nishida, Masamitsu; and Numata, Kazunori.
4.392.970. CI. 252-62.900.
Numata, Seiji: See —
Maki, Naoki; Numata, Seiji; Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Yamamoto,
Heroe, 4,393,429, CI. 361-19.000.
Nussbaumer, Dietmar: See —
Perl, Horst; Nussbaumer, Dietmar; Kluver, Horst; and Beer, Hans,
4,392,963, CI. 210-692.000.
Nussenbaum, Joseph: See —
Gresser, Herbert D.; Kaplan, George; and Nussenbaum, Joseph,
4,392,476, CI. 125-30.00R.
Nyland, Clifford A., to Railroad Service, Inc. Railway maintenance
machine. 4,392,433, CI. 104-9.000.
Occidental Chemical Corporation: See—
Miscioscio, Kathleen B.; and Smith, Paul T.. 4.392.921, 01.
204-47.000.
Tomaszewski, Thaddeus W., 4,392,922, CI. 204-51.000.
Ochs, Charles S., to Anchor Hocking Corporation. Closure cap.
4,392,580, CI. 215-332.000.
O'Connell, Denis, to Institute for Industrial Research & Standards.
Lifting and tilting trailer. 4,392,687, CI. 298-5.000.
Odeh, Aziz S.; and Dotson, Billy J., to Mobil Oil Corporation Method
of improved oil recovery by simultaneous injection of steam and
water. 4,392,530, CI. 166-269.000.
Ogata. Masatsugu: See —
Ishii. Takeo; Ogau. Masatsugu; and Narahara, Toshikazu,
4,393.177, CI. 525-422.000.
Ogusu, Chihaya: See —
Taketoshi, Kazuhisa; and Ogusu, Chihaya. 4.392.452. CI.
118-723.000.
O'Hara. James E.: See —
Miller. Ronald E.; O'Hara. James E.; and Rola. Arthur E..
4.393.507. CI. 373-81.000.
Ohashi. Takashi: See —
Kaneda. Hiroshi; Arai. Katsuhiko; Suzuki. Akira; and Ohashi,
Takashi, 4,393,015, CI. 264-51.000.
PI 30
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Ohhata, Michinobu: See —
■ Takahashi, Masayuki; Goto, Kunihiko; Tanaka, Hisami; and Oh-
hata. Michinobu, 4,393,318, CI. 307-353.000.
Ohio State University Research Foundation, The: See —
Witiak, Donald T.; and Rahwan, Ralf G., 4,393.226, CI.
549-433.000.
Ohirogge, Alvin J.: See —
White, Joe L.; and Ohirogge, Alvin J., 4,393,082, CI. 426-2.000.
Ohmori. Hiroyuki; Uchimura, Hiroshi; and Mikage, Yuzo, to Matsu
Kyu Kabushiki Kaisha. Dip switch. 4,393,281, CI. 200-16.00D.
Ohnishi, Hiroyuki: See-
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu, Haruyoshi; Fujita, Yutaka; Tazume,
Masayuki; Takeuchi, Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi, Hiroyuki,
4,393,258. CI. 585-25.000.
Ohta, Teruto; and Kinoshita. Yoshio, to Showa Aluminum Industries
K.K. Process and apparatus for production of aluminum. 4,392,926,
CI. 204-67.000.
Ohtani, Osamu: See —
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; Ohtani, Osamu; Miyake, Hidekazu;
and Fujiwara, Khosuke, 4,393,210, CI. 546-141.000.
Oka, Tateki, to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha. Magnetic brush
developing apparatus. 4.392,735, CI. 355-3.0DD.
Okabe, Masao: See —
Tatsuhama, Tetsuro; and Okabe, Masao, 4,392,744, CI. 356-153.000.
Okada, Kenzo: See —
Miyashiu, Akira; Okada. Kenzo; and Kuramoto, Takashi,
4.393,200, CI. 536-18.100.
Okamoto, Hiroshi: See —
Yokobori, Nobuyoshi; Urayama, Masashi; Okamoto, Hiroshi; and
Igarashi, Yoshiaki, 4,393,422, CI. 360-73.000.
Okano, Shigeru: See —
Fujiu. Takahiro; Nakajima, Masao; and Okano, Shigeru, 4,392,265,
CI. 8-120.000.
Okaya Electric Industries Co., Ltd.: See —
Kamegaya, Takeo; and Waunabe, Satoshi, 4,393,326, CI.
313-582.000.
Okonogi, Tuneo: See —
Makabe, Osamu; Murai, Yasushi; Okonogi, Tuneo; Onodera,
Masahiro; Koyama, Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida, Takashi, 4,393,058,
CI. 424-246.000.
Okuda, Kuniteru; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada, Shunichi;
and Kabuto, Masami, to Oval Engineering Co., Ltd.; and Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Flow meter utilizing Karman vortex street.
4,392,385, CI. 73-861.230.
Okuma, Kiwamu; Haga, Tsunehiro; Kizara, Masao; Otaki, Keiji; and
Hirai, Ayahiro, to Nitto Boseki Co., Ltd. Glass fiber forming unit.
4.392,878, CI. 65-6.000.
Okumura Corporation: See —
Tatsuhama, Tetsuro; and Okabe, Masao, 4,392,744, CI. 356-153.000.
Okumura, Taketo; Tsukahara, Taiji; Mikuriya, Takashi; Watanabe,
Hideki; and Katada, Katsutoshi, to Kawasaki Steel Corporation.
Method of plate rolling and equipment therefor. 4,392,371, CI.
72-231.000.
Okuna, Kenji: See —
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Tom;
Takahashi, Kazue; Watanabe, Michihiro; and Kotani. Sumihisa.
4,392.423, CI. 101-93.480.
Okuyama. Ajoshio: See —
Takasugi. Mitsuo; and Okuyama, Ajoshio, 4.392,491, CI.
604-202.000.
Olejak, Gerhard: See—
Bruggendieck, Siegfried; Nolting, Karl-Heinz; Krahn, Friedrich;
and Olejak, Gerhard, 4,392,714, CI. 350-96,230.
Olsen, John H.; and Pritchard, Robert S., to Flow Industries, Inc.
High-pressure seal with controlled deflection under pressure.
4,392,655, CI. 277-1.000.
Olson, Allan R.: See—
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R.; and
Howley, Joseph P., 4,393,085, CI. 426-28.000.
Olson, Donald O. Self-perforating drip irrigation device. 4,392,616, CI.
239-271.000.
Olympus Optical Company Limited: See —
Iwasama, Teruo; and Tojiki, Hitomi, 4.393.340, CI. 318-301.000.
Kimura, Kenji, 4,392,726, CI. 354-25.000.
Kimura, Kenji, 4,393,339, CI. 318-254.000.
Kimura. Kenji, 4.393,409, CI. 358-227.000.
Kimura, Kenji, 4,393,418. CI. 360-22.000.
Nishikawa, Masaji, 4,392,737, CI. 355-3.00R.
Sakurai, Yoshifumi, 4,393,427, CI. 360-112.000.
Shimizu, Tsutomu, 4,392,716, CI. 350-145.000.
Tomizawa, Yoshio, 4,393,420, CI. 360-73.000.
Tsunefuji, Katsuhiko, 4,392,729, CI. 354-152.000.
O'Mara. Raymond D.; Smorol. Michael E.; and Tobin. Curtis L., to
Carrier Corporation. Apparatus for securing a wire to a grille.
4,392,525, CI. 165-125.000.
Omori, Toshiyuki; and Abe, Kunihiro, to Kao Soap Co. Ltd. Screen
filter. 4.392,951, CI. 209-307.000.
Omura, Sadafumi: See —
Sawada, Jiro; Hanada. Kazunori; Tamai. Masaharu; Morimoto.
Shigeo; and Omura, Sadafumi, 4,393.228. CI. 549-549.000
O'Neill, Michael H. Shade shirt. 4,392,258, CI. 2-209.100.
Ong, Edith C See—
Barker, Robert A.; and Ong, Edith C, 4,392,298, CI. 29-577.00C.
Ong, Warren R., to Fairchild Camera & Instrument Corp. Random
access memory dual word line recovery circuitry. 4,393.476. CI.
365-203.000.
Ono, Hironobu: See —
Miyagi, Hideo; Suematsu, Toshio; Nakano, Jiro; and Ono,
Hironobu, 4,392,467, CI. 123-325.000.
Onodera, Masahiro: See —
Makabe, Osamu; Murai, Yasushi; Okonogi, Tuneo; Onodera,
Masahiro; Koyama, Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida, Takashi, 4,393,058,
CI. 424-246.000.
Op Het Veld, Adriaan J. G.: See—
Engelfriet, Adrianus R. C; Op Het Veld, Adriaan J. G.; and Van
Vucht, Theodorus J. P., 4,392,397, CI. 76-I07.00A.
Oreopoulos, Dimitrios G.; and Zellerman, Gabor. Catheter. 4,392.855,
CI. 604-175.000.
Orthoband Company. Inc.: See —
DeWoskin, Irvin S., 4,392,825, CI. 433-5.000.
Osaka Municipal Government: See —
Hirashima, Tsuneaki; Miyata, Toshiyuki; Yamamoto, Yoshikazu;
and Kato, Mitsuyuki, 4,393,216. CI. 548-305.000.
Osche, Gregory R.: See —
Buser, Rudolph G.; Osche, Gregory R.; Nomiyama, Neal T.; and
Rohde, Robert S.. 4,393,517, CI. 455-608.000.
Oshima, Harumi, to Tokico Ltd. Disc brake having slidably mounted
caliper with friction pad supporting member provided thereon.
4,392,559, CI. 188-73.320.
Otaki, Keiji: See—
Okuma, Kiwamu; Haga, Tsunehiro; Kizara, Masao; Otaki, Keiji;
and Hirai, Ayahiro, 4,392,878, CI. 65-6.000.
Otsuka Kagaku Yakuhin Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami. Junzo; Sasaoka. Michio;
Saito. Norio; and Shiroi. Takashi. 4.392,923, CI. 204-59.00R.
Ott, Karl-Heinz: See—
Lindner, Christian; Ott, Karl-Heinz; and Pischtschan, Alfred,
4,393,172, CI. 525-310.000.
Ottolini, Leonardo, to Luigi Franchi S.p.A. Safety device for the
trigger mechanism of a shot-gun of the gas-pump type. 4,392,319, CI.
42-69.00B.
Ouchi. Hiromu; Nishida, Masamitsu; and Numata, Kazunori, to Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Piezoelectric ceramics. 4,392,970,
CI. 252-62.900.
Ouchi, Kiyoshi: See —
Shibata, Tomoyuki; Nakayama, Mituhito; and Ouchi, Kiyoshi,
4,392,790, CI. 417-360.000.
Oude Alink, Bemardus A.: See —
Thompson, Neil E. S.; Redmore, Derek; Oude Alink, Bemardus A.;
and Outlaw, Benjamin T., 4,393,026, CI. 422-12.000.
Outlaw, Benjamin T.: See —
Thompson, Neil E. S.; Redmore, Derek; Oude Alink, Bemardus A.;
and Outlaw, Benjamin T., 4,393,026, CI. 422-12.000.
Outokumpu Oy: See —
Heimala, Seppo O.; Hultholm, Stig E.; and Tuovinen, Frans H.,
4,393,029, CI. 423-55.000.
Lilja, Launo L.; and Makitalo, Valto J., 4,392,885, CL 75-26.000.
Oval Engineering Co., Ltd.: See —
Okuda, Kunitem; Fukami, Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,392,385, CI. 73-861.230.
Owen, Leonard J.: See —
Baker, Robert W.; Owen, Leonard J.; and Simmons, Reginald J.,
4.392,706, CI. 339-91.00R.
Owen, William H.; Simko, Richard T.; and Tchon, Wallace E., to
Xicor, Inc. Nonvolatile static random access memory system.
4,393.481, CI. 365-228.000.
Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation: See —
Hohman, Charles M.; Propster. Mark A.; and Seng, Stephen,
4,392,310, CI. 34-172.000.
Takeuchi, Kunthiko; and Belt, James S., 4,392,879, CI. 65-6.000.
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See —
Uhlig, Albert R.; and Chang, Long F., 4,392,579, CI. 215-253.000.
Oxenrider, Bryce C: See —
Rogic, Milorad M.; and Oxenrider, Bryce C, 4,393,215, CI.
548-125.000.
Ozawa, Kiyomi; and Ishii, Shigem, to Nissan Chemical Industries, Ltd.
Process for producing 6-phenoxypicolinic aldehydes. 4,393,213. CI.
546-298.000.
Ozeki, Takeshi, to Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co., Ltd. Light distributor.
4,392,712, CI. 350-96.160.
Pacific Nuclear Fuels, Inc.: See —
Lang, Linton W.; and Stetson, Robert L., 4,393,510, CI.
376-172.000.
Paetsch, Juergen: See —
Broecker, Franz J.; Hupfer, Leopold; Merger, Franz; Miesen,
Emest; Paetsch, Juergen; and Zirker, Guenter, 4,393,251, CI.
568-811.000.
Painter, James D. Hosiery trimming apparatus. 4,392,596, CI.
223-43.000.
Pako Corporation: See —
Anderson, Richard D., 4,392,743. CI. 355-75.000.
Pallos, Ferenc M.; Brokke, Mervin E.; and Ameklev, Duane R., to
Suuffer Chemical Company. Herbicide compositions. 4,392,884, CI.
71-100.000.
Palluel, Pierre: See—
Shroff, Arvind; and Palluel, Pien-e, 4,393,328, CI. 313-346.00R.
Palma, Gary E.: See—
Angelbeck, Albert W.; and Palma, Gary E., 4,393,503, CI.
372-20.000.
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszio; and Szomor, Maria, to Chinoin Gyogyszer Es
July 12, 19 i 3
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 31
Vegyeszeti Termekek Gyara Rt. 2-Cyano-2-(3-phenoxy-phenyl)-pro-
pionic acid amide and preparation thereof. 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Pampalone, Thomas R., to RCA Corporation. Aqueous developable
poly(olefin sulfone) terpolymers. 4.393,160, CI. 524-360.000.
Paper Converting Machine Company: See —
Fulk, James B.; McKeefry, Jerry L.; Schuning, George F.; and
Bradley, John J., 4,392,844, CI. 493-399.000.
Pardes, Greg: See —
Berger. Richard F.; Pardes. Greg; and Gerber. Bernard R.,
4,392,576, CI. 215-l.OOC.
Parker, Alan; Famhill, William M.; and Clough, Douglas O. Friction
spinning apparatus. 4,392,343, CI. 57-401.000.
Parrish, Reuel C. Quick disconnect safety coupling. 4,392,513, CI.
137-614.010.
Parsons, Raymond L.: See —
Huntley, John D.; and Parsons. Raymond L.. 4,393.459, CI.
364-900.000.
Partridge, Joshua. Drain pan for radiators and cooling systems.
4,392,552, CI. 184-106.000.
Pascarella, Vincent J.: See—
Damico, Dennis J.; and Pascarella, Vincent J., 4,393,186, CI.
528-49.000.
Paschke, Edward E.; and Petty-Weeks, C. Bruce, to Standard Oil
Company (Indiana). Polyamides and copolyamides comprising -1,2-
di(p-aminophenoxy) ethane moieties. 4,393,162, CI. 524-606.000.
Pascoe, Robert D., to American Standard Inc. Vital protection arrange-
ment for raih-oad track circuits. 4,392,626, CI. 246-34.00R.
Passavant-Werke Michelbacher Huette: See—
Fechter, Leonhard; and Jung, Hubert, 4,392,952, CI. 210-159.000.
Patent-Treuhand-Geselischaft fur elektrische Gluhlampen mbH: See—
Dobrusskin, Alexander; Klein, Lutz; and Woizan, Gunter,
4,393,331, CI. 313-489.000.
Paton, Samuel J.: See —
Crum, Glen F.; and Paton, Samuel J., 4,393,263, CI. 585-443.000.
Patsch, Manfred; Ruske, Manfred; and Hahn, Erwin, to BASF Aktien-
gesellschaft. Cationic phthalocyanine dyes. 4,393,005, CI.
260-245.730.
Paul, Charles T.: See —
Ganzi, Gary C; and Paul, Charles T., 4,392,958, CI. 210-493.200.
Paulson, Robert C. Swabbing cup construction for swabbing an oil well
pipe. 4,392,528, CI. 166-153.000.
Paulson, Wayne M.; and Hughes, David W., to Motorola, Inc. Chromi-
um-silicon-nitrogen resistor material. 4,392,992, CI. 252-512.000.
Paulussen, Heinz: See —
Anstotz, Helmut; Kubik, Klaus; and Paulussen, Heinz, 4,392,288,
CI. 29-116.0AD.
Pawelchak, John M.; Chen, James L.; Cryan, John G.; and LaVia.
Anthony L., to E. R. Squibb & Sons. Inc. Adhesive compositions.
4,393,080, CI. 428-355.000.
Pearson, David D.; Lemkey, Frank D.; and Kear, Bemard H., to United
Technologies Corporation. Superalloy properties through stress
modified gamma prime morphology. 4,392,894, CI. 148-2.000.
Pechau, Gerhard: See —
Wyzgol, Ewald; Rasehom, Hans-Jurgen; and Pechau, Gerhard,
4,392,399, CI. 83-106.000.
Pechiney Ugine Kuhlmann: See —
Armand, Marcel, 4,392,924, CI. 204-64.00T.
Peck. Anthony W.. to Burroughs Wellcome Co. Bupropion and etha-
nol. 4.393.078, CI. 424-330.000.
Peck, John H.: See —
LaFever, Clifford E.; and Peck, John H., 4,392,407, CI. 89-33.0BB.
Pelosi, Stanford S., Jr., to Norwich Eaton Pharmaceuticals, Inc. 3-[[5-
(4-ChlorophenyI)furfurylidene]amino]-5-(substituted)-2-oxazolidi-
nones. 4,393,204, CI. 542-420.000.
Penco, Sergio: See —
Bargiotti, Alberto; Cassinelli, Giuseppe; Penco, Sergio; Arcamone,
Federico; and Casazza, Annamaria, 4,393,052, CI. 424-180.000.
Pendlebury, David: See —
Stables, Wilbur L.; Pendlebury, David; Saich, Anthony M.; and
Hamlyn, Maxwell C, 4,392,285, CI. 28-276.000.
Pennwalt Corporation: See —
Kamens, Emest R., 4,393,148, CI. 521-93.000.
Sandler, Stanley R.; and Bohen, Joseph M., 4,393,248, CI.
568-676.000.
Sprout, Oliver S., Jr., 4,393.093, CI. 427-40.000.
Pennzoil Company: See —
Drechsel, Erhart K.; Holcomb, Dysart E.; and Sardisco, John B.,
4,393,032, CI. 423-320.000.
Sardisco, John B.; and Holcomb, Dysart E., 4,393,030, CI.
423-167.000.
Perisic, Milan; Lumbers, Warwick J.; and Bone, John A., to Automatic
Rollers Doors Australia Pty., Ltd. Electrically-operated roller door
operating mechanism. 4,392,392, CI. 74-626.000.
Perkin-Elmer Corporation, The: See—
Voipe, Gerald T.; Laskoski, Leonard S.; Amodeo, Ralph J.; Swan-
son, William J.; and Gottesman, Jerome D., 4,393,352, CI.
329-50.000.
Perkins, David, Jr., to Corrugated Drum Systems, Inc. Carton with
integral closures. 4,392,607, CI. 229-39.00R.
Perl, Horst; Nussbaumer, Dietmar; Kluver, Horst; and Beer, Hans, to
Sartorius GmbH. Resorcinol or phloroglucinol condensation product
for aqueous mixture purification. 4,392,963, CI. 210-692000.
Permawick Bearing Corporation: See-
Abel, Martin L., 4,392,753. CI. 384-136.000.
Pemicano, Vincent S.; and Wright, Michael R. Reflective garment and
method of manufacturing same. 4,392,901, CI. 156-155.000.
Peters, Daniel G.: See —
Holtey, Thomas O.; Noyes, Steven S.; and Peters, Daniel G.,
4,393,461, CI. 364-900.000.
Peters, Karl-Clemens: See —
Hummerich, Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger, Franz; Immel,
Guenther; Kraus, Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-Clemens,
4,393,207, CI. 544-196.000.
Peters, Roswell D. M., to United Stttes of America, Army. Quartz
resonator processing system. 4,392,287, CI. 29-25.350.
Petersen, Uwe: See —
Sudler, Peter; Metzger, Karl G.; Voss, Eckart; Petersen, Uwe; and
Zeiler, Hans-Joachim, 4,393,051, CI. 424-180.000.
Peterson, Edward W.: See —
Lagus, Peter L.; Peterson, Edward W.; and Hicks, William O..
4,392,376, CI. 73-155.000.
Peterson, Terry M., to Chevron Research Company. Method for im-
proving the efficiency of a solar cell and an improved cadmium
sulfide/copper sulfide photovoltaic cell. 4,393,267, CI. 136-260.000.
Petre, John H.; and Cosgrove, Delos M., to Cleveland Clinic Founda-
tion, The. Infusion pump controller. 4,392,849, CI. 604-66.000.
Petrina, Robert J., to Bruce Industries, Inc. Repairable fluorescent lamp
ballast. 4,393,435, CI. 361-377.000.
Petrolite Corporation: See —
Thompson, Neil E. S.; Redmore, Derek; Oude Alink, Bemardus A.;
and Outlaw, Benjamin T., 4,393,026, CI. 422-12.000.
Petty-Weeks, C. Bruce: See—
Paschke, Edward E.; and Petty-Weeks. C. Bnice. 4.393.162. CI.
524-606.000.
Pfendler, Thomas: See —
Bauerlen, Hans; Pfendler, Thomas; and Wocher, Berthold,
4,392,383, CI. 73-724.000.
Pfizer Inc.: See —
Jasys, Vytautas J., 4,393,001, CI. 260-239.100.
Phillips, Bobby M., to Eastman Kodak Company. Spinneret orifice
cross-sections. 4,392,808, CI. 425-464.000.
Phillips Petroleum Company: S«—
Edmonds, James T., Jr., 4,393,197, CI. 528-388.000.
Funk, Gary L., 4,392,877, CI. 62-37.000.
Haws, John R., 4,393,170, CI. 525-89.000.
Witt, Donald R., 4,392,990. CI. 252-458.000.
Photon Chroma, Inc.: See —
Plumadore, John D., 4.392,734, CI 355-3.00R.
Pick. Emest, to Purdue Frederick Company, The. Apparatus for stor-
ing and dispensing liquid douche. 4,392,492, CI. 604-82.000.
Pierre, Joseph F.: See —
Yannopoulos. Lymperios N.; and Pierre, Joseph F., 4,392,991, CI.
252-466.00J.
Pilkington P. E. Limited: See-
Rogers, Philip J., 4,392,710, CI. 350-505.000.
Pioneer Electric Corporation: See—
Yokogawa, Tomoshisa; and Gomi, Shintaro, 4,393,513, CI.
455-243.000.
Pipe Systems, Incorporated: See —
Campbell, Steve, 4,392,294, CI. 29-451.000.
Pischtschan, Alfred: See-
Lindner, Christian; Ott, Karl-Heinz; and Pischtschan, Alfred.
4,393,172, CI. 525-310.000.
Pitches, Brian E.; Murray, Robert M. S.; and Rogers, Douglas J., to 501
Ferranti Limited. Capacitance measuring apparatus. 4,392,378, CI.
73-3O4.00C.
Piter, Hans; and Serapins, Klaus, to Felten & Guilleaume Carlswerk
AG. Arrangement for alignedly coupling two coated Iight<onduc-
tive fibers. 4,392,713, CI. 350-96.210.
Pithouse, Kenneth B.; and Swinmum, Christopher J., to Raychem
Limited. Device for enclosing objects. 4,392,898, CI. 156-85.000.
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See —
Couper, Robert A.; Frediani, John K.; and Lillie, Terrance L.,
4,393,377, CI. 340-731.000.
Di Giulio, Peter C, 4,393,386, CI. 346-75.000.
Soderberg, John H., 4,393,454, CI. 364-518.000.
Pizzuti, Donato F., to Polaroid Corporation. Folding camera with
viewfinder having independently mounted optical elements.
4,392,732, CI. 354-187.000.
Plascore, Inc.: See —
Hubner, Fritz, 4,393,323, CI. 313-110000.
Plastic Forming Company, Inc., The: See —
Schurman, Peter T., 4,393,023, CI. 264-150.000
Plesa, Laszio, to Aranykalasz Mgtsz. Universal manual grafting device.
4,392,304, CI. 30-178.000.
Plessey Company pic. The: See —
Culley, Emest, 4,393,490, CI. 370-13.000.
CuIIey, Emest, 4,393,490, CI. 370-13.000.
Plies, Erich: See —
Anger, Klaus; Frosien, Juergen; Lischke, Burkhard; Plies, Erich;
and Tonar, Klaus, 4,393,308, CI. 250-396.00R.
Plumadore, John D., to Photon Chroma, Inc. Electrophotographic
camera. 4,392,734, CI. 355-3.00R.
Polaroid Corporation: See —
Gaudiana, Russell A.; and Kalyanaraman, Palaiyur S., 4,393.194.
CI. 528-348.000.
Pizzuti, Donato F., 4,392,732, CI. 354-187.000.
Rogers, Howard G.; Gaudiana, Russell A.; Manello. Jeannette S.;
and Sahatjian, Ronald A., 4,393,196, CI. 528-363.000.
PI 32
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Politoys Ipari Szovetkezet: See —
Rubik, Emo. 4,392.323. CI. 46-l.(X)R.
Pomper. Seymour; and LaBaw. Glenn D.. to Nabisco Brands, Inc.
Bread mix and process. 4,393,084, CI. 426-19.000.
Ponticello. Gerald S.: See-
Baldwin. John J.; and Ponticello. Gerald S., 4,393,212. CI.
546-286.000.
Popkov, Igor v.: See —
Merenkov, Jury F.; Egorov, Vladimir D.; Stepanov. Valentin G.;
and Popkov, Igor V., 4,392,786, CI. 417-50.000.
Portalab Instruments Limited: See —
Rook. Graham A. W.; and Cameron. Colin H.. 4,392,746. CI.
356-409.000.
Porter. Warren W,, to NCR Corporation. Low insertion force printed
circuit card connector. 4,392,704, CI. 339-75.0MP.
Post Office, The: See—
Cochrane, Peter; and Kitchen, James A., 4,393,279, CI. 179-
175.31R.
Potash, Hanan, to Burroughs Corporation. Digital device for time-mul-
tiplexing multiple tasks. 4,393.465, CI. 364-900.000.
Potter, Ralph M., to General Electric Company. Method of coating a
fused silica envelope. 4,393,100, CI. 427-181.000.
Poupe, Oldrich. to Vysoka skola dopravy a spojov. Circuit arrangement
for a track circuit with multiple signal sources. 4,392.625. CI. 246-
34.0CT.
Pouradier. Jean-Marc E.: See —
Mouille. Rene' L.; Gallot, Jacques R.; and Pouradier, Jean-Marc E.,
4.392,781, CI. 416-223.00R.
Power Hybrids, Incorporated: See —
Hale. Raymond L., 4,393.392. CI. 357-74.000.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See —
Girgis, Mikhail M.. 4.393.189. CI. 528-155.000.
Greenberg, Charles B.. 4.393.095, CI. 427-87.000.
Prem Magnetics, Inc.: See —
Horton. Sunley K., 4.393,361, CI. 335-212.000.
Preuss, Dieter: See —
Gast, Uwe; Hennig, Eberhard; Preuss, Dieter; Taudt, Heinz; and
Wellendorf, Klaus. 4.393.399. CI. 358-80.000.
Prevo. Donald L. Device for spreading monolayered films. 4,392.450,
CI. 118-120.000.
Priester, Martin; and Loew, Peter, to Ciba-Geigy AG. Process for the
manufacture of anthraquinone compounds. 4,393,007, CI.
260-378.000.
Pritchard, Robert S.: See—
Olsen, John H.; and Pritchard, Robert S., 4,392.655. CI. 277-1.000.
Procter & Gamble Company. The: See —
Lucas. Donald S.; Stone, Roger L.; and Cooper. Eugene R.,
4.392.848, CI. 604-53.000.
Mao, Mark H. K.; Miller, Larry E.; and Weeman, John M.,
4,393,203, CI. 536-124.000.
Marsan, Mario S.; and Hartwell, Edward W., 4,392,862, CI.
604-366.000.
Proctor, Gary R., to Emhart Industries, Inc. Heating control system.
4,393.300. CI. 219-497.000.
Products Unlimited Corp.: See —
Schreiner. Gary W.; Kemp. Merle L., Jr.; and Chemoff. Edward
A, 4,393,359. CI. 335-128.000.
Propster, Mark A.: See —
Hohman, Charles M.; Propster, Mark A.; and Seng, Stephen,
4,392,310, CI. 34-172.000.
Pumpenfabrik Urach: See —
Hanafi, Nabil, 4,392,784, CI. 417-103.000.
Purcell, William F.: See-
Brown, Ross K.; Thompson, Raymond D.; Woods, Terrill W.;
Wright, Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes, William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546, CI. 180-326.000.
Purdue Frederick Company, The: See—
Pick, Ernest, 4.392,492. CI. 604-82.000.
Purdue Research Foundation: See —
White, Joe L.; and Ohlrogge, Alvin J., 4.393,082, CI. 426-2.000.
Pushee, Joan C; Harry, leuan L.; Beck, Martin H.; and Krishnakumar,
Suppayan M., to Continental Group, Inc., The. Solid stating.
4,392,804, CI. 425-174.80E.
Q-Dot, Inc.: See—
Linnenbrink, Thomas E.; and Gradl, David A., 4,393,357, CI.
333-165.000.
Quadracast, Inc.: See —
Tschantz, William H.. 4,392.566, CI. 198-509.000.
Quanex Corporation: See —
Miller, Ronald E.; O'Hara, James E.; and Rola, Arthur E.,
4,393,507, CI. 373-81.000.
Queue Systems, Inc.: See —
Farley, Max F.; and Fine, Laughton T., 4,392,514, Q. 137-624.200.
Quick-Rotan Elektromotoren GmbH: See —
Angersbach, Wolfgang; and Meier, Karl-Heinz, 4,393,343, CI.
318-640.000.
Quintanares, Joseph A.; See —
Mattingly, Glen R.; and Quintanares, Joseph A., 4,392,490, CI.
128-202.270.
R&D Associates: See —
Dooley, James L., 4,392,438, CI. 110-106.00R.
Rabenecker, Horst: See —
Eckstein, Wolfgang; Rabenecker, Horst; and Behnke, Jurgen,
4,392,389, CI. 73-864.910.
Radocaj, Mijo, to Dyneer Corporation. Belt tensioner. 4,392,840, CI.
474-117.000.
Radziwill, Wolfgang; Doring, Gunter; and Steinbusch, Hans, to U.S.
Philips Corporation. Magnetically controllable electronic switch.
4,393,317, CI. 307-309.000.
Raggio, Ivan J. Minimum temperature correction method for locating
and setting gas-lift valves. 4,392,532, CI. 166-372.000.
Rahwan, Ralf G.: See—
Witiak, Donald T.; and Rahwan, Ralf G., 4,393,226, CI.
549-433.000.
Railroad Service, Inc.: See —
Nyland, Clifford A., 4,392,433, CI. 104-9.000.
Ralston Purina Company: See —
Sullins, Richard D.; and Lanter, Kent J., 4,393,087, CI. 426-74.000.
Ramdohr, Detlef; Knauf, Walter; Brensing, Karl-Heinz; and Kummerl-
ing, Rolf, to Mannesmann Aktiengesellschaft. Diagonal rolling of
hollow stock. 4,392,369, CI. 72-96.000.
Ramer, Paul C, to Alpine Research, Inc. Integral ski binding. 4,392,666,
CI. 280-614.000.
Rankin, E. Edward, to Gearhart Industries, Inc. Early gas detection
system for a drill stem test. 4,392,377. CI. 73-155.000.
Rann. Harald. to E.C.H. Will (GmbH & Co.). Apparatus for severing
running paper webs or the like. 4.392,402, CI. 83-345.000.
Ransom. Stephen A.: See —
Stickel. Tedd K.; and Ransom, Stephen A.. 4,393.315, CI.
307-264.000.
Rao, Krishna K.: See-
Yang, Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang, I-Der, 4,392,986,
CI. 252-435.000.
Rapp, Gunter: See —
Mittelbach, Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss, Werner; Hoffmann,
Dietrich; Siebrecht, Gunter; Kriechbaum, Karl; and Rapp, Gun-
ter, 4,393,290. CI. 200-148.00A.
Rapp, Robert A.: See —
Yang, Chiang Y.; and Rapp, Robert A., 4,392,928, CI. 204-130.000.
Raquet. Erwin. to Fried. Krupp Huttenwerke AG. Rotating body
sympathetic vibration absorber. 4,392,681, CI. 295-7.000.
Rasehorn, Hans-Jurgen: See —
Wyzgol, Ewald; Rasehorn, Hans-Jurgen; and Pechau, Gerhard,
4,392,399, CI. 83-106.000.
Rasekhi, Houshang; and Nelson, Alfred M., to Wang Laboratories, Inc.
Magnetic toner transfer method and apparatus. 4,393,389, CI.
346-153.100.
Rasmussen, David J.: See —
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Carl E.; Kerr, Douglas P.; Ras-
mussen, David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W.,
4,393,491, CI. 370-13.000.
Rasmussen, Erling E., to Motorola Inc. Multithreshold A/D converter
utilizing error amplifiers. 4,393,368, CI. 340-347.0AD.
Rau, Karlheinz: See —
Bonewitz, Hans-Ulrich; Muhlich, Albert; and Rau, Karlheinz,
4,392,715, CI. 350-96.330.
Raven, Johannes G.; and Van Buul, Marinus C. W., to U.S. Philips
Corporation. Video signal processing circuit for noise reduction.
4,393,396, CI. 358-36.000.
Raychem Limited: See —
Pithouse, Kenneth B.; and Swinmum, Christopher J., 4,392,898, CI.
156-85.000.
RCA Corporation: See —
Botez, Dan, 4.393,504, CI. 372-45.000.
Goldstein. Bernard; Dresner. Joseph; and Szostak. Daniel J.,
4,393,348, CI. 324-158.0OR.
Hacke. Joseph F.; and Bazin. Lucas J.. 4,393,395, Cl. 358-23.000.
Holmes, David D., 4,393.397. Cl. 358-36.000.
Hurst. Robert N.. 4.393.415. Cl. 360-9.100.
Mehrotra, Gopi N., 4,393,489, Cl. 369-86000.
Pampalone, Thomas R., 4,393,160, Cl. 524-360.000.
Reitmeier, Glenn A., 4,393,414, Cl. 358-336.000.
Schelhorn, Robert L., 4,393,438. Cl. 361-401.000.
Shaw, Joseph M.. 4.392.299. Cl. 29-590.000.
Smith. Edgar M., 4,392,834, Cl. 445-6.000.
Straub, Paul J., Jr., 4,393,487, Cl. 369-74.000.
Weinberg, Leonard, 4,393,444, Cl. 364-200.000.
Zorbalas, George S.. 4.393,421, Cl. 360-73.000.
REB Manufacturing, Inc.: See —
Smalley, Raymond L., 4.392,771. Cl. 414-545.000.
Redden. Raymond L., to Baker International Corporation. Apparatus
for compiling and monitoring subterranean well-test data. 4.393.485.
Cl. 367-25.000.
Redmond. Harry W.; and Jeannotte. Raymond V., to Norjay Services,
Ltd. Skate blade. 4.392.658, Cl. 280-11.180.
Redmore, Derek: See —
Thompson, Neil E. S.; Redmore, Derek; Oude Alink, Bemardus A.;
and Outlaw, Benjamin T., 4,393,026, Cl. 422-12.000.
Redox Technologies, Inc.: See —
Kollar, John, 4,393,252, Cl. 568-852.000.
Redpath, Diane L.: See —
Bakos, Peter; Darrow, Russell E.; Funari, Joseph; and Redpath,
Diane L., 4,392,617, Cl. 239-290.000.
Reed, Charles F.; and Morrow, Charles M., to Avery International
Corporation. Sur trip label stripper. 4,392.585, Cl. 221-1.000.
Reed, Russell, Jr.; Burdette, George W.; Meyers, Gary W.; and Vuono,
William R., to United States of America, Navy. Ramjet fuel.
4,392,895, Cl. 149-19.300.
Reeves, Jerry L., to Towmotor Corporation. Load lifting carriage
having side shift adjusUble forks. 4,392,772. Cl. 414-667.000.
Refarmed S.A.: See — _
Gonella. Jacques. 4.393,053. Cl. 424-180.000.
July 12, 198!
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 33
Reiche, Horst: See—
Schimitzek, Gunter; and Reiche, Horst, 4,392,331, Cl. 51-55.000.
Reimschuessel, Herbert K.; and DeBona, Bruce T., to Allied Corpora-
tion. Preparation of p-(l,l-dimethyl-2-hydroxyethyl)benzoic acid.
4,393,233, Cl. 562-473.000.
Reinartz, Hans-Dieter: See —
Schopper, Beiiid; Lowe, Derek; Reinartz, Hans-Dieter; and Tan-
dler, Peter, 4,392,691, Cl. 303-6.00C.
Reiner, Alberto, to D and D Sri. Nicotinoyl esters for analgesic and
anti-infiammatory treatment. 4,393,067, Cl. 424-256.000.
Reischl, Artur; and Wagner, Kuno, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Pro-
cess for the preparation of polyaddition products of isocyanates and
denatured biomasses, their use as reactive fillers and as plant nutrients
and a process for the production of sheets or shaped articles using the
polyaddition products. 4,393.166. Cl. 525-27.000.
Reitmeier. Glenn A., to RCA Corporation. Horizontal-rate phase-
change of TV pixel distribution among multiple recorder tracks for
dropout concealment. 4.393.414, Cl. 358-336.000.
Reliance Electric Co.: See —
Bishop, Larry D., 4,393,492, Cl. 370-15.000.
Brown, Harold J., 4,393,316, Cl. 307-270.000.
Rengo Co., Ltd.: See —
Tokuno, Masateru; Ishii, Yoshinori; and Hoshiyama, Hidetoshi,
4,392,910, Cl. 156-361.000.
REPA Feinstanzwerk: See—
Wier, Franz, 4,392,282, Cl. 24-230.0AL.
REPA FeinsUnzwerk GmbH: See—
Fohl, Artur, 4,392,619, Cl. 242-107.200.
Fohl, Artur, 4,392,671, Cl. 280-802.000.
Reseal Container Corporation of America, The: See—
Berger, Richard F.; Pardes, Greg; and Gerber, Bernard R.,
4,392,576, Cl. 215-l.OOC.
Research Council of Alberta: See —
Kessick, Michael A., 4,392,944, Cl. 208-188.000.
Return on Investment Corporation: See —
Hilton, Carl W., 4.392,650, Cl. 273-29.00A.
Revue TTiommen AG: See —
Mettler. Eduard, 4,392,750, Cl. 368-228.000.
Rexnord Inc.: See —
Smith, Larry C, 4.392,795, Cl. 418-31.000.
Reynolds, Blake: See —
Marion, Charles P.; Brent, Albert; Richter. George N.; Crouch.
William B.; Child. Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,392.869.
Cl. 48-197.00R.
Reynolds. James T.. to Dana Corporation. Center bearing bracket.
4.392.694, Cl. 308-184.00R.
Rhea Vendors S.r.l.: See —
Majer, Cario D., 4,392,593, Cl. 222-305.000.
Rheinmetall GmbH: See-
Koine, Richard, 4,392,414, Cl. 89-35.00R.
Richard, Henry J.: See —
Gidge, Kenneth N.; and Richard, Henry J., 4,392,360, Cl.
62-249.000.
Richard Wolf GmbH: See—
Hiltebrandt. Siegfried, 4,392,485, Cl. 128-6.000.
Richards, Glenn L.: See —
Cray, Edgar R.; Davis. Russell R.; Knapp. Maynard K.; Richards.
Glenn L.; Root. Bernard H.; and Woodruff, William W.,
4,393,495, Cl. 370-56.000.
Richgels, Henry J.: See —
Gassaway, Gary S.; Richgels, Henry J.; and Foster, James I.,
4,393,488, Cl. 367-75.000.
Richter, George N.: See —
Marion, Charles P.; Brent, Albert; Richter, George N.; Crouch,
William B.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,392,869,
Cl. 48-197.00R.
Ricoh Co., Ltd.: See—
Jinnai, Koichiro; Horike, Masanori; Iwasaki, Kyuhachiro; and
Kodama, Yutaka, 4,393,385, Cl. 346-75.000.
Sekigawa, Keiji, 4,393,452, Cl. 364-514.000.
Yamada, Kunihiro, 4,393,482, Cl. 365-236.000.
Ridge, Warren J.; and Roberts, Dennis C, to Wespac. Multiple camera
automatic digitizer and method. 4,393,410, Cl. 358-285.000.
Riebel, Hans-Jochem; Eue, Ludwig; and Faust, Wilfried, to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft. N-N-Bis(haloacyl)-diaza-cycloalkanes for pro-
tecting plants from herbicide damage. 4,392,882, Cl. 71-92.000.
Rigler, Josef K.; Wienhofer, Ekkehard; Leithauser, Horst; and Truken-
brod, Karl, to Chemische Werke Huls AG. Fire retardant fine partic-
ulate expandable styrene polymers. 4,393,146, Cl. 521-56.000.
Riise Engineering Company, Inc.: See —
Barton, Dale S.; and Heck, Richard M., 4,392.765, Cl. 414-30.000.
Rinner, Bemhard: See —
Weber, Ralph; Rollinger, Bemt; Nagl, Michael; and Rinner, Bem-
hard, 4,392,637, Cl. 266-265.000.
Ritchey, Charles R.: See-
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson. Avery A., Jr.; Walker, Harrel L.;
Bowler, Eleanor G.; and Ritchey, Charles R., 4,393,048, Cl.
424-132.000.
Ritzer, Alan; Hajjar, Abraham L.; McEntee, Harry R.; and Shade, Ray
W., to General Electric Company. Redistribution of polysilanes in
high boiling residues. 4,393,229, Cl. 556430.000.
Rivier, Jean E. F.: See —
Vale, Wylie W., Jr.; Rivier, Jean E. F.; and Brown, Marvin R.,
4,393,050, Cl. 424-177.000.
Rivollet, Marc; and Monzer, Pierre, to Eublissements Femand Ber-
chet. Direct-current electric switch. 4,393,284, Cl. 200-60.000.
1032O.G.--33
Rizzo, Joyce A.: See—
ChiefTo, Anibole B.; Davis, Howard K.; and Rizzo, Joyce A.,
4,392,870. Cl. 55-20.000.
Roberge, Gerald; and Doyon, Andre, to Hydro Quebec. Variable
inductor. 4.393.157, Cl. 323-355.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See—
Bauerlen, Hans; Pfendler, Thomas; and Wocher, Berthold,
4.392.383. CI. 73-724.000.
Gast. Theodor; and Binder. Kurt. 4,392,632, Cl. 251-65.000.
Grunwald, Werner; Zehender, Ernst; Friese, Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz, Jurgen; Neu, Hans; Kimer, Kuno; and Schumacher,
Bemd. 4,393,282, Cl. 200-19.00R.
Gunther, Dieter; Bertsch, Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold,
Herbert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt, Michael, 4,392,470, Cl.
123-440.000.
Knetsch, Manfred; and Romann, Peter, 4,392,386, Cl. 73-861.760.
Uhmann, Klaus, 4,393,406, Cl. 358-160.000.
Neuhaus, Dieter; Sohner, Gerhard; Ruf, Walter; Jesse, Erich; and
Roth, Helmut, 4,393,432, Cl. 361-104.000.
Stumpp, Gerhard; and Wessel, Wolf, 4,392,352, Cl. 60-602.000.
Wessel, Wolf, 4,392,469, Cl. 123-387.000.
Robert Burkle GmbH & Co.: See—
Bohn, Hans; Stein, Wolfgang; Bemsau, Peter; and Staubitzer, Fred,
4,392,909, Cl. 156-306.900.
Roberts. Dennis C: See-
Ridge, Warren J.; and Roberts, Dennis C, 4,393,410, Cl.
358-285.000.
Roberts, Norman L.; and Whitaker, Graham, to Imperial Chemical
Industries PLC. Preparation of 2-chloro-5-trinuoromethylpyridine
and 2-chloro-5-perchlorofluoromethylpyridines. 4,393,214, Cl.
546-345.000.
Robin, Wallace R.; See—
Garrett, David M.; and Robin, Wallace R., 4,393,066, Cl.
424-251.000.
Robinson, Leon R.: See —
Hammond, David C; Elchenko. Stephen M.; Tralies. John M.;
Verburgt. Peter W.; and Robinson, Leon R.. 4.393,483, Cl.
367-13.000.
Rockwell International Corporation: See —
Darby, Vene L., 4,392,602. Cl. 228-118.000.
Molina, Orlando G., 4,392,982, Cl. 252-408.100.
Rogers, Douglas J.: See^—
Pitches, Brian E.; Murray, Robert M. S.; and Rogers, Douglas J.,
4,392,378, Cl. 73-3O4.0OC.
Rogers, George L. Lineal multi-cylinder hydraulic pumping unit for
wells. 4,392,792, Cl. 417-400.000.
Rogers, Howard G.; Gaudiana, Russell A.; Manello, Jeannette S.; and
Sahatjian, Ronald A., to Polaroid Corporation. Polymers containing
recurring units from dienoic acid. 4,393,196, Cl. 528-363.000. ^
Rogers, Philip J., to Pilkington P. E. Limited. Optical apparatus.
4,392,710, Cl. 350-505.000.
Rogic, Milorad M.; and Oxenrider, Bryce C, to Allied Corporation.
Cleavage of dialkoxyketoxime. 4.393,215, Cl. 548-125.000.
Rohde, Robert S.: See—
Buser, Rudolph G.; Osche, Gregory R.; Nomiyama, Neal T.; and
Rohde, Robert S.. 4.393.517. Cl. 455-608.000
Rola. Arthur E.: See — ^•
Miller. Ronald E.; O'Hara. James E.; and Rola. ;%thur E.,
4,393,507, Cl. 373-81.000.
Roley, Robert D., to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Belleville spring loaded
seal. 4,392,657, Cl. 277-95.000.
Rollinger, Bemt: See-
Weber, Ralph; Rollinger, Bemt; Nagl, Michael; and Rinner, Bera-
hard, 4,392,637, Cl. 266-265.000.
Rolscreen Company: See —
Buhr, Ten-y J., 4,392,330, Cl. 49-381.000.
Romann, Peter: See —
Knetsch, Manfred; and Romann, Peter, 4,392,386, Cl. 73-861.760.
Ronco, Karl: See —
Muller, Rolf; Roueche, Armand; Muller, Paul; and Ronco, Karl,
4,392,999, Cl. 260-157.000.
Rook, Graham A. W.; and Cameron, Colin H., to Portalab InstrumenU
Limited. Portable photometer. 4,392.746, Cl. 356-409.000.
Root, Bemard H.: See-
Cray, Edgar R.; Davis, Russell R.; Knapp, Maynard K.; Richards,
Glenn L.; Root, Bemard H.; and Woodruff. William W..
4,393.495. Cl. 370-56.000.
Roper Corporation: See —
Goertzen. Gerold G., 4,392,538, Cl. 180-I9.00R.
Rose, Carl J.: See-
Cole, William G.; Goudie, Alexander C; and Rose, Carl J.,
4,393,079, Cl. 424-331.000.
Roth, Helmut: See—
Neuhaus, Dieter; Sohner, Gerhard; Ruf, Walter; Jesse, Erich; and
Roth, Helmut. 4.393,432. Cl. 361-104.000.
Roth. Robert B.; and Seitzer. Walter H.. to Suncor, Inc. Recovery of
bitumen from tar sands sludge using additional water. 4.392.941. Cl.
208-11. OLE.
Rotondo. Richard. Rocker arm adapter for altering cam profile of
exhaust valve. 4.392.461. Cl. 123-90.160.
Roueche. Armand: See —
Muller, Rolf; Roueche. Armand; Muller. Paul; and Ronco. Karl.
4.392.999, Cl. 260-157.000.
Rowe Intemational, Inc.: See —
Scalera, Frank T., 4,392.588, Cl. 222-129.400.
PI 34
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Royer, Daniel: See —
Guedj, Richard; Dieuksaint, Eugene; and Royer, Daniel,
4,393,268, CI. 178-18.000.
Rubik, Emo, to Politoys Ipari Szovetkezet. Toy with turnable elements
for forming geometric shapes. 4,392,323, CI. 46-l.OOR.
Rudolf, Susan A.: See —
Rudolf Warren P.; and Rudolf, Susan A., 4,392.311, CI. 36-7.300.
Rudolf, Warren P.; and Rudolf, Susan A. Expandable overshoe.
4,392,311, CI. 36-7.300.
Ruedin, Yves: See —
Ganguillet, Claude; Ruedin, Yves; and Sallin, Michel, 4,392,720, CI.
350-357.000.
Ruf, Max, to Audi NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft. Device for
lubricating a rotary piston air pump. 4,392,797, CI. 418-91.000.
Ruf. Walter: See—
Neuhaus, Dieter; Sohner, Gerhard; Ruf, Walter; Jesse, Erich; and
Roth, Helmut, 4,393,432, CI. 361-104.000.
Rufford, Roger V., to Fairchild Camera & Instrument Corp. Random
access memory preset circuitry. 4,393,473, CI. 365-190.000.
Rule Industries, Inc.: See —
Muessel, Dan C; and Hagopian, Nubar. 4,392,635, CI. 254-344.000.
Runge, Richard J.: See —
Thompson, Don D.; Brown, Robert J. S.; and Runge, Richard J.,
4,393,486, CI. 367-73.000.
Ruske, Manfred: 5*^ —
Patsch, Manfred; Ruske, Manfred; and Hahn, Erwin, 4,393,005, CI.
260-245.730.
Russell, B. Carson. Drawer building system having fastening guns.
4,392,599, CI. 227-40.000.
Russey, James W., to Towmotor Corporation. Lift mast assembly.
4,392,554, CI. 187-9.00E.
Ryco Graphic Manufacturing, Inc.: See —
Switall, Thomas G., 4,392,508, CI. 137-99.000.
S-Cubed: See —
Lagus, Peter L.; Peterson, Edward W.; and Hicks, William O.,
4,392.376, CI. 73-155.000.
S R I International: See-
Manser, Gerald E., 4,393,199, CI. 528-408.000.
Saab-Scania Aktiebolag: See —
Folkesson, Hans; and Uberg, Ulf, 4,392,368, CI. 72-63.000.
Safdy, Max E.: See —
Schut. Robert N.; Safdy, Max E.; and Hong, Enrique, 4,393,081. CI.
424-274,000.
Sagae, Syoji: See —
Matsuda, Yasumasa; Mukumoto, Kyoji; Sagae, Syoji; and
Kasahara, Masatoshi, 4,393,388, CI. 346-140.00R.
Sagami Chemical Research Center: See —
Ichikawa, Masani, 4,393.144, CI. 518-715.000.
Sagishima, Takayuki: 5ee —
Ikushima, Hiroshi; Baba, Takaaki; Sagishima, Takayuki; and Ta-
naka. Masanobu, 4,393,400, CI. 358-92.000.
Sahara, Masayoshi; Nakai, Masaaki; Ishida, Tokuji; and Hosomizu,
Hiroshi, to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha. Camera exposure
control devices with smoothing circuit. 4,392,727, CI. 354-43.000.
Sahatjian, Ronald A.: See —
Rogers, Howard G.; Gaudiana, Russell A.; Manello. Jeannette S.;
and Sahatjian. Ronald A.. 4.393.196, CI. 528-363.000.
Saich. Anthony M.: See —
Stables. Wilbur L.; Pendlebury. David; Saich, Anthony M.; and
Hamlyn, Maxwell C, 4,392,285, CI. 28-276.000.
Saint-Gobain Vitrage: See —
Schwarzenberg, Norbert; Ueberwolf, Heinz; and Kaesmacher,
Jakob, 4,392,404, CI. 83-886.000.
Saito, Junichi; and Kume, Toyohiko, to Nihon Tokushu Noyaku Seizo
K.K. Preparation of bis-(l-bromo-2,3,3-trichloro-2-propenyl) ether.
4,392,929, CI. 204-1 58.0HA.
Saito, Norio: See —
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami. Junzo; Sasaoka, Michio;
Saito, Norio; and Shiroi, Takashi, 4,392,923, CI. 204-59.00R.
Saito, Shigemasa, to Fuji Electric Company, Ltd. Method of manufac-
turing a movable contact member. 4,392,302, CI. 29-879.000.
Saito, Yoshitada: See —
Yano, Akira; Saito, Yoshitada; and Kasahara, Yasushi, 4,393,134,
CI. 435-29.000.
Sakakibara Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Sakakibara, Syoji, 4,392,896, CI. 156-39.000.
Sakakibara, Syoji, to Sakakibara Sangyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of
producing a gypsum plaster board. 4,392,896, CI. 156-39.000.
Sakamaki, Hisashi: See —
Inuzuka, Tsuneki; Murakami. Koichi; Kurita, Kenji; and Sakamaki,
Hisashi, 4,392,741, CI. 355-14.00R.
Sakano, Kozaburo: See —
Maruhashi, Yoshitsugu; Tanikawa, Isao; Hirata, Sadao; Yazaki,
Jinichi; and Sakano, Kozaburo, 4,393,106, CI. 428-35.000.
Sakcriska, Glenn, to Canadian Skate Contours, Ltd. Ice skate sharp-
ener. 4,392,332, CI. 51-92.0BS.
Sakudo, Noriyuki; Tokiquchi, Katsumi; Koike, Hidemi; Kanomata,
Ichiro; and Nakashima, Humihiko, to Hitachi, Ltd. Microwave
plasma ion source. 4,393,333, CI. 315-111.810.
Sakurai, Yoshifumi, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Multichannel mag-
netic head. 4,393,427. CI. 360-112.000.
Salk Institute for Biological Studies. The: See —
Vale, Wylie W., Jr.; Rivier, Jean E. F.; and Brown. Marvin R.,
4.393.050. CI. 424-177.000.
Sallin. Michel: See —
Ganguillet. Claude; Ruedin. Yves; and Sallin, Michel. 4,392,720, CI.
350-357.000.
Salzman. Norman; and Wellner. Edward. Body coordination training
aid. 4.392.830. CI. 434-258.000.
Sanders, Bernard, to Bonar Horticulture, Ltd. Plant growing unit,
method and system. 4,392,327, CI. 47-59.000.
Sandler, Stanley R.; and Bohen, Joseph M., to Pennwalt Corporation.
Flame reUrded halogenated polyol. 4,393,248, CI. 568-676.000.
Sano, Kazuhiko: See —
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane, Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4,393,398, CI.
358-76.000.
Sano, Yasuro, to Janome Sewing Machine Co., Ltd. Sewing machine
with a cyclic pattern stitching device. 4,392,442, CI. 1 12-275.000.
Sapp. John B.. Jr.: See —
Hanson. Harry T.; and Sapp. John B.. Jr.. 4.393.241, CI. 568-49.000.
Sardisco, John B.; and Holcomb, Dysart E., to Pennzoil Company.
Upgrading of phosphate ore. 4,393,030, CI. 423-167.000.
Sardisco, John B.: See —
Drechsel, Erhart K.; Holcomb, Dysart E.; and Sardisco, John B..
4,393,032, CI. 423-320.000.
Sartorius GmbH: See —
Perl, Horst; Nussbaumer, Dietmar; Kluver, Horst; and Beer, Hans,
4,392,963, CI. 210-692.000.
Sasagawa, Masaru; Umeda, Tatsuo; and Kushima, Mamoru, to Honda
Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Trimming and piercing apparatus.
4,392,400, CI. 83-185.000.
Sasai, Mitsuo; Tomikawa, Kiyozi; and Kajiwara, Kazuo, to Nittetsu
Steel Drum Co., Ltd. Method and apparatus for forming drum seam.
4,392,295, CI. 29-509.000.
Sasaki, Takashi; Hagiwara, Miyuki; Hosoi, Fumio; and Takagi, Tohru,
to Japan Atomic Energy Research Institute. Polymer compositions.
4,393,165, CI. 525-10.000.
Sasano. Yoshiro: See —
Takeda. Koichi; and Sasano. Yoshiro. 4.393,449. CI. 364-474.000.
Sasaoka. Michio: See —
Torii. Sigeru; Tanaka. Hideo; Nokami. Junzo; Sasaoka. Michio;
Saito. Norio; and Shiroi, Takashi, 4,392.923, CI. 204-59.00R.
Sasaoka, Takeshi: See —
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane, Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4,393,398, CI.
358-76.000.
Sato, Hideki: See—
Itsubo, Junichi; Mori, Fumio; and Sato, Hideki, 4,392,581, CI.
215-348.000.
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu, Haruyoshi; Fujita, Yutaka; Tazume, Masayuki;
Takeuchi, Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi, Hiroyuki, to Dainippon Mk &
Chemicals Inc. l-Cyclohexyl-2-cyclohexylphenylethane derivatives.
4,393,258, CI. 585-25.000.
Sato, Koichiro: See —
Fujii, Kunihiko; Hirosaki, Yukihiro; Nishiyama, Yoshihisa; and
Sato, Koichiro, 4,392.535. CI. 177-1.000.
Sato. Kokichi: See—
Maekawa, Hideyuki; Hiramoto. Shinji; Itaya. Kozo; Sato. Kokichi;
and Nishida, HiroUka, 4,392,577, CI. 215-32.000.
Sato, Nobukatsu: See —
Inoue, Koji; Sato, Nobukatsu; and Tamura, Takashi, 4,393,219, CI.
548-534.000.
Sato, Yoshinari; and Teraji, Tsutomu, to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co.,
Ltd. Dihydropyridine derivative, and pharmaceutical composition
comprising the same. 4,393,070, CI. 424-266.000.
Sato, Yoshito; and Takahashi, Tomoyuki, to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu
Seisakusho. Final drive assembly for vehicles. 4,392,396, CI.
74-785.000.
Sauer, Philip H.: See—
Huck, Charles M.; Studer, John E.; and Sauer, Philip H., 4,392.860,
CI. 604-212.000.
Saurer-Allma GmbH: See —
Grill. Werner. 4.392.341, CI. 57-90.000.
Savin Corporation: See —
Landa, Bcnzion, 4,392,742, CI. 355-15.000.
Sawada, Jiro; Hanada, Kazunori; Tamai. Masaharu; Morimoto. Shigeo;
and Omura. Sadafumi. to Taisho Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd. Epoxysuc-
cinic acid derivatives. 4.393.228. CI. 549-549.000.
Scalera. Frank T.. to Rowe International. Inc. Nozzle assembly for cold
drink merchandiser. 4.392.588. CI. 222-129.400.
Scansaroli. Michael N.: See —
Whalin. Jeffery A.; Shanley, Charles W.; Scansaroli. Michael N.;
and Dworsky. Lawrence N., 4,393,131, CI. 430-320.000.
Schadlich, Gunther: See —
Moraw, Roland; and Schadlich, Gunther, 4,392,711, CI.
350-361.000.
Schalch, Eugen: See —
Alder, Hanspeter; and Schalch, Eugen, 4,392,925, CI. 204-67.000.
Scharf, William D.: See—
Merkel. George; and Scharf. William D.. 4.393.509. CI.
376-156.000.
Schelhom. Robert L.. to RCA Corporation. Porcelain coated metal
boards having interconnections between the face and reverse surfaces
thereof 4.393.438. CI. 361-401.000.
Schelling & Co.: See-
Ess. Wilfried. 4.392.401. CI. 83-219.000.
Schenk, Gunther; Bergthaller, Peter; Wolfrum, Gerhard; and Stolzen-
burg, Rudolf, to Agfa-Gevaert Aktiengesellschaft. Photographic
JULY 12, 198;
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 35
recording material with arylazocyanoacetic ester dye releasers.
4,393,132, CI. 430-562.000.
Schepotin, Sergei G.: See —
Glebov, Vladimir P.; Krivtsov, Georgy V.; Danchenkov, Jury V.;
Khukhry, Sergei A.; and Schepotin, Sergei G., 4,392,567, CI.
198-544.000.
Scherler, Alfred: See—
Berischinger, Hans; and Scherler, Alfred, 4,392,954, CI.
210-195.300.
Scheuermann, Rolf: See —
Leifeld, Ferdinand; Marx, Hans-Jurgen; and Scheuermann, Rolf,
4,392,275, CI. 19-81.000.
Schiek, James M.: See —
Bloemers, James L.; Schiek, James M.; Frazzell, Michael E.; and
Karls, Michael A., 4,392,779, CI. 415-141.000.
Schimitzek, Gunter; and Reiche, Horst. Clampable apparatus for grind-
ing spherical surfaces. 4,392,331, CI. 51-55.000.
Schlicht, Raymond C, to Texaco Inc. Molybdenum-zinc dialkyldithio-
phosphates as lubricant additives. 4,392,966, CI. 252-32.70E.
Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Bald, Wilfried, 4,392,367, CI. 72-12.000.
Schlueter, Gert; and Schuster, Wilhelm, to Battelle-Institut e.V.
Method and device for examining urine for particulate constituents.
4,393,141, CI. 436-63.000.
Schmatz, Jurgen: See —
Grunwald, Werner; Zehender, Ernst; Friese, Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz, Jurgen; Neu, Hans; Kimer, Kuno; and Schumacher,
Bemd, 4,393,282, CI. 200-19.00R.
Schmid, Gerhard E.: See —
Greschner, Johann; Kraus, Georg; and Schmid, Gerhard E..
4.393.127, CI. 43O-5.000.
Schmidt, Edward M.; and Kahl, George D., to United States of Amer-
ica, Army. Gaseous blast reducer. 4,392,412, CI. 89-14.00D.
Schmidt, Johan M.: See —
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; Gielis, Gerardus C. M.; Schmidt,
Johan M.; and Schoonheijm, Harry B., 4,393,273, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Schmidt, Klaus, to Carl Freudenberg. Firma. Filter packing. 4.392.876.
CI. 55-524.000.
Schmidt. Robert J., to UOP Inc. Hydration of olefms. 4.393,256. CI.
568-907.000.
Schmidt, Terrance C, to Electrohome Limited. Regulation of the EHT
voltage of a CRT. 4,393,336, CI. 315-387.000.
Schmitt, Helmut; Strewe, Wolfgang; and Schurig. Helmuth. to Uhde
GmbH. Electrolysis cell. 4.392,937, CI. 204-269.000.
Schnurle, Hans: See —
Gunther, Dieter; Bertsch, Richard; Bottcher, Siegfried; Arnold,
Herbert; Schnurle, Hans; and Horbelt. Michael. 4,392,470. CI.
123-440.000.
Schoen. David A.: See —
Jackson. Tee-Squant-Nee; Vernon, Paul M.; and Schoen, David A.,
4,393,498, CI. 371-20.000.
Scholz, Romanus: See —
Hofbauer, Peter; Scholz, Romanus; Heidemeyer, Paulus; and Zim-
mermann, Frank, 4,392,394, CI. 74-689.000.
Schoonheijm, Harry B.: See —
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; Gielis, Gerardus C. M.; Schmidt,
Johan M.; and Schoonheijm, Harry B., 4,393,273, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Schopper, Bemd, to ITT Industries, Inc. Pressure regulator. 4,392,51 1,
CI. 137-493.200.
Schopper, Bemd; Lowe, Derek; Reinartz, Hans-Dieter; and Tandler,
Peter, to ITT Industries, Inc. Dual-circuit pressure control valves.
4,392,691, CI. 303-6.00C.
Schrader, Alfons; and Schreiner, Waldemar, to Babcock Textilmas-
chinen GmbH. Apparatus for heat treating a continuously moving
web. 4,392,309, CI. 34-54.000.
Schreiner, Gary W.; Kemp, Merle L., Jr.; and Chemoff, Edward A., to
Products Unlimited Corp. Electromagnetic relay. 4,393,359, CI.
335-128.000.
Schreiner, Waldemar: See —
Schrader, Alfons; and Schreiner, Waldemar, 4,392,309, CI.
34-54.000.
Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, to Boehringer Mannheim
GmbH. Process for the selective separation of endoproteases.
4,393,139, CI. 435-219.000.
Schrotz, Kurt; and Schwobel, Richard, to Esselte Pendaflex Corpora-
tion. Belt printing mechanism having improved catch mechanism for
detenting positioning wheel. 4.392.424. CI. 101-111.000.
Schubert, Fritz. Orrery. 4,392,831, CI. 434-291.000.
Schuck, Lee R. See-
Calkins, James D.; Bushong, Eugene E.; and Schuck, Lee R.,
4,393,313, CI. 250-560.000.
Schultz, Donald L., to Clark Equipment Company. Pivoted steering
column for lift truck. 4,392,670, CI. 280-775.000.
Schulz, Walther: See-
Wagner, FriU; Lindorfer, Walter; Jahn-Held, Wilhelm; and Schulz,
Walther, 4,392,892, CI. 134-25.100.
Schumacher. Bemd: See —
Grunwald. Werner; Zehender, Emst; Friese, Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz, Jurgen; Neu, Hans; Kimer, Kuno; and Schumacher,
Bemd, 4,393,282, CI. 200-19.00R.
Schumacher, Ralf: See-
Struck, Carl-Heinz; and Schumacher, Ralf, 4,392,824, CI.
432-180.000.
Schumann, Klaus: See—
Altenschopfer. Theodor; and Schumann. Klaus. 4.392.977. CI.
252-174.190.
Schuning. George F.: See —
Fulk. James B.; McKeefry, Jerry L.; Schuning, George F.; and
Bradley, John J., 4,392.844, CI. 493-399.000.
Schurig, Helmuth: See —
Schmitt, Helmut; Strewe, Wolfgang; and Schurig, Helmuth,
4,392,937, CI. 204-269.000.
Schurman, Peter T., to Plastic Forming Company, Inc., The. Method
for preparing a parison and transferring it to a molding machine.
4,393.023, CI. 264-150.000.
Schuster, Wilhelm: See —
Schlueter, Gert; and Schuster, Wilhelm, 4,393.141, CI. 436-63.000.
Schut, Robert N.; Safdy, Max E.; and Hong, Enrique, to Miles Labora-
tories, Inc. Methyl 3-acetamido-2-<5-methoxy-indol-3-yl) propanoate
and hypotensive use thereof 4,393,081. CI. 424-274,000
Schutt, Hermann, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the prepara-
tion of the highly pure enzyme kallikrein from swine pancreas ex-
tracts. 4,393,140, CI. 435-226.000.
Schwager, Frederic A., to Mattel, Inc. Self-locking two-part fastener.
4,392,279, CI. 24-22 1. OOR.
Schwartz, Alan R.: See —
Marshall, Harry L.; and Schwartz, Alan R.. 4,393,118, CI.
428-403.000.
Schwarz, Richard A., to Cosden Technology, Inc. Expandable poly-
meric styrene particles. 4,393,147, CI. 521-60.000,
Schwarzenbach, Alfred, to BBC Brown, Boveri & Company Limited,
Constant pressure air storage installation with water supply for gas
turbine power plants, 4,392,354, CI, 60-727,000.
Schwarzenberg, Norbert; Ueberwolf, Heinz; and Kaesmacher, Jakob,
to Saint-Gobain Vitrage, Cutting head for glass cutting machine.
4.392.404. CI. 83-886.000.
Schwei. Lawrence J.: See —
Stinson. Wilbur G.; Schwei. Lawrence J.; and Vong, Sandy T. S.,
4,393,098, CI. 427-168.000.
Schwobel Rich&rd' Sec
Schrotz, Kurt; and Schwobel, Richard, 4,392,424, CI. 101-111.000.
Sears, Stanley L., to Boeing Company, The. Panel welding system.
4.392.604, CI. 228-212.000.
Seeley, El win W.: See —
Hansen. Peder M.; Hoffman. John G.; Seeley. Elwin W.; and
Andrew, Wesley A., 4,393,350, CI, 324-334.000.
Seeney, Charles E,; Kraemer, John F,; and Vamum, Nancy C, to
International Minerals & Chemicals Corp. Oxidatively coupled cold-
set binders, 4,393,152, CI. 523-139.000.
Seher, Eugen: See —
Kantz, Dieter; and Seher. Eugen. 4,393,478. CI. 365-210.000
Seiden. Lewis J., to T-Bar Incorporated. Transfer bus matrix. 4.393,381.
CI. 340-825.830.
Seino. Kazuyuki: See —
Takenaka. Shigeo; Kamohara. Eiji; and Seino, Kazuyuki, 4,392,914,
CI. 156-633.000.
Seirei Industry Company Limited: See—
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi, Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa, .
Mitsuaki; and Yamamoto, Takashi, 4,392,421, CI. 99-524.000.
Seitzer, Walter H.: See-
Roth, Robert B.; and Seitzer, Walter H., 4,392.941. CI, 208-1 1, OLE,
Seiyaku Co., Ltd.: See—
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; OhUni, Osamu; Miyake, Hidekazu;
and Fujiwara, Khosuke, 4,393,210, CI. 546-141,000,
Sekigawa, Keiji, to Ricoh Co., Ltd. Method of reproducing a picture
having improved resolution. 4,393,452, CI, 364-514,000.
Sekimoto, Sohichi. to Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd. Image forming method and
apparatus. 4,392,719, CI. 350-342.000.
Selectastation, Inc.: See—
Besen, Peter D,; Shulsinger, Don H.; and Goldberg, Stuart D.,
4,393,277, CI. I79-2.00A.
Seiner, Allen J,; and Seiner, Marc D, Method and apparatus for foot
stabilization, 4,392,487, CI, 128-80.00H.
Seiner, Marc D.: See^-
Selner, Allen J.; and Seiner. Marc D.. 4.392.487. CI. 128-80,OOH.
Seltzer. Raymond: See-
Weiss, Jonas; and Seltzer, Raymond, 4,393,002, CI. 26O-239,30R,
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; OhUni, Osamu; Miyake, Hidekazu; and
Fujiwara, Khosuke, to Seiyaku Co,, Ltd.; and Taiho Pharmaceutical
Co., Ltd. l(2H)-Isoquinolone compounds and acid addition salts
thereof 4,393,210, CI. 546-141.000.
Seng, Stephen: See —
Hohman, Charles M.; Propster, Mark A.; and Seng, Stephen,
4,392,310, CI. 34-172.000.
Sengenberger, Charles G,: See—
Corbeels, Roger J.; and Sengenberger, Charles G., 4,392,981, CI.
252-373.000.
Sentoku, Hideshi, to Laurel Bank Machine Co., Ltd. Stacking cylinder
for use in a coin handling machine. 4,392,504, CI. 133-l.OOA.
Sentrol, Inc.; See —
Holce, Thomas J.; and Huckins, Charles M., 4,392,707, CI. 339-
125.00R.
Sepke, Arnold L., to National Union Electric Corporation. Electric
vacuum cleaner with window for viewing belt. 4,392,271, CI.
15-339.000.
Serapins, Klaus: See —
Piter, Hans; and Serapins, Klaus, 4,392,713, Q. 350-96.210.
Shacter, Stuart B.: See-
Davis, William F.; and Shacter, Stuart B., 4,393,355, CI.
330-294.000.
PI 36
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Shade. Ray W.: See—
Ritzer, Alan; Hajjar, Abraham L.; McEntee, Harry R.; and Shade,
Ray W., 4.393.229, CI. 556-430.000.
Shakespear, Horacio, to General Motors Corporation. Vehicle suspen-
sion system. 4,392.667, CI. 280-690.000.
Shalit, Harold: See-
Sun, Hsiang-ning; Leonard. John J.; and Shalit, Harold, 4,393,038,
CI. 423-584.000.
Shanley. Charles W.: See—
Whalin, JefTery A.; Shanley. Charles W.; Scansaroli, Michael N.;
and Dworsky, Lawrence N.. 4,393.131, CI. 430-320.000.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Masuzawa. Sigeaki; and Kihara, Yoshiro. 4,393,460, CI.
364-900.000.
Tanimoto, Akira; Nakanishi, Tosaku; and Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu,
4.393.462. CI. 364-900.000.
Shaw, Joseph M., to RCA Corporation. Method or manufacturing low
resistance gates and interconnections. 4.392,299, CI. 29-590.000.
Sheingom, Larry A. Device for blind spot delineation. 4,392,725, CI.
351-224.000.
Shell Oil Company: See —
Allen. Roy A.. 4.393.181. CI. 525-504.000.
Goodall, Brian L.; van der Nat. Adrianus A.; and Sjardijn, Willem,
4,393,182. CI. 526-125.000.
Sherman. Allan, to United States of America, National Aeronautics and
Space Administration. Cooling by conversion of para to ortho-hydro-
gen. 4,393,039, CI. 423-648.00R.
Sherwin-Williams Company, The: See —
Wagener, Anthony P., 4,392,994. CI. 252-602.000.
Sherwood Medical Company; See —
George, Robert D.; and di Palma. Georgio. 4.392.858, CI.
604-187.000.
Shiba, Keisuke; Nakao, Sho; and Toyama. Tadao. to Fuji Photo Film
Co., Ltd. Light-sensitive lithographic printing plate precursor.
4,393,128, CI. 430-273.000.
Shibata, Kazuhiko: See —
Miki, Nobuaki; Kawamoto. Mutsumi; Shibata. Kazuhiko; Yoshida.
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki, 4,393,467. CI. 364-424.100.
Shibata. Tomoyuki; Nakayama. Mituhito; and Ouchi, Kiyoshi, to Ebara
Corporation. Coupling system for submergible pump. 4,392,790, CI.
417-360.000.
Shibazaki, Kenji: See —
Ito. Masazumi; and Shibazaki, Kenji, 4,392,740. CI. 355-14.0SH.
Sugiura, Masamichi; and Shibazaki, Kenji, 4,393,375, CI.
340-700.000.
Shibukawa, Mitsuru: See —
Hayashi, Hiroshi; Shimojima, Yukiji; Shirai, Takashi; Ishida,
Torao; and Shibukawa. Mitsuru. 4.393.225. CI. 549-289.000.
Shibuya, Kyoichi; and Ihara. Tomomi. to Sumitomo Semento Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Method of recovering exhaust gas from boiler in electri-
cal power generating device using combustible material as fuel and
apparatus for performing such method. 4.392.353. CI. 60-657.000.
Shibuya. Yoshimichi; and Takahashi, Masami, to Hitachi. Ltd. Liquid
crysul display device. 4,392,717, CI. 350-334.000.
Shikano, Michio; and Kiugawa, Shuzi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Fujikoshi.
Internal gear pump motor. 4,392,799, CI. 418-169.000.
Shima, Michitsune; lida, Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami, Masaharu;
Shimoyama. Toshikazu; Takano, Genta; and Kato, Akira, to Mit-
subishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electron beam working apparatus
for cylindrical members. 4,393,294, CI. 219-121.0EC.
Shimada, Hiroshi; and Aoyama, Keizo, to Fujitsu Limited. Semicon-
ductor memory circuit. 4.393,472. CI. 365-190.000.
Shimada, Hiroshi, to Fujitsu Limited. Address buffer circuit. 4,393,480,
CI. 365-227.000.
Shimane, Koichi: See —
Horiguchi, Satoru; Sasaoka, Takeshi; Shimane, Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4,393,398, CI.
358-76.000.
Shimatsu, Minoru: See —
Yoshitsugu. Seikichi; and Shimatsu. Minoru, 4,392,684, CI.
296-185.000.
Shimazaki, Kanzo: See —
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi, Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa,
Mitsuaki; and Yamamoto, Takashi, 4,392,421, CI. 99-524.000.
Shimazu, Yoshimi: See —
Watanabe, Masazumi; Uehara, Mikio; Shimazu, Yoshimi; Ishiyama,
Jiro; and Kato, Motohiko. 4,393,083, CI. 426-15.000.
Shimizu, Masami; and Yasunobe, Junji, to Ishikawajima-Harima Juko-
gyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Oil seal for bearings of turbocharger.
4.392,752. CI. 384-135.000.
Shimizu, Masami; and Monno, Asao, to Fuji Electric Company, Ltd.
Method of tube wall thickness measurement. 4,393,305, CI.
250-358.100.
Shimizu, Tsutomu, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Mechanism to main-
tain constant body tube length of binocular microscope. 4,392,716, CI.
350-145.000.
Shimojima, Yukiji: See —
Hayashi, Hiroshi; Shimojima, Yukiji; Shirai, Takashi; Ishida,
Torao; and Shibukawa, Miteuni, 4,393,225, CI. 549-289.000.
Shimoyama, Toshikazu: See —
Shima. Michitsune; lida. Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami, Masaharu;
Shimoyama, Toshikazu; Takano, Genta; and Kato, Akira,
4.393.294, CI. 219-I21.0EC.
Shimoyashiki, Nobuyoshi: See —
Akiyama, Hiroyuki; Haukeyama, Hideo; Shimoyashiki, Nobuyo-
shi; Momose, Yoshiaki; and Imai, Fusao. 4,393,016, CI.
264-53.000.
Shinohara, Koichi; and Fujita, Takashi, to Matsushita Electric Indus-
trial Co., Ltd. Method of vacuum depositing a layer on a plastic film
substrate. 4,393,091, CI. 427-13.000.
Shionogi & Co., Ltd.: See —
Maekawa, Hideyuki; Hiramoto, Shinji; Itaya, Kozo; Sato, Kokichi;
and Nishida, Hirotaka, 4,392,577, CI. 215-32.000.
Shirahata, Kunikatsu: See —
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki, Tatsuya; Shirahata. Kunikatsu; Kasai,
Masaji; Hirayama. Noriaki; Morimoto. Makoto; and Fukui,
Masanori. 4.393.056. CI. 424- 1 8 1 .000.
Shirai. Takashi: See —
Hayashi. Hiroshi; Shimojima, Yukiji; Shirai, Takashi; Ishida,
Torao; and Shibukawa, Mitsuru, 4,393,225, CI. 549-289.000.
Shiraishi, Mitsuru: See —
Terao, Shinji; Shiraishi, Mitsuru; and Maki, Yoshitaka, 4,393,075,
CI. 424-304.000.
Shirasaki, Masataka, to Fujitsu Limited. Prism polarizer. 4,392,722, CI.
350-375.000.
Shirato, Yoshiaki; Takatori, Yasushi; Hara, Toshitami; Nishimura,
Yukuo; and Takahashi, Michiko, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Method for producing recording head. 4,392,907, CI. 156-252.000.
Shirayama, Shimpey: See —
Nozaki, Shinichi; Tai, Ichiro; and Shirayama, Shimpey, 4,393,307,
CI. 250-390.000.
Shirley, Robert L., to Master Craft Boat Company. Ski boat. 4,392,448,
CI. 114-271.000.
Shiroi, Takashi: See —
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Sasaoka. Michio;
Saito. Norio; and Shiroi. Takashi. 4.392,923. CI. 204-59.00R.
Shitamatsu. Ryujiro: See —
Tanaka. Yoshiro; Moroi. Hayato; Komatsu. Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura. Tadashi. 4,392,267,
CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi,
Kazuo; Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, 4,392,50is,
CI. 134-46.000.
Shmotkin, Mark B.: See —
Buryakov, Viktor P.; Ivanov, Gennady M.; Kislik, Mikhail I.;
Kurgansky, Pavel M.; Shmotkin, Mark B.; and Eikhenvald,
Eduard V., 4,392,551, CI. 184-7.00D.
Shoup, Leo E. Soft contact lens asepticizing case. 4,392,569, CI.
206-5.100.
Showa Aluminum Industries K.K.: See —
Ohta, Teruto; and Kinoshita, Yoshio, 4,392,926, CI. 204-67.000.
Showa Chemical Co., Ltd.: See —
Hirashima, Tsuneaki; Miyata, Toshiyuki; Yamamoto, Yoshikazu;
and Kato, Mitsuyuki, 4,393,216, CI. 548-305.000.
Showa Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See —
Tsuchiya, Takayoshi; and Matsuo, Masami, 4,392,664, CI.
280-276.000.
Showman, Robert L.; and Weber, Robert N., to AMP Incorporated.
Cam actuated zero insertion force mother/daughter board connector.
4,392,700, CI. 339-17.00M.
Shows, Everett W., to General Motors Corporation. Gas turbine engine
fuel system. 4,392,347, CI. 60-39.270.
Shroff, Arvind; and Palluel, Pierre, to Thomson-CSF. Hot cathode, its
production process and electron tube incorporating such a cathode.
4,393,328, CI. 313-346.00R.
Shulsinger, Don H.: See —
Besen, Peter D.; Shulsinger, Don H.; and Goldberg, Stuart D.,
4,393,277, CI. 179-2.00A.
Shum, Lanson Y., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Robotic manipulator
structure. 4,392,776, CI. 414-744.00R.
Sid Harvey, Inc.: See —
Lindtveit, Herbert E., 4.392.796. CI. 418-32.000.
Sidchrome (S.E. Asia) Limited: See —
Siddall, Michael. 4,392.509. CI. 137-340.000.
Siddall, Michael, to Sidchrome (S.E. Asia) Limited. Furnace valve.
4.392.509. CI. 137-340.000.
Siddiqui. Ehtisham U. A.; Wenzel, James L.; and Butterfield, John L.,
to General Electric Company. Sheer disconnect. 4.392,835. CI.
464-32.000.
Sidote, George J.: See —
Sung. Rodney L.; Sidote, George J.; and Sweeney, William M.,
4,392,866, CI. 44-53.000.
Siebrecht, Gunter: See —
Mittelbach, Gunter; Horstmann, Gunter; Heiss, Werner; Hoffmann,
Dietrich; Siebrecht, Gunter; Kriechbaum, Karl; and Rapp, Gun-
ter, 4,393,290, CI. 200-148.00A.
Siegal, Burton L., to Kiwi Coders Corporation. Base-lock type font
holder for imprinting apparatus. 4,392,430, CI. 101-381.000.
Siegmund, Walter P., to Warner Lambert Technologies, Inc. Image
intensifier faceplate. 4,393,322, CI. 313-544.000.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Anger, Klaus; Frosien, Juergen; Lischke, Burkhard; Plies, Erich;
and Tonar, Klaus, 4.393,308. CI. 25O-396.00R.
Fork. Kurt; Kaufhold. Wolfgang; Meusel, Wolfgang; and Wald-
mann, Hermann, 4,393,345, CI. 322-19.000.
Glashauser, Walter; and Ghica, Grigore-Vlad, 4,393,129. CI.
430-296.000.
Kantz, Dieter; and Seher, Eugen, 4,393,478, CI. 365-210.000.
Kuenemund, Friedrich L., 4,393,356, CI. 333-165.000.
July 12, 198-
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 37
Stoeger, Klaus; Birkle, Siegfried; and Gehring, Johann, 4,392,936,
CI. 204-213.000.
Zeitraeg, Rolf, 4,393,496, CI. 370-62.000.
Sigalos & Levine, P.C.: See —
Hall, Alfred E., 4,392,651, CI. 273-153.00R.
Sigma Research, Inc.: See —
Franklin, James L., 4,392,359, CI. 62-235.100.
Silver, Howard B.: See —
Moore, Anthony J.; and Silver, Howard B., 4,392,973, CI.
252-78.100.
Simko, Richard T.: See —
Owen, William H.; Simko, Richard T.; and Tchon, Wallace E.,
4,393,481, CI. 365-228.000.
Simmons, Reginald J.: See —
Baker, Robert W.; Owen, Leonard J.; and Simmons, Reginald J.,
4,392,706, CI. 339-9 l.OOR.
Singer Company, The: See —
Kreeley, Bruce K., 4,392,512, CI. 137-496.000.
Sirotnak, Francis M.: See —
DeGraw, Joseph I., Jr.; and Sirotnak, Francis M., 4,393,064, CI.
424-251.000.
Sisis Equipment (Macclesfield) Limited: See —
Suniforth, Eric, 4,392,595, CI. 222-619.000.
Sjardijn, Willem: See —
Goodall, Brian L.; van der Nat, Adrianus A.; and Sjardijn. Willem.
4.393.182. CI. 526-125.000.
Skarstad. Paul M.; Coury, Arthur J.; and Untereker, Darrel F., to
Medtronic. Inc. Battery cathodes. 4,393,125, CI. 429-105.000.
Skrobisch, Alfred, to Staver Company, Inc., The. Electromagnetic
indicator having a rotor disposable in discrete positions. 4,393,362, CI.
335-272.000.
Skura, William A.; and Cathey. Thaddeus F.. to Uniroyal. Inc. Toothed
positive drive power transmission belt with a fabric reinforcement
suspended within the belt teeth. 4,392.842. CI. 474-205.000.
Skwirut. Henry; and Young, Robert G.. to North American Philips
Electric Corp. Method for effectively contacting manganese-
activated zinc silicate phosphor with antimony oxide during phos-
phor coating, and resulting lamp. 4,393,330, CI. 313-487:000.
Sletzinger, Meyer, to Merck & Co., Inc. Process for preparing methyl-
vanillyl ketone from isoeugenol. 4,393,242, CI. 568-322.000.
Sloan Kettering Institute for Cancer Research: See—
DeGraw, Joseph I., Jr.; and Sirotnak, Francis M., 4,393,064, CI.
424-251.000.
Smalley, Raymond L., to REB Manufacturing, Inc. Lift safety switch
system. 4.392,77' CI. 414-545.000.
Smart, Jol... u.: oet- —
Berlie, Elmer M.; ai .1 Smart, John D., 4,392,816, CI. 431-202.000.
Berlie, Elmer M.; Si art, John D.; and Zelensky, Michael J.,
4,392,817, CI. 431-20. .000.
Smetana, Raymond S.: See—
Harbaugh, William L.; a id Smetena. Raymond S.. 4,393.018. CI.
264-82.000.
Smit, Geoffrey N.. to Borg-V imer Corporation. Metal belt. 4.392.843.
CI. 474-245.000.
Smith. Donald R.: See—
Boyd. Mary G.; and mith. Donald R.. 4,392.905, CI. 156-235.000.
Smith. Edgar M„ to P' A Corporation. Method for aging a cathode of
a cathode-ray tu^ .. 4.392,834, CI. 445-6.000.
Smith. Gary F.: See —
Baylis, . rancis P.; and Smith. Gary E.. 4.393.046. CI. 424-117.000.
Smith. Larry C, to Rexnord Inc. Wear resisunt rotor slots for vane-
type pumps or motors. 4,392,795. CI. 418-31.000.
Smith, Norman L., to Ashland Oil, Inc. Energy efficient process for the
production of carbon black. 4,393,034, CI. 423-450.000.
Smith, Paul T.: See—
Miscioscio, Kathleen B.; and Smith, Paul T., 4,392,921, CI.
204-47.000,
Smock, Steven W.: See—
Kinsey, Brian D.; and Smock, Steven W., 4,392,357, CI. 62-153.000.
Smolin, William, to Texaco Inc. Separation of para-xylene. 4,393,266,
CI. 585-828.000. ,
Smorol, Michael E.: See —
O'Mara, Raymond D.; Smorol, Michael E.; and Tobin, Curtis L.,
4,392,525, CI. 165-125.000.
Sobotta, Rainer: See —
Langbein, Adolf; Merz, Herbert; Sobotu, Rainer; Bauer, Rudolf;
Jennewein, Hans M.; and Mierau, Joachim, 4,393,069, CI.
424-265.000.
Societa Pneumatici Pirelli S.p.A.: See—
Bertoldo, Giorgio, 4,392,899, CI. 156-127.000.
Societe Alsacienne de Constructions Mecaniques de Mulhouse: See—
Gauvain, Roger; and Kueny, Michel, 4,392,276, CI. 19-97.000.
Societe Anonyme des Eublissements Adrien de Backer: See—
Yperman, Jacques L., 4.393,440, CI. 362-309.000.
Societe Anonyme dite L'Oreal: See —
Koulbanis, Constontin; Zabotto, Arlette; Griat, Jacqueline; and
Charrier, Jean, 4,393,043, CI. 424-59.000.
Societe Europenne de Propulsion: See—
Habermann, Helmut; and Brunet, Maurice, 4,392,693, CI.
308-10.000.
Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d'Aviation,
"S.N.E.C.M.A.": See—
Tirole, Jacques P. H.; Mons, Claude M.; and Spinat, Roland R.,
4,392,656, CI. 277-53.000.
Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale: See—
Chareire, Jean-Louis, 4,392,459, CI. 123-21.000.
Mouille, Rene' L.; Gallot, Jacques R.; and Pouradier, Jean-Marc E.,
4,392,781, CI. 416-223.00R.
Societe SOGEFINA, Societe de Gestion Financiere Armoricaine:
Herriau, Paul, 4,392,439, CI. 111-34.000.
Soderberg, John H., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Electronic parcel register.
4.393.454. CI. 364-518.000.
Sohner, Gerhard: See —
Neuhaus, Dieter; Sohner, Gerhard; Ruf. Walter; Jesse. Erich; and
Roth, Helmut, 4,393,432. CI. 361-104.000.
Sony Corporation: See—
Kaneko. Shinji. 4.393.413. CI. 358-326.000.
Kojima, Chiaki; Hasegawa. Kayoko; and Miyahara, Kosuke,
4,393,126, CI. 430-2.000.
Nagai, Tamiji; and Matsushita. Takeshi. 4.393.337, CI. 315-408.000.
Tatami, Mitsushige, 4,393,412. CI. 358-318.000.
Soriente. Alfonse J., to Ecodyne Corporation. Liquid treatment appara-
tus. 4.392,955, CI. 210-195.400.
Souther, Channing: See —
Crowley, Kevin J.; and Souther, Channing, 4,392,312, CI. 36-
67.00R.
Spars, Byron G.: See—
Wallman, P. Henrik; and Spars, Byron G., 4,392,942, CI. 208-
1 l.OOR.
Spaulding, Bernard B.: See —
Knapp, George W.; and Spaulding, Bernard B., 4,393,464. CI.
364-900.000.
Spencer Wright Industries. Inc.: See —
Ingram, Gary L., 4,392,440, CI. 112-79.00A.
Sperry Corporation: See —
Fung, Anthony K., 4,393,458, CI. 364-900.000.
Stickel, Tedd K.; and Ransom, Stephen A., 4,393,315. CI.
307-264.000.
Spinat, Roland R.: See —
Tirole, Jacques P. H.; Mons, Claude M.; and Spinat, Roland R.,
4,392,656, CI. 277-53.000.
Spinhime, James M., to United Technologies Corporation. Intracavity
phase front and power control. 4.393.303. CI. 250-201.000.
Spire Corporation: See —
Kreisman, Wallace S., 4,393,105, CI. 428-34.000.
Little, Roger G., 4,392,297, CI. 29-572.000.
Spradlin, Joseph E.; Morgan, Jeffrey D.; Olson, Allan R.; and Howley,
Joseph P., to General Foods Corporation. Enzyme digestion for a
dog food of improved palatability. 4,393.085. CI. 426-28.000.
Spre^ing Machine Exchange. Inc.: See —
Costigan. Conrad A.. 4.392.646, CI. 270-30.000.
Sprecker, Mark A., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Norbor-
nyl ethers. 4,393,247, CI. 568-665.000.
Sprout, Oliver S., Jr., to Pennwalt Corporation. Preparation of high
gamma (a)phase poly(vinylidene fluoride) piezoelectric materials.
4,393,093, CI. 427-40.000.
Spyder Sales & Service, Inc.: See—
Barchard, John, 4,392,541. CI. 180-209.000.
Squire, Edward N., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Process for dechlorinating organic compounds. 4,393,227, CI.
549-455.000.
SRI International: See—
DeGraw, Joseph I., Jr.; and Sirotnak, Francis M., 4,393,064, CI.
424-251.000.
Stables, Wilbur L.; Pendlebury, David; Saich, Anthony M.; and Ham-
lyn. Maxwell C, to Allied Corporation. Device having yarn passage
of specified dimensions for interlacing filaments of multifilament
yam. 4,392,285. CI. 28-276.000.
Stacy, Robert A.: See—
Allen, Louis B., Jr.; Koenig, Herbert G., Jr.; Stacy, Robert A.; and
Meyer, Danny D., 4,393,393, CI. 357-81.000.
Stadler, Peter; Metzger, Karl G.; Voss, Eckart; Petersen, Uwe; and
Zeiler, Hans-Joachim, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. 1-
N(Aminopolyhydroxyalkyl)aminoglycoside antibiotics and method
of use. 4,393,051, CI. 424-180.000.
Staedtler, J. S.: See—
Handl, Werner, 4,393,022, CI. 264-148.000.
Stair. Eugene V. Fuel loader. 4.392.479. CI. 126-242.000.
Stanadyne. Inc.: See —
Lesher, Kenneth W , 4.392.462. CI. 123-90.550.
Standard Knitting Mills. Inc.: S«—
Irving, William A.; and Thornton, Robert E., Jr., 4,392,315, CI.
40-27.000.
Standard Oil Company, The: See—
Curatolo. Benedict S.; and Coffey, Gerald P., 4,393,192, Q.
528-292.000.
Li, George S.; Jones, John F.; and Giffcn. William M., Jr.,
4,393,020, CI. 264-108.000.
Velenyi, Louis J.; Dolhyj. Serge R.; and Krupa, Andrew S..
4,393,260, CI. 585-357.000.
Standard Oil Company (Indiana): See—
Allen, John K.; and Lammers. Gerard C, 4,393,264, CI.
585-469.000.
Nimry, Tayseer S.; and Fields, Ellis K., 4.393,222, CI. 549-234.000.
Paschke. Edward E.; and Petty-Weeks. C. Bruce, 4,393,162, CI
524-606.000.
Staniforth, Eric, to Sisis Equipment (Macclesfield) Limited. Apparatus
for dispensing particulate material. 4,392,595, CI. 222-619.000.
Slant Inc.: See —
Harris, Robert S., 4,392,507, CI. 137-38.000.
Stant, Ivan H. Fence wire winder. 4,392,518. CI. 140-119.000.
PI 38
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Stanton, David J., to Medtronic, Inc. Neuromuscular stimulator.
4,392,496, CI. 128-423.0OW.
Staubitzer, Fred: See —
Bohn, Hans; Stein, Wolfgang; Bemsau. Peter; and Staubitzer, Fred,
4,392,909, CI. 156-306.900.
StaufTer Chemical Company: See —
Pallos, Ferenc M.; Brokke, Mervin E.; and Arneklev, Duane R.,
4,392.884, CI. 71-100.000.
Staver Company, Inc., The: See —
Skrobisch, Alfred, 4,393,362, CI. 335-272.000.
Stavo Industries, Inc.: See —
Vogel, George P., 4,392,956, CI. 210-224.000.
Steele, Raymond, to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Fou-
rier masking analog signal secure communication system. 4,393,276,
CI. 179-1.50R.
Steer r^flviri C * Sec
Cox, Roger B.; and Steer, David C. 4,393,089. CI. 426-573.000.
Steg Siebtechnik GmbH: See—
Lefferts, Johannes, 4,392,902, CI. 156-161.000.
Steifensand Sitzmobel- und Tischfabrik, Inh.: See —
Beer, Herbert, 4,392,686, CI. 297-376.000.
Steigleitcr, Werner: See —
Engelbach, Heinz; Steigleiter, Werner; and Glietenberg. Helmut.
4.392,984, CI. 252-432.000.
Stein, Wolfgang: See —
Bohn, Hans; Stein, Wolfgang; Bemsau, Peter; and Staubitzer, Fred,
4,392,909, CI. 156-306.900.
Steinbusch, Hans: See —
Radziwill, Wolfgang; Doring, Gunter; and Steinbusch, Hans,
4,393,317, CI. 307-309.000.
Stepanov, Valentin G.: See —
Merenkov, Jury F.; Egorov, Vladimir D.; Stepanov, Valentin G.;
and Popkov, Igor V., 4,392.786, CI. 417-50.000.
Stephan, Rudolf: See —
McKee, Graham E.; Haaf, Franz; Hambrecht, Juergen; Benker,
Klaus; Stephan, Rudolf; and Breuer, Hans, 4,393,164, CI.
525-83.000.
Stephens, Thomas W., to American Monitor Corporation. Assay
method and reagent for the determination of chloride. 4,393,142, CI.
436-125.000.
Stepurenko, Ivan R.: See —
Golyak, Gleg L.; Golyak. Leonty A.; and Stepurenko, Ivan R.,
4,392,805, CI. 425-206.000.
Sterimatic Holdings Limited: See —
Dent, Hugh R., 4,392,859, CI. 604-198.000.
Stemberger, Ludwig A., to University of Rochester, The. Process for
the preparation of biologically active peptide analogues. 4,392,996,
CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Stetson, Robert L.: See —
Lang, Linton W.; and Stetson, Robert L., 4,393,510, CI.
376-172.000.
Stevens, Aaron A.: See —
Buckhouse, Norman O.; Stevens, Aaron A.; and Lawrence, Ran-
dall K., 4,392.543, CI. 180-272.000.
Stevens, Frederick F.: See —
Hillberg, Robert L.; and Stevens, Frederick F., 4,392,320, CI.
42-69.00R.
Stewart. John S.; and Gonek. Stanislaw M.. to Brush Switchgear Lim-
ited. Gas blast interrupters. 4.393.291. CI. 20O-148.00R.
Stickel. Tedd K.; and Ransom. Stephen A., to Sperry Corporation.
High-gain subilized converter. 4,393,315, CI. 307-264.000.
Stickler, Johann R. Apparatus for breeding queen honeybees. 4,392,262,
CI. 6-9.000.
Stiefel Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Yu, Cheng-Sein, 4,393,061, CI. 424-248.580.
Stille, John K. Optically active phosphines. 4,393,240, CI. 568-13.000.
Stinson, Wilbur G.; Schwei. Lawrence J.; and Vong. Sandy T. S.. to
Ford Motor Company. Process for developing a coating film on a
heated glass sheet. 4,393,098, CI. 427-168.000.
Stoeger, Klaus; Birkle, Siegfried; and Gehring, Johann, to Siemens
Aktiengesellschaft. Device for the galvanic deposition of aluminum.
4,392,936, CI. 204-213.000.
Stolzenburg, Rudolf: See —
Schenk, Gunther; Bergthaller, Peter; Wolfrum, Gerhard; and
Stolzenburg, Rudolf. 4,393,132, CI. 430-562.000.
Stone, Roger L.: See —
Lucas, Donald S.; Stone, Roger L.; and Cooper, Eugene R.,
4,392,848, CI. 604-53.000.
Strandell, Per-Olof Two-high rolling stand for bar and/or wire rolling
mill. 4.392,370. CI. 72-201.000.
Straub, Paul J., Jr.. to RCA Corporation. Stylus cartridge. 4,393,487,
CI. 369-74.000.
Straub, Robert D.: See—
Deckard, John I.; and Straub, Robert D., 4,392,612, CI. 239-88.000.
Strauch. Karl, to Werner Kammann Maschinenfabrik GmbH. Holding
device for a hollow body with an open end and a pivotal handle for
printing thereon in a printing machine. 4,392,565, CI. 198-378.000.
Strauss, Udo: See —
Hoppe. Karl; and Strauss, Udo, 4,393.179, CI. 525-490.000.
Strewe, Wolfgang: See —
Schmitt, Helmut; Strewe, Wolfgang; and Schurig, Helmuth,
4,392,937. CI. 204-269.000.
Strieker, George O.; Teumer, Karl H.; and Groenendal, Ronald C, to
Ludlow Corporation. Hot melt transfer coating process and prod-
ucts. 4,393,117, CI. 428-352.000.
Stringer, Carl: See —
La Force, Jean, 4,392,603, CI. 228-196.000.
Stringer, Carl Thomas: See —
La Force, Jean, 4,392,603, CI. 228-196.000.
Stringer Oil & Gas Co.: See —
U Force, Jean, 4,392,603, CI. 228-196.000.
Stringham, Roger S.: 5^ —
Toy, Madeline S.; and Stringham, Roger S., 4,393,198, CI.
528-397.000.
Stromberg-Carlson Corporation: See —
Cray, Edgar R.; Davis, Russell R.; Knapp, Maynard K.; Richards,
Glenn L.; Root, Bernard H.; and Woodruff, William W.,
4,393,495. CI. 370-56.000.
Struck. Carl-Heinz; and Schumacher. Ralf. to Dr. C. Otto & Comp.
G.m.b.H. System for improving the flow of gases to a combustion
chamber of a coke oven or the like. 4,392,824, CI. 432-180.000.
Studer, John E.: See —
Huck, Charles M.; Studer, John E.; and Sauer, Philip H., 4,392,860,
CI. 604-212.000.
Stump, Theodore M.: See —
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Carl E.;-Kerr, Douglas P.; Ras-
mussen, David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W.,
4,393,491. CI. 370-13.000.
Stumpp. Gerhard; and Wessel. Wolf, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Appara-
tus for regulating turbochargers and internal combustion engines
associated therewith. 4.392,352, CI. 60-602.000.
Suburban Tool, Inc.: See —
Campeau, Gary P., 4,392,643, CI. 269-136.000.
Suda, Hitoshi: See —
Fujii, Takayuki; and Suda, Hitoshi, 4,392,539, CI. 180-90.000.
Suda, Takayuki; and Yasuda, Koichi, to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd.
Coil element. 4,393,364, CI. 336-65.000.
Sudo, Fumio: See —
Kodaka, Mikio; Morishita, Hitoshi; Bada, Hajime; and Sudo,
Fumio, 4,392,886, CI. 75-52.000.
Suefuji, Masahiro: See —
Misaki, Susumu; Suefuji, Masahiro; Mitote, Tamio; and Matsumura,
Naotake, 4,393,231, CI. 560-73.000.
Suematsu, Toshio: See —
Miyagi, Hideo; Suematsu, Toshio; Nakano, Jiro; and Ono,
Hironobu. 4,392,467, CI. 123-325.000.
Sugamura, Noboru: See —
Itakura, Fumitada; and Sugamura, Noboru, 4,393,272, CI. 179-
l.OSA.
Sugawara, Noboru, to Kanto Seiki Co., Ltd. Device for connecting
speedometer to flexible shaft. 4,392,836, CI. 464-52.000.
Sugie, Kiyoshi; Yamada, Takeyoshi; and Yamaji, Teizo, to Teitin Lim-
ited. Novel silicon<ontaining copolymer, ultrathin solid membrane
composed of said copolymer, use of said solid membrane for concen-
trating a specified gas in a gaseous mixture, and process for producing
said solid membrane. 4,393,113, CI. 428-220.000.
Sugimura, Mitsuo: See —
Tarumi, Niro; Komiya, Shigeo; and Sugimura, Mitsuo, 4,393,184,
CI. 526-261.000.
Sugiura, Kyoji: See —
Kimura, Kaoni; and Sugiura. Kyoji. 4.393.183. CI. 526-245.000.
Sugiura. Masamichi; and Shibazaki. Kenji, to Minolta Camera Co.. Ltd.
Control system for copying apparatus. 4,393,375, CI. 340-700.0(X).
Sugiura, Shigekata; and Kanno. Susumu, to Alps Electric Co., Ltd.
Chassis assembly. 4,393.436. CI. 361-380.000.
Sullins. Richard D.; and Lanter. Kent J., to Ralston Purina Company.
Process for the production of a floating aquatic food pellet. 4,393,087,
CI. 426-74.000.
Sullivan, Norman D. Food dispensing gun. 4,392,592, CI. 222-288.000.
Sumitomo Semento Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Shibuya, Kyoichi; and Ihara, Tomomi, 4,392,353, CI. 60-657.000.
Sun. Hsiang-ning; Leonard. John J.; and Shalit. Harold, to Atlantic
Richfield Company. Hydrogen peroxide production. 4,393,038, CI.
423-584.000.
Sun Oil Company of Pennsylvania: See —
Chieffo, Anibole B.; Davis, Howard K.; and Rizzo, Joyce A.,
4,392,870, CI. 55-20.000.
Suncor, Inc.: See —
Roth, Robert B.; and Seitzer, Walter H., 4,392,941, CI. 208-1 l.OLE.
Sung, Rodney L.; Sidote, George J.; and Sweeney, William M., to
Texaco Inc. Etheramine corrosion inhibitor for alcohols. 4,392.866,
CI. 44-53.000.
Sung, Rodney L.; and Sweeney, William M., to Texaco Inc. Amino
corrosion inhibitor for alcohols. 4,392,867, CI. 44-53.000.
Supertex, Inc.: See —
Blanchard, Richard A., 4,393.391, CI. 357-23.000.
Suzuki, Akira: See —
Kaneda, Hiroshi; Arai, Katsuhiko; Suzuki, Akira; and Ohashi,
Takashi, 4,393,015, CI. 264-51.000.
Suzuki, Hirotsugu: See —
Endo, Tadakazu; Suzuki, HiroUugu; and Takahashi, Masanori,
4,392,903, CI. 156-167.000.
Suzuki, Ichiro; Yasumatsu, Jun; Imai, Yoshikazu; and Motonami, Masa-
nao, to Toyou Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Seatbelt system.
4,392,673, CI. 280-804.000.
Suzuki, Jyuji. to Nippon Elumin Sash Co., Ltd. PivoUble window
moved between locked and opened positions by means of a single
operating handle. 4,392,329, CI. 49-356.000.
Suzuki, Kunihiko: See —
Kondo. Nobuo; Naganoma, Masanori; Hibi, Hitoshi; Fujii, Tetsuo;
and Suzuki, Kunihiko, 4,393,365. CI. 34O-S7.000.
July 12, 198!
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 39
Suzuki. Manji. Recorder training device. 4.392.408. CI. 84-380.00C.
Suzuki. Mitsuo: See —
Matsuoka, Shigeni; Tokunaga. Takeshi; Yonekura. Seiji; Yamau-
chi. Koji; and Suzuki, Mitsuo, 4,393.342. CI. 318-467.000.
Suzuki. Shinichi: See —
Torii. Michihiro; Hirukawa. Kohei; Urata. Hiroshi; and Suzuki,
Shinichi. 4,393.373. CI. 340-384.00E.
Suzuki. Yasuhiko: See —
Nishio, Kanemitsu; Takagi. Shunichi; and Suzuki. Yasuhiko.
4.393.324. CI. 313-133.000.
Svendsen, Gordon D.. to Ampex Corporation. Serial-to-parallel con-
verter. 4.393.301. CI. 377-56.000.
Swanson, William J.: See —
Volpe. Gerald T.; Laskoski. Leonard S.; Amodeo, Ralph J.; Swan-
son, William J.; and Gottesman, Jerome D., 4.393,352, CI.
329-50.000.
Sweeney, William M.: See —
Sung, Rodney L.; Sidote, George J.; and Sweeney, William M.,
4.392.866. CI. 44-53.000.
Sung. Rodney L.; and Sweeney. William M.. 4,392,867. CI.
44-53.000.
Swett, James B.; and Arnold. Ann A., to Dart Industries Inc. Watering
can. 4,392.594, CI. 222-530.000.
Swinmum, Christopher J.: See — •••
Pithouse, Kenneth B.; and Swinmum, Christopher J., 4.392.898, CI.
156-85.000.
Swiss Aluminium Ltd.: See —
Alder, Hanspeter; and Schalch, Eugen, 4,392.925. CI. 204-67.000.
Clumpner. Joseph A.. 4.392.636, CI. 266-218.000.
Switall, Thomas G., to Ryco Graphic Manufacturing, Inc. Proportional
mixing system with water motor drive. 4,392,508, CI. 137-99.000.
Switchcraft, Inc.: See —
Bailey. James R.; and Lutzenberger, Kurt, 4.392.708. CI. 339-
182.00R.
Sycor. Inc.: See —
Vidwans, Mohan P., 4,393,424, CI. 360-105.000.
Symons, Robert S.. to Varian Associates. Inc. Gyrotron transverse
energy equalizer. 4.393.332. CI. 315-4.000.
System Industries Inc.: See—
Kyser. Edmond L., 4,393,384, CI. 346-1.100.
Szabo, Gabor: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss. Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda. Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay. Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Szakacs, Gabor L.: See —
Dunn, Thomas J.; Yuniskis, Donald G., Jr.; Szakacs, Gabor L.; and
Nguyen, Nghia V., 4,393,448, CI. 364-449.000.
Szary, Herbert: See —
Nix, Hans; and Szary, Herbert, 4,392,305, CI. 33-169.00F.
Szomor, Maria: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda, Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor. Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
Szostak, Daniel J.: See —
Goldstein. Bemard; Dresner. Joseph; and Szostak. Daniel J..
4.393,348, CI. 324-158.00R.
Szvoboda, Ida: See —
Palosi, Endre; Heja, Gergely; Korbonits, Dezso; Kiss, Pal; Guczi,
Csaba; Cser, Judit; Szvoboda. Ida; Szabo, Gabor; Kallay, Tamas;
Ledniczky, Laszlo; and Szomor, Maria, 4,393,008, CI. 260-
465.00D.
T-Bar Incorporated: See —
Seiden, Lewis J., 4,393,381, CI. 340-825.830.
Tada. Ritsuro: See —
Takahashi. Akio; Wajima, Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Morishita,
Hirosada; Mizuno. Yutaka; Yokozawa. Shunya; and Tsukanishi.
Kenji. 4.393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Taft, John R. Wind powering of turbine having variable pitch vanes.
4,392,780, CI. 416-17.000.
Tagusari, Koji: See—
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama. Toru;
Takahashi, Kazue; Watanabe, Michihiro; and Kotani, Sumihisa,
4,392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Tahara, Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu, Yasuhiro; Kubota.
Reiko; and Takahashi. Toshihiro. to Nisshin Flour Milling Co.. Ltd.
Decaprenylamine derivatives. 4.393.209. CI. 544-404.000.
Tai. Ichiro: See —
Nozaki. Shinichi; Tai. Ichiro; and Shirayama. Shimpey. 4,393,307,
CI. 250-390.000.
Taiho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Senda, Shigeo; Katho, Eiichi; Ohtani, Osamu; Miyake. Hidekazu;
and Fujiwara. Khosuke.\393.2IO. CI. 546-141.000.
Taisei Kako Co.. Ltd.; See—
Maekawa, Hideyuki; Hiramoto. Shinji; Itaya. Kozo; Sato, Kokichi;
and Nishida, HiroUka, 4,392,577. CI. 215-32.000.
Taisho Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.: See—
Sawada, Jiro; Hanada. Kazunori; Tamai. Masaharu; Morimoto.
Shigeo; and Omura. Sadafumi. 4.393.228. CI. 549-549.000.
Takada, Atsunobu; and Higaki. Yuzo. to Nisshin Oil Mills Limited. The.
Steroid ester, and cosmetics and ointments conuining the same.
4.393,044. CI. 424-59.000.
Takada, Juichiro. Emergency locking retractor for a vehicle occupant
restraint belt. 4,392,620. CI. 242-107.40A.
Takagi. Kunihiko. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Vac-
uum circuit breakers. 4.393.286. CI. 200-144.00B.
Takagi, Shunichi: See—
Nishio, Kanemitsu; Takagi. Shunichi; and Suzuki, Yasuhiko.
4.393.324. CI. 313-133.000.
Takagi, Tohru: See —
Sasaki. Takashi; Hagiwara. Miyuki; Hosoi, Fumio; and Takagi,
Tohru. 4,393,165, CI. 525-10.000.
Takagishi. Haruyoshi: See —
Fujikawa, Tsuneo; and Takagishi. Haruyoshi. 4,392.601. CI.
228-4.100.
Takahashi. Akio; Wajima. Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Morishita. Hirosada;
Mizuno. Yutaka; Yokozawa. Shunya; and Tsukanishi, Kenji, to Hita-
chi Chemical Company, Ltd. Thermosetting prepolymer from poly-
functional maleimide and bis maleimide. 4,393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Takahashi, Kazue: See —
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari, Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Tom;
Takahashi, Kazue; Watanabe. Michihiro; and Kotani, Sumihisa,
4,392.423, CI. 101-93.480
Takahashi, Masami: See —
Shibuya, Yoshimichi; and Takahashi, Masami, 4,392,717, CI.
350-334.000.
Takahashi, Masanori: See—
Endo, Tadakazu; Suzuki, Hirotsugu; and Takahashi, Masanori,
4.392.903. CI. 156-167.000.
Takahashi. Masayuki; Goto. Kunihiko; Tanaka. Hisami; and Ohhata,
Michinobu. to Fujitsu Limited. Sample and hold circuit. 4,393.318,
CI. 307-353.000.
Takahashi, Michiko: See —
Shirato, Yoshiaki; Takatori, Yasushi; Hara, Toshitami; Nishimura.
Yukuo; and Takahashi, Michiko. 4.392.907, CI. 156-252.000.
Takahashi, Takao, to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Weft picking method and
device for carrying out same. 4,392,517, CI. 139-435.000.
Takahashi, Tomoyuki: See —
Sato, Yoshito; and Takahashi, Tomoyuki, 4,392,396, CI. 74-785.000.
Takahashi, Toshihiro: See —
Tahara. Yoshiyuki; Koyama, Hiroyasu; Komatsu. Yasuhiro;
Kubota. Reiko; and Takahashi. Toshihiro. 4.393.209. CI.
544-404.000.
Takano, Genta: See—
Shima. Michitsune; lida. Seiichi; Kihara, Shiso; Minami. Masaharu;
Shimoyama, Toshikazu; Takano. Genta; and Kato. Akira.
4.393.294. CI. 219-121.0EC.
Takano. Takao: See —
Mita. Ryuichi; Higuchi. Chojiro; Kato, Toshio; Kawashima,
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano,
Takao. 4,393,000. CI. 260-239.00E.
Takasugi, Hisashi: See —
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Tsuji, Kiyoshi; and Chiba,
Toshiyuki, 4,393,059, CI. 424-246.000.
Takasugi, Mitsuo; and Okuyama, Ajoshio, to Colpo Company Limited.
Injector. 4,392,491, CI. 604-202.000.
Takatori. Yasushi: See —
Shirato. Yoshiaki; Takatori. Yasushi; Hara, Toshitami; Nishimura,
Yukuo; and Takahashi, Michiko, 4.392,907, CI. 156-252.000.
Takatsu, Haruyoshi: See —
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu, Haruyoshi; Fujita, Yuuka; Tazume,
Masayuki; Takeuchi. Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi. Hiroyuki,
4.393.258. CI. 585-25.000.
Takaya. Takao; Takasugi. Hisashi; Tsuji. Kiyoshi; and Chiba. To-
shiyuki. to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Company, Limited. Cephem
compounds. 4,393,059, CI. 424-246.000.
Takayasu, Akira. Clad steel plates. 4.393,122, CI. 428-594.000.
Takeda Chemical Industries, Ltd.: See—
Terao, Shinji; Shiraishi, Mitsuru; and Maki, Yoshitaka. 4,393,075,
CI. 424-304.000.
Takeda, Koichi; and Sasano, Yoshiro, to Daihatsu Motor Co., Ltd.; and
Matsushita Electric Industnal Co.. Ltd. Numerically controlled
machine tool. 4.393.449. CI. 364-474.000.
Takenaka. Shigeo; Kamohara. Eiji; and Seino. Kazuyuki. to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method for manufacturing mask
for color CRT. 4.392.914. CI. 156-633.000.
Taketoshi. Kazuhisa; and Ogusu. Chihaya. to Nippon Hoso Kyokai.
Evaporation device. 4.392.452. CI. 118-723.000.
Takeuchi. Akihiro; Kobayashi. Masaaki; and Fujisawa. Kiyoji. to Mat-
sushiu Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Tracking system for a videotape
recorder. 4,393,416, CI. 360-10200.
Takeuchi, Akihiro: See—
Kobayashi, Masaaki; Takeuchi, Akihiro; and Fujisawa, Kiyoji,
4,393,417, CI. 360-10.300.
Takeuchi, Kiyohumi: See-
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu, Haruyoshi; Fujita, Yutoka; Tazume,
Masayuki; Takeuchi, Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi. Hiroyuki.
4,393.258. CI. 585-25.000.
Takeuchi, Kunthiko; and Belt, James S.. to Owens-Coming Fiberglas
Corporation. Method of forming glass fibers while monitoring a
process condition in a spinner. 4.392.879. CI. 65-6.000.
Takeuchi. Tomio: See —
Umezawa. Hamao; Takeuchi. Tomio; and Nakano. Hiroshi,
4.393,047. CI. 424-118.000.
Talres Development (N.A.) N.V.: See—
Cheetham, Peter S. J., 4,393,136, CI. 435-161.000.
Tamai. Masaham: See—
Sawada, Jiro; Hanada, Kazunori; Tamai, Masaham; Morimoto,
Shigeo; and Omura, Sadafumi, 4,393.228, CI. 549-549.000.
PI 40
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Tamaoki, Tatsuya: See —
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki, Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai,
Masaji; Hirayama, Noriaki; Morimoto, Makoto; and Fukui,
Masanori, 4,393,036. CI. 424-181.000.
Tamura, Takashi: See —
Inoue, Koji; Sato, Nobukatsu; and Tamura, Takashi, 4,393,219, Ci.
548-534.000.
Tanaka, Asami. Metal-porcelain dental restoration and method of
making. 4,392,829, CI. 433-222.000.
Tanaka, Eiichi; Ishibasi, Nobcru; and Inoue, Shojiro, to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Combustion appliance with safety de-
vice. 4,392,813, CI. 431-76.000.
Tanaka, Hideo: See —
Torii, Sigeni; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Sasaoka, Michio;
Saito, Norio; and Shiroi, Takashi, 4,392,923, CI. 204-59.00R.
Tanaka, Hisaji: See —
Nishiyama, Masanobu; Kanazawa, Fusao; Tanaka, Hisaji; and
Nishimura, Tatsuo, 4,392,269, CI. 15-145.000.
Tanaka, Hisami: See —
Takahashi, Masayuki; Goto, Kunihiko; Tanaka, Hisami; and Oh-
hau. Michinobu, 4,393,318, CI. 307-353.000.
Tanaka, Masanobu: See —
Ikushima, Hiroshi; Baba, Takaaki; Sagishima, Takayuki; and Ta-
naka, Masanobu, 4,393,400, CI. 358-92.000.
Tanaka, Masashi: See —
Kumada, Akio; Ihochi, Takahiko; Homma, Makoto; and Tanaka,
Masashi, 4,392,747, CI. 368-88.000.
Tanaka, Masato; Furukawa, Shunsuke; Iwamoto, Ikuo; and Doi, To-
shitada. Method and apparatus for communicating digital information
words by error-correction encoding. 4,393,502, CI. 371-40.000.
Tanaka, Toshihiko: See —
Nakasu, Kei; Ichikawa, Shigeni; Tanaka, Toshihiko; and Ikeda,
Mitsuo, 4,392,560, CI. 188-73.340.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi, Kazuo;
Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, to Kabushiki Kaisha
Kobe Seiko Sho. Apparatus for continuously pickling the outer
surfaces of tubular materials. 4,392,267, CI. 15-88.000.
Tanaka, Yoshiro; Moroi, Hayato; Komatsu, Yukihiko; Akagi, Kazuo;
Shitamatsu, Ryujiro; and Nishimura, Tadashi, to Kabushiki Kaisha
Kobe Seiko Sho. Apparatus for conveying tubular materials in pick-
ling facilities of the same. 4,392,506, CI. 134-46.000.
Tandberg Data A/S: See —
Danielsen, Pctter; and Moen, Tor, 4,393,378, CI. 340-744.000.
Tandlcr, Peter: See —
Schopper, Bemd; Lowe, Derek; Reinartz, Hans-Dieter; and Tan-
dler, Peter, 4,392,691, CI. 303-6.00C.
Tanikawa, Isao: See —
Maruhashi, Yoshitsugu; Tanikawa, Isao; Hirata, Sadao; Yazaki,
Jinichi; and Sakano, Kozaburo, 4,393,106, CI. 428-35.000.
Tanimoto, Akira; Nakanishi, Tosaku; and Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu, to
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic translator with means for pro-
nouncing input words and translated words. 4,393,462, CI.
364-900.000.
Tao, John C, to International Coal Refming Company. Coal-oil slurry
preparation. 4,392,940, CI. 208-8.0LE.
Tarumi, Niro; Komiya, Shigeo; and Sugimura, Mitsuo, to Hoya Lens
Corporation. Lens having a high refractive index with a low disper-
sion. 4,393,184, CI. 526-261.000.
Tatami, Mitsushige, to Sony Corporation. Automatic chroma level
control circuit for compensating both slow and rapid chroma level
changes. 4,393,412, CI. 358-318.000.
Tatsuhama, Tetsuro; and Okabe, Masao, to Okumura Corporation.
Method of and apparatus for determining angular and transversal
displacements of shield machine and succeeding pipe. 4,392,744, CI.
356-153.000.
Tatsumi, Hideo: See —
Kanamaru, Hisanobu; Tohkairin, Akira; Tatsumi, Hideo; Asahi,
Naoutsu; and Haginoya, Mitsuo, 4,392,296, CI. 29-520.000.
Taudt, Heinz: See —
Gast, Uwe; Hennig, Eberhard; Preuss, Dieter; Taudt, Heinz; and
Wellendorf, Klaus, 4,393,399, CI. 358-80.000.
Taylor, Derek P., to Fastbac Research Limited. Shaped materials.
4,393,116, CI. 428-343.000.
Tazume, Masayuki: See —
Sato, Hisato; Takatsu, Haruyoshi; Fujita, Yutaka; Tazume,
Masayuki; Takeuchi, Kiyohumi; and Ohnishi. Hiroyuki,
4,393,258, CI. 585-25.000.
Tchon, Wallace E.: See —
Owen, William H.; Simko, Richard T.; and Tchon, Wallace E.,
4,393,481, CI. 365-228.000.
TDK Electronics Co., Ltd.: See —
Fukuda, Kazumasa, 4,393,110, CI. 428-173.000.
Suda, Takayuki; and Yasuda, Koichi, 4,393,364, CI. 336-65.000.
Teagarden, Dirk L.: See —
DeGeeter, Melvin J.; McCall, John M.; and Teagarden, Dirk L.,
4,393,065, CI. 424-251.000.
Technicare Corporation: See —
Gardineer. Bayard G.; and Heringes, James A., 4,392,486, CI.
128-68.000.
Teckmcyer, Fred W.; and Dom, George K. Gasoline fuel extender
formulation. 4,392.868, CI. 44-56.000.
Tetjin Limited: See —
Yakushiji, Satoshi; Yamamoto, Atsushi; Kitamura, Yukio; and
Yoshioka, Nobuo, 4,392,286, CI. 28-289.000.
Teitin Limited: See —
Sugie, Kiyoshi; Yamada, Takeyoshi; and Yamaji, Teizo, 4,393,113,
CI. 428-220.000.
Tektronix, Inc.: See —
Lewis, John, 4,393,443, CI. 364-200.000.
Teledyne Industries, Inc.: See —
Crocker, William A.; and Hug, Duane L., 4.393.230, CI.
556-457.000.
Tengi, John P.: See —
Keith, Dennis D.; Tengi. John P.; and Weigele, Manfred, 4,393,003,
CI. 260-245.20R.
Teraji, Tsutomu: See —
Sato, Yoshinari; and Teraji, Tsutomu, 4,393,070, CI. 424-266.000.
Terao, Shinji; Shiraishi, Mitsuru; and Maki, Yoshitaka, to Takeda
Chemical Industries. Ltd. Quinone compounds and their use in sup-
pressing the production of SRS-A in mammals. 4.393.075. CI.
424-304.000.
Terwilliger. Gerald L.: See —
Merritt. Robert C; and Terwilliger. Gerald L.. 4.392.472, CI.
123-564.000.
Tessarolo. Francesco: See —
Costanzi. Silvestro; Tessarolo. Francesco; and Brunelli, Maurizio.
4.393.218, CI. 548-530.000.
Teumer, Karl H.: See —
Strieker, George O.; Teumer. Karl H.; and Groenendal. Ronald C,
4.393.117, CI. 428-352.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
Corbeels, Roger J.; and Sengenberger. Charles G., 4,392,981, Q.
252-373.000.
Estes. John H.; and Herbstman. Sheldon. 4.392,946. CI.
208-217.000.
Johnson. Fred L.. Jr.; and Watts. Lewis W.. Jr.. 4.393.254, CI.
568-867.000.
Marion. Charles P.; Brent. Albert; Richter. George N.; Crouch,
William B.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4.392,869.
CI 48-197 OOR
Schlicht. Raymond C. 4.392.966. CI. 252-32.70E.
Smolin. William. 4,393.266. CI. 585-828.000.
Sung. Rodney L.; Sidote. George J.; and Sweeney. William M.,
4.392,866, CI. 44-53.000.
Sung, Rodney L.; and Sweeney, William M., 4,392,867, CI.
44-53.000.
Yeakey. Ernest L.; and Watts. Lewis W.. Jr.. 4.393,237, CI.
564-153.000.
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See —
Blades. Brian J.. 4,392,608, CI. 236-48.00R.
Du, Nguyen T.; and Asao. Akihide, 4,392,893, CI. 148-1.500.
Du. Nguyen T.; and Asao, Akihide, 4,393,479, CI. 365-218.000.
Grenier. Aime J.. 4.393.289. CI. 200-147.00R.
Kitagawa, Norihisa; and Iwamoto. Eisaburo. 4.393.475. CI.
365-201.000.
McElroy, David J., 4,393,474, CI. 365-200.000.
Theyskens, Karel H. A. Tower crane. 4.392,574. CI. 212-225.000.
Thode, Charles W.: See—
Ashlock, Robert L.; Gabrielson, Carl E.; Kerr, Douglas P.; Ras-
mussen, David J.; Stump, Theodore M.; and Thode, Charles W.,
4,393,491, CI. 370-13.000.
Thoman, James J.: See —
Vander Eyken, Gerardus H.; and Thoman, James J., 4,392,446, CI.
114-144.00R.
Thomas, Alan F.; and Naf, Ferdinand, to Firmenich, SA. Alicyclic
unsaturated compounds, their preparation and use of same as perfume
ingredients. 4,392,993, CI. 252-522.00R.
Thomas, Dolphus W., Jr. Clam bucket attachment. 4,392,774, CI.
414-726.000.
Thomas, Gareth J.: See —
Broadhurst, Michael J.; Hassall. Cedric H.; and Thomas. Gareth J.,
4.393.221. CI. 549-39.000.
Thomas, Paul D. Ceiling suspended product display. 4,392,316, CI.
40-617.000.
Thomas. William L.. to Zenith Radio Corporation. Teletext interface
for digital storage medium having synthetic video generator.
4,393,376. CI. 340-717.000.
Thomas William L.: See —
Cox. ChaHes M.; and Thomas William L.. 4,393.404. CI.
358-147.000.
Thompson. Don D.; Brown. Robert J. S.; and Runge, Richard J., to
Chevron Research Company. Method for interpreting well log
records to yield indications of gas/oil in an earth formation such as a
sandstone, limestone, or dolostone. 4.393.486. CI. 367-73.000.
Thompson. Neil E. S.; Redmore. Derek; Oude Alink. Bemardus A.; and
Outlaw. Benjamin T.. to Petrolite Corporation. Compounds contain-
ing sulfur and amino groups. 4.393.026. CI. 422-12.000.
Thompson. Raymond D.: See —
Brown. Ross K.; Thompson. Raymond D.; Woods. Terrill W.;
Wright. Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes, William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546, CI. 180-326.000.
Thomson, Charles D.: See —
Bell, Melvyn R.; and Thomson, Charles D., 4,393,437, CI.
361-383.000.
Thomson-CSF: See-
Beck, Jean L.; le Bars. Jean F.; Emmanuelli. Yves A.; and Bargues,
Denis, 4,393,408, CI. 358-205.000.
Guedj, Richard; Dieulesaint, Eugene; and Royer, Daniel,
4,393,268, CI. 178-18.000.
Shroff, Arvind; and Palluel, Pierre, 4,393,328, CI. 3I3-346.00R.
July 12, m:
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 41
Thomson, Michael G. R.: See—
Collier, Robert J.; and Thomson, Michael G. R., 4,393,312, CI.
250-492.200.
Thornton, Robert E., Jr.: See—
Irving, William A.; and Thornton. Robert E., Jr., 4,392,315. CI.
40-27.000,
Tieberg. Lars A.; and Carlqvist. Stig G. Method and plant for recover-
ing heat from smoke gases. 4.392,809. CI. 431-1 1.000.
Tif Instruments. Inc.; See —
Liebermann. Leonard N., 4,392.374. CI. 73-19.000.
- Timex Corporation: See —
LePage, Joseph R., 4,392,284, CI. 24-265.00B.
Timmons, David R., to Automation Industries, Inc. Grommet clip.
4.392.283, CI. 24-255.0SL.
Tirole. Jacques P. H.; Mons, Claude M.; and Spinat. Roland R., to
Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d' Aviation,
"S.N.E.C.M.A.". Air-cooled sealing rings for the wheels of gas
turbines. 4.392,656. CI. 277-53.000.
Titeflex Corporation: See—
Adamczyk, Rudolph A., 4,392,678, CI. 285-256.000.
Toagosei Chemical Industry Co., Ltd.: See —
Kimura, Kaoru; and Sugiura, Kyoji, 4,393,183, CI. 526-245.000.
Tobias, Michael A.; and Lynch, Conrad L., to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Polyester coil coating. 4,393,121, CI. 428-458.000.
Tobin, Curtis L.: See—
O'Mara, Raymond D.; Smorol, Michael E.; and Tobin. Curtis L..
4.392,525, CI. 165-125.000.
Tohkairin, Akira: See—
Kanamaru, Hisanobu; Tohkairin, Akira; Tatsumi, Hideo; Asahi.
Naotatsu; and Haginoya. Mitsuo, 4,392,296, CI. 29-520.000.
Tojiki, Hitomi: See —
Iwasama, Teruo; and Tojiki. Hitomi. 4.393.340. CI. 318-301.000.
Tokai Rubber Industries Ltd.: See—
Konishi. Keizo. 4.392.639. CI. 267-140.100.
Tokai TRW & Co.. Ltd.: See—
Michio. Abe; and Naoyuki, Maeda, 4,392,540, CI. 180-142.000.
Tokico Ltd.: See—
Kato, Tetsuo; and Makita, Naoki, 4,392,638, CI. 267-64.240.
Oshima, Harumi, 4,392,559, CI. 188-73.320.
Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Makita, Naoki, 4,392,293, CI. 29-436.000.
Tokiquchi, Katsumi: See —
Sakudo, Noriyuki; Tokiquchi, Katsumi; Koike, Hidemi; Kanomata,
Ichiro; and Nakashima, Humihiko. 4,393,333, CI. 315-111.810
Tokuhara, Shinji: See—
Moriwaki, Takeshi; and Tokuhara, Shinji. 4.393.169. CI.
525-67.000.
Tokunaga. Takeshi: See—
Matsuoka, Shigeru; Tokunaga, Takeshi; Yonekura, Seiji; Yamau-
chi, Koji; and Suzuki, Mitsuo, 4,393,342, CI. 318-467.000.
Tokuno, Masateru; Ishii, Yoshinori; and Hoshiyama, Hidetoshi, to
Rengo Co., Ltd. Web aligning process and apparatus. 4,392,910, CI.
156-361.000.
Tokura, Seiichi: See —
Nishiyama, Masashi; Kobayashi, Yoshinari; Tokura, Seiichi; and
Nishi, Norio, 4,392,916, CI. 162-157.100.
Tokyo Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Fujii, Kunihiko; Hirosaki, Yukihiro; Nishiyama, Yoshihisa; and
Sato, Koichiro. 4.392,535. CI. 177-1.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Nakamine. Chosin. 4,392,736, CI. 355-3.00R.
Nozaki, Shinichi; Tai, Ichiro; and Shirayama, Shimpey, 4,393,307,
CI. 250-390.000.
Takagi, Kunihiko, 4,393,286, CI. 200-144.00B.
Takenaka, Shigeo; Kamohara, Eiji; and Seino, Kazuyuki, 4,392,914,
CI. 156-633.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Ozeki, Takeshi, 4,392,712, CI. 350-96.160.
Tolk, Norman H.: See —
Feldman, Leonard C; Kraus, Joseph S.; Tolk, Norman H.; Traum,
Morton M.; and Tully, John C. 4.393.311. CI. 250-459.100.
Tomaszewski, Thaddeus W., to Occidental Chemical Corporation.
Trivalent chromium electrolyte and process employing vanadium
reducing agent. 4,392,922, CI. 204-51.000.
Tomcufcik, Andrew S.; Wright, William B., Jr.; and Marsico, Joseph
W., Jr., to American Cyanamid Company. 3-[(a-Substituted-benzyl]-
2.3.dihydrothiazolo(3.2-a][ 1 ,3]diazacyclan-3-ol denvatives.
4,393,004, CI. 260-245.500.
Tomikawa, Kiyozi: See—
Sasai, Mitsuo; Tomikawa, Kiyozi; and Kajiwara. Kazuo, 4,392,295,
CI. 29-509.000.
Tomita, Fusao; Tamaoki, Tatsuya; Shirahata, Kunikatsu; Kasai, Masaji;
Hirayama, Noriaki; Morimoto, Makoto; and Fukui, Masanori, to
Kyowa Hakko Kogyo Co., Ltd. Antibiotics tetronolide compounds
and process for production thereof 4,393,056, CI. 424-181.000.
Tomizawa, Yoshio, to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd. Tape run speed-
changing circuit. 4,393,420, CI. 360-73.000.
Tomozawa, Atsushi: See—
ManiU, Rikio; and Tomozawa, Atsushi, 4,393,367. CI. 340-
347.0DD —
Tonar. Klaus: See— , .^ ^ „, ^ ,.
Anger. Klaus; Frosien. Juergen; Lischke, Burkhard; Flies, Encn;
and Tonar, Klaus, 4,393,308, CI. 250-396.00R.
Tonne, Peter; and Jaedicke, Hagen, to BASF Aktiengesellschaft. Prepa-
ration of aromatic sulfohalides. 4,393,211, CI. 546-153.000.
Toppan Printing Co., Ltd.: See—
Fujiu, Takahiro; Nakajima, Masao; and Okano. Shigeru, 4.392.265.
CI. 8-120.000.
Toray Industries: See —
Yoshii, Toshiya; Nakura, Satoru; and Murakami. Masatsugi,
4,393,115, CI. 428-323.000.
Toray Industries, Inc.: See —
Endo, Tadakazu; Suzuki, Hirotsugu; and Takahashi, Masanori,
4,392,903, CI. 156-167.000.
Torii, Michihiro; Hirukawa, Kohei; Urata, Hiroshi; and Suzuki, Shini-
chi, to Fuji Electrochemical Co., Ltd. Piezoelectric audible sound
generator. 4,393,373, CI. 340-384.00E.
Torii, Sigeru; Tanaka, Hideo; Nokami, Junzo; Sasaoka. Michio; Saito.
Norio; and Shiroi. Takashi, to Otsuka Kagaku Yakuhin Kabushiki
Kaisha. Process for preparing thiazolinozetidinone derivatives.
4,392.923, CI. 204-59.00R.
Toska Co., Ltd.: See—
Hara, Saburo, 4,392.906, CI. 156-250.000.
Tourdot, Jacques; and Carron, Henry, to L'Air Liquide Societe Ano-
nyme pour I'Etude et I'Exploitation des Procedes. Activating compo-
sition for bleaching with peroxide products. 4,392,975, CI. 252-99.000.
Towmotor Corporation: See—
Johannson, Richard J., 4.392,773, CI. 414-667.000.
Reeves, Jerry L., 4.392.772. CI. 414-667.000.
Russey, James W., 4,392,554, CI. 187-9.00E.
Towse, Eric R. Adaptor for facilitating blood sampling procedures.
4,392,499, CI. 128-764.000.
Toy, Madeline S.; and Stringham, Roger S., to United States of Amer-
ica, Air Force. Copolymers from octafluoronaphthalene. 4,393,198,
CI. 528-397.000.
Toyama, Tadao; See —
Shiba, Keisuke; Nakao, Sho; and Toyama, Tadao. 4,393,128, CI.
430-273.000.
Toyo Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Harasaki, Hayathugu; and Tsutagawa, Wataru, 4,392,545, CI.
180-294.000.
Toyo Seikan Kaisha Limited: See—
Kitamura, Yoichi; and Hotta, Hisashi, 4,392,582, CI. 220-75.000.
Maruhashi, Yoshitsugu; Tanikawa, Isao; Hirata. Sadao; Yazaki,
Jinichi; and Sakano, Kozaburo, 4.393,106, CI. 428-35.000.
Toyo Soda Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See—
Kubo, Masashige; Yoshimitsu, Mitsuaki; and Katsuragawa, Kanzi,
4,393,246, CI. 568-639.000.
Toyota Jidosha 'Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Inoue, Nobuyoshi; and Kishi, Tomomi. 4,393.293, CI. 219-90.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kato, Takashi; and Hayakawa, Masaharu, 4,393,012, CI. 261-
39.00A.
Kobashi, Mamoru; and Itoh, Hiroshi, 4,392,468, CI. 123-339.000.
Miyagi, Hideo; Suematsu, Toshio; Nakano, Jiro; and Ono,
Hironobu, 4,392.467, CI. 123-325.000.
Miyagi, Hideo; and Nakano, Jiro, 4,392,471, CI. 123-489.000.
Nakasu, Kei; Ichikawa, Shigeru; Tanaka, Toshihiko; and Ikeda.
Mitsuo. 4.392.560. CI. 188-73.340.
Suzuki, Ichiro; Yasumatsu, Jun; Imai, Yoshikazu; and Motonami,
Masanao, 4,392,673, CI. 280-804.000.
Yamamoto, Toshimasa; Mori, Mamoru; and Kinaga. Eiichi,
4,392,672, CI. 280-803.000.
Tralies, John M.: Sw—
Hammond, David C; Elchenko, Stephen M.; Tralies, John M.;
Verburgt, Peter W.; and Robinson, Leon R., 4,393,483, CI.
367-13.000.
Traugh, Hubert L. Bicycle rack. 4,392,597. CI. 224-42.130
Traum, Morton M.: See —
Feldman, Leonard C; Kraus. Joseph S.; Tolk. Norman H.; Traum.
Morton M.; and Tully. John C. 4.393.311. CI. 250-459.100.
Trio Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Miyamoto, Yukihiko, 4,393.274. CI. 179- LOGS.
Trukenbrod. Karl: See—
Rigler. Josef K.; Wienhofer. Ekkehard; Leithauser. Horst; and
Trukenbrod, Kari. 4.393.146. CI. 521-56.000.
Trutzschler GmbH & Co. KG: See—
Leifeld, Ferdinand; Marx, Hans-Jurgen; and Scheuermann, Rolf,
4,392,275, CI. 19-81.000.
Tschantz, William H., to Quadracast, Inc. Bulk material handling and
reclaiming equipment. 4,392,566, Ci. 198-509.000.
Tsuchida, Takayasu; and Nakamori, Shigeru, to Ajinomoto Company
Incorporated. Method for producing L-glutamic acid by fermenta-
tion. 4,393,135, Ci. 435-110.000.
Tsuchiya, Takayoshi; and Matsuo, Masami, to Showa Manufactunng
Co., Ltd. Front fork of motorcycle. 4,392.664. CI. 280-276.000.
Tsuji. Kiyoshi: See—
Takaya. Takao; Takasugi. Hisashi; Tsuji. Kiyoshi; and Chiba.
Toshiyuki, 4.393.059, CI. 424-246.000.
Tsukahara, Taiji: See —
Okumura, Taketo; Tsukahara, Taiji; Mikuriya, Takashi; Watanabe,
Hideki; and Katada, Kauutoshi, 4.392,371, CI. 72-231.000.
Tsukamoto Seiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Miida. Eishiro. 4.392.534. CI. 175-340.000.
Tsukanishi. Kenji: See—
Takahashi. Akio; Wajima. Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Monshita,
Hirosada; Mizuno, Yutaka; Yokozawa, Shunya; and Tsukanishi,
Kenji, 4,393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Tsunefuji, Katsuhiko, to Olympus Optical Company Ltd. Movable
reflecting mirror for single lens reflex camera. 4,392,729, CI.
354-152.000.
PI 42
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Tsurumi Synthetic Refractories Co., Ltd.: See —
Yoshinaka, Satoru; Fushida, Masao; and Kimoto, Tatsuzi,
4,393,143, CI. 501-89.000.
Tsutagawa, Watani: See —
Harasaki, Hayathugu; and Tsutagawa, Watani, 4,392,545, CI.
180-294.000.
Tsutsui, Mitsukuni; and Yoshinari, Takashi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Ignition
coil for an internal combustion engine. 4,392,473, CI. 123-635.000.
Tully, John C: See —
Feldman, Leonard C; Kraus, Joseph S.; Tolk, Norman H.; Traum,
Morton M.; and Tully, John C, 4,393,311, CI. 250-459.100.
Tuovinen, Frans H.: See —
Heimala, Seppo O.; Hultholm, Stig E.; and Tuovinen, Frans H.,
4,393,029, CI. 423-55.000.
Tumbough, Harold L.; and Wemtz, Charles W., to Alvey Inc. Live
roller conveyor. 4,392,568, CI. 198-781.000.
Turner, Frederick T.: See —
Harra, David J.; and Turner, Frederick T., 4,392.938, CI.
204-298.000.
Tusinski, Joseph; and Hill, Phillip D., to Cobum Optical Industries, Inc.
Fluid dispersing apparatus for use in producing ophthalmic lenses.
4,392,334, CI. 51-263.000.
Tyler. Keith A.; and Fix, Sidney R., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber
Company, The. Curable long fiber loaded rubber composition and
method of making same. 4,393,154, CI. 524-12.000.
Tyrell, John A.; and Freimiller, Gary L., to General Electric Company.
Carbonate copolymers prepared from imide reactants. 4,393,190, CI.
528-170.000.
Uberg, Ulf: See—
Folkesson. Hans; and Uberg, Ulf, 4,392,368, CI. 72-63.000.
Uchimura, Hiroshi: See —
Ohmori, Hiroyuki; Uchimura, Hiroshi; and Mikage, Yuzo,
4,393,281, CI. 200-16.00D.
Ueberwolf, Heinz: See —
Schwarzenberg, Norbert; Ueberwolf, Heinz; and Kaesmacher,
Jakob, 4,392,404, CI. 83-886.000.
Uehara, Mikio: See—
Watanabe, Masazumi; Uehara, Mikio; Shimazu, Yoshimi; Ishiyama,
Jiro; and Kato, Motohiko, 4.393,083, CI. 426-15.000.
Uhde GmbH: See—
Schmitt, Helmut; Strewe, Wolfgang; and Schurig, Helmuth,
4.392,937, CI. 204-269.000.
Uhlig, Albert R.; and Chang, Long F.. to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Closure
with domed portion. 4,392,579, CI. 215-253.000.
Uhrhan. Paul; and Krauthausen. Edmund, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for the production of 2.3-Dihydro-4H-l,4-benzothiazines.
4,393,206, CI. 544-51.000.
Ulrich, Lawrence W.; and Walker, Connie W., to Durable Packaging
Corporation. Apparatus for sealing cartons. 4,392,911, CI.
156-468.000.
Umeda, Tatsuo: See —
Sasagawa, Masaru; Umeda, Tatsuo; and Kushima, Mamoru,
4,392,400, CI. 83-185.000.
Umezawa, Hamao; Takeuchi, Tomio; and Nakano, Hiroshi, to Microbi-
ochemical Research Foundation. Antibiotic cytophagin and a process
for producmg the same. 4.393,047, CI. 424-118.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See —
Mohr, Paul H.; and Matulewicz, William N., 4,392.972, CI.
252-75.000.
Union Oil Company of California: See —
Delaney, Dennis D.; and Fenton, Donald M., 4,393,037, CI. 423-
573.00R.
Millman, William S., 4,392,985, CI. 252-435.000.
Uniroyal, Inc.; See —
Skura. William A.; and Cathey, Thaddeus F., 4,392,842, CI.
474-205.000.
United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority: See —
Moody, Brian R.; Lowe, Duncan B.; and Lowe, Derek W.,
4.392,435. CI. 104-284.000.
United States of America
Agriculture: See —
Geimer. Robert L.. 4,393,019, CI. 264-83.000.
Air Force: See —
Bilow, Norman, 4,393,101, CI. 427-228.000.
Ennis. Gerald E.; and Colombo, Mario, Jr., 4,392.775, CI.
414-729.000.
Homer, Joseph L.; and Ludman, Jacques E., 4,392.709. CI.
350-3.830.
Myer, Robert J., 4,392,624, CI. 244-158.00A.
Toy, Madeline S.; and Stringham, Roger S., 4,393,198, CI.
528-397.000.
Army: See —
Buser, Rudolph G.; Osche, Gregory R.; Nomiyama, Neal T.; and
Rohde, Robert S., 4,393,517, CI. 455-608.000.
LaFever, Clifford E.; and Peck, John H., 4.392.407. CI. 89-
33.0BB.
Mason. Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson. Avery A., Jr.; Walker, Harrel
L.; Bowler, Eleanor G.; and Ritchey, Charles R., 4,393,048. CI.
424-132.000.
Merkel. George; and Scharf. William D.. 4,393,509, CI.
376-156.000.
Peters. Roswell D. M., 4,392.287. CI. 29-25.350.
Schmidt, Edward M.; and Kahl, George D., 4,392,412, CI. 89-
14.00D.
Wesson. Jerry J.. 4,392,348, CI. 60-229.000.
Ziegler, George E., 4,393,014, CI. 264-3.00R.
Energy: See —
CaJnes. Michael J., 4,392,380. CI. 73-644.000.
Fultz. Brent T.. 4,393.306. CI. 250-374.000.
Heckman. Richard A.. 4.392,995. CI. 252-627.000.
Lauf, Robert J.; and Morgan, Chester S., 4,393,124, CI.
429-104.000.
Moore, SUnley W., 4,392,481, CI. 126-418.000.
Wang, Ching L., 4,393,512, CI. 378-156.000.
Yang, Chiang Y.; and Rapp, Robert A., 4,392,928. CI.
204-130.000.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See —
Brown, Gerald V., 4,392,356, CI. 62-3.000.
Clemmons, James I., Jr., 4,392,749. CI. 368-118.000.
McDonald. Glen E.. 4.392.920. CI. 204-37.00R.
Sherman, Allan, 4,393,039, CI. 423-648.00R.
Yamauchi, Samuel T., 4,392,874, CI. 55-194.000.
Navy: See —
Davies, Kirk E., 4,393,369, CI. 340-347 .OAD.
De Marco, Michael, 4,392,443, CI. 114-20.00R.
Durrell, Robert R., 4,392.410. CI. 86-l.OOR.
Hammond. David C; Elchenko. Stephen M.; Tralies, John M.;
Verburgt, Peter W.; and Robinson, Leon R., 4,393.483. CI.
367-13.000.
Hansen. Peder M.; Hoffman. John G.; Seeley, Elwin W.; and
Andrew, Wesley A.. 4.393.350. CI. 324-334.000.
Reed. Russell. Jr.; Burdette, George W.; Meyers, Gary W.; and
Vuono, William R., 4,392,895, CI. 149-19.300.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See —
Boudault, Robert, 4,393,508, CI. 375-9.000.
Bruggendieck, Siegfried; Nolting, Karl-Heinz; Krahn, Friedrich;
and Olejak, Gerhard. 4.392,714, CI. 350-96.230.
Claasen, Theodoor A. C. M.; Gielis, Gerardus C. M.; Schmidt.
Johan M.; and Schoonheijm. Harry B.. 4.393,273, CI. 179-l.OGD.
Crombeen, Jacobus E.; Crooymans, Petrus W. H. M.; and Visser,
Jan, 4,392,939, CI. 204-298.000.
Engelfriet, Adrianus R. C; Op Het Veld, Adriaan J. G.; and Van
Vucht, Theodorus J. P., 4,392,397, CI. 76-107.00A.
Geis, Hans P.; and Helber. Holger, 4,393,403. CI. 358-113.000.
Hart. Comelis M.; and Lohstroh, Jan, 4,393,471. CI. 365-154.000.
Kunze. Dieter, 4,393,314, CI. 307-228.000.
Radziwill, Wolfgang; Doring, Gunter; and Steinbusch, Hans,
4,393,317, CI. 307-309.000.
Raven, Johannes G.; and Van Buul. Marinus C. W., 4,393.396. CI.
358-36.000.
van der Kooi. Auke G.. 4,393.325, CI. 313-552.000.
United Technologies Corporation: See —
Angelbeck, Albert W.; and Palma, Gary E., 4,393.503. CI.
372-20.000.
Madden. William M.. 4.392.615. CI. 239-265.370.
Pearson. David D.; Lemkey, Frank D.; and Kear. Bernard H.,
4 392 894 CI 148-2 000
Spinhirne, James M., 4,393,303, CI. 250-201.000.
Universal Foods Corporation: See —
Bittle, Cari E., 4,392,533. CI. 171-14.000.
University of Iowa Research Foundation: See —
Burton, Donald J.; and Flynn, Richard M.. 4.393.011. CI.
260-970.000.
University of Rochester. The: See —
Stemberger. Ludwig A., 4,392,996, CI. 260-1 12.00R.
Untereker, Darrel F.: See —
Skarstad, Paul M.; Coury, Arthur J.; and Untereker, Darrel F.,
4,393,125, CI. 429-105.000.
UOP Inc.: See-
Fink, Allen H., 4,392,346, CI. 60-39.040.
Firth, Bruce E., 4,392,969, CI. 252-52.00R.
Schmidt, Robert J., 4,393,256, CI. 568-907.000.
Ward, Dennis J.; and Vora, Bipin V., 4,393,259, CI. 585-315.000.
Upjohn Company, The: See —
Allen, Harry R., 4,393,054, CI. 424-180.000.
DeGeeter, Melvin J.; McCall, John M.; and Teagarden, Dirk L.,
4,393.065, CI. 424-251.000.
Manis. Jack J.; and Highlander. Sarah K.. 4.393.137. CI.
435-172.000.
Urata. Hiroshi: See —
Torii. Michihiro; Hirukawa, Kohei; Urata, Hiroshi; and Suzuki.
Shinichi. 4,393,373, CI. 34O-384.00E.
Urayama, Masashi: See —
Yokobori, Nobuyoshi; Urayama. Masashi; Okamoto. Hiroshi; and
Igarashi, Yoshiaki, 4,393,422, CI. 360-73.000.
Vale, Wylie W., Jr.; Rivier, Jean E. F.; and Brown, Marvin R., to Salk
Institute for Biological Studies, The. Analogs of extended N-terminal
somatosUtin. 4,393,050. CI. 424-177.000.
Van Abeelen, Petrus C. A. M.; and de Munck, Hans, to General Elec-
tric Company. High impact, high modulus reinforced aromatic car-
bonate polymeric mixtures. 4,393,161, CI. 524-506.000.
Van Buul, Marinus C. W.: See-
Raven, Johannes G.; and Van Buul, Marinus C. W., 4,393,396, CI.
358-36.000.
Van Capelleveen, Pieter. to Gebr. van Capelleveen B.V. Intermediate
storage baking tins. 4.392.768. CI. 414-278.000.
van den Berg, Johannes C. M. Controlling perceived sound source
direction. 4,393,270, CI. 179-l.OOD.
van den Broek, Frederik H. Dismantleable boat cradle. 4,392.627. CI.
248-176.000.
Vander Eyken. Gerardus H.; and Thoman. James J., to Cinkel Indus-
tries. Ltd. Pedestal mount autopilot. 4.392.446. CI. 114-144.00R.
July 12, 19
i
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 43
van der Kooi. Auke G.. to U.S. Philips Corporation. Low-pressure
mercury vapor discharge lamp with mercury amalgam. 4,393,325, CI.
313-552.000.
van der Nat. Adrianus A.: See —
Goodall. Brian L.; van der Nat. Adrianus A.; and Sjardijn. Willem.
4,393,182. CI. 526-125.000.
Van Heyningen, Roger S.. to Eastman Kodak Company. Photographic
film cartridge assemblies with removable filters. 4.392.731, CI.
354-180.000.
Van Landeghem-Heynderickx, Renate, executor: See—
Euzen, Jean-Paul; Jacquin, Yves; and Van Landeghem, Hugo,
deceased, 4,392,943, CI. 208-152.000.
Van Landeghem, Hugo, deceased: See —
Euzen. Jean-Paul; Jacquin, Yves; and Van Landeghem, Hugo,
deceased. 4.392.943. CI. 208-152.000.
Van Ooyen, Richard C: See—
Albrecht. Allan J.; and Van Ooyen. Richard C, 4.392,314, CI.
37-103.000.
Van Pelt, Gregory A. Sculptured lamp base. 4,392,904, CI. 156-194.000.
Van Vucht, Theodorus J. P.: See—
Engelfriet, Adrianus R. C; Op Het Veld, Adriaan J. G.; and Van
Vucht, Theodorus J. P., 4,392,397, CI. 76-107.00A.
Van Winkle, Denzal W. Valve structure having movable seat means.
4.392.633, CI. 251-122.000.
Varian Associates, Inc.: See —
Harra, David J., 4,392,932, CI. 204-192.00E.
Harra. David J.; and Turner. Frederick T.. 4,392.938. CI.
204-298.000.
Luscher, Paul E.. 4,392,453, CI. 118-726.000.
Symons, Robert S., 4,393,332, CI. 315-4.000.
Varnum, Nancy C: See —
Seeney, Charles E.; Kraemer, John F.; and Vamum, Nancy C,
4,393,152, CI. 523-139.000.
Vautrin, Wayne. Heat storage and delivery apparatus. 4,392,480, CI.
126-400.000.
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Leipzig: See—
Forster, Karl-Heinz; and Johne, Hans, 4,392.429, CI. 101-365.000.
Wege, Regina, 4,392.426. CI. 101-363.000.
VEB Schwennaschinen-Kombinat "ERNST THALMANN" Magde-
burg: See —
Wyzgol. Ewald; Rasehorn, Hans-Jurgen; and Pechau. Gerhard.
4,392,399, CI. 83-106.000.
Veba Oel AG: See-
Gottlieb, Klaus; Bruderreck, Hartmut; and Wehmeier, Friedel-
Heinrich, 4,393,250, CI. 568-697.000.
Velenyi, Louis J.; Dolhyj, Serge R.; and Krupa, Andrew S., to Standard
Oil Company, The. Preparation of cyclohexenyl compounds.
4.393.260, CI. 585-357.000.
Veltel, Reinhard: See —
Horstmann, Aloys; Eckholt, Heinz; and Veltel, Reinhard,
4,392.340, CI. 57-83.000.
Verburgt, Peter W.: See-
Hammond, David C; Elchenko, Stephen M.; Tralies, John M.;
Verburgt, Peter W.; and Robinson, Leon R., 4,393.483, CI.
367-13.000.
Verdouw, Albert J., to General Motors Corporation. Combustion liner.
4.392.355. CI. 60-752.000.
Vereinigte Schmirgel und Maschinen-Fabriken AG: See —
Eisenberg, Gustav; and Bigorajski, Gunter, 4,393,021, CI.
264-143.000.
Vernon. Paul M.: See-
Jackson. Tee-Squant-Nee; Vernon. Paul M.; and Schoen, David A.,
4,393,498, CI. 371-20.000.
Victor Company of Japan, Ltd.: See —
Minagawa, Hiroyasu, 4,393,353, CI. 330-102.000.
Videki, Edwin R., II: See—
Milligan, Charles A.; Videki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F.,
4,393,445, CI. 364-200.000.
Vidwans, Mohan P., to Sycor, Inc. Pressure arm assembly for disc
recorders. 4,393,424, CI. 360-105.000.
Viellefont, Jean F.; and Dierckxsens, Robert P. L., to Metallurgie
Hoboken-Overpelt. Process and apparatus for replacing cathodes.
4,392.934. CI. 204-198.000.
Viets, Hermann. Directional control of engine exhaust thrust vector in
a STOL-type aircraft. 4.392,621. CI. 244-12.500.
Viitanen. Veikko K.: See—
Billett, Ronald J.; and Viitanen. Veikko K., 4,392,600, CI.
227-50.000.
Vikoma International Limited: See-
Webb, Michael G., 4.392.957, CI. 210-241.000.
Visser, Jan: See —
Crombeen. Jacobus E.; Crooymans, Petrus W. H. M.; and Visser,
Jan, 4.392,939, CI. 204-298.000.
Voest- Alpine AG: See-
Weber. Ralph; Rollingcr, Bemt; Nagl, Michael; and Rinner. Bern-
hard. 4,392.637. CI. 266-265.000.
Vogel, George P.. to Stavo Industries. Inc. Encapsulated frame type
filter press. 4.392.956, CI. 210-224.000.
Vogel, Ignaz. Scat support slide track structure. 4,392,692, CI. 308-
6.00R.
Vogel, John D.: See— __
Groth. Hugh F.; and Vogel. John D.. 4.392.614. CI. 239-215.000.
Vogt. Carl L.: See—
Maloney, Robert T.; and Vogt, Cari L., 4,392,505, CI. 133-4.00A.
Volkmann GmbH & Co.: See—
Horstmann, Aloys; Eckholt. Heinz; and Veltel, Reinhard.
4,392,340, CI. 57-83.000.
Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Hofbauer. Peter; Scholz. Romanus; Heidemeyer, Paulus; and Zim-
mennann, Frank. 4.392,394, CI. 74-689.000.
Volpe, Gerald T.; Laskoski, Leonard S.; Amodeo, Ralph J.; Swanson,
William J.; and Gottesman, Jerome D., to Perkin-Elmer Corporation.
The. Sample-and-hold hybrid active RC filter. 4.393.352. CI.
329-50.000.
von Fraunberg, Karl: See —
Hoffman. Werner; von Fraunberg, Karl; and Baumann, Manfred,
4,393,245, CI. 568-375.000.
Vong, Sandy T. S.: See—
Stinson, Wilbur G.; Schwei, Lawrence J.; and Vong, Sandy T. S.,
4,393,098, CI. 427-168.000.
Vora, Bipin V.: See-
Ward, Dennis J.; and Vora. Bipin V., 4,393,259, CI. 585-315.000.
Voss, Eckart: See —
Stadler, Peter; Metzger, Karl G.; Voss, Eckart; Petersen, Uwe; and
Zeiler, Hans-Joachim, 4,393,051, CI. 424-180.000.
Vrba, Jiri: See —
Burbank. Max B.; Lomnes, Randy K.; Vrba, Jiri; and Fife, Alistair
A., 4,393,349, CI. 324-248.000.
Vuono, William R.: See-
Reed, Russell, Jr.; Burdette, George W.; Meyers, Gary W.; and
Vuono, William R., 4,392,895, CI. 149-19.300.
Vysoka skola dopravy a spojov: See—
Poupe, Oldrich. 4,392,625. Q. 246-34.0CT.
W. R. Grace & Co.: See—
Laine. Nonnan R.; and Herrera, Jose E.. 4.392.987, CI. 252-448.000.
Wada. Shunichi: See—
Okuda. Kuniteru; Fukami. Teruki; Asayama, Yoshiaki; Wada,
Shunichi; and Kabuto, Masami, 4,392,385, CI. 73-861.230.
Wagener, Anthony P., to Sherwin-Williams Company, The. Corrosion
inhibitor for cellulosic insulation. 4,392,994, CI. 252-602.000.
Wagner, Bill L., Sr., to Bio Clinic Company. Abduction pillow.
4,392,489, CI. 128-80.00A.
Wagner. Fritz; Lindorfer, Walter; Jahn-Held, Wilhelm; and Schuiz,
Walther, to Wintershall Aktiengesellschaft; and Gesellschaft fur
Biotechnologische Forschung. Process for separating hydrocarbons
from particulate solids. 4.392.892. CI. 134-25.100.
Wagner. Kuno: See —
Reischl. Artur; and Wagner, Kuno. 4.393.166, CI. 525-27.000.
Wagner, Wilhelm: See —
Wolters, Gerhard; and Wagner, Wilhelm, 4.392.465, CI.
123-263.000.
Wajima, Motoyo: See—
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Morishiu,
Hirosada; Mizuno, Yutaka; Yokozawa, Shunya; and Tsukanishi,
Kenji, 4,393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Waldmann. Hermann: See-
Fork, Kurt; Kaufiiold, Wolfgang; Meusel, Wolfgang; and Wald-
mann, Hennann, 4,393.345, CI. 322-19.000.
Walker. Connie W.: See—
Ulrich, Lawrence W.; and Walker, Connie W., 4,392,911, Q.
156-468.000.
Walker. Fred L. Cellular moist film plant culture system. 4.392,328. CI.
47-62.000.
Walker, Harrel L : See-
Mason, Arthur D., Jr.; Johnson, Avery A., Jr.; Walker, Harrel L.;
Bowler, Eleanor G.; and Ritchey, Charies R., 4,393,048, CI.
424-132.000.
Walkup, William B.. to Ark-les Corporation. Shorting jumper.
4.392.702. CI. 339-19.000.
Wallace, John D. Foldable table with foldable support frame. 4,392,437,
CI. 108-112.000.
Wallman, P. Henrik; and Spars, Byron G.. to Chevron Research Com-
pany Modified staged turbulent bed process for retorting carbon
conuining solids. 4,392.942. CI. 208-1 l.OOR.
Walter. John: See—
Kubis, Charles S.; and Walter, John, 4,392,764, CI. 413-69.000.
Walters, John P.; and Bamhart, Steven G., to Wisconsin Alumni Re-
search Foundation. Electric spark type light source for producing
light for spectroscopic analysis. 4,393,327, CI. 3 15-24 l.OOR.
Walwel, Inc.: See—
Laakmann, Peter; and Laakmann, Katherine D., 4.393.506. CI.
372-59.000.
Wampler. Charles W., II: See-
Denny, Clifford M.; and Wampler, Charles W., II, 4.392,757, CI.
400-328.000.
Wang, Ching L., to United Sutes of America. Energy. Hyper-filter-
fiuorescer spectrometer for x-rays above 120 keV. 4.393,512, CI.
378-156.000.
Wang Laboratories, Inc.: See—
Rasekhi, Houshang; and Nelson, Alfred M., 4,393,389. CI.
346-153.100.
Ward, Dennis J.; and Vora. Bipin V.. to UOP Inc. Process for conver-
sion of propane or butane to gasoline. 4,393.259, CI. 585-315.000.
Warner-Lambert Company: See—
CiafTone. John T.. 4,392,303, CI. 30-85.000.
Warner Lambert Technologies, Inc.: See—
Siegmund, Walter P., 4,393.322. CI. 313-544.000.
Wasserman, Edel: See—
Elsenbaumer, Ronald L.; and Wasserman, Edel, 4,392.978. CI.
252-182.000.
PI 44
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Watai, Haruhisa; Furuta, Hiroyuki; and Kawamoto, Akira, to Yuken
Industry Co., Ltd. Plastic coated with golden evaporated film.
4.393,120, CI. 428-457.000.
Watanabe Engineering Co., Ltd.: See —
Watanabe, Mamoru, 4,392,561, CI. 188-73.360.
Watanabe, Harumichi: See —
Ishida, Noboru; and Watanabe, Harumichi, 4,392,968, CI. 252-
5I.50R.
Watanabe, Hideki: See—
Okumura, Taketo; Tsukahara, Taiji; Mikuriya, Takashi; Watanabe,
Hideki; and Katada, Katsutoshi, 4,392,371, CI. 72-231.000.
Watanabe, Mamoru, to WaUnabe Engineering Co., Ltd. Disc brake.
4,392,561, CI. 188-73.360.
Watanabe, Masazumi; Uehara, Mikio; Shimazu, Yoshimi; Ishiyama,
Jiro; and Kato, Motohiko, to Kikkoman Corporation. Method for
producing grape must and wine. 4,393,083, CI. 426-15.000.
Watanabe, Michihiro: See —
Nakajima, Isao; Tagusari. Koji; Okuna, Kenji; Hayama, Toru;
Takahashi, Kazue; Watanabe, Michihiro; and Kotani. Sumihisa,
4,392,423, CI. 101-93.480.
Watanabe, Nobuhisa, to Yoshida Industry Co., Ltd. Vanity case.
4,392,503, CI. 132-83.00R.
Watanabe, Satoshi: See —
Kamegaya, fakeo; and Watanabe, Satoshi, 4,393,326, CI.
313-582.000.
Waterhousc. John S.: See—
Hathaway, Roderick D.; Irving, Edward; and Waterhousc, John S.,
4,392,930. CI. 204-159.140.
Watkins, Hugh: See—
Calderone, Nicholas; Watkins. Hugh; and Yoshida, Takao,
4.392,976. CI. 252-174.110.
Watts. Lewis W., Jr.: See-
Johnson, Fred L., Jr.; and Watts, Lewis W., Jr., 4,393,254, CI.
568-867.000.
■ Yeakey. Ernest L.; and Watts, Lewis W., Jr., 4,393,237. CI.
564-153.000.
Way International, The: See—
Coad, Peter. Jr.; and Wilensky. David E.. 4.392,409, CI. 84-462.000.
Webb, Michael G.. to Vikoma International Limited. Anti-pollution
equipment. 4,392.957. CI. 210-241.000.
Weber. Heinrich; Lorenz. Kurt; and Dungs. Horst, to Carl Still Gmbh
& Co. KG, Firma. Method and apparatus for indirectly drying and
preheating fine material. 4.392.823, CI. 432-114.000.
Weber, Ralph; Rollinger. Bemt; Nagl. Michael; and Rinner, Bemhard,
to Korf-Stahl AG; and Voest-Alpine AG. Metallurgical melting
apparatus with a blow-nozzle or burner capable of swivelling in
different directions. 4,392,637, CI. 266-265.000.
Weber, Robert N.: See-
Showman, Robert L.; and Weber, Robert N., 4,392.700, CI. 339-
17.00M.
Weeman, John M.: See — /
Mao. Mark H. K.; Miller. Larry E.; and Weeman. John M..
4.393,203. CI. 536-124000.
Wege, Regina. to Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz" Leip-
zig. Ink-applying arrangement. 4.392.426, CI. 101-363.000.
Wegner, Glenn: See-
Gregorian, Roubik; and Wegner, Glenn, 4,393,351, CI. 328-127.000.
Wegrzyn, Ryszard: See—
Wrobel, SUnislaw; and Wegrzyn, Ryszard. 4,392,549, CI.
181-239.000.
Wehmeier, Friedel-Heinrich: See-
Gottlieb, Klaus; Bruderreck, Hartmut; and Wehmeier, Friedel-
Heinrich, 4,393,250. CI. 568-697.000.
Weidler, Charles H., to AMP Incorporated. Tap connector assembly.
4,392,701. CI. 339-17.0OR.
Weigele. Manfred: See —
Keith. Dennis D.; Tengi. John P.; and Weigele, Manfred, 4.393.003.
CI. 260-245.20R.
Weiler. Raywood C. to BMC Products. Knockdown metal table.
4,392,436, CI. 108-81.000.
Weinberg, Leonard, to RCA Corporation. Memory addressing circuit
for converting sequential input data to interleaved output data se-
quence using multiple memories. 4,393,444. CI. 364-200.000.
Weingartner, Bemhard, to Neutrik Aktiengesellschaft. Electrical con-
nector. 4.392.699. CI. 339-14.0OP.
Weiss. Jonas; and Seltzer, Raymond, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, e-
Caprolactam blocked diisocyanates. 4,393,002, CI. 260-239.30R.
Weiss, Wolfram: See—
Hummerich, Rainer; Weiss, Wolfram; Merger, Franz; Immel,
Guenther; Kraus, Hans-Joachim; and Peters, Karl-Clemens.
4.393.207. CI. 544-196.000.
Wellendorf. Klaus: See—
Gast. Uwe; Hennig, Eberhard; Preuss, Dieter; Taudt, Heinz; and
Wellendorf, Klaus, 4,393,399, CI. 358-80.000.
Wellner, Edward: See—
Salzman. Norman; and Wellner. Edward, 4.392,830. CI
434-258.000.
Wclsch. Walter N.. to Dynabrade, Inc. Guide wheels for belt grinder.
4,392.333, CI. 51-170.0EB.
Welschof, Hans-Heinrich; and Damian. Karl, to Lohr & Bromkamp
GmbH. Sealing boot for universal joint. 4.392.838, CI. 464-175.000.
Wenzel, James L.: See —
Siddiqui, Ehtisham U. A.; Wenzel. James L.; and Butterfield, John
L., 4.392,835, CI. 464-32.000.
Werner Kammann Maschinenfabrik GmbH: See —
Strauch. Karl. 4.392.565. CI. 198-378.000.
Wemtz. Charles W.: See—
Tumbough. Harold L.; and Wemtz, Charles W.. 4.392,568, CI.
198-781.000.
Wespac: See —
Ridge. Warren J.; and Roberts, Dennis C, 4,393,410, CI.
358-285.000.
Wessel, Wolf to Robert Bosch GmbH. RPM Regulating device for the
fuel injection system of an intemal combustion engine. 4,392.469, CI.
123-387.000.
Wessel, Wolf See—
Stumpp, Gerhard; and Wessel, Wolf, 4,392,352, CI. 60-602.000.
Wesson, Jerry J., to United States of America, Army. Device for
bleeding motor gases thru motor pole piece. 4,392,348, CI. 60-229.000.
West Electric Co., Ltd.: See—
Hirata, Shinji; and Ina. Hirohiko, 4,393,335, CI. 3 15-24 1. OOP.
Western Electric Company. Inc.: See —
Hannes. John S.; and Harringer. Robert V., 4,392,301, CI.
29-741.000.
Western Research and Development: See —
Berlie, Elmer M.; and Smart, John D., 4,392,816, CI. 431-202.000.
Berlie, Elmer M.; Smart, John D.; and Zelensky, Michael J.,
4.392,817, CI. 431-202.000.
Westfalia Separator AG: See—
Gunnewig, Hubert. 4,392,845, CI. 494-1.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Bauerle, James E., 4.392,388, CI. 73-863.230.
Jones, Stanley W.; and Franz, James H., Jr., 4,393,338, CI.
318-86.000.
Shum, Lanson Y., 4.392.776, CI. 414-744.00R.
Yannopoulos. Lymperios N.; and Pierre, Joseph F., 4.392,991. CI.
252-466.00J.
Weston. Paul, to Lucas Industries Limited. Intemal combustion engine
throttle control. 4.392.502, CI. 123-342.000.
Westphal, Thomas R. Head support and halo jig. 4.392.645. CI.
269-328.000.
Westvaco Corporation: See —
Fremion, Edwin A., 4,392,606. CI. 229-23.00R.
Westwood, William D.: See—
Maniv, Shmuel; and Westwood, William D., 4,392,931, CI. 204-
192.00R.
Wetrok Inc.: See—
Notta, Adolf 4,392.787, CI. 417-269.000.
Whalin, Jeffery A.; Shanley, Charles W.; Scansaroli, Michael N.; and
Dworsky, Lawrence N., to Motorola. Inc. Method for captivating a
substrate within a holder. 4.393,131, CI. 430-320.000.
Whallon, William P., Jr.: See-
Hall, James R.; and Whallon, William P., Jr., 4,392,703, CI. 339-
49.00R.
Whellams, Geoffrey E. Squirrel cage induction motors. 4,393,344, CI.
318-759.000.
Whitaker, Graham: See-
Roberts, Norman L.; and Whitaker, Graham. 4,393,214, CI.
546-345.000.
White, Dwain M.: See-
Giles, Harold F., Jr.; and White, Dwain M., 4,393,168, CI.
525-66.000.
White, Joe L.; and Ohirogge, Alvin J., to Purdue Research Foundation.
Ion exchange materials to increase consumption of non-protein nitro-
gen by ruminants. 4,393,082, CI. 426-2.000.
Whitehurst. Darrell D.: See-
Mitchell, Thomas O.; and Whitehurst. Darrell D., 4.393.255, CI.
568-902.000.
Whitman Medical Corporation: See—
Lichtenstein. Joseph. 4.392.856, CI. 604-177.000.
Whitney, Douglass G.; and Martin, John K., III. Injection and monitor-
ing system. 4,392,847, CI. 604-118.000.
Wiedenmann, Hans: See —
Beller, Manfred; and Wiedenmann, Hans, 4,392,523, CI.
164-453.000.
Wieland, Erich G., to Koenig & Bauer AG. Ink fountain for printing
machines. 4,392,427. CI. 101-365.000.
Wieland, Erich G., to Koenig & Bauer AG. Ink fountain for printing
machines. 4,392,428, CI. 101-365.000.
Wieland, Erich G., to Koenig & Bauer AG. Method to maintain smooth
running of ink metering elements in ink fountains of printing ma-
chines. 4,392,431, CI. 101-426.000.
Wieland Werke AG: See—
Hage, Manfred; Demuth, Hans; and Junker, Otto, 4,392,526, CI.
165-154.000.
Wieland- Werke A.G., Metallwerke: See—
Beller. Manfred; and Wiedenmann. Hans, 4.392,523, CI.
164-453.000.
Wienhofer, Ekkehard: See —
Rigler, Josef K.; Wienhofer, Ekkehard; Leithauser, Horst; and
Trukenbrod, Karl, 4,393,146, CI. 521-56.000.
Wier, Franz, to REPA FeinsUnzwerk. Lock for safety belts. 4,392,282,
CI. 24-230.0AL.
Wightman. William, Jr. Adjusuble face-plate template. 4,392,307, CI.
33-197.000.
Wilensky, David E.: See—
Coad, Peter, Jr.; and Wilensky, David E., 4,392,409, CI. 84-462.000.
Will, Peter. Joint splint. 4,392,488. CI. 128-80.00R.
William H. Rorer, Inc.: See-
Douglas, George H.; and Campbell, Henry P., 4,393,077, CI.
424-326.000.
July 12, 198;
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 45
Williams, Robert D.: See-
Brown, Ross G.; Bright, David R.; and Williams, Robert D.,
4,393,041, CI. 424-19.000.
Williams, Thomas V. Parallel inherently balanced roury valve intemal
combustion engine. 4,392,460, CI. 123-80.0BB.
Willinger, Allan H., to Willinger Bros. Inc. Aquarium net assembly and
packaging therefore. 4.392,570, CI. 206-231.000.
Willinger Bros. Inc.: See —
Willinger, Allan H., 4,392,570, CI. 206-231.000.
Willmouth. Frank M.: See-
Holmes, Paul A.; Willmouth, Frank M.; and Newton, Alan B.,
4,393,167, CI. 525-64.000.
Winiarski, Albert C, to Christmas Club. Checkbook comprising alter-
nate check blanks and check stubs. 4,392,675, CI. 282-23.00R.
Wintershall Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Wagner, Fritz; Lindorfer, Walter; Jahn-Held, Wilhelm; and Schuiz,
Walther, 4,392,892, CI. 134-25.100.
Wirth, Charles J., to Kamatics Corporation. Rotary drive coupling.
4.392,837, CI. 464-69.000.
Wisconsin Alumni Research Foundation: See-
Walters. John P.; and Barnhart. Steven G., 4.393,327. CI. 315-
241.00R.
Wistar Institute, The: See —
Curtis. Peter J.; and Wunner, William H., 4,393,201, CI. 536-27.000.
Wistar Institute of Anatomy and Biology, The: See—
Knowles, Barbara B.; and Aden, David P., 4,393,133, CI. 435-6.000.
Witiak, Donald T.; and Rahwan, Ralf G., to Ohio Sute University
Research Foundation. The. Compounds and methods for changing
calcium metabolism within the cells of a mammal. 4.393,226. CI.
549-433.000.
Witt. Donald R., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Heating silica gel in
inert atmosphere before activation. 4.392,990, CI. 252-458.000.
Wocher. Berthold: See —
Bauerlen, Hans; Pfendler. Thomas; and Wocher, Berthold,
4,392.383, CI. 73-724.000.
Woizan. Gunter: See —
Dobrusskin, Alexander; Klein. Lutz; and Woizan, Gunter,
4,393.331, CI. 313-489.000.
Wolfe, Hunter. Spreader safety device. 4.392,680, CI. 294-78.00R.
Wolfrum, Gerhard: See —
Schenk, Gunther; Bergthaller, Peter; Wolfrum, Gerhard; and
Stolzenburg, Rudolf 4,393,132, CI. 430-562.000.
Wolters, Gerhard; and Wagner, Wilhelm. to Daimler-Benz Aktien-
gesellschaft. Self-igniting intemal combustion engine with a rotation-
ally symmetrical piston trough. 4.392.465. CI. 123-263.000.
Wong, Rayman Y. Pyridylalkyl thiocarbonates as insect repellents.
4.393.068, CI. 424-263.000.
Wong, Tom C, to General Motors Corporation. Cap and valve assem-
bly. 4,392,583, CI. 220-202.000.
Wood, Robin: See —
BritUin, David R.; and Wood, Robin, 4,393,062, CI. 424-250.000.
Woodruff. William W.: See-
Cray, Edgar R.; Davis, Russell R.; Knapp, Maynard K.; Richards,
Glenn L.; Root, Bernard H.; and Woodruff. William W.,
4,393,495, CI. 370-56.000.
Woods, Terrill W.: See-
Brown, Ross K.; Thompson, Raymond D.; Woods, Terrill W.;
Wright, Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes, William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546, CI. 180-326.000.
Woodward, Fred E.; and Hudson, Alice P. Laundry softener antistatic
composition. 4.392,965. CI. 252-8.800.
Woodward. Kenneth E.; and Zeiger. Terry L. Cylinder head oil distri-
bution system for certain Harley-Davidson motorcycle engines.
4,392,464, CL 123-196.00R.
Wooster Brush Company, The: See —
Groth, Hugh F.; and Vogel, John D., 4,392,614, CI. 239-215.000.
Woronets, Eli M. Sports whistle with finger grip. 4,392.325, CI.
46-179.000.
Wright. Darrell L.: See-
Brown. Ross K.; Thompson, Raymond D.; Woods. Terrill W.;
Wright, Darrell L.; Conner, James M.; Crookes. William E.; and
Purcell, William F., 4,392,546, CI. 180-326.000.
Wright, Forrest S.; and Zimmerman, Ted R., to Industrial Holograph-
ies, Inc. Tilt head camera for interferometric analysis of tires.
4,392,745, CI. 356-348.000.
Wright, Harold T., to Disctron, Inc. Linear head actuator. 4,393,425,
CI. 360-105.000.
Wright, Michael R.: See—
Pemicano, Vincent S.; and Wright, Michael R., 4.392.901, CI.
156-155.000.
Wright, William B., Jr.: See—
Tomcufcik, Andrew S.; Wright, William B., Jr.; and Marsico,
Joseph W., Jr.. 4,393,004, CI. 260-245.500.
Wrightman, Ronald A. Log building construction. 4,392,520. CI.
144-363.000.
Wrobel, Stanislaw; and Wegrzyn, Ryszard, to Instytut Chemii Nieor-
ganicznej. Boiler noise suppressor. 4.392,549. CI. 181-239.000.
Wulff, Claus: See—
Freiug, Dieter; Bottenbruch, Ludwig; and Wulff, Claus, 4,393,009,
CI. 260-544.00K.
Wunderwald, Peter: See—
Schrenk, Jurgen; and Wunderwald, Peter, 4,393,139. CI.
435-219.000.
Wunner, William H.: See-
Curtis, Peter J.; and Wunner, William H., 4.393,201. CI. 536-27.000.
Wunning, Joachim. Multiple heat recuperation bumer system and
method. 4.392.818. CI. 431-215.000.
Wyoming Mineral Corporation: See —
Crossley. Thomas J.. 4.393.028, CI. 423-15.000.
Wyzgol, Ewald; Rasehom, Hans-Jurgen; and Pechau, Gerhard, to VEB
Schwermaschinen-Kombinat "ERNST THALMANN" Magdeburg.
Drum-type wire shear. 4,392,399. CI. 83-106.000.
Xicor, Inc.: See —
Owen, William H.; Simko, Richard T.; and Tchon, Wallace E..
4.393.481. CI. 365-228.000.
Yaecker. John, Administrator: See —
Gordon, Edmund A., deceased; and Yaecker, John. Administrator.
4.392.344. CI. 59-78.100.
Yaguchi, Tsuguo: See —
Horiguchi. Satoru; Sasaoka. Takeshi; Shimane. Koichi; Mogi,
Shigeru; Yaguchi, Tsuguo; and Sano, Kazuhiko, 4.393.398, CI.
358-76.000.
Yahashi. Satoru: See —
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi. Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa.
Mitsuaki; and Yamamoto. Takashi, 4,392,421, CI. 99-524.000.
Yakushiji, Satoshi; Yamamoto, Atsushi; Kitamura, Yukio; and Yoshi-
oka, Nobuo, to Teijin Limited. Apparatus for taking up a bundle of
filaments. 4.392,286. CI. 28-289.000.
Yamada. Kunihiro, to Ricoh Company. Ltd. Shift register. 4.393.482.
CI. 365-236.000.
Yamada. Takashi: See —
Fujinami, Hiroshi; and Yamada. Takashi, 4,393,271, CI. 179-l.OSM.
Yamada, Takeyoshi: See—
Sugie, Kiyoshi; Yamada, Takeyoshi; and Yamaji, Teizo, 4,393,113,
CI. 428-220.000.
Yamagata, Tetsuya: See—
Noda, Kanji; Nakagawa, Akira; Yamagata, Tetsuya; and Ide,
Hiroyuki, 4,393,076, CI. 424-317.000.
Yamago, Naoyoshi: See-
Ida. Michiaki; Hagiwara, Noriaki; Yamago. Naoyoshi; Yoshioka.
Masahiro; and Kikuchi, Katsuaki, 4,392,751, CI. 384-99 000.
Yamaguchi, Akihiro: See —
Mita, Ryuichi; Higuchi, Chojiro; Kato, Toshio; Kawashima,
Nobuyuki; Yamaguchi, Akihiro; Nagai, Shosuke; and Takano,
Takao. 4.393,000, CI. 26O-239.0OE.
Yamaguchi, Keiki, to Yokogawa Electric Works. Ultrasonic diagnostic
equipment. 4,392,379, CI. 73-626.000.
Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Makita, Naoki, to Tokico Ltd. Method of
assembling combination shock absorber and air spring. 4.392.293, CI.
29-436.000.
Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi: See—
Maki. Naoki; Numata, Seiji; Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Yamamoto.
Heroe, 4,393,429, CI. 361-19.000.
Yamaji, Teizo: See—
Sugie, Kiyoshi; Yamada, Takeyoshi; and Yamaji, Teizo, 4,393,113,
CI. 428-220.000.
Yamamoto, Atsushi: See—
Yakushiji, Satoshi; Yamamoto, Atsushi; Kitamura, Yukio; and
Yoshioka, Nobuo, 4.392.286. CI. 28-289.000.
Yamamoto, Heroe: See—
Maki, Naoki; Numata, Seiji; Yamaguchi, Kiyoshi; and Yamamoto.
Heroe, 4,393,429, CI. 361-19.000.
Yamamoto, Takashi: See—
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi, Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa.
Mitsuaki; and Yamamoto. Takashi. 4,392,421. CI. 99-524.000.
Yamamoto. Toshimasa; Mori, Mamoru; and Kinaga. Eiichi, to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Kabushiki-Kaisha Tokai-Rika-
Denki-Seisakusho. Webbing retractor. 4,392.672, CI. 280-803.000.
Yamamoto, Yoshikazu: See —
Hirashima, Tsuneaki; Miyata, Toshiyuki; Yamamoto, Yoshikazu;
and Kato, Mitsuyuki, 4,393,216, CI. 548-305 000
Yamasaki. Saburo: See—
Hiraiwa, Kazuyoshi; and Yamasaki. Saburo, 4,393,285, CI.
200-61.880,
Yamashita, Koji, to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd. Mobile antenna mount-
ing assembly. 4,393,383, CI. 343-903.000.
Yamauchi, Koji: See—
Matsuoka, Shigeru; Tokunaga, Takeshi; Yonekura, Seiji; Yamau-
chi, Koji; and Suzuki. Mitsuo. 4.393.342, CI. 318-467.000.
Yamauchi. Samuel T., to United Sutes of America. National Aeronau-
tics and Space Administration. Degassifying and mixing apparatus for
liquids. 4.392,874, CI. 55-194.000.
Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu: See —
Tanimoto, Akira; Nakanishi, Tosaku; and Yanagiuchi, Shigenobu.
4.393,462, CI. 364-900.000.
Yang, Chiang Y.; and Rapp, Robert A., to United Sutes of America,
Energy. Method of doping a semiconductor. 4,392,928, CI.
204-130.000.
Yang, Tai-Cheng; Rao, Krishna K.; and Huang, I-Der, to Exxon Re-
search & Engineenng Co. Catalyst for carboxylic anhydride produc-
tion. 4,392,986, CI. 252-435.000.
Yanma Agricultural Equipment Company Limited: See—
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi, Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa,
Mitsuaki; and Yamamoto, Takashi, 4,392,421, CI. 99-524.000.
Yannopoulos, Lymperios N.; and Pierre, Joseph F., to Westinghouse
Electric Corp. Method of making a-hematite catalyst. 4,392,991, CI.
252-466.00J.
Yano, Akira; Saito, Yoshitada; and Kasahara, Yasushi, to Fujizoki
Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Standard blood filter paper for use in
diagnosis of histidinemia. 4.393,134. CI. 435-29.000.
PI 46
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 12, 1983
Yano, Noriyuki; Yahashi, Satoru; Shimazaki, Kanzo; Nakazawa, Mit-
suaki; and Yamamoto. Takashi, to Seirei Industry Company Limited;
and Yanma Agricultural Equipment Company Limited. Rice hulling
and sorting device. 4,392,421, CI. 99-524.000.
Yasuda, Koichi: See —
Suda, Takayuki; and Yasuda. Koichi. 4,393.364. CI. 336-65.000.
Yasuhara. Seishi. to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Diesel engine having a dual
lubrication system. 4.392,463, CI. I23-196.00M.
Yasumatsu, Jun: See —
Suzuki, Ichiro; Yasumatsu, Jun; Imai, Yoshikazu; and Motonami.
Masanao. 4.392.673, CI. 280-804.000.
Yasunobe, Junji: See —
Shimizu, Masami; and Yasunobe. Junji. 4.392.752. CI. 384-135.000.
Yates, Winston F.: See—
Milligan, Charles A.; Videki, Edwin R., II; and Yates, Winston F.,
4,393,445, CI. 364-200.000.
Yazaki, Jinichi: See —
Maruhashi, Yoshitsugu; Tanikawa, Isao; Hirata, Sadao; Yazaki,
Jinichi; and Sakano. Kozaburo. 4.393.106, CI. 428-35.000.
Yazawa, Satoru: See —
Hosokawa, Minoru; Ikeda. Masayuki; and Yazawa. Satoru.
4.393,380. CI. 340-805.000.
Yeakey, Ernest L.; and Watts, Lewis W., Jr.. to Texaco Inc. Polyox-
yalkylenepolyacrylamides. 4.393,237. CI. 564-153.000.
Yip. Kin F.: See—
Helfrich. Elaine A.; and Yip. Kin F., 4,392.864, CI. 8-506.000.
Yokobori, Nobuyoshi; Urayama, Masashi; Okamoto, Hiroshi; and
Igarashi, Yoshiaki, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Device
for driving magnetic tape. 4,393,422. CI. 360-73.000.
Yokogawa Electric Works: See—
Yamaguchi, Keiki, 4,392,379, CI. 73-626.000.
Yokogawa, Tomoshisa; and Gomi, Shinuro, to Pioneer Electric Corpo-
ration. Input signal level control device for receiver. 4,393,513. CI.
455-243.000.
Yokomizo, Yoshikazu, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Contour correcting
apparatus for video signals. 4,393.407, CI. 358-166.000.
Yokozawa, Shunya: See —
Takahashi, Akio; Wajima, Motoyo; Tada, Ritsuro; Morishita.
Hirosada; Mizuno, Yutaka; Yokozawa, Shunya; and Tsukanishi.
Kenji, 4,393,188, CI. 528-88.000.
Yonekura, Seiji: See —
Matsuoka, Shigeni; Tokunaga. Takeshi; Yonekura. Seiji; Yamau-
chi. Koji; and Suzuki. Mitsuo. 4.393.342, CI. 318-467.000.
Yoshida Industry Co.. Ltd.: See—
Watanabe. Nobuhisa. 4.392,503, CI. 132-83.00R.
Yoshida Kogyo K. K.: See—
lai, Kenichiro, 4,392,291, CI. 29-408.000.
Matsuda, Yoshio, 4,392,363, CI. 66-193.000.
Yoshida, Muneaki. Camera with focal-plane shutter having contrast
control. 4.392,728, CI. 354-49.000.
Yoshida. Takao: See —
Calderone, Nicholas; Watkins, Hugh; and Yoshida, Takao,
4.392,976, CI. 252-174.110.
Yoshida, Takashi: See —
Makabe, Osamu; Murai, Yasushi; Okonogi, Tuneo; Onodera.
Masahiro; Koyama, Yoshiyuki; and Yoshida, Takashi, 4,393,058,
CI. 424-246.000.
Yoshida, Tsuyoshi: See —
Miki, Nobuaki; Kawamoto, Mutsumi; Shibau, Kazuhiko; Yoshida,
Tsuyoshi; and Amano, Hiroyuki. 4,393,467, CI. 364-424. 100.
Yoshii, Hisao, to Dainichi Kogyo Co., Ltd. Control circuit for gasifled
liquid fuel combustion apparatus. 4,392,812, CI. 431-73.000.
Yoshii, Toshiya; Nakura, Satoru; and Murakami, Masatsugi, to Toray
Industries. Multilayered polypropylene film. 4,393,115, CI.
428-323.000.
Yoshimitsu. Mitsuaki: See —
Kubo, Masashige; Yoshimitsu, Mitsuaki; and KaUuragawa, Kanzi,
4,393,246, CI. 568-639.000.
Yoshimoto, Koichi. to Hanshin Sogyo Co., Ltd. Two-wheeled roller
skate. 4,392,659, CI. 280-1 1.230.
Yoshinaka, Satoru; Fushida. Masao; and Kimoto. Tatsuzi, to Tsurumi
Synthetic Refractories Co., Ltd. Amorphous refractory settable at
low temperatures. 4,393,143, CI. 501-89.000.
Yoshinari. Takashi: See—
Tsutsui. Mitsukuni; and Yoshinari. Takashi. 4.392.473. CI.
123-635.000.
Yoshino. Masahito, to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Quartz crystal
watch. 4.392,748, CI. 368-88.000.
Yoshioka, Masahiro: See —
Ida, Michiaki; Hagiwara, Noriaki; Yamago, Naoyoshi; Yoshioka,
Masahiro; and Kikuchi. Katsuaki. 4.392.751. CI. 384-99.000.
Yoshioka, Nobuo: See—
Yakushiji. Satoshi; Yamamoto. Atsushi; Kitamura. Yukio; and
Yoshioka. Nobuo, 4,392,286, CI. 28-289.000.
Yoshitsugu. Seikichi; and Shimatsu. Minoru, to Nissan Motor Company
Limited. Vehicle body structure. 4,392.684, CI. 296-185.000.
You, Chin-San. Method of producing a racket frame. 4,393.024. CI.
264-162.000.
Young. Robert G.: See—
Skwirut, Henry; and Young, Robert G., 4,393,330, CI. 313-487.000.
Yperman, Jacques L., to Societe Anonyme des Eublissements Adrien
de Backer. Cover assembly for airport guidance light. 4,393,440, CI.
362-309.000.
Yquel, Jean-Pierre, to L'Oreal. Measuring instrument with automatic
loading and an automatic cycle, for studying the tensile characteris-
tics of fibres. 4,392,384, CI. 73-830.000.
Yu, Cheng-Sein. to Stiefel Laboratories, Inc. Anesthetic-antipruritic
morpholine compounds, compositions and use. 4,393.061, CI.
424-248.580.
Yuken Industry Co., Ltd.: See—
Watai, Haruhisa; Furuta, Hiroyuki; and Kawamoto, Akira.
4,393,120, CI. 428-457.000.
Yuniskis, Donald G., Jr.: See —
Dunn, Thomas J.; Yuniskis, Donald G., Jr.; Szakacs, Gabor L.; and
Nguyen, Nghia V., 4,393,448, CI. 364-449.000.
Yuyama, Yasuaki: See —
Honjo, Satoru; Yuyama, Yasuaki; Iwasa. Masakazu; and Imanishi.
Kazuo. 4,393.112. CI. 428-207.000.
Zabotto. Arlette: See—
Koulbanis. Constantin; 2^botto, Arlette; Griat. Jacqueline- and
Charrier, Jean, 4,393,043, CI. 424-59.000.
Zajac, John, to Eaton Corporation. Wafer support system. 4,392,915.
CI. 156-643.000. »-»- ^
Zehender, Ernst: See —
Grunwald. Werner; Zehender. Ernst; Friese. Karl-Hermann;
Schmatz. Jurgen; Neu. Hans; Kimer, Kuno; and Schumacher,
Bemd, 4,393,282, CI. 200-19.00R.
Zeidler, Ulrich: See —
Fischer, Herbert; Budnowski, Manfred; and Zeidler, Ulrich,
4,393,060, CI. 424-248.500.
Zeiger, Terry L.: See —
Woodward. Kenneth E.; and Zeiger. Terry L.. 4,392,464, CI.
123-196.00R.
Zeiler, Hans- Joachim: See —
Stadler, Peter; Metzger, Karl G.; Voss, Eckart; Petersen, Uwe; and
Zeiler, Hans- Joachim, 4,393,051, CI. 424-180.000.
Zeitraeg. Rolf, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Method for feeding call
progress tones into conference connections. 4,393,496, CI. 370-62.000.
Zelensky, Michael J.: See—
Berlie, Elmer M.; Smart, John D.; and Zelensky, Michael J..
4,392.817, CI. 431-202.000.
Zellerman, Gabor: See —
Oreopoulos. Dimitrios G.; and Zellerman, Gabor, 4,392.855, CI.
604-175.000.
Zemp. Hans N.. to Etablissement Texcontor. Anionic ion exchange
resins with cholesterol-decreasing properties. 4,393,145, CI.
521-38.000.
Zengel, Hans-Georg; and Bergfeld, Manfred, to Akzo NV. Method for
the production of blocked isocyanates. 4,393,238, CI. 564-255.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
Cox, Charles M.; and Thomas William L., 4,393,404, CI.
358-147.000.
De Vries, Adrian J., 4,393,358, CI. 333-194.000.
Lehnert, Stanley E., 4.393,329, CI. 313-477.00R.
Thomas, William L., 4,393,376, CI. 340-717.000.
Ziegler, George E., to United States of America, Army. Method of
casting explosive charge with high solids content. 4,393,014, CI.
264-3.00R.
Zimmerman, Ted R.: See —
Wright, Forrest S.; and Zimmerman, Ted R., 4,392,745, CI.
356-348.000.
Zimmermann, Frank: See —
Hofbauer, Peter; Scholz, Romanus; Heidemeyer, Paulus; and Zim-
mermann, Frank, 4,392,394, CI. 74-689.000.
Zirker, Guenter: See —
Broecker. Franz J.; Hupfer. Leopold; Merger, Franz; Miesen,
Ernest; Paetsch, Juergen; and Zirker, Guenter, 4.393.251. CI.
568-811.000.
Zorbalas. George S.. to RCA Corporation. Rapid stepping of a moving
recorded medium. 4,393,421, CI. 360-73.000.
501 Ferranti Limited: See —
Pitches, Brian E.; Murray. Robert M. S.; and Rogers, Douglas J.,
4,392,378, CI. 73-304.00C.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 12th DAY OF JULY, 1983
Note — Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Ampex Corporation: See —
Miller, Jerry W., Re. 31,311, CI. 360-40.000.
Antonelli, Joseph A.; Kelly, Renee J.; and McLaughlin, Joseph E., to
Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company. High solids ambient
temperature curing coatings of acrylic-fatty acid drying oil resins.
Re. 31,309, Q. 523-459.000.
Armco Inc.: See —
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby, John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B., Re. 31.306, CI. I48-12.00F.
Dow Chemical Company, The: See —
Najvar, Daniel J., Re. 31,310, CI. 525-531.000.
Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company: See —
Antonelli, Joseph A.; Kelly, Renee J.; and McLaughlin, Joseph E.,
Re. 31,309, CI. 523-459.000.
Elias, James A., deceased (by Elias, June G., executrix); Newby, John
R.; and Pierson, Marvin B., to Armco Inc. Cold rolled, ductile, high
strength steel strip and sheet and method therefor. Re. 31,306, CI.
148-I2.00F.
Elias, June G., executrix: See —
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby, John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B., Re. 31,306, CI. I48-I2.00F.
Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho: See—
Tsukiji, Yoshihiro, Re. 31,304. CI. 29-27.00C.
Kelly, Renee J.: See —
Antonelli, Joseph A.; Kelly, Renee J.; and McLaughlin, Joseph E.,
Re. 31.309, CI. 523-459.000.
MacKenzie, Kenneth A.; and Verhoeff, Abraham, to Shell Internatio-
nale Research Maatschap. IIJ B.V. Method for preparing clay-based
grease compositions. Re. 31,307, CI. 252-28.000.
McLaughlin, Joseph E.: See —
Antonelli, Joseph A.; Kelly, Renee J.; and McLaughlin, Joseph E.,
Re. 31,309, CI. 523-459.000.
Miller, Jerry W., to Ampex Corporation. DC Free encoding for data
transmission system. Re. 31.311, CI. 360-40.000.
Moran, Harold J., to Switlik Parachute Coijipany, Inc. Life preserver of
the encapsulated type. Re. 31,305, CI. 441-123.000.
Najvar, Daniel J., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Impact resistant
vinyl ester resin and process for making same. Re. 31,310. CI.
525-531.000.
Newby, John R.: See —
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby, John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B., Re. 31,306, CI. 148-12.00F.
Pierson, Marvin B.: See —
Elias, James A., deceased; Newby, John R.; and Pierson, Marvin
B.. Re. 31,306, CI. I48-12.00F.
Shell Internationale Research Maatschap, IIJ B.V.: See—
MacKenzie, Kenneth A.; and Verhoeff, Abraham, Re. 31,307, CI.
252-28.000.
Switlik Parachute Company, Inc.: See—
Moran, Harold J., Re. 31,305, CI. 441-123.000
Tsukiji, Yoshihiro, to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho. Machine
for drilling holes in right-angular work surfaces. Re. 31,304. CI.
29-27.00C.
Verhoeff, Abraham: See—
MacKenzie, Kenneth A.; and Verhoeff, Abraham, Re. 31,307, CI.
252-28.000.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Hanson, Alden W., Method of generating snow. Bl 2,968,164, CI.
62—74.
Enright, Dennis J.; Kahabka, Richard D.; and Miller, Donald F.,
to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Wire-splic-
ing apparatus and method. Bl 3,708.779. CI. 339—99 R.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See —
Enright, Dennis J.; Kahabka. Richard D.; and Miller, Donald
F., Bl 3.708.779, CI. 339—99 R
Palenchar, Daniel P.; Lehker, Wayne H.; and Lock, David P.. to
Kardex Systems. Inc. Universal motor control. Bl 3.866,100,
CI. 318—257.
Kardex Systems, Inc.: See —
Palenchar, Daniel P.; Lehker. Wayne H.; and Lock, David
P.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
A.P.C. Industries, Inc.: See—
Marks, Barry M., 269,664, CI. DlO-104.000.
Allibert S.A.: See—
Deconinck, Didier, 269,653, CI. D6-56.000.
Allison Corporation: See-
Seltzer, Samuel M.; and Dennison, Saul, 269,672, CI. D 13- 10.000.
Allison, Philip J., to T. S. Simms & Co. Limited. Paint roller frame.
269,650, 7-12-83, CI. D4-38.100.
American Safety Razor Company: See-
Chase, David O.; and Maloney, Martin, 269,724, CI. D28-46.000.
American Standard Inc.: See —
Niemann, James E., 269,696, CI. D23-28.O0O.
Am way Corporation: See-
Powers, Robert M., 269,660, CI. D7-409.000.
Baker Instruments Corp.: See —
Parker, Bernard, 269,703, CI. D24-8.000.
Barbour, Bruce E. Electric sheet music page turner. 269,683, 7-12-83,
CI. D17-99.000.
Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc.: See-
Green, Brian C, 269,706, CI. D24-63.000.
Bendix Corporation, The: See —
Fulmer, Keith H.; and Kytta, Oswald O., 269,670, CI. D13-1.000.
Horsting, John J.. 269,671, CI. D13-1.000
Blowers, Dorothy L., to Pacific Furniture Manufacturing Co. Seat.
269,651, 7-12-83, CI. D6-47.000.
Bor, Marta. Infant wrapping blanket. 269,658, 7-12-83, CI. D6-267.000.
Bragin, David G.: See —
Swett, James B.; and Bragin, David G., 269,656, CI. D6-130.000
PI 47
PI 48
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Burgin, James R.: See —
Cooke. Brian G.; and Burgin, James R., 269,725, CI. D34-O6.0O0.
Cameron, Jerry L. Formal men's suit. 269,645, 7-12-83, CI. D2-29.O0O.
Chambers, Charles: See —
Harris, Jeff; Horwitz, Jack; and Chambers, Charles, 269,690, CI
D21-I9O.00O.
Chase, David O.; and Maloney, Martin, to American Safety Razor
Company. Twin blade razor. 269,724, 7-12-83, CI. 028-46.000.
Cincinnati Milacron Inc.: See —
Morser, Alfred H.; and Watson, Robert C, 269,681, CI. D15-
199.000.
Claman, Mike T., to Lewittes Furniture Enterprises, Inc. Chair
269.654, 7-12-83, CI. D6-57.000.
Claman, Mike T. Chair. 269,655, 7-12-83, CI. D6-57.000.
Clemar Manufacturing Corp.: See —
Graham, Cleve A.; Tisserat, Craig R.; and Mendoza, Enric C.
269.697, CI. D23-38.000.
Coats &. Clark, Inc.: See—
Einhom, Ruediger, 269,661, CI. D8- 367.000.
Coca-Cola Company. The: See-
May, Timothy J.; and Wendt, David W., 269,699, CI. D23-150.000
Combi Co., Ltd.: See—
Nakao, Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Matsuda, Hiroaki, 269,687.
CI. D2 1-59.000.
Cooke, Brian G.; and Burgin, James R., to Overseas Corporation: Litter
bin. 269,725, 7-12-83, CI. D34-O6.000.
Cooper, Benjamin F.; and Major, Paul O., to Micromation, Inc. Com-
puter. 269,678. 7-12-83, CI. D 14- 102.000.
Crawford, Donald A. Stove. 269,698, 7-12-83, CI. D23-97.000.
Dart Industries Inc.: See—
Swett. James B.; and Bragin. David G.. 269.656, CI. D6-130.000.
Deconinck. Didier, to Allibert S.A. Arm chair. 269,653, 7-12-83, CI
06-56.000.
Dennison, Saul: See —
Seltzer. Samuel M.; and Dennison. Saul, 269,672, CI. DI3-10.000
De Pascalis, Donato. Cake. 269,644, 7-12-83, CI. Dl-1 5.000.
Dispositivos Reductores de Tabaco, S.A. (Sodire): See—
Torreblanca Cervantes. Rafael, 269,710. CI. D27-5 1.000.
Dobias, John J. Mortar. 269,693. 7-12-83, CI. D22-3.000.
Downey, David P.: See —
McKean. Eric J.; and Downey. David P.. 269.652, CI. D6-48.000
Orackett Company, The: See-
Jones, David A.; Koshido, Yasuhiro; and Maust, Daniel A
269,649, CI. 04-03.000.
G'Neil. William J.. Jr.. 269.695, CI. D23- 1 50.000.
Einhom. Ruediger. to Coats & Clark. Inc. Hook. 269,661, 7-12-83 CI
08-367.000.
Ekholm, Pertti: See—
Suovaniemi, Osmo; Ekholm, Pertti; Kaukanen, Esko; and Kukka
Aarre, 269,702, CI. O24-8.000.
Espedalen, Kare. Tire chain for slip prevention of vehicle. 269,666,
7-12-83, CI. D 12- 154.000.
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.; and
Schneider, Rolf E., to Siemens Corporation. Telephone busy lamp
field console. 269,675, 7-12-83. CI. 014-58.000.
Fulmer, Keith H.; and Kytta. Oswald C. to Bendix Corporation, The.
Backing plate for servomotor diaphragm. 269,670, 7-12-83, CI. 013-
Graham, Cleve A.; Tisserat, Craig R.; and Mendoza, Enric C, to
Clemar Manufacturing Corp. Sprinkler system control housing
269,697, 7-12-83, CI. 023-38.000.
Gravity Guidance, Inc.: See —
Miller, Jack V., 269,701, CI. 024-03.000.
Green, Brian C, to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Dispensing
container for pharmaceutical diluents. 269.706, 7-12-83, CI. D24-
63.000.
Gushiken, Shigeki: See—
Kashima, Taisuke; Gushiken, Shigeki; Tsuburaya, Kazuyuki and
Seki. Yasusuke. 269.677. CI. 014-80.000.
Hancock. John P.; and Smethers. Rollo G., Jr., to Lockheed Corpora-
tion. Airplane. 269,669. 7-12-83. CI. D12-332.000.
Harns. Jeff; Horwitz, Jack; and Chambers. Charles. Toy mask resem-
bling a chicken beak. 269,690, 7-12-83, CI. D2 1-190.000.
Hirabayashi. Tsugio; and Nakai, Michio. to Sony Corporation Tennis
practice net. 269.692, 7-12-83, CI. 021-200.000.
Hirota, Takeshi; and Inagi, Toshihiro, to Kanda Tsushin Koeyo Co
Ltd. Telephone. 269,674, 7-12-83, CI. 014-53.000.
Hitachi, Ltd.: See—
Kashima, Taisuke; Gushiken, Shigeki; Tsuburaya, Kazuyuki and
Seki, Yasusuke, 269.677, CI. 014-80.000.
Takahashi. Akira; Segawa, Noritaka; and Obata, Takeichi, 269 676
CI. 014-80.000.
Hoel, Per O. Electronic game casing. 269,686, 7-12-83. CI. 021-13 000
Holloway. Richard D. Combined goblet and drinking tube 269 659
7-12-83, CI. 07-11.000.
Horsting, John J., to Bendix Corporation, The. End frame for a servo-
motor. 269.671. 7-12-83. CI. O13-1.000.
Horwitz. Jack: See —
Harris. Jeff; Horwitz. Jack; and Chambers, Charles, 269,690, CI.
Hunter Douglas International N.V.: See—
Thual. Jacques G. L., 269.707. CI. 025-88.000
Thual. Jacques G. L.. 269.708, CI. 025-88.000
Thual, Jacques G. L., 269,709, CI. 025-89.000
Inagi, Toshihiro: See —
Hirota. Takeshi; and Inagi, Toshihiro, 269,674, CI. D14-53 000
Ishii. Yoshiyasu: See —
Nakao. Shinroku; Ishii. Yoshiyasu; and Matsuda, Hiroaki, 269.687.
Jemberg. Louis: See—
^°26Wc"Dn°24 00o''^"' "^"' °' ^"^ '^""^'^' ^"*''
^l69!7?7;H"fi?3, a. D^-flTO^ ^^ ^^^' °^ P'"''*" •""'"""'•
Johansson, Hans O.; Nilsson, Hans G.; and Jemberg, Louis, to Svea
Data Communication & Computer Aktiebolag. Variable cable con-
{^'o'' '"ferface for dau processing equipment. 269.673. 7-12-83, CI.
Johnson, Bill: See—
Skille, Arlen, 269,726, CI. 034-24.000.
Jones, David A.; Koshido, Yasuhiro; and Maust, Daniel A., to Orackett
Company. The. Broom head. 269,649, 7-12-83, CI. 04-03 000
Kanda Tsushin Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See
Hirota. Takeshi; and Inagi, Toshihiro, 269.674. CI. 014-53 000
K^hima, Taisuke; Gushiken. Shigeki; Tsuburaya, Kazuyuki and Seki
Yasusuke. to Hitachi. Ltd. Television receiver. 269.677. 7-12-83, CL
Kaukanen, Esko: See—
Suovaniemi, Osmo; Ekholm. Pertti; Kaukanen, Esko; and Kukka
Aarre, 269,702, CI. D24-8.000. na ivuKxa,
Klaiber. Gerhart F.: See—
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F •
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,675, CI. 014-58.000.
Kommandiittiyhtio Finnpipette Osmo A. Suovaniemi: iSee—
Suovaniemi, Osmo; Ekholm, Pertti; Kaukanen, Esko; and Kukka
Aarre, 269.702. CI. O24-8.000.
Koshido, Yasuhiro: See —
Jones, David A.; Koshido, Yasuhiro; and Maust, Daniel A
269,649, CI. 04-03.000.
Kukka, Aarre: See—
Suovaniemi, Osmo; Ekholm, Pertti; Kaukanen, Esko; and Kukka,
Aarre. 269,702. CI. D24-8.000.
Kytta. Oswald O.: See—
Fulmer. Keith H.; and Kytta. Oswald O.. 269,670, CI. D 13- 1.000.
La Barbera, Angelo M., to SCM Corporation. Case for a typewriter
269,647, 7-12-83, CI. D3-72.000.
Lansdowne, Kenneth R. Desk name plate. 269,685, 7-12-83, CI. D20-
15.000. . . V, Kj^yj-
Lehr, Harold. Mobile. 269.665, 7-12-83, CI. Dl 1-141.000.
Lewittes Furniture Enterprises, Inc.: See —
Claman, Mike T., 269,654, CI. 06-57.000.
Lockheed Corporation: See —
Hancock, John P.; and Smethers, Rollo G.. Jr.. 269.669. CI 012-
332.000.
Luntz, Richard. Writing instrument or similar article. 269,684, 7-12-83
CI. 019-47.000.
Major, Paul D.: See-
Cooper, Benjamin F.; and Major, Paul D., 269,678, CI. D14-
102.000.
Maloney, Martin: See —
Chase, David O.; and Maloney, Martin, 269,724, CI. 028-46.000.
Marks, Barry M., to A.P.C. Industries, Inc. Electronic marker for
buried utilities. 269,664, 7-12-83. CI. D 10- 104.000.
Matsuda. Hiroaki: See —
Nakao, Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Matsuda, Hiroaki, 269.687
CI. D2 1-59.000.
Maust, Daniel A.: See-
Jones. David A.; Koshido, Yasuhiro; and Maust, Daniel A ,
269,649, CI. D4-O3.0O0.
May, Timothy J.; and Wendt, David W., to Coca-Cola Company. The.
Air freshener container. 269.699. 7-12-83. CI. 023-150.000.
McKean. Eric J.; and Downey, David P., to Qantas Airways Limited.
Dual aircraft seat. 269,652. 7-12-83, CI. 06-48.000.
Mendoza, Enric C: See —
Graham, Cleve A.; Tisserat, Craig R.; and Mendoza, Enric C,
269,697, CI. D23-38.000.
Micromation, Inc.: See —
Cooper, Benjamin F.; and Major, Paul O., 269,678, CI. D14-
102.000.
Miller, Jack V., to Gravity Guidance, Inc. Full body weight traction
device. 269,701, 7-12-83. CI. 024-03.000.
Molenaar. Lester V. Spinning toy. 269.688. 7-12-83. CI. D2 1-95.000.
Morooka. Shinichi. to Sharp Corporation. Electronic computer.
269.679, 7-12-83. CI. 014-106.000.
Morser, Alfred H.; and Watson, Robert C, to Cincinnati Milacron Inc.
Robot arm. 269,681, 7-12-83, CI. 015-199.000.
Muzumdar, Deepak R.: See —
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,675, CI. D14-58.0OO.
Myojo, Seiji, to Shimano Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Reel for fishing or
the like. 269,694, 7-12-83. CI. D22-25.0OO.
Nakai. Michio: See —
Hirabayashi. Tsugio; and Nakai. Michio. 269.692. CI. 021-200.000.
Nakao. Shinroku; Ishii, Yoshiyasu; and Matsuda, Hiroaki, to Combi
Co., Ltd. Animated figure ring toy. 269,687, 7-12-83, CI. 021-59.000.
Niemann, James E., to American Standard Inc. Cap for a faucet handle
269,696, 7-12-83. CI. 023-28.000.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 49
Nilsson. Hans G.: See —
Johansson, Hans O.; Nilsson. Hans G.; and Jernberg. Louis.
269,673. CI. D13-24.0OO.
Obata, Takeichi: See—
Takahashi, Akira; Segawa. Noritaka: and Obata. Takeichi. 269.676.
CI. 014-80.000.
Ohanian, Charles. Bracket for coin change holder. 269,728. 7-12-83. CI.
099-34.000.
Ohkado. Tetsuo. to Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc. Toy vehicle. 269,689.
7-12-83. CI. 021-128.000.
O'Neil. William J.. Jr.. to Orackett Company. The. Room deodorizer
dispenser. 269.695. 7-12-83, CI. 023-150.000.
Ornstein. Richard; and Vassilatos. Jerry. Portable exercise stand.
269.691, 7-12-83. CI. 021-191.000.
Ottaway, James N. Yeast thermometer. 269,662. 7-12-83. CI. DIO-
57.000.
Ottopran S.r.I.: See—
Prandelli, Achille. 269.680. CI. 07-31 1.000.
Overseas Corporation: See —
Cooke. Brian G.; and Burgin. James R., 269.725. CI. D34-06.000.
Oy Wiik & Hoglund Ab: See—
Jofs. Jarl-Erik, 269.727, CI. D92- 1.100.
Pacific Furniture Manufacturing Co.: See —
Blowers. Dorothy L.. 269.651. CI. 06-47.000.
Parker. Bernard, to Baker Instruments Corp. Pipettor. 269.703. 7-12-83.
CI. O24-8.000.
Parks. Edward D.: See-
Smith. Gary E.; and Parks. Edward D.. 269.663. CI. 010-69.000.
Peirce. Elwin E.; and Waltz. Arthur L. Ventilator. 269.700. 7-12-83. CI.
023-151.000.
Powers. Robert M.. to Amway Corporation. Roasting rack. 269.660.
7-12-83. CI. 07-409.000.
Prandelli, Achille, to Ottopran S.r.I. Beverage dispenser or similar
article. 269,680, 7-12-83. CI. 07-311.000.
Prentice, Edward J.: See —
Taylor. Don R.; and Prentice. Edward J.. 269.667, CI. 012-157.000.
Qantas Airways Limited: See —
McKean, Eric J.; and Downey. David P.. 269.652. CI. 06-48.000.
Rogstad. Gary: See —
Skille, Arien, 269,726, CI. 034-24.000.
Rubbermaid Incorporated: See-
Taylor, William O., 269,657, CI. 06-199.000.
Schaer, Beatrice K. Linen bag. 269,646. 7-12-83. CI. 03-71.000.
Schneider. Rolf E.: See—
Foggia. Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber. Gerhart F.;
and Schneider. Rolf E.. 269.675. CI. D 14-58.000.
Schweitzer. Henry H. Boardsailing board. 269,668. 7-12-83. CI. D12-
303.000.
SCM Corporation: See —
La Barbera, Angelo M., 269,647. CI. 03-72.000.
Segawa. Noritaka: See —
Takahashi. Akira; Segawa. Noritaka; and Obata. Takeichi. 269,676,
CI. 014-80.000.
Seki, Yasusuke: See—
Kashima, Taisuke; Gushiken, Shigeki; Tsuburaya, Kazuyuki; and
Seki. Yasusuke. 269,677. CI. 014-80.000.
Seltzer. Samuel M.; and Dennison, Saul, to Allison Corporation. Tray
for a battery. 269.672. 7-12-83. CI. D13-10.000.
Sharp Corporation: See —
Morooka. Shinichi. 269.679. CI. D14- 106.000.
Shimano Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Myojo. Seiji. 269.694. CI. D22-25.000.
Siemens Corporation: See—
Foggia. Donald A.; Muzumdar. Deepak R.; Klaiber. Gerhart F.;
and Schneider. Rolf E.. 269.675. CI. 014-58.000.
Skille. Arlen, to Johnson. Bill; and Rogstad. Gary. Fireplace wood
carrier. 269.726. 7-12-83. CI. 034-24.000.
Smethers. Rollo G.. Jr.: See-
Hancock, John P.; and Smethers, Rollo G.. Jr.. 269.669, CI. 012-
332.000.
Smith, Gary E.; and Parks. Edward D. Pole level. 269.663. 7-12-83, CI.
D 10-69.000.
Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited: See—
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. 269,711. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. 269.712. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. 269,713. CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. 269,714, CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey, Geoffrey D., 269,715, CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey, Geoffrey O., 269,716, CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey, Geoffrey D., 269.717. CI. D28-2.0OO.
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. 269.718. CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. 269,719, CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey, Geoffrey D., 269.720. CI. D28-2.0OO.
Tovey, Geoffrey O., 269.721. CI. D28-2.0OO.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. 269.722. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. 269.723. CI. D28-2.O0O.
Sony Corporation: See —
Hirabayashi, Tsugio; and Nakai. Michio. 269.692. CI. D2 1 -200.000
Suovaniemi. Osmo; Ekholm. Pertti; Kaukanen, Esko; and Kukka.
Aarre, to Kommandiittiyhtio Finnpipette Osmo A. Suovaniemi.
Microvetle assembly. 269.702. 7-12-83, CI. D24-8.000.
Svea Data Communication & Computer Aktiebolag: See —
Johansson, Hans O.; Nilsson, Hans G.; and Jernberg, Louis.
269.673. CI. D 1 3-24.000.
Swett. James B.; and Bragin. David G.. to Dart Industries Inc. Com-
bined mail and key rack or the like. 269.656. 7-12-83. CI. 06-130.000.
Swift Instruments. Inc.: See—
Yokota, Kenichi. 269.682. CI. 016-131.000.
T. S. Simms & Co. Limited: See —
Allison, Philip J., 269.650, CI. D4-38.I00.
Takahashi, Akira; Segawa. Noritaka: and Obata, Takeichi, to Hitachi.
Ltd. Television receiver. 269.676. 7-12-83, CI. 014-80.000.
Taylor, Don R.; and Prentice, Edward J Automobile rooftop carrier.
269,667. 7-12-83. CI 012-157.000.
Taylor. William D.. to Rubbermaid Incorporated. Storage tray for
attachment beneath a shelf 269,657, 7.12-83, CI 06-199 000.
Thual. Jacques G. L., to Hunter Douglas International N V Decorative
slat assembly for a suspended ceiling or the like. 269,707, 7-12-83, CI.
025-88.000.
Thual, Jacques G. L., to Hunter Douglas International N.V. Decorative
slat assembly for a suspended ceiling or the like 269,708, 7-12-83, CI.
D25-88.000.
Thual, Jacques G. L.. to Hunter Douglas International N.V. Decorative
slat assembly for a suspended ceiling or the like. 269.709. 7-12-83. CI.
025-89.000.
Tisserat. Craig R.: See-
Graham, Cleve A.; Tisserat, Craig R.; and Mendoza, Enric C.
269,697, CI. 023-38.000.
Tomy Kogyo Co., Inc.: See—
Ohkado, Tetsuo, 269,689. CI 021-128.000
Torreblanca Cervantes, Rafael, to Weslbury Foundation. The; and
Dispositivos Reductores de Tabaco. S.A. (Sodire) Cigar and ciga-
rette filter perforator. 269.710. 7-12-83. CI. 027-51.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey O . to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.711. 7-12-83. CI. D28-2.0OO
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.712. 7-12-83. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited.
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.713. 7-12-83. CI. 028-2 000.
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.714. 7-12-83. CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited.
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.715, 7-12-83. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet 269.716. 7-12-83. CI. O28-2.000
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.717. 7-12-83. CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.718. 7-12-83. CI. O28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited.
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.719, 7-12-83. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited.
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.720. 7-12-83. CI D28-2.000.
Tovey, Geoffrey O.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.721. 7-12-83. CI. D28-2.000.
Tovey. Geoffrey D.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.722. 7-12-83. CI. O28-2.00a
Tovey. Geoffrey O.. to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited
Pharmaceutical tablet. 269.723. 7-12-83. CI. O28-2.000.
Tsuburaya. Kazuyuki: See —
Kashima. Taisuke; Gushiken. Shigeki; Tsuburaya. Kazuyuki; and
Seki. Yasusuke. 269.677. CI. D 14-80.000.
Vassilatos. Jerry: See —
Ornstein. Richard; and Vassilatos. Jerry. 269.691. CI. 021-191.000
Waltz. Arthur L.: See—
Peirce. Elwin E.; and Waltz. Arthur L.. 269.700. CI. 023-151.000
Watson. Robert C: See —
Morser. Alfred H.; and Watson. Robert C. 269.681. CI. D15-
199.000.
Wendt. David W.: See-
May. Timothy J.; and Wendt. David W.. 269.699. CI. D23- 150.000.
Westbury Foundation. The: See—
Torreblanca Cervantes. Rafael. 269.710. CI. 027-51.000.
Wilcox. Donald; and Zambrano. Nobile. Storage container. 269.648.
7-12-83, CI. 03-73.000.
Wolf, Ehrenfried G. B. Base for a false tooth. 269,704, 7-12-83, CI.
D24-33.000.
Wolf, Ehrenfried G. B. False tooth 269,705, 7-12-83, CI. D24-33.000.
Yokota, Kenichi, to Swift Instruments, Inc. Field microscope 269,682,
7-12-83, CI. 016-131.000.
Zambrano, Nobile: See—
Wilcox, Donald; and Zambrano, Nobile. 269.648. CI 03-73.000.
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Conard-Pyie Company: See —
Meilland. Marie L.. 5.067. CI. 11.000.
Fischer. Arnold W.. to Pan-American Plant Company. African Violet
named Swan Lake. 5.068, 7-12-83, CI. 69.000.
Meilland, Marie L., to Conard-Pyle Company. Rose plant — Meima-
garmic variety. 5,067. 7-12-83, CI. 11.000.
Pan-American Plant Company: See-
Fischer, Arnold W., 5.068, CI. 69.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED JULY 12, 1983
Note. — First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
CLASS 2
105 4,392,257
209.1 4,392,258
227 4,392,259
CLASS 4
324 4,392,260
CLASS 5
101 4,392,261
CLASS 6
9 4,392,262
CLASS 7
100 4,392,263
138 4,392,264
CLASS 8
4,392,265
4,392,863
4,392,864
120
400
S06
CLASS 12
146 S 4,392,266
CLASS 15
88
91
14S
322
339
4,392,267
4,392,268
4,392,269
4,392,270
4,392,271
CLASS 1«
95 R 4,392,272
CLASS 17
12 4392,273
21 4.392,274
CLASS 19
81 4.392,275
97 4,392,276
CLASS 24
196 4,392,277
213 R 4.392,278
221 R 4.392,279
230 A 4.392,280
230 AL 4.392,282
230.5 R 4,392,281
255 SL 4.392,283
265 B 4.392,284
CLASS 28
276
289
4,392,285
4.392,286
CLASS 29
25.35
27 C
116 AD
160.6
239
408
421 R
436
451
309
520
572
577 C
590
739
741
879
4,392,287
Re.31,304
4,392,288
4,392,289
4,392,290
4,392,291
4,392,292
4,392,293
4,392,294
4,392,295
4.392.296
4,392,297
4,392,298
4,392,299
4,392,300
4,392,301
4,392,302
CLASS 30
4,392,303
4,392,304
8S
178
CLASS 33
169 F 4,392,305
174 B
197
293
54
172
4,392,306
4,392,307
4,392,308
CLASS 34
4,392,309
4,392,310
CLASS 36
7.3 4,392,311
67 R 4,392,312
117
4,392,313
CLASS 37
103 4,392,314
CLASS 40
27 4,392,315
617 4,392,316
618 4,392,317
CLASS 42
1 LP 4,392,318
69 B 4,392,319
69 R 4,392,320
87 4,392,321
CLASS 43
4,392,322
118
CLASS 44
51 4,392,865
53 4,392,866
4,392,867
56 4,392,868
CLASS 46
1 F 4,392,324
1 R 4,392,323
179 4,392,325
CLASS 47
28 R 4,392,326
59
62
4,392,327
4,392,328
CLASS 48
197 R 4,392,869
CLASS 49
356 4,392,329
381 ■ 4,392,330
CLASS 51
55 4,392,331
92 BS 4,392,332
170 EB 4,392,333
263 4,392,334
CLASS 52
309.17 4,392,335
417 4,392,336
CLASS 53
4,392,337
4,392,338
48
462
CLASS 55
20 4,392,870
23 4,392,871
36 4,392,872
67 4,392,873
194 4,392,874
228 4,392,875
524 4,392,876
CLASS 56
192 4,392,339
CLASS 57
83
90
264
401
4,392,340
4,392,341
4,392,342
4,392,343
CLASS 59
78.1 4,392,344
CLASS 60
39.02
39.04
39.27
229
500
518
526
602
657
727
752
4,392,345
4,392,346
4,392,347
4,392,348
4,392,349
4,392,350
4,392,351
4,392,352
4,392,353
4,392,354
4,392,355
CLASS 62
74 Bl 2.968.164
3 4,392,356
37 4,392,877
153 4,392,357
155 4,392,358
235.1 4,392,359
249
343
514 R
170
4,392,360
4,392,361
4,392,362
CLASS 65
4,392,878
4,392,879
4,392,880
CLASS 66
60 H 4,392,364
19.'' 4,392,363
CLASS 68
19 4,392,365
205 R 4,392,366
CLASS 71
9 4,392,881
92 4,392,882
93 4,392,883
100 4,392,884
CLASS 72
12 4,392,367
63 4,392,368-
96 4,392,369
201 4,392,370
231 4,392,371
311 4,392,372
321 4,392,373
CLASS 73
19 4,392,374
118 4,392,375
155 4,392,376
4,392,377
304 C 4,392,378
626 4,392,379
644 4,392,380
663 4,392,381
708 4,392,382
724 4,392,383
830 4,392,384
861.23 4,392,385
861.76 4,392,386
863.21 4,392,387
863.23 4,392,388
864.91 4.392,389
CLASS 74
89.15 4,392,390
333 4,392,391
626 4,392,392
661 4,392,393
689 4,392,394
690 4,392,395
785 4,392,396
CLASS 75
26 4,392,885
52 4,392,886
58 4,392,887
68 R 4.392,888
97 A 4,392,889
CLASS 76
107 A 4,392,397
CLASS 81
9.51 4,392,398
CLASS 83
106 4,392,399
185 4,392,400
219 4,392,401
345 4,392,402
418 4,392,403
886 4,392,404
CLASS M
1.24 4,392,405
1.26 4,392,406
380 C 4,392,408
462 4,392,409
CLASS 86
1 R 4,392,410
CLASS 89
1.819 4,392,411
14 C 4,392,413
14 D 4,392,412
33 BB 4,392,407
35 R
461
4,392,414
CLASS 91
4,392,415
CLASS 92
71 4,392,416
CLASS 98
1.5 4,392.417
CLASS 99
330 4,392,418
339 4,392,419
406 4,392,420
524 4,392,421
CLASS 100
118 4,392,422
CLASS 101
93.48 4,392,423
111 4.392,424
327 4,392,425
363 4,392,426
365 4,392,427
4,392,428
4,392,429
381 4,392.430
426 4,392,431
CLASS 102
334 4,392,432
CLASS 104
9 4,392,433
70 4,392,434
284 4,392.435
CLASS 106
100 4,392,890
CLASS 108
81 4,392,436
112 4,392,437
CLASS 110
106 R 4,392,438
CLASS 111
4.392,439
34
CLASS 112
79 A 4,392,440
158 B 4,392.441
275 4,392.442
CLASS 114
20 R 4,392,443
39 4,392,444
67 A 4,392,445
144 R 4,392,446
230 4,392,447
271 4,392,448
343 4,392,449
CLASS 118
120 4,392,450
690 4,392,451
723 4,392,452
726 4,392,453
CLASS 119
2 4,392,454
CLASS 122
20 A 4,392,455
CLASS 123
1 A
1 R
18 R
21
80 BB
9016
9055
196 M
196 R
263
299
325
339
342
387
440
489
4,392,456
4,392,457
4,392,458
4,392,459
4,392,460
4,392,461
4,392,462
4,392,463
4,392,464
4,392,465
4,392,466
4,392,467
4,392,468
4,392,502
4,392,469
4,392,470
4,392,471
564
635
644
4,392,472
4,392.473
4,392,474
CLASS 124
35 A 4,392,475
CLASS 125
30 R 4,392,476
CLASS 126
77 4,392,477
84 4,392,478
242 4,392,479
400 4,392,480
418 4,392,481
440 4,392,482
450 4,392,483
4,392,484
CLASS 128
6
68
79
80A
80 H
80R
202.27
316
326
334 R
423 W
637
665
764
4,392,485
4,392,486
4,392,562
4,392,489
4,392,487
4,392,488
4,392,490
4.392,493
4,392,494
4,392,495
4,392,496
4,392,497
4,392,498
4,392,499
CLASS 130
26 4.392,500
CLASS 131
300 4,392,501
CLASS 132
83 R 4.392.503
CLASS 133
1 A 4,392,504
4 A 4,392,505
CLASS 134
10 4,392,891
25.1 4,392,892
46 4,392,506
CLASS 136
260 4,393,267
CLASS 137
38 4,392,507
99 4,392,508
340 4,392,509
454.2 4,392,510
493.2 4,392,511
496 4.392,512
614.01 4.392.513
624.2 4,392,514
CLASS 139
55.1 4,392,515
115 4,392,516
435 4,392,517
CLASS 140
119 4,392,518
212
363
CLASS 144
4,392,519
4,392,520
CLASS 14«
1.5 4,392,893
2 4,392,894
12 F Re.3I,306
CLASS 149
19.3
4,392,895
CLASS 152
218
341
4,392,521
4,392,522
CLASS 156
39
66
85
127
4,392,8%
4,392,897
4,392,898
4,392.899
153
155
161
167
194
235
250
252
306.9
361
468
504
584
633
643
4.392.900
4,392.901
4.392,902
4,392,903
4,392,904
4,392,905
4,392,906
4,392,907
4,392,909
4,392,910
4,392,911
4,392,912
4,392,913
4,392,914
4,392,915
CLASS 162
1571 4,392,916
168.1 4,392,917
CLASS 164
453 4,392,523
CLASS 165
4.392,524
76
125
154
4,392,525
4,392,526
CLASS 166
55.2 4,392,527
153 4,392,528
255 4,392,529
269 4,392,530
278 4,392,531
372 4,392.532
CLASS 171
14 4.392.533
CLASS 175
340 4,392,534
CLASS 177
1 4,392,535
134
4.392.537
CLASS 178
18 4.393,268
22.08 4,393,269
CLASS 179
1 D 4,393,270
1 GD 4,393,273
1 GS 4,393,274
1 SA 4.393.272
1 SM 4,393,271
1 VL 4,393,275
1.5 R 4,393,276
2 A 4,393,277
84 C 4,393,278
175.31 R 4,393,279
CLASS ISO
19 R 4,392,538
90 4,392,539
142 4.392.540
209 4.392.541
217 4,392.536
228 4.392.542
272 4.392.543
273 4.392.544
294 4.392.545
326 4.392.546
CLASS ISl
4.392.547
4.392.548
4,392.549
135
156
239
CLASS 182
82 4,392,550
CLASS 184
7 D 4.392,551
106 4,392,532
CLASS 186
61 4,392,553
CLASS 187
9 E 4,392,554
CLASS m
65.1 4.392,555
PI 51
PI 52
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
67
71.9
72.7
73.32
73.34
73.36
4.392.556
4.392.557
4.392.558
4.392.559
4.392.560
4.392.561
CLASS 193
10 4.392.563
CLASS 194
1 N 4.392.564
CLASS 198
4,392.565
378
509
544
781
4.392,566
4.392,567
4.392,568
CLASS 200
4
16 D
19 R
51.09
60
61.88
144 B
144 R
147 R
148 A
148 R
228
4,393,280
4,393,281
4.393.282
4.393.283
4.393.284
4.393.285
4,393.286
4.393.287
4.393.288
4.393.289
4.393.290
4.393.291
CLASS 202
4,392.919
CLASS 204
37 R
47
51
59 R
64T
67
98
130
158 HA
159.14
192 E
192 R
198
206
213
269
298
403
4.392.920
4.392.921
4.392.922
4.392.923
4.392.924
4.392.925
4,392,926
4,392,927
4,392.928
4,392,929
4,392.930
4,392,932
4,392,931
4,392,934
4,392.935
4.392.936
4.392.937
4.392.938
4.392.939
4.392,933
CLASS 206
5.1 4.392.569
231 4.392.570
557 4.392.571
CLASS 208
8LE
11 LE
It R
152
188
210
217
229
254 R
4.392.940
4.392.941
4.392.942
4,392,943
4,392,944
4,392,945
4,392,946
4,392,947
4,392,948
CLASS 209
5 4,392,949
211
307
4,392,950
4,392,951
CLASS 210
159
169
195.3
195.4
224
241
493.2
638
651
679
688
692
4,392,952
4,392,953
4.392,954
4.392.955
4.392.956
4,392,957
4,392,958
4,392,959
4,392,960
4,392,%1
4,392,962
4,392,963
CLASS 211
19 4,392,572
CLASS 212
225 4,392,574
230 4,392,573
CLASS 213
4,392,575
CLASS 215
C 4,392,576
4,392,577
4,392,578
4.392,579
4.392.580
76
1
32
231
253
332
348
4,392,581
CLASS 219
69 M
90
121 EC
121 EJ
121 PC
137 R
137.62
446
497
4,393,292
4,393,293
4,393,294
4,393,295
4.393.296
4.393.297
4.393.298
4.393.299
4.393.300
CLASS 220
75 4.392,582
202
374
4,392,583
4,392,584
CLASS 221
1 4,392,585
210 4,392,586
CLASS 222
63 4,392,587
129.4 4,392,588
137 4,392,589
174 4.392.590
227 4.392.591
288 4,392.592
305 4.392.593
530 4.392,594
619 4,392,595
CLASS 223
43 4,392,596
CLASS 224
42.13 4.392.597
155 4.392.598
CLASS 227
40 4.392.599
50
4.1
118
196
212
4,392.600
CLASS 228
4.392.601
4,392,602
4.392,603
4.392.604
CLASS 229
19 4.392.605
23 R 4.392.606
39 R 4,392,607
CLASS 235
474 4.393.302
CLASS 236
48 R 4.392.608
CLASS 237
5 S 4,392.610
12.3 C 4,392.609
CLASS 239
74
88
115
215
265.37
271
290
461
4,392,611
4,392,612
4,392,613
4,392,614
4.392,615
4,392,616
4,392,617
4,392,618
CLASS 242
107.2 4,392,619
107.4 A 4.392.620
CLASS 244
12.5 4.392.621
102 A 4.392.622
102 R 4.392,623
158 A 4.392,624
CLASS 246
34 CT 4.392.625
34 R 4.392.626
CLASS 248
176 4,392.627
202.1 4,392.628
205 R 4.392.629
309 R 4.392.630
CLASS 250
201
343
358.1
374
390
396 R
398
459.1
492.2
560
4.393.303
4.393.304
4.393.305
4.393.306
4,393,307
4,393,308
4,393,309
4,393,310
4,393,311
4,393,312
4,393,313
58
65
122
129
CLASS 251
4,392,631
4,392,632
4,392,633
4,392,634
CLASS 252
8.5 C
8.8
28
32.7 E
41
51.5 R
52 R
62.9
70
75
78.1
99
174.11
174.19
182
184
373
408.1
429 B
432
435
448
455 R
455 Z
458
466 J
512
522 R
602
627
344
4,392,964
4,392,965
Re.31,307
4.392,966
4,392,967
4,392,968
4,392,969
4,392,970
4.392,971
4,392,972
4.392.973
4.392.974
4.392,975
4,392,976
4,392,977
4,392,978
4,392,979
4,392,980
4.392,981
4,392,982
4,392,983
4,392,984
4,392,985
4,392,986
4.392,987
4,392,988
4,392,989
4,392,990
4,392,991
4,392,992
4,392,993
4,392,994
4,392,995
CLASS 254
4,392,635
CLASS 260
112R
112.5 R
146 R
157
239 E
239.1
239.3 R
245.2 R
245.5
245.73
349
378
465 D
544 K
940
970
4,392,996
4.392.997
4.392.998
4,392,999
4,393,000
4,393,001
4,393,002
4,393,003
4,393,004
4,393,005
4,393,006
4,393,007
4,393,008
4,393,009
4,393,010
4,393,01 1
CLASS 261
39 A 4,393,012
64 B 4,393,013
CLASS 264
3R
51
53
82
83
108
143
148
150
162
4,393,014
4,393,015
4,393,016
4,393,017
4,393,018
4,393,019
4,393,020
4,393,021
4,393,022
4,393,023
4,393,024
CLASS 266
218 4,392,636
265
4,392,637
CLASS 267
64.24 4,392,638
140.1 4,392,639
141.2 4,392,640
CLASS 269
49
4,392,641
73
4,392,642
136
4,392,643
157
4,392,644
328
4,392,645
CLASS 270
30 4.392.646
CLASS 272
3 4.392.647
24 4.392.648
67 4.392.649
CLASS 273
29 A 4.392.650
400
423
4,392.653
4,392,654
CLASS 277
1 4,392,655
53
95
4,392,656
4.392,657
CLASS 280
11.18
11.23
12 M
43.23
68
276
414.2
614
690
721
751
775
802
803
804
825
4,392,658
4,392,659
4,392,661
4,392,662
4,392,663
4,392,664
4,392,665
4,392,666
4,392,667
4,392,668
4,392,660
4,392,669
4,392,670
4,392,671
4,392,672
4,392,673
4,392,674
CLASS 282
23 R 4,392,675
CLASS 285
61 4,392,676
137 R 4,392,677
256 4,392,678
CLASS 294
15 4,392,679
78 R 4,392,680
CLASS 295
7 4,392,681
CLASS 296
26 4,392,682
37.9 4,392,683
185 4,392,684
CLASS 297
119 4,392,685
376 4,392,686
CLASS 298
5 4,392,687
22 R 4,392.688
CLASS 299
39 4,392,689
CLASS 301
121 4,392,690
CLASS 303
6 C 4,392,691
CLASS 307
228 4,393,314
264 4,393,315
270 4,393,316
309 4,393,317
353 4,393,318
CLASS 308
6 R 4,392,692
10
184 R
187.2
4,392,693
4,392,694
4,392,695
CLASS 310
80 4,393,319
156
313 B
4,393,320
4,393,321
153 R
358
4,392,651
4,392,652
CLASS 312
330 R 4,392,696
348 4,392,697
CLASS 313
110
4,393,323
133
4,393,324
346 R
4,393,328
477 R
4,393,329
487
4.393,330
489
4,393,331
544
4,393,322
552
4,393,325
582
4,393,326
CLASS 315
4
111.81
167
241 P
241 R
387
408
257
86
254
301
4,393,332
4,393,333
4.393,334
4,393,335
4,393,327
4.393,336
4,393,337
CLASS 318
Bl 3.866,100
4.393,338
4,393,339
4,393,340
445"
467
640
759
4,393,341
4,393,342
4.393,343
4,393,344
CLASS 322
19 4,393,345
CLASS 323
280 4,393,346
355 4,393,157
CLASS 324
126 4.393,347
158 R 4,393,348
248 4,393,349
334 4,393,350
CLASS 328
127 4,393,351
CLASS 329
50 4,393,352
CLASS 330
102 4,393,353
280 4,393,354
294 4,393,355
CLASS 333
165 4,393,356
4,393,357
194 4,393,358
CLASS 335
128 4,393,359
164 4,393,360
212 4,393,361
272 4,393,362
288 4,393,363
CLASS 336
65 4,393,364
99
10
14 P
17 M
17 R
19
49 R
75 MP
91 R
125 R
182 R
57
347 AD
347 DA
347 DD
384 E
405
700
717
731
744
784
805
825.83
CLASS 339
Bl 3.708,779
4,392,698
4,392,699
4,392,700
4,392,701
4,392,702
4,392,703
4,392,704
4,392,705
4,392,706
4,392,707
4,392,708
CLASS 340
4,393,365
4,393,368
4,393,369
4,393,371
4,393,372
4,393,370
4,393,367
4,393,373
4,393,374
4,393,375
4,393,376
4,393,377
4,393,378
4,393,379
4,393,380
4,393,381
CLASS 343
112 D 4,393,382
903 4,393,383
CLASS 346
1.1
75
108
140 R
153.1
4,393,384
4,393,385
4,393,386
4,393,387
4,393,388
4,393,389
224
25
43
49
152
173
180
187
266
CLASS 351
4,392,725
CLASS 354
4,392,726
4,392,727
4,392,728
4,392,729
4,392.730
4.392,731
4,392,732
4,392,733
CLASS 355
3DD
3FU
3R
3TR
14 R
14 SH
15
75
4,392,735
4,392,739
4,392,734
4,392,736
4,392,737
4,392,738
4,392,741
4,392,740
4,392,742
4,392,743
CLASS 356
153 4,392,744
348 4,392,745
409 4,392,746
CLASS 357
23 4,393,391
74 4,393,392
81 4,393,393
CLASS 358
22
23
36
76
80
92
107
111
113
147
153
160
166
205
227
285
302
318
326
336
4,393,394
4,393,395
4,393,396
4,393,397
4.393.398
4.393,399
4,393,400
4,393,401
4,393,402
4,393,403
4,393,404
4,393,405
4,393,406
4,393,407
4,393,408
4,393,409
4,393,410
4,393,41 1
4,393,412
4,393,413
4,393,414
CLASS 360
9.1 4,393,415
10.2 4,393,416
10.3 4,393,417
22 4,393,418
37.1 4,393,419
40 Re.31,3n
73 4,393,420
— 4,393,421
4,393,422
4,393,423
4,393,424
4,393,425
4,393,426
4,393,427
4,393,428
CLASS 361
4,393,429
4,393,430
4,393,431
4,393,432
4,393,433
4,393,434
4,393,435
4,393,436
4,393,437
4,393,438
93
105
112
123
19
92
97
104
119
286
377
380
383
401
133
4,JVJ,J^*U
CLASS 362
CLASS 350
182
4,393,439
3.83
4,392,709
309
4,393,440
96.16
4,392,712
CLASS 363
96.21
96.23
96.33
4,392,713
4,392,714
4,392,715
61
70
4,393,441
4,393,442
145
4,392,716
CLASS 364
163
4,392,724
200
4,393,443
334
4,392,717
4,393,444
336
4,392,718
4,393,445
342
4,392,719
4,393,446
357
4,392,720
4,393,470
4,392,721
415
4,393,466
361
4,392,711
424.1
4,393.467
375
4,392,722
426
4,393,447
407
4,392,723
449
4,393,448
505
4,392,710
474
4,393,449
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
PI 53
4,393,450
135
4,392,752
4,393,044
458
4.393,121
^"YW A r^^^ M^^ A
SIO
4,393,451
136
4,392,753
93
4,393,045
594
4,393,122
CLASS 494
CLASS 546
SI4
4,393,452
4,393,453
CLASS 400
117
118
4,393,046
4,393,047
CLASS 429
1
40
4,392,845
4,392,846
141
153
4,393,210
4,393,211
518
4,393,454
119
4,392,754
132
4,393,048
24
4.393.123
CLASS 501
286
4,393,212
S19
4,393,455
4,392,755
145
4,393,049
104
4.393.124
298
4.393,213
724
4,393,456
144.2
4,392,756
177
4,393,050
105
4.393.125
89
4,393,143
345
4,393,214
726
736
4,393,457
4,393,468
328
697.1
4,392,757
4,392,758
180
4,393,051
4,393,052
CLASS 430
CLASS 518
CLASS 548
900
4,393,458
4,393,459
4,393,460
11
CLASS 403
4,392,759
4,393.053
4.393.054
4.393.055
2
5
273
4.393.126
4.393.127
4.393.128
715
4,393,144
CLASS 521
125
305
362
4.393,215
4,393,216
4,393,217
4,393,461
4,393,462
CLASS 406
181
229
4.393,056
4,393,057
296
313
4.393.129
4,393,130
38
56
4,393,145
4,393,146
530
534
4,393,218
4,393,219
4,393,463
88
4,392,760
246
4,393,058
320
4,393,131
60
4.393,147
545
4.393,220
4,393,464
CLASS 408
4,393,059
562
4.393,132
93
4.393.148
CLASS 549
4,393,465
4,393,469
59
4,392,761
248.5
248.5J
4,393,060
1 4.393,061
CLASS 431 -',
129
4.393.149
CLASS 523
39
234
4,393,221
4,393,222
154
CLASS 36S
4393,471
116
CLASS 410
4,392,762
250
251
4,393,062
4,393,063
4,393,064
11
37
4,392,809
4,392.810
4.392,811
111
130
4.393.150
4.393,151
266
273
289
4.393.223
4.393.224
4.393.225
4.393,226
4,393,227
190
4,^93,472
CLASS 411
4,393,065
73
4.392.812
139
4.393.152
433
4,393,473
342
4,392,763
4,393,066
76
4.392.813
201
4.393,153
455
2UU
• 4,393.474
256
4,393,067
170
4.392.814
459
Re.3 1.309
549
4.393.228
201
4,393,475
CLASS 413
263
4,393,068
175
4.392.815
CLASS 524
203
4,393,476
69
4,392,764
265
4,393,069
202
4.392.816
CLASS 556
210
4,393,478
^TV A fVf^ A 4 A
266
4,393,070
4.392.817
12
4.393,154
430
4.393.229
218
433,479
CLASS 414
274
4,393,071
215
4.392.818
60
4,393,155
457
4.393.230
222
4,393,477
30
4,392,765
4,393,081
231
4.392.819
114
4.393,156
CLASS 560
227
4,393,480
113
4,392,766
275
4.393,072
284
4.392.820
4,393,158
228
4,393,481
136
4,392,767
284
4,393,073
CLASS 432
243
4,393,159
73
4.393.231
236
4393,482
278
4,392,768
285
4,393,074
360
4,393,160
CLASS 562
CLASS 3tf7
397
4,392,769
304
4,393,075
96
4.392.821
506
4.393,161
^^ B-i/^tiTa^ «nyA
432
4,392,770
317
4,393,076
106
4.392.822
606
4.393.162
419
4.393.232
13
4.393,483
545
4,392,771
326
4,393,077
114
4,392,823
608
4,393.163
473
4.393.233
23
23
73
4,393,484
4393,485
4393,486
667
726
-- 4,392,772
4,392,773
4,392,774
330
331 -
4,393,078
4,393,079
180
4,392,824
CLASS 433
10
CLASS 525
4.393.165
475
478
579
4.393,234
4,393.235
4.393.236
75
4393,488
729
4,392,775
CLASS 425
5
4,392,825
27
4.393.166
CLASS 564
CLASS 3«B
744 R 4,392,776
71
4,392,801
7
4,392,826
64
4.393.167
153
4.393.237
4.393.238
4.393.239
88
118
228
4392,747
4392,748
4392,749
4392,750
131
CLASS 415
4,392,777
78
107
126 S
4,392,800
4,392,802
4,392,803
32
217
222
4.392,827
4,392.828
4.392.829
66
67
83
4.393,168
4,393,169
4,393,164
255
331
139
141
4,392,778
4,392,779
174.8 E 4,392,804
206 4,392,805
CLASS 434
89
309
4,393,170
4,393,171
13
CLASS 568
4,393,240
CLASS 3«
CLASS 416
286
4,392,806
258
4.392.830
310
4,393,172
49
4,393,241
74
4,393,487
1 ^
^wT^^f VkbT^.^ ~-W M^f
393
4,392,807
291
4.392.831
329.4
4.393,173
322
4,393,242
86
4,393,489
CLASS 370
17 '*,3fi,ienj
223 R 4,392,781
CLASS 417
464
4,392,808
CLASS 426
6
CLASS 435
4.393.133
369
377
379
4,393,174
4,393,175
4.393,176
344
360
375
4,393.243
4.393.244
4.393.245
13
4,393,490
36
50
68
103
218
269
4,392,782
4,392,786
4,392,783
4,392,784
4,392,785
4,392,787
2
4,393,082
29
4.393.134
422
4.393,177
639
4.393.246
4393,491
15
4,393,083
110
4.393.135
437
4,393,178
665
4.393.247
IS
4393,492
19
4.393,084
161
4.393.136
490
4,393,179
676
4.393.248
16
4393,493
28
4.393.085
172
4.393.137
504
4,393,180
688
4.393.249
27
4393,494
74
4.393.086
176
4.393.138
4,393,181
697
4.393.250
36
4393,495
4.393.087
219
4.393.139
531
Re 31,310
811
4.393.251
62
4393,496
234
4.393.088
226
4.393.140
852
4.393.252
89
5
4393,497
CLASS 371
4.393,499
312
360
379
4,392,788
4,392,789
4,392,790
4,392,791
573
646
4.393.089
4,393.090
CLASS 427
63
125
CLASS 436
4.393.141
4.393.142
125
245
7fil
a.ASS 526
4,393,182
4,393,183
4.393,184
860
867
902
907
4.393.253
4.393.254
4.393.255
4.393.256
13
4393,500
400
4,392,792
13
4,393,091
^"rm A Of M <«t
£,Vl
20
4.393,498
462
4,392,793
38
4,393,092
CLASS 440
CLASS 528
CLASS 570
33
4393,501
475
4.392.794
40
4,393,093
49
4.392.832
11
4,393,185
145
4,393.257
40
4393,502
CLASS 418
44
87
4,393,094
4,393,095
4,393,096
CLASS 441
49
4,393,186
CLASS 585
CLASS 372
31
4,392,795
0 /
90
69
4.392,833
60
88
155
170
4,393,187
4,393,188
4,393,189
4,393,190
25
4,393.258
20
4393,503
32
4,392,796
94
4,393,097
123
Re. 3 1,305
315
4.393.259
43
4393,504
91
4,392,797
168
4,393,098
CLASS 445
357
4.393.260
57
4.393,505
102
4,392,798
177
4,393,099
422
4.393.261
59
4,393,506
169
4,392,799
181
4,393,100
6
4,392,834
207
4,393,191
443
4.393.263
CLASS 373
CLASS 422
194
228
4.392,908
4.393.101
CLASS 455
292
326
4,393,192
4,393,193
467
469
4.393.262
4.393,264
81
4,393,507
12
4,393,026
243
4.393.102
243
4.393,513
348
4,393,194
639
4,393,265
CLASS 375
269
— 4,393,027
391
4.393.103
336
4,393,514
361
4,393,195
828
4,393,266
606
4,393,515
363
4,393,196
9
4393,508
CLASS 423
CLASS 428
608
4,393,516
388
4,393,197
CLASS 604
CLASS 376
15
4,393,028
7
4.393.104
4,393,517
397
4,393,198
53
4,392,848
55
4,393,029
34
4.393.105
617
4,393,518
408
4,393,199
66
4,392,849
133
4392,918
167
4,393,030
35
4.393.106
82
4,392,492
136
4393,509
239
4,393,031
42
4.393.107
CLASS 464
CLASS 536
4,392,850
172
4393,510
320
4,393,032
44
4.393.108
32
4,392,835
18.
4,393,200
4,392,851
247
4393,025
388
4,393,033
119
4.393.109
52
4,392,836
27
4,393,201
til
4,392,852
CLASS 377
450
4,393,034
173
4.393.110
69
4,392,837
102
4,393,202
118
4.392,847
56
4393,301
478
4,393,035
195
4.393.111
175
4,392,838
124
4.393,203
171
4,392,853
4,393,036
207
4.393.112
183
4,392,839
CLASS 542
174
4,392,854
CLASS 378
573 R 4,393,037
220
4.393.113
«"*« A t>e^ MmM
175
4,392,855
128
4393511
584
4,393,038
252
4.393.114
CLASS 474
420
4,393,204
177
4,392,856
136
4|393,5I2
CLASS 3^2
648 R 4,393,039
323
4.393.115
117
4,392,840
CLASS 544
179
4,392,857
^~t« A flO A-* A
343
4.393,116
156
4,392,841
187
4,392,858
CLASS 424
352
4.393.117
205
4,392,842
28
4.393,205
198
4,392,859
2
4393,366
I
4,393,040
355
4,393.080
245
4,392,843
51
4,393,206
202
4.392,491
19
4,393,041
403
4,393,118
196
4,393,207
212
4,392,860
CLASS 384
49
4,393,042
413
4,393,119
CLASS 493
343
4,393,208
366
4,392,861
99
4392,751
59
4,393,043
457
4,393,120
399
4,392,844
404
4,393.209
4,392,862
PI 54
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
Dl- 15
269.644
D7—
11
269,659
10
269.672
59
269,687
D24—
8
269.702
269,715
D2— 29
269,645
311
269,680
24
269.673
95
269.688
269.703
269,716
D3— 71
269,646
409
269,660
DI4—
53
269.674
128
269.689
03
269.701
269.717
72
73
269,647
269,648
269,649
269,650
269,651
D8-
367
269,661
58
269,675
190
269.690
33
269.704
269.718
DIO—
57
269,662
80
269.676
191
269.691
269.705
269.719
38 1
69
269,663
269,677
200
269.692
63
269.706
269.720
D6— 47
104
269,664
102
269,678
D22—
3
269.693
D25-
88
269.707
269,721
48
269,652
Dll-
Ml
269.665
106
269,679
25
269.694
269.708
269.722
56
269.653
D12-
154
269.666
D15—
199
269.681
D23—
28
269,696
89
269.709
269.723
57
269.654
157
269.667
DI6—
131
269.682
38
269,697
D27-
51
269.710
46
269,724
269.655
303
269.668
D17-
99
269.683
97
269.698
D28-
2
269.711
D34— 06
269.725
130
269.656
332
269.669
D19-
47
269,684
150
269,695
269.712
24
269,726
199
269.657
D13-
1
269.670
D20-
15
269,685
269,699
269.713
D92- 1.1
269.727
267
269.658
269.671
D21—
13
269,686
151
269,700
269.714
D99— 34
269.728
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
5.067
69
5,068
(U.S
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
States, Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama 1 1
Alaska 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California 6
Canal Zone 7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
Florida 12
Georgia 13
Guam 14
Hawaii .„ 15
Idaho 16
Illinois 17
Indiana 18
Iowa 19
Kansas 20
Kentucky 21
Louisiana 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota ; 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York '. 36
North Carolina 37
North Dakota 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 48
Utah 49
Vermont .^„ 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming .■ 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army .- 58
U.S. Navy 59
(First number in listing denotes location according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the OfTicial Gazette to obtain details
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
PATENTS
4.392.603
4.393.411
4,392,445
4,393.256
4.392.631
4.392.616
4.393.425
4,392,454
4,393,259
4.392.770
4.392,624
4.393.435
4,392,519
4,393,264
4.392,774
4,392,668
4.393,457
4,392,594
4,393,275
4.392.945
4.392,689
4,393,458
4,392.615
4,393,298
4.393.030
4.392,697
4,393,465
4.392,803
4,393,313
4.393.031
4.392.704
4,393,466
4,392,965
4,393,329
4.393.045
4.392.760
4,393,468
4,393.131
4,393,334
23 : 4.392.413
4.392.791
4,393,473
4.393.150
4,393,357
4.392.792
4.392.843
4,393,476
4,393.303
4.393.358
24 : 4.392.311
4,392.844
4,393,481 ^
4.393.394
4.393.359
4,392.410
4,392,852
4,393,485
4.393.495
4,393.361
4.392,412
4,392,857
4,393,486
13 : 4,392.273
4.393.376
4,392,610
4,392,872
4,393.488
4.392.679
4.393.404
4.392.827
4,392,884
4,393,491
4,392.847
4,393.518
4,392.830
4,392,895
4,393,499
15 : 4.392,785
18 : 4.392.264
4.392.987
4,392,915
4,393,505
17 : 4,392,263
4.392.355
4.393,025
4,392,932
4,393,506
4.392,271
4,392.357
4,393,039
4,392,935
4.393,512
4,392,301
4,392,393
4.393,090
4,392,938
08 : 4,392,261
4.392.346
4,392,406
25 : 4.392.266
4,392,942
4,392,666
4.392,380
4,392,507
4.392.297
4,392,982
4.392.739
4,392,382
4,392.518
4,392,312
4,392,985
4.392.846
4,392,395
4.392.665
4,392.326
4.392,988
4.393,028
4.392,415
4.392,820
4.392.425
4.392.995
■ 4,393,497
4,392,430
4,392,864
4.392.455
4.393.010
09 : 4,392,281
4,392,450
4,392,900
4.392.608
4.393.013
4,392,284
4,392,456
4,393,041
4.392.635
4.393,037
4,392,303
4,392,462
4,393,082
4.392.678
4,393,040
4,392,308
4.392,508
4.393,142
4.392,702
4,393,050
4,392,320
4,392,538
4,393,149
4,392,709
4,393,064
4,392,492
4.392,541
4.393.152
4.392.732
4,393,068
4,392.764
4,392,572
4.393.153
4,392.734
4,393,101
4,392,783
4.392,609
4.393,156
4.392.780
4,393,159
4,392,837
4,392.611
4,393,158
4,392.853
4,393,174
4,392,842
4.392.657
4,393,190
4.392,905
4,393,175
4,392.880
4.392,682
4,393,202
4,392,958
4,393,176
4.392.894
4.392.708
4,393,300
4,392,959
4,393,198
4,392.918
4.392.754
4,393,487
4,393,104
4,393,199
4,393.001
4.392,755
4,393,489
4,393,105
4,393,267
4.393.023
4,392,826
19 : 4,392,330
4,393,168
4,393,278
4.393.084
4,392,829
4,392,546
4.393.196
4,393.301
4,393.123
4,392,850
4,392,607
4.393.277
4.393,306
4,393.322
4,392,851
4,393,01 1
4.393,289
4.393.320
4,393.352
4,392,861
20 : 4,392,391
4.393,441
4,393,332
4.393.386
4,392,904
21 : 4,392,358
4,393.448
4,393,347
4,393.503
4,392,911
4,392,501
4.393.461
4,393,350
10 : 4,392.555
4.392,969
4,392,670
26 : 4.392.280
4,393.351
4,392,870
4,392,994
4,392,757
4.392.322
4,393.369
1 1 : 4.392,725
4,392,997
4.392,758
4.392.332
4.393.377
4.392,874
4,393,085
4.392.766
4.392,347
4.393.384
12 : 4.392,272
4,393,117
4.393.155
4.392.350
4.393.391
4,392,348
4,393.162
22 : 4.392.268
4.392,497
4,393,392
4,392,419
4,393,222
4.392,349
4,392,544
04
06
4,392,464
4,392,490
4,392,569
4,392.992
4,393,092
4,393,346
4,393.354
4,393,355
4,393,368
4.393,410
4.393,445
4,393,446
4,393,459
Re.31,311
4,392,258
4,39C2,279
4,392,283
4,392,290
4,392,307
4,392,324
4,392,325
4,392,328
4.392,335
4.392,336
4,392,362
4,392,374
4.392,376
4.392,381
4.392,398
4.392,407
4.392,409
4.392,418
4.392,420
4.392,436
4.392,438
4.392,453
4.392,475
4.392,482
4,392,484
4.392,487
4.392,489
4,392,494
4,392,495
4,392,527
4,392,533
4,392,548
4,392,552
4,392.563
4,392,578
4,392,592
4,392,598
4,392,600
4,392,602
PI 55
PI 56
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
4,392,583
34 : Re.3 1,305
4,392,597
Re.3 1,309
4,392,612
4,392,298
4,392,643
4,392,299
4,392,644
4,392,437
4,392,650
4,392,478
4,392,654
4,392,486
4,392,667
4,392,570
4,392,690
— 4,392,588
4,392,745
— 4,392,807
4,392,753
4,392,856
4,392,762
4,392,860
4,392,798
4,392,917
4,392,901
4,392,947
4,392,922
4,392,955
4,393,054
4,392,978
4,393,065
4,392,986
4,393,081
4,392,989
4,393,094
4,393,003
4,393,098
4,393.004
4,393,125
4,393,014
4,393,137
4,393.046
4,393,271
4,393,080
4,393,323
4,393,102
4,393,341
4,393,111
4,393,424
4,393,121
4,393,507
4,393,160
27 :
4,392,417
4,393,187
4,392,433
4,393,191
4,392,461
4,393,215
4,392,480
4,393,233
4,392,496
4,393,241
4,392,500
4,393,242
4,392,562
4,393,247
4,392,743
4,393,252
4,392,782
4,393,253
4,392,953
4,393,255
4,393,423
4,393,262
29 :
4.392,294
4,393,276
4,392,318
4,393,311
4,392,505
4,393,312
4,392,568
4,393,330
4,392,575
4,393,348
4.392.636
4,393,379
4,392,653
4,393,389
4,392,825
4,393,395
4,392,858
4,393,397
4,393,026
4,393,414
4.393.087
4.393,415
4,393,393
4,393,421
31 :
4,392,695
4,393,438
4,393,154
4,393,444
32 :
4,392,260
4,393,456
4,392,648
4.393.504
33 :
4,392,360
4.393,517
4,392,449
35 : 4.392,458
4,392,804
4,392,481
4,392,889
36 : 4,392,333
4,393,194
4,392,351
4,393,450
4,392,472
4,392.476
4,392,566
4,392.645
4.392,377
4,392,483
4.392.579
4.392.647
4,392.530
4,392.499
4.392.580
4.392.675
4.392.531
4,392,521
4.392.585
4.392.676
4.392.532
4,392,525
4.392.613
4.392.680
4,392,591
4,392,553
4,392.614
4,392,698
4,392,628
4,392,556
4.392.669
4,392,700
4,392.633
4,392.576
4.392,694
4.392.701
4.392.641
4,392,617
4.392.765
4.392.705
4.392.651
4,392,642
4.392.771
4.392.776
4,392,775
4,392,646
4.392.833
4,392,834
4,392,961
4,392,703
4,392,840
4,392,835
4,392,964
4,392,721
4,392,848
4,392,863
4,392,979
4.392.731
4,392.849
4,392.865
4,392,980
4.392.778
4.392.862
4,392,868
4.393.032
4,392.787
4,392.879
4,392,888
4,393,042
4,392,796
4.392,891
4.392.940
4,393,048
4,392,866
4,392,920
4.392.941
4.393,066
4,392,867
4,392,950
4.392.991
4.393.147
4,392.869
4,393,017
4,393.006
4.393.181
4,392.897
4,393,020
4,393,018
4,393,237
4,392,921
4,393,034
4,393,027
4,393,254
4,392,928
4,393,100
4.393.038
4,393,261
4,392,946
4.393.107
4,393.074
4,393,263
4,392,956
4.393.109
4.393.077
4,393.463
4,392,966
4.393.192
4,393,093
4.393.474
4,392,972
4,393,203
4,393,095
4.393.492
4,392,976
4,393,223
4,393,103
49 : 4.393.130
4,392,981
4,393,226
4,393,118
50 : 4.392.759
4,392,996
4,393,260
4,393,119
4.393.455
4,393,002
4.393.316
4.393,133
51 : 4.392.285
4,393,055
4,393,319
4,393,173
4,392,287
4,393,096
4,393,401
4,393,186
4,392,547
4,393,148
4,393,439
4,393,189
4,392,749
4,393,204
4,393,464
4,393,201
4,392,769
4,393.208
40 : 4,392,334
4,393,212
4,393,509
4.393.217
4,392,479
4,393,227
53 : 4,392,359
4.393.229
4.392,513
4.393.248
4,392,451
4,393,240
4,392,528
4.393,265
4,392.604
4,393,266
4,392,649
4,393,315
4.392.622
4,393,269
4,392,763
4,393,338
4.392.623
4.393,362
4,392,877
4,393,483
4.392,655
4.393,381
4,392,990
43 : 4,393,288
4,392,832
4,393,454
4,393,170
44 : 4,392,443
4,393,382
4,393,501
4,393,197
45 : 4.392.366
4,393.498
4,393,516
41 : 4,392,477
4,392.586
4,393,510
37 :
4,392,390
4,392,707
4.392,873
54 : 4,392,621
4,392,516
4,392,772
4,393,114
55 : 4,392,314
4,392,660
4,392,773
47 : 4.392,315
4,392.543
4,393,493
4,393,230
4,392,440
4.392.599
39 :
Re.3 1,306
4,393,366
4,392,448
4,392,629
4,392,310
4,393.443
4,392,596
4,392,779
4,392,321
42 : 4.392,300
4,392,606
4,392,795
4,392,356
4,392,344
4,392,808
4,392,801
4.392,403
4,392,345
4,393,124
4,393.019
4,392,457
4.392.388
4,393,430
4.393.327
4,392,514
4.392.460
4,393,451
4.393,402
4,392,529
4.392.512
48 : Re.31,310
4,393,431
4,392,554
4,392,626
4.392.316
4.393.511
DESIGN PATENTS
06 :
269,651
269,701
17 :
269,662
09 :
269,646
18 :
269,663
269,648
269,668
269,703
21 I
269.678
12 :
269,656
25 :
269,685
13 :
269.645
269,690
269,669
26 :
269,697
16 :
269,698
269,706
269,670
269,671
269,696
269,686
269,728
269,660
269,667
27
34
36
269,688
269,672
269,675
269,647
269,654
269,655
269,661
269,665
269,683
269.695
269,691
41 :
269,700
269,724
48 :
269,664
269,649
53 :
269,704
269,657
269,705
269.681
55 :
269,699
269.684
269,726
U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : O— 1983
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
NAME— FIRST.
I 1 1
LAST
1
1 1
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
1 1
STREET ADDRESS
1 1 I
CITY
1 ,
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mfil this form to: NEW ADDRESS
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20402
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORIl
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
@ %
Domestic; @ %
Foreign.
NAME— FIRST, LAST
1 1 1 1 III
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
1 1 1 1 1 1
1 1 1
STREET ADDRESS
1 1 1
1 1
CITY
1 1 1 1 1 ; !
STATE
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
Q Remittance Enclosed (Make
checks payable to Superin-
tendent of Documents)
Q Charge to my Deposit
Account No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO;
Superintendent of Document*
Government Printing Office
Washington. D.C. 20402
voi
CI
. V<K
GAZE
UNITED STATES PATf HI m T
'■ i '■'*'.■ J. ■" ■'. ■■'■ ■•
-'*?^:-
^_j, .
".i, -..-r^r V .. >- *: -v \ . ■':; . ^^ ,^ -■■■ -
A.J' ^i^'i
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
July 19, 1983 Volume 1032 Number 3
CONTENTS
, Page
Patent and Trademark OfTice Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1032 OG 20
Reissue Applications Filed |032 OG 20
Request for Reexamination Filed |032 OG 20
Patent Suits |032 OG 20
Patent Certificates of Correction 1032 OG 24
Disclaimers 1032 OG 24
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries i032 OG 25
Condition of Patent Applications |032 OG 26
Reexaminations 1032 OG 27
Reissue Patents Granted (31,312) g-j\
Plant Patents Granted (5,069) ^75
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,393,519) X77
Chemical (4,394,125) |087
Electrical (4,394,529) 1 195
Design Patents Granted (269,729) 1 283
Index of Patentees ^ PI I
Indicesof Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees PI 43
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations) PI 47
Designs and Plants PI 50
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors
Patents (Including Reissues) PI 51
Designs and Plants PI 52
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington, D.C., 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark OfTice at $1.00
each; PLANT PATENTS in color, $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks, Washington, DC, 20231.
Printing authorized by Section ll(a)3 of Title 35, U.S. Code P.T.O.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28, 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee ... $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(a)(5) and 1.525(b)).
Re. 30,926, Reexam. No. 90/000,389, Requested: June
2, 1983, CI. 73/638, ULTRASONIC INSPECTION,
Benjamin J. Ross, et al., Owner of Record: Republic
Steel Corp.. Cleveland, Ohio. Attorney or Agent: Watts,
Hoffman, et al., Ex. Gp.: 244, Requester: Owner
3,742,723, Reexam. No. 90/000,398, Requested: June
8, 1983, CI. 137/315, PIPE FREEZING DEVICE,
Frederick G. J. Grise, Owner of Record: Inventor, At-
torney or Agent: Charles R. Fay, Ex. Gp.: 341, Request-
er: Sandler & Greenblum, Arlington, Va.
4,301,259, Reexam. No. 90/000,404, Requested: June
13, 1983, CI. 525/333.1, LINEAR ORGANO CAR-
BONATE COUPLING FOR LIVING POLYMERS
OF CONJUGATED DIENES, Joginder Lai, et al..
Owner of Record: Goodyear Tire & Rubber Co., Akron,
Ohio, Attorney or Agent: J. Y. Clowney, Ex. Gp.: 144,
Requester: Michelin &. Cie, Ferrand Cedex, France
4,332,536, Reexam. No. 90/000,391, Requested: June
3, 1983, CI. 425/033, HYDRAULIC TIRE PRESS
Anand P. Singh, et al., Owner of Record: NRM Corp.,
Akron, Ohio, Attorney or Agent: Maky, Renner, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 147, Requester: c/o Joseph Spivak, Washing-
ton, DC.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS RLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4,152,598, Re. S.N. 498,509, Filed May 26, 1983, CI.
250/391, LUBRICANT DISTRIBUTION DETERMI-
NATION BY NEUTRON RADIOGRAPHY, Peter A.
E. Stewart, Owner of Record: Rolls-Royce Ltd., London,
England. Attorney or Agent: Roger W. Parkhurst, Ex.
Gp.: 256
4,269,543, Re. S.N. 498,574, Filed May 26, 1983, CI.
405/198, MOBILE, OFFSHORE, SELF-ELEVATING
(JACK-UP) UNIT LEG/HULL RIGIDIFICATION
SYSTEM, Jerome L. Goldman, et al., Owner of Rec-
ord: Friede and Goldman, Ltd., New Orleans, La., Attor-
ney or Agent: C. Emmett Pugh, et al., Ex. Gp.: 356
4,303,748, Re. S.N. 476,344, Filed Mar. 17, 1983, CI.
429/192, ELECTROCHEMICAL GENERATORS
FOR PRODUCING CURRENT AND NEW MATE-
RIALS FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE, Michel B.
Armand, et al.. Owner of Record: Agence Nationale de
Valorisation de la Recherche (Anvar), Neuilly-sur-Seine,
France, Attorney or Agent: Gerard J. Weiser, et al., Ex.
Gp.: Ill
Patent Suits
Notices under 35 U.S.C. 290; Patent Act of 1952
3,122,474, Hoffman-La Roche, Inc., CHLORDI-
AZEPOXIDE AND CLIDINIUM HALIDE COMPO-
SITION AND METHOD OF USING SAME, filed
Feb. 18, 1982, D.C.N. J. (Newark), Doc. 82-483, Hoff-
man-La Roche, Inc., et al v. Bolar Pharmaceutical Co.,
Inc., et al Consent order for preliminary injunction and
terminating action administratively filed Mar. 17, 1982.
3,365,800, Richard F. Carella, ARCHERY BOW
SIGHT ASSEMBLY; 4,328,625, same, ARCHERY
BOWSIGHT (BETWEEN RANGE), filed Mar. 30,
1983, DC, ED. Mich. (Bay City), Doc. 83 CV 9036
PH, Richard F. Carella v. Target Sales, Co., et al
3,409,579, Ashland Oil, Inc., FOUNDRY BINDER
COMPOSITION COMPRISING BENZYLIC ETHER
RESIN, POLYISOCYANATE, AND TERTIARY
AMINE; 3,676,392, same, RESIN COMPOSITIONS,
filed Mar. 4, 1983, D.C., E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc.
83CV0806DT, Ashland Oil. Inc. v. Delta Resins & Re-
fractories, Inc.
3,425,779, Paul C. Fisher, PRESSURIZED MARK-
ING INSTRUMENT, filed Apr. 19, 1983, DC, N.D.
111. (Chicago), Doc. 83 C 2456, Paul C. Fisher v. Sears
Roebuck and Co.
3,430,221, Barringer Research Ltd., PROXIMITY
DETECTOR, filed July 9, 1980, DC, WD. Pa. (Pitts-
burgh), Doc. 80-925, Federal Laboratories, Inc. - v.
Barringer Research Ltd., et al Defendant is the owner of
1032 OG 20
July 19, lib
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1032 00 21
Pat. No. 3,430,221 which is valid and subsisting. Consent
Decree filed May 2, 1983.
3,465,441, Leonard I. Linkow, RING-TYPE IM-
PLANT FOR ARTIFICIAL TEETH, filed Apr. 11,
1983, D.C.N. J. (Newark), Doc. 83-1242 L, Oratronics.
Inc. V. Leonard I. Linkow.
3,479,840, Dana Corp., TRUNNION SEAL FOR
CARDAN-TYPE UNIVERSAL JOINT, filed Mar. 30,
1983, D.C.. N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 83 C 2248, Dana
Corp. V. Precision Universal Joint Corp.
3,480,504, Good and Morgan, AUTOMATIC APPA-
RATUS FOR APPLYING COVERS TO BIOLOGI-
CAL SLIDES, filed Jan. 10, 1983, D.C. Minn. (Minne-
apolis), Doc. 4-83 Civil 35, Rose M. Morgan and Dorothy
I. Good V. Gibbco Scientific, Inc., et al Stipulation and
Order of Dismissal without prejudice dated Mar. 30,
1983.
3,501,611, Paul Opprecht, ELECTRODE ROLL
FOR WELDING MACHINES; 3,743,813, same,
METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC MANUFACTURE
OF METAL CONTAINER BODIES, AND
WELDING MACHINES FOR APPLICATION
THEREOF; 3,745,295, same, METHOD FOR AUTO-
MATIC MANUFACTURE OF METAL CONTAIN-
ER BODIES, AND WELDING MACHINE FOR AP-
PLICATION THEREOF; 4,160,892, same, METHOD
AND APPARATUS FOR SEAM WELDING
OVERLAPPED EDGES, filed May 11, 1982, DC,
N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 82 C 2938, Paul Opprecht v.
Fuji Kogyosho Co.
3,620,650, Robert F. Shaw, GAS-DISABLED LIQ-
UID PUMPING APPARATUS, filed Mar. 15, 1983,
D.C, N.D. Calif. (San Francisco), Doc. C83 1252 WAI,
Oximetrix, Inc. v. Robert F. Shaw, et al
3,659,112, Caterpillar Tractor Co., MASTER LINK
FOR CUSHIONED TRACK, filed Mar 18, 1983, DC.
CD. 111. (Peoria), Doc. 83-1066, Caterpillar Tractor Co.
V. Intertractor, Viehmann & Co.
3,676,392. (See 3,409,579.)
3,702,484, Aqua Therm Products Corp., LIGHT-
WEIGHT, MINIMUM-VOLUME WATER PAD, filed
Feb. 16, 1982, D.C, N.D.N.Y. (Utica), Doc. 82-CV-161,
Aqua Therm Products Corp. v. Akros Mfg., Inc.. et al
Stipulated Order of Dismissal of Action under Rule
41(a)(l)(ii) filed Apr. 18, 1983.
3,712,357, Belts, Bolts, Cups, Corp., BOLT FOR AT-
TACHING ELEVATOR BUCKETS TO BELTS,
AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME, filed Mar. 3,
1983, DC, N.D. Ga. (Atlanta), Doc. C83-593A, Belts,
Bolts, Cups, Corp. v. Maxi-Lift, Inc.
3,743,813. (See 3,501,611.)
3,745,295. (See 3,501,611.)
3,748,997, Tempmaster Corp., ACOUSTICAL INSU-
LATED FAN AND TEMPERATURE CONDITION-
ING PENTHOUSE UNIT, filed May 4, 1983. DC Ak.
(Anchorage), Doc. A83-237, Tempmaster Corp. v. Mark
Hot, Inc., et al
3,754,309, Kennametal, Inc., CUTTING INSERT
AND CLAMPING ARRANGEMENT THEREFOR,
filed Feb. 8, 1980, DC, WD. Mich. (Grand Rapids),
Doc. G80-91 CAl, Kennametal Inc. v. Spec Tool Co.,
Inc. Plaintiff is the owner of Pat. No. 3,754,309, which is
good and valid at law. Defendant is permanently
enjoined from further infringing Plaintiff's patent. Final
Judgment filed Apr. 27, 1983.
3,782,708, Kuhlman Corp., SPRING ASSEMBLY
AND METHODS AND MACHINES FOR THE
MANUFACTURE THEREOF; 3,866,287, same,
METHODS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
SPRING ASSEMBLIES, filed Apr. 13, 1983, DC,
E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 83CV134D9T, Kuhlman
Corp. V. Peterson American Corp.
3,825,129, Don D. Beck. PIPE HANDLING APPA-
RATUS; 4,099,630, same, filed June 30, 1980, DC,
WD. Okla. (Oklahoma City), Doc. C-80-773-T, Don D.
Beck V. Briscoe Black Gold. Inc., et al Plaintiff is the
owner of Pat. Nos. 3,825.129 and 4,099,630 which are
good and valid. Judgment against defendant filed Mar.
2, 1983.
3,825,229, Construction Specialties, Inc.. COMBINA-
TION HANDRAIL AND WALL PROTECTOR
3,861,110, same, BUMPER GUARD; 4,196,552, same,
CRASH RAIL; 4,200,261, same, HANDRAIL AND
CRASH RAIL, filed Jan. 5, 1982. DC Kans. (Wichita).
Doc. 82-1013, Construction Specialties, Inc. v. Balco, Inc.
3,861,110. (See 3,825,229.)
3,865,452, Industrial Electronic Hardware Corp..
SPARK GAP PROTECTION IN CATHODE RAY
TUBE SOCKETS, filed Feb. 1, 1978, DC, N.D. 111.
(Chicago), Doc. 78 C 361, Industrial Electronic Hardware
Corp. V. American Plasticraft Co. On Stipulation, com-
plaint and counterclaim dismissed with prejudice, per
Order dated Feb. 14, 1979.
3,866,287. (See 3,782,708.)
3,875,719, Troy Steel Corp.. METAL SUPPORT
FOR WOOD STRUCTURAL ELEMENTS, filed Nov
17, 1978, D.C. Minn. (St. Paul), Doc. 2-78-435, Troy
Steel Corp v. United Steel Products Co. Same, filed July
27, 1979, DC. E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 972982. Troy
Steel Corp. v. Gordon Machinery Co.
3,876,579, Rexnord, Inc., COMPOSITION TO BE
APPLIED TO A SURFACE TO INCREASE ITS
WEAR RESISTANCE, filed Aug. 8, 1980, DC, N.D.,
111. (Chicago), Doc. 80 C 4229, Rexnord, Inc. v. Polygem,
Inc. Consent Decree permanently enjoining and
restraining defendants from further infringing Pat. No.
3,876,579 filed May 4, 1983.
3.879,825, B & J Mfg. Co., TIRE BUFFING MA-
CHINE BLADES, filed Apr. 22, 1983, DC, N.D. Ohio
(Cleveland), Doc. C83-1731, B & J Mfg Ca v. D. A.
Frost Industries, Inc.. et al
3,890,975, Ethicon, Inc , CONTROLLED RELEASE
SUTURE, filed May 21, 1976, DC, S.D.N.Y., Doc.
76-CIV-2301, American Cyanamid Co. v. Ethicon, Inc.
Defendant has judgment against Plaintiff, dismissing the
complaint, per judgment filed June 17, 1977.
3,895,312, Systron Donner Corp., LOW NOISE
HIGH SPECTRAL PURITY MICROWAVE FRE-
QUENCY SYNTHESIZER, filed Mar. 23, 1983, DC ,
N.D. Calif (San Francisco), Doc. 83-1396 WAI, Systron
Donner Corp., et al v. Gigatronics, Inc.. et al
3,920,075, Texas Iron Works, Inc., METHOD FOR
POSITIONING A LINER ON A TUBULAR MEM-
BER IN A WELL BORE WITH A RETRIEVABLE
PACK OFF BUSHING THEREBETWEEN, filed
Mar. 20, 1979, DC, S.D. Tex. (Houston). Doc.
H-79-581. Texas Iron Works, Inc. v. Brown Oil Tools, Inc.
3,923,301, Dwight L. Myers. AMUSEMENT WA-
TER SLIDE AND METHOD, filed Dec. 21. 1978.
D.C, M.D.N.C (Greensboro). Doc. C-78-659-S. United
States of America v. Dwight L. Myers. Action voluntarily
dismissed without prejudice by Plaintiff on Feb. 15,
1979.
3,944,760, CTS CORP., SWITCH ASSEMBLY
HAVING SLIDER ACTUATOR INSULATING
PLATE INSERTED BETWEEN NORMALLY
CLOSED CONTACTS, filed Apr. 28, 1982, DC, N.D.
Calif (San Jose). Doc. 82-1850, CTS Corp v. Stanford
Applied Engineering. Inc. Case dismissed without preju-
dice and without costs on Mar. 25, 1983.
3,969,780, James M Henderson, CONTINUOUS
CARPET DYEING PROCESS, filed Nov. 9, 1979,
DC, N.D. Ga. (Rome), Doc. C79-236R, United Mer-
chants and Manufacturers, Inc. v. James M. Henderson.
1032 OG 22
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
3,978,531, Bengt Erland Hon, LIFTING DEVICE,
filed Feb. 15, 1977, DC. District of Columbia (Wash.
DC), Doc. 77-0281, Labarge, Inc. v. Bengt Erland Hon,
et al Stipulation and Order dismissing action, including
without limitation all claims with prejudice, filed May
18, 1978.
3,995,498, Nortron Corp., WHEEL MOUNTING
ASSEMBLY FOR TIRE BALANCING MACHINE;
4,352,291, same, BALANCING MACHINE, filed Apr.
26, 1983, D.C., N.D. Calif. (San Francisco), Doc.
C-83-2096 TEH, Nortron Corp. v. Dynabal Corp.. et al.
4,024,734, Trip-Lite Ltd., YARN FAULT DETEC-
TORS; D. 246,292, same, YARN FAULT DETEC-
TOR, filed Aug. 9, 1982, D.C., N.D.N.Y. (Utica), Doc.
82-CV-825, Trip-Lite Ltd.. et al v. Kencap Products. Inc.
Final Judgment on Consent filed Feb. 8, 1983.
4,048,573, Mcintosh Laboratory, Inc., AMPLIFIER
IMPROVEMENTS FOR LIMITING CLIPPING, filed
Apr. 13, 1983, D.C., W.D. Wash. (Seattle), Doc.
C83-508M, Mcintosh Laboratory. Inc. v. Carver Corp.
4,052,775, Irvin Industries, Inc., SAFETY SEAT
BELT BUCKLE, filed Nov. 18, 1977, DC. Del. (Wil-
mington), Doc. 77-453, Irvin Industries, Inc. v. Gateway
Industries. Inc. Stipulation and Order dismissing case
with prejudice filed July 2, 1979.
4,061,788, Malcolm R. Wommack, WORM DETEC-
TION PROCESS, filed Nov. 7, 1979, DC, N.D. Tex.
(Fort Worth), Doc. CA4-79-391K, Malcolm R.
Wommack v. Durham Pecan Co.. Inc.
4,072,230, L. K. Van Keuren Co., Inc., ASSEMBLY
FOR SUPPORTING DELICATE EQUIPMENT
DURING SHIPPING, filed Sept. 14, 1981, DC,
N.D.N.Y. (Utica), Doc. 81-CV-977, L. K. Van Keuren
Co.. Inc. V. Central Packaging Supply. Inc. Case
dismissed at call of dismissal calendar on Mar. 25, 1983.
4,072,309, Jerry Lee Wilson, MULTI-PURPOSE EX-
ERCISE DEVICE, filed July 21, 1982, D.C., N.D.
Ohio (Cleveland), Doc. C82-1883A, Jerry Lee Wilson, et
al. V. Contractor Equipment Mfg., Inc., et al
4,099,630. (See 3,825,129.)
4,099,658, John A. Bott, ARTICLE CARRIER FOR
AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES, filed May 8, 1979, DC,
E.D. Mich. (Detroit), Doc. 79-71438, John A. Bott v.
Four Star Corp. Defendant is permanently enjoined from
further infringing Plaintiff's patent. Judgment filed Apr.
27, 1983.
4,105,017, Electro-Biology, Inc., MODIFICATION
OF THE GROWTH, REPAIR AND MAINTE-
NANCE BEHAVIOR OF LIVING TISSUE AND
CELLS BY SPECIFIC AND SELECTIVE CHANGE
IN ELECTRICAL ENVIRONMENT; 4,266,532, same,
MODIFICATION OF THE GROWTH, REPAIR
AND MAINTENANCE BEHAVIOR OF LIVING
TISSUES AND CELLS BY SPECIFIC AND SELEC-
TIVE CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL ENVIRON-
MENT; 4,266,533, same, MODIFICATION OF THE
GROWTH, REPAIR AND MAINTENANCE BE-
HAVIOR OF LIVING TISSUES AND CELLS BY A
SPECIFIC AND SELECTIVE CHANGE IN ELEC-
TRICAL ENVIRONMENT; 4,315,503, same, MODI-
FICATION OF THE GROWTH, REPAIR AND
MAINTENANCE BEHAVIOR OF LIVING TIS-
SUES AND CELLS BY SPECIFIC AND SELEC-
TIVE CHANGE IN ELECTRICAL ENVIRON-
MENT, filed Apr. 8, 1983, DC, S.D.N.Y., Doc.
83-CIV-2718. Telectronics Proprietary Ltd. v. Electro-Biol-
ogy. Inc.
4,111,477, Paul D. Rigali, WINDOW GUARD RE-
LEASE, filed May 24, 1982, DC, CD. Calif. (Los
Angeles), Doc. CV-82-2559, Paul D. Rigali v. Los
Alimitos Ornamental Castings, Inc. Court dismissed ac-
tion for failure to comply with pretrial rules and for fail-
ure to appear on Mar. 31, 1983.
4,138,186, Everett/Charles, Inc., TEST APPARA-
TUS, filed May 8, 1981, DC, WD. Va. (Harrisonburg),
Doc. 81-0066 (H), Everett/Charles, Inc.. et ai v. World '
Enterprises, Inc. Stipulation of Dismissal with prejudice
filed Apr. 6, 1983.
4,160,336, Query and Query, METHOD FOR
TREATING FIREANTS, filed Apr. 15, 1983, D.CS.C
(Charleston), Doc. 83-0917-1, Grady W. Query and O.
Grady Query v. Whit mire Research Labs, Inc., et al
4,160,892. (See 3,501,611.)
4,181,409, American Optical Corp., ASPHERIC
LENS SERIES, filed July 24, 1981, DC, M.D. Fla.
(Tampa), Doc. 81-7(X) Civ T H, American Optical Corp.
V. Essilor International (Compagnie Generale D'Optique)
S.A., et al
4,196,552. (See 3,825,229.)
4,200,261. (See 3,825,229.)
4,212,335, Anthony J. Bova, WATERBED FILLING
UNIT, filed Apr. 7, 1983, DC, CD. Calif. (Los
Angeles), Doc. 83 2206, Anthony J. Bova v. Waterworth.
4,214,658, Simple Pleasures, Inc., SMOKING SYS-
TEM, filed Apr. 5, 1983, DC, N.D. 111. (Chicago),
Doc. 83 C 2372, Simple Pleasures. Inc., et al v. Paul'
Singh, doing business as Peacock.
4,217,473, W. H. Brady Co., CONNECTING FLEX-
IBLE SWITCH; 4,218,600, same, filed Jan. 3, 1983,
D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 83C0020, W. H. Brady
Co. V. Carl Gorr Printing Co. Plaintiff is the owner of
Pat. Nos. 4,217,473 and 4,218,600 which are valid and
have been infringed by defendant. Defendant is enjoined
from further infringing Plaintiff's patents. Filed Apr. 25,
1983.
4,218,600. (See 4,217,473.)
4,254,452, Gary P. Switala, LIGHTED TRAY AP-
PARATUS, filed Apr. 5, 1983, DC, N.D. 111. (Chica-
go), Doc. 83 C 2359, Laminite Plastics Corp. v. Gary P.
Switala, doing business as G.P.S. Manufacturer.
4,264,892, Lincoln M. Zonn, ALARM DEVICE, filed
Dec. 15, 1982, D.C, N.D. Calif. (San Francisco), Doc.
C82 6789 EFL, Lincoln M. Zonn and Brian P. Lewis v.
Tandy Corp., et al Stipulation and Order for Dismissal
with prejudice filed Apr. 20, 1983.
4.266.532. (See 4,105,017.)
4.266.533. (See 4,105,017.)
4,267,751, Lynn J. Ziegelmeyer, SAW CHAIN
DEPTH-GRINDING APPARATUS, filed Mar. 24,
1983, D.C. Ore. (Portland), Doc. 83-444, Lynn J
Ziegelmeyer v. Elmer R. Silvey. et ai. doing business as
Silvey Precision Chain Grinders.
4,287,993, Vito Licari, ADJUSTABLE RACK FOR
HANGING ARTICLES, filed May 7, 1982, D.C.N.J.
(Newark), Doc. 82-1449, Basic Line. Inc. v. K-Del Corp.
Order of Dismissal of action filed Mar. 24, 1983.
4,300,287, Larry T. Tibbs, CUTTING TOOL, filed
Apr. 7, 1983, D.C, N.D. 111. (Chicago), Doc. 83 C 2413,
Larry T. Tibbs. et al v. Gerald Wivins, doing business as
Wivco Tool Design Ltd., et al
4,313,485, BSL Corp., TRANSPARENT ACCESS
CURTAIN FOR COOLERS AND THE LIKE, filed
May 27, 1982, D.C, W.D.N.Y. (Buffalo), Doc. 82-462E,
BSL Corp. V. Fredrick's Equipment Service. Inc. Same,
filed Mar. 24, 1983, D.C, N.D. Calif. (San Francisco),
Doc. 83-1400 WAI, BSL Corp. v. Necor Corp.
4,315,503. (See 4,105,017.)
4,321,038, Van R Dental Products, Inc., BRAIDED
GINGIVAL RETRACTION CORD, filed Apr. 26,
1983, DC, W.D. Wash. (Seattle), Doc. C83-573M, Van
R Dental Products, Inc. v. Pascal Co.. Inc.
July 19, H*3,
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1032 OG 23
4,322,827, Lowrance Electronics, Inc., RANGE EX-
PANDER FOR SONAR SYSTEM, filed Mar. 29, 1983,
D.C, N.D. Okla. (Tulsa), Doc. 83-C-272-E, Lowrance
Electronics. Inc. v. Techsonics, Inc.
4,328,625. (See 3,365,800.)
4,343,032, Cable Electric Products, Inc., LIGHT
SENSITIVE ELECTRICAL DEVICE, filed Mar. 7,
1983, D.C, CD. Calif. (Los Angeles), Doc. 83 1357,
Cable Electric Products, Inc. v. Home Equipment Mfg.
Ca
4,348,158, Smith & Loveless, Inc., SEWAGE PUMP-
ING STATION, filed Apr. 29, 1983, DC, W.D. Wis.
(Madison), Doc. 83-C-410-C Smith <fi Loveless, Inc. v.
Usemco, Inc.
4,352,291. (See 3,995,498.)
4,355,210, Midian Electronics, Inc., SUB-MINIA-
TURE TONE ENCODER WITH AUTOMATIC
NUMBER IDENTIFICATION, filed Oct. 19, 1982,
D.C, N.D. Calif. (San Francisco), Doc. C.82-5772-RFP,
Midian Electronics, Inc. v. Norcomm Corp. Stipulation to
dismiss with prejudice filed May 10, 1983.
4,369,959, William M. Hornbuckle, SHEET FEED
MACHINE, filed Apr. 7, 1983, DC, N.D. Okla. (Tul-
sa), Doc. 83-C-307-E, William M. Hornbuckle v. Sandco,
Inc.
J,372,59il
4,372,593; David A. Kesselman, TAMPER INDICA-
TOR, filed Apr. 6, 1983, D.C.N.J. (Newark), Doc.
83-1221, David A. Kesselman v. E. J. Brooks Co., Inc.
Re. 29,114, James H. McQuestion, BURIAL VAULT,
filed June 19, 1978, D.C, E.D. 111. (Danville), Doc.
78-0087-D, James H McQuestion v. David L. Darby, et
al, doing business as Greenland Plastics Co.
Re. 29,487, Cabot Corp., EARPLUGS, filed Mar. 3,
1983, D.C, CD. Calif. (Los Angeles), Doc. 83 1289.
Moldex/ Metric Products, Inc. v. Cabot Corp.
Re. 30,613, Matsuzaka Iron Works, Inc., SHEARING
TOOL FOR SYNTHETIC RESIN TUBES; D.
252,666, same, VINYL PIPE CUTTER, filed Mar. 28,
1983, D.C, N.D. Ohio (Youngstown), Doc. C83-1328Y,
Wheeler Mfg. Corp. v. Matsuzaka Iron Works. Inc.
D. 246,292. (See 4,024,734.)
D. 252,666. (See Re. 30,613.)
D. 253,752, Cincinnati Microwave, Inc., RADAR
WARNING RECEIVER, filed Feb. 15, 1983, DC,
S.D. Ohio (Dayton), Doc. C-3-83-139, Cincinnati Micro-
wave, Inc. V. Larrick\ Inc. Case transferred to the N.D.
111. on May 13, 1983.
D. 254,186, The Colber Corp., RESISTOR HOUS-
ING, filed Oct. 4, 1982, DC, ED. Tenn. (Chattanoo-
ga), Doc. Civ- 1-82-447, The Colber Corp v. D. M. Stew-
ard Mfg. Co. Plaintiff is the owner of D. 254,186.
Defendant is permanently enjoined against further in-
fringing Plaintiff's patent. Filed Apr. 28, 1983.
D. 256,802, Cagles, Inc., EVISCERATOR TOOL,
filed Feb. 12, 1982, D.C, N.D. Ga. (Gainesville), Doc.
C82-027G, Cagles. Inc. v. Centennial Machine Co.. Inc.
Consent stipulation of dismissal filed Jan. 18, 1983.
D. 260,624, John J. Madison Co., Inc., FIGURINE
OF AN ANTELOPE; D. 261,375, same, FIGURINE
OF A OKAPI; D. 261,490, same, FIGURINE OF A
BASSET HOUND; D. 262,007, same, FIGURINE OF
A DUCK, filed Apr. 18, 1983, DC, S.D.N.Y., Doc.
83-CIV-2955, John J. Madison Co., Inc. v. Benrose Lamp
Co., Inc.
D. 261,096, Petersen Mfg. Co., Inc., HAND TOOL,
filed Nov. 2, 1982, DC, CD. Calif. (Los Angeles).
Doc. 82 5667, Petersen Mfg. Co.. Inc. v. Central Purchas-
ing. Inc.. doing business as Harbor Freight Salvage Co.. et
al Plaintiff's D. 261,096 is invalid and unenforceable,
per order filed Apr. 18, 1983.
D. 261,375.
D. 261,490.
D. 262,007.
(See D. 260,624.)
(See D. 260,624.)
(See D. 260,624.)
D. 263,465, Franzus Co., Inc.. VOLTAGE CON-
VERTER OR SIMILAR ARTICLE, filed Mar. 28,
1983, D.C, S.D.N.Y., Doc. 83-CIV-2368, Franzus Co..
Inc. V. Zurich Electric Industrial Corp.
PP 3,130, Arthur Bright, ALMOND TREE, filed
May 2, 1983. DC, ED. Calif. (Fresno), Doc. CV-
F-83-180-REC Arthur Bright v. Berenda Mesa Farming,
et al
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of July 19, 1983
Re. 31,176
Des. 267,431
4,179,747
4,204,928
4,256.459
4,268,299
4,268,693
4,269.673
4,276,101
4,286,240
4,294,376
4,296,256
4,298,395
4,307.238
4,307,256
4,311,703
4,311,925
4,321,918
4,325,881
4,326,265
4,336,572
4,339,576
4,341,776
4.346,171
4,346.914
4,348,346
4,349,826
4,350,084
4,352,178
4,354,381
4,354.488
4.355,815
4,356,739
4,357,268
4,358.420
4,359,584
4,360,741
4,361,169
4,361,997
4,363,541
4,366,305
4.369.232
4,369,436
4,370,008
4,370.256
4.371,184
4,371,408
4,371,606
4,372,618
4,372,827
4,373,442
4,373.901
4.373,932
4,373,948
4,374,140
4.375,562
4,376,088
4,376,262
4,376.319
4.376.476
4.376,953
4.377,488
4,377.525
4,377,611
4,377,673
4,377,860
4,377,870
4.378,361
4,378,503
4,378,530
4,378,555
4,378,598
4,378,827
4,378,855
4,380,540
4.380,628
4,381,081
4,381,396
4,381,472
4.381.711
4,381,862
4.381,933
4,382,246
4,382,767
4,383,016
4,383,389
4,383,735
4,385,155
Disclaimers
4,20b,9\0.— William M. Biesemeyer, Phoenix, Ariz. TA-
BLE SAW FENCE SYSTEM. Patent dated June
10, 1980. Disclaimer filed June 6, 1983, by the inven-
tor.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims I through 7 of
said patent.
4,316,116.— Jam« y4. Graves, Highland Hts. and Gilbert
H. Reilings, Chardon, Ohio. TRIPLE-COIL IN-
CANDESCENT FILAMENT. Patent dated Feb.
16, 1982. Disclaimer filed May 27, 1983, by the as-
signee. General Electric Co.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 1 through 5 of
said patent.
4,360,510.— y«//o/i W. Proctor, Pittsburgh, Pa. METHOD
FOR SCREENING ANTI-TUMOR AGENTS OF
THE RETICULOENDOTHELIAL STIMULANT
CLASS. Patent dated Nov. 23, 1982. Disclaimer filed
May 31, 1983, by the inventor.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claim 4 of said patent.
1032 OG 24
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent deposi-
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope
of these collections varies from library to library, rang-
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some
libraries to all or most- of the patents issued since 1870,
or earlier, in other libraries.
These patent collections are open to public use and
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g.
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro-
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the
public in gaining effective access to information con-
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
table following, the collections are organized in patent
number sequence.
Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
in some combination of both. Facilities for making paper
copies from either microfilm in reader^rinters or from
the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general-
ly provided for a fee.
Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
patents at a particular library is advised to contact that
library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as
to avert possible inconvenience.
State
Alabama
Arizona
California
Colorado
Delaware
Georgia
Illinois
Louisiana
Massachusetts
Michigan
Minnesota
Missouri
Nebraska
New Hampshire
New Jersey
New York
Name of Library
Birmingham Public Library
Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University
Los Angeles Public Library
Sacramento: California State Library
Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse*
Denver Public Library
Newark: University of Delaware
Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Technology
Chicago Public Library
Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University
Boston Public Library
Detroit Public Library
Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center
Kansas City: Linda Hall Library
St. Louis Public Library
North Carolina
Ohio
Oklahoma
Pennsylvania
Rhode Island
South Carolina
Tennessee
Texas
Washingto^
Wisconsin
Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library
Durham: University of New Hampshire Library
Newark Public Library
Albany: New York State Library
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library
New York Public Library (The Research Libraries)
Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University
Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of
Cleveland Public Library
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries
Toledo/Lucas County Public Library
Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library
Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University
Providence Public Library
Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina
Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center
Dallas Public Library
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University
Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington
Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin
Milwaukee Public Library
Telephone Contact
(205) 254-2555
(602) 965-7607
(213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
(916) 322-4572
(408) 738-5580
(303) 571-2122
(302) 738-2238
(404) 894-4508
(312) 269-2865
(504) 388-2570
(617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
(313) 833-1450
(612) 372-6552
(816)363-4600
(314)241-2288 Ext. 214,
Ext. 215
(402)472-3411
(603) 862-1777
(201)733-7814
(518)474-5125
(716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
(212) 930-0850
(919) 737-3280
(513)369-6936
(216) 623-2870
(614) 422-6286
(419) 255-7055 Ext. 212
(405) 624-6546
(215)448-1321**
(412) 622-3138
(814) 865-4861
(401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
(803) 792-2372
(901) 528-2957
(214)749-4176
(713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
(206) 543-0740
(608) 262-6845
(414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries offer CASSIS (Classification And Search Support Information System), which
provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
•Collection organized by subject matter.
**Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5:00 p.m.
1032 OG 25
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF April 2, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY. GROUP 1 10-D E. TALBERT, Director ^ • 116-81
Sanic impounds; Inorganic ComposUions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chem^try Metallurgy Me al-
lurgical AppaVatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Batteries; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubricating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices. n 7n.«i
GENERAL ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120-C. E. VAN HORN, Director ••.•„•••.■•••■ " : ''-^O-*'
Heterocyclic Amides; Alkaloids; Azo; Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids Oxo and Oxy; Quinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides, Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY, PLASTICS AND MOLDING, GROUP 140-J. O. THOMAS, JR., Director 3-1-82
Synthetic Resins Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions; Syn hetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g., Coatmg; Molding;
Ink Prosthdontics Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding. Shaping, Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather, Fur and JextUe Treating Compositions.
COATING LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY. GROUP 160-S. N. ZAHARNA, Director . .... . 3-09-82
Coating Processes Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Materials; Adhesive
Bonding; Special Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions, and Photography^
SPECIALIZED CHEMICAL INDUSTRIES AND CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170- ^^^^^
Fertihze^"FlSsfFl?memation; Analytical Chemistry;' Reactors; Sugar and Starch; Paper Making; Glass Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation, Preserving; Lic^uid Gas
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refrigeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS. PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS. GROUP 210-S. W. ENGLE Director 5-22-81
Generation and UtiliS General Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION, GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE, Director ■.■,.■■ ^ . n ^
Ordnance, Firearms and Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, Communications Op-
fcs Radar; Directional Radio; Torpedoes; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
Devices Radioactive Materials; Powder Metallurgy, Rocket Fuels; Special, Fuel, Explosive and Thermic Composi-
INFoSATferT^ANSMTssf^^^^ AND RETRIEVAL, GROUP 230-EARL LEVY. Director ..... . 1-05-81
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing. Computation and Conversion;
Storage Devices and Related Arts.
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING. AND MEASURING. GROUP 240- ^ ^^.g]
Re^emaclS;'^Be^an?gt PdmT'p'acking; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleanmg;
FoS Treating; Agitating; Centrifugal Separating; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projecors;
Web Feeding Winding and Reelini; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
ELECTRONrcSp'SSk'NT"^YS™S AND DEVICES, GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS, Director .. 8-25-80
Semi ConducVor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring. MO 81
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director
Industrial Arts; Household, Personal and Fine Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310-B. R. GRAY, Director . . ......... ..... .■ 5-18-81
Conveyors; Hoists; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding, D.spenMng; Fluid Sprin-
kling Fire Extinguishers; Com Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids Boats,
Ships Aeronautics; Motor and Land Vehicles and Appurtenances; Brakes; Railways and Railway Equipment.
MATERUL SHAPING, ARTICLE MANUFACTURING, TOOLS, GROUP 320-STEPHEN G^ ^^^^^k^T^L^
Manufacturing Processes, Assembling, Combined Machines. Special Article Making, Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
and Wire Working; Metal Fusion-Bonding, Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping or Dividing; Work and
Tool Holders, Woodworking; Tools; Cutlery; Jacks; Fishing, Etc.; Butchering; and Books and Printed Matter.
AMUSEMENT. HUSBANDRY, PERSONAL TREATMENT. INFORMATION. GROUP 330- ^^^^^
Amu^mtm^and^Scising Devices; Projectors;' Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvestmg; Earth Working and
Excavating; Tobacco; Artificial Body Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Pnnting; Typewriters; Infor-
mation Dissemination. _ . „..r-„^.,.v,^ rx . n i7-»n
HEAT POWER, AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340-D. J STOCKING, Director . ^ ^ _^^ Hl^ 80
Power Plants; Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engine* and Pumps; Heat Gener-
ation and Exchange; Refrigeration; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Gearing,
Fluid Handling and Control; Lubrication. „..,^ ^„^,,r, tc«
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS, TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING, GROUP 350- ^ ^^^^
BiJlding Structuresl^Racksi Cabinets! Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe Couplings; Joints; Miscel-
laneous Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineering; Earth Dnlling, Mining,
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
Expiration of patents: The patents within the range of numbers indicated below expire during April 1983. except those which inay
have Sd their terms curtailed by disclaimer under the provisions of 35 U.S.C. 253. Other patents, '^^"ed^f'^-jji!. .^^ f. "//^I'Zv^f
of numbers indicated below, may have expired before the full term of 17 years for the same reasons, or have lapsed under the provi-
sions of 35 use 151 Numbers 3,243.822 to 3.248.737. inclusive
Pf e"»s . Numbers 2.616 to 2.627 inclusive
Plant Patents
1032 OG 26
Matter enc
REEXAMINATIONS
JULY 19, 1983
osed in heavy brackets [ ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexamination specification; matter printed in
italics indicates additions made by reexamination.
HOPPFR r >?TF iTrrHiiir Mirr^u a MIc^^ " "'^^^"^ position upon movement of said plate toward said
V • w c; . ir V^lCHING MECHANISM open position, said one end portion of said latch resting on
Francis M. Nester, Mechanicsburg, Pa., assignor to K.S. ihe upper surface of said plate when in said tripped position
D 1 ..• '"°"**'"'^*' VI*^"i;;**,?^*l'J*l; '^"^ '" position for subsequent automatic movement into said
Reexamination Request No 90/000,167 Feb. 24, 1982. engaged position when said plate moves into said closed
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 3,707,126, position
issued Dec. 26, 1972, Ser. No. 54,245, Jul. 13, 1970.
U.S. a. 105/282 P Int. Cl.^ B61D 7/20: E05 65/14
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claim 1 is confirmed.
Claim 4, having been finally determined to be unpatenta-
ble, is cancelled.
Claim 2 is determined to be patentable as amended:
Claim 3, dependent on an amended claim, is determined
to be patentable.
2. A discharge gate and lock assembly for a hopper car
having a discharjge opening on the underside thereof, said
assembly comprising a frame adapted to be attached to
said car at said opening, a plate mounted on said frame
for generally horizontal movement between a closed po-
sition where it covers said opening and an open position
where it uncovers said opening, a latch rod pivotally
mounted on said frame and extending generally trans-
versely of the direction of movement of said plate, a
handle on each end of said latch rod adjacent a side of
said frame, and an elongated latch on said rod adjacent
said plate, said latch being rotatable by turning either one
of said handles between an engaged position in which
one end portion of said latch engages and holds said plate
in said closed position and a disengaged position in which
the one end portion extends upwardly from the rod and
permits opening movement of said plate and the opposite
end portion of said latch extends downwardly from the
rod in the patch of movement of a portion of said plate
and movement of said plate toward its open position
resulting in said portion of said plate striking said opposite
end portion and tripping said latch from said disengaged
position toward said engaged position, said latch being
positioned on said rod relative to said handles to be
pulled by the weight of said handles and said one end
portion into said engaged position after the tripping of
said latch when said plate is returned to closed position,
said opposite end portion of said latch when in said disen-
gaged position extending downwardly into said path of move-
ment of said portion of said plate to be struck and rotated to
Bl 4,073,296 (108th)
APPARATUS FOR ACUPRESSURE TREATMENT
Francis J. McCall, Box 236, Lansing, 111. 60438
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,195, May 4, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,073,296,
issued Feb. 14, 1978, Ser. No. 646,003, Jan. 2, 1976.
Int. CV A61B 77/00. A61H 39/04 U.S. Q. 128/303
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
The patentability of claims 1-3 is confirmed.
New claims 4 and 5 are added and determined to be
patentable.
4. An acupressure treatment device comprising:
a plastic mold closely conforming to a human external
ear, said plastic mold to be locatable in a predeter-
mined position and only in this said predetermined
position within the external ear:
said mold to be removably retained within said external
ear in said predetermined position, said mold to be
located directly adjacent acupucture points located
within said external ear which are to influence corre-
sponding specific body functions to be treated: and
nodule means imbedded within said plastic mold, said
nodule means to contact said external ear, said nodule
means not less than about one millimeter in diameter,
said nodule means positioned on said mold to depress vt
least one of said acupuncture points and thereby treat at
least one said corresponding specific body function when
said mold is retained in said predetermined position in
said ear.
'-■ 1032 OG 27
1032 OG 28
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
Bl 4,054,937 (109th)
CAPACITOR
Lyon Mandelcorn, Pittsburgh; Robert L. Miller, Murrys-
▼ille, both of Pa.; George E. Merder; John H. Pickett,
both of Bloomington, Ind.; Thomas W. Dakin, Murrys-
ville, Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corpora-
tion, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,138, Jan. 18, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,054,937,
issued Oct. 18, 1977, Ser. No. 681,292, Apr. 28, 1976.
U.S. a. 361/315 Int. a.' HOIG 4/22: HOIB 3/00
ing with a dielectric spacer impregnated with a dielectric
fluid which comprises:
(a) about 80 to about 99% by weight of a compound
having the general formula
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION. IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claim 1 is determined to be patentable as amended:
Claims 2-15, dependent on an amended claim, are deter-
mined to be patentable.
New claims 16-22 are added and determined to be
patentable.
1. A capacitor comprising layers of metal foil alternat-
[O^.]
Q-^^-TS
R.
or mixtures thereof, where each R is independently
selected from alkyl from C2 to C*; and
(b) about 1 to about 20% by weight of a compound
having the general formula
or mixtures thereof, where each Ri is independently
selected from alkyl from C2 to Q.
REISSUES
_ JULY 19, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets £ J appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in iulics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,312
TENSION MONITOR MEANS
Gerald R. Eddens, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to W. J. tlidustries,
Inc., Fenton, Mo.
Original No. 4,130,014, dated Dec. 19, 1978, Ser. No. 840,646,
Oct. 11, 1977. Application for reissue Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No.
295,225 I
' Int. CI.3 GOIL 5/10
U.S. a. 73—862.48 19 Claims
A
•U'
1. Apparatus for measuring the tension in a continuously
moving web comprising in combination, two spaced frame
members, a shaft extending between the frame members and
having web engaging means rotatably mounted thereon, cou-
pling members connecting opposite ends of the shaft to the
respective frame members, each of the coupling members
having substantially planar members arranged to be intersected at
intermediate locations by and to be substantially normal to the
axis of the shaft, and two spaced opposed two spaced deflectable
portions located respectively on opposite sides of the axis of
the shaft, each of said deflectable portions including a member
which is relatively deflectable in a preselected plane only and each
having spaced end edges integrally connected with the respective
spaced planar members whereby the deflectable portions and the
planar members form an enclosed structure such that when pres-
sure is applied to the shaft by the web in a direction to cause one
of the planar members to move relative to the other the deflectable
portions will deflect so as to maintain the planar members in
essentially parallel relation, means for holding the web in en-
gagement with the rotatably mounted means for producing a
web tension load component on the shaft with web tension
load components deflecting the shaft and straining the deflect-
able portions while maintaining the spaced substantially planar
members in an essentially parallel relation, and strain sensing
transducing means located on at least one of the deflectable
portions for conveying therefrom a signal derived from said
straining and therefore representative of the tension in the web.
Re. 31,313
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR WELL TESTING
John V. Fredd, and Phillip S. Sizer, both of Dallas, Tex., assign-
ors to Otis Engineering Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Original No. 4,274,485, dated Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 78,712,
Sep. 25, 1979. Application for reissue Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No.
311,638
Int. a.^ E21B 34/14. 43/12, 47/00; F16K 31/44
U.S. a. 166—250 17 Qaims
1. A valve comprising,
a valve body having a seat therein,
a valve member cooperable with said seat and controlling
flow through the valve body,
first resilient means urging said valve member to one of open
and closed positions,
a plunger connected to said valve member and moving with
the valve member between open and closed positions,
. said connection between the plunger and valve member
providing for movement of said plunger relative to the
valve member after the valve member reaches the other of
said open and closed positions,
second resilient means opposing relative movement between
the plunger and valve member,
pulling means releasably latching onto said plunger, and
latch release means releasing said pulling means from said
plunger upon movement of said plunger a selected dis-
tance in a direction toward said other position after said
valve member has moved to said other position.
15. The method of testing a well having a tubing with a landing
nipple and a by-pass valve in said landing nipple comprising,
running a transducer probe into the tubing and landing the
probe in the by-pass valve,
alternately flowing the well and shutting in the well by raising
and lowering said probe after it is landed in the valve,
determining well conditions while said well is shut-in and flow-
ing
Re. 31,314
BRAKE DRUM SEAL WITH DUAL ELASTOMERIC LEGS
James G. Blaha, Painesville, Ohio, assignor to Towmotor Corpo-
ration, Mentor, Ohio
Original No. 4,243,234, dated Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 12,162, Jan.
18, 1979. Application for reissue Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No.
236,953
Int. a.' F16J 15/32, 15/34
U.S. CI. 277—84 22 Qaims
108
1. A seal assembly (10), comprising:
a first member (12);
a second member (14) having an outer surface (66), a face
(68) and a central axis (70), said outer surface (66) being
871
872
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
oriented generally along said central axis (70), said face
(68) having an annular opening (76) and extending in-
wardly from said outer surface (66) in a direction toward
said central axis (70), said annular opening (76) having
sidewalls (78) and a bottom surface (80), said first and
second members (12,14) being rotatable one relative to the
other;
first means (28) for supporting said first and second members
(12,14) in rotation one relative to the other;
a body (36) having first and second end portions (50,52) and
a first side (42) and being positioned adjacent and about
said annular opening (26);
a first leg (38) having a scaling surface (58) and being con-
nected to the [second end portion (52)] first end portion
(50) of the body (36) and extending outwardly from the
first side (42) of the body (36) into said annular opening
(76), said sealing surface [56J 58 being in sealing, slidable
contact with the face (68) of the second member (14) in
said annular opening (76);
a second leg (40) having a sealing surface (60) and being
connected to the second end portion (52) of the body (36)
and extending outwardly from the first side (42) of the
body (36), said sealing surface (60) being in sealing, slid-
able contact with the second member (14) radially relative
to said central axis (70) at the outer surface (66) of said
second member (14); and
second means (72) for sealably connecting said body (36) to
said first member (12).
Re. 31,316
ELONGATED IGNITING DEVICE
Robert W. Moore, 449 E. Altgeld Ave., Glendale Heights, III.
60137
Original No, 4,315,731, dated Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 242,362,
Mar. 10, 1981. Application for reissue Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No.
367,381
Int. a.3 F23Q 1/04
U.S. a. 431—254 15 Qaims
Re. 31,315
APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING A PUMP TO A
CONTROLLER
Jon A. Jenkins, Rancho Sante Fe, and Raymond E. Cannon, San
Diego, both of Calif., assignors to Imed Corporation, San
Diego, Calif.
Original No. 4,277,227, dated Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 53,981, Jul.
2, 1979. Application for reissue Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No.
321,192
Int. a.3 B04B 27/00,- A61M 5/20
U.S. a. 417—63 40 Qaims
13. An elongated igniting device for a conventional cigarette
lighter having a head end with a rotatable fling wheel adjacent a
movable valve actuator controlling flow of fuel through a valve to
an outlet port, said device comprising:
an elongated shank;
a handgrip on one end portion of said shank-
holding means on the opposite end portion of said shank for
releasably retaining the cigarette lighter with the head end
facing away from the hand grip;
an actuator rod guided for reciprocable movement parallel to
said shank, said rod having an outer extension beyond the
head end of the lighter and being movable between extended
and retracted mode conditions relative to the lighter head
end:
trigger means adjacent the hand grip and connected to the
actuator rod, effective in response to pull on the trigger, to
move said actuator rod to said retracted mode condition: and
igniting means supported on said outer extension in position to
engage and rotate the rim of said flint wheel and depress said
valve actuator to ignite the lighter in response to movement of
the actuator rod to its said retracted mode condition.
^.r^^',iA
1. In combination for use with a pump for introducing fiuid
to a receiver and for controlling the pressure of the fluid intro-
duced by the pump to the receiver, the pump having detent
means,
an output line for passing the fluid from the pump to the
receiver,
a resilient diaphragm connected in the output line for con-
straint in accordance with the pressure of the fluid in the
line,
means movable with the diaphragm for obtaining the pro-
duction of an output indication when the pressure of the
fluid in the output line has reached a particular level,
a housing holding the output line, the diaphragm and the
movable means, and
detent means on the housing for co-operating with the de-
tent means on the pump for releasably holding the housing
in a particular fixed relationship with the pump.
Re. 31,317
RARE EARTH-COBALT SYSTEM PERMANENT
MAGNETIC ALLOYS AND METHOD OF PREPARING
SAME
Nobuo Imaizumi, and Kazuo Wakana, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Namiki Precision Jewel Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Original No. 4,221,613, dated Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 6„024, Jan.
24, 1979. Application for reissue Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No.
209,664
Gaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 3, 1978, 53-015518
Int. C\} HOIF 1/02
U.S. a. 148—103 7 Qaims
1. Permanent magnetic alloys comprising 11.5-12.5% rare
earth components of which 6.3-12% is samarium and 0.5-6.2%
in yttrium; 0.2-2.5% hafnium, [19.5-26.5%] 105-26.5%
iron, 7-10.5% copper, and 52-[70.7%] 70.8% cobalt, the
ranges of the aforesaid components being in atomic ratios.
2. A method of preparing the alloys of claim 1 comprising
the steps of melting raw material containing said components,
solidifying the resulting melt, pulverizing the resulting ingot
into powders having a grain size of 1-50 /im, compacting the
powders after magnetic field orientation thereof, sintering said
compacted powders at 1160''-I220° C. for 1-10 hours, cooling
the sintered body at a rate of at least V C./second at least until
the temperature is about 900° C, and then annealing the result-
ing bulk at 750° -900° C.
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
873
" Re. 31,318
AUTOMATIC MODULAR MEMORY ADDRESS
ALLOCATION SYSTEM
Phillip A. Kaufman, Saratoga, Calif.; Kenneth C. Gorman, Boul-
der, Cok).; George C. Henry, Mission Viejo, and Roy
Blacksher, Cupertino, both of Calif., assignors to Computer
Automation, Inc., Irvine, Calif.
Original No. 4,025,903, dated May 24, 1977, Ser. No. 395,548,
Sep. 10, 1973. Application for reissue May 23, 1979, Ser. No.
41,746
Int. a.3 G06F 13/06: GllC 5/06. 7/00, 9/00
U.S. a. 364—200 51 Qaims
tt^, I y^v^'k^
[ ' ^n i| -^; "' -p "
"'" If- -'--~=ii\ ■•— ----=;r -~^^ - - 1
address signal and in accordance with the starting and
ending address signals of the associated memory unit, for
enabling said individual memory unit to select a memory
cell therein corresponding to said selected absolute ad-
dress only when said selected absolute address lies within
the local range of the associated memory unit.
Re. 31,319
DIGITAL DATA COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
Alexander G. Eraser, Bernardsville, N.J., assignor to Bell Tele-
phone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Original No. 3,749,845, dated Jul. 31, 1983, Ser. No. 175,678,
Aug. 27, 1971. Application for reissue Feb. 25, 1980, Ser. No.
123,970
Int. a.' H04J 3/16
U.S. a. 370—80 19 Claims
7. In a digital computer having a processing unit and a sys-
tem for selectively addressing individual memory cells for a
memory bank having a plurality of separate memory units,
each said memory unit being replaceable by memory units con-
taining a different number of memory cells.^br storing informa-
tion in or for reading information from such cells in accor-
dance with a corresponding selectable absolute address signal
generated by said processing unit to represent an absolute
address, the combination of:
a plurality of memory capacity signal sources [associated
with] located on said memory units on a one-to-one basis,
each signal source supplying a signal representing the
memory cell capacity of the memory unit with respect to
which said last mentioned signal source is associated; '
an auxiliary signal source for establishing an initial digital
starting address;
range setting means controlled by said plurality of said signal
sources for establishing a unique fixed digital starting
address for each individual memory unit
and for establishing a unique fixed ending address for each
individual memory unit in accordance with said unique
starting address and the memory capacity of said each
individual memory unit, and for generating signals repre-
senting said starting and ending addresses respectively;
and a plurality of range detectors associated with said mem-
ory units on a one-to-one basis, each such range detector
being controlled in accordance with a selected absolute
I — ^-^ -^-^
LOW ' TCMMWLi rMiitAi
i*n
) SWTC-M,
-/''.—
s«>ic.iiic
net""'*-
X, .■
...
— J,,
» . •••■•
...
— •,
1. A data transmission system for supporting data cells among
a plurality of digital devices, a data call being comprised of
randomly occurring bursts of data with intervening pauses, com-
prising means for virtually allocating transmission paths upon
request preparatory to establishing data calls from any of said
digital devices to any other of said digital [device] devices by
assigning to each call a description of transmission resources to
convey the data and means for activating said virtually allocated
transmission for [paths] path in accordance with the assigned
description only [when] upon determination that a data burst of
the call is actually transmitted.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 19. 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,069
MFNIATURE ROSE PLANT
Cecilia L. D. Bennett, 489 Minot Ave., Chula Vista, Calif. 92010
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,711
Int. a.J AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 9 1 Qaim
1. A new and distinct variety of miniature rose plant of
hardy, dwarf, bushy, much branched habit, substantially as
illustrated and described, characterized by buds and flowers
similar in coloring to the variety Tiffany a hybrid tea.
5,071
STRAWBERRY PLANT
Harold A. Johnson, Jr., Watsonville, Calif., assignor to DriscoU
Strawberry Associates, Inc., Watsonville, Calif.
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,774
Int. a.^ AOIH 5/03
U.S. a. Pit.— 48 1 Qaim
1. The new and distinct strawberry plant herein described
and illustrated, and identified by the characteristics enumer-
ated above. --
5,070
MINIATURE ROSE PLANT
Cecilia L. D. Bennett, 489 Minot Ave., Chula Vista, Calif. 92010
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,538
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 9 1 Oaim
1. A new and distinct variety of miniature rose plant of
hardy, dwarf, bushy, much branched habit, substantially as
illustrated and described, characterized by buds and flowers
similar in coloring to the variety Perfume Delight a hybrid tea;
and further characterized by a low growing; compact plant of
miniature proportions.
5,072
CALLISTEMON BOYETTE'
John A. Blaser, 7605 N. Tuttle Ave., and Robert J. Boyette,
2340 Tallevast Rd., both of Sarasota, Fla. 33581
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,676
Int. CI.' AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 54 1 Qaim
1. The new and distinct variety of Callisiemon viminalis,
substantially as herein shown and described, characterized
particularly as to novelty by an extreme weeping habit and
persistent year-round blooming.
S75
PATENTS
GRANTED JUL. 19, 1983
ERRATA
For See
CLASS PATENT NO.
604-115 4,393,870
604-055 4,393,871
604-151 4,393,872
604-151 4,393,873
135-109 4,393,887
192-099 4,393,907
1 04-069 4,394, 1 73
585-667 4,394,255
264-004 4.394,287
524-776 4,394,307
377-105 4,394,587
3 1 5-280 4,394,605
PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,393,519
COMBINATION VISOR AND SWEATBAND
Norman J. Nicastro, 6210 E. Jenan, Scottsdale, Ariz. 85254
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,793
Int. a.3 A61F 9/04
U.S. a. 2—12 8 Qaims
1. Headgear adapted for use with an eyeshield of the type
including eye protecting lenses supported on a lens frame worn
by a user, said headgear comprising:
(a) a head band adapted to encircle the head of the user and
positionable in retained relationship thereon on a person's
head, at least a portion of said head band being con-
structed of a material which is elasticized and stretchable
and moisture absorbent said portion forming a section
adapted to bear on and closely conform to the forehead of
the user;
(b) a flexible visor attached to said head band at said section
and extending along its entire length from the head band
forwardly therefrom, said visor having an outer edge;
(c) fastener means on said visor adapted to engage the said
lens frame whereby said visor is extendable and securable
between the head band and said frame to form a protective
shield fully extending in the peri-ocular area between the
forehead of the user and the frame, with said eye protect-
ing lenses held in a position whereby moisture accumula-
tion on the lenses is minimized and the entire peri-ocular
area is substantially shielded from solar rays.
of material, said stuffing being divided into two segre-
gated divisions;
(d) means extending about the perimeter of said first and
second sheets of material for enclosing the two divisions
of said stuffing therebetween;
(e) means for securing said first and second sheets of material
against one another intermediate the divisions of said
stuffing and transverse to said apparatus to form two parts
of said apparatus fiexibly juxtaposed with one another by
said two sheets of material;
(0 first strap means attached to one of the parts of said
apparatus for encircling the user's forearm; and
(g) second strap means attached to another of the parts of
said apparatus for encircling the user's upper arm, said
first and second strap means operating in concert to main-
tain continuingly during use of said apparatus and secur-
ing means positionally coincident with the crook of the
arm to permit flexing of said apparatus commensurate
with bending of the arm;
whereby, said apparatus is retainable adjacent the crook of a
user's arm by said first and second straps to cushion the crook
of the arm and distribute any loads placed thereon and without
impeding blood circulation or restricting elbow movement.
1. Apparatus for distributing loads in the crook of a user's
arm to avoid impeding blood circulation on placement of a
load at the crook of the arm and without restricting elbow
movement, said apparatus comprising in combination:
(a) a first sheet of flexible material;
(b) a second sheet of flexible material;
(c) stuffing disposed intermediate said first and second sheets
4,393,521
DISPOSABLE GARMENT SHIELD AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURE
Carolyn R. Jones, 2818 S. Poplar Way, Lake Oswego, Oreg.
97304
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 250,918
Int. a.' A41D 27/12: D05B 97/00
U.S. CI. 2—56 28 Qaims
4,393,520
ELBOW PILLOW
Coral A. Koch, 2067 W. Rainbow Ridge, Tucson, Ariz. 85745
1 1 Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 345,026
1 1 Int. C1.3 A41D 13/08
U.S. a. 2—16 5 Qaims
1. A disposable garment shield for positioning under the arm
of the user in the sleeve area of a garment being worn,
said shield having a first side adapted to be secured to the
garment being worn and a second moisture absorbent side,
said shield having a transverse fold line thereacross,
said shield being folded toward said second side from said
fold line up to a location longitudinally removed from said
fold line, and reversely folded beyond said location expos-
ing said second side and causing said shield to be de-
pressed between lateral ends of said fold line forming a
concavity adapting said shield to fit the underarm of the
user.
4,393,522
ANKLE GARTER WITH FOOT STIRRUP
Diane M. Calabrese, 9710 Roosevelt Blvd., Philadelphia, Pa.
19115
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,275
Int. a.3 A41F 1/00: A41D 1/06
U.S. a. 2—336 4 Claims
1. An article to hold a pants 1^ in place on the foot for ease
of insertion into a sock, boot or the like comprising an open
ended garter band adapted to adjustably wrap around the
877
878
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
bottom of the pants adjacent the ankle of the foot, a U-shaped
longitudinally elastic stirrup having legs affixed to said garter
band inwardly of the free ends of said garter band, the length
of said garter band between the jwints on connection of said
stirrup legs to said garter band being longitudinally elastic, and
means at the opposite faces of said garter band adjacent its free
/ J
4^93,524
SELF-CONTAINED SEWAGE WASTE DISPOSAL
SYSTEM
Qifton F. Briner, Lafayette, Ind.; William R. Bocchini, Wyck-
off, and Brian Wilcockson, Long Beach Island, both of N.J.,
assignors to American Standard, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,595
Int. a.J E03D 5/016
U.S. a. 4—317 19 Qaims
» M 22
14-
ends mating by fmger pressure to releasably close said garter
band, said means including a fuzz portion on the inner face of
said garter band adjacent one free end thereof and a mating
hook portion on the outer face of said garter band adjacent its
other end whereby when said ends are overlapped and pressed
together said fuzz and hook portions will releasably interen-
gage.
4,393,523
TUB nLLING AND SHOWER VALVE
Werner Nolden, Wittiich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
American Standard Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser, No. 363,695
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 30,
1981, 3113615
Int. a.3 E03C 1/04
U.S. CI. 4—192 2 Qaims
1. A self-contained sewage waste disposal system compris-
ing; a housing structure, a toilet bowl adapted to receive
human waste and fluid for diluting the waste, transporting the
waste and rinsing the bowl, a removable filter cassette in the
housing in communication with the toilet bowl, means for
flushing the bowl and dumping the contents into the filter
cassette and for subsequent refilling of the bowl, filter means in
the cassette for separating the coarse and fine particles of solid
material from the fluid received from the bowl, storage means
in the cassette to store the solid material in a compact manner
for subsequent disposal upon removal of the cassette, pump
means including interconnected conduits in the housing to
transport fluid from the interior of the system to fill the bowl
after a flush, to transport filtered fluid from the filter cassette to
a position for recirculation, and control means to pass the fluid
through the system to facilitate the collection and disposal of
sewage waste within the system in a predetermined sequence.
1. Tub filling and shower valve comprising a pivotable tub
inlet assembly including a change-over valve means for direct-
ing the flow of water from a tub mode to a shower mode, said
change-over valve means having a pair of superimposed con-
trol discs, one of which is a seating disc having a throughput
opening coupled to a water discharge mixing chamber and the
other control disc being rotatably mounted on said seating disc
and having two throughput openings which are adapted to be
aligned with said throughput opening of said seating disc, a
control bushing rotatably mounted in a housing of said valve
and having a pair of conduits, one end of which is coupled to
said throughput openings of said rotatable disc with the oppo-
site end being coupled to a shower outlet by one of said con-
duits of said control bushing and said other conduit being
coupled to said pivotable tub inlet means of a lateral discharge
opening in said control bushing.
4,393,525
HEAT-CONTROLLED SANITARY BATHING DEVICE
Kenshi Kondo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nihon Den-Nitsu
Keiki Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 330,950
Int. a.3 A47K i/20
U.S. a. 4—420,2 5 Qaims
1. In a water-closet apparatus with a heat-controlled bathing
system, including a heater for heating feed water to a predeter-
mined temperature, a bidet portion having nozzle means
adapted for spraying heated water supplied from said heater, a
pump for feeding water to said heater and nozzle means, and a
valve means for controlling the flow rate of water to said
heater, the improvement which comprises:
July 19,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
879
said control valve means comprising a tubular valve casing
defining axially contiguously aligned discharge, supply
and recirculating chambers therein; an inlet port provided
in said valve casing at a location so that feed water from
said pump may be supplied to said supply chamber there-
through; a discharge port provided in said valve casing at
a location so that feed water in said discharge chamber
may be fed to said heater therethrough; a recirculating
port provided in said valve casing at a location so that the
feed water in said recirculating chamber may be recircu-
lated to the suction side of said pump; main and auxiliary
valve seats provided in said valve casing at positions
between said discharge and supply chambers and between
said supply and recirculating chambers, respectively; a
valve plug axially movably accommodated in said supply
chamber and having main and auxiliary valve faces coop-
erable with said main and auxiliary valve seats, respec-
tively, for controlling the rate of water flowing there-
through, said valve plug being constantly urged to engage
said main valve face with said main valve seat; and a valve
stem threaded into said valve casing for axial movements
and having a portion adapted for abutting engagement
with said valve plug for displacing said valve plug so that,
by turning said valve stem, feed water supplied to said
supply chamber from said pump may be admitted into
either one or both of said discharge and recirculating
chambers; and
said heater comprising an outer vessel; an inner vessel defin-
ing a primary chamber therein and placed inside of said
outer vessel to define a secondary chamber therebetween;
a water feed pipe extending between said primary cham-
ber and said outlet port of said water control valve; an
opening provided in an upper portion of said primary
chamber so that said primary chamber is in fluid commu-
nication with said secondary chamber; first and second
heating means for heating water in said primary and sec-
ondary chambers to predetermined temperature levels,
respectively; a heated water feed means extending be-
tween said secondary chamber and said nozzle means; and
~ means for stopping operation of said pump when the
water temperature in said secondary chamber exceeds said
predetermined temperature level.
4,393,526
POOL CLEANING APPARATUS
Paul B. IVJiller, 6513 Temba Dr., and Tony C. R. Miller, 6484
DuSault Dr., both of San Jose, Calif. 95119
Filed Not. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,928
Int. a.3 B08B 9/Oi; E04H 3/16
U.S. a. 4—490 11 Claims
~-i
1. A pool cleaning apparatus for attachment to a pressurized
inlet of a swimming pool, the apparatus comprising:
(a) a main body portion provided with a chamber;
(b) first means coupling said main body portion to said inlet
such that pressurized water may flow from said inlet into
said chamber;
(c) a pressure relief valve coupled to said main body portion
for selectively venting said pressurized water within said
chamber;
(d) an elongated, flexible primary cleaning hose having a
first end coupled to said main body portion and opening
on said chamber, whereby pressurized water from said
chamber may flow out a second end of said hose;
(e) a nozzle submerged below the surface of the water con-
tained by said swimming pool to direct a flow of water
towards said water surface; and
(0 second means coupling said nozzle to said main body such
that pressurized water from said chamber may flow out of
said nozzle, wherein said second means is adjustable to
permit the angle and direction of the flow of water from
said nozzle to be varied.
4,393,527
METHOD OF CONTROLLING NON-SOLAR SWIMMING
POOL HEATER
Robert M. Ramey, North Hollywood, Calif., assignor to Tele-
dyne Industries, Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 220,377, Dec. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,368,549.
This application Sep. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 418,5^6
Int. a.' E04H i/16, 3/18
U.S. a. 4—493 1 Qaim
H L
*"••• »■••• C^acc ► I ^^^ Tawo tbwi— »^w— - iX^.,
1. A method of controlling a non-solar heater to provide
supplemental heating for a solar-collector heated swimming
pool, comprising the steps of:
providing solar collectors;
connecting the solar collectors to heat the water in the
swimming pool, whereby the collectors establish an opti-
mum daily water temperature vs. time profile when full
solar energy is available;
connecting the non-solar heater to heat the water in the
swimming pool;
providing a non-solar heater temperature vs. time profile
which closely approximates the optimum profile; and
controlling the non-solar heater to heat the pool water in
accordance with the non-solar heater temperature vs. time
profile, whereby the non-solar heater acts to supplement
the solar collectors to that the water temperature closely
approximates the optimum temperature profile when full
solar energy is not available.
4,393,528
ADJUSTABLE TRAMPOLINE TYPE POOL AND HOT
TUB COVER
Trent W. West, P.O. Box 956, Aptos, Calif. 95003
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,414
Int. aJ E04H 3/16
U.S. a. 4—498 17 Qaims
1. A cover for covering pools comprising:
at least one hinge for mounting to a rigid support adjacent
the pool;
a hinge arm pivotally mounted in such a hinge for pivoting
880
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
between open and cover pool positions, the arm having an
axis and first and second ends, the arm being pivotable at
the first end thereof about a pivot axis defined in the hinge,
the arm being capable of movement through a predeter-
mined angle of rotation away from a plane that is substan-
tially normal to the pivot axis;
a clamp at the second end of the arm, the clamp having an
axis oriented at a predetermined clamp angle relative to
the axis of the arm;
a hoop having a perimetral shape conforming to and circum-
scribing the pool, said hoop secured in the clamp, an
interior hoop area being defined by the perimeter of the
hoop; and
a panel for covering the pool and secured to the hoop and
spanning the interior hoop area thereof, the clamp angle
and the angle of rotation of said hinge arm in combination
allowing for adjustment of the hoop in the clamp in accor-
dance with the shape of said hoop such that when the
panel covers the pool the hoop lies in a horizontal plane.
4,393,529
INVALID CHAIR
Elizabetb Britz, 2303 First Street, New Port Richey, Fla. 33552
Filed Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,468
Int. a.3 A61G 1/02. 1/04. 7/02
U.S. a. 5—81 R 5 Qaims
1. A two-part invalid chair, comprising:
an elongated, tubular frame having an open inner area
bounded by a U-shaped, tubular, head-supporting portion
on a first end and a U-shaped, tubular, foot-supporting
portion on a second end with a first leg of said head por-
tion connected to a first end of a first tubular, fiank-sup-
porting portion whose second end is connected to a first
leg of said foot-supporting portion and with a second leg
of said head portion connected to a first end of a second,
tubular, flank-supporting portion whose second end is
connected to a second leg of said foot-supporting portion;
a body supporting web suspended in said open inner area of
said frame and mounted to said U-shaped head-supporting
portion, said flank-supporting portions and said U-shaped
foot-supporting portion;
a first horizontal trough mounted to a support base, having
a semi-circular cross section which conforms to the shape
of said first tubular, flank-supporting portion of said frame
and a second horizontal trough mounted to said support
base, having a semi-circular cross section which conforms
to the shape of said second tubular, flank-supporting por-
tion of said frame, for removably mounting said flank-sup-
porting portions to said support base;
said first and second flank-supporting portions of said frame
being in a substantially, mutually parallel relationship at a
predetermined separation distance;
said first and second horizontal troughs being mounted to
said support base in a substantially, mutually parallel rela-
tionship at said predetermined separation distance for
removably mounting said respective flank-supporting
portions thereto;
a first clamp mounted to said first horizontal trough of said
base, for clamping said first flank-supporting portion of
said frame thereto;
a second clamp mounted to said second horizontal trough of
said base, for clamping said second flank-supporting por-
tion of said frame thereto;
a first upper trough mounted to a first end of said first hori-
zontal trough, having a semi-circular cross section which
conforms to the shape of said first leg of said U-shaped,
tubular, head-supporting portion of said frame and a sec-
ond upper trough mounted to a first end of said second
horizontal trough, having a semi-circular cross section
which conforms to the shape of said second leg of said
U-shaped, tubular, head-supporting portion of said frame,
for removably mounting said head-supporting portion
thereto;
said first and second upper troughs being mounted to said
respective first and second horizontal troughs in a mutu-
ally spaced relationship for removably mounting the tubu-
lar contours of said respective first and second legs of said
head-supporting portion of said frame into said semi-circu-
lar contours of said respective upper troughs;
a first clamp mounted to said first upper trough of said base,
for clamping said first leg of said head-supporting portion
of said frame thereto;
a second clamp mounted to said second upper trough of said
base, for clamping said second leg of said head-supporting
portion of said frame thereto;
said first leg of said U-shaped head-supporting portion of
said frame being hingedly mounted to said first end of said
first flank-supporting portion and said second leg of said
U-shaped head-supporting portion of said frame being
hingedly mounted to said first end of said second flank-
supporting portion;
said first upper trough of said base being hingedly mounted
to said first end of said first horizontal trough and said
second upper trough of said base being hingedly mounted
to said first end of said second horizontal trough;
a first lower trough mounted to a second end of said first
horizontal trough, having a semi-circular cross section
which conforms to the shape of said first leg of said U-
shaped, tubular, foot-supporting portion of said frame and
a second lower trough mounted to a second end of said
second horizontal trough, having a semi-circular cross
section which conforms to the shape of said second leg of
said U-shaped, tubular, foot-supporting portion of said
frame, for removably mounting said foot-supporting por-
tion thereto;
said first and second lower troughs being mounted to said
respective first and second horizontal troughs in a mutu-
ally spaced relationship for removably mounting the tubu-
lar contours of said respective first and second legs of said
foot-supporting portion of said frame into said semi-circu-
lar contours of said respective lower troughs;
a first clamp mounted to said first lower trough of said base,
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
881
for clamping said first leg of said foot-supporting portion
of said frame thereto; and
a second clamp mounted to said second lower trough of said
base, for clamping said second leg of said foot-supporting
portion of said frame thereto.
4,393,530
PILLOW
Lucille Stark, Pine Village II, Box 127, Hobart, Ind. 46342
1 1 Filed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,300
I i Int. a.' A47G 9/00
U.S. a. 5—437 1 Qaim
>-Z2
4,393,531
LINER FOR A WATER BED
Eugenio D. Model, 71 Upper Toyon, Kentfield, Calif. 94904
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,388
1 1 Int a.' B65D 5/36: A47C 27/08
U.S. O. 5—451 5 Qaims
1. In a waterbed which comprises a liquid containing mat-
tress disposed in a frame, the improvement comprising a liner
for a waterbed, the liner being adapted to be installed in the
frame prior to installing the mattress therein, the liner compris-
ing:
a planar bottom panel of a flexible water tight material;
a plurality of upstanding side walls secured to the periphery
of said bottom panel thereby forming a container for
containing therein a mattress, said side walls being
adapted to encircle said mattress; and
each of said upstanding side walls having two equal sections,
defined by rigid panels completely enclosed by a water-
proof sheet, the two equal sections of each of said side
walls being separated by a seam that permits folding of the
structure, said water-tight material of all of said side walls
being secured to said bottom panel in a fluid tight manner.
4,393,532
METHOD FOR CONTINUOUS DELUSTERING HIGH
TEMPERATURE TREATMENT OF A TEXTILE
PRODUCT AND AN APPARATUS THEREFOR
Yoshikazu Sando, and Hiroshi Ishidoshiro, both of Wakayama,
Japan, assignors to Sando Iron Works Co., Ltd., Wakayama,
Japan
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,427
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1980, 55-49292;
Apr. 15, 1980, 55-50632[U]
Int. Cl.^ D06B 3/12
U.S. a. 8—149.1 9 Qaims
J
1. A pillow comprising:
a pillow body having elevated opposed end parts, an ele-
vated side part extending laterally between said end parts,
said end parts and side part defining a generally "U"
shaped frame and a depressed center part extending be-
tween said end parts and said side part;
a second pillow body fitted in said depressed center part of
said pillow body providing a top surface substantially
even in elevation with said side part and said end parts;
atid
said second pillow body being connected to the side of said
side part proximate to said depressed part for pivotal
movement of said second pillow body out of said de-
pressed center part against said elevated side part for
support thereby in a position elevated above said end parts
and side part.
^ f - - I ^- -V,
Miiiri|ii!,i,ii/i!i;i''i,iijiii!i;:,i|jr ■
V n 'IVTi
r\..^
JVE~
/^J
1. A method for continuous delustering high temperature
treatment of a textile product comprising subjecting a textile
product such as yarns, a strip and a cloth to be treated to
steaming while transporting the textile product continuously
through a steamer body maintained with a high temperature
wet heat under an elevated pressure, guiding the textile prod-
uct over a plurality of cloth guide rolls provided in the steamer
body, and maintaining a water film between each of the guide
rolls and the textile product guided therewith for preventing
that the surface of the textile product is lustered.
2. An apparatus for the continuous delustering high tempera-
ture treatment of a textile product comprising a high pressure
steamer, a plurality of axially extending cloth guide rolls lo-
cated within said steamer and arranged to transport the textile
product continuously through the steamer body, said cloth
guide rolls arranged to move the textile product in an up and
down zigzag path through said steamer with the textile prod-
uct passing around and in contact with said cloth guide rolls,
means for maintaining a high temperature wet heat within said
steamer, means for supplying heated water to at least certain of
said cloth guide rolls, and said cloth guide rolls each including
means for maintaining a water film between each said cloth
guide roll and the textile product guided thereover.
4,393,533
DEVICE FOR LAP-JOINT ENGAGEMENT OF TWO
BRIDGE ELEMENTS ON INTRADOS OR EXTRADOS
AND BRIDGE ELEMENT COMPRISING IT
Michel E. Terrien, and Claude Bouvet, both of Angers, France,
assignors to Etat Francais, Paris, France
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,782
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 21, 1980, 80 18257
Int. a? EOID 15/14
U.S. CI. 14—2.6 12 Claims
1. A device for permitting the lap joint connection of two
bridge elements, a lower bridge element and an upper bridge
element, on intrados or extrados, the lower bridge element
t>eing capable of becoming the upper bridge element and vice
versa, comprising:
882
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a means for centering the two bridge elements with respect
to each other when they assume an overlapping configu-
ration; and
a means for connecting the two bridge elements, the con-
necting means comprising at least two retractable studs
belonging to the first bridge element and located on axes
124 (^
I2fr-
tially compressed to establish an effective working diameter
for said brush means which is less than said maximum effective
working diameter, and guide means for maintaining the align-
ment of said brush means and said sleeve means, said guide
means comprising a central guide rod on said sleeve means, a
guide tube aligned with said guide rod mounted on said brush
oblique with respect to the surface of the first bridge
element, the tow studs being adapted to cooperate with at
least two recesses in a second bridge element, the recesses
having the same inclination with respect to the surface of
the second bridge element as the studs have with respect
to the surface of the first bridge element.
4,393,534
FLOOR CLEANING AND POLISHING MACHINE
Jeffrey A. Lee, Crystal, and Mike J. Todd, Eagan, both of
Minn., assignors to H. B. Fuller Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,000
Int. a.5 A47L 11/162
U.S. a. 15—98 15 Qaims
means, said guide rod being telescopically received in said
aligned guide tube such that said guide rod extends out of only
one end of said guide tube whereby the effective length of said
guide means can be varied by moving said guide rod into and
out of said guide tube, and a handle connected to the top of said
guide rod.
4,393,536
DUAL MODE VACUUM CLEANER
Ruel W. Tapp, P.O. Box 449, Tomball, Tex. 77375
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,515
Int. C\? A47L 5/14
MS. a. 15—327 C
4 Claims
1. Apparatus for mechanically varying the speed of a disk
driven rotationally about an axis by a power source, compris-
ing:
(a) means for supporting the disk relative to the axis, said
supporting means being rotatably disposed about the axis;
(b) means for imparting rotational motion to said supporting
means directly from the power source and at a fixed
speed;
(c) a variant speed element mounted for rotation about the
axis and geared from the power source to a different
speed;
(d) means for selectively keying said supporting means to
one of said direct rotational motion imparting means and
said variant speed element.
4,393,535
ADJUSTABLE BRUSH
Paul Kunz, Bern, Id. 83220
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,748
Int. a.3 A46B 9/10
U.S. a. 15—169 15 Claims
15. A circular brush having an adjustable effective working
diameter comprising brush means having radially projecting
flexible bristles and annular sleeve means having a diameter
less than the diameter of said radially projecting bristles, said
sleeve means being selectively, axially movable between a first
position in which said sleeve means is retracted away from the
bristles of said brush means whereby said bristles project freely
in the radial direction to establish a maximum effective work-
ing diameter for said brush means, and a second position in
which said sleeve means is extended to at least partially sur-
round said brush means whereby said bristles are at least par-
1. A vacuum cleaner apparatus comprising
(a) an elongated canister which confines an electric motor,
air-moving means driven by said motor, and filtration
means adapted to remove particulate material from air
moved through said canister by said air-moving means,
(b) front and rear closure means associated with each end of
said canister,
(c) a vacuum port positioned within said front closure
means,
(d) an exhaust port positioned within said rear closure
means,
(e) said vacuum and exhaust ports communicating with the
interior of said canister and adapted to permit facile con-
nection thereto of conduits,
(0 means associated with the underside of said canister to
facilitate movement over a horizontal surface,
(g) means associated with the upper side of said canister for
releasable attachment to a tubular member,
(h) a rigid tubular member having first and second extremi-
ties,
(i) a first flexible conduit adapted to communicate between
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
883
said vacuum port and the first extremity of said tubular
member,
(j) a floor-cleaning device comprised of a housing which
encloses a second electric motor and rotary brushes
driven by said motor, means associated with the lower-
most surface of said housing to facilitate movement over a
horizontal surface, an inlet port positioned in the upper-
most surface of said housing and communicating with a
conduit which extends to an opening adjacent the lower-
most surface of said housing, and an exit port positioned in
a side surface of said housing, said exit |X)rt serving to
engage the second extremity of said tubular member,
(k) and a second flexible conduit, shorter than said first
flexible conduit, adapted to attach at one end to said ex-
haust port and at its opposite end to said inlet port when
said canister is attached to said rigid tubular member in a
manner such that said front closure means is upwardly
directed.
4,393,538
SCRUBBER WITH FOAM AND SPRAY SUPPRESSOR
Donald L. Olson, Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to Tennant
Company, Minneapolis, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 72,826, Sep. 6, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 185,651
Int. a.^ A47L 11/204
U.S. a. 15—320 19 Qaims
4,393,537
POWER BROOM WITH AUGER AND VACUUM DEBRIS
CONVEYOR
Layton J. Reprogle, and Truman B. Reprogle, both of St. Louis
County, Mo., assignors to All Temp Engineering Inc., St.
Louis, Mo.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,812
Int. a.^ EOIH 1/04
U.S. a. 15—348 8 Qaims
L
1. A power broom for removal of debris from a surface
comprising a housing, a rotary brush mounted within said
housing for rotation about a horizontal axis, said housing sub-
stantially enclosing said brush with the lower portion of said
brush being exposed for brushing engagement with said sur-
face, said brush being driven in such direction as to propel
debris from said surface upwardly within said housing, the
latter including a portion thereof adjacent said brush for re-
ceiving and collecting said debris picked up and propelled by
said brush within said housing, an outlet for said debris within
said housing, an auger positioned within said housing and
extending generally transversely thereof for positively convey-
ing said debris to said outlet, vacuum means in communication
with said outlet for vacuum conveying said debris from said
outlet, a plurality of wheels for rollingly supporting said power
broom, means for driving said brush, said auger, and certain of
said wheels, a handle connected to the rear of said housing and
extending rearwardly therefrom, means operable in response
to movement of said handle relative to said housing between
first and second positions to cause said housing to be moved
relative to said rear wheels and relative to said surface between
an inoperative mode in which the rear wheels are not driven
and in which said brush is lifted clear of said surface, an opera-
tive mode in which the rear wheels are driven in forward
direction and in which said brush operatively engages said
surface.
1. A scrubbing machine comprising:
a body;
wheels rotatably affixed to said body;
tank means for containing scrubbing solution, said tank
means comprising a single recovery tank;
means for conveying said solution from said tank means to
the surface to be scrubbed;
means for working the solution on the surface;
vacuum squeegee means for recovering said solution from
the scrubbed surface;
means for conveying said solution from said squeegee means
to said tank means; said conveying means including a
vacuum fan and duct means, said vacuum fan providing
sufficiently high velocity to pick up said solution from the
surface, said velocity being sufficiently great that substan-
tial foaming would occur in said tank means if said veloc-
ity were maintained throughout said duct means; said duct
means having an entrance cross section area to an exit
cross sectional area ratio sufficient to substantially reduce
the necessary high velocity of the solution at the squeegee
means to a critical lower velocity which minimizes foam-
ing and spraying, wherein at least a portion of said duct
means has a substantially uniformly increasing cross sec-
tional area whereby said solution velocity is reduced
sufficiently to avoid development of foam and spray as
said recovered solution is conveyed to said tank means.
4,393,539
OVERHANDLE FOR ENCLOSING A DENTAL TOOL
HANDLE OR SHANK
Bernard Weissman, New York, N.Y., assignor to Ipco Corpora-
tion, White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,664
Int. CI.' B25G 3/38
U.S. a. 16—114 R 15 Claims
1. An overhandle for enclosing a cylindrical end portion of
a rotatable dental tool, comprising:
884
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
two mating semi-cylindrical elongated first and second sec-
tions having respective first and second forward end faces,
said forward end faces being confrontingly opposed to
each other in an opened condition of said overhandle, and
said forward end faces being in a single plane in an assem-
bled closed condition of said overhandle with said sections
disposed against each other to define an elongated cylin-
drical body capable of being rotated;
a pair of hinges interconnecting said forward end faces to
provide a one piece construction and to permit said sec-
tions to pivot from said opened condition to said closed
condition;
an elongated channel respectively provided in each of said
sections to define first and second channels, each of said
channels extending respectively through said first and
second forward end faces, said channels being in axial
alignment with each other in said opened condition, said
channels matingly confronting each other in said assem-
bled closed condition to define an internal chamber with a
forward end having an opening therethrough, said cham-
ber receiving the cylindrical end portion of the tool
therein with a remaining portion of the tool axially extend-
ing through said chamber opening in said forward end;
said hinges being spaced apart with one of said hinges being
disposed on one side of said chamber opening and the
other hinge being disposed on an opposite side of said
chamber opening to permit the remaining portion of the
tool to extend between said hinges without any interfer-
ence therefrom;
first means in at least one of said sections for preventing axial
extraction of the end portion of the tool from said cham-
ber;
second means in at least one of said sections for rotating the
end portion of the tool when said overhandle is rotated;
releasable coupling means for retaining said sections to-
gether in said assembled closed condition to enclose the
end portion of the tool therein and for permitting said
sections to be pivoted into said opened condition to re-
move the end portion of the tool therefrom;
said sections having respective first and second rear end
portions including rear end faces remote from said for-
ward end faces to provide said overhandle with a rear end
when in said assembled closed condition; and
said coupling means including at least one locking member
extending outwardly from said first rear end portion, and
at least one recess located in a corresponding position in
said second rear end portion for receiving said locking
member in said assembled closed condition.
equipment having on each side thereof facing each of said limb
sections a recess and a projection, the projection on one side is
aligned along an axis with the projection on the other side,
each of said limb sections including a first part connected at
one end to said web section and a separate second part pivot-
ally connected to the other end of said first part, said first part
including a pin for transversely releasably engaging into said
recess of said equipment and a longitudinally extending recess,
said projection being inserted into the longitudinal recess and
then slidably moved in the longitudinal direction in the longi-
tudinal recess when said handle is moved in a direction parallel
to the longitudinal direction to thereby maintain said handle in
an upright position conjointly with said pin while allowing said
handle to pivotally rotate about the axis when said pin is disen-
gaged from said equipment recess, and means for urging the
portion of said second part adjacent to said first part toward
said equipment, said second part being engageable with said
projection after said projection is inserted and slidably moved
in the longitudinal direction in said longitudinal recess to pre-
vent said handle from detaching from said equipment recess if
said handle is moved in a direction opposite to the longitudinal
direction and disengageable from said projection when pvio-
tally rotated about a pivot against said urging means to allow
said handle to be detached from said equipment by being
moved in a direction opposite to the longitudinal direction.
4,393,540
DETACHABLE HANDLE HAVING A PIVOTAL PART
Toshiharu Yamamoto; Manabu Sato, both of Yokohama; Kat-
suya Akiba, Abiko, and Koreyoshi Abe, M atsudo, all of Japan,
assignors to Victor Company of Japan, Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,552
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 16, 1980, 55-
100335[U]
Int. a.5 B25G 3/18
U.S. a. 16—114 R 4 Qaims
» A
4,393,541
HINGE FOR DEPLOY ABLE STRUCTURES SELF
LOCKING HINGE
Edward J. Hujsak, La Jolla, and Hans M. Stocker, San Diego,
both of Calif., assignors to General Dynamics Corporation/-
Convair Div., San Diego, Calif.
Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,752
Int. a.^ E05F 1/12
U.S. CI. 16—297 11 Claims
1. A detachable carrying handle comprising a web section
and a pair of parallel limb sections extending in a longitudinal
direction for carrying a portable equipment, said portable
<K>
1. A hinge having structural members attached thereto for
positioning said structural members in a folded, back-to-back
position and in an aligned deployed position comprising,
a pair of hinge members pivotly connected together, said
hinge members form a bifurcated hinge construction,
, biasing means connecting hinge members together and bias-
ing said hinge members in both a folded and an unfolded
position, said biasing means is located on the center line of
said structural members and wherein said pivotal connec-
tion is offset said center line and located to allow said
hinge members to fold to a position where said hinge
members are back-to-back,
a trigger mechanism and a locking mechanism on said hinge
members,
said trigger mechanism holding said locking member in an
inoperative position when said hinge is in all but its un-
folded position and triggering said locking mechanism to
lock said hinge members together when said hinge is in its
unfolded position.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
885
1 1 4,393,542
POLYCENTRIC HINGE FOR CAST-BRACES
Gonzalo Martinez, P.O. Box 12304, Bogota, Colombia
, , Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,485
1 1 Int. a.^ E05D 7/00
U.S. a. Ifr— 369 3 Qaims
>
4,393,544
KRILL PEELING MACHINE
James M. Lapeyre, New Orleans, La.; Noel A. Svendsen, Mar-
blehead; Raymond J. Carroll, Jr., Pinehurst. both of Mass.;
Henry H. Long, River Ridge, La., and Richard S. Lindberg,
Shrewsbury, Mass., assignors to The Laitram Corporation,
New Orleans, La.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,709
Int. CI.' A22C 29/02
U.S. CI. 17—73 10 Qaims
I )
l^ A hinge for a knee brace including an elongated element
attachable to a leg above the knee and a further elongated
element attachable to the leg below the knee, said element
being interconnected by a multi-fiexible linkage comprising
individual links pivotally interconnected in zig-zag manner and
a cable anchored at one end to one of said elongated elements
and threaded through the zig-zag links.
SHRIMP
4,393,543
PROCESSING AND HANDLING APPARATUS
Roger C. Martin, 1392 Lenora Dr., Merritt Island, Fla. 32952
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,901
Int. Q.' A22C 29/00
U.S. Q. 17—72 19 Qaims
1. A mechanism for orienting shell bearing curled shrimp
body parts and for successively discharging the oriented body
parts therefrom comprising a pair of elongated inclined cylin-
drical rolls that are laterally spaced apart and arranged in
parallel to define a channel in which the body parts are re-
ceived and supported during the orientation thereof, said chan-
nel being inclined and having an upper end at which the body
parts are received, and a lower end from which the body parts
are discharged, each of said cylindrical rolls having a smooth
cylindrical surface, means for rotatably driving said rolls in
opposite directions that provide for the upward passage of the
cylindrical surfaces thereof at the space between said rolls,
means for feeding randomly arranged shell bearing curled
shrimp body parts into the channel at said upper end, at least
one of said cylindrical rolls having an elongated narrow
groove in its cylindrical surface; said elongated groove being
arranged in parallel with the axis of rotation of said one roll
and during each revolution thereof to facially confront at the
space between the rolls a portion of the smooth cylindrical
surface of the other of said rolls, said one roll having a ledge
forming surface that projects generally radially inwardly of the
smooth cylindrical surface thereof and defines the trailing side
of said groove; said ledge being arranged when said rolls are
being driven to encounter the lower side edge of the shell of a
shrimp body part that is supported on the rolls with its ventral
side confronting said space therebetween and to flip the en-
countered body part over onto its dorsal side in the channel
defined by said rolls.
1. A krill peeling machine comprising:
a bank of pairs of peeling rolls having peeling nips therebe-
tween with their major axes transverse to the path of fiow
of a supply of krill to be peeled,
means for oscillating said peeling rolls causing said nips to
engage and peel krill,
said banks of peeling rolls being at a declination from the
horizontal of from 20° to 30° and having a loading and
discharge end,
leveling means at the loading end of said peeling bank for
distributing the krill substantially evenly across the peel-
ing nips of the rollers to provide a layer of krill in contact
with the peeling nips,
krill longitudinal guide means spaced transversely along the
major axes of the peeling rolls to maintain a uniform
distribution of krill transversely of the axes of the peehng
rolls,
and water means positioned to supply water means so that
the water acts as a peeling lubricant between the krill and
peeling nips and also as a conveyor to promote progress of
the krill down the bank of p>eeling rolls as a Huid conveyor
bed the speed of progress of which can be varied depend-
ing on the size and age of the krill.
4,393,545
PROCESSING OF SEA URCHINS
Brian F. O'Donnell, 4 Nerissa St., Burwood, 31325, Victoria,
Australia
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,330
Qaims priority, application Australia, Dec. 4, 1979, PE1598
Int. Q.3 A22C 29/04
U.S. Q. 17—76 8 Qaims
1. A tool for cracking the shells of sea urchins and like
shelled creatures, characterised by a blade formed with a cen-
tral recess which enables the blade to penetrate the shell of the
886
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
sea urchin in the region of the mouth thereof without causing
significant damage to the internal organs or roe of said sea
urchin, said blade having cutting edges extending upwardly
and outwardly from either side of said recess.
4,393,546
OYSTER SPLITTER
Jorge M. Ruiz, Rte. 1, Box 30, Fletcher La., Walker, La. 70785
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,401
Int. a.^ A22C 29/04
U.S. a. 17—76 1 Qaim
1. A device for splitting oyster and clam shells, comprising:
(a) a support, which includes a base and a frame, the base
further including an enclosure for positioning the oyster
or clam; and
(b) shell-splitting means including a first bar pivotally con-
nected to the frame, and a second bar substantially perpen-
dicular to the first bar. one end of the second bar fastened
to the first bar, the second bar including at its other end a
hard, substantially conical edge; the first bar fastened to
and substantially perpendicular to a third bar which is
coaxial with a bearing fastened to the frame, whereby the
first bar is capable of free rotation about the axis of the
third bar.
4,393,547
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE OUTPUT
CONTROL IN A CARDING MACHINE
Fritz Hosel, Monchengiadbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,677
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 3,
1979, 2944428
Int. OX? DOIG 15/40. 15/48; DOIH 5/42
U.S. a. 19—105 8 Qaims
1. In a carding machine including a doffer, a first motor for
driving said doffer, a feed roller and a second motor for driving
said feed roller; the improvement comprising an apparatus for
controlling the output and the sliver density in said carding
machine; said apparatus having
(a) a first motor regulator connected to said first motor;
(b) a second motor regulator connected to said second mo-
tor;
(c) a first desired value setter for said doffer, connected to
said first motor regulator;
(d) a second desired value setter for said feed roller, con-
nected to said second motor regulator;
(e) a memory connected to said first and second desired
value setters for feeding setting signals therefrom into said
memory;
(0 a first switch having first and second positions for selec-
tively connecting said first motor regulator to said first
value setter or to said memory; and
(g) a second switch having first and second positions for
selectively connecting said second motor regulator to said
second value setter or to said memory.
4,393,548
FOLDED HEAD CABLE TIE AND METHODS FOR
MAKING AND USING THE SAME
Philip J. Herb, Somerville, N.J., assignor to Thomas & Beits
Corporation, Raritan, N.J.
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,263
Int. Cl.^ B65D 63/00
U.S. a. 24—16 PB 16 Claims
1. A self-latching tie comprised of a resilient elongate mem-
ber having an end extent of folded walls defining a box-like
head, said member having a body extent extending integrally
and continuously with one wall of said head through an open-
ing in another wall of said head and defining a tail, said head
having a longitudinal passage therethrough bounded on op-
posed sides by walls of said member end extent inclusive of said
one wall for receiving said tail, said head and said tail having
respective complemental engagement means for securing said
tail in such head passage.
4,393,549
SUPPORT CLIP FOR A DROPWIRE OR THE LIKE
Ignazio Leonardo, Mountainside, N.J., assignor to Diamond
Communication Products, Inc., Garwood, N.J.
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,857
Int. a.3 F16G 11/02
U.S. a. 24—115 A 6 Qaims
1. As an ariicle of manufacture, a support clip for a dropwire
or the like, comprising a formed unitary blank of ductile metal
sheet, the planiform of the blank being a peripherally continu-
ous elongate rectangular frame surrounding a central open
rectangular window region, said frame comprising two elon-
gate parallel legs and two shori end legs integrally connecting
the longitudinal ends of said elongate legs, the length of said
elongate legs along the length of said window region being at
July 19,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
887
least twice the length of said short end legs along the width of
said window region, like longitudinally central obtuse-angle
bends in each of said elongate legs, whereby the span between
end legs is less than the length of said elongate legs but is
nevertheless greater than the length of said short end legs, the
width of said window being sized for accommodation of the
width of dropwire to be secured to a support and said span
between end legs being greater than the combined double
4,393,550
SAFETY CLASP FOR THE STRING OF FOOTWEAR
James Yang, and James M. F. Chen, both of No. 206, Li Hsing
Rd., Taichung City, Taiwan
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,369
Int. a.^ F16G 11/00
U.S. CI. 24—117 2 Qaims
A01 201
1. A sa
102
103 101
tion of said mount; and said knot member being detachable
from said mount by adjusting said flat protruding head in
alignment with said shaped perforation of said mount.
thickness of the dropwire, whereby a loop of the dropwire may
be inserted through the window within said span with portions
of the dropwire on both sides of the loop in adjacency to the
combined extent of double the dropwise thickness, further
whereby the clip may then be secured by crimping said end
legs toward each other to reduce said span and in compressed
squeezing engagement with said dropwire portions to perma-
nently retain the loop, with said longitudinally central bends
permanently reduced from said obtuse angle.
4,393,551
ROTATABLY ENGAGING HEAD FOR FASTENER
Burnell J. Wollar, Barrington, III., and Richard J. Schwind,
Akron, Ohio, assignors to Phillips Plastics Corp., Phillips,
Wis.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,139
Int. Q.^ A44B 77/00
U.S. Q. 24—213 R 5 Qaims
1. In a resilient fastener for attaching a complementary panel
member to a support member, said panel member and said
support member each including an aperture, said fastener
comprising: a head of larger diameter than said panel member
aperture, said head including an upperside, an underside and a
circumferential edge; a shank extending from said underside of
said head; said head having a slit extending radially inwardly
from said circumferential edge of said head; and a lead-in
tongue spaced above and generally parallel to said upperside of
said head, said lead-in tongue being connected to said upper-
side of said head along one side of said slit for the mtroduction
of said head into and through said panel member aperture as
said fastener is rotated relative to said panel member aperture,
said lead-in tongue circumferentially overlapping and substan-
tially covering said slit for its entire length and overlapping a
portion of said upperside of said head.
4,393,552
JEWELRY CLASP RETAINING MEMBER
Charles Frankel, Brooklyn, N.Y., assignor to Laurel Enter-
prises, Rahway, N.J,
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,531
Int. Q.5 A44B 11/25: A44C 5/18
U.S. Q. 24—213 C 9 Qaims
ety clasp for the string of footwear comprising a
fastening member and a knot member, said knot member hav-
ing a lower portion transversely perforated with a hole, an
extending rod portion, and a flat protruding head the height of
which is larger than the diameter of said extending rod portion,
said extending rod portion being between said lower portion
portion and said flat protruding head; said fastening member
comprising a tube having two bores, a compression spring
within said tube, a pin at each end of said tube biased by said
spring, and each pin having a bore substantially corresponding
in size to said bore of said tube, and a mount perpendicular to
said tube, said mount having a shaped perforation correspond-
ing in size to the thickness of said flat protruding head and to
the diameter of said extending rod portion so as to receive said
flat protruding head and extending rod portion of said knot
member therethrough as in the form of a keyed rod, whereby
a knot is obtained by passing the opposite ends of said string of
the footwear through the aligned bores of said tube and said
pins upon said pins being depressed in said tube and further
passing said ends in an opposite direction through the perfora-
tion in said lower portion of said knot member, and still further
inserting said head of said knot member through the perfora-
1. In a jewelry clasp having a female housing, a male mem-
ber for insertion into said housing, and locking means for
releasably locking said male member within said housing, an
improvement comprising:
retaining means mounted on said male member for effecting
unidirectional passage of said male member through a
jewelry mounting aperture associated with an article of
jewelry so that the article of jewelry is retained on a chain
connected to said male member;
said retaining means including a resilient clip; and
said clip including outwardly bowed resilient sections later-
ally extending from opposing sides of said male member.
888
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,553
LOCKING DEVICE FOR A SAFETY BELT
Franz Wier, Goggingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,921
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 25,
1980, 3006939
Int. a.' A44B 11/25
U.S. a. 24—230 AL 5 Qaims
4,393,555
BELT LOCK FOR A SAFETY BELT
Fbhl, Schorndorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa Fein-
stanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,039
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 2,
1980, 3012939
Int. a.3 A44B 11/26
U.S. CI. 24—230 A
L^U.
^
6 Claims
1. Locking device for a safety belt comprising a belt lock
having two spaced plates defining an insertion path, a plug-in
tongue attached to a belt for insertion in the insertion path, a
latch movable transversely to the direction of the insertion of
the plug-in tongue to detent the inserted tongue, a pressure
element movable manually against the force of a spring to
move the latch transversely out of the detent position, a spring-
activated sliding ejector disposed in the insertion path ahead of
the tongue, a stop connected with the pressure element to halt
the ejector from contacting the tongue when in the detent
position, said stop movable with the pressure element and
concurrently moves away from blocking said ejector when
said pressure element moves said latch out of the detent posi-
tion.
4,393,554
LOCKING DEVICE FOR SAFETY BELTS
Franz Wier, Goggingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, /.l.'Jorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,922
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 25,
1980, 3006972
Int. a.' A44B 11/26
1. Lock for a safety belt comprising a belt lock having a
lock-housing with an insertion path, a plug-in tongue with an
engagement detent only at one side at a longitudinal edge for
insertion in the insertion path of the lock-housing, a latch
mechanism having a latch for engaging the detent of the plug-
in tongue inserted in the insertion path, said tongue having a
guide-profile at its forward end, seen in the profile direction,
said insertion path having a mating surface which fits the
guide-profile of said tongue only when correctly inserted, a
pressure element movable against the force of a spring to move
said latch out of engagement with said tongue to permit with-
drawal of the tongue from the belt lock, and wherein the
plug-in tongue is provided with a wart-like, stamped projec-
tion which is raised above the tongue's fiat side, and which is
guided loosely with play in a groove-like bulge in the housing.
4,393,556
PLASTIC BUCKLE
Takuo Yuda, Yokohama, and Akira Mizusawa, Fujisawa, both of
Japan, assignors to Nifco, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,325
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 18, 1980, 55-
51812[U]
Int. Q\? B65D 6i/00
U.S. a. 24—230 AL
3aaims U.S. Q. 24— 230 R
6 Claims
1. Locking device for a safety belt comprising a belt lock
having two spaced plates defining an insertion path, a plug-in
tongue attached to a belt for insertion in the insertion path, a
latching bolt having an engagement surface movable trans-
versely to the plug-in direction of the plug-in tongue to block
withdrawal of the tongue by contact of said engagement sur-
face with a straight edge surface of said plug-in tongue, said
straight edge surface changing its shape upon the belt being
subjected to a load and said engagement surface of said latch
contoured to complement the shape of said edge surface under
load to thereby provide increased contact area between said
latching bolt and said plug-in tongue under load conditions.
1. A plastic buckle comprising two discrete, totally separa-
ble half buckle members each having a longitudinal dimension
and a lateral dimension, a first half buckle member having a
belt-insertion slit along one lateral edge thereof and a second
buckle member having another belt-insertion slit along one
lateral edge thereof opposite said one lateral edge of said first
buckle member, said first buckle member including a first snap
engaging means and a fulcrum creating upstanding wall region
formed near one lateral edge thereof including a retention
ledge located at an uppermost extremity of the fulcrum creat-
ing upstanding wall region, said second buckle member includ-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
889
ing a second snap engaging means adapted for snapping en-
gagement with said first snap engaging means and fulcrum
engaging portion formed near a lateral edge wherein said
fulcrum engaging portion is adapted to be caught by said reten-
tion ledge, whereby the two buckle members are assembled
into one complete buckle by positioning the fulcrum engaging
portion of the second buckle member adjacent the fulcrum
creating upstanding wall region with the first buckle member
angularly disposed relative to the second buckle member, then
rotating the two buckle members toward each other with the
point of contact of the two buckle members serving as the
fulcrum of rotation and snapping the two buckle members into
fast union by resiliently engaging the first snap engaging means
of the first buckle member with the second snap engaging
means of the second buckle member.
4,393,557
SAFETY BELT BUCKLE
Yves Schmidt, Audincourt, France, assignor to Aciers et Outil-
lage Peugeot, Audincourt, France
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,383
Claims priority, application France, May 14, 1980, 80 10826
Int. Cl.^ A44B 11/25
U.S. CI. 24—230 A 5 Claims
surface come in contact with each other by elastic deformation
of said articulation means.
4,393,558
FASTENER FOR SHEET MATERIAL
Karl J. Herwegh, and Rutger Modderkolk, both of Eerbeek,
Netherlands, assignors to Nederlandse Pillo-Pak Maatschap-
pij B.V., Eerbeek, Netherlands
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,334
Claims priority,, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28,
1980, 3024471
Int. CI.' A44B 79/00
U.S. a. 24—230 R 7 Claims
'X
13 '9
20 30 29 '' Ji^fTrH.J'
H
3» 4-^-16 ^»i-
'«' T (?jv • y
1. In a safety belt buckle for attaching a portion of a safety
belt to retaining means through a tongue member constituting
a latch, said buckle comprising a case, a support for fixing to
the retaining means and disposed in the case, the support hav-
ing two spaced-apart walls, locking means for the latch, the
locking means being disposed between said walls, articulation
means mounting the locking means on said walls of the support
so that the locking means are pivotable on said walls of the
support about an axis, stop means movably mounted on the
support, the locking means defining a first abutment surface
cooperative with the latch to retain the latch in a locked posi-
tion, the locking means defining a second abutment surface
adapted to bear against the stop means, a control knob cooper-
ative with the stop means for withdrawing the stop means and
releasing the locking means, the support defining a comple-
mentary abutment surface, the locking means defining a third
abutment surface adapted to be applied, in a locked position of
the buckle, against said complementary abutment surface when
a tensile force exceeding a predetermined value is exerted on
the latch in a direction for extracting the latch; the improve-
ment wherein said locking means define a predetermined space
therebetween and each of said walls of the support, said articu-
lation means project from opposite sides of the locking means
and extend through said spaces and into said walls of the sup-
port whereby a force for shifting the locking means relative to
said walls of the support in a direction perpendicular to said
axis would elastically deform said articulation means on oppo-
site sides of the locking means, spacer means being provided
for maintaining said spaces between the locking means and said
walls of the support so that, when said tensile force is exerted,
said third abutment surface and said complementary abutment
1. In a device for the detachable mounting of flexible sheets,
comprising a plurality of molded members of synthetic resin,
connectible in pairs with each other, clamping the sheet be-
tween them, wherein one molded member is adapted to be
attached as the base part to a substrate and the other molded
member can be detachably mounted on the base part, and
wherein a spike for passing through the sheet extends from a
base plate of the base part; the improvement in which the spike
has a cylindrical spike body and an annular fiange carrying a
conical spike tip. and the other molded member is a slip-on
member comprising a two-legged clamping fork, the fork legs
of which are secured together at one end and spaced apart at
the other end and have a least spacing from each other which
is somewhat less than the outer diameter of the spike body, the
inner lateral surfaces of said fork legs having at least one recess
wherein the spike body locks into place when the legs of the
clamping fork are slid lengthwise between said flange and said
base plate with said legs straddling said spike body.
4,393,559
U-BOLT CLAMP WITH TUBULAR REINFORCING
MEANS
John E. Heckethorn, Dyersburg, and Danny J. Whittle, Newb-
ern, both of Tenn., assignors to Heckethorn Manufacturing
Company, Dyersburg, Tenn.
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,237
Int. CI.' B65D 6i/00
U.S. CI. 24-277 7 Qaims
3*
1. A U-bolt clamp saddle body formed from a single folded
blank of sheet metal, including a pair of spaced parallel U-bolt
leg receiving housings, a central web section having an arcuate
lower edge extending between said housing, and an integral
tubular reinforcing rib extending from one said housing to the
890
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
other on said web and forming the top face thereof, said rein-
forcing rib being of triangular cross section and having a pla-
nar top face between two of the verticies defined by said tri-
angular cross section, the third vertex defined by said triangu-
lar cross section of said rib being located between the top face
and said arcuate lower edge.
4,393,560
CLIP FOR RETAINING A WINDSHIELD MOLDING IN
AN AUTOMOBILE
Yoshinori Kato, Aichi, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Togo Seisakusho, Japan
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272^25
CTaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 28, 1980, 55-
91203[U]; Apr. 15, 1981, 56-54910[U]
Int. a.^ B60J 1/00; E06B 3/58
U.S. a. 24—295 10 CI"""
fastening means formed on one side of said base plate portion
and adapted for snap engagement with the automobile body, at
least one radiator grille fastening means formed on the other
side of the base plate portion and adapted for snap engagement
with the radiator grille, and three ribs comprising a first rib
disposed diametrically of said recess and a pair of ribs spaced
on either side of said first rib, each of said pair of ribs having an
arcuate outer lateral surface and positioned surrounding said
radiator grille fastening means, and a fastening attachment
point formed on the radiator grille and provided with an open-
ing formed opposite the radiator grille fastening means of the
fastener and adapted to admit into snap engagement therewith
said radiator grille fastening means, said radiator grille fasten-
ing attachment point having an annular recess adapted to admit
the rib of the fastener into intimate contact therewith.
4,393,562
APPARATUS FOR IMPARTING VISUAL SURFACE
EFFECTS TO RELATIVELY MOVING MATERIALS
Jimmy L. Stokes, Moore, S.C, assignor to Milliken Research
Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 227,828
Int. a.' D06C 23/00
U.S. a. 26—2 R 13 Claims
1. A clip for retaining a molding to a predetermined inside
face of a window glass receiving frame in an automotive body
comprising
a band-like support plate formed of an elastic matenal;
a flexible hook member formed integrally with said support
plate for defining a space for insertion of said molding
between said window glass receiving frame and said hook
member, said hook member being elastically engageable
with said molding;
a pair of wing plates formed at the outermost ends of said
support plate, said wing plates being flexible relative to
the center of said support plate;
means for releasably retaining said wing plates substantially
parallel with the center portion of said support plate; and
means for disengaging said wing retaining means upon inser-
tion of said molding into said space between said window
glass receiving means and said hook member;
said wing clips having at least equal spring force as that of
said hook member.
4,393,561
RADIATOR GRILLE HXING STRUCTURE
Takuo Yuda, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nifco, Inc.,
Yokahama, Japan
Filed Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 164,506
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 5, 1979, 54-91897[U]
Int. a.3 E04B 1/38
U.S. a. 24-297
3 Oaims
1. A fixing structure for fastening a radiator grille to an
automobile body, comprising in combination a fastener com-
posed of a base plate portion, at least one automobile body
1. In apparatus for pressurized heated fluid stream treatment
of a relatively moving substrate material to impart a change in
the appearance thereof and including an elongate fluid distnb-
uting manifold assembly disposed across the path of relative
movement of the material and closely adjacent the surface
thereof for discharging at least one discrete stream of heated
pressurized fluid against the surface of the material; the im-
provement wherein said manifold assembly comprises
first and second elongate manifold housings defining corre-
sponding first and second fluid-receiving compartments
extending across the path of relative movement of the
material;
said first housing including inlet means for introducing pres-
surized heated fluid into said first compartment generally
uniformly along its elongate length, outlet means located
remotely from said inlet means for discharging heated
fluid from the compartment generally uniformly along its
elongate length, said first housing inlet and outlet means
defining a flow path through said housing which is gener-
ally perpendicular to its length, the axis of fluid flow
introduced into said first compartment by said inlet means
and the axis of fluid flow discharged from said first com-
partment by said outlet means being substantially parallel;
said second manifold housing including inlet means for
receiving pressurized heated fluid into said second com-
JULY 19, 983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
891
partmcnt generally uniformly along its length, fluid
stream discharge outlet means in said second housing for
directing said at least one stream of fluid against the sur-
face of the substrate material, said second housing inlet
and outlet means defining a flow path of heated fluid
through said housing which is generally perpendicular to
its length;
and means attaching said second housing to said first hous-
ing, with said outlet means of said first housing communi-
cating with said inlet means of said second housing, and
with the axis of discharge of said fluid stream discharge
outlet means disposed at a substantially right angle to the
heated fluid flow path through said first manifold housing.
4,393,563
COED FORCED SINTERED POWDER METAL
ANNULAR BEARING RING BLANKS
David T. Smith, 2619 W. Pratt Blvd., Chicago, III. 60645
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,931
Int. Cl.^ B21K 1/04
U.S. a. 29—149.5 DP 13 Oaims
' inoii . ; f £«"5- , ' OSAfM't , ' LUBE
■foimf" Aiiotss "otKH- "onat
■t^'C-,
PB0POftT**LLV MtX
POWK" WIEBIALS
COUWCT ittTO
0«E£S WffOSW
l«
SINTER I
• NNEAi 1'
*
SEfMAIE rOKCED BIA
,K«IO WNER AND
» NO Blanks
(HliE«
SEMING
ftOCL EORM OU'EB
9£AP'N0 BLANK TO
flNISttDWtlSWfE
ROLL fORM INNER
BEAPiNO Blank to
IFINISttEO Si;{lSf«fE
' flNiSME:? Outer
BEARING RING '
rtNSHEO INNER
HEAR'NO RING
1. A method for the manufacture of improved bearing ele-
ments, without high temperature forming which comprises the
following steps:
(1) combining (a) powders consisting substantially of iron
with (b) ferro-alloy powders each containing a maximum
of 80% by weight iron and the balance of each alloying
powder being either manganese, nickel, chromium, mo-
lybdenum, or vanadium, (c) graphite powder, and (d) a
lubricant,
(2) mixing the resulting combination,
(3) compacting the resulting mixture to produce a preform,
(4) pre-sintering the preform,
(5) coating the sintered preform with a stop-off coating and
lubricant,
(6) cold forging the coated and lubricated preform to
achieve a plastic deformation of at least 50%, through a
combination of lateral and vertical flow and produce an
article being at least 98% dense and approximating the
shape of the finished article,
(7) resintering the cold forged shape,
(8) annealing the resintered shape, and
(9) roll forming the annealed and resintered shape into sub-
stantially final dimensions.
4,393,564
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REPAIRING HEAT
EXCHANGERS
John E. Martin, Penllyn Pike, Springhouse, Pa. 19477
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,189
Int. a.' B23P 15/26
U.S. a. 29—157.3 C 15 Oaims
1. Apparatus for use in plugging a tube in a heat exchanger
having a bundle of tubes mounted at opposite ends in spaced
tube sheets comprising:
a plug assembly adapted to be installed inside one end of the
tube in the zone of one of said tube sheets, said plug assem-
bly including an expandable ring and a wedge mounted in
the ring and slidable relative thereto to expand the ring
radially outward against the inside of the tube;
breakaway means connected to said wedge and projecting
into said tube;
pull rod means connected at one end to said breakaway
means and extending lengthwise of said tube beyond the
other of said tube sheets;
compression tube means engaged at one end with said ring
and surrounding said pull rod means inside said heat ex-
changer tube and extending therealong from said ring into
proximity with the other tube sheet;
ram means disposed adjacent said other tube sheet for apply-
ing tension to said pull rod means and compression to said
compression tube means while maintaining said plug as-
. sembly aligned with its tube sheet;
whereby upon application of tension and compression the
wedge is drawn into the ring until a predetermined outward
pressure is reached causing the breakaway means to separate
for affording withdrawal of the compression tube means and
pull rod means from inside the heat exchanger tube.
4,393,565
METHOD OF MAKING A WATER-COOLED
ELECTRODE HOLDER
James G. Wilson, II, Huntington, and P. Fred Hammers. Bar-
boursville, both of W. Va., assignors to Wilson Welding Com-
pany, Inc., Huntington, W. Va.
Division of Ser. No. 148,290, May 9. 1980, Pat. No. 4,342,878.
This application Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,888
Int. CV B23P 15/26: H05B 7/105
U.S. O. 29—157.3 R 4 Oaims
1. A method of making an electrode holder of the type
comprising a U-shaped slab of metal with a circuitous passage-
way therethrough for the flow of cooling water, comprising
blind drilling a plurality of straight holes at right angles to each
other through two adjacent edges of a flat slab of metal with a
plurality of said holes intersecting each other, bending said flat
slab to U-shape in a direction such that the holes extending in
one direction are bent to U-shape but the holes at right angles
thereto remain straight and to an extent such that the legs of
the U-shaped slab remain flat so that portions of the holes bent
in a U-shape form straight passages, plugging the ends of said
straight passages, and plugging certain of said holes that re-
1032 0.<3.— 35
892
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
main straight intermediate their length between certain adja-
cent U-shaped holes, in such a pattern as to leave a single
4,393,567
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE ASSEMBLY OF
LONG OBJECTS ON A ROTATING SHAFT
Lennart Disborg, Linkoping, Sweden, assignor to FFV Industri-
produkter AB, Eskilstuna, Sweden
Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,276
Claims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 17, 1980, 8007313
Int. CV B23P 17/00, 11/02: F16D 19/00
U.S. a. 29—421 R 14 Qaims
i§ 2' « •! *
1 ■
r:
*i
1,
I
~
jl
i_,.
>
f
rJ
■„".'I
ll'.l"
t;:;'J:
V
Ul
v> .
*^-^ ■ . - . -. V 1
circuitous passageway through the slab having an inlet end and
an outlet end opening edgewise through the slab.
4.393,566
PROCESSING OF COPPER TUBING
Otto L'himann, Burgdorf, and Klaus-Peter Uhlmann, Bad Iburg,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Kabel-und Metall-
werke Gutehoffnungshutte AG, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,297
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 5,
1980, 30036
Int. CI.' B23P 17/00: B21B 9/00
U.S. a. 29—417 26 Qaims
1. Method for the assembly of long objects on a rotating
shaft by using two expander bushings of the kind made up of a
sealed body with an inner collar and an outer collar which
form a pressure cavity between them filled with a pressure
medium, and which has a means for pressurizing the pressure
medium in the pressure cavity, and where the expander bush-
ings each have a flange arranged to lie against each end surface
of the long object which shall be assembled, characterized by
that an axial hole is recessed partially into the flange of each
expander bushing from the surface directed towards the col-
lars, the hole being connected to a channel leading to the
pressure cavity, and a corresponding axial hole is led through
the long object which shall be assembled, and the expander
bushings are first assembled to the end surfaces of the long
object so that the expander bushings axial hole coincides with
the axial hole through the long object, the axial holes and
channels being filled with the same pressure medium as in the
pressure cavity, whereby a hydraulic system is established
between the unit comprising the expander bushings and the
long object which shall be assembled.
15. A method for processing copper tubing following sizing
under utilization of a drawing oil, comprising the steps of
passing copper tubing through a furnace for annealing,
whereby drawing oil deposits evaporate;
applying suction to the trailing end of the tubing so that
evaporated oil deposits are removed through said trailing
end; providing another such tubing having a front and a
trailing end;
connecting the front end to the trailing end of the first-men-
tioned tubing under utilization of a hollow plug in order to
obtain a string of tubing;
applying suction to the trailing end of the other tubing so
that vapK)rs can be removed through the latter's end;
continuing the annealing during the connecting step, and
repeating the providing, connecting, and applying steps to
obtain a continuous process on a continuous string of
tubing; and
cutting the resulting, continuous string of tubing into shorter
lengths.
4,393,568
METHOD FOR ATTACHING WOODEN FORMS TO A
CONCRETE SURFACE
Ramon Navarro, 10138 E. Rush St., South El Monte, Calif.
91733
Division of Ser. No. 30,071, Apr. 16, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,755
Int. CV B23P 11/00
U.S. CI. 29—432 * Claims
1. A method of forming a tilt-up concrete wall panel com-
prising: aligning wooden form members on a horizontal slab of
set concrete to define a length and width of a tilt-up concrete
panel, placing a plurality of brackets in abutment with the
exterior surfaces of the wooden form members, each of the
brackets having a vertical side plate abutting the outer surface
of the adjacent wooden form member and a horizontal base
plate perpendicularly disposed relative to the side plate and
extending outwardly from the adjacent wooden member in
abutment with the top surface of the horizontal slab, said
vertical side plate having a first pair of alignment apertures and
a second pair of staple receiving apertures, driving a fastener
through an aperture in the base plate to attach the base plate to
the horizontal slab, positioning a pair of alignment probes of a
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
893
staple gun into said first pair of apertures to align a staple with 4,393,570
said second pair of apertures, and driving said staple through METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CUTTING STRIPS
FROM LONG PLATES
Georg Frick, Giinzburg; Harro Reiff, Leipheim, and Alois
Kirsch, Giinzburg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Karl Mengele & Sohne Maschinenfabrik und Eissengiesserei
GmbH & Co., Gunzburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,643
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 15,
1979, 2950555
Int. CI.' B26D 11/00: B23D 15/04
U.S. CI. 29—560 14 Claims
said second pair of apertures in the side and plate into the
adjacent wooden form member.
4,393,569
METHOD OF INSTALLING DEFRACTORY CERAMIC
! FIBER MODULE
Carlisle O. Byrd, Jr., Houston, Tex., assignor to J T Thorpe
Company, Houston, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 146,116, May 2, 1980, abandoned. This
japplication Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,877
Int. CI.' B23P 3/00. 19/04
U.S. CI. 29—460 13 Claims
^<
1. A method of installing refractory ceramic fiber module,
composed of a folded blanket of refractory ceramic fiber ex-
tending between two end folds and having attachment mem-
bers extending outwardly from said folds, to a support tube
which supports a metal member during movement of the mem-
ber in a furnace comprising the steps of:
(a) wrapping the blanket of the module about the tube; and
(b) attaching the attachment members to the tube.
1. Method for cutting strips from long plates such as sheet
metal plates including supporting a plate to be cut at a cutting
station on an elongated stationary support surface, forming a
cutting line along the length of the plate extending along an
edge of the support surface, movably positioning a shear stand
along the length of the plate in the cutting station adjacent the
side of the plate from which a cut strip is to be cut and along
the edge of the stationary support surface, providing a mov-
able cutter and a stationary cutter on the shear stand with the
movable cutter having a length which is relatively short com-
pared to the length of the support surface so that the length of
the support surface is a multiple of the length of the movable
cutter, arranging the shear stand at one end of the cutting line
and displacing the movable cutter toward the stationary cutter
to effect a first cut, moving the movable cutter away from the
stationary cutter and then moving the shear stand for the
dimension corresponding to the lenglth of the movable cutter
for making the next cut, moving the movable cutter toward the
stationary cutter to effect a second cut continuing from the
first cut and repeating the steps of moving the shear stand and
then moving the movable cutter toward the stationary cutter
until a length of plate has been completely cut. releasably
holding the portion of said plate to be cut adjacent to and
outwardly from the edge of the support surface as the movable
cutter is moved toward the stationary cutter and releasing the
cut portion after the cutting action has been completed, clamp-
ing the opposite side of the plate from the side being cut and
holding the plate during the continuation of the cutting opera-
tion, and supporting the portion of the plate already cut during
the continuation of the step-wise cutting operation along the
length of the plate to be cut.
4,393,571
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING AN ARC WELDED
SLEEVE
Werner Sturm, Allerheiligenstr. 624, Hagendorf, Switzerland
per No. PCT/CH79/00079, § 371 Date Jan. 29, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Jan. 10, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO79/01140, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 27, 1979
per Filed May 29, 1979, Ser. No. 192,526
Claims priority, application Switzerland, May 29, 1978,
5858/78
Int. CI.' B23P 22/00
U.S. CI. 29—564.6 7 Qaims
1. An apparatus for forming a welding sleeve of the type
having a coil of electrical resistance heating wire in spaced,
juxtaposed turns embedded in the inner wall of a thermoplastic
>
894
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
sleeve member and surrounding a cylindrical coil former,
comprising
means at opposite ends of the coil former defining first and
second clamp members;
means for winding the coil of wire around the former so that
the windings extend from said first clamp member to said
second clamp member;
first and second clamping bodies;
means for supporting said clamping bodies for movement
toward and away from said first and second clamp mem-
9
bers, respectively, so that said first clamping body can be
moved to engage said first clamp member after the wire
has been placed on said first member to attach the wire
thereto, and said second clamping body can be moved to
engage said second clamp member after the wire has been
placed on said second member to attach said wire thereto;
and
means operatively associated with said second clamping
body for severing said wire after attachment thereof to
said second clamp member.
4,393,572
METHOD OF MAKING LOW LEAKAGE N-CHANNEL
SOS TRANSISTORS UTILIZING POSITIVE
PHOTORESIST MASKING TECHNIQUES
Steven G. Policastro, Readington Township, Hunterdon County,
and Dae-Shik Woo, Hillsborough Township, Somerset
County, both of N.J., assignors to RCA Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed May 29, 1980, Ser. No. 154,601
Int. a? HOIL 21/86. 21/20
U.S. a. 29—571 8 Claims
Z^E^^
ft 34
layer where at least one island which will be used for
forming a transistor is located; and
(iii) removing the portions of the epitaxial silicon layer
which are not under the masking layer in order to leave
- the islands on the top side of the sapphire substrate;
wherein the improvement comprises:
(a) forming a transparent masking layer over the surface of
the silicon island and the exposed portions of the sapphire
substrate between the islands;
(b) applying a positive photoresist layer over the top surface
of the transparent masking layer;
(c) exposing the photoresist layer from the underside of the
substrate, whereby only those portions of the photoresist
layer which overlie the edges of the islands and those
portions of the photoresist layer which lie between the
islands will be exposed, but only those portions of the
photoresist layer which overlie the top surface of the
islands will not be exposed through the islands;
(d) developing the photoresist layer;
(e) removing only those portions of the transparent masking
layer which are on the sides of and between the islands
that are exposed when the photoresist layer is developed;
(0 removing the photoresist layer remaining on the unre-
moved portions of the transparent masking layer; and
(g) implanting conductivity modifying ions of a type oppo-
site to that of the source and drain regions into the ex-
posed edges of the islands.
4,393,573
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICE PROVIDED WITH COMPLEMENTARY
SEMICONDUCTOR ELEMENTS
Kotaro Kato, Chofu, and Tetsuma Sakurai, Hachioji, both of
Japan, assignors to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public
Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 181,357
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 17, 1979, 54/117873;
Mar. 4, 1980, 55/26177; Apr. 14, 1980, 55/48555
Int. a.^ HOIL 21/223
U.S. a. 29—571 5 Qaims
10
26 35 -
M M 2529 30 38 32 39 40 36 33 42
1. An improved method for forming an SOS PET device
having source and drain regions of a given conductivity type,
comprising the steps of:
(i) epitaxially growing a silicon layer on the top side of a
sapphire substrate;
(ii) forming a masking layer on the surface of the silicon
layer, the masking layer covering the area of the silicon
21 15 Ji 18 12 22 19 16 05
1. A method of manufacturing a compound semiconductor
device comprising the steps of:
applying a first mask layer onto one major surface of a
semiconductor substrate except a first local region, said
first mask layer having an upper layer and a lower layer of
the same material and an intermediate layer of a different
material having a first etching speed;
forming a first semiconductor layer of a first conductivity
type on the entire surface of said substrate by an epitaxial
growth process, said first semiconductor layer including a
single crystalline layer grown from said first local region
of said semiconductor substrate, and a polycrystalline
layer grown from said first mask layer;
forming a second mask layer of said same material on a
portion of said first semiconductor layer corresponding to
said first local region, said second mask layer being etch-
able by a solution which barely etches said intermediate
layer and being substantially thicker than said lower layer
of said first mask layer;
etching said first semiconductor layer by using said second
mask layer so as to leave only said single crystalline layer
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
895
having inclined surfaces determined by a crystal structure
of said single crystalline layer;
removing said second mask layer;
forming a layer containing an impurity of the first conduc-
tivity type at a high concentration over the entire outer
surface of said single crystalline layer;
forming a first insulating layer on said single crystalline
layer;
removing said first mask layer;
forming a second semiconductor layer of a second conduc-
tivity type over the entire surface of the substrate by
epitaxial growth process, said second semiconductor layer
mcluding a polycrystalline layer grown from said first
insulating layer and a single crystalline layer grown from
said semiconductor substrate;
selectively forming a third mask layer on the single crystal-
line layer of the second semiconductor layer;
etching said second semiconductor layer by using said third
mask layer so as to leave a single crystalline layer of the
second semiconductor layer on a second local region of
the semiconductor substrate thereby forming inclined
surfaces determmed by crystal structure of said semicon-
ductor substrate;
removing said third mask layer;
formmg a layer containing at a high concentration an impu-
rity of the second conductivity type on the entire outer
surface of the remaining single crystalline layer of said
second semiconductor layer and exposed surface of said
substrate;
forming a second insulating layer on a surface containing the
remainmg single crystalline layer of said second semicon-
ductor layer and exposed surface of said substrate;
forming a polycrystalline semiconductor layer on said sur-
faces of said first and second insulating layers;
removing said semiconductor substrate; and
forming semiconductor elements having complementary
characteristics in respective exposed single crystalline
layers by utilizing a surface formed by polishing as a major
plane.
4,393,574
METHOD FOR FABRICATING INTEGRATED CIRCUITS
Masafumi Shimbo, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Daini Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
I j Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,617
I I Int. CV HOIL 21/205. 21/208
U.S. a. 29—571 5 Claims
'i r-? '^s ">^ 'e^
that the top surface of the growth layer is at the same level
as the upper face of the substrate in the region adjoining
said concave portion; and,
fabricating semiconductor devices in said substrate and said
growth layer.
4,393,575
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURING A JFET WITH AN
ION IMPLANTED STABILIZATION LAYER
James L. Dunkley, Santa Clara, and Robert C. Dobkin, Ather-
ton, both of Calif., assignors to National Semiconductor Cor-
poration, Santa Clara, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 19,135, Mar. 9, 1979, abandoned, which is a
continuation of Ser. No. 716,049, Aug. 20, 1976, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 575.418, May 7, 1975,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 377,611, Jul. 9,
1973, abandoned. This application Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No.
284,664
Int. CI. HOIL 21/265
U.S. a. 29—571 8 Claims
50 44
1. The method of stabilizing the surface of a junction field
effect transistor having a gate region of a first conductivity
type material in a semiconductor body, a source region and a
drain region of a second conductivity type material in said
semiconductor body, and channel region of said second con-
ductivity type in said gate region and between said source
region and said drain region comprising the step of forming a
stabilization region over said channel region by ion implanta-
tion of a shallow layer material of said first conductivity type.
4,393,576
METHOD OF PRODUCING ELECTRICAL CONTACTS
ON A SILICON SOLAR CELL
Reinhard Dahlberg, Flein, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Licenta Patent- Verwaltungs-GmbH, Frankfurt am Main, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,927
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 26,
1980, 3036260
Int. CI.' HOIL 31/18
U.S. a. 29-572 7 Qaims
'y
f,»/'<'-^
-A".
J-
1. A method for fabricating integrated circuits comprising .-•-•'•
the steps of: ^
forming a concave portion having bottom and side faces on
a semiconductor single-crystal substrate; —
forming an insulating film on the faces of said concave por- •
tion except for at least one portion of the bottom face of
said concave portion;
forming a first semiconductor growth layer on the bottom 1- A method of producing electrical contacts on a silicon
face of said concave portion which is free of the insulating solar cell, comprising: stamping out a metal film or foil adher-
film by chemical vapor deposition using a mixture gas ing to one side of a carrier together with the carrier in the
containing semiconductor chloride and hydrogen such shapeof the contacts; and applying the sumped contact film or
896
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
foil to the silicon so as to be detached from the carrier and to
adhere to the silicon surface.
4,393,577
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURING THE SAME
Kazuo Imai, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Telegraph &
Telephone Public Corp., Japan
Division of Ser. No. 84,627, Oct. 12, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,759
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1978, 53-132253;
Oct. 27, 1978, 53-132254; May 24, 1979, 54-63252; Jun. 4, 1979,
54-69001
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/263: C25F 3/00
U.S. a. 29—576 B H Claims
4,393,578
METHOD OF MAKING SILICON-ON-SAPPHIRE FET
William R. Cady, Scotia; SePuan Yu, and John R. Eshbach, both
of Schenectady, all of N.Y., assignors to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 109,174, Jan. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,548
Int. CI.' HOIL 21/225. 21/308
U.S. CI. 29—576 B 3 Claims
'31a
PROTON ION IMPIANTATION
33
31c
34i
34b
fai
I
_Jk * »(l» !?» , ••'"
31 '
I
m m M « 37i '
. f ,1 ^ ' ' ' ' ^ ' ' '7"-
~r-T~ T
N »
1. The method of making a silicon-on-sapphire junction field
effect transistor structure comprising the steps of:
forming on a sapphire substrate lower and upper opposite
conductivity type silicon layers having given area dimen-
sions, said lower layer being lightly doped and said upper
layer moderately doped;
depositing on said upper silicon layer a layer of doped poly-
crystalline silicon and fabricating thereon a patterning
layer;
etching said polycrystalline silicon to undercut beneath said
patterning layer and define a gate conductor;
implanting impurity ions into exposed areas of said silicon
layers using said patterning layer as a mask, and removing
the latter;
annealing to activate said implanted impurity ions and result
in heavily doped source and drain regions which are
self-aligned with said gate conductor and have a channel
region therebetween, said annealing further diffusing
impurity atoms from said polycrystalline silicon gate con-
ductor to create a gate region of opposite conductivity
type as said channel region; and
depositing conductor metallizations on said source and drain
regions.
Ui I3i
^^
44b 43b
\ N ^
1. A method of manufacturing a semiconductor device com-
prising the steps of selectively implanting proton ions into a
principal surface of a P type monocrystalline silicon substrate;
heatmg said silicon substrate to form an N type monocrystal-
line silicon region;
anodizing said substrate to form a porous silicon region
extending m a thickness direction from the major surface
of said P type monocrystalline substrate except said N
type silicon region, said porous silicon region being
formed to contact with all side surfaces and at least a
portion of a bottom surface of said N type silicon region;
and
thermally oxidizing said porous silicon region for converting
the same into a porous silicon oxide region while at the
same time converting said N type silicon region into a P
type silicon region.
4,393,579
DEVICE FOR MOUNTING CHIP-TYPE ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS ON A SUBSTRATE
Godwin J. O. G. Van Hooreweder, Brugge, Belgium, assignor to
U. S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,802
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 25, 1980,
8001114
Int. a.3 B23P 19/00
U.S. a. 29—740 4 Claims
1. A device for mounting chip-type electronic components
on a substrate, comprising a table, a mounting head fixed to the
table, and means for positioning a substrate with respect to the
mounting head, characterized in that the mounting head com-
prises:
a guide fixed in position with respect to the table, defining a
single horizontal channel said guide having a vertical
passage therethrough,
a slide displaceably mounted in said guide for movement
along said channel only between a loading position and an
unloading position, and having a recess for accommodat-
ing and transporting a component, said recess having a
horizontal supporting surface and a vertical abutment face
for engaging a component being transported in the recess,
a suction device moveably mounted to be displaceable in a
vertical direction only, through said passage, and
means for displacing said suction device upward to pick up
a component from the slide when the slide is in the unload-
JULY 19^ 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
897
OS
ing position; and then when the slide is moved from the
unloading position, downward to move the component
through said passage to position the picked up component
onto a substrate positioned underneath the guide.
4,393,580
ONE STEP APPLICATOR TOOL
Leslie C.Hall, Jr., Camp Hill, Pa., assignor to AMP Incorpo-
rated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,714
Int. CI.' HOIR 43/04
U.S. CI. 19—749 5 Claims
'>.s
by first spring means so as to apply constant force to a
cable, and
second cable engaging means supported on said clamping
arm by second spring means so as to apply increased force
to a cable upon locking of said clamping arm in said lock-
ing feature.
4,393,581
METHOD OF FORMING LEADS ON A LEAD FRAME
Gabriel B. Cherian, York, Pa., assignor to AMP Incorporated,
Harrisburg, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 114,451, Jan. 22, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,221
Int. CI.' HOIR 43/00
U.S. a. 29—827 3 Claims
1. In an applicator tool for applying a connector having a
plurality of insulating piercing electrical terminals onto a mul-
ti-conductor flat cable with each terminal engaging a respec-
tive conductor, said tool having a frame having integral spaced
upper and lower arms, ram means mounted in said upper arm
for vertical movement, an upper tooling member mounted on
a free lower end of said ram means, means to actuate said ram
means, guide rail means mounted on said lower arm extending
from a point beneath said ram means in cantilever fashion, and
a lower tooling assembly including a sliding base mounted on
said guide rail means for sliding motion between a point remote
from said ram to said point beneath said ram, a base plate
assembly fixed to said sliding base and including a base plate,
cable guide means mounted on the base plate, cable clamp
means for securing a cable to said base plate, connector receiv-
ing means, and cable stop means selectively positionable to
abut the free end of a cable and to allow through feed of said
cable whereby a connector can be applied intermediate the
ends of the cable, said cable clamp means comprising:
a first fixture secured to one edge of said base plate,
a locking fixture secured to the opposite edge of said base
plate,
a clamping arm having one end pivotally attached to said
first fixture and locking means on the opposite free end
engageable with said locking fixture,
first cable engaging means supported on said clamping arm
1. A method of forming a lead frame comprising the steps of:
a. stamping out a flat lead frame having a center pad and a
plurality of leads extending outwardly from one or more
sides thereof, every other lead consisting of an inner end
adjacent the center pad, a long outer end and a midsection
intermediate the inner and outer ends and the leads in
between the every other lead consisting of an inner end
adjacent the center pad, a short outer end and a midsec-
tion intermediate the inner and outer ends, further said
outer ends of all leads being stamped out to extend
obliquely away from the midsection,
b. forming one row of legs along a first side of the center pad
by perpendicularly bending the short outer ends where
the midsections and outer ends join; and
forming a second row of legs spaced from and parallel to
the first row of legs by perpendicularly bending the long
outer ends at a predetermined distance outwardly from
where the midsection and outer ends join.
c.
4,393,582
METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR FORMING A
CABLE CORE HAVING AN INTERNAL CABLE SHIELD
William S. Arnold, Jr., and Joseph C. Tulloss, both of Baltimore,
Md., assignors to Western Electric Company, Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,429
Int. Cl.^ HOIB 13/20: B23P 23/00
U.S. CI. 29—828 7 Claims
1. A method of assembling a plurality of units of insulated
conductor pairs and a metallic strip into a cable core in which
the units are separated into groups by the metallic strip, said
method comprising the steps of:
moving each of a plurality of units of a first group of units of
insulated conductor pairs along a path of travel through
an associated individual opening in a first faceplate,
through an associated individual opening in a guide plate
and then through an opening in a second faceplate which
is common to all the units in said first group;
moving each of a plurality of a second group of units of
898
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
insulated conductor pairs along a path of travel through
an associated individual opening in the first faceplate and
then through an opening in the second faceplate which is
common to all the units in said second group;
causing a metallic strip to be formed into a screen which has
a generally central portion that is disposed between the
groups of units and an arcuate portion that is attached to
each end of the central portion with each arcuate portion
enclosing at least a portion of an associated group of the
units, said step of causing the metallic strip to be formed
incuding the steps of moving the strip through a slotted
opening in the first faceplate which is disposed between
the groups of openings and moving the metallic strip
through a slotted openmg in the second faceplate which is
disposed between the common openings, the slotted open-
ing in the second faceplate having a central portion be-
tween the common openmgs and an arcuate portion that is
attached to each end of the central portion; while
engaging at least a portion of the strip which is adjacent to
the first group of units as the units of the first group are
being moved through the openings in the guide plate
between the two faceplates to cause one arcuate portion to
be disposed in a predetermined manner about the units of
the first group without inadvertent deformation of the
strip, the steps of moving each of the units of said first
group through an individual opening in the guide plate
being effective to cause the units of said first group to be
maintained in a predetermined position as the metallic
strip is being formed about the units of the first and second
groups.
plate for causing said strip to be formed into a screen of a
predetermined configuration while preventing buckling of
the strip as it is advanced between said faceplates and for
controlling the formation of the arcuately disposed por-
tion of the strip that is to enclose the first group of units,
said plate means including an arcuately configured edge
surface which engages the strip as it is advanced between
said first and second faceplates and a plurality of openings
in an arrangement which corresponds to that of the units
in the first group of the cable units.
4,393,583
ANTI-TORQUE CONNECTION APPARATUS AND
METHOD FOR USING
Henry J. Zwald, Mesa, Ariz., assignor to Motorola Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,583
Int. a.^ HOIR 43/00; B25B 13/00
U.S. a. 29—857 2 Claims
3. Apparatus for forming a cable core having an internally
disposed shield which separates groups of stranded conductor
units that are in a predetermined arrangement, said apparatus
comprising:
a first faceplate having a plurality of openings formed there-
through in two groups, each of said openings of one group
being adapted to permit passage of a stranded cable unit of
a first group of units and each of said openings of the other
group being adapted to permit passage of a stranded cable
unit of a second group of units, said first faceplate also
including a slot which is disposed between the groups of
openings and which is adapted to permit passage of a
metallic strip therethrough;
a second faceplate spaced from said first faceplate, said
second faceplate including a first opening for passing a
first group of the units, a second opening for passing a
second group of the units, and a slot having an arcuate
portion depending from each end thereof;
means for advancing each of a plurality of stranded conduc-
tor units along a path of travel through an opening in the first
and then through one of the openings in the second faceplate
and for advancing a metallic strip along a path of travel which
is interposed between the groups of the units and through said
slots in said faceplates to cause said strip to be formed into a
configuration having arcuate free end portions each of which
encloses at least a portion of one of the groups of units; and
plate means interposed between said first and second face-
plates and cooperating with said slot in said second face-
1. A method of tightening a cable connector which is inelas-
tically coupled to a cable, the connector being adapted to
couple the cable to a mating device, said method comprising
the steps of:
providing the cable connector having at least a cable adaptor
and a nut, said cable adaptor being adapted to be firmly
engaged by a tool, said tool having an adaptor engage-
ment portion with a slot said adaptor engagement portion
being adapted to firmly engage said cable adaptor without
interferring with said cable;
furnishing a nut driver having a nut engagement portion
rotatably disposed around said adaptor engagement por-
tion of said tool and having a cutaway cylindrical portion
capable of being aligned with said slot in said tool;
engaging said nut with said nut engagement portion;
passing said cable through said slot in said adaptor engage-
ment portion, and through said cutaway cylindrical por-
tion;
restraining said cable adaptor from rotation about said cable
with said tool; and
rotating said nut driver and thereby rotating said nut to
tighten said cable connector to the mating device.
2. An apparatus for tightening a cable connector to a mating
device, said cable connector having at least a cable adaptor and
a nut, said cable adaptor being inelastically coupled to said
cable, said cable adaptor being adapted to be firmly engaged by
a tool, said apparatus comprising in combination:
a tool having a portion adapted for firmly engaging and for
preventing rotation of the cable adaptor, said tool having
a cylindrical portion with a slot for allowing clearance for
the cable; and
a nut driver rotatably disposable around said tool for firmly
tigtening the nut, said nut driver having an engagement
portion shaped to allow said nut driver to firmly engage
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
899
and to turn the nut, said engagement portion being capable
of coaxial rotation around said portion of said tool, said
nut driver having a cut away cylinrical portion coaxially
arranged around and capable of being aligned with said
slot in said cylindrical portion of said tool to form an
aperture larger than the cable, said aperture allowing said
nut driver to be axially fed and rotated around said tool
while providing clearance for the cable.
4,393,584
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE OF ELECTRODE
CONSTRUCTION
Rex O. Bare, and Earl F. Robinson, both of Lawrence, Kans.,
assignors to C. R. Bard, Inc., Murray Hill, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 100,904, Dec. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,365,634.
This application Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,119
I Int. C\? HOIR 43/00
U.S. a. 29—877 6 Claims
from saic
strip.
operation, said first pair of cutters forming a first hair trimmer
and being adjustable between different positions; and a second
pair of cooperating toothed cutters, one being reciprocatory
and the other being stationary in operation, said second pair of
cutters being arranged for operation in line and in juxtaposition
with the first pair of cutters in at least one of said positions
thereof so as to form with the first pair of cutters a second hair
trimmer of greater length than the first hair trimmer measured
in the direction of reciprocation of the reciprocatory cutters,
or said second pair of cutters having a greater length than the
first pair of cutters measured in the direction of reciprocation
of the reciprocatory cutter of each pair of cutters and being
arranged to form independently of the first pair of cutters a
second hair trimmer of greater length than the first hair trim-
mer.
1. A method of fabricating a disposable medical electrode
assembly including a cover, said method comprising the steps
of: providing a strip including, a first layer of material having
an adhesively coated surface, which layer will provide the
support layer for the electrode assembly, and a second layer in
the form of a first release liner covering and engaged with said
adhesively coated surface; forming an opening in said strip
extending through said first layer and said first release liner;
mounting a terminal member and a porous matrix with respect
to said opening; removing said first release liner to expose the
adhesively coated side of said strip, while leaving said porous
matrix and said terminal means in place; applying a second
release liner to the exposed adhesively coated surface of said
strip, which liner is aperture free and overlies and protects said
matrix and said adhesively coated surface of the support layer,
said second release liner thereby providing a cover for said
electrode assembly; severing the completed electrode assembly
4,393,585
DRY-SHAVING APPARATUS WITH HAIR-TRIMMING
MEANS
Petrus J. J. Nagelkerke, Drachten, Netherlands, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,235
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 25, 1980,
8003670 I
' Int. C\? B26B 19/20
U.S. a. 30—34.1 5 Qaims
4,393,586
SHAVING BLADE ASSEMBLY FOR ROTARY TYPE
ELECTRIC SHAVER
Tetsuo Hamashima, and Fumihiro Kumano, both of Hikone,
Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 173,427
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 7, 1979, 54-
108789[U]
Int. a. J B26B 19/14
U.S. CI. 30—43.6 3 Claims
22
21 20
%^ Bm;3 i,3;2 13
1. A idry-shaving apparatus provided with hair-trimming
means comprising a first pair of cooperating toothed cutters,
one being reciprocatory and the other being stationary in
1. A shaving blade assembly for a rotary type electric
shaver, comprising:
an outer blade including a dome-shaped fiexible steel foil
including inner and outer surfaces, and having a plurality
of hair-introducing apertures provided in a substantially
spherical central area thereof,
said outer blade being provided with a groove recessed
longitudinally inwardly from said outer surface thereof
and extending concentrically relative to a longitudinal
axis of said outer blade which passes through said cen-
tral area, said groove located radially inwardly of an
outer periphery of said outer blade to separate said
central area of said outer blade from an outer area
thereof, said groove including radially inner and outer
side walls and a base interconnecting said side walls,
said radially inner side wall forming with said outer
surface of said outer blade a first edge, said radially
outer side wall forming with said outer surface a second
edge, said first edge extending longitudinally outwardly
to a greater extent than said second edge, a plurality of
first hair-introducing slits extending from within said
central area and along said radially inner side wall
toward said base, and a plurality of second hair-intro-
ducing slits extending from within said outer area and
along said radially outer side wall toward said base, and
an inner blade member beneath said outer blade and includ-
ing:
a plurality of inner blades, each inner blade having a
shearing edge corresponding to said inner surface of
said outer blade and extending generally radially along
a substantial portion thereof, including a substantial
portion of said central area to support said outer blade,
and
a substantially disk-shaped inner blade frame supporting
900
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said inner blades in radial direction bringing said shear-
ing edges into resilient and slidable contact with said
inner surface of said outer blade and having an axial
hole for receiving a rotary driving shaft of a motor of
said shaver to rotate said inner blade member about a
longitudinal axis of rotation,
each of said inner blades having an incision in a position
corresponding to said groove of said outer blade, and
said incision having edge parts spaced from said inner
and outer side walls of said groove to define therebe-
tween a gap for allowing relatively long hair to be
introduced into the gap through said first and second
slits in said side walls.
4,393,587
SPRING SHIELDED SAFETY KNIFE
William A. Kloosterman, 6553 Hearne Rd. • 1107, Cincinnati,
Ohio 45211
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,775
Int. aj B26B 1/08
U.S. CI. 30—162 6 Claims
like members on a like portion of the other pivoted mem-
ber;
each of the portions having the blade-like members being
notched at their ends remote from the pivot for securely
grasping and holding an article between the blade-like
members to enable the blade-like members to shear
through an article as the blade-like members are pivoted.
\>
-4 -N^. i*" jS O l^>»U I ^ \i*^2(
/
is j< -JS
1. A sprmg shielded safety knife, said knife including handle
means for permitting a user to operably grip said knife, said
handle means having a hollow interior portion, blade cutting
means fixedly secured to said handle means and extending
outwardly therefrom, blade shield means normally position-
able over said blade cutting means and being slidably retract-
able into said hollow interior portion of said handle means,
spring means contained in said hollow interior portion biasing
said blade shield means into blade shielding position, said blade
shield means being retained in position over said blade cutting
means by a compression force provided by said spring means,
said blade cutting means being detachably securable to^' longi-
tudinally extending blade shaft, said blade shaft being in con-
centric alignment with said hollow interior portion of said
handle means and being fixedly secured to a remote end of said
handle means, said blade shaft having a travel slide means
operably associated therewith, said travel slide means serving
to regulate a depth of cut of said blade cutting means by limit-
ing a movement of said blade shield means into said hollow
mterior portion of said handle means, said travel slide means
including a travel slide operably positionable in a slot on said
blade shaft and further including a screw means threadably
securable thereto, said screw means passing through said slot
means in said blade shaft and being securable to an aperture
contained on said blade shield means.
4,393,589
CONSTRUCTION FOR A MOTOR-DRIVEN CHAIN SAW
Bengt A. Barkhult, Hovas, Sweden, assignor to Emab Electrolux
Motor Aktiebolag, Huskvarna, Sweden
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,793
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jun. 9, 1980, 8004300
Int. CUB27B 17/00
U.S. a. 30—381 6 Qaims
1. A chain saw having an oil pump and a carburetor compris-
ing: a plurality of units including an engine-saw unit, a casing,
a fuel tank, a fuel filter for said fuel tank forming a filter-tank
unit, said filter-tank unit including a top portion and a bottom
portion restricting spacings for oil and fuel, respectively, and
enclosing said filter, a plurality of pipes molded and perma-
nently mounted in said top portion for oil and fuel from the
respective tanks to said oil pump and carburetor, said carbure-
tor which is located on said top portion and is provided with an
air filter, and a permanently formed and molded holder in said
top portion for holding said filter. -^
4,393,588
FOOD MINCER
Eugene Kowalski, South Orange, N.J., assignor to Elpo Indus-
tries, Inc., Paramus, N.J.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,662
Int. Q\? A47J 19/04
U.S. a. 30—196 6 Oaims
1. An implement for mincing comprising:
a pair of pivoted members each having a handle portion and
a portion having a plurality of blade-like members with
nonreentrant cutting edges;
the pivoted members being interchangeable;
the blade-like members on one pivoted member being
adapted to interleave with a complementary set of blade-
4,393,590
SAW GUIDE BAR
Glenn G. E. Pantzar, Arsunda, Sweden, assignor to Santrade
Ltd., Lucerne, Switzertand
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,041
aaims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 3, 1980, 8006930
Int. a.3 B27B 77/02
U.S. CI. 30—387 12 Qaims
1. A chain saw guide bar comprising two side plates and an
intermediate layer, each of said side plates comprising an outer
layer of fiber-reinforced plastic material and an inner layer of
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
901
metal which is glued to said outer layer, said intermediate layer 4,393,592
being of less height than said inner layers such that said inner GAUGE FOR CHECKING LINEAR DIMENSIONS OF
MECHANICAL PIECES
Carlo Dall'Aglio, Volta Reno di Argelato, Italy, assignor to
■- j I f Finike Italiana Marposs, S.p.A., S. Marino di Bentivoglio,
luly
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,875
Claims priority, application Italy, Jul. 22, 1980, 2477 A/80
Int. CV GOIB 5/02. 7/02
U.S. a. 33—172 B 9 Qaims
17 13 14
layers and said intermediate layers form a guide track for a saw
chain.
" 4,393,591
OPTICAL TRANSDUCER
Renato Conta, Ivrea. Italy, assignor to Ing. C. Olivetti & C,
S.p.A., Italy
I Filed Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 320,875
Claims priority, application Italy, Nov. 17, 1980, 68755 A/80
Int. Cl.^ GOIB 11/00. 11/26
U.S. CI. 33—1 L 6 Qaims
1. An optical transducer for determining the angular position
of a rotatable member relative to a fixed structure, comprising
a disc connected to said rotatable member and provided with a
plurality of radial light transmitting elements alternate to light
non-transmitting elements, a housing connected to said fixed
structure and inside which said disc is lodged, a light emitting
element mounted on said housing for illuminating said radial
elements, a plurality of photocells arranged on said housing to
detect the passage of light through said light transmitting
elements, and an electronic circuit connected to said photocells
for generating output signals indicative of the angular position
of said rotatable disc with respect to said housing, wherein said
circuit comprises active and passive components, electrical
interconnections between said components, at least one trim-
ming resistor for regulating said output signals within predeter-
mined limits, a ceramic plate mounted on said housing and
having an external fiat surface on which said electrical inter-
connections and said trimming resistor are deposited, and an
edge reference element deposited on said ceramic plate at a
predetermined and exact distance from said trimming resistor,
for causing the trimming of said trimming resistor to be oper-
ated by means of a calibrating apparatus including a laser beam
automatically founding said edge reference element and auto-
matically positionable on said trimming resistor starting from
said edge reference element.
!!l 'i
i;-;f ^ !
1. A gauge for the dimensional checking of mechanical
pieces, including supporting means: a gauging arm; means for
connecting the arm to the support means adapted to enable
movement of the arm; a feeler, fixed to the movable arm to
contact the surface of the piece to be checked; a spring includ-
ing coils defining a geometrical axis, the spring having a first
end cooperating with the gauging arm; and an adjustment
device with a movable element cooperating with a second end
of the spring, for adjusting the force applied by the spring to
the gauging arm, wherein said adjustment device includes a
control device, coupling means to couple the control device to
the support means while allowing the rotation of the control
device about said axis, the control device being coaxial with
the spring and arranged substantially inside the coils of the
spring, the adjustment device further including a member fixed
to the support means and that cooperates with the movable
element in order to prevent it from rotating while permitting
its axial translation along said axis, the control device being
coupled to the movable element to control said axial transla-
tion.
4,393,593
REGISTER-PIN-LOCATING DEVICE
Robert P. Abbott, 7241 Garden Grove Blvd., Ste. E, Garden
Grove, Calif. 92640
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,926
Int. CL' B41B 1/00
U.S. CI. 33—184.5 7 Qaims
1. A register-pin-locating device, comprising:
a substantially flat rectangular plate having a longitudinal
bend formed therein, defining first and second half sec-
tions
wherein said first and second half sections are horizontally
offset from each other; and
at least one elongated slot formed in said plate transversely
to said bend, said slot being equally disposed in each of
said half sections.
902
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,594
COLLAPSIBLE SCRIBER ASSEMBLY
Ronald E. Hoffman, Uniontown, Ohio, and William K. Freed,
Memphis, Tenn., assignors to The Goodyear Tire & Rubber
Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,557
Int. a.i GOIB 5/255
U.S. a. 33—203.16 5 Qaims
so that a first set of alternating flat portions and arcuate
portions are provided on at least one side of said ring
1. A collapsible scriber assembly for checking the radial and
lateral runout of a wheel and tire assembly and for marking a
reference line on a tire, comprising:
(a) a horizontal base assembly comprising at least two
straight bar members, at least one of said straight bar
members being hinged at the center of its length, and all of
said straight bar members connected to each other at or
near their ends by means for attaching and detaching;
(b) at least one straight vertical member, having first and
second ends, the first end attached hingably to one of the
straight bar members of said horizontal base assembly in
such a manner that when it is in its operative position said
straight vertical member is perpendicular to said horizon-
tal base assembly and extends vertically upward there-
from;
(c) a pivot mechanism held in place perpendicular to said
straight vertical member by means for attachment at or
near the second end of said straight vertical member;
(d) a pivot bar, with first and second ends, having a bore
through it near the center of its length, a well in the first
end and an eyelet attached to the second end, said pivot
mechanism passing through the bore in the pivot bar so
that said pivot bar may pivot in a vertical plane;
(e) a scribe, used for providing a reference point and for
making a reference line, inserted lengthwise in the well in
the first end of said pivot bar and held in place by means
for securing such as a set screw; and
(0 a coil spring, having first and second ends, the first end of
said coil spring affixed to the eyelet at the second end of
said pivot bar, and the second end of said coil spring
affixed to said horizontal base assembly, providing a stabi-
lizing tension on the pivot bar.
member substantially the same radial distance from the
axis of the ring member to enable longitudinal compres-
sion of said resilient locking means.
4,393,596
REMOTELY ADJUSTABLE SIGHTING DEVICE FOR
TRACTORS
B. Lynn Gerber, 6286 E. Catalina Dr., Scottsdale, Ariz. 85251
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 99,526, Dec. 3, 1979, Pat. No.
4,280,281. This application Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,454
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 28,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' GOIC 15/00
U.S. a. 33— 264 UQaims
4,393,595
TUBE ADJUSTMENT GASKET AND RIFLE SCOPE
EMPLOYING SAME
Dale E. Gibson, Salem, Oreg., assignor to Leupold & Stevens,
Inc., Beaverton, Oreg.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,966
Int. a.^ F41G 1/38
U.S. a. 33—245 23 Qaims
1. An adjustment gasket of synthetic plastic material, com-
prising:
a resilient ring member;
a plurality of resilient locking means provided on the ring
member at positions spaced about the longitudinal axis of
said ring member, including a plurality of concave curved
surface portions of substantially the same shape spaced
about the periphery of said ring member; and
a plurality of fiat surface portions spaced between said con-
cave portions about the periphery of said ring member and
positioned longitudinally outward of said arcuate portions
1. A sighting apparatus attachable to a tractor to enable a
driver of the tractor to precisely align the tractor with swaths
or furrows previously cut in a field by a farming implement
towed to the tractor, said sighting apparatus comprising in
combination:
a. a first extension arm for extending outwardly an adjust-
able distance to one side of the tractor from a mounting
point of the tractor, said first extension arm having an
outer end and an inner end;
b. support means pivotally connected to the mounting point
and also engaging the inner end of said extension arm for
supporting said first extension arm;
c. first adjustment means adjustable by a driver seated in the
driver's seat of the tractor for controlling extending and
retracting of said extension arm from said support means;
d. first sighting bar means rotatably connected to the outer
end of said first extension arm for effecting visual align-
ment of the tractor with the previously cut swath or
furrow;
e. second adjustment means adjustable by the driver when
the driver is seated in the driver's seat of the tractor for
controlling rotation of said first sighting bar means, said
July 19,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
903
first and second adjustment means being located suffi-
ciently close to the driver's seat to be conveniently con-
trolled by the driver while the driver assumes a normal
driving position in the driver's seat;
f. pendulum means connected to said support means for
maintaining said support means in a level orientation as
the tractor tilts or is jolted as the tractor moves over
uneven or rough ground; and
g. damping means engaging said pendulum means for damp-
ing movement of said pendulum means relative to the
tractor.
4,393,597
STABILIZED SIGHTING DEVICES FOR VEHICLES
Jean-Francois Picard, Versailles, and Paul Jacquard, le Peco,
both of France, assignors to Societe D' Applications Generates,
Paris, France
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,895
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 26, 1979, 79 31721
Int. CV GOIC 15/14
U.S. CI. 33—275 G 7 Claims
4,393,598
BOREHOLE TOOL
Steven W. Powell, and James G. Stockton, both of Houston,
Tex., assignors to NL Sperry Sun, Inc., Sugar Land, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 115,454, Jan. 25, 1980, abandoned. This
application Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,400
Int. a.' E21B 47/00
U.S. a. 33—302 8 Qaims
1. A stabilized sighting device comprising;
a first gimbal unit mounted for rotation about a first axis;
a drive motor for rotating said first gimbal unit about said
first axis;
a second gimbal unit mounted for rotation on said first gim-
bal unit about a second axis perpendicular to said first axis;
a sight unit provided with a gyroscope and mounted on said
second gimbal unit for rotation within a predetermined
limited angular range with respect to a predetermined
reference position which is a canonical position about a
third axis perpendicular to said second axis;
first and second motor means for driving said second gimbal
unit and sight unit about said second and third axes, re-
spectively;
said gyroscope having a first sensitive axis located parallel to
said second axis when the sight unit is in said predeter-
mined reference position about said third axis, and a sec-
ond sensitive axis parallel to said third axis,
first and second servo loop circuits connected to first and
second outputs of said gyroscope for controlling said first
and second motor means, respectively;
detector means arranged to deliver a signal representative of
the deviation of said sight unit from the canonical position
with respect to the second gimbal unit;
and a position copying loop controlled by said detector
means and activating said drive motor in a direction tend-
ing to compensate said deviation, whereby said second
servo loop returns said sight unit to said predetermined
reference position which is a canonical position.
1. An apparatus for measuring a borehole parameter com-
prising:
(a) an elongated housing having first and second ends;
means for supply alternating electrical power to said housing
at either of said first or second ends, said means including
at least one electrical conductor running between said first
and second ends; (at either end to permit inversion of the
housing in the borehole);
means within said housing for detecting a borehole parame-
ter, said detecting means being activated in response to
changes in the parameter being detected, said detecting
means also being activated in response to the passage of an
electrical current creating a magnetic field within the
immediate environment of said detecting means;
means for dampening the response of said detecting means
and thereby slowing down the response time of said de-
tecting means to the magnetic field created by said electri-
cal current; and
means for varying the direction of electrical current supplied
to said housing at a rate faster than the response time of
said detecting means when subjected to the electrical
current, thereby providing a zero average magnetic field.
4,393,599
LEVELING MECHANISMS FOR HAND-HELD POWER
DRILL
John W. Sterrenberg, 8350 E. McKellips Rd. #146, Scottsdale,
Ariz. 85257, assignor to John W. Sterrenberg, Scottsdale,
Ariz.
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,183
Int. CI.' GOIC 9/28: B23B 49/00
U.S. O. 33—336
22 Qaims
40. ?/-, >•' -
1. A leveling mechanism for use in conjunction with a drill,
the drill including a rotatable drive member for rotating a
chuck, the rotatable drive member having a threaded central
bore formed therein, said leveling mechanism comprising in
combination:
(a) a support;
(b) a drive shaft rotatably mounted to said support and
having an axis of rotation, said drive shaft having first and
second ends, the first end of said drive shaft being coupled
to said chuck, and the second end of said drive shaft being
externally threaded and of a diameter commensurate with
that of the threaded central bore within the rotatable drive
member, said externally threaded second end of said drive
904
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
shaft being received directly by the threaded centra! bore
within the rotatable drive member for rotating the chuck;
(c) said support being maintained at a substantially fixed
pioint along the rotational axis of said drive shaft and at a
substantially fixed distance from said drill and relatively
proximate thereto for minimizing the distance between the
drill and the chuck rotated thereby; and
(d) a first bubble level attached to said support to aid a user
in holding the drill in a predetermined position.
4,393,600
STRUCTURAL BEAM SQUARE
Norman O. Coc, 2600 Senter Rd. #77, San Jose, Calif. 95111
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,538
Int. CI.' GOIB 3/30
U.S. CI. 33—474 4 Qaims
substantially at right angles to said first and second sur-
faces,
a first reference mark positioned upon at least one of said
surfaces at a position where the plane of said third surface
intersects said first and second surfaces, and
70, ,74
i ^ J
i
W6
-■
ih
*-, ^-4,
"•
jni > — — -^
1. In a square for use in establishing a line on the base of a
structure perpendicular to a wall extending from the base, the
combination comprising,
unitary first and second arm members extending at right
angles to each other, said first and second arm members
having T-shaped cross sections, said first and second arm
members comprising,
first and second coplanar stem members having inner and
outer edges, and
first and second fianges extending along the inner edge of
the respective first and second stem members, respec-
tively, said first and second fianges being of uniform,
equal, height, the outer free edge of one of said first and
second arm members bemg adapted to abut the wall asso-
ciated with the base with the other arm member extending
perpendicular to the wall for use in marking off the base
along said fiange on the other arm member,
said square including at least one gauge member secured to
the stem member of the other of said first and second arm
members said gauge member including a gauge plate
extending parallel to the one arm member abutting the
wall of the structure for use in cross marking the line
established using said fiange on the other arm member,
said gauge plate having a height equal to the height of said
first and second fianges.
at least one second reference mark comprising a plurality of
marks which define at least one line which is spaced from
said first reference mark and positioned upon at least one
of said first and second surfaces at an angle of 135° relative
to said third surface.
4,393,602
VEHICLE DRYING MACHINE AND METHOD
Judson L. Smith, 5432 Lighthouse La., Tempe, Ariz. 85283
Division of Ser. No. 932,273, Aug. 9, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,338
Int. CI.' F26B 5/00
U.S. CI. 34—34 2 Claims
<«A 29 2iA
4,393,601
MEASURING DEVICE
Jerald G. Peterson, 1417 Kurtz Rd., McLean, Va. 22101
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,865
Int. a.' GOIB 3/02
U.S. a. 33—494 6 Claims
1. A measuring device comprising a plurality of stepped
surfaces including a first surface extending in a first longitudi-
nal plane and a second surface extending in a second longitudi-
nal plane, said first and second surfaces being substantially
parallel and offset relative to each other to form said stepped
surfaces,
a third surface extending from said first surface to said sec-
ond surface in a third plane, said third surface extending
1. A method of drying a vehicle comprising the steps of:
establishing a path of relative linear horizontal movement
between a nozzle and the vehicle,
directing a generally circular blast of air from the nozzle
from one side of said path onto the exterior of the vehicle
above the vehicle bottom at a velocity exceeding 1 50 mph,
directing second and third generally circular blasts of air
against the exterior of the vehicle, said second blast being
directed downward from above the vehicle and said third
blast being directed generally horizontally and from the
side of the path opposite said one side, and
oscillating the directions of said blasts in a direction of oscil-
lation generally transverse to the direction of said path,
said blasts from the side being alternated in opposite direc-
tions so both are not blasting upward at same time.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
905
4,393,603
DRYER THERMAL EFTICIENCY
John R. Casperson, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,159
Int. CI.' F26B 3/24
U.S. CI. 34—39 15 Qaims
« \
■-4
*X
^j^_N>— ^k^iss
-%3) tri ;^ D
'^■^H^Kfe^rcrjzzzjJgbbb^^f^
80 \ ^66
4,393,605
SPORTS SHOE
Georg Spreng, Weiherstrasse 10, D-7272 Aitensteig, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,803
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 15,
1980, 3043266
Int. CI.' A43B 5/00. 13/04, 23/00
U.S. CI. 36—114 10 Claims
L^
1. A process for removing liquid from particulate matter
which comprises:
(a) feeding said particulate matter containing the liquid into
a rotary drum vessel which has attached thereto projec-
tions extending from the outside of the drum vessel
through the drum vessel wall to the inside thereof, and
having portions extending into the drum vessel and por-
tions extending into the space outside of the drum vessel,
(b) contacting the outside of said vessel and those portions of
said projections which extend into the space surrounding
said vessel with a heating medium,
(c) rotating said rotary drum vessel containing said particu-
late material
(d) exposing the particulate matter containing liquid to those
inside portions of said projections which extend from the
interior of the vessel through the walls of the vessel to the
exterior of the vessel and which contact the heating me-
dium that contacts the vessel thereby transferring heat
through said projections,
(e) vaporizing the liquid to be removed, and -"
(0 recovering particulate matter having reduced liquid con-
tent.
1. A cleat projection for an athletic shoe, having a shape
characterized by three frustoconical members of equal height
and unequal volume, two said members being smaller than a
third said member, said third member being disposed between
said smaller members, each of said three frustoconical mem-
bers having a major axis, said major axes defining points on an
arc, each said frustoconical member having a base portion, said
base portions being overlapping portions, said shape including
fillet portions interconnecting the sides of said frustoconical
members
1. A sports shoe having a sole and an enclosing upper, said
upper having a toe cap, formed of a plurality of strips, articu-
latingly interconnected along parallel lines extending from the
inside edge toward the heel of said shoe at an acute angle with
the longitudinal axis of said shoe, said sole being provided with
a plurality of grooves aligned with the articulating intercon-
nections of said strips.
4,393.606
EXCAVATOR WITH LASER POSITION INDICATOR
Waldemar Warnecke, Grasleben, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Friedrich Wilh. Schwing GmbH, Heme, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,450
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 30,
1980, 3032821
Int. CI.' E02F 5/02
U.S. CI. 37—103 5 Claims
4,393,604
OUTSOLE FOR ATHLETIC SHOE
Kevin J. Crowley, Newburyport, Mass., assignor to Converse
Inc., Wilmington, Mass.
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,485
Int. a.' A43C 15/02
U.S. a. 36—67 R 1 Claim
26 25
1. In a back hoe excavator of a type having an articulated
digging device with a digging bucket mounted at an outer end,
in which the digging bucket Js capable of being set to a given
cutting angle, and in which the digging bucket is moved
toward a human operator of the excavator in a digging direc-
tion during a digging operation while the digging bucket is
maintained at the given cutting angle, a position indicator
apparatus for checking position of the digging device of the
excavator relative to a digging floor which has already been
formed, the position indicator apparatus being arranged in a
field of view of the human operator of the excavator to provide
a visual indication of the position of the digging device to the
operator, the position indicator apparatus comprising:
laser transmitter means for providing a laser beam in a direc-
tion parallel to the digging direction, the laser transmitter
means being positioned on an opposite side of the digging
bucket from the operator, so that the digging bucket
moves in the digging direction toward the operator and
away from the laser transmitter means during a digging
operation;
mounting means for mounting the laser transmitter means
906
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
with respect to the digging floor which has already been bar and the rear of the rearward section being supported at
formed so that the laser beam is representative of vertical each side by land wheels, the wheels on each side being carried
and horizontal aspects of a digging floor to be dug by the on an arm pivotally mounted on said rearward section, a fixed
excavator; and scraper blade at the pivoted end of the said rearward section,
target means mounted to and carried by the digging device, a load carrying container behind the scraper blade, an apron
the target means being at least partially transparent, and pivotally mounted above and forwardly of the load carrying
having a first surface facing the operator and a second, container the forward section having substantially vertical
opposite surface for receiving the laser beam from the wings on either side thereof to guide soil to the load carrying
laser transmitter, and wherein the target means repro- container, the apron having a substantially downwardly di-
duces a visual image of an end point of the laser beam for rected edge, when it is in a, first, raised position in which it is
parallax-free observation by the operator during an entire located subsUntially above the scraper blade so as to leave the
digging operation in which the digging bucket is set to a
given cutting angle and moved in the digging direction
toward the Of)erator.
4,393,607
HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
Katsu Hirosowa, Komatsu, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Komatsu Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,516
Int. a.' E02F 5/22
U.S. a. 37—103 3 Claims
1. A hydraulic excavator comprising:
a base;
a first boom mounted on said base for movement in a vertical
plane about a first pivot;
a second boom mounted on said first boom for movement in
the same vertical plane about a second pivot;
an arm assembly mounted on said second boom for move-
ment in the same vertical plane about a third pivot;
an implement mounted at the swinging end of said arm
assembly for movement about a fourth pivot;
means for swinging said first boom with respect to said base
about the first pivot, said means including a lever pivotally
mounted on said base and first and second hydraulic cylin-
ders, said lever having first and second ends and is pivoted
about the first pivot, said first hydraulic cylinder having
its one end pivotally connected to said base and the other
end pivotally connected to the first end of said lever while
said second hydraulic cylinder has its one end pivotally
connected to the second end of said lever and the other
end pivotally connected to said first boom;
a third hydraulic cylinder for swinging said second boom
with respect to said first boom about the second pivot;
a fourth hydraulic cylinder for swinging said arm assembly
with respect to said second boom about the third pivot;
and
a fifth hydraulic cylinder for swinging said implement with
respect to said arm assembly about the fourth pivot.
mouth of the load carrying container unimpeded, and means to
cause the apron to rotate generally arcuately downwardly to a,
second, lowered position in which the edge substantially abuts
the scraper blade, the apron effectively closing the forward
end of the load carrying container, the rotation being effected
by hydraulic rams connected between the apron and formed
slots in the wings, the slots constraining the ends of the rams to
move in a fixed path to control the movement of the edge of
the apron, means connected between the said forward and
rearward sections, on each side of the frame pivot to effect
raismg and lowering movements of the said pivot and thus to
the scraper blade.
4,393,609
FEEDING DEVICE
Arne Persson, PI 5165, S-82027 Sbderala, Sweden
PCT No. PCT/SE81/00102, § 371 Date Nov. 24, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 24, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02723, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 1, 1981
PCT Filed Mar. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 328,571
Int. CV EOIH 5/09
U.S. a. 37—238 7 Claims
4,393,608
LAND FORMING AND EARTH MOVING EQUIPMENT
John R. Hodge, Nathalia-Katamatite Rd., Numurkab, Victoria,
Australia (3636)
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,170
Claims priority, application Australia, Sep. 2, 1980,
PE5364/80
Int. Cl.^ E02F 5/00
1. A feeding device comprising a rotary drum in the casing
wall of which one or more openings are provided to serve as
intakes, with which blade-like elements cooperate, said blade
elements projecting outwardly from the outside of the casing
wall so as to rip and carry along goods and bring it into the
interior of the drum through said intake upon rotation of the
drum, means being provided inside the casing wall for convey-
ing the goods introduced into the drum to an outlet opening at
an end of the drum, said intake openings being in the form of
narrow slots, which together with the associated blade ele-
ments extend helically along the casing wall, said means for
conveying the goods to the outlet opening including a flange
U.S. a. 37— 124 nOaims . _
1. Earth moving and land forming equipment including an which projects from the inside of the casing wall towards the
open frame formed as a forward section and a rearward section interior of the drum, said flange extending, like the slots and
pivoted together on a transverse axis, the forward section the blade elements, helically in the direction from one of the
adapted to be connected at its forward end to a tractor draw ends of the drum towards the other, the pitch of the slots and
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
907
the blade elements along the drum being greater than the pitch
of the interior flange.
4,393,610
CARD CARRYING MICRORLM AND ASSOCIATED
READING LENS AND PROCESS OF FORMING SAME
David L. Adrian, Abilene, Tex., assignor to Lens-Card Systems,
Inc., Abilene, Tex.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,972
Int. CI.' G09F I/IO; G02B 27/04
U.S. a. 40—625 10 Claims
37A
373
1. A data card comprising:
a flexible paper stock having an information portion upon
which information appears that can be read in the normal
manner with the naked eye with a portion removed at one
end region,
a microfilm upon which information is recorded and which
is disposed at said one end region,
a pair of flexible clear plastic sheets laminating opposite sides
of said paper stock respectively, including said microfilm,
an aperture formed through said clear plastic sheets and
through said paper stock at an end region opposite said
one end region,
a round plastic lens located in said aperture,
said lens having a central magnifying portion and an annular
outer gripping portion for gripping the opposite sides of
said card for securing said lens to said card and in said
aperture,
said annular outer gripping portion extending transversely to
the thin plane of said lens beyond said central magnifying
portion on each side of said lens for providing protection
for each side of said central magnifying portion,
said card being flexible whereby a reader may bend said card
to align and focus the lens on the microfilm for reading the
same;.
front surface having thereon a numberal representing the
date of a day of the month; and
a lug on one of said mounting structure and said one date
column extending toward the other of said mounting
structure and said one date column; said other of said
mounting structure and said one date column having
openings on opposite sides of said axis extending thereinto
and through the rear thereof, each opening being dimen-
sioned to receive said lug freely therein, but having a
protrusion near the rear of said other of said mounting
structure and said one date column positioned to interfere
with the movement of said lug into said opening, whereby
said mounting structure may be rotated to force said lug
through the rear portion of one of said openings so that
said lug is retained in said one opening.
4,393,612
PADDED FRAME
Susan Qark, 7270 Prow Way, Dublin, Calif. 94566
Filed Jun. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 389,854
Int. CI.' A47G 1/06: G09F 1/12
U.S. CI. 40—152
7 Qaims
4,393,611
PERPETUAL CALENDAR
Ronald S. Lane, 406 Deer Creek Dr., Plainsboro, N.J. 08536,
and James M. Wittes, Linden, N.J., assignors to Ronald S.
Lane, Plainsboro, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 10,336, Feb. 8, 1979, Pat. No.
4,275,516, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 798,273,
May 19, 1977, Pat. No. 4,142,311. This application Jun. 8, 1981,
1 1 Ser. No. 271,613
1 1 Int. CI.5 G09F 3/00
U.S. CI. 40—107 10 Qaims
1. An improved permanent calendar assembly to precisely
display any month of the year and reflect the number of days
m the desired month, said assembly having a date column area,
a plurality of date columns, and means to detachably secure
said colunns to said date column area, the improvement com-
prising:
at least one reversible mounting structure secured at the
lower end of a respective one of said date columns for
rotation about an axis extending along said column;
a pair of opposed surfaces on said mounting structure, a rear
surface being unnumbered, the other surface defining a
1. A padded frame comprising
a mounting board having a uniform layer of foam sponge
material secured thereto on one side thereof and having at
least one opening for framing a picture or other object.
bands of adhesive surfaces disposed on the opposite side of
said mounting board from said sponge layer and surround-
ing the periphery of said mounting board and the opening
therein and
a decorative covering material stretched over said sponge
material layer and squeezing it to the mounting board
around the border of said mounting board and around the
opening in the center thereof, said covering material being
wrapped around the edges of said mounting board and the
edge of said opening and stuck to said adhesive surfaces on
the reverse side thereof.
908
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,613
PROJECTILE LUBRICATING AND MUZZLE LOADING
DEVICE FOR GUN
Ronald J. Knosky, R.D. #3 - Box 166, Leechburg, Pa. 15656
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,418
Int. O.^ F41C 27/00
U.S. CI. 42—90 7 Qaims
/«, e5_ 60
1. A projectile lubricating and muzzle loading device for
muzzle loading guns comprising a body structure having.
(a) a top surface:
(b) a bottom surface for placing on the muzzle of the gun
when inserting a projectile thereinto;
(c) an aperture adapted to receive and hold said projectile
during lubrication and to align said projectile with the
muzzle of the gun for purposes of loading, said aperture
defined by a side wall structure extending from and con-
necting the top surface to the bottom surface, and having
the axis thereof aligned substantially at right angles with
the bottom surface;
(d) a resiliant member located in said aperture which cooper-
ates with the projectile when placed in said aperture, said
member adapted to restrict the flow of lubricant towards
the rear of the projectile thereby preventing contamina-
tion of the powder with the lubricant when the projectile
is loaded into said muzzle for firing; and
(e) means for introducing lubricant to said aperture when the
projectile is held therein.
4,393,614
GUN REST
Fred E. Pickett, 508 Sophia I^., Shreveport, La. 71115
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 158,060, Jun. 9, 1980, Pat. No.
4,345.398. This application Feb. 27, 1981, S€r. No. 238,763
Int. a.' F41C 29/00
U.S. CI. 42— 94 8 Claims
1. A gun rest for supportmg a firearm comprising:
(a) a monopod characterized by a round, hollow and elon-
gated base support member having a pivoted end and an
open end opposite said pivoted end, and tapered from a
top base support diameter at said pivoted end to a smaller
bottom base support diameter at said open end, and a
plurality of round, hollow and elongated interior support
members carried by said base member and tapered from a
first interior support diameter at the top ends thereof,
respectively, to a smaller second interior support diameter
at the bottom ends, thereof, respectively, to permit said
interior support members to successively rest in, and
selectively telescope from said open end of said base sup-
port member; and
(b) a monopod bracket pivotally attached to said pivoted
end of said monopod and further comprising clamp means
carried by said bracket for removable engagement with
the barrel of said firearm to secure said monopod bracket
and said monopod to said firearm.
4,393,615
FISHING APPARATUS
Vincent B. Hodshire, 2701 NE. Adams St., Peoria, III. 61603
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,726
Int. CI.' AOIK 97/01
U.S. CI. 43—15 9 Claims
5-»> ,60
Xrl05
1. A fishing apparatus comprising: '
a main support member;
a first member connected to said main support and movable
between first and second positions;
a trigger member connected to said first member;
means for retaining said trigger and said first member in said
first position;
means for resiliently urging said trigger and said first mem-
ber toward said second position;
a first elongated guide member extending from said main
supjwrt, said first guide having a first end adjacent said
trigger;
a first line connected to said trigger and extending through
said first guide and terminating adjacent a second end of
said guide;
a reel mounted on said main support;
a second elongated guide member extending from said main
support, said second guide having a first end adjacent said
reel;
a second line extendably connected to said reel and extend-
ing through said second guide; and
means connected to said first line for releasably engaging
said second line.
4,393,616
TRAP APPARATUS, AND METHODS OF FABRICATING
AND UTILIZING SAME
Gilbert T. Kaufman, Flint, and Alfred Evans, Swartz Creek, both
of Mich., assignors to Critter Getter, Inc., Flint, Mich.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,882
Int. a.' AOIM 23/18
U.S. a. 43—60 16 Qaims
1. An animal trap comprising:
a housing forming an elongated chamber and having for-
ward and rear walls;
an opening in said forward wall for entry of an animal to be
trapped;
a platform member within said chamber and extending sub-
stantially the full length and width of said chamber, but
being spaced from the walls of said cahmber sufficiently to
July 19,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
909
permit pivoting therein about a horizontal axis from a first
condition in which said platform slopes upwardly from
said opening to a second condition in which said platform
slopes downwardly with respect to said opening;
means pivotally mounting said platform member within said
chamber at a point spaced along said platform, whereby
said platform can pivot about a horizontal axis;
/J ^ Sf
4,393,618
NOVELTY WRITTEN MESSAGE DEVICE SUITABLE
FOR MAILING
Otis E. Ray, P.O. Box 40302, St. Petersburg, Fla. 33743
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,204
Int. CI. A63H l/iO
U.S. CI. 46—35 2 Oaims
,-^-l:
an indicator mounted on said platform and moveable
thereby to indicate the condition of said platform with
respect to said opening and to thus give an indication that
an animal may be trapped in said trap;
a locking device attached to said platform and operable to
lock said platform in said second condition; and
said indicator operably cooperating with said locking device
and being movable by a user of said trap to unlock said
locking device in said second condition.
4,393,617
' ANIMAL TRAP SIGNAL APPARATUS
Nicky L. Charnoske, 1450 Sheldon St., Alger, Mich. 48601
II Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270.603
' ' Int. CV AOIM 2i/26
U.S. CI. 43— 96 5 Claims
1. A written message carrier and spinning toy combination
device comprising a pair of equal diameter equal thickness thin
flat discs formed of stiff sheet material of a t\pe which will
accept writing by a pen or pencil at least on one face of each
disc, a thin comparatively small diameter spacer ring between
said discs coaxially and being adhesively fixed to ihc opposing
interior faces of the discs and uniting them in parallel coaxially
spaced relationship with the discs spaced apart a small distance
not substantially greater than the thickness of the sheet mate-
rial from which the discs are formed, said spacer ring forming
an axle for the device, and a tether attached to the spacer ring
and adapted to be wound thereon substantially in convolutions
which overlap one another in a common plane radially of the
discs, the thickness of the tether being such that the wound
tether convolutions substantially fill the narrow space between
said discs in the region occupied by the convolutions.
4,393,619
DOLL EYE HAVING INSERT FORMING THE IRIS
Mason D. Vlurch. 5419 Williams, Wayne, Mich. 48184
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,733
Int. CI.' A63H i/iS
U.S. CI. 46—165 6 Claims
1. A signal apparatus for use with an animal trap positionable
underwater and having at least one movable portion compris-
ing:
a housing having an open end, the housing adapted to be
attached to the animal trap in a substantially vertical
orientation with the open end uppermost,
a movable cover member for releasably closing the open end
of the housing;
a buoyant float disposable within the housing;
means for extensibly attaching the buoyant fioat to the hous-
ing such that the buoyant fioat can rise to the surface of
the water when released from the housing; and
means for connecting the cover member to a movable por-
tion of the animal trap such that the cover member is
movable to a position uncovering the open end of the
housing and releasing the buoyant float therefrom in re-
sponse to the closing of the animal trap.
1. A doll eye comprising:
a substantially sphericaf solid body constructed of a thermo-
setting clay, said body having a substantially cylmdrical
and diametric bore formed through it,
an eye insert having an elongated stem and an annular fiared-
out portion at one end of the stem,
means for securing said eye insert to said body so that said
stem protrudes into said bore and so that the outwardh
facing side of said fiared-out portion substantially con-
forms to the outer periphery of the body,
wherein said eye insert is constructed of a transparent mate
rial having a coating of colored material on the other side
of said eye insert fiared-out portion. Said coating of col-
910
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
ored material determining the extent and color of the iris
in the finished eye, and
a coating of transparent material on the outer periphery of
said body and said outwardly facing side of said flared-out
portion.
the area of the polygon defined by the points of attach-
ment to the members of the base, the means having a
4,393,620
ROCKET TRAIN TOY ASSEMBLY
Kazuya Murakami, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Takara Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,948
Int. Cl.^ A63H 11/10
U.S. a. 46—201 12 Claims
/ 8
1. A reconfigurable toy comprising:
a first housing member having a longitudinal axis configured
to simulate a portion of a surface vehicle in an initial
position;
a second housing member configured to simulate the front
portion of a surface vehicle and relatively movable along
the longitudinal axis from the first housing member, a
portion of the second housing member is pivotally mov-
able to reconfigure the front portion of the surface vehicle
configuration into the nose portion of an aeronautical
vehicle when placed in a second position;
first and second outer wall members are pivotally mounted
to the first housing member and are simulated to comple-
ment a surface vehicle configuration in an initial position
and to extend away from the first housing member to a
second position to provide a set of wings for an aeronauti-
cal vehicle configuration;
means for biasing the outer wall members and the portion of
the second housing member to an aeronautical vehicle
configuration when placed into an initial position of a
surface vehicle, and
means for activating the reconfiguration by releasing the
outer wall members and portion of the second housing
member to be moved by the biasing means.
4,393,621
TREE HOLDER
Oifford H. Rodeil, 8749 Contee Rd., Laurel, Md. 20811
Filed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,712
Int. a.^ A47G 7/02
U.S. a. 47—40.5 15 Qaims
• 1. A stand for holding trees in an upright position compris-
ing:
(a) a base upon which the end of a trunk of a tree rests when
the tree is being held in an upright position;
(b) at least three orthogonally projecting members attached
to a surface of the base at spaced apart locations which
define a polygon, each member projecting a distance from
the base such that it extends along the trunk to the stem
where the branches join to the stem when the end of the
trunk touches the base; and
(c) means attached to and extending upwardly from the base
for holding the end of the trunk at least partially within
.-4
Wi^m'"
46 44 ■■22
pointed member located on a line extending between each
adjacent pair of vertices of the polygon.
4,393,622
WATER FUNNEL AND CARD HOLDER FOR CUT
FLOWERS
Joseph S. Gallo, Sr., Walpole, Mass., assignor to Dakota Plas-
tics Company, Watertown, S. Dak.
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,864
Int. Cl.^ AOIG 29/00
U.S. a. 47—48.5 6 Claims
1. A water funnel arrangement for cut flowers including a
unitary structure for funnelling water into a container having
foam plastic material for receiving cut ends of cut flowers, the
arrangement comprising:
a funnel having its large opening for receiving water and its
small opening for passing water therefrom,
a tubular member having an opening at its upper end to
receive the small opening of the funnel and for passing
water through the tubular member to its lower end, said
tubular member having at least one aperture proximate the
lower end for discharging water therefrom and
a pointed tip means closing the lower end of the tubular
member below the aperture and having a pointed portion
insertable into the foam plastic, said pointed portion hav-
ing a maximum dimension greater than the external di-
mension of the tubular member to provide a cavity in the
foam plastic above the pointed portion to receive water
discharged from the aperture and enabling water to
contact the foam plastic throughout the height of the
cavity and along the top surface of the foam plastic, said
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
911
funnel including a pair of slits formed therein extending
downwardly from the upper edge thereof for holding a
card having indicia.
4,393,623
ARRANGEMENT FOR MOUNTING A DOOR
Johann Munz, Hinwil, Switzerland, assignor to Team Form AG,
Hinwil, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,544
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 18,
1979, 2950857
Int. C\? E05D 15/32
U.S. CI. 49—248 19 Claims
1. An arrangement for mounting a door pivotable about a
vertical axis and guided for parallel displacement relative to a
housing, the arrangement comprising at least one guiding
element arranged to guide a door for parallel displacement
relative to a housing and pivotally connected with the former
and the latter in predetermined pivot points; and a supporting
element arranged to support the door on the housing and
pivotally connected with the latter in further pivot points
which are offset relative to the first mentioned pivot points,
said supporting element including two separate shaped mem-
bers which are mirror-inverted relative to one another and
each has a horizontally extending leg and a vertically extend-
ing leg extending in different planes and an intermediate web
connecting said legs with one another, said vertically extend-
ing legs can be cut into desired lengths and upon adjustment of
the relative position of said horizontal legs in different vertical
planes, being fixedly connected with one another for joint
rotation.
wheel and the workpiece, on the other side of such centeriine
intersecting the axis of rotation of the grinding wheel and
extending parallel to such straight line path of reciprocation of
the wheelhead, and symmetrical about said centeriine with the
point of contact between the grinding wheel and the work-
piece, an arm carried by said base, a pivot constructed and
arranged to pivot said arm with respect to said base about an
axis spaced from and extending generally parallel to the axis of
rotation of said wheel and spaced from said straight line path of
reciprocation of said grinding wheel, a dresser wheel drive
carried by said arm at a point distal from such pivot and con-
f^22 sx'* '^7^ 'r -"
^^
/tf-+
structed and arranged to receive and rotate a dresser wheel
with its axis of rotation extending essentially parallel to the axis
of rotation of the grinding wheel, and said arm being con-
structed and arranged such that the location of its pivot point
and the lineal distance between its pivot point and the axis of
rotation of the dresser wheel is such that when said arm is
pivoted so that the dresser wheel contacts the grinding wheel,
the point of contact between the dresser wheel and grinding
wheel is essentially symmetrical with the point of contact
between the grinding wheel and the workpiece throughout the
range of diameters of workpieces which can be ground by the
grinding machine.
4,393,625
APPARATUS FOR GRINDING GEARS
Peter Bloch, Mutschellen, and Hansjorg Bickel, Au, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Maag Gear-Wheel & Machine Com-
pany Limited, Zurich, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 157,977
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 20, 1979,
5757/79
Int. QV B24B 49/00, 53/06
U.S. CI. 51—165.87 2 Claims
4,393,624
THREAD GRINDER
Anthony Kushigian, P.O. Box 768, Hendersonville, N.C. 28739
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,501
Int. a.' B24B 3/22
U.S. a. 51—5 D 29 Qaims
1. A machine for grinding workpieces comprising a base, a
wheelhead carried by said base for reciprocation in a straight
line path and constructed and arranged to drive a grinding
wheel with its axis of rotation extending essentially trans-
versely to said straight line path of reciprocation, a workhead
adapted to releasably receive and rotate a workpiece and con-
structed and arranged to position the workpiece so that the
point of contact between such workpiece and the grinding
wheel is on one side of the centeriine which intersects the axis
of rotation of the wheel and extends parallel to such straight
line path of reciprocation of said wheelhead, a grinding wheel
dresser adapted to receive a dresser wheel and constructed and
arranged so that the point of contact between the dresser
wheel and the grinding wheel is located on the same side of the
grinding wheel as the point of contact between the grinding
36
1. An apparatus for grinding gear teeth having substantially
involute-shaped tooth flank profiles and tooth roots, compris-
ing:
at least one grinding head;
912
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a substantially dished grinding wheel having an active grind-
ing point and being mounted at said grinding head;
a grinding head support at which there is adjustably
mounted the grinding head in the radial direction ofthe
dished grinding wheel;
a dressing device displaceable in a predetermmed adjustment
direction;
means for displaceably grinding the dressing device at the
grinding head in the adjustment direction;
adjustment device means;
said adjustment drive means including adjustment gearing, a
pinion mounted at said grinding head, two gear racks
extending in the adjustment direction and with which
meshes said pinion, one of said gear racks being arranged
at said grinding head support, the other of said gear racks
being arranged at said dressing device;
said adjustment drive means imparting by means of the
adjustment gearing to the grinding head and the dressing
device adjustment movements in a ratio of approximately
1:2;
an advance drive means for displacing both gear racks in its
lengthwise direction such that the pinion is prevented
from rotating during a movement of the grinding head
which is caused by the adjustment drive means, in order to
thereby enable the dressing device to participate in the
movement of the grinding head in a ratio of approximately
1:1;
said advance drive means shifts the active grinding point of
the dished grinding wheel downwardly towards the tooth
root of the gear tooth being ground so as to selectively
grind a different part of the gear tooth by means of a
peripheral portion of the dished grinding wheel;
said advance drive means shifts the active grinding point of
the dished grinding wheel downwwardly towards the
tooth root of the gear tooth being ground in order to grind
said different part of the gear tooth along a grinding curve
which differs from the involute along which there is
ground the tooth flank profiles of the gear teeth.
4,393,626
TOOLHOLDER FOR SUPPORTING THIN ROTARY
TOOLS
George A. Schroer, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to Cincinnati
Milacron Inc., Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,577
Int. a.3 B24B 41/04
U.S. CI. 51—168 1 Qaim
1 A toolholder for supporting thin rotary tools, comprising:
(a) a first tool ring having
(1) a generally circular tool support section,
(2) a flanged shoulder portion adjacent to said support
section,
(3) facial tooth means and tooth space means formed in
said support section,
(4) means for locating and driving said ring with a rotat-
able tool spindle;
(b) a second tool ring having
(1) a generally circular tool support section,
(2) a fianged shoulder portion adjacent to said support
section,
(3) facial tool means and tooth space means formed in said
support section;
(c) means for supporting said first and second rings in a
concentric manner with each other and with the tooth
means of one ring aligned with and disposed facing the
tooth space means of the other ring; and
(d) means for clamping said rings together enmeshing re-
spective tool support sections of said rings
whereby a tool having a thickness equal to or less than the
combined lengths of each of said tool support sections of
said rings may be clamped and supported on a substan-
tially continuous bore support surface.
4,393,627
REVERSING SCREW/HIGH-LOW SPEED LEVEL WIND
SCREW
Harrison A. Ailey, Jr., Knoxville, Tenn., assignor to Acraioc
Corporation, Oak Ridge, Tenn.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,791
Int. CV B24B 19/00, 3/00
U.S. CI. 51—246 9 Claims
/^/'
1. Sharpening mechanism for moving at a variable speed
along the length of the edge of a recipicating knife of a cutting
mechanism comprising:
driving means;
grinding means driven by said driving means for contacting
an edge on said knife to be sharpened;
a movable carriage for supporting and moving said grinding
means along said edge of said recipicating knife;
traversing mechanism for moving said movable carriage,
said traversing mechanism including a drive shaft rotated
by said driving means and having a first and further por-
tion and right hand and left hand peripheral threads cut
therein, a guide means for following said peripheral
threads cut in said drive shaft, and a carrier member con-
necting said guide means and said movable carriage, said
right and left hand peripheral threads having a first se-
lected pitch along said first section of said drive shaft and
a pitch different from said first selected pitch along said
second portion of said drive shaft such that said driven
grinding means is moved along selected portions of said
recipicating knife edge at selected speeds.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
913
4,393,628
nxtD ABRASIVE POLISHING METHOD AND
' APPARATUS
John C. Ottman, San Jose, Calif., and John C. S. Shen, Roches-
ter, Minn., assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
I Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,549
Int. CI.' B24B 1/00
U.S. CI. 51-281 SF 11 Claims
brackets each having a base portion and two parallel ridges
outstanding therefrom in the same direction in channel config-
uration, said ridges being oppositely barbed and providing a
substantially rectangular notch gr<Mi\e between each barb and
said base portion, said awning slat being bifurcated along one
edge into a channel-shaped web obliquely joined to the remain-
der of the slat at one channel corner of said channel-shaped
web, the free edges of said channel-shaped web being oppo-
sitely beaded and being spaced apart so as to fit onto said
brackets by snap action, said beads being of substantially rect-
angular profile and fitting into said notches for support of said
slat on said brackets.
1. The method of polishing a rigid, metal magnetic disk
substrate comprising:
applying a water soluble, low viscosity liquid vehicle to the
disk substrate surface to be polished;
rotating an annulus of non-friable, non-rigid, high density
polyurethane foam impregnated with in excess of 50% b>
weight of classified hard particles, said annulus being
mounted on a rigid backing plate and having an inner
diameter greater than the difference of the inner and outer
radii of the disk substrate annular surface to be polished;
and
positioning said annulus of impregnated foam in contact
with said disk substrate with the axis of rotation parallel to
the axis of rotation of said disk substrate and relatively
displaced therefrom to cause the inner diameter of said
impregnated foam annulus to extend across the disk sub-
strate annular width to be polished, the contact pressure
being at least 10 pounds per square inch.
4,393,629
EXTRUDED SNAP-FASTENING FOR SLATS AND
METAL AWNING MADE THEREWITH
Aldo Gasparini, Kungsportsavenyn 34, and Nils E. Wimnell,
Karl Gustavsgatan 59, both of 411 36 Goeteborg, Sweden,
assignors to Aldo Gasparini and Nils Erik Wimnell
1 1 Filed May 5, 1981, Ser. No. 260,685
1 1 Int. CI.' E04B 1/34
U.S. CI. 52—74 11 Claims
1. A metal awning structure having at least one awning slat,
directly held in position at spaced locations along the same
lateral boundary of said slat, on at least two brackets, said
4.393,630
ACTUATION MEANS FOR THE RACKING PLATFORM
OF A MAST
Arnold W. Knox, deceased, late uf Tulsa, Okla. (by Ester Knox,
executrix), assignor to Crane Carrier Corporation, Tulsa.
Okla.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,049
Int. CI.' B66C 23/04. 23, n2
U.S. CI. 52—121 16 Claims
1. In combination with a telescoping mast having a fixed
lower structure and a traveling upper structure, actuation
means for timed extension and retraction of a platform at-
tached to said upper structure comprising;
at least one upper pulley secured within said upper structure
above said platform:
at least one lower pulley secured within said upper structure
below said platform;
traveling means cooperable with said upper structure and
said lower structure;
catch means on said lower structure for receiving and retain-
ing said lower traveling means; and
cable means extending from said platform around said upper
pulley, said lower pulley and connected to said traveling
means, whereby when said upper structure is extended
said traveling means is propelled along said lower struc-
ture until received by said catch means whereupon said
platform is extended.
914
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,631 to the upper vertical support wall of the building, wherein the
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ACOUSTIC CEILING TILE means for securing also includes a securing member coupled to
SYSTEM FOR DISPERSING LONG WAVE SOUND
Edward D. Krent, 207 W. Eisenhower Dr., Sharon, Mass. 02067
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,599
Int. aJ E04B 1/82
U.S. a. 52—144 25 Qaims
1. An acoustic tile ceiling system comprising:
a suspended ceiling structural grid adapted to hold a plural-
ity of individual acoustic tile elements;
a pluraliity of smoothly contoured acoustic tile elements,
each tile element having a surface thereof adapted to form
a ceiling surface when installed within said ceiling struc-
tural grid;
said tile element surface exhibiting a curvature substantially
as a surface of revolution varying smoothly and without
abrupt changes from a substantially horizontal aspect at
the periphery of said tile element through an increasingly
downwardly projecting curvature to an inflection point
through a decreasingly downwardly projecting curvature
to a central, substantially horizontal portion, depressed at
least 5 centimeters below the peripheral portion;
each said tile element forming in the composite with adja-
cent tile elements as installed in said structural grid, a
substantially continous smoothly flowing curvature, par-
ticularly adapted to disperse long wave length audible
sound.
the rigid frame and secured to the top of the lower vertical
support wall that in part defmes the existing window opening.
4,393,633
WALL CONSTRUCTION
Joseph Charniga, P.O. Box 292, New Middletown, Ohio 44442
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,480
Int. a.3 E04B 2/02; E04C 2/80
U.S. CI. 52—303 4 Qaims
4,393,632
BUILDING SYSTEM
Clarence N. Levesque, Westford, Mass., assignor to C. Levesque
Co. Inc., Lowell, Mass.
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,336
Int. a.3 E04H 7/00; E04B 2/88
VJS. a. 52—235 15 Claims
1. A building panel system for covering the exterior surface
of a building that is being restored having a plurality of struc-
tural panels with each panel adapted for support from an exist-
ing window opening and comprising; a rigid frame having a
window opening, a window secured in the frame window
opening, and means for securing the panel to the building
including brace means extending from the rigid frame above
the frame window opening to the building at the existing win-
dow opening, said existing window opening being deHned at
least in part by upper and lower vertical support walls,
wherein the existing window opening is greater in height than
the frame window opening with the existing window opening
being covered by the window and a section of the frame over-
lying the window, wherein the brace means comprises a brace
extending from the section of the frame overlying the window
1. An improvement in an exterior load bearing wall con-
struction having horizontally spaced vertically standing stud-
ding and outer and inner wall portions supported thereon, said
improvement comprising the formation of said outer wall
portion consisting of at least two layers of insulating board and
at least one layer of insulating batting and an exterior surfacing
material, a plurality of closely spaced scallops formed in the
inner surfaces of said studding to form narrow transverse areas
therebetween, said inner wall portion comprising dry wall and
the like positioned against said narrow transverse portions of
said studding, upper and lower plates positioned on the upper
and lower ends of said studding, said outer wall portion ex-
tending only partially into areas of said wall construction
between said studding so as to provide air spaces between said
outer wall portion and said inner wall portion and openings in
said inner wall portion for ventilating said air spaces.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
915
4,393,634
ROOFING SYSTEM AND NEEDLE PUNCHED
IMPREGNATED SYNTHETIC HBER FABRIC
Thomas R. McDermott, Franklin, Mass., and Robert K. Jack-
son, Spofford, N.H., assignors to Clark-Cutler-McDermott
Company, Franklin, Mass.
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,806
Int. CI.' B32B 5/24. 11/10: E04C 1/00
U.S. a. 52—309.1 18 Claims
1. A roofing system comprising:
a roofing deck having a substantially continuous top surface
area extending over the space covered by the roof;
a synthetic fiber needled fabric flexible porous layer cover-
ing said top surface, the fibers in said layer coated with
asphalt but without fiber-free asphalt retained within the
interstices of the fabric;
means for adhering said flexible layer to said top surface; and
a waterproof asphalt saturant applied in situ to the top sur-
face of said layer to form a continuous waterproof coating
which bonds by absorption in the upper lattice structure
of the said fabric layer.
4,393,635
INSULATED WALL CONSTRUCTION APPARATUS
Robert T. Long, 3216 Shasta Ct., NE., Cedar Rapids, Iowa
52402
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,039
Int. CV E04B 2/84, 1/74; E04C 2/26
U.S. a. 52—309.11 15 Qaims
said board and a central portion smaller than said flange, and
wherein said spools also each have an inner portion which is
larger than said central portion for locking said spool to said
board.
4,393,636
BOX BEAM REINFORCED CONCRETE STRUCTURE
Raymond H. Rockstead, and Christopher A. Rockstead, both of
10041 Tesia Rd., Livermore, Calif. 94550
Filed Sep. 24, 1980. Ser. No. 190,355
Int. a.^ E04B 1/16
U.S. a. 52—381 3 Claims
1. The combination of integrated spaced apart parallel con-
crete skin walls and an elongated monolithic solid concrete
core connecting said walls;
flexible wire mesh sections embedded in said walls and said
core and being positioned to provide continuous rein-
forcement extending medially of said walls and across said
core;
a plurality of sinuous truss wires each extending between
and having its apexes fixed to and providing an uninter-
rupted continuous wire connection between and support-
ing said sections in spaced apart substantially parallel
planes with said apexes embedded in said walls;
a pair of flexible frangible sheets mounted on and solely
supported by said truss wires one interiorly of and sub-
stantially parallel to each of said sections in spaced rela-
tion thereto and providing backing for concrete forming
said walls with said sections embedded medially in said
walls;
said sheets permitting cutting thereof to provide selectively
positioned sheet ends folded transversely and interiorly to
form spaced apart backing walls on opposite sides of and
generally parallel to one of said truss wires for supporting
plastic concrete forming said core contiguous to and inte-
grated with said skin walls; and
said last-named truss wire extending through and being
embedded in said core and having its length extending
longitudinally of said core.
4,393,637
WOOD ROOF TRUSS CONSTRUCTION
Leo D. Mosier, 322 Euclid, Sheboygan, Wis. 53081
Filed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 1%,075
Int. a.' E04B 1/32
U.S. a. 52—644 14 Qaims
1. An insulating wall comprising two spaced outer layers of
form-poured concrete; a high density insulating board disposed
between said outer layers; a plurality of rods extending perpen-
dicularly through said insulating layer and further extending
substantially from respective outer surfaces of said outer lay-
ers; and a plurality of retainer means mounted to receive and
immovably hold a rod for fixing the lateral position of said rods
with respect to said insulation layer, whereby said rods abut
said form during pouring of said concrete to retain said interior
layer substantially immovably during pouring and are retained
in said concrete after curing for forming a mechanical connec-
tion between said interior layer and each of said outer layers,
wherein said retainer means comprises a pair of spools formed
with central openings that can be inserted into opposite sides of
said insulating board, wherein said spools each have an en-
larged outer flange that can be depressed into the surface of
^^^^-^^m
« - n 17
1. A roof truss construction comprising a pair of redundant
super-positioned load resisting force systems, said systems
formed of a coincident top chord, a web system depending
from said top chord and a pair of individually functioning
bottom chords, one of said chords being a word bichord in-
cluding lap-splices, connected to said web system and the other
916
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
chord comprising tension rod means disposed longitudinally
within said bichord generally parallel thereto and means sup-
porting said tension rod independent of said bichord, said web
system including web clusters each comprising a vertical and
diagonal strut members depending from said top chord and
converging at a common point at the bottom chord, plate
means at the point of convergence secured to the bottom ends
of each converging strut member, said plate means having first
passage means formed horizontally therein and strap means
secured to and depending from said plate means and having
second passage means formed longitudinally therein for sup-
porting the rod without fixed attachment and said second
passage means being aligned in said web cluster and containing
spacer means passing therethrough whereby to secure said
web cluster to said bottom bichord.
4,393,639
REINFORCING ELEMENT AND PROCESS FOR ITS
MANUFACTURE
Franz Bucher, Reut-Nicolussi-Str. 12, A-6020 Innsbruck, Aus-
tria
per No. PCr/AT80/00003, § 371 Date Oct. 27, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Oct. 24, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01818, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 4, 1980
PCT Filed Jan. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 212,718
Claims priority, application Austria, Feb. 27, 1979, 1484/79
Int. Cl.^ E04C 5/02
U.S. CI. 52—730 11 Claims
4,393,638
ANCHOR ROD, METHOD OF SETTING IT IN PLACE
AND METHOD OF ITS MANUFACTURE
Rudolf Sell, Munich, and Herbert Kistner, Freiburg, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Upat GmbH & Co., Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,271
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 16,
1979, 2941769
Int. CI.' E04B ]/38
U.S. CI. 52—704 23 Claims
7^^
3 12 6
♦4-
^^
:=?
Y-
2 ' 6
L,
V:'V ^
I O I I'
V
7 6
12
''12'
1. A reinforcing insert to be embedded in a tension zone of
a ferroconcrete member, comprising an assembly of parallel,
closely juxtaposed steel rods including at least one through-
going main rod and at least one ancillary rod of lesser length
adjoining same, said ancillary rod being connected with said
main rod along a plurality of elongate stretches, two of said
stretches being located at the ends of said ancillary rod which
are offset from the extremities of said main rod to an extent
letting the tensile strength of said assembly vary in approxi-
mate conformity with the moment line of said ferroconcrete
member, said stretches having cross-sectional areas of suffi-
cient strength to transfer the tensile stress of said ancillary rod
from the ends thereof to said main rod.
4,393,640
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HANDLING AND
FILLING BAGS OR ENVELOPES
Denis B. Cole, Honiton, and Derek C. Trethewy, Esher, both of
England, assignors to Hazelwood Enterprises Limited, Alder-
ney, Channel Islands
Filed Aug. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 182,182
Int. CV B65B 9/08. 43/30. 43/36
U.S. CI. 53—69 17 Claims
1. An anchor rod for setting in and fastening, with the use of
a hardenable mortar, to concrete and similar structural matri-
ces into which a prebore which closely fits the portions of
greatest diameter of said anchor rod has been prepared, said
anchor having first and second extremities and comprising:
a connection portion at or near the first extremity of the rod
designed to remain outside of the prebore and to provide
for fastening an object to said rod or to said concrete or
structural matrix;
an insertion portion provided, in a region thereof extending
substantially to the second extremity (5) of the rod, with
profiling for causing mortar and abrasive grains mixed
therewith to be carried along by rotation of said anchor
rod during insertion thereof, said profiling being provided
in the form of a multiplicity of outwardly extending uni-
formly spaced ridges running in an axially directed steep-
pitch spiral configuration providing grooves (12) between
adjacent ridges, said ridges each having a slight trough-
like concavity (24) running between a pair of outwardly
directed apices (23).
1. Apparatus for handling flexible fillable containers selected
from the group consisting of preformed bags and envelopes,
comprising:
means for mounting a continuous length supply consisting of
a series of similar preformed flexible fillable containers,
each separated from its respective neighbour(s) by a tear-
line allowing detachment of the leading endmost such
flexible fillable container from the continuous length sup-
ply, each such container being open at one marginal edge
July 19, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
917
of the continuous length supply for insertion theremto of
a filling material;
means for intermittently advancing the free end of the con-
tinuous length supply;
a surface on which the flexible fillable containers are ar-
ranged to travel under control of said advancing means;
a filling station for said flexible fillable containers located at
a predetermined location along said surface;
intermittently operable suction means located at said filling
station for holding the leading endmost flexible fillable
container of the supply in a predetermined position and
selected orientation at said filling station;
intermittently operable blowing means for directing a stream
of air towards the opening of the said endmost container
while held by the suction means, and into the said con-
tainer to thereby hold the same open for the insertion of a
said filling material; and
intermittently operable clamping bar means located immedi-
ately upstream of said filling station and adapted in opera-
tion to clamp the leading edge of the flexible fillable con-
tainer next adjacent in said continuous supply to said
endmost container at least for a period of time after filling
of said endmost container is complete, thereby enabling
ready detachment of the filled endmost container from
said continuous supply along the tear-line separating said
endmost and said next adjacent containers, to leave said
filling station free for receipt of said next adjacent con-
tainer.
4,393,641
DEVICE FOR CLOSING GATHERED ENDS OF
WRAPPERS WITH U-SHAPED CLIPS
Herbert Niedecker, Am EUerhang 6, Konigstein 2, Fed. Rep. of
Germany (6240)
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,272
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 29,
1980, 3020325
Int. CI.' B65B 61/00
U.S. CI. 53—138 A 4 Claims
w.
1. In a device for closing a U-shaped clip about the gathered
end of a wrapper and comprising a housing carrying a clip-
closing die, a punch pivotally mounted on said die to move
from inoperative to clip-closing position in cooperation with
said die, means for supplying clips to said punch, and means for
moving said punch from inoperative to clip-closing position,
the improvement which comprises
(a) a wedge shaped opening provided in one end face of the
housing, the opening widening adjacent its apex to form a
space for receiving the gathered end;
(b) two gathering means pivotally mounted on the housing
on opposite sides of the wedge-shaped opening so that,
upon pivoting, a gathered end within the opening is
caused to enter the receiving space;
(c) a gathering nose on the punch; and
(d) means operatively connecting the gathering arms and the
punch so that only after the gathering arms have been
closed the punch is pivoted so that the nose engages and
further compacts the gathered end against the die where-
upon the punch applies the clip about the gathered end,
the clip being closed by the die.
4,393,642
SHEET RECEIVING AND STORAGE APPARATUS
Hendrik S. Plessers, Wychmaal, and Julianus J. Hellemans,
Kontich. both of Belgium, assignors to Agfa-Gevaeri N.V.,
Mortsel, Belgium
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,335
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 9, 1980,
8011695
Int. a.' B65B 5/06. 5/10. 7/00
U.S. CI. 53—266 R 14 Qaims
Jsh:^-
.'■'■. I
IT-,—',
1. A sheet-receiving and storage apparatus comprising a
housing having an entrance opening via which sheets can be
fed one by one into its interior, an open -bottomed magazine
releasably connected to said housing via said open bottom for
receiving sheets from said housing in the same sequence and
stormg them as a stack, a sheet advancing mechanism for
causing sheets entering said housing to advance to a rest posi-
tion with their upper portions within said magazine and their
trailing end portion extending through said open bottom into
said housing, sheet supporting means normally disposed in a
position underlying the trailing edges of a plurality of said
sheets in said rest position and thereby supporting a stack of
such sheets in face to face relationship in said rest position, a
mechanism for elevating said sheet supporting means up-
wardly from its normal position thereby to raise the supported
sheet stack bodily into the magazine, stack retaining means
operative for retaining the raised stack of sheets in the maga-
zine against the action of gravity after retraction of said sheet
supporting means to its normal position, and closure means for
light-tightly closing the bottom of said magazine after such
retraction. .
918
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,643
PROCESS FOR FORMING A BARRIER PHASE
Durward Fryar, Burlington, Ky., and Jerome J. Schmitz, Cincin-
nati, Ohio, assignors to The Procter & Gamble Company,
Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 306,808, Sep. 29, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 402,870
Int. a.^ B29D 3/00; B65B 7/28
U.S. a. 53—471 10 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a product containing two incom-
patible phases separated by a thin film barrier phase compris-
ing:
A. dipping a pin of appropriate size and possessing heat
transferring capability into a molten bath of the barrier
phase material, said pin's outer surface having a tempera-
ture below the solidification temperature of said barrier
phase.
B. withdrawing said pin from said barrier bath with a solidi-
fied film of said barrier material left on its surface;
C. placing the coated pin into an open end of a container
designed to contain the product, the coated pin being
placed tightly against an opposite end of said container
which is closed;
D. putting a molten outer phase material into a space be-
tween said coated pin and the outer wall(s) of said con-
tainer, maintaining the temperature of the outer surface of
said coated pin below the solidification temperatures of
the barrier phase and the outer phase materials thereby
allowing the outer phase material to solidify;
E. increasing the temperature of said pin sufficiently to allow
barrier phase material to attach to said solidified outer
phase and removing said pin from said container; and;
F. pourmg molten inner phase material into the space previ-
ously occupied by said pin and allowing said mner phase
material to solidify.
7. A process according to claim 1 wherein the pin has cool-
ing water circulating therein during the barrier forming step.
8 A process according to claim 7 wherein hot water is
circulating within the pin during the barrier release and attach-
ment to the outer phase step.
4,393,644
TWO-SPEED DRIVE APPARATUS FOR BLOWER FANS
Wayne B. Martenas, New Holland, Pa., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New Holland, Pa.
Filed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,869
Int. aj AOID 87/10: B02B ]/02
U.S. a. 56—12.8 7 Qaims
1. In an agricultural machine including a frame, a blower fan
supported on said frame for discharging crop material from
said agricultural machine, and a main drive shaft supported on
said frame for driving said blower fan, the improvement com-
prising:
(a) an input shaft connected to be rotated by said main drive
shaft;
(b) said blower fan connected to rotate on said input shaft;
(c) a first gear connected to rotate with said input shaft;
(d) a second gear disposed on said input shaft;
(e) a third gear interconnecting said first and second gears;
(0 means connecting said third gear to said blower fan;
(g) means for selectively fixing said second gear to either of
said input shaft and said frame;
(h) said blower fan being rotated at the same speed as said
input shaft when said second gear is fixed to, and rotates
with, said input shaft; and
(i) said blower fan being rotated at a slower speed than said
input shaft when said second gear is fixed to said frame.
4,393,645
REAR BAGGER ATTACHMENT FOR LAWN MOWER
James W. Moore, Beaver Dam, Wis., assignor to Deere & Com-
pany, Moline, III.
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,261
Int. CI.' AOID 35/22
U.S. a. 56—202 13 Claims
3. A bag assembly for a lawn mower carried in underslung
relation on a vehicle having rear wheels supporting the vehicle
frame, and in which the mower has a duct extending upwardly
and rearwardly to a rear discharge portion terminating rear-
wardly of the vehicle and for directing grass clippings trans-
verse of the vehicle, said bag assembly comprising: a bagger
frame mounted on the vehicle frame; a pair of rod-like horizon-
tally disposed rectangular-shaped bag supporting rims with
adjacent fore-and-aft extending sides extending rearwardly
from inner forward corners; a pair of bags suspended on and
depending from the respective rims; structures at said corners
rigid with the respective rims and projecting forwardly from
said corners; means mounting said structures at said corners on
the bagger frame for vertical sliding movement to and from
lowermost positions in which said rims are slightly lower than
the discharge portion and for suspending the respective rims
and bags in cantilever fashion from said corners; and a bagger
top hinged at a forward edge to the bagger frame and extend-
ing over the respective rims and having an opening receiving
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
919
and for passing material from the discharge portion of the duct
into the top.
4,393,646
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR JOINING YARN OR
1 1 THREAD ENDS
Sergio Lucchetta, Wadenswil, Switzerland, assignor to Mas-
chinenfakrik Schweiter AG, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,327
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 12, 1980,
9216/80 I j
1 1 Int. a.' DOIH ]5/00
U.S. a. 57-22 8 Claims
a lappet;
a holder inserted into said lappet;
a resilient support member;
a snail wire supported, through said resilient support mem-
ber, by said holder inserted into said lappet so as to
contact running spinning yarns for producing inherent
vibrations at a side portion of said snail wire; and
a piezo-electric element attached to a portion of said snail
wire so as to detect said inherent vibrations for detecting
presence of running spinning yarns, said snail wire being
formed, at said portion thereof attached to said piezo-elec-
tric element along the face portion thereof, mto a Hat-
shaped portion, said fiat-shaped portion having a groove
formed therein at a side face portion thereof opposite to
said face portion attached to said piezo-electric element,
and at approximately a central portion of said piezo-elec-
tric element in a direction intersecting at right angles with
the axial direction of said snail wire so as to form a thin
portion in said face portion of said snail wire attached to
said piezo-electric element.
1. A method for splicing two yarn or thread ends in a splic-
ing head of the type having a turbulence chamber for receiving
the ends to be spliced together wherein the ends are subjected
to centric pressure medium flow which is tangential to the
periphery of the turbulence chamber so that the yarn or thread
ends are subjected to turbulence and are twisted together to
form a joint, including
providing two driving pressure medium fiow streams to the
turbulence chamber to form the pressure medium fiow
therein,
introducing the two driving flow streams into the turbulence
chamber through inlets at opposite side walls thereof, the
two streams at the inlets being parallel with each other,
and
guiding the two driving fiow streams in opposite directions
4,393.648
FIBER-GUIDING ELEMENT FOR OPEN END SPINNING
MACHINES
Miroslav Rambousek, Usti n Orl, and Stanislav Svarc, Doini
Dobrouc, both of Czechoslovakia, assignors to Elitex, koncem
textilniho strojirenstvi, Liberec, Czechoslovakia
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,598
Claims priority, application Czechoslovakia, Sep. 11, 1980,
6157-80
Int. Cl.^ DOIH 7/882
U.S. CI. 57-413 4 Claims
along
ber.
emniscate-like paths through the turbulence cham-
4,393,647
SNAIL WIRE ARRANGEMENT FOR YARN BREAKAGE
DETECTION IN RING FRAMES
Yohji Kitamura, 1-18, Deguchi 1-chome, Hirakata-shi, Osaka,
Japan
per No. PCT/JP81/00036, § 371 Date Aug. 20, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 20, 1981, PCT Pub. No. W081/02433, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 3, 1981
PCT Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,424
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1980, 55-25200;
Dec. 4, 1980, 55-174238; Dec. 4, 1980, 55-174239
Int. a.3 DOIH 13/16
U.S. a. 57—81 3 aaims
1. A yam breakage detecting snail wire arrangement for ring
frames and the like comprising:
1. In an open-end spinning machine having a hollow spin-
ning rotor which may be rotated in either direction for the
purpose of forming either yarn with a lefi-hand twist or yarn
with a right-hand twist, the improvement which comprises a
fiber-guiding element having an exit opening through which
separated fibers are directed into the spinning rotor, the guid-
ing element being fixedly mounted with respect to the rotor
and having a left fiber-directing wall and a right fiber-directing
wall, the left fiber-directing wall of said fiber-guiding element
being oriented in a first direction substantially tangential to the
then retreating collecting surface of the spinning rotor when
the rotor is rotating in one direction, the opposite, right fiber-
directing wall of the fiber-guiding element at the exit opening
thereof within the rotor being oriented in a second direction
opposite the said one direction and substantially tangential
relative to the then retreating collecting surface of the spinning
rotor when the rotor is rotating in the other, reverse direction.
920
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19. 1983
4,393,649
STEAM OUTPUT CONTROL SYSTEM
Dah Yu Cheng, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to International
Power Technology, Inc., Sunnyvale, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 59,591, Jul. 23, 1979, Pat. No.
4,297,841. This application Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 175,287
Int. a.' F02C 7/00
U.S. a. 60—39.05 15 Claims
EXHAUST
GASES
and flexible relative to said rigid material of said frusto-coni-
cal main body portion, said different material of the at least
said surface of said solid pointed cone-shaped tip portion
being flexible at said bond during operational rotation of the
spinner causing local high stress levels to be produced and
cracks propagated in any ice at said bond with surface de-
flection of the remainder of the at least said surface of said
solid pointed cone-shaped tip portion causing any accretion
of ice thereon to shed from the remainder of the spinner.
SUPER HEATED
STEAM OUT
4,393,651
FUEL CONTROL METHOD AND APPARATUS
Robert E. Peck, Prospect, and Raymond D. Zagranski, Somers,
both of Conn., assignors to Chandler Evans Inc., West Hart-
ford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,059
Int. Cl.^ F02C 9/36
U.S. CI. 60—39.281 9 Claims
1. A heat engine comprising a dual fluid cycle engine having
a counterflow heat exchanger, comprising at least an evapora-
tor and a superheater section, for recovering waste heat from
the engine exhaust gases to evaporator water into superheated
steam for mixmg with the engine combustion products, and
having means for regulating the steam generation rate compris-
ing a control valve located between the evaporator and super-
heater sections of the heat exchanger.
4,393,650
GAS TURBINE ENGINE HAVING AN AUTOMATIC ICE
SHEDDING SPINNER
Francis C. Pool, Duffield, England, assignor to Rolls-Royce
Limited, London, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 222,750, Jan. 6, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 887,418, Mar. 15,
1978, abandoned. This application Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No.
236,045
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 20, 1977,
16318/77
Int. C\? P02G 3/00
U.S. a. 60—39.093 10 Qaims
1. In a fuel control for a gas turbine engine of the type
having: a pump for delivering a pressurized flow of fuel; an
inlet conduit for receiving fuel flow from the pump; a dis-
charge conduit in fluid communication with the inlet conduit
for delivering fuel to the engine; and a computer responsive to
selected engine parameters for generating a signal indicative of
a requested fuel flow, the improvement comprising:
a constant flow regulator fluidly connected to the pump and
the inlet conduit for generating a constant flow of fuel in the
inlet conduit;
a bypass conduit in fluid communication with the inlet side of
the pump for returning fuel thereto; and
a flow diverter, having first and second outlet ports, positioned
in the inlet conduit such that it receives the constant fuel
flow therein and has the first and second outlet ports in
respective fluid connection with the discharge conduit and
the bypass conduit, the flow diverter including a flow divid-
ing device responsive to the signal from the computer for
apportioning the constant fuel flow between the first and
second outlet ports so that the requested fuel fiow is deliv-
ered to the discharge conduit and the remainder of the
constant fuel flow is delivered to the bypass conduit.
1. In a gas turbine propulsion engine for aircraft in which
thrust is provided only from flow of exhaust gases or a combi-
nation of flow of exhaust gases and by-pass air, said engine
having an air inlet and an exhaust gas outlet, the improvement
in a spinner positioned in the forward end of said air inlet for
automatically shedding ice accretions at operational rotations
of the engine, said spinner comprising:
a conical member having an included conical angle of substan-
tially 57°, said conical member having a frusto-conical main
body portion and a solid pointed cone-shaped tip portion
attached thereto by a bond, said solid pointed cone-shaped
tip portion of said spinner having an axial length relatively
shorter than an axial length of said frusto-conical main body
portion and said axial length of said solid pointed cone-
shaped tip portion being no greater than 75 mm. and no less
than 50 mm., said frusto-conical main body portion being
manufactured from a material rigid at operational rotations
of the spinner, and said solid pointed cone-shaped tip portion
having at least a surface made of a different material from
4,393,652
EXHAUST SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
John H. Munro, 18 W. Mystic Ave., Mystic, Conn. 06355
Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,654
Int. a.3 FOIN 3/02. 1/24. 3/20
U.S. CI. 60—295 3 Qaims
1. An exhaust system for connection to exhaust gas pipes of
an internal combustion engine comprising a casing adapted for
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
921
flow therethrough of exhaust gases from an upstream end to a
downstream end of said casing, said casing having a muffler
chamber at its upstream end, an intermediate spark and mois-
ture arrester chamber and an exhaust gas purifier chamber at its
downstream end, said muffler chamber comprising a remov-
able foraminous cartridge having an axial opening therein for
flow of exhaust gases therethrough and a sound attenuating
material disposed about said cartridge, said removable forami-
nous cartridge containing a plurality of sound attenuating
chambers decreasing in size from the upstream end to the
downstream end and having openings for passage of sound
waves from said chambers to said sound attenuating material,
said intermediate chamber being filled with a heat and corro-
sion resistant strand material presenting a large number of
surfaces serving to filtering out sparks and moisture and fur-
ther muffling exhaust gases passing therethrough, said exhaust
gas purifier chamber comprising a replaceable foraminous
cartridge filled with small particles of exhaust gas purifying
material, said purifying cartridge being supported in said gas
purifier chamber by removable means whereby exhaust gases
pass upwardly therethrough and whereby said cartridge may
be withdrawn from said chamber for inspection or replacement
of said cartridge.
4,393,654
SHAPE MEMORY ELEMENT ENGINE
L. Ronald PeUy, Box 385, Fillmore, Calif. 93015
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 56,429, Jul. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 275,101
Int. a.' P03G 7/06
U.S. CI. 60-527 5 ci.i„s
4,393,653
RECIPROCATING EXTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Victor H. Fischer, Artarmon, Australia, assignor to Thermal
Systems Limited, Grand Cayman, British West Indies
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,867
Claims priority, application Australia, Jul. 16, 1980, PE4554
Int. CI.' FOIK 21/04
U.S. q. 60-511 25 Claims
1. A mechanism for transforming heat energy into mechani-
cal energy comprising;
a. a plurality of deformable shape memory elements having
inner surfaces and responsive to form changes at a prede-
termined transition temperature;
b. a hot fluid incorporating a temperature above said transi-
tion temperature of said shape memory elements;
c. a cold fluid incorporating a temperature below said transi-
tion temperature of said shape memory elements; and
d. a crankshaft including at least one offset crankpin rotat-
ably connected to one end of said shape memory elements,
said crankpin incorporating fluid passageways for trans-
porting, respectively, hot and cold fluids, said fluid pas-
sages sequentially and sealably cooperating with said
inner surfaces of said shape memory elements whereby
said cold fluid may contact said shape memory elements
prior to deformation and said hot fluid may contact said
shape memory elements prior to recovery.
4,393,655
RESERVOIR FOR A MASTER CYLINDER
Junichi Komorizono, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Aisin Seiki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Kariya, Japan
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 235,045
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 19, 1980, 55-19890(U]
Int. a.' B60T 11/26
U.S. CI. 60-585 3 Qaims
8 7b
7t 5 70
1. A method of operating a reciprocating external combus-
tion engine having a cylinder and a piston therein defining a
working end space, wherein energy is transferred to a working
gas from a heated vaporizable liquid heat transfer medium,
which comprises
(1) inducting working gas into the end space;
(2) generating externally of the cylinder heated heat-transfer
medium under a pressure such as to maintain the medium
in the liquid state;
(3) after induction, injecting heated liquid medium into the
working gas and allowing at least part of the liquid me-
dium to vaporize, so as to raise the interna! energy of the
gas;
(4) in an expansion stroke of the piston, allowing the wet gas
containing the heat-transfer medium to expand thereby
driving the piston;
(5) exhausting wet gas from the end space near the end of the
expansion stroke;
(6) separating liquid heat-transfer medium from wet exhaust
gas containing heat-transfer medium vapor; and
(7) recycling the separated liquid medium to stage (2) above.
1. A reservoir for a master cylinder which comprises a
reservoir body adapted to be placed above and secured to a
master cylinder body and having a top opening defined by a
top peripheral edge portion, a cap adapted to be secured to the
reservoir body for closing the top opening, a flexible dia-
phragm disposed between the reservoir body and the cap. said
diaphragm including a flexible portion substantially covering
the top opening of the reservoir body and a peripheral portion
922
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
adapted to be interposed between the top peripheral edge
portions of the reservoir body and the cap, a depressing plate
interposed between the peripheral portions of the diaphragm
and the cap, and restraining means provided on the depressing
plate for engagement with the peripheral portion of the dia-
phragm to thereby restrain it from a radially inward move-
ment, said cap being provided with a pair of hook-shaped
portions for engagement with an outer edge of said depressing
plate for securing said depressing plate to said cap, and said
diaphragm being formed with a pair of inward projections
engaging apertures in said depressing plate for securing said
diaphragm to said depressing plate such that said cap, depress-
ing plate, and diaphragm form a sub-assembly to be placed on
the reservoir body.
4,393,657
METHOD FOR RECOVERING WASTE HEAT AS
MOTIVE POWER
Isao Takatama, 2-5-6 Kohokudai, Abiko, Chiba-ken, Japan
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,732
Int. CV FOIK 7/16
U.S. a. 60—653 4 Qaims
4,393,656
WASTE HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM FOR AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Forest L. Anderson, 12186 Melody Dr., Denver, Colo. 80234,
and Robert H. Nation, 13164 Elk PI., Denver, Colo. 80239
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 204,855, Nov. 7, 1980, Pat. No.
4,351,155. This application Sep. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 420,494
Int. CV FOIK 23/10
U.S. CI. 60—618 18 Claims
1. A method primarily intended for recovering and utilizing
waste heat from the exhaust and coolant of an internal combus-
tion engine by using a single working fluid, said method com-
prising the steps of:
(a) pumping liquified working fluid to a first location along
a first path,
(b) vaporizing said working fluid at said first location along
said first path to a high side temperature and pressure by
applying waste heat from said exhaust,
(c) expanding said vaporized working fluid in said first path
to produce work,
(d) condensing said expanded working fluid to a liquid state
by removing heat therefrom,
(e) rep)eating steps (a)-(d) while simultaneously,
(0 pumping said liquified working fluid along a second path
having at least two portions thereof in parallel,
(g) vaporizing said working fluid of step (0 in said parallel
portions of said second path to high side temperatures and
pressures less than the high side temperature and pressure
of said first path by respectively applying waste heat in
parallel from said coolant and the removed heat of step
(d),
(h) expanding said vaporized working fluid in said second
path to produce work,
(i) condensing said expanded working fluid of step (h) to a
liquid state, and
(j) repeating steps (O-(')
1. A novel method for the recovery of waste heat from a
waste gas in the form of motive power in a cycle having a
superheater provided on the upstream side and a counterflow
heat exchanger on the downstream side respectively in the
path of the waste gas to permit efficient recovery of the sensi-
ble heat of waste gas, characterized by injecting part of the
high-pressure hot water brought to an elevated temperature by
the heat absorbed within said counterflow heat exchanger into
the circulation steam of the superheater system emanating
from the outlet of said superheater thereby cooling the circula-
tion steam into a saturated steam, returning the saturated steam
to said superheater via the inlet thereof thereby enabling the
saturated steam within said superheater to be converted into a
superheated steam by the heat derived through the gas-gas
heat exchange from the waste gas within said superheater,
supplying a mass flow of the superheated steam equalling the
amount of the hot water used for the aforementioned injection
as the working steam for the steam turbine system to the steam
turbine thereby causing the superheated steam within the
steam turbine to be adiabatically expanded to generate motive
power, subsequently introducing the expanded steam into the
condenser to be condensed therein, introducing the resultant
condensed cold water into said counterflow heat exchanger to
be converted therein into a high-temperature, high-pressure
hot water by the heat derived through the gas-liquid heat
exchange from the waste gas within the heat exchanger, sup-
plying the portion of the hot water remaining after deduction
of the portion for use in the aforementioned cooling of the
circulation steam to the hot water turbine to be adiabatically
expanded therein to generate motive power, subsequently
introducing the expanded hot water (wet steam) into the con-
denser to be condensed therein, and thereafter repeating the
same heat cycles as described above sequentially one after
another.
4,393,658
EXTRACTION CONDENSING TURBINE
Wulf Bohnenkamp, Diisseldorf-Wittlaer, and Gerd Hempel,
Hamburg, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Blohm
& Voss AG, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 83,413. Oct. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 281,934
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 13,
1978, 2844681
Int. a.^ FOIB 31/08
U.S. CI. 60—657 6 aaims
1. A steam extraction turbine comprising: a high pressure
turbine section; a low pressure turbine section from which
steam is exhausted from said turbine; a steam extraction section
arranged in the steam flow path intermediate said high and said
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
923
low pressure sections of said turbine from which steam is fed
into said low pressure section; said steam extraction section
including steam extraction chamber means fed from said high
pressure section from which steam is extracted from said tur-
bine for external use; valve means between said steam extrac-
tion chamber means and said low pressure section for control-
ling the amount of steam flowing therebetween; and cooling
means defining a steam flow path between said steam extrac-
tion chamber means and said low pressure section in parallel
with the flow path through said valve means for supplying
steam to prevent overheating of said low pressure section, said
cooling means including energy extraction means for extract-
ing from the steam flowing through said cooling means energy
which is applied to drive said turbine.
M 4,393,659
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING
STERILE SLUSH ICE
Richard M. Keyes, Lake Summerset, and Stephen W. Schwit-
ters, Rockford, both of III., assignors to Taylor Freezer Com-
pany, Rockton, III.
I Filed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 384,014
Int. a.3 F25C 1/00
U.S. a. 62—66 _ 8 Qaims
1. A method of producing surgical sterile slush ice from a
surgical sterile liquid for use in surgical procedures compris-
ing:
(a) providing a portable refrigeration apparatus including a
cabinet having an open top heat transfer basin at the top
and depending side walls defining an enclosure, the refrig-
erating apparatus having refrigeration mechanism in the
cabinet including an evaporator in heat transfer relation to
the heat transfer basin and compressor means and con-
denser means and expansion control means connected in a
closed refrigeration loop with the evaporator;
(b) providing a separate sterilizable product basin dimen-
sioned to be removably receivable in the heat transfer
basin;
(c) introducting a quantity of non-toxic heat transfer medium
into the heat transfer basin;
(d) sterihzing the product basin to surgical sterility and
positioning the product basin in the heat transfer basin for
cooling of the product basin via the heat transfer medium;
(e) introducing a quantity of a surgical sterile liquid of a type
suitable for subcutaneous administration into the product
basin;
(0 operating the refrigeration mechanism to cause congeal-
ing of the surgical sterile liquid on the walls of the product
basin;
(g) providing a sterilized scraping tool, and scraping ice off
the walls of the product basin as the sterile liquid congeals
thereon to produce loose sterile ice slush in the product
basin; and
(h) allowing a quantity of the loose sterile ice slush to accum-
mulate in the product basin and removing the loose sterile
ice slush from the product basin for immediate use in
surgical procedures.
4,393,660
QUIESCENT FORMATION OF GASIHED ICE PRODUCT
AND PROCESS
Fredric Kleiner, New City, N.Y., and Valery B. Zemelman,
Wilton, Conn., assignors to General Foods Corporation, White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,233
Int. a.' F25C ///*
U.S. CI. 62-69 4 aaims
1
*
' 1
1
J
1 i
1 - " '
'«
ra
gJ:
Lj
.:.
"- P^^s^?^
jFzO
~ ^-n
;^.— ^^^-^
* ".
' ' 1
:i.-i n
- - 1
:r:
"le
^
n.
^ x,
1. A process for preparing gasified ice characterized by a
granular, crystalline porous structure, a brittle texture, good
stability in its frozen state, and the ability to rapidly and quietly
release its gas content to aqueous solution upon melting, which
process comprises:
a. maintaining aqueous liquid in a pressurized vessel under
conditions of temperature and pressure effective to form a
stable gas hydrate upon contact with a conditionally-sta-
ble-hydrate-forming gas;
b. introducing finely-dispersed bubbles of a conditionally-
stable-hydrate-forming gas into said aqueous liquid, at a
pressure above that within said vessel to contact said
liquid with said gas;
c. constantly withdrawing gas from said vessel to maintain a
substantially constant pressure within said vessel;
d. maintaining said contact for a period of time effective to
form a suspension comprising gas hydrate dispersed
within said liquid;
e. freezing said suspension under pressure; and
f. separating unreacted aqueous liquid from said vessel prior
to freezing.
1032 O.C
4,393,661
MEANS AND METHOD FOR REGULATING FLOWRATE
IN A VAPOR COMPRESSION CYCLE DEVICE
Himanshu B. Vakil, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,493
Int. a.^ F25B 41/00
U.S. a. 62-113 9 aaims
1. A method for regulating the working fluid flowrate in a
-36
924
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
vapor compression cycle device which comprises compressing
a working fluid vapor in a compressor, condensing working
fluid vapor in a condensing heat exchanger, passing a portion
of the working fluid from said condensing heat exchanger
through a first expansion device positioned so as to pass work-
ing fluid from the lower most section or termination of the
output of said condensing heat exchanger, passing a portion of
the working fluid from said condensing heat exchanger
through a second expansion device positioned so as to pass
working fluid from a region of the condensing heat exchanger
itMjr/IWtM/ ,
output which is upstream or higher than the inlet to said first
expansion device, said working fluid flowing in said expansion
devices being substantially in heat exchange relationship such
that the working fluid flowing through said first expansion
device can be cooled by the expanded working fluid flowing
through said second expansion device, passing the working
fluid from said expansion devices to an evaporating heat ex-
changer or to an evaporating heat exchanger and associated
inlet tube of said compressor, evaporating the working fluid in
said evaporative heat exchanger, and finally compressing the
working fluid vapor for recirculation.
interconnecting an outlet from said compressor to a second
heat exchanger means, means for varying the load on said
compressor, a liquid coolant means connected to said second
heat exchanger means, a receiver for cooled liquid refrigerant
connected to said second heat exchanger means, conduit means
connected from the outlet of said receiver to said evaporator
means of said first heat exchanger means, and expansion valve
means in said conduit means, said method comprising the steps
of:
establishing a desired set point temperature to be maintained in
a predetermined one of said zones designated a control zone;
constantly measuring the actual temperature in said control
zone;
establishing a continuous series of equal time sampling periods
for said compressor;
operating said compressor at a relatively high load for a prede-
termined first portion of each time sampling period respon-
sive to said measured temperature and at a relatively low
load for the remaining or second portion of the sampling
period;
during each time sampling period, determining the difference
in the actual temperature from the set point temperature in
the control zone;
calculating any change in the length of time for the first por-
tion of the next sampling period required to maintain the set
point temperature in the control zone from said difference;
controlling the compressor responsive to said calculation ac-
cordingly so that it is cycled from high load to low load
during each time sampling period;
establishing a continuous series of equal time sampling periods
for each of said fans or valves; and
controlling the length of time during the first parts of said time
sampling periods for each of said fans or valves that each of
said fans or valves are turned on for purposes of zone tem-
perature control.
4,393,662
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR REFRIGERATION OR AIR
CONDITIONING INSTALLATION
George P. Dirth, 504 Cambrian Way, San Ramon, Calif. 94583
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,207
Int. Cl.^ F25D 77/00; G05D 2i/i2
U.S. CI. 62-115 9 Claims
4,393,663
TWO-PHASE THERMOSYPHON HEATER
Howard E. Grunes, and Dennis J. Morrison, both of Santa Cruz,
Calif., assignors to Gas Research Institute, Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,817
Int. C\? F25D U/00
U.S. CI. 62—119 12 Qaims
TYnCAt RLfRWtMnON SYSTtM
/«0
-COCUM Tom*
COOLMt Town
OfLIVOT IMTIII
Ligulo
MraMOiMT
k-^.a4-»..-@4r^c-a|
1. A method for increasing the efficiency and reducing the
power consumption of a refrigeration system have a compres-
sor driven by a motor, first heat exchanger means with evapo-
rator means located in a control zone and one or more addi-
tional zones to be cooled, said first heat exchanger means being
connected to the compressor inlet, fan means associated with
said first heat exchanger means, a conduit for liquid refrigerant
j:^ —
KSTRICTlON
EVAPORATOR
HEAT
SOURCE
rlO
COHDENSER
^2S
t^
1. Apparatus for transferring heat from a heat source to a
heat sink via a vaporizable liquid when the apparatus is operat-
ing, the apparatus comprising
evaporator means at the heat source for heating the vaporiz-
able liquid so that a portion of the liquid is vaporized to
produce a moving stream of a heated liquid-vapor mixture;
condenser means at the heat sink, the condenser means having
a inlet and an outlet, the inlet being communicatively cou-
pled to the evaporator means for receiving the heated mix-
ture, and wherein the condenser means extracts both sensible
and latent heat from the heated mixture and condenses the
vapor portion of the mixture back into liquid form, and
wherein the outlet is communicatively coupled to the evapo-
rator means for returning the cooled liquid and condensed
vapor to the evaporator for reheating;
supply means for communicatively coupling the inlet of the
condenser means to the evaporator means; and
return means for communicatively coupling the outlet of the
July 19, 1983
Jl
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
925
condenser means to the evaporator means, the return means
further including restriction means for passing the cooled
liquid and condensed vapor from the outlet of the condenser
means to the evaporator means while impeding the flow of
vapor from the evaporator means to the condenser means
through the outlet of the condenser means by way of the
return means when the apparatus is operating.
4,393,664
MULTIPLE DAMPER ASSEMBLY FOR REACH-IN
CASES OF THE AIR DEFROST TYPE
George E. Wallace, Levittown, Pa., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries, Inc., Farmington, Conn.
I Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,482
I Int. a.3 A47F i/04
U.S. a. 62-256 ,0 Qaims
E? 44 4«
4,393,665
SERVER FOR WINE BOTTLES AND THE LIKE
James H. Gardner, and Noel H. deNevers, both of Salt Lake
City, Utah, assignors to Aurora Design Associates, Inc , Salt
Lake City, Utah
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 171,901, Jul. 24, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser No 61 655
Jul. 30, 1979, Pat. No. 4,255,944. This application Mar. 30, '
1981, Ser. No. 248,816
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 17,
1981, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q\? F25D i/08
U.S. a 62-457 9ci^^
1. In a refrigerated display case formed with an air inflow
duct and an adjacent primary air passage having a refrigeration
coil therein and respectively having inflow and exhaust open-
ings for communicating said duct and passage with the ambient
atmosphere during a defrost cycle, the improvement compris-
ing:
(a) a first series of dampers controlling air flow through the
exhaust openings;
(b) a second series of dampers controlling air flow through
the inflow openings; and
(c) means interengaging all of said dampers for joint simulta-
neous movement to open and closed positions respec-
tively, the dampers of each series being arranged in a
straight row, the row of dampers of the first series being
parallel to the row of dampers of the second series, each
damper of the first series being aligned transversely of said
rows with a damper of the second series, the damper-
interengaging means including an element extending be-
tween and rigidly connecting all the dampers of one of
said series, said element being in the form of an elongated
bar fixedly connected to each of the dampers of said one
series and extending from end-to-end of said one series,
the dampers of each series being hingedly mounted for
movement between open and closed positions, all the
dampers of each series being swingable about a common
hinge axis, the hinge axes of the first and second series
being parallel, said bar extending in parallel relation to
said hinge axes, said damper-interengaging means includ-
ing a cam on each damper of said one series and a tongue
on the corresponding, transversely aligned damper of the
other series engageable by the cam upon opening of the
damper of said one series, the cams on the several dampers
of said one series biasing the tongues of the several damp-
ers of the other series when the dampers of said one series
are moved to open position, for simultaneous movement
of the dampers of the other series to open position con-
jointly with the dampers of said one series.
1. A server for wine bottles and the like comprising
a housing open at the top for receiving a bottle and having
a side wall shaped to conform to and surround the side
exterior of the bottle and a bottom wall joined at its perim-
eter to said side wall, said side wall having a height of at
least one-half the height of the enlarged portion of the
bottle and being made of a heat conductive material, the
side wall and bottom wall forming a receptacle means for
holding ice in contact with said side wall to cause said side
wall to absorb heat from the bottle if the bottle is at a
higher temperature than the side wall, and to substantially
prevent the transfer of ambient heat to the bottle, and
support means within said housing above said bottom wall to
hold the bottle above and out of contact with the ice, said
support means having openings therein to allow place-
ment of ice into the receptacle means through the top
opening of the housing.
4,393,666
BALANCED HEAT EXCHANGE ASSEMBLY
Doyle A. Revis, 9864 Monroe Dr., Dallas, Tex. 75220
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,614
Int. CV F25B 27/02
U.S. a. 62—506
1 Qaim
LM XD MCm'
1. A heat exchange assembly for reclaiming heat from the
refrigerant of an air conditioning system comprismg:
a water circulation means;
a refrigerant circulation means;
a plurality of tube-in-tube heat exchange coils connected in
parallel in the refrigerant and water circulation means to
receive refrigerant in one tube and water in the other for
heat exchange therebetween; and
means for ensuring a substantially equal rate of flow of
refrigerant through each of the heat exchange coils, said
means includes a refrigerant-in manifold pipe connecting
the upstream end of the refrigerant tube of each of the
coils to the refrigerant circulation circuit and a refriger-
926
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
ant-out manifold pipe connecting the downstream end of
the refrigerant tube of each coil to the refrigerant circula-
tion circuit, said inlet manifold pipe having successive
decreases of cross-sectional area downstream of each said
upstream end connection and said outlet manifold pipe
having successive increases of cross-sectional area up-
stream of each said downstream end connection.
4,393,668
MANUAL KNITTING FRAME WITH SUPPORT
OifTord Leach, Sr., 1947 Woodglen La., #1, Vacaville, Calif.
95688
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,679
Int. a.J D04B 3/00
U.S. a. 66— 4 - 6aaims
4,393,667
JEWELRY ARTICLES
Martine Reinstein, Valkenlaan 14a, B-1800 Vilvoorde, Belgium,
and Jacques Wurcel, Elfbunderslaan 18, B-1650 Beersel,
Belgium
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No, 271,875
Qaims priority, application Belgium, Aug. 20, 1980, 201799
Int. a.^ A44C 17/02
U.S. a. 63—29 R 10 Qaims
1. A jewelry article set comprising:
a support;
a setting having an ornamental element on a front face
thereof and a backface;
male and female elements for coupling said backface of said
setting to said support;
said female element being located and permanently fixed
inside said setting and having a first groove which is open
towards said backface of said setting and toward two
opposite faces of said female element, said first groove
having first and second parts, said first part of said first
groove being broader than said second part, said second
part of said first groove opening towards said backface of
said setting and having an end which is substantially co-
planar with said backface of said setting;
said male element having a shape complementary to that of
said first groove so that when said male element is inserted
into said first groove of said female element through one
of said two opposite faces of said female element, both said
male and female elements are hidden from view and it is
impossible to disengage said male element from said fe-
male element through said second part of said first groove;
a blocking lever for fastening said male and female elements
together, said blocking lever having one end connected to
a pivot connected to said female element and having
means on its other end for gripping said lever to a boss
of said female element located inside said setting to fasten
said blocking lever other end to said boss, when fastened
said blocking lever extending within said setting and pre-
venting a sliding movement between said male and female
elements;
said male element being a part of said support; and
a notch provided in said support through which said block-
ing lever extends when it is fastened.
1. In a knitting device, including a knitting frame comprising
two spaced parallel bars, said bars having upper flat surfaces
forming a plane and a row of pins substantially perpendicular
to said plane on each of said bars; the improvement comprising
a support for said frame, said support comprising a base plate,
at least one upstanding hook-shaped locking member on said
base plate, and at least one upstanding sustaining member on
said base plate, said sustaining member being spaced from said
locking member laterally of said base plate by a distance sub-
stantially the same as the width of one of said bars of said
knitting frame, the hook of said locking member facing said
sustaining member and the upper surface of said sustaining
member being curved upwardly from said base plate and away
from said locking member, said sustaining member being of
such thickness that it will pass between the bars of said knitting
frame, whereby said knitting frame can be laid on said support
with one of said bars resting on said plate and within the hook
of said locking member and against said sustaining member;
and means for securing said support in a substantially fixed
position.
4,393,669
AUTOMATIC LAONG METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
MAKING PIECES WITH MULTIDIRECTIONAL WOVEN
REINFORCEMENT
Georges J. J. Cahuzac, Le Bouscat, France, assignor to Societe
Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale, Paris, France
Filed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 228,970
Qaims priority, application France, Aug. 11, 1980, 80 17666
Int. Q.5 D04B 9/44; D03D 41/00
U.S. Q. 66—13 18 Qaims
1. Method for automatically lacing reinforcements or woven
pieces made by multidirectional weaving and composed of
filiform textile elements disposed in several directions, one of
the directions of weaving being initially materialised by tempo-
rary rigid rods which have to be replaced, in the course of
lacing operations, by filiform textile elements, this method
comprising the following steps of:
passing a needle through the woven piece, which needle
simultaneously pushes a preselected rigid rod outwardly
and chases it from the woven piece,
causing the needle to grip a textile element previously
formed as a loop and
causing the needle, provided with the textile element thus
July 19, 1983
11
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
927
gnp^d, to pass through the woven piece in the opposite
direction, said textile element thus gripped occupying the
space vacated by the previously chased rigid rod.
in the selected group from the first position to the second
position, and
a second drive means for moving the selectors other than
those belonging to the selected group so as to move the
corresponding knitting needles from the non-knit position
to the knit position.
4,393,671
APPARATUS FOR DYEING HBER BY UTILIZING
MICROWAVES
H^ime Ito, 2-32, Kamiotai, Nishi-Ku, Nagoya City, Aichi Pre-
fecture, Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 225.437
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 19, 1980, 55-4687-
Aug. 25, 1980, 55-117229
Int. Q.J D06B 3/02
U.S. Q. 68-5 C 3 c,^„,
■^"^ ^li T
^
disengaging the needle from the woven piece, and
releasing it from the textile element.
4,393,670
AUTOMATIC KNITTING NEEDLE SELECTION DEVICE
Takeji Hashimoto, Nagaokakyo; Kiyohumi Okumoto, and
Masayasu Andoh, both of Kyoto, all of Japan, assignors to
Dainippon Screen Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,258
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1980, 55-113421
Int. Q.^ D04B 7/00, 15/66
U.S. Q. 66-75.2 ,3 ci,i„.
1. A fiber dyeing apparatus which comprises
(a) a vessel which is adapted to hold a quantity of fiber to be
dyed, said vessel being formed of a material capable of
transmitting microwaves, said vessel being formed of a gas
tight pressure resisting sealed construction, said vessel
being provided with a lid member to seal the vessel, said
lid member being provided with a control valve to control
the internal pressure of the vessel,
(b) a fiat car located underneath said vessel so that the vessel
can be moved from one place to another, said vessel being
supported on said flatcar by rotary shafts that are con-
nected with means to rotate them and thereby move the
vessel rotatively,
(c) a radiation chamber extending around said vessel and
said fiatcar,
(d) a microwave generator, and
(e) a microwave guide for conducting microwaves from said
microwave generator to said radiation chamber so that the
vessels containing fiber that are located in said radiation
chamber can be irradiated.
1. An automatic knitting needle selection device for forming
knitting patterns in a knitting machine, comprising:
a plurality of vertically oriented knitting needles which can
assume either a knit position or a non-knit position,
a plurality of vertically oriented selectors, provided in one-
to-one relation with respect to the knitting needles and
pivoted at their lower ends by a pivot shaft, which can
assume either a first position adapted for moving the
corresponding knitting needles from the non-knit position
to the knit position and a second position adapted for not
moving the corresponding knitting needles from the non-
knit position to the knit position,
a plurality of solenoids, again provided in one-to-one rela-
tion relative to the selectors, for attracting a selected
group from the selectors according to a desired knitting
pattern,
a first drive means for moving the selectors other than those
4,393,672
CYLINDER LOCK AND KEY ASSEMBLY
Egon Gelhard, Thomas-Mann-Strasse 10, D-5000 Koln 51, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
per No. PCT/DE79/00144, § 371 Date Aug. 13, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 13, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01299, PCT Pub
Date Jun. 26, 1980
PCT Filed Dec. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 204,401
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 13
1978, 2853655
Int. CIJ E05B 47/00
U.S. Q. 70-277 ,2 Qaims
1. A cylinder lock and key assembly for effecting a mechani-
cal and electro-mechanical locking, comprising:
a lock cylinder casing having a cylinder-receiving bore and
a crosspiece offset from said bore m which a keyway is
formed, a lock cylinder rotatably mounted in said cylin-
der-receiving bore of said casing, and a key receivable in
said keyway, said key and said keyway being provided
928
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
TULY 19, 1983
with interchangeable and mechanically ccxiable tumbler
means for effecting a mechanical locking and electrical
of the row. and said lugs being respectively positioned on
said at least one side bar so as to engage said waisted
portions when the pins of a row have been set in predeter-
mined positions by the key when the key is in an operative
position,
(g) said at least one side bar including guide portions which
extend between the pins of a row at least when the side bar
is retracted into the cylinder and engage with surfaces in
the cylinder to resist misalignment of the side bar.
4,393,674
HYDRAULIC CHUCK DEVICE FOR ENGAGEMENT
WITH THE INSIDE OF A TUBE
Robert Rasmussen, Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to Air-Mo
Hydraulics, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,206
Int. a.3 B21D 22/10
U.S. a. 72—61 9 Qaims
means for changing the flow of electric current for effect-
ing an electromechanical locking signal.
4,393,673
CYLINDER LOCK
Bo G. Widen, Torshalla, Sweden, assignor to GKN Stemnan
AB, Eskiltuna, Sweden
Filed Jul. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 165,357
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Jul. 10, 1979, 7906022
Int. CV E05B 19/06. 27/06
U.S. a. 70—358 5 Qaims
<9 »
1. A hydraulic chuck device for use with the inside of a tube,
comprising:
a body defining a chamber; a piston slideably mounted in
said chamber; an axially centered stem means mounted at
one end on said piston and having a passage along its axis;
sleeve means slideably covering said stem means and
mounted on said body; collet means operably connected
to said stem means and said sleeve means such that relative
movement of one with respect to the other causes activa-
tion of said collets;
first fluid means connected to said piston to cause relative
movement between said stem means and said sleeve; and
second fluid means connected to said stem means for passage
of fluid through said passage of said stem means into the
inside of said tube.
1. A cylinder lock comprising:
(a) a housing,
(b) a cylinder core mounted for rotation in said housing,
(c) a slot extending into the cylinder core parallel to the
rotation axis thereof, for receiving a key,
(d) at least one row of locking pins guided in bores in said
cylinder core and being movable against spring means by
a key which engages ends of the pins when the key is
inserted into the slot,
(e) at least one side bar accommodated in a recess extending
axially in a peripheral part of the cylinder core, said at
least one side bar being spring biassed outwardly of the
cylinder into engagement with a recess in the housing
which recess is shaped to retract the side bar in the cylin-
der core upon turning of the cylinder core,
(0 said locking pins having operative waisted portions, and
said at least one said side bar having a number of lugs
which must engage in said waisted portions of said pins of
a row to permit said retraction, said waisted portions of
the pins of the or each row being identically positioned on
said pins of said row with respect to said ends of the pins
4,393,675
CONTRIVANCE FOR THE MACHINING OF
CYLINDRICAL SURFACES ON METAL-CUTTING
LATHES
Gennady M. Azarevich, ulitsa Akademika Yangelya, 14, korpus
2, kv. 257; losif A. Gusyatsky, ulitsa Malaya Bronnaya, 10,
kv. 35; Lidia B. Savelieva, 9 Parkovaya ulitsa, 68, korpus 2,
ky. 16, and Boris I. Akimov, Simonovsky val, 7, korpus 1, kv.
249, all of Moscow, U.S.S.R.
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,521
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Apr. 25, 1980, 2916251
Int. Q.3 B23B 27/10: B24B 39/04
U.S. Q. 72—71 2 Qaims
1. A contrivance for the machining of cylindrical surfaces on
work supported for rotation on metal-cutting lathes compris-
ing a housing; a tool head fixed inside said housing; at least one
tool clamped in said tool head and having a cutting edge; a
head with deforming rollers, said head being located in said
housing behind said tool head; a system for feeding coolant-
lubricant incorporating a source of coolant-lubricant, a cham-
ber disposed in said housing between said tool head and said
head with deforming rollers, said chamber being connected to
said source of coolant-lubricant and to said head with deform-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
929
ing rollers, at least one nozzle fitted in said housing between 4,393 677
said chamber and said tool head so that the jet issuing there- PLUGS FOR USE IN PIERCING AND ELONGATING
from is aimed at the cutting edge of at least one said tool, the MILLS
Manabu Tamura, Kanagawa; Yoshiki Kamemura, Tokyo, and
Masao Handa, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon
Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,753
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1979, 54-167515
Int. Q.^ B21B 19/04
U.S. Q. 72-97 ,5 a^„.
iLrf —
surface of said work defining one wall of said nozzle, and said
nozzle confining the coolant-lubricant flow to direct and con-
fine said flow to issue againt the cutting edge of said tool.
4,393,676
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING CONNECTING MEMBER
SHANKS, SUCH AS HINGES FOR WINDOW AND DOOR
FRAMES, FORMED OF CYLINDRICAL SECTIONS OF
DIFFERENT DIAMETER, WITH CONTINUOUS EVEN
SCREW THREAD, THAT IS WITH CONSTANT PITCH
Luciano Prosdocimo, Viale Grigoletti 73, Fontanafredda, Porde-
none, Italy
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 898,162, Apr. 20, 1978,
abandoned. This application Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,820
Qaims iMiority, application Italy, Jan. 31, 1978, 45704 A/78
Int. CV B21H 3/02
U.S. Q. 72-92 3 aaims
1. A plug for use in a piercing and elongating mill to manu-
facture seamless steel pipes having its surface coated with a
highly adherent durable heat insulating layer consisting essen-
tially of iron oxides comprising at least one oxide selected from
the group consisting of FeO, Fe304. and Fe203 which had
been formed on the surface of said plug by spraying molten
powder consisting essentially of iron oxide onto the surface of
the plug to form said layer, said iron oxide molten powder
which is sprayed onto the surface of said plug also contains at
least one metal or oxide selected from the group consisting of
the oxides of chromium, nickel, copper and manganese, and
the metals iron, chromium, nickel, cobalt, copper and manga-
nese.
4,393,678
SPRING COILING MACHINE
Guido Favot, and Alf A. Berg, both of Vasteras, Sweden, assign-
ors to Tekno-Detaljer Sture Carlsson AB, Vallingby, Sweden
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,795
Int. CI.' B21F 3/02. 11/00
U.S. Q. 72-131 10 Claims
1. A method of forming a thread convolution with uniform
pitch on a shank with at least two coaxial and essentially cylin-
drical portions of different diameters, the thread convolution
on the shank being a leading face disposed at a first angle to the
central axis of the shank, said method comprising the steps of
providing a blank having two coaxial and essentially cylindri-
cal portions connected by a sloping portion with the surface
inclined at said first angle to the common axis of the two
cylindrical portions, rolling said blank between a rotating
chaser having two coaxial thread forming surfaces radially
spaced apart by a distance equaling the difference in radius of
said two different diameter portions of said blank and a fixed
curved chaser having two thread forming surfaces radially
spaced apart by a distance equal to the difference in the radius
of said two diflerent diameter portions of said blank, the larger
diameter of said rotating chaser having a larger surface speed
than the smaller diameter portion of said rotating chaser and
being disposed in engagement with the smaller diameter por-
tion of said blank, and guiding said blank during said rolling by
abutting said sloping surface of said blank against sloping
thread forming surfaces of said rotating chaser and said fixed
chaser which connect said two thread forming surfaces of said
rotating chaser and said fixed chaser, respectively, and which
are parallel with said sloping surface of said blank to form a
continuous uniform pitch thread convolution over and be-
tween the two essentially cylindrical portions of the blank.
1. A spring coiling machine, comprising two cooperating
rotatable wire feeding rollers and a driving device for said wire
feeding rollers by which said rollers may be rotated in order to
feed a wire in its longitudinal direction between said rollers to
a spring forming station, where wire bending tools are pro-
vided to cause the wire, as it reaches said station, to be succes-
sively bent so as to form a coiled spring by being brought into
contact with said bending tools with successive portions
thereof, and where a separate movable pitch controlling tool is
provided to control the pitch of said spring along the length
thereof through engagement with said wire, a cam follower
being connected to said pitch controlling tool to control the
position thereof through cooperation with a movable cam
curve operatively connected to said driving device, wherein
said cam curve defined by a plurality of distinct portions which
are longitudinally displaceable relative to each other, said cam
930
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
curve being mounted for reciprocating rectilinear movement
in unison with a reciprocating gear rack included in said driv-
ing device.
4,393,679
METHOD FOR PRODUONG BLANK FOR WIDE
FLANGE BEAM
Yoshiaki Kusaba, Ibaraki, Japan, assignor to Sumitomo Metal
Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Set. No. 209,299
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1979, 54-172089
Int. a.i B21B 1/08
LI.S. a. 72—221 3 Qaims
having a pair of horizontal rolls and at least one vertical roll,
said method including the steps of:
providing each of said rolling mill stands with rolls defining
two different roll-pass openings having preselected con-
figurations to process a heated workpiece according to
said schedule at only one of two different preselected
locations in the rolling mill train, said vertical roll and a
pair of horizontal rolls establishing one of the two differ-
ent roll-pass openings in each rolling mill stand,
rolling heated workpieces in a designated one of the two
roll-pass openings in each of the rolling mill stands,
replacing at least the horizontal rolls at one location with a
pair of horizontal rolls after use at a different location to
utilize an unused roll-pass opening at the previous location
to process workpieces according to said schedule, and
rolling additional heated workpieces in said unused roll-pass
opening.
4,393,681
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING HERMETIC SEALING
MEMBER
Masao Sakai, Mobara, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,643
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 23, 1979, 54-92674
Int. CV B21D 31/02
U.S. CI. 72—329 6 Qaims
1. A method for producing a blank for a wide flange beam,
said method comprising:
forming a box caliber, at least one forming caliber and a
sizing caliber by a pair of rolls of a break-down mill;
providing a flat slab as raw material with said flat slab hav-
ing a rectangular ratio of width to thickness of from 3 to
6;
conducting a former stage of a rolling process by edging said
raw material by said box caliber with the widthwise di-
mension of said material maintained vertically until the
total reduction of said width is 30%, and then reducing
said material, mainly in a web portion thereof, by said
forming caliber, with the widthwise dimension of said
web maintained horizontally, into a dog-bone-shaped
workpiece having a rectangular ratio which substantially
is equal to that of said raw material;
conducting a latter stage of said rolling process by edging
said workpiece to reduce the width thereof by said box
caliber with said web maintained vertically, and web-roll-
ing said workpiece to reduce the thickness oftsaid web by
said sizing caliber with said web maintained horizontally,
thereby forming said workpiece into a desired blank for a
flange beam and providing said forming and sizing cali-
bers to be sequentially smaller in width.
4,393,680
METHOD FOR ROLLING RAILS
Daniel C. Kovacs, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to SMS Schlo-
emann-Siemag, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,413
Int. a.i B21B 31/08
U.S. a. 72—234 10 Claims
GROOVE 12
1. A method of manufacturing a hermetic seal member in-
cluding a metal cylinder, at least one end thereof being adapted
to be soldered to another member to form a hermetic sealing
structure, comprising the steps of deforming a metal plate into
a cup-shaped member, pressing the periphery only of at least
one end surface of said cup-shaped member to compress a
portion of said end surface periphery into an annular flat con-
centric with the longitudinal axis of said cup-shaped member,
and making a concentric cut through said end surface at a
diameter which leaves a portion of said annular flat as the
remainder of said end surface of said cup-shaped member.
1. A method of hot-rolling elongated workpieces to form a
rail or the like according to a schedule of roll passes in a rolling
mill train which includes at least two rolling mill stands each
4,393,682
FEED BAR DRIVING APPARATUS FOR A TRANSFER
PRESS
Shozo Imanishi, Sagamihara, Japan, assignor to Aida Engineer-
ing, Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,969 *
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 6, 1981, 56-31963
Int. Q.3 B21D 43/04. 43/05: B65G 25/02
U.S. Q. 72—405 10 Qaims
1. A feed bar driving apparatus for a transfer press having
two parallel feed bars, comprising:
a pair of carriers located at each of the ends of the two
parallel feed bars, said carriers each having vertically
movable feed bar receptacles thereon for holding the feed
bars for permitting them to slide freely in the direction of
their length while restricting their movements in the lat-
eral direction, the carriers in each pair being movable
toward and away from each other for moving said feed
bars in clamping and unclamping movements;
a rack mechanism between each pair of carriers and having
a rack attached to each carrier, a pinion engaging each
said rack, said pinions located at positions between the
July 19, 1983
1
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
931
corittsponding carriers and the center of the space be-
tween the carriers, and an even number of idler gears
connected between said pinions, for driving said pinions in
opposite directions of rotation;
a cam carrying slide member reciprocally slidable on said
press;
a reciprocating mechanism connected to one of said carriers
in each pair and having a reciprocal motion producing
cam on said slide member, reciprocating cam follower
means actuated by said cam, and a connecting rod con-
nected between said cam follower means and said one
carrier for reciprocatingly driving said one carrier from
the reciprocating sliding movement of said slide;
4,393,683
TRACTION DRIVE FOR FORGING MANIPULATORS
Werner Folta, Mettmann, and Erwin Kost, Meerbusch, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SMS Schloemann-Siemag
Aktiengesellschaft, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,701
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 7,
1980, 3021519
Int. Q.3 B21J 13/10
U.S. Q. 72-422 g Qaims
^
.if'*^C~^;
-*~- ,,-'!l »-
.J
>:)
>
f^^
TT^
■)^
1. A forging manipulator comprising: a chassis; rail wheels
rotatably mounted on said chassis for supporting the chassis so
that said chassis can travel forwards and rearwards on rails,
said chassis having a forward part and a rear part and forward
rail wheels and rear rail wheels mounted respectively thereon;
manipulating means mounted on the forward part of the chas-
sis; laterally spaced side members on the rear part of said
chassis; and a chassis drive unit mounted on the rear part of the
chassis comprising, a transmission casing, a traction motor
mounted on said casing, an output shaft extending from the
transmission casing, bearing means for rotatably supporting
said shaft on said casing, transmission means in said casing
operably connecting said motor to said output shaft, a toothed
wheel on said output shaft mounted directly adjacent said shaft
bearing means for meshing with a stationary rack for moving
said manipulator chassis along said rack and rails by said mo-
tor, said toothed wheel and output shaft being coaxial with
respect to said rear rail wheels, transmission casing bearing
means mounted on said side members in which the output shaft
beanng means are journalled, and torque-absorbing means
connecting said transmission casing to the rear part of the
chassis.
4,393.684
PRESS HAVING A LINKAGE MECHANISM
CONNECTABLE AND DISCONNECTABLE FROM A
RAM
David M. Hansen, Dublin, and Richard B. Ernest, Richboro,
both of Pa., assignors to Penn Engineering & Manufacturing
Corp., Danboro. Pa.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,942
Int. Q.' B21J 9/i8
U.S.Q. 72-451 9 Claims
an elevating mechanism for said feed bar receptacles in each
pair of earners and having a splined shaft extending
through both carriers in each pair and along which said
carriers are slidable, an elevating plate in each carrier
supporting the corresponding feed bar receptacle, a link
means in each carrier connected between said splined
shaft and said elevating plate for raising and lowering said
elevating plate when said splined shaft is rotated; and
a rotation producing mechanism for each splined shaft and
having a rotation producing cam on said slide member,
rotation cam follower means actuated by said rotation
producing cam, and a pinion on said splined shaft to which
said rotation cam follower means is connected.
,, V V-.fe' «?
.'rS^-,',^- •■ S-S-.-, - ' ^^ •^^V.^.^^^.^T.■.^.^
rV 74t,
m 1
1. A press for assembling a fastener or the like to a plate or
the like comprising
a frame,
an anvil assembly carried by said frame,
a toggle mechanism assembly carried by said frame and
including two toggle links movable between -retracted and
extended positions,
a ram operatively connectable to said toggle links,
said toggle mechanism assembly when in said extended
position being in contact with said ram and when said
toggle mechanism assembly is in said retracted position
being out of contact with said ram,
punch means connected to said ram,
pneumatic means for retracting and extending said toggle
links and applying a force to said ram when one of said
toggle links is in contact with said ram,
said pneumatic means including
a first pneumatic cylinder and piston assembly for holding
said ram in a raised position,
first pneumatic switch means for terminating the flow of
932
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
pressurized air to said first pneumatic cylinder, thereby
permitting said ram and punch means to descend by grav-
ity to a lower position,
second pneumatic switch means activated after a sufficient
descent of said ram and punch means toward said lower
position, and
a second pneumatic cylinder piston and assembly opera-
tively connected to said second pneumatic switch means
for extending and retracting said toggle links,
whereby when said toggle links are extended and one of said
toggle links is in contact with said ram a force sufficiently
high to insert said fastener into said plate is applied by said
toggle links to said ram and when said toggle links are
retracted and one of said toggle links is out of contact with
said ram no force is applied by said toggle links to said ram
and said ram is permitted to descend and rise without
contacting said toggle mechanism assembly.
4,393,686
CIRCUIT ARRANGEMENT FOR A GAS MEASURING
AND GAS ANALYSIS APPARATUS
Hans-Jbrg Fengler, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Auergesellschaft GmbH, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,015
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 21,
1980, 3031555
Int. a.' GOIN 31/00
U.S. a. 73—23 5 Qaims
4,393,685
TOOL ATTACHING DEVICE FOR PRESSES
Yoshikazu Sakamura, 56, Kitamomodani-Cho, Minami-Ku,
Osaka-Shi, Japan
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,409
Int. a.^ B21J 13/02
U.S. a. 72—481 ♦ Claims
,/if// fn^ff
1. A device for attaching a tool to a press, comprising:
(1) means for withdrawingly holding a tool therein, the tool
inserted therein in a first direction;
(2) means, including a pressing member having an eccentric
portion for preventing the tool when held in said holding
means from slipping out of said holding means while in
contact with the peripheral surface of the tool, pivotally
mounted on said holding means and openly positioned for
pivotal movement in a circumferential direction during
insertion of the tool, for engaging the tool at said eccentric
portion in biting contact therewith when the tool is held in
said holding means, so as to exert a force thereon in a
second direction opposite said first direction, said pressing
member being provided with an unlocking lever including
an elongated member;
(3) spring means for elastically biasing said pressing member
in said second direction; and
(4) a fluid driven power pusher engagable with said elon-
gated member for pivoting said unlocking lever in said
circumferential direction against the bias of said spring
means to pivot said pressing member to pivot said eccen-
tric portion in said first direction so as to disengage said
eccentric portion from the tool so that the tool can be
withdrawn from said holder in said second direction; said
elongated member being disengagable from said power
pusher, whereby said pressing member can be pivoted in
said circumferential direction by manually pivoting said
elongated member to disengage said eccentric portion
from the tool.
0 b Motmmm
1 valM
Mj^ Ogiput
1. A circuit arrangement for an apparatus for measuring and
analyzing gases and consisting of a measuring part with an
indicating and warning device, characterized by the provision
of:
(a) a binary counter which is acted upon by an oscillator and
which is connected to a digital-analog converter through
a digital storage,
(b) a digital-comparator connected for comparing the binary
values of the counter output from the binary counter and
the input to the digital-analog converter,
(c) an analog comparator which is connected to a measured-
value input from the measuring part and to a maximum
value output of the digital-analog converter, the analog
comparator connected to a digital section and adapted for
actuating the digital logic section such that said logic
section opens and closes the digital storage, and
(d) a chargeover switch located between the measuring part
and the indicating device and connected for switching the
maximum value output to the measured value input on the
input of said indicating device.
4,393,687
SENSOR ARRANGEMENT
Klaus Miiller, Tamm; Ernst Linder, Miihlacker, and Helmut
Maurer, Schwieberdingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 214,481
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 18,
1980, 3001711
Int. a.3 GOIL 23/22; HOIT 13/48
U.S. a. 73—35 7 Qaims
1. Engine knock sensor arrangement to detect oscillations
arising upon knocking in an internal combustion engine due to
undesired progress of the course of combustion within a com-
bustion chamber thereof, said engine having a cylinder head
seal (35);
and comprising sensing means including
a pair of light guide fibers or filaments (36, 37; 38, 39) posi-
tioned within the cylinder head seal;
light guide means in optically coupled relation with respect
to said light guide fibers or filaments;
and photoelectric evaluation means (412) connected to said
light guide means for photoelectric evaluation of light
_ sensed by said light guide fibers or filaments.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
933
5. Combined spark plug and optical sensor structure having
an electrical or sparking portion and an optical combustion
observation portion to determine oscillations occurring
upon knocking of an internal combustion engine having
a housing (10) forming a ground or chassis electrode for the
electrical portion, and having a spark gap ground elec-
trode (lOfl) secured thereto;
a metal tube (11) extending centrally within the housing and
forming a center electrode of the sparking portion termi-
nating adjacent the ground electrode, and spaced there-
from by a spark gap;
a light guide element (12) located within the metal tube and
terminating essentially even with the end of the tube
adjacent the spark gap, but short of the end of the tube at
the other end thereof;
an insulator (lOb) located between said center electrode
metal tube and the housing, electrically separating the
30 '?!
4,393,688
PIEZOELECTRIC KNOCK SENSOR
Daniel U. Johnston, and George A. Shinkle, both of Anderson,
Ind., assignors to General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 322,989
Int. Q.' GOIL 23/22
U.S. Q. 73-35 2 Qaims
housing and the metal tube and supporting the metal tube,
and the light guide element therein, within the housing;
a light pick-up surface (13, 20) formed at the end of the light
guide element;
and a light guide cable (15) having an optical coupling sur-
face positioned in optically coupled relation with respect
to the light guide element (12) and located within the end
portion of the metal tube (11) remote from the spark for
connection of optical signals derived from the light guide
element to an electrical evaluation circuit (112);
wherein the spark plug comprises an ante-chamber (26);
and wherein the light guide element comprises a light guide
element portion (12a) recessed with respect to the end
portion of said tube (11) and a further light guide portion
(12b) terminating essentially flush with the end of said
tube (II) to provide two different viewing apertures for
the respective light guide element portions.
1. A knock sensor for an internal combustion engine com-
prising, in combination:
a mounting element adapted for rigid attachment to the
engine;
a flexing plate supported on the mounting element and
adapted to execute plate vibrations in response to knock
events in the engine, the plate having a surface comprising
a plurality of raised radial ridges;
a piezoelectric disk affixed to the surface of the plate for
flexure with vibrations thereof in abutment with the radial
ridges by means of an adhesive substance between the
raised radial ridges, said ridges providing internal electri-
cal ground contact for one surface of the piezoelectric
disk through the plate, mounting element and engine, as
well as strain transmission between the plate and the disk;
a cover affixed to the periphery of the plate, the cover in-
cluding an electric output terminal; and
spring means compressed between the cover and the other
surface of the piezoelectric disk, said spring means being
in electrical contact with the electric output terminal, the
radial arrangement of said ridges permitting radial out-
flow of excess adhesive to permit the spring means to
force the piezoelectric element into contact with said
ridges, whereby good internal electrical ground contact in
the sensor is assured.
4,393,689
DEVICE FOR DETERMINING PHYSICAL
CHARACTERISTICS OF A FLUID, SUCH AS ITS
LIQUID-VAPOR EQUILIBRIUM PRESSURE
Henri Renon, Paris, and Dominique Richon, Aulnay-sous-Bois,
both of France, assignors to Institut Francais du Petrole,
Rueil-Malmaison and Association pour la Recherche et le
Developpment, Paris, both of, France
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser, No. 254,722
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 16, 1980, 80 08568
Int. Q.3 GOIN 7/14
U.S. Q. 73-64.2 iQ Qaims
1. A device for determining physical characteristics of a
fluid, such as its liquid-vapor equilibrium pressure or its volu-
metric mass, said device comprising in combination:
(a) a removable compact cell (1) adapted for being accu-
rately weighed, said cell (1) comprising means (6) for
introducing the fluid and means (8,9) for homogenizing
and stirring the fluid contained therein, at least one mea-
suring gauge (7), and said cell having a slidable wall (2);
(b) a pressurizing unit (10) adapted for having its tempera-
ture controlled, and provided with a housing (19) for
receiving said removable cell (1); and
(c) means for reducing the internal volume of said cell (1)
934
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
comprising calibrated compression means (33) associated
with said pressurizing unit (10) and operatively associated
with said slidaHe wall (2) of said cell (1) for compressing
the fluid contained therein.
4,393,690
FORCE BALANCING TECHNIQUES FOR COMPLEX
CYCLICALLY MOVING PLANAR LINKAGES
Gerard G. Lowen, Wyckoff, and Stephen J. Tricamo, Norwood,
both of N.J., assignors to Research Foundation of the City
University of New York, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,826
Int. a.^ GOIM 1/22
U.S. a. 73—66 32 Qaims
a support provision attached to the rail vehicle;
a test unit attached to the support provision including: a
frame supported by the support provision;
a pressure plate held by the frame and capable of being
lowered down and lifted up and disposed in its upper rest
position such that it is at a level above the track region for
preventing interference with line travel and capable of
being lowered down to below the formation level; and
a pressure piston adapted to an opening in said pressure plate
and capable of substantially vertical motion relative to the
pressure plate for pressing into the subgrade to be tested.
4,393,692
STATIC PRESSURE PROBE AND METHOD
Walter L. Qark, Scottsdale, and Trevor G. Sutton, Tempe, both
of Ariz., assignors to The Garrett Corporation, Los Angeles,
Calif.
Filed Feb. 21, 1978, Ser. No. 879,542
Int. CI.3 GOIL 7/00
U.S. a. 73—115 18 Claims
1. The method of fully force balancing cyclically moving
planar n-bar linkages to reduce residual shaking forces com-
prising the steps of,
cyclically moving the planar linkagt through its movement
cycle,
determining during the cyclic movement in the plane of
movement the shaking forces (F^) along a set of two coor-
dinates, such as the x and y axes, for a plurality of angular
sensing positions in the movement cycle,
determining the angular positioh and angular velocity of the
input link at said plurality of positions to thereby provide
a plurality of sets of data,
and establishing from the plurality of sets of data determin-
ing the shaking forces at the plurality of sensing positions
with the help of the balancing equations the required
corrective mass and location of counterbalance structure
for reducing the shaking forces F5 of both fundamental
frequencies and harmonics of the cyclic movement.
1. A probe for use in measuring static pressure of an air-
stream comprising:
a flow pickup tube having an open end disposed in a down-
stream direction relative to said airstream, said open end
presenting an orifice of preselected size; and
a protective hood carried with said tube in surrounding
relationship to said open end of the tube, said hood being
substantially larger than said tube and having an open
distal end disposed downstream of said orifice and pres-
enting an opening communicating with said airstream,
said opening being at least twice as large as said orifice.
4,393,691
RAIL VEHICLE FOR TRACK INVESTIGATION
Hermann D. Koehne, Printroper Str. 555, D-4300 Essen 11, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,365
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 15,
1980, 3034704
Int. a.^ GOIN i/42
U.S. a. 73—84 24 Claims
1. Rail vehicle for track investigation comprising
means attached to said vehicle for removing supporting
material of the track disposed below the rail level;
4,393,693
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR DETECTING CRANK
SHAFT ORIENTATION AND VALVE ASSEMBLY IN AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Tadashi Nalto, Toyota, Japan, assignor to Toyota Jidosha Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,544
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 22, 1980, 55-5980
Int. Cl.^ F02P 77/00.- GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—116 8 Claims
4. A method for automatically inspecting a multi-cylinder
four-cycle internal combustion engine having a crankshaft; a
piston, an intake valve, and an exhaust valve for each cylinder,
each being operatively coupled to the crankshaft; and a mem-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
935
ber rotatable with the crankshaft and having a detectable
angular index, wherein the method comprises:
(a) turning the crankshaft of such an engine;
(b) detecting when the index on the rotatable member
reaches a predetermined angular position corresponding
to a top dead center position of a preselected piston;
(c) simultaneously measuring the positions of a plurality of
preselected valves when the index is detected at the top
dead center position; and
(d) distinguishing in response to the displacement values of
the plurality of preselected valves whether the preselected
piston is at its compression top dead center position or its
exhaust top dead center position.
4,393,694
VEHICLE STEERING AND FRONTEND ALIGNMENT
DEFECT DETECTOR
John A. Marten, Wauconda; Donald Legler, Fort Wayne, and
Jesse W. Wagoner, Dundee, all of III., assignors to Sun Elec-
tric Corporation, Crystal Lake, III.
1 Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,647
I Int. a.^ GOIM 15/00
U.S. a 73-117 16aaims
1. An apparatus for detecting defects in vehicles having a
front portion with a first side and a second side, a rear portion,
at least two front wheels rotatably mounted in said front posi-
tion, rear support means for mobile support of said rear por-
tion, and steering means for steering said front wheels, said
steering means including a steering rod rotatable around an
axis of rotation, a steering wheel rotatably mounted about said
axis of rotation and connected to said steering rod, and con-
necting means for steerably connecting said steering rod to said
front wheels, said steering wheel being in a center position
when said wheels are aligned for forward motion of said vehi-
cle, said apparatus comprising:
wheel rotating means for rotating each of said' front wheels
of said vehicle when said steering wheel is turned through
a relatively small angle of rotation to urge the front por-
tion of the vehicle to move in the direction of the vehicle's
first or second side;
first retaining means for retaining said first side of said vehi-
cle from movement in the direction of the vehicle's first
side, said first retaining means having a first urging force
determining means for determining a first value of urging
force exerted by said vehicle on said first retaining means
when said steering wheel is rotated about the axis of rota-
tion from said center position through a relatively small
first angle of rotation to urge the first side of the vehicle
against said first retaining means; ^
a second retaining means for retaining said second side of
said vehicle from movement in the direction of the vehi-
cle's second side, said second retaining means having a
second urging force determining means for determining a
second value of urging force exerted by said vehicle on
said second retaining means when said steering wheel is
rotated about the axis of rotation from said center position
through a relatively small second angle of rotation to urge
the second side of the vehicle against said second retaining
means;
angular rotation measuring means for measuring the angular
rotation of said steering wheel about the rotational axis of
said steering wheel about the rotational axis of said steer-
ing rod whereby said first and second angles of rotation of
said steering wheel can be made to be approximately equal
in magnitude; and
rotational force measuring means for measuring the force or
torque exerted on said steering wheel during rotation of
said steering wheel about the rotational axis of said steer-
ing rod and whereby a first value of rotating force can be
obtained when the steering wheel is rotated through said
first angle of rotation and a second value of rotating force
can be obtained when the steering wheel is rotated
through said second angle of rotation, so that the first and
second urging force values and the first and second rotat-
ing force values can be mathematically compared to deter-
mine if a steering or front-end alignment defect exists in
the auto.
4,393,695
MANUAL SHIFT SYSTEM AND METHOD OF USE FOR
VEHICLE TESTING
Richard A. Marshall, and Edward F. Miller, both of Indianap-
olis, Ind., assignors to Laboratory Equipment Corp., Moores-
ville, Ind.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,868
Int. a.' GOIM 15/00
U.S. CI. 73-117.3 6 Claims
1. A remote, manual shift system cooperatively arranged
with the clutch linkage and gear shift stick of a manual trans-
mission vehicle for use during vehicle testing, said manual shift
system comprising:
a manual transmission test vehicle;
means for generating a DC voltage signal;
a first sensor assembly coupled to the throttle linkage of said
vehicle and suitably arranged to respond to throttle link-
age movements;
a second sensor assembly coupled to the clutch linkage of
936
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said vehicle and suitably arranged to respond to clutch
linkage movements;
a dual rotary sensor assembly coupled to the gear shift stick
of said vehicle, said dual rotary sensor assembly suitably
arranged to record the X-axis component of the move-
ment of the gear shift stick by first sensor means and the
Y-axis component of the movement of the gear shift stick
by second sensor means, said dual rotary sensor assembly
thereby providing real-time position information of the
gear shift stick;
a clutch actuator subassembly mechanically coupled to the
clutch linkage of said vehicle and suitably arranged to
respond to a DC voltage signal from said generating
means in order to move said clutch linkage;
a throttle actuator subassembly mechanically coupled to the
throttle linkage of said vehicle and suitably arranged to
respond to a DC voltage signal from said generating
means to move said throttle linkage;
a gear shift actuator subassembly mechanically coupled to
the gear shift stick of said vehicle and suitably arranged to
respond to a DC voltage from said generating means
signal to move said gear shift stick;
data recording and processing means electrically coupled to
said first and second sensor assemblies and to said dual
rotary sensor assembly; and
said gear shift actuator subassembly including a DC drive
system, a linkage arm and a ball screw assembly suitably
arranged for converting rotary motions from said DC
drive system into linear travel of said linkage arm, said DC
drive system disposed within said vehicle and being suit-
ably adapted to respond to data input signals from said
data recording and processing means for duplicating the
real-time position movements of said gear shift stick.
4,393,696
METHOD FOR GENERATING ENERGY OUTPUT
SIGNAL
Frederick G. Willis, Ann Arbor; Richard R. Radtke, Plymouth;
Joseph Ellison, Detroit, and Steven R. Fozo, Westland, all of
Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,861
Int. CV GOIM 15/00
U.S. CI. 73—117.3 11 Qaims
mf£f
¥S r//n£
£AfCW£ Sfitro
40*0 Ai/nv£
Wiffcf/r
/\>
\
C-'
r/Mi
A
£JI/C/'¥£ ^fi£££>
¥Aiy£
v£iOnrf
dOAD
=5
r/mr
a
fM6/tif ^SAtfO
VAiU£
reiOCfTr
V^^
dOSO
c'-:T.rj
r/Af^
^MG/M£ ^A£££>
relatively long duration of time, said long duration being
longer than said medium duration;
generating an estimated future energy output by combining
a weighted sum of the short term, medium term and long
term energy outputs, the weighting being a coefficient A
for the short term output, a coefficient B for the medium
term output and a coefficient C for the long term output.
4,393,697
AIR FLOW RATE MEASURING APPARATUS
Kanemasa Sato; Sadayasu Ueno, and Kazuhiko Miya, all of
Ibaraki, Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,838
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 31, 1980, 55-11345
Int. C\? GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—118 15 Claims
1. A method of generating an energy output signal for use in
controlling the performance of a spark ignited automobile
internal combustion engine, said method including the steps of:
generating a short term energy output average during a
relatively short duration length of time;
generating a medium term energy output average during a
medium duration length of time, said medium duration
being longer than said short duration;
generating a long term energy output average during a
^ ^
1. An air flow rate measuring apparatus for internal combus-
tion engines, comprising an air flow sensor disposed in a pas-
sage through which intake air flows into said engine, and a
temperature sensor disposed in said passage and adapted to
compensate the temperature of said air flow sensor with re-
spect to the measurement of the flow rate of said intake air, said
air flow sensor and said temperature sensor being arranged in
the same plane which is at right angles to the direction in
which said intake air flows, wherein said air flow sensor and
said temperature sensor are fixed at their respective end por-
tions by conductive support pins having the same surface area
and the same heat capacity.
4,393,698
DEVICE FOR MEASURING HOLLOW CYLINDER
SURFACES
Ludwig Pietzsch, Im Rosengartle 14, D-7500 Karlsruhe 41, Fed.
Rep. of Germany; Knud Overlach, Ettlingen, and Manfred
Wamser, Karlsruhe, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Ludwig Pietzsch, Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,159
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 27,
1980, 3024331; Oct. 3, 1980, 3037519
Int. a.3 GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—118 14 Qaims
1. Apparatus for measuring the inner surface of a generally
cylindrical bore, comprising
(a) a housing (1) adapted for insertion within the bore;
(b) clamping jaw means (12) for clamping said housing
within the bore;
(c) a longitudinal measuring arm (2) rotatably connected
with said housing for rotation about, and extending longi-
tudinally of, the bore axis;
(d) first drive means (5) for rotating said arm relative to said
housing;
(e) a measuring head (8) connected with said measuring arm
for axial displacement along the length thereof;
(0 second drive means (7) for axially displacing said measur-
ing head relative to said arm;
(g) sensor means (9) connected for radical displacement
relative to said measuring head;
(h) spring means (21) biasing said sensor means radially
outwardly relative to said head toward a position in en-
gagement with the inner surface of the bore; and
July \% 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
937
(i) means responsive to the deflection of said spring for
generating an electrical signal corresponding with the
"1
ir^J^^^}/,
4,393,699
PNEUMATIC ADHESION TESTER
James F. N. Seller, Jr., Frederick, Md., assignor to The United
Sutes of America as represented by the Secretary of Com-
merce, Washington, D.C.
1 1 Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,231
I ! Int. a.^ GOIN 19/08
U.S. a. 73-150 A 4 aaims
1. A pneumatic adhesion tester comprising:
a fixture having a bonding surface adapted to be bonded to a
coated or uncoated substrate,
a plate and a membrane sealed together solely along their outer
peripheries, said membrane being adapted to directly
contact said coated or uncoated substrate, '
a hole extending through said membrane and at least into said
plate for receiving said fixture so that said bonding surface is
substantially flush with said membrane,
means for introducing a pressurized gas between said plate and
membrane, said membrane having said hole being adapted to
be thereby pressed into gas-tight contact with said coated or
uncoated substrate, said bonding surface remaining flush
with said membrane until the bonding surface separates, and
means for measuring the pressure of said gas introduced be-
tween said plate and membrane.
4,393,700
PROCESS AND TEST SPECIMEN FOR DETERMINING
THE ADHESION TO GLASS OF INTERLAYERS FOR
LAMINATED GLASS BY THE TENSILE SHEAR TEST
Klaus Fabian, Kriftel, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Ho-
echst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,072
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany. Oct 11
1980,3038449
Int. a.' GOIN 3/24
U.S. a. 73-150 A _ 4c„i„,
radia displacement of said sensor means relative to said
measuring head, thereby to afford an indication of the
inner surface contour of the bore.
1. A process for determining the adhesion to glass of inter-
layers for laminated glass by the tensile shear test, which com-
prises subjecting to a tensile strain a substantially paral-
lelepiped-like test specimen consisting of laminated glass, the
individual sheets of glass of which are divided to form an
obtuse fracture, the edges of the fractures facing the interlayer
being staggered, and determining the minimum force required
to detach the interlayer from the individual sheets of the glass
laminate.
4,393,701
YARN TESTER SYSTEM
John B. Lawson, Providence, R.I., assignor to Lawson-Hem-
phill. Inc., Central Falls, R.I,
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,066
Int. a.3 GOIL 5/04
U.S. CI. 73-160 32 Qaims
1. A yarn tester system comprising:
heater means for inducing a change in length of yarn to be
tested;
first means for feeding yarn to be tested to said heater means
at a first predetermined tension;
first means for sensing a function of the amount of yarn
transferred by said first means for feeding;
second means for feeding yarn for receiving yarn from said
heater means;
second means for sensing a function of the amount of yarn
transferred by said second means for feeding;
third means for feeding yarn for receiving yarn from said
second means for feeding;
third means for sensing a function of the amount of yarn
transferred by said third means for sensing;
first yam tension control means for establishing a second
predetermined tension on said yarn between said first and
second means for feeding and controlling the speed of said
938
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
second means for feeding to maintain said second prede-
termined tension;
second yarn tension control means for establishing a third
predetermined tension on said yam between said second
and third means for feeding and controlling the speed of
said third means for feeding to maintain said third prede-
termined tension; and
means, responsive to said first, second, and third means for
sensing, for determining fiber shrinkage and recovery of
the yam which has been transferred between the first,
second, and third means for feeding.
4,393,703
SEALING ASSEMBLY FOR FURNACE PROBE BORE
Werner Schneider, Siegen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Dango & Dienenthal Maschinenbau GmbH, Siegen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed* Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 213,917
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 15,
1979 2950672
Int. a.3 GOIN 1/22; GOID 21/02
U.S. a. 73—432 R 11 Oaims
4,393,702
GAS FLOW MEASURING DEVICE
Tokio Kohama, Nishio; Hideki Obayashi, Okazaki; Hisasi
Kawai, Toyohashi, and Tsuneyuki Egami, Aichi, all of Japan,
assignors to Nippon Soken, Inc., Nishio, Japan
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,563
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36614;
May 14, 1980, 55-64427
Int. a.^ GOIF 7/65
U.S. a. 73—204 9 Qaims
1. A gas flow measuring device comprising:
pipe means for directing flow of a gas whose flow rate is to
be measured;
an electric heater disposed within said pipe means;
a first temperature dependent resistor disposed within said
pipe means downstream of said electric heater;
a second temperature dependent resistor disposed within
said pipe means, at a position suffering substantially no
influence of heat from said electric heater;
each of said first and second temperature dependent resistors
and said electric heater includes a resistance wire of a
platinum alloy;
wherein platinum is alloyed with a metal chosen from the
group consisting of rhodium, iridium, palladium, ruthe-
nium, and nickel;
a measuring circuit connected to said first and second tem-
perature dependent resistors and to said electric heater to
generate an output voltage indicative of the flow rate of
the gas depending on the resistance values of said first and
second temperature dependent resistors, sai(l measuring
circuit including at least two reference resistors constitut-
ing a bridge circuit together with said first and second
temperature dependent resistors; and
each of said at least two reference resistors of said bridge
circuit including a film resistor deposited on an insulating
base.
1. An attachment for a bore in the shaft wall of a blast fur-
nace through which a blast furnace probe is received compris-
ing, stop valve means, a sealing assembly, and a hose seal
including an annular flexible element for slidably engaging said
probe which bears against said blast furnace probe and which
is connected to said sealing assembly.
4,393,704
GRAIN LOSS SAMPLING DEVICE
Richard Bartko, R.R. #1, North Battleford, Saskatchewan,
Canada (S9A 2X3)
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 259,836
Int. a.i AOID 43/00; AOIF 12/00
U.S. CI. 73—432 R 15 Qaims
10
1. A grain loss sampling device for selectively sampling the
discharge of a grain harvesting machine, said machine having
a straw and chaff discharge across the rear thereof and a sup-
porting framework extending forwardly therefrom; said sam-
pling device comprising in combination a support frame pivot-
ally securable by one end thereof in trailing relationship to said
supporting framework of said grain harvesting machine upon
the underside thereof and forwardly of said straw and chaff
discharge, means to detachably support the other end of said
support frame in a nonoperating position and to release said
support frame to the operating position, and a drop box detach-
ably held by said support frame, said drop box including sides
and a base, said drop box being detachable from said support
frame on to the ground therebelow and passing under said
discharge when said support frame is in the operating position.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
939
I ' 4,393,705
SPEanC GRAVITY LEVEL GAUGE AND METHOD
Charles D. Eidschun, Qearwater, Fla., assignor to Micro-Plate,
Inc., Gearwater, Fla.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,246
Int. CIJ GOIN 9/28
U.S. a. 73-439 5 Oaims
third and fourth wavelengths, the first and third wave-
lengths being different, and the second and fourth wave-
1. A specific gravity and level gauge comprising, in combi-
nation,
a pair of pipes for insertion into a liquid fluid having a vari-
able level and variable specific gravity, the length of the
pipes being predetermined to provide a head difl'erential
between the lower end of the shorter pipe and the lower
end of the longer pipe,
means for securing the pipes in essentially vertically oriented
fashion with the liquid fluid to be measured,
means for supplying a gaseous fluid into each of the pipes
including a plenum to maintain a given head of gaseous
fluid by slowly discharging the gas into the liquid fluid at
the lower end portion of the pipes,
a pair of gaseous fluid pressure chambers at the upper por-
tion of the pipes,
bleed holes for permitting a gaseous fluid to pass from the
plenum into the gaseous pressure fluid chambers and
thence to the pipes,
and pressure transducer means for reacing the gaseous pres-
sure fluid in the pressure chamber for the short pipe and
the gaseous pressure fluid chamber for the long pipe.
4,393,706
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLED ACOUSTIC ROTATION OF
I OBJECTS
Martin B. Barmatz, Glendale, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,672
Int. a J H02N 11/00
U.S. a. 73—505 n aaims
1. Apparatus for levitating and controlling rotation of an
object, comprising:
means for applying acoustic energy along at least two per-
pendicular directions to a region which includes the ob-
ject, with the energy along a first direction including
energy of first and second wavelengths, and with the
energy along the second direction including energy of
lengths being substantially the same and of lower intensity
than the first and third wavelengths.
4,393,707
FLUIDIC ANGULAR RATE SENSOR EMPLOYING
IONIZED GAS
Carl M. Ferrar, East Hartford, Conn., assignor to United Tech-
nologies Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,321
Int. a.' GOIP 15/OS
U.S. CI. 73-505 2 Qaims
1. A fluidic angular rate sensor comprising:
means for generating and directing a gas stream along an axis
passing through a quantity of substantially stationary gas;
means for creating ions over a predetermined region of said
gas stream and said stationary gas;
a center electrode positioned on said axis;
ion-collecting means comprising at least two ion-collecting
electrodes for collecting ions from said gas stream at least
two positions displaced symmetrically from said axis by a
first predetermined transverse distance in a first plane
passing through said axis, to form first and second ion
currents;
a pair of compensating electrodes disposed symmetrically
about said axis at a second predetermined transverse dis-
tance greater than said first predetermined transverse
distance in said first plane, said pair of compensating
electrodes being biased with respect to said center elec-
trode by a bias amount such that ions are attracted from
the vicinity of said ion-collecting electrodes toward said
compensating electrodes, the amount of said bias being
such that ion flow from said ion-collecting electrodes to
said compensating electrodes is substantially equal to ion
flow from said center electrode to said ion-collecting
electrodes, whereby current flow common to both said
ion currents is reduced;
means for combining said first and second ion currents to
form a signal representative of the difference between said
ion currents.
940
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,708
ACOUSTIC SYSTEM FOR MATERIAL TRANSPORT
Martin B. Barmatz, Glendale; Eugene H. Trinh, Los Angeles;
Taylor G. Wang, Glendale; Daniel D. Elleman, San Marino,
and Nathan Jacobi, Pasadena, all of Calif., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Administrator
of the National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,929
Int. a.3 H02N 11/00
U.S. a. 73—505 9 Qaims
4,393,710
ELECTROSTATIC ACCELEROMETER
Alain M. Bernard, Fresnes, France, assignor to Office National
d'Etudes et de Recherches Aerospatiales, Chatillon, France
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,590
Qaims priority, application France, Nov. 28, 1980, 80 25272
Int. a.3 GOIP 15/125, 15/13
U.S. a. 73—517 B 9 Qaims
1. A method for moving an acoustically positioned object
within a chamber comprising:
applying acoustic energy of a plurality of resonant modes
along the same predetermined direction within said cham-
ber, in sequence, to move the object between pressure
wells established by said modes, wherein a first mode has
a first pressure well and a second mode has pressure wells
on initial and final opposite sides of said first pressure well;
said step of applying acoustic energy including applying said
first mode at a time when the object lies on said initial side
of said first pressure well, to draw said object toward said
first pressure well, and then applying said second mode
while the object is moving toward said final side.
4,393,709
DIRECTION DETECTION APPARATUS
Masatoshi Hanimatsu, Tamayama; Makoto Tomoyori, Iwate,
and Noboru Tsushima, Morioka, all of Japan, assignors to
Alps Electric Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,519
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 13, 1980, 55-159896
Int. Q.3 GOIC 19/58
U.S. Q. 73—505 6 Qaims
1. A direction detection apparatus comprising a centrifugal
force detector including a weight and a detecting means for
detecting a movement of said weight and generating a centrifu-
gal force signal, a clock signal generator generating a time
signal, a velocity detector generating a velocity signal, and a
computation means connected to said force detector, clock
signal generator and velocity generator to compute a direc-
tional angle on the basis of said centrifugal force signal, said
time signal and said velocity signal.
L."
»TlWO T~
or T-. ALT..I«.T.«. j-^ nt A1T.I»UIT«« POIW-T.*. T^ "S^J.^^^^
HT,«.or~.™T«««H L0.~.7T.TW.,0«T(Wi) J I W t», TOT w.W-T
..«
i4 17.
if: '^m
:,'^"
W jL W
rzT
»«aiT>OM)M«
30'
lemcuiT \ — -1
1. Electrostatic accelerometer comprising:
an electrically conducting test weight;
a cage in which said test weight is located;
a system of electrodes for suspending said test weight lo-
cated in said cage at the points where the axes of a coordi-
nate tri-rectangular trihedral meet the cage and associated
by pairs of electrodes located along given coordinate axes
of said trihedral, said electrodes forming with said con-
ducting test weight pairs of variable capacitors, each pair
relating to one coordinate axis;
a least a measurement circuit of the capacities of a pair of
electrodes relating to one coordinate axis;
at least a generator of electrostatic positioning control sig-
nals of the test weight along said coordinate axis, driven
by said measurement circuit and connected to the pair of
electrodes relating to said coordinate axis;
means for calculating the gradients of the measured capaci-
ties of said pair of electrodes;
means for squaring said positioning control signals relating
to said pair of electrodes; and
means for multiplying said gradient by said squared signals.
4,393,711
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR ULTRASONIC
DETECTION OF FLAWS IN POWER PLANT PIPING
SYSTEMS
Meivin E. Lapides, Mountain View, Calif., assignor to Electric
Power Research Institute, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
FiledlSov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,627
Int. Q.^ GOIN 29/04
U.S. Q. 73—592 _ 6 Qaims
1. In a method of in-service ultrasonic detection of a crack-
ing condition in a pipe section of predetermined configuration,
the steps of:
(a) selecting a plurality of ultrasonic return signal features
and a tunable algorithmic combination of the measured
values thereof whose resultant value is useful in distin-
guishing return signals from a cracking condition and
from geometric reflectors, said selection being based on
prior ultrasonic examination studies on a plurality of pipe
samples having a variety of known geometric reflectors
and known cracking conditions;
(b) providing a calibration pipe sample having a prearranged
configuration with geometric reflectors substantially cor-
responding to said pipe section and at least one known
cracking condition;
(c) performing an ultrasonic examination of said calibration
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
941
pipe sample to measure the values of said selected return
signal features while tuning said tunable algorithmic com-
bination to optimize the capability of said algorithmic
combination to distinguish return signals from said geo-
metric reflectors and said known cracking condition;
second housing means for supporting said display in rela-
tion to said surface: and
interconnecting means for adjustably interconnecting said
first housing means and said second housing means in
reflection-receiving relation to each other,
said second housing means including:
an elongated hollow tube with one end constructed to
contact said surface and the other end constructed for
viewing, with the liquid crystal display being positioned
intermediate the ends of the second housing means,
there being further provided:
l»t-S£«WIC£ PIPE SECTKW
1 5 -2 MH, POWER BMO
2 ?SMHf POWER BANC
z:o
<S!
(d) performing an ultrasonic examination of said pipe section
using the same selected return signal features and said
tuned algorithmic combination of the values thereof to
ascertain the presence or absence of a cracking condition
therein. ,
4,393,712
PORTABLE LIQUID CRYSTAL TESTING DEVICE
Jaswinder S. Sandhu, Chicago, III., assignor to R^j Technology
Partnership, Chicago, III.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,003
Int. Q.3 GOIN 29/00
U.S. Q. 73—603 8 Qaims
1. A portable device for inspecting bodies for internal flaws
and for providing a visual image thereof which comprises:
an ultrasonic transducer which emits ultrasonic energy for
insonifying at least a portion of the body to be inspected;
a liquid crystal display for receiving energy from the insoni-
fied body and for visually displaying an image thereof; and
means for viewing the display;
wherein the improvement comprises said device being
constructed to rest on a surface, to be acoustically
coupled to said surface, and to inspect for flaws or
features beneath said surface, said device including:
an assembly for separately but adjustably supporting said
transducer and said liquid crystal display in reflection-
receiving relation to each other, said assembly including:
first housing means for supporting said transducer in rela-
tion to said surface;
means at the viewing end for optically viewmg images
developed by said display;
means at the contacting end for acoustically coupling said
second housing means to the surface; and
acoustic transmission means for contacting the cell and
the coupling means for carrying acoustic signals from
the contact end of said housing to the cell;
whereby when said device is placed on a surface, ultra-
sonic energy emitted from said transducer is projected
into the body and reflections therefrom are received on
said display through said coupling end and transmission
medium for optical viewing.
4,393,713
DIGITAL PRESSURE-MEASURING DEVICE
Philippe Guillemot, Paris, France, assignor to Mecilec, Paris,
France
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 52,980, Jun. 28, 1979, Pat. No.
4,301,685. This application Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,743
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 27, 1980, 81 01450
Int. a.3 GOIL 9/00
U.S. Q. 73—701 7 Qaims
62 ^io ,m
1. A digital pressure-measuring device comprising a first
chamber subjected to the pressure to be measured, a second
chamber connected to the first through an opening fitted with
a valve, a pressure-tight partition-wall between the two cham-
bers, said wall being deformable under the action of a pressure
difference between the two chambers, an element for convert-
ing the deformation of the partition-wall directly to electrical
942
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
logic signals indicating the appearance of a pressure difference
equal to a predetermined increment +AP and to a predeter-
mined decrement — AP and to zero, wherein said element
comprises an optical emitter, two light guides in spaced rela-
tion, two photoreceivers and a screen secured to the deform-
able wall and capable of displacement between the emitter and
the light guides in order to permit or prevent penetration of the
light into either of the two guides, said device being further
provided with means for initiating opening of the valve under
the action of the logic signals which indicate the appearance of
a pressure difference equal to + AP and for initiating closure of
said valve under the action of the signal which indicates that
said difference is zero, bidirectional counting means for receiv-
ing said logic signals and accounting for the number of incre-
ments + AP obtained and reduced by the number of decre-
ments — AP obtained.
4,393,714
DIFFERENTIAL PRESSURE SENSOR
Curt Schmidt, Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kemforschungszentrum Karlsruhe GmbH, Karlsruhe, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,692
Qaims priority, application European Patent Off., Mar. 7,
1981, 81101676.5
Int. a.^ GOIL 9/n
U.S. a. 73—718 8 Claims
34
1. A differential pressure sensor comprising in combination:
(a) a housing including means defining first and second
inlets;
(b) a rod-shaped capacitive displacement sensor affixed to
said housing in the interior thereof;
(c) a first electrode constituted by an end face of said dis-
placement sensor;
(d) a second electrode constituted by a diaphragm extending
generally parallel to and at a distance from said first elec-
trode; said diaphragm having opposite faces;
(e) a bellows affixed to said housing and said diaphragm
along a circumference thereof;
(0 a first chamber defined within said housing and communi-
cating with said first inlet; and
(g) a second chamber defined within said housing and com-
municating with said second inlet; said first and second
chambers being separated fluid tight from one another;
one of said faces of said diaphragm being exposed to the
pressure of a first fluid admitted to said first chamber
through said first inlet and the other of said faces of said
diaphragm being exposed to the pressure of a second fluid
admitted to said second chamber through said second
inlet, whereby said diaphragm is displaced and said dis-
tance from said first electrode is varied as a function of the
difference between the pressures of said first and second
fluids to vary the capacitance of said capacitive displace-
ment sensor.
433,715
ABSOLUTE PRESSURE PICK-UP, ESPEOALLY FOR
MEASURING PRESSURE AT INTAKE IN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Claude Lombard, Le Chesnay, France, assignor to Regie Na-
tionale Des Usines Renault, Boulogne-Billancourt, France
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,975
Claims priority, application France, May 7, 1980, 80 10172
Int. a.3 GOIL 9/10
U.S. a. 73—728 . 3 Qaims
1. A pressure pick-up comprising:
a scalable rigid cylindrical envelope having two ends;
a fluid tight elastic bellows in said envelope and having one
end attached to one of said ends of said envelope;
biasing means associated with said bellows for expanding
said bellows;
a ferrite screened magnetic circuit in said bellows;
a mobile ferrite core in said circuit and fixed to the other end
of said bellows;
a single induction coil within said circuit, said coil having
two ends extending out of said envelope;
means for applying a fluid pressure in said envelope and only
on the outside of said bellows; and
means for providing a fluid tight seal for said envelope at
points where said two ends exit said envelope.
4,393,716
nXTURE FOR ENVIRONMENTAL EXPOSURE OF
STRUCTURAL MATERIALS UNDER COMPRESSION
LOAD
Ronald K. Gark, Hampton, and W. Barry Lisagor, Newport
News, both of Va., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Administrator of the National Aeronau-
tics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Nov. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,506
Int. a.^ GOIN 3/08, 3/02, 25/00
U.S. a. 73—818 3 Qaims
1. An apparatus for stressing deformable materials which
comprises: _
a top plate;
a bottom plate;
A guide cylinder positioned between said top plate and said
bottom plate;
a load piston positioned within said guide cylinder;
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
943
an adjusuble loading bolt positioned in the center and ex-
tending through said top plate to contact said load piston;
means for positioning a deformable material specimen be-
tween said bottom plate and said load piston;
said adjustable loading bolt serving to apply a compression
load force to said load piston;
means for maintaining the compression load force on said
load piston, said means for maintaining the compression
load force consisting of two tie bolts;
each said tie bolt extending from the upper surface of said
top plate to the lower surface of said bottom plate;
said tie bolts being fixably attached to said bottom plate; and
each of said tie bolts extending through a tie bolt nut posi-
tioned on the upper surface of said top plate;
whereby tightening said tie bolt nuts draws said top plate
toward said bottom plate, and pushes said top plate and
said bottom plate securely against said guide cylinder to
thereby maintain the compression load force applied to
the specimen by said loading bolt and said load piston.
uration to hold a workpiece at two laterally displaced
locations thereon,
(b) each clamping means includes a clamping head and a
divided workpiece end holder disposed within the clamp-
ing head,
(c) the clamping heads each have a front wall facing each
other and an inwardly enlarged opening at their facing
front walls,
(d) each divided workpiece end holder is mounted in said
enlarged opening and contains a longitudinal opening for
the passage of the end of the workpiece,
(e) the rear side of each workpiece end holder having a
support face effective to support a thicker head located at
the end of the workpiece, and
1 1 4,393,717
APPARATUS FOR TESTING MEDiaNAL TABLETS
Donald L. Mason, Washington, and Warren A. McAllister,
Greenville, both of N.C., assignors to Burroughs Wellcome
Co., Research Triangle Park, N.C.
I Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,825
Int. Q.' GOIN 3/08
U.S. Q. 73-821 16 Qaims
1. Apparatus for testing medicinal tablets for thickness,
diameter and hardness comprising a support for receiving
tablets one at a time for testing, means movable relative to the
support in a direction perpendicular to the thickness of the
tablet to measure the thickness of the tablet, means movable
relative to the support in a direction at right angles to the
thickness of the tablet to measure the diameter of the tablet,
said latter means being further movable to crush the tablet to
thus measure the hardness, and means for effecting reciprocal
movement of the aforesaid means in sequence and for repeating
said sequence of operation for a predetermined number of
tablets.
V— ^
(0 a measuring apparatus including two laterally displaced
elongation measurement holders for engaging the work-
piece at two laterally displaced locations thereon which
locations are inwardly spaced from the ends of the work-
piece,
(g) said measurement holders include an annular jacket ring
having a central opening and a bipartite inner annular ring
mounted within said central opening,
(h) each of the sections of said bipartite inner ring having an
annular groove facing inwardly with respect to the speci-
men and having a structural configuration to engage a
shoulder formed at each of the two laterally spaced loca-
tions on the workpiece.
4,393,718
ASSEMBLY FOR STRESS TESTING MATERIAL UNDER
HIGH TEMPERATURES
Werner Gebhard, Forsbach, and Claus Kroder, Cologne, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Deutsche Forschungs-und
VersuchsansUlt fiir Luft-und Raumfahrt e.V., Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,573
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 20,
1980, 3023063 _
Int. a? GOIN 3/04
U.S. Q. 73—859 5 Qaims
1. An assembly for tensile stress testing material under high
temperatures, said assembly comprising:
(a) two clamping means mounted to move longitudinally
with respect to each other and having a structural config-
4,393,719
IONIZATION FLOWMETER
Walter J. Wiegand, Glastonbury, and Robert H. Bullis, Avon,
both of Conn., assignors to United Technologies Corporation,
Hartford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,837
Int. Q.3 GOIF 1/70
U.S. Q. 73—861.05 25 Qaims
12. An apparatus for measuring the flux of a fluid flowing
along an axis through a defined region comprising:
(a) ion means for producing a concentration of ions distrib-
uted in said fluid and for varying said ion concentration to
produce ion concentration changes in said fluid;
(b) a plurality of planar fluid-permeable electrodes oriented
substantially perpendicular to said fluid flow and disposed
along the axis of said flow region at predetermined posi-
tions;
(c) voltage means for applying a first potential between said
ion producing means and a first fluid-permeable electrode
disposed on a first side of said ion producing means;
(d) voltage means for applying a second potential between
said first electrode and a second fluid-permeable electrode
located on said first side further from said ion producing
means than said first fluid-permeable electrode;
(e) firjt signal means for generating an entrance signal re-
944
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
lated in time to the passage of ion concentration changes
through said first fluid-permeable electrode and first de-
tection means for generating an exit signal related in time
to the passage of ion concentration changes through said
second fluid-permeable electrode; and
(0 combining means, responsive to said first signal means
and first detection means, for combining first entrance and
4,393,721
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING FLUID FLOW
John T. Turaer, Higher Disley; Harish C. Gulati, Denton; WH*
liam B. Hall, Alderley Edge, all of England, and Arnold
Watson, Auckland, New Zealand, assignors to The Victoria
University of Manchester, Manchester, England
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,344
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 16, 1980,
8026746
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/20
U.S. a. 73—861.21 16 Qaims
exit signals obtained at a first value of said second poten-
tial with second entrance and exit signals obtained at a
second value of said second potential with a representa-
tion of the magnitudes of said first and second voltages
and with other physical parameters of the apparatus in a
predetermined manner to form a representation of the
fluid flux.
1. Apparatus for measuring fluid flow comprising a tubular
body, means defining a fluid flow path, a member within said
tubular body formed of crest and trough formations disposed
along said path such that the flow of fluid is between the outer
surface of said member and the internal surface of said tubular
body and produces a signal which is dependent upon the fluid
flow, means for detecting said signal, and means for converting
the detected signal to provide a measurement of the fluid flow.
4,393,722
FLOW MEASURING DEVICE
Marvin D. Scott, 701 Morningside Dr., Mineral Wells, Tex.
76067
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,741
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/42
U.S. a. 73—861.61 6 Qaims
4,393,720
BALL-ORCULATION TYPE LIQUID FLOW RATE
SENSOR
Tom Takahashi, Mito, and Sadayasu Ueno, Katsuta, both of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,387
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 24, 1980, 55-131634
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/70
U.S. Q. 73—861.05
16 Qaims
1. A flow rate sensor comprising an annular passage means
for enabling a flow of liquid therethrough, a movable member
disposed in the annular passage means, an intake passage means
for supplying the liquid to the annular passage means, and an
outlet passage means disposed concentrically to the intake
passage means for enabling the liquid to flow out of the annular
passage means about an outer periphery of the intake passage
means.
1. A fluid measuring device comprising:
housing having a bore therethrough; a pair of spaced fluid
passageway means in said housing for permitting fluid to
exit said housing for differential pressure measurement;
and
removable orifice means removably insertable substantially
across said housing bore intermediate said pair of passage-
way means, said orifice means comprising,
a carrier member having a central arcuate cutout portion
of slightly greater than 180 degrees, an orifice plate and
centrally apertured seal plates on opposite sides of said
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
945
orifice plates, all of said plates being carried within said
carrier cutout portion whereby said plates are re-
strained from radial movement.
4,393,723
FLUID FLOW METER
Glen Brand, 4114 N. 79th, Omaha, Douglas County, Nebr.
68134
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,675
Int. a.3 GOIF //;;
U.S. Q. 7i-861.72 lo Qaims
1. A fluid flow meter, comprising:
a turbine having a hub for mounting on a supporting struc-
ture affixed to the interior of a housing having inlet and
outlet ends, for both rotational and downstream move-
ment of said turbine with respect to said supporting struc-
ture, in response to the rate of flow of fluid through said
housing;
means for biasing said turbine with forces in directions oppo-
site to those applied to said turbine by said fluid flow; and
means for determining the combined rotational and down-
stream displacement of said turbine, whereby said flow
rate can be translated to more than 360° of angular dis-
placement of said turbine.
4,393,724
FLOW METER HAVING A ROTARY BODY
Karl-Heini Werkmann, and Wolfgang Sauerschell, both of
Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to VDO
Adolf Schindling AG, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,146
Int. Q\? GOIF I/IO
U.S. Q. 73-861.91 41 Qaims
T"
Tm
1. In a flow meter, particulariy for liquids, having an impel-
ler which is arranged in a measurement bore and is drivable by
a flow stream of oncoming flow flowing through the measure-
ment bore, the improvement comprising
a housing forming a chamber with an inlet connection and an
outlet connection,
a movable wall subdividing said chamber into two chamber
halves,
one of said chamber halves is in communication with said
inlet connection and the measurement bore upstream of
said impeller,
the other of said chamber halves is in communication with
said outlet connection and the measurement bore down-
stream of said impeller,
the impeller has a bearing shaft, the ends of said bearing shaft
being rotatably mounted in an axially and radially guiding
bearing,
at least one vane of the impeller having a flow-on surface
inclined to the direction of the oncoming flow, and
sensor means for detecting the rotary frequency of said
impeller.
4,393,725
APPARATUS TO MEASURE YARN TENSION
Larry S. Satterfield, Moore, S.C, assignor to Milliken Research
Corporation, Spartanburg, S.C.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,966
Int. a.J GOIL 5/10: GOIH li/00
U.S. Q. 73-862.41 4 Qaims
3. Apparatus to measure the tension in a running length of
yarn comprising: a frame, at least one pair of guide members
attached to said frame and longitudinally spaced from one
another to guide yarn from one end of said frame to the other
end of said frame, air jet means mounted to said frame to
supply air under pressure against the yarn passing between said
guide members to cause said yam to vibrate at its harmonic
frequency and a second means mounted in said frame to mea-
sure the harmonic frequency of the yarn as it passes through
said guide members.
4,393,726
SAMPLING VALVE USEFUL IN LIQUID
CHROMATOGRAPHY
Rolf Tamm, Salem, and Toma Tomoff, Uberlingen, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bodenseeverk Perkin-Elmer &
Co. GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,735
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 1,
1980, 3037014
Int. Q.5 GOIN i5/O0
U.S. Q. 73-864.84 3 Qaims
1. Method of feeding samples in liquid chromatography, said
method comprises the steps of:
providing a sample into a dosing loop by means of an injec-
946
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
tion needle through a sample inlet valve said valve having
stationary and movable members in a first position of said
valve,
changing said sample valve to a second position, thereby
connecting, in series, a transport liquid source, said dosing
loop and a separating column, and
wherein said providing step includes:
sucking an air volume into said injection needle prior to
^ sucking-in said sample;
inserting said injection needle, through a bore in said mov-
able valve member into a dosing bore of said stationary
valve member,
retracting said injection needle after the sample has been
introduced and prior to said changing-over of said sample
valve.
motion in relation to each other when actuated by said actuat-
ing means, the radius of curvature of said curved surfaces
4,393,727
FRICTION DRIVE
Edward H. Phillips, Middletown, Calif., assignor to Optimetrix
Corporation, Mountain View, Calif.
Filed Mar. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 129,214
Int. a.3 F16H 13/14
U.S. a. 74—209 10 Qaims
4,393,728
FLEXIBLE ARM, PARTICULARLY A ROBOT ARM
Ove Larson, Gothenburg, and Charles Davidson, Askim, both of
Sweden, assignors to Robotgruppen HE, Gothenburg, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 129,202, Mar. 11, 1980, abandoned.
This application Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,589
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 16, 1979, 7902366
Int. a.^ B25J 1/02; F16C 7/00; A61F 1/06
U.S. a. 74—469 14 Claims
1. A flexible arm, particularly a robot arm, for supporting
and/or manipulating tools or the like, wherein a number of
elements are arranged in series for contacting each other and
power-generating and power-transmitting actuating means are
provided and arranged to operate the elements to move them
with respect to each other comprising each said element has
segments with convexly curved surfaces substantially oppo-
sitely disposed with respect to each other, the curved surfaces
of each of said segments engaging the adjacent curved surfaces
of the adjacent segments so that said elements have a rolling
being relatively considerably larger than the height of said
segments.
4,393,729
GEAR SHIFT MECHANISM
Thomas E. Wilson, Troy, Mich., assignor to Rockwell Interna-
tional Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,286
Int. C\? G05G 5/24
U.S. a. 74-475 4 Qaims
54
.010 INCH
1. A friction drive comprising:
a rotary drive member;
a rotary driven member; and
a compliant rotary member for coupling the rotary drive
member and the rotary driven member together, the com-
pliant rotary member being loaded against at least one of
those members;
the compliant rotary member having a circular inner portion
and an annular outer portion resiliently and eccentrically
offset relative to one another and further having at least
three circumferentially extending spring elements sym-
. metrically disposed around the periphery of the inner
portion, each of those circumferentially extending spring
elements being entirely circumferential in an unloaded
condition of the compliant rotary member, being rigidly
attached at one end to the inner portion and being rigidly
attached at another end to the outer portion.
80-
1. A gear shift mechanism for a gear mounted on a shaft
within the housing of a power transmitting device comprising:
a shift rod mounted parallel with said shaft and capable of
axial movement between a first and a second position, said
shift rod extending through a hole in said housing to have
an external end and an internal portion;
coupling means rigidly mounted on said internal portion
coupling said shift rod to said gear to cause said gear to be
capable of moving in response to said movement of said
shift rod;
a locking lever pivotally mounted within a slot in said shift
rod and having an extended end thereof capable of extend-
ing beyond an external surface of said shift rod;
said locking lever being pivotally biased to cause said ex-
tended end to overlie said housing adjacent said hole
when said shift rod is in said first position and to make
sliding contact with an interior surface of said hole when
said shift rod is in said second position and between said
first and said second positions; and
means for retracting said extended end of said locking lever
to be within said slot when said shift rod is selectively
moved from said first position to said second position.
4,393,730
UNIDIRECTIONAL DETENT GATE
John R. Randall, La Palma, Calif., assignor to McDonnell Doug-
las Corporation, Long Beach, Calif.
FUed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,733
Int. a.J G05G 5/06
U.S. a. 74—538 10 Claims
10. A unidirectional gate for a detent slot on the periphery of
a base activated by a roller moving in a first plane comprising:
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
947
a first pivot peg mounted on said base member perpendicular
to said first plane;
a carrier mounted on said first pivot peg for rotation in a first
direction in a second plane parallel to said first plane;
spring means attached to said base and said carrier restrain-
ing rotation of said carrier in a first direction, said carrier
rotation in the second direction opposite said first direc-
. tion limited by a stop located on said base member;
second pivot peg mounted on said carrier perpendicular to
said first plane and parallel to said first pivot peg;
adapted to selectively produce forward drive or reverse
drive at a constant torque multiplication.
4,393,732
ABNORMALITY TREATMENT DEVICE FOR
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION CONTROL DEVICE
Tadashi Suzuki, and Norimasa Kishi, both of Yokosuka, Japan,
assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 23, 1980. Ser. No. 190,071
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 28, 1979, 54-124816-
Sep. 28, 1979, 54-124817; Sep. 28, 1979, 54-124818; Sep. 28!
Int. a.' B60K 41/16: F16H 5/64
U.S. a. 74-866 9 q^^
103 I06
!QQ I '0^ loe 110 112- III-
^ ' I '"°I09 III 112 115
102 M.{ n)iMBriillill---ntiiii^^ {
a cover having two slots therein mounted on said first and
second pivot pegs for rotation and for vertical movement;
second spring means attached to said cover and to said base
to restrain rotation and vertical movement of said cover;
and
a pin mounted on said cover, perpendicular to said first
plane, to engage said roller in a first arc to move said
cover and expose said detent slot, and when said roller
engages the said pin in a second arc opposite said first arc,
the roller forces the gate closed, providing a bridge over
the detent slot.
120 ""
fOf "0 -OB lis
II
4 393 731
INnNITELY VARIABLE BELT-DRIVE TRANSMISSION
Howard L. Croswhite; Po-Lung Liang, both of Livonia, and Alan
R. Fisher, Dearborn, all of Mich., assignors to Ford Motor
Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 186,944
Int. a.3 F16H 37/08. 57/10. 47/08
U.S. a. 74-689 ,0 Qaims
\ S/VSw/~\
1. A motor vehicle transmission for producing a stepless
range of torque ratios between an input member and an output
member comprising:
means connected to the input member for varying its torque
ratio by steplessly changing the radial distance from the
axes of the input member and its output member at which
an endless, flexible belt driveably engages these members;
a hydrodynamic torque converter connected to the output
of the torque ratio producing means, adapted to multiply
the torque output of the torque ratio producing means
over at least a portion of its range; and
a gearset connected to the output of the torque converter
1. An abnormality treatment device for a control device for
an automatic transmission including a speed change gear mech-
anism whose power transmission passage is connected to an
output shaft of an engine and changed by means of hydrauli-
cally operated friction means to obtain a plurality of speed
ranges, said treatment device including a speed range selection
judgement circuit for receiving respective signals from an
engine load sensor generating engine load signals correspond-
ing to engine loads and from a vehicle speed sensor generating
vehicle speed signals corresponding to vehicle speeds, compar-
ing these signals with values corresponding to predetermined
engine load and vehicle speed and determining said speed
range and operation of said friction means, and a hydraulic
control judgement circuit for receiving the signals from said
engine load sensor to operate a hydraulic regulator valve, said
treatment device comprising, in its input portion receiving the
signals from said engine load sensor and said vehicle speed
sensor, an abnormal value detection circuit for detecting an
abnormal value of any one of said respective signals to gener-
ate an abnormal value detection signal, and an abnormality
treatment circuit for producing abnormality treatment signals
to be fed to said speed range selection judgement circuit and
said hydraulic control judgement circuit in response to said
abnormal value detection signal, thereby upon detection of the
948
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
abnormal value signal, enabling said speed range selection
judgement circuit and said hydraulic control judgement circuit
to maintain a predetermined speed range and a predetermined
high pressure, respectively.
4,393,733
CORKSCREWS WITH TACKLE REDUCTION
Bruno Desnouiez, 76, Boulevard du General Koenig, 92200
Neuilly, and Andre Dejoux, 15, rue Lakanal, 75015 Paris,
both of France
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,655
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 2, 1979, 79 19823;
Jul. 4, 1980, 80 14994
Int. a.3 B67B 7/00
U.S. a. 81— 3.38 A 7aaims
which fix said lower tackle block and said screw-carrying plate
therebetween, said tackle arrangement comprising cable
means, means to secure one end of said cable means to said
lower tackle block, said one-piece generally tubular body end
wall being formed with opening means permitting said cable
means to pass therethrough, the end of said cable means pass-
ing through said opening means comprising a free operating
end of said tackle arrangement cable means, said molded one-
piece tubular body including no external moving parts other
than said free operating end of said cable means, and said
stirrup legs' length being such with respect to said upper and
lower motion stops and with respect to the length of said
one-piece molded generally tubular body that said screw-car-
rying plate and said lower tackle block secured thereto do not
extend out of the lower open end of said body during normal
use of said corkscrew.
4,393,734
COMBINED TORQUE LIMITING AND MARKING
WRENCH
M. W. Thorn; E. R. Thorn, both of Farmington Hills, and Brent
Thorn, Northville, all of Mich., assignors to Van F. Belknap
Co., Inc., Wixom, Mich.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,836
Int. C1.3 B25B 2i/00
U.S. CI. 81—468 2 Qaims
*»
.-.'■T^--.-r-*fT7-.'r^i-
. '; ■
so -"^ /o
1. A corkscrew comprising a screw-carrying plate and a
J^ tackle arrangement, a one-piece molded generally tubular
body, a cork extracting screw fixed to said screw-carrying
plate, means to mount said plate and said tackle arrangement
inside said body, said body being closed by an end wall at its
other upper end, said tackle arrangement comprising upper
and lower tackle block means to secure said upper tackle block
in said upper end of said body in closely spaced relation to said
end wall, said securing means comprising a pin extending
through said upper tackle block and the juxtapositioned por-
tions of said body, said one-piece molded body being formed
with integral internal groove means extending over substan-
tially all of the internal height of said body, said upper and
lower tackle blocks and screw-carrying plate being formed
with complementary groove means mating with said body
groove means, mating of said body and upper tackle block
groove means serving to prevent relative rotation between said
upper tackle block and said body, mating of said lower tackle
block and said body groove means serving to prevent relative
rotation between said lower tackle block and said body and to
guide axial motion of said lower tackle block within said body,
said upper tackle block serving as a stop for the upward motion
of said lower tackle block within said body, a generally "U"-
shaped stirrup comprising a pair of generally parallel elongated
legs and a cross-connecting portion at one end of said legs, said
body end wall being formed with an opening to permit said
cross-connecting portion of said stirrup and portions of said
legs to extend therethrough and to be located externally of said
body, said stirrup cross-connecting portion being adapted to fit
through said end wall opening and to engage an upper surface
of said upper tackle block to thereby define an end of down-
ward travel stop of said stirrup with respect to said upper
tackle block, recall compression spring means mounted on said
legs of said stirrup and constrained between said upper and
lower tackle blocks to normally urge said upper and lower
tackle blocks away from each other; means to secure said
screw-carrying plate, said lower tackle block and the free ends
of said legs of said stirrup to each other; said securing means
comprismg a pair of crimped portions on each of said legs
1. A torque limiting and part marking wrench comprising an
elongated tubular torque applying handle, an elongated gener-
ally cylindrical housing pivotally mounted at one end to said
torque applying handle, a replaceable part engaging head
assembly mounted to the other end of said housing, and a part
marking mechanism mounted within said housing, said torque
applying handle, cylindrical housing, head assembly and part
marking mechanism being disposed along a common axis,
means for releasably mounting said head assembly to said
housing whereby said head assembly may be replaced with
another head assembly of a different size or design, and said
housing being positionable at various attitudes relative to said
torque applying handle depending on the location of a part
operated upon by the wrench and the available working space;
said head assembly including a wrench head portion having
an open part engaging area and a generally cylindrical
shank portion that is releasably retained within said other
end of said housing by said mounting means;
said marking mechanism including a striking pin that passes
through a bore in said head assembly shank portion for
reciprocal movement, said striking pin being mounted to a
piston assembly that is slidably movable within a bore in
said housing, said striking pin being extended outwardly
from said housing for marking a part in response to fluid
pressure acting on said piston assembly and said striking
pin being retracted within said housing by a return spring
mounted between said head assembly shank portion and
said piston assembly;
said housing including a fluid receiving chamber for receiv-
ing pressurized fluid from an on-off fluid valve unit
mounted on said torque applying handle, said piston as-
sembly being actuated in response to fluid pressure in said
chamber from said valve unit when the torque on a part
acted upon by said wrench has reached a predetermined
value due to manipulation of said wrench.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
949
4 393 735
CUTTING PLATE CARRIER INSERTABLE IN A
HOLDER OF A MACHINE TOOL, IN PARTICULAR A
LATHE TOOL
Otto Eckle, Loechgau, and Helmut Veigel, Schwieberdingen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Komet Stahlhalter-
und Werkzeugfabrik Robert Breuning GmbH, Besigheim,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,775
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 16,
1980, 8000947[U]
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 3, 1995,
1 1 has been disclaimed.
1 1 Int. CI.' B23B 27/00, 29/00
U.S. a. 82-36 R 6 Qaims
1. In a cutting plate carrier insertable in a holder of a ma-
chine tool, in particular a lathe tool, said cutting plate carrier
having a plane base surface and a cylindrical peripheral surface
adjacent and extending perpendicularly thereto and the axis of
which coincides with the axis of a central screw thread pro-
vided in said cutting plate carrier and extending perpendicu-
larly to the base surface, a recess for a polygonal cutting plate
having plural cutting tips, plural lateral surfaces and a central
bore therein and fixable in said recess by means of a clamping
screw which can be screwed into said central thread, for which
cutting plate said recess has a plane supporting surface ar-
ranged parallel to said base surface and a plurality of bearing
surfaces extending parallel to said lateral surfaces of said cut-
ting plate, and a second screw thread provided parallel to said
central screw thread and for screwing in a retaining screw
inserted into said holder from a side thereof remote from said
recess, the improvement comprising wherein said cutting plate
carrier has a substantially circular plan, the axis of which
coincides with the axis of said central screw thread, wherein
the number of said plurality of bearing surfaces corresponds to
the number of said plural lateral surfaces on said cutting plate,
said bearing surfaces each being arranged at an equal distance
(a) from said central screw thread, and wherein the radius of
said peripheral surface of said cutting plate carrier is only
slightly greater than the distance of said cutting tips of said
cutting plate from its said central bore, whereby said cutting
tips are wholly radially inside said peripheral surface and in
said recess to thereby render said cutting plate unusable until
undesired portions of said cutting plate carrier are removed to
expose a desired amount of said cutting plate.
strand for movement across the strand path to engagement
with said bed knife; a linkage mechanism having a knee and
being pivotally connected at one end to said support while the
other end of the linkage mounts said arm for said movement; a
first motive means coupled to said linkage for imparting said
movement; a second motive means engageable with the knee
of the linkage to hold the knee in an over-the-center position
and limit movement of said arm to a location slightly above the
(
strand path and then when energized, said second motive
means moves the knee over center and allows said arm to
complete its movement to engagement with said bed knife;
means for removing the severed and continuously advancing
strand located adjacent said bed knife; and a longitudinal mem-
ber and mounting means between said longitudinal member
and said support to allow transverse movement across the
strand path above the strand removal means.
4,393,737
JULIENNE CUTTER FOR FOOD PROCESSORS
Koichiro Shibata, Seto, Japan, assignor to Cuisinarts, Inc.,
Greenwich, Conn.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,592
Int. CI.' B26D 3/26
U.S. a. 83-356.3 5 Qaims
' ' 4,393,736
CUTTER FOR A MOVING STRAND
Thomas R. Qark, Wilmington, Del.; Alvin E. Lillmars, Newtown
Square, Pa.; Elwood A. Roth, Seaford; Alvin L. Schmick,
Frederica, both of Del., and Maurice C. Todd, Chadds Ford,
Pa., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours and Company,
Wilmington, Del.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,720
Int. a.3 B65H 35/00
U.S. a. 83—100 2 Oaims
1. In an apparatus for processing at least one continuous
advancing strand, a cutting device for the strand comprising: a
support situated adjacent the path of travel of the strand; a bed
knife attached to said support and located below and across
said path of travel; an arm positioned above the path of the
1. A julienne cutter tool for use in rotary food processors of
the type having a working bowl with tool drive means extend-
ing into the bowl for rotating said julienne tool in said bowl in
a predetermined direction about an axis, a removable cover for
the bowl when in use, and a feed passage for introducing food
material into the bowl, said julienne tool having a hub with a
disc-like member secured to the hub, said disc-like member
having a periphery and an elongated opening therein extending
from a region near said hub to a region near the periphery of
said disc-like member, said disc-like member having an ele-
vated portion having a leading edge located behmd said open-
ing, and cutting means associated with said opening for pro-
ducing multiple closely spaced cuts in food items applied
thereto with the resultant cut strips passing through said open-
ing into said bowl, said julienne cutting tool comprising:
a unitary integral cutting structure formed of sheet metal
having an elongated lower portion integral with an elon-
950
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
gated upper portion, which is at a higher elevation than
said lower portion,
said elongated lower portion of said integral cutting struc-
ture being secured beneath said disc-like member in front
of said opening in said disc-like member,
said elongated upper portion of said integral cutting struc-
ture being secured to the top of said elevated portion of
said disc-like member behind said opening near to the
leading edge of said elevated portion of said disc-like
member,
said elongated upper portion of said cutting structure pro-
jecting forward generally horizontally beyond the leading
edge of said elevated portion of the disc-like member,
said cutting structure including a row of relatively closely
spaced, small parallel blades integral with both said upper
and lower portions of said cutting structure,
said row of blades being located in said elongated opening,
said small, parallel blades extending upwardly relative to
said disc-like member as seen looking at said row of blades
in front elevation,
each of said blades being integrally joined to said upper
portion of the cutting structure by an upper triangular
gusset,
each of said blades being integrally joined to said lower
portion of the cutting structure by a lower triangular
gusset,
said upper and lower triangular gussets extending generally
horizontally in opposite directions from the respective
blades,
the leading edges of the upper triangular gussets being sharp-
ened for forming a series of horizontally aligned knife
edges,
the leading edges of the blades also being sharpened,
for said upper triangular gussets to make clean horizontal
cuts in food items and for said blades to make uniformly
spaced upright cuts in the food items for forming cleanly,
uniformly, and neatly cut julienne strips when said cutter
tool is rotated at high speed by the drive means in the food
processor.
4.393,738
CUmNG ROLL FOR PRODUCING SHAPED INNER
AND OUTER CUTS AND A METHOD FOR MAKING
SAME
Giinter Heyden, Neuwied, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Winkler A Dunnebier Maschinenfabrik und Eisengiesserei
GmbH & Co. KG, Neuwied, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 123,634, Feb. 22, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,143
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 24,
1979, 2907325
Int. a.3 B26D 1/62: B21K 5/12
U.S. a. 83—663 2 Qaims
said base member, said weld beads being arranged and
disposed to substantially assume the desired blade profile
with a cutting edge having a rounded cross-sectional
profile supported on a narrower neck portion so as to
require only minor machining to form the cutting edge of
the blade; and
sharpening in a single machining operation the cutting edge
of said blade to a shape resembling a pitched roof.
4,393,739
TOP SHARPENING CHAIN
Jaroslav J. Olmr, Columbia, S.C., assignor to Textron, Inc.,
Providence, R.I.
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,237
Int. a.3 B27B 33/14
U.S. a. 83—834 5 Qaims
1. In a top sharpening saw chain cutting link formed of a
single piece and sharpenable by a grinding device attached to
a chain saw and including a body portion, a depth gauge and an
integral hooded cutting element, the improvement comprising
a side plateless cutting element including a top plate having a
bottom surface, a top surface spaced therefrom and initiating
rearward thereof at a leading end, and a leading end connect-
ing surface extending between the top surface and bottom
surface, a juncture between the connecting surface and the
bottom surface defining the only cutting edge of the cutting
element, said top plate connecting to said body portion
through a surface located rearward of said juncture and along
a side of said bottom surface so as to define an area of clearance
for chip passage.
4,393,740
PROGRAMMABLE TONE GENERATOR
Thomas A. Niezgoda, DeKalb, and Carl P. Oppenheimer, Syca-
more, both of III., assignors to The Wurlitzer Company, De-
Kalb, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 22,970, Mar. 23, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 221,983
Int. a.J GIOH 7/00
U.S. a. 84—1.01 8 Claims
1. A method of making a cutting roll for producing shaped
inner and outer cuts on moving webs or discrete blanks of
paper or the like, comprising the steps of:
welding a multiplicity of weld beads made of a highly wear-
resistant steel alloy on a base member made of a readily
weldable steel so as to form a web-like blade whose cut-
ting edge corresponds to the contour of the desired cut-
ting pattern, said weld beads being disposed one above the
other and one beside the other longitudinally along and on
ICLOCXl tl COUHTtH
JO J ' m 1 1 1 1 1,
I v., — ii^ — tzs
I
u
LtVfl. /
coNmoL
Z6'/
AUTHUtTie
kJ^init
Sd.
» < 1 1<^
Ul —
UST
la-'
1. A digital electronic tone signal generating circuit for an
electronic musical instrument comprising: a clock, digital
counter means having an input connected to said clock and
having a plurality of outputs, a plurality of like tone signal
July 19,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
9S1
branches each comprising a digital signal processing circuit
including buffer means connected to selected ones of said
counter outputs, adder means connected to said buffer, pro-
grammable variable number source means connected to said
adder, comparator means connected to said adder and also to
said selected counter outputs, and flip-flop means connected to
said comparator and controlled thereby to produce either a
logic 1 or logic 0 output, said selected counter outputs and said
programmable variable number source means cooperating for
controlling the state of said flip-flop means to construct a
rectangular wave output of selected pulse width and pulse
spacing in each tone signal branch, thereby comprising a com-
posite tone signal of selected fundamental frequency and har-
monic content for each tone signal branch, wherein said pro-
grammable variable number source means comprises means
providing programmed fixed numbers, programmable means
for generating further numbers and means for selectively add-
ing said further numbers with said fixed numbers.
1. In an e ectronic organ provided with a plurality of input
keyboard keys, a plurality of stops, plural input circuits for
providing input waveform signals of different frequencies, and
keyer circuits operative in response to actuation of selected
keys for gating waveform signals from said input circuits to
keyer output circuitry,
separate means each effective for providing enabling pulses
for operating a given keyer to an on condition for cou-
pling a said waveform signal, each of said separate means
being controllable to provide a different enabling pulse at
a different time for a controllably different length of time
to said given keyer,
wherein each of said separate means is responsive to a key of
said keyboard for operating said given keyer to an on
condition, with the separate means being separately re-
sponsive according to operation of stops of said organ.
4,393,742
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE TYPE
SYNTHESIZING A PLURALITY OF PARTIAL TONE
SIGNALS
Masatada Wachi, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon Gakki
Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Hamamatsu, Japan
Filed Aug, 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,052
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1980, 55-124929
Int. a.i GIOH 1/06
U.S. a. 84-1.23 8 Claims
4,393,741
ELECTRONIC ORGAN CTRCUIT
Gerald A. Budelman, Aloha, Oreg., assignor to CBS, Inc., New
York, N.Y.
I j Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,652
' ' Int. a.3 GlOB 3/10; GIOH 1/24
U.S. a. 84—1.01 16 Claims
1. An electronic musical instrument comprising:
means for producing a time window signal;
means for producing a plurality of predetermined partial
tone signals;
first control means connected to said time window signal
producing means for controlling a time width of said time
window signal;
second control means connected to said partial tone signal
producing means for controlling the frequency of each of
said partial tone signals and assigning said partial tone
signals to respective time divisioned time slots;
modulating means for modulating said partial tone signals
with said time window signal and producing modulated
partial tone signals in said time divisioned time slots re-
spectively; and
synthesizing means connected to said rnodulating means for
synthesizing said modulated partial tone signals and pro-
ducing a musical tone signal.
4,393,743
ELECTRONIC MUSICAL INSTRUMENTS OF THE TYPE
SYNTHESIZING A PLURALITY OF PARTIAL TONE
SIGNALS
Masatada Wachi, Hamamatsu, Japan, assignor to Nippon Gakki
Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha, Hamamatsu, Japan
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 301,014
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 24, 1980, 55-133261
Int. a.3 GIOH 1/08. 7/00
U.S. a. 84—1.23 13 Qaims
1. An electronic musical instrument of the type in which a
952
/
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
musical tone is synthesized from a plurality of windowed
partial tone components, comprising:
time window signal generating means for separately generat-
ing for each of said windowed partial tone components a
time window signal having a time width;
frequency signal generating means for separately generating
for each of said windowed partial tone components a fre-
quency signal having a frequency;
tone color setting means for setting a tone color selected
among a plurality of tone colors;
control means connected to said tone color setting means for
determining said time widths of said time window signals
generated by said time window signal generating means and
said frequencies of said frequency signals generated by said
frequency signal generating means in accordance with the
set tone color;
modulating means for amplitude modulating each frequency
signal with the time window signal for the corresponding
windowed partial tone component and for combining the
resultant modulated signals to produce a combined signal
containing a plurality of partial tone components whose
frequencies are determined by said time widths and said
frequencies; and
sound system means for converting said combined signal to a
musical tone.
4,393,744
PRESS FOR RELOADING RIFLE AND PISTOL
CARTRIDGES
Richard J. Lee, 3146 Kettle Moraine Rd., Hartford, Wis. 53027
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,677
Int. a.3 F42B 33/02
U.S. a. 86—25 6 Claims
means for restraining said turret from moving axially up-
wardly when a force is applied to it by the ram.
4,393,745
RELEASABLE RETAINER FOR EJECTION TUBE
Henry C. Mayo, and William V. Millman, both of Alexandria,
Va., assignors to The United States of America as represented
by the Secretary of the Army, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,624
Int. a.3 F41F 3/04
U.S. a. 89—1.806 9 Oaims
1. A detent assembly including a slotted support defming at
least one slot therein by an inside wall, said slotted support
mounted on a hollow support, the detent assembly to detain a
movable item in the hollow support, the detent assembly hav-
ing a spring connected to the slotted support, a restraining
tooth connected to the spring such that the spring biases the
restraining tooth through the slot in the slotted support and
wherein the restraining tooth is rotated against the bias of the
spring by movement thereagainst of the item, such that:
as the restraining tooth is rotated against the bias of the
spring, the restraining tooth is forced against the inside
wall of said slot in the slotted support preventing move-
ment of the item within the hollow support in a first direc-
.tion.
4 393 746
AMMUNITION MAGAZINE WITH BUILT-IN
COMPARTMENT COVERS
John G. Rocha, Dover, N.J., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,826
Int. a.3 F41D 10/14
U.S. a. 89—34 7 aaims
1. A press for reloading cartridges comprising:
a base member,
an elongated ram mounted for moving axially upwardly and
downwardly on the base member and a holder at an end of
the ram for holding a cartridge,
means for driving the ram axially in opposite directions,
a turret ring and means for supporting said turret ring rigidly
above the base member in a plane that is transverse to the
axis of the ram, said turret ring having an axially directed
bore and bearing surface means on said ring circumjacent
the nominally upper end of the bore,
a generally circular turret for supporting dies that act on said
cartridge, said turret having radially outwardly extending
flange means radially remote from its center which out-
wardly extending flange means interface with said bea-
rinng surface to support said turret for rotating in in said
bore of the turret ring, and
1. An ammunition magazine comprising a plurality of com-
partments formed by vertical separators for holding rounds
linked by a belt and at least one compartment cover, said
compartment cover rotatably mounted immediately above one
of said vertical separators for either opening or closing one of
said compartments, said compartment cover having an opened
position when said rounds are disposed inside said one of said
compartments and a closed position when said one of said
compartments is emptied of said rounds, wherein said compart-
JULY 19, 1^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
953
ment cover is radially extended from said one of said vertical
separators forming a substantially continuous surface with said
one of said vertical separators, and said compartment cover
forming a single vertical plane with said one of said vertical
separators when in said opened position, and extending in a
direction substantially perpendicular to said one of said verti-
cal separators when in said closed position.
4,393,747
LOADING TABLE
Olle Gustavsson, and Goran Sundmar, both of Karlskoga, Swe-
den, assignors to Aktiebolaget Bofors, Bofors, Sweden
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,635
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Dec. 18, 1979, 7910436
Int. CI.3 F41F 9/02
U.S. a. 89—45 8 Qaims
o
t
1. A firearm loading table for receiving a plurality of ammu-
nition units and individually depositing said ammunition units
comprising:
an endless chain supported by first and second sprockets,
forming upper and lower horizontal chain segments;
a plurality of holding trough segments connected to said
endless chain, and perpendicular therewith, pairs of said
holding trough segments abutting each other along said
upper segment to form a trough member for receiving an
ammunition unit, said holding trough segments having a
rear edge at the center thereof for coacting with a front
edge of a section of the ammunition unit for fixing the
ammunition unit against forward motion;
stop means;
a support member for holding said stop means an adjustable
preselected distance from one end of said trough members
to form an adjustable stop means whereby motion of an
ammunition unit in a direction of said one end is restricted;
and
means for rotating said sprockets to incrementally move said
endless chain a distance substantially equal to the distance
between centers of said holding troughs, whereby said
segments on said upper horizontal segment advancing
towards the end of the said horizontal segment separate,
releasing an ammunition unit, the rear segment of a trough
pushing said released ammunition unit into a receiving
plane.
4,393,748
DEVICE FOR STRIPPER
Sten Hallqvist, and Erik Eriksson, both of Karlskoga, Sweden,
assignors to Aktiebolaget Bofors, Bofors, Sweden
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,595
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Dec. 18, 1979, 7910442
I Int. Q.3 F41F 9/06
U.S. Q. 89—47 7 Qaims
1. In a firearm having a chamber for receiving a shell and
powder charge, a ramming unit for inserting said shell and
powder charge in said chamber, a threaded breech ring and
closing screw for maintaining said chamber closed, the im-
provement comprising:
an elongated stripper for holding the powder charge in the
chamber during extraction of said ramming unit, said
stripper being connected at one end to swmg from a first
charge holding position to a second position for maintain-
ing said stripper from striking said powder charge;
a blocking means for maintaining said stripper in said second
position until said ramming unit moves said shell and
powder charge into said chamber including a longitudinal
blocking rod having at one end thereof an actuator for
longitudinally displacing said rod in response to move-
ment of said ramming unit, and a displacement means
connecting said stripper with a remaining end of said
blocking rod, whereby motion of said rod releases said
stripper from said second position to assume said first
position under the influence of a spring force against said
stripper; and,
means for moving said stripper from said first position to said
second position in response to closing said screw with said
breech ring whereby said stripper is maintained in place
avoiding contact with a subsequent shell and powder
charge.
4,393,749
VACUUM ACTUATED TYPE BOOSTER DEVICE
Yoshihisa Miyazaki, Ueda, Japan, assignor to Nissin Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Ueda, Japan
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,354
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1979, 54-124636
Int. Q.3 F15B 9/10: FOIB 19/00; F16J 3/00
U.S. CI. 91—376 R 5 Qaims
1. In a vacuum actuated booster device having a booster
shell, a booster piston reciprocatably received in the booster
shell, a diaphragm connected at its inner peripheral portion to
the rear side of a radial disc portion of said booster piston and
at its outer peripheral portion to the peripheral wall of said
booster shell, a first working chamber and a second working
chamber defined in said booster shell by said booster piston
and said diaphragm, a vacuum source with which said first and
second working chambers are normally communicated, an
input rod slideably mounted in said booster piston, and valve
means connected to atmosphere for bringing said second
working chamber into communication with ambient air by the
954
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
forward movement of said input rod so that said booster piston
is driven forwardly by the differential pressure between said
first and second working chambers,
an improvement wherein said booster piston comprises a
piston body having a disc portion with windows and
porous thin-walled members covering said windows, said
diaphragm contacting said porous thin-walled members
closing said windows.
4,393,750
BRAKE BOOSTER
Wilfried Wagner, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to ITT Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
nied Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,134
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 7,
1980, 3029911
Int. a.^ F15B 9/10
U.S. a. 91—376 R 9 Claims
of said piston as it is urged toward said one cylinder end and
for introducing fluid at the rear of said piston to urge it away
from said one cylinder end, said cylinder ports being spaced
longitudinally apart along the direction of travel of said piston
within said cylinder with one port nearer said cylinder end
than the other port, said piston being shiftable over said other
cylinder port, a valve for evacuating and introducing fluid
from and into said one cylinder end, said valve having first,
second and third passages, each of said first and second pas-
sages in spaced communication with said third passage in the
valve, a fluid flow restrictor means within said third valve
passage and shiftable therein in response to fluid flow from a
1. A brake booster for automotive vehicles comprising:
a low-pressure casing having a longitudinal axis;
an axially movable wall disposed in said casing in a coaxial and
transverse relationship with said axis to subdivide said casing
into a low-pressure chamber and a working chamber;
a mechanically actuatable control valve to connect said work-
ing chamber to a selected one of said low-pressure chamber
and atmosphere, said control valve being disposed in an
axially movable control valve housing disposed coaxial of
said axis in communication with a master cylinder piston
actuating push rod;
a force-transmitting sleeve having a plurality of longitudinal
slots disposed in said casing coaxial of said axis, one end of
said sleeve being connected to said housing and the other
end of said sleeve being connected to said movable wall; and
a reinforcement tube extending coaxial of said axis through
said casmg having an outside diameter less than the inside
diameter of said sleeve, said tube being sealed to said mov-
able wall, having one end connected to one end wall of said
casing in a transverse relationship to said axis adjacent said
low-pressure chamber and having a plurality of radial exten-
sions adjacent the other end of said tube in said working
chamber, each of said plurality of radial extensions extend-
ing through a different one of said plurality of longitudinal
slots and connected to the other end wall of said casing in a
transverse relationship with said axis adjacent said working
chamber.
non-operative position to an operative position between said
first and second passages for reducing the rate of fluid flow
from said first valve passage into said third valve passage, said
first valve passage in communication with said one cylinder
port, said second valve passage in communication with said
other cylinder port whereby fluid will first flow through both
said first and second valve passages and out said third valve
passage as the piston approaches said one cylinder end and
then flow only through said first and third valve passages at a
reduced rate after said piston shifts over said other cylinder
port to provide a cushioning resistance to the movement of
said piston.
4,393,752
PISTON COMPRESSOR
Hans Meier, Kollbrunn, Switzerland, assignor to Sulzer Broth-
ers Limited, Winterthur, Switzerland
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,975
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 14, 1980,
1209/80
Int. Cl.^ FOIB il/00
U.S. a. 92—86 n Claims
4,393,751
TWO HOLE HYDRAULIC CUSHION VALVE
Clarence R. Kelley, Mishawaka, Ind., assignor to C. C. Kelley &
Sons, Mishawaka, Ind.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,750
Int. a.5 F15B 15/22
U.S. a. 91—408 4 aaims
1. In a cylinder having a fluid actuated piston therein, said
piston being shiftable longitudinally within said cylinder by the
operation of said fluid, the improvement wherein said cylinder
includes two ports at one end for evacuating fluid from in front
1. A piston compressor comprising a cylinder block; a dou-
ble walled cylinder liner mounted in said cylinder block, said
cylinder liner having a first wall defining a bore for reciproca-
tion of a piston therein and a second wall annularly spaced
from said first wall to define an annular chamber therebetween
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL ..
955
for receiving a coolant, said second wall being spaced from a
wall of said cylinder block to define an annular space therebe-
tween;
a collecting chamber in said cylinder block for receiving
leakage gas, said collecting chamber being in communica-
tion with said bore of said cylinder liner;
a vent line in said block communicating with said annular
space; and
a pressure gauge connected to said vent line.
4,393,753
ATTACHMENT FOR MOTOR VEHICLES WITH REAR
WINDOWS
Richard Chatlos, Johnstown, Pa., assignor to Air-O-Scoop Cor-
poration, Johnstown, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 194,224, Oct. 6, 1980, Pat. No.
4,346,648, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 118,444,
Feb. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,326,451. This application May 12, 1982,
Ser. No. 377,564
Int. a.3 BIOJ 1/20
U.S. CI. 98—2.12 18 Qalms
4,393,754
AIR DEFLECTION ASSEMBLY FOR VEHICLE
SUNROOFS
Louis E. Hough, 22448 Statler, St. Oair Shores, Mich. 48081,
and Walter J. De Vigili, 16082 Dugan Rd., Roseville, Mich.
48066
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,151
Int. a.J B60J 7/00
U.S. a. 98—2.14 8 Qaims
H-/90
1. An air deflection assembly for use with a vehicle having a
sunroof opening in the roof thereof, comprising:
an air deflecting member extending transverse to said open-
ing for deflecting air flowing over said roof and through
or over said opening; and
mounting means for mounting said deflecting member adja-
cent the leading edge of said opening for independent
pivotal movement about first and second transversely
extending axes, whereby to permit adjustment of both the
elevation and inclination of said deflecting member.
4,393,755
HEAT TREATMENT OF PARTICULATE SOLID
MATERIALS
Graham S. Cattell, Lingfield, and John E. Brittain, Beaconsfield,
both of England, assignors to The A.P.V. Company Limited,
Crawley, England
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,868
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 15, 1980,
8005147
Int. Q\} A47J 27/04
U.S. CI. 99—348 4 Qaims
1. A window containing an air flow device for a closed
motor vehicle or boat for positioning in the rear aperture
thereof, which comprises a window frame, two outer window
sections which are stationary and mounted in the end portions
of said window frame, said two outer window sections begin of
such size as to form an opening therebetween, and said air flow
device mounted in said opening, said air flow device compris-
ing a base plate, a bottom lip attached on top to said base plate,
and on bottom to the bottom portion of said window frame,
two vertical side plates, each having one end attached to the
end of the base plate, a narrow top horizontal plate attached on
each end to the vertical side plates on the side towards the
opening, a top vertical lip attached to the edge of said top plate
towards said opening, part of the ends of said top vertical lip
being attached to said side plates, a back plate which is at-
tached at its bottom to the portion of said base plate inside of
said motor vehicle and is positioned with its top away from
said top horizontal plate or the vertical plane of said opening
thereby forming a gap between said top horizontal plate and
said back plate, and an extension of the edge of each of said side
plates facing said opening which provides means of sealingly
engaging the end of one of said outer window sections facing
the opening, at least said back plate being transparent, said two
side plates being generally triangular in shape, being attached
on one edge to said back plate and preventing lateral air flow.
1032O.G.— 37
1. In apparatus for the batchwise heat treatment of particu-
late solid material, comprising a heat treatment vessel mounted
on hollow trunnions for rotation about a generally horizontal
axis and shaped so as to impart a tumbling action to the solid
material therein as the vessel rotates, the heat treatment vessel
having a fluid inlet leading via one of the hollow trunnions, and
a discharge outlet for withdrawal of the total solids and liquids
contents of the vessel via one of the hollow trunnions; the
improvement of a second rotary vessel for subsequent treat-
ment of the material discharged from the said heat treatment
vessel, the second rotary vessel also being mounted on hollow
trunnions and being provided with a first connection to said
discharge outlet of said heat treatment vessel for receiving
solids and liquids therefrom and a second connection for the
supply and discharge of fluid, each of said connections being
via one of the hollow trunnions and with strainer means therein
956
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
at a lcx:ation to trap solids as the solids and liquids enter from 4,393,757
the heat treatment vessel for separating the solid particles from FOOD POUCH COOKING HOLDER
the liquid whereby liquid withdrawn from the heat treatment Clifford W. Welsh, 1622 Sonata La., Lake San Marcus, Calif.
vessel and introduced into the second vessel with the solids 92069
may be separated therefrom for discharge via said second
connection, the strainer means being adjustable whereby the
solids may be allowed to drop from the strainer means and
mixed by tumbling the second rotary vessel with a further
liquid introduced via the said second connection.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,955
Int. a.^ A47J 37/00
U.S. a. 99—369
4,393,756
STEAM PEELING OR COOKING APPARATUS
Peter W. C. van der Schoot, Ouderkerk a/d IJssei, Netherlands,
assignor to Goudsche Machinefabriek B.V., Gouda, Nether-
lands
Continuation of Ser. No. 235,368, Feb. 19, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 104,990, Dec. 18, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,311
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 29, 1978,
7812678
Int. a.i A23N 7/00
U.S. a. 99—348 8 Qaims
2 Claims
1. A steam peeling apparatus for plant products such as
potatoes, carrots, celery, red beets, Swedish turnips, apples and
the like, comprising:
a substantially cylindrical peeling vessel having a product
opening at one end closable by a closure mounted for
movement within the vessel and a liquid discharge outlet
at the other end;
means mounting the vessel for only tilting movement around
a horizontal axis from a normally operating longitudinally
inclined position wherein the one end is above the other
end to a discharge position wherein the other end is above
the one end;
a partition disposed in the vessel at said other end perpendic-
ular to the longitudinal axis thereof and spaced from the
liquid discharge outlet, wherein the partition is config-
ured, when the vessel is in the normally operating posi-
tion, to prevent passage of product to be peeled while
allowing condensate to pass therethrough to form a con-
densate collection space thereunder such that the product
to be peeled does not lie in the condensate during the
application of steam;
steam supply and discharge means comprising an access
opening in the vessel disposed above the product level
when the vessel is in the normally operating position, a
first steam line disposed colinearly with the horizontal
tilting axis and a second line connecting the first line to the
access opening; and
at least one stirring arm disposed above the partition and
axially along the wall of the vessel and means for rotating
same about the longitudinal axis of the vessel when the
vessel is in the normally operating position.
1. A food pouch cooking holder suitable for cooking in pots
of hot water, comprising:
a regular shaf>ed, multiple wire member welded flat frame
having an exterior frame of regular shape and multiple
cross frame members permanently secured together,
a pair of diverging wire support frame members disposed
fully across the regular shaped flat frame and permanently
secured thereto, said diverging pair of frame members
having a pair of free termini projecting beyond one exte-
rior frame edge, and a second pair of termini formed in
parallel and projecting beyond the opposed second exte-
rior frame edge and having a first U-bend terminus,
a pair of curved horizontal extending securing means formed
on the pair of first termini of aforesaid pair of diverging
wire support frame members, said pair of securing means
adapted to be secured to the top rim of a cooking pot,
a slidable, frictionally secured fastener disposed on aforesaid
second pair of termini disposed in parallel, said fastener
having a forward positioned securing means engagable
with said cooking pot top rim, and a rearward positioned
pusher means, said fastener providing a third securing
means securing said cooking holder on said cooking pot,
said pair of diverging wire support frame members also
disposed in a second U-bend, adapted and sized to provide
a required depth of immersion of said regular shaped,
multiple wire frame inside of said cooking pot, and,
said cooking holder capable of securing in said cooking pot
and securing a cooking food pouch under said holder in
water during a cooking time period.
4,393,758
FOOD PROCESSING APPARATUS
Al Amnahian, El Monte, Calif., assignor to Electra Food Ma-
chinery, Inc., El Monte, Calif.
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,171
Int. a.^ A21C 9/00, 9/06
U.S. a. 99—450.6 7 Qaims
1. An apparatus for forming a Mexican food product having
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
957
an exterior wrap comprising a tortilla and an inner filling,
comprising:
(a) an elongated longitudinally extending supporting frame
work;
(b) a driving drum rotatably supported proximate one end of
said framework;
(c) a driven drum rotatably supported forwardly of said
driving drum rotatably supported proximate one end of
said framework;
(d) a continuous, yieldably deformable endless conveyor belt
carried by said driving and driven drums, said belt having
an upper and a lower surface, said lower surface including
a downwardly dejjending "V" shaped protuberance ex-
tending the entire length of said belt;
(e) means for driving said driving drum at a predetermined
rate of speed;
(0 a pair of angularly, upwardly extending rollers supported
by said framework and adapted to rollably engage the
lower surface of said conveyor belt said rollers being
adapted to rotate respectively about axes extending at an
angle with respect to the plane of said conveyor belt;
(g) a first flanged wheel supported by said framework and
disposed on a first side of said conveyor belt, said wheel
being adapted to rotate about an axis disposed generally
perpendicular to the plane of said conveyor belt; and
being adapted to fold a first portion of said conveyor belt
■^ transverse to the line of travd of the belt to move a first
side portion of the tortilla into overlapping pressural
contact with the inner filling;
(h) a second flanged wheel supported by said framework and
disposed on a second side of said conveyor belt, said
wheel being adapted to rotate about an axis disposed
generally perpendicular to the plane of said conveyor belt,
and being adapted to fold a second portion of said con-
veyor belt transversely of the line of travel of the belt to
move a second side portion of the tortilla into overlapping
pressural contact with said first portion of the tortilla to
form a shaped product wherein the inner filling is substan-
tially encapsulated within the tortilla;
(i) a plurality of longitudinally spaced apart rotatable flanged
wheels carried by said framework intermediate said first
and second flanged wheels adapted to maintain said first
portion of said tortilla in pressural contact with the inner
filling;
(j) a plurality of longitudinally spaced apart rotatable
flanged wheels carried by said framework forwardly of
said second flanged wheel adapted to maintain said second
portion of said tortilla in pressural contact with said first
portion of said tortilla; and
(k) a plurality of longitudinally spaced apart rotatable guide
wheels carried by said framework adapted to engage said
"V" shaped protuberance on said belt to guide longitudi-
- nal travel of said belt over said driving and driven drums.
Guy Qui
1. A cheese making apparatus for producing cheese from a
pressed mass of curds wherefrom the whey has been drained,
which comprises
(a) a rectangular vat including
(1) a bottom wall,
(2) two longitudinally extending side walls,
(3) a fixed end wall and
(4) a mobile end wall opposite the fixed end wall, the side
and end walls defining interior dimensions of the vat,
(b) a pressing plate arranged to be lowered into, and lifted
out of, the vat, the pressing plate having outer dimensions
slightly smaller than the interior dimensions of the vat,
(c) a filtering sheet supported on the bottom wall of the vat
for displacement in a direction parallel to the side walls,
(d) a transverse partition affixed to an end of the filtering
sheet adjacent the fixed end wall of the vat for displace-
ment with the filtering sheet in said direction, the partition
defining with the side walls, the bottom wall and the
mobile end wall an operating volume of the vat determin-
ing the amount of curds to be held in the vat, and displace-
ment of the partition changing the operating volume, and
the transverse partition being elastically compressible in a
vertical direction whereby lowering of the pressing plate
into the vat compresses the partition and permits the plate
to apply pressure to the curds held in the vat, and
(e) means for simultaneously displacing the filtering sheet
and the transverse partition affixed thereto in said direc-
tion.
4,393,760
JUICER
Tokuichiro Hasegawa, No. 18-6, 5-chome, Kanayama, Naka-ku,
Nagoya-shi, Aichi-ken, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 137,445, Apr. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
application May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,387
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 12, 1979, 54-
47599[U]
Int. CV A23N 1/02
U.S. a. 99—510 12 Gaims
4,393,759
CHEESE MAKING APPARATUS
liou, Niort, France, assignor to Pierre Guerin S.A.,
Mauze-sur-le-Mignon, France
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,763
Gaims priority, application France, Jan. 15, 1981, 81 00611
Int. G.3 AOIJ 25/00; A23C ] 9/072
U.S. G. 99—459 14 Gaims
1. A juicer comprising a housing having a top portion with
a raw material supplying mouth, a plurality of cutters, a sup-
port structure for said housing, a roll for pressing the raw
material and a link means engaging the top portion for holding
the roll within said housing; wherein
said housing has a bowl shaped structure with an exhaust port
disposed at an intermediate portion thereof for removal of
draff after pressing of said raw material, and further with an
opening disposed at the bottom portion thereof for removal
of juice produced by said pressing of said raw material;
said plurality of cutters are arranged in vertical length in an
inner wall of said housing;
said roll has a convex bowl shape corresponding to the inner
shape of said housing and substantially fit within said hous-
ing, and further comprising spiral shaped top portion, spiral
shaped intermediate portion and a bowl shaped bottom
^
958
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
portion, said spirals having their threads running vertically,
and said top spiral having a larger space between each
thread than the intermediate spiral, said bottom portion
including a projection at the bottom thereof, said projection
fitting into said opening disposed at the bottom of said hous-
ing, and wherein said bottom portion and said projection
have a plurality of vertical grooves therein and terminating
toward the end of said projection whereby squeezed, juice
will flow by gravity through said vertical grooves and out of
said opening of said housing; and wherein
said roll is positioned with the portion between the intermedi-
ate spiral and the bottom portion being disposed adjacent
said exhaust port, wherebysaid raw material is fed into said
supplying mouth and by operating said roll, said raw mate-
rial is pressed against said cutters first grossly by the upper
spiral and then fmely by the intermediate spiral, and then the
resulting draff of said raw material is exhausted through said
exhaust port and the resulting juice flows through said verti-
cal grooves of said bottom portion and through said vertical
grooves of said projection and through said of)ening at the
bottom of said housing.
4393,761
FLOATING KNIFE ASSEMBLY FOR A MEAT
DEFATTING MACHINE
Robert P. Murphy, 1807 Commercial, St. Joseph, Mo. 64503
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 281,006
Int. a.^A22C; 7/72
U.S. a. 99—589 8 Qaims
1. A meat defatting machine for severing, from a succession
of pieces of meat each having a red meat layer of constant
thickness and a fat layer of varying thickness, a portion of said
fat layer in excess of a desired total thickness of red meat layer
and fat layer; said machine comprising:
(a) a housing;
(b) a knife blade;
(c) conveyor means associated with said housing to present
a succession of pieces of meat past said knife blade;
(d) link means freely pivotally connecting said knife blade to
said housing to allow said knife blade to be positioned
over a continuous range of positions above said conveyor
means;
(e) gauge means communicating with said knife blade and
engageable with said pieces of meat to automatically
position said knife blade a distance above said conveyor
means to sever from said pieces of meat a portion of the fat
layer thereof in excess of a desired total thickness of red
meat layer and fat layer remaining after said severance;
wherein said link means includes:
(1) a pair of spaced apart, vertically oriented, parallel
support members rigidly connected to said housing;
(2) a forward pair of spaced apart, vertically oriented,
parallel mounting plates aligned with said support mem-
bers and parallel thereto; said knife blade being
mounted on and extending between said forward plates
and supported thereby;
(3) a pair of upper and lower parallel links having each
end thereof pivotally connected to an associated one of
said support members and mounting plates respectively
thereby forming a parallelogram.
4,393,762
SUNFLOWER SEED DEHULLING MACHINE
Wilson E. Jacobs, Buenos Aires, Argentina
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,018, Apr. 21, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 30,372, Apr. 16, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 852,929, Nov. 18,
1977, abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 636,994, Dec. 2,
1975, abandoned. This application Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No.
369,814
Int. a.3 B02B 3/00. 7/02; B02C 9/02
U.S. a. 99—609 5 Qaims
1. A rotor especially adapted for dehulling sunflower seeds,
comprising:
a disc adapted to be rotated;
means for feeding sunflower seeds to a central portion of
said disc;
substantially straight radially-disposed blades mounted on
said disc extending from the edge of said disc to a position
adjacent said central portion thereof for guiding the sun-
flower seeds from said central portion radially outward
therefrom to the edge of said disc whereby the seeds are
ejected radially outwardly of said disc along said blades
by centrifugal force, said blades comprising a plate in-
clined with respect to said disc in the direction of disc
rotation and forming with said disc a radial channel hav-
ing a height conforming to the thickness of sunflower
seeds adapted to orient the seeds with their major axes
parallel to the radial channel axis as the seeds are ejected
outwardly along said blades;
an annular impact ring surrounding said disc; and
means for sweeping seeds out of the path of said blades to
clear the path of seed portions which rebound off said
impact ring and avoiding interference by said rebounding
seed portions with the seeds being ejected outwardly and
maintaining said outwardly ejected seed in their proper
orientation with their major axes parallel to the radial
channel axis as the seeds are ejected outwardly of said disc
toward said impact band, said sweeping means comprising
flns mounted on said disc in front of said blades in the
direction of disc rotation and extending radially outward
of said disc beyond the most radially outward portion of
said blades to a position spaced slightly inwardly from the
face of said impact ring and each of said flns being con-
structed and arranged to intercept rebounding seed por-
tions conveyed to the impact ring by the blade preceeding
in the direction of disc rotation and to divert said rebound-
ing seed portions away from the path of the sunflower
seeds conveyed to the impact ring by the blade following
in the direction of disc rotation.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
959
4,393,763
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PRE-DRAPING AN
OBJECT RECEIVING STATION WITH FLEXIBLE
BINDING
L. Peter Sauer, Glenview, and Ronald W. Gurak, Fox River
Grove, both of III., assignors to Signode Corporation, Glen-
view, III.
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,969
y Int. a.J B65B 13/10
U.S. a. 100—2 12 Qaims
1. In a cnuteless method for forming a loop of flexible bind-
ing about objects positioned seriatim in an object receiving
station, said method including restraining an end of said bind-
ing adjacent said receiving station and then pulling a trailing
portion of the binding in a closed path around an object; said
method characterized by the improvement comprising:
(a) while a previously bound first object is in said receiving
station, initially pulling said trailing portion of the binding
through a major portion of the locus of said closed path
around the receiving station and guiding spaced portions
of said binding from the interior of said path around said
receiving station to retain the binding in a configuration
spaced outwardly of said receiving station;
(b) after commencing step (a), removing the bound first
object from said receiving station;
(c) positioning a second object in said receiving station; and
(d) after terminating step (c), terminating said interior guid-
ing of the binding around said receiving station to permit
said binding to contact said second object while further
pulling said trailing portion of the binding completely
around said closed path and to then form a tensioned loop
about the second object.
4,393,764
ROUND BALER WITH A DISCHARGE GATE FOR
REARWARDLY MOVING A BALE
Jean Viaud, Gray, France, assignor to Deere & Company, Mo-
line, IIL
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,651
Claims priority, application France, Aug. 20, 1980, 80 18200
Int. a.3 B30B 5/06: AOID 39/00
U.S. CI. 100—88 6 Claims
1. In a round baler comprising:
a plurality of transverse rollers;
means supported on said rollers and defining a bale forming
chamber for forming a bale of generally cylindrical shape;
and
a bale discharge gate means for opening said chamber and
discharging said bale on the ground; the improvement com-
prising:
said gate means further comprising bale drive means for con-
tacting a bale discharged on the ground and for displacing
said bale along the ground away from said baler.
4,393,765
ALUMINUM CAN COMPACTOR
Albert Accettura, and Wanda J. Accettura, both of 25502 Jacyin
Ave., Sunnymead, Calif. 92388
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,853
Int. a.3 B30B 9/32
U.S. a. 100—98 R 2 Qaims
ss .
/rjo
1. An aluminum can compactor device, comprising, in com-
bination, a base member and a handle pivotally connected
thereto by a hinge at one end of said base member and one end
of said handle, said base member including a pair of parallel,
elongated legs, a web between a longitudinally intermediate
portion of said legs, a raised stage portion upon said web and
an upward spike upon said raised stage portion; and a circular
portion along a longitudinally intermediate portion of said
handle being aligned with said stage of said web when said
handle is pivoted in a closed position against said base member,
and an upwardly recess on an underside of said handle circular
portion.
4,393,766
BELT PRESS WITH HOSE-TYPE ACTUATOR
Peter Thies, Ennepetai-Voerde, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Wagener Schwelm GmbH & Co., Schwelm, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,670
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 26,
1980, 3028400
Int. a.' B30B 15/06
U.S. a. 100—99 10 Qaims
1. A belt press comprising:
a plurality of upper and a plurality of lower traverses respec-
tively having lower and upper traverse faces;
respective upright tie bolts extending vertically between said
upper and lower traverses and securing said lower tra-
verses to the respective upper traverses;
upper and lower press platens carried on and between said
traverses and having respective upper and lower platen
960
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
faces respectively confronting said lower and upper tra-
verse faces;
hydraulic actuating means for displacing said traverses
toward each other and thereby pressing said platens
against a belt engaged therebetween, said means being
engaged between one of said platen faces and the con-
fronting traverse face and having
a pressure plate bearing on said one platen face,
a plurality of diametrically compressible but circumferen-
tially unstetchable hydraulic hoses forming at least one
substantially closed chamber and bearing in one direction
in surface contact on said pressure plate and in the oppo-
site direction in surface contact at least indirectly on said
confronting traverse face, said hoses having in uncom-
pressed condition a predetermined hose diameter but
being partially flattened between said plate and said con-
fronting traverse face, and
means for pressurizing said chamber;
means for displacement of said plate toward and away from
said confronting traverse face only through a distance
substantially shorter than said diameter; and
at least one bend-compensating element having a pair of
nonparallel upper and lower surfaces and engaged be-
tween said hydraulic actuating means and one of the
respective faces.
side having an opening for passing refuse material there-
through;
said bottom side including a receptacle support surface
which is inclined from a high front end to a low rear end;
the enclosure structure defining a front opening for passing
a receptacle therethrough;
means for retaining a receptacle on said support surface, said
retaining means preventing horizontal movement of said
receptacle in any horizontal direction except in a direction
up said inclined surface out of said front opening; and
a compactor device mounted on the top side over said top
side opening, said compactor device including a ram
member mounted for reciprocal, vertical movement into
and out of a receptacle arranged on said support surface,
said compactor device having a refuse receiving opening
located below the ram for passing refuse therethrough and
through the top side opening into a receptacle.
4,393,768
VARIABLE DATA IMPRINTER WITH RACK
CENTERING AND CARRIAGE INTERLOCK
MECHANISM
William P. Barbour, Mount Prospect, III., assignor to Security
Imprinter Corporation, Walkersville, Md.
Continuation of Ser. No. 146,098, May 2, 1980, abandoned. This
application Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,931
Int. Cl.^ B41F 3/60
U.S. a. 101—45 10 Claims
4,393,767
VERTICAL REFUSE COMPACTOR
James H. Dutfield, Palgrave, Canada, assignor to Reftech Lim-
ited, Woodbridge, Canada
Filed Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,196
Claims priority, application Canada, Aug. 11, 1981, 383644
Int. a.' B30B 15/30
MS. a. 100—229 A 16 Qaims
1. A compactor for compacting material in an open topped
receptacle comprising:
an enclosure structure including a bottom side, a coextensive
top side and rigid vertical post structures extending be-
tween and connecting said bottom and top sides, the top
1. A variable data imprinting machine comprising an elon-
gated flat printing bed section providing a document support-
ing surface and including a print wheel pack adjacent said
surface formed of rotatable, coaxial side-by-side closely adja-
cent print wheels each having circumferentially spaced raised-
number-bearing imprint block formations separated by notches
about their peripheries for imparting impressions to a docu-
ment on said surface, an imprinting carriage movable from a
parking position at one end of said surface through advance
and return strokes longitudinally along the document support
surface having a roller platen for transfer of imprinted charac-
ters to the document during one of said strokes, an elongated
rack housing portion underlying and extending beyond the
printing bed section defining a rack adjustment control panel
projecting from a side of the printing bed section, a plurality of
toothed racks slidable longitudinally in said rack housing por-
tion with teeth of each of the racks engaging notches of the
respective print wheels to rotatably index the print wheels to
selected number-printing positions, means slidably supporting
and guiding the toothed racks for longitudinal wheel-indexing
movement subjacent the print wheels of the wheel pack, said
racks having downwardly facing centering notches along their
lower edges in predetermined positional relationship to said
teeth, a rack centering mechanism including a blade member
underiying the racks having a blade movable into and out of
said notches and lifting means for raising said blade member
and a control leg, a pivoted quadarant member of generally
sector-shaped elevational profile located subjacent said park-
ing position and pivoted adjacent the lowermost portion
thereof about a pivot axis located below the plane of said
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
961
supporting surface, said quadrant member having generally
arcuate convex peripheral surface portions movable circumfer-
entially of said pivot axis adjoining shoulder formations defin-
ing an intercept surface in the path of advancing movement of
said carriage from the parked position and a stop shoulder
engageable with said control leg to latch the quadarant mem-
ber in a blocking position restraining the carriage in said park-
ing position, means moving the control leg from latching abut-
ment with said stop shoulder responsive to adjustment of the
toothed racks to new settings, and means positioned to be
activated by movement of said carriage during a pre-imprint-
ing part of its advance stroke to insert said blade into said
centering notches of each rack for precisely aligning the print
wheels to insure proper fine adjustment registration of the
imprinting numbers at the printing positions.
4,393,769
ELECTROSTATIC CLLTCH-OPERATED PRINTING
MECHANISM
Alfred J. Landon, Peekskill; William B. Pennebaker, Carmel,
and Han C. Wang, Chappaqua, all of N.Y., assignors to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,864
Int. a.3 B41J 9/10. 9/32, 9/36
U.S. a. 101-93.3 2 Claims
4,393,770
PRINTER WITH PRINTING DRUM
Hiroshi Takahashi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo and Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha,
Saitama, both of, Japan
Filed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,467
Oaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1980, 55-124988
Int. a.J B41J 1/44
U.S. a. 101—93.22 2 Qaims
A printing mechanism, comprising:
an electrostatic clutch assembly, including a rotatively
mounted semiconductive drum, and a conductive band
wrapped around the periphery of said drum such that the
application of a voltage pulse across said drum and band
generates an electrostatic force therebetween, and means
for rotating said drum;
a printing hammer rotationally mounted on a hammer
shaft, and having a first arm extending from said hammer
shaft and having a hammer head, said hammer head caus-
ing a printing operation during rotational movement of
the printing hammer about said shaft in a first direction,
said printing hammer also having a second arm extending
from said hammer shaft in a direction substantially oppo-
site to that of said first arm, said second arm defining an
elongated slot along its length, and a pin being mounted in
said slot and further being coupled to said band for move-
ment therewith; and
a spring means for actuating said printing hammer, said
spring means being mechanically coupled to said band
through said printing hammer which is pulled to a cocked
position, against the compressive action of said spring, by
said band during the application of a voltage pulse across
said electrostatic clutch while said drum is rotating, said
printing hammer being actuated by the cocked spring at
the termination of the voltage pulse which releases the
spring, and said spring means compressively bearing
against said first arm during rotation of said first arm in a
direction counter to said first direction.
!S S « I : I I I C
1. A printer comprising:
a printing drum comprising a group of odd digit typ)es and a
group of even digit types, said odd digit types and said
even digit types being disposed so as to come into a print-
ing position alternately;
means for generating timing a pulse for indicating the posi-
tion of said odd digit type on said drum;
means for generating a timing pulse for indicating the posi-
tion of said even digit type on said drum;
means for stopping said drum when any selected tyf>e or said
drum comes into the print position; and
means for carrying out printing following a predetermined
time measured from detection of a timing pulse of even
digit type which is positioned just before an odd digit type
when the odd digit type is to be printed, and for carrying
out printing following the predetermined time measured
from detection of a timing pulse of odd digit which is
positioned just before an even digit when the even digit is
to be printed.
4,393,771
PRINTING HEAD FOR A PRINTER
Juichi Tatsumi, Iruma, Japan, assignor to Ye Data Inc., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,637
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 25, 1980, 55-
167504[U]
Int. a.3 B41J 9/02
U.S. Q. 101—93.48 2 Qaims
1. In permanent magnet type printing head for an impact dot
962
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
printer wherein a plate spring hammer has a hammer tip pro-
vided on one side thereof, and an attracting magnetic pole
provided with a releasing electromagnetic coil arranged on
another side opposite said hammer, the improvement compris-
ing an armature disposed on the side where said hammer tip of
said plate spring hammer is provided, and a yoke formed with
a through hole or notch within which said armature is mov-
able, said attracting magnetic pole being arranged between said
hammer tip and said armature.
4 393 772
ROTARY PRINTING MACHINE, PARTICULARLY
NEWSPAPER-TYPE OFFSET PRINTING MACHINE
Rainer Burger, Augsburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
M.A.N.-ROLAND Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft, Of-
fenbach am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,319
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep, of Germany, Sep. 13,
1980, 3034670
Int. a.5 B41F 7/02
U.S. a. 101—217 13 Claims
rollers (13, 14) between an upper and a lower position in
which, respectively,
when the guide rollers are in the upper position, the horizon-
tally extending portion of the web is in essential alignment
with the printing cyhnder, and thereby spacing the por-
tion extending in vertical direction from the printing
cylinder by the horizontally extending portion, and,
when the guide rollers are in the lower position, the horizon-
tally extending portion of the web is positioned below the
pivot axis of the pivotable operator platform.
4,393,773
ROTARY SHEET PRINTING MACHINE WITH
TRANSPORT CHAIN
Klaus Tbeilacker, Friedberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
M.A.N.-Roland Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft, Offen-
bach Am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,067
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 8,
1981, 3114076
Int. Cl.^ B41F 21/06
U.S. a. 101—232 15 Qaims
1. Rotary printing machine having
a printing station (1, 2, 3);
two vertically staggered guide rollers (13, 14), one being
associated with a section of a paper web (5) being supplied
to a printing cylinder (20) of the printing station, and the
other being associated with a section of the paper web
being removed from the printing station,
said guide rollers guiding the paper web in a guide path
having a portion extending essentially in vertical direction
(A, A'), a portion extending in essentially horizontal direc-
tion for guidance of the paper web with respect to the
printing cylinder of the printing station, the portion ex-
tending in essentially horizontal direction being sufFi-
ciently long to space the essentially vertical portion of the
path from the printing station by a distance sufTicient to
render the printing station accessible to an operator;
vertically movable positioning means (15, 16, 17) coupled to
the two guide rollers and selectively positioning the two
guide rolers with respect to the printing station to change
the relative position of the essentially horizontal portion
and the essentially vertical portion of the guide path of the
web (5) with respect to the printing station;
a pivotable operator platform (11) selectively horizontally
positionable above the horizontal portion of the web path
when the essentially vertical portion of the web is adja-
cent the printing cylinder, and the horizontal portion is
remote from the printing cylinder, and separated there-
from by the essentialy vertical portion (A), and pivotable
to a vertical position about a pivot axis located remote
from the vertical portion of the web when the vertical
portion of the web is adjacent the printing station; and
guide means (25) guiding movement of the two guide
1. Rotary sheet printing machine having
a printing station (1) and a receiving station (2);
a transport chain system (3) to transport sheets from the
printing station to the receiving station including an end-
less transport chain (6) forming a supply run (4) and a
return run (5) and having grippers (13) located thereon;
means (21) applying a liquid to at least the upper side of the
sheet being transported by the chain system including
a liquid application cylinder (14) located between the supply
run and the return run of the chain formed with an axial
groove (15) in its circumference,
and a counter cylinder (26) located for surface engagement
with the liquid application cylinder opposite the supply
run of the chain
wherein, in accordance with the invention
the axial groove in the liquid application cylinder (14) is
dimensioned to receive the entirety of the grippers (13) of
the transport chain (6);
supply chain guide means (17, 19) are provided guiding the
chain with respect to the liquid application cylinder such
that a gripping surface (9, 27) of the grippers is tangent to
the liquid application cylinder;
and return chain guide means (18, 20) are provided guiding
the chain with respect to the liquid application cylinder
such that the grippers (13) are wholly received in the
groove (15) to permit application of a liquid to the liquid
application cylinder at the side thereof engaged by the
return run of the chain.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
963
1 1 4,393,774
APPARATUS FOR PRINTING AND DISPENSING
LABELS
Anthony V. J. Figg, Kirby Cross, England, assignor to Norprint
International, Boston, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 114,686, May 23, 1979,
abandoned. This application Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,863
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 23, 1978,
21428/78
Int. a.3 B41K 5/02. 1/08
U.S. Q. 101—288 5 Qaims
Si 30D 46 3X J8
1. In apparatus for printing and dispensing labels, at a print-
ing station having a printing surface,
a body,
a print-head assembly supported within the body, having a
row of operative print facets, and being operative to pro-
duce a print impression on a label during each operating
cycle of the apparatus, said cycle extending in a forward,
direction from a rest configuration of the apparatus to a
printing station configuration and return to the rest con-
figuration,
lever means pivotally mounting the print-head assembly in
the body,
means biasing the lever means to the rest configuration in the
operating cycle,
means pivotally mounting the print-head assembly on said
lever means at a location on the lever means remote from
the point of pivoting of the lever means on the body and
also remote from the operative print facets,
means for actuating the lever means to bring the print-head
assembly and the operative print facets thereof to the
printing station during each operating cycle, and
cam means, including track means controlling the angular
orientation of the print head assembly during part of the
pivotal motion of the lever means relative to the body and
of the print head assembly relative to the lever means, said
track means comprising a first track portion that extends
from the rest configuration of the print head assembly, and
a second track portion that extends from the first track
portion towards the configuration at the print station
a follower spigot on the print-head assembly disposed at
the end of the print head assembly remote from the
pivot mounting thereof,
an inking roller assembly having an inking roller,
said inking roller being operative during the forward
portion of the operating cycle to ink the operative print
facets and to guide the print-head assembly along its
path towards said printing station,
the first track portion also being effective, in the absense
of the inking roller, to guide the print-head assembly
along a path towards the printing station,
first said track portion and also the inking roller being
ineffective to guide the print-head assembly over the
corresponding return portion of the return stroke of the
operating cycle under the action of the biasing means so
that irrespective of the presence of the inking roller, no
further inking of the operative print facets can occur,
the second track portion being operative at said printing
station in conjunction with the follower spigot posi-
tively to constrain the print-head assembly against mo-
tion in the plane of the operative print facets thereby to
avoid a blurred impression and,
the pivot poijit of the print-head assembly on the lever
means being offset substantially from an imaginary
plane passing through the operative row of print facets
at the printing surface and extending normally to the
plane of the row of print facets.
4,393,775
ARRANGEMENT FOR METERING THE INK QUANTITY
IN INKING UNITS ON PRINTING PRESSES
Bert Cappel; Gunther Schniggenfittig, both of Mulhein, and
Siegfried Schuhmann, Offenbach am Main, all of Fed. Rep. of ^
Germany, assignors to M.A.N.-Roland Druckmaschinen Ak-
tiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,365
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 14,
1980, 3030774
Int. CV B41F 31/02. 1/46
U.S. a. 101—365 5 Qaims
^y^
y^a
1. In an ink fountain combination comprising a frame defin-
ing a generally horizontal slot having parallel walls, a fountain
roller rotatable in the frame adjacent the slot and having means
for slowly driving the same, a metering assembly mounted in
the slot and having a presented front edge arranged in abutting
relation to the surface of the roller, the frame being shaped to
support a body of ink adjacent the metering assembly so that a
film of ink is formed on the roller by the assembly as the roller
is rotated, the metering assembly being in the form of a series
of fiat slides fitted in the slot and arranged side by side in
coplanar relation with their lateral edge lying closely adjacent
one another so that the preferred front edge is substantially
continuous, means at the rear ends of the respective slides for
individually adjusting the position of each slide with respect to
the fountain roller thereby to meter ink in predetermined thick-
ness in respective zones upon the foundation roller, the front
portion of each slide having embedded therein a blade of wear-
resistant spring metal, each said slide having a tip portion
formed of a generally rectangular piece of resilient material,
the tip portion of each slide being relieved in the region just
behind the blade to accomodate rearward fiexing movement of
the blade, such relief being provided by a transverse groove
substantially filled with a yieldable strip of soft material Hush
with the top surface of the groove such that each slide presents
only planar surfaces free of nooks and crannies behind the
blade, the blade being coextensive with the width of the slide
and so oriented in the slide as to present a Hat face to the
fountain roller defining with the fountain roller a sharply acute
cusp faced in such direction that the surface of the roller moves
out of the cusp so that (a) when the slide is slightly retracted
from the fountain roller in a metering mode a gap is created for
the feeding of a film or ink on the roller surface at a metered
rate which depends upon the degree of retraction and so that
(b) when the slide is advanced to close the gap in a sealing
mode the edge of the blade bears against the surface of the
fountain roller fiexing broadwise resiliently and accommodat-
ingly to achieve a seal between the blade and the fountain
roller with only a limited reaction force being exerted between
them.
964
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,776
INK FOUNTAIN DEVICE FOR USE IN PRINTING PRESS
Hideaki Toyoda, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Komori Printing
Machinery Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 292,304
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 20, 1981, 56-24760
Int. a.' B41F 31/04, 31/06
U.S. a. 101—365 9 Claims
secured to said top surface of said terminal section and
forming with said bottom surface, rear surface and said
side wall of said slot a continuous force-fit receptacle for
a terminal segment of a flat workpiece having a thickness
substantially equal to the separation between said under-
side of said cover and said bottom wall of said slot.
4,393,778
DEVICE FOR WASHING BLANKET CYLINDER OF
ROTARY OFFSET PRESS
Toshihisa Kaneko, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Dai Nippon In-
satsu Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,440
Int. CI.' B41F 35/06: B41L 41/06
U.S. CI. 101—425 5 Claims
1. An ink fountain device for use in a printing press having
an ink fountain containing printing ink, said ink fountain com-
prising an inking roller immersed in said printing ink contained
in said ink fountain; a blade support; a plurality of blade sec-
tions juxtaposed on said blade support along the lengthi)f said
inking roller, each of said blade sections being spaced an inde-
pendent predetermined distance from the periphery of said
inking roller; independent gap adjustment means for each of
said blade sections for independently adjusting said predeter-
mined distance between said blade section and the periphery of
said inking roller; a thin magnetic plate extended over all of
said blade sections, said thin magnetic plate having substan-
tially the same width as the combined width of said blade
sections; and a permanent magnet associated with each of said
blade sections beneath said thin magnetic plate for attracting
said magnetic plate to each of said blade sections.
)r' ViE
4,393,777
HOLDING FIXTURE FOR A HOT STAMPING PRESS
Raymond P. Harris, Baltimore, Md.. assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,499
Int. CI.' B41F 21/00
U.S. a. 101—407 BP 3 Claims
1. In a device for washing a blanket cylinder of a rotary
offset press, which device comprises a brush roll disposed on a
lateral side of the blanket cylinder for rotation about an axis
parallel to the axis of the blanket cylinder, in the same rota-
tional direction as the blanket cylinder, and in pressed state in
a region of contact against the blanket cylinder, the rotational
direction of the brush roll being such that the peripheral sur-
face thereof in said region of contact moves upward, spraying
means disposed above the brush roll for spraying a wash liquid
against the blanket cylinder at a part thereof in front of the
region of contact as viewed in the rotational direction of the
blanket cylinder, and a housing enclosing the brush roll and the
spray means, functioning to prevent the washing liquid from
scattering undesirably to other parts of the press, and having a
trough at the bottom thereof for collecting waste washing
liquid and washed-off foreign matter, said housing having a
ceiling plate having a bent portion from which the ceiling plate
extends obliquely upward with an eave-like shape toward an
edge in close proximity of the blanket cylinder, said bent por-
tion being the lowest portion of the ceiling plate and located
above the brush roll whereby droplets of the washing liquid
slung upward against the ceiling plate flow downward there-
along toward said bent portion to drip onto the brush roll and
not onto the blanket roll.
1. A fixture for holding a flat, stiff workpiece for contact
with a stamp head, comprising:
a unitary member having a generally elongate shape provid-
ing a hand graspable section (50) and a planar, distal termi-
nal section (51);
a narrow and elongate slot (54) formed in said planar, distal
terminal section having a bottom surface, a rear surface,
and at least one side wall said slot being open to the end
and top surfaces of said terminal section; and
an elongate cover (60) having a fiat underside detachably
4,393,779
ELECTRIC DETONATOR ELEMENT
Uwe Brede, and Horst Penner, both of Fiirth, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft,
Troisdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 948,782, Oct. 5, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 171,293
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 20,
1977, 2747163
Int. CI.' F42B 5/08
U.S. CI. 102—202.5 12 Qaims
1. An electrical detonator element comprising:
a support of an electrically nonconductive material;
an electric circuit provided on the support for enabling detona-
tion, the electric circuit including an ignition resistance with
lead electrodes connected thereto and at least one electronic
component means, the ignition resistance and the at least one
electronic component means being electrically connected in
the electrical circuit and each being separately arranged on
the support; and
July 19 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
965
a mechanically firm insulating member contacting the support
so as to at least partially cover the at least one electronic
component means, the at least one electronic component
means being embedded in the insulating member, the insulat-
a breech piece secured to the rear end of the gun barrel and
defining therewith a charge chamber centered on an axis;
positioning means for emplacing said projectile in said gun
barrel with said detonator extending rearwardly into said
charge chamber along said axis, said breech piece being
'-k.
ms^
^
ing member being provided with a recess in the region of the
ignition resistance which exposes at least the ignition resis-
tance, the recess extending through the insulating member
and being adapted for receiving a primer charge in operative
connection with the ignition resistance.
provided with at least one conduit opening tangentially
into said charge chamber for injecting a liquid propellant
into same with circulatory motion around said detonator;
and
igniting means for setting off said detonator in the presence
of the circulating propellant.
Alexey T
4,393,780 4,393,782
OMNI DIRECTIONAL FUZE REVOLVING HREARMS AND AMMUNITION
Zacharin, Parsippany, N.J., assignor to The United THEREFOR
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Charles R. Olsen, 307 Conestoga Way, Eagleville, Pa. 19408
Army, Washington, D.C. Filed Sep. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 187,772
I Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,739 Int. CI.' F42B 5/02
! Int. CI.' F42C 1/06, 9/02; F42B 23/26 U.S. Q. 102—446 17 Qaims
U.S. a. 102—255
13 Qaims
1. A fiiae comprising:
a frame;
a firing pin slidably mounted in said frame;
a slider supporting a detonator, for moving said detonator
into alignment with said pin;
an impact sensor for engaging and restraining said pin, said
sensor being pivotally mounted in said frame;
said slider having a safe position and having an arm sized to
hold said sensor when said slider is in said safe position, said
sensor being free to pivot and to disengage said pin in response
to deceleration of said frame in excess of a predetermined
magnitude when said slider has moved said detonator into
alignment with said pin.
1 1 4,393,781
FUZE FOR LIQUID SHELL PROPELLANTS
Manfred Graf, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Rheinnetall GmbH, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 26, 1973, Ser. No. 337,093
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 13,
1972, 22^7728
I Int. Q.' F42B 5//(5, 9/74
U.S. Q. i02— 440 2 Qaims
1. A fuze for firing a projectile from a gun barrel, compris-
ing:
a pyrotechnical detonator disposed at the aft end of a projec-
tile to be fired, said detonator having a diameter less than
the caliber of said projectile;
1. A firearm special cartridge for use in the cylinder of a
revolving cylinder firearm of the type having a barrel in front
of the cylinder and in which the cylinder has a plurality of
axially extending chambers each having an open mouth, said
cartridge comprising in combination,
(a) a cartridge case having a closed head and an open mouth,
the said cartridge case open mouth being spaced rearward
of the revolver cylinder chamber mouth when the car-
tridge is installed in a revolver cylinder chamber,
(b) a generally cylindrical adapter member made of resil-
iently deformable material having a passage open at both
ends extending therethrough from one end to the other
along the cylindrical axis and having an external diameter
at least at the rear end which fits closely within the mouth
of the cartridge case, said adapter front end extending
substantially to the mouth of the revolver cylinder cham-
ber when the cartridge is installed in a revolver cylinder,
the rear end of said adapter being formed to be radially
expandible under gas pressure formed within the cartridge
case upon firing of the cartridge to peripherally seal the
outside surface of the adapter against the inside surface of
the cartridge case and minimize escape of propellant gas
between the said adapter and cartridge case,
(c) means securing said adapter within said cartridge case,
and
(d) a bullet disposed close-fittingly within the open passage
through said adapter and closing the open cross-sectional
area thereof,
whereby, when the cartridge is fired the expanding gas drives
the resilient adapter forward so that its front end strikes the
rear face of the firearm barrel to seal the cylinder-to-barrel gap
and prevent the escape of propellant gas except through the
barrel muzzle, and thereafter when the bullet exits the barrel
966
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
muzzle the reduction of gas pressure to ambient permits longi-
tudinal retraction of the resilient adapter and frees the cylinder
for rotation.
whereby the detonation of said explosive charge forces
said cutter ram to impinge upon said retainer to cut said
retainer and to force said retainer to release said longitu-
dinal segments.
4 J93 783
FLUIDIC RANGE-SAFE EXPLOSIVE DEVICE
Michael J. Goes, Mine Hill; John R. Masly, Landing, and AI-
bertus E. Schmidlin, Caldwell, all of N.J., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Army, Washington, D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 126,802, Mar. 3, 1980, Pat. No. 4,334,478.
This application Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,049
Int. a.3 F42B 9/20
U.S. a. 102—529 3 Qaims
4,393,784
APPARATUS FOR REPLAONG RAIL FASTENING
ELEMENTS AND, OPTIONALLY, RAILS
Josef Theurer, Vienna, Austria, assignor to Franz Plasser Bahn-
baumaschinen-Industriegesellschaft m.b.H., Vienna, Austria
Continuation of Ser. No. 149,159, May 14, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 902,853, May 4, 1978,
abandoned. This application Dec. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 332,303
Oaims priority, application Austria, May 6, 1977, 3255/77
Int. a.5 EOIB 29/20. 31/26. 31/22
U^. a. 104—2 7 Oaims
1. Fluidic range safe device which comprises;
a projectile having a leading nose portion and a generally
cylindrical body portion located therebehind, said body
portion including;
at least two complementary longitudinal segments adja-
cently disposed to form a cylindrically shaped body
assembly, said body assembly having a plurality of
cylindrical recesses axially located therein and a
tongue-in-groove end;
a cylindrical forward body portion operatively disposed
intermediate said longitudinal segments and said nose
portion, said forward body portion snapfittably engag-
ing said tongue-in-groove end of said longitudinal seg-
ments and to said nose portion;
means for thermally inducing disintegration of said body
portion of said projectile further comprising;
a nozzle element axially disposed in said nose portion, said
nozzle element tapering to a reduced diameter orifice;
an air vent assembly communicating with said orifice, said
air vent assembly comprising an air collection chamber
and air escape channels radiating therefrom;
temperature responsive fragmentation means located in said
forward body portion in fluid registry with said air vent
assembly, said fragmentation means adapted to respond to
elevated temperature to cause said body portion to disinte-
grate which includes;
temperature transmitter means disposed within said body,
said temperature transmitter adapted to absorb and
transmit thermal energy, said transmitter means in-
cludes a temperature absorptive tube having an open
end communicating with said air collection chamber,
and an opposed closed end; and
fragmentation promoter means, disposed in registry with
said closed end of said temperature absorptive tube, for
overcoming the cohesive forces maintaining the integ-
rity of said body portion; said promoter means includes;
retainer means comprising a spider member for releasably
holding said longitudinal segments and said forward
body portions together during projectile launch and
flight, and for mechanically allowing said longitudinal
segments to separate from said forward body portion
after said projectile has traveled a specified distance
down range; and
said release means comprises a movable cutter ram dis-
posed at one end thereof in axial abutment against said
retainer, and a thermally actuated explosive charge
located between the opposite end of said cutter ram and
the closed end of said temperature absorptive tube,
} etn m m o j o «swe7o
1. An apparatus for replacing track rails fixed to ties with old
rail fastening elements at a predetermined track gauge by track
rails fixed to the ties with new rail fastening elements at said
gauge, which comprises
(a) a train of a plurality of track-bound cars mounted for
mobility along the track rails at said gauge in an operating
direction and one of the cars being a carrier frame com-
prising
(1) two pivotal frame parts and
(2) a pivoting axle extending substantially perpendicularly
to a plane defined by the track rails and interconnecting
the pivotal frame parts for pivotal movement with
respect to each other,
(b) an assembly hne of a series of individual operating mech-
anisms arranged spacedly and sequentially on the track-
bound cars, each of the operating mechanisms including
vertically movable tools mounted on the cars and cen-
tered over their work, the assembly line comprising, in
sequence,
(1) a first one of the individual operating mechanisms
including tools for detaching the old rail fastening ele-
ments from the ties, the removed rail fastening elements
leaving holes in the ties,
(2) another one of the individual operating mechanisms
for lifting the rails at gauge and for spreading the lifted
rails beyond the track gauge, the first and other operat-
ing mechanisms being arranged on a forward one of the
frame parts, as seen in the operating direction,
(3) means for working on the ties mounted on the carrier
frame, the tie working means including an operating
mechanism for plugging the holes in the ties and an
operating mechanism for adzing the ties,
(4) an additional one of the individual operating mecha-
nisms for placing the track rails on the plugged and
adzed ties at said gauge,
(5) a further one of the individual operating mechanisms
including tools for applying the new rail fastening ele-
ments to fix the track rails to the plugged and adzed ties,
the additional and further operating mechanisms being
arranged on a rear one of the frame parts, as seen in the
operating direction, and
(6) respective tie holding devices associated with the tie
working means and the first operating mechanism.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
967
433,785
SUSPENDED TRACK FOR MONORAIL SUSPENDED
TROLLEYS
Franz HSrtnagel, Oberperfuss, Austria, assignor to Finna R.
Stahl GmbH & Co., Stuttgart- Wangen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,524
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 21,
1980, 3019301
Int. C\? EOIB 25/22
U.S. O. 194—110 20 Claims
1. Suspended track for monorail suspended trolleys having
an upper hollow structural section (1);
a lower hollow structural sections (2);
and a connecting web (3) connecting said upper and lower
sections together, adapted to be supported by hanger
elements (25) laterally attachable to said web, and further
being adapted to support electrical connection tracks,
buses or rails (15),
said connecting web being a unitary element integral with
the upper and lower hollow structural section and defin-
ing a central portion, and mutually approaching end por-
tions leaving, between the ends (8) thereof, an open space;
and wherein, in accordance with the invention,
the central portion of the generally C-cross-sectionally
shaped connecting web forms a back portion (11);
the end portions of said web extend forwardly from the back
portion, converging towards each other and leaving,
between the ends (8) thereof, a groove-like open gap (4)
which defines said space;
and mutually diverging wing portions (6) are provided ex-
tending upwardly and downwardly away from said gap
(4), said wing portions merging into said upper and lower
hollow structural sections (1, 2) and extending to form
upper and lower hollow structural portions, respectively,
of said sections.
4,393,786
TRACK CROSSING FOR A TWO TRACK SUSPENSION
RAILROAD
Hans J. Diill, Langensendelbach, and Adolf Hillmer, Eriangen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
I Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,674
Claims firiority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 12,
1979, 2950017
Int. a? EOIB 25/12
U^. a. 104—141 5 Oaims
1. In a track crossing for a carriage of a two-track suspension
railroad arranged in a track girder, in which running surfaces
for support wheels are provided on both sides of a slot pro-
vided in the track girder, through which a suspension connect-
ing the carriage to a cabin passes, the improvement compris-
ing:
(a) the track girder being a box girder, at the sidewalls of
which parallel guide surfaces for lateral guide wheels and
current rails are arranged,
(b) two settable support members having lateral guide sur-
faces for bridging the unused track pivoted for swinging
motion at the mutually opposite sidewalls of the crossing
track girders about vertical axes;
(c) depressions in the sidewalls of the box girders in the one
or the other track into which said support members can be
swung; and
(d) current rails on at least one of said support members.
4,393,787
ROLLER SIDE BEARING MOUNTING SYSTEM AND
METHOD
George M. Hess, Huron, and James A. Zils, North Royalton,
both of Ohio, assignors to Russell, Burdsall A Ward Corpora-
tion, Oeveland, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 135,480, Mar. 31, 1980. Pat. No.
4,323,015. This application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,881
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 6, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. O.' F16B 5/02. 31/02
U.S. O. 105—199 CB 22 Oaims
1. An arrangement for mounting a roller side bearing assem-
bly to a rail car truck assembly, said arrangement comprising in
combination:
a truck assembly including spaced wheels adapted to roll-
ingly support said rail car on a pair of parallel spaced apart
tracks, said assembly including a top surface portion;
a side roller bearing assembly having an elongated generally
U-sha[)ed bearing cage including a bottom wall and a pair
of spaced apart generally parallel side walls upstanding
therefrom, said bottom wall having at least a pair of
spaced apart openings extending therethrough in registry
with at least a pair of openings in said truck top surface
portion, said bearing cage side walls having at least one
cylindrical bearing member extending therebetween
adapted to supportingly engage an area of said rail car for
reducing frictional forces generated during swivel move-
ment between said car and truck assembly;
an elongated threaded fastener extending through each of
said pairs of registered bottom wall and top surface por-
tion openings, said fasteners each having a head and an
elongated shank threaded along at least the outermost end
section thereof wherein said head and shank interface with
each other at a distinct fillet area, said head cooperating
with said bottom wall and said shank extending through
an associated pair of registered bottom wall and top sur-
968
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
face portion openings with said threaded outermost end
disposed in threaded engagement with retaining means
disposed on the underside of said top surface portion, said
threaded fasteners being placed in some desired clampload
condition within predetermined upper and lower limits as
a function of rotating said fasteners to secure threaded
advancement thereof into said retaining means, said de-
sired clampload being less than an amount which would
cause failure in said bearing cage and greater than an
amount which increases the potential for failure in said
fasteners when said fasteners are subjected to tensile and
bending loads resulting from loading of said roller side
bearing assembly during rolling travel of said rail car
along said track, said fasteners each further including
means for limiting the torque applied thereto during fas-
tener rotation into threaded advancement with said retain-
ing means whereby the resultant fastener clamploads may
not exceed said upper limit; and,
bearing means interposed between the head of each fastener
and said bearing cage bottom wall to facilitate control of
frictional forces occurring at said fastener heads during
rotation thereof into threaded engagement with said re-
taining means, said bearing means further protecting the
fillet areas of said fasteners from being imbedded by said
bearing cage bottom wall at said bottom wall openings at
least when said fasteners are subjected to tensile and bend-
ing loads.
4,393,789
HIGH SECURITY TRANSACTION DRAWER
Herman E. Glotfelter, 4618 N. Post Rd., Indianapolis, Ind.
46226
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,077
Int. a.^ E06B 7/i2
U.S. a. 109—19 9 Qaims
4,393,788
RETRACTABLE PROTECTIVE-SCREENS AND
EQUIPMENT INCLUDING THEM
Bernard F. Campbell, 95 Havelock Rd., and Leslie Vallance, 6
Hollingbury Copse, both of Brighton, East Sussex, England
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,152
Int. CI.' E04N 9/00
U.S. CI. 109—2 13 Claims
«-
1. In combination with a partition structure having a hori-
zontal drawer opening formed therethrough, a drawer struc-
ture defining an upwardly opening compartment, support
means supporting said drawer structure from said partition for
shifting of said drawer through said opening between first and
second positions with said compartment opening upwardly on
first and second sides of said partition, a security panel shift-
ably supported from said drawer for movement between
closed and open positions closing and opening, respectively,
said compartment from above, and security panel shifting
means operatively connected between said panel and said
support means for automatically shifting said panel to said
open position responsive to said drawer being shifted to said
first position, automatic shifting of said panel to said closed
position responsive to initial shifting of said drawer from said
first position toward said second position and automatic shift-
ing of said panel back to said open position responsive to final
movement of said drawer to said second position.
4,393,790
SAFE DOOR ASSEMBLY
William H. Bagwell, 1610 Country Club Prado, Coral Gables,
Fla. 33134
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,323
Int. CI.' E05G 1/04: E05B 6i/00. 63/14, 15/16
U.S. a. 109—76 25 Qaims
1. In equipment including a retractable protective-screen in
the form of a member having two side-edges that are guided
for movements of the member in extension and retraction of
the screen, and drive means coupled to said member to drive it
in at least one of said movements, the improvement wherein
said drive means is coupled to said member to established
driving engagement therewith via a rack-and-pinion coupling,
said coupling comprising a rack carried by said member, said
rack being an elongate strip of fiexible material having project-
ing teeth formed integrally therewith, said strip being secured
to said member at least at spaced positions along the length of
the strip to extend on said member substantially centrally
thereof intermediate said side-edges, and a pinion engaging
with the teeth of the rack, said drive means being coupled to
said pinion to rotate the pinion and thereby drive said member
via said rack.
1. In a safe door assembly comprising a door casing, a door,
a plurality of locking bolts operated by a combination lock so
as to be selectively extended outwardly from or retracted
inwardly into said door to lock or unlock, respectively, said
door to said casing; said casing including a seat to accommo-
date a shoulder on said door and recess to receive each of said
outwardly extended locking bolts; said door also including a
combination lock with a retractable tongue operatively con-
nected to a sliding link bar with lever means to simultaneously
extend or retract said locking bolts; the improvement compris-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
969
ing a pivotable relocking bar spring biased to pivot into a
position whereby a portion of said bar mates with a corre-
sponding portion in said link bar to prevent said link bar from
sliding, said relocking bar positioned to mate with said link bar
when said combination lock is disposed inwardly from its
normal position; a hardened steel barrier separating the mecha-
nism of said combination lock from the outside wall of said
door; and a plurality of bolts through the outer wall of said
door and through said hardened steel barrier fastened with
lock nuts and supporting a handle for moving said door away
from said casing, said bolts being weakened in their shank
portions to shear off the head of the bolt if subjected to the
torque normally required for unloosening said bolt from its
lock nut.
4,393,791
UNDERCUTTER SEED PLANTER
Donald A. Suderman, Manhattan, Kans., assignor to Kansas
State University Research Foundation, Manhattan, Kans.
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,469
Int. CV AOIC 5/06. 7/20
U.S. CI. 111-34 5 Claims
1. A s^td planting apparatus comprising an undercutter
plow having a blade with horizontal leading and trailing edges;
transport means supporting said blade for substantially hori-
zontal movement at a selected depth beneath a soil surface; an
enlongated rigid seed delivery member connected to said blade
and extending rearwardly from the trailing edge thereof for
longitudinal movement beneath a soil surface behind said
blade; said seed delivery member having a front portion and an
elongated rear portion; said front portion being hingedly con-
nected to said blade for horizontal and vertical movement of
said rear portion with respect to said blade; said rear portion
being tubular an3 rearwardly terminating in a trailing end
having a seed discharge opening for releasing seeds into the
soil beneath the surface thereof; said seed delivery member
communicating with seed metering means adapted to supply
seeds in a flowing air stream thereto for the release of seeds
into the soil from said discharge opening; and a gage wheel
assembly secured to said rear portion of said seed delivery
member adjacent said trailing end; said gage wheel assembly
including a stanchion secured to said seed delivery member
adjacent said rear portion, a mounting member adjustably
secured to said stanchion for movement into different selected
positions of vertical adjustment therealong, and a pair of
wheels rotatably mounted upon and disposed on opposite sides
of said mounting member above and behind said trailing end of
said seed delivery member; said seed delivery member being
provided adjacent said trailing end with an upstanding air
release tube for releasing air from said rear portion at a point
spaced forwardly from said discharge opening; said air release
tube having an outlet spaced above said seed delivery member
a distance substantially greater than the depths of the soil at
which said trailing end is adapted to be supported by said gage
wheel assembly; said assembly being adapted to support said
trailing end of said seed delivery member at a selected depth
totally beneath the surface of the soil, with said seed delivery
member forming a tunnel beneath the surface for receiving
seeds from said discharge opening, when said apparatus is in
operation- said trailing end of said seed delivery member hav-
ing a depending longitudinal flange for firming the soil within
said tunnel.
4,393,792
APPARATUS FOR MATTRESS MANUFACTURE
Albert R. St. Clair, Hamilton, Ohio, assignor to Simmons U.S.A.
Corporation, Atlanta, Ga.
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,271
Int. a.^ D05B 11/00
U.S. a. 112-3 R 6 Qaims
1. A mattress core manufacturing apparatus for making a
core unit out of an assembly of coiled wire springs having a
pair of spaced end coils representing the top and bottom faces
of the assembly, the apparatus comprising:
a frame;
a support for holding said assembly, said support mounted
on the frame for reciprocal movement relative to said
frame;
a plurality of needles mounted on said frame, said needles
being thrust through said assembly between said top and
bottom faces thereof upon reciprocation of said support
relative said frame;
an intermediate needle guide assembly mounted on said
frame spaced from said support for reciprocal movement
relative to said frame;
a drive means operatively attached to said support for recip-
rocal movement thereof;
a plurality of needle guide bushings mounted on said support
and intermediate needle guide assembly; and
said needle guide bushings including a bushing surface for
said needles to prevent said needles from bending as the
support reciprocates relative to said frame and said nee-
dles are thrust through the assembly held by said support.
4,393,793
TUFTING MACHINE WITH ADJUSTABLE YARN GUIDE
TUBE BANK
Max M. Beasley, Chattanooga, Tenn., assignor to Tuftco Corpo-
ration, Chattanooga, Tenn.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,376
Int. CI.' D05C 15/18
U.S. CI. 112—79 R 9 Claims
1. In a tufting machine having means for supporting a base
fabric for longitudinal movement in a feeding direction from
front to rear through said machine, a plurality of transversely
spaced reciprocal needles for introducing yarns through the
base fabric to form loops, a yarn jerker bar reciprocably mov-
ing with the needles, yarn guide means comprising:
(a) a yarn tube bank including a plurality of yarn guide tubes
having upper and lower open ends,
(b) mounting means supporting said yarn tube bank on the
machine above the base fabric,
(c) said yarn tube bank comprising a yarn jerker member
spanning the lower ends of said yarn guide tubes,
(d) each of said yarn guide tubes receiving a yarn from a
yarn supply through its upper end and guiding said yarn
through said corresponding yarn guide tube, and across
970
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said yarn jerker member and the yarn jerker bar to a
corresponding needle, and
(e) adjustment means for vertically adjusting the {>osition of
said yam jerker member on said machine relative to said
needles.
4,393,794
SEWING MACHINE WITH NEEDLE DROPPING HOLE
CHANGING CONTROL DEVICE
Yasukata Eguchi, Kunitachi; Hideaki Takenoya, and Yasuro
Sano, both of Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Janome
Sewing Machine Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,914
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 5, 1979, 54-
152423[U]
Int. aj D05B 1/14. 3/02. 75/00
UjS. a. 112—158 E 1 Qaim
1. A sewing machine having a pulse motor operatively con-
nected to a needle of the sewing machine to control the needle
position and selectively operated to change the position of the
needle and exchange a laterally elongated needle dropping
hole for a reduced circular dropping hole and vice versa in
dependence upon the stitching type, said needle plate being
provided with an auxiliary needle plate which is formed with
the reduced circular needle dropping hole and is selectively
displaced by a transmission linkage to a position in which the
auxiliary needle plate covers the laterally elongated needle
dropping hole of the needle plate to provide the reduced circu-
lar needle dropping hole and to a position in which the auxil-
iary needle plate is spaced from the laterally elongated needle
dropping hole of the needle plate, comprising operating means
movable between a first and second predetermined positions,
clutch means normally connected to the operating means and
selectively operated to connect the pulse motor to the operat-
ing means when the pulse motor is driven to a predetermined
angular position displacing the needle to a predetermined
position, control means operatively connected to the operating
means and to the transmission means, said control means in-
cluding a cam member displaced to a predetermined position
by a drive force of the pulse motor through the operating
means, a follower member engaging the cam member, said cam
member being rotated by a starting drive of the sewing ma-
chine to displace the follower member to a predetermined set
position, thereby to displace the auxiliary needle plate relative
to the needle plate through the transmission means, and means
for holding the follower member in the set position.
4,393,795
ELECTRONIC SEWING MACHINE
Hachiro Makabe, Fussa; Kazuo Watanabe; Hideaki Takenoya,
both of Hachioji; Toshiaki Kume, Tachikawa, and Toshihide
Kakinuma, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Janome Sewing
Machine Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No, 96,573, Nov. 21, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,710
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 27, 1978, 53-145280
Int. a.3 D05B 3/02
U.S. CI. 112—158 E 2 Qaims
^QS)-*-CD
1. A sewing machine having an electric machine motor
driven by a manually operated controller, stitch forming in-
strumentalities including a needle driven by the machine motor
to vertically reciprocate so as to penetrate a fabric to be sewn
and a fabric feeding device driven by the machine motor in
synchronism with the needle to feed the fabric relative to the
movement of the needle, fabric presser means manually ad-
justed to press the fabric against the needle plate at a set pres-
sure, and electronic memory means storing stitch data sequen-
tially read out to control the needle position and the fabric
feeding position, comprising electromagnetic drive means
(FMw) operated by the stitch data of the memory means to
control the needle position; another electromagnetic drive
means (PMf) operated by the stitch data of the memory means
to control the fabric feeding position; means manually oper-
ated to adjust the fabric presser means to press the fabric with
a suitable pressure for basting stitches and generating an elec-
tric signal at a predetermined set position; control circuit
means (CC) activated by operation of the controller to drive
the machine motor at a reduced speed and to stop the machine
motor after one complete rotation thereof with the needle
stopped at the upper dead point thereof; switching means
operated by one of the electromagnetic means to make the
fabric feeding device inoperative; and data processing means
(CPU) detecting the electric signal of the fabric presser adjust-
ing means to perform calculations and treatments of the results
by means of the programing data stored in the memory,
thereby to produce orders to operate the control circuit means
and the switching means.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
971
4,393,796
ARRANGEMENT FOR OPERATING AN
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED SEWING MACHINE
IN A DIAGNOSTIC MODE
William H. Dunn, Frankford Township, Sussex County; Leonard
I. Horey, West Orange, and Marvin Kurland, East Bruns-
wick, all of N.J., assignors to The Singer Company, Stamford,
Conn.
I Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,148
Int. a.3 D05B 3/02. 79/00
U.S. CI. 112—158 E 6 Claims
so.
CENTRAL
PROCESSOR
66-' 1 AND
UNIT [. DATt I ''*^"'*
68 ^™^^^^^"^^
9S
\
ADORESS J PBnr.R.y
MICROCOMPUTER
BIGHT
ACTUATOR
SrSTEM
—r
r
MOTOR
CONTROL
srsTEiir
65
64
CMBLE ORtVE MOTOR
TuWl OFF All LED5
at»R MOTOR TEST FlK
jUftT ai,TEST
MOTQH TEST 1
4,393,797
ARRANGEMENT AND METHOD FOR PREVENTING
FALSE TRIGGERING IN AN OPTICALLY SWITCHED
BUTTONHOLE MECHANISM
Walter H. W. Marsh, Scotch Plains, N.J., assignor to The Singer
Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 449,093
Int. a.3 D05B 3/06
U.S. a. 112—158 B 2 Qaims
1. In an electronically controlled sewing machine having a
controller, a controllable drive motor, and an optical button-
hole mechanism including photosensitive means responsive to
changes in the amount of light impinging thereon for providing
buttonhole signals adapted to be used by said controller for
sequencing through states in the formation of a buttonhole
pattern, the improvement comprising:
-^ 1. An electronically controlled multiple pattern sewing
machine having operator controlled input means for selecting
functions to be performed by said sewing machine, indicating
means for providing an indication of the function selected by
an operator via said input means, diagnostic means for operat-
ing said sewing machine in a diagnostic mode, said diagnostic
means utilizing said indicating means for providing an indica-
tion to said Ojjerator of the operation of said sewing machine
while in said diagnostic mode, and operator controlled means
for selectively causing said diagnostic means to be operative.
■u'TiMHOK lariioin
DCM
tf'I C0I.0
Hits
i S'tdl
rncwt
uwriiw
L«rt«
-OSD
.wtn
mrw
crncun
r
^ I » — I 1 — T — I .
EMBlt SW iMBI STOf tNt&E S'.» UMlI iVjr
-^
iiwi
fliuMT
tffC
means enabled only during operation of said drive motor for
transmitting said buttonhole signals to said controller.
4,393,798
ROTARY SHUTTLE FOR A SEWING MACHINE
Haw-Lin Cheng, No. 119, Chung Shan Rd., Taiwan, Taiwan
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,537
Int. CI.' D05B 57/16. 71/02
U.S. a. 112—231 2 Claims
1. A rotary loop taker for a sewing machine comprising:
(a) an internal housing comprising an upper part and a lower
part held together by a ring which forms a middle part of
the interna! housing;
(b) an external housing comprising a tail base over which can
be fitted an internally tapered member for fitting the loop
taker into a sewing machine; and
(c) a flexible piece fixed to the external housing, the external
housing and flexible piece being free of screw holes and
the ring having a Teflon coating so that the internal and
external housings are rotatable relative to each other.
4,393,799
ATTACHMENT OF KNITTED FABRIC STRIP TO A
PIECE OF FABRIC
Denis Matthews, Sutton-in-Ashfield, England, assignor to Math-
birk Limited, Sutton-in-AshHeld, England
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,526
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 20, 1979,
7936477; Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 25, 1980, 8002667
Int. a.^ D05B 1/00
U.S. O. 112—262.1 9 Qaims
1. A method of linking a fabric strip to a piece of fabric, the
fabric strip having spaced longitudinal edges, comprising im-
paling the piece of fabric on the points of a linking machine and
positioning the fabric strip on the points of the linking machine
adjacent one of the longitudinal edges of the strip in a manner
972
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
whereby the second longitudinal edge of the strip is arranged
to abut the points, gripping the fabrics by gripping means to
position them relative to each other preparatory to linking and
then linking the two fabrics together by a sewing operation.
4,393,800
BELT LOOP FOLDER AND FEED APPARATUS
Francis B. Hargett, Richmond, Va., assignor to AMF Incorpo-
rated, White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,769
Int. a.3 D05B 3/12
U.S. a. 112—265.1 10 Qaims
ment with one of said stationary tongues thereby clamping
the folded loop ends therebetween; and
means for moving the stationary and folding tongues for-
wardly thereby moving a folded belt loop transversely to
its length to a stitching station of a tacker for attachment
to a garment.
8. A method of folding and presenting a drop type belt loop
for attachment to a garment comprising the steps of
feeding a belt loop endwise to a position for folding;
clamping the belt loop in position only until folded;
underfolding both ends of the belt loop with the underfolded
upper belt loop end extending past the fold of the lower
belt loop end;
clamping the underfolded belt loop ends together thereby
holding the belt loop and
moving the folded belt loop transversely to its length for
presenting the folded belt loop for attachment.
4,393,801
SEWING MACHINE DUST COLLECTOR
Masahisa Kato; Syouji Kasugai, and Osamu Gouda, all of Aichi,
Japan, assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 349,109
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 19, 1981, 56-23276
Int. Cl.^ D05B 71/00
U.S. a. 112—282 5 Claims
e,/"-)
1. Apparatus for folding and presenting a drop type belt loop
for attachment to a garment, comprising
a base plate;
drop plate means connected to move vertically relative to
said base plate and biased upwardly;
said drop plate means being provided with a laterally dis-
posed receiver immediately forward of said base plate for
belt loops moving endwise thereto;
folding means comprising a pair of laterally spaced station-
ary tongues connected to said base plate and extending
across the bottom of said receiver, and a pair of folding
tongues connected to said drop plate means and extending
therefrom across said receiver;
said folding tongues being spaced upwardly and outwardly
of said stationary tongues;
stabilizer means being provided with a pair of laterally
spaced jaws extending across said receiver and being
spaced vertically in alignment with said stationary
tongues;
first means for moving said stabilizer means toward said
receiver to clamp a belt loop during folding between said
jaws and stationary tongues, and for moving said stabilizer
means away from said receiver to release a folded belt
loop;
second means for simultaneously moving said receiver and
folding tongues downwardly relative to said stationary
tongues and thereafter moving said folding tongues
toward each other below said stationary tongues thereby
folding the upper and lower loop ends under the belt loop
between said stationary tongues with the upper loop end
extending past the fold of the lower loop end;
one of said folding tongues being disposed in vertical align-
1. A dust collector for use with a sewing machine compris-
ing a clutch motor adapted to drive a sewing machine, suction
means for collecting waste associated with the operation of
said sewing machine including a blower motor, first control
means for selectively energizing said blower motor in synchro-
nization with the engagement of the clutch of said clutch
motor and second control means adapted to selectively ener-
gize said blower motor independently of said first control
means.
4,393,802
BOAT HULL WITH UNDERSIDE CHANNEL
Salvatore A. Rizzo, P.O. Box 87, E. Setauket, N.Y. 11733
Filed May 16, 1980, Ser. No. 150,338
Int. C\? B63B 1/38
U.S. a. 114—67 A 12 Claims
1. A hull for a motor boat having an internal combustion
propulsion engine comprising a first pair of spaced apart verti-
cal wall portions disposed on the undersurface of said hull and
extending longitudinally with respect to said hull, a second pair
of spaced apart vertical wall portions extending transversely
with respect to said hull, with a first of said second pair of wall
portions disposed at an intermediate location between the bow
and the stern of said hull and with a second of said second pair
of wall portions disposed proximate to said stern of said hull, a
horizontally disposed wall portion extending between said first
and said second pair of wall portions and with said first pair of
wall portions, said second pair of wall portions and said hori-
zontal wall portion, in combination defining a longitudinal
cavity which projects inwardly into said hull, a plurality of
exhaust ports disposed on said first wall of said second pair of
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
973
wall portions, with said exhaust ports directed longitudinally
with respect to said hull and directed toward said stern and
connection means connecting said exhaust ports with said
propulsion engine for the purpose of introducing exhaust gases
into said cavity in order to reduce hull-to-water friction, a pair
of longitudinal keel members disposed, one each, on port and
on starboard sides of said cavity, with lower surfaces of said
keel members including a longitudinally grooved portion, and
connection means disposed to introduce exhaust gases from
said propulsion engine into forward portions of said keel mem-
bers.
4,393,803
BOAT ROPE CONTROLLER
Richard W. Donalies, 1545 Newcastle La., Hoffman Estates, III.
60194
Filed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,514
Int. Cl.^ B63B 21/16
U.S. a. 114—254 9 Qaims
between and near the central portion of said two support
arms for containing said boat rope;
a pulley mounted for free rotation to said framework be-
tween and at the end of said two support arms opposite
said mounting means, said pulley and said reel means
being substantially aligned whereby said boat rope can
readily pass to or from said reel means via said pulley;
mode control means operable with said reel means for selec-
tively securing said reel means to prevent its rotation and
for releasing said reel means to allow its rotation;
driving means attached to said reel means for rotating said
reel means, said driving means being removable from said
rope controller and said driving means and said mode
control means being operable from a safe position with the
boat;
rope guide means cooperatively associated with said reel
means and said pulley for restricting the movement of said
boat rope relative to said reel means and said pulley and,
thereby, preventing malfunctions due to tangling and
knotting of the boat rope within the rope controller;
a service cover mounted to said framework, said service
cover, together with said framework, forming a substan-
tially contiguous outer surface around said contained boat
rope and any internal parts whereby said service cover
and said framework protect the occupants of the boat
form the potential danger of internal moving parts, shield
the occupants from spewing water from rotating internal
parts and the boat rope, deter unauthorized tampering and
dismantling of the rope controller, and protect internal
parts and the boat rope from environmental elements; and
cover locking means operable with said service cover for
locking said service cover to said framework, said cover
locking means including drive locking means for securing
said driving means while allowing for removal of said
driving means and said service cover being not removable
when said driving means is secured, whereby inadvertent
or unauthorized access to or dismantling of said rope
controller is prevented.
4,393,804
APPARATUS FOR REMOVING TONER FROM AND
APPLYING OFFSET PREVENTIVE LIQUID TO A
FIXING ROLLER
James C. Nygard, Maplewood; Melvin P. Weiss, W oodbury, and
Thomas E. Larsen, St. Paul, all of Minn., assignors to Minne-
sota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,545
Int. Cl.^ B05C 11/00
U.S. CI. 118—60 10 Claims
2. A boat rope controller for a boat rope which is used for
water skiing or other related water sports, anchoring and
general marine towing, said boat rope controller comprising:
mounting means attached to the rear of a boat for providing
occupants of the boat with an uninterrupted view;
a framework including two substantially parallel support
arms, one end of said framework engaging said mounting 1. Apparatus for removing toner material offset to a rotat-
means at an angle to extend said framework generally able fixing roller and applying offset preventing liquid to the
upward from said mounting means and rearward of the fixing roller including:
boat; a supply core;
a reel means mounted for free rotation to said framework a rotatable take-up core;
974
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a rotatable pressure roller having an outer layer of resilient
material;
a web member adapted to be moved from said supply core to
said take-up core via said pressure roller, said pressure
roller positioned to provide a contact nip for said web
member with the fixing roller opposite said pressure roller
wherein contact of said web member with the fixing roller
at said contact nip removes toner material offset to the
fixing roller; and
an offset preventing liquid applicator means positioned be-
tween said supply core and said contact nip for applying
offset preventing liquid to the surface of said web member
that is brought into contact with the fixing roller.
with respect to said only one direction of movement of the
pig-
4,393,805
PIPELINE PIG FOR LINING PIPE LINES
Hubert Boer, Reken, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to diga-die
gasheizung GmbH, Essen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,621
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 11,
1980, 3046608
Int. a.3 B05C 7/00
U.S. a. 118—105 7 Qaims
4,393,806
BOAT FOR THE EPITAXIAL GROWTH FROM THE
LIQUID PHASE
Marc Mahieu; Philippe Vandenberg, both of Caen, and Jacques
J. Varon, Troarn, all of France, assignors to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,816
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 27, 1980, 80 04323
Int. Q\? HOIL 21/208
U.S. CI. 118—412 5 Qaims
16 161 17 ,
1. In a pipeline pig for lining a pipe line with an internal
coating of a solidifying plastic composition with which the
pipe line is spread by means of the pig which is adapted during
operative movement of the pig to be drawn in the pipe line in
only one direction of movement of the pig with respect to the
pig, the pipeline pig having at least one spreader body and at
least one forward and one rear guide body, the improvement
wherein
each said guide body comprises means for exact central and
coaxial guiding of the spreader body in the pipe line com-
prising,
at least three narrow, resiliently elastic guide pieces bent into
U-form, each of said guide pieces comprising a middle
part with forward and rear U-legs at ends thereof and
rounded transitions from the middle part to the U-legs,
said middle parts extending in an axial direction of the pipe-
line pig for the exact central and coaxial guidance of the
pipeline pig in the pipe line by abutment on an inner wall
of the pipe line and being offset in relation to one another
in a circumferential direction,
means for securing said forward U-legs non-displaceably in
the axial direction in the pig,
a common bearing means for displaceably mounting said
rear U-legs in the axial direction in the pig, said rear U-
legs of said guide pieces being secured to said common
bearing, said forward U-legs being located forwardly with
respect to said only one direction of movement of the pig
and said rear U-legs being located rearwardly, opposite
10 T13
12 21 n
1. A boat for use in a device for liquid phase epitaxial growth
of two successive semiconductor layers on a plurality of semi-
conductor substrates, said boat comprising
a crucible structure,
a bottom support layer of said crucible structure having a
cavity for holding said substrates,
a slide layer positioned above said support layer and extend-
ing for linear movement through opposite end walls of
said crucible structure,
two reservoirs for liquid solutions provided on said slide
layer, one of said two reservoirs having said support layer
as a bottom, and
a removable sealing element provided in said slide layer to
act as a bottom for the other of said two reservoirs.
4,393,807
SPINNER
Shuzo Fujimura, and Atsuyuki Yasuda, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,515
Gaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1979, 54/119242
Int. G.3 B05C 5/00
U.S. G. 118—501 6 Gaims
ASP
1. A spinner comprising: a rotating spindle for causing a
workpiece to spin at a high speed, and a cup disposed around
said spindle and provided at a buttom wall thereof with a port
for air evacuation, said cup comprising a deflector ring dis-
posed in the interior of the cup and extending inwardly, said
deflector ring having an annular barrier at the inner peripheral
edge for defining steps projecting from the upper and lower
surfaces of the ring, respectively, said barrier having an inner
peripheral surface formed to diverge at least upwardly with
respect to the axis of the spindle, and wherein said deflector
ring has an outer peripheral wall for defining with the side wall
of the cup an annular space therebetween, said outer peripheral
wall of the deflector ring being provided with a plurality of
holes for air evacuation arranged approximately equidistantly
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
975
in the circumferential direction, whereby the interior of the
cup is also in communication with the air evacuation port in
the bottom wall of the cup, via a second route including said
annular space and the air evacuation holes in the outer periph-
eral wall of the cup.
4,393,808
MEANS FOR PROCESSING MINIATURE ELECTRONIC
COMPONENTS
Denver Braden, Carlsbad, Calif., assignor to Palomar Systems &
Machines, Inc., Escondido, Calif.
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,347
I Int. G.J B05C 11/14. 13/00, 13/02
U.S. G. 118—503 9 Gaims
as magnet wire comprising a die, a bare fllament pay-out de-
vice, a coated filament take-up device, said die being located
between said pay-out and take-up devices, said die having a
throat portion, an entrance opening larger than said throat
portion interconnected by a converging interior wall, thereby
defining a cavity between said throat portion and said opening,
said die being positioned to receive a filament trained between
said pay-out and take-up devices in said opening and throat
portion, said die being fixed in position, a reservoir of flowable
but hardenable material, a flowable material applicator con-
nected to said reservoir means, said applicator applying said
material to said filament just prior to said filament entering said
die and in excess of that required to coat said filament to a
desired thickness in a single pass, whereby said excess collects
in said die cavity, and means including said material in said die
cavity for centering said filament in said throat portion.
Yd^ L
1. Loading means orienting parts each having a configura-
tion of right rectangular shape with a greater length dimension
from end surface to end surface than width dimension from
side surface to side surface and with a greater width dimension
from side surface to side surface than thickness dimension from
face surface to face surface, comprising:
(a) a loading plate having a multiplicity of through openings,
said openings being disposed in juxtaposed rows, each
opening extending therethrough from top face to bottom
face of said plate and said openings receiving said parts
from the top of said plate and said openings orienting said
parts and discharging oriented parts from the bottom of
said plate,
(b) each opening tapering from said top face to said bottom
face to said plate to help feed said parts into said openings
from the top of said plate, and
(c) each opening being formed at said bottom face of said
plate with an oblong shape having a width generally
matching said thickness dimension of said parts and less
than said length and width dimensions of said parts in
order to orient said parts relative to the axis of each part
from face surface to face surface thereof
4,393,809
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURING MAGNET WIRE
George D. Hilker, Fort Wayne, Ind., assignor to Phelps Dodge
Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
I Filed Aug. 7, 1978, Ser. No. 931,314
' Int. G.3 B05B 5/02; B05C 5/00, 9/08
U.S. G. 118—620 15 Claims
1. An apparatus for the manufacture of coated filaments such
4,393,810
ELECTROGRAPHIC DEVELOPMENT APPARATUS AND
METHOD HAVING OSCILLATING MAGNETIC
CROSS-MIXING
George P. Kasper, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed May 20, 1982, Ser. No. 380,173
Int. CI.' G03G 15/09
U.S. G. 118—657 10 Gaims
•^>
1. In electrographic development apparatus of the kind
adapted for use at a development zone which extends trans-
versely across the operative path of an electrographic imaging
device, said development apparatus including means providing
a developer supply zone and magnetic brush means for trans-
porting developer along a developer path from said supply
zone into a developing position at the development zone and
then back toward the developing position or the supply, the
improvement comprising:
(a) cross-mix magnet means mounted proximate a transverse
portion of said developer path; and
(b) means for oscillating said cross-mix magnet means along
said developer path portion whereby developer moving
past said portion of said developer path is intermixed
transversely across said developer path.
2. In electrographic development apparatus of the kind
adapted for use at a development zone which extends trans-
versely across the operative path of an electrographic imaging
device, said development apparatus including a developer
housing providing a supply zone for electrographic developer
and magnetic feed means for transporting developer along a
developer path from said supply zone to a developing position
at the development zone and then back toward the supply
zone, the improvement comprising:
(a) a non-magnetic housing portion extending transversely
of, and in closely spaced relation to, said developer path at
a location displaced from said developing position;
(b) cross-mix magnet means mounted in close relation to said
non-magnetic housing portion and on the housing side
external with respect to the developer path; and
(c) means for oscillating said cross-mix magnet means along
976
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said non-magnetic housing portion whereby developer
moving along the developer path will be shifted trans-
versely with respect to the operative path of the electro-
graphic imaging device.
4,393,811
WEIGHTED TEAT CUP SHELL AND ASSEMBLY
Syd E. Bodmin, Otumoetai, New Zealand, assignor to Mae Lois
Moore, Tauranga, New Zealand
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,715
Claims priority, application New Zealand, Mar. 24, 1981,
196595
Int. a.5 AOIJ 5/04
U.S. a. 119—14.47
9 Qaims
admission of the next sow pivoting the enclosure to the
raised open position and washing the floor and the interior
of the enclosure thoroughly,
maintaining the enclosure in the open position such that the
floor and enclosure interior are exposed to the sun's rays
long enough to kill all bacteria in the hut, and
lowering the enclosure to the closed position and moving
another sow into the hut for farrowing.
1. A teat cup shell comprising a body having an upper por-
tion with an open end arranged to receive a complimentary
upper portion of a teat cup inflation and a lower portion in-
cludmg an aperture through which a lower portion of the teat
cup inflation may pass wherein the body of the teat cup shell is
formed in a mouldable material and includes at least one inter-
nally moulded and inset weight, said internally moulded and
inset weight being positioned in the upper regions of the teat
cup shell and extending in length substantially throughout the
upper pKjrtion of the teat cup shell where the walls thereof are
thicker such that the centre of mass of the teat cup shell due to
the presence of the inset weight in the upper region is within
the upper region;
wherein the upper region of said teat cup body is provided
with a substantially circular outer surface and the lower
region of the body is provided with a substantially oval
outer surface and the internal bore of the teat cup shell is
such that the width in a first plane is greater than the
width in a second plane at right angles to the first plane.
4,393,813
WATERING DEVICE FOR PET ANIMALS
Teho Sou, 7-18 Higashiimazato 2-chome, Higashinari-ku,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,854
Int. a.3 AOIK 7/00
U.S. a. 119—72.5 3 Claims
4,393,812
SWTSE FARROWING HUT AND METHOD OF
FARROWING PIGS AND MAINTAINING A DISEASE -
FREE FARROWING HUT
Claude W. Ahrens, Grinnell, Iowa, assignor to Miracle Recrea-
tion Equipment Company, Grinnell, Iowa
Continuation of Ser. No. 945,084, Sep. 25, 1978, Pat. No.
4,269,144. This application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,089
Int. a.' AOIK 1/02
U.S. a. 119—16 1 Claim
1. Method of farrowing pigs and providing and maintaining
a disease free single litter farrowing hut wherein the hut in-
cludes a floor and an enclosure with the enclosure being pivot-
able from a position over the floor to an open raised position
whereby the floor and the entire interior of the enclosure may
be exposed to the sun, including the steps of, providing a
substantially non-porous hut, which bacteria cannot penetrate,
locating the farrowing hut outside in the open in substantial
spaced relation to other farrowing huts so that each litter has
fresh air and is not breathing the air from another adjacent
litter and in a position relative to the sun that sun rays will
- reach the substantial area of the floor and interior of the
enclosure when in the raised open position,
following the removal of one sow and litter and before the
/^^
1. A watering device for pet animals, which comprises; an
elongated sucking pipe extending downwardly from a hermeti-
cally sealed water container, and being so configured that pet
animals can water from a suction port at the lower end of said
sucking pipe; said sucking pipe comprising an elongated hol-
low cylinder of predetermined internal diameter open at both
ends and made of a hard material which is not damaged by
biting and chewing and an elongated cylindrical leakage-pre-
venting plug disposed entirely within said hollow cylinder and
container and having a longitudinal base of lesser diameter
than said predetermined internal diameter, said plug being
made of a material susceptible to damage by biting and chew-
ing and being located protectively within said sucking pipe
such that it cannot be contacted directly by^ said animals, said
plug having engagement means on its outer surface for retain-
ing it within said cylinder.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
977
4,393,814 bottom edge of the skirt to the top limit of said openings below
MULTI-FUELED BOILER the level of the liquid, an exhaust stack communicating with
Raymond Sjevert, 790 Old Colony Rd., Meriden, Conn. 06450 the housing above the dome, and heat exchange means associ-
I Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,254
Int. a.3 F22B 31/04
U.S. a. 122—22
8 Claims
3r
PCT
4,393,815
HEATING PLANT
Niels R. Pedersen, Nybrogaasrdsvej 59, and Eyvind S. Nielsen,
Alsoddevej 35, both of Hadsund, Denmark (DK 9560)
PCT No. PCT/DK80/00048, § 371 Date Apr. 16, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 16, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00611, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 5, 1981
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 253,928
Int. CV F22B 1/02
U.S. CI. 122—31 R 13 Claims
1. A hepting plant comprising a housing, a combustion
chamber, a high pressure burner associated with the combus-
tion chamber, an exhaust pipe extending from the combustion
chamber vertically within the housing and terminating within
a smoke trap provided in the housing, the smoke trap including
a dome having a downwardly extending skirt, the skirt extend-
ing below the top level of the exhaust pipe, means for maintain-
ing a smoke washing liquid level below the level of the exhaust
pipe and above the bottom edge of the dome skirt within the
housing, openings provided in the dome skirt in the area below
the liquid level, said openings decreasing in area from the
0^
■ ?2
I \
J L
I ,
■ ■ -^ \:'
I
r-A
-15
t.
J . L
5
K^i-
h" 'nnr
ated with the housing through which heat exchange fluid may
be circulated for extracting the heat generated in the heating
plant.
1. A multi-fuel boiler having improved combustion effi-
ciency comprising two compartments, said compartments each
including external walls and an internal wall partially separat-
ing the compartments from each other to permit passage of
heated gas from one compartment to the other so that the fuels
may be burned in each compartment in sequence or simulta-
neously,
wherein said compartments comprise a front compartment
for combustion of a solid fuel positioned and connected to
and communicating with said front compartment, a rear
compartment for combustion of a fluid fuel, and an ash pit
positioned in front of said rear compartment and beneath
said front compartment and separated from said front
compartment by a grate to hold solid fuel;
means in one compartment to burn fluid fuel and means in
the other compartment to burn solid fuel, a water-filled
supply tank positioned above said front compartment;
wherein said internal wall between the two compartments is
a substantially vertical water-conductive wall connected
to said water supply tank to heat the water of said tank;
a plurality of fire tubes each having inlet and exhaust ori-
fices, said fire tubes passing through said water supply
tank, said fire tubes having their inlet orifices connected to
said front compartment to receive hot combustion gases
from both said compartments, said fire tubes heating the
water within the supply tank and being connected to a flue
for exhausting combusted gases.
4,393,816
THERMODYNAMIC METHOD FOR STEAM-WATER
SEPARATION
Paul A. Bock, 2246 N. Edinboro Ave., Claremont, Calif. 91711
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,470
Int. a.' F22D 1/00
U.S. CI. 122—412 7 Claims
? 'O
1. In the method of improving the quality of wet process
steam produced by conventional and once through type boilers
by removing moisture therefrom while reducing the quantity
of boiler feedwater required to produce the resulting high
quality dried steam, the steps comprising:
(a) introducing wet process steam from a boiler to a steamwa-
ter separation vessel to separate entrained moisture and dry
the steam to form relatively dry process steam;
(b) removing from the separation vessel the separated moisture
therein as a water stream including dissolved solids and
passing said stream through a pressure reducing control
valve to vaporize said water to form low pressure steam;
(c) introducing said low pressure steam to a low pressure flash
vessel and flashing said steam therein to separate moisture
therefrom and form low pressure dry steam;
(d) removing from the flash vessel the separated moisture
therein as a low pressure water stream including higher
quantities of dissolved solids and passing said stream through
a feedwater preheater in indirect heat exchange relationship
with fresh boiler feedwater to preheat said feedwater and
cool said water stream;
(e) removing from the flash vessel the low pressure dry steam
978
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
produced therein and passing said steam through a condens-
ing heat exchanger to condense said steam for form a recov-
ered hot stream of boiler feedwater substantially free of
dissolved solids;
(0 mixing the preheated stream of fresh boiler feedwater with
the relatively hot stream of recovered boiler feedwater in a
holding tank to form a combined feedwater stream having a
temperature greater than that of the preheated fresh boiler
feedwater and pumping said hot combined feedwater stream
under high pressure through the condensing heat exchanger
in indirect heat exchange relationship with the low pressure
dry steam from the flash vessel to further heat said combined
feedwater stream and to condense said steam and thence to
said boiler for use therein in the production of steam;
(g) discharging the water stream leaving the feedwater pre-
heater, together with the included high quantities of dis-
solved solids, as a relatively cool waste stream; and
(h) removing from the separation vessel, as an improved qual-
ity product, the relatively dry process steajn.
5. In the method of improving the quality of high tempera-
ture, high pressure wet process steam produced by conven-
tional and once through type boilers by removing moisture
therefrom while reducing the quantity of boiler feedwater
required to produce the resulting high quality dried steam, the
steps comprising:
(a) introducing wet high temperature, high pressure process
steam from a boiler to a high pressure steam-water separa-
tion vessel to separate entrained moisture and dry the steam
to form high temperature, high pressure relatively dry pro-
cess steam;
(b) removing from the separation vessel the separated moisture
therein as a high pressure, high temperature water stream
including dissolved solids and passing said stream through a
pressure reducing control valve to vaporize said water to
form low pressure, high temperature steam;
(c) introducing said low pressure, high temperature steam to a
low pressure flash vessel and flashing said steam therein to
separate moisture therefrom and form low pressure dry
steam;
(d) removing from the flash vessel the separated moisture
therein as a low pressure, high temperature water stream
including higher quantities of dissolved solids and passing
said stream through a feedwater preheater in indirect heat
exchange relationship with fresh boiler feedwater to preheat
said feedwater and cool said water stream;
(e) removing from the flash vessel the low pressure dry steam
produced therein and passing said steam through a condens-
ing heat exchanger to condense said steam to form a recov-
ered hot stream of boiler feedwater substantially free of
dissolved solids;
(0 mixing the preheated stream of fresh boiler feedwater with
the relatively hot stream of recovered boiler feedwater in a
holding tank to form a combined feedwater stream having a
temperature greater than that of the preheated fresh boiler
feedwater and pumping said hot combined feedwater stream
under high pressure through the condensing heat exchanger
in indirect heat exchange relationship with the low pressure
dry steam from the flash vessel to further heat said combined
feedwater stream and to condense said steam and thence to
said boiler for use therein in the production of steam;
(g) discharging the water stream leaving the feedwater pre-
heater, together with the included high quantities of dis-
solved solids, as a relatively cool waste stream; and
(h) removing from the separation vessel, as an improved qual-
ity product, the high temperature, high pressure relatively
dry process steam.
4,393,817
COMBUSTION AND POLLUTION CONTROL SYSTEM
John E. Lindberg, Lafayette, Calif., assignor to Owen, Wicker-
sham & Erickson, San Francisco, Calif.
Division of Set. No. 657,747, Feb. 13, 1976, abandoned, which is
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 613,867, Sep. 16, 1975,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 356,589,
May 3, 1973, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 227,440, Feb. 18, 1972, abandoned. This application Sep. 25,
1980, Ser. No. 190,932
Int. a. J F02B 43/08. 19/00. 47/00
U.S. a. 123—3 11 Claims
1. A method for providing improved combustion and re-'
duced emissions in an internal combustion engine, having a
combustion zone and an exhaust, comprising
feeding both fuel and controlled amounts of an aqueous fluid
comprising a mixture of steam and hydrogen into said
combustion zone, and
in response to engine needs, increasing the weight ratio of
said aqueous fluid to said fuel during engine acceleration.
4,393,818
COAL DUST COMBUSTION MOTOR
Otto Lefnaer, Brucknerstr. 68, 7000 Stuttgart 1, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,347
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1981, 3101910
Int. a.J F02B 45/02
U.S. a. 123—23 28 Qaims
^!r
FtELER FW
MEASURING
REVOLUTIONS
RESPECnvILV
OUNK UKUC
1. A coal dust combustion motor comprising a cylinder; a
piston reciprocatable in said cylinder between a suction stroke
and a compression stroke and defining between one end of said
piston and a facing end wall of said cylinder a main combina-
tion space; a whirling chamber continuously communicating
with said space in the region of said end wall of said cylinder;
means for blowing a mixture of air and coal dust at a low
pressure of about 5-7 atm into said whirling chamber during
July 19, 1,983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
979
the compression stroke of said piston at a time at which the
pressure in said space is greater than the effective pressure in
said whirling chamber.
4,393,819
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING COOLING WATER
TEMPERATURE FOR WATER-COOLED ENGINE
Takayuki Tanaka, Komae, and Rempei Matsumoto, Ohta, both
of Japan, assignors to Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,761
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 30, 1981, 55-65672
Int. CV FOIP 7/14
U.S. a. 123—41.08 4 Qaims
1. A system for controlling cooling water temperature for a
water-cooled engine having an intake passage, a radiator, a
cooling water passage communicating a water jacket in said
engine with said radiator, and a thermostat provided in said
cooling water passage, said thermostat being so arranged as to
open said passage when the cooling water temperature exceeds
a predetermined value, said system comprising
a bypass for bypassing said thermostat;
bypass valve means provided in said bypass for closing the
bypass;
solenoid valve means for actuating said bypass valve; and
switch circuit means connected parallel to said solenoid
valve means for selectively switching the solenoid valve
means;
said switch circuit means comprising a low temperature
switch responsive to low cooling water temperature to
effect the operation of said solenoid valve for closing said
bypass valve of said bypass, a high temperature switch
means responsive to high cooling water temperature to
effect the operation of said solenoid valve for closing said
bypass valve, and a light load switch means responsive to
the light load operation of the engine to effect the opera-
tion of said solenoid valve for closing the bypass valve.
4,393,820
ROLLING CONTACT ROCKER ARM AND PIVOT
Emil R. Maki, Rochester, Mich.; Ferdinand Freudenstein, Riv-
erdale, N.Y.; Raymond L. Richard, Jr., Port Clinton, Ohio,
and Meng-Sang Chew, Sterling Heights, Mich., assignors to
General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 261,736, May 7, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,926
Int. a.3 FOIL 1/18
U.S. a. 123—90.41 9 Qaims
1. A reciprocating internal combustion engine of the type
having an engine block defining a cylinder with a port, a valve
reciprocably located in said port and biased to a predetermined
position, a valve actuator spaced from the valve and movable
in opposite sense to reciprocate the same, and a valve train
means including a rocker arm in engagement with the valve
and the valve actuator and actuated in rocking movement to
reciprocate said valve against said bias to open and close the
port for engine operation, the improvement comprising:
means defining a rocking support intermediate the length of
the rocker arm, said means and said rocker arm defining a
pair of cooperating inner and outer cylindrical bearing
surface contours carrying the reaction forces of rocker
arm pivotal movement, the radius of the outer conforma-
tion being in the range of about 3 to 1.7 times the radius of
the inner conformation;
restrainer means to anchor the cooperating cylindrical con-
formations for substantially rolling action in relation to
each other, said restrainer means comprising a pin extend-
ing radially outward from the inner conformation and a
recess in the outer conformation of a size to receive said
pin.
=H-/
said recess defining opposed sloping guide surfaces fiaring
outward in the direction toward the center of the outer
conformation and over which the pin walks during rocker
arm oscillation, the conformation of the pin being such
that the pin moves in substantially walking motion during
such reciprocation,
whereby within the range of rocker arm oscillation the pin
establishes substantially rolling contact between the cylin-
drical surfaces by contact with the guide surfaces of the
recess and itself executes substantially rolling contact with
the guide surfaces defined by the recess.
4,393,821
CYLINDER OR CYLINDER LINER
Shigeru Urano, Omiya, Japan, assignor to Nippon Piston Ring
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 151,064
Claims priority, application Japan, May 22, 1979, 54-62198
Int. a.5 F02F 1/00
U.S. a. 123—195 C 6 Qaims
- 5
1. An internal combustion engine comprising: a piston, a
cylinder and a cylinder liner, said piston being operatively
disposed in said cylinder, said cylinder liner having a plurality
of spaced separate annular hardened layers produced directly
from the cylinder liner without discontinuity, on the inner
peripheral surface of said liner in the vicinity of the top dead
center of said piston, the distance between adjacent annular
hardened layers being smaller than an axial length of a piston
ring of said piston.
980
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,822
WATER-COOLED, MULTI-CYLINDER INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Bertram Obermayer; Othmar Skatsche, and Josef Greier, all of
Graz, Austria, assignors to Hans List, Graz, Austria
Filed Aug. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 178,586
Claims priority, application Austria, Aug. 28, 1979, 5759/79
Int. a.^ F02F 7/00
U.S. a. 123—195 R 4 Qaims
plurality of suction valves each adapted to intermittently seat
on the respective valve seats wherein said cylinders are di-
vided into first and second groups each group having a plural-
ity of cylinders with different phase of suction strokes from one
to another and having no overlap therebetween; a suction
valve seat lubricating apparatus comprising a partition wall
disposed in said suction manifold dividing the same into first
lOb
1. A water-cooled internal combustion engine comprising:
a cylinder block;
a cooling jacket provided in said cylinder block;
a plurality of in-line cylinders provided in said cylinder block
each having a cylinder diameter, a lower end portion and a
bottom edge portion;
a plurality of crankshaft main bearings each formed from first
and second bearing portions;
a plurality of main bearing bolts each having threads formed
thereon for mutually connecting said first and second bear-
ing portions;
means for connecting each of said cylinders to said cooling
jacket at said lower end portion of each of said cylinders at
a distance from said bottom edge portions of each of said
cylinders corresponding to 0.5 to 0.75 times said cylinder
diameter; and
means for exclusively interconnecting said lower end portion
of each of said cylinders wherein said means for exclusively
interconnecting said lower end portion of each of said cylin-
ders is disposed between adjacent cylinders below said
means for connecting said cylinders to said cooling jacket
such that said lower end portion of each of said cylinders is
substantially unconstrained from said bottom edge portion
of each of said cylinders up to a distance corresponding to
0.2 to 0.4 times said cylinder diameter, and wherein said
threads formed on said main bearing bolts are disposed
within said cylinder block at a distance from said bottom
edge portion of each of said cylinders at least as great as the
distance from said means for exclusively interconnecting
said lower end portion of each of said cylinders to said
bottom edge portion of each of said cylinders.
and second chambers, said first chamber being communicated
with said first group of cylinders and said second chamber
being communicated with said second group of cylinders, and
a pair of lubricant supply means each connected to and open
within said first or second chamber for supplying lubricant
thereinto whereby supplied lubricant may be carried by the
suction air to the respective valve seats sequentially so as to
lubricate the same.
4,393,824
HEATING SYSTEM
Friedrich B. Fischer, Cologne, and Gottfried Moser, Bergisch
Gladbach, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Klockn*
er-Humboldt-Deutz AG, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,758
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 18,
1980, 3039372
Int. a.3 Ft)lM 7/00
U.S. a. 123—196 AB 12 Claims
4,393,823
SUCTION VALVE SEAT LUBRICATING APPARATUS
Hideo Furukawa; Kazuo Chikugo, and Yoichi Otsuki, all of
Oyama, Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu
Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 275,103
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 25, 1980, 55-88156[U]
Int. a.' FOIM l/OO
U.S. a. 123—196 M 2 Oaims
1. In a diesel engine including a plurality of cylinders, a
turbocharger, a compressor driven by the turbocharger for
compressing a suction air, a suction manifold connected to the
compressor, a plurality of cylinder heads each having a suction
port and a valve insert with a valve seat formed therein, each
suction port being connected to the suction manifold and a
1. In an internal combustion engine having an oil distribution
system normally operable at a predetermined pressure level,
said system including a main oil conduit, a pump for suctioning
oil from an oil sump of the engine and feeding the oil to oil
distributing points or galleries of said oil distribution system, an
oil heating system comprising solely said oil distribution sys-
tem wherein said pump comprises a high-pressure pump pro-
ducing a pressure of about one order of magnitude higher than
said predetermined level, a pressure-reducing element in said
conduit between said pump and said oil distributing points for
reducing the oil pressure flowing therethrough and thereby
increasing the oil temperature before the oil reaches said oil
distributing points or galleries of said oil distribution system.
July 19,
^83
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
981
4 393 825
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING FUEL FLOW WITHIN AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Philip L. Breeck; David E. Shultz, and Andrew C. Rosselli, all of
Columbus, Ind., assignors to Cummins Engine Company, Inc.,
Columbus, Ind.
I Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,768
Int. a.^ F02M 6i/02
U.S. a 123-198 F ^ llQaims
path between the low pressure supply pump and the injection
pump, said valve being arranged to prevent fiow of fuel along
L
V'
iT^^e
^
P^
wz
1. A system for controlling fuel flow within an internal
combustion engine having a plurality of cylinders, said system
comprising a fuel source; a fuel pump responsive to the speed
of the engine and having an inlet connected to said fuel source,
a first outlet connected to a first fuel supply line for a predeter-
mined number of first cylinders, and a second outlet; and a
multi-mode adjustable control valve having a housing pro-
vided with a first port connected to a drain communicating
with the fuel source, a second port connected to the second
outlet of said fuel pump, a third port connected to the first fuel
supply line, and a fourth port connected to a second fuel supply
line for a predetermined number of second cylinders; said
control valve, when the engine is operating below a predeter-
mined first speed and/or below a predetermined operating
temperature, automatically assuming a first mode wherein fuel
flow to the second cylinders is substantially cut off except for
a predetermined restrictive amount of fuel flow thereto under
a predetermined low pressure to effect continuous lubrication
of said second cylinders, and when the engine is operating
above said predetermined operating temperature, the control
valve automatically assumes a second mode wherein there is
substantially unrestricted fuel flow to the second cylinders.
4,393,826
LIQUID FUEL INJECTION PUMPING APPARATUS
Brian W. Tumber, Greenford, England, assignor to Lucas Indus-
tries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,992
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 23, 1980,
8041282
Int. a? F02D 77/00, 7/06
U.S. a. 123—198 DB 4 Qaims
1. A liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying
fuel to an internal combustion engine comprising an injection
pump operable in use to deliver fuel in timed relationship with
an associated engine, a low pressure supply pump for supply-
ing fuel to the injection pump, valve means for controlling the
output pressure of the supply pump, a resiliently loaded com-
ponent defining a surface against which a control pressure can
act to enable the amount of fuel supplied at each injection
stroke of the injection pump to be varied, a control valve for
deriving said control pressure from the output pressure of the
supply pump, and a valve responsive to the pressure drop
across said control valve, said valve being included in the flow
10' IS II i3 \Z ^ '5 ZC
said flow path in the event that the pressure drop across said
control valve falls below a predetermined value.
4 393 827
MULTICYLINDER INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE,
ESPECIALLY FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES AND
PROCESS FOR SUPPLYING OF A FUEL-AIR MIXTURE
THERETO
Wolfgang Schmid, Markgroeningen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Dr. Ing. h.c.F. Porsche AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,485
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 25,
1980, 3044248
Int. CI.' F02M li/04; P02D 77/00
U.S. CI. 123-198 F 30 Qaims
•:;;:;jr*
1. Multicylinder internal combustion engine having separate
cylinder groups, each cylinder group being associated with a
fuel-air mixture supply means for selectively supplying a fuel-
air mixture or only air thereto, wherein each cylinder group is
associated with a throttle valve arranged in an intake pipe,
each throttle valve being connected to a control lever and the
position of the throttle valves being variable by an accelerator
pedal actuated cam disk which is arranged to coact with the
control levers, the control lever connected to the throttle
valve that is associated with the first cylinder group coacts
with a single curved path of the cam disk in all operating
ranges of the internal combustion engine, both when the en-
gine is warmed-up for operation and in the warming-up phase
of the internal combustion engine; the control lever connected
to the throttle valve that is associated with the second cylinder
group coacts with a first curved path, that is correlated with a
predetermined partial load range, when the internal combus-
tion engine is warmed-up for operation, and coacts with a
second curved path, that is correlated with all operating ranges
of the internal combustion engine, in the warming-up phase of
the internal combustion engine and when the engine is
warmed-up, about the predetermined partial load range up to
full load, characterized in that
said single curved path cooperating with the control lever of
the first cylinder group is an inner path of a first guide slot,
said first curved path coacting with the control lever of
982
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the second cylinder group is an outer path of a second
guide slot, and said second curved path coacting with the
control lever of the second cylinder group is an inner path
of said second guide slot.
ber having a displacement equal to or greater than the
displacement of the compression chamber.
4,393,828
ROTARY ENGINE
Frank H. Jolly, 1832 Glendale Dr., Areata, Calif. 95521
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,597
Int. a.' F02B 53/08
4,393,829
ROTARY ENGINE
Williani P. Gardiner, Dallas, Tex., assignor to W. G. Slow T. (a
partnership), Dallas, Tex.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,319
Int. a.5 F02B 53/00
U.S. a. 123—249 7 Qaims
U.S. a. 123—203
1 Claim
1. An internally-cooled rotary engine comprising:
two connected housings with hollow chambers therein; said
chambers interconnected by a high temperature fire tube,
said fire tube composed of high temperature material, said
fire tube insulated from said housing by high temperatures
insulation material and air space, said fire tube maintained
at high temperature;
one of said chambers comprising a compression chamber,
said chamber affixed with inlet means for gaseous mixture,
said chamber equipped with a roller rotatably mounted on
an eccentric crank to rotate inside said chamber, said
roller equipped with resilient circular face seals, said
chamber housing a rocking vane dividing said chamber
into separate intake and compression volumes, said rock-
ing vane mounted in said chamber with a shaft, said rock-
ing vane sealed to said roller with a projection shaped to
seal by entrained gas pressure, said rocking vane sealed to
said chamber by resilient seals on face, projection, and
sides, said rocking vane being lightly pressed against said
roller by spring means;
the second of said chambers comprising an expansion cham-
ber affixed with outlet means for expanded gases and
steam, said second chamber equipped with a roller rotat-
ably mounted on an eccentric crank to rotate inside said
chamber, said roller equipped with resilient circular face
seals, said second chamber housing a rocking vane divid-
ing said chamber into separate expansion and exhaust
volumes, said rocking vane mounted in said chamber with
a shaft, said rocking vane sealed to said roller with a
projection shaped to seal by entrained gas pressure, said
rocking vane sealed to said chamber by resilient seals on
face, projection, and sides, said rocking vane being lightly
pressed against said roller by spring means, said second
chamber affixed with inlet control and timing means by a
projection valve on said rocking vane; said second cham-
ber affixed with water injection means by hollow passages
and spray nozzles in said rocking vane, said second cham-
1. A rotary engine comprising:
a casing having a cylindrical bore and a plurality of combus-
tion chambers spaced circumferentially externally of the
bore;
a fuel supply for supplying a combustible fuel mixture;
a drive shaft concentrically received within the bore and jour-
naled for rotation;
a rotor concentrically mounted on said drive shaft and having
a radius less than the radius of the bore, and having a plural-
ity of vane chambers equally spaced circumferentially
around said rotor;
a plurality of first valves spaced circumferentially around the
bore, said first valves alternately establishing and suppress-
ing fluid communication between the bore and the exterior
of said casing;
a plurality of second valves spaced circumferentially around
the bore, said second valves separately and sequentially
establishing and suppressing fiuid communication between
the bore and the combustion chambers, the combustion
chambers and said fuel supply, the exterior of the casing and
the bore, and said fuel supply and the bore, respectively;
a plurality of quadrant dividers equally spaced circumferen-
tially around the bore, said quadrant dividers projecting
radially into the interior of the bore a distance substantially
equal to the difference between the radius of the bore and
the radius of said cylindrical rotor, thereby forming a plural-
ity of arcuate chambers; and
a plurality of cylindrical vanes rotatably received within the
vane chambers and disposed for rolling contact with the
wall of the bore, and each of said vanes having a notch
disposed so that said vanes will roUably contact said quad-
rant dividers while suppressing fluid communication be-
tween adjacent pairs of arcuate chambers.
4,393,830
ACOUSTIC DETONATION SUPPRESSION IN A
CATALYTIC ENVIRONMENT IN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Albert G. Bodine, 7877 Woodley Ave., Van Nuys, Calif. 91406
Filed Jul. 28, 1978, Ser. No. 929,165
Int. a.3 F02B 27/00. 51/02
U.S. a. XH—ni l* claims
1. In an internal combustion engine, having a combustion
chamber and an ante-chamber dimensioned to suppress detona-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
983
tion waves generated in said chamber in fluid communication
with said combustion chamber, the improvement comprising:
catalytic means contained in said ante-chamber for facilitat-
ing the combustion within said combustion chamber.
1. A control system for a mixture-compressing internal com-
bustion engine comprising a carburetor means, an intake mani-
fold means, a throttle valve means disposed in the intake mani-
fold means, and an idle channel means for bypassing the throt-
tle valve means, an additional channel means only forming an
air channel bypasses the carburetor means and throttle valve
means for introducing air into the intake manifold means, the
additional channel means terminates in the intake manifold
means at a position downstream of the idle channel means, first
valve means are provided for controlling a communication
between the additional channel means and the intake manifold
means, the first valve means is located between the throttle
valve means and inlet openings of the internal combustion
engine, a diaphragm means is connected to the valve means for
controlling an opening and closing of the valve means, line
means are interposed between the diaphragm means and the
intake manifold means for enabling an exposing of a side of the
diaphragm means facing away from the first valve means to
intake manifold vacuum, a further valve means, controlled by
intake manifold vacuum, is disposed in the line means for
enabling a venting of the diaphragm means and opening of the
first valve means when the intake manifold vacuum is above an
idle value, during a coasting operation of the engine whereby
the side of the diaphragm means facing away from the first
valve means can be evacuated to activate the first valve means
so that air exclusively flows into the intake manifold through
the air channel means, thereby permitting an introduction of
air into the intake manifold means through the additional chan-
nel means, and means are provided for controlling a position-
ing of the further valve means.
4,393,832
BRAKING DIESEL ENGINES
Olof Samuel, Stockholm, Sweden, and Heikki Hellemaa, Abo,
Finland, assignors to Nordstjernan AB, Stockholm, Sweden
and Oy Warstsila AB, Abo, Finland
per No. PCr/SE80/00245, § 371 Date Jun. 5, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 5, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/0I030, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 16, 1981
PCT Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 276,348
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Oct. 10, 1979, 7908405
Int. C\? F02D 35/00
U.S. a. 123-327 _ 10 Qaims
4,393,831
CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
I ENGINE
Horst Bergitann, Esslingen, and Hans Pracht, Weinstadt, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Daimler-Benz Aktien-
gesellschaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,235
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 10,
1980, 3038233
Int. Q.3 F02D 9/06; F02M 23/08
U.S. Q. 123—323 14 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for controlling he braking action of a
diesel engine having a plurality of combustion chambers in
which pressurized air is supplied tto the combustion chambers
from a source of pressurized air during the compression stroke
of the engine through valve means provided in the combustion
chambers, each valve means having at least one conduit pro-
viding fluid communication between the source of pressurized
air for introducing pressurized air to and discharging air from
the valve means when in an open position, which valve means
is opened by pressurized air supplied through a second conduit
to a piston forming part of said valve means and slideably
positioned in a cylinder located external to the combustion
chamber, the improvement comprising:
a means for controlling the introduction of pressurized air to
and discharge of air from the piston and cylinder, includ-
ing
an electro-magnetic valve placed intermediate the source of
pressurized air and the cylinder, which electro-magnetic
valve is adapted to be slideably moved between an open
position in which air is introduced to the cylinder and a
closed position in which air is discharged from the cylin-
der; and
a means for producing an electrical signal and actuating said
electro-magnetic valve including an electrical transmitter
electrically connected to said electro-magnetic valve, said
transmitter being operatively associated with a means for
transmitting rotational motion of the engine to the trans-
mitter, such that the electro-magnetic valve is briefly
opened at approximately the commencement and conclu-
sion of the compression stroke.
6. In a method for controlling the braking action of a diesel
engine having a plurality of combustion chambers in which
pressurized air is supplied to the combustion chambers from a
source of pressurized air during the compression stroke of the
engine through valve means provided in the combustion cham-
bers, each valve means having at least one conduit providing
fluid communication between the source of pressurized air for
984
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
introducing pressurized air to and discharging air from the
valve means when in an open position, which valve means is
opened by pressurized air supplied through a second conduit to
a piston forming part of said valve means and slideably posi-
tioned in a cylinder located external to the combustion cham-
ber, the improvement comprising:
controlling the introduction of pressurized air to and dis-
charge of air from the piston and cylinder, by driving an
electrical transmitter with a means for transmitting rota-
tional motion of the engine, said electrical transmitter
producing an electrical signal in and actuating an electro-
magnetic valve arranged intermediate the source of pres-
surized air and the cylinder, the electrical signal so pro-
duced causing said electromagnetic valve to open and
admit air to the cylinder, and closing said electromagnetic
valve by terminating the electrical signal and discharging
air from the cylinder, such pressurized air is introduced to
the combustion chambers at approximately the com-
mencement of the compression stroke and air is dis-
charged from the compression stroke at approximately the
end of the compression stroke.
said first electrical position encoder by a certain predeter-
mined amount.
4,393,834
TWO-TEMPERATURE THERMALLY RESPONSIVE
FAST IDLE CONTROL SWITCH
John Doherty, Jr., Assonet, Mass., assignor to Texas Instru-
ments Incorporated, Dallas, Tex.
Division of Ser. No. 216,708, Dec. 15, 1980, Pat. No. 4,350,967.
This application Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,478
Int. Cl.^ F02D ]/04
U.S. a. 123—339 2 Claims
4,393.833
DEVICE FOR THE CONTROL OF THE TRAVELING
SPEED OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
Arnold Mann, Bieber, and Harald Collonia, Konigstein, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to VDO Adolf Schindling
AG, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 86,828, Oct. 22, 1979, Pat. No. 4,313,408,
which is a division of Ser. No. 894,371, Apr. 7, 1978, abandoned.
This application Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,531
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 2,
1977, 2753702; Dec. 2. 1977, 2753703; Dec. 9, 1977, 2754826
Int. a.3 F02D 11/10
U.S. a. 123—335 5 Oaims
M-,
Z^
("
ze-..
^\
U-
-4?1
■as
.^^
■x>
'ZM
■7..
30
-34-
■3&
1. A device for the control of the traveling speed of a motor
vehicle with a regulating unit actuatable by the vehicle driver,
particularly a gas pedal, and means for transmission of the
movement of the same to an element, particularly the throttle
valve, which influences the fuel-air mixture, comprising
a regulating unit,
a first electrical position encoder being coupled with said
regulating unit, said first position encoder having an out-
put with an output signal,
means for influencing the air-fuel mixture of the vehicle,
an electrical adjusting device including a positioning actua-
tor, the latter being connected with said means,
a second electrical position encoder being coupled with said
positioning actuator, said second electrical position en-
coder having an output with an output signal,
an electrical controller including said electrical adjusting
device and having a desired value input connected with
the output of said first electrical position encoder and
having an actual value input connected with the output of
said second electrical position encoder, and wherein
the vehicle includes an ignition circuit, the device further
comprising
means for interrupting the ignition circuit of the motor
vehicle upon a deviation of the output signal of said sec-
ond electrical position encoder from the output signal of
1. A fast idle control system for an automotive engine com-
prising fast idle means, electrically operable control means for
actuating the fast idle means, an electrical power source, and a
thermally responsive electrical switch connected to the power
source and mounted in heat-transfer relation to the engine for
operating the control means to actuate the fast idle means
when the engine is below a first temperature during engine
warm-up, to deactuate the fast idle means when the engine is
heated to said first temperature during normal running of the
engine, and to reactuate the fast idle means when the engine is
heated above a second temperature during extended idling
operation of the engine, characterized in that, the thermally
responsive electrical switch comprises a thermally conducting
housing having a well with an open end and a closed end
mounted in heat transfer relation to the engine, first and second
thermally responsive dished disc elements of thermostat metal
each adapted to move with snap action from an original dished
configuration to an inverted dished configuration at said re-
spective first and second temperatures, said elements being
disposed in the housing well in facing relation to each other
with peripheral portions of the elements aligned with each
other and with one of the elements resting on the closed end of
the well, spacer means disposed between the peripheral por-
tions of the elements, switch means having first and comple-
mentary contact means thereon mounted in the open end of the
housing well, the first contact means being movable between
an open circuit position spaced from the complementary
contact means and a closed circuit position engaging the
contact means, the contact means being electrically connected
to the power source and said control means respectively for
providing a signal to the control means corresponding to the
circuit position of the contact means, and motion transfer
means movably mounted between the other thermally respon-
sive disc element and the first contact means for permitting the
first contact means to be in one of said circuit positions at a
temperature below said first temperature and then to move to
the other circuit position and to return to said one circuit
position in sequence as the engine is successively heated to said
first and second temperatures.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
985
4,393,835
RPM GOVERNOR FOR A FUEL INJECTION PUMP
Franz Eheim, Stuttgart, and Gerald Hofer, Weissach-Flacht,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 81,285, Oct. 2, 1979, Pat. No. 4,325,337.
This application Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,715
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct, 17,
1978, 2845096
Int. a.3 F02D 31/00
U.S. a. 123—357 4 Claims
1. In an rpm governor for a fuel injection pump of an internal
combustion engine which includes
a quantity adjustment means for determining the quantity of
fuel injected, said quantity adjustment means being mov-
able along a predetermined path between a first position at
which a maximum quantity of fuel is injected and a second
position at which a minimum quantity of fuel is injected,
a first shaft,
a governor lever means for positioning said quantity adjust-
ment means, said governor lever means being pivotable
about said first shaft and coupled to said quantity adjust-
ment means,
an rpm adjuster means for exerting a force on said governor
lever means proportional to the rpm of the internal com-
bustion engine,
restoring force means for exerting a force on said governor
lever means counter to the force exerted on said governor
lever means by said rpm adjuster means,
a second shaft having opposite ends defining an axis therebe-
tween, said second shaft being pivotably mounted for
rotation about its axis;
a first pin, disposed eccentrically on said second shaft;
an adjustment lever means, connected to said second shaft
for arbitrary pivotal movement of said second shaft; and
a governor spring, connected at one end to said first pin and
at an opposite end to said governor lever means; and a
rotary electromagnet having an armature which is en-
gaged with said second shaft to vary the setting of said
rpm governor.
4,393,836
SYSTEM FOR THE REGULATION AND CONTROL OF
THE ANGLE OF ADVANCE FOR THE IGNITION UNIT
OF AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Giancarlo De Angelis, Milan; Alberto Catastini, Corsico; Aldo
Bassi; Edoardo Rogora, both of Milan; Dario Radaelli, Leg-
nano; Luciano Bertoloni, Milan, and Francesco Perrone,
Novara, all of Italy, assignors to Alfa Romeo, S.p.A., Milan,
Italy
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,586
Claims priority, application Italy, Sep. 10, 1979, 25585 A/79
Int. a.^ F02D 5/00; F02B 3/10
U.S. a. 12^—417 4 Claims
1. System of regulation and control of an ignition advance
for an ignition unit of an internal combustion engine, the engine
comprising a mainshaft, engine sparking plugs, means for gen-
erating high-voltages, means for distributing said high-voltage
to said sparking plugs according to an explosion sequence, at
least a power stage for driving said high voltage generating
means, said regulation and control system comprising a first
detector of a first engine operative parameter capable of deliv-
ering in a discrete number values provided by said first param-
eter, each of said values comprising a preselected number of
bits; a second detector of a second engine operative parameter
capable of delivering in a discrete number values provide by
said second parameter, each of said values of said second
parameter comprising a preselected number of bits; each com-
bination of the values of said first and second parameters iden-
tifying a preselected operative condition of said engine; a third
detector for detecting a working temperature of said engine
and being capable of delivering in a discrete number values
provided by said working temperature, each of said values of
said working temperature comprising a preselected number
bits; a first pulse generator operatively connected to said en-
gine mainshaft and being capable of delivering at every revolu-
tion of said engine mainshaft a pulse signal comprised of a
number of pulses equal to the number of ignition events which
must be commanded in a revolution of said engine, each of said
pulses having a preselected phase angle relationship relative to
the engine top dead center; a second pulse generator opera-
tively connected to a second engine shaft rotated at a speed
equal to one half the speed of said engine mainshaft and being
capable of delivering a properly phased pulse at every engine
cycle; a central microprocessor unit (C.P.U.); a reading and
writing storage unit (RAM); a plural storage cell reading only
storage unit (ROM) containing calculation programs of said
microprocessor unit, a preselected controlled advance of said
ignition of said engine as a function of said two engine opera-
tive parameters, a preselected control of correction of said
PULSt atN|fl*TO«S
• 1 ' M ' : : 11
t I I I
ERfACfS 1 ,.
SPAnil fLUC3
All Wl 13
15 K I 17 M«M
, I VC]|*ftij|
' arwRAi'M
3*
l^J Uj U.. t , 1 , 1 i , 4 * ' ♦ *
a;-" ;*';J *'-]** ***.♦ ^
N)
46 47 48 49 I SO
nTCRCONNCCTMC iiNE
37
MICROCOMPUTER
ignition advance as a function of said working temperature of
said engine; said storage cells of said storage units (ROM)
relative to said preselected control of ignition advance each
containing an information piece comprised of a preselected
number of bits, the value of which is a function of an angle of
ignition advance of a selected sparking plug relative to said
piston top dead center position in the operative condition
defined by a combination of said values of aforesaid two engine
operative parameters, and all the other engine operative pa-
rameters being considered to be constant; the number of said
storage cells being equal to the number of the possible combi-
nations of values provided by a preselected number of most
significant bits of said first engine operative parameter with
values provided by a preselected number of most significant
bits of said second engine operative parameter; said cells of said
storage unit (ROM) relative to said preselected control of
correction of said ignition advance each containing a piece of
information the value of which is an ignition advance correc-
tion coefficient defined as a function of said values provided by
said engine working temperature; said system comprising at
least one timer operatively connected to said central micro-
processor unit (C.P.U.) and to said at least one power stage;
said centra! microprocessor unit being programmed for gener-
ating an address of said reading only storage (ROM), mcluding
the combination of said preselected number of said first most
significant bits of said value provided by said first engine oper-
ative parameter with said preselected number of said most
significant bits of said value provided by said second engine
operative parameter forming means for:
986
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
identifying by said address that storage cell of said reading
only storage in which is contained a first information of
said angle of ignition advance;
identifying in said reading only storage in addition to said
first information of said angle of ignition advance, three
additional pieces of information of said angle of ignition
advance, each of which pieces of information corresponds
to the contents of said storage cells situated in a predeter-
mined area around said address, each of said three storage
cells being identified by algebraically summing prese-
lected constants to said address;
obtaining from said four pieces of information of said angle
of advance of ignition an information of angle of ignition
advance calculated by an iterative process of interpola-
tion, an elementary operative module of which utilizes a
preselected number of said least significant bits of each of
said first and second engine operative parameters;
identifying in said reading only storage the storage cell
containing said correction coefficient corresponding to
said engine working temperature, and for utilizing said
correction coefficient to modify according to a prese-
lected procedure said calculated angle of ignition advance
information;
calculating from said information of angle of advance of
ignition relative to said piston top dead center position;
corrected for said engine temperature, information of
delay time relative to a first pulse delivered by said first
pulse generator, said information of delay time being
expressed in the form of a number of constant-frequency
pulses;
identifying the sparking plug on which said spark must
occur, through said pulsed signal delivered by said first
pulse generator;
controlling actuating of said power stage of said high volt-
age generating means of said identified sparking plug
utilizing said timer, so that the same high voltage generat-
ing means may start the storage of electricity, the instant
of time of actuation of said power stage being determined
through said pulsed signal delivered by said first pulse
generator; and
controlling the deactuation of said power stage so as to have
said spark occurring on said identified sparking plug as a
function of said delay time utilizing said timer.
ating a knocking signal when the output signal of said first
means is greater than said second predetermined value;
(c) a third means for adjusting the engine spark advance
angle in response to said knocking signal; and
(d) a fourth means for detecting an unstable engine condition
and interrupting operation of said third means in response
thereto,
whereby upon the occurrence of an unstable engine condition
said engine spark advance angle adjustment is suspended.
4,393,838
THERMAL AND VACUUM TRACKING CARBURETOR
JET WITH ELECTRONIC CONTROL
Ralph P. Muscatell, 2007 NE. 20th Ave., Ft. Lauderdale, Fla.
33305
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,247
Int. a.J F02M 7/00, 1/04
U.S. CI. 123—435 5 Qaims
4,393,837
SPARK TIMING CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Kunihiko Sugihara, Takasho, and Michio Onoda, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited,
Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,811
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 6, 1979, 54-100115
Int. a.' F02P 5/04
U.S. a. 123—425 18 Qaims
OfTCCTillC. - - —
ciocwr
-
•iTfCPATiO. I
CiSCW
StCONC
1. A spark ignition timing control system for use with an
internal combustion engine comprising:
(a) a first means for sensing engine vibration magnitude, and
for comparing said sensed vibration magnitude with a first
predetermined value and generating an output signal
when said sensed vibration magnitude is greater than said
first predetermined value;
(b) a second means for comparing the output signal of said
first means with a second predetermined value and gener-
1. In a carburetor, a device for the porportional mixing of
fuel and air for induction into an internal combustion engine,
comprising:
means for defining a fuel chamber;
a fuel mixing conduit having an air inlet at one end, a fuel/air
outlet at the opposite end and a venturi throat between
said inlet and said outlet;
a fuel metering valve operatively arranged to discharge fuel
into said throat;
an orifice operatively connected between said fuel chamber
and said valve to supply fuel to said valve;
a rod and stem adjustable positioned at said orifice to control
the flow of fuel therethrough;
means responsive to the engine manifold vacuum to adjust
said rod and stem in a direction to increase the flow of fuel
to said valve when the engine vacuum diminishes and in
the opposite direction to decrease the flow of fuel to said
valve when the engine vacuum increases;
means responsive to the engine exhaust temperature to ad-
just said rod and stem in a direction to increase the flow of
fuel to said valve when the engine exhaust temperature
increases and in the opposite direction to decrease the
flow of fuel to said valve when the engine exhaust temper-
ature decreases, whereby the richness of the fuel/air mix-
ture is controlled jointly by the engine vacuum and the
engine exhaust temperature;
the improvement wherein:
said temperature responsive means comprises an electric
linear drive motor means for driving said valve member to
control the flow of fuel at said fuel metering valve;
thermistor means electrically responsive to the engine ex-
haust temperature to provide a variable resistance; and
July 19,
983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
987
circuit means including amplifier means coupling said
thermistor means to said electric linear drive motor means
for supplying an electric current to said electric linear
drive motor means which varies in proportion to the
resistance of said thermistor means to provide said bi-
directional movement of said fuel metering valve.
ofTtype electromagnetic valve at said predetermined duty
ratio.
4 J93 839
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING AN AIR-FUEL RATIO
RyiUi Kataoka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Fuji Jukogyo Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Tokyo and Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama,
both of, Japan
Filed Aug. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 174,372
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 2, 1979, 54-98919
Int. a.3 P02M 7/12
U.S. a. 123-440 6 Qaims
4 393 840
FUEL CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AUTOMOBILE ENGINE
Hideki Tanaka, and Kazutoshi Otsuka, both of Hiroshima,
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Kogyo Co., Ltd., Hiroshima, Japan
Filed Aug, 26, 1980, Ser. No. 182,405
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 31, 1979, 54/112252
Int. CV P02B 33/00: F02M 77/00
U.S. Q. 123-440 6 a^„.
Ma - - -i _,
.?,!!?!,„ "« ■"" «»™
SK ^° "** *"* "*" . '"•«*«
^ ' > — ■ - acuiot
'--'^ll.
NulfBHlfli ■^SBIOCS 7 noiii
cmn oMutN
1. In a system for controlling the air-fuel ratio for a carbure-
tor of an internal combustion engine having an induction pas-
sage, a throttle valve in said induction passage, an exhaust
passage, detecting means for detecting the concentration of a
consistent of exhaust gases passing through said exhaust pas-
sage and providing a detecting output signal dependent
thereon, air-fuel mixture supply means for supplying the air-
fuel mixture to the induction passage, including an on-ofl" type
electromagnetic valve for correcting the air-fuel ratio of the
air-fuel mixture supplied by said air-fuel mixture supply means,
the improvement comprising
a comparing circuit means for comparing the detecting
output signal of said detecting means with a reference
value corresponding to a stoichiometric air-fuel ratio
value and for producing a first output signal dependent on
the difference,
an integration circuit means responsive to said first output
signal for producing an integration output signal,
a driving circuit means for producing a driving output for
driving said type on-off type electromagnetic valve de-
pendent on the integration output signal of said integra-
tion circuit means for controlling the air-fuel ratio to a
value approximately equal to the stoichiometric air-fuel
ratio,
a constant signal generating circuit means for producing a
constant signal selectively operating said on-off type elec-
tromagnetic valve at a predetermined duty ratio via said
driving circuit means,
a first switch connecting said integration circuit means with
said driving circuit means,
a second switch connecting said constant signal generating
circuit means with said driving circuit means,
means comprising a vacuum switch in said induction passage
for sensing only such a high vacuum occurring in a rapid
deceleration condition of said engine that would cause
misfiring, and
a switch actuating circuit means responsive to the output of
said vacuum switch for producing a second output signal
for opening said first switch and closing said second
switch, said switch actuating circuit means includes a R.S.
flip-flop output stage and a control circuit input stage
connected to each other, whereby said driving circuit
means is operated by the constant signal from said con-
stant signal generating circuit means for driving said on-
1032 O.G.r-38
1. In an automobile fuel control system for an automobile
internal combustion engine comprising a source of combustible
air-fuel mixture, a mixture intake passage means for supplying
the combustible air-fuel mixture from the mixture source to the
combustion engine, and exhaust passage means including a
catalytic converter which provides simultaneous oxidization of
unbumed fuel and a reduction of nitrogen oxides, said automo-
bile fuel control system including a composition sensor for
detecting the concentration of a particular component of the
exhaust gases emitted from the engine, a mixing ratio control
means including a compensator for compensating for varia-
tions of the air-fuel mixing ratio of the combustible air-fuel
mixture, said mixing ratio control means being operable in
response to an output signal from the composition sensor to
cause the compensator to operate, and an exhaust gas recircu-
lating means including a recirculating passage for communicat-
ing the exhaust passage means to the mixture inuke passage
means and including a control valve means for establishing and
interrupting the communication between the exhaust passage
means and the intake passage means through the recirculating
passage, the improvement which comprises a temperature
detector for detecting the temperature of the engine and for
generating a first temperature signal when the detected tem-
perature of the engine is equal to or higher than a first predeter-
mined value and for generating a second temperature signal
when the detected temperature of the engine subsequently
becomes equal to or higher than a second predetermined value
which is higher than the first predetermined temperature as a
result of warm-up of the engine, said control valve means being
held in position to establish the communication between the
exhaust passage means and the intake passage means in re-
sponse to the generation of the first temperature signal, said
mixing ratio control means being operated in response to the
generation of the second temperature signal to cause the com-
pensator to compensate for variations of the air-fuel mixing
ratio of the combustible air-fuel mixture being supplied to the
engines wherein said air-fuel mixture supplied to said engine is
enriched prior to the generation of said second temperature
signal when said engine is cold started.
988
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,841
DEVICE FOR REGULATING THE FUEL-AIR RATIO IN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Ulrich Drews, Vaihingen; Peter Werner, Wiernsheim, and Wer-
ner Mohrle, Stuttgart, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,760
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 28,
1980, 3024607
Int. a.5 F02B 3/08
U.S. a. 123—440 5 Qaims
4 393 842
AIR/FUEL RATIO CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES, HAVING ATMOSPHERIC
PRESSURE COMPENSATING FUNCTION
Kazuo Otsuka, Higashikurume; Shin Narasaka, Yono, and
Shumpei Hasegawa, Niiza, all of Japan, assignors to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,880
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1980, 55-103315
Int. C1.3 F02B 33/00
U.S. a. 123—440 6 Qaims
CNCIHC
FUEL-IUR , 1
nerfRwc ' t
XVKt
t.-M
!B?sft'
1. A system for regulating the fuel-air mixture ratio being
combusted in an internal combustion engine, the system having
a lambda sensor having an internal resistance;
a regulating device connected to the internal combustion
engine to regulate the fuel-air ratio;
a regulating circuit for controlling said regulating device;
a monitoring circuit connected to said lambda sensor for
generating a signal indicating lambda sensor readiness as a
function of said internal resistance; said monitoring circuit
including:
a resistor connected at a first end to said lambda sensor and
connected at a second end to said monitoring circuit for
generating a resultant voltage at the first end of said resis-
tor;
two comparator devices having different threshold values
which are connected to said lambda sensor to receive said
resultant voltage and to compare said resultant voltage to
said respective threshold values and to thereby generate
respective output signals indicative of said comparison;
a logic processing circuit connected to receive said outputs
of said two comparator devices for producing an output;
an evaluation circuit connected to receive said logic process-
ing circuit output and connected to said regulating circuit
for generating a lambda sensor readiness signal to operate
said regulating device and a lambda sensor non-readiness
signal to shut off said regulating device whereby said
system is switched to open-loop control according to said
logic processing circuit output, said system further includ-
ing:
a voltage source connected to said monitoring circuit;
a first voltage divider connected across said voltage
source;
a second voltage divider, connected parallel to said first
voltage divider and having a pickup-point; and
wherein said resistor has a high resistance value and con-
nects said pickup-point with said lambda sensor.
1. An air/fuel ratio control system for performing feedback
control of the air/fuel ratio of a mixture being supplied to an
internal combustion engine, which comprises: an O2 sensor for
detecting the concentration of oxygen present in exhaust gases
emitted from said engine; fuel quantity adjusting means for
producing said mixture being supplied to said engine; and an
electrical circuit operatively connecting said O2 sensor with
said fuel quantity adjusting means in a manner effecting feed-
back control operation in response to an output signal pro-
duced by said O2 sensor to control the air/fuel ratio of said
mixture to a first predetermined preset value, said electrical
circuit including means for interrupting said feedback control
operation when said engine comes into a predetermined oper-
ating condition, means responsive to said interruption of said
feedback control operation to control said fuel quantity adjust-
ing means so as to obtain an air/fuel ratio of said mixture equal
to a second predetermined preset value corresponding to said
predetermined engine operating condition irrespective of the
value of the output signal of said O2 sensor, and means for
correcting said second predetermined preset value as a func-
tion of atmospheric pressure.
4 393 843
AIR-FUEL RATIO FEEDBACK CONTROL SYSTEM FOR
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES, HAVING
FUNCnON OF CORRECTING POSTHON OF AIR/FUEL
RATIO CONTROL VALVE ACTUATOR
Kazuo Otsuka, Higashikurume; Shin Narasaka, Yono, and
Shumpei Hasegawa, Niiza, all of Japan, assignors to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,528
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 7, 1980, 55-108507
Int. Q.3 F02M 7/18
U.S. Q. 123—440 2 Qaims
1. In an air/fuel ratio feedback control system for perform-
ing feedback control of the air/fuel ratio of an air/fuel mixture
being supplied to an internal combustion engine, which in-
cludes means for detecting the concentration of an exhaust gas
ingredient emitted from the engine, fuel quantity adjusting
means for producing the mixture being supplied to said engine,
means operatively connecting said concentration detecting
means with said fuel quantity adjusting means in a manner
effecting feedback control operation to control the air/fuel
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
989
ratio of said mixture to be a predetermined value, said connect-
ing means comprising an electrical circuit, valve means for
varying the air/fuel ratio of said mixture, and a pulse motor
arranged to be controlled by said electrical circuit for driving
said valve means, the combination comprising position detect-
ing means for producing an output when said pulse motor is at
a predetermined reference position which is set within a mov-
able range of said pulse motor, a memory storing a value indic-
ative of said predetermined reference position for said pulse
motor, a first register responsive to an output signal of said
concentration detecting means, indicative of the concentration
of said exhaust gas ingredient, to make accessible a predeter-
mined desired value for said pulse motor, a second register
storing a value indicative of an actual position of said pulse
motor, means for driving said pulse motor until said actual
position value in said second register becomes equal to said
predetermined desired value, and means responsive to said
output of said position detecting means to cause shifting of said
predetermined reference p>osition value stored in said memory
to said second register to replace the value stored in the latter
by said predetermined reference position value.
4,393,844
LIQUID FUEL PUMPING APPARATUS
Robert T. J. Skinner, High Wycombe, England, assignor to
Lucas Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 153,780, May 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application Nov. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 439,815
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 6, 1979,
7923685
1 1 Int. Q.3 F04B 23/10. 19/02
U.S. Q. 123-^-450 1 Qaim
1. A liquid fuel injection pumping apparatus for supplying
fuel to an internal combustion engine and comprising a body
part which defines a cavity, a rotary distributor member lo-
cated in the body part and arranged in use, to be driven in
timed relationship with the associated engine, a transverse bore
formed in the distributor member, a pair of plungers in the
bore, the outer end of said plungers being exposed within said
cavity, a delivery passage extending from said bore to a first
axial position on the periphery of the distributor member, an
outlet in the body part positioned to register with the delivery
passage during inward movement of the plungers as the distrib-
utor member rotates and while the delivery passage is in com-
munication with the outlet, a supply passage in the distributor
member, said supply passage communicating with the bore and
extending to a second axial position on the periphery of the
distributor member which is axially spaced from said first
position, a supply port formed in the body part for communica-
tion with said supply passage during at least part of the time
between successive inward movements of the plungers, a
source of fuel under pressure, an adjustable throttle through
which fuel from the source can flow to the supply port, a
further port formed in the body part, said further port being
positioned at said first axial position for registration with said
delivery passage during at least part of the time said supply
port is in communication with said supply passage whereby a
fiow of fuel together with any air, can take place along the
supply passage, along the delivery passage and through said
further port, and valve means for pressurizing fuel leaking into
said cavity whereby when said throttle is closed to prevent fuel
fiow to said bore, said plungers will be moved inwardly their
maximum extent to prevent actuation thereof by said cam
means.
4,393,845
MEANS FOR IMPROVING THE EFHCIENCY OF AN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
William R. Seitz, Royal Oak, Mich., assignor to The Bendix
Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Apr. 3, 1978, Ser. No. 892,722
Int. Cl.^ F02D 5/02
U.S. Q. 123—478 n Qaims
* mo NOLO I
AJ~
]"
1. In an internal combustion engine having means for con-
trolling the speed thereof and having an electronic fuel injec-
tion system which meters fuel to the engine in proportion to
the width of pulses applied to engine fuel injectors, said fuel
injection system establishing the width of said fuel injector
pulses as a function of ambient engine operating parameters,
wherein the improvement comprises:
means for increasing the efficiency of operation of said
engine including;
means for varying in either a positive or negative sense the
width of said fuel injector pulses established by said fuel
injection system;
means for maintaining the speed of said engine constant;
means providing a quantity proportional to the width of said
injector pulses;
means for periodically sampling and storing said quantity;
means for comparing an instantaneous value of said quantity
with said stored value of said quantity to determine which
of said compared values is of greater magnitude; and
means for reversing the sense of pulse width variation pro-
duced by said pulse width varying means whenever said
comparing means indicates that the sense of change in said
pulse width is in the direction of increased fuel consump-
tion by said engine.
990
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4393 846 4^93,847
FUEL PUMPING APPARATUS LOW PRESSURE SEALING ARRANGEMENT FOR A
Dorian F. Mowbray, Burnham; Ivor Fenne, Greenford, and Eric J^F:, '^JECTOR ,. ^ . ^„„
J. Cavanagh, Surbiton, aU of England, assignors to Lucas Charles W. May, Cedar Falls, Iowa, assignor to Deere A Com-
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England pany, Moline, III.
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,269 Filed Mar. 25, 1982, Ser. No 361,680
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 15, 1980, Int. Q.^ F02M 47/02
8005266 ^'S- ^- 123—502 5 c aims
Int. a.3 F02M 59/20
U.S. a. 123— 502 4aaims _
1. A fuel pumping apparatus for supplying fuel to an internal
combustion engine comprising an injection pump operable in
use in timed relationship with an associated engine, fluid pres-
sure operable means for adjusting the timing of delivery of fuel
by the apparatus comprising a member against a surface of
which fluid under pressure can act, and resilient means oppos-
ing the movement of the member by said fluid pressure, a low
pressure fuel supply pump for supplying fuel to the injection
pump, an adjustable throttle for varying the quantity of fuel
supplied to the injection pump, a transducer associated with
the throttle valve for providing a first signal indicative of the
effective flow area of the throttle valve throughout the range
of movement thereof, an electrical circuit which receives said
first signal, a second signal indicative of the speed of operation
of the apparatus and a third signal indicative of the fuel pres-
sure upstream of the metering valve and from which is deter-
mined a fourth signal representing the amount of fuel supplied
to the injection pump, means responsive to at least said second
and fourth signals for providing a fifth signal to vary the timing
of delivery of fuel by the apparatus, an error amplifier to which
said fifth signal is supplied, a further transducer for providing
a sixth signal representative of the position of said fluid pres-
sure operable means, said sixth signal being supplied to said
error amplifier, an actuator responsive to the output of said
error amplifier for controlling the pressure applied to said fluid
pressure operable means, said actuator controlling the size of a
restrictor through which fluid under pressure from a source is
applied to said surface, said source of fluid pressure being said
low pressure fuel supply pump and including a branch passage
from downstream of said restrictor and through which fuel is
supplied to the injection pump under the control of said throt-
tle valve.
1. A low pressure sealing arrangement for a fuel injector
comprising:
(a) a housing containing a cylindrical barrel therein and
having an annular cavity formed between an inner surface
of said housing and an outer surface of said barrel, said
barrel also having a bore formed therein;
(b) a plunger and a piston spaced therefrom, said plunger and
piston being positioned within said bore for axial move-
ment;
(c) a nozzle situated at one end of said bore remote from said
plunger for releasing fuel into a combustion chamber of an
engine;
(d) a timing chamber defined in said bore between said
plunger and said piston being adapted to receive pressur-
ized fluid for creating a coupling between said plunger
and said piston;
(e) a metering chamber defined in said bore between said
piston and said nozzle;
(0 passages formed in said housing and said barrel for receiv-
ing pressurized fluid and transmitting said fluid into said
timing chamber, into said metering chamber and into
opposite ends of said annular cavity;
(g) control means for varying the flow of pressurized fluid
through one of said passages and into one of said annular
cavity;
(h) a pressure activated valve arranged in said annular cavity
and movable by fluid pressure between an open position
permitting fluid flow from said pressurized source into
said timing chamber and a closed position preventing fluid
flow from said pressurized source to said timing chamber;
(i) a cylindrical sleeve concentrically arranged about said
pressure activated valve within said annular cavity for
providing a first low pressure seal against an outer surface
of said pressure activated valve; and
0) means for axially urging an end of said cylindrical sleeve
against a surface of said annular cavity to provide a second
low pressure seal therewith, said first and second seals
preventing leakage of fuel from said timing chamber dur-
ing periods of increased pressure while permitting rapid
movement of said pressure activated valve between said
open and closed position with a minimal amount of drag
forces acting thereon.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
991
4,393,848
CONTROL MECHANISM FOR SELECTIVELY
OPERATING AN INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
ON TWO FUELS
Arthur G. Poehlman, Oconomowoc, Wis., assignor to Outboard
Marine Corporation, Waukegan, HI.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,225
I Int. a.J F02M 21/02
U.S. a. Il3— 5
ionization of fuel supplied to the second cylinder prior to
explosion of the fuel-air mixture in the second cylinder, said
variable ignition distributor being usable with a distributor cap
connected to an ignition coil and connected to the spark plugs
in the first and the second cylinders and comprising:
a rotor disposed within the distributor cap;
~-»
-525
6 Claims
^-^
1. Apparatus for controlling operation of an internal com-
bustion engine which is selectively operable using gaseous fuel
or liquid fuel, said apparatus comprising a gaseous fuel supply
line extending between the engine and a source of gaseous fuel,
a liquid fuel supply line extending between the engine and a
source of liquid fuel, and means for controlling supply to the
engine of the gaseous fuel and the liquid fuel, said control
means including an operator controlled fuel selector switch
movable between a gaseous fuel position and a liquid fuel
position, said control means being operable following prior
engine operation with gaseous fuel and in response to move-
ment of said fuel selector switch from said gaseous fuel position
to said liquid fuel position for permitting liquid fuel flow
through said liquid fuel supply line, for permitting continued
gaseous fuel flow through said gaseous fuel supply line until
initiation of liquid fuel combustion, and for thereafter prevent-
ing further gaseous fuel flow through said gaseous fuel supply
line until repositioning of said fuel selector switch to said
gaseous fuel position, said control means also being operable
following prior engine operation with liquid fuel and in re-
sponse to movement of said fuel selector switch from said
liquid fuel position to said gaseous fuel position for preventing
further liquid fuel flow through said liquid fuel supply line, for
preventing gaseous fuel flow through said gaseous fuel supply
line until termination of liquid fuel combustion, and for thereaf-
ter permitting gaseous fuel flow through said gaseous fuel
supply line until repositioning of said fuel selector switch to
said liquid fuel position.
an ignition electrode carried by said rotor for transferring a
high voltage spark from the ignition coil to the spark plug
in the first cylinder;
circuit means responsive to transfer of said high voltage
spark for generating a low voltage spark; and
a variable electrode carried by said rotor for transferring
said low voltage spark to the second cylinder.
4,393,850
IGNITION SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Minoru Nishida; Tadashi Hattori, and Akira Tanaka, all of
Okazaki, Japan, assignors to Nippon Soken, Inc., Nishio,
Japan
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,516
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 10, 1980, 55/95887
Int. aj F02P 15/02. 15/10 15/00
U.S. a. 123—536 9 Oaims
21
Ba
i - —
oumoN
SIMAL
QEICRAraR
CCl.
CONTKX.
C«CUT
KM
u^
ouTPin
cfnjT
4,393,849
VARIABLE IGNITION DISTRIBUTOR
Kim J. Sae, 11-43 Daebang-Dong, Dongjak-Gu, Seoul, Rep. of
Korea
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,174
Qaims priority, application Rep. of Korea, May 10, 1980,
80-1843[U]
Int. a.i P02M 27/04: P02P 15/00
U.S. a. 123—536 11 Qaims
1. A variable ignition distributor for furnishing a high-volt-
age spark to a spark plug in a first cylinder to initiate an explo-
sion of a fuel-air mixture therein and for furnishing a low
voltage spark to a spark plug in a second cylinder to enhance
engine
22
1. An ignition system for an internal combustion
having a plurality of spark plugs comprising:
an ignition coil including a primary coil and a secondary coil
for generating a secondary voltage including a high volt-
age generated by interruption of a primary coil current,
said secondary voltage reaching a dielectric breakdown
voltage of a gap between discharge electrodes of any one
of said spark plugs to cause a capacitive discharge therebe-
tween;
a DC high voltage generating circuit for generating a DC
992
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
high voltage which is, in absolute value magnitude, lower
than the dielectric breakdown voltage and higher than a
voltage required to sustain discharge between the dis-
charge electrode gap during a predetermined time interval
from before occurrence of the capacitive discharge to a
predetermined time or a predetermined crank angle there-
after;
said DC high voltage generating circuit including memory
means for storing a plurality of predetermined time peri-
ods corresponding to a plurality of engine conditions and
for generating a signal indicative of one of said time peri-
ods in response to a detected engine condition, and a
circuit responsive to said output signal of said memory
means to determine said predetermined time interval after
the beginning of the capacitive discharge, whereby the
time of interrupting said DC high voltage is determined in
dependence on the detected engine condition;
an output circuit for selectively applying one of the second-
ary voltage and the DC high voltage to the discharge
electrode gap in accordance with relative levels of both
voltages; and
an ignition coil control circuit for controlling supply and
interruption of the primary coil current.
433,852
UNKAGE MECHANISM FOR SUPERCHARGER
SYSTEM
Robert C. Merritt, Coming, N.Y., and Gerald L. TerwUliger,
Wixom, Mich., assignors to Eaton Corporation, Oeveland,
Ohio
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Set. No. 214,305
Int. a.3 F02B 33/44; F02D 23/00
U.S. a. 123—564 21 Qaims
4,393,851
DIESEL FUEL TEMPERATURE CONTROLLING
APPARATUS
Marc S. Gorans, Willmar, Minn., assignor to Phillips Temro,
Inc., Eden Prairie, Minn.
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,917
Int. a.3 F02M 31/00
U.S. CI. 123—557 14 Claims
1. In an induction system including an inlet receiving air, an
outlet adapted to deliver the air to an expansible combustion
chamber of an engine, first and second air flow paths con-
nected in parallel between the inlet and outlet, a supercharger
interposed in the second path; the improvement comprising:
valve means including a valving member and means respon-
sive to differential pressure between the inlet and outlet,
said valving member moveable between open and closed
positions to control air flow in said first path for regulating
said differential pressure between a minimum and a maxi-
mum pressure, and
said pressure responsive means operative to move said valv-
ing member toward said first position to decrease said
differential pressure in response to said outlet pressure
exceeding said maximum pressure.
.^FUEL
WATER,
OUT
RADIATOR
WATER
4 393 853
EXHAUST GAS REORCULATION TYPE INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES AND METHOD OF
OPERATING SAME
WUliam N. Groves, Rapid Oty, S. Dak., assignor to Research
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,798
Int. a.3 F02M 25/06
U.S. a. 123—568 6 Oaims
1. Apparatus for controlling the temperature of liquid fuel
flowing in a fuel supply line while maintaining the same in
liquid form comprising:
(a) fuel conduit structure having fuel inlet and outlet pas-
sages;
(b) a fuel-heating heat exchanger having heat exchange
surfaces which define a fuel passageway connected in fuel
communicating relation with said inlet and outlet pas-
sages;
(c) fluid conduit means defining a bypass passageway com-
municating with said inlet and outlet passages and effec-
tive to bypass fuel from said fuel conduit structure
through said heat exchanger;
(d) thermostatic valve means for modulating the flow of
such fuel through said passageways in response to temper-
ature of unmixed and unhealed bypassed fuel in said fuel
conduit structure; and
(e) said valve means being constructed and arranged within
said fuel conduit structure to direct the flow of fuel
through said conduit structure when the fuel supply enter-
ing said inlet is warm and through said fluid conduit means
and said heat exchanger when the fuel supply entering
said inlet is cold.
^^ ^'CRANKSHAFT
1
1. In a multi-cylinder internal combustion engine having a
fuel and an air source connected to each cylinder via a substan-
tially centrally located intake valve means in each cylinder;
means for stratifying a combustible fuel/air mixture and ex-
haust gas in the cylinder during the intake stroke, said means
for stratifying comprising:
(a) fuel/air mixture swirling means for each cylinder;
(b) at least one inlet port in each cylinder open to each
cylinder from about 60° BBDC to about 60° ABDC;
(c) conduit means connecting each said at least one inlet port
with a source of pressurized exhaust gas;
(d) said source of pressurized exhaust gas comprising the gas
exhausting from the cylinder 360° apart on the firing order
of the engine;
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
993
(e) means for causing the exhaust gas to swirl in each cylin-
der in the same direction as the swirl of the air/fuel mix-
ture.
4,393,854
MIXING UNIT
Maurice Tacquet, 14 AUee dcs Pres, F-59650 Villeneuve d'Ascq,
France
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,519
Oaims priority, application France, Feb. 19, 1980, 80 04386
Int. a.3 F02B 7/00
U.S. a. 123-576 5 Qaims
1. An apparatus for supplying fuel to a combustion device,
comprising in combination:
(a) a first tank for storing light fuel;
(b) a second tank for storing heavy fuel;
(c) a third tank;
(d) a first conduit connecting said first tank with said third
tank for supplying light fuel from said first tank to said
third tank;
(e) a second conduit connecting said second tank with said
third tank for supplying heavy fuel from said second tank
to said third tank;
(0 a third conduit connecting said third tank with said com-
bustion device for supplying fuel from said third tank to
said combustion device;
(g) a fourth conduit connecting said combustion device with
said third tank for returning excess fuel from said combus-
tion device to said third tank;
(h) a pump in said third conduit for driving fuel through said
third and fourth conduits; said pump having an output
flow rate that is greater than the rate of fuel consumption
of said combustion device;
(i) a first valve in said first conduit for controlling the fuel
flow therethrough;
(j) a second /alve in said second conduit for controlling the
fuel flow therethrough;
(k) a viscosity sensing means connected to said fourth con-
duit for sensing the viscosity of the fuel flowing there-
through and
(1) control means connecting said viscosity sensing means
with at least one of said valves for changing the ratio of
the rates of fuel flowing in said first and second conduits
in response to signals from said viscosity sensing means for
maintaining the viscosity of the fuel in said third tank and
in said third conduit at a predetermined value.
4 393 855
CORRECnNG DEVICEFOR THE COMBUSTION OF
ENGINES OF VEHICLES DURING TRANSITIONAL
PHASES OF OPERATION
Andre Mandar, Creteil; Jules Fressard, Paris, and Martine
Mandar, Versailles, all of France
per No. PCr/FR80/00058, § 371 Date Dec. 11, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 11, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02179, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 16, 1980
PCT Filed Apr. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 220,040
Int. a.3 P02M 23/04
U.S. a. 123-587 10 Qaims
O ,*- O 13
ft.OH ■*«••• Ol.
= ii
1. A device for correcting the combustion of internal com-
bustion engines which are subjected to frequent changes in
speed of rotation and loads, in particular automobile engines,
each internal combustion engine having an intake manifold for
directing a mixture of air and fuel to an engine comprising a
first sealed chamber directly connected to said intake manifold,
a second sealed chamber separated from the first chamber by a
diaphragm having a neutral position, said second chamber
being connected to the first chamber, through passage means
for delaying transmission of pressure variations from the first
chamber to the second chamber, control means for reducing
the fuel to air ratio of said air and fuel mixture, said control
means being coupled to said diaphragm for activation by said
diaphragm whenever the differential pressure between the
second and first chambers exceeds a first predetermined value
and also whenever the differential pressure between the first
and second chambers exceeds a second predetermined value,
whereby the fuel to air ratio is reduced during acceleration and
deceleration transitory phrases of the engine.
4,393,856
APPARATUS FOR MILLING BUILDING BLOCKS
Siegfried Gebhart, Tobelstadel, D-7971 Aitrach-Aichstetten,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,535
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 13,
1980, 3009615
Int. a.^ B28D 1/18
U.S. a. 125—3 16 Oaims
' b'-'«1j2 21 it
\i
t^Trrllf^
1. Apparatus for milling building blocks at opposite first and
second sides in two steps, comprising in combination:
first means for milling said blocks at said first side thereof in
a first one of said steps;
second means for milling said blocks at said second side
thereof in the second one of said two steps;
third means located between said first and second means for
accelerating said blocks in a direction of transportation of
the blocks after said milling at said first side; and
994
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
fourth means legated between one of said first and second
means and said third means for turning said blocks by 180°
for said milling at a second side thereof;
said fourth means including a box having opposite open
ends, with one open end providing an entrance for blocks
and the other open end an exit for the blocks, and means
including a frame for mounting the box for rotation by
said 180* about an axis of rotation parallel to said direction
of transportation of the blocks.
a porportional control valve for proportionally controlling
the supply of the fuel to the combustion unit;
a temperature sensor for detecting the temperature of a fluid
heated with the heat of combustion produced by the
combustion unit; and
a control circuit comprising a bridge circuit including the
temperature sensor as a component thereof, a proportional
integrating differentiating circuit comprising a propor-
tional differentiating circuit including an operation ampli-
fier and a proportional integrating circuit including an
433,857
collapsibl&c;rill
Richard Sanford, Rte. 2, Potsdam, N.Y. 13676
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,915
Int. a.^ F24C 1/16
U.S. a. 126—9 R 9 Oaims
^^t=4-
f^'
S'
r
■VW"—
>/7
tr
^:i
-It
1. A collapsible grid comprising:
(1) a pair of flexible cables;
(2) a plurality of rigid rods fastened at one end of each rod in
ordered sequence beginning with a first rod at one end of
one cable and continuing to a second rod at the other end
of the one cable, and each remaining rod fastened at the
other end to the other cable in like sequence with the first
rod at one end of the cable and continuing to the second
rod at the other end of the sequence, said second rod
having a degree of flexibility;
(3) a pair of bars each connected at one end of the bar to one
end of the first rod, said first rod having means near each
of its ends to capture the bars between the respective cable
and the said means;
(4) said bars each having a receiving hook to removably
receive the second of said rod members, and said second
bar having a pair of detent means respectively to receive
said hooks; and
whereby when the hooks receive and engage the second bar
member, the rods are under compression and the cables
are under tension by spring action of the second bar to
spread the rods into an array useful as a grill, and whereby
when said rods are disengaged from the hooks the grill is
collapsed, the bars and rods may be rolled up and retained
by the cable to form a bundle.
operation amplifier and an integration capacitor, the pro-
portional integrating differentiating circuit being adapted
to receive an output from the bridge circuit representative
of a deviation of the fluid temperature from a first temper-
ature setting and to give a drive output to the proportional
control valve, and a discharging circuit including a com-
parator for comparing an output from the differentiating
circuit with a second temperature setting and adapted to
cause discharge of a charge from the integration capacitor
when the comparison in the comparator indicates that the
fluid temperature exceeds a specified level.
4,393,859
SOLAR COLLECTOR ROOF
Gabor Marossy, and Warren E. Mueller, both of Middletown,
Ohio, assignors to Annco Inc., Middletown, Ohio
Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122,583
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—429 35 Oaims
^«
4,393,858
COMBUSTION CONTROL SYSTEM
Keiichi Mori, Izumiohtsu; Yasukiyo Ueda, and Keyiro Mori,
both of Nara, all of Japan, assignors to MatsushiU Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 100,529
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 11, 1978, 53-153498;
Dec. 11, 1978, 53-153499; Dec. 12, 1978, 53-153926
Int. a.J F24H 1/00
VS. a. 126—351 5 Claims
1. A combustion control system comprising:
a combustion unit for a fuel;
1. In a building structure of the type having a roof construc-
tion including a plurality of spaced rafters supporting a plural-
ity of spaced generally parallel transversely extending purhns
and a plurality of interiocking rigid metallic roof panels posi-
tioned on and extending between said puriins, each of said
panels having a central planar portion and a web extending
upwardly along opposite edges of the planar portion, each of
the webs being configured to interlock with a web of an adjoin-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
995
ing panel to form a channel-like rib, said ribs extending in
generally parallel fashion between the ridge and eave of the
roof, the improvement in combination therewith comprising
means for converting said roof construction to a solar collector
for converting solar energy impinging thereon to thermal
energy including:
glazing means defined by a solar radiation transmissive sheet
overlying the outer surface of the roof construction in
spaced relationship therewith and being supported by said
ribs at spaced points to form a plurality of duct-like air
passageways between the lower surface of the solar radia-
tion transmissive sheet and the central planar portion of
the roof panels, the sides of said air passageways being
formed by the inside surfaces of the channel-like ribs
adjoining said central planar portion, said air passageways
extending generally between the eave and ridge of the
roof structure;
means associated with the upper surface of said central
planar portion for converting solar radiation impinging
thereon to thermal energy within the air passageway;
means for attaching said solar radiation transmissive sheet to
said ribs to maintain the sheet in spaced relationship with
said central planar portion comprising an elongated hat
section including a planar portion and leg portions de-
pending downwardly from the outer edges of said planar
portion, said sheet being secured between said hat section
and said rib, the lower ends of said leg portions operating
to space the sheet from the roof surface;
inlet means for introducing air into one end of the air pas-
sageway; and
outlet means for exhausting heated air from the opposite end
of the air passageway for use in the building structure
interior such that air moves in a single direction between
inlet and outlet within said passageway in contact with the
upper surface of the panel and the lower surface of the
solar radiation transmissive sheet, whereby a solar collec-
tor may be formed by using the roof surface as the solar
fadiation absorbing surface.
27. A method for constructing a solar roof to supply supple-
mental heated air to an existing building structure by retrofit-
ting an existing conventional roof construction associated with
the building of the type having a plurality of spaced rafters
supporting a plurality of spaced generally parallel transversely
extending metallic purlins and a plurality of interlocking rigid
metallic roof panels positioned on and extending between said
purlins, each of said panels having a central planar portion and
a web extending upwardly along opposite edges of said planar
portion, each of the webs being configured to interlock with a
web of an adjoining panel to form a channel-like rib, said ribs
extending in generally parallel fashion between the ridge and
eave of the roof, said method comprising the steps of:
attaching to said ribs by means of a hat section including a
planar portion and leg portions depending downwardly
from the outer edges of the planar portion a solar radiation
transmissive sheet such that the sheet is secured between
the hat portion and the rib with the lower ends of the leg
portions positioning the sheet in spaced overlying rela-
tionship with the outer surface of the roof construction to
form a plurality of duct-like air passageways positioned
between the lower surface of the solar radiation transmis-
sive sheet and the central planar portion of the roof panels
with the inside surfaces of the channel-like ribs adjoining
the central planar portion of the roof panel forming the
sides of the air passageway, said air passageways extend-
ing generally between the eave and ridge of the roof
structure, the central planar portion of the panel serving as
a solar radiation absorbing surface; and
supplying means for introducing air into one end of the air
passageways and for removing heated air from the oppo-
site end of the air passageways for use within the building
structure interior such that air moves in a single direction
between inlet and outlet within said passageway in contact
with the upper surface of the panel and the lower surface
of the solar radiation transmissive sheet.
433,860
SOLAR HEAT COLLECTING APPARATUS
Paul M. French, 12 James St., Seekonk, Mass. 02771
Filed Not. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,729
Int a.J F24J 3/02
VJS. a. 126-429 1 Qaim
1. A hot air type solar heat-collecting apparatus comprising
(a) an upwardly extending outer door panel fitted into a wall
of a building within a frame with openings therethrough at
different vertical levels, said panel being so oriented as to
receive the rays of the sun,
(b) a heat-collecting plate having a subsUntialiy black coat-
ing over its surface spaced from said panel and covering
said openings and forming with said panel a closed heat
chamber except for said openings,
(c) a heat trap cover capable of passing sun's heating rays
covering said plate whereby the sun's rays will pass
through said cover and impinge upon said plate and heat
air in said chamber.
4,393,861
APPARATUS FOR THE UTILIZATION OF SOLAR
ENERGY
Buddy M. Beard, 2856 Janelle, and Joe M. Beard, 822 E. York
Way, both of Sparks, Nev. 89431
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 82,813, Oct. 9, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,549
Int. a.' F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—436 16 Qaims
1. A system for heating an interior space of a building, the
system comprising:
collector wall structure formed from a concrete material and
having a generally interior-facing surface, an opposed
exterior surface, and a plurality of apertures communicat-
ing the interior-facing and exterior surfaces to one an-
other;
an exterior panel formed from a material transparent to solar
energy, a first interior panel, and means for respectively
mounting said exterior and first interior panels in spaced
relation to the exterior and interior-facing surfaces of the
collector wall structure to form first air passages compris-
ing spacing between the exterior panel and the exterior
surface, the first interior panel and the interior-facing
surface and the plurality of apertures;
storage wall structure formed from a concrete material and
having a second interior-facing surface, a second interior
panel, and means for mounting the second interior panel
to the second interior-facing surface to form at least a
second air passage therebetween;
conduit means intercoupling the first and second air passages
996
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
for communicating air from the first air passages to the
second air passage; and
is assembled; wherein each of said ducts is closed except
for duct openings at each end thereof; and
b. a first manifold chamber separate and distinct from said
heating chamber to be disposed at one end of said set of
ducts when said kit is assembled; a second manifold cham-
ber separate and distinct from said heating chamber to be
disposed at the other end of said set of ducts; wherein said
first manifold chamber vertically extends from above said
base down through a hole in said base adjacent said one
end of said ducts when said kit is assembled; wherein said
second manifold chamber vertically extends from above
said base down through a hole in said base adjacent said
other end of said set of ducts when said kit is assembled;
wherein said first manifold chamber includes an aperture
in its side through which said set of ducts horizontally
extend when kit is assembled; wherein said second mani-
fold chamber includes an aperture in its side through
which said set of ducts horizontally extend when said kit
is assembled; wherein said first and second manifold
chambers each include an open-topped compartment and
a lid therefor; wherein said compartment includes a pro-
truding lip segment adjacent its open top; wherein said lid
overlies said open top and lip segment when said kit is
assembled; wherein said lip and overlying lid define said
aperture in said manifolds through which the open ends of
said ducts extend when said kit is assembled and wherein
said heating chamber and manifolds are detached from
said glazing and glazing support when said kit is assem-
bled.
air moving means operably coupled to the conduit means for
moving air from the first air passages to the second pas-
sage and back again via the conduit means.
4,393,863
EXTRAVASCULAR ORCULATION OF OXYGENATED
SYNTHETIC NUTRIENTS TO TREAT TISSUE HYPOXIC
AND ISCHEMIC DISORDERS
JeweU L. Osterholm, Radnor, Pa., assignor to Thomas Jefferson
University, Philadelphia, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 139,886, Aug. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,378,797.
This application Jun. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 275,116
Int. a.^ A61K 31/00; A61M 5/14
U.S. a. 128—1 R 18 Claims
4,393,862
SOLAR AIR DUCT
Douglas A. Wilke, Glen Head, N.Y., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of Agricul-
ture, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 193,581
Int. a.3 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126-448 2 Claims
J^
.RKSIKl
t^ HOUHt •-
«_.
PKSSUDElFlOll*
M1E MMITM
nnwi i Hum
onccMin
- WOTI-CO
WMTm.caina.
lENPEMTIME
MUUSTWIIT
riWTOTiiiir
WMiM.cania
„ FUTRtTm t
rfe
3
14
■T
4a
T
SjtHMAliMnN
canmi
«UIIII
WTKIT
EDtHSOl
FLOtUTE
FUESSUHE
IEIlPtR«TUK
L«CIIC ACID
OnCENICO,
«IWWI«
EMMS
SOMM'KITtSRM
WLOWn CELLS
NTUOlK PMWCTS
aauM caracin
rasoK.En:
— »
T-
I
[ivym
DUCMSTIC FLUID
I
L'r--jr.=3««i-»rLr-.='=-rr=.'=rarm.«
.--Sltiin t ._^
— KCOBirWH —
.^_-Jj
13
~ 4a
1. In an apparatus for heating air with solar energy, wherein
said air is heated in a chamber disposed below a glazing and
surrounded by glazing support structure, the improvement
wherein said apparatus comprises a kit capable of on-site as-
sembly upon a planar-shaped base, and wherein said kit in-
cludes:
a. at least one prefabricated heating chamber to be placed
upon said base, said chamber consisting essentially of a set
of elongated, hollow, flat, straight, sheet-metal ducts,
which lie flat, side-by-side, above said base when said kit
1. A method of treating hypoxic-ischemic neurologic tissue,
in mammals, comprising:
(a) providing a physiologically acceptable synthetic ox-
ygenatable fluid;
(b) oxygenating said oxygenatable fluid to produce an oxy-
genated fluid;
(c) injecting a substantially continuous stream of said oxy-
genated fluid into the cerebrospinal fluid pathway, at a
first injection point;
(d) substantially continuously withdrawing fluid from said
cerebrospinal fluid pathway at a second point which is
selected to create a circulation of said oxygenated fluid m
the vicinity of said ischemic tissue; whereby ischemic
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
997
neurologic tissue will be oxygenated and otherwise nour-
ished by said fluid.
4,393,864
SYRINGt SHIELDS AND METHODS FOR USING SAME
Benjamin M. Galkin, Cherry Hill, N.J.; Raymond Boon, Gle-
nolden. Pa.; Rudolph V. Gilliam, Yeadon, Pa., and Chan H.
Park, Ambler, Pa., assignors to Thomas Jefferson University,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 121,211, Feb. 13, 1980, Pat. No.
4,307,713. This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,961
Int. a.3 A61B 6/00
U.S. a. 128—1.1 8 Qaims
IDD
to DtSt C»llfPlI(»
1. A hand shield for use with a syringe at least during the use
of that syringe for drawing aliquots of radioactive materials
from a vial, comprising a shielding disc, said disc having an
aperture centrally defined therein for receiving a syringe barrel
therethrough, said aperture being slightly oversized with re-
spect to the syringe barrel to permit a rotation of the barrel axis
with respect to the plane of the disc of between about 5 and 25
degrees.
433,865
NAPKIN FOR A YOUNG CHILD
Jacques Lambert, 29 me de la Gare, 59232 Vieux-Berquin
(Nord), France
FUed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,756
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 15, 1980, 80 22520;
Dec. 20, 1980, 80 27989
Int. a.J A61F 5/00
U.S. O. 128—80 A 16 Qaims
1. A ni^)kin for an infant designed to prevent or cure an
abnormality of one or both hips, such as dysplasia, subluxation
of the hip or reducible and stable luxation, by binding the infant
in a napkin in the abduction position comprising:
semi-rigid orientation means for positioning the legs of the
infant in bent position at an angle of approximately 90°
with respect to the pelvis and in abduction of about 60°
while permitting movement of the legs, said semi-rigid
orientation means being of the ischio-sacral type, and
means for retaining said orientation means in position, said
retaining means comprising flexible fabric or plastic mate-
rial which is fastened around the waist of the infant and
which assures maintaining the orientation means on the
thighs and pelivs of the infant,
said retaining means applying said orientation means on the
pelvis and the lower rear portions of the infant's thighs
and to keep the thighs flexed with respect to the pelvis, the
orientation means providing a semi-elastic resistance prin-
cipally to an adduction of the thighs by retaining them in,
or restoring them to, the abduction position.
4,393,866
TIBIA BRACE
Alan Finnieston, 1901 NW. 17 Ave., Miami, Fla. 33125
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 284,019
Int. a.3 A61F 5/04
U.S. a. 128—87 R 7 Claims
1. A tibia brace to nest about and to be secured about a
wearer's leg, said brace having anterior and posterior seg-
ments, extending from a point below the knee of the wearer to
a point above the ankle of the wearer,
said posterior segment with an interior and an exterior main
surface, said interior surface being adapted to confront the
posterior surface of the leg of the wearer, said posterior
segment being of relatively thin rigid plastic material and
said segment having an upper end and a lower end zone,
said upper end and said lower end zone being spaced from
one another a predetermined distance of between about 10
inches to 14 inches, said posterior segment being generally
U-shaped as seen in cross section defining a base and a pair
of spaced side walls extending in generally curved relation
from the base, the upper end being greater in size than the
lower end zone sizing the posterior segment for mating
along the leg of a wearer, each side wall having a terminal
end edge spaced from one another and defining a mouth of
predetermined normal unflexed dimension and yieidable
to expansion or contraction to manipulate the mouth;
said anterior segment having an inside surface and an outside
surface with an upper end and a lower end and being
generally C-shaped as seen in cross section, said upper end
and said lower end being spaced from one another a com-
panionate distance to mate with the distance between the
upper end and lower end zone of the posterior segment in
clamping relation along the anterior part of the leg of a
wearer;
keeper means to stabilize the segments in mating relation
with one another with a poriion of the anterior segment
within the mouth defined by the posterior segment and in
nesting relation about and along the length of the leg of a
wearer to provide suppori around the entire periphery of
the leg without gaps in the engagement of the leg and
interior surfaces of the posterior and anterior segments;
and •
998
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
means to locate and orient the brace vertically and circum-
ferentially with respect to the leg of a wearer and said
means to locate including a portion to receive the heel of
the wearer to stabilize the location of the brace, said last
named means being secured to the posterior segment and
said heel receiving portion extending forwardly from a
point spaced vertically below the lower ends of said poste-
rior and anterior segments and lying substantially between
a downward extension of the vertical surfaces of said
segments, whereby the knee and ankle joints of the wearer
are unrestrained by said tibia brace and said means to
locate and orient the brace supports the brace in proper
vertical position on the leg of the wearer.
4,393,867
ANATOMICAL COMPRESSION DEVICE
Howard C. Bmwi, 1222 E. 19th St, New York, N.Y. 10003
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104,187, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No.
4,300,542. This application Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,313
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to No?. 17,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61F 5/04
U.S. a. 128—87 R 21 Oaims
1. An anatomical compression device adapted to encircle
and apply a compressive force to an anatomical body part,
comprising:
a completely sealed, flexible walled, expandible envelope
adapted to at least partially encircle the body part;
securing means for securing said envelope in an encircling
relationship around the body part; and
inflating means including a frangible member within said
envelope for rapidly generating a supply of substantially
only gas therein, said frangible member being accessible
from the exterior of said envelope through the flexible
walls thereof, whereby said frangible member may be
manually ruptured to rapidly generate gas within said
envelope, thereby causing said envelope to expand rapidly
without further manipulation thereof and apply a com-
pressive force to the body part.
bone fragments for stabilizing such bone fragments during
healing, comprising, in combination:
a pair of rigid arcuate support members spaced apart from
each other; each of the support members generally arcuate
have a generally rectangular cross-section, the major
dimension of which extends, in use, generally perpendicu-
lar to the axis of the bone to be stabilized; each support
member has a hole proximate each end thereof; spaced
from and positioned between said holes is an arcuate slot
formed from proximate one hole to proximate the other
hole, the holes and the slot being formed through the
support member perpendicular to said major dimension
thereof;
a pair of spacing bolts extending through the holes through
the support members;
means on the spacing bolts for adjusting and for fixing the
spacing between the support members;
a plurality of surgical fixation pin support means, each such
pin support means comprising a connector portion extend-
ing from a clevis which includes a pair of spaced clamping
members each of which has an aperture formed there-
through, means cooperating with the connector portion
for removably and adjustably securing the pin support
means in the slot of a support member, an elongated clevis
pin having formed therethrough a transverse aperture
which is adapted to receive a fixation pin; the clevis pin
extends through the apertures in the clevis clamping mem-
bers with the aperture in the clevis pin between said
clamping members; and means on said clevis pin for tight-
ening the clamping members together on a fixation pin
received in the aperture in the clevis pin so that when the
device is in use, the distance and angular orientation of the
bone fragment to be stabilized is thereby fixed relative to
the fixation device.
4,393,868
COLLES FRACTURE HXATURE DEVICE
H. Derek Teague, Manhattan Beach, Calif., assignor to Ace
Orthopedic Manufacturing Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,267
Int. a.3 A61F 5/04
U.S. a. 128—92 A 1 Claim
4,393,869 ^
ELECTRONICALLY CONTROLLED RESPIRATOR
Abraham Boyarsky, Montreal; Jack Friedman, Cote St. Luc;
Athanasios Christodoulopoulos, St. Laurent, and Rock Lee,
St. Hubert, all of Canada, assignors to Canadian Patents &
Development Limited, Ottawa, Canada
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,151
Int. a.i A61M 16/00
U.S. a. 128—204.18 8 Qaims
FfraM
ELECrnOMC
CONTROL
._4
FROM
ELECTRONIC
CONTROL
SURH.T
r
Electwcal to pfcuMtfnc
3^ J TBAiCOUCER
ss
1. A method of controlling the breathing cycle of a patient
comprising:
determining the total resistance R of the patient's lungs;
determining the total compliance C of the patient's lungs;
determining the alveolar tidal volume V°^ 7^ of the patient's
lungs;
delivering oxygen enriched air to the patient for an inspira-
tion period T of the breathing cycle at an initial pressure
RV^j/t and increasing the pressure to a pressure
1. An external fixation device for use in orthopedic surgery
for fixing the angular orientation and longitudinal extent of
surgical fixation pins adapted, when in use, to be secured to
R Vat Vat
July 19,' 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
999
at the end of the inspiration cycle; and
lowering the pressure to a level below RV^j/t during an
expiration period of the breathing cycle.
a spermicide-foaming agent in a dry weight percentage of
from about 10% to about 50%, and
4,393,870
SUCTION INJECTOR
Wolfgang' Wagner, Exercierstrasse 1, 1 Berlin 65, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 93,615, Nov. 9, 1979, Pat. No.
4,284,077, which is a division of Ser. No, 933,136, Aug. 14, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 793,951,
May 5, 1977, Pat. No. 4,114,691, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 634,741, Nov. 21, 1975, abandoned. This application
Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 241,378
Int. C\? A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—115 . 14 Oaims
1. A suction injector, particularly for use with hypodermic
injections, comprising a container filled with a liquid medicine;
a piston arranged for movement in said container; a cannula
operatively connected to said container; a suction cup having
an outer cylindrical portion defining an outer chamber and an
inner cylindrical portion defining an inner chamber, said inner
chamber having a surface to be positioned over human skin to
be treated, said inner portion having an aperture for receiving
said cannula through which the liquid medicine is discharged
upon the movement of said piston and at negative pressure
which is accumulated in said outer chamber during fabrication;
and means for preventing communication of the negative
pressure in said outer chamber to said inner chamber until said
inner chamber is in pressure contact with the skin.
4,393,871
VAGINAL DEVICE
Bruce W. Vorhauer, Irvine, and Thomas A. Dobbie, Jr., Newport
Beach, both of Calif., assignors to VLI Corporation, Costa
Mesa, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 167,386, Jul. 9, 1980,
abandoned, Ser. No. 96,295, Nov. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 96,293, Nov.
11, 1979, abandoned, Ser. No. 900,864, Apr. 28, 1978, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 810,109, Jun. 27, 1977,
abandoned. This application Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,228
Int. C\? A61F 13/20
U.S. a. 609—58 24 Oaims
1. A vaginal device adapted for insertion and placement in
the human vaginal cavity and subsequent removal therefrom,
comprising:
10 -•
a water-catalyzed foamed urethane polymer from which the
spermicide is slowly released from the sponge during use.
4,393,872
ASPIRATING SURGICAL FORCEPS
Benjamin Reznik; Stanley Welber, and Ludwig Streifeneder, all
of Chicago, III., assignors to Eder Instrument Co., Inc., Chi-
cago, 111.
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,181
Int. 0.3 A61M 1/00
U.S. O. 604—151 11 Oaims
1. Surgical forceps capable of simultaneously aspirating
liquids from a surgical site while grasping objects such as bone
chips floating in said liquid, said forceps comprising:
(a) an elongate tubular body defining a channel which termi-
nates at one end of said body to define a mouth;
(b) at least three springy prongs having inwardly bent distal
ends;
(c) an actuating means disposed within the body for retract-
ing said prongs substantially within the mouth of the
channel and for extending said prongs outwardly from
said mouth, said prongs diverging during outward exten-
sion and converging during retraction;
(d) a spring means cooperating with said actuating means for
normally maintaining the prongs in a retracted position;
and
(e) communication means within said body for allowing
liquids to be aspirated from a surgical site through said
mouth and channel while said prongs are extended, while
said prongs are in said retracted position and while said
prongs are intermediate said extended and retracted posi-
tions, whereby liquids are aspirated such that objects
floating in the liquid are drawn towards the mouth facili-
tating the capture of such objects with said prongs.
1000
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4393 873
GASTROSTOMY AND OTHER PERCUTANEOUS
TRANSPORT TUBES
Michael S. Nawash, 605 Nakoma St., Midland, Mich. 48640;
Suzanne StiUman, 826 N. Whittier Dr., Beverly Hills, Calif.
90210, and Robert S. Mason, 745 W. Mariposa Ave., El
Segundo, Calif. 90245
Division of Ser. No. 129,089, Mar. 10, 1980, Pat. No. 4,315,513.
This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,329
Int. a.3 A61M 25/00
U.S. a. 604—151 ♦ Claims
responsive to said sensing means for counting heartbeat pauses
which exceed a first predetermined interval and sequential
heartbeat pauses of a predetermined number each of which
exceeds a second shorter predetermined interval, and means
for reporting on the state of said counting means.
25-
.\0
/3-v4 I '^^
/-^
(
/^
— fK/MP
NurOlENT
\ J^
/,
ss
4,393,875
BRASSIERE
Dolores O'Boyle, Woodridge, and Phyllis Shonk, Glen Rock,
both of N.J., assignors to International Playtex, Inc., Stam-
ford, Conn.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 219,111
Int. a.3 A41C i/00
U.S. a. 128—425 5 Qaims
1. In a gastrostomy or like percutaneous transport tube of the
type having a length of tubing with a first end configured for
enlargement when inserted into the stomach or other bodily
region of a patient, and apertured for the passage of fluids, an
assembly at the other end of said tubing, comprising:
a rigid, generally cylindrical member having a certain shoul-
der portion, having at one end an axial projection engag-
ing said tubing, and having at the other end a radially
extending flange, there being an axial passageway through
said member and communicating with said tubing, and
an annular skin protector disc formed of resilient material,
said disc having a central aperture through which said
shoulder portion extends, said disc thus seating between
said flange and the external skin of the abdominal wall
when said percutaneous transport tube is emplaced in a
patient,
said skin protector disc having a set of raised ridges integral
therewith on the side facing said skin, said ridges being
arranged so as to permit the entry of air between said disc
and the exterior abdominal wall.
4,393,874
BRADYCARDIA EVENT COUNTING AND REPORTING
PACER
Tibor A. Nappbolz, Drummoyne, Australia; Barry Hinch,
Princes Risborough, and David B. Shaw, Exeter, both of
England, assignors to Telectronics Pty. Ltd., Lane Cove,
Australia
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 372,026
Int. a.' A61N l/i(>
U.S. CI. 128—419 PT 27 Qaims
1. A series of brassieres of like styling for women whose size
is selected from paired groupings of chest measurement ranges
to diaphragm measurement ranges and whose bust measure-
ment does not exceed her chest measurement by more than 2
inches and whose bust cup size designation is selected from
subdivisions within said bust measurement ranges; each bras-
siere in said series including a pair of breast receiving compo-
nents each having a depth adapted to enable the bust of the
wearer within said selected size designation to closely fit
therein, and a perimeter portion adapted to overlie the bust
wall of the wearer in close juxtaposition to the bust of the
wearer where the breast tissue extends outward of the chest
wall, said perimeter portion having an inner edge section, an
outer edge section and a base section and where each brassiere
in said series further including a body encircling member
adapted to extend about the wearer and the extent of said body
encircling member measured from a point along the outer
perimeter edge section of one of said breast receiving compo-
nents to a like point along the outer perimeter edge of the other
of said breasts receiving components is substantially the same
for each brassiere in said series.
^ ' %^ ^
~\-^ >m.<t\»\-A^ ctwuiTW [ — ba
1. An implantable heart pacer comprising means for generat-
ing pacing pulses, means for sensing heart activity, means for
controlling said generating means to generate pacing pulses at
times dependent upon when heart activity was sensed, means
433,876
SHOE ORTHOSIS OR SHOE ORTHOSIS PARTS
Alfred Dieterich, Westtorgraben 3, Niimberg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
FUed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,110
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1980, 3019561; Apr. 6, 1981, 3113820
Int. CI.' A43B 7/24
U.S. a. 128—583 19 Claims
1. A shoe orthosis device for corrective treatment of foot
deformities wherein the pressure of the posterior part of the
foot on the device is transmitted to the part of the foot which
is to be treated in an intermittently acting force, comprising a
sole member, means within said sole member which are
adapted to be operated by said pressure to rotate the forefoot
around the longitudinal axis of the foot and/or move it substan-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1001
tially transversely to said longitudinal axis substantially about
an axis perpendicular to the sole, whereby said means act on
the inner side of the forefoot to lower it, thus rotating said
forefoot.
4,393,877
HEART RATE DETECTOR
Mir Imran, Pittsburgh, and Steve Kolenik, Leechburg, both of
Pa., assignors to Mieczyslaw Mirowski, Owings Mills, Md.
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,910
Int. Q\? A61B 5/04
U.S. a. 128-705 37 Qaims
WOMOSTAtLt
WUlTwiMftTOI
MMiaaic
ItCFIIACTOIIV
1 ZCM CHOSSHH
* OCTCCTOII
»w.Sf
ecNfuro*
29. A system for use with an automatic defibrillator for
defibrillating the heart of a patient experiencing abnormal
cardiac rhythm, comprising:
input means for receiving ECG waveforms;
processing means coupled with said input means for process-
ing the ECG waveforms in accordance with a probability
density function to develop a probability density function
. output signal;
a heart rate detector coupled between said input means and
a processing output means, said heart rate detector com-
prising,
first detecting means for detecting an ECG wave packet
by detecting a first characteristic of said wave packet
and providing a first output signal when said wave
packet is detected;
second detecting means for detecting an ECG wave
packet by detecting a second characteristic of said wave
packet and providing a second output signal when said
wave packet is detected;
rate detector output means for receiving the first and
second output signals and for providing a rate detector
output signal to the processing output means when the
aggregate number of first and second output signals
exceed a predetermined rate; and
coupling means for selectively coupling only one of said
first and second detecting means with said rate detector
output means whereby the aggregate number of first
and second output signals represents the number ^f
heart beats; and
processing output means for coupling said processing
means and heart rate detector with a defibrillating pulse
generator for initiating the discharge of a defibrillating
shock upon receiving a predetermined signal from at
least one of said processing means and said heart rate
detector.
4 393 878
PRESSURE MONITORING METHOD AND APPARATUS
Alan R. Kahn, Madison, Wis., assignor to Meadox Instruments,
Inc., Oakland, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 211,084, Nov. 28, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,381
Int. a.3 A61B 5/00
U.S. a. 128-748 15 Qaims
1. Pressure monitoring apparatus comprising:
(a) a fluid pressure pump supplying gas under pressure;
(b) a pressure sensor including:
(1) a cup shaped housing having an open mouth and hav-
ing an inlet and an outlet formed therein;
(2) a flexible diaphragm sealed over the open mouth of the
housing to define a plenum between the walls of the
mouth in the housing and the diaphragm, and wherein
the inlet formed in the housing is in communication
with the plenum;
(3) an exhaust tube centrally mounted in the housing
within the plenum with an end thereof terminating
adjacent the inner side of the diaphragm and connected
to be in communication with the outlet from the hous-
ing;
(c) tubing connecting the pump to the inlet in the sensor
housing to supply gas under pressure to the inlet and also
connecting the outlet in the sensor housing to the pump to
form a closed system;
(d) a flow restriction connected in the tubing between the
pump and the inlet to the sensor housing so that the flow
to the sensor is substantially uniform; and
(e) means for measuring pressure connected to measure the
pressure in the tubing between the flow restriction and the
inlet to the sensor housing, whereby changes in ambient
pressure at the pressure sensor will result in movement of
the diaphragm to alternately open and close the exhaust
tube to automatically maintain the pressure within the
plenum approximately equal to the ambient pressure, and
whereby the means for measuring pressure in the tubing
will measure a pressure which is approximately equal to
the pressure within the plenum.
1002
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,879
TISSUE-COLLECTING APPARATUS
Hyman T. Milgrom, Chicago, III., assignor to Milex Products,
Inc., Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. II, 1980, Ser. No. 139,240
Int a.3 A61B 10/00
U.S. a. 128—758 13 Cl«>ms
of said back member to support the back member in an
upright position; and
means for connecting an upper portion of the back member
to an upper portion of the receptacle to support the recep-
tacle in a upright position by the stand, wherein the con-
necting means releasably attaches the back member to the
receptacle, with the connecting means comprising a tun-
1. In an apparatus for collecting animal or human tissue, said
apparatus including a housing having an interior and an exte-
rior, a curette having a tissue-scraping end and a passageway
communicating with the housing interior and extending from
said housing and terminating at a front end of the curette in a
tissue-receiving opening, said housing acting as a handle for
manipulating the apparatus, said housing having an outlet
opening communicating with the interior of said housing and
adapted to be connected to a source of vacuum for sucking
tissue through said tissue-receiving opening of said curette and
mto said housing, the improvement wherein said housing is
transparent along at least a portion of one longitudinally ex-
tending side thereof, and said housing having a substantially
planar tissue collection screen inside said housing in the path of
flow of said tissue to be drawn through said curette and into
the housing, said screen extending longitudinally and obliquely
of said housing for substantially the full length thereof, the
screen having a multiplicity of tissue-screening apertures with
inlet and outlet sides forming a communication between oppo-
site laterally facing sides of the screen, said apertures being of
such a size to catch the tissue being drawn through the housing
and screen, the inlet side of the apertures on the side of said
screen facing said longitudinally transparent portion of said
one side of said housing, and the length of said housing being
substantially greater than the lateral dimension thereof so that
the obliquely extending screen which extends for substantially
the full length of the housing has such a substantial longitudinal
component that any tissue collected thereon is readily visible
to the user looking laterally into the housing as he grasps the
housing to manipulate the apparatus.
4,393,880
DEVICE FOR COLLECnNG BODY LIQUIDS
Glenn N. Taylor, Gary, III., assignor to The Kendall Company,
Boston, Mass.
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,499
Int. a.3 A61F 5/44
VS. a. 128—760 18 Claims
1. A device for collecting body liquids, comprising:
a receptacle having a chamber to receive and collect body
liquids;
a stand having a back member having upper and lower
portions, and leg means extending from the lower portion
ao^ Cm
nel in an upper portion of the receptacle, a rod extending
through the tunnel, and means for attaching said rod to the
back member, wherein the attaching means comprises a
pair of spaced apertures in the upper portion of the back
member, a pair of spaced bosses removably received in
said apertures, a pair of spaced ears connected to said
bosses, said ears having openings to removably receive
said rod with the tunnel located intermediate said ears.
4,393,881
MIDSTREAM URINE COLLECTION DEVICE
Nayan S. Shah, 15091 Isleview, Chesterfield, Mo. 63017
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 78,570, Sep. 24, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,005
Int. C1.3 A61B 10/00
U.S. a. 128—760 16 Claims
1. A midstream urine collection device (10) comprising:
a receiving cup (12) having a fluid receiving cavity with an
opening therein;
support means (16a, 16b) carried by said cup (12) and en-
gageable with a support surface to retain said cup (12)
with the opening facing upwardly away from said support
surface;
a needle assembly (23) carried by a lower portion of said cup
(12) and extending outwardly away from the fluid receiv-
ing cavity in said cup, a channel (20) communicating
between said cup (12) and said needle assembly (23); and
valve means (25) on said needle assembly (23) controlling
the flow of fluid through said needle assembly (23).
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1003
1 1 4,393,882
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR COLLECnNG,
TRANSPORTING, AND DELIVERING MICRO SAMPLES
OF BLOOD
Fred K. White, Miami, Fla., assignor to American Hospital
Supply Corporation, Evanston, III.
Division of Ser. No. 71,702, Aug. 31, 1979, Pat. No. 4,263,922.
ThU application Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,372
Int. a.3 A61B 5/14
U.S. a. 128—764 11 Claims
r
4,393,883
SINGLE PASS A-V LEAD
Nicholas P. D. Smyth, Bethesda, Md.; Jeanne M. Lesniak,
Columbia Heights, and Kenneth B. Stokes, Brooklyn Park,
both of Minn., assignors to Medtronic, Inc., Minneapolis,
Minn.
1 1 Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,298
I Int. a.i A61N 1/04
U.S. a. 128—785 6 Qaims
1. A single pass dual chamber pacing lead comprising:
a connector;
an outer sheath having a proximal end attached to said
connector and having a distal end and having a junction
point intermediate said proximal end and said distal end,
said outer sheath having a "J" shaped bend located inter-
mediate said distal end and said junction point;
a flrst space wound coil conductor located within said outer
sheath having a proximal end coupled to said connector
and having a distal end;
an atrial electrode coupled to said distal end of said first
space wound coil conductor;
a first stylet removeably insertable in said first space wound
coil conductor which when inserted substantially straight-
ens said outer sheath and whereby placement of said atrial
electrode is controlled;
a ventricular electrode;
a second space wound coil conductor slideably located
within said outer sheath between said proximal end and
said junction point of said outer sheath having a distal end
attached to said ventricular electrode, said first and sec-
ond space wound coil conductors mutually insulated, said
second space wound coil conductor slideable in a proxi-
mal direction within said outer sheath whereby said sec-
ond space wound coil conductor may be substantially
withdrawn into said outer sheath;
1. A one-piece adapter for use in collecting micro samples of
blood for laboratory testing, said adapter having integral body
and tip sections formed entirely of resilient plastic material,
said adapter having a bore extending through said body and tip
sections, said tip section having a frusto-conical outer surface
dimensioned and tapered outwardly towards the free end of
said tip section to provide a male Luer taper and having the
portion of said bore extending therethrough tapering gradually
inwardly at an angle within the range of about 1° to 3° mea-
sured from the longitudinal axis of said adapter for receiving
and engaging the inlet tube of a blood analyzer, said body
section of said adapter having the portion of said bore extend-
ing therethrough tapering gradually inwardly at an angle
within the range of about 2° to 6° measured from the longitudi-
nal axis of said adapter and encompassing diameters of about
0.08 to 0.10 inches.
a second stylet insertable in said second space wound coil
conductor whereby placement of said ventricular elec-
trode is controlled; and
a space wound coil located within said outer sheath and
having a proximal end attached to said connector and a
distal end attached to said atrial electrode located coaxi-
ally about said first conductor between said junction point
and said atrial electrode and located coaxially about said
second conductor between said junction point and said
connector.
4,393,884
DEMAND INHALER FOR ORAL ADMINISTRATION OF
TOBACCO, TOBACCO-LIKE, OR OTHER SUBSTANCES
Allen W. Jacobs, 12538 Oxnard St., #3, North Hollywood,
Calif. 91606
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,466
Int. a.3 A24D 1/00: A61M 15/00
U.S. a. 131—273 6 Qaims
1. A dispenser for introducing a substance into the mouth of
a user comprising: means defining a reservoir for containing
the substance in a pressurized state and also defining an inner
chamber in axial alignment with the reservoir and having an
apertured end portion at the end thereof opposite to said reser-
voir; a partition interposed between said reservoir and said
inner chamber and having an aperture therein; an elongated
member mounted for reciprocal pivotal movement in said
inner chamber and having a first angular position in said inner
chamber in which the aperture in the partition is closed, and
said elongated member having a second angular position
within said inner chamber in which the aperture is open for
releasing the substance from the reservoir to the apertured end
portion of said inner chamber; and in which the user selec-
tively introduces suction to the inner chamber through the
apertured end portion thereof to move the elongated member
from its first angular position to its second angular position so
as to cause the aperture in said partition to open to enable the
substance in the reservoir to be introduced into the mouth of
1004
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the user through said apertured end portion under the control
of the user.
— CH2— C—
Ri
CO— Di— El®— N— Q Y©
433,885 *2
aGARETTE nLTER
Donald A. Silberstein, Louisville, Ky., assignor to Brown A and O to an average 95 mole % of recurring structural ele-
Williamson Tobacco Corporation, Louisville, Ky. ments of the formula
FUed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,756
Int. aJ A24D 3/04
sa^ms 1 2
— CH2— C—
U.S. a. 131—339
16 "4
10 '2
CO— NH2
and O to an average 10 mole % of recurring structural ele-
ments of the formulas
A, A.
— CH2— C— or — CH2— C—
G, G2
1. A filter for a cigarette, comprising:
a first longitudinally extending cylindrical chamber;
a second longitudinally extending cylindrical chamber dis-
posed within the first chamber with a spacing between the
outer wall of the second chamber and the inner wall of the
first chamber, the wall of the second chamber being air
impervious;
transversely disposed smoke impervious partition means
disposed at the end of the chambers interfacing with a
tobacco column of the cigarette; and,
means defining at least one orifice through said smoke im-
pervious partition means for providing direct flow com-
munication between the tobacco column of the cigarette
and the interior of said second chamber whereby no
smoke comes in contact with the exterior of said second
chamber, the at least one orifice having a smaller cross-
sectional area than the cross-sectional area of the second
chamber, said first and second chambers being of substan-
tially the same length with their ends being transversely
aligned.
in which Ai, A2, A3 and A4 are each hydrogen or methyl, Gi
and G2 differ from one another and are each — CN, — COOH
or
4,393,886
MIXTURES OF QUATERNARY, POLYMERIC, HIGH
MOLECULAR WEIGHT AMMONIUM SALTS, WHICH
ARE BASED ON ACRYLIC COMPOUNDS, AND
SURFACTANTS, THEIR PREPARATION, AND THEIR
USE IN COSMETICS
Dieter Strasilla, Weil am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Germany; Laszlo
Moldovanyi, Basel, Switzerland; Charles Feamley, and Hu-
bert Meindl, both of Riehen, Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,811
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 5, 1980,
6688/80
Int a.J A45D 7/00
VS. a. 132—7 17 Oaims
1. A cosmetic composition which contains water, (a) at least
one ammonium salt which is soluble or gives a microemulsion
in aqueous surfactant systems and which has a molecular
weight distribution of 10* to lO'- the molecular weight of at
least 5 percent by weight of the copolymeric salt being 10^ to
10' and the salt containing on average 5 to 100 mole % of
recurring structural elements of the formula
— CO— D2— E2— N
/
i
\
R3
R4
Di and D2 are each oxygen or — NH — , Ei and E2 are each
alkylene having 1 to 4 carbon atoms which is unsubstituted or
substituted by hydroxyl, Ri, R2, R3 and R4 are each methyl or
ethyl, Q is alkyl, hydroxyalkyl having 1 to 4 carbon atoms or
benzyl, and Y~ is a halide, alkylsulfate or alkylphosphonate
anion having 1 to 4 carbon atoms in the alkyl radical, and (b)
at least one non-ionic surfactant or a surfactant with one posi-
tive and one negative charge within the molecule, wherein the
composition contains components (a) and (b) in a weight ratio
of 1:2 to 400. ^
4,393,887
COLLAPSIBLE TENT FRAME
Edwin H. Oribin, K. A K. Factory, Mayne St, Laimceston,
Tasmania, 7250, Australia
Continuation of Ser. No. 66,863, Aug. 15, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,967
Qaims priority, application Australia, Aug. 17, 1978, PD5520
Int. a.3 A45F ]/]6
U.S. a. 135—109 _ 13 Claims
1. A rigid self supporting collapsible tent frame comprised of
triangular roof and wall frame sections formed of elongate
frame members hingedly interconnected at their ends to form
July 19. 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1005
a unitary structure in both the erected and collapsed state, the
adjacent triangular roof frame sections of said collapsible tent
having a common elongate roof frame member and alternate
ones of the triangular wall frame sections having an elongate
member common with a triangular roof frame section, said
roof frame sections having a commpn apex in both the erected
and collapsed state, the elongate members common to the wall
and roof frame sections being hingedly connected at the ends
thereof to define the ceiling area of the tent, said common wall
and roof frame section members being comprised of at least
two parts connected by means to provide a flexible joint that is
spring loaded and allows both expansion and contraction at a
point therealong remote from the points of connection of other
roof frame section members connected thereto, the remaining
alternate ones of the triangular wall frame sections having two
common elongate frame members with the first mentioned
alternate triangular wall frame sections and being inversely
arranged relative thereto to define the base area and a plurality
of free comers of the tent, the elongate frame members of the
remaining alternate triangular wall frame sections defining the
base area and the plurality of free comers of the tent being
comprised by means to provide a flexible joint at an intermedi-
ate point therealong remote from the points of connection of
the first mentioned alternate triangular wall frame sections
thereto.
4,393,888
METHOD OF PROTECTING CONTENTS OF A BARGE
WHILE IN TRANSTT
James E. Nivin, Louisville, Ky., assignor to American Commer-
cial Barge Line Co., Jeffersonville, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 831,648, Sep, 8, 1977, Pat. No. 4,130,125.
This application Aug. 10, 1978, Ser. No. 932,667
Int. a.3 B63B 19/14
4 Qaims
1. The method of protecting contents of a barge in transit
with an open hatch from the weather comprising the steps of
erecting a light-weight fabric pup-tent like hatch cover array
to extend above the hatch over a ridge pole assembly affixed to
the deck and maintaining the tent in erected position over the
ridge pole assembly in transit in the place of altemative hatch
cover means, erecting from a folded position stowed on deck
the ridge pole assembly affixed to the deck of the barge to
extend over the top of the open hatch, placing a removable tent
fabric sheet over the framework, fastening the sheet edges to
the barge, and removal of the tent fabric and storing for further
use on the barge deck by folding the fabric and then rolling the
fabric from two ends onto a pair of bobbins.
4,393,889
HRE-SAFE VALVE STRUCTURE
Scott W. Binegar, and Hamid J. Saka, both of Houston, Tex.,
assignors to ACF Industries, Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,532
Int. a.i F16K 13/04
U.S. CI. 137—72 4 Claims
1. In an expanding gate valve having a valve body with a
flow passage therethrough, a valve chamber in the body com-
municating with the flow passage, and an expanding gate
assembly movably mounted in the valve chamber for opening
and closing the flow passage, and wherein the valve chamber
becomes sealed off" from the flow passage in the open and
closed conditions of the valve, means defining an annular
recess in said valve body circumferentially surrounding the
flow passage on the upstream side of said valve element and
opening between said valve chamber and said flow passage,
said recess having a rear wall extending from the flow passage
generally radially thereof and a circumferential cylindrical
wall extending substantially coaxially to the flow passage from
the valve chamber to said rear wall, and sealing means adapted
to sealingly engage the gate assembly in its opened and closed
conditions whereby said valve chamber becomes sealed off
from said flow passage; an improved valve structure compris-
ing:
an annular metallic seat disposed in said annular recess, said
annular seat having an inner annular cylindrical surface
substantially coaxial to and facing said flow passage and
an outer peripheral annular cylindrical surface substan-
tially coaxial to said inner annular cylindrical surface and
facing said recess circumferential wall, said annular seat
having a port therein extending in a generally radial man-
ner from the flow passage between said inner annular
cylindrical surface and said outer peripheral annular cylin-
drical surface such that the outer end of the port is ex-
posed to the interior of the valve chamber and the inner
end of the port is exposed to said flow passage; and
a relief plug of a selected temperature degradable material
positioned in a plugging relationship within said port, said
relief plug being exposed to both the fluid environment
within said valve chamber on its outer end and said flow
passage on its inner end whereby the valve chamber is
sealed off from the flow passage during the open and
closed conditions of the gate valve and said relief plug is
caused to evacuate the port into the upstream flow pas-
sage upon the fluid environment in the valve chamber
reaching a preselected temperature condition or when a
preselected pressure differential exists between the valve
chamber and flow passage.
1006
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^3,890
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR AUTOMATIC
IRRIGATION
Einar Skappel, KTartaervaegen 12, SE 595 00 Mjoelby, Sweden
per No. PCr/SE79/00213, § 371 Date Jun. 23, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 22, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00777, PCT Pub.
Date May 1, 1980
per Filed Oct. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 224^25
Int. a.3 F16K 7 7/i6
U.S. a. 137— 78J 9 Qaims
pipe device during initial opening of said water cock for
permitting rinsing of impurities from the water cock prior
to the opening of said closure member; and
1. A control apparatus for an irrigation system, comprising a
container adapted to receive a quantity of a fluid, valve means
having an inlet and an outlet and responsive to variations in the
quantity of fluid in said container for respectively effecting and
obstructing communication between said inlet and said outlet
when the quantity of said fluid in said container is less than and
greater than a predetermined amount, and temperature respon-
sive means for varying the quantity of said fluid in said con-
tainer in response to changes in the temperature of the ambient
air, the quantity of fluid in said container being progressively
decreased and increased as the ambient air temperature respec-
tively decreases and increases, said temperature responsive
means including a closed chamber partially filled with said
fluid and partially filled with a gas, said gas having a volume
which respectively increases and decreases as the temperature
of said gas increases and decreases, and means for effecting
fluid communication between a lower portion of said container
and a lower portion of said chamber, a change in ambient air
temperature effecting a change in the volume of said gas in said
chamber, causing fluid to be drawn into or forced from said
chamber through said means for effecting communication, the
quantity of fluid in said container respectively increasing and
decreasing as the quantity of fluid in said chamber decreases
and increases.
k^^
delay closing means actuated by fluid pressure within said
extension pipe piece for closing said valve body to prevent
communication between said extension pipe piece and said
drain pipe device after the expiration of a predetermined
time period.
4,393,892
ROTARY VALVE FOR CONTROLLING THE FLOW OF A
SOLID PARTICULATE MATERIAL
Gaetano Di Rosa, Pino Torinese, Italy, assignor to F.A.T.A. -
Fabrica Apparecchi di Sollevamento e Trasporto ed Afflni
S.p.A., Turin, Italy
Filed Mar. 21, 1978, Set. No. 888,791
Claims priority, application Italy, Jun. 3, 1977, 68286 A/77
Int. aJ F16K 3/36
U.S. a. 137—242 3 Qaims
4,393,891
DEVICE FOR TEMPORARILY RINSING A WATER COCK
COUNTERSUNK IN THE GROUND
Govert J. Snoek, and William J. Tuil, both of Dieren, Nether-
lands, assignors to Ocean B.V., Dieren, Netherlands
Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,678
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 23, 1980,
8005300
Int. a? B08B 9/02; F16K 31/122
US. a. 137—238 8 Qaims
1. A drain valve for use with a water cock countersunk into
the ground surface and including an extension pipe piece with
a closing member being disposed above the ground surface,
said water cock being in fluid communication with said exten-
sion pipe piece and said closing member comprising:
a drain pipe device operatively connected between the
water cock and the closing member positioned in the
extension pipe piece;
a valve body slidable disposed adjacent to said drain pipe
device to selectively permit the fluid communication
between said extension pipe piece and said drain pipe
device;
biasing means for normally biasing said valve body into an
open position for normally permitting the fluid communi-
cation between said extension pipe piece and said drain
1. A rotary valve for controlling the flow of a solid particu-
late material comprising a hollow body having an internal
circumferential surface provided with two diametrically op-
posed valve ports, a rotatable support disposed within said
body, two diametrically opposed obturator elements carried
by said rotatable support and cooperating with said valve
ports, each obturator being movable radially relative to said
support and relative to the other obturator element, and resil-
ient means disposed between said support and each obturator
element for urging each obturator element radially outwardly
relative to said support and against said internal circumferen-
tial surface of the valve body, said body having internal end
surfaces perpendicular to said circumferential surface, said
support being in the form of said rectalinear frame having two
sidewalls adjacent the internal end surfaces of said body, at
least one of said sidewalls being fixed to a drive shaft, said
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1007
frame having two additional sidewalls adjacent the internal
circumferential surface of the body so that solid material will
pass through the rectalinear frame when the valve is open,
each obturator element having a bearing surface cooperating
with a bearing surface on the support for the purpose of mov-
ing said obturator element circumferentially upon closure of
the associated valve port with said bearing surfaces being
inclined to each other in such a way that upon closure of the
valve the support applies to each obturator element a direct
radially outward force in order to augment the radial force of
the resilient means.
4,393,893
' LUBRICATED SPLIT PLUG VALVE
William H. Alexander, Houston, Tex., assignor to Vapor Corpo-
ration, Chicago, III.
1 1 FUed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,728
1 1 Int. Q.3 F16K 5/22
U.S. Q. 137—246.12 8 Qaims
50 -^
1. A valve element for a valve comprising:
a valve body including a cylindrical bore therethrough with
first and second ports thereto;
said valve body split along a plane oblique to said bore to
define first and second core members; and
first and second identical continuous grooves defined in the
outer peripheral surfaces of said first and second core
members, respectively;
said first and second grooves each comprising; a first portion
circumferentially displaced from said port and a second
portion essentially surrounding said port.
4,393,894
FLUID SUPPLY AND DISPENSING APPARATUS
Hans C. Mol, Wilton, and LeRoy H. Byrne, Waterbury, both of
Conn., assignors to Pitney Bowes Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,330
Int. Q.5 G05D 9/00
U.S. Q. 137—454 -^ 8 Qaims
I. In a fluid supply and dispensing system including fluid
dispensing means for carrying a working supply of fluid having
a working surface level, and including reservoir means con-
nected in fluid flow communication with said dispensing means
for. carrying a replenishing supply of fluid having a surface
level which establishes the working surface level of the work-
ing supply of fluid, an improvement for lowering the working
surface level to a non-working level, said improvement com-
prising:
a. said reservoir means including a movable fluid displace-
ment member which is normally lowered into the replen-
ishing supply of fluid; and
b. means for raising the displacement member at least par-
tially out of the replenishing supply of fluid, whereby the
surface level of the replenishing supply of fluid and thus
the working supply surface level is lowered to a non-
working level.
4393,895
CHECK VALVE FOR USE WITH HIGH PRESSURE
PUMP
Robert J. Rubey, Wisconsin Rapids, Wis., assignor to Sterling
Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,506
Int. Q.5 F16K 15/04
U.S. Q. 137—539.5 2 Qaims
40k
1. A check valve member for use with a high pressure pump,
said valve comprising:
a valve body having an inlet and an outlet and a fluid pas-
sageway therebetween;
a valve seat in said passageway between said inlet and said
outlet;
a valve member comprising a ball in said passageway mov-
able toward said valve inlet for seating against said valve
seat for sealing said passageway against backflow of fluid
therethrough;
a plate extending across the outlet end of said valve body
and having one or more apertures therein for passage of
fluid therethrough;
a plunger slidably mounted on said plate for movement
toward and away from said valve seat coaxially with the
axis of said valve body and in the position closest to said
valve seat projecting to within 1 to 10 mm of the valve
member when said valve member is seated on said valve
seat and in the position furthest from said valve seat acting
as a valve member lift limiter;
spring means urging said plunger toward and into contact
with said valve member and permitting movement of said
plunger away from said valve seat sufficiently far to per-
mit said valve member to attain a maximum lift position;
and
adjusting means mounted on said plunger and operably
associated with said plate for adjusting the position of said
plunger toward and away from said valve seat.
1008
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,896 said supplementary fluid control members remote from said
RADIAL VANE GAS THROTTLING VALVE FOR sidewalls, so that each said supplementary control fluid pas-
VACUUM SYSTEMS
Edward J. Slabaugh, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Comptech,
Incorporated, San Jose, Calif.
Filed Aug. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 412,251
Int. a.3 F16K 13/00
VJS. a. 137—601 15 Claims
sage causes control fluid from said control fluid passage of one
of said sidewalls to flow against the other sidewall.
1. A gas flow control valve comprising:
an annular flange having a continuous inner peripheral sur-
face and a spaced apart, outer peripheral surface con-
nected to the inner peripheral surface in a gas barrier
relation between opposed side walls,
a plurality of movable vanes disposable in a common plane
closing the inside of the annular flange, said common
plane parallel to the flange side walls, said vanes radially
mounted for rotational shutter-like movement out of said
common plane by inclining on an axis out of said common
plane,
a plurality of rotatable shims having an outer toric surface,
matching the curvature of the inner peripheral surface of
the flange and having a rotational support means for con-
nection to the inner peripheral surface of the flange, each
shim having a support side connected to a vane for trans-
mitting shim rotation to a connected vane and further
having rim means for transmitting rotational motion to
rim means of adjacent shims, and the shims arranged in an
endless rim-to-rim motive communication relation,
coupling means supported in the flange from the outside
peripheral region to the inside peripheral region for com-
municating rotary motion from outside the flange to one
of the shims.
4,393,898
FLUID OUTLET DEVICE AND A METHOD OF
CONTROLLING FLUID FLOW THROUGH A NOZZLE
Masao Izumi, Fujisawa; Hiroshi Yoshida, Zama, and Yukio
Yoshikawa, Hiratsuka, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,637
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 28, 1979, 54-171762
Int. C1.3 B05B 1/14
U.S. a. 137—831 5 Qaims
4,393,897
FLUID OUTLET STRUCTURE
Masao Izumi, Fujisawa; Hiroshi Yoshida, Zama, and Yukio
Yoshikawa, Hiratsuka, all of Japan, assignors to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama and Tokyo Sokuhan Co., Ltd.,
Zama, both of, Japan
Filed Not. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,386
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 20, 1979, 54-149452
Int. C1.3 F15C 1/04
VS. CI. 137—831 3 Qaims
1. A fluid outlet structure using a fluid element including a
supply opening for supplying compressed fluid, an outlet open-
ing corresponding to said supply opening for fluid exhaust, a
main fluid passage formed between said openings and control
fluid passages comprising cavities provided in sidewalls on
inner opposite sides of said main fluid passage, two supplemen-
tary fluid control members, each having two supplementary
cavities divided by a center wall forming a T-shaped body in
each said supplementary fluid control member, each said sup-
plementary cavity having a supplementary control fluid pas-
sage communicating with said main fluid passage, and two
communicating pipes, each communicating with said cavity in
one of said sidewalls and one of said supplementary cavities of
1. A fluid outlet device for directing a fluid comprising:
(a) a nozzle including the following portion;
(1) an inlet port;
(2) an outlet port;
(3) a throat portion formed between said inlet port and
outlet ports;
(4) first and second fluid control chambers positioned on
either side of said throat;
(5) first and second control fluid passages communicating
with respective fluid control chambers;
(6) first and second flappers for regulating the flow of
fluid through respective control fluid passages; and
(7) first and second electromagnets for controlling the
operation of respective flappers, and
(b) a control circuit comprising:
(1) first and second switching means for actuating respec-
tive electromagnets;
(2) a control signal generator for supplying timed alternat-
ing square wave pulses to respective switching means;
and
(3) first and second delay means respectively connected to
said first and second switching means for retarding
respective turn off timings thereof.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1009
4,393,899
PLUGGING APPARATUS
Tadashi tsuji, and Ryokichi Igarashi, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,845
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 21, 1979, 54-166357
Int. Q.J G21C 17/00. 19/20; F16L 55/10
U.S. Q. 138—89 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for plugging a plurality of cylindrical holes
provided through an inner peripheral wall of a cylindrical
container, said apparatus comprising a plurality of plugs to be
inserted into said plurality of holes for plugging the same, a
supporting ring assembly having an outer diameter smaller
than an inner diameter of said container, a beam assembly
detachably connected to said ring assembly, means provided
on said beam assembly for supporting said plurality of plugs
and simultaneously forcing said plugs radially outwardly into
said cylindrical holes of said cylindrical container, and means
for preventing said plugs from being driven radially inwardly
out of said cylindrical holes.
4,393,900
INSERT PLUG
Padej Gajiyiva, Fairfield, and Eigil Wium, Cheshire, both of
Conn., assignors to General Signal Corporation, Stamford,
Conn.
I Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 325,075
Int. Q.3 F16L 55/24
U.S. Q. 138—89 14 Claims
1. A plug for use with a mating body member and compris-
ing in combination:
(a) a generally cylindrical plug member threaded on its outer
cylindrical surface;
(b) a closing surface member for closing said plug member at
the lower limit thereof;
(c) said closing surface member including a central upward
projecting member; and wherein
(d) said cylindrical plug member includes an inner surface
having a first longitudinal surface projecting inward and
disposed on said inner surface in a manner to permit a
linear lever to be positioned for an end thereof to contact
sai- fir«t lOiitZ'Midinal surface concurrently with an inter-
mediate portion of said lever contacting said upward
projecting member whereby a turning torque may be
exerted on said plug in response to the application of force
on the linear lever.
4393,901
LOW-PERMEABILITY HOLLOW SPHERES AND PIPE
HLLED WITH THE SPHERES FOR TEMPORARY
WEIGHT REDUCTION
Warren R. Beck, Saint Paul, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 190,718, Sep. 24, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jul. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 399,455
Int. Q.3 C04B 31/04; F16L 1/04. 9/08
U.S. Q. 138-145 7 Qaims
1. Reduced-density pipe which absorbs water at a rate that
remains substantially unchanged even after storage under
moist or wet conditions and which improves the laying of
underwater pipeline at great depths by minimizing forces that
tend to buckle a pipeline and by permitting retrieval of re-
cently laid pipeline, said pipe comprising a porous cement-
based cylindrical shell surrounding a core pipe and filled with
hollow spheres that (a) average between 0.05 and 2 centimeters
in diameter, (b) have a density of no more than about 0.35 gram
per cubic centimeter, and (c) individually comprise (i) a porous
hollow core sphere comprising a polymeric binder material
and a plurality of solid particles held by the binder material, at
least a portion of the thickness of the sphere wall being filled
by the particles and the particle-filled sphere wall being perme-
able such that said core spheres fill instantly with air at a
pressure of about 2 pounds per square inch; and (ii) a coating
on the exterior surface of the porous hollow core sphere that
partially seals the core sphere; said coated spheres exhibiting a
stable slow permeability to water such that between about one
and ten weeks is required for the spheres to fill with water
under an ocean-depth pressure of 10 or more kilograms per
square centimeter, whereby the cement shell gradually in-
creases in density when immersed in a body of water at depths
that apply such a pressure.
4,393,902
TRANSMISSION FOR THE SHED-FORMING
MECHANISM OF A LOOM
Josef Brock, Viersen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Mas-
chinenfabrik Carl Zangs Aktiengesellschaft, Krefeld, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,032
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 19,
1979, 2937760
Int. Q.3 D03C 1/00; F16H 1/28. 35/02
U.S. Q. 139—76 " 10 Qaims
1. In a transmission for a shedding mechanism (dobby) of a
loom for the production of a nonuniform drive from a uniform
drive comprising a drive shaft and a driven shaft aligned there-
with, said shafts being supported in a transmission housing, the
improvement comprising
a rotor arranged fixed for rotation on said drive shaft,
at least one gear segment,
an eccentric shaft swingably supports said gear segment on
said rotor,
each of said at least one gear segment has two cam rollers
arranged in different planes,
a driven pinion arranged fixed for rotation on said driven
shaft engages said gear segment,
two cams fastened in said different planes respectively to the
transmission housing,
1010
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said cam rollers cooperate with said cams in form-locked
manner,
Km
lecting lamellae and a concentrically disposed outer ring of
cover strip lamellae, said collecting lamellae being retractable
and extensible relative to said cover strip lamellae, said strip-
ping being effected by stripping said windings from said form
onto said collecting tool, the improvement wherein, during
68 70 58 62 M « 60 46
KB
\ \ \ \ \
5i 25 102 98 12 22
said cams are asymmetrically formed such that an adjustable
relative movement per revolution between the drive shaft
and the driven shaft is produced dependent on the form of
said two cams.
4^93,903
WEFT FEELER UNIT FOR A FLUID-JET LOOM
Yoshio Ida, Kanazawa, Japan, assignor to Tsudakoma Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Japan
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,455
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 23, 1980, 55-85656
Int. a.3 D03D 51/34
U.S. a. 139—370.2 10 Claims
said stripping, said collecting lamellae are retracted to a posi-
tion wherein their free ends are positioned immediately beyond
the free ends of the cover strip lamellae such that they extend
therebeyond a distance less than the thickness of a stator
packet which is to receive a winding.
4,393,905
WIRE SPLICTNG TOOL
Frank A. Perrien, 205 Calva Rd., North Little Rock, Ark. 72116
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,471
Int. a.5 B21F 15/04
U.S. a. 140—118 7 Qaims
1. Improved weft feeler unit for a fluid-jet loom, comprising:
a weft feeler made up of first and second electrodes which
are mounted to the reed of said loom on the weft arrival
side, and which are spaced from each other along the
traveling path of a weft; and
means for applying a voltage of 900 to 3,000 volts to said
electrodes, which voltage is sufficiently high to establish a
virtual electric connection between said electrodes and
said weft even when there is a physical gap between said
weft and either of said electrodes due to whipping of said
weft as long as said weft has been normally inserted.
4,393,904
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR WINDING STATORS OR
THE LIKE
Willi Muskulus, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Balzer & Droll KG, Niederdorfelden, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 14,546, Feb. 23, 1979, Pat. No. 4,221,243.
This application Jun. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 162,432
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 24,
1978, 2808048
Int a.' H02K 15/04
U.S. a. 140—92.1 3 Qaims
2. In a method of stripping electrical windings from a wind-
ing form onto which said windings are wound onto a collect-
ing tool, said collecting tool comprising an inner ring of col-
1. A wire splicing tool comprising:
elongated, rigid frame means adapted to be manually
grasped by a user of said tool; the frame means having a
generally tubular center portion and a pair of integral,
spaced-apart ends extending outwardly from said center
portion;
rotatable wire control means associated with said frame
center portion for controlling wires to be spliced, said
rotatable wire control means comprising:
shank means rotatably received within said frame center
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1011
for selectively capturing at least a portion of first wire
end; and,
head means for forcibly contacting and splicing a second
wire end about said first wire end in response to rotation
of said tool by said user;
manually operated means for rotating said wire control
means between a first wire admitting or discharge position
and a second wire capturing position, said last mentioned
means for manually rotating said wire control means
comprising an elongated stem projecting outwardly from
said control means shank generally perpendicularly out-
wardly from said frame within a travel limiting slot which
prevents rotation of said wire control means when said
tool is rotated to splice wire ends;
said tubular frame center comprising a slot for admitting or
discharging a wire segment; and,
said shank means comprising an elongated wire receptive
groove adapted to be selectively registered in alignment
with said slot for admitting or discharging a wire end, and
operable when not aligned with said slot to capture a wire
segment passing therethrough.
4,393,906
STERN TO BOW OFFSHORE LOADING SYSTEM
William A. Gill, El Toro, Calif., assignor to FMC Corporation,
Chicago, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 80,369, Oct. 1, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,565
Int. Cl.^ B65B 3/04
U.S. a. 141—387 — 8 Qaims
' " ' — « 'l ■ ' ' ^
1. A loading system for transferring fluid from one fluid
handling means to another and to provide for relative move-
ment between the different handling means, said system com-
prising:
a support structure for mounting on a first fluid handling
means;
a horizontal support boom having an inboard end connected
to said support structure;
a boom conduit member mounted along said boom;
means for coupling the inboard end of said boom conduit
member to said first handling means;
an articulated loading arm having one end thereof pivotally
connected to the outer end of said boom conduit member
for movement about a first horizontal axis;
an inboard sheave;
means for mounting said inboard sheave for rotation about
said first horizontal axis with said inboard sheave fixed to
said loading arm;
a tower sheave rotatably mounted on said support structure;
a loading arm support cable;
means for connecting said support cable between said in-
board sheave and said tower sheave including a plurality
of idler sheaves, means for pivotally mounting a first idler
sheave on the outer end of said support boom adjacent
said inboard sheave, means for mounting a second idler
adjacent said tower sheave, means for connecting a first
end of said support cable to said inboard sheave, said
support cable being trained around said inboard sheave
and trained around a portion of said first and said second
idler sheaves, and means for connecting a second end of
said support cable to said tower sheave;
means for rotating said tower sheave to rotate said inboard
sheave and to pivotally move said loading arm about said
first horizontal axis; and
means for connecting the outboard end of said loading arm
to a second fluid handling means.
4,393,907
CLUTCH ASSIST APPARATUS
Victor Kronstadt, Hagerstown, Md., assignor to Mack Trucks,
Inc., Allentown, Pa.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,867
Int. Q.3 F16D 23/12: G05G 17/00
U.S. Q. 192—99 S 18 Qaims
^v'^^ —
r-»~
,♦ » 4-% a.'
!0' .L«a I* 4' I
1. A clutch assist mechanism for assisting clutch disengage-
ment comprising:
(a) a clutch release shaft for rotation between clutch-
engaged and disengaged positions;
(b) a movable member for movement along a substantially
linear path for rotation of said clutch release shaft;
(c) a radial member fixed to said shaft and extending radially
therefrom, said radial member having a portion for engag-
ing said movable member to translate linear movement of
said movable member into rotational movement of said
shaft;
(d) biasing means for biasing said movable member in a
direction of the linear path corresponding to a clutch-
disengaged position; and
(e) means for preventing said biasing means from assisting
movement of said movable member along the linear path
until after an initial movement along at least a portion of
said linear path;
(0 said movable member being a rack having upstanding
gear teeth, and said radial member being a sector in which
said portion for engaging said movable member is arcuate
and includes complementary gear teeth for engagement
with the gear teeth of said rack.
4,393,908
HAMMER WITH TWO DETACHABLE HEADS
Howard W. Qay, c/o Endall Company, 5083 27th Ave., Rock-
ford, III. 61109
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,591
Int. a.3 B25D 1/02
U.S. Q. 145—29 A 12 Qaims
4. A hammer having a handle and two detachable heads,
each of said heads comprising:
a main body made of a material capable of being cast or
molded, a plate made of a material which is harder than
the material of said body, said plate being located adjacent
one end of said body and being formed with a central
axially extending hole, wrenching flats formed around the
peripheral margms of said plate and unshielded by the
1012
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
material of said body, an internally threaded sleeve dis-
posed within said body and having an outer portion lo-
cated within said hole, said sleeve being joined rigidly to
said plate and being made of a substance which is harder
than the material of said body, a flange integral with the
outer portion of said sleeve and located adjacent the outer
face of said plate, the peripheral margins of said flange
being located radially inwardly of the peripheral margins
of said plate, a series of axially extending openings formed
through said plate between the peripheral margins of said
flange and the peripheral margins of said plate, a ring of
inwardly tapered end up to said end-defined circular
opening;
(g) said diameter measurement at said circular opening being
not greater than said diameter measurement at said mem-
brane;
(h) wherein said diameter measurements are such that upon
insertion of an associated cannula, that portion of said
inner surface at said circular opening provides a circum-
ferential seal about the associated cannula before the can-
nula pierces said membrane.
4,393,910
FLEXIBLE CONTAINER HAVING FOUR LIITING
LOOPS
Odd F. Rasmussen, Porsgrunn, Norway, assignor to Norsk
Hydro A.S., Oslo, Norway
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,855
Claims priority, application Norway, Oct. 29, 1980, 803222
Int. a.3 B65D 33/14
U.S. a. 150—12 3 aaims
said material located on the outer face of said plate and
intimately encircling said flange, and pieces of said mate-
rial integrally joined to said ring and to said body and
extending through said openings,
said handle comprising an elongated handle portion and
further comprising a disc on one end of said handle
portion, said disc being formed with an axially extend-
ing hole, a stud located with the hole in said disc and
having threaded end portions extending in opposite
directions from said disc and threaded into said sleeves
to attach said heads to said handle.
4,393,909
UNIVERSAL ADMINISTRATION PORT
Stephen Pearson, Ingleside, 111., assignor to Baxter Travenol
Laboratories, Inc., Deerfield, 111.
FUed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 335,132
Int. a.' B65D 41/20
U.S. a. 150—8 8 Qaims
1. In a flexible container for the lifting, transportation and
storage of bulk material, said flexible container including a
bottom, plural side walls, an inlet opening and lifting loops, the
improvement wherein:
said flexible container comprises four said lifting loops;
each said lifting loop comprises an integral extension of the
material of at least portions of said side walls;
each said lifting loop has a width of no more than approxi-
mately one-quarter of the circumference of said container;
and
said bottom is formed from an integral extension of the
material of at least one of said side walls.
1. A fluid container administration port for use with an
associated cannula, comprising:
(a) a continuous sidewall;
(b) a cannula-pierceable membrane extending across a base
of said sidewall;
(c) an inwardly tapered end continuous with said sidewall
and opposite said base and said membrane;
(d) a volume-defining inner surface of said sidewall and said
inwardly tapered end;
(e) said inner surface being substantially concentric about a
longitudinal axis of said port taken through the center of
said membrane and the center of a circular opening de-
fined by said inwardly tapered end;
(0 such that diameter measurements, taken across said de-
fined volume so as to span said inner surface, increase
along said longitudinal axis from said membrane substan-
tially up to said inwardly tapered end and decrease along
said longitudinal axis from the commencement of said
4,393,911
SAFETY LINER FOR TIRES
Mason C. Winfield, Orchard Park, N.Y., assignor to Astronics
Corporation, Orchard Park, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 401,938
Int. C1.5 B60C 77/00
U.S. a. 152—158 13 aalms
1. A safety liner for tires, comprising
a pair of complimentary, semi-circular members made of a
generally rigid, plastic material,
a flexible, generally C-shaped bearing disposed to be secured
around the drop center of a tire rim with the inner periph-
eral surface of the bearing engaged with the outer periph-
eral surface of the drop center of the rim, and
means for releasably securing said semi-circular members
together in the form of a ring disposed within a tire and
coaxially around the outside of said bearing, and with the
inner peripheral surfaces of said members being seated
slidably in a circumferential groove formed in the outer
surface of said bearing,
the outer diameter of the ring formed by said members being
greater than that of said rim and less than the inner periph-
ery of a tire mounted on the rim, whereby when the last-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1013
named tire becomes flat it is engaged with the outer sur-
faces of said members to cause rotation of said members
relative to said bearing, and
said bearing having integral, circumferential flange sections
at opposite side of said groove and slidably engageable
with said members to prevent lateral movement thereof
when said members are rotated on said bearing.
t--^
4 8 9 8'
1. A process of manufacturing a tire from one or more liquid
or paste materials which solidify in a mold, the tire being
formed of a crown and of two sidewalls each terminated by a
reinforced bead and each without reinforcement, the mold
being formed by an envelope which defines the outer toroidal
surface of the tire and by a core which defines the inner surface
of the tire, in which process the tire is molded in a cross section
different from that of the tire when mounted on its rim but not
inflated, this process being characterized by the use of a mold
in which, in radial cross section,
the crown of the tire is arranged approximately the same
axially and radially as in the tire mounted on its rim but
not inflated,
the sidewalls have lengths practically identical to those in
the tire when mounted on its rim but not inflated and
median lines each formed of two consecutive segments,
name y, a first segment which is rectilinear or concave
towards the outside of the tire and is adjacent to the shoul-
der and a second segment which is concave towards the
inside of the tire and is adjacent to the bead, the junction
between the two segments being located at a radial dis-
tance from the crown which is greater than in the tire
when mounted on its rim but not inflated, and
the beads are arranged, on the one hand, approximately the
same radially as in the tire when mounted on its rim but
not inflated and, on the other hand, axially outward of
their position on the rim.
7. A tire manufactured by the process in accordance with
claim 1.
4,393,913
TIRE AND WHEEL CONHGURATION
Charles E. Grawey, Peoria, and John J. Groezinger, Dunlap,
both of III., assignors to Caterpillar Tractor Co., Peoria, III.
per No. PCT/US8 1/00758, § 371 Date Jun. 8, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 8, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/04224, PCT Pub.
Date Dec. 9, 1982
PCT Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 287,541
Int. a.' B60C 9/00. 5/00: B60B 21/00, 25/00
U.S. a. 152—364 16 Qaims
4,393,912
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF TIRES BY
MOLDING
Jacques Gouttebessis, La Mouteyre, France, assignor to Com-
pagnie Generale des Etablissements Michelin, Qermont-Fer-
rand, France
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,938
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 10, 1980, 80 26258
Int. a? B60C 3/00. 13/00: B29H 17/02
U.S. a. 152—353 R 7 Qaims
1. In a rim assembly (12) having a rim portion (24) adapted
to have mounted thereon a closed torus tire (14) having a pair
of roll restraining hoops (16) and a shoulder portion (30) axi-
ally outward from each of said roll restraining hoop (16), the
improvement comprising:
said rim assembly (12) including means (22) for reducing the
rolling resistance of the closed torus tire (14), said means
(22) including an elastomeric element (22) positioned
solely between said shoulder portion of said closed torus
tire and said rim portion (24) and being bonded to said rim
portion (24).
7. A wheel assembly (10) comprising:
a rim portion (24) having a tire retaining periphery (18);
a closed torus tire (14) mounted on said rim portion and
having a pair of roll restraining hoops (16) and a rim
contacting periphery (19), said rim contacting periphery
including a shoulder portion (30) positioned axially out-
ward from each of said roll restraining hoops (16); and
a pair of elastomeric elements (22) affixed to said rim portion
(24), each of said elastomeric elements (22) being posi-
tioned between one of said shoulders (30) of the closed
torus tire (14) and the adjacent portion of the tire retaining
periphery.
4,393,914
TIRE CHANGER WITH COMBINATION WHEEL
CLAMPS AND BEAD LOOSENERS
Charles G. Leeper, Antioch, Tenn., assignor to Hennessy Indus-
tries, Inc., LaVergne, Tenn.
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,153
Int. Q.^ B60C 24/06
U.S. Q. 157—1.2 13 Qaims
1. A device for clamping a wheel and loosening the bead of
a tire attached thereto, comprising:
1014
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a table to hold a wheel and tire;
a plurality of radially converging shoes located on said table
and having means for clamping a wheel to said table;
a tongue extensible from at least one of said shoes; and
arcuate structure snugly engaging the cylindrical holder ele-
ment and supported thereby for rotational positioning about
said holder element, and being provided with a pendant pull
member intermediate longitudinal edges of the arcuate struc-
ture with the said edges being selectively spaced from each
other a distance permitting the pull member to be positioned in
accordance with the rotational positioning of the arcuate struc-
ture behind or in front of the holder element or any point
therebetween without obstructing the longitudinal slot
through which the webbing material extends.
motor means for sequentially moving said shoes towards
clamping engagement with a wheel and thereafter extend-
ing said tongue between a wheel and a tire bead to loosen
the tire bead from the wheel.
4^93,916
APPARATUS FOR PRESSURE DIE CASTING
Stancho H. Vutov, and Rashko R. Slavov, both of Sofia, Bul-
garia, assignors to Institute po Metaloznanie i Technologia na
Metalite, Sofia, Bulgaria
Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,289
Claims priority, application Bulgaria, Apr. 2, 1980, 47207
Int. C1.3 B22D 17/06, 18/00
U.S. CI. 164—119 3 Qaims
4,393,915
WEB SECURING DEVICE
Carl G. Olson, 705 N. Elmhurst Rd., Prospect Heights, 111.
60070
Filed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,346
Int. a.3 A47H 13/00. 23/01
U.S. a. 160—395 5 Claims
^^S^^
1. A device for attachment to a free margin of flexible web-
bing material, as for example a map, said device comprising: an
elongated mounting strip to which the free margin of flexible
webbing material may be affixed; and a rigid, tubular, elon-
gated substantially cylindrical holder element having at least
one open end, a cylindrical outer wall, a longitudinal slot
within said outer wall having a width approximating the thick-
ness of the webbing material, said outer wall being of predeter-
mined thickness and continuous in cross-section circumferen-
tially from one edge of said slot to the other edge of said slot,
to define a cylindrical inner surface coaxial therewith, and a
pair of elongated rib means within said holder element and
formed integrally therewith, said rib means each being gener-
ally V-shaped in cross-section, the legs of each V being sym-
metrically arranged with respect to said cylindrical inner sur-
face and diverging from diametrically spaced apices to inte-
grally join said cylindrical inner surface and of similar thick-
ness to said outer wall and integrally joining the interior sur-
face of said outer wall at locations spaced apari from said slot
and extending substantially the entire length thereof for rigidly
supporting said outer wall to resist bending moments while
leaving a major portion of the interior portion of the holder
element hollow so as to minimize the weight thereof, said rib
means further defining an elongated aperture communicating
with said slot and being shaped to accommodate said mounting
strip lengthwise through said open end with said webbing
material extending through said slot, and said aperture having
inner walls formed by said rib means arranged to coact with
said mounting strip to facilitate impingement of said mounting
strip with said aperture inner walls as an incident to the lateral
shifting of said holder element; and handle means including an
1. An apparatus for pressure die casting by using elevated
gas pressure in a die, comprising in combination,
a hydraulic press including a cylinder and a piston having an
axially extending piston rod, said piston being slidably
mounted in said cylinder; said piston dividing said cylin-
der into a first chamber and a second chamber, which
chambers are filled with hydraulic liquid from a source of
pressurized liquid for said hydraulic press;
die means including a die cavity are rigidly connected to said
piston rod;
said piston rod including a gas retaining cavity which is in
communication via first valve means with a reservoir of
pressurized gas;
said gas retaining cavity containing a predetermined quan-
tity of hydraulic liquid in its bottom portion which is in
communication via a passage in said piston rod with said
second chamber in said cylinder;
said second chamber being in communication with said
source of pressurized liquid via second valve means;
an upper portion of said gas retaining cavity being also in
communication with said die cavity via a third valve
means;
and fourth valve means operatively connected to said die
cavity for venting it to the atmosphere;
whereby when said third and fourth valve means are closed
and the hydraulic liquid in the first chamber is pressurized
via said source of pressurized liquid, the piston is caused to
slidably move downwardly in said cylinder causing hy-
draulic liquid to flow from said second chamber into said
gas retaining cavity via said passage in said piston which
causes the gas contained therein to be additionally pres-
surized to a predetermined equilibrium and thereafter said
pressurized gas being caused to flow into the die cavity via
said third valve means.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1015
4,393,917
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CASTING AND
EXTRUDING MATERIAL
Francis J. Fuchs, Jr., Mercer County, N J., assignor to Western
Electric Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continnation-in-part of Ser. No. 810,457, Jun. 27, 1977,
abandoned, This application Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,733
I Int. a.^ B22D 11/12
U.S. a. 164—476 13 Qaims
1. A method of continuously casting and extruding a mate-
rial, comprising the steps of:
(a) at a feeding station, introducing the material in molten
condition into an annular groove in a radially extending,
first surface on a first rotary member;
(b) enclosing a portion of the annular groove in the first
surface with a radially extending second surface on a
second rotary member, so as to define a region of overlap
between the second rotary member and the annular
groove;
(c) rotating the first and second rotary members simulta-
neously about two different axes in such direction as to
transport the molten material within said annular groove
from the feeding station and partly through said region of
overlap while simultaneously cooling said material to
produce full solidification thereof in the course of such
transportation thereof; and
(d) further utilizing the rotation of said first and second
members to cause extrusion of the material from the annu-
lar groove, in solidified condition, through an extrusion
die disposed in said groove with at least part thereof being
within said region of overlap, said die having an aperture
shaped in conformity with a desired cross-sectional con-
figuration, thereby to form an elongated product of said
desired cross-sectional configuration from said material.
4,393,918
MELTING LATENT-HEAT HEAT OR COLD
EXCHANGER-STORAGE DEVICE
Jean Patry, 9, rue Saint-Paul, Paris, France (75004)
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,845
Int. a.3 F28D/ 7/00
U.S. a. 165—10 7 Qaims
1. A heat or cold exchanger and storage device operable
according to the melting latent heat effect, said device com-
prising:
an elongated main container divided into two halves by a
longitudinal partition to create two chambers connected
at one end of said main container;
a plurality of elementary containers stacked in said two
chambers in a manner such that a heat carrier medium
circulated through said chambers will pass around said
elementary containers and will meet a homogeneous resis-
tance;
each said elementary container comprising a pair of semi-
spherical elements so shaped such that when assembled
there will be a gap therebetween permitting circulation
therethrough of the heat carrier medium;
each said element being filled with a heat and/or cold stor-
age medium capable of generating a substantial quantity of
heat when melting;
each said element being formed of a deformable material
capable of absorbing volumetric variations resulting from
crystallization; and
each said element containing therein an air pocket to pro-
duce an expansion inherent to the device.
4,393,919
THERMAL ENERGY METER
Gary R. Anderson, 428 E. Chapel St., Rockton, III. 61072
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,433
Int. Q.3G01K 77/00
U.S. Q. 165—11 R 7 Claims
^r
1. A device for monitoring the thermal energy used by a
single unit of a multi-unit building having a central space con-
ditioning system said device comprising an energy monitoring
circuit having a sensor unit comprising two temperature sen-
sors separated by a solid sensor element, a differencing means
to determine the temperature difference between said two
temperature sensors, and a recording and display means for the
totalization and reading of the energy consumption monitored
wherein said sensor unit is thermally coupled to a space condi-
tioning heat exchanger.
4,393,920
MANIPULATOR FOR WORKING IN A HEAT
EXCHANGER
Michitsune Shima, Kobe; Shiso Kihara, Akashi; Takeo Omichi,
Kobe; Taeqji Igarashi, Shiga, and Kenji Mangetsu, Kameoka,
all of Japan, assignors to The Kansai Electric Power Co., Inc.,
Osaka; Kyushu Electric Power Co., Inc., Fukuoka; Shikoku
Electric Power Co., Inc., Takamatsu and Mitsubishi Jukogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, all of, Japan
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,029
Int. a.3 F28F 11/00
U.S. Q. 165—11 A 7 Qaims
1. A manipulator for working in a heat exchanger, the heat
exchanger including a water chamber delimited by a drum end
plate and a header plate on which a large number of heat
transfer tubes of a vertical type heat exchanger are arrayed, the
manipulator comprising a support frame disposable within said
water chamber; a freely extensible and contractible main arm
having a first base end portion mounted on said support frame
and a tip end portion, said main arm being rotatable about said
first base end portion and vertically swingable about a first
fulcrum at said first base end portion; a sub-arm having a
1016
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
second base end portion mounted at said tip end portion of said
main arm, said sub-arm being rotatable about said second base
end portion and vertically swingable about a second fulcrum at
said second base end portion, said sub-arm being positionable
in parallel to said header plate; a vertically movable clamp
shaft insertable into one of said large number of heat transfer
tubes, coaxial with the rotational axis of said sub-arm; and a
position detector for detecting the position of said clamp shaft
for use in positioning said clamp shaft so as to become coaxial
with said one of said large number of heat transfer tubes, pro-
vided on said clamp shaft.
said temperature signal output from said temperature
sensor means, and said externally supplied signal which
corresponds to said reference constant, set point, tempera-
ture level and for producing an error signal which is the
difference between said ((externally supplied, set point
temj)erature signal) minus (temperature signal)) and said
(heat transfer signal);
drive amplifier means for producing a positioning drive
signal to said electromechanical valve responsively to said
error signal from said differential amplifier means.
4,393,922
ENGINE UNIT WITH LUBRICANT COOLING
Friedrich Bahrle, Kernen, and Helmut Wulf, Ostfildem, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Daimler-Benz Aktien-
gesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,372
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1980, 3002155
Int. a.5 F28F 15/00
U.S. a. 165—41 4 Qaims
r
4,393,921
aRCUIT CONTROLLING COOLANT FLOW TO A
NON-LINEAR HEAT EXCHANGER THROUGH A
NONLINEAR ELECTROMECHANICAL VALVE
Terry B. Zbinden, Maple Grove, Minn., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 397,954
Int. a.i G05D 15/00
U.S. a. 165^*0 5 Qaims
?7 29
1. In a thermal exchange coolant loop wherein coolant from
a reservoir is pumped as regulated by the position of an electro-
mechanical valve, through a heat exchanger for heat transfer,
an electrical control circuit for said electromechanical valve to
the end that the temperature of said coolant within said reser-
voir may be essentially maintained, via said heat transfer, at a
reference constant, set point, temperature level as determined
by an externally supplied signal, said electromechanical valve
control circuit comprising;
position potentiometer means for providing a linear position
signal output resfwnsively to the position of said electro-
mechanical valve;
non-linear compensator means responsive to said position
signal output of said position potentiometer means for
deriving a heat transfer signal output which is approxi-
mately linear with the coolant flow controlled by said
electromechanical valve;
temperature sensor means for providing a temperature signal
output, essentially linear over a temperature range, re-
sponsively to the temperature of said coolant within said
reservoir;
differential amplifier means for receiving said heat transfer
signal output from said non-linear compensator means.
1. A differential gear of a vehicle driving axle lubricated by
means of a liquid lubricant, having a lubricant collecting pipe
as well as having a lubricant cooling system, comprising a heat
pipe, with its heat-receiving part, that is circular in its cross
section, projecting directly into the lubricant collecting space
in an area of an especially high reflux current or turbulence of
the lubricant in the collecting space; the heat-emitting part of
the heat pipe, in the operational installation position of the
differential gear, is geodetically higher than its heat-receiving
part; and the heat-emitting part of the heat pipe is formed in a
plate-shaped manner, of two sheet-metal plates that are welded
to one another so that they are hermetically tight, with the
heat-emitting part being exposed to ambient air and being
aligned in the driving direction of the vehicle, where the sur-
face in the heat-emitting part of the heat pipe that can be used
for the formation of the condensate is larger than the surface in
the heat-receiving part that can be used for the evaporation.
4^93 023
CONTOUR-ADAPTIVE ATMOSPHERIC HEAT
EXCHANGE APPARATUS
Jack J. Press, 17426 Plaza Destacado, San Diego, Calif. 92128
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,490
Int. Q.3 F28F 3/12. 21/06: F24J 3/02
U.S. Q. 165—46 2 Qaims
1. An atmospheric heat transfer apparatus which is capable
of bending over structures, said apparatus consisting of:
a sealed container having front and rear walls which are
made of thin, pliable sheet material which have smooth
inner surfaces capable of contacting each other over sub-
stantially their entire inner surfaces so as to provide a
planar liquid passageway therebetween;
said container having an inlet and an outlet for the liquid so
that the inlet can be positioned above the outlet to cause
the liquid to flow by gravity and cause a negative pressure
within the container which draws the container walls
toward one another with only the liquid flowing therebe-
tween; and
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1017
I
means for relieving compression contact between the con- 4^3,925
tainer walls where any bend occurs in the container, the STOVE PIPE HEAT EXTRACTOR
Kenneth J. Jacobsen, 14005 SW. Bonnie Brae Ct., Beaverton,
Oreg. 97005, and Jerome F. Moshofsky, 9019 SW. 15th St.,
Portland, Oreg. 97219
Filed Nov. 2, 1977, Ser, No. 847,798
Int. Q.' F24F 3/02
U.S. Q. 165—122 3 Qaims
compression contact relieving means being located only
where such bend occurs.
1. A heat exchange apparatus for use with hydrogen storing
material, comprising;
a hydrogen reservoir;
a heat source;
a heat exchanger having a low temperature fluid pathway
defined by first closed conduit means in said heat ex-
changer and a high temperature fluid pathway indepen-
dent of said low temperature fluid pathway and defined by
second closed conduit means in said heat exchanger;
pressure controlling means;
a heat utilizing system; and
a regenerator chamber packed with a heat storing material
and disposed only between said high temperature fluid
pathway and said low temperature fluid pathway of said
heat exchanger, wherein the high temperature fluid path-
way is connected to said heat source and the low tempera-
ture fluid pathway is connected to said heat utilizing
system, and said regenerator chamber is connected via
said pressure controlling means to said hydrogen reser-
voir.
m
4,393,924
HEAt EXCHANGE APPARATUS WITH USE OF
HYDROGEN STORING MATERIAL
Takayoshi Asami, Ohtsu, and Hidekazu Sonoi, Kobe, both of
Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho, Kobe,
Japan
- I Filed Jun. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 274,194
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 23, 1980, 55-85700
Int. Q.3 F28D 27/00
U.S. Q. 165—104.12 7 Qaims
^a
\^=>
1. A stove pipe heat extractor comprising:
a hot gas conducting inner pipe having a longitudinal central
axis;
an inner jacket surrounding the inner pipe, the pipe and inner
jacket defining a first air path;
an outer jacket surrounding the pipe and inner jacket, the
inner and outer jackets defining a second air path;
means for introducing air into the first air path in a spiral
upward air flow pattern;
means for reversing air flow from the first air path and
directing the flow downward in a spiral flow pattern into
the second air path;
and an air exit vent operatively connected to the second air
path.
4,393,926
CLOVER HEAT EXCHANGER CORE
Guy H. AppeU 2235 W. 25th St, Sui Pedro, Cdif. 90732
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,354
Int. Q.3 F28D 7/00. 7/10
U.S. Q. 165—165 9 Qaims
1. A heat exchanger comprising a plurality of elongate paral-
lel fluid medium conducting tubes, a first fluid handling means
communicating with the opposite ends of the tubes to deliver
a first fluid medium into one end and to receive said medium at
the other end thereof, a second fluid handling means directing
a second fluid medium about the exterior of and between the
tubes, each tube is formed with an uneven number of circum-
ferentially spaced longitudinally extending grooves and cir-
cumferentially spaced longitudinally extending lobes, each
lobe occurs between a pair of adjacent grooves, the grooves
have concave substantially radially outwardly disposed out-
side bottom surfaces and the lobes have substantially radially
outwardly disposed convex outside surfaces, the radius of said
convex surfaces is less than the radius of said concave surfaces.
1018
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the lobes at the sides of each tube projecting toward adjacent
tubes extend to the related grooves of said adjacent tubes with
•'iba
valve, a sucker rod pump including a traveling valve, and a
string of sucker rods, apparatus for positioning a selected
volume of a selected fluid in the bottom of said well without
disturbing said pump, rods, tubing, or standing valve, compris-
ing;
(a) a first opening in said tubing above said sucker rod pump;
(b) a shroud, or cylindrical pipe, outside of, said tubing
string, forming an annulus between said tubing and said
shroud, said shroud extending to a point below the inlet to
said sucker rod pump, from a point above said first open-
ing; means to seal said shroud to the outside of said tubing
string above said first opening;
(c) crossover means inserted into said tubing string in the
vicinity of the inlet to said sucker rod pump; said cross-
over means sealed to said shroud; permitting radial flow of
well fluid from outside said shroud to the inlet to said
sucker rod pump, and also permitting longitudinal flow of
fluid down said annulus from said first opening to the
bottom of said shroud;
(d) an overpressure relief valve set to open at a selected fluid
pressure on its inlet, said relief valve positioned at and
closing off the bottom end of said shroud;
(e) at the mouth of said well, means to close off the top of
said tubing string; and
(0 means to inject at least a selected first volume of a se-
lected first fluid, into said closed top end of said tubing at
a selected pressure above atmospheric pressure.
4,393,928
APPARATUS FOR USE IN REJUVENATING OIL WELLS
Charles E. Wamock, Sr., P.O. Box 509, Ventura, Calif. 93002
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,640
Int. C1.3 E21B 43/00
U.S. a. 166—105 2 Qaims
^ :f^ ^
/f^^
the concave and convex surfaces of the related lobes and
grooves in spaced relationship.
4,393,927
APPARATUS FOR POSITIONING A TREATING LIQUID
AT THE BOTTOM OF A WELL
Mortimer Singer, 2320 Plaza del Grande, Las Vegas, Nev. 89102
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 94,381, No?. 15, 1979, Pat. No.
4,267,888. This application Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,361
Int. a.' E21B 37/00. 37/06
U.S. a. 166—105 11 Claims
rlErC^"
1. In a liquid producing well having installed at least a string
of tubing extending from the surface to the bottom, a standing
1. An apparatus for use in rejuvenating oil wells wherein
such rejuvenation involves injecting steam through a pipe-
string and holding the steam under pressure in the well for a
period of time before a production pump is lowered into the
pipestring to resume production pumping operations, includ-
ing, in combination:
(a) a sub incorporating a check valve comprising a valve
seat, ball and spring biasing the ball against the seat, said
sub having exterior upper and lower threads for insertion
into the pipestring so that steam can pass down through
the pipestring and through the check valve to the sur-
rounding formations, the check valve blocking back flow
of steam into the pipestring, said sub having internal
threads at its upper and lower ends, and a reduced diame-
ter central opening defining an annular shoulder facing
said upper end, said seat being receivable in said upper end
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1019
for seating on said annular shoulder; a threaded collar
received in said upper internal threads to hold said seat
against said annular shoulder; and a spring cage thread-
edly received in said lower internal threads of said sub for
holding said spring for said check valve in a manner to
urge said ball upwardly through the reduced diameter
central opening against said valve seat, whereby said
check valve can be easily disassembled for maintenance
purposes; and
(b) a hollow probe member having a lower narrow nose
portion with a plurality of openings in its lateral wall, the
diameter of said nose portion being less than the diameter
of the seat for said check valve, the upper end of said
probe member having threads for threaded engagement
with the lower end of said production pump such that the
probe member can be substituted for the normal pump
screen threadedly held therein, whereby after steam has
been injected into the well, the check valve will hold the
pressure and block back flow so that said production
pump can immediately be lowered while said well is cool-
ing and the pressure is dropping, said probe member serv-
ing to enter said valve seat and unseat said ball to thereby
open said check valve and permit production pumping of
the well to resume.
4,393,929
WELL PACKERS AND SLIP ASSEMBLIES FOR USE
THEREWITH
Neil H. Akkerman, Kingwood, Tex., assignor to AVA Interna-
tional, Houston, Tex.
I Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 233,627
' Int. a.3 E21B 33/128. 33/129
U.S. CI. 166—134 13 Claims
1. A packer for use in closing off an annular space about a
pipe string within a well bore, comprising a tubular member
adapted to be connected as part of the pipe string, first and
second sleeves surrounding the tubular member, normally
contracted packing and slip elements carried about the first
sleeve, means for expanding the packing and slip elements into
engagement with the well bore in response to movement of
one of said sleeves from an axially extended to an axially re-
tracted position with respect to the other sleeve, means form-
ing an annular chamber in which fluid at a lesser pressure than
ambient well fluid may be contained and including a piston on
said one sleeve, whereby said well fluid urges said one sleeve
toward retracted position, and a circumferentially expandible
and contractible ring disposed within said chamber and having
wedging surfaces and ratchet teeth on its opposite sides en-
gageable with corresponding parts on said one sleeve and one
of the other sleeve and tubular member for locking said sleeves
I032O.G.— 39
against extension as said one sleeve is moved to retracted
position.
4 393 930
SUBTERRANEAN WELL PRESSURE SURGING TOOL
Richard J. Ross, and Luis E. Mendez, both of Houston, Tex.,
assignors to Baker International Corporation, Orange, Calif.
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,997
Int. a.' E21B 37/08
U.S. a. 166—188 8 Qaims
1. In a surging apparatus for cleaning particulates from the
perforations or the production formation face of a subterra-
nean well, the apparatus including a surge chamber connect-
able to a tubing string and insertable in the well casing at
atmospheric pressure, and a pressure actuated lower valve
positionable between the lower end of the atmospheric pres-
sure surge chamber and the casing bore adjacent to the casing
perforations, said pressure operated lower valve being actu-
ated by a predetermined increase in the fluid pressure in the
annulus between the casing and the tubing string, the improve-
ment comprising: a packer apparatus carried on said tubing
string for selective sealing engagement at a predeterminable
position in the well; a flapper valve pivotally mounted in the
tubing string above the atmospheric pressure surge chamber
and normally closing the bore of the tubing string; an axially
shiftable actuating sleeve normally engaging the perimeter of
said flapper valve to maintain same in a closed position with
respect to the bore of the tubing string; radially shiftable lock-
ing means normally securing said actuating sleeve in said valve
closing position; a retainer sleeve normally holding said lock-
ing means in said normal locking position, said retainer sleeve
having a lower end disposed in a fluid pressure chamber com-
municable with the bore of the tubing string; shear means
preventing movement of said retaining sleeve from its normal
locking position with respect to the lockmg means, whereby an
increase in fluid pressure in said tubing string bore above a
predetermined level effects the shearing of said shear means
and the axial movement of said retainer sleeve to release said
locking means; a piston shoulder on said actuating sleeve ex-
posed to fluid pressure in the tubing string bore by the pressure
induced movement of said retainer sleeve to effect the shifting
of said actuating sleeve to an unlocked position relative to said
flapper valve; and biasing means for urging said flapper valve
to its open position.
1020
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,931 4,393,932
COMBINATION HYDRAULICALLY SET HANGER METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNIFORMLY
ASSEMBLY WITH EXPANSION JOINT PACKING GRAVEL AROUND A WELL CASING OR
John F. Muse; Rudy B. Callihan; Bobby F. Goad, all of San LINER
Antonio, and Qyde S. Wainwright, Jr., McQueeney, all of Albert G. Bodine, 7877 Woodley Ave., Van Nuys, Calif. 91406
Tex., assignors to Baker International Corporation, Orange, Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 243,846
Calif Int. a.J E21B 33/13
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,839 U.S. Q. 166— 249 8 Qaims
Int. a.' E21B 19/10
U.S. a. 166—208 5 Qaims
1. Appartus for cementing a liner in the bottom of a subterra-
nean well bore below the well casing comprising, in combina-
tion: a torque transmitting, annular expansion joint having its
upper end adapted to be secured to a tubular work string; an
annular running tool secured to the bottom end of said torque
transmitting, annular expansion joint, said running tool and
said expansion joint defining interconnected axial bores having
substantially the same l.D. as the tubular work string; a liner
hanger secured in surrounding relationship to said running
tools by left hand threads; a liner sleeve assembly having its top
end secured to the lower portion of said liner hanger; said liner
sleeve assembly including means for attaching a cement float
shoe at its bottom end and a landing collar sleeve disposed
above the cement float shoe; shearable valve means in said
landing collar permitting the development of a predetermined
fluid pressure in the bore of said running tool; said liner hanger
having a plurality of slips disposed around its exterior periph-
ery and movable outwardly to engage the well casing; resilient
means urging said slips outwardly; axially movable means on
said running tool retaining said slips in an inwardly retracted
position during run-in of the aforesaid apparatus; an annular
piston formed on said axially movable means, said running tool
defining an annular cylinder chamber cooperable with said
annular piston and in fluid communication with said bore of
said running tool, whereby the application of a predetermined
fluid pressure to the tubular work string effects displacement
of said piston to release said slips to expand into engagement
with the well casing and set the hanger; said axially movable
means including a ring axially fixed on said axially movable
means but rotatable relative thereto; a plurality of axial fingers
secured to said ring and respectively engagable with said slips,
whereby right hand rotation of said running tool relative to
said liner sleeve assembly will alternatively release said slips
and set the hanger and permit removal of the running tool; said
shearable valve means being sheared and displaced down-
wardly in the liner by an increase of fluid pressure above said
predetermined value, thereby permitting flow of cementing
fluid into said liner.
W^
iriij-
1. A method for uniformly packing gravel around the perfo-
rated region of a well liner comprising the steps of
installing a casing through overburden to a fluid producing
formation,
insulling a liner at the bottom end of said casing in said
formation, said liner having apertures therein for passing
said fluid to the interior thereof,
pouring gravel into the region surrounding said liner to
inhibit the flow of foreign material through said apertures
into the interior of said liner,
generating high level sonic elastic wave energy, and
coupling said sonic energy to the gravel through an elastic
column coupled to the liner to effect the fluidization
thereof and the resultant uniform distribution and com-
paction of said gravel without voids therein around the
liner.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1021
4 393 933
DETERMINATION OF MAXIMUM FRACTURE
PRESSURE
Kenneth G. Nolte, and Michael B. Smith, both of Tulsa, Okla.,
assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 155,873, Jun. 20, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,666
1 1 Int. a.3 E21B 49/00
U.S. a. 166-250 8 Qaims
and continuing to inject said wettability alteration fluid into
said coal seam until the permeability thereof to the flow of said
"■s?^ g^^?^?'^C7^3^r'5^^^.^J^^:?V^^T;^V7V7^5 -T
o5
40 60 100 200
Tint. KINUTES
'^J-
combustion-supporting gas therethrough has increased to a
maximum extent.
1. A method of determining the maximum bottomhole treat-
ing pressure which should be attained during the fracturing of
a subterranean formation at a first wellbore extending into the
formation, which comprises
extending a fracture into the formation from a second well-
bore extending into the formation by injecting fluid into
the fracture at a rate sufficient for extending said fracture
into the formation until the change in the bottomhole
treating pressure is substantially zero during the injection
of the fluid,
measuring at the second wellbore the bottomhole treating
pressure,
determining the bottomhole treating pressure at which the
change in bottomhole treating pressure during the forma-
tion of the fracture extending from the second wellbore is
substantially zero, and
taking the sum of said determined bottomhole treating pres-
sure less the in situ closure stress of the formation at the
second wellbore plus the in situ closure stress of the for-
mation at a said first wellbore extending into the formation
as the maximum bottomhole treating pressure which
should be attained during the fracturing of the formation
at said first wellbore.
4,393,935
STIMULATION OF GAS WELLS WITH PHOSPHATE
ESTER SURFACTANTS
William B. Walton, Oeburne, Tex., assignor to BASF Wyan-
dotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 154,651, May 30, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,278,129. This application Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,098
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 14,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. CV E21B 43/22
U.S. a. 166-263 10 Qaims
1. A method of treating gas-bearing subterranean formations
to improve permeability thereof and increase or restore pro-
duction of gas comprising introducing into said formation
through a producing means in fluid communication with said
gas-bearing subterranean formation, a treatmg fluid compris-
ing:
(A) an aqueous solution of about 5 to about 50 weight per-
cent of an alkyl or aralkyl polyoxyalkylene phosphate
ester surfactant having the formula:
4,393,934
CONDITIONING A COAL SEAM PRIOR TO IN-SITU
GASinCATION
Joseph G. Savins, and James C. Melrose, both of Dallas, Tex.,
assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
1 Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 296,039
I Int. C\? E21B 43/24
U.S. a. 166-261 10 Qaims
1. A method for conditioning a subsurface wet coal seam
prior to in-situ gasification wherein combustion of a portion of
the coal in said seam has been initiated and is maintained by
injection of a combustion-supporting gas into said seam
through an injection well whereby there results an in-situ
combustion front containing hot combustion gases which
move toward a spaced production well and movement of this
front displaces the hot combustion gases into the production
well for recovery, the improvement comprising injecting into
said coal seam via said injection well a wettability alteration
fluid, said wettability alteration fluid capable of decreasing the
water content of said coal and altering the wettability of said
coal thereby increasing the permeability thereof to the flow of
gas therethrough; recovering fluids including the wettability
alteration fluid from said coal seam via said production well.
{OH)Jl|-0-[(A)„— 0]j,— P-(OX).
0-[(A)„-01,-P-(0XV
(I)
(II)
wherein Ri represents an alkyl radical containing from
about 10 to 18 carbon atoms, R2 represents an alkyl radical
of about 5 to about 27 carbon atoms or a cycloalkyl radical
and radicals derived from mineral oils containing alkyl,
cycloalkyl and mixed alkylcycloalkyl radicals having
from about 12 to 27 carbon atoms, R3 and R4 represent
either hydrogen or alkyl of from about 1 to 22 carbon
atoms and the higher alkyls defined by R] and cycloalkyls
defined by R2 or radicals derived from mineral oils; A
represents the residue of ethylene oxide, ethylene oxide
and tetrahydrofuran, or mixed lower alkylene oxides
selected from the group consisting of ethylene oxide,
propylene oxide, butylene oxide, alone or including tetra-
hydrofuran, wherein the total molecular weight of said
ester is about 500 to about 1500, and wherein A can be
heteric or block in molecular configuration; n represents
the degree of oxyalkylation; x and y are I or 2, the sum of
X and y is 3 and z is an integer of 0 to 5; X is hydrogen or
1022
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a monovalent cation selected from at least one of the
group consisting of an alkali metal, and ammonium; and
thereafter,
(B) injecting water into the pore space adjacent to the well
bore in amounts sufficient to displace the aqueous solution
of said phosphate ester out into the formation,
(C) retaining said aqueous solution of said phosphate ester
and water within said formation for a period of not less
than 24 hours and
(D) thereafter, pumping and/or displacing said aqueous
solution of said phosphate ester and said water from said
formation into the well bore by injecting water into said
formation by an injection means in fluid communication
with said gas-bearing subterranean formation to produce
the desired gas through said producing means.
product of reacting sulfur trioxide with Ch to C20 olefins, and
(d) a noncondensable gas, present in the vapor phase in an
amount between about 0.0003 and 0.3 percent by mol, calcu-
lated on total mols in the vapor phase.
19. In a process for displacing oil within an oil-containing
subterranean reservoir by flowing a steam-containing fluid in
conjunction with a surfactant component through the pores of
a relatively steam-permeable zone with said reservoir, the
improvement which comprises: employing as the fluid flowed
through the pores of the reservoir the steam foam-forming
composition of claim 1.
4,393,936
METHOD FOR THE ENHANCED RECOVERY OF OIL
AND NATURAL GAS
Virgil A. Josendal, Pomona, Calif., assignor to Union Oil Com-
pany of California, Brea, Calif.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,957
Int. a.3 E21B 43/22
U.S. a. 166—263 28 Claims
1. A method for the recovery of hydrocarbons from a sub-
terranean formation containing both natural gas and liquid
petroleum, said formation having an upper first zone contain-
mg said natural gas, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) introducing a gaseous displacement fluid through a first
well communicating with said first zone so as to displace
at least a portion of said natural gas from said first zone to
a second well and recovering said portion of natural gas
through said second well; and
(b) thereafter introducing an oil-miscible displacement fluid
into said formation at a selected pressure so as to displace
at least a portion of said liquid petroleum to a recovery
well, and recovering said portion of liquid petroleum
through said recovery well.
4,393,938
TREATING WELLS WITH
lON-EXCHANGE-PRECIPITATED SCALE INHIBITOR
Jimmie B. Lawson, and Edwin A. Richardson, both of Houston,
Tex., assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Apr. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 252,566
Int. C\? E21B 43/16. 43/25: C09K 3/00
U.S. a. 166—279 5 Qaims
1. A well treating process for inhibiting scaling by fluid
which is produced from a clay-containing subterranean reser-
voir which tends to exchange cations with those contained
within an injected aqueous solution, comprising:
dissolving within an aqueous solution of relatively neutral pH
(a) at least one nitrogen-containing phosphonate scale inhib-
iting compound which contains scale-inhibiting anions that
form multivalent cation salts which are only slightly soluble
at the pH of the solution and (b) enough of at least one
substantially neutral salt to both provide a ratio of monova-
lent-to-multivalent cations of at least about 100 and to sub-
stantially saturate the solution with respect to multivalent
cation salts of the scale-inhibiting anions;
injecting said solution into a portion of said reservoir which (a)
has a significant tendency to exchange cations with those
contained within an injected aqueous solution and (b) con-
tains a significant proportion of adsorbed multivalent cati-
ons; and,
controlling the rate at which said solution is injected so that at
least some portions of that solution remain relatively near
the well long enough to induce a significant precipitation of
scale inhibitor salt due to the ion-exchange-induced addition
of multivalent cations to the solution.
4,393,937
OLEHN SULFONATE-IMPROVED STEAM FOAM
DRIVE
Richard E. Dilgren, Houston, and Kenneth B. Owens, Spring,
both of Tex., assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,425
Int. a.3 E21B 43/24
U.S. a. 166—272 29 Qaims
1. A steam-foam-forming composition useful in the displace-
ment of oil within the pores of or a production of oil from an
oil-containing reservoir, consisting essentially of (a) water,
present in the composition, at a temperature substantially
equalling its boiling temperature at the reservoir pressure, in
both a liquid phase and a vapor phase of steam having a quality
of at least about 30% but not more than about 80%, (b) an
electrolyte, present in the liquid phase in an amount between
about 0. 1 and 5 percent by weight, calculated on the weight of
the liquid phase, (c) a surfactant component, present in the
liquid phase in an amount between about 0.01 and 5 percent by
weight, calculated on the weight of the liquid phase, said
surfactant component comprising in substantial part olefin
sulfonate obtained by hydrolysis and neutralization of the
4,393,939
CLAY STABILIZATION DURING OIL AND GAS WELL
CEMENTING OPERATIONS
Charles W. Smith, and John K. Borchardt, both of Duncan,
Okla., assignors to Halliburton Services, Duncan, Okia.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,963
Int. a.3 E21B 33/138
U.S. a. 166—293 24 Qaims
1. A process for filling a zone adjacent to a permeable forma-
tion containing clays and treating said clays with a clay stabi-
lizing organic cationic polymer comprising:
mixing an aqueous inorganic cement slurry containing a water
soluble clay stabilizing organic cationic polymer, said poly-
mer having a molecular weight of about 400-6,000,000 and
containing cationic groups of nitrogen, sulfur, or phospho-
rous or combinations thereof, wherein said polymer is added
to said slurry in an effective concentration to produce a
filtrate containing polymer in an amount of at least about
0.1% by weight of filtrate; and
introducing said aqueous cement slurry into said zone.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1023
4,393,940
RETRIEVABLE FLOAT VALVE ASSEMBLY
Larry V. Cooper, Lake Charles, and Michael W. Sloane, Sr.,
Egan, both of La., assignors to Ace Fishing & Rental Tools,
Inc., Lake Charles, La.
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,580
Int. C\? E21B 34/08
U.S. a. 166—325 10 Qaims
1. A retrievable float valve housing tool assembly for place-
ment in a drill string comprising:
a. a sub member having on one end portion thereof, upper
drill string connection means for connecting said sub to a
drill string, said sub being open-ended providing between
the open ends a continuous fluid conveying bore;
b. lower drill string connection means on the lowermost
portion of said sub for removably connecting said sub at
its lower end to a drill string which depends downwardly
therefrom;
c. float valve canister means attachable during operation to
and supported by said sub member for housing a float
valve therewithin, said canister means having a continu-
ous fluid conveying bore from one end portion to the
other thereof and defining therewithin a float valve recep-
tive space; and
d. attachment means for attaching said canister means to said
sub, said means comprising a connector on the canister
means which attaches to said sub member at the lower
portion thereof independently of the sub member/lower
drill string connection, so that disassembly of the sub
member/lower drill string connection alone allows re-
moval of the upper portion of the drill string with the sub
member and the canister means.
4,393,941
CHIMNEY RRE SNUFFER
Barry A. Stevens, Box 122, Leland Ave., North Springffeld, Vt.
05150 I
I Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,437
Int. a.3 A62C 13/24
U.S. a. 169—70 3 Claims
■A I %
0 I I 1 'i
1. A chimney fire snuffer for attachment to the end of a
garden hose or the like for lowering through a chimney for
extinguishing chimney fires caused by accumulated creosote
on the interior surfaces of the chimney and tending to block the
chimney interior, said snuffer comprising:
an elongated heavy metal cylindrical body,
a bore extending axially of said body from one end thereof,
a plurality of spray nozzles mounted to the periphery of said
body and forming a circumferentially spaced array about
said body,
said spray nozzles each bearing a fine spray hole opening to
the body bore,
means for sealably coupling one end of said body about said
bore to said hose for filling said bore with water under
pressure,
and wherein said heavy metal body terminates at the end
remote from said hose coupling means in a solid conical
end and functioning to seal off said bore at that end and to
break through accumulated creosote tending to block the
chimney passage when lowered at the end of the garden
hose, and wherein water solely in fine water spray mist
form is directed radially of said heavy metal body to
quickly extinguish the flames with minimal water damage
to the chimney interior and the building bearing the chim-
ney.
4,393,942
VEHICLE-SUPPORTED THREE-POINT COUPLING AND
POSITION RESPONSIVE FLUID BLOCKING DEVICE
THEREFOR
Guy Mijot; Leon Derycke, both of Reims; Didicr Dienne, Guig-
nicourt, and Roger Martinet, Reims, all of France, assignors
to Attelages Lemoine - La Mecano - Soudure Remoise, Reims,
France
Filed Feb. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 120,420
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 16, 1979, 7904034
Int. C1.3 AOIB 63/10
U.S. a. 172—2 16 Qaims
1. A vehicle-supported three-point coupling assembly for
coupling an implement to one end of said vehicle, wherein said
coupling assembly comprises:
a rectangular frame assembly fixedly mounted to said vehi-
cle, said frame assembly including a pair of vertically
extending sides, a pair of horizontally extending sides
interconnecting said vertically extending sides and sup-
porting a yoke for receiving an end of a thrust bar;
a cross-bar assembly including a pair of traction bars pivot-
ally connected to vertically extending support brackets at
one end and extending horizontally away from said verti-
cally extending brackets, said support brackets pivotally
connected to said vertically extending sides, said support
brackets further being interconnected by a tubular bar,
said traction bars supporting at a remaining end thereof an
implement holding means, whereby said cross-bar assem-
bly including said traction bars can pivot in a vertical
direction pivoting said implement holding means;
first and second screw adjustment means each connecting
one of said vertically extending brackets to a respective
one of said traction bars, said screw adjustment means
1024
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
determining the angular relationship between said cross-
bar assembly and said brackets;
a fluid operated jack assembly connected to said vehicle and
to said support brackets;
conduit means supplying an operating fluid to and from said
jack assembly;
a shutter block means for blocking fluid flow through said
jack assembly, said shutter block means having an actua-
tor responsive to a predetermined relative position of said
support bracket with respect to said vehicle; and
valve means for controlling the direction of fluid flow
through said conduit means and said jack assembly,
whereby said cross-bar assembly moves vertically until
said support bracket arrives at said predetermined relative
position with respect to said vehicle.
4^93,944
DRILL RIG
Hans Gugger, and John Ackland, both of Brisbane, Australia,
assignors to Warman International Limited, Australia
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,298
Oaims priority, application Australia, Sep. 18, 1979, PE0543
Int. a.3 E21B 7/02, 15/04
U.S. a. 173—28 5 Oaims
4,393,943
TELESCOPING CARRIER FOR FORESTRY
EQUIPMENT
Albert Andersson, Skelleftea, Sweden, assignor to Stiftelsen
Industriellt Utvecklingscentrum, Skelleftea, Sweden
Filed Feb. 21, 1979, Ser. No. 13,616
Claims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 21, 1978, 78019908
Int. a.3 AOIB 61/04
U.S. a. 172—260.5 13 Qaims
^^
2. A carrier adapted to be supported on a vehicle, one end of
the carrier being provided with means for detachably attach-
ing an implement for forestry cultivation, and the carrier being
capable of being connected to the vehicle at at least one con-
nection means between the ends of the carrier, characterized in
that the connection means comprises a vertical axle permitting
the carrier to be rotated about a vertical axis and in that the
carrier consists of at least two telescopically movable mem-
bers, one of which is capable of being connected to the vehicle
by said connection means and another of which is provided
with said means for detachably attaching said implement for
forestry cultivation, the members being interconnected by a
device consisting of a hydraulic circuit including a hydraulic
double-acting piston-cylinder means connected to the tele-
scoping members, and an accumulator, the device exerting a
force, the force being applied by fluid pressure, the force being
operable to urge the telescopically movable members to tele-
scopically contract the contracting force being adapted to urge
the implement against a towing resistance toward said vehicle
and said device being provided with a hydraulic pressure relief
valve between supply and discharge conduits to the piston-cyl-
inder means and set to a predetermined value so that when the
towing resistance exceeds the predetermined value, the force
urging the members to contract is overcome by said resistance,
thus permitting relative movement between the telescopically
movable members and permitting said force to retract the
members when the towing resistance no longer exceeds the
predetermined value, and the device further comprising a
direction control valve for said piston-cylinder means, the
relief valve being set at a pressure which is higher than the
pressure for the direction control valve.
1. A mobile drill rig comprising:
a mast having a pair of forward and rear mast members con-
nected to each other;
a base frame located at the lower extremities of said mast
members;
a rotation head comprising a variable speed axial piston motor;
a main gear box connected to the output of said piston motor;
a planetary drive adapted to be connected to the input of the
main gear box, said rotation head being mounted directly
between the mast members for axial movement along the
mast members, with the drill line located between the pair of
forward mast members; and
a cradle located at the top of the mast such that the rotation
head can move along said mast members into said cradle,
said cradle being pivotally connected to said mast members
so as to be pivotal about a horizontal axis so that with the
rotation head within said cradle the cradle is adapted to be
pivoted to move the rotation head further back between the
mast members to move the rotation head clear of the drill
line.
4 393 945
ROTARY DRILL WITH AKELLY BAR AND HYDRAULIC
CHUCK
Charles L. Rassieur, Creve Coeur, Mo., assignor to Central
Mine Equipment Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,429
Int. a.3 E21B 3/04
U.S. CI. 173—163 2 Qaims
1. In a rotary drilling apparatus wherein a rotary table is
adapted to be moved axially while rotating, said rotary table
including a spindle having an axially directed passage through
it as its center of rotation, a kelly bar extending through said
passage, means carried by the rotary table for transmitting
positive rotational force from the rotary table to the kelly bar,
said kelly bar having shoulder means having radial shoulder
surfaces, elongated plunger means carried by said rotary table
for selectively engaging and disengaging said kelly bar shoul-
der surfaces and actuating means carried by said rotary table
for causing said plunger means to engage with and disengage
from said shoulder means, the improvement comprising a
tubular housing, means for holding said housing against rota-
tion and to permit axial movement of said housing with said
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1025
table, a chuck body mounted on said spindle and extending
axially within and for rotation with respect to said housing,
said plunger means being mounted for radial movement in said
chuck body, said plunger means having cam surfaces on oppo-
site sides of them intermediate their ends; said actuating means
comprising a tube mounted on said chuck body for axial move-
ment with respect thereto, said tube having spaced fingers,
straddling said plunger means, each with a wedge-shaped
f5?1\
, ZOI
faced support sections on and offset angularly around said
support along the longitudinal direction thereof,
(b) means forming longitudinally spaced attachment holes in
said support sections,
(c) explosive charges having sealed cases fixed to the sup-
port in the attachments holes,
(d) means on each of said support sections forming said
longitudinally spaced attachment holes in pairs with a
distance between the centers of each pair smaller than the
maximum diameter of a charge perpendicular to its axis,
said attachment holes being configured to support the
charges with axes substantially perpendicular to said sup-
port section fiat faces,
(e) rear parts in the charge cases of reduced diameter for
engaging in said attachment holes such that two charges
are fixed on each of said support sections with the axes of
said two charges oriented in opposite radial directions,
and
(0 detonating means connected to said charges to fire them.
IM'
camming surface for engaging the said cam surfaces of said
plungers and moving said plungers outwardly radially upon
axial movement of said tube to disengage said plungers from
said kelly bar shoulder means, hydraulic means for moving said
tube axially selectively, and means for biasing said plungers
toward and into engagement with said kelly bar shoulder
means when said tube camming means are moved away from
said plungers.
4 393 947
SOUND ATTENUATING ROCK DRILL SHANK
Uwe Lutze, Munich; Dieter Scholz, Unterpfaffenhofen, and
Ernst Brennsteiner, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany.
assignors to Hiiti Aktiengesellschaft, Schaan, Liechtenstein
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,522
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 27,
1980, 3044775
Int. 0.'E21B 17/22
U.S. O. 175-323 8 Qaims
J
4,393,946
WELL PERFORATING APPARATUS
Alain Pottier, Houston, Tex.; Pierre Chesnel, Savigny-sur-Orge,
and Bernard Chaintreau, Avon, both of France, assignors to
Schlumberger Technology Corporation, Houston, Tex.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,868
Oaims priority, application France, Aug. 12, 1980, 80 17723;
Feb. 10, 1981, 81 02547
Int. O.^E21B'/i/;;7
U.S. O. 175—4.56 21 Oaims
i --^'
, ; =•
Jl..Jt
ii .,
1. Rock drill comprising an axially elongated drill shank, a
boring head at one end of said drill shank, a helix extending
around and in the axial direction of said shank for carrying
borings away from said boring head, said helix spaced radially
— outwardly from said shank, an axially extending tubular shell
coextensive for the axial length thereof with said drill shank
and located between said shank and said helix, means formed
of a highly polymerized material for spacing said tubular shell
radially outwardly from said drill shank, said helix is supported
on said tubular shell, wherein the improvement comprises
means located between said helix and said drill shank for pro-
viding a sound-attenuating effect and said sound-attenuating
means comprises first a support element, located between and
^ ^ _^, , p. in contact with said helix and said tubular shell and serving
(a) an elongated metallic support tube having successive both as a support for said helix and as a barrier preventing the
portions which are crushed edge to edge in different transmission of vibrations between said helix and said tubular
predetermined radial directions to form a series of fiat- shell.
1. A well perforating apparatus comprising:
1026
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,948
ROCK BORING BIT WITH NOVEL TEETH AND
GEOMETRY
Carlos Fernandez, West Covina, Calif., assignor to Boniard I
Brown, West Covina, Calif.
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,814
Int. CI? E21B 10/16
U.S. a. 175—374
cutting tooth means cuts a substantially circular track
about said axis of advance.
4 193 950
TARE WEIGHING APPARATUS AND METHOD
THEREFOR
12 Qaims King L. Klopfenstein, Prospect Heights, and Robert H. Connors,
Chicago, both of III., assignors to Triangle Package Machin-
ery Company, Chicago, 111.
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,986
Int. a.3 GOIG 13/14
U.S. CI. 177—108 16 Qaims
^*3°t«c3..-:^©
1. A rock boring bit assembly comprising:
a body adapted for engagement with associated driving
components;
at least one cone rotatively mounted on said body, said cone
having an axis;
each cone including a plurality of cutting members disposed
over substantially all the conical face thereof in generally
upstanding relationship to the face, said cutting members
having generally rectilinear edges; and
at least some of said cutting members being disposed in a
plurality of rings, all of said rings extending around said
axis, each of said plurality of rings being axially spaced
along said axis and overlapping with at least one other
ring and having the cutting members of the respective
rings interspersed.
4,393,949
ROCK BORING APPARATUS
Carl R. Peterson, Boxford, Mass., assignor to Peterson Associ-
ates, Ltd., Boxford, Mass.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,906
Int. a? E21B 10/16
VJS. a. 175—377 11 Claims
1. A high-speed, particulate material batch weighing appara-
tus for the cyclic weighing and discharge of individual por-
tions of said material which are of a predetermined, uniform
weight and wherein errors caused by changes in the tare
weight of said apparatus are compensated for, said apparatus
comprising:
a weighing bucket with a discharge gate;
first means for measuring the tare weight of said weighing
bucket and discharge gate combination when said dis-
charge gate is open follovC-ing the discharge of said mate-
rial therefrom and the stabilization of said tare weight and
for generating a first control signal following said mea-
surement;
control means integrally coupled to said discharge gate and
to said first means for receiving said first control signal
and for closing said discharge gate in response thereto;
and
second means for measuring and comparing the weight of
the discharge gate, the weighing bucket and material
therein with said tare weight and for generating a second
control signal when the weight of said discharge gate,
weighing bucket and material therein exceeds said tare
weight by said predetermined weight, said second means
coupled to said control means for providing said second
control signal thereto for discharging the material from
said weigh bucket in response thereto.
1. Apparatus for boring holes in rock comprising
a boring head rotatable about an axis of advance, and
a multiplicity of cutters mounted on said head, at least a
plurality of said cutters each comprising a helical disc
cutter comprising
a cutter body roUtable about a cutter axis, and cutting
tooth means forming a helical path about said cutter
axis, wherein said path does not close upon itself, the
locus of said path upon rotation of said head having a
generally conical envelope tapering in the direction of
said advance
each said cutter body being mounted on said boring head
for free rotation about said cutter axis, whereby each
4 393 951
MEASURING DEVICE OF THE USEFUL LOAD AND OF
THE LOAD ON THE AXLES OF A TRUCK
Loos Horst-Rudolf, ViliMt-rar-GIane, and Bernard Dupre,
Marly, both of Switzerland, assignors to Vibro-Meter S.A.,
Fribourg, Switzerland
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,647
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 9, 1980,
9066/80
Int. a.3 GOIG 19/08
U.S. a. 177—136 12 Claims
1. Measuring device of the useful load and of the load on the
axles of a truck comprising a frame and a tipper, the measure-
ment being effected by load cells mounted between said frame
and said tipper, characterized in that the setting and the ar-
rangement of said load cells permits to the tipper a mobility
July 19, 1983 GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
nt number of degress of
freedom so that the load cells are submitted exclusively to the
1027
with respect to the frame with a sufficient number of degress of 4,393,953
f*i
I
SNOWMOBILE
Roland Boulianne, 227 de la Fabrique St., Jonquiere, Canada
(G7X 3N8)
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,772
Int. a.^ B62M 27/02
U.S. a. 180—190
9aaims
^^-r—
constraints resulting from the weight of said tipper and of said
useful load.
4 393 952
STEERING GEAR FOR A TRACK-LAYING VEHICLE
Joachim Schreiner, Gratkorn, Austria, assignor to Bombardier-
Rotax Gesellschaft mbH., Vienna, Austria
per No. PCr/AT80/00024, § 371 Date Mar. 12, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 10, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00240, PCT Pub
Date Feb. 5, 1981
PCT Filed Jul. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 242,332
Claims priority, application Austria, Jul. 12, 1979, 4856/79
Int. a.3 B62D 11/18
U.S. a. 180-6.44 5 ci3i„,
9. A snowmobile comprising a body having a front end and
a rear end, a front ski assembly attached to the body and carry-
ing the front end thereof, an endless track attached to the body
and carrying the rear end thereof, a rear ski assembly and a
suspension arm system pivotally attaching the rear ski assem-
bly and the endless track to the rear end of the body for verti-
cal pivoting displacement of the rear ski assembly and the
endless track about a transverse pivot axis relative to each
other and to the body, said suspension arm system including a
pair of suspension arms longitudinally extending in fore-and-aft
direction, and pivotally connecting the endless track and the
rear ski assembly relative one to the other, and a resilient
suspension pivotally connecting the suspension arms relative to
the body for resilient up-and-down displacement of the suspen-
sion arms relative to the body.
4,393,954
MOTORIZED BICYCLE
Paul B. Soucy, and John J. Soucy, both of 119 West St., Me-
thuen, Mass. 01844
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,156
Int. a.' B62K 11/00
U.S. CI. 180-205 5 Qwms
6. A steering arrangement for a tracklaying vehicle having
an engine, a drive shaft, and right and left drive wheels, the
steering arrangement comprising:
right and left planetary-gear transmissions each having a sun
gear connected to the respective wheel;
a ring gear coaxially surrounding the respective sun gear
and connected directly to the drive shaft, the ring gears
being joined together for joint rotation;
at least one planet gear meshing with the respective sun
and ring gears; and
a planet carrier carrying the respective planet gear;
respective independently operable right and left hydrostatic
drive motors connected to the planet carriers of the re-
spective transmissions; and
hydrostatic pump means driven by the engine for indepen-
dently powering and operating the drive motors for add-
ing the rotation of the other inputs to that of the respective
outputs.
3. In combination with a bicycle having a pedal crank shaft
housing, a pedal crank shaft journaled in said housing, a frame
having a front diagonal bar, an upwardly extending bar form-
ing a seat support, a rearwardly extending fork, a forwardly
extending fork, a wheel carried by said forward fork, a rear
wheel carried by said rear fork and a sprocket assembly on the
rear wheel, a motor unit attached to said bicycle frame, power
input means for transmitting power output from said motor to
said pedal crank shaft, a sprocket assembly mounted on said
pedal crank shaft, a chain connecting said sprocket assembly
with said rear wheel sprocket assembly, and pedal cranks
extending from said pedal crank shaft, the improvement com-
prising means for engaging said pedal cranks to impart move-
ment to said pedal crank shaft and to disengage said pedal
crank when power is transmitted from said motor to said pedal
1028
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
crank shaft and comprising a cam surface disposed on the pedal
crank shaft adjacent the ends of said pedal cranks, a slot dis-
posed in said pedal cranks, a movable pin disposed in said slot,
a tension spring disposed in said slot for urging said pin-into
engagement with said cam surface, said cam surface having a
portion of its surface arranged to engage said pin during opera-
tion of said pedal cranks whereby said pedal cranks transmit
movement to said pedal crank shaft.
4 393 955
MOTORBUS OR SIMILAR VEHICLE
Albert Van Mullem, Boutersem, Belgium, assignor to PVBA
Van Mullem, Tienen, Belgium
Continuation of Ser. No. 140,419, Apr. 14, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 5^ 1982, Ser. No. 365,807
Claims priority, application Belgium, Apr. 12, 1979, 194570
Int. a.^ B60K 9/00
U.S. a. 180—291 ^ Claims
nicating with the front side compartment, and a water drain
path having an inlet port opened to the bottom of the front side
compartment and an outlet port opened to the surrounding
portion of the outlet pipe.
4 393 957
METHOD OF ELIMINATING TRUCK HUNTING IN
RAILWAY TRUCKS
V. T. Hawthorne, 310 Danell Rd., Radnor, Pa. 19087
Filed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 228,976
Int. C1.3 B61K 3/00
U.S. CI. 184—3 R 8 Claims
^l-TX-
«2
r_-
i-
Z-i
r--i
[motoh 1
ISENSOH
1. A vehicle such as a motor bus having at least a first
wheeled support having first wheels adjacent one end thereof
and a second wheeled support having second wheels adjacent
the other end thereof, said supports including cross members
extending between the wheels, a bodywork having a length at
least substantially equal to the distance between said wheeled
supports, said bodywork defining an upper beam structure,
body means suspended from said beam structure and including
a lowermost floor with at least a part of the floor at or below
the level of the axis of rotation of said wheels, said beam struc-
ture defining means for stiffening the bodywork against both
transverse and longitudinal bending, and support means for
resiliently supporting said beam structure on said wheeled
supports, said support means including an upright portion
extending upwardly from said wheeled supports and adjacent
the side walls of the bodywork, and further including upper-
most shock absorbers between said upright portion and said
beam structure for providing enhanced stability in the support
of the beam structure in its upper disposition.
HUNTING
SENSOR
^
'J 42 <atAK£'
SENSOR
4,393,956
DRAINING DEVICE USED IN A CAR-MUFFLER
Minoru Tsukui; Hiroshi Sekiguchi, both of Ohta, and Takatoshi
Machida, Ashikag^, all of Japan, assignors to Fuji Jukogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,442
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 8, 1981, 56-50564[U]
Int. a.3 FOIN 1/08
U.S. a. 181—265 4 Qaims
1. A draining device used in a car-muffler characterized by
comprising a hollow cylindrical muffler body having a plural-
ity of compartments separated by means of partition plates
with they having water passing holes disposed to their bot-
toms, and inlet pipe for exhaust gas communicated to one of
the compartments except of that positioned in the front side of
the muffler, some intermediary pipes used to communicate the
exhaust gas between the compartments, an outlet pipe commu-
1. In the operation of a rail vehicle having trucks with rail
contacting wheels and brakes with brake shoes associated with
each of said wheels, said rail vehicle being associated with
other similar rail vehicles and pulled by a locomotive means,
said trucks on each of said pulled rail vehicles tending to vi-
brate or hunt when pulled by said locomotive means at a speed
above a critical speed, a method of eliminating said vibration or
hunting to increase the critical speed of said rail vehicle to a
value above its operating speed comprised of:
sensing the speed of said vehicle and producing a correlated
speed signal;
comparing said speed signal to a fixed reference signal corre-
lated to the critical speed; and
applying a low coefficient of friction material to the wheels
of said rail vehicle to provide a lubricating film between
said wheels and the rail on which they ride only when said
speed signal exceeds said reference signal.
4,393,958
PROGRESSIVE-CENTRAL LUBRICATION SYSTEM
Horst Saretzky, Ennepetal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
De Limon Fluhme GmbH & Co., Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 235,288
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 6,
1980, 3008543
Int. C1.3 F16N 7/38. 29/00
U S. Q. 184 7 D ^' Qaims
1. In a progressive central lubricating system having at least
two progressive distributors connected to a feed line, of which
distributors a first so-called master distributor has a plurality of
outlets and a second of the progressive distributors has a con-
JULY 19i'l983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1029
trol chamber, a control line for connecting one of the outlets of
the master distributor to the control chamber of the second of
the progressive distributors, said control chamber having no
direct connection to the feed line, the improvement comprising
a predetermined additional amount control lines respec-
tively corresponding to the other outlets of the master
distributor.
and rigidly fixing said axle with said chassis for stabilizing the
support for said vehicle chassis.
CH
V
M
cH A
• ■-. a
■^
^10 111
i „ 16 !
LpTlEiU
I
P
-I _J
4 393 959
HYDRAULIC STABILIZER FOR AXLE ON MAST LIFT
VEHICLE
Alvin W. Acker, Topeka, Kans., assignor to Allis-Chalmers
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
I Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 214,642
' Int. C\? B66F / 7/00; B60G 21/06
US- CI. 187-9 E 9 Qaims
25
9'j
24
j-.^-.jJ tii^23
1. A stabilizer on a lift vehicle comprising, a vehicle having
a lift mast, a lift carriage reciprocally mounted on said mast for
carrying a load, a vehicle chassis, a pivotal axle pivotally
supporting said vehicle chassis, a pair of hydraulic cylinders
with each cylinder pivotally connected to said axle and to said
chassis on opposing sides of said chassis, a hydraulic stabilizer
circuit circulating hydraulic Huid in one cylinder and out the
other cylinder of said hydraulic cylinders to allow pivoting of
said axle, a normally open control valve between said hydrau-
lic cylinders controlling the flow of hydraulic fluid in and out
of said hydraulic cylinders, pressure relief valves for cross-
over flow between said hydraulic cylinders controlling prede-
termined stabilizing forces, said control valve closing and
interrupting flow in and out of said hydraulic cylinders respon-
sive to the lift of the carriage on said mast lifting above a
predetermined height thereby locking said hydraulic cylinders
A 3Q3 050
LOW NOISE RAILROAD RETARDER BRAKE SHOE
STRUCTURE
Michael B. Mazur, and Emil M. Punko, both of BrookTield,
Wis., assignors to AAA Sales & Engineering, Inc., Oak Creek,
Wis.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,790
Int. a.^ B61K 7/02
U.S. CI. 188-62 • 17 Claims
4-T
a predetermined amount of other progressive distributors
respectively corresponding to the other outlets of the
master distributor and having respective corresponding
control chambers, the respective corresponding control
chambers thereof are each connected by a separate of said
additional control lines respectively to the other outlets of
the master distributor, and said corresponding control
chambers of said other progressive distributors having no
direct connection to the feed line.
1. A low noise railroad car retarder brake shoe structure
suitable for being supported by a plurality of adjacent brake
beams arranged in tandem in the retarder for braking the wheel
of a railroad car passing through the retarder along a rail, said
structure comprising:
a series of alternating long brake shoes and short brake shoes
afllxable to the brake beams, the length of a long brake
shoe being such that said shoe symmetrically straddles
two adjacent brake beams while leaving a space on the
brake beam in the central portion thereof, the length of a
short brake shoe being such as to occupy the space on the
central portion of the brake beam between two long brake
shoes; said long brake shoe being affixable to each of the
adjacent brake beams at at least two points, said long
brake shoes having braking surfaces containing a plurality
of slanting slots opening therein, said slots being omitted
in the central portion of said long brake shoe, said short
brake shoe having a braking surface containing at least
one slanting slot opening therein.
4 393 961
DEVICE FOR COUPLING PARTS OF A SELF-RAISING
PLATFORM STRUCTURE
Bart Boon, Schiedam, Netherlands, assignor to RSV-Gusto
Engineering B.V., Schiedam, Netherlands
PCT No. PCT/NL80/00022, § 371 Date Feb. 18, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 18, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02853, PCT Pub
Date Dec. 24, 1980
PCT Filed Jun. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 237,148
Int. a.' E02B 17/06
U.S. a. 188-67 4 Qaims
1. In a self-raising platform structure, a device for coupling
together two bodies in any position with respect to each other,
said bodies being mounted for linear displacement with respect
to each other in two opposite directions, a platform forming
one of said bodies and a leg of.said platform structure forming
1030
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the other body, said device comprising: at least one pair of
pawl means, each pawl means having a pawl each pivotally
connected at a pivot point to the same one of said bodies and
provided with a part capable of contacting the other one of
said bodies, said pawl means being arranged at least on both
sides of said other body and the pivot points being disposed in
a plane extending transversely to the direction of displacement,
said contact parts being shaped in such a manner that upon a
pivotal movement of the pawl means towards each other said
contact parts approach each other, so that the relative move-
ment between the bodies will be inhibited in one of said two
directions while being permitted in the other direction, means
for pivoting said pair of pawl means towards and apart from
each other, and at least a second pair of pawl means connected
to said one body and having the same construction as said first
pair of pawl means, and being spaced apart from said first pair
of pawl means but mounted in such a manner that upon a
pivotal movement thereof towards each other the contact parts
of the second pair of pawl means will approach each other so
that relative movement between the bodies is inhibited in the
other direction, and means for pivoting said second pair of
pawl means towards and apart from each other.
4,393,963
DISC BRAKE CALIPER SUPPORT
Roger W. Oltmanns, Jr., South Bend, and Larry A, Portolese,
Granger, both of Ind., assignors to The Bendix Corporation,
Southfield, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 191,188, Sep. 26, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 412,745
Int. CI.' F16D 65/02
U.S. a. 188—73.45 3 Qaims
4,393,962
SELF-CENTERING DEVICE FOR CALIPER BRAKE
ASSEMBLY
Jacob Kobelt, 6110 Oak St., Vancouver, British Columbia,
Canada (V6M 2W2)
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,906
Int. a.' F16D 55/224
U.S. a. 188—72.6 10 Claims
1. A caliper brake assembly having a body and a pair of
caliper arms hinged relative to the body for rotation about at
least one arm hinge axis, the arms cooperating with brake shoes
adjacent inner portions of the arms and an actuator adjacent
outer portions of the arms, the assembly being further charac-
terized by:
(a) a rocker means hinged freely to the body for rotation
about a rocker axis disposed parallel to the hinge axis,
(b) a pair of rocker links having outer portions thereof
hinged to respective caliper arms at equal distances from
the respective hinge axis, and inner portions thereof
hinged to the rocker means,
so that movement of one caliper arm is essentially equal and
opposite to movement of the remaining caliper arm due to
coupling between the caliper arms by the rocker means and
rocker links.
1. A disc brake comprising:
a rotor having friction faces on opposite sides thereof and
rotatable about an axis perpendicular to the plane of said
rotor;
a caliper cooperating with a pair of friction element to urge
the pair of friction elements into engagement with the
friction faces on the rotor to retard rotation of said rotor;
a non-rotating torque member including a pair of circumfer-
entially-spaced arms which define an opening therebe-
tween, said caliper being received in said opening, said
torque member arms having axially-extending grooves in
registry with corresponding axially extending grooves in
said caliper, said grooves cooperating to define a pair of
axially-extending apertures between said torque member
arms and said caliper;
a pair of resilient assemblies slidably disposed within said
axially-extending apertures between said torque member
arms and said caliper, one of said resilient assemblies
comprising a split metal sleeve providing a first spring rate
responsive to initial distortion of said one resilient assem-
bly in a radial direction up to a^ predetermined amount,
and an elastomeric cylinder providing a second additive
spring rate which is higher than said first spring rate, said
elastomeric cylinder being responsive to further distortion
of said resilient assembly in the radial direction beyond the
predetermined amount, said split metal sleeve and said
elastomeric cylinder providing for circumferential move-
ment of said caliper relative to said torque member in
response to distortion of both said split metal sleeve and
said elastomeric cylinder to permit said caliper to abut said
torque member, said caliper sliding axially along said
resilient assemblies and being substantially restrained from
circumferential motion by the arms of said torque mem-
ber, said second additive spring rate increasingly resisting
movement of said caliper into abutment with said torque
member to reduce the velocity of movement of said cali-
per at the time-when said caliper abuts said torque member
in order to diminish the impact during abutment.
July 19,
1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1031
4 393 964
HYBRID POWER SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR
OPERATING SAME
Yves J. Kemper, Birmingham, Mich., assignor to Ipanema Com-
pany, Bloomfieid Hills, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 23,398, Mar. 23, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 938,904, Sep. 1, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,056
Int. a.' B60K 41/28
U.S. CI. 192-.044 34 Qaims
1. A hybrid power system for driving an inertial load,.said
system comprising:
a prime mover having a power shaft and means for converting
a succession of power impulses to rotary motion in said
power shaft, said means requiring an auxiliary supply of
kinetic energy to maintain continuity and smoothness of
power shaft rotation during power generating operation of
said prime mover;
a flywheel having a kinetic energy storage capacity sufficient
to provide said auxiliary supply of kinetic energy;
variable speed transmission for transmitting torque between
said flywheel and the inertial load;
adjustable coupling means between said prime mover power
shaft and said flywheel, said coupling means being adjustable
between a condition of full engagement for driving connec-
tion of said power shaft, said flywheel and said transmission
means, through an intermediate condition of partial engage-
ment in which said flywheel and said power shaft are yielda-
bly connected for transmission of limited torque, and a con-
dition bf complete disengagement to disconnect said
flywheel and said power shaft, thereby to provide a range of
engagement varying from maximum at said condition of full
engagement to minimum at said condition of complete disen-
gagement; and
means for adjusting said coupling means throughout said range
of engagement.
4,393,965
ROTARY ACTUATOR
John Zouzoulas, Williamsville, N.Y., assignor to Andco Actua-
tor Products, Inc., Buffalo, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,644
Int. a.' F16D 21/04
U.S. a. 192-48.91 17 Qaims
1. An actuator comprising:
a drive motor;
an output member capable of receiving an output drive rod;
drive means including a worm wheel mounted around said
output member and freely rotatable relative thereto, said
worm wheel being arranged so as to be rotated by said
drive motor, and a driving portion mounted on said worm
wheel for transmitting power from said worm wheel to
said output member;
coupling means for transmitting rotational movement of said
output member to an output drive rod, said coupling
means including a driver and a stem nut, said driver and
said stem nut being arranged within and coupled to said
output member and said stem nut being capable of being
attached to an output drive rod to be driven by said actua-
tor;
clutch means mounted on said output member at a location
adjacent said drive portion for rotation therewith but
being axially movable along said output member, said
clutch means having lug members at one end capable of
engaging said drive portion and having extension mem-
bers at its other end coupling said clutch means to said
output member so that said clutch means couples said
output member to said drive portion of said drive means
when said clutch means is arranged in a first position m
which said lug members of said clutch means engages said
drive portion of said drive means;
g.—v-^:^:^-"^ Iv .V ■■>
IsL^E^
bias means for normally biasing said clutch means into its
first position;
declutch means capable of causing said clutch means to be
moved into a second position so that said lugs are moved
out of engagement with said drive portion if rotation of
said driving portion ceases;
retainmg means for retaining said clutch means in its second
position until resumption of rotation of said driving por-
tion, said retaining means including a tripper member that
rests upon said driving portion when said clutch means is
in its second position; and.
said driving portion including deactivating means for auto-
matically deactivating said declutch means upon resump-
tion of rotation of said driving portion and enabling said
clutch means to return to its first position.
4,393,966
OPERATION CONTROL APPARATUS OF A
COMPRESSOR
Hiroya Kono; Jun Hasegawa, both of Kariya^ Mitsukane
Inagaki, Anjo, and Hisao Kobayashi, Kariya, all of Japan,
assignors to Toyoda Jidosha Kog>o Kabushiki Kaisha and
Nippon Denso Company Limited, both of Aichi, Japan
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,642
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 26, 1979, 54-138864
Int. aj F04B 49/02. 49/06: F16D 43/24
U.S. a. 192-56 R 9 Oaims
1. An operation control apparatus of a compressor provided
with a rotary shaft which is rotated by a driving apparatus by
way of a clutch, and a housing for rotatably supporting said
rotary shaft, comprising:
a sensed portion disposed on one end surface of said rotary
shaft and offset from the axis of said shaft;
an electromagnetic sensor disposed opposite to a locus de-
scribed by said sensed portion and generating pulse signals
in response to variation of the magnetic flux density which
1032
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
takes place every time said sensed portion passes across
said electromagnetic sensor during rotation of said rotary
shaft; and
the assembly away from the clutch driven plate along a guide,
said assembly comprising;
a bearing having a stationary race;
a co-axial cylindrical stem secured to the stationary race of
the bearing and having at least part with a cross-section in
the form of a polygon providing pairs of diametrically
opposed flats engagable between the fork arms;
a pulse monitoring circuit connected to said electromagnetic
sensor and providing a release commanding signal to said
clutch when it receives no pulse signal from said electro-
magnetic sensor for a predetermined time duration.
4,393,967
ELECTROSTATIC CLUTCH
Jerome J. Cuomo, Lincolndale; Alfred J. Landon, Peekskill, and
Han C. Wang, Yorktown Height, all of N.Y., assignors to
International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 91,310, Nov. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,717
Int. a.3 F16D 27/00; B65H 29/30: B05D 5/12
U.S. a. 192—84 E 24 Qaims
and a radial flange secured on the stem providing an abut-
ment against which the fork arms act during release of the
clutch, said flange having portions of reduced radial width
which are not engageable with the fork arms, and said
flange is orientated relative to the stem so that engage-
ment of the fork arms with any pair of opposed flats on the
stem automatically cause the stem to rotate on the bearing
and align the radially wider portions of the flange with the
fork arms.
4,393,969
ROLLER TABLE FOR USE WITH A POWER SAW
William J. Woell, R.R. 1, Davenport, N. Dak. 58021
Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,777
Int. C1.3 B65G 13/00
U.S. a. 193—35 TE ^ Claims
1. An electrostatic clutch operable by the Johnsen-Rahbek
effect, comprising:
a rotatable drum and a band engageable therewith, said
drum including an engageable surface which is a semicon-
ductive surface comprising a layer of substantially pure
silicon carbide on a conductive substrate, said layer hav-
ing a thickness between about 10 fim and 2,500 ^m and
containing a dopant in an amount effective to cause the
resistivity of the layer to be within a range of from about
10' to 10^ ohm-cm.
4,393,968
CLUTCH RELEASE BEARING ASSEMBLIES
Christopher P. Dee, Bishop Tachbrook, England, assignor to
Automotive Products Limited, Leamington Spa, England
FUed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,808
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 22, 1979,
7944327
Int. C\? F16D 23/14
U.S. a. 192—98 * Claims
1. An annular release bearing assembly for a pull type fric-
tion clutch in which to release the clutch a release fork moves
1. For use in combination with a power tool with which
large workpieces are used, a self-supporting roller table com-
prising:
a frame comprising a pair of spaced, parallel, side members and
end members joining the side members;
a plurality of support legs at each end of the frame for support-
ing said frame independently of the power tool at a height
compatible for cooperation with said power tool, said legs
comprising a pair of leg assemblies at each end of the frame,
each leg assembly comprising a pair of legs, each leg com-
prising a tube section joined to another tube to move as an
assembly and having upper and lower ends, said legs each
including an adjustable leg portion adjustably telescopically
fitted in each tube section;
July 19,, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1033
a plurality of rollers, each roller comprising a plastic pipe 4,393,971
section having two open ends and a pair of plastic end plugs COIN-CONTROLLED VENDING APPARATUS
having surfaces for respectively concentrically engaging an James H. Wilson, 804 W. Mitchell, #410, Arlington, Tex 76013
inside surface of the plastic pipe at both open ends and an Filed Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,762
integrally molded plastic stub shaft, each side member of the Int. Q.' G07F 11/44, 13/02
frame having a plurality of apertures formed therein and ^'S- CI. 194—93 ig Qajms
having annular surfaces for directly receiving the stub shafts /'"Y?
of the end plugs to rotatably mount the stub shafts and said /'p " >,/-'
rollers in generally parallel spaced apart relationship and
directly supported on the annular surfaces; and
hinge means for pivotally mounting the leg assemblies to the / L-uT"
frame side members to position the tubes of each assembly ^
below the lower edge of a respective side member and in
alignment therewith, the hinge axis of the hinge means being
offset from the longitudinal axis of the legs and above the
upper ends of the legs so that when the legs are pivoted
upright the upper ends of the tube sections of the legs abut
against the lower edge of the respective side frame member
to directly support the frame and rollers.
4,393,970
rt'ONOR SYSTEM VENDING MACHINE
Martin P. Strack, Jr., Conway, Ark., assignor to Polyvend Inc.,
Conway, Ark.
I Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,897
I Int. a.3 G07F 11/28
U.S. CI. 194-17 14 Claims
1. A coin operated vending machine comprising:
housing means adapted lo be disposed upon a supporting
surface or structure for containing products to be vended;
door means associated with said housing means and adapted
to be moved between an open, product accessible position
and a closed position;
latching means for releasably maintaining said door means in
a closfed position, the latching means comprising:
latch bolt means for engaging said door means;
solenoid means for locking said latch bolt means, said
solenoid means including plunger means for engaging
said latch bolt means, said solenoid means adapted to
disengage said plunger means from said latch bolt
means thereby unlocking said latch bolt means in re-
sponse to solenoid energization; and,
shield means for temporarily preventing said plunger
means from lockably engaging said latch bolt means
after deenergization of said solenoid means to permit
subsequent opening of said door means;
coin acceptor means for switching current to said solenoid
means in response to the input of preselected coins,
whereby to permit opening of said door means to facilitate
a vend; and,
power supply means for supplying current to said coin ac-
ceptor means.
■jC2i
7. The method of vending merchandise from a machine in
response to the deposit of a prescribed coin using a manually
activated slide, comprising the steps of:
(a) utilizing the movement of a manually activated slide to
move a ball to a position for engaging a merchandise
carrier at a loading station for the carrier, and the ball
being lifted with an elevator to a position for engaging the
merchandise carrier in response to moving the coin slide
within the machine;
(b) utilizing the weight of the ball to operate on the loaded
merchandise carrier so as to move said carrier from the
loading station to an unloading station;
(c) disengaging the ball from an operative association with
the merchandise carrier at the unloading station after the
merchandise has been removed from the carrier; and
(d) returning the merchandise carrier to the loading station
to await the deposit of another coin and the loading of
new merchandise.
4,393,972
COIN CHUTE ASSEMBLY
Rex M. Maloy, Broken Arrow, Okla., assignor to Orin W.
Coburn, Muskogee, Okla.
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,532
Int. a.' G07D 5/02. 5/08: G07F 1/04
U.S. CI. 194-99 1, aaims
1. A coin chute assembly comprising:
a housing having a coin receiving opening, a first coin exit
opening, a second coin exit opening, and a coin passage-
way disposed therein and interconnecting the coin receiv-
ing opening with the first and second coin exit openings.
1034
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the coin passageway characterized as having an upper
coin path, a coin receiving section and a coin reject sec-
tion, the upper coin path and the coin receiving section
being positionable to permit a coin to fall in a substantially
downward direction in a mounted position of the coin
chute assembly through the upper coin path and the coin
receiving section towards the first coin exit opening, and
the upper coin path and the coin reject section being
positionable to permit a coin to fail in a substantially
downward direction in a mounted position of the coin
chute assembly through the upper coin path and the coin
reject section towards the second coin exit opening;
a gate assembly having a first portion movably disposable in
a portion of the coin receiving section and a second por-
tion movably disposable in a portion of the coin reject
section, the gate assembly blocking movement of the coin
through the coin receiving section of the coin path in one
position and directing the coin into the coin reject section
of the coin passageway and the gate assembly being mov-
able to one other position for permitting movement of the
coin into and through the coin receiving section of the
coin passageway and blocking movement of the coin
through the coin reject section of the coin passageway;
and
wherein the housing comprises a coin receiving end, an op-
posed second end, a first side and an opposed second side, the
first and second sides cooperating to define the coin passage-
way in the housing, the opposed second side having a first
elongated opening extending generally transversely to and
intersecting the coin receiving section of the coin passageway,
and a second elongated opening extending generally trans-
versely to and intersecting the coin reject section of the coin
passageway and wherein the gate assembly is movably dis-
posed in the first and the second elongated openings; and
wherein the gate assembly comprises:
a body member having a first side and an opposed second
side;
a first gate disposed on the first side of the body member
extending from the first side of the body, the first gate
being positionable within the first elongated opening in
the housing;
a second gate disposed on the first side of the body member
and extending from the first side of the body member, the
second gate being positionable within the second elon-
gated opening in the housing; and
means for moving the gate assembly in a direction about
perpendicular to the coin passageway, comprising,
a pin member having a first end and an opposed second
end, the first end of the pin member being secured to the
body member of the gate assembly and the pin member
extending a distance generally perpendicularly from the
body member; and
a solenoid operatively connected to the pin member gen-
erally near the second end of the pin member for mov-
ing the pin member and the gate assembly connected
thereto in a direction about perpendicular to the coin
passageway to move the first gate and the second gate
in the respective first and second elongated openings in
the housing.
4,393 973
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR REMOVING
NON-RECnnED CAPSULES FROM A CAPSULE
RECrinCATION AND TRANSPORT DEVICE
Charles E. Ackley, Sr., Oreland, and Charles E. Ackley, Jr.,
Philadelphia, both of Pa., assignors to R. W. Hartnett Com-
pany, Philadelphia, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 939,066, Sep. 1, 1978, abandoned. This
application Jul. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 169,437
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 8, 1995,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 198—384 7 Qaims
, «e
-i
^',.^'^:
^^2-M,
"' ^^^^],
— ^ - - -^^^ 1? — -
1. Method for removing improperly rectified telescoping
capsules from a travelling capsule array, wherein said capsules
have body portions and cap portions of enlarged diameter
relative to said body portions, slideably telescoping over said
body portions, said method comprising:
(a) loading a multiplicity of said capsules into a hopper;
(b) transferring the capsules from the hopper to a rotatable
transport cylinder having a plurality of capsule carrying
cavities at the surface thereof; said capsules being disposed
in random fashion in said cavities, one capsule per cavity,
arrangement of said cavities on said transport cylinder defin-
ing capsule spacing while within said array;
(c) rectifying substantially all of said capsules in said cavities on
said transport cylinder while occasionally appearing non-
rectified capsules continue traveling on said transport cylin-
der;
(d) applying gripping means about all of said capsules, but
grasping only said occasionally appearing non-rectified
capsules, as said capsules, being substantially rectified, travel
in said array; and
(e) removing said non-rectified capsules from said traveling
array by exerting force on said non-rectified capsules sub-
stantially normal to the direction of travel of said array with
" said gripping means while removing said gripping means
from about said rectified capsules thereby leaving said recti-
fied capsules undisturbed in their previously rectified state
while said array is moving.
4. In a capsule rectification and transport device, wherein
said capsules are caused to travel from an upstream location to
a downstream location and wherein said capsules comprise
body portions and enlarged cap portions, the combination
comprising, hopper means into which a multiplicity of capsules
are to be loaded, an endless conveyor, transport means for
receiving said capsules from said hopper and for transporting
them in a downstream direction along a predetermined path to
said endless conveyor, rectification means disposed adjacent to
said transport means for rectifying substantially all of said
capsules into dispositions in which said cap portions of said
rectified capsules lie along one side of a predetermined path
and in which said body portions of said rectified capsules he on
the opposite side of said predetermined path, whereby occa-
sionally appearing non-rectified capsules continue to travel on
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1035
said transport means, and non-rectified capsule removal means
located downstream from said rectification means for remov-
ing said occasionally appearing non-rectified capsules from
said predetermined path, said removal means being positioned
adjacent said predetermined path for contacting said non-recti-
fied capsules as they are carried along said predetermined path,
and said removal means comprising engagement means physi-
cally structured for grasping the non-rectified capsules and
being shaped in such a manner so as to grasp only non-rectified
capsules while not being capable of grasping rectified capsules,
said removal means having capacity for removing said non-
rectified capsules from said path, and means provided for
removing said non-rectified capsules from said removal means.
i.
1. A watertight utility capsule comprising a pair of tubular
opposite end sections each including a closed end and an open
screw threaded end, said closed end defining a rounded outer
surface, at least one intermediate tubular extension section
open at both ends, selectively engageable end to end one with
another and with the tubular opposite end sections and cooper-
atively forming therewith a tubular fully closed container, one
end of each intermediate section and the open end of one
opposite end section being internally screw threaded, the other
end of each intermediate section and open end of the other
opposite end section being externally screw threaded comple-
mentarily relative to the internally screw threading of said one
end and the open end of said one opposite end section, and said
tubular sections assembling end to end by screwing the exter-
nally screw threaded ends into the internally screw threaded
ends respectively, said tubular sections having a constant
cross-section and, when assembled, defining a completely
smooth external surface, with fiush joints at each pair of assem-
bled tubular sections, the constant transverse section of said
tubular section being of predetermined size arranged to fit in
one user's anus to concealably carry something dry in the
user's anus.
iL
U.S. a. 206—3
4,393,975
REFRIGERATED LIP STICK CONTAINER
Constance R. Moore, 8351 E. Rose La., Scottsdale, Ariz. 85253
Filed Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364,524
Int. Q\} B65D 85/72
-385 6 Oaims
1. An apparatus for retaining and refrigeratng a lip stick
dispenser comprising:
(a) a case;
(b) a lip stick dispenser located in said case, said lip stick
dispenser having a lipstick located therein;
(c) retainer means for retaining within said case said lip stick
dispenser, said retainer means defining a chamber between
said case and said lip stick dispenser;
(d) cover means for closing said case to protect said lip stick
dispenser; and
4,393,974
WATERPROOF PLASTIC CONTAINER
Michel Levesque, 2091 Montee de la Station, St. Justine de
Newton, Canada (JOP ITO)
I Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 284,081
Int. Q\} A45C 11/00; B65D 6/02, 8/04
U.S. a. 2Q6— 37 3 Qaims
(e) a refrigerant contained within the chamber defined by
said retainer means and located around said lip stick dis-
penser, said case and said cover means enclosing both said
refrigerant and said lip stick dispenser together therein.
4.393.976
REUSABLE CHILDPROOF CLOSURE
Daniel J. Maguire, 323 W. Waverly Rd., Glenside, Pa. 19038
Filed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser, No. 356,962
Int. CI.' B65D 53/02
U.S. a. 215—211 12 Qaims
^-^J !:Z3j^/^'
l)
1. In a reusable childproof closure suitable to close the noz-
zle of a container of the type wherein the nozzle is defined
from the container by a shoulder, the improvement which
comprises
the nozzle comprising a circular wall having an inside sur-
face and an outside surface,
a peripheral groove extending radially outwardly from
the inside surface of the nozzle; and
a cap in overfilling relationship to the nozzle, the cap com-
prising a top and a hollow, generally cylindrical, closure
wall depending from the top,
said closure having an inside surface and an outside sur-
face, the outside surface being of dimension and config-
uration to slide within and cooperate with the inside
surface of the nozzle circular wall,
a peripheral lip extending radially outwardly from the
outward surface of the cap closure wall,
the configuration of the nozzle peripheral groove and the
configuration of the cap peripheral lip being cooperat-
ing and complementing to form a lock therebetween
when the cap is applied to the nozzle,
the cap further comprising an outer, generally cylindrical
skirt, the said skirt being connected to the said cap
closure wall by a radial extension and being configured
overfit substantially the entire nozzle,
whereby the cap can be removed from the nozzle by applying
upwardly directed forces at the bottom of the said skirt and
sufficient magnitude to force the cap lip out of the nozzle
groove.
1036
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,393,977
CHILD RESISTANT PACKAGE
Wendell D. Willingham, Toledo, Ohio, assignor to Owens-
Illinois, Inc., Toledo, Ohio
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,585
Int. a.' B65D 55/02
U.S. a. 215—211 37 Qaims
^-JiT
(a) a disc-like top wall engageable with the rim to effect a
substantially fluid-tight seal;
(b) an annular skirt depending from the top wall, the skirt
having on its inner periphery:
(i) helical threads configured to mate with the threads on
the first outer wall portion of the container neck to
secure the closure cap to the bottle, the threads cooper-
ating to form a second substantially, fluid-tight seal;
(ii) a radially inwardly projecting tooth for cooperative
reception within the recess of the outer wall portion
when the closure cap is fully threaded onto the con-
tainer, the tooth having a configuration precluding axial
vertical movement thereof in response to relative un-
threading movement of the cap; and,
(iii) a pair of spaced generally vertically extending rupture
zones on either side of the tooth, the rupture zones
extending from the lowermost extremity of the skirt to
points generally adjacent the closure disc;
(c) a tab projecting laterally outwardly of the skirt from a
location, near the lower edge thereof, the tab being dis-
posed between the vertically extending rupture zones
1. A child resistant package comprising
a container having a side wall, a bottom wall and an open
end,
a closure including an outer member and an inner member,
said inner member having a portion thereof extending
through an opening in the outer member such that axial
pressure may be applied through said portion to move the
inner member relative to the outer member in an axial
direction,
a liner insert sealingly engaging the upper end of the con-
tainer,
interengaging means between the inner member and the
liner such that when the closure is removed from the
container, the liner insert is also removed,
spring means between the liner and the inner member yield-
ingly urging the inner member axially outwardly toward
the outer member,
said container having radially resilient portions on the side
wall,
said outer member including a peripheral skirt having por-
tions thereof adapted to engage said radial resilient por-
tions on the container,
said inner member having an annular wall adjacent the skirt
of the outer member,
said annular wall having means thereon operable upon axial
inward movement of said inner member to move said
radially movable portions of the container to disengage
said portions from the portions of the outer member,
said wall of said inner member and said skirt of said outer
member having interengaging portions which engage
upon axially inward movement of the inner member rela-
tive to the outer member so that the closure can be re-
moved by axial movement carrying with it the outer
member, and the inner member and the insert.
142 -
4,393,978
REUSABLE CONTAINER CLOSURE CAP
Milton Kessler, Youngstown, and Myron E. Ullman, Jr.,
Canfield, both of Ohio, assignors to Kessler Products Co.,
Inc., Youngstown, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 182,628, Aug. 29, 1980, Pat. No. 4,354,610.
This application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,327
Int. a.5 B65D 41/34
U.S. a. 215—253 5 Oaims
1. A closure cap for sealing the neck portion of a container
such as a milk bottle, the neck portion having an upstanding
annular rim, a first outer wall portion depending therefrom and
having threads thereon and further having a recess thereon, the
closure cap being formed of a material having limited flexibil-
ity and comprising:
whereby, upon upward flexure of the tab, the rupture
zones will fail and permit the lower skirt area therebe-
tween to be hinged radially outwardly to withdraw the
tooth from the recess and permit unthreading removal of
the closure cap from the neck of the container, the limited
flexibility of the cap material permitting substantial coop-
eration of the threads notwithstanding rupture of the skirt
wall along the rupture lines, where the cap may thereupon
be releasably resecured to the container by the threads
with the closure disc effecting the first seal to preclude
leakage;
(d) the recess on the outer wall portion of the container neck
including an upper wall surface which extends substan-
tially normal to the axis of the container neck; and,
(e) the closure cap tooth including a flat upper surface for
reception in said recess against the upper wall surface
thereof, the tooth further having a camming surface
thereon to permit minimal deflection of said skirt thereon
outwardly as said closure cap is threaded onto the con-
tainer neck portion prior to the reception of the tooth in
the recess.
4,393,979
CLOSURES FOR CONTAINERS
Martin F. Ball, Shrivenham, and Fred Fidler, South Morton, Nr.
Didcot, both of England, assignors to Metal Box Limited,
Reading, England
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,365
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 15, 1980,
8012372
lnt,aJB65D 17/34
U.S. a. 220—270 3 Qaims
1. A container having a wall, an aperture in the wall, an
annulus of gasket material around the aperture on the inside of
the container wall and a plug closure including a plug portion,
said plug portion including a cylindrical wall and an end wall,
said cylindrical wall being disposed in said aperture, said plug
closure being constructed from relatively rigid and stiff syn-
thetic copolymeric plastic material, a flange extending gener-
ally radially outwardly of the cylindrical wall to surroundingly
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
,J
1037
underlie an annular wall portion of said container wall, said
flange being radially outwardly converging in axial cross-sec-
tion to thereby define a deformable feather edge, said feather
1. A liquid tank having a vent arranged to vent the tank
when the tank is in a generally upright -attitude, a filler ar-
ranged to admit liquid into the tank below the upper surface
thereof, whereby in use an air space remains in the tank at all
times, and a pipe for supplying liquid from the tank, said pipe
extending from the base of the tank ai a first side thereof and
terminating as an open-ended vent in the region of the top of
the tank opposite said first side, said pipe including a supply
portion extending as a branch from a part of the pipe opposite
said first side in the region of the base of the tank.
4,393 981
APPARATUS FOR SUPPLYING A PREDETERMINED
NUMBER OF PISTON RINGS TO A WORK STATION
Masahiko Wada, and Masato Ueki, both of Kashiwazaki, Japan,
assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Riken, Tokyo, Japan
I Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,253
Claims priority, application Japan, May 19, 1980, 55-
68417[U]
Int. a.3 B65G 59/00
U.S. a. 221-289 5 Qaims
1. Apparatus for supplying a predetermined number of split
piston rings to a work station comprising:
(a) a charge-side chute having a pair of downwardly inclined
parallel grooves on opposite side surfaces thereof for
holding a supply of rings, said grooves receiving the end
portions of the confronting end faces forming the gap of
the rings whereby the rings are suspended from and slide
down the grooves by gravity;
(b) a discharge-side chute having a pair of similarly inclined
parallel grooves on opposite side surfaces thereof, said
discharge-side chute being spaced from the charge side
chute with its grooves extending in a longitudinal direc-
tion parallel to but out of alignment with the grooves of
the charge-side chute;
(c) slider means for transferring a predetermined number of
rings from the charge chute to the discharge chute inter-
posed between the chutes, said means includmg a slide
plate having inclined parallel grooves on opposite side
edge terminating in a terminal edge held in formed sealing
engagement with the gasket by frictional engagement of the
cylindrical wall in said aperture.
4,393,980
LllQUID CONTAINER ARRANGED TO LIMIT
UNDESIRABLE DRAINAGE
John S. Armour, Farnborough; Peter M. F. Watson, Woking-
ham, and Graham L. Donne, Bracknell, all of England, assign-
ors to The Minister of Transport in Her Britannic Majesty's
Government of the United Kingdom of Great Britain and
Northern Ireland, London, England
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,030
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 17, 1980.
8019788
Int. a.^ B65D 25/00: F16K 45/00
U.S. a. 220-85 S 5 Qaims
21 . a-
surfaces thereof, said plate being vertically movable be-
tween a position where the grooves of said slide plate are
in alignment with the grooves of said charge-side chute to
receive rings from the charge chute and a position where
the grooves of said slide plate are in alignment with the
grooves of said discharge-side chute to transfer the rings
from the slide plate to the discharge chute; and
(d) adjuster means for controlling the number of rings re-
ceived by the slider means and transferred to the dis-
charge chute.
4,393,982
METERED DISPENSING OF LIQUIDS
Alexander Kuckens, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Dagma Deutsche Automaten und Getrankemaschinen
GmbH & Co. KG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 17, 1979, Ser. No. 103,904
Int. CI.' B65D 83/00
U.S. a. 222-209 6 Qaims
1-1
LJ«_«_^ M 16 i
10
1. A device for metered dispensing of liquids, especially
easily perishable organic liquids, comprising a container in the
form of a throw-away package with its outlet opening extend-
ing downward in metering position, a metering vessel portion
of flexible material communicating with the outlet opening and
comprising a tubular member, inlet and outlet openings, and an
electromagnetic actuating means for selectively compressing
the metering vessel and for actuating closing means at the inlet
and outlet of the tubular member, wherein the container is
provided with a collar surrounding the outlet opening, in
which the metering vessel portion constantly connected to the
container can be stored prior to putting the throw-away pack-
age into operation, wherein the tubular member of the meter-
ing vessel portion is provided with an axially compressible
bellows between the closing means, said bellows having a large
1038
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
diameter as compared to its axial height, and wherein the area
of the tubular member arranged therebelow extends through
the central opening of the electromagnetic actuating means
provided in the form of an annular coil, and the area arranged
above the bellows penetrates an anchor plate radially extend-
ing above the bellows.
4,393,983
INTERMESHING SCREW-TYPE REFINER
Erik F. Eriksson, Ymsenvagen 9^, S- 121 42 Johanneshov, Swe-
den
Continuation of Ser. No. 177,749, Dec. 28, 1979, abandoned.
This application Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,644
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 28, 1978,
17035/78
Int. a.3 B30B 3/04. 15/32
U.S. a. 222—233 19 Claims
shell having in the immediate neighbourhood of said gasket at
least one passage for admitting additional gas from said con-
tainer into said shell and having, at the opposite end from said
gasket, a liquid inlet tube, said valve member being axially
extended by a hollow actuating and dispensing stem for said
valve for dispensing a mixture of said liquid and gas, and said
stem passing in a sealing manner through said gasket; said
valve being characterised in that said actuating stem and said
valve member define between them a plurality of passages
1. Apparatus of the type used for treating cellulose pulp,
comprising two intermeshing rotary screws driven synchro-
nously within a housing having lateral and end walls and hav-
ing a material inlet and a material outlet in the range of respec-
tively an inlet and an outlet end of the housing, each screw on
a cylindrical core carrying a surface section constituting a
treating screw thread, said screw thread comprising a feeding
screw thread section starting near said inlet and having a termi-
nal end spaced from said housing outlet end, said cylindrical
core further carrying a feed-reversing surface section starting
near the terminal end of said feeding screw thread section and
having a terminal end near said housing outlet end, said mate-
rial outlet being provided in the lateral wall of said housing
adjacent the termmal end of the feeding screw thread sections
of both screws for discharge of treated material substantially at
right angles in relation to a plane through the axes of said
screws, an outwardly flaring collar outwardly extending from
said lateral housing wall around said material outlet, said collar
having an outlet opening extending in a plane oblique to the
direction of material discharge, means being provided out-
wardly of said collar selectively to restrict the outlet area of
said collar outlet opening, said restricting means comprising a
closure element moveable between a position in which said
oblique collar outlet opening is substantially closed and open-
ing positions in which said oblique collar outlet opening is
selectively uncovered, adjustable means being provided con-
trolling the movement of said closure element to selectively
establish the resistance offered by said restricting means
against discharge of material through said outlet.
closable by said gasket and effective, when opened, to conduct
a flow of mixed liquid and additional gas from the interior of
said shell to the interior of said actuating stem, wherein said
valve member has, facing the gasket, a cylindrical axial recess
of polygonal section in which is secured the hollow actuating
stem in the form of a cylinder of revolution which opens freely
to the base of said recess, forming at least five circumferentially
spaced passages capable of being closed off by said gasket and
of providing communication between the interior of said shell
and said hollow actuating stem.
4,393,985
LADLE SHROUD SUPPORT ASSEMBLY
Rudi Miiller, Bad Oeynhausen, and Wolfgang Loser, Wesel-
Fliiren, both of Fed, Rep. of Germany, assignors to Vesuvius
International Corporation, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,367
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 7, 1980,
8007825
Int. CI.' B22D 41/08
U.S. a. 222—591 10 Claims
4,393,984
VAPOR TAP VALVE FOR AEROSOLS
Andre Debard, Buc, France, assignor to Aerosol Inventions and
Development AS AID SA, Fribourg, Switzerland
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,661
Claims priority, application France, Sep. 20, 1979, 79 23394
Int. a.i B65D 83/14
U.S. a. 222^-402.18 5 Qaims
1. A vapour tap valve for aerosol packages comprising a
mounting cup for crimping onto a container containing liquid
and gas, said mounting cup carrying a valve shell held clamped
against an annular sealing gasket centred on an axial opening in
said mounting cup, said valve shell enclosing and guiding
axially a spring-loaded valve member with a spring urging said
valve member into sealing engagement with said gasket, said
4. An assembly for supporting a ladle protection shroud
cooperable with a movable plate of a rotary slic'e gate mecha-
nism of a metal pour vessel for protecting the pouring of mol-
ten metal into a mould, comprising: a flange (2) extending
outwardly from a ladle protection shroud (1), a shroud holding
ring (4), an intermediate bearing ring (3) disposed between the
flange and the holding ring and configured to define a planar
annular sliding surface (5) with the holding ring to enable free
rotational motion of the shroud and bearing ring about the
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1039
holding ring and interlocking means for slidably coupling the
bearing ring to the holding ring and for preventing relative
axial motion between said rings.
4,393,986
SURFBOARD CARRYING RACK
Michael Sirey, 555 Banyan Tree La. #201, Delray Beach, Fla.
33444
L Filed Jun. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 385,258
Int. a.i B62J 9/00. 11/00. 7/02
-32 A 16 Oaims
1. A rack for carrying a surfboard on edge longitudinally on
a two-wheeled vehicle comprising:
longitudinally extending frame means having a U-shaped
end view transverse to the longitudinal extent of said
frame means for receiving said surfboard;
means for attaching said frame means to a side of said vehi-
cle;
a first U-shaped restraining member having two legs con-
nected by a bight portion, said legs extending from an end
of said frame means so that said bight portion extends
transverse to said longitudinal extent of said frame means;
a second U-shaped restraining member having two legs
connected by a bight portion, said legs of said second
restraining member extending generally upwardly from
adjacent said first restraining member so that the respec-
tive bight portions of the first and second restraining
members function to prevent said surfboard from sliding
forward with respect to said vehicle;
means for preventing said surfboard from moving upward
out of said frame means; and
means for preventing said surfboard from moving rear-
wardly with respect to said vehicle out of said frame
means. ■
4,393,987
SUPERPLASTICALLY FORMED STRUCTURE AND
METHOD OF MAKING
Charles N. Anderson, Kent; Samuel D. EIrod, Seattle, and Ge-
rald O. Miller, Kent, all of Wash., assignors to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
I Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,039
I Int. a.3 B23K 31/02
U.S. a. 228—157 13 Qaims
1. A method of superplastically forming a reinforced panel,
with steps comprising: placing a grid patterned core material
onto a titanium sheet, locating an aluminum shim between the
core and the sheet at alternate grid intersections, spot welding
the core to the sheet at each intersection not having an alumi-
num shim, placing a titanium sheet over the core and spot
welding them together at each grid intersection having an
aluminum spacer, raising the temperature into superplastic
forming range and introducing an inert gas under pressure
between the sheets moving the sheets apart and forming a
panel reinforced with the core material joined at alternate
intersections to opposite face sheets.
4,393,988
SPOON LID
Mary Burke, 2430 Fair Oaks Apt. 187, Sacramento, Calif. 95825
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,444
Int. a.' B65D 43/08. 3/00
U.S. a. 229-43 7 Qaims
1. A deformable container-lid including a spoon integral
therewith comprising in combination:
a lid having substantially planar top and bottom surfaces and
a depending perimeter lip adapted to sealingly engage a
container,
a tab member formed to serve as an eating utensil folded by
a hinge on said bottom surface of said lid inboard of said
lip whereby said utensil is adapted to be folded from a
stored position parallel to and underlying said bottom lid
surface to a hinged outwardly deployed position extend-
ing beyond said lip, said tab member having crease and
score lines thereon to assist deformation.
said lid and hinge formed from a resilient material having a
memory whereby said lid and hinge can be respectively
deformed and deployed to dispense material within said
container with said utensil, and thereafter restored to an
original condition for storage of a portion of the material
in the container.
4.393,989
ENVELOPE-TYPE MAILING FOLDER
Greg P. Maclin, and Allen M. Brandenburger, both of Stone
Mountain, Ga., assignors to Container Corporation of Amer-
ica, Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,350
Int. a.' B65D 27/04. 27/08: G09F 3/18
U.S. a. 229—71 1 Qaim
1. In an envelope-type mailing folder formed from a unitary
blank of foldable paperboard, the combination of:
(a) a rear panel;
(b) a pair of end panels foldably joined to opposite ends of
said rear panel and folded to overlie margmal end portions
of said rear panel;
1040
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
(c) a front panel foldably joined along one side edge to a side
edge of said rear panel;
(d) said front panel overlying said rear panel and said end
panels and being secured to the latter to form with both
said rear panel and said end panels an internal, primary
pocket for receiving material to be transj)orted in said
folder;
(e) a closure flap foldably joined to another side edge of said
front panel and being folded to overlie and be secured to
said rear panel to close said primary pocket;
(0 a transparent, plastic film having marginal areas secured
to a portion of said front panel, said end panels and an
outer surface of said rear panel extending the entire length
thereof to form with said rear panel a separate, external
secondary pocket for receiving and displaying other mate-
rial, said plastic film including a pair of sheets having
adjacent marginal areas disposed in overlapped relation to
provide access to said secondary pocket.
4,393,990
PROCESS AND DEVICE FOR DISPERSING
FLAMMABLE GASES INTO THE ATMOSPHERE
Flavien Lazarre, Pau, France, assignor to Societe Nationale Elf
Aquitaine (Production), Courbevoie, France
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,114
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 7, 1979, 79 30069
Int. a.3 F23D 13/20
U.S. a. 239—1 3 Qaims
A
5--
EZZ2
kzz2
Yrrrrf^
dz
y'
,!A}ni-fy
that the large opening communicates with the chamber
and the plurality of passages; and
radially extending finlike means received within said conical
passage for retarding rotation of water passing through
the nozzle body conical passage.
4,393,992
SPRINKLER HEAD ASSEMBLY
Norman E. Strunk, 401 McMaster Crescent, Saskatoon, Sas-
katchewan, and Anton P. Pohoreski, Box 100, Asquith, Sas-
katchewan, both of Canada
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No, 258,311
Int. a.3 B05B 15/06
U.S. a. 239—200 7 Qaims
1. A process for dispersing flammable gas into the atmo-
sphere without danger of explosion or combustion comprising,
ejecting the gas through at least one opening of specified area,
at a pressure above a minimum pressure, and below a maximum
pressure, said minimum pressure corresponding to a pressure
below which said gas flowing through said opening is explo-
sive, and said maximum pressure corresponding to a pressure
above which said gas fiowing through said opening exhibits
stable ignition in the presence of a flame.
U.S
1
a
4,393,991
SONIC WATER JET NOZZLE
Nathaniel B. Jeffras, Woodland Hills, and Robert H. Torgersen,
Canoga Park, both of Calif., assignors to Automation Indus-
tries, Inc., Greenwich, Conn.
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,286
Int. CUB05B 77/06
a. 239—102 10 Qaims
A sonic water jet nozzle, comprising:
housing including a chamber for containing a source of
sonic energy, and walls defining a plurality of substan-
tially parallel passages lying outwardly of the first cham-
ber, one end of each passage being in open communication
with said chamber in said housing and the other end of
each passage opening to the exterior of said housing;
means for interconnecting the other ends of the passage at
the housing exterior to a source of pressurized fluid;
a nozzle body having a conical passage therethrough with a
relatively large opening at one surface and a relatively
small opening at another surface, the centerline of said
conical passage being substantially parallel to said plural-
ity of passages;
said nozzle body being interconnected with the housing such
l3o 32c 32o 32b
■J8(it~_l . IT" "\ >
"^tr^g.32
1. A sprinkler head assembly including a hollow sprinkler
head assembly tube, a sprinkler tip secured within the upper
portion of said hollow sprinkler head assembly tube, and a
valve secured within the lower portion of said hollow sprinkler
head assembly tube, comprising
(I) means for retaining said sprinkler tip within said hollow
sprinkler head assembly tube, comprising:
(i) first securing means associated with said hollow sprin-
kler head assembly tube;
(ii) second securing means depending from said sprinkler
tip for insertion into the upper portion of said hollow
sprinkler head assembly tube, said second securing
means comprising a pair of diametrically opposite
wings, the lower portions of which are normally biased
towards one another, a central longitudinally extending
tube bifurcated at its lower end interconnecting said
wings, an upwardly facing shoulder at the lower por-
tion of each said wings, and means associated with said
bifurcated central tube for urging said abutment shoul-
ders apart into secure engagement with said retaining
means, said means including a rod disposed within said
bifurcated tube, said rod being of slightly greater diame-
ter than said threaded bore; whereby downward longi-
tudinal movement of said rod urges said abutment
shoulders apart into secure engagement with said re-
taining means;
(iii) retaining means within the upper portion of said hol-
JULY 19,
1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1041
loW sprinkler head assembly tube on the inner wall
thereof; and
(iv) means for urging said securing means into secure
engagement with said retaining means, said means com-
prising said fiburcated tube and said rod; and
(II) a valve assembly comprising a valve seat secured within
said hollow sprinkler head assembly tube, a valve engage-
able with said seat, said valve including a head and a stem
extending therefrom, said stem being provided with a
head, means in said valve assembly to support and guide
said valve for reciprocal motion relative to said seat, said
valve stem being normally in a lower position with the
valve in its fully opened position, and means to control the
vertical position of said valve relative to said seat, said
control means comprising said rod for said securing means
into secure engagement with said retaining means
whereby, when said rod urges said abutment shoulders
apart into secure engagement with said retaining means,
said rod also engages said stem head, thereby to limit
upward movement of said valve stem.
4,393,993
SPRAY GUN
Ewald Kille, and Guido Zimmermann, both of Friedrichshafen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to J. Wagner GmbH, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,666
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 30,
1980, 3020539
Int. a.^ B05B 9/04
U.S. CI. 239-332 14 Qaims
1. A hand held spray gun and supply unit which comprises
a center housing section in the form of an inverted L-shaped
member having a horizontal top leg with top and bottom faces
and a peripheral side wall, said top leg having a front to rear
longitudinally extending bore and a vertical hollow hand grip
leg depending from the rear portion of the horizontal leg with
a fragmental cylindrical recessed front face along the length
thereof under the horizontal leg, a pump assembly removably
mounted in said bore including a pump cylinder in said bore
and a nozzle overlying the peripheral side wall of the horizon-
tal leg at the front of the bore communicating with said cylin-
der, said cylinder having an intake extending through the
bottom face of said horizontal leg, a piston reciprocally
mounted in said cylinder to pump fluid from the intake through
the nozzle, a cylindrical supply container removably sus-
pended from the bottom face of said horizontal leg embraced
by the vertical leg in the recessed front face thereof, an electric
motor mounted on the top face of said horizontal leg driving
said piston, said hollow vertical leg providing a chamber
adapted to receive a battery to energize said motor, a switch on
the top face of said horizontal leg having an actuating button
accessible at the peripheral side wall of said horizontal leg, a
removable cover on said horizontal leg enclosing said motor
and switch, and a tube depending from the bottom face of the
horizontal leg into the container for supplying fiuid from the
bottom of the container to said intake for discharge through
said nozzle.
4,393,994
ELECTROMAGNETIC FUEL INJECTOR WITH
FLEXIBLE DISC VALVE
Gerald C. Rieck, Sterling Heights, Mich., assignor to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,466
Int. Q.' B05B l/iO
U.S. Q. 239-585 3 Qaims
111
i *
V
.*
»44,
JLlfbM""'^
1. An electromagnetic fuel injector including housing means
providing a fuel chamber therein intermediate its ends adapted
to receive fuel and which has an upstanding annular valve seat
therein encircling a discharge passage from said chamber
through which fuel is to be ejected; a fiexed fiexible valve
means having spaced apart fingers positioned in said fuel cham-
ber and adapted to be vertically flexed relative to said valve
seat to open and close said passage; a solenoid means opera-
tively supported in said housing means, said solenoid means
including an axial movable armature positioned to engage one
side of said valve means opposite said valve seat and, a valve-
closing spring positioned to act on said armature in an axial
direction whereby said valve means is forced by said armature
into seating engagement with said valve seat; and, a valve-
opening spring disposed in said discharge passage and posi-
tioned to abut against the opposite side of said valve means to
effect unseating of said valve means from said valve seat when
said solenoid means is energized.
4,393,995
EMERGENCY LOCKING TYPE RETRACTOR
Masahiro Tukamoto, Fujisawa, Japan, assignor to Nippon Seiko
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,004
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1981, 56-
59213[U]
Int. Q.' A62B i5/02: B65H 75/48
U.S. Q. 242—107.4 A 5 Qaims
1. An emergency locking type retractor having a retractor
base; a take-up reel to which webbing is fastened and which is
rotatably supported by said retractor base while being biased in
webbing take-up direction; locking means formed around the
portion of said retractor base which supports said take-up reel;
a latch member supported by said take-up reel for axial sliding
movement between a position in which it is engaged with said
locking means and a non-engaging p>osition in which it is not
engaged with said locking means, said latch member having an
engaging portion and a cam portion; a guide member rotatable
with said take-up reel and having a guide portion normally
engaged with the engaging portion of said latch member and
1042
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
guiding the movement thereof in the axial direction of said
take-up reel; a biasing member for biasing said latch member
toward said non-engaging position; a ratchet wheel having a
toothed portion and a cam portion engaged with the cam
portion of said latch member, said ratchet wheel being loosely
fitted on said take-up reel against axial movement; a first latch
piece mounted on said ratchet wheel for movement between a
first position and a second position and biased toward said first
position; an inertia member loosely fitted on said take-up reel
for operating said first latch piece; a latch portion secured to
said retractor base and engageable with said first latch piece
when said latch piece is brought from said first position to said
second position by said inertia member rotating relative to said
ratchet wheel upon sensing of a webbing draw-out speed ex-
across an arrestment area for engagement with a moving body,
said engagement causing the formation of transverse waves in
the constraining means, including tensile-load absorption
means at opposing ends of the constraining means; wherein the
improvement comprises:
stationary guide means positioned against opposing flexible
linear portions of said constraining means at the side
thereof opposite the direction of said moving body and
longitudinally offset from the moving body engagement
point;
said guide means imparting a curved shape having a dimin-
ishing radius of curvature to said portions whereby less
than total reflection of the transverse waves occurs at the
point where said guide means contact the flexible linear
portions of said constraining means.
4,393,997
REMOVABLE SECONDARY AIRCRAFT FUEL
ENCLOSURE
David L. Gibler, Rancho Palos Verdes, and Daniel J. O'Connell,
Cypress, both of Calif., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Apr. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 368,785
Int. a.3 B64D 17/ i2
.U.S. a. 244—135 R 3 Claims
.'■^ "
ceeding a predetermined value, thereby stopping rotation of
said ratchet wheel; and a vehicle sensing mechanism provided
on said retractor base, said vehicle sensing mechanism includ-
ing a second latch piece and means for sensing a vehicle accel-
eration or deceleration exceeding a predetermined value to
thereby bring said second latch piece from a non-engaging
position in which it is not engaged with the toothed portion of
said ratchet wheel to a position in which it is engaged with said
toothed portion, thereby stopping rotation of said ratchet
wheel; whereby when rotation of said ratchet wheel is
stopped, said latch member is caused to slide axially by the cam
portion of said ratchet wheel through the cam portion of said
latch member and is brought to a position in which it is en-
gaged with said locking means, so that the rotation of said
take-up reel in webbing draw-out direction is locked.
4,393,9%
AIRCRAFT ARRESTMENT SYSTEM
Cazimir Tuman, 71 Caleta Dr., Camarillo, Calif. 93010
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 170,692, Jul. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,739
Int. a.3 B64F 1/02
U.S. CI. 244—110 C 12 Oaims
,/^
1. A removable enclosure for sealing an aircraft fuel tank
against fuel leakage into aircraft fuselage compartments, com-
prising:
a. a drip pan disposed beneath said tank within said fuselage,
said pan defining a shallow trough for collecting liquid
from said tank;
b. a peripheral seal on the surface of said pan;
c. means defining a drain line, communicating with said
trough, for draining said liquid accumulations overboard
said aircraft;
d. first and second upright panels, attached to said aircraft, at
respective opposite ends of said pan; and
e. means for releasably sealing said ends of said pan to said
upright panels and the sides of said pan to said fuselage at
said peripheral seal, said means including a plurality of
overcenter fasteners spaced around the periphery of said
pan releasably interconnecting said pan with said aircraft
and said upright panels.
1. An arrestment system having constraining means placed
4,393,998
TUBE CLAMP
Walter E. Allen, Prospect, Conn., and Douglas D. Wilson,
Huntington, W. Va., assignors to Transamerica DeLaral Inc.,
Princeton, N.J.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,401
Int. C1.3 F16L 3/08
U.S. a. 248—74 R 4 Qaims
1. In clamping apparatus for supporting a metal tube from
fixed structure, wherein (a) a split metal sleeve with raised end
shoulders comprises identical interlocking halves of greater
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1043
than 180° total extent such that each half has self-retaining
snap-action assembly capability in respect of the same metal
tube, and wherein (b) a fixedly mountable loop clamp sur-
rounds the sleeve with axial play between the end shoulders,
the loop clamping being so sized when clamped to said sleeve
as to establish a predetermined frictional resistance to sleeve
displacement with respect to said clamp, the improvement
wherein each of the sleeve halves has a thin layer of friction
material bonded thereto, said friction material comprising an
uncured nitrite rubber-phenolic resin adhesive which incorpo-
rates its curing agents, the bore of the lined sleeve halves being
compressed in engagement with the metal tube such that the
frictional resistance to displacement of the sleeve on the metal
tube is greater than the frictional resistance to sleeve displace-
tween and lateral side members defining the perimeter of
said grid body,
one or more upstanding fixture devices secured to and upon
the upper surface of said top plate for selective engage-
ment and attachment by and to, and disengagement and
detachment from a processing, assembling and/or testing
machine, and for elevating and lowering said pallet for
one or more processing, assembling and/or testing opera-
tions on said device supported on and translated by said
pallet,
and means fixedly securing said fixture devices to said top
plate surface, and securing said top plate, grid body and
bottom plate together.
4,394,000
METAL MIRROR MOUNTING CLIP
Thomas D. Kurtz, 1101 First Ave., Rock Falls, III. 61071
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,122
Int. a.i A47G 1/16
U.S. CI. 248-466 4 claims
ment with respect to said clamp, said adhesive being curable to
establish a bond of said sleeve to said metal tube in the presence
of minimum ambient temperature in the order of 300° P.,
whereby in aircraft application in the vicinity of an engine with
ambient temperatures of at least 300° P., where displacement
accommodation of the sleeve on a metal tube is not desirable,
said sleeve will become bonded to the metal tube upon opera-
tion of the engine; and further whereby in aircraft application
in wing or the like structure which is subject to flexure and
which is characterized by lesser ambient temperatures, said
sleeve will not become bonded to the metal tube but rather will
remain capable of displacement on the metal tube for such
unusual situations of axial play as the clamp-to-sleeve engage-
ment will not accommodate.
' 4,393,999
CONVEYOR PALLET CONSTRUCTION
David J. Forshee, Oxford, Mich., assignor to Syn-Trac Systems
Inc., Oxford, Mich.
I Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,798
I Int. C1.3 B65D 19/32, 19/44
U.S. a. 24»-346 41 Oaims
1. A metal mirror mounting clip comprising, a back plate
having an integral flange on one edge extending forwardly
from the front side of the back plate and an integral lip on the
flange spaced forwardly from the forward side of the back
plate, a mounting screw having a head and a threaded shank,
the back plate having an elongated slot extending perpendicu-
lar to the flange for receiving the shank of the headed mount-
ing screw, the back plate having a pair of mirror guide shoes
integral therewith generally paralleling the slot and spaced
from opposite sides of the slot, said mirror guide shoes each
comprising an elongated strip sheared along its lengthwise
edges from the back plate and having an elongated generally
straight portion offset forwardly from the front side of the
back plate and rearwardly curved end portions at opposite
ends of the straight portion integral with the back plate, the
guide shoes defining guide surfaces spaced forwardly from the"
front side of the back plate a distance greater than the height of
the head of the mounting screw.
\ !
«■■ fi-
\
■^^'f^. ■-
'- L^.*
1. In a conveyor driven plastic pallet structure for support-
ing and translating a device to be processed, assembled and/or
tested, the improved combination comprising
a top plate, an intermediate grid body and a bottom plate
arranged in lamella relationship,
said grid body having a plurality of spaced apart intermedi-
ate grid members defining open pockets or spaces therebe-
4 394 001
HEIGHT-ADJUSTING MECHANISM FOR CHAIR SEAT
Joseph M. Wisniewski, Marne, Mich., assignor to Haworth,
Inc., Holland, Mich.
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,841
Int. a.' F16M 13/00
U.S. CI. 248-542 10 Qaims
1. In a chair having a seat means, a base having thereon an
upwardly-projecting pedestal defining a central opening which
projects vertically downwardly therethrough, a vertically-
elongated spindle having the upper end portion thereof nonro-
tatably secured to said seat means, said spindle projecting
downwardly so that the lower portion thereof is rotatably
positioned and confined within said central opening, said spin-
dle having an elongated central portion thereof provided with
external threads, and a load-released height-adjusting mecha-
nism coacting between said spindle and said pedestal for (I)
rotatably supporting the seat means when occupied for rota-
tion about the axis of the spindle and (2) permitting the height
of said seat means when unoccupied to be vertically adjusted
1044
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
responsive to rotation of the unoccupied seat means relative to
the base, said height-adjusting means including a nut thread-
ably engaged with said spindle, a first clutch means for nonro-
tatably connecting said nut to said spindle when said seat
means is occupied, a second clutch means for nonrotatably
connecting said nut to said pedestal when said seat means is
unoccupied, and spring means normally urging said nut up-
wardly relative to said pedestal for effecting engagement of
said second clutch means when the seat means is unoccupied,
the improvement comprising: an enlarged bore formed in said
pedestal and projecting downwardly from the upper end
thereof in concentric relationship to said central opening, said
second clutch means being mounted adjacent the upper end of
said pedestal, said first clutch means being positioned within
said bore downwardly a substantial distance below said second
clutch means, said nut being disposed vertically between said
first and second clutch means, said second clutch means in-
cludinng a second clutch element fixed to said f>edestal adja-
cent the upper end thereof and disposed for engagement with
tapered portion having a flange opening for lading to pass
through for entry or exit from the tank; said body portion
further including a recess located below the body portion
adapted to receive a valve housing having a valve seat and a
lading valve located within the housing; first fastener means
holding said housing in place within said mounting flange;
shaft means to move said valve between open and closed posi-
ao 16 aa
tions relative to said valve seat extending out of the valve
housing, and wedge means extending longitudinally of said
mounting flange and located between and engaging both said
valve housing and said mounting flange adjacent said shaft
means effective to carry impact load components applied
through said valve housing to said mounting fiange; and
thereby protect said shaft means.
4,394,003
CRYOGENIC BUTTERFLY VALVE WITH
BIDIRECnONAL SEALING CAPABILITY
Ritchie W. Whitaker, El Toro, Calif., assignor to The Walworth
Company, Valley Forge, Del.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,591
Int. a.3 F16K 25/00
U.S. a. 251— 173 SQaims
an opposed upper clutch portion formed on the upper end of
said nut when said nut is in a raised position due to said seat
means being unoccupied, said first clutch means including a
first clutch element which is axially seated on a shoulder
formed on said pedestal in axially downwardly spaced relation-
ship from the upper end of said pedestal, said first clutch ele-
ment being nonrotatably but axially slidably connected to said
spindle and being engageable with an opposed lower clutch
portion formed on the lower end of said nut when the latter is
in its lower position due to said seat means being occupied, and
said spring means comprising a coil spring concentrically
disposed within said bore and having the lower end thereof
seated on said pedestal and the upper end thereof disposed in
operative engagement with said nut for continuously urging
the latter upwardly toward said second clutch element, said
coil spring being disposed in encircling relationship to said first
clutch element, whereby said nut is totally disengaged and is
spaced axially upwardly from said first clutch element when in
said upper position.
4,394,002
MOUNTING FLANGE FOR WAFERSPHERE BOTTOM
OUTLET VALVE
Richard B. Polley, St. Charles, Mo., assignor to ACF Industries,
Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,407
Int. a.3 B61D 5/00
U.S. a. 251—144 15 Qaims
1. A railway tank car valve assembly comprising: a tank
bottom having a tank opening therein; a mounting flange
mounted adjacent said tank opening; said mounting flange
having a tapered portion extending longitudinally on either
side of said lading opening; said mounting flange further in-
cluding a flange body portion located inwardly from said
1. In a valve comprising:
a valve body having a flow passage therethrough;
a valve disc rotatably mounted in said body between valve
open and valve closed positions;
an annular sealing surface around the periphery of said valve
disc; and
an annular sealing device on said body surrounding said
sealing surface;
said sealing device comprising:
an annular relatively wide recess having a relatively narrow
opening therefrom;
a resilient seal ring in said recess;
said seal ring being of generally reclining-U configuration,
with legs transverse to the axis of rotation of said disc;
the radially outer leg being longer than the inner leg so that
pressure acting against the outer surface of said seal ring
will bias same radially inward;
means clamping and sealing the annular edge of said outer
leg in said body; and
a radially extending, dynamic seal inward extension on the
July 19. ,1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1045
end of said inner leg extending through said narrow open-
ing into sealing engagement with said disc.
4,394,004
CARPET STRETCHING TOOL
James R. Allen, 3130 S. 17th St., Omaha, Nebr. 68108; John D.
Allen, 10302 S. 144th St., Omaha, Nebr. 68138, and Robert A.
Knigge, 11808 Cryer Ave., Omaha, Nebr. 68144
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,488
Int. a.J B65H 77/00
U.S. a. 254— 204 SQaims
1. A carpet stretching tool extending along a horizontal
longitudinal-axis and comprising:
A. a pair of laterally extending and substantially parallel
barbed bars including a lead-bar longitudinally spaced
from a trail-bar, each barbed bar including a plurality of
downwardly extending barbs having sharp-ends collec-
tively defining the tool horizontal bottom-plane and being
adapted to removably engage distinct terminal lengths of
carpet to be stretched into proximity;
B. longitudinally extending guide means attached to the
respective barbed bars and located in elevation above the
downwardly extending barbs, said guide means being
adapted to permit relative longitudinal movement be-
tween the carpet engaging barbed bars while also main-
taining them in substantial upright parallelism, said guide
means comprising a cross-sectionally non-circular collar
extending upwardly from one of the barbed bars and a
cross-sectionally non-circular longitudinally extending
shank attached to the other barbed bar and slidably ex-
tending through said collar; and
C. force application means attached to the respective barbed
bars and occupying a distinct elevation located intermedi-
ate the downwardly extending barbs and said guide means
shank, said force application means being adapted to cause
relative longitudinal movement between the carpet engag-
ing barbed bars through said guide means and including:
i. a longitudinally extending elongate threaded stud lo-
cated in elevation below said guide means longitudinal
shank, said stud being firmly attached to one of the
barbed bars and being movably surrounded by the other
barbed bar; and
ii. a handle threadedly engaged with said elongate stud
remote from the stud attachment and adapted to apply
direct pressure upon the movable barbed bar as said
handle is moved along the threaded stud whereby the
movable barbed bar is caused by said handle to move
toward the stud attached barbed bar.
4,394,005
COLLAPSIBLE TRAFnC BARRICADE
James B. Stewart, 436 Smith St., Marion, Ohio 43302
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,171
Int. a.3 E04H 17/14: EOIF li/00: E04G 1/00. 1/32
U.S. a. 256—64 2 Qaims
1. A collapsible traffic barricade comprising a reflective
panel essentially rectangular in shape and in cross-section, the
length of said panel being substantially greater than its height
and the height of said panel being substantially greater than its
width, two metal leg supports each comprising an upper por-
tion, rectangular in shape and of a size slightly larger than the
cross-sectional size of said panel and adapted to receive said
panel therein, and being provided with two legs, each of said
legs being positioned at obtuse angles to said upper portion of
said leg supports both in the plane of said upper portion and in
a plane at right angles to said upper portion, and a horizontal
connector connecting said lower portions of said leg supports
approximately midway thereof, each of said metal legs being
provided on the outside of its lower portion with a rectangular
member of a size adapted to receive a reflective panel therein.
4,394,006
MOLTEN METAL FLOW CONTROL
John R. Bedell, Madison, N.J., assignor to Electric Power Re-
search Institute, Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 367,031
Int. Cl.^ B22D 39/06
U.S. CI. 266-239 n Qaims
1. A flow control device for supplying molten metal from a
crucible or the like for a continuous casting operation or the
like comprising:
nozzle means for receiving and discharging metal flow for
casting;
a weir upstream of the nozzle discharge for controlling
metal flow through said nozzle means; and means for
selectively applying pressurized gas against inflowing
molten metal in said weir to stop molten metal flow
through said weir and said nozzle means whereby said
casting operation may be selectively terminated.
4,394,007
DEBURRING CHAMBER FOR THERMAL DEBURRING
Ernst Leisner, Ditzingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
per No. PCr/EP80/00056, § 371 Date Apr. 23, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 23, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00819, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 2, 1981
PCT Filed Jul. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 253,843
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 27,
1979, 7927450[U]
Int. C\J C21D 9/00: B23K 7/00
U.S. a. 266— 2/»9 8 Qaims
1. A chamber for thermal deburring of work pieces compris-
1046
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
ing readily replaceable parts (11,12,13) fitting together to pro-
vide respectively the internal lateral, tip and bottom walls of
II n 17 « »
4,394,009
SHEET FEEDER WITH BUCKLE RESTRAINT AND FEED
ROLL SLIPPAGE
Carl A. Bergman, South Dartmouth; Roy L. Thomas, New Bed-
ford, and Richard A. Bourbeau, North Dartmouth, all of
Mass., assignors to Standard Duplicating Machines Corpora-
tion, New Bedford, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 204,559, Nov. 6, 1980, abandoned, which is ^
a continuation of Ser. No. 33,740, Apr. 26, 1979, abandoned.
This application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,950
Int. a.' B65H 3/06. 9/06
U.S. a. 271—10 6 Qaims
said chamber and more permanent backing parts (17,15,23)
assuring support and shock-resisting integrity for the chamber.
4,394,008
AUTOMATIC AND MANUAL SHEET FEEDING
MECHANISM
Mitsuhiko Sugiyama, Ebina, Japan, assignor to Rank Xerox
Limited, London, England
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,935
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1980, 55-54115
Int. aj B65H 3/06. 1/26
U.S. a. 271—9 3 Claims
1. A sheet feed mechanism for a reproduction machine
having a photoreceptor surface to which sheets of copy paper
are applied for receiving a toner image, and a supply of copy
sheets comprising:
a sheet feed mechanism arranged to feed copy sheets to the
photoreceptor surface seriatim from a stack of paper and
having a stack contacting roller arranged to contact the
top sheet of the stack;
a second sheet feed roller arranged above said stack contact-
ing roller and in contact therewith;
a third roller arranged above said second roller and in
contact therewith to form a nip therebetween;
a sheet guide means for guiding sheets manually inseried
thereon and moved toward said nip;
detection means for sensing the presence of a sheet manually
inserted on the sheet guide means as it is moved towards
said nip;
means for driving the stack contacting roller; and
means for moving the stack contacting roller out of contact
with said stack while maintaining contact with said second
sheet feed roller in response to said detection means sens-
ing the presence of a sheet manually inserted on the sheet
guide means, whereby said stack contacting roller rotates
in a direction to feed sheets to the photoreceptor surface
when in contact with the stack and rotates in the same
direction to feed sheets manually through said nip when
said stack contacting roller is not in contact with the stack.
1. Apparatus for feeding single sheets of paper from a stack
of said sheets, comprising:
a lower guide surface for supporting the under surface of
said sheets during feeding thereof,
an upper guide surface spaced above said lower guide sur-
face,
separation means for separating a single sheet from said stack
and feeding said single sheet along said lower guide sur-
face, said means for separating including a single, central-
ly-located feed roll providing a moving feed surface,
registration means downstream of said means for separating,
said registration means being activated at the end of a
predetermined delay period beginning when said means
for separating is activated,
said delay period being sufficient to assure that said single
sheet is moved into engagement with said registration
means before the end of said period,
said upper and lower guide surfaces extending from said feed
roll to said registration means,
said upper guide surface being shaped in the vicinity of said
feed roll so as to permit said feed roll to contact said
sheets,
said upper and lower guide surfaces being fixed in predeter-
mined positions during operation of said apparatus,
the separation between said upper and lower guide surfaces
being greater at a location intermediate said separation
and registration means than at said means to define a
buckle-restraint region intermediate said means wherein
buckling of said sheet occurs after engagement with said
registration means and before the end of said delay period,
and
said moving feed surface of said feed roll being adapted to
slip with respect to said sheet after said sheet has buckled
against the surface of said region,
whereby differences in the amount of time required to feed
said sheets from said stack into engagement with said
registration means can be accommodated because said
delay period can be made longer than the longest feeding
time expected and said buckle-restraint region and slip-
ping of said feeding surface can present excessive buckling
of sheets arriving before the end of the longer delay per-
iod.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1047
4,394,010
SHEET FEEDER
Raymond A. Hogenson, Shoreview, Minn., assignor to Minne-
sota Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,338
Int. a.i B65H 3/30
U.S. a 271-22 5 Qaims
/.^
4,394,011
AUTOMATIC CARD OR TAG DELIVERY APPARATUS
Michael L. Dalton, New Canaan, Conn., assignor to Dalton
Systems, Inc., Wilton, Conn.
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,810
Int. a.3 B65H 3/08
U.S. a. 271-107 7 Qaims
1. A delivery apparatus for cards or tags comprising a sub-
stantially level support plate, a hopper structure for a stack of
vertical cards on one end portion of the support plate, a linear
guideway in fixed parallel relationship to the support plate
below the support plate, a carriage element movably engaged
with said guideway, a linear power actuator connected with
said carriage element to drive it in opposite directions on the
guideway, a vacuum arm means pivotally attached to the
carriage element on a transverse horizontal pivot axis and
having attached crank arm means, a spring biasing the vacuum
arm means toward a level rest position when the carriage
elerhent is at the other end portion of the support plate, and a
fixed stop in the path of movement of said crank arm means at
an intermediate part of the support plate and engaging the
crank arm means to swing the vacuum arm means to a substan-
tially vertical position above the support plate in opposition to
said spring, whereby the vacuum arm means can pick up a
vertical card from said hopper structure and swing the card to
a level position while transporting the card to said rest position
where the card can be attached to an article.
4,394,012
WEIGHTED EXEROSE VEST
Jeffrey T. Egbert, 22 College Ave., Rexburg, Id. 83440, and
Jason S. Egbert, 5036 Whitaker, Pocatello, Id. 83201
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,914
Int. a.3 A63B 21/12
U.S. a. 272-119 20 Qaims
1. A sheet feeder comprising
frame means for supporting a stack of sheets,
a feed roll for feeding said sheets having an axle which is
rotatably supported on said frame means,
means for affording contact of the uppermost sheet within
the stack of sheets with said feed roll,
drive means for intermittently rotating said axle,
a feed roll brake mounted on said axle, including means for
releasidjly coupling said feed roll brake to said axle afford-
ing the rotation of said feed roll brake with said axle, until
the application of a predetermined force on said feed roll
brake in a direction opposing the rotation of said axle by
said drive means, and
biasing means for applying said predetermined force, and for
rotating said feed roll brake, said axle, and said feed roll in
a direction opposite to the direction of rotation caused by
said drive means upon the cessation of the rotation of said
axle by said drive means, thereby urging the uppermost
sheets in the stack of sheets in a direction opposite to the
feeding direction, and accordingly fanning the uppermost
sheets of said stack of sheets. ^^
1. An exercise vest adapted to be worn about the chest, back
and shoulders of the wearer thereof comprising:
(a) a contoured shoulder fabric portion adapted to be worn
about the back of the neck and over shoulders of the
wearer terminating in a horizontal lower back edge and a
pair of horizontal lower front edges;
(b) a trapezoidal back fabric portion terminating in parallel
top and bottom edges and symmetrical generally down-
wardly and inwardly tapered side edges, said top edge
being continguous with and sewn to the lower back edge
of said shoulder portion;
(c) a fabric chest portion comprising right and left flaps
adapted to overlap across the chest of the wearer, said
right flaps and left fiaps being essentially mirror image of
each other, each flap being generally trapezoidal in shape
having top and bottom parallel edges, said bottom edge
being greater in length than said top edge, an outer gener-
ally vertical side edge connecting the outermost ends of
said top and bottom edges and an inner generally diagonal
edge connecting the innermost ends of said top and bot-
tom edges, said inner diagonal edge being greater in
iength than said outer vertical side edge, said top edges
being continguous with and sewn to the lower front edges
of said shoulder portion;
(d) a pair of adjustable strap securing means interconnecting
the lowermost portions of said tapered side edges of said
back portion with the lowermost portion of said outer
1048
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
generally vertical side edges of said right and left flaps of
said chest portion;
(e) fastening means for securing said flaps of said chest por-
tion in an overlapping position across the chest of the
wearer comprising a pair of straps located on one flap of
said chest portion, one strap being affixed at the corner
formed by the juncture of the inner diagonal and lower
edges of the flap so as to form an extension of said comer
and the other strap being affixed along said inner diagonal
edge approximately midway between said top and bottom
edges, and a correspondmg pair of strap receiving loops
located on the opposite flap, one of said receiving loops
being affixed near the comer formed by the juncture of
the outer vertical side edge and the bottom edge and the
other receiving loop being affixed along said diagonal
edge approximately midway between said top and bottom
edges, said straps containing means to secure each strap in
a fixed position after said strap has passed through its
corresponding receiving loop;
(0 a plurality of weight pockets affixed to said back and
chest portions, said weight pockets being of a uniform size
and being uniformly distributed thereon;
(g) a plurality of weight modules adapted to be selectively
and removably inserted into said weight pockets, each of
said weight modules being configured to have a size and
shape that fills said weight pockets, said weight modules
thereby being constrained from all movement once in-
serted inside one of said pockets; and
(h) a plurality of identical weights, each of said weights
being of a uniform size and mass, and being adapted to be
securely held inside of said weight modules.
nism mounted on said frame and having a cable trained down
and through said elevator unit, the free end of said cable being
connected to said basketball mechanism; and, an electrical
system to selectively energize said hoist mechanism to raise or
lower said elevator unit by movement of said basketball mech-
anism, and to selectively energize said linkage actuator of said
basketball mechanism.
4,394,014
TENNIS RACKET
John A. Balaban, 4142 Graham St., Pleasanton, Calif. 94566
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,992
Int. a? A63B 49/02
U.S. a. 273—73 G 4 Qaims
4,394,013
APPARATUS FOR BASKETBALL
James E. Larsen, Lincoln, Nebr., and Charles E. Rogers. Akron,
Ohio, assignors to Randall Industries, Inc., Akron, Ohio
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 383,118
Int. a.5 A63B 7]/02
U.S. a. 273—1.5 R 4 Qaims
50 ,„ 26 ?2
32-\28-.|24,
,,"77 ^ ," 52n\28a124/„ 13
1. A tennis racket having a handle, a bow, and a throat
which connects the handle and the bow, said bow having pairs
of coaxial holes drilled therethrough to receive strings, an open
slot in said throat, said slot being wider than said strings and
positioned so that the axis of a hole passing through said throat
will lie within said slot, and so that the axes of at least some of
said coaxial holes pass through said throat to the exterior of the
racket without contacting any portion of the racket.
4,394,015
RACKET STRUCTURE
Omar J. Bosnia, Buenos Aires, Argentina, assignor to Taybos
Sociedad Anonima, Buenos Aires, Argentina
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,150
Int. Cl.^ A63B 49/02. 49/10
U.S. a. 273—73 C
9 Qaims
60 «2
•UP
•DOWN
• RELtaSE
r
70
5J- r -t. J-- V-v rfj_ .
1. Apparatus for use above a playing court for the game of
basketball, comprising: a suspension frame adapted to be se-
cured to a ceiling or structural support above the court; a
telescoping elevator unit suspended beneath said frame and
having a plurality of coaxially interfitting segments including
an outer segment and an inner segment, said outer segment
having an upper end adapted to be secured to said frame; a
basketball mechanism carried coaxially of said elevator unit
inner segment and having arcuately moving paddles to accept
and hold a basketball, said paddles being interconnected by a
motion linkage to a linkage actuator for selective movement to
drop a held basketball toward the playing court; a hoist mecha-
■^9^ 27'':^
1. A racket structure comprising a one-piece composite
member having two contiguous parallel straight end portions
continuing into an intermediate open oval shaped, arcuate
portion, a bridge portion extending between and connected to
said end portions adjacent the beginning of said arcuate portion
and closing said open oval shaped, arcuate portion, said bridge
and oval portions defining a head frame section for stringing
with a taut string, said head frame section to form a striking
surface, said parallel straight end portions defining a handle
section with a grip, said one-piece composite member having
an inner light-weight soft plastic core member defining a longi-
tudinal center line and having an inner face, an outer face and
further including a central prestressed longitudinal cord mem-
ber, said open oval shaped arcuate portion of said core member
having between said center line and said outer face, crosswise
to said center line arranged spaced apart anchoring recesses
each continuing by a bore from said center line towards said
inner face, each of said bores being oriented towards the space
circumscribed by said frame section, a glass fiber, reinforced
outer hard plastic layer, sheathing said core and entering said
recesses by way of anchoring portions, each of said anchoring
portions including a perforation coaxial with the pertinent
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1049
bore, a paif of resilient, flat cover members mounted an oppo-
site sides on said composite member, each cover member hav-
ing a head portion and a handle portion, each head portion
being of oval shape substantially equal to the shape of said head
frame section, each handle portion being of substantially the
same shape as said handle section, an endless oval shaped inner
rim integral with said head portion, the height of said rim being
less than half the height of the inner face of said head frame
section, and each rim abutting on said inner face and leaving
between them a central free portion into which end said bores
for said string.
4,394,016
GAME USING THE HELICAL MOVEMENT OF A BALL
OR VEHICLE
Pavlos Maios, Louka Ralli 8, Pireaus, Greece
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,977
Qaims prjority, application Greece, Feb. 23, 1980, 61269
Int. Q.' A63F 7/04
U.S. Q. 273^1
-109
1 Claim
'-tf
1. An amUsement device comprising:
a first cylinder having a helicoidal passageway formed
therein!
a second cylinder having a helicoidal passageway formed
therein and surrounded by said first cylinder;
wherein said helicoidal passageway from said first cylinder
intersects with said helicoidal passageway of said second
cylinder forming a continuous passageway in said first and
second cylinders, said continuous passageway comprising
channels in the walls of said first and second cylinders,
a hollow handle mounted beneath said first and second
cylinders, and
a movable member arranged for free movement within said
continuous passageway, and said hollow handle,
wherein said movable member comprises a ball.
removably received on said square members, a spinner device
inscribed on said board, for selecting which square member is
4,394,017
EARTHQUAKE GAME
Rick D. Maloy, Rte. 2, Newcomerstown, Ohio 43832
I Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,894
I Int. Q.3 A63F i/00
U.S. Q. 273-237 7 Qaims
1. An earthquake game, comprising, in combination, a board,
with a pair of side walls, and a pair of end walls fixedly secured
to it in a suitable manner, a border of adjacent segments im-
printed on said board, for use with a plurality of playing cards,
a plurality of square members freely received in openings
through said board, for simulating cities, a plurality of mecha-
nisms with circuit means, secured to said board, for vibrating
each of said square members, a plurality of building structures
J6 ,^* -'^
J7 39
Zt
to be vibrated by the players, and a pair of dice for the use of
each player, to determine which player will start said game off.
4,394,018
ELECTRONIC LOGIC GAME
Philip Orbanes, Topsfield, Mass., and Julius Cooper, New Hyde
Park, N.Y., assignors to Ideal Toy Corporation, Hollis, N.V.
Continuation of Ser. No. 86,606, Oct. 19, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 403,232
Int. Q.' A63F i/00
U.S. Q. 273-237 1 Qaim
1. An electronic logic game for play by at least one player to
identify which one of predetermined "suspects" has committed
a "crime", comprising:
a keyboard having manually actuable keyboard switches
including an "on" key to initiate play, a "suspect" key to
selectively establish a "suspect" questioning mode or a
"suspect" accusation mode, numeric keys actuable to
enter numerical data for identifying a "suspect" and fur-
ther actuable to enter predetermined "questions", a "ques-
tion" key actuable to enable said predetermined "ques-
tions" to be asked of the identified "suspect", an "end
turn" key actuable to terminate the "questioning" of said
identified "suspect", and an "accuse" key actuable to
"accuse" an identified "suspect" of being guilty of said
"crime";
a visual display including graphic means operable in re-
sponse to the actuation of said "on" key to provide a
visual display representing the location of said "crime"
and the identity of the "suspect" who is a "victim" of that
"crime", said graphic means being further operable in
response to the actuation of said "question" key and a
numeric key to provide a visual display representing an
"answer" to a "question", and said graphic means being
additionally operable in response to the establishing of a
1050
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
"suspect" questioning mode to provide a visual display of
the "alibi" of said identified "suspect";
audio indicating means for indicating an erroneous "ques-
tion" of an identified "suspect", for indicating a false
"accusation" of an identified "suspect", and for indicatmg
the correct "accusation" of an identified "suspect";
a plurality of "suspect" cards, each indicating the identity of
a respective "suspect" and selected "questions" that may
be asked of said respective "suspect"; and
microprocessor means programmed to store, for each of said
"suspects", data indicating the "alibi" of each "suspect"
for each "crime", data indicating the "answer" of each
"suspect" to each of said selected "questions", data indi-
cating whether each "suspect" is a victim of each "crime",
and data indicating whether each "suspect" is guilty of
each "crime", said microprocessor means being initially
operative to retrieve data stored therein indicating the
"victim", "location" and "guilty" "suspect" of a "crime"
and to operate said visual display for displaying informa-
tion representing said "victim" and "location" of said
"crime", said microprocessor means being operative in
response to the actuation of keys identifying a respective
"suspect" to retrieve the data indicating the "answer" of
said identified "suspect" to a selected "question" and to
operate said visual display for displaying information
representing said "answer", and said microprocessor
means being operative in response to the actuation of keys
identifying an "accused" "suspect" to retrieve said data
indicating whether the "accused" "suspect" is "guilty"
and to operate said audio indicating means to indicate if
said "accused" "suspect" is "guilty".
grouped into separate oil field regions providing a separate
region for each of said categories, said oil field regions are
contiguous with spaces of the particular category associated
therewith, at least one of said categories have multiple non-
adjacent properties located on said edge portion and contig-
uous with one of said regions which extends across said
center portion between opposite edge portions.
4,394,020
HIGH-SPEED SEAL
Erwin S. Oelke, Cypress, Calif., assignor to Smith International,
Inc., Newport Beach, Calif.
Filed Oct. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 434,996
Int. aJ F16J 15/34: F16C 33/78: E21B 10/08
U.S. a. 277—1 / 12 Qaims
4394,019
OIL DRILLING GAME BOARD
James R. Anthony, and David M. Rush, both of Indianapolis,
Ind., assignors to Antfamco, Inc., Carmel, Ind.
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,159
Int. a.J A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273—256 * Claims
1. An oil well drilling game comprising:
a game board having a hollow interior and a playing surface
thereabove, said playing surface having marked thereon a
plurality of oil properties with each property having associ-
ated therewith oil well holes extending through said playing
surface into said interior;
a plurality of movable oil well bodies within said interior, said
bodies having contact surfaces spaced from said playing
surfaces different distances associated with the amount of oil
for a given oil well; and
oil drilling means extendable through to drill any of said holes
and operable to contact any of said contact surfaces located
therebeneath to indicate the amount of oil for a given oil
well and wherein:
said game board has a circumferentially extending edge por-
tion defining a continuous playing path with said properties
positioned on said circumferentially extending edge portion
and grouped into different categories, said game board has a
center portion surrounded by said edge portion with said oil
well holes located in said center portion and grouped into
separate oil well holes located in said center portion and
1. A seal apparatus for a rotary cone rock bit, said seal being
positioned in a cavity formed between a journal extending
from a leg of said rock bit and a rotatable cone mounted on said
journal, said seal comprising:
a metal ring, said ring having a diameter that will fit within
said cavity, a peripheral surface formed by said ring subse-
quently serving as part of a metal-to-metal seal, an annular
seal gland channel formed by said metal ring, said channel
being positioned adjacent said peripheral surface,
a resilient material partially encapsulating said metal ring,
said resilient material forming an O-ring type of seal in
said cavity formed between said leg of said rock bit and
said rotatable cone,
a separate seal packing ring contained within said seal gland
channel in said metal ring, during initial rotation of said
cone on said journal, a portion of said separate seal pack-
ing ring adjacent said metal peripheral surface eventually
wears away exposing said peripheral metal surface to an
adjacent cavity wall, said metal surface and said cavity
wall subsequently forming a lapped sealing surface, said
separate seal packing ring prevents loss of a lubricant
stored within said rock bit during the time said peripheral
surface of said metal ring is forming a lapped seal against
said adjacent wall of said cavity.
4,394,021
CONTACT SEALING
Jouni A. MerilJi, Pajaia, Sweden, assignor to Luossavaara-
Kiininavaara AB, Stockholm, Sweden
FUed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,858
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 25, 1980, 8001455
Int. a.' F16J 15/46
U.S. a. 277—34.3 > Claim
1. A contact sealing for sealing an annular space between
two relatively rotating members, particularly for seahng a
material flow to a rotary drum from an opening in a stationary
wall, one of the members being provided with an annular
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1051
sealing surface and the other member being provided with an
annular bottoming groove facing the sealing surface of said one
member, the bottoming groove receiving a closed pressurized
flexible and expandable annular hose and an annular sealing
member, said sealing member being force-engaged by said hose
2V 22^23'
to seal about said sealing surface, said sealing member being a
flexible strip, having two ends respectively being provided
with a groove and a tongue, the groove and tongue being
interconnected and secured by an axial stud, and the stud in
ium being secured to said other member.
4 394 022
MECHANICALLY EXPANDABLE ANNULAR SEAL
Richard F. Gilmore, Kennewick, Wash, (granted to U.S. Depart-
ment of Energy under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,998
Int. a.5 F16K 27/04; F16J 15/16; F16L 37/20
U.S. a. 277-36 10 Qaims
1. An expandable annular reusable seal assembly for hermeti-
cally sealing a first generally planar stationary containment
surface to a second generally planar stationary containment
surface wherein said second containment surface is proximate,
spaced apart, and generally parallel with respect to said first
containment surface, said seal assembly comprising;
(a) a rigid, circular ring having a longitudinal axis;
(b) means for movably and generally parallelly attaching
said ring to said first containment surface so that said
ring's motion is generally restricted to a rotation about its
longitudinal axis;
(c) a plurahty of ring wedges fixed to said ring, each of said
ring wedges having a generally identically inclined
square-thread helical-shaped surface oriented obliquely
away from said ring and obliquely towards said second
containment surface, said ring wedges each also having
the shape of an annular segment and together similarly
disposed in an annular, generally hole-saw-tooth-like
array coaxial with said ring;
(d) a pluraUty of seal wedges, each of said seal wedges con-
tacting said inclined surface of a corresponding said ring
wedge and having a first face generally lying a plane
disposed towards, and generally parallel with, said second
containment surface, said seal wedges each also having
the shape of an annular section and together disposed in a
I032O.G.--140
generally contiguous annular cluster with said first faces
together generally lying in a common plane;
(e) means for slideably attaching each of said seal wedges to
its corresponding said ring wedge so that each of said seal
wedges is slideable along said ring wedge's inclined sur-
face;
(0 means for restricting the motion of said se-1 wedges to be
perpendicular to said first containment surface;
(S) an annular elastomer seal, generally matching said ring,
having its inner and outer circumfe»ence hermetically
attached to said first containment surface, said elastomer
seal disposed between said first faces of said seal wedges
and said second containment surface, and having a central
annular portion attached to said first faces of said seal
wedges; and
(h) mechanical means for rotating said ring from a first
angular position to a second angular position, and main-
taining said ring at said second angular position, to rotate
said ring wedges to slide forth said seal wedges to extend
said elastomer seal towards said second containment sur-
face to form a fiuidtight annular barrier, and for counter-
rotating said ring from said second angular position to said
first angular position, and maintaining said ring at said first
angular position, to counterrotate said ring wedges to
slide back said seal wedges to retract said elastomer seal
from said second containment surface to remove said
fiuidtight annular barrier.
4 394 023
HIGH TEMPERATURE VALVE STEM PACKING WITH
COILED GRAPHITE SEAL RINGS
Alberto L. Hinojosa, Houston, Tex., assignor to Daniel Indus-
tries Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Sep. 29, 1982. Ser. No. 427,463
Int. a.' F16K 31/44; F16J 15/12
U.S. a. 277-124 3 Qaims
1. A high temperature stem packing assembly for valves,
comprising:
(a) a plurality of graphite seal rings composed of spirally
coiled graphite tape originally coiled in such manner as to
form generally planar circular end surfaces;
(b) metal packing adapter ring means being interposed be-
tween each of said graphite seal rings, said packing
adapter ring means defining convex circular end surface
means at one end thereof and planar circular end surface
means at the opposite end thereof, said convex circular
end surface means deforming the end surface of the seal
ring in contact therewith from said originally generally
planar circular surface configuration to a corresponding
concave configuration mating with said convex circular
surface of said adapter ring means.
>
10S2
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,024
SEAL FOR USE WITH PIPES TO BE nTTED ONE INTO
ANOTHER WITH SPIGOT AND SOCKET ENDS
Johannes C. Delhaes, Voerendaal-Ten Esschen, Netherlands,
assignor to Rubber-en Kunststoffabriek ENBI B.V., Nether-
lands
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,718
Oaims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 4, 1980,
8003258
Int. a.3 FldJ 15/10: F16L 21/00
U.S. a. 277—207 A 6 Qaims
surface, said ring further defining a central, circumferential,
concave grcxjve embedded in said spigot; and
an O-ring seal retained in the spigot ring groove between the
spigot and bell sealing rings when the spigot end is telescopi-
cally received in the bell end.
4,394,026
PANEL EDGE GASKET WITH COMPRESSIBLE
SEALING PORTION
Kenneth L, Kaiser, and William C. Shirley, both of P.O. Box
248, Second & Elm, Hudson, Wis. 54016
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,403
Int. C1.5 F16J 15/10; E06B 7/23
U.S. a. 277—231
ni
7 Qaims
1. A seal for use with pipes to be inserted one into another by
means of spigot and socket ends comprising a sealing sleeve
made of an elastomeric material, said sleeve being clamped
within the socket by a radially resilient bushing provided with
outward corrugations extending parallel to the axis of said
bushing, said bushing is provided with a collar which is seg-
mented by cuts extending throughout the entire width of said
collar.
4,394,025
PIPE COMPRESSION SEAL FOR BELL AND SPIGOT
JOINT
Kenneth W. Anderson, Springfield, III., assignor to Anderson
Seal Company, Inc., Springfield, III.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,297
Int. a.' F16J 15/10; F16L 21/02
U.S. a. 277—207 A 5 Claims
1. A pressure resistant system for joining concrete pipes in
end-to-end relationship wherein said first pipe terminates in a
bell end and the second pipe terminates in a complimentary
spigot end telescopically received therein, the bell end defining
a bell end face and an internal offset face radically and axially
offset from the bell end face, and the spigot end defining a
spigot end face and an external offset face radially and axially
offset from the spigot end face, the end face and offset face of
said bell end of said spigot being connected, respectively, by
inner and outer seal mounting surfaces, said system compris-
ing:
a bell end sealing ring extending from the bell offset face to the
bell end face along the bell seal mounting surface, said ring
mounting a plurality of mutually spaced, outwardly di-
rected, circumferential flanges embedded in said bell;
a spigot end sealing ring extending from the spigot offset face
to the spigot end face along the spigot seal mounting surface,
said ring mounting a plurality of mutually spaced, inwardly
directed, circumferential flanges embedded in said spigot,
the end of said ring adjacent said spigot offset face mounting
an integral sealing flange extendmg outwardly at an angle
thereto and embedded in said pipe below the spigot offset
yi?
'^iLk'"
'4
■IZ
1. An edge gasket for a foamed-in-place panel comprising
(a) a compressible sealing portion,
(b) attachment means for attaching said sealing portion to a
panel edge, wherein said attachment means is L-shaped
with an interior channel which is adapted to engage a
substrate having two 90° bends therein, and
(c) a flexible wing carried by said attachment means.
4,394,027
TRACTOR-TRAILER LAND VEHICLE
Robert G. Watkins, Jr., No. 2 Longview Rd., R.D. #4, Coates-
ville. Pa. 19320
Continuation of Ser. No. 26,056, Apr. 2, 1979, Pat. No.
4,272,089, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 769,518, Feb. 17,
1977, Pat. No. 4,149,732. This application May 11, 1981, Ser.
No. 262,217
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 17,
1996, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J B60P i/22
U.S.a. 280— 5C 5 Qaims
1. A fuel transport land vehicle for dispensing jet fuel to an
aircraft comprising
a tractor, a trailer having a tank for carrying jet fuel,
means for detachably coupling said tractor to said trailer,
pumping module means enclosed within a housing having
disposed therein means for filtering said jet fuel and means
for modulating the flow of said jet fuel from said tank, and
means for detachably securing said housing to said tractor
whereby said pumping module means may be easily re-
moved from said tractor upon malfunction of said pumping
module means.
July 19, vill
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1053
4,394,028
SKATE
Joseph S. Wheelwright, 551 Tremont St., Boston, Mass. 02116
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,445
I Int. a.3 A63C n/04
U.S. a. 280-11.19 17 Qaims
1. A roller skate comprising
a foot supporting plate carrying means for engaging a human
foot thereon,
a front wheel carried by a yoke fixedly connected to said
plate,
said front wheel extending above said plate and being in
front of said means for engaging,
a pair of side wheels mounted on both sides of said plate and
extending above said plate,
means for suspending said plate on said side wheels for
lateral tilting motion of said plate and said front wheel
relative to said side wheels, and
brake means comprising a rear brake wheel secured to the
rear of said plate and activated by movement of a skater's
foot,
whereby said plate and front wheel can be tilted as a
skater leans during turning while said front and side
wheels remain on the ground.
4,394,029
FOOT OPERATED VEHICLE
Frank E. Holmgren, P.O. Box No. 8, Big Lake, Minn. 55309
I Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,762
' Int. a.3 A63C;7/W,B62K27/;0
U.S. a. 280-11.23 14 Claims
1. A foot operated vehicle comprising:
a frame having a generally flat foot support platform and a
tubular collar secured to the forward end of the frame
positioned in a generally upright orientation;
rear wheel means supporting the rear of the platform;
a steerable front wheel assembly connected to a forward
portion of the frame in supportive relationship to the
forward portion of the platform, said front wheel assem-
bly including a steering shaft, a front wheel rotatably
mounted to the steering shaft, said steering shaft extending
through said tubular collar for pivotally connecting the
front wheel to the frame for pivotal movement about a
generally upright axis, said steering shaft having an upper
end portion extended outwardly of the collar;
bias means connected between the frame and the tube collar
comprised as a helical spring disposed in surrounding
relationship to the upper end portion of the steering shaft
extended outwardly of the collar and having one end
connected to the collar and an opposite end connected
proximate the upper end of the steering shaft, said spring
operable to bias the front wheel in a straight ahead posi-
tion with respect to the frame whereby upon execution of
a turn the forward wheel pivots in the direction of the turn
against the influence of the bias means, and is returned to
a straight ahead position by the bias means upon comple-
tion of the turn, and;
a cap assembled to the top end of the steering shaft for
rotation therewith and having downwardly extended
cylindrical sidewalls positioned in covering relationship to
the spring and in overiapping relationship to the upper
end of the tubular collar.
4,394,030
KING PIN CONNECTING MECHANISM
Akira Inoue, Kitakyushu, Japan, assignor to Hitachi Metals,
Ltd., Japan
Filed Jan. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 228,180
Int. a.' B62D 5i/06
U.S. a. 280-434 3 Qaims
>
1. A connecting mechanism for connecting a king pin fixed
to a trailer to a fifth wheel plate provided on a tractor, com-
prising: a substantially enclosed box structure having a slot
extending longitudinally in one side thereof for receiving said
king pin therein, and having an opening in an adjacent side
thereof contiguous with said slot for permitting entry of said
king pin into said box structure and into said slot, said box
structure having pivotally mounted therein at least a portion of
the parts for connecting said king pin, said box structure being
detachably attached in a secure manner to the lower face of
said fifth wheel plate, with said one side of said box structure
adjacent thereto.
4,394,031
EASILY MOUNTABLE SWINGABLE-ARM DRAW-PIN
RETAINER
Roy C. Barton, 724 Main St., and Dale A. Smith, Box 169, both
of Mt. Vernon, III. 62864
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,157
Int. a.^ B60D 1/02
U.S. a. 280—515 1 Qaim
6
3 —
'^^~C
IT
1. In a tow-hitch having a bar attachable to a first vehicle, a
therewith-mating clevis attachable to a second vehicle, and a
conventional hitch tow-pin couplingly insertable downwardly
through alined bores in said bar and said clevis, the improve-
ment comprising: a tow-pin-retaining fully assembled unit
having a vertically disposable pivot pin, means for fixing said
pivot pin to tow-hitch structure so as to be closely adjacent the
axis of said tow-pin in its hitch-coupling arrangement, an arm
1054
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
mounted on said pivot pin for horizontal swinging to and from
a position closely above the top of said tow-pin, and detent
means for yieldably holding said arm in its tow-pin-overlying
and -retaining position, said tow-pin-retaining unit comprising
a short sleeve telescopically slidable over a conventional draw-
bar, said pivot pin being firmly fastened to the top of said
sleeve, said means for fixing being set screws for releasably
anchoring said sleeve to said draw-bar, and said detent means
comprising a nut fixed to said pivot pin and radially grooved
on its arm-facing surface, rounded protuberances on said arm
for engaging in the grooves of said nut, and a coil spring
around said pivot pin biasing said arm toward said nut.
4,394,033
TEMPERATURE COMPENSATING ELASTIC CONE
George W. Goetz, Detroit; Ame J. Santti, Lapeer, and Gary R.
LaLonde, Sterling Heights, all of Mich., assignors to The
Firestone Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,318
Int. aJ B60R 21/08
U.S. a. 280—736 1 Claim
4,394,032
SKI SAFETY BINDING
Ralf Storandt, Leonberg; Manfred Richert, Farchant, and Georg
Scheck, Leonberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Geze GmbH, Leonberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,615
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 30,
1979, 2948275
Int. aJ A63C 9/0*7
U.S. a. 280—618 24 Qaims
-^
1. A ski safety binding for protecting a skier during skiing
against both a dangerous bending moment acting on a leg of
the skier at an endangered section of the skier's leg and a
dangerous torsional moment acting about the leg, said ski
safety binding comprising: a sole plate; a ski boot securing
system carried by said sole plate for releasably securing a ski
boot to said sole plate; mounting means for mounting the sole
plate on a ski having an upper surface and a longitudinal direc-
tion, for limited displacement in said longitudinal direction,
and for limited pivotal movement about a transverse axis and
about a vertical axis extending substantially along the skier's
leg; guide means disposed between said sole plate and said ski
and displaced in said longitudinal direction from said vertical
axis, said guide means including an inclined guide extending at
an inclined angle to said upper surface of the ski in a vertical
plane including said longitudinal direction and a transverse
guide extending in a direction transverse to said inclined guide;
first retaining means for retaining the sole plate in a specified
Ijosition along said inclined guide; second retaining means for
retaining the sole plate in a specified position along said trans-
verse guide; first resilient means permitting resilient deflection
of said first retaining means on the occurrence of excessive
forces thereon due to said bending moment to allow movement
of said sole plate along said inclined guide; second resilient
means permitting resilient deflection of said second retaining
means on the occurrence of excessive forces thereon due to
said torsional moments to allow limited movement of said sole
plate along said transverse guide, and sensor means responsive
to said limited movement along said inclined guide and to said
limited movement along said transverse guide to release said
boot securing system.
1. A passive occupant-restraint system comprising
(a) an inflatable cushion,
(b) a fluid generator operatively connected to said cushion,
(c) means to fire said generator and create inflation fluid,
(d) discharge ports in said generator directing flow of infla-
tion fluid into said cushion, and
(e) means coaxial with said generator to vent fluid directly
therefrom and beyond said cushion and responsive to an
increase in operating temperature, said venting means
having a flexible web terminating in an axially extending
rib fitting within the end of said generator and moveable
substantially axially from that position closing the end of
said generator to an open position in response to said
mcrease.
4,394,034
BELT CLAMP FOR RETRACTOR
James E. Murphy, Royal Oak, and Kenneth H. Reid, Mt. Clem-
ens, both of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corporation,
Detroit, Mich.
Filed Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,028
Int. a.3 B60R 21/10
U.S. a. 280—801 3 Claims
1. A retractor for vehicle body occupant restraint belt com-
prising:
a frame having a belt reel for winding and unwinding the
restraint belt;
means mounting the frame for limited movement on the
vehicle body;
locking means acting between the frame and the reel and
selectively operable to lock the reel against belt unwind-
ing rotation;
a clamping member carried by the frame independently of
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1055
the belt reel for limited movement with the reel and the
frame; It
a clamping abutment mounted on the vehicle body in spaced
relation from the clamping member and from the belt reel
and cooperating with the clamping member to define a
belt passage through which the belt travels during wind-
ing and unwinding from the reel; and
yieldable means acting between the frame and vehicle body
to establish the frame at a normal position spacing the
clamping member from the clamping abutment to permit
travel of the belt therebetween during belt winding and
unwinding, said yieldable means yielding upon the occur-
rence of a predetermined occupant restraint load imposed
on the frame subsequent to lockup of the reel by the reel
locking means to permit the frame to move relative the
vehicle body in the direction of belt loading and effect
clamping of the belt between the clamping member and
the clamping abutment to fix the length of the belt against
spooling down on the reel.
1. An automotive vehicle seat belt device, comprising:
(a) a slide mechanism fixed to the vehicle, said mechanism
comprising:
(i) a slide rail; and
(ii) a slide element slidably mounted to said rail;
(b) a seat belt anchored at one end thereof to the vehicle and
connected at the other end thereof to said slide element;
(c) a drive motor operably connected to said slide element to
move said slide element along said slide rail; and
(d) an electric circuit for controlling the operation of said
drive motor, comprising:
(i) a front travel limit switch operative in response to the
position of said slide element;
(ii) a rear travel limit switch operative in response to the
position of said slide element;
(iii) a door switch operative in response to the door posi-
tion;
(iv) first changeover means responsive to a first position of
said door switch and a switch for driving said motor in
one direction to move said slide element to the front;
(v) second changeover means responsive to a second
position of said door switch and a first position of said
rear travel limit switch for driving said motor in the
reverse direction to move said slide element to the rear;
and
(vi) control switching means for disabling the effect of the
movement of said door switch to its first position, said
control switching means being actuated in response to
predetermined vehicle conditions.
4,394,036
PASSIVE SAFETY BELT ARRANGEMENT
Christian Hildebrandt, Gifhom-Wilsche, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft, Wolfsburg,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,226
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 20,
1980, 3019158
Int. Q.3 B60R 21/02
U.S. Q. 280—804
4 Qaims
4,394,035
AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE SEAT BELT DEVICE
Yoshimi Sato, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor Co.,
Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 187,870
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1979, 54-119210
Int. Q.3 A62B 35/00
U.S. Q. 280—804 14 Qaims
1. A passive safety belt arrangement for vehicles, for exam-
ple passenger automobiles, has a safety belt with one end being
connectable, by means of a manually-operable closing device,
with a slide which can be displaced by a drive means, said slide
being displaceable in a guide held on the vehicle body between
a release position, in which the belt is lifted off the body of a
vehicle occupant, and a restraining position, in which the belt
is applied to the body of the vehicle occupant, characterized in
that in the region of the restraining position of the slide, a
counterpart, which is connectable with the a part of the closing
device at the belt end, is fastened to a stationary point on the
vehicle body.
4,394,037
SPARK-GENERATING ROLLER SKATE ASSEMBLY
David H. Kuntz, 11810 Bel Ter., Los Angeles, Calif. 90049
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,820
Int. Q.3 A63C 17/026
U.S. Q. 280—816 17 Qaims
1. An improved spark-generating roller skate assembly, said
assembly comprising, in combination:
(a) a plurality of rollers;
(b) a weight-bearing frame securing said rollers in spaced
relation for rotation; and
(c) a spark generator comprising:
(i) an abrasive disposed on a surface of at least one of said
rollers, which surface rotates during skating utilizing
said assembly but which surface does not contact the
ground during said skating,
1056
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
(ii) a sparking element which generates a spark when
moved into frictional contact with said abrasive, and
(iii) a flexible resilient holder bearing said sparking ele-
ment and arranged to normally position said sparking
element out of contact with said abrasive but in a posi-
tion close enough thereto so that vibrations imparted to
said holder during skating utilizing said assembly move
said sparking element into and out of brief intermittent
contact with said abrasive.
4 394 038
ADHESIVE-BACKED BOOKLET FOR CREDIT CARD
TRANSACTION
Paul E. Klein, 601 First St., Lake Oswego, Oreg. 97034
Filed Jan. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 223,854
Int. a.5 G09F 3/10
U.S. CI. 282—1 R 5 Oaims
10
/ 32 28 26
2022
1. In combination a transaction record including a card
having print-impartible characters, and an imprinting device
having a support surface with a defined region for receiving
such a card, and a pressure platen cooperative with such sur-
face and manipulatable relative thereto to effect an imprinting
operation, said record being imprintable and, comprising
a recording sheet placeable on said surface, said sheet having
a defined expanse disposed to extend, when said sheet is
placed on said surface, over at least a portion of a card
received by such defined region, and
pressure-responsive adhesive means distributed over the
expanse face placeable adjacent said card for capturing
and releasably retaining with said sheet said card follow-
ing an imprinting operation.
elementary unions equipped with seals, said union device com-
prising:
(a) first and second plates for supporting the male and female
elements and operative to be brought close together so as
to compress the seals associated with the elements carried
by said plates, said second plate having fixed thereto
paired toothed columns which project from its surface
toward the first plate, and said first plate supporting oppo-
site each pair of columns a block having bores disposed to
slidably receive said columns;
(b) automatic latching means to retain said plates in an opera-
tive position in which the seals would be compressed
between the male and female elements of the elementary
unions, said latching means comprising pillar means fixed
to said second plate and projecting toward the first plate,
each pillar means being formed with a transverse depres-
sion, said first plate and block having a perforation dis-
posed to slidably receive said pillar means, and bolt means
slidably carried by said block and having a tooth operative
to engage said transverse depression of said pillar means to
retain said plates in said operative position, the bolt means
being displaceable to disengage the tooth from said de-
pression to permit separation of said plates;
(c) a shaft rotatably supported by each block and passing
adjacent to each bore, a pair of pinions mounted on each
shaft and respectively extending into each bore and dis-
posed therein to mesh with one of said toothed columns,
the pinions being operative when rotated in a first locking
direction to displace said first plate toward said second
plate and being operative when rotated in a second un-
locking direction to urge said first plate away from said
second plate;
(d) release means carried by said shaft and operative to
displace said bolt means to disengage said tooth from said
depression when said shaft is rotated in said second un-
locking direction; and
(e) lost-motion connecting means coupling said shaft and
said pinions, said connecting means allowing said pinions
a predetermined angle of freedom of rotation with respect
to said shaft.
4 394 039
MULTIPLE UNIONS FOR SIMULTANEOUSLY JOINING
A PLURALITY OF PNEUMATIC OR HYDRAULIC PIPES
Jean-Luc Burquier, Veyrier du Lac, France, assignor to S.A. Des
Etablissements Staubli, Faverges, France
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,482
Oaims priority, application France, Mar. 25, 1980, 80 07625
Int. a.^ F16L 55/00, 39/00. 37/00
U.S. a. 285—85 8 Claims
4,394,040
GRAPPLE
Richard Marzka, 6051 Knoyle Rd., Erie, Pa. 16510, assignor to
Richard Marzka and Mark R. Krahe, both of Erie, Pa.
Filed Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 286,610
Int. a.3 B66C 7//0
U.S. CI. 294—66 R 3 Claims
1. In a multiple union device for simultaneously joining the
complementory male and female elements of a plurality of
1. Apparatus for grapple which comprises:
a relatively rigid frame (11),
said frame (11) being formed generally in the shape of a
triangle having a first straight side (12), a second straight
side (13) and a third straight side (14),
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1057
said first side and said third side being connected together at
a first apex,
said first side and said second side being connected together
at a second apex and said second and third sides being
connected together at a third apex.,
said first apex being adapted to have a line attached thereto,
a plurality of hook members (24,25) swingably mounted on
said second side (13), each said hook member having an
elongated straight portion (23), an eye formed on one end
of said elongated straight portion and a curved hook (24,
25) formed in the other end of said elongated straight
portion, said eyes receiving said second side,
a plurality of tubular spacers (26) received on said second
side (13), each said spacer being received on said second
side between each two adjacent said eyes,
a cross member (18) extending from said first side adjacent
said first apex and to said third side and attached to said
first side and said third side,
each said hook member having its said curved hook extend-
ing in a different direction from the said hooks adjacent
thereto,
said hook members terminating in an end portion extending
generally parallel to said straight portion and terminating
in a flat end.
4,394,041
HOISTING YOKE
Jakob de Nachtegaal, Hendrik Ido Ambacht, Netherlands, as-
signor to IHC Holland N.V., Papendrecht, Netherlands
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,605
Claims priority, application Netherlands, May 20, 1980,
8002900
Int. CV B66C 1/10
U.S. CI. 294—181 R 2 Claims
1. A hoist ng yoke for lifting and displacing a load, compris-
ing an elongated frame, means at opposite ends of the frame for
supporting the frame, suspension means intermediate the
length of the frame displaceable lengthwise of the frame for
sharing the load of the frame, and means responsive to unequal
loading of said supporting means at the ends of the frame to
move said intermediate means lengthwise of the frame until the
loading at the opposite ends of the frame and at the intermedi-
ate means are all three equal.
4,394,042
ICE SKATE CARRIER
David H. Smith, 454 Barkentine La., Redwood City, Calif.
94065
I Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,560
Int. a.3 B65D 77/00
U.S. a. 294—163 11 Claims
1. In a portable, rigid carrier for a pair of ice skates includ-
ing: an upright wall having a front side, a rear side, a pair of
lateral panels having planar surfaces, a top and a bottom, the
improvement comprising:
a central, longitudinal slit extending from lower portion to
upper portion of said front and rear sides;
each of said lower portions provided with an adjustment
means located in said slit comprising a plurality of pairs of
opposite notches and a peg member removably insertable
therebetween;
each of said upper portions of said front and rear sides pro-
vided with a spring-loaded locking means positioned
between said panels;
said adjustment means and said locking means cooperating
with each other for holding an ice skate blade in a fixed
position in said carrier when said blade is inserted therebe-
tween in said slit.
4,394,043
SUN VISOR
Michael B. Moulding, Hatfield Peverel, England; Klaus Miiller,
Weil-Haltingen, and Gerhard Mack, Rheinfelden-Adelhausen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ford Motor Com-
pany, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,293
Int. a.^ B60J 3/00
U.S. a. 296—97 H 6 Oaims
10 13 J2 5 3, 7-
1. A sun visor comprising a mounting bracket having a
longitudinally extending shaft projecting therefrom, a visor
panel mounted on the shaft for rotation about the longitudinal
axis of the shaft, and a mounting clip connected to the visor
panel for rotation therewith and including a spring leaf which
exerts a radial force on the shaft which resists rotation of the
visor panel on the shaft, characterized in that the spring leaf
and the shaft include complementary interengaging radial
formations which engage each other to resist axial movement
of the visor panel along the shaft.
4,394,044
REMOVABLE SUNROOF FOR VEHICLES
Louis E. Hough, 22448 Statler, St. Oair Shores, Mich. 48081;
Walter J. De Vigili, 16082 Dugan Rd.. Roseville, Mich. 48066,
and David C. Shifflett, 19466 Highlight Dr., Ointon Town-
ship, Ointon County, Mich. 48043
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,150
Int. a.5 B60J 7/00
U.S. a. 296—218 29 Qaims
18. A sunroof assembly for a vehicle having an opening in
the roof thereof, comprising:
a frame extending around the periphery of said opening;
a compressible seal on said frame and extending around the
periphery of said opening;
a sunroof panel adapted to overlie said opening in sealing
engagement with said seal; and.
1058
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
front and rear, spaced apart means for removeably mounting
said panel on said frame and each including latch means
for latching the front and rear of said panel in an open,
elevated position above said roof, said frame including
(1) a first generally planar section adapted to overlie the top
of said roof surrounding the perimeter of said opening,
(2) a second section having a first surface extending down-
wardly and away from said first section at an oblique
angle relative to said first section, and
(3) a third section disposed below said roof and having a
second surface contiguous with said first surface extend-
ing inwardly and away from the perimeter of said open-
ing, said first and second surfaces defining a channel, said
second and third sections including a pair of opposed
grooves in said first and second surfaces respectively, said
compressible seal being disposed within said channel and
conformingly engaging said first and second surfaces, said
seal extending into said opposed grooves whereby to be
held by said grooves within said channel.
101
trapezoidal-shaped member, said strap means extending
from said first side being continuous from said upper base
to said lower base and stitched together distal from said
first side to provide large and small loops, and said strap
means extending from said second side being continuous
from said upper base to said lower base and stitched to-
gether distal from said second side to provide large and
small loops;
a flat belt slidably receivable through said small loops, said
belt adjustably attachable to said support when using said
implement as a seat, and to said game when using said
implement for game towing such that said user's arms are
respectively inserted through said large loops of said first
and second sides with said chest means against said user's
chest and each of said first strap means across a shoulder
of said user to suspend said chest means; and
said large loops passable over said user's head to suspend
said sling means from said neck when said implement is
used as an arm sling.
4,394,046
CONVERTIBLE ROCKER AND HIGH CHAIR
Warren W. Irwin, and Greg W. Irwin, both of 1330 Bluegrass
Rd., Vista, Calif. 92083
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,628
Int. a.^ A47C 3/02
U.S. a. 297—132 6 aaims
4,394,045
SPORTSMAN SLING SEAT AND GAME HAUL
Jack B. Shaw, 2710 Bedford St., and Donald E. Shaw,
Merchant St., both of Johnstown, Pa. 15904
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 214,992
Int. a.3 A47C 13/00
U.S. a. 297—118 3 aaims
1. A multi-use sportman's implement comprising:
seat means for providing a seat for a user when suspended
from a support;
sling means for supporting a user's arm when suspended
from the neck of said user;
chest means for distributing towing forces across the chest of
said user when used for towing game;
said seat, sling, and chest means comprising a trapezoidal-
shaped member, fabricated of flexible material, having an
upper base and a lower base, said upper base having a
length approximating the width of a man's chest and said
lower base having a length greater than said upper base
length;
first and second strap means respectively disposed and
stitched along said upper and lower bases and ejftending
outwardly from a first side and a second side of said
12 20
1. A convertible rocker and high chair comprising:
a chair having a back, arms, and a rigid seat,
a skirt depending from the sides of the seat and having a
front section and a rear section,
two pairs of inner and outer centrally pivoted cross arms
pivotally mountable at their upper ends to the chair skirt,
two pairs of inner and outer centrally, pivoted cross legs
curved on their under sides to form rockers when the
chair is lowered,
the cross legs being pivotally mounted at their upper ends to
the lower ends of the cross arms to form a doubly extend-
able mechanism for raising and lowering the chair,
transverse rungs connecting opposite pairs of cross legs and
cross arms at their pivot points,
the front section of the skirt having a cam aperture with
internal cam surfaces,
a control rung connecting the upper ends of the inner cross
arms and passing through the cam aperture for controlling
the extension of the chair,
means for securing the control rung within the cam aperture
to lock said chair in its upper or lower configuration.
4,394,047
SEAT BACK MOUNTING SYSTEM
Rene J. Bninelle, Wolcott, Conn., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,157
Int. a.3 A47C 1/027
U.S. a. 297—361 3 Claims
1. A mounting system for a back rest of a multi-passenger
vehicle scat comprising a pivotable support element carried by
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1059
a seat base frame; said pivotable support element having the
back rest pivotally attached thereto so as to permit approxi-
mately 90° of frictionally restrained movement of the back rest
relative to the pivotable support element in a forward, vertical
to horizontal path in response to the application of a relatively
large force to the seat back; an actuating link for transmitting
pivotal reclining motion of said pivotal support element and
said back rest to a generally axially movable portion of a re-
cline lock assembly carried by the seat base frame, said actuat-
< > 4,394,048
INTERLOCKING MECHANISM OF BOTH SIDE LOCK
RECLINER FOR AUTOMOTIVE SEAT
Kenji Sakurai, Toyota, and Noboru Yoshimura, Chiryu, both of
Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
and Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha, both of Aichi, Japan
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,503
Claims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1980,
55/67107[U]
Int. CI.' A47C 1/026
U.S. a. 297—367 4 Qaims
a 3S
1. An interlocking mechanism of a both-side lock recliner for
an automotive seat having a pair of right and left engaging
mechanisms at both sides of the seat comprising:
an interlocking mechanism for simultaneously controlling
the lock and the release of the right and left engaging
mechanisms and including right and left manipulating
levers and auxiliary levers provided symmetrically at both
sides of the seat, and an interlocking rod including hooks
formed at both ends thereof for engaging between the
auxiliary levers of both sides,
said both-side manipulating levers rotatably secured to right
and left side hinge shafts secured to right and left side
lower arms, respectively at the outside of the lower arms,
said both-side auxiliary levers and the interlocking rod rotat-
ably secured to the right and left side hinge shafts secured
to the right and left side lower arms, respectively at the
inside of the lower arms,
said both-side manipulating levers so connected as to be
integrally rotated with the respective auxiliary levers
through right and left side pins, respectively.
said interlocking rod connected to both-side auxiliary levers
at the hook ends provided at the positions separate from
the rotating coaxial centers thereof.
4,394,049
KNEELING AID DEVICE
Fred A. Ward, R.R. #1, Cairo, Mo, 65239
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,310
Int. a.' A47C 9/12
U.S. a. 297—439
3 Claims
ing link being pivotally mounted at its respective ends to said
pivotal support element and to said axially movable portion of
said recline lock assembly, said actuating link being mounted
intermediate its ends to said pivotal support element so as to
permit a small degree of frictionally restrained movement
relative to said pivotable support element, said small degree of
frictionally restrained movement being instituted by the appli-
cation of a force to the seat back which is considerably smaller
than the force required to move said back rest relative to said
pivotable support element.
1. A kneeling device, comprising, in combination:
(a) a rigid, normally horizontal frame having upper and
lower sides thereto and of greater width than depth,
whereas to have substantially forward, rear and side
edges,
(b) a pair of normally substantially vertical bail members
rigidly connected to said frame and positioned with one
bail adjacent each side edge thereof in opposition to one
another, leaving subsubstantial space therebetween for a
person to kneel on the upper surface of the frame therebe-
tween without being in contact with either bail when
kneeling,
(c) upper portions of each of said bail members positioned
substantially above the frame and having substantially
horizontally oriented portions thereof adapted for grasp-
ing, each by one hand of a user of the device, in kneeling
down thereon on rising up therefrom,
(d) one of the bail members having a substantially relatively
higher grasping portion to be grasped by one hand of the
user and the other of the bail members having a substan-
tially relatively lower grasping portion to be grasped by
the other hand of the user, said grasping portions being
said substantially horizontally oriented upper portions of
said bail members,
(e) the said relatively lower grasping portion of said one bail
member so positioned and located in height as to require
the initially standing user to lean or stoop to grasp same
with one hand and to bear a preponderance of the user's
weight and relatively more substantially support the user
when the user, grasping both said bail grasping portions
with separate hands, is substantially down in kneeling
position or beginning to rise therefrom to a standing posi-
tion,
(0 the said relatively higher grasping portion of the other
bail so positioned and located in height as to not require
the initially standing user to stoop to grasp same with the
other hand and to bear a preponderance of the user's
weight and relatively more substantially support the user.
1060
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
when the user, grasping both said portions with separate
hands, is beginning to kneel downwardly to the frame
upper surface from a standing position or has substantially
risen upwardly from the frame upper surface to a standing
position,
(g) two supporting leg members fixed to the underside of the
frame and extending normally downwardly therefrom
adapted to support the frame in a horizontal position
spaced upwardly from a substantially horizontal support-
ing surface, said leg members being positioned closely
adjacent the side edges of the frame, normal to the width
axis thereof and extending substantially the depth thereof,
(h) one of the bail members being of substantially greater
height than the other, the said relatively higher bail grasp-
ing portion and relatively lower bail grasping portion
comprising the uppermost parts of the respective bail
members and
(i) a pair of wheels rotatably mounted next to the side edges
of the frame having the highest bail member thereat on the
underside of the frame and outboard of the supporting leg
member at that side of the frame,
(j) the two supporting leg members fixed to the underside of
the frame being of greater height than the downward
extension of the wheels below said frame,
whereby the frame may be tilted off the supporting leg mem-
bers onto the said wheels by grasping the the higher bail mem-
ber at the top thereof and tilting the frame at an angle to the
supporting surface.
4,394,050
APPARATUS FOR SECURING AN ARTICXE TO A
PLASTIC FRAME-LIKE STRUCTURE
Colin R. Spooner, Norfolk, England, assignor to Delorean Re-
search Limited Partnership, Bloomfield Hills, Mich.
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,469
Int. a.' A62B 35/00
U.S. a. 297—468 12 Qaims
plastic structure with said second portion of said second
mounting member and said other portion of said first mounting
member spaced by said spacing means and oppositely disposed,
said second mounting member including means for receiving
said article.
4,394,051
METHOD OF HYDROSPALLING
Martin S. Oudenhoven, Lakewood, Colo., assignor to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Interior, Washington, D.C.
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,038
Int. a.' E21C i 7/06
U.S. a. 299—16 5 Claims
HIGH PRESSURE
WATER LINE
TENSION CRACK
7T-rrr
1. A method of hydrofracturing in situ rock material from its
free surface when the material's tensile strength is much less
than its compressive strength comprising the steps of:
(a) forming a small diameter hole no more than 1 inch in
diameter to a predetermined depth in the material to be
fractured;
(b) cutting a generally circular slot in the material from near
the bottom of the hole formed in step a, said slot extending
outwardly from the hole and encircling it;
(c) mounting and inflating an elongated packer assembly
having a fluid conduit therethrough in the hole, said
packer terminating at its end remote from the hole's en-
trance near the intersection of the hole with the slot
formed in step b; and
(d) injecting a fiuid under high pressure into said slot's vol-
ume through the conduit in the packer assembly to frac-
ture the material with the fracture beginning at or near the
periphery of the slot and extending to the material's free
surface.
1. Apparatus for securing an article to a plastic structure, the
plastic structure including two spaced and adjacently disposed
frame-like members each having an opening therein, the appa-
ratus comprising a first mounting member having a first por-
tion of increased perimeter which is greater than the perimeter
of the opening in one of the frame-like members, said first
mounting member being adapted to extend into the opening in
the one frame-like member with the first portion being adapted
to engage the one frame-like member adjacent the opening
therein on an exterior side thereof, a second mounting member
having a second portion of increased perimeter which is
greater than the perimeter of the opening in the other of the
frame-like members, said second mounting member being
adapted to extend into the opening in the other frame-like
member with the second portion engaging the other frame
member adjacent the opening therein on an exterior side
thereof, said first mounting member including another portion
adapted to engage an interior side of said other frame-like
member, at least one of said first and second mounting mem-
bers including means for spacing said second portion of said
second mounting member and said other portion of said first
mounting member, and means for connecting said first and
second mounting members together to engage them in the
4,394,052
CARPET TAKE-UP DEVICE AND METHOD FOR USING
THE SAME
Edgar L. Adams, 1516 E. 29th St., Des Moines, Iowa 50317, and
William D. Ludington, R.R. 1, Carlisle, Iowa 50047
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,997
Int. a.5 A47L 11/12; B65H 75/02
U.S. CI. 299—18
11 Qaims
1. A carpet take-up device for removing carpet from a sup-
porting surface, said device comprising:
a frame having forward and rearward ends;
a spool mechanism rotatably mounted on said frame for
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1061
rotation about a horizontal axis, said spool mechanism
being adapted to retentively receive a loose end of said
carpet,
a means for rotating said spool mechanism,
a blade adapted to wedge beneath said carpet, and having
opposite longitudinal ends,
a rear support wheel,
a roller bar rotatably mounted to said frame behind and
below said spool mechanism and behind and above said
blade, and
said loose end of said carpet passing above said blade, behind
and around said roller bar and being connected to said
spool mechanism such that rotation of said spool mecha-
nism causes said blade to be pulled forward beneath said
carpet to free said carpet from said supporting surface.
4,394,053
NOZZLE HOLDER FOR CUTTER DRUM IN LONGWALL
MINING MACHINERY
Herbert Schnpphaus, Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Gebr. Eickhoff Maschinenfabrik und Eisengiesserei
m.b.H., Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,529
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Noy. 28,
1980, 3044874
Int. a.3 E21C 35/22. 27/24
U.S. a. 299-81 8 Qaims
1. In a cutter drum having a cutter drum body rotatably
mounted on a shaft and a nozzle holder non-rotatably mounted
on said shaft in a location corresponding to the end face of said
drum body,
said nozzle holder being equipped with nozzles distributed
over its periphery,
said nozzles being adapted to form, in the mineral to be
loosened with the use of said drum, a spray pattern extend-
ing over the peripheral portion of said drum body facing
the material being mined,
a plurality of cutter picks carried on said drum body at said
end face thereof,
said picks projecting beyond said end face of said drum body
and being dimensioned and positioned such that when said
drum body is rotated about said shaft and said nozzles are
fed to form jets of water, the picks will intersect with said
jets to produce a pulsating efTect.
4,394,054
PLAY-FREE HOOK-TYPE CONNECTION
Gerrit Nieboer, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to U.S. Phil-
ips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,551
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 19, 1979,
7909125
Int. Q.3 G12B 9/00: A47B 81/06
U.S. Q. 312—7.2 8 Qaims
1. A hook-type connection for the play-free connection of a
first part to a second part, the hook-type connection compris-
ing:
a flexible hook with a shank and at least one wing mounted
on said shank, said shank connected to said first part hav-
ing a pressure edge, and
an abutment which is connected to said second part having
an abutment edge with which said pressure edge cooper-
ates, at least one of the two edges enclosing an acute angle
with a plane which extends substantially perpendicularly
of the longitudinal direction of said shank of said hook,
- m
said hook being locally structurally weakened in the longi-
tudinal direction of said shank when a torque is exerted on
said shank by at least said one wing which forms part of
said hook and which is connected to said shank adjacent
the end which is remote from said first part, said wing
having an edge which faces said first part and comprises
said pressure edge.
4,394,055
CABINET FOR VIDEO GAME CONSOLES.
CARTRIDGES, ACCESSORIES, AND INSTRUCTION
BOOKLETS
Richard D. Smith, 28640 Vista Madera, San Pedro, Calif. 90732
Filed Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,352
Int. Q.' A47B 47/00. 81/06
U.S. Q. 312—196 10 Qaims
'•'..^^•'
if "71-"^
1. As an article of manufacture a cabinet for holding video
game playing equipment including control consoles and acces-
sories, said cabinet having a top having an opening in it, the
periphery of the opening being constructed to provide sup-
porting surfaces for accommodating a plurality of different
control consoles having varying configurations, said opening
having portions whereby to provide support surfaces and
means forming additional support surfaces at said opening
which are positioned whereby the said support surfaces can
accommodate control consoles having a base portion of
smaller dimensions which can extend through said opening to
be supported on said additional surfaces, the said cabinet hav-
ing a lower section constructed for holding accessories, said
opening has portions of different width than other portions,
said other portions being constructed to accommodate a con-
trol console having a base part of a size to be accommodated to
be received in the said opening at the position of said other
portions, said opening includes inwardly extending ledges
having portions extending inwardly from the ends of the said
opening, to accommodate a console having a base part extend-
ing into the opening, said opening has narrower end portions
which form shoulders in the said top between the opening
portions, the said ledges including portions extending inwardly
1062
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
from said shoulders, providing a rectangular configuration to
receive and hold a narrower base portion of another console.
4,394,056
DRAWER LOCKING MECHANISM
Elden W. Janke, Valencia, Calif., assignor to Teradyne, Inc.,
Boston, Mass.
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,557
Int. a.3 E05B 65/46: E05C 15/04
U.S. a. 312—216 7 Qaims
having a male connector end insertable in the first recess of the
first molded fitting, a second outer fitting molded about the
other end of the hose and having a second recess at its extrem-
ity, a second removable electrical harness having a female
connector end insertable in the second recess of the second
molded fitting, the improvement which comprises:
(a) a female connector with dual insulated wires molded and
enclosed entirely within the first outer fitting, a female
plug being included therein and accessible within the first
recess of the first outer fitting to receive the male connec-
1. Locking mechanism for a plurality of vertically oriented
horizontally reciprocal members which comprises
a first member of said members,
a second member of said members,
a first vertically limitedly reciprocable locking bar,
a second vertically limitedly reciprocable locking bar,
first camming means carried by said first member for
cooperation with said first vertically limitedly recipro-
cable locking bar to provide first vertical movement of
said first vertically limitedly reciprocable locking bar
when said first member is moved away from said first
vertically reciprocable locking bar,
second camming means carried by said second member
for cooperation with said second vertically limitedly
reciprocable locking bar to provide second vertical
movement of said second vertically limitedly reciproca-
ble locking bar when said second member is moved
away from said second vertically reciprocable locking
bar,
first latch means carried by said first member for coopera-
tion with said first vertically limitedly reciprocable
locking bar to prevent horizontal movement of said
second member upon said first vertical movement, and
second latch means carried by said second member for
cooperation with said second vertically limitedly recip-
rocable locking bar to prevent horizontal movement of
said second member upon said second vertical move-
ment.
tor of the first harness, said dual wires being electrically
connected to said pair of electrical conductors of the hose;
and
(b) a male connector with dual insulated wires molded and
enclosed entirely within the second outer fitting, a male
plug being included therein and accessible within the
second recess of the second outer fitting to receive the
female connector of the second harness, said dual wires
being electrically connected to said pair of electrical con-
ductors of the hose.
4,394,058
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR INSERT ASSEMBLY
David L. Frear, Aflon, N.Y., assignor to The Bendix Corpora-
tion, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,139
Int. aJ HOIR 13/42
U.S. a. 339—59 R 8 Qaims
4,394,057
DOUBLE-MOLDED ELECTRICAL END HTTING
ASSEMBLY
James Williams, Abbeville, and Henry K. Wills, Greenwood,
both of S.C, assignors to Automation Industries, Inc., Green-
wich, Conn.
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,435
Int. a.^ HOIR 35/00
U.S. a. 339—15 2 Qaims
1. In combination with a flexible hose having a pair of elec-
trical conductors extending throughout its length, a first outer
fitting molded about one end of the hose and having a first
recess at its extremity, a first removable electrical harness
1. In combination with an electrical connector having re-
movable contacts said connector of the type having: a housing;
a plurality of contacts, each contact having a rear portion, a
forward mating portion, and an annular groove between said
forward and rear portions, and means for releasably mounting
said contacts in said housing including an insert having a plu-
rality of bores therein, each bore having therein a portion of a
respective contact having the annular groove therein and a
contact retention member, the improvement wherein said
contact retention member comprises:
an arcuate segment having forward and rear ends spaced
from the wall of said bore and on the inside thereof an
inwardly projecting shoulder engaging the annular
groove in a respective contact, and on the outside thereof
between said ends, means for pivotally mounting to said
insert the arcuate segment in each bore so that either end
of said arcuate segment may be deflected to disengage the
projecting shoulder from the groove in the contact
whereby, a tool may be inserted into a bore in said insert
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1063
to engage and pivot said arcuate segment in said bore so
that the projecting shoulder of the segment disengages
from the groove in the contact thereby releasing the
contact in said bore for removal from the connector.
' ' 4,394,059
CONNECTOR OF A TYPE USED WITH DRY CELL
BATTERIES AND MANUFACTURING METHOD
Charles E. Reynolds, Mechanicsburg, Pa., assignor to AMP
Incorporated, Harrisburg, Pa.
I Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,443
Int. a.3 HOIM 2/04
U.S. a. 339-125 R 22 Qaims
1. A connector of the type comprising an insulating support
having a snap fastener plug terminal and a snap fastener socket
terminal on a first surface thereof, said snap fastener plug and
socket terminals being dimensioned to be coupled to a comple-
mentary snap fastener socket terminal and a snap fastener plug
terminal respectively on a similar connector, said connector
being characterized in that:
said support comprises a molded thermoplastic member
having an integral plug terminal supporting portion and an
integral socket terminal supporting portion on said first
surface,
said plug terminal and said socket terminal each being a
one-piece stamped and formed sheet metal member hav-
ing first and second contact portions, each of said termi-
nals being partially inserted through said support so that
the first contact portion of each terminal is on said first
surface of said support and said second contact portion is
on a second surface of said support which is oppositely
directed with respect to said first surface,
said first contact portion of said plug terminal being against,
and supported by, said plug terminal supporting portion,
said first contact portion of said socket terminal being
against, and supported by, said socket terminal supporting
portioiiJ «>
4,394,060
LIGHT BEAM SCANNING SYSTEM WITH SAW
TRANSDUCER
Carl M. Verber, Columbus; Richard P. Kenan, Upper Arlington,
and Richard Ridgway, Columbus, all of Ohio, assignors to
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
I Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,470
Int. a.3 G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 350—96.13 10 Qaims
4. A light beam scanning system comprising:
an optical waveguide;
SAW transducer means for generating surface acoustic
waves in said waveguide; and
driving means for driving said SAW transducer means, said
driving means comprising a varactor tuned oscillator and
a digital linearization circuit for compensating for the
y
h ■ E3
.7— M
U-, , L
.( U _
non-linearity of the frequency of said varactor tuned
oscillator.
4,394,061
APPARATUS FOR ALIGNING AN OPTICAL RBER IN
AN LED PACKAGE
Scott L. Schroeder, Belmont, Calif., assignor to GTE Automatic
Electric Incorporated, Northlake, III.
Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,722
Int. Q.' G02B 7/26
U.S. Q. 350-96.20 ig Qaims
SOURCE y
'« '0
1. A ferrule for loosely-releasably supporting a filament over
at least the major portion of a limited length thereof and hold-
ing the limited length of filament in a straight line so as to
reduce bowing of the filament adjacent one end of the ferrule
that is proximate the emitting surface of a light emitting ele-
ment, said ferrule comprising:
an elongated member having a length between opposite ends
thereof that extends in a prescribed direction along a given
straight line and which corresponds to the limited length;
said member having a recess cut into the exterior surface
thereof over the breadth thereof for defining first and
second sections on opposite sides of the recess and at
opposite ends of said member, the recess extending over a
prescribed length which is much less than the limited
length and having a depth that is at least equal to the
distance between the given line and the perimeter of said
member;
said first section having a first channel therein extending
over the length thereof along the given line and being in
front of the bottom of the recess so as to open into the
recess, the first channel being dimensioned for receiving
the largest filament to be supported and extending into
said member to the given line; and
said second section having a second channel therein extend-
ing over the length thereof along the given line and being
in front of the bottom of the recess so as to open into the
recess, the second channel also being dimensioned for
1064
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
receiving the largest filament to be supported and extend-
ing into said member to the given line;
the first and second channels overlapping along the given
line sufficiently for receiving a filament therein, and being
oriented in an end view of said member looking along the
given line for forming an angle therebetween that is suffi-
cient for receiving and holding a filament therein.
4^94,062
SPLITTABLE HBER OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE AND
METHOD OF MANUFACTURE
Hartmut Schneider, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich
Filed Feb. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 124,608
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 9,
1979, 2909356
Int. a.3G02B 5/772
U.S. a. 350—96.33 9 Claims
positions situated in one plane, said radiation source positions
forming a distribution, said device comprising:
illumination means for irradiating the coded image;
a photosensitive element;
an imaging matrix comprising a number of imaging elements
equal to the number of radiation source positions, said
imaging elements being situated in a matrix plane in a
distribution which is the same as or linearly proportional
to the distribution of radiation source positions, said imag-
ing matrix being illuminated, via the coded image, by the
illumination means to form superposed perspective images
of the object on the photosensitive element, the super-
posed perspective images producing an image of a layer of
the object on the photosensitive element; and
means for changing the positions of the individual imaging
elements in the matrix plane while maintaining the distri-
bution of the elements linearly proportional to the distri-
bution of radiation source positions, wherein images of
different layers of the object are produced by changing
the positions of the imaging elements.
7. An optical device such as an optical directional coupler
comprising a splittable optical fiber waveguide with a split
portion, said waveguide having an outer surface and at least
one fiber optical core being surrounded by a cladding material,
said splittable waveguide having at least a pair of longitudi-
nally extending indentations in an outer surface, each of said
indentations having a substantial depth with a corresponding
reduction in the thickness of the cladding at each indentation
to create starting points for splitting wedges and to receive the
splitting wedges and said split portion of the waveguide ex-
tending between the pair of indentations.
4,394,064
DURABLE CERAMIC ENAMEL SPANDRELS
Samuel Dauson, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 278,957
Int. a.3 G02B 17/00. 27/00 ^
U.S. a. 350—259 e^QMms
1. An article for use in curtainwall construction compnsi^:
a. a rigid panel substrate;
b. an opaque colored ceramic enamel coating fired on said
substrate; and
c. a transparent, colorless, protective metal oxide film depos-
ited over said ceramic enamel coating,
wherein the dominant wavelength of light reflected by said
opaque ceramic enamel coating is not equivalent to the domi-
nant wavelength of light transmitted by said transparent film.
4,394,063
DEVICE FOR RECONSTRUCTING LAYER IMAGES OF A
THREE-DIMENSIONAL OBJECT BY MEANS OF AN
ADJUSTABLE IMAGING MATRIX
Hermann Weiss, Hamburg; Erhard Klotz, Halstenbek; Horst
Peemoller, Hamburg; Rolf Linde, Haseldorf, and Wilfried
Mauser, Hamburg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, NY
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,325
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 17,
1979 2946442
Int. CI.' G02B 5/32: G03H 1/28; A61B 6/02
U.S. a. 350—162.13 8 Qaims
»--«
» h t«
4,394,065
WINDSHIELD VISOR MIRROR
Arthur P. Swanson, 1454 Estate La., Glenview, III. 60025
Filed Sep. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 420,899
Int. a.3 B60R 1/08
U.S. a. 350—304
14 Oaims
1. A device for producing images of layers of a three-dimen-
sional object from a coded image of the object, said coded
image being a superposition of perspective images formed by
irradiating the object from a large number of radiation source
1. A vehicle windshield visor mounted rear view mirror
adapted to reflect to the vehicle driver the area in the traffic
lane alongside the driver at the rear end of the vehicle, which
comprises a mirror unit having a base, means for mounting the
base against a face of a windshield visor and said unit having a
mirror with an end adjacent the traffic lane hinged on the base
to swing the mirror laterally of the visor face to reflect said
area.
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1065
4,394,066
REVERSIBLE FLAG TYPE REAR VIEW MIRROR
Bernard C. Sharp, White Plains, N.Y., assignor to Parker Han-
nifin Corporation, Shelton, Conn.
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,469
Int. a.3 B60R 1/06
U.S. a. 350—307 10 Qaims
4,394,067
DISPLAY DEVICE
Aloysius M. J. M. Spruijt, Eindhoven; Matheus A. T. Wijburg,
Nijmegen; Gerardus C. M. Benschop, Nijmegen, and Hen-
drikus J. M. Vos, Nijmegen, all of Netherlands, assignors to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,562
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Sep. 7, 1979,
7906695
Int. a.3 G02F 1/133. 1/13
U.S. a. 350—334 19 Claims
1. A display device comprising two supporting plates sepa-
rated by a space; a layer of liquid crystal in said space; a rim of
sealing material between said two supporting plates and en-
closing said- layer of liquid crystal; a pattern of electrodes on
one of said supporting plates facing said^ayer of liquid crystal;
at least one further electrode on the other of said supporting
plates facing said layer of liquid crystal; supply electrodes on
said one supporting plate individually driving said pattern of
electrodes; at least one non-encapsulated IC crystal
accommodated in said rim of sealing material between said two
supporting plates; contact pads of said IC crystal connected to
said supply electrodes: and a number of external connection
13 U 10 9 11
1. A rear view mirror head comprising a housing member of
elongate generally polygonal shape, said member forming a
frame for a mirror plate and being provided with a recess
extending about and behind one end of said frame, and a sub-
stantially U-shaped saddle member fitting in said recess, said
saddle member having means fixed thereto for joining said
head pivotably with a mirror mounting bracket to be attached
to a side of a vehicle body, said housing member and said
saddle member respectively having connecting portions which
confront in said recess and are joinable for fixing said members
together with said housing member facing to either side of said
saddle member so that the mirror head is assembleable for use
on either the left side or the right side of a vehicle body.
electrodes connected to other contact pads of said IC crystal to
be in communication with said supply electrodes.
4,394,068
FLUORESCENTLY ACTIVATED DISPLAY DEVICE
WITH IMPROVED SENSITIVITY
Heinz Pape; Ferdinand Quella, and Hans Krueger, all of Mu-
nich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 121,372
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20,
1979, 2910952
Int. a.' G02F 1/133. 1/19
U.S. a. 350—345 40 Qaims
<
Fk
1
6 B
i
9
M.
1. A device for the optical display of information with im-
proved sensitivity and intensity comprising:
a plate consisting of a material with an index of refraction
greater than 1 and which contains fluorescent particles for
collection of light radiation impinging on said plate by
means of fluorescent scattering;
a passive display having regions controllably switchable
between a light absorbing and a light reflective state, said
1066
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
passive display disposed behind said, plate in the line of ionic, nonliquid-crystalline helichromic compound, said he-
sight of a viewer; and lichromic compound being soluble in said nematic liquid crys-
a coupling means for coupling selected areas of said plate tal material, and said helichromic compound being a dichroic
and said passive display to allow transmission of light in dye and having the general formula
selected patterns to a viewer.
Q-(-Z)„
4,394,069
LIQUID CRYSTAL TUNED BIREFRINGENT HLTER
Wilbur I. Kaye, Corona Dei Mar, Calif,, assignor to Beckman
Instruments, Inc., Fullerton, Calif.
Filed Jun. 5, 1979, Ser. No. 45,725
Int. aJ G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 350—347 E 10 Qaims
wherein:
Q is a radical selected from the group consisting of azo,
azo-stilbene, benzothiazolyl polyazo, methine, azo-
methine, merocyanine and methine arylidene radicals;
Z is an organic group capable of imparting helical ordering
characteristics to said mixture of nematic liquid crystal
and helichromic compound; and
n is an integer having a value of 1 or greater.
^s.
■J
XT£CTae
\. A tunable optical filter comprising:
a plurality of polarizers spaced at intervals along a propaga-
tion axis, each polarizer being characterized by a plane of
polarization;
a plurality of birefringent elements spaced along the propa-
gation axis within the intervals between the polarizers,
any two birefringent elements being separated by at least
one polarizer, each birefringent element having an optic
axis oriented so that the plane defined by the optic axis and
the propagation axis forms a 45° angle with the plane of
polarization of each of the two polarizers immediately
adjacent to and on opposite sides of that birefringent
element, and at least one of the birefringent elements
comprising a liquid crystal cell whose optic axis changes
in response to a voltage applied to the cell;
means for controllably tuning the filter to a selected wave-
length by applying to each liquid crystal cell a voltage
corresponding to the selected wavelength so that each
birefringent element will produce a relative phase shift
equal to a multiple of 180° between the ordinary and
extraordinary orthogonally polarized components of a
light ray having the selected wavelength propagating
along the propagation axis;
wherein each birefringent element is characterized as oper-
ating at a particular order, the order of an element being
defined as the quotient obtained by dividing 360° into said
relative phase shift equal to a multiple of 180°; and
wherein said filter includes eight birefringent elements,
having orders of 1, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 8 and 13, respectively.
4,394,071
LENS SYSTEM WITH nLL-IN LENS
Yasuyuki Yamada, Mitaka, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 296,649
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 3, 1980, 55-122179
Int. a.^ G02B 9/62, 15/02
U.S. a. 350—422 1 Claim
4,394,070
HELICHROMIC COMPOUNDS AND DISPLAYS
Harvey A. Brown, Lake Elmo, and William A. Huffman, Minne-
apolis, both of Minn., assignors to Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 169,275, Jul. 16, 1980. This
application Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 274,184
Int. a? G02F 1/13: C09K 3/34
U.S. a. 350—349 33 Qaims
1. A composition consisting essentially of a nematic hquid
crystal material and, in admixture therewith, an organic, non-
lli kblklbhlilli
1. A lens system having a main photo-taking lens and a fill-in
lens lying in between said main photo-taking lens and the
image plane and detachable therefrom, and having the follow-
ing various conditions:
said fill-in lens having, from front to rear, a positive 1st lens,
a negative 2nd lens and a positive 3rd lens;
letting ni and vi denote the refractive index and Abbe num-
ber of the glass of said positive 1st lens respectively, rs the
radius of curvature of the front surface of said positive 3rd
lens, ds the axial thickness of said 3rd lens, ns and V3 the
refractive index and Abbe number of the glass of said 3rd
lens respectively, and f the overall focal length of said
main photo-taking lens and said fill-in lens attached
thereto, the following relationships are fulfilled:
(l)0.3<r5/f<0.6
(2)0.02<d5/f<0.08
(3)1.5<ni<1.7
(4) 30.0 < VI < 50.0
(5)1.45<n3<1.75
(6)45.0<V3<85
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1067
4394,072 4,394,074
„„. , „ , . ZOOM LENS FIBEROPTIC-LIGHTED OPTICAL APPARATUS
tUis 1. Betensky, New York, N.Y., assignor to Vivitar Corpora- William McMahon, 14102 Willow U., Westminster Calif
tion, Santa Monica, Calif. 92683, and Bernard Jensen, Rte. 1, Box 52, Escondido, Calif!
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,611 92025
U.S. a. 350—427
Int. a.5 G02B 15/18
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,154
10 Qaims Int. CI.^ A61B 3/10
U.S. a. 351—206
10 Qaims
m
SB
y^v
LT^
Pf
la to
CD, SE
1. A zoom lens comprising from the object end a first posi-
tive group, a second negative group, a third negative group,
and a fourth positive group, said second group being a singlet
and the absolute value of the ratio of the power of said second
group to said first group is less than 1.75, said fourth group
from the object end comprising a positive doublet followed by
a positive lens and a negative lens.
4,394,073
COMPACT WIDE ANGLE LENS
Koichi Wakamiya, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku
K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 214,887
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 28, 1979, 54-1721198
Int. Q.3 G02B 9/60
U.S. Q. 350— 465 6 Claims
Li L2L3L4L5
1. A compact wide angle lens system having an angle of
view of 6O°-70° and a total length as short as the total focal
length, f, of the lens system, comprising, in succession from the
object side, a first positive meniscus lens component having its
convex surface facing the object side, a second biconcave lens
component, a third positive lens component having its surface
of sharper curvature facing the object side, a fourth positive
lens component, and a fifth negative meniscus lens component
having its convex surface facing the image side, the lens system
satisfying the condition:
0.51f<f4<1.38f
where f* represents the focal length of said fourth component.
1. A fiberoptic-lighted optical apparatus for use with a cam-
era for photographing the surface of the eye of a subject,
wherein the apparatus comprises:
a housing structure;
means on said housing structure to support and position the
subject's head with respect to said camera;
means for mounting and adjusting said camera with respect
to the eye of said subject;
dual-light-source means adapted to be activated by the oper-
ation of said camera;
a light-transfer medium adapted to receive light from said
dual-light source, and project said light remotely there-
from to illuminate said eye of said subject;
said dual-light-source means comprising:
a first light source; and
a second light source, wherein said second light source is
positioned in front of and adjacent said first light source,
whereby both of said light sources can be transmitted
singularly or simultaneously through said light-transfer
medium; and
means for individually activating said first light source sepa-
rately from said second light source, when said second
light source is not required;
said light-transfer medium comprising:
a first bundle of light-transmitting fiberoptic strands; and
a second bundle of light-transmitting fiberoptic strands, said
strands being positioned adjacent each other, and in ad-
justable alignment with said first and second light sources,
each bundle including a light-receiving end and a light-
projecting end, said light-projecting end of each bundle
being respectively positioned adjacent opposite sides of
the lens of said camera;
means for selectively positioning said light-receiving end of
said light-transmitting bundles in front of said dual-light-
source means to selectively transmit light to one side or
the other of said subject's eye.
1068
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,075
SUPPORT APPARATUS
Garrett Brown, 508 Pine St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19106, and Ar-
nold O. Di Giulio, 4522 Woodman Ave., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
91423
Continuation of Ser. No. 700,544, Jun. 28, 1976, Pat. No.
4,208,028, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 506,326,
Sep. 16, 1974, Pat. No. 4,017,168. This application Jun. 16, 1980,
Ser. No. 159,657
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 17,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 G03B 17/00
U.S. a. 352— 243 7 Qaims
4,394,076
INDIOA RECORDING APPARATUS
Solomon Manber, Sands Point; David Chiang, Dix Hills, and
Mosi Chu, Setauket, all of N.Y., assignors to Amtech Patent
Licensing Corp., No. Miami Beach, Fla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 173,966, Jul. 31, 1980, Pat. No.
4,310,226. This application Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,279
The portioii of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 12,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? B41B 21/08: GOID 9/38; H04I 15/34
U.S. CI. 354—5 12 Qaims
1. A weight support apparatus system especially adapted for
operation as a portable device on a moving carrier and capable
of being guided by the arm of an operator which comprises:
weight support means comprising first and second ends, the
first end being connected to and adapted to support at
least part of the weight, the second end being connected
to the carrier,
said weight support means comprising at least a pair of
first and second interconnected support arms, said sup-
port arms being adapted to damp out vibrations due to
movement of the carrier,
each of the support arms comprising an upper and a
lower longitudinal link and a medial bracket, which
upper and lower links and medial brackets resjsec-
tively form legs of a parallelogram, the respective
upper and lower links and the medial bracket of each
arm being pivotally interconnected to permit vertical
rotative movement of one arm relative to the other,
the first and second support arms each comprising
respectively a first resilient means and a second resil-
ient means, the first and second resilient means con-
tinuously biasing respectively the ends of the support
arms that are remote from the carrier upwardly rela-
tive to the carrier, the bias of the first and second
resilient means being substantially balanced by the
weight, the first and second resilient means being
connected respectively across the parallelograms to
damp out vibrations caused by movement of the
carrier and to cause the weight to free-float irrespec-
tive of movement of the carrier,
said weight support means substantially freeing the opera-
tor's hands from the weight and capable of being guided
to a desired position selected by the operator; and
rotatable hinge bracket means interconnecting the me-
dial brackets of the support arms, the hinge bracket
means comprising a vertical pivot pin to permit hori-
zontal rotatable movement of one arm relative to the
other,
whereby the weight is isolated and free-floating at a
distance from the operator substantially independent
of any unwanted lateral and vertical vibrations
caused by motion of the carrier.
12. Indicia recording apparatus comprising: a source of a
record medium; an accepting means for accepting record
medium removed from said source; a supporting means inter-
mediate said source and said accepting means, for supporting a
portion of the record medium, a carriage means controllably
and repeatedly movable opposite said supporting means and in
a direction transverse to the travel of the record medium, and
a recording head on said carriage means, said recording head
comprising radiation emitting means for emitting intensity
modulated radiation toward said supporting means along a
plurality of equilength scan lines, each of said scan lines being
in a difl"erent plane intersecting said supporting means whereby
during a single traverse of said carriage means a transverse
band of the record medium is scanned.
4,394,077
DEVICE FOR DETECTING SHARP FOCUSING
Tsunemi Yoshino, Ibaraki; Toshitsugu Kashihara; Hiroshi
Iwata, both of Nara, and Akitoshi Morioka, Osaka, all of
Japan, assignors to West Electric Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 313,668
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 27, 1980, 55-150527
Int. C\? G03B 13/18. 15/05
U.S. a. 354—25 8 Qaims
12 I o 10 ""n 3 15
1. An image focusing device characterized by comprising
a light beam projection means which is disposed within a
photographic lens, whose optical axis is contained in the
same plane which contains the optical axis of said photo-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1069
graphic lens and which can project the light beam toward
an object,
a lens-group displacement detection means which is dis-
posed within said photographic lens and which can re-
spond to the axial displacement of said photographic lens
for focusing the object so as to cause said light-beam
projection means to change the light-beam projection
direction,
a photodetection means which is disposed within a camera
body at such a position spaced apart from a main mirror
by the same distance between the mirror and the film
plane at which said photodetection means can intercept
the light beam passing through said photographic lens
along the optical axis thereof and at which said photode-
tection means will not interfere with the formation of the
image of the object through said photographic lens upon
a film plane,
a driver-control means which includes an actuating switch
and which, upon closure of said actuating switch, can
drive said light-beam projection means, and
a detection circuit which drives a display means responding
to the output from said photodetection means to detect
whether or not said photographic lens is sharply and
correctly focused at the object.
where Ki,K2,K,+2 are coefficients, and
controlling exposure of the camera based on the scene
brightness (B).
4,394,078
METHOD OF CONTROLLING EXPOSURE
Takaaki Terashita, Minami-ashigara, Japan, assignor to Fuji
Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,155
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 3, 1979, 54*127655
i Int. a.' G03B 7/08
U.S. a. 354—31 1 Claim
1. A method of controlling exposure for a camera based on
the scene brightness measured by light measuring elements
comprising the steps of;
dividing a light measuring area in a camera into a plurality of
zones,
providing at least one light measuring element in each of said
zones,
obtaining the maximum or minimum brightness (Bzi) in each
of said zones,
obtaining an average brightness (Bo) from the outputs of all
the light measuring elements provided in said light mea-
suring area,
obtaining a weighted sum of the brightness based on a for-
mula of
/=1
where K,+2 is a coefficient and n is the number of the
zones,
computing a scene brightness (B) by use of a formula of
B = K] + Ki-Bo-i- 1 K\+2Bzi
4 394 079
PHOTOGRAPHIC FLASH DEVICE OPERATIVELY
RESPONSIVE TO THE LUMINANCE OF AN OBJECT TO
BE PHOTOGRAPHED TO PREVENT OVEREXPOSURE
Yoshiyuki Takematsu, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Fuji Koeki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan, a part interest
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,510
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 26, 1980, 55-85953;
Jul. 18, 1980, 55-97571
Int. a.' G03B 15/03
U.S. a. 354-33 12 Qaims
C -- D ■ A B ■
9. A photographic flash device operatively responsive to the
luminance of an object to be photographed and for use with a
camera including means for positioning a flash light device into
a retracted, nonoperative position and into an extended, opera-
tive position, the photographic flash device comprising:
a DC power source;
charge storage means coupled to said DC power source for
charging thereby;
means for triggering said flash light device when the charge
level of said charge storage means exceeds a predeter-
mined charge level;
means for detecting the luminance level of an object to be
photographed and for inhibiting the charging of said
charge storage means when the detected luminance level
is greater than a predetermined luminance level; and
means for driving the positioning means to control the posi-
tioning of said flash light device in said operative position
responsive to the detection of the luminance of the object
to be photographed being less than said predetermined
level and in said nonoperative position responsive to the
detection of the luminance of the object to be photo-
graphed being greater than said predetermined level.
4,394,080
WINDING DEVICE FOR CAMERA
Hirovuki Kimura, Kawasaki, and Tateo Yamada, Yokohama,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 261,802, May 8, 1981, abandoned. This
application Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,506
Claims priority, application Japan, May 13, 1980, 55-63091;
May 13, 1980, 55-63097
Int. C\? G03B 1/12, 17/36
U.S. a. 354—173 13 Qaims
1. A winding device for a camera in which winding of a
loaded film from a winding start position to an exposure start
position is made automatically without interrelation to expo-
sure operations, comprising:
display means for displaying the number of film frames
exposed during exposure operations, said display means
being rotatable in response to winding and rewinding of
1070
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the film and being restorable to an initial state before film
winding by completion of film rewinding;
control means operative to automatically enable winding of
loaded film, said control means being movably supported;
changeover means associated with rotation of said display
means, said display means being in contact with said con-
4,394,082
SHUTTER FOR CAMERA
Michio Senuma, Tokyo, and Kunio Watanabe, Kawasaki, both of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,524
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 23, 1980, 55-6900[U]
Int. a.i G03B 9/40
U.S. a. 354—246 2 Qaims
trol means to maintain said control means operative while
said display means displays the region from the winding
start position to the exposure start position; and
displacing means for displacing said control means out of the
operative zone of the changeover means, said displacing
means operating in response to a rewind releasing opera-
tion.
4,394,081
MAGNETICALLY CONTROLLED SHUTTER
Teiji Hashimoto, and Syuichiro Saito, both of Kawasaki, Japan,
assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Scr. No. 292,733
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1980, 55-118607
Int. a.' G03B 9/62
U.S. a. 354—234 8 Qaims
1. A shutter for a camera comprising:
an opening for light to pass therethrough;
a plurality of shutter blades for opening and closing said
opening for said light, said plurality of shutter blades
comprising
(a) a plastic sheet
(b) a metal layer formed on both surfaces of said plastic
sheet, said metal layer having a thickness of between
0.001 to 0.005 mm;
(c) a black coating on the surface of said metal layer;
(d) an embossed member for effecting connection with
said shutter blades; and
(e) shutter driving members mounted on said embossed
portions of each of said plurality of shutter blades so as
to connect said shutter blades to each other, said mem-
bers opening and closing said plurality of shutter blades.
4,394,083
IMAGING SYSTEM FOR A MULTI-MAGNinCATION
COPIER UTILIZING GRADIENT INDEX LENS ARRAY
James D. Rees, Fittsford, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corporation,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,409
Int. a.3 G03B 27/00. 27/68
U.S. a. 355—1 3 Qaims
1. A magnetically controlled shutter comprising: a leading
shutter blind and a following shutter blind, a leading checking
member for holding the leading shutter blind, a following
checking member for holding the following shutter blind, and
a leading electromagnet for controlling the leading shutter
blind and a following electromagnet for controlling the follow-
ing shutter blind, each acting on the respective checking mem-
bers as power is supplied thereto for releasing a checking
thereof, the electromagnet for controlling the following shut-
ter blind having magnetic action characteristics different from
those of the electromagnet for controlling the leading shutter
blind, wherein said electromagnets are attraction type mag-
nets, and wherein said electromagnets have respective yokes
made of different magnetic substances.
[_lJ
1. An imaging system for a multi-magnification copier
wherein a document on an object plane is reproduced onto a
photosensitive image plane at a selected magnification, said
system including:
a lens array assembly comprising a first gradient index lens
array positioned between the object and image planes, to
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1071
transmit an image of said document onto said image plane
first at a unity magnification,
a second gradient index lens array positioned between the
object and image planes, said lens array adapted to trans-
mit an image of said document onto said image plane at a
second magnification m other than unity, said system
further including:
means for preventing transmission of said document image
through a selected one of said lens arrays whereby light
reflected from said document is transmitted through said
other array in the particular magnification onto the image
plane,
illumination means placed beneath the object plane and
adapted to provide a narrow illumination band of light
along the bottom surface of the object plane so as to create
a document scan exposure zone,
means for driving said document past said exposure zone,
said driving means adapted to move the platen at a first
rate associated with said unity magnification, a second
rate associated with said second magnification and at least
a third rate at one of said magnifications, said third rate
resulting in an anamorphic magnification K of said docu-
ment image at said imaging plane in the scan direction, and
means for moving the image plane at a process speed V
4,394,084
LOW-PROnLE ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC COPYING
MACHINE
Manfred R. Kuehnle, Lexington, Mass., assignor to Coulter
Systems Corporation, Bedford, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 11,309, Feb. 12, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,305
' Int. a.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—3 BE 31 Qaims
AM '■'-'J' '*
1. A low-profile electrophotographic copying machine espe-
cially suitable for table top use comprising
an electrophotographic imaging belt mounted for rotational
and horizontal movement on at least a pair of spaced
rollers, to define a pair of substantially parallel horizon-
tally oriented closely proximate upper and lower reaches,
the lower reach of which is positioned to define an image
plane, at least one of said rollers being driven, drive means
for driving the said roller and producing rotational move-
ment of said belt,
a charging station, including a corona generating device
arranged adjacent the path of said belt for applying a
charge potential thereto as the belt travels therepast and
an exposure station located along the path of said belt
downstream of said charging station whereat a light image
is projected onto said charged belt to form an electrostatic
latent image,
a horizontal copy platen arranged substantially parallel with
and spaced from said electrophotographic belt generally
at about the same level as said upper reach of said electro-
photographic belt,
a folded optical projection station including a projection
system for projecting light image of a document from the
copy platen to said electrophotographic belt at said expo-
sure station to form said electrostatic latent image on said
lower reach of said belt at the image plane,
-a development station located along the path of said belt
downstream of said exposure station for developing said
electrostatic latent image as the electrophotographic belt
travels therepast,
a carrier medium supply and feed station, mounted above
said electrophotographic belt whereby to dispense carrier
medium to said belt subsequent to development of said
electrostatic latent image on the belt,
and an image transfer station, including means for transfer-
ring said developed image onto said carrier medium after
receipt of the carrier medium from said supply and feed
station and delivering said carrier medium having said
transferred image to the exterior of said machine, the
upper reach of the electrophotographic belt being posi-
tioned proximate both said last mentioned two sutions to
provide for delivery of the carrier medium to said upper
reach and the reception of said carrier medium by said
upper reach, a housing for containing said electrophoto-
graphic imaging belt, said folded optical station, said
developing station and said carrier supply station, said
developing station being partially nested within said
folded projection station, with said electrophotographic
belt being located between and closely proximate to said
developing station and said carrier medium supply station.
4 394 085
PROCESSING STATION FOR CHARGING. EXPOSING
AND DEVELOPING PRINTING MASTERS
Werner Dennhardt, Bad Kreuznach, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,482
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 15,
1980, 3047205
Int. Q.5 G03G 15/00. 15/28
U.S. Q. 355—3 R n Qaims
1. A processing station for charging, exposing and develop-
ing printing masters, comprising an exposure table, at least one
corona device, a developing unit and an optical scanning-expo-
sure device; said exposure table being adapted to be rotated
through 180° about a pin and comprising two superposed
suction tables which are arranged in such a way that their
suction plates form the topside and the underside of the expo-
sure table.-
4,394,086
PARTICLE CONTAINMENT APPARATUS
James M. Hoffman, Jr., Walworth, and Richard A. Lux, Web-
ster, both of N.Y., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stamford,
Conn.
Filed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,695
Int. Q.^ G03G 15/00
U.S. Q. 355—3 R 10 Qaims
1. An apparatus for preventing particle contamination, in-
cluding
a moving member;
1072
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a housing defining a chamber for storing the particles; and
means, operatively associated with said housing, for deflning
a surface area extending in a direction substantially paral-
lel to and spaced from said member with the length of the
said DOWN
neously.
operating means are operated simulta-
4,394,088
COPYING MACHINE
Hiroyuki Hanamoto, and Yoshihiro Horie, both of Toyokawa,
Japan, assignors to Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha, Higa-
shi, Japan —
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,426
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1981, 56-4581 1
Int. a.3 G03G 15/00
U.S. a. 355—14 R 10 Qaims
4 3 23 29 24 22
surface area parallel to said member being much greater
than the space between the surface area of said defining
means and said member so as to minimize air fiow into and
out of the chamber in said housing, thereby preventing the
escape of particles from the chamber of said housing.
4,394,087
MECHANICAL ARRANGEMENT FOR CONTROLLING
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC APPARATUS
Yutaka Irie, Toyokawa; Kenzo Nagata, Okazaki, and Hideo Ito,
Toyokawa, all of Japan, assignors to Minolta Camera Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,398
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1980, 55-80526
Int. a.-' G03G 15/00. 15/04
U.S. a. 355—14 E 18 Qaims
8 9 10 II 6
12 13 14 15
16.
22
21
mii^i
P^
=(i=^
□ (!)
S4_-__, S S — ^1 — 4?
.,;"B2325^,;[r][F|[I][F] ^[®}|[^43
.pii434^0[i]0[c]
^4';R^[7]@[9][0]
:$=^
^
^
d
^^^M
^m^^
6 7
C i,
O 20 II
14
32 26 31
1. A mechanical arrangement including a device to be con-
trolled, an operational device for adjusting an active state of
said controlled device through external operations and a con-
trol means for controlling the active state of said controlled
device in response to operations of said operational device,
said operational device comprising:
indicating means for indicating changes in the active state of
said controlled device stepwise;
UP operating means for increasing one step by one step an
indication of said indicating means; and
DOWN operating means for decreasing one step by one step
the indication of said indicating means;
said control means comprising:
means for changing the indication of said indicating means in
response to operations of said UP operating means and
said DOWN operating means and for changing the active
state of said controlled device in accordance with the
indication of said indicating means; and
means for setting the indication of said indicating means and
the active state of said controlled device to a predeter-
mined standard value when said UP operating means and
10. In an improved copying machine having means for re-
cording an image, means for developing an image, means for
storing copy paper, a copy paper transportation system for
translating copy paper to receive the developed image, to fix it
to the copy paper and to position it for removal from the copy
machine, means for moving copy paper from the storing means
into the paper transportation system, means for determining
the presence of copy paper in the storing means and providing
a signal, means for determining the movement of the copy
paper through the paper transportation system including a
paper sensing monitor for providing a signal and a timing
means initiated upon energization of a copying cycle to pro-
vide a first time period before introduction of copy paper into
the paper transportation system, the improvement comprising:
a paper transport error detecting means responsive to the
means for determining the movement of the copy paper
and enabled by a signal representing a failure of copy
paper to reach the paper sensing monitor within a prede-
termined time; and
control means connected to the paper transport error detect-
ing means and the means for determining the presence of
the copy paper in the storing means for disabling the paper
transjwrt error detecting means when the means for deter-
mining the presence of copy paper renders a no paper
signal after energization of a copy cycle and before expira-
tion of the first period of time.
4,394,089
COLOR PHOTOPRINTING WITH A SCANNING
MEMORY MASK
Walter L. Mcintosh, Woodbridge, and John N. Street, Alexan-
dria, both of Va., assignors to LogEtronics, Inc., Springfield,
Va.
Filed Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,765
Int. aj G03B 27/04
U.S. a. 355—88 30 Qaims
1. A color contact printer for exposing an image receiving
media from an image carrying media with a scanning spot of
radiant energy, wherein said image receiving media is substan-
tially opaque to at least one spectral component of said radiant
energy, said printer comprising:
a. a single means for scanning said image carrying media
with at least one scanning spot of radiant energy, said
means subsequently being used to expose said image re-
ceiving media;
b. at least one photosensor means for measuring the radiant
energy passing through the image carrying media, to
generate density-related signals;
July 191 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1073
c. means responsive to said density-related signals for modu-
lating said scanning spot to modify the effective contrast
range and exposure level of said density-related signals;
d. luminous mask memory means for storing said modified
density-related signals, said signals representing a density-
corrected luminous mask of said image;
e. means for bringing said opaque image receiving media
into intimate contact with said image carrying media after
said luminous mask memory scan has been completed;
f. means for exposing said image receiving media through
said image carrying media with said scanning spot of
radiant energy, said exposing scan having said density-
corrected luminous mask superimposed thereon to alter
the exposing effect of said scanning spot to provide a
density-corrected image on said image receiving media.
25. A method of automatically modifying the exposure level
and contrast excursion limits for a color contact printer
wherein an opaque photographic receiving media is used, said
method comprising:
a. positioning a color original to be duplicated over a scan-
ning spot light source, said light source having means to
vary the respective blue, red and green components of
said light;
b. prescanning said original with said scanning spot while
measuring the light passing through the original to deter-
mine its minimum and maximum density, the maximum
density of the material, the difference between said mini-
mum and maximum densities (AD) and its average density;
c. comparing the AD value to a predetermined reference
value to generate a scanning spot control signal, said
reference value representing the maximum contrast accep-
tance limits of said photographic receiving media;
d. memory scanning the original while simultaneously (1)
modulating the scanning spot with said control signal, and
(2) recording the light level passing through the original in
a memory storage means, said controlled modulation
being effective to alter the contrast excursion limits and
determine the exposure level required, said modulated
light level representing a modified luminous mask of the
original to be duplicated;
e. positioning said opaque photographic receiving media
over said color original and in intimate contact therewith;
f. exposing said opaque photographic receiving media with
said scanning spot while modulating said spot with the
luminous mask signal stored in said memory storage
means, whereby 'he exposure level and contrast excursion
limits of said exposure are retained within the predeter-
mined contrast excursion limits of the opaque photo-
graphic receiving media.
4,394,090
PROCESS TIMING APPARATUS
Robert L. Hyde, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to TRW Inc.,
Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,045
Int. a.3 G04F 8/00, 10/00
U.S. a. 368-121 24 Qalms
_»«;5i>}_v«*.ifc,i
C»f<X OuTfUt
1. In a system for controlling a process, timing apparatus
comprising a display device normally operative to display a
value representative of a process variable; control means re-
sponsive to the process variable attaining a predetermined
value for producing a control signal to change the process
from a first state to a second state; timing means responsive to
the process variable attaining said predetermined value for
measuring, during a predetermined period of time, the elapsed
time from the time at which the process variable attains said
predetermined value and for producing a timing signal having
an instantaneous value representative of the elapsed time; and
means for displaying on the display device, during said prede-
termined period of time and in place of the value representative
of the process variable, a value dependent upon the relation-
ship between the value of the timing signal and the predeter-
mined period of time.
4,394,091
AIR BEARING AND ANTIFRICTION BEARING
ASSEMBLY
Edward D. Klomp, Mount Clemens, Mich., assignor to General
Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,934
Int. a.^ F16C 21/00. 35/07
U.S. a. 384—101 3 Claims
22 19
1. A hydrodynamic foil bearing and anti-friction bearing
assembly, comprising,
a shaft housing member having an axial bore,
a rotatable shaft member receivable within the axial bore
with a predetermined maximum static eccentricity be-
tween the axis of the axial bore and the axis of the shaft
member when the shaft member is at zero speed,
a hydrodynamic foil bearing within the axial bore for rotat-
ably supporting the shaft member at a predetermined
rotational speed with a predetermined minimum running
eccentricity between the axis of the axial bore and the axis
of the shaft member,
an antifriction bearing element within the axial bore axially
1074
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
adjacent the hydrodynamic foil bearing and including
inner and outer races and a complement of rolling ele-
ments disposed therebetween, one of the races being se-
cured to one member of the shaft and housing members
and the other race being engageable with the other mem-
ber of the Shift and housing members at zero shaft speed
and at low shaft speeds,
the other race being eccentrically spaced from the other
member by an amount which is less than the maximum
static eccentricity and greater than the minimum running
eccentricity whereby the bearing element provides the
sole support of the shaft member at zero speed,
the support of the shaft member being shared between the
bearing element and the foil bearing as the shaft member
accelerates from zero shaft speed to running shaft speed,
with the shaft member being solely supported by the foil
bearing at running sjseed as the other race of the bearing
element moves away from the other member and the shaft
member rotates within the axial bore at the predetermined
minimum running eccentricity.
4,394,092
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR HIGH SPEED
THERMAL PRINTING
Miroslav S. Osmera, and Ralf M. Brooks, both of Waterloo,
Canada, assignors to NCR Canada Ltd. - NCR Canada Ltee,
Mississauga, Canada
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 333,148
Int. aJ B41J 31/02: GOID 15/10
U.S. a. 400—120 22 Claims
dance with a pattern of data to be printed so as to partially
complete the printing of said pattern; and
said moving means including indexing means for providing
relative movement (along a line which is substantially
perpendicular to said rows) among said face, said ribbon,
and said record medium when they are in said printing
relationship so as to present said rows of heating elements
to an unprinted portion of said record medium to enable
progressively the completing of said pattern of data,
whereby upon predetermined numbers of energizations of
said heating elements and subsequent indexings by said
indexing means, said pattern of data is completed.
4,394,093
SUPPORT MEANS FOR PRINT WIRE
Kiyomitsu Asano, Musashino; Masao Jozuka, and Toshikatsu
Kondo, both of Nagoya, all of Japan, assignors to Brother
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Nagoya and Nippon Telecommuni-
cation Engineering Company, Tokyo, both of, Japan
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,298
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 12, 1980, 55-111426
Int. a.^ B41J 3/12
U.S. a. 400—124 3 Qaims
1. An electroresistive printing apparatus comprising:
a printing station;
at least one printing unit at said printing station, with each
said printing unit having a face, and with each said face
being comprised of a matrix of resistive heating elements
arranged in rows and columns so as to produce a printed
dot density of a predetermined number of dots per milli-
meter;
means for positioning a record medium at said printing
station;
means for providing a ribbon containing heat-transferrable
ink at said printing station;
means for moving relatively said face of said printing unit,
said ribbon, and said record medium into and out of print-
ing relationship at said printing station;
means for energizing momentarily selected ones of said
heating elements in said rows when said ribbon, said re-
cord medium and said face are in said printing relationship
for transferring said ink to said record medium in accor-
1. A print wire support device for a printer wherein a plural-
ity of print wires are selectively driven in a longitudinal direc-
tion thereof to perform a printing action, said support device
comprising:
an armature including an arm portion carrying each of said
print wires, said arm portion being formed of a single
planar blank by bending into a structure of a U-shaped
cross section having opposite arms and a base, said arm
portion having a free end and including
a pair of side portions corresponding to the opposite arms of
said U-shaped cross section and facing toward each other,
free end parts of said side portions being joined at inner
surfaces thereof by welding in a plane parallel to said side
portions to form a joined jwrtion at said free end part of
said arm portion, and
a connecting portion corresponding to the base of said U-
shaped cross section and connecting said pair of side
portions,
said joined portion being formed in spaced relation to said
connecting portion and having a first supporting aperture
formed therethrough substantially perpendicular to said
connecting portion, each of said inner surfaces of said
parts of the side portions being formed with a groove of
semicircular cross section to define a substantially full
360° cylindrical inner surface defining said first supporting
aperture when said inner surfaces are welded,
said connecting portion having a second supporting aperture
formed through the thickness thereof and in alignment
with said first supporting aperture along a line substan-
tially perpendicular to said connecting portion,
said first and said second supporting apertures being spaced
from each other by a predetermined distance along said
line of alignment,
said print wires each having a fixed end portion welded to a
portion of said connecting portion defining said second
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1075
supporting aperture, and said fixed end portion extending
through said first supporting aperture in contact with said
substantially full 360° cylindrical inner surface defining
said first supporting aperture such that a bending force
applied to said print wire upon said printing action is
received by said cylindrical inner surface.
which include vertical supporting elements provided with
annular fianges having radially directed apertures for receiving
fastening wedges, said scaffolding structure comprising a scaf-
folding element formed at one end thereof with a terminal lug;
a coupling shoe having two prongs arranged one above the
other; an open slot formed between the prongs for engaging
4 394 094
SLIDE MOTION SENSOR FOR SLIDE MOUNT DATA
PRINTER
Robert A. Simning, Minneapolis, and Michael E. Schultz,
Brooklyn Center, both of Minn., assignors to Pako Corpora-
tion, Minneapolis, Minn.
1 1 Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,297
II Int. CI.' B41F 77/00
U.S. a. 400-124 10 Qaims
3i
the flange and an elongated slot formed in the prongs for
receiving the fastening wedge, another flat lug projecting
outwardly from the terminal end of said shoe at an angle of
about 135° relative to the elongated slot, said flat lug having its
sides extending parallel to said terminal lug and being pivota-
bly connected thereto.
1. Apparatus for printing alphanumeric information on pho-
tographic slide mounts, the apparatus comprising:
a slide track along which the photographic slide mounts are
advanced, the slide track including a printing station;
printer means for printing alphanumeric characters on a
slide mount when the slide mount is positioned in the slide
track at the printing station;
mount indexing means for causing the slide mount to be
indexed from station-to-station along the slide track;
means for providing an eject signal indicating that a final
slide mount of a customer order is at the printing station;
a pair of generally parallel conveyor belts adjacent opposite
sides of the slide track and extending from the printing
station toward the exit end so that a slide mount at the
print station is held between the belts and the slide track
and the motion of the slide mount as it enters the print
station causes motion of the belts;
DC electric motor means responsive to the eject signal and
connected to the conveyor belts for driving the conveyor
belts to cause slide mounts located between the printing
station and the exit end to be driven toward the exit end,
the DC electric motor means generating an electric signal
in response to motion of the belts as the slide mount enters
the print station; and
control means responsive to the electric signal generated by
the DC electric motor means for controlling the printer
means and the mount indexing means.
4,394,096
ATTACHMENT SYSTEM FOR PLASTIC LINERS
Bruce W. Stevens, Roanoke, Ind., assignor to Menasha Corpora-
tion, Neenah, Wis.
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 297,023
Int. CI.-' B25G 3/00: F16B 2/14, 21/80: F16G 3/00
U.S. CI. 403—408 6 Claims
4,394,095
SCAFFOLDING STRUCTURE
Eberhard Layher, Blankenhornstrasse 17, D-7129 Giiglingen-
Eisensbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,100
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 29,
1981, 8112653[U]
Int. a.3 E04G 7/00
MS. a. 403—49 3 Qaims
1. A scaffolding structure for use in scaffolding systems
1. In a system attaching a plastic liner to a substrate using a
bolt with a plastic capped head that is received in an enlarged
recess at the exposed liner surface to be flush with said surface
and that has an attachment shank that extends through a shank
opening in the liner at the bottom of the recess and into the
substrate,
the improvement wherein:
the recess is straight-sided; the cap is straight-sided and
includes a pheripheral portion that extends around the
periphery of the bolt head and is peripherally smaller than
the recess; and the peripheral portion includes a radially
outwardly extending sealing skirt that is peripherally
larger than the recess and is rolled upwardly when the
bolt is inserted into a sealing engagement with the sides of
the recess.
1076
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,097
RETAINING APPARATUS
Wilhelm H. Horlacher, Hartford, Conn., assignor to Honeywell,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,435
Int. aj B25G 3/02: F16D 1/00
U.S. a. 403—360 4 Claims
'Ko 15
1. A retaining assembly for use in mounting on a first mem-
ber having a cylindrical aperture therein comprising:
a cylindrical member sized to extend through the aperture in
the first member, said cylindrical member having a surface
groove only part way around said cylindrical member
near one end thereof to form abutments where the groove
ends;
an externally threaded one-piece clip member having aq
inner cavity sized to snap over the end of said cylindrical
member, an inner surface of the cavity having a convex
partially circumferential ridge extending radially in-
wardly into the cavity and adapted to fit within the
groove on said cylindrical member upon insertion of said
cylindrical member into the cavity of said clip member to
hold said clip member on the end of said cylindrical mem-
ber, the ridge having an end portion which cooperates
with the abutments to prevent the clip member from
rotating with respect to said cylindrical members; and
a nut member inteinally threaded to cooperate with the
external threading of said clip member and operable to be
tightened against the first member to secure said cylindri-
cal member with respect to the first member.
full open position and operable to maintain said radial gate
at preselected incremental open positions intermediate
said closed and full open positions to permit a preselected
incremental flow of water through said waterway toward
said turbine;
a second gate carried by said radial gate and operable inde-
pendent of the positioning of said radial gate to be selec-
tively moved between a flow blocking position to a maxi-
mum open position with said second gate permitting a
maximum supplemental fiow of water through said water-
way to said turbine when in said maximum open position
and permitting generally no supplemental flow when in
said blocking position; said water face plate of said radial
gate having an opening therethrough operable to permit
said maximum supplemental fiow of water through said
radial gate to said turbine and said second gate comprising
a fiap-gate having a water surface plate sized to com-
pletely cover said opening in said radial gate; said flap-
gate being supported on said radial gate on a downstream
surface thereof in said blocking position wherein said
waler surface plate covers said opening in said radial gate
and movable from said blocking position to a maximum
open position to permit said maximum supplemental fiow
of water through said opening toward said turbine; and
means for selectively moving said second gate between said
blocking and maximum open positions independent of the
positioning of said first gate comprising a power operator
operably connected to said flap-gate to move said flap-
gate between said flap blocking and maximum open posi-
tion;
whereby said radial gate is positionable to an intermediate
open position permitting only a predetermined amount of
water to flow to the turbine which is less than an amount
necessary to drive the turbine to achieve a synchroniza-
tion of the turbine and said flap-gate may be operated to
permit a supplemental flow of water to the turbine to fine
tune the water flow to achieve synchronization and there-
after said radial gate may be opened to permit full water
flow to the turbine.
4 394 098
RADIAL GATE HAVING FINE TUNING OF FLOW
CONTROL
4 394 099
PLASTIC LENS CONTOUR CUTTING MACHINE
Emil Santinelli, Carmel, N.Y., assignor to Lemay Corporation,
Helmut H. Wirschal, York, and Warren G. Whippen, Dover, Carmel, N.Y.
both of Pa., assignors to Allis-Chalmers Corporation, Milwau-
kee Wis.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,537
Int. CI.' E02B 9/08; F03B 15/04
U.S. a. 405—77
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,225
Int. a.3 B23C 1/18: B24B 9/14
U.S. a. 409—104
2 Claims
f?,e2
12 Claims
"* US ^
./.
-IM
<«s. \
■^J»
ff-l
.^2
1 1 ' 1
^' V
^145,
lit
/J2
-9B __
1. An apparatus in operable combination with a hydraulic
turbine for controlling a flow of water through a waterway in
which said turbine, is located, comprising:
a radial gate within said waterway upstream of said turbine
having a water face plate movable between a closed posi-
tion for interrupting said flow of water through said wa-
terway toward said turbine and a full open position per-
mitting a generally uninhibited flow of water through said
waterway toward said turbine;
means for moving said radial gate between said closed and
1. An improved machine for cutting, edging, contouring,
and beveling the periphery of a plastic lens, said machine being
of the type having a head mounted on a base and carrying a
lens pattern and a plastic lens which is to be cut and has a base
curvature, means for rotating said pattern and said lens about a
common axis, wherein the machine includes a carriage
mounted on said base and having a pattern follower in bearing
contact with said pattern and having a rotatable cutter with a
cutting edge capable of engaging said periphery of said lens,
said cutting edge forming a beveling means, means for moving
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1077
said carriage substantially perpendicular toward and away
from said axis, said movement effecting an engagement of said
cutter with said periphery of said lens, the improvement com-
prising:
said cutter having a cutter edge of a metal of a high hardness
and rotatable at high speed, said cutter having a cutting
face and a radial plane of rotation, said cutting face form-
ing a clearance angle with said radial plane, said face
operative to direct particles along said face away from
said radial plane of rotation; and
bevel aligning means including base curve cam means con-
nected to said head and cam tracing means connected to
said carriage, said cam means having a surface forming the
same base curvature as said lens, said tracing means being
in bearing contact with said surface for effecting a move-
ment of said head with said lens in a first direction to a
position that aligns the center of said lens with said bevel-
ing means, said aligning means including biasing means
connected to said head and said base and effecting a move-
ment of said head in a second direction resulting in bearing
contact of said surface of said cam means against said
tracing means, said surface of said base curve cam means
including a plurality of discrete sectors, each of said sec-
tors having a different base curvature surface, said cam
means rotatable to effect bearing alignment between the
surface of any selected sector and said tracing means,
whereby when said selected sector has a surface forming
the same base curvature as the base curvature of said lens,
said tracing means effects a movement of said head with
said lens in said first direction to a position that aligns the
center of said lens with said beveling means,
whereby when said lens and said lens pattern are rotated and
said cutter is rotated at high speed, said carriage moves
toward said axis effecting an engagement of said cutter
with said lens periphery to cut and edge said plastic lens
and simultaneously form a bevel at the center of said
periphery.
4,394,100
PICKUP TRUCK CARGO BOX COVER ASSEMBLY
Harold K. Sperlich, Orchard Lake, Mich., assignor to Chrysler
Corporation, Highland Park, Mich.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,709
I Int. Q\? B62D 25/20
U.S. a. 4i(
16-2
6 Claims
1. In combination with a pickup truck having an open cargo
box formed of an upstanding front wall, upstanding sidewalls,
a floor and a pivotally mounted rear tailgate defining a cargo
area with a rearward access opening, said sidewalls including
an opposed pair of wheel housings projecting upwardly from
the floor and projecting inwardly into the cargo area, said
tailgate hinged for pivotal movement about a horizontal axis
between a substantially upright locked position closing at least
a portion of the access opening and a lowered position; the
improvement comprising:
first horizontally disposed channel means on said front wall
extending a predetermined distance thereacross;
second horizontally disposed channel means on said tailgate
in opposed relation with said first channel means whereby
said channels define a horizontally extending plane spaced
a predetermined distance above said cargo area floor;
each said wheel housing having an upper substantially pla-
nar surface located substantially in said horizontally ex-
tending plane;
rectangular panel means dimensioned such that its one for-
ward marginal transverse edge is adapted to be snugly
received in said first channel means, and
said panel means having a predetermined longitudinal di-
mension such that with said forward edge snugly received
in said front wall channel means its other rearward trans-
verse edge is adapted to be snugly received in said tailgate
channel means with said tailgate in its upright closed
position whereby said panel means is retained by said
tailgate channel means providing a covered load space on
the cargo area floor subjacent an upper level cargo area
on said panel means.
4,394,101
HEIGHT ADJUSTABLE CARGO CONTAINER LOCKING
MECHANISM
John E. Richer, Oceanside, Calif., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 225,883
Int. CI.' B60P 7/li
U.S. CI. 410—83 15 Qaims
10. A locking mechanism for securing a cargo container
having standard bottom located receptacle type fittings, com-
prising:
a housing which is adapted to be disposed beneath a fitting of
the container, the housing having a bottom and an open
top;
a platform slidably contained within the housing and
adapted to be raised upwardly out of and lowered into the
housing, the surface area of the platform being of a size to
permit said platform to bear against the bottom of a re-
spective fitting when in the upward position out of the
housing;
elevator means for raising and lowering the platform;
a locking element mounted on top of the platform and
adapted to be received within the container fitting;
means connected to the locking element and extending
downwardly through the platform and do>^nwardIy
through the housing for rotating the locking element
within the fitting container.
4,394,102
SERVO AMPLinCATION SYSTEM
Clarence F. Batchelder, Jamul; Charles E. Thomas, San Diego,
and Kent B. Casady, La Jolla, all of Calif., assignors to Clipp
Control Corporation, San Diego, Calif.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,386
Int. CI.' B25J i/00
U.S. a. 414—5 13 Claims
1. A servo amplification system comprising:
(a) a control cylinder having a double-acting control piston
defining a first and second control chamber on opposite
sides of said piston;
1078
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
(b) a pilot value and a pilot cylinder having a double-acting
piston and being operated by said pilot valve, said valve
having a first and second inlet port connected to said first
and second control chamber, respectively, to drive said
pilot selectably in a first or second direction;
(c) a drive cylinder having a drive piston activated by a
directional valve operated by said pilot cylinder;
(d) a feedback cylinder with a double-acting feedback piston
JB< « 22
at, *
v^ v=^m
^
A^f^si
-i-JI IMlv'l
w
1
hydraulic fluid through said hydraulic system, an improved
hydraulic system comprising:
said first hydraulic cylinder being connected hydraulically
in series with said second hydraulic cylinder, such that
hydraulic fluid flows between said first and second hy-
draulic cylinders without passing through one of said
control valves; and
a relief valve connected to said conduit means to redirect the
flow of hydraulic fluid away from said second hydraulic
cylinder to said first hydraulic cylinder after said second
hydraulic cylinder has reached the end of its stroke.
S-i'^"
-it ss
operatively connected to said drive piston to be moved
thereby, said feedback cylinder defining first and second
feedback chambers on opposite sides of said feedback
piston, said first and second feedback chambers communi-
cating with said second and first inlet ports respectively,
such that movement of said control piston in a first direc-
tion operates, through said pilot valve and cylinder, said
drive cylinder which moves a distance proportional to the
distance moved by said control cylinder.
4,394,104
CONTAINER STORAGE INSTALLATION
Mario Camerini, Via Puntoni 5, and Giacomo Pizzi, Piazza
Cavour 22, both of Livomo, Italy
Filed Jul, 16, 1980, Ser. No. 169,245
Oaims priority, application Italy, Jul. 16, 1979, 17408 A/79
Int. C\? B65G 7/06
U.S. a. 414—276 7 Qaims
4,394,103
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FOR A ROUND BALE WAGON
L. Dennis Butler, Kingsburg, and Alan R. Askov, Fresno, both of
Calif., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New Holland, Pa.
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,570
Int. CV AOID 87/12
U.S. a. 414—24.5 1 CI"™
» « . • "
1. In a bale wagon for picking up bales of crop material from
the field, accumulating a plurality of bales and transporting the
accumulated bales to a preselected storage location to be un-
loaded from the bale wagon, said bale wagon having a mobile
frame adapted for movement across the field; a bale pickup
means pivotally mounted on said mobile frame for individually
engagmg bales of crop material on the ground and elevating
said bales onto the bale wagon; a load bed supported on said
frame for accumulating a plurality of bales, said load bed in-
cluding a receiving portion on which a number of bales may be
deposited and arranged in a predetermined manner; means for
arranging and positioning said bales deposited on said load bed
by said bale pickup means; a hydraulic system including a first
hydraulic cylinder for interconnecting said bale pickup means
and said frame for pivotal movement of said bale pickup means
to elevate bales onto said receiving portion of said load bed, a
second hydraulic cylinder interconnecting said means for
arranging and positioning said bales and said frame for opera-
tively driving said means for arranging and positioning, con-
trol valves for controlling the flow of hydraulic fluid to each
respective said hydraulic cylinder and conduit means in opera-
tive communication with said control valves and said hydrau-
lic cylinders for transferring a flow of hydraulic fluid therebe-
tween; and power means for operatively powering the flow of
1. In a container storage installation comprising: a ware-
house having a plurality of elongated, container-receiving cells
arranged in an array of rows and columns, a servicing passage-
way common to said cells and into which each cell opens by
one end, and a container loading- and unloading unit displace-
able horizontally and vertically in the said passageway for
loading and unloading a container lengthwise into and from a
selected cell, each cell having floor members supporting a
container in the cell, and wherein the container comprises a
standard corner block at each of its four lower corners, the
improvement wherein:
the said floor members in each cell comprise a pair of trans-
versely spaced guide rails extending longitudinally of the
cell throughout substantially the whole length of the
latter, and a trolly bridging the rails and having a contain-
er-supporting upper surface providing a support for a
restricted lower front-edge region only of the container
substantially corresponding to the lower corner blocks at
that end, said trolly being freely reliable on the rails under
a thrust applied thereto by a container during loading and
unloading into and from the cell;
the rails in each cell are sloping towards the passageway
whereby, as the leading end of a container being pushed
into a cell takes its support on the trolly, the latter is
entrained by the container to climb along the rails thereby
to gradually lift the said leading end of the container;
the said loading- and unloading unit comprises a horizontally
elongated elevator platform capable of supporting a con-
tainer on its upper face, and a carriage displaceable on said
face from one end to the other end of the platform, said
carriage having thereon first means for gripping a con-
tainer on the platform by an end pair of the corner blocks
at the lower rear-edge region of the container to push and
pull the container lengthwise thereof for respectively
loading and unloading a cell and second means engageable
with said end pair of blocks at the lower rear-edge region
of said container to raise and lower said rear-edge region
relative to said carriage to assist in the transfer of said
container; and
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1079
wherein the end section of the platform adjacent the ware-
house comprises transfer means for delivering to the trolly
the said lower front-edge region of a container supported
by the platform as the container is pushed by the carriage,
said transfer means comprising a power-actuated pad in
the upper face of the platform arranged to reciprocate
longitudinally of the platform while lifting the said end
region of the container by engagement with a comer
block in said region.
4,394,105
TIPPING TRAILER
Gordon B. Mitchell, R.D. 3, Hamilton, New Zealand
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 254,011
Int. a.J B60P 1/28
U.S. a. 414-436 5 Qaims
1. A tipping trailer comprising a hopper having a base, side,
front and rear walls, a pair of trailer wheels mounted to said
base arranged to support the hopper from a ground surface
during towing, a frame comprising a pair of substantially paral-
lel side arms each being pivotably connected to the sides of the
hopper at a point above the trailer wheels and a forward por-
tion connecting the side arms and having a trailer coupling
fixed at or near the leading end thereof by which the trailer can
be connected to a towing vehicle, and locking means arranged
to secure the hopper with respect to the frame during towing,
wherein the side walls of the hopper are a matching pair, each
having a first curved edge portion extending from the base
forming a pair of skids for the hopper, the arrangement being
such that upon release of the locking means the hopper and the
trailer wheels may tilt about the pivotal connections between
the side arms and the sides of the hopper such that an edge of
the skids adjacent the base makes contact with the surface
below and on reversal of the trailer the hopper and wheels
revolve, the hopper rolls back on the curved skids, and the
wheels pass upwards between the side arms whereby the
hopper is upended.
4,394,106
GLASS HANDLING LIFT TRUCK
Kenneth A. Frees, St. Peters, and Thomas E. Quick, Florissant,
both of Mo., assignors to Missouri Research Laboratories,
Inc., St. Charles, Mo.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,829
Int. C\? B66F 9/14
U.S. CI. 414-622 8 Qaims
dling glass sheets in packs comprising a glass pack lifting
frame, gripping means at the sides of said lifting frame for
engaging sides of a glass pack and support feet at the bottom of
said lifting frame for supporting said glass pack, a framework
of said mechanism for attachment to the lift mast of said truck,
and further characterized by swinging frame means pivotally
interengaging said framework and lifting frame to permit slew-
ing and side-shifting movements of said lifting frame relative to
said truck, first controllable motor means for eflecting said
side-shifting movement and second controllable piotor means
for effecting said slewing movement, said first motor means
comprising first extendable-retractable hydraulic cylinder
means effectively interengaging said framework and said
swinging frame means, said second motor means comprising
second extendable-retractable hydraulic cylinder means effec-
tively mterengaging said lifting frame and said swingmg frame
means, said swinging frame means including a first pair of
oppositely disposed swingable frame members swingabiy en-
gaged to said framework on opposite sides thereof and a sec-
ond pair of oppositely disposed swingable frame members
swingabiy interengaging distal ends of said firsfpair with said
lifting frame, whereby said lifting frame may be controliably
positioned both angularly and laterally relative to said truck
for picking up and depositing glass sheets.
4,394,107
TRACTOR MOUNTED FORKLIFT
Steve L. Siebert, Qovis, Calif., assignor to D & S Manufactur-
ing, Clovis, Calif.
Filed Nov. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 318,662
Int. a.3 B66F 9/06
U.S. a. 414—631 7 Qaims
1. For use with a lift truck, a lift truck mechanism for han-
1. A forklift assembly for use in conjunction with a vehicle
of the type having hitch means moveable in a generally vertical
direction, the forklift assembly comprising:
a frame;
means for mounting said frame to the hitch means;
tine assembly means including a generally horizontal exten-
sion member moveably mounted parallel to a generally
vertical first path along said frame;
roller means rotatabiy mounted to said frame;
a first cable having one end attached to and wrapped around
said roller means in a first direction and having its other
end attached to a point on said vehicle, said first direction
chosen so that raising said frame along a generally vertical
second path by the hitch means causes said first cable to
unwind from said roller means; and
means operably coupling said roller means and said tine
assembly means for raising said tine assembly along said
1080
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
first path when said roller is rotated in a second direction,
said second direction being opposite said first direction.
4,394,108
FRONT LOADER VEHICLE WITH TELESCOPING
BOOM
Richard J. Cook, Hayti, and Richard Reade, Caruthersville,
both of Mo., assignors to Mid-Continent Aircraft Corpora-
tion, Hayti, Mo.
Filed Dec. 21, 1977, Ser. No. 862,972
Int. a.' B66C 23/04
U.S. a. 414—680 9 Qaims
cially for propulsion plants on aircraft adapted to be selectively
shut-off in a low-resistance position, said equipment including
a rotor hub with blades pivotally mounted thereon, said blades
(20) having a longitudinal axis (L^) and a twist {^0) about said
axis (L^) between the chord line (Spf) at the blade root and the
chord line (S/>s) at the blade tip,
the improvement comprising means whereby said blades
(20) are each selectively pivotal about pivot support
means on the hub into an operational or a collapsed posi-
tion,
9. For use in a front loader vehicle which has integral frame
structure with front and rear frame portions, a boom arrange-
ment comprising: a front and a rear boom support means
adapted respectively for rigid attachment to the front and rear
frame portions of the vehicle; a telescoping boom structure;
means pivotally mounting the rear end of said boom structure
to the rear boom support means to permit elevation of said
boom about a rear pivot axis from a horizontal position with
the boom structure projected forward to an elevated position
extending upward and forward; said front boom support means
comprising an extensible power operated motor connected to
the boom and adapted to be connected to the front truck frame
portions; said boom structure having at least two telescoping
elongate members, and comprising: outer and inner tubes,
roller means carried by both tubes enabling a free rolling coac-
tion between said tubes, the innermost elongate member being
slidable from a fully retracted position to an extended position
within the outermost elongate member; means to interlock said
elongate members at least in fully retracted and fully extended
interrelationship; said innermost tube, when the locking means
are disengaged, being unrestrained and free to roll under iner-
tia forces betwen the retracted and extended limit positions;
and abutment means on each of said tubes adapted to provide
an abutment telescopic limit engagement at the retracted posi-
tion and at the extended position of the innermost tube; said
means pivotally mounting the rear end of said boom structure
including an elongated pivot cross beam disposed normal to
said beam adjacent and under the rearward portion of the
outermost tube with means rigidly securing said support beam
to said outermost tube; and means mounted on the front end of
the innermost elongate member for carrying a material dis-
pensing container.
4 394 109
ARRANGEMENT AND EQUIPMENT FOR THE
DISPLACEMENT OF BLADES, PARTICULARLY
PROPELLER BLADES
Donald Ritchie, Immenstaad, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Domier GmbH, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 119,806
Int. a.3 B64C n/28
U.S. a. 416—142 * Claims
1. In equipment for the adjustment of rotor blades, particu-
larly propeller blades of fans, turbines, and the like, and espe-
said blades (20) when collapsed forming, by means of the
position of pivot axes (33) of said pivot support means,
helical cut-outs of a common cylindrical or conical enve-
lope with the longitudinal axes (L^) extending at a slant
imparted by the twist (Ag) with respect to the longitudinal
direction of said envelope,
the position of the pivot axes (33) at a common base circle
being determined by the slant of the pivot axes (33) with
respect to the plane of rotation (E— E) of said blades (20)
and by the slant of the axes (33) with respect to the chord
line {Spf) at the blade root.
4,394,110
SWASH-PLATE TYPE COMPRESSOR
Yutaka Ishizuka, Konan, Japan, assignor to Diesel Kiki Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,496
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 13, 1979, 54-172525
Int. a.3 F04B 1/18. 39/02
U.S. a. 417—269 5 Qaims
1. A swash-plate type compressor comprising:
a cylindrical cylinder block having two cylindrical members
combined together in axial alignment and horizontally dis-
posed, each of said cylindrical members having an outer end
face; a drive shaft extending through said cylinder block
along an axis thereof and rotatable relative to said cylinder
block; a swash plate secured on said drive shaft; and three
pistons arranged within said cylinder block in engagement
with said swash plate;
said cylinder block including:
three cylinder bores within which said pistons are slidably
disposed, said cylinder bores being formed within said cylin-
drical members of said cylinder block in circumferentially
spaced relation to each other and extending through said
cylinder block axially thereof, two of said cylinder bores
being located at upper portions of said cylinder block and
one being located at a lower portion thereof;
three spaces formed within each one of said cylindrical mem-
JULY 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
108 1
bers of said cylinder block and opening in said outer end face
of said each one cylindrical member, each of said spaces
being arranged between adjacent ones of said three cylinder
bores, one of said spaces being located at an upper portion of
„ said each one cylindrical member and two of said spaces
being located at lower portions thereof, said three cylinder
bores being arranged in an array of an inverted triangle with
the diametric centers of said cylinder bores located at the
vertices of said inverted triangle, said three spaces being
arranged in an array of a triangle with the diametric centers
of said spaces located at the vertices of said triangle;
a chamber located at a central portion of said cylinder block,
within which said said swash plate is arranged;
said two spaces located at said two lower portions of said each
one cylindrical member being in communication with said
swash plate chamber, said two lower spaces and said swash
plate chamber forming an oil reservoir in which lubricating
oil is stored;
a communication bore communicating said one space located
at said upper portion of one of said cylindrical members with
said one space located at said upper portion of the other of
said cylindrical members; and
a vertical partition wall axially extending through said cylinder
block, said vertical partition wall dividing said one space
located at said upper portion of each of said cylindrical
members into a high pressure medium chamber and a low
pressure medium chamber, and also dividing said communi-
cation bore into two passages;
said high pressure chambers in said cylindrical members being
communicated with each other by one of said passages of
said communication bore, while said low pressure chambers
in said cylindrical members being communicated with each
other by the other of said passages of said communication
bore, said high pressure medium chambers and said one
passage of said communication bore serving as a passage for
high pressure medium, and said low pressure medium cham-
bers and said other passage of said communication bore
serving as a passage for low pressure medium.
axes in common with the axis of the shroud, motor supporting
legs which are connected to the shroud and have end flanged
portions in substantially the same plane as the upper end of the
shroud, and means for simultaneously fastening said flanged
portions of the motor supporting legs to the top cover and
drawing the upper end of the shroud snugly agamst the cover.
4 394 112
COMBINATION ROLLER TOOTH SET HAVING
ROLLER TEETH AND CONCAVE SURFACES DISPOSED
TO ENGAGE EACH OTHER
George V. Woodling, 22077 Uke Rd.. Rocky River, Ohio 44116
Continuation of Ser. No. 103,905, Dec. 17. 1979, abandoned.
This application Aug. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 292,523
Int. CI.' FOIC 1/113: F16H 1/28. 55/10
U.S. a. 418-61 B . 3 a.i„.
CT'
(
0
JO
o
[e ^
%
r>
« J It,
. C j
/Ts
^
IS
X
\
■^r^
» )
\.^_v(t
4
It
( "/
K^
'•"T
?7«
Lv
" T"
l«
o\
_y
U.
« )
o-
4 394 111
TOP COVER, MOTOR, FAN AND FAN SHROUD
ASSEMBLY FOR AN AIR CONDITIONING UNIT
John M. Wiese, Red Bud, and Russell W. Hoeffken, Belleville,
both of III., assignors to Snyder General Corporation, Red
Bud, III
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,080
Int. a.3 F28F 13/12: F04B 35/04: F04D 29/54
U.S. a. 417-360 10 Qaims
1. In an air conditioning unit, a top cover with a vent for the
passage of air, a depending cylindrical shroud in communica-
tion with said vent, a fan and a motor for driving the fan having
1. An inside and an outside combination roller tooth set
comprising an in.side rotary body member having a longitudi-
nal rotary body axis, an outside stationary body member sur-
rounding said inside rotary body member and having a longitu-
dinal stationary body axis substantially parallel to said rotary
body axis, said rotary body axis and said stationary body axis
being displaced from each other, said inside rotary body mem-
ber being internally unsupported and having freedom of move-
ment to provide a rotational movement about its own rotary
body axis and a recycling movement about said stationary
body axis, said inside rotary body member having therein a
plurality of inside roller teeth disposed substantially parallel to
and extending circumferentially around said rotary body axis
as a center, all of said inside roller teeth having substantially
the same diameter and being spaced apart one from the other in
a circumferential direction and defining inside adjacent roller
teeth having substantially equal intervals therebetween, said
outside body member having therein a plurality of outside
roller teeth disposed substantially parallel to and extending
circumferentially around said stationary body axis as a center,
all of said outside roller teeth having substantially the same
diameter and being spaced apart one from the other in a cir-
cumferential direction and defining outside adjacent roller
teeth having substantially equal intervals therebetween, one of
the said plurality of roller teeth being one less in number than
the number of the other of said plurality of roller teeth, said
inside body member being provided with a plurality of out-
wardly facing roller recesses into which said inside roller teeth
may be respectively mounted, said outside body member being
provided with a plurality of inwardly facing roller recesses
into which said outside roller teeth may be respectively
mounted, said inside and said outside roller teeth facing each
other and defining a plurality of contactable cylindrical roller
teeth, one of said body members having a plurality of longitu-
dinally extending geometric concave surfaces respectively
disposed between and in parallel relation to said adjacent roller
teeth thereof, at least one of said geometric concave surfaces
and at least a roller tooth in the other of said body members
being disposed to engage each other and provide a concave-to-
convex contact engagement therebetween, each of said roller
teeth in one of said plurality of roller teeth having a diameter
greater than the respective intervals between the adjacent
roller teeth in the other of said plurality of roller teeth, said
concave-to-convex contact engagement in combination with
1082
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said plurality of contactable cylindrical roller teeth externally
and solely supporting said inside rotary body member for
rotational movement about its own rotary body axis and for
recycling movement about said stationary body axis.
4,394,114
COMPRESSOR
Tenio Maruyama, Neyagawa; Tadayuki Onoda, Toyonaka, and
Tatsuhisa Taguchi, Shiga, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,084
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1980, 55-39729
Int. a.^ F03C 2/00
U.S. a. 418—269 10 Qaims
4 394,113
LUBRICATION AND PACKING OF A ROTOR-TYPE
COMPRESSOR
Karl Bammert, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Niirnberg Aktiengesell-
schaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,722
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 5,
1979, 2948992
Int. a.' FOIC 1/16
U.S. CI. 418—98 10 Claims
5 >3 .2 4 V 12- 7 10 /"
F 3 m 6 I 2 13 8 9
13a 13b
X-
1. A rotary compressor comprising:
a housing defining a working space with an intake for receiv-
ing gas at low pressure to be compressed, a discharge for
discharging compressed gas at high pressure and at least
two oil spaces;
at least one rotor having a shaft rotatably mounted in said
working space for compressing gas in said working space;
a radial plane bearing adjacent each oil space connected
between each end of said shaft and said housing for rotat-
ably mounting said rotor;
a shaft packing surrounding said shaft between each of said
bearings and said working space;
a lubricating oil circuit including, an oil supply tank defining
a tank space for receiving oil and gas, a supply conduit for
supplying oil from said tank space to each bearing, and a
return conduit for returning oil from said oil spaces to said
tank space;
a pressure equalizing connection connected between said
lubricating oil circuit and said low pressure intake to
equalize the pressure of all of said oil lubricating circuit
with pressure in said intake;
said housing defining a drain space surrounding said shaft
and between said packing and said bearing at each end of
said shaft for collecting oil flowing out from each bearing
on one side of each drain space and gas flowing through
each packing from said working space on opposite side of
each drain space;
a drain channel connected respectively between each drain
space and each oil space; and
an oil space conduit connected between said two oil spaces.
1. A compressor which comprises:
a cylinder having a hollow interior;
a rotor member rotatably eccentrically mounted in said
hollow interior and having a plurality of outwardly open
sliding recesses therein;
a plurality of vanes slidably mounted in corresponding slid-
ing recesses and extending outwardly into sliding contact
with the inner surface of said cylinder;
a rotor shaft on said rotor having the ends extending from
the opposite ends of said rotor;
end plates secured to opposite ends of said cylinder and
closing said hollow interior for defining a vane chamber in
said cylinder, said ends of said rotor shaft being rotatably
supported on said end plates, and the surfaces of said end
plates and the surfaces of the ends of said rotor being in
spaced opposed relationship to define a clearance therebe-
tween, at least one of said opposed surfaces at at least one
end said rotor having a ring-like groove therein spaced
radially outwardly from said rotor shaft and into which
the inner ends of said sliding recesses are open;
means for supplying a liquid lubricant under pressure into
said ring-like groove; and •
a dynamic pressure type fluid thrust bearing in said surface
in which said ring-like groove is positioned and being
between said ring-like groove and said rotor shaft, and
including a plurality of grooves in said surface extending
from said ring-like groove to said rotor shaft.
July 19, 983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1083
4,394,115
FORMING ARRANGEMENT FOR MACHINES MAKING
RECEPTACLES OUT OF THERMOPLASTIC MATERIAL
Jean-Marc Dronet, Falaise, France, assignor to Societe d' Ap-
plication Plastique Mecanique et Electronique Plas-
timecanique S.A., Falaise, France
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,595
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 3, 1980, 80 07539
Int. a.3 A23G 1/20; B29C 3/00
U.S. a. 425—122 5 Qaims
1. An improved heat-forming molding machine for produc-
ing by deep drawing receptacles of thermoplastic material
from plastic strips and sheets including means for feeding a
plastic band into the mold cavity of the machine; the improve-
ment comprising,
a fixed mandrel;
a mold having a mold cavity reciprocally movable relative
to said fixed mandrel, said mandrel thereby moving into
and out of said mold cavity,
said mandrel and/or mold defining a forming chamber
adapted to receive a plastic banderole, which forming
chamber and mandrel have contours which substantially
correspond to that of the mold cavity so that said mandrel
has a substantially fixed transverse cross-sectional area
with respect to the forming chamber and mold cavity to
thereby define a narrow guide passage for the plastic
banderole;
said mandrel including a plurality of parts, a first number of
these parts having transverse sections which remain fixed
relative to said forming chamber and a second number of
these parts have transverse sections which rotate relative
to said forming chamber, the latter sections forming part
of round or curved portions of the forming chamber, said
rotatable transverse sections including suction channels
for coacting and biasing the banderole against the rotat-
able parts of the mandrel to thereby impart an advancing
motion to the banderole, said suction channels being in
operative communication with a vacuum source.
4,394,116
MANDREL ADJUSTMENT SYSTEM IN A PLASTIC
RESIN BLOW MOLDING MACHINE
Ernest O. Kuenzig, 32 Waverly St., Glen Head, N.Y. 11545, and
Frank L. Pennino, 10 Leanore Dr., Farmingdale, N.Y. 11735
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,902
Int. CI.3 B29D 2i/04; B29F i/06
U.S. Q. 425—192 R 20 Qaims
1. An apparatus in a plastic resin blow molding machine to
adjust the vertical position of a vertically aligned mandrel
relative to a forming die, the mandrel and forming die forming
a tubular parison, in which the mandrel has a cylindrical top
shaft portion having external screw threads, the forming die is
positioned within a die block, the mandrel top shaft portion
extends above the die block, and vertical spacer means are
positioned on the die block,
the improvement comprising a horizontally aligned plate
member connected to the spacer means and having an
orifice therethrough, a mandrel adjustment nut having
internal screw threads which mate with the screw threads
of the top shaft portion of the mandrel, the adjustment nut
being rotatably positioned on the plate member so that it
1032 O.O,
W
freely rotates thereon, a ratchet ring means connected to
the adjustment nut and having a plurality of spaced
ratchet means about its external side wall so that its rota-
tion will rotate the adjustment nut, and
a ratchet wrench means positioned on the ratchet ring means
to rotate said ratchet ring means and its connected thereto
adjustment nut to lower and raise the mandrel relative to
the forming die, said ratchet wrench means having a
ratchet pawl which fits, in sequence, into the spaced
ratchet means and an arm member to apply rotational
pressure to said ratchet ring means through said pawl and
to thereby rotate said adjustment nut; and
set means to selectively lock said adjustment nut against
rotation relative to the plate member.
10. An apparatus in a plastic resin blow molding machine to
adjust the vertical position of a vertically aligned mandrel
relative to a forming die, the mandrel and forming die forming
a tubular parison, in which the mandrel has a cylindrical top
shaft portion having external screw threads, the forming die is
positioned within a die block, the mandrel top shaft portion
extends above the die block, and vertical spacer means are
positioned on the die block,
4t7
^\5?WJh^
-m,
20t
A
4L::
II ~ ■
M
^2i
&^'^
ait
--»
--'7
the improvement comprising a horizontally aligned plate
member connected to the spacer means and having an
orifice therethrough, a mandrel adjustment nut having
internal screw threads which mate with the screw threads
on the top shaft portion of the mandrel, the adjustment nut
being rotatably positioned on the plate member so that it
freely rotates thereon, a ring ratchet means about its exter-
nal side wall so that its rotation will rotate the adjustment
nut, and
a ratchet wrench means removably positioned on the ratchet
ring means to rotate said ratchet ring means and its con-
nected thereto adjustment nut to lower and raise the man-
drel relative to the forming die, said ratchet wrench means
having a pawl which fits said spaced ratchet means and an
arm member carrying said pawl and which at least par-
tially spans and grips said ring ratchet means, and
clamp means removably attachable to said mandrel and fixed
against rotation relative to said spacer means to selectively
lock said mandrel against rotation relative to the spacer
means while permitting vertical movement of said man-
drel.
1084
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,117
HOT SPRUE SLEEVE VALVE ASSEMBLY FOR AN
INJECTION MOLDING MACHINE
Arnold E. Taylor, Lomita, Calif., assignor to Discovision Associ-
ates, Costa Mesa, Calif.
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,431
Int. a.' B29F 1/03
U.S. a. 425—549 31 Qaims
:f/ 4?
1. In an injection molding machine for producing centrally
apertured record discs, a valve assembly for controlling flow
of molten disc-forming material through a sprue bushing into a
disc -shaped mold cavity, comprising:
a sleeve valve carried about the sprue bushing for axially
sliding movement between a first position retracted from the
mold cavity to allow flow of the molten disc-forming mate-
rial through the sprue bushing into the mold cavity, and a
second position advanced into the mold cavity to separate
the sprue bushing from the mold cavity for preventing flow
of the molten disc-forming material through the sprue bush-
ing into the mold cavity and for molding a central aperture
in the record disc; and
means for controlling movement of said sleeve valve between
said first and second positions,
said control means moving said sleeve valve to said second
position prior to solidification of said disc-forming material
within the mold cavity,
said control means comprising a spring for biasing said sleeve
valve toward said second position,
said sleeve valve including an angularly set pressure face at its
end adjacent the mold cavity and oriented for communica-
tion with disc-forming material within the sprue bushing,
said sleeve valve being responsive to the pressure of the
material within the sprue bushing acting upon said pressure
face for movement against said spring to said first position
when the pressure reaches a predetermined magnitude.
4,394,118
METHOD AND ARRANGEMENT FOR REDUCING NO,
EMISSIONS FROM FURNACES
Johannes J. Martin, Leopoldstrasse 248, 8000 Miinchen 40, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,309
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 8,
1980, 3025851
Int. a.2 F23J 7/00
U.S. a. 431—4 2 Qaims
1. A method of reducing NO, emissions from combustion
apparatus, particularly furnaces, comprising the steps of:
(a) establishing combustion in a combustion chamber of the
type having a plurality of combustion zones and mixing
zones wherein each of said mixing zones communicates
with a respective combustion zone, said mixing zones
being located below said combustion zones;
(e) introducing into each of said mixing zones a combination
of steam, a portion of which having been generated in a
closed steam system, and combustion air and mixing said
combination, wherein said combustion air preheated by
said steam is introduced in a generally clockwise direction
to said steam in at least a portion of said mixing zones;
(c) admitting said mixed combination of steam and combus-
tion air into each of said combustion zones;
(d) monitoring the NO^t concentration of waste gases emitted
from each of said combination zones; and
(e) adjusting the amount of steam introduced into each of
said mixing zones in relation to the NG^ concentration of
the waste gases emitted from its corresponding combus-
tion zone.
4,394,119
PROCESS FOR COMBUSTING
AMMONIA-CONTAINING GASES WHICH ALSO
CONTAIN HYDROGEN SULFIDE
Jan Waller, and Philippus Loof, both of The Hague, Nether-
lands, assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,839
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 26, 1980,
8001137
Int. a.^ F23D U/20
U.S. a. 431— 5 8 Qaims
» «
1. A process for combusting two gas streams, a first stream
containing ammonia and hydrogen sulfide gases, and a second
stream containing hydrogen sulfide gas and no ammonia, in the
thermal zone of a sulfur recovery unit in which hydrogen
sulfide-containing gases are partially combusted to a mixture of
sulfur dioxide and hydrogen sulfide in a ratio of substantially
1:2 by supplying said hydrogen sulfide-containing gases to a
burner consisting of a double gun having two concentric tubes
and surrounded by an air register, which burner debouches
into a mixing zone followed by a combustion zone, comprising
supplying said second stream comprising primarily hydrogen
sulfide-containing gases to the mixing zone via the outer of the
two concentric tubes and mixing said stream in said mixing
zone with an oxygen-rich gas or gas mixture supplied to the
mixing zone via the air register, and separately supplying said
first stream comprising primarily ammonia-containing gases to
the thermal zone via the inner of the two concentric burner
gun tubes, said ammonia-containing gases leaving the burner
July 19, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1085
and entering the mixing zone at about the plane of emergence
of said hydrogen sulfide-containing gases, and combusting said
gases in the combustion zone.
4,394,120
BURNER
Alexandr V. Golovanov; Vladislav Y. Eschenko; Irsali K.
Musaev, and Zakhidzhan S. Talibdzhanov, all of Tashkent,
U.S.S.R., assignors to Sredneaziatsky Filial Vniipromgaz,
Tashkent, U.S.S.R.
1 1 Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,347
1 1 Int. Q.' F23Q 9/00
U.S. Q. 431—284 2 Qaims
MET
4,394,121
rnOD OF CONTROLLING CONTINUOUS
REHEATING FURNACE
Yoshinori Wakamiya, Nishinomiya; Yoshiharu Hamasaki,
Takarazuka; Masaki Kutsuzawa, Kobe, all of Japan, and
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, 03, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,331
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 8, 1980, 55-158387;
Nov. 12, 1980, 55-159974
Int. Q.3 F27D i/00; F27B 9/40; C21B 7/24
U.S. Q. 432—11 1 Qaim
-^
,12 ,12 22 • ('2
^ <
— • jS r-Jrhi-ii-ii^nn.-inn i-if-1 rf nnmn nrpi-i |-|rir~inrin □ a -
24
(I)
1. A met
4-
(2) (3),
M2
(i)
(P!
'12
temperature profile within the furnace determined at the pres-
ent time point; predicting a future change in the temperature of
the furnace on the basis of the thus-determined present temper-
atures of the slabs and the flow rate of said fuel introduced into
each of said control zones, said fiow rate set, according to said
temperature change determining means; determining the pre-
dicted slab temperatures by using said predicted change of said
furnace temperature; determining the flow rate of said fuel
introduced into each of said control zones so as to render the
differences between said predicted slab temperatures and the
corresponding objective slab temperatures so as to be not
greater than a predetermined value, and controlHng the fiow
rate of said introduced fuel following an objective value based
on the flow rate of said fuel so determined.
1. A burner comprising: concentrical shells defining annular
passages including: a peripheral passage for a low-calorie gas;
an intermediate passage for secondary air having auxiliary
shells defining an annular passage for a high-calorie gas; a
central passage for an air mixture; the circle of an average
diameter of said annular passage for a high-calorie gas defining
in the outlet section a central zone which amounts to between
0.38 and 0.5 of the total area of the outlet section of the burner;
converging nozzles of minimum diameters equal to one an-
other, said converging nozzles being installed in the outer
shells of said peripheral passage and of said intermediate pas-
sage.
:hod of controlling a continuous reheating furnace,
comprising the steps of sensing the flow rates, at a plurality of
time points, of fuel and air introduced into each of a plurality
of control zones into which a continuous heating furnace is
divided; determining the temperature profile within the fur-
nace up to the present time point by using means for determin-
ing a change in the temperature profile within the furnace with
respect to time from the sensed flow rates of the thus-intro-
duced fuel and air; finding the temperature of each slab intro-
duced into the furnace at the present time point by using said
4,394,122
FURNACE REGENERATOR WITH IMPROVED FLOW
DISTRIBUTION
Alejandro G. Bueno, Toledo, and K. Lawrence Stover, Genoa,
both of Ohio, assignors to Libbey-Owens-Ford Company,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,641
Int. Q.' F24H 7/00: F27D 77/00
U.S. Q. 432—30 10 Qaims
^
i>3^r> 26<'-^ 4
cr-D/cyM:i 0'"<]"-q
7 28 28 ■ X
1. In a method of equalizing the flow of exhaust gas and
combustion air throughout the length of elongated regenera-
tors extending along either side of the melting area of a contin-
uous tank-type glass melting furnace, wherein the regenerators
include an elongated checkerwork structure defining a multi-
tude of gas passageways extending the complete length of the
associated regenerator and having an open plenum space there-
above communicating with a plurality of ports spaced along
the melting area, the improvement comprising alternately
supplying combustion air to and withdrawing exhaust gas from
said regenerators through a plurality of upwardly open cham-
bers spaced therealong and below said checkerwork structure,
and apportioning the fiow of combustion air supplied and
exhaust gases withdrawn among said chambers so as !o pro-
duce more uniform fiow of combustion air and exhuast gases
through said checkerwork structure throughout the length
thereof.
4,394,123
TILTABLE SUPPORT BRACKET FOR SLIDABLY
SUPPORTING QUARTZ SUPPORT TUBES FOR
SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER PROCESSING BOARDS,
AND PROCESSING APPARATUS EMBODYING SUCH
BRACKETS
Robert S. Higuera, Escondido, and John F. Ryan, San Diego,
both of Calif., assignors to Northern Telecom, Inc., Nashville,
Tenn.
Filed Feb. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 347,175
Int. Q.3 F27D 5/00, 3/00
U.S. Q. 432—253 11 Qaims
1. A tiltable support bracket comprising;
two spaced apart pillars;
1086
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19. 1983
a rotatable shaft extending between upper ends of said pil-
lars;
a first member attached to and connecting lower ends of said
pillars;
a second member hingedly connected to said first member
for tilting of said first member about a hinging axis parallel
to the rotational axis of said rotatable shaft;
said second member including means for attaching the sec-
ond member to a support surface;
depend from said ring member when the latter is in a floating
position, said bag having an open end attached to the periphery
of said ring member, an opening formed in one side of said bag
and being provided with a slide closure, said opening being in
alignment with said opening in said ring member, a flexible seat
member supported from said ring member within said bag for
supporting an occupant, a canopy made of flexible material
attached to the periphery at the upper side of said ring mem-
42. ^f 6t
^ 46 47 45
a projection extending from said first member on a side of
said hinging axis remote from said second member;
the arrangement such that contact with said pillars by a third
member moving in a first direction will tilt said pillars
about said hinging axis to a substantially horizontal posi'
tion with said projection extending up behind said third
member, said third member engaging with said projection
on reverse movement of said third member to tilt said
pillars about said hinging axis to an upright position.
4,394,124
FLOTATION LIFE SUPPORT DEVICE
Harold W. Cooper, 30 Ensley, Oxford, Mich. 48051
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 265,040
Int. a.3 B63C 9/00
U.S. a. 441—86 8 Oaims
1. A flotation life support device comprising: a buoyant ring
member hinged at one circumferential point and forming an
opening at a diametrically opposed point, a bag adapted to
ber, a slide fastener dividing said canopy into two portions
extending from said hinge to said opening and being closable to
enclose said ring member and the open end of said bag, said
slide fastener closing the opening in said bag being in its most
open position when the fastener is at a lower end of said open-
ing, and a lanyard having one end attached to said slide fas-
tener and having the other end provided with a flotation ele-
ment.
CHEMICAL
4,394,125
PROCESS FOR BLEACHING TEXTILES AND FOR
COMBATING MICRO-ORGANISMS WITH
SULFONATED PHTHALOCYANINE OF ALUMINUM OR
ZINC AND CONTAINING HALOGEN OR CYANO
SUBSTITUENTS AS PHOTOACTIV ATOR
Gerd Holzle, Liestal; Gerhard Reinert, Allschwil, and Rudolf
Polony, Basel, all of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,229
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 9, 1980,
6764/80; Sep. 9, 1980, 6765/80
Int. a.3 D06L i/00; AOIN 4i/00; C02F 1/50
U.S. CI. 8—103 13 Oaims
1. In a process for combating micro-organisms in or on an
organic or inorganic substrates by treating the substrate with
one or more water-soluble phthalocyanines selected from the
group consisting of the sulfonated zinc phthalocyanines and
the sulfonated aluminium phthalocyanines, in the presence of
water and under irradiation with light, the improvement which
comprises using a phthalocyanine which is further substituted
by a halogen atom or a pseudohalogen group.
n-C<,H
■V
(CH2)7CC)OR
COOR
KO — CrH2r)j — in which r is 2 or 3 and s is up to 1 5; and
R2 is alkyl or alkenyl of 8-30 carbon atoms;
wherein the ratio of cycloaliphatic diester to high boiling
aromatic ester is 0. 1 : 1 to 10: 1 and wherein the combination
of cycloaliphatic diester and high boiling aromatic ester
constitutes 10-90% by weight of the textile-treating com-
position.
' ' 4,394,126
DIESTER COMPOSITION AND TEXTILE PROCESSING
COMPOSITIONS THEREFROM
Robert B. Wilson, P.O. Box 6786, Greenville, S.C. 29606
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 90,092, Nov. 1, 1979,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 203,636, Nov. 3, 1980, Pat. No.
4,293,305. This application Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,028
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 6, 1998,
1 1 has been disclaimed.
' ' Int. a.3 D06M l/OO
U.S. Q. 8—115.6 36 Claims
o
CONVENTIONAL SPIN fINlSH
(200X1
1. In a textile treating composition containing one or more
emulsifiers, dispersing agents and/or antistatic agents compris-
ing one or more of ethoxylated castor oil, ethoxylated hydro-
genated castor oil, ethoxylated alkylphenol, ethoxylated pri-
mary or secondary alkanol or a salt of a phosphated ethoxyl-
ated primary alkanol or alkylphenol, the improvement wherein
the composition contains:
(a) a cycloaliphatic diester of the formula
4,394,127
METHOD OF DEPOSITING PERFUME AND
COMPOSITIONS THEREFOR
James B. Melville, Wirral, England, assignor to Lever Brothers
Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,484
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 7, 1980,
8004106; Feb. 7, 1980, 8004107; Feb. 7, 1980, 8004108
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 27,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q\} A61K 7/46: B08B i/OO: CUD i/$0. 17/01
U.S. a. 8—137 6 Qaims
1. A method of cleaning and depositing perfume on a fabric
surface, comprising contacting the fabric surface with an aque-
ous composition containing a perfume and from about 0.05 g
per liter to about 8.5 g per liter, based on the volume of the
aqueous composition, of a water-soluble detergent active mate-
rial, with or without a detergency builder, characterized in
that the perfume is added to the aqueous composition in the
form of from about 0.005 g per liter to about 0.3 g per liter,
based on the volume of the aqueous composition of particles
having an average size of from about 0. 1 micron to about 2000
microns, the particles being an intimate mixture of (a) from
about 0.5% to about 50% by weight, based on the weight of
the particles, of a perfume component; and (b) from about 50%
to about 99.5% by weight, based on the weight of the particles
of a matrix comprising at least one water-dispersible amine of
the formula
R— N— R1R2
where R is an alkyl or alkenyl group having 8 to 22 carbon
atoms, Ri is hydrogen or an alkyl or alkenyl group having 1 to
4 carbon atoms, and R2 is hydrogen or an alkyl or alkenyl or
amino-alkyl group having 1 to 22 carbon atoms, the matrix
containing no added cationic material.
whereiii R is substituted or unsubstituted straight or
branched chain alkyl of 4-20 carbon atoms, polyoxyalkylene of
the formula HO(CH2CH20)«CH2CH2— , HO(C3H60)nC3.
H6— , HO(CH2CH20);XC3H60)^3H6-, or HO(C3H60);^C2
H40)^2H4— or phosphated polyoxyalkylene, wherein n is
2-22 and the sum of p + q is n;
(b) a high boiling aromatic ester of the formula ArCOO— R-
1— OOCAr or ArCOOR2, wherein Ar is a monocyclic
aryl of up to 10 carbon atoms; R 1 is alkylene of 2-8 carbon
atoms or polyoxyalkylene of the formula — CMi-
4,394,128
METHOD OF SIZING POLYESTER YARN
Hal C. Morris, Warminster, Pa., assignor to Rohm and Haas
Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,543
Int. a.^ DOIC 3/02: D06L 1/06, 1/14: B65H 71/00
U.S. CI. 8—138 12 Qaims
I. A method of sizing polyester yarn for weaving comprismg
the steps of (I) applying thereto a free radical initiated vinyl
polymer latex having an acid pH and a weight average molecu-
lar weight from about 300,000 to 2,500,000; said polymer in
dried film form being hydrophobic and not redispersible in a
solution at a pH from about 2 to 7 but redispersible by an
aqueous alkaline medium, said polymer being prepared from
monomers consisting essentially of, by weight, 45 to 65% butyl
acrylate, 28 to 45% styrene and/or methyl methacrylate, and 8
to 14% acrylic acid and/or methacrylic and (2) drying the
yarn.
9. The method of claim 1 in which said monomers consist
essentially of about 50 to 60% butyl acrylate, 28 to 40% sty-
rene and 10 to 13% methacrylic acid.
II. A method of weaving comprising the steps of preparing
a polyester yarn in accordance with the method of claim 1, 2,
3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, or 9, weaving the yarn into fabric, and removing
said vinyl polymer therefrom by an aqueous alkaline solution.
1087
1088
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,129
PROCESS FOR THE HNISHING OF HBROUS
MATERIALS: SULFONYL- OR
CARBONYL-CYANAMIDES OF DYESTUFFS
Hartmut Springer, Konigstein, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,992, Aug. 21, 1980, abandoned.
This application Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 2%,469
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 24,
1979, 2934247
Int. a.3 C07C 125/08; C09B 33/15; D06P 1/16
U.S. a. 8—543 1 Claim
1. In a process for coloring a fibrous material made of wool,
synthetic polyamide fibres or cellulose fibres, or of mixtures
thereof, which comprises applying an organic dyestuff in the
form of an aqueous or organo-aqueous solution or dispersion
onto said fibrous material and treating it at a temperature of
from 60° to 230° C. for fixation of the dyestuff on the substrate,
the improvement consisting of employing as the organic dye-
stuff an organic dyestuff containing one or several groups of
the formula
— X— N— CN
in which X is sulfonyl or carbonyl and A is hydrogen or the
equivalent of a mono-, bi- or trivalent metal or is ammonium.
lets are substantially all of a size less than about 0.5 micron, said
emulsion being free of surfactants.
4 394 132
PARTICULATE COAL-IN-LIQUID MIXTURE AND
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
David W. Taylor, Edgemont, Pa., assignor to Ergon, Inc, Jack-
son, Miss.
Filed May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 151,358
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 8, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. aJ ClOL 1/32
U.S. a. 44—51 49 Claims
4,394,130
COPPER PHTHALOCYANINES HAVING
TRIMETHYLAMMONIUMMETHYL GROUPS AS
PAPER DYES
Helmut Moser, Reinach, Switzerland, assignor to Sandoz Ltd.,
Basel, Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 122,117, Mar. 8, 1971,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 696,152,
Jan. 8, 1968, abandoned. This application Jan. 8, 1976, Ser, No.
647,432
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 18, 1967,
706/67; Jan. 4, 1968, 87/68
Int. a.' C09B 47/04
U.S. CI. 8—661 7 Qaims
1. A process for producing turquoise paper comprising (a)
incorporating into paper stock an effective amount of a dye of
the formula
CuPc-CH2-N{CH3)3Cl©)„,
or a mixture thereof, wherein
CuPc is a copper phthalocyanine radical having not more
than 0.5 mol of sulfo group per molecule, and
n is 2 or 3,
said effective amount being an amount sufficient to impart the
desired turquoise color to the paper to be formed, and (b)
forming turquoise paper from said paper stock.
4,394,131
COMBUSTION FUEL EMULSION
Joseph Marro, Jr., West Haven, and Gurdon B. Wattles, North
Haven, both of Conn., assignors to Entoleter, Inc., New Ha-
ven, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 842,090, Oct. 14, 1977, abandoned.
This application Mar. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 130,387
Int. a.' ClOL 1/32
U.S. a. 44—51 9 Qaims
1. A stable combustion fuel emulsion consisting essentially of
a petroleum fuel as the continuous phase and water droplets
dispersed therein, wherein said water is present in an amount
less than about 20% by weight, and wherein said water drop-
1. An improved process for producing a particulate coal-in-
liquid mixture comprising:
a. grinding raw coal to a particle size of less than about 40
microns in a substantially air-free environment using a
gaseous carrier medium to form a hydrophobic coal-frac-
tion and a hydrophilic ash-fraction;^^
b. contacting said fractions with an aqueous liquid whereby
the particles constituting the ash fraction are wetted, but
the particles constituting the coal fraction are left substan-
tially dry;
c. separating the ash particles from the coal particles; and
d. mixing the coal particles with liquid.
4,394,133
ALKYL ACETATES AS PHASE SEPARATION
INHIBITORS IN LIQUID HYDROCARBON FUEL AND
ETHANOL MIXTURES
Harry A. Smith, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich. ~
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,135
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/18
U.S. a. 44—56 15 Qaims
1. A method for preventing a mixture of hydrous ethanol
and a liquid hydrocarbon fuel from separating into two phases
comprising adding to the mixture an effective amount less than
about 1 percent by weight of the liquid hydrocarbon fuel and
hydrous ethanol of a phase separation inhibitor wherein the
inhibitor is selected from the group of alkyl acetates which
have:
(a) a solubility parameter of about 8.4 to 9.8 (cal/cc)*; and
(b) a dipole moment of about 1.75 to 1.90 debye.
4,394,134
REDUONG FUEL CONSUMPTION WITH A
FLUORINATED COMPOUND
Carleton N. Rowc, Yardley, Pa., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 866,084, Dec. 30, 1977,
abandoned. This application Nov. 9, 1979, Ser. No. 92,861
Int. a.3 ClOL 1/20
U.S. a. 44—62 10 Claims
1. A method for decreasing fuel consumption in an internal
combustion engine by adding to the lubricating oil or liquid
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1089
hydrocarbon fuel used therein a sufficient amount of a poly-
merizable polyfluoro monomer compound of the formula
O R'
II I
RCH2OC— C=CHR'
wherein R is a C3 to C17 aliphatic hydrocarbon group contain-
ing from 5 to 35 fluoride groups, R' is hydrogen or a C1-C3
hydrocarbyl group and R" is hydrogen or a Ci-Cig hydro-
carbyl group and polymerizing said monomer during engine
operation to form an amount of a polymer thereof to effect a
reduction in fuel consumption of said engine.
4,394,137
PARTIAL OXIDATION PROCESS
Charles P. Marion, Mamaroneck; William B. Crouch, Chap-
paqua; Albert Brent, Huntington, all of N.Y.; George N.
Richter, San Marino, Calif.; Edward T. Child, Tarrytown,
N.Y., and Blake Reynolds, Riverside, Conn., assignors to
Texaco, Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 212,054, Dec. 3, 1980, Pat. No.
4,371,378, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 167,876.
Jul. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,351,645, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 107,215, Dec. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,338,099. This
application Jnn. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,420
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 28,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. aj ClOJ 3/46
U.S. a. 48—197 R 20 Qaims
4,394,135
LIQUID HYDROCARBON FUEL COMPOSITION
Harry J. Andress, Wenonah, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 945,280, Sep. 25, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jun. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 156,969
Int. aJ ClOL 1/22
U.S. a. 44—71 3 Qaims
1. A liquid hydrocarbon fuel composition comprising fuel
and, as the sole detergent, a detergency amount of the product
of reaction between phenylstearic acid and a polyamine of the
formula
NH2-(C„H2„NH)x-C„H2„-NH2
wherein n is from 2 to 4 and x is 1 to 9 and wherein the reac-
tants and employed in proportions such that sufficient acid is
present to completely acylate the said polyamine.
4,394,136
SYSTEM FOR RECOVERING METHANE GAS FROM
LIQUID WASTE
Dietrich W. Grabis, San Rafael, Calif., assignor to United Inter-
national California Corporation, San Rafael, Calif.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,884
Int. CU C02F ///O-/
U.S. a. 4S— 111 9 Oaims
1. A system for recovering methane gas from liquid waste,
comprising: an open pit extending into the ground; a cover
sheet disposed over said pit; means for disengagably holding a
circumferential portion of said cover sheet adjacent to a sec-
tion of the ground circumscribing said pit in an air sealed
fashion, whereby said sheet can be repeatedly used to cover
and uncover said pit without damage to the sheet, said holding
means including a downwardly extending and upwardly open-
ing trench which extends around said pit along said section of
ground circumscribing the latter and which is filled with water
for receiving said circumferential portion of said cover, said
holding means also including means located within said trench
for maintaining a circumferential segment of said sheet portion
under the water in said trench; means for directing liquid waste
into said pit so as to produce said methane gas within said pit;
means for removing said gas from said pit; and means for
removing the waste from said pit.
V^:^4
•" m " jn
•
rtAtsmt
t
C0^Ttl>t. »*C*-*
' *
*.H^.f
stmrtFSfS tf A» ,H w^f/sv
1. In a process for producing gaseous mixtures comprising
H2, CO, CO2, entrained particulate carbon, and at least one
material from the group consisting of H2O, N2. H2S. COS,
CH4, Ar, and ash in a free-fiow noncatalytic partial oxidation
gas generator, the improvement employing a burner having a
central section with separate first and second fiuid passage
means and an annular section with separate third and fourth
fluid passage means, and changing from one reactant feed-
stream to another without shutting down or depressurizing the
system comprising the steps of:
(1) passing a first reactant stream of first solid carbonaceous
fuel slurry or hydrocarbonaceous fuel with or without
mixture with HjG through either the first or second fiuid
passage means in the central section of said burner, and/or
simultaneously passing a second reactant stream of said
first solid carbonaceous fuel slurry or hydrocarbonaceous
fuel with or without mixture with H2O through either the
third or fourth fiuid passage means in the annular section
of said burner; wherein the central section of the burner
includes a central conduit, said central conduit being
closed at the upstream end and having an unobstructed
downstream circular exit orifice at the tip of the burner;
said annular section being bounded by an outer conduit
coaxial and concentric with said central conduit along its
length and in spaced relationship therewith and forming
an annular passage therebetween, said annular passage
being closed at the upstream end and having an unob-
structed downstream annular exit orifice at the tip of the
burner and wherein the central longitudinal axis of the
annular passage is parallel to the central longitudinal axis
of the burner throughout its length; said first passage
means comprises a central bunch of tubes passing through
the closed end of said central conduit and making a gas-
tight seal therewith, and wherein the downstream ends of
said central bunch of tubes are retracted upstream from
the burner face a distance of about 0 to 12 times the mini-
1090
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
mum diameter of the central conduit exit orifice at the tip
of the burner; said second passage means comprising the
space between the inside wall of said central conduit and
the outside surfaces of the central bunch of tubes; said
third passage means comprising an annular bunch of tubes
passing through the closed end of said annular passage and
making a gastight seal therewith, and wherein the down-
stream ends of said annular bunch of tubes are retracted
upstream from the burner face a distance of about 0 to 12
times the minimum width of the annular exit orifice at the
tip of the burner; and said fourth passage means compris-
ing the space between the inside wall of the outer conduit
and the outside surfaces of the annular bunch of tubes;
(2) simultaneously passing a separate reactant stream of
free-oxygen containing gas with or without mixture with
a temperature moderating gas through the unused fluid
passage means in each of the central and/or annular sec-
tions of said burner which are related to said fluid passage
means through which said stream(s) of first solid carbona-
ceous fuel slurry or hydrocarbonaceous fuel with or with-
out mixture with H2O are passing;
(3) mixing together said reactant streams from (1) and (2) to
produce a well-distributed blend, and reacting said mix-
ture by partial oxidation in the reaction zone of said gas
generator at an autogenous temperature in the range of
about 1700° to 3500° F., a pressure in the range of about 1
to 300 atmospheres, an atomic ratio of oxygen/carbon in
the range of about 0.5 to 1.7, and a weight ratio H20/fuel
in the range of about 0 to 5.0;
(4) replacing in said central and/or annular section(s) one or
more of said reactant stream(s) of first solid carbonaceous
fuel slurry or hydrocarbonaceous fuel with or without
mixture with H2O with a replacement stream of a second
carbonaceous fuel slurry or hydrocarbonaceous fuel with
or without mixture with H2O; and simultaneously with (4)
or after completion of (4);
(5) controlling the temperature and weight ratio H20/fuel in
the reaction zone at design conditions by adjusting the
flow rate(s) of the reactant stream(s) of free-oxygen con-
taining gas with or without mixture with a temperature
moderating gas passing through the burner, and if neces-
sary introducing supplemental H2O into the reaction zone.
discharging the gaseous phase of said mixture from said
separator.
4,394,138
DIVERGING VORTEX SEPARATOR
John R. Schilling, P.O. Box 4191, Woodside, Calif. 94062
Filed Jan. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 4,805
Int. a.3 BOID 45/12
U.S. a. 55—1 10 Qaims
1. A separator for separating the liquid and gaseous phases of
a fluid mixture thereof comprising:
a vertical and upwardly diverging vortex section having a
lower inlet, an upper outlet, and a vertically-continuous
inner surface between said inlet and said outlet which is
circular in configuration normal to the vertical axis of said
vortex section throughout its height and which expands
substantially hyperbolically,
means for introducing said fluid mixture into said inlet of
said vortex section with a substantial component of tan-
gential velocity,
first outlet means above said outlet of said vortex section for
second outlet means surrounding said outlet of said vortex
section for discharging the separated liquid phase out-
wardly from said outlet of said vortex section.
4,394,139
DIRECT CONTACT CONDENSER AND SEPARATING
METHOD
Robert D. Board, Boca Raton, Fla., assignor to Ecolaire Incor-
porated, West Easton, Pa.
Filed Mar. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 354,825
Int. a.3 BOIF 3/04
U.S. a. 55—20 6 Qaims
i^«
^S^
1. A direct contact condenser including a housing having a
partition, a manifold water supply conduit having valves for
discharge to opposite sides of the partition, means defining a
plurality of showers below the elevation of said partition and
through which a gas stream will pass sequentially, each shower
receiving water from one side of said partition, means for
introducing a gas stream sequentially through said showers,
the last shower being provided with temperature sensors,
means for controlling water flow from said supply conduit to
said last shower in response to the differential of said sensors,
and collection means for collecting water from said last
shower while preventing the collected water from mixing with
water from other showers, and an outlet chamber downstream
July 19,
983
CHEMICAL
1091
from said ast shower where noncondensible gases collect for
subsequent treatment.
4,394,140
DEGASSING SYSTEM AND CENTRIFUGAL PUMP
Walter E. Uljestrand, Houston, Tex., assignor to Smith Interna-
tional, Inc., Newport Beach, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 865,989, Dec. 30, 1977, Pat. No.
4,331,458. This application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,402
Int. a.' BOID 19/00. 45/00
U.S. a. 55—184 40 Qaims
' ' 4,394,141
EXPANSION TANK AND WATER BOX DEVICE FOR
HEAT EXCHANGER, SUCH AS A RADIATOR OF A
MOTOR VEHICLE
Patrick Cadars, Maurepas, and Bruno Hellouin de Cenival,
Noisy le Roi, both of France, assignors to VALEO, Paris,
France
Continuation of Ser. No. 48,249, Jun. 13, 1979, Pat. No.
4,289,507. This application May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,357
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 15, 1978, 78 17966
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 15,
I 1998, has been disclaimed.
' Int. Q.J BOID 5i/0ft FOIP 5//0
U.S. Q. 55-195 45 Qaims
1. In a heat exchanger for an automotive vehicle, said heat
exchanger including a plurality of substantially parallel heat
exchanging tubes and a collector plate having a plurality of
openings, each of said openings being traversed, respectively,
by an end of one of said tubes for the purpose of mounting the
same, the combination of:
(a) an expansion tank;
(b) said expansion tank having a peripheral edge portion
sealingly connected to said collector plate;
(c) a water box disposed inside said expansion tank, said-
water box comprising a partition separate from said ex-
pansion tank;
(d) said partition having a hollow cross sectional profile and
two opposed longitudinal edges engaging said collector
>7t MS ^S«J }(S
1. In a system for degassing liquid containing mediums, said
system including a degassing vessel having an inlet and an
outlet and a generally vertical shaft centrifugal pump con-
nected to said vessel for introducing said liquid medium into
said vessel, the improvement wherein said pump comprises:
means defining an inlet housing, said inlet housing having at
least one inlet for the intake of said liquid medium;
means defining a pump casing having at least one outlet for
the discharge of said liquid medium, said pump casing and
said inlet housing being in open communication with one
another;
a pump impeller rotatably mounted in said pump casing for
pumping said liquid medium into said degassing vessel;
a pump frame at least partially defining a vent chamber, said
pump frame including an apertured partition, said aper-
ture providing open communication between said vent
chamber and said inlet housing;
said inlet housing being disposed between said vent chamber
and said pump casing, said pump casing being disposed
below said inlet housing;
an inlet impeller rotatably mounted in said inlet housing
closely adjacent said apertured partition and operative to
direct fluid from said vent chamber into said inlet housing;
and egress passage means communicating with said inlet
housing adjacent said apertured partition for directing gas
accumulating in the upper portion of said inlet housing
vertically upwardly away from said inlet housing.
. plate on each side of said tube ends, respectively, to define
a collector chamber between said partition and said col-
lector plate;
(e) said partition also forming a compensation chamber
between said water box and said expansion tank;
(0 means for holding said partition in place between said
expansion tank, and said collector plate when said expan-
sion tank and collector plate are sealingly connected; and
(g) said means for holding including at least one rib inter-
posed between said expansion tank and said partition.
4,394,142
WATER SPRAY COOLER
Edward D. Thimons, Bethel Park, Pa.; Kenneth S. Heller, New-
ton; John F. McCoy, III, Chelmsford, both of Mass., and
Austin Whillier, Johannesburg, South Africa, assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the Secretary of
the Interior, Washington, D.C.
Continuation of Ser. No. 185,671, Sep. 10, 1980, abandoned. This
application Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,638
Int. Q." BOID 47/00
U.S. Q. 55—242 3 Qaims
' /
1. An apparatus for cooling air supplied to underground
mines by its direct contact with cooler water comprising:
a housing for the heat exchanger having structural elements
therein which form an air inlet chamber to receive an air
stream to be cooled and an upper outlet chamber to ex-
haust the cooled air stream;
said housing also having structural elements which form a
water spray chamber between said inlet and outlet cham-
bers, said spray chamber being in fluid communication
with the inlet and outlet chambers;
an air inlet port in said housing in fluid communication with
1092
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said air inlet chamber to receive air from the underground
mine and allow it to enter the housing;
an air outlet port in the upper portion of said housing in fluid
communication with the outlet chamber to allow cooled
air to exit from the housing into the underground mine; air
deflection means mount in said inlet chamber for deflect-
ing the incoming air to be cooled into the spray chamber,
said deflector means comprising a lattice shaped frame-
work;
water collecting means mounted at the lower end of the inlet
chamber;
water spray means mounted in said spray chamber for sup-
plying a spray of water cooler than the air entering therein
from the inlet chamber; and
a mist eliminator mounted above the spray means in the
housing, said eliminator comprising a mesh layer through
which the air flows before leaving the outlet chamber
whereby incoming mine air is deflected to the spray cham-
ber wherein cooler water is sprayed thereon to cool the
air, said sprayed water falling through the flow of incom-
ing air to further cool the air until the water is discharged
into the water collecting means.
4,394,144
DEHUMIDIFYING CONTAINER
Yoshio Aoki, Koga, Japan, assignor to Kaken Chemical Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,263
Int. a.3 BOID 53/14. 53/26
U.S. a. 55—281 8 Qaims
3 « 3 6
4,394,143
PROTECTIVE SPARK ELIMINATING SYSTEM FOR A
HLTER BAGHOUSE
Leonard J. O'Dell, Louisville, Ky., assignor to Allis-Chalmers
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Jul. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 394,851
Int. a.3 BOID 50/00
U.S. a. 55—261 11 Qaims
1. A protective spark eliminating system for removing burn-
ing particulates from a hot gas stream, comprising:
a housing having an outer side wall defming a separating
chamber within the housing, a top section enclosing the
top of the housing, and a hopper having a bottom outlet
enclosing the bottom of the housing;
a hot gas inlet duct spaced from the top section projecting
through the side wall into the chamber providing a hot gas
inlet for directing the hot gas stream into the chamber;
a gas outlet duct in the top section of the housing providing
an outlet for directing the hot gas stream out of the cham-
ber; and
a secondary gas system adapted to circulate a secondary gas
stream through the chamber including a blower having a
gas inlet and a gas outlet, a gas nozzle connected to the
outlet of the blower aligned above thegas inlet duct
adapted to maintain a localized gas curtain flowing down-
wardly across the width of the hot gas inlet, an inertial
separator having a gas inlet and a gas outlet, means con-
necting the gas inlet of the inertial separator to the outlet
of the hopper, and means connecting the outlet of the
inertial separator to the inlet of the blower; whereby
burning particulates in the hot gas stream are directed down-
wardly by the gas curtain as the hot gas stream enters the
separating chamber whereafter the downwardly descend-
ing particulates are entrained in the secondary gas stream
as it flows to the inertial separator where the particulates
are removed from the gas stream which is in turn drawn
into the inlet of the blower and directed back to the sepa-
rating chamber.
3. A dehumidifier, comprising:
a dehumidifying agent;
an outer container; and
an inner container having an upper end and a bottom portion
interconnected with a side wall, said inner container con-
taining said dehumidifying agent therein, said inner con-
tainer having an opening at its upper end and a discharge
pipe provided upright from a center of said bottom por-
tion, said discharge pipe having at least one slit which
continuously extends in a longitudinal direction of said
pipe in a wall thereof and along a substantial length of said
wall, said discharge pipe having respective openings at its
upper and lower ends, said inner container being detach-
ably fltted into said outer container in such a manner that
a space having a predetermined volume is formed between
said bottom portion of said inner container and a bottom
portion of said outer container.
4,394,145
AIR CLEANERS
Jarl Sundseth, 23 Lennox Gardens, London, S.W. 1, England
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,474
Int. a.3 BOID 45/12
U.S. a. 55—347 7 Oaims
1. An air cleaner comprising a shallow housing having a first
outer end wall and a second inner end wall, said inner and
outer end walls connected by a peripheral wall, a plurality of
tubular dust separator elements arrayed in the housing for
generally straight through flow of air across the thickness of
said housing, wherein
each separator element comprises
a tubular portion having inner and outer generally cylin-
drical surfaces,
an annular inlet generally defined by said first outer end wall
of said housing, said inlet further defined by an annular
inlet wall and a central dome,
the inner surface of said tubular portion being of greater
diameter than the inlet wall.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1093
inclined vanes connecting said annular inlet wall and said
central dome adapted to impart spin to dust-laden air
entering said inlet,
an air outlet generally defined by said second, inner end wall
of said housing, said wall having an annular portion ex-
tendinjg from the surface thereof toward said air inlet,
said air outlet of smaller diameter than said inlet and
coaxial with said inlet and the inner surface of said
tubular portion,
an annular space remote to said inlet defined by at least the
inner surface of said tubular portion and by the annular
inwardly extending portion of the inner housing wall,
a circumferential dust exit defined in said tubular portion
adjacent to said annular space, said exit extending over a
limited arc within the range 45° to 90°,
the housing defines about the separator elements a closed
dust collection chamber, said chamber containing means
for guiding flow of air in said chamber, the guide means
including the generally cylindrical outer surface of said
tubular portion, and
the vanes of the plurality of separator elements being in-
clined so as to impart left- or right-handed spin to air
passing therethrough, with elements having vanes adapted
to impart left-handed spin positioned adjacent to elements
having vanes adapted to impart right-handed spin in said
array of elements,
whereby dust-laden air entering a first separator element
through said air inlet is imparted with left- or right-handed
spin and enters said annular space, the circulating air mass
in the annular space inducing at the exit a corresponding
circulation of an air mass in the dust collection chamber
surrounding said first separator element, the opposite
direction of flow being imparted to air flow in adjacent
separator elements and thereby in the air masses surround-
ing said adjacent elements reinforcing the circulating flow
in the closed dust collection chamber, dust in the spinning
air flow mass in the annular space of said first element is
directed toward the inner surface of the tubular portion by
the imparted spin and held in suspension by the air mass
circulating in the annular space, air substantially free of
dust leaves said separator element via said air outlet, and
dust in the air flow mass passing the exit is separated from
the air flow mass in said annular space remote to said inlet
by centrifugal force with a radial velocity component and
enters the air flow mass in the surrounding dust collection
chamber, the dust collection chamber being closed so
substantially no air flows through the exit between the
separi^tor element and the dust collection chamber.
Max KMti
4,394,146
nLTER APPARATUS
i,' Shrewsbury, N.J., assignor to Crane & Co., Inc.,
Dalton, Mass., a part interest
I Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,694
Int. a.3 BOID 46/18
U.S. a. 55r-354 10 Oaims
1. A roll type filter apparatus having a filter chamber with an
inlet for receiving gaseous medium, an outlet for discharging
filtered gaseous medium, said filter chamber having opposite
side walls defining between them a path for the gaseous me-
dium from said inlet to said outlet, a filter medium spanning
across said filter chamber between said side walls and having
opposite edge portions disposed adjacent the respective side
walls, said filter medium comprising a support grid and a filter
mat substantially co-extensive with said support grid, and
means to guide said medium in a predetermined path through
said filter chamber with one surface facing upstream toward
said inlet and the opposite surface facing downstream toward
said outlet, said support grid being on the downstream side of
said filter mat;
flange means projecting inwardly of said chamber from said
sidewalls, said flange means being disposed on said oppo-
site side walls in alignment with said predetermined path
to underlie the edge portions of said filter medium on the
downstream or outlet side of said filter medium and oc-
cupy the space between said filter medium and said side
walls, and having a series of apertures disposed in lon-
gitudinally-spaced relation along the length of said flange
means;
means to advance said filter medium longitudinally through
said filter chamber between said flange means with the
side edges of said filter medium overlying the free edges of
said flange means; and
means to assemble the mat of said filter medium onto said
support grid and feed the assembled filter medium into the
filter chamber with the opposite edge portions overlying
the upstream surface of the respective flange means in-
cluding the series of apertures, said apertures operable to
provide fluid communication between the filter chamber
outlet and the upstream surface of said flange means in the
area where said medium is in overlying relation therewith
to effect intimate engagement therebetween, whereby
gaseous medium flowing through said filter chamber must
pass through said filter medium in its travel from said inlet
to said outlet.
4,394,147
INTERNALLY SUPPORTED FILTER
John A. Caddy, and William A. Putman, both of Louisville, Ky.,
assignors to Allis-Chalmers Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,756
Int. a.^ BOID ^6/70
U.S. a. 55—357 5 Qaims
1. An internally supported composite filter having a single
handle adapted to be removably secured in a flow-through
mounting structure for separating particulate materials from a
gas stream flowing through the mounting structure, compris-
ing:
a closed loop of relatively rigid material forming a thin
wire-like frame having a pair of opposing side portions;
two confronting sheets of filter media having substantially
the same peripheral shape as said frame and being secured
thereto, said frame being positioned between said sheets
inwardly of their outer peripheries;
fastening means securing said sheets together in a relatively
1094
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
uncompacted fashion proximate the center of the sheets to
retard bulging of the filter during filtering operations; and
said handle being formed of a flexible strip, said handle
having one end secured to one of said side portions and a
free end adapted to be grasped by a workman to accom-
modate removing the filter by pulling the strip which
causes the filter to pivot about the other side portion to
peel it out of the mounting structure in a pivotal sliding
fashion, thereby essentially minimizing shaking of the
filter when the workman removes it from the mounting
structure.
the plant and passes into the plant cell where the lipid vesicle
is broken down and releases the encapsulated plant nutriment.
4,394,148
SHORT aRCUIT PROOF DRIVER AND ALARM
aRCXirr for a solenoid in a glassware
FORMING machine
William H. Ryan, Toledo, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Illinois, Inc.,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,607
Int. aj C03B 9/40
U.S. a. 65—159 18 Qaims
^ ■40<y<gBaLis^
•isv PovvtB aus -
1 r — *
AfiV
OuTPoT
A,.AOM CIRCUIT
4,394,150
SULPHUR-CLAY PRILLS
Barney D. Garrison, Jr., and Barry S. Marjanovich, both of
Calgary, Canada, assignors to Canadian Superior Oil Ltd.,
Calgary, Canada
Filed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,642
Qaims priority, application Canada, Feb. 29, 1980, 346710
Int. a.J C05G 3/04
U.S. a. 71—62 26 Claims
1. In a glassware forming machine including at least one
forming means for forming articles of glassware, the forming
means including an actuator having a first electrical character-
istic when functioning in a normal operating mode and a sec-
ond electrical characteristic when in a failure operating mode
and a source of power connectable to the actuator, a self-
protecting driver circuit for selectively actuating the actuator
comprising: driver means for selectively connecting the actua-
tor to the source of power whereby the actuator is energized in
the normal operating mode; said driver means having an active
element for limiting the amount of electrical current drawn
therethrough to a predetermined amount when the forming
means is short-circuited whereby the actuator remains ener-
gized in the failure operating mode.
rn.i
^I\
.5^^{^
1. A process for producing substantially spherical, water
degradable, sulphur-clay particles comprising:
passing at least one stream of a mixture comprising molten
sulphur and a particulate swelling clay into an aqueous
solution of a water soluble electrolyte salt, said solution
comprising about 5 to 15%, by weight, of said salt and about
85 to 95%, by weight, of water,
maintaining said solution at a temperature effective to cool said
mixture below its solidification temperature,
allowing the surface tension of the molten sulphur to break up
said stream in said solution to form substantially spherical
droplets and allowing said droplets to cool and solidify in
said solution to form said substantially spherical particles,
withdrawing said particles from said solution and drying said
particles.
4,394,149
PLANT NUTRIMENT COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD
OF THEIR APPLICATION
Francis C. Szoka, Jr., 76 Summit St., Waltham, Mass. 02154,
and Demetrios P. Papahadjopoulos, 3170 Condit St., Lafay-
ette, Calif. 94549
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 881,116, Feb. 24, 1978, Pat. No.
4,235,871. This application May 13, 1980, Ser. No. 149,516
Int. a.3 C05C 9/00
U.S. a. 71—28 8 Qaims
1. A method of providing nutriments to agricultural plants
possessing plant cells having cell walls and cell membranes,
which comprises; applying to the plant a nutritional amount of
a plant nutriment, encapsulated in a lipid vesicle, whereby the
lipid vesicle encapsulating the plant nutriment is taken up by
4,394,151
AZOLYL-HYDROXY ALKANOIC ACID COMPOUNDS
Paul de Fraine, Wokingham; John M. Clough, High Wycombe,
and Paul A. Worthington, Maidenhead, all of England, assign-
ors to Imperial Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Filed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,203
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 22, 1980,
8027451
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/50, 43/64; C07D 233/60, 249/08
U.S. a. 71—76 7 Qaims
1. A racemic compound having the general formula (I):
OH O
Y — N— CH2— C— CH— C— OR^
N
and stereoisomers thereof, wherein R' is a straight or branched
chain alkyl group having from 1 to 6 carbons, phenyl or phenyl
substituted with halogen, alkyl, alkoxy, nitro, phenyl or phe-
noxy; R^ and R^ are together a — CH2— CH2— bridging
group, or each represents hydrogen, straight or branched
chain alkyl groups having from 1 to 6 carbon atoms, phenyl or
benzyl or phenyl or benzyl substituted with halogen, alkyl or
alkoxy of 1 to 6 carbons, nitro, phenyl or phenoxy, the alkyl
moiety of the benzyl being unsubstituted or substituted with
July 19,
983
CHEMICAL
1095
alkyl of from 1 to 6 carbons; and Y is =N— or =rCH— , and
acid addition salts, alkyl, aralkyl or aryl ethers, alkanoate esters
and metal complexes thereof
6. A method of combating fungal diseases in a plant, which
comprises applying to the plant, to seed of the plant, or to the
locus of the plant or seed, a fungicidally effective amount of a
compound as defined in claim 1.
7. A method of regulating plant growth which comprises
applying to the plant, to seed of the plant, or to the locus of the
plant or seed, a plant growth regulating amount of a compound
as defined in claim 1.
4,394,152
SULFUR-CONTAINING OXIME COMPOUNDS FOR
PROTECTING CULTIVATED PLANTS
Elmar Sturm, Aesch; Heinrich Schempp, Arlesheim, and Henry
Martin, Allschwil, all of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y,
Division of Ser. No. 68,123, Aug. 20, 1979, Pat. No. 4,278,613.
This application May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,534
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 28, 1978,
9081/78 I
' ' Int. Q.' AOIN 37/34
U.S. Q. 71-77 86 Claims
37. A method for protecting crops from injury caused by
application of a herbicide, said method comprising applying to
the crop sepds a crop protecting amount of a compound of the
formula
(' >— SO2— C— CN
R2^=/
N— O— Q
wherein
each of Ri and R2 is hydrogen, halogen or C1-C4 alkyl, and
Q is a hydrogen, a metal cation or a C1-C4 alkyl.
44. A method for protecting plants from injury caused by
application of a herbicide, said method comprising dipping the
roots of the seedlings of said plants into a solution comprising
a crop protecting effective amount of a compound of the for-
mula
SO2— C— CN
II
N— O— Q
wherein
each of R| and R2 is hydrogen, halogen or C1-C4 alkyl, and
Q is hydrogen, a metal cation or a C1-C4 alkyl group.
4,394,153
HERBICIDAL ARYL ESTERS OF
N-[(HETEROCYCLIQ-AMINOCARBONYL]SULFAMIC
AOD
James J. Reap, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 168,345, Jul. 11, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 261,751
Int. Q.^ AOIN 9/22; C07D 239/32
U.S. Q. 71—92 28 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
QSO2R1
0S02NH-
-CON— A
I
R4
where
Q is O or NR5;
Rl is C1-C4 alkyl. C1-C4 alkyl substituted with 1-3 atoms of
P. CI or Br, CH2CH2OCH3, CH2CH2CH2OCH3 or •
Rb
R?
R2 is H, F, CI, Br, OCH3, NO2 or C1-C2 alkyl;
R3 is H. F. CI, Br or CH3;
R4 is H, CH3 or OCH3;
R5 is C1-C4 alkyl;
Rband R7are independently H, F, CI, Br, CH3, CF3, N02or
OCH3;
A is
N-(
X is NH2, N(CH3)2. NHCH3, C1-C4 alkyl, CH2OCH3.
CH2OC2H5, C1-C3 alkoxy, C3-C4 alkenyloxy. C3-C4
alkynyloxy, OCH2CF3 or C1-C3 alkyl substituted with
1-3 atoms of F, CI or Br;
Y is H, CH3, OCH3 or CI;
Z is CH, CCH3, CBr. CCI. CF or CI
provided that:
(1) when Y is CI. then Z is CH and X is NH2, NHCH3.
N(CH3)2. CH3 or OCH3; and
(2) when Y is H, then X is OCH3. CH3 or CH2OCH3. and Z
is CH, CCH3, CBr, CCI. CF or CI.
4,394,154
SUBSTITUTED
PYRIDYLOXYBENZO-2,l,3-OXADIAZOLES AND
-THIADIAZOLES AND N-OXIDES THEREOF
Richard J. Anderson, Palo Alto, and Michael M. Leippe, Boul-
der Creek, both of Calif., assignors to Nabisco Brands, Inc.,
Parsippany, N.J.
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,070
Int. Q.' C07D 498/04. 513/04; AOIN 43/40
U.S. Q. 71—92 6 Qaima
1. A compound of the formula:
1096
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
wherein,
n is zero or one;
t is zero, one or two;
W is oxygen or sulfur; and
each of Y and Z is independently selected from hydrogen,
lower alkyl, lower haloalkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkyl-
thio, lower alkoxycarbonyl, acetyl, halogen, cyano, nitro
and X is hydrogen.
6. A method for the control of weeds which comprises
treating said weed or its locus with an herbicidally effective
amount of a compound of the formula as defined in claim 1.
4^94,156
NOVEL N-PHENYL-SUBSTITUTED N-HETEROCYCXIC
COMPOUNDS, THEIR PREPARATION AND USE IN
AGENTS FOR REGULATING PLANT GROWTH
Hans Tobler, Allschwil; Weraer Fbry, Basel, and Rolf Schurter,
Binningen, all of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corpo-
ration, Ardsley, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 111,517, Jan. 14, 1980,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 8%,970, Apr. 12, 1978,
Pat. No. 4,208,202. This application Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No.
314,620
Gaims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 15, 1977,
4702/77; Nov. 9, 1977, 13661/77
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/40; COID 213/62; C07D 213/64. 213/68
U.S. a. 71—94 8 Qaims
1. A compound of the formulae la or lb.
(la)
4,394,155
SUBSTITUTED PYRIDINE 1-OXIDE HERBICIDES
Howard L. Plant, Milford; Steven E. Cantor; Arthur M.
Doweyko, both of Cheshire, all of Conn.; Mark A. Dekeyser,
Waterloo, Canada, and Allyn R. Bell, Cheshire, Conn., assign-
ors to Uniroyal, Inc., New York, N.Y. and Uniroyal Ltd.,
Ontario, Canada
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,813
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/40; C07D 213/64
U.S. a. 71—94
1. A compound having the structural formula
20 Oaims
NH— SO2CF3
1 .R2
(lb)
NH— SO2CF3
or a salt thereof formed with a cation selected from the group
consisting of alkali metals, alkaline earth metals, zinc, copper,
iron and organic amines, in which formulae
Ri, R2 and R3 independently of one another are hydrogen,
C1-C4 alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, alkoxycarbonyl having 1 to 4
carbon atoms in the alkyl portion, carboxyl, halogen or
cyano, and
X and Z independently of one another are hydrogen, C1-C4
alkyl, C1-C5 alkoxy or halogen.
6. A composition for regulating plant growth which con-
tains, in addition to carrier materials, an effective plant growth
regulating amount of at least one trifluoromethanesul-
phonamido-phenyl-substituted heterocyclic compound ac-
cording to claim 1 as the active component.
wherein R and R' may be the same or different and are Ci to
C4 alkyl, Ci to C4 alkoxy, phenyl or halogen provided that R
or R' is not halogen if attached in the 3-position of the pyridine
ring, and R or R' may further be hydrogen provided that one
of them is one of the recited moieties other than hydrogen; R^
is hydrogen, halogen, methyl or ethyl; R^ is phenyl or phenyl
substituted with halogen, Ci to C4 alkyl, Ci to C4 alkoxy, or
nitro; and n is 1 or 2.
19. A herbicidal composition comprising a compound of any
of claims 1 to 18 in a herbicidally effective amount in admix-
ture with a carrier therefor.
20. A herbicidal method comprising applying, to a locus at
which it is desired to control weeds, a herbicidally effective
amount of a compound as in any of claims 1 to 18.
4 394 157
PYRIDYL-2.0XYPHENYL0XIME DERIVATIVES AND
THEIR USE AS HERBIODES
Georg Pissiotas, Lorrach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Hermann
Rempfler, Ettingen, Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 172,575, Jul. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,322,241.
This appUcation Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,676
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 7, 1979,
7230/79
Int. a.3 C07D 213/64; AOIN 43/40
U.S. a. 71—94 ♦ Claims
1. A compound of the formula —
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1097
\-C=N— O— (
wherein
Rl is halogen or trifluoromethyl,
X is methyl or cyano, and
Q is lower cyanoalkyl.
3. A method of selectively controlling weeds in crops of
cultivated plants, which comprises applying to said crops a
herbicidally effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
4,394,158
PYRIDYL-2-OXYPHENYLOXIME DERIVATIVES, AND
THEIR USE AS HERBICIDES
Georg Pissiotas, Lorrach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Hermann
Rempfler, Ettingen, Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 172,575, Jul. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,322,241."
This application Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,678
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 8, 1979, 7230/79
Int. a.3 C07D 213/64; AOIN 43/40
U.S. CI. 71—94 8 Oaims
1. A compound of the formula
R3
,-rCo
^ N
C=N— O— Q
X
wherein
Rl is halogen or trifluoromethyl,
each of R2 and R3 is hydrogen or halogen,
X is methyl or cyano, and
Q is methylcarbamoyl, phenylcarbamoyl or di-chloro-phe-
nyl carbamoyl.
8. A method of selectively controlling weeds in crops of
cultivated plants, which comprises applying to said crops a
herbicidally effective amount of a compound of claims 1, 2 or
4,394,159
2-CHLORO-3-(PHENOXY OR PHENYLTHIO)-6.6-NITRO
-ANILINES
Wolfgang Buck; Richard Sehring; Gerbert Linden, all of Ingel-
heim, and Sigmund Lust, Darmstadt, all of Fed. Rep. of Crer-
many, assignors to Celamerck GmbH & Co. KG, Ingelheim,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 185,799, Sep. 10, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 127,367, Mar. 4, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 57,500, Jul. 13,
1979, abandoned. This application Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No.
243,385
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 15,
1978, 2831262
Int. a.J E05B 65/08, 63/14; C07C 149/42. 87/60
U.S. a. 71—98 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
CI N
/
NO2
wherein
A is hydrogen, alkyl of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, cycloalkyi of 3
to 6 carbon atoms, chloro-(alkyl of 2 to 6 carbon atoms),
hydroxy-(alkyl of 2 to 6 carbon atoms) or allyl;
B is alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms;
R is hydrogen, fluorine, chlorine, bromine, methyl or me-
thoxy; and
X is oxygen or sulfur.
4,394,160
MAKING MAGNETIC POWDERS
Walter O. Freitag, Dresher, and Victor V. Suchodolski, Erden-
heim, both of Pa., assignors to Sperry Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Dec. 3, 1979, Ser. No. 99,365
Int. a.J C22C 1/04; HOIF 1/02
U.S. a. 75—0.5 AA 7 Qaims
1. A method of producing magnetic powders having a coer-
cive force in the range of from about 3(X) Oe to 700 Oe for use
in the manufacture of magnetic recording media which com-
prises:
(a) pre-determining the desired coercive force of said mag-
netic powders,
(b) preparing a solution of metal salt capable of forming a
ferromagnetic material,
(c) maintaining the solution of Step (b) at a pre-selected
temperature which is functionally determinate of the
desired coercive force, said pre-selected temperature
being within a range of from about 0° C. to 50° C.,
(d) preparing a solution of a borohydride reducing agent,
(e) maintaining the solution of Step (d) at a pre-selected
temperature which is functionally determinate of the
desired coercive force, said pre-selected temperature
being within a range of from about 0° C. to 50° C.,
(0 mixing the solutions of Steps (c) and (e) together while
applying a magnetic field of a selected magnitude to said
mixture during the reducing reaction between said solu-
tions, the temperatures of said reactant solutions of Steps
(c) and (e) prior to the mixing being pre-selected so as to
control the coercive force of the magnetic powder pro-
duced from the mixture of Step (0-
4,394,161
METHOD OF PRODUCING A VANADIUM- AND
NITROGEN-CONTAINING MATERIAL FOR USE AS AN
ADDITION TO STEEL
Roy R. Hannum, Long Bottom, Ohio, assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jun. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 393,228
Int. Q.3 C22B 34/00
U.S. Q. 75—0.5 BC 1 Qaim
1. A method for making a material containing vanadium and
nitrogen substantially in the form of V2N, said method com-
prising:
(i) providing a mixture of V2O3 and carbon in substantially
stoichiometric proportions in accordance with the follow-
ing formula:
V2O3-I-3C— 2V-(-3CO
(ii) subjecting the mixture in a furnace to a temperature in
the range of about 1000° C. to 1500° C. under a reduced
1098
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
pressure in the range of about 5 mm to 100 microns to
cause reaction between mixture constituents and the evo-
lution of CO;
(iii) continuously maintaining the temperature and pressure
in the furnace in the respective ranges specified in (ii)
while simultaneously and continuously introducing nitro-
gen gas into the furnace to provide a nitrogen atmosphere
in the furnace until CO is essentially no longer evolved
from the mixture; and
(iv) subsequently cooling the mixture in a nonoxidizing
environment.
4,394,162
TREATMENT OF MATTER IN LOW TEMPERATURE
PLASMAS
Jozef K. Tyiko, Stoneleigh, England, assignor to Plasma Hold-
ings N.V., Curacao, Netherlands Antilles
Division of Ser. No. 138,693, Apr. 9, 1980. This application Apr.
23, 1982, Ser. No. 371,320
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 17, 1979,
7913337
Int. Cl.^ C22D 7/00
U.S. a. 75—10 R 20 Claims
1. A method of treating particulate matter with low tempera-
ture plasma, comprising the steps of:
(a) producing an electrical arc discharge between spaced
stationary electrode structures at least one of which is
annular;
(b) causing at least 50 Hz frequency changes in the power
and circulation in the distribution of the discharge about
the peripheries of the or each annular electrode structure
to produce a region of plasma in the interelectrode space;
and
(c) introducing entrained particulate matter into the plasma
region created thereby.
the plasma zone below the electrode in an arc furnace of a
direct current type, said furnace containing a crude iron
melt, the temperature of said melt, by means of adjused
supply of electrical enerby to the arc, is maintained over
1200° C, and the content of dissolved carbon in said melt is
maintained above 2% by injecting suitably preheated hydro-
carbons into the crude iron melt at a depth exceeding 30 cm
below the surface of the melt;
a.4 precooling the gases leaving the arc furnace by introducing
directly into the leaving gases an adjusted flow of coolant, or
a mixture of natural gas and water vapor, and
a. 5 recovering a substantial part of the physical heat content of
the precooled gases, and purifying from dust said precooled
gases by scrubbing.
4,394,164
PROCESS FOR REMOVAL OF HARMFUL IMPURITIES
FROM METALLURGICAL SULPHIDE MELTS
Juho K. Makinen, Vanha-Ulvila, and Kaarina M. E. Kaenniemi,
Noormarkku, both of Finland, assignors to Outokumpu Oy,
Outokumpu, Finland
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,508
Qaims priority, application Finland, Sep. 26, 1980, 803052
Int. a.3 C21B 1/04: C22B 1/02
U.S. CI. 75—21 10 Claims
4,394,163
PROCESS FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF CRUDE IRON
AND SYNTHESIS GAS
Per H. Collin, Stocksund, Sweden, assignor to Asea AB, Vast-
eras, Sweden
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,325
Claims priority, application Norway, Jun. 23, 1980, 801878
Int. a.J C21C 5/52
U.S. a. 75—11 7 Claims
1. A process for converting an iron oxide into crude iron
which comprises: I. introducing in an arc furnace, a fine-
grained material essentially containing iron oxide into a plasma
zone between an electrode and a melt surface of a crude iron
melt, and II. injecting a gaseous or volatile hydrocarbon into
said crude iron melt at a depth of at least 30 cm below the
surface thereof, comprising:
a. 1 preheating the iron oxide-containing material, or said iron
oxide-containing material in admixture with adjusted quanti-
ties of slag formers, by means of combustion gases from
burning the gases from the prereduction according to a.2 or
supplementally with other fuels;
a.2 prereducing the preheated concentrate according to a.l;
a.3 introducing the concentrate prereduced according to a.2 in
1. A process for the removal from metallurgical sulphide
melts of harmful impurities selected from the group consisting
essentially of arsenic, antimony, bismuth and lead, comprising
sulphurating the sulphide melt in an inert gas atmosphere by
feeding into the melt a sulphur containing agent in an amount
such that the sulphur supplied to the sulphide melt is at least
10% in excess of the stoichiometric sulphur amount as calcu-
lated from the sulphur requirement of the principal compo-
nents of the melt.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1099
4,394,165
METHOD OF PRELIMINARY DESILICONIZATION OF
MOLTEN IRON BY INJECTING GASEOUS OXYGEN
Shingo Satoh; Takashi Inoue; Minoru Naki, and Yuji Kawauchi,
all of Muroran, Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation,
Japan |
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,999
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 19, 1981, 55-129609
J I Int. a.5 C21C 7/00
U.S. a. 75U6O 11 Qaims
1. A method of preferential desiliconization of molten iron
by injecting gaseous oxygen wherein the gaseous oxygen is
injected into the molten iron at controlled a rate depending
upon the silicon content of the molten iron so as to satisfy the
formula (I):
0.03= Vo2^1.
25 [%Si]- 0.075
(I)
wherein V02. the rate of gaseous oxygen feed Nm^/min/ton
pig,) and [%Si]: Si content of the molten iron (%).
4,394,166
SCRAP METAL RECOVERY PROCESS
James A. Kennedy, Newnan, Ga., assignor to The William L.
Bonnell Company, Newnan, Ga.
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 382,880
Int. CI.' C22B 21/00
U.S. a. 75—65 R
9 Qaims
1. Method for recycling aluminum scrap containing thermal
barrier material, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) comminuting said scrap to pieces from about 18 to about
4 inches in length thereby preparing a relatively uniformly
sized aluminum scrap product;
(b) conveying said comminuted aluminum scrap product to
a storage hopper;
(c) continuously feeding the commmuted aluminum scrap
product from said storage hopper to an indirect-fired
rotary kiln;
(d) heating said scrap product in said indirect-fired rotary
kiln to a temperature of about 800° to 900° F. for a period
of about one-half to one hour thereby substantially com-
pletely removing said thermal barrier material as combus-
tible gas and cinder producing a satisfactory aluminum
melt furnace feed product;
(e) collecting and burning said combustible gases and smoke
in a waste heat recovery afterburner to provide heatmg
values for said step (d);
(0 transferring heating values provided in step (e) to said
indirect-fired rotary kiln; and,
(g) feeding said feed product from said indirect-fired rotary
kiln to an aluminum melt furnace for melting.
4,394,167
METHOD OF CARBOTHERMICALLY PRODUQNG
ALUMINUM
Kenshi Kuwahara, Kanagawa, Japan, assignor to Mitsui Alumi-
num Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,053
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 22, 1980, 55-53374
Int. CI.' C22B 21/02
U.S. Q. 75—68 A 13 Qaims
-1
\^h \i
1. A method of carbothermically producing an aluminum
metal from alumina, silica and iron-oxide bearing materials,
which comprises;
(a) providing briquettes of a mix of said materials and a
carbonaceous material which contains a sufficient amount
of carbon to reduce the oxides in the material and coking
said briquettes at a temperature of 600° to 900° C. by
direct contact with non-oxidizing gas, to form coked
briquettes,
(b) heating the coked briquettes to a temperature of 2,000° to
2,100° C. with gas for combustion to form an aluminum-
silicon-iron alloy,
(c) scrubbing the resulting alloy in the nascent state with a
molten lead splash to preferentially absorb the aluminum
in the alloy into the molten lead,
(d) separating the silicon and iron of the alloy from the
aluminum-absorbed molten lead,
(e) cooling the aluminum-absorbed molten lead to cause it to
separate into liquid layers of aluminum and lead, respec-
tively, and
(0 subjecting the aluminum layer to distillation to distill off
lead present and recover aluminum metal in substantially
pure form.
4,394,168
AUSTENITIC WEAR RESISTANT STEEL
Tor Hartvig, and Fetter Fjellheim, both of Raufoss, Norway,
assignors to A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker, Raufoss,
Norway
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,630
Claims priority, application Norway, Jul. 7, 1980, 802044
Int. CI.' C22C 38/38
U.S. Q. 75—126 A 9 Qaims
AU.01 <• ■QuNocD cuvncs loe.
1. An austenitic wear resistant steel having good wear resis-
tance and serviceability when subjected to abrasive and com-
1100
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
bined abrasive stresses and impact stresses consisting essen-
tially of, in percentage by weight:
16.-25.
Mn
1.0-2.0
C
0 5-5.0
Cr
0.2-2.0
Si
01-0.5
Ti
O3-4.0
Mo
O0-0.5
one or more of Ce, Sn,
V. W or Nb (Cb)
O0-5.0
Ni
O0-5.0
Cu
0.0-0.1
P (impurity)
0.0-0.1
S (impurity)
remainder to 100%
Fe.
4,394,169
HIGH STRENGTH AUSTENITE STEEL HAVING
EXCELLENT COLD WORK HARDENABILITY
Koji Kaneko; Yoshihidc Fuchino, and Tsuyoshi Inoue, all of
Kobe, Japan, assignors to Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho,
Kobe, Japan
Filed May 13, 1982, Set. No. 377,842
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 15, 1981, 56-72997
Int. a.^ C22C 38/02
U.S. CI. 75—128 A 3 Claims
volume of high density boron nitride and the remainder being
a cermet, said high density boron nitride consisting of 4-16%
by volume of zincblende-type boron nitride and 96-84% by
volume of wurtzite-type boron nitride, and said cermet consist-
ing of 70-95% by volume of at least one ceramic material
selected from the group consisting of aluminum nitride, mag-
nesium nitride, titanium nitride, silicon nitride, chromium
nitride, hafnium nitride, zirconium nitride, tantalum nitride,
molybdenum nitride, niobium nitride, vanadium nitride, alumi-
num oxide, yttrium oxide, zirconium oxide, titanium boride,
zirconium boride, hafnium boride, tungsten boride, tantalum
boride, chromium boride, molybdenum boride, titanium car-
bide, boron carbide, chromium carbide, silicon carbide, haf-
nium carbide, zirconium carbide, vanadium carbide, tungsten
carbide, niobium carbide, tantalum carbide and mixtures and
solid solutions thereof; and 30-5% by volume of at least one
metal selected from the group consisting of nickel, cobalt,
chromium, manganese, iron, molybdenum, tungsten, vana-
dium, aluminum, magnesium, silicon, titanium, zirconium and
hafnium, said composite sintered compact having a Vickers
hardness not higher than about 2,680 kg/mm^.
X 0^ Ot-O- - O O
0^ O:
1 2o[ e
n
-J
P€III«£»BiLlTY
» 10
4,394,171
THICK nLM CONDUCTOR COMPOSITIONS
Kumaran M. Nair, East Amherst, N.Y., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 289,114, Aug. 3, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 354,814
Int. a.^ C09D 5/24
U.S. a. 106—1.14 10 Qaims
1. A palladium/silver metallization suitable for 'the manufac-
ture of printed terminations, which is an admixture of:
A. 50-95% by weight finely divided particles of metallic
materials comprising by weight
(1) 6 to 60 parts palladium metal;
(2) 94 to 40 parts silver metal or alloys thereof in the same
proportions; and
B. 5-50% by weight finely divided particles of a bismuth-
free low-melting, low viscosity devitrifiable glass com-
prising 50-80% by weight Pb304 and 10-30% Ge02.
1. High strength austenitic steel having excellent cold work
hardenability, consisting essentially of the following elements:
C . . . 0.1-0.3 wt.%;
Si ... a positive amount and up to 1.5 wt.%;
Mn . . . 16-22 wt.%;
Cr . . . 14-18 wt.%;
V . . . 0.8-1.7 wt.%;
N . . . 0.3-0.6 wt.%;
Ni . . . less than 0.8 wt.%; and
Fe and inevitable impurities . . . balance,
with a proviso that the C-, N- and V-contents satisfy the fol-
lowing inequalities:
C-|-N-(V/10)^0.4 wt.%; and
C-|-N-(-(V/5)^0.75 wt.%.
4,394,170
COMPOSITE SINTERED COMPACT CONTAINING
HIGH DENSITY BORON NITRIDE AND A METHOD OF
PRODUCING THE SAME
Akira Sawaoka, Yokohama; Masatada Araki, Handa; Shinroku
Saito, Yokohama, and Tamotsu Akashi, Aichi, all of Japan,
assignors to Nippon Oil and Fats Company, Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,700
Claims priority, application Japan, Noy. 30, 1979, 54/154245
Int. a.i B22F 3/14: C22C 29/00
U.S. a. 75—233 2 Qaims
1. A composite sintered compact consisting of 15-60% by
4 394 172
NON-DUSTING AND FAST-WETTING IMPRESSION
MATERIAL AND METHOD OF PREPARING SAME
Max Scheuble, Zurich, and Paul Munsch, Oberhasli, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Dentsply Research & Development
Corp., Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 181,417, Aug. 26, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,143
Int. a.J A61C 9/00; C08L 1/08, 5/04
U.S. a. 106—38.5 D 6 Qaims
1. In a dry powdered impression material comprising an
alginic acid salt component and a filler component, wherein
said material exhibits a tendancy toward dusting in its dry
powdered state, wherein said material is mixable with water to
form an impression paste capable of setting to a solid, and
wherein said material exhibits a further tendancy toward dust-
ing upon admixture with water, the improvement comprising a
coating on at least a portion of the powdered components
rendering said material substantially non-dusting in its dry
powdered form and during admixture with water, said coating
being readily and rapidly wet, dispersed or dissolved by water
and present in an amount of from about 1-10% by weight
based on the total weight of the dry powdered components.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1101
4,394,173
SPORTING AND RECREATIONAL FACILITY SLIDE
Christian Aste, Innsbruck, Austria, assignor to Horst Schwamm,
Sistrans and Friedbert Pezzei, Grin7«ns, both of, Austria
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,274
Qaims priority, application Austria, May 5, 1980, 2368/80;
May 5, 1980, 2372/80
Int. Q.3 A63G 21/00. 25/00. 21/04
U.S. Q. 104-69 7 Qaims
4,394,175
SELF-LEVELLING CEMENTITIOUS MIXES
Leslie W. Cheriton, 3 Meadow Way Wing, Leighton Buzzard,
Bedfordshire, LU7 OTG, and Philip J. Ansell, 20 Grove Way,
Simpson, Milton Keynes, Buckinghamshire, both of England
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261^25
Int. Q.J C04B 7/35
U.S. Q. 106-90 14 Qaims
1. A self-levelling screeding composition in the form of a
free flowing paste, said composition comprising sand and other
fillers, water, and hydraulic cement component comprising a
Portland cement and a high alumina cement characterized in
that the cements are present in a weight ratio of 20-80:80-20
and in that the composition further includes a plasticiser com-
ponent in a weight ratio of about 1% of the cement component
to make the mix workable and sufficient of a set retarder com-
ponent to delay the initial setting time about one hour.
1. A sporting or recreational slide, particularly for use with
unsteered vehicles, said slide comprising:
a plurality of joined sections which form a sliding surface
and which form regions which are, when viewed from
above, straight regions, circular-arc regions and clothoid-
shaped intermediate regions between and joining adjacent
straight and circular-arc regions;
said intermediate region having a first end at said straight
region and a second end at said circular-arc region; and
said sliding surface at the outer curved side of said interme-
diate region having a cross-sectional shape which continu-
ously changes between said first and second ends, said
cross-sectional shape at said first end comprising a quarter
of an ellipse corresponding to the cross-sectional shape of
said sliding surface at said straight region, and the ratio
between the major axis and the minor axis of the ellipse
continuously decreasing toward said second end.
4,394,176
METHOD OF PRODUCING SILICATE-CONTAINING
GRANULATES
Hendrik Loggers, Amerongen, Netherlands, assignor to Aarding
Weerstandlas B.V., Netherlands
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,046
Int. Q.' C04B 15/13
U.S. Q. 106—120 9 Qaims
1. A method of producing calcium silicate-contaming granu-
lates by mixing a calcium oxide bound-containing product with
a silicon-containing product, water and, if desired, a filler,
subsequently forming granulates from said mixture by means of
a heating treatment, while maintaining said granulates in a
heated vapour atmosphere, wherein said heated vapour atmo-
sphere is formed by having a heating fiuid chosen from moist
and non-moist heating fiuids acting indirectly upon the granu-
lates in such a way that any direct moisture condensation from
the heating fiuid upon the granulates is prevented.
4,394,174
PHOSPHATE CEMENT AND MORTAR
Ernst A. Tomic, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Filed Jun. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 383,453
y Int. Q.3 C04B 9/04
U.S. Q. 10^—85 18 Qaims
1. A storable cement product containing (a) magnesium
oxide in the form of particles which have a surface area of less
than about 1 square meter per gram, and up to 90 percent of
which pass through a 200-mesh screen and 10 percent of which
are held on a 170-mesh or coarser screen; and (b) aluminum
phosphate; components (a) and (b) being adapted to be com-
bined with water and an inert aggregate of mixed particle sizes
in amounts such as to form a mixture therewith comprising, by
weight, about from 3 to 25 percent of component (a), about
from 10 to 15 percent of component (b), about from 5 to 10
percent water, and about from 50 to 82 percent aggregate, and
thereupon to undergo a reaction which raises the temperature
of a 45-kilogram sample of the mixture to a peak temperature
in the range of about from 40° to 90° C. at a rate such that said
peak temperature is reached after the elapse of at least 10
minutes after the formation of said mixture.
4,394,177
COATING COMPOSITION
Akira Fujioka, Osaka; Kazuo Sakiyama, Ibaraki; Akio
Takigawa, and Motoaki Yoshida, both of Nishinomiya, all of
Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited
and Nippon Sheet Glass Co. Ltd., both of Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,565
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 10, 1980, 55-1532
Int. Cl.^ C09K 3/00
U.S. Q. 106—287.14 12 Claims
1. A transparent, abrasion-resistant coating composition
having high adhesiveness for transparent polymers, which
comprises: as component (A), at least one hydrolyzate selected
from the group of epoxy group-containing silicon compounds
represented by the general formula (1):
R<,'-Si-(OR^)4-o-6
(1)
wherein, R' stands for an organic group containing an epoxy
group, R2 for hydrogen atom, a hydrocarbon group having 1
to 6 carbon atoms or vinyl group, R^ for a hydrocarbon group
having 1 to 5 carbon atoms, alkoxyalkyl group or acyl group
having I to 4 carbon atoms, a for an integer of 1 to 3 and b for
an integer of 0 to 2, providing that a-(-b = 3 is satisfied, said one
hydrolyzate being used in an amount of 100 parts by weight (of
solids; calculated as
Ra'— Si-O ^_a-b ).
— 3 —
as component (B), at least one member selected from the group
1102
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
consisting of hydrolyzates of organic silicon compounds repre-
sented by the general formula (2):
R/-Si-(OR5)4-c
(2)
wherein, R* stands for a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 6
carbon atoms, vinyl group, methacryloxy group, amino group,
mercapto group, or organic group containing fluorine or chlo-
rine, R' for a hydrocarbon group having 1 to 5 carbon atoms,
alkoxyalkyl group or acyl group having 1 to 4 carbon atoms
and c for an integer of 0 to 3; colloidal silica and organic
titanium compounds, said one member being used in an amount
within the range of from 1 to 567 parts by weight (of solids,
calculated as Re"*— Si— 0(4-c)/2 >n the case of an organic sili-
con compound represented by the general formula (2), as Si02
in the case of colloidal silica or as K/'—T\—0(4-d)/2 in the
case of an organic titanium compound, wherein R^ stands for
an unhydrolyzed group containing no hydroxy group and d for
an integer of 1 to 4); and as component (C), a curing catalyst
selected from the group consisjing of ammonium perchlorate
and ammonium chloride.
4,394,179
ABRASIVE-CONTAINING CONTACT LENS CLEANING
MATERIALS
Edward J. Ellis, Georgetown, and Joseph C. Salamone, Marble-
head, both of Mass., assignors to Polymer Technology Corpo-
ration, Wilmington, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 51,960, Jun. 25, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,223
Int. CV B08B 11/00, 7/00; CUD 3/14, 17/08
U.S. CI. 134—7 3 Claims
2. A method of cleaning an ophthalmic hard contact lens,
said method comprising,
applying an aqueous cleaning solution containing a silica gel
abrasive having an average particle size of no more than
10 microns of a particle size sufficient for use in lens pol-
ishing present in an amount of from 0. 1 % by weight to a
value below that which would cause damaging scratching
or changing of the power of the lens,
a surface active agent in an amount of from 0. 1 to 30% by
weight and a separate suspending agent to a surface of a
lens and abrading said surface to remove unwanted sur-
face deposits if present without changing the power of the
lens or adversely affecting or scratching said lens,
said suspending agent being selected from the class consist-
ing of inorganic salts and hydrophilic polymers.
4,394,178
BULK LACTULOSE/LACTOSE SEPARATION BY
SELECTIVE ADSORPTION ON ZEOLITIC MOLECULAR
SIEVES
Chien C. Chao, Millwood, and John D. Sherman, Chappaqua,
both of N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Dan-
bury, Conn.
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,501
Int. CV CUD 3/12: C07H 1/06
U.S. a. 127—46.3 5 Qaims
SiO «4 «8 S2 X
6« 68 72 76 SO 84 98
ELUTION VOLUME I'"')
32 K CO 104 ce
4,394,180
METHOD OF FORMING HIGH RESISTIVITY REGIONS
IN GAAS BY DEUTEHON IMPLANTATION
Geoffrey Dearnaley, Abingdon, England; Kenneth Steeples,
Edinburgh, Scotland, and Ian J. Saunders, Morecambe, En-
gland, assignors to United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority,
London, England
Filed Jun. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 158,871
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 12, 1979,
7920389
Int. CV HOIL 21/263
U.S. a. 148—1.5 9 Claims
1. A process for separating lactulose from admixture with
lactose by selective adsorption which comprises contacting a
mixture comprising said compounds at a temperature of from
30° C. to 100° C. and at a pressure sufficient to maintain the
system in the liquid phase with an adsorbent composition
comprising at least one crystalline aluminosilicate zeolite se-
lected from a group consisting of modified zeolite Type Y
having a cation site concentration of from about 40 to about 10
equivalents per mole unit cell and a face centered cubic unit
cell having an aofor the decationized form of from 24.3 to 24.6
A in which the zeolitic cations are more than 50% barium or
potassium, whereby lactulose is selectively adsorbed thereon;
removing the nonadsorbed portion of said mixture from
contact with the zeolite adsorbent; and desorbing the lactulose
therefrom by contacting said adsorbent with a desorbing agent
and removing the desorbed lactulose.
^108'
je'-
«^.
^Jb <o'3
IcyyJmfoe^ c^'^
1. A process for producing a semi-conductor device having
regions of high resistivity in a semi-conductor substrate body
comprising gallium arsenide or other related compounds and
mixed crystals which show similar electrical behavior to gal-
lium arsenide, comprising the sole operation of implanting
deuterons only into the said regions of the substrate body with
energies only up to a maximum value corresponding to a de-
sired depth of penetration into the substrate body.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1103
4,394,181
METHODS OF MANUFACTURING A
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE HAVING A CHANNEL
REGION SPACED INSIDE CHANNEL STOPPERS
Keith H. Nicholas, Reigate, England, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,041
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 3, 1980,
8031992
Int. a.3 BOIJ 77/00, HOIL 21/263
U.S. a. 148—1.5 10 Claims
V N/ V V 4/
1. A method of manufacturing a semiconductor device with
an insulated gate field effect transistor having a channel region
comprising the steps of
providing a first masking layer on a major surface of a semi-
conductor body of one conductivity type,
introducing a dopant into unmasked areas of said semicon-
ductor body through said first masking layer to form
channel stoppers of said one conductivity type, said chan-
nel stoppers having a higher concentration of said dopant
than adjoining portions of said semiconductor body,
oxidizing said unmasked areas of said semiconductor body to
form an oxide layer inset on said semiconductor body, said
channel stoppers being present below said inset oxide
layer,
removing said first masking layer to expose a first window
bounded by said inset oxide layer,
providing a second masking layer on said inset oxide layer
and inside said first window for masking against ion im-
plantation, said second masking layer providing a second
window having sides parallel to the channel length situ-
ated within said first window, said sides determining the
width of the channel region to be spaced apart from said
channel stoppers, and
implanting ions characteristic of a second conductivity type
through said second window to form said channel region.
II 4,394,182
MICROELECTRONIC SHADOW MASKING PROCESS
FOR REDUCING PUNCHTHROUGH
Roy L. Maddox, III, Westminster, Calif., assignor to Rockwell
International Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
I Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,206
I Int. CV BOIJ ; 7/00; HOIL 21/265
U.S. a. 148—1.5 26 Claims
U-L-J
•^
k:^ V ^^li°--"
i'
AljOjKor SOS)
1. A process for controlling the impurity profile distribution
in a body of semiconductor material which includes a conduc-
tive layer, comprising the steps of:
defining a masking member on a laterally extending major
surface of said body in a predetermined pattern;
etching said surface and said body through said conductive
layer using said masking member as a mask so as to form
a truncated, pyramidal shaped gate element having sides
which slope to form tapered gate edges; and
ion implanting active regions of said semiconductor circuit
using said gate element as a mask so as to form active
regions having lighter and shallower degenerately doped
portions under said tapered gate edges, a channel region
being defined under said gate element between said active
regions,, the length of said channel region extending be-
tween said active regions under said gate dement, the
length of said channel between said degenerately doped
portions being less than the length of said channel region
beneath said degenerately doped portions.
4,394,183
SOLIDIFICATION OF MOLTEN MATERIALS
Kenneth A. Jackson, Plainfleld, and Lionel C. Kimerling, West-
field, both of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated, Murray Hill, N'.J.
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,575
Int. CI.' HOIL 21/24
U.S. CI. 148—1.5 24 Qalms
1. A method comprising
establishing, within an at least two component molten mate-
rial, an advancing freezing interface which is curved, with
at least two tangents from portions of the interface which
intersect, the solubility of at least one of the components
of the melt being higher in the melt phase than in the solid
phase, whereby the at least one component solidifies along
the locus of intersecting tangents, with an enriched con-
centration higher than the average concentration of that
component taken over the entire initial molten zone just
before the onset of solidification.
4,394,184
DETERMINATION OF GRAIN REFINERS IN
PHOSPHATE CONVERSION COATING BATHS
Richard G. Adams, Audubon, Pa., assignor to Pennwalt Corpo-
ration, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,572
Int. a.' C23F 7/08
U.S. CI. 148—6.15 R 14 Claims
1. A process for determining the concentration of a phos-
phorous containing organic grain refiner in an aqueous, acidic
conversion coating bath which includes an inorganic divalent
metal phosphate comprising, determining the chemical oxygen
demand of the bath, precipitating the grain refiner from a
portion of the bath by raising the pH to above about 4.0 in the
presence of excess metal ion, determining the chemical oxygen
demand of the precipitated portion of the bath, and determin-
ing the concentration of grain refiner in the bath from the
difference between the chemical oxygen demand of the bath
and the precipitated portion of the bath.
1104
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,185
PROCESSING FOR COPPER BERYLLIUM ALLOYS
Henry T. McOelland, Shoemakersville, and Joseph B. Kuhn,
Reading, both of Pa., assignors to Cabot Beryico, Inc., Read-
ing, Pa.
Filed Mar. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 363,682
Int. aj C22F 1/08
U.S. a. 148—11.5 C 7 Qaims
1. In a process for producing formed parts from a copper
beryllium alloy, which process includes the steps of: preparing
a copper beryllium melt; casting the melt, hot working the cast
copper beryllium; solution annealing the copper beryllium;
optionally cold working the solution annealed copper beryl-
lium; forming the copper beryllium; and age hardening the
formed copper beryllium at a temperature of from 400° to
1200° F. for a period of at least 4 minutes; the improvement
comprising the step of preaging the solution annealed or solu-
tion annealed and cold worked copper beryllium, prior to
forming, at a temperature of from 400° to 1000° F. for a pwriod
of up to 180 seconds, the copper beryllium being at fmal gauge
prior to preaging.
4,394,186
METHOD FOR PRODUCING A DUAL-PHASE STEEL
SHEET HAVING EXCELLENT FORMABILITY, HIGH
ARTIFiaAL-AGING HARDENABILITY AFTER
FORMING, HIGH STRENGTH, LOW YIELD RATIO, AND
HIGH DUCTILITY
Takashi Furukawa, Machida, and Kazuo Koyama, Kimitsu, both
of Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,175
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 15, 1979, 54-163277
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Aug. 25,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C21D 8/02
U.S. a. 148—12 F 7 Qaims
average cooling rate (R2) being high enough withtn its
said range so as to provide the cooled steel sheet with said
excellent formability and high artiricial-hardenability after
forming.
4,394,187
METHOD OF MAKING STEELS WHICH ARE USEFUL
IN FABRICATING PRESSURE VESSELS
Hiroo Ohtani, and Seiichi Watanabe, both of Amagasaki, Japan,
assignors to Sumitomo Metal Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,030
Int. a.3 C22C 38/22. 38/32; C21D 8/02
U.S. a. 148—12 F 4 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing a steel plate which consists
essentially of 0.05 to 0.20% of C, 0 to 0.15% of Si, 0.46 to
1.00% of Mn, 2.00 to 3.50% of Cr, 0.80 to 1.20% of Mo,
0.00015 to 0.0009% of B, 0.005 to 0.070% of Sol. Al, and the
balance of Fe, said method including heating a slab for the
plate rolling at a temperature of not more than 1150° C.
2. A method of manufacturing a steel plate which consists
essentially of 0.05 to 0.20% of C, 0 to 0.15% of Si, 0.46 to
1.00% of Mn, 2.00 to 3.50% of Cr, 0.80 to 1.20% of Mo,
0.00015 to 0.0009 of B, 0.005 to 0.070% of Sol. Al, and the
balance of Fe, said method including gradually cooling the
steel at a rate of not more than 30° C./hour immediately after
plate rolling.
~e '0
^ 60
9
50
in 30
UJ
& '0
^ fl DUAL- mASE
■* STEEL SHEET
— A CONVENTIONAL mW-STWNGTM
W STEEL SHEET
lO 20
ELONGATION %
30
"TiTUD PrPN5lLe HnM!5(i»taS.T0TiL —
STRENGTH STI^NGT H £l0NMTi0N ElONGATlON
mm^ I kQ. mm- |
296
®| 45 5
626
210
315
60 0
175
VALUE
YIELD STTJENGTH
TENSILE STPENGTH
0 30
250 :o 2
047
0 76
4,394,188
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING FERRITE STAINLESS
STEEL SHEETS HAVING EXCELLENT WORKABILITY
Jirou Harase, Munakata, and Tadashi Nakayama, Kitakyushu,
both of Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,713
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 9, 1980, 55-108813
Int. a.3 C21D 8/04
U.S. a. 148—12 EA 3 Qaims
1. A method for producing a dual-phase steel sheet mainly
composed of a ferrite phase and at least one rapidly-cooled
transformed phase selected from the group consisting of a
martensite phase, a bainite phase and a retained austenite phase,
and having a tensile strength not lower than 40 kg/mm^, excel-
lent formability and high artificial-aging hardenability after
forming, comprising the steps of:
hot rolling a steel containing from 0.01 to 0.12% carbon and
from 0.7 to 1.7% manganese, followed by coiling;
continuously annealing the steel sheet, which has undergone
the hot rolling, at an annealing temperature in the range of
from 730° to 900° C, and;
cooling in two successive stages from the annealing tempera-
ture to a temperature lower than 200° C. at an average
primary cooling rate (Ri) in the range of 1° C./secon-
d<Ri <30° C./second over a primary cooling stage from
said annealing temperature down to an intermediate tem-
perature (T) in the range of 420<T<700° C, and at an
average secondary cooling rate (R2) in the range of 100°
C./second <R2< 300° C./second over a secondary cool-
ing stage from the intermediate temperature (T) down to
a temperature not higher than 200° C, said secondary
%
70 II ii
III III'*)*'
1. A process for producing a SUS 430 type ferrite stainless
steel sheet having excellent workability, comprising hot rolling
a ferrite stainless steel slab containing 0.03 to 0.1% C, 0.08 to
0.5% sol. Al and not less than 70 ppm N with a total reduction
of at least 80% in the temperature range from 1 150° to 900' C.
at the central portion of the slab thickness, reduction by at least
one pass of the hot rolling being not less than 35%, coiling at
a temperature not lower than 800° C. and, without subjecting
the hot rolled steel sheet to annealing, cold rolling the hot
rolled steel sheet by a single step into a fmal thickness.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
llOS
4 394 189
HIGH PERFORMANCE TUBULARS FOR CRITICAL OIL
COUNTRY APPLICATIONS AND IMPROVED PROCESS
FOR THEIR PREPARATION
James B. Greer, Houston, Tex., assignor to Lone Star Steel
Company, Dallas, Tex.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 261,919, May 8, 1981, Pat. No.
4,354,882. This application Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No, 387,793
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 19,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ C21D 9/08
U.S. a. 148—12 R 23 Qaims
1. A process for manufacturing high performance tubulars
having minimum yield strengths ranging from 80,000 to
140,000 psi characterized by improved sulfide stress cracking
resistance and improved dimensional control comprising the
steps of providing a killed steel bloom comprising in amounts
by weight 0.20 to 0.35 percent carbon, 0.35 to 0.90 percent
manganese, 0.75 to 1.50 percent chromium, 0. 15 to 0.75 percent
molybdenum, 0.25 percent maximum nickel, 0.35 percent maxi-
mum copper, 0.040 percent maximum phosphorus, 0.04 per-
cent maximum sulfur, 0.35 percent maximum silicon, and the
balance iron, except normal steelmaking impurities, upset forg-
ing the killed steel bloom in a closed end cylindrical die to form
an extrusion billet, hot piercing the extrusion billet while still in
the upset forging die, cold machining the outside diameter and
the inside diameter to be concentric and cold machining the
nose of the extrusion billet, reheating and extruding the extru-
sion billet to form an extruded shell ^ft^in the cross-sectional
area of the extruded shell is in the nmge of 10 to 40 percent
larger than the cross-sectional area of the finished tubular,
subjecting the extruded shell to a first intercritical heat treat-
ment to recrystallize and refine the grain structure, removing
surface defects by grinding, sizing the ground, heat treated
extruded shell by cold working to the finished tubular dimen-
sions, subjecting the sized tubular to a second intercritical heat
treatment to recrystallize and refine the grain structure, and
subjecting the finished tubular to a quench and temper process
wherein the tubular is austenitized, quenched, and tempered to
produce a substantially tempered martensitic structure having
a minimum yield strength in the range of 80,000 to 140,000 psi.
4,394,190
MAGNETIC GATE AND METHOD OF PRODUCTION
THEREOF
Wilhelm Ertl, Ottobrunn; Ulrich Lachmann, and Heinrich
Pertsch, both of Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin and Munich
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,686
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 18,
1980, 3001771
Int. Q.3 HOIL 43/06
U.S. Q. 148—31.55 4 Qaims
Hxsva
17 18 16
1. Magnetic gate, comprising a magnetically permeable
metal piece having first and second parts being spaced apart
from each other, a pole shoe being integral with said second
part of said metal piece and protruding toward said first part of
said metal piece, a thin intermediate carrier being firmly con-
nected to said pole shoe, finger-like contact structures integral
with said intermediate carrier, a semiconductor chip having an
integrated circuit being soldered to said finger-like contact
structures, a synthetic material plate with contact structures
being disposed on said intermediate carrier, outer junction
wires being connected to outer ends of said contact structures
of said synthetic material plate, a magnet being fastened to said
first part of said metal piece and protruding toward said second
part of said metal piece, said magnet having a magnetic pole
with an at least partly fiat surface being opposite said pole shoe
and semiconductor chip defining an open space therebetween,
said first and second parts of said metal piece being separated
by the direct interposition of said magnet, open space, semicon-
ductor chip and pole shoe, and synthetic insulation material
embedding and fixing said metal piece, magnet and pole shoe in
place.
4 394 191
STACKED POLYCRYSTALLINE SILICON HLM OF
HIGH AND LOW CONDUCTIVITY LAYERS
Yasuo Wada, Tokyo; Hiroo Usui, Machida; Makoto Ohkura,
Hachioji; Masanobu Miyao; Masao Tamura, both of
Tokorozawa, and Takashi Tokuyama, Higashikurume, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,224
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 17, 1979, 54-162760
Int. Q.' HOIL 21/263: B05D 3/06
U.S. Q. 148-33.1 10 Qaims
5 5
r
DEPtM fRO« ""jltWiCf
1. A polycrystalline silicon film comprising a second layer
and a first layer formed on the second layer, the second layer
being formed by impurity doping and thermal annealing prior
to forming the first layer, said second layer having an activated
impurity concentration that is not higher than a solid solubility,
and the first layer being formed on said second layer and
having an activated impurity concentration that is higher than
the solid solubility, whereby a polycrystalline film having a
low resistivity is formed.
4,394,192
METHOD FOR PRODUCING LOW SILICON STEEL
ELECTRICAL LAMINATION STRIP
Prabhat K. Rastogi, Munster, Ind., assignor to Inland Steel
Company, Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,830
Int. Q.^ HOIF 1/00
U.S. Q. 148-120 11 Qaims
1. In a method for producing cold rolled steel strip for use in
electric motor laminations, the steps of:
providing a steel consisting essentially of the following
composition in wt.% before cold rolling:
carbon
.06 max.
manganese
.55-.75
silicon
.15-.25
aluminum
.15-.25
phosphorus
.12 max.
sulfur
.025 max.
iron
essentially the balance;
hot rolling said steel into steel strip;
coiling said hot rolled steel strip while the steel is at a coiling
1106
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
temperature in the range 1250'- 1400° F. (682°-760° C.)
and then allowing said coiled strip to cool;
cold rolling said steel strip;
continuously annealing said steel strip at a strip temperature
in the range 1250°- 1400° F. (682°-760° C.) for about 2-5
minutes, and then allowing said strip to cool;
and temper rolling said strip to produce a reduction of about
5-7.5%;
whereby said steel strip, after said temper rolling step, has a
grain size and crystallographic orientation which, upon
subsequent magnetic annealing at a temperature in the
range 1400°- 1 550° F. (760°-843° C.) for about 1-2 hours in
a decarburizing atmosphere, produces an average ferritic
grain size of about 3.5-5.0 ASTM and a preponderance of
crystallographic planes containing the easiest direction of
magnetization.
4,394,194
METHOD FOR HEAT TREATING STRUCTURAL
MEMBERS
George L. Satava, Arlington, Tex., and Carroll L. Deemer,
Euclid, Ohio, assignors to Midland Steel Products, Cleveland,
Ohio
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 192,430
Int. a.^ C21D 1/18
U.S. a. 148—131 22 Qaims
4,394,193
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR THE CONTINUOUS,
CONTACTLESS MONITORING OF THE STRUCTURE
STATE OF COLD STRIP
Manfred Gfrerer, Eriangen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,613
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 24,
1980, 3015894
Int. a.' C21D 1/54
U.S. a. 148—129 5 Qaims
1. A method for continuous monitoring of the internal struc-
ture of a metal strip subjected to an annealing treatment, said
method comprising the steps of:
inducing a first magnetic flux of cyclically varying intensity
in the strip at one point in the annealing treatment;
simultaneously measuring the intensity of the first flux modi-
fied by said strip;
forming a first predetermined functional relationship be-
tween the measured intensity and the induced intensity to
determine energy lost due to variation of the intensity of
the first flux;
inducing a second magnetic flux of cyclically varying inten-
sity in said strip at a later point in the annealing treatment;
simultaneously measuring the intensity of the second flux
modified by said strip;
forming a second predetermined functional relationship
between the measured intensity and the induced intensity
of the second flux to determine energy lost due to varia-
tion of the intensity of the second flux;
comparing the energy lost due to variation of the first flux to
energy lost due to variation of the second flux to obtain a
measure of the change of internal structure of the metal
strip between the first and second points, and
controlling the annealing process as a measure of said
change.
* 1. A method for induction heat treating and quenching of a
structural member of carbon steel to a uniform martensitic
structure, said structural member having a web and at least one
flange substantially perpendicular thereto consisting of
induction preheating the structural member to a temperature
in the range of 900° to 1400° F. by means of at least one
coil utilizing the frequency in the range of 180 to 3000
cycles;
continuting in a separate induction heating stage to heat the
structural member to the austenitizing temperature in the
range of 1450° to 1800° F. by the use of at least one coil
having a higher frequency than that of the prior step;
liquid quenching the structural member with a multiplicity
of nozzles immediately, said nozzles being disposed at an
angle in the direction of the advance of the structural
member and the pressure regulated from the bottom of the
quench zone liquid quench within the range of 10 to 20
pounds per square inch, from the top of the quench zone
liquid quench in the range of 1.5 to 6 pounds per square
inch and from the sides of the quench zone liquid quench
in the range of 5 to 25 pounds per square inch of the
structural member to minimize distortion thereof;
concurrently restraining the member by its web in a series of
segmented restraining rolls placed on the bottom and the
top thereof so as to present slots through which the liquid
may be sprayed to quench the structural member until the
structural member has reached a temperature below 1000°
F. to minimize localized bow distortion;
induction heating the structural member to a temperatering
temperature in the range of 750° to 1250° F. by the use of
a coil having a frequency in the range of 180 to 3000
cycles; and
subsequently restraining the structural member while cool-
ing to avoid camber distortion by passing the structural
member through web restraining and tapered roll flange
forming rolls, followed by tapered vertical restraint rolls,
and finally flange surface engaging rolls to minimize cam-
bering distortion.
4,394,195
COOLING OF CENTER PLATE TO AVOID SOFTENING
Harold T. Ried, and Edgar C. Weaver, both of St. Charles, Mo.,
assignors to ACF Industries, Incorporated, New York, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 398,750
Int. a.^ C21D 9/00
U.S. a. 148—149 18 Oaiffls
1. Apparatus for heat treating a railway car body while
maintaining a portion thereof unheat treated comprising: a heat
treat furnace having means for heating a railway car body;
movable support means for moving the railway car body into
the heat treating furnace; an insulating box located on said
support means; said insulating box including end support
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1107
means for supporting a portion of said railway car body and
center support means for supporting at least a portion of the
railway car body; an opening within said insulating box
adapted to receive a portion of said railway car body which is
not to be heat treated; insulating means surrounding said center
car support means; means for introducing a cooling medium
into said center support means whereby said cooling medium
maintains said car body depending portion at a sufficiently low
temperature to avoid substantial softening of the depending
portion and whereby said heat treating furnace heat treats the
remaining portion of said car to a desired heat treating temper-
ature.
width of the groove is achieved, thereby filling the groove
with insulating material;
(c) doping at least a part of the surface of the insulating
material with low melting point material and melting this
doping material by heat treatment;
(d) etching the insulating material by the depth thereof on
the non-grooved surface of the semiconductor substrate to
form a field region consisting of insulating material left in
the groove; and
(e) forming an active element in that region of the semicon-
ductor substrate which is isolated, at least in part, by said
field region.
13. A method of heat treating a railway freight car body
while maintaining a selected portion in an unsoftened state
comprising: locating an insulating box adapted to receive a
depending portion of a railway car which is not to be softened
upon a movable support member; providing insulating adja-
cent said depending portion to prevent heat from a heat treat-
ing furnace from softening said depending member; circulating
a cooling medium into the area where said depending member
is located while heat treating the railway freight car body and
removing the railway freight car from the heat treating furnace
and disconnecting the flow of said cooling media into said
insulating material.
4 394 197
COOK-OFF RESISTANT BOOSTER EXPLOSIVE
Irving Kabik, Silver Spring, and Vernon D. Ringbloom. West
Friendship, both of Md., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,133
Int. Cl.^ C06B 45/10
U.S. CI. 149-19.3 4 ci,i„,
1. An explosive composition having a mild cook-off charac-
ter comprising:
A. a mixture of explosives comprising
(1) from 58 to 62 weight percent of 1.3,5-triamino-2.4.6-
trinitrobenzene, and
(2) the remainder being a second explosive selected from
the group consisting of cyclotetramethylenetetranitra-
mine, cyclotrimethylenetrinitramine, and mixtures
thereof; and
B. a compatible binder of polytetrafluoroethylene having a
glass transiton temperature (Tg) greater than 105° C.
4 394 196
METHOD OF ETCHING, REFILLING AND ETCHING
DIELECTRIC GROOVES FOR ISOLATING MICRON
SIZE DEVICE REGIONS
Hiroshi Iwai, Takaidonishi, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,642
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 16, 1980, 55-97223;
Jul. 16, 1980, 55-97224; Nov. 29, 1980, 55-168582
Int. a.^ HOIL 21/76, 27/00
U.S. a. 14i-187 22 Qaims
4t-2
_4i-)
4 394 198
WATER-IN-OIL EMULSION EXPLOSIVE
COMPOSITION
Fumio Takeuchi, and Masao Takahashi, both of Aichi, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Oil and Fats Company, Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,094
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 25, 1980, 55-115819-
Sep. 8, 1980, 55-124201
Int. C\? C06B 45/02
U.S.Q. 149-21 6 Qaims
1. A water-in-oii emulsion explosive composition comprising
a disperse phase formed of an aqueous oxidizer solution con-
sisting of (a) an inorganic oxidizer salt selected from the group
consisting of ammonium nitrate, and a mixture of ammonium
nitrate with at least one of sodium nitrate and calcium nitrate,
(b) water and (c) at least one member selected from lithium,
sodium, potassium, calcium and ammonium salts of weak acid
and condensed phosphoric acid; a continuous phase formed of
a combustible material consisting of (d) fuel oil and/or wax; (e)
an emulsifier; and (0 hollow microspheres or microbubbles.
-2(
1. A method for manufacturing a semiconductor device
comprising:
(a) forming at least one groove at a predetermined portion of
a semiconductor substrate;
(b) depositing insulating material on the surface of the semi-
conductor substrate including the groove, said insulating
material being deposited until on the non-grooved surface
of the substrate a depth greater than one half the opening
4,394,199
EXPLOSIVE EMULSION COMPOSITION
Philip Barnhard, IV, Spanish Fork, and Lyman G. Bahr, Payson,
both of Utah, assignors to Agnus Chemical Company. North-
brook, III.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,742
Int. Q.3 C06B 45/02
U.S. Q. 149-21 9 Qaims
1. A water-in-oil emulsion explosive composition consisting
essentially of (a) an aqueous phase comprised of a solution of
oxidizing salts, (b) an oil phase consisting essentially of a nitro-
paraffin having three carbon atoms and optionally a hydrocar-
bon, (c) an emulsifying agent, and (d) at least one sensitizing
agent.
1108
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,200
PILE EXTILE ARTICLES AND PROCESS AND DEVICE
FOR THEIR MANUFACTURE
Pierre Grosjean, Lyons, France, assignor to Rhone-Poulenc-
Textile, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 84,638, Oct. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,814
Oaims priority, application France, Oct. 13, 1978, 78 29473;
Oct. 13, 1978, 78 29475; Japan, Oct. 13, 1978, 53/29474
Int. a.3 D04H 11/00
U.S. a. 156—72 1 Claim
1. A process for introducing pile textile elements in the form
of bundles of a plurality of substantially parallel filamentary
textile materials having a base stably joining the materials at
one end of the bundle into the meshes of a flexible meshed grid
wherein the dimension of the base is slightly greater than the
openings of the meshes of said grid, comprising
(1) seating said pile textile element in a truncated cone-
shaped inserting tool which is open at its wide end, said
cone being defined by a plurality of radially inwardly
compressible fingers along the generatrices of the cone,
(2) passing the cone-shaped inserting tool with the pile tex-
tile element seated therein through a mesh of the grid from
one side to the other side thereof,
(3) removing the cone-shaped tool from the tile textile ele-
ment while leaving the element locked in said mesh by
means of said base,
(4) radially inwardly collapsing said fingers so that the diam-
eter of the wide end of the cone becomes narrower than
■ the opening of the meshes of the meshed grid,
(5) passing the opened end of the collapsed cone through an
empty mesh of said grid from said other side to said one
side,
(6) expanding said fingers to their normal opening so that the
step (1) may be repeated, and
(7) repeating the steps (l)-(6) at least once.
work bed with tubular anchors projecting from said first
slab;
casting a second reinforced concrete slab in a horizontal
formwork bed with convoluted wire reinforcing rings
having a ring plane lying in the plane of said second slab
disposed at locations corresponding to said tubular an-
chors, the convolutions of said ring lying transverse to
said ring plane; and
turning over said first slab upon the setting thereof and
lowering it toward said second slab prior to the setting
thereof and vibrating said anchors into the concrete of
said second slab and into the rings thereof.
4,394,202
METHOD FOR RELINING AN UNDERGROUND GAS
LINE OR THE LIKE WITHOUT EXCAVATION
William R. Thomas, Malvern, and George S. Sykora, Strafford-
Wayne, both of Pa., assignors to UMAC, Inc., Paoli, Pa, and
Brooklyn Union Gas Company, Brooklyn, N.Y., a part inter-
est
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,336
Int. a.3 B32B 35/00
U.S. a. 156—94 22 Oaims
4,394,201
CONCRETE SLAB ASSEMBLY, ESPEaALLY FOR
BUILDING FACADES
Ernst Haeussler, Grashofstr. 47, 4300 Essen 1, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Division of Ser. No. 202,746, Oct. 31, 1980. This application
Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,595
Int. a.3 B32B 31/16: E04B 2/28
U.S. a. 156—73.6 4 Qaims
1. A method of repairing or relining a pipeline or the like,
comprising the steps of:
obtaining access to an opening into the pipeline;
mounting an expandable sealing unit by means of a connect-
ing means to the end of a predetermined length of flexible
tubing;
positioning said expandable sealing unit with said flexible
tubing connected thereto at a selected position within said
pipeline;
heating said expandable sealing unit by means of a heating
unit positioned within said expandable sealing unit;
expanding, in response to said heating, said expandable seal-
ing unit to expand to form a tight seal between the outer
surface of said expandable sealing unit and the interior
surface of said pipeline; and,
rem.oving said heating unit from the internal portion of said
expandable sealing unit whereby said pipeline is provided
with a flexible tubing mounted within the pipeline to be
repaired and sealably connected to said pipeline.
L.
1. A method of making a composite panel comprising the
steps of:
casting a first reinforced concrete slab in a horizontal form-
4,394,203
PROCESS FOR MANUFACTURE OF
THREE-DIMENSIONAL ROTATIONAL PARTS AND
MACHINE FOR THE IMPLEMENTATION OF SUCH
PROCESS
Bruno Bompard, and Alain Bruyere, both of Lyons, France,
assignors to Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique and Societe
Brochier et Fils, both of Paris, France
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,536
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 1, 1980, 80 14640
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Oct. 19,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B65H 81/00
U.S. a. 156—175 14 Qaims
1. A process for the manufacture of rotational parts from a
three-dimensional material comprising the steps of producing a
supporting mandrel provided with longitudinal and circumfer-
ential rows of barbs which between them define longitudinal
corridors and circumferential corridors,
placing superimposed layers of longitudinal threads and of
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1109
circumferential threads mounting the longitudinal threads
continuously along the contour of the mandrel, in the said
corridors, some of the longitudinal threads being placed in
only a portion of length of the corresponding longitudinal
corridors, and having extremities which do not extend out
of the corresponding longitudinal corridors,
maintaining said extremities continuously following their
application to said mandrel by winding at least one hold-
ing thread in at least one circumferential corridor next to
said extremities, simultaneously to the placing of the cor-
responding layer of longitudinal threads, said extremities
of at least some of the longitudinal threads being tempo-
rarily maintained by means of a first retractable member
before the holding thread is wound on,
densifying the assembly thus obtained, and finally eliminat-
ing the supporting mandrel, whereby said rows of barbs
and said sheets of threads define the three-dimensional
material.
5. A process for the manufacture of rotational parts from a
between said heated bars such that no pressure is applied to
said open end of said flexible container while said open end of
said flexible container is positioned between said pair of heated
bars, evaporating said moisture from said open end of said
flexible container while said open end of said flexible container
is positioned between said pair of heated bars and applying
sealing pressure to said open end of said flexible container
while cooling said open end of said flexible container while
said open end of said flexible container is positioned between
said pair of chilled bars to thereby provide a hermetic seal on
said open end of said flexible container.
three-dimensional material comprising the steps of producing a
supporting mandrel provided with longitudinal and circumfer-
ential rows of barbs which between them define longitudinal
corridors and circumferential corridors, placing superimposed
layers of longitudinal threads and of circumferential threads in
the said corridors, densifying the assembly thus obtained, then
eliminating the supporting mandrel, placing some of the longi-
tudinal threads in only a portion of the length of the corre-
sponding longitudinal corridors, extremities of said some longi-
tudinal threads being temporarily held in position by a first
retractable member, said some longitudinal threads being then
caused to come back into the corresponding longitudinal corri-
dors over said first retractable member, said extremities being
then held in position inwards of the first retractable member by
a second retractable member, said first retractable member
being then withdrawn in a direction that is substantially tan-
gential with respect to the mandrel, and at least one holding
wire being wound on in at least one circumferential corridor
next to said extremities, thereby continuously holding said
extremities in position.
4 394 205
METHOD FOR VULCAnIzaTION BONDING OF
FLUORINE-CONTAINING ELASTOMERS TO
VULCANIZED NATURAL AND SYNTHETIC
ELASTOMERS
Donald R. Blcnner, Erie, Pa., assignor to Lord Corporation,
Erie, Pa.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,162
Int. a.^ C09J 5/02
U.S. CI. 156-307.3 3 a^„s
1. A method for bonding an unvulcanized fluorinated elasto-
mer to a previously vulcanized non-fluorinated elastomer,
wherein saud unvulcanized elastomer is cured in situ against
said vulcanized elastomer, said method comprising:
exposing at least one surface of said vulcanized elastomer to
a fluorine-containing compound selected from the group
consisting of sulfur tetrafluoride, boron trifluoride and
phosphorus pentafluoride;
coating at least a portion of said at least one surface which
has been exposed to said fluorine-containing compound
with (a fluorinated elastomeric) an adhesive for fluori-
nated elastomers;
applying to the adhesive-coated portion of said at least one
surface an unvulcanized fluorinated elastomer composi-
tion; and
curing said unvulcanized fluorinated elastomer composition.
4,394,204
METHOD FOR HEAT SEALING
James L. Hutcheson, Mechanicsville, Va., assignor to Reynolds
Metals Company, Richmond, Va.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 132,494, Mar. 21, 1980,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 75,844, Sep. 14, 1979, abandoned, said
Ser. No. 132,494, is a division of Ser. No. 75,844,. This
application Jul. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 170,052
Int. Cl.^ B32B 31/00. 31/20
U.S. a. 156-275.1 8 Qaims
1. In a method of forming a heat seal on the open end of a
flexible container after filling of said flexible container and
cleaning of said open end of said flexible container, said clean-
ing producing moisture on said open end of said flexible con-
tainer, said flexible container comprising a pair of generally
planar walls which have been heat sealed to one another,
comprising positioning said open end of said flexible container
between a pair of heated bars and subsequently positioning said
open end of said flexible container between a pair of chilled
bars the improvement comprising maintaining a sufficient gap
4 394 206
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR APPLYING AN
ELONGATED TAB TO A MOVING SUBSTRATE
Victor H. Qausen, and Charles E. Asbury, both of Vancouver,
Wash., assignors to H. B. Fuller Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,647
Int. a.3 B32B 31/10; B65D 65/34
U.S. a. 156-322 12 Qaims
12. A method of extending the period of time during which
an elongated flexible member coated with a thermoplastic
adhesive is in engagement with a heating roll, comprising the
steps of:
(a) providing a second roll having an axis spaced from the
axis of the heating roll;
(b) successively coiling the flexible member about both rolls;
and
(c) spacing said coils axially along said rolls so that they do
not engage one another by pivoting said second roll with
1110
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
its axis moving in a plane generally parallel to said axis of with rounded front, in such a way that the front ends of shield
said heating roll to a position at which said axes are out of (23) and adhesive sprayer (9) are flush over and under each
other, or that the shield (23) protrudes in relation to the sprayer
(9), and where the assembly consisting of adhesive sprayer (9)
and shield (23) are suspended or has moving organs in such a
way that the assembly during insertion into the bag valve (6)
describe a curved motion (A) in the vertical middle of the bag
valve, so that when penetrating the bag valve (6) the assembly
will lift up the valve, and where the adhesive sprayer (9) is
designed to apply adhesive to the lower inside of the bag valve
(6).
^N^
4,394,208
ULTRASONIC BONDING
Kenneth Y. Wang, Greensboro, N.C., and Berlie R. Hill, Cana,
Va., assignors to Burlington Industries, Inc., Greensboro,
N.C.
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,714
Int. a.3 B29C 27/08; B32B 31/20
U.S. a. 156—580.1 15 Qaims
parallel alignment so that the angle between said axes in
said plane is increased in size.
4 394 207
APPARATUS FOR SEALING THE VALVE IN A VALVE
BAG
Ernst R. Berthelsen, Terndnip, and Christian Hejlesen, Vadum,
both of Denmark, assignors to Bates Ventilsaekke Co. A/S,
Norresundby, Denmark
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,767
Qaims priority, application Denmark, Mar. 3, 1981, 946/81
Int. a.^ B65B 7/02
U.S. a. 156—578 10 aaims
1. An apparatus designed to seal the valve of a valve bag
with adhesive, and of the kind where the bags arrive from a
bagging machine vertical or somewhat reclining, and which
apparatus comprises an adhesive sprayer designed in such
fashion that it can be inserted in the bag valve there to apply an
apportioned quantity of the adhesive onto the inside of the
valve and next be withdrawn, and also comprising a piston
member designed so as to apply pressure to the bag valve after
the application of adhesive and closing it in the process, char-
acterized in that mounted over and connected to the adhesive
sprayer (9) there is an in cross-section bow-shaped shield (23)
v^
11. Apparatus for vibration welding of material comprising
means for transporting in a first direction a web of material
to be vibration welded;
a plurality of ultrasonic vibration sources disposed to act
upon substantially the entire width of the web;
anvil means cooperating with said vibration sources to effect
welding, said anvil means disposed on the opposite side of
the web as said ultrasonic vibration sources;
a roller of hard material extending substantially the entire
width of the web; and
means for mounting said roller just before any of said ultra-
sonic vibration sources so that said roller applies a force to
the web.
4,394,209
ARRANGEMENT FOR AFFIXING THE BOTTOM OF A
THERMOPLASTIC CONTAINER
Dieter Kolb, Tuebingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Christian M^er GmbH & Co. KG., Tuebingen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,883
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 25,
1981, 8108746
Int. a.3 B29C 27/08; B32B 31/16
U.S. a. 156—580.1 7 Qaims
1. An improved arrangement for weldingly connecting a
cylindrical synthetic thermoplastic container to a bottom also
of synthetic thermoplastic material having an annular connect-
ing edge portion integral therewith, the improvement compris-
ing in combination,
a machine frame;
counter pressure means rotatably and axially adjustably
mounted in said machine frame;
ultrasonic welding means operatively mounted on said ma-
chine frame and adapted to coact with said counter pres-
sure means;
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
nil
a first disc rotatably mounted in said machine frame coaxi-
ally with respect to said counter pressure means:
a drive motor operatively connected to said first disc for
driving y rotating it;
impinging said vapor stream upon said substrate such that
said lead film is deposited thereon;
using said shutter for selectively shielding said substrate
from the flow of said vapor stream;
controlling the packing density of said lead film by regulat-
ing said acceleration voltage; and
controlling the surface flatness of said lead film by regulating
said temperature control means such that the temperature
of said substrate is maintained below the melting point of
lead.
said counter pressure means comprising at least one freely
rotatably mounted anvil roller which is adapted to coun-
ter-pressure the connecting edge of the bottom or inside
the container towards said ultrasonic welding means.
4,394,211
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING A SEMICONDUCTOR
DEVICE HAVING A LAYER OF POLYMIDE RESIN
Nobuhiro Uchiyama, Yokohama; Masataka Shingu, Kawasaki,
and Saburo Tsukada, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu
Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 415,929
Int. aj B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06; B29C 17/08
U.S. a. 156-628 iatdms
4,394,210
PROCESS FOR FORMING A LEAD nLM
Kiyoshi Morimoto, Mobara, and Toshinori Takagi, Nagaoka-
kyo, both of Japan, assignors to Futaba Denshi Kogyo K.K.,
Chiba, Japan
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,212
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-40441
Int. a.3 C30B 23/08
U.S. a 156-608 5 Qaims
IVPLANTATlON DOSAGE (CW^I
1. A method of manufacturing a semiconductor device com-
prising the steps of:
forming on a substrate a polyimide resin layer,
implanting an ion into a portion of said polyimide resin layer
to substantially decrease the etching rate of said portion of
said polyimide resin layer, are
carrying out a selective etching of said polyimide resin layer
so that the etching is sbustantially blocked by said portion
of said polyimide resin layer.
1. A process for forming a lead film including a closed type
crucible having at least one injection nozzle, means for heating
and vaporizing lead, an ionization chamber, an acceleration
electrode having an acceleration voltage, a shutter, a substrate,
temperature control means for controlling the temperature of
said substrate, and a vacuum chamber surrounding said cruci-
ble, said heating and vaporizing means, said ionization cham-
ber, said acceleration electrode, said shutter, said substrate, and
said temperature control means, wherein said process com-
prises:
heating and vaporizing said lead in said crucible to form a
pressurized lead vapor;
injecting said lead vapor through said at least one injection
nozzle into said vacuum chamber;
maintaining a pressure differential between said vacuum
chamber and said lead vapor in said crucible at a ratio of
less than or equal to 10~2;
using said pressure differential to form a vapor stream of said
lead;
generating electron beams within said ionization chamber;
directing said electron beams through said vapor stream so
as to form an ionized portion of said vapor stream;
accelerating said ionized portion of said vapor stream
toward said substrate with said acceleration electrode;
4,394,212
BLEED-FAST CATIONIC DYESTUFFS
Alex Pociluyko, Glen Mills, Pa., assignor to Scott Paper Com-
pany, Philadelphia, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 88,288, Oct. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,359,419,
which is a division of Ser. No. 902,661, May 4, 1978, Pat. No.
4,221,562. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,854
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 20,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.J D21H 3/80
U.S. Q. 162-162 2 Qaims
1. A dyed, non-woven, absorbent, cellulosic web having
good bleed fastness comprising cellulosic fibers and a water-
insensitive cationic dyestuff on said cellulosic fibers, said dye-
stuff comprising the reaction product of a dialdehyde selected
from the group consisting of glyoxal and glutaraldehyde and a
cationic, water-soluble dyestuff having a functional group
capable of reacting with the dialdehyde to form a water-insen-
sitive reaction product dyestuff wherein the functional group
of the water-soluble dyestuff is a lower alkylene amine of the
formula— (CH2)nNH2 wherein n is from 1 to 5.
1112
OFFICIAL GAZETTE (
July 19, 1983
4 394 213
HYDROXY-ALUMIn'umVlIGNIN SULFONATE
COMPOSITIONS
Richard L. Ferm, Lafayette, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,299
Int. a.3 D21H i/lH
U.S. a. 162—163 15 Qaims
1. A composition comprising about 30% by weight to about
95% by weight water and about 70% by weight to about 5%
by weight of a solute, said solute comprising a mixture of a
lignin sulfonate salt and a polymeric hydroxy-aluminum salt in
a weight ratio of lignin sulfonate to hydroxy-aluminum of from
about 1:4 to about 4:1.
for recycling to the second slurrying means middle oil derived
at least in part from the discharge of the first reactor, and
4,394,214
CONSTRUCTION OF UNIVERSAL EGG CELL CUSHION
AND METHOD
Kenneth D. Bixler, Huntington, N.Y.; Henry A. Lord, Cape
Elizabeth, Me., and Richard F. Reifers, New Canaan, Conn.,
assignors to Diamond International Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,980
Int. Q\? D21J 7/00
U.S. a. 162—228
means for discharging as a product light oil derived from the
e ^ . discharge of the second reactor.
4,394,216
VAPOR CONDENSATE RETURN MEANS IN A VAPOR
GENERATING AND RECOVERY APPARATUS
James W, McCord, 9101 Nottingham Parkway, Louisville, Ky.
40222
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,169
Int. a.3 BOID 3/02
U.S. a. 202—170 12 Qaims
1. The method of forming a vertically elongated hollow thin
walled cushion or pillopad on a side wall of an egg cell, includ-
ing
fastening to the screen side of the egg cell perforated mold
an elongated grooved bubble shaped segment, and
sucking, by the application of vacuum, pulp fibres from a
pulp slurry on the screen and over the grooved bubble
segment to form a relatively thin layer of pulp fibres in
relation to the surface of said bubble segment, the vacuum
on the side of the screen opposite from the bubble segment
side is also present in the groove and serves to insure that
fibres form in relation to the surface of said bubble seg-
ment.
4,394,215
APPARATUS FOR CONVERTING COAL INTO LIQUID
PRODUCTS
Berend Jagen Andries Brink, both of Sasolburg, and Comelis
Kleynjan, Lochvaal, all of South Africa, assignors to Sasol
One (Proprietary) Limited, Sasolburg, South Africa
Division of Ser. No. 156,684, Jun. 5, 1980, Pat. No. 4,318,797.
This application Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,264
Qaims priority, application South Africa, Jun. 18, 1979,
79/2997
Int. a.J BOID 11/02: ClOC i/08: ClOG 21/00
U.S. a. 196—14.52 12 Claims
1. An apparatus for carrying out a coal liquefaction process
comprising in parallel separate and distinct first and second
coal digestion reactors for digesting particulate coal in a past-
ing oil under pressure, first and second separate and distinct
coal slurrying means feeding separately into the first and sec-
ond reactors respectively, fractionating means coupled to said
first and second reactors and adapted to produce light oil,
middle oil and heavy or residue fractions, means for recycling
to the first slurrying means heavy or residue fraction derived at
least in part from the discharge of the second reactor, means
1. A vapor generating and recovery apparatus comprising:
a housing having a vaporizing chamber and a condensing
chamber therein separated by a first weir of preselected
height;
means to add heat to said vaporizing chamber and means to
remove heat from said condensing chamber; and,
means to transfer condensate from said condensing chamber,
to said vaporizing chamber, said means to transfer con-
densate including means to separate components within
the condensate and return said separated components in
separate streams to said vaporizing chamber, said means to
remove heat being disposed within said condensing cham-
ber below the upper extremity of said weir and spaced
sufficiently above said means to transfer condensate for
providing a constant vapor blanket over the means to
remove heat from the condensing chamber.
9. A vapor generating and recovery apparatus comprising:
a housing having a vaporizing chamber sub-divided into a
plurality of sub-chambers by weirs of preselected height,
and a condensing chamber separated from said vaporizing
chamber by a first weir of a preselected height greater
than that of any said weirs sub-dividing said vaporizing
chamber;
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1113
means to add heat to at least one of said sub-chambers of said
vaporizing chamber, and means to remove heat from said
condensing chamber;
means to transfer condensate from said condensing chamber
to at least one of said vaporizing sub-chambers, said trans-
fer means including means to separate components within
the condensate and in returning at least one of said sepa-
rated components to at least one of said vaporizing sub-
chambers, said means to remove heat being disposed
within said condensing chamber below the upper extrem-
ity of said weir.
4 394 218
COKE QUENCH CAR EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Joerg P. Baum, Hosel, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Baumco Geselishaft fur Aniagentechnick mbH, Essen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,275
Int. a.' ClOB ii/00, 33/14. 45/00
U.S. a. 202-263 ,2 Qaims
4 394 217
APPARATUS FOR SERVICING COKE OVENS
Wilhelm Holz, Gelsenkirchen; Helmut Lukaszewicz, Bottrop,
and Kari Gregor, Bochum, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Ruhrkohle Aktiengesellschaft, Essen and Gewerk-
schaft Schalker Eisenhiitte, Gelsenkirchen, both of. Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,452
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 27
1980,3011781
Int. CI.' ClOB 33/06. 39/04. 39/12. 43/06
U.S. CI. 202-227 13 Oaims
1. A system for capturing emissions from coke as it is pushed
from an oven including:
a first transporter movable in a path adjacent said oven,
coke receiving means and gas cleaning means mounted
adjacent each other on said first transporter,
guide means mounted on said first transporter and extending
over said coke receiving means and said gas cleaning
means,
a second transporter mounted on said guide means and
movable thereon from a first position above said coke
receiving means to a second position above said gas clean-
ing means,
said second transporter having hood means mounted
thereon, said coke receiving means being open at its upper
end for receiving coke, said hood means being open at its
lower end and sized to cover the opening in said coke
receiving means,
said hood means also having a port for receiving coke from
a coke oven,
and coupling means for coupling said hood means to said gas
cleaning means
when said second transporter is positioned above said coke
receiving means whereby emissions collected by said
hood means are transmitted to said gas cleaning means,
the opening in said coke receiving means being exposed
when said second transporter is in its second position to
permit the coke and in said coke receiving means to be
quenched.
1. Apparatus for servicing coke ovens in a battery, each coke
oven having a floor and the battery having a pusher machine
side and a coke side, said apparatus comprising:
a gantry having a plurality of vertical supports, each with a
controllable and individually driven trackless running
gear for moving said gantry along either side of the coke
oven battery;
a boom machine mounted on said gantry and movable with
respect thereto in a direction transverse to the direction of
movement of the gantry along the battery;
a boom having one end mounted on said boom machine for
horizontal rotation and vertical pivoting with respect to
said boom machine, said boom having a connection head
for a work implement at the other end;
a work implement for servicing the coke ovens coupled to
said connection head;
an adjustable feed conveyor mounted in said gantry and
extendable to the fioor of the coke ovens for receiving
material discharged from the coke ovens;
coke quenching means mounted in said gantry for receiving
material from said feed conveyor;
receiving means mounted in said gantry for receiving mate-
rial from said coke quenching means; and
a discharge conveyor coupled to said receiving means for
discharging the material from said servicing apparatus.
4,394,219
FRACTIONATING LIQUIDS
Thomas W. Mix, Wellesley, and Jay S. Dweck, Framingham,
both of Mass., assignors to Merix Corporation, Wellesley,
Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 161,880, Jun. 23, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 45,839, Jun. 5,
1979, abandoned. This application Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No.
287,035
Int. a.' BOID 3/42
U.S. a. 203-1 8 Claims
1. A method of fractionating feed liquid containing fractions
having different volatilities, said method being carried out in
fractionating tower apparatus including a plurality of multi-
stage segments, heaters, and vaporizers, said method compris-
ing
heating said feed liquid, by means of said heaters and vapor-
izers, to different temperatures to fiash vapor fractions of
different volatilities,
feeding said flashed vapor fractions to different multi-stage
segments of said fractionating tower apparatus, fractions
of higher volatilities being fed to higher segments,
withdrawing liquid sidestreams from a plurality of said seg-
ments,
separately feeding reflex liquid from at least one segmet.t to
a segment below it, and
controlling the level of heavy components in at least one
1114
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
selected liquid sidestream withdrawn from a segment tionating the oillayer to produce fractions of mtroalkane corn-
below a segment where vapor is flashed by limiting the ponents, the improvement comprising, subjecting the con-
temperature at which said vapor is flashed to below the denser liquid and absorber bottoms solely to extractive distilla-
tion with substantially pure water to remove sufficient impuri-
ties therefrom so that the condensate is relatively free of impu-
rities, thereby avoiding carbonaceous build-up in the heads
column and fractionater during extraction of the nitroalkanes.
4,394,221
METHOD OF DEODORIZING AND/OR DEACIDIFYING
HIGH-BOILING ORGANIC COMPOUNDS,
PARTICULARLY EDIBLE OILS
Hemuum Stage; Hartmut Hammer, both of Koln-Niehl, and
Walter Kiihns, Dormagen, all of Fed, Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to Firma Wilhelm Schmidding GmbH & Co., Cologne,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 137,535
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 7,
1979, 2914101
Int. a.3 BOID 1/06. 1/14; CUB 3/14
U.S. a. 203—89 8 Claims
temperature of the vapor in the tower whose composition
most closely matches the composition of the flashed va-
por.
4,394,220
PROCESS FOR RECrinCATION OF PROPANE
NITRATION STREAM
Richard S. Egly, West Terre Haute, and Cecil E. Turnquist,
Terre Haute, both of Ind., assignors to Angus Chemical Com-
pany, Northbrook, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 182,921, Sep. 2, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 313,862
Int. a.^ BOID 3/34. 15/00
U.S. a. 203—42 3 Qaims
y/-
^/
±
— ^
^^
r
•^
.V
V
"^y
— y
^ '
^/a
3
p!..
1. In a method for rectifying the crude production stream
obtained from the process of vapor phase nitration of hydro-
carbon to produce nitroalkanes, which includes passing the
vapor phase nitration stream from a nitration chamber through
a condenser to condense a substantial portion of the normally-
liquid components and separate said normally-liquid compo-
nents from normally-gaseous components, forming absorber
bottoms by passing the gaseous components into a water ab-
sorber to wash the gas, said absorber bottoms including nitroal-
kanes, acetaldehyde, nitrogen, nitrogen oxides and oxygenated
compounds, stripping the condenser liquid and absorber bot-
toms by distillation to form a condensate including a water
layer and an oil layer, said oil layer comprising crude nitroal-
kanes and low boiling components, stripping the low boiling
components from the condensate in a heads column, and frac-
1. A method of removing volatile impurities from a high-
boiling, heat-sensitive organic liquid, which method comprises
(a) passing said high-boiling, heat-sensitive organic liquid
which contains volatile impurities downwardly through a
multiplicity of parallel, vertically-oriented tubular flow
channels so as to divide said organic liquid into a multi-
plicity of free falling films, said flow channels having
inside diameters of 34 to 72 mm and lengths of 6 to 16
meters, the liquid load application being controlled to a
rate of between 1 and 2.5 mVm.hour/meter of flow chan-
nel circumference,
(b) concurrently passing a heated medium along a major
portion of the length of said vertically-oriented tubular
flow channels, and
(c) concurrently passing a carrier vapor consisting of steam
upwardly through said vertically oriented flow channels
in counterflow to the flow of said liquid films, the steam
exiting the upper ends of said flow channels with the
volatile impurities and the organic liquids exiting the
lower ends of said flow channels in purified form,
the initial temperatures of said organic liquid in step (a) and
said heated medium in step (b) and the flow rate of steam of
step (c) being controlled such that the working pressure in said
flow channels is between 2 and 10 mbar and the pressure drop
thereacross is less than half of the head pressure, the working
temperature in the flow channels is below the decomposition
point of the organic liquid, the viscosity of the free falling
liquid films is less than 0.003 Pas, the Reynolds number of the
liquid is over 100, the warm-up of the liquid in the flow chan-
nels is between 10° and 20° K., the exchange time in the flow
channels is between 10 and 20 seconds and the initial tempera-
ture of the heated medium is a maximum of 5° K. above the
exiting temperature of the purified organic liquid.
-July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1115
4,394,222
METHOD FOR DETERMINING THE OXYGEN
CONTENT IN GASES, UNINFLUENCED BY
TEMPERATURE VARIATIONS
Franz-Josef Rohr, Abtsteinach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Brown, Boveri & Cie AG, Mannheim-KaferUl, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,432
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nor. 20,
1979, 2946775
1 1 Int. a.3 GOIN 27/46
U.S. a. 204-1 T 4 Claims
^^
1. Method for determining the oxygen content in gases
influenced by temperature variations of the gases which com-
prises passing said gases in contact with a first electrochemical
measuring cell connected to a voltage source, said electro-
chemical cell having a solid electrolyte which is heated to an
operating temperature, and through which a diffusion-limited
electric current flows which depends on the oxygen content of
the gases and the magnitude of which is determined as a first
electrical signal measuring the oxygen content of the gases, the
combination therewith of deriving a second electrical signal
from the oxygen content of an auxiliary gas with a constant
oxygen content by passing the auxiliary gas in contact with a
second electrochemical measuring cell which is approximately
identical to the first measuring cell with respect to design,
operation and operating conditions to obtain said second elec-
trical signal, and forming a temperature-independent quotient
from the two electrical signals and employing the quotient as a
measure of the oxygen content of the gases, wherein a heater is
disposed in the first measuring cell to heat the electrolyte
which is an oxygen ion-containing solid electrolyte, a first
electrode adjacent an inside surface of the electrolyte and a
second electrode adjacent the opposite outside surface, said
electrodes connected to the voltage source to form an electric
circuit, with one of said electrodes acted on by said gases
causing an electric current which flows as a function of the
oxygen content of said gases, wherein the second measuring
cell also has a solid electrolyte with electrodes on the inside
and outside surfaces of the electrolyte, wherein the solid elec-
trolytes of the first and the second measuring cells consist of
one piece, wherein the outer electrode for the first cell and for
the second cell each is surrounded by an interspace with open-
ings for the introduction and discharge for the feed gases and
the auxiliary gas, wherein the interspace of the first cell is
connected to said gases and the interspace of the second cell is
connected to the auxiliary gas with a double-throw switching
device to enable switching the flow of gases from the first
interspace to the second interspace and the flow of auxiliary
gas from the second interspace to the first interspace and the
reverse, wherein the electrodes of the second cell are con-
nected to the voltage source to form a second electric circuit,
with said auxiliary gas acting on one of said electrodes causing
an electric current to flow in the second circuit as a function of
the oxygen content of the auxiliary gas, wherein the two elec-
tric circuits are connected to a divider for forming the quotient
of said two determined electric current signals, and wherein
the temperature-independent quotient is fed to a receiving
device acting as an indicating, regulating or controlling device.
1032 O.G.
4,394,223
TIN AND GOLD PLATING PROCESS
R. Dean Hall, Baltimore, Md., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the SecreUry of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 308,973
Int. a.3 C25D 5/02. 5/56
U.S. a. 204-15 5 Qaims
1. A method for plating two metals onto a copper clad
substrate comprising the steps of:
a. defining, by utilizing photoresist material, a circuit pattern
on the copper cladding which results in protected copper
and unprotected copper;
b. etching away the unprotected copper until only a thin
layer of copper remains;
c. applying resistive material on selected areas of the thin
layer of copper in such a manner that first portions of the
circuitry to be plated with a first metal are connected to
one another via the resistive material while other portions
of the circuitry not to be plated with said first metal are
not connected via the resistive material to said first por-
tion;
d. etching away to completion the unprotected copper and
then removing all photoresist and resistive material;
e. applying resistive material to said selected areas of copper
in order to protect them from plating;
f electroplating said first portions of the circuitry with said
first metal;
g. electroless plating said other portions of the circuit with a
second metal by immersing the entire substrate in a plating
bath; and
h. removing all resistive material and then etching away the
remainder of the thin copper layer.
4,394,224
TREATMENT OF TITANIUM PRIOR TO BONDING -^
Alauddin Mahoon, and Richard P. J. Kohler, both of Weybridge,
England, assignors to British Aerospace Public Limited Com-
pany, London, England
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,251
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 24, 1980,
8013459
Int. a.3 C25D 11/34
U.S. CI. 204-57 6 Qaims
1. A method of treating articles of Titanium or Titanium
alloy to form an adhesive receptive oxide layer upon a surface
region thereof, which method includes applying to the surface
to be treated a mixture of aqueous solutions of sodium hydrox-
ide in a solution concentration of from 0.5 to 5 molar and
Hydrogen Peroxide in a solution concentration of from 0.1 to
1 molar, maintaining the applied mixture within a temperature
range within which the Hydrogen Peroxide is relatively stable,
and impressing a voltage of from 3 to 15 V on the mixture to
provide an anodic treatment thereby producing an environ-
mentally stable adhesive bonding surface.
1116
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,225
PROCESS FOR THE ADDITION OF
lODOPERFLUOROALKANES ONTO ETHYLENIC OR
ACETYLENIC COMPOUNDS BY ELECTROCATALYSIS
Auguste Commeyras, Clapiers, and Patrick Calas, Montpellier,
both of France, assignors to Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhl-
mann, Courbevoie, France
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,609
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 8, 1980, 80 15121
Int. a.3 C25B 3/10
U.S. a. 204—59 R 6 Qaims
through said membrane from said anode compartment into said
cathode compartment and to combine with hydroxide ions to
form quaternary ammonium hydroxide that is essentially free
of halide, and to dissociate water at the cathode to form hydro-
gen and hydroxide ions; and removing a product containing
greater than 25 wt. % of quaternary ammonium hydroxide
from said cathode compartment.
1. A process for the addition of an iodoperfluoroalkane of
the formula CF3 (CF2)«I, in which n is an integer from 1 to 19,
onto an ethylenic or acetylenic alcohol or ether having the
unsaturation between the second and third carbon atoms,
comprising forming a mixture of said alkane and said alcohol
or ether and subjecting said mixture to electrocatalysis in an
electrolytic cell.
4,394,226
ELECTROLYTIC METHOD FOR PRODUCING
QUATERNARY AMMONIUM HYDROXIDES
Robert C. Wade, Ipswich, and Lawrence J. Guilbault, Topsfield,
both of Mass., assignors to Thiokol Corporation, Chicago, 111.
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,594
Int. C\? C25B 1/00. 3/00
U.S. a. 204—72 13 Qaims
4,394,227
ELECTROCHEMICAL PROCESS FOR THE
PREPARATION OF BENZANTHRONES AND PLANAR,
POLYCYCLIC AROMATIC OXYGEN-CONTAINING
COMPOUNDS
Horst Jager, Bettingen; Eric Plattner, Seltisberg; Jacques Ber-
sier, Riehen, and Christos Comninellis, Prilly, all of Switzer-
land, assignors to Ciba-Geigy AG, Basel, Switzerland
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,109
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 5, 1981,
1475/81; May 8, 1981, 2996/81
Int. C\? C25B 3/04
U.S. a. 204—73 R 22 Claims
1. An electrochemical process for the preparation of benzan-
throne and planar, polycyclic aromatic oxygen-containing
compounds, which comprises carrying out the reaction in an
electrolytic cell which is separated by a diaphragm into a
cathode compartment and an anode compartment and which
contains an acid in the cathode compartment, in which process
an anthraquinone of the formula
If
{ ^ f^
^^h
,
1
20
,2* 1
^ ■
25
as
j-^-^ir
■
It
I V
30
10
is converted electrochemically in the cathode compartment
into the semiquinone form and the latter being reacted with
glycerol to give the benzanthrone of the formula
1. A process for producing quaternary ammonium hydrox-
ide in an electrolytic cell having an anode compartment con-
taining an anode and a cathode compartment containing a
cathode, said anode and cathode compartments being sepa-
rated by a cationic membrane that has been treated with a
mineral acid prior to use in the process and is capable of rejec-
tion of passage of essentially all halide anions from said anode
compartment to the cathode compartment and capable of
permitting a passage of hydrated quaternary ammonium cati-
ons from the anode to cathode compartment, comprising:
feeding a solution of a quaternary ammonium halide into said
anode compartment; feeding water into said cathode compart-
ment; establishmg and maintaining a sufficient electrical poten-
tial between said anode and cathode to produce a flow of
electrical current across said cell thereby causing halide ions to
lose an electron at said anode, and combine to form halogen
molecules, hydrated quaternary ammonium ions to migrate
in which the benzene rings A and B can be substituted, and, in
the anode compartment, the cations of a transition metal salt
are simultaneously converted from a lower oxidation stage into
a higher oxidation stage, the cations in their higher oxidation
stage being used for the chemical oxidation of planar, polycy-
clic aromatic compounds to give the corresponding oxygen-
containing compounds, said chemical oxidation either carried
out directly in the anode compartment or subsequently in a
separate reactor vessel; and isolating from the catholyte and
anolyte the respective products formed.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1117
4,394 228
RANEY alloy coated cathode FOR
CHLOR-ALKALI CELLS
Thomas J. Gray, Guilford, Conn., assignor to Olin Corporation,
New Haven, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 179,150, Aug. 18, 1980, Pat. No.
4,370,301. This application Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 334,058
Int. a? C25B 1/34. 11/04
U.S. a. 204-98 16aaims
^fct£ *l-L COATINGS twriALLV 120 M<(»OnS THKK *
RANCy- N. FBOM /PRECURSORfPLASM*
j_ SPRATECy
1. In a process of producing alkali metal hydroxide compris-
ing electrolyzing an aqueous alkali metal chloride brine in an
electrolytic cell having an anode, a cathode comprising a
substrate with a catalytic surface thereon, said anode being
separated from cathode by a synthetic, fluorocarbon resin
permionic membrane, the improvement wherein
a. said membrane is a member of a class consisting of cationic
exchange membranes of hydrophillic phosphonated, sul-
fonated or carboxylated fluorocarbontelomers; and
b. said cathode surface comprises a Raney nickel alloy, said
Raney alloy being predominantly derived from an adher-
ent layer of Nij^Moi-^Ab beta structured precursory
crystalline surface layer where x is between 0.80 and 0.95.
4 394 229
CATHODE ELEMENT FOR SOLID POLYMER
ELECTROLYTE
Malcolm Korach, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to PPG Industries,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 155,277, Jun. 2, 1980, Pat. No. 4,345,986.
This application May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 373,951
Int. a.3 C25B 1/34. 9/00
U.S. CI. 204-98 1 Qaim
removably bearing upon the permionic membrane comprise a
microporous ductile member consisting essentially of sintered
metallic materials, having a thickness of from about 0. 1 milli-
meter to 1 millimeter, and conforming to the permionic mem-
brane.
4 394 230
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SPLITTING WATER
MOLECULES
Henry K. Puharich, Rte. 1, Box 97, Delaplane, Va. 22025
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,277
Int. a.' C25B 1/04. l/W. 9/04
U.S. CI. 204-129 9 aaims
1. A method for splitting water molecules into hydrogen and
oxygen comprising
(a) generating complex electrical wave forms matching the
complex wave form resonant frequencies of tetrahedral
water molecules;
(b) applying said generated wave forms in resonance to said
water molecules to shatter said molecules, thereby liberat-
ing hydrogen and oxygen.
1. In a method of electrolyzing an aqueous alkali metal
chloride brine, comprising feeding the brine to the anolyte
compartment of a solid polymer electrolyte electrolytic cell
having an electrolyte impermeable permionic membrane with
an anodic portion and a cathodic portion, anodic means in
contact with the anodic portion, and cathodic means in contact
with and removably and compressively bearing upon the ca-
thodic portion, the improvement wherein the cathode means
4,394,231
CATHODE FOR THE ELECTROLYTIC PRODUCTION
OF HYDROGEN
Edgard Nicolas, Meise-Eversem, Belgium, assignor to Solvay A
Cie, Brussels, Belgium
Continuation of Ser. No. 163,086, Jun. 26, 1980. This application
Aug. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 297,311
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 29, 1979, 79 17441
Int. a.5 C25B 1/02. 11/06
U.S. a. 204-129 10 Qaims
1. In a process for the production of hydrogen in an electro-
lytic cell, wherein hydrogen is electrolytically produced on
the active zone of a cathode, the improvement consisting in
that the cathode active zone essentially consists of a metal
oxide produced by the thermal decomposition of a thermally
decomposable compound of a metal selected from the group
consisting of cobalt, iron, maganese and nickel, said metal
oxide being produced in situ on a support made of an electri-
cally conducting material selected from the group consisting of
cobalt, chromium, iron, maganese, nickel and alloys of these
metals.
1118
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,232
PICKLING OF ALUMINUM
Robertus Exalto, Amsterdam, and Adriaan Kwakeraaak, Aals-
meer, both of Netherlands, assignors to Fokker B.V., Schi-
phol-Oost, Netherlands
Filed Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,973
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Feb. 12, 1981,
8100686
Int. a.3 C25F 1/04
U.S. a. 204—144 7 Qaims
4,394,234
METHOD OF PROCESSING ELECTRICALLY
CONDUCTIVE MATERIAL BY GLOW DISCHARGE
Naotatsu Asahi, Katsuta; Sizuka Yamaguchi, Hitachi, and Kat-
suyoshi Terakado, Katsuta, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 174,748
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 2, 1979, 54-10472;
Sep. 14, 1979, 54-117298; Jan. 23, 1980, 55-5790
Int. aJ COIB 21/30: Clin 1/48
U.S. a. 204—164 20 Qaims
OCX)
800
600
Distance between seconmry
electrode and workpiece
(mm)
1. A pickling process for aluminum articles, comprising the
steps of:
(a) providing a pickling bath consisting essentially of a sus-
pension of carbon particles in sulfuric acid,
(b) immersing an aluminum article to be pickled into said
bath, and
(c) maintaining said article in said bath for a period of time
sufficient to effect complete pickling of said article.
4,394,233
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ETHYL a-CHLOROETHYL
CARBONATE
Sang-Woo Park, Seoul, Rep. of Korea, assignor to The Korea
Advanced Institute of Science and Technology, Seoul, Rep. of
Korea
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 287,641
Qaims priority, application Rep. of Korea, Dec. 23, 1980,
4891/80
Int. a J BOIJ 19/12
U.S. Q. 204—158 HA 5 Qaims
1. A process for preparing ethyl a-chloroethyl carbonate
having the formula:
1. A surface treatment process wherein glow discharge is
established between a cathode and an anode of a power source
to carry out heat treatment of a workpiece under a reduced
pressure condition in a container, comprising the steps of
placing the workpiece which has a conductive surface and
which is electrically connected to the cathode in said con-
tainer, positioning a secondary electrode which has a conduc-
tive surface and which is electrically connected to the cathode
close to a selected treatment portion of said workpiece, and
effecting a glow discharge between the conductive surfaces of
said workpiece and the secondary electrode and said anode;
the distance between the workpiece and the secondary elec-
trode being set to be 2 to 25 mm to increase the surface temper-
ature of the selected treatment portion of said workpiece and
to increase the heat treatment effect on said selected treatment
portion of said workpiece and the pressure of the treatment
atmosphere being varied in the range 0.1 to 10 Torr to control
the treatment temperature.
o=c
\
O— CH2— CH3
O— CH— CH3
a
which comprises chlorinating diethylcarbonate having the
formula:
o=c
/
O— CH2— CH3
O— CH2— CHj
4 394 235
HEAT-SEALABLE POLYPROPYLENE BLENDS AND
METHODS FOR THEIR PREPARATION
John G. Brandt, Qemmons; Joyce H. Dickerson, and William R.
Schmitt, both of Winston-Salem, all of N.C., assignors to RJ
Archer Inc., Winston-Salem, N.C.
Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,905
Int. Q.3 C08L 23/12: B29D 7/24: C08J 7/18: C08F 212/08
U.S. Q. 204—165 31 Qaims
1. A heat-sealable film consisting essentially of a corona
discharge treated, biaxially oriented film comprising a blend of
stereoregular polypropylene containing about 5% to about
25% by weight based on the total composition of a terpene-sty-
rene or substituted styrene copolymer consisting of about 85%
to about 25% terpene and about 15% to about 75% styrenic
monomer.
with chlorine gas in the presence of ultraviolet radiation.
4 394 236
MAGNETRON CATHODE SPUTTERING APPARATUS
Merrill G. Robinson, Ann Arbor, Mich., assignor to Shatter-
proof Glass Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Feb. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 348,804
Int. Q.^ C23C 15/00
U.S. Q. 204—192 R * Qaims
8. A method of sputtering thin films of a selected coating
material upon substantially planar substrates in which there is
provided a fixed elongated cathode member having a convex
surface, establishing in back of said surface a magnetic field
providing an erosion pattern on a target consisting of a contin-
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1119
uous foil of the material to be sputtered, drawing said continu-
ous foil across and in contact with said convex surface, and
elongated conductive element with an electrically con-
ductive adhesive;
immersing said element and said disk bonded thereto into a
hardenable synthetic resin to harden into a clump there-
around; and
machining said clump to turn the same into a cylindrical
sheath surrounding said element and said disk and expos-
ing a face of said disk by machining said clump flush with
said face.
passing beneath said foil target the substrates to receive the
coating material sputtered from said foil.
4 394 237
SPECTROSCOPIC MONITORING OF GAS-SOLID
PROCESSES
Vincent M. Donnelly, Berkeley Heights; Daniel L. Flamm,
Chatham Township, Morris County, and Robert F. Karlicek,
Jr., Kenilworth, all of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Labo-
ratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
I Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,468
I Int. Q.J C23C 15/00
U.S. Q. 204-192 E 14 Qaims
1. A process for fabricating devices comprising the steps of
introducing a gas into proximity to a material surface, inducing
a change in said material surface, spectroscopically monitoring
said gas and controlling said process in accordance with said
spectroscopic monitoring characterized in that the quantitative
concentration of a plurality of species in said gas is monitored
by inducing fluorescence from said plurality of species with a
light source external to said gas wherein at least one of said
species fluoresces through a spectroscopic fragmentation pro-
cess or multiple photon process, and wherein based on the
quantitative measurement of said fluorescence the conditions
of said fabrication process are adjusted to yield a desired result.
4 394 239
ELECTRO-CHEMICAL SENSOR FOR THE DETECTION
OF REDUCING GASES, IN PARTICULAR CARBON
MONOXIDE, HYDRAZINE AND HYDROGEN IN AIR
Dieter Kitzelmann, Bonn, and Jacques Deprez, Frechen, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,277
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sen 9
1980, 3033796 ^'
Int. Q.' GOIN 27/J^
U.S. Q. 204-414 4 cims
COtH^-E-.
C0,-2H'+2«
/D>«2H-.2e
-•HO
4,394 238
METHOD OF MAKING A MEASURING ELECTRODE
ASSEMBLY AND ELECTRODE MADE THEREBY
Jerzy Golimowski, Warsaw, Poland; Laszio Sipos, V. Gorica,
Yugoslavia, and Paul Valenta, Aachen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Kernforschungsanlage Julich GmbH, Julich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 136,932, Apr. 3, 1980, Pat. No. 4,302,314.
This application Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,325
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 7,
1979, 2914193
Int. a.i GOIN 27/30: HOIR 43/00
U.S. CI. 204-400 6 Qaims
1. In an electro-chemical sensor for the measurement of
carbon monoxide, hydrogen or hydrazine in ambient air. com-
prising a catalyst containing measuring electrode exposed to
ambient air and communicating through an aqueous acid elec-
trolyte with a non-polarizable counter electrode, the improve-
ment comprising:
(a) a body of an aqueous hygroscopic polymer gel in which
ionogenic substances are dissolved, the gel body having
sticky surfaces,
(b) the measuring electrode comprising a porous sheet-like
matrix, coated with catalyst particles,
(c) the matrix being firmly anchored at the surface of the
polymer gel in a self-supporting manner and the catalyst
particles being embedded with part of their surfaces in the
gel and with the remaining surface portions protruding
from the gel.
4 394 240
COMBINED SULFUR OXIDE/OXYGEN MEASURING
APPARATUS
Alfred R. Pebler, Penn Hills, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Mar. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 358,769
Int. Q.3 GOIN 27/58
U.S. Q. 204-412 4 Qaims
1- A multi-sensor gas measuring apparatus for generating
1. A method of making a measunng electrode assembly signals indicative of the partial pressure of oxygen and the
which compnses the steps: partial pressure of a selected anhydride, i.e., SOa-. NOjr. etc. of
of bonding a disk of electrode material to one end of an a monitored gas environment comprising
1120
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
first and second solid electrolyte electrochemical cells each
cell including an oxygen ion conductive solid electrolyte
element having a sensing electrode and a reference elec-
trode disposed on opposite surfaces thereof,
a third solid electrolyte electrochemical cell including a
solid electrolyte element containing oxy-anions of the
selected anhydride having a sensing electrode and a refer-
ence electrode disposed on opposite surfaces thereof, said
first, second and third solid electrolyte electrochemical
cells being combined to form an enclosure having a cavity
therein,
a reference composition of said selected anhydride and oxy-
gen being located within said cavity, said reference electrodes
of said first, second and third solid electrolyte electrochemical
cells being exposed to said reference composition,
said sensing electrode of said first solid electrolyte electro-
chemical cell being exposed to a gas environment of
aicwpwassw
OIIGEH
^KAStlKKIII
i 10 CMTROl
m awiTOiiiiic
— CIRCUITPI
^MUrODIBE
KtSUIEKH
known oxygen partial pressure, said first cell generating a
signal indicative of the oxygen partial pressure of the
reference composition,
said sensing electrodes of said second and third cells being
exposed to said monitored gas environment, said second
cell generating a signal indicative of the difference in
oxygen partial pressure between the monitored gas envi-
ronment and the reference composition, said third cell
generating a signal indicative of the difference between
the partial pressure of the combination of oxygen and the
selected anhydride in the monitored gas environment and
the partial pressure of the combination of oxygen and the
selected anhydride in the reference composition, and
circuit means connected to said first, second and third cells
and responding to the signals generated by providing an
indication of both the partial pressure of oxygen and the
partial pressure of the selected anhydride within said
monitored gas environment.
(a) racks supporting each workpiece in a generally vertical
plane,
(b) transport means for moving each rack along a path, a
portion of which path is in the plane of the workpiece so
supported in its rack,
(c) means defining a receptacle adapted to contain an elec-
trolytic solution through which solution said racks move
along said portion of said path,
(d) pressure manifold means at the bottom of said receptacle,
and comprising a conduit on the longitudinal centerline of
said receptacle,
(e) means for providing electrolyte to said manifold means
under pressure,
(0 a plurality of nozzle defining towers arranged in at least
two longitudinally extending rows, said towers projecting
upwardly from said manifold means and nozzles directed
toward the portion of said path of said workpieces in said
receptacle to spray solution on both workpiece surfaces as
they move between said towers, comprising upstanding
pipes the lower ends of which pipe communicate directly
with said conduit to define a space between said pipes for
receiving said racks, and rack guiding rails mounted to
said pipes for receiving at least the lower edge of said rack -
therebetween to guide the rack during movement along
said portion of said path between said nozzle defining
towers or pipes,
(g) a primary electrical power supply,
(h) means for connecting said racks to one terminal of said
electrical power source,
(i) means for supporting metal to be plated in said receptacle,
said metal support means connected to the other terminal
of said electrical power source, and
(j) said means for providing electrolyte to said pressure
manifold means including pumping means and return
manifold means in said receptacle for recirculating the
solution and to provide the desired pressure and fiow rate
of the solution at said nozzles in said towers.
4,394,242
CLAMP, TOOL, AND ELECTROLYSIS CELL ANODE
MOUNT
John F. Qark, Pittsburgh, Pa„ assignor to Adnovum AG, Horn,
Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 115,621, Jan. 28, 1980, Pat. No. 4,269,673.
This application Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,800
Int. a.3 C25C 3/10; C25D 17/04; B25B 13/58. 5/04
U.S. a. 204—243 R <» CI"™*
4,394,241
HIGH SPEED PLATING OF FLAT PLANAR
WORKPIECES
George R. Scanlon, Pine Meadow, Conn., assignor to Napco,
Inc., Terryville, Conn.
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,191
Int. a.3C25D 17/06. 17/28
U.S. a. 204—198 26 Qaims
1. Apparatus for electroplating generally flat planar work-
pieces which may have small openings onto one or both work-
piece surfaces, said apparatus comprising:
1. In a clamp including means for providing a backing
against which articles to be clamped can be placed, gate means
mounted for pivoting about an axis into and out of confronta-
tion with said backing means, said axis passing through said
gate means, gate engaging means for preventing further pivot-
ing of the gate means when the gate means is in confrontation
with the backing means, and means for forcing the gate means
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1121
toward the backing means at least when the gate means is in
confrontation with said backing means, at least the portion of
the gate means at said axis moving toward the backing means
during operation of the forcing means in forcing the gate
means toward the backing means, the means for forcing includ-
ing a bolt secured at one end in the backing means and extend-
ing along said axis, with the gate means pivoting on the bolt,
and a nut on the bolt end opposite to the end secured at the
backing means, any engagement of the nut with the gate means
being insufficient to pivot the gate means into and out of con-
frontation with said backing means, wherein the improvement
comprises the fact that the direction of pivoting of the gate
means away from the gate engaging means out of confronta-
tion with said backing means is the same as the rotational
direction of loosening of said nut and the direction of pivoting
of the gate means toward the gate engaging means into con-
frontation with said backing means is the same as the rotational
direction of tightening of said nut.
4. In an electrolysis cell having a superstructure (8), a clamp
as claimed in claim 1, the clamp being adjustably mounted on
the super structure for clamping as an article to be clamped, an
anode bar (17).
dized at least partially to metal oxide of partial oxidation in
structure thereof, the partial oxidation penetrating the whole
4 394 243
ELECTRODE FOR AN ELECTROCHEMICAL METAL
MACHINE PROCESS
Gerhard Hoffmann, Berglen-Steinach, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Stuttgart, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,742
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 22,
. 1979, 2938402
Int. a.3 C25B 11/03; B23P 1/02; C25F 7/00
U.S. CI. 204-284 9 claims
1. An electrode for an electrochemical metal-removing
process for a workpiece having an edge, characterized in that
the electrode is formed of a metal sheet which extends at right
angles to a direction of sinking of the electrode in the metal
removing process, the metal sheet is provided with perfora-
tions adapted to extend laterally beyond a line defined by said
edge to be processed so as to enable the production of end-
faced contours,
means disposed against the metal sheet on the side thereof
leading in the direction of sinking for insulating a surface
coextensive with said perforations to prevent electro-
chemical metal removal therefrom.
4 394 244
Dly^PHRAGMS FOR ALKALINE WATER
ELECTROLYSIS AND METHOD FOR PRODUCTION OF
THE SAME AS WELL AS UTILIZATION THEREOF
Jiri Dirisek, and Jiirgen Mergel, both of Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Kernforschungsanlage Jiilich Gesell-
schaft mit beschrankter Haftung, Jiilich, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,448
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 7,
1979, 2927566
Int. a.3 C25B 13/04
U.S. a. 204-295 12 Qaims
1. A diaphragm for alkaline water electrolysis and made of a
porous sinter material, comprising a porous sinter metal oxi-
"t**-,o
structure resulting in a sufficiently isolating but mechanically
consistent body.
4,394,245
SPUTTERING APPARATUS
Yoshio Homma; Sukeyoshi Tsunekawa, both of Hachioji; Hiro-
shi Morisaki, Yokohama, and Seiki Harada, Hachioji, all of
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,959
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 18, 1981, 56-21550
Int. Q.' C23C 15/00
U.S. Q. 204-298 11 Claims
1. A sputtering apparatus comprising at least one cathode
and at least one substrate electrode facing the cathode and
having an electrode surface plate, the improvement wherein
the electrode surface plate of said at least one substrate elec-
trode facing said cathode has at least a portion thereof that is
made of a soft magnetic material having an initial permeability
of at least 100.
4,394,246
ELECTROPHORESIS APPARATUS WITH FLOW
CO.NTROL
David W. Richman, Chesterfield, and Charles D. Walker, Ball-
win, both of Mo., assignors to McDonnell Douglas Corpora-
tion, Long Beach, Calif.
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,049
Int. a.' GOIN 27/26. 27/40
U.S. Q. 204-301 7 Claims
-60
U-SO
-AlHOOt
^<jl
1 *5__
30
20
62
pump'
ANODE
52
D
PUMP
1
1. In an apparatus for conducting a continuous free flow
electrophoresis separation procedure, the apparatus compris-
ing:
a rectilinear buffer filled separation chamber defined by two
elongate spaced apart parallel plates forming a front and
back to the chamber, two sides, an end comprising a
collection manifold having a plurality of spaced apart
collection tubes, an end comprising a buffer solution inlet
manifold assembly;
two buffer filled electrode chambers, each disposed adjacent
to one of the sides of the separation chamber in electrical
communication therewith; and
1122
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
at least one sample inlet port located at or near the inlet of
the chamber;
the improvement comprising means for controlling buffer
flow across the separation chamber in a direction substan-
tially parallel to an electrical field created between the
electrode chambers, the means comprising first and sec-
ond buffer flow paths, the first flow path connecting the
outlet of the first electrode chamber with the inlet of the
second electrode chamber, and the second flow path
connecting the outlet of the second electrode chamber
with the inlet of the first electrode chamber, the buffer
solution in each flow path being driven by separate pump
means.
4,394,247
LIQUEFACTION OF COALS USING RECYCLABLE
SUPERACID CATALYST
George A. Olah, 2252 Gloaming Way, Beverly Hills, Calif.
90210
Filed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,260
Int. a.3 ClOG 1/06
U.S. CI. 208—10 5 Qaims
1. A process for the liquefaction of coals or other predomi-
nantly hydrocarbonaceous materials by treatment thereof with
hydrogen gas under superatmospheric pressure of 25-150
atmospheres at temperatures of 50°-250° C. in the presence of
a superacidic system comprising anhydrous hydrogen fluoride
and boron trifluoride, present in a mole ratio of about 0.5 to 2
to 1.
4 394 248
COAL LIQUEFACTION PROCESS
John G. Gatsis, Des Plaines, III., assignor to UOP Inc., Des
Plaines, III.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,665
Int. C\? ClOG 7/06
U.S. a. 208—10 21 Qaims
1. A process for producing hydrogen-enriched hydrocarbo-
naceous products from coal which comprises:
(a) contacting said coal in a solvent extraction zone at sol-
vent extraction conditions with a solvent, hydrogen and a
residual oil containing asphaltenes and at least one finely
divided, unsupported metal sulfide; and
(b) recovering hydrogen-enriched hydrocarbonaceous prod-
ucts.
hydrodesulfurizing the feedstock, thereby obtaining a sub-
stantially sulfur-free hydrocarbon material;
separating the hydrocarbon material into a gaseous fraction
and a liquid fraction;
conducting the liquid fraction directly into a heater of a
catalytic dewaxing unit and subsequently into the cata-
lytic dewaxing unit, wherein it is contacted with a highly
siliceous zeolite ZSM-5 type porous crystalline material,
and conducting an effluent from the catalytic dewaxing
unit to a first heat exchanging means;
conducting the gasous fraction into the first heat exchanging
means, wherein the gaseous fraction is preheated by the
catalytic dewaxing unit effluent; and
conducting the thus-obtained preheated gaseous fraction
into the catalytic dewaxing unit.
15. In a catalytic process for dewaxing at least on petroleum
feedstock comprising contacting the petroleum feedstock with
a highly siliceous ZSM-5 type zeolite porous crystalline mate-
rial at a temperature of about 550° F. to about 1100° F. and at
a pressure of about 15 psig to about 3000 psig, the improvement
which comprises desulfurizing the petroleum feedstock prior
to the introduction thereof into the catalytic dewaxing process
so that the hydrocarbon effluent of the desulfurization step
contains less than about 3% by weight of sulfur;
separating the hydrocarbon effluent into a gaseous fraction
and a liquid fraction;
conducting the liquid fraction directly into a heater of a
catalytic dewaxing unit and subsequently into the cata-
lytic dewaxing unit, wherein it is contacted with a highly
siliceous zeolite ZSM-5 type porous crystalline material,
and conducting an effluent from the catalytic dewaxing
unit to a heat exchanging means;
conducting the gaseous fraction into the first heat exchang-
ing means, wherein the gaseous fraction is preheated by
the catalytic dewaxing unit effluent; and
conducting the thus-obtained preheated gaseous fraction
into the catalytic dewaxing unit.
4,394,250
DELAYED COKING PROCESS
Arnold L. Grossberg, Berkeley, Calif., assignor to Chevron
Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,338
Int. C\? ClOG 47/26
U.S. a. 208—108 * Claims
4,394,249
CATALYTIC DEWAXING PROCESS
Roderick C. Shen, Belle Mead, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,026
Int. a.3 ClOG 47/16
U.S. a. 208—89 27 Qaims
1. A process for dewaxing at least one petroleum feedstock
comprising: _
1. In a delayed coking process comprising heating a hydro-
carbon feedstock to cracking temperatures and thereafter
introducing the heated feedstock into a coking drum under
delayed coking conditions wherein the heated feedstock soaks
in the drum in its contained heat which is sufficient to convert
the feedstock to cracked vapors and coke, the improvement
comprising adding a cracking catalyst in an amount in the
range of about 0.1 to about 3% by weight based on the hydro-
carbon feedstock and hydrogen in an amount in the range of
about 50 to about 500 SCF per barrel of the hydrocarbon
feedstock to the feedstock thereby causing an increase in the
distillate yield from the process.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1123
' I 4,394,251
HYDROCARBON CONVERSION WTTH CRYSTALLINE
SILICATE PARTICLE HAVING AN
ALUMINUM-CONTAINING OUTER SHELL
Stephen J. Miller, San Francisco, Calif., assignor to Chevron
Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
J Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,496
Int. Q.J ClOG 47/16. 11/05. 35/095
—111 15 Qaims
1. A hydrocarbon conversion process, comprising contact-
ing, under hydrocarbon conversion conditions, a hydrocarbo-
naceous feedstock with a particle, comprising an inner portion
and an outer portion disposed as a shell around said inner
portion wherein said outer portion has the same crystal struc-
ture as said inner portion, said inner portion comprising an
intermediate pore size crystalline silicate having a
silica:alumina mole ratio greater than about 200:1, and said
outer portion having a silica:alumina mole ratio of less than
about 100:1 and wherein said particle is prepared by a process
comprising:
(1) initiating crystallization in a crystallization medium sub-
stantially free of aluminum to produce the intermediate pore
size crystalline silicate;
(2) adding a source of aluminum to said crystallization me-
dium; and
(3) crystallizing onto said crystalline silicate the isostructural
outer portion which comprises alumina.
4,394,252
METHOD OF REFORMING GASOLINE TO RAISE THE
OCTANE THEREOF UTILIZING LOW VALENCE TI, V
OR CR COMPOSITED WITH NON-OXIDIZING HIGH
SURFACE AREA SUPPORT
William K. T. Gleim, 1250 NW. 120th St., Seattle, Wash. 98125
I Filed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,447
' Int. CV ClOG 35/04. 35/06
U.S. Q. 208—134 6 Qaims
1. In a method of reforming a gasoline feed in the presence
of a reforming catalyst to raise the octane number thereof, the
improvement which comprises utilizing a reforming catalyst
comprising:
(a) a catalytic component selected from the^oup consisting
of titanium, vanadium and mixtures thereof, said catalytic
component being present in divalent form or in an admix-
ture of the divalent form and the metal, the ratio of the
catalytic component in divalent form to the catalytic
component present as the metal being at least 1:1; and
(b) a high surface area support for said catalytic component
which will not oxidize said catalytic component at reform-
ing conditions to a valence state higher than the divalent
valence state.
4,394,253
HYDROCARBONS HYDROPROCESSING WITH
, IMOGOLITE CATALYST
Robert A. Van Nordstrand, San Rafael, Calif., assignor to Chev-
ron Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
1 1 Filed Sep. 26, 1979, Ser. No. 78,867
I Int. a.^ ClOG 45/08
U.S. Q. 208—251 H 14 Claims
1. A process for hydrogen treating a hydrocarbon feed
which comprises contacting said feed, at hydrogen treating
conditions, with a catalyst comprising shaped catalytic bodies
including (1 ) dispersed rods of fibrous form imogolite and (2) at
least one inorganic oxide gel, said gel bonding said rods to-
gether in substantially random mutual orientation in said cata-
lytic bodies, at least 40% of the total pore volume in said
catalytic bodies being provided by pores with diameters be-
tween about 200 Angstrom units and 1,000 Angstrom units.
4,394,254
METHOD FOR SEPARATING STRAIGHT CHAIN
HYDROCARBONS USING ZEOLITES HAVING LARGE
CRYSTALS
Paul H. Lewis, Groves, and Gerald V. Nelson, Nederland, both
of Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 371,840
Int. Q.' ClOG 25/03
U.S. Q. 208—310 Z 23 Qaims
Oeoc'ivai.o" Ho'e
Regression Ltf»e Bounded by 95%
Confidence intef^ois
I
£<» roc SOO 900
1. A method for separating straight chain hydrocarbons
from a hydrocarbon fraction having straight chain hydrocar-
bons, nonstraight chain hydrocarbons and a sulfur compound
comprising the steps of contacting said hydrocarbon fraction
having more than about 800 parts per million by weight of total
sulfur including more than about 15 parts per million mercap-
tan with a 5A zeolite which selectively absorbs said straight
chain hydrocarbons to the substantial exclusion of said non-
straight chain hydrocarbons, said zeolite having crystals of an
average size larger than about 700 angstroms, said crystal size
being measured along one edge of the zeolite crystal; and then
desorbing said straight chain hydrocarbons from said zeolite.
4,394,255
ISOMERIZATION PROCESS
Semyon Kukes; Gerhard P. Nowack, and Marvin M. Johnson,
all of Bartlesville, Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum
Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Jul. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 395,940
Int. CI.' C07B 5/23
U.S. CI. 585—667 6 Claims
1. A process for the isomerization of an aliphatic mono-ole-
fin hydrocarbon feed to shift the interna! double bond therein
to produce a corresponding terminal olefin which comprises
subjecting said mono-olefin hydrocarbon under isomerization
conditions to the action of a catalyst comprising zirconium
phosphate and zirconium phosphonate wherein the catalyst
used is prepared from an aryl phosphonic acid and a compound
of zirconium.
4,394,256
APPARATUS FOR SEPARATING ABRASIVE BLASTING
MEDIA FROM DEBRIS
James R. Goff, Rte. 1, Box 247AB, Seminole, Okla. 74868
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 232,465, Feb. 9, 1981, Pat. No.
4,364,823. This application Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 330,042
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 21,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.' B07B 7/04
U.S. Q. 209—135 31 Qaims
1. An apparatus for separating debris from spent abrasive in
1124
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
an abrasive blasting apparatus in which the debris and spent
abrasive are recirculated from a blast zone at high speed along
a recirculation chamber comprising
means for receiving said debris and spent abrasive from said
recirculation chamber and allowing a quantity of said
debris and spent abrasive to collect thereby forming a pile
of said debris and spent abrasive with a face of said pile
exposed to incoming debris and spent abrasive from said
recirculation chamber; wherein said pile has an angle of
repose whereby additional incoming debris and spent
abrasive fall down said face to form a substantially unob-
structed, vertical, uniform curtain of falling debris and
spent abrasive;
hydrogen or a saturated aliphatic radical of 1 to 8 carbon
atoms, inclusive.
8. A process for collecting mineral values from an ore
wherein said process comprises mixing ground ore with water
to form an aqueous ore pulp, adding to said aqueous ore pulp
an effective amount of a frother, aerating said aqueous ore pulp
and thereafter recovering said mineral values, wherein the
frother is of the general structure:
X
I
R-S-[C1„-Z
Y
wherein R is taken from the group consisting of a saturated
aliphatic radical of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, inclusive, a phenyl
and an alkylaryl wherein the alkyl group consists of a saturated
aliphatic radical of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive; n is an
integer of 1 to 4, inclusive, X and Y are individually either
hydrogen or a saturated aliphatic radical of 1 to 8 carbon
atoms, inclusive; and Z is taken from the group consisting of
O
H
— C=N, — C— NH2 and — O— R '"
wherein R" and R'" are aliphatic radicals having 1 to 8 carbon
atoms, inclusive.
means for providing a stream of fluid through said recircula-
tion chamber;
means having a first opening below said receiving means for
drawing off a first portion of said stream of fluid from said
recirculation chamber;
wherein said drawing means has a second opening for the
passage therethrough of a second portion of said stream of
fluid not passing through said first opening; and
whereby said falling curtain of debris and spent abrasive is
washed by said stream of fiuid as it passes from said recir-
culation chamber to said drawing means to entrain debris
from said falling curtain in said stream of fluid.
4,394,257
FROTH FLOTATION PROCESS
Samuel S. Wang, Cheshire, and Michael J. Scanlon, Stratford,
both of Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 95,839, Nov. 19, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,574
Int. a.3 B03D 1/14
U.S. a. 209—166 14 Qaims
1. A process for collecting mineral values from a sulfide ore
wherein said process comprises mixing ground ore with water
to form an aqueous ore pulp, adding to said aqueous ore pulp
an effective amount of a frother, aerating said aqueous ore pulp
and thereafter recovering said mineral values, wherein the
frother is of the general structure:
X
I
R-W-[C]„-Z
Y
R— W— [C)„— C=N
Y
wherein R is taken from the group consisting of a saturated
aliphatic radical of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, inclusive, a phenyl
and an alkylaryl wherein the alkyl group consists of a saturated
aliphatic radical of 1 to 6 carbon atoms, inclusive, W is taken
from the group consisting of oxygen, imino and alkyl substi-
tuted imino wherein the alkyl radical consists of a saturated
aliphatic radical of 1 to 12 carbon atoms, inclusive, n is an
integer of 1 to 4, inclusive, and X and Y are individually either
4,394,258
FROTH FLOTATION APPARATUS WITH WATER
RECOVERY AND METHOD
Donald E. Zipperian, Tucson, Ariz., assignor to The Diester
Concentrator Co., Inc., Fort Wayne, Ind.
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 276,809
Int. C\? B03D 1/24
U.S. a. 209—170 31 Qaims
FCIS ^-^■^
1. Apparatus for separation of minerals from an aqueous
pulp containing a mixture of mineral and gangue particles by
froth flotation compising:
an upstanding flotation compartment adapted to contain a
relatively quiescent body of aqueous pulp,
feed means for introducing aqueous pulp into said flotation
compartment,
froth-collecting means disposed adjacent to the upper end of
said flotation compartment for collecting a float fraction
of said aqueous pulp, aeration means for applying aerated
water to said flotation compartment near the bottom
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1I2S
whereby bubbles of air are introduced throughout sub-
stantially the entire cross-section of said flotation com-
partment,
said aeration means including a constriction plate substan-
tially spanning said flotation compartment, said constric-
tion plate having a plurality of bubble-receiving apertures
spaced throughout the area thereof,
tailing-discharge means for discharging an aqueous non-float
fraction of unfloated particles of said aqueous pulp from
said flotation compartment, water-collecting means below
said constriction plate for receiving water from said aera-
tion means, means for inhibiting passage of said non-float
fraction from said flotation compartment to said water-
collecting means, and pump means for pumping water
from said water-collection means back to said aeration
means, whereby the water that is collected is recirculated
and aerated for application to said flotation compartment.
4,394,259
VACUUM PNEUMATIC CONVEYING APPARATUS AND
METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING FOOD PRODUCTS
John R. Benny, Seattle; Robert W. Buher, Kent, and Paul K.
Smith, Kirkland, all of Wash., assignors to TEMCO, Inc.,
Bellevue, Wash.
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,368
Int. C\? B03B 7/00; A22C 25/08
U.S. a. 209—250 20 Claims
1. A vacuum pneumatic conveying apparatus utilized to
convey food products, such as to convey fish from a fishing
boat to a fish tender or to a processing factory keeping the fish
from being injured via avoiding damaging contact with any of
this apparatus, comprising:
(a) a frame assembly of a horizontal base, a vertical support
high rise support on this base, and a separator support on
this vertical support;
(b) a combined assembly of an in line upper primary product
separator, and a lower secondary liquid separator
mounted on the frame assembly via the separator support
and the vertical high rise suppori at a substantial elevation
above the horizontal base, with this upper primary prod-
uct separator to separate the fish from the air, essentialy
being a chamber with an open bottom having inside a
downwardly directed internal conduit which extends
from its top outside entry downwardly and outwardly to
* its lower outside exit and this internal conduit has an
upwardly and sideways facing longitudinally grilled air
exit to allow the air to escape into this chamber of the
upper primary product separator, and with the secondary
liquid separator to separate liquid from air, essentially
being a chamber with an open top to match the open
bottom of the chamber of the upper primary product
separator, having: a funnel like central interior passage; a
higher circumferentially located air exit for air enroute toa
blower; and a lower centered gurry and liquid exit;
(c) a rotary positive displacement blower mounted on the
horizontal base of the frame assembly, and having a con-
duit connected from its inlet blow, to the higher circum-
. ferentially located air exit above of the secondary liquid
separator, and having its exit directing the exhaust air to a
silencer, and having a silencer to direct the exhaust air into
the atmosphere at a convenient location;
(d) a movable inlet depending conduit to receive and to
guideably fly fish from its point of inlet, having a nozzle,
which is moved about in a hold of a fishing boat, with fish
thereafter flying up through this inlet to the combined
assembly above of the in line upper primary product
separator, and the lower secondary liquid separtor, and
having at its top, an exit fastening assembly for joining this
movable inlet with the top outside entry of the inside
downwardly directed internal conduit positioned within
the chamber of the upper primary product separator;
(e) a movable outlet depending conduit to receive and to
guide fish leaving the lower outside exit above, of the
downwardly directed internal conduit within the chamber
of the upper primary product separator, with their mo-
mentum assuring their continuation of travel by gravity
downwardly to be collected and then discharged for
example on sorting conveyors of a fish processing factory,
having at its entry a fastener assembly for joining with the
lower outside exit of the downwardly directed internal
conduit, and having at its exit an easily manipulated self
sealing flexible discharge sleeve capable of holding back a
sufficient changing group of fish until their combmed
weight overcomes the barometric pressure head, to there-
after intermittently force open this otherwise self sealing
flexible discharge sleeve; and
(0 a smaller movable outlet depending conduit to receive
and to guide gurry and liquid leaving the combined assem-
bly of the in line upper primary product separator and the
lower secondary liquid separator, having a fastener assem-
bly for joining it to the lower secondary liquid separator,
which in turn has the lower centered gurry and liquid exit
to also receive the fastener assembly, and having a self
sealing flexible discharge sleeve capable of holding back a
sufficient temporarily collecting grouping of particles of
gurry and liquid, until their combined weight overcomes
the barometric pressure head, to thereafter intermittently
force open this otherwise self sealing flexible discharge
sleeve and the departing liquid and gurry is collected,
eventually to be disposed of as waste or a waste product.
4,394,260
CONTROL. DEVICE FOR A ROTARY
VALVE-CONTROLLED JIGGING MACHINE
Siegfried Heintges, Haltern; Werner Strauss, and Karl-Heinz
Weiffen, both of Bochum, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,873
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 15,
1980, 3038921
Int. CI.' B03B 5/24
U.S. a. 209—500 9 Qaims
1. Apparatus for controlling a rotary valve jigging machine
which has an air chamber disposed in a separating liquid below
1126
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19. 1983
a jigging screen and air is supplied to and exhausted from the
air chamber through inlet and outlet air lines, respectively,
comprising: sensing means in the air chamber for producing an
electrical signal corresponding to the stroke of the liquid pulsa-
tions; an outlet throttling valve in said outlet air line; and
control means connected between said sensing means and said
throttling valve for adjusting said throttling valve in response
to the electrical signal being outside predeterrtiined limits, said
control means comprising first and second means connected to
said sensing means and responsive to the magnitude of said
electrical signal to produce respective first and second signals
when said electrical signal transgresses respective predeter-
mined upper and lower threshold values, and electrical servo-
mechanism means connected between said first and second
means and said throttling valve for adjusting said throttling
valve in resfHJnse to said first and second signals.
4,394,261
SYSTEM FOR CONTROLLING CLARinCATION OF
BOILER FEED WATER AND THE LIKE
Henry D. Moser, Post Falls, Id., assignor to Texaco inc.. White
Plains, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,007
Int. a.' C02B 1/20
U.S. a. 210—96.1 2 Oaims
CHCMOU
UNTBtiTtO
WATER —
6 — ,n
jL
n
P%r
IF
'23
16
TUReiO( METER
second timing means for checking said turbidity at said first
predetermined intervals,
second circuit means for connecting said second timing
means to said first timing means for activating said second
timing means whenever said turbidity switch is closed,
and
third timing means for opening said second valve means at
said third predetermined regular intervals.
4,394,262
SYSTEM FOR MINIMIZING BACKWASH WATER
USAGE ON SELF-CLEANING STRAINERS
Ronald G. Bukowski, and Timothy L. Johnson, both of Erie, Pa.,
assignors to Zurn Industries, Inc., Erie, Pa.
Filed Aug. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 406,580
Int. a.3 BOID 29/38
U.S. CI. 210—103 8 Qaims
1. In combination with a system for controlling clarification
of boiler feed water and the like by precipitation, said system
comprising
a settling tank having an inlet and an outlet for said water,
means for adding a chemical to said inlet water to cause said
precipitation,
a drain line and first valve means for drawing off precipitate
from the bottom of said tank,
a small sampling line connected into said tank at a predeter-
mined level above the bottom of said tank for continuously
sampling water from said tank,
means for continuously measuring turbidity of said sampled
water, comprising
a switch having a closed position if said turbidity exceeds a
predetermined minimum and an open position if not, and
means for backwashing said precipitate draw-off, comprising
a second valve means for controlling flow through a con-
necting line between said inlet water and said drain line
while said first valve means is closed,
timing and control means for checking said turbidity at first
predetermined intervals and for activating said first valve
means for second predetermined intervals if said turbidity
exceeds a predetermined minimum and for activating said
second valve means with disabling of said first valve means
at third predetermined regular intervals,
said timing and control means comprising
first timing means for opening said first valve means for said
second predetermined intervals,
first circuit means for connecting said turbidity switch to
said first timing means for activating said first timing
means only when said turbidity exceeds said predeter-
mined minimum
1. In an automatic backwashing strainer system including a
backwashing strainer with a backwash outlet; a backwash
valve for controlling the fiow of backwash water through the
backwash outlet; an actuator operating the backwash valve,
and control means for automatically activating the actuation,
the improvement in said control means comprising:
(a) a first timer which periodically produces a first control
signal for a variable duration and with a variable cycle
time;
(b) a second timer which periodically produces a second
control signal for a variable duration and with a variable
cycle time, wherein the duration of the second control
signal is shorter than the duration of the first control signal
and the cycle time of the second control signal is longer
than the cycle time of the first control signal;
(c) a differential pressure switch which produces a differen-
tial pressure signal whenever the pressure drop across the
strainer exceeds a predetermined upper limit and main-
tains said differential pressure signal until said pressure
drop reaches a predetermined lower limit;
(d) a latch responsive to the differential pressure signal
which produces a third control signal while the differen-
tial pressure switch is activated and which maintains the
third control signal for a variable time delay after the
pressure drop across the strainer reaches the predeter-
mined lower limit;
(e) means for varying the duration and cycle time of the first
and second control signals;
(f) means for varying the time delay of the third control
signal; and
(g) means for selecting, in response to operating conditions
of the backwashing strainer system, one or more of said
control signals to activate the actuator, such that the
July 19,
983
CHEMICAL
1127
strainer is cleaned with a minimum usage of backwash
water.
4 394 263
CONNECTING DEVICE FOR PNEUMATIC AND/OR
HYDRAULIC CIRCUITS IN COLUMN
I CHROMATOGRAPHY
Werner Dosch, Mainz, and Heinz Wagner, Mainz-Marienbord,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Carlo Erba Stru-
mentazione S.p.A., Rodano, Italy
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,548
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 4,
1980, 3045654
Int. CI.' BOID 15/08
U.S. CI. 210-198.2 15 Claims
1. A connecting device for use in pneumatic and/or hydrau-
lic circuits, to be used in separation techniques, as in capillary
column chromatography, for systems of partition and commu-
tation of a fiuid flow carrying a sample to be analyzed, in
which chemically inert gaskets and fittings are used, compris-
ing: a pneumatic or hydraulic distribution panel (SI) which
comprises at least a mechanically stable, thick wall glass or
fused silica body (Kl, K2, K3), having a capillary channel (1)
therein, and further having a series of side fittings in the form
of transverse holes (2), to define a multiple T-fitting, said trans-
verse holes (2) housing capillary tubes (Q) adapted for convey-
ing gas or liquid, and said capillary tubes (Q) being constructed
such that their ends are easily removable, pneumatically sealed
and substantially free from dead volumes; said holes (2) having
an inlet in the thick-wall body (Kl, K2, K3) which is flattened
to provide a bearing surface (3) for a gasket, and said thick-
wall body (Kl, K2, K3) carrying holding couplings (F), each
of which can be fixed in correspondence with a hole (2), and
each coupling (F) having a set screw (E) adapted for sealingly
securing the end of a tube (Q) inserted in a transverse hole (2)
through a gasket (L) pressing on said bearing surface (3).
4,394,264
MAGNETIC LIQUID HLTER
Werner Schimion, Hilchenbach, and Josef Herbrand, Briihl,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to SMS Schloemann-
Siemag Aktiengesellschaft, Diisseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,759
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 17,
1980, 3035003
Int CI.3 BOID 35/06: B03C 1/06: C02F 1/48
U.S. CI. 210—222 26 Qaims
25. A machine for filtering particles, in particular magneti-
cally attractable particles, from a liquid, said machine compris-
ing:
a housing having a vessel;
a weir in said vessel subdividing same into an elongated
treatment compartment having a predetermined compart-
ment length and an outlet compartment, said housing
being formed in said treatment compartment with a sump;
means for introducing a liquid to be cleaned into said treat-
ment compartment and for withdrawing liquid frpm said
outlet compartment;
a carriage displaceable longitudinally on said vessel above
said treatment compartment and suspending a vertical
carriage frame in said treatment compartment;
an array of horizontally extending spaced magneljc bars
carried on said carriage frame in said treatment compart-
ment, said bars each having a bar length measured parallel
to said treatment compartment that is substantially less
than said compartment length;
respective scrapers fixed on said housing above said sump
and engaging said bars;
respective annular nozzles fixed on said scrapers surround-
ing and directed at the respective bars;
means for feeding a fluid under pressure to said nozzles to
direct annular fluid streams at the respective bars and
thereby loosen particles from the bars adjacent the scrap-
ers;
means for displacing said carriage with said bars longitudi-
nally relative to said housing and scrapers through a dis-
tance equal generally to said bar length and thereby scrap-
ing particles off said bars, whereby the particles freed
from said bars drop in said treatment compartment; and
means for withdrawing liquid from said sump.
26. A machine for filtering particles, in particular magneti-
cally attractable particles, from a liquid, said machine compris-
ing:
a housing having a vessel;
a weir in said vessel subdividing same into an elongated
treatment compartment having a predetermined compart-
ment length and an outlet compartment, said housing
being formed in said treatment compartment with a sump;
means for introducing a liquid to be cleaned into said treat-
ment compartment and for withdrawing liquid from said
outlet compartment;
a carriage displaceable longitudinally on said vessel above
said treatment compartment and suspending a vertical
carriage frame in said treatment compartment, said frame
including horizontally spaced end members each having a
plurality of vertically and horizontally spaced holes;
an array of horizontally extending spaced magnetic bars
carried on said carriage frame in said treatment compart-
ment, said bars each having a bar length measured parallel
to said treatment compartment that is substantially less
than said compartment length, said bars further having
respective ends received in the respective holes of the end
members, said ends of said bars being each formed with a
radially outwardly open groove, each of said end mem-
bers being provided with a slidable element engageable in
the respective grooves;
respective scrapers fixed on said housing above said sump
and engaging said bars and including nozzles directed at
the respective bars;
means for feeding air under pressure to said nozzles.;
means for displacing said carriage with said bars longitudi-
nally relative to said housing and scrapers through a dis-
tance equal generally to said bar length and thereby scrap-
ing particles off said bars, whereby the particles scraped
off said bars drop in said treatment compartment; and
means for withdrawing liquid from said sump.
1128
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,265
VESSEL IN PARTICULAR SUCTION DREDGER
PROVIDED WITH MEANS FOR REMOVING OIL FROM
A WATER SURFACE
Nicolaas J. van Drimmelen, Aiblasserdam; James P. Barneveld
Binkhuysen, Papendrecht; Johan van Renssen, Maassluis, and
Pieter Verboom, Aiblasserdam, all of Netherlands, assignors
to IHC Holland N.V., Papendrecht, Netherlands
Filed Dec. 20, 1979, Ser. No. 105,530
Int. a.' E02B 15/04
U.S. a. 210—242.3 18 Qaims
a varying radial clearance between said Filter unit and said
sidewall around their respective circumferences; and
(c) a screw closure for said open top, said closure having a
first central opening through which to communicate with
said niter unit and a second vent opening radially spaced
from said central opening.
1. In a suction dredger comprising a vessel having a hold for
the storage of dredged material, means for emptying said hold,
a suction conduit with a suction head, a suction-pressure pump
in the suction conduit having a pressure conduit debouching
within the hold, said vessel having its own power and control
means, collecting means positionable at the side of the vessel
and adapted to intersect the water surface and having means
for sucking up oil floating upon the water surface and collected
by the collecting means, said vessel having tanks for the stor-
age of the sucked up oil-water mixture; the improvement in
which said tanks are comprised by the open hold of the vessel
normally serving for the storage of dredged material and the
means for sucking up oil have said pressure conduit debouch-
ing into said hold, each said collecting means comprising a
sweeping arm connected to a connection arm which is con-
nected swingably about at least a horizontal axis to a carrier
attached to the edge of the deck, said connection arm extend-
ing rearwardly from said carrier and having its rear end carry-
ing the sweeping arm via a universal joint.
4,394,267
DIFFUSER ASSEMBLY
Johan C. F. C. Richter, Oslo, Norway, and Ole J. Richter,
Karlstad, Sweden, assignors to Kamyr, Inc., Glens Falls, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,407
Int. a.' BOID 33/00
U.S. CI. 210—331
4,394,266
PRESSURE HLTER ADAPTER AND CONTAINMENT
VESSEL
Ravinder C. Mehra, Fairport, and Raj K. Aggarwal, Penfield,
both of N.Y., assignors to Sybron Corporation, Rochester,
N.Y.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,435
Int. a.' BOID 35/14
U.S. a. 210—244 2 Qaims
'.(, '6 22
1. A containment vessel for receiving a vacuum filter unit
comprising:
(a) a hollow cylindrical body having a closed bottom por-
tion, a cylindrical side wall upstanding from said bottom
portion, and an open top;
(b) said bottom portion including a raised fioor defining a
cylindrical well extending below the plane of said fioor
for accommodating the base of the filter unit, said well
being located off center relative to said bottom providing
12 Claims
_].
1
\ ^y/jn^ *
^2o —
■^^^br~
■J
''\ \
J*—
-j«r -M^
/^-*' ^•o —
1. In an elongated upright hollow vessel which includes side
and bottom walls, the improvement comprising: a plurality of
withdrawal screens extending substantially parallel to the
vessel direction of elongation, and spaced from each other in
directions perpendicular to the vessel direction of elongation;
non-rotatable conduit means for supporting said withdrawal
screens and for providing for passage of fluid from said with-
drawal screens to an area remote from said withdrawal screens
and exterior of said vessel; means for only reciprocating said
conduit means with attach withdrawal screens up and down in
a direction substantially coincident with the direction of elon-
gation of the vessel; and means for introducing fluent material
to be treated into said vessel and withdrawing treated fluent
material therefrom; and
said means for only reciprocating consisting essentially of a
linear actuator located below the bottom wall of said
vessel within the cross-sectional area of the vessel, for
avoiding boiling problems as a result of liquor suck-up
during start-up; and wherein said conduit means for pro-
viding passage of fluid from said withdrawal screens in-
cludes a central conduit substantially concentric with said
linear actuator and reciprocal with said linear actuator,
said central conduit operatively passing through the bot-
tom wall of said vessel.
July 19, N83
CHEMICAL
1129
4,394,268
CONVERSION OF PLUG FLOW AND COMPLETE MIX
AERATION BASINS TO BARRIER OXIDATION
DITCHES
John H. Reid, 7 Stansbury Ct., Fredericksburg, Va. 22401
Division of Ser. No. 28,383, Apr. 9, 1979, which is a division of
Ser. No. 957,432, Nov. 3, 1978, which is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 848,705, Nov. 4, 1977, which is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 649,995, Jan. 19, 1976, abandoned. This application
Sep. 14, 1979, Ser. No. 75,412
Int. a.J C02F 3/20
U.S. a. 210—628 25 Qaims
ing of (a) monobutyl phosphate, (b) dibutyl phosphate, (c)
mono-2-ethylhexyl phosphate, (d) di-2-ethylhexyI phosphate,
and (e) a complex of plutonium, uranium, or a fission product
thereof with monobutyl phosphate, dibutyl phosphate, mono-
2-ethylhexyl phosphate, or di-2-ethylhexyl phosphate, com-
prising contacting said solution with silica gel having alkali
metal ions absorbed thereon.
1. A method for converting a reactor basin of an activated
sludge waste water treatment process, said reactor basin in-
cluding at least one aerating device, to a barrier oxidation
ditch, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) removing said at least one aerating device;
(b) forming an endless channel within said reactor basin, said
endless channel having substantially parallel sides and a
floor; and
(c) placing a single barriered circulator/aerator within said
endless channel, said barriered circulator/aerator com-
prising:
(1) barrier means for separating mixed liquor within said
endless channel into upstream liquor within an intake
channel and downstream liquor within a discharge
channel, and providing hydraulic support to said down-
stream liquor;
(2) a flow passage through said barrier means for provid-
ing fluid communication between said intake channel
and said discharge channel;
(3) at least one pump means disposed within said fluid
communication passage for propelling said upstream
liquor through said passage from said intake channel to
said discharge channel, around said endless channel
back to said intake channel, and
(4) at least one aeration means disposed within said fluid
communication passage for dispersing an oxygen-con-
taining gas into said propelled upstream liquor to form
freshly aerated mixed liquor.
4,394,269
METHOD FOR CLEANING SOLUTION USED IN
NUCLEAR FUEL REPROCESSING
Othar K. Tallent, Oak Ridge; Karen E. Dodson, Knoxville, and
James C. Mailen, Oak Ridge, all of Tenn., assignors to The
United States of America as represented by the United States
Department of Energy, Washington, D.C.
I Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,831
I Int. a.3 G21F 9/12
U.S. a. 210—690 3 Qaims
1. A method of processing a solution containing (1) a hydro-
carbon diluent, (2) a phosphate selected from the group con-
sisting of tri-n-butyl phosphate and tri-2-ethylhexyl phosphate,
and (3) a degradation product selected from the group consist-
4,394,270
APPARATUS FOR THE CHEMICAL CONDITIONING OF
SLUDGES
Achim Hartmann, Pulheim, and Dieter Schinkitz, I^everkuseii,
both of Fed, Rep. of Germany, assignors to Kronos Titan-
G.m.b.H., Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,441
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 13,
1980, 3030558
Int. CI.' C02F 11/14
U.S. CI. 210-726 24 Qaims
^
-^u-ir
B
^
.^^
1. An apparatus for the conditioning of sludges comprising:
a. first and second vertically arranged cylindrical vessels,
each vessel having a sealed bottom and a sealed top;
b. an overflow pipe connecting the first and second cylindri-
cal vessels installed tangentially to the upper portions of
the first and second cylindrical vessels;
c. a sludge feed pipe connected to a source of sludge, said
sludge feed pipe being installed in a direction tangentially
opposite the overflow pipe above the bottom of the first
vessel;
d. a feed tube connected to a source of a first conditioning
material, said feed tube being installed tangentially into
the sludge feed pipe;
e. two further feed tubes being respectively connected to
sources of a second and a third treating material, said two
further feed tubes being installed tangentially into the
overflow pipe; and
f. a discharge pipe installed in a direction tangentially oppo-
site the overflow pipe above the bottom of the second
vessel, said apparatus being further constructed and ar-
ranged whereby the sludge entering the sludge feed pipe is
mixed with the first conditioning material, spirals upward
through the first vessel, passes through the overflow pipe
wherein it is mixed with the second and third conditioning
material, passes into the second vessel, spirals downward
thereby further mixing the sludge and the conditioning
materials and is discharged through the discharge pipe.
6. A process for the conditioning of sludge comprising:
a. feeding sludge to the lower part of a first vertically ar-
ranged cylindrical vessel having a sealed bottom and a
sealed top;
b. treating the sludge by the addition of a flocculant;
c. mixing the sludge and flocculant in an intensive manner by
conveying the sludge and flocculant in a spiral flow up-
ward through the first vessel to form a sludge mixture;
d. transferring the sludge mixture to the upper part of a
second vertically arranged cylindrical vessel having a
sealed bottom and a sealed top;
e. adjusting the pH of the sludge mixture by the addition of
a fluid neutralizing agent;
f. mixing the sludge mixture and neutralizing agent in an
intensive manner by conveying the sludge mixture and
neutralizing agent in a spiral flow downward through said
1130
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
second vessel to form a homogeneous conditioned sludge;
and
g. recovering the conditioned sludge.
4,394,271
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR HLTRATION OF
MOLTEN METAL
Daniel E. Groteke, 1228 Ridge Qiff Rd., Cincinnati, Ohio 45215
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,829
Int. a.^ C22B 9/02
U.S. a. 210—773 18 Qaims
1. A liquid metal filter apparatus for purifying a metal bath,
comprising:
a crucible having a rim and a bottom;
a portion of said crucible being a porous ceramic material
having an open cell structure characterized by a plurality
of interconnected pores, said ceramic material serving as a
filter;
a shock resistant ring attached to said rim;
a brace rigidly attached to said ring; and
a bracket rigidly positioned external to the molten metal
bath and said brace being attached to said bracket for
rigidly positioning said crucible with respect to the molten
metal bath.
15. A method for filtration of liquid metal from a molten
bath comprising:
providing a crucible with a rim and a ring attached thereto,
said ring being more shock resistant than said crucible,
said crucible having a bottom with a passage therethrough
which is fitted with a porous filter;
submerging said filter into said liquid metal while maintain-
ing said rim above the surface of said liquid metal;
rigidly positioning said crucible with respect to the molten
metal bath by means of a brace rigidly attached to said
ring and to a bracket external to said liquid metal bath;
allowing liquid metal to pass through said filter to fill said
crucible; and
extracting said liquid metal from said crucible.
4,394,272
LIQUID CLARIHER AND METHOD
Herbert R. Damerau, Farmington Hills, Mich., assignor to
Pecor Corporation, Taylor, Mich.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,214
Int. a.^ BOID 29/i»
U.S. a. 210—779 17 Qaims
1. A liquid clarifier comprising, in combination:
a settling tank;
a clean-liquid tank;
a filter between the tanks through which liquid flows from
the settling to the clean-liquid tank;
a flight conveyor in the settling tank having a forwarding
run arranged to scrape the bottom of the settling tank and
move sludge to a discharge chute and a return run ar-
ranged adjacent the filter; and
means for selectively positioning the conveyor return run
either close to the filter to scrape a filter cake formed
thereon or position the return run in spaced non-scraping
relation.
17. The method of clarifying a liquid comprising:
delivering the liquid to a settling tank;
holding the liquid in the tank to allow contaminates to settle
therefrom;
removing sludge from the tank by arranging a flight con-
veyor so that a forwarding run scrapes the bottom of the
tank;
moving liquid in the settling tank through a filter into a clean
tank; and
shifting the return run of the flight conveyor into and out of
scraping relation with the filter in accordance with the
clogged condition thereof.
4,394,273
DEFOAMERS FOR AQUEOUS LIQUIDS CONTAINING
SOLUBLE ZINC SALTS
Michael H. Hoff, Houston, Tex., assignor to NL Industries,
Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,350
Int. Q\? C09K 7/02; E21B 4i/00: BOID 19/04
U.S. a. 252—8.55 R 9 Qaims
1. A defoaming composition comprising a mixture of 2,6,8-
trimethyl-4-nonanone and the triethoxylated derivative of
2,6,8-trimethyl-4-nonanol wherein the volume ratio of 2,6,8-
trimethyl-4-nonanone to the triethoxylated derivative of 2,6,8-
trimethyl-4-nonanol is in the range from about 9:1 to about 1:9.
4,394,274
Patent Not Issued For This Number
8 Claims
4,394,275
COMPOSITE MATERIAL FOR SLIDING SURFACE
BEARINGS
Wolfgang Bickle, Reilingen; Rolf Funke, Bad Schonborn, and
Rolf Pfoh, Rauenberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Karl Schmidt GMBH, Neckarsulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,394
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 19,
1980, 3027409
Int. a.3 ClOM 5/18
U.S. a. 252— 12
5
4
-I
2
1. A composite material for a sliding surface bearing com-
prising a supporting shell of steel, which is covered by a bear-
ing metal layer comprising sintered porous bronze having a
porosity of 25 to 45%, the voids of which are filled with a
fluorocarbon-lead mixture comprising 30 to 60% by weight
polyvinylidene fluoride and 20 to 50% by weight lead, said
bearing metal layer in turn covered by an anti-friction layer
comprising 30 to 60% by weight polyvinylidene fluoride and
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1131
20 to 50% by weight lead, said anti-friction layer having pock-
ets or grooves therein containing a lubricant.
4,394,276
METHOD FOR IMPROVING FUEL ECONOMY OF
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES USING
SULFUR-CONTAINING ALKANEDIOLS
Vernon R. Small, Jr., Rodeo, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,630
Int. a.3 ClOM l/i8, 1/20
U.S. a. 252-32.7 E 14 Claims
1. A lubricating oil composition comprising a major propor-
tion of an oil of lubricating viscosity and a minor effective
amount of a sulfur-containing alkane diol fricton-reducing
additive of the formula
R-S-(CH2);„-CH-(CH2)„-CH2
OH OH
wherein R is alkyl containing from 5 to 30 carbon atoms, m is
1 or 2 and n is 0 or 1.
4,394,277
METHOD FOR IMPROVING FUEL ECONOMY OF
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES USING BORATED
SULFUR-CONTAINING 1,2-ALKANE DIOLS
Vernon R. Small, Jr., Rodeo, Calif., assignor to Chevron Re-
search Company, San Francisco, Calif.
I Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,631
Int. a.3 ClOM 1/54. 1/38
U.S. a. 252-32.7 E 19 Claims
1. A borated sulfur-containing 1,2-alkane diol of the formula
R— S— (CH2)m— CH— CH2
I I
O O
\ /
B
I
OH
wherein R is alkyl containing 5 to 30 carbon atoms and m is 1
or 2.
4,394,278
ifillCriON REDUCING ADDITIVES AND
COMPOSITIONS THEREOF
Andrew G. Horodysky, Cherry Hill, and Joan M. Kaminski,
Clementon, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Oil Corporation,
New Yprk, N.Y.
I Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,105
Int. aj ClOM 1/54. 5/22: C07F 5/04
U.S. a. 252-46.3 19 Qaims
1. A reaction product produced by (I) reacting a hydrolyzed
imidazoline with a mercaptan and an aldehyde, followed by (2)
reacting the product of (I) with a boron compound.
8. A lubricant or liquid hydrocarbon fuel composition com-
prising a major proportion of a lubricant or fuel and an antifric-
tion or antioxidant amount of a product produced by (1) react-
ing a hydrolyzed imidazoline with a mercaptan and an alde-
hyde, followed by (2) reacting the product of (1) with a boron
compound.
4,394,279
ANTIOXIDANT COMBINATIONS OF SULFUR
CONTAINING MOLYBDENUM COMPLEXES AND
AROMATIC AMINE COMPOUNDS FOR LUBRICATING
OILS
Louis deVries, Greenbrae, and John M. King, San Rafael, both
of Calif., assignors to Chevron Research Company, San Fran-
cisco, Calif.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,914
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 25,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. aj ClOM 1/20. 1/32. 1/38. 1/54
U.S. a. 252-46.4 17 Qaims
1. A lubricating oil additive comprising a combination of
(a) an oil soluble sulfur containing molybdenum complex
prepared by (1) reacting an acidic molybdenum com-
pound and a basic nitrogen compound selected from the
group consisting of a succinimide, carboxylic acid amide,
Mannich base, phosphonamide, thiophosphonamide.
phosphoramide, dispersant viscosity index improvers, or
mixtures thereof to form a molybdenum complex wherein
from 0.01 to 2 atoms of molybdenum are present per basic
nitrogen atom, and (2) reacting said complex with carbon
disulfide in an amount to provide 0. 1 to 4 atoms of sulfur
per atom of molybdenum, and
(b) an oil soluble aromatic amine compound or mixtures
thereof, wherein the aromatic amine compound of compo-
nent (b) is present in an amount of from 0.02 to 10 parts by
weight per part by weight of the sulfur containing molyb-
denum complex of component (a).
4,394,280
ION CONDUCTIVE MIXED CRYSTAL
Ulrich von Alpen, Schlossborn; Reinhard Brautigam, Hofheim,
and Antony Oliapuram, Frankfurt, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Varta Batterie A.G., Hanover, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,364
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 11,
1981, 3123099
Int. a.3 HOIG 9/02
U.S. q. 252-62.2 2 Qaims
1. A mixed crystal for use as the ion conductive solid electro-
lyte in galvanic elements formed of the components Na20,
Zr02, P2O5 and Si02, wherein the composition is expressed by
the general formula
Na
1 + axZT2 + 2 j;t - ax&'xP} - xO 1 2 |;t,
a being a constant with a numerical value between 0.8 and 0.9
and X being a variable parameter with numerical values of 1.8
to 2.3.
4,394,281
COMPOSITION FOR USE IN A MAGNETICALLY
FLUIDIZED BED
Ronald E. Rosensweig, Summit, N.J., assignor to Exxon Re-
search and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 218,087, Dec. 19, 1980, Pat. No.
4,368,131, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 943,384,
Sep. 18, 1978, abandoned. This application Sep. 22, 1982, Ser.
No. 421,041
Int. aj BOIJ 21/04. 35/02
U.S. a. 252—62.55 5 Qaims
1. As a composition of matter, a particulate material which
can be oriented within, and formed into a magnetically stabi-
lized fluidized bed to provide high magnetization at a low
applied field which comprises particles of geometrically elon-
gate shape which have a major axis at least 1.2 times the length
of the minor axis, the particles being of average diameter
(minor axis) ranging from about 10 ^m to about 4000 /im and
contain a nonferromagnetic component, composited with a
plurality of elongate ferromagnetic components, the ferromag-
1132
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
netic components being multidomain, having dimensions of at
least 1 ^m in all directions, elongated in two directions, and
having a length idiameter (L/D) ratio of at least 2 and not more
than 313, the nonferromagnetic component being comprised of
alumina within which said ferromagnetic components are
dispersed as inclusions within the interior of the composite
particles, and aligned with the major axis of said particles the
ferromagnetic components being oriented with their long
dimensions essentially parallel, the ferromagnetic components
constituting at least 0.5 percent, but not more than
7r/2(L/D+ 1), of the total volume of each particle, where L/D
is the average ratio of the longest dimension of a ferromagnetic
inclsuion relative to the shortest dimension, and, in said mag-
netically stabilized fluidized bed, the particles can rotate, or
turn to line up said ferromagnetic components essentially par-
allel to the direction of the field, and wherein a catalytically
effective amount of a catalytically active metal is dispersed on
the surface of the composite, and the composite particles are
catalytically active.
propylene glycol mixed with propylene glycol monostearate
and water wherein said ice release composition is applied to
4,394,282
COMPOSITION FOR USE IN A MAGNETICALLY
FLUIDIZED BED
Robert L. Seiver, Baton Rouge, La., assignor to Exxon Research
and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 218,088, Dec. 19, 1980, Pat. No.
4,368,132, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 943,552,
Sep. 18, 1978, abandoned. This application Sep. 22, 1982, Ser.
No. 421,046
Int. a.3 BOIJ 21/00. 23/00. 35/02
U.S. a. 252—62.55 4 Qaims
1. As a composition of matter, particulate material which
can be oriented within, and formed into a magnetically stabi-
lized fluidized bed to provide an effective demagnetization
coefficient of from about 0.0027 to about 0.174, which com-
prises particles containing a non-ferromagnetic refractory,
porous inorganic oxide component composited with a plurality
of elongate ferromagnetic components, each ferromagnetic
component being multidomain, having dimensions of at least 1
^m in all directions, elongated in two directions, and having a
length:diameter (L/D) ratio of at least 2 but not more than 313,
said ferromagnetic components being present in the composite
particles as inclusions within a matrix formed by said nonferro-
magnetic component, and oriented in such a way that there is
a preferred direction in each particle such that all the ferro-
magnetic components in said particle have a long dimension
essentially parallel with said preferred direction and constitut-
ing at least 0.5%, but not more than 7r/2(L/D+ 1), of the total
volume of each particle, where |-/D is the average ratio of the
longest dimension of the ferromagnetic components relative to
the shortest dimension, and, in said magnetically stabilized
fluidized bed, the particles can rotate, or turn to line up said
preferred direction parallel to the direction of the field such
that essentially all of the ferromagnetic components have a
long dimension essentially parallel to the direction of the field,
and wherein a catalytically effective amount of a catalytically
active metal is disjsersed on the surface of the composite parti-
cles, and the composite particles are catalytically active.
said substrate from a pressurized sealed container which con-
tains said ice release composition and a propellant.
4,394,284
STABILIZED METHYLCHLOROFORM COMPOSITION
Alvetta Pryor, Houston, Tex., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 234,279, Feb. 3, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 169,864,
Jul. 17, 1980, abandoned. This application Aug. 2, 1982, Ser. No.
403,%1
Int. a.5 C23G 7/52; CUD 5/02
U.S. a. 252—153 3 Qaims
1. A stabilizer composition for 1,1,1-trichloroethane wherein
the stabilizer consists essentially of 1.5 to 4 vol. % dioxane,
0.75 to 2 vol. % butylene oxide and 0. 1 to 1.0 vol. % 3-butyn-l-
ol based on the total volume of stabilizer and trichloroethane.
3. A stabilized 1,1,1-trichloroethane solvent employed in a
vapor degreasing process which consists essentially of 2.0 to
3.0% dioxane, 0.75% butylene oxide, 0.5% 3-butyn-l-ol, 1.5%
of ethyl or isopropyl nitrate and the remainder trichloroethane
all based on the total volume of solvent plus inhibitors.
4,394,283
STABLE ICE RELEASE AGENT
Lorenzo Spratt, P.O. Box 41138, Dallas, Tex. 75241
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,524
Int. a.J C09K 3/18
U.S. a. 252—70 5 Qaims
1. In a pressurized container which is provided with a spray
valve, an ice release composition consisting of propylene gly-
col mixed with propylene glycol monostearate and water and
a propellant.
3. A method for inhibiting the bonding of ice precipitates to
a substrate comprising the step of applying directly to the
substrate a layer of an ice release composition consisting of
4,394,285
PRINS REACTION PRODUCTS OF DIISOAMYLENE,
DERIVATIVES THEREOF, ORGANOLEPTIC USES
THEREOF AND PROCESSES FOR PREPARING SAME
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach, N.J., assignor to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 267,850, May 28, 1981, Pat. No. 4,359,412.
This application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,575
Int. a.3 CUD 3/50 9/44
U.S. a. 252—174.11 1 Claim
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
perfumed article which is a solid or liquid anionic, cationic,
nonionic or zwitterionic detergent comprising the step of
adding to a solid or liquid anionic, cationic, nonionic or zwit-
terionic detergent base an aroma augmenting or enhancing
quantity of at least one compound defined according to the
structure:
V
o— z
wherein one of the dashed lines is a carbon-carbon double
bond and each of the other of the dashed lines is a carbon-car-
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1133
bon single bond; wherein the wavy line: •-^-^is a carbon-car-
bon single bond or no bond at all; wherein Z represents hydro-
gen, — CH2— , or C2-C4 acyl; with the proviso that when the
wavy lines^^-^^N^is no bond at all, Z represents hydrogen or
C2-C4 acyl and when the wavy line:— -*-**• is a carbon-carbon
single bond, then Z represents — CH2— .
crystalline sesquioxide but including amorphous forms
thereof; and mixtures of same;
said composition having an average particle size range on
the order of between about i and about 50 microns;
II 4,394,286
PARTIALLY HYDROLYZED, DMT PROCESS RESIDUE,
AND USEFUL PROPYLENE OXIDE DERIVATIVE
THEREOF
William H. Millick, III, Wilmington, N.C., assignor to Her-
cofina, Wilmington, N.C.
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,503
Int. a.3 C08G 18/48; C09K 3/00; C07C 69/76; C08F 6/00
U.S. a. 252—182 9 Claims
1. As a composition of matter, partially hydrolyzed, DMT
process residue, characterized by an Acid No. of about
150-375 mg. KOH/g.
4. As a composition of matter, a mixture of partially hydro-
lyzed, DMT process residue characterized by an Acid No. of
about 150-375 mg. KOH/g, and a glycol containing 4 or more
carbon atoms.
8. As a composition of matter, a mixture consisting essen-
tially of the propylene oxide reaction product of partially
hydrolyzed, DMT process residue, which residue is character-
ized by an Acid No. of about 150-375 mg. KOH/g., and dipro-
pylene glycol up to about 20% of the mixture.
4,394,287
INCORPORATION OF HNELY DIVIDED ADDITIVES
AT THE SURFACE OF MICROCAPSULE WALLS
Joseph A. Scarpelli, Dayton, Ohio, assignor to Eurand America,
Inc., Dayton, Ohio
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,919
Int. a.^ BOIJ 13/02
U.S. a. 64—4.32 6 Claims
1. A method for preparing en masse, in an aqueous manufac-
turing vehicle, microcapsules with a substantially water-insolu-
ble core and containing incorporated at their surface under a
thin polymer film a substantially water-insoluble finely divided
additive which comprises the steps of:
(a) producing an aqueous suspension of microcapsules con-
taining a substantially water-insoluble core material and
having as at least one wall material component an anionic
hydrophilic polymeric colloid which produces a solid
wall around the core,
(b) then adding substantially water-insoluble finely divided
additive under stirring to produce a fine dispersion, and
(c) adding cationic hydrophilic polymeric colloid solution
without further addition of anionic hydrophilic colloid to
cause the colloid to envelop the additive and deposit it on
the capsule wall under a thin film.
" 4,394,288
ACTIVATED AMMONIUM NITRATE PLASTIC FOAM
BLOWING AGENT
Sambasiva R. Allada, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 251,618, Apr. 6, 1981, abandoned. This
application Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 351,849
Int. a.3 C09K 3/00
U.S. a. 252—350 4 Qaims
1. A blowing agent system for foaming expandable resinous
thermoplastic material masses, comprising an intimate, gener-
ally "fluffy" and finely divided powder composition of:
(a) ammonium nitrate; and
(b) up to about 10 parts per hundred by weight, based on
total composition weight, of a chromium compound se-
lected from the group consisting of: inorganic and organic
salts of chromium; oxides of chromium excepting the
CATAlTiC ACri\/iTY OF CHROfi^lUM:
EFFECT OF VALEVCE 4/VE> MOLECULAR
WEIGHT
1^120
|ioo
1^80
60
^40
15;
20
Formate -
ficetatt
Fiuoride
DiChromatt
(Cu.K)-
Chronate.
(m^)
Chromate (Co)
Oxalatt
I 'Chionde
*£ulfate
pActltjiacttonate
fC>>/ortdt(II)
Dtchrowate
''OndefSIi
I
4^uifatefKXr) ,„,
, 0 Oinmui-m fW
I • Chromium iW
• Chromium IITI
Cataljjsf. 5 Part) jaer
h/undred bij u/t fpph)
0 10 20 30 10 50 60
Wt % Chromium en tht Cata/ifSt
(c) up to about 4 percent by weight, based on total composi-
tion weight of a surfactant or soap additament.
4,394,289
CONTINUOUS FOAM GENERATING SYSTEM
Lamar W. Brown, 1185 Qearview Dr., Ringgold, Ga. 30736, and
James E. Bartenfield, 1104 W. Pine Dr., Dalton, Ga. 30720
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,336
Int. Cl.^ BOIF 3/04. 5/06
U.S. CI. 252—359 E 3 Qaims
M
-\
♦
1. Apparatus for producing foam continuously, said appara-
tus comprising:
a body member defining a foam generating chamber, said
body member having an inlet in communication with said
foam generating chamber and an outlet in communication
with said foam generating chamber at a point remote from
said inlet, said inlet and outlet being in an imaginary sub-
stantially non-horizontal plane;
means for introducing a foamable liquid into said inlet;
means for introducing a gas into said inlet simultaneously
with said foamable liquid;
turbulator means substantially filling said foam generating
chamber for foaming, mixing and homogenizing said
foamable liquid and gas;
first baffle means disposed within said body member and
extending from said outlet toward said inlet, said first
baffle means defining a first zone within said foam gener-
ating chamber;
second baffle means disposed within said body member and
disposed about said first bafile means, said second baffle
1134
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
means defining a second zone within said foam generating
chamber between said first baffle means and said second
baffle means;
said body member defining a third zone within said foam
generating chamber between said body member and said
second baffle means;
said third zone communicating with said inlet and with said
second zone at one end of said second baffle means; and
said second zone communicating with said first zone at the
other end of said second baffle means, said second zone
not being communicable with said third zone at said other
end of said second baffle means and said first zone commu-
nicating with said outlet.
4,394,290
REGENERATION OF SUPPORTED CATALYSTS
CONTAINING PALLADIUM AND/OR PLATINUM AND
TELLURIUM
Rolf Schnabel, Schifferstadt; Hans-Martin Weitz, Bad Dur-
kheim, and Rolf Fischer, Heidelberg, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Ludwigshafen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,503
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 23,
1981, 3102087
Int. a.3 BOIJ 2im: C07C 69/16, 67/055
U.S. a. 252—412 10 aaims
(a) a metal dihalide wherein the metal is selected from
Groups IIA and IIB of the Periodic Table, and
(b) a transition metal compound wherein the transition metal
is selected from the group consisting of Groups IVB and
VB transition metals and the transition metal is bonded to
at least one atom selected from the group consisting of
oxygen, nitrogen, and sulfur, and said oxygen, nitrogen,
and sulfur atoms are in turn bonded to a carbon atom of an
organic radical are (I) reacted to produce a first catalyst
component, and (2) said first catalyst component is re-
acted with at least one organoaluminum precipitating
agent selected from compounds of the general formula
AIR„X3_„ wherein each R is individually selected from
saturated and unsaturated hydrocarbyl radicals containing
1 to 20 carbon atoms petjadical, X is a halogen, and n is
any number such that 1 ^ n ^ 2, and then (3) the product of
that reaction is reacted with at least one halogen-contain-
ing compound of Groups IV A and VA capable of adding
halogen to the product of step (c).
1. A process for regenerating a supported catalyst for acy-
loxylations, which catalyst contains palladium or platinum or
mixtures thereof as well as tellurium, with or without copper,
the copper content A being from 0 to 2, where A is the number
of gram atoms of copper per gram atom of the palladium or
platinum or mixtures thereof, which process comprises:
impregnating the catalyst to be regenerated with a copper
solution in such an amount that the regenerated catalyst
has a copper content B=A + C, where A has the above
meaning and C is a number from 0.5 to 6;
drying the impregnated catalyst at from 50° to 200° C;
then treating the catalyst with a reducing agent at from 100°
to 500° C; and
finally heating the catalyst at from 400° to 900° C.
9. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the reducing
agent is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, hy-
drazine, methanol and formaldehyde.
10. A process as claimed in claim 1, wherein the final heating
step at 400°-900° C. is carried out for a period of about 15
minutes to 4 hours.
4,394,292
CATALYSTS FOR THE POLYMERIZATION OF
OLEHNS
Yasuharu Yamada, Osaka, and Kiyoshi Kawai, Toyonaka, both
of Japan, assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited,
Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 138,148, Apr. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4,347,157.
This application Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,451
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1979, 54-51641;
Jan. 28, 1980, 55-9200
Int. C1.3 C08F 4/02. 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 22 Qaims
1. A solid catalyst component for olefin polymerization
prepared by a method consisting essentially of reacting an
organo-magnesium compound represented by the formula,
R'MgX or R*2Mg
wherein R^ and R^ are each an alkyl, aryl, aralkyi or alkenyl
group having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, and X is a chlorine, bro-
mine or iodine atom, in solution, with an alkoxy phosphorus
compound of the formula.
4,394,291
POLYOLEHN POLYMERIZATION PROCESS AND
CATALYST
Gil R. Hawley, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,533
Int. d? C08F 4/64
MS. a. 252—429 B 35 Qaims
1. A catalyst for the polymerization of alpha olefins compris-
ing the product resulting when reactants comprising
R^rfP(OR*)eX/
wherein R^ and R* are each a hydrocarbon group having 1 to
20 carbon atoms, X is a halogen atom, and d, e, and f are
numbers satisfying the equations at the same time,
0^d<e, 0<eg3, 0^f<3, and d-(-e + f=3
to produce a solid product which is a catalyst carrier, and
supjMjrting a titanium compound and/or a vanadium com-
pound on said solid product.
4,394,293
CATALYST FOR THE PHOTOLYTIC PRODUCHON OF
HYDROGEN FROM WATER
Michael Gratzel, and John Kiwi, both of Vaud, Switzerland,
assignors to Engelhard Corporation, Iselin, N.J.
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,673
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 8, 1979,
7931250; Switzerland, Jul. 8, 1980, 8022338
Int. C\? BOIJ 31/02: C08K 3/08
U.S. a. 252—430 12 Claims
1. A stabilized catalyst for promoting electron transfer to
water protons for mediating evolution of hydrogen gas by
photolysis comprising an active catalytic reducing amount of
Noble metal particles in finely divided form and a water per-
meable protective agent adsorptive to said metal particles and
being polyvinyl alcohol.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
4 394 294
MEMBRANE CATALYST FOR HYDROGENATION OF
ORGANIC COMPOUNDS AND METHOD FOR
1 1 PREPARING SAME
Vladimir M. Gryaznov, Lomonosovsky prospekt 14, kv. 504;
Viktor S. Smimov, Kutuzovsky prospekt 26, kv. 555; Valentin
M. Vdovin, Leninsky prospekt 23, kv. 90; Margarita M. Er-
milova, ulitsa Cherkizovskaya 10, korpus 2, kv. 103, all of
Moscow; Liya D. Gogua, ulitsa Arakishvili, 7, kv. 7, Tbilisi;
Nina A. Pritula, ulitsa 3-ya Frunzenskaya, 14, kv. 87, and
Galina K. Fedorova, ulitsa Pyatnitskaya, 39, kv. 6, both of
Moscow:, all of U.S.S.R.
I Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,074
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., Jan. 20, 1977, 2451417
Int. CV BOIJ 31/08. 31/06
U.S. a. 252-430 II Qaims
1. A membrane catalyst for hydrogenation of organic com-
pounds comprising a porous metal substrate selected from the
group consisting of porous stainless steel, porous copper and
porous nickel, having thereon a vulcanized film comprising a
polyorganosiloxane polymer and a heterogenized palladium
complex of the formula
Me Me
I I
Z— Si— O— Si— T
I I
0 O
1 I
Z— Si— O— Si— Z
I I
Me Me
-continued
1135
(H)
R O-
Me
I
•SiO-
I
T
I
■SiO-
I
(HI)
-R" or
(IV)
Si02
R
I
■O— Si— R— D
I
R
PdL.
wherein
R = alkyl, alkoxy or chlorine
R' = — C6H4— or — (CH2)„— and n= 1-10
D = PR"2 wherein R" = alkyl or phenyl; N R "2 wherein
R'" = alkyl or C5H4N
L=— CL, Br or OCOCH3.
4,394,295
COORDINATION COMPLEXES AS
POLYESTERIFICATION CATALYSTS
Kurt Weinberg, Upper Saddle River, N.J., and Gordon C. John-
son, Armonk, N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation,
Danbury, Conn.
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,293
1 1 Int. a.3 C08L 67/02
U.S. a. 2512-431 C 17 Qaims
1. A polyesterification catalyst for the manufacture of solid
fiber-forming polyesters or copolyester of dicarboxylic acid
compounds and aliphatic glycols comprising a coordination
complex of (A) and (B), wherein:
(A) is a metal alkoxy halide selected from the group consist-
ing of I
M(OR)aXft
wherein m is at least one of titanium, zinc, germanium, tin,
lead, antimony and; R is alkyl, aryl, alkylaryl, arylalkyl,
haloalkyl having from 1 to 20 carbon atoms; a and b are
integers having a value of from I to 3; the sum of (a + b) is
equal to or less than the integer 4; x is at least one of F, CI,
Br or 1; with the proviso that when M is antimony a is an
integer having a value of from 1 to 4 and the sum (a + b) is
equal to or less than 5;
-Me jx LMe J^
QCH2CH2SiR3»»
wherein T is CH2=CX— or (R*0)2PCH2CHX-
II
O
X is hydrogen or methyl and is methyl only when m is one;
R* is alkyl or haloalkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
R** is is methyl, ethyl, butyl, acetoxy, methoxy, ethoxy or
butoxy;
R is methyl, ethyl, butyl, methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, or tri-
methylsiloxy;
R' is methyl, methoxy. ethoxy, butoxy or trimethylsiloxy;
R" is methoxy, ethoxy, butoxy, trimethylsiloxy or vinyl-
dimethylsiloxy;
R'" is methyl, ethyl, butyl or trimethylsilyl;
Me is methyl;
Z is methyl or T; .
Q is an NCCH2-, NH2CH2NHCH2-, NC-HS- or
HSCH2CH2S— group;
n is an integer having a value of from 2 to 5;
m is an integer having a value of zero or one;
X is an integer having a value of from I to 100; and
y is an integer having a value of from 1 to 100;
wherein the mole ratio of A:B in said coordination complex is
from 2:1 to 1:10.
4 394 296
BORON TRIFLUORIDE-WATER-SILICA CATALYST
Ajay M. Madgavkar, Irvine, Calif., and Harold E. Swift, Gib-
sonia. Pa., assignors to Gulf Research & Development Com-
pany, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 104,415, Dec. 17, 1979, Pat. No.
4,308,414. This application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,456
Int. a.3 BOIJ 21/02. 37/00
U.S. CI. 252-433 7 Claims
1. A three-component hydrocarbon conversion catalyst
comprising particulate silica having boron trifiuoride and
water adsorbed thereon, said catalyst obtainable by the adsorp-
tion on said particulate silica of water and boron trifiuoride
from a liquid hydrocarbon in the presence of an atmosphere
comprising boron trifiuoride.
(B) is a si
of:
icon compound selected from the group consisting
R
I
T-(CJ0OC„H2„);„-Si-R"
I
R'
(I)
4,394,297
ZINC TITANATE CATALYST
John H. Kolts, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 267,230, May 26, 1981, Pat. No. 4,368,344.
This application Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,628
Int. a.3 BOIJ 27/14. 23/08; HOIB 1/06
U.S. a. 252-437 6 Claims
1. A catalyst composition comprising zinc, titanium and a
promoter at least one member of which is selected from the
group consisting of aluminum, phosphorus, indium, and tin
wherein said zinc and titanium are present in said catalyst
composition in the form of zinc titanate which is prepared by
calcining a mixture of zinc oxide and titanium dioxide in the
1136
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
presence of free oxygen at a temperature in the range of about
650° C. to about 1050° C.
4,394,298
HYDROGENATION CATALYST
Gerhard P. Nowack; Marvin M. Johnson, and Donald C. Tabler,
all of Bartlesville, Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum
Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 111,053, Jan. 10, 1980, abandoned. This
application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,350
Int. a.' BOIJ 23/46. 23/74. 27/24
U.S. a. 252—438 * Claim
1. A hydrogenation catalyst comprising a suitable support
and ruthenium (III) hexacyanocobaltate.
4,394,299
PALLADIUM-RHODIUM CATALYST FOR
PURIFICATION OF CRUDE TEREPHTHALIC ACID
Imre Puskas, Glen Ellyn, and David E. James, Batavia, both of
III., assignors to Standard Oil Company (Indiana), Chicago,
III.
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,338
Int. a.' BOIJ 23/46. 23/44: C07C 51/42
U.S. CI. 252—447 22 Claims
11. A catalyst composition for purification of terephthalic
acid which comprises crystallites of palladium and rhodium
adsorbed on a porous activated carbon support material, said
support material having a surface area of at least 600 m^ /g
wherein said catalyst composition is prepared by contacting
said support with (a) an aqueous solution of an amine and a
palladium salt in the presence of an organic carboxylic acid
wherein concentration of said amine is sufficient to solubilize
said palladium salt and mole ratio of said acid to said amine is
at least 0.75 and with (b) an aqueous solution of a rhodium
compound and an alkali metal nitrite wherein penetration of
said palladium and rhodium crystallites into said porous sup-
port is within the range of from about 70 to 150 micrometers of
the surface of said support.
12. The composition of claim 11 wherein said amine is se-
lected from the group consisting of ammonia, pyridine, the
picolines and the lutidines.
14. The composition of claim 11 wherein said acid has from
2 to 5 carbon atoms and is selected from the group consisting
of acetic acid, propionic acid, butyric acid, isobutyric acid,
n-valeric acid and mixtures thereof.
4,394,301
CATALYTIC HYDROCRACKING,
HYDRODESULFURIZATION, AND/OR
HYDRODENITROGENATION OF ORGANIC
COMPOUNDS EMPLOYING PROMOTED ZINC
TITANATE AND A ZEOLITE AS THE CATALYTIC
AGENT
Lloyd E. Gardner, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 145,639, May 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,324,647.
This application Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,148
Int. a.' BOIJ 29/10, 29/16
U.S. a. 252—455 Z 1* Qaims
1. A catalyst composition comprising zeolite, zinc, titanium,
and at least one promoter selected from the group consisting of
vanadium, chromium, cobalt, nickel, molybdenum, tungsten,
rhenium, platinum, palladium, rhodium, ruthenium, and com-
pounds thereof
4,394,302
HYDRODESULFURIZATION CATALYST ON
LITHIUM-CONTAINING SUPPORT AND METHOD FOR
ITS PREPARATION
J. Wayne Miller, Yorba Linda, and Howard D. Simpson, Irvine,
both of Calif., assignors to Union Oil Company of California,
Brea, Calif.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,526
Int. a.' BOIJ 21/04. 23/04. 23/24
U.S. a. 252—465 3* Claims
1. A method for preparing a catalyst which method com-
prises incorporating a porous refractory oxide with a lithium
component, calcining the lithium-incorporated porous refrac-
tory oxide to form a lithium component-containing composi-
tion having a substantially increased average pore diameter
than that of said porous refractory oxide and incorporating a
Group VIE metal component with said composition.
4 394 300
ZEOLITE CATALYST MODIFIED WITH GROUP IVB
METAL
Chin C. Chu, North Brunswick, and Warren W. Kaeding, West-
field, both of N.J., assignors to Mobil Gil Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 137,881, Apr. 7, 1980, Pat. No.
4,278,827. This application Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,820
Int. CI.' BOIJ 29/28
U.S. a. 252—455 Z H Claims
1. A catalyst composition comprising:
a crystalline zeolite material characterized by a constraint
index of within the approximate range of 1 to 12 and a
silica to alumina mole ratio of at least 12;
said zeolite further comprising at least 0.25 weight percent
of one or more Group IVB metals incorporated into said
zeolite in the form of a Group IVB metal oxide and at least
0.25 weight percent of phosphorus incorporated into said
zeolite in the form of an oxide of phosphorus.
2. The composition of claim 1 wherein said Group IVB
metal is germanium.
4. The composition of claim 1 wherein said Group IVB
metal is tin.
6. The composition of claim 1 wherein said Group IVB
metal is lead.
4,394,303
LARGE PORE SHAPED HYDROPROCESSING
CATALYSTS
Kirk R. Gibson, El Cerrito, Calif., assignor to Chevron Research
Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,856
Int. CV BOIJ 23/84. 35/02
U.S. CI. 252—470 ♦ Claims
1. A catalyst for hydroprocessing heavy hydrocarbonaceous
feedstocks that contain at least 10 ppm nickel plus vanadium
comprising:
a porous shaped catalyst particle comprising an elongated
extrudate having an asymmetric quadralobe cross-section
characterized by having the centers of the four compo-
nent circles define two substantially equilateral triangles
joined on a base, having substantially all of the points
within said particle within 0.02 inch from the nearest
external surface of said particle, said particle having an
average pore diameter within the range of 120 Angstroms
to 700 Angstroms, said particle having between 4 and 15
weight percent of a catalytic metal from Group VIB and
between 0 and 10 weight percent of a catalytic metal from
Group VIII; where said weight percents are based on the
catalytic metals content of the total particle weight, calcu-
lated as reduced metal, such that when contacted with a
heavy hydrocarbonaceous feedstock containing at least 10
ppm nickel plus vanadium under hydroprocessing condi-
tions substantial metal penetration occurs to a depth of at
least 0.012 inch from the nearest surface of said support.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1137
4 394 304
ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTING POLYMER BLENDS
Gary E. Wnek, Natick, Mass., assignor to Massachusetts Insti-
tute of Technology, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,143
Int. CV C08F 8/22, 255/02, 257/02; HOIB 1/12
U.S. CI. 252-520 „ q^^^
1. A method of forming a conductive polymer comprising a
blend of at least one processable polymer, polyacetylene and a
dopant, the method comprising:
(a) impregnating at least one processable polymer with a
Ziegler-Natta catalyst;
(b) exposing said impregnated polymer to acetylene gas,
whereby substantially linear molecules of polyacetylene
are formed within a matrix of the processable polymer;
and
(c) introducing a dopant into the polyacetylene, whereby a
conductive blend is formed.
4,394,306
BROMINE CONTAINING nRE RETARDANT
COMPOSITIONS OF MATTER
Manny Ravey, Haifa, Israel, assignor to IMI (Tami) Institute
for Research & Development Ltd., Haifa, Israel
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,476
Oaims priority, application Israel, May 23, 1980, 60149
Int. a.3 C09K 3/28
U.S. a. 252-609 15 a^„,
4,394,305
ALPHA-OXYALKYLENE AMINE OXIDE COMPOUNDS
USEFUL IN DETERGENTS
Eugene P. Gosselink, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The Procter
& Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,533
InL CV CUD 3/30. 3/32; C07C 103/127. 69/22
U.S. CI. 252-528 35 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
O
R'CHCOX
(0R2)„N
O
(R^)2
or R'C//CN(R'»)2
(0R2)„N
(R^)2
I. A composition of matter of the formula
(BrCH2)mC(CH2CKCH20),H]4.m
wherein m-1.6 to 2.3 and x=0.75 to 1.10, obtained by the
hydroxymethylation 2-bromomethyl-2-hydroxymethy!-pro-
pane-l,3-diol, 2,2-bis(bromomethyI)propane-l,3-diol, 2-
bromomethyl-2-hydroxymethy]-l,3-dibromopropane, and
mixtures thereof, containing an average of 1.7 to 2.5 hydroxyl
groups per molecule, with formaldehyde or its polymeric
forms, said compositions of matter being useful as active or
additive fire retardants for polymeric materials.
II. Fire retardant compositions comprising compounds,
according to claim 1, together with phosphorus-containing
reactive fire retardant component.
wherein R' is hydrogen or a C1-C20 hydrocarbyl group; R2 is
a C2-C6 alkylene group; n is from 1 to about 20; each R^ is a
C1-C20 hydrocarbyl group or a C2-C3 alkylene oxide group
containing from 1 to about 10 alkylene oxide units; each R"* is
hydrogen, a C1-C20 hydrocarbyl group or a C2-C3 alkylene
oxide group containing from 1 to about 10 alkylene oxide units;
and X is hydrogen, a water-soluble metal, ammonium or substi-
tuted ammonium cation, a Ci-Cs hydrocarbyl group or a
C2-C3 alkylene oxide group containing from 1 to about 10
alkylene oxide units; provided that the total number of carbon
atoms in hydrocarbyl groups at the R', R^, and X or R'»substit-
uents is from about 8 to about 40.
24. A detergent composition comprising from about 0.005%
to about 99% by weight of an amine oxide surfactant of the
formula:
4 394 307
TRACK RECORDINGPLASTIC COMPOSITIONS
Gregory Tarle, 2665 Kenney Dr., San Pablo, Calif. 94806
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,691
Int. a.' C08K 5/11
U.S. a. 524-776 15 Qaims
1. An improved nuclear particle track recording solid plastic
composition consisting essentially of about 98% by weight of
polymeric di-ethylene glycol bis allyl carbonate and an effec-
tive amount to reduce roughening caused by etchants up to
about 2% by weight of a alkyl phthalic acid ester admixed
therein.
.Jo.
(0R2)„N
'R^)2
or
O
O
r'c//cn(r*)2
(0R2)„N
o
(R^)2
wherein R' is hydrogen or a C1-C20 hydrocarbyl group; R2 is
a C2-C6 alkylene group; n is from 1 to about 20; each RMs a
C1-C20 hydrocarbyl group or a C2-C3 alkylene oxide group
containing from 1 to about 10 alkylene oxide units; each R^ is
hydrogen, a C1-C20 hydrocarbyl group or a C2-C3 alkylene
oxide group containing from 1 to about 10 alkylene oxide units;
and X is hydrogen, a water-soluble metal, ammonium or substi-
tuted aiuinonium ^^v^n, a Ci-Cg hydrocarbyl group or a
C2-C3 alkylene oxide group containing from 1 to about 10
alkylene oxide units; provided that the total number of carbon
atoms in hydrocarbyl groups at the R', R^, and X or R'^substit-
uents is from about 8 to about 40.
4,394,308
METHOD OF PRODUCING
a-L-ASPARTYL-L-PHENYLALANINEMETHYLESTERS
Prathivadibhayankaram S. Sampathkumar, Parsippany, and
Basant K. Dwivedi, Randolph, both of N.J., assignors to
Chimicasa GmbH, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 150,881, May 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,693
Int. a.' C07C 103/52
U.S. a. 260—112.5 R 4 Qaims
1. A method of preparing a-L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine
alkylester in high yield without substantial isomer formation of
the alkylester, which method comprises:
(a) reacting L-aspartic acid with an alcohol, to provide an
esterified aspartate compound with the beta-carboxyl
group blocked by the ester group, and having a free alpha-
carboxyl group;
(b) reacting the amino group of the esterified aspartate com-
pound with a carbobenzoxy halide, to provide an N-car-
bobenzoxyl, esterified, L-aspartate compound with a free
alpha-carboxyl group;
(c) reacting the N-carbobenzoxyl, esterified, aspartate com-
pound in a coupling reaction with an alkylester of L-
phenylalanine, by reaction of the free amino group of the
1138
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
L-phenylalanine with the free alpha-carboxyl group of the
aspartate compound, to provide a coupled aspartate-
phenylalanine compound;
(d) hydrogenating the coupled compound, to reintroduce
into the molecule the free amino group and one of the free
carboxyl groups of the aspartate portion of the coupled
compound; and
(e) recovering the L-aspartyl-L-phenylalanine alkylester in a
high yield, without substantial racemization of the a-L-
aspartyl-L-phenylalanine alkylester.
4,394,309
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
NN-DIMETHYL-N-(2-BROMO-4-METHYLPHENYL)-
TRIAZENE
Qaus Stolzer, Wuppertal, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 30, 1981,^r. No. 249,247
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 12,
1980, 3014122
Int. a.5 C07C 113/00. 113/04, 103/27, 87/60
U.S. a. 260—140 ' Claims
1. A process for the preparation of N,N-dimethyl-N'-(2-
bromo-4-methyl-phenyl)-triazene of the formula
4,394 310
l-AMINO-2-SULFO-(4'-PYRAZOLONYL-PHENYL)-
AMINOANTHRAQUINONE COMPOUNDS AND A
PROCESS FOR THEIR PREPARATION
Hermann Fuchs, Konigstein, and Klaus Filzinger, Hofheim am
Taunus, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst
Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Continuation of Ser. No. 75,534, Sep. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,779
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 15,
1978, 2840120 .
Int. a.3 C09B 62/45. 62/503. 62/505: D06P 1/384
U.S. a. 260— 162 5 Qaims
1. A water-soluble anthraquinone-azo compound in the form
of a free acid having the formula
O NH2
^/^N=N-
N(CH3)2
consisting essentially of
(a) reacting N-acetyl-p-toluidine of the formula
CH3— / \-NH-CO-
CH3
COOR
wherein each Ri is sulfo or when one Ri is hydrogen the other
Ri is sulfo; R is hydrogen or lower alkyl; D is unsubstituted
benzene or unsubstituted naphthalene or benzene or naphtha-
lene which is substituted by 1 to 3 substituents selected from
the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogen,
nitro and sulfo and is substituted by the a fibre-reactive group
Z which is the group — SO2— CH2— CH2— Zi or — SO-
2— CH=CH2, in which Z\ is hydroxy or an inorganic or or-
ganic radical which can be eliminated to form — SO-
2— CH=CH2 and n is 1 or 2.
4. A process for the preparation of a compound defined in
claim 1, which comprises diazotizing a compound of the for-
mula
with bromine at a temperature between about 0° and 100°
C, to give the intermediate product of the formula
CH3— / V-NH-CO-CH3
Br
(b) reacting the intermediate product with hydrochloric acid
by either
(i) adding a dilute solution of aqueous hydrochloric acid
to the intermediate product in its reaction solution and
heating the mixture to a temperature between about 50°
and 120° C, or
(ii) precipitating the intermediate product from its reac-
tion solution by mixing with water and filtering off, and
without purification or drying heating the precipitate
with dilute aqueous hydrochloric acid to a temperature
between about 50° and 120° C, thereby to form a solu-
tion of 2-bromo-4-methylaniline hydrochloride,
(c) reacting the resulting aqueous solution with an alkali
metal nitrite at a temperature between about -20° and
+ 30° C, and
(d) reacting the product with dimethylamine at a tempera-
ture between about 0° and 50° C.
NH2
NH2
in which Ri is defined as in claim 1, by means of an equivalent
quantity of sodium nitrite, in the presence of a mineral acid, to
give the diazo compound of the formula
,(-)
in which Ri is defined as in claim 1. and coupling the diazo-
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1139
nium salt at a pH in the range of from 3.5 to 5.5 with an acetyl- ylic acid in an inert solvent at from about - 10° C. to room
succinic acid ester of a lower alkanol, adjusting then the pH to temperature.
a value within the range from 9 to 13 to form the pyrazolone
compound of the formula
SO3H
""a:
OH
Ri
wherein X and Y are selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen, halogen and trifluoromethyl, which consists essen-
tially of the reaction of a compound of the formula
NHOH
4,394,312
PROCESS FOR PREPARING RIFAMYCIN
DERIVATIVES
Moon H. Han, and Baik L. Seong, both of Seoul, Rep. of Korea,
assignors to Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technol-
ogy, Seoul, Rep. of Korea
Filed Apr. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 373,807
Claims priority, application Rep. of Korea, Oct. IS, 1981,
3897/1981[U] _
Int. a.^ C07D 498/08
U.S. a. 260—239.3 P 4 Qaims
1. A process for preparing 3-dialkylaminomethyl rifamycin
S derivatives having the formula:
COOR
in which R and Ri are defined as in claim 1, and coupling this
compound with the diazonium compound of an amine of the
formula 1
H2N— D— Z„
in which D, Z and n are defined as in claim 1.
4,394,311
PRODUCTION OF 2-BENZAZEPINES
Eugene J. Trybulski, Parsippany, N.J., assignor to Hoffmann-
La Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 150,509, May 16, 1980, Pat. No. 4,318,854,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 10,118, Feb. 7, 1979,
abandoned. This application Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,208
Int. Q.3 C07D 223/16
U.S. CI. 260—239 BB 1 Qaim
1. A process to produce a compound of the formula
C22H36O5
CO
O
NH
CH2N,
R*
CH3
wherein R' and R^ are 0x0 (=0); and R^ and R^ are methyl,
ethyl, propyl, isopropyl, butyl or pentyl, or are connected by
methylene bridge where
— n;
'R*
represents piperidine or 3-methylpyrrolidine which process
comprises contacting rifamycin S with 1 to 1.5 equimolar
amount of an appropriate iminium salt in an organic solvent at
a temperature ranging from room temperature to the boiling
point of the solvent for a time sufficient to complete the reac-
tion.
4,394,313
SYMMETRICAL AZETIDINONE ALDEHYDE
DISULnDES AND PROCESS
Stjepan Kukolja, Carmel, and Janice L. Pfeil, Indianapolis, both
of Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company, Indianapolis, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 138,023, Apr. 7, 1980, Pat. No. 4,293,495.
This application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,9%
Int. CV C07D 403/12, 487/04, 403/14
U.S. Q. 260—245.4 15 Qaims
1. A process for preparing symmetrical azetidinone alde-
hyde disulfide compounds of the formula
H
•^'-^j^^'
I CHO
.*— N
OHC I
H
N-Ri
't' -tc
6^ '0R2
wherein X and Y are as above, with a mixture of a catalytic which comprises:
amount of mercuric sulfate and an excess of a C| to C4 carbox- (i) reacting a 2(i-alkoxy cephalosporin ester of the formula
1140
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
H
•'■"^///j^ ' '^X^^'*
o^^^^
CH3
O^ OR2
with about 1 to about 1.3 equivalents of an N-chioro
halogenating agent in a chlorinated hydrocarbon solvent
at a temperature between — 10° C. and 30° C;
(2) combining the above solution with an aqueous suspension
of between about 2 and about 4 molar equivalents of
mercury dichloride and about 5 to about 7 molar equiva-
lents of cadmium carbonate at a temperature between
about 0° C. and about 30° C; where in the above formulae
Rl is an acyl group of the formula
R'
\
^^OV
R2
where — R is — CHj, — C2H5, — CH2CH2CN, — CH2CH2OH,
— CH2CH2OCH3, -CH2CH2N(CH3)2 or — CH2CH=CH2,
— R' is — R or
o
— R2 is — H, — CH3 — C2H5, — OCH3. — OC2H5, or
R— C—
wherein R' is
(a) C1-C7 alkyl, cyanomethyl, C\-Ct haloalkyl, 4-
protected amino-4-protected carboxybutyl; or
(b) C|-C6alkoxy, phenoxy. benzyloxy or p-methoxyben-
zyloxy; or
(c) the group^ — R" wherein R" is phenyl or substituted
phenyl wherein the substituents are 1 or 2 halogens,
protected hydroxy, cyano, trtfluoromethyl, C1-C4 al-
kyl, C1-C4 alkoxy, protected carboxy, protected car-
boxymethyl, protected hydroxymethyl or protected
aminomethyl; or
(d) an arylalkyi group of the formula
R -(0)m-CH2-
wherein m is 0 or 2; or
(e) a substituted arylalkyi group of the formula
H
I
R— C—
I
W
o
II
NHCCH3
and R^ is — H, — CH3, — OCH3 or — OC2H5;
CHj
O
o
N
NH
N
N
H
OO'
wherein R'" is R" as defined above, 2-thienyl, 3-thienyl,
2-furyl or 3-furyl; W is protected hydroxy, protected
carboxy, protected amino, or
(0 a heteroarylmethyl group of the formula
R -CH2—
wherein R"" is 2-thienyI, 3-thienyl, 2-furyl, 3-furyl,
2-thiazolyl, 5-tetrazolyl, 1-tetrazolyl;
R2 is a carboxy protecting group; and R3 is methyl, ethyl or
isopropyl.
4,394,314
PROCESS OF PREPARING AROMATIC ALDEHYDES BY
REACTING SELECTED AROMATIC COMPOUNDS
WITH FORMAMIDINE ACETATE AND AN ORGANIC
ACID ANHYDRIDE
Wallace C. Petersen, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont
de Nennours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,734
Int. a.^ C09B 11/14: C07C 103/24
U.S. a. 260—391 12 Qaims
1. A process comprising reacting an aromatic compound Ar,
wherein Ar is selected from the group consisting of
o o
CH3CCH2CNH ( (~^ y
CH30
or
OCH3
with a compound of the formula H2NCH =NH + ^''3C02 ;
and an anhydride of the formula
000 O
II // // //
(CH3C)20. (CF3C)20, (C1CH2C)20, (CH3CH2C)20,
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1141
-continued
o
//
o
//
(CH3CH2CH2C)20 or
H.C-
H2C,
o
o
to form a compound of the formula
Ar„CH(NHCCA3)3-^
where A is H or F and m is 1, 2, or 3.
4,394,316
COPPER MODIFIED MANCOZEB
Yen-Yau H. Chao, North Wales, Pa., assignor to Rohm and
Haas Company, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,060
Int. a.' C07F 13/00. 1/08
U.S. a. 260—429 K 5 Qaims
1. A copper modified mancozeb which comprises mancozeb
reacted with from about 2.5% to about 20% copper (II) ion
and a water solubilizing anion or complex thereof
4,394,315
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING P- AND
O-BENZOQUINONE DERIVATIVES
Fumio Ishii, Hino, and Kenichi Kishi, Sagamihara, both of Ja-
pan, assignors to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,061
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 31, 1980, 55-10884
Int. CI.' C07C 46/06, 50/04. 50/08. 50/12. 50/18
U.S. CI. 260—396 R 6 Claims
1. A method for synthesizing p- or o-benzoquinone deriva-
tives represented by formula III or IV
OH
U3'"^^R2
Rl Rs
OH
I
Rb
II
4,394.317
PLATINUM-STYRENE COMPLEXES WHICH PROMOTE
HYDROSILATION REACTIONS
Richard C. McAfee, Tecumseh; James Adkins, Adrian, and
Richard L. Miskowski, Jackson, all of Mich., assignors to
SWS Silicones Corporation, Adrian, Mich.
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,462
Int. CI.' C07F 15/00
U.S. a. 260—429 R 6 Claims
1. A process for preparing a platinum catalyst for hydrosila-
tion reactions which comprises reacting a platinum halide with
an olefinic hydrocarbon selected from the group consisting of
styrene and ring substituted styrenes in the presence of a basic
material for sufficient time to form a platinum complex having
more than one but less than 4 gram atoms of halogen per gram
atom of platinum.
4,394,318
TELLURIUM (II) COMPOUNDS AND COMPLEXES
HAVING ORGANIC MOIETIES CONTAINING SILICON
Henry J. Gysling, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 198,690, Oct. 20, 1980, Pat. No. 4,287,354.
This application Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,839
Int. CI.' C07F 1/08. 15/00. 1/10. 13/00
U.S. CI. 260—429 R 7 Claims
1. A transition metal complex of a compound represented by
the formula:
Te[(CH2)„SiRR'R"l2
wherein;
n is an integer from 1 to 10 and
R, R' and R" are independently selected from the group
consisting of alkyl and aryl.
by oxidizing, at a temperature between —20° C. and 35° C. in
the presence of a quaternary ammonium salt phase transfer
catalyst, with an aqueous hypohalite solution having a pH of
from 8 to 10, a p- or o-hydroquinone derivative represented by
formula I or II
wherein, in formula I, II, III, and IV, Ri through Rg, which
may be the same or different, represent hydrogen atoms, or
alkyl or aryl groups, provided that all the Ri, R2, R3 and R4
groups and all the R5, Re, R? and Rg groups are not hydrogen
atoms, and Ri and R2, R3 and R4, R5 and Re, and Rft and R7,
respectively, may form a 5 or 6-membered hydrocarbon ring,
said temperature being between 0° C. and 35° C. when a com-
pound of formula I is oxidized and between —20° C. and 0° C.
when a compound of formula II is oxidized.
4,394,319
CO-ORDINATION COMPOUND OF PLATINUM
Paul C. Hydes, and Derek R. Hepburn, both of Reading, En-
gland, assignors to Johnson Matthey Public Limited Com-
pany, London, England
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,478
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 3, 1980,
8028484; May 20, 1981, 8115549
Int. CI.' C07F 15/00
U.S. CI. 260—429 R 3 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of a co-ordination com-
pound of platinum in substantially pure form and having the
structure
CI OH NH2CH(CH3)2
\l /
Pt
/ 1 \ -
CI OH NH2CH(CH3)2
comprising reacting cis-dichloro-di(isopropylamine)platinum-
(II) with hydrogen peroxide, isolating the product, dissolving
the said product in N,N-dimethylacetamide, isolating the re-
sulting product which comprises a 1:1 adduct of the said com-
pound with N,N-dimethylacetamide and thereafter removing
1142
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the said N.N-dimethylacetamide under vacuum at a tempera-
ture less than 80* C.
4,394,320
SYNTHESIS OF STANNIC TETRA MERCAPTIDES
Michel Pereyre, Talence, and Jean-Claude Pommier, Gradig-
nan, both of France, assignors to Societe Nationale Elf Aqui-
taine, France
Filed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,820
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 12, 1981, 81 04965
Int. a? C07F 7/22
U.S. a. 260—429.7 11 Qaims
1. Process of preparation of stannic tetra mercaptides from
corresponding mercaptans comprising the step of heating the
mercaptan with metallic tin.
nyl radicals having from about two to about 30 carbon atoms,
cycloalkyl radicals having from about three to about 40 carbon
atoms, aralkyl and alkaryl radicals having from about six to
about 40 carbon atoms, hydrocarbyl groups carrying halogen,
hydroxyl, alkoxy or aryloxy, or an alkyl, aryl, alkenyl, cycloal-
kyl, aralkyl or alkaryl group carrying a sulfonate group, pro-
vided that at least one of Ri, R2 and R3 is an alkyl, aryl, alke-
nyl, cycloalkyl, alkaryl or aralkyl carrying a sulfonate group;
M is sulfur or oxygen; F is phosphorus, arsenic or antimony;
and further provided that F is bonded to the groups Ri, R2 and
R3 through carbon.
4,394,321
TRIARYLBORANEISOCY ANO METAL COMPOUNDS
Michael M. Cone, Orange, Tex., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Nov, 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,216
Int. a.' C07F 15/04. 5/02
U.S. a. 260—439 R 10 Claims
1. Compounds having the general formula:
B(Ar)3
C
(RlCN);r N (NCRsk
M
/l\
R2CN N NCR4
C
B(Ar)3
wherein X is 0 or 1, Y is a positive integer of 1-50, M is a metal
selected from the group of metals of groups II A, IB, IIB, VllB
and VIII; provided that when M is Pd, Ag, Cd, Pt, Au or Hg,
X is 0; Ar is an aryl or substituted aryl group having 6-10
carbon atoms; R\, R2, R3 and R4are the same or different and
are selected from groups consisting of alkyl and substituted
alkyl groups having 1-6 carbon atoms, alkenyl and substituted
alkenyl groups having 2-6 carbon atoms, aryl groups having
6-10 carbon atoms and when adjacent nitrile groups are co-
joined alkylene groups having 1-4 carbon atoms.
4,394,322
GROUP VA YLIDES AND PROCESS FOR PREPARING
SAME
David L. Beach, Gibsonia, and James J. Harrison, Glenshaw,
both of Pa., assignors to Gulf Research & Development Com-
pany, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 179,079, Aug. 18, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,293,502, and a continuation of Ser. No. 179,080, Aug. 18,
1980, and a continuation of Ser. No. 179,076, Aug. 18, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,293,727, and a continuation of Ser. No. 179,005, Aug. 18,
1980, Pat. No. 4,310,716. This application Nov. 25, 1980, Ser.
No. 210,283
Int. a.3 C07F 9/72. 9/74. 9/90. 9/50
U.S. a. 260—440 25 Qaims
1. A Group VA ylide defined by the following formula:
Ri.
R4 M
4,394,323
PRODUCTION OF ANTIMONY
ORGANOPHOSPHORODITHIOATES
Richard E. Lowery, Bartlesville, Okla.; Bruce W. Gordon, and
Barry N. Steger, both of Borger, Tex., assignors to Phillips
Petroleum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,964
Int. aJ C07F 9/90
U.S. a. 260—446 4 Qaims
1. A process of reacting one or more antimony reagents of
the general formula Sb^Xn; wherein X is — O, — OH,
— OOCR", — CI, — Br, or — F; R" is an organic radical con-
taining 1 to 12 carbon atoms; and m and n are independent and
represent numbers from 1 to 5, with at least one hydrocarbyl
phosphorodithioic acid component to produce antimony dihy-
drocarbylphosphorodithioates comprising the steps of
(a) adding less than the stoichiometric amount of antimony
reagent to the acid component,
(b) allowing the added antimony reagent to react with the
acid component,
(c) repeating steps (a) and (b) until substantially all of the
acid component is neutralized, and (d) separating the
desired antimony salt from the product of step (c).
4,394,324
STABLE ANTIMONY
ORGANOPHOSPHORODITHIOATES
Harold W. Mark; Brent J. Bertus, and John S. Roberts, all of
Bartlesville, Okla., assignors to Phillips Petroleum Company,
Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,526
Int. aJ C07F 9/90
U.S. a. 260—446 9 Qaims
1. Stabilized antimony hydrocarbylphosphorodithioate salts
produced by the steps of:
(1) reacting a molar excess of a hydroxyl component with
one or more substances containing phosphorus and sulfur,
and
(2) reacting the product of step (1) with an antimony-con-
taining compound.
\ I
R2— F=C— C— R5 •
R3
wherein Ri, R2, R3, R4 and R5 are either alike or different
members selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl
radicals having from about one to about 24 carbon atoms, aryl
radicals having from about six to about 20 carbon atoms, alke-
4,394,325
ELEMENTAL SULFUR-STABLIZED ORGANIC
ANTIMONY COMPOUND COMPOSITION
Robert E. Bresser, Sharonville, Ohio; Sidney S. White, Jr.,
Seminole, Fla., and Arthur F. Koeniger, Cincinnati, Ohio,
assignors to Carstab Corporation, Reading, Ohio
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,473
Int. Q.3 C09K 15/32: C07C 149/00
U.S. Q. 260—446 3 Qaims
1. A composition comprising
A. at least one organic antimony compound containing at
least one antimony to sulfur to carbon linkage and being
selected from compounds having the formulas:
(R)rrT-Sb-(-SR'),
(I)
or the formula
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1143
Sb Sb
, / \ / \ ,
(R'S)„ _ (Y), (SR')^
wherein
R is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl,
cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aralkyl, alkaryl, and alkenyl;
R' is selected from the group consisting of alkyl, aryl,
cycloalkyl, cycloalkenyl, aralkyl, alkaryl, alkenyl.
O
— (CH2)?-C00R2 and — (CH2)3-OCR^;
R2 is hydrogen, alkyl, aryl, alkenyl, cycloalkyl or alkoxy-
alkyl;
R^ is alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl or alkenyl;
Y is selected from the group consisting of
00 O
II II II
-S— (CH2)jy— CO-, -OC-(CH2),-S-(CH2),— CO-,
00 O
M " . " II
— D— R^I-l-D— , — OC— R'*— CO, — S— R"*- CO— R*— S— .
O O
. " . " .
— S— R*— CO— R*— OC— R"*- S— ,
o o
-■S-(CH2V-OC-R'*-CO-(CH2);,-S-.
00
II II
i— (CH2)y,— OC— R5— CO— (CH2V— S— ,
c=o
I
o
I
(CH2)p
S
I ,
Sb— (SR')y
R2-y
R2-;— Sb— (SR')/
S
I
(CH2)p
O
I
c=o
o I o ^
-continued
o o
II . II
-S-(CH2),-C0-R5-0C-(CH2),-S-
and
O
I
c=o
I
(CH2),
s
\
R2-y— Sb— (SR');
R2-y— Sb— (SR')/
S
I
(CH2),
O
c=o
I
o
I
o
— S— (CH2),— CO— R''— OC— (CH2),— S-
. o
I
c=o
I
(CH2),
s
R2-;— Sb— (SR')y
R* is alkylene, arylene or alkenylene;
R* is a trivalent alkyl or aryl radical;
R^ is a tetravelent alkyl or aryl radical;
D is oxygen or sulfur;
i= I, 2 or 3;
j=l or2;
m=l or 2 and m' = 0 or 1;
n=l or 2 and n'=Oor 1;
X is 0 or 1 with the proviso that when x=0 then m-i-
m' = 2 and n-|-n' = 2, and when x=l then m=l, m'=0,
n=l and n'=0;
z is 1, 2 or 3;
a is 2, 3 or 4;
q is 1, 2 or 3; and
p is 2, 3 or 4;
B. elemental sulfur in an amount from about 0.005% to about
2.0% by weight based on the weight of the organic anti-
mony compound.
-fS- (CH2)p— OC— R6— CO— (CH2);,— S— .
c=o
I
o
I
(CH2)p
S
R2-y— Sb— (SR');
4,394,326
PREPARATION OF ALKENOXY ALUMINUM
COMPOUNDS AND COMPOUNDS PRODUCED
Dennis B. Malpass, La Porte, and G. Scott Yeargin, Pasadena,
both of Tex., assignors to Texas Alkyls, Inc., Westport, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 6,323, Jan. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,341,910.
This application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,512
Int. CV C07F 5/06
U.S. Q. 260—448 AD 2 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula
R"
\ I
C=C— CH2OAIQ2
o
— S--(CH2)«— CO— R*— OC— (CH2)o— S— ,
/
in which R, R' and R" are independently alkyl groups having
from 1 to 20 carbon atoms each and Q is an alkyl group having
from I to 20 carbon atoms.
1144
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,327
HERBICIDALLY ACTIVE
PHENOXY-a-PHENOXY-ALKANECARBOXYLIC AaO
DERIVATIVES
Otto Rohr, Therwil, Switzerland; Georg Pissiotas, Lorrach, Fed.
Rep. of Germany; Beat Bohner, Binningen, and Kurt Burde-
ska, Basel, both of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Cor-
poration, Ardsley, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 83,906, Oct. 11, 1979, abandoned, which is
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 883,021, Mar. 3, 1978,
abandoned. This application May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,650
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 8, 1977,
2867/77; Jul. 4, 1977, 8182/77
Int. CI.' C07C 153/07. 121/75: AOIN 41/00
\}S. CI. 260—455 R 4 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
4,394,329
2-HYDROXYMETHYL-l,3-PROPANEDIOL NITRATE
ESTER
Michael W. Barnes, Brigham City, Utah, assignor to Thiokol
Corporation, Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 52,155, Jun. 26, 1979, abandoned, which is
a division of Ser. No. 854,946, Nov. 25, 1977, abandoned. This
application Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,273
Int. C\? C07C 77/02: C06B 45/10. 25/00
U.S. a. 260—467 4 Qaims
1. A compound 2-hydroxymethyl-l,3-propanediol trinitrate,
said compound being a water white liquid at room tempera-
ture.
4,394,330
PHOSPHONATE DERIVATIVES OF POLYALKYLENE
POLY AMINES AS FLAME RETARDANTS
Thomas A. Hardy, Tarrytown, N.Y., and Sophia Y. Liu, Free-
mont, Calif., assignors to Stauffer Chemical Company, West-
port, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 959,390, Nov. 9, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 755,278, Dec. 29, 1976,
abandoned. This application Feb. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 125,591
Int. CI.' C07F 9/40: C08G 18/00
U.S. CI. 260—932 1 Claim
1. A composition having the structural formula:
wherein
the floating substituents CI and CN are in the 2- and 4-posi-
tions,
Rl is hydrogen or C1-C4 alkyi, and
R4' is Ci-Cgalkyl unsubstituted or substituted by halogen or
cyano or interrupted by oxygen, sulfur, a carbonyl or a
carboxyl oxy group; C2-C8 alkenyl optionally substituted
by halogen; C2-C8 alkinyl optionally substituted by halo-
gen; Cj-Cg cycloalkyl; Cj-Cg cycloalkenyl; phenyl un-
substituted or substituted by halogen, cyano, nitro, C2-C4
alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy or trifluoromethyl; or benzyl unsub-
stituted or substituted by halogen, cyano, nitro, C1-C4
alkyl, C1-C4 alkoxy or trifluoromethyl.
CH2P(0) (OCH2CH3)2
HOCH2CH2NCH2CH2NCH2CH2CH2NCH2CH2OH
CH2P(0) (OCH2CH3)2 CH2P(0) (OCH2CH3)2
4,394,331
CARBURETOR
Yousuke Okabe, Niiza, and Osamu Shoji, Kawagoe, both of
Japan, assignors to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 238,632
Int. a.5 F02M 1/16
U.S. a. 261—18 B 1 Claim
4,394,328
PRODUCTION OF PEROXYDICARBONATES
James A. Barter, Akron, and David E. Kellar, Barberton, both of
Ohio, assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 920,886, Jun. 30, 1978,
abandoned. This application Mar. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 134,370
Int. CV C07C 68/02
U.S. a. 260—463 7 Qaims
1. In a process for preparing peroxydicarbonate represented
by the formula R— OCO— OO— OCO— R wherein R is an
alkyl or cycloalkyl radical derived from a monohydric alcohol
and containing up to 18 carbon atoms by reacting, at a temper-
ature of from - 10° C. to 30° C, a chloroformate of the for-
mula R— OCO— CI, wherein R is as defined above, with hy-
drogen peroxide and alkali metal hydroxide and recovering
undiluted jseroxydicarbonate from the reaction mixture,
wherein the improvement resides in adding aqueous alkali
metal hydroxide solution, containing from 20 percent to 40
percent by weight alkali metal hydroxide, to a continuously
stirred batch of an aqueous unemulsified, non-colloidal mixture
consisting essentially of chloroformate and hydrogen peroxide
the mixture containing from 4 to 12 percent stoichiometric
excess of hydrogen peroxide based on the quantity of chloro-
formate and having a hydrogen peroxide content of from about
10 percent to about 35 percent by weight based on the quantity
of water in the mixture, sufTicient alkali metal hydroxide solu-
tion being added to the mixture so as to provide from 1 to 10
percent stoichiometric excess of alkali metal hydroxide based
on the quantity of chloroformate in the mixture.
<=^3
1. In a carburetor including an intake bore having a venturi
portion therein, a throttle valve disposed in said intake bore at
the downstream side of said venturi portion, a primary nozzle
opening to a portion of said intake bore between said throttle
valve and said venturi portion, and a secondary nozzle opening
to said venturi portion, said primary nozzle and said secondary
nozzle being in communication with a float chamber through a
primary jet and a secondary jet, respectively;
an improvement which comprises: a slow fuel passage shunt-
ing from a portion between said primary nozzle and said
primary jet, said slow fuel passage being communicated
with an idle port and a by-pass port both of which open to
said intake bore in the vicinity of said throttle valve; a
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1145
cup-shaped member disposed beneath the level of the fuel
in said float chamber and defining therein a downwardly
opened space, said primary jet opening to an uppermost
portion of the space in said cup-shaped member while
said secondary jet opening to an intermediate portion of
the ^ace in said cup-shaped member, a main fuel tank
storing an alcoholic fuel therein and communicating with
said float chamber through a float chamber; and an
auxiliary fuel tank storing gasoline therein and communi-
cating with the space in said cup-shaped member through
a metering pump.
4,394,332
CRlitlBLELESS PREPARATION OF RAPIDLY
SOLIDIFIED FINE PARTICULATES
Ramaswamy V. Raman, and Robert S. Carbonara, both of Co-
lumbus, Ohio, assignors to Battelle Memorial Institute, Co-
lumbus, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 163,907, Jun. 27, 1980, abandoned.
This application Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,003
Int. CV BOIJ 2/06
U.S. a. 264—8 10 Claims
1. A method of making solid fine particulates from a nor-
mally solid material, which at a temperature within 25 percent
of its equilibrium melting point °K has a surface tension in the
range of 10 to 2500 dynes/cm. and a viscosity in the range of
0.001 to 1 poise when a molten material, comprising the steps
of:
(a) heating an unconfined portion of a mass of the solid
material to a molten state so as to permit droplets of mol-
ten material to fall therefrom;
(b) providing a moving ring-like mass of a centrifugally
disposed rotating liquid quench fluid;
(c) positioning said portion subjected to heating and said
moving ring-like mass in relation to each other that the
droplets of molten material fall into contact with said
moving ring-like mass of the centrifugally disposed rotat-
ing liquid quench fluid;
(d) breaking said droplets through said contact into frag-
ments and cooling said fragments into solid fine particu-
lates by said moving ring-like mass of the centrifugally
disposed rotating liquid quench fiuid; and
(e) subsequently separating the solid fine particulates from
the liquid quench fluid.
4,394,333
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF BLOW MOLDED
ARTICLES ACCOMPANIED WITH THE RECOVERY OF
A BLOWING GAS
Hatahiko Fukushima, Katano; Tadahiko Handa, Takarazuka,
and Kenji Kodama, Hirakata, all of Japan, assignors to Air
Products and Chemicals, Inc., Allentown, Pa.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,140
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 9, 1980, 55/62086
Int. Q.-' B29C 77/07, 25/00
U.S. Q. 264—37 14 Claims
1. In a process for the production of a blow molded thermo-
plastic article comprising the steps of extruding the thermo-
plastic material into a molten state to form a parison. introduc-
ing from a storage means a blowing gas containing a reactive
gas component into the parison and expanding said parison to
form the resulting blow molded article, the improvement
which comprises:
adjusting within said storage means said blowing gas to a
preselected level of pressure and concentration of said
reactive gas before introducing the blowing gas into said
-n
parison, purging said blowing gas from the interior of said
blow molded article with a purging gas, recovering a
mixture of said purging gas and said blowing gas contain-
ing a high concentration of the reactive gas component,
during an initial stage of said purging, in said storage
means and disposing of the remaining mixture of blowing
gas and purging gas after the pressure and reactive gas
component concentration reaches a preselected level in
said storage means.
4,394,334
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR DEBURRING
MOULDED PARTS PRODUCED BY PRESSING
Gunter H. Kiss, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Lig-
notock Verfahrenstechnik GmbH, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,643
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1981, 3102220
Int. CI.' B29J 5/06
U.S. Q. 264—80 12 Claims
1. A process for deburring moulded parts produced by press-
ing large edge contours of poor heat-conducting materials
formed of crushed, glued, organic, raw materials comprising
the steps "of:
thermically decomposing the material of a small circumfer-
ential zone between the edge contour of the moulded part
to be deburred and the waste shoulder during pressing of
the moulded part; and
removing the decomposed material from the edge contour
when the moulded part is removed from the press tools.
1146
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,335
PROCESS FOR PREPARING STRUCTURAL
COMPONENTS
Michael Roth, and Volker Frey, both of Burghausen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Wacker-Chemie GmbH, Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 322,038
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 28,
1980, 3044948
Int. a.3 C04B 7/02
U.S. a. 264—82 9 Claims
1. A process for preparing structural components which
comprises forming a slurry containing a hydraulic bonding
agent, water, additives and an organopolysiloxane in which at
least a portion of the organopolysiloxane consists of at least
one compound of the formula
4,394,338
PRODUCTION OF ELONGATED nBER-REINFORCED
COMPOSITE ARTICLES
Masani Fuwa, Abiko, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Petrochem-
ical Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,812
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 21, 1980, 55-114981
Int. Q\? B29F i/lO; B32B il/U; B29D 27/00
U.S. a. 264—135 14 Qaims
R^Si(0R'V0H)20 4.
where at least 10 percent of the number of the R radicals are
alkyl radicals having at least 4 carbon atoms per radical and the
other R radicals are selected from the group consisting of alkyl
radicals having from 1 to 3 carbon atoms per radical, phenyl
radicals and mixtures thereof, R' is an alkyl radical having
from 1 to 4 carbon atoms per radical, x is 0, 1, 2 or 3, with an
average of from 0.9 to 1.8, y is 0, 1, 2 or 3, with an average of
from 0.01 to 2.0, and z is 0, 1, 2 or 3, with an average 0.00 to 0.5,
with the proviso that the sum of x + y + z may not exceed 3.5,
molding the slurry and thereafter exposing the molded slurry
to aqueous steam.
4,394,336
PRODUCTION OF TABLETS OF SODIUM
DICHLOROISOCYANURATE
Tadao Shimamura; Junji Nakano, and Yasufumi Seo, all of
Tokushima, Japan, assignors to Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Com-
pany Ltd., Marugame, Japan
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 284,758
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 1, 1980, 55-106604
Int. CI.' A61J i/lO
U.S. CI. 264—109 5 Claims
1. A method of producing sodium dichloroisocyanurate
tablets capable of gradually and smoothly dissolving in water,
comprising tabletting particulate sodium dichloroisocyanurate
with a moisture content of from about 7 to about 20 weight %,
and thermally treating the resulting tablets at a temperature of
from about 50° to about 100° C. under a condition such that the
water content in said tablets is not lost by vaporization.
1. A pultrusion process for producing elongated composite
articles which comprises the steps of: impregnating an elon-
gated reinforcing fiber material with a thermosetting resin;
introducing the fiber material impregnated with the thermoset-
ting resin into a stationary long-land die; extruding, into a
shaping portion of the long-land die, a non-foaming thermo-
plastic resin in molten state onto the external surface of the
fiber material thereby to coat the entire outer surface of the
fiber material with the thermoplastic resin and thereby to form
a composite material; immediately thereafter supplying a lubri-
cant between the entire outer surface of the composite material
and the inner surface of the long-land die; heating and setting
the thermosetting resin in an elongate setting portion of the
long-land die as the composite material is moved therethrough
and shaped; cooling the composite material after it has moved
out of the land-land die thereby to solidify the thermoplastic
resin, and drawing the cooled composite material so as to pull
the composite material through said long-land die.
4,394,339
PROCESS FOR PREPARING OPEN STRUCTURE FIBERS
Ronald E. Pfeiffer, Pensacola, and Francesco DeMaria, Gulf
Breeze, both of Fla., assignors to American Cyanamid Com-
pany, Wayne, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 13,344, Feb. 21, 1979, Pat. No. 4,316,714.
This application Nov. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 210,935
Int. a? DOIF 6/75
U.S. a. 264—177 F 2 Qaims
4,394,337
THERMAL INSULATING BODY AND A PROCESS FOR
MAKING THE SAME
Hans Kummermehr, Ludwigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Griinzweig & Hartmann und Glasfaser AG, Lud-
wigshafen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,171
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 13,
1979, 2941606; Oct. 18, 1979, 2942087
Int. Q\} B29C 7/02. 1/04
U.S. Q. 264—122 13 Qaims
1. A process for making a thermal insulating body, compris-
ing,
forming a first admixture of a binder and a dispersant,
wherein the dispersant is present in an amount of 0.5 to
20% by weight of the binder and wherein the particle size
of the binder is generally 1 micron or less;
mixing the first admixture with a highly dispersed insulating
material to form a second admixture; and
then pressing and curing the second admixture, by applica-
tion of heat, so that the edges and corners of the insulating
material undergo cross-linking with the binder.
1 o I
1. A process for preparing open structure fiber which com-
prises extruding a fusion melt of acrylonitrile polymer and
water through a spinnerette assembly which comprises in
combination
a. a spinnerette plate containing a plurality of orifices with a
counterbore for each oriffice and
b. removable pins positioned within each orifice-counter-
bore combination, each pin being of solid construction and
having an upper portion positioned within said counter-
bore and a lower portion positioned within said orifice,
said upper portion occupying a fixed position within said
counterbore and enabling spinning composition to fiow
through the counterbore to the orifice at operative back
pressure and said lower portion contacting the wall of the
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1147
orifice at one position while providing clearance at other
positions and having suitable shape characteristics to
provide an open structure in the extrudate formed directly
into a steam-pressurized solidification zone maintained
under conditions of pressure and temperature which pre-
vent formation of a sheath-core structure in the extrudate
and enable orientation stretching of the extrudate to be
achieved while said extrudate remains within said solidifi-
cation zone.
4,394,340
METHOD OF PRODUCING THIN-WALLED ENDLESS
BELT
Noriyoshi Tarumi, Hachioji; Hiroshi Tsuchiya, Iruma;
Masakazu Kokiso, Tokyo, and Hiroaki Ohta, Yokohama, all
of Japan, assignors to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo and Hokushin Industries Corporation, Yokohama, both
of, Japan
Filed Oct. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 315,963
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 29, 1980, 55/151638
Int. Q.' B29C 5/04
U.S. Q. 264-219 12 Qaims
1. A method of producing a thin-walled endless belt having
a thickness between 30 and 500 microns by centrifugal molding
which comprises introducing a liquid curable silicone rubber
dissolved in a solvent into a rotating cylindrical mold to coat
the inner surface of said mold, hardening said liquid curable
silicone rubber to form a silicone rubber coated mold surface
on the inner surface of said cylindrical mold, and thereafter
introducing into said rotating cylindrical mold a thermosetting
resin which is at least one heat resistant resin selected from the
group consisting of polyimide, polyamide-imide and polyben-
zimidazole resins dissolved in a volatile solvent onto said inner
silicone rubber coated mold surface to coat said inner silicone
rubber coated mold surface, then hardening said thermosetting
resin and then removing said hardened thermosetting resin
from said mold to form said endless belt having a thickness
between 30 and 500 microns.
J, 4,394,341
METHOD TO CENTER AND SEPARATE
ELECTROFORMED REPLICAS FROM A MATRIX
Donald J. Wierschke, Brownsburg, Ind., assignor to RCA Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 344,533
Int. C\? B29C 7/02
U.S. Q. 264—225 6 Claims
1. In the matrixng method employed in the manufacture of a
molded record wherein a matrix, having a relief pattern de-
fined in a surface thereof, which pattern includes a spiral infor-
mation track positioned concentrically about an unrecorded
center portion, is replicated by electroforming a metal on the
surface of the matrix until a predetermined thickness of metal
has been deposited and the replica thus formed is separated
from the surface of the matrix, the improvement which com-
prises:
(a) providing an insert member having a surface which is
passive to the metal to be electroformed on the matrix,
said insert being an integral member having a given shape
consisting of a base of a first diameter which is less than
the diameter of the unrecorded portion of the matrix, a
boss portion positioned normally and centrally with re-
spect to the diameter of the base and being of a second
diameter less than said first diameter, and a positive lead
portion extending from the first diameter to the second
diameter, said insert further including attaching means
associated with said boss portion for securing a separation
tool to said insert;
(b) positioning and securing said insert to the matrix with a
securing means prior to electroforming metal on the ma-
trix, said insert being placed with its base portion flush
against the matrix at a position in the center unrecorded
portion concentrically equidistant from the information
track;
(c) electroforming the metal over the surface of the matrix
and the positive lead portion of the insert to form a rep-
lica;
(d) removing securing means holding said insert to the ma-
trix;
(e) securing a separation tool to the attaching means and
(0 applying a separation force to the separation tool to urge
the replica away from the matrix, whereby the positive
lead portion of the insert in combination with the tool
applied provides the separation force at the center portion
of the replica to assist in the separation of the replica from
the surface of the matrix.
4,394,342
FORMING PLASTIC ARTICLES HAVING STRANDS BY
STRETCHING
Frank B. Mercer, Blackburn, England, assignor to P.L.G. Re-
search Limited, Blackburn, England
Filed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,729
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 9, 1979,
7935034; Jul. 8, 1980, 8022318
Int. Q.' B29C 7 7/Oi
U.S. Q. 264—292 13 Qaims
1. A method of making a plastic material article, comprising
providing a piece of plastic starting material having a plurality
of generally coaxial rings of holes or depressions therem, each
hole or depression being separated from its adjacent hole or
depression in the same ring by a zone, the sum of the cross-sec-
tional areas of all the zones in a given ring being approximately
equal to the sum of the cross-sectional areas of each other ring,
the cross-sectional area of each zone being the multiplication
product of (a) the shortest distance between adjacent holes or
depressions and (b) the average thickness of the plastic starting
material along that distance, said piece being substantially all at
substantially the same temperature, and moving a first part of
said piece which is within the rings with respect to a second
part which is on the other side of the rings, in a direction
generally at right angles to notional planes which generally
intersect the holes or depressions of the respective rings.
1032 O.G.-rr43
1148
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
thereby stretching said zones of said given and other rings into
oriented strands, said zones in the given ring all being stretched
to substantially the same stretch ratio and said zones in the
other rings all being stretched to substantially the same stretch
ratio.
improvement comprising: a heat pipe constructed to decrease
magnetic pressure drop thereacross and having a cross section
with a first distance greater than a second distance, said first
4,394,343
PROCESS FOR THE FORMING OF COUPLING PIECES
FROM A THERMOPLASTIC
Petrus M. Acda, and Jacob Karreman, both of Enkhuizen, Neth-
erlands, assignors to Polva Nederland B.V., Enkhuizen, Neth-
erlands
Filed Dec. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 102,655
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 12, 1978,
7812063
Int. a.3 B29C 7/QO
U.S. a. 264—296 3 Qaims
distance being substantially parallel to said magnetic field and
said second distance being substantially perpendicular to said
magnetic field, whereby a magnetic pressure drop across the
heat pipe is decreased.
1. Process for the forming of coupling pieces from a thermo-
plastic, which coupling pieces comprise at least one annular
undercut and present a free end and a terminal part which is
located between the free end and the location of the greatest
depth of the undercut and which is narrowed in the direction
from the greatest depth of the undercut, in which process the
thermoplastic is formed with the aid of a forming core which
is provided with an annular rib, and the external surface of
which corresponds to the internal surface of the coupling piece
to be formed, the forming being carried out at a pressure and a
temperature which are such that the forming core is closely
surrounded by the thermoplastic, so as to form a coupling
piece with an annular undercut, part of the coupling piece
preformed in this way is cooled, the narrowed terminal part of
the coupling piece, from the free end to the greatest depth of
the undercut, being kept at a temperature which is such that
this part remains elastically deformable, at least the part of the
forming core provided with the annular rib is then withdrawn
from the narrowed terminal part while provoking an elastic
deformation of this terminal part, the elastically deformed
terminal part is then cooled to a temperature at which the
thermoplastic is no longer deformable, and the coupling piece
formed in this way is completely withdrawn from the forming
core, characterised in that the narrowed terminal part of the
preformed coupling piece is postformed to give the desired
final shape, after it has been elastically deformed and before it
has completely cooled.
4,394,345
ULTRASONIC METHOD AND APPARATUS
John G. De Briere; Mary M. Lemanowicz; David L. Richardson,
and Willem Vanderputten, ail of San Jose, Calif., assignors to
General Electric Company, San Jose, Calif.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,431
Int. a.3G21C/ 7/00
U.S. a. 376—245 26 Claims
4,394,344
HEAT PIPES FOR USE IN A MAGNETIC HELD
Richard W. Werner, San Ramon, and Myron A. Hoffman, Da-
vis, both of Calif, (granted to U.S. Department of Energy
under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,818
Int. a.^ F28D 75/00
U.S. a. 376—146 10 Qaims
4. A heat pipe in combination with a magnetic field perpen-
dicular to the longitudinal axis of the heat pipe, said heat pipe
having a cross section wherein a first distance is greater than a
second distance, said first distance being substantially parallel
to said magnetic field, and said second distance being substan-
tially perpendicular to said magnetic field, whereby magnetic
pressure drop across said heat pipe is decreased while in the
magnetic field.
8. In a magnetic confinement reactor having at least one heat
pipe for transferring heat and positioned so that a longitudinal
axis of the heat pipe is perpendicular to a magnetic field, the
1. An apparatus for detecting cracks in the jet pump beam of
a jet pump arrangement of a nuclear reactor, wherein said
arrangement includes a downwardly directed jet pump having
a nozzle for receiving pressurized driving water, a riser pipe
positioned adjacent said jet pump for supplying said driving
water, a pipe elbow connecting the top of said riser pipe to the
inlet of said nozzle, and a removable jet pump beam assembly,
including a jet pump beam bearing on said elbow to hold said
elbow in place, said apparatus comprising an ultrasonic signal
production means, and communicating means for communicat-
ing said signals from said production means to and from a jet
pump beam, said communicating means being straddlingly
mountable over a jet pump beam, and said ultrasonic signals
being directionally oriented toward the upper surface of said
jet pump beam, whereby incipient cracks appearing on said
surface are timely ultrasonically detectable.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1149
4,394,346
WATER LEVEL GAUGE FOR A NUCLEAR REACTOR
Shinichi Morooka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,655
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 20, 1979, 54-
175507[U]; Jan. 29, 1980, 55-8578[U]
Int. Q.3 GOIF 2i/l6: G21C 17/02
U.S. Q. 376—258 5 Qaims
1. A water level gauge for a nuclear reactor having a refer-
ence water level container communicating with a fluid in the
upper part of a nuclear reactor pressure vessel through an
upper part pressure tube, a differential pressure detector with
two inlets for detecting a differential pressure between the
reference water level in the reference water level container
and the water level inside the nuclear reactor pressure vessel,
a reference water head tube connecting one of said two inlets
of the differential pressure detector with the reference water
level container, and a lower part pressure tube connecting the
other inlet of the differential pressure detector with a predeter-
mined measuring point of part of the nuclear reactor pressure
vessel, characterized by further comprising heat conduction
means for absorbing heat from the reference water head water
inside said reference water head tube and from the water inside
said lower part pressure tube and for conducting the heat to the
outside of a housing of the nuclear reactor pressure vessel, and
a heat exchanger for removing the heat conducted to the
outside of the housing by said heat conduction means.
4,394,347
BRAZING nLLER METAL COMPOSITION AND
PROCESS
John H. McMurray, Stratford, and Jule Miller, Derby, both of
Conn., assignors to Avco Corporation, Stratford, Conn.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,793
Int. Q.3 C22C 19/05
U.S. Q. 420—453 2 Qaims
1. A brazing filler metal composition consisting essentially
of, by weight, from about 8.0% to about 11.0% chromium;
from about 2.0% to about 3.0% boron; from about 3.0% to
about 4.5% silicon; from about 2.5% to about 4.0% iron; from
about 7.0% to about 9.0% tungsten; a maximum of 0.06%
carbon and the remainder nickel.
4,394,348
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF ALUMINIUM
ALLOYS
Francis R. F. Hardy, Chester, and Martin G. Griffiths, Warring-
ton, both of England, assignors to Interox Chemicals Ltd.,
London, England
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,163
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 15, 1979,
7935699
Int. Q.' C22C 7/02
U.S. Q. 420—528 H Claims
1. In a process for the production of a strontium-modified
aluminium alloy which comprises admixing an aluminium-
bearing material and a strontium-bearing material, said
aluminium-bearing material con.sisting of aluminium or alumin-
ium alloyed with at least one member selected from the group
consisting of magnesium and silicon, and heating the admixed
materials to form a strontium-modified aluminium alloy, the
improvement wherein said strontium-bearing material com-
prises strontium peroxide.
4,394,349
APPARATUS FOR THE FLUIDIZED CATALYTIC
CRACKING OF HYDROCARBON FEEDSTOCK
Robert R. Cartmell, Crown Point, Ind., assignor to Standard Oil
Company (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,901
Int. Q.J F27B 15/08: ClOG 35/14, 47/30
U.S. Q. 422-147 6 Qahns
STRIPPIIK US
KTOWcino nustoM
MO CRUKmC CATILTST
1. An apparatus for the fluidized catalytic cracking of a
hydrocarbon feedstock, the apparatus comprising:
(a>a disengaging vessel having a dense catalyst phase and a
dilute catalyst phase;
(b) a vertically ascending riser reactor having means at its
upstream end for the introduction of the feedstock and the
catalyst, the riser reactor further having a downstream
end communicating with the interior of the vessel;
(c) a collar having two open ends in communication with the
interior of said disengaging vessel and positioned along
the same axis as the downstream end of the riser reactor,
the collar further being positioned in close proximity to,
but not in contact with, the riser reactor such that an
annular space is defined between the riser reactor and the
collar, the collar having a diameter greater than the diam-
eter of the riser reactor at its downstream end; and
(d) a cyclone separation system located within the vessel and
having:
(i) an outlet communicating with the interior of the vessel
to discharge catalyst into the dense phase;
(ii) an outlet connected to vent the cracked hydrocarbons
outside the vessel; and
(iii) an inlet directly and laterally communicating with the
collar;
whereby vapors from the vessel may enter the annular space
defined by the collar through one open end thereof and
1150
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
may thereafter enter the cyclone separation system
through said inlet.
4,394,350
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR VORTEX FLOW
CARBON BLACK PRODUCTION
Paul J. Cheng, Bartlesville, Okla., assignor to Phillips Petro-
leum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Division of Ser. No. 145,094, Apr. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4,321,248.
This application Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,780
Int. a.i C09C 1/48: BOIJ 10/00
U.S. a. 422—150 5 Qaims
CH/WGE
OIL
T
15
the exhaust gases, said converter having a configuration such
that exhaust gas flow is non-uniformly distributed across the
upstream frontal areas of each of the substrates, said converter
further having a chamber located between said substrates, an
air distribution tube having an open end adapted to be con-
nected to said pulsed air supply and extending through and
across said chamber and terminating with a closed end, said
tube within said chamber having a plurality of holes which are
sized and spaced along said tube such that they nonuniformly
distribute the pulsed air supply throughout said chamber in a
manner to provide a resultant air flow distribution conforming
with the non-uniform distribution of exhaust gas, a plurality of
flow dividers spaced along said tube and extending substan-
tially parallel to each other in a manner to partition said cham-
ber into a plurality of discrete channels each open to selected
ones of said holes to receive one portion only of the non-
uniform distribution of the pulsed air supply and one portion
only of the non-uniformly distributed exhaust gas whereby said
non-uniform air flow distribution is maintained between said
channels while said exhaust gas is flowing between said sub-
strates to prevent the exhaust gas from entering the down-
stream substrate with an improper mix of pulsed air so that the
conversion efficiency of said downstream substrate is maxi-
mized.
1. An apparatus for producing carbon black which com-
prises:
(a) a carbon black reactor having at least a combustion zone,
(b) a means for introducing combustion gas in a precombus-
tion or combustion zone of said carbon black reactor in a
manner to produce a vortex of combustion gases traveling
axially in said reactor, and
(c) a means for producing an axially moving vortex of fluid
which contains feedstock internally to said comoustion
gas vortex said means for producing a feedstock contain-
ing vortex comprising (1) a first centrally located tubular
member with a feedstock outlet nozzle at the downstream
end and (2) a second tubular member, closed at both ends,
and disposed about said first tubular member to form an
annular space, the downstream end of said second member
being located upstream of said feedstock outlet, said sec-
ond member having an inlet means for cooling air at the
upstream end and a plurality of tangential slots circumfer-
entially disposed at the downstream end to produce a flow
of a fluid which contains feedstock in a vortex of cooling
air moving axially in said reactor interfacing with the
vortex of (b) under conditions to produce carbon black.
4,394,352
MELT RECHARGE APPARATUS
Robert W. Helda, deceased, late of Scottsdaie, Ariz.; by Cynthia
Hazeltine, executor. Phoenix, and H. Ming Liaw, Scottsdaie,
both of Ariz., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed Mar. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 130,913
Int. a.3 C30B 15/02
U.S. a. 422—232 3 Claims
4,394,351
DUAL-MONOLITH CATALYTIC CONVERTER WITH
SECONDARY AIR INJECTION
Richard A. Cast, Southfield, Mich., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,843
Int. a.3 FOIN 3/32
U.S. a. 422—171 6 Qaims
/tf MOVEABLE GATE
VALVE
JOPOLTCRTSTALLINE
MATERIAL
J500MKT
i?HEAT DEFOBMABLE
SumOT MEMBERS
1. For use with an exhaust gas pulsed air supply means
providing a pulsed air supply, a dualmonolith catalytic con-
verter adapted to receive exhaust gases and having an up-
stream located substrate with a catalyst and an in-line down-
stream located substrate with a catalyst cooperating to purify
1. An improved recharging apparatus including a container
into which charge material can be loaded, wherein the im-
provement comprises thermally deformable tantalum support
means closing an end of said container and capable at room
temperature of supporting the weight of said charge material,
said means deformable at an elevated temperature to release
said charge material.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1151
4,394,353
SEPARATION OF RARE EARTH METALS USING A
CATION EXCHANGER
Tetsuya Miyake, Tokyo; Kunihiko Takeda, Yokohama; Hatsuki
Onitsuka, Fujisawa; Kazuo Okuyama, Yokohama, and Yasuki
Shimamura, Fuji, all of Japan, assignors to Asahi Kasei Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 213,110
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 19, 1979, 54-165245;
Dec. 20, 1979, 54-166087; Apr. 30, 1980, 55-57472; Aug. 5, 1980,
55-107302; Aug. 8, 1980, 55-109068; Aug. 9, 1980, 55-109644;
Aug. 11, 1980, 55-110068; Aug. 12, 1980, 55-110493; Aug. 27,
1980, 55-117968
Int. a.' COIF 77/00
U.S. a. 423—21.5 10 Claims
1. In a process for the separation of one rare earth metal from
another in a mixture of rare earth metals by passing a retaining
agent solution through a bed of a cation exchanger to convert
the cation exchanger into that of a retaining agent type, passing
a solution of the mixture through the cation exchanger to form
a rare earth metal adsorption zone on the bed of the cation
exchanger, passing a complexing agent solution through the
cation exchanger to effect migration of the rare earth metal
adsorption zone through the bed of the cation exchanger and
separating a fraction of one of the rare earth metals, the im-
provement which comprises using as the cation exchanger a
cation exchanger having a micro-void volume ratio of 0.58 to
0.95 and a degree of crosslinking of 8 to 17 or having a micro-
void volume ratio of 0.50 to 0.95 and a degree of crosslinking
of 17 to 80 and passing the materials through the cation ex-
changer at a rate such that the migration velocity of the rare
earth metal adsorption zone through the cation exchanger is
^ from about 5 m per day to about 500 m per day.
It
4,394,354
SILVER REMOVAL WITH HALOGEN IMPREGNATED
ACTIVATED CARBON
Ronald S. Joyce, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Calgon Carbon
Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 305,889
Int. CI.' C22B 11/00
U.S. CI. 423—25 6 Claims
1. A process for removing the anionic silver thiosulfate
complex from an aqueous, solution comprising contacting said
solution with halogen impregnated activated carbon contain-
ing at least 0.1 weight percent halogen, said halogen being
selected from the group consisting of iodine, bromine or any
combination of iodine and bromine.
4,394,355
RECOVERY OF CATALYTICALLY-USEFUL COBALT
AND LIKE METAL MOIETIES FROM THEIR SOLID
OXALATES WITH EDTA SALTS
James D. Fnige', Pampa, Tex., assignor to Celanese Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,251
Int. a.3 C07C 51/235. 55/07; COIG 51/00, 3/00
U.S. a. 423—27 9 Claims
1. In a process for treating a solid comprising the oxalate of
a metal of the group consisting of cobalt, copper, and manga-
nese to recover therefrom an aqueous solution containing a
water-soluble salt of said metal substantially free from oxalate
moiety, the improvement which comprises:
leaching said solid with an aqueous solution of a water-solu-
ble salt of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) to
form a leach liquor containing in solution the metal moiety
of said metal oxalate in the form of the EDTA-metal
complex;
mixing said leach liquor with a solution containing dissolved
calcium ions in a quantity at least stoichiometrically equiv-
alent to the oxalate ions contained in said leach liquor to
form a mixture comprising a precipitate of solid calcium
oxalate and a solution containing said EDTA-metal com-
plex;
separating said calcium oxalate precipitate from said mixture
to produce a clarified solution of said EDTA-metal com-
plex;
acidifying said clarified solution with an effective amount of
a strong acid to decompose said complex to form solid
EDTA and a dissolved salt of said metal; and
removing said solid EDTA from said acidified solution
leaving said metal salt dissolved therein.
8. In a process for oxidizing an organic feedstock with a
catalyst comprising cobalt in a liquid phase comprising a car-
boxylic acid to produce a liquid oxidate comprising a carbox-
ylic acid and wherein cobalt initially contained in said catalyst
is converted to cobalt oxalate, in which process said cobalt
oxalate is separated as a solid from said oxidate and converted
to a cobalt salt which can be re-used as catalyst in said process,
the improvement which comprises;
leaching said solid with an aqueous solution of a water-solu-
ble salt of ethylenediaminetetraacetic acid (EDTA) to
form a leach liquor containing in solution the cobalt moi-
ety of said cobalt oxalate in the form of the EDTA-cobalt
complex:
mixing said leach liquor with a solution containing a quantity
of calcium ions sufficient to react with said complex to
form a mixture comprising a precipitate of solid calcium
oxalate and a solution containing said EDTA-cobalt com-
plex;
separating said calcium oxalate precipitate from said mixture
to produce a remaining clarified solution of said EDTA
cobalt complex;
acidifying said clarified solution with an effective amount of
a strong acid other than sulfuric acid to decompose said
complex to form solid EDTA and a dissolved cobalt salt;
removing said solid EDTA from said acidified solution
leaving a clarified cobalt salt solution; and
returning said clarified cobalt salt solution to said oxidation
process for re-use as catalyst therein.
4,394,356
RECUPERATION OF CYANIDES FROM RINSING
SOLUTIONS OF CYANIDRIC PROCESSES FOR
ELETRODEPOSITION OF METALS
Michael F. Peuser, Rua Princesa Isabel, 266, Apto 181, Sao
Paulo 04601, and Jose B. Bartolo, Nicolau-210-Diadema, San
Paulo 09900, both of Brazil
PCT No. PCT/BR80/00002, § 371 Date Sep. 25, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Sep. 25, 1980, PCT Pub. No. W 080/01 563, PCT Pub.
Date Aug. 7, 1980
PCT Filed Jan. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 285,222
Int. €1.1 COIC 3/08: C02F 1/58
U.S. a. 423—43 3 Qaims
1. A process for recuperation of a cyanide from a rinsing
solution of a cyanidric process for electrodeposition of copper,
the solution containing a soluble complex cyanide of an alkali
metal and copper, comprising adding to the solution a soluble
simple salt of bivalent copper reacting with said complex
cyanide and any free cyanide ions in said solution to form and
precipitate an insoluble cyanide of copper, and separating said
precipitant for reuse, said precipitation, being conducted with-
out using hydrochloric acid by adding sodium bisulfite to the
solution to reduce the pH of the solution to between 1.5 and 4.0
and the copper ion of the simple salt to a cuprous state for
precipitating insoluble cuprous cyanide.
3. A process for recujseration of a cyanide from a rinsing
solution of a cyanidric process for electrodeposition of cad-
mium, the solution containing a soluble complex cyanide of an
alkali metal and cadmium, comprising conducting the process
in two stages, in a first whereof the solution is diluted to a
cadmium content below 17 g/1, a soluble salt of zinc and a
strong acid is added to the diluted solution to precipitate insol-
uble zinc cyanide, and the precipitate is separated from the
solution, and in the second stage adding to the solution from
1152
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
the first stage an alkali compound reacting with cadmium ions
in the solution to form and precipitate an insoluble cadmium
salt, and separating the precipitate.
4,394,357
SEPARATION OF COBALT AND NICKEL BY
OXIDATIVE PRECIPITATION WITH
PEROXYMONOSULFURIC ACID
Diana M. Mounsey, Runcorn, and David B. Mobbs, Handforth,
both of England, assignors to Interox Chemicals Ltd., London,
England
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,575
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Dec. 5, 1980,
8039084
Int. aj COIG 51/00
U.S. a. 423—140 19 Claims
1. In a process for the separation of cobalt and nickel from an
aqueous acidic sulphate solution thereof in which Caro's Acid
is introduced into said aqueous solution, and is at least partially
neutralised by introduction of a neutralising agent, resulting in
a cobalt-containing precipitate, and the resultant precipitate is
separated from the residual aqueous phase, the improvement
which comprises employing at least a stoichiometric amount of
Caro's Acid based on the amount of peroxomonosulphuric
acid required theoretically to oxidise all the cobalt in solution
to cobalt (111), said Caro's Acid containing not more than 1
mole of hydrogen peroxide per 8 moles of peroxomonosulphu-
ric acid, maintaining the aqueous solution of cobalt and nickel
at a pH of not more than pH 4.7 and at a minimum pH ranging
from pH 3.1 when the nickel to cobalt mole ratio in the solu-
tion before Caro's Acid introduction is 1:1 or lower up to pH
3.5 when said mole ratio is 40:1 or higher, by introduction
thereinto of an alkali metal hydroxide or carbonate, for a per-
iod of at least 2 hours after introduction of Caro's Acid solu-
tion commences, during which period cobalt hydroxide pre-
cipitates out of solution.
4,394,359
PROCESS FOR MAKING GRANULATED CONDENSED
PHOSPHATES
Horst-Dieter Wasel-Nielen; Alexander Maurer, and Renate
Adrian, all of Hiirth, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,425
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 23,
1980, 3035805
Int. OJ COIB 25/40
U.S. a. 423—305 8 Qaims
1. A process for converting pulverulent, water-soluble,
condensed phosphates of the following general formula (I)
M20(MP03)„
in which M stands for sodium, potassium or ammonium and n
stands for a number between 4 and about 100, to a granulate,
wherein the pulverulent, water-soluble, condensed phosphate
is thoroughly agitated and granulated in the presence of water
and of a phosphate salt other than the condensed phosphate,
which comprises: thoroughly agitating and granulating a con-
donsed phosphate of the general formula (I) or a mixture of the
phosphate with an anhydrous or partially hydrated alkali metal
phosphate in the presence of water and aiding the formation of
a granulate from the pulverulent material with a granulating
aid comprising an ammonium polyphosphate of the following
general formula (II)
H(n.m) + 2 (NH4);„P„03„+|
in which n stands for an integral average value of 3 to 1000, m
stands for a whole number of up to n -i- 2, and the m/n-ratio is
between about 1.0 and 1.67, the water being used in a propor-
tion of about 0.05 to 5.0 weight %, the ammonium polyphos-
phate of general formula (II) being used in a granulation-assist-
ing proportion of about 0.003 to 1 weight %- and the alkali
metal phosphate being used in a proportion of up to about 40
weight %, the percentages being all based on the quantity of
the condensed phosphate of general formula (I).
4,394,358
PRODUCTION OF GRANULAR ALKALI METAL
DIPHOSPHATES OR TRIPHOSPHATES
Alexander Maurer; Renate Adrian; Herbert Panter, all of
Hiirth; Gero Heymer, and Dieter Nblker, both of Erftstadt, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,100
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 23,
1980, 3035820
Int. aj COIB 25/30
U.S. a. 423—305 9 Qaims
1. In the process for making granular, partially or com-
pletely hydrated alkali metal diphosphates or triphosphates,
wherein pulverulent, anhydrous or partially hydrated alkali
metal diphosphates or triphosphates are intensively mixed and
granulated in the presence of water and a phosphate salt other
than the alkali metal diphosphate or triphosphate, the improve-
ment which comprises: intensively mixing and granulating
alkali metal diphosphates or triphosphates consisting to an
extent of at least 20% of particles with a size of less than 0.045
mm and hydrated to an extent of less than 90%, based on the
phosphates' theoretical content of water of hydration, in the
presence of a quantity of water at most necessary for com-
pletely hydrating the alkali metal diphosphates or triphos-
phates and in the presence of an ammonium polyphosphate,
this latter presenting a degree of condensation of 3 up to about
1000 and being used in proportion of about 0.5 to 50 weight %,
based on the quantity of water used.
4,394,360
PROCESS FOR REDUCING IRON IN PHOSPHORIC
ACID SOLUTION
Klaus Schrodter, and Klaus Lehr, both of Hiirth, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,811
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 4,
1980, 3045645
Int. aj COIB 15/16. 25/26
U.S. a. 423—317 9 Qaims
1. A process for reducing iron from the trivalent to bivalent
oxidation stage with the aid of a reductant, the iron being
present in phosphoric acid solution, which comprises using red
phosphorus as the reductant and effecting the reduction in the
presence of at least 5 ppm of copper, based on the weight of the
solution at temperatures within the range of 10° to 90° C. by
keeping the red phosphorus in contact with the iron-containing
phosphoric acid solution over a period at least necessary for
the reduction of iron.
4,394,361
METHOD OF PURIFYING PHOSPHORIC ACID
Sidney Berkowitz, Highland Park, and Richard A. Mohr, Mar-
tinsville, both of N.J., assignors to FMC Corporation, Phila-
delphia, Pa.
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,279
Int. aj COIB 25/16
U.S. a. 423—321 S 12 Claims
1. In the purification of wet process phosphoric acid by the
solvent extraction of sulfuric acid acidulated phosphatic ores
July 19, l«l3
CHEMICAL
1153
wherein there is formed an aqueous phase containing the major
part of the impurities and a solvent phase containing purified
phosphoric acid and separating both said phases, and recover-
ing the phosphoric acid the improvement which comprises
extracting the phosphoric acid with an organic, essentially
water-insoluble liquid extractant consisting essentially of an
organic phosphate selected from the group consisting of an
alkyl phosphate, an aryl phosphate or an alkyl aryl phosphate
diluted with an organic solvent selected from the class consist-
ing of diisobutyl ketone, acetophenone, benzophenone, 3-octa-
none, 1-octanol and 1-decanol.
ammonium compounds to effect a liquid phase reaction and
form alkaline-earth compound precipitation products in the
form of granules which are difficultly soluble in water, with-
drawing the said granules from the bottom of the said reaction
chamber and separately recovering from said reaction cham-
ber a third aqueous stream containing an essentially particle-
free aqueous solution of free ammonia and a fourth aqueous
stream containing an aqueous solution of free ammonia and
suspended particles of said precipitation products.
4,394,362
CRYSTALLINE SILICATE PARTICLE HAVING AN
ALUMINUM-CONTAINING OUTER SHELL
Stephen J. Miller, San Francisco, Calif., assignor to Chevron
Research Company, San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,497
Int. aj COIB 33/28; BOIJ 29/06
U.S. a. 423—328 20 Qaims
1. A particle, comprising an inner portion and an outer
portion disposed as a shell around said inner portion wherein
said outer portion has the same crystal structure as said inner
portion, said inner portion comprising an intermediate pore
size crystaUine silicate having a silica:alumina mole ratio
greater than about 200:1, and said outer portion having a
silica:alumina mole ratio of less than about 100:1 and wherein
said particle is prepared by a process comprising:
(1) initiating crystallization in a crystallization medium sub-
stantially free of aluminum to produce the intermediate
pore size crystalline silicate;
(2) adding a source of aluminum to said crystallization me-
dium; and
(3) crystallizing onto said crystalline silicate the isostructural
outer portion which comprises alumina.
4,394,363
PROCESS FOR THE GRANULATION OF
PRECIPITATION PRODUCTS FORMED FROM
AMMONIUM COMPOUNDS
Egon Haese, Bochum; Rolf Willms, Witten, and Karl D. Schul-
theiss, Bochum, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Dr.
C. Otto & Comp. G.m.b.H., Bochum, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 115,648, Jan. 28, 1980, abandoned. This
application Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,880
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 29,
1979, 2903289
Int. Q.^ COIC 1/02
U.S. Q. 423—356 6 Claims
4,394,364
SEPARATION OF BORIC AOD FROM MIXTURES
THEREOF W ITH SULPHURIC ACID
Josef Hakl, Allschwil, Switzerland, assignor to Sandoz Ltd.,
Basel, Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 960,814, Nov. 15, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jul. 16, 1979, Ser. No. 57,740
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 16, 1977,
13992/77
Int. Q.' COIB i5//a 17/90
U.S. Q. 423—483 11 Qaims
1. A process for the separation of boric acid from a boric
acid-containing aqueous sulphuric acid mother liquor, the
concentration of boric acid in said mother liquor being at least
2% by weight based on the H2SO4, comprising adjusting the
concentration of the sulphuric acid towards 50% by weight
H2SO4, based on H2SO4 and H2O, with the proviso that the
final concentration lies within the range of from 49 to 51% by
weight, and with the further proviso that where the initial
sulphuric acid is dilute, the concentration thereof is adjusted
towards 50% by weight by distilling off water, and then sepa-
rating the boric acid which precipitates out of the mother
liquor.
1. A process for the granulation of precipitation products
formed from the reaction of ammonium compounds with alka-
line-earth compounds, which comprises introducing into a
liquid-filled reaction chamber above the bottom thereof a first
aqueous stream containing the said ammonium compounds and
introducing a second aqueous stream containing the said alka-
line-earth compounds such that the said alkaline-earth com-
pounds are immediately and intimately mixed with the said
4,394,365
METHOD FOR CURTAILING PHOSPHOROUS
IMPURITY IN THE PRODUCTION OF HYDROGEN
FLUORIDE
Bohdan Gnyra, Kingston, Canada, assignor to Alcan Interna-
tional Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,772
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 5, 1981,
8100110
Int. CI.' COIB 7/22
U.S. Q. 423—485 8 Qaims
1. A process for the production of hydrogen fluoride by
reaction of sulphuric acid of a concentration in excess of 95%
by weight at a temperature of 195°-240° C. with fluorspar,
containing phosphorous impurities, characterised in that for
the purpose of reducing the phosphorous impurities in the
generated gaseous hydrogen fluoride, the reaction of sulphuric
acid with fluorspar is carried out in the presence of aluminium
sulphate in an amount of about 0.4-2.5%, expressed as % AI on
the basis of the fluorspar.
4,394,366
PROCESS FOR PRODUCTION OF COCL2 SOLUTION
FROM COBALTIC OXIDE-HYDRATE
Victor A. Ettel, Mississauga; Eric A. Devuyst, Toronto, and
Alexander Illis, Mississauga, all of Canada, assignors to Inco
Limited, Toronto, Canada
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,059
Qaims priority, application Canada, Nov. 14, 1980, 364745
Int. Q.' COIG 53/08
U.S. Q. 423—493 5 Qaims
1. A process for producing cobaltous chloride from cobaltic
hydroxide while avoiding the generation of chlorine which
comprises slurrying in water cobaltic hydroxide to be dis-
solved and treating the resulting slurry with a reducing agent
from the group consisting of methanol, formaldehyde and
formic acid and with hydrochloric acid such that the contact
1154
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
of said acid with said slurry occurs in the presence of said
reducing agent and the rate of said acid addition is controlled
to maintain the slurry at a pH above 1 .
4,394,368
HIGH TEMPERATURE HYDROLYSIS OF ALUMINUM
SULFATE SOLUTIONS
Donald E. Shanks, Reno, Nev., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Interior,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,539
Int. a.3 COIF 7/26. 7/74
U.S. a. 423—556 3 Qaims
4.394,367
PROCESS FOR RECOVERY OF CHLORINE FROM
HYDROGEN CHLORIDE
Elton G. Foster, Houston, Tex., assignor to Shell Oil Co., Hous-
ton, Tex.
Filed Mar. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 357,031
Int. C\? COIB 7/04
U.S. a. 423—502 6 Gaims
,n>tf jmSOfiPTiOM ZONE
secoNc
4aSQf*PTiON
/owe" STRlOPlNC
ZONE t .
OilOP'Wf
SiCONO DiSTlU*T'ON PQQOUC^
STRtPPrtGONe XON£
-d
220 2*0 260
TEMPERATURE. "C
1. A process for hydrolysis of dilute aqueous aluminum
sulfate solution containing about 100-300 grams per liter of
aluminum sulfate and minor amounts of impurities consisting
essentially of maintaining said solution in a closed system at a
hydrolysis temperature above 300° C. for a time sufficient to
convert a high percentage of the aluminum sulfate to the insol-
uble basic aluminum sulfate, A1(0H)S04, and subsequently
quenching the closed system in water.
1. In a process wherein chlorine is produced by contacting
oxygen and hydrogen chloride and minor amounts of organic
impurities in the presence of a chloride of a metal having an
atomic number of 21 to 30, both inclusive, at hydrogen chlo-
ride oxidizing conditions in a reaction zone thereby forming a
reaction mixture comprising chlorine, hydrogen chloride,
water, carbon dioxide and halogenated impurities, the steps
which comprise
(a) contacting said reaction mixture in a first absorption with
zone with sulfuric acid having a temperature lower than
the temperature of the reaction mixture exiting the reac-
tion zone to partially cool and to dry said reaction mix-
ture;
(b) contacting the partially cooled reaction product from
step (a) in a second absorption zone with carbon tetrachlo-
ride thereby absorbing in said carbon tetrachloride sub-
stantially all of the halogenated impurities and a small
amount of the chlorine contained in said partially cooled
reaction product;
(c) cooling the unabsorbed product from step (b) in a con-
densing zone thereby forming in said condensing zone a
liquid phase consisting essentially of chlorine and hydro-
gen chloride, and a vapor phase consisting essentially of
unreacted oxygen, carbon dioxide and hydrogen chloride;
(d) stripping said liquid phase from step (c) in a first stripping
zone to remove as overhead hydrogen chloride and re-
moving chlorine as bottom product;
(e) stripping the absorption product from step (b) ina second
stripping zone to remove chlorine as an overhead stream
and leaving a bottom product comprising carbon tetra-
chloride, and impurities which originated from the reac-
tion zone; and
(0 distilling by fractional distillation said bottoms product
from step (e) in a distillation zone to recover carbon tetra-
chloride as overhead product, said distillation column
being operated at a pressure sufficient to remove said
impurities as a liquid bottoms product.
4,394,369
HYDROGEN PEROXIDE PROCESS
Wayne Ranbom, Pennington, N.J., assignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,592
Int. a.3 COIB 15/02
U.S. a. 423—588 14 Qaims
1. An improved process for producing hydrogen peroxide
by the alternate reduction and oxidation of a substituted an-
thraquinone and its tetrahydro derivative as the working com-
pound, dissolved in a solvent to constitute a liquid working
solution wherein the improvement resides in using a solvent
comprising an N-substituted-2-pyrrolidone wherein the substi-
tuted moiety is a hydrocarbon containing 6 to 12 carbon atoms.
4,394,370
BONE GRAFT MATERIAL FOR OSSEOUS DEFECTS
AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Steven R. JefTeries, 5802 Leith Walk, Baltimore, Md. 21239
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,367
Int. aj A61K 9/00. 35/32
U.S. a. 424—15 12 Qaims
1. A bone graft material capable of inducing the formation of
osseous tissue in the animal in which it is implanted, said bone
graft material consisting essentially of a collagen conjugate
containing:
from about 65 to about 95 weight percent reconstituted
collagen having dispersed substantially uniformly therein
from about 35 to about 5 weight percent of (a) demineralized
bone particles, (b) solubilized bone morphogenic protein,
or (c) mixtures of demineralized bone particles and solubi-
lized bone morphogenic protein,
said bone graft material adapted to induce the formation of
osseous tissue when implanted in an animal.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1155
' 4,394,371
DENTRIFRICE PREPARATION
Giadnto G. Barberio, UmstoD, England, assignor to Colgate-
Palmolive Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,260
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 7, 1981,
81/10857
Int. Q.3 A61K 7/16, 7/18
U.S. Q. 424—52 4 Qaims
1. A dentifrice preparation in an unlined aluminium tube
containing a dentifrice vehicle and dispersed therein a non-
toxic anticaries amount of a water-soluble alkali metal mono-
fluorophosphate, 20-75% by weight of dentally acceptable
alkaline earth metal orthosphosphate polishing material,
0.01-20% by weight of a water-soluble sodium trimetaphos-
phate and an amount of at least 0.4% by weight phytic acid
effective to reduce attack by the dentifrice on the aluminium of
an unlined aluminium tube.
4,394,372
PROCESS FOR MAKING LIPID MEMBRANE
STRUCTURES
James L. Taylor, Naperville, III., assignor to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 219,186, Dec. 22, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,567
Int. Q.3 A61K 45/02. 37/26. 47/00
U.S. Q. 424—85 18 Qaims
1. A process for producing vesicles wherein a solution con-
taining lipids, amphiphiles and other membrane materials,
capable of forming vesicles, in a solvent system is dispersed in
an aqueous solution and, subsequently, at least a portion of that
solvent system is stripped off, characterized in that said solvent
system comprises at least two organic components, Si and S2,
wherein:
(a) Si is highly soluble in the aqueous solution;
(b) S2 is hydrophobic;
(c) $2 is more volatile than the aqueous solution;
(d) the membrane materials are not entirely soluble in S2
alone;
(e) the mixture of Si and S2 forms an interface with the
aqueous solution; and
(0 the membrane materials may be dissolved in a mixture of
S) and S2.
' ' 4,394,373
METHOD OF ACHIEVING HEMOSTASIS -=
William G. Malette, 667 Parkwood La., Omaha, Nebr. 68132,
and Herbert J. Quigley, Jr., 9511 Mockingbird Dr., Omaha,
Nebr. 68127
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,321
Int. Q.3 A61K 31/60. 35/56
U.S. Q. 424—95 14 Qaims
1. The method of achieving hemostasis in bleeding open
wounds which comprises placing chitosan in contact with the
wound.
4,394,374
tHYMUS GLAND EXTRACTS
Richard N. Ushijima, 43 Nanea Ave., Wahiawa, Hi. 96786
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,581
Int. Q.J A61K 7/32
U.S. Q. 424—95 16 Qaims
1. A process for producing a thymus extract in the substan-
tial absence of added acids and organic solvents comprising:
comminuting defatted thymus glands;
mixing the comminuted glands with water at a ratio of not
more than 300 g of comminuted glands per 400 ml of
water;
maintaining the resulting mixture at an elevated temperature
and for a time sufficient that large proteins and proteolytic
enyzymes are at least partially denatured;
mechanically separating the mixture, by centrifugation or
equivalent means, into oils, undissolved solids, and an
aqueous solution including protein substances;
decanting to isolate the aqueous solution;
after the aforesaid steps, forming a precipitate including the
protein substances by adding a source of sulfate ions to the
aqueous solution in an amount sufficient to produce a
precipitate yield at least as great as a yield obtained when
from 400 to 600 ml. of distilled water are mixed with each
300 g. of comminuted glands to produce the aqueous
solution and from 9.5 to eleven parts to saturated ammo-
nium sulfate solution are combined with each seven parts
of the aqueous solution at room temperature;
separating the precipitate from supernatant liquid by centrif-
ugation or equivalent means;
combining the precipitate with water so that a portion of the
precipitate dissolves to form an extract solution;
dializing the extract solution to remove dissolved, low mo-
lecular weight substances from the extract solution; and
purifying the extract solution by removing any undissolved
precipitate from the extract solution by centrifugation or
equivalent means.
4,394,375
CEPHALOSPORIN DERIVATIVES, AND
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THEM
Peter H. Bentley; Kenneth D. Hardy, and Peter H. Milner, all
of Horsham, England, assignors to Beecham Group Limited,
England
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 271,008
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 6, 1980,
8018674
Int. Q.^ A61K 31/545: C07D 501/57
U.S. Q. 424—114 13 Qaims
1. A compound of formula (I) or a pharmaceutically accept-
able salt or in vivo hydrolysable ester thereof:
£H20H ^
R.CH.CONH-^
I
NH
(I)
R^
r2
CO
I
r^ 1
CH2A
C02H
1 3
N
O
wherein
R is phenyl, 4-hydroxyphenyl, or a 5- or 6-membered hetero-
cyclic ring containing up to three heteroatoms selected
from oxygen, sulphur or nitrogen, optionally substituted
with hydroxy, amino, halogen or Ci-6alkoxy;
R' represents hydrogen or Ci-e alkyl:
R2 and R^ are the same or different and represent hydrogen,
Ci-6 alkyl, halogen, amino, hydroxy, or C|-6alkoxy;
X represents oxygen or sulphur; and
A represents hydrogen, or acetoxy.
4,394,376
METHOD FOR PREVENTING
HYPERTRIGLYCERIDEMIA
Hiroshi Kamimae, Yokohama, and Tadashi Ishikawa,
Sagamihara, both of Japan, assignors to Nihon Nosan Kogyo
K.K., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Feb. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 351,176
Qaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 25, 1981, 56-025428
Int. Q.5 A61K 33/18
U.S. Q. 424—150 5 Qaims
1. A method for preventing hypertriglyceridemia in humans
1156
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
comprising ingesting a hypertriglyceridemia preventing /or fungi which comprises contacting the insects, mites, nema-
amount of iodine-enriched whole egg or egg yolk in the daily todes and/or fungi with an insecticidally, miticidally, nemato-
diet. cidally and/or fungicidally effective amount of at least one
amide phosphorothiolate derivative as defmed in claim 1.
4,394,377
RUMINANT ANIMAL PERFORMANCE BY ^
CO-ADMINISTERING CHOLINE AND PROPIONATE
ENCHANCERS
Howard R. Spires, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to Syntax (U.S.A.)
Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,001
Int. CIJ A61K 37/00. 31/35. 31/14
U.S. a. 424—177 32 Qaims
1. A method for increasing the availability of supplemental
dietary choline to an animal with a developed rumen, which
method comprises co-administering a diet-supplementing
amount of choline or a choline compound with a propionate-
enhancing amount of a propionate-enhancing antibiotic com-
pound.
4,394,378
3-(TRIMETHOXYSILYL) PROPYLDIDECYLMETHYL
AMMONIUM SALTS AND METHOD OF INHIBITING
GROWTH OF MICROORGANISMS THEREWITH
Stewart E. Klein, Richardson La., Harrison, N.Y. 10528
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,319
Int. a.' C07F 7/10: A61L 13/00
U.S. a. 424—184 9 Qaims
1. A silyl quaternary ammonium compound having the
formula
C10H21
(CHjO)3Si{CH2)3— N®— CH3 X©
Cio— H21
wherein X is selected from the group consisting of fluoride,
chloride, bromide, iodide, sulfate and acetate.
4,394,380
2-(2-ALKOXYALKYL)-l,2,4-TRIAZOLE COMPOUNDS
AND THEIR USE AS FUNGICIDES
Sugavanam Balasubramanyan, Wokingham, and Margaret C.
Shephard, Maidenhead, both of England, assignors to Imperial
Chemical Industries PLC, London, England
Continuation of Ser. No. 882,205, Feb. 27, 1978, Pat. No.
4,315,016, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 720,664,
Sep. 7, 1976, abandoned. This application Jul. 24, 1981, Ser. No.
286,552
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 10, 1975,
37242/75
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 9, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.3 AOIN 43/64; C07D 249/08
U.S. a. 424—269 9 Claims
1. A compound of general formula:
4,394,379
AMIDE PHOSPHOROTHIOLATE DERIVATIVES AND
THEIR USE AS PESTICIDES
Osamu Kirino, Ashiya; Masachika Hirano, Ibaraki; Hisami
Takeda, and Toshiro Kato, both of Takarazuka, all of Japan,
assignors to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited, Osaka,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 58,565, Jul. 18, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jan. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 113,133
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 21, 1978, 53/89712
Int. a.^ AOIN 57/14: C07F 9/165. 9/40
U.S. a. 424—211 13 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
RiY X
Ml /
PSCH2CON
/
R2O
CHCOOR3
wherein X is an oxygen or sulfur atom, Y is an oxygen or sulfur
atom or imino group, Ri and R2, which may be the same or
different, are each a C1-C3 alkyl group, R3 is a C1-C4 alkyl
group, R4 is a hydrogen atom or methyl group, R5 is a C1-C3
alkyl, methoxy or ethoxy group, Z is a hydrogen atom, a
methyl group or chlorine atom and n is 1 or 2.
10. A method for controlling insects, mites, nematodes and-
N — N—
N
■C— OR5
I
H
wherein R3 is alkyl having up to 5 carbon atoms, phenyl op-
tionally substituted with one substituent selected from the class
consisting of halogen, nitro or alkyl having up to 4 carbon
atoms, or benzyl optionally substituted on the a-carbon atom
with alkyl having up to 4 carbon atoms, and R5 is alkyl having
up to 5 carbon atoms, alkenyl having up to 5 carbon atoms, or
a fungicidal acid salt of such a compound.
7. A method of combating fungal diseases in a plant, said
method consisting essentially of the step of applying to the
plant, seed of the plant or to the locus of the plant or seed, a
fungicidally effective amount of a compound or salt as claimed
in claim 1.
4,394,381
METHOD FOR THE RELIEF OF PAIN
George F. Sherrill, Newport Beach, Calif., assignor to George F.
and Irene Sherrill 1978 Trust No. 1 and George F. and Irene
Sherrill 1978 Trust No. 2, both of Newport Beach, CaUf. part
interest to each
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 29,698, Apr. 13, 1979, Pat. No.
4,267,007, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 781,170, Mar. 25,
1977, abandoned. This application Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,563
Int. CI.3 A61K 31/40, 31/14. 31/505. 31/44
U.S. a. 424—274 20 Oaims
1. A method for the relief in humans of pain which is suscep-
tible to topical treatment comprising the topical application to
the distressed areas of a person of an amount of an anesthetic
composition effective to relieve said pain, wherein the compo-
sition comprises an effective amount of at least 0.1% captan
and an effective amount of surface active quaternary ammo-
nium salt bactericide.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1157
°l I 4,394,382
DIHYDROBENZOPYRAN COMPOUNDS AND
PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITION COMPRISING
SAID COMPOUNDS
Masami Shiratsuchi, Musashimurayama; Noboru Shimizu,
Higashimurayama; Hiromichi Shigyo, Fuchu; Yoshinori
Kyotani, Higashiyamato; Hisashi Kunieda, Higa-
shimurayama; Kiyoshi Kawamura, Tokorozawa; Seiichi Sato;
Toshihiro Akashi, both of Higashimurayama; Masahiko
Nagakura, Sayama; Naotoshi Sawada, Kawasaki, and Yasumi
Uchida, Ichikawa, all of Japan, assignors to Kowa Company,
Ltd., Japan
Filed Jun. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 271,927
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 17, 1980, 55/80841;
Dec. 25, 1980, 55/182854
Int. CI.' A61K 31/35: C07D 311/04
U.S. CI. 424-283 3 Claims
1. A compound represented by the following
(I)
lower alkylene group or a — CONH-lower alkylene
group, and
n represents 1 or 2.
(B-0N02)„ -
wherein
A represents a direct bond or the bond — CH2— O— ,
R] represents a member selected from the group consisting
of a C3-C5 alkyl group, a hydroxy-(C3-C5 alkyl) group, a
lower alkylamino-lower alkyl group, a nitrato-(C3-C5
alkyl) group and a phenyl-(Ci-C5) alkyl group, provided
that the phenyl may be substituted by a lower alkoxy
group,
R2 represents a member selected from the group consisting
of hydrogen, halogen, OH, NO2, a carbamoyl group, a
lower alkyl group, a lower alkoxy group, a lower alkyl-
eneoxy group and an acetyl group,
R3 represents hydrogen or NO2
B represents a direct bond, a C1-C7 alkylene group, a — O—
lower alkylene group or a —CONH-lower alkylene
group, and
n represents 1 or 2;
and an acid addition salt thereof
2. A pharmaceutical composition comprising (1) an amount,
effective for treatment of diseases of the cardiovascular sys-
tem, of a compound represented by the following formula (I)
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof and
(2) a pharmaceutically acceptable diluent or carrier.
(I)
(B-0N02)„
4,394,383
N-ALKOXYSULFENYLCARBAMATES USEFUL AS
INSECTICIDES
Mitsuyasu KawaU; Noriharu Umetsu, and Tetsuo R. Fukuto, all
of Riverside, Calif., assignors to Regents of the University of
California, Berkeley, Calif.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,437
Int. CV AOIN 47/24: C07D 307/86: C07C 161/00
U.S. CI. 424—285 9 Qaims
1. A composition having pesticidal activity comprising
about 60 to 95 percent by weight of a carbamate of the formula:
_ O
II
RlOC— N— S— OR2
I
R
wherein R is a hydrocarbyl group containing from 1 to 12
carbon atoms; Ri is a hydrocarbyl group containing from 1 to
20 carbon atoms or is a benzoheterocyclic ring containing 5 or
6 members in the heterocyclic portion, said heterocyclic por-
tion containing one or two O or S atoms; and R2 is a hydro-
carbyl group containing only atoms of carbon and hydrogen
and from 1 to 24 carbon atoms, or is a substituted hydrocarbyl
group of 1-24 carbon atoms containing, in addition to atoms of
carbon and hydrogen, at least one other atom; and from about
5 to about 40 percent by weight of a polysulfide derivative of
said carbamate of the formula:
O
II
RlOC— N— S„— OR2
wherein n is an integer between 2 and about 4 and the other
variables are as above.
wherein
A represents a direct bond or the bond — CH2 — O — ,
R] represents a member selected from the group consisting
of a C3-C5 alkyl group, a hydroxy-(C3-C5)alkyl group, a
lower alkylamino-lower alkyl group, a nitrato-(C3-C5
alkyl) group and a phenyl-(Ci-C5 alkyl) group, provided
that the phenyl may be substituted by a lower alkoxy
group,
R2 represents a member selected from the group consisting
of hydrogen, halogen, OH, NO2, a carbamoyl group, a
lower alkyl group, a lower alkoxy group, a lower alkyl-
eneoxy group and acetyl group,
R3 represents hydrogen or NO2,
B represents a direct bond, a C1-C7 alkylene group, a — O—
4,394,384
AMINOTHIAZOLE CYCLOALKENYLOXYIMINO
ACETAMIDO CEPHEM DERIVATIVES
Takao Takaya, Kawanishi; Hisashi Takasugi, Kohamanishi;
Masayoshi Murata, Mino, and Akiteru Yoshioka, Kyoto, all
of Japan, assignors to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Sep. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 183,167
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 3, 1979,
7930515; Jun. 2, 1980, 8018006
Int. Q.^ A61K 31/545: C07D 501/34. 501/56
U.S. Q. 424—246 11 Qaims
1. A cephem compound of the formula:
S
N — r C— CONH— I 1^ ^|—
wherein
R' is amino or a protected amino group;
R2 is cyclopentenyl or cyclohexenyl;
R^ is carboxy or a protected carboxy group;
R5
R*
1158
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
R* is a group of the formula:
— CH2-R**'
wherein K*^ is lower alkanoyloxy or thiadiazolyhhio; and
R5 is hydrogen or lower alkyl; and pharmaceutical! y accept-
able salts thereof
11. A pharmaceutical composition comprising an effective
amount of a compound of claim 1 or pharmaceutical ly accept-
able salt thereof in association with a pharmaceutically accept-
able, substantially non-toxic carrier or excipient.
-continued
o
II
— CH2CHSNCOR' or
L I
R* CH3
O
R5
I
R*-
O
II
o
— N— C— O— N=C— (CH2)s-C=N— O— C— N— S— N— O-OR
4,394,385
TREATMENT OF GRAY MATTER EDEMA
Edward J. Cragoe, Jr., Lansdale, Pa., assignor to Merck & Co.,
Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Continuation of Ser, No. 209,187, Nov. 21, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 57,635, Jul. 16, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 879,998, Feb. 22,
1978, abandoned. This application Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No,
344,148
Int. CV A61K 31/34
U.S. a. 424—285 17 Qaims
1. A method of treating persons with gray matter edema
which comprises administering to such a person an effective
amount of a compound of the formulae:
CH3
where R' is — N^C
I
CHj CH3
COOH
COOH
I
II
wherein
R' is H. CH3 or CI
R2 is CH3 or CI
R^ is alkyl or alkenyl of one through six carbons; cycloalkyl
or cycloalkylalkyl of four through seven carbons; phenyl,
unsubstituted or substituted with chloro or methyl; ben-
zyl; or thienyl
R* is H, alkyl of one through five carbons, or R* and R^
taken together with the carbon to which they are attached
may be joined to form a cycloalkyl radical of five or six
carbons, and
R5 is (1) furyl, (2) thienyl, (3) phenyl, unsubstituted or substi-
tuted with methyl, methoxy or halo, or (4) benzyl, unsub-
stituted or substituted with methyl or halo
or the pharmaceutically acceptable salt, ester, or amide deriva-
tive thereof.
4,394,386
FLUORINATED CARBAMATE INSECTICIDES
William J. Middleton, Chadds Ford, Pa., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 139,797, Apr. 14, 1980, Pat. No. 4,323,578,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 65,485, Sep. 10, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jan, 11, 1982, Ser. No. 338,474
Int. Cl.^ AOIN 37/52; C07C 119/18
U.S. a. 424—298 6 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
CF3.
^ >=N— O— C— N— SOR wherein R is — N— C— OR',
R^S CH3 CH3
3
>
r3 CH3
/ I
, — N=CHC~SCH3,
\ , I
SR2 CH3
RZ is C1-C6 alkyl; C3-C6 alkenyl, or CH2
^^
R3 is CFXY, CON(CH3)2, CH2OCH3, or C1-C3 alkyl;
wherein X and Y are independently H or F;
R'» is H or CH3;
P5 is 0, 1 or 2;
R^or R^are independently H. C1-C4 alkyl, phenyl or phenyl
substituted with one atom of F, CI, Br or CH3;
provided that when:
R'* is CH3, R' must be
— N=C
/
R3
SR2
and R3 must be CFXY.
3. An insecticide composition consisting essentially of a
surfactant, diluent, and an effective amount of a compound of
claim 1.
4,394387
COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD OF COMBATTING
PEST EMPLOYING SUBSTITUTED BENZOPHENONE
HYDROZONES OR SEMICARBAZONES
Leonard G. Copping, Southwell; John C. Kerry, Nottingham;
Thomas I. Watkins, Nottingham; Robert J. Willis, Notting-
ham, and Bryan H. Palmer, Nottingham, all of England,
assignors to The Boots Company PLC, Nottingham, England
Division of Ser. No. 124,183, Feb. 25, 1980, Pat. No. 4,344,893,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 15,011, Feb. 26, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,918
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 1, 1978,
8002/78; Mar. 1, 1978, 8003/78
Int. a.3 AOIN 41/02, 43/40. 47/10, 47/28
U.S. a. 424—300 13 Claims
1. An insecticidal or acaricidal composition comprising an
inert carrier and an insecticidally or acaricidally effective
amount of a compound of formula I
I
(Rl)m
(0);^R3
in which m is 0 and n is 0 or m is 1 and n is 0 or 1; p is 0, 2 or
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1159
3, X is 0 or 1; R', R5 and R*' are hydrogen, alkyl, haloalkyl or
alkoxy or R' and an adjacent R^ group together with the
benzene to which they are attached form a naphthyl group; R^
and R* may be the same or different and are hydrogen; alkyl;
an ester group of formula R^XCO, where X is oxygen or
sulphur and R* is selected from the group consisting of alkyl
(optionally substituted by alkoxy, cycloalkyl, halogen, phenyl,
substituted, phenyl, naphthyl, phenoxy or substituted phe-
noxy), cycloalkyl, alkenyl, (optionally substituted by phenyl or
substituted phenyl), alkynyl, phenyl, substituted phenyl, 2-
naphthyl, furyl, thienyl, pyridyl, morpholinyl, piperidyl, and
thiamorpholinyl; an acyl group of formula R^CO where R' is
selected from the group consisting of hydrogen, alkyl, (option-
ally substituted by alkoxy, cycloalkyl, halogen, phenoxy or
substituted phenoxy), cycloalkyl, alkenyl (optionally substi-
tuted by phenyl or substituted phenyl), alkynyl, phenyl, substi-
tuted phenyl, 2-naphthyl, morpholinyl, piperidyl and thiamor-
pholinyl; (wherein when one of R* or R^ contains a substituted
phenyl group, the phenyl is substituted by one or more groups
selected from the group consisting C1-4 alkyl, C1-4 haloalkyl.
nitro, Ci-4 alkoxy, C1-4 alkylthio, C1-4 dialkylamino, phenyl
and halogen); a carbamoyl group of formula — CONR'^R"
where R'^and R" are the same or different and are hydrogen
or alkyl; or R^and R* together with the nitrogen to which they
are attached form the group piperidine, pyrrolidine, thiamor-
pholine or morpholine; R^ is alkyl, optionally substituted by
halogen; alkenyl; N,N-dialkylamino; or phenol, optionally
substituted by alkyl or halogen; with the proviso that when p
is 0, R2 and R^ are not both hydrogen.
RCF2X
J^ ^CH— CO— O— CH
R2 R3
Z Jr—/
Xr°x>^'
wherein RCF2X — , Y and Z are all meta or para to the carbon
to which the alkanoic acid ester group is attached, and X is O,
S, SO or SO2; Y and Z is each H, CI, F, Br, NO2, CH3 or
OCH3; R is H, F, CHF2 or CF3; R2 is ethyl, n-propyl, isopro-
pyl, isopropenyl or t-butyl; R3 is H, CN or — C=CH; and R4
is H, F, CI, CH3 or OCH3 or the optical isomers thereof
a relatively high ribonucleotide reductase level, an amount of
a compound according to the following formula effective to
inhibit ribonucleotide reductase
HO
Z
<>
C— R'
II
O
4,394,388
METHOD FOR THE CONTROL OF CATTLE GRUBS
EMPLOYING M-PHENOXYBENZYL AND
a-CYANO-M-FHENOXYBENZYL ESTERS OF
2-HALOALKYL(OXY-, THIO-, SULFINYL-, OR
SULFONYDPHENYL ALKANOIC ACIDS
Robert H. Schenkel, Yardley, Pa., assignor to American Cyana-
mid Company, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,055
Int. Cl.^ A61K 31/275. 31/235
U.S. CI. 424—304 8 Claims
1. A method for protecting ruminant, domestic, and farm
animals from infestation by the larvae of fiies of the family
Hypodermatidae comprising, applying topically to larvae-
infested animals a larvicidally effective amount of a compound
having the structural formula:
wherein Z and Z' are individually H or OH, at least one of Z
and Z' bemg OH, and R' is NHOH or O-phenyl.
6. A compound of the formula
(OH)„
O
II
C — O — phenyl
wherein n is 2 or 3.
8. A compound of the formula
HO
..M^„.„.
wherein Z is H or OH.
4,394,390
NASAL DOSAGE FORMS OF PROPRANOL
Anwar A. Hussain; Shinichiro Hirai, and Rima Bawarshi, all of
Lexington, Ky., assignors to University of Kentucky Research
Foundation, Lexington, Ky.
Division of Ser. No. 63,176, Aug. 3, 1979, Pat. No. 4,284,648.
This application Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,786
Int. CV A61K 9/06. 31/135: C07C 93/00
U.S. a. 424—330 11 Qaims
1. A pharmaceutically acceptable nasal composition, in
dosage unit form, for nasal administration to obtain a systemic
therapeutic )3-adrenergic blocking response in a warm-blooded
animal, consisting essentially of, per nasal dosage unit, (i) a
systemically therapeutically effective unit /3-adrenergic block-
ing amount of a compound having the formula
1 1 4,394,389
HYDROXYBENZOHYDROXAMIC ACIDS,
BENZAMIDES AND ESTERS AS RIBONUCLEOTIDE
REDUCTASE INHIBITORS
Bartholomeus van't Riet, 3419 Nobel Ave., Richmond, Va.
23222; Howard L. Elford, 3313 Gloucester Rd., Richmond,
Va. 23227, and Galen L. Wampler, 6938 Chamberlayne Rd.,
Mechanicsville, Va. 23111
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 16,472, Mar. 1, 1979, Pat. No.
4,263,322. This application Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,171
Int. a.3 A61K 31/235. 31/185; C07C 103/26. 69/78
U.S. a. 424—308 10 Qaims
1. A method of inhibiting ribonucleotide reductase which
comprises administering to a mammal carrying a tumor having
OH
I
OCH2CHCH2NHCH(CH3)2
or a nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable ester of salt thereof,
and (ii) a nontoxic pharmaceutically acceptable nasal carrier
therefor, said composition being formulated as a nasal ointment
or a nasal gel adapted for sustained release to the nasal mucosa.
11. Propranolol stearate.
1160
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,391
RADIOIMMUNOASSAY REAGENTS
Jan I. Thorell, Beleshogsvagen 1, S-21618 Malmo, Sweden
Filed Feb. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 122^12
Int. a.' A61K 45/00, 47/00; AOIN 25/10
U.S. a. 424—366 H Claims
1. A composition for separating free and bound radioligands
within a radioimmunoassay, said bound radioligand being
formed as a reaction product from reagents of the radioimmu-
noassay; the composition comprising individual particles capa-
ble of sedimenting in said assay and containing:
(1) as a first active component, an attenuator having a high
capacity to absorb emitted radiation of the radioligand and
being selected from the group consisting of silver, cad-
mium, tungsten, bismuth and oxides thereof, and
(2) as a second active component a material capable of bind-
ing said free radioligand or reaction product and being
selected from the group consisting of charcoal, antibodies,
antigens and biologically non-immune active binders.
4,394,392
PROCESSES FOR PRODUaNG COMPOSITE ICE
CONFECTIONS, AND PRODUCTS THEREOF
David Tresser, Bedford, England, assignor to Thomas J. Lipton,
Inc., Englewood Qiffs, N.J.
per No. PCr/GB80/00120, § 371 Date Mar. 20, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 17, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00190, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 5, 1981
PCT Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 244,797
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 20, 1979,
7925374; Jul. 20, 1979, 7925375; Jul. 20, 1979, 7925401; Jul. 20,
1979, 7925402; Jul. 20, 1979, 7925447
Int. a? A23G 9/04. 9/24
U.S. a. 426—101 14 Qaims
1. A process for producing a composite edible product con-
taining a dry edible material selected from the group consisting
of biscuits and wafers and a water-containing edible confection
selected from the group consisting of ice or ice cream which
comprise the steps of:
(a) spraying a relatively water-impermeable fat-containing
edible material which when measured at 46° C. has a
viscosity of 173 at least 10 poise, tjioo at least 2.0 poise, and
■T\CA at least 1.2 poise, from an atomizing spray gun onto a
dry edible material selected from the group consisting of
biscuits and wafers, and
(b) combining the water-containing edible confection with
the sprayed dry edible material.
4,394,393
METHOD FOR PEELING CITRUS FRUIT
Paul F. Sage, Box 191-F, Babson Park, Fla. 33827
Division of Ser. No. 141,376, Apr. 18, 1980, Pat, No. 4,318,339.
This application Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,380
Int. Q\? GOIN 33/02; A23N 7/00
U.S. a. 426—231 1 Qaim
coring the fruit;
slicing the fruit into twelve uniform segments;
placing the fruit segments in a conveyor to laterally trans-
port individual fruit segments;
sensing the position of a concave rotary carrier;
pushing the fruit segment into the concave rotary carrier
when the rotary carrier is at a predetermined loading
position;
confining the fruit segment to a radial position on the con-
cave rotary carrier;
forcing the fruit segment substantially towards the center of
the concave rotary carrier so that the peel of the fruit is
molded against the concave surface of the concave rotary
carrier;
rotating the rotary carrier;
forcing the fruit segment through a pointed concave sever-
ing knife having a concave surface substantially the same
as the concave surface in the rotary carrier and disposed
an incremental distance away from the rotary carrier at
least equal to the thickness of the peel and albedo layer of
the fruit segment, the severing knife being oriented so as
to have a substantial vertical component whereby the pulp
will fall from the severing knife by the action of gravity.
4,394,394
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING DRY DISCRETE
AGGLOMERATED GARLIC AND ONION AND
RESULTING PRODUCTS
Louis J. Nava, Redwood City, and Neal L. Ewing, Livermore,
both of Calif., assignors to Foremost-McKesson, Inc., San
Francisco, Calif.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,615
Int. a.3 A23B 7/02; A23L 1/224. 1/223
U.S. a. 426—285 - 5 Qaims
1. A method for removing the peel and albedo from the pulp
of citrus fruit comprising the steps of:
1. A method for the production of a dry free flowing ag-
glomerated product from dry powder material selected from
the group consisting of garlic and onion or combinations
thereof, the method making use of an upright structure form-
ing superposed upper and lower treatment chambers that are in
free unobstructed communication, the method comprising the
steps of dispersing the dry powder in the air stream and contin-
uously introducing the air stream and dispersed powder into
the upper portion of the upper chamber, simultaneously intro-
ducing atomized water into the upper chamber and causing the
dispersed powder particles to be co-mingled with water drop-
lets, the resulting wetting of the powder particles by contact
with water droplets causing the particles to become sticky
whereby random contacts of the wetted particles in the upper
chamber form dispersed moist porous aggregates that are
sticky and have little firmness, continuously introducing hot
drying air into the lower portion of the lower chamber,
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1161
whereby such air progresses upwardly through the lower
chamber and upwardly into the upper chamber, the air pres-
sure within both the upper and lower chambers being main-
tained slightly below atmospheric, and causing the dispersed
moist aggregates continuously to progress in free flight down-
wardly by gravity from the upper chamber into and through
the lower chamber whereby sufficient moisture is removed
from the dispersed aggregates while progressing through the
lower chamber in free flight to render them nonsticky and
firm, the aggregates while sticky having minimum contact and
adherence with the walls of the chambers, and then subjecting
the aggregates to drying to the desired final moisture content.
4,394,395
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF A MOLDED
FOOD PRODUCT BY SINTERING
Walter Rostagno, La Tour-de-Peilz, and Alfred Morand,
Blonay, both of Switzerland, assignors to Societe d' Assistance
Technique pour Produits Nestle S.A., Lausanne, Switzerland
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,744
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Oct. 31, 1980,
8114/80
Int. CI.' A23P 1/00; A23C 9/18; A23F 5/38; A23G 3/00
U.S. CI. 426—285 8 Claims
1. A process for the production of a food product in the form
on an individual article made from a powder-form starting
material comprising the steps of:
(a) introducing a food powder having a particle size of from
.^ 0. 1 to 3.0 mm and a moisture content of less than 20% by
weight into the cells of a mold, said food powder capable
of being superficially softened under the effect of heat and
having a high level of fluidity;
(b) lightly compacting the food powder in the cells by apply-
ing a pressure on the powder of from 1 to 8 kg/cm^;
(c) subjecting the compacted powder to a sintering treat-
ment in a furnace for 3 to 10 minutes at a product tempera-
ture of from 45° to 120° C. such that the individual parti-
cles melt at their surface and adhere to one another to
form an individual article;
(d) removing the articles from the mold; and then
(e) cooling the articles.
Lawrence \.
4,394,396
SHRIMP PROCESSING
'Shimp, Robbinsville, N.J., and John E. Steinhauer,
Malvern, Pa., assignors to FMC Corporation, Philadelphia,
Pa.
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 309,873
Int. Q.' A23L 1/325
U.S. Q. 426—332 6 Qaims
1. A process for inhibiting the loss of moisture of raw shrimp
on thawing or cooking while retaining their natural appear-
ance after processing comprising contacting the shrimp with
an aqueous solution of a phosphate salt mixture of sodium
tripolyphosphate and sodium acid pyrophosphate, said salts
being present in a weight ratio of 80:20 to 60:40, the pH of said
solution being about 6.2 to 7.1, the concentration of said salt
mixture m t
le solution being 0.5 wt % to saturation.
4,394,397
PROCEISS FOR PRODUCING PASTA PRODUCTS
Josephine E. Lometillo, Sepulveda, and John M. Wolcott, Bur-
bank, both of Calif., assignors to Carnation Company, Los
Angeles, Calif.
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 308,071
I Int. Q.3 A23L 1/16
U.S. Q. 426—557 11 Qaims
1. A process of producing instant cooking pasta products
having a porous, cellular structure which consists essentially of
forming a particulate mixture containing a major proportion
by weight of a farinaceous starch-containing material,
from \% to 26% by weight of gluten, from 0.25% to
0.75% by weight of microcrystalline cellulose, between
1% to 3.5% by weight of an edible vegetable oil, and from
0%-Iess than 2% of a phosphatide,
introducing the particulate mixture into an extrusion cooker
together with an amount of water sufficient to provide an
expandable mixture capable of being carried through the
extrusion cooker.
subjecting said expandable mixture to severe mechanical
working under temperatures sufficiently high to cook the
mixture, thereby gelatinizing the starch and thermosetting
the gluten contained therein, and pressure sufficiently
high that the pressure drop across the die orifice will
result in flashing off of water in the mixture as steam,
extruding the hot, pressurized mixture through a plurality of
die orifices into atmospheric conditions, thereby expand-
ing the cooked material by flashing of contained water to
steam, and
drying the extruded product to a maximum moisture content
of about 10%, thereby producing an expanded product
having a porous cellular structure which may be hydrated
for consumption by contact with hot water for a short
period of time and which upon hydration has a firm tex-
ture and good integrity without becoming pasty or sticky.
4,394,398
METHOD FOR REMOVING ROT FROM POTATOES
Donald C. Wilson, San Jose, Calif., assignor to FMC Corpora-
tion, Chicago, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 149,791, May 14, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 331,092
Int. CV A23L 1/216
U.S. CI. 426—481 12 Claims
6. A method for removing the decayed f>eel and decayed
flesh portions from the skin and underlying sound portions of
a potato with apparatus including potato supporting means and
a plurality of rubber fingers consisting essentially of: the steps
of supporting the potato, contacting substantially all portions
of the surface of the potato with the fingers with sufficient
force to crack the skin encompassing the decayed portions and
to penetrate the decayed portions of the potato surface without
damaging the peel or flesh of sound portions of the potato, and
directing streams of liquid against substantially all portions of
the surface of the potato at a sufficient pressure for washing the
potato and for forcing liquid through cracks and underneath
the decayed peel for lifting the decayed peel and removing the
decayed flesh while removing a minimum of sound peel and
sound flesh of the potato.
1162
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,399
LOW CALORIE TABLE SYRUP PRODUCT
William L. Keyser, East Dundee, and Diane S. Kinney, St.
Charles, both of III., assignors to The Quaker Oats Company,
Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,173
Int. a.3 A23L 1/09
U.S. a. 426—658 4 Oaims
1. An edible, fluid, fat-free syrup composition for use as a
table syrup containing not more than 60 calories per fluid
ounce consisting essentially of water and not more than 43.3%
by weight of the composition sugar solids, 0.5 to 1.0% by
weight of the composition a medium viscosity carboxymethyl
cellulose gum having a high degree of carboxymethyl substitu-
tion or a derivative thereof, 0.1 to 1.0% by weight of the
composition salt, 0.01 to 0.5% by weight of the composition an
edible anti-mycotic agent, 0.01 to 0.10% by weight of the
composition sodium hexametaphosphate, and 0.01 to 0.5% by
weight of the composition a flavorant.
4,394,400
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEPOSITING
COATINGS IN A GLOW DISCHARGE
Geoffrey W. Green, Malvern, and Alan H. Lettington,
Worcester, both of England, assignors to National Research
Development Corporation, London, England
Filed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,825
Oaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 16, 1980,
8001383
Int. C\? B05C 3/02: C23C U/00
U.S. a. 427—38 12 Claims
chamber for establishing a plasma including ions of mate-
rial to be coated on said substrate within the chamber,
means for supporting said substrate in the plasma between
the anode and cathode structures and electrically sepa-
rated therefrom said substrate surface being shaded from
the direct stream of positively charged ions from the
anode towards the cathode structure and spaced a prede-
termined distance from the cathode to receive neutral ions
directly from the cathode structure
means for controlling the temperature of the substrate inde-
pendently of the temperature of the plasma, anode struc-
ture and cathode structure, the arrangement being such
that a plasma may be formed in the chamber so that ions
of the coating material will strike the cathode and a signifi-
cant number of atoms leave the cathode to strike the
substrate and form the required coating.
4,394,401
METHOD OF PLASMA ENHANCED CHEMICAL VAPOR
DEPOSITION OF PHOSPHOSILICATE GLASS nLM
Yoshimi Shioya, Yokohama; Mamoru Maeda, Tama; Kanetake
Takasaki, Tokyo, and Mikio Takagi, Kawasaki, all of Japan,
assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,978
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 8, 1980, 55-108164
Int. a.3 HOIL 21/316
U.S. a. 427—39 10 Qaims
14 S.Ha.NeO,
PHj.Ar
1. A method of depositing a coating on a substrate, compris-
ing the steps of:
providing a plasma containing ions of material to be depos-
ited as a coating in a chamber having a cathode structure,
arranging the substrate in the plasma between the anode and
cathode structures and electrically separated therefrom,
said substrate surface being shaded from a direct stream of
positively charged ions from the anode structure toward
the cathode structure and spaced from the cathode struc-
ture to receive neutral ions of the coating material directly
from the cathode structure, and
controlling the substrate temperature independently of the
plasma temperature, the arrangement being such that
positively charged ions of coating material in the plasma
are attracted to and strike the cathode structure and a
significant number of atoms of coating material leave the
cathode structure and strike the substrate to form the
coating.
2. Apparatus for depositing a coating on a substrate compris-
ing:
a vacuum tight chamber,
a pump for providing a vacuum within the chamber,
means for introducing a gas within the chamber,
means including an anode and a cathode structure within the
1. A method of plasma enhanced chemical vapOr deposition
of a phosphosilicate glass film on a substrate comprising the
step of exposing the substrate to a reaction gas mixture includ-
ing SiH4, N2O and PH3, said deposition being effected under
conditions such that the reaction gas mixture has a mol ratio of
N2O to SiH4 (N20/SiH4) which is greater than or equal to 50
and a mol ratio of PH3 to SiH4 (PH3/SiH4) which is less than
or equal to 0.08.
4 394 402
PROCESS FOR TREATING ACETYLENE POLYMER OR
DOPED ACETYLENE POLYMER
Naoshi Yasuta, Yokohama; Yoshio Matsumura, Yamato, and
Teizo Kotani, Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Japan
Synthetic Rubber Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,186
Claims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1980, 55-66555
Int. a.3 B05D 3/06
U.S. CI. 427—40 11 Claims
1. A process for treating an acetylene polymer or a doped
acetylene polymer, which comprises:
plasma polymerizing a gasifiable organic compound under
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1163
J
reduced pressure by plasma excitation of said organic
compound; and
depositing a polymer film on a solid surface of the acetylene
or doped acetylene polymer positioned in said polymeri-
zation reaction system.
4,394,403
PndTOPOLYMERIZABLE COMPOSITIONS
George H. Smith, Maplewood, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 467,899, May 8, 1974,
abandoned. This application Apr. 2, 1975, Ser. No. 564,421
, Int. CI.3 G03C 1/68; C08F 8/18: B05D 3/06
U.S, CI. 427—42 41 Claims
1. A photopolymerizable composition comprising:
(a) an organic material which is cationically polymerizable;
and
(b) about 0.5 to 30 parts by weight, per 100 parts by weight
of said organic material, of an aromatic iodonium complex
salt photoinitiator of the formula
Ar'
(Z)„
AH
4,394,404
METHOD FOR PRODUCING MAGNETIC RECORDING
MEDIUM
Yoshihisa Suzuki; Takanoli Kaizuka; Yoshiaki Hanyu; Mituyo-
shi Otake, and Yoichi Hidano, all of Yokohama, Japan, as-
signors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 118,742, Feb. 5, 1980, Pat. No. 4,313,989.
This application Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,090
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 9, 1979, 54-13349
Int. C\? HOIF 70/02
U.S. Q. 427—48 13 Qaims
UV IRRAOMTON
.Oil
SO
01 I 3 57 O
MOLECUUW) WEIGHT CONVERTED TO STYRENE
1. In a process for producing a magnetic recording medium
comprising the steps of dispersing magnetic particles in a
binder and a solvent, coating the resulting magnetic particles
dispersion on a fiexibie support, orienting the magnetic parti-
cles, drying the magnetic particles dispersion at a high temper-
ature to prepare a magnetic layer, smoothing the surface of the
magnetic layer and slitting the resulting fiexibie support, the
improvement which comprises irradiating the magnetic parti-
cles dispersion or the magnetic layer with ultraviolet rays at
the step of coating the magnetic particles dispersion or after
the coating step to form a layer which prevents the oozing out
of a substance from the magnetic layer which causes sticking
trouble, said layer which prevents the oozing out of a sub-
stance from the magnetic layer being derived from some of
said binder and being formed on the surface of the magnetic
layer, whereby sticking trouble during use of said magnetic
recording medium is substantially prevented.
wherem Ar' and Ar^ are aromatic groups having 4 to 20
carbcHi atoms and are selected from the group consisting
of phenyl, thienyl, furanyl, and pyrazolyl groups; Z is
selected from the group consisting of an oxygen atom; a
sulfur atom;
I
4.394.405
METHOD OF MAKING FORCE TRANSDUCER
FLEXURE
Kim W. Atherton, Believue, Wash., assignor to Sundstrand Data
Control, Inc., Redmond, Wash.
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,130
Int. CI.' B05D 5/12
U.S. CI. 427—58 32 Claims
S=0; C=0; 0=S=0; R— N
III I
where R is hydrogen, lower alkyl or acyl; a carbon-to-car-
bon bond; or
I
Rl— C— R2
where Ri and R2 are selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen, an alkyl radical having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and
an alkenyl radical having 2 to 4 carbon atoms; and n is
zero or 1; and X~ is a halogen-containing complex anion
selected from the group consisting of tetrafluoroborate,
hexafluorophosphate, hexafluoroarsenate, hexachloroan-
timonate, and hexafiuoroantimonate.
1. A method of manufacturing a fiexure for use in connecting
a force sensing element to a mounting base in a force trans-
ducer comprising:
providing a blank with two opposed surfaces;
164
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
removing material from a first portion and a first indicator
portion of one of said surfaces;
removing material from a second indicator portion in the
other of said surfaces wherein at least a portion of said
indicator portion is directly opposite from said first indica-
tor portion; and
discontinuing removal of material from said first portion
when at least a portion of the material of said blank be-
tween said first and second indicator portions disappears
such that at least a portion of said indicator portion sur-
faces meet.
12. In the manufacture of a force transducer having a mov-
able element hinged to a base by a bendable flexure, the mov-
able element having an electrical circuit component thereon,
the improved method of forming the flexure section, c^mpris-
•"8- „ u
providing a transducer blank havmg a flexure section with
parallel faces generally at right angles to the sensitive axis
of the movable element; and
removing material from a portion of at least one face of said
flexure section to form a conductor receiving channel, the
bottom surface of such channel lying substantially in the
neutral bending plane of said flexure section.
18. The flexure forming method of claim 12 including the
step of applying a conductor on the bottom surface of each of
said channels and extending from said base to said movable
element.
4,394,406
DOUBLE POLYSILICON CONTACT STRUCTURE AND
PROCESS
James R Gardiner, Wappingers Falls; Stanley R. Makarewicz,
New W indsor; Martin Revitz, Poughkeepsie, and Joseph F.
Shepard, Hopewell Junction, all of N.Y., assignors to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,647
Int. CV HOIL 21/36
U.S. CI. 427—86 1 Claim
on the second dielectric layer 5 and superimposed, in part
at least, on the first conductive polysilicon layer 3, said
second polysilicon layer 7 having a thickness in the order
of 3000 to 5000 A,
G. forming a third dielectric layer 8 (FIG. 7) on the second
conductive polysilicon layer 7, said third dielectric layer 8
being formed of silicon dioxide and having a thickness in
the order of 1000 to 2000 A,
H. etching a contact opening 16' (FIG. 9) in the third dielec-
tric 8 to expose the second conductive polysilicon layer 7
overlying the first conductive polysilicon layer 3 whereby
the second dielectric layer 5 prevents the etchant from
exposing the first conductive polysilicon layer 3 by way of
voids existing in the second conductive polysilicon layer 7
due to enlarged polysilicon grains, and
I. forming a metal contact 12' in the opening 16' (FIG. 9),
whereby the second dielectric layer 5 prevents the etchant
from attacking the first dielectric layer 4 overlying the
first conductive polysilicon layer 3 and exposing the sur-
face of the first polysilicon layer 3 to the metal 12 thereby
physically joining together the first and second conduc-
tive polysilicon layers 3, 7.
4,394,407
METHOD FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF A LAYER
FROM A THERMOCHROME LACQUER, AND ITS USE
Eva Blazso, Baar, Switzerland, assignor to LGZ Landis & Gyr
Zug AG, Zug, Switzerland
PCT No. PCT/CH80/00039, § 371 Date Feb. 12, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Feb. 12, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00084, PCT Pub.
Date Jan. 22, 1981
PCT Filed Mar. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 233,783
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 27, 1979,
5987/79
Int. a.3 B41M 3/12
U.S. a. 427—150 6 Qaims
1. A process for fabricating a contact structure for a semi-
conductor device including at least two superimposed polysili-
con conductors comprising the steps of:
A. forming a first insulating layer 2 (FIG. 3) on a semicon-
ductor substrate A to a preselected thickness, said insulat-
ing layer 2 being formed of silicon dioxide and having a
thickness in the order of 300 to 700 A,
B. forming a first conductive polysilicon layer 3 (FIG. 3) on
the first insulating layer 2, said polysilicon layer 3 having
a thickness in the order of 3000 A to 5000 A,
C. forming a first dielectric layer 4 (FIG. 4) on the first
conductive polysilicon layer 3, said first dielectric layer 4
being formed of silicon dioxide and having a thickness in
the order of 1000 A to 4000 A,
D. patterning the first insulating 2 and dielectric 4 and con-
ductive polysilicon layers 3 into a preselected shape (FIG.
5).
E. patterning a second dielectric layer 5 (FIG. 5) on the first
dielectric layer as an etch barrier to selected etchants, said
second dielectric layer 5 being selected from the group
consisting of silicon nitride and aluminum oxide, said
second dielectric layer 5 having a thickness in the order of
200 to 1000 A,
F. forming a second conductive polysilicon layer 7 (FIG. 7)
1. In a method of coating a smooth surface with a thermoch-
romic, water-resistant layer, with the aid of two reaction com-
ponents being substantially free of any water and storable
separately, and with the aid of a film-forming component and
a hardener,
one reaction component being an organic sulfur compound
splitting off sulfur in ionized form only upon being heated
above 70° C, and thereby assuming a dark discoloration,
the other reaction component being a metal compound
produced with the aid of a resin base selected from the
group consisting of a methacrylic acid dissolved in aro-
matic solution means and a compound containing epoxy
groups said metal compound being selected from the
group consisting of an oxide, an inorganic salt, or a soap of
a monocarboxylic acid wih 2, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16, 18, 20, 22 or
38 C-atoms, or a dicarboxylic acid metal compound
wherein the metal is selected from the group consisting of
bismuth, copper, silver, gold, mercury, thallium, lead.
y
July 19,
983
CHEMICAL
116S
vanadium, molybdenum, tungsten, rhenium, iron, cobalt,
nickel, palladium, or platinum,
the steps comprising:
dispersing said metal compound in said resin base,
mixing said reaction components with said film-forming
component and said hardener to yield a multi-component
substantially transparent resin, suitable of being used for
screen printing, thereby setting off an exothermal reaction
generating a temperature not higher than about 40° C,
and
applying said multi-component resin to said surface and
allowing it to harden thereon at room temperature for at
least 30 minutes, whereby said multicomponent resin is
hardened to a substantially bone-dry state.
^ 4 394 408
APpI^RATUS AND METHOD FOR APPLYING
ADHESIVE TO A CONTAINER EDGE PORTION
John Walter, Evergreen Park, III.; Donald J. Roth, Westport,
Conn., and Charles S. Kubis, Willowbrook, III., assignors to
The Continental Group, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,500
Int. CI.3 B05C 3/20. 7/00; B05D 3/12. 7/22
U.S. a. 427—231 13 Qaims
^77777.' 7777^7777777
1. Apparatus for applying adhesive to the free edge of an
open ended can comprising:
means for moving and rotating the can in a predetermined
path;
an adhesive dip tank disposed along said path containing adhe-
sive having a top surface, and
means for holding the can at an acute angle to the said top
surface of the adhesive and immersing a section of the edge
of the can into the adhesive while said can is rotated and
moved in said path.
4,394,409
COMPOSITE WOOD ARTICLE AND METHOD OF
MANUFACTURE
James E. Hertel, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Weyerhaeuser
Company, Tacoma, Wash.
Continuation of Ser. No. 835,944, Sep. 22, 1977, abandoned. This
application Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,924
Int. a.' E04C 3/30: F16L 9/00; B32B 31/00; B27B 1/00
U.S. a. 428—36 4 Qaims
>
together into the cross-sectional shape of a parallelogram
and with at least two pairs of two opposed pieces being
substantially similar in cross-sectional size,
said triangular-shaped pieces being joined together along
elongated joints, each piece being joined to two adjacent
pieces with one surface thereof being joined over its entire
surface and the other surface thereof being joined over
less than a whole portion of its surface thereby resulting in
an elongated hollow section in the article.
4,394,410
DISPOSABLE FOIL BROILING SHEET
Harold Osrow, and Armando A. Araujo, both of New York,
N.Y., assignors to Osrow Products Company, Inc., Old Beth-
page, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 121,140, Feb. 13, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,603
Int. CI.' B32B 3/24. 3/28. 15/04
U.S. CI. 428—43 7 Claims
1. An elongated wood article comprising:
a plurality of four elongated triangular-shaped pieces joined
1. A tripartite, laminate, generally flat, self-form-maintain-
ing, thin, cooking, rectangular, sheet element comprising:
(A) a generally flat, foraminous, rectangular, upper layer
composed of non-combustible, impermeable, malleable
aluminum foil,
(B) a generally flat, continuous, rectangular, central core
layer composed of a dry bibulous material capable of
absorbing hot liquid fat. and
(C) a generally flat, rectangular, lower, imperforate layer
composed of non-combustible, impermeable, malleable
aluminum foil coextensive and in registry with the upper
layer, whereby rendered fat from a fat-containing comes-
tible being broiled in a broiling chamber while resting on
said element will drain through the foramina in said upper
foil layer, to be absorbed in said core layer, trapped by
said lower foil layer and contained between said upper
and lower foil layers, so that spattering of the rendered fat
in the chamber will be reduced,
(D) said upper and lower layers extending peripherally
beyond the boundaries of the core layer and being periph-
erally sealed together by continuous seams to form a
peripheral margin having a thickness not in excess of 4
mils,
(E) the periphery of said tripartite element being sufficiently
deformable to be manually bendable with great ease and
to be pinched together at the corners of the rectangular
element to form peripheral flanges on all edges of the
cooking sheet, which flanges are self-form-maintaining so
that the element can be formed into the shape of a shallow
pan,
(F) the thickness of each of the foil layers being between J
mils and 2 mils,
(G) the sizes of the foramina ranging between 1/64" and |"
across.
1166
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,411
STRUCTURAL PANEL OF GYPSUM WITH TEXTILE
CASING AND METHOD FOR PRODUCING SAME
Manfred Kriill, Heiligkreuzsteinach; Udo Lobert, Neuenburg;
Dieter Stamm, Heidelberg, and Klaus Veeser, Miillheim, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Firma Carl Freudenberg,
Weinheim an der Bergstrasse, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,698
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 4,
1981, 3113682
Int. CI.' B32B 1/04. 31/18
U.S. a. 428—70 8 Oaims
1. A structural panel comprising gypsum within an enclo-
sure of a mineral and/or fiberglass fabric impressed therein,
said fabric having larger pores on the inside facing said gypsum
and containing at least two kinds of fibers, with fibers on the
inside of the fabric facing the gypsum being of relatively larger
diameter than the other fibers in the fabric, and said fibers of
said fabric being cemented together by a bonding agent con-
taining from about 30 to about 85 percent by weight, referred
to the weight of the bonding agent, of a hydroxide of alumi-
num, iron and/or silicon.
° 4,394,413
FLAME RETARDANT DRYER FABRICS
William T. Westhead, Waycross, Ga., assignor to Scapa Dryers,
Inc., Waycross, Ga.
Filed Feb. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 232,678
Int. C\? B32B 7/00
U.S. CI. 428—257 24 Qaims
4,394,412
COMPOSITE MEMBER COMPRISING METALLIC
SHEET BENT TO BE ARCUATE IN SECTION AND RIGID
SYNTHETIC RESIN COATING
Hideomi Yamamoto; Haruzo Watanabe, both of Shiga; Hidehiko
Kishie, Shijonawate, and Toshio Nishihara, Shiga, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,924
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1981, 56-48768
Int. a.' B32B 1/00. 3/00
U.S. CI. 428—174 5 Claims
1. A flame retardant dryer fabric comprising:
a plurality of interwoven machine direction and cross-
machine direction yarns; and
an admixture of resin and flame retardant coating said ma-
chine direction and cross-machine direction yarns,
said resin being chosen for its known ability to provide
fabric stability, wear and abrasion resistance, heat and
hydrolysis resistance, resistance to chemical attack, modu-
lus, and oil and dirt resistance; said flame retardant being
compatible with said resin; and said admixture being free
of nucleation and being an integral part of said fabric.
4,394,414
AQUEOUS SIZING COMPOSITION FOR GLASS FIBERS
FOR USE ON CHOPPED GLASS FIBERS
Daniel G. Brown, Caroleen, and Donald L. Motsinger, Forest
City, both of N.C, assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pitts-
burgh, Pa.
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,541
Int. a.' D04H 1/58: C08L 83/06
U.S. CI. 428—288 21 Claims
1. A composite member bent to be arcuate in transversal
section, comprising:
a metallic sheet bent to be arcuate in transversal section with
respect to a first center of curvature and formed with a
plurality of small arcuate sectional protuberances extend-
ing in the longitudinal direction and distributed only in the
transversal direction, each of said small arcuate sectional
protuberance being curved with respect to a second cen-
ter of curvature,
said first center of curvature and each said second center of
curvature being selected to be positioned on the same side
with respect to said metallic sheet, and
a rigid synthetic resin layer covering both main surfaces of
said metallic sheet, said composite member being formed
in a length,
the length of said metallic sheet being selected to be sub-
stantially the same as the length of said length of the
composite member, and
said plurality of small arcuate sectional protuberances
being formed as protuberances extending continuously
throughout the length of said metallic sheet.
4000 3«00
2000 I80O 1600
FREQUENCE ICM-'
1. An aqueous sizing composition for glass fibers, compris-
ing:
a. one or more cationic lubricants,
b. water soluble or dispersible amide selected from the group
consisting of monoamides, diamides, melamine, diamides
of saturated dicarboxylic acids, carbamides, non-polym-
eric amine-containing amides and mixtures thereof,
c. curable silicone polymer in a cationic aqueous emulsion;
and
d. water in an amount to give a solids content in the range of
about 0.1 to about 5 weight percent wherein the major
amount of the solids of the sizing composition is com-
prised of cationic lubricant and emulsion.
July 19, 983
CHEMICAL
1167
4,394,415
ELECTROMAGNETIC WAVE ENERGY ABSORBING
MATERIAL
Shunji Tsuda, 12-12-604 Nishi-kamata, 7-chome, Ota-ku, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,192
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 5, 1981, 56-122711
Int. a.' B32B 15/04, 15/20 7/02
U.S. a. 428—332 4 Qaims
1. An electromagnetic wave energy absorbing material com-
prising an aluminum material having a microporous aluminum
oxide layer having a thickness of 0.1-1.4 micron on its surface,
wherein 0.05-1.5 g/m^of at least one of elements of metals and
semiconductors selected from the group consisting of cobalt,
silver, lead, molybdenum, copper, chromium, selenium, sili-
con, germanium, iron, manganese, nickel, zinc, tin and palla-
dium is contained in the micropores of the microporous alumi-
num oxide
ayer.
4,394,416
nLM-PAPER FIBER LAYER LAMINATE AND PROCESS
FOR PREPARATION THEREOF
Yoshikazu Shimizu, Amagasaki, and Kathuhiro Yamaguchi,
Osaka, both of Japan, assignors to Azona Co., Ltd., Kobe,
Japan
Division of Ser. No. 213,642, Dec. 5, 1980, abandoned. This
application May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,380
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1979, 54-161150
Int. CV B32B 27/10. 27/28
U.S. CI. 428—341 3 Qaims
1. A film-paper fiber layer laminate comprising a film se-
lected from the group consisting of a polyvinyl chloride film,
a polyethylene film, a polypropylene film, a polystyrene film, a
polyacetate film, a polycarbonate film, a polyester film, a
polyamide film, a polyimide film and a chlorinated rubber film;
and a thin paper fiber layer bonded to the film, the basis weight
of the paper fiber layer being 5 to 15 g/m^.
ether ether ketones and polyesters, said coating being applied
to a desired thickness in a single pass, said thickness meeting
the requirements of ANSI/NEMA Standards Publication No.
MWlOOO-1977.
4,394,418
AQUEOUS SIZING COMPOSITION AND GLASS FIBERS
MADE THEREWITH FOR REINFORCING
THERMOSETTING POLYMERS
Chester S. Temple, McKees Rocks, Pa., assignor to PPG Indus-
tries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,349
Int. a.^ B32B 9/00
U.S. a. 428—391 36 Qaims
1. An aqueous sizing composition for glass fibers to yield
sized glass fiber strands useful in reinforcing thermosettmg
polymers, comprising:
(a) poly(vinylacetate) silane copolymer,
(b) epoxy polymer,
(c) one or more glass fiber lubricants,
(d) an organo silane coupling agent selected from the group
consisting of amino-organo-silane coupling agents, lubri-
cant modified amino-organo-silane coupling agents,
epoxy-containing silane coupling agents and a mixture of
two or more of these agents,
(e) one or more nonionic surfactants,
(f) polyethylene-containing polymer in an amount of 0 to
about 25 weight percent of the solids of the aqueous sizing
composition,
(g) wax in an amount of about 0 to about 5 weight percent of
the solids of the aqueous sizing composition where an
amount of the polyethylene-containing polymer is present
when the wax is absent and an amount of wax is present if
the polyethylene-containing polymer is absent and when
both are present, the weight ratio of the polyethylene-con-
taining polymer to wax is in the range of about 25:1 to
about 1:25,
(h) organic hydrocarbon acid to give the composition a pH
in the range of about 4 to about 9, and
(i) water to give a total solids content in the range of about
1 to about 30 weight percent.
4,394,417
MAGNET WIRE
George D. Hilker, Fort Wayne, Ind., assignor to Phelps Dodge
Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 931,314, Aug. 7, 1978. This
application Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,473
Int. aj B32B 27/00
U.S. CI. 428—383 7 Qaims
1. A magnet wire or other coated filament comprising: an
elongated filament and an essentially concentric and continu-
ous coating superimposed on said filament, said coating being
chosen from the group of materials consisting of polyamides,
polycarbonates, polysulfones, epoxys, polyether imides, poly-
4,394,419
PRINTED CIRCUIT MATERIAL
Jiri K. Konicek, Bennington, Vt., assignor to Oak Industries
Inc., Rancho Bernardo, Calif.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,988
Int. a.i C23F 1/00; C25D 5/10
U.S. Q. 428-416 10 Qaims
1. A product useful in the manufacture of printed circuits
including,
(a) a carrier layer of copper fully removable by etchmg and
having a thickness on the order of about 10-35 microns,
(b) a thin layer of copper having a thickness in the range of
1168
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
1-12 microns to be used in the formation of electrical
circuit paths, and
(c) an intermediate metallic layer positioned between the (a)
and (b) layers and secured thereto, said intermediate layer
having a thickness in the range of 0.1-2.0 microns and
being selected from the group consisting of nickel, a nick-
el-tin alloy, a nickel-iron alloy, lead, and a tin-lead alloy,
said intermediate layer adhering sufficiently to the (b)
layer of copper to prevent removal thereof by an etchant
removing the (a) layer of copper.
4,394,420
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Kiminori Tamai, and Masashi Hayama, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct, 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,407
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 19, 1980, 55-163056
Int. CI.' B32B 9/04
U.S. a. 428—447 1 Claim
t
04
<• 02 h
I I
siiiamoiitx
Anionic SUlfAClAm 2X
the P/M blank diameter selected being substantially in-
versely related to the density of said blank, the P/M
diameter selected being correlated to produce a sub-
stantially full thread,
and then thread rolling said sintered P/M blank using a
threading die of the same thread gage as the predeter-
mined roll threaded product to be produced,
whereby a thread rolled P/M product is produced having
a porous core and highly densified threads, the density
of the threads at the surface and sub-surface thereof
from the root to the crest being at least about 95% of
the actual density, with the density of the core ranging
from about 75% to 92% of the actual density of the
metal forming the product.
4,394,422
BONDED STRUCTURE AND PROCESS OF MAKING
SAME
Ray J. Van Thyne, 1070 Valley Lake Dr., Inverness, III. 60067,
and John J. Rausch, Rte. 2, Box 177, Antioch, III. 60002,
assignors to Ray J. Van Thyne; John J. Rausch and Material
Sciences Corporation, all of Mount Prospect, III.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,127
Int. C1.3 B32B 3/28; C23C 9/00
U.S. CI. 428—592 24 Qaims
I 10 100 lOOO 10000 lOOOOO
HSCKlTfOfSltlCONtOll {CS)
1. In a magnetic recording medium having a magnetic layer
which comprises a magnetic powder, a binder and a nonionic
or anionic surfactant in an amount of 1.0 to 5.0 wt. % based on
said magnetic powder, the improvement comprising within
said magnetic layer of 0.5 to 5.0 wt. % based on said binder of
a silicone oil of the formula
CH3
(CH3)3SiO-e Si— O-^ Si(CH3)3
CH3
where n is a value such that the viscosity of the silicone oil is
500 c.s. or lower at 25° C, whereby the blooming of the surfac-
tant and the plasticization of the magnetic layer are diminished.
4 394 421
THREAD FORMING OF SINTERED POROUS METAL
SHAPES
William J. Chmura, Southington, and Ronald S. Slusarski, Ber-
lin, both of Conn., assignors to Textron Inc., Providence, R.I.
Continuation of Ser. No. 55,508, Jul. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,641
Int. CI.' B21H 3/04; B22F 3/24. 5/06; B32B 5/14
U.S. CI. 428—547 16 Qaims
.//
A bonded structure comprising at least two adjacent fer-
rous-based components having a layer diffused in the surface
of both of said parts to bond them, together, wherein both of
said components are sheets of ferrous-based material and at
least one of said sheets has spacer means bonded to the other
of said sheets to create at least one channel therebetween, said
bonded structure being made by the steps of placing said
components in juxtaposition, and contacting said juxtaposed
components with a molten alloy bath consisting essentially of
lead and at least one diffusing element, thereby to create a
layer diffused into the surfaces of both of said components
which bonds them together.
1. A method of producing a thread rolled sintered cylindri-
cal metal product which comprises:
forming a sintered cylindrical powder metal (P/M) blank of
density ranging from about 75% to 92% of the actual
density of said metal having a selected diameter larger
than the final pitch diameter of a predetermined roll
threaded product produced therefrom and not exceeding
the outside diameter of said predetermined roll threaded
product.
4 394 423
CLOSURE DEVICE FOR LEAD-ACID BATTERIES
Konstantin Ledjeff, Schwalbach, Fed. Rep. of Germany (granted
to U.S. Department of Energy under the provisions of 42
use 2182)
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 307,000
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 3,
1980, 3045480
Int. C\? HOIM 2/12
U.S. a. 429—86 ♦ Claims
1. A closure device for attaching to a lead-acid battery for
removing poisons from gases produced and discharged during
battery use, comprising the combination of a filter of activated
carbon and means for preventing explosion, said means for
preventing explosion comprises a nozzle having an inlet com-
municating with a passageway from said battery and a con-
stricted discharge for gases directed towards an impingement
surface, a closed-end tube disposed around said nozzle and
having a closed end forming said impingement surface, said
closed-end tube having a side-wall opening for gas discharge at
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1169
an end portion opposite to said impingement surface and an
open-end vertical tube outside said closed-end tube, said open-
end tube having an open upper end at a level above said side
wall openings in said closed-end tube but below said con-
stricted discharge of said nozzle and below said filter of acti-
4,394,424
PRINTING SCREEN AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
Frank A. Sportelli, 7 Redwood Ct., Glen Cove, N.Y. 11542
1 1 Filed Aug. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 292,087
1 1 Int. CI.' G03F 5/00; G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—6 20 Qaims
1. A method of making a photoprinting image element, said
method comprising:
(a) providing a negative screen having two sets of parallel
equispaced lines located thereon, each said set being per-
pendicular to each other,
(b) providing a photographic film to be exposed,
(c) exposing the negative screen onto the photographic film
in two separate exposures,
(d) said negative screen being disposed at a predetermined
angle in each said separate exposure,
(e) each said predetermined angle being at a different angle
with respect to each other, and
(0 developing the exposed photographic film to produce a
photoprinting image element having a regular screen
pattern as shown in FIG. 2.
3. The method as defined in claim 1 wherein:
the negative screen is a gravure negative screen, and
there is a separate exposure at each of the predetermined
photoprinting angles of 105° and 75°.
4,394,425
PHOTOCONDUCriVE MEMBER WITH a-SI(0
BARRIER LAYER
Isamu Shimizu, Yokohama; Shigeru Shirai, Yamato, and Eiichi
Inoue, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 299,576
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 12, 1980, 55-127542;
Sep. 12, 1980, 55-127543; Sep. 13, 1980. 55-127490; Sep. 24,
1980, 55-133209; Sep. 24. 1980, 55-133210; Sep. 24, 1980,
55-133211
Int. a.' G03G 5/082. 5/14
U.S. a. 430—65 98 Claims
100
104
vated carbon to provide means for maintaining a liquid level
through which said gases must pass, said open end tube having
a porous medium of wettable material in its lower end portion
for positioning in communication with and at least partially
below the surface of acid electrolyte within said battery.
1. A photoconductive member comprising: a support, a
photoconductive layer consitituted of an amorphous material
containing silicon atoms as a matrix and containing hydrogen
atoms or halogen atoms, and an intermediate layer provided
between them, said intermediate layer having a function to bar
penetration of carriers from the side of the support into the
photoconductive layer and to permit passage from the photo-
conductive layer to the support of photocarriers generated in
the photoconductive layer by projection of electromagnetic
waves and movement of the photocarriers toward the side of
the support, and said intermediate layer being constituted of an
amorphous material containing silicon atoms and carbon atoms
as constituents and wherein said intermediate layer is non-
photoconductive in the visible light region and is from 30 to
1,0(X) Angstroms in thickness.
4,394,426
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE MEMBER WITH a-SKN)
BARRIER LAYER
Isamu Shimizu, Yokohama; Shigeru Shirai, Yamato, and Eiichi
Inoue, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,568
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 25, 1980, 55-134114;
Sep. 25, 1980, 55-134115; Sep. 25, 1980, 55-134116; Sep. 30,
1980, 55-137149; Sep. 30, 1980, 55-137150; Sep. 30, 1980.
55-137151
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 16,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' G03G 5/082. 5/14
U.S. a. 430—65 98 Qaims
100
104
1. A photoconductive member comprising: a support, a
photoconductive layer constituted of an amorphous material
containing silicon atoms as matrix and containing hydrogen
atoms or halogen atoms, and an intermediate layer provided
between them, said intermediate layer having a function to bar
penetration of carriers from the side of the support into the
photoconductive layer and to permit passage from the photo-
1170
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
conductive layer to the support of photocarriers generated in
the photoconductive layer by projection of electromagnetic
waves and movement of the photocarriers toward the side of
the support, and said intermediate layer being constituted of an
amorphous material containing silicon atoms and nitrogen
atoms as constituents and wherein said intermediate layer is
non-photoconductive in the visible light region and is from 30
to 1,000 Angstroms in thickness.
4 394 427
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC SENSITIZING SCREEN
WITH PERIPHERALLY CLOGGED APERTURES
Masaji Nishikawa; Norio Amemiya; Tadahiro Yasuda, and
Shigeni Nakayama, all of Hachioji, Japan, assignors to Olym-
pus Optical Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 981,315, Nov. 28, 1979, abandoned.
This application Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,783
Gaims priority, application Japan, Jiin. 24, 1977, 52-74%9;
Jun. 24, 1977, 52-74970; Jun. 24, 1977, 52-74971; Jun. 24, 1977,
52-74972; Jun, 24, 1977, 52-74973
Int. a.^ G03G 5/04
U.S. a. 430—68 6 Claims
5^ /^ ^ '^ ^I
\ L „.. ..J - .-. .-r-^^
4,394,429
DEVELOPMENT PROCESS AND APPARATUS
Dan A. Hays, Fairport, N.Y., assignor to Xerox Corporation,
Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 155,889, Jun. 2, 1980,
abandoned. This application Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,437
Int. O.^ G03G Um. U/09
U.S. a. 430—102 13 Qaims
1. An improved process for causing the development of
electrostatic latent images on an imaging member, comprising
providing a development zone ranging in length of from about
0.5 centimeters to about 5 centimeters, which development
zone is encompassed by a tensioned deflected flexible imaging
member and a transporting member wherein the flexible imag-
ing member is comprised -of a supporting substrate, a
photogenerating layer, and a transport layer comprised of
electrically active diamine molecules dispersed in an inactive
resinous binder, the diamine molecules being of the formula
ZZ2Z.
Effective Image Plane
1. An electrophotographic sensitizing screen formed from a
conductive mesh having a plurality of apertures therein ex-
tending over the surface and to the peripheral edges thereof in
a regular array, said mesh including an insulating layer applied
thereto, a conductive layer overlying said insulating layer, and
a photosensitive layer overlying said conductive layer the
improvement comprising clogged apertures extending in-
wardly of the peripheral edges of said screen to define a pe-
ripheral area, said apertures in said peripheral area clogged
with an insulative synthetic resin to block the passage of co-
rona ions therethrough, said area of said screen interiorly of
said peripheral area serving as an image area, said conductive
layer extending over said image area at least to said peripheral
area.
4,394,428
PHOTOCONDUCTIVE COMPOSITION AND ELEMENTS
COMPRISING TWO DIFFERENT COMPOUNDS
HAVING A DIOXABORIN NUCLEAS ON A DERIVATIVE
THEREOF
James A, Van Allan; Jerome H. Perlstein; George A. Reynolds,
and Thomas E. Goliber, all of Rochester, N.Y., assignors to
Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,257
Int. a.3 G03G 5/09
U.S. a. 430—83 5 Qaims
1. A photoconductive element comprising a support and a
layer of a photoconductor composition comprising:
(a) an electron donating photoconductor; and sensitizing
amounts of
(b) a first electron acceptor selected from cyanine and styryl
methine dyes having a 1,3,2-dioxaborin nucleus and
(c) a second electron acceptor selected from methine-free
compounds having a nucleus selected from the group
consisting of 1,3,2-dioxaborin; 1,3,2-oxazoborin and 1,3,2-
diazoborins.
wherein X is selected from the group consisting of (ortho)
CH3, (meta) CH3, (para) CH3, (ortho) CI, (meta) CI, (para)
CI, causing the deflected flexible imaging member to move at
a speed of from about 5 cm/sec to about 50 cm/sec, causing the
transporting member to move at a speed of from about 6
cm/sec to about 100 cm/sec, said deflected flexible imaging
member and said transporting member moving at different
speeds, the ratio of the velocity of the transporting member to
the flexible imaging member being greater than zero and less
than 1 with the development time ranging from 0.83 seconds to
about 5103 seconds, maintaining a distance between the flexi-
ble imaging member and the transporting member of from
about 0.05 millimeters to about 1.5 millimeters, adding insulat-
ing developer particles to the development zone, which parti-
cles are comprised of electrically insulating toner particles, and
electrically insulating magnetic carrier particles, the flexible
imaging member being deflected by the electrically insulating
developer particles, wherein the deflection of the flexible
imaging member caused by the insulating developer particles
contained in the development zone is in the form of an arc of
from about 10° to about 50°, contained in the development
zone, introducing a high electric field in the development zone,
wherein the developer particles contained in the development
zone are agitated, and the insulating toner particles migrate
from one layer of carrier particles to another layer of carrier
particles in the development zone, the carrier particles rotating
in one direction and subsequently in another direction,
whereby toner particles are continuously made available im-
mediately adjacent the deflected flexible imaging member, said
process being accomplished in the absence of a magnetic field.
4 394 430
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC DRY TONER AND
DEVELOPER COMPOSITIONS
Thomas A. Jadwin, Rochester, and Robert C. Storey, Penfield,
both of N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Roches-
ter, N.Y.
FUed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,028
Int. C\? G03G 9/70
U.S. a. 430—110 7 Qaims
1. A two-component electrophotographic developer com-
prising magnetic carrier particles and a dry particulate electro-
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1171
photographic toner comprising a major amount of binder toned image on the charge retentive member; transferring the
polymer and dispersed therein as a charge control agent in an ,oned image onto an image receiving member; fixing the trans-
amount of 0.01 to 3 weight percent of the particulate toner, a ^rred toned image on the image receivmg member; and suc-
quaternary ammonium salt of the formu a: ^^- , . .u j 1 . r j 1-
^ ' cessively repeating the developing, transferring and fixing
steps for the same and single latent image so as to form a
CH3 / \ plurality ofduplicated copies, the improvement comprising the
I / /^n\ step of: gradually increasing the total amount of the developer
R-N®-CH2— ^ (j )XQ
CH3 \ V
wherein R is alkyl of 12 to 24 carbon atoms and X© is an anion.
' ' 4,394,431
METHOD FOR DEVELOPING AN ELECTROSTATIC
LATENT IMAGE WITH A LIQUID DEVELOPER
Takashi Saito, Ichikawa; Junichi Sakurayama, and Tsuyoshi
Watanabe, both of Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 97,861, Nov. 27, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,523
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 12, 1978, 53-153966
Int. a.3 G03G 15/10
U.S. CI. 430—119 6 Gaims
1. A method for developing an electrostatic latent image
comprising the steps of bringing a rigid member into pressure
contact with a rotary member having a porous elastic member
in the form of a layer provided about the periphery thereof to
cause said elastic member to be refreshed therein with liquid
developer in accordance with the elastic deformation of the
elastic member, urging said rotary member against an electro-
static latent image bearing surface and rotating said rotary
member to supply the liquid developer to said bearing surface,
thereby carrying out development of the electrostatic latent
image, and regulating the amount of elastic deformation of said
elastic member in the direction of its thickness produced by the
pressure contact thereof with said rigid member to be equiva-
lent to or larger than the elastic deformation of said elastic
member in the direction of its thickness produced by the pres-
sure contact thereof with said bearing surface.
4,394,432
MEtHOD FOR PRINTING A PLURALITY OF
DUPLICATED COPIES FROM THE SAME
ELECTROSTATIC CHARGE LATENT IMAGE
Masaji Nishikawa, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Opti-
cal Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 9,585, Feb. 5, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,329
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 8, 1978, 53-13995
Int. OJ G03G 13/16
U.S. a. 430—120 5 Gaims
1. An improved method of printing a plurality ofduplicated
copies with the aid of a single electrostatic charge latent image
formed on an electrostatic charge retentive member to form an
electrostatic charge latent image corresponding to an image of
a document to be duplicated on a charge retentive member and
developing the latent image with a developer to form a visible
10 15
Trn Numter of Copies
X
supplied to the latent image on the charge retentive member
while maintaining the toner concentration substantially con-
stant for developing the latent image in such a manner, that
both a large variation in print density at a higher density part
in the image and a small variation in print density at a lower
density part for successive copies are simultaneously cor-
rected.
4,394,433
DIAZONIUM IMAGING SYSTEM
Kenneth G. Gatzke, Lake Elmo, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 101,143, Dec. 7, 1979,
abandoned. This application Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,197
Int. Q\} G03C 1/60, 5/18, 1/727
U.S. G. 430—151 18 Gaims
1. An article comprising a light sensitive, positive-acting,
heat developable, dry layer on a substrate, the dry ingredients
of said layer comprising at least 25% by weight of a polymeric
binder, at least 0.3% by weight of a leuco dye capable of being
oxidized to a colored form upon only heating, a sufficient
amount of a photosensitive diazonium salt to oxidize said leuco
dye to a colored form in non-light struck p>ortions of said layer,
and less than 0.1 mole nitrate ion per 1.0 mole leuco dye. said
leuco dye in said layer being present in a concentration suffi-
cient to provide an increase in optical density upon develop-
ment of at least 0.2.
18. A process for imaging an article comprising a light sensi-
tive, positive-acting, heat developable, dry layer on a substrate,
the dry ingredients of said layer comprising at least 25% by
weight of a polymeric binder, at least 0.3% by weight of a
leuco dye capable of being oxidized to a colored form upon
only heating, a sufficient amount of a photosensitive diazonium
salt to oxidize said leuco dye to a colored form in non-light
struck portions of said layer, and less than 0. 1 mole nitrate ion
per 1.0 mole leuco dye, said leuco dye in said layer being
present in a concentration sufficient to provide an increase in
optical density upon development of at least 0.2, said process
comprising the steps:
a. exposing said article to an image-wise distribution of
radiation to destroy said diazonium salt in light-struck
areas, and
b. heating said article to enable said diazonium salt to oxidize
said leuco dye to a colored form in non light-struck areas
to produce said positive image.
1172
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,434
PLATING RESIST WITH IMPROVED RESISTANCE TO
EXTRANEOUS PLATING
Robert R. Rohloff, Afton, Minn., assignor to Minnesota Mining
and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
per No. PCr/US80/00876, § 371 Date Dec. 8, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 8, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00310, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 5, 1981
per Filed Jul. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 282,180
Int. a.3 G03C 1/68
U.S. a. 430—270 23 Claims
1. A photohardenable resist composition comprising poly-
merizable organic binder, a photoinitiator capable of initiating
polymerization of said binder upon exposure to actinic radia-
tion, and an effective amount, greater than 1% by weight, of
aluminum oxide microparticles dispersed throughout said
binder, said aluminum oxide microparticles being made by the
flame hydrolysis of anhydrous aluminum halide.
applying a second layer of photoresist over said first layer;
said second layer of photoresist being sensitive to a wave-
length of light, a solvent and a developer different from
said selected wavelength, solvent and developer to which
said first layer of photoresist is sensitive,
forming a first relief image in said second layer of photoresist
by exposure through a fixed mask having an image
thereon,
partially exposing said first layer of photoresist using said
second layer as a mask,
removing said second layer of photoresist,
applying a third layer of photoresist over said first layer, said
third layer of photoresist being sensitive to a wavelength
of light, a solvent and a developer different from said
4,394,435
SYNDIOTACTIC POLYBUTADIENE COMPOSITION
FOR A PHOTOSENSITIVE PRINTING PLATE
Milton Farber, Bethany, Conn., and John R. Worns, Misha-
waka, Ind., assignors to Uniroyal, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,360
Int. CU G03C 7/6«
U.S. a. 430—287 26 Qaims
1. An elastomeric composition for making a printing plate
comprising (A) a mixture of syndiotactic 1,2-polybutadiene
(SBD) and cis-l,4-polyisoprene (cis-IR); (B) between about 0.1
and 5 phr of a photoinitiator activatable by actinic radiation;
and (C) from 0 to 3 phr of a photopolymerizable ethylenically
unsaturated compound, wherein (A) comprises 30 to 75%
cis-IR and correspondingly 70 to 25% SBD by weight.
1 3- 10
1 i r^.ji I'i
5^
(s-Ez:
M-)yy ^i<W 'W .^
^
selected wavelength, solvent and developer to which said
first layer of photoresist is sensitive,
forming a second relief image in said third layer substantially
identical to the first relief image formed in said second
layer by exposure through a second mask having the same
image as the said first mask but having different defects
thereon,
re-exposing said first layer of photoresist using said third
layer as a mask to fully expose only those partially ex-
posed portions of said first layer thereof corresponding to
areas being exposed by said third layer; and
developing a relief image in said first layer of photoresist,
said relief image having openings extending to the surface
of said substrate only in said fully exposed areas.
4.394,436
Patent Not Issued For This Number
4,394,437
PROCESS FOR INCREASING RESOLUTION OF
PHOTOLITHOGRAPHIC IMAGES
Albert S. Bergendahl, Underbill; Mark C. Hakey, Milton, and
John P. Wilson, Hinesburg, all of Vt., assignors to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,056
Int. CI.3 G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—312 9 Qaims
1. A method of developing relief images in a first layer of
photoresist comprising the steps of:
applying a first layer of photoresist, sensitive to a selected
wavelength of light, a selected solvent and a selected
developer, to the surface of a substrate;
4,394,438
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING AN OPTICALLY
READABLE INFORMATION CARRIER USING DEEP
U.V. RADIATION
Pieter Van Pelt, Sunnyvale, Calif., and Gerardus J. M. Lippits,
Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,703
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Dec. 22, 1980,
8006947
Int. a.3 G03C 5/04: GOID 15/02. 15/24
U.S. a. 430—321 3 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing an optically readable informa-
tion carrier in which a substrate plate is provided on one side
or on both sides with an optical structure which structure
comprises an information track of information areas situated
alternatively at a higher and a lower level, characterized in
that a substrate plate which is manufactured entirely from
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1173
polymethylmethacrylate is exposed, according to a litho-
graphic process, to deep ultraviolet light through a mask
which is brought into contact with a surface of said substrate
plate, said mask comprising a supporting plate which is trans-
parent to deep ultraviolet light, said supporting plate being
provided on the side facing the substrate with a layer of mate-
rial impermeable to deep ultraviolet light, in which layer a
pattern is provided corresponding to the optica! structure to be
provided in the substrate plate and the substrate plate thus
exposed through said mask is then treated with a developer
capable of disolving the exposed parts of said polymethylmeth-
acrylate thereby dissolving the exposed parts of said polyme-
thylmethylacrylate and forming an information track on said
substrate plate.
4,394,439
NON-SILVER X-RAY RECORDING PROCESS
Jean J. Robillard, 46 Arnold Rd., Pelham, Mass. 01002
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,685
Int. a.3 G03C 5/24
U.S. CI. 430—336 lO Claims
1. A process for forming a permanent record of an X ray
image onto a transparent substrate which comprises
(A) providing a photosensitive film comprising
(1) a film substrate made of a photodegradable haloge-
nated polymer, and
(2) an image forming layer on said film substrate, said
image forming layer comprising
(a) an halogenated free radical sensitive dye former, and
(b) a complexing agent, which is an organic metal salt
said (a) and (b) being uniformly dispersed in an or-
ganic binder;
(B) photographically, imagewise exposing the photosensi-
tive film to an X ray image to imagewise photodegrade
the polymer and selectively generate halogenated free
radicals; and
(C) heating the exposed photosensitive film to allow the
imagewise generated halogenated free radicals to react
with the dye former to thereby form a dye image and
complex the dye with the complexing agent to finally
provide a dye complex image.
4,394,440
YELLOW-DYE-FORMING PHOTOGRAPHIC
DEVELOPING COMPOSITION
Carl R. Cappel, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 341,712
Int. CV G03C 7/16. 7/00
U.S. a. 430—379 7 Qaims
6. In a method of reversal color processing of a photo-
graphic element in which said element is developed in a yel-
low-dye-forming photographic developing solution, the im-
provement wherein said solution comprises
(1) a haloacetanilide coupler of the formula
U ft U M /
II I II I /
R— C— C— C— N— ^
wherein R is a branched alkyl group of 3 to 6 carbon
atoms, X is CI or Br, Y is X, hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 8
carbon atoms, and A and B differ and are either H or
COOM where M is a photographically inactive cation or
a methyl or ethyl group;
(2) an N-alkyl-N-alkoxyalkyl-p-phenylenediamme develop-
ing agent of the formula
CHj-CH2-N-(CH2)„-0-R'
NH2
wherein n is an integer having a value of from 2 to 4, R'
is alkyl of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and R^ is alkyl of from
1 to 4 carbon atoms or alkoxy of from 1 to 4 carbon atoms;
and (3) a 4,4-disubstituted-l-ary!-3-pyrazolidinone balancing
developing agent of the formula
wherein R^ and R^ are the same or different and each is
alkyl of I to 6 carbon atoms or hydroxyalkyi of 1 to 6
carbon atoms, and R* is hydrogen, halogen, alkyl of 1 to 6
carbon atoms, or alkoxy of 1 to 6 carbon atoms.
4,394,441
PHOTOGRAPHIC SENSITIVE MATERIALS
Hideo Kawaguchi, Minami-ashigara; Takayuki Inayama,
Fujinomiya; Masaaki Takimoto, Tokyo, and Yoshihiro Ono,
Asaka, all of Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339.798
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1981, 56-4442
Int. a.' G03C 1/84
U.S. a. 430—524 12 Qaims
1. A photographic sensitive material comprising at least one
silver halide sensitive layer provided on a plastic film base
through a subbing layer, wherein the improvement comprises
said subbing layer containing fine particles of at least one
electrically conductive crystalline metal oxide selected from
ZnO, Ti02, Sn02, AI2O3, In203, Si02. MgO, BaO, and M0O3,
or a compound oxide thereof having a volume resistivity of
10' VL cm or less, dispersed in an organic polymer binder.
1174
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,442
POST-STRETCH WATER-DISPERSIBLE SUBBING
COMPOSITION FOR POLYESTER nLM BASE
Conrad E. Miller, Hendersonville, N.C., assignor to E. 1. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 357,908
Int. a.' G03C 1/78
U.S. CI. 430—532 « Qaims
1. An article of manufacture comprising an energy -treated
biaxially oriented polyester film base coated with
(1) a subbing layer applied from an aqueous dispersion of a
linear copolyester having a relative viscosity of from
about 1.3 to about 1.7 measured as a 0.58% solution in
m-cresol at 25° C. which comprises the reaction product
of substantially equimolar equivalents of at least two di-
carboxylic acids and at least one dihydric alcohol, said
dicarboxylic acid equivalents being supplied by a plurality
of acid reactants which, based on a total of 100% (molar)
acid equivalents, includes from about 0.1% (molar) to
about 10% (molar) equivalents of an aromatic sulfonated
compound having a structural formula,
X— Z— Y
I -
SO3M
wherein:
M is a monovalent cation selected from the group of an
alkali metal, ammonium substituted ammonium, and
quaternary ammonium;
X and Y are monovalent radicals individually selected
from the group having structural formulas consisting of
00 O
II II II
HO— C— , A— O— C— , HO(CH2)„— O— C— and
probe; wherein said probe is an extension of the nucleotide
sequence of an oligonucleotide primer having a nucleotide
sequence complementary to a region of said target mRNA
coding for a portion of said known amino acid sequence,
said oligonucleotide probe being produced by separately
effecting cDNA synthesis in the presence of said oligonu-
cleotide primer and only three deoxynucleotide triphos-
phates, isolating and separating extended cDNA fractions
having at least three more nucleotides than said primer,
sequencing said extended fractions, and recovering at least
one oligonucleotide complementary to a longer region of
said target mRNA coding for a longer portion of said
known amino acid sequence.
O
II
H0[(CH2)„01m-C-
4,394,444
COF ACTOR INDICATOR COMPOSITIONS
Erma C. Cameron, Mishawaka; Qaude R. Gunter, Elkhart, and
Rodric H. White-Stevens, Howe, all of Ind., assignors to
Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart, Ind.
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,252
Int. CV C12Q 1/60
U.S. a. 435—11 36 Claims
1. A composition for the determination of an analyte in a
sample which composition comprises:
an analyte-responsive component comprising a pyridine
nucleotide susceptible of reduction in response to the
presence of said analyte and at least one constituent inter-
reactive with said analyte to cause reduction of the pyri-
dine nucleotide;
a hydroxylase capable of being uncoupled and a pseudosub-
strate capable of uncoupling said hydroxylase, which
hydroxylase and pseudosubstrate, in the presence of the
reduced form of said pyridine nucleotide, are effective to
generate hydrogen peroxide;
a peroxidatively active substance; and
a hydrazone indicator comprising a hydrazone and a cou-
pler, which indicator, when in its oxidized form, cannot be
reduced by said pyridine nucleotide.
wherem
A is a lower alkyl group having 1-5 carbon atoms; m and
n are positive integers of less than 20 with n being
greater than 1; and Z is a trivalent aromatic radical;
and wherein said copolyester is not branched, cross-
linked, or used with a crosslinking agent; and
(2) a gelatin-containing layer contiguous thereto.
4,394,443
METHOD FOR CLONING GENES
Sherman M. Weissman, New Haven, Conn.; Dennis Pereira,
W esterly, R.I., and Ashwani Sood, New Haven, Conn., assign-
ors to Yale University, New Haven, Conn.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,643
Int. a.J C12Q 1/68: C12P 27/00, 21/02; C12N 15/00: C12P
19/34: GOIN 33/50
U.S. a. 435—6 12 Claims
1. A method for isolating and indentifying a recombinant
clone having a DNA segment therein coding for at least one
desired heterologous polypeptide, at least a short amino acid
sequence of which is known, said method comprising the steps
of:-
(a) effecting cDNA synthesis on a mixture of mRNAs con-
taining a target mRNA coding for said at least one poly-
peptide, and isolating the resultant cDNA mixture;
(b) inserting said resultant cDNA into recombinant cloning
vehicles, and transforming hosts with said vehicles; and
(c) separating the transformants and isolating and identifying
a recombinant clone containing a DNA segment which is
homologous over at least a portion thereof to at least one
oligonucleotide probe specific for said DNA segment, said
identification being effected by hydridization with said
4,394,445
ENZYMATIC GLYCERIDE HYDROLYSIS
Paul T. Nix, 62 Forest Dr., Jackson, N.J. 08527; Janet M.
Santoro, 70 Kingsly Way, Freehold, N.J. 07728, and Joyce E.
Stephens, P.O. Box 51, Avon-by-Sea, N.J. 07717
Continuation of Ser. No. 187,664, Sep. 16, 1980, abandoned, and
a continuation of Ser. No. 13,862, Feb. 22, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 331,449
Int. a.3 C12Q 1/44
U.S. CI. 435—19 9 Claims
1. A composition useful for the hydrolysis of a glycerol ester
in an aqueous medium comprising a mixture of from about 65
to 91 units of Rhizopus arrhizus lipase and from about 35 to 9
units of Pseudomonas fluorescens lipase per 100 units of toUl
lipase.
4 394 446
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF THE
ANTIBIOTIC OXANOSINE
Hamao Umezawa; Nobuyoshi Shimada, both of Tokyo; Hiroshi
Naganawa, Honmachi; Tomohisa Takita, Asaka; Masa
Hamada, Naito, and Tomio Takeuchi, Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Zaidan Hojin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,650
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 22, 1980, 55-165159
Int. C\? CUP 19/40: C12N 1/20: C12R 1/465
U.S. a. 435—88 3 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of the antibiotic oxanosine
which comprises cultivating Streptomyces capreolus MG265-
CF3, ATCC No. 31963 until a substantial amount of oxanosine
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1175
is accumulated in the culture medium, and recovering the
oxanosine from the culture medium.
4 394 447
PRODUCTION OF HIGH-PYRUVATE XANTHAN GUM
ON SYNTHETIC MEDIUM
Martin C. Cadmus, and Qarence A. Knutson, Jr., both of Peo-
ria, III., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Secretary of Agriculture, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 23, 1978, Ser. No. 908,601
Int. C\? C12P 19/06. 19/04: C12R 1/64
U.S. a. 435-104 3 Qaims
1. In a process for producing polysaccharides by fermenta-
tion of a carbohydrate-containing nutrient medium with the
bacterium Xanthomonas campestris, wherein said bacterium is
cultivated on said medium under conditions suitable for its
growth, the improvement comprising:
a. providing (NH4)2HP04 as the primary nitrogen source in
said nutritent medium at a level of at least 0.15 g./lOO ml.
of medium;
b. providing a total phosphate level in said nutrient medium
of at least 0.25 g./lOO ml. of medium; and
c. recovering from said fermentation medium a polysaccha-
ride isolated from residual solids in said medium wherein
said polysaccharide has a pyruvic acid content of at least
3.3% by weight.
4,394,448
METHOD OF INSERTING DNA INTO LIVING CELLS
Francis C. Szoka, Jr., 76 Summit St., Waltham, Mass. 02154,
and Demetrios P. Papahadjopoulos, 3170 Condit St., Lafay-
ette, Calif. 94549
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 881,116, Feb. 24, 1978, Pat. No.
4,235,871. This application Apr. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 143,455
Int. a.3 C12N 15/00
U.S. a. 435-172 11 Qaims
1. A method of inserting deoxyribonucleic acid into a living
cell, which comprises; encapsulating the acid material in a lipid
vesicle and bringing the vesicle in contact with said cell,
whereby insertion occurs.
4,394,449
STABILIZATION OF COENZYMES IN AQUEOUS
SOLUTION
Ivan E. Modrovich, 1043 Mesa Dr., Camarillo, Calif. 93010
Filed Feb. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 121,225
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 7, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C12N 9/96: C12Q 1/58. 1/50 1/34
U.S. Q. 435—188 27 Qaims
1. A stabilized aqueous coenzyme solution for use in the
clinical assay of a selected biological constituent through the
enzymic reaction of an enzyme or enzymes with selective
substrates for the enzymes and a labile coenzyme, said aqueous
coenzyme solution comprising:
(a) at least one first enzyme and a first substrate for selec-
tively reacting with the first enzyme in the assay of the
selected biological constituent;
(b) a labile coenzyme for interacting with the first enzyme
and first substrate, which labile coenzyme degrades in said
aqueous solution to a coenzyme conversion product; and
(c) an enzyme and substrate system comprising at least one
second enzyme and a selective second substrate for the
second enzyme, which second enzyme and second sub-
strate react in said aqueous enzyme solution with the
coenzyme conversion product to form the coenzyme.
4,394,450
METHOD FOR PURIHCATION OF URICASE
David A. Brock, and Surendra K. Gupta, both of Elkhart, Ind.,
assignors to Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart, Ind.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,484
Int. CIJ C12N 9/06: C12Q 1/62
U.S. Q. 435-191 7 Qaims
1. A method for purifying uricase by decreasing the amount
of active catalase present which comprises adjusting the pH of
a catalase-containmg uricase preparation to a pH in the range
of about 11 to 1 3 to inactivate said catalase. and recovering
therefrom a uricase preparation substantially free of active
catalase.
4 394 451
CULTURE MEDIUM AND CONDITIONS FOR GROWTH
OF MAGNETIC BACTERIA
Richard P. Blakemore, Durham, N.H., and Ralph S. Wolfe,
Champaign, III., assignors to BioMagnetech Corp., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,160
Int. Q.^ C12N 1/20: C12R 1/01: C12P 3/00
U.S. Q. 435-253 27 Qaims
1. An aqueous culture medium for the growth of a biologi-
cally pure culture of magnetic bacteria, comprising, per 100
ml, about 2-30 ^M of ferric quinate. about 10-1000 mg of an
organic compound selected from the group consisting of fu-
maric acid, tartaric acid, malic acid, succinic acid, lactic acid,
pyruvic acid, oxaloacetic acid, malonic acid, /3-hydrox-
ybutyric acid, maleic acid, galactose, rhamnose, melibiose,
acetic acid, adipic acid, and glutaric acid, a vitamin source, a
mineral source, a nitrogen source, an acetate source, and a pH
buffer, said pH buffer resulting in a pH of said aqueous culture
medium of about 5.2-7.5.
4,394,452
SYNTHETIC STOOL
Roland HartI, Eppertshausen, and Dieter Helm, Heppenheim,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Rohm GmbH,
Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 30, 1978, Ser. No. 910,285
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 31,
1977, 2724438; May 2, 1978, 2819284
Int. CI.' GOIN 33/72: C09K 3/00
U.S. Q. 436—66 2 Qaims
1. A synthetic human stool, spreadable on a substrate and
adaptable to use as a control standard in the diagnostic detec-
tion of occult blood in the stool, said synthetic stool consisting
essentially of a matrix of a member selected from the group
consisting of oxygen-containing organic polymers which are
difficultly soluble in water and oxygen-containing inorganic
solids difficultly soluble in water, a non-bleeding coloring
agent adherent to said matrix and simulating the color of a
human stool, a liquid selected from the group consisting of
water and lubricants, and a predetermined amount of hemo-
lyzed human blood, said coloring agent on treatment with
hydrogen peroxide showing no change in color or no change
in color interfering with such a diagnostic detection of occult
blood.
4,394,453
ENVELOPES FOR TUNGSTEN-HALOGEN LAMPS
William H. Dumbaugh, Jr., Painted Post, N.Y., assignor to
Coming Glass Works, Coming, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 299,737
Int. Q.3 C03C 3/08
U.S. Q. 501—66 2 Qaims
1. A glass envelope for a tungsten-halogen incandescent
lamp, said glass exhibiting a strain point of at least 670° C, a
coefficient of thermal expansion (0°-300'' C.) of
42-45 X 10- VC, a liquidus temperature below 1 150* C, and
a viscosity at the liquidus temperature greater than 2x10*
1176
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
poises, and consisting essentially, expressed in weight percent
on the oxide basis, of
Si02
AI2O3
B2O3
CaO
MgO
60.0 ± 1.5
17.0 ± 1.0
5.0 ± 0.8
11.4 ± 0.8
7.5 ± 0.8
barium titanate (BaTiOs), 10 to 35 wt.% of titanium oxide
(TiOi), 1 to 6 wt.% of bismuth oxide (BisOs) and 1 to 10 wt.%
of lead oxide (Pbs04), and including 1 to 6 wt.% of zinc oxide
(ZnO) and 1 to 6 wt.% of silicon oxide (SiOa).
the total Al203 + Si02 being held between 74.5-78, the weight
ratio Si02:Ai203 being held between about 3.3-3.8, and the
weight ratio CaO:MgO being held between about 1.3-1.8.
4,394,454
METHOD FOR MAKING SINTERED DOLOMITE WITH
A LOW POROSITY AND A GOOD HYDRATION
STABILITY
Karlbeinz Riisener, Dusseldorf; Alfred Roeder, Duisburg; Wolf-
gang Miinchberg, Hagen; Herbert Richrath, Hagen, and Max
Chmiel, Hagen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Dolomitwerke GmbH, Wulfrath, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,449
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 9,
1981, 3118481
Int. a.3 C04B 35/04
U.S. a. 501—112 11 Qaims
1. In a method for making a dolomite sinter with a low
porosity and a good hydration stability made of milled raw
dolomite comprising the steps of adding foreign oxides to
milled pure raw dolomite powder having a low content of
foreign oxides, pressing the milled raw dolomite powder-
foreign oxide admixture into briquets, and heating the briquets
to a sintering temperature, the improvement comprising:
adding a member selected from the group consisting of burnt
dolomite, dolomite hydrate, semi-burnt dolomite and
combinations thereof in quantities of between 3 and 20%
by weight, relative to the total mixture, to said raw dolo-
mite powder and wherein said foreign oxides are added in
such quantities such that the total content of foreign ox-
ides is 1 to 3% by weight calculated on the ignition loss
free mixture.
4,394,455
SPINEL SLIP CASTING COMPOSITION AND ARTICLES
Dale M. Bertelsman, Lake Jackson; William M. Eckert, Angle-
ton, and Stanley J. Morrow, Qute, all of Tex., assignors to
The Dow Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 217,712, Dec. 18, 1980,
abandoned. This application Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,048
Int. a.3 C04B 35/04
U.S. a. 501—117 13 Qaims
1. A casting composition comprising
(A) 10 to about 60 percent by weight of a powder of a spinel
prepared by coprecipitation of metal hydroxides or metal
compound convertable to the metal hydroxides, dried and
calcined to between about 400° and 1400° C; and
(B) the balance water and a sufficient deflocculating agent to
form a substantially stable dispersion of the powder.
4,394,457
POROUS COMPOSITE MATERIAL AND PROCESS FOR
PREPARING SAME
Tatsuo Ogasa, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Agency of Indus-
trial Science & Technology, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 72,185, Sep. 4, 1979, Pat. No. 4,252,907.
This application Apr. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 144,205
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 18, 1978, 53-142522
Int. Q.3 C08J 9/40. 9/42
U.S. Q. 521—54 4 Qaims
1. A porous foamed material comprising a porous, foamed
body formed of hydrophobic polymer having a multiplicity of
pores dispersed in said body and each communicating with the
surface of the body and providing a porosity of 10-70% for
said body, said hydrophobic polymer being selected from the
group consisting of polyolefin resins, styrene resins, acrylic
resins and polyvinyl chloride resins, and having a layer pro-
vided over at least a portion of the interior surface of each of
said pores and containing a hydrophilic polymer selected from
the group consisting of polyvinyl alcohol, polyacrylic acid,
polyvinyl pyrrolidone, polyethylene glycol and a salt of poly-
acrylic acid, in a weight ratio of 1-25 parts of said hydrophilic
polymer per 100 parts of said hydrophobic polymer, said po-
rous foamed material being the product of emulsification of an
aqueous solution containing said hydrophilic polymer and a
foaming agent into a solution of said hydrophobic polymer in
an organic solvent, wherein liquid particles of said aqueous
solution are dispersed in said organic solvent to form an emul-
sion, followed by removal of non-solids from the emulsion and
by foaming of the remaining solid obtained from said emulsion
to obtain said porous, foamed body.
4,394,458
ALKALI METAL BOROHYDRIDE CONCENTRATE
Robert C. Wade, Ipswich, Mass., assignor to Thiokol Corpora-
tion, Chicago, III.
Division of Ser. No. 272,867, Jun. 12, 1981, abandoned. This
application Jul. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 398,057
Int. Q.3 C08J 9/06
U.S. Q. 521—82 5 Qaims
1. A method of making a solid, substantially inert, and stable
alkali metal borohydride blowing agent concentrate, compris-
ing:
a. dry blending from 0.5% to 20% by weight of dried alkali
metal borohydride with a dried inert resinous polymer in
which reactive protonic hydrogen atoms are substantially
absent to form a mixture thereof containing less than about
0. 1 % by weight adsorbed water;
b. heating said mixture to a temperature above the melting
point of said resin to form a molten mixture;
c. extruding said molten mixture to form a solid, stable and
substantially inert concentrate; and
d. forming said extruded and cooled concentrate into pellets.
4,394,456
TEMPERATURE-COMPENSATING CERAMIC
DIELECTRICS
Yukio Sakabe, Kyoto, and Goro Nishioka, Hirakata, both of
Japan, assignors to Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd., Kyoto,
Japan
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,328
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 13, 1981, 56-56175
Int. Q.3 C04B 35/46; HOIB 3/]2
U.S. Q. 501—138 2 Qaims
1. A temperature-compensating ceramic dielectric consist-
ing essentially of a composition consisting essentially of 35 to
65 wt.% of neodymium titanate (NdjTi207), 10 to 35 wt.% of
4,394,459
FAST-CURING FOAMABLE COMPOSITION BASED ON
ETHYLENE TERPOLYMERS
John Rys-Sikora, Bel Aire, Md., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Division of Ser. No. 303,479, Sep. 18, 1981, Pat. No. 4,370,423.
This application Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,452
Int. Q.J C08J 9/06
U.S. Q. 521—84 4 Qaims
1. A crosslinked closed-cell microcellular foamed article
with bulk density of at least 0.02 g/cm^ comprising a terpoly-
mer of
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1177
(i) ethy ine,
(ii) 10 to 40 percent by weight of a softening monomer
selected from the group consisting of alkyl acrylates and
methylacrylates having linear or branched alkyl groups of
1 to 18 carbon atoms, vinyl esters of saturated carboxylic
acids having 1 to 18 carbon atoms and vinyl alkyl ethers
wherein the alkyl group contains 1 to 18 carbon atoms;
and
(iii) 1.0 to 20 percent by weight carbon monoxide.
4,394,460
ETHYLENE-CHLOROTRIFLUOROETHYLENE
COPOLYMER FOAM
Daniel C. Chung, Middlesex; William A. Miller, Bridgewater,
and Eugene R. Baumgaertner, Florham Park, all of N.J.,
assignors to Allied Corporation, Morris Township, Morris
County, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 213,716, Dec. 8, 1980, Pat. No. 4,331,619.
This application Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,326
Int. Q.J C08J 9/08. 9/10
U.S.Q. 521-92 34 Qaims
1. A composition comprising:
a copolymer of ethylene and chlorotrifluoroethylene, the
copolymer having between 40 and 60 mol percent of
ethylene units and correspondingly between about 60 and
about 40 mol percent of chlorotrifluoroethylene units;
an effective amount of a blowing agent selected from the
group consisting of hydrozodicarboxylates, diesters of
azodiformic acid and carbazides; and
at least one nucleating agent selected from the group consist-
ing of talc, magnesium carbonate, calcium carbonate,
barium carbonate, zinc carbonate, lead carbonate, magne-
sium oxide, calcium oxide, barium oxide, zinc oxide and
lead oxide.
4,394,461
AZOCARBOXYLATE BLOWING AGENT
Paul E. Stott, Houston, Tex., assignor to Uniroyal, Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 430,101
Int. Q.J C08J 9/10
U.S. Q. 521—113 10 Qaims
1. A foamable and curable polyester composition consisting
essentially of, all parts by weight (unless otherwise indicated):
(a) 100 parts liquid unsaturated polyester resin;
(b) 0.1-10 parts azocarboxylate of the formula
wherein M is a metal; x is the valence of R and is 1-6, y is
the valence of M and is 1-4, and mx = ny = p where
p=l-24; and R is:
(1) A, a mono- or polyvalent radical: C|-CioalkyI, haloal-
kyl; C5-C6 cycloalkyi; C7-C9 aralkyl; C7-C9 alkaryl;
phenyl, halophenyl; naphthyl; C4-C10 oxydialkylene
oxydiphenylene; or
(2) COOM', where M' is the same as or different from M,
or
(3)COOR' whereR'is A;or
(4) COR2, where R2 is A or NH2
(c) 0.1-4.0 parts hydrogen peroxide, organic peroxide or
organic hydroperoxide,
(d) 0.1-20 parts proton donor
(e) 3-1000 ppm, based on metal, of metal promoter,
(0 0-2.0 parts surface active agent, and
(g) 0-250 parts filler.
4 394 462
MIXTURES OF POLYMERS FOR MEDICAL USE
Christian Pusineri, Serezin du Rhone, and Jean Goletto, Ecully,
both of France, assignors to Hospal-Sodip, S.A., Meyzieu,
France
Division of Ser. No. 103,894, Dec. 17, 1979. This application
Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,323
Int. Q.5 C08J 9/14
U.S. Q. 521-137 1 oaim
1. Process for the preparation of a foamed composition
having good compatibility with biological materials consistmg
of a mixture of vinyl chloride polymer and a polyether-ure-
thane with tertiary amine and/or ammonium groups with the
proportion of the polyether-urethane being from 1 to 99 per-
cent by weight, relative to the total mixture, on a blowing
agent or a solvent in an inadequate amount to solubilise the
total amount of the composition, and in that this paste is then
extruded at a temperature below 100° C. to foam said mixture
of polymers.
4 394 463
RIGID POLYURETHANE FOAMS MADE FROM AMINO
POLYOLS MODIHED WITH EPOXY RESINS
Michael Cuscurida; Neal J. Grice, and George P. Speranza, all
of Austin, Tex., assignors to Texaco Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 183,558, Sep. 2, 1980, Pat. No. 4,309.532.
This application Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,560
Int. Q.J C12P 5/02
U.S. Q. 521—167 2 Qaims
1. An improved rigid polyurethane foam produced by the
reaction of a modified amino polyol, an organic poiyisocyanate
and one or more foam catalysts where in the improvement
comprises making the modified amino polyol by the reaction of
components comprising
(a) a rigid foam polyol initiator having an active hydrogen
functionality equal to or greater than four,
(b) an amine,
(c) one or more alkylene oxides and
(d) an epoxy resin.
4,394,464
MODIHED POLYIMIDE FOAMS AND METHODS OF
MAKING SAME
John Gagliani, 6280 Lance PI.. San Diego, Calif. 92120, and
John V. Long, 1756 E. Lexington PI., El Cajon, Calif. 92021
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,778
Int. Q.J C08J 9/22. 9/24. 9/32
U.S. Q. 521—180 13 Qaims
1. The method of making a resilient, flame resistant modified
polyimide foam which comprises the steps of:
reacting an aromatic dianhydride with an oximine having
the general formula:
r
^
CH2— (CH2)x— NHCO
wherein "X" is an integer from 2 to 4, in a mole ratio of oxoi-
mine to dianhydride between about 1.5:1 and about 0.05.1 to
produce an N-substituted aliphatic imide;
dissolving said imide in a reactive solvent esterifying agent
to exterify said imide;
1178
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
adding thereto a diamine;
drying the resulting solution; and
heating the dry material to a selected foaming temperature
of from about 120° C. to about 320° C. for a period of from
about 10 to about 60 minutes;
whereby a resilient foam having good flame resistance is
produced comprising pjolyimide and polyimide-amide
with proportions depending on the selected foaming tem-
perature.
V
— C— OH;
I
R2
or prepolymer thereof or mixtures thereof; and a catalytic
amount of a metal salt of a carboxylic acid catalyst wherein the
metal constituent of said salt of a carboxylic acid is capable 6f
existing in at least two valence states.
4,394,465
DENTAL MATERIALS BASED ON ORGANIC PLASTICS
IN PASTE FORM
Wolfgang Podszun, Cologne; Michael Walkowiak, Leverkusen,
and Hans-Hermann Schuiz, Leichlingen, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,570
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 26,
1979 2938875
Int. a.3 A61K 6/08; C08K 3/36. 3/40
U.S. O. 523—116 14 Qaims
1. A dental material which is based on organic plastics and is
in paste form, characterized in that it comprises (a) 18 to 50%
by weight of a polymerisable binder, (b) 20 to 65% by weight
of a crosslinked bead polymer with an average particle size of
5 to 100 ftm and (c) 5 to 45% by weight of glass beads with an
average particle size of 5 to SOji.
4,394,467
SIZED CARBON nBERS CAPABLE OF USE WITH
POLYIMIDE MATRIX
Robert Edelman, Staten Island, N.Y., assignor to Celanese Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,108
Int. C1.3 B32B 5/00, 27/06; D02G 3/00
U.S. a. 523—205 26 Qaims
1. A carbon fiber having a flexible coating on the surface
thereof in a concentration of approximately 0.3 to 5.0 percent
by weight based upon the weight of the carbon fiber of a sizing
composition which comprises a polyamic acid oligomer, and is
capable of yielding a rigid polyimide at elevated temperatures
which is derived fropi the reaction of at least one aromatic
diamine, at least one aromatic dianhydride, and at least one
aromatic tetracarboxylic acid diester in which the carboxylic
acid groups and ester groups are ortho disposed, wherein said
polyamic acid oligomer is an intermediate in the formation of
said rigid polyimide.
4,394,466
FULVENE BINDER COMPOSITIONS
Bruce A. Gniber, Worthington; Heimo J. Langer, and William
R. Dunnavant, both of Columbus, all of Ohio, assignors to
Ashland Oil, Inc., Ashland, Ky.
Division of Ser. No. 174,970, Aug. 4, 1980, Pat. No. 4,320,218.
This application Nov. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 320,026
Int. a? C08K 5/09
U.S. a. 523—141 19 Qaims
1. A molding composition which comprises a major amount
of aggregate and an effective bonding amount up to about 40%
by weight of the aggregate of a composition capable of curing
in the presence of oxygen containing a fulvene of the formula:
c
H
c
/ \
R6— C C— R3
4,394,468
nBER REINFORCED POLYOXYMETHYLENE
MOLDING COMPOSITIONS
Shau-Zou Lu, Whitehouse Station, N.J., assignor to Celanese
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 3, 1982, Ser. No. 345,287
Int. Q.3 C08L 71/02; C08F 3/40; C08J 3/20
U.S. Q. 523—205 10 Qaims
1. An improved fiber reinforced polyoxymethylene molding
composition comprising the admixture of:
(i) a polyoxymethylene polymer; and
(ii) an effective amount of a fibrous reinforcement, wherein
said fibrous reinforcement is surface treated with a vinyl
polymer which is selected from the group consisting of
polyvinylacetate, copolymers of vinyl acetate and other
ethylenically unsaturated monomers and partially hydro-
lyzed vinyl acetate polymer.
R5— C
C— R4
wherein each Ri and R2 individually is hydrogen or a hydro-
carbon containing 1 to 10 carbon atoms, or a hydrocarbon
containing one or more oxygen bridges in the chain; or a furyl
group; or are interconnected to form a cyclic group, each R3
and R6 individually is hydrogen or methyl, each R4 and R5 is
hydrogen or methyl or
— C— OH,
I
R2
4,394,469
POLYSILOXANE TREATED ANTIMONY COMPOUNDS
Julius J. Stratta, Yorktown Heights, N.Y.; Lloyd M. Robeson,
White House Station, N.J., and Richard V. Girardi, Mahopac,
N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury,
Conn.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 363,103
Int. Q.' C08K 9/06
U.S. Q. 523—212 18 Qaims
1. An inorganic antimony compound surface modified with
up to about 10 percent by weight of a polysiloxane having the
formula:
H R'
I I
-fSiO-)3^SiO-)y
I I
R R'"^
provided that a maximum of only one such R3, R4. R5 and Re
is methyl and provided that a maximum ofany one such R4 and wherein R, R' and R" are individually alkyl, alkenyl, aryl,
Rj J5 alkylaryl, alkoxy, ether, ester, carboxyl, or amino groups hav-
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1179
ing from 1 to 18 carbon atoms, and a-l-b equals from 2 to 1,000
provided a/b is greater than 0.5.
4,394,470
COLORED POLYETHYLENE TEREPHTHALATE
MOULDING COMPOUND AND MOULDED PRODUCTS
MADE THEREFROM
Marcel A. Werner, Huissen; Arnold Venema, and Michael G. H.
Pisters, both of Amhem, all of Netherlands, assignors to Akzo
N.V., Amhem, Netherlands
Filed Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,846
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Mar. 20, 1981,
8101373
I Int. Q.5 C08K J/75
U.S. Q. 524—56 16 Qaims
1. A coloured polyethylene terephthalate moulding com-
pound, characterized in that in the moulding compound there
is uniformly distributed 10-25000 ppm of caramel.
4,394,471
COMPOSITIONS OF ALKYLENE-ALKYL ACRYLATE
COPOLYMERS HAVING IMPROVED FLAME
RETARDANT PROPERTIES
Michael J. Keogh, Bridgewater, N.J., assignor to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 127,509, Mar. 5, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 944,336,
Sep. 21, 1978, Pat. No. 4,243,579. This application Feb. 11, 1981,
Ser. No. 232,480
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 6, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.3 C08K 5/34. 3/26, 3/22, 3/30
U.S. Q. 524—92 22 Qaims
1. A flame retardant alkylene-alkyl acrylate copolymer
composition comprising an alkylene-alkyl acrylate copolymer,
from about 1 to 30 weight percent of a halogenated flame
retardant additive, and more than 20, up to about 30 weight
percent of at least one of calcium or magnesium oxide, carbon-
ate, hydroxide or sulfate; said weight percents based on the
total weight of the composition.
4,394,472
STABILIZED POLYISOPRENE COMPOSITION
Tadahiko Ito; Toshio Arao; Nobuo Satoh, and Hiroshi Harada,
all of Ibaraki, Japan, assignors to Japan Synthetic Rubber
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,827
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1980, 184540
Int. Q.3 C08K 5/34, 5/52
U.S. Q. 524—100 9 Qaims
1. A stabilized polyisoprene composition comprising 100
parts by weight of polyisoprene and 0.15-3.0 parts by weight
of a binary system antioxidant consisting of a phosphite type
antioxidant represented by the formula:
ORi
P— OR2
OR3
wherein Ri, R2 and R3, which may be the same or different,
represent aryl or alkaryl groups having 6 to 33 carbon atoms,
and
a triazine derivative type antioxidant represented by the
formula
1032 O.G.
Xi— R'
^^•^
N N
R--X3— U JI-X2-R"
N
wherein Xj, X2 and X3, which may be the same or different,
are selected from the group consisting of — NH— , — O— , and
— S— , and R', R", and R'", which may be the same or differ-
ent, represent alkyl groups having 2 to 15 carbon atoms, or
alkyl-substituted or unsubstituted hydroxyphenyl groups hav-
ing 1 to 10 carbon atoms in the alkyl group,
or 2,4,6-tris (3',5'-di-t-butyl-4'-hydroxypheny!ethoxy)- 1,3,5-
trizaine,
wherein the weight ratio of the phosphite type antioxidant to
the triazine derivative type antioxidant is 70/10-95/5.
4,394,473
RUBBER COMPOUNDING BAGS AND HLM MADE
FROM SYNDIOTACnC 1,2-POLYBUTADIENE
John P. Winter, and Mladomir Tomic, both of Appleton, Wis.,
assignors to The Coca-Cola Company, Atlanta, Ga.
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,046
Int. Q.J B65D 25/08; C08F 36/00
U.S. Q. 524—226 42 Qaims
1. A package which comprises (A) an article selected from at
least one of unvulcanized or vulcanized rubber or compound-
ing ingredients for unvulcanized rubber packaged in (B) a bag
or film made of syndiotactic 1,2-polybutadiene containing at
least one antiblock agent additive and also containing at least
one slip agent additive selected from the group consisting of
fatty acids and metal salts thereof, fatty acid amides, and ester
waxes and partially saponified products thereof, the thickness
of said bag or film being in the range of about O.S to about 10
mils.
19. A method of compounding rubber which comprises
mixing unvulcanized rubber with a package comprising at least
one compounding ingredient for unvulcanized rubber pack-
aged in a coextruded bag or film made of syndiotactic 1,2-
polybutadiene containing at least one antiblock agent additive
and also containing at least one slip agent additive selected
from the group consisting of fatty acids and metal salts thereof,
fatty acid amides, and ester waxes and partially saponified
products thereof, the total thickness of said bag or film being in
the range of about 0.5 to about 10 mils, said coextruded bag or
film comprising at least an inside layer and an outside layer,
said inside layer being comprised of syndiotactic 1,2-
polybutadiene containing a greater amount of one or more of
said antiblock agents than the outside layer.
37. A compounded rubber comprised of a mixture of an
unvulcanized rubber and a package comprising at least one
compounding ingredient for unvulcanized rubber packaged in
a coextruded bag or film made of syndiotactic 1.2-polybutadi-
ene containing at least one antiblock agent additive and also
containing at least one slip agent additive selected from the
group consisting of fatty acids and metal salts thereof, fatty
acid amides, and ester waxes and partially saponified products
thereof, the total thickness of said bag or film being in the
range of about 0.5 to about 10 mils, said coextruded bag or film
comprising at least an inside layer and an outside layer, said
inside layer being comprised of syndiotactic 1,2-polybutadiene
containing a greater amount of one or more of said antiblock
agents than the outside layer.
1180
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,474
PRODUCT AND PROCESS FOR REDUONG BLOCK AND
INCREASING SLIP OF LINEAR LOW DENSITY
ETHYLENE COPOLYMER FILMS
Osborae K. McKinney, and David P. nores, both of Lake Jack-
son, Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,268
Int. a.3 C08K 5/16: B29D 7/02
U.S. a. 524—232 !♦ Claims
1. A process for reducing block, and increasing slip, of
extrusion-cast films of linear low density ethylene copolymers
which inherently exhibit high block and low slip, said process
comprising
incorporating into the said copolymer, prior to extrusion-
casting into films, an effective amount in the range of
about 0.05 to about 1.5 weight percent of at least one
secondary fatty acid amide and about 0.02 to about 2
weight percent of finely-divided natural mineral, and
extrusion-casting the mixture into a thin film,
wherein the linear low density ethylene copolymer com-
prises ethylene copolymerized with a sufficient amount of
at least one alpha, beta-ethylenically unsaturated alkene
having from 3 to 12 carbons, to provide a copolymer
having a density in the range of about 0.90 to about 0.94
gms. cc,
said copolymers having a melt index in the range of about
0.1 gm./lO min. as measured by ASTM-D- 1238(E) to
about 20 gms./ 10 min. as measured by ASTM-D- 1238(D).
13. The film produced by the process of claim 1, having an
average thickness in the range of about 0.3 to about 8 mils.
incorporated therein a stabilizing amount of a compound hav-
ing the following structural formula:
O
n
l_/0y-S-CH2-CH-0-C-R-
-C-0-CH-CH2-S— (O;
OH
>— CH-
wherein R is an alkylene radical containing 2 to 10 carbon
atoms, a phenylene radical, or a radical of the structural for-
mula:
— CH2— CH2— S— CH2CH2-.
4,394,475
AQUEOUS SIZING COMPOSITION FOR PRODUONG
SIZED GLASS HBER STRANDS WITH IMPROVED SLIP
FLOW PROPERTIES
Chester S. Temple, McKees Rocks, and Ed C. Hsu, Pittsburgh,
both of Pa., assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,202
Int. a.3 C08K 5/54
U.S. a. 524—262 15 Claims
1. In an aqueous sizing comf)osition for treating glass fibers,
having one or more film forming polymers, one or more cou-
pling agents and one or more lubricants or any mixture thereof,
and water the improvement comprising:
(a) the one or more film forming polymers are nonstarch film
forming polymers that provide integrity to the glass fibers,
and the aqueous composition also has:
(b) a polyethylene-containing polymer where the polyethyl-
ene has limited branching with a polydispersity index of
less than 10 which is present in an amount of about 0.1 to
about 10 weight percent of the aqueous sizing composi-
tion, and
(c) a wax having a melting point greater than 50° C. present
in the aqueous sizing composition in an amount of about
0. 1 to about 6 weight percent of the aqueous sizing com-
position, where the weight ratio of polyethylene-contain-
ing polymer to wax is about 25:1 to about 1:25 and the
amount of the polyethylene and wax in an aqueous sizing
composition does not exceed about 1 5 weight percent of
the aqueous sizing composition.
4,394,477
COATING COMPOSITION
James B. Screeton, HeathHeld House, Lynstead, Nr. Sitting-
bourne, Kent, England
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,358
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 30, 1980,
8034934
Int. a? C08K 5/09
U.S. a. 524—319 8 Qaims
1. A coating composition comprising a pigment component
dispersed in a binder component, \yherein the pigment compo-
nent contains in particular form both a white mineral pigment
and a laminar solid and the binder component substantially
consists of a copolymer selected from a vinyl acetate veo va
copolymer and a vinyl acetate laureate copolymer dissolved in
an alcohol.
4,394,478
OXIDIZED CARBONACEOUS MATERIALS AND
VULCANIZED AND VULCANIZABLE RUBBER
COMPOSITIONS REINFORCED WITH SUCH
CARBONACEOUS MATERIALS
Jon W. Martin, Los Alamitos, Calif., assignor to TRW Inc.,
Redondo Beach, Calif.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,921
Int. a.3 C08K 3/18, 3/10
U.S. a. 524—424 3 Claims
1. A composition comprising a major amount of diene rub-
ber and a minor amount of oxidized carbonaceous material
comprising carbon in an amount of about 80% to about 99%;
oxidized iron dispersed in, intimately associated with and at
least partially bonded to the carbon in an amount of about 1%
to about 15%; and hydrogen in an amount of about 0.1% to
about 1.5% by weight.
4,394,476
DIESTER ANTIOXIDANTS
Kirkwood S. Cottman, Akron, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear
Tire A Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 243,323, Mar. 13, 1981, abandoned.
This application Jul. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 396,935
Int. a.3 C08K 5/13
VJS. a. 524—289 5 Qaims
1. A polymer susceptible to oxidative degradation having
4,394,479
VINYL ACETATE INTERPOLYMER LATICES
Irving Serlin, Springfield, Mass., assignor to Monsanto Com-
pany, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,994
Int. a.3 C08F 2/24; C08L 29/04
U.S. a. 524—459 20 Claims
1. An aqueous latex consisting essentially of a partially neu-
tralized acid-modified interpolymer of a C4-D6 vinyl ester and
a protective colloid, wherein the vinyl ester interpolymer
comprises from about 3 to about 7 weight percent of carbox-
yiic acid groups supplied by an interpolymerized C4-C10 vinyl-
ene monobasic carboxylic acid monomer, wherein the neutral-
JULY 19,
983
CHEMICAL
1181
izing agent is a volatile base, wherein the concentration of
protective colloid is less than about 0.8 parts by weight per 100
parts by weight of the interpolymer and wherein the particle
size of the latex is in the range of from 0.05 to about 0.5 mi-
crons.
12. A method of preparing an aqueous latex consisting essen-
tially of a partially neutralized acid-modified interpolymer of a
C4-C6 vinyl ester and a protective colloid, wherein the vinyl
ester interpolymer comprises from about 3 to about 7 weight
percent of carboxylic acid groups supplied by an interpolymer-
ized C4-C10 vinylene monobasic carboxylic acid monomer,
wherein the neutralizing agent is a volatile base, wherein the
concentration of protective colloid is less than about 0.8 parts
by weight per 100 parts by weight of the interpolymer and
wherein the particle size of the latex is in the range of about
0.05 to about 0.5 microns, said method comprising:
A. interpolymerizing the vinyl ester and vinylene monobasic
carboxylic acid monomer in aqueous suspension at a pH in
the range of about 6.0 to about 6.2 in the presence of the
protective colloid while adding incrementally sufficient of
the volatile base to neutralize from about 10 to about 30
percent of the vinylene monobasic carboxylic acid mono-
mer; and
B. adjusting the pH of the interpolymer suspension to a
value in the range of about 6.2 to about 7.5 and agitating
the interpolymer suspension to form the latex.
4,394,480
LOW SHRINKAGE UNSATURATED POLYESTER RESIN
COMPOSITION
Norihisa Ujikawa, and Kyosuke Fukushi, both of Aichi, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Oil and Fats Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,168
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 1, 1981, 56-048769
Int. a.3 C08L 67/06
U.S. a. 525—43 16 Qaims
1. A low-shrinkage unsaturated polyester resin composition
comprising (a) from 20 to 70% by weight of unsaturated poly-
ester resin, (b) from 20 to 70% by weight of a first polymeriz-
able monomer and (c) from 1 to 20% by weight of a block
copolymer mixture having acid groups, said block copolymer
mixture having been prepared by first copolymerizing (i) a
polymeric peroxide having the formula
-ecR 1COR2OCR icootii
II II II II
00 00
wherein Ri is alkylene or substituted alkylene having 1 to 18
carbon atoms, cycloalkylene or substituted cycloalkylene hav-
ing 3 to 15 carbon atoms, phenylene or substituted phenylene;
R2 is alkylene or substituted alkylene having 2 to 10 carbons
atoms,
-(-CHCH20)jrR4-
R3
wherein R3 is hydrogen or methyl, R4 is alkylene or substituted
alkylene having 2 to 10 carbon atoms and m is an integer of 1
to 13,
— (o)-C(CH3)2— ^^or — ^^^C(CH3)2— ^H^;
~~)
and n is an integer of 2 to 20, with (ii) a second monomer
com]X>nent selected from the group consisting of monomer A,
monomer B, mixture of monomer A and an unsaturated or-
ganic acid, and mixture of monomer B and an unsaturated
organic acid,
wherein monomer A consists of 70 to 100% by weight of vinyl
acetate and up to 30% by weight of fourth monomer copoly-
merizable with vinyl acetate, and monomer B consists of 0 to
100% by weight of one or more styrene series monomers
and 0 to 100% by weight of one or more unsaturated organic
acid esters,
whereby to obtain a copolymer having peroxy bonds in the
molecule, and then block copolymerizing said copolymer
having peroxy bonds in the molecule with a third monomer
component which is selected from the same group as, but is
different from, the said second monomer component that was
used in the first copolymerization step, with the provisos that
one of said second and third monomer components is a mixture
of one of monomer A or monomer B and said unsaturated
organic acid and the other of said second and third monomer
components is the other of monomer A or monomer B.
4,394,481
CATIONIC ARCYLAMIDE AND RUBBER MODIHED
— ASPHALTS
Anthony V. Gross!, Newark; Leon A. Hagelee, Minerva Park;
Louis T. Hahn, and Alfred Marzocchi, both of Newark, all of
Ohio, assignors to Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation,
Toledo, Ohio
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,902 ""
Int. a.3 C08F 289/00; C08G 83/00; C08H 5/00
U.S. a. 525—54.5 21 Claims
14. A chemically modified asphalt reaction product pro-
duced by charging into a reactor an acrylamide having a dou-
ble bond, asphalt, a vinyl aromatic monomer, and a rubbery
polymer which is a homopolymer of a diene or a copolymer of
a diene and an olefinically unsaturated monomer and heating
the materials at an elevated temperature for several hours so as
to produce said reaction product.
4,394,482
MODIHED ASPHALT COMPOSITION
William E. Uffner, Newark, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Coming
Fiberglas Corporation, Toledo, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 167,985, Jul. 14, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,124
Int. aj C08L 95/00
U.S. a. 525—54.5 16 Qaims
1. A chemically modified asphalt composition comprising
(1) an asphalt which has been reacted with a polymerizable
vinyl aromatic monomer and a rubbery polymer and (2) a
terpene resin, said terpene resin being present in an amount
sufficient to reduce the viscosity of said reacted asphalt.
4,394,483
SAPONinCATION OF ETHYLENE COPOLYMERS
SUSPENDED IN KETONE
Victor J. Hobes, Dinslaken, and Wolfgang Payer, Wesel, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ruhechemie Aktiengeseil-
schaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,565
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 6,
1980, 3046144
Int. Q.3 C08F 8/12
U.S. Q. 525—60 9 Qaims
1. In a process for the production of ethylene copolymers
comprising by weight
(1) more than 60% polyethylene,
(2) 0 to 20% polyesters of C3 to C12 alkenecarboxylic acids
with Ci to Cg primary alcohols,
(3) I to 20% C3 to C|2 polyalkenecarboxylic acids, ps com-
prising saponifying a feedstock comprising by weight a
granular polymer or
(a) at least 50% ethylene,
(b) 2 to 50% esters of C3 to C12 alkenecarboxylic acids with
C| to Cg primary alcohols,
(c) 0 to 30% vinyl esters of saturated monobasic, aliphatic
carboxylic acids with I to 6 carbon atoms, and
1182
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
(d) up to 3% C3 to C12 alkenecarboxylic acids,
the improvement which comprises said feedstock having a
particle size of 0. 1 to 8.0 mm, and being suspended in a liquid
phase consisting essentially of a ketone, there being 1 part of
said feedstock to 1-10 parts of said ketone, said ketone being of
the formula
RCR'
- H
o
wherein R and R' are individually a straight or branched chain
alkyl radical having 1 to 6 carbon atoms, and
carrying out the saponification of the polyester of alkenecar-
boxylic acids with primary alcohols at 40° to 75° C. in the
presence of at least one alkaline saponifying agent, while
retaining the granular structure thereof.
4^94,484
POLYPENTABROMOSTYRENE, PROCESS FOR THE
PRODUCTION AND USE
Herbert Jenkner, Pulheim; Robert Strang, Cologne, and Peter
Adermann, Rosrath, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Chemische Fabrik Kalk GmbH, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 280,979
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 7,
1980, 3025666
Int. a.3 C08F 112/04
U.S. a. 525—72 9 Qaims
1. Polypentabromostyrene having a bromine content of
between 76% and 80% and a softening point above 280° C. and
which is thermally decomposed at a temperature of above 400°
C.
2. A process for preparing polypentabromostyrene having a
bromine content of between 76% and 80% and a softening
point above 280° C. and which is thermally decomposed at a
temperature of 400° C, comprising heating pentabromostyrene
to a temperature of 100° C. to 150° C. in an alcoholic solvent
having a boiling point of above 100° C. in the presence of an
effective amount of a polymerization catalyst.
(A) a modified hydroxy acrylic copolymer which is the step-
wise reaction product of:
(i) a copolymer bearing pendant hydroxyl groups and hav-
ing a number average molecular weight (Mn) of between
about 1000-5000, said copolymer being prepared from (a)
between about 5 and about 40 weight percent of monoeth-
ylenically unsaturated hydroxy alkyl ester of the formula
CH2=CRi— COOR2 wherein Ri is H or an alkyl group
and R2 is a hydroxy alkyl group and (b) between about
95-60 weight percent of other monoethylenically unsatu-
rated monomers;
(ii) dicarboxylic acid anhydride comprising at least about 50
percent by weight of an alkyl hexahydrophthalic anhy-
dride, wherein (i) and (ii) are reacted in an amount suffi-
cient to esterify between about 30 and about 100 percent
of said pendant hydroxyl groups of said copolymer
thereby generating pendant carboxyl groups; and
(iii) a monoepoxide functional monomer comprising at least
about 90 percent by weight C2-C10 monoepoxide func-
tional monomers, wherein said monomer is reacted with
said pendant carboxyl groups of the polymer reaction
product of (i) and (ii) in an amount so as to provide at least
about 1.0 equivalent of epoxide groups per equivalent of
said pendant carboxyl groups to generate pendant hy-
droxyl groups;
(B) an amine-aldehyde crosslinking agent;
(C) 0-50 weight percent based on the total weight of (A),
(B) (C) and (D) of a hydroxy functional additive having a
number average molecular weight (M„) of between about
150 and about 6000; and
(D) solvent said amine-aldehyde crosslinking agent being in-
cluded in said composition in an amount sufficient to provide
at least about 0.60 equivalents of nitrogen crosslinking func-
tionality for each equivalent of hydroxyl functionality in-
cluded in said composition either as a hydroxyl group on
said modified hydroxy acrylic copolymer or as a hydroxyl
group on said hydroxy functional additive.
4,394,485
FOUR COMPONENT ADHESIVE BLENDS AND
COMPOSITE STRUCTURES
Ashok M. Adur, Rolling Meadows, III., assignor to Chemplex
Company, Rolling Meadows, III.
Filed Mar. 31, 1982, Ser. No. 363,894
Int. a.' C08L 51/06, 23/26
U.S. a. 525—74 11 Claims
1. A modified polyolefin blend consisting essentially of:
(A) HDPE having a density of about 0.94-0.97 g/cc;
(B) at least one polypropylene polymer or copolymer;
(C) LDPE having a density of about 0.91-0.94 g/cc; and
(D) a polyethylene polymer grafted with at least one grafting
monomer polymerizable ethylenically unsaturated carbox-
ylic acid or acid derivative.
4,394,486
HIGH SOLIDS COATINGS WITH ENHANCED
FLEXIBILITY AND IMPACT STRENGTH
Mohinder S. Chattha, Livonia, and Ares N. Theodore, Farming-
ton Hills, both of Mich., assignors to Ford Motor Company,
Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,684
Int. C\? C08L 61/28, 37/00
MS. O. 525—162 40 Oaims
1. A thermosetting coating composition exhibiting improved
fiexibility and impact strength and having excellent weather-
ability and comprising:
4 394 487
ADSORBENT FOR THE AFnNITY-SPEanC
SEPARATION OF MACROMOLECULAR MATERIALS
Weraer Miiller, Bielefeld, and Hans BUnemann, Steinhagen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Boehringer Mann-
heim GmbH, Mannheim-Waldhof, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Division of Ser. No. 880,914, Feb. 24, 1978, Pat. No. 4,335,226.
This application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,543
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 2,
1977, 2709094
Int. a.3 C08F 267/ W. 8/00
U.S. a. 525—281 7 Qaims
1. Process for the preparation of an adsorbent for the affini-
ty-specific separation of nucleic acids, comprising a polymeric
carrier material onto which an affine residue group consisting
of a base and/or structure specific complex former for nucleic
acids, is covalently bound wherein said polymeric carrier
material is first formed from at least one monomer which
additionally possesses a functional group via which the affine
residue for the biopolymer can be bound directly or via a
polymeric spacer, the polymeric carrier material is optionally
comminuted to the desired particle size and then the affine
residue for the biopolymer is grafted on either directly or by
copolymerization in the presence of at least one further mono-
mer as co-monomer so that particles of the desired size are
produced.
July 19,
^83
CHEMICAL
1183
4,394,488
ZINC PEROXIDE PROCESS
Chan J. Kin, and Ahti A. Koski, both of Samia, Canada, assign-
ors to Polysar Limited, Ontario, Canada
Filed Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400,008
Claims priority, application Canada, Aug. 10, 1981, 383563
Int. a.' C08J 3/24; C08C 19/04: C08F 236/12; C08C 19/42
U.S. a. 524-432 9 Qaims
1. A process for the production of a mixture of butadiene-
acrylonitrile polymer and zinc peroxide which comprises: (I)
forming an aqueous mixture in a reactor equipped with means
for agitation and means for temperature control, said aqueous
mixture comprising (a) from about 15 to about 30 weight per-
cent of zinc oxide made by the French Process being at least
about 99 weight percent pure and having an average particle
size of from about 0.1 to about 0.5 micron, (b) from about
0.0075 to about 0.2 parts by weight of sulphuric acid per part
by weight of zinc oxide, (c) from about 1 to about 5 moles of
hydrogen peroxide per mole of zinc oxide, and (d) the balance
to 100 weight percent being water, said aqueous mixture being
formed by adding said zinc oxide to a preformed mixture in
said reactor of said sulphuric acid, said hydrogen peroxide and
said water while maintaining the contents of said reactor in an
agitated condition and at a temperature of from about 20° to
about 35° C. throughout the addition of said zinc oxide and
then for a further time of from about 1 to about 4 hours,
thereby producing an aqueous slurry of a mixture of zinc
peroxide and zinc oxide containing less than about 0.05 weight
percent of residual hydrogen peroxide; and (II) transferring
said aqueous slurry to a mixing vessel, adding thereto and
mixing therewith a stream of an aqueous latex of a butadiene-
acrylonitrile polymer, said polymer containing from about 20
to about 45 weight percent acrylonitrile and having a molecu-
lar weight characterized by a Mooney (ML 1 -|-4 at 100° C.) of
from about 35 to about 65, contacting the resulting mixture
with an aqueous stream of calcium chloride to coagulate said
mixture, separating said coagulated product from the aqueous
phase, recovering and drying said product to a water content
of less than about 1 weight percent to yield a final product
containing from about 48 to about 57 weight percent of said
polymer and from about 43 to about 52 weight percent of said
mixture of zinc peroxide and zinc oxide wherein said final
product contains at least about 27.5 weight percent zinc perox-
ide.
of an alkyl dicarboxylic acid having from 4 to 20 carbon
atoms, a diester of an alkyl dicarboxylic acid having from
6 to 20 carbon atoms, and combinations thereof, at least 70
mole percent of an aromatic dicarboxylic acid or ester
thereof selected from the group consisting of an aryl
dicarboxylic acid having from 8 to 20 carbon atoms, an
alkyl substituted aryl dicarboxylic acid having from 9 to
20 carbon atoms, a diester of an alkyl substituted aryl
dicarboxylic acid having from II to 20 carbon atoms, a
diester of an aryl dicarboxylic acid having from 10 to 20
carbon atoms, and combinations thereof;^
said diol comprising up to 30 mole percent of a diol selected
from the group consisting of a glycol having from 2 to 12
carbon atoms, a glycol ether having from 4 to 12 carbon
atoms, or combinations thereof, said diol component also
having at least 70 mole percent of
a hydantoin compound having the formula
V
R2-C-
N
/ \ /
HO— R3 C
O
c
I
N— R4— OH
wherein Ri and R2 can be the same or different and is an alkyl
having from I to 2 carbon atoms, and where R? and R4can be
the same or different and is an alkyl having from 1 to 4 carbon
atoms.
8. A water dispersible polyester according to claim 1, 2, 4, 5,
or 7, wherein said dispersible polyester has been cured by a
curing agent, so that said polyester is water insoluble.
9. A water dispersible polyester according to claim 8,
wherein said curing agent is an epoxy compound.
4,394,489
FLUOROELASTOMER CURATIVES
Carl A. Aufdermarsh, Newark, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours & Co., Wilmington, Del.
Filed Feb. 25, 1982, Ser. No, 352,328
Int. Q.3 C08F 4/72
U.S. Q. 525-370 7 Qaims
1. In a nitrile-substituted fiuoroelastomer composition con-
taining a curing agent, the improvement wherein the curing
agent comprises about from 1 to 10 parts per 100 parts by
weight of elastomer of an organotin compound having the
general formula RxSnY4_;t wherein x is 0-3, R is aryl of 6-10
carbon atoms or alkyl of 1-4 carbon atoms, and Y is at least one
of allyl, propargyl, and allenyl.
4,394,490
WATER DISPERSIBLE POLYESTER COMPOSITIONS
William C. T. Tung, Tallmadge, Ohio, assignor to The Goodyear
Tire & Rubber Company, Akron, Ohio
Filed Sep. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 425,146
Int. a? C08F 283/00; C08G 63/76; C08L 63/00
U.S. Q. 525—438 10 Qaims
1. A water dispersible polyester, comprising:
a polyester, said polyester comprising a mixture of units in
• the polymer chain made from the reaction product of a
diacid component and a diol,
said diacid component comprising up to 30 mole percent by
weight of a compound selected from the group consisting
4,394,491
ADDITION POLYMERIZABLE ADDUCT OF A
POLYMERIC MONOAHL AND AN UNSATURATED
ISOCYANATE
Dwight K. Hoffman, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,155
Int. CV C08L 71/02, 75/08
U.S. Q. 525-452 9 Qaims
1. An ethylenic addition polymerizable adduct of a monoahl
and an active ethylenically unsaturated isocyanate monomer,
said monoahl being an organic compound containing only one
active hydrogen moiety capable of reacting with the isocya-
nate moiety of the isocyanate monomer to form the adduct,
said adduct being represented by the formula:
Y-(R "A)-„R"-Z
wherein each A is individually — O— , — S— or
— N—
I
Ri
wherein Ri is hydrogen or alkyl; Y is oxyalkyi or oxyaryl; Z is
an oxycarbonylaminoalkyl ester of an a,^-ethylenically unsat-
urated carboxylic acid; each R " is individually alkylene, aryl-
ene hydroxyalkylene, aminoalkylene, alkoxyalkylene, arylox-
yalkylene, arylalkylene, hydroxyarylalkylene or haloalkylene;
and m is a whole number such that -(-R"'A-)-;„R"'— has a
number average molecular weight from about 60 to about
100,000 and being capable of stabilizing a dispersion of a poly-
mer comprising the adduct in a continuous liquid phase.
1184
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4 194 492
CURING EPOXIDE RESINS IN AN AQUATIC
ENVIRONMENT
Christopher M. Andrews, Cambridge, England, assignor to Qba-
Geigy Corporation, Ardsley, N.Y.
FUed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,466
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 30, 1981,
8120155
Int. a.J C08L 61 m, 61/06
XJJS. a. 525—504 * Claims
1. Curable compositions comprising
(a) an epoxide resin and
(b) a silamine of the formula
R2
r3— Si— NH
-4-R'-NH-Si-NH- — R'-NH-Si-R^
II
where
R' represents the divalent residue of an aromatic or arali-
phatic diprimary amine after removal of the two primary
amino groups,
R2, R3, R4, r5, and R*. which may be the same or different,
each represent an alkyl group of 1 to 8 carbon atoms or an
aryl group of 6 to 10 carbon atoms,
and
n represents zero or an integer of from 1 to 10.
R> R2
I t
H2C=C C=CH2
I I
0=C0CH2— CH— CH20C=0
O
I
c=o
I
NH
I
(CH2)„
NH
I
c=o
I
o
I
0=CC)CH2— CH— CH20C=0
H2C=C
C=CH2
R*
4394 493
CROSSLINKABLE POLY(bxYALKYLENE) GRAFT
COPOLYMERS
David J. Bartkoritz, North Tarrytown, and George H. Greene,
Croton-on-Hudson, both of N.Y., assignors to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
FUed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,211
Int. a.5 C08F 283/06
U.S. a. 525—530 2 Qaims
1. A graft copolymer of N-(isobutoxymethyl)acrylamide and
a poly(oxyalkylene) having up to about 70 percent by weight
of said N-(isobutoxymethyl)-acrylamide grafted onto a poly-
(oxyalkylene) polymer having the formula:
R"[(OC„H2„)/)R']a
wherein R" is a hydrocarbon radical containing up to 10 car-
bons having a valence of a, a is an integer having a value from
1 to 4, R' is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hydrocarbon
radical containing up to 6 carbons, n has a value of 2 to 4, and
z is an integer having a value of about 2 to about 800, wherein
said graft copolymer is crosslinkable and film formable.
wherein R', R^, R^ and R* are each hydrogen or a methyl
group and n is equal to a value varying from 2 to 10 .
2. A dental filling composition, comprising: a polymerizable
monomer having the formula I:
R> R2
I I
H2C=C C=CH2
0=C0CH2— CH— CH2C)C=0
I
O
I
c=o
I
NH
I
(CH2)„
NH
I
c=o
I
o
I
0=C0CH2— CH— CH20C=0
I I
H2C=C C=CH2
r3 R*
wherein R', R^, R^ and R'* are each a hydrogen ora methyl
group and n is equal to a value varying from 2 to 10 and a filler
material.
4,394,494
DENTAL HLLING MATERIAL
Mikio Miyake, Yamanishi; Shinya Kitoh, and Satoshi Hayashi,
both of Hiratsuka, all of Japan, assignors to Lion Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
FUed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,704
Chums priority, appUcation Japan, Jul. 4, 1980, 55-91408;
Not. 12, 1980, 55-158982
lat a.' A61K 6/02; C08F 26/02; C07C 125/06
UJS. a. 526—301 1' Claims
1. A polymerizable monomer having the formula:
4 394 495
DIISOCYANATES USEFUL AS A STRUCTURAL
COMPONENT IN THE PREPARATION OF
POLYURETHANE PLASTICS
Hans-Joachim SchoU, Cologne, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Bayer AktiengeseUschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
FUed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,120
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 17,
1981, 3105776
Int. a? C08G 18/76
U.S. a. 528—67 2.CIaims
1. A mixture of homologues and isomers of diisocyanates
corresponding to the formula:
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
OCN
NCO
in which R represents a saturated, straight-chained aliphatic
hydrocarbon radical having 8 to 1 5 carbon atoms prepared by
(a) dinitrating a mixture of homologues and isomers of hy-
drocarbons corresponding to the formula
which mixture, at 1013 mbar, has a boiling range accord-
ing to ASTM D 86 of 10°-50' C. within the temperature
range of from 270°-330° C;
(b) hydrogenating the product of (a) to form a mixture of
diamine compounds; and
(c) phosgenating the diamino compounds of (b).
4,394,496
EPOXIDATION PRODUCTS OF
l,l,l-TRI-(HYDROXYPHENYL) ALKANES
Paul G. Schrader, Antioch, Calif., assignor to The Dow Chemical
Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 234,237, Feb. 13, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 906,384,
May 16, 1978, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 646,730, Jan. 5, 1976, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 173,259, Aug. 19, 1971,
abandoned. This application Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,586
Int. a.3 C08G 39/32
U.S. a. 528—98 33 Qaims
1. The epoxidation product of a phenolic compound of the
formula
(A)
wherein:
Q is H or an alkyl group of from 1 to about 10 carbon atoms;
each R independently represents an alkyl group of from 1 to
about 12 carbon atoms, phenyl or cycloaiky! of from 3 to
about 6 carbon atoms;
each Z independently represents H or OH, with the proviso
that at least one Z group on each of Rings 1, II and III is
OH;
each X independently represents bromo, chloro or nitro;
each p independently is 0, 1 or 2, each n independently is 0,
1, or 2, the sum of n-l-p for each ring being 0, 1, 2 or 3
when each Z is other than hydrogen,
and an epihalohydrin of the formula:
1183
(B)
O
/ \
X'-CH2-C CH2
Y
wherein X' is CI or Br and Y is H or — CH3;
said epoxidation product having an average epoxide func-
tionality of from about 2.5 to about 6.0, or at least about
70% of theoretical for the number ot available hydroxyls,
whichever is greater.
23. The cured epoxidation product of claim 1.
4,394,497
SOLID MATERIALS PREPARED FROM EPOXY RESINS
AND PHENOLIC HYDROXYL-CONTAINING
MATERIALS
Donald L. Nelson, and Bryan A. Naderhoff, both of Lake Jack-
son, Tex., assignors to The Dow Chemical Company, Midland,
Mich.
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,799
Int. aj C08G 59/00. 65/14
U.S. a. 528-101 9 Qaims
1. Solid compositions resulting from reacting, in the pres-
ence of an effective quantity of a suitable catalyst,
(I) at least one material having an average of more than one
1,2-epoxy group per molecule with
(II) at least one material having an average of more than one
phenolic hydroxy] group per molecule;
wherein at least one of (I) or (II) contains with respect to (II)
or has been prepared from with respect to (I) a reaction prod-
uct of
(A) at least one aromatic compound containing (1) at least
one aromatic ring, (2) at least one aromatic hydroxyl
group and (3) which aromatic ring has at least one ortho
or para position capable of being alkylated, and
(B) at least one unsaturated aliphatic or cycloaliphahtic
hydrocarbon containing 4 to 6 carbon atoms or one or
more dimers or oligomers thereof, or mixtures thereof.
4,394,498
METHOD FOR PROVIDING PARTICULATES OF
LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMERS AND PARTICULATES
PRODUCED THEREFROM
John R. Kastelic, Rockaway, N.J., assignor to Celanese Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 295,339
Int. Q.3 B29D 27/00; C08G 63/18; B02C 11/08
U.S. Q. 528—193 26 Qaims
1. A method of providing particulates of a polymer which is
capable of forming an anisotropic melt phase and suitable for
use in a thermally and chemically resistant coating which
method comprises providing a foamed melt of said polymer,
forming an article comprised of said polymer which contains a
multitude of voids, and masticating said article to an extent
sufficient to form particulates of said polymer.
24. Particulates of a polymer produced by the method of
claim 1 which exhibit a length to diameter ratio of less than
about 10:1 and a maximum cross-sectional dimension of less
than about 100 microns.
1186
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,499
POLYIMIDE RESINS
Joseph G. Robinson, Winchcombe, and David I. Barnes, Chel-
tenham, both of England, assignors to Coal Industry (Patents)
Limited, London, England
FUed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 290,089
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 22, 1980,
8027411
Int. a.3 C08G 73/10
\}S. a. 528—229 10 Qaims
1. An improved phenanthrene based polyimide resin com-
prising a reaction product of (1) diphenic anhydride oligomers
comprising two to about six moieties of
120° C. and pressures greater than 10 atmospheres and capable
of preventing ionization of hydrochloric acid at said tempera-
O,
,o.
,o
-##
and (2) from 0.1 to 0.6 of an equivalent quantity of an aromatic
primary diamine and from 0 Q ♦'^ 0 4 of an equivalent quantity
of a monofunctional primary amine or ammonia.
4,394,500
BEAD POLYMERIZATION PROCESS FOR PREPARING
POLYBENZIMIDAZOLE
George N. Milford, Jr., Waynesboro, Va., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,865
Int. C\? C08G 69/04
U.S. a. 528—313 5 Oaims
1. Process for the preparation of polybenzimidazole in the
form of small particles from at least one aromatic compound
selected from the group consisting of o-diamino-substituted
carboxylic acid compounds by contacting at least one o-
diamino-substituted carboxylic acid compound with an excess
of polyphosphoric acid dehydrating agent in an inert, nonsol-
vent, liquid medium, heating to \20'-2lQ' C. for 1-4 hours
with stirring, cooling to room temperature with continued
stirring and filtering to remove polybenzimidazole which is
washed to remove impurities.
tures and pressures, said drying agent being an expanded and
finely ground aluminum silicate.
4,394,502
IMMUNOTHERAPEUnC AGENT FOR TUMORS
COMPRISING LIPOPOLYSACCHARIDE AS AN ACTIVE
COMPONENT
Chisato Maruyama, No. 20-6, 1-chome, Mukogaoka, Bunkyo-
ku, Tokyo-to, Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 147,127, May 6, 1980, Pat. No.
4,329,452. This application Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293,999
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 4, 1979, 54-84681
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 11,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C08B i7/00: A61K 31/72; C07H 13/02
U.S. a. 536—119 5 Qaims
1. An immunotherapeutic agent for tumors, which com-
prises as an effective component lipopolysaccharide compris-
ing, arabinomannan as a polysaccharide and fatty acids bonded
to said arabinomannan through an ester linkage, the fatty acid
content in said lipopolysaccharide being 3 to 28%, said lipo-
polysaccharide being obtained by hot water extraction and
purification of the cell body of human tubercle bacillus, Myco-
bacterium tuberculosis strain Aoyama B or Mycobacterium
tuberculosis strain HstRv-
4,394,501
COMPOSITION FOR PREVENTING PLATE OUT IN
EXTRUSION EQUIPMENT
Walfrida G. E. Kuibers-Kiewik, Hengelo; Johannes Akkerman,
le Dedemsvaart, and Johan Gons, AA Dedemsvaart, all of
Netherlands, assignors to Wavin B.V., ZwoUe, Netherlands
Filed Feb. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 231,271
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 2, 1980,
8000690; Nov. 19, 1980, 8006314
Int. a.5 C08K 3/34
U.S. a. 528-^t85 4 Qaims
1. A plastic composition incorporating additives to prevent
plate out on molding tools and extruders consisting essentially
of particles of polymers of vinylchloride and vinylidene chlo-
ride and copolymers thereof and additives selected from the
group comprising sUbilizers and lubricating agents wherein at
least one of said stabilizers and lubricating agents is a metal
compound, free of liquids and blowing agents, and a drying
agent capable of binding water at temperatures greater than
4,394,503
CEPHALOSPORIN DERIVATIVES
Hajime Kamachi, Qba; Jun Okumura, Yokohama; Takayuki
Naito, Kawasaki, and Masahisa Oka, Yokoyama, all of Japan,
assignors to Bristol-Myers Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 328,331
Int. a.3 C07D 501/38; A61K 31/545
U.S. a. 544—25 * Claims
1. A compound of the formula
I
H2N
CH2
coo-
H3C— C— CH3
COOH
wherein R is methyl, ethyl or isopropyl, or a pharmaceutically
acceptable salt, physiologically hydrolyzable ester or solvate
thereof.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1187
' 4,394,504
CEPHALOSPORIN DERIVATIVES
Thomas J. Commons, Wayne, and John R. Potoski, Spring City,
both of Pa., assi^iors to American Hmne Products Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,361
Int. a.3 C07D 501/34
U.S. a. 544—28 3 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
Ci-Ci2alkanoyl, Ca-Cftalkoxycarbonyl, C|-C5alk-
anoyloxymethyl, carbamoyl or tri-Ci-Csalkylsilyl;
R2 is hydrogen, Ci-Csalkyl, C6-Cioaryl or C7-CioaralkyI;
X is hydrogen, halogen or C2-C6alkoxycarbonyl;
Y is O, NR' (R' is hydrogen or Ci-Csalkyl), S, SO or SO2;
and
n is an integer of 1-3.
H2N-
O
N.
N
OR'
CH2— R2
C02H
in which:
R' is H, alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, alkenyl of 2 to 4 carbon
atoms, alkynyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms, arylalkyl of 7 to 10
carbon atoms, 2-carboxyprop-2-yl, carboxymethyl, alkan-
oyl of 2 to 4 carbon atoms or a-phenylalkanoyl of 8 to 10
carbon atoms;
R2 is H, hydroxy, alkanoyloxy of 2 to 6 carbon atoms, car-
bamoyloxy,
where
C0NH2
N-
■N
s
R*is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to '4 carbon atoms or
where
N-
•N
II "
R5 is hydrogen or alkyl of 1 to 4 carbon atoms, vinyl, sul-
fonyloxymethyl or carboxymethyl;
or a pharmaceutically acceptable salt thereof.
4,394,505
5-FLUOROURACIL DERIVATIVES
Susumu Kamata, Takarazuka, and Wataru Nagata, Nishino-
miya, both of Japan, assignors to Shionogi & Co., Ltd., Osaka,
Japan
Filed Apr. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 369,110
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 28, 1981, 56-64738
Int. Q.^ C07D 487/04. 498/04, 513/04
U.S. Q. 544—91 5 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula -
wherein
R' is hydrogen, Ci-Csalkyl, C6-Cioaryl, C7-Cioaralkyl,
4,394,506
AGRICULTURAL SULFONAMIDES
George Levitt, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 29,281, Apr. 13, 1979,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 15,341,
Mar. 1, 1979, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 965,070, Nov. 30, 1978, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 910,965, May 30, 1978,
abandoned. This application Nov. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 98,781
Int. Q.' C07D 239/28, 239/30
U.S. Q. 544-321 g Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
O
II
CQR
R2
W
R3
SO2N— C— NR]
R4 R5
berei
Qis
n
O;
Wis
O;
Ris
Ci-
-C4 alkyl;
R2is
H;
Rsis
H;
R4is
H;
Rsis
H
or CH3;
Rl is — ^ Q Z;
X is H, CH3, OCH3 or OC2H5;
Y is H. CI, CH3, OCH3 or OC2H5; and
Z IS CH.
4,394,507
PROCESS FOR PRODUCnON OF ENCAINIDE
Gary D. Madding, Evansvitle, Ind., assignor to Mead Johnson A
Company, Evansville, Ind.
Filed Dec. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 330.298
Int. Q.3 C07D 211/02, 211/34
U.S. Q. 546—185 2 Qaims
1. A process for preparing 4-methoxy-2'-[2-(l-methyl-2-
piperidyl)ethyl]benzanilide (I), which comprises:
1188
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
(I)
(O),
H,
A-(CH2)mZ(CH2)„NH R'
OCH3
(a) reacting methyl N-p-anisoylanthranilate (III)
(III)
C05C"-
NH
o
0CH3
with 2-picolyllithium to give 2-(2-pyridylacetyl)-p-
anisanilide (II);
(ID
OCH3
(b) hydrogenating an acid addition salt of II in glacial acetic
acid in the presence of a platinum catalyst until hydrogen
uptake reaches 3 equivalents;
(c) replacing the platinum catalyst with palladium-on-carbon
catalyst and continuing hydrogenation until 2 more equiv-
alents of hydrogen are absorbed; and
(d) adding excess 37% formalin and continuing hydrogena-
tion until hydrogen absorption ceases.
wherein
p is 1 or 2;
R' is hydroxy or NR2r3;
R2 and R' each are independently hydrogen, (lower)alkyl,
(lower)alkenyl, (lower)alkynyl, cyclo(lower)alkyl(lower-
)alkyl, hydroxy(lower)alkyl, (lower)alkoxy(lower)alkyl,
(lower)alkylthio(lower)alkyl, 2-fluoroethyl, 2,2,2-tri-
fluoroethyl or cyano(lower)alkyl, or, when R^ is hydro-
gen, R3 may also be cyclo(lower)alkyl, amino(lower)al-
kyl, (lower)alkylamino(lower)alkyl, di(lower)al-
kylamino(lower)alkyl, pyrrolidino(lower)alkyl, piperidi-
no(lower)alkyl, piperazino(lower)alkyl, substituted pyri-
dyl(lower)alkyl wherein the pyridyl ring may contain one
substituent selected from (lower)alkyl, (lower)alkoxy,
hydroxy, amino and halogen, amino, (lower)alkylamino,
di(lower)alkylamino, hydroxy, (lower)alkoxy, 2,3-dihy-
droxypropyl, cyano, amidino, (lower)alkylamidino,
A'— (CH2)m'Z'(CH2)„'— , phenyl, phenyl(lower)alkyl,
substituted phenyl or substituted phenyl(lower)alkyl,
wherein the phenyl ring may contain one or two substitu-
ents independently selected from (lower)alkyl, hydroxy,
(lower)alkoxy and halogen or one substituent selected
from methylenedioxy, trifluoromethyl and di(lower)al-
kylamino; or R2 and R^, taken together, may be
— CH2CH2X(CH2)^;
r is an integer of from 1 to 3, inclusive;
X is methylene, sulfur, oxygen or N-R**, provided that, when
r is 1, X is methylene;
R* is hydrogen, (lower)alkyl, (lower)alkenyl, (lower)alky-
nyl, (lower)alkanoyl or benzoyl;
m and m' each are independently an integer of from zero to
2, inclusive;
n and n' each are independently an integer of from 2 to 4,
inclusive;
Z and Z' each are independently sulfur, oxygen or methy-
lene;
A and A' each are independently phenyl, imidazolyl, thia-
zolyl, isothiazolyl, oxazolyl, isoxazolyl, triazolyl,
thiadiazolyl, oxadiazolyl, furyl, thienyl or pyridyl; pro-
vided that A and A' independently may contain one or
two substituents, the first substituent being selected from
(lower)alkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl, halogen, amino,
hydroxymethyl, (lower)alkoxy.
4,394,508
CHEMICAL COMPOUNDS
Ronnie R. Crenshaw, Dewitt, and Aldo A. Algieri, Fayetteville,
both of N.Y., assignors to Bristol-Myers Company, New
York, N.Y,
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 163,831, Jul. 7, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,182,
Jan. 31, 1980, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser.
No. 72,517, Sep. 4, 1979, abandoned. This application Mar. 3,
1981, Ser. No. 240,034
Int. CI.3 C07D 417/12, 285/10
MS. a. 546—209 58 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
-(CH2),N=C
NHR'*
NHR
15
and — (CH2)9NR5R^, and the second substituent being
selected from (lower)alkyl, hydroxy, trifluoromethyl,
halogen, amino, hydroxymethyl and (lower)alkoxy;
q is an integer of from 0 to 6, inclusive; R'^ and R'' indepen-
dently are hydrogen or (lower)alkyl, or, if R'* is hydro-
gen, R" also may be (lower)alkanoyl or benzoyl, or R'*
and R", taken together, may be ethylene; and
R5 and R^ each are independently hydrogen, (lower)alkyl,
(lower)alkenyl, (lower)alkynyl, (lower)alkoxy(lower)al-
kyl, cyclo(lower)alkyl or phenyl, provided that R' and R^
may not both be cyclo(lower)alkyl or phenyl; or R' and
R6, taken together with the nitrogen atom to which they
are attached, may be pyrrolidino, methylpyrrolidino,
dimethylpyrrolidino, piperidino, methylpiperidino, dime-
JULY 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1189
thylpiperidino, hydroxypiperidino, homopiperidino, hep-
tamethyleneimino or octamethyleneimino;
or a nontoxic, pharmaceutically acceptable salt, hydrate,
solvate or N-oxide thereof.
4,394,509
2-[(PHENYLTHIO)METHYL OR ETHYL]PYRIDINE
I DERIVATIVES
Roger Crossley, Reading, England, assignor to John Wyeth and
Brother Limited, Maidenhead, England
DiTision of Ser. No. 232,452, Feb. 9, 1981, Pat. No. 4,327,102.
This application Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,430
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 20, 1980,
8005668; Feb. 20, 1980, 8005669
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 29,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 C07D 213/32. 213/44
U.S. a. 546—339 6 Qaims
1. A compound of formula II:
R2>W^S(CH2)„^^ N ^
R>
wherein R represents hydrogen or lower alkyl, R' represents
hydrogen or fluorine, R^ represents hydrogen, fluorine or
chlorine, n is 1 or 2 and at least one of R, R' and R^ is other
than hydrogen, and the pharmaceutically acceptable salts
thereof.
concentrating the organic layer to a volume of from about
180 to about 300 ml. per gram-mole of pivalate, adding the
hot concentrated solution to water, cooling the mixture to
from about 0° to about 10°, and separating the solid prod-
uct.
4,394,511
IMIDAZOLE 4(5)-DITHIOCARBOXYLIC AODS OR
SALTS
Natsuo Sawa, and Tokuichi Saeki, both of Kagawa, Japan, as-
signors to Shikoku Chemicals Corporation, Kagawa, Japan
Filed Apr. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 370,354
Qaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 23, 1981, 56/62240
Int. Q.' C07D 233/84
U.S. Q. 548—343 13 Qaims
1. An imidazole-4(5)-dithiocarboxylic acid compound repre-
sented by the following general formula:
R4— C:
I
N
:C— C— S.X
I II
NHS
4,394,510
PROCESS FOR PREPARING AN ISOXAZOLYLUREA
Eddie V. P. Tao, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Eli Lilly and
CompaiQ', Indianapolis, Ind.
I Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,555
Int. Q.3 C07D 261/14
U.S. Q. 548—240 12 Qaims
1. A process for preparing l-(5-t-butylisoxazol-3-yl)-3,3-
dimethylurea without isolation of intermediates, consisting
essentially of
(1) combining a C1-C6 alkyl pivalate with acetonitrile in the
presence of sodium hydride, potassium t-butoxide or soda-
mide at from about 80° to about 1 10°, extracting the reac-
tion mixture with water, acidifying the water layer, ex-
tracting the acidic water layer with an inert organic sol-
vent, and extracting the organic layer with aqueous so-
dium hydroxide;
(2) combining the basic aqueous layer with hydroxylamine
or a salt thereof, adjusting the pH of the mixture to from
about 7.5 to about 8.5, and holding the mixture at from
about 70° to about 100°, combining the mixture with from
about 0.5 to about 2 moles of concentrated hydrochloric
acid per mole of pivalate, holding the mixture at from
about 50° to about 100°, combining the mixture with from
about 1 to about 3 moles of concentrated hydrochloric
acid per mole of pivalate, holding the mixture at from
about 50° to about 100°, cooling the mixture, extracting
the mixture with cyclohexane, making the aqueous layer
basic with sodium hydroxide, cooling the basic mixture,
extracting the mixture with ethyl acetate, and drying the
organic layer;
(3) slowly adding the dried organic layer to a solution of
phosgene in ethyl acetate at from about —25° to about 5°,
holding the mixture at from about 60° to about 100°, and
cooling the mixture;
(4) combining the cooled mixture with dimethylamine, hold-
ing the mixture at from about 60° to about 100°, cooling
the mixture, neutralizing the mixture with aqueous acid.
C
I
R2
wherein R2 stands for a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hy-
drocarbon group having up to 20 carbons, R4 stands for a
hydrogen atom or an alkyl group having up to 4 carbon atoms,
and X stands for a hydrogen atom or an alkali metal atom.
4,394,512
1-(SUBSTITUTED PHENYL) AM INOANTI PYRIN
COMPOUNDS
Hans-Georg Batz, Tutzing, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Boehringer Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim- Waldhof, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Jan. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 228,011
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 5,
1980, 3004129; Oct. 7, 1980, 3039207; Jan. 13, 1981, 3100807
Int. Q.3 C07D 231/46
U.S. Q. 548—365 3 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula
CH3
CH3— N
NH2
wherein R represents the group N(R2)2. in which each R2 is an
alkyl group of 1 to 3 carbon atoms, or one R2 is an acylgroup
of 1 to 3 and the other R2 is an alkvl group of 1 to 3 carbon
atoms, and Ri has the same meaning as R or is a hydrogen atom
or NH2.
1190
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4 394 513
N-AZOLYL ACETANILIDES, THE MANUFACTURE
THEREOF, AND THEIR USE AS
Karl Eicken, Wachenheim; Wolfgang Rohr, Mannheim, and
Bruno Wueraer, Limburgerhof, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 31, 1979, Ser. No. 108,541
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 17,
1979, 2901593
Int. a.3 C07D 403/12
U.S. a. 548—374 3 Qaims
1. An N-azolylacetanilide of the formula
I
-R^
CO— A,
where R denotes hydrogen or Ci-C4-alkyl; R' denotes hydro-
gen, Ci-C4-alkyl or halogen; R2 denotes hydrogen or methyl,
R3 denotes A; and A denotes N-azolylmethyl in which the
heterocyclic ring of the N-azolylmethyl is a pyrazole, 1,2,4-
triazole or imidazole ring which ring is unsubstituted or substi-
tuted by from one to three radicals selected from the group
consisting of methyl, methoxy and chlorine, with the proviso
that both of the heterocyclic rings cannot be imidazole.
4,394,514
PROCESSES FOR PREPARING 4.SUBSTITUTED
INDOLES
Lawrence I. Kruse, Haddonfield, N.J., assignor to SmithKline
Beckman Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No, 259,123, Apr. 30, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,016
Int. CI.' C07D 209/04
U.S. a. 548—508 5 Claims
1. The method of preparing a 4-substituted indole of the
following formula:
K
r "
L l|_N02 N-NHCONH2
in which R is as defined above, and
(B) reacting said semicarbazone under standard low pressure
catalytic hydrogenation conditions over a noble metal
hydrogenation catalyst until the reaction is complete to
give the desired 4-substituted indole.
4,394,515
10,ll-DIHYDRO-ll-OXODraENZO[b/TrHIEPIN
COMPOUNDS
Joshua Rokach, Chomedey-Laval, Canada; Qarence S. Rooney,
Worcester, and Edward J. Cragoe, Jr., Lansdale, both of Pa.,
assignors to Merck & Co., Inc., Rahway, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. N9._917,211, Jun. 23, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 819,200, Jul. 26, 1977,
abandoned. This application Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,221
Int. a.3 C07D 337/14
U.S. a. 549—12 2 Qaims
1. A compound which is 10,ll-dihydro-ll-oxodibenzo[b,fl-
thiepin-3-carboxylic acid.
2. A compound which is 10,ll-dihydro-ll-oxodibenzo[b,f]-
thiepin-3-carboxylic acid-5-oxide.
4,394,516
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF A FURAN
DERIVATIVE
John W. Qitherow, Sawbridgeworth, England, assignor to Glaxo
Group Limited, London, England
Filed May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,963
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, May 7, 1981,
8113944
Int. Q.' C07D 307/52
U.S. Q. 549—495 9 Claims
1. A process for the preparation of ranitidine of formula (I)
jr\
(I)
CHNO2
CH2SCH2CH2NHCNHMe
in which R is lower alkoxy, lower alkyl, benzyloxy or carbalk-
oxy, said alkoxy or alkyl groups being of 1-6 carbons, compris-
ing the steps of;
(A) reacting a o-nitro-/3-dimethylaminostyrene of the for-
mula: ^
Me2NCH2 O
which comprises reacting cystamine of formula (II)
SCH2CH2NH2
SCH2CH2NH2
either with a nitroethenamine of formula (III)
CHNO2
II
LCNHMe
(II)
(III)
K .
U^ J*— N02
CHN(CH3)2
where L is a leaving group, or with a compound of formula
(IV)
in which R is as defined above, with semicarbazide or an
acid addition salt thereof at ambient temperature in aque-
ous dimethylformamide or dimethylacetamide until the
reaction is substantially complete to give a semicarbazone
of the formula
L L • av)
\ /
C
II
CHNO2
where L is a leaving group, followed by reaction with methyl-
amine, to give a disulphide of formula (V)
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1191
CHNO2 (V)
II
SCH2CH2NHCNHMe
SCH2CH2NHCNHMe
CHNO2
which is then reacted with 5-[(dimethylamino)methyl]-2-furan-
methanol under acid conditions.
4,394,517
QUATERNARY AMMONIUM FUNCTIONAL SILICON
COMPOUNDS
Eugene R. Martin, Ousted, Mich., and Jeffrey A. Tripp, Hills-
dale, Australia, assignors to SWS Silicones Corporation,
Adrian, Mich.
Filed May 21, 1982, Ser. No. 380,487
Int. Q.3 C07F 7/10
U.S. Q. 556—419 18 Qaims
1. A process for preparing quaternary ammonium functional
silicon compounds which comprises reacting a carboxylic acid
functional quaternary ammonium compound selected from the
group consisting of compounds having the formulas
/
R'
^1 /,
^\-(a+fi N— (R'— C— R^OH)a and
C
II
+ +
o
R>
^1 J
/H
R' O
kl > 11
(HO— C— R^C— R'^N— Ri-N-(-R^C— R^C— OH)
X2
number of from 0 to 3, in which the sum of a-t-f cannot
exceed 4, g is a number of from 0 to 2, in which the sum
of e + g cannot exceed 3, n is 2, 3 or 4' r is a number of
from 1 to 50 and y is a number of from 0 to 10.
with an aminofunctional silicon compound selected from the
group consisting of
(a) Silanes having the formula
NH2(R*NH)6— R*— Si(OR)3 _ f
(b) Siloxialnes having at least one unit of the formula
NH2(R''NH)fc— R*— SiO i_b
(c) and ihixtures thereof, at a temperature of from 0° up to
about 175° C, in which R is a monovalent hydrocarbon
radical having from 1 to 22 carbon atoms, R' is a hy-
drocarbonoxy radical having the formula — (CnH2«0)r,
R2 is a divalent hydrocarbon radical selected from the
group consisting of (CH2)>., CH=CH and cyclic divalent
hydrocarbon radicals selected from the group consisting
of C6H4, CeHg, C6H10, and CioHe, R^ is a divalent hydro-
carbon radical having from 2 to 10 carbon atoms, R* is
selected from the group consisting of a saturated divalent
hydrocarbon radical having up to 10 carbon atoms, a
divalent hydrocarbonoxy radical in which the oxygen is in
the form of an ether linkage and an unsaturated divalent
hydrocarbon radical having from 3 to 10 carbon atoms, X
is an anionic radical, a is a number of from 1 to 4, b is 0, 1
or 2, c is 0, 1, 2 or 3, e is a number of from 1 to 3, f is a
4,394,518
ORGANIC nBERS HAVING IMPROVED SLIP
PROPERTIES
Peter Huber; Peter August; Helga Lampelzammer, all of Burg-
hausen, and Willi Primas, Simbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Wacker-Chemie GmbH, Munich, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 876,454, Feb. 9, 1978, abandoned. This
application Dec. 31, 1979, Ser. No. 108,895
Int. Q.J C07F 7/10
U.S. Q. 556—424 2 Qaims
1. A polymeric organosilicon compound of the formula
MaRfrSi{I(OSiR2)„D]^(OSiR2)„OSiR3 _ rfM^}-
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrocar-
bon radicals and substituted hydrocarbon radicals having from
1 to 10 carbon atoms, D is a radical of the formula
— AflA — \q — (A — Afl)c — ,
where X is selected from the group consisting of
-NR - and — NR'R"
where R' is hydrogen or R, R" is a bivalent aliphatic hydrocar-
bon radical, A is selected from the group consisting of a biva-
lent aromatic hydrocarbon radical and a substituted bivalent
aromatic hydrocarbon radical, M is a radical of the formula
-Xa-A-Xa-{A-Xa)fH.
a is 0 or 1, b is 0, 1 or 2, c is 0 or a number of from I to 5, d is
0 or 1 , m is 0 or a number of from I to 20, n is a number of from
1 to 1,000 with the proviso that at least one Xj— A— Xj — A
radical is present per molecule in which a is 1.
4,394,519
AMINO ACID BLOCKING AGENTS
Louis A. Carptno, and Beri Cohen, both of Amherst, Mass.,
assignors to Research Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 342,2%
Int. Q.' C07C 125/067
U.S. Q. 560—32 9 Qaims
1. A protected amino acid of the formula:
<x^-
R3— C— R»
R
I
OCONHCHCOOH
wherein R is an amino acid residue; Rj and R4 are each hydro-
gen, alkyl, aryl or aralkyl; R5 is up to three hydrogen atoms,
alkyl, aryl, alkaryl aralkyl, halogen or nitro; and Re is up to
four hydrogen atoms, fused phenyl, alkyl, aryl, alkaryl, aralkyl,
halogen or nitro; the alkyl, aryl, alkaryl or aralkyl group con-
taining up to nine carbon atoms.
1192
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,520
5-UREIDO-3-THIA HEXANEDIOIC ACID
Gregoire Kalopissis, Paris, France, assignor to Societe Anonyme
dite: L'Oreal, Paris, France
Division of Ser. No. 871,839, Jan. 24, 1978, Pat. No. 4,204,064,
whicii is a division of Ser. No. 714,004, Aug. 12, 1976, Pat. No.
4,085,217, which is a division of Ser. No. 501,615, Aug. 29, 1974,
Pat. No. 3,976,781, which is a division of Ser. No. 203,046, Nov.
29, 1971, Pat. No. 3,849,576, which is a continuation-in-part of
Ser. No. 736,960, Jun. 14, 1968, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 427,976, Jan. 25, 1965,
abandoned, and Ser. No. 602,480, Dec. 19, 1966, abandoned, Ser.
No. 794,363, Jan. 27, 1969, abandoned, Ser. No. 801,840, Feb.
24, 1969, abandoned, Ser. No. 817,193, Apr. 17, 1969,
abandoned, Ser. No. 858,161, Sep. 15, 1%9, Pat. No. 3,671,643,
Ser. No. 12,122, Feb. 17, 1970, abandoned, and Ser. No. 36,405,
May 11, 1970, abandoned. This application Dec. 31, 1979, Ser.
No. 108,829
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 29, 1964, 64 961897;
Luxembourg, Dec. 22, 1965, 50125; France, Jun. 21, 1967, 67
1113%; Jul. 28, 1967, 67 116160; Luxembourg, Jan. 29, 1968,
55371; Feb. 23, 1968, 55553; Feb. 19, 1969, 58042; Apr. 19, 1969,
55935; Belgium, Jun. 3, 1969, 74877; Luxembourg, May 12,
1969, 58634; Apr. 23, 1971, 63056; Apr. 23, 1971, 63057
Int. a.^ C07C 149/437
U.S. a. 562—557 1 Claim
1. 5-ureido-3-thia hexanedioic acid.
4,394,523
CATALYTIC HYDROGENATION OF DI
(4-AMINOPHENYL) METHANE
Gary F, Allen, New Martinsville, W. Va., assignor to Mobay
Chemical Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,200
Int. a.3 C07C 85/24
U.S. CI. 564—451 15 Qaims
1. A process for the catalytic hydrogenation of di(4-amino-
phenyOmethane to a liquid di(4-aminocyclohexyl)methane
containing from 15% to 40% by weight of the trans, trans
isomer comprising hydrogenating di(4-aminophenyl)methane
in the presence of (i) a ruthenium-on-alumina catalyst (ii) at
least 25% by weight of an aliphatic alcohol selected from the
group consisting of methanol, ethanol, n-propanol, and isopro-
panol, based on the weight of the total weight of the di(4-
aminophenyl)methane and the alcohol, and (iii) ammonia, the
amount of ammonia present being such that the molar ratio of
ammonia to di(4-aminophenyl)methane is from 0.5:1 to 10:1,
the hydrogenation being conducted at a hydrogen pressure of
at least 500 psi, at a temperature of from 150° C. to 217° C, and
for a time not exceeding 60 minutes.
4,394,521
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION OF THE SCHIFFS
BASES OF 2,6-DICHLORO-5-HYDROXYANILINE
Reinhard Sappelt, Meersburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Lonza-Werke G.m.b.H., Weil am Rhein, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,522
Int. C\? C07C 119/10
U.S. a. 564—271 25 Qaims
1. Process for the production of 2,6-dichloro-5-hydroxy-
anils having the formula:
OH
N=C
/
'\
Rl
R2
wherein R' and R^ are the same or different and each is an
alkyl radical having 1 to 4 C atoms, comprising reacting 2,4-
dichloro-3-aminophenol with a ketone having the formula:
R'— CO— r2
wherein R' and R^ have the same meaning as above.
4,394,524
PREPARATION OF POLYALKYLENE POLY AMINES
FROM AMMONIA, ALKYLENEAMINE, AND
ALKANOLAMINE
Michael E. Ford, Trexlertown, and Thomas A. Johnson, Ore-
field, both of Pa., assignors to Air Products and Chemicals,
Inc., Allentown, Pa.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,687
Int. Q.3 C07C 85/06
U.S. Q. 564—479 22 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a noncyclic polyalkylene poly-
amine which comprises:
contacting ammonia, an alkyleneamine compound having
two primary amino groups of the general formula:
H2N-
H H
I I
-(-C-);,N-
R
•H
-iy
wherein R is hydrogen or a lower alkyl (C1-C4) radical, x
is a number from 2 to about 6, and y is a number from 1 to
about 4, and an alkanolamine compound having primary
or secondary hydroxyl groups of the general formula:
4,394,522
CATALYTIC HYDROGENATION OF
DI(4-AMINOPHENYL)METHANE
Gary F. Allen, New Martinsville, W. Va., assignor to Mobay
Chemical Corporation, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,979
Int. Q.3 C07C 85/24
U.S. Q. 564—451 10 Qaims
1. A process for the catalytic hydrogenation of di(4-amino-
phenyOmethane to a liquid di(4-aminocyclohexyl)methane
containing from 15% to 40% by weight of the trans, trans
isomer comprising hydrogenating di(4-aminophenyl)methane
in the presence of an unsupported ruthenium dioxide catalyst
under a hydrogen pressure of at least 2500 jjsi and at a tempera-
ture of from 150° to 210° C.
H2N-
H H
I I
-(-C-);cN-
R
-iy
H
I
(-C-);tOH
I
R
wherein R is hydrogen or a lower alkyl (C1-C4) radical, x
is a number from 2 to about 6, and y is a number from 0 to
about 3; in the presence of an effective amount of a phos-
phorus-containing substance or a salt of a sulfur-contain-
ing substance, or the corresponding acid, at a temperature
sufficient to effect reaction between the ammonia, the
alkyleneamine compound and the alkanolamine com-
pound under a pressure sufficient to maintain the reaction
mixture essentially in liquid phase.
July 19, 1983
CHEMICAL
1193
4,394,525
PROCESS FOR HYDROGENATING ALDEHYDES
Roger F. Vogel, Butler; George Marcelin, Pittsburgh, and
Harold E. Swift, Gibsonia, all of Pa., assignors to Gulf Re-
search A Development Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,821
Int. Q.^ C07C 45/62
U.S. Q. 568—462 23 Qaims
1. A process for hydrogenating an aliphatic aldehyde having
from two to 20 carbon atoms which comprises contacting the
same with hydrogen in the presence of a catalyst composed of
about three to about 60 weight percent nickel mounted on an
amorphous support containing (1) at least one Group 11 A
metal compound selected from the group consisting of magne-
sium, calcium, strontium and barium compounds, (2) alumina
and (3) aluminum phosphate, such support having an average
pore radius of from about 10 A to about 300 A, a surface area
ranging from about 80 m^/g to about 350 m^/g and a pore
volume of from about 0.33 cc/g to about 1.5 cc/g, said Group
IIA metal compound being present in an amount ranging from
about two to about 35 mole percent, alumina in an amount
ranging from about 1 5 to about 60 mole percent and aluminum
phosphate in an amount ranging from about 25 to about 80
mole percent wherein said unsaturated organic compound is
passed over said catalyst at a liquid hourly space velocity of
about 1.0 to about 12 while maintaining in the reaction zone a
temperature of about 30° to about 200° C. and a hydrogen
partial pressure of about 0 to about 500 pounds per square inch
gauge.
4,394,526
PARA-CRESOL HALIDE SALT COMPLEX USEFUL FOR
SEPARATING PARA-CRESOL FROM META-CRESOL
Gerd Leston, Pittsburgh, Pa., assignor to Koppers Company,
Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 53,438, Jun. 29, 1979, Pat. No. 4,267,389.
This application Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,203
Int. Q.3 C07C 37/68, 37/66
U.S. Q. 568—716 5 Qaims
1. A complex between para-cresol and an anhydrous or
dehydrated inorganic halide salt selected from the group con-
sisting of calcium bromide, magnesium chloride, lithium bro-
y
i
i
>6
'-
20NE
•>r
*0
IS
, 20
'•1 I
S2
70»-E
, .
M
2?
1
?«
K
1 1
30
TONt
.. 1
ZONE
mide and manganese bromide, said complex formed in the
presence of meta-cresol and a non-aqueous solvent.
4,394,527
METHOD FOR THE LIQUID PHASE OXIDATIVE
FLUORINATION OF AROMATIC COMPOUNDS
Robert G. Fischer, Jr., Fairfield, and Arnold Zweig, Westport,
both of Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Filed Oct. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 87,135
Int. Q.3 C07C; 7//2
U.S. Q. 570—143 4 Qaims
1. A process for monofluorinating a benzene nucleus which
comprises: reacting at a temperature ranging from about 25° C.
to about 100° C. in the liquid phase a benzene compound with
argentic fluoride in the range of from about 0. 1 mol to about 1
mol per mol of said benzene compound, said compound being
dissolved in an inert solvent therefor present in amounts rang-
ing from about 99% to 50% solvent and the remamder being
said benzene compound for a time sufficient to convert said
argentic fluoride to argentous fluoride, and recovering said
fluorinated benzene compound in good yield and purity.
4,394,528
HIGH ENERGY FUEL COMPOSITIONS
Dennis H. Fisher, Westerville, Ohio, assignor to Ashland Oil,
Inc., Ashland, Ky.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,451
Int. Q.' ClOL 1/04
U.S. Q. 585—14 4 Qaims
1. A composite high density fuel having a net heat of com-
bustion of at least 140,000 BTU/gal., a flash point between 140°
and 1 50° F. and a viscosity not in excess of about 30 cps at 0°
P.; said fuel consisting essentially of (a) 35-90 wt. % of an
isomeric mixture of tetrahydromethylcyclopentadiene dimers
conforming to the physical property specifications for RJ-4;
(b) 10-40 wt. % exo-tetrahydrodicyclopentadiene; and (c)
0-30 wt. % of the hydrogenated derivatives of a co-trimer of
cyclopentadiene and methyl cyclopentadiene or a trimer of
cyclopentadiene.
ELECTRICAL
4^94,529
SOLAR CELL ARRAY WITH LIGHTWEIGHT SUPPORT
STRUCTURE
Ri^ N. Gounder, RobbinsTille, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
11 FUed Aug. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 290,176
f I Int. a.3 HOIL 31/04; B32B 27/04
U.S. a. 136—245 14 Oaims
sink, and electrical conductor means including a first conduc-
tive portion attached for electrical connection to said solid
state device, said first conductive portion includes a thin bend-
able terminal strip portion extending from a conductive strip
adhered to said first substrate side, said terminal strip portion
including first and second parts with said first part substantially
normally connected to said conductive strip and said second
part substantially normally connected to said first part, and a
second conductive portion extending through said terminal
opening and including a conductive lead wire having a bare
end soldered to said second part, said second conductive por-
tion disposed within said terminal opening and maintained
substantially normal to said substrate and providing external
electrical access to said solid state device.
5. A solar generator comprising:
a composite structural sheet member including at least one
layer of epoxy-reinforced polyparabenzamide woven
fabric,
a plurality of epoxy-reinforced carbon fiber stiffener ele-
ments secured to one side of said sheet member, said
elements having a long axis, and
an array of solar cells secured to a surface of said layer,
wherein said stiffener elements in a direction parallel to
said long axis, said sheet, and said solar cells all have
. effectively the same coefficient of thermal expansion.
1. A power control assembly, comprising a solid state device
including a heat generating portion, an electrically insulating
thermally conductive substrate having a first side operatively
connected in heat transfer relation to said heat generating solid
state portion, a heat sink having an outer surface abutting a
second substrate side spaced from said first side for dissipating
heat from said solid state device, an electrically insulating
housing having a first side including an outer wall surrounding
an opening providing a recessed inner wall spaced from said
outer wall with said substrate enclosing said opening and
spaced from said inner wall to form a cavity about said solid
state device, said inner wall including a terminal opening ex-
tending from said cavity to a second side of said housing,
means for mechanically clamping said substrate to said heat
4,394,531
TRANSMISSION LINE ASSEMBLY INCLUDING MEANS
FOR REDUaNG VIBRATIONS AND METHOD OF
MAKING SAME
Jacques J. A. Delabie, Bonneuil sur Mame, France, assignor to
Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs
d' Aviation, "S.N.E.C.M.A.", Paris, France
Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,127
Oaims priority, application France, Dec. 3, 1979, 79 29922
Int. Cl.^ HOIB 7/18; H02G 7/] 4; F16L 57/00
U.S. a. 174—24 12 Oaims
4,394,530
POWER SWITCHING DEVICE HAVING IMPROVED
HEAT DISSIPATION MEANS
Lance R. Kaufman, 1821 W. Daisy La., Milwaukee, Wis. 53209
Filed Sep. 19, 1977, Ser. No. 834,601
Int. 0.3 HOIL 23/36
U.S. a. 174—16 HS 6 Oaims
J V
^-^"»---«-»v^
A^J,^^
1. A transmission line assembly including means for reducing
transmission line vibration comprising:
an outer tubular sheath having an inner surface forming an
inner diameter;
an inner tubular wall member firmly frictionally fixed to said
inner surface of said outer tubular sheath;
a transmission line disposed within said inner tubular wall
member for transmitting energy;
a plurality of radially contracted tubular sections having
axial lengths at regularly spaced axial intervals formed in
said inner tubular wall member and contiguously sur-
rounding said transmission line for protecting, centering
and supporting said transmission line within said outer
tubular sheath; and
a plurality of radially enlarged sections formed in said inner
tubular wall member having axial lengths greater than the
axial lengths of said radially contracted tubular sections
and having outer diameters radially compressed by said
outer tubular sheath.
12. A method of manufacturing a transmission line assembly
including means for reducing transmission line vibration, said
assembly including a transmission line disposed within a ther-
moretractable plastic tube disposed within a tubular sheath,
said transmission line having a smaller diameter than the inside
diameter of said tube, wherein said method comprises:
inserting said transmission line into said tube;
heating said thermoretractable plastic tube at regular axial
intervals so as to form a tubular wall member having
tubular uncontracted sections and tubular contracted
sections wherein said tubular contracted sections contigu-
ously surround said transmission line; and
inserting said transmission line fitted with said tubular wall
member into said sheath, said sheath having an inside
diameter substantially the same as the outside diameter of
said uncontracted sections of said tubular wall member for
friction fitting engagement therewith.
1195
1196
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,532
MULTILAYER CURRENT DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS
AND METHODS OF FABRICATION THEREOF
Arturo J. Aguayo, Tempe, Ariz., assignor to Rogers Corpora-
tion, Rogers, Conn.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,393
Int. a.3 HOIB 7/00
U.S. a. 174—72 B 5 Qaims
1. A multilayer bus bar assembly including:
capacitor ribbon means, said ribbon means comprising a
continuous elongated dielectric member of rectangular
cross sections and electrically conductive coatings on a
pair of oppositely disposed planar surfaces of the dielec-
tric member; and
a plurality of distribution prong means on each of said planar
surfaces, said prong means being comprised of an electri-
cally conductive material, said prong means being me-
chanically and electrically bonded to respective coatings
of said ribbon means.
5. A method of forming a bus bar assembly including the
following steps:
forming an elongated flat dielectric ceramic wafer haying a
rectangular cross-section;
applying a layer of conductive material to a pair of opposed
surfaces of the flat ceramic wafer; and
electrically and mechanically bonding a plurality of trans-
versely extending conductive distribution prongs to each
of the conductive layers on the said opposed surfaces of
the flat dielectric ceramic wafer.
an end of said cable, said first portion defining a concavity, said
second portion being rectangular and extending from said first
portion, said rectangular second portion having opposing first
surfaces defining a height and opposing second surfaces defin-
ing a width, said width being greater than said height, said first
portion forming a cone smoothly tapering into said second
portion, the cable end being fixed within said rectangular
portion, and a covering layer disposed between the cable and
said electrically conductive member at the boundary between
said first portion and said second portion, wherein the merger
of said cone with said second surfaces forms a concave line
facing said concavity, whereby said concavity is nearly circu-
lar.
4. A method of producing a terminal on an air-cooled cable
used in spot welding, comprising the steps of:
flaring one end of a cylindrical electrically conductive mem-
ber into a conical configuration, a portion of the inner
diameter of said conical configuration being larger than
the diameter of the cable;
forming a covering layer only on a selected end portion of
said cable;
inserting said cable end portion into said cylindrical electri-
cally conductive member; and
pressing, into a rectangular configuration, said cylindrical
electrically conductive member at a portion thereof in-
cluding a part of said end flared into the conical configura-
tion, whereby said cable end portion is fixed in said electri-
cally conductive member and wherein said cable end
portion is inserted such that said selected end portion is at
a boundary between said flared end and said rectangular
configuration.
4,394,533
AIR-COOLED CABLES WITH TERMINALS AND
METHOD OF PRODUONG SAME
Mitsuo Naito, 1406, Haguro-cho, Kofu-shi, Yamanashi, Japan
FUed Jon. IV, 1981, S«. No. 274,424
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 25, 1980, 55-85161
Int. a.3 HOIR 4/18. 13/56
U.S. a. 174—74 R 5 Qaims
4,394,534
CRYOGENIC CABLE AND METHOD OF MAKING SAME
George Bahder, Edison, N.J., and Mario Rabinowitz, Menlo
Park, Calif., assignors to Electric Power Research Institute,
Inc., Palo Alto, Calif.
Filed Jan. 14, 1980, S^r. No. 111,808
Int. a.3 HOIB 7/34
U.S. a. 174—15 S 7 Qaims
1. A coaxial cryogenic electrical cable comprising an inner
electrical conductor, means for cooling said inner conductor, a
conductor shield surrounding said inner conductor, a solid
polymeric electrical insulator surrounding said inner conduc-
tor and conductor shield, an outer conductor surrounding said
insulator, and a collapsible spacer means positioned between
said inner conductor and said conductor shield.
1. A terminal in combination with an air-cooled cable em-
ployed in spot welding, said cable consisting of a plurality of
non-insulated wires, said terminal comprising an electrically
conductive member having first and second portions receiving
4 394 535
SPLIT PHASE STEREOPHONIC SOUND SYNTHESIZER
Joseph P. Bingham, Carmel, and John F. Benford, Indianapolis,
both of Ind., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,926
Int. Q.5 H04R 5/00; H04S 5/00
U.S. Q. 179—1 GP 10 Claims
1. A stereo synthesizer for producing synthesized stereo
sound signals from monophonic input signals comprising:
a source of monophonic sound signals;
a phase splitter circuit having an input coujpled to said source
of monophonic sound signals and first and second outputs
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1197
at whidh monophonic sound signals of opposite phase
relationship are produced;
a transfer function circuit having an input coupled to said
first output of said phase splitter circuit and an output, and
exhibiting an amplitude versus frequency response charac-
teristic including two spaced frequencies of maximum
attenuation and a frequency of minimum attenuation inter-
mediate said spaced frequencies within an audio frequency
range occupied by said monophonic sound signals, for
producing an intensity modulated signal at said transfer
function circuit output;
a first output terminal responsive to said output of said trans-
fer function circuit for producing a first synthesized stereo
sound signal;
i«" ■
10 II
HOiouri
00 b I ,, J I
sj, t ~l_«S«_^v^^ — pic— « I 20 « -S «:> si! _ .til ^
L I 5 f I - m '" f'
dm;
a second output terminal;
means for transferring monophonic sound signals from said
second output of said phase splitter circuit to said second
output terminal without introduction of variations in
amplitude or phase with frequency over said audio fre-
quency range; and
means for transferring intensity modulated signals from said
output of said transfer function circuit to said second
output terminal without further introduction of variations
in amplitude or phase with frequency over said audio
frequency range to develop a second synthesized stereo
sound signal.
4,394,536
SOUND REPRODUCTION DEVICE
Kenji Shima, and Masahiro Hibino, both of Amagasaki, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No, 272,548
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 12, 1980, 55-80367
Int. Q.3 H04R 5/00
U.S. Q. 179—1 G 8 Qaims
L+Ll+L2-Ri-R2
SHS-tt]
I2L.
I2R
R+Rl + R2-Ll-La
said first one of the left and right signals in said first main
signal path circuit means;
second addition means for adding a signal whose phase is
opposite to the phase of said varied by difference signal to
said second one of the left and right signals in said second
main signal path circuit means;
means for phase shifting said varied difference signal to
produce a phase shifted varied difference signal;
third addition means for adding said phase shifted varied
difference signal to said first one of the left and right
signals in said first main signal path circuit means; and
fourth addition means for adding to said second one of the
left and right signals in said second main signal path circuit
means a signal whose phase is opposite to the phase of said
phase shifted varied difference signal.
4,394,537
SOUND REPRODUCTION DEVICE
Keqji Shima, and Masahiro Hibino, both of Hyogo, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,549
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 12, 1980, 55-80368
Int. Q.3 H04H 5/00
U.S. Q. 179—1 G 7 Qaims
101 L"-
O-'-f
102 '"'
lOiR R
-;>H^-a:]
^^^^2-^
1. A sound reproducing device operatively connectable to
first and second loudspeakers and to receive a stereo signal
including left and right signals, comprising:
first main signal path circuit means for transmitting a first
one of the left and right signals of the stereo signal to the
first loudspeaker;
second main signal path circuit means for transmitting a
second one of the right and left signals of the stereo signal
to the second loudspeaker;
means for producing a difference signal equal to the differ-
ence between the right and left signals;
means for varying said difference signal to produce a varied
difference signal;
first addition means for adding the varied difference signal to
1. A sound reproducing device operatively connected to
first and second loudspeakers and operatively connected to
receive a stereo signal including left and right signals, compris-
ing:
first main signal path circuit means for transmitting a first
one of the left and right signals of the stereo signal to the
first loudspeaker;
second main signal path circuit means for transmitting a
second one of the right and left signals of the stereo signal
to the second loudspeaker;
means for producing a difference signal equal to the differ-
ence between the right and left signals;
means for varying said difference signal to produce a varied
difference signal;
first addition means for adding the varied difference signal to
said first one of the left and right signals in said first main
signal path circuit means;
second addition means for adding a signal whose phase is
opposite to the phase of said varied difference signal to
said second one of the left and right signals in said second
main signal path circuit means;
means for phase shifting said varied difference signal to
produce a phase shifted varied difference signal;
third addition means for adding said phase shifted varied
difference signal to said first one of the left and right
signals in said first main signal path circuit means;
fourth addition means for adding to the second one of the
left and right signals in said second main signal path circuit
means a signal whose phase is opposite to the phase of said
phase shifted varied difference signal; and
means for converting one of the left and right signals from
one of said first and second main signal path circuit means
and applying the converted signal to the other of said first
and second main signal path circuit means so as to substan-
tially compensate the one of said left and right signals in
1198
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19. 1983
the other of said first and second main signal path circuit
means.
4.394,538
SPEECH RECOGNITION SYSTEM AND METHOD
Ben Warren, Saratoga; George M. White, Los Altos; Rick Par-
fitt, Los Gatos, and Peter Deng, San Jose, all of Calif., assign-
ors to Threshold Technology, Inc., Delran, N.J.
FUed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,273
Int. a.3 GIOL 7/00
U.S. a. 179—1 SD 24 Claims
«0 to* ^--'O
.. vafMOCtSU*
>TOK
OK V '»' S^O"' n ^"^^ 1 - *^'^
I* 9* I
«■«•' COM^MiSOM
1. Apparatus for receiving spoken input training words and
for subsequently recognizing a spoken input command word,
comprising:
feature extraction means for generating feature signals indic-
ative of the presence or absence of features in a spoken
input word;
means for storing, as a time-dependent reference array, the
presence or absence status of feature signals during each
training word;
means for storing, as a non-time-dependent reference vector,
an indication of the cumulative presence of feature signals
during each training word;
means for storing, as a time-dependent feature array, the
status of feature signals during the command word;
means for storing, as a non-time-dependent feature vector,
an indication of the cumulative presence of feature signals
during the command word;
means for comparing member-by-member, the command
word feature array with each training word reference
array to obtain an array comparison figure for each train-
ing word;
means for comparing, feature-by-feature, the command
word feature vector with each training word reference
vector to obtain a vector comparison figure for each
training word; and
means responsive to both the array comparison figure and
the vector comparison figure for each training word for
selecting the training word which most closely matches
the command word.
4,394,539
TIMEPIECE WITH AUTOMATIC TIME SETTING
SYSTEM THRU DIAL TELEPHONE LINE AND
AUTOMATIC SPEED ADJUSTING SYSTEM
Tsan-chen Chu, 31-2, Alley 5, Lane 100, Tun Hua S. Rd., Taipei,
Taiwan
FUed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,013
Int. a.3 H04M 77/00
U.S. a. 179—2 TC 4 Qaims
1. An automatic time-setting and adjusting system for a
timepiece to be used in conjunction with a telephone standard
time annunciation station which, when dialed, provides a voice
signal announcing a approaching time and audible tone desig-
nating that time at the proper instant, said system comprising:
first means for dialing said standard time annunciation sys-
tem at a prescribed time;
second means connected to said telephone line for separating
voice signals from said audible tone;
third means for analyzing the received voice signal from the
standard time annunciation station to determine the an-
nounced time;
fourth means for counting time synchronously with said
timepiece and providing a time signal representing the
time registered at said timepiece;
a ,„ AUTOMO'C IIM£ 3iGN4L CIL'SROTION
*^ DIAL SEPARATING SIGNAL
, CIRCUIT CIRCUIT ANALYZER
:ec:
TELEP"
I Timepiece
-EPECE I n ^ "J i"' i'"
DiALHW Time stabt
AOJ CIRCUIT
SYNTMCSiZER
TIMEPIECE
fifth means for determining the time difference between the
determined announced time and the time represented by
said time signal and providing a time differential signal
corresponding to the determined time difference;
sixth means for adjusting the time and operating speed of
said timepiece in accordance with said time differential
signal; and
seventh means responsive to said time differential signal for
determining said prescribed time.
4,394,540
REMOTE METER READER AND METHOD FOR
READING METERS OVER NON-DEDICATED
TELEPHONE LINES
Alan E. Willis; John R. Lowdenslager, both of Stamford, and
Neal Goldstein, Middletown, all of Conn., assignors to Timex
Corporation, Waterbury, Conn.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,723
Int. a.5 H04M 77/05
U.S. a. 179—2 AM 19 Qaims
..-. si 'is","' ~ iP I —
soes:»BEB s'A'o-i
1. A method of transmitting meter data to a central office
from meters at a telephone subscriber station over non-
dedicated telephone lines in response to a call initiated by said
central office and without actuating the ringing device in the
subscriber telephone at the telephone subscriber station, the
method comprising:
a. providing at said subscriber station a selectively operable
meter reader, said meter reader being coupled in series
between said telephone line and said subscriber telephone,
being connected to said meter, being capable of answering
telephone calls and having clock means keeping time of
day,
b. isolating said subscriber telephone from said telephone
lines for a predetermined data access time,
c. answering any call received with said meter reader when
said subscriber telephone is isolated.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1199
d. confirming that the call received is the call initiated by the
central office, and
e. transmitting meter data to said central office if it is con-
firmed that said call is from said central office.
1 1 4,394,541
THREE STAGE MINIMUM CONnGURATION
CONDITIONALLY NON-BLOCKING MATRIX
Lewis J. Seiden, 37 Liberty Rd., Tappan, N.Y. 10983
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,063
Int. a.3 H04G 3/42
U.S. a. 179—18 GE 17 Qaims
F^TAGE Moraccs r I
Ka <o ^ I '
■J\ I \ » siMCMBrnzs i \< - ST«
' y "^ la - ijr. 1 '1 V «
/\ , ,_"-J . .»'H 'J /\ ^A
LSnccnunKtsiiTi
^STAOC Mcrnces
lOt — lOo
ST|« MATBCIS
140
LJ'
otjh-
1. In a switching system having N inputs and M outputs, a
three stage matrix array wherein each input may be connected
to each output not busy, and every input may simultaneously
reach an output, comprising
a first stage including n square substage matrices, each with
X inputs and outputs, where N = nx
a second stage including x substage matrices, each with n
inputs and m outputs, an output from each first substage
matrix being connected to an input of each second sub-
stage matrix,
a third stage including m square matrices, each with x inputs
and outputs where M = mx, an output from each second
substage matrix being connected to an input of each third
substage, and
switch means for interconnecting the combinations of inputs
and outputs of each substage matrix.
the voice frequency signals from said microphone; a receiver
amplifier means for amplifying voice frequency signals re-
ceived from said line; a serially connected circuit means con-
nected between said first and second line terminals, said circuit
means comprising a first resistance, a second resistance and a
balancing network for preventing the output from said trans-
mitter amplifier from entering said receiver amplifier; a
smoothing circuit means for smoothing a voltage supplied
from said line, said smoothing circuit comprising a third resis-
tor having one end connected to the connection point of said
first and second resistors and a first capacitor connected be-
tween said second line terminal and the other end of said third
resistor; a first line equalization circuit connected in parallel
with said first capacitor of said smoothing circuit for varying
the input impedance of said transmitter amplifier in accordance
with the charge voltage of said first capacitor; a second line
equalization circuit connected in parallel with said first capaci-
tor for varying the input impedance of said receiver amplifier
in accordance with the charge voltage of said first capacitor; a
constant current circuit; said transmitter amplifier and sdid
receiver amplifier each having power source terminals sup-
plied with DC current from said first and second line terminals,
said power source terminals of said transmitter amplifier being
connected between the connecting point of said first and sec-
ond resistances and said second line terminal, said power
source terminals of said receiver amplifier being connected in
parallel with said serially connected circuit means via said
constant current circuit, and the input signals of said receiver
amplifier being supplied from the connecting point of said
second resistance and said balancing network to input termi-
nals of said receiver amplifier, which input terminals of said
receiver amplifier are connected in parallel with said second
line equalization circuit.
4,394,543
TELEPHONE LINE HOLDING ORCUIT
Francis P. Keiper, Jr., Sunnyvale, and John N. Kerns, Redwood
City, both of Calif., assignors to Lear Siegler, Inc., Santa
Monica, Calif.
Filed Jun. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 270,507
Int. a.3 H04M 1/24
U.S. a. 179—84 R 15 Qaims
' ' 4,394,542
TELEPHONE TRANSMISSION CIRCUIT
Michio Hara; Akinobu Tomimori, and Hiroshi Hara, all of
Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
I Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 243,111
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 26, 1980, 55-38423
Int. C1.3 H04M 7/60
U.S. CI. 179—81 B 3 Qaims
r:_ir:| ar__h_J ^
• i --i '
1. A telephone transmission circuit for connection to a line
having first and second line terminals, said telephone transmis-
sion circuit comprising: a microphone for providing voice
frequency signals; a transmitter amplifier means for amplifying
1. A holding circuit adapted for connection across a tele-
phone line which has a voltage across the line and a current
flowing through the line when held, said holding circuit being
adapted to maintain the line on hold, said holding circuit com-
prising:
(a) current regulating means responsive to a current flow
through a telephone line having a voltage across the line
and a current flowing through the line for maintaining the
line current at a predetermined current level when the
voltage across the line is at least at a predetermined mini-
mum voltage level;
and
(b) voltage regulating means reponsive to the voltage ap-
pearing across the line for preventing an average of the
line voltage from being reduced below said predetermined
1200
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
minimum voltage level, said voltage regulating means
controlling said current regulating means in response to
current flow through the telephone line and the difference
between voltage across the telephone line and a reference
voltage.
4^94,545
CONSTRUCTION OF A TELEPHONE INSTRUMENT
Francis S. Doyle, Oaklandon; Terry B. Prince, and Martin J.
Stevenson, both of Indianapolis, all of Ind., assignors to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Mar. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 129,243
Int. a.3 H04M 1/02
U.S. a. 179—179 13 Qaims
4,394,544
LINE aRcurr for multiple line telephone
Daniel De Leon, Santo Ana, Calif., assignor to GTE Automatic
Electric Labs Inc., Northlake, III.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,563
Int. a.3 H04M 1/72, 9/00
U.S. a. 179—99 H 9 Qaims
vOtCC »NC
emeu"
HOLD AND LMC
■juNtClKCUlI tJ '•"<;'<'"
*-\ I 0_, TCLEPHOftC 2
1. A plurality of line circuits in a multiple line telephone
having a line switch for each line, and a hold switch for all
lines, each of said line circuits connected to a telephone switch-
ing system via an associated line, said telephone switching
system operated to apply alternating current ringing signal and
loop current to a selected one of said lines, each of said line
circuits comprising:
a loop holding circuit connected to an associated line and
said hold switch;
a switching circuit connected to said holding circuit; and
visual indicating means connected to said switching circuit;
one of said line switches for each line operated to connect
said visual indicating means to said line;
whereby said loop current flows through said line switch
and said visual indicating means;
said visual indicating means operated in response to said
loop current to generate a steady visual signal;
said hold switch operated to generate a holding circuit en-
able signal and further generated to release said operated
line switch;
said holding circuit operated in response to said enable signal
to conduct said loop current to said switching circuit;
said switching circuit operated in response to said loop
current to periodically, alternately apply and shunt, said
loop current to and from said visual indicating means;
said visual indicating means operated in response to said
periodically applied loop current to generate a periodic
visual signal of a first characteristic.
1. A housing for a telephone instrument comprising first and
second housing members that are joined together, the housing
members having rims that are pKJsitioned adjacent to one an-
other when the housing members are joined together, one
portion of both the first and second housing members including
cooperating elements for interlocking the first and second
housing members together, and an opposing portion of both
the first and second housing members including means for
latching the first and second housing members together
CHARACTERIZED IN THAT the means for latching the
housing members together comprises an inflexible securing
element included as part of the first housing member, the
securing element being adjacent to a wall of and extending
beyond the rim of the first housing member, and a cooperating
inflexible securing element integral to and extending interiorly
from a wall of the second housing member that is adjacent to
the wall of the first housing member when the housing mem-
bers are joined together, the wall of the second housing mem-
ber being flexed from its normal position during the assembly
of the housing members and returning to its normal position
once assembly is complete to latch the housing members to-
gether, wherein the interlocking elements and the latching
means alone join the housing members together.
4,394,546
COMPOSITE SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Masatoshi Hanimatsu, Tamayama, Japan, assignor to Alps
Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,291
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1980,
55/144442[U]; Nov. 5, 1980, 55/1 580 19[U]
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/00
U.S. a. 200—5 R 13 Qaims
1. A composite switch assembly comprising:
(a) a cylindrical rotary knob;
(b) four push buttons each being substantially quadrantal
when viewed from above and arrayed circularly within
said rotary knob in a manner to be movable upwards and
downwards a predetermined amount;
(c) a switch base plate disposed underneath said rotary knob;
(d) partition means for partitioning said four push buttons, a
lower part of said partition means being fixed to said
switch base plate;
(e) co-acting means provided respectively on said push
buttons and said partition means for holding said push
buttons in place within said rotary knob; and
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1201
(0 means provided on said push buttons and said partition
means for holding said rotary knob in place; and
(g) contact means including six contact mechanisms dis-
posed on said switch base plate, four of said contact mech-
anisms each being located under a respective one of said
push buttons and adapted to be actuated by depression of
the respective one of said push buttons, and the remaining
two of said contact mechanisms each being respectively
actuated by turning said rotary knob.
4,394,547
LAMINATED MEMBRANE SWITCH
Willis A. Larson, Crystal Lake, III., assignor to Oak Industries,
Inc., Rancho Bernardo, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 118,410, Feb. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,314,114. This application Jan. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 343,310
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Feb. 2, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 HOIH 13/02
U.S. a. 200—5 A 4 Qaims
1. A membrane switch assembly including a membrane, a
substrate, a spacer member having spaced openings therein
positioned between said membrane and substrate, and a thin
layer of a polyethylene material interposed between said mem-
brane and spacer and between said substrate and spacer, elec-
trical conductors formed on each thin layer and facing the
spacer, said membrane, substrate and spacer being formed of a
material which is heat bondable to the interposed polyethylene
material, the application of heat and pressure to said assembly
utilizing said polyethylene material to bond said membrane,
substrate and spacer into a switch assembly.
axis of said handle, said base member having first contact
means thereon;
a support member integral with said handle which supports
said handle for arcuate movement, said support member
moving relative to said base member, said support member
having second contact means thereon arranged to contoct
said first contact means upon moving said handle in a
predetermined direction;
a plurality of elongate latch arms integral with one of said
members and extending between said base and said sup-
port member, said latch arms having distal ends with
latches thereon which limit the relative movement of said
support member away from said base member; said distal
ends serving as pivot points for said arcuate movement of
said support member; and
first resilient means between said support member and said
base member, said first resilient means urging said support
member away from said base member.
4,394,549
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
Richard D. Dennis, Bridgeport, N.Y., assignor to Carrier Corpo-
ration, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,122
Int. Q.^ HOIH 15/10
U.S. Q. 200—16 E 9 Claims
MO
^
"^
304^
1. [j"'A&
Q--V-J/(fj- 300
XP^^
, :' 3o.y/
ll 310^
11. w
323 ^r^->:>'
303-
y
'J(W
JOYSTICK SWITCH
Frank P. Dola, Port Richey, Fla., assignor to AMP Incorpo-
rated, Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,818
Int. Q.^ HOIH 25/00, 3/02
U.S. Q. 200—6 A 15 Qaims
1. A joystick switch assembly which comprises:
an elongate handle;
a base member lying in a plane extending transversely of the
1. An electrical connector comprising:
a first connector member defining a longitudinal axis;
a second connector member movable between a first posi-
tion forming a first electrically conductive circuit with the
first connector member, and a second f>osition longitudi-
nally spaced from the first position and forming a second
electrically conductive circuit with the first connector
member;
wherein a selected one of the first and second connector
members includes a plurality of outwardly extending
blades defining parallel blade axes, and the other one of
the first and second connector members defines a plurality
of receptacles receiving the blades and defining receptocle
axes parallel to the blade axes;
1202
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
switching means including a plate secured to the first con-
nector member, a handle, means connecting the handle to
the plate for movement between first and second handle
positions, and means connecting the second connector
member to the handle for moving the second connector
member along the blade axes away from the first position,
then along the longitudinal axis of the first connector
member, and then along the blade axes toward and into
the second position and means for guiding movement of
the second connector member between the first and sec-
ond positions thereof.
ing member adapted to be coupled to said spindle means for
rotation therewith, said first and second contact effecting
members being interfitting and having mutually engaging stop
means to limit rotation of said spindle means and said second
contact effecting member by a predetermined arcuate amount,
at least said first contact effecting member having electric
switch contact elements associated therewith, said second
contact effecting member having means for opening and clos-
ing a circuit with said electric switch contacting elements,
spring means interposed between the lock spindle means and
4,394,550
GAS-BLAST SWITCH ACTUATABLE BY A
MECHANICAL DRIVE BY MEANS OF A DRIVE
ELEMENT
Hubert Wallimana, Oberentfelden, Switzerland, assignor to
Sprecher & Schuh AG, Aarau, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,782
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 4, 1980, 5152/80
Int. a.5 HOIH 7/03. 33/42
U.S. a. 200—34 7 Claims
second contact effecting member urging and holding the latter
in interfitting engagement with the first contact effecting mem-
ber, said first contact effecting member including opening
means at the rear so that a rod like tool inserted therein de-
presses the second contact effecting member releasing the
interfitting engagement and said means for removably cou-
pling the first contact effecting member to the cylinder includ-
ing means for enabling sliding removal of the first contact
effecting member upon release of the interfitting engagement
with said second contact effecting member.
1. A gas-blast switch containing an operating mechanism
including a damping device comprising a mechanical drive;
a drive element connected to said mechanical drive;
said gas-blast switch being actuatable by means of said me-
chanical drive and said drive element; "
a switch housing;
a through-passage housing connected to said switch housing
and containing a liquid bath;
said drive element being guided out of said switch housing
through said through-passage housing and said liquid
bath, with said liquid bath serving as a gas-tight seal for
said drive element; and
a hydraulic damping device immersed in said liquid bath
within said through-passage housing and cooperating with
the drive element.
4,394,552
FLIP-ACnON GUARD AND POSITION INDICATOR
FOR PUSH-TO-ACTUATE AND PUSH-TO-RELEASE
SWITCH
Mark S. Schlosser, Seattle, Wash., assignor to Korry Manuftu-
turing Co., Seattle, Wash.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,139
Int. a.3 HOIH 13/04
U.S. a. 200—61.62 8 Claims
4,394,551
SWITCH LOCK
Frank J. S> ' ^rbing. River Grove, III., assignor to Fort Lock
Corporation, River Grove, III.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,491
Int. a.3 HOIH 9/28
U.S. a. 200—44 8 Qaims
1. In a lock having a cylinder and key actuated spindle
means disposed in said cylinder, a switch operating subassem-
bly adapted to be operated by rotation of the spindle means
through use of a proper key, comprising, a first contact effect-
ing member having means for removably coupling said first
member sutionarily to said cyKnder, a second contact effect-
1. A switch assembly including push-to-latch and push-to-
release switch means adapted to be mounted in a mounting
panel, said switch means including a push-button head manu-
ally accessible from the front of the mounting panel and guided
for lineal reciprocation transversely to the panel through a
range including an intermediate latched position and extending
between an outer, released position of said assembly and an
inner, latch-releasing position thereof, a flip cover, means for
hingedly mounting said flip cover adjacent to said push-button
head in fixed relation to the panel so as to swing about an axis
transverse to such lineal reciprocation between an inner, limit-
ing guard position overlying said head in its released position.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1203
and a fully outwardly extending position clearing the push-but-
ton head for manual access to said head, mutually interengage-
able abutment elements respectively carried by said flip cover
and said push-button head disengaged in the released position
of the push-button head and relatively positioned, firstly, to
pass one another without engaging one another accompanying
swinging of said flip cover to said fully outwardly extending
position with said head in its released position, secondly, to
engage one another with the flip cover maintained thereby
partially outwardly extended with the head in its latched posi-
tion, and thirdly, to engage one another in sliding contact
terminated by one such abutment element passing out of en-
gagement with the other accompanying movement of the flip
cover inwardly and conjoint movement of the push-button
head inwardly beyond latched position of the head, thereby to
permit return of the flip cover to its guard position as the
push-button head approaches latch-releasing position.
4,394,553
SNAP ACTION SWITCH
Paul G. Fell, Evansville, Ind., assignor to AMF Incorporated,
White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,280
1 1 Int. a.3 HOIH 5/22
U.S. a. 200—67 DA 7 Qaims
1
j50 ^ 60 48 50
said support means to thereby retain the blade means
mounted with the spring tension of said arm portions; and
actuating means operatively associated with said blade
means to actuate the free end thereof toward and away
from said first contact to make and break contact there-
with.
4,394,554
VACUUM aRCUTT INTERRUPTER
Junichi Warabi, Shizuoka; Sbinzo Sakuma, Yokohama; Hidemi
Kawaguchi, and Yukio Kobari, both of Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Kabufhiki Kalsha Meidensha, Japan
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,853
Claims priority, application Japan, May 6, 1980, 55-59675
Int. a.3 HOIH 33/66
U.S. O. 200—144 B 33 Qaims
2. A switch comprising:
a casing;
a first contact mounted within the interior space of the
casing;
a unitary support means comprising a terminal portion with-
out said casing, a base portion disposed longitudinally
within the interior space of said switch, a first portion
disposed normal to and at one end of said base portion and
having a slot therein a second and a third portion spaced
apart and normal to said base portion at the other end
thereof with each said second and third portions having a
slot therein;
a blade means mounted with spring tension to said support
means and comprising a contact carrying end free to move
within the interior space of said casing, two spaced apart
formed spring tension arm portions interconnected at their
respective ends by a first and a second transverse portion,
a rigid tongue portion integral with said first transverse
portion and disposed between said arm portions and termi-
nating in a bearing edge, and a shank portion integral with
said second transverse portion with two laterally extend-
ing trunnion portions at its other end;
said blade means being mountable to said support means
with said bearing edge of said tongue being held in said
slot of said first portion while said laterally extending
portions of said shank portions are pivotally disposed
within a respective slot of the second and third portions of
1. A vacuum interrupter for electric power having a vacuum
vessel, the vacuum vessel comprising:
(a) a cylindrical insulating envelope made of a ceramic mate-
rials or crystallized glass having a metallized layer at each
end thereof;
(b) a first metallic end plate made of copper located on one
end of said cylindrical insulating envelope;
(c) a second metallic end plate made of copper located on
the other end of said cylindrical insulating envelope;
(d) a stationary electrode holder fixedly extending through
said first metallic end plate, at the inner end of which a
stationary electrode contact is provided;
(e) a movable electrode holder extending through said sec-
ond metallic end plate so as to be able to move in a given
direction at the inner end of which a movable electrode
contact is provided;
(0 an arc shielding member located within said cylindrical
insulating envelope so as to surround said stationary and
movable electrode contacts;
(g) a bellows located within said arc shielding member for
movably sealing said movable electrode holder with said
second metallic end plate; and
(h) means for connecting said first metallic end plate with
one metallized layer of said cylindrical insulating enve-
lope, connecting said second metallic end plate with the
other metallized layer of said cylindrical insulating enve-
lope, connecting said first metallic end plate with said
stationary electrode holder, and connecting one end each
of said arc shielding member and bellows with said second
metallic end plate.
4,394,555
SWITCH ASSEMBLY WTTH PIVOTED ACTUATOR
Donald A. Long, and Thomas R. Sowash, both of Anderson, Ind.,
assignors to General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich,
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,690
Int. aJ HOIH 13/52
U.S. a. 200—159 R 4 Qaims
1. A switch assembly comprising
a support having a face, an aperture defined in the face,
a circuit board mounted on the support, the board surface
extending transverse to the said face,
1204
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
a switch including a movable contact and a stationary
contact mounted on the circuit board and arranged for
operation between open and closed state by movement of
the movable contact generally perpendicular to the circuit
board, and
a switch actuator having pivot means mounted on the sup-
port adjacent the aperture for rocking movement about an
axis substantially parallel to the circuit board and the face,
4^94,557
ELECTRONIC CONTROLLED HEAT COOKING
APPARATUS
Jin Tachihara, Oumihachiinan, and Hideaki Koyama, Otsu, both
of Japan, assignors to Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd., Moriguchi,
Japan
FUed May 20, 1980, Ser. No. 151,609
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1979, 54-75024;
Jnn. 13, 1979, 54-75026
Int a.3 H05B 1/02
MS. a. 219—10.55 B 13 Claims
the actuator having a push button portion extending away
from the circuit board in one direction from the pivot
means and protruding through the aperture to allow man-
ual movement of the actuator and having an operator
portion extending in another direction from the pivot
means to the switch for switch operation upon actuator
movement, whereby a force applied to the push button
j)ortion in a direction generally perpendicular to the face
is effective to operate the switch.
4,394,556
CAM OPERATED SWITCH ASSEMBLY
Gilbert Gould, Thousand Oaks, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,822
Int.a.3H01H77/;6
U.S. a. 200—161
9 0ainis
, /"^^^
EZZZZZZZZZZ3
|sthomg| «/ V
v_
<eo 100
vb{ [io)i5o| surt"! [clew I
l-*2
1. A switching system for connecting battery power to an
electronic unit comprising,
a normally-closed switch having an operable lever arm,
a rotatable cam having a curved surface for depressing said
lever arm to open said switch,
a lanyard,
means in said cam for releasably attaching one end of said
lanyard thereto, and
means engageable with said cam for preventing rotation of
said cam.
1. An electronically controlled heat cooking apparatus,
comprising:
heating energy generating means for providing heating
energy to a material being cooked,
entry means for setting heating conditions corresponding to
a desired plurality of heating modes successively set in an
arbitrary sequence for cooking said material being cooked
by means of said heating energy generating means;
said entry means comprising d plurality of groups of heating
condition setting means for independently establishing
signals corresponding to said heating conditions of a de-
sired heating mode;
each said group of heating condition setting means compris-
ing heat designating means for setting the heat to be ap-
plied during a single heating mode, and timer time period
entry means for setting a timer time period corresponding
to the desired duration of said single heating mode;
storing means for storing signals corresponding to said heat-
ing conditions set by said plurality of groups of heating
condition setting means and to the sequence in which said
groups were successively set,
said storing means comprising heat storing means for storing
the heat settings entered by said heat designating means,
timer time period storing means for storing said timer time
periods entered by said timer time period entry means, and
sequence storing means, responsive to the sequence in
which an operator sets said groups, for identifying the
sequence in which said groups have been set regardless of
which group said operator chooses to set first;
heat stari commanding means,
control means responsive to the output of said heating start
commanding means and to said signals stored in said
storing means for controlling said heating energy generat-
ing means to perform said desired sequential heating
modes in accordance with the order stored in said order
storing means and the heating conditions stored in said
heat storing means and said timer time period storing
means, and
said cooking apparatus further comprising an operation
portion having a plurality of discrete sections, each of said
sections having a respective group of heating condition
setting means disposed therein.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1205
4,394,558
EDM METHOD OF MACHINING WORKPIECES WITH A
CONTROLLED CRATER CONHGURATION
Kiyoshi Inoue, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Inoue-Japax Research
Incorporated, Yokohama, Japan
FUed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,287
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1980, 55-49662;
Apr. 15, 1980, 55-49663
Int. C\? B23P 1/12
U.S. a. 219—69 W 8 Claims
> o
ll 30
•320
10
REMOVAL RATE
SURFACE ROUGHNESS
06
04
f02
<
il
Is
0 5 10 15 20 25
RATE OF FLOW OF MACHINING MEDIUM
oscillating a welding electrode in a width direction within a
groove of a pair of metals to be welded, the vertical movement
of said electrode is controlled so as to always maintain an arc
length constant, the improvement comprising the steps of: arc
welding said groove of a predetermined shape by using a
predetermined welding speed and wire feed speed; upon com-
pletion of a half cycle of oscillation of said electrode, integrat-
ing a vertical displacement of said electrode over a period of
time to obtain a cross-sectional area So described by said elec-
trode and also obtaining an oscillation stroke x^ of said elec-
trode; storing said cross-sectional area S and said oscillation
stroke in memory means; similarly obtaining a cross-sectional
area S and an oscillation stroke x for the next half cycle of
oscillation of said electrode; and varying a cross-sectional area
of metal deposition by an amount AS given by
A5 = S - f- So,
*0
whereby providing a weld bead having a uniform level.
1. A method of machining an electrically conductive work-
piece with a tpol electrode juxtaposed therewith across a
machining gap flooded with a liquid machining medium,
wherein a succession of time-spaced electrical pulses are
passed through said gap to produce between the opposed
surfaces of the tool electrode and the workpiece discrete
electroerosive discharges each of which results in the
formation of a discharge crater on a localized spot on the
workpiece surface and the consequential localized stock
removal therefrom and which, with such discharge cra-
ters formed successively and randomly throughout the
workpiece surface opposed to the tool electrode surface,
cumulatively remove stock from the workpiece while the
tool electrode is moved relative to the workpiece along a
predetermined path to advance stock removal in the
workpiece;
wherein the liquid machining medium may be forced to flow
through said machining gap; and
wherein the tool electrode may be displaced relative to the
workpiece, independently of but simultaneously with the
aforesaid relative displacement therebetween,
said method comprising: reducing the surface roughness of
said machined workpiece by increasing at least one of the
rate of said flow of the liquid machining medium through
said gap and the rate of the second-mentioned relative
displacement between the tool electrode and the work-
piece to such an extent that each of said discharge craters
becomes elliptical in shape and has its major axis at least
two times greater than its minor axis.
4,394,560
COVERED ELECTRODE CONTAINING ZIRCONIUM
FOR SHIELDED METAL ARC WELDING
Katsuhiro Kishida; Yutaka Mekuchi, both of Yokohama; Sumio
Hirao, Kaminagaya, and Hirohiko Date, Yokosuka, all of
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Ltd., Yokohama,
Japan
Filed Oct. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 310,283
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1980, 55-140555
Int. a.3 B23K 35/30
U.S. a. 219—137 WM 9 Claims
4,394,559
ARC WELDING METHOD
Hirokazu Nomura; Yiyi Sugitani, both of Tsu, and Yasuo
Suzuki, Hisai, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Kokan Kabu-
shiki Kaisha, Toyko, Japan
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,403
Oaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 27, 1980, 55-188685
Int. a.3 B23K 9/12
U.S. a. 219—125.12 5 Qaims
Zr IN DEPOSITED METAL. Wl%
tZr IN COVERING ,Wt%)
1. A covered electrode for shielded metal arc welding, the
electrode consisting of a core wire and a covering and com-
prising such amounts of Ni, Si, B, Nb, C and Zr as essential
alloying elements that deposited metal given by the covered
electrode contains at least 40% by weight of Ni, 3 to 8% by
weight of Si, 0. 1 to 0.5% by weight of B, 0.3 to 2.0% by weight
of Nb, 0.2 to 1.5% by weight of C and 0.01 to 0.20% by weight
ofZr.
1. In an arc welding method of the type in which while
4,394,561
TANK STRUCTURE FOR AN AIR HUMIDIFYING
ELECTRODE STEAM GENERATOR
Allen J. Zerbel, Madison, Wis., assignor to Wehr Corporation,
Milwaukee, Wis.
FUed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,360
Int. a.3 H05B 3/60: F22B 1/30; B65D 6/00
U.S. a. 219—285 4 Claims
1. A generally cylindrical water tank for an electrical steam
generator of an air humidifier including a plurality of elec-
trodes mounted inside the tank in circumferentially-spaced
relationship with each connected to a separate electrical termi-
nal, said tank comprising:
mating top and bottom cylinder halves molded from an
electrically insulative plastic material as substantially
1206
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
mirror images of each other, each of said halves having an
open mating end and a substantially closed, opposite end
Including an opening and a plurality of circumferentially-
spaced, externally and internally projecting bosses at
locations corresponding to desired locations of the electri-
cal terminals, the terminal bosses on said top and bottom
halves being substantially identical except at least some of
said top half includes an electrical terminal integrally
molded therein, each of said halves further including a
radially extending row of at least two internally project-
sponding to the tank pitch circle diameter at center points
including:
1. a reference center point,
2. a plurality of center points disposed at angular intervals
from the reference center point equal to three hundred
and sixty degrees (360°) divided by the number of aper-
tures in the tank flange to define a first set of center
points,
3. a plurality of center points disposed at angular intervals
from the reference center point equal to three hundred
and sixty degrees (360°) divided by the number of aper-
tures in the tank flange plus one, to define a second set
of center points, and
4. at least the first center point of the first set of center
points on each side of the reference center point and the
first center point of the second set of center points on
each side of the reference center point cooperate to
define elongate apertures, and
(c) fastener means receivable by the mounting apertures of
the tank flange and the heater flange to connect the heater
to the tank.
-*<<«i «
4^94,563
FOOT CONSTRUCTION FOR PORTABLE ELECTRIC
SPACE HEATERS
John W. Schnell, Boone County, Mo., assignor to Toastmaster,
Inc., Columbia, Mo.
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,513
Int. a.3 F16M 11/20; F24H 9/06; H05B 7/00
U.S. a. 219—342 2 Qaims
ing mounting bosses radially aligned with and radially
spaced from each of said terminal bosses, each of said
mounting bosses adapted to receive means for anchoring
the upper end of an electrode on said top half with one
mounting boss in each row being circumferentially
aligned with a corresponding boss in another row; and
means for removably holding said mating ends of said top
and bottom halves in assembly to define a chamber with
the opening in said bottom half serving as a water inlet and
the opening in said top half serving as a steam outlet.
4,394,562
ELECTRIC IMMERSION HEATER MOUNTING FLANGE
Fred Epstein, Clayton, and Tom Holden, Mehlville, both of Mo.,
assignors to Industrial Engineering and Equipment Incorpo-
rated, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,565
Int. C\? H05B 3/82: F24H 1/10
U.S. a. 219—306 6 Qaims
2. In a portable electric space heater having a heater body,
the combination of:
a pair of foot members adapted to support the heater body
on a support surface, said foot members being initially
detached from the heater body;
means for attaching said foot members to the heater body at
spaced apart locations thereon to permit the foot members
to support the heater body on a support surface;
a pair of rib members projecting pgenerally downwardly
from the heater body at spaced apart locations thereon,
each rib member having a curved edge operable to upset
the heater body when placed on a support surface while
detached from said foot members;
means for deactivating the heater when the heater body is
upset; and
means presenting a socket in each foot member at a location
to receive the corresponding rib when the foot member is
attached to the heater body.
1. An immersion heater and tank assembly comprising:
(a) a tank including an open end having an annular flange,
said flange having a plurality of circular mounting aper-
tures disposed on a common pitch circle diameter at angu-
lar intervals equal to three hundred and sixty degrees
(360°) divided by the number of apertures in the tank
flange,
(b) an immersion heater receivable within the tank and hav-
ing an annular mounting flange, said flange having mount-
ing apertures disposed on a pitch circle diameter corre-
4,394,564
SOLID PLATE HEATING UNTT
Raymond L. Dills, Louisville, Ky., assignor to General Electric
Company, Louisville, Ky.
FUed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,587
Int. a.3 H05B i/6« ~
U.S. a. 219—449 8 Qaims
1. A plate surface heating unit having a top plate defining a
heating area, said top plate having a softening temperature.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1207
temperature setting means for determining the operating tem-
perature of said top plate including a control system for main-
taining said heating area substantially at the selected cooking
temperature while maintaining the temperature of said heating
area below the softening temperature of said top plate compris-
ing:
a metal sheathed electrical resistance heating element in
intimate contact with the underside of said top plate, said
element having a heating capacity capable of elevating the
temperature of said top plate above its softening tempera-
ture;
a temperature-sensing means arranged for sensing the tem-
perature of said top plate at a plurality of selected loca-
tions in said heating area;
a terminal block with terminals for receiving the plug-in heat-
ing element and supplying electric power thereto,
a double pole switch with contacts connected to line voltage
and to the terminal block,
a solenoid to open and close the switch,
means to detect the presence and absence of a cooking vessel
on the heating element, and
means cooperating with the cooking vessel detection means to
de-energize the solenoid in the event of cooking vessel ab-
sence and open the double pole switch and energize the
solenoid in the event the cooking vessel is present and close
the double pole switch.
56 fiOWtK
SMITCH
TtMP.
/"'
«-l
COMblTIOM£ft
OUTPU T
^«
-CA
34
*0 57i,
g; , /■ y r- .<^- /
"ink S76 /7
AA>
L..H-
72
4,394,566
LADLE PREHEATER
Klas B. O. Magnusson, Hallstahammar, Sweden, assignor to
Bulten-Kanthai Aktiebolag, Hallstahammar, Sweden
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 97,673, Nov. 27, 1979. This
application Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,128
Int. a.3 H05B i/06; F27B 14/00
U.S. CI. 219—523 3 Claims
_ EXHAUST [-»
cycling means in said temperature setting means operable to
control energization of said heating element to maintain
the temperature of said top plate at said operating temper-
ature;
a control means in circuit connection between said tempera-
ture sensing means and said temperature setting means for
deenergizing said heating element independent of said
cycling means when the temperature sensed by said tem-
perature sensing means of said top plate and said heating
element at said selected locations of said heating area
reaches a selected temperature below the softening tem-
perature of said top plate.
~ II 4,394,565
POWER DISCONNECT ASSEMBLY FOR ELECTRIC
HEATING ELEMENTS
Raymond L. Dills, Louisville, Ky., assignor to General Electric
Company, Louisville, Ky.
I Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 324,306
' Int. a.3 H05B i/6S
U.S. a. 219—452 9 Qaims
1. A power disconnect assembly comprising;
a plug-in electric heating element adapted to support and heat
a cooking vessel and its contents.
1. A preheater for a casting ladle, comprising
(a) a lifting table having an upper surface adapted to support
the ladle, and an actuator for adjusting the vertical posi-
tion of said upper surface;
(b) a fixed frame disposed adjacent to said table;
(c) a horizontal refractory deck fixedly secured to said fixed
frame in overhanging relation to said upper surface of said
lifting table;
(d) a set of U-shaped electrical heating elements composed
essentially of molybdenum disilicide, each of said heating
elements being supported on said deck individually, and
each having a vertical heating portion extending down-
wardly from said deck, and a pair of terminal portions
extending upwardly from said deck;
(e) a set of refractory plugs for said set of heating elements,
each said plug supporting one of said elements with said
portions thereof projecting therefrom, each of said plugs
being disposed in a vertical aperture in said deck, and
being insertable and removable from above said deck;
(0 at least one of said plugs having a downwardly facing
peripheral shoulder supported on an upwardly facing
shoulder within the corresponding deck aperture;
(g) an electrical circuit connected to said terminal portions;
and
(h) a power supply connected to said actuator; whereby the
ladle, supported on said upper surface beneath said deck
may be raised to receive the vertical heating portions of
said set of heating elements and be internally heated
thereby.
1208
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,567
DATA RECORDING SYSTEM
Max J. SchoDhnber, Seefeidquai 1, CH 8008 Ziirich, Switzer-
land
Filed Mar. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 127,117
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 6, 1979,
2150/79
Int. a.' GOIF 7/00; G06K 5/00
U.S. a. 235—375 13 Claims
j^
Q
1. Apparatus for recording data commensurate with a plural-
ity of serially collected samples of material comprising:
means providing a plurality of input signals commensurate
with sensed parameters of each sample of material;
means providing input signals commensurate with the iden-
tity of each sample of material;
data recording means, said recording means including:
a first storage device, said storage device comprising a
removable data storage medium and means for record-
ing data on said medium; and
a second data storage device, said second storage device
including a removable data storage medium and means
for recording data on said medium; and control means
interconnecting said input signal providing
means and said recording means, said control means selectively
delivering data bearing signals to said first and second storage
devices for recording on said mediums whereby information
commensurate with sensed material parameters and the iden-
tity of the sample corresponding to those sensed parameters
will be selectively stored on the first or second or both said
first and second storage mediums.
(d) roller drive means for driving said feed roller,
(e) read means for reading information on the cards fed from
said hopper,
(f) card detection means for detecting the presence or ab-
sence of the card in said hopper,
(g) weight detection means for detecting the presence or
absence of the card weight in said hopper,
(h) mode selection means for selecting a sequential read
mode or a single card read mode for a card read mode of
said read means,
(i) memory means for storing detection signals of said card
detection means and said weight detection means as status
signals, and
(j) processing means for determining a mode setting signal
from said mode selection means and determining transi-
tion of mode and an immediately previous status when the
status transits based on information from said card detec-
tion means, said weight detection means and said memory
means and further determining if a transition time from a
first status to a second status is within a predetermined
time period and if a status immediately previous to the
second status is the first status in order to discriminate a
one card out of stack read mode and a single inserted card
read mode and provide a control signal to said roller drive
means in accordance with the discriminated mode.
4,394,569
FOCUS DETECTING METHOD AND APPARATUS
Kazuo Nakamura, Shiki, Japan, assignor to Asahi Kogaku
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,132
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 29, 1979, 54-172963
Int. a.3 GOIJ 1/36
U.S. a. 250—204 6 Qaims
-^'^
f
5->
4-
'^f^
jh
t7^ PROCESSING
"^ — ' ORCUIT
-^^2
4,394,568
CARD READING APPARATUS
Yoshinobu Nakatsu, Hadano, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 294,054
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 5, 1980, 55/122406
Int. Q.J G06K 13/00; B65H 1/10
U.S. Q. 235—475 * Qaims
1. A card reading apparatus for reading information re-
corded on a card, comprising:
(a) a hopper in which cards are accommodated or inserted,
(b) a card weight disposed on said hopper or the cards
stacked in said hopper,
(c) a feed roller for feeding the cards stacked or inserted in
said hopper,
1. An automatic focusing device for a camera comprising:
first and second sensor groups;
means for projecting images of an object transmitted
through a focusing lens onto said first and second sensor
groups;
means for shifting at least one of said images on said sensor
groups;
means for converting outputs of said first and second sensor
groups to digital numbers;
means for storing said digital numbers;
calculating means for determining in succession:
(1) a first set of successive values of:
n—\ n—\—p -
F= 2 |iA+l -7*1 X /So- 2 \ik-\-p-jk\ y- Pp+2
A=l *='
for successive values of p for positive values of F, and a
second set of successive values of:
^•="2 |«t-yA+l| X i3o- "^2, \Jk-\-p- ik\yh+l
for successive values of p for negative values of F
where \k are ones of said digital numbers corresponding
to sensors of said first sensor group, j* are ones of said
digital numbers corresponding to sensors of said second
sensor group with k indicating sensor positions within
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1209
said sensor groups, n is the number of sensors in each
said sensor group, p= — 1, 0, 1,2,...? with P being an
integer less than n, /3o=Ao/(n— 1),
/3|,+2=Ao/(n— p— 1) and Ao is a predetermined con-
stant;
(2) values of F = Fs and F = Fs + 1 where Fs represents the
value of F before a change in the sign of F and Fs+ 1
represents the value of F after a change in the sign of F
for successive values of p, and S corresponds to an
image movement amount from a prior position to a
position corresponding to the value of p before said
change in sign of F; and
(3) a value of M = S -i- Fs/(Fs- F5+ 1) if said change in the
sign of said value F occurs during said first set of values
and M = S — Fs/(F5— Fs-(- 1) if said change in the sign of
said value F occurs during said second set of values;
and means for moving said lens directly from said prior
position to a focused position determined in accordance
with sa d value of M.
4,394,571
OPTICALLY ENHANCED SCHOTTKY BARRIER IR
DETECTOR
Jaan Jurisson, Fridley, Minn., assignor to Honeywell Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 263,966
Int. C\? HOIJ 40/14
U.S. Q. 250—216 4 Qaims
1. In a Schottky barrier radiation detector the improvement '
comprising:
. a mirror positioned a distance from the barrier substantially
equal to one quarter of the wavelength of the radiation
being detected.
4,394,570
PHOTOELECTRIC CONVERSION CIRCUIT
Kazunori Mizokami, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus
Optical Company Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,612
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1979, 54/168718
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 40/14
U.S. Q. 250—209 5 Qaims
4,394,572
PHOTODETECTOR HAVING AN ELECTRICALLY
CONDUCnVE, SELECTIVELY TRANSMISSIVE
WINDOW
Scott A. Wilber, Boulder, Colo., assignor to Biox Technology,
Inc., Boulder, Colo.
FUed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,955
Int. Q.3 HOIJ 5/02
U.S. Q. 250— 239 12 Qaims
130 30 40 140
1. A photoelectric conversion circuit comprising:
a pair of series connected photodiodes having first and sec-
ond connection points;
a capacitor having one side thereof connected to said first
connection point of said photodiodes and arranged to be
charged and discharged in response to a photocurrent
from said photodiodes;
first and second semiconductor switching circuits, wherein
the output of said first switching circuit is connected to
the input of said second switching circuit to form a junc-
tion, and wherein said second connection point of said
photodiodes is connected to said junction; and
the combination of said photodiodes and said capacitor
forming a feedback circuit connected across said first and
second switching circuit, whereby the switching opera-^
tion of said switching circuits is effected in response to
charging and discharging of said capacitor by photocur-
rent from said photodiodes.
1. A photodetector device having substantially decreased
sensitivity to various electromagnetic interferences, the device
comprising:
an electrically conductive case having a hollow interior
portion;
a photosensitive material positioned within the case;
an opening defined in a portion of the case; and
an electrically conductive window structure transparent to
selected wavelengths of energy positioned within the
opening to enclose the interior of the case, the electrically
conductive window being in electrical contact with the
electrically conductive case;
whereby the window may pass radiation of selected wave-
lengths while isolating the photosensitive material from
interference energy of non-selected wavelengths.
1210
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UNDERWATER
DETECTION OF HYDROCARBONS
Aderbal C. Correa; John S. Gergely, both of Ponca Qty, Okla.,
and Andrew J. Blanchard, College Station, Tex., assignors to
Conoco Inc., Ponca Oty, Okla.
FUed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,137
Int. a.3 GOIV 5/00; GOIT 1/167
U.S. CI. 250—253 23 Claims
given resolution of said standard spectra, to generate
modified standard spectra; and
(b) comparing said modified standard spectra and said mea-
sured spectrum to derive information relative to the earth
formation.
4,394,575
APPARATUS FOR MEASURING VAPOR DENSITY, GAS
TEMPERATURE, AND SATURATION RATIO
Loren D. Nelson, Morrison, Colo., assignor to Ophir Corpora-
tion, Denver, Colo.
Filed Jun. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 164,059
Int. a.5 GOIJ 7/00
U.S. a. 250—343 6 Qaims
1. A method for detecting presence of hydrocarbons within
a body of water proximate the water bottom comprising:
moving an instrument platform through said body of water
at a pre-selected distance above the water bottom;
generating light energy and directing said light energy from
said instrument platform toward a selected area within the
body of water as a repetitive scanning beam on said water
bottom transverse to the line of movement of said instru-
ment platform;
detecting selected fluorescence excitation resulting from
said light energy; and
providing a data readout of said fluorescence excitations as
an indication of hydrocarbon presence.
4,394,574
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CONSTITUENT
ANALYSIS OF EARTH FORMATIONS
James A. Grau, Ridgefield, Conn., and Russel C. Hertzog, Mis-
souri City, Tex., assignors to Schlumberger Technology Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 65,244, Aug. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,123
Int. a.5 GOIV 5/00
U.S. CI. 250—262 22 Claims
VAPOR
DENSITY
OUTPUT
1. A new and improved passive radiometric device for mea-
suring true air temperature without physical contact wherein
the improvement comprises:
an extremely narrow system wavelength received radiance
bandpass on the order of 0.5 microns or less, said received
radiance bandpass being selected to be in the strong car-
bon dioxide absorption band whose center is at substan-
tially 4.255 microns.
4,394,576
APPARATUS FOR DETECTING THE LOCATION OF
INODENT RADIATION
Eiichi Tanaka, Mitaka; Norimasa Nohara; Hideo Murayama,
both of Chiba; Keiyi Ishimatsu, Abiko; Akira Ogushi, Mito,
and Katsumi Takami, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Na-
tional Institute of Radiological Sciences, Chiba and Hitachi
Medical Corporation, Tokyo, both of, Japan
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,870
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 29, 1979, 54-124742
Int. a.J GOIT 1/20
U.S. a. 250—366 21 Qaims
1. A method for investigating a geological system, which
includes a geological formation traversed by a well bore,
through comparison of a measured spectrum, generated by
means including a radiation detector, with standard spectra
having a given resolution, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) modifying said standard spectra to reduce the effect of
the diflerence between the detector resolution extant
during the detection of said measured spectrum and the
1. An apparatus for detecting a location of incident radia-
tion, comprising:
a scintillation crystal;
a pair of photo-multiplier tubes having their photo-cathodes
optically coupled to said scintillation crystal.
July 19, 983
ELECTRICAL
1211
said scintillation crystal and said pair of photo-multiplier
tubes forming a set;
a location detecting means coupled to said photo-multiplier
tubes for specifying, from outputs of said photo-multiplier
tubes, a location witin said crystal at which a scintillation
has taken place,
said scintillation crystal being comprised of at least three
adjacent crystal segments arranged in a row in a first
direction with two end segments being located at the
respective ends of the row, each of said crystal segments
being so coupled to each other to insure that a scintillation
occurring in any one of the component crystal segments
will cause said photo-multiplier tubes to deliver substan-
tially the same output irrespective of the location of oc-
currence of scintillation in said any one crystal segment
and that scintillations occurring in the respective crystal
segments will cause the photo-multiplier tubes to deliver
outputs different in level with each other; and
in which the photo-cathodes of said pair of photo-multiplier
tubes face in a second direction transverse to said flrst
direction.
4,394,577
DISPLACEMENT MEASUREMENT DEVICE AND
METHOD
Marvin L. Peterson; Norman W. Hein, Jr., and Donald H.
Oertie, all of Ponca City, Okla., assignors to Conoco Inc.,
Ponco City, Okla.
I Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,441
' Int. a.3 GOIJ 1/42
U.S. a. 250—372
16 Qaims
r —
\ UOCK
1 + 1
!2
"1
■ Oii»i.*y
r
" 1
4,394,578
HIGH PRESSURE, HIGH RESOLUTION XENON X-RAY
DETECTOR ARRAY
John M. Houston, Schenectady, and Nathan R. Whetten, Burnt
Hills, both of N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company,
Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,026
Int. Q.3 GOIT 1/li
U.S. Q. 250—374 9 Qaims
■* iW J*
1. A high resolution detector array for computerized tomog-
raphy comprising:
a sealed housing forming a detection chamber having an
x-ray permeable window therein;
a collector plate extending through one wall of said housing
into said chamber;
a voltage plate disposed in said chamber parallel to said
collector plate; and
a volume of xenon gas disposed in said chamber at a density
of approximately 0.5 to 2.5 grams per cubic centimeter.
4,394,579
LASER INDUCED PLASMA PRODUCTION FOR
ISOTOPE SEPARATION
Fred R. Schwirzke, 1591 Josselyn Canyon Rd., Monterey, Calif.
93940
Filed Oct. 22, 1979, Ser. No. 86,982
Int. Q.5 BOID 59/00
U.S. Q. 250—423 P 17 Qaims
15. A method of monitoring the displacement of an object,
comprising:
marking the object with a flrst reflective material responsive
to ultraviolet energy;
marking the object, in predetermined spaced relation with
the first reflective material, with a second reflective mate-
rial responsive to ultraviolet energy;
detecting when the first reflective material initially responds
to ultraviolet energy;
detecting when the second reflective material initially re-
sponds to ultraviolet energy;
preventing the redetection of a response to the ultraviolet
energy by the first reflective material after the initial
response thereby to ultraviolet energy until after the step
of detecting when the second reflective material initially
responds to ultraviolet energy; and
calculating, in response to said steps of detecting when the
first reflective material initially responds and of detecting
when the second reflective material initially responds, the
distance the object has moved.
U}
16
19
/
TUNABLE
LASER
SYSTEM
12
•4,
PUMP LEVEL
\^I8\26
/26\\
28
IONIZATION
■1 ^
REDUCED
IONIZATION
ENERGY
22
-26
20 METASTA8LE STATE
electron transitions ♦
to lower i
encroy states
energy!
ground state
1. The method of separating selected atoms which absorb
radiation of one frequency from other atoms which absorb
radiation of different frequencies comprising:
(a) heating a mass of material containing both types of said
atoms until a vapor of said material is formed;
(b) irradiating said vapor with a laser source operating at
said one frequency whereby said selected atoms are
pumped into excited metastable states above the ground
state of said selected atoms;
(c) supplying a continuous source of thermal energy to said
selected atoms in said excited metastable states forming an
ionized plasma of said selected atoms; and
(d) separating said ionized plasma from all said other atoms.
1032 O.G.— 45
1212
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ANALYZING GEMS
Peter J. Gielisse, Brewster, Minn., assignor to L.C.E. Ltd.,
Worthington, Minn.
FUed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,165
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/64
U.S. a. 250—461.1 46 Oaims
therein characterized in that said panel is colored with a color-
ant so that the mean reflectance of said panel in the wavelength
region of the stimulating rays for said stimulable phosphor is
lower than the mean reflectance of said panel in the wave-
length region of the light emitted by said stimulable phosphor
upon stimulation thereof.
71
92
^
96
PHOTOCELL
91
DISPLAY
1 DETECTOR
95
k— 5 5
69- FILTER
99
E2-^^
COMPARATOR
1
°\.'T\/
LOGIC
v^y
97
98
1. Apparatus for analyzing gem specimens, comprising:
housing means;
a source of radiated energy carried by the housing means
capable of emitting electromagnetic radiation over a wide
spectrum of wavelengths of varying intensity;
holder means for supporting a gem specimen in a predeter-
mined position relative to the source of radiated energy,
the holder means being opaque to said radiated energy and
having an aperture formed therethrough in which the gem
specimen is disposed, and through which at least part of
the gem specimen is exposed to said radiated energy;
the holder means and the source of radiated energy being
constructed and arranged so that the radiated energy
interacts with said gem specimen, causing it as a result to
emit radiated energy over a wide spectrum of wave-
lengths of varying intensity;
detector means carried by the housing means in a position in
which it is exposed to the energy emitted by said gem
specimen and constructed to detect the intensity of energy
emitted by said gem specimen over a spectrum of wave-
lengths that is narrow relative to the spectrum of wave-
lengths emitted by said gem specimen, said narrow spec-
trum being chosen as a function of known response of a
particular species of gem to radiated energy;
signal means associated with the detector means for generat-
ing an electric signal representative of the intensity of
energy emitted by the gem specimen and detected by the
detector means;
and readout means associated with the signal means for
providing a readout in response to said electric signal that
is representative of the nature of the gem specimen.
7. 12
14
13 **
16 17
4,394,582
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR UTILIZING THE
WASTE HEAT ENERGY OF AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Ottmar KreissI, Karlsfeld; Josef Schurrer, Deisenhofen; Karl
Motz, Munich; Wilhelm Leitgeb, Bad Neustadt, all of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, and Heinz Rosenberg, Vienna, Austria,
assignors to M.A.N.-Dachauer, Munich and Siemens, Er-
langen, both of. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 256,818, Apr. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,666
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 28,
1980, 3016330; Aug. 9, 1980, 3030232
Int. a.3 FOIK 23/W
U.S. a. 290—4 C 23 Oaims
4,394,581
RADIATION IMAGE STORAGE PANEL
Kenji Takahashi; Hisashi Yamazaki; Juiyi Miyahara, all of
Minamiashigara; Noboni Kotera; Shusaku Eguchi, both of
Odawara, and Norio Miura, Isehara, all of Japan, assignors to
Fi^i Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jun. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,520
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 7, 1S^9, 54/71604
Int. a.3 H05B 33/00
U.S. O. 250—484.1 13 Oaims
1. A method for utilizing thfe waste heat energy of an internal
combustion engine, said method comprising driving a thermo-
dynamic expansion machine by waste heat from an internal
combustion engine, directly driving from said thermodynamic
expansion machine, a synchronous machine having a non-
wound rotor as an electrical power generator, connecting at
least one electrical converter to the output of said generator,
the rotational speed of the generator being the same as the
expansion machine, driving an electric motor from said genera-
tor and delivering output from said motor to said engine to
relieve the load thereon.
1. A 'adiation image storage panel having a fluorescent layer
compriiing a binder and a stimulable phosphor dispersed
4,394,583
ELECTRIC FENCE ENERGIZERS
Colin A. Standing, Hamilton, New Zealand
Continuation of Ser. No. 942,870, Sep. 15, 1978, abandoned. This
application Oct. 10, 1979, Ser. No. 83,366
Oaims priority, application New Zealand, Sep. 13, 1977,
185174
Int. O.J B23P 1/02; G05F 1/08
U.S. O. 307—108 5 Oaims
1. An electric fence energizer of the capacitor discharge
type, comprising:
an output transformer having a primary winding;
a capacitor connected across said power supply and the
primary winding of said transformer;
an SCR means, connected between said capacitor and said
transformer primary winding, for controllably discharg-
ing said capacitor through said transformer primary wind-
ing;
controllable switch means, connected between said power
supply and said capacitor, for charging said capacitor by
means of said power supply;
control circuit means for cyclically charging and discharg-
JULY 19, 983
ELECTRICAL
1213
li
fiid
ing said capacitor by controlling said switch means and
said SCR means, said control circuit means including
means for charging said capacitor to substantially the
same level in each cycle, said level being independent of
mmor
luctuations in said power supply; and
a sense line connected to said control circuit means to sense
the capacitor voltage, said control circuit means including
means for inhibiting charging of said capacitor when said
sense line detects that said SCR means has discharged
abnornially.
SWITCH
covering each of said ports, each said pane being unde-
tachably fastened to its associated port;
conductor means for interconnecting said transmitting and
receiving devices; and
means undetachably fastened to said door for providing a
conduit for said conductor means when said door is closed
and open and to inhibit tampering with said conductor
means.
4,394,585
POWER aRCUrr-BREAKER WITH
REMOTE-CONTROLLABLE OPERATION THRESHOLD
Rosette Alberti, 7 rue Marie Bonaparte, 92 210 Saint-Ooud,
France
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 263,020
Oaims priority, application France, May 14, 1980, 80 10861
Int. 0.3 HOIH 3/26; H02J 1/00
U.S. O. 307—140 4 Oaims
4,394,584
ING DEVICE FOR CHECKING THE CLOSED
POSITION OF A FOLDING DOOR
Kurt Spahni, Bachs, and Walter Bucher, Reictaenburg, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Bauer Kassenfabrik AG., Riimlang,
Switzerland
PCT No. PCT/CH79/00065, § 371 Date Jan. 3, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 14, 1979, PCT Pub. No. WO79/01028, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 29, 1979
PCT Filed May 3, 1979, Ser. No. 192,523
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, May 3, 1978,
4861/78
Int. 0.3 G08B 13/08; HOIH 3/16; H03K 17/00; E05G 1/10
U.S. O. 307—117 7 Oaims
1. A power circuit-breaker with remote-control of the oper-
ation threshold, comprising at least a detection captor of a
predetermined position of the control element of the release
sensitive to the intensity consumed and a release of the circuit-
breaker made of an electro-magnetic element, the control
element of the release being a bimetallic strip and the captor a
contact element coming in contact with said bimetallic strip,
when said position is reached, and sending under the control of
a centralized remote-control receiver, a control current to the
circuit-breaker release.
7. A switching device for checking the closed position of a
swinging door mounted in a frame, the device being of the type
in which a signal is produced by the closing movement of the
door relative to the frame comprising
an infrared transmitting device in one of the door and frame;
an infrared receiving device in the other of the door and
frame for producing a distinguishable signal when infrared
energy is received;
circuit means including a switching transistor coupled to
said transmitting device for selectively activating said
receiving device to produce an alarm-activating signal in
the presence of infrared energy;
means defining a plurality of ports in each of said doorand
frame to permit passage to infrared energy therethrough,
said ports being aligned in pairs when the door is closed,
said transmitting device being arranged to project energy
and said receiving device being arranged to receive
energy through at least one but less than all of said pairs
of ports;
a pane of bullet proof glass transparent to infrared energy
4,394,586
DYNAMIC DIVIDER ORCUIT
Shinji Morozumi, Shimosuwa, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki
Kaisha Suwa Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 19, 1973, Ser. No. 408,148
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 19, 1972, 47/104830
Int. 0.3 H03K 23/22. 19/096
U.S. O. 377—105 17 Oaims
«-T
1. A dynamic binary divider circuit comprised of an interme-
diate inverter, a first multiple inverter and a second multiple
inverter, said intermediate inverter being formed by the com-
plementary connection of a P-channel transistor and an N-
channel transistor, each said first and second multiple inverters
1214
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
being formed from the serial connection of two-series-con-
nected P-channel transistors to two series connected N-chan-
nel transistors respectively, the drain terminals of one of the
P-channel and N-channel transistors of each multiple inverter
being connected together to define an output terminal of the
respective multiple inverter, the gate terminals of said one of
the P-channel and N-channel transistors of each multiple in-
verter being connected together to define an input terminal of
the respective inverter, said output terminal of said first multi-
ple inverter being coupled through said intermediate inverter
to the input of said second multiple inverter, the output termi-
nal of said second multiple inverter being coupled to the input
terminal of said first multiple inverter, the other P-channel
transistor of said first multiple inverter and the other N-chan-
nel transistor of said second multiple inverter being connected
for receipt at the respective gate terminals thereof with a first
clock pulse and the other N-channel transistor of said first
multiple inverter and the other P-channel transistor of said
second multiple inverter being connected for receipt at the
respective gate terminals thereof with a second clock pulse
which is the complement of said first clock pulse whereby the
parasitic capacitance at respective outputs of said first and
second multiple inverters is utilized as a memory means, so that
a division of said clock pulse applied is effected.
4,394,588
CONTROLLABLE DI/DT PUSH/PULL DRIVER
Gene J. Gaudenzi, Purdys, N.Y., assignor to International Busi-
ness Machines Corporation
Filed Dec. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 221,687
Int. a.3 H03K 5/08, 17/08, 19/082. 19/20
U.S. a. 307—443 6 Oaims
4,394,587
CMOS DIFFERENTIAL COMPARATOR WITH
HYSTERESIS
James A. McKenzie, and Joe W. Peterson, both of Austin, Tex.,
assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaumburg, 111.
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,975
Int. a.3 H03K 5/24
U.S. a. 307—355 4 Qaims
N
N
'bb "ao
"OUT
1. A circuit for limiting the time-rate of change of down-
going transitions of a signal present at the output terminal of an
active collector driver, comprising a first transistor having a
base coupled to a signal input terminal and a collector coupled
to a means for providing a supply voltage and an emitter cou-
pled to ground, a second transistor having a collector coupled
to said output terminal and an emitter coupled to ground for
pulling-down said signal present at said output terminal to a
low state, impedance means coupled to said first transistor and
the base of said second transistor for limiting the base current
of said second transistor, pull-up means coupled to said output
terminal for pulling-up said signal present at said output termi-
nal to a high state, a feedback path coupled to said output
terminal and said impedance means for limiting said time-rate
of change of said downgoing transition of said output signal,
and switch means for clamping said feedback path to ground.
1. In a comparator for providing an output voltage which is
proportional to the difference between a first input voltage on
a gate of a first MOS transistor and a second input voltage on
a gate of a second MOS transistor coupled to form a differen-
tial stage with the first transistor, a hysteresis circuit compris-
ing,
bias current means comprising:
a third MOS transistor having a first current electrode
coupled to a selected one of the first and second transis-
tors, a gate electrode, and a second current electrode
for shunting a predetermined portion of current sourced
by the one transistor in an enabled condition;
a fourth MOS transistor having both a first current elec-
trode and a gate electrode coupled to the gate electrode
of said third MOS transistor, wherein said fourth MOS
transistor is coupled as a master current mirror device
and said third MOS transistor is coupled as a slave
current mirror device; and
a current source coupled to the first current electrode of
said fourth MOS transistor; and
switching means coupled to the second current electrode
of said third MOS transistor and to an output of the
comparator, for enabling the bias current means when
the output voltage of the comparator exceeds a prede-
termined threshold.
4,394,589
LOGIC aRCurr including at least one
RESISTOR OR ONE TRANSISTOR HAVING A
SATURABLE RESISTOR HELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR
STRUCTURE
Ngu T. Pham, and Gerard Nuzillat, both of Paris, France, as-
signors to Thomson-CSF, Paris, France
Division of Ser. No. 121,179, Feb. 13, 1980. This application
Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,535
Int. a.3 H03K 19/094
U.S. a. 307—450 5 Qaims
SATURABLE RESISTW
1. A logic circuit comprising an input stage, wherein a first
field-effect transistor is in series with a first saturable resistor
interposed on the drain side in the supply of the first transistor,
an output stage including a second transistor which is identical
with the first and has a supply on the drain side which is com-
mon with the input stage supply, the gate of the second transis-
tor being connected to the drain of the first transistor, the
supply circuit of the second transistor being closed across a
forward-biased diode, and a second saturable resistor on the
ground of the common supply is connected to the source of the
first transistor, an input terminal connected to the gate of the
July 19, W83
ELECTRICAL
1215
first transistor and an output terinal tapped between the diode
and the second saturable resistor;
wherein at least a selected one of the field effect transistors
or the saturable resistors has a saturable resistor structure
comprising a layer of semiconductor material on a semi-
insulating substrate, the character and type of doping of
said material being such as to set up a dipolar domain in
respect of an electric field which is higher than a so-called
critical value, and further comprising two ohmic contacts
on said layer, wherein a groove is cut in the semiconduc-
tor layer between the ohmic contacts so as to define a
residual channel in the material, the dimensions of said
groove being such that the critical value of the electric
field is overstepped in respect of a value of the order of
one volt of the voltage between said ohmic contacts.
4,394,591
LINEAR A-C GENERATOR
Sergei A. Aronov, Slavyansky bulvar, 1, kv. 396; Vladimir A.
Bashilov, Prospekt Mira, 112, kv. 331, both of Moscow; Niko-
lai M. Volkov, Ljuberetsky raion, poselok Dzerzhinsky, ulitsa
Shkolnaya, 5, kv. 187, Moskovskaya oblast, and Sergei D.
Dukhovlinov, Orlikov pereulok, 8, kv. 10, Moscow, all of
U.S.S.R.
Filed Mar. 17, 1978, Ser. No. 887,534
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Aug. 18, 1977, 2509409
Int. a.J H02K 45/00
U.S. a. 310—11 4 Qaims
4,394,590
FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR CIRCUIT
ARRANGEMENT
Akira Honda, Odawara, Japan, assignor to International Recti-
fier Corp. Japan Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP79/00330, § 371 Date Aug. 28, 1981, § 102(e)
Date JuL 7, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01924, PCT Pub.
Date Jul. 9, 1981
X Filed Dec. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 197,099
Int. C\? H03K 17/10. 17/687
584 7 Claims
1. A field effect transistor circuit arrangement including a
plurality of field effect transistors having first and second
electrodes and a control electrode, and a load (RL), which are
connected in a series arrangement between a power source
voltage point (Vs) and a common potential point (C), compris-
ing: 1 1
means for applying a control pulse (Vin) to the control
electrode of one of said field effect transistors which is
connected in said series arrangement on the side of the
common potential point;
at least one first parallel connection circuit having a first
resistor and a first capacitor, each first parallel connection
circuit being coupled between the control electrode of a
respective one of the remaining field effect transistors and
the common potential point;
at least one second parallel connection circuit having a
second resistor and a second capacitor, each second paral-
lel connection circuit being coupled between a respective
first parallel connection circuit and the first electrode of
one of said remaining field effect transistors which is
connected in said series arrangement on the side of the
power source voltage point, a capacitance of said first
capacitor in said first parallel connection circuit being
larger than that of said second capacitor in said second
parallel connection circuit;
a Zener diode connected between the second electrode and
the control electrode of each of said field effect transistors
for preventing a voltage applied therebetween from ex-
ceeding a predetermined breakdown voltage between the
control electrode and second electrode of each of said
field effect transistors; and
said remaining field effect transistors being changed to a
conductive state at the time that said control pulse is
applied to said one field effect transistor.
1. A linear a-c generator comprising: a stationary magnetic
system having a magnetic circuit; n channels filled with liquid
metal, each of said n channels being partially located in a gap
of said stationary magnetic system and all of said channels
being connected hydraulically in series to form a closed her-
metically sealed loop; armatures located in said channels and
being reciprocal therein; and electrodes for taking off the
energy generated in said armatures.
4,394,592
LONG STROKE LINEAR ACTUATOR
Andrew B. Pataki, Lansdale, Pa., assignor to Sperry Corpora-
tion. New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,788
Int. a.3 H02K 41/00
U.S. a. 310—12 1 aaim
28 27
", ^\ \ Mil M2j \ Ml
LOAD
1. A linear actuator for moving a shaft comprising:
a plurality of successive modules mounted on said shaft,
each module including an armature, a spacer and a flange;
a first one of said modules being adjacent an endplate;
only said first module having an armature fixedly connected
to said shaft;
means for urging each armature into engagement with an
adjacent armature, said means including a resilient mem-
ber only in said first module between said endplate and
said fixed armature;
said first module flange and armature having a gap therebe-
tween;
each module armature and flange having a gap therebe-
tween; and
said first module gap being greater than any successive
module gap.
1216
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,593 connected with each other and oppositely poled with respect
LIQUID COOLED DYNAMOELECTRIC MACHINES to each other and spaced from each other by (2n+ 1)-180 elec-
Yoshitsugu Gocho, Fi^isawa, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kanagawa, Japan
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,909
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 14, 1980, 55-1 11023
Int. a.3 H02K 9/00
U.S. a. 310—54 3 Qaims
^^^i
1. An apparatus for assisting in the liquid cooling of a dyna-
moelectric machine comprising a hollow rotor shaft; a double
wall tube assembly defming an annular space, said tube assem-
bly secured in said hollow rotor shaft in such a manner that an
outer tube of said assembly extends outwardly beyond a distal
end of the rotor shaft, and an inner tube of said assembly ex-
tends outwardly beyond a distal end of said outer tube; a sta-
tionary frame surrounding a portion of said tube assembly
extending out of the rotor shaft, said stationary frame defming
therein an exhaust chamber communicating with said annular
space between said outer tube and said inner tube; means for
supplying cooling water into said inner tube; means for ex-
hausting cooling water from said chamber; means for sealing
gaps between said stationary frame and said tube assembly; a
first bushing between said distal end of the rotor shaft and said
outer tube so that the outer tube is axially slidable relative to
said first bushing; a second bushing between said distal end of
the outer tube and said inner tube such that the inner tube is
axially slidable relative to said second bushing, each of the first
and second bushings being made of a rigid material; and a layer
of a low heat conductivity material covering the outer surface
of said inner tube.
4,394,594
MOTOR WITH A DISK ROTOR
Fritz Schmider, Homberg, and Rolf Miiller, St. Georgen, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Papst-MOTOREN KG,
St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 52,831, Jun. 28, 1979,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 708,092, Jul. 23, 1976,
Pat. No. 4,174,484. This application Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No.
171,810
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 23,
1979, 2934183
Int. a.5 H02K 11/00
\JJS. a. 310—68 R 31 Qaims
1. Brushless d.c. motor comprising a multipolar permanent
magnet rotor having at least 6 poles, stator means comprising
a plurality of ironless coils arranged in a one layer winding
arrangement, said coils being connected to form a plurality of
phase windings (122, S1-S4), rotor position sensing means
(76,77; 254,255; 254,255'; 296,297) for controlling the currents
in said phase windings so as to obtain four current pulses per
rotor rotation angle of 360 electrical degrees and to create in
operation a rotary magnetic field driving said permanent mag-
net rotor, said winding arrangement comprising two sets of
coils, each set comprising at least one pair of coils electrically
I
trical degrees between centers, where n is a low positive inte-
ger.
4,394,595
STATOR ARRANGEMENT FOR A SYNCHRONOUS
MOTOR
Robert F. Weaver, Jamestown, Ind., assignor to Emhart Indus-
tries, Inc., Indianapolis, Ind.
Continuation of Ser. No. 965,996, Dec. 4, 1978, abandoned. This
application Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,330
Int. a.3 H02K 21/00
U.S. CI. 310—162 7 Qaims
1. A method of providing good starting characteristics in a
synchronous motor which includes inter-meshed stator poles
and a permanent magnet rotor with rotor poles rotating with
said inter-meshed stator poles and wherein a field coil which
generates flux to cause said rotation of said rotor is disposed
adjacent said inter-meshed stator poles in a side-by-side rela-
tionship, the method comprising:
(a) providing shading means for a predetermined number of
said stator poles to provide a group of shaded poles and a
group of unshaded poles,
(b) selecting a reference pole from each of said groups,
(c) determining the flux phase difference between said refer-
ence pole and individual poles of a group,
(d) converting said phase difference to a mechanical angle and
locating said individual poles with respect to each other
according to said mechanical angle.
4,394,596
THREE-PHASE INDUCTION MOTOR
Tadatomo Kimura, Yotsukaichi, and Takeshi Noguchi, Mie,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,553
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-128309
Int. Q.3 H02K 3/00
U.S. Q. 310—184 6 Qaims
1. A three-phase induction motor comprising:
first to sixth phase terminals, said fourth to sixth phase termi-
nals being connected to said first to third phase terminals,
respectively, during full drive of the motor;
a cylindrical stator core;
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1217
six coil group arranged on the hollow cylindrical core at
equal intervals in the circumferential direction of the
stator;
the coils of a first group being wound about a first one-sixth
of the core and divided into first and second sub-groups
each having N turns;
the coils of a second group adjacent the first group being
wound about a second one-sixth of the core and divided
into third and fourth sub-groups each having N turns
the coils of a third group adjacent the second group being
wound about a third one-sixth of the core and divided into
fifth and sixth sub-groups each having N turns
the coils of a fourth group adjacent the third group being
wound about a fourth one-sixth of the core and divided
into seventh and eighth sub-groups each having N turns
the coils of a fifth group adjacent the fourth group being
wound about a fifth one-sixth of the core and divided into
ninth and tenth sub-groups each having N turns;
the coils of the sixth group adjacent the fifth group being
wound about the last one-sixth of the core and divided
into eleventh and twelfth sub-groups each having N turns,
said sixth sub-group having M turns (M ^ N) arranged adja-
cent M turns of the seventh sub-group, said first sub-group
having M turns arranged adjacent M turns of said twelfth
sub-group, said first and eighth sub-groups being con-
nected in series between said first and second phase termi-
nals to constitute a first subassembly of coils, said fifth and
twelfth sub-groups being connected in series between said
4,394,597
MULTIPLE POLE AXIAL nELD ELECTROMAGNETIC
DEVICES
Joseph A. Mas, Morristown, NJ., assignor to Allied Corpora-
tion, Morris Township, Morris County, N J.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,244
Int. Q.3 H02K 1/22
U.S. Q. 310—268 46 Claims
^ U< U2 Z< 12
u z
1. In an axial field electromagnetic device including a rotor
and a stator formed of core elements that delimit a selected
number of poles, the improvement comprising:
a core element in the form of a cylinder having an annular
cross section and two opposed annular core faces at either
end thereof, said cylinder having an axial thickness (L)
separating said faces and a plurality of radial slots disposed
in one of said faces, each of said slots having a width (W),
a depth (T) and a slot area (slot width times slot length),
said slotted face having a face area (A^ equal to the differ-
ence between the annular cross-sectional area of said core
and the total of said slot areas,
said radial slots being sized such that the sum of said slot
widths per hole is between approximately 30% to approxi-
mately 90% of said axial thickness, said slot depth is be-
tween approximately 45% to approximately 75% of said
axial thickness and the total of said slot areas is between
approximately 27% to approximately 180% of said re-
maining face area (Ay).
second and third phase terminals to constitute a second
sub-assembly of coils, said tenth and third sub-groups
being connected in series between said third and first
phase terminals to constitute a third sub-assembly of coils,
said second and seventh sub-groups being connected in
series between the fourth and fifth phase terminals to
constitute a fourth sub-assembly of coils, said sixth and
eleventh sub-groups being connected in series between
said fifth and sixth phase terminals to constitute a fifth
sub-assembly of coils, and said ninth and fourth sub-
groups being connected in series between said sixth and
fourth phase terminals to constitute a sixth sub-assembly
of coils,
wherein at the start of the motor a first-phase voltage is
applied to the first phase terminal, a second-phase voltage
is applied to the second phase terminal and the third-phase
voltage is applied to the third phase terminal, and during
the full drive of the motor the first-phase voltage is ap-
plied to the first and fourth phase terminals, the second-
phase voltage is applied to the second and fifth phase
terminals and the third-phase voltage is applied to the
third and sixth phase terminals, thus causing the first and
fourth sub-assemblies to form a first assembly of coils, the
second and fifth sub-assemblies to form a second assembly
of coils and the third and fifth sub-assemblies to form a
thinl assembly of coils, whereby three-phase voltage is
applied to the coils of said first, third, fifth, eighth, tenth
and twelfth sub-groups at the start of the motor and to all
the sub-groups during the full drive of the motor.
4,394,598
SPARK PLUG FOR INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINES
Horst Bergmann, Esslingen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,901
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 29,
1979 2948043
Int. aj HOIJ 5/48; HOIT 13/04
U.S. Q. 313—51 11 Qaims
1. An assembly for a spark plug deeply arranged in a spark
plug recess provided in an intmal combustion engine, the spark
plug comprising a mounting portion, a center electrode means,
and an insulating body, comprising
1218
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
extension means adapted to be attached to the spark plug for
facilitating access thereto, the extension means includes a
center electrode, an insulating means, and a tubular jacket
with at a first end an inner cross-sectional configuration
corresponding to a cross section of the mounting portion
of the spark plug, and at a second end a mounting means,
means for enabling an attachment of the insulating body and
center electrode of the extension means to the spark plug,
means for retaining the tubular jacket at the insulating means
of the extension means,
means for sealing the first end of the tubular jacket with
respect to an insulating body of the spark plug,
means for sealing the second end of the tubular jacket with
respect to the insulating body of the extension means, and
means for sealing the tubular body with respect to the spark
plug recess.
4^94,599
FLAT CATHODE RAY TUBE
James Smith, Reigate, and Daphne L. Lamport, Caterham, both
of England, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,269
Int. a.3 HOIJ 29/46
U.S. a. 313—422 8 Qaims
33 2G 32 36 37 it 11
^y=^
1. A flat cathode ray tube including an electron gun for
producing an electron beam, first means for deflecting the
beam in a first direction, means for accelerating the deflected
beam, second means for deflecting the accelerated beam in a
second direction, and a pair of spaced-apart electrodes defining
a trajectory control space into which the beam is directed by
the second means, said electrodes including a screen and a
repeller electrode for repelling the beam toward the screen,
characterized in that the accelerating means comprises
successively-arranged first and second lenses, each of said
lenses accelerating and converging the beam, said first
lens converging the beam to form an object for the second
lens.
said row conductors being positioned upon a first surface of
said substrate, with said anodes directed toward said substrate,
with said column conductors contacting said cathode elec-
trodes on the outer surface of said matrix and each having a
fourth, equal to said second plurality of row conductors, plu-
rality of openings formed therein and positioned over the
non-electrode portions of the cathode surfaces of said diodes;
the improvement comprising:
r
KTlVVl^^l- L
-K
1
said row conductors extending in rows along said first sur-
face of said substrate, thence over said second edge of said
substrate, thence extending in rows from said second edge
on the second surface of said substrate, the positions of
said row conductors on said second surface being con-
toured to turn through a right angle, and thence to said
third edge of said substrate.
4,394,601
ZoStMn THIN-FILM ELECTROLUMINESCENT
ELEMENT WITH MEMORY FUNCTION
Mikio Takeda, Tenri; Yoshinobu Kakihara, Nara; Masani Yo-
shida, and Yukihiko Nakata, both of Tenri, all of Japan,
assignors to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 486,096, Jul. 5, 1974, abandoned. This
application May 18, 1977, Ser. No. 798,008
Int. a.3 H05B ii/l4, 33/18. 33/22
U.S. a. 313— 509 3aaims
4,394,600
LIGHT EMITTING DIODE MATRIX
Alfred Flannagan, Weston, Canada, assignor to Litton Systems,
Inc., Beverly Hills, Calif.
FUed Jan. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 229,489
Int. a.3 HOIL 25/04
U.S. a. 313—500 4 Claims
1. In a light emitting diode matrix, a substrate having, in
order, first, second, third, and fourth adjacent edges; a first
plurality of light emitting diodes, each having an anode elec-
trode centered on its anode end face and a plurality of cathode
electrodes positioned around the periphery of its cathode end
face, arranged in rows and columns of a rectangular coordinate
system; a second plurality of row conductors, equal in number
to the number of rows of said diodes, each electrically contact-
ing the anode electrodes of said diodes of its respective row; a
third plurality of column conductors, equal in number to the
number of said columns of diodes, each electrically contacting
the cathode electrodes of its respective column and thence
extending over said first edge of said substrate; said anodes and
1. A ZnS:Mn thin-film electroluminescent element contain-
ing a hysteresis memory function which comprises a ZnS:Mn
thin-film electroluminescent layer containing ZnS polycrystal-
line grains having a diameter of 0.05 to 0.2/i and containing Mn
in a concentration of 0.05 to 5.0 weight percent, said Mn serv-
ing as a luminescent center, said electroluminescent layer being
sandwiched between a pair of dielectric layers, at least one of
the dielectric layers being made of Y2O3. and first and second
electrodes provided on the respective dielectric layers, said
ZnS:Mn electroluminescent layer having a thickness of
0.4-2.0fi and a dielectric constant at 1 KHz of about 10 to 22,
a loss tangent at 1 KHz of about 1 to 4x 10^, and a breakdown
strength of about 3 to 4x 10^ V/cm.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1219
4,394,602
ENCLOSED ELECTRICAL DEVICES
Waldo D. Apgar, Reading; Charles L. Davis, Mohntoa; Loring
D. Emery, Jr., Hamburg; Werner F. Esselufan, Wyomissing,
and Walter R. Holbrook, Reading, all of Fa., assignors to
Western Electric Co., Inc. and Bell Telephone Laboratories,
Inc., both of New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,757
Int. a.3 HOIJ 7/44
U.S. a. 315—71 , 20 aaims
lO
IOC
96 78 93
'102
W 72
1. An enclosed electrical device, comprising:
an arrangement of circuit elements including conductive
elements lying substantially in and along a plane;
a first enclosure member applied to a first side and a second,
separate enclosure member applied to a second side of the
circuit elements for at least partially enclosing said circuit
elements; means in one or more conductive elements for
permitting penetration of such elements;
means for penetrating conductive elements in the circuit for
fixedly restraining such elements; and
means associated with said enclosure members for fixedly
engaging the penetrating means such that the enclosure
members and the circuit elements are fixed relative to one
another in a secure assembly.
1 1 4,394,603
ENERGY CONSERVING AUTOMATIC LIGHT OUTPUT
SYSTEM
Don F. Widmayer, Bethesda, Md., assignor to Controlled Envi-
ronment Systems Inc., Rockville, Md.
Continuation of Ser. No. 945,842, Sep. 26, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 849,427, Nov. 7, 1977,
abandoned. This application Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,410
Int. Q\? H05B 41/16. 41/36
U.S. a. 315—311 42 Qaims
25. An energy conserving light output control system for
firing and maintaining arc current flow through a plurality of
fluorescent lamps, said system comprising:
arc current supply means comprising a first voltage multiply-
ing means, including a plurality of capacitors and diodes in
accordance with the number of lamps, for supplying arc
current to said fluorescent lamps after said fluorescent lamps
have been fired;
ionizing power supply means comprising a second voltage
multiplying means, including a plurality of capacitors and
diodes in accordance with the number of lamps, for provid-
ing, in cooperation with said arc current supply means, an
ionizing voltage for firing the lamps and for providing a low
voltage after said lamps are fired;
said arc current supply means constituting means for providing
a non-dissipative decline in the voltage supplied to the lamps
with an increase in the lamp load current;
light sensing means for sensing the total ambient light includ-
ing the light output of the lamps as well as the ambient light
produced by other light sources; and
feedback menas, including a solid state current control device
connected in the arc current path of said lamps, for control-
ling the amplitude of the current in said arc current path in
accordance with the output of said light sensing means so as
to maintain the total ambient light at a substantially constant
level.
4,394,604
CONTROL APPARATUS FOR AN
ELECTRO-MECHANICAL DEVICE THAT GENERATES A
BACK EMF
Andre Brecy, Frahier, and Francois Grudler, Bellort, both of
France, assignors to Cii Honeywell Bull, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 17,918, Mar. 6, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,740
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 24, 1978, 78 08618
Int. a.' H02P 1/22
U.S. CI. 318—257 4 Qaims
0
:incj.i
- " — 1
" L . ^
>:,njB-.E
1. Apparatus for controlling the speed and running direction
of a d.c. motor comprising first and second transistors having
emitte»- collector paths, electrodes of said paths having a first
common connection, a d.c. power supply having first and
second output electrodes and an intermediate tap, the voltages
at the first and second output electrodes being respectively at
potentials greater than and less than the voltage at the tap,
means for connecting the motor in circuit with the power
supply, the first common connection and the paths so current
flows through the motor in a first direction between the first
output electrode and the tap through the path of the first
transistor and in a second direction through the motor between
the second output electrode and the tap through the path of the
second transistor, said means for connecting including means
for altering the motor connections to the power supply so
current flows in the first direction through the motor between
the first and second output electrodes through the path of the
first transistor and the total voltage between the first and
second output electrodes is connected across the first transistor
and motor.
1220
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,605
LOAD DRIVE CONTROL SYSTEM
Hidehito Terazawa, Oobu, Japan, assignor to Nippondenso Co.,
Ltd., Kariya, Japan
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,778
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, 55-25511
Int. a.J H02P 1/22
U.S. a. 318—280 13 Qaims
control the rpm of the motor as a function of its load current,
comprising:
(a) a measuring resistance connected in said load circuit for
producing a measuring signal proportional to said load cur-
rent;
(b) a thyristor having an anode and a cathode and being con-
nected in at least one branch of said load circuit:
(c) a control circuit connected to actuate said thyristor, said
control circuit comprising a series circuit arranged in paral-
lel to the anode and cathode of said thyristor, said series
circuit including a coupling resistor and a switching transis-
tor having an emitter and a collector, said coupling resistor
being connected to the collector of said switching transistor;
(d) said thyristor having a control electrode connected
through a diode to the collector of said switching transistor,
said switching transistor having a base electrode connected
through a resistance to a parallel circuit comprising a capaci-
tor and a variable resistor, and a diode connecting said mea-
suring signal from said measuring resistance to said resis-
tance in series with said switching transistor base electrode.
1. A load drive control system comprising:
instruction means for selectively producing forward and
reverse drive instruction signals for starting the driving of
a controlled load in forward and reverse directions re-
spectively;
signal holding switching means for holding a forward or
reverse signal corresponding to the forward or reverse
drive instruction signal from said instruction means;
said instructions means comprising an automatically-restor-
ing switch which switches by receiving an actuation force
to generate one of said instruction signals and restores
when the actuation force is released to stop the generation
of the one instruction signal;
reversible motor means for driving said load in either for-
ward or reverse direction;
means responsive to said signal holding switching means for
controlling electric current supplied from a power supply
to said motor means;
current detecting means for detecting the magnitude of the
current supplied to said motor means;
and upper and lower limit detecting means responsive to said
current detecting means for releasing the holding action of
said holding switching means when the motor supplied
current becomes higher or lower than an upper or lower
Hmit respectively.
4,394,606
SPEED CONTROL aRCUIT FOR ELECTRIC MOTOR
Peter Woerwag, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Dupro A.G., Romanshom, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 209,154
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 21,
1979, 2946930
Int. a.3 H02P 5/06
U.S. a. 318—434 10 Qaims
10-
- Wi--
— * » ** — »-A,w-4-o onri rt
10
1. An apparatus for cleaning textile floor coverings, said
apparatus including a roller shaped brush, an electric motor for
rotating said roller shaped brush, and a suction device for
evacuating dirt and dust particles from said floor covering, said
motor connected to an alternating current supply and having a
load current passing therethrough and an adjustable rotational
speed, a circuit arranged in the load circuit of the motor to
4,394,607
CONTROL SYSTEMS FOR GATES AND THE LIKE
INCLUDING A MOTOR OVERLOAD MONITORING
aRCUIT
Rodger P. Lemirande, Riverview, Mich., assignor to Stanley
Automatic Openers, Detroit, Mich.
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,846
Int. a.3 H02P 1/16
U.S. a. 318—453 28 Qaims
1. Apparatus for controlling the current delivered through
an electrical motor, comprising:
means for producing a measured level of voltage proportion-
ate to the magnitude of current flowing through said
motor;
means for generating a first reference level of voltage;
means coupled with said producing means and said generat-
ing means for comparing the magnitude of said first refer-
ence level of voltage with said measured level of voltage
and for producing a first output signal when said measured
level exceeds said first reference level;
means for generating a second reference level of voltage;
means for comparing the magnitude of said second reference
level of voltage .with said measured level of voltage and
for producing a second output signal when said measured
level exceeds said second reference level; and,
means responsive to either of said first and second output
signals for interrupting delivery of electrical current to
said motor.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1221
4,394,608
Kf ACHINE TOOL TRAaNG SYSTEM
Robert E. Tryber, and George A. Hoffman, both of Racine, Wis.,
assignors to Gettys Manufacturing Co., Inc., Racine, Wis.
Filed Nov. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 208,698
Int. a.3 G05B 19 /i6
U.S. a. 318—578 8 Oaims
tronic counter; a set value provision connected to said compar-
ison circuit and providing preset setting values, said compari-
son circuit comparing the results of counting with values pro-
vided by said set value provision to obtain a deviation signal; a
device for reversal of a direction of rotation of the motor
connected to said comparison circuit and to said recognition
circuit and providing for reversal of direction of rotation of the
motor upon appropriate deviation signal; gate means con-
nected to the set value provision and to said device for reversal
and providing a gate signal; and a motor control circuit con-
nected to the motor and to the gate means and operative for
controlling the final control element by employing the gate
signal.
1. A control system wherein a stylus traces a contour around
a template, and wherein the template moves relative to the
stylus in response to deflection of the stylus by moving contact
with the template, comprising means for detecting a rate of
change of the deflection angle of the stylus from said template,
and means for producing a signal for controlling the magnitude
of the velocity of said template relative to said stylus in re-
sponse to the rate of change of deflection angle.
4,394,609
CONTROL PROVISION OPERATION FOR PRINTING
MACHINES
Max Jaaicki; Hans-Georg Liefke; Reinhart Keil, and Gerd
Geyer, all of Leipzig, German Democratic Rep., assignors to
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz", Leipzig, Ger-
man Democratic Rep.
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,703
Oaims priority, application German Democratic Rep., Apr.
10, 1980, 220348
Int. C1.3 G05B 19/28
U.S. a. 318—603 13 Qaims
1. Control provision for final control elements of a printing
machine wherein a rotatable final control element is driven by
a motor, comprising a pulse generating disk attached to the
final control element of the printing machine and axially cen-
tered therewith, said disk having recesses regularly spaced
from the axis; sensing means having two sensing points dis-
posed at a radial distance from the axis suitable for engaging
the recesses of the disk, said sensing means sensing the position
of the recesses at said two sensing pwints; a recognition circuit
connected to said sensing means and processing signals coming
from said sensing means for recognizing the rotary direction of
the final control element; an electronic counter connected to
said recognition circuit and counting signals provided by said
sensing means; a comparison circuit connected to the elec-
4,394,610
ADAPTIVE REFERENCE VOLTAGE GENERATOR FOR
HRING ANGLE CONTROL OF LINE-COMMUTATED
INVERTERS
Carlisle R. Dolland, Torrance, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 291,131
Int. Q\} H02P 5/i4
U.S. CI. 318—803 6 Qaims
1. Apparatus for generating an adaptive reference voltage
for use as a firing angle control signal in a system for control of
a line-commutated inverter using information from integrated
back EMF signals from a high speed multiphase permanent
magnet motor comprising
means of combining 120° segments of said integrated back
EMF signals symmetrical about their maxima of one po-
larity into a composite wavform, and
means for sampling said maxima of said composite wave-
form and holding each maximum until the next sampling,
thereby generating a voltage to be used as a reference for
comparison with said integrated back EMF signals for
control of the firing angle of said inverter that is propor-
tional to the amplitude of said integrated back EMF sig-
nals, whereby any change in amplitude of said integrated
back EMF signals will not effect a change in the operating
power factor of said motor and inverter.
1222
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,611
METHOD FOR CHARGING A STORAGE BATTERY
William H. Fallon, Qeveland; William R. Schober, Avon Lake,
both of Ohio; Edward O. Neukirch, and Donald W. Kirby,
both of Reading, Fa., assignors to General Battery Corpora-
tion, Reading, Fa.
FUed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,341
Int. aJ H02J 7/00
U.S. a. 320—21 21 Claims
first and second comparison means for terminating charg-
ing of said cells by disabling said charging means,
whereby fast charging is terminated only if the trough volt-
age exceeds said reference voltage during a time period
when the charging voltage is below said selected value.
3. The circuit according to claim 1 or claim 2 further includ-
ing thermostatic contacts in thermal relation with said cells,
said contacts opening if the temperature of the cells exceeds a
selected value thereby to terminate fast charging.
B«TTt»» cni,'
■I
-—r~
> — • — - — ■
■ 1
1
20
CNM3ER
'•
S "^ VOLTAGE
<»F&ulATC<»
,3* ' ,"•0
COoNTeR'
ttMER
4,394,613
FULL-CHARGE INDICATOR FOR BATTERY CHARGERS
Steven W. Cole, Covina, Calif., assignor to California Institute
of Technology, Pasadena, Calif.
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 225,961
Int. a.3 H02J 7/W; GOIR 19/165
U.S. a. 320—48 8 Qaims
1. A method for charging a storage battery, the method
comprising:
a. charging the battery at a first rate during a first portion of
a charging cycle;
b. charging the battery at a second rate, lower than the first
rate, during a second portion of the charging cycle; and
c. periodically interrupting the charging, at fixed, timed
intervals, during the second portion of the charging cycle;
d. wherein the interruption of the charging cycle defines a
duty cycle wherein approximately one sixth of the charg-
ing cycle is interrupted during the second portion of the
charging cycle.
4,394,612
BATTERY CHARGING aRCUIT
Emil Emerle, Mount Prospect, and Alex F. Gawron, Park Ridge,
both of 111., assignors to Skil Corporation, Chicago, 111.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,891
Int. a.3 H02J 7/04
U.S. a. 320—31 8 Qaims
5. In a battery charger, a circuit for protecting the battery
from being overcharged, comprising
control means in the charging current path for providing less
than a preselected voltage drop thereacross when the
charging current level is less than a known level which is
related to full-charge battery state,
a resistive network connected between a conductor along
which current is conducted into said battery and a source
of reference potential for said battery,
a transistor switch having its base-emitter junction con-
nected across said control means to switch from one con-
duction state to a second state when the voltage drop
across said control means is less than said preselected
voltage drop, and
switching means for reducing the resistance provided by
said network when the voltage across said control means
is less than said preselected voltage drop, said switching
means comprising a photocoupler responsive to said tran-
sistor switch to emit light when said transistor switch is
switched to said second state and a photocoupler transis-
tor connected in parallel with a portion of said resistive
network,
whereby light from said photocoupler activates said
photocoupler transistor to reduce the resistance provided
by said network.
1. A circuit for controlling fast charging of battery cells to
prevent damage to said cells comprising:
(a) charging means for producing a rectified charging volt-
age and applying said charging voltage to said cells,
(b) first comparison means for detecting when the charging
voltage is at or below a selected value corresponding to a
minimum trough voltage value and producing an output
indicative thereof,
(c) second comparison means for detecting when the trough
voltage of said cells exceeds a reference voltage corre-
sponding to the full charge value of said cells and produc-
ing an output indicative thereof,
(d) means responsive only to the combined outputs of said
4,394,614
STATIC VAR GENERATORS
Michael B. Brennen, Wilkins Township, Allegheny County;
Laszlo Gyugyi, and Eric J. Stacey, both of Penn Hills Town-
ship, Allegheny County, all of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Sep. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 302,349
Int. Q\} H02J i/18
U.S. a. 323— 210 2 Claims
1. A static VAR generator, comprising:
(a) a capacitive current means disposed for connection into
an AC network;
(b) a monitoring means connected to said AC network for
July 19,
983
ELECTRICAL
1223
monitoring the capactive current requirement of the AC
network;
(c) a control means connected to said capacitive current
means and said monitoring means for causing connection
of said capacitive current means into said AC network in
response to the reactive requirements of said AC network;
■>f\
(d) switching means for connecting said capacitive current
means into said AC network; and
(e) an auxiliary shutdown means for allowing said switching
means to disconnect said capacitive current means from
the AC network without causing restriking transients in
the event of failure of said monitoring means or said con-
trol means.
4,394,615
APPARATUS FOR TESTING THE QUALITY OF THE
GROUND CONNECTION AND THE INSULATION
QUALITY IN AN ELECTRICAL HAND TOOL OR THE
LIKE
Joseph A. Rocci, Jr., 12243 S. 71st Ave., Palos Heights, 111.
60463
I Filed Mar. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 128,499
I ' Int. a.3 GOIR il/02. 31/12
U.S. a. 324—51 4 Oaims
1. Apparatus for testing the quality of a ground connection
between the plug of an electrical hand tool or the like and the
tool housing, said apparatus comprising
a rectangular enclosure of molded plastic non-conductive
construction and having a flat plate of conductive metallic
construction secured to said enclosure as a first flat exter-
nal wall of said rectangular enclosure,
an electrical plug including at least first and second prongs
rigidly carried by and projecting outwardly from a second
wall of said enclosure other than said first wall and
adapted to be received into first and second power recep-
tacles of a utility power outlet,
a three-receptacle electrical outlet carried by a third wall of
said enclosure other than said first and second walls and
adapted to receive a said tool plug having three prongs,
with one of said three prongs being a tool ground prong
and one of said three receptacles being a ground recepta-
cle for receiving said tool ground prong,
first electrical circuit means disposed within said enclosure
and connected to said first and second prongs for receiv-
ing electrical power and to said ground receptacle and
said plate, said first circuit means being responsive to
electrical resistance between a tool housing in physical
contact with said plate and the ground prong of a tool
plug received in said three-receptacle outlet,
said first circuit means, said enclosure including said plate
and said three-receptacle outlet being electrically isolated
from utility ground at said utility power outlet,
second circuit means disposed within said enclosure and
connected to said first and second prongs for receiving
electrical power, to said plate and to both receptacles in
said three-receptacle outlet other than said ground recep-
tacle, said second circuit means being responsive to elec-
trical resistance between a tool housing in physical
contact with said plate and prongs of a tool plug other
than the ground prong,
first indicating means visibly disposed on said enclosure and
responsive to said first circuit means for indicating the
quality of a ground connection within a said tool between
the tool plug and the tool housing, and
second indicating means separate from said first indicating
means visibly disposed on said enclosure and responsive to
said second circuit means for indicating the quality of
insulation within the tool between the said other prongs
and the tool housing,
said first and second circuit means being connected to said
prongs, said plate and said receptacles in said three-recep-
tacle outlet to operate independently of each other for
indicating the quality of said ground connection and the
quality of said insulation independently of each other.
4,394,616
CABLE BREAK LOCATOR
Edward M. Browne, and Miles A. Smither, both of Houston,
Tex., assignors to Geosource Inc.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,636
Int. a.J GOIR 31/08. 11/52
U.S. a. 324—52 8 Qaims
trrrr::
1 1 1
Z.-a
> V
1. A method of determining the location of a break in a given
pair of wires in a multi-pair cable, comprising the steps of:
(a) shorting one wire of the given pair and all other wires in
the cable to ground;
(b) applying a variable frequency AC current source across
the given pair to develop an AC voltage across the given
pair;
(c) multiplying the AC voltage developed across the given
pair by a second AC signal, which has a quadrature phase
relationship to the AC current source to form a product
1224
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
signal having a DC component proportional to the quad-
rature component of the AC voltage across the given pair;
and
(d) comparing the DC component of said product signal to
a reference signal, said reference signal having a value
which is inversely proportional to the capacitance of an
unbroken pair.
4,394,618
DIGITAL TRACKING PHASE METER
Viktor P. Maiko, Gelendzhik, U.S.S.R., assignor to Juzhnoe
ProizTodstvennoe Obiedinenie Po Morskim Geologoraz-
vedochnym Rabotam "JUZHMORGEOLOGIA", Gelend-
zhik, U.S.S.R.
Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 236,110
Int. a.3 GOIR 25/00
U.S. a. 324—83 D 1 Claim
Harrow pulie
shaper
4,394,617
SWEPT-DIP PROBE
E. Lawrence Wampler, 6708 Bostwick Dr., Springfield, Fairfax
County, Va. 22151
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 298,657
Int. C\? GOIR 27/00
U.S. a. 324—57 Q 6 Claims
>i I
1. A probe comprising a detachable coupling link acting as a
primary winding of a transformer, a secondary is formed by
the network-under-test coupling inductance; one terminal of
the primary is series connected to a diode, the second terminal
of the primary winding is connected to the outer conductor of
a coaxial transmission line; the second terminal of the diode is
connected to the center conductor of the coaxial transmission
line; the purpose of the diode is to couple rectified r.f energy
to the primary winding of the transformer and to rectify the r.f
energy for measurement of the circuit resonance parameter;
the coaxial transmission line center conductor and the first
diode junction are connected to a second diode; the second
diode, rectifies the r.f energy in phase opposition to the first
diode, the opposite terminal of the second diode is connected
to the outer conductor of the coaxial transmission line; an
analog signal that is a net result of the rectification by the two
diodes is carried by the transmission line to the r.f energy-
analog signal combiner /separator; the input to the combiner/-
separator is the r.f energy source and the output is the analog
signal representation of the resonance response curve that is a
frequency function of the network-under-test; the analog sig-
nal is displayed by a suitable display device with radio fre-
quency on one axis, driven by the frequency sweep analog
waveform and on the other axis is the network response func-
tion driven by the probe analog waveform, a result of probe
coupling to the network-under-test; and,
including a r.f frequency-analog signal combiner/separator
for processing the signals and comprised of an r.f input
connection, a r.f signal output, coupled to the probe
coaxial cable center conductor through a d.c. blocking
capacitor; the coaxial cable center conductor is also con-
nected to an r.f. choke first end, and the r.f choke second
end is connected to the display device, the display device
end of the r.f choke, the second end, is connected to a r.f
bypass capacitor; the opposite end of the r.f bypass capac-
itor is connected to the common circuit point of the sys-
tem, thus forming a lowpass filter.
Hji-
.St^itcfi
Count pulse
generator
Putse counter
Cjitrol I'uLse
Hi stn tutor
' /nvi
r /
1
^ S :
Suitcn
I Phase CkcU integer
I rersrsme cuutter —
1. A digital tracking phase meter, comprising:
a narrow pulse shaper, the input of which serves as a first
input of said digital tracking phase meter to which square
signals are applied, and the output of which shapes pulses
corresponding to the leading edge of said input signal;
a first switch, the first input of which is connected to said
output of said narrow pulse shaper, with said first switch
incorporating a second input and an output;
a pulse counter comprising an input, a countdown input, an
output, with said input connected to said output of said
first switch;
a count pulse generator, the output of which is connected to
said countdown input of said pulse counter;
a control pulse distributor incorporating a first input serving
as a second input of said digital tracking phase meter to
which said input square pulses are applied, a second input
connected to said output of said pulse counter, and first
and second outputs;
a phase cycle fraction reversible counter incorporating
countup and countdown inputs connected respectively to
said first and second outputs of said control pulse distribu-
tor, a first data output connected to said second input of
said first switch, and second and third outputs;
a second switch included in said control pulse distributor
and furnished with a first input which is said first input of
said distributor, a second input which serves as said sec-
ond input of said distributor, and said output serves as a
first output of said distributor;
an inverter included in said control pulse distributor and
furnished with an input connected to said first input of said
second switch and an output;
a third switch included in said control pulse distributor and
furnished with a first input connected to said output of
said inverter, with a second input connected to said sec-
ond input of said second switch, and with an output serv-
ing as said second output of said distributor; and
a phase cycle integer reversible counter incorporating
countup and countdown inputs connected to said second
and third outputs of said phase cycle fraction reversible
counter, respectively.
4,394,619
HALL PROBE WITH AUTOMATIC CONNECONG
MEANS
Martin Gschwandtner, Hof bei Salzburg, Austria, assignor to
Vereinigte Metallwerke Ranshofen-Bemdorf Aktiengesell-
schaft, Braunau am Inn, Austria
FUed Oct. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 193,667
Claims priority, application Austria, Oct. 5, 1979, 6513/79
Int a.3 GOIR 79/00
U.S. a. 324—117 H 6 Claims
1. In an electrolysis system in which a current carrier is
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1225
connected between a current source and an electrode, a device
for monitoring the amplitude of the current in said carrier, said
device comprising:
a Hall generator;
means for mounting said Hall generator on said carrier;
a direct current source connected to said Hall generator for
energizing same;
gggygmn i
an amplifier and discriminator circuit connected to said Hall
generator and responsive to an output thereof represent-
ing a magnetic field around said carrier;
a display connected to said amplifier and discriminator cir-
cuit for displaying the current in said carrier; and
means for automatically connecting said source upon the
mounting of said Hall generator on said carrier.
spondingly aligned recesses in their front edges to define a
notch in said body, said alignment plate having laterally
disposed lower channels formed in its top surface and
straddling said notch, said cover plate having upper chan-
nels formed in its bottom surface in mirror-image relation
to said lower channels,
electrically conductive spring-loaded pins interposed be-
tween said alignment plate and said cover plate and lo-
cated in cooperatively mating ones of said upper and
lower channels, each of said pins having a movable end
projecting beyond said body and a spring end fixed in said
body, and
means for holding said body and said test field in juxtaposed
relation to enable each said movable end to contact one of
said test points, said means for holding interposed between
said bottom plate and said alignment plate and including:
rotatable first and second fingers, each having a hooked
end disposed within said notch and arranged to coopera-
tively grasp said protuberance; and a spring adapted to
exert rotational force proximate the back ends of said
fingers to cause each said hooked end to engage said
protuberance.
4,394,621
ELECTRONIC VELOOTY MEASUREMENT
ESPEOALLV FOR SELF-CLOCKING WRITE HEAD
James E. Roben, Mint Hill, N.C., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,319
Int. a.^ GOIP 3/46. 3/52
U.S. a. 324—163 2 Qaims
4,394,620
ELECTRICAL ACCESS TOOL FOR ENGAGING
RECESSED TEST POINTS
Anthony R. Montalto, Edison; Louis J. Scerbo, Succasunna, and
Jeremla P. Starace, Randolph Township, Morris County, all
of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorpo-
rated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 78,960, Sep. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,298,239.
This application May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,662
int. a.3 GOIR 1/067; HOIR 13/00, 13/516
U.S. a. 324—149 4 Qaims
1. Velocity measuring apparatus for producing an electrical
measurement of the velocity of an object having at least one
magnetically sensible mark thereon, wherein the improvement
comprises:
an induced current magnetic field sensing device,
a variable resistance magnetic field sensing device,
means supporting said devices closely adjacent, one to an-
other, for encountering said mark during substantially the
same state of relative motion with respect to said object,
' and
means responsive to a signal output from each of said de-
vices for producing said electrical measurement.
1. A t^t tool for accessing test points in a field having a
protuberance serving to interlock said tool with said field, said
tool
characterized by
a layered body comprising a bottom plate, an alignment
plate and a cover plate, each said plate formed with corre-
4,394,622
HIGH VOLTAGE COAXIAL SWTTCH
John P. Rink, Los Alamos, N. Mex. (granted to U.S. Depart-
ment of Energy under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
FUed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,457
Int. a.^ HOI J 77/00, 25/34
U.S. a. 377—115 12 Claims
1. A high voltage coaxial switch comprising:
a circular cross-sectioned cylindrical cathode;
a thin walled hollow circular cross-sectional cylindrical
inner electrode coaxially surrounding said cathode;
a hollow circular cross-sectional cylindrical outer electrode
coaxially surrounding said inner electrode;
means for facilitating evacuation of the region between said
cathode and said inner electrode;
1226
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
means for facilitating provision of a gas to the region be-
tween said inner electrode and said outer electrode;
means for providing a high voltage charge to said outer
electrode;
means for connecting a load to said inner electrode;
and
means for providing a high voltoge pulse between said cath-
4,394,624
CHANNELIZED FEED-FORWARD SYSTEM
Ronald M. Bauman, Washington, D.C., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,760
Int. a.3 H03F 1/26
U.S. a. 330—151 23 Qaims
/9 35 m
ode and said inner electrode to cause electrons to be emit-
ted from said cathode and accelerated toward said inner
electrode with sufficient quantities of electrons passing
therethrough to cause secondary electron emission and a
volumetric discharge in the region between said inner
electrode and said outer electrode whereby a high voltage
charge on said outer electrode is discharged to said inner
electrode and through a load connected thereto.
4,394,623
RING CAVITY FOR A RAMAN CAPILLARY
WAVEGUIDE AMPLIHER
Norman A. Kumit, Santa Fe, N. Mex. (granted to U.S. Depart-
ment of Energy under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
Filed Jan. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 229,023
Int. C1.3 HOIS i/iO
U.S. a. 330—4.3 12 Qaims
COOlEO CAPilLAI**
ftCO-FQItWMD CMANNCt 13
' — {«
MMPLiNG MEANS M
EOUALIZMG WCANSj^
1. A feed-forward system for reducing the distortion gener-
ated by a device such as an amplifier, the feed-forward system
comprising:
a feed-forward channel including,
sampling means adapted to be connected to the device for
extracting a sample of the distortion products from the
output of the device in a frequency band whose band-
width is less than that of the device; and
equalizing means connected to the sampling means for
equalizing the sample and the products remaining in the
output of the device in the frequency band after extract-
ing the sample; and
combining means connected to the equalizing means and
adapted to be connected to the device for subtractively
combining the equalized sample and the remaining prod-
ucts to produce a system output in which distortion in the
frequency band is reduced.
4,394,625
SEMICONDUCTOR INTEGRATED aRCUIT DEVICE
Koichi Sakai, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Toko, Inc., Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 96,429, Nov. 21, 1979. This application
Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,854
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 6, 1978, 53/151231;
Mar. 28, 1979, 54/40157
Int. a.3 H03F i/30
U.S. a. 330—267 16 Qaims
1. A ring cavity for a Stokes injected Raman capillary wave-
guide amplifier system comprising:
Raman capillary waveguide amplifier means for Raman
scattering CO2 laser radiation by rotational states of a
diatomic molecular gas;
external Stokes radiation source means aligned for injecting
an external Stokes signal into said Raman capillary wave-
guide amplifier means such that said external Stokes signal
coprogpagtes with said CO2 laser radiation and whereby
said external Stokes signal reduces the gain required in
said Raman capillary waveguide amplifier to generate an
amplified Stokes signal;
means for injecting a portion of said amplified Stokes signal
back into said Raman capillary waveguide amplifier
means in the same direction as said external Stokes signal
to extend the effective duration of said external Stokes
signal and to extract additional energy from said CO2 laser
radiation.
1. A semiconductor integrated circuit device comprising a
power amplifier circuit including a vertical type FN? transis-
tor and a first NPN transistor which are formed in a common
semiconductor substrate, the output stage of said power ampli-
fier circuit comprising a complementary symmetrical circuit
wherein an output terminal is led out of the connection point
between the collector of said vertical type PNP transistor and
the collector of said first NPN transistor, a d.c. power source
is connected between said emitter of said vertical type PNP
transistor and the emitter of said first NPN transistor, and
wherein at least one of the transistors constituting said comple-
mentary symmetrical circuit forms a current mirror circuit
together with an additional transistor.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1227
4,394,626
PHASE SYNCHRONIZING CIRCUIT
Hiroshi Karihara, Tokyo; Sadao Takenaka, Yokohama, and Eiji
Itaya, Kamakura, all of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited,
Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,847
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 29, 1979, 54-154554
Int. C1.J H03L im
U.S. a. 331—12 14 Qaims
COMBINER -o'
1. A phase synchronizing circuit comprising:
an input terminal;
a voltage-controlled oscillator (VCO) having an output and
an input;
first and second phase detectors, each operatively connected
to said input terminal and to said output of said VCO;
first and second low-pass filters, each of said filters having an
input connected to a corresponding one of said first and
second phase detectors, and an output, said first low-pass
filter operatively connected to said input of said VCO,
whereby the output of said first low-pass filter is applied
to control the frequency of said VCO;
first and second multipliers, respectively, operatively con-
nected to said first and second low-pass filters, each of said
multipliers also being operatively connected to said output
of said VCO;
adder means, operatively connected to said first and second
multipliers, for providing an output signal of a linear
combination of the outputs of said respective multipliers;
an output terminal, connected to receive said output signal
of said adder means; and
at least one three-terminal phase shifting means, operatively
connected between said first and second phase detectors
and said VCO, and between said first and second multipli-
ers and said VCO, in such relation that said first and
second phase detectors operate in an orthogonal relation
with respect to the input signal received at said input
terminal, and in such relation that said output signal of said
adder means is synchronous with the signal received at
said input terminal.
4,394,627
AUDIOMETER WITH PHOTO SENSITIVE, DIGITALLY
TUNABLE LOW DISTORTION OSCILLATOR
Gerd- Wolfgang Gotze, and Manfred Miiller, both of Berlin, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stutt-
gart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,107
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep, of Germany, Mar. 26,
1980, 3011651
Int. a.3 H03B 5/20
U.S. a. 331—66 8 Qaims
1. Audiometer having a low distortion, reproducible tunable
oscillator including
an oscillator circuit (10);
a pluraHty of resistors (11-14; 15-18) in the oscillator circuit;
a like plurality of electronic switches (19', 192... 19/1. 20',
20^ . . . 20"), one, each, connected in series with the respec-
tive resistor,
the connection pattern of the switches determining the oper-
ating frequency of the oscillator circuit;
and an opto-electronic switch control means providing
binary digital output signals to said switches to control
selective closing thereof and hence placing selected resis-
tors in the oscillator circuit,
wherein the opto-electronic control means comprises a
source of light (23-28);
a plurality of light responsive elements (30-35);
and a movable selective light transmission-blocking masking
means having selective openings permitting light transmis-
3 n
r> ■
39
3»
J' " •] 3 J 3 , -J a 3 ]
e" b' 19' x/xf xf
3) \ «
sion between said light source and the light responsive
elements, selectively, in accordance with the positioning
of said openings and the blocking means with respect to
the light responsive elements, to determine the tuning
frequency of the oscillator in accordance with the position
of the masking means, and for shifting the tuning fre-
quency upon shifting of the masking means, free from
switching clicks.
4,394,628
MODULATION SYSTEMS
Donald S. Banks, Wellesley Hill, Mass., assignor to Raytheon
Company, Lexington, Mass.
Filed Feb. 2, 1962, Ser. No. 172,054
Int. a.i H03C 7/00
U.S. CI. 332—19 5 Qaims
.CVlATlOK
X ^
PHASE I 1
SHiflEt- /■ \
' ' Icav.tt! ,«• . ^ , M
V
1 MI«E><
■ PHASt
Pf TtC'OR
1. Apparatus for deviating the frequency of a carrier signal
in accordance with the frequency deviations of an intermediate
frequency signal comprising:
modulator means for varying the frequency of said carrier
signal is accordance with a modulating signal;
first mixer means for providing sum and difference fre-
quency signals of the product of the modulated carrier
signal and the frequency deviating intermediate frequency
signal;
filter means coupled to said mixer means and resonant at a
predetermined one of said sum and difference frequency
signals for providing a carrier control signal having a
phase error component proportional to the deviation of
said predetermined one of said sum and difference signals
from its predetermined value;
second mixer means for mixing said carrier control signal
with said modulated carrier signal to produce an interme-
diate frequency control signal having a phase error com-
ponent proportional to the deviation of said predeter-
mined one of said sum and difference signals from its
predetermined value; and
means for comparing said intermediate frequency control
1228
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
signal with said frequency deviating intermediate fre-
quency signal to provide said modulating signal.
4,394,629
HYBRID POWER DIVIDER/COMBINER aRCUIT
Mahesh Kumar, South Brunswick; Raymond J. Menna, Plains-
boro, and Ho-Chung Huang, West Windsor, all of N.J., as-
signors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,609
Int a.3 HOIP 5/18
U.S. a. 333—109 6 Oaims
4,394,631
RADIO FREQUENCY CHOKE AND METHOD OF USE
John C. PavUc, Pleasant Gap, Pa., assignor to C-Cor Electron-
ics, Inc., State College, Pa.
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,361
Int a.5 H03H 7/46. 7/09
U.S. a. 333—132 14 Claims
J
1. A power divider comprising in combination:
first, second and third quadrature hybrids, each having a pair
of input ports and a pair of output ports, one of said output
ports of said first hybrid being connected to one of said
input ports of said second hybrid, said output ports of said
second hybrid being directly connected to the input ports
of said third hybrid for causing a signal passing through
the combination of said second and third hybrids to ex-
hibit a propagation delay L and a fixed relative to fre-
quency 90° phase shift; and
a transmission line exhibiting a propagation delay L having
no fixed relative to frequency phase shift coupled to the
other output port of said first hybrid.
4,394,630
COMPENSATED DIRECTIONAL COUPLER
Kenyon, S. Wayne, Manlius; Bernard H. Geyer, Jr., Liverpool,
and Conrad E. Nelson, Camillus, all of N.Y., assignors to
General Electric Company, Syracuse, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,519
Int. a.3 HOIP 5/J8
U.S. a. 333—116 21 Claims
60
*~
L2
72.
V
•4 I I » 76 •♦— -i» 76
_rLri_rLnL.
-70
.64
66
62
s
W2 _^6e
74
4
t.„T^I ' '.^A^' \ ^
7^
11. A signal distribution passive unit comprising,
an input terminal for receiving an input signal including a
radio frequency input signal and an AC power input sig-
nal,
a first output terminal and a second output terminal for
transmitting a first output signal and a second output
signal, said first and second output signals being matched
to said input signal,
transformer means for receiving said radio frequency input
signal to direct said radio frequency input signal to said
first and second output terminals,
said transformer means being connected to said input termi-
nal and said first and second output terminals,
choke means for separating said radio frequency input signal
from said AC power input signal to prevent said AC'
power input signal from being transmitted to said trans-
former means,
said choke means being connected to said input terminal and
to said first and second output terminals to by-pass said
transformer means, and
said choke means including an inductor coil having a resistor
connected in series with said coil to present a high impe-
dance to the inductance of said coil and reduce the series
resonance in the coil and thereby prevent reductions in
the magnitude of said AC power input signal for a broad-
band of radio frequencies.
4,394,632
MILLIMETER-WAVE ODD HARMONIC FREQUENCY
MULTIPLIER
Chi P. Hu, Santa Barbara, Calif., assignor to Honeywell Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,815
Int. a.3 HOIP 1/20
VJS. a. 333—218 12 Qaims
1. A directional coupler comprising:
a dielectric substrate having two major parallel op]X>sing
faces;
a pair of spaced elongate electrodes disposed on one major
face of said substrate and defining a coupling region there-
between extending along at least a part of their respective
lengths; each of said electrodes comprising a comb elec-
trode comprising an elongate bus bar extending in a gener-
ally longitudinal direction and a plurality of spaced teeth
attached to said bus bar in the area of said coupling region
and extending generally transverse to said bus bar in the
direction away from the other of said electrodes; and
a conductor supporting said substrate.
1. A millimeter-wave odd-harmonic frequency multiplier
comprising:
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1229
(a) a block member of metallic material, said member having
a main surface and a top surface at an angle to said main
surface,
(b) a wave-guide RF output port extending from said main
surface part way through said member, said port having a
rectangular cross-section of constant width and with a
first portion of said port adjacent to said main surfaces
having a height selected in accordance with the desired
frequency output of said multiplier and the remainder of
said port having a height substantially reduced from that
of said first portion,
(c) an RF input port extending from said top surface through
said block member to connect with said remainder of said
wave-guide port,
(d) low pass filter means insulatively positioned in said input
port, and
(e) a pair of anti-parallel diodes positioned at the junction of
said remainder of said wave-guide output port and said
RF input port,
whereby said multiplier functions, upon a millimeter-wave
signal of a base frequency being applied to said RF input port,
to produce an output signal at said RF output port of an odd-
harmonic of said base frequency.
said ground plane to form a lower ground plane for each
high Q region, said cover being separated from the micro-
strip circuitry of each high Q region by said dielectric
layer and an air pocket.
4,394,634
VAPOR COOLED CURRENT LEAD FOR CRYOGENIC
ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
James H. Vansant, Tracy, Calif, (granted to U.S. Department of
Energy under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,918
Int. a.3 HOIF 7/22
U.S. a. 335—216 17 Claims
4,394,633
MICROSTRIP CIRCUIT WITH SUSPENDED
SUBSTRATE STRIPLINE REGIONS EMBEDDED
THEREIN
Gerald I. Klein, Baltimore, Md., assignor to Westinghouse Elec-
tric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,349
Int. a.5 HOIP 3/08
U.S. a. 333—238 11 Qaims
1. A microstrip microwave circuit having embedded therein
at least one suspended substrate stripline region for high Q
circuit elements, said microwave circuit comprising:
a ground plane having top and bottom surfaces;
a dielectric layer disposed on said top surface of said ground
plane;
a continuous microstrip circuit pattern disposed on the ex-
posed surface of said dielectric layer and having at least
one region for high Q circuit elements with at least one
interconnecting circuit path to the remaining microstrip
circuitry, said dielectric layer having channels through to
the top surface of said ground plane substantially encir-
cling said microstrip circuitry of each corresponding high
Q region except for portions of the dielectric layer which
support said interconnecting microstrip circuit paths
thereof;
said ground plane having the section substantially under-
neath each high Q region removed to form openings in the
bottom surface thereof;
a metallic housing for each high Q region to form an upper
ground plane covering the corresponding microstrip cir-
cuitry and separated therefrom by an air pocket, each
housing having sidewalls adapted for seating into the
dielectric channels of its high Q region to make physical
contact with the top surface of said ground plane, said
sidewalls of each housing including an opening for each
interconnecting microstrip circuit path for passage there-
through; and
a metallic cover for said openings in the bottom surface of
llW;^:^^^.
(,2
/
1. Apparatus for conducting electric current to and from
cryogenic electrical equipment, which comprises:
(a) a plurality of inner tubes, each having an inside end and
outside end, provided with internal conduits substantially
traversing the length of said tubes and penetrating said
inside and outside ends, said inner tubes being arranged
generally parallel to one another in substantially adjacent
relation and capable of conducting and transferring elec-
tric current and heat;
(b) a plurality of outer tubes substantially encasing said inner
tubes, said outer tubes having inside ends and outside ends
defining openings in themselves, said outer tubes being
capable of conducting and transferring electric current
and heat, and being in heat conducting and electricity
conducting communication with said inner tubes, said
inner tubes and other tubes together forming a plurality of
composite tubes;
(c) a sheath provided with an inside and outside end, defin-
ing a channel through itself which penetrates said inside
and outside ends, said sheath being mounted to encase said
plurality of composite tubes in a bundled arrangement
forming apparatus capable of conducting and transferring
electric current and heat;
(d) top and bottom block mounting means fitted to hold said
composite tubes, said mounting means being fixedly held
on said ends of said sheath in such relation that the combi-
nation of the sheath and mounting means define a chamber
capable of sealably holding said composite tubes, said
mounting means adapted to receive, conduct and transfer
electricity and heat, said sheath, mounting means and
composite tubes being combined for creating an electric
current lead;
(e) vent means, located toward said outside end of said
sheath, penetrating said sheath;
(0 cryogenic electrical equipment device, capable of being
operated by electric current;
(g) cryogenic cooling means, housed within and cooling said
device; and,
(h) means for connecting the inside end of said current lead
to said device, so said internal conduits of said composite
tubes are in fluid communication with said cooling means
so said cooling means is free to move from the inside of
1230
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said device through said internal conduits of said compos-
ite tubes toward said outside end, emerging through said
vent means and said outside ends of said composite tubes,
cooling said composite tubes and said current lead as the
cooling means travels from said inside end toward said
outside end and vent means.
clamp means encompassing the core parts and clamping the
E-shaped core parts in engagement with each other and the
4,394,635
METHOD FOR DETERMINING DISSOLVED GAS
CONCENTRATIONS IN DIELECTRIC COOLANTS
Stephen D. Foss, Pittsfield, Mass., assignor to General Electric
Company, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,902
Int. a.J HOIF 27m
U.S. a. 336—55 12 Qaims
2S 23
2. A gas-insulated transformer comprising:
a transformer tank containing a noncondensable gas for use
as a dielectric insulating medium;
a plurality of transformer windings arranged around a trans-
former core within said tank;
a plurality of tubes extending through said windings and
containing a liquid coolant for cooling said winding dur-
ing transformer operation;
piping means connecting with said coolant tubes and with a
heat exchanger for carrying said coolant to said heat
exchanger and removing heat from said coolant;
a sight glass connected with said piping means for observing
a sample of said coolant within said piping means;
a pressure indicating means connected with said piping
means for determining said coolant pressure;
heater means in thermal contact with said sight glass for
heating said coolant to cavitation within said sight glass;
and
temperature indicating means thermally proximate said sight
glass for indicating the temperature of coolant within said
sight glass.
^4
lOb K3c lOd
I-shaped core part in engagement with the back of said one of
the E-shaped core parts.
4,394,637
WOUND BOBBIN COIL APPARATUS
Jose O. G. Petroons, Beersel, Belgium, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,194
Int. OJ HOIF 15/10
U.S. a. 336—192 5 Qaims
/, /
lVl<^>''-.
4,394,636
STRUCTURE OF A TRANSFORMER
Imaizumi Hiraku, Shisui, and Mitsui Tadashi, Tokyo, both of
Japan, assignors to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 1, 1981, Ser. No. 259,704
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1980, 55*63047[U]
Int. a.^ HOIF 27/26. 27/30
U.S. a. 336—172 4 Claims
1. A transformer comprising two E-shaped core parts, each
having a back from one side of which projects at right angles
thereto three spaced-apart legs, positioned with the extremities
of the legs abutting such as to defme a center leg and a leg at
either side thereof between the backs of the E-shaped core
parts, a sjhx)! on which is wound a coil positioned on the center
leg and an I-shaped core part of a length and breadth corre-
sponding to the length and breadth of the backs of the E-
shaped core parts positioned in engagement with the back of
one of the E-shaped core parts, means defining an open groove
at the interfaces exclusively in one of said interfaces, a coil
wound on the I-shaped core part, the windings of which are
received in said groove and a C-shaped, elastically-engageable
1. A wound bobbin coil apparatus which comprises:
a coil form having a generally cylindrical surface having
disposed at respective axial extremeties thereof first and
second generally circular side flanges;
said coil form including first and second generally L-shaped
cooperating locking members extending respectively from
said first and second generally circular side flanges, said
locking members including means for locking engagement
therebetween and including means for engaging a plural-
ity of associated wires, «aid L-shaped locking members
having at least one face thereof having a plurality of up-
standing bosses disposed thereon in spaced relationship to
allow entrance of termination wires therebetween.
4,394,638
MINIATURE PLUG-IN FUSE ASSEMBLY AND METHOD
OF MAKING A FUSE ELEMENT THEREFOR
Sucha S. Sian, Southfield, Mich., assignor to Essex Group, Inc.,
Fort Wayne, Ind.
Filed Jul. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 400,569
Int. C1.5 HOIH 85/22
U.S. a. 337—264 8 Qaims
1. A plug-in fuse assembly of the type comprising a housing
formed of insulation material and a one-piece composite fuse
element formed of fuse sheet metal and secured to said hous-
ing, said fuse element having two laterally spaced generally
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1231
parallel conductive terminal prong portions and a fuse link
portion of substantially smaller cross sectional area than said
terminal prong portions extending transversely between said
terminal prong portions, said fuse assembly being characterised
in that:
each of said terminal prong portibns comprises a tubular
^ body having an annular wall with contiguous edges
thereof defining a longitudinally extending seam, each of
4,394,640
SAFE MERGING SYSTEM USING SHORT PULSE
SIGNAL REFLECTOMERTY
Gerald F. Ross, Lexington, Mass., assignor to Sperry Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,504
Int. a.' G08G 1/12
U.S. a. 340—23 8 Qaims
said tubular bodies having a forward contacting section
adapted for insertion into a conductive receptacle contact
and an integral retention section rearward of said contact-
ing section, said terminal prong portions being formed
with said seams in a generally coplanar relation and facing
each other, said fuse link portion extending laterally from
said retention sections proximate respective seams thereof;
said retention sections and said fuse link portion being
secured within said housing.
4,394,639
PRINTED CIRCUIT FUSE ASSEMBLY
James D. McGalliard, 11171 Fenwick PI., Santa Ana, Calif.
92705
Division of Ser. No. 970,632, Dec. 18, 1978, Pat. No. 4,296,398.
This application May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,704
Int. Q.' HOIH 85/04
U.S. CI. 337—292 4 Claims
A
_t- i>^-.' ig
^y
1. In an electrical device having a printed circuit board
including a plurality of electrical components, such as a resis-
tor, capacitor, integrated circuit, or the like, which are com-
bined to form a printed circuit, an improved fuse assembly
comprising:
a conventional fuse having a predetermined current rating
electrically connected to said printed circuit;
a thin printed fuse element having a predetermined fuse
rating higher than said rating of said conventional fuse
formed integral with said printed circuit and connected in
series with said conventional fuse; and
said thin fuse element, upon burn-out, providing a perma-
nent record on said circuit board of consumer mis-use of
said electrical device caused by the bypass or improper
replacement of said conventional fuse.
1. A system for determining distance to and speed of vehi-
cles travelling in each of a multiplicity of merging guideways
comprising:
means paralleling each of said merging guideways for the
propagation of short electromagnetic pulses;
means coupled to said propagation means at a fixed prese-
lected location for generating first electromagnetic pulses
of short duration;
. means on board each of said vehicles responsive to said first
electromagnetic pulses for coupling second electromag-
netic pulses of short duration to said propagation means
for transmission towards said fixed location;
means coupled to said propagation means substantially at
said preselected location for receiving said second electro-
magnetic piiKf's and for providing signals representative
thereot; and
means coupled to receive said representative signals for
determining distances from said fixed location to and
speed of a preselected number of said vehicles.
4,394,641
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR CODING BINARY DATA
AND A DEVICE DECODING CODED DATA
Max Artigalas, Puis, France, assignor to Tbomson-CSF, Paris,
France
Filed Oct. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 192,940
Claims priority, application France, Oct. 1, 1979, 79 24419
Int. Q.' H03K 13/24
U.S. Q. 340—347 DD 5 Qaims
1. A device for preparing an input signal for transmission,
said input signal having a sequence of groups selected from a
set of all possible groups, each of said groups having n binary
digits having a repetition frequency of F, comprising:
a parallel-read series-write memory register having one
input for receiving the input signal and n outputs for
delivering simultaneously the n bits of each group;
first memory means having n address inputs coupled respec-
tively to the n outputs of said memory register and 2n
outputs for delivering respectively, one word of an associ-
ated pair of a plurality of pairs ot > ords. each of said pairs
being uniquely associated with one possible output of said
1232
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
memory register, respectively, each of said words having
n bits of a "0" state and n bits of a "1" state and a repetition
frequency of 2F, each of the bits of said words being
adjacent to a bit having the same state except end bits of
said words which can be adjacent to a bit in said word of
opposite state, one word of each of said pairs being a
complement of the other word of each of said pairs;
a first parallel-read/write memory register means having 2n
inputs coupled to the outputs of said first memory means
for storing the value of the word delivered by said first
memory means, said first memory register means having
2n outputs;
3-1 5 1
U .1 »«»tC*v t~
"S *1 ««1.«T.. I
'i ; -m ' ' I ' ' '
I
I. t i 9
iMi
>-10
leaver for changing the order of data bits in a data stream to be
transmitted comprising:
a data source for providing a stream of data bits to be trans-
mitted,
interleaver means coupled to said stream of data bits,
transmitter means coupled to said interleaver means for
transmitting said data bits in a quasi-random pattern se-
quence,
said interleaver means comprising buffer memory means for
storing a block of said stream of said data bits in a prede-
termined sequential pattern of memory addresses,
said addresses being definable in terms of an array of col-
umns and rows,
first address pointer means coupled to said buffer memory
means for generating said predetermined pattern of mem-
ory addresses and for storing said data bits in said buffer
memory means in rows,
second address pointer means coupled to said buffer mem-
ory means for generating a predetermined quasi-random
pattern of memory addresses and for reading said stored
data bits out of said buffer memory means by columns,
said predetermined quasi-random pattern of memory ad-
dresses being generated by a predetermined rotation of
bits within columns, and
control means coupled to said buffer memory means and said
first and second pointer means for alternately storing said
stream of data bits into said buffer memory means as rows
of data bits and for reading said stored data bits out of said
buffer memory means as columns of data bits in a prede-
termined quasi-random stream of data bits.
an inverter having 2n inputs coupled respectively to the 2n
outputs of said first memory register means, a control
input for receiving a control signal, and 2n outputs;
a second parallel-read/write memory register means having
2n inputs coupled respectively to the 2n outputs of said
inverter and 2n outputs;
a control device having one output for delivering said con-
trol signal for said inverter as a function of both the binary
word defined by the 2n bits present on the 2n inputs of the
inverter and the binary word defined by the 2n bits pres-
ent on the 2n outputs of said inverter; and
a series-read parallel-write memory register having 2n inputs
"coupled respectively to the 2n outputs of said second
memory register means and one output.
4,394,643
CAPACITIVE TOUCH PANEL CONTROL
Robert R. Williams, Green Camp Township, Marion County,
Ohio, assignor to Whirlpool Corporation, Benton Harbor,
Mich.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,589
Int. CI.5 G06F 3/02; HOIG 7/00
U.S. a. 340—365 C 15 Claims
4,394,642
APPARATUS FOR INTERLEAVING AND
DE-INTERLEAVING DATA
Robert J. Currie; Glen D. Rattlingourd, both of Salt Lake City;
Billie M. Spencer, Bountiful, and John W. Zscheile, Jr.,
Farmington, all of Utah, assignors to Sperry Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,434
Int. a.3 H03K 13/24
U.S. a. 340—347 DD 11 Claims
1. A dau transmitting system of the type having an inter-
1. A capacitive touch panel comprising:
a first dielectric wall member having opposite first and
second surfaces;
a conductive touch pad on said first surface;
a second dielectric wall member having opposite third and
fourth surfaces;
a first conductive circuit pad on said third surface;
a second conductive circuit pad on said fourth surface, said
second circuit pad being out of appositional facial registra-
tion with said first circuit pad;
electrical means connecting said first and second conductive
circuit pads in an electrical circuit, said electrical connect-
ing means including one portion adjacent said third sur-
face and another portion adjacent said fourth surface, the
disposition of said portions adjacent said opposite surfaces
of the second dielectric wall member permitting crossover
of said portions with the crossover portions being spaced
apart by said second dielectric wall member; and
means for retaining said dielectric wall members with said
third surface facially juxtaposed to said second surface
and with at least a portion of each of said circuit pads in
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1233
appositional facial registration with said touch pad to
provide a variable capacitance between said circuit pads
as an incident of selective touching and nontouching of
said touch pad by a user.
4,394,644
PURSE ALARM
Angela M. Di Leo, Linden, and James Lucia, Morristown, both
of N.J., assignors to Solomon Zaromb, Hinsdale, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 56,811, Jul. 12, 1979,
abandoned. This application Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 198,120
Int. C1.3 G08B 13/14
U.S. a. 340—571 17 Claims
zone of an electrical energy responsive marker wherein a
transmitter is coupled to an electrical energy field radiator for
establishing throughout said zone an AC energy field, and a
receiver is coupled to an electrical energy field receptor for
detecting a predetermined alteration of said AC energy field
caused by the presence of said marker within said AC energy
field, characterized in that at least one of said radiator and
receptor is disposed in a gate-like structure that is mounted for
rotation to and fro about a vertical axis with substantially all of
said structure extending horizontally to one side of said axis.
4,394,646
TEMPERATURE INDICATOR FOR A GLASS CERAMIC
COOKING SURFACE
Gerhard Giissler, Mbrikestr. 46, D-7519 Oberderdingen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 201,563
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 31,
1979, 2943922
Int. a.3 HOIH 37/46; H05B 3/02
U.S. a. 340—594 8 Oaims
1. In a battery-powered alarm device comprising a switch
connecting a battery to an alarm so as to activate the latter, said
battery, alarm, and switch being enclosed within a purse,
satchel or any other type of bag, the improvement comprising
a switch means for keeping said alarm from being activated and
for deactivating said alarm once it has been activated by open-
ing said switch and keeping said switch open through the
insertion of a prong uniquely shaped into a matching hole
within said purse, satchel or other bag and for activating said
alarm upon withdrawal of said prong, said prong being insert-
ible and withdrawable externally to said bag, and said switch
means being recessed and substantially concealed within said
matching hole in such a manner that mere insertion therein of
or poking with a sharp-tipped object other than said uniquely
shaped prong can not bring about the opening of said switch to
deactivate said alarm.
4,394,645
ELECTRICAL SURVEILLANCE APPARATUS WITH
MOVEABLE ANTENNA ELEMENTS
David R. Humble, Deerfieid Beach; Jon N. Weaver, Boca Raton;
David L. Gentzler, Boynton Beach; Ezra D. Eskandry, Pom-
pano Beach, and Peter J. Lamanna, Boca Raton, all of Fla.,
assignors to Sensormatic Electronics Corporation, Deerfieid
Beach, Fla.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 301,038, Sep. 10, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 337,990
Int. a.^ G08B 18/00, 22/00
U.S. a. 340—572 20 Qaims
1. Apparatus for detecting the presence within a surveillance
1. A temperature indicator for a glass ceramic cooking sur-
face, the temperature indicator having an indicating device, a
heat-sensitive switching device including an auxiliary heating
system, a temperature sensor and a switch operable by the
temperature sensor for activating the indicating device, the
switching device, temperature sensor and switch being dis-
posed in a casing that is thermally coupled to said cooking
surface, the temperature indicator comprising:
two electrodes disposed in the casing, the auxiliary heating
system being fixed therebetween by spring action, one of
the electrodes forming a partition between the auxiliary
heating system and the temperature sensor;
the auxiliary heating system including a positive temperature
co-efficient (PTC) resistor having a Curie temperature
below the ambient temperature of the casing during con-
tinuous operation of the heating system and having a
maximum rated operating temperature above the continu-
ous operating ambient temperature;
the switch for the indicating device being located away from
the cooking surface for protection against thermal dam-
age; and,
the temperature sensor being thermally coupled so closely to
the heating system of the glass ceramic cooking surface
and to the glass ceramic cooking surface itself that the
cooling time of the temperature sensor coincides with the
cooling time of the glass ceramic cooking surface, not-
withstanding variations in the cooling time of the glass
ceramic cooking surface as normally occur.
1234
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4^94,647
VOLTAGE MONITORING ARRANGEMENT FOR ORED
POWER DIODES
Gilbert A. Van Dine, Winfield Township, Du Page County, 111.,
assignor to Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated, Mur-
ray Hill, N.J.
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,960
Int. a.^ G08B 21/00
U.S. a. 340—645 20 Qaims
ClB POo
armature having a second longitudinal axis, said first axis
being substantially perpendicular to said second axis;
said reset relay having a second frame, a second coil assembly
including a second core and a second winding, and a second
moveable armature;
said second coil assembly having a third longitudinal axis and
said second armature having a fourth longitudinal axis, said
third axis being substantially perpendicular to said fourth
axis;
said set relay being disposed perpendicularly to said reset
relay, said first axis being perpendicular to said third axis and
said second axis being substantially perpendicular to said
fourth axis;
said first axis intersecting said second axis, and said third axis
intersecting said fourth axis, said second axis being substan-
tially parallel to said third axis and said first axis being sub-
stantially parallel to said fourth axis, and said third axis being
substantially spaced from said second axis;
1. A voltage monitoring arrangement for a direct-current
power distribution system wherein a plurality of separate
power sources supply p)Ower in parallel to a common load
through separate two-terminal power diodes similarly poled
for unidirectional current conduction therethrough between
the source terminals of the power diodes and the common load
terminals of the power diodes and wherein the sources and the
load have a common power supply return characterized in that
at least one power diode is provided with voltage monitoring
circuitry comprising:
(A) a first two-terminal current conducting circuit adapted
to be fully conducting only in response to a prescribed
first minimum amount of direct-current voltage across its
terminals and to be negligibly conducting for lesser or
reversed-polarity voltages;
(B) a second two-terminal current conducting circuit
adapted to be fully conducting only in response to a pre-
scribed second minimum amount of direct-current voltage
across its terminals and negligibly conducting for lesser or
reversed-polarity voltages; and
(C) a two-terminal, direct-current impedance; -*
(D) one terminal of each of the first circuit being connected
to a common circuit node, the corresponding terminal of
said second circuit being connected to the same common
node; and one of said terminals of said impedance being
connected to said common circuit node;
(E) the other terminals of the resjjective first circuit, second
circuit, and impedance being connected respectively to
the load terminal of the power diode, to the source termi-
nal of the power diode, and to the common return; and,
(F) the impedance being of such value as to limit to pre-
scribed maxima the fully conducting amounts of current
through the first and second circuits.
4,394,648
BRUSH WEAR DETECTOR SYSTEM WITH LATCHING
RELAY
Richard W. Mattson, Rossford, Ohio, assignor to Allied Corpo-
ration, Toledo, Ohio
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,849
Int. a.3 G08B 27/00
U.S. a. 340—679 5 Qaims
1. A brush wear detection system, comprising:
a dynamoelectric machine having a plurality of brushes;
at least one sensing wire means for providing a brush wear
signal indicative of critical brush wear;
a latching relay operatively connected to said sensing wire
means;
said latching relay including a set relay and a reset relay;
said set relay having a first frame, a first coil assembly respon-
sive to said brush wear signal including a first core and at
least one first winding, and a first movable armature, said
first coil assembly having a first longitudinal axis and a first
y-
^WUJ
v»,..
-ir
/A
,U
ft .
* #= ** •■*
0/'^
.111 Ac .All
S3,
•* *-
.,s
■■«
said first armature having an energized pKjsition and a de-ener-
gized position responsive to said first coil assembly;
said second armature having an energized position and a de-
energized position responsive to said second coil assembly;
said fi^t armature substantially perpendicularly overlapping a
portion of said second armature and latching said second
armature in said energized position when said first armature
is in said de-energized position;
said second armature substantially perpendicularly overlap-
ping a portion of said first armature and latching said first
armature in said energized position when said first armature
has moved to said energized position responsive to said first
coil assembly;
said set relay including a pair of alarm contacts operatively
connected to a source of power and to an alarm means for
providing an indication of brush wear responsive to said
sensing wire.
4,394,649
COMMUNICATION TERMINAL PROVIDING USER
COMMUNICATION OF HIGH COMPREHENSION
Michael A. Suchoff, Brookline; Holly T. Doyle, and Robert O.
Doyle, both of Cambridge, all of Mass., assignors to I/O
Corporation, Santa Monica, Calif.
FUed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 173,263
Int. a.J G09G i/04
U.S. a. 340—711 28 Qaims
1. A keyboard and display terminal for communication with
a data processing host and having character-entering keys and
a character-displaying element and further having the im-
provement comprising
A. means for selectively controlling character display on a
JULY 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1235
single line of said display element to start the display of
characters in either of first and second spaced-apart loca-
tions of said single display line,
B. means for restricting keyboard control of displayed char-
acters to only those characters for which the display starts
at said second display location,
C. means for extending, along said single display line, the
display of characters for which the display started at said
secotid location in the direction toward the display loca-
tions of characters for which the display started at said
first location, and
D. means responsive to the extension of characters for which
the display started at said second location onto locations
displaying characters for which the display started at said
first location, for maintaining the display of the latter
characters stationary in the absence of such an extension,
and for moving the display of the latter characters in the
direction of said extension in the presence of such an
extension.
4,394,650
GRAPHIC AND DATA CHARACTER VIDEO DISPLAY
SYSTEM
Nicholas R. Long, Hudson, N.H.; William E. Peisel, Marlboro,
Mass.; Joseph L. Ryan, Tuscon, Ariz., and Richard R. Wat-
kins, Chelmsford, Mass., assignors to Honeywell Information
Systems Inc., Waltham, Mass.
1 1 Filed Feb. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 235,807
' Int. Q.3 G09G 1/14
U.S. Q. 340—728 3 Qaims
1. A video control system for supplying both data characters
and graphic characters to video drive logic controlling the
operation of a CRT video screen in a video terminal system
having a timing control system, said video control system
comprising:
(a) logic memory means responsive to binary address codes
for providing binary character codes including, alterna-
tively, both binary data character codes and binary
graphic character codes, the binary character codes com-
prising bits sufficient in number to match that required in
a horizontal scan of a data character but not sufficient in
number to match that required in a horizontal scan of at
least certain graphic characters;
(b) video information stream logic means receiving said
binary character codes from said logic memory means and
responsive to clock control signals generated by said
timing control system for converting said binary character
codes to a serial video bit stream to be applied to said
video drive logic, and repeating a most significant bit
position logic level in said serial video bit stream upon
occurrence of a graphic character Hag bit in said binary
address code.
4,394,651
EASTERN ARABIC NUMBER DISPLAY
Michael Frankston, 375 Harvard St., Apt. 23, Cambridge, Mass.
02139, and Krikor A. Bezjian, 24 Frederick St., Belmont,
Mass. 02178
Filed Jun. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 157,895
Int. Q.' G09G 3/04
U.S. Q. 340—756 16 Qaims
1 2 3 4 S
B&&B
7 8 9
1. A multiple segment number display for selectively dis-
playing each Eastern Arabic number, said display comprising
eight segments, six of said segments being substantially elon-
gated, said segments being oriented with respect to one
another such that when viewing said display in its proper
orientation,
(a) five of said elongated segments are arranged to form an
apparent quadrilateral, the first and second of said five
elongated segments forming the respective top and
bottom of said quadrilateral, a third of said five elon-
gated segments forming the right hand side of said
quadrilateral, and the remaining fourth and fifth seg-
ments of said five elongated segments extending sub-
stantially colinearly with respect to one another, the
fourth segment disposed above said fifth segment, so as
to form the left hand side of said quadrilateral,
(b) the sixth elongated segment extends from the approxi-
mate top left corner of said quadrilateral to the approxi-
mate bottom right comer of said quadrilateral so as to
form a diagonal of said quadrilateral dividing said quad-
rilateral into left and right triangular portions, and,
(c) the seventh and eighth segments are disposed respec-
tively in the left and right triangular portions;
wherein said eight segments are selectively energizable so
as to display each of said Eastern Arabic numbers.
4,394,652
DATA DISPLAY SYSTEM
Jean Rabette, Bondues, France, assignor to Societe Vandeputte
Fils & Qe, S.A., Tourcoing, France
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,007
Qaims priority, application France, Jul. 18, 1980, 80 16076
Int. Q.^ G09G 3/34
U.S. Q. 340—764 2 Qaims
1. Data display system having a group of at least two parallel
rotors (101 to 104) each formed by a single body (2), having in
two diametrically opposite areas ranges of different colors,
which rotates freely in a mounting (5) to which it is associated
by a shaft (4), which is in contrast interlocking in rotation with
a permanent magnet (6) the position of which is such that the
1236
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
line passing through its poles (7, 8) is essentially radial to the
axis of the shaft (4). in which system end rotors (101, 104) of
the group of at least two parallel rotors, to control their rota-
tion, each cooperate with one pole of an electromagnet (10)
connected to a source (15) of direct current by an inverter-
interruptor (16) and which is attached to the mounting (5) in
such a way that each pole is located in the plane perpendicular
to the axis of the rotors in which the poles of the permanent
magnets may turn, and in said system the datum to be dis-
played, such as a sign, a letter, a figure or a design, consist of
at least one point the entire apparent surface of which is always
4^94,654
IDENTinCATION DEVICE
Hellmut W. Hofknann-Cerfontaine, Nuremberg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignor to Hannsheinz Porst, Nuremberg, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,192
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 17,
1980 3014882
Int. a.5 G06K 5/00; G08B 13/06; H04Q l/OO
U.S. a. 340—825.34 12 Qaims
lOPEmUNENT
STORAGE TNR
II COMPAR-
ATOR , 2s
, 24 CHARACTER FU3R
CMXUL-
-ATOR
UNIT
-J GATE
1 CIRCUIT
TWI I
WATCH
DATA
L
J"
?■
[mta
of one color, for example light, or of another, for example dark,
this point is itself formed of several colored ranges which are
juxtaposed and borne by distinct ones of the group of rotors
(101, 102, 103, 104) grouped to be controlled synchronously
and, so that all the rotors of the same group may be activated
at the same time, the system includes a single electromagnet
(10) having poles (17, 18) located in the plane of the axes of the
rotors, on either side of the entire group of rotors so as to
directly exert their effect only on the permanent magnets (6) of
the rotors (101, 104) located at the ends of the group and only
on their pole oriented towards the outside of the group.
ISTCRAGE
ge|H 1 ^
1. An identification device characterized in that permanent
storage means in which an alphanumerical character string
forming a code is stored, and a word register into which an
alphanumerical character string can be entered by means of
input means, are connected to a comparator which supplies to
a display device a control signal indicating that conformity
between the two character strings is either present or missing;
and further characterized by a time function element with
interlocking means which, at the end of a pre-determined
expiration period of time, supplies an interiocking signal which
prevents an existing conformity from being displayed, the
expiration period defining the validation during which the
device permits indication of the presence or absence of confor-
mity.
4,394,653
BIDIRECTIONAL DRIVE MULTIPLEXED DISPLAY
SYSTEM
Eric G. Breeze, Los Altos, Calif., assignor to General Instrument
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 210,133
Int. a.3 G09G i/l4
U.S. CI. 340—802 15 Qaims
CM^fMC'ijr
cuMtcm
114.
m 7
T£m
C
'£f
1
•■
>
\
11
'
1 ,
1
y
■ .
•
<;
^''.■,
;
'■
.
11
-
1
1
—H
H
r ^
.^" ' -
-'--
—
E--rT:rii
-*
k 1
:E
^
-^
4 394 655
BIDIRECnONAL, INTERACTIVE nRE DETECHON
SYSTEM
John M. Wynne, Oak Ridge, and William R. Vogt, Rockaway,
both of N.J., assignors to Baker Industries, Inc., Parsippany,
N.J.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,401
Int. Q.^ H04Q 9/00; G08B 23/00
U.S. Q. 340—825.36 1' Cl""^
1. An apparatus comprising: a display having a plurality of
characters, each of said characters having N segments, each of
said segments being electrically unidirectional and having two
terminals of different polarities said apparatus further consist-
ing of; N-l- 1 directly interconnected with said characters; each
character having N of said N-l-1 busses connected to like
polarity terminals of the N segments of that character, and the
N-l- 1th bus for that character being connected to all of the
other polarity terminals of the segments of that character; and
said N-l- 1th bus being a different bus for each character.
TRANSPONDER 15
1. A bidirectional, interactive signalling system comprismg
a pair of electrical conductors,
a controller coupled to said conductors, for transmitting a
series of signal groups sequentially over said conductors.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1237
each sighal group comprising a plurality of pulse signals,
each pulse signal having first and second portions of dif-
ferent amplitude; and
a plurality of transponders, each coupled to said conductors,
each transponder having its own unique address, with
each of said transponders being connected to recognize as
its address a particular signal group in the series of signal
groups transmitted from the controller, and to respond
upon recognition of its unique address by transmitting
data back to the controller over the same conductor pair,
which data may include information regarding a predeter-
mined condition such as alarm and/or trouble, in which
said controller transmits one or more commands to a
selected one of the transponders by modulating a first
portion of at least one signal in the signal group directed to
the selected transponder, and the selected transponder
replies by modulating the second portion of at least one
pulse signal in the same signal group to encode data se-
4,394,657
DECODER CTRCUTT
Hideaki Isogai, Higashikurume, and Yukio Takahashi, Shiga,
both of Japan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,757
Int. Q.3 H04Q 9/00; H03K 79/056, 19/01; GllC 11/ 40
U.S. Q. 340—825.93 11 Qaims
lected
"or return to the controller.
4,394,656
SOUND DISPLAY APPARATUS HAVING SEPARATION
CONTROL
Mark T. Goettsche, 2310 McMillan, Eugene, Oreg. 97405
I filed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,293
' Int. Q.^ A63J n/00; H04Q 19/02
U.S. Q. 340—825.73 12 Qaims
TT
^
"'^lAi. i-lv?"'^in. "^^ * fS^ I MAIN POWCN
'^Ww
1. A decoder circuit, operatively connectable to receive a
plurality input signals "ao, ai, a2, — , a," and to a word line,
comprising:
input gates, operatively connectable to receive the plurality
of input signals "ao, ai, a2, — , a,", for generating inverse
signals "ao, ai, §2, — , a," in dependence upon the plural-
ity of input signals "ao, ai, a2, - - - , a,";
a logic circuit, operatively connected to said input gates, for
generating an output in dependence upon combined input
signals that are the combination signals of said signals ao
through a/ and ao through a,-,
an output gate, operatively connected to said logic circuit
and operatively connectable to the word line, for selec-
tively driving the word line by the output supplied from
said logic circuit; and
current control means, electrically connected between a
voltage source and said output gate, for switching a cur-
rent from said voltage source and activating said output
gate.
/
1. A light modulated sound display for producing lighting
effects from first and second stereophonically related audio
signals comprising:
(a) summation amplifier for combining said stereophonically
related signals;
(b) first, second, and third filters for receiving an output
signal from said summation amplifier, said filters dividing
said signal into first, second and third signals, each con-
taining a portion of the signal frequencies contained in said
output signal;
(c) first, second and third comparators, each having an input
connected to one of said first, second and third filters, and
each having a reference input;
(d) means for combining a portion of the signal provided by
said filters, said means providing a reference signal for
each of said comparator's reference input; and
(e) first, second and third switching gates connected to drive
individual lighting elements, said gates having a control
input connected to one of said comparator output termi-
nals, whereby said switching elements are individually
controlled to illuminate a lighting element according to
the signal energy provided by one of said filters.
4,394,658
ADAPTIVE MTl CLUTTER TRACKER-CANCELLER
METHOD AND APPARATUS
Robert D. Short, III, Littleton, Mass., assignor to Sperry Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,617
Int. Q.3 GOIS n/52
U.S. Q. 343—7.7 11 Qaims
1. An adaptive MTl clutter canceller comprising:
mixer means having input means for receiving signals at first
and second frequencies, said second frequency differing
from said first frequency by a difference frequency, and
output means for providing signals, at said output means,
having frequencies representative of said difference fre-
quency;
delay means having input means coupled to said output
means of said mixer means for time delaying said signals at
said diflerence frequencies and for providing said time
delayed signals at an output means thereof;
phase comparator means having first input means coupled to
said output means of said delay means and second input
means coupled to said output means of said mixer means
for providing signals at an output means that are represen-
tative of phase differences between signals coupled from
1238
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
said output means of said time delay means and said output
means of said mixer means;
first averaging means having input means coupled to said
output means of said phase comparator means for provid-
ing signals representative of an average, over a first prede-
termined period, of signals coupled from said phase com-
parator means;
second averaging means coupled to receive said average
signal from said first averaging means for providing sig-
the pilot signals injected into the individual receiving
channels;
e. doppler frequency detecting means for detecting a target
doppler frequency from the tracking error signals; and
f a control circuit electrically-connected to the tunable pilot
signal generator, to the tunable transmitting means, and to
the doppler frequency detecting means for tuning the pilot
signal frequency to the composite value of the transmit-
ting frequency and the doppler frequency.
'-.■ '
.
r
M '
-^
^-
J .
11
l^
^V.
'W—
f \--o -
■ — (^
>^
Ot.i-
T(
'
r
/
s
1
/5
14
...J
..CO
• —
1 iit»AOE
1 «■"••"
i JtOAOt
> OvE»
—
4,394,660
PHASED ARRAY FEED SYSTEM
Leonard D. Cohen, Brooklyn, N.Y., assignor to Eaton Corpora-
tion, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,947
Int. a.5 H04B 7/00
U.S. a. 343—100 SA 2 Qaims
80IA-J7 80IB
S02A
nals representative of an average, over a second predeter-
mined period, of signals coupled from said averaging
means; and
means having output means coupled to said input means of
said mixer means and input means coupled to receive said
average signal from said second averaging means for
providing signals having frequencies that are functions of
said average signals coupled from said second averaging
means.
4,394,659
MONOPULSE RADAR WITH PILOT SIGNAL
GENERATOR
Bernard Gellekink, Ootmarsum, Netherlands, assignor to Hol-
landse Signaalapparaten B.V., Hengelo, Netherlands
PCT No. PCr/NL80/00012, § 371 Date Dec. 17, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 12, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02326, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 30, 1980
PCT Filed Apr. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 227,097
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Apr. 17, 1979,
7902974
Int. a.3 GOIS 13/44
U.S. a. 343—16 M 10 Qaims
BtOfsnn ci*»cu>i
y CO«>m«to« 5771 MTtC'On/ / soot" UtMO".
-•Is 1*5. «.fj iSriTV^" '^^•'■^^f'
^1
U\
"■"O'tCTtO*
i
OSClLL»TOI« 1
1'
llDO^^lEB
1,«««C|JESS"«.
RBon
C0»M£C"0»4
REOiSTO
1. A monopulse radar for tracking a target, comprising:
a. a tunable transmitting means for transmitting RF pulse
signals toward the target;
b. a plurdity of receiving channels for producing tracking
error signals from target return signals;
c. a tunable pilot signal generator for injecting pilot signals
representative of artifical target return signals into the
receiving channels, said pilot signals having predefined
phase and amplitude relationships;
d. means for correcting; the tracking error signals in response
to differences in the amplification and the phase shifts of
804A
805
804B 8040 8040
1. A feed system for a phased array antenna, comprising:
(a) a plurality of injection lock oscillators, each having a first
input port for accepting an injection lock signal, a second
input port for accepting a signal to control the phase of the
oscillator's output signal and an output port for supplying
the oscillator output signal to an external load, said second
input port being separate and unconnected to any bias port
used to supply bias power to said oscillator,
(b) means for coupling each oscillator output port to an
antenna element in a series of adjacent elements in a
phased array antenna,
(c) a tuned circuit within each oscillator for tuning the fre-
quency of the oscillator when the oscillator is not injec-
tion locked and for adjusting the phase of the output signal
of the oscillator when the frequency of the oscillator is
controlled by the injection lock signal, the tuned circuit
being tuned by a control signal applied to the second input
port of the oscillator,
(d) means for supplying an injection locked signal to the first
input port of a first oscillator which supplies a first an-
tenna element, and
(e) means for coupling a portion of the output signal of each
oscillator to the first input port of the next oscillator
which supplies the next adjacent element in the array, the
coupled signal serving as the injection lock signal for the
oscillator receiving the coupled signal.
4,394,661
RECORDING MATERIAL FOR STORAGE OF DIGITAL
INFORMATION AND A RECORDING METHOD FOR
STORAGE OF DIGITAL INFORMATION
Hugo K. Peeters, Mortsel, Belgium, assignor to Agfa-Gevaert,
N.V., Mortsel, Belgium
FUed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,405
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 22, 1980,
8013289
Int. a.3 GOID 15/34
V.S. a. 346—1.1 16 Qaims
11. Recording method operating with information- wise
modulated laser beams comprising the steps of
(1) information- wise pulsed irradiation with a first laser beam
of a recording material comprising on the same side of a laser
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1239
radiation-reflective support, including a support with laser
radiation reflecting layer, two superimposed adjacent re-
cording layers which can undergo on exposure instantly
produced optical density changes responsive to irradiation
with laser beams of different wavelength, the compositions
of said layers being such that they have different radiation-
sensitive characteristics permitting information-wise record-
ing to take place in one layer without changing the optical
density of the other layer to such a degree that laser beam
read out of optical density information in one layer becomes
impossible upon using laser beams of different wavelength
for each recording layer, wherein said first beam is focused
onto a thermosensitive recording layer of said recording
material, while having a relative movement between said
thermosensitive recording layer and said beam, the exposure
with said first beam being of sufficient dose to produce in
said thermosensitive recording layer a pattern of a physical
change associated with a change in optical density, and
(2) information-wise pulsed laser irradiation of said recording
material with a second laser beam which beam is focused
onto a photosensitive recording layer of said recording
material while having a relative movement between said
photosensitive layer and said second laser beam whose laser
radiation contains electromagnetic radiation of the visible
and/or ultra-violet wavelength range in the spectral sensitiv-
ity range of the photosensitive layer, the exposure of the
photosensitive recording layer being information-wise such
that a detectable colour or colour change is formed therein
without affecting the thermosensitive layer, the recording of
information with the first laser beam in the thermosensitive
recording layer being such that therein the optical density is
modified without modifying the optical density of the photo-
sensitive layer in such a degree that the selective laser beam
read out of recorded information in each of the recording
layers by using laser radiation of different wavelength be-
. comes inwossible.
4,394,662
DOT PRINTER FOR REPRODUCTION OF HALFTONE
IMAGES
Kunio Yoshida; Hiroaki Kotera; Yukifumi Tsuda, all of Kawa-
saki; Yoshimitsu Kanno, Sagamihara, and Motohiko Naka,
Kanagawa, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Research
Institute Tokyo, Inc., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,513
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 31, 1980, 55-106081;
Dec. 25, 1980, 55-188015
Int. CI.3 GOID 9/00, 15/18; H04N 1/22
U.S. a. 346—33 R 21 Qaims
1. A dot printer adapted to receive a gray scale input signal
comprising a recording head having a tendency to become
inoperative in a range below a threshold level, means for con-
trolling said recording means in response to a clock pulse to
record on a recording medium a dot with varying proportions
of high and low discrete levels as a function of said gray scale
input signal, means for moving said recording head and record-
ing medium relatively to each other so that the recording head
scans along a line path and is successively shifted to the next
scan line by the width of a line path, means for generating an
oscillating signal, and means for modulating the amplitude of
said gray scale input signal with said oscillating signal to over-
[^
IP5EU0O-RANOOW
' PULSE GENERfiTOfi ''
f-T
t- fl p
^ \
P R P
-■2
rH
^ h
1
DiViDt -BT
COUNT EM
._a
I >4
'±j 0'
[Wive utiNs
hllNC SCAN I
COUNTtn
come said tendency so that the modulated signal oscillates
above and below the threshold level.
4,394,663
INK JET PRINTING APPARATUS
Minoni Ameyama, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Company,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,427
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 4, 1980, 55-139211
Int. a.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. a. 346—75 5 Qaims
1. An ink jet printing apparatus including an ink jet head,
vibrator means for applying pressure oscillation to ink in the
ink jet head thereby causing the ink to be ejected from the ink
jet head and separated into droplets, charging means for charg-
ing the ink droplets and deflection means for deflecting the
charged ink droplets, characterized by comprising:
control means for controlling a size of images printed by the
printing apparatus, the control means comprising coarse
control means for adjustably moving at least one of the ink
jet head, charging means and deflection means and fine
control means for varying the number of guard drops
composed of uncharged ink droplets between charged ink
droplets.
4,394,664
THERMAL PLOTTER
James M. Lapeyre, New Orleans, La., assignor to The Laitram
Corporation, New Orleans, La.
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,021
Int. Q.^ GOID 15/10
U.S. Q. 346—76 R 10 Qaims
1. A thermal plotter comprising:
a pair of electrically conductive elements spaced from each
other and disposed along a first axis;
an electrical resistance wire disposed at an acute angle to
said first axis of said elements and having a bridging por-
tion in contact with the front edges of the elements;
means for supporting the resistance wire at an acute angle to
said first axis and operative to move the wire along a
second axis transverse to the first axis, and to cause move-
1240
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
ment of the bridging portion of the wire along the front
edges of said elements;
means coupled to the support means for causing movement
of the wire along the second axis in response to an input;
means for providing a voltage across said elements;
a thermally responsive sheet disposed in contact with the
front edges of the elements;
4,394,666
TIME RECORDER
Hiroshi Kato, Atsugi; Hisataka Ato, Yokohain&; Osamu
Inagaki, Kawasaki, and Hiroshi Matsuo, Yokohama, all of
Japan, assignors to Amano Corporation, Yokohama, Japan
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,207
Claims priority, application Japan, May 20, 1980, 55-66611
Int. a? G07C 7/06
U.S. a. 346—82 9 Qaims
the bridging portion of the wire being heated by electrical
current flowing therethrough to a temperature sufficient
to produce a visible image on the sheet;
the movement of the bridging portion of the wire along said
elements being magnified in relation to movement of the
wire along the second axis.
4 394 665
ELECTRICAL CONTACT FOR CONDUCTIVE-BACKED
PAPER
Gerald F. Kopp, Pine, Colo., assignor to Honeywell Inc., Minne-
apolis, Minn.
Filed May 26, 1982, Ser. No. 382,039
Int. a.3 GOID 15/16
U.S. a. 346—76 R 7 Qaims
1. Apparatus for use in a recorder having a moving conduc-
tive-backed paper to supply electrical energy to the conduc-
tive backing comprising:
a wire brush for applying a uniform heating current to the
paper, the brush including a sufficient number of wire bris-
tles to contact the conductive backing in a substantially
continuous fashion across the paper so that all portions of the
paper proximate the brush are contacted, the wire bristles
being fine enough to bend and make a flexible contact with
the conductive backing; and
means connecting the wire brush to a source of electrical
energy.
1. A time recorder capable of accepting a time card having
a personal code of each individual time card user, of printing
predetermined time data, for example, the time of day of ac-
ceptance of said time card on a predetermined line of said time
card, and of ejecting said time card after said time is printed
thereon, said time recorder comprising:
means defining a predetermined path of time card convey-
ance having an inlet opening into which said time card is
at least partially manually inserted;
reading means for reading said personal code when said time
card is inserted into said predetermined path;
storage means for electronically storing at least print line
number data corresponding to said personal code read by
said reading means;
printing means for printing said predetermined time data
upon said time card;
motor means roUtable in a first direction for conveying said
time card along said predetermined path after said time
card is at least partially manually inserted into said inlet
opening, and rotatable in a second direction opposite to
said first direction for ejecting said time card from said
time recorder after said predetermined time data is printed
upon said time card; and
position determining means for determining the position of
said time card relative said printing means so that said
predetermined time data is printed upon a predetermined
print line number of said time card, said position determin-
ing means including movable means for contacting and
being displaceable with the bottom edge of said time card
as said time card is conveyed through a portion of said
predetermined path by said motor means, position signal
generating means for generating a position signal respon-
sive to said movable means, and comparator means for
comparing said position signal and said stored print line
number data and for stopping said motor means when said
position signal is equal to said stored print line number
data.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1241
4,394,667 4,394,669
RADIAL ACCESS DRIVE FOR AN OPTICAL DISK LIQUID JET RECORDING APPARATUS
RECORDER Masakazu Ozawa, Yokohama; Kunio Watanabe; Shigeyuki
David Cheng, San Jose, and Stephen T. Chai, Rancho Palos Matsumoto, both of Kawasaki; Yukuo Nishimura,
Verdes, both of Calif., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stam- Sagamihara, and Takashi Miyazaki, Tokyo, all of Japan,
ford. Conn. assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 362,361 Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,348
Int. C1.3 G06K 15/02; GOID 15/32 Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-100085;
U.S. Q. 346—137 4 Qaims Jul. 22, 1980, 55-100086
Int. Q.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. Q. 346—140 R
5 Qaims
1. In a data recorder system including optical means for
providing an information modulated light beam, a member
including a data recording surface sensitive to said light beam,
and first means for causing rotation of said data recording
surface,
characterized in that
said optical means are held in a stationary position, and
second means for moving said data recording surface along
an arcuate path relative to said optical means.
4,394,668
ELECTRONIC PRINTER
Riccardo Brescia, Ivrea, Italy, assignor to Ing. C. Olivetti & C,
S.p.A., Italy
Filed Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 298,790
Qaims priority, application Italy, Sep. 22, 1980, 68467 A/80
Int. Q.3 GOID 15/16; HOIH 1/00
U.S. Q. 346—139 R 10 Qaims
1. An electronic printer comprising a tracing element carried
at one vertex of an articulated parallelogram, and actuating
means responsive to electrical signals to distort the parallelo-
gram so as to move the tracing element in two coordinate
directions parallel to the printing plane, at least two of the arms
of the parallelogram being constituted by thin fibres of elastic
material, the articulated joints of the parallelogram being con-
stituted by the end portions of the arms.
1. A liquid jet recording apparatus comprising:
a first ink tank for storing an amount of ink;
a second ink tank position at a level higher than said first ink
tank, and connected to a feed tube in communication with
said first ink tank, said second ink tank receives the ink
from said first tank through the feed tube, said first ink
tank and said second ink tank being closed containers;
a recording head associated with said second ink tank for
jetting the ink fed from said second ink tank; and
a carriage connected to said second ink tank and said record-
ing head for reciprocally moving said second ink tank and
said recording head together, wherein at least a portion of
the feed tube is moved along the reciprocal movement
path of said second ink tank thereby producing pressure in
said second ink tank to feed the ink to said second ink tank
from said first ink tank.
4,394,670
INK JET HEAD AND METHOD FOR FABRICATION
THEREOF
Hiroshi Sugitani, Machida; Hiroto Matsuda, Yokohama; Koichi
Kimura, Yamanashi, and Masami Ikeda, Chiba, all of Japan,
assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 335,466
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 9, 1981, 56-1856; Jan.
19, 1981, 56-94651; Jun. 19, 1981, 56-94654
Int. Q.3 GOID 15/18
U.S. Q. 346—140 R 19 Qaims
1. An ink-jet head comprising an ink flow path formed by
laminating cured films of photosensitive compositions and an
ink discharging orifice, at least the ink discharging orifice
region being composed of the cured films.
1242
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,671
ELECTROGRAPHIC RECORDING
Roger D. Erickson, Denver, Colo., assignor to Honeywell Inc.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
FUed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,376
Int. a.3 GOID 75/06
U.S. a. 346—155 7 Qaims
1. An electrographic recording system for recording infor-
mation on an electrographic recording medium, comprising:
a non-magnetic platen over which said recording medium
passes;
a multipolar magnetic structure;
a non-magnetic shell;
means mounting said shell for motion about said magnetic
structure with the peripheral surface of said shell spaced a
small predetermined distance above said platen;
means for supplying magnetic toner particles to the outer
surface of said shell;
means for defining a recording station substantially at the
fHJsition of nearest approach of said shell to the upper
surface of said platen;
an array of recording styli positioned at said recording sta-
tion and spaced between the peripheral surface of said
shell and said platen;
said means for defining a recording station including a mag-
netically permeable strip secured to but insulated from the
under surface of said array of recording styli, said magnet-
ically permeable strip concentrating the magnetic field
produced by said magnetic structure to form a dynamic
bridge of toner particles between said shell and said re-
cording medium at said recording station.
electrodes of one material and having different forward
and reverse electrical characteristics so that rectification is
'V r,} fittC/filTATf
derived from a microstructure, including said groupings,
of said main body.
4,394,673
RARE EARTH SILICIDE SCHOTTKY BARRIERS
Richard D. Thompson, Millwood, N.Y.; Boryeu Tsaur, Arling-
ton, Mass., and King-Ning Tu, Chappaqua, N.Y., assignors to
International Business Machines Corporation, AnBonk, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,565
Int. a.3 HOIL 29/48
U.S. a. 357—15 10 Claims
2O(Ho,M,Er,0y,r,iifla) 21{V,«,llo,Cr,or Ti)
'22(Pt,Pd.Ni,orIr) 24(Pt,Pd,)(i,orIr)
4,394,672
TITANIUM DIOXIDE RECHHER
Allen H. Meitzler, Ann Arbor; William T. Donlon, Jr., Detroit,
and Samuel S. Schinozaki, Livonia, all of Mich., assignors to
Ford Motor Company, Dearborn, Mich.
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,441
Int. Q\} HOIL 27/24, 49/02. 29/12. 29/161
U.S. a. 357—10 5 Qaims
5. A rectifier comprising:
a ceramic oxide main body having a pair of opposing major
surfaces, said ceramic oxide being an oxide of a tetravalent
metal atom;
a pair of spaced metal electrodes disposed on said opposing
major surfaces of said ceramic oxide main body, the mate-
rial of said metal electrodes being selected from the group
of platinum and palladium; and
groupings of a combination of the electrode material and the
tetravalent metal material interspersed throughout the
ceramic oxide main body thereby forming a rectifier with
V / ^22(Pt,Pd.
18 I^^^=iLW'?:>
25-1
n-Si
1. A disilicide Schottky barrier contact having a barrier
potential of about 0.4 eV, comprising:
an n-type silicon substrate; and
a rare earth metal deposited on said n-type silicon substrate,
wherein said disilicide Schottky barrier contact is formed
by heating said silicon substrate and said rare earth metal.
6. A disilicide Schottky barrier contact having a barrier
potential of about 0.7 eV, comprising:
an p-type silicon substrate; and
a rare earth metal deposited on said p-type silicon substrate,
wherein said disilicide Schottky barrier contact is formed
by heating said silicon substrate and said rare earth metal.
434,674
INSULATED GATE FIELD EFFECT TRANSISTOR
Hiraku Sakuma, and Toshiyuki Suzuki, both of Tokyo, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Electric Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,683
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 9, 1979, 54-130143;
Nov. 13, 1979, 54-146668
Int. Q.3 HOIL 29/78
U.S. Q. 357—23 9 Qaims
27 24 25 26 2*i
"^/^-^T^Vy^ ■;• rr^-v^---'-'^
» :,//
21 30 32 29
1. An insulated gate field effect transistor comprising a
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1243
semiconductor substrate of one conductivity type, a source
region and a drain region of the opposite conductivity type
provided along one principal surface of said semiconductor
substrate, a channel region between said source region and said
drain region, a gate electrode provided on said channel region
via a gate insulating film, and an impurity region of said one
conductivity type having a higher impurity concentration than
said semiconductor substrate, said impurity region being pro-
vided in contact with substantially the entire bottom of said
source region excluding the side wall of said source region
facing said channel region, said impurity region being led out
to said one principal surface through a portion of said substrate
other than said channel region and being ohmically connected
to a source electrode jointly with said source region, said
impurity region having an impurity concentration of 1 x 10'*
cm ~ 3 or higher, said semiconductor substrate having a bottom
surface opposite to said one principal surface, said semiconduc-
tor substrate between said drain region and said bottom surface
having an impurity concentration less than 1 x 10'* cm~^.
4,394,675
TRANSPARENT ASYMMETRIC ELECTRODE
STRUCTURE FOR CHARGE COUPLED DEVICE IMAGE
SENSOR
Constantine N. Anagnostopoulos, Mendon, and Teh-Hsung Le^,
Webster, both of N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company,
Rochester, N.Y.
.Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,366
1 1 Int. a.3 HOIL 29/78, 29/04
U.S. Q. 357—24 5 Claims
a?
.It
or
g^
"'T, f
\ =:
::
^
«,
■i-
■i
■I.-
t
I, :|,
1- L
i.
r
—-e
r«- ^■— T^ rr -
;
4,394,676
PHOTOVOLTAIC RADIATION DETECTOR ELEMENT
Dimitrios C. Agouridis, Oak Ridge, Tenn. (granted to U.S.
Department of Energy under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,358
Int. Q.' HOIL 27/14. 31/00. 29/161
U.S. Q. 357—29 4 Qaims
1. A photovoltaic radiation detector element comprising:
a body of semiconductor material;
an electrically conductive current collector attached to said
body and formed with a plurality of thin branch segments
connected at a common point; and
a photovoltaic junction forming coating on said body which
closely approaches but is spaced from said current collec-
tor branch segments.
4,394,677
THYRISTOR FOR LOW-LOSS TRIGGERING OF SHORT
IMPULSES WITH SCHOTTKY CONTACT TO CONTROL
GATE ELECTRODE
Andre Jaecklin, Ennetbaden, Switzerland, assignor to BBC
Brown, Boveri & Company, Limited, Baden, Switzerland
Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 182,655
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Jan. 16, 1980,
342/80
Int. Q.3 HOIL 29/74
U.S. CI. 357—38 12 Qaims
1. A frame. transfer type charge coupled image sensing de-
vice wherein photocharges are accumulated under a transfer
electrode in the transfer channel of a CCD shift register, com-
prising:
(a) a semiconductor substrate;
(b) a transparent insulating layer formed on a light receiving
surface of said substrate;
(c) a first set of transfer electrodes comprising a plurality of
electrodes disposed in groups of one or more electrodes,
said groups being disposed in spaced-apart relation on said
insulating layer;
(d) a second set of transfer electrodes, disposed on said
insulating layer between said groups of first transfer elec-
. trodes, said transfer electrodes of said second set being
substantially wider than the transfer electrodes of said first
set, and substantially transparent in the visible region of
the spectrum; and
(e) means for blocking light from passing through said first
set of transfer electrodes.
JO- - >
^5';^^
■ f.'.:.rr:.\'..\:.:r7zr:
^
1. A disc-shaped thyristor device comprising:
a main thyristor formed of four alternating zones of opposite
conductivity type including an n ""^ -doped cathode emitter,
a p-doped cathode base, a n-doped anode base and a p-
doped anode, wherein a portion of the cathode base
emerges to a cathode-side surface and serves as a gate;
an integrated auxiliary thyristor provided for improving
current rise time upon main thyristor ignition, said auxil-
iary thyristor comprising an n + -doped region and p"*"-
doped secondary control region formed between the gate
and the cathode emitter of the main thyristor; and
an integrated diode provided for shortening the turn-off time
of the main thyristor during turn-off of current conduc-
1032O.G.— 46
1244
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
tion therethrough, said integrated diode comprising a
Schottky contact formed between the gate and the cath-
ode emitter on said cathode base of said main thyristor.
said Schottky contact electrically connected to said gate
by means of a metallization.
micrometers thick covering the base, the copper block
and the stud.
4,394,678
ELEVATED EDGE-PROTECTED BONDING PEDESTALS
FOR SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICES
Vern H. Winchell, II, Phoenix; Thomas A. Scharr, Tempe, and
Lowell E. Qark, Phoenix, all of Ariz., assignors to Motorola,
Inc., Schaumburg, III.
Filed Sep. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 76,879
Int. a.3 HOIL 23/48. 29/44. 29/52
U.S. CI. 357—68 9 Claims
4,394,680
COLOR TELEVISION SIGNAL PROCESSING
APPARATUS
Toshiro Watanabe, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,699
Claims priority, application Japan. Apr. 1, 1980, 55-42991;
Apr. 1, 1980, 55-42992
Int. Cl.^ H04N 9/535
U.S. a. 358—22 25 Qaims
1. A bonding pedestal for a semiconductor circuit containing
intra-circuit metallization comprising:
a semiconductor substrate;
a bonding pad having an outer aluminum layer and lying
over a portion of said substrate, said outer aluminum layer
comprising a peripheral portion and a central portion, said
central portion having a substantially planar aluminum
bonding surface, and wherein said bonding surface is
higher than said peripheral portion;
a hard core under said central portion of said bonding pad,
lying over said substrate and conformally covered on sides
and top by said outer aluminum layer which forms said
peripheral portion and said bonding surface; and
insulating means covering said peripheral portion but lying
at a lower level than said bonding surface in a region
surrounding said bonding pad.
4 394 679
LIGHT EMITTING DEVICE WITH A CONTINUOUS
LAYER OF COPPER COVERING THE ENTIRE HEADER
Frank Z. Hawrylo, Trenton, N.J., assignor to RCA Corporation,
New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,160
Int. a.3 HOIL 23/12. 23/36
U.S. CI. 357—81 6 Claims
1. In a light emitting device which comprises:
a base plate having two major surfaces;
a stud axially mounted on a first major surface;
a copper block mounted on the second major surface of the
base plate; and
a light emitting element mounted on the copper block;
the improvement which comprises:
a continuous layer of copper between about 5 and about 125
OtPt-
22 ,23
-f^^^^^^^^^H^i^^ii;^^
1. A color television signal processing apparatus comprising:
a first and a second register means for selectively dividing a
first and a second color television signals into sample
signals indicative of picture element levels during periods
of one n-th (n: integer) of one period of a color chromi-
nance subcarrier signal and temporarily storing indicia of
said sample signals for a predetermined number of sequen-
tial periods,
a calculation means for calculating correlationships, by use
of said sample signals indicative of said picture element
levels, between at least one color signal component con-
tained in said first and said second color television signals,
and for issuing a predetermined correlation signal,
a generating means for taking out at least one signal compo-
nent among a chroma difference component and a lumi-
nance difference component from said correlation signal,
and for generating a chromakey signal for controlling a
signal level of said first color television signal, and
a mixing means for mixing the level-controlled first color
television signal with a third color television signal.
4,394,681
OPTICAL SYSTEM FOR PROJECTION TELEVISION
William A. Rowe, Palatine, III., assignor to Zenith Radip Corpo-
ration, Glenview, III.
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,206
Int. a.3 H04N 9/31
U.S. CI. 358—60 9 Claims
1. For use in an ultra-compact, rear-projection television
receiver, a projection optical system protractible and retract-
ible within a narrow spatial column for emerging from and
nesting within a cabinet of said receiver, said optical system
comprising in combination:
a stationary optical assembly permanently enclosed in a
lower portion of said cabinet, said assembly having:
image projection means including at least one cathode ray
tube means for forming a television image, and having
associated projection lens means on a common axis
therewith for projecting an aerial image of said televi-
sion image a predetermined image projection distance
along an optical path folded by optical path folding
means, said common axis being oriented at a predeter-
mined, steeply upward projection angle; and
first mirror means mounted closely adjacent to said image
July 19,
983
ELECTRICAL
1245
projection means for receiving said aerial image, said
first mirror being oriented at a fixed predetermined first
mirror reflection angle effective to reflect said aerial
image steeply upwardly along said folded optical path;
a protractible optical assembly elevatable as a unit from said
cabinet including:
second mirror means located over said image projection
means for receiving said aerial image reflected from said
first mirror means when said protractible optical assem-
bly is protracted, said second mirror means being ori-
ented at a fixed predetermined second mirror reflection
angle effective to reflect said aerial image forwardiy,
and when said protractible optical assembly is retracted,
said predetermined second mirror reflection angle pro-
vides for angular conformance with said projection
angle of said image projection means effectively permit-
ting nesting of said second mirror with said image pro-
jection means;
rear projection screen means located appreciably for-
wardiy of said second mirror means and vertically
arranged for receiving, when said protractible optical
assembly is protracted, said aerial image reflected from
said second mirror means, and when said protractible
optical assembly is retracted, said screen means is verti-
cally arranged for nesting between a front panel of said
cabinet and said first mirror means;
said projection angle of said image projection means, and
said predetermined first and second mirror reflection
angles being such that said protractible optical assembly,
when retracted and nested, is overall depth-wise-shallow,
and said receiver is as compact as a conventional, large-
screen console television receiver, and when said pro-
tractible optical assembly is protracted within said narrow
spatial column, said receiver remains depth-wise-shallow,
yet is capable of displaying an image with an area greater
than three times the image area of said conventional tele-
vision receiver.
4,394,682
DC SWITCHING CIRCUIT
Eugene K. Severson, Colorado Springs, Colo., assignor to Hewl-
ett-Packard Company, Palo Alto, Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 968,244, Dec. 11, 1978, Pat. No. 4,346,308.
This application Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,130
Int. a.^ H04N 9/27
U.S. a. 358—73 4 Qaims
1. A bidirectionally conductive switching circuit for selec-
tively coupling a plurality of dc high voltages to a beam pene-
tration CRT, the switching circuit comprising:
a beam penetration CRT possessing a high voltage terminal
having a capacitance that can be charged and discharged
and also having a resistance high enough to limit the
current due to the resistance to a value less than either of
the first and second holding currents for the first and
second serial strings of triacs recited below:
a first dc voltage supply;
a first serial string of triacs, each triac thereof having first
and second conduction terminals and a gate terminal, the
conduction terminals coupled serially between the first dc
voltage supply and the high voltage terminal of the beam
penetration CRT, the first serial string having a first hold-
ing current beneath whose value the string will no longer
conduct in the absence of a signal applied to the gate
terminals;
a first trigger means having a plurality of outputs each indi-
vidually coupled to an associated gate terminal in the first
serial string of triacs, for synchronously applying to the
gate terminals a periodic signal switching the triacs con-
ductive to charge the capacitance of the beam penetration
CRT toward the voltage of the first dc voltage supply
until the charging current falls below the value of the first
^^tf^^-^A.' — ^1 ^^^^-H,
y.
I. I Tlll««(l I/-HO
▼"• CIIKUIT (
I 1
holding current and for thereafter maintaining the voltage
at that level;
a second dc voltage supply of voltage different in value than
the voltage of the first dc voltage supply;
a second serial string of triacs, each triac thereof having first
and second conduction terminals and a gate terminal, the
conduction terminals coupled serially between the second
dc voltage supply and the high voltage terminal of the
beam penetration CRT, the second serial string having a
second holding current t>eneath whose value the string
will no longer conduct in the absence of a signal applied to
the gate terminals; and
a second trigger means having a plurality of outputs each
individually coupled to an associated gate terminal in the
second serial string of triacs, for synchronously applying
to the gate terminals a periodic signal switching the triacs
conductive to discharge the capacitance of the beam
penetration CRT toward the voltage of the second dc
voltage supply until the discharging current falls below
the value of the second holding current and for thereafter
maintaining the voltage at that level.
1246
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,683
NEW PHOTODETECrOR ARRAY BASED OPTICAL
MEASUREMENT SYSTEMS
Nicholas Liptay-Wagner, Roland Renaud, both of Windsor;
Timothy R. Pryor, Tecumseh, and Donald A. Clarke,
Windsor, all of Canada, assignors to Diffracto Ltd., Canada
Filed Jun. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 163,290
Int. aj H04N 7/18
U.S. a. 358—107 55 Qaims
PHOTO OCTECTOB
AIWA* CAMERA
1L0W OflSS
flLTER
(LINE Aft
PHASE)
I tB^
I I PRECISION
TIMER
H IFI
COMPUTER BOS
DIFFERENTIATOR
DIFFERE
DIFFERENTIATOR
I ZERO
' CROSSING
DETECTOR
y
output of the first memory by a factor (1— ai), with
0=ai,= 1, to add the resulting products on an elemental
basis and to supply the resulting sum to an input of the first
memory;
second video processor means comprising a second memory,
multiplying and addition circuits connected at least with
the second memory to form a recursive filter which func-
tions to multiply the current image information by a factor
02, to multiply image information received from an output
of the second memory by a factor (1 —02), with 0^02= 1,
to add the resulting products on an elemental basis and to
supply the resulting sum to an input of the second mem-
ory;
subtraction means connected to outputs of the first memory
and the second memory which function to subtract image
information in the first memory from image information in
the second memory,
the factor a\ being different from the factor az-
1. Method for analyzing a light pattern produced on a photo
detector array, comprising the steps of:
filtering the signal from said photodetector array with a low
pass filter,
differentiating the output of (lie low pass filter to obtain a
derivative of said filtered signal at at least one point in said
pattern,
detecting the point of zero crossing of said differentiated
signal, and
timing said zero crossing point relative to a reference point
to obtain the position of at least one point.
4,394,684
DEVICE FOR DIFFERENTIAL IMAGE
DETERMINATION
Leonardus A. J. Verhoeven, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 165,174, Jul. 2, 1980, Pat. No.
4,350,998. This application Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,330
Gaims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 19, 1979,
7905611
Int. CV H04N 7/18
U.S. CI. 358—111 3 Qaims
pGT&pf^
I 5UBTRACT0R
/
f-l
0-*
COfWCRTER
v^ J
vnco pnocEssoo
1. A device for processing current image information which
has been separated into image elements comprising:
first video processor means comprising a first memory,
multiplying and addition circuits connected at least with
the first memory to form recursive filter means which
functions to multiply the current image information by a
factor a I, to multiply image information received from an
4,394,685
INTERFACE FOR OPERATING A DOT MATRIX
PRINTER FOR PRINTING A VIDEO IMAGE
David Yeomans, Portmarnock, Ireland; Christopher J. Wilkin-
son, Cronborough, England; Damien McCartney, Drogheda,
and Micheal O'Dwyer, Navan, both of Ireland, assignors to
Centronics Data Computer Corporation, Hudson, N.H.
Filed Sep. 4, 1980, Ser. No. 184,079
Int. OJ H04N 5/76
U.S. a. 358— 264 23 Qaims
1. A method for storing data for use in operating a printer of
the dot matrix type from digitized video data comprising a
composite sync signal incorporating field and line sync signals,
a data signal incorporating digitized image data, and a clock
signal incorporating regularly occurring time pulses for use in
synchronizing the digitized data signals, said method compris-
ing the steps of:
initiating an acquired data cycle upon detection of a next
field signal when the printer is ready to print;
counting line sync signals occurring after the detection of
the last-mentioned field sync signal;
counting timing pulses occurring after detection of each line
sync signal; and
selecting a predetermined portion, less than the whole of the
image data of each line, in accordance with the timing
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1247
pulse count, for storage in a random access memory at
location$ in the memory determined in accordance with
Mt S 0M'Vf t^iii
•x-i
*r
a method for correcting time base errors in the so reconsti-
tuted television signals, comprising the steps of
furnishing a sequence of reference television line synchroni-
zation signals;
separating output line synchronization signals from said
reconstituted television signal;
'-4-l£)^
-^
33SJ,.LX>; 1- — ,0--
'": '•'"■■■^' '"'^
^.^-^-^-zJt
»7- f f,i\
ivT-T^,
1;,
f J *
.r>
to
C^.
producing for every television line a pulse lasting for sub-
stantially all the time lapse between the arrival of one of
said output line synchronization signals and the next of
said reference synchronization signals: and
delaying the beginning of readout for the next television line
of said individual signal segments by applying said pulse
lasting for said time lapse to interrupt the furnishing of
readout clock pulses for readout purposes.
4,394,687
APPARATUS FOR DECODING DIGITAL
INFORMATION PROCESSED FOR INCLUSION IN
WIDE BAND T.V. VIDEO SIGNAL
Peter R. Hutt, Stoner End, Froxfield, Petersfield, Hampshire,
and John J. Moyce, 21 Culver Rd., Newbury, Berkshire, both
of England
PCT No. PCT/GB80/00078, § 371 Date Dec. 30, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Dec. 30, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/02489, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 13, 1980
PCT Filed Apr. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 227,050
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 30, 1979,
7914977
Int. Q.' H04N 7/08
U.S. Q. 358—147 7 Qaims
the line count associated with the portion of image data
being stored.
»CNft" VA lM
ma«'.c»'Wi wowa'KKi
CHWiKif"*^ a T
4,394,686
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR CORRECTING TIME BASE
ERRORS IN BROADBAND SIGNALS STORED IN OR
TRANSMITTED THROUGH A PLURALITY OF
NARROW-BAND CHANNELS
Winfried Horstmann, Griesheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,774
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 28,
1980, 3012070
Int. Q.5 H04N 5/76, 7/12
U.S. Q. 358—134 8 Qaims
1. In a method for reconstituting a television signal by read-
out at a predetermined readout rate for time transformation of
individual segments of said signal stored after pickup from a
record medium in a plurality of stores as received respectively
from a plurality of narrow-band channels at a recording rate
lower than said readout rate, said segments having been re-
corded on said medium after a time transformation reciprocal
to said first-mentioned time transformation:
x.vr/ \
0 0
i 0 scajcMo njfi
, fJUMPU ««> IT
(HUMOUS RO* y *S 0)
1. A television receiver system for receiving digital informa-
tion signals transmitted with a conventional wide band video
signal to enable display of the information represented by the
digital information signal in a display having predetermined
numbers of rows and columns of characters, the information
signals being transmitted in lines each of which contain data
relating to a number of characters less than the predetermined
number of columns in the display, comprising:
means for receiving the digital information signals separated
from the wide band video signals:
means for storing said digital information signals for display
in said predetermined numbers of rows and columns;
1248
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
means for detecting in the digital information signals a tabu-
lation control code indicative of the presence of digital
information relating to two rows of the display in an
information line and including row and column addressing
codes and wherein said means for detecting includes row
address and column address detecting means for respec-
tively detecting the row and column addressing codes,
means for retaining an immediately previous row address
for a subsequently received data information line when
said detecting means detects said control code, and
wherein the column address detecting means controls the
retaining means to change the row address to that re-
ceived from said subsequently received data information
line at a time determined by the detected column address
received from said subsequently received data information
line; and
means for controlling the storage addressing of said digital
information signals in said means for storing in accordance
with said control code to ensure proper read out for dis-
play of the information.
device including means for selecting the particular table-
look-ups to be read by said central processing unit, and
f a digital to analog converter for converting the modified
video data from said first memory device into analog
video signals.
5. A method of manipulating video picture data for the
purpose of enhancing contrast over certain areas of interest
comprising:
a. passing said video picture data through a first memory
device which is arranged to modify the video picture data
according to the contents of a table-look-up contained
therein,
b. providing a second memory device having therein a plu-
rality of different table-look-ups, each table-look-up corre-
sponding to a different gamma correction, and
c. selectively reading out one of said table-look-ups from
said second memory device and writing said table-look-up
so read into said first memory device.
4,394,688
VIDEO SYSTEM HAVING AN ADJUSTABLE DIGITAL
GAMMA CORRECTION FOR CONTRAST
ENHANCEMENT
Hitoshi lida, Bedford, and Pay-Shin King, Newton, both of
Mass., assignors to Hamamatsu Systems, Inc., Waltham,
Mass.
Filed Aug. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 2%,068
Int. a.3 H04N 5/14. 5/20
U.S. a. 358—160 9 Qaims
TO HOST COMPUTER
N TV
^ CAMERA
TQ HOST COMPUTER «
TV MOMITOR
c
25
7"
ALU
—r
IFRAMEMEMORT^ PROCESSOR
I COMTROL
JJ I PANEL
4,394,689
PROGRAMMABLE CRT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL
Edward L. Wallace, Ellicott City, and Theodore Wright,
Crownsville, both of Md., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,357
Int. CV H04N 5/14
U.S. a. 358—168 4 Qaims
BR«MTIC5S
SiT
\o
COMP05ITI
OATAJ) AND
GRAPHICS
VI Deo
OSPLAf
I
r
22
_1Z_
L
J"
L>
oecooiNG
LOGIC
MEANS
M
1^
»^ CONV ^^
4S
40d
46d
500
WtAPHKS
CONTWOLLEB
6 6'T
LATCM
0/A
CONV
"
^
1. A video system comprising a television camera for con-
verting visual information into analog video signals, a digital
video signal processor for digitally processing said anolog
video signals and a television monitor for displaying an image
of the processed analog video signals, said digital video signal
processor including:
a. an analog to digital converter for converting the analog
video signals into video data,
b. a first memory device for modifying the video data ac-
cording to the particular contents contained therein,
c. a second memory device, said second memory device
having stored therein a plurality of table-look-ups, each
table-look-up corresponding to a different gamma correc-
tion,
d. a central processing unit for controlling the operations of
the digital video signal processor, said operations includ-
ing reading out one of said table-look-ups in said second
memory device and writing said read data into said first
memory device,
e. a manually operated control device for controlling the
operations of the central processing unit, said control
1. A system including means for selectively displaying any
one of a plurality of video channels on a cathode ray tube
display means, said system being characterized by the im-
provement comprising:
a manually actuable brightness set enable means for provid-
ing an enable signal while actuated;
a manually operable control means for providing a selec-
tively variable brightness input signal;
computer means, responsive to coincidence of said enable
signal and said brightness input signal for providing a
digital word output representative of the currently dis-
played channel and a display brightness level correspond-
ing to said input signal;
decoding means, responsive to said digital word output to
provide a plurality of separate digital words each repre-
sentative of a selected brightness level for one of said
channels;
a plurality of digital storage and readout means each corre-
sponding to one of said channels and operative to store the
digital words for that channel upon deactivation of said
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1249
enable signal, and to read out said digital word whenever
the corresponding channel is being displayed;
means for converting each digital word to a brightness level
control signal when the corresponding channel is dis-
played;
said display means being responsive to said brightness level
control signal whereby a predetermined brightness level
of the display means is effected for each channel upon its
display.
4,394,690
VARIABLE ASPECT RATIO TELEVISION RECEIVER
Katsumi Kobayashi, Machida, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,389
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 25, 1980, 55-
55871[U] I
I Int. CI.' H04N 3/22. 5/74
U.S. CI. 358—180 10 Claims
10
1. In a variable aspect ratio television receiver comprising:
a video signal input terminal supplied with a video signal
which can be either a standard composite video signal
intended to be displayed at with standard aspect ratio or a
non-standard composite video signal having an identifica-
tion signal and intended to be displayed with a non-stand-
ard aspect ratio;
a video amplifier having an input connected to said video
input terminal and an output providing an image output
signal;
an image reproducing apparatus supplied with the image
output signal from said amplifier and displaying a video
picture;
deflecting means associated with said image reproducing
apparatus and developing said video picture according to
a predetermined format with a deflection height and a
deflection width, such that a portion of said video signal
occurs in an overscan portion beyond the deflection
height of said format;
an identification signal detecting circuit supplied with said
input video signal for detecting the presence of said identi-
fication signal carried in said non-standard composite
video signal; and
a deflection width changing circuit means connected be-
tween said identification signal detecting circuit and said
deflecting means for changing said deflection width devel-
oped at said deflecting means in response to said identifi-
cation signal, thereby varying the aspect ratio of said
video picture; the improvement in which said identifica-
tion signal is carried in said non-standard composite video
signal during said overscan portion of said video picture
of said non-standard video signal, and said identification
signal detecting circuit includes means adapted for detect-
ing of said identification signal during said overscan per-
iod.
4,394,691
REMOTE CONTROL SYSTEM
Toshio Amano, Tokyo; Kunio Nagai, and Juri Honma, both of
Yokohama, all of Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 288,517
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 8, 1980, 55-
113240[U]
Int. a.' H04N 5/44
U.S. CI. 358—194.1 12 Qaims
^j?IA
IJHl
^''
?0
r^
?b
^6 m ■/■/ ~ J4
li
/2C ' ^?IC
'k
1. A remote control system for selectively controlling a
desired one of plural devices by the remote transmission of
control signals from a transmitter, said system comprising:
central control.means including decoding means for decoding
a remotely transmitted control signal to produce a corre-
sponding device control signal, said central control means
being coupled to said plural devices for controlling said
desired device with said device control signal;
plural receiving means spatially separated from each other,
each receiving means receiving said remotely transmitted
control signal;
at least one input terminal provided on said central control
means, said at least one input terminal being coupled to one
of said receiving means for receiving a remotely transmitted
control signal therefrom; and
means for supplying the remotely transmitted control signal
received at said at least one input terminal to said decoding
means, whereby a desired device is controlled in response to
a remotely transmitted control signal received by said re-
ceiving means coupled to said at least one input terminal.
4,394,692
HOUSING ASSEMBLY FOR AN ELECTRICAL
APPARATUS
Rein S. Randmae, Fort Salonga, and Todd H. Whitaker, Smith-
town, both of N.Y., assignors to Vicon Industries, Inc., Plain-
view, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,582
Int. a.' H04N 5/30
U.S. a. 358—229 7 Qaims
1. A housing assembly for an electronic surveillance camera
comprising:
a lower housing for providing support to said camera having
a frame portion at the rearward end thereof, said rear
frame portion defining an open space through which
connections may be made from the exterior of said hous-
ing assembly to its interior;
an upper housing matingly engaging said lower housing to
create an enclosed region within said housing assembly;
an end cap detachably connected to said frame portion of
said lower housing and covering said open space in said
frame portion to seal said enclosed region from contami-
nants external to said housing assembly,
said end cap being constructed of a single piece of resilient
material and comprising:
1250
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
means for relieving strain on a cable entering said housing
assembly through said end cap, said end cap having a slit
communicating with said strain relief means for facilitat-
ing entry of cables therethrough, and
4=?^
means for providing the altered pel array pulse train to the
scanning recorder means to modulate the dot patterns
generated thereby.
4,394,694
TAPE SYNCHRONIZING APPARATUS
Ichiro Ninomiya, Kanagawa, and Jun Takayama, Tokyo, both of
Japan, assignors to Sony Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 189,576
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1979, 54-124368;
Nov. 19, 1979, 54-149859
Int. aJ GllB 27/00; H04N 5/78
U.S. a. 360—14.3 7 Claims
resilient notched protrusions extending from said end cap
and spaced so as to engage the inner rim of said frame
portion to provide detachable connection between said
end cap and said frame portion.
4,394,693
SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR GENERATING
ENLARGED OR REDUCED IMAGES
Robert E. Shirley, Boulder, Colo., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 23,404, Mar. 23, 1979, abandoned. This
application Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,555
Int. aJ H04N 1/22
U.S. a. 358—298 20 Claims
SCMfmC ItOUMSU
t4tcc:roK\,
SCJ>MN€D
IrSi^^^
r
PHOrOOCTECTOR
SDuMw;
\£L£UCST
jCONWCL
r^30
1. A system for reproducing an original image of given size
in a selectable reproduced size that is variable within a substan-
tial range, comprising:
scanning means for generating a pel array pulse train repre-
sentative of intensity variations of individual pels in a pel
array of rows and columns on the original image;
scanning recorder means for generating dot patterns in rows
and columns on a reproduced image medium; and proces-
sor means responsive to the pel array pulse train generated
by the scanning means for altering the pel array pulse train
to modify the number of rows and columns in the pel
array of rows and columns on the original image, the
processor means including means for selecting one of a
plurality of different scale factors, means responsive to a
selected scale factor for generating a coded pulse train
having pulse positions synchronized with the pel array
pulse train, the coded pulse train being comprised of
pulses of first and second values, the arrangement of
which is determined by the selected scale factor and varies
for different scale factors, means for sequentially storing
the individual pulses of the coded pulse train, means for
sequentially applying the stored individual pulses of the
coded pulse train to alter the pel array pulse train, and
1. A video tape synchronizing system for a helical scan video
tape recorder which uses a video tape having information
signals and time code signals recorded thereon and which is
adapted to reproduce said information signals from said video
tape when the latter is moved at any one of a plurality of
different speeds, comprising:
time code reader means for reading out said time code sig-
nals recorded on said video tape which is used in said
helical scan video tape recorder;
selecting means for setting a direction and any one of said
plurality of different speeds of movement of the video tape
at an in-point, wherein said in-point indicates a starting
point for playing back information signal* recorded in said
video tape; and
control processing means for determining a pre-roll point at
which said video tape is to be stopped by determining the
distance between said in-point and said pre-roll point in
response to said time code signals read out by said time
code reader means which correspond to said in-point of
said video tape and said set direction and said set one of
said plurality of different speeds of movement of said
video tape at said in-point, and for controlling said helical
scan video tape recorder to stop said video tape at said
pre-roll point.
4,394,695
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR EVALUATING
RECORDING SYSTEMS
Douglas K. Mahon, Boulder Creek, Calif., assignor to Sharp
Corporation, Osaka, Japan
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,699
Int. aJ GllB 5/09
U.S. a. 360—53 7 Qaims
1. Apparatus for evaluating recording systems including
means responsive to the raw data for generating a plurality of
data windows having leading and trailing edges, a plurality of
data separators connected to receive said data windows and
the reproduced data and serving to separate out data which
falls outside the windows, means for providing at each of said
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
12S1
separators different relative positions between at least one edge 4,394,697
of said window and said data to thereby provide different MAGNETIC RECORDING/REPRODUCING APPARATUS
Tsutomu Kurosawa, Ohmiya, Japan, assignor to Sahi Electron-
k
~^ COMPifi^TCfij— H -OIWTEB
\Z-
U^-— ^ — I
!* Se«l»4T0R I I COMPiMTOfil — A COJNnB
M'NOCMr
iCO*WWfiT0fi — •
' ^ XM*>AWTTfil— J ^j.(rtB I
effective sized windows at each of said separators for separat-
ing out the data.
4,394,696
APPARATUS FOR POSITIONING MAGNETIC HEAD TO
POSITION CORRESPONDING TO REFERENCE TRACK
ON MAGNETIC TAPE
Tomohisa Yoshimaru, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,288
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 1, 1980, 55-42437
Int. Cl.^ GllB 21/08. 5/55. 17/00
U.S. CI. 360—78 2 Claims
-=^ir>.^x .
"^^ f
STEPPtB ; I i
MOTOR
JcontrolL .
; CIRCUIT p 5
1. In a magnetic tape apparatus provided with a magnetic
head movable in a direction perpendicular to the direction of
running of a magnetic tape having a plurality of data tracks
extending in the running direction thereof and a stepper motor
for moving the magnetic head in the direction perpendicular to
the running direction of the tape with respect to a reference
position corresponding to a reference track of the tape, said
stepper motor including a rotor and a plurality of phase wind-
ings successively excited by a drive pulse signal, apparatus for
positioning said magnetic head to said reference position com-
prising:
detecting means for detecting the arrival of said magnetic head
at the neighborhood of said reference position when said
head is moved toward said reference position;
a plurality of selectable switches for specifying the phase and
the corresponding phase winding which will be excited
when said head is at said reference position; and
control circuit means connected to said detecting means, said
switches and said stepper motor for causing said stepper
motor to stop said magnetic head at said reference position
when the previously specified phase winding of said step
motor is excited after the detection of arrival of said mag-
netic head at the neighborhood of said reference position by
said detecting means to thereby obtain the reference position
of said magnetic head.
ics Co., Ltd., Ohmiya, Japan
Filed Aug. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 177,736
Int. CI.' GllB 15/32: B65H 51/28: H04M 1/65
U.S. a. 360—91
9 Oaims
--^t:
1. Recording-reproducing apparatus for the automatic an-
swering of telephones comprising:
first and second independently movable, elongated. Hexible
recording media, orie for storing a pre-recorded message
to be transmitted and the other for recording an incoming
message.
first supply and take-up means for the first of said media for
effecting forward and rewind movements thereof,
second supply and take-up means for the second of said
media for effecting forward and rewind movements
thereof,
motive means,
cam means driven by said motive means,
first pivotable lever means formed with first follower means
for following said cam means and with first pulley means
driven by said motive means.
second pivotable lever means formed with second follower
means for following said cam means and with second
pulley means driven by said motive means,
said first lever means being pivoted in response to the move-
ments of said first follower means in such a manner as
selectively to bring said first pulley means mto driving
relation with at least said first take-up means and thereby
control at least the forward movement of the first of said
recording media, and
said second lever means being pivoted in response to the
movements of said second follower, means in such a man-
ner as selectively to bring said second pulley means into
driving relation with at least said second take-up means
and thereby control at least the forward movement of the
second of said recording media.
4,394,698
APPARATUS FOR AUTOMATIC INVERTING OF
CASSETTES
Etienne A. M. Schatteman, W'emmel, Belgium, assignor to Staar
S. A., Belgium
Filed Mar. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 245,381
Int. CI.' GllB 5/00. 15/68
i.S. a. 360—96.5 10 Oaims
1. Apparatus for inverting a cassette for use in connection
with a recorder/playback device, the inverting apparatus
comprising:
(a) a rotatable magazine for receiving the cassette and invert-
ing the cassette during rotation of the magazine:
(b) movable stop means for stopping and retaining the cas-
sette at a holding position within the magazine: and
(c) transfer means separate from said rotatable magazine for
removing the cassette from said holding position m the
1252
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
rotatable magazine and conveying the cassette to an oper- 4,394,700
ating position in the recorder/playback device, said trans- RESTRAINING AND SEALING MECHANISM FOR DISC
CARTRIDGE
Roy J. Edwards, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Disctron, Inc.,
Milpitas, Calif.
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,899
Int. a.3 GllB 23/04
U.S. a. 360—133
«, ^^
fer means engaging and moving said stop means to release
the cassette.
4,394,699
THIN-FILM MAGNETIC HEAD
Nobuyuki Kaminaka, Moriguchi; Kenji Kanai, Neyagawa;
Norimoto Nouchi, Katano, and Noboru Nomura, Kyoto, ail of
Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Japan
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,307
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 21, 1980, 55-21099
Int. CI.' GllB 5/12. 5/30. 5/22
U.S. a. 360—113 9 Claims
1. A thin-film magnetic head comprising a substrate, a layer
of magnetoresistive element deposited on said substrate at a
temperature other than at room termperature and a conductor
layer for supplying said magnetoresistive element with an
electric current in the longitudinal direction thereof, wherein:
said substrate comprises a single crystal material;
at least two crystal axes of said substrate material are in parallel
with the surface on which said layer of magnetoresistive
element is deposited, the coefficient of thermal expansion of
the substrate being different in the directions of said crystal
axes;
the orientations of said crystal axes and the coefficients of
thermal expansion in said directions are in the relationship
such that an internal stress is set up within said magnetoresis-
tive element in parallel or perpendicular to said longitudinal
direction of said element due to the difference between the
temperature during the deposition of said element and room
temperature; and
the magnetostriction coefficient of said element is selected so
that said set up stress has the effect of orienting the spins
within said element in said longitudinal direction.
17 Oaims
^ ^■VJ^^'^^e.l^lA-^ V^
1. In a cartridge containing a rotatable disc oriented gener-
ally parallel to the top and bottom of the cartridge and at-
tached to a hub assembly, said hub assembly rotatable about an
axis by a disc-drive assembly through an opening in the bottom
of said cartridge and displaceable axially with respect to said
cartridge, said cartridge for insertion into a disc -drive assem-
bly, a mechanism for restraining the movement of said mag-
netic disc and hub assembly relative to said cartridge and for
sealing said cartridge when said cartridge is not inserted into
said disc -drive assembly comprising:
an annular surface on said cartridge near said opening, said
annular surface fixed with respect to the top and bottom of
said cartridge;
an annular flange carried by said hub assembly having an
annular sealing surface generally opposite to said annular
surface on said cartridge and configured to sealingly en-
gage said annular surface on said cartridge; and
means for axially pressing said annular sealing surface on
said fiange against said annular surface on said cartridge
by pressing on an annular surface of said hub assembly,
said means acting when said cartridge is not inserted into
said disc -drive assembly to restrain said disc and hub
assembly from rotating and to seal said cartridge about
said opening, said means being located peripherally about
said hub assembly near the bottom of said cartridge and
outside that portion of the cartridge containing the disc.
4,394,701
RECORDING TIME MODE DETECTOR
Kouichi Igata, Hirakata, and Masaaki Kobayashi, Kawanishi,
both of Japan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.,
Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,476
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 24, 1979, 54-152324;
Mar. 21, 1980, 55-36676; Jul. 3, 1980, 55-91486
Int. a.3 GllB 15/52
U.S. a. 360—137 3 Qalms
.^ J\
J
^^r1
1. In a multi-speed video tape recorder/reproducer utilizing
a magnetic tape having video information and control signals
recorded thereon, and having a magnetic tape driving means
comprising a capstan, and further having one of said control
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1253
signals recorded on said magnetic tape indicative of a video
frame, a recording time mode detector for detecting the re-
cording time mode of the video information recorded on said
magnetic tape, said recording time mode detector comprising:
a reproducing head means for reproducing said control
signals recorded on said magnetic tapes;
a frequency generator means operatively mechanically con-
nected to said capstan for providing a signal indicative of
the number of rotations of said capstan;
a counter means for counting the number of pulses output by
said frequency generator means during a video frame, a
clock input of said counter means being connected to said
frequency generator means and a reset input of said
counter means being connected to said reproducing head
means;
a decoder and storage means operatively connected to said
reproducing head means and said counter means for de-
tecting and storing the recording time mode of said mag-
netic tape by determining the count stored in said counter
means during one video frame;
and indicator means operatively connected to said decoder
and storage means for indicating the detected recording
time mode.
4,394,702
POWER FAILURE DETECTION AND CONTROL
CIRCUIT
Guy Bootbe, Laguna Beach, Calif., assignor to Sperry Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
I Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,887
' Int. CV H02H 3/24
U.S. a. 361—92 10 aaims
4,394,703
LOAD PROTECTING ARRANGEMENT
James S. Butcher, Glendale Heights, III., assignor to GTE Auto-
matic Electric Labs Inc., Northlake, III.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,188
Int. a.' H02H 3/08
U.S. a. 361—101 17 Claims
1
1 <»0.
1
1. A protection circuit for use between a first source of DC
power and a load, comprising:
current pass means connected between said load and said DC
source;
DC bias means connected to said current pass means, condi-
tioning said current pass means to conduct therethrough,
current from said first DC power source to said load;
sensing means connected to said current pass means;
control means connected to said sensing means and to said
current pass means, initially operated in response to detec-
tion of a fiow of current in excess of a predetermined value,
from said first source to said load by said sensing means, to
operate said current pass means to limit the fiow of current
therethrough;
feedback means connected between said current pass means
and said control means, developing a signal in response to
said limiting of current flow through said current pass
means, to render said control means fully operated, and
render said current pass means inoperative;
and reset means operated in response to said rendering of said
current pass means inoperative, to disable said feedback
means developed signal to thereby render said current pass
means reoperated.
4,394,704
SURGE ARRESTER ASSEMBLY
Raymond D. Jones, Cheam, England, assignor to Til Corpora-
tion, Lindenhurst, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 18,360, Mar. 6, 1979, Pat. No. 4,320,435.
This application Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,897
Int. a.' H02H 1/04
U.S. a. 361— 119 4 Claims
1. A ciiicuit for detecting the condition of a power source
comprising,
a first pulse circuit (1, OSl) for selectively generating pulses
(D) of a first time period and frequency as a function of
the signal (C) supplied thereto from said power source,
a second pulse circuit (OS2) for selectively generating pulses
(E) of a second time period and frequency as a function of
the pulses (D) supplied thereto by said first pulse circuit,
said second pulse circuit selectively supplying pulses to
said first pulse circuit to effectively disable said first pulse
circuit, and
reset circuit means (2, etc) connected between said power
source and each of said first and second pulse circuits to
reset said first and second pulse circuits to a prescribed
condition when said power source has returned to a pre-
scribed level.
ff
\J^
\:-:.-v.-V ■ - \>/Tf-/oic
h
1. A two electrode gas tube arrester comprising,
(a) an insulating tubular member having a central bore;
(b) first conductive end cap means carried on one end of said
tubular member and in abutting relationship thereot, said
end cap means including a central conductor extending
1254
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July .19, 1983
axially thereon through said tubular member to present
the free end thereof beyond the other end of said tubular
member;
(c) second conductive end cap means carried on said other
end of said tubulr member, said second end cap means
having a portion extending over said free end of said
conductor such that an ionization gap is defined therebe-
tween;
(d) said second end cap means including a first cylindrical
portion bonded to the external surface of said tubular
member and a second cylindrical portion of reduced diam-
eter joined thereto by a shoulder portion, and further
including a circular portion in juxtaposition to said free
end of said conductor, said ionization gap being defined (i)
by the space between said conductor free end and said
circular portion or (ii) by the space between said conduc-
tor and said second reduced diameter portion;
(e) said shoulder and said other end of said tubular member
defining a clearance therebetween for controlling the size
of said first mentioned ionization gap space;
(0 said first and second end cap means being joined to said
tubular member in gas tight relationship to form a control
volume; and
(g) ionizable gas in said control volume.
4,394,705
ANTI-STATIC HOSE ASSEMBLIES
Lawrence P. Blachman, Reading, Pa., assignor to The Polymer
Corporation, Reading, Pa.
Filed Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,711
Int. CI.' H05F 3/00
U.S. CI. 361—215 6 Claims
sockets positioned thereon for said electrical components;
each of said sockets being shaped to telescopically receive
therein one end of an associated electrical component and
surround said component end on each side thereof to
retain the same in place; said sockets being arranged in
pairs with one member of each pair disposed in said first
and second housing portions, respectively, and the mem-
bers of each socket pair being aligned for receiving the
associated electrical component therebetween; each of
--^^fei^^
¥1
said sockets having a central axis which is disposed in a
mutually parallel relationship; and
(c) said first and second housing portions being intercon-
nected with alignment of said socket pairs, and. conver-
gence of the same along an axis parallel with the axes of
said sockets, with opposing ends of said electrical compo-
nents positioned between and aligned with the associated
socket pair, whereby each of said electrical components is
vcaptured therebetween to securely mount said electrical
]components in said housing without separate fasteners.
4,394,707
ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT PACKAGE
John J. Consoli, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,470
Int. a.3 H05K 1/02
U.S. a. 361—398 3 Claims
1. An anti-static hose comprising:
a tube which is a tubular component of the hose;
a reinforcement which is high tenacity yarns applied in
tensioned relationship over the tube;
a static drain which is a conductive layer over the reinforce-
ment; and,
a cover which is a continuous protective layer of polymeric
material enveloping the static drain and the reinforce-
ment, the improvement comprising:
a stripe of a conductive polymer extending through the
cover and along the length of the hose, which stripe
forms a portion of the outer surface of the cover and is
in contact with the static drain.
4,394,706
POWER CONVERTER FOR RECREATIONAL VEHICLES
Daniel J. Crafts, Battle Creek, Mich., assignor to Progressive
Dynamics, Inc., Marshall, Mich.
Filed Jul. 11, 1979, Ser. No. 56,605
Int. a.' H05K 5/02
U.S. a. 361—331 24 Claims
1. A power converter for recreational vehicles, comprising:
(a) at least two electrical components being electrically
interconnected for altering the characteristics of a source
of electrical power;
(b) a housing adapted for mounting in said recreational
vehicle, and including first and second portions; each of
said housing portions having an interior surface with
1. An electrical circuit package comprising:
a flexible dielectrical substrate;
a single first portion of the dielectrical substrate having
located thereon all electrically conductive paths and all
electrical components associated with the circuit package,
the components being electrically connected to the con-
ductive paths on the first pwrtion;
at least one electrical component supported on the first
portion of the substrate including an integral catch remote
to the electrical connection of the component to the con-
ductive paths on the first portion; and
a single second portion of the dielectric substrate extending
lengthwise from the first portion, the second portion being
free of any electrically conductive paths and electrical
components, the second portion having integral means for
cooperating with the catch on the component to secure
the two portions together, the second portion being at
least equal in length to the first portion and being folded
over and secured to the first portion to provide an electri-
cally insulating protective cover for the components.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1255
1 1 4,394,708
ELECTRONIC THERMOSTAT WITH PROTECTED
CIRCUITRY
Donald J. Kasprzyk, Maple Grove, Minn., assignor to Honey-
well Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
1 1 Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,067
I ' Int. a? H05K 5/02 '
U.S. a. 361—399 8 Qaims
1. An electronic thermostat having circuit components that
are subject to electrical and mechanical damage, including:
mounting base means and cover riieans forming said electronic
thermostat when said base means and said cover means are
mounted together; circuit board means including electronic
circuit components that are susceptible of electrical and me-
chanical damage; said circuit board means further having
contact means in the form of a plurality of separate individual
contact members mounted upon said board means and con-
nected to said electronic circuit components; said circuit board
means mounted within said cover means; insulating enclosure
means mounted within said cover means to partially enclose
said circuit board means to protect said circuit board means
from damage by accidental contact with said circuit board
means; said insulating enclosure means including barrier means
which form separate individual plural contact openings of
limited size to provide access to said individual contact mem-
bers through said contact openings; said base means adapted to
be mounted upon a surface with said base means including
connection means; and said base connection means including
separate plural electric base contact members that project from
said base means through said openings to engage said circuit
board contact members to complete electric connections from
said base means to said circuit board means to complete the
mounting of said electronic thermostat.
4,394,709
DIE-STAMPED CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY HAVING
RELIEF MEANS TO PREVENT TOTAL SWITCH
DEFORMATION
Boyd G. Brower, and John W. Shaffer, both of Williamsport,
Pa., assignors to GTE Products Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 131,614, Mar. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4,320,572.
This application Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,531
Int. a,3 H05K 3/20
U.S. a. 361-^401 11 Claims
1. A circuit board assembly for use within a photoflash
device, said circuit board assembly comprising:
a dielectric substrate; ,
a thin, electrically conductive switching element positioned
on said dielectric substrate and having a portion thereof
die-stamped an established distance within a surface of
said dielectric substrate;
an electrically conductive member die-stamped within said
surface of said dielectric substrate simultaneously with
said switching element and having a part thereof located
on said portion of said switching element die-stamped
within said substrate, said die-stamping electrically con-
necting said conductive member to said portion of said
^ switching element; and
relief means located within said dielectric substrate for pre-
venting total severing of said switching element during
said die-stamping thereof within said dielectric substrate,
at least one segment of said portion of said switching
element die-stamped within said substrate being aligned
with said relief means during said die-stamping and there-
after being positioned within said relief means such that
said segment is not severed, at least one part of said die-
■ stamped portion of said switching element adjacent said
die-stamped segment of said portion being deformed or
severed by said die-stamping.
4,394,710
DIE-STAMPED CIRCUIT BOARD ASSEMBLY FOR
PHOTOFLASH DEVICES
Boyd G. Brower, Williamsport; David R. Broadt, Lewisburg, and
John W. Shaffer, Williamsport, all of Pa^ assignors to GTE
Products Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 131,711, Mar. 19, 1980, Pat. No. 4.325,771.
This application Jan. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 336,532
Int. CI.' H05K 3/20
U.S. CI. 361—401 15 Oaims
1. A circuit board assembly for use within a photofiash
device, said circuit board assembly comprising: _
a dielectric substrate;
at least one thin, electrically conductive switching element
having a portion thereof die-stamped an established dis-
tance within a surface of said substrate; and
at least one thin, electrically conductive metallic member
die-stamped within said surface of said substrate simulta-
neously with said switching element and having a part
thereof located on said die-stamped portion of said switch-
ing element, said die-stamping electrically connecting said
conductive member to said portion of said switching
element and securedly positioning both said conductive
member and said switching element on said dielectric
substrate without severing said switching element.
4,394,711
CIRCUIT BOARD WITH WELDABLE TERMINALS
Larry R. Conley, Fountain Valley. Calif., assignor to Intercon-
nection Technology, Inc., Costa Mesa. Calif.
Division of Ser. No. 44,404, Jun. 1, 1979, Pat. No. 4,242,719.
This application May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,565
Int. CV H05K 1/18
U.S. CI. 361—408 9 Oaims
1. A solderable and weldable circuit board apparatus com-
prising:
a base board having a multiplicity of holes therein;
a layer of solderable material dispKJsed on said base board
and forming a plurality of separate connection regions, the
1256
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
layer in each of said regions plating a plurality of holes and
an area on said base board which connects the holes; and
a plurality of pins of weldable material, each lying in a
selected one of said holes and having an electrode-engage-
able end to enable the welding of a wire thereto, each pin
being in press-fit contact with the layer of solderable
material on the walls of the hole but being free of bonding
spacing substantially equal to twice the diameter of said
cross section.
to the solderable material that plates the hole so the pin
can be removed by forcing out without substantial dam-
age to the walls of the hole;
each of said connection regions having at least one hole
which holds one of said pinds and at least one other hole
which is devoid of a pin to enable a lead to be soldered
therein.
4,394,713
SELF-SUPPORTING CAPACITOR CASING HAVING A
PAIR OF TERMINAL PLATES SANDWICHING AN
INSULATIVE BODY FOR ALIGNING TERMINAL
POSITIONS
Kazunori Yoshida, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Electric
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,585
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 7, 1979, 54-
169518[U]
Int. CV BOIJ 17/00; HOIG 9/00
U.S. a. 361—433 10 Qaims
4,394,712
ALIGNMENT-ENHANCING FEED-THROUGH
CONDUCTORS FOR STACKABLE
SILICON-ON-SAPPHIRE WAFERS
Thomas R. Anthony, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,854
Int. CI.' H05K 1/14
U.S. CI. 361—411 8 Claims
1. An article of manufacture comprising in combination:
(a) a plurality of bodies, said bodies being disposed in an
array, each said body being adjacent to a next body with
a relatively uniform gap therebetween, each said body
having top and bottom major opposed surfaces substan-
tially parallel to each other and an outer peripheral edge
area interconnecting said major surfaces, said array hav-
ing an array axis, said array axis being substantially per-
pendicular to the major surfaces of each body of said
array; and
(b) means for electrically interconnecting said bodies, said
means
(i) having a substantially circular cross section,
(ii) having a plurality of materials of construction, said
materials being arranged about said cross section in the
region between said top and bottom surfaces as a first
core material, a second material circularly encompass-
ing said core material and a third outermost material
circularly encompassing said first and second materials,
the material of said cross section in said gap being sub-
stantially said first core material;
(iii) extending through and between each said body in said
array,
(iv) having a means axis, said means axis being substan-
tially parallel to said array axis, and
(v) being arranged in a substantially periodic means array,
said means array having a means axis-to-means axis
1. A self-supporting double-layer electrical capacitor com-
prising a conductive case having a bottom portion, an open end
portion, and a side wall portion extending therebetween; a
laminated capacitor body having a plurality of double-layer
electrical capacitor cells disposed within said conductive case
and having opposed first and second electrodes substantially
parallel to each other, said first electrode facing the inner
bottom portion of said conductive case and being electrically
connected thereto; a first terminal plate disposed on said sec-
ond electrode and being electrically connected thereto, said
first terminal plate having a first elongated terminal portion
which is substantially perpendicular to a principal surface of
said first terminal plate and supported away from said side wall
of said conductive case, said first elongated terminal portion
extending toward said open end portion and set away from a
center axis of said conductive case; insulating means for electri-
cally isolating said first terminal plate and said laminated ca-
pacitor body from the side wall portion of said conductive
case; an insulative body disposed on said first terminal plate
and having an opening for said first elongated terminal portion
to pass through; and a second terminal plate disposed on said
insulative body and having an opening for said first elongated
terminal portion to pass through, said second terminal plate
having a second elongated terminal portion substantially per-
pendicular to a principal surface thereof and supported away
from said side wall of said conductive case, said second elon-
gated terminal portion extending toward said open end portion
and set away from the center axis of said conductive case, said
second terminal plate and said insulative body having compli-
mentary contours for positioning said second terminal plate so
that said first elongated terminal portion passing through the
opening of said insulative body is electrically isolated from said
second terminal plate, said open end portion of said conductive
case being caulked onto a periphery of said second terminal
plate for making an electrical connection thereto, said caulking
pressing said second terminal plate toward the bottom of said
conductive case, whereby electrical connections are achieved
entirely by a mechanical pressure.
July 19,
983
ELECTRICAL
1257
4,394,714
STEP LIGHTING SYSTEM
James Rote, 9523 Bullion Way, Orangevale, Calif. 95662
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,046
Int. CV F21V 7/04: F21S 1/14
U.S. a. 362—32 12 Qaims
1. A protective device for a ground-deposited light compris-
ing: I
a housing;
a light source located in said housing, said housing having at
least one opening therein for letting light out of said hous-
ing; I
transparent sealing materials for sealing said opening; and,
granular particles that are harder than said transparent seal-
ing material, said granular particles being partly embed-
ded in said transparent sealing material and partly pro-
truding above the surface thereof for protecting said trans-
parent sealing material against abrasion.
4,394,716
SELF-CONTAINED UNDERWATER LIGHT ASSEMBLY
Thomas G. Campagna; Alfred A. D' Andrea, Sr., both of Seiden,
and Frank Campagna, East Northport, all of N.Y., assignors
to Aqualume, Incorporated, Seiden, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 224,676
Int. a.' F21L 11/00
U.S. CI. 362—158 14 Qaims
4,394,715
PROTECTIVE DEVICE FOR A GROUND-DEPOSITED
LIGHT
Anders Dahlberg, Taby, Sweden, assignor to Tatis Plasttatnigar
AB, Taby, Sweden
PCT No. PCT/SE79/00070, § 371 Date Nov. 30, 1979, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 28, 1979, PCT Pub. No. WO79/00849, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 1, 1979
PCT Filed Mar. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 177,535
Qaims pnority, application Sweden, Mar. 30, 1978, 7803611
I Int. a.-' F21S 1/02
U.S. CI. 362—153 20 Qaims
1. A lighting system for stairs comprising:
(a) A light panel adapted for disposition in or proximate one
or more steps, said panel comprising an elongated sectiffn
having a plurality of fibre optic rod receiving apertures
therein along the length of said panel,
(b) a plurality of fibre optic cables, corresponding to the
number of apertures with each of said apertures having an
end of a cable therein,
(c) a light source, comprising a source of light disposal
within a housing connected to a power source,
(d) a light grid, comprising areas adapted to receive all of
said cables other ends and to dispose same toward said
light source said light panel being disposed in the nose of
the step to light the nose thereof, or within the balustrade
to light the balustrade.
1. A self-contained underwater light assembly comprising,
(a) transparent shell means;
(b) lamp socket means;
(c) compartment means detachably secured within and
against the transparent shell means for housing a power
assembly means, weights and the lamp socket means;
(d) means for detachably securing the compartment means
within and against the transparent shell means;
(e) power assembly means secured within the compartment
means for securing a source of current within the com-
partment means and for supplying current to the lamp
socket means;
(0 detachable seal means for sealing the compartment means
within an area of the transparent shell means; and
(g) means for switching on and off the current supplied to
the lamp socket means by the power assembly means
when a source of current is installed in the power assem-
bly means.
4,394,717
ILLUMINATION SYSTEM FOR COPYING APPARATUS
Malcolm G. Brockwell, Ilford, England, assignor to Ciba-Geigy
AG, Basel, Switzerland
Filed Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,616
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 2, 1981,
8103075; Apr. 15, 1981, 8111884
Int. Q.' F21V 7/00
U.S. Q. 362—247 7 Qaims
h
1. An illumination system for a photographic copying appa-
ratus for mixing light from two sources {la, lb), which illumi-
nation system comprises disf>osed along a longitudinal optical
1258
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
axis (5) a light-mixing mirror (16) which has as the light-mixing
face (16fl) a generally sulcated face having grooves (17) therein
of triangular cross-section and raised portions of triangular
cross-section separating the grooves such that alternate facets
(17a. 176) are parallel, said two light sources (la. lb) being
diametrically opposed relative to the longitudinal axis (5) and
located below the sulcated face (16a) and each being adapted
to direct light onto said light-mixing mirror (lb) from an angle
(fi) relative to said longitudinal axis (5) which is twice the
complement of the angle (a) made by one of the sets of said
parallel facets (17a, lib) relative to the longitudinal axis (5), the
general plane of the sulcated face (16o) of the light-mixing
mirror (16) being disposed normal to the said longitudinal axis
and the grooves (17) therein having smooth polished reflecting
surfaces (17a, lib) and extending normal to a plane containing
both light sources and the longitudinal axis (5), light from the
two light sources striking the light-mixing mirror (16) and
being reflected therefrom substantially along the longitudinal
axis.
4,394,718
MOUNTING BRACKETS FOR HANDRAIL SYSTEM
Claude P. Balzer, Wichita, Kans., assignor to Balco, Inc., Wich-
ita, Kans.
Continuation of Ser. No. 181,231, Aug. 24, 1980, Pat. No.
4,367,517. This application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,762
Int. CV F21V 19/04
U.S. CI. 362—278 10 Qaims
signal transistor being coupled in emitter follower config-
uration to the base of the power transistor; and
-i
^■v:
t _ -:-
. -*•
Uprnt _ 5 ,
-i-
(b) a diode and a feedback current limiting resistor con-
nected in series between the secondary winding and the
base of the signal transistor.
1. A light emitting mounting bracket comprising:
(a) a body portion having a cavity projecting inwardly from
one side thereof; said one side having a surface associated
therewith;
(b) a slot defined at the juncture of said cavity and said
surface;
(c) a light emitting source securely and removably retained
in said cavity;
(d) electrical current means communicating with said light
emitting source; and
(e) a resilient transparent lens wedgedly resiliently and re-
movably received in said slot; said lens having an outer
surface associated therewith; said lens surface mating with
said body portion surface so as to be substantially flush
therewith, thereby presenting a substantially clean profile.
4,394,720
AUTO-STABILIZED HIGH POWER ELECTRIC
GENERATOR ESPECIALLY ADAPTED FOR POWERING
PROCESSES INVOLVING DISCHARGE IN A RAREFIED
GASEOUS ATMOSPHERE
Gabriel Gabor, Petit-Beauregard, France, assignor to Jean
Frager, Paris, France
Filed Dec. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 215,144
Int. CV H02M 5/438
U.S. CI. 363—37 7 Claims
4,394,719
CURRENT CONTROL APPARATUS FOR A FLYBACK
CAPACITOR CHARGER
Gregory O. Moberg, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman
Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 329,855
Int. a.^ H02M 3/335
U.S. a. 363—18 6 Qaims
1. In a DC to DC converter adapted to be energized by a
power supply, the converter comprising a transformer includ-
ing a primary winding and secondary winding, and switching
means including a jxiwer transistor having a base electrode, the
power transistor being coupled between the power supply and
the primary winding for periodically interrupting the power
supply current to cause current to flow in the secondary wind-
ing, the improvement comprising:
(a) a high gain, signal transistor having a base electrode, the
rs«m>(NG| J^
mSTOR,
r^T]^^
-\ /iMERMOCMEMtCAL
/ FURNACE L_
V"
^2, 22lSWlTCMi
T>*YHISTO*t
CONTSOL
1. Auto-Stabilized high power electric generator, especially
adapted for powering a process involving a discharge into a
rarified gaseous atmosphere, which comprises a controllable
frequency oscillator connected to a rectifier circuit by a con-
nection comprising, in series, an induction coil, a measuring
device which furnishes a detected signal representing the cur-
rent flowing between said oscillator and said rectifier, and a
comparator comparing said signal with a reference signal, and
which controls the frequency of said oscillator so as to cause an
increase in frequency when said detected signal becomes
greater than the reference signal, said oscillator being regu-
lated by a switching device controlled, in the event the de-
tected signal is less than the reference signal, by a timing de-
vice, and in the event the detected signal is higher than the
reference signal, by the pulses delivered by said comparator.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1259
4,394,721
THYRISTOR POWER CONVERTER WITH SWITCHED
IMPEDANCE
Toshiaki Ishii, Inazawa, Japan, assignor to Mitsubishi Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,849
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 4, 1980, 55/154985
Int. CV H02M J/12
U.S. CI. 363—44 6 Claims
CjO — ""^""^ ' y 'Tm^ jy iv " y
1. A thyristor power conversion apparatus for converting ac
power to dc power by thyristor commutation, comprising:
(a) an ac power supply (1) having an internal reactance (2),
(b) thyristor means (4) for converting ac power to dc power,
and having a reactance component (3) on an input side
thereof,
(c) capacitor means (8) connected to said input side of said
- thyristor means,
(d) impedance element means (9) connected in series with
said capacitor means,
(e) switching means (10) connected in parallel with said
impedance means, and
(0 firing circuit means (11) for generating;
(1) firing signals to commutate said thyristor means, and
(2) switching signals to close said switching means only
during the commutation of said thyristor means.
alternating polarity voltage across each of the two high
voltage secondary windings;
an ultor terminal, an intermediate voltage terminal and a
reference terminal;
a first voltage doubler coupled to. said first high voltage
winding for rectifying the alternating polarity voltage
developed across said first high voltage winding during
both polarity intervals thereof to produce a first direct
voltage, said first direct voltage being applied to said
intermediate voltage terminal to generate said picture tube
intermediate direct voltage between said intermediate
voltage terminal and said reference terminal; and
a second voltage doubler coupled to said second high volt-
age winding for rectifyig the alternating polarity voltage
developed across said second high voltage winding during
both polarity intervals thereof to produce a second direct
voltage, said first and second direct voltages being com-
bined and applied to said ultor terminal to generate said
picture tube ultor accelerating potential between said
ultor terminal and said reference terminal.
4,394,723
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
John P. Hoffman, Peoria, III., assignor to Caterpillar Tractor
Co., Peoria, III.
PCT No. PCT/US81/00578, § 371 Date Apr. 30, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Apr. 30, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO82/03954, PCT Pub.
Date Nov. 11, 1982
PCT Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 275,075
Int. CV H02P 13/24
U.S. CI. 363— 87 12 Claims
sio.Tsgm «„/«]V8,
4,394,722
TELEVISION RECEIVER HIGH VOLTAGE GENERATOR
Leroy W. Nero, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,791
Int. CV H02M 7/10; H04N 3/18
U.S. a. 363—68 17 Claims
1. In a television display system having a picture tube that
requires an ultor accelerating potential and an intermediate
direct voltage, a high voltage generator for developing the two
voltages, comprising:
a source of alternating voltage;
a transformer including a primary winding and first and
second high voltage secondary windings, said primary
winding being coupled to said source for developing an.
1. In a power supply circuit (20) having a load (12), means
(22) for conducting current of a 3-phase AC source, and trig-
gerable means (24) for coupling the current of the 3-phase AC
source between said conducting means (22) and said load (12),
the improvement comprising:
(a) means (27) for generating a reference signal in response
to one reference phase voltage (AB) of the 3-phase AC
source; and
(b) means (35) for triggering said triggerable means (24) at
predetermined phase angles of the 3-phase AC source
relative to the reference phase voltage (AB) and in re-
sponse to the reference signal to control the current
through said load (12), wherein said means (35) includes:
(i) means (36) for dividing a cycle of the one reference
phase voltage (AB) into a plurality of phase angles and
generating signals representing the plurality of phase
. angles;
(ii) a decoder logic network (52) being adapted to decode
the signals representing the plurality of phase angles;
and
(iii) means (67) for selectively activating said decoder
logic network to decode the signals representing the
phase angles to control the build-up or decay of the
current through said load (12).
1260
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,724
PROPULSION MOTOR CONTROL APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Warren C. Fry, West Mifflin; James H. Franz, Murrysville, and
Paul J. Merlino, West Newton, all of Pa., assignors to Wes-
tinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,698
Int. a.' H02M 3/315; H02P 5/J6
U.S. a. 363—124 8 Claims
«-i , 1 '■
1. In control apparatus for a load circuit ojjerative with a
power supply and including a member through which current
passes, with said load circuit being responsive to a control
pulse to determine the operation of said load circuit, the combi-
nation of
first switch means for coupling the control pylse to said load
circuit when the first switch means is conductive,
second switch means responsive to current passing through
said member and being made conductive in accordance
with the passage of current through said member,
first signal means for applying said control pulse through the
second switch means when the second switch means is
conductive, and
second signal means coupled with the second switch means
and controlling the conductivity of the first switch means
when the second switch means is conductive.
in a memory member of said system, wherein said memory
member holds one of a first queue of representations of pro-
cesses awaiting information units not available when required
by said processes and a second queue of representations of
information units available to processes and not required by
other processes, wherein said data element operatively associ-
ates related ones of said first and second queues with each
other, said data element including a field representing the one
of said queues present in said memory member, and wherein
said system during the execution of a first process executes an
instruction of a particular class for transferring an information
unit between said first process and a second process, an appara-
tus for controlling transfer of information units between said
first and second processes, comprising:
retrieving means controlled by said instruction for retrieving
said data element from said memory member;
testing means for testing said field of said data element re-
trieved from said memory member and for generating a first
signal when said field represents the presence of said first
queue and a second signal when said field represents the
presence of said second queue; and
control means controlled by said instruction and selectively
responsive to said first and second signals for processing the
one of said queues present in said memory member to enable
the transfer of an information unit between said first and-
second processes.
_ EMU.ATt]l»S
N-lcONI
JSTDM
UMT |»0«TS
^
~^
.J
L.
"2 '"f
(Me /r^tPHpau. SUBSYSTEM 1
STQiuGt Si^esYsreM
1. In a data processing system wherein a data element is held
4,394,726
DISTRIBUTED MULTIPORT MEMORY
ARCHITECTURE
Wayne H. Kohl, LaCrescenta, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,623
Int. aJ G06F 9/22, 13/00
U.S. a. 364—200 9 Qaims
4,394,725
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR TRANSFERRING
INFORMATION UNITS BETWEEN PROCESSES IN A
MULTIPROCESSING SYSTEM
Jacques Bienvenu; Patrick Dufond, both of Paris; Claude Carre,
la Varenne-St-Hilaire; Due L. Tuong, Paris; Henri Verdier,
Paris; Philippe-Hubert deRivet, Paris; John J. Bradley, Gar-
ches, all of France, and Benjamin S. Franklin, Cambridge,
Mass., assignors to Compagnie Honeywell Bull, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 529,015, Dec. 2, 1974, abandoned. This
application Dec. 4, 1978, Ser. No. 966,371
Oaims priority, application France, Nov. 30, 1973, 73 42711
Int. a.3 G06F 9/00
U.S. a. 364—200 14 Qaims
r
COMMAND
'NTeRrace
I
t COMMAWO a OflTA BUS
r
1 H
1 ^"
N8<
.,3)
LLM
R«M
A/D
COMV
1 "
1
"1
'35
1
TELE-
METRY
^34
1. In a distributed data processing system having a plurality
of independent centers connected to a bus for performing
tasks, and having a source of system clock pulses applied to all
centers, each task center being comprised of a memory and a
plurality of devices using said memory, one of said devices in
each center being a bus adapter coupling said bus to said mem-
ory, and one of said devices in one of said centers being a bus
controller for control of the transfer of data between task
centers, a separate multiport memory architecture for said
memory of each task center comprising logic means responsive
to said clock pulses for synchronous timing and control of
direct access to said memory by devices of the task center,
including said bus adapter, a separate device being given access
during each of NX clock pulse periods in a predetermined
sequence, with selected devices being given access more than
once in a sequence, where N is the fixed number of bits in a
word to be serially transferred on said bus between centers and
X is an integer selected for each task center to satisfy particular
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1261
needs of the task center, whereby all devices of a task center
are given memory access at least once during NX clock pulse
intervals.
4,394,727
MULTI-PROCESSOR TASK DISPATCHING APPARATUS
Roy L. Hoffman, Pine Island; Merle E. Houdek, Rochester;
Larry W. Loen, Rochester, and Frank G. Soltis, Rochester, all
of Minn., assignors to International Business Machines Cor-
poration, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,543
Int. CV G06F 9/46
U.S. CI. 364—200 6 Claims
JHOF STtlKt CICLt
01
1. Tasking apparatus for a multiprocessor computer system
including at least two processors sharing a common main
storage containing a task dispatching queue adapted to have
task dispatching elements enqueued in priority sequence, each
processor having a task dispatcher for dispatching task dis-
patching elements from said task dispatching queue and for
performing task switches when its associated processor is
processing a task dispatching element having a priority lower
than the priority of a waiting dispatchable task dispatching
element on said task dispatching queue, said processors each
having an enqueueing mechanism for returning waiting non-
dispatchable task dispatching elements to said task dispatching
queue, the improvement comprising:
a signal dispatcher for each processor for scanning the prior-
ities of task dispatching elements on said task dispatching
queue and signaling another processor to operate its task
dispatcher upon finding a task dispatching element on said
task dispatching queue having a priority higher than the
priority of the task dispatching element being processed
by the processor to be signaled, said signal dispatcher
being rendered operable in response to said enqueueing
mechanism of the associated processor enqueueing a task
dispatching element on said task dispatching queue.
4,394,728
ALLOCATION CONTROLLER PROVIDING FOR
ACCESS OF MULTIPLE COMMON RESOURCES BY A
DUPLEX PLURALITY OF CENTRAL PROCESSING
UNITS
Joseph A. Comfort; Thomas J. Perry, and Michel Loos, all of
Phoenix, Arit., assignors to GTE Automatic Electric Labs
Inc., Northlake, III.
Filed Jun. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 163,047
Int. CI.' G06F 13/00. 13/06
U.S. CI. 364—200 19 Claims
1. An allocation controller providing for equal priority
sharing of multiple duplicate copy resources by active ones of
duplicated pairs of a plurality of, CPUs said allocation control-
ler comprising:
said plurality of CPUs including first, second and third
groups each group including first and second portions;
at least three resources each having two duplicate copies,
• each to be selectively connected to any CPU of said plu-
rality;
first arbitration means including first, second and third dupli-
cated groups, each duplicated group of first arbitration
means connected to a corresponding group of CPUs;
said first arbitration means operated in response to resource
request signals from said plurality of CPUs to provide for
selection of one CPU per CPU group;
a plurality of CPU buses including first, second and third
groups corresponding to said CPU groups, each bus con-
nected between a particular CPU and said first arbitration
means, each CPU bus including a control portion and an
address/data portion;
at least three pair of group buses, each bus pair correspond-
ing to one said CPU group and said corresponding CPU
buses, and each group bus connected between a particular
CPU through said corresponding CPU bus via said first
arbitration means and connected to one copy of said dupli-
cate copy resources via one said group bus, each group
bus further connected to said other group buses of said
corresponding groups;
one group bus of each said, pair further connected to a first
copy of said duplicate copy resources and another group
bus of each said pair further connected to a second copy of
said duplicate copy resources;
second arbitration means connected between each of said
duplicate copy resources and each group of first arbitra-
tion means and said second arbitration means operated in
response to said operation of said first arbitration means to
select one of said requesting CPUs of said different CPU
groups for connection to said first and said second copies
of one selected duplicate copy resource via one said pair
of group buses and said corresponding CPU buses;
said group bus pair connected to said requesting CPU via
said corresponding CPU bus through said first arbitration
means and said second arbitration means and connected to
said duplicate copy resources to establish bus connection
between said one selected CPU and said selected duplicate
copy resources for the transmission of data to and from
said resources; and
each of said second arbitration circuits operated on a rota-
tional basis to allocate access of said selected duplicate
copy resources to said requesting CPU.
4,394,729
JUMP RETURN STACK
Rolfe D. Armstrong, Escondido, Calif., assignor to NCR Corpo-
ration, Dayton, Ohio
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,417
Int. a.' G06F 9/42
U.S. a. 364—200 9 Claims
1. In a data processor comprising control store means to
store instructions at specific addresses, fetch control register
means connected thereto to control the operation thereof,
execution means to process information fetched from the ad-
dresses in controllable sequence, jump return stack means
comprising:
storage means for storing a plurality of jump return ad-
dresses in order;
1262
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
counter means connected to said storage means for address-
ing said storage means; and
register means connected to said storage means to supply
address information thereto and separately connected to
said execution means and separately connected to said
fetch control register means for storing the latest jump
return address inputted to said jump return stack means, to
make the latest jump return address available to said fetch
control register means independently of receiving a jump
return address directly from the storage means.
4,394,730
MULTI-PROCESSOR SYSTEM EMPLOYING
JOB-SWAPPING BETWEEN DIFFERENT PRIORITY
PROCESSORS
Seigo Suzuki, Yokohama, and Seiji Eguchi, Kawasaki, both of
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Japan
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 120,400, Feb. 11, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 747,347, Dec. 3,
1976, abandoned. This application Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No.
197,566
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 4, 1975, 50-144630
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 2,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ G06F 9/46. 15/16
U.S. a. 364—200 3 Qaims
1
11
1
u
POBTI
P0RT2
A
^
.13 LrcsjpoRn
1 . •'"^
MEMOfn
«EA2
.(PORTZ
-no It
1 j
1 ' CPU?
i
SPl
PCI
PSWl
1 ■ ^- .'
1
SP2
PC2
1 !.
.M
pswz
1 i
I/O
1 DEVICE
1
I
or
(ii) first program control means coupled to said first inter-
nal memory for directing the transfer of said linkage
information between said first internal memory and said
external memory via said data bus,
(iii) an instruction register and decoder which receives an
interrupt signal from said I/O device and which causes
said program control means to direct the transfer of said
linkage information corresponding to said first stored
program into said external memory, and
(iv) means coupled to said instruction register and decoder
for generating a swap interrupt signal after said linkage
information is stored in said external memory and for
causing said high priority processor to execute a pro-
gram supplied by said I/O device; and
(c) a low priority processor initially executing a second
stored program and connected by said data bus to said
external memory, said low priority processor including:
(i) a second internal memory containing linkage informa-
tion, including program status data and instructions, for
the program being executed by said low priority proces-
sor,
(ii) second program control means coupled to said second
internal memory for directing the transfer of said link-
age information between said second internal memory
and said external memory via said data bus,
(iii) a control and timing circuit responsive to said swap
interrupt signal from said high priority processor for
causing said second program control means to direct
the storage of said linkage information corresponding to
said second stored programming into said external
memory and to direct the retrieval of said linkage infor-
mation corresponding to said first stored program from
said external memory into said second internal memory
of said low priority processor, thereby causing said low
priority processor to execute said first stored program.
4,394,731
CACHE STORAGE LINE SHAREABILITY CONTROL
FOR A MULTIPROCESSOR SYSTEM
Frederick O. Flusche; Richard N". Gustafson, both of Hyde
Park, and Bruce L. McGilvray, Pleasant Valley, all of N.Y.,
assignors to International Business Machines Corporation,
Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,500
Int. CV G06F 15/16
U.S. a. 364—200 16 Qaims
CH'l IC[ 1
HI I
III
/»
I CH«1 — J see L -- » J J srTl - -.' c»ii 1
'l 1 ^ ■ -jL^ I, , , ,1 : 1
• » >i bus' III
\-\ ' r--i
I ■ \ ^~^
1 ISC I rr . ^ ISC ! I
' '^— tL_ ^^^ '
I |iSI > I ISX IS! 1 1 ISK I I
I ll"il "Ii:' il"!ff ^: I
1. A multi-processor system coupled to an external I/O
device, said multi-processor system comprising:
(a) an external memory;
(b) a high priority processor initially executing a first stored
program and connected by a data bus to said external
memory, said high priority processor including:
(i) a first internal memory containing linkage information,
including program status data and instructions, for the
program being executed by said high priority processor.
1. A multiprocessor (MP) system having at least two proces-
sors, in which each processor has a processor store-in-cache,
and a processor cache directory (PD) with a plurality of line
entries for corresponding line positions in the associated cache,
the MP system further comprising,
each processor requesting its PD for main storage access
with either an exclusive (EX) or readonly (RO) shareabil-
ity signal,
an exclusive (EX) bit position, a line change (CH) bit posi-
tion, a valid (V) bit position, and an address field being
July 19, 198
t
ELECTRICAL
1263
provided in each PD line entry, the opposite states of the
EX bit position indicating exclusive or readonly shareabil-
ity for the corresponding line position,
cache miss detecting means connected to each PD for gener-
ating a storage line fetch and cross-interrogation (XI)
command from each cache miss, the XI command indicat-
ing if the initiating processor request has an exclusive or
readonly signal and is a fetch or store request and indicat-
ing a main storage address for the request,
cross-interrogation (XI) means connected to receive each XI
command,
control means connected to receive the output of the XI
means and searching valid line entries represented in each
other PD in the MP system for detecting any existing
conflicting line having the main storage address indicated
in the XI command,
testing means associated with each PD and connected to
receive each XI command for testing the state of the EX
bit position in any entry found to represent a conflicting
line, and if the EX bit is set to the exclusive state also
testing the CH bit for the conflicting line,
means connected to each cache for casting out any conflict-
ing line from the associated cache if the testing means
senses the CH bit is on, and setting off the V bit position
in the associated PD entry for the conflicting line,
means in the associated PD for the conflicting line for setting
the EX bit position to the readonly state if the CH bit
position is off and not casting out the line which then
remains valid in its processor cache,
inter-cache means connected between the processors in the
MP for setting an EX bit position to readonly state in a
line entry for the storage line fetch in the PD which gener-
ated the XI command when the EX bit position in each
entry for the conflicting line is set to readonly state,
whereby readonly cache sharing is permitted for the line
obtained by the storage line fetch found to have a conflict-
ing line in another cache in a non-changed state, even
though the initiating processor request is for exclusive
control of the requested data.
ing segment has been written to while resident in said
cache store;
said command queue comprising a series of commands
issued by said host processor to said storage control unit
and waiting to be executed by said storage control unit to
transfer data between said host processor and said disk
drive device through said storage control unit;
said storage control unit including,
first means connected to said storage means for searching
said segment descriptor Uble for an entry wherein said
written-to bit is set.
second means, responsive to said first means when said
first means locates an entry wherein said written-to bit
is set, for forming a command directing the transfer of
, the segment of data corresponding to said located entry
from said cache store to said disk drive device,
third means for entering said formed command into said
command queue; and
means responsive to said command queue for executing said
formed command when said disk drive device is not busy,
whereby the transfer of said written-to segment from said
cache store to said disk drive device is accomplished
without intervention by said host processor.
, 4,394,733
i CACHE/DISK SUBSYSTEM
Robert E. Swenson, Mendota Heights, Minn., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,152
Int. CI.' G06F 13/00
U.S. CI. 364—200 15 Claims
4 394 732
CACHE/DISK SUBSYSTEM TRICKLE
Robert E. Swenson, Mendota Heights, Minn., assignor to Sperry
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 207,097
Int. CV G06F 13/00
U.S. a. 364—200 10 C'«>™s
I 1 :--r ! K
1. In a data processing system including a disk drive device
for driving a disk, a host processor for issuing commands
calling for the transfer of data between said host processor and
said disk drive device, a cache store for storing segments of
data, and a storage control unit connected between said host
processor, said cache store and said disk drive device for
controlling transfers of data between said host processor, said
cache store and said disk drive device in response to said
conmiand, the improvement comprising:
storage means for storing a command queue and a segment
descriptor table,
said table having an entry therein corresponding to each
segment of data in said cache store, each of said entries
including a written-to bit which is set if the correspond-
1. A data processing system comprising:
a disk drive device for driving a data storage disk;
a host processor for issuing commands defining an operation
to be performed and the address of disk space at which
said operation is to be performed,
said address specifying the starting address and a number of
words of said disk space;
a cache store for storing segments of data;
means for storing a segment descriptor table, said segment
descriptor table having an entry corresponding to each
segment of data residing in said cache store;
a storage control unit interfacing with said host processor,
said disk drive device, said means for storing a segment
descriptor table and said cache store;
means in said storage control unit responsive to a command
from said host processor calling for a read from said disk
for accessing said segment descriptor table to produce a
1264
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
miss signal if a copy of the data from the disk space speci-
fied by said command is not resident in said cache store;
means responsive to said miss signal for transferring from
said disk space to said cache store the data from the speci-
fied disk space which is not resident in said cache store;
and
means in said storage control unit for controlling the transfer
of the data at said specified disk space to said host proces-
sor;
whereby said host processor may read from said disk any
variable number of words of data as specified by said
address.
4,394,734
PROGRAMMABLE PERIPHERAL PROCESSING
CONTROLLER
Kent S. Norgren, Longmont, and Robert E. Vogelsberg, Boulder,
both of Colo., assignors to International Business Machines
Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,636
Int. a.' G06F 13/00
U.S. a. 364—200 11 Claims
H
i bu rmmiM
Utm =11
1. In a peripheral processing system having a central proces-
sor for supervising the system, a plurality of peripheral de-
vices, a peripheral memory, said devices for processing data
with the peripheral memory independent of the central proces-
sor, control apparatus for controlling access of the peripheral
devices to the peripheral memory comprising:
a plurality of memory address registers, each register se-
lected by one of the peripheral devices,
a plurality of mode registers, each mode register selected by
one of the peripheral devices,
said memory address registers being initialized to a starting
address by said central processor;
said mode registers being initialized to one of a plurality of
end-of-block modes by said central processor, each mode
defining an end-of-block condition for a block of memory
space;
means for accessing the peripheral memory with an access
address corresponding to the starting address from the
memory address register selected by a peripheral device,
said accessing means advancing said access address to
access memory space as said selecting peripheral device
processes data;
end-of-block detection means, responsive to the mode in said
selected mode register, for detecting when said access
address has reached the end-of-block condition defined by
the mode in said selected mode register;
means, responsive to the end-of-block condition detected by
said detecting means, for inhibiting said accessing means
whereby the mode in said selected mode register controls
when the selecting peripheral device has completed ac-
cess to a block of memory space.
4,394,735
DATA PROCESSOR CONTROLLED BY
MICROPROGRAMS
Kiyosumi Satoh, and Nobuyuki Watanabe, both of Kawasaki,
Japan, assignors to A. Aoki & Associates, Tokyo, Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP80/00167, § 371 Date Mar. 25, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 20, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00315, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 5, 1981
PCT Filed Jul. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 245,645
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 25, 1979, 54-94504
Int. a.3 G06F 1/00
U.S. a. 364—200 19 Claims
I siNx Vmir
1. A data processor controlled by microprograms, compris-
ing:
an instruction register for storing a machine instruction
having a suboperation code and an operation code;
a control memory, operatively connected to said instruction
register, for storing a first micro-instruction having next
address data and address control data and a second micro- .
instruction having suboperation index data units;
a micro-instruction register, operatively connected to said
control memory, for temporarily storing the first micro-
instruction read out in a first access of said control mem-
ory by using the operation code of the machine instruction
stored in the instruction register, and the suboperation
index data units contained in the second micro-instruction
read out in a second access of the control memory by
using the suboperation code of said machine instruction;
a selector operatively connected to said micro-instruction
register; and
means, operatively connected to said micro-instruction reg-
ister, said selector and said control memory, for logical
operation;
each of said first micro-instructions are stored in the control
memory and read out by using said operation code, said
selector selecting one of said suboperation index data units
according to said address control data, a third access to
said control memory being performed by using combined
next address data obtained by the logical operation be-
tween said next address data and the selected suboperation
index data unit using said means for logical operation.
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1265
4,394,736
DATA PROCESSING SYSTEM UTILIZING A UNIQUE
TWO-LEVEL MICROCODING TECHNIQUE FOR
FORMING MICROINSTRUCTIONS
David H. Bernstein, Ashland, Mass.; Richard A. Carberry,
Cupertino, Calif.; Michael B. Druke, Chelmsford, and Ronald
I. Gusowski, Westboro, both of Mass., assignors to DaU
General Corporation, Westboro, Mass.
Filed Feb. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 120,272
Int. CI.' G06F 9/22
U.S. CI. 364—200 10 Qaims
processing a radiographic image comprising steps of recording
radiographic images of an object viewed from the same direc-
tion on a plurality of radiographic films, superposing and aver-
aging the images on the plurality of radiographic films to
obtain an averaged image having averaged density, and en-
hancing the gradient of gradation of the averaged image.
I n — ' .-^
IVtTfM 1
•<« I 'M"* 1 1 ^ wMn
^1 O Ki»«iiilTf '
1/j. ECLint I/O ~J-f\ ici
IRFUf ' '
ttMVAUOINHT*
ft CWTMl MftUU
1. In a data processing system requiring the generation of
microinstructions for performing data processing operations
and including a
a central processor unit having means responsive to macroin-
structions for providing decoded macroinstructions for use
in generating one or more microinstructions, said central
processor unit further including
first control store means for providing one or more microin-
structions in response to identification signals, one or more
selected fields of each of said microinstructions being
capable of modification;
second control store means for providing a plurality of
microinstruction portions, one or more of said second
plurality of microinstruction portions providing modifier
fields containing information usable for modifying said
one or more selected fields of said one or more microin-
structions, said second control store means being respon-
sive to a said decoded macroinstruction for producing said
plurality of microinstruction portions; and
modification means responsive to said one or more microin-
structions provided by said first control store means and
to the modifier fields of said one or more microinstruction
portions provided by said second control store means for
providing modified microinstructions for performing said
data processing operation.
4 394 738
METHOD OF AND DEvlcEFOR DETERMINING THE
DISTRIBUTION OF RADIATION ABSORPTION IN A
SLICE OF A BODY
Wolfgang Wagner, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 216,478
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 16,
1979, 2924423
Int. a.' A61B 6/00: GOIN 23/00
U.S. a. 364—414 7 Claims
4 394 737
METHOD OF PROCESSING RADIOGRAPHIC IMAGE
Takao Komaki, and Seiji Matsumoto, both of Minami-ashigara,
Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa,
Japan
Filed Jul. 11, 1980, Set. No. 168,802
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1979, 54-87793;
Jul. 11, 1979, 54-87796; Jul. 11, 1979, 54-87797
Int. CV G06F 15/42
U.S. a. 364—414 13 Qaims
1. In radiographic image recording system, a method of
1. A method for determining the distribution of radiation
absoption properties in a body by computed tomography
which includes the steps of:
radiating a planar examination zone in the body, from a
plurality of directions, with radiation having a first inten-
sity so that the radiation passes through the examination
zone along a large number of measurement paths in the
plane of the examination zone, collimating said radiation
so that the radiation having a first intensity does not pass
through the body along paths which do not pass through
the examination zone, and measuring the intensity of the
radiation which has passed through the examination zone
along the paths to obtain as a first set of measurement
values;
radiating a positioning zone, which lies in the plane of and
completely encloses the examination zone, from a plural-
ity of directions with radiation having a second intensity
which is smaller than the first intensity, so that the radia-
tion passes through the positioning zone along a large
number of measurement paths in the plane of the zones,
and measuring the intensity of the radiation which has
passed through the positioning zone to obtain a second set
of measurement values;
calculating first absorption values from the first set of mea-
surement values;
calculating second absorption values from the second set of
measurement values; and
reconstructing the distribution of radiation absorption prop-
erties in the examination zone from using the first absorp-
tion values and the second absorption values.
1266
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,739
AUTOMATIC SPEED CONTROL SYSTEM FOR AN
AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLE
Kouichi Suzuki, and Kazuyuki Mori, both of Yokohama, Japan,
assignors to Nissan Motor Company, Limited, Kanagawa,
Japan
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,196
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1980, 55-2140
Int. aj B60K 31/00
U.S. a. 364—426 22 Qaims
. ^'^' no .-^
1. An automatic speed control system for an automotive
vehicle which adjusts the vehicle speed to a pre-set constant
speed, comprising:
a first means for setting the vehicle speed at a desired value
and comparing said set speed with the actual vehicle speed
to obtain the difference therebetween, said first means
generating a control signal corresponding to the deter-
mined difference;
a second means for controlling an accelerator of the vehicle
in response to said control signal in a control mode of the
control system to reduce the difference between the set
speed and the actual speed to zero;
a third means connected to disable application of said con-
trol signal to said second means for interrupting' the opera-
tion of the control system;
a fourth means comprising a resume means, said fourth
means connected for enabling application of said control
signal to said second means, activated for returning the
control system to operation after interruption of the oper-
ation thereof and for returning the vehicle speed to said
set speed; and
a fifth means connected to said fourth means for inhibiting
the control system from entering into the control mode
when said fourth means is activated until said fourth
means is deactivated thereafter, thereby delaying the
response of said second means to the operation of said
fourth means to return the vehicle speed to said set speed
until said fourth means is again deactivated,
whereby erroneous operation of said second means due to a
faulty resume means Is prevented.
4,394,740
COMPUTER ADAPTED APPARATUS AND METHOD
FOR PRICING LENGTHS OF MATERIAL
Tadmor Shalon, St. Louis, Mo., assignor to The Measuregraph
Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,268
Int. CI.' G06F 15/20: GOIB 3/12
U.S. a. 364—464 14 Oaims
1. A processor controlled apparatus for measuring and pric-
ing lengths of material such as fabric, or the like, comprising:
(a) a base structure having a horizontal throat for passage
therethrough of a margin of the material to be measured
and below said throat a measuring roller adapted for
rotation;
(b) a pressure roller adapted for rotation around an axis
above and parallel to the axis about which said measuring
roller rotates;
(c) a resiliently loaded pressure roller support structure
mounted on said base structure and being movable be-
tween an elevated position for insertion and removal of
said material and a lowered position in which said pres-
sure roller resiliently engages said measuring roller en-
abling said material to be pulled through said throat and
thereby rotate both said rollers;
(d) releasable latching means carried by said base structure
and adapted for releasably latching said pressure roller
supp)ort structure when raised to said elevated position;
(e) means for notching said material after a desired number
of uniform units of length have been drawn through said
rollers to indicate the length so drawn, comprising:
(i) a fixed blade positioned below the plane of the material
being measured and proximate said throat;
(ii) a movable shear blade adapted for movement in a
vertical plane and cooperable for notching said material
on the margin thereof;
(iii) manual notch operator means for moving said mov-
able blade downwardly to notch said fabric; and
(iv) means biasing said movable blade and manual latch
operator means to a raised position wherein said mov-
able blade is out of engagement with said fixed blade;
(f) a mechanical lock-out mechanism operable in response to
operation of said notch operator means during notching of
said fabric and including:
(i) disable means for blocking notching motion of said
notch operator means and movable between disable and
enable positions;
(ii) rotative means driven by said measuring roller and
adapted for being locked in a single rotative home
position corresponding to said measuring roller being in
a position corresponding to some predetermined uni-
form unit of measure whereby to lock said measuring
roller in such home position; and
(iii) cooperatively associated positionable members
mounted on said base structure and being adapted in
response to movement of said notch operator means for
mechanically sensing said home position and dependent
upon said rotative means being in said home position for
locking said rotative means and thereby locking said
measuring roller in said home position, moving said
disable means to its said enable position enabling said
notch operator means to move through the notching
motion and raising said pressure roller to its said ele-
vated position for latching by said latching means;
(g) manual latch operator release means adapted to unlatch
said pressure roller support structure latching means to
allow said pressure roller to return to said lowered posi-
tion;
(h) manual operator reset means including means operative
on said measuring roller rotative means for restoring said
rotative means and thereby restoring said measuring roller
to said home position when rotatively offset therefrom;
and
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1267
(i) processor means mounted on said base structure includ-
ing:
(i) optical encoder and electronic signal processing means
operable in response to rotation of said measuring roller
for each predetermined unit of measure for developing
and storing a signal count corresponding to the total of
such units measured and from such count developing
and displaying with electronic digital light display
means controlled by said count the length so measured;
(ii) a keyboard and storage means for entering and storing
unit price, operator and product code information and
displaying with electronic digital alpha-numeric light
. display means associated therewith the entry of such
information;
(iii) computation means for utilizing said count and unit
price and developing therefrom, storing and displaying
a total price; and
(iv) a ticket printer having character forming and ticket
advancing means under program control included in
said processor means for printing said unit price, length,
total price, operator and product code on a ticket in
alpha-numeric form; and
(j) a switch adapted to disable said optional encoder means in
response to raising of said pressure roller to said elevated
position.
4,394,742
ENGINE GENERATED WAVEFORM ANALYZER
Marvin R. Crummer, Tustin; Kenneth S. Gold. Canoga Park;
David G. Johnson, Newhall; Tom R. Vandermeyden, Norwalk,
and Edmond R. Pelta, Los Altos Hills, all of Calif., assignors
to FMC Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,516
Int. CI.' GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 364—487 29 Oaims
Michael \V.
4,394,741
|bATTERY monitoring SYSTEM
Lowndes, Birmingham, England, assignor to Lucas
Industries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Nov. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 208,109
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 28, 1980,
8021285
Int. CI.' H02J 7/00: G06F 15/56
U.S. CI. 364—483 9 Claims
''• aavER ciXTKois
1. An internal combustion engine wave characteristic analy-
zer for a two dimensional wave signal representative of an
operating characteristic of the engine wherein predetermined
wave characteristic data are held in storage, comprising means
for receiving the wave signal and for providing a plurality of
sampled output signals corresponding to wave characteristics
at a plurality of positions along the length of the wave, means
for receiving and storing data indicative of said plurality of
output signals, means for continuously performing analysis of
ones of said plurality of output signal data utilizing others of
said plurality of output signal data and ones of said predeter-
mined wave characteristic data, thereby providing a discrete
analysis signal, means for continuously receiving and diagnos-
ing the engine operating characteristic in view of said discrete
analysis signal and for providing a diagnostic signal for the
engine operating characteristic responsive thereto, means cou-
pled to said diagnostic signal for providing an instruction
output relating to operations required to retain and reestablish
the predetermined wave characteristic, and means for alphanu-
merically displaying said instruction output.
4,394,743
TONE GENERATION METHOD AND APPARATUS
USING STORED REFERENCE CALIBRATION
COEFFICIENTS
Paul A. Mercer, Parsippany, N.J., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,678
Int. a.' GIOH 5/10: H04M 1/50
U.S. a. 364—514 18 Claims
Xi'J^?^3i3
1. A battery state of charge evaluator comprising:
means responsive to battery voltage for producing a voltage
value,
means responsive to battery current for producing a current
value,
means for computing the polarization voltage as a complex
function of time and of the current value, the complex
function being determined in accordance with characteris-
tics of the battery being evaluated,
means for correcting the voltage value to compensate for the
polarization voltage, and
means for computing the state of charge of the battery as a
function of the corrected voltage value, said function
being determined in accordance with the characteristics
of the battery being evaluated.
1. A tone signal generator including a source (16) of select-
able sets of digital coefficient signals defining a predetermined
1268
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
iULY 19, 1983
analog signal waveform, and means (19) for multiplying said
coefficient signals by a reference signal for producing an ana-
log tone signal which is recurrent at a predetermined rate, the
generator comprising
means (53, 13) for feeding back the output of said generator
to control the magnitude of said reference signal for estab-
lishing a predetermined generator output tone amplitude.
4,394,744
REAL-TIME AMPLITUDE HISTOGRAM SHAPER
Edwin H. Wrench, Jr., San Diego, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 234,063
Int. a.' G06F 15/31
U.S. CI. 364—553 1 Claim
t'.S. Patent lui it. iws
•-/^
4.394.744
JU-IMT S'»«L
':0HTRC1 S'^K.
wcaOWKtSSOT
COfllTIClLEI*
AMO
mSTOGtAM SHAPfd
1. A real-time amplitude histogram shaper transforming an
input signal V„ according to a first histogram having levels of
voltage amplitude into an output signal according to a second
histogram having levels of voltage amplitude, comprising:
means for receiving an input analog signal V,>,;
means, whose input is connected to the receiving means, for
estimating the histogram of the input signal;
means, whose input is connected to the output of the estimat-
ing means, for computing the transfer function required to
transform the input signal to an output signal with a de-
sired amplitude histogram;
means, whose input is connected to the output of the com-
puting means, for generating control signals;
means, one of whose two inputs is connected to the receiv-
ing means and the other to the output of the generating
means, which modifies its input signals by the transfer
function g(V,„) = V(„^,/-V,„ where Vou,is the magnitude
of the output voltage and V/„ is the magnitude of the input
voltage, the input levels of voltage amplitude being Vj,
V2, . . . , V„, the output signal thereby having the form of
the desired amplitude histogram; wherein
the transfer function modifying means includes n channels,
and comprises:
the means for receiving the input analog signal V,>,, the
means being a common junction point for the n channels;
a plurality of n means for voltage translation, one in each of
n channels, each means for receiving two input signals, the
signal V/n and the signal comprising the inverted voltages
Vi, V2, Vj, . . . , V„, and for translating the input signal
Vi„ by the voltage Vi, V2, V3, . . . , V„, respectively;
wherein
The plurality of means for voltage translation comprises n
diodes connected to the inputs of two adjacent channels,
the n-th diode being connected to a source of bias voltage;
a jjlurality of n saturating unity-gain means, one in each of
the n channels, the inputs of the n saturating means being
connected to the outputs of the n translating means, each
saturating means passing only the signals corresponding to
an input signal within a specific voltage range;
the plurality of n saturating unit gain means comprising:
a resistor, in the range of Ik, in series in each channel, one
end of the resistor in the first channel being connected
to the receiving means, all of the other resistors having
one end connected to the junction of two diodes; and
a plurality of n double-diode clippers, one end of each
being connected to the other end of the resistor, the
other end of each being connected to a source of bias
voltage; the transfer function modifying means further
comprising:
a plurality of n means for amplifying, each having an input
connected to the output of one of the saturating unity-gain
means, for amplifying the signals in the first through n-th
channels by a magnitude gi through gn, respectively;
the plurality of means for amplifying comprising n field-
effect transistors (FETs), each of whose source is con-
nected to the junction of the resistor and the double-diode
clipper, and each of whose gate is connected to the means
for generating control signals; the transfer function modi-
fying means further comprising:
a means for summing, having n inputs connected to the n
outputs of the plurality of amplifying means;
the means for summing comprising:
a plurality of n resistors, in the range of 22k, one end of
each being connected to the drain of the FET, the other
end of each resistor being connected to a common
junction; and
an operational amplifier whose input is connected to the
common junction of the resistors, the output signal of
the summing means being the desired amplitude histo-
gram.
4,394,745
VIDEO EDITING APPARATUS
William A. Menezes, Mountain View, and Douglas D. Kuper,
Campbell, both of Calif., assignors to Sony Corporation, To-
kyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 139,448
Int. CI.' G06F 1/00: H04N 5/785
U.S. CI. 364—900 26 Claims
•'* '^Si'3i¥MF¥r
Kc /v
V
£krfur f
*f
f^f/r c
-1 /
1
-' 1
Mie /• >WJ £>j»r'»
t^sym An D^rM ■
r
1
rwti^r t Aei o^TM
—
1. Video editing apparatus for use with video playback and
recording devices wherein information signals on a first record
medium are reproduced and recorded on a second record
medium, the relative positions of said first and second record
media being represented by position data signals, said appara-
tus comprising means connectable to said video playback and
recording devices to provide reord medium position data
derived from said position data signals; a console having a
plurality of display registers for displaying said record medium
position data; a plurality of register selector means associated
with corresponding ones of said display registers, each being
operable to select its associated display register; a plurality of
signal selector means operable to select respective information
signals reproduced from said first medium to be recorded on
said second medium when a selected one of said media reaches
a position represented by the position data displayed in a se-
lected display register; a plurality of indicator means associated
with respective ones of said signal selector means and opera-
tive to provide predetermined indications to apprise an opera-
tor of the relative times at which said respective information
signals are to be recorded on said second medium; central
processing means responsive to the operation of a selected
signal selector means and a selected register selector means for
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1269
associating the information signal selected by that signal selec-
tor means with the position data displayed in the display regis-
ter corresponding to said operated register selector means, and
for initiating the recording on said second medium of the
information signal selected by that signal selector means when
said selected medium reaches the position represented by the
associated position data; and means for communicating be-
tween said console and said central processing means.
m, the transistors of each set being provided in the same collec-
tor epitaxial bed (51) in a semiconductor substrate with a col-
A:X'. i
4,394,746
SWAP GATE FOR ION-IMPLANTED
CONTIGUOUS-DISK BUBBLE DEVICES
Richard G. Hirko; Kochan Ju, both of San Jose, and Ian L.
Sanders, Sunnyvale, all of Calif., assignors to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,481
Int. CI.' GllC 19/08
U.S. CI. 365—36 9 Claims
•I -/
iv
<-'l'\U
J.
B Si kl 111
-! ' '
4-4 I
--ill
:ri-tl ;
ri ! I
«ii-^Z2^
,jBjjg j4__|.
UL*I
lector contact (CI) common to all the transistors, the collector
contact of each set being connected to a read circuit (CL).
1. A swap gate for ion-implanted contiguous-disk bubble
devices comprising
a major loop,
a minor loop having a folded end portion facing said major
loop, said end portion having a first region and a second
region separated by a third region,
a swap element positioned between said major loop and said
" minor loop, said swap element having a first portion asso-
ciated with said major loop, said swap element having a
second portion associated with said first region, said swap
element having a third portion associated with said second
region to form a merge gate, and
conductor means associated with said swap element
whereby activation of said conductor means causes the
swap function to be effected.
4,394,748
ROM COLUMN SELECT CIRCUIT AND SENSE
AMPLIFIER
Jules D. Campbell, Jr., Austin, Tex., assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Aug. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 293.772
Int. CI.' GllC 7/00. / 7/00
U.S. CI. 365—104 12 Claims
4,394,747
HIGH DENSITY INTEGRATED READ-ONLY MEMORY
Michel J. Grandguillot, Mennecy; Pierre B. Mollier, Boissisc le
Roi, and Jean-Paul J. Nuez, Mennecy, all of France, assignors
to International Business Machines Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,289
Claims priority, application France, Dec. 7, 1979, 79 30422
Int. CI.' Gll^ 11/40
U.S. CI. 365—104 6 Claims
1. Integrated read-only memory including nxm memory
cells located at the intersections of m bit lines and n word lines
in which binary Information of a first type is represented by the
presence of a connection to a transistor in a cell, the base of
said transistor being connected to a word line while its emitter
is connected to a bit line, and in which binary information of a
second type is represented by the absence of connection to a
transistor m a cell, said memory being of the type m which
reading is ensured by means of m read transistors the emitters
of which are connected to the bit lines while their bases are
connected to a reference voltage supply, the improvement
comprising read transistors (TL) arranged into k adjacent sets
of mA consecutive elements, k being an integer submultiple of
; "00,1 "ss; ;•'*;«
vss »ss
4
1. A read only memory column select circuit comprising:
column load means coupled between a first supply and a
ROM output; ■
a primary column select transistor having a first current
electrode coupled to the output terminal;
a secondary column select transistor having a first current
electrode coupled to a second current electrode of said
primary column select transistor;
a program transistor having a first current electrode coupled
to a second current electrode of said secondary column
select transistor, and a second current electrode coupled
to a second supply;
row select means coupled to a control electrode of said
program transistor for selectively enabling said program
transistor; and
secondary column select means coupled to a control elec-
trode of said secondary column select transistor for selec-
tively enabling said secondary column select transistor;
a primary column select circuit comprising:
1270
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
voltage divider means coupled between said first and
second supplies and to a control electrode of said pri-
mary column select transistor, for selectively develop-
ing an enabling voltage on the control electrode of said
primary column select transistor which is at least equal
to, but not substantially greater than, the threshold
voltage of said primary column select transistor above
the voltage developed on the second current electrode
of said primary column select transistor when said
secondary column select and program transistors are
enabled.
8. A read only memory column select circuit and sense
amplifier comprising:
column load means coupled between a first supply and a
ROM output;
a primary column select MOS transistor having the drain
thereof coupled to the ROM output;
a secondary column select MOS transistor having the drain
thereof coupled to the source of said primary column
select transistor;
a program MOS transistor having the drain thereof coupled
to the source of said secondary column select transistor,
and the source thereof coupled to a second supply;
row select means coupled to the gate of said program transis-
tor for selectively enabling said program transistor; and
secondary column select means coupled to the gate of said
secondary column select MOS transistor for selectively
enabling said secondary column select MOS transistor;
a sense amplifier having an input coupled to said ROM
output for sensing the level of voltage at the ROM output
and translating said level, comprising:
a source follower transistor having the drain thereof cou-
pled to said first supply, the gate thereof coupled to said
ROM output, and the source thereof coupled to an
intermediate output of said sense amplifier; and
biasing means coupled to the second current electrode of
said source follower transistor for providing a load to
said source follower transistor.
4,394,749
PHOTOELECTRIC DEVICE AND METHOD OF
PRODUCING THE SAME
Toshihisa Tsukada, Tokyo; Yukio Takasaki, Hachioji; Tadaaki
Hirai, Koganei; Toru Baji, Kokubunji; Hideaki Yamamoto,
Hachioji; Yasuo Tanaka, Kokubunji; Eiichi Maruyama,
Kodaira, and Sachio Ishioka, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to
Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 30, 1980, Ser. No. 154,999
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 8, 1979, 54-71272;
Nov. 9, 1979, 54-144415
Int. CI.' GllC 13/00
U.S. a. 365—106 8 Claims
A .
3 ^
^"-5 1 1 1 '^ i
1 M A-AA a
[_\J.AAA A
1. A photoelectric device comprising:
a solid state imaging device having a semiconductor sub-
strate including a plurality of photoelectric conversion
portions; and
scanning means coupled to said substrate for selecting pho-
toelectric conversion portions from said plurality of pho-
toelectric conversion portions,
wherein the photoelectric conversion portions include a
photoconductive layer which covers said semiconductor
substrate and which lies electrically in contact with at
least said scanning means, and a light transmissive elec-
trode which is formed on said photoconductive layer,
characterized in that said photoconductive layer is made
of an amorphous chalcogenide material whose principal
constituent is Se.
4,394,750
PROM ERASE DETECTOR
Anil Gercekci, Geneva, Switzerland, assignor to Motorola, Inc.,
Schaumburg, III.
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 282,196
Int. CI.' GllC 11/40
U.S. a. 365—218 8 Oaims
'^r^^}^
1. A programmable read only memory having an erase
detector to detect when the memory has been erased and
having a data bus, the erase detector comprising: latch means
having an input and an output, the input being coupled to the
data bus; a first transistor being controllable by the output of
the latch means; a memory cell coupled in series with the first
transistor and having a control input coupled to the output of
the latch means, the memory cell and first transistor forming an
output node therebetween; and means for coupling the output
node to the data bus.
4,394,751
LOW POWER STORAGE CELL
Steve Burstein, Bayshore, and Jay Popper, Kew Gardens, both
of N.Y., assignors to Standard Microsystems Corporation,
Hauppauge, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 200,085
Int. CV GllC 7/00
U.S. CI. 365—227 5 Claims
l£
'w
I TO
^S^'i ^Jv/
1. A dual low power storage cell operable in an access mode
and a storage mode and comprising,
a Hip-flop circuit having first and second transistors, a first
terminal of each of said transistors being connected to cell
ground potential, a second terminal of each of said transis-
tors being connected to cell supply voltage, a third termi-
nal of said first transistor being connected to the second
terminal of said second transistor and a third terminal of
said second transistor being connected to the second ter-
minal of said first transistor,
first and second voltage sources,
first switch means operatively connected to said first voltage
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1271
source and to said second terminal of said first and second
transistors and effective when in an "on" state to place the
storage cell in the access mode by applying a supply
voltage of a first voltage level to said flip-flop circuit,
second switch means operatively connected to said second
voltage source and to said second terminal of said first and
second transistors for placing the storage cell in a storage
cell in the storage mode by applying a supply voltage of a
second voltage level to said flip-flop circuit, said second
voltage level being substantially less than said first voltage
level, and
means for placing said first switching means in an "ofr' state,
thereby removing said first voltage level from said flip-
flop circuit, when the storage cell is in its said storage
mode.
Tjir » 1}
't t /
sistors during the selected and non-selected states of an
associated word line.
4,394,753
INTEGRATED MEMORY MODULE HAVING
SELECTABLE OPERATING FUNCTIONS
Hans-Joerg Penzel, Wolfratshausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin &. Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,133
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 29,
1979, 2948159
Int. a.' GllC 7/00
U.S. CI. 365—236 3 Qaims
4,394,752
DECODING AND SELECTION CIRCUIT FOR A
MONOLITHIC MEMORY
Gerard Boudon; Bernard Denis, both of Mennecy; Virginie de
Grivel, Neuilly, and Pierre Mollier, Saint Fargeau Ponthierry,
all of France, assignors to International Business Machines
Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,136
Claims priority, application European Pat. Off., Sep. 26, 1980,
80430019 I
I Int. CV GllC 7/00
U.S. a. 365—227 » Claims
1. A selection circuit for a memory array having a matrix of
cells arranged in n rows and m columns wherein the cells of
different rows are connected to n word lines each having
selected and non-selected states, the selection of a word line
during a selected state being controlled by an address decoding
circuit receiving at its input a line addressing signal and having
n outputs, each output controlling the state of a line driver
transistor, the n driver transistors being of a first conductivity
type, each of which includes first and second electrodes and a
control electrode, said first electrode being connected to a
voltage supply terminal, said second electrode being con-
nected to a word line and said control electrode being con-
nected to an output of said decoding circuit, comprising;
n control transistors having a conductivity opposite to that
of said driver transistors, each of said control transistors
being associated with one of said driver transistors and
having a first conductive electrode connected to said
voltage supply terminal and a second conductive elec-
trode connected to the control electrode of its associated
driver transistor, and
means including a regulating transistor for supplying a cur-
rent to the control electrode of each of said control tran-
swnCMciiaxT
DATtBUE
oecooER
11 leiioBv Ml,
1. In an integrated memory module of the type in which a
plurality of memory cells are arranged in a matrix of columns
and rows and are addressable by row and column addresses
received via a plurality of address terminals in response to
strobe signals to provide data on a plurality of write/read lines,
in which a bidirectional address buffer is connected to the
address terminals for receiving an address, and in which a row
address decoder and a column address decoder are connected
between the address buffer and the rows and columns of mem-
ory cells, respectively, for producing row and column selec-
tion signals, the improvement therein comprismg;
a data bus connected to said memory and havmg a plurality
of lines equal to the number n of write/read lines to be
selected by a higher value portion of a column address;
a mode register operable to receive and store mode signals
from and to provide mode signals for the address termi-
nals, the mode signals defining the operating functions of
the memory module, in response to predetermined control
signals;
a bidirectional data input and data output device connected
to said data bus;
said memory matrix divided into small n areas each includ-
ing an identical plurality of columns of memory cells and
all said areas being simultaneously accessible; and
a switch circuit, including a bidirectional operating portion,
and selectively operable to connect the address buffer to
the address decoders, to connect the address buffer to the
mode register and to connect the address register to the
data bus in response to receipt of other control signals
including the strobe signals.
4,394,754
APPARATUS FOR LOW FREQUENCY TORSIONAL
SHEAR WAVE LOGGING
Kenneth H. Waters, Cape Town, South Africa, assignor to
Conoco Inc., Ponca City, Okla.
Filed Oct. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 195,368
Int. a.3 GOIV 1/16
U.S. a. 367—75 6 C\9\m%
5. A seismic wave detector for detecting shear waves in a
formation adjacent a borehole, comprising:
1272
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
housing means for secure disposition within said borehole;
means carried by said housing means for actuation to posi-
tion said housing means in said borehole,
armature means of ring shape having plural permanent mag-
net sections of equal arcuate length intersticed in equal
spacing by plural segments of high permeability metal;
rotor means of circular shape disposed for close positioning
within said armature means, and having a non-magnetic
central portion secured to a concentric high permeability
»-1 coi^eol , — -J
t — s.'a-^i. OX'
■ jn^r — ^-
I A*fO^''f9
'^"^i^^' ] ■^^}^^'/^?i'r-^^jfi^Mm^TMm^'^"
outer portion that is formed to provide plural cores, and
having plural coils equi-spaced therearound as formed on
said respective cores for disposition in flux associative
positioning to said plural permanent magnets;
means for rigidly securing said armature means to said hous-
ing means;
torsion bar means for axially securing said rotor means to
said housing means; and
means connecting opposite ends of each of said plural coils
to provide a detector output.
4,394,755
BEARING ARRANGEMENT FOR AN OBJECTIVE OF AN
OPTICAL APPARATUS FOR WRITING AND/OR
READING RECORDING TRACKS BY MEANS OF A
RADIATION BEAM
Wilhelmus A. H. Gijzen, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to
U.S. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,510
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Jul. 31, 1980,
8004380
Int. a.^ GllB 7/08. 7/12. 21/12
U.S. CI. 369—45 11 Qaims
1. An optical apparatus for, during operation, writing and/or
reading recording tracks in a recording surface of a record
carrier (3) by means of a radiation beam (2) which is produced
by a radiation source and, more specifically, for scanning video
and/or audio recording tracks in a reflecting recording surface
of a rotary video or audio disc by means of a light beam, which
apparatus comprises:
a frame (5).
an objective (6) for concentrating the radiation beam (2) to a
radiation spot (7) in a focussing plane, which objective has
an upper end (8), which during operation faces the record-
ing surface of a record carrier (3), and a lower end (9),
which is remote from the recording surface, and com-
prises a lens system (10) with an optical axis (11),
a combined bearing arrangement for the objective, which
arrangement is a combination of, firstly, a focussing bear-
ing arrangement which is adapted to realize focussing
movements (12) of the objective between a rest jwsition
and an operating position and relative to the frame in a
direction which at least substantially coincides with the
optical axis so as to enable any deviations from an average
position of the recording surface of the record carrier in a
direction perpendicular to the recording surface to be
followed with the focussing plane, and, secondly, a piv-
otal bearing arrangement which is adapted to realize
pivotal movements of the objective relative to the frame
in pivoting directions (13. 14) about an axis (15, 16) sub-
stantially perpendicular to the optical axis (11) of the lens
system (10), so as to enable any deviations from an average
position of the recording track in directions situated in the
recording surface to be followed with the radiation spot
(7); -
electrically controllable focussing means (32-46) for electri-
cally realizing and controlling the focussing movements
(12) of the objective (6);
as well as electrically controllable pivoting means (32-46)
for electrically realizing and controlling the pivotal move-
ments of the objective, characterized in that the combined
bearing arrangement for the objective comprises a plain
bearing arrangement, comprising a stationary bearing
member (17), which is substantially coaxial with the opti-
cal axis (11) of the objective (6), is connected to the frame
(5) and has an at least partly convex outer surface (18). as
well as a movable bearing member (19), which is con-
nected to the objective and has a cylindrical inner surface
(20) which with a certain amount of bearing clearance
cooperates with the convex outer surface (18) of the sta-
tionary bearing member (17) in a sliding and pivotal fash-
ion.
4,394,756
GENERATION OF BUSY SIGNALS IN A DIGITAL
CONCENTRATOR
Ronald J. Canniff, Naperville, III., assignor to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,618
Int. a.3 H04Q 11/04; H04J 3/16
U.S. CI. 370—56 6 Qaims
1. A method of transmitting a busy signal to a calling party
when all paths are busy through a digital switching system
utilizing successive frames of selectively assigned time slots,
said method
characterized by the steps of
transferring a busy code word from a table to a line-to-trunk
assignment device (810)
storing a busy status signal in said assignment device to each
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1273
newly active line when all paths through said switching
system are in use, and
using said busy status signals to transfer said busy code word
to each said newly active line.
^ 4,394,757
FRAME FORMAT FOR PCM SPEECH DATA IN A
TELEPHONE TRANSMISSION SYSTEM AND DIGITAL
TELEPHONE APPARATUS FOR USE WITH THIS
J I FRAME FORMAT
Deepak Muzumdar, Somerset, N.J.; George A. Mierzwa, Boca
Raton, Fla.; Richard Sanders, Boca Raton, Fla., and Orrie J.
Van der Meiden, Boca Raton, Fla., assignors to Siemens
Corporation, Iselin, N.J.
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,395
Int. a.^ H04J 3/06. 3/12
U.S. CI. 370—100 5 Claims
1. Digital telephone apparatus for transmitting and receiving
PCM speech data as well as signalling information via a tele-
phone transmission line, said apparatus comprising, in combi-
nation:
(a) a serial frame synchronizer, adapted to receive serial
digital information that was transmitted over said trans-
mission line, said serial frame synchronizer decoding a
synchronizing code in said serial digital information and
thereby identifying the timing of successive, 125 microsec-
ond frames of data;
(b) a sync/signalling generator connected to said serial
frame synchronizer and adapted to transmit serial digital
information over said transmission line, said sync/signall-
ing generator being responsive to a first enable signal
received from said serial frame synchronizer for shifting
out to said transmission line a first outgoing 8 bit data
word comprising a synchronization code and a signalling
code;
(c) a first codec/PCM filter connected to said serial frame
synchronizer and adapted to transmit serial digital infor-
mation over said transmission line, said first codec/PCM
filter being responsive to a second enable signal from said
serial frame synchronizer for shifting out to said transmis-
sion line a second outgoing 8 bit data word comprising a
PCM speech sample, said second outgoing 8 bit word
immediately following said first outgoing 8 bit data word;
and,
(d) means for generating a third outgoing 8 bit data word
connected to said serial frame synchronizer and adapted
to transmit serial digital information over said transmis-
sion line, said means for generating said third outgoing 8
bit data word being responsive to a third enable signal
from said serial frame synchronizer for shifting out to said
transmission line said third outgoing 8 bit data word, said
'iS<J
.-•but
m^-
ii!
H
"iH.i'.l
r'»^-
.;.«
""^ ■ 1
tWiP
•l«>»ll« «. •
WHi;
CUC.'lT
SKUit
\^^-^
'a;
T
>M,0: UK'UMMX
I — ■ — I si«c(s««'.'«t r" -
t^-
SUV-:', "*
i«i nil
'''JC<'»".<
•asiwca-xii
third outgoing 8 bit data word immediately following said
second outgoing 8 bit data word.
4,394.758
SYNCHRONIZING UNIT FOR RECEIVING SECTION OF
PCM STATION
Roberto D. Donne, Milan, Italy, assignor to Italtel Societa
Italiana Telecomunicazioni, S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,065
Qaims priority, application Italy, Jun. 30, 1980, 23104 A/80
Int. CI.' H04J 3/08
U.S. CI. 370—105 13 Qaims
1. A synchronizing unit controlling the operation of a re-
ceiving station of a PCM station of a telecommunication sys-
tem, comprising:
timing means stepped by line-clock pulses extracted from an
incoming bit stream organized into alternating first and
second frames each containing a multiplicity of channels
accommodating respective data words, an initial channel
No. 0 of each first and second frame normally containing
a respective alignment word A and B characterized by at
least one invariable bit in a predetermined time position,
and timing means generating clock signals fed to said
receiving section and further emitting first and second
1274
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
marking pulses TA and TB in a time slot assigned to the
No. 0 channel of said first and second frames, respectively;
correlation means including a decoder receiving said incom-
ing bit stream and emitting respective identification pulses
AX and BX upon recognizing said alignment words A and
B, said correlation means further including logic circuitry
generating an error signal FAT upon nohcoincidence of
said marking pulses TA and TB with the respective identi-
fication pulses AX and BX, said logic circuitry feeding
EC-
V ,;.;;:•.
20
AX
I "
5«i
_3-
fFf
F»I ATL t EPT
AW
corrective signals into said timing means for readjusting
same to re-establish coincidence between said marking
pulses and the corresponding identification pulses; and
a malfunction detector connected to said correlation means
and to said timing means for receiving therefrom at least
one of said identification pulses and the corresponding
marking pulse, said detector including gating means for
producing an alarm indication AW in the absence of coin-
cidence therebetween.
CT
CK-
*L-
D£-
O'l
<-* Cdu
FC
cs-r
RL
ffi
I
CD
— M — -ou
UK
C - n c u i I
— TS
— L
_J
certain of said additional inputs thereof during the No. 0
channel of said second frames while leaving other multi-
plexer outputs connected to the associated stage outputs;
decoding means emitting supervisory instructions upon
detecting certain bit groupings in a data word loaded into
said input register in the No. 0 channel of a frame; and
switching means connected to said decoding means for
generating internal signals in response to said supervisory
instructions, said multiplexer being further controlled by
said switching means for modifying a bit in one of said
alignment words in the presence of said supervisory in-
structions.
4,394,760
PROCESS FOR MONITORING ANALOG AND DIGITAL
MOBILE RADIO CONNECTIONS
Karl Kammerlander, Wolfratshausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 238,071 c^
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 31,
1980, 3012513
Int. CV H04J 3/00
U.S. CI. 370— 111 4 Claims
4,394,759
TRANSMITTING SECTION OF PCM STATION
Roberto Delle Donne, Milan, Italy, assignor to Italtel Societa
Italiana Telecomunicazioni S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,064
Claims priority, application Italy, Jun. 30, 1980, 23105 A/80
Int. a.^ H04J 3/]2. 3/14
U.S. a. 370—110.1 12 Qaims
1. A transmitting section of a PCM station of a telecommuni-
cation system, comprising:
channel-forming means for organizing n-bit data words into
alternating first and second outgoing frames each contain-
ing a multiplicity of channels accommodating respective
data words, said channel-forming means including an
input register with n stages accommodating respective bits
of an arriving data word loaded into same, an output
register with n stages, and a multiplexer with n outputs
connected to respective stage inputs of said output register
and with a plurality of inputs connected to respective
stage outputs of said input register, said multiplexer hav-
ing additional inputs connected to points of fixed potential
representing predetermined logical values;
timing means stepped by a local clock for identifying an
initial channel No. 0 of each frame and controlling said
multiplexer to replace certain bits of a data word in the
No. 0 channel of each frame by predetermined bits yield-
ing partly invariable alignment words A and B loaded into
said output register in said first and second frames, respec-
tively, said timing means emitting a frame-designating
signal switching part of the outputs of said multiplexer to
AS
COMPRESST
AND GATE
III— L
CAMOUFLAGE
DEVICE
USl \.3)
AE
V
US3 i.) US2 2j
V
TRANSMISSION
SIGNAL INPUT
V
MODULATOR
AND
TRANSMITTER
RECEIVER
AND
DEMODULATOR
7^
EXPANDOR DECAMOUFUCE
DEVICE
RECEIVE
SIGNAL OUTPUT
REGENERATOR
1. In a process for monitoring analog and digital mobile
radio connections in a mobile radio network comprising a
plurality of mobile radio subscriber stations and a plurality of
base stations which are mutually spaced in a cellular arrange-
ment having rigidly prescribed overlapping radio ranges
which are directly adjacent one another as radio range groups
in which the total number of available frequency channels is
repeated, in which the frequency distribution plan for the base
stations is designed such that common channel disturbances in
a radio range, including an extended boundary zone of the
overlapping, are substantially eliminated, in which at least the
signaling in digital form between the base stations and the'
mobile subscriber stations is carried out over duplex time-divi-
sion multiplex organization channels, in which radio range
related information blocks are time compressed for transmis-
sion, and in which the time-compressed information blocks are
expanded to obtain useful information, the improvement
therein comprising the steps of:
time compressing analog radio range related information
blocks which are to be transmitted as useful signals in
specific time slots to produce gaps between the informa-
tion blocks including delaying the compressed informa-
tion blocks;
inserting data block sequences into the gaps, containing
monitoring signals including subscriber identification, the
signal-to-noise ratio of the connection and subscriber and
network internal signals;
transmitting the composite signals so formed to a receiver
and receiving the same;
extracting the data block sequences from the received com-
posite signals; and
then expanding the time-compressed information blocks to
their original lengths to obtain the useful information.
JULY 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1275
4,394,761
CURRENT SWITCHING TECHNIQUE
John L. Clark, Columbia Heights, Minn., assignor to Honeywell
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Apr.' 16, 1981, Ser. No. 254,820
Int. Cl.^ H02H 7/20
U.S. a. 371—8 6 Qaims
21 2i ? 10 i^
"'Y
■^fh
:: yr^^
iOO '05
>H^-Hf4VH
.a'
f?
i32 ST
1 '5
t
V
^i-r
/ ^
41)1 \n ^> — -^ 1
|~ " \^.:i,'^ L'
<2r| ,?5J 1,6 113 *'
1. A redundancy circuit comprising, in combination:
a measuring impedance;
first and second operational amplifiers having inverting
input terminals, non-inverting input terminals, and output
terminals;
a source of excitation voltage with respect to ground;
means connecting said source through said measuring impe-
dance producing a signal current into said inverting input
terminals to provide a signal to said amplifiers;
means grounding said non-inverting input terminals;
first and second feedback impedances;
and switch means having a first condition in which said first
feedback ipipedance is connected between the output
terminal and the inverting input terminal of said first
amplifier, and said second feedback impedance is con-
nected between said inverting terminal of said second
amplifier and ground, so that the output of said first opera-
tional amplifier is representative of the signal current from
said measuring impedance,
said switch means having a second condition in which said
second feedback impedance is connected between the
output terminal and the inverting input terminal of said
second amplifier, and said first feedback impedance is
connected between said inverting terminal of said first
amplifier and ground, so that the output of said second
operational amplifier is representative of the signal from
said measuring impedance.
4,394,762
PULSE-CODE MODULATION SIGNAL PROCESSING
CIRCUIT
Daiki Nabeshtma, Kamakura, Japan,, assignor to Tokyo
Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 222,769
Int. CI.3 G06F ;///0 ,
U.S. a. 371—38 10 Qaims
1. A signal processing circuit for recording PCM signals,
comprising:
A/D coverting means for sampling at a predetermined fre-
quency analog signals to be recorded and converting
sampled signals into digital signals forming sample words;
mode determining means for generating a first mode signal
when a sample word from the A/D converting means
consists of N bits, where N is a positive integer, and a
second mode signal when a sample word from the A/D
converting means consists of N-l-M bits, where M is a
positive integer;
error correction word generating means connected to said
A/D converting means and mode determining means for
generating, in response to a first mode signal, K -I- L error
correction words, each consisting of N bits, and where K
and L are positive integers, for a predetermined number of
N-bit sample words and for generating, in response to a
second mode signal, K error correction words each con-
sisting of M + N bits for the same number of (M-(-N)-bit
words as that of the N-bit sample words;
first memory means connected to said A/D . converting
means and said error correction word generating means
for interleaving error correction words among the sample
words corresponding thereto;
arranging means to desired PCM signals connected to said
first memory means and mode determining means for
allotting, in response to a first mode signal, first by said
predetermined number of N-bit sample words and then
secondly the K-i-L error correction words to one hori-
zontal scanning segment of a television signal and for
A/D
■ CONVERTER
\
BATQB I
PARtT
SiGMAl
GENEBATOB I
T—f
, lATCm
J -^ "EG STER I
-f
> '
PARITY
— SIGNAL
GENERATOR
GA'
a.
}2
CONTROt I
SIGNAL
GENtHATOR I
-| '
36
V -
CRC
Signal
generator
P'S
CONvERTfR I
ELECTING 1
CiRCij'T {
CLOCK
Signal
glnerator
S*NC
Signal
generator
J" »H
.d4
dividing, in response to a second mode signal, each of the
sample words and error correction words into an M-bit
component and an N-bit component and then allotting to
the horizontal scanning segment the M-bit components of
said predetermined number of sample words, the M-bit
components of K error correction words, the N-bit com-
ponents of said predetermined number of sample words,
and the N-bit components of K error correction words in
that order, thereby allotting N-bit components of said
predetermined number of said sample words and the N-bit
components of K error correction words to a slot to
which L error correction words are allotted in response to
a first mode signal; and
means for recording on a video tape the PCM output signals
from said arranging means and mode determining means
in a form which is adapted to a data format for the televi-
sion signal.
4,394,763
ERROR-CORRECTING SYSTEM
Genzo Nagano, and Masao Takahashi, both of Yokohama, Ja-
pan, assignors to Fujitsu Limited, Tokyo, Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP80/00199, § 371 Date May 1, 1981. § 102(e)
Date Apr. 24, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00641, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 5, 1981
PCT Filed Aug. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 261,181
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 31, 1979, 54-111152
Int. a.' G06F 11/10: GllC 29/00
U.S. a. 371—38 11 Claims
1. An error-correcting system, operatively connected be-
tween a main memory and a central processing unit, compris-
ing:
an error correction code logic circuit, which can correct
n-bit errors, where n is a positive integer, and detect n-(- 1-
bit errors;
first means, operatively connected to said central processing
unit and said error correction code logic circuit, for dis-
criminating whether an error, occurring in said main
memory, is a soft error or a hard error;
second means for storing data for a defective memory cell of
said main memory, which defective memory cell produces
the hard error;
1032 0.0.^7
1276
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
JULY 19, 1983
third means, operatively connected to said main memory,
said first means and said second means, for, when a hard
error is found by using said first means, switching the data
for the defective memory cell of said main memory to said
second means; and
MEMORY
-121
a-, ; 123^
m
SWITCHING
CIRCUIT
,L6
L7_
L3-
122
-L^ L8
CO«R
CONT
ECC
L2-
CPU ^
4 394 765
ELECTRO-SLAG REMELTING FURNACE FOR
CONSUMABLE ELECTRODES AND HAVING AN
ELECTRODE DRIVE
Uwe Reimpell, Hanau; Helmut Grof, Bruchkobel; Franz-Georg
Knell, and Anton Wamser, both of Hanau, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Leybold-Heraeus GmbH, Cologne,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 324,995
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 15,
1980, 3047214
Int. a? H05B 7/109
U.S. a. 373—52 10 Claims
-L9
fourth means, operatively connected to said first means and
said third means, for effecting a vahdation operation with
respect to the data to be stored in said second means.
4 394 764
LASER PROCESSING APPARATUS
Ken Ishikawa, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Tokyo Shibaura
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,816
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1980, 55-118738
Int. CI.' HOIS 3/00
U.S. CI. 372—38 8 Claims
wmm&
1. An electro-slag remelting furnace for consumable elec-
trodes and comprising a mold for receiving a melt formed from
the electrode material; at least one drive motor and at least one
spindle and an associated spindle nut for vertical movement of
the electrode; at least one guide column, which is provided for
vertically guiding the consumable electrodes and which ex-
tends parallel with the spindle and relative to which the spindle
is rotatably mounted at its two ends; and at least one clamping
device for the consumable electrodes comprising the spindle
nut which is of fixed location, the spindle which is mounted in
the spindle nut and is vertically displaceable therein, the spin-
dle being connected by its lower end to the clamping device;
and a guide in which the guide column is displaceably
mounted, together with the spindle. —
1. A laser processing apparatus comprising:
direct current power supply circuit means;
main discharge circuit means connected to said direct cur-
rent power supply circuit means for supplying main dis-
charge current thereto;
falling waveform control circuit means connected to said
direct current power supply circuit means for controlling
the falling of the discharge current waveform;
discharge current stopping circuit means connected to said
waveform control circuit means for effecting the control
thereof so that the discharge current is stopped when the
discharge current becomes lower than a predetermined
value;
main control circuit means connected to said main discharge
circuit means, falling waveform control circuit means and
discharge current stopping circuit means for effecting the
control of these individual circuit means at predetermined
timings; and
laser beam oscillating means connected to said main dis-
charge circuit means and falling waveform control circuit
means for providing a laser beam according to the main
discharge current and discharge current having a con-
trolled falling waveform portion.
4 394 766
GRAPHITIZATION SYSTEM METHOD AND
APPARATUS
Bench Y. Karagoz, Grand Island, N.Y., assignor to Great Lakes
Carbon Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,249
Int. CV H05B 3/60: F27D 3/00
U.S. a. 373—120 23 Qaims
1. An apparatus for the production of graphite from carbon
bodies comprising a refractory lined open-topped metal and
generally U-shaped shell furnace supported by structural sup-
port means, a column of carbon bodies within said furnace
which are in end abutting relationship surrounded by particu-
late thermal insulation medium and held in place by and m
electrical contact with two electrical power heads located at
the ends of said furnace at least one of which is movable by
means effective to apply pressure to said column, said power
heads being adapted to conduct a current of electricity through
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1277
said column of bodies to convert the carbon bodies to graphite
by the Joule effect, and means to remove said thermal insula-
C^'^ "■■^f^
tion medium by gravity dumping through the bottom of said
furnace.
4,394,767
DATA TRANSMISSION OVER LONG DISTANCE
CIRCUITS
Martin N. Y. Shum, Brookfield, Conn., assignor to General
DataComm Industries, Inc., Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jul. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 281,059
Int. a.' H04B 3/20
U.S. a. 375—13 2 Qaims
-4-
•j Tow r
Trontmitltd .
Signoi L ' * **' >L ^ *** J
|4^' ^'j^
sCT H — H3Ji^"] — E°JHr!?-^?r@-
Siflr.01 I
Ansii««f
ModeT*
1. A method of handshaking between an originate modem
and an answer modem interconnected by a communication line
comprising the steps of:
causing a ringing signal to be applied to the answer modem
in response to a signal from the originate modem;
connecting the answer modem to the communication line
after receipt of the ringing signal;
transmitting an answerback tone from the answer modem to
the originate modem after a period of silence following
connection of the answer modem to the communication
line;
connecting the originate modem to the communication line
after receipt of the answerback tone;
waiting sufficiently long to reactivate any echo suppressors
in the communication line;
thereafter transmitting first and second training sequences,
one from the originate modem to the answer modem and
the other from the answer modem to the originate modem,
said first and second training sequence being sufficiently
long to train up any echo canceller in the communication
line;
detecting if the lengths of the first and second training se-
quences as ipceived are significantly shorter than their
lengths as transmitted; and
in the event the training sequences as received are signifi-
cantly shorter than their lengths as transmitted, 'transmit-
ting a sacrificial carrier at the beginning of each transmis-
sion of data in a new direction on said communication line
and in the event that the training sequences are not signifi-
cantly shorter as received than as transmitted beginning
each transmission of data in a new direction on said com-
munication line without a sacrificial carrier.
4,394,768
ADAPTIVE SYSTEM IN A DIGITAL DATA RECEIVER
PROVIDING COMPENSATION FOR AMPLITUDE AND
PHASE DISTORTIONS INTRODUCED BY A DATA
TRANSMISSION CHANNEL
Hikmet Sari, Alfortville, France, assignor to U.S. Philips Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,453
Claims priority, application France, May 14, 1980, 80 10863
Int. CI.' H04L 25/03
U.S. CI. 375—14 2 Claims
MULTIPLYING CMCUIT
OUTPUT OkTA
TBANSMISSION
CHANNEL
1. In a digital data receiver, an adaptive system providing
compensation for amplitude and phase distortions introduced
by a data transmission channel and comprising an adaptive
equalizing circuit receiving a signal vector Xk from the data
transmission channel output and producing an output signal y*,
a decision circuit receiving this output signal y* and producing
an estimation s^^^ of each one of the digital data s;_(^ applied
to the data transmission channel input, a summing circuit re-
ceiving said output signal y* and said estimation SA_</for pro-
ducing a difference signal ek-yk — ^k-d< and a multiplying
circuit for multiplying said difference signal e^ by an iteration
step ak, characterized in that the adaptive equalizing circuit is
a non-recursive transversal filter having N adjustable
weighting coefficients and the adaptive systems comprises for
the determination of these coefficients by consecutive itera-
tions:
a first circuit for determining, in a matrix A^ which is an
estimation of the square signal autocorrelation matrix
A = E(X^-X*7-;? ^'^) at an instant to-l-kT, where E is the
expectation operator, Xk is the transpose of Xk, to is a
constant, k is an integer and T is the duration of a data
symbol period, the (N/2-1-1) first elements a/(A)Of the first
row if N is even, or the (N-f l)/2 first elements a, of the
first row if N is odd, said estimation being based on the
relation:
where i is an integer with O^i^N- 1 and /3 is a constant with
0</3<l,
a second circuit connected to said first circuit for forming a
vector
U(k) = [,„(*). r,(*). r2<*) r^ 2. '^- ll^" '" ^^ich r/*) = «/*>
in which r/*) = fl/*) for every i not exceeding N/2 if N is even,
or not exceeding (N- 1)/2 if N is odd, and
1278
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
for every i exceeding said limits, a third circuit connected to
said second circuit for forming a vector
A(*) = [Xo<*>. Xi<*). X2<*) Xj(^_,l^^
whose components are the eigenvalues of a circulant matrix
having the transpose of the said vector U<*)as a first row, with
the aid of the relation:
where P is the unitary matrix of the order N defined by:
(f.g=0, 1.2, ...,N-2. N-1)
and
the clock inputs of both being connected to receive the
same clock signal, said master and slave being enabled
by said clock signal at different times, and_
(2) an R input, an S input, a Q output and a Q output;
(C) said plurality of said n flip-flops being connected in serial
succession, whereby the Q and Q outputs of each flip-flop
are connected to the R and S inputs respectively, of the
next successive fiip-flop; and
(D) said counter having a non-inverting feedback, compris-
ing: _
(1) first means coupling the Q outputs of the (n— 1)'*
flip-flop and (n-2)''' flip-flop to the S input of the {,\Y'
flip-flop, and _
(2) second means coupling the Q outputs of the (n — 1)'*
flip-flop and the (n)'* flip-flop to the R input of the {Xf
flip-flop.
PU =
Nl^
expl/ 2iTfg/S\.
a fourth circuit connected to the data transmission channel
output and the multiplying circuit output for forming a
vector Q<*) with the aid of the relation:
where P*^*^ is the complex conjugate of said unitary matrix P,
a fifth circuit connected to said fourth and third circuits for
dividing said vector Q<*) by said vector A(*) on a term-by-
term basis so that the resulting vector
f<*> = [/0<*>./l<*>./2<*>. ■ ■■/N>-\f'^ = 0<*Va(*>
has components f/*)=9/*)/\/*) for every i not exceeding N-1,
a sixth circuit connected to said fifth circuit for multiplying
said vector F<*) by said unitary matrix for producing a
vector HW=P-F<*>.
a seventh circuit connected to said sixth circuit and said
transversal filter for up-dating the vector C* of the N
weighting coefficients of said transversal filter at the in-
stant to-l-kT so as to produce a coefficient vector C^-i- 1 at
the instant t(,-f-(k-l- 1)T in accordance with the relation:
4,394,770
X-RAY FILM PACKAGE AND METHOD AND
APPARATUS FOR MAKING THE SAME
Peter J. La Franca, 719 Cunningham St., Rockford, III. 61102
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,739
Int. C\? G03B 41/16: G03C 5/16
U.S. CI. 378—169 11 aaims
4,394,769
DUAL MODULUS COUNTER HAVING
NON-INVERTING FEEDBACK
John M. Lull, Fullerton, Calif., assignor to Hughes Aircraft
Company, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 274,005
Int. a.3 H03K 21/36, 21/10, 23/08
U.S. a. 377—116 11 Qaims
-11/10
1. A self-initializing ring counter, comprising:
(A) means for receiving a clock signal;
(B) a plurality of n flip-flops, each of said flip-flops, compris-
ing:
(1) a master and a slave each having its own clock input,
.^-
1. An X-ray film package for applying dimensional indicia
on the developed X-ray film, said package comprising, a sheet
of X-ray film having pre-exposed but undeveloped dimensional
indicia thereon, and a cover completely enclosing said film,
said cover being formed of material which protects said film
from normal light but which is penetrated by X-radiation
whereby, when the package is placed adjacent an object and
subjected to X-radiation and the film thereafter is developed,
both the object and said dimensional indicia appear on said film
with the dimensional indicia being black on the developed film.
4,394,771
APPARATUS FOR MOVING FllM CASSETTES
Pierre Charrier, 5520 Grande-Prairie, St. Leonard, Quebec,
Canada
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 250,034
Int. a.3 G03B 41/16
U.S. a. 378—172 5 Qaims
1. An apparatus for use in taking X-ray pictures, comprising:
a plurality of X-ray film holders, each holder being adapted
to hold two X-ray films in back-to-back relation;
means for intermittently rotating the holders in a closed loop
past a picture-taking station on the loop, each holder
stopping at the station during the time a picture is taken
and presenting one of its two films for a first picture as it
first passes said station, and
means for rotating each holder through 180° as it is moved
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1279
through the closed loop after its first passage at the station,
to present the other film it carries for a second picture at
the picture-taking station during a second passage at said
station.
4,394,772
RADIOGRAPHIC CASSETTE
Tadaomi Okamoto, Fujisawa; Masayuki Ohta, Sakado, and
Makoto Watanabe, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Okamoto
Manufacturing Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 326,839
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 6, 1981, 56-
148420[U] ,
I Int. a.^ G03B 41/16
U.S. CI. 378—182 1 Claim
17
t
finger, thereby changing the density of electric charges on
said surfaces according to the fingerprint pattern of said
finger; and
(b) electrical means for providing the electric output signal -
in accordance with the distribution of said charges on at
least one of said surfaces.
4,394,774
DIGITAL VIDEO COMPRESSION SYSTEM AND
METHODS UTILIZING SCENE ADAPTIVE CODING
WITH RATE BUFFER FEEDBACK
Robert D. Widergren, Saratoga; Wen-Hsiung Chen, Sunnyvale;
Stanley C. Fralick, Saratoga, and Andrew G. Tescher, Clare-
mont, all of Calif., assignors to Compression Labs, Inc., San
Jose, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 969,991. Dec. 15, 1978, Pat. No.
4,302,775. This application Jun. 26, 1981. Ser. No. 277,981
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 24,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' G06K 9/36: H04N 9/32. 7/12: H04B 3/46
U.S. CI. 382—56 " Claims
r:" "■
4*-^ 4p ^^0
VAII)-
^-^ —
MTC I BATE
•* Buffi"
.,-• OECOOihG
*-^p-
iNVCKSC . .
1. A radiographic cassette comprising a film-receiving plate
and a film-keeping plate engageable with said film-receiving
plate in light-tight relation to press a film against said film-
receiving plate, in which said film-keeping plate is provided
with a solar battery and a liquid crystal indicator adapted to be
actuated by currents therefrom, both being open to view, and
provided on its inner surface with a pair of conductive planes
isolated from each other and connected to said battery, and
said film-receiving plate is provided on an associated position
of its inner surface with a conductive plate Which is adapted to
come in contact with said conductive planes to cause shorting.
4,394,773
FINGERPRINT SENSOR
Hartwig Ruell, Mount Laurel, N.J., assignor to Siemens Corpo-
ration, Iselin, N.J.
1 1 Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,606
I ' Int. a.' G06K 9/00
U.S. a. 382—4 19 Claims
1. A fingerprint sensor for transforming the fingerprint
information of a finger, under investigation into an electric
output signal, comprising in combination:
(a) a contact device containing a piezoelectric material, said
contact device having surfaces including a contact surface
for exercising a contact pressure thereon by means of said
5. A data compression method for adaptive coding a stream
of data coefficients in which some of said coefficients are of
zero magnitude, and transferring said adaptively coded coeffi-
cients through a limited bandwidth medium, comprising the
steps of: "'-
multiplying said data coefficients by a normalization factor
which includes an automatically variable feedback control
component and a predetermined compression component
and putting out the product resulting therefrom as normal-
ized data coefficients;
encoding said normalized transform coefficients in accor-
dance with said predetermined data coding scheme in-
cluding variable length, statistically derived, minimum
redundancy coding of amplitude coefficients and includ-
ing run length coding of zero amplitude coefficients for
further compression and transfer through said limited
bandwidth medium
writing said minimum redundancy and run length coded
- coefficients into a compressor buffer memory at a high
asynchronous rate and deriving said feedback control
component as a function of the instantaneous quantity of
data in said memory in relation to the capacity thereof;
and,
reading out to said limited bandwidth medium said coded
coefficients at a predetermined low synchronous transmis-
sion rate.
1280
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
4,394,775
FREQUENCY DIVISION COMMUNICATION SYSTEM
WHEREIN CONVENTIONAL
TRANSMITTER-TRANSCEIVER CAN BE USED AS A
REPEATER OR LOCAL BASE STATION
John Bruinsma, Clayton, Australia, assignor to U.S. Piiilips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,575
Claims priority, application Australia, May 29, 1980,
PE03784
Int. Cl.^ H04B 7/U. 1/44
U.S. a. 455—17 5 Qaims
4,394,776
PRIORITY CHANNEL SYSTEM FOR A SYNTHESIZED
TRANSCEIVER
Jaime A. Borras, Hialeah; Ruben J. Gonzalez, Miami, both of
Fla.; Daniel M. Smith, Schaumburg, III., and Alfred B. Wiec-
zorek. Plantation, Fla., assignors to Motorola, Inc., Schaum-
burg, III.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,565
Int. a.3 H04B 1/38: H03J 7/00
U.S. a. 455—76 7 Claims
OECETVER SECTION,
4IXER I
TRANSMITTER SECTION^
1. A transceiver for use in a frequency division, two-fre-
quency multi-channel communication system having a multi-
channel transmitter with transmission channel selection means
for selecting a channel transmitter frequency and a multi-chan-
nel receiver with receive channel selection means for selecting
a channel receiving frequency band, characterized in that said
receiver further comprises an automatic control system cou-
pled to said transmission channel selection means and said
receive channel selection means, said automatic control system
comprising;
a multi-stable periodic switching device for switching the
receive channel selection means so as to sequentially se-
lect a first channel receiving frequency band and a second
channel receiving frequency band, and for switching the
transmission channel selection means so as to select a first
channel transmitter frequency and a second channel trans-
mitter frequency, said multi-stable periodic switching
device having a control input which, in response to a
keying signal, arrests the periodic switching therof;
detection means fed by signals received within the fre-
quenccy band of a selected receive channel which, in
response to detection thereby of a received signal having
predetermined characteristics, applies said keying signal
to the control input of said multi-stable periodic switching
device and causes said transmitter to transmit information
carried by the received signal; and
a steering circuit, coupled between said multi-stable periodic
switching device and said transmission channel selection
means, having steering modes for determining which
channel transmitter frequency is to be selected, in which a
first steering mode causes said transmission channel selec-
tion means to select said second channel transmitter fre-
quency in response to a received signal within said first
channel receiving frequency band and, alternately, to
select said first channel transmitter frequency in response
to a received signal within said second channel receiving
frequency band.
1. A portable transceiver including a digital frequency syn-
thesizer capable of tuning a plurality of communications chan-
nels, said transceiver including a priority channel monitoring
system comprising:
a crystal channel element capable of providing injection
signals to the transceiver for tuning to a predesignated
priority channel;
sampling means coupled to the digital frequency synthesizer
and the crystal channel element, alternately supplying
injection signals from said synthesizer and said channel
element to the receiver portion of the transceiver;
carrier detection means detecting the presence of carrier
signal in the receiver section of the transceiver;
priority means coupled to said carrier detection means and
said sampling means, disrupting the operation of the sam-
pling means and establishing tuning of the transceiver for
transmission or reception at the communication channel
corresponding to said crystal controlled channel element
when a carrier signal is detected on that frequency corre-
sponding to said crystal controlled channel element; and
delay means coupled to said sampling means to maintain
the tuning of the transceiver at said priority channel for a
predetermined interval to enable a responding transmis-
sion on said priority channel from a transceiver operator.
4,394,777
METHOD OF AND SYSTEM FOR CLASSIFYING
EMERGENCY LOCATING TRANSMITTERS AND
EMERGENCY POSITIONS INDICATING RADIO
BEACONS
Paul E. Wren, Severna Park, Md., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Administrator of the Na-
tional Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Dec. 12, 1979, Ser. No. 102,592
Int. C\? H04B 7/26
U.S. a. 455—95 10 Qaims
1. A distress location transmitter, comprising:
oscillator means for generating a carrier signal to be supplied
to an antenna during a distress call;
July 19, 1983
ELECTRICAL
1281
means for modulating said carrier signal with a distress
characteristic waveform; and
means for periodically disabling said modulating means at a
^
osc
GATE
-I-
^C
TIMER
y^— 14
SWEEP
GEN
/"
22
GATE
— I —
X
-30
20
MULTI
predetermined rate corresponding to one of a plurality of
classes of user for said distress location transmitter in
providing a period of unmodulated carrier to identify said
user class associated with said distress call.
put of said frequency discriminator for providing a con-
trol voltage to said voltage controlled oscillator on the
occasion of the reception of the desired broadcasting
wave by said tuner,
broadcasting wave sensing means responsive to the levels of
both the output from said intermediate frequency circuit
and an S curve signal obtained from said frequency dis-
criminator for sensing the reception of said broadcasting
wave and providing a reception signal relating thereto,
and
Switching means responsive to said reception signal from
said broadcasting wave sensing means for switchably
selecting either said phase locked loop or said automatic
frequency control loop for supply of said control voltage
to said voltage controlled oscillator.
4,394,778
TUNING CONTROL APPARATUS OF RECEIVER
Shigehiko Ikeguchi, and Kouzi Tanaka, both of Oora, Japan,
assignors to Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd., Moriguchi and Tokyo
Sanyo Electric Co. Ltd., Gunma, both of, Japan
Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,272
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 16, 1979, 54-133986
Int. CI.' H04B 1/26
U.S. CI. 455—182 9 Claims
^%}QQrE]T3J
luP
d
4,394,779
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR RECEIVING
DISTORTION-FREE FM SIGNALS BY VEHICULAR
RADIOS
Jens Hansen, Diekholzen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 231,953
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 22,
1980, 3006627
Int. CI.' H04B 1/10
U.S. CI. 455—277 14 Claims
20 . \
19 I
15
13
II
10
PROGRflMMflHL E
FBEO DIVIDES
EEh
ij^
"K VALUE
C£ r.
— 7"^ —
iwFi^—
1S1G%AL
- L NC£
DSC
32 STtoc
3i
55
50
a J IS"*
« 3 ^'itWi
■ I
to
tt
u
„1",
Uns
^
1. A turiitig control apparatus of a receiver for tuning said
receiver to a desired broadcasting wave, comprising:
a tuner including a voltage controlled oscillator as a local
oscillator for generating an intermediate frequency output
when the receiver is tuned to the desired broadcasting
wave,
an intermediate frequency circuit for receiving the output of
said tuner,
a frequency discriminator for receiving the output of said
intermediate frequency circuit,
a phase locked loop for providing a control voltage to said
voltage controlled oscillator on the occasion of a desired
broadcasting wave selecting operation by said receiver
such that said intermediate output frequency is obtained
from said tuner, said phase lock loop including a program-
• able frequency dividing means for dividing the voltage
controlled oscillator output by a selectable ratio such that
the oscillator has a preset frequency related to the desired
broadcasting wave,
an automatic frequency control loop responsive to the out-
1. Method of reducing distortion in the reception of signals
by vehicular FM radio receivers, in which the receiver has an
antenna system (13), the system including a main antenna
element (14) matched to the frequency band of the receiver,
and an auxiliary rod antenna element (15, 17, 18, 19, 20) having
different directonal characteristics which is short with respect
to the main antenna element;
as RF stage (10);
a distortion recognition stage (30) connected to the RF stage
and providing an output signal when distorted reception is
recognized, comprising the steps of
connecting said main antenna element to the receiver;
recognizing non-distortion - distortion characteristics of the
signal from the RF stage in the recognition stage;
(a) upon recognition of non-distortion, leaving said main
antenna element connected;
(b) upon recognition of a distorted signal, connecting the
auxiliary antenna element of a first directional characteris-
tic which has a different directional characteristic than
said main antenna element to the RF stage of the receiver;
(c) continuing to recognize the characteristic of the signal
for a predetermined time interval (r);
(d-1) upon sensing non-distortion characteristic of the signal
1282
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
during said predetermined time interval, connecting the
main antenna element to the RF stage of the receiver; or
(d-2) upon sensing continued distortion characteristic of the
signal, connecting said auxiliary antenna element of a
second direictional characteristic different from said first
directional characteristic to the RF stage of the receiver;
(e) and continuing steps (c) and (d); and
wherein the step of connecting the auxiliary rod antenna
element of difTferent directional characteristics comprises
selectively connecting specifically oriented shielding ele-
ments (17-20) surrounding said rod antenna element (15)
to ground or chassis, while leaving other selectively ori-
ented shielding elements unconnected to provide for se-
lectively specific directional characteristic of the auxiliary
antenna element.
modulating the reflected and collected sunlight with the
data; and
4,394,780
BALLOON COLLECTOR/DIRECTOR SUNSUBSATCOM
CONCEPT
Gregory C. Mooradian, Del Mar, Calif., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,254
Int. CI.' H04B 9/00
U.S. a. 455—618 12 Claims
8. A method for optically transmitting data from an orbiting
satellite comprising:
infiatably distending a sunlight reflecting and collecting
surface in a first distensible means to reflect and collect
sunlight;
infiatably distending a modulated sunlight directing surface
in a second distensible means in order to transmit the data
modulated sunlight.
DESIGNS
JULY 19, 1983
269,729 269,732
MOLDED MEAT PRODUCT OR SIMILAR ARTICLE SHOE BOTTOM
Martin B. P. Zonnenberg, Old Oakwood- Rd., Oakwood, Ga. Joseph P. Famolare, Jr., Putney, Vt., assignor to Famolare, Inc.,
30566 New York, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 202,535 Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,513
I , Term of patent 14 years ~ Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. a. DOl— 04 Int. CI. HI— 04
U.S.a. Dl— 26 U.S. a. D2— 319
269,730
BRASSIERE
Flavia DiTullio, New York, N.Y., assignor to Consolidated
Foods Corporation, Winston-Salem, N.C.
I .Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,052
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D2— 0/
U.S. CI. D2— 24
269,731
AFTER SKI BOOT
Mario Mattiuzzo, Treviso, Italy, assignor to Nordica S.P.A., 269,733
Montebelluna, Italy CANE
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,115 Margaret E. Ayres, 33 Uroy St., Binghamton, N.Y. 14892
Claims priority, application Italy, Dec. 18, 1980, 23678/80[U] Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,384
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
" \xA.a.\i2-04 Int.a.D3-0i
U.S.a.D2-275 U.S.a.D3-7
1283
1284
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,734 269,736
KNITTING NEEDLE LUGGAGE
Hidekazu Okada, Ashiya, Japan, assignor to Oover Mfg. Co., Ted Stark, Jeney City, N J., assignor to M/M Verdi Interna-
Ltd., Osaka, Japan tional. Inc., Jersey City, N.J.
Filed Dec. 19, 1979, Ser. No. 105,088 Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,285
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 12, 1979, 54-47495 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. C\. D3— 0/
Int. a. D02— 07 U.S. a. D3— 71
IJ.S. a. D3— 28
i
269,735
COMPARTMENTED TRAVEL CASE
Brian T. Bunetta, 19981 Carrie, Detroit, Mich. 48234
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,737
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 02
U.S. a. D3— 39
269,737
LUGGAGE
Ted Stark, Montclaire, N.J., assignor to M/M Verdi Interna-
tional, Inc., Jersey City, N.J.
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,298
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D3— 07
U.S. a. D3— 71
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1285
269,738 269,740
LUGGAGE LUGGAGE
Ted Stark, Montclaire, N.J., assignor to M/M Verdi Interna- Ted Stark, Montclaire, N.J., assignor to M/M Verdi Interna-
tional, Inc., Jersey City, N.J. tional. Inc., Jersey City, N.J.
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,401 Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,405
j I Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
" Int. a. D3~0; Int. a. D3— 07
U.S. a. D3— 77 U.S. CI. D3— 71
269,739 269,741
LUGGAGE LUGGAGE
Ted Stark, Montclaire, N.J., assignor to M/M Verdi Interna- Ted Stark, Montclaire, N.J., assignor to M/M Verdi Interna-
tional, Inc., Jersey City, N.J. tional. Inc., Jersey City, N.J.
Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,403 Filed Apr. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 366,406
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D3-07 Int. Q. D3-07
VS. a. D3— 71
U.S. a. m—n
1286
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,742 269,744
CRIB CHAIR
Merlin A. Brunner, New London; Harvey J. Draheim, Frederick J. Wallace, Salisbury, N.C., assignor to Lyon-Shaw,
Weyauwega, and Michael J. Schaffer, New London, all of Inc., Salisbury, N.C.
Wis., assignors to Simmons Universal Corporation, New Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 281,991
York, N.Y. Term of patent 14 years
Filed Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 238,245 Int. Q. D6— 0/
Term of patent 14 years U.S. C\. D6— 56
Int. a. D6— o;
U.S. a. D6— 16
269,745
SETTEE
Stapleton Long, Morristown, Tenn., assignor to The Berkline
Corporation, Morristown, Tenn.
Filed Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,607
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D6— 01
U.S. a. D6— 63
269,743
CHAIR
Wolfgang Miiller-Deisig, Borgenteich, Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignor to Fehlbaum & Co., Domach, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,467
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— o;
U.S. a. D6— 31
269,746
SETTEE
Richard Brooks, North Hollywood, Calif., assignor to The Ber-
kline Corporation, Morristown, Tenn.
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 346,579
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 07
U.S. a. D6— 63 —
JULY 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1287
269,747 269^749
SEAT CRT TERMINAL STAND
Frederick J. Wallace, Salisbury, N.C, assignor to Lyon-Shaw Daniel F. Foster, 7160 S. Vine Cir. East, Littleton, Colo. 80122
Incorporated, Salisbury, N.C. F"ed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,288
Filed Jul. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 281,990 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. CI. D6-04; D14-02
Int. a. D6— 0/ U.S. a. D6— 85
U.S. a. D6— 70
II
269,750
DISPLAY STAND FOR FLOOR TILES, CARPETS OR
SIMILAR ARTICLE
Anthony E. Bolyn, Verona, N.J., assignor to Congoleum Corpo-
ration, Kearny, N.J.
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,487
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D06— 06
U.S. CI. D6— 85
T \~
-\
\
"
i
1
-
[■
■ ' > '
^
_Li_J
269,748
CHAIR
France Berlic, Rozna dolina c. III/5, 61000 Ljubljana, Yugosla- ^^^^^ ^^^ ASSEMBLED RODS AND REELS
""^ Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 221,042 Paul F. Rieman, 4390 E. Broadway, Des Moines, Iowa 50317
Claims priority, application Yugoslavia, Nov. 5, 1980, 416/80 Filed May 7, 1981, Ser No. 261,635
11 Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
11 Int.a.D6-0/ Int.a.D6-06
U.S. a. D6— 76 U.S. a. D6— 125
^^^
1288
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,752 269,754
DISPLAY CABINET FOR FLOOR TILES, CARPETS OR DISPLAY UNIT
SIMILAR ARTICLE Fred W. Kates, New York, N.Y., assignor to Revlon, Inc., New
Anthony E. Bolyn, Verona, N.J., assignor to Congoleum Corpo- York, N.Y.
ration, Kearny, N.J. Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,180
Filed Dec. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 217,372 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. Q. D06— 04
Int. a. D06— W U.S. a. D6— 186
U.S. a. D6— 168
""
«=- I
.^
■ 0 ■ .
—
7
7
^- ■
■,('
]
't
_^^--
j
irfc
if
269,755
FRONT AND SIDE PANELS OF A DESK
Amerigo Terenzoni, 400 S. Western, Oklahoma City, Okla.
73109
Filed Sep. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 186,553
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D06—06
U.S. a. D6— 192
269,753
COLLAPSIBLE TABLE
Giovanni Offredi, Via L. Murator 29, Milano, Italy
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,246
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6—03
U.S. a. D6— 178
269,756
SUPPORT BRACKET FOR A TABLE LEG
Edwin C. Sandham, Thiensville, Wis., assignor to Nordson Cor-
poration, Amherst, Ohio
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,157
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D6— 0<5
U.S. a. D6— 194
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1289
269,757
CRIB FOOTBOARD
Merlin A. Brunner, New London; Harvey J. Draheim,
Weyauwega, and Michael J. Schaffer, New London, all of
Wis., assignors to Simmons Universal Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,339
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. CI. D6—D6
U.S. a. D6— 198
269,760
SECURING DEVICE FOR A GENERATOR HXED BY A
SLIDEWAY ON SEAT-STAYS OF A BICYCLE
Gilbert Geney, Seloncourt, France, assignor to Cycles Peugeot,
Valentigney, France
Filed Feb. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 120,122
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 8, 1980, 80 387
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D8— OS
U.S. a. D8— 382
269,758
BAR-B-QUE SHELL
Charles A. Braswell, Burnet, Tex., assignor to Jaro, Inc., Bur-
net, Tex.
1 1 Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,930
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D7— 02
U.S. a. D7— 337
269,761
CAN OR THE LIKE
Thomas N. Gaunt, Leeds, England, assignor to Plastona (John
Waddington) Limited, Leeds, England
259 759 Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,486
DRIVE FASTENER SHANK Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 12, 1980,
Burnell J.'Wollar, Barrington, 111., assignor to Phillips Plastics 99<>105 , „, „. ,a „.a«
^ nwii' \»7- Term of patent 14 years
Corp., Phillips, Wis. ^ j^_ '
Filed Jul. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 171,025 „ c ^ no ^7n
Term of patent 14 years ^•^- ^'- ^—-^'^
Int. a. D8— 0«
U.S. a. D8— 388
1290
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,762 269,765
BOTTLE PACKAGING CONTAINER
Andrew Grant, Markham, Canada, assignor to BP Oil Limited, Vincent E. Fortuna, Garden Grove, Calif., assignor to Cosden
Toronto, Canada Technology, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Nov. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 205,474 Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,885
Claims priority, application Canada, Jul. 14, 1980, 1407804 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. O. D9— 0/
Int. a. D9—01 U.S. a. D9— 398
U.S. CI. D9— 375
feSl
\t^i^t^
AiUlAAfl-AJU)
269,763
PACKAGING CONTAINER
Vincent E. Fortuna, Garden Grove, Calif., assignor to Cosden
Technology, Inc., Dallas, Tex. '
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,810
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D9— 01
V.S. CI. D9— 398
H')T|»ltl»ff|W)»tflTl?lWMj
269,766
DISPLAY CARD FOR JEWELRY ARTICLES OR THE
LIKE
Andrew G. Strasser, Woodcliff Lake, N.J.; Donna M . Tierney,
and Daniel B. Thorsen, both of Bronxville, N.Y., assignors to
General Mills Products Corp., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,137
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— Oi
U.S. a. D9— 457
269,764
PACKAGING CONTAINER
Vincent E. Fortuna, Garden Grove, Calif., assignor to Cosden
Technology, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,812
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D9— 0/
U.S. CI. D9— 398
^ +
-■^
' • '. ;• ;
-4-
■ ' • .
'-'-^ - ,
i^ - -
*^:
■^■^:
-_ -,
pWiq'-.
-k-:^.^.
•b'». 6-;
■ -^
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1291
269,767 269,769
DIGITAL WATCH SEGMENTED TURTLE-SHAPED PENDANT OR
John T. Houlihan, Watertown, and John S. Maliskas, Newtown, SIMILAR ARTICLE
both of Conn., assignors to Timex Corporation, Waterbury, Muriel Meyer, Long Beach, N.Y., assignor to General Mills
Conn. Products Corp., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 254,033 Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,444
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
" Int. a. DIO— 02 Int. CI. Dll— O;
U.S.a. DIO— 38 U.S.a, Dll— 82
269,768
SYMBOLIC PIN
Peter A. Terry, 6315 Colony Way, Edina, Minn. 55435
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,841
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
' ' Int. a. Dll— 0/
U.S. CI. Dll— 47
>
I
1292
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,770 269,772
JEWELRY CHAIN CLASP COMBINED FRONT AND REAR FENDERS, CHAIN
James E. Pittenger, 2427 S. Allison Way, Lakewood, Colo. GUARD, ENGINE COVER AND FUEL TANK FOR
80227, and William S. Worth, 2855 E. Maplewood, Littleton, MOPED
Colo. 80120 Daniel G, Hahn, Olney, III., assignor to AMF Incorporated,
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,459 White Plains, N.Y.
Term of patent 14 years Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 184,703
Int. a. Dll— 0/ Term of patent 14 years
U.S. a. Dll-87 Int. a. D12-//
U.S. a. D12— 110
V
V
269,773
COMPRESSION TOOL FOR INSIDE TIRE REPAIR OR
SIMILAR ARTICLE
Alec W. Niconchuk, Peabody, Mass., assignor to North Shore
Laboratories Corp., Peabody, Mass.
Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,563
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. 12—99
U.S. a. D12— 153
B^^^T^
269,771
SIMULATED CHRISTMAS TREE
Cole Williams, 2408 Allanjay PI., Glendale, Calif. 91208
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,512
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. Dll— OJ
U.S. a. Dll— 118
269,774
SUPPORT BRACKET FOR AUTOMOTIVE ROOF RACK
Joseph W. Schawarzli, 430 Comstock Rd., Scarborough, On-
tario, Canada
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,628
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D12— 7(5
U.S. a. D12— 157
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1293
269,775
MOTORCYCLE RADIO COVER
Fred O. Hoese, 30706 Wildcat Dr., Bulverde, Tex. 78163
Filed Aug. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 177,865
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
" Int. a. D12— 77
U.S. CI. D12— 192
269,778
POLARIZED TERMINAL BLADE
Donald G. McGregor, 98 Power Rd., Pawtucket, R.I. 02860
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,219
^ Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D13— Oi
U.S. CI. D13— 24
'I I '
f
-7—
—
c
D
/
/
1
.1,
/
/ /
/
/
^^
—
269,776
-
WHEEL CENTER
Donald F. Morgan, 133 E. Central, Zeeland, Mich. 49464
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,917
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
' ' Int. CI. D12— 76
U.S. a. D12— 204
269,779
TELEPHONE
John E. Bevilacqua, Jr., and James E. Ross, both of Charlottes-
ville, Va., assignors to United Artists Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Jan. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 223,105
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 53
269,777 269,780
DIAPHRAGM PLATE FOR A SERVOMOTOR INTERCOM SPEAKER AND RECEIVER
Robert L. Williams, South Bend, Ind., assignor to The Bendix p^ter J. Doodson, Eindhoven, Netherlands, assignor to U.S.
Corporation, Southfield, Mich. Philips Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 217,972 Filed Sep. 27, 1979, Ser. No. 79,629
Term of patent 14 years Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 2, 1979,
Int. a. D13— 07 989299
U.S. a. D13— 1 Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D14— Oi
U.S. CI. D14— 57
1294
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,781 269,783
TELEPHONE BUSY LAMP FIELD CONSOLE WITH HOUSING OF A VISCOUS FAN DRIVE
DISPLAY Richard W. Heater, Marshall, Mich., assignor to Eaton Corpo-
Donald A. Foggia, Ocean, N.J.; Deepak R. Muzumdar, Boca ration, Cleveland, Ohio
Raton, Fla.; Gerhart F. Klaiber, Boca Raton, Fla., and Rolf E. Filed Jun. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 163,598
Schneider, Boca Raton, Fla., assignors to Siemens Corpora- Term of patent 14 years
tion, Iselin, N.J. Int. Q. D15— 0/
Filed Oct. 23, 1980, Ser. No. 199,991 U.S. Q. D15— 5
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D14— Oi
U.S. a. D14— 58
269,782
PRINTER
Daniel Canning, Dublin, and James B. Jordan, Berkeley, both of
Calif., assignors to Qume Corporation, San Jose, Calif.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,522
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D14— 02, D18— 02
U.S. a. D14— 111
269,784
AGRICULTURAL TILLER
Philip D. Stark, Kankakee, 111., assignor to Roper Corporation,
Kankakee, III.
Filed Sep. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 188,138
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D15— Oi
U.S. CI. D15— 12
July
19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1295
269,785 269,787
SANITARY COUNTERTOP MACHINE FOR STORING BAG nLLING DEVICE
AND DISPENSING PARTICULATE ICE Jerry W. Cramer, Upland, Calif., assignor to Sunkist Growers,
Charles M. Lents, Leon Valley, Tex., assignor to Stainless Ice- Inc., Sherman Oaks, Calif.
Tainer Company, San Antonio, Tex. Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,734
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,468 Term of patent 14 years
Term of patent 14 years Int. Q. D15— 99
Int. a. D15— 05, 07 U.S. CI. D15~145
U.S. a. D15— 80
269,788
GUITAR
Wallace J. LeBlue, 3455 Pine, Beaumont, Tex. 77703
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,112
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D17— Oi
U.S. a. D17— 14
269,786 269,789
BEARING HOUSING HOUSING FOR SIMULATING HEARTBEAT AND
Sture Ostling, Katrineholm, Sweden, assignor to AB SKF, Goth- WOMB SOUNDS
enburg, Sweden Todd D. Monson, 2090 Cresthill Dr., Salt Uke City, UUh 841 1 7
Filed Jan. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 225,852 Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 216,007
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D15-99 Int. Q. D19-07
U.S. CI. D15-143 US. CI. D19-59
1296
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,790
TEACHING CLOCK
Frank Alessio, l572-79th St., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11228
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,706
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 07
U.S. a. D19— 64
269,792
HOOP ROLLER
Beiganiin T. Baser, 460 N. 48th St., Springfield, Oreg. 97477
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,064
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— o;
U.S. a. D21— 101
269,793
PLAYHOUSE
David L. Giveans, San Francisco, Calif., assignor to SB/JP
Enterprises, Inc., San Francisco, Calif.
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,163
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 01 _
U.S. a. D21— 114
269,791
COMPARTMENTED TRAY FOR DRAFTING SUPPLIES
Richard W. Chatham, P.O. Box 6361, Greensboro, N.C. 27405
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,938
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D19— 02
U.S. a. D19— 77
269,794
BALL CATCHING AND THROWING DEVICE
Homer C. Amos, Palm Springs, Calif., assignor to Brunswick
Corporation, Skokie, 111.
Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 158,337
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 28,
1997, has been disclaimed.-
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D21— 0/
U.S. a. D21— 210
July 19, 983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1297
269,795 269,798
BAIlL CATCHING AND THROWING DEVICE HSHING REEL
Homer C. Amos, Palm Springs, Calif., assignor to Brunswick Robert W. Fee, Wichita; Richard J. Robbins, Derby, both of
Corporation, Skokie, 111.
Filed Jun. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 158,334
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jun. 28,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D21— O;
U.S. CI. D21— 210
Kans., and Henry L. Neufeld, Tulsa, Okla., assignors to
Brunswick Corporation, Skokie, III.
Filed Jul. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 286,751
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 05
U.S. CI. D22— 25
269,799
269,796 nSHING LURE
INSECT CATCHING DEVICE OR THE LIKE Johnny J. Waller, P.O. Box 91, Checotah, Okla. 74426
Michael J. Stringfellow, Bend, Oreg., assignor to Carl Dudrey, Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250,758
St. Johns, Kans. Term of patent 14 years
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,213 ^nt- C- D22— 05
Term of patent 14 years U.S. CI. D22— 27
Int. CI. D22— 06
U.S. a. D22— 20
269,797
ICE nSHING ROD
Douglas D. Riis, Marion, Iowa
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,008
1 1 Term of patent 14 years
1 1 Int. a. D22— 05
U.S. CI. D22— 23
269,800
nSHING LURE
Johnny J. Waller, P.O. Box 91, Checotah, Okla. 74426
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 250.759
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D22— 05
U.S. a. D22— 27
1298
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,801 269,803
SWIMMING POOL CHEMICAL DISPENSER OR THE RREPLACE GRATE
LIKE David Anderson, 1311 E. Main St., St. Charles, III. 60174
Arlon G. Sangster. Sterling, Mass., and Joseph J. Tepas, Jr., Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 221,985
Easton, Conn., assignors to Olin Corporation, New Haven, Term of patent 14 years
Conn. Int- «• D23-0i
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,051 U.S. Q. D23— 95
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— 07
U.S. a. D23— 03
269,804
STOVE
Winston J. F. Sorensen, Rudkobing, Denmark, assignor to Dan-
ish Stove Association, ApS, Odense, Denmark
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,294
Claims priority, application Denmark, May 23, 1980, 408/80
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— OJ
U.S. a. D23— 97
269,802
SWIMMING POOL CHEMICAL DISPENSER OR THE
LIKE
Roy P. Alexander, Killingworth, Conn.; Arlon G. Sangster,
Sterling, Mass., and Joseph C. Green, Milford, Conn., assign-
ors to Olin Corporation, New Haven, Conn.
FUed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,052
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— o;
U.S. CI. D23— 03
269,805
FUEL LOADER FOR LOADING FUEL SUCH AS WOOD
LOGS INTO WOOD BURNING STOVES
Eugene V. Stair, Rte. 1, Caddo, Okla. 74729
Filed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,137
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D23— Oi
U.S. a. D23— 125
Ar
• '"''i--
-^.j-
..^
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1299
269,806 269,809
WARMING SHELF FOR A PARLOR STOVE COMBINED PORTABLE VENT AND SUPPORT FOR A
Duncan C. Syme, Chelsea, Vt., assignor to Vermont Castings, CLOTHES DRYER
Inc., Randolph, Vt. Charles W. Chadd, 13119 HermiUge La., Houston, Tex. 77009
,Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 248,811 Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 181,195
Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D23— Oi Int. CI. D23— 04
U.S. CI. D23— 127 U.S. CI. D23-151
269,807
AIR PRE-COOLER UNIT FOR AIR CONDITIONERS OR
THE LIKE
William E. Morrow, and Robert B, Morrow, both of Winston-
Salem, N.C., assignors to Aqua-Mist, Inc., Winston-Salem,
N.C.
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,840
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D23— 0-/
U.S. CI. DJ3— 139 ^ '
269,808
HUMIDIFIER DISPERSION TUBE
Bernard W. Morton, Minnetonka, Minn., assignor to DrlSteem
Humidifier Company, Hopkins, Minn.
1 1 Filed Dec. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 212,212
I Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D23— 04
U.S. a. D23— 146
269,810
PHYSIOLOGICAL SIGNALS MONITOR/RECORDER OR
THE LIKE
Leslie E. Mace, Bothell; Paul W, Jones, Issaquah. and Robert
M. Boonstra, Kent, all of Wash., assignors to Physio-Control
Corporation, Redmond, Wash.
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 244,920
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 07. 02
U.S. CI. D24— 17
I o
-4-
o e s i) I.) 0 0 t^
1300
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,811
SWABBING STICK
Jack W. Kaufman, 357 Frankel Blvd., Merrick, N.Y. 11566
Filed Feb. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 125,149
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— (W
U.S. a. D24— 34
o
269,814
SPA
Gerald C. Fishel, Anaheim; Harold E. Cowley, Garden Grove,
and Dean W. Myers, Santa Ana, all of Calif., assignors to
Gerico Fiberglass Products, Inc., Huntington Beach, Calif.
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,959
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 07, D23— OZ D25— 99
U.S. a. D24— 38
269,812
CHIROPRACTIC ACTIVATOR
William E. Lancellotti, 371 Broadway, Providence, R.I. 02903
Filed Oct. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 193,917
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D24— 02
U.S. a. D24— 36
269,815
PACIFIER
Robert L. Qually, 2238 Central St., Evanston, 111. 60201
Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 217,959
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. 24—0^
U.S. CI. D24— 45
269,813
COMBINED HYDROTHERAPY SPA AND SWIMMING
POOL
Lino Z. Topete, 1845 E. San Antonio St., San Jose, Calif. 95116
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,115
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D24— 07. D23— 02, D25— 99
U.S. a. D24— 38
July 19, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1301
269,816 269,819 -^
SHIN SPLINT WALL MOUNTED HAIR DRYING DEVICE
Robert H. Meier, and Evelyn Farr, both of Jackson, Mich., Jean-Marie Froidevaux, Carouge, Switzerland, assignor to Al-
assignors to Camp International, Inc., Jackson, Mich. iseo Diffusion S.A., Switzerland
1 1 Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,328 Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 255,315
1 1 Term of patent 14 years Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. 24— Oi Int. Q. D28— Oi
U.S. a. D24— 64 U.S. a. D28— 12
^^s:
?
1
T
W'f - 1"^
«
jL_ :'
\f. : I i i
269,817
AIRCRAFT TAIL POSITION LIGHT
James F. Frazier, Westbrook, Conn., assignor to Whelen Engi-
neering Company, Inc., Deep River, Conn.
Filed Nov. 6, 1980, Ser. No. 204,572
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D26— 06
U.S. a. D26— 35
269,820
HAIRDRESSER COMB
Nicole Bisson, Laval, Canada, assignor to Salon Nicole Bisson
Inc., Montreal, Canada
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,369
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D28— Oi
U.S. a. D28— 25
269,818
LIGHT nXTURE
Donald S. Ament, Encino, Calif., assignor to Miracle Recreation
Equipment Company, Grinnell, Iowa
Filed Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 169,803
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D26— 05
U.S. a. D26— 73
3
1(1
1302
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 19, 1983
269,821
COMBINED CAT PLAYGROUND AND EXERaSER
Merle Hurley, 1362 E. Main, #4, EI Cajon, Calif. 92021
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,052
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D30— 99
U.S. a. D30— 42
269,822
AUTOMATIC TELLER MACHINE KIOSK
John E. Barthel, Dallas, Tex., assignor to Dahl-Braden, Chap-
man Architects, Inc., Dallas, Tex.
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,894
Term of patent 14 years
Int. a. D99— 00
U.S. a. D99— 28
269,823
AUTOMATIC TELLER MACHINE BOOTH FOR
MOUNTING ON A WALL
John E. Barthel, Dallas, Tex., assignor to First International
Services Corporation, Dallas, Tex.
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 283,029
Term of patent 14 years
Int. CI. D99— 00
U.S. CI. D99— 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 19th DAY OF JULY, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Watanabe, Nobuyuki, 4.394,735, CI.
4,393,593. CI
Manabu; Akiba, Katsuya; and Abe,
16-114.00R.
, Wanda J. Aluminum can compactor.
4,393,940, CI.
A. Aoki & Associates: See —
Satoh, Kiyosumi: and
364-200.000.
A.P.V. Company Limited, The; See—
Cattell, Graham S.; and Bnttain, John E., 4,393,755, CI. 99-348.000.
A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfabrikker: See—
Hartvig, Tor; and Fjellheim, Petter, 4.394.168. CI. 75-126.00A.
AAA Sales & Engineering. Inc.: See—
Mazur, Michael B.; and Punko, Emil M., 4,393.960. CI. 188-62.000.
Aarding Weerstandlas B.V.: See —
Loggers. Hendrik. 4.394.176, CI. 106-120.000.
Abbott, Robert P. Register-pin-locating device
33-184.500.
Abe, Koreyoshi: See—
Yamamoto, Toshiharu; Sato
Koreyoshi, 4,393,540. CI
Accettura. Albert; and Accettura
4.393,765, CI. 100-98.00R.
Accettura, Wanda J.: See—
Accettura, Albert; and Accettura, Wanda J.. 4,393,765. CI. 100-
98.00R
Acda, Petrus M.; and Karreman, Jacob, to Polva Nederland B.V
Process for the forming of coupling pieces from a thermoplastic
4,394,343. CI. 264-296.000.
Ace Fishing & Rental Tools, Inc : See-
Cooper, Larry V.; and Sloane, Michael W., Sr
166-325.000.
Ace Orthopedic Manufacturing Inc.: See—
Teague, H Derek, 4,393,868, CI. 128-92.00A.
ACF Industries, Incorporated; See—
Binegar, Scott W.; and Saka, Hamid J., 4,393,889, CI. 137-72.000.
Policy, Richard B., 4,394,002, CI. 251-144.000.
Ried, Harold T.; and Weaver, Edgar C;, 4,394,195, CI. 148-149.000.
Aciers et Outillage Peugeot: See-
Schmidt, Yves, 4.393.557, CI. 24-230.00A.
Acker, Alvin W., to Allis-Chalmers Corporation. Hydraulic stabilizer
for axle on mast lift vehicle. 4.393,959. CI. 187-9.00E.
Ackland, John; See—
Gugger, Hans; and Ackland, John, 4,393,944, CI. 173-28.000.
Ackley, Charles E., Jr.: See—
Ackley. Charles E., Sr.; and Ackley. Charles E., Jr., 4,393,973, CI.
198-384 000
Ackley, Charles E., Sr.; and Ackley, Charles E.. Jr., to R. W. Hartnett
Company. Method and apparatus for removing non-rectified capsules
from a capsule rectification and transport device. 4,393,973, CI.
198-384.000.
Acraloc Corporation: See—
Ailey, Harrison A., Jr., 4,393,627, CI. 51-246.000.
Adams, Edgar L.; and Ludington, William D. Carpet take-up device
and method for using the same. 4.394.052, CI. 299-18.000.
Adams, Richard G., to Pennwalt Corporation. Determination of grain
refiners in phosphate conversion coating baths. 4,394.184, CI 148-
6.15R.
Adermann. Peter: See —
Jenkner, Herbert; Strang, Robert; and Adermann. Peter. 4.394.484,
CI. 525-72.000.
Adkins. James: See —
McAfee. Richard C; Adkins, James; and Miskowski, Richard L.,
4,394.317, CI. 260-429.00R.
Adnovum AG; See —
Clark, John F., 4,394,242, CI. 204-243.00R.
Adrian, David L., to Lens-Card Systems, Inc. Card carrying microfilm
and associated reading lens and process of forming same. 4,393,610,
CI. 40-625.000.
Adrian, Renate; See—
Maurer, Alexander; Adrian, Renate; Panter, Herbert; Heymer,
Gero; and Nolker, Dieter, 4,394,358, CI. 423-305.000.
Wasel-Nielen, Horst-Dieter; Maurer, Alexander; and Adrian, Re-
nate. 4,394,359, CI. 423-305.000.
Adur, Ashok M., to Chemplex Company. Four component adhesive
blends and composite structures. 4,394,485, CI. 525-74.000.
Aerosol Inventions and Development AS AID SA; See—
Debard, Andre, 4,393,984, CI. 222-402.180.
Agency of Industrial Science & Technology: See—
Ogasa, Tatsuo, 4,394,457, CI. 521-54.000. —
Agfa-Gevaert. N.V.: See—
Peetei^, Hugo K.. 4.394.661. CI. 346-1.100.
Plessers. Hendrik S.; and Hellemans. Julianus J
53-266.00R.
Aggarwal. Raj K.; See —
Mehra, Ravinder C; and Aggarwal. Raj K.,
210-244.000.
4,393,642, CI.
4,394,266, CI.
Agnus Chemical Company; See—
Bamhard, Philip. IV; and Bahr, Lyman G., 4,394,199, CI
149-21.000.
Agoundis, Dimitrios C. Photovoltaic radiation detector element.
4.394,676, CI. 357-29.000.
Aguayo, Arturo J., to Rogers Corporation Multilayer current distribu-
tion systems and methods of fabrication thereof 4,394.532, CI 174-
72.00B.
Ahrens. Claude W.. to Miracle Recreation Equipment Company. Swing
farrowing hut and method of farrowing pigs and maintaining a dis-
ease - free farrowing hut. 4.393.812. CI 119-16.000.
Aida Engineering. Ltd.; See— —
Imanishi. Shozo. 4.393,682, CI. 72-405.000
Ailey, Harrison A., Jr . to Acraloc Corporation Reversing screw/high-
low speed level wind screw. 4.393.627, CI. 51-246.000.
Air-Mo Hydraulics, Inc.: See —
Rasmussen. Robert. 4.393,674. CI. 72-61 000.
Air-O-Scoop Corporation: See —
Chatlos. Richard. 4,393,753, CI. 98-2 120
Air Products and Chemicals, Inc.; See-
Ford, Michael E; and Johnson. Thomas A.. 4.394.524. CI.
564-479.000.
Fukushima. Hatahiko; Handa, Tadahiko; and Kodama, Kenji,
4,394,333. CI. 264-37.000.
Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Komorizono. Junichi, 4.393.655. CI. 60-585.000.
Sakurai. Kenji; and Yoshimura. Noboru. 4.394.048. CI 297-367.000
Akashi. Tamotsu: See—
Sawaoka. Akira; Araki, Masatada: Saito. Shinroku; and Akashi,
Tamotsu, 4,394,170, CI. 75-233.000.
Akashi, Toshihiro: See—
Shiratsuchi, Masami; Shimizu, Noboru; Shigyo, Hiromichi;
Kyotani, Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura, Kiyoshi; Sato.
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura, Masahiko; Sawada, Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi, 4,394,382. CI 424-283 000
Akiba. Katsuya: See—
Yamamoto. Toshiharu; Sato. Manabu; Akiba. Katsuya; and Abe.
Koreyoshi. 4.393.540, CI. 16-114.00R.
Akimov. Boris I.: See—
Azarevich, Gennady M.; Gusyatsky. losif A.; Savclieva. Lidia B.;
and Akimov, Boris I., 4,393,675, CI. 72-71.000.
Akkerman, Johannes; See—
Kuibers-Kiewik, Walfrida G. E.; Akkerman, Johannes; and Gons,
Johan, 4,394,501, CI. 528-485 000
Akkerman, Neil H., to AVA International. Well packers and slip assem-
blies for use therewith. 4.393,929, CI. 166-134.000
Aktiebolaget Bofors; See—
Gustavsson, OUe; and Sundmar, Goran, 4,393,747, CI 89-45.000
Hailqvist, Sten; and Eriksson. Erik, 4,393.748, CI. 89-47.000.
Akzo N.V.: See-
Werner, Marcel A.; Venema, Arnold; and Pisters, Michael G H.,
4,394,470. CI. 524-56.000.
Alberti, Rosette. Power circuit-breaker with remote-controllable opera-
tion threshold. 4,394,585, CI. 307-140.000.
Alcan International Limited; See—
Gnyra, Bohdan, 4,394,365. CI. 423-485.000
Alexander. William H.. to Vapor Corporation. Lubricated split plug
valve. 4.393.893. CI. 137-246.120.
Alfa Romeo. S.p.A.; See —
De Angelis. Giancarlo; Catastini. Alberto; Bassi, Aldo; Rogora.
Edoardo; Radaelli. Dario; Bertoloni. Luciano; and Perrone.
Francesco. 4.393.836. CI. 123-417.000.
Algieri. Aldo A.; See —
Crenshaw. Ronnie R.; and Algieri. Aldo A.,
546-209.000.
All Temp Engineering Inc.: See—
Reprogle. Layton J.; and Reprogle. Truman B
15-348.000.
Allada, Sambasiva R.. to Dow Chemical Company,
ammonium nitrate plastic foam blowing agent
252-350.000.
Allen. Gary F., to Mobay Chemical Corporation Catalytic hydrogena-
tion of di(4-aminophenyl)methane 4.394.522, CI. 564-451.000
Allen, Gary F., to Mobay Chemical Corporation. Catalytic hydrogena-
tion of di (4-aminophenyl) methane 4.394,523, CI 564-451.000
Allen, James R.; Allen, John D ; and Knigge, Robert A. Carpet stretch-
ing tool. 4,394,004, CI. 254-204.000.
Allen, John D.; See—
Allen, James R.; Allen, John D.; and Knigge, Robert A.. 4.394,004.
CI. 254-204.000.
Allen. Walter E.; and Wilson. Douglas D.. to Transamerica DeLaval
Inc. Tube clamp. 4.393.998. CI 248-74.00R
4,394.508. CI.
, 4,393,537, CI
The Activated
4,394,288. CI
PI 1
PI 2
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Allied Corporation: See- Anthony. Thomas R.. to General Electric Company. Alignment-
Chung, Daniel C; Miller. William A.; and Baumgaertner, Eugene enhancing feed-through conductors for stackable silicon-on-sapphire
R 4 394 460 CI 521-92 000 wafers. 4.394,712, CI. 361-41 1.000.
Mas Joseph a' 4 394 597 CI 310-268 000. Aoki. Yoshio, to Kaken Chemical Co.. Ltd. Dehumidifying container.
Mattson, Richard 'w..'4,394.648. CI. 340-679.000. 4.394.144. CI. 55-281.000. . r^ , i- , u
Allis-Chalmers Corporation: See- Apgar. Waldo D.: Davis, Char les L.; Emery LonngD.. Jr.; Esseluhn,
Acker Alvin W 4 393 959 CI 187-9.00E. Werner F.; and Holbrook, Walter R, to Western Electric Co., Inc.;
Caddy John A and Putman, William A., 4.394,147, CI. 55-357.000. and Bell Telephone Laboratories. Inc. Enclosed electrical devices.
O'Dell, Leonard J, 4,394,143.0.55-261.000. 4.394.602. CI. 315-71.000. , ,„, „,. ^,
Wirschal, Helmut H.; and Whippen, Warren G., 4,394,098. CI. Appel. Gemard H. Clover heat exchanger core. 4,393,926, CI.
405-77.000. 165-165.000.
Alps Electric Co., Ltd.: See— Aqualume, Incorporated: See- ,„ ^ ^ _ ^ /-
Harumatsu. Masatoshi; Tomoyori, Makoto; and Tsushima. Noboru, Campagna. Thomas G.; D Andrea. Alfred A., Sr.; and Campagna.
4.393.709. CI. 73-505.000. Frank, 4.394,716, CI. 362-158.000.
Harumatsu. Masatoshi. 4.394,546, CI. 200-5.00R. Araki. Masatada: See— . c ou , jai. u
Amano Corporation: See— Sawaoka, Akira; Araki, Masatada; Saito, Shinroku; and Akashi,
Kato, Hiroshi; Ato, Hisataka; Inagaki. Osamu; and Matsuo, Hiroshi, Tamotsu. 4,394.170. CI. 75-233.000.
4 394 666 CI 34^-82 000 Arao. Toshio: See —
Amano.' Toshio- Nagai, Kunio; and Honma, Juri, to Sony Corporation. Ito, Tadahiko; Arao, Toshio; Satoh. Nobuo; and Harada. Hiroshi.
Remote control system. 4,394.691, CI. 358-194.100. 4,394.472, CI. 524-100.000.
Amemiya, Nono: See- Araujo, Armando A.: See- .... awaaio ri
Nishikawa, Masaji Amemiya, Norio; Yasuda, Tadahiro; and Naka- Osrow, Harold; and Araujo, Armando A., 4.394,410. CI.
yama. Shigeru, 4.394.427, CI. 430-68.000. 428-43.000.
American Commercial Barge Line Co.: See— Armco Inc.: See— «,«,„„ t: a »qi afo ri
Nivin, James E, 4,393,888, CI. 114-201. OOR. ^'°**29(S Mueller. Warren E., 4,393.859, CI.
^Ti2he?ToEin''S'"T'fnTzweig Arnold 4,394.527. CI. ArmoJr''jihn S.; Watson. Peter M. F; and Donne. Graham L.. to
571^143 000 ' ' '♦.^^.^^'. '-' United Kingdom ofGreat Britain and Northern Ireland, The Minister
Pf.,^ej. Ron.,.. E. and DcM.na, F,„cesco, 4.^33,. C. 264- fJ^Z\^X'":^"^^^!r^'^°S:tr^^^^^^^
209-166.00a Arnold.' William S., Jr.; and Tulloss. Joseph C, to Western Electric
American »«'"«= Pf«l"'^'* Corporation^ See- Company, Inc. Methods of and apparatus for forming a cable core
^^^^T^rrinn '"^' ' ' *'^'*'^°*' *^' having an internal cable shield. 4,393.582. CI. 29-828.000.
544-28.000. . c Aronov, Sergei A; Bashilov, Vladimir A.; Volkov, Nikolai M.; and
^"wh!t"e"F"^'l'S'{8lTM2°8"7S^^^ flStToS''" "^''^ "" "-'"" '"" ''""''" '•'''•'"' ^'■
^"IIZX^S^U William R.; and Wi.cockson. Brian, ^^^^^^ "f ^^^J^ SS^^tsuka. Hatsuki; Okuyama.
v,*;.'^^'\v' ^ a\1^-^ n A 109 nnn Kazuo; and Shimamura, Yasuki, 4,394.353, CI. 423-21.500.
Nolden. Werner. 4.393.523. CI. 4-192.000. ^sahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Ameyama. Minoru, to Ricoh Company, Ltd. Ink jet printing apparatus. Nakamura. Kazuo. 4.394.569. CI. 250-204.000.
4.394.663. CI. 346-75.000. Asahi. Naotatsu; Yamaguchi. Sizuka; and Terakado, Katsuyoshi, to
AMF Incorporated: See— Hitachi. Ltd. Method of processing electrically conductive material
Feil. Paul G., '♦'394.553 CI. 200-67.0DA^ t, .^^ discharge. 4,394.234. CI. 204-164.000.
Hargett. Francis B.. 4,393,800, CI. 112-265.100. Asami. Takayoshi; and Sonoi. Hidekazu. to Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe
AMP Incorporated: See— Seil^o sj,o Heat exchange apparatus with use of hydrogen storing
Cherian, Gabriel B., 4,393.581. CI. 29-827.000. material. 4,393,924, CI. 165-104.120.
Dola, Frank P., 4,394,548, CI. 200-6.00A. Asano, Kiyomitsu; Jozuka, Masao; and Kondo, Toshikatsu, to Brother
Hall. Leslie C, Jr., 4,393,580, CI. 29-749.000. Koevo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nippon Telecommunication Engineer-
Reynolds, Charles E, 4,394,059, CI. 339-125.00R. ing Company. Support means for print wire. 4,394.093. CI.
Amtech Patent Licensing Corp.: See— 400-124.000.
Manber. Solomon; Chiang, David; and Chu, Mosi, 4,394.076, CI. y^^bury Charles E.: See—
354-5.000. Clausen. Victor H.; and Asbury, Charles E., 4.394.206, CI.
Anagnostopoulos. Constantine N.; and Lee, Teh-Hsung, to Eastman 156-322.000.
Kodak Company. Transparent asymmetric electrode structure for ^^^ ^g. ^gg_
charge coupled device image sensor. 4,394,675, CI. 357-24.000. Collin, Per H., 4,394.163. CI. 75-1 1.000.
Andco Actuator Products. Inc.; See— Ashland Oil, Inc.: See—
Zouzoulas, John, 4,393,965, CI. 192-48.910. pisher. Dennis H., 4,394.528, CI. 585-14.000.
Anderson. Cary R. Thermal energy meter. 4,393.919. CI. 165-1 l.OOR. Gruber. Bruce A.; Langer. Heimo J.; and Dunnavant. William R..
Anderson, Charles N.; Elrod, Samuel D.; and Miller, Gerald O., to 4,394,466, CI. 523-141.000.
Boeing Company, The. Superplastically formed structure and Askov, Alan R.: See-
method of making. 4,393.987, CI. 228-157.000. Butler, L. Dennis; and Askov, Alan R., 4,394,103, CI. 414-24.500.
Anderson, Forest L.; and Nation, Robert H. Waste heat recovery Association pour la Recherche et le Developpment: See-
system for an internal combustion engine. 4,393,656, CI. 60-618.000. Renon, Henri; and Richon, Dominique, 4,393,689, CI. 73-64.200.
Anderson. Kenneth W., to Anderson Seal Company, Inc. Pipe com- Aste, Christian, to Schwamm, Horst; and Pezzei. Friedbert. Sporting
pression seal for bell and spigot joint. 4.394,025. CI. 277-207.00A. and recreational facility slide. 4,394,173, CI. 104-69.000.
Anderson, Richard J.; and Leippe, Michael M., to Nabisco Brands, Inc. Astronics Corporation: See-
Substituted pyridyloxybenzo-2,l,3-oxadiazoles and -thiadiazoles and Winfield, Mason C, 4.393.911. CI. 152-158.000.
N-oxides thereof. 4.394.154. CI. 71-92.000. Atherton. Kim W,, to Sundstrand Data Control. Inc. Method of making
Anderson Seal Company. Inc.: See— force transducer flexure. 4.394.405. CI. 427-58.000.
Anderson. Kenneth W.. 4.394,025, CI. 277-207.00A. Ato, Hisataka: See—
Andersson, Albert, to Stiftelsen Industriellt Utvecklingscentrum. Tele- Kato, Hiroshi; Ato, Hisataka; Inagaki. Osamu; and Matsuo. Hiroshi,
scoping carrier for forestry equipment. 4.393.943, CI. 172-260.500. 4,394.666. CI. 346-82.000
Andoh. Masayasu: See— Attelages Lemoine - La Mecano - Soudure Remoise: See-
Hashimoto. Takeji; Okumoto, Kiyohumi; and Andoh, Masayasu, Mijot, Guy; Derycke, Leon; Dienne, Didier; and Martinet. Roger,
4,393,670, CI. 66-75.200. 4,393,942, CI. 172-2.000.
Andress, Harry J., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Liquid hydrocarbon fuel Auergesellschaft GmbH: See —
composition. 4,394,135, CI. 44-71.000. Fengler, Hans-Jorg, 4,393,686, CI. 73-23.000.
Andrews. Christopher M., to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Curing epoxide Aufdermarsh, Cari A., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
resins m an aquatic environment. 4.394.492, CI. 525-504.000. Fluoroelastomer curatives. 4.394.489, CI. 525-370.000.
Angus Chemical Company: See— August, Peter: See— „ . , u i ^ o^—c
EkIv Richard S. and Tumquist. Cecil E., 4,394,220, CI. Huber, Peter; August, Peter; Lampelzammer. Helga; and Pnmas.
203-42.000. Willi. 4,394.518, CI. 556-424.000.
Anmahian. Al, to Electra Food Machinery, Inc. Food processing Aurora Design Associates, Inc.: See— ,, , „ . ,„, .,t ^,
apparatus. 4.393,758, CI. 99-450.600. Gardner. James H.; and deNevers. Noel H., 4.393,665, CI.
Ansell, Philip J.: See— 62-457.000.
Cheriton.LeslieW.;andAnsell. Philip J. 4,394,175. CI. 106-90.000. Automation Industnes. Inc.: See— „ ^-.oiooi ni
Antfamco Inc See— Jeffras. Nathaniel B.; and Torgersen. Robert H.. 4,393.991, CI.
Anthony. James R.; and Rush. David M.. 4.394.019. CI. 239-102.000. . ,o^ n<i ^i «oisnnn
273-256.000. Williams, James; and Wills, Henry K., 4,394,057. CI. 339-15.000.
Anthony, James R.; and Rush. David M., to Antfamco, Inc. Oil drilling Automotive Products Limited: See—
game board. 4,394,019. CI. 273-256.000. Dee. Christopher P.. 4.393.968. CI. 192-98.000.
JULY 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 3
AVA International: See— Bashilov. Vladimir A.: See—
Akkerman, Neil H., 4,393.929, CI. 166-134.000. Aronov, Sergei A.; Bashilov, Vladimir A.; Volkov, Nikolai M.; and
Avco Corporation: See— Dukhovlinov, Sergei D., 4.394,591, CI. 310-1 1.000.
McMurray, John H.; and Miller, Jule, 4,394,347, CI. 420-453.000. Bassi, Aldo: See—
Azarevich, Gennady M.; Gusyatsky, losif A.; Savelieva, Lidia B.; and De Angelis, Giancarlo; Catastini, Alberto; Bassi. Aldo; Rogora,
Akimov. Boris I. Contrivance for the machining of cylindrical sur- Edoardo; Radaelli. Dario; Bertoloni, Luciano; and Pcrrone,
faces on metal-cutting lathes. 4,393,675, CI. 72-71.000. Francesco, 4,393.836, CI. 123-417.000. „ „
Azona Co Ltd See— Batchelder, Clarence F.; Thomas, Charles E.; and Cas»dy, Kent B.. to
Shimiz'u. Yoshikazu; and Yamaguchi. Kathuhiro. 4,394,416, CI Clipp Control Corporation. Servo amplification system. 4,394,102,
428-341.000. CI. 414-5.000.
Bagwell, William H. Safe door assembly. 4,393.790, CI. 109-76.000. Bates Ventilsaekke Co. A/S: See-
Bahder. George; and Rabinowitz. Mario, to Electric Power Research Berthelsen, Ernst R.; and Hejlcsen, Christian. 4.394.207, CI.
Institute, Inc. Cryogenic cable and method of making same ..'^^'^^* ^^9 .
4,394.534, CI. 174-1 5.00S. Baltelle Memorial Institute: See- „ u-^ c . ,oa ii7 ri
Bahr Lvman G See— Raman, Ramaswamy V.; and Carbonara, Robert S , 4,394,332, CI.
Barnhard, Philip. IV; and Bahr, Lyman G.. 4.394,199. CI. 264-8 000. w u r- ku i .«..Kc..,...-h
149 21000 ^'^' Hans-Georg, to Boehnnger Mannheim GmbH 1 -(Substituted
Bahrle. Friedrich; and Wulf, Helmut, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesell- ^ Phenyl) aminoantipyrin compounds. 4.394.512. CI. 548-365.000.
schaft. Engin^unit with lubricant cooling. 4.393,922. CI, 165-41.000. Baue^r^Kassen^fabnk AG^^See-^^^^^ ^^^^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^^
'•"'Tsukada,'Toshihisa; Takasaki, Yukio; Hirai. Tadaaki; Baji. Toru; Baum Joerg P., to Baumco Gesellshaft fur Anlagentechnick mbH
Yammioto, Hideaki; Tanaka. Yasuo; Maruyama. Eiichi; and „ ^oke quench car emission contro system. 4,394,218, CI 202-2610^^
, 7 7^ c w A lOA -lAo r-1 it.K in* nnn Bauman, Ronald M., to United States of America, Navy. Channelized
Ishioka, Sachio, 4,394.749. CI. 365-106.000. feed-forward system. 4.394.624. CI. 330-1 51 .000.
Baker industries, inc.: iee- d-»odA«ri ^4n.«7«; ^«i Baumco Gesellshaft fur Anlagentechnick mbH: See—
Wynne, John M. and Vogt, William R., 4,394,655, CI. 340-825.360. ^ ^ 4,394.218. CI. 202-263.000.
Baker International Corporation: See— R,„ma!iPrtnpr Pnopne R fw—
Muse, John F Callihan R"dyB Goad. Bobby F,; and Wain- «^"Xng"D'amefc. SillfrWilliam A.; and Baumgaertner. Eugene
wnght, Clyde S.. Jr 4,393,931, CI l^^-mOOO. R, 4,394,460, CI. 521-92.000.
Ross, Richard J.; and Mendez, Luis E., 4,393,930, CI. 166-188.000. gg^^^^j^j i^j^g. ^gg_
Balaban, John A. Tennis racket. 4.394,014. CI. 273-73.00G. Hussain. Anwar A.; Hirai. Shinichiro; and Bawarshi, Rima,
Balasubramanyan. Sugavanam; and Shephard. Margaret C. to Imperial ^ ^^^ ^^ ^j ^24 330 000
Chemical Industries PLC. 2;;(2-A'ko';yalkyn-1.2^-tnazoU com- Baxter trav'enol Laboratories, Inc.: See-
pounds and their use as fungicides. 4,394.380, CI. 424-269.000. Pearson, Stephen. 4,393.909, CI. 150-8.000.
Balco, Inc.: See — Bayer Aktiengesellschaft See
Balzer, Claude P.. 4,394,718, CI. 362-278^000^ Kitzelmann, Dieter; and Deprez, Jacques. 4,394,239. CI
Ball, Martin F.; and Fidler, Fred, to Metal Box Limited. Closures for 204-414.000
containers. 4.393.979. CI. 220-270.000. . ^ ^ , Podszun, Wolfgang; Walkowiak. Michael; and Schulz. Hans-Her-
Balzer, Claude P., to Balco, Inc. Mounting brackets for handrail system. ^^^^^ 4 394 465 CI 523-116.000.
4,394,718, CI. 362-278,000. Scholl, Hans- Joachim, 4.394,495, CI. 528-67.000.
Balzer & Droll KG: See— Stolzer, Claus, 4,394,309, CI. 260-140.000.
Muskulus, Willi, 4,393,904, CI. 140-92.100. bBC Brown, Boveri & Company, Limited: See—
Bammert, Karl, to M.A N. Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Nurnberg Ak- Jaecklin, Andre, 4,394.677, CI 357-38.000.
tiengesellschaft. Lubrication and packing of a rotor-type compressor. Beach, David L ; and Harrison, James J., to Gulf Research & Develop-
4,394,113, CI. 418-98.000. ment Company Group VA ylides and process for preparing same.
Banks, Donald S., to Raytheon Company. Modulation systems. 4,394,322, CI. 260-440.000.
4,394,628, CI. 332-19.000. Beard, Buddy M.; and Beard, Joe M. Apparatus for the utilization of
Barberio, Giancinto G.. to Colgate-Palmolive Company. Dentrifrice solar energy. 4,393,861, CI. 126-436.000.
preparation. 4,394,371, CI. 424-52.000. Beard, Joe M.: See—
Barbour, William P., to Security Imprinter Corporation. Variable data Beard, Buddy M ; and Beard, Joe M., 4,393,861, CI. 126-436 000
imprinter with rack centering and carriage interlock mechanism. Beasley, Max M., to Tuftco Corporation. Tufting machine with adjust-
4,393,768, CI. 101-45.000. able yarn guide tube bank. 4.393.793, CI. 112-79 OOR.
Bare Rex O. and Robinson, Earl F., to C. R. Bard, Inc. Method of Beck, Warren R., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company
manufacture of electrode construction. 4.393.584. CI. 29-877.000. Low-permeability hollow spheres and pipe filled with the spheres for
Barkhult. Bengt A., to Emab Electrolux Motor Aktiebolag. Construe- temporary weight reduction. 4,393,901. CI. 138-145.000.
tion for a motor-driven chain saw. 4,393,589, CI. 30-381.000. Beckman Instruments, Inc.: See—
Barmatz, Martin B., to United States of America, National Aeronautics Kaye, Wilbur I., 4,394.069, CI. 350-347.00E , .. ,
and Space Administration. System for controlled acoustic rotation of Bedell, John R.. to E'ect"c Power Research Institute, Inc. Molten
objects. 4.393,706, CI. 73-505,000. metal fiow control. 4,394,006, CI. 266-239.000.
Barmatz, Martin B.; Trinh, Eugene H.; Wang, Taylor G.; Elleman, Beecham Group Limited. See-
Daniel D.; and Jacobi. Nathan to United States of America, National Bentley, Peter H. Hard>^ Kenneth D.; and Milncr, Peter H.,
Aeronautics and Space Administration. Acoustic system for material 4,394.375 ci. 4Z4-i 14.iaa).
transport. 4 393.708. CI. 73-505.000. ^"•pfanr Howar^L.; Cantor. Steven E.; Doweyko. Arthur M.;
Barnes. David I: See- Dekeyser, Mark A.; and Bell, Allyn R., 4.394,155, CI. 71-94.000.
528-?2'9'00r ' ' • Bell Telephone Laboratories. Inc.: See-
Barnes, Michael W., to Thiokol Corporation. 2-Hydroxymethyl-l,3-
propanediol nitrate ester. 4,394,329, CI. 260-467.000.
Barneveld Binkhuysen, James P.: See-
van Drimmelen, Nicolaas J.; Barneveld Binkhuysen, James P.; van
Renssen, Johan; and Verboom, Pieter. 4,394,265, CI. 210-242.300.
Barnhard, Philip, IV; and Bahr, Lyman G., to Agnus Chemical Com-
pany. Explosive emulsion composition. 4,394,199, CI. 149-21.000.
Baron, Howard C. Anatomical compression device. 4,393,867. CI.
128-87.00R.
Bartenfield. James E.: See —
Brown. Lamar W.; and Bartenfield, James E.. 4.394,289. CI. 252-
359.00E.
Barter. James A.; and Kellar. David E.. to PPG Industnes. Inc. Produc-
tion of peroxydicarbonates. 4.394.328. CI. 260-463.000,
Apgar. Waldo D.; Davis. Charles L,; Emery. Loring D,. Jr.; Es-
seluhn. Werner F.; and Holbrook. Walter R.. 4.394,602. CI.
315-71.000.
Canniff. Ronald J.. 4.394,756, CI. 370-56.000.
Consoli, John J.. 4,394,707, CI. 361-398.000.
Donnelly, Vincent M.; Flamm, Daniel L.; and Kariicek, Robert F..
Jr.. 4,394.237. CI. 2O4-192.00E.
Doyle. Francis S.; Prince. Terry B.; and Stevenson, Martin J..
4,394.545. CI. 179-179.000.
Jackson. Kenneth A.; and Kimeriing, Lionel C, 4,394,183, CI.
148-1.500.
Mercer, Paul A., 4,394,743. CI. 364-514.000.
Montalto. Anthony R.; Scerbo, Louis J.; and Starace, Jeremia P..
4.394.620. CI. 324-149.000.
Van Dine. Gilbert A., 4.394.647. CI. 340-645.000.
Bariko. Richard. Grain loss sampling device. 4,393.704. CI. 73-432.00R. Bendix Corporation. The: See
Bartkovitz, David J.; and Greene. George H., to Union Carbide Corpo- prear. David L.. 4,394,058. CI. 339-59.00R.
ration. Crosslinkable poly(oxyalkylene) graft copolymers. 4,394,493, Oltmanns. Roger W., Jr.; and Portolese. Larry A.. 4.393.963. CI.
CI. 525-530.000. 188-73.450.
Bartolo. Jose B.: See- Seitz. William R.. 4.393.845. CI. 123-478.000.
Peuser. Michael F; and Bartolo. Jose B. 4.394,356. CI. 423-43.000. Benford. John F: See-
Barton Roy C and Smith, Dale A. Easily mountable swingable-arm Bingham. Joseph P.; and Benford. John F.. 4.394.535, CI. 17«»-
draw-pinretainer. 4.394.031,0.280-515.000. '^^ „ „. „. „, ^ c .u d 1 1^ .^ TPMrn
BASF Aktiengesellschaft: See- Benny, John R.; Buher. Robert W.; and Smith, Paul K to TEMCO.
Eicken Karl Rohr Wolfeang; and Wuerzer. Bruno. 4,394,513, CI. Inc. Vacuum pneumatic conveying apparatus and method lor trans-
548-374 000 ferring food products. 4,394,259, O. 209-250.000.
Schnabel Rolf Weitz, Hans-Martin; and Fischer, Rolf, 4,394.290, Benschop, Gerardus C. M.: See— . .»• n u
r? 2S2-412000 Spruijt. Aloysius M. J. M.; Wijburg. Matheus A. T.; Benschop.
BASF Wyandltte^orporation: See- Gerardus C. M.; and Vos. Hendnkus J. M.. 4.394.067. O.
Walton, Wilham B.. 4.393,935. CI. 166-263.000.
350-334.000.
PI 4
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Bentley. Peter H.; Hardy, Kenneth D.; and Milner, Peter H., to Bee-
cham Group Limited. Cephalosporin derivatives, and compositions
containing them. 4,394,375, CI. 424-114.000.
Serg, Alf A.: See
Favot, Guido; and Berg, Alf A., 4,393,678, CI. 72-131.000.
Bergendahl, Albert S.; Hakey, Mark C; and Wilson, John P., to Inter-
national Business Machines Corporation. Process for increasing
resolution of photolithographic images. 4,394,437, CI. 430-312.000.
Bergman, Carl A.; Thomas, Roy L.; and Bourbeau, Richard A., to
Standard Duplicating Machines Corporation. Sheet feeder with
buckle restraint and feed roll slippage. 4,394,009, CI. 271-10.000
Bergmann, Horst; and Pracht. Hans, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesell-
schaft. Control system for internal combustion engine. 4,393,831, CI.
123-323.000.
Bergmann, Horst, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft. Spark plug for
internal combustion engines. 4,394,598, CI. 313-51.000.
Berkowitz, Sidney; and Mohr, Richard A., to FMC Corporation.
Method of purifying phosphoric acid. 4.394,361, CI. 423-321.0OS.
Bernard, Alain M., to Office National d'Etudes et de Recherches Aeros-
patiales. Electrostatic accelerometer. 4,393,710, CI. 73-517.00B.
Bernstein. David H.; Carberry. Richard A.; Druke, Michael B.; and
Gusowski, Ronald I., to Data General Corporation. Data processing
system utilizing a unique two-level microcoding technique for form-
ing microinstructions. 4,394,736, CI. 364-200.000.
Bersier. Jacques: See —
Jager, Horst; Plattner, Eric; Bersier, Jacques; and Comninellis,
Christos, 4,394,227, CI. 204-73.00R.
Bertelsman, Dale M.; Eckert, William M.; and Morrow, Stanley J., to
Dow Chemical Company, The. Spinel slip casting composition and
articles. 4,394,455. CI. 501-1 17.000.
Berthelsen, Ernst R.; and Hejiesen, Christian, to Bates Ventilsaekke Co.
A/S. Apparatus for sealing the valve in a valve bag. 4,394,207. CI.
156-578.000.
Bertoloni. Luciano: See —
De Angelis, Giancarlo; Catastini, Alberto; Bassi, Aldo; Rogora.
Edoardo; Radaelli. Dario; Bertoloni. Luciano; and Perrone,
Francesco, 4,393,836, CI. 123-417.000.
Bertus, Brent J.: See —
Mark, Harold W.; Bertus, Brent J.; and Roberts, John S., 4.394,324,
a. 260-446.000.
Betensky, Ellis I., to Vivitar Corporation. Zoom lens. 4.394.072. CI.
350-427,000.
Bezjian. Krikor A.: See —
Frankston, Michael; and Bezjian, Krikor A., 4,394,651, CI.
340-756.000.
Bickel, Hansjorg: See —
Bloch, Peter; and Bickel, Hansjorg, 4,393,625. CI. 51-165.870.
Bickle, Wolfgang; Funke, Rolf; and Pfoh. Rolf, to Karl Schmidt
GMBH. Composite material for sliding surface bearings. 4.394.275.
CI. 252-12.000.
Bienvenu, Jacques; Dufond, Patrick; Carre, Claude; Tuong, Due L.;
Verdier, Henri; deRivet, Philippe-Hubert; Bradley, John J.; and
Franklin, Benjamin S., to Compagnie Honeywell Bull. Apparatus and
method for transferring information units between processes in a
multiprocessing system. 4,394,725, CI. 364-200.000.
Binegar. Scott W.; and Saka, Hamid J., to ACF Industries, Incorpo-
rated. Fire-safe valve structure. 4,393,889, CI. 137-72.000.
Bingham. Joseph P.; and Benford. John F., to RCA Corporation. Split
phase stereophonic sound synthesizer. 4,394,535, CI. 179-l.OGP.
BioMagnetech Corp.: See —
Blakemore. Richard P; and Wolfe, Ralph S., 4,394,451, CI.
435-253.000.
Biox Technology, Inc.; See —
Wilber, Scott A., 4,394,572, CI. 250-239.000.
Bixler, Kenneth D.; Lord, Henry A.; and Reifers, Richard F.. to
Diamond International Corporation. Construction of universal egg
cell cushion and method 4,394.214. CI. 162-228.000.
Blachman, Lawrence P., to Polymer Corporation, The. Anti-static hose
assemblies. 4,394,705, CI. 361-215.000.
Blakemore. Richard P.; and Wolfe, Ralph S.. to BioMagnetech Corp.
Culture medium and conditions for growth of magnetic bacteria.
4,394,451, CI. 435-253.000.
Blanchard, Andrew J.: See —
Correa, Aderbal C; Gergely, John S.; and Blanchard, Andrew J.,
4,394,573, CI. 250-253.000.
Blazso, Eva, to LGZ Landis & Gyr Zug AG. Method for the manufac-
ture of a layer from a thermochrome lacquer, and its use. 4,394,407,
CI. 427-150.000.
Blenner, Dpnald R., to Lord Corporation. Method for vulcanization
bonding of fluorine-containing elastomers to vulcanized natural and
synthetic elastomers. 4,394,205, CI. 156-307.300.
Bloch, Peter; and Bickel, Hansjorg, to Maag Gear-Wheel & Machine
Company Limited. Apparatus for grinding gears. 4,393,625, CI.
51-165.870.
Blohm & Voss AG: See—
Bohnenkamp, Wulf; and Hempel, Gerd. 4,393,658. CI. 60-657.000.
Board, Robert D., to Ecolaire Incorporated. Direct contact condenser
and separating method. 4,394,139, CI. 55-20.000.
Bocchini, William R.: See —
Briner, Clifton F.; Bocchini, William R.; and Wilcockson. Brian,
4,393,524, CI. 4-317.000.
Bock, Paul A. Thermodynamic method for steam-water separation.
4,393,816, CI. 122-412.000.
Boden, Richard M., to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc. Prins
reaction products of diisoamylene, derivatives thereof, organoleptic
uses thereof and processes for preparing same. 4,394,285, CI.
252-174.110.
Bodenseeverk Perkin-Elmer & Co. GmbH: See —
Tamm, Rolf; and Tomoff. Toma, 4,393.726, CI. 73-864.840.
Bodine, Albert G. Acoustic detonation suppression in a catalytic envi-
ronment in internal combustion engine. 4.393.830. CI. 123-272.000.
Bodine, Albert G. Method and apparatus for uniformly packing gravel
around a well casing or liner. 4,393,932, CI. 166-249.000.
Bodmin, Syd E., to Moore, Mae Lois. Weighted teat cup shell and
assembly. 4,393,811, CI. 119-14.470.
Boehringer Mannheim GmbH: See —
Batz, Hans-Georg, 4,394,512, CI. 548-365.000.
Muller, Werner; and Bunemann, Hans, 4,394,487, CI. 525-281.000.
Boeing Company. The: See —
Anderson. Charles N.; EIrod. Samuel D.; and Miller. Gerald O.,
4.393,987. CI. 228-157.000.
Boer» Hubert, to diga-die gasheizung GmbH. Pipeline pig for lining pipe
lines. 4,393,805, CI. 1 18-105.000.
Bohnenkamp. Wulf; and Hempel, Gerd. to Blohm & Voss AG. Extrac-'
tion condensing turbine. 4.393.658, CI. 60-657.000.
Bohner, Beat: See —
Rohr, Otto; Pissiotas, Georg; Bohner, Beat; and Burdeska. Kurt,
4,394.327. CI. 260-455.00R.
Bombardier-Rotax Gesellschaft mbH.: See —
Schreiner. Joachim, 4,393,952. CI. 180-6.440.
Bompard, Bruno; and Bruyere, Alain, to Commissariat a I'Energie
Atomique; and Societe Brochier et Fils. Process for manufacture of
three-dimensional rotational parts and machine for the implementa-
tion of such process. 4,394,203, CI. 156-175.000.
Boon, Bart, to RSV-Gusto Engineering B.V. Device for coupling parts
of a self-raising platform structure. 4,393,961, CI. 188-67.000.
Boon, Raymond: See —
Galkin. Benjamin M.; Boon. Raymond? Gilliam, Rudolph V.; and
Park, Chan H., 4.393.864. CI. 128-1.100.
Boothe, Guy, to Sperry Corporation. Power failure detection and
control circuit. 4,394,702, CI. 361-92.000.
Boots Company PLC, The: See —
Copping, Leonard G.; Kerry, John C; Watkins, Thomas L; Willis,
Robert J.; and Palmer, Bryan H., 4,394,387, CI. 424-300.000.
Borchardt, John K.: See —
Smith, Charles W.; and Borchardt, John K., 4,393,939, CI.
166-293.000.
Borras, Jaime A.; Gonzalez, Ruben J.; Smith, Daniel M.; and Wiec-
zorek, Alfred B., to Motorola, Inc. Priority channel system for a
synthesized transceiver. 4,394,776. CI. 455-76.000.
Bosnia, Omar J., to Taybos Sociedad Anonima. Racket structure.
4.394.015. CI. 273-73.0OC.
Boudon, Gerard; Denis. Bernard; de Grivel, Virginie; and Mollier,
Pierre, to International Business Machines Corporation. Decoding
and selection circuit for a monolithic memory. 4.394,752, CI.
365-227.000.
Boulianne, Roland. Snowmobile. 4,393,953, CI. 180-190.000.
Bourbeau, Richard A.: See —
Bergman, Carl A.; Thomas, Roy L.; and Bourbeau, Richard A.,
4.394,009, CI. 271-10.000.
Bouvet, Claude: See —
Terrien, Michel E.; and Bouvet, Claude, 4,393,533, CI. 14-2.600.
Boyarsky, Abraham; Friedman, Jack; Christodoulopoulos, Athanasios;
and Lee, Rock, to Canadian Patents & Development Limited. Elec-
tronically controlled respirator. 4,393,869. CI. 128-204.180.
Braden. Denver, to Palomar Systems & Machines. Inc. Means for
processing miniature electronic components. 4,393,808, CI.
118-503.000.
Bradley, John J.: See —
Bienvenu, Jacques; Dufond, Patrick; Carre, Claude; Tuong, Duo
L.; Verdier, Henri; deRivet, Philippe-Hubert; Bradley. John J.;
and Franklin. Benjamin S., 4.394,725, CI. 364-200.000.
Brand, Glen. Fluid flow meter. 4.393,723, CI. 73-861.720.
Brandenburger, Allen M.: See —
Maclin, Greg P.; and Brandenburger, Allen M., 4,393,989, CI.
229-71.000.
Brandt, John G.; Dickerson, Joyce H.; and Schmitt, William R., to RJ
Archer Inc. Heat-sealable polypropylene blends and methods for
their preparation. 4,394.235, CI. 204-165.000.
Brautigam, Reinhard: See —
von Alpen, Ulrich; Brautigam, Reinhard; and Oliapuram, Antony,
4,394,280, CI. 252-62.200.
Brecy, Andre; and Grudler, Francois, to Cii Honeywell Bull. Control
apparatus for an electro-mechanical device that generates a back
EMF. 4,394,604, CI. 318-257.000.
Brede, Uwe; and Penner, Horst, to Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft.
Electric detonator element. 4.393.779, CI. 102-202.500.
Breeck, Philip L.; Shultz, David E.; and Rosselli, Andrew C, to Cum-
mins Engine Company, Inc. System for controlling fuel flow within
an internal combustion engine. 4,393,825, CI. 123- 198. OOF.
Breeze, Eric G., to General Instrument Corporation. Bi-directional
driye multiplexed display system. 4,394,653. Cf. 340-802.000.
Brennen, Michael B.; Gyugyi, Laszlo; and Stacey, Eric J., to Westing-
house Electric Corp. Static VAR generators. 4,394,614, CI.
323-210.000.
Brennsteiner, Ernst: See —
Lutze, Uwe; Scholz, Dieter; and Brennsteiner, Ernst, 4,393,947, CI.
175-323.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 5
Brent, Albert: See-
Marion, Charles P.; Crouch, William B.; Brent, Albert; Richter.
George N.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,394.137.
CI. 48-197.00R.
Brescia. Riccardo, to Ing. C. Olivetti & C, S.p.A. Electronic printer.
4,394,668, CI. 346-I39.00R.
Bresser, Robert E.; White, Sidney S., Jr.; and Koeniger. Arthur F.. to
Carstab Corporation. Elemental sulfur-stablized organic antimony
compound composition. 4,394,325, CI. 260-446.000.
Briner, Clifton F.; Bocchini, William R.; and Wilcockson, Brian, to
American Standard, Inc. Self-contained sewage waste disposal sys-
tem. 4,393,524, CI. 4-317.000.
Brink, Andries: See —
Jager, Berend; Brink, Andries; and Kleynjan, Cornelis, 4,394,215,
CI. 196-14.520.
Bristol-Myers Company: See—
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., 4,394,508. CI.
546-209.000.
Kamachi. Hajime; Okumura. Jun; Naito. Takayuki; and Oka,
Masahisa, 4,394,503, CI. 544-25.000.
British Aerospace Public Limited Company: See —
Mahoon, Alauddin; and Kohler. Richard P. J.. 4.394.224. CI.
204-57.000.
Brittain. John E.: See—
Cattell, Graham S.; and Brittain. John E.. 4.393.755. CI. 99-348.000.
Britz. Elizabeth. Invalid chair. 4.393.529, CI. 5-81.00R.
Broadt, David R.: See—
Brower, Boyd G.; Broadt. David R.; and Shaffer, John W.,
4.394.710. CI. 361-401.000.
Brock. David A.; and Gupta. Surendra K.. to Miles Laboratories. Inc.
Method for purification of uricase. 4.394.450. CI. 435-191.000.
Brock. Josef, to Maschinenfabrik Carl Zangs Aktiengesellschaft. Trans-
mission for the shed-forming mechanism of a loom. 4,393,902. CI.
139-76.000.
Brockwell, Malcolm G., to Ciba-Geigy AG. Illumination system for
copying apparatus. 4,394,717. CI. 362-247.000.
Brooklyn Union Gas Company: See-
Thomas, William R.; and Sykora. George S.. 4,394.202. CI.
156-94.000.
Brooks. Ralf M.: See—
Osmera. Miroslav S.; and Brooks. Ralf M.. 4,394.092. CI.
400-120.000.
Brother Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Asano, Kiyomitsu; Jozuka. Masao; and Kondo. Toshikatsu,
4,394,093. CI. 400-124.000.
Brower. Boyd G.; and Shaffer. John W.. to GTE Products Corporation.
Die-stamped circuit board assembly having relief means to prevent
total switch deformation. 4,394,709, CI. 361-401.000.
Brower, Boyd G.; Broadt, David R.; and Shaffer, John W., to GTE
Products Corporation. Die-stamped circuit board assembly for pho-
tofiash devices. 4,394.710. CI. 361-401.000.
Brown, Boniard I.: See —
Fernandez, Carlos, 4,393.948. CI. 175-374.000.
Brown. Boveri & Cie AG: See —
Rohr, Franz-Josef. 4,394.222. CI. 204- LOOT.
Brown, Daniel G.; and Motsinger. Donald L.. to PPG Industries. Inc.
Aqueous sizing composition for glass fibers for use on choppted glass
fibers. 4.394.414. CI. 428-288,000.
Brown, Garrett; and Di Giulio. Arnold O. Support apparatus.
4,394,075, CI. 352-243.000.
Brown, Harvey A.; and Huffman. William A,, to Minnesota Mining and
Manufacturing Company Helichromic compounds and displays,
4,394,070. CI. 350-349.000,
Brown, Lamar W ; and Bartenfield. James E Continuous foam generat-
ing system. 4,394,289. CI. 252-359.0OE,
Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation: See—
Silberstein, Donald A , 4.393.885. CI. 131-339000,
Browne, Edward M.; and Smither. Miles A,, to Geosource Inc. Cable
break locator, 4.394,616. CI, 324-52.000.
Bruinsma, John, to U.S. Philips Corporation Frequency division com-
munication system wherein conventional transmitter-transceiver can
be used as a repeater or local base station. 4.394.775, CI, 455-17,000,
Brunelle, Rene J,, to UOP Inc. Seat back mounting system. 4,394.047.
CI. 297-361.000.
Bruyere. Alain: See —
Bompard. Bruno; and Bruyere. Alain, 4,394.203. CI 156-175000,
Bucher, Franz. Reinforcing element and process for its manufacture.
4,393,639, CI. 52-730.000.
Bucher, Walter: See —
Spahni, Kurt; and Bucher. Walter, 4.394.584. CI, 307-117 000
Buck, Wolfgang; Sehring, Richard; Linden, Gerbert; and Lust. Sig-
mund, to Celamerck GmbH & Co, KG. 2-Chloro-3-(phenoxy or
phenylthio)-6-6-nitro -anihnes. 4,394,159. CI 71-98.000.
Budelman, Gerald A., to CBS, Inc. Electronic organ circuit, 4,393,741,
CI. 84-1,010,
Bueno, Alejandro G.; and Stover, K. Lawrence, to Libbey-Owens-
Ford Company. Furnace regenerator with improved flow distribu-
tion. 4,394,122, CI, 432-30.000,
Buher, Robert W.: See-
Benny, John R.; Buher, Robert W.; and Smith, Paul K., 4.394.259.
CI. 209-250.000.
Bukowski, Ronald G.; and Johnson, Timothy L., to Zurn Industries,
Inc. System for minimizing backwash water usage on self-cleaning
strainers. 4.394.262. CI. 210-103.000.
Bullis. Robert H,: See—
Wiegand. Walter J,; and BuIIis. Robert H. 4.393,719. CI
73-861.050,
Bulten-Kanthal Aktiebolag: See —
Magnusson. Klas B, O,. 4.394.566. CI 219-523.000
Bunemann. Hans: See —
MuIIer. Werner; and Bunemann, Hans. 4.394.487, CI. 525-281.000
Burdeska. Kurt: See —
Rohr. Otto; Pissiotas. Georg; Bohner. Beat; and Burdeska. Kurt.
4.394.327. CI. 260-455.00R,
Burger. Rainer. to MA N -ROLAND Druckmaschinen Aktiengesell-
schaft. Rotary printing machine, particularly newspaper-type offset
printing machine, 4,393,772, CI, 101-217,000
Burke, Mary, Spoon lid, 4,393.988. CI. 229-43.000
Burlington Industries. Inc.: See —
Wang. Kenneth Y,; and Hill. Beriie R . 4.394.208. CI, 156-580 100
Burquier. Jean-Luc. to S,A Des Etablissemenls Slaubli Multiple un-
ions for simultaneously joining a plurality of pneumatic or hydraulic
pipes. 4.394.039, CI, 285-85.000,
Burroughs Wellcome Co,: See —
Mason. Donald L.; and McAllister. Warren A., 4.393.717. CI
73-821.000.
Burstein. Steve; and Popper. Jay. to Standard Microsystems Corpora-
tion. Low power storage cell. 4.394.751. CI. 365-227 000,
Butcher. James S.. to GTE Automatic Electric Labs Inc. Load protect-
ing arrangement. 4.394.703. CI. 361-101.000,
Butler. L. Dennis; and Askov. Alan R.. to Sperry Corporation Hydrau-
lic system for a round bale wagon, 4.394.103. CI. 414-24,500.
Byrd. Carlisle O.. Jr., to J T Thorpe Company, Method of installing
defractory ceramic fiber module 4.393,569. CI 29-460,000
Byrne. LeRoy H.: See—
Mol. Hans C: and Byrne, LeRov H.. 4.393.894. CI 137-454.000,
•C. C Kellev & Sons: See—
Kelley. Clarence R,. 4.393.751, CI. 91-408000,
C-Cor Electronics, Inc: See—
Pavlic. John C . 4.394.631. CI. 333-132.000.
C. Levesque Co. Inc.: See —
Levesque. Clarence N,, 4.393.632. CI, 52-235,000
C R Bard. Inc.: See-
Bare. RcK O.; and Robinson. Eari F,. 4.393.584. CI, 29-877,000,
Cabot Berylco. Inc: See —
McClelland. Henry T.; and Kuhn. Joseph B . 4.394.185. CI 148-
11.50C.
Cadars. Patrick; and Hellouin de Cenival. Bruno, to VALEO Expan
sion tank and water box device for heat exchanger, such as a radiator
of a motor vehicle 4.394.141. CI. 55-195,000
Caddy. John A ; and Puiman. William A., to Allis-Chalmers Corpora-
tion, Internally supported filter, 4.394.147. CI. 55-357.000,
Cadmus, Martin C ; and Knutson. Clarence A,. Jr,. to United States of
America. Agriculture Production of high-pyruvate xanthan gum i>n
synthetic medium, 4.394.447, CI 435-104,000.
Cady, William R,; Yu, SePuan; and Eshbach. John R . lo General
Electric Company, Method of making silicon-on-sapphire FET
4.393.578. CI, 29-576,008,
Cahuzac. Georges J, J . to Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale
Automatic lacing method and apparatus for making pieces with
multidireclional woven reinforcement, 4,393.669. CI, 66-13.000
Calabrese. Diane M, Ankle garter with foot Mirrup, 4.393.522. CI
2-336.000,
Calas. Patrick: See —
Commeyras. Auguste; and Calas. Patrick. 4.394.225. CI, 204
59.00R.
Calgon Carbon Corporation: See-
Joyce. Ronald S.. 4.394.354. CI. 423-25,0a)
California Institute of Technology: See-
Cole. Steven W,. 4.394.613. CI 320-48 tXX)
Callihan. Rudy B : See-
Muse, John F ; Callihan. Rudy B ; Goad. Bobby F ; and Wain-
wright. Clyde S.. Jr.. 4.393.931, CI 166-208,000
Camerini, Mario; and Pizzi, Giacomo Container storage installation
4.394.104. CI 414-276,000,
Cameron. Erma C; Gunter. Claude R.; and White-Stevens. Rixlric H .
to Miles Laboratories, Inc Cofactor indicator compositions
4,394.444. CI, 435-11.000.
Campagna, Frank: See —
Campagna. Thomas G ; D'Andrea. Alfred A.. Sr ; and Campagna.
Frank. 4.394.716. CI, .^62-158,000.
Campagna. Thomas G ; D'Andrea. Alfred A , Sr ; and Campagna
Frank, to Aqualume. Incorporated, Self-contained underwater light
a-ssembly, 4,394.716. CI. 362-158,000,
Campbell. Bernard F,; and Vallance. Leslie Retractable protective-
screens and equipment including them, 4.393.788, CI, 109-2.000.
Campbell, Jules D,, Jr,, to Motorola. Inc ROM Column select circuit
and sense amplifier 4.394.748. CI 365-104.000.
Canadian Patents & Development Limited: See —
Boyarsky. Abraham; Friedman. Jack; Christodoulopoulos.
Athanasios; and Lee. Rock. 4.393,869, CI 128-204 180
Canadian Superior Oil Ltd.: See-
Garrison. Barney D.. Jr.; and Marjanovich. Barry S., 4.394.150. CI
71-62,000.
Canniff, Ronald J., to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated
Generation of busy signals in a digital concentrator 4.394.756. CI
370-56.000.
Canon Denshi Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Takahashi. Hiroshi. 4,393.770. CI. 101-93.220.
1032 O.G.
PI 6
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Canon Kabushiki KaishaS^t-— ,,„^n<,, r-, i^^iiAnnn
Hashimoto. Teiji; and Saito. Syuichiro, 4,394.081. C . 354-234.000.
Kimura. Hirovuki; and Yamada. Tateo. 4,394.080. CI. 354-173.000.
Ozawa Masakazu; Watanabe. Kunio; Matsumoto. Shigeyuki; Ni-
shimura, Yukuo; and Miyazaki, Takashi. 4.394,669, CI. 346-
140.00R. . „, ^ _ .
Saito. Takashi; Sakurayama. Junichi; and Watanabe, Isuyosni,
4 394,431, CI. 430-119.000. _
Senuma, Michio; and Watanabe, Kunio, 4,394,082, CI. 354-246.000.
Shimizu, Isamu; Shirai, Shigeru; and Inoue, Eiichi, 4,394,425, CI.
430-65.000. ^.. ^. ^ ,„^ ^., _,
Shimizu, Isamu; Shirai, Shigeru; and Inoue, Eiichi. 4,394,426, CI.
430-65.000. ., . ^. ^ ,, .
Sugitani, Hiroshi; Matsuda, Hiroto; Kimura, Koichi; and Ikeda,
Masami. 4,394,670, CI. 346-140.00R.
Takahashi. Hiroshi, 4,393,770, CI. 101-93.220. „. . .
Verber Carl M.; Kenan. Richard P.; and Ridgway. Richard,
4.394.060. CI. 350-96.130.
Yamada. Yasuyuki. 4.394.071. CI. 350-422.000
Cantor. Steven E.: See— ^ r^ , ,. .u \a
Plant Howard L.; Cantor, Steven E.; Doweyko. Arthur M.;
Dekeyser. Mark A.; and Bell, Allyn R., 4,394.155. CI. 71-94.000
Cappel Bert Schniggenfittig. Gunther; and Schuhmann, Siegfried, to
MAN -Roland Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft Arrangement
for metering the ink quantity in inking units on printing presses.
4.393,775. CI. 101-365.000. ^, „ ^ ^
Cappel Carl R.. to Eastman Kodak Company. Yellow-dye-forming
photographic developing composition. 4.394.440, CI. 430-379.000.
Carberry. Richard A.: See— ^ , .. . , n a
Bernstein David H.; Carberry, Richard A.; Druke, Michael B.; and
Gusowski. Ronald I., 4,394.736, CI. 364-200.000.
Carbonara. Robert S.: See— ^ , ,n^ ,,-, r-t
Raman. Ramaswamy V.; and Carbonara. Robert S.. 4,394.332. CI
264-8.000.
Carl Freudenberg. Firma: See—
Krull Manfred; Lobert. Udo; Stamm. Dieter; and Veeser. Klaus,
4,394,411. CI. 428-70.000.
Carlo Erba Strumentazione S.p.A.See— i,n_io« 7nn
Dosch. Werner; and Wagner. Heinz, 4.394,263. CI. 210-198.200.
Carnation Company: See —
Lomeiillo, Josephine E.; and Wolcott, John M., 4,394,397, CI.
426-557.000. . .
Carpino Louis A.; and Cohen, Beri. to Research Corporation. Amino
acid blocking agents. 4.394.519. CI 560-32.000.
Carre. Claude: See— ^, . -r- r-»
Bienvenu. Jacques; Dufond. Patrick; Carre, Claude; Tuong, Due
L Verdier. Henri; deRivet, Philippe-Hubert; Bradley. John J.;
and Franklin. Benjamin S.. 4.394,725, CI. 364-200.000.
Carrier Corporation: See—
Dennis, Richard D., 4,394.549. CI. 200-I6.00E.
Carroll, Raymond J . Jr.; See— . , ,
Lapeyre. James M.; Svendsen. Noel A.; Carroll, Raymond J., Jr.;
Long, Henry H.; and Lindberg, Richard S., 4,393,544. CI.
17-73.000.
Carstab Corporation: See— » v c
Bresser, Robert E.; White. Sidney S.. Jr.; and Koeniger. Arthur h..
4,394.325. CI. 260-446.000.
Cartmell. Robert R., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana). Apparatus for
the fluidized catalytic cracking of hydrcK-arbon feedstock. 4,394,349.
CI. 422-147.000.
Casady. Kent B.: See— ^ . „ o
Batchelder, Clarence F.; Thomas. Charles E.; and Casady, Kent 0.
4,394,102. CI. 414-5.000.
Casperson. John R.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Dryer thermal
efficiency 4.393,603, CI. 34-39.000.
Catastini, Alberto: Sfe— „ »■■ n
De Angelis, Giancarlo; Catastini, Alberto; Bassi, Aldo; Rogora,
Edoardo Radaelli, Dario; Bertoloni, Luciano; and Perrone.
Francesco. 4.393.836. CI. 123-417.000.
Caterpillar Tractor Co.: See— 4-,n->a,t ni
Grawey. Charles E.; and Grt>ezinger, John J., 4,393,913, CI
152-364.000.
Hoffman, John P., 4.394.723. CI. 363-87.000. ...
Catlell. Graham S.; and Brittain, John E.. to A.P.V. Company Limited.
The Heal treatment of particulate solid materials. 4,393,755, CI.
99-348.000.
Cavanagh, Eric J.: See— . c i
Mowbray, Dorian F.; Fenne, Ivor; and Cavanagh, trie J.,
4.393,846. CI. 123-502.000.
CBS. Inc : See—
Budelman. Gerald A., 4.393,741, Ci. 84-1.010.
Celamerck GmbH & Co KG: See—
Buck Wolfgang Sehring, Richard; Linden, Gerbert; and Lust,
Sig'mund. 4.394,159. CI. 71-98.000.
Celanese Corporation: See—
Edelman. Robert. 4,394.467. CI. 523-205 000
Fruge'. James D., 4.394,355, CI. 423-27.000.
Kastelic. John R.. 4,394,498, CI. 528-193.000.
Lu, Shau-Zou, 4,394.468, CI. 523-205.000.
Central Mine Equipment Company: See—
Rassieur, Charles L., 4,393,945, CI 173-163.000.
Centronics Data Computer Corporation: See—
Yeomans David; Wilkinson, Christopher J ; McCartney, Damien;
and O'Dwyer. Micheal, 4,394.685, CI. 358-264.000.
*" ^Cheng. David; and Chai. Stephen T , 4,394,667. CI. 346-137.000.
Chaintreau. Bernard: See— . ^ ,„-, oAt.
Pettier, Alain; Chesnel, Pierre; and Chaintreau, Bernard, 4,393,946.
CI. 175-4.560.
Chandler Evans Inc.: Sf^— .,-, *-,o, t«i r-t
Peck, Robert E.; and Zagranski, Raymond D., 4.393,651, CI.
60-39.281. .^ ^
Chao, Chien C; and Sherman, John D., to Union Carbide Corporation.
Bulk lactulose/lactose separation by selective adsorption on zeolitic
molecular sieves. 4.394,178, CI. 127-46.300.
Chao Yen-Yau H., to Rohm and Haas Company. Copper modified
mancozeb. 4,394,316, CI. 260-429.00K.
Charniga, Joseph. Wall construction. 4,393,633, CI. 52-303.000.
Charnoske, Nicky L. Animal trap signal apparatus. 4,393,617, CI.
43-96.000. ^ ,„^ __, „,
Charrier, Pierre. Apparatus for moving film cassettes. 4.394,771, CI.
378-172.000. ^ .
Chatlos, Richard, to Air-O-Scoop Corporation. Attachment for motor
vehicles with rear windows. 4,393,753, CI. 98-2.120.
Chattha, Mohinder S.; and Theodore, Ares N., to Ford Motor Com-
pany High solids coatings with enhanced flexibility and impact
strength. 4,394.486, CI. 525-162.000
Chemische Fabrik Kalk GmbH: See—
Jenkner, Herbert; Strang, Robert; and Adermann, Peter, 4,394,484.
CI. 525-72.000.
Chemplex Company: See—
Adur, Ashok M., 4,394,485, CI. 525-74.000.
^''^YanT James; and^Chen, James M. F., 4,393,550. CI. 24-117.000.
Chen, Wen-Hsiung: See— ^ . , c- • /- a
Widergren. Robert D.; Chen, Wen-Hsiung; Fralick. Stanley C; and
Tescher, Andrew G., 4,394,774, CI. 382-56.000.
Cheng Dah Yu, to International Power Technology, Inc. Steam output
control system. 4.393,649, CI. 60-39.050.
Cheng, David; and Chai, Stephen T., to Xerox Corporation. Radial
access drive for an optical disk recorder. 4,394,667, CI. 346- 137.000.
Cheng, Haw-Lin. Rotary shuttle for a sewing machine. 4,393,798, CI.
112-231.000. .. ^ A A
Cheng Paul J., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Method and apparatus
for vortex flow carbon black production. 4,394.35a CI. 422-150.000.
Cherian Gabriel B., to AMP Incorporated. Method of forming leads on
a lead frame. 4,393,581. CI. 29-827.000.
Cheriton. Leslie W.; and Ansell. Philip J. Self-levelling cementitious
mixes. 4.394.175. CI. 106-90.000.
Chesnel. Pierre: See— a a in-, oa^
Pottier, Alain; Chesnel. Pierre; and Chaintreau. Bernard, 4,393,946,
CI. 175-4.560.
Chevron Research Company: See—
deVries. Louis; and King, John M., 4.394,279. CI. 252-46.400.
Ferm, Richard L., 4.394,213. CI. 162-163.000.
Gibson. Kirk R., 4,394,303, CI. 252-470.000.
Grossberg, Arnold L., 4.394,250. CI. 208-108.000.
Miller, Stephen J., 4.394,251, CI 208-111.000.
Miller. Stephen J., 4.394,362, CI. 423-328.000.
Small, Vernon R.. Jr., 4,394,276. CI. 252-32.70E.
Small. Vernon R., Jr.. 4.394.277, CI. 252-32.70E.
Van Nordstrand. Robert A.. 4.394,253. CI. 208-25 l.OOH.
Chew , Meng-Sang: See— , „ . . n ji i,
Maki Emil R. Freudenstein, Ferdinand; Richard. Raymond L. Jr.,
and Chew, Meng-Sang, 4.393,820, CI. 123-90.410.
Chiang, David: S«'— . -.nA n-it. *-i
Manber, Solomon; Chiang, David; and Chu, Mosi, 4,394,076. Cl^
354-5.000.
Chikugo, Kazuo: See— , ^ u- a iai afi
Furukawa, Hideo; Chikugo, Kazuo; and Otsuki, Yoichi, 4,393,823,
CI. 123-196.00M.
Child, Edward T: See— .„ „ ..
Marion, Charles P.; Crouch, William B.; Brent, Albert, Richter.
George N.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4.394.137.
CI. 48-197.60R.
Chimicasa GmbH: See— . r^ a u ^=„.
Sampathkumar, Prathivadibhayankaram S.; and Dwivedi, Basant
K, 4,394,308, CI. 260-1 12.50R.
Chmiel, Max: See — ,, „, ir d
Rosener, Karlheinz; Roeder, Alfred; Munchberg Wolfgang, Ri-
chrath. Herbert; and Chmiel. Max, 4.394.454, CI. 50-112^000.
Chmura, William J.; and Slusarski Ronald S-«o Textron Inc. Thread
forming of sintered porous metal shapes. 4,394,421, CI. 428-547.000.
Christian Maier GmbH & Co. KG.: See—
Kolb, Dieter. 4.394.209. CI. 156-580.100.
Christodoulopoulos. Athanasios: See— ^. . , i
Bovarsky Abraham; Friedman. Jack; Christodoulopoulos.
Thanasios; and Lee, Rock. 4,393,869, CI. 128-204.180.
, Chrysler Corporation: See— .,„,,«v^
Soerlich Harold K., 4.394,100, CI. 410-2.000.
Chu. Chin C.; and Kaeding. Warren W to M^b^'Oil Corporation.
Zeolite catalyst modified with group IVB metal. 4,394,300. CI. 252-
455.00Z.
^''"'Manb^r. Sdomon; Chiang, David; and Chu, Mosi, 4.394.076. CI.
Chu. Tsan-chen. Timepiece with automatic time setting system thru dial
telephone line and automatic speed adjusting system. 4,394,53V, ci.
1 79 2 OTC
Chung, Daniel C; Miller, William A.; and Baumgaertner, Eugene R., to
Allied Corporation. Ethylene-chlorotrifiuoroethylene copolymer
foam. 4.394,460, CI. 521-92.000.
July 19, 19:3
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 7
Ciba-Geigy AG: See—
Brockwell. Malcolm G., 4,394,717, CI. 362-247.000.
Jager, Horst; Plattner, Eric; Bersier, Jacques; and Comninellis
Christos. 4,394.227, CI. 204-73.00R.
Ciba-Geigy Corporation: See-
Andrews, Christopher M., 4,394,492, CI. 525-504.000.
Holzle, Gerd; Reinert, Gerhard; and Polony, Rudolf, 4,394,125, CI.
8-103.000.
Pissiotas, Georg; and Rempfier, Hermann. 4,394,157, CI. 71-94.000.
Pissiotas, Georg; and Rempfier, Hermann, 4,394.158. CI. 71-94.000.
Rohr. Otto; Pissiotas. Georg; Bohner. Beat; and Burdeska. Kurt,
4.394,327. CI. 260-455.00R.
Strasilla. Dieter; Moldovanyi, Laszlo; Fearnley, Charles; and
Meindl, Hubert, 4,393,886, CI. 132-7.000.
Sturm, Elmar; Schempp, Heinrich; and Martin, Henry, 4,394,152,
CI. 71-77.000.
Tobler, Hans; Fory, Werner; and Schurter. Rolf, 4.394.156, CI.
71-94.000.
Cii Honeywell Bull: See —
Brecy, Andre; and Grudler, Francois, 4,394,604, CI. 318-257.000.
Cincinnati Milacron Inc.: See —
Schroer. George A.. 4,393.626. CI. 51-168.000.
Clark-Cutler-McDermott Company: See—
McDermott. Thomas R.; and Jackson, Robert K., 4,393,634, CI.
52-309.100.
Clark, John F., to Adnovum AG. Clamp, tool, and electrolysis cell
anode mount. 4,394,242. CI. 204-243.00R. ' ■
Clark. John L., to Honeywell Inc. Current switching technique.
4.394,761. CI. 371-8.000.
Clark. Lowell E.: See —
Winchell, Vern H., II; Scharr, Thomas A., and Clark, Lowell E.,
4,394,678, CI. 357-68.000.
Clark, Ronald K.; and Lisagor, W. Barry, to United States of America,
National Aeronautics and Space Administration. Fixture for environ-
mental exposure of structural materials under compression load.
4,393,716, CI. 73-818.000.
Clark, Susan. Padded frame. 4,393.612. CI. 40-152.000.
Clark. Thomas R.; Lillmars, Alvin E.; Roth, Elwood A.; Schmick,
Alvin L.; and Todd, Maurice C, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and
Company. Cutter for a moving strand. 4.393.736, CI. 83-100.000.
Clark, Walter L.; and Sutton, Trevor G., to Garrett Corporation, The.
Static pressure probe and method. 4.393,692, CI. 73-115.000.
Clarke, Donald A.: See —
Liptay-Wagner, Nicholas; Renaud. Roland; Pryor, Timothy R.;
and Clarke, Donald A., 4,394,683, CI. 358-107.000.
Clausen, Victor H.; and Asbury, Charles E., to H. B. Fuller Company
Apparatus and method for applying an elongated tab to a moving
substrate. 4,394,206, CI. 156-322.000.
Clay, Howard W. Hammer with two detachable heads. 4,393,908, CI.
145-29.00A.
Clipp Control Corporation: See —
Batchelder, Clarence F.; Thomas, Charles E.; and Casady, Kent B.,
4,394,102, CI. 414-5.000.
Clitherow, John W.. to Glaxo Group Limited. Process for the prepara-
tion of a furan derivative. 4,394.516, CI. 549-495.000.
Clough, John M.: See-
ds Fraine. Paul; Clough. John M.; and Worthington, Paul A.,
4,394.151, CI. 71-76.000.
Coal Industry (Patents) Limited: See-
Robinson. Joseph G.; and Barnes, David 1., 4.394,499. CI.
528-229.000.
Coburn, Orin W.: See —
Maloy, Rex M., 4,393,972, CI. 194-99.000.
Coca-Cola Company, The: See-
Winter. John P.; and Tomic, Mladomir, 4,394,473, CI. 524-226.000.
Coe, Norman O. Structural beam square. 4,393,600, CI. 33-474.000.
Cohen, Beri: See —
Carpino, Louis A.; and Cohen. Beri. 4.394,519, CI. 560-32.000.
Cohen, Leonard D., to Eaton Corporation. Phased array feed system.
4,394,660. CI. 343-lOO.OSA.
Cole. Denis B.; and Trethewy. Derek C, to Hazelwood Enterprises
Limited. Method and apparatus for handling and filling bags or
envelopes. 4.393,640, CI. 53-69.000.
Cole, Steven W., to California Institute of Technology. Full-charge
indicator for battery chargers. 4,394.613, CI. 320-48.000.
Colgate-Palmolive Company: See —
Barberio, Giancinto G., 4,394,371. CI. 424-52.000.
Collin, Per H., to Asea AB. Process for the manufacture of crude iron
and synthesis gas. 4,394.163. CI. 75-11.000.
Collonia, Harald: See-
Mann, Arnold; and Collonia, Harald, 4,393.833, CI. 123-335.000
Comfort, Joseph A.; Perry, Thomas J.; and Loos, Michel, to GTE
Automatic Electric Labs Inc. Allocation controller providing for
access of multiple common resources by a duplex plurality of central
processing units. 4,394.728. CI. 364-200.000.
Commeyras. Auguste; and Calas, Patrick, to Produits Chimiques Ugine
Kuhlmann. Process for the addition of iodoperfiuoroalkanes onto
ethylenic or acetylenic compounds by electrocatalysis. 4,394,225, CI.
204-59.00R.
Commissariat a I'Energie Atomique: See—
Bompard, Bruno; and Bruyere, Alain, 4,394,203, CI. 156-175.000.
Commons, Thomas J.; and Potoski, John R., to American Home Prod-
ucts Corporation. Cephalosporin derivatives. 4,394,504, CI.
544-28.000
Comninellis, Christos: See—
Jager, Horst; Plattner, Eric; Bersier, Jacques; and Comninellis,
Christos, 4,394,227, CI. 204-73.00R
Compagnie Generale des Etablissements Michelin: See —
Gouttebessis, Jacques, 4,393.912, CI. 152-353.00R.
Compagnie Honeywell Bull: See —
Bienvenu, Jacques; Dufond, Patrick; Carre, Claude; Tuong, Due
L.; Verdier, Henri; deRivet, Philippe-Hubert; Bradley, John J.;
and Franklin, Benjamin S., 4,394,725, CI. 364-200.000.
Compression Labs, Inc.: See —
Widergren, Robert D.; Chen, Wen-Hsiung; Fralick. Stanley C; and
Tescher, Andrew G.. 4.394.774. CI. 382-56.000.
Comptech. Incorporated: See —
Slabaugh. Edward J., 4.393,896, CI. 137-601.000.
Cone, Michael M., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Triarylboraneisocy ano metal compounds. 4,394,321, CI. 260-
439.00R.
Conley, Larry R., to Interconnection Technology, Inc. Circuit board
with weldable terminals. 4,394.711, CI. 361-408 000.
Connors, Robert H.: See —
Klopfenstein, King L.; and Connors. Robert H.. 4,393.950. CI.
177-108.000.
Conoco Inc.: See —
Correa. Aderbal C; Gergely, John S.; and Blanchard. Andrew J.,
4.394,573, CI. 250-253.000.
Peterson, Marvin L.; Hein, Norman W., Jr.; and Oertle. Donald H.,
4,394,577, CI. 250-372.000.
Waters, Kenneth H., 4,394,754, CI. 367-75.000.
Consoli, John J., to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated. Electri-
cal circuit package 4,394.707, CI. 361-398.000
Conta, Renato, to Ing. C. Olivetti & C, S.p.A. Optical transducer
4,393,591, CI. 33-l.OOL.
Container Corporation of America: See —
Maclin, Greg P.; and Brandenburger, Allen M.. 4.393,989. CI.
229-71.000.
Continental Group, Inc., The: See —
Walter, John; Roth. Donald J.; and Kubis. Charles S.. 4.394.408. CI.
427-231.000.
Controlled Environment Systems Inc.: See —
Widmayer. Don F.. 4,394,603, CI. 315-31 1.000.
Converse Inc.: See —
Crowley, Kevin J., 4,393.604. CI. 36-67 OOR
Cook, Richard J.; and Reade. Richard, to Mid-Continent Aircraft
Corporation. Front loader vehicle with telescoping boom. 4.394,108,
CI. 414-680.000.
Cooper, Harold W. Flotation life support device. 4,394,124, CI.
441-86.000.
Cooper, Julius: See —
Orbanes. Philip; and Cooper. Julius. 4.394,018, CI. 273-237.000.
Cooper. Larry V.; and Sloane. Michael W.. Sr , to Ace Fishing &
Rental Tools, Inc. Retrievable float valve assembly 4.393,940. CI.
166-325.000.
Copping. Leonard G.; Kerry. John C; Walkins. Thomas I.; Willis.
Robert J.; and Palmer, Bryan H., to Boots Company PLC. The
Compositions and method of combatting pest employing substituted
benzophenone hydrozones or semicarbazones. 4.394.387. CI.
424-300.000.
Corning Glass Works: See—
Dumbaugh. William H.. Jr., 4,394.453. CI. 501-66.000.
Correa, Aderbal C; Gergely, John S.; and Blanchard, Andrew J , to
Conoco Inc. Method and apparatus for underwater detection of
hydrocarbons. 4,394,573, CI. 250-253.000.
Cottman. Kirkwood S., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company. The.
Diester antioxidants. 4,394.476. CI. 524-289.000.
Coulter Systems Corporation: See—
Kuehnle. Manfred R., 4,394,084, CI. 355-3.0BE.
Crafts, Daniel J., to Progressive Dynamics, Inc. Power converter for
recreational vehicles. 4,394.706. CI. 361-331.000.
Cragoe. Edward J.. Jr.. to Merck & Co., Inc. Treatment of gray matter
edema. 4.394.385. CI. 424-285.000.
Cragoe, Edward J., Jr.: See —
Rokach, Joshua; Rooney, Clarence S.; and Cragoe, Edward J., Jr.,
4.394,515. CI. 549-12.000.
Crane Carrier Corporation: See—
Knox. Arnold W.. deceased. 4.393.630, CI. 52-121.000.
Crane & Co.. Inc.: See-
Klein, Max, 4,394,146, CI. 55-354.000.
Crenshaw, Ronnie R.; and Algieri, Aldo A., to Bristol-Myers Company.
Chemical compounds. 4,394.508. CI. 546-209.000.
Critter Getter, Inc.: See-
Kaufman. Gilbert T.; and Evans, Alfred, 4,393,616, CI 43-60.000
Crossley, Roger, to John Wyeth and Brother Limited. 2-[(Phenylthio)-
methyl or ethyl]pyridine derivatives. 4,394,509, CI. 546-339.000.
Croswhite, Howard L.; Liang, Po-Lung; and Fisher. Alan R., to Ford
Motor Company. Infinitely variable belt-drive transmission
4,393,731, CI. 74-689.000.
Crouch, William B.: See-
Marion. Charles P.; Crouch, William B.; Brent, Albert; Richter,
George N.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,394.137,
CI. 48-197.00R.
Crowley, Kevin J., to Converse Inc. Outsole for athletic shoe.
4,393,604. CI. 36-67.0OR.
Crummer, Marvin R.; Gold. Kenneth S.; Johnson. David G.; Vander-
meyden, Tom R.; and Pelta. Edmond R.. to FMC Corporation.
Engine generated waveform analyzer. 4,394,742, CI. 364-487 000.
PI 8
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Cuisinarts, Inc.: See —
Shibata. Koichiro. 4.393,737, CI. 83-356.300.
Cummins Engine Company, Inc.: See—
Breeck, Philip L.; Shultz, David E.; and Rosselli, Andrew C,
4,393,825, CI. 123-198.00F.
Cuomo, Jerome J.; Landon, Alfred J.; and Wang, Han C, to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation. Electrostatic clutch.
4,393,967, CI. 192-84.00E.
Currie, Robert J.; Rattlingourd, Glen D.; Spencer, Billie M.; and
Zscheile. John W., Jr., to Sperry Corporation. Apparatus for inter-
leaving and de-interleaving data. 4,394,642, CI. 34O-347.0DD.
Cuscurida, Michael; Grice, Neal J.; and Speranza, George P., to Texaco
Inc Rigid polyurethane foams made from amino polyols modified
with epoxy resins. 4,394,463, CI. 521-167.000.
D & S Manufacturing: See—
Siebert, Steve L., 4,394,107, CI. 414-631.000.
Dagma Deutsche Automaten und Getrankemaschinen GmbH & Co.
KG: See—
Kuckens, Alexander, 4,393,982. CI. 222-209.000.
Dahlberg, Anders, to Tatis Plasttatnigar AB. Protective device for a
ground-deposited light. 4,394,715. CI. 362-153.000.
Dahlberg, Reinhard, to Licenta Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH. Method of
producing electrical contacts on a silicon solar cell. 4,393,576, CI.
29-572.000.
Dai Nippon Insatsu Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kaneko, Toshihisa, 4,393,778, CI. 101-425.000.
Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Bahrle, Friedrich; and Wulf, Helmut, 4,393,922. CI. 165-41.000.
Bergmann. Horst; and Pracht, Hans, 4,393.831, CI. 123-323.000.
Bergmann, Horst, 4,394,598. CI. 313-51.000.
Hoffmann, Gerhard, 4,394,243, CI. 204-284.000.
Dainippon Screen Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Hashimoto, Takeji; Okumoto, Kiyohumi; and Andoh, Masayasu,
4,393,670, CI. 66-75.200.
Dakota Plastics Company: See—
Gallo, Joseph S.. Sr., 4,393.622. CI. 47-48.500.
Dall'Aglio. Carlo, to Finike Italiana Marposs. S.p.A. Gauge for check-
ing linear dimensions of mechanical pieces. 4.393.592. CI. 33-172.00B.
Dalton. Michael L., to Dalton Systems. Inc. Automatic card or tag
delivery apparatus. 4.394.011. CI. 271-107.000.
Dalton Systems. Inc.: See—
Dalton. Michael L.. 4.394.011. CI. 271-107.000.
Damerau. Herbert R., to Pecor Corporation. Liquid clarifier and
method. 4.394,272, CI. 210-779.000.
D'Andrea, Alfred A., Sr.: See—
Campagna, Thomas G.; D'Andrea, Alfred A., Sr.; and Campagna,
Frank. 4.394.716. CI. 362-158.000.
Dango & Dienenthal Maschinenbau GmbH: See-
Schneider. Werner. 4.393.703. CI. 73-432.00R.
Daniel Industries Inc.: See —
Hmojosa. Alberto L., 4.394.023. CI. 277-124.000.
Data General Corporation: See —
Bernstem, David H.; Carberry, Richard A.; Druke, Michael B.; and
Gusowski, Ronald I., 4,394,736, CI. 364-200.000.
Date, Hirohiko: See —
Kishida, Kalsuhiro; Mekuchi, Yutaka; Hirao, Sumio; and Date,
Hirohiko, 4,394.560. CI. 219-I37.0WM.
Dauson. Samuel, to PPG Industries. Inc. Durable ceramic enamel
spandrels. 4.394.064. CI. 350-259.000.
Davidson. Charles: See —
Larson. Ove; and Davidson. Charles, 4,393,728, CI. 74-469.000.
Davis, Charles L.: See—
Apgar, Waldo D.; Davis, Charles L.; Emery, Loring D., Jr.; Es-
seluhn. Werner F.; and Holbrook, Walter R., 4,394.602. CI.
315-71.000.
De Limon Fluhme GmbH & Co.: See—
Saretzky, Horst. 4.393.958. CI. I84-7.00D.
De Angelis. Giancarlo; Catastini. Alberto; Bassi. Aldo; Rogora.
Edoardo; Radaelli. Dario; Bertoloni. Luciano; and Perrone. Fran-
cesco, to Alfa Romeo. S.p.A. System for the regulation and control of
the angle of advance for the ignition unit of an internal combustion
engine. 4.393.836. CI. 123-417.000.
Dearnaley. Geoffrey; Steeples. Kenneth; and Saunders. Ian J., to United
Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority. Method of forming high resis-
tivity regions in GaAs by deuteron implantation. 4.394.180. CI.
148-1 500.
Debard. Andre, to Aerosol Inventions and Development AS AID SA.
Vapor tap valve for aerosols. 4.393.984. CI. 222-402.180.
De Briere. John G.; Lemanowicz. Mary M.; Richardson. David L.; and
Vanderputten. Willem. to General Electric Company. Ultrasonic
method and apparatus. 4.394.345. CI. 376-245.000.
Dee. Christopher P.. to Automotive Products Limited. Clutch release
bearing assemblies. 4.393.968. CI. 192-98.000.
Deemer. Carroll L.: See —
Satava. George L.; and Deemer. Carroll L.. 4.394.194. CI.
148-131.000.
Deere & Company: See —
May. Charles W.. 4.393.847. CI. 123-502.000.
Moore. James W.. 4.393.645. CI. 56-202.000.
Viaud. Jean. 4.393.764, CI. 100-88.000.
de Fraine. Paul; Clough, John M.; and Worthington. Paul A., to Impe-
rial Chemical Industries PLC. Azolyl-hydroxy alkanoic acid com-
pounds. 4.394.151. CI. 71-76.000.
de Grivel, Virginie: See —
Boudon. Gerard; Denis. Bernard; de Grivel, Virginie; and Mollier,
Pierre, 4.394,752, CI. 365-227.000.
Dejoux, Andre: See —
Desnoulez, Bruno; and Dejoux. Andre. 4.393.733. CI. 81-3.38A.
Dekeyser. Mark A.: See —
Plant. Howard L.; Cantor. Steven E.; Doweyko, Arthur M.;
Dekeyser. Mark A.; and Bell. Allyn R.. 4.394.155. CI. 71-94.000.
Delabie. Jacques J. A., to Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction
de Moteurs d'Aviation, "S.N.E.C.M.A.". Transmission line assembly
including means for reducing vibrations and method of making same.
4.394.531. CI. 174-24.000.
De Leon. Daniel, to GTE Automatic Electric Labs Inc. Line circuit for
multiple line telephone. 4.394,544. CI. 179-99.00H.
Delhaes, Johannes C. to Rubber-en Kunststoffabriek ENBI B.V. Seal
for use with pipes to be fitted one into another with spigot and socket
ends. 4,394,024, CI. 277-207.00A.
Delle Donne, Roberto, to Italtel Societa Italiana Telecomunicazioni
S.p.A. Transmitting section of PCM station. 4,394.759. CI.
370-110.100.
Delorean Research Limited Partnership: See—
Spooner. Colin R.. 4.394.050. CI. 297-468.000.
DeMaria. Francesco: See—
Pfeiffer. Ronald E.; and DeMaria. Francesco. 4,394,339, CI. 264-
177.00F.
de Nachtegaal, Jakob, to IHC Holland N.V. Hoisting yoke. 4,394,041,
CI. 294-181.00R.
deNevers, Noel H.: See —
Gardner, James H.; and deNevers, Noel H., 4,393,665, CI.
62-457.000.
Deng, Peter: See —
Warren, Ben; White, George M.; Parfitt, Rick; and Deng, Peter,
4,394,538, CI. 179-l.OSD.
Denis, Bernard; See —
Boudon, Gerard; Denis, Bernard; de Grivel, Virginie; and Mollier,
Pierre, 4,394,752, CI. 365-227.000.
Dennhardt, Werner, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Processing station
for charging, exposing and developing printing masters. 4.394.085,
CI. 355-3.00R.
Dennis, Richard D., to Carrier Corporation.' Electrical connector.
4,394.549. CI. 200-16.00E.
Denisply Research & Development Corp.: See —
Scheuble. Max; and Munsch, Paul, 4,394.172, CI. 106-38.50D.
Deprez, Jacques: See—
Kitzelmann, Dieter; and Deprez. Jacques, 4,394,239, CI.
204-414.000.
deRivet, Philippe-Hubert: See—
Bienvenu, Jacques; Dufond, Patrick; Carre, Claude; Tuong, Due
L.; Verdier. Henri; deRivet, Philippe-Hubert; Bradley, John J.;
and Franklin, Benjamin S., 4,394.725. CI. 364-200.000.
Derycke. Leon: See —
Mijot. Guy; Derycke. Leon; Dienne. Didier; and Martinot, Roger,
4,393,942, CI. 172-2.000.
Desnoulez, Bruno; and Dejoux, Andre. Corkscrews with tackle reduc-
tion. 4.393.733. CI. 81-3.38A.
Deutsche Forschungs-und Versuchsanstalt fur Luft-und Raumfahrt
e.V.: See —
Gebhard. Werner; and Kroder. Claus. 4,393.718. CI. 73-859.000.
De Vigili. Walter J.: See-
Hough. Louis E.; and De Vigili. Walter J.. 4,393,754, CI. 98-2.140.
Hough, Louis E.; De Vigili, Walter J.; and Shifflett, David C,
4,394,044, CI. 296-218.000.
deVries. Louis; and King. John M.. to Chevron Research Company.
Antioxidant combinations of sulfur containing molybdenum com-
plexes and aromatic amine compounds for lubricating oils. 4.394.279.
CI. 252-46.400.
Devuyst. Eric A.: See —
Ettel. Victor A.; Devuyst. Eric A.; and Illis. Alexander. 4.394,366,
CI. 423-493.000.
Diamond Communication Products, Inc.: See-
Leonardo, Ignazio. 4.393.549. CI. 24-1 I5.00A.
Diamond International Corporation: See —
Bixler. Kenneth D.; Lord, Henry A.; and Reifers, Richard F..
4.394,214. CI. 162-228.000.
Dickerson, Joyce H.: See —
Joyce H.; and Schmitt, William R.,
Brandt, John G.; Dickerson,
4,394,235, CI. 204-165.000.
Dienne, Didier: See —
Mijot, Guy; Derycke, Leon; Dienne, Didier; and Martinot, Roger,
4,393.942. CI. 172-2.000.
Diesel Kiki Co.. Ltd.: See—
Ishizuka. Yutaka. 4.394.1 10. CI. 417-269.000.
Diester Concentrator Co.. Inc.. The: See —
Zipperian. Donald E.. 4.394.258. CI. 209-170.000.
Dieterich. Alfred. Shoe orthosis or shoe orthosis parts. 4.393.876. CI.
128-583.000.
Diffracto Ltd.: See— . „
Liptay-Wagner. Nicholas; Renaud. Roland; Pryor. Timothy R.;
and Clarke. Donald A.. 4.394.683. CI. 358-107.000.
diga-die gasheizung GmbH: See —
Boer. Hubert. 4.393.805. CI. 118-105.000.
Di Giulio. Arnold O.: See—
Brown. Garrett; and Di Giulio. Arnold O.. 4.394.075. CI.
352-243.000.
Di Leo. Angela M.; and Lucia. James, to Zaromb. Solomon. Purse
alarm. 4,394.644. CI. 340-571.000.
Dilgren. Richard E.; and Owens. Kenneth B.. to Shell Oil Company.
Olefin sulfonate-improved steam foam drive. 4.393.937.
166-272.000.
CI.
JULY 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 9
Dills. Raymond L.. to General Electric Company. Solid plate heating
unit. 4.394.564. CI. 219-449.000.
Dills. Raymond L.. to General Electric Company. Power disconnect
assembly for electric heating elements. 4.394.565. CI. 219-452.000.
Di Rosa. Gaetano. to F.A.T.A. - Fabrica Apparecchi di Sollevamento
e Trasporto ed Affini S.p.A. Rotary valve for controlling the flow of
a solid particulate material. 4.393.892. CI. 137-242.000.
Dirth. George P. Control system for refrigeration or air conditioning
installation. 4.393.662. CI. 62-115.000.
Disborg. Lennart. to FFV Industriprodukter AB. Method and appara-
tus for the assembly of long objects on a rotating shaft. 4.393.567. CI.
29-42 l.OOR.
Discovision Associates: See —
Taylor. Arnold E.. 4.394.117. CI. 425-549.000.
Disctron. Inc.: See —
Edwards, Roy J.. 4.394.70a CI. 360-133.000.
Divisek. Jiri; and Mergel. Jurgen. to Kemforschungsanlage Julich
Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung. Diaphragms for alkaline
water electrolysis and method for production of the same as well as
utilization thereof 4.394.244. CI. 204-295.000.
Dobbie. Thomas A., Jr.: See —
Vorhauer. Bruce W.; and Dobbie. Thomas A.. Jr.. 4.393.871. CI.
609-58.000.
Dobkin. Robert C: See—
Dunkley, James L.; and Dobkin. Robert C, 4,393.575. CI.
29-571.000.
Dr. C. Otto Sl Comp. G.m.b.H.: See—
Haese. Egon; Willms. Rolf; and Schultheiss. Karl D.. 4.394.363, CI.
423-356.000.
Dr. Ing. h.c.F. Porsche AG: See —
Schmid, Wolfgang, 4,393,827, CI. I23-198.00F.
Dodson, Karen E.: See —
Tallent, Othar K.; Dodson, Karen E.; and Mailen, James C,
4,394,269, CI. 210-690.000.
Doherty, John, Jr., to Texas Instruments Incorporated. Two-tempera-
ture thermally responsive fast idle control switch. 4,393,834. CI.
123-339.000.
Dola, Frank P.. to AMP Incorporated. Joystick switch. 4.394,548, CI.
200-6.00A.
DoUand, Carlisle R., to United States of America, National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Adaptive reference voltage generator for
firing angle control of line-commutated inverters. 4,394,610, CI.
318-803.000.
Dolomitwerke GmbH: See—
Rosener, Karlheinz; Roeder, Alfred; Munchberg, Wolfgang; Ri-
chrath, Herbert; and Chmiel. Max. 4.394.454. CI. 501-112.000.
Donalies. Richard W. Boat rope controller. 4.393.803. CI. 114-254.000.
Donlon. William T.. Jr.: See —
Meitzler, Allen H.; Donlon. William T.. Jr.; and Schinozaki. Sam-
uel S.. 4,394.672. CI. 357-10.000.
Donne. Graham L.: See —
Armour, John S.; Watson. Peter M. F.; and Donne, Graham L.,
4,393,980, CI. 220-85.00S.
Donne, Roberto D., to Italtel Societa Italiana Telecomunicazioni,
S.p.A. Synchronizing unit for receiving section of PCM station.
4,394,758. CI. 370-105.000.
Donnelly. Vincent M.; Flamm. Daniel L.; and Karlicek. Robert F.. Jr..
to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated. Spectroscopic moni-
toring of gas-solid processes. 4.394.237. CI. 204-192.00E.
Dornier GmbH: See —
Ritchie. Donald. 4.394.109. CI. 416-142.000.
Dosch, Werner; and Wagner. Heinz, to Carlo Erba Strumentazione
S.p.A. Connecting device for pneumatic and/or hydraulic circuits in
column chromatography. 4.394.263. CI. 210-198.200.
Dow Chemical Company. The: See—
Allada. Sambasiva R.. 4.394.288. CI. 252-350.000.
Bertelsman. Dale M.; Eckert. William M.; and Morrow, Stanley J.,
4.394.455. CI. 501-117.000.
Hoffman. Dwight K.. 4.394,491. CI. 525-452.000.
McKinney. Osborne K.; and Flores. David P., 4.394.474. CI.
524-232.000.
Nelson, Donald L.; and Naderhoff, Bryan A., 4,394,497. CI.
528-101.000.
Pryor. Alvetta. 4.394.284. CI. 252-153.000.
Schrader, Paul G.. 4.394.496. CI. 528-98.000.
Smith, Harry A., 4,394,133, CI. 44-56.000.
Doweyko, Arthur M.: See —
Plant, Howard L.; Cantor, Steven E.; Doweyko, Arthur M.;
Dekeyser, Mark A.; and Bell, Allyn R., 4,394,155, CI. 71-94.000.
Doyle, Francis S.; Prince, Terry B.; and Stevenson, Martin J., to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Construction of a telephone
instrument. 4,394,545, CI. 179-179.000.
Doyle. Holly T.: See—
Suchoff, Michael A.; Doyle. Holly T.; and Doyle. Robert O..
4,394,649, CI. 340-711.000.
Doyle, Robert O.: See—
Suchoff, Michael A.; Doyle, Holly T.; and Doyle, Robert O.,
4,394,649, CI. 340-711.000.
Drews, Ulrich; Werner, Peter; and Mohrle, Werner, to Robert Bosch
GmbH. Device for regulating the fuel-air ratio in internal combustion
engines. 4,393,841, CI. 123-440.000.
Dronet, Jean-Marc, to Societe d'Application Plastique Mecanique et
Electronique Plastimecanique S.A. Forming arrangement for ma-
chines making receptacles out of thermoplastic material. 4,394,115,
CI. 425-122.000.
Druke, Michael B.: See —
Bernstein, David H.; Carberry, Richard A.; Druke. Michael B.; and
Gusowski. Ronald I.. 4,394,736. CI. 364-200.000.
Dufond. Patrick: See —
Bienvenu. Jacques; Dufond. Patrick; Carre. Claude; Tuong. Due
L.; Verdier. Henri; deRivet. Philippe-Hubert; Bradley, John J.;
and Franklin. Benjamin S.. 4.394.725. CI. 364-200.000.
Dukhovlinov. Sergei D.: See —
Aronov. Sergei A.; Bashilov. Vladimir A.; Volkov. Nikolai M.; and
Dukhovlinov. Sergei D.. 4.394.591. CI. 310-11.000.
Dull. Hans J.; and Hillmer. Adolf, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Track
crossing for a two track suspension railroad. 4.393,786. CI.
104-141.000.
Dumbaugh. William H.. Jr.. to Corning Glass Works. Envelopes for
tungsten-halogen lamps 4.394,453. CI. 501-66.000
Dunkley. James L.; and Dobkin. Robert C. to National Semiconductor
Corporation. Process for manufacturing a JFET with an ion im-
planted stabilization layer. 4.393.575. CI. 29-571.000.
Dunn. William H.; Horey. Leonard I.; and Kurland. Marvin, to Singer
Company. The. Arrangement for operating an electronically con-
trolled sewing machine in a diagnostic mode. 4.393.796. CI. 112-
158.0OE.
Dunnavant. William R.: See —
Gruber. Bruce A.; Langer. Heimo J.; and Dunnavant. William R..
4.394.466. CI. 523-141.000.
Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company: See —
Aufdermarsh. Carl A.. 4.394.489, CI. 525-370.000
Clark. Thomas R.; Lillmars. Alvin E.; Roth. Elwood A.; Schmick.
Alvin L.; and Todd. Maurice C. 4.393.736. CI. 83-100.000.
Cone. Michael M.. 4.394.321. CI. 260-439 OOR.
Levitt. George. 4.394.506. CI. 544-321.000.
Middleton. William J.. 4.394.386. CI. 424-298.000.
Milford. George N.. Jr.. 4.394.500. CI. 528-313.000.
Miller. Conrad E.. 4,394.442. CI. 430-532.000.
Nair. Kumaran M.. 4.394.171. CI. 106-1.140.
Petersen. Wallace C. 4.394.314. CI. 260- .^9 1. 000.
Reap. James J.. 4.394.153. CI. 71-92.000.
Rys-Sikora. John. 4,394.459. CI. 521-84.000. '
Tomic. Ernst A.. 4.394.174. CI. 106-85.000.
Dupre. Bernard: See —
Loos. Horst-Rudolf; and Dupre. Bernard. 4.393.951. CI.
177-136.000.
Dupro AG.: See—
Woerwag. Peter, 4.394.606. CI. 318-434.000.
Dutfield. James H.. to Reftech Limited. Vertical refuse compactor
4.393.767. CI. 1OO-229.0OA.
Dweck. Jay S.: See —
Mix. Thomas W.; and Dweck. Jay S.. 4.394.219. CI. 203-1.000.
Dwivedi. Basant K.: See —
Sampathkumar. Prathivadibhayankaram S.; and Dwivedi. Basant
K.. 4.394.308. CI. 260-1 I2.50R.
Dynamit Nobel Aktiengesellschaft; See—
Brede. Uwe; and Penner. Horst. 4.393.779, CI. 102-202.500.
Eastman Kodak Company: See —
Anagnostopoulos, Constantine N.; and Lee. Teh-Hsung. 4.394.675.
CI. 357-24.000.
Cappel. Carl R.. 4.394,440. CI. 430-379.000.
Gysling. Henry J.. 4.394.318. CI. 260-429.00R.
Jadwin. Thomas A.; and Storey. Robert C. 4.394.430. CI.
430-110.000.
Kasper. George P.. 4.393.810. CI. 118-657.000.
Moberg. Gregory O., 4.394.719. CI. 363-18.000.
Van Allan. James A.; Perlstein. Jerome H.; Reynolds. George A.;
and Goliber. Thomas E.. 4.394.428. CI. 430-83.000.
Eaton Corporation: See —
Cohen. Leonard D.. 4.394.660. CI. 343-lOO.OSA.
Merritt, Robert C; and Terwilliger. Gerald L.. 4.393.852. CI.
123-564.000.
Eckert. William M.: See—
Bertelsman. Dale M.; Eckert. William M.; and Morrow. Stanley J..
4.394.455. CI 501-117.000.
Eckle. Otto; and Veigel. Helmut, to Komet Stahlhalter- und Werkzeug-
fabrik Robert Breuning GmbH. Cutting plate carrier insertable in a
holder of a machine tool, in particular a lathe tool. 4.393.735. CI.
82-36.00R.
Ecolaire Incorporated: See —
Board. Robert D.. 4.394,139. CI. 55-20.000.
Edelman, Robert, to Celanese Corporation. Sized carbon fibers capable
of use with polyimide matrix. 4,394,467, CI. 523-205.000
Eder Instrument Co., Inc.; See —
Reznik, Benjamin; Welber, Stanley; and Streifeneder, Ludwig,
4.393,872, CI. 604-151.000.
Edwards, Roy J., to Disctron, Inc. Restraining and sealing mechanism
for disc cartridge. 4,394,700, CI. 360-133.000.
Egami, Tsuneyuki; See—
Kohama. Tokio; Obayashi. Hideki; Kawai. Hisasi; and Egami.
Tsuneyuki. 4.393.702. CI. 73-204.000.
F.iyh^rt Jflson S " Sec
Egbert. Jeffrey T.; and Egbert. Jason S.. 4.394.012. CI. 272-1 19.000.
Egbert. Jeffrey T.; and Egbert. Jason S. Weighted exercise vest.
4.394.012. CI. 272-119.000.
Egly. Richard S.; and Tumquist. Cecil E., to Angus Chemical Com-
pany. Process for rectification of propane nitration stream. 4.394.220,
CI. 203-42.000.
Ecuchi Sciii' Sec
Suzuki. Seigo; and Eguchi. Seiji. 4.394.730. CI. 364-200.000.
1032 o.q.^*9
PI 10
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Eguchi, Shusaku: See —
Takahashi, Kenji; Yamazaki, Hisashi; Miyahara, Junji; Kotera,
Noboru; Eguchi. Shusaku; and Miura. Norio, 4,394,581, CI.
250-484.100.
Eguchi, YasukaU; Takenoya, Hideaki; and Sano, Yasuro, to Janome
Sewing Machine Co. Ltd. Sewing machine with needle dropping
hole changing control device. 4,393,794, CI, 112-158.00E.
Eheim, Franz; and Hofer, Gerald, to Robert Bosch GmbH. RPM
Governor for a fuel injection pump. 4,393,835, CI. 123-357.000.
Eicken, Karl; Rohr, Wolfgang; and Wuerzer, Bruno, to BASF Aktien-
gesellschaft. N-Azolyl acetanilides, the manufacture thereof, and
their use as. 4,394,513, CI. 548-374.000.
Eidschun, Charles D., to Micro-Plate, Inc. Specific gravity level gauge
and method. 4,393,705. CI. 73-439.000.
Electra Food Machinery, Inc.: See —
Anmahian, Al, 4,393,758. CI. 99-450.600.
Electric Power Research Institute, Inc.: See—
Bahder, George; and Rabinowitz, Mario, 4,394,534. CI. 174-15.008.
Bedell, John R.. 4,394,006, CI. 266-239.000.
Lapides, Melvin E., 4,393,711, CI. 73-592.000.
Elford, Howard L.: See —
van't Riet, Bartholomeus; Elford, Howard L.; and Wampler, Galen
L., 4,394.389, CI. 424-308.000.
Eli Lilly and Company: See —
Kukolja, Stjepan; and Pfeil, Janice L., 4,394,313, CI. 260-245.400.
Tao, Eddie V. P., 4,394.510, CI. 548-240.000.
Elitex. koncern textilniho strojirenstvi: See—
Rambousek, Miroslav; and Svarc. Stanislav, 4,393,648, CI.
57-413.000.
Elleman, Daniel D.: See—
Barmatz, Martin B.; Trinh, Eugene H.; Wang, Taylor G.; Elleman,
Daniel D.; and Jacobi, Nathan, 4,393,708, CI. 73-505.000.
Ellis, Edward J.; and Salamone, Joseph C, to Polymer Technology
Corporation Abrasive-containing contact lens cleaning materials.
4,394,179. CI. 134-7,000.
Ellison. Joseph: See-
Willis. Frederick G.; Radtke. Richard R.; Ellison. Joseph; and
Fozo. Steven R.. 4.393.696, CI. 73-117.300.
Elpo Industries, Inc.; See —
Kowalski, Eugene, 4,393.588. CI. 30-196.000.
Elrod, Samuel D.: See-
Anderson, Charles N.; Elrod, Samuel D.; and Miller, Gerald O..
4,393.987, CI. 228-157.000,
Emab Electrolux Motor Aktiebolag: See—
Barkhult, Bengt A,, 4,393,589, CI. 30-381.000.
Emerle. Emil; and Gawron. Alex F.. to Skil Corporation. Battery
charging circuit. 4.394.612. CI. 320-31.000.
Emery. Loring D.. Jr.: See —
Apgar. Waldo D.; Davis, Charles L.; Emery, Loring D., Jr.; Es-
seluhn, Werner F.; and Holbrook, Walter R., 4,394,602, CI.
315-71.000.
Emhart Industries, Inc.: See-
Wallace. George E., 4,393,664, CI. 62-256.000.
Weaver, Robert F.. 4,394.595, CI. 310-162.000.
Engelhard Corporation: See—
Gratzel, Michael; and Kiwi. John, 4,394,293, CI. 252-430000.
Entoleter, Inc.: See —
Marro. Joseph. Jr.; and Wattles. Gurdon B.. 4.394,131, CI.
44-51.000.
Epstein, Fred; and Holden, Tom, to Industrial Engineering and Equip-
ment Incorporated. Electric immersion heater mounting flange.
4,394,562, CI. 219-306.000.
Ergon, Inc: See —
Taylor, David W., 4,394,132, CI. 44-51.000.
Enckson, Roger D.. to Honeywell Inc. Electrographic recording.
4.394,671, CI. 346-155.000.
Eriksson Eriki S€€
Hallqvist. Sten; and Eriksson. Erik, 4,393,748, CI. 89-47.000.
Eriksson, Erik F. Intermeshing screw-type refiner. 4,393,983, CI.
222-233.000.
Ermilova, Margarita M.: See —
Gryaznov, Vladimir M.; Smimov, Viktor S.; Vdovin, Valentin M.;
Ermilova, Margarita M.; Gogua, Liya D.; Pritula. Nina A.; and
Fedorova, Galina K., 4,394,294, CI. 252-430.000.
Ernest. Richard B.: See —
Hansen, David M.; and Ernest, Richard B.. 4,393,684, CI.
72-451.000.
Ertl, Wilhelm; Lachmann, Ulrich; and Pertsch, Heinrich, to Siemens
Aktiengeselischaft. Magnetic gate and method of production thereof.
4,394,190, CI. 148-31.550.
Eschenko. Vladislav Y.: See—
Golovanov, Alexandr V.; Eschenko. Vladislav Y.; Musaev. Irsali
K.; and Talibdzhanov. Zakhidzhan S.. 4.394.120. CI. 431-284.000,
Eshbach, John R,: See —
Cady. William R ; Yu, SePuan; and Eshbach, John R., 4,393,578,
CI. 29-576,0OB,
Eskandry, Ezra D.: See —
Humble. David R.; Weaver, Jon N.; Gentzler, David L.; Eskandry,
Ezra D.; and Lamanna, Peter J.. 4.394,645, CI. 340-572.000.
Esseluhn, Werner F.: See—
Apgar, Waldo D.; Davis, Charles L.; Emery, Loring D., Jr.; Es-
seluhn, Werner F.; and Holbrook. Walter R., 4,394,602, CI.
315-71.000.
Essex Group, Inc.: See —
Sian, Sucha S.. 4,394,638, CI. 337-264.000.
Etat Francais: See —
Terrien, Michel E.; and Bouvet, Claude, 4,393,533, CI. 14-2.600.
Ettel, Victor A.; Devuyst, Eric A.; and lUis, Alexander, to Inco Lim-
ited. Process for production of C0CI2 solution from cobaltic oxide-
hydrate. 4,394,366, CI. 423-493.000.
Eurand America, Inc.: See —
Scarpelli, Joseph A., 4,394,287, CI. 64-4.320.
Evans, Alfred: See —
Kaufman, Gilbert T.; and Evans, Alfred, 4,393,616, CI. 43-60.000.
Ewing, Neal L.: See —
Nava, Louis J.; and Ewing, Neal L.. 4.394,394. CI. 426-285.000.
Exalto. Robertus; and Kwakernaak. Adriaan, to Fokker B.V. Pickling
of aluminum. 4,394,232. CI. 204-144.000.
Exxon Research and Engineering Co.: See —
Rosensweig, Ronald E., 4,394,281, CI. 252-62.550.
Seiver, Robert L.. 4,394,282, CI. 252-62.550.
F.A,T,A. - Fabrica Apparecchi di Sollevamento e Trasporto ed Affini
S D /^ ' Sec
Di Rosa, Gaetano, 4,393,892, CI, 137-242.000.
Fabian, Klaus, to Hoechst Aktiengeselischaft. Process and test speci-
men for determining the adhesion to glass of interlayers for laminated
glass by the tensile shear test. 4,393,700, CI. 73-150.00A.
Fallon. William H.; Schober. William R.; Neukirch. Edward O.; and
Kirby. Donald W.. to General Battery Corporation. Method for
charging a storage battery. 4.394.611, CI. 320-21.000.
Farber, Milton; and Worns, John R., to Uniroyal, Inc. Syndiotactic
polybutadiene composition for a photosensitive printing plate.
4,394,435, CI. 430-287.000.
Favot, Guido; and Berg. Alf A., to Tekno-Detaljer Sture Carlsson AB.
Spring coiling machine. 4,393,678, CI. 72-131.000.
Feamley, Charles: See —
Strasilla, Dieter; Moldovanyi, Laszlo; Fearnley, Charles; and
Meindl. Hubert. 4,393.886, CI. 132-7.000.
Fedorova, Galina K.: See —
Gryaznov, Vladimir M.; Smimov, Viktor S,; Vdovin. Valentin M.;
Ermilova, Margarita M,; Gogua. Liya D,; Pritula, Nina A,; and
Fedorova, Galina K., 4,394,294, CI. 252-430.000.
Feil, Paul G., to AMF Incorporated. Snap action switch. 4,394.553, CI.
200-67.0DA.
Fengler. Hans-Jorg, to Auergesellschaft GmbH. Circuit arrangement
for a gas measuring and gas analysis apparatus. 4.393,686, CI.
73-23.000.
Fenne, Ivor: See —
Mowbray, Dorian F.; Fenne, Ivor; and Cavanagh, Eric J.,
4,393,846, CI. 123-502.000.
Ferm, Richard L., to Chevron Research Company. Hydroxy-
aluminum/lignin sulfonate compositions. 4,394,213. CI. 162-163.000.
Fernandez. Carlos, to Brown, Boniard I. Rock boring bit with novel
teeth and geometry. 4,393,948, CI. 175-374.000.
Ferrar. Carl M.. to United Technologies Corporation. Fluidic angular
rate sensor employing ionized gas. 4.393,707, CI. 73-505.000.
FFV Industriprodukter AB: See—
Disborg, Lennart, 4.393.567. CI. 29-42 l.OOR.
Fidler. Fred: See —
Ball. Martin F.; and Fidler, Fred. 4,393,979, CI. 220-270000.
Figg, Anthony V, J., to Norprint International, Apparatus for printing
and dispensing labels, 4,393,774, CI, 101-288,000,
Filzinger, Klaus: See—
Fuchs, Hermann; and Filzinger. Klaus. 4,394,310, CI, 260-162.000.
Finike Italiana Marposs, S,p,A,: See—
Dall'Aglio. Carlo, 4,393,592, CI, 33-172,00B,
Finnieston, Alan, Tibia brace. 4.393,866. CI, 128-87,0OR,
Firestone Tire & Rubber Company. The: See—
Goetz, George W,; Santti. Arne J,; and LaLonde, Gary R.,
4,394,033, CI, 280-736.000.
Fischer, Friedrich B.; and Moser, Gottfried, to Klockner-Humboldt-
Deutz AG. Heating system. 4,393.824, CI. 123-196.0AB.
Fischer. Robert G.. Jr.; and Zweig, Arnold, to American Cyanamid
Company. Method for the liquid phase oxidative fluorination of
aromatic compounds. 4,394,527, CI. 570-143.000.
Fischer, Rolf: See—
Schnabel, Rolf; Weitz, Hans-Martin; and Fischer, Rolf, 4,394,290,
CI. 252-412.000.
Fischer, Victor H„ to Thermal Systems Limited. Reciprocating exter-
nal combustion engine. 4,393,653, CI, 60-511,000,
Fisher. Alan R,: See —
Croswhite. Howard L.; Liang, Po-Lung; and Fisher, Alan R,.
4,393,731. CI. 74-689,000,
Fisher, Dennis H,, to Ashland Oil, Inc, High energy fuel compositions.
4,394,528, CI, 585-14,000,
Fjellheim, Petter: See—
Hartvig, Tor; and Fjellheim, Petter, 4,394.168, CI. 75-I26.00A.
Flamm, Daniel L.: See —
Donnelly, Vincent M.; Flamm, Daniel L.; and Karlicek, Robert F.,
Jr., 4,394,237. CI. 204-192.00E.
Flannagan, Alfred, to Litton Systems, Inc. Light emitting diode matrix,
4,394,600, CI, 313-500,000.
Flores, David P,: See —
McKinney, Osborne K,; and Flores, David P., 4,394,474, CI,
524-232,000,
Flusche, Frederick O,; Gustafson, Richard N,; and McGilvray, Bruce
L,. to International Business Machines Corporation, Cache storage
line shareability control for a multiprocessor system, 4,394,731, CI,
364-200.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 11
FMC Corporation: See —
Berkowitz, Sidney; and Mohr. Richard A.. 4.394.361. CI. 423-
321.00S.
Crummer. Marvin R.; Gold, Kenneth S.; Johnson. David G.;
Vandermeyden, Tom R.; and Pelta, Edmond R.. 4.394.742. CI
364-487000.
Gill. William A.. 4.393.906. CI. 141-387,000,
Ranbom, Wayne. 4.394.369. CI, 423-588,000.
Shimp. Lawrence A.; and Steinhauer. John E.. 4.394.396. CI
426-332.000.
Wilson. Donald C, 4.394,398, CI. 426-481.000.
Fohl. to Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH. Belt lock for a safety belt.
4.393.555. CI. 24-230.00A.
Fokker B.V.: See—
Exalto. Robertus; and Kwakernaak. Adriaan. 4,394,232. CI
204-144,000.
Folta. Werner; and Kost, Erwin. to SMS Schloemann-Siemag Aktien-
geselischaft, Traction drive for forging manipulators. 4.393.683. CI.
72-422,000.
Ford. Michael E.; and Johnson. Thomas A., to Air Products and Chem-
icals. Inc. Preparation of polyalkylene polyamines from ammonia,
alkyleneamine. and alkanolamine. 4.394.524. CI, 564-479.000
Ford Motor Company: See —
Chattha, Mohinder S.; and Theodore. Ares N,. 4.394.486. CI
525-162,000,
Croswhite. Howard L.; Liang. Po-Lung; and Fisher. Alan R,.
4,393.731, CI, 74-689,000,
Meitzler. Allen H.; Donlon. William T., Jr.; and Schinozaki. Sam-
uel S, 4.394.672. CI. 357-10.000.
Moulding. Michael B.; Muller. Klaus; and Mack, Gerhard.
4,394,043, CI. 296-97.00H.
Willis. Frederick G.; Radtke. Richard R.; Ellison. Joseph; and
Fozo. Steven R., 4.393.696. CI. 73-117.300.
Foremosl-McKesson. Inc.: See —
Nava, Louis J.; and Ewing, Neal L.. 4.394..394. CI. 426-285.000.
Forshee. David J., to Syn-Trac Systems Inc. Conveyor pallet construc-
tion. 4.393.999. CI, 248-346.000.
Fort Lock Corporation: See—
Scherbing, Frank J.. 4.394.551. CI. 200-44.000.
Fory. Werner: See —
Tobler. Hans; Fory. Werner; and Schurter. Rolf. 4.394.156. CI
71-94.000.
Foss. Stephen D.. to General Electric Company. Method for determin-
ing dissolved gas concentrations in dielectric coolants. 4,394.635. CI.
336-55.000.
Foster. Elton G.. to Shell Oil Co, Process for recovery of chlorine from
hydrogen chloride, 4.394.367. CI. 423-502.000.
Fozo. Steven R.: See —
Willis. Frederick G.; Radtke. Richard R ; Ellison, Joseph; and
Fozo, Steven R., 4.393.696. CI. 73-1 17.300.
Frager. Jean: See—
Gabor. Gabriel. 4.394.720. CI. 363-37.000.
Fralick, Stanley C: See —
Widergren. Robert D.; Chen. Wen-Hsiung; Fralick, Stanley C ; and
Tescher. Andrew G.. 4,394.774. CI. .^82-56.(XX)
Frankel. Charles, to Laurel Enterprises. Jewelry clasp retaining mem-
ber. 4.393,552. CI. 24-213.00C.
Franklin. Benjamin S.: See —
Bienvenu. Jacques; Dufond. Patrick; Carre, Claude; Tuong. Due
L.; Verdier. Henri; deRivet, Philippe-Hubert; Bradley. John J ;
and Franklin. Benjamin S.. 4.394.725. CI. 364-200.000.
Frankston. Michael; and Bezjian. Krikor A Eastern Arabic number
display. 4.394.651. CI. 340-756.000.
Franz. James H.: See-
Fry. Warren C; Franz. James H.; and Merlino. Paul J.. 4.394.724.
CI. 363-124.000.
Franz Plasser Bahnbaumaschinen-Industriegesellschaft m.b.H.: See—
Theurer, Josef. 4,.193.784. CI. 104-2.000.
Frear, David L.. to Bendix Corporation. The. Electrical connector
insert assembly. 4.394.058. CI. 339-59.00R.
Freed. William K : Sfe—
Hoffman. Ronald E.; and Freed, William K . 4.393,594. CI
33-203.160,
Frees. Kenneth A.; and Quick, Thomas E.. to Missouri Research Labo-
ratories. Inc. Glass handling lift truck. 4.394.106. CI. 414-622.000.
Freitag. Walter O.; and Suchodolski. Victor V.. to Sperry Corporation
Making magnetic powders. 4.394.160, CI 75-0.5AA.
French. Paul M. Solar heat collecting apparatus. 4.393,860, CI
126-429.000.
Fressard. Jules: See—
Mandar. Andre; Fres.sard, Jules; and Mandar. Martine. 4,393.855,
CI. 123-587.000.
Freudenstein. Ferdinand: See—
Maki. Emil R ; Freudenstein. Ferdinand; Richard. Raymond L.. Jr.;
and Chew. Meng-Sang. 4.393.820. CI. 123-90410
Frey. Volker: See-
Roth. Michael; and Frey. Volker. 4.394.335. CI. 264-82.000.
Frick. Georg; Reiff. Harro; and Kirsch. Alois, lo Karl Mengele &
Sohne Maschinenfabrik und Eissengiesserei GmbH & Co. Method of
and apparatus for cutting strips from long plates. 4,393.570. CI
29-560.000
Friedman. Jack: See —
Boyarsky. Abraham; Friedman, Jack; Christodoulopoulos.
Athanasios; and Lee. Rock, 4.393.869. CI. 128-204.180.
Friedrich Wilh. Schwing GmbH: See —
Warnecke. Waldemar. 4.393.606. CI. 37-103.000.
Fruge'. James D.. to Celanese Corporation. Recovery of catalytically-
useful cobalt and like metal moieties from their solid oxalates with
EDTA salts. 4.394,355. CI. 423-27.000
Fry. Warren C; Franz, James H.; and Merlino. Paul J., to Westinghousc
Electric Corp Propulsion motor control apparatus and method.
4.394.724. CI. 363-124.000.
Fryar, Durward; and Schmilz. Jerome J., to Procter & Gamble Com-
pany. The. Process for forming a barrier phase 4.393.643. CI
53-471.000.
Fuchino. Yoshihide: See —
Kaneko. Koji; Fuchino. Yoshihide; and Inoue. Tsuyoshi. 4.394.169.
CI. 75-I28.00A.
Fuchs. Francis J.. Jr . to Western Electric Company. Inc Methods and
apparatus for casting and extruding material. 4.393.917. CI.
164-476.000.
Fuchs. Hermann; and Filzinger, Klaus, to Hoechst Aktiengeselischaft.
l-Amino-2-sulfo-(4'-pyrazolonyl-phenyl)-amini)anihraquinone com-
pounds and a process for their preparation. 4,394.310. CI. 260-162.000.
Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kataoka, Ryuji. 4,343.839. CI. 123-440.000.
Tanaka. Takayuki: and Matsumoto. Rempei. 4.393.819. CI.
123-41080
Tsukui. Minoru; Sekiguchi. Hiroshi; and Machida. Takaloshi.
4.393.956. CI. 181-265.000.
Fuji Koeki Kabushiki Kaisha; See —
Takematsu. Yoshiyuki. 4.394.079. CI 354-33.000.
Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd.; See—
Kavsaguchi. Hideo; Inayama. Takayuki; Takimoto. Masaaki; and
Ono. Yoshihiro. 4.394.441. CI 4.30-524000.
Komaki. Takao, and MatsumiMo, Seiji. 4..194.737, CI 364-414.000
Takahashi. Kenji: Yamazaki. Hisashi; Miyahara. Junji; Kotera.
Noboru; Eguchi, Shusaku; and Miura. Norio. 4.394.581. CI
250-484.100.
Terashita. Takaaki. 4.394.078. CI 354-31 000
Fujimura. Shuzo; and Yasuda. Atsuvuki. lo Fujitsu Limited. Spinner.
4.393.807. CI. 118-501 000.
Fujioka. Akira; Sakiyama. Ka/uo; Takigawa. Akio; and Yoshida,
Motoaki. to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited; and Nippon
Sheet Glass Co. Lid. Coating composition 4.394.177, CI
106-287.140.
Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co.. Ltd ; Sec —
Takava. Takao; Takasugi. Hisashi; Murata. Masayoshi; and Yoshi-
oka. Akiteru, 4.394.384. CI. 424-246.000
Fujitsu Limited; Sec —
Fujimura, Shuzo; and Yasuda, Atsuvuki. 4..193.807. CI 1 18-501 000
Isogai. Hideaki; and Takahashi. Yukio. 4.394.657. CI. .^40-825 930
Kurihara. Hiroshi; Takenaka. Sadao; and Itava. Eiji, 4,394.626. CI
331-12.000.
Nagano. Genzo; and Takahashi. Masao, 4.394.763, CI. 371-38.0(K)
Shioya. Yoshimi; Maeda. Mamoru; Takasaki. Kanetake; and
Takagi. Mikio. 4.394.401. CI. 427-39 (KW
Uchiyama. Nobuhiro; Shingu, Masataka: and Tsukada. Saburo,
4..194,211.C1. 156-628 000
Fukushi. Kyosuke; Sec —
Ujikawa, Norihisa; and Fukushi. Kyosuke. 4,.194.480. CI
525-43.000
Fukushima. Hatahiko, Handa. Tadahiko, and Kt>dama. Kenji. lo Air
Products and Chemicals, Inc Process for the production of bkm
molded articles accompanied with the recovery of a blowing gas
4.394.333. CI. 264-37.000.
Fukuto. Tetsuo R.; Sec —
Kawata. Mitsuvasu; Umetsu, Noriharu; and Fukuto. Tetsuo R ,
4.3«i4..183, Cl' 424-285.(XX).
Funke. Rolf; Sir—
Bickle. Wolfgang: Funke. Rolf; and Pfoh. Rolf. 4..194.275. CI
252-12.000.
Furukawa. Hideo: Chikugo. Ka/uo; and Oisuki. ^ oichi. to Kabushiki
Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho. Suction valve scat lubricating apptra-
tus. 4.393.823. CI. 123-19600M.
Furukawa. Takashi; and Koyama, Kazuo. to Nippon Steel Corporation
Method for prcxlucing a dual-phase steel sheet having excellent
formabilily. high artificial-aging hardenabiliiy after forming, high
strength, low yield ratio, and high ductility. 4.394.186. CI. 148-
12.00F.
Futaba Denshi Kogyo K K ; See—
Morimoio. Kiyoshi; and Takagi. Toshinori. 4.394.210. CI
156-608.000
Fuwa. Masaru. to Mitsubishi Petrix-hemical Company Limited. Pro-
duction of elongated Tiber-reinforced comptisite articles. 4.3'*4,338,
CI. 264-135.fX)0.
Gabor. Gabriel, to Frager. Jean Auto-stabilized high ptiwer electric
generator especially adapted for powering processes involving dis
charge in a rarefied gaseous atmosphere 4.394.720. CI 363-37.000.
Gagliani. John, and Long. John V. Mixlified polyimide foams and
methods of making same. 4.394.464. CI. 521-IKO.OOO
Gajajiva. Padej; and Wium. Eigil. to General Signal Corptualion. Insert
plug. 4..^93.900. CI. 138-89.000.
Galkin. Benjamin M.; Boon. Raymond: Gilliam. Rudolph V , and Park.
Chan H.. lo Thomas Jefferson University. Syringe shields and meth-
(Xls for using same. 4.393.864. CI. 128-1 100.
Gallo. Joseph S . Sr.. to Dakota Plastics Company Water funnel and
card holder for cut fiowers 4.393,622. Cl 47-48 500
Gardiner. James R; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and Shep-
ard. Joseph F . to International Business Machines Corp. Double
polysilicon contact structure and process 4.394.406. Cl 427-86.000.
PI 12
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Gardiner, William P.. to W. G. Slow T. (a partnership). Rotary engine.
4.393.829, CI. 123-249.000.
Gardner. James H.; and deNevers, Noel H., to Aurora Design Associ-
ates. Inc. Server for wine bottles and the like. 4,393.665. CI.
62-457.000.
Gardner. Lloyd E.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Catalytic hydro-
cracking, hydrodesulfunzation. and/or hydrodenitrogenation of
organic compounds employing promoted zinc titanate and a zeolite as
the catalytic agent. 4.394,301. CI. 252-455.00Z.
Garrett Corporation. The: See-
Clark. Walter L.; and Sutton. Trevor G., 4,393,692, CI. 73-1 15.000.
Garrison. Barney D.. Jr.; and Marjanovich. Barry S.. to Canadian
Superior Oil Ltd. Sulphur-clay prills. 4.394.150. CI. 71-62.000.
Gas Research Institute; See—
Grunes. Howard E.; and Morrison, Dennis J.. 4,393,663, CI.
62-119.000.
Gasparini, Aldo; and Wimnell, Nils E.. to Gasparini. Aldo; alTd Wim-
nell. Nils Erik. Extruded snap-fastening for slats and metal awning
made therewith. 4.393,629. CI. 52-74.000.
Gast. Richard A., to General Motors Corporation. Dual-monolith
catalytic converter with secondary air injection. 4.394.351. CI.
422-171.000.
Gatsis. John G., to UOP Inc. Coal liquefaction process. 4,394,248, CI.
208-10.000.
Gatzke. Kenneth G.. to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Com-
pany. Diazonium imaging system. 4.394.433. CI. 430-151.000.
Gaudenzi. Gene J. to International Business Machines Corporation
Controllable di/dt push/pull driver 4.394.588, CI. 307-443.000.
Gawron, Alex F.: See —
Emerle, Emil; and Gawron, Alex F.. 4,394,612. CI. 320-31.000.
Gebhard, Werner; and Kroder, Claus, to Deutsche Forschungs-und
Versuchsanstalt fur Luft-und Raumfahrt e.V. Assembly for stress
testing material under high temperatures. 4.393,718, CI. 73-859.000.
Gebhart, Siegfried. Apparatus for milling building blocks. 4.393,856. CI.
125-3.000.
Gebr Eickhoff Maschinenfabrik und Eisengiesserei m.b.H.: See—
Schupphaus. Herbert, 4.394,053, CI. 299-81.000.
Gelhard, Egon. Cylinder lock and key assembly. 4,393,672, CI
70-277.000.
Gellekink, Bernard, to Hollandse Signaalapparaten B.V. Monopulse
radar with pilot signal generator. 4,394.659, CI. 343-16.00M.
General Battery Corporation; See—
Fallon. William H.; Schober, William R.; Neukirch, Edward O.;
and Kirby, Donald W., 4,394,61 1, CI. 320-21.000.
General DataComm Industries, Inc.; See—
Shum, Martin N. Y.. 4,394,767. CI. 375-13.000.
General Dynamics Corporation/Con vair Div ; See—
Hujsak, Edward J.; and Stocker, Hans M., 4,393,541, CI.
16-297.000.
General Electric Company; See-
Anthony, Thomas R., 4,394,712. CI. 361-411.000.
Cady, William R ; Yu. SePuan; and Eshbach, John R., 4,393,578,
CI. 29-576.00B.
De Briere. John G.; Lemanowicz, Mary M.; Richardson. David L.;
and Vanderputten. Willem. 4.394.345. CI. 376-245.000.
Dills. Raymond L , 4.394.564, CI. 219-449.000.
Dills. Raymond L.. 4,394,565, CI. 219-452.000.
Foss, Stephen D.. 4,394,635. CI. 336-55.000.
Houston. John M.; and Whetten. Nathan R , 4,394,578, CI.
250-374.000.
Kenyon, S. Wayne; Geyer, Bernard H., Jr.; and Nelson, Conrad E..
4.394.630. CI. 333-116.000.
Vakil. Himanshu B.. 4.393.661. CI. 62-113.000.
General Foods Corporation: See —
Kleiner, Fredric; and Zemelman. Valery B.. 4.393.660. CI
62-69.000.
General Instrument Corporation; See-
Breeze. Eric G.. 4,394,653, CI. 340-802.000.
General Motors Corporation: See —
Gast, Richard A.. 4,394,351, CI. 422-171.000.
Johnston, Daniel U.; and Shinkle, George A., 4,393,688, CI.
73-35.000
Klomp, Edward D.. 4,394.091, CI. 384-101.000.
Long, Donald A.; and Sowash. Thomas R., 4.394.555. CI. 200-
159.0OR
Maki. Emil R.; Freudenstein. Ferdinand; Richard, Raymond L.. Jr.;
and Chew. Meng-Sang. 4.393.820. CI. 123-90.410
Murphy. James E.; and Reid, Kenneth H.. 4.394.034, CI.
280-801.000.
Rieck, Gerald C, 4,393,994, CI. 239-585.000
General Signal Corporation: See—
Gajajiva, Padej; and Wium, Eigil. 4,393,900, CI. 138-89.000.
Gentzler. David L.: See-
Humble, David R.; Weaver. Jon N.; Gentzler, David L.; Eskandry,
Ezra D.; and Lamanna. Peter J.. 4.394,645. CI. 340-572.000.
George F. and Irene Sherrill 1978 Trust No. 1; See—
Sherrill, George F., 4.394.381. CI. 424-274.000.
George F and Irene Sherrill 1978 Trust No. 2; See—
Sherrill. George F.. 4.394.381. CI. 424-274.000.
Geosource Inc.; See —
Browne. Edward M.; and Smither. Miles A.. 4.394.616. CI.
324-52.000.
Gerber, B. Lynn Remotely adjustable sighting device for tractors.
4.393.596. CI. 33-264.000.
Gercekci. Anil, to Motorola. Inc. Prom erase detector. 4,394,750, CI.
365-218.000.
Gergely, John S.; See —
Correa, Aderbal C; Gergely, John S.; and Blanchard, Andrew J.,
4,394,573, CI. 250-253.000.
Gettys Manufacturing Co., Inc.: See —
Tryber, Robert E.; and Hoffman, George A., 4,394,608, CI.
318-578.000.
Gewerkschaft Schalker Eisenhutte; See—
Holz, Wilhelm; Lukaszewicz. Helmut; and Gregor, Karl, 4,394,217,
CI. 202-227.000.
Geyer, Bernard H, Jr.; See—
Kenyon, S. Wayne; Geyer, Bernard H., Jr.; and Nelson, Conrad E.,
4,394,630, CI. 333-116.000.
Geyer, Gerd: See —
Janicki, Max; Lieflce, Hans-Georg; Keil, Reinhart; and Geyer.
Gerd, 4,394,609, CI. 318-603.000.
Geze GmbH; See —
Storandt. Ralf; Richert, Manfred; and Scheck, Georg, 4,394.032.
CI. 280-618.000.
Gfrerer, Manfred, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Method and device
for the continuous, contactless monitoring of the structure state of
cold strip 4,394,193, CI. 148-129.000.
Gibler, David L.; and O'Connell, Daniel J., to United States of Amer-
ica, Air Force. Removable secondary aircraft fuel enclosure.
4,393,997, CI. 244-135.00R.
Gibson. Dale E.. to Leupold & Stevens, Inc. Tube adjustment gasket
and rifle scope employing same. 4.393,595, CI. 33-245.000.
Gibson, Kirk R., to Chevron Research Company. Large pore shaped
hydroprocessing catalysts. 4,394,303, CI 252-470.000.
Gielisse, Peter J., to L.C.E. Ltd. Method and apparatus for analyzing
gems. 4,394,580, CI. 250-461.100.
Gijzen, Wilhelmus A. H., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Bearing arrange-
ment for an objective of an optical apparatus for writing and/or
reading recording tracks by means of a radiation beam. 4,394,755, CI.
369-45.000.
Gill, William A., to FMC Corporation. Stern to bow offshore loading
system. 4,393,906, CI. 141-387.000.
Gilliam, Rudolpi V.: See —
Galkin, Benjamin M.; Boon, Raymond; Gilliam, Rudolph V.; and
Park, Chan H., 4,393,864, CI. 128-1.100.
Gilmore, Richard F. Mechanically expandable annular seal. 4,394,022.
CI. 277-36.000.
Girardi, Richard V.: See—
Stratta, Julius J.; Robeson, Lloyd M.; and Girardi, Richard V..
4,394,469, CI. 523-212.000.
GKN Stenman AB; See—
Widen, Bo G., 4,393,673, CI. 70-358.000.
Glaxo Group Limited; See —
Clitherow, John W., 4,394,516, CI. 549-495.000.
Gleim, William K. T. Method of reforming gasoline to raise the octane
thereof utilizing low valence Ti, V or Cr composited with non-oxidiz-
ing high surface area support. 4,394,252, CI. 208-134.000.
Glotfelter, Herman E. High security transaction drawer. 4,393,789. CI.
109-19.000.
Gnyra. Bohdan, to Alcan International Limited. Method for curtaihng
phosphorous impurity in the production of hydrogen fluoride.
. 4.394.365, CI. 423-485.000.
Goad, Bobby F.; See-
Muse. John F.; Callihan. Rudy B.; Goad, Bobby F.; and Wain-
wright, Clyde S., Jr., 4,393,931, CI. 166-208.000.
Gocho, Yoshitsugu, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Liq-
uid cooled dynamoelectric machines. 4,394,593, CI. 310-54.000.
Goes. Michael J.; Masly. John R.; and Schmidlin. Albertus E., to United
States of America, Army. Fluidic range-safe explosive device.
4,393,783, CI. 102-529.000.
Goettsche, Mark T. Sound display apparatus having separation control.
4,394,656. CI. 340-825.730.
Goetz, George W.; Santti, Arne J.; and LaLonde, Gary R., to Firestone
Tire & Rubber Company, The. Temperature compensating elastic
cone. 4,394,033, CI. 280-736.000.
Goff, James R. Apparatus for separating abrasive blasting media from
debris. 4,394,256, CI. 209-135.000.
Gogua, Liya D.; See —
Gryaznov, Vladimir M.; Smimov, Viktor S.; Vdovin, Valentin M.;
Ermilova, Margarita M.; Gogua, Liya D.; Pritula, Nina A.; and
Fedorova, Galina K., 4,394,294, CI. 252-430.000.
Gold, Kenneth S.; See—
Crummer, Marvin R.; Gold, Kenneth S.; Johnson, David G.;
Vandermeyden, Tom R.; and Pelta. Edmond R.. 4,394.742. CI.
364-487 000.
Goldstein, Neal; See-
Willis, Alan E.; Lowdenslager, John R.; and Goldstein, Neal,
4,394,540, CI. 179-2.0AM.
Goletto, Jean: See— ,nnnn
Pusineri, Christian; and Goletto, Jean, 4,394.462, CI. 521-137.000.
Goliber, Thomas E.; See —
Van Allan, James A.; Perlstein, Jerome H.; Reynolds, George A.;
and Goliber, Thomas E., 4,394,428, CI. 430-83.000.
Golimowski, Jerzy; Sipos, Laszlo; and Valenta. Paul, to Kernfor-
schungsanlage Julich GmbH. Method of making a measuring elec-
trode assembly and electrode made thereby. 4,394.238, CI.
204-400.000.
Golovanov, Alexandr V.; Eschenko, Vladislav Y.; Musaev, Irsali K.;
and Talibdzhanov, Zakhidzhan S., to Sredneaziatsky Filial Vniiprom-
gaz. Burner. 4,394,120, CI. 431-284.000.
July 19, 1^83
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 13
Gons, Johan; See —
Kuibers-Kiewik, Walfrida G. E.; Akkerman, Johannes; and Gons.
Johan. 4.394.501. CI. 528-485.000.
-Gonzalez, Ruben J.; See —
Borras, Jaime A.; Gonzalez, Ruben J.; Smith, Daniel M.; and
Wieczorek, Alfred B., 4.394.776. CI. 455-76.000.
Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company. The; See —
Cottman, Kirkwood S.. 4.394.476. CI. 524-289.000.
Hoffman. Ronald E.; and Freed. William K.. 4.393.594. CI.
33-203.160.
Tung. William C. T.. 4.394.490. CI. 525-438.000.
Gorans. Marc S.. to Phillips Temro. Inc. Diesel fuel temperature con-
trolling apparatus. 4.393.851. CI. 123-557.000.
Gordon. Bruce W.: See —
Lowery. Richard E.; Gordon. Bruce W.; and Steger. Barry N..
4.394.323. CI. 260-446.000.
Gosselink. Eugene P.. to Procter & Gamble Company. The. Alpha-
oxyalkylene amine oxide compounds useful in detergents. 4,394.305,
CI. 252-528.000.
Gossler, Gerhard. Temperature indicator for a glass ceramic cooking
surface. 4.394,646, CI. 340-594.000.
Gotze, Gerd-Wolfgang; and Muller, Manfred, to Robert Bosch GmbH.
Audiometer with photo sensitive, digitally tunable low distortion
oscillator. 4,394,627. CI. 331-66.000.
Gouda. Osamu; See —
Kato. Masahisa; Kasugai, Syouji; and Gouda, Osamu, 4,393,801, CI.
112-282.000.
Goudsche Machinefabriek B.V.: See —
van der Schoot, Peter W. C . 4.393.756. CI. 99-348.000.
Gould, Gilbert, to United Slates of America, Navy. Cam operated
switch assembly. 4,394,556, CI. 200-161.000.
Gounder, Raj N., to RCA Corporation. Solar cell array with light-
weight support structure. 4,394,529. CI. 136-245.000.
Gouttebessis. Jacques, to Compagnie Generale des Etablissements
Michelin. Process for the manufacture of tires by molding. 4.393.912.
CI. 152-353.00R.
Grabis. Dietrich W.. to United International California Corporation.
System for recovering methane gas from liquid waste. 4.394.136. CI.
48-111.000.
Graf. Manfred, to Rheinmetall GmbH. Fuze for liquid shell propellants.
4,393.781. CI. 102-440.000.
Grandguillot. Michel J.; Mollier. Pierre B.; and Nuez. Jean-Paul J., to
International Business Machines Corp. High density integrated read-
only memory. 4.394.747. CI. 365-104.000.
Gratzel. Michael; and Kiwi. John, to Engelhard Corporation. Catalyst
for the photolytic production of hydrogen from water. 4.394.293. CI
252-430.000.
Grau. James A.; and Hertzog. Russel C. to Schlumberger Technology
Corporation. Methods and apparatus for constituent analysis of earth
formations. 4.394.574. CI. 250-262.000.
Grawey. Charles E.; and Groezinger. John J., to Caterpillar Tractor
Co. Tire and wheel configuration. 4.393,913. CI. 152-364.000.
Gray. Thomas J., to Olin Corporation. Raney alloy coated cathode for
chlor-alkali cells. 4,394,228. CI. 204-98.000.
Great Lakes Carbon Corporation: See —
Karagoz. Berch Y.. 4.394.766. CI. 373-120.000.
Green. GeofTrey W.; and Lettington. Alan H.. to National Research
Development Corporation. Method and apparatus for depositing
coatings in a glow discharge. 4.394.400. CI. 427-38.000.
Greene. George H.; See —
Bartkovitz, David J.; and Greene. George H.. 4.394.493. CI.
525-530.000.
Greer, James B., to Lone Star Steel Company. High performance
tubulars for critical oil country applications and improved process for
their preparation. 4,394,189, CI. I48-12.00R.
Gregor, Karl; See —
Holz, Wilhelm; Lukaszewicz, Helmut; and Gregor, Karl, 4,394,217.
CI. 202-227.000.
Greier. Josef: See —
Obermayer, Bertram; Skatsche. Othmar; and Greier. Josef.
4.393,822. CI. 123-I95.00R.
Grice. Neal J.; See —
Cuscurida. Michael; Grice. Neal J.; and Speranza. George P..
4.394,463. CI. 521-167.000.
Griffiths. Martin G.: See-
Hardy. Francis R. F.; and Griffiths. Martin G.. 4.394,348. CI.
420-528.000.
Groezinger. John J.; See —
Grawey. Charles E.; and Groezinger, John J., 4,393,913, CI
152-364.000.
Grof, Helmut: See —
Reimpell, Uwe; Grof, Helmut; Knell, Franz-Georg; and Wamser,
Anton. 4.394.765. CI. 373-52.000.
Grosjean. Pierre, to Rhone-Poulenc -Textile. Pile extile articles and
process and device for their manufacture. 4.394,200, CI. 156-72.000.
Grossberg, Arnold L., to Chevron Research Company. Delayed coking
process. 4.394,250, CI. 208-108.000.
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hagelee, Leon A., Hahn. Louis T.; and Marzocchi.
Alfred, to Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation. Cationic arcyla-
mide and rubber modified asphalts. 4,394,481, CI. 525-54.500.
Groteke, Daniel E. Apparatus and method for filtration of molten
metal. 4,394,271, CI. 210-773.000.
Groves, William N., to Research Corporation. Exhaust gas recircula-
tion type internal combustion engines and method of operating same.
4,393,853, CI. 123-568.000.
Gruber. Bruce A.; Langer. Heimo J.; and Dunnavant. William R., to
Ashland Oil. Inc. Fulvene binder compositions. 4.394.466, CI.
523-141.000.
Grudler, Francois: See—
Brecy, Andre; and Grudler, Francois, 4,394.604, CI. 318-257.000.
Grunes, Howard E.; and Morrison. Dennis J., to Gas Researcl Insti-
tute. Two-phase thermosyphon heater 4.393.663. CI. 62-119 000.
Grunzweig & Harlmann und Glasfaser AG: See —
Kummermehr. Hans. 4.394.337. CI. 264-122.000.
Gryaznov. Vladimir M.; Smirnov. Viktor S.; Vdovin. Valentin M.;
Ermilova, Margarita M.; Gogua, Liya D.; Pritula, Nina A.; and
Fedorova, Galina K. Membrane catalyst for hydrogenation of or-
ganic compounds and method for preparing same. 4,394,294, CI.
252-430.000.
Gschwandtner. Martin, to Vereinigte Metallwerke Ranshofen-Berndorf
Aktiengesellschaft. Hall probe with automatic connecting means.
4,394,619, CI. 324-1 17.00H.
GTE Automatic Electric Incorporated: See —
Schroeder, Scott L.. 4.394.061. CI. 350-96.200.
GTE Automatic Electric Labs Inc.: See-
Butcher, James S.. 4.394.703. CI. 361-101.000.
Comfort. Joseph A.; Perry. Thomas J.; and Loos. Michel,
4.394.728, CI. 364-200.000.
De Leon, Daniel. 4.394.544. CI. 179.99.00H.
GTE Products Corpniration: See —
Brower. Boyd G.. and Shaffer. John W . 4.394.709. CI. 361-401.000
Brower. Boyd G.; Broadt. David R.; and Shaffer. John W..
4.394.710. CI. 361-401.000.
Gugger. Hans; and Ackland. John, to Warman International Limited
Drill rig. 4.393.944. CI. 173-28.000.
Guilbault. Lawrence J.; See —
Wade. Robert C; and Guilbault. Lawrence J.. 4.394.226. CI.
204-72.000.
Guillemot. Philippe, to Mecilec. Digital pressure-measuring device.
4.393.713. CI. 73-701.000.
Gulati. Harish C; See —
Turner. John T.; Gulati. Harish C; Hall. William B ; and Watson.
Arnold, 4.393.721. CI. 7.V861.210.
Gulf Research & Development Company: See —
Beach. David L.; and Harrison. James J.. 4.394.322. CI
260-440.000.
Madgavkar. Ajav M ; and Swift. Harold E.. 4.394.296. CI.
252-433.000.
Vogel. Roger F.; Marcelin. George; and Swift. Harold E.,
4.394.525. CI. 568-462.000.
Gunter. Claude R.; See-
Cameron. Erma C; Gunter, Claude R : and White-Stevens. Rodric
H.. 4.394.444. CI. 435-1 1.000.
Gupta. Surendra K.; See —
Brock. David A.; and Gupta. Surendra K. 4.394.450, CI
435-191.000.
Gurak. Ronald W.: See—
Sauer. L. Peter; and Gurak, Ronald W . 4.393.763. CI 100-2.000.
Gusowski. Ronald I.; See —
Bernstein. David H ; Carberry. Richard A.; Druke. Michael B : and
Gusowski. Ronald I.. 4.394.736. CI 364-200000
Gustafson. Richard N.: See —
Flusche. Frederick O.; Gustafson. Richard N.; and McGilvray.
Bruce L . 4.394.731. CI. 364-200.000
Gustavsson. Olle; and Sundmar. Goran, to Akiiebtilaget Bofors. Load-
ing table. 4.393.747. CI. 89-45.000.
Gusyatsky. losif A.; See —
Azarevich. Gennady M ; Gusyatskv. losif A.; Savelieva. Lidia B.;
and Akimov. Boris 1.. 4.393.675. CI. 72-71.000.
Gysling. Henry J., to Eastman Kodak Company. Tellurium (II) com-
pounds and complexes having organic moieties containing silicon.
4.394.318. CI. 260-429.00R.
Gyugyi. Laszlo: See —
Brennen. Michael B.: Gyugyi. Laszlo; and Stacey. Eric J.,
4.394.614. CI 323-210.000.
H. B. Fuller Company: See-
Clausen. Victor H.; and Asbury. Charles E. 4.394.206. CI.
156-322.000
Lee. Jeffrey A ; and Todd. Mike J.. 4.393.534. CI 15-98 000
Haese. Egon; Willms. Rolf; and Schultheiss. Karl D . to Dr C Otto &
Comp. GmbH. Process for the granulation of precipitation prtxiucts
formed from ammonium compounds. 4.394.363. CI. 423-356.000
Haeussler. Ernst Concrete slab assembly, especially for building fa-
cades. 4.394.201. CI. 156-73.600.
Hagelee. Leon A.; See —
Grossi. Anthony V ; Hagelee, Leon A.; Hahn. Louis T ; and Mar-
ztx-chi. Alfred, 4.394.481, CI. 525-54.500
Hahn, Louis T.; See —
Grossi, Anthony V ; Hagelee, Leon A.; Hahn, Louis T.; and Mar-
zocchi, Alfred, 4.394,481, CI. 525-54.500.
Hakey, Mark C; See—
Bergendahl. Albert S.; Hakey. Mark C . and Wilson. John P..
4.394.437. CI. 430-312.000.
Hakl. Josef, to Sandoz Ltd Separation of b<iric acid from mixtures
thereof with sulphuric acid. 4.394.364. CI. 423-483.000
Hall. Leslie C. Jr.. to AMP Incorporated. One step applicator tool
4.393.580. CI. 29-749.000.
Hall. R. Dean, to United States of America. Air Force. Tin and gold
plating process. 4.394.223. CI 204-15.000.
PI 14
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Hall. William B.: See-
Turner. John T.; Gulati. Harish C; Hall, William B.; and Watson,
Arnold, 4,393,721. CI. 73-861.210.
Halliburton Services; See —
Smith, Charles W.; and Borchardt, John K., 4.393,939, CI.
166-293.000.
Hallqvist, Sten; and Eriksson. Erik, to Aktiebolaget Bofors. Device for
stripper. 4.393.748. CI. 89-47.000.
Hamada. Masa: See —
Umezawa. Hamao: Shimada. Nobuyoshi; Naganawa, Hiroshi;
Takita, Tomohisa; Hamada, Masa; and Takeuchi, Tomio,
4,394,446, CI 435-88.000.
Hamamatsu Systems, Inc.: See —
Iida. Hitoshi; and Kmg, Pay-Shin. 4.394,688, CI. 358-160.000.
Hamasaki, Yoshiharu: See —
Wakamiya, Yoshinori, Hamasaki, Yoshiharu; Kutsuzawa, Masaki;
and Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. 4,394,121, CI.
432-11.000.
Hamashima. Tetsuo; and Kumano, Fumihiro, to Matsushita Electric
Works. Ltd. Shaving blade assembly for rotary type electric shaver.
4.393.586. CI. 30-43.600.
Hammer. Hartmut: See—
Stage, Hermann; Hammer, Hartmut; and Kuhns. Walter. 4.394,221,
CI. 203-89.000.
Hammers, P. Fred: See-
Wilson. James G.. II; and Hammers. P. Fred. 4.393.565. CI. 29-
157.30R.
Han, Moon H.; and Seong, Baik L., to Korea Advanced Institute of
Science and Technology. Process for preparing rifamycin deriva-
tives. 4.394,312, CI. 260-239.30P.
Hanamoto, Hiroyuki; and Horie, Yoshihiro, to Minolta Camera Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Copying machine. 4,394,088, CI. 355-14.00R.
Handa, Masao: See —
Tamura, Manabu; Kamemura. Yoshiki; and Handa, Masao.
4,393.677. CI. 72-97.000.
Handa. Tadahiko: See—
Fukushima. Hatahiko; Handa. Tadahiko; and Kodama. Kenji,
4.394.333. CI. 264-37.000.
Hannum, Roy R.. to Union Carbide Corporation. Method of producing
a vanadium- and nitrogen-containing material for use as an addition to
steel. 4.394.161. CI 75-0.5BC
Hansen, David M.; and Ernest. Richard B., to Penn Engineering &
Manufacturing Corp. Press having a linkage mechanism connectable
and disconnectable from a ram. 4,393.684. CI. 72-451.000.
Hansen, Jens, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Method and system for receiv-
ing distortion-free FM signals by vehicular radios. 4,394,779, CI.
455-277.000.
Hanyu, Yoshiaki: See —
Suzuki. Yoshihisa; Kaizuka. Takanoli; Hanyu. Yoshiaki; Otake.
Mituyoshi; and Hidano. Yoichi. 4.394,404, CI. 427-48.000.
Hara, Hiroshi: See —
Hara, Michio; Tomimori, Akinobu; and Hara, Hiroshi, 4,394,542.
CI. 179-81. OOB
Hara, Michio; Tomimori. Akinobu; and Hara, Hiroshi, to Nippon
Electric Co, Ltd. Telephone transmission circuit. 4,394,542. CI.
179-8 1. OOB.
Harada. Hiroshi; See—
Ito. Tadahiko; Arao. Toshio; Satoh, Nobuo; and Harada. Hiroshi.
4.394.472, CI. 524-100.000.
Harada. Seiki; See—
Homma, Yoshio; Tsunekawa, Sukeyoshi; Morisaki, Hiroshi; and
Harada, Seiki, 4,394,245. CI. 204-298.000.
Harase, Jirou; and Nakayama. Tadashi. to Nippon Steel Corporation.
Process for producing ferrite stainless steel sheets having excellent
workability. 4.394.188, CI. 148-12.0EA.
Hardy. Francis R. F ; and Griffiths, Martin G., to Interox Chemicals
Ltd. Process for the preparation of aluminium alloys. 4,394,348, CI.
420-528.000.
Hardy, Kenneth D.; See—
Bentley. Peter H.; Hardy, Kenneth D.; and Milner, Peter H.,
4,394,375, CI. 424-114.000.
Hardy, Thomas A.; and Liu. Sophia Y.. to Stauffer Chemical Company
Phosphonate derivatives of polyalkylene polyamines as flame retar-
dants. 4.394.330. CI. 260-932.000.
Hargett, Francis B., to AMF Incorporated. Belt loop folder and feed
apparatus. 4.393.800. CI. 112-265.100.
Harris. Raymond P.. to United States of America, National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Holding fixture for a hot stamping press.
4,393,777. CI. 101-407.0BP.
Harrison. James J.; See —
Beach. David L.; and Harrison. James J.. 4,394.322, CI.
260-440 000.
Hartl, Roland; and Helm, Dieter, to Rohm GmbH. Synthetic stool.
4,394.452, CI. 436-66.000.
Hartmann, Achim; and Schinkitz, Dieter, to Kronos Titan-G.m.b.H.
Apparatus for the chemical conditioning of sludges. 4,394,270, CI.
210-726.000.
Hartvig, Tor; and Fjellheim, Petter. to A/S Raufoss Ammunisjonsfab-
rikker. Austenitic wear resistant steel. 4.394.168. CI. 75-l26:OOA
Harumatsu. Masatoshi; Tomoyori. Makoto; and Tsushima, Noboru. to
Alps Electric Co.. Ltd. Direction detection apparatus. 4,393,709. CI.
73-505.000.
Harumatsu. Masatoshi, to Alps Electric Co.. Ltd. Composite switch
assembly. 4.394,546. CI. 20O-5.OOR.
Hasegawa. Jun; See —
Kono, Hiroya; Hasegawa. Jun; Inagaki. Mitsukane; and Kobayashi,
Hisao. 4.393.966. CI. I92-56.00R.
Hasegawa. Shumpei; See —
Otsuka. Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei,
4.393.842. CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka. Kazuo; Narasaka. Shin; and Hasegawa. Shumpei,
4.393.843, CI. 123-440.000.
Hasegawa, Tokuichiro. Juicer. 4.393,760, CI. 99-510.000.
Hashimoto. Takeji; Okumoto, Kiyohumi; and Andoh, Masayasu, to
Dainippon Screen Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Automatic knitting nee-
dle selection device. 4,393,670, CI. 66-75.200.
Hashimoto, Teiji; and Saito, Syuichiro. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Magnetically controlled shutter. 4.394.081. CI. 354-234.000.
Hattori. Tadashi; See —
Nishida. Minoru; Hattori. Tadashi; and Tanaka, Akira, 4,393.850,
CI. 123-536.000.
Hawley. Gil R.. to Phillips Petroleum Company. Polyolefin polymeri-
zation process and catalyst. 4,394,291, CI. 252-429.00B.
Haworth, Inc.; See—
Wisniewski, Joseph M., 4,394,001, CI. 248-542.000.
Hawrylo, Frank Z., to RCA Corporation. Light emitting device with a
continuous layer of copper covering the entire header. 4,394,679, CI.
357-81.000.
Hawthorne, V. T. Method of eliminating truck hunting in railway
trucks. 4,393,957, CI. 184-3.00R.
Hayama, Masashi; See —
Tamai, Kiminori; and Hayama, Masashi, 4,394.420, CI. 428-447.000.
Hayashi. Satoshi; See —
Miyake. Mikio; Kitoh, Shinya; and Hayashi. Satoshi, 4,394,494, CI.
526-301.000.
Hays, Dan A., to Xerox Corporation. Development process and appara-
tus. 4,394,429. CI. 430-102.000.
Hazeltine. Cynthia, executor; See —
Helda. Robert W., deceased; Hazeltine, Cynthia, executor; and
Liaw, H. Ming, 4,394,352, CI. 422-232.000.
Hazelwood Enterprises Limited; See —
Cole, Denis B.; and Trethewy, Derek C. 4.393.640. CI. 53-69.000.
Heckethorn. John E.; and Whittle. Danny J., to Heckethorn Manufac-
turing Company. U-Bolt clamp with tubular reinforcing means.
4.393.559. CI. 24-277.000.
Heckethorn Manufacturing Company: See —
Heckethorn. John E.; and Whittle. Danny J.. 4,393,559, CI.
24-277.000.
Hein. Norman W., Jr.; See —
Peterson, Marvin L.; Hein, Norman W., Jr.; and Oertle, Donald H.,
4,394,577. CI. 250-372.000.
Heintges. Siegfried; Strauss. Werner; and Weiffen. Karl-Heinz, to
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG. Control device for a rotary valve-
controlled jigging machine. 4.394.260, CI. 209-500.000.
Hejiesen. Christian; See —
Berthelsen. Ernst R.; and Hejiesen, Christian, 4,394,207. CI.
156-578.000.
Helda. Robert W.. deceased; by Hazeltine, Cynthia, executor; and
Liaw, H. Ming, to Motorola, Inc. Melt recharge apparatus. 4,394,352,
CI. 422-232.000.
Hellemaa, Heikki; See —
Samuel. Olof; and Hellemaa. Heikki. 4,393.832, CI. 123-327.000.
Hellemans, Julianus J.; See—
Plessers. Hendrik S.; and Hellemans, Julianus J., 4.393.642, CI.
53-266.00R.
Heller. Kenneth S.; See—
Thimons, Edward D.; Heller, Kenneth S.; McCoy, John F., Ill; and
Whillier, Austin, 4,394,142, CI. 55-242.000.
Hellouin de Cenival, Bruno: See —
Cadars. Patrick; and Hellouin de Cenival, Bruno, 4,394,141, CI.
55-195.000.
Helm, Dieter: See —
Hartl, Roland; and Helm. Dieter, 4.394,452, CI. 436-66.000.
Hempel. Gerd; See—
Bohnenkamp. Wulf; and Hempel, Gerd, 4,393,658, CI. 60-657.000.
Hennessy Industries, Inc.; See —
Leeper, Charles G.. 4,393,914, CI. 157-1.200.
Hepburn, Derek R.; See —
Hydes. Paul C; and Hepburn. Derek R. 4.394.319, CI. 260-
429.00R.
Herb. Philip J. to Thomas & Belts Corporation. Folded head cable tie
and methods for making and using the same. 4,393,548, CI. 24-16.0PB.
Herbrand, Josef; See —
Schimion, Werner; and Herbrand, Josef, 4.394,264, CI. 210-222.000.
Hercofina: See —
Millick, William H., Ill, 4,394,286, CI. 252-182.000.
Hertel, James E., to Weyerhaeuser Company. Composite wood article
and method of manufacture. 4,394.409, CI. 428-36.000.
Hertzog, Russel C; See — ^^
Grau, James A.; and Hertzog, Russel C, 4,394,574, CI. 250-262.000.
Herwegh, Karl J.; and Modderkolk, Rutger, to Nederiandse Pillo-Pak
Maatschappij B.V. Fastener for sheet material. 4,393,558, CI. 24-
230.00R.
Hess, George M.; and Zils, James A., to Russell. Burdsall & Ward
Corporation. Roller side bearing mounting system and method.
4.393,787, CI. 105-199.0CB.
Hewlett-Packard Company: See —
Severson, Eugene K., 4,394,682, CI. 358-73.000.
Heyden, Gunter, to Winkler & Dunnebier Maschinenfabrik und Eisen-
giesserei GmbH & Co. KG. Cutting roll for producing shaped inner
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 15
and outer cuts and a method for making same. 4,393.738, CI
83-663.000.
Heymer, Gero: See —
Maurer, Alexander; Adrian, Renate; Panter, Herbert; Heymer.
Gero; and Nolker, Dieter. 4,394,358, CI. 423-305.000.
Hibino, Masahiro; See —
Shima. Kenji; and Hibino, Masahiro, 4,394,536. CI. 179-l.OOG.
Shima, Kenji; and Hibino. Masahiro, 4.394.537, Q. 179-l.OOG.
Hidano, Yoichi: See —
Suzuki, Yoshihisa; Kaizuka, Takanoli; Hanyu, Yoshiaki; Otake,
Mituyoshi; and Hidano, Yoichi, 4,394,404, CI. 427-48.000.
Higuera, Robert S.; and Ryan. John F., to Northern Telecom. Inc.
Tiltable support bracket for slidably supporting quartz support tubes
for semiconductor wafer processing boards, and processing apparatus
embodying such brackets. 4,394,123, CI. 432-253.000.
Hildebrandt, Christian, to Volkswagen werk Aktiengesellschaft. Passive
safety belt arrangement. 4,394,036, CI. 280-804.000.
Hilker, George D., to Phelps Dodge Industries, Inc. Apparatus for
manufacturing magnet wire. 4,393,809, CI. 118-620.000.
Hilker, George D., to Phelps Dodge Industries, Inc. Magnet wire.
4.394,417, CI. 428-383.000.
Hill, Beriie R.: See-
Wang, Kenneth Y.; and Hill, Beriie R., 4,394.208, CI. 156-580.100.
Hillmer, Adolf; See-
Dull, Hans J.; and Hillmer, Adolf, 4.393,786, CI. 104-141.000.
Hilti Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Lutze, Uwe; Scholz, Dieter; and Brennsteiner. Ernst. 4,393,947. CI.
175-323.000.
Hinch, Barry: See —
Nappholz, Tibor A.; Hinch. Barry; and Shaw, David B., 4,393,874.
CI. 128-419.0PT.
Hinojosa. Alberto L., to Daniel Industries Inc. High temperature valve
stem packing with coiled graphite seal rings. 4,394,023, CI.
277-124.000.
Hirai, Shinichiro; See —
Hussain, Anwar A.; Hirai, Shinichiro; and Bawarshi, Rjma,
4,394,390, CI. 424-330.000.
Hirai, Tadaaki; See —
Tsukada, Toshihisa; Takasaki, Yukio; Hirai, Tadaaki; Baji, Toru;
Yamamoto, Hideaki; Tanaka, Yasuo; Maruyama, Eiichi; and
Ishioka, Sachio, 4.394,749, CI. 365-106.000.
Hiraku, Imaizumi; and Tadashi, Mitsui, to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd.
Structure of a transformer. 4,394,636, CI. 336-172.000.
Hirano. Masachika; See —
Kirino, Osamu; Hirano, Masachika; Takeda. Hisami; and Kato,
ToshiitJ, 4,394,379, CI. 424-211.000.
Hirao, Sumio; See —
Kishida, Katsuhiro; Mekuchi, Yutaka; Hirao, Sumio; and Date,
Hirohiko, 4,394,560, CI. 219-1 37.0WM.
Hirko, Richard G.; Ju, Kochan; and Sanders, Ian L., to International
Business Machines Corporation. Swap gate for ion-implanted con-
tiguous-disk bubble devices. 4,394,746, CI. 365-36.000.
Hirosawa, Katsu, to Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho. Hydraulic
excavator. 4,393,607, CI. 37-103.000.
Hitachi, Ltd.; See—
Asahi, Naotatsu; Yamaguchi, Sizuka; and Terakado, Katsuyoshi,
4,394,234, CI. 204-164.000.
Homma, Yoshio; Tsunekawa, Sukeyoshi; Morisaki, Hiroshi; and
Harada, Seiki, 4,394.245, CI. 204-298.000.
Nakatsu, Yoshinobu, 4.394,568. CI. 235-475.000.
Sakai, Masao. 4,393.681, CI. 72-329.000.
Sato, Kanemasa; Ueno, Sadayasu; and Miya, Kazuhiko, 4,393,697,
CI. 73-118.000.
Suzuki, Yoshihisa; Kaizuka, Takanoli; Hanyu, Yoshiaki; Otake,
Mituyoshi; and Hidano, Yoichi, 4,394,404. CI. 427-48.000.
Takahashi, Toru; and Ueno, Sadayasu. 4,393.720. CI. 73-861.050.
Tsukada, Toshihisa; Takasaki. Yukio; Hirai, Tadaaki; Baji, Toru;
Yamamoto, Hideaki; Tanaka, Yasuo; Maruyama, Eiichi; and
Ishioka, Sachio, 4,394,749. CI. 365-106.000.
Wada. Yasuo; Usui. Hiroo; Ohkura. Makoto; Miyao. Masanobu;
Tamura, Masao; and Tokuyama, Takashi, 4,394,191. CI.
148-33.100.
Hitachi Medical Corporation; See—
Tanaka, Eiichi; Nohara, Norimasa; Murayama. Hideo; Ishimatsu.
Kenji; Ogushi, Akira; and Takami, Katsumi, 4,394,576. CI.
250-366.000.
Hitachi Metals, Ltd.: See—
Inoue, Akira, 4,394,030, CI. 280-434.000.
Hobes, Victor J.; and Payer, Wolfgang, to Ruhechemie Aktiengesell-
schaft. Saponification of ethylene copolymers suspended in ketone.
4,394,483, CI. 525-60.000.
Hodel, Eugenio D. Liner for a water bed. 4,393,531, CI. 5-451.000.
Hodge, John R. Land forming and earth moving equipment. 4,393,608,
CI. 37-124.000.
Hodshire, Vincent B. Fishing apparatus. 4,393,615, CI. 43-15.000.
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Dennhardt, Werner, 4,394,085, CI. 355-3.00R.
Fabian. Klaus, 4,393,700, CI. 73-150.00A.
Fuchs, Hermann; and Filzinger, Klaus, 4,394,310. CI. 260-162.000.
Maurer. Alexander; Adrian, Renate; Panter, Herbert; Heymer,
Gero; and Nolker, Dieter, 4.394,358, CI. 423-305.000.
Schrodter, Klaus; and Lehr, Klaus, 4,394,360, CI. 423-317.000.
Springer, Hartmut, 4,394.129. CI. 8-543.000.
Wasel-Nielen, Horst-Dieter; Maurer, Alexander; and Adrian, Re-
nate, 4,394,359. CI. 423-305.000.
Hoeffken, Russell W.; See—
Wiese, John M.; and HoeflVen, Russell W., 4,394,111. CI.
417-360.000.
Hofer, Gerald; See —
Eheim. Franz; and Hofer. Gerald. 4.393.835, CI. 123-357.000.
Hoff, Michael H., to NL Industries, Inc. Defoamers for aqueous liquids
containing soluble zinc salts. 4,394,273, CI. 252-8.55R
Hoffman, Dwight K., to Dow Chemical Company, The Addition
polymerizable adduct of a polymeric monoahl and an unsaturated
isocyanate. 4,394,491, CI. 525-452.000.
Hoffman, George A.; See —
Tryber, Robert E.; and Hoffman, George A., 4,394.608. CI.
318-578.000.
Hoffman. James M., Jr.; and Lux. Richard A., to Xerox Corporation
Particle containment apparatus. 4.394.086, CI. 355-3.00R.
Hoffman. John P.. to Caterpillar Tractor Co. Power supply circuit.
4.394,723, CI. 363-87.000.
Hoffman, Myron A.; See-
Werner, Richard W.; and Hoffman, Myron A.. 4,394,344, CI.
376-146.000.
Hoffman, Ronald E.; and Freed. William K., to Goodyear Tire &
Rubber Company. The. Collapsible scriber assembly. 4.393.594, CI
33-203.160.
Hoffman, Roy L.; Houdek, Merie E.; Loen, Larry W.; and Soltis, Frank
G., to International Business Machines Corporation Multi-processor
task dispatching apparatus 4,394.727, CI. 364-200 000.
Hoffmann, Gerhard, to Daimler-Benz Aktiengesellschaft. Electrode for
an electrochemical metal machine process. 4,394,243, CI. 204-284.000.
Hoffmann-La Roche Inc.: See —
Trybulski, Eugene J.. 4.394.311, CI. 260-239.0BB.
Hofmann-Cerfontaine, Hellmut W., to Porst, Hannsheinz Identification
device. 4,394,654, CI. 340-825.340.
Hogenson, Raymond A., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
Company. Sheet feeder. 4.394.010. CI. 271-22.000.
Hokushin Industries Corporation: See —
Tarumi. Noriyoshi; Tsuchiya. Hiroshi; Kokiso. Masakazu; and
Ohta, Hiroaki, 4,394,340, CI 264-219.000.
Holbrook, Walter R.; See—
Apgar, Waldo D.; Davis, Charles L.; Emery, Loring D., Jr.; Es-
seluhn, Werner F.; and Holbrook. Walter R.. 4.394.602. CI
315-71.000.
Holden, Tom; See-
Epstein, Fred; and Holden, Tom, 4,394,562, CI. 219-306.000.
Hollandse Signaalapparaten B.V.; See—
Gellekink, Bernard, 4,394,659, CI 343-16.00M
Holmgren, Frank E. Foot operated vehicle. 4,394,029, CI 280-11 230.
Holz, Wilhelm; Lukaszewicz, Helmut; and Gregor. Karl, to Ruhrkohle
Aktiengesellschaft; and Gewerkschaft Schalker Eisenhutte. Appara-
tus for servicing coke ovens. 4,394,217, CI. 202-227.000.
Holzle, Gerd; Reinert, Gerhard; and Polony, Rudolf, to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation. Process for bleaching textiles and for combating micro-
organisms with sulfonated phthalocyanine of aluminum or zinc and
containing halogen or cyano substituents as photoactivator.
4,394,125, CI. 8-103.000.
Homma, Yoshio; Tsunekawa, Sukeyoshi; Morisaki, Hiroshi; and
Harada, Seiki, to Hitachi, Ltd. Sputtering apparatus. 4,394.245. CI.
204-298.000.
Honda. Akira. to International Rectifier Corp. Japan Ltd. Field effect
transistor circuit arrangement. 4.394,590, CI. 307-584.000.
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Okabe, Yousuke; and Shoji, Osamu, 4,394,331, CI. 261-I8.00B.
Honda Motor Co., Ltd.; See—
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei,
4.393.842, CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei.
4.393.843. CI. 123-440.000.
Honeywell Inc.; See —
Clark, John L., 4,394,761, CI. 371-8.000.
Erickson, Roger D., 4,394,671, CI. 346-155.000
Horlacher, Wilhelm H., 4,394.097. CI. 403-360.000.
Hu. Chi P.. 4,394,632, CI. 333-218.000.
Jurisson, Jaan, 4,394,571, CI. 250-216.000.
Kasprzyk, Donald J., 4.394,708, CI. 361-399.000.
Kopp, Gerald F., 4,394.665. CI. 346-76.00R.
Honeywell Information Systems Inc.; See —
Long. Nicholas R.; Peisel. William E.; Ryan. Joseph L.; and Wat-
kins. Richard R.. 4,394,650, CI. 340-728.000.
Honma, Juri: See —
Amano, Toshio; Nagai, Kunio; and Honma, Juri, 4,394,691, CI.
358-194.100.
Horey, Leonard I.; See —
Dunn, William H.; Horey, Leonard I.; and Kurland, Marvin,
4,393,796, CI. 112-158.00E.
Horie, Yoshihiro: See—
Hanamoto, Hiroyuki; and Horie, Yoshihiro, 4,394,088, CI. 355-
14.00R.
Horiacher, Wilhelm H., to Honeywell, Inc. Retaining apparatus.
4,394,097, CI. 403-360.000.
Horodysky, Andrew G.; and Kaminski, Joan M., to Mobil Oil Corpora-
tion. Friction reducing additives and compositions thereof. 4,394,278,
CI. 252-46.300.
Horstmann. Winfried, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Method and system for
correcting time base errors in broadband signals stored in or transmit-
ted through a plurality of narrow-band channels. 4,394.686. CI.
358-134.000.
PI 16
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Hortnagel, Franz, to R. Stahl GmbH & Co., Firma. Suspended track for
monorail suspended trolleys. 4.393,785. CI. 104-110.000.
Hosel. Fritz, to Trutzschler GmbH & Co. KG. Method and apparatus
for the output control in a carding machine. 4,393,547. CI. 19-105.000.
Hospal-Sodip, S.A.: See—
Pusineri. Christian; and Goletto, Jean, 4,394.462, CI. 521-137.000.
Houdek. Merle E.: See-
Hoffman, Roy L.; Houdek, Merle E.; Loen, Larry W.; and Soltis,
Frank G., 4,394,727. CI. 364-200.000.
Inagaki. Mitsukane: See—
Kono, Hiroya; Hasegawa, Jun; Inagaki. Mitsukane; and Kobayashi,
Hisao. 4.393.966, CI. 192-56.00R.
Inagaki, Osamu: See —
Kato, Hiroshi; Ato, Hisataka; Inagaki, Osamu; and Matsuo, Hiroshi,
4,394,666, CI. 346-82.000.
Inayama, Takayuki: See—
Kawaguchi, Hideo; Inayama, Takayuki; Takimoto, Masaaki; and
Ono, Yoshihiro, 4,394,441, CI. 430-524.000.
Hough, Louis E.; and De Vigili, Walter J. Air deflection assembly for inco Limited: See-
vehicle sunroofs. 4,393,754. CI. 98-2.140
Hough, Louis E.; De Vigili, Walter J.; and Shifllett, David C. Remov-
able sunroof for vehicles. 4,394,044. CI. 296-218.000.
Houston. John M.; and Whetten, Nathan R., to General Electnc Com-
pany. High pressure, high resolution xenon x-ray detector array.
4.394.578. CI. 250-374.000.
Hsu. Ed C: See-
Temple. Chester S.; and Hsu. Ed C. 4.394,475, CI. 524-262.000.
Hu, Chi P., to Honeywell Inc. Millimeter-wave odd harmonic fre-
quency multiplier. 4.394,632. CI. 333-218.000.
Huang. Ho-Chung: See-
Kumar. Mahesh; Menna, Raymond J.; and Huang, Ho-Chung,
4,394.629, CI. 333-109.000.
Huber, Peter; August. Peter; Lampelzammer, Helga; and Primas, Willi,
to Wacker-Chemie GmbH. Organic fibers having improved slip
properties. 4,394.518, CI. 556-424.000.
Huffman, William A.: See-
Brown, Harvey A.; and Huffman. William A.. 4.394,070, CI.
350-349.000.
Hughes Aircraft Company: See-
Lull, John M., 4,394,769, CI. 377-116.000.
Hujsak, Edward J.; and Stocker, Hans M.. to General Dynamics Corpo-
ration/Convair Div. Hinge for deployable structures self locking
hinge. 4.393,541. CI. 16-297.000.
Humble, David R.; Weaver, Jon N.; Gentzler, David L.; Eskandry,
Ezra D.; and Lamanna, Peter J., to Sensormatic Electronics Corpora-
tion. Electrical surveillance apparatus with moveable antenna ele-
ments. 4.394,645. CI. 340-572.000.
Hussain, Anwar A.; Hirai, Shinichiro; and Bawarshi, Rima, to Univer-
sity of Kentucky Research Foundation. Nasal dosage forms of pro-
pranol. 4.394.390. CI. 424-330.000.
Hutcheson. James L., to Reynolds Metals Company. Method for heat
sealmg. 4.394,204, CI. 156-275.100.
Hutt, Peter R.; and Moyce, John J. Apparatus for decoding digital
information processed for inclusion in wide band T.V. video signal.
4.394.687. CI. 358-147.000.
Hyde, Robert L., to TRW Inc. Process timing apparatus. 4,394.090, CI.
368-121.000.
Hydes. Paul C; and Hepburn, Derek R . to Johnson Matthey Public
Limited Company. Co-ordination compound of platinum. 4,394,319,
CI. 26O-429.0OR.
I/O Corporation: See —
Suchoff. Michael A.; Doyle. Hollv T.; and Doyle. Robert O..
4.394.649. CI. 340-711.000.
Ida. Yoshio. to Tsudakoma Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Weft feeler unit
for a fiuid-jet loom. 4.393.903, CI. 139-370.200.
Ideal Toy Corporation: See —
Orbanes. Philip; and Cooper. Julius. 4,394,018. CI. 273-237.000.
Igarashi, Ryokichi: See—
Tsuji, Tadashi; and Igarashi, Ryokichi. 4.393.899. CI. 138-89.000.
Igarashi. Taenji: See—
Shima. Michitsune; Kihara. Shiso; Omichi. Takeo; Igarashi. Taenji;
and Mangetsu. Kenji. 4.393,920, CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Igata, Kouichi; and Kobayashi, Masaaki, to Matsushita Electric Indus-
trial Co., Ltd. Recording time mode detector. 4,394,701. CI.
360-137.000.
IHC Holland N.V.: See—
de Nachtegaal. Jakob. 4.394.041. CI. 294-181.00R.
van Drimmelen. Nicolaas J.; Barneveld Binkhuysen. James P.; van
Renssen, Johan; and Verboom, Pieter, 4,394,265, CI. 210-242.300.
lida, Hitoshi; and King, Pay-Shin, to Hamamatsu Systems, Inc. Video
system having an adjustable digital gamma correction for contrast
enhancement. 4,394,688, CI. 358-160.000.
Ikeda, Masami: See —
Sugitani, Hiroshi; Matsuda. Hiroto; Kimura. Koichi; and Ikeda.
Masami. 4.394,670. CI. 346-140.00R.
Ikeguchi, Shigehiko; and Tanaka. Kouzi. to Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd.;
and Tokyo Sanyo Electric Co. Ltd. Tuning control apparatus of
receiver. 4,394,778, CI. 455-182.000.
Illis, Alexander: See—
Ettel, Victor A.; Devuyst. Eric A.; and Illis, Alexander, 4,394,366,
CI. 423-493.000.
Imai, Kazuo, to Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corp. Semicon-
ductor devices and method of manufacturing the same. 4,393,577. CI.
29-576.00B.
Imanishi, Shozo. to Aida Engineering. Ltd. Feed bar driving apparatus
for a transfer press. 4.393.682. CI. 72-405.000.
IMI (Tami) Institute for Research & Development Ltd.: See—
Ravey, Manny. 4.394,306, CI. 252-609.000.
Imperial Chemical Industries PLC: See —
Balasubramanyan, Sugavanam; and Shephard, Margaret C,
4,394,380, CI. 424-269.000.
de Fraine, Paul; Clough, John M.; and Worthington, Paul A.,
4.394,151, CI. 71-76.000.
Ettel, Victor A.; Devuyst. Eric A.; and Illis, Alexander, 4,394,366,
CI. 423-493.000.
Industrial Engineering and Equipment Incorporated: See —
Epstein, Fred; and Holden, Tom, 4.394,562, CI. 219-306.000.
Ing. C. Olivetti & C, S.p.A.: See-
Brescia, Riccardo, 4,394,668. CI. 346-139.00R.
Conta, Renato, 4.393,591. CI. 33-l.OOL.
Inland Steel Company: See —
Rastogi. Prabhat K., 4.394.192. CI. 148-120.000.
Inoue, Akira, to Hitachi Metals, Ltd. King pin connecting mechanism.
4,394,030, CI. 280-434.000.
Inoue, Eiichi: See —
Shimizu, Isamu; Shirai, Shigeru; and Inoue, Eiichi, 4,394,425, CI.
430-65.000.
Shimizu, Isamu; Shirai, Shigeru; and Inoue, Eiichi, 4,394,426, CI.
430-65.000.
Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated: See —
Inoue, Kiyoshi. 4,394,558, CI. 219-69,00W.
Inoue, Kiyoshi, to Inoue-Japax Research Incorporated. EDM Method
of machining workpieces with a controlled crater configuration.
4,394,558, CI. 219-69.00W.
Inoue, Takashi: See —
Satoh, Shingo; Inoue, Takashi; Naki, Minora; and Kawauchi, Yuji,
4.394,165, CI. 75-60.000.
Inoue, Tsuyoshi: See —
Kaneko, Koji; Fuchino, Yoshihide; and Inoue, Tsuyoshi, 4.394,169,
CI. 75-128.00A.
Institut Francais du Petrole: See —
Renon, Henri; and Richon, Dominique, 4,393,689, CI. 73-64.200.
Institute po Metaloznanie i Technologia na Metalite: See —
Vutov, Stancho H.; and Slavov, Rashko R., 4,393,916, CI.
164-119.000.
Interconnection Technology, Inc.: See —
Conley, Larry R.. 4.394.71 1. CI. 361-408.000.
International Business Machines Corporation: See —
Bergendahl. Albert S.; Hakey. Mark C; and Wilson, John P.,
4,394,437, CI. 430-312.000.
Boudon, Gerard; Denis, Bernard; de Grivel, Virginie; and Mollier,
Pierre, 4,394,752, CI. 365-227.000.
Cuomo, Jerome J.; Landon, Alfred J.; and Wang, Han C,
4,393,967, CI. 192-84.00E.
Flusche, Frederick O.; Gustafson, Richard N.; and McGilvray,
Bruce L., 4,394,731, CI. 364-200.000.
Gardiner, James R; Makarewicz, Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and
Shepard. Joseph F.. 4.394.406. CI. 427-86.000.
Gaudenzi, Gene J.. 4,394.588. CI. 307-443.000,
Grandguillot. Michel J.; Mollier. Pierre B.; and Nuez, Jean-Paul J.,
4,394,747, CI. 365-104.000.
Hirko. Richard G.; Ju. Kochan; and Sanders, Ian L., 4,394,746, CI.
365-36.000.
Hoffman, Roy L.; Houdek, Merle E.; Loen, Larry W.; and Soltis,
Frank G., 4,394,727, CI. 364-200.000.
Landon, Alfred J.; Pennebaker, William B.; and Wang, Han C,
4,393.769. CI. 101-93.300.
Norgren. Kent S.; and Vogelsberg, Robert E., 4,394.734, CI.
364-200.000.
Ottman. John C; and Shen. John C. S., 4.393,628, CI. 51-281.0SF.
Rohen, James E., 4,394,621, CI. 324-163.000.
Shirley, Robert E., 4,394.693. CI. 358-298.000.
Thompson. Richard D.; Tsaur, Boryeu; and Tu, King-Ning,
4,3.94,673, CI. 357-15.000.
International Flavors & Fragrances Inc.; See—
Boden, Richard M., 4,394,285, CI. 252-174.110.
International Playtex, Inc.: See —
O'Boyle, Dolores; and Shonk, Phyllis, 4,393,875, CI. 128-425.000.
International Power Technology, Inc.: See —
Cheng, Dah Yu, 4.393,649. CI. 60-39.050.
International Rectifier Corp. Japan Ltd.: See-
Honda, Akira, 4,394,590, CI. 307-584.000.
Interox Chemicals Ltd.: See —
Hardy. Francis R. F.; and Griffiths, Martin G., 4,394,348, CI.
420-528.000.
Mounsey, Diana M.; and Mobbs, David B., 4,394,357, CI.
423-140.000.
Ipanema Company; See —
Kemper, Yves J., 4,393,964, CI. 192-.044.
Ipco Corporation: See —
Weissman. Bernard, 4,393,539, CI. 16-114.00R.
Irie, Yutaka; Nagata, Kenzo; and Ito, Hideo, to Minolta Camera Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Mechanical arrangement for controlling electrophoto-
graphic apparatus. 4,394.087, CI. 355-14.0OE.
Irwin, Greg W.: See — ^^^^
Irwin, Warren W.; and Irwin. Greg W., 4,394,046, CI. 297-132.000.
Imran Mir and Kolenik, Steve, to Mirowski. Mieczyslaw. Heart rate Irwin, Warren W.; and Irwin. Greg W. Convertible rocker and high
detector. 4,393,877, CI. 128-705.000. chair. 4,394,046, CI. 297-132.000
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 17
Ishidoshiro, Hiroshi: See —
Sando, Yoshikazu; and Ishidoshiro, Hiroshi, 4,393,532, CI.
8-149.100.
Ishii, Fumio; and Kishi. Kenichi. to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co.,
Ltd. Method for manufacturing p- and o-benzoquinone derivatives.
4,394.315, CI. 260-396.00R.
Ishii, Toshiaki, to Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Thyristor power
converter with switched impedance. 4,394,721, CI. 363-44.000.
Ishikawa, Ken, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Laser
processing apparatus. 4,394,764, CI. 372-38.000.
Ishikawa, Tadashi: See —
Kamimae, Hiroshi; and Ishikawa, Tadashi, 4,394,376, CI.
424-150.000.
Ishimatsu, Kenji: See —
Tanaka. Eiichi; Nohara, Norimasa; Murayama, Hideo; Ishimatsu,
Kenji; Ogushi. Akira; and Takami, Katsumi, 4,394,576, CI.
250-366.000.
Ishioka, Sachio; See —
Tsukada. Toshihisa; Takasaki. Yukio; Hirai. Tadaaki; Baji. Toru;
Yamamoto. Hideaki; Tanaka. Yasuo; Maruyama. Eiichi; and
Ishioka. Sachio, 4,394,749, CI. 365-106.000.
Ishizuka, Yutaka, to Diesel Kiki Co., Ltd. Swash-plate type compressor
4,394,110, CI. 417-269.000.
Isogai, Hideaki; and Takahashi, Yukio, to Fujitsu Limited. Decoder
circuit. 4,394,657, CI. 340-825.930.
Italtel Societa Italiana Telecomunicazioni S.p.A.: See —
Delle Donne, Roberto, 4,394.759. CI. 370-110.100.
Donne, Roberto D., 4,394,758. CI. 370-105.000.
Itaya. Eiji: See —
Kurihara, Hiroshi; Takenaka. Sadao; and Itaya, Eiji, 4,394,626. CI.
331-12.000.
Ito, Hajime. Apparatus for dyeing fiber by utilizing microwaves.
4.393.671. CI. 68-5.00C.
Ito. Hideo; See —
Irie. Yutaka; Nagata. Kenzo; and Ito. Hideo, 4,394,087, CI. 355-
I4.00E.
Ito, Tadahiko; Arao, Toshio; Satoh, Nobuo; and Harada, Hiroshi, to
Japan Synthetic Rubber Co., Ltd. Stabilized polyisoprene composi-
tion. 4,394,472, CI. 524-100.000.
ITT Industries, Inc.; See —
Wagner. Wilfried, 4,393,750, CI. 91-376.00R.
Iwai, Hiroshi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of
etching, refilling and etching dielectric grooves for isolating micron
size device regions. 4,394,196, CI. 148-187.000.
Iwata, Hiroshi; See —
Yoshino, Tsunemi; Kashihara, Toshilsugu; Iwata, Hiroshi; and
Morioka, Akitoshi, 4,394,077, CI. 354-25.000.
Izumi, Masao; Yoshida, Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa, Yukio, to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd.; and Tokyo Sokuhan Co., Ltd. Fluid outlet struc-
ture. 4,393,897, CI. 137-831.000.
Izumi, Masao; Yoshida, Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa, Yukio, to Nissan
Motor Co., Ltd. Fluid outlet device and a method of controlling fluid
now through a nozzle. 4,393,898, CI. 137-831.000.
J T Thorpe Company: See —
Byrd, Carlisle O., Jr., 4,393,569, CI. 29-460.000.
J. Wagner GmbH; See —
Kille, Ewald; and Zimmermann, Guido, 4,393,993, CI. 239-332.000.
Jackson, Kenneth A.; and Kimerling, Lionel C, to Bell Telephone
Laboratories, Incorporated. Solidification of molten materials.
4,394,183, CI. 148-1.500.
Jackson, Robert K.; See—
McDermott, Thomas R.; and Jackson, Robert K., 4,393,634, CI.
52-309.100.
Jacobi. Nathan: See —
Barmatz, Martin B.; Trinh. Eugene H.; Wang. Taylor G.; Elleman.
Daniel D.; and Jacobi. Nathan. 4.393.708. CI. 73-505.000.
Jacobs. Allen W. Demand inhaler for oral administration of tobacco.
tobacco-like, or other substances. 4.393.884. CI. 131-273.000.
Jacobs. Wilson E. Sunflower seed dehulling machine. 4,393,762, CI.
99-609.000.
Jacobsen, Kenneth J.; and Moshofsky, Jerome F. Stove pipe heat
extractor. 4,393,925, CI. 165-122.000.
Jacquard, Paul: See —
Picard, Jean-Francois; and Jacquard, Paul, 4,393,597, CI. 33-
275.0OG.
Jadwin, Thcmias A.; and Storey, Robert C, to Eastman Kodak Com-
pany. Electrophotographic dry toner and developer compositions.
4,394,430, CI. 430-110.000.
Jaecklin, Andre, to BBC Brown, Boveri & Company, Limited. Thy-
ristor for low-loss triggering of short impulses with Schottky contact
to contrcJ gate electrode. 4,394,677, CI. 357-38.000.
Jager, Berend; Brink, Andries; and Kleynjan, Comelis, to Sasol One
(Proprietary) Limited. Apparatus for converting coal into liquid
products. 4,394,215, CI. 196-14.520.
Jager, Horst; Plattner, Eric; Bersier, Jacques; and Comninellis, Christos,
to Ciba-Geigy AG. Electrochemical process for the preparation of
benzanthrones and planar, polycyclic aromatic oxygen-containing
compounds. 4,394,227, CI. 204-73.00R.
James, David E.; See—
Puskas, Imre; and James, David E., 4,394,299, CI. 252-447,000.
. Janicki, Max; Liefke, Hans-Georg; Keil, Reinhart; and Geyer, Gerd, to
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz". Control provision
operation for printing machines. 4,394,609, CI. 318-603.000.
Janke, Elden W., to Teradyne, Inc. Drawer locking mechanism.
4.394.056, CI. 312-216.000.
Janome Sewing Machine Co. Ltd.: See —
Eguchi, Yasukata; Takenoya, Hideaki; and Sano, Yasuro, 4,393,794,
CI. 112-158.00E.
Makabe, Hachiro; Watanabe, Kazuo; Takenoya, Hideaki; Kume,
Toshiaki; and Kakmuma, Toshihide, 4,393,795, CI. 112-158.00E.
Japan Synthetic Rubber Co., Ltd.; See —
Ito, Tadahiko; Arao, Toshio; Satoh. Nobuo; and Harada. Hiroshi.
4.394.472, CI. 524-100.000.
Yasuta. Naoshi; Matsumura. Yoshio; and Kotani, Teizo, 4.394,402.
CI. 427-40.000.
JefTeries. Steven R. Bone graft material for osseous defects and method
of making same. 4.394.370. CI. 424-15.000.
Jeffras. Nathaniel B.; and Torgersen. Robert H., to Automation Indus-
tries. Inc. Sonic water jet nozzle. 4.393.991. CI. 239-102.000.
Jenkner. Herbert; Strang. Robert; and Adermann. Peter, to Chemische
Fabrik Kalk GmbH. Polypentabromostyrene. process for the produc-
tion and use. 4.394.484. CI. 525-72.000.
Jensen. Bernard: See—
McMahon, William; and Jensen, Bernard, 4,394,074, CI
351-206.000.
John Wyeth and Brother Limited: See —
Crossley, Roger, 4,394,509, CI. 546-339.000.
Johnson, David G.; See —
Crummer, Marvin R.; Gold, Kenneth S ; Johnson, David G.;
Vandermeyden, Tom R.; and Pelta, Edmond R.. 4,394.742, CI.
364-487.000.
See —
and Johnson, Gordon C. 4.394.295. CI. 252-
and Johnson. Marvin M.
and Tabler. Donald C.
CI. 260-
Cl.
CI.
Johnson. Gordon C:
Weinberg. Kurt
43I.OOC.
Johnson. Marvin M.; See —
Kukes. Semyon; Nowack. Gerhard P.;
4.394.255. CI. 585-667.000.
Nowack, Gerhard P.; Johnson, Marvin M.:
4,394,298, CI. 252-438.000.
Johnson Matthey Public Limited Company: See —
Hydes, Paul C; and Hepburn. Derek R., 4.394.319.
429.00R.
Johnson. Thomas A.; See —
Ford, Michael E.; and Johnson, Thomas A., 4,394,524,
564-479.000.
Johnson, Timothy L.; See —
Bukowski, Ronald G.; and Johnson, Timothy L., 4,394,262,
210-103.000.
Johnston, Daniel U.; and Shinkle. George A., to General Motors Cor-
poration. Piezoelectric knock sensor. 4.393.688, CI. 73-35.000.
Jolly, Frank H. Rotary engine. 4,393.828, CI. 123-203.000.
Jones, Carolyn R. Disposable garment shield and method of manufac-
ture. 4,393,521, CI. 2-56.000.
Jones, Raymond D.. to Til Corporation. Surge arrester assembly
4.394.704. CI. 361-119.000.
Josendal, Virgil A., to Union Oil Company of California. Method for
the enhanced recovery of oil and natural gas. 4.393.936. CI.
166-263.000.
Joyce. Ronald S.. to Calgon Carbon Corporation. Silver removal with
halogen impregnated activated carbon. 4.394.354. CI. 423-25.000.
Jozuka. Masao; See —
Asano. Kiyomitsu; Jozuka. Masao; and Kondo. Toshikatsu,
4,394,093. CI. 400-124.000.
Ju. Kochan: See —
Hirko. Richard G.; Ju. Kochan; and Sanders. Ian L.. 4.394.746. CI
365-36.000.
Jurisson. Jaan. to Honeywell Inc. Optically enhanced Schottky barrier
IR detector. 4.394.571. CI. 250-216.000.
Juzhnoe Proizvodstvennoe Obiedinenie Po Morskim Geologoraz-
vedochnym Rabotam "JUZHMORGEOLOGIA"; See—
Maiko. Viktor P.. 4.394.618. CI. 324-83.00D.
Kabel-und Metallwerke Gutehoffnungshutte AG; See —
Uhlmann. Otto; and Uhlmann. Klaus-Peter. 4,393.566. CI.
29-417.000.
Kabik. Irving; and Ringbloom. Vernon D.. to United States of America.
Navy. Cook-off resistant booster explosive 4.394.197, CI. 149-19.300.
Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha; See—
Shimbo, Masafumi. 4.393,574. CI 29-571,000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho; See—
Asami. Takayoshi; and Sonoi. Hidekazu. 4,393.924. CI. 165-104,120.
Kaneko. Koji; Fuchino, Yoshihide; and Inoue, Tsuyoshi, 4,394,169,
CI, 75-128.00A.
Kabushiki Kaisha Komatsu Seisakusho; See—
Furukawa, Hideo; Chikugo, Kazuo; and Otsuki, Yoichi. 4,393.823,
CI. 123-196.00M.
Hirosawa, Katsu, 4,393,607, CI. 37-103.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Meidensha; See—
Warabi, Junichi; Sakuma, Shinzo; Kawaguchi, Hidemi; and Koban.
Yukio. 4.394.554. CI. 200-l44,00B,
Kabushiki Kaisha Riken; See—
Wada. Masahiko; and Ueki. Masato. 4.393.981. CI. 221-289.000.
Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha; See—
Morozumi, Shinji. 4.394.586. CI. 377-105.000,
Kabushiki Kaisha Togo Seisakusho: See—
Kato. Yoshinori. 4.393.560. CI, 24-295,000.
Kaeding. Warren W.: See—
Chu. Chin C; and Kaeding. Warren _W.. 4.394.300. CI. 252-455.00Z.
Kaenniemi, Kaarina M. E.; See—
Makinen. Juho K.; and Kaenniemi, Kaarina M. E., 4,394,164, CI.
75-21.000.
PI 18
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Kahn, Alan R., to Meadox Instruments, Inc. Pressure monitoring
method and apparatus. 4,393,878, CI. 128-748.000.
Kaiser, Kenneth L.; and Shirley, William C. Panel edge gasket with
compressible sealing portion. 4,394,026, CI. 277-231.000.
Kaizuka, Takanoli: See —
Suzuki, Yoshihisa; Kaizuka, Takanoli; Hanyu, Yoshiaki; Otake,
Mituyoshi; and Hidano, Yoichi, 4,394.404. CI. 427-48.000.
Kaken Chemical Co., Ltd.: See—
Aoki, Yoshio, 4,394,144, CI. 55-281.000.
Kakihara, Yoshinobu: See —
Takeda, Mikio; Kakihara, Yoshinobu; Yoshida, Masaru; and
Nakata, Yukihiko, 4,394.601, CI. 313-509.000.
Kakinuma, Toshihide: See—
Makabe, Hachiro; Watanabe, Kazuo; Takenoya. Hideaki; Kume,
Toshiaki; and Kakinuma, Toshihide, 4,393,795, CI. n2-158.00E.
Kalopissis. Gregoire, to Societe Anonyme dite: L'Oreal. 5-Ureido-3-
thia hexanedioic acid. 4,394,520, CI. 562-557.000.
Kamachi, Hajime; Okumura, Jun; Naito, Takayuki; and Oka, Masahisa,
to Bristol-Myers Company. Cephalosporin derivatives. 4,394,503, CI.
544-25.000.
Kamata, Susumu; and Nagata, Wataru. to Shionogi & Co., Ltd. 5-
Fluorouracil derivatives. 4,394,505, CI. 544-91.000.
Kamemura, Yoshiki: See—
Tamura, Manabu; Kamemura, Yoshiki; and Handa, Masao,
4.393,677, CI. 72-97.000.
Kamimae, Hiroshi; and Ishikawa. Tadashi, to Nihon Nosan Kogyo
K.K. Method for preventing hypertriglyceridemia. 4,394.376, CI.
424-150.000.
Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; Kanai, Kenji; Nouchi, Norimoto; and Nomura,
Noboru, to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Thin-film mag-
netic head. 4,394,699, CI. 360-113.000.
Kaminski, Joan M.: See—
Horodysky, Andrew G.; and Kaminski, Joan M., 4,394,278, CI.
252-46.300.
Kammerlander, Karl, to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Process for moni-
toring analog and digital mobile radio connections. 4.394,760, CI.
370-111.000.
Kamyr, Inc.: See —
Richter, Johan C. F C; and Richter, Ole J., 4,394.267, CI.
210-331.000.
Kanai, Kenji: See—
Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; Kanai, Kenji; Nouchi, Norimoto; and No-
mura, Noboru, 4,394,699, CI. 360-113.000.
Kaneko, Koji; Fuchino, Yoshihide; and Inoue, Tsuyoshi, to Kabushiki
Kaisha Kobe Seiko Sho. High strength austenite steel having excel-
lent cold work hardenability. 4,394,169, CI. 75-128.00A.
Kaneko, Toshihisa, to Dai Nippon Insatsu Kabushiki Kaisha. Device
for washing blanket cylinder of rotary offset press. 4,393,778, CI.
101-425.000.
Kanno, Yoshimitsu: 5^e—
Yoshida, Kunio; Kotera, Hiroaki; Tsuda, Yukifumi; Kanno, Yo-
shimitsu; and Naka, Motohiko, 4,394,662, CI. 346-33.00R.
Kansai Electric Power Co., Inc., The: See—
Shima, Michitsune; Kihara, Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu, Kenji, 4,393,920, CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Kansas State University Research Foundation: See —
Suderman, Donald A., 4,393.791, CI. 111-34.000.
Karagoz, Berch Y., to Great Lakes Carbon Corporation. Graphitization
system method and apparatus. 4,394,766, CI. 373-120.000.
Karl Mengele & Sohne Maschinenfabrik und Eissengiesserei GmbH &
Co.: See—
Frick, Georg; Reiff. Harro; and Kirsch. Alois, 4,393,570, CI.
29-560.000.
Karl Schmidt GMBH: See—
Bickle, Wolfgang; Funke, Rolf; and Pfoh, Rolf, 4.394.275, CI.
252-12.000.
Karlicek, Robert F., Jr.: See-
Donnelly, Vincent M.; Flamm, Daniel L.; and Karlicek, Robert F.,
Jr., 4,394,237, CI. 204-192.00E.
Karreman, Jacob: See —
Acda, Petrus M.; and Karreman, Jacob, 4.394.343. CI. 264-296.000.
Kashihara. Toshitsugu: See —
Yoshino, Tsunemi; Kashihara, Toshitsugu; Iwata, Hiroshi; and
Morioka, Akitoshi, 4,394,077, CI. 354-25.000.
Kasper, George P., to Eastman Kodak Company. Electrographic
development apparatus and method having oscillating magnetic
cross-mixing. 4,393,810. CI. 118-657.000.
Kasprzyk, Donald J., to Honeywell Inc. Electronic thermostat with
protected circuitry. 4,394.708. CI. 361-399.000.
Kastelic. John R., to Celanese Corporation. Method for providing
particulates of liquid crystal polymers and particulates produced
therefrom. 4.394.498. CI. 528-193.000.
Kasugai, Syouji: See —
Kato, Masahisa; Kasugai, Syouji; and Gouda, Osamu, 4,393,801, CI.
112-282.000.
Kataoka, Ryuji, to Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd. System for controlling an air-fuel ratio. 4,393.839. CI.
123-440.000.
Kato. Hiroshi; Ato. Hisataka; Inagaki. Osamu; and Matsuo. Hiroshi, to
Amano Corporation. Time recorder. 4,394.666, CI. 346-82.000.
Kato, Kotero; and Sakurai, Tetsuma, to Nippon Telegraph & Tele-
phone Public Corporation. Method of manufacturing semiconductor
device provided with complementary semiconductor elements.
4,393.573. CI. 29-571.000.
Kato. Masahisa; Kasugai, Syouji; and Gouda, Osamu, to Mitsubishi
Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Sewing machine dust collector. 4.393.801,
CI. 112-282.000.
Kato. Toshiro: See—
Kirino. Osamu; Hirano. Masachika; Takeda, Hisami; and Kato.
Toshiro, 4,394,379, CI. 424-211.000.
Kato, Yoshinori, to Kabushiki Kaisha Togo Seisakusho. Clip for retain-
ing a windshield molding in an automobile. 4,393,560, CI. 24-295.000.
Kaufman, Gilbert T.; and Evans, Alfred, to Critter Getter, Inc. Trap
apparatus, and methods of fabricating and utilizing same. 4,393,616,
CI. 43-60.000.
Kaufman, Lance R. Power switching device having improved heat
dissipation means. 4,394,530. CI. 174-16.0HS.
Kawaguchi, Hidemi: See —
Warabi, Junichi; Sakuma, Shinzo; Kawaguchi, Hidemi; and Kobari.
Yukio, 4.394,554. CI. 200-144.00B.
Kawaguchi. Hideo; Inayama, Takayuki; Takimoto, Masaaki; and Ono,
Yoshihiro, to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd. Photographic sensitive
materials. 4,394,441, CI. 430-524.000. ~"
Kawai, Hisasi: See —
Kohama, Tokio; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi; and Egami,
Tsuneyuki, 4,393,702, CI. 73-204.000.
Kawai, Kiyoshi: See —
Yamada, Yasuharu; and Kawai, Kiyoshi, 4,394,292, CI. 252-
429.00B.
Kawamura, Kiyoshi: See —
Shiratsuchi, Masami; Shimizu, Noboru; Shigyo, Hiromichi;
Kyotani, Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura, Kiyoshi; Sato,
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura, Masahiko; Sawada, Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi, 4.394.382. CI. 424-283.000.
Kawata. Mitsuyasu; Umetsu, Noriharu; and Fukuto. Tetsuo R., to
University of California, Regents of the. N-Alkoxysulfenylcarba-
mates useful as insecticides. 4,394,383, CI. 424-285.000.
Kawauchi. Yuji: See —
Satoh. Shingo; Inoue, Takashi; Naki, Minoru; and Kawauchi, Yuji,
4,394,165, CI. 75-60.000.
Kaye, Wilbur I., to Beckman Instruments, Inc. Liquid crystal tuned
birefringent filter. 4,394,069, CI. 350-347.00E.
Keil, Reinhart: See —
Janicki, Max; Liefke, Hans-Georg; Keil, Reinhart; and Geyer,
Gerd, 4,394,609, CI. 318-603.000.
Keiper, Francis P., Jr.; and Kerns, John N., to Lear Siegler, Inc. Tele-
phone line holding circuit. 4,394,543, CI. 179-84.00R.
Kellar, David E.: See-
Barter, James A.; and Kellar, David E., 4,394,328. CI. 260-463.000.
Kelley, Clarence R., to C. C. Kelley & Sons. Two hole hydraulic
cushion valve. 4,393,751, CI. 91-408.000.
Kemper. Yves J., to Ipanema Company. Hybrid power system and
method for operating same. 4.393.964. CI. 192-044.
Kenan. Richard P.: See—
Verber, Carl M.; Kenan, Richard P.; and Ridgway, Richard,
4,394,060, CI. 350-96.130.
Kendall Company, The: See-
Taylor, Glenn N., 4,393,880, CI. 128-760.000.
Kennedy, James A., to William L. Bonnell Company, The. Scrap metal
recovery process. 4,394,166, CI. 75-65.00R.
Kenyon. S. Wayne; Geyer, Bernard H., Jr.; and Nelson, Conrad E., to
General Electric Company. Compensated directional coupler.
4,394,630. CI. 333-116.000.
Keogh. Michael J., to Union Carbide Corporation. Compositions of
alkylene-alkyl acrylate copolymers having improved flame retardant
properties. 4,394,471, CI. 524-92.000.
Kernforschungsanlage Julich Gesellschaft mit beschrankter Haftung:
See —
Divisek, Jiri; and Mergel, Jurgen, 4,394,244, CI. 204-295.000.
Golimowski, Jerzy; Sipos, Laszlo; and Valenta, Paul, 4,394,238, CI.
204-400.000.
Kernforschungszentrum Karlsruhe GmbH: See-
Schmidt, Curt, 4,393.714. CI. 73-718.000.
Kerns. John N.: See—
Keiper. Francis P.. Jr.; and Kerns. John N., 4,394,543. CI. 179-
84.00R.
Kerry, John C: See —
Copping, Leonard G.; Kerry, John C; Watkins. Thomas I.; Willis.
Robert J.; and Palmer, Bryan H., 4,394,387. CI. 424-300.000.
Kessler. Milton; and Ullman. Myron E.. Jr., to Kessler Products Co.,
Inc. Reusable container closure cap. 4,393,978, CI. 215-253.000.
Kessler Products Co., Inc.: See—
Kessler, Milton; and Ullman, Myron E., Jr., 4,393.978, CI.
215-253.000.
Keyes, Richard M.; and Schwitters, Stephen W., to Taylor Freezer
Company. Method and apparatus for producing sterile slush ice.
4,393.659, CI. 62-66.000.
Keyser. William L.; and Kinney. Diane S.. to Quaker Oats Company,
The. Low calorie table syrup product. 4,394,399, CI. 426-658.000.
Kihara, Shiso: See—
Shima, Michitsune; Kihara, Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu, Kenji, 4,393,920, CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Kille, Ewald; and Zimmermann, Guido, to J. Wagner GmbH. Spray
gun. 4,393,993, CI. 239-332.000.
Kim, Chan J.; and Koski, Ahti A., to Polysar Limited. Zinc peroxide
process. 4,394.488. CI. 524-432.000.
Kimerling, Lionel C: See —
Jackson, Kenneth A.; and Kimerling, Lionel C, 4,394.183, CI.
148-1.500.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 19
Kimura. Hirovuki; and Yamada. Tateo. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Winding device for camera. 4.394,080. CI. 354-173.000.
Kimura. Koichi: See—
Sugitani, Hiroshi; Matsuda. Hiroto; Kimura, Koichi: and Ikeda,
Masami, 4,394,670. CI. 346-140.00R.
Kimura. Tadatomo; and Noguchi, Takeshi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha. Three-phase induction motor. 4,394,596, CI.
310-184.000.
King, John M.: See—
deVries. Louis; and King. John M., 4,394,279, CI. 252-46.400.
King. Pay-Shin: See —
lida, Hitoshi; and King. Pay-Shin, 4,394,688, CI. 358-160.000.
Kinney. Diane S.: See —
Keyser. William L.; and Kinney. Diane S., 4,394,399. CI.
426-658.000.
Kirby. Donald W.: See—
Fallon, William H.; Schober, William R.; Neukirch. Edward O.;
and Kirby. Donald W . 4.394.61 1. CI. 320-21.000.
Kirino, Osamu; Hirano. Masachika; Takeda, Hisami; and Kato, Toshiro,
to Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited. Amide phosphorothiolate
derivatives and their use as pesticides. 4,394,379, CI. 424-21 1.000.
Kirsch, Alois: See —
Frick, Georg; Reiff. Harro; and Kirsch, Alois, 4,393,570, CI.
29-560.000.
Kishi, Kenichi: See —
Ishii, Fumio; and Kishi, Kenichi, 4,394.315, CI. 260-396.0OR.
Kishi, Norimasa: See —
Suzuki, Tadashi; and Kishi, Norimasa, 4,393,732, CI. 74-866.000.
Kishida, Katsuhiro; Mekuchi, Yutaka; Hirao, Sumio; and Date,
Hirohiko, to Nissan Motor Company, Ltd. Covered electrode con-
taining zirconium for shielded metal arc welding. 4,394.560, CI.
219-137.0WM.
Kishie. Hidehiko: See —
Yamamoto. Hideomi; Watanabe, Haruzo; Kishie. Hidehiko; and
Nishihara, Toshio, 4,394,412, CI. 428-174.000.
Kiss, Gunter H., to Lignotock Verfahrenstechnik GmbH. Process and
apparatus for deburring moulded parts produced by pressing.
4,394.334. CI. 264-80.000.
Kistner, Herbert: See-
Sell. Rudolf; and Kistner, Herbert. 4,393.638, CI 52-704.000.
Kitamura. Yohji. Snail wire arrangement for yarn breakage detection in
ring frames. 4,393,647, CI. 57-81.000.
Kitoh, Shinya: See —
Miyake, Mikio; Kitoh, Shinya; and Hayashi, Satoshi, 4,394,494. CI.
526-301.000.
Kitzelmann, Dieter; and Deprez, Jacques, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft.
Electro-chemical sensor for the detection of reducing gases, in partic-
ular carbon monoxide, hydrazine and hydrogen in air. 4.394,239, CI.
204-414.000.
Kiwi, John: See —
Gratzel, Michael; and Kiwi, John, 4,394.293, CI. 252-430.000.
Klein. Gerald I., to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Microstrip circuit
with suspended substrate stripline regions embedded therein.
4,394,633, CI. 333-238.000.
Klein, Max, to Crane & Co., Inc., a part interest. Filter apparatus,
4,394,146, CI. 55-354.000.
Klein, Paul E. Adhesive-backed booklet for credit card transaction.
4,394,038, CI. 282-l.OOR.
Klein, Stewart E. 3-(Trimethoxysilyl) propyldidecylmethyl ammonium
salts and method of inhibiting growth of microorganisms therewith.
4,394,378, CI. 424-184.000.
Kleiner, Fredric; and Zemelman, Valery B., to General Foods Corpora-
tion. Quiescent formation of gasified ice product and process.
4,393,660, CI. 62-69.000.
Kleynjan, Comelis: See —
Jager, Berend; Brink, Andries; and Kleynjan, Cornelis, 4,394,215.
CI. 196-14.520.
Klockner-Humboldt-Deutz AG: See —
Fischer, Friedrich B.; and Moser, Gottfried, 4,393,824, CI. 123-
196.0AB.
Heintges, Siegfried; Strauss, Werner; and Weiffen, Karl-Heinz,
4,394,260, CI. 209-500.000.
Klomp, Edward D., to General Motors Corporation. Air bearing and
antifriction bearing assembly. 4,394,091, CI. 384-101.000.
Kloosterman, William A. Spring shielded safetv knife. 4,393,587, CI.
30-162.000.
Klopfenstein, King L.; and Connors, Robert H., to Triangle Package
Machinery Company. Tare weighing apparatus and method therefor.
4,393,950. CI. 177-108.000.
Klotz. Erhard: See-
Weiss. Hermann; Klotz. Erhard; Peemoller. Horst; Linde. Rolf; and
Mauser. Wilfried. 4.394.063. CI. 350-162.130.
Knell. Franz-Georg: See—
Reimpell. Uwe; Grof, Helmut; Knell, Franz-Georg; and Wamser,
Anton, 4J94,765, CI. 373-52.000.
Knigge, Robert A.: See-
Allen, James R.; Allen ' ihn D.; and Knigge, Robert A., 4,394,004,
CI. 254-204,000.
Knosky, Ronald J. Project e lubricating and muzzle loading device for
gun. 4,393,613, CI. 42-90 000.
Knox, Arnold W., deceased (by Knox, Ester, executrix), to Crane
Carrier Corporation. Actuation means for the racking platform of a
mast. 4,393,630, CI. 52 121.000.
Knox, Ester, executrix: See—
Knox, Arnold W.. detoased, 4,393,630, CI. 52-121.000.
Knutson, Clarence A., Jr.: See —
Cadmus, Martin C; and Knutson. Clarence A., Jr . 4.394.447, CI.
435-104.000.
Kobari, Yukio: See —
Warabi. Junichi; Sakuma, Shinzo; Kawaguchi, Hidemi; and Kobari,
Yukio, 4.394,554, CI. 200-144.00B.
Kobayashi, Hisao: See —
Kono. Hiroya; Hasegawa, Jun; Inagaki, Mitsukane; and Kobayashi.
Hisao, 4.393,966. CI. 192-56.0OR.
Kobayashi, Kalsumi, to Sony Corporation. Vanable aspect ratio televi-
sion receiver. 4,394,690, CI. 358-180.000.
Kobayashi, Masaaki: See —
Igata, Kouichi; and Kobayashi, Masaaki. 4,394,701, CI. 360-137,000.
Kobelt, Jacob. Self-centering device for caliper brake assembly,
4,393,962, CI. 188-72.600.
Koch, Coral A. Elbow pillow. 4,393,520, CI. 2-16.000. .
Kodama. Kenji: See —
Fukushima, Hatahiko; Handa, Tadahiko; and Kodama, Kenji,
4,394,333, CI. 264-37.000.
Koehne, Hermann D. Rail vehicle for track investigation. 4,393,691, CI.
73-84.000,
Koeniger, Arthur F.: See —
Bresser, Robert E.; White, Sidney S.. Jr.; and Koeniger. Arthur F.,
4,394,325, CI. 260-446.000.
Kohama, Tokio; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi; and Egami.
Tsuneyuki, to Nippon Soken. Inc. Gas flow measuring device
4.393,702. CI. 73-204.000.
Kohl, Wayne H., to United States of America. National Aeronautics
and Space Administration. Distributed multiport memory architec-
ture. 4,394,726, CI. 364-200.000,
Kohler, Richard P. J.: See—
Mahoon, Alauddin; and Kohler, Richard P. J., 4,394.224, CI,
204-57.000.
Kokiso, Masakazu: See—
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Tsuchiya, Hiroshi; Kokiso, Masakazu: and
Ohta, Hiroaki. 4,394,340, CI. 264-219.000.
Kolb, Dieter, to Christian Majer GmbH & Co. KG. Arrangement for
affixing the bottom of a thermoplastic container. 4,394,209, CI,
156-580.100.
Kolenik, Steve: See —
Imran, Mir; and Kolenik, Steve. 4.393.877, CI. 128-705.000.
Kolts, John H., to Phillips Petroleum Company. Zinc titanate catalyst,
4,394,297, CI. 252-437,000,
Komaki, Takao; and Matsumoto. Seiji, to Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd
Method of processing radiographic image. 4,394.737, CI, 364-414,000,
Komatsu, Shigeru; and Nakamura, Michio. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki
Kabushiki Kaisha, Method for fabricating semiconductor device by
heat treatment of insulating film to improve adhesion to a resist film,
4.394,436, CI. 430-311.000.
Komet Stahlhalter- und Werkzeugfabrik Robert Breuning GmbH:
See —
Eckle, Otto; and Veigel, Helmut. 4.393.735. CI. 82-36.00R.
Komori Printing Machinery Co., Ltd.: See —
Toyoda, Hideaki, 4,393,776, CI. 101-365.000.
Komorizono, Junichi, to Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha. Reservoir for a
master cylinder. 4.393.655. CI, 60-585.000.
Kondo, Kenshi, to Nihon Den-Nitsu Keiki Co.', Ltd. Heat-controlled
sanitary bathing device. 4,393,525, CI. 4-420.200.
Kondo, Toshikatsu: See —
Asano, Kiyomitsu; Jozuka, Masao; and Kondo, Toshikatsu,
4,394,093, CI. 400-124.000.
Konicek, Jiri K., to Oak Industries Inc. Printed circuit material
4,394.419, CI. 428-416,000.
Konishirotu Photo Industry Co., Ltd.: See —
Ishii. Fumio; and Kishi. Kenichi, 4,394,315, CI. 26O-396.0OR.
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Tsuchiya, Hiroshi; Kokiso, Masakazu; and
Ohta, Hiroaki. 4.394,340. CI. 264-219,000.
Kono, Hiroya; Hasegawa. Jun, Inagaki. Mitsukane; and Kobayashi.
Hisao, to Toyoda Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha; and Nippon
Denso Company Limited, Operation control apparatus of a compres-
sor, 4,393,966. CI. 192-56.00R.
Kopp, Gerald F.. to Honeywell Inc. Electrical contact for conductive-
backed paper. 4.394,665, CI. 346-76,00R.
Koppers Company, Inc.: See —
Leston, Gerd. 4,394,526, CI, 568-716.000,
Korach, Malcolm, to PPG Industries, Inc Cathode element for solid
polymer electrolyte 4.394.229. CI. 204-98,000,
Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technology: See —
Han, Moon H.; and Seong. Baik L,, 4,394,312, CI. 260-239.30P.
Park, Sang- Woo, 4,394,233, CI. 204-158.OHA.
Korry Manufacturing Co.: See —
Schlosser, Mark S., 4,394.552. CI. 200-61.620.
Kim. Chan J.; and Koski. Ahti A.. 4.394.488. CI. 524-432.000
Kost, Erwin: See —
Folta. Werner; and Kost. Erwin. 4.393.683. CI. 72-422.000
Kotani, Teizo: See —
Yasuta, Naoshi; Matsumura, Yoshio; and Kotani, Teizo, 4,394,402,
CI. 427-40.000,
Kotera, Hiroaki: See—
Yoshida, Kunio; Kotera, Hiroaki; Tsuda, Yukifumi; Kanno, Yo-
shimitsu; and Naka, MotohikO, 4,394,662, CI. 346-33.00R.
Kotera, Noboru: See —
Takahashi. Kenji; Yamazaki, I'isashi; Miyahara, Junji; Kotera.
Noboru; Eguchi, Shusaku; and Miura, Norio, 4.394,581, CI.
250-484.100.
PI 20
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Kovacs, Daniel C, to SMS Schloemann-Siemag, Inc. Method for
rolling rails. 4,393.680, CI. 72-234.000.
Kowa Company. Ltd.: See— .
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda. Hisashi; Kawamura. Kiyoshi; Sato.
Seiichi Akashi. Toshihiro; Nagakura, Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi. 4.394.382, CI. 424-283.000.
Kowalski, Eugene, to Elpo Industries. Inc. Food mincer. 4.393.588. CI.
30-196.000.
Koyama. Hideaki: See —
Tachihara. Jin; and Koyama. Hideaki. 4.394.557, CI. 219-10.55B.
Koyama. Kazuo. See—
Furukawa. Takashi; and Koyama. Kazuo. 4.394.186, CI. 148-
I2.00F.
Krahe. Mark R.: See—
Marzka, Richard. 4,394.040. CI. 294-66.00R.
Kreissl, Ottmar; Schurrer, Josef; Motz, Karl; Leitgeb, Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg, Heinz, to M.A.N.-Dachauer; and Siemens. Method and
apparatus for utilizing the waste heat energy of an internal combus-
tion engine. 4,394,582, CI. 29O-4.0OC.
Krent, Edward D. Three-dimensional acoustic ceiling tile system for
dispersing long wave sound. 4.393,631. CI. 52-144.000.
Kroder, Claus: See —
Gebhard, Werner; and Kroder, Claus, 4,393,718, CI. 73-859.000.
Kronos Titan-G.m.b.H.: See—
Hartmann, Achim; and Schinkitz, Dieter. 4.394,270, CI.
210-726.000.
Kronstadt, Victor, to Mack Trucks, Inc. Clutch assist apparatus.
4.393.907. CI. 192-99.00S.
Krueger, Hans; See —
Pape, Heinz; Quella, Ferdinand; and Krueger, Hans, 4,394,068. CI.
350-345.000.
Krull. Manfred; Lobert. Udo; Stamm. Dieter; and Veeser. Klaus, tg
Carl Freudenberg. Firma. Structural panel of gypsum with textile
casing and method for producing same. 4,394,411. CI. 428-70.000.
Kruse, Lawrence I., to SmithKline Beckman Corporation. Processes
for preparing 4-substituted indoles. 4,394,514, CI. 548-508.000.
Kubis, Charles S.; See-
Walter, John; Roth, Donald J.; and Kubis, Charles S., 4,394,408, CI
427-231.000.
Kuckens, Alexander, to Dagma Deutsche Automaten und Getran-
kemaschinen GmbH & Co. KG. Metered dispensing of liquids.
4,393,982, CI. 222-209.000.
Kuehnle, Manfred R., to Coulter Systems Corporation. Low-profile
electrophotographic copying machine. 4,394,084, CI. 355-3.0BE.
Kuenzig, Ernest O.; and Pennino, Frank L. Mandrel adjustment system
in a plastic resin blow molding machine. 4,394,116, CI. 425-192.00R.
Kuhn, Joseph B.: See— ^. ,^„
McClelland, Henry T.; and Kuhn, Joseph B., 4,394,185, CI. 148-
11.50C.
Kuhns, Walter: See— ,„.-,.,,
Stage, Hermann; Hammer, Hartmut; and Kuhns, Walter, 4,394,221,
CI. 203-89.000.
Kuibers-Kiewik, Walfrida G. E.; Akkerman, Johannes; and Gons,
Johan, to Wavin B.V. Composition for preventing plate out in extru-
sion equipment. 4,394,501, CI. 528-485.000.
Kukes. Semyon; Nowack, Gerhard P.; and Johnson. Marvin M., to
Phillips Petroleum Company. Isomerization process. 4.394.255. CI.
585-667.000.
Kukolja. Stjepan; and Pfeil. Janice L.. to Eli Lilly and Company.
Symmetrical azetidinone aldehyde disulfides and process. 4,394.313.
CI. 260-245.400.
Kumano, Fumihiro: See —
Hamashima. Tetsuo; and Kumano, Fumihiro, 4,393,586, CI
30-43.600.
Kumar, Mahesh; Menna, Raymond J.; and Huang, Ho-Chung. to RCA
Corporation. Hybrid power divider/combiner circuit. 4.394.629, CI.
333-109.000.
Kume. Toshiaki: See —
Makabe. Hachiro; Watanabe, Kazuo; Takenoya. Hideaki; Kume,
Toshiaki; and Kakmuma, Toshihide, 4,393,795, CI. 112-158.00E.
Kummermehr, Hans, to Grunzweig & Hartmann und Glasfaser AG.
Thermal insulating body and a process for making the same.
4,394,337, CI. 264-122.000.
Kunieda, Hisashi: See—
Shiratsuchi, Masami; Shimizu, Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani, Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura, Kiyoshi; Sato,
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura, Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi, 4,394,382, CI. 424-283.000.
Kuntz, David H. Spark-generating roller skate assembly. 4,394,037, CI.
280-816.000.
Kunz, Paul. Adjustable brush. 4,393,535, CI. 15-169.000.
Kuper, Douglas D.: See—
Menezes, William A.; and Kuper, Douglas D., 4,394.745. CI.
364-900.000.
Kurihara. Hiroshi; Takenaka, Sadao; and Itaya. Fiji, to Fujitsu Limited.
Phase synchronizing circuit. 4,394.626. CI. 331-12.000.
Kurland. Marvin: See —
Dunn. William H.; Horey, Leonard I.; and Kurland. Marvin.
4,393,796, CI. 112-158.00E.
Kumit, Norman A. Ring cavity for a raman capillary waveguide ampli-
fier. 4,394,623, CI. 330-4.300.
Kurosawa, Tsutomu, to Sahi Electronics Co., Ltd. Magnetic recording-
/reproducing apparatus. 4,394,697, CI. 360-91.000.
Kurtz, Thomas D. Metal mirror mounting clip. 4,394,000, CI.
248-466.000.
Kusaba, Yoshiaki, to Sumitomo Metal Industries. Ltd. Method for
producing blank for wide flange beam. 4.393.679, CI. 72-221.000.
Kushigian, Anthony. Thread grinder. 4,393,624, CI. 51-5.00D.
Kutsuzawa. Masaki: See—
Wakamiya. Yoshinori; Hamasaki. Yoshiharu; Kutsuzawa. Masaki;
and Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, 4.394,121, CI.
432-11.000.
Kuwahara, Kenshi, to Mitsui Aluminum Co., Ltd. Method of carbo-
thermically producing aluminum. 4,394,167, CI. 75-68.00A.
Kwakernaak, Adriaan: See—
Exalto, Robertus; and Kwakernaak, Adriaan. 4.394.232. CI.
204-144.000.
Kyotani. Yoshinori: See—
Shiratsuchi, Masami; Shimizu, Noboru; Shigyo, Hiromichi;
Kyotani, Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura, Kiyoshi; Sato,
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura, Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida. Yasumi. 4.394,382, CI. 424-283.000.
Kyushu Electric Power Co., Inc.: See—
Shima, Michitsune; Kihara, Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu, Kenji, 4,393,920, CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
L.C.E. Ltd.: See—
Gielisse, Peter J., 4,394,580, CI. 250-461.100.
Laboratory Equipment Corp.: See —
Marshall, Richard A.; and Miller, Edward F.. 4,393.695, CI.
73-117.300.
Lachmann. Ulrich: See—
Ertl, Wilhelm; Lachmann, Ulrich; and Pertsch, Heinnch, 4,394,190,
CI. 148-31.550.
La Franca, Peter J. X-Ray film package and method and apparatus for
making the same. 4,394,770, CI. 378-169.000.
Laitram Corporation, The: See —
Lapeyre, James M.; Svendsen, Noel A.; Carroll, Raymond J.. Jr.;
Long, Henry H.; and Lindberg, Richard S., 4,393,544, CI.
17-73.000.
Lapeyre, James M., 4,394,664, CI. 346-76.00R.
LaLonde, Gary R.: See—
Goetz, George W.; Santti, Arne J.; and LaLonde, Gary R.,
4,394,033, CI. 280-736.000.
Lamanna, Peter J.: See —
Humble, David R.; Weaver, Jon N.; Gentzler, David L.; Eskandry,
Ezra D.; and Lamanna, Peter J., 4,394,645, CI. 340-572.000.
Lambert, Jacques. Napkin for a young child. 4,393,865, CI. 128-80.00A.
Lampelzammer, Helga: See—
■ Huber, Peter; August, Peter; Lampelzammer, Helga; and Primas.
Willi, 4,394,518, CI. 556-424.000.
Lamport, Daphne L.: See —
Smith, James; and Lamport, Daphne L., 4,394,599, CI. 313-422.000.
Landon, Alfred J.; Pennebaker, William B.; and Wang, Han C, to
International Business Machines Corporation. Electrostatic clutch-
operated printing mechanism. 4,393,769, CI. 101-93.300.
Landon, Alfred J: See—
Cuomo, Jerome J.; Landon, Alfred J.; and Wang, Han C,
4,393,967, CI. I92-84.00E.
Lane, Ronald S.; and Wittes. James M.. to Lane, Ronald S. Perpetual
calendar. 4,393,611, CI. 40-107.000.
Langer, Heimo J.: See—
Gruber, Bruce A.; Langer, Heimo J.; and Dunnavant, William R.,
4.394,466, CI. 523-141.000.
Lapeyre, James M.; Svendsen, Noel A.; Carroll, Raymond J., Jr.; Long,
Henry H. and Lindberg, Richard S., to Laitram Corporation, The.
Krillpeelingmachine. 4,393.544, CI. 17-73.000.
Lapeyre, James M., to Laitram Corporation, The. Thermal plotter.
4,394,664, CI. 346-76.00R.
Lapides, Melvin E., to Electric Power Research Institute, Inc. Appara-
tus and method for ultrasonic detection of flaws in power plant piping
systems. 4,393,711, CI. 73-592.000. ^
Larsen, James E.; and Rogers, Charles E., to Randall Industries. Inc.
Apparatus for basketball. 4.394,013, CI. 273-1.50R.
Larsen, Thomas E.: See—
Nygard, James C; Weiss, Melvin P.; and Larsen, Thomas h.,
4,393,804. CI. 118-60.000.
Larson. Ove; and Davidson. Charles, to Robotgruppen HB. Flexible
arm. particularly a robot arm. 4,393.728. CI. 74-469.000.
Larson. Willis A., to Oak Industries, Inc. Laminated membrane switch.
4,394,547. CI. 200-5.00A.
Laurel Enterprises: See —
Frankel. Charles. 4.393.552, CI. 24-213.00C.
Lawson-Hemphill. Inc.: See—
Lawson. John B.. 4.393.701. CI. 73-160.000.
Lawson. Jimmie B.; and Richardson, Edwin A., to Shell Oil Company.
Treating wells with ion-exchange-precipitated scale inhibitor.
4,393.938. CI. 166-279.000.
Lawson John B., to Lawson-Hemphill. Inc. Yarn tester system.
4.393.701, CI. 73-160.000. , ^^, ^^^^
Layher, Eberhard. Scaffolding structure. 4,394,095. CI. 403-49.000.
Lazarre, Flavien, to Societe Nationale Elf Aquitaine (Production).
Process and device for dispersing flammable gases into the atmo-
sphere. 4,393.990, CI. 239-1.000. . . wi «.« ri
Leach, Clifford, Sr. Manual knitting frame with support. 4,393.668, CI.
66-4.000.
Lear Siegler, Inc.: See— . ,„^ ,.,, ^, ,-,n
Keiper, Francis P.. Jr.; and Kerns, John N., 4,394.543, CI. 179-
84 OOR
Ledjeff. Konstantin. Closure device for lead-acid batteries. 4.394.423.
CI. 429-86.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 21
Lee, Jeffrey A.; and Todd, Mike J., to H. B. Fuller Company. Floor
cleaning and polishing machine. 4,393,534. CI. 15-98.000.
Lee. Richard J. Press for reloading rifle and pistol cartridges. 4,393.744.
CI. 86-25.000.
Lee. Rock: See—
Boyarsky, Abraham; Friedman. Jack; Christodoulopoulos,
Athanasios; and Lee, Rock, 4.393.869, CI. 128-204.180.
Lee, Teh-Hsung: See—
Anagnostopoulos, Constantine N.; and Lee, Teh-Hsung. 4.394.675.
CI. 357-24.000.
Leeper, Charles G., to Hennessy Industries. Inc. Tire changer with
combination wheel clamps and bead looseners. 4.393,914, CI.
157-1.200.
Lefnaer. Otto. Coal dust combustion motor. 4,393,818. CI. 123-23.000.
Legler. Donald: See —
Marten, John A.; Legler, Donald; and Wagoner. Jesse W .
4,393,694, CI. 73-117.000.
Lehr, Klaus: See—
Schrodter, Klaus; and Lehr, Klaus, 4,394,360. CI. 423-317.000.
Leipp>e, Michael M.: See^
Anderson. Richard J.; and Leippe. Michael M.. 4,394.154. CI.
71-92.000.
Leisner. Ernst, to Robert Bosch GmbH. Deburring chamber for ther-
mal deburring. 4,394.007, CI. 266-249.000.
Leitgeb, Wilhelm: See—
Kreissl, Ottmar; Schurrer. Josef; Motz. Karl; Leitgeb. Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg, Heinz. 4,394,582, CI. 290-4.00C.
Lemanowicz. Mary M.: See —
De Briere, John G.; Lemanowicz, Mary M.; Richardson, David L.;
and Vanderputten, Willem, 4,394.345, CI. 376-245.000.
Lemay Corporation: See—
Santinelli. Emil, 4,394,099. CI. 409-104.000.
Lemirande, Rodger P., to Stanley Automatic Openers. Control systems
for gales and the like including a motor overioad monitoring circuit.
4,394,607. CI. 318-453.000.
Lens-Card Systems, Inc.: See —
Adrian. David L.. 4.393,610, CI. 40-625.000.
Leonardo, Ignazio, to Diamond Communication Products, Inc. Support
clip for a dropwire or the like. 4,393,549, CI. 24-115.00A.
Lesniak, Jeanne M.: See —
Smyth, Nicholas P. D.; Lesniak, Jeanne M.; and Stokes, Kenneth
B., 4.393,883, CI. 128-785.000.
Leston, Gerd, to Koppers Company. Inc. Para-cresol halide salt com-
plex useful for separating para-cresol from meta-cresol. 4,394,526, CI.
568-716.000.
Lettington, Alan H.: See —
Green, Geoffrey W.; and Lettington, Alan H., 4.394,400, CI.
427-38.000.
Leupold & Stevens, Inc.: See-
Gibson. Dale E., 4,393,595, CI. 33-245.000.
Lever Brothers Company: See-
Melville, James B., 4.394.127. CI. 8-137.000.
Levesque, Clarence N.. to C. Levesque Co. Inc. Building system.
4,393,632, CI. 52-235.000.
Levesque, Michel. Waterproof plastic container. 4.393,974. CI.
206-37.000.
Levitt. George, to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company. Agricul-
tural sulfonamides. 4.394,506, CI. 544-321.000.
Lewis, Paul H.; and Nelson, Gerald V., to Texaco Inc. Method for
separating straight chain hydrocarbons using zeolites having large
crystals. 4.394,254, CI. 208-3 lO.OOZ.
Leybold-Heraeus GmbH: See —
Reimpell. Uwe; Grof, Helmut; Knell, Franz-Georg; and Wamser.
Anton, 4.394,765, CI. 373-52.000.
LGZ Landis &. Gyr Zug AG: See—
Blazso, Eva, 4,394,407, CI. 427-150.000.
Liang. Po-Lung: See—
Croswhite, Howard L.; Liang, Po-Lung; and Fisher, Alan R.,
4.393.731, CI. 74-689.000.
Liaw, H. Ming: See—
Helda, Robert W., deceased; Hazeltine. Cynthia, executor; and
Liaw, H. Ming, 4,394,352. CI. 422-232.000.
Libbey-Owens-Ford Company: See—
Bueno. Alejandro G.; and Stover. K. Lawrence. 4.394.122. CI.
432-30.000.
Licenta Patent-Verwaltungs-GmbH: See—
Dahlberg. Reinhard. 4.393.576. CI. 29-572.000.
Liefke, Hans-Georg: See—
Janicki, Max; Liefke, Hans-Georg; Keil, Reinhart; and Geyer,
Gerd, 4,394,609, CI. 318-603.000.
Lignotock Verfahrenstechnik GmbH: See—
Kiss, Gunter H.. 4.394.334. CI. 264-80.000
Liljestrand. Walter E., to Smith International. Inc. Degassing system
and centrifugal pump. 4,394,140, CI. 55-184.000.
Lillmars, Alvin E.: See— j . c- •. i
Clark, Thomas R.; Lillmars, Alvin E.; Roth, Elwood A.; Schmick,
Alvin L.; and Todd. Maurice C. 4.393.736. CI. 83-100.000
Lindberg, John E., to Owen, Wickersham & Erickson. Combustion and
pollution control system. 4,393.817, CI. 123-3.000.
Lindberg, Richard S : See—
Lapeyre, James M.; Svendsen, Noel A.; Carroll, Raymond J., Jr.;
Long, Henry H.; and Lindberg, Richard S.. 4,393.544. CI.
17-73.000.
Linde. Rolf: See— , j n ir a
Weiss Hermann; Klotz, Erhard; Peemoller. Horst; Linde, Rolf; and
Mauser, Wilfried. 4.394.063. CI. 350-162.130.
Linden. Gerbert: See-
Buck, Wolfgang; Sehring, Richard; Linden, Gerbert; and Lust,
Sigmund, 4,394,159, CI. 71-98.000.
Linder, Ernst: See —
Muller, Klaus; Linder, Ernst; and Maurer, Helmut, 4,393,687, CI.
73-35.000
Lion Corporation: See—
Miyake, Mikio; Kitoh, Shinya; and Hayashi, Satoshi, 4,394,494, CI.
526-301.000.
Lippits, Gerardus J. M.: See —
Van Pelt. Pieter; and Lippits. Gerardus J. M., 4.394.438. CI.
430-321.000
Liplay-Wagner. Nicholas; Renaud. Roland; Pryor. Timothy R.; and
Clarke. Donald A., to Diffracto Ltd. New photodetector array based
optical measurement systems 4.394,683. CI. 358-107.000.
Lisagor. W. Barry: See —
Clark. Ronald K.; and Lisagor. W. Barry, 4,393,716, CI. 73-818.000.
List, Hans: See—
Obermayer, Bertram; Skatsche, Othmar; and Greier, Josef,
4,393,822, CI. 123-195 OOR
Litton Systems. Inc : See—
Flannagan, Alfred. 4.394.600, CI. 313-500.000.
Liu, Sophia Y.; See —
Hardy. Thomas A.; and Liu. Sophia Y.. 4.394.330. CI. 260-932.000.
Lobert. Udo; See—
Krull. Manfred; Lobert. Udo; Stamm. Dieter; and Veeser. Klaus.
4.394.411. CI. 428-70.000.
Loen. Larry W.: See-
Hoffman, Roy L.; Houdek. Merle E.; Loen. Larry W.; and Soltis.
Frank G.. 4.394,727. CI 364-200.000.
LogEtronics, Inc.: See —
Mcintosh. Walter L.; and Street. John N . 4,394,089, CI. 355-88.000.
Loggers, Hendrik, to Aarding Weerstandlas B.V. Method of producing
silicate-containing granulates. 4,394,176, CI. 106-120000.
Lombard, Claude, to Regie Nationale Des Usines Renault Absolute
pressure pick-up, especially for measuring pressure at intake in inter-
nal combustion engines. 4,393.715, CI. 73-728.000.
Lometillo, Josephine E : and Wolcott. John M., to Carnation Company
Process for producing pasta products. 4,394,397, CI. 426-557.000.
Lone Star Steel Company; See—
Greer. James B., 4,394,189. CI. 148-12.00R.
Long, Donald A.; and Sowash, Thomas R., to General Motors Corpo-
ration Switch assembly with pivoted actuator. 4,394,555, CI. 200-
I59.00R.
Long, Henry H.; See—
Lapeyre, James M.; Svendsen. Noel A.; Carroll, Raymond J.. Jr.;
Long, Henry H ; and Lindberg. Richard S.. 4.393.544. CI.
17-73.000.
Long. John V.: See —
Gagliani. John; and Long, John V., 4.394,464, CI. 521-180.000,
Long, Nicholas R.; Peisel, William E.; Ryan, Joseph L.; and Watkins.
Richard R., to Honeywell Information Systems Inc. Graphic and
data character video display system. 4,394,650, CI. 340-728.000
Long. Robert T. Insulated wall construction apparatus. 4,393,635, CI
52-309.110.
Lonza-Werke GmbH.: See—
Sappelt. Reinhard. 4.394.521. CI. 564-271.000.
Loof. Philippus; See-
Waller. Jan; and Loof. Philippus. 4.394.119. CI. 431-5.000.
Loos. Horst-Rudolf; and Dupre. Bernard, to Vibro-Meter S.A. Measur-
ing device of the useful load and of the load on the axles of a truck.
4.393.951. CI. 177-136.000.
Loos. Michel: See-
Comfort. Joseph A ; Perry. Thomas J.; and Loos. Michel.
4.394.728. CI. 364-200.000.
Lord Corporation: See —
Blenner. Donald R.. 4,394,205, CI. 156-307.300.
Lord. Henry A.; See—
Bixler. Kenneth D ; Lord. Henry A.; and Reifers. Richard F.,
4.394.214. CI. 162-228.000.
Loser, Wolfgang; See —
Muller, Rudi; and Loser, Wolfgang, 4,393,985, CI. 222-591.000.
Lowdenslager, John R.; See-
Willis, Alan E.; Lowdenslager, John R.; and Goldstein, Neal,
4,394,540, CI. I79-2.0AM.
Lowen, Gerard G.; and Tricamo, Stephen J., to Research Foundation
of the City University of New York. Force balancing techniques for
complex cyclically moving planar linkages 4,393,690, CI 73-66.000
Lowery, Richard E.; Gordon, Bruce W.; and Steger. Barry N.. to
Phillips Petroleum Company Production of antimony organophos-
phorodithioates. 4.394.323. CI. 260-446.000
Lowndes. Michael W.. to Lucas Industries Limited. Battery monitoring
system. 4.394.741. CI 364-483.000.
Lu. Shau-Zou, to Celanese Corporation. Fiber reinforced polyoxymeth-
ylene molding compositions. 4,394,468, CI. 523-205.000
Lucas Industries Limited; See—
Lowndes. Michael W., 4,394,741, CI. 364-483.000.
Mowbray, Dorian F.; Fenne, Ivor; and Cavanagh, Eric J.,
4,393,846, CI. 123-502.000.
Skinner, Robert T J.. 4,393,844, CI. 123-450.000.
Tumber, Brian W.. 4,393,826, CI. 123-I98.0DB.
Lucchetta, Sergio, to Maschinenfabrik Schweiter AG. Method and
apparatus for joining yarn or thread ends. 4,393,646, CI 57-22.000.
Lucia, James; See— . „ ,,. ^
Di Leo, Angela M.; and Lucia, James, 4,394,644, CI. 340-571.000.
PI 22
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Ludington. William D.: See—
Adams, Edgar L.; and Ludington, William D., 4,394,052, CI.
299-18.000.
Lukaszewicz, Helmut: See— ^ ,„^ -,n
Holz, Wilhelm; Lukaszewicz, Helmut; and Gregor, Karl, 4,394,217,
CI. 202-227.000.
Lull John M., to Hughes Aircraft Company. Dual modulus counter
having non-inverting feedback. 4,394,769, CI. 377-116.000.
Luossavaara-Kiirunavaara AB; See—
Menla, Jouni A., 4.394,021, CI. 277-34.300.
Lust. Sigmund: See-
Buck Wolfgang Sehring, Richard; Linden, Gerbert; and Lust,
Sigmund, 4.394.159. CI. 71-98.000.
Lutze, Uwe; Scholz, Dieter; and Brennsteiner, Ernst, to Hilti Aktien-
gesellschaft. Sound attenuating rock drill shank. 4,393,947, CI.
175-323.000.
Lux, Richard A.: See—
Hoffman, James M., Jr.; and Lux, Richard A., 4,394,086, CI. 355-
3.00R.
M.A.N.-Dachauer: See—
Kreissl Ottmar; Schurrer, Josef; Motz, Karl; Leitgeb, Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg. Heinz. 4,394,582, CI. 290-4.00C.
M.A.N. Maschinenfabrik Augsburg-Nurnberg Aktiengesellschaft:
See —
Bammert, Karl. 4.394.113. CI. 418-98.000.
MAN -ROLAND Druckmaschinen Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Burger, Rainer. 4.393.772. CI. 101-217.000.
Cappel. Bert; Schniggenfittig. Gunther; and Schuhmann, Siegfried,
4,393,775, CI. 101-365.000.
Theilacker. Klaus, 4,393.773, CI. 101-232.000.
Maag Gear-Wheel & Machine Company Limited: See—
Bloch, Peter; and Bickel. Hansjorg. 4,393,625, CI. 51-165.870.
Machida, Takatoshi: See—
Tsukui, Minoru; Sekiguchi, Hiroshi; and Machida, Takatoshi.
4,393,956, CI. 181-265.000.
Mack, Gerhard: See— - . .
Moulding, Michael B.; Muller, Klaus; and Mack, Gerhard,
4,394,043, CI. 296-97.00H.
Mack Trucks, Inc.: See—
Kronstadt, Victor, 4,393.907. CI. 192-99.00S.
Maclin. Greg P.; and Brandenburger, Allen M.. to Container Corpora-
tion of America. Envelope-type mailing folder. 4,393,989, CI.
229-71.000.
Madding, Gary D., to Mead Johnson & Company. Process for produc-
tion of encainide. 4,394,507, CI. 546-185.000.
Maddox, Roy L.. Ill, to Rockwell International Corporation. Micro-
electronic shadow masking process for reducing punchthrough.
4.394.182, CI. 148-1.500.
Madgavkar. Ajay M.; and Swift. Harold E.. to Gulf Research & Devel-
opment Company. Boron trifluoride-water-silica catalyst. 4,394,296,
CI. 252-433.000.
Maeda, Mamoru: See —
Shioya, Yoshimi; Maeda, Mamoru; Takasaki, Kanetake; and
Takagi, Mikio. 4,394,401, CI. 427-39.000.
Magnusson, Klas B. O., to Bulten-Kanthal Aktiebolag. Ladle preheater.
4.394,566, CI 219-523.000.
Maguire. Daniel J. Reusable childproof closure. 4,393,976, CI.
215-211.000.
Mahieu, Marc; Vandenberg, Philippe; and Varon, Jacques J., to U.S.
Philips Corporation. Boat for the epitaxial growth from the liquid
phase. 4,393.806. CI. 118-412.000.
Mahon. Douglas K.. to Sharp Corporation. Method and apparatus for
evaluating recording systems. 4.394.695, CI. 360-53.000.
Mahoon. Alauddin; and Kohler, Richard P. J., to British Aerospace
Public Limited Company. Treatment of titanium prior to bonding.
4,394,224, CI. 204-57.000.
Maiko, Viktor P., to Juzhnoe Proizvodstvennoe Obiedinenie Po Mor-
skim Geologorazvedochnvm Rabotam "JUZHMORGEOLOGIA".
Digital tracking phase meter. 4,394,618, CI. 324-83.00D.
Mailen, James C: See—
Tallent, Othar K.; Dodson, Karen E.; and Mailen, James C,
4,394,269. CI. 210-690.000.
Makabe, Hachiro; Watanabe. Kazuo; Takenoya. Hideaki; Kume, To-
shiaki; and Kakinuma. Toshihide, to Janome Sewing Machine Co.
Ltd. Electronic sewing machine 4,393,795, CI. 112-158.00E.
Makarewicz, Stanley R.: See-
Gardiner, James R; Makarewicz, Stanley R.; Revitz, Martin; and
Shepard, Joseph F., 4,394,406, CI. 427-86.000.
Maki, Emil R.; Freudenstein, Ferdinand; Richard, Raymond L., Jr.; and
Chew Meng-Sang. to General Motors Corporation. Rolling contact
rocker arm and pivot. 4,393,820, CI. 123-90.410.
Makinen, Juho K.; and Kaenniemi. Kaarina M. E.. to Outokumpu Oy.
Process for removal of harmful impurities from metallurgical sul-
phide melts. 4,394,164, CI. 75-21.000.
Malette, William G.; and Quigley, Herbert J., Jr. Method of achieving
hemostasis. 4,394,373, CI. 424-95.000.
Maloy, Rex M., to Cobum, Orin W. Coin chute assembly. 4,393.972, CI.
194-99.000.
Maloy. Rick D. Earthquake game. 4.394,017. CI. 273-237.000.
Malpass. Dennis B.; and Yeargin, G. Scott, to Texas Alkyls, Inc. Prepa-
ration of alkenoxy aluminum compounds and compounds produced.
4,394,326, CI. 260-448.0AD.
Manber, Solomon; Chiang, David; and Chu, Most, to Amtech Patent
Licensing Corp. Indicia recording apparatus. 4,394,076, CI.
354-5.000.
Mandar, Andre; Fressard, Jules; and Mandar, Martine. Correcting
device for the combustion of engines of vehicles during transitional
phases of operation. 4,393,855, CI. 123-587.000.
Mandar, Martine: See —
Mandar, Andre; Fressard, Jules; and Mandar, Martine, 4,393,855,
CI. 123-587.000.
Mangetsu, Kenji: See —
Shima, Michitsune; Kihara, Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu, Kenji. 4.393.920. CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Mann, Arnold; and Collonia, Harald, to VDO Adolf Schindlmg AG.
Device for the control of the traveling speed of a motor vehicle.
4,393,833, CI. 123-335.000.
Manos. Pavlos. Game using the helical movement of a ball or vehicle.
4,394,016, CI. 273-109.000.
Marcelin, George: See —
Vogel, Roger F.; Marcelin, George; and Swift, Harold E.,
4,394,525. CI. 568-462.000.
Marion, Charles P.; Crouch, William B.; Brent, Albert; Richter, George
N Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, to Texaco, Inc. Partial
oxidation process. 4,394,137, CI. 48-197.00R.
Marjanovich, Barry S.: See —
Garrison, Barney D., Jr.; and Marjanovich, Barry S., 4,394,150, CI.
71-62.000.
Mark, Harold W.; Bertus. Brent J.; and Roberts, John S., to Phillips
Petroleum Company. Stable antimony organophosphorodithioates.
4,394,324, CI. 260-446.000.
Marossy, Gabor; and Mueller. Warren E., to Armco Inc. Solar collec-
tor roof, 4.393.859, CI. 126-429.000.
Marro, Joseph, Jr.; and Wattles, Gurdon B., to Entoleter, Inc. Combus-
tion fuel emulsion. 4,394,131, CI. 44-51.000.
Marsh, Walter H. W., to Singer Company, The. Arrangement and
method for preventing false triggering in an optically switched but-
tonhole mechanism. 4,393,797. CI. 112-158.00B.
Marshall. Richard A.; and Miller. Edward F., to Laboratory Equipment
Corp. Manual shift system and method of use for vehicle testing.
4.393.695, CI. 73-117.300.
Marten, John A.; Legler, Donald; and Wagoner, Jesse W., to Sun
Electric Corporation. Vehicle steering and front-end alignment
defect detector. 4,393,694, CI. 73-117.000.
Martenas, Wayne B.. to Sperry Corporation. Two-speed drive appara-
tus for blower fans. 4,393,644, CI. 56-12.800.
Martin, Eugene R.; and Tripp. Jeffrey A., to SWS Silicones Corpora-
tion. Quaternary ammonium functional silicon compounds. 4,394,517,
CI. 556-419.000.
Martin, Henry: See-
Sturm, Elmar; Schempp, Heinrich; and Martin, Henry, 4,394,152,
CI. 71-77.000.
Martin, Johannes J. Method and arrangement for reducing NO^ emis-
sions from furnaces. 4,394.118. CI. 431-4.000.
Mariin. John E. Method and apparatus for repairing heat exchangers.
4,393,564, CI. 29-157.30C.
Martin, Jon W., to TRW Inc. Oxidized carbonaceous matenals and
vulcanized and vulcanizable rubber compositions reinforced with
such carbonaceous materials. 4,394.478. CI. 524-424.000.
Martin, Roger C. Shrimp processing and handling apparatus. 4,393,543,
CI. 17-72.000.
Martinez, Gonzalo. Polycentric hinge for cast-braces. 4,393,542, CI.
16-369.000.
Martinot, Roger: See—
Mijot, Guy; Derycke, Leon; Dienne, Didier; and Martinot, Roger,
4.393,942, CI. 172-2.000.
Maruyama, Chisato. Immunotherapeutic agent for tumors comprising
hpopolysaccharide as an active component. 4,394,502, CI.
536-119.000.
Maruyama, Eiichi: See— ,._.._
Tsukada, Toshihisa; Takasaki, Yukio; Hirai, Tadaaki; Baji, Toru;
Yamamoto, Hideaki; Tanaka, Yasuo; Maruyama, Eiichi; and
Ishioka, Sachio, 4,394,749. CI. 365-106.000.
Maruyama. Teruo; Onoda, Tadayuki; and Taguchi, Tatsuhisa, to Mat-
sushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd. Compressor. 4,394,114, CI.
418-269.000. .. , „ ^
Marzka, Richard, to Marzka, Richard; and Krahe, Mark R. Grapple.
4,394,040, CI. 294-66.00R.
Marzocchi, Alfred: See—
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hagelee, Leon A.; Hahn, Louis T.; and Mar-
zocchi, Alfred, 4,394.481. CI. 525-54.500. .r„ ,
Mas. Joseph A., to Allied Corporation. Multiple pole axial field electro-
magnetic devices. 4,394,597, CI. 310-268.000.
Maschinenfabrik Carl Zangs Aktiengesellschaft: See-
Brock, Josef, 4,393,902, CI. 139-76.000.
Maschinenfabrik Schweiter AG: See—
Lucchetta, Sergio, 4,393,646, CI. 57-22.000.
Masly, John R: See— . „ , j, » .u . c
Goes Michael J.; Masly, John R.; and Schmidlin, Albertus E..
4.393,783. CI. 102-529.000.
Mason, Donald L.; and McAllister, Warren A., to Burroughs Wellcome
Co. Apparatus for testing medicinal tablets. 4,393,717, CI. 73-82 1.IXXJ.
Mason, Robert S.: See— n u . c
Nawash, Michael S.; Stillman, Suzanne; and Mason, Robert i.,
4,393,873, CI. 604-151.000.
Massachusetts Institute of Technology: See—
Wnek, Gary E., 4,394,304, CI. 252-520.000.
Material Sciences Corporation: See—
Van Thyne, Ray J.; and Rausch, John J., 4.394.422. CI. 428-592.000.
Mathbirk Limited: See-
Matthews, Denis, 4,393,799, CI. 1 1 2-262. 100.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 23
Matsuda, Hiroto: See —
Sugitani, Hiroshi; Matsuda, Hiroto; Kimura, Koichi; and Ikeda,
Masami, 4,394,670, &t 346-140.00R.
Matsumoto, Rempei: See—
Tanaka, Takayuki; and Matsumoto, Rempei, 4,393.819. CI.
123-41.080.
Matsumoto. Seiji: See —
Komaki. Takao; and Matsumoto, Seiji, 4,394,737, CI. 364-414.000.
Matsumoto, Shigeyuki: See —
Ozawa, Masakazu; Watanabe, Kunio; Matsumoto, Shigeyuki; Ni-
shimura, Yukuo; and Miyazaki, Takashi, 4,394,669. CI. 346-
140.00R.
Matsumura. Yoshio: See —
Yasuta. Naoshi; Matsumura, Yoshio; and Kotani, Teizo. 4,394,402,
CI. 427-40.000.
Matsuo, Hiroshi: See —
Kato, Hiroshi; Ato, Hisataka; Inagaki. Osamu; and Matsuo. Hiroshi.
4,394,666. CI. 346-82.000.
Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.: See —
Igata, Kouichi; and Kobayashi, Masaaki, 4,394,701, CI. 360-137.000.
Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; Kanai, Kenji; Nouchi, Norimoto; and No-
mura. Noboru. 4.394.699. CI. 360-113.000.
Maruyama. Teruo; Onoda. Tadayuki; and Taguchi. Tatsuhisa.
4.394,114. CI. 418-269.000.
Mori. Keiichi; Ueda. Yasukiyo; and Mori. Keijiro, 4,393,858, CI.
126-351.000.
Watanabe. Toshiro. 4.394.680. CI. 358-22.000.
Matsushita Electric Works. Ltd.: See —
Hamashima. Tetsuo; and Kumano. Fumihiro. 4.393,586. CI.
30-43.600.
Yamamoto, Hideomi; Watanabe. Haruzo; Kishie, Hidehiko; and
Nishihara. Toshio. 4.394.412. CI. 428-174.000.
Matsushita Research Institute Tokyo. Inc.: See—
Yoshida. Kunio; Kotera. Hiroaki; Tsuda. Yukifumi; Kanno, Yo-
shimitsu; and Naka, Motohiko. 4,394,662. CI. 346-33.0OR.
Matthews, Denis, to Mathbirk Limited. Attachment of knitted fabric
strip to a piece of fabric. 4.393,799, CI. 1 12-262.100.
Mattson, Richard W.. to Allied Corporation. Brush wear detector
system with latching relay. 4.394.648. CI. 340-679.000.
Maurer. Alexander: Adrian. Renate; Panter, Herbert; Heymer. Gero;
and Nollojr. Dieter, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Production of
granular alkali metal diphosphates or triphosphates. 4,394.358. CI.
423-305.000.
Maurer. Alexander: See —
Wasel-Nielen. Horst-Dieter; Maurer, Alexander; and Adrian, Re-
nate, 4.394,359. CI. 423-305.000.
Maurer, Helmut: See —
Muller. Klaus; Linder, Ernst; and Maurer, Helmut, 4,393.687, CI.
73-35.000.
Mauser, Wilfried: See —
Weiss, Hermann; Klotz, Erhard; Peemoller, Horst; Linde. Rolf; and
Mauser. Wilfried. 4.394.063. CI. 350-162.130.
May. Charles W.. to Deere & Company. Low pressure sealing arrange-
ment for a fuel injector. 4.393,847, CI. 123-502.000.
Mayo, Henry C; and Millman, William V., to United States of America,
Army. Rcleasable retainer for ejection tube 4,393,745. CI. 89-1.806.
Mazur, Michael B.; and Punko, Emil M., to AAA Sales & Engineering,
Inc. Low noise railroad retarder brake shoe structure. 4,393,960, CI.
188-62.000.
McAfee, Richard C; Adkins, James; and Miskowski, Richard L., to
SWS Silicones Corporation. Platinum-styrene complexes which
promote hydrosilation reactions. 4,394,317. CI. 260-429.00R.
McAllister. Warren A.: See-
Mason. Donald L.; and McAllister, Warren A., 4,393,717, CI.
73-821.000.
McCartney, Damien: See—
Yeomans, David; Wilkinson. Christopher J.; McCartney. Damien;
and O'Dwyer, Micheal, 4,394.685, CI. 358-264.000.
McClelland. Henry T.; and Kuhn. Joseph B.. to Cabot Berylco. Inc.
Processing for copper beryllium alloys. 4.394.185. CI. 148-1 1.50C.
McCord. James W, Vapor condensate return means in a vapor generat-
ing and recovery apparatus. 4,394,216, CI. 202-170.000.
McCoy, John F., Ill: See—
Thimons, Edward D.; Heller, Kenneth S.; McCoy, John F., Ill; and
Whillier. Austin, 4,394.142, CI. 55-242.000.
McDermott, Thomas R.; and Jackson. Robert K.. to Clark-Cutler-
McDermott Company. Roofing system and needle punched impreg-
nated synthetic fiber fabric. 4.393.634. CI. 52-309.100.
McDonnell Douglas Corporation: See —
Randall, John R., 4,393,730, CI. 74-538.000.
Richman, David W.; and Walker, Charles D.. 4,394.246. CI.
204-301.000.
McGalliard, James D. Printed circuit fuse assembly. 4,394,639, CI.
337-292.000.
McGilvray, Bruce L.: See—
Flusche, Frederick O.; Gustafson, Richard N.; and McGilvray,
Bruce L., 4,394,731, CI. 364-200.000.
Mcintosh, Walter L.; and Street, John N., to LogEtronics, Inc. Color
photoprinting with a scanning memory mask. 4,394,089, CI.
355-88.000.
McKenzie. James A.; and Peterson. Joe W., to Motorola, Inc. CMOS
Differential comparator with hysteresis. 4,394,587, CI. 307-355.000.
McKinney. Osborne K.; and Flores, David P.. to Dow Chemical Com-
pany, The. Product and process for reducing block and increasing
slip of linear low density ethylene copolymer films. 4,394,474. CI.
524-232.000.
McMahon, William; and Jensen, Bernard. Fiberoptic-lighted optical
apparatus. 4,394,074, CI. 351-206.000.
McMurray, John H.; and Miller, Jule, to Avco Corporation. Brazing
filler metal composition and process. 4,394.347. CI. 420-453.000.
Mead Johnson & Company: See —
Madding. Gary D.. 4.394,507. CI. 546-185.000.
Meadox Instruments. Inc.: See—
Kahn. Alan R.. 4.393.878. CI. 128-748.000.
Measuregraph Company. The: See —
Shalon. Tadmor. 4.394.740. CI. 364-464.000.
Mecilec: See —
Guillemot. Philippe. 4.393.713. CI. 73-701.000.
Medtronic. Inc.: See —
Smyth. Nicholas P. D.; Lesniak. Jeanne M.; and Stokes, Kenneth
B.. 4,393,883. CI. 128-785.000.
Mehra, Ravinder C; and Aggarwal. Raj K.. to Sybron Corporation.
Pressure filter adapter and containment vessel. 4,394.266. CI.
210-244.000.
Meier. Hans, to Sulzer Brothers Limited. Piston compressor. 4,393,752.
CI. 92-86.000.
Meindl, Hubert: See —
Strasilla. Dieter; Moldovanyi. Laszio; Fearnley. Charles; and
Meindl. Hubert. 4.393.886. CI. 132-7.000.
Meitzler. Allen H.; Donlon. William T.. Jr.; and Schinozaki. Samuel S..
to Ford Motor Company. Titanium dioxide rectifier. 4.394.672. CI.
357-10.000.
Mekuchi. Yutaka: See —
Kishida. Katsuhiro; Mekuchi. Yutaka; Hirao, Sumio; and Date,
Hirohiko. 4.394.560. CI. 219-137.0WM.
Melrose. James C: See —
Savins. Joseph G.; and Melrose, James C, 4,393,934. CI.
166-261.000.
Melville. James B.. to Lever Brothers Company. Method of depositing
perfume and compositions therefor. 4,394.127, CI. 8-137.000.
Menasha Corporation: See —
Stevens. Bruce W . 4.394.096. CI. 403-408.000.
Mendez. Luis E.: See —
Ross. Richard J.; and Mendez. Luis E.. 4.393.930. CI. 166-188.000.
Menezes. William A.; and Kuper. Douglas D.. to Sony Corporation.
Video editing apparatus. 4.394.745, CI. 364-900.000.
Menna. Raymond J.: See —
Kumar. Mahesh; Menna. Raymond J.; and Huang. Ho-Chung.
4,394.629. CI. 333-109.000.
Mercer. Frank B.. to P.L.G. Research Limited. Forming plastic articles
having strands by stretching. 4.394.342. CI. 264-292.000.
Mercer. Paul A., to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated. Tone
generation method and apparatus using stored reference calibration
coefficients. 4.394.743. CI. 364-514.000.
Merck & Co.. Inc.: See —
Cragoe. Edward J.. Jr.. 4.394.385. CI. 424-285.000.
Rokach. Joshua; Rooney. Clarence S.; and Cragoe. Edward J.. Jr..
4.394.515. CI. 549-12.000.
Mergel. Jurgen: See —
Divisek. Jiri; and Mergel, Jurgen. 4.394.244. CI 204-295.000.
Merila. Jouni A., to Luossavaara-Kiirunavaara AB. Contact sealing.
4.394.021. CI. 277-34.300.
Merix Corporation: See —
Mix. Thomas W.; and Dweck. Jay S.. 4.394.219. CI. 203-1.000.
Merlino. Paul J.: See —
Fry. Warren C; Franz. James H.; and Meriino. Paul J.. 4.394.724.
CI. 363-124.000.
Merritt. Robert C; and Terwilliger. Gerald L.. lo Eaton Corporation
Linkage mechanism for supercharger system. 4.393.852. CI
123-564.000.
Metal Box Limited: See —
Ball. Martin F.; and Fidler. Fred. 4.393.979. CI. 220-270.000.
Micro-Plate. Inc.; See —
Eidschun. Charles D.. 4.393.705. CI. 73-439.000.
Mid-Continent Aircraft Corporation: See —
Cook, Richard J.; and Reade. Richard. 4.394.108. CI. 414-680.000
Middleton. William J., to Du Pont de Nemours. E I., and Company
Fluorinaled carbamate insecticides. 4.394.386. CI. 424-298 000
Midland Steel Products: See—
Satava. George L.; and Deemer. Carroll L.. 4.394.194. CI.
148-131.000.
Mierzwa. George A.: See —
Muzumdar. Deepak; Mierzwa. George A ; Sanders. Richard: and
Van der Meiden. Orrie J.. 4.394.757. CI 370-100 000
Mijot. Guy; Derycke. Leon; Dienne. Didier; and Martinot. Roger, to
Attelages Lemoine - La Mecano - Soudure Remoise. Vehicle-sup-
ported three-point coupling and position responsive fluid blocking
device therefor. 4.393.942. CI, 172-2.000.
Miles Laboratories. Inc.: See —
Brock. David A.; and Gupta. Surendra K.. 4.394,450, CI
435-191.000.
Cameron, Erma C; Gunter. Claude R.; and White-Stevens. Rodric
H.. 4.394,444, CI. 435-11.000.
Milex Products, Inc.: See —
Milgrom, Hyman T., 4,393,879. CI. 128-758.000.
Milford. George N.. Jr.. to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company
Bead polymerization process for preparing polybenzimidazole.
4.394.500. CI. 528-313.000.
Milgrom. Hyman T.. to Milex Products. Inc. Tissue-collecting appara-
tus. 4,393,879, CI. 128-758.000.
PI 24
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Miller. Conrad E., to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Post-
stretch water-dispersible subbing composition for polyester film base.
4,394,442. CI. 430-532.000.
Miller, Edward F.: See—
Marshall. Richard A.; and Miller, Edward R, 4,393,695, CI.
73-117.300.
Miller. Gerald O.. See-
Anderson. Charles N.; Elrod. Samuel D.; and Miller, Gerald O.,
4,393.987, CI. 228-157.000.
Miller, J. Wayne; and Simpson, Howard D., to Union Oil Company of
California. Hydrodesulfurization catalyst on lithium-containing sup-
port and method for its preparation. 4,394,302, CI. 252-465.000.
Miller, Jule: See—
McMurray, John H.; and Miller, Jule, 4,394,347, CI. 420-453.000.
Miller Paul B.; and Miller, Tony C. R. Pool cleaning apparatus.
4,393,526, CI. 4-490.000.
Miller, Stephen J., to Chevron Research Company. Hydrocarbon
conversion with crystalline silicate particle having an aluminum-con-
taining outer shell. 4,394,251, CI. 208-1 1 1.000.
Miller. Stephen J., to Chevron Research Company. Crystalline silicate
particle having an aluminum-containing outer shell. 4,394,362, CI.
423-328.000.
Miller, Tony C. R. See— __
Miller, Paul B.; and Miller, Tony C. R.. 4.393,526, CI. 4-490.000.
Miller. William A.: See-
Chung. Daniel C; Miller. William A.; and Baumgaerlner. Eugene
R.. 4.394,460, CI. 521-92.000.
Millick, William H.. Ill, to Hercofina. Partially hydrolyzed, DMT
process residue, and useful propylene oxide derivative thereof
4.394,286, CI. 252-182.000.
Milliken Research Corporation: See—
Satterfield. Larry S., 4,393,725, CI. 73-862.410.
Stokes. Jimmy L., 4,393,562, CI. 26-2.00R.
Millman. William V.: See-
Mayo. Henry C; and Millman. William V., 4,393,745, CI. 89-1.806.
Milner. Peter H.: See—
Bentley. Peter H.; Hardy. Kenneth D.; and Milner, Peter H..
4.394,375, CI. 424-114.000.
Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company: See-
Beck, Warren R.. 4,393,901. CI. 138-145.000.
Brown, Harvey A.; and Huffman, William A., 4.394,070, CI.
350-349.000.
Gatzke, Kenneth G., 4,394,433, CI. 430-151.000.
Hogenson, Raymond A., 4,394,010, CI. 271-22.000.
Nygard, James C; Weiss, Melvin P.; and Larsen. Thomas E.,
4,393,804, CI. 118-60.000.
Rohloff, Robert R., 4,394,434, CI. 430-270.000.
Smith, George H., 4,394,403, CI. 427-42.000.
Minolta Camera Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Hanamoto, Hiroyuki; and Horie, Yoshihiro, 4,394,088, CI. 355-
14.00R.
Irie, Yutaka; Nagata, Kenzo; and Ito, Hideo, 4.394.087, CI. 355-
14.00E.
Miracle Recreation Equipment Company: See —
Ahrens. Claude W., 4,393,812, CI. 119-16.000.
Mirowski, Mieczyslaw: See —
Imran, Mir; and Kolenik, Steve, 4,393,877. CI. 128-705.000.
Miskowski. Richard L.: See —
McAfee, Richard C; Adkins, James; and Miskowski, Richard L.,
4,394,317, CI. 260-429.00R.
Missouri Research Laboratories, Inc.: See —
Frees, Kenneth A.; and Quick, Thomas E., 4,394,106, CI.
414-622.000.
Mitchell, Gordon B. Tipping trailer. 4,394,105, CI. 414-436.000.
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Ishii. Toshiaki, 4,394,721, CI. 363-44.000.
Kato, Masahisa; Kasugai, Syouji; and Gouda, Osamu, 4,393,801, CI.
112-282.000.
Shima, Kenji; and Hibino, Masahiro, 4,394.536. CI. 179-l.OOG.
Shima, Kenji; and Hibino, Masahiro, 4,394,537, CI. 179-l.OCG.
Wakamiya, Yoshinori; Hamasaki, Yoshiharu; Kutsuzawa, Masaki;
and Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha, 4,394,121, CI.
432-11.000.
Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Shima, Michitsune; Kihara, Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu. Kenji. 4.393.920. CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Mitsubishi Petrochemical Company Limited: See —
Fuwa. Masaru. 4,394,338, CI. 264-135.000.
Mitsui Aluminum Co., Ltd.: See —
Kuwahara, Kenshi, 4,394.167, CI. 75-68.0OA.
Miura, Norio: See—
Takahashi, Kenji; Yamazaki, Hisashi; Miyahara, Junji; Kotera,
Noboru; Eguchi, Shusaku; and Miura, Norio, 4,394,581, CI.
250-484. 100.
Mix, Thomas W.; and Dweck. Jay S., to Merix Corporation. Fractionat-
ing liquids. 4,394,219, CI. 203-1.000.
Miya, Kazuhiko: See —
Sato, Kanemasa; Ueno. Sadayasu; and Miya. Kazuhiko, 4,393,697,
CI. 73-118.000.
Miyahara, Junji: See —
Takahashi, Kenji; Yamazaki, Hisashi; Miyahara. Junji; Kotera.
Noboru; Eguchi, Shusaku; and Miura, Norio. 4.394.581. CI.
250-484.100.
Miyake. Mikio; Kitoh. Shinya; and Hayashi, Satoshi, to Lion Corpora-
tion. Dental filling material. 4,394,494, CI. 526-301.000.
Miyake, Tetsuya; Takeda, Kunihiko; Onitsuka, Hatsuki; Okuyama,
Kazuo; and Shimamura, Yasuki, to Asahi Kasei Kogyo Kabushiki
CI.
24-
Kaisha. Separation of rare earth metals using a cation exchanger.
4,394,353, CI. 423-21.500.
Miyao, Masanobu: See —
Wada, Yasuo; Usui, Hiroo; Ohkura, Makoto; Miyao, Masanobu;
Tamura. Masao; and Tokuyama. Takashi, 4.394.191, CI.
148-33.100.
Miyazaki, Takashi: See —
Ozawa, Masakazu; Watanabe, Kunio; Matsumoto, Shigeyuki; Ni-
shimura, Yukuo; and Miyazaki, Takashi, 4.394.669, CI. 346-
140.00R.
Miyazaki, Yoshihisa, to Nissin Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Vacuum
actuated type booster device. 4,393,749, CI. 91-376.0OR.
Mizokami, Kazunori. to Olympus Optical Company Ltd. Photctelectric
conversion circuit. 4,394,570. CI. 250-209.000.
Mizusawa, Akira: See —
Yuda, Takuo; and Mizusawa, Akira. 4,393,556, CI. 24-230.00R.
Mobay Chemical Corporation: See-
Allen, Gary F., 4,394,522, CI. 564-451.000.
Allen. Gary F., 4,394,523, CI. 564-451.000.
Mobbs, David B.: See —
Mounsey. Diana M.; and Mobbs, David B., 4,394,357, CI.
423-140.000.
Moberg, Gregory O., to Eastman Kodak Company. Current control
apparatus for a flyback capacitor charger. 4,394,719. CI. 363-18.000.
Mobil Oil Corporation: See —
Andress, Harry J., 4,394,135, CI. 44-71.000.
Chu, Chin C; and Kaeding, Warren W., 4,394,300, CI. 252-455.00Z.
Horodysky, Andrew G.; and Kaminski, Joan M., 4,394,278, CI.
252-46.300.
Rowe, Carleton N., 4,394.134. CI. 44-62.000.
Savins, Joseph G.; and Melrose, James C, 4,393,934,
166-261.000.
Shen, Roderick C. 4,394.249, CI. 208-89.000.
Modderkolk, Rutger: See —
Herwegh, Karl J.; and Modderkolk, Rutger. 4,393,558, CI.
230.00R.
Modrovich, Ivan E. Stabilization of coenzymes in aqueous solution.
4,394,449, CI. 435-188.000.
Mohr, Richard A.: See—
Berkowitz, Sidney; and Mohr. Richard A.. 4,394,361, CI. 423-
321.0OS.
Mohrle, Werner: See —
Drews, Ulrich; Werner, Peter; and Mohrle, Werner, 4.393.841, CI.
123-440.000.
Mol, Hans C; and Byrne, LeRoy H., to Pitney Bowes Inc. Fluid supply
and dispensing apparatus. 4,393,894, CI. 137-454.000.
Moldovanyi, Laszlo: See —
Strasilla, Dieter; Moldovanyi, Laszlo; Fearnley, Charles; and
Meindl, Hubert, 4,393,886. CI. 132-7.000.
Mollier, Pierre: See —
Boudon, Gerard; Denis, Bernard; de Grivel, Virginie; and Mollier,
Pierre, 4,394.752, CI. 365-227.000.
Mollier, Pierre B.: See —
Grandguillot, Michel J.; Mollier, Pierre B.; and Nuez, Jean-Paul J.,
4,394.747, CI. 365-104.000.
Monsanto Company: See—
Serlin. Irving. 4.394.479, CI. 524-459.000.
Montalto, Anthony R.; Scerbo, Louis J.; and Starace, Jeremia P., to Bell
Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated. Electrical access tool for
engaging recessed test points. 4,394,620, CI. 324-149.000.
Mooradian, Gregory C, to United States of America, Navy. Balloon
collector/director sunsubsatcom concept. 4,394,780, CI. 455-618.000.
Moore, Constance R. Refrigerated lip stick container. 4.393,975, CI.
206-385.000.
Moore, James W., to Deere & Company. Rear bagger attachment for
lawn mower. 4,393,645, CI. 56-202.000.
Moore, Mae Lois: See —
Bodmin, Syd E.. 4,393.811, CI. 119-14.470.
Morand, Alfred: See— _^
Rostagno, Walter; and Morand, Alfred, 4,394,395, CI. 426-285.000.
Mori, Kazuyuki: See — ^^
Suzuki, Kouichi; and Mori, Kazuyuki. 4.394.739, CI. 364-426.000.
Mori, Keiichi; Ueda, Yasukiyo; and Mori, Keijiro, to Matsushita Elec-
tric Industrial Co., Ltd. Combustion control system. 4,393,858, CI.
126-351.000.
Mori, Keijiro: See—
Mori. Keiichi; Ueda. Yasukiyo; and Mori, Keijiro. 4.393,858, CI.
126-351.000.
Morimoto, Kiyoshi; and Takagi, Toshinori, to Futaba Denshi Kogyo
K.K. Process for forming a lead film. 4,394,210, CI. 156-608.000.
Morioka, Akitoshi: See —
Yoshino, Tsunemi; Kashihara, Toshitsugu; Iwata, Hiroshi; and
Morioka, Akitoshi, 4,394,077, CI. 354-25.000.
Morisaki, Hiroshi: See—
Homma, Yoshio; Tsunekawa, Sukeyoshi; Morisaki, Hiroshi; and
Harada, Seiki, 4,394,245, CI. 204-298.000.
Morooka, Shinichi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Water
level gauge for a nuclear reactor. 4,394,346, CI. 376-258.000.
Morozumi. Shinji. to Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha. Dynamic di-
vider circuit. 4.394.586, CI. 377-105.000.
Morris. Hal C. to Rohm and Haas Company. Method of sizing polyes-
ter yam. 4,394,128, CI. 8-138.000.
Morrison, Dennis J.: See —
Grunes, Howard E.; and Morrison, Dennis J., 4,393,663, CI.
62-119.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 25
Morrow, Stanley J.: See —
Bertelsman. Dale M.; Eckert. William M.; and Morrow. Stanley J..
4.394.455, CI. 501-117.000.
Moser, Gottfried: See —
Fischer. Friedrich B.; and Moser, Gottfried. 4.393,824. CI 123-
196.0AB
Moser. Helmut, to Sandoz Ltd. Copper phthalocyanines having trime-
thylammoniummethyl groups as paper dyes. 4.394.130, CI. 8-661.000
Moser. Henry D.. to Texaco Inc. System for controlling clarification of
boiler feed water and the like. 4.394,261, CI. 210-96.100.
Moshofsky. Jerome F.: See —
Jacobsen, Kenneth J.; and Moshofsky, Jerome F.. 4,393.925, CI.
165-122.000.
Mosier. Leo D. Wood roof truss construction. 4.393,637, CI. 52-644.000.
Motorola, Inc.: See —
Borras, Jaime A.; Gonzalez, Ruben J.; Smith. Daniel M.; and
Wieczorek, Alfred B., 4.394.776. CI. 455-76.000.
Campbell, Jules D.. Jr., 4,394,748. CI. 365-104.000.
Gercekci, Anil, 4,394.750. CI. 365-218.000.
Helda. Robert W., deceased; Hazeltine. Cynthia, executor; and
Liaw. H. Ming. 4,394,352, CI. 422-232.000.
McKenzie. James A.; and Peterson. Joe W.. 4,394,587. CI.
307-355.000.
Winchell, Vern H., II; Scharr. Thomas A.; and Clark. Lowell E.,
4,394,678. CI. 357-68.000.
Zwald, Henry J.. 4,393,583, CI. 29-857.000.
Motsinger. Donald L.: See-
Brown. Daniel G.; and Motsinger. Donald L.. 4,394,414, CI.
428-288.000.
Motz, Karl: See—
Kreissl, Ottmar; Schurrer. Josef; Motz. Karl; Leitgeb, Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg. Heinz. 4.394.582. CI. 290-4.00C.
Moulding. Michael B.; Muller. Klaus; and Mack. Gerhard, to Fprd
Motor Company. Sun visor. 4.394.043. CI. 296-97.00H.
Mounsey. Diana M.; and Mobbs. David B.. to Interox Chemicals Ltd.
Separation of cobalt and nickel by oxidative precipitation with perox-
ymonosulfuric acid. 4,394,357, CI. 423-140.000.
Mowbray, Dorian F.; Fenne. Ivor; and Cavanagh. Eric J., to Lucas
Industries Limited. Fuel pumping apparatus. 4,393,846, CI.
123-502.000.
Moyce, John J.: See—
Hutt, Peter R.; and Moyce, John J.. 4.394.687. CI. 358-147.000.
Mueller. Warren E.: See —
Marossy, Gabor; and Mueller. Warren E.. 4.393,859. CI
126-429.000.
Muller. Klaus; Linder. Ernst; and Maurer. Helmut, to Robert Bosch
GmbH. Sensor arrangement. 4,393,687, CI. 73-35.000.
Muller, Klaus: See-
Moulding. Michael B.; Muller. Klaus: and Mack. Gerhard.
4,394,043, CI. 296-97.00H.
Muller, Manfred: See —
Gotze, Gerd-Wolfgang; and Muller, Manfred. 4.394,627, CI.
331-6^.000.
Muller, Rolf: See—
Schmider, Fritz; and Muller. Rolf. 4.394,594, CI. 310-68.00R.
Muller, Rudi; and Loser, Wolfgang, to Vesuvius International Corpora-
tion. Ladle shroud support assembly. 4,393.985, CI. 222-591.000.
Muller, Werner; and Bunemann. Hans, to Boehringer Mannheim
GmbH. Adsorbent for the affinity-specific separation of macromolec-
ular materials. 4,394,487, CI. 525-281.000.
Munchberg, Wolfgang: See—
Rosener, Karlheinz; Roeder, Alfred; Munchberg. Wolfgang; Ri-
chrath. Herbert; and Chmiel. Max. 4.394.454. CI. 501-1 12.000.
Munro, John H. Exhaust system for internal combustion engines.
4,393.652, CI. 60-295.000.
Munsch, Paul: See—
Scheuble, Max; and Munsch, Paul, 4,394,172. CI. 106-38.50D.
Munz, Johann, to Team Form AG. Arrangement for mounting a door
4,393,623, CI. 49-248.000.
Murakami. Kazuya, to Takara Co., Ltd. Rocket train toy assembly.
4,393,620. CI. 46-201.000.
Murata Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See—
Sakabe, Yukio; and Nishioka, Goro, 4,394,456, CI. 501-138.000.
Murata, Masayoshi: See —
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi, Hisashi; Murata, Masayoshi; and Yoshi-
oka, Akiteru, 4,394,384, CI. 424-246.000.
Murayama, Hideo: See—
Tanaka, Eiichi; Nohara, Norimasa; Murayama. Hideo; Ishimatsu.
Kenji; Ogushi, Akira; and Takami, Katsumi, 4.394.576, CI.
250-366.000.
Murch, Mason D. Doll eye having insert forming the iris. 4,393,619, CI.
46-165.000.
Murphy, James E.; and Reid. Kenneth H.. to General Motors Corpora-
tion. Belt clamp for retractor. 4.394,034. CI. 280-801.000.
Murphy, Robert P. Floating knife assembly for a meat defatting ma-
chine. 4,393,761, CI. 99-589.000.
Musaev, Irsali K.: See—
Golovanov, Alexandr V.; Eschenko, Vladislav Y.; Musaev, Irsali
K.; and Talibdzhanov. Zakhidzhan S., 4,394,120. CI 431-284.000.
Muscatell, Ralph P. Thermal and vacuum tracking carburetor jet with
electronic comrol. 4,393.838, CI. 123-435.000.
Muse, John F.; Callihan, Rudy B.; Goad, Bobby F.; and Wamwright.
Clyde S., Jr., to Baker International Corporation. Combination hy-
draulically set hanger assembly with expansion joint. 4,393.931, CI.
166-208.000.
Muskulus, Willi, to Balzer & Droll KG. Method and device for winding
stators or the like. 4.393,904. CI. 140-92.100.
Muzumdar. Deepak; Mierzwa, George A ; Sanders, Richard; and Van
der Meiden, Orrie J , to Siemens Corporation Frame format for
PCM speech data in a telephone transmission system and digital
telephone apparatus for use with this frame format. 4.394,757, CI.
370-100.000.
Nabeshima. Daiki. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha Pulse-
ccxle modulation signal priKessing circuit. 4.394.762. CI 371-38.000.
Nabisco Brands. Inc.: See-
Anderson, Richard J.; and Leippe. Michael M., 4,394,154, CI.
71-92.000.
See—
L.; and->Jaderhoff, Bryan A.. 4.394.497. CI.
Nagai, Kunio; and Honma. Juri. 4.394,691, CI.
Naderhoff, Bryan A.
Nelson. Donald
528-101.000.
Nagai, Kunio: See —
Amano. Toshio:
358-194.100.
Nagakura. Masahiko: See—
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda. Hisashi, Kawamura. Kiyoshi; Sato.
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida. Yasumi. 4.394.382. CI. 424-283.000.
Naganawa. Hiroshi: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Shimada, Nobuyoshi; Naganawa. Hiroshi;
Takita. Tomohisa; Hamada. Masa; and Takeuchi. Tomio.
4.394.446. CI. 435-88.000
Nagano. Genzo; and Takahashi, Masao, to Fujitsu Limited. Error-cor-
recting system. 4.394.763, CI. 371-38.000.
Nagata. Kenzo: See—
Irie. Yutaka; Nagata. Kenzo; and Ito. Hideo. 4,394.087. CI. 355-
14.00E.
Nagata. Wataru: See—
Kamala. Susumu; and Nagata. Wataru. 4,394,505, CI 544-91.000
Nagelkerke. Petrus J J., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Dry-shaving
apparatus with hair-trimmmg means. 4.393.585. CI. 30-34.100,
Nair, Kumaran M., to Du Pom de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Thick
film conductor comptisitiohs. 4,394,171. CI. 106-1.140.
Naito. Mitsuo. Air-cotiled cables with terminals and methixl of produc-
ing same. 4.394.533. CI. 174-74.00R.
Naito. Tadashi. to Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha Apparatus and
method for detecting crank shaft orientation and valve assembly in an
internal combustion engine. 4.393.693. CI. 73-116.000.
Naito. Takayuki: See—
Kamachi. Hajime; Okumura. Jun; Naito, Takayuki; and Oka,
Masahisa. 4.394.503. CI. 544-25.000.
Naka. Motohiko: See —
Yoshida. Kunio; Kotera. Hiroaki; Tsuda. Yukifumi; Kanno. Yo-
shimitsu; and Naka. Motohiko. 4.394.662. CI 346-33 OOR.
Nakamura. Kazuo. to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Focus
detecting method and apparatus 4.394.569, CI. 250-204.000.
Nakamura. Michio: See—
Komatsu. Shigeru: and Nakamura. Michio, 4,394,436. CI.
430-311.000.
Nakano, Junji: See —
Shimamura. Tadao; Nakano. Junji; and Seo, Yasufumi, 4,394,336,
CI. 264-109.000.
Nakata, Yukihiko: See—
Takeda, Mikio; Kakihara, Yoshinobu; Yoshida, Masaru; and
Nakata, Yukihiko. 4.394.601. CI. 313-509.000.
Nakatsu. Yoshinobu. to Hitachi. Ltd Card reading apparatus. 4.394.568.
CI. 235-475.000.
Nakayama. Shigeru: See—
Nishikawa. Masaji; Amemiya. Norio; Yasuda. Tadahiro; and Naka-
yama. Shigeru. 4.394.427. CI. 430-68.000.
Nakayama. Tadashi: See—
Harase. Jirou; and Nakayama. Tadashi. 4,394,188, CI 148-12.0EA
Naki. Minoru: See —
Satoh. Shingo; Inoue. Takashi; Naki. Minoru; and Kawauchi. Yuji.
4.394.165. CI. 75-60.000.
Napco. Inc.: See—
Scanlon. George R.. 4,394,241. CI. 204-198.000
Nappholz, Tibor A.; Hinch. Barry; and Shaw. David B.. to Telectronics
Pty. Ltd Bradycardia event counting and reporting pacer 4,393,874,
CI 128-419.0PT
Narasaka, Shin: See —
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa. Shumpei.
4.393.842. CI. 123-440.000
Otsuka. Kazuo; Narasaka. Shin; and Hasegawa. Shumpei.
4.393.843. CI. 123-440.000.
Nation. Robert H.: See-
Anderson, Forest L.; and Nation, Robert H., 4,393,656, CI
60-618 000.
National Institute of Radiological Sciences: See—
Tanaka. Eiichi; Nohara. Norimasa; Murayama. Hideo; Ishimatsu.
Kenji; Ogushi. Akira; and Takami. Katsumi. 4.394.576, CI.
250-366.000.
National Research Development Corporation: See-
Green. Geoffrey W.; and Lettington. Alan H.. 4.394,400, CI
427-38.000.
National Semiconductor Corptiration: See—
Dunkley, James L.; and Dobkin. Robert C, 4,393,575, CI
29-571.000.
Nava, Louis J.; and Ewing, Neal L.. to Foremost-McKesson. Inc
Process for producing dry discrete agglomerated garlic and onion
and resulting products. 4,394,394, CI. 426-285.000.
1032 OG.— 50
PI 26
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
, Jr.; and Nelson, Conrad E.,
Navarro. Ramon. Method for attaching wooden forms to a concrete
surface. 4.393.568. CI. 29-432.000.
Nawash, Michael S.; Stillman. Suzanne; and Mason. Robert S. Gastros-
tomy and other percutaneous transport tubes. 4,393.873. CI.
604-151.000.
NCR Canada Ltd. - NCR Canada Ltee: See—
Osmera. Miroslav S.; and Brooks, Ralf M., 4,394.092. CI.
400-120.000.
NCR Corporation: See —
Armstrong. Rolfe D.. 4.394,729. CI. 364-200.000.
Nederlandse Pillo-Pak Maatschappij B.V.: See —
Herwegh. Karl J.; and Modderkolk, Rutger. 4,393,558, CI. 24-
230.00R.
Nelson, Conrad E.: See —
Kenyon, S. Wayne; Geyer, Bernard H
4,394.630. CI. 333-116.000.
Nelson, Donald L.; and Naderhoff, Bryan A., to Dow Chemical Com-
pany. The. Solid materials prepared from epKJxy resins and phenolic
hydroxyl-containing materials. 4.394.497. CI. 528-101.000.
Nelson. Gerald V.: See —
Lewis. Paul H.; and Nelson, Gerald V., 4,394,254, CI. 2O8-310.0OZ.
Nelson. Loren D., to Ophir Corporation. Apparatus for measuring
vapor density, gas temperature, and saturation ratio. 4,394.575, CI.
250-343.000.
Nero. Leroy W.. to RCA Corporation. Television receiver high voltage
generator. 4.394,722. CI. 363-68.000.
Neukirch. Edward O.: See—
Fallon, William H.; Schober. William R.; Neukirch. Edward O.;
and Kirby. Donald W.. 4.394.611, CI. 320-21.000.
Nicastro, Norman J. Combination visor and sweatband. 4,393,519, CI.
2-12.000.
Nicholas, Keith H.. to U.S. Philips Corporation. Methods of manufac-
tunng a semiconductor device having a channel region spaced inside
channel stoppers. 4.394.181. CI. 148-1.500.
Nicolas. Edgard. to Solvay & Cie. Cathode for the electrolytic produc-
tion of hydrogen. 4.394.231, CI. 204-129.000.
Nieboer, Gerrit. to U.S. Philips Corporation. Play-free hook-type
connection. 4.394.054. CI. 312-7.200.
Niedecker. Herbert. Device for closing gathered ends of wrappers with
U-shaped clips. 4.393.641. CI. 53-138.00A.
Nielsen. Eyvind S.: See —
Pedersen. Niels R.; and Nielsen. Eyvind S., 4,393,815, CI. 122-
31.00R.
Niezgoda, Thomas A.; and Oppenheimer. Carl P.. to Wurlitzer Com-
pany, The. Programmable tone generator. 4.393.740. CI. 84-1.010.
Nifco. Inc.: See —
Yuda. Takuo; and Mizusawa. Akira. 4,393.556, CI. 24-23O.0OR.
Yuda. Takuo. 4.393.561. CI. 24-297.000.
Nihon Den-Nitsu Keiki Co., Ltd.: See—
Kondo, Kenshi, 4,393,525, CI. 4-420.200.
Nihon Nosan Kogyo K.K.: See^
Kamimae, Hiroshi; and Ishikawa, Tadashi.
424-150.000.
Ninomiya, Ichiro; and Takayama. Jun, to Sony Corporation
synchronizing apparatus 4,394.694. CI 360-14.300.
Nippon Denso Company Limited: See —
Kono. Hiroya; Hasegawa. Jun; Inagaki. Mitsukane; and Kobayashi,
Hisao, 4.393,966, CI. 192-56.00R.
Nippon Electric Co., Ltd.: See —
Hara, Michio; Tomimori, Akinobu; and Hara, Hiroshi, 4,394,542,
CI. 179.81.00B.
Sakuma. Hiraku; and Suzuki. Toshiyuki. 4,394.674, CI. 357-23.000.
Yoshida, Kazunori, 4,394,713. CI. 361-433.000.
Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Wachi. Masatada. 4.393.742. CI. 84-1.230.
Wachi. Masatada, 4,393,743, CI. 84-1.230.
Nippon Kogaku K.K.: See —
Wakamiya, Koichi, 4.394,073, CI. 350-465.000.
Nippon Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Nomura. Hirokazu; Sugitani. Yuji; and Suzuki. Yasuo. 4.394.559,
CI. 219-125.120.
Tamura, Manabu; Kamernura, Yoshiki; and
4,393.677. CI. 72-97.000.
Nippon Oil and Fats Company, Limited: See —
Sawaoka. Akira; Araki. Masatada; Saito. Shinroku; and Akashi,
Tamotsu, 4.394.170, CI. 75-233.000.
Takeuchi, Fumio; and Takahashi. Masao. 4.394.198
Ujikawa. Norihisa; and Fukushi. Kyosuke,
525-43.000.
Nippon Piston Ring Co.. Ltd.: See —
Urano. Shigeru. 4.393.821. CI. 123-195.00C.
Nippon Seiko Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Tukamoto. Masahiro, 4.393.995. CI. 242-107.40A.
Nippon Sheet Glass Co. Ltd.: See—
Fujioka. Akira; Sakiyama. Kazuo; Takigawa, Akio; and Yoshida,
Motoaki, 4,394.177. CI. 106-287.140.
Nippon Soken. Inc.: See —
Kohama. Tokio; Obayashi. Hideki; Kawai. Hisasi; and Egami.
Tsuneyuki. 4.393.702. CI. 73-204.000.
Nishida. Minoru; Hattori. Tadashi; and Tanaka. Akira, 4,393,850,
CI. 123-536.000.
Nippon Steel Corporation: See —
Furukawa, Takashi; and Koyama, Kazuo, 4,394,186, CI. 148-
12.00F.
Harase, Jirou; and Nakayama, Tadashi, 4,394,188, CI. 148-12.0EA.
4,394,376, CI.
Tape
Handa, Masao,
,C1. 149-21.000.
4,394,480, CI.
Method of
8, CI. 114-
Satoh. Shingo; Inoue. Takashi; Naki, Minoru; and Kawauchi, Yuji,
4,394,165, CI. 75-60.000.
Nippon Telecommunication Engineering Company: See —
Asano, Kiyomitsu; Jozuka, Masao; and Kondo, Toshikatsu,
4,394,093, CI. 400-124.000.
Nippon Telegraph & Telephone Public Corp.: See —
Imai. Kazuo, 4,393,577. CI. 29-576.00B.
Kato. Kotaro; and Sakurai, Tetsuma, 4,393,573, CI. 29-571.000.
Nippondenso Co., Ltd.: See —
Terazawa, Hidehito, 4,394.605, CI. 318-280.000.
Nishida, Minoru; Hattori, Tadashi; and Tanaka, Akira, to Nippon
Soken, Inc. Ignition system for internal combustion engines.
4,393,850, CI. 123-536.000.
Nishihara, Toshio: See—
Yamamoto, Hideomi; Watanabe, Haruzo; Kishie, Hidehiko; and
Nishihara, Toshio, 4,394,412, CI. 428-174.000.
Nishikawa, Masaji; Amemiya, Norio; Yasuda, Tadahiro; and Naka-
yama, Shigeru, to Olympus Optical Company Limited. Electrophoto-
graphic sensitizing screen with peripherally clogged apertures.
4,394,427, CI. 430-68.000.
Nishikawa, Masaji. to Olympus Optical Company Limited. Method for
printing a plurality of duplicated copies from the same electrostatic
charge latent image. 4.394.432, CI. 430-120.000.
Nishimura, Yukuo: See —
Gzawa, Masakazu; Watanabe, Kunio; Matsumoto. Shigeyuki; Ni-
shimura, Yukuo; and Miyazaki, Takashi, 4,394,669, CI. 346-
140.00R.
Nishioka. Goro: See —
Sakabe. Yukio; and Nishioka, Goro, 4,394,456, CI. 501-138.000.
Nissan Motor Co., Ltd.: See —
Izumi, Masao; Yoshida, Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa, Yukio, 4,393,897,
CI. 137-831.000.
Izumi, Masao; Yoshida, Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa, Yukio, 4,393,898,
CI. 137-831.000.
Kataoka, Ryuji, 4,393,839, CI. 123-440.000.
Kishida, Katsuhiro; Mekuchi, Yutaka; Hirao, Sumio; and Date,
Hirohiko, 4.394,560. CI. 219-137.0WM.
Sato. Yoshimi. 4.394,035. CI. 280-804.000.
Sugihara. Kunihiko; and Onoda. Michio. 4,393,837, CI.
123-425.000.
Suzuki, Kouichi; and Mori, Kazuyuki, 4,394,739, CI. 364-426.000.
Suzuki, Tadashi; and Kishi, Norimasa, 4,393,732, CI. 74-866.000.
Nissin Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Miyazaki, Yoshihisa. 4.393,749, CI. 91-376.00R.
Nivin, James E., to American Commercial Barge Line Co
protecting contents of a barge while in transit. 4,393,8
201. OOR.
Nix, Paul T.; Santoro, Janet M.; and Stephens, Joyce E. Enzymatic
glyceride hydrolysis. 4,394,445, CI. 435-19.000.
NL Industries, Inc.: See —
Hoff, Michael H.. 4.394,273, CI. 252-8.55R.
NL Sperry Sun. Inc.: See —
Powell. Steven W.; and Stockton, James G., 4.393.598, CI.
33-302.000.
Noguchi, Takeshi: See —
Kimura, Tadatomo; and Noguchi, Takeshi. 4.394.596. CI.
310-184.000.
Nohara. Norimasa: See—
Tanaka, Eiichi; Nohara, Norimasa; Murayama, Hideo; Ishimatsu,
Kenji; Ogushi. Akira; and Takami, Katsumi, 4,394,576, CI.
250-366.000.
Nolden, Werner, to American Standard Inc. Tub filling and shower
valve. 4.393.523, CI. 4-192.000.
Nolker, Dieter: See —
Maurer, Alexander; Adrian. Renate; Panter. Herbert; Heymer.
Gero; and Nolker. Dieter. 4.394,358. CI. 423-305.000.
Nolte. Kenneth G.; and Smith, Michael B.. to Standard Oil Company
(Indiana). Determination of maximum fracture pressure. 4,393,933,
CI 166-250.000.
Nomura, Hirokazu; Sugitani, Yuji; and Suzuki, Yasuo, to Nippon
Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha. Arc welding method. 4,394,559, CI.
219-125.120.
Nomura, Noboru: See —
Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; Kanai, Kenji; Nouchi, Norimoto; and No-
mura, Noboru, 4.394.699. CI. 360-113.000.
Nordstjeman AB: See —
Samuel. Olof; and Hellemaa. Heikki, 4.393,832, CI. 123-327.000.
Norgren, Kent S.; and Vogelsberg, Robert E., to International Business
Machines Corp. Programmable peripheral processing controller.
4,394,734, CI. 364-200.000.
Norprint International: See —
Figg, Amhony V. J., 4,393,774, CI. 101-288.000.
Norsk Hydro AS.: See —
Rasmussen, Odd F., 4,393.910, CI. 150-12.000.
Northern Telecom, Inc.: See —
Higuera, Robert S.; and Ryan, John F.. 4,394.123, CI. 432-253.000.
Nouchi, Norimoto: See—
Kaminaka, Nobuyuki; Kanai, Kenji; Nouchi, Norimoto; and No-
mura, Noboru, 4,394,699, CI. 360-113.000.
Nowack, Gerhard P.; Johnson, Marvin M.; and Tabler, Donald C, to
Phillips Petroleum Company. Hydrogenation catalyst. 4,394,298, CI.
252-438.000.
Nowack, Gerhard P.: See —
Kukes, Semyon; Nowack, Gerhard P.; and Johnson, Marvin M.,
4,394,255, CI. 585-667.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 27
Nuez, Jean-Paul J.: See —
Grandguillot, Michel J.; Mollier, Pierre B.; and Nuez, Jean-Paul J.,
4,394,747, CI. 365-104.000.
Nuzillat, Gerard: See —
Pham, Ngu T.; and Nuzillat, Gerard, 4,394.589. CI. 307-450.000.
Nygard. James C; Weiss, Melvin P.; and Larsen. Thomas E.. to Minne-
sota Mining and Manufacturing Company. Apparatus for removing
toner from and applying offset preventive liquid to a fixing roller.
4.393,804, CI. 118-60.000.
Oak Industries Inc.: See—
Konicek, Jiri K., 4,394,419, CI. 428-416.000.
Larson, Willis A., 4,394,547, CI. 200-5.00A.
Obayashi, Hideki: See —
Kohama, Tokio; Obayashi, Hideki; Kawai, Hisasi; and Egami,
Tsuneyuki, 4,393,702, CI. 73-204.000.
Obermayer, Bertram; Skatsche. Othmar; and Greier. Josef, to List.
Hans. Water-cooled, multi-cylinder internal combustion engine
4,393,822, CI. 123-195.00R.
O'Boyle, Dolores; and Shonk, Phyllis, to International Playtex, Inc.
Brassiere. 4,393,875. CI. 128-425.000.
Ocean B.V.: See —
Snoek. Govert J.; and Tuil, William J., 4,393,891, CI. 137-238.000.
O'Connell. Daniel J.: See—
Gibler, David L.; and O'Connell, Daniel J., 4.393.997. CI. 244-
135.00R.
O'Dell. Leonard J., to Allis-Chalmers Corporation. Protective spark
eliminating system for a filter baghouse. 4.394.143. CI. 55-261.000.
O'Donnell. Brian F. Processing of sea urchins. 4.393.545. CI. 17-76.000.
O'Dwyer, Micheal: See —
Yeomans. David; Wilkinson, Christopher J.; McCartney, Damien;
and O'Dwyer, Micheal, 4,394,685, CI. 358-264.000.
Oelke. Erwin S.. to Smith International. Inc. High-speed seal. 4,394.020.
CI. 277-1.000.
Oertle. Donald H.: See-
Peterson. Marvin L.; Hein. Norman W.. Jr.; and Oertle, Donald H..
4.394,577. CI. 250-372.000.
Office National d'Etudes et de Recherches Aerospatiales: See-
Bernard, Alain M., 4,393,710, CI. 73-517.00B.
Ogasa. Tatsuo, to Agency of Industrial Science & Technology. Porous
composite material and process for preparing same. 4,394,457, CI.
521-54.000.
Ogushi. Akira: See —
Tanaka, Eiichi; Nohara, Norimasa; Murayama, Hideo; Ishimatsu,
Kenji; Ogushi. Akira; and Takami, Katsumi, 4,394.576, CI
250-366.000.
Ohkura, M«koto: See —
Wada, Yasuo; Usui
Tamura, Masao;
148-33.100.
Ohta, Hiroaki: See—
Tarumi, Noriyoshi; Tsuchiya,
Ohta, Hiroaki. 4.394.340. CI
Ohta. Masayuki: See—
Okamoto. Tadaomi; Ohta, Masayuk
4,394,772, CI. 378-182.000.
Ohtani, Hiroo; and Watanabe, Seiichi, to Sumitomo Metal Industries,
Ltd. Method of making steels which are useful in fabricating pressure
vessels. 4,394,187, CI. 148-12.00F.
Oka, Masahisa: See —
Kamachi. Hajime; Okumura. Jun; Naito. Takayuki; and Oka,
Masahisa, 4.394,503, CI. 544-25.000.
Okabe. Yousuke; and Shoji. Osamu. to Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. Carburetor. 4,394,331, CI. 261-18.00B.
Okamoto Manufacturing Co., Ltd.: See—
Okamoto, Tadaomi; Ohta, Masayuki; and Watanabe. Makoto.
4.394,772, CI. 378-182.000.
Okamoto, Tadaomi; Ohta, Masayuki; and Watanabe, Makoto, to
Okamoto Manufacturing Co., Ltd. Radiographic cassette. 4,394,772.
CI. 378-182.000.
Okumoto, Kiyohumi: See-
Hashimoto. Takeji; Okumoto, Kiyohumi; and Andoh, Masayasu,
4,393,670, CI. 66-75.200.
Okumura, Jun: See —
Kamachi, Hajime; Okumura, Jun; Naito, Takayuki; and Oka,
Masahisa, 4,394,503, CI. 544-25.000.
Okuyama, Kazuo: See—
Miyake, Tetsuya; Takeda. Kunihiko; Onitsuka, Hatsuki; Okuyama,
Kazuo; and Shimamura, Yasuki. 4.394.353. CI. 423-21.500.
Olah, George A. Liquefaction of coals using recyclable superacid
catalyst. 4.394.247. CI. 208-10.000.
Oliapuram, Antony: See—
von Alpen. Ulrich; Brautigam. Reinhard; and Oliapuram, Antony,
4,394,280, CI. 252-62.200.
Olin Corporation: See-
Gray, Thomas J., 4,394,228, CI. 204-98.000.
Olmr, Jaroslav J., to Textron, Inc. Top sharpening chain. 4,393,739, CI.
83-834.000.
Olsen, Charles R. Revolving firearms and ammunition therefor.
4,393,782. CI. 102-446.000.
Olson, Carl G. Web securing device. 4.393.915. CI. 160-395.000.
Olson. Donald L.. to Tennant Company. Scrubber with foam and spray
suppressor. 4.393.538. CI. 15-320.000.
Oltmanns, Roger W., Jr.; and Portolese, Larry A., to Bendix Corpora-
tion, The. Disc brake caliper support. 4,393,963, CI. 188-73.450.
Olympus Optical Company Ltd.: See—
Mizokami, Kazunori, 4,394,570, CI. 250-209.000.
Nishikawa, Masaji; Amemiya, Norio; Yasuda, Tadahiro, and Naka-
yama, Shigeru. 4,394.427. CI. 430-68 000.
Nishikawa. Masaji. 4.394,432. CI. 430-120.000.
Omichi. Takeo: See—
Shima. Michitsune; Kihara. Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu, Kenji, 4,393,920, CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Onitsuka, Hatsuki: See—
Miyake, Tetsuya; Takeda, Kunihiko; Onitsuka, Hatsuki; Okuyama.
Kazuo; and Shimamura. Yasuki. 4.394.353. CI. 423-21.500.
Ono. Yoshihiro; See —
Kawaguchi. Hideo; Inayama. Takayuki; Takimoto. Masaaki; and
Ono, Yoshihiro. 4.394.441, CI 430-524.000.
Onoda, Michio: See —
Onoda,
and
Michio, 4,393,837, CI.
Hiroo; Ohkura, Makoto; Miyao. Masanobu;
and Tokuyama. Takashi. 4.394,191. CI.
Hiroshi; Kokiso.
264-219.000.
Masakazu; and
and Watanabe. Makoto.
Sugihara. Kunihiko;
123-425.000.
Onoda. Tadayuki: See —
Maruyama. Teruo; Onoda. Tadayuki; and Taguchi, Tatsuhisa.
4.394.114, CI 418-269.000.
Ophir Corporation: See-
Nelson, Loren D.. 4.394.575, CI. 250-343.000.
Oppenheimer. Carl P.: See—
Niezgoda. Thomas A.; and Oppenheimer, Carl P., 4,393,740, CI.
84-1.010.
Optimetrix Corporation: See —
Phillips, Edward H.. 4.393.727, CI 74-209 000.
Orbanes. Philip; and Cooper. Julius, to Ideal Toy Corporation Elec-
tronic logic game. 4.394.018, CI. 273-237.000.
Orobin. Edwin H. Collapsible tent frame. 4.393.887. CI. 135-109.000.
Osmera. Miroslav S.; and Brooks, Ralf M., to NCR Canada Ltd - NCR
Canada Ltee. Method and apparatus for high speed thermal printing.
4. .394.092. CI. 400-120.000.
Osrow. Harold; and Araujo, Armando A., to Osrow Products Com-
pany. Inc. Disposable foil broifing sheet. 4.394.410. CI 428-43.000.
Osrow Products Company. Inc.: See —
Osrow. Harold; and Araujo. Armando A.. 4.394.410. CI
428-43.000.
Osterholm, Jewell L.. to Thomas Jefferson University. Extravascular
circulation of oxygenated synthetic nutrients to treat tissue hypoxic
and ischemic disorders 4.393.863. CI 128-l.OOR.
Otake. Mituyoshi: See —
Suzuki, Yoshihisa; Kaizuka. Takanoli; Hanyu, Yoshiaki; Otake.
Mituyoshi; and Hidano. Yoichi. 4.394.404. CI. 427-48.000
Otsuka. Kazuo; Narasaka. Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei. to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. Air/fuel ratio control system for internal combustion
engines, having atmospheric pressure compensating function.
4.393.842. CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka, Kazuo; Narasaka, Shin; and Hasegawa, Shumpei. to Honda
Motor Co., Ltd. Air-fuel ratio feedback control system for internal
combustion engines, having function of correcting position of air/fuel
ratio control valve actuator. 4,393,843, CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuka. Kazutoshi: See—
Tanaka. Hideki; and Otsuka. Kazutoshi, 4,393,840, CI. 123-440.000.
Otsuki, Yoichi: See—
Furukawa, Hideo; Chikugo. Kazuo; and Otsuki. Yoichi. 4,393.823.
CI. 123-196.00M.
Ottman. John C; and Shen, John C. S.. to International Business Ma-
chines Corporation. Fixed abrasive polishing method and apparatus
4.393.628. CI. 51-281.0SF.
Oudenhoven. Martin S . to United States of America. Interior. Method
of hydrospalling. 4.394.051. CI. 299-16.000.
Outboard Marine Corporation: See—
Poehlman. Arthur G.. 4,393,848, CI. 123-525.000.
Outokumpu Oy: See—
Makinen, Juho K.; and Kaenniemi, Kaarina M. E., 4,394,164. CI.
75-21.000.
Overlach. Knud: See —
Pietzsch. Ludwig; Overlach, Knud; and Wamser, Manfred.
4.393.698, CI. 73-118.000.
Owen, Wickersham & Erickson: See—
Lindberg. John E., 4,393,817, CI 123-3.000.
Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corporation: See—
Grossi, Anthony V.; Hagelee, Leon A.; Hahn, Louis T.; and Mar-
zocchi, Alfred, 4,394,481, CI. 525-54.500.
Uffner. William E.. 4.394.482, CI. 525-54.500.
Owens-Illinois, Inc.: See-
Ryan, William H., 4,394,148, CI. 65-159.000.
Willingham. Wendell D., 4.393.977. CI. 215-211.000.
Owens, Kenneth B.: See —
Dilgren, Richard E., and Owens, Kenneth B., 4,393.937, CI
166-272.000. -
Oy Warstsila AB: See-
Samuel, Olof; and Hellemaa, Heikki, 4,393,832, CI. 123-327.000.
Ozawa, Masakazu; Watanabe, Kunio; Matsumoto, Shigeyuki: Ni-
shimura, Yukuo; and Miyazaki, Takashi, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha
Liquid jet recording apparatus. 4,394.669, CI. 346-140.00R.
P.L.G. Research Limited: See-
Mercer. Frank B.. 4.394,342. CI. 264-292.000.
Pako Corporation: See —
Simning. Robert A.; and Schultz. Michael E.. 4.394.094. CI
400-124.000.
Palmer. Bryan H.: See-
Copping. Leonard G ; Kerry. John C; Watkins. Thomas I.; Willis.
Robert J.; and Palmer. Bryan H.. 4.394.387. CI. 424-300000.
Palomar Systems & Machines. Inc.: See—
Braden. Denver. 4.393,808, CI. 118-503.000.
PI 28
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Panter, Herbert: See—
Maurer, Alexander; Adrian, Renate; Panter, Herbert; Heymer,
Gero; and Nolker, Dieter, 4,394,358. CI. 423-305.000.
Pantzar, Glenn G. E., to Santrade Ltd. Saw guide bar. 4,393,590, CI.
30-387.000.
Papahadjopoulos, Demetrios P.: See —
Szoka, Francis C, Jr.; and Papahadjopoulos, Demetrios P.,
4,394,149, CI. 71-28.000.
Szoka, Francis C, Jr.; and Papahadjopoulos, Demetrios P.,
4,394,448. CI. 435-172.000.
Pape, Heinz; Quella. Ferdinand; and Krueger, Hans, to Siemens Aktien-
gesellschaft. Fluorescently activated display device with improved
sensitivity 4.394.068, CI. 350-345.000. ^
Papst-MOTOREN KG: See—
Schmider. Fritz; and Muller. Rolf, 4,394,594, CI. 310-68.00R.
Parfitt, Rick: See-
Warren, Ben; White, George M.; Parfitt, Rick; and Deng, Peter,
4,394,538, CI. 179-l.OSD.
Park, Chan H.: See—
Galkin, Benjamin M.; Boon, Raymond; Gilliam, Rudolph V.; and
Park. Chan H.. 4.393.864. CI. 128-1.100.
Park. Sang- Woo, to Korea Advanced Institute of Science and Technol-
ogy, The. Process for preparing ethyl a-chloroethyl carbonate.
4,394,233, CI. 204-158.0HA.
Parker Hannifm Corporation: See —
Sharp, Bernard C, 4,394.066. CI. 350-307.000.
Pataki. Andrew B.. to Sperry Corporation. Long stroke linear actuator.
4.394.592. CI. 310-12.000.
Patry, Jean. Melting latent-heat heat or cold exchanger-storage device.
4,393,918, CI. 165-10.000.
Pavlic, John C. to C-Cor Electronics, Inc. Radio frequency choke and
method of use. 4,394,631, CI. 333-132.000.
Payer. Wolfgang: See —
Hobes, Victor J.; and Payer. Wolfgang. 4,394.483. CI. 525-60.000.
Pearson. Stephen, to Baxter Travenol Laboratories, Inc. Universal
administration port. 4,393.909. CI. 150-8.000.
Pebler. Alfred R.. to Westinghouse Electric Corp. Combined sulfur
oxide/oxygen measuring apparatus. 4.394,240, CI. 204-412.000.
Peck, Robert E.; and Zagranski, Raymond D., to Chandler Evans Inc.
Fuel control method and apparatus. 4,393,651. CI. 60-39.281.
Pecor Corporation: See—
Damerau. Herbert R., 4.394.272, CI. 210-779.000.
Pedersen. Niels R.; and Nielsen, Eyvind S. Heating plant. 4,393,815, CI.
122-31.00R.
Peemoller. Horst: See-
Weiss. Hermann; Klotz. Erhard; Peemoller, Horst; Linde, Rolf; and
Mauser. Wilfried. 4.394.063. CI. 350-162.130.
Peelers. Hugo K.. to Agfa-Gevaert. N.V. Recording material for stor-
age of digital information and a recording method for storage of
digital information. 4.394.661. CI. 346-1.100.
Peisel. William E.; See —
Long, Nicholas R.; Peisel, William E.; Ryan, Joseph L.; and Wat-
kins, Richard R., 4.394.650, CI. 340-728.000.
Pelly. L. Ronald. Shape memory element engine. 4,393,654, CI.
60-527.000.
Pelta. Edmond R.: See —
Crummer. Marvin R.; Gold, Kenneth S.: Johnson, David G.;
Vandermeyden, Tom R.; and Pelta. Edmond R.. 4.394,742, CI.
364-487.000.
Penn Engineering & Manufacturing Corp.: See —
Hansen. David M.; and Ernest. Richard B., 4,393,684, CI.
72-451.000.
Pennebaker. William B.: See —
Landon. Alfred J.; Pennebaker. William B.; and Wang. Han C.
4.393.769. CI. 101-93.300.
Penner. Horst: See —
Brede, Uwe; and Penner. Horst. 4,393,779. CI. 102-202.500.
Pennino. Frank L.: See —
Kuenzig. Ernest O.; and Pennino, Frank L., 4,394,116, CI. 425-
192.0OR
Pennwalt Corporation: See —
Adams. Richard G.. 4.394.184. CI. 148-6. 15R.
Penzel. Hans-Joerg. to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Integrated memory
module having selectable operating functions. 4,394,753, CI.
365-236.000.
Pereira, Dennis: See —
Weissman. Sherman M.; Pereira, Dennis; and Sood, Ashwani,
4.394.443. CI. 435-6.000.
Pereyre. Michel; and Pommier. Jean-Claude, to Societe Nationale Elf
Aquitaine. Synthesis of stannic tetra mercaptides. 4.394.320. CI.
260-429.700.
Perlstein, Jerome H.: See —
Van Allan, James A.; Perlstein, Jerome H.; Reynolds. George A.;
and Goliber. Thomas E.. 4.394.428, CI. 430-83.000.
Perrien. Frank A. Wire splicing tool. 4,393,905, CI. 140-118.000.
Perrone. Francesco: See —
De Angelis. Giancarlo; Catastini. Alberto; Bassi, Aldo; Rogora.
Edoardo; Radaelli, Dario; Bertoloni, Luciano; and Perrone,
Francesco, 4,393.836, CI. 123-417.000.
Perry. Thomas J.: See —
Comfort, Joseph A.; Perry, Thomas J.; and Loos. Michel,
4,394,728, CI. 364-200.000.
Persson. Ame. Feeding device. 4,393,609, CI. 37-238.000.
Pertsch, Heinrich: See —
Ertl, Wilhelm; Lachmann, Ulrich; and Pertsch, Heinrich, 4.394,190,
CI. 148-31.550.
Petersen, Wallace C, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company.
Process of preparing aromatic aldehydes by reacting selected aro-
matic compounds with formamidine acetate and an organic acid
anhydride. 4.394,314, CI. 260-391.000.
Peterson Associates, Ltd.: See —
Peterson, Carl R., 4.393,949, CI. 175-377.000.
Peterson, Carl R., to Peterson Associates, Ltd. Rock boring apparatus.
4,393,949, CI. 175-377.000.
Peterson, Jerald G. Measuring device. 4,393,601, CI. 33-494.000.
Peterson, Joe W.: See —
McKenzie, James A.; and Peterson, Joe W., 4,394,587, CI.
307-355.000.
Peterson. Marvin L.; Hein. Norman W.. Jr.; and Oertle, Donald H.. to
Conoco Inc. Displacement measurement device and method.
4.394,577. CI. 250-372.000.
Petroons, Jose O. G., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Wound bobbin coil
apparatus. 4,394,637, CI. 336-192.000.
Peuser, Michael F.; and Bartolo, Jose B. Recuperation of cyanides from
rinsing solutions of cyanidric processes for eletrodeposition of metals.
4,394.356. CI. 423-43.000.
Pezzei, Friedbert: See —
Aste, Christian, 4,394,173, CI. 104-69.000.
Pfeiffer, Ronald E.; and DeMaria, Francesco, to American Cyanamid
Company. Process for preparing open structure fibers. 4,394,339, CI.
264-177.00F.
Pfeil. Janice L.: See —
Kukolja, Stjepan; and Pfeil, Janice L., 4,394,313, CI. 260-245.400.
Pfoh, Rolf: See—
Bickle, Wolfgang; Funke, Rolf; and Pfoh, Rolf, 4,394,275, CI.
252-12.000.
Pham, Ngu T.; and Nuzillat, Gerard, to Thomson-CSF. Logic circuit
including at least one resistor or one transistor having a saturable
resistor field effect transistor structure. 4,394,589, CI. 307-450.000.
Phelps Dodge Industries, Inc.: See —
Hilker. George D., 4,393,809, CI. 118-620.000.
Hilker, George D.. 4,394,417, CI. 428-383.000.
Phillips, Edward H., to Optimetrix Corporation. Friction drive.
4,393,727, CI. 74-209.000.
Phillips Petroleum Company: See —
Casperson. John R.. 4,393.603. CI. 34-39.000.
Cheng. Paul J.. 4,394,350, CI. 422-150.000.
Gardner, Lloyd E., 4.394,301, CI. 252-455.0OZ.
Hawley, Gil R., 4,394,291, CI. 252-429.0OB.
Kolts, John H., 4,394,297, CI. 252-437.000.
Kukes, Semyon; Nowack, Gerhard P.; and Johnson, Marvin M.,
4,394,255. CI. 585-667.000.
Lowery, Richard E.; Gordon, Bruce W.; and Steger, Barry N.,
4.394,323, CI. 260-446.000.
Mark, Harold W.; Bertus, Brent J.; and Roberts, John S., 4,394,324,
CI. 260-446.000.
Nowack, Gerhard P.; Johnson, Marvin M.; and Tabler, Donald C,
4,394,298, CI. 252-438.000.
Phillips Plastics Corp.: See —
Wollar, Burnell J.; and Schwind, Richard J., 4,393,551, CI. 24-
213.0OR.
Phillips Temro, Inc.: See —
Gorans, Marc S., 4,393,851, CI. 123-557.000.
Picard, Jean-Francois; and Jacquard, Paul, to Societe D'Applications
Generales. Stabilized sighting devices for vehicles. 4,393,597, CI.
33-275.00G.
Pickett, Fred E. Gun rest. 4,393,614, CI. 42-94.000.
Pierre Guerin S.A.: See —
Quilliou. Guy, 4,393,759, CI. 99-459.000.
Pietzsch, Ludwig; Overlach, Knud; and Wamser, Manfred, to Pietzsch,
Ludwig. Device for measuring hollow cylinder surfaces. 4,393,698,
CI. 73-118.000.
Pissiotas, Georg; and Rempfler. Hermann, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
Pyridyl-2-oxyphenyloxime derivatives and their use as herbicides.
4.394.157, CI. 71-94.000.
Pissiotas, Georg; and Rempfler, Hermann, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation.
Pyridyl-2-oxyphenyloxime derivatives, and their use as herbicides.
4.394.158, CI. 71-94.000.
Pissiotas, Georg: See —
Rohr, Otto; Pissiotas, Georg; Bohner, Beat; and Burdeska, Kurt,
4,394,327, CI. 260-455.00R.
Pisters, Michael G. H.: See —
Werner, Marcel A.; Venema, Arnold; and Pisters, Michael G. H..
4,394,470, CI. 524-56.000.
Pitney Bowes Inc.: See —
Mol, Hans C; and Byrne, LeRoy H., 4,393,894, CI. 137-454.000.
Pizzi, Giacomo: See —
Camerini, Mario; and Pizzi, Giacomo, 4,394,104, CI. 414-276.000.
Plant, Howard L.; Cantor, Steven E.; Doweyko, Arthur M.; Dekeyser,
Mark A.; and Bell, Allyn R.. to Uniroyal, Inc.; and Uniroyal Ltd.
Substituted pyridine 1-oxide herbicides. 4,394,155, CI. 71-94.000.
Plasma Holdings N.V.: See —
Tylko, Jozef K., 4,394.162, CI. 75-lO.OOR.
Plattner, Eric: See —
Jager, Horst; Plattner, Eric; Bersier, Jacques; and Comninellis,
Christos, 4,394,227, CI. 204-73.00R.
Plessers, Hendrik S.; and Hellemans, Julianus J., to Agfa-Gevaert N.V.
Sheet receiving and storage apparatus. 4,393,642, CI. 53-266.00R.
Pociluyko, Alex, to Scott Paper Company. Bleed-fast cationic dye-
stuffs. 4.394.212, CI. 162-162.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 29
Podszun, Wolfgang; Walkowiak, Michael; and Schulz. Hans-Hermann,
o Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Dental matenals based on organic plas-
tics in paste form. 4.394.465. CI. 523-1 16 000
Poehlman, Arthur G.. to Outboard Marine Corporation. Control mech-
Pohoreski, Anton P.: See—
Strunk, Norman E.; and Pohoreski. Anton P . 4 393 992 CI
239-200.000. '
Policastro. Steven G.; and Woo. Dae-Shik. to RCA Corporation
Method of making low leakage N-channel SOS transistors utilizing
positive photoresist masking techniques. 4,393.572. CI 29-571 000
Policy, Richard B., to ACF Industries, Incorporated. Mounting flange
tor wafersphere bottom outlet valve. 4,394,002 CI 251-144 000
Polony, Rudolf: See—
Holzle, Gerd; Reinert. Gerhard; and Polony, Rudolf, 4,394,125, CI.
Polva Nederland B.V.: See—
Acda, Petrus M.; and Karreman, Jacob, 4.394.343, CI. 264-296 000
Polymer Corporation, The: See—
Blachman, Lawrence P., 4,394,705. CI. 361-215.000
Polymer Technology Corporation: See-
Ellis. Edward J; and Salamone. Joseph C. 4.394.179 CI 134-7 000
Polysar Limited: See-
Kim, Chan J.; and Koski, Ahti A.. 4.394,488. CI 524-432 000
Polyvend Inc.: See—
Strack. Martin P.. Jr., 4,393.970, CI. 194-17.000
Pommier, Jean-Claude: See—
Pereyre, Michel; and Pommier. Jean-Claude, 4,394,320 CI
260-429.700.
Pool, Francis C, to Rolls-Royce Limited. Gas turbine engine having an
automatic ice shedding spinner. 4,393,650, CI. 60-39 093
Popper, Jay: See—
Burstein, Steve; and Popper. Jay, 4,394,751, CI. 365-227 000
Porst, Hannsheinz: See—
Hofmann-Cerfontaine, Hellmut W.. 4.394.654. CI 340-825 340
Portolese. Larry A.: See—
Oltmanns, Roger W.. Jr.; and Portolese. Larry A., 4.393,963, CI.
Potoski. John R.: See-
Commons, Thoma-s J.; and Potoski. John R,, 4,394,504. CI.
Pottier. Alain; Chesnel. Pierre; and Chaintreau. Bernard, to Schlum-
4^39^946 CI 1°75T560^°''^"''°" ^^" P^^'"°"""g apparatus.
Powell Steven W.; and Stockton, James G., to NL Sperry Sun, Inc
Borehole tool. 4,393,598, CI. 33-302.000.
PPG Industries, Inc.: See-
Barter, James A.; and Kellar, David E.. 4.394,328, CI. 260-463 000
Ti^"4oP^^' °' *"'' "^o'singer. Donald L., 4.394,414, CI.
^^o' Zoo .kjUO.
Dauson, Samuel, 4,394,064, CI. 350-259 000.
Korach. Malcolm. 4,394,229, CI. 204-98 000
Temple. Chester S., 4,394,418, CI. 428-391.000
Temple, Chester S.; and Hsu, Ed C. 4,394.475, CI. 524-262 000
Pracht, Hans: See—
Bergmann, Horst; and Pracht, Hans, 4,393,831, CI 123-323 000
fioi IfiV^f^A^^/^SlJlP*'^^ atmospheric heat exchange apparatus.
'*,jyj,yii, CI. 165-46.000.
Primas. Willi: See—
^^^u ^A^f^i ,'^"8"^'' ''^'^'■^ Lampelzammer, Helga; and Primas.
Willi, 4,394.518. CI. 556-424.000.
Prince. Terry B.: See—
^434,55."ci. l79^m"^'^""' ^' '"'^ ^•'"*^"'""' ^^"'" ^ •
Pritula. Nina A.: See—
Gryaznov, Vladimir M.; Smirnov. Viktor S.; Vdovin. Valentin M
Ermilova. Margarita M.; Gogua. Liya D.; Pritula, Nina A. and
Fedorova, Galina K., 4.394.294. CI. 252-430.000
Procter & Gamble Company. The: See—
Fryar. Durward; and Schmitz, Jerome J., 4,393,643, CI 53-471 000
Gosselink, Eugene P., 4,394,305, CI. 252-528 000
Taylor, James L., 4,394,372, CI. 424-85.000.
Produits Chimiques Ugine Kuhlmann: See—
Commeyras, Auguste; and Calas, Patrick, 4,394,225. CI. 204-
j".UUK..
Progressive Dynamics, Inc.: See-
Crafts, Daniel J., 4,394,706, CI. 361-331.000.
Prmdocimo, Luciano Process for producing connecting member
shanks, such as hinges for window and door frames, formed of cylm-
dncal sections of different diameter, with continuous even screw
thread, that is with constant pitch. 4,393,676, CI 72-92 000
Pryor. Alvetta, to Dow Chemical Company. The. Stabilized methyl-
chloroform composition. 4.394,284, CI. 252-153 000
Pryor, Timothy R.: See—
Liptay-Wagner, Nicholas; Renaud, Roland; Pryor, Timothy R
and Clarke, Donald A.. 4,394,683. CI. 358-107.000.
Puharich. Henry K. Method and apparatus for splitting water mole-
cules. 4,394,230. CI. 204-129.000.
Punko, Emil M.: See—
Mazur, Michael B.; and Punko, Emil M., 4,393,960, CI. 188-62.000.
Pusineri, Christian; and Goletto, Jean, to Hospal-Sodip. S.A. Mixtures
of polymers for medical use. 4.394.462. CI. 521-137.000.
Puskas, Imre; and James, David E., to Standard Oil Company (Indiana).
Palladium-rhodium catalyst for puriFication of crude terephthalic
acid. 4,394,299, CI. 252-447.000.
Putman, William A.: See—
Dvn^A^*i^^' ^?h,'^- ^o** •'"""an, William A., 4,394,147, CI. 55-357.000.
rVbA Van Mullem: See-
Van Mullem. Albert. 4.393.955. CI. 180-291 000
Quaker Oats Company. The: See—
Keyser. William L.; and Kinney. Diane S.. 4.394.399. CI
426-658.000.
Quella. Ferdinand: See—
''^PfA'?fi"il?"^"^• Ferdinand; and Krueger. Hans. 4.394,068, CI
350-345.000.
Quick, TTiomas E.: See—
'''!?^.-!^^^^'^ ^ • ^"*^ Q""^''- Thomas E.. 4.394,106, CI
414-622.000.
Quigley, Herbert J.. Jr.: See—
"^^ils Ooi)''^'" ^' ^"'^ ^"'S'^y- ""^" J • J"-.. 4.394,373, CI
^4,m75?c'|-.i9-45S.°"*^"" '^ ^"^"^ -'"'"^ ^PP---
R. Stahl GmbH & Co.. Firma: See—
Hortnagel. Franz. 4,393.785. CI. 104-110000
R W. Hartnetl Company: See—
^"lOB^,-.,^!!^'" ^ • ^'■'- ^"'^ ^*-'''''=y' Charles E.. Jr.. 4.393.973. CI
1V8-364.000.
Rabette. Jean lo Societe Vandeputte Fils & Cie. S.A. Data display
system. 4.394.652. CI. 340-764.000. ^ ^
Rabinowitz. Mario: See
Bahder. George; and Rabinowitz. Mario. 4,394.534. CI 174-1 5 OOS
Kadaelli, Dario: See—
De Angelis. Giancarlo; Catastini. Alberto; Bassi. Aldo Rogora
Edoardo; Radaelli. Dario; Bertoloni. Luciano; and Perrone'
Francesco. 4.393.836. CI 123-417 000
Radtke. Richard R.: See—
WMIis. Frederick G ; Radtke. Richard R.; Ellison. Joseph; and
Fozo. Steven R.. 4.393.696. CI. 73-117.300.
Raj Technology Partnership: See—
Sandhu. Jaswinder S.. 4.393^712. CI 73-603 000
Raman. Ramaswamy V.; and Carbonara. Robert S.. to Batielle Memo-
rial Institute. Cruableless preparation of rapidly solidified fine partic-
ulates. 4.394.332. CI. 264-8.000.
Rambousek. Miroslav; and Svarc. Stanislav. to Elitex. koncern textil-
niho strojirenstvi. Fiber-guiding element for open end spinning ma-
chines. 4.393.648. CI. 57-413.000. i 6 »
Ramey, Robert M.. to Teledyne Industries. Inc. Method of conirollinE
non-solar swimming pool heater. 4.393.527, CI 4-493 000
'^'4"Si6rcr42':1^5™(So*^'"^"""°" "'"^'°^'" ^''''"^' P'"^^'
Randall Industrfes. Inc.: See—
Larsen, James E.; and Rogers. Charles E . 4.394.013. CI. 273-1.50R
Randall. John R.. to McDonnell Douglas Corporation Unidirectional
detent gale. 4.393,730. CI. 74-538.000.
Randmae. Rein S.; and Whitaker, Todd H.. to Vicon Industries. Inc
Housing assembly for an electrical apparatus 4,394 692 CI
358-229.000. . . . v.i.
Rank Xerox Limited: See—
Sugiyama. Mitsuhiko. 4.394.008. CI. 271-9.000
Rasmussen. Odd F.. to Norsk Hydro AS. Flexible container having
four lifting loops. 4,393,910, CI. 150-12.000. .
Rasmussen, Robert, to Air-Mo Hydraulics. Inc. Hydraulic chuck de-
vice for engagement with the inside of a tube. 4.393.674. CI.
72-61.000.
Rassieur. Charles L.. lo Central Mine Equipment Company Rotary
drtll with a kelly bar and hydraulic chuck. 4.393.945. CI 173-163 000
Rastogi. Prabhat K., to Inland Steel Company. Method for producing
low silicon steel electrical lamination strip. 4,394.192. CI 148-120 000
Ratigalas, Max. to Thomson-CSF Method and device for coding
binary data and a device decoding coded data. 4,394,641, CI 340-
347.0DD.
Rattlingourd, Glen D.: See—
Currie. Robert J.; Rattlingourd. Glen D ; Spencer. Billie M and
Zscheile. John W.. Jr . 4.394.642. CI. 340-347 ODD
Rausch. John J.: See-
Van Thyne. Ray J.; and Rausch. John J.. 4.394.422. CI 428-592 000
Ravey, Manny, to IMI (Tami) Institute for Research & Development
Lid. Bromine containing fire retardant compositions of matter
4,394,306, CI. 252-609.000.
Ray Otis E Novelty written message device suitable for mailing
4.393.618. CI. 46-35.000. *
Raytheon Company: See-
Banks. Donald S.. 4.394.628, CI. 332-19.000.
RCA Corporation: See —
Bingham, Joseph P.; and Benford. John F.. 4,394.535, CI. 179-
Gounder, Raj N., 4.394.529. CI. 136-245.000.
Hawrylo. Frank Z.. 4.394,679, CI. 357-81.000.
Kumar, Mahesh; Menna, Raymond J.; and Huang, Ho-Chung
4,394,629. CI. 333-109.000. '^'
Nero. Leroy W , 4.394,722, CI. 363-68.000.
Policastro. Steven G.; and Woo, Dae-Shik. 4 393 572 CI
29-571.000.
Wierschke. Donald J.. 4,394,341, CI. 264-225.000
Reade, Richard: See-
Cook, Richard J.; and Reade, Richard, 4,394.108. CI 414-680 000
Reap. James J., to Du Pont de Nemours, E I., and Company Herbi-
cidal aryl esters of N-((heterocyclic)-aminocarbonyl]sulfamic acid
4,394,153, CI. 71-92.000.
PI 30
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Rees, James D., to Xerox Corporation. Imaging system for a mul«'-'nag-
nification copier utilizing gradient index lens array. 4,394,08J, ci.
355-1.000.
Reftech Limited: See—
Dutfield. James H.. 4.393.767, CI. 10O-229.0OA.
Regie Nationale Des Usines Renault: See—
Lombard, Claude. 4.393,715. CI. 73-728.000.
Reid John H. Conversion of plug How and complete mixaeration
ba^ms to barrier oxidation ditches. 4,394,268, CI. 210-628.000.
Reid, Kenneth H: S^e— „., „ . „ AiaAniA r\
Murphy. James E., and Reid, Kenneth H., 4.394.034, CI.
280-801.000.
Reifers. Richard F.: See— . „ , d u ,^ p
Bixler, Kenneth D.; Lord, Henry A.; and Reifers, Richard F.,
4,394,214. CI. 162-228.000.
Reiff, Harro: Sfe— a iai ^m r]
Frick, Georg; Reiff. Harro; and Kirsch. Alois, 4,393,570. CI.
29-560.000. _ ^ ,,,
Reimpell. Uwe; Grof, Helmut; Knell. Franz-Georg; and Wamser,
Anton, to Ley bold- Heraeus GmbH. Electro-slag remelting furnace
for consumable electrodes and having an electrode drive. 4,394,765,
d. 373-52.000.
Reinert, Gerhard: See— o ^ le a ioa it;. n\
Holzle, Gerd; Reinert, Gerhard; and Polony. Rudolf. 4.394.125. CI.
8-103.000. . , , . ,o, ^t, r-i
Reinstein. Martine; and Wurcel. Jacques. Jewelry articles. 4.393.667. CI.
63-29.0OR.
''%^S:;^t"!Georg;fnd-Rempner. Hermann, 4 394 157 CI 71-94.000.
Pissiotas, Georg; and Rempfler, Hermann, 4,394,158, CI. 71-94.000.
Renaud, Roland: See— , „ , . n -r ^.i,., d .
LiDtav-Waener, Nicholas; Renaud, Roland; Pryor, Timothy R.,
and Clarke, Donald A, 4,394,683. CI. 358-107.000.
Renon. Henri; and Richon. Dominique, to Institut Francais du Petrole;
and Association pour la Recherche et le Developpment Device for
determining physical characteristics of a fluid, such as its liquid-vapor
equilibrium pressure. 4,393,689, CI. 73-64.200.
Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH: See—
Fohl, 4,393,555, CI. 24-230.00A.
Wier, Franz. 4,393,553, CI. 24-230.0AL.
Wier, Franz, 4.393,554. CI. 24-230.0AL.
Reprogle. Layton J.; and Reprogle. Truman B.. to All Temp Engineer-
ing Inc Power broom with auger and vacuum debris conveyor.
4,393,537, CI. 15-348.000.
Reprogle, Truman B.: See— r, a ^a-i >ii-i r-i
Reprogle, Layton J.; and Reprogle, Truman B., 4,393,537, CI.
15-348.000.
Research Corporation: See—
Carpino, L^uis A.; and Cohen, Ben, 4,394,519, CI. 560-32.000.
Groves. William N., 4.393.853. CI. 123-568.000.
Research Foundation of the City University of New York: See-
Lowen. Gerard G.; and Tricamo. Stephen J.. 4,393,690, CI.
73-66.000. ^, ^ ,„, ... „,
Revis, Doyle A. Balanced heat exchange assembly. 4,393,666, CI.
62-506.000.
Revitz. Martin: See— „ ^ ... j
Gardiner. James R; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and
Shepard, Joseph F., 4,394,406. CI. 427-86.000.
Reynolds, Blake: See— » ,. . d u. ,
Marion. Charles P.; Crouch. William B.; Brent. Albert; Richter.
George N.; Child. Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,394,137,
CI. 48-197.00R. , .
Reynolds, Charles E., to AMP Incorporated. Connector of a ty,^ used
with dry cell batteries and manufacturing method. 4,394,059, ci.
339-125.0OR.
Reynolds, George A.: See— , . ^ a
Van Allan, James A.; Perlstein, Jerome H.; Reynolds, George A.;
and Goliber, Thomas E., 4,394.428. CI. 430-83.000.
Reynolds Metals Company: See—
Hutcheson, James L., 4,394,204. CI. 156-275.100.
Reznik. Benjamin; Welber, Stanley; and Streifeneder. Ludwig, to Eder
Instrument Co.. Inc. Aspirating surgical forceps. 4.393.87^. Ci.
604-151.000.
Rheinmetall GmbH: See— '
Graf. Manfred. 4,393,781, CI. 102-440.000.
Rhone-Poulenc-Textile: See—
Grosjean, Pierre. 4.394,200, CI. 156-72.000.
Richard, Raymond L. Jr.: See— j„ . .o Ji i,
Maki Emil R.; Freudenstein, Ferdinand; Richard, Raymond L.. Jr.;
and Chew. Meng-Sang. 4.393.820. CI. 123-90.410.
Richardson. David L.: See— .'. „ . j r^ a i
De Briere, John G.; Lemanowicz. Mary M.; Richardson, David L.;
and Vanderputten. Willem. 4.394.345. CI. 376-245.000.
Richardson, Edwin A: See— a lo^ oig r\
Lawson, Jimmie B.; and Richardson, Edwin A., 4.393.938, CI.
166-279.000. ^, ., ,. J . ui
Richer John E.. to United States of America. Navy. Height adjustable
cargo conuiner locking mechanism. 4,394,101. CI. 410-83.000.
Richert, Manfred: See— „ . , ^ • -.n. n-,-,
Storandt, Ralf; Richert. Manfred; and Scheck. Georg. 4,394,032,
CI. 280-618.000. ,, ^ „ _ ,
Richman. David W.; and Walker, Charles D to McDonnell Dougl^
Corporation. Electrophoresis apparatus with flow control. 4.394,246,
CI. 204-301.000.
Richon, Dominique: See— ^ . . . „, ,„o <-,, ,, ^ ^{^
Renon. Henri; and Richon, Dommique, 4,393.689, CI. 73-64.200.
Richrath, Herbert: See—
Rosener, Karlheinz; Roeder, Alfred; Munchberg, Wolfgang; Ri-
chrath, Herbert; and Chmiel, Max, 4.394.454, CI. 501-112.000.
'^"'*Mari?n,°Charles R; Crouch. William B.; Brent. Albert; Richter.
George N.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds. Blake. 4.394.137.
CI. 48-197.00R. . ^._
Richter Johan C F. C; and Richter. Ole J., to Kamyr. Inc. Diffuser
assembly. 4.394,267, CI. 210-331.000.
Richter, Ole J: See— . „ . ^, , aioa-x.! r\
Richter, Johan C. F. C; and Richter, Ole J.. 4.394.267. CI.
210-331.000.
Ricoh Company, Ltd.: See—
Ameyama, Minoru, 4,394,663. CI. 346-75.000.
Ridgway, Richard: See— , „.. o u a
Verber Carl M.; Kenan, Richard P.; and Ridgway. Richard.
4,394,060, CI. 350-96.130. .
Rieck Gerald C, to General Motors Corporation. Electromagnetic fuel
injector with flexible disc valve. 4,393,994, CI. 239-585.000.
Ried, Harold T.; and Weaver, Edgar C, to ACF Industries Incorpo-
rated. Cooling of center plate to avoid softening. 4.394.193. Cl.
148-149.000.
Ringbloom, Vernon D.; See— r^ . laA xa-i ni
Kabik, Irving; and Ringbloom, Vernon D.. 4.394.197. CI.
149-19.300.
Rink. John P. High voltage coaxial switch. 4.394,622, CI. 377-115.000.
Ritchie Donald, to Dornier GmbH. Arrangement and equipment for
the displacement of blades, particularly propeller blades. 4,394,109.
Rizzo. Salvatore A. Boat hull with underside channel. 4.393.802. CI.
114-67.00A.
RJ Archer Inc.: See— ^ c- ,_ «/ n d
Brandt John G.; Dickerson, Joyce H.; and Schmitt, William R.,
4.394.235, CI. 204-165.000.
Robert Bosch GmbH: See— .,n, o„ii-i
Drews, Ulrich; Werner, Peter; and Mohrle, Werner, 4,393,841, CI.
123-440 000
Eheim. Franz; and Hofer, Gerald, 4,393,835, CI. 123-357.000.
Gotze. Gerd-Wolfgang; and Muller. Manfred. 4.394.627. CI.
331-66.000.
Hansen. Jens. 4,394.779, CI. 455-277.000.
Horstmann, Winfried, 4.394.686. CI. 358-134.000.
Leisner. Ernst. 4.394.007. CI. 266-249.000.
Muller, Klaus; Linder, Ernst; and Maurer, Helmut. 4,393,687, CI.
73-35.000.
, Roberts, John S.: See— , i. c a ioa ^-ia
Mark, Harold W.; Bertus, Brent J.; and Roberts, John S.. 4,394,324,
CI. 260-446.000.
Robeson, Lloyd M.: See— j o u ,^ v
Stratta, Julius J.; Robeson, Lloyd M.; and Girardi, Richard V..
4,394,469, CI. 523-2 1 2.000.
Robillard, Jean J. Non-silver X-ray recording process. 4,394,439, CI.
430-336.000.
Robinson, Earl F.: See— 077 nrm
Bare, Rex O.; and Robinson, Earl F., 4,393 584 CK 29-877^000.
Robinson, Joseph G.; and Barnes, David I., to Coal Industry (Patents)
Limited. Polyimide resins. 4,394.499, CI. 528-229.000.
Robinson, Merrill G., to Shatterproof Glass Corporatioir Magnetron
cathode sputtering apparatus. 4,394,236, CI. 204-192.00R.
•'"'^LrorOve^andVavidson, Charies, 4,393,728. CI. 74-469.000.
Rocci. Joseph A.. Jr. Apparatus for testing the quality of the ground
connection and the insulation quality in an electrical hand tool or the
like. 4,394,615, CI. 324-51.000.
Rocha. John G., to United States of America Army. Animuniuon
magazine with built-in compartment covers. 4,393.746. CI. 89-J4.UUU.
Rockstead. Christopher A.: See— . „ , ^ r-u . v.^, a
Rockstead, Raymond H.; and Rockstead. Christopher A..
4.393,636, CI. 52-381.000. . » o u
Rockstead, Raymond H.; and Rockstead. ChristopherA. Box beam
reinforced concrete structure. 4.393.636. CI. 52-38 1. UW.
Rockwell International Corporation: See—
Maddox. Roy L.. III. 4.394.182. CI. 148-1.500.
Wilson. Thomas E., 4,393,729, CI. 74-475 000.
Rodell, Clifford H. Tree holder. 4,393,621. CI. 47-40.500.
Roeder, Alfred: See— ,, ,. ,., ,r d
Rosener, Karlheinz; Roeder, Alfred; Munchberg Wolfgang, Ri-
chrath. Herbert; and Chmiel. Max. 4.394.454. CI. 501-112.000.
''Ta;S.tm« kfan"^ Rogers. Charles E.. 4.394.013. CI. 273-1.50R.
Rogers Corporation: See —
Aguayo Arturo J.. 4.394.532. CI. 174-72.00B.
Roeora. Edoardo: See — ■ . , . n
De Angelis, Giancarlo; Catastini, Alberto; Bassi, Aldo; Rogora.
Edoardo Radaelli, Dario; Bertoloni, Luciano; and Perrone.
Francesco, 4,393,836, CI. 123-417.000.
Rohen, James E.. to International Business Machines Corporation.
Electronic velocity measurement especially for self-clocking write
head. 4,394,621, CI. 324-163.000. .
Rohloff Robert R., to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Coinpany.
Plating resist with improved resistance to extraneous plating.
4.394,434, CI. 430-270.000.
Rohm GmbH: See — ^i.nnt\
Hartl, Roland; and Helm, Dieter. 4.394.452. €1. 436-66.000.
Rohm and Haas Company: See—
Chao. Yen-Yau H.. 4.394.316, CI. 260-429.00K.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 31
Morris, Hal C. 4,394,128. CI. 8-138.000.
Rohr, Franz-Josef, to Brown, Boveri & Cie AG. Method for determin-
ing the oxygen content in gases, uninfluenced by temperature varia-
tions. 4,394,222, CI. 204- LOOT.
Rohr, Otto; Pissiotas, Georg; Bohner, Beat; and Burdeska, Kurt, to
Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Herbicidally active phenoxy-a-phenoxy-
alkanecarboxylic acid derivatives. 4,394,327, CI. 260-455.00R.
Rohr, Wolfgang: See—
Eicken, Karl; Rohr. Wolfgang; and Wuerzer. Bruno, 4.394.513, CI.
548-374.000.
Rokach. Joshua; Rooney, Clarence S.; and Cragoe, Edward J . Jr., to
Merck & Co., Inc. 10,ll-Dihydro-ll-oxodibenzo[b,(]ihiepin com-
pounds. 4.394,515. CI. 549-12.000.
Rolls-Royce Limited: See-
Pool. Francis C. 4.393.650, CI 60-39.093.
Rooney, Clarence S.: See —
Rokach. Joshua; Rooney. Clarence S.; and Cragoe. Edward J., Jr..
4.394.515. CI. 549-12.000.
Rosenberg, Heinz: See —
Kreissl, Ottmar; Schurrer, Josef; Motz. Karl; Leitgeb, Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg, Heinz. 4,394,582, CI. 290-4.00C.
Rosener, Karlheinz; Roeder, Alfred; Munchberg, Wolfgang; Richrath,
Herbert; and Chmiel, Max, to Dolomitwerke GmbH. Method for
making sintered dolomite with a low porosity and a good hydration
stability. 4,394,454, CI. 501-112.000.
Rosensweig, Ronald E., to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Com-
position for use in a magnetically fluidized bed. 4,394,281, Ci.
252-62.550.
Ross, Gerald F., to Sperry Corporation. Safe merging system using
short pulse signal reflectomerty. 4,394,640, CI 340-23.000
Ross, Richard J.; and Mendez, Luis E., to Baker International Corpora-
tion. Subterranean well pressure surging tool. 4,393,930, CI.
166-188.000.
Rosselli, Andrew C.: See —
Breeck, Philip L.; Shultz, David E.; and Rosselli, Andrew C..
4,393,825, CI. I23-198.00F,
Rostagno, Walter; and Morand, Alfred, to Societe d'Assistance Tech-
nique pour Produits Nestle S.A. Process for the production of a
molded food product by sintering. 4,394,395, CI. 426-285.000.
Rote, James. Step lighting system. 4,394,714, CI. 362-32.000.
Roth, Donald J.: See-
Walter, John; Roth, Donald J.; and Kubis. Charles S.. 4.394.408. CI.
427-231.000.
Roth. El wood A.: See —
Clark. Thomas R.; Lillmars, Alvin E ; Roth, Elwood A.; Schmick.
Alvin L.; and Todd, Maurice C, 4,393.736, CI. 83-100.000.
Roth, Michael; and Frey, Volker, to Wacker-Chemie GmbH. Process
for preparing structural components. 4,394,335. CI. 264-82.000.
Rowe, Carleton N., to Mobil Oil Corporation. Reducing fuel consump-
tion with a fluorinated compound. 4,394,134, CI. 44-62.000.
Rowe, William A., to Zenith Radio Corporation. Optical system for
projection television. 4,394,681. CI. 358-60.000.
RSV-Gusto Engineering B.V.: See —
Boon, Bart, 4,393,961, CI. 188-67.000.
Rubber-en Kunststoffabriek ENBI B.V : See—
Delhaes, Johannes C, 4,394,024, CI. 277-207.00A.
Rubey, Robert J., to Sterling Drug Inc. Check valve for use with high
pressure pump. 4.393,895. CI. 137-539.500.
Ruell. Hartwig. to Siemens Corptiration. Fingerprint sensor. 4.394.773,
CI. 382-4.000.
Ruhechemie Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Hobes, Victor J.; and Payer, Wolfgang, 4.394,483, CI. 525-60 000
Ruhrkohle Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Holz, Wilhelm; Lukaszewicz, Helmut; and Gregor. Karl, 4,394,217.
CI. 202-227.000.
Ruiz. Jorge M. Oyster splitter 4.393.546, CI. 17-76 000
Rush. David M.: See-
Anthony. James R; and Rush, David M.. 4,394.019, CI
273-256.000.
Russell, Burdsall & Ward Corporation: See—
Hess. George M.; and Zils, James A.. 4.393,787, CI. 105-199.0CB.
Ryan. John F.: See—
Higuera, Robert S.; and Ryan. John F.. 4,394,123, CI. 432-253.000.
Ryan, Joseph L.: See —
Long, Nicholas R.; Peisel. William E.; Ryan. Joseph L.; and Wat-
kins. Richard R.. 4.394.650, CI. 340-728.000.
Ryan, William H., to Owens-Illinois, Inc. Short circuit proof driver and
alarm circuit for a solenoid in a glassware forming machine.
4,394,148, CI. 65-159.000.
Rys-Sikora, John, to Du Pont de Nemours, E. I., and Company. Fast-
curing foamable composition based on ethylene terpolymers.
4,394,459, CI. 521-84.000. ^
Sae, Kim J. Variable ignition distributor. 4,393,849, CI. 123-536.000.
Saeki, Tokuichi: See —
Sawa, Natsuo; and Saeki, Tokuichi, 4,394,511, CI 548-343 000.
Sage, Paul F. Method for peeling citrus fruit. 4,394,393. CI. 426-231.000.
Sahi Electronics Co.. Ltd.: See-
Kurosawa. Tsutomu, 4.394.697. CI. 360-91.000.
St. Clair, Albert R., to Simmons USA Corporation. Apparatus for
mattress manufacture. 4.393.792. CI. 112-3.00R.
Saito, Shinroku: See —
Sawaoka, Akira; Araki, Masatada; Saito, Shinroku; and Akashi,
Tamotsu, 4,394.170, CI. 75-233.000.
Saito, Syuichiro: See—
Ha.shimoto, Teiji; and Saito, Syuichiro, 4,394,081, CI. 354-234 000.
Saito, Takashi; Sakurayama, Junichi; and Watanabe, Tsuyoshi. to
Canon Kabushiki Kaisha Method for developing an electrostatic
latent image with a liquid developer. 4,394,431, CI. 430-119.000.
Saka, Hamid J.: See —
Binegar, Scott W.; and Saka, Hamid J., 4,393,889, CI. 137-72.000
Sakabe, Yukio; and Nishioka, Goro, to Murata Manufacturing Co.. Ltd.
Temperature-compensating ceramic dielectrics. 4,394,456. CI.
501-138.000.
Sakai, Koichi, to Toko, Inc. Semiconductor integrated circuit device.
4.394,625, CI. 330-267.000.
Sakai, Masao, to Hitachi, Ltd. Method of manufacturing hermetic
sealing member. 4,393,681, CI. 72-329.000.
Sakamura, Yoshikazu. Tool attaching device for presses. 4,393,685, CI.
72-481.000.
Sakiyama, Kazuo: See —
Fujioka, Akira: Sakiyama, Kazuo; Takigawa, Akio; and Yoshida.
Motoaki, 4,394,177, CI. 106-287.140.
Sakuma, Hiraku: and Suzuki, Toshiyuki, to Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd
Insulated gate field effect transistor. 4.394,674, CI 357-23 000
Sakuma, Shinzo; See —
Warabi, Junichi: Sakuma. Shinzo; Kawaguchi. Hidemi; and Kobari.
Yukio. 4.394.554. CI. 200-144.00B
Sakurai. Kenji; and Yoshimura. Noboru. to Toyota Jidosha Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha; and Aisin Seiki Kabushiki Kaisha Interlocking
mechanism of both side lock recliner for automotive seat. 4.394,048.
CI. 297-367.000.
Sakurai, Teisuma: See—
Kato, Kotaro; and Sakurai, Tetsuma. 4,393,573, CI. 29-571.000.
Sakurayama, Junichi: Sec —
Saito. Takashi; Sakurayama. Junichi; and Watanabe. Tsuyoshi,
4,394,431,0.430-119.000.
Salamone, Joseph C: See-
Ellis. Edward J ; and Salamone, Joseph C . 4.394.179. CI. 134-7.000.
Sampathkumar. Prathivadibhayankaram S.; and Dwivedi. Basani K.. to
Chimicasa GmbH. Method of producing a-L-aspartyl-L-phenylala-
nine methylcsters. 4.394.308. CI. 260-1 12. 50R.
Samuel, Olof; and Hellemaa. Heikki. to Nordstjernan AB; and Oy
Warstsila AB. Braking diesel engines. 4.393.832. CI. 123-327 000
Sanders. Ian L.: See —
Hirko. Richard G.; Ju. KiK'han; and Sanders. Ian L.. 4.394.746. CI.
365-36.000.
Sanders. Richard: See —
Muzumdar. Deepak; Mier^wa. George A.; Sanders, Richard; and
Van der Meiden, Orrie J.. 4.394.757. CI. 370-100.000.
Sandhu. Jaswinder S.. to Raj Technology Partnership Portable liquid
crystal testing device. 4.393.712, CI. 73-603.000.
Sando Iron Works Co.. Ltd.: See —
Sando. Yoshikazu; and Ishidoshiro. Hiroshi. 4.393.532. CI.
8-149.100.
Sando. Yoshikazu; and Ishidoshiro. Hiroshi. to Sando Iron Works Co..
Ltd. Method for continuous delustcring high temperature Ireaimenl
of a textile product and an apparatus therefor. 4.393.532, CI.
8-149 100.
Sandoz Ltd.: See —
HakI, Josef, 4.394.364. CI. 423-483.000.
Moser. Helmut. 4,.^94,l.'!0. CI 8-661 000.
Sanford. Richard. Collapsible grill. 4.393.857. CI.-r26-9.00R
Sano. Yasuro: See —
Eguchi, Yasukata: Takenoya, Hideaki; and Sano, Yasuro, 4,393,794.
CI. 112-158.00E.
Suntinelli. Emil. to Lemay Corporation. Plastic lens contour cutting
machine. 4.394.099. CI. 409-104.000
Santoro. Janet M.: 5<'e —
Nix. Paul T.; Santoro. Janet M.; and Stephens. Joyce E.. 4.394.445.
CI. 435-19.000.
Santrade Ltd.: Sec —
Pantzar. Glenn G. E.. 4.393.590. CI. 30-387.000.
Santti. Arne J.: See —
Goetz. George W.; Santti. Arne J.; and LaLonde. Gary R .
4.394.033. CI. 280-736.000.
Sanyo Electric Co.. Ltd.: See —
Ikeguchi. Shigehiko; and Tanaka. Kouzi. 4.394.778. CI.
455-182.000.
Tachihara. Jin; and Koyama. Hideaki. 4.394.557, CI. 219-10.55B
Sappelt, Reinhard. to Lonza-Werke GmbH Process for the produc-
tion of the SchifTs bases of 2,6-dichloro-5-hydroxy-aniline. 4,394,521,
CI. 564-271.000.
Saretzky, Horst, to De Limon Fluhme GmbH & Co. Progressive-cen-
tral lubrication system. 4,393,958, CI. 184-7.00D.
Sari, Hikmet, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Adaptive system in a digital
data receiver providing compensation for amplitude and phase distor-
tions introduced by a data transmission channel. 4,394,768, CI.
375-14.000.
Sasol One (Proprietary) Limited: See —
Jager, Berend; Brink, Andries; and Kleynjan, Cornelis, 4,394,215,
CI. 196-14.520.
Satava, George L.; and Deemer, Carroll L., to Midland Steel Products.
Method for heat treating structural members 4,394,194, CI.
148-131.000.
Sato, Kanemasa; Ueno, Sadayasu; and Miya, Kazuhiko, to Hitachi, Ltd.
Air flow fate measuring apparatus. 4,393.697. CI. 73-1 18.(XX).
Sato. Manabu: See —
Yamamoto. Toshiharu; Sato. Manabu; Akiba. Katsuya; and Abe.
Koreyoshi, 4.393,-540, CI. I6-1I4 00R
PI 32
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Sato. Seiichi: See —
Shiratsuchi, Masami; Shimizu, Noboru; Shigyo, Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura, Kiyoshi: Sato.
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi. 4,394.382. CI. 424-283.000.
Sato. Yoshimi, to Nissan Motor Co.. Ltd. Automotive vehicle seat belt
device. 4.394.035. CI. 280-804.000.
Satoh. Kiyosumi; and Watanabe. Nobuyuki. to A. Aoki & Associates.
Data processor controlled by microprograms. 4,394,735. CI
364-200.000.
Satoh. Nobuo: See—
Ilo. Tadahiko; Arao, Toshio; Satoh. Nobuo; and Harada, Hiroshi.
4.394.472. CI. 524-100.000.
Satoh, Shingo; Inoue. Takashi; Naki. Minora; and Kawauchi. Yuji. to
Nippon Steel Corporation. Method of preliminary desiliconization of
molten iron by injecting gaseous oxygen 4.394.165. CI. 75-60.000.
Satterfield. Larry S.. to Milliken Research Corporation. Apparatus to
measure yarn tension. 4.393,725. CI. 73-862.410.
Sauer. L. Peter; and Gurak, Ronald W., to Signode Corporation.
Method and apparatus for pre-draping an object receiving station
with flexible binding. 4.393,763, CI. 100-2.000.
Sauerschell. Wolfgang: See—
Werkmann. Karl-Heinz; and Sauerschell, Wolfgang, 4,393,724, CI.
73-861.910.
Saunders, Ian J.; See—
Dearnaley, Geoffrey; Steeples, Kenneth; and Saunders, Ian J.,
4,394.180, CI. 148-1.500
Savelieva. Lidia B.: See—
Azarevich. Gennady M.; Gusyatsky. losif A.; Savelieva, Lidia B.;
and Akimov. Boris I.. 4.393.675. CI. 72-71.000.
Savins. Joseph G.; and Melrose. James C, to Mobil Oil Corporation.
Conditioning a coal seam prior to in-situ gasification. 4,393,934, CI.
166-261.000.
Sawa, Natsuo; and Saeki. Tokuichi. to Shikoku Chemicals Corporation.
Imidazole 4(5)-dithiocarboxylic acids or salts. 4.394.511, CI.
548-343:000.
Sawada, Naotoshi: See —
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda. Hisashi; Kawamura. Kiyoshi; Sato.
Seiichi Akashi. Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida. Yasumi. 4.394.382. CI. 424-283.000.
Sawaoka. Akira; Araki. Masatada; Saito. Shinroku; and Akashi,
Tamolsu. to Nippon Oil and Fats Company. Limited Composite
sintered compact containing high density boron nitride and a method
of producing the same. 4.394.170. CI. 75-233.000.
Scanlon. George R . to Napco. Inc. High speed plating of flat planar
workpieces. 4,394.241. CI. 204-198.000.
Scanlon. Michael J.: See-
Wang. Samuel S.; and Scanlon. Michael J.. 4.394,257, CI.
209-166.000.
Scapa Dryers. Inc.: See—
Westhead. William T.. 4.394.413. CI. 428-257 000.
Scarpelli. Joseph A., to Eurand America, Inc. Incorporation of finely
divided additives at the surface of microcapsule walls. 4,394,287. CI.
64-4.320.
Scerbii. Louis J.: See — .
Montalto. Anthony R ; Scerbo, Louis J.; and Starace, Jeremia P.,
4,394,620. CI. 324-149.000
Scharr. Thomas A.: See—
Winchell. Vern H., II; Scharr. Thomas A.; and Clark. Lowell E..
4.394,678. CI. 357-68.000.
Schatteman, Etienne A M.. to Staar S. A. Apparatus for automatic
inverting of cassettes. 4.394.698. CI. 360-96.500.
Scheck. Georg: See—
Storandt. Ralf; Richert. Manfred; and Scheck, Georg, 4.394,032.
CI. 280-618.000.
Schempp. Heinrich: St-e— ^ ,„. ,n
Sturm. Elmar; Schempp, Heinnch; and Martin. Henry. 4.394.152,
CI. 71-77.000.
Schenkel. Robert H . to American Cyanamid Company. Method for the
control of cattle grubs employing m-phenoxybenzyl and acyano-m-
phenoxybenzyl esters of 2-haloalkyl(oxy-. thio-. sulfinyl-. or sul-
fonyDphenyl alkanoic acids. 4.394.388. CI. 424-304.000
Scherbing. Frank J., to Fort Lock Corporation. Switch lock. 4,394,551.
CI 200-44.000.
Scheuble. Max; and Munsch. Paul, to Dentsply Research & Develop-
ment Corp. Non-dusting and fast-wetting impression material and
method of preparing same 4,394.172, CI. 106-38.50D.
Schilling. John R. Diverging vortex separator 4.394.138. CI. 55-1.000.
Schimion. Werner; and Herbrand. Josef, to SMS Schloemann-Siemag
Aktiengesellschaft Magnetic liquid filter 4.394.264. CI. 210-222.000.
Schinkitz. Dieter: See—
Hartmann. Achim; and Schinkitz. Dieter. 4.394.270. CI.
210-726.000.
Schinozaki. Samuel S.: See—
Meitzler Allen H.; Donlon. William T.. Jr.; and Schinozaki. Sam-
uel S, 4.394,672. CI. 357-10 000
Schlosser. Mark S.. to Korry Manufacturing Co. Flip-action guard and
position indicator for push-to-actuate and push-to-release switch.
4.394.552. CI. 200-61.620.
Schlumberger Technology Corporation: See— ,,, „^
Grau. James A.; and Hertzog, Russel C. 4,394,574, CI. 250-262.000.
Pottier, Alain; Chesnel. Pierre; and Chaintreau, Bernard. 4,393.946,
CI. 175-4.560.
Schmick, Alvin L.: See— . . ^ ^ i
Clark, Thomas R.: Lillmars, Alvin E.; Roth, Elwood A.; Schmick,
Alvin L.; and Todd, Maurice C. 4.393.736. CI. 83-100.000.
Schmid. Wolfgang, to Dr. Ing h.c.F. Porsche AG. Multicylinder
internal combustion engine, especially for automotive vehicles and
process for supplying of a fuel-air mixture thereto. 4,393,827, CI.
123-198.0OF.
Schmider, Fritz; and Muller, Rolf, to Papst-MOTOREN KG. Motor
with a disk rotor. 4,394,594. CI. 310-68.0OR.
Schmidlin. Albertus E.: See—
Goes. Michael J.; Masly. John R.; and Schmidlin, Albertus E.,
4.393.783. CI. 102-529.000.
Schmidt, Curt, to Kernforschungszentrum Karlsruhe GmbH. Differen-
tial pressure sensor. 4,393,714, CI. 73-718.000.
Schmidt, Yves, to Aciers et Outillage Peugeot. Safety belt buckle.
4,393,557. CI. 24-230.0OA.
Schmitt. William R.: See—
Brandt. John G.; Dickerson. Joyce H.; and Schmitt. Wilham R.,
4.394.235, CI. 204-165.000.
Schmitz, Jerome J.: See—
Fryar, Durward; and Schmitz, Jerome J., 4.393,643, CI. 53-471,000.
Schnabel, Rolf; Weitz, Hans-Martin; and Fischer, Rolf, to BASF Ak-
tiengesellschaft. Regeneration of supported catalysts containing
palladium and/or platinum and tellurium. 4,394,290, CI. 252-412.000.
Schneider. Hartmut. to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft. Splittable fiber
optical waveguide and method of manufacture. 4,394,062, CI.
350-96.330.
Schneider. Werner, to Dango & Dienenthal Maschinenbau GmbH.
Sealing assembly for furnace probe bore. 4,393,703. CI. 73-432.0OR.
Schnell. John W.. to Toastmaster. Inc. Foot construction for portable
electric space heaters. 4,394,563. CI. 219-342.000.
Schniggenfittig, Gunther: See—
Cappel, Bert; Schniggenfittig, Gunther; and Schuhmann, Siegfried,
4,393.775. CI. 101-365.000.
Schober. William R See—
Fallon, William H.; Schober, William R.; Neukirch. Edward O.;
and Kirby, Donald W., 4.394.611. CI. 320-21.000.
Scholl. Hans-Joachim, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Diisocyanates
useful as a structural component in the preparation of polyurethane .
plastics. 4.394.495, CI. 528-67.000.
Scholz, Dieter: See—
Lutze. Uwe; Scholz, Dieter; and Brennsteiner, Ernst, 4.393,947, CI.
175-323.000.
Schonhuber. Max J. Data recording system. 4.394.567. CI. 235-375.000.
Schrader, Paul G.. to Dow Chemical Company. The. Epoxidation
products of l,l,l-tri-(hydroxyphenyl) alkanes. 4,394,496, CI.
528-98.000.
Schreiner, Joachim, to Bombardier-Rotax Gesellschaft mbH. Steering
gear for a track-laying vehicle. 4.393,952, CI. 180-6.440.
Schrodter, Klaus; and Lehr. Klaus, to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft.
Process for reducing iron in phosphoric acid solution. 4,394,360, CI.
423-317.000. _, ^
Schroeder. Scott L.. to GTE Automatic Electric Incorporated. Appa-
ratus for aligning an optical fiber in an LED package. 4,394.061, CI.
350-96.200. ,
Schroer, George A., to Cincinnati Milacron Inc. Toolholder for sup-
porting thin rotary tools. 4,393,626, CI. 51-168.000.
Schuhmann. Siegfried: See—
Cappel. Bert; Schniggenfittig. Gunther; and Schuhmann, Siegfried',
4,393,775. CI. 101-365.000.
Schultheiss, Karl D.: See— , ^ . -,„^ ,^, ^,
Haese. Egon; Willms. Rolf; and Schultheiss, Karl D., 4,394,363, CI.
423-356.000.
Schultz. Michael E.: See—
Simning. Robert A.; and Schultz, Michael E.. 4.394,094, CI.
400-124.000.
Schulz. Hans-Hermann: See—
Podszun. Wolfgang; Walkowiak. Michael; and Schulz, Hans-Her-
mann, 4.394,465. CI. 523-116.000.
Schupphaus. Herbert, to Gebr. Eickhoff Maschinenfabrik und Eisen-
giesserer m.b.H. Nozzle holder for cutter drum in longwall mining
machinery. 4,394.053. CI. 299-81.000.
Schurrer. Josef: See— „ , , ■ ,_ «, •!. i j
Kreissl. Ottmar; Schurrer, Josef; Motz, Karl; Leitgeb, Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg. Heinz. 4.394,582, CI. 290-4.00C.
Schurter. Rolf: See—
Tobler. Hans; Fory. Werner; and Schurter, Rolf, 4,394.156, CI.
71-94.000.
Schwamm. Horst: See—
Aste, Christian, 4,394,173, CI. 104-69.000.
Schwind. Richard J: 5w— .,„,„, -, ,.
Wollar. Burnell J.; and Schwind, Richard J., 4,393,551, CI. 24-
213.00R. , .
Schwirzke Fred R. Laser induced plasma production for isotope sepa-
ration. 4,394,579. CI. 250-423.00P.
Schwitters. Stephen W.: See—
Keyes, Richard M.; and Schwitters, Stephen W., 4,393.659. CI.
Scott, Marvin D. Flow measuring device. 4,393,722, CI. 73-861.610.
Scott Paper Company; See—
Pociluyko, Alex, 4,394,212, CI. 162-162.000.
Screeton, James B. Coating composition. 4,394,477, CI. 524-319.000.
Security Imprinter Corporation: See—
Barbour, William P., 4,393,768. CI. 101-45.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 33
Linden. Gerbert; and Lust.
Sehring. Richard: See —
Buck, Wolfgang; Sehring, Richard:
Sigmund. 4,394,159, CI. 71-98.000.
Seiden, Lewis J. Three stage minimum configuration conditionally
non-blocking matrix. 4.394,541, CI. 179-18.0GE.
Seiler, James F. N.. Jr.. to United States of America. Commerce. Pneu-
matic adhesion tester. 4.393.699. CI. 73-150.00A.
Seitz. William R.. to Bendix Corporation. The. Means for improving the
efficiency of an internal combustion engine. 4.393.845. CI.
123-478.000.
Seiver, Robert L.. to Exxon Research and Engineering Co. Composi-
tion for use in a magnetically fluidized bed. 4.394.282. CI. 252-62.550.
Sekiguchi. Hiroshi: See—
Tsukui. Minoru; Sekiguchi. Hiroshi; and Machida. Takatoshi.
4.393.956. CI. 181-265.000.
Sell, Rudolf; and Kistner, Herbert, to Upat GmbH & Co. Anchor rod.
method of setting it in place and method of its manufacture. 4.393.638.
CI. 52-704.000.
Sensormatic Electronics Corporation: See-
Humble. David R.; Weaver. Jon N.; Gentzler. David L.; Eskandry.
Ezra D.; and Lamanna. Peter J.. 4.394.645. CI. .340-572.000.
Senuma. Michio; and Watanabe. Kunio. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha.
Shutter for camera. 4.394.082. CI. 354-246.000.
Seo. Yasufumi: See —
Shimamura. Tadao; Nakano. Junji; and Seo, Yasufumi. 4.394.336.
CI. 264-109.000.
Seong. Baik L.: See —
Han, Moon H.; and Seong. Baik L.. 4.394.312. CI. 260-239.30P.
Serlin, Irving, to Monsanto Company. Vinyl acetate interpolymer
latices. 4,394,479, CI. 524-459.000.
Severson. Eugene K.. to Hewlett-Packard Company. DC Switching
circuit. 4,394.682, CI. 358-73.000.
Shaffer, John W.: See—
Brower. Boyd G.; and Shaffer. John W.. 4.394.709. CI. 361-401 000
Brower, Boyd G.; Broadt. David R.; and ShatTer. John W .
4.394,710. CI. 361-401.000.
Shah, Nayan S. Midstream urine collection device. 4,393,881. CI.
128-760.000.
Shalon. Tadmor. to Measuregraph Company. The. Computer adapted
apparatus and method for pricing lengths of material. 4,394.740. CI.
364-464.000.
Shanks. Donald E.. to United States of America. Interior High temper-
ature hydrolysis of aluminum sulfate solutions. 4.394.368. CI.
423-556.000.
Sharp. Bernard C. to Parker Hannifin Corporation. Reversible flag
type rear view mirror. 4.394.066. CI. 350-307.000.
Sharp Corporation: See—
Mahon. Douglas K.. 4.394.695. CI. 360-53.000.
Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Takeda. Mikio; Kakihara. Yoshinobu; Yoshida. Masaru; and
Nakata. Yukihiko. 4.394.601. CI. 313-509.000.
Shatterproof Glass Corporation: See—
Robinson. Merrill G.. 4.394,236, CI. 204-192.00R.
Shaw, David B.: See—
Nappholz, Tibor A.; Hinch. Barry; and Shaw. David B.. 4,393.874.
CI. 128-419.0PT.
Shaw. Donald E.: See-
Shaw. Jack B.; and Shaw. Donald E.. 4.394.045. CI. 297-118.000.
Shaw. Jack B.; and Shaw. Donald E Sportsman sling seat and game
haul. 4.394.045. CI. 297-118.000.
Shell Oil Company: See—
Dilgren. Richard E.; and Owens. Kenneth B.. 4.393.937. CI.
166-272.000.
Foster, Elton G.. 4.394.367, CI. 423-502.000.
Lawson, Jimmie B.; and Richardson, Edwin A., 4,393,938. CI.
166-279.000.
Waller. Jan; and Loof. Philippus. 4.394.119, CI. 431-5.000.
Shen. John C. S.: See—
Ottman. John C; and Shen. John C. S.. 4.393.628. CI. 51-281.0SF
Shen. Roderick C. to Mobil Oil Corporation. Catalytic dewaxing
process. 4.394.249. CI. 208-89.000.
Shepard. Joseph F.: See —
Gardiner. James R; Makarewicz. Stanley R.; Revitz. Martin; and
Shepard. Joseph F.. 4.394.406. CI 427-86.000.
Shephard. Margaret C : See—
Balasubramanyan. Sugavanam; and Shephard. Margaret C.
4.394.380. CI. 424-269.000.
Sherman, John D.: See—
Chao. Chien C; and Sherman. John D.. 4.394.178. CI. 127-46.300
Sherrill. George F.. to George F. and Irene Sherrill 1978 Trust No. 1;
and George F. and Irene Sherrill 1978 Trust No. 2. Method for the
relief of pain. 4,394,381, CI. 424-274.000.
Shibata, Koichiro, to Cuisinarts, Inc. Julienne cutter for food proces-
sors. 4.393.737. CI. 83-356.300.
Shiffiett. David C: See-
Hough. Louis E.; De Vigili, Walter J.; and Shffflett. David C.
4.394.044. CI. 296-218.000.
Shigyo. Hiromichi: See—
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda. Hisashi; Kawamura. Kiyoshi; Sato.
Seiichi Akashi. Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi. 4.394.382, CI. .424-283.000.
Shikoku Chemicals Corporation: See—
Sawa, Natsuo; and Saeki. Tokuichi. 4.394.511. CI. 548-343.000.
Denki Kabushiki
179-1 OOG.
Denki Kabushiki
179-l.OOG.
Shikoku Electric Power Co.. Inc.: See —
Shima. Michitsune; Kihara. Shiso; Omichi, Takeo; Igarashi, Taenji;
and Mangetsu, Kenji. 4.393,920. CI. 165-1 l.OOA.
Shikoku Kasei Kogyo Company Ltd.: See —
Shimamura. Tadao; Nakano. Junji; and Seo. Yasufumi. 4.394.336.
CI. 264-109.000.
Shima. Kenji; and Hibino. Masahiro, to Mitsubishi
Kaisha. Sound reproduction device. 4.394.536. CI.
Shima. Kenji; and Hibino. Masahiro. to Mitsubishi
Kaisha. Sound reproduction device. 4.394.537. CI.
Shima. Michitsune; Kihara. Shiso; Omichi. Takeo; Igarashi. Taenji; and
Mangetsu. Kenji. to Kansai Electric Power Co.. Inc.. The; Kyushu
Electric Power Co.. Inc.; Shikoku Electric Power Co . Inc ; and
Mitsubishi Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Manipulator for working in a
heat exchanger. 4.393.920. CI. 165-11 OOA.
Shimada. Nobuyoshi: See —
Umezawa. Hamao; Shimada. Nobuyoshi; Naganawa. Hiroshi;
Takita. Tomohisa; Hamada. Masa; and Takeuchi. Tomio.
4,394.446. CI. 435-88.000.
Shimamura. Tadao; Nakano, Junji; and Seo. Yasufumi. to Shikoku
Kasei Kogvo Company Ltd. Production of tablets of sodium dichlo-
roisocyanurate. 4.394.336, CI 264-109 000.
Shimamura. Yasuki: See—
Miyake. Tetsuya; Takeda. Kunihiko; Onitsuka. Hatsuki; Okuyama.
Kazuo; and Shimamura. Yasuki. 4.394.353. CI. 423-21 500.
Shimbo. Masafumi, to Kabushiki Kaisha Daini Seikosha Method for
fabricating integrated circuits. 4..393.574. CI. 29-571.000.
Shimizu. Isamu; Shirai. Shigeru; and Inoue. Eiichi. to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha. Photoconduclive member with a-Si(C) barrier layer
4.394.425. CI. 430-65.000.
Shimizu. Isamu; Shirai. Shigeru; and Inoue. Eiichi. to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha Photoconduclive member with a-Si(N) barrier layer
4.394.426. CI. 430-65.000.
Shimizu. Noboru: See —
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda. Hisashi; Kawamura. Kiyoshi. Sato,
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada. Naoto-
shi; and Uchida. Yasumi. 4.394.382. CI 424-283.000.
Shimizu. Yoshikazu; and Yamaguchi. Kathuhiro. to Azona Co.. Ltd
Film-paper fiber layer laminate and process for preparation thereof
4.394.416. CI. 428-341.000.
Shimp. Lawrence A ; and Steinhauer. John E.. to FMC Corporation
Shrimp processing. 4.394,396. CI. 426-332.000.
Shingu. Masataka: See—
Uchiyama. Nobuhiro; Shingu. Masataka; and Tsukada. Saburo.
4.394.211. CI. 156-628.000
Shinkle. George A.: See-
Johnston. Daniel U.; and Shinklc, George A.. 4.393.688. CI
73-35.000.
Shionogi & Co.. Ltd.: See —
Kamata. Susumu; and Nagata. Wataru. 4.394.505. CI
Shioya. Yoshimi; Maeda. Mamoru; Takasaki. Kanetake;
Mikio. to Fujitsu Limited. Methixi of plasma enhanced chemical
vapor deposition of phosphosilicate glass film 4.394.401. CI
427-39.000.
Shirai. Shigeru: See—
Shimizu. Isamu; Shirai. Shigeru; and Inoue.
430-65.000.
Shimizu. Isamu; Shirai. Shigeru; and Inoue.
430-65.000.
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi; Kyotani.
Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura. Kiyoshi; Sato. Seiichi.
Akashi. Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada. Naotoshi; and
Uchida. Yasumi. to Kowa Company. Ltd. Dihydrobenzopyran com-
. pounds and pharmaceutical composition comprising said compounds
4.394.382. CI. 424-283.000.
Shirley. Robert E.. to International Business Machines Corporation
System and method for generating enlarged or reduced images
4.394.693. CI. 358-298.000.
Shirley. William C: See-
Kaiser. Kenneth L , and Shirley. William C. 4.394.026. CI
277-231.000.
Shoji. Osamu: See— ^
Okabe. Yousuke; and Shoji. Osamu. 4.394.331. CI. 261-18.00B.
Shonk. Phyllis: See— , _ ^
O'Boyle. Dolores; and Shonk. Phyllis. 4.393.875. CI. 128-425.000.
Short. Robert D . III. to Sperry Corporation Adaptive MTI clutter
tracker-canceller method and apparatus. 4.394.658. CI. 343-7 700.
Shultz. David E.: See—
Breeck. Philip L.; Shultz. David E.; and Rosselli. Andrew C .
4,393.825. CI. 123-198.00F.
Shum. Martin N Y.. to General DataComm Industries. Inc. Data
transmission over long distance circuits. 4.394.767. CI 375-13.000.
Sian. Sucha S.. to Essex Group. Inc. Miniature plug-in fuse assembly
and method of making a fuse element therefor 4.394.638. CI
337-264.000 ^^ ,,,
Siebert. Steve L.. to D & S Manufacturing Tractor mounted forklili
4.394.107. CI. 414-631.000.
Siemens: See—
Kreissl Ottmar; Schurrer. Josef; Motz. Karl; Leitgeb. Wilhelm; and
Rosenberg. Heinz. 4.394.582. CI. 290-400C.
Siemens Aktiengesellschaft: See—
Dull. Hans J.; and Hillmer. Adolf. 4.393.786. CI. 104-141 000
Ertl. Wilhelm; Lachmann. Ulrich; and Pertsch, Heinnch. 4.394.190.
CI. 148-31.550.
Gfrerer. Manfred. 4..394.193. CI. 148-129.000.
544-91.000
and Takagi.
Eiichi. 4,394.425. CI
Eiichi. 4.394.426. CI
PI 34
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Kammerlander. Karl, 4.394,760, CI. 370-111.000.
Pape, Heinz; Quelia, Ferdinand; and Krueger, Hans, 4,394,068, CI.
350-345.000.
Penzel. Hans-Joerg, 4,394,753, CI. 365-236.000.
Schneider, Hartmut, 4,394,062, CI. 350-96.330.
Siemens Corporation: See —
Muzumdar, Deepak; Mierzwa, George A.; Sanders, Richard: and
Van der Meiden, Orrie J., 4.394.757, CI. 370-100.000.
Ruell. Hartwig. 4.394.773. CI. 382-4.000.
Sievert. Raymond. Multi-fueled boiler. 4.393.814. CI. 122-22.000.
Signode Corporation: See —
Sauer. L. Peter; and Gurak, Ronald W., 4,393,763. CI. 100-2.000.
Silberstein. Donald A., to Brown & Williamson Tobacco Corporation.
Cigarette Hlter. 4.393.885. CI. 131-339.000.
Simmons U.S.A. Corporation: See —
St. Clair. Albert R.. 4.393,792, CI. I12-3.00R.
Simning. Robert A.; and Schultz, Michael E., to Pako Corporation.
Slide motion sensor for slide mount data printer. 4,394,094, CI.
400-124.000.
Simpson, Howard D.: See —
Miller, J. Wayne; and Simpson, Howard D.. 4,394.302, CI.
252-465.000.
Singer Company, The: See —
Dunn. William H.; Horey. Leonard L; and Kurland, Marvin.
4,393,796. CI 112-I58.00E.
Marsh. Walter H. W.. 4.393.797. CI. 112-158.00B.
Singer. Mortimer. Apparatus for positioning a treating liquid at the
bottom of a well. 4,393.927. CI. 166-105.000.
Sipos, Laszio: See —
Golimowski, Jerzy; Sipos, LaszIo; and Valenta, Paul. 4.394.238. CI.
204-400.000.
Sirey. Michael. Surfboard carrying rack. 4,393,986. CI. 224-32.00A.
Skappel, Einar. Method and device for automatic irrigation. 4,393,890,
CI. 137-78.200.
Skalsche. Othmar: See —
Obermayer. Bertram; Skatsche. Othmar; and Greier, Josef.
4.393.822. CI. 123-195.00R.
Skil Corporation: See —
Emerle. Emil; and Gawron. Alex F., 4,394,612, CI. 320-31.000.
Skinner, Robert T. J., to Lucas Industries Limited. Liquid fuel pumping
apparatus. 4,393,844, CI. 123-450.000.
Slabaugh, Edward J., to Comptech. Incorporated. Radial vane gas
throttling valve for vacuum systems. 4,393,896, CI. 137-601.000.
Slavov, Rashko R.: See —
Vutov, Stancho H.; and Slavov, Rashko R., 4,393,916, CI.
164-119.000.
Sloane. Michael W., Sr.: See —
Cooper. Larry V.; and Sloane, Michael W., Sr.. 4,393,940, CI.
166-325.000
Slusarski. Ronald S.; See —
Chmura. William J.; and Slusarski. Ronald S., 4,394,421, CI.
428-547.000.
Small, Vernon R., Jr.. to Chevron Research Company. Method for
improving fuel economy of internal combustion engines using sulfur-
containing alkanediols. 4,394,276, CI. 252-32. 70E.
Small. Vernon R.. Jr.. to Chevron Research Company. Method for
improving fuel economy of internal combustion engines using bo-
rated sulfur-containing 1.2-alkane diols. 4.394.277. CI. 252-32. 70E.
Smirnov. Viktor S.: See —
Gryaznov, Vladimir M.; Smirnov, Viktor S.; Vdovin, Valentin M.;
Ermilova, Margarita M.; Gogua, Liya D.; Pritula, Nina A.; and
Fedorova, Galina K., 4.394.294. CI. 252-430.000.
Smith. Charles W.; and Borchardt. John K.. to Halliburton Services.
Clay stabilization during oil and gas well cementing operations.
4.393.939. CI. 166-293.000.
Smith. Dale A.: See —
Banon, Roy C; and Smith. Dale A.. 4,394.031, CI. 280-515.000.
Smith. Daniel M.: See —
Borras. Jaime A.; Gonzalez, Ruben J.; Smith, Daniel M.; and
Wieczorek, Alfred B., 4,394,776, CI. 455-76.000.
Smith, David H. Ice skate carrier. 4,394.042. CI. 294-163.000.
Smith. David T. Cold forced sintered powder metal annular bearing
ring blanks. 4.393.563. CI. 29-149.5DP.
Smith. George H.. to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing Company.
Photopolymerizable compositions. 4.394,403, CI. 427-42.000.
Smith, Harry A., to Dow Chemical Company, The. Alkyl acetates as
phase separation inhibitors in liquid hydrocarbon fuel and ethanol
mixtures. 4,394,133, CI. 44-56.000.
Smith International, Inc.: See —
Liljestrand, Walter E., 4.394,140, CI. 55-184.000.
Oelke. Erwin S.. 4.394.020. CI. 277-1.000.
Smith. James; and Lamport. Daphne L., to U.S. Philips Corporation.
Flat cathode ray tube. 4,394,599. CI. 313-422.000.
Smith, Judson L. Vehicle drying machine and method. 4,393,602, CI.
34-34.000.
Smith, Michael B.: See —
Nolte, Kenneth G.; and Smith, Michael B., 4,393,933, CI.
166-250.000.
Smith. Paul K.: See-
Benny, John R.; Buher, Robert W.; and Smith, Paul K., 4,394,259.
CI. 209-250.000.
Smith, Richard D. Cabinet for video game consoles, cartridges, acces-
sories, and instruction booklets. 4.394,055, CI. 312-196.000.
Smither, Miles A.: See —
Browne, Edward M.; and Smither, Miles A., 4,394,616, CI.
324-52.000.
SmithKline Beckman Corporation: See —
Kruse, Lawrence I., 4,394,514, CI. 548-508.000.
SMS Schloemann-Siemag Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Folta, Werner; and Kost. Erwin. 4,393,683, CI. 72-422.000.
Schimion, Werner; and Herbrand, Josef, 4,394.264, CI. 210-222.000.
SMS Schloemann-Siemag. Inc.: See —
Kovacs, Daniel C, 4,393,680. CI. 72-234.000.
Smyth. Nicholas P. D.; Lesniak. Jeanne M.; and Stokes, Kenneth B., to
Medtronic, Inc. Single pass A-V lead. 4,393,883. CI. 128-785.000.
Snoek, Govert J.; and Tuil, William J., to Ocean B.V. Device for
temporarily rinsing a water cock countersunk in the ground.
4.393.891, CI. 137-238.000.
Snyder General Corporation: See —
Wiese, John M.; and Hoefdcen. Russell W.. 4,394,111, CI.
417-360.000.
S.A. Des Etablissements Staubli: See —
Burquier. Jean-Luc. 4,394,039, CI. 285-85.000.
Societe Anonyme diie: L'Oreal: See —
Kalopissis, Gregoire, 4,394.520, CI. 562-557.000.
Societe Brochier et Fils: See —
Bompard, Bruno; and Bruyere, Alain, 4,394,203, CI. 156-175.000.
Societe d'Application Plastique Mecanique et Electronique Plas-
timecanique S.A.: See —
Dronet, Jean-Marc, 4,394,115, CI. 425-122.000.
Societe D'Applications Generales: See —
Picard. Jean-Francois; and Jacquard, Paul. 4.393.597, CI. 33-
275.00G.
Societe d'Assistance Technique pour Produits Nestle S.A.: See —
Rostagno, Walter; and Morand, Alfred, 4,394,395, CI. 426-285.000.
Societe Nationale d'Etude et de Construction de Moteurs d'Aviation,
"S.N.E.C.M.A.": See—
Delabie, Jacques J. A., 4,394,531, CI. 174-24.000.
Societe Nationale Elf Aquitaine: See —
Pereyre, Michel; and Pommier, Jean-Claude, 4,394,320, CI.
260-429.700.
Societe Nationale Elf Aquitaine (Production): See —
Lazarre, Flavien. 4.393,990, CI. 239-1.000.
Societe Nationale Industrielle Aerospatiale: See —
Cahuzac, Georges J. J., 4,393,669, CI. 66-13.000.
Societe Vandeputte Fils & Cie, S.A.: See —
Rabette. Jean, 4,394,652, CI. 340-764.000.
Soltis, Frank G.: See —
Hoffman, Roy L.; Houdek, Merle E.; Loen, Larry W.; and Soltis,
Frank G., 4,394,727. CI. 364-200.000.
Solvay & Cie: See —
Nicolas. Edgard. 4,394,231, CI. 204-129.000.
Sonoi, Hidekazu: See —
Asaini, Takayoshi; and Sonoi, Hidekazu, 4,393,924, CI. 165-104.120.
Sony Corporation: See —
Amano, Toshio; Nagai, Kunio; and Honma. Juri, 4,394,691, CI.
358-194.100.
Kobayashi. Katsumi. 4.394,690. CI. 358-180.000.
Menezes, William A.; and Kuper, Douglas D., 4,394,745, CI.
364-900.000.
Ninomiya, Ichiro; and Takayama, Jun, 4,394,694. CI. 360-14.300.
Sood. Ashwani: See —
Weissman. Sherman M.; Pereira, Dennis; and Sood. Ashwani.
4.394.443. CI. 435-6.000.
Sou. Teho. Watering device for pet animals. 4,393,813, CI. 119-72.500.
Soucy, John J.: See —
Soucy. Paul B.; and Soucy. John J., 4.393,954. CI. 180-205.000.
Soucy, Paul B.; and Soucy. John J. Motorized bicycle. 4.393,954, CI.
180-205.000.
Sowash, Thomas R.: See —
Long. Donald A.; and Sowash. Thomas R., 4,394,555, CI. 200-
I59.00R.
Spahni, Kurt; and Bucher, Walter, to Bauer Kassenfabrik AG. Switch-
ing device for checking the closed position of a folding door.
4,394,584, CI. 307-117.000.
Spencer, Billie M.: See —
Currie, Robert J.; Rattlingourd. Glen D.; Spencer, Billie M.; and
Zscheile, John W., Jr., 4,394,642, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Speranza, George P.: See —
Cuscurida, Michael; Grice, Neal J.; and Speranza, George P.,
4,394,463, CI. 521-167.000
Sperlich. Harold K., to Chrysler Corporation. Pickup truck cargo box
cover assembly. 4,394,100. CI. 410-2.000.
Sperry Corporation: Sec —
Boothe, Guy, 4,394.702, CI. 361-92.000.
Butler, L. Dennis; and Askov. Alan R., 4,394,103, CI. 414-24.500.
Currie, Robert J.; Rattlingourd, Glen D.; Spencer, Billie M.; and
Zscheile, John W., Jr., 4,394,642, CI. 340-347.0DD.
Freitag, Walter O.; and Suchodolski, Victor V., 4,394,160, CI.
75-0.5AA.
Martenas, Wayne B., 4,393,644, CI. 56-12.800.
Pataki, Andrew B., 4,394.592, CI. 310-12.000. _
Ross, Gerald F., 4,394,640, CI. 340-23.000.
Short, Robert D., Ill, 4,394,658, CI. 343-7.700.
Swenson, Robert E., 4,394,732, CI. 364-200.000.
Swenson, Robert E., 4,394,733, CI. 364-200.000.
Zbinden, Terry B., 4,393,921, CI. 165-40.000.
Spires, Howard R., to Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc. Ruminant animal perfor-
mance by co-administering choline and propionate enchancers.
4,394,377, CI. 424-177.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 35
Spooner, Colin R., to Delorean Research Limited Partnership. Appara-
tus for securing an article to a plastic frame-like structure. 4,394.050.
CI. 297-468.000
Sportelli, Frank A. Printing screen and method of making same.
4,394,424, CI. 430-6.000.
Spratt, Lorenzo. Stable ice release agent. 4.394,283, CI. 252-70.000.
Sprecher & Schuh AG; See—
Wallimann, Hubert, 4,394,550, CI. 200-34.000.
Spreng, Georg. Sports shoe. 4,393,605, CI. 36-1 14.000.
Springer. Hartmut. to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the
finishing of fibrous materials: sulfonyl- or carbonyl-cyanamides of
dyestuffs. 4,394.129. CI. 8-543.000.
Spruijt. Aloysius M. J. M.; Wijburg. Matheus A. T.; Benschop. Gerar-
dus C M.- and Vos. Hendrikus J. M., to U.S. Philips Corporation.
Display device. 4,394,067, CI. 350-334.000.
Sredneaziatsky Filial Vniipromgaz: See—
Golovanov, Alexandr V.; Eschenko, Vladislav Y.; Musaev, Irsali
K.; and Talibdzhanov, Zakhidzhan S., 4,394,120, CI. 431-284.000.
Staar S A ■ S^-^-
Schatteman, Etienne A. M., 4,394,698, CI. 360-96.500.
Stacey, Eric J.: See— t~ ,
Brennen, Michael B.; Gyugyi. Laszio; and Stacey. Eric J..
4,394,614, CI. 323-210.000.
Stage, Hermann; Hammer, Hartmut; and Kuhns, Walter, to Wilhelm
Schmidding GmbH & Co., Firma. Method of deodorizing and/or
deacidifying high-boiling organic compounds, papicularly edible
oils. 4,394,221, CI. 203-89.000.
Stamm, Dieter: See—
KruII, Manfred; Lobert, Udo; Stamm, Dieter; and Veeser, Klaus,
4,394,411, CI. 428-70.000.
Standard Duplicating Machines Corporation: See-
Bergman, Carl A.; Thomas, Roy L.; and Bourbeau, Richard A..
4,394,009, CI. 271-10.000.
Standard Microsystems Corporation: See—
Burstein, Steve; and Popper, Jay. 4,394,751, CI. 365-227.000.
Standard Oil Company (Indiana): See—
Cartmell, Robert R, 4,394,349, CI. 422-147.000. ^ ,„, „„ ^,
Nolte, Kenneth G.; and Smith, Michael B., 4,393,933. CI.
166-250 000.
^ Puskas, Imre; and James, David E., 4,394,299, CI. 252-447.()C»^
Standing, Colin A. Electric fence energizers. 4,394,583, CI. 307-108.000
Stanley Automatic Openers: See—
Lemirande. Rodger P., 4,394,607, CI. 318-453.000.
Starace. Jeremia P.: See— , d
Montalto, Anthony R.; Scerbo. Louis J.; and Starace. Jeremia V .
4.394.620. CI. 324-149.000.
Stark, Lucille. Pillow. 4.393.530. CI. 5-437.000.
Stauffer Chemical Company: See— „,, „^
Hardy, Thomas A.; and Liu. Sophia Y., 4,394,330. CI. 260-932.000.
Steeples, Kenneth: See—
Deamaley, Geoffrey; Steeples, Kenneth; and Saunders, Ian J.,
4,394,180, CI. 148-1.500.
Steger, Barry N.: See— „ vt
Lowery. Richard E.; Gordon, Bruce W.; and Steger, Barry N..
4,394,323, CI. 260-446.000.
Steinhauer, John E.: See— ..,«..,«/: r-i
Shimp, Lawrence A.; and Steinhauer, John E., 4,394.396. CI
426-332.000.
Stephens, Joyce E: See— . -.n. ,.c
Nix, Paul T.; Santoro, Janet M.; and Stephens, Joyce E., 4,394,445.
CI. 435-19.000.
Sterling Drug Inc.: See—
Rubey, Robert J., 4,393.895, CI. 137-539.500.
Sterrenberg, John W., to Sterrenberg, John W. Leveling mechanisms
for hand-held power drill. 4,393,599, CI. 33-336.000.
Stevens, Barry A. Chimney fire snuffer. 4,393,941, CI. 169-70.000.
Stevens Bruce W., to Menasha Corporation. Attachment system for
plastic liners. 4,394,096, CI. 403-408.000.
Stevenson, Martin J.: See—
Doyle, Francis S.; Prince, Terry B.; and Stevenson, Martin J.,
4,394,545, CI. 179-179.000. . ,„. ^^^ ^,
Stewart, James B. Collapsible traffic barricade. 4,394,105, CI.
256-64.000.
Stiftelsen Industriellt Utvecklingscentrum: See—
Andersson, Albert, 4,393,943, CI. 172-260.500.
Stillman, Suzanne: See— o u . c
Nawash, Michael S.; Stillman, Suzanne; and Mason, Robert b.,
4,393.873, CI. 604-151.000.
Stocker, Hans M: See— ' ^ ,„, di r-i
Hujsak, Edward J.; and Stocker, Hans M., 4.393.541. CI.
16-297.000.
Stockton. James G.: See— r- a xox <oa ri
Powell, Steven W.; and Stockton, James G., 4,393.598. CI.
33-302.000. . -
Stokes. Jimmy L.. to Milliken Research Corporation. Apparatus for
imparting visual surface effects to relatively moving materials.
4.393,562. CI. 26-2.0OR.
Stokes. Kenneth B.: See—
Smyth Nicholas P. D.; Lesniak. Jeanne M.; and Stokes. Kenneth
B.. 4.393.883, CI. 128-785.000.
Stolzer, Claus, to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft. Process for the preparation
of N.N-dimethyI-N-(2-bromo-4-methylphenyl)-tnazene. 4,394,309.
CI. 260-140.000. , ^ r' r- Ku
Storandt Ralf; Richert, Manfred; and Scheck, Georg. to Geze GmbH.
Ski safety binding. 4,394,032, CI. 280-618.000.
Storey, Robert C: See—
Jadwin, Thomas A.; and Storey. Robert C, 4.394,430, CI.
430-110.000.
Stott, Paul E., to Uniroyal, Inc. Azocarboxylate blowing agent.
4.394,461. CI. 521-113.000
Stover, K. Lawrence: See—
Bueno, Alejandro G.; and Stover, K. Lawrence, 4,394,122, CI.
432-30.000.
Strack. Martin P.. Jr., to Polyvend Inc. Honor system vending machine.
4.393,970, CI. 194-17.000.
Strang. Robert: See—
Jenkner. Herbert; Strang. Robert; and Adermann, Peter, 4,394,484,
CI. 525-72.000.
Strasilla. Dieter; Moldovanyi. LaszIo; Fearnley. Charles; and Meindl.
Hubert, to Ciba-Geigy Corporation. Mixtures of quaternary, poly-
meric, high molecular weight ammonium salts, which are based on
acrylic compounds, and surfactants, their preparation, and their use in
cosmetics. 4,393,886, CI. 132-7.000.
Stratta, Julius J.; Robeson. Lloyd M.; and Girardi. Richard V., to Union
Carbide Corporation. Polysiloxane treated antimony compounds.
4,394,469, CI. 523-212.000.
Strauss, Werner: See —
Heintges, Siegfried; Strauss. Werner; and Weiffen, Karl-Heinz.
4,394,260, CI. 209-500.000.
Street, John N.: See—
Mcintosh, Walter L ; and Street, John N., 4,394.089. CI. 355-88.000.
Streifeneder. Ludwig: See—
Reznik, Benjamin; Welber, Stanley; and Streifeneder, Ludwig,
4,393,872, CI. 604-151.000.
Strunk, Norman E.; and Pohoreski. Anton P. Sprinkler head assembly.
4,393,992, CI. 239-200.000.
Sturm, Elmar; Schempp, Heinrich; and Martin, Henry, to Ciba-Geigy
Corporation Sulfur-containing oxime compounds for protecting
cultivated plants. 4,394,152, CI. 71-77.000.
Sturm, Werner Apparatus for producing an arc welded sleeve
4,393,571, CI. 29-564.600.
Suchodolski. Victor V.: See— , „ ^,
Freitag. Walter O.; and Suchodolski. Victor V.. 4.394.160, CI.
75-0.5AA. ,,^
Suchoff. Michael A ; Doyle, Holly T.; and Doyle, Robert O.. to I/O
Corporation Communication terminal providing user communica-
tion of high comprehension. 4,394,649, CI. 340-711.000
Suderman, Donald A., to Kansas State University Research Founda-
tion. Undercutter seed planter. 4,393,791, CI. 111-34.000
Sugihara. Kunihiko; and Onoda, Michio, to Nissan Motor Company,
Limited Spark timing control system for an internal combustion
engine. 4,393,837, CI. 123-425.000.
Sugitani, Hiroshi; Matsuda. Hiroto; Kimura, Koichi; and Ikeda.
Masami, to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Ink jet head and method for
fabrication thereof 4,394,670, CI 346-140.00R.
• Sugitani, Yuji: See— . ,«.■ .en
Nomura, Hirokazu; Sugitani, Yuji; and Suzuki. Yasuo. 4,394,559.
CI. 219-125.120.
• Sugiyama, Mitsuhiko, to Rank Xerox Limited. Automatic and manual
sheet feeding mechanism. 4,394,008. CI. 271-9.000.
Sulzer Brothers Limited: See-
Meier. Hans, 4,393,752, CI. 92-86.000.
Sumitomo Chemical Company, Limited: See—
Fujioka, Akira; Sakiyama, Kazuo; Takigawa, Akio; and Yoshida.
Motoaki. 4,394,177, CI. 106-287.140.
Kinno Osamu Hirano, Masachika; Takeda, Hisami; and Kato,
Toshiro, 4,394,379, CI. 424-21 1.000. .
Yamada, Yasuharu; and Kawai, Kiyoshi, 4,394,292. CI. 252-
429.00B.
Sumitomo Metal Industries. Ltd.: See—
Kusaba, Yoshiaki, 4,393,679. CI. 72-221.000
Ohtani. Hiroo; and Watanabe. Seiichi, 4,394,187, CI. 148-12.00F
Sun Electric Corporation: See—
Marten, John A.; Legler, Donald; and Wagoner. Jesse W.,
4.393.694, CI. 73-117.000.
Sundmar, Goran: See— .,„,-,., ^, on ^c/mn
Gustavsson, Olle; and Sundmar, Goran, 4.393,747. CI. 89-45.000.
Sundseth, Jarl. Air cleaners. 4,394,145, CI. 55-347.000.
Sundstrand Data Control, Inc.: See—
Atherton. Kim W.. 4,394,405. CI. 427-58.000.
^""ciark! W^aUer L.;^aiid Sutton, Trevor G.. 4.393,692, CI. 73-1 15.000.
Suzuki. Kouichi; and Mori. Kazuyuki. to Nissan Motor Company.
Limited Automatic speed control syst^i for an automotive vehicle.
4.394.739. CI 364-426.000. ^ . „ ^ u v
Suzuki. Seigo; and Eguchi. Seiji. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha. Multi-processor system employing job-swapping between
different priority processors. 4.394,730. CI. 364-200.00(1 , . ..
Suzuki. Tadashi; and Kishi. Norimasa. to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd. Ab-
normality treatment device for automatic transmission control de-
vice. 4,393,732. CI. 74-866.000.
Suzuki, Toshiyuki: See— , ^ ^ , .,„.,,. r-i i<mf¥¥i
Sakuma, Hiraku; and Suzuki, Toshiyuki, 4.394,674, CI 357-23 000
Suzuki, Yasuo: See— . -xoa t^ta
Nomura, Hirokazu; Sugitani, Yuji; and Suzuki, Yasuo, 4,394,559,
CI. 219-125.120. , ^ . w
Suzuki, Yoshihisa; Kaizuka, Takanoli; Hanyu, Yoshiaki; Otake. Mituyo-
shi and Hidano, Yoichi, to Hitachi. Ltd. Method for producing
magnetic recording medium. 4,394.404, CI. 427-48.000.
PI 36
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Svarc, Stanislav: See —
Rambousek, Miroslav; and Svarc, Stanislav, 4,393,648, CI.
57-413.000.
Svendsen, Noel A.: See —
Lapeyre, James M.; Svendsen, Noel A.; Carroll, Raymond J., Jr.;
Long, Henry H.; and Lindberg, Richard S., 4.393,544, CI.
17-73.000.
Swanson, Arthur P. Windshield visor mirror. 4,394,065, CI.
350-304.000.
Swenson, Robert E., to Sperry Corporation. Cache/disk subsystem
trickle. 4,394,732. CI. 364-200.000.
Swenson, Robert E., to Sperry Corporation. Cache/disk subsystem.
4,394,733, CI. 364-200.000.
Swift, Harold E.: See —
Madgavkar, Ajay M.; and Swift, Harold E., 4,394,296, CI.
252-433.000.
Vogel, Roger F.; Marcelin, George; and Swift, Harold E.,
4,394,525, CI. 568-462.000.
SWS Silicones Corporation: See —
Martin, Eugene R.; and Tripp, Jeffrey A., 4,394,517, CI.
556-419.000.
McAfee. Richard C; Adkins, James; and Miskowski, Richard L.,
4,394,317, CI. 260-429.00R.
Sybron Corporation: See —
Mehra, Ravinder C; and Aggarwal, Raj K., 4.394,266, CI.
210-244.000.
Sykora, George S.: See —
Thomas, William R.; and Sykora, George S., 4,394,202, CI.
156-94.000.
Syn-Trac Systems Inc.: See —
Forshee, David J., 4.393,999, CI. 248-346.000.
Syntex (U.S.A.) Inc.: See —
Spires, Howard R., 4,394,377. CI. 424-177.000.
Szoka, Francis C, Jr.; and Papahadjopoulos, Demetrios P Plant nutri-
ment compositions and method of their application. 4.394,149, CI.
71-28.000.
Szoka. Francis C, Jr.; and Papahadjopoulos, Demetrios P. Method of
inserting DNA into livmg cells. 4.394,448, CI. 435-172.000.
Tabler, Donald C: See —
Nowack, Gerhard P.; Johnson, Marvin M.; and Tabler, Donald C,
4.394.298. CI. 252-438.000.
Tachihara. Jin; and Koyama. Hideaki, to Sanyo Electric Co., Ltd.
Electronic controlled heat cooking apparatus. 4,394,557, CI. 219-
10.55B.
Tacquet. Maurice. Mixing unit. 4.393,854, CI. 123-576.000.
Tadashi. Mitsui: See —
Hiraku, Imaizumi; and Tadashi, Mitsui, 4,394.636. CI. 336-172.000.
Taguchi. Tatsuhisa: See —
Maruyama, Teruo; Onoda. Tadayuki; and Taguchi, Tatsuhisa,
4.394,114. CI. 418-269.000.
Takagi, Mikio: See—
Shioya. Yoshimi; Maeda. Mamoru; Takasaki. Kanetake; and
Takagi, Mikio, 4,394,401. Ci. 427-39.000.
Takagi. Toshinori: See—
Morimoto, Kiyoshi; and Takagi, Toshinori. 4.394.210. CI.
156-608.000.
Takahashi. Hiroshi. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha; and Canon Denshi
Kabushiki Kaisha. Printer with printing drum. 4.393.770. CI.
101-93.220.
Takahashi. Kenji; Yamazaki. Hisashi; Miyahara. Junji; Kotera. Noboru;
Eguchi. Shusaku; and Miura, Nono. to Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd.
Radiation image storage panel. 4.394,581. CI. 250-484.100.
Takahashi. Masao: See —
Nagano. Genzo; and Takahashi, Masao. 4,394,763, CI. 371-38.000.
Takeuchi, Fumio; and Takahashi, Masao, 4,394,198, CI. 149-21.000.
Takahashi, Toru; and Ueno. Sadayasu, to Hitachi, Ltd. Ball-circulation
type liquid flow rate sensor. 4,393,720. CI. 73-861.050.
Takahashi, Yukio: See —
Isogai, Hideaki; and Takahashi, Yukio, 4,394,657. CI. 340-825.930.
Takami, Katsumi: See —
Tanaka, Eiichi; Nohara, Norimasa; Murayama, Hideo; Ishimatsu,
Kenji; Ogushi, Akira; and Takami, Katsumi, 4.394.576. CI.
250-366.000.
Toj^ora Co Ltd ' Sec
Murakami. Kazuya. 4.393.620. CI. 46-201.000.
Takasaki. Kanetake: See —
Shioya. Yoshimi; Maeda. Mamoru; Takasaki. Kanetake; and
Takagi. Mikio, 4,394,401. CI. 427-39.000.
Takasaki, Yukio: See —
Tsukada, Toshihisa; Takasaki, Yukio; Hirai. Tadaaki; Baji. Toru;
Yamamoto, Hideaki; Tanaka, Yasuo; Maruyama, Eiichi; and
Ishioka, Sachio. 4.394.749. CI. 365-106.000.
Takasugi. Hisashi: See —
Takaya, Takao; Takasugi. Hisashi; Murata, Ma.sayoshi; and Yoshi-
oka, Akiteru. 4,394.384. CI. 424-246.000.
Takatama. Isao. Method for recovering waste heat as motive power.
4.393,657. CI. 60-653.000.
Takaya. Takao; Takasugi. Hisashi; Murata. Masayoshi; and Yoshioka.
Akiteru. to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd. Aminothiazole cy-
cloalkenyloxyimino acetamido cephem derivatives. 4.394.384. CI.
424-246.000.
Takayama. Jun: See —
Ninomiya. Ichiro; and Takayama. Jun. 4.394,694, CI. 360-14.300.
Takeda, Hisami: See —
Kirino, Osamu; Hirano, Masachika; Takeda, Hisami; and Kato,
Toshiro, 4,394.379. CI. 424-211.000.
Takeda. Kunihiko: See —
Miyake. Tetsuya; Takeda. Kunihiko; Onitsuka. Hatsuki; Okuyama,
Kazuo; and Shimamura, Yasuki. 4.394.353. CI. 423-21.500.
Takeda. Mikio; Kakihara, Yoshinobu; Yoshida, Masaru; and Nakata.
Yukihiko, to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha. ZnS:Mn Thin-film electrolu-
minescent element with memory function. 4,394,601, CI. 313-509.000.
Takematsu, Yoshiyuki, to Fuji Koeki Kabushiki Kaisha, a part interest.
Photographic flash device operatively responsive to the luminance of
an object to be photographed to prevent overexposure. 4,394,079. CI.
354-33.000.
Takenaka. Sadao: See —
Kurihara. Hiroshi; Takenaka. Sadao; and Itaya. Eiji. 4,394.626. CI.
331-12.000.
Takenoya. Hideaki: See —
Eguchi. Yasukata; Takenoya. Hideaki; and Sano. Yasuro. 4,393.794.
CI. 112-I58.0OE.
Makabe. Hachiro; Watanabe. Kazuo; Takenoya. Hideaki; Kume.
Toshiaki; and Kakinuma. Toshihide. 4,393.795, CI. 1I2-158.00E.
Takeuchi, Fumio; and Takahashi, Masao, to Nip()on Oil and Fats Com-
pany. Limited. Water-in-oil emulsion explosive composition.
4.394.198. CI. 149-21.000.
Takeuchi, Tomio: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Shimada, Nobuyoshi; Naganawa. Hiroshi;
Takita. Tomohisa;' Hamada. Masa; and Takeuchi, Tomio,
4,394,446. CI. 435-88.000.
Takigawa. Akio; See —
Fujioka, Akira; Sakiyama. Kazuo; Takigawa, Akio; and Yoshida,
Motoaki. 4.394,177, CI. 106-287.140.
Takimoto. Masaaki: See —
Kawaguchi. Hideo; Inayama. Takayuki; Takimoto, Masaaki; and
Ono, Yoshihiro, 4,394,441, CI. 430-524.000.
Takita, Tomohisa: See —
Umezawa, Hamao; Shimada, Nobuyoshi; Naganawa, Hiroshi;
Takita, Tomohisa; Hamada, Masa; and Takeuchi, Tomio,
4,394,446. CI. 435-88.000.
Talibdzhanov. Zakhidzhan S.: See —
Golovanov, Alexandr V.; Eschenko. Vladislav Y.; Musaev. Irsali
K.; and Talibdzhanov. Zakhidzhan S., 4.394.120. CI. 431-284.000.
Tallent. Othar K.; Dodson. Karen E.; and Mailen. James C. to United
States of America. Energy. Method for cleaning solution used in
nuclear fuel reprocessing. 4.394,269. CI. 210-690.000.
Tamai, Kiminori; and Hayama. Masashi. to TDK Electronics Co., Ltd.
Magnetic recording medium. 4,394,420, CI. 428-447.000.
Tamm, Rolf; and Tomoff. Toma, to Bodenseeverk Perkin-Elmer & Co.
GmbH. Sampling valve useful in liquid chromatography. 4.393,726.
CI. 73-864.840.
Tamura. Manabu; Kamemura. Yoshiki; and Handa. Masao, to Nippion
Kokan Kabushiki Kaisha. Plugs for use in piercing and elongating
mills. 4,393,677, CI. 72-97.000.
Tamura, Masao: See —
Wada, Yasuo; Usui. Hiroo; Ohkura. Makoto; Miyao. Masanobu;
Tamura. Masao; and Tokuyama. Takashi. 4.394.191, CI.
148-33.100.
Tanaka. Akira: See —
Nishida. Minoru; Hattori. Tadashi; and Tanaka, Akira, 4,393.850,
CI. 123-536.000.
Tanaka, Eiichi; Nohara. Norimasa; Murayama, Hideo; Ishimatsu. Kenji;
Ogushi. Akira; and Takami. Katsumi. to National Institute of Radio-
logical Sciences; and Hitachi Medical Corporation. Apparatus for
detecting the location of incident radiation. 4.394.576. CI.
250-366.000.
Tanaka. Hideki; and Otsuka, Kazutoshi. to Tokyo Kogyo Co.. Ltd. Fuel
control system for automobile engine. 4.393.840. CI. 123-440.000.
Tanaka. Kouzi: See —
Ikeguchi. Shigehiko; and Tanaka. Kouzi. 4.394.778, CI.
455-182.000.
Tanaka. Takayuki; and Matsumoto. Rempei. to Fuji Jukogyo Kabushiki
Kaisha. System for controlling cooling water temperature for water-
cooled engine. 4.393.819. CI. 123-41.080.
Tanaka. Yasuo: See —
Tsukada. Toshihisa; Takasaki, Yukio; Hirai, Tadaaki; Baji, Toru;
Yamamoto, Hideaki; Tanaka, Yasuo; Maruyama, Eiichi; and
Ishioka. Sachio, 4.394.749. CI. 365-106.000.
Tao, Eddie V. P.. to Eli Lilly and Company. Process for preparing an
isoxazolylurea. 4,394,510, CI. 548-240.000.
Tapp. Ruel W. Dual mode vacuum cleaner. 4,393,536. CI. I5-327.00C.
Tarle. Gregory. Track recording plastic compositions. 4,394.307, CI.
524-776.000.
Tarumi. Noriyoshi; Tsuchiya. Hiroshi; Kokiso, Masakazu; and Ohta,
Hiroaki, to Konishiroku Photo Industry Co., Ltd.; and Hokushin
Industries Corporation. Method of producing thin-walled endless
belt. 4,394,340, CI. 264-219.000.
Tatis Plasttatnigar AB: See—
Dahlberg, Anders, 4,394,715, CI. 362-153.000.
Tatsumi, Juichi. to Ye Data Inc. Printing head for a printer. 4.393,771.
CI. 101-93.480.
Taybos Sociedad Anonima: See —
Bosnia. Omar J.. 4.394.015. CI. 273-73.00C.
Taylor, Arnold E., to Discovision Associates. Hot sprue sleeve valve
assembly for an injection molding machine. 4,394,117, CI.
425-549.000.
Taylor, David W., to Ergon, Inc. Particulate coal-in-liquid mixture and
process for the production thereof 4,394,132, CI. 44-51.000.
Taylor Freezer Company: See —
Keyes, Richard M.; and Schwitters, Stephen W., 4,393,659, CI.
62-66.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 37
Taylor, Glenn N., to Kendall Company. The. Device for collecting
body liquids. 4.393,880, CI. 128-760.000.
Taylor, James L.. to Procter & Gamble Company, The. Process for
making lipid membrane structures. 4.394,372. CI. 424-85.000.
TDK Electronics Co.. Ltd.: See—
Hiraku, Imaizumi; and Tadashi, Mitsui, 4,394,636, CI. 336-172.000.
Tamai, Kiminori; and Hayama, Masashi. 4,394,420, CI. 428-447.000.
Teague, H. Derek, to Ace Orthopedic Manufacturing Inc. Colles frac-
ture fixature device. 4,393.868. CI. I28-92.00A.
Team Form AG: See —
Munz, Johann. 4.393.623, CI. 49-248.000.
Tekno-Detaljcr Sture Carlsson AB: See —
Favot. Guido; and Berg. Alf A., 4.393.678. CI. 72-131.000.
Telectronics Pty. Ltd.: See—
Nappholz. Tibor A.; Hinch. Barry; and Shaw. David B.. 4.393,874.
CI. I28-419.0PT.
Teledyne Industries, Inc.: See—
Ramey, Robert M.. 4,393,527, CI. 4-493.000.
TEMCO, Inc.:S^e—
Benny, John R.; Buher, Robert W.; and Smith, Paul K., 4,394,259,
CI. 209-250.000.
Temple, Chester S., to PPG Industries, Inc. Aqueous sizing composi-
tion and glass fibers made therewith for reinforcing thermosetting
polymers. 4,394,418, CI. 428-391.000.
Temple, Chester S.; and Hsu, Ed C, to PPG Industries, Inc. Aqueous
sizing composition for producing sized glass fiber strands with im-
proved slip flow properties. 4,394,475, CI. 524-262.000.
Tennant Company: See —
Olson, Donald L., 4,393,538, CI. 15-320.000.
Teradyne, Inc.: See— _
Janke, Elden W.. 4.394,056, CI. 312-216.000.
Terakado, Katsuyoshi: See —
Asahi, Naotatsu; Yamaguchi, Sizuka; and Terakado, Katsuyoshi,
4,394,234, CI. 204-164.000.
Terashita, Takaaki. to Fuji Photo Film Co.. Ltd. Method of controlling
exposure. 4,394.078, CI. 354-31.000.
Terazawa. Hidehito. to Nippondenso Co.. Ltd. Load drive control
system. 4,394,605. CI. 318-280.000.
Terrien, Michel E.; and Bouvet, Claude, to Etat Francais. Device for
lap-joint engagement of two bridge elements on intrados or extrados
and bridge element comprising it. 4,393,533. CI. 14-2.600.
Terwilliger. Gerald L.: See —
Merritt. Robert C; and Terwilliger, Gerald L., 4,393,852. CI.
123-564.000.
Tescher. Andrew G.: See —
Widergren, Robert D.; Chen. Wen-Hsiung; Fralick, Stanley C; and
Tescher, Andrew G.. 4.394.774. CI. 382-56.000.
Texaco Inc.: See —
Cuscurida, Michael; Grice, Neal J.; and Speranza, George P..
4.394.463. CI. 521-167.000.
Lewis, Paul H.; and Nelson, Gerald V., 4.394.254. CI. 208-3 lO.OOZ.
Marion. Charles P.; Crouch. William B.; Brent. Albert; Richter.
George N.; Child, Edward T.; and Reynolds, Blake, 4,394,137,
CI 48-197 OOR
Moser, Henry D., 4,394.261. CI. 210-96.100.
Texas Alkyls, Inc.: See —
Malpass. Dennis B.; and Yeargin, G. Scott. 4,394,326. CI. 260-
448.0AD.
Texas Instruments Incorporated: See —
Doherty. John. Jr.. 4.393,834. CI. 123-339.000.
Textron Inc.: See—
Chmura. William J.; and Slusarski. Ronald S.. 4.394.421. CI.
428-547.000.
Olmr, Jaroslav J.. 4.393.739. CI. 83-834.000.
Theilacker. Klaus, to M.A.N. -Roland Druckmaschinen Aktiengesell-
schaft. Rotary sheet printing machine with transport chain. 4.393.773.
CI. 101-232.000.
Theodore, Ares N.: See—
Chattha. Mohinder S.; and Theodore. Ares N.. 4,394,486, CI.
525-162.000.
Thermal Systems Limited: See —
Fischer. Victor H., 4.393.653. CI. 60-511.000.
Theurer. Josef, to Franz Plasser Bahnbaumaschinen-Industriegesell-
schaft m.b.H. Apparatus for replacing rail fastening elements and,
optionally, rails. 4.393.784. CI. 104-2.000.
Thies. Peter, to Wagener Schwelm GmbH & Co. Belt press with hose-
type actuator. 4,393,766, CI. 100-99.000.
Thimons. Edward D.; Heller. Kenneth S.; McCoy. John F.. Ill; and
Whillier, Austin, to United States of America, Interior. Water spray
cooler. 4,394,142, CI. 55-242.000.
Thiokol Corporation: See —
Barnes. Michael W., 4,394,329, CI. 260-467.000.
Wade, Robert C; and Guilbault, Lawrence J., 4.394.226, CI.
204-72.000.
Wade. Robert C, 4.394.458. CI. 521-82.000.
Thomas & Belts Corporation: See —
Herb. Philip J.. 4.393,548. CI. 24-16.0PB.
Thomas. Charles E.: See —
Batchelder. Clarence F.; Thomas. Charles E.; and Casady. Kent B.,
4,394,102. CI. 414-5.000.
Thomas J. Lipton. Inc.: See—
Tresser. David, 4.394.392. CI. 426-101.000.
Thomas Jefferson University: See —
Galkin. Benjamin M.; Boon, Raymond; Gilliam, Rudolph V.; and
Park. Chan H.. 4.393.864. CI. 128-1.100.
Osterholm. Jewell L.. 4,393,863, CI. 128- 1. OOR.
Thomas, Roy L.: See-
Bergman, Carl A.; Thomas. Roy L.; and Bourbeau. Richard A..
4.394.009, CI. 271-10.000.
Thomas. William R.; and Sykora, George S.. to UMAC. Inc.; and
Brooklyn Union Gas Company, a part interest. Method for relining
an underground gas line or the like without excavation. 4.394.202. CI.
156-94.000.
Thompson. Richard D.; Tsaur. Boryeu; and Tu. King-Ning. to Interna-
tional Business Machines Corporation. Rare earth silicide Schottky
barriers. 4.394.673. CI. 357-15.000.
Thomson-CSF: See—
Pham. Ngu T.; and Nuzillat. Gerard, 4,394,589, CI. 307-450.000.
Ratigalas, Max. 4.394.641. CI. 340-347.0DD.
Thorell. Jan I. Radioimmunoassay reagents. 4.394.391. CI. 424-366.000.
Thorn. Brent: S^f—
Thorn, M. W,; Thorn, E. R.; and Thorn. Brent. 4.393.734. CI.
81-468.000.
Thorn. E. R.: See-
Thorn. M. W.; Thorn. E. R.; and Thorn. Brent. 4.393,734, CI.
81-468.000.
Thorn. M. W.; Thorn. E. R.; and Thorn. Brent, to Van F. Belknap Co.,
Inc. Combined torque limiting and marking wrench. 4,393,734, CI.
81-468.000.
Threshold Technology, Inc.: See —
Warren. Ben; White. George M.; Parfitt, Rick; and Deng. Peter.
4.394,538, CI. 179-l.OSD.
Til Corporation; See —
Jones. Raymond D., 4,394,704, CI. 361-119.000.
Timex Corporation: See —
Willis, Alan E.; Lowdenslager, John R.; and Goldstein, Neal,
4,394,540, CI. I79-2.0AM.
Toastmaster, Inc.: See —
Schnell, John W., 4,394,563, CI. 219-342.000.
Tobler, Hans; Fory, Werner; and Schurter, Rolf, to Ciba-Geigy Corpo-
ration. Novel N-phenyl-substituted N-heterocyclic compounds, their
preparation and use in agents for regulating plant growth. 4,394,156,
CI. 71-94.000.
Todd, Maurice C: See —
Clark, Thomas R.; Lillmars, Alvin E.; Roth, Elwood A.; Schmick,
Alvin L.; and Todd, Maunce C. 4,393,736, CI. 83-100.000.
Todd, Mike J.: See-
Lee, Jeffrey A.; and Todd, Mike J., 4.393,534. CI. 15-98.000.
Toko, Inc.: See —
Sakai, Koichi, 4,394.625, CI. 330-267.000.
Tokuyama, Takashi: See —
Wada, Yasuo; Usui, Hiroo; Ohkura, Makoto; Miyao, Masanobu;
Tamura, Masao; and Tokuyama, Takashi, 4,394,191, CI.
148-33.100.
Tokyo Kogyo Co., Ltd.: See—
Tanaka, Hideki; and Otsuka. Kazutoshi. 4.393.840. CI. 123-440.000.
Tokyo Sanyo Electric Co. Ltd.: See —
Ikeguchi. Shigehiko; and Tanaka. Kouzi. 4,394.778, CI.
455-182.000.
Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Gocho, Yoshitsugu. 4.394.593. CI. 310-54.000.
Ishikawa. Ken. 4.394,764. CI. 372-38.000.
Iwai, Hiroshi, 4,394,196, CI. 148-187.000.
Kimura, Tadatomo; and Noguchi. Takeshi, 4,394,596. CI
310-184.000.
Komatsu. Shigeru; and Nakamura. Michio, 4,394,436. CI
430-311.000.
Morooka. Shinichi, 4,394.346. CI. 376-258.000.
Nabeshima. Daiki. 4.394.762. CI. 371-38.000.
Suzuki. Seigo; and Eguchi. Seiji, 4.394.730. CI 364-200.000.
Tsuji. Tadashi; and Igarashi. Ryokichi. 4.393.899, CI. 138-89.000.
Yoshimaru, Tomohisa. 4.394.696, CI. 360-78.000.
Tokyo Sokuhan Co., Ltd.: See—
Izumi, Masao; Yoshida, Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa, Yukio, 4,393.897.
CI. 137-831.000.
Tomic. Ernst A., to Du Pont de Nemours. E. I., and Company Phos-
phate cement and mortar. 4.394.174. CI. 106-85.000
Tomic. Mladomir: See —
Winter. John P.; and Tomic. Mladomir. 4.394.473. CI. 524-226.000
Tomimori. Akinobu: See —
Hara. Michio; Tomimori, Akinobu; and Hara. Hiroshi, 4.394.542,
CI. I79-8I.00B.
Tomoff, Toma: See —
Tamm, Rolf; and Tomoff, Toma, 4,393,726. CI. 73-864.840.
Tomoyori. Makoto: See—
Harumatsu, Masatoshi; Tomoyori. Makoto; and Tsushima. Noboru.
4.393.709, CI. 73-505.000.
Torgersen. Robert H.: See—
Jeffras. Nathaniel B.; and Torgersen. Robert H., 4.393.991. CI.
239-102.000
Toyoda. Hideaki. to Komori Printing Machinery Co.. Ltd. Ink fountain
device for use in printing press. 4.393.776. CI. 101-365.000.
Toyoda Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Kono. Hiroya; Hasegawa. Jun; Inagaki. Mitsukane; and Kobayashi.
Hisao, 4.393.966, CI 192-56.00R.
Toyota Jidosha Kabushiki Kaisha: See—
Naito. Tadashi. 4.393.693. CI 73-116.000.
Toyota Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See —
Sakurai. Kenji; and Yoshimura. Noboru. 4.394.048. CI. 297-367.000.
Transamerica DeLaval Inc.: See —
Allen, Walter E.; and Wilson, Douglas D., 4.393,998, CI. 248-
74.00R.
PI 38
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Tresser, David, to Thomas J. Lipton, Inc. Processes for producing
composite ice confections, and products thereof. 4,394,392, CI.
426-101.000.
Trethewy, Derek C See —
Cole, Denis B.; and Trethewy, Derek C, 4,393,640, CI. 53-69.000.
Triangle Package Machinery Company: See—
Klopfenstein, King L.; and Connors, Robert H., 4,393,950, CI.
177-108.000.
Tricamo, Stephen J.: See—
Lowen, Gerard G.; and Tricamo, Stephen J., 4,393,690, CI.
73-66.000.
Trinh, Eugene H.. See —
Barmatz, Martin B.; Tnnh, Eugene H.; Wang, Taylor G.; Elleman,
Daniel D.; and Jacobi, Nathan, 4,393.708. CI. 73-505.000.
Tripp, Jeffrey A.: See-
Martin. Eugene R.; and Tripp. Jeffrey A.. 4,394,517, CI.
556-419.000.
Trutzschler GmbH & Co KG: See—
Hosel, Fritz, 4J93,547, CI. 19-105.000.
TRW Inc.: See-
Hyde, Robert L., 4.394,090. CI. 368-121.000.
Martin, Jon W., 4,394.478, CI. 524-424.000.
Tryber, Robert E.; and Hoffman, George A., to Gettys Manufacturing
Co., Inc. Machine tool tracing system. 4,394,608, CI. 318-578.000.
Trybulski. Eugene J., to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc. Production of 2-ben-
zazepines. 4,394,311, CI. 26O-239.0BB.
Tsaur, Boryeu: See —
Thompson, Richard D.; Tsaur. Boryeu; and Tu. Kmg-Nmg.
4.394,673. CI. 357-15.000.
Tsuchiya. Hiroshi; See —
Tarumi. Noriyoshi; Tsuchiya. Hiroshi; Kokiso. Masakazu; and
Ohta, Hiroaki. 4.394,340. CI. 264-219.000.
Tsuda. Shunji. Electromagnetic wave energy absorbing material.
4,394,415, CI. 428-332.000.
Tsuda, Yukifumi: See —
Yoshida. Kunio; Kotera, Hiroaki; Tsuda, Yukifumi; Kanno, Yo-
shimitsu; and Naka. Motohiko. 4,394,662, CI. 346-33.00R.
Tsudakoma Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha: See-
Ida, Yoshio, 4.393,903. CI. 139-370.200.
Tsuji. Tadashi; and Igarashi. Ryokichi, to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabu-
shiki Kaisha. Plugging apparatus. 4,393,899. CI. 138-89.000.
Tsukada, Saburo: See —
Uchiyama, Nobuhiro; Shingu, Masataka; and Tsukada, Saburo,
4,394,211, CI. 156-628.000.
Tsukada, Toshihisa; Takasaki. Yukio; Hirai. Tadaaki; Baji. Toru; Yama-
moto. Hideaki; Tanaka. Yasuo; Maruyama, Eiichi; and Ishioka,
Sachio. to Hitachi. Ltd. Photoelectric device and method of produc-
ing the same. 4.394.749, CI. 365-106.000.
Tsukui, Mmoru; Sekiguchi. Hiroshi; and Machida. Takatoshi, to Fuji
Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha. Draining device used in a car-muffler.
4.393,956. CI. 181-265.000.
Tsunekawa. Sukeyoshi: See —
Homma. Yoshio; Tsunekawa, Sukeyoshi; Morisaki, Hiroshi; and
Harada, Seiki, 4,394,245, CI. 204-298.000.
Tsushima, Noboru; See—
Harumatsu, Masatoshi; Tomoyori. Makoto; and Tsushima, Noboru,
4.393.709. CI. 73-505.000.
Tu, King-Ning: See-
Thompson. Richard D.; Tsaur. Boryeu; and Tu. King-Ning.
4,394.673, CI. 357-15.000.
Tuftco Corporation: See —
Beasley, Max M., 4,393,793, CI. 112-79.00R.
Tuil, William J.: See—
Snoek. Govert J.; and Tuil. William J.. 4.393.891. CI. 137-238.000.
Tukamoto. Masahiro. to Nippon Seiko Kabushiki Kaisha. Emergency
locking type retractor. 4.393.995. CI. 242-I07.40A.
Tulloss. Joseph C: See-
Arnold. William S.. Jr.; and Tulloss. Joseph C, 4.393.582. CI.
29-828.000.
Tuman. Cazimir. Aircraft arrestment system. 4.393,996, CI. 244-
IIO.OOC.
Tumber, Brian W., to Lucas Industries Limited. Liquid fuel injection
pumping apparatus. 4,393,826, CI. 123-198.0DB.
Tung, William C. T., to Goodyear Tire & Rubber Company, The.
Water dispersible polyester compositions. 4,394,490, CI. 525-438.000.
Tuong. Due L.: See —
Bienvenu, Jacques; Dufond. Patrick; Carre. Claude; Tuong, Due
L.; Verdier, Henri; deRivet. Philippe-Hubert; Bradley. John J.;
and Franklin. Benjamin S., 4.394,725. CI. 364-200.000.
Turner. John T.; Gulati. Harish C; Hall, William B.; and Watson.
Arnold, to Victoria University of Manchester, The. Apparatus for
measuring Huid flow. 4,393,721, CI. 73-861.210.
Turnquist. Cecil E.: See —
Egly, Richard S.; and Turnquist. Cecil E.. 4,394.220, CI.
203-42.000.
Tylko, Jozef K.. to Plasma Holdings N.V. Treatment of matter in low
temperature plasmas. 4.394.162. CI. 75-lO.OOR.
Uchida, Yasumi: See—
Shiratsuchi. Masami; Shimizu. Noboru; Shigyo. Hiromichi;
Kyotani. Yoshinori; Kunieda, Hisashi; Kawamura. Kiyoshi; Sato.
Seiichi; Akashi, Toshihiro; Nagakura. Masahiko; Sawada, Naoto-
shi; and Uchida, Yasumi, 4.394.382. CI. 424-283.000
Uchiyama. Nobuhiro; Shingu. Masataka; and Tsukada. Saburo. to
Fujitsu Limited. Method of manufacturing a semiconductor device
having a layer of pwlymide resin. 4,394,21 1, CI. 156-628.000.
Ueda. Yasukiyo: See —
Mori. Keiichi; Ueda, Yasukiyo; and Mori, Keijiro, 4,393,858, CI.
126-351.000.
Ueki, Masato: See —
Wada, Masahiko; and Ueki, Masato, 4.393,981, CI. 221-289.000.
Ueno, Sadayasu: See —
Sato, Kanemasa; Ueno, Sadayasu; and Miya, Kazuhiko, 4,393,697,
CI. 73-118.000.
Takahashi. Toru; and Ueno. Sadayasu. 4,393,720, CI. 73-861.050.
Uffner, William E., to Owens-Coming Fiberglas Corporation. Modified
asphalt composition. 4,394,482, CI. 525-54.500.
Uhlmann, Klaus-Peter: See—
Uhlmann, Otto; and Uhlmann, Klaus-Peter, 4.393,566. CI.
29-417.000.
Uhlmann. Otto; and Uhlmann, Klaus-Peter, to Kabel-und Metallwerke
Gutehoffnungshutte AG. Processing of copper tubing. 4,393,566. CI.
29-417.000.
Ujikawa, Norihisa; and Fukushi. Kyosuke. to Nippon Oil and Fats Co..
Ltd. Low shrinkage unsaturated polyester resin composition.
4.394.480. CI. 525-43.000.
UUman. Myron E.. Jr.: See—
Kessler. Milton; and Ullman, Myron E., Jr., 4,393,978, CI.
215-253.000.
UMAC, Inc.: See-
Thomas, William R.; and Sykora, George S., 4.394,202, CI.
156-94.000.
Umetsu, Noriharu: See —
Kawata, Mitsuyasu; Umetsu, Noriharu; and Fukuto, Tetsuo R.,
4,394,383. CI. 424-285.000.
Umezawa. Hamao; Shimada, Nobuyoshi; Naganawa. Hiroshi; Takita,
Tomohisa; Hamada, Masa; and Takeuchi, Tomio. to Zaidan Hojin
Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai. Process for the preparation of the
antibiotic oxanosine. 4.394.446. CI. 435-88.000.
Union Carbide Corporation: See —
Bartkovitz. David J.; and Greene, George H.. 4,394,493, CL_
525-530.000.
Chao. Chien C; and Sherman, John D.. 4.394,178. CI. 127-46.300.
Hannum, Roy R., 4,394,161, CI. 75-0.5BC.
Keogh, Michael J.. 4.394,471. CI. 524-92.000.
Stratta, Julius J.; Robeson, Lloyd M.; and Girardi. Richard V.,
4,394,469, CI. 523-212.000.
Weinberg, Kurt; and Johnson. Gordon C, 4,394,295, CI. 252-
431.00C.
Union Oil Company of California: See —
Josendal, Virgil A., 4,393.936. CI. 166-263.000.
Miller. J. Wayne; and Simpson, Howard D., 4,394,302, CI.
252-465.000.
Uniroyal, Inc.: See —
Farber, Milton; and Worns, John R.. 4.394.435, CI. 430-287.000.
Plant. Howard L.; Cantor, Steven E.; Doweyko, Arthur M.;
Dekeyser, Mark A.; and Bell, Allyn R.. 4.394.155. CI. 71-94.000.
Stott, Paul E.. 4,394.461. CI. 521-113.000.
Uniroyal Ltd.: See —
Plant. Howard L.; Cantor, Steven E.; Doweyko. Arthur M.;
Dekeyser. Mark A.; and Bell. Allyn R., 4.394,155. CI. 71-94.000.
United International California Corporation: See—
Grabis. Dietrich W.. 4.394.136. CI. 48-111.000.
United Kingdom Atomic Energy Authority: See —
Dearnaley. Geoffrey; Steeples, Kenneth; and Saunders, Ian J.,
4,394.180, CI. 148-1.500.
United Kingdom of Great Britain and Northern Ireland. The Minister
of Transport in Her Britannic Majesty's Government of the: See-
Armour. John S.; Watson, Peter M. F.; and Donne, Graham L.,
4,393.980. CI. 220-85.00S.
United States of America
Agriculture: See —
Cadmus. Martin C; and Knutson; Clarence A., Jr., 4.394,447, CI.
435-104.000.
Wilke. Douglas A.. 4,393.862, CI. 126-448.000.
Air Force: See —
Gibler. David L.; and O'Connell, Daniel J., 4,393.997, CI. 244-
135.0OR.
Hall. R. Dean, 4,394,223, CI. 204-15.000.
Army: See —
Goes, Michael J.; Masly. John R.; and Schmidlin, Albertus E.,
4,393,783, CI. 102-529.000.
Mayo, Henry C; and Millman, William V., 4,393,745, CI.
89-1 806
Rocha! John G., 4,393,746, CI. 89-34.000.
Zacharin. Alexey T.. 4,393.780. CI. 102-255.000.
Commerce: See —
Seiler, James F. N.. Jr.. 4,393,699, CI. 73-150.00A.
Energy: See —
Tallent. Othar K.; Dodson. Karen E.; and Mailen. James C,
4.394.269. CI. 210-690.000.
Interior: See —
Oudenhoven. Martin S.. 4,394.051. CI. 299-16.000.
Shanks. Donald E.. 4.394.368. CI. 423-556.000.
Thimons, Edward D.; Heller, Kenneth S.; McCoy, John F., Ill;
and Whillier, Austin. 4,394.142. CI. 55-242.000.
National Aeronautics and Space Administration: See—
Barmatz. Martin B.. 4.393.706. CI. 73-505.000.
Barmatz. Martin B.; Trinh. Eugene H.; Wang. Taylor G.; Elle-
man, Daniel D.; and Jacobi, Nathan, 4,393,708, CI. 73-505.000.
Clark, Ronald K.; and Lisagor. W. Barry. 4.393.716. CI.
73-818.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 39
Dolland. Cariisle R., 4,394,610, CI. 318-803.000.
Harris, Raymond P., 4,393,777, CI. 101-4O7.0BP.
Kohl, Wayne H., 4,394,726, CI. 364-200.000.
Wren, Paul E., 4,394,777, CI. 455-95.000.
Navy: See —
Bauman, Ronald M., 4,394,624, CI. 330-151.000.
Gould. Gilbert. 4.394,556. CI. 200-161.000.
Kabik. Irving; and Ringbloom. Vernon D., 4,394,197, CI.
149-19.300.
Mooradian. Gregory C, 4.394.780. CI. 455-618.000.
Richer. John E.. 4.394,101. CI. 410-83.000.
Wallace. Edward L.; and Wright. Theodore. 4.394.689. CI.
358-168.000.
Wrench. Edwin H., Jr., 4,394,744. CI. 364-553.000.
U.S. Philips Corporation: See—
Bruinsma, John. 4.394.775. CI. 455-17.000.
Gijzen. Wilhelmus A. H.. 4.394.755. CI. 369-45.000.
Mahieu. Marc; Vandenberg. Philippe; and Varon, Jacques J..
4.393.806. CI. 118-412.000.
Nagelkerke. Petrus J. J.. 4.393.585, CI. 30-34.100.
Nicholas, Keith H.. 4,394.181. CI. 148-1.500.
Nieboer. Gerrit, 4.394,054, CI. 312-7.200.
Petroons. Jose O. G.. 4,394.637. CI. 336-192.000.
Sari, Hikmet. 4,394.768. CI. 375-14.000.
Smith, James; and Lamport. Daphne L.. 4.394.599, CI. 313-422.000.
Spruijt. Aloysius M. J. M.; Wijburg. Matheus A. T.; Benschop.
Gerardus C. M.; and Vos. Hendrikus J. M.. 4,394.067. CI.
350-334.000.
Van Hooreweder, Godwin J. O. G.. 4.393.579. CI. 29-740.000.
Van Pelt, Pieter; and Lippits. Gerardus J. M.. 4.394.438. CI.
430-321.000.
Verhoeven. Leonardus A. J.. 4.394.684. CI. 358-111.000.
Wagner. Wolfgang. 4.394.738. CI. 364-414.000.
Weiss. Hermann; Klotz. Erhard; Peemoller. HorsI; Linde. Rolf; and
Mauser. Wilfried. 4.394.063. CI. 350-162.130.
United Technologies Corporation: See —
Ferrar. Carl M.. 4,393.707. CI. 73-505.000.
Wiegand, Walter J.; and Bullis. Robert H.. 4.393,719, CI.
73-861.050.
University of California. Regents of the: See —
Kawata. Mitsuyasu; Umetsu. Noriharu; and Fukuto, Tetsuo R.,
4.394,383, CI. 424-285.000.
University of Kentucky Research Foundation: See—
Hussain, Anwar A.; Hirai. Shiniehiro; and Bawarshi. Rima.
4.394.390. CI. 424-330.000.
UOP Inc.: See—
Brunelle. Rene J. 4.394.047. CI. 297-361.000.
Gatsis. John G.. 4,394,248, CI. 208-10.000.
Upat GmbH & Co.: See-
Sell, Rudolf; and Kistner, Herbert, 4.393,638. CI. 52-704.000.
Urano, Shigeru, to Nippon Piston Ring Co., Ltd. Cylinder or cylinder
liner. 4,393,821, CI. 123-I95.00C.
Ushijima, Richard N. Thymus gland extracts. 4,394,374, CI. 424-95.000.
Usui, Hiroo: .See —
Wada, Yasuo; Usui, Hiroo; Ohkura, Makoto; Miyao, Masanobu;
Tamura, Masao; and Tokuyama, Takashi, 4,394,191, CI.
148-33.100.
Vakil, Himanshu B., to General Electric Company. Means and method
for regulating flowrate in a vapor compression cycle device.
4,393,661, CI. 62-113.000.
Valenta, Paul: See —
Golimowski, Jerzy; Sipos, Laszlo; and Valenta, Paul, 4,394,238, CI.
204-400.000.
VALEO: See-
Cadars. Patrick; and Hellouin de Cenival, Bruno, 4,394,141, CI.
55-195.000.
V&llflnc6 Leslie Sec
Campbell. Bernard F.; and Vallance. Leslie, 4,393.788, CI.
109-2.000.
Van F. Belknap Co.. Inc.: See-
Thorn. M. W.; Thorn. E. R.; and Thorn, Brent. 4,393,734, CI.
81-468.000.
Van Allan, James A.; Perlstein, Jerome H.; Reynolds, George A.; and
Goliber. Thomas E.. to Eastman Kodak Company. Photoconductive
composition and elements comprising two different compounds
having a dioxaborin nucleas on a derivative thereof 4.394.428. CI.
430-83.000.
Vandenberg, Philippe: See —
Mahieu, Marc; Vandenberg, Philippe; and Varon, Jacques J.,
4,393.806. CI. 118-412.000.
Van der Meiden. Orrie J.: See —
Muzumdar. Deepak; Mierzwa. George A ; Sanders. Richard; and
Van der Meiden. Orrie J.. 4.394.757. CI. 370-100.000.
Vandermeyden, Tom R.: See —
Crummer, Marvin R.; Gold, Kenneth S.; Johnson. David G ;
Vandermeyden. Tom R.; and Pelta. Edmond R.. 4.394.742. CI.
364-487.000.
Vanderputten, Willem: See —
De Briere. John G.; Lemanowicz, Mary M.; Richardson, David L.;
and Vanderputten. Willem. 4.394.345. CI. 376-245.000.
van der Schoot. Peter W. C. to Goudsche Machinefabriek B.V. Steam
peeling or cooking apparatus. 4.393.756. CI 99-348.000
Van Dine. Gilbert A., to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated
Voltage monitoring arrangement for ORed power diodes. 4.394.647.
CI. 340-645.000.
van Drimmelen. Nicolaas J.; Barneveld Binkhuysen. James P.; van
^ Renssen. Johan; and Verboom. Pieter. to IHC Holland N.V. Vessel in
particular suction dredger provided with means for removing oil
from a water surface 4.394.265. CI. 210-242.300.
Van Hooreweder. Godwin J. O. G.. to U. S. Philips Corporation.
Device for mounting chip-type electronic components on a substrate.
4.393.579, CI. 29-740.000.
Van Mullem. Albert, to PVBA Van Mullem. Motorbus or similar
vehicle. 4.393.955. CI. 180-291.000.
Van Nordstrand, Robert A. to Chevron Research Company. Hydro-
carbons hydroproces.sing with imogolite catalyst. 4.394.253. CI.
208-25 1. OOH.
Van Pelt. Pieter; and Lippits. Gerardus J M . to U.S. Philips Corpora-
tion. Method of manufacturing an optically readable information
carrier using deep U.V radiation 4.394.438. CI. 4.30-321.000.
van Renssen. Johan: See —
van Drimmelen. Nicolaas J.; Barneveld Binkhuysen. James P.; van
Renssen. Johan; and Verboom. Pieter. 4..194.265. CI. 210-242.300.
Vansant. James H. Vapor cooled current lead for cryogenic electrical
equipment. 4.394.6.U. CI. 335-216.000.
van't Riet. Bartholomeus; Elford. Howard L.; and Wampler. Galen L
Hydroxybenzohydroxamic acids, benzamides and esters as ribonucle-
otide reductase inhibitors. 4..394.38Q, CI. 424-308.000.
Van Thyne. Ray J.; and Rausch, John J., to Van Thyne. Ray J.; Rausch.
John J.; and Material Sciences Corporation. Bonded structure and
process of making same 4.394.422. CI. 428-592.000.
Vapor Corporation: See —
Alexander. William H . 4.393.893. CI 137-246.120.
Varon. Jacques J.: See —
Mahieu. Marc; Vandenberg. Philippe; and Varon. Jacques J..
4.393,806. CI. 118-412.000
Varta Batterie A.G.: See —
von Alpen. Ulrich; Brautigam. Reinhard; and Oliapuram. Antony.
4.394.280. CI. 252-62.200.
VDO Adolf Schindling AG: See-
Mann. Arnold; and Collonia. Harald. 4.393.833. CI 123-335 000.
Werkmann. Karl-Heinz; and Sauerschell. Wolfgang. 4.393.724. CI.
73-861.910.
Vdovin. Valentin M.: See —
Gryaznov. Vladimir M.; Smirnov. Viktor S.; Vdovin. Valentin M.;
Ermilova. Margarita M.; Gogua. Liya D.; Pritula. Nina A.; and
Fedorova. Galina K.. 4.394.294. CI. 252-430.000.
Veb Kombinat Polygraph "Werner Lamberz": See —
Janicki. Max; Liefke. Hans-Georg; Keil. Reinhart; and Gever.
Gerd. 4.394.609. CI. 318-603.000.
Veeser. Klaus: See—
Krull. Manfred; Loberl. L'do; Stamm. Dieter; and Veeser. Klaus.
4.394.411. CI. 428-70.000.
Veigel. Helmut: See —
Eckle. Otto; and Veigel. Helmut. 4.393.735. CI. 82-36.00R
Venema. Arnold: See —
Werner. Marcel A.; Venema. Arnold; and Pisters. Michael G. H..
4.394.470. CI. 524-56.000.
Verber. Carl M.; Kenan. Richard P.; and Ridgway. Richard, to Canon
Kabushiki Kaisha. Light beam scanning system with saw transducer
4,394.060. CI. 350-96.130.
Verboom. Pieter: See —
van Drimmelen. Nicolaas J.; Barneveld Binkhuysen. James P ; van
Renssen, Johan; and Verbtwm, Pieter. 4.394.265. CI. 210-242 300.
Verdier. Henri: See —
Bienvenu. Jacques; Dufond. Patrick; Carre. Claude; Tuong. Due
L.; Verdier. Henri; deRivet. Philippe-Hubert; Bradley. John J.;
and Franklin. Benjamin S.. 4..394.725. CI .^64-200000.
Vereinigte Metallwerke Ranshofen-Berndorf Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Gsehwandtner. Martin. 4.394.619. CI. 324-1 17 OOH.
Verhoeven. Leonardus A. J., to US Philips Corporation Device for
differential image determination. 4.394.684. CI. 358-111.000.
Vesuvius International Corporation: See —
Muller. Rudi; and Loser. Wolfgang. 4.393.985. CI 222-591 000
Viaud. Jean, to Deere & Companv Round baler with a discharge gale
for rearwardly moving a bale. 4.393,764, CI. 100-88.000.
Vibro-Meter S.A.: See —
Loos. Horst-Rudolf; and Dupre. Bernard. 4,393.<)51, CI
177-136.000.
Vicon Industries. Inc.: See —
Randmae. Rein S.; and Whitaker. Todd H.. 4.394.692. CI.
358-229.000.
Victor Company of Japan, Limited: See—
Yamamoto, Toshiharu; Sato. Manabu: Akiba. Katsuya; and Abe.
Koreyoshi. 4.393.540. CI 16-II4.00R
Victoria University of Manchester. The: See —
Turner. John T.; Gulati. Harish C; Hall. William B.; and Watson.
Arnold. 4.393.721. CI. 73-861.210.
Vivitar Corporation: See —
Betensky. Ellis I.. 4.394.072. CI. 350-427.000.
VLI Corporation: See —
Vorhauer. Bruce W.; and Dobbie. Thomas A.. Jr . 4.393.871. CI.
609-58.000.
Vogel. Roger F.; Marcelin, George; and Swift. Harold E.. to Gulf
Research & Development Company. Process for hydrogenaling
aldehydes. 4.394.525, CI. 568-462.000.
Vogelsberg. Robert E.: See —
Norgren. Kent S.; and Vogelsberg. Roben E.. 4.394.734. CI.
364-200.000.
Vogt. William R.: See-
Wynne. John M.; and Vogl. William R.. 4.394.655. CI. 340-825.360
PI 40
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Volkov, Nikolai M.: See —
Aronov, Sergei A.; Bashilov, Vladimir A.; Volkov, Nikolai M.; and
Dukhovlinov. Sergei D., 4.394.591, CI. 310-11.000.
Volkswagenwerk Aktiengesellschaft: See —
Hildebrandt, Christian, 4,394,036, CI. 280-804.000.
von Alpen, Ulrich; Brautigam, Reinhard; and Oliapuram, Antony, to
Varta Balterie A.G. Ion conductive mixed crystal. 4.394.280. CI.
252-62.200.
Vorhauer, Bruce W.; and Dobbie, Thomas A., Jr., to VLI Corporation.
Vaginal device. 4,393.871. CI. 609-58.000.
Vos, Hendrikus J. M.: See —
Spruiji, Aloysius M. J. M.; Wijburg. Matheus A. T.; Benschop.
Gerardus C M.; and Vos. Hendrikus J. M., 4.394.067, CI.
350-334.000.
Vutov, Stancho H.; and Slavov. Rashko R., to Institute po Metalozna-
nie i Technologia na Metalite. Apparatus for pressure die casting.
4,393.916, CI. 164-119.000.
W G. Slow T. (a partnership): See —
Gardiner. William P.. 4.393,829. CI. 123-249.000.
Wachi, Masatada. to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic
musical instruments of the type synthesizing a plurality of partial tone
signals. 4.393,742, CI. 84-1.230
Wachi, Masatada, to Nippon Gakki Seizo Kabushiki Kaisha. Electronic
musical instruments of the type synthesizing a plurality of partial tone
signals. 4,393,743, CI. 84-1.230
Wacker-Chemie GmbH: See —
Huber, Peter; August, Peter; Lampelzammer, Helga; and Primas,
Wilh. 4.394,518. CI. 556-424.000.
Roth. Michael; and Frey. Volker, 4,394.335, CI. 264-82.000.
Wada, Masahiko; and Ueki. Masato, to Kabushiki Kaisha Riken. Appa-
ratus for supplying a predetermined number of piston rings to a work
station, 4,393,981, CI. 221-289.000.
Wada, Yasuo; Usui, Hiroo; Ohkura, Makoto; Miyao, Masanobu;
Tamura, Masao; and Tokuyama, Takashi, to Hitachi, Ltd. Stacked
polycrystalline silicon film of high and low conductivity layers.
4,394.191, CI. 148-33.100.
Wade, Robert C; and Guilbault, Lawrence J., to Thiokol Corporation.
Electrolytic method for producing quaternary ammonium hydrox-
ides. 4,394,226, CI. 204-72.000.
Wade, Robert C, to Thiokol Corporation. Alkali metal borohydride
concentrate 4.394,458, CI. 521-82.000.
Wagener Schwelm GmbH & Co.: See —
Thies, Peter. 4.393.766. CI. 100-99.000.
Wagner. Heinz: See—
Dosch. Werner; and Wagner. Heinz. 4.394.263. CI. 210-198.200.
Wagner. Wilfried. to ITT Industries, Inc. Brake booster. 4,393,750, CI.
91-376.0OR.
Wagner, Wolfgang. Suction injector. 4,393,870, CI. 604-115.000.
Wagner, Wolfgang, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Method of and device
for determining the distribution of radiation absorption in a slice of a
body. 4,394,738. CI. 364-414.000.
Wagoner, Jesse W.: See —
Marten. John A.; Legler, Donald; and Wagoner. Jesse W..
4.393,694, CI. 73-117.000.
Wainwright, Clyde S.. Jr.: See —
Muse. John F.; Callihan. Rudy B.; Goad, Bobby F.; and Wain-
wright. Clyde S., Jr., 4,393.931. CI. 166-208 000.
Wakamiya, Koichi. to Nippon Kogaku K.K. Compact wide angle lens.
4,394,073, CI. 350-465.000
Wakamiya, Yoshinori; Hamasaki, Yoshiharu; Kutsuzawa, Masaki; and
Mitsubishi Denki Kabushiki Kaisha. Method of controlling continu-
ous reheating furnace. 4,394,121, CI. 432-11.000.
Walker, Charles D.: See—
Richman, David W.; and Walker, Charles D., 4,394,246, CI.
204-301.000
Walkowiak, Michael: See —
Podszun, Wolfgang; Walkowiak, Michael; and Schuiz, Hans-Her-
mann, 4,394,465. CI. 523-116.000.
Wallace. Edward L.; and Wright, Theodore, to United States of Amer-
ica, Navy. Programmable CRT brightness control. 4,394,689, CI.
358-168 000.
Wallace, George E., to Emhart Industries, Inc. Multiple damper assem-
bly for reach-in cases of the air defrost type. 4,393,664, CI. 62-256.000.
Waller, Jan; and Loof, Philippus, to Shell Oil Company. Process for
combusting ammonia-containing gases which also contain hydrogen
sulfide. 4.394.119. CI. 431-5.000.
Wallimann. Hubert, to Sprecher & Schuh AG. Gas-blast switch actuat-
able by a mechanical drive by means of a drive element. 4,394,550, CI.
200-34.000.
Walter, John; Roth, Donald J.; and Kubis, Charles S., to Continental
Group, Inc., The. Apparatus and method for applying adhesive to a
container edge portion 4,394,408, CI. 427-231.000.
Walton, William B.. to BASF Wyandotte Corporation. Stimulation of
gas wells with phosphate ester surfactants. 4.393.935, CI. 166-263.000.
Walworth Company, The: See —
Whitaker, Ritchie W., 4,394.003. CI. 251-173.000.
Wampler. E. Lawrence. Swept-dip probe. 4,394,617, CI. 324-57.00Q.
Wampler, Galen L.: See —
van't Riet, Bartholomeus; Elford, Howard L.; and Wampler, Galen
L., 4,394.389. CI. 424-308.000.
Wamser. Anton: See —
Reimpell. Uwe; Grof, Helmut; Knell, Franz-Georg; and Wamser,
Anton, 4,394.765. CI. 373-52.000.
Wamser, Manfred: See—
Pietzsch, Ludwig; Overlach, Knud; and Wamser, Manfred,
4,393,698, CI. 73-118.000.
Wang, Han C: See —
Cuomo, Jerome J.; Landon. Alfred J.; and Wang, Han C,
4,393.967. CI. 192-84.00E.
Landon. Alfred J.; Peniiebaker. William B.; and Wang. Han C,
4,393,769, CI. 101-93.300.
Wang, Kenneth Y.; and Hill, Berlie R., to Burlington Industries, Inc.
Ultrasonic bonding. 4,394,208, CI. 156-580100.
Wang, Samuel S.; and Scanlon, Michael J., to American Cyanamid
Company. Froth notation process. 4,394,257, CI. 209-166.000.
Wang, Taylor G.: See —
Barmatz, Martin B.; Trinh, Eugene H.; Wang, Taylor G.; Elleman,
Daniel D.; and Jacobi, Nathan, 4,393,708, CI. 73-505.000.
Warabi, Junichi; Sakuma, Shinzo; Kawaguchi, Hidemi; and Kobari,
Yukio, to Kabushiki Kaisha Meidensha. Vacuum circuit interrupter.
4,394,554, CI. 200-144.00B.
Ward, Fred A. Kneeling aid device. 4,394,049, CI. 297-439.000.
Warman International Limited: See —
Gugger, Hans; and Ackland, John, 4,393,944, CI. 173-28.000.
Warnecke, Waldemar, to Friedrich Wilh. Schwing GmbH. Excavator
with laser position indicator. 4,393,606, CI. 37-103.000.
Warnock, Charles E., Sr. Apparatus for use in rejuvenating oil wells.
4,393,928, CI. 166-105.000.
Warren, Ben; White, George M.; Parfitt, Rick; and Deng, Peter, to
Threshold Technology, Inc. Speech recognition system and method.
4,394,538, CI. 179-l.OSD.
Wasel-Nielen, Horst-Dieter; Maurer, Alexander; and Adrian. Renate. to
Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft. Process for making granulated con-
densed phosphates. 4.394.359, CI. 423-305.000.
Watanabe, Haruzo: See —
Yamamoto. Hideomi; Watanabe, Haruzo; Kishie, Hidehiko; and
Nishihara. Toshio, 4,394,412, CI. 428-174.000.
Watanabe, Kazuo: See —
Makabe, Hachiro; Watanabe, Kazuo; Takenoya, Hideaki; Kume,
Toshiaki; and Kakinuma, Toshihide, 4,393,795, CI. II2-158.0OE.
Watanabe, Kunio: See —
Ozawa, Masakazu; Watanabe, Kunio; Matsumoto, Shigeyuki; Ni-
shimura, Yukuo; and Miyazaki, Takashi, 4,394,669, CI. 346-
140.00R.
Senuma, Michio; and Watanabe, Kunio, 4,394,082, CI. 354-246.000.
Watanabe, Makoto: See —
Okamoto, Tadaomi; Ohta, Masayuki; and Watanabe, Makoto,
4,394,772, CI. 378-182.000.
Watanabe, Nobuyuki: See —
Satoh, Kiyosumi; and Watanabe, Nobuyuki, 4,394,735, CI.
364-200.000.
Wiiljinjih^ Sf*iif hi* ti*f
Ohtatii, Hiroo; and Watanabe. Seiichi. 4.394.187. CI. 148-12.00F.
Watanabe. Toshiro. to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co.. Ltd. Color
television signal processing apparatus. 4.394.680. CI. 358-22.000.
Watanabe, Tsuyoshi: See —
Saito, Takashi; Sakurayama, Junichi; and Watanabe, Tsuyoshi,
4,394,431. CI. 430-119.000.
Waters. Kenneth H.. to Conoco Inc Apparatus for low frequency
torsional shear wave logging. 4,394.754, CI. 367-75.000.
Watkins, Richard R.: See-
Long, Nicholas R.; Peisel, William E.; Ryan. Joseph L.; and Wat-
kins. Richard R., 4.394.650 CI. 340-728.000.
Watkins. Robert G.. Jr. Tractor-trailer land vehicle. 4,394,027, CI.
280-5.00C.
Watkins, Thomas I.: See —
Copping, Leonard G.; Kerry, John C; Watkins, Thomas I.; Willis,
Robert J.; and Palmer, Bryan H., 4,394,387, CI. 424-300.000.
Watson, Arnold: See-
Turner, John T.; Gulati, Harish C; Hall, William B.; and Watson.
Arnold, 4,393,721. CI. 73-861.210
Watson. Peter M. F.: See —
Armour. John S.; Watson. Peter M. F.; and Donne, Graham L.,
4,393,980 CI. 220-85.00S.
Wattles, Gurdon B.: See—
Marro, Joseph, Jr.; and Wattles. Gurdon B.. 4.394.131. CI.
44-51.000.
Wavin B v.: See—
Kuibers-Kiewik. Walfrida G. E.; Akkerman, Johannes; and Gons.
Johan, 4,394,501, CI. 528-485.000.
Weaver, Edgar C: See —
Ried. Harold T.; and Weaver. Edgar C, 4,394,195, CI. 148-149.000.
Weaver, Jon'N.: See —
Humble, David R.; Weaver. Jon N.; Gentzler. David L.; Eskandry,
Ezra D.; and Lamanna. Peter J.. 4,394,645. CI. 340-572.000.
Weaver. Robert F.. to Emhart Industries, Inc. Stator arrangement for a
synchronous motor. 4,394.595, CI. 310-162.000.
Wehr Corporation: See —
Zerbel, Allen J., 4,394,561, CI. 219-285.000.
Weiffen, Karl-Heinz: See —
Heintges, Siegfried; Strauss, Werner; and Weiffen, Karl-Heinz,
4,394,260, CI. 209-500.000.
Weinberg, Kurt; and Johnson, Gordon C, to Union Carbide Corpora-
tion. Coordination complexes as polyesterification catalysts.
4,394,295, CI. 252-431.00C.
Weiss, Hermann; Klotz, Erhard; Peemoller, Horst; Linde, Rolf; and
Mauser, Wilfried, to U.S. Philips Corporation. Device for recon-
structing layer images of a three-dimensional object by means of an
adjustable imaging matrix. 4,394,063, CI. 350-162.130.
Weiss, Melvin P.: See —
Nygard, James C; Weiss, Melvin P.; and Larsen, Thomas E.,
4,393,804, CI. 118-60.000.
July 19, 1983
LIST OF PATENTEES
PI 41
4.393,582, CI.
Weissman, Bernard, to Ipco Corporation. Overhandle for enclosing a
dental tool handle or shank. 4,393,539, CI 16-1 14.00R.
Weissman, Sherman M.; Pereira, Dennis; and Sood, Ashwani, to Yale
University. Method for cloning genes. 4.394.443, CI. 435-6.000.
Weitz, Hans-Martin: See—
Schnabel. Rolf; Weitz, Hans-Martin; and Fischer, Rolf, 4.394.290.
CI. 252-412.000.
Welber, Stanley: See —
Reznik, Benjamin; Welber, Stanley; and Streifeneder. Ludwig,
4,393,872, CI. 604-151.000.
Welsh. Clifford W. Food pouch cooking holder. 4.393.757. CI.
99-369.000.
Werkmann, Karl-Heinz; and Sauerschell, Wolfgang, to VDO Adolf
Schindling AG. Flow meter having a rotary body. 4.393.724. CI.
73-861.910
Werner, Marcel A.; Venema, Arnold; and Pisters. Michael G. H., to
Akzo N.V. Colored polyethylene terephthalate moulding compound
and moulded products made therefrom. 4.394.470. CI. 524-56.000.
Werner. Peter; See-
Drews, Ulrich; Werner, Peter; and Mohrle. Werner, 4,393,841, CI.
123-440.000.
Werner, Richard W.; and Hoffman. Myron A. Heat pipes for use in a
magnetic field. 4.394.344, CI. 376-146.000.
West Electric Co.. Ltd.: See—
Yoshino, Tsunemi; Kashihara, Toshitsugu; Iwata. Hiroshi; and
Morioka. Akitoshi. 4,394,077, CI. 354-25.000.
West, Trent W. Adjustable trampoline type pool and hot tub cover.
4,393,528, CI. 4-498.000.
Western Electric Co.. Inc.: See—
Apgar, Waldo D.; Davis, Charles L.; Emery. Loring D.. Jr.; Es-
seluhn, Werner F.; and Holbrook. Walter R., 4,394,602, CI.
315-71.000.
Arnold, William S., Jr.; and Tulloss, Joseph C
29-828 000
Fuchs. Francis J., Jr„ 4.393,917, CI. 164-476.000.
Westhead, William T., to Scapa Dryers, Inc. Flame retardant dryer
fabrics. 4,394,413, CI. 428-257.000.
Westinghouse Electric Corp.: See—
Brennen, Michael B.; Gyugyi, Laszlo; and Stacey. Eric J..
4.394,614, CI. 323-210000.
Fry, Warren C; Franz, James H.; and Merlino, Paul J., 4,394,724,
CI. 363-124.000.
Klein, Gerald I.. 4,394,633, CI. 333-238.000.
Pebler, Alfred R.. 4.394,240, CI. 204-412.000.
Weyerhaeuser Company: See —
Hertel. James E., 4,394,409, CI. 428-36.000.
Wheelwright, Joseph S. Skate. 4,394,028, CI. 280-11.190.
Whetten, Nathan R.: See —
Houston. John M.; and Whetten. Nathan R., 4,394,578. CI.
250-374.000.
Whillier, Austin: See—
Thimons, Edward D.; Heller. Kenneth S.; McCoy, John F., Ill; and
Whillier, Austin. 4.394.142, CI. 55-242.000.
Whippen, Warren G.: See —
Wirschal, Helmut H.; and Whippen, Warren G., 4,394,098, CI.
405-77.000,
Whirlpool Corporation: See-
Williams, Robert R., 4.394,643. CI. 34O-365.0OC.
Whitaker. Ritchie W.. to Walworth Company, The. Cryogenic butter-
fly valve with bi-directional sealing capability. 4,394,003, CI.
251-173.000.
Whitaker, Todd H.: See—
Randmae. Rein S.; and Whitaker. Todd H.. 4,394,692, CI.
358-229.000.
White, Fred K., to American Hospital Supply Corporation. Method
and device for collecting, transporting, and delivering micro samples
ofblood. 4,393.882. CI. 128-764.000.
White. George M.: See-
Warren, Ben; White. George M.; Parfitt. Rick; and Deng. Peter.
4.394,538. CI. 179-l.OSD.
White. Sidney S.. Jr.: See—
Bresser, Robert E.; White, Sidney S.. Jr.; and Koeniger. Arthur F ,
4,394,325, CI. 260-446.000.
White-Stevens, Rodric H.: See-
Cameron, Erma C; Gunter, Claude R.; and White-Stevens, Rodric
H. 4,394.444. CI. 435-11.000.
Whittle, Danny J.: See—
Heckethorn, John E.; and Whittle,
24-277.000.
Widen, Bo G., to GKN Stenman AB. Cylinder lock. 4,393,673, CI.
70-358.000.
Widergren. Robert D.; Chen. Wen-Hsiung; Fralick, Stanley C; and
Tescher, Andrew G.. to Compression Labs. Inc. Digital video com-
pression system and methods utilizing scene adaptive coding with
rate buffer feedback. 4.394.774, CI. 382-56.000.
Widmayer, Don F., to Controlled Environment Systems Inc. Energy
conserving automatic light output system. 4,394,603, CI. 315-31 1.000.
Wieczorek, Alfred B.: See—
Borras, Jaime A.; Gonzalez, Ruben J.; Smith, Daniel M.; and
Wieczorek, Alfred B., 4,394,776, CI. 455-76.000.
Wiegand, Walter J.; and Bullis, Robert H., to United Technologies
Corporation. Ionization flowmeter 4,393.719. CI. 73-861.050.
Wier Franz, to Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH. Locking device for a
safety belt 4.393.553. CI. 24-23O0AL.
Wier. Franz, to Repa Feinstanzwerk GmbH. Locking device for safety
belts. 4.393.554. CI. 24-230.0AL.
Wierschke. Donald J., to RCA Corporation. Method to center and
separate electroformed replicas from a matrix. 4.394,341. CI.
264-225.000.
Wiese. John M.; and Hoeffken. Russell W,. to Snyder General Corpora-
tion, Top cover, motor, fan and fan shroud assembly for an air condi-
tioning unit. 4.394.in. CI. 417-360.000
See —
J. M.; Wijburg. Matheus A. T; Benschop,
and Vos, Hendrikus J. M., 4,394.067, CI.
Danny J., 4,393,559, CI
Wijburg, Matheus A. T.:
Spruijt, Aloysius M
Gerardus C. M.;
350-334.000.
Wilber, Scott A., to Biox Technology, Inc. Photodetector having an
electrically conductive, selectively transmissive window. 4,394,572,
CI. 250-239,000.
Wilcockson, Brian: See—
Briner, Clifton F.; Bocchini. William R.; and Wilcockson. Brian.
4.393.524. CI. 4-317.000.
Wilhelm Schmidding GmbH & Co.. Firma: See-
Stage. Hermann; Hammer. Hartmut; and Kuhns. Walter. 4.394.221.
CI. 203-89.000.
Wilke. Douglas A., to United States of America, Agriculture. Solar air
duct. 4.393.862. CI. 126-448.000.
Wilkinson. Christopher J : See—
Yeomans. David; Wilkinson, Christopher J.; McCartney. Damien;
and O'Dwyer, Micheal. 4.394.685. CI. 358-264.000.
William L. Bonnell Company. The: See-
Kennedy. James A.. 4.394.166. CI. 75-65.00R.
Williams, James; and Wills. Henry K . to Automation Induslnes. Inc.
Double-molded electrical end fitting assembly. 4.394.057. CI.
339-15.000.
Williams. Robert R.. to Whirlpool Corporation. Capacitive touch panel
control. 4.394.643. CI. 340-365.00C.
Willingham. Wendell D.. to Owens-Illinois. Inc. Child resistant pack-
age. 4.393.977. CI. 215-211.000.
Willis. Alan E.; Lowdenslager. John R.; and Goldstein. Neal, to Timex
Corporation. Remote meter reader and method for reading meters
over non-dedicated telephone lines 4.394.540, CI. 179-2.0AM.
Willis, Frederick G,; Radtke, Richard R.; Ellison, Joseph; and Fozo,
Steven R., to Ford Motor Company. Method for generating energy
output signal. 4,393,696, CI. 73-117.300.
Willis. Robert J.: See-
Copping. Leonard G ; Kerry. John C; Watkins, Thomas I ; Willis,
Robert J ; and Palmer. Brvan H., 4.394.387, CI. 424-300.000.
Willms, Rolf: See—
Haese, Egon; Willms, Rolf; and Schultheiss, Karl D,, 4,394,363, CI.
423-356.000.
Wills, Henry K.: See—
Williams, James; and Wills, Henry K.. 4.394.057. CI. 339-15.000
Wilson. Donald C. to FMC Corporation, Method for removing rot
from potatoes, 4.394,398. CI. 426-481.000.
Wilson. Douglas D.: See-
Allen, Walter E ; and Wilson. Douglas D.. 4.393.998, CI 248-
74.00R
Wilson, James G,. II; and Hammers, P Fred, to Wilson Welding Com-
pany, Inc Method of making a water-cooled electrode holder
4,393,565, CI. 29-157.30R.
Wilson, James H. Coin -con trolled vending apparatus. 4,393,971, CI.
194-93.000.
Wilson, John P.: See—
Bergendahl. Albert S.; Hakey, Mark C; and Wilson, John P.,
4,394,437. CI. 430-312.000,
Wilson, Robert B. Diester composition and textile processing composi-
tions therefrom. 4,394,126, tl. 8-1 15 600
Wilson, Thomas E., to Rockwell International Corporation. Gear shift
mechanism. 4.393,729, CI. 74-475.000.
Wilson Welding Company, Inc.: See-
Wilson, James G.. II; and Hammers. P. Fred, 4,393,565, CI. 29-
157.30R.
Wimnell, Nils E.: See—
Gasparini, Aldo; and Wimnell, Nils E., 4,393,629, CI. 52-74,000
Wimnell. Nils Erik: See—
Gasparini, Aldo; and Wimnell. Nils E., 4.393.629. CI. 52-74,000,
Winchell. Vern H,. II; Scharr. Thomas A ; and Clark. Lowell E,, to
Motorola. Inc. Elevated edge-protected bonding pedestals for semi-
conductor devices. 4.394.678. CI. 357-68.000.
Winfield, Mason C. to Astronics Corporation. Safety liner for tires
4.393.911. CI. 152-158.000.
Winkler & Dunnebier Maschinenfabrik und Eisengiesserei GmbH &
Co KG: See—
Heyden. Gunter. 4,393.738. CI. 83-663 000.
Winter. John P.; and Tomic. Mladomir. to Coca-Cola Company. The.
Rubber compounding bags and film made from syndiotactic 1,2-
poly butadiene. 4,394,473, CI. 524-226.000
Wirschal, Helmut H.; and Whippen, Warren G., to Allis-Chalmers
Corporation. Radial gate having fine tuning of flow control.
4,394,098, CI. 405-77.000.
Wisniewski, Joseph M., to Haworth, Inc. Height-adjusting mechanism
for chair seat. 4,394,001, CI. 248-542.000.
Wittes, James M.: See— ^, ^^^
Lane, Ronald S.; and Wittes. James M.. 4,393.611, CI. 40-107.000.
Wium, Eigil: See —
Gajajiva, Padej; and Wium, Eigil, 4,393,900. CI. 138-89.000
Wnek. Gary E.. to Massachusetts Institute of Technology Electrically
conducting polymer blends 4.394,304, CI 252-520000
Woell, William J. Roller table for use with a power saw. 4,393,969, CI.
193-35.0TE.
PI 42
LIST OF PATENTEES
July 19, 1983
Woerwag, Peter, to Dupro A.G. Speed control circuit for electric
motor. 4,394,606, CI. 318-434.000.
Wolcott, John M.: See—
Lometillo, Josephine E.; and Wolcott, John M., 4,394,397, CI.
426-557.000.
Wolfe. Ralph S.: See—
Blakemore, Richard P.; and Wolfe, Ralph S., 4,394.451, CI.
435-253.000.
Wollar. Burnell J.; and Schwind, Richard J., to Phillips Plastics Corp.
Rotatably engaging head for fastener. 4,393,551, CI. 24-2I3.0OR.
Woo, Dae-Shik: See —
Policastro. Steven G.; and Woo. Dae-Shik, 4.393,572, CI.
29-571.000.
Woodling, George V. Combination roller tooth set having roller teeth
and concave surfaces disposed to engage each other. 4,394,112. CI.
418-61.00B.
Worns, John R.: See —
Farber. Milton; and Worns, John R., 4,394.435. CI. 430-287.000.
Worthington, Paul A.: See —
de Fraine. Paul; Clough. John M.; and Worthington. Paul A..
4.394.151. CI. 71-76.000.
Wren, Paul E., to United States of America, National Aeronautics and
Space Administration. Method of and system for classifying emer-
gency locating transmitters and emergency positions indicating radio
beacons. 4.394,777, CI. 455-95.000.
Wrench, Edwin H., Jr., to United States of America, Navy. Real-time
amplitude histogram shaper. 4,394.744. CI. 364-553.000.
Wright. Theodore: See —
Wallace. Edward L.; and Wright. Theodore. 4,394,689. CI.
358-168.000.
Wuerzer, Bruno: See —
Eicken, Karl; Rohr, Wolfgang; and Wuerzer, Bruno, 4,394,513, CI.
548-374.000.
Wulf, Helmut: See—
Bahrle, Friedrich; and Wulf, Helmut. 4,393,922. CI. 165-41.000.
Wurcel. Jacques: See—
Reinstein. Martine; and Wurcel. Jacques. 4.393,667, CI. 63-29.00R.
Wurlitzer Company, The: See —
Niezgoda, Thomas A.; and Oppenheimer, Carl P., 4.393.740. CI.
84-1.010.
Wynne. John M.; and Vogt, William R.. to Baker Industries, Inc.
Bidirectional, interactive fire detection system. 4.394.655. CI.
340-825.360.
Xerox Corporation: See —
Cheng, David; and Chai. Stephen T.. 4.394.667. CI. 346-137.000.
Hays, Dan A., 4,394,429, CI, 430-102.000.
Hoffman, James M., Jr.; and Lux, Richard A., 4,394,086, CI. 355-
3.00R.
Rees, James D., 4,394.083, CI. 355-1.000.
Yale University: See —
Weissman, Sherman M.; Pereira. Dennis; and Sood, Ashwani,
4,394.443. CI. 435-6.000.
Yamada. Tateo: See —
Kimura. Hirovuki; and Yamada, Tateo, 4,394,080. CI. 354-173.000
Yamada. Yasuharu; and Kawai. Kiyoshi, to Sumitomo Chemical Com-
pany, Limited Catalysts for the polymerization of olefins. 4,394.292.
CI. 252-429.00B.
Yamada. Yasuyuki. to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha. Lens system with fill-in
lens. 4.394.071. CI. 350-422.000.
Yamaguchi, Kathuhiro: See—
Shimizu. Yoshikazu; and Yamaguchi, Kathuhiro, 4.394.416, CI.
428-341.000.
Yamaguchi. Sizuka: See —
Asahi, Naotatsu; Yamaguchi. Sizuka; and Terakado. Katsuyoshi.
4.394.234. CI. 204-164.000.
Yamamoto. Hideaki: See —
Tsukada, Toshihisa; Takasaki. Yukio; Hirai. Tadaaki; Baji. Toru;
Yamamoto. Hideaki; Tanaka. Yasuo; Maruyama. Eiichi; and
Ishioka. Sachio, 4.394.749. CI. 365-106.000.
Yamamoto, Hideomi; Watanabe. Haruzo; Kishie. Hidehiko; and Ni-
shihara. Toshio. to Matsushita Electric Works. Ltd. Composite
member comprising metallic sheet bent to be arcuate in section and
rigid synthetic resin coating. 4.394,412, CI. 428-174.000.
Yamamoto, Toshiharu; Sato, Manabu; Akiba, Katsuya; and Abe,
Koreyoshi, to Victor Company of Japan, Limited. Detachable handle
having a pivotal part. 4,393,540, CI. 16-I14.00R.
Yamazaki, Hisashi: See —
Takahashi, Kenji; Yamazaki, Hisashi; Miyahara, Junji; Kotera.
Noboru; Eguchi. Shusaku; and Miura. Norio. 4.394.581. CI.
250-484.100.
Yang, James; and Chen, James M. F. Safety clasp for the string of
footwear. 4,393,550, CI. 24-117.000.
Yasuda, Atsuyuki: See —
Fujimura, Shuzo; and Yasuda, Atsuyuki. 4,393,807. CI. 1 18-501.000.
Yasuda, Tadahiro: See —
Nishikawa, Masaji; Amemiya. Norio; Yasuda. Tadahiro; and Naka-
yama, Shigeru. 4.394.427. CI. 430-68.000.
Yasuta. Naoshi; Matsumura. Yoshio; and Kotani. Teizo, to Japan Syn-
thetic Rubber Co.. Ltd. Process for treating acetylene polymer or
doped acetylene polymer. 4,394,402. CI. 427-40.000.
Ye Data Inc.: See —
Tatsumi. Juichi. 4.393.771. CI. 101-93.480.
Yeargin. G. Scott: See —
Malpass, Dennis B.; and Yeargin, G. Scott. 4.394.326, CI. 260-
448.0AD.
Yeomans. David; Wilkinson. Christopher J.; McCartney. Damien; and
O'Dwyer. Micheal. to Centronics Data Computer Corporation.
Interface for operating a dot matrix printer for printing a video
image. 4.394,685. CI. 358-264.000.
Yoshida. Hiroshi: See —
Izumi. Masao; Yoshida, Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa, Yukio, 4.393,897.
CI. 137-831.000.
Izumi. Masao; Yoshida. Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa. Yukio. 4,393.898,
CI. 137-831.000.
Yoshida. Kazunori. to Nippon Electric Co.. Ltd. Self-supporting capac-
itor casing having a pair of terminal plates sandwiching an insulative
body for aligning terminal positions. 4.394.713. CI. 361-433.000.
Yoshida. Kunio; Kotera. Hiroaki; Tsuda. Yukifumi; Kanno. Yoshimitsu;
and Naka. Motohiko. to Matsushita Research Institute Tokyo, Inc.
Dot printer for reproduction of halftone images. 4.394,662, CI. 346-
33.00R.
Yoshida. Masaru: See —
Takeda. Mikio; Kakihara. Yoshinobu; Yoshida. Masaru; and
Nakata. Yukihiko. 4.394.601. CI. 313-509.000.
Yoshida. Motoaki: See —
Fujioka. Akira; Sakiyama. Kazuo; Takigawa, Akio; and Yoshida.
Motoaki. 4.394.177. CI. 106-287.140.
Yoshikawa. Yukio: See —
Izumi. Masao; Yoshida. Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa. Yukio, 4,393.397.
CI. 137-831.000.
Izumi, Masao; Yoshida. Hiroshi; and Yoshikawa. Yukio. 4.393,898,
CI. 137-831.000.
Yoshimaru, Tomohisa. to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha.
Apparatus for positioning magnetic head to position corresponding to
reference track on magnetic tape. 4,394,696, CI. 360-78.000.
Yoshimura, Noboru: See—
Sakurai, Kenji; and Yoshimura. Noboru. 4.394.048. CI. 297-367.000.
Yoshino. Tsunemi; Kashihara. Toshitsugu; Iwata. Hiroshi; and Mori-
oka. Akitoshi. to West Electric Co., Ltd. Device for detecting sharp
focusing. 4,394.077. CI. 354-25.000.
Yoshioka. Akiteru: See —
Takaya. Takao; Takasugi. Hisashi; Murata, Masayoshi; and Yoshi-
oka. Akiteru, 4,394,384, CI. 424-246.000.
Yu, SePuan: See —
Cady, William R.; Yu, SePuan; and Eshbach, John R., 4,393,578.
CI. 29-576.00B.
Yuda. Takuo; and Mizusawa. Akira, to Nifco. Inc. Plastic buckle.
4.393.556. CI. 24-230.00R.
Yuda. Takuo, to Nifco, Inc. Radiator grille fixing structure. 4,393,561,
CI. 24-297.000.
Zacharin, Alexey T., to United States of America, Army. Omni direc-
tional fuze. 4,393,780, CI. 102-255.000.
Zagranski. Raymond D.: See —
Peck. Robert E.; and Zagranski. Raymond D., 4,393.651. CI.
60-39.281.
Zaidan Hojin Biseibutsu Kagaku Kenkyu Kai: See —
Umezawa. Hamao; Shimada, Nobuyoshi; Naganawa. Hiroshi;
Takita. Tomohisa; Hamada. Masa; and Takeuchi. Tomio,
4.394.446. CI. 435-88.000.
Zaromb. Solomon: See —
Di Leo. Angela M.; and Lucia. James. 4,394,644, CI. 340-571.000.
Zbinden, Terry B., to Sperry Corporation. Circuit controlling coolant
flow to a non-linear heat exchanger through a non-linear electrome-
chanical valve. 4,393,921. CI. 165-40.000.
Zemelman, Valery B.: See —
Kleiner, Fredric; and Zemelman, Valery B., 4.393,660, CI.
62-69.000.
Zenith Radio Corporation: See —
Rowe, William A'., 4,394,681, CI. 358-60.000.
Zerbel. Allen J., to Wehr Corporation. Tank structure for an air humidi-.
fying electrode steam generator. 4,394.561. CI. 219-285.000.
Zils JflfTics A ' Sec
Hess. George M.; and Zils. James A.. 4.393,787. CI. 105-199.0CB.
Zimmermann. Guido: See —
Kille. Ewald; and Zimmermann. Guido. 4.393,993, CI. 239-332.000.
Zipperian, Donald E., to Diester Concentrator Co.. Inc., The. Froth
flotation apparatus with water recovery and method. 4,394,258, CI.
209-170.000.
Zouzoulas, John, to Andco Actuator Products, Inc. Rotary actuator.
4.393,965, CI. 192-48.910.
Zscheile, John W, Jr.: See —
Currie, Robert J.; Rattlingourd. Glen D.; Spencer, Billie M.; and
Zscheile. John W., Jr.. 4.394.642. CI. 34O-347.0DD.
Zurn Industries. Inc.: See —
Bukowski. Ronald G.; and Johnson. Timothy L., 4,394,262, CI.
210-103.000.
Zwald, Henry J., to Motorola Inc. Anti-torque connection apparatus
and method for using. 4,393,583. CI. 29-857.000.
Zweig, Arnold: See —
Fischer, Robert G., Jr.; and Zweig, Arnold, 4,394,527. CI.
570-143.000.
LIST OF REISSUE PATENTEES
TO WHOM
PATENTS WERE ISSUED ON THE 19th DAY OF JULY, 1983
Note —Arranged in accordance with the first significant character or word of the name
(in accordance with city and telephone directory practice).
Bell Telephone Laboratories, Incorporated: See—
Eraser, Alexander G., Re. 31,319, CI. 370-80.000.
Blacksher, Roy: See—
Kaufman. Phillip A.; Gorman, Kenneth C; Henry, George C; and
Blacksher. Roy, Re. 31,318, CI. 364-200.000.
Blaha, James G., to Towmotor Corporation. Brake drum seal with dual
elastomeric legs. Re. 31.314. CI. 277-84.000.
Cannon. Raymond E.: See —
Jenkins, Jon A.; and Cannon. Raymond E.. Re. 31.315. CI.
417-63.000.
Computer Automation, Inc.: See-
Kaufman. Phillip A.; Gorman. Kenneth C; Henry. George C; and
Blacksher. Roy. Re. 31.318. CI. 364-200.000.
Eddens, Gerald R., to W. J, Industries. Inc. Tension monitor means.
Re. 31.312, CI. 73-862.480.
Eraser. Alexander G.. to Bell Telephone Laboratories. Incorporated.
Digital data communication system. Re. 31.319. CI. 370-80.000.
Fredd, John V.; and Sizer, Phillip S.. to Otis Engineering Corporation.
Method and system for well testing. Re. 31,313, CI. 166-250.000.
Gorman, Kenneth C: See-
Kaufman. Phillip A.; Gorman. Kenneth C; Henry, George C; and
Blacksher. Roy. Re. 31.318. CI. 364-200.000.
Henry. George C; See-
Kaufman, Phillip A.; Gorman. Kenneth C; Henry. George C; and
Blacksher. Roy. Re. 31.318. CI. 364-200.000.
Imaizumi. Nobuo; and Wakana. Kazuo. to Namiki Precision Jewel Co..
Ltd. Rare earth-cobalt system permanent magnetic alloys and method
of preparing same. Re. 31.317, CI. 148-103.000.
Imed Corporation: See —
Jenkins, Jon A.; and Cannon, Raymond E., Re. 31,315. CI.
417-63.000.
Jenkins. Jon A.; and Cannon. Raymond E.. to Imed Corporation.
Apparatus for converting a pump to a controller. Re. 31.315. CI.
417-63.000.
Kaufman. Phillip A.; Gorman. Kenneth C; Henry. George C; and
Blacksher, Roy, to Computer Automation. Inc. Automatic modular
memory address allocation system. Re. 31.318. CI. 364-200.000
Moore. Robert W. Elongated igniting device. Re. 31.316. CI.
431-254.000.
Namiki Precision Jewel Co., Ltd.: See—
Imaizumi. Nobuo; and Wakana. Kazuo. Re. 31,317. CI.
148-103.000.
Otis Engineering Corporation: See—
Fredd. John V.; and Sizer. Phillip S.. Re. 31.313. CI. 166-250.000
Sizer. Phillip S.: See—
Fredd. John V.; and Sizer, Phillip S., Re. 31,313, CI. 166-250.000
Towmotor Corporation; See—
Blaha. James G.. Re. 31.314. CI. 277-84.000.
W. J. Industries, Inc.: See—
Eddens, Gerald R.. Re 31.312, CI. 73-862.480.
Wakana, Kazuo: See—
Imaizumi. Nobuo; and Wakana. Kazuo. Re. 31,317. CI.
148-103.000.
LIST OF REEXAMINATION PATENTEES
TO WHOM
CERTIFICATES WERE ISSUED
Nester; Francis M.. to K. S. Industries. Inc. Hopper gate latching
mechanism. Bl 3.707.126. CI. 105-282 P.
K. S. Industries, Inc.: See—
Nester. Francis M. Bl 3,707.126, CI. 105—282 P.
McCall. Francis J. Apparatus for acupressure treatment. Bl
4.073.296, CI. 128—303 R.
Mcndelcorn. Lyon; Miller. Robert L; Mercier; George E.; Pick-
ett, John H.; and Dakin, Thomas W.. to Westinghousc Electric
Corporation. Capacitor. Bl 4.054.937. CI. 361—315.
Westinghouse Electric Corporation; See—
Mandelcorn. Lyon; Miller. Robert L., Mercier. George £.;
Pickett. John H.; and Dakm. Thomas W. Bl 4,054.937. CI.
361-315.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
AB SKFi pee—
Osthng, Sture. 269.786. CI. D15-143.0OO.
Alessio. Frank. Teaching clock. 269.790. 7-19-83. CI. D19-64.000.
Alexander. Roy P.; Sangster. Arlon G.; and Green, Joseph C. to Olin
Corporation. Swimming pool chemical dispenser or the like. 269.802.
7-19-83. CI. D23-03.000.
Aliseo Diffusion S.A.: See —
Froidevaux, Jean-Mane. 269.819. CI. D28-12.000.
Ament. Donald S.. to Miracle Recreation Equipment Company. Light
fixture. 269.818. 7-19-83. CI. D26-73.000. "^
AMF Incorporated: See—
Hahn. Daniel G.. 269.772, CI. D12-1 10.000.
Amos, Homer C, to Brunswick Corporation. Ball catching and throw-
ing device. 269.794, 7-19-83. CI. D21-210.000.
Amos. Homer C. to Brunswick Corporation. Ball catching and throw-
ing device. 269,795, 7-19-83. CI. D21-210.000.
Anderson. David. Fireplace grate. 269.803, 7-19-83, CI. D23-95.000.
Aqua-Mist. Inc.: See—
Morrow. William E.; and Morrow, Robert B.. 269.807. CI. D23-
139.000.
Ayres. Margaret E. Cane 269.733. 7-19-83. CI. D3-7 000.
Barthel. John E., to Dahl-Braden, Chapman Architects. Inc. Automatic
teller machine kiosk. 269,822. 7-19-83. CI D99-28.000.
Barthel. John E.. to First International Services Corporation Auto-
matic teller machine booth for mounting on a wall 269,823. 7-19-83.
CI D99-28.000
Baser, Benjamin T. Hoop roller. 269.792. 7-19-83. CI. D21-101.000.
Bendix Corporation. The: See—
Williams. Robert L.. 269.777. CI. D 13- 1. 000.
Berkline Corporation. The: See —
Brooks. Richard. 269.746. CI. D6-63.000.
Long. Stapleton. 269.745. CI. D6-63.000.
Berlic. France. Chair. 269,748. 7-19-83. CI D6-76.000.
Bevilacqua. John E.. Jr.; and Ross. James E.. to United Artists Corpora-
tion. Telephone. 269.779. 7-19-83. CI. D14-53.00O.
Bisson, Nicole, to Salon Nicole Bisson Inc Hairdresser comb 269.820.
7-19-83. CI. D28-25.000.
Bolyn. Anthony E.. to Congoleum Corporation. Display stand for floor
tiles, carpets or similar article. 269.750. 7-19-83. CI. D6-85 000
PI 43
PI 44
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
Bolyn, Anthony E., to Congoleum Corporation. Display cabinet for
floor tiles, carpets or similar article. 269,752, 7-19-83, CI. D6-168.000.
Boonstra, Robert M.: See —
Mace. Leslie E.; Jones. Paul W.; and Boonstra. Robert M., 269,810.
CI. D24-I7.O0O.
BP Oil Limited: See-
Grant, Andrew, 269,762. CI. D9-375.000.
Braswell. Charles A., to Jaro, Inc. Bar-b-que shell. 269.758. 7-19-83, CI.
D7-337.O0O.
Brooks, Richard, to Berkline Corporation, The. Settee. 269,746,
7-19-83, CI. D6-63.000.
Brunner, Merlin A.; Draheim, Harvey J.; and Schafier, Michael J., to
Simmons Universal Corporation. Crib. 269,742, 7-19-83, CI. D6-
16.000.
Brunner. Merlin A.; Draheim, Harvey J.; and Schaffer, Michael J., to
Simmons Universal Corporation. Crib footboard. 269,757, 7-19-83,
CI. D6- 198.000.
Brunswick Corporation: See —
Amos, Homer C, 269,794, CI. D2 1-2 10.000.
Amos, Homer C, 269,795, CI. D2 1-2 10.000.
Fee, Robert W.; Robbins, Richard J.; and Neufeld, Henry L.,
269.798, CI. D22-25.0O0.
Bunetta, Brian T. Compartmented travel case. 269,735. 7-19-83. CI.
D3-39.0OO.
Camp International, Inc.: 5^^ —
Meier, Robert H.; and Farr, Evelyn, 269.816, CI. D24-64.000.
Canning, Daniel: and Jordan, James B., to Qume Corporation. Printer.
269.782, 7-19-83, CI. D14-1 11.000.
Chadd. Charles W. Combined portable vent and support for a clothes
dryer. 269.809, 7-19-83. CI. D23- 15 1.000.
Chatham. Richard W. Compartmented tray for drafting supplies.
269.791, 7-19-83. CI. D19-77.0OO.
Clover Mfg. Co.. Ltd.: See —
Okada, Hidekazu. 269.734. CI. D3-28.000.
Congoleum Corporation: See —
Bolyn. Anthony E.. 269.750. CI. D6-85.0OO.
Bolyn. Anthony E.. 269,752, CI. D6-I68.000.
Consolidated Foods Corporation: See—
DiTullio, Flavia, 269,730. CI. D2-24.000.
Cosden Technology. Inc.: See —
Fortuna. Vincent E.. 269,763, CI. D9-398.000.
Fortuna, Vincent E., 269,764, CI. D9-398.000.
Fortuna. Vincent E.. 269,765. CI. D9-398.00O.
Cowley. Harold E.: See —
Fishel, Gerald C; Cowley, Harold E.; and Myers, Dean W.,
269,814, CI. D24-38.000.
Cramer, Jerry W.. to Sunkist Growers, Inc. Bag filling device. 269.787.
7-19-83. CI. DI5-145.000.
Cycles Peugeot: See —
Geney. Gilbert, 269,760, CI. D8-382.000.
Dahl-Braden, Chapman Architects, Inc.: See —
Barthel, John E., 269,822, CI. D99-28.000.
Danish Stove Association, ApS: See —
Sorensen, Winston J. F., 269,804, CI. D23-97.000.
DiTullio, Flavia, to Consolidated Foods Corporation. Brassiere.
269.730. 7-19-83, CI. D2-24.000.
Doodson, Peter J., to U.S. Philips Corporation. Intercom speaker and
receiver. 269,780, 7-19-83, CI. D14-57.000.
Draheim, Harvey J.: See —
Brunner, Merlin A.; Draheim. Harvey J.; and Schaffer. Michael J..
269.742. CI. D6- 16.000.
Brunner. Merlin A.; Draheim. Harvey J.; and Schaffer. Michael J..
269,757. CI. D6-198.000.
Dri Steem Humidifier Company: See —
Morton. Bernard W., 269.808. CI. D23- 146.000.
Dudrey, Carl: See —
Stringfellow. Michael J., 269.796. CI. D22-20.000.
Eaton Corporation: See —
Heater. Richard W.. 269,783. CI. D15-5.000.
Famolare. Inc.: See —
Famolare. Joseph P.. Jr.. 269,732, CI. D2-319.000.
Famolare, Joseph P., Jr., to Famolare, Inc. Shoe bottom. 269,732,
7-19-83, CI. D2-3I9.00O.
Farr, Evelyn: See —
Meier, Robert H.; and Farr. Evelyn. 269,816, CI. D24-64.000.
Fee, Robert W.; Robbins, Richard J.; and Neufeld, Henry L., to Bruns-
wick Corporation. Fishing reel. 269,798, 7-19-83, CI. D22-25.00O.
Fehlbaum & Co.: See —
Muller-Deisig, Wolfgang, 269,743. CI. D6-3I.0OO.
First International Services Corporation: See —
Barthel. John E., 269.823. CI. D99-28.000.
Fishel. Gerald C; Cowley. Harold E.; and Myers, Dean W., to Gerico
Fiberglass Products. Inc. Spa. 269,814, 7-19-83, CI. D24-38.000.
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber. Gerhart F.; and
Schneider. Rolf E.. to Siemens Corporation. Telephone busy lamp
field console with display. 269.781. 7-19-83. CI. D14-58.000.
Fortuna, Vincent E., to Cosden Technology, Inc. Packaging container.
269.763. 7-19-83. CI. D9-398.000.
Fortuna, Vincent E., to Cosden Technology, Inc. Packaging container.
269.764. 7-19-83, CI. D9-398.O0O.
Fortuna, Vincent E., to Cosden Technology, Inc. Packaging container.
269.765. 7-19-83, CI. D9-398.O0O.
Foster. Daniel F. CRT Terminal stand. 269.749, 7-19-83, CI. D6-85.00O.
Frazier. James F.. to Whelen Engineering Company. Inc. Aircraft tail
position light. 269,817, 7-19-83, CI. D26-35.0OO.
Froidevaux, Jean-Marie, to Aliseo Diffusion S.A. Wall mounted hair
drying device. 269,819. 7-19-83, CI. D28-12.000.
Gaunt, Thomas N., to Plastona (John Waddington) Limited. Can or the
like. 269,761, 7-19-83, CI. D9-370.000.
General Mills Products Corp.; See —
Meyer, Muriel, 269,769, CI. Dl 1-82.000.
Strasser, Andrew G.; Tierney. Donna M.; and TTiorsen. Daniel B.,
269.766. CI. D9-457.000.
Geney. Gilbert, to Cycles Peugeot. Securing device for a generator
fixed by a slideway on seat -stays of a bicycle. 269,760, 7-19-83, CI.
D8-382.000.
Gerico Fiberglass Products, Inc.: See —
Fishel, Gerald C; Cowley, Harold E.; and Myers, Dean W.,
269.814, CI. D24-38.0OO.
Giveans, David L., to SB/JP Enterprises, Inc. Playhouse. 269,793,
7-19-83, CI. D21-1 14.000.
Grant, Andrew, to BP Oil Limited. Bottle. 269,762, 7-19-83, CI. D9-
375.000.
Green, Joseph C: See —
Alexander, Roy P.; Sangster, Arlon G.; and Green, Joseph C,
269,802, CI. D23-O3.000.
Hahn, Daniel G., to AMF Incorporated. Combined front and rear
fenders, chain guard, engine cover and fuel tank for moped. 269.772.
7-19-83. CI. D12-1 10.000.
Heater, Richard W., to Eaton Corporation. Housing of a viscous fan
drive. 269,783, 7-19-83, CI. D 15-5.000.
Hoese, Fred O. Motorcycle radio cover. 269,775, 7-19-83, CI. D12-
192.000.
Houlihan, John T.; and Maliskas, John S., to Timex Corporation. Digi-
tal watch. 269,767, 7-19-83, CI. DIO-38.000.
Hurley. Merle. Combined cat playground and exerciser. 269.821.
7-19-83. CI. D30-42.000.
Jaro. Inc.: See —
Braswell, Charles A., 269,758, CI. D7-337.000.
Jones. Paul W.: See —
Mace. Leslie E.; Jones. Paul W.; and Boonstra, Robert M., 269,810.
CI. D24- 17.000.
Jordan, James B.: See —
Canning, Daniel; and Jordan. James B., 269,782, CI. D14-1 11.000.
Kates, Fred W. to Revlon, Inc. Display unit. 269,754, 7-19-83.' CI.
D6- 1 86.000.
Kaufman, Jack W. Swabbing stick. 269,811, 7-19-83, CI. D24- 34.000.
Klaiber, Gerhart F.: See—
Foggia. Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269.781. CI. D14-58.O0O.
Lancellotti. William E. Chiropractic activator. 269,812, 7-19-83. CI.
D24-36.000.
LeBlue. Wallace J. Guitar. 269,788, 7-19-83, CI. DI7-I4.000.
Lents, Charles M.. to Stainless IceTainer Company. Sanitary counter-
top machine for storing and dispensing particulate ice. 269.785,
7-19-83, CI. Dl 5-80.000.
Long, Stapleton. to Berkline Corporation. The. Settee. 269.745. 7-19-83,
CI. D6-63.000.
Lyon-Shaw, Inc.: See —
Wallace, Frederick J., 269,744, CI. D6-56.O0O.
Wallace, Frederick J.. 269,747. CI. D6- 70.000.
M/M Verdi International, Inc.: See —
Stark, Ted. 269.736, CI. D3-7 1.000.
Stark, Ted, 269,737, CI. D3-7 1.000.
Stark. Ted. 269.738. CI. D3-77.000.
Stark. Ted. 269.739. CI. D3-7 1.000.
Stark. Ted. 269.740. CI. D3-7 1.000.
Stark. Ted. 269,741. CI. D3-71.000.
Mace. Leslie E.; Jones. Paul W.; and Boonstra. Robert M.. to Physio-
Control Corporation. Physiological signals monitor/recorder or the
like. 269.810, 7-19-83. CI. D24- 17.000.
Maliskas, John S.: See —
Houlihan, John T.; and Maliskas, John S., 269.767. CI. DIO-38.000.
Mattiuzzo. Mario, to Nordica S.P.A. After ski boot. 269,731, 7-19-83,
CI. D2-275.00O.
McGregor, Donald G. Polarized terminal blade. 269.778. 7-19-83, CI.
Dl 3-24.000.
Meier, Robert H.; and Farr, Evelyn, to Camp International, Inc. Shin
splint. 269,816, 7-19-83, CI. D24-64.000.
Meyer, Muriel, to General Mills Products Corp. Segmented turtle-
shaped pendant or similar article. 269,769, 7-19-83, CI. Dl 1-82.000.
Miracle Recreation Equipment Company: See —
Ament, Donald S., 269.818, CI. D26-73.0OO.
Monson, Todd D. Housing for simulating heartbeat and womb sounds.
269,789, 7-19-83. CI. D19-59.000.
Morgan, Donald F. Wheel center. 269,776, 7-19-83, CI. D 12-204.000.
Morrow, Robert B.: See —
Morrow, William E.; and Morrow, Robert B., 269,807, CI. D23-
139.000.
Morrow, William E.; and Morrow, Robert B., to Aqua-Mist. Inc. Air
pre-cooler unit for air conditioners or the like. 269.807. 7-19-83. CI.
D23- 139.000.
Morton. Bernard W.. to Dri Steem Humidifier Company. Humidifier
dispersion tube. 269.808. 7-19-83, CI. D23-146.000.
Muller-Deisig. Wolfgang, to Fehlbaum & Co. Chair. 269,743. 7-19-83,
CI. D6-3 1.000.
Muzumdar, Deepak R.: See —
Foggia, Donald A.; Muzumdar, Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.;
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,781, CI. D14-58.000.
LIST OF DESIGN PATENTEES
PI 45
Myers, Dean W.: See—
Fishel, Gerald C; Cowley. Harold E.; and Myers, Dean W,
269,814, CI. D24-38.000.
Neufeld, Henry L.: See-
Fee, Robert W.; Robbins, Richard J.; and Neufeld. Henry L
269.798, CI. D22-25.000.
Niconchuk. Alec W., to North Shore Laboratories Corp. Compression
tool for inside tire repair or similar article. 269.773. 7-19-83, CI
D12-153.O0O.
Nordica SPA.: See—
Mattiuzzo, Mario, 269,731, CI. D2-275.00O.
Nordson Corporation: See—
Sandham, Edwin C, 269.756. CI. D6-I94.000.
North Shore Laboratories Corp.: See—
Niconchuk. Alec W., 269.773. CI. D 12- 153.000.
Offredi. Giovanni. Collapsible table. 269.753. 7-19-83. CI. D6- 1 78.000.
Okada. Hidekazu. to Clover Mfg. Co.. Ltd. Knitting needle. 269.734.
7-19-83. CI. D3-28.O0O.
Olin Corporation: See —
Alexander. Roy P.; Sangster. Arlon G.; and Green. Joseph C.
269,802, CI. D23-03.000.
Sangster, AHon G.; and Tepas. Joseph J.. Jr.. 269,801. CI. D23-
03.000.
Ostling. Sture, to AB SKF. Bearing housing. 269,786, 7-19-83. CI
DI5-143.000.
Phillips Plastics Corp.: See—
Wollar. Burnell J.. 269,759, CI. D8-388.000.
Physio-Control Corporation: See-
Mace, Leslie E.; Jones, Paul W.; and Boonstra. Robert M,. 269,810.
CI. D24- 17.000.
Pittenger, James E.; and Worth, William S. Jewelry chain clasp.
269.770. 7-19-83, CI. Dl 1-87.000.
Plastona (John Waddington) Limited: See-
Gaunt. Thomas N., 269.761. CI. D9-37O000
Qually. Robert L. Pacifier. 269.815, 7-19-83. CI. D24-45.000.
Qume Corporation: See —
Canning, Daniel; and Jordan, James B., 269,782, CI. D14-1 1 1.000.
Revlon, Inc.: See —
Kates, Fred W.. 269,754, CI. D6-I86.000.
Rieman, Paul F Caddy for assembled rods and reels. 269,751. 7-19-83.
CI. D6-125 000.
Riis, Douglas D. Ice fishing rod. 269,797, 7-19-83, CI. D22-23.O0O.
Robbins, Richard J.: See-
Fee. Robert W.; Robbins. Richard J.; and Neufeld. Henry L..
269,798, CI. D22-25.O0O.
Roper Corporation: See-
Stark. Philip D.. 269.784. CI. D15-12.000.
Ross. James E.: See —
Bevilacqua. John E.. Jr.; and Ross. James E.. 269.779. CI. D14-
53.000.
Salon Nicole Bisson Inc.: See—
Bisson. Nicole. 269,820. CI. D28-25.000.
Sandham. Edwin C. to Nordson Corporation. Support bracket for a
table leg. 269,756, 7-19-83. CI. D6- 194,000.
Sangster, Arlon G.; and Tepas. Joseph J.. Jr., to Olin Corporation.
Swimming pool chemical dispenser or the like. 269.801. 7-19-83. CI.
D23-03.000
Sangster. Arlon G.: See —
Alexander. Roy P.; Sangster. Arlon G.; and Green. Joseph C.
269,802, CI. D23-03.000.
SB/JP Enterprises, Inc.: See—
Giveans, David L., 269,793, CI. D21-1 14.000.
Schaffer, Michael J.; See—
Brunner, Merlin A.; Draheim, Harvey J.; and Schaffer. Michael J..
269.742. CI. D6- 16.000.
Brunner. Merlin A.; Draheim, Harvey J.; and Schaffer, Michael J .
269,757. CI. D6- 198.000.
Schawarzli. Joseph W. Support bracket for automotive roof rack.
269.774, 7-19-83, CI. D12-157.000.
Schneider, Rolf E.: See —
Foggia. Donald A.; Muzumdar. Deepak R.; Klaiber, Gerhart F.
and Schneider. Rolf E.. 269,781. CI. D14-58.000.
Siemens Corporation: See—
Foggia. Donald A.; Muzumdar. Deepak R ; Klaiber. Gerhart F.
and Schneider, Rolf E., 269,781. CI. D14-58.000
Simmons Universal Corporation: See—
Brunner. Merlin A.; Draheim, Harvey J.; and Schaffer. Michael J
269,742. CI. D6-16.000.
Brunner. Merlin A.; Draheim. Harvey J.; and Schaffer. Michael J .
269.757. CI. D6-198.000.
Sorensen. Winston J. F.. to Danish Stove Association. ApS. Stove
269,804, 7-19-83. CI. D23-97.000.
Stainless IceTainer Company: See-
Lents. Charles M., 269.785. CI Dl 5-80.000.
Stair. Eugene V. Fuel loader for loading fuel such as woixl logs into
wood burning stoves 269.805, 7-19-83. CI D23-125.000
Stark. Philip D.. to Roper Corporation. Agricultural tiller 269,784
7-19-83. CI. D15-12.000.
Stark. Ted. to M/M Verdi International. Inc. Luegage 269.736.
7-19-83, CI. D3-7 1.000
Stark. Ted. to M/M Verdi International. Inc LugBaee 269.737,
7-19-83, CI. D3-7 1.000
Stark. Ted. to M/M Verdi International, Inc. LuBgaee 269,738
7-19-83, CI. D3-77.000.
Stark, Ted, to M/M Verdi International, Inc. Luggage. 269.739
7-19-83. CI. D3-7 1.000.
Stark. Ted. to M/M Verdi International. Inc. LuBRage 269,740
7-19-83, CI. D3-71.000.
Stark, Ted, to M/M Verdi International. Inc. LuEgaBe 269.741
7-19-83. CI. D3-71.000.
Strasser, Andrew G.; Tierney. Donna M.; and Thorsen. Daniel B.. to
General Mills Products Corp. Display card for jewelry articles or the
like. 269.766. 7-19-83, CI. D9-457.000.
Stringfellow. Michael J., to Dudrey. Carl. Insect catching device or the
like 269.796. 7-19-83. CI. D22-20.000.
Sunkisl Growers. Inc : See-
Cramer, Jerry W . 269.787. CI D 15- 145.000
Syme. Duncan C. to Vermont Castings. Inc Warming shelf for a parior
stove 269.806. 7-19-83. CI. D23-127.000.
Tepas. Joseph J.. Jr.: See--
Sangster. Arlon G.; end Tepas. Joseph J . Jr.. 269.801. CI. D23-
03.000.
Terenzoni. Amerigo. Front and side panels of a desk. 269.755. 7-19-8^,
CI. D6- 192.000.
Terry. Peter A Symbolic pin. 269.768. 7-19-83. CI. Dl 1-47.000
Thorsen. Daniel B : See—
Strasser. Andrew G.; Tierney. Donna M.; and Thorsen. Daniel B.,
269.766, CI. D9-457.000.
Tierney. Donna M: See—
Strasser. Andrew G ; Tierney. Donna M.; and Thorsen. Daniel B .
269.766. CI. D9-457.O0O
Timex Corporation: See —
Houlihan. John T.; and Maliskas. John S , 269.767. CI DIO-38.000.
Topete, Lino Z. Combined hydrotherapy spa and swimming pool.
269.813. 7-19-83. CI. D24-38.000.
United Artists Corporation: See —
Bevilacqua. John E.. Jr.; and Ross. James E.. 269.779. CI. D14-
53.000.
US Philips Corporation: See—
Doodson. Peter J.. 269.780, CI D14-57 000.
Vermont Castings, Inc.: See—
Syme. Duncan C. 269.806. CI D23- 127.000.
Wallace. Frederick J., to Lyon-Shaw. Inc. Chair 269.744. 7-19-83, CI.
D6-56000.
Wallace, Frederick J, to Lyon-Shaw Incorporated. Seal 269.747.
7-19-83. CI. D6-7O.O0O.
Waller, Johnny J Fishing lure. 269.799. 7-19-83. CI D22-27 000,
Waller. Johnny J. Fishing lure. 269,800. 7-19-83. CI. D22-27.000.
Whelen Engineering Company. Inc : See—
Frazier. James F.. 269.817. CI D26-35.000.
Williams. Cole. Simulated Christmas tree. 269.771. 7-19-83. CI Dll-
118.000.
Williams. Robert L.. to Bendix Corporation. The Diaphragm plate for
a servomotor 269.777. 7-19-83. CI. D13-1.000
Wollar. Burnell J., to Phillips Plastics Corp. Drive fastener shank
269,759. 7-19-83. CI. D8-388.000.
Worth. William S.: See—
Pittenger. James E.; and Worth. William S.. 269.770. CI Dll-
87.000.
Zonnenberg. Martin B. P. Molded meal product or similar article.
269.729. 7-19-83. CI. Dl-26.000
LIST OF PLANT PATENTEES
Bennett. Ceci ia L. D. Miniature rose plant. 5.069. 7-19-83. CI. 9.000.
Bennett. Cecilia L. D. Miniature rose plant 5.070. 7-19-83. CI 9.000.
Blaser. John A ; and Boyette, Robert J. Callistemon 'Boyette'. 5.072.
7-19-83. CI. 54.000.
Boyette. Robert J : See—
Blaser. John A ; and Boyette. Robert J.. 5.072. CI. 54.000.
DriscoII Strawberry Associates. Inc.: See —
Johnson. Harold A.. Jr., 5,071. CI. 48.000.
Johnson, Harold A., Jr , to DriscoII Strawberry Associates, Inc. Straw-
berry plant. 5,071, 7-19-83, CI. 48.000.
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
ISSUED JULY 19, 1983
Note. — First number, class; second number, subclass; third number, patent number
12
16
56
336
192
317
420.2
490
493
498
CLASS!
4,393,519
4,393.520
4,393.521
4,393,522
CLASS 4
4,393,523
4,393.524
4,393.525
4,393.526
4.393,527
4,393.528
CLASS $
81 R 4.393,529
437 4,393,530
451 4.393,531
CLASS S
103 4,394.125
115.6 4,394,126
137 4.394,127
138 4.394,128
149.1. 4.393,532
543 4.394,129
661 4.394,130
CLASS 14
2.6 4.393,533
CLASS 15
98 4,393,534
169 4.393,535
320 4.393,538
327 C 4,393,536
348 4,393,537
CLASS 16
114R 4,393,539
4.393,540
297 4.393,541
369 4.393,542
CLASS 17
72 4,393,543
73
76
4,393,544
4,393,545
4^393,546
CLASS 19
105 4.393,547
CLASS 24
16 PB 4,393,548
115 A 4,393,549
117 4,393,550
213 C 4,393,552
213 R 4,393,551
230 A 4.393,555
4,393,557
230 AL 4,393,553
4,393,554
230 R 4,393.556
4,393,558
277 4,393,559
295 4,393,560
297 4,393,561
CLASS 26
2 R 4,393,562
CLASS 29
149.5 DP
157.3 C
157.3 R
417
421 R
432
460
560
564.6
571
572
576 B
740
749
827
828
857
4,393,563
4,393,564
4,393,565
4,393,566
4,393,567
4,393.568
4,393,569
4,393,570
4,393,571
4,393,572
4,393,573
4.393,574
4,393,575
4,393,576
4,393,577
4,393.578
4.393,579
4,393,580
4^393,581
4,393,582
4,393,583
877
34.1
43.6
162
196
381
387
4,393,584
CLASS 30
4,393.585
4.393,586
4,393.587
4.393.588
4.393.589
4,393.590
CLASS 33
1 L 4.393.591
172 B 4,393.592
184.5 4,393,593
203.16 4,393,594
245 4,393,595
264 4,393,596
275 G 4,393,597
302 4,393,598
336 4,393,599
474 4,393,600
494 4,393,601
CLASS 34
34 4,393,602
39 4,393,603
CLASS 36
67 R 4,393,604
114 4,393,605
CLASS 37
103 4,393,606
4,393,607
124 4,393,608
238 4,393,609
CLASS 40
107 4,393,611
152 4,393,612
625 4,393,610
CLASS 42
90 4,393,613
94 4.393,614
CLASS 43
15 4,393,615
60 4,393,616
96 4,393,617
CLASS 44
51 , 4,394,131
4,394,132
56 4,394,133
62 4,394,134
71 4,394,135
CLASS 46
35 4,393,618
165 4,393,619
201 4,393,620
CLASS 47
40.5 4,393.621
48.5 4,393,622
CLASS 48
111
197 R
248
4,394,136
4,394,137
CLASS 49
4,393,623
CLASS 51
5 D 4,393,624
165.87
168
246
281 SF
4,393,625
4.393.626
4.393,627
4.393,628
CLASS 52
74
121
144
235
303
309.1
309.11
381
644
704
730
69
4.393,629
4,393,630
4,393,631
4,393,632
4,393,633
4,393,634
4,393,635
4,393,636
4,393,637
4,393,638
4,393,639
CLASS 53
4,393,640
138 A
266 R
471
1
20
184
195
242
261
281
347
354
357
4,393,641
4.393,642
4,393,643
CLASS 55
4,394,138
4,394.139
4.394,140
4,394,141
4,394,142
4,394,143
4,394,144
4,394,145
4,394,146
4.394,147
CLASS 56
12.8 4,393.644
202
22
81
413
4.393.645
CLASS 57
4,393.646
4.393.647
4,393.648
CLASS 60
39.05
39.093
39.281
295
511
527
585
618
653
657
4.393.649
4.393.650
4,393.651
4,393,652
4,393,653
4,393,654
4,393,655
4,393.656
4,393.657
4.393,658
66
69
113
115
119
256
457
506
CLASS 62
4,393,659
4,393,660
4,393,661
4,393,662
4,393,663
4,393,664
4,393,665
4,393,666
CLASS 63
29 R 4.393,667
CLASS 64
4.32 4,394,287
CLASS 65
159 4,394,148
CLASS 66
4 4,393.668
13
75.2
4.393,669
4.393.670
CLASS 68
5 0 4,393,671
CLASS 70
277
358
28
62
76
77
92
94
98
61
71
92
97
131
221
234
329
405
422
451
4,393,672
4,393,673
CLASS 71
4,394,149
4,394,150
4,394,151
4,394,152
4,394,153
4,394,154
4,394,155
4,394,156
4,394,157
4,394,158
4,394,159
CLASS 72
4,393,674
4,393,675
4,393,676
4,393,677
4,393.678
4.393,679
4,393,680
4,393,681
4,393,682
4,393,683
4,393,684
481
23
35
64.2
66
84
115
116
117
117.3
118
150 A
160
204
432 R
439
505
4,393,685
CLASS 73
517 B
592
603
701
718
728
818
821
859
861.05
861.21
861.61
861.72
861.91
862.41
862.48
864.84
209
469
475
538
689
866
4,393,686
4,393,687
4,393,688
4,393,689
4,393,690
4,393,691
4,393,692
4,393,693
4,393,694
4,393,695
4.393,696
4,393,697
4,393,698
4,393,699
4,393,700
4,393,701
4,393.702
4,393,703
4,393,704
4,393,705
4,393,706
4,393,707
4,393,708
4.393,709
4,393,710
4.393.711
4,393.712
4.393.713
4.393.714
4,393.715
4.393.716
4.393.717
4,393,718
4,393,719
4,393,720
4.393.721
4.393.722
4.393.723
4.393.724
4..W.725
Re.31.312
4,393.726
CLASS 74
4.393.727
4.393,728
4,393,729
4,393,730
4,393,731
4.393.732
CLASS 75
0.5 AA
0.5 BC
10 R
11
21
60
65 R
68 A
126 A
128 A
233
4,394.160
4.394.161
4.394,162
4.394,163
4,394,164
4.394.165
4.394.166
4.394.167
4,394,168
4,394.169
4.394,170
CLASS 81
3.38 A 4,393,733
468
4,393,734
CLASS 82
4,393,735
CLASS 83
4,393,736
4,393,737
4,393,738
4,393,739
CLASS 84
101 4,393,740
4,393,741
1.23 4,393,742
4,393,743
CLASS 86
4,393,744
36 R
100
356.3
663
834
25
CLASS 89
1.806 4,393,745
34 4,393,746
45 4,393,747
47 4,393,748
CLASS 91
376 R
408
4,393.749
4,393.750
4.393,751
CLASS 92
86 4,393,752
CLASS 98
2.12 4,393.753
2.14
348
369
450.6
459
510
589
609
4,393,754
CLASS 99
4.393,755
4,393,756
4.393.757
4.393.758
4.393.759
4.393.760
4.393.761
4.393,762
CLASS 100
2
4,393.763
88
4.393.764
98 R
4.393.765
99
4,393.766
229 A
4,393.767
CLASS 101
45
4.393.768
93.22
4,393,770
93 3
4,393,769
93.48
4,393,771
217
4,393,772
232
4,393,773
288
4,393.774
365
4,393,775
4,393,776
407 BP
4,393,777
425
4,393,778
CLASS 102
202 5
4,393.779
255
4.393,780
440
4,393,781
446
4,393,782
529
4.393.783
CLASS 104
2 4,393.784
69 4.394,173
110 4,393.785
141 4,393.786
CLASS 105
199 CB
81 .^. 707, 126
4.393,787
CLASS 106
1.14
38.5 D
85
90
120
287.14
4,394,171
4,394,172
4,394,174
4,394,175
4,394,176
4.394.177
CLASS 109
2 4.393,788
19 4,393,789
76 4,393,790
CLASS 111
34 4,393,791
CLASS 112
3 R
79 R
158 B
158 E
231
262.1
265.1
282
4,393.792
4.393,793
4,393,797
4,393,794
4.393,795
4,393,796
4,393,798
4,393,799
4.393,800
4,393,801
CLASS 114
67 A 4,393.802
201 R 4.393.888
254 4.393,803
CLASS 118
60 4,393,804
105
412
4.393,805.
4,393.806
501
503
620
657
4,393,807
4,393,808
4,393,809
4.393,810
CLASS 119
14.47 4.393.811
16
72.5
4.393.812
4.393.813
CLASS 122
22 4,393.814
31 R 4.393,815
412 4,393,816
CLASS 123
3
23
41.08
90.41
195 C
195 R
196 AB
196 M
198 DB
198 F
203
249
272
323
327
335
339
357
417
425
435
440
450
478
502
525
536
557
564
568
576
587
CLASS
4,393.817
4.393,818
4,393.819
4.393.820
4.393.821
4.393.822
4.393.824
4.393.823
4.393.826
4.393.825
4.393.827
4,393.828
4.393.829
4.393,830
4,393,831
4,393,832
4,393,833
4,393,834
4.393.835
4.393,836
4,393,837
4,393,838
4,393.839
4.393.840
4.393.841
4.393.842
4.393,843
4,393,844
4,393,845
4,393,846
4.393.947
4.393.848
4.393.849
4,393.850
4,393.851
4.393.852
4,393,853
4,393,854
4,393,855
125
3 4.393,856
CLASS 126
9R
351
429
436
448
4,393,857
4,393,858
4,393,859
4,393,860
4,393,861
4,393,862
CLASS 127
46,3 4,394,178
CLASS 128
.W3
1 R
1.1
80 A
87 R
92 A
204.18
419 PT
425
583
705
748
758
760
764
785
Bl 4.073.296
4,393,863
4,393,864
4.393,865
4,393,866
4,393,867
4,393,868
4,393,869
4.393,874
4.393.875
4.393.876
4.393.877
4,.193,878
4,393.879
4.393.880
4.393.881
4.393.882
4.393.883
CLASS 131
273 4.393.884
339 4.393.885
PI 47
PI 48
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
CLASS 132
7 4.393.886
CLASS 134
4.394.179
CLASS 135
109 4,393,887
CLASS 136
4.394.529
CLASS 137
4,393.889
4.393.890
4.393.891
4.393.892
4.393.893
4.393.894
4.393,895
4.393.896
4.393.897
4.393.898
CLASS 138
89 4.393.899
4.393.900
145 4.393,901
245
72
78.2
238
242
246.12
454 *
539.5
601
831
CLASS 139
76
370.2
92.1
118
387
4.393.902
4.393,903
CLASS 140
4.393,904
4,393,905
CLASS 141
4.393.906
CLASS 145
29 A 4.393.908
CLASS 148
1.5
6.15 R
1I.5C
12 EA
12 F
12 R
31.55
33.1
103
120
129
131
149
187
f394,180
4.394.181
4.394.182
4.394.183
4.394.184
4.394,185
4.394.188
4.394.186
4,394.187
4.394.189
4,394.190
4.394,191
Re.31.317
4,394,192
4.394.193
4.394,194
4.394.195
4,394,196
CLASS 149
19.3 4,394,197
21 4.394.198
4,394.199
CLASS 150
8 4.393.909
12 4.393.910
CLASS 152
158 4,393.911
353 R
364
4.393,912
4.393,913
11 R
40
41
46
104.12
122
165
4.393.919
4,393.921
4,393,922
4.393,923
4,393,924
4,393,925
4,393.926
CLASS 166
IDS
134
188
208
249
250
261
263
272
279
293
325
4,393,927
4,393,928
4.393.929
4,393,930
4.393.931
4.393.932
Re.31,313
4,393,933
4,393.934
4.393.935
4,393.936
4,393.937
4.393.938
4.393.939
4.393.940
384
CLASS 169
70 4,393,941
CLASS 172
2 4.393.942
260.5 4.393.943
CLASS 173
28 4.393.944
163 4,393.945
CLASS 174
15 S 4,394.534
CLASS 156
72 4,394.200
73.6 4.394.201
94 4.394.202
175 4,394,203
275.1 4.394.204
307.3 4.394.205
322 4.394.206
578 4.394.207
580. 1 4.394,208
4,394.209
608 4.394.210
628 4.394.211
CLASS 157
1.2 4.393.914
CLASS 160
395 4.393.915
CLASS 162
162 4.394,212
163 4,394.213
228 4.394,214
CLASS 164
119 4.393.916
476
4.393,917
CLASS 165
10 4,393.918
1 1 A 4,393,920
16 HS
24
72 B
74 R
4,394,530
4.394.531
4.394.532
4,394.533
CLASS 175
4.56 4.393.946
323
374
377
4,393.947
4.393.948
4.393.949
CLASS 177
108 4.393,950
136
4,393.951
CLASS 179
1 G
1 GP
1 SD
2 AM
2TC
18 GE
81 B
84 R
99H
179
4.394.536
4,394.537
4.394,535
4.394.538
4,394,540
4,394,539
4,394,541
4,394,542
4,394,543
4,394,544
4,394.545
CLASS 180
6.44 4,393.952
190
205
291
4.393.953
4.393,954
4.393.955
CLASS 181
265 4,393.956
CLASS 184
3 R 4.393.957
7D
4.393.958
CLASS 187
9E
4.393.959
CLASS 188
62
4,393,960
67
4.393.961
72.6
4.393.962
73.45
4.393.963
CLASS 192
4891
4.393,965
56 R
4,393.966
84E
4.393.967
98
4.393,968
99S
4,393,907
044
4,393,964
CLASS 198
4,393,973
CLASS 200
5 A
5R
6 A
16 E
34
44
61.62
67 DA
144 B
159 R
161
4,394,547
4.394,546
4.394.548
4.394,549
4.394.550
4,394,551
4.394,552
4,394.553
4.394,554
4.394,555
4,394,556
CLASS 202
170 4,394,216
227
263
4.394.217
4.394.218
CLASS 193
35 TE 4.393.969
CLASS 194
17 4.393.970
93 4,393.971
99 4.393,972
CLASS 196
14.52 4.394.215
CLASS 203
1 4.394.219
42
89
4.394.220
4.394.221
CLASS 204
1 T
15
57
59 R
72
73 R
98
129
144
158 HA
164
165
192 E
192 R
198
243 R
284
295
298
301
400
412
414
4.394.222
4.394.223
4.394.224
4,394.225
4.394.226
4.394.227
4.394.228
4.394.229
4.394,230
4.394.231
4,394,232
4.394.233
4.394,234
4.394.235
4.394,237
4.394,236
4,394,241
4.394.242
4,394,243
4.394.244
4,394,245
4.394.246
4,394,238
4,394,240
4,394,239
CLASS 206
37 4,393,974
385 4.393,975
CLASS 208
10
89
108
111
134
251 H
310 Z
135
166
170
250
500
270
4,393,979
CLASS 221
289 4,393,981
CLASS 222
209 4,393,982
233 4,393,983
402.18 4,393.984
591 4.393,985
CLASS 224
32 A 4.393.986
CLASS 228
157 4,393.987
CLASS 229
43 4,393,988
71
375
475
1
102
200
332
585
4.394.247
4.394,248
4,394.249
4.394.250
4.394.251
4.394.252
4,394,253
4,394.254
CLASS 209
4.394.256
4.394,257
4,394,258
4,394,259
4.394.260
CLASS 210
96.1 4,394.261
103 4,394,262
198.2 4.394.263
222 4.394.264
242.3 4,394,265
244 4,394,266
331 4,394,267
628 4,394,268
690 4,394,269
726 4,394,270
773 4,394,271
779 4,394.272
CLASS 215
211 4.393.976
4,393.977
253 4,393.978
CLASS 219
10.55 B 4,394.557
69 W
125.12
137 WM
285
306
342
449
452
523
4.394.558
4,394.559
4.394.560
4,394.561
4,394.562
4,394.563
4,394.564
4,394,565
4,394.566
4.393.989
CLASS 235
4.394.567
4.394.568
CLASS 239
4.393.990
4.393.991
4.393.992
4.393,993
4.393.994
CLASS 242
107.4 A 4,393,995
CLASS 244
1 10 C 4.393,996
135 R 4.393,997
CLASS 248
74 R
346
466
542
4,393,998
4.393,999
4,394,000
4.394.001
CLASS 250
204
209
216
239
253
262
343
366
372
374
423 P
461.1
484.1
144
173
4,394,569
4.394,570
4,394,571
4.394.572
4,394,573
4.394,574
4,394,575
4.394,576
4.394.577
4.394,578
4.394.579
4,394,580
4.394.581
CLASS 251
4,394,002
4.394,003
CLASS 252
CLASS 220
85 S 4.393.980
8.55 R
12
32.7 E
46.3
46.4
62.2
62.55
70
153
174.11
182
350
359 E
412
429 B
430
431 C
433
437
438
447
455 Z
465
470
520
528
609
204
239.3 P
245.4
391
396 R
429 K
429 R
429.7
439 R
440
446
448 AD
455 R
463
467
932
64
4,394,312
4,394,313
4,394.314
4.394.315
4,394,316
4,394.317
4,394.318
4.394,319
4.394.320
4.394,321
4.394.322
4.394,323
4,394,324
4.394.325
4,394,326
4.394.327
4.394.328
4.394.329
4.394.330
4.394.273
4,394.275
4.394.276
4.394,277
4.394.278
4.394.279
4,394.280
4,394,281
4,394.282
4,394,283
4,394,284
4,394.285
4,394,286
4,394.288
4,394,289
4,394.290
4,394.291
4,394,292
4,394.293
4,394,294
4.394.295
4,394,296
4.394.297
4.394.298
4.394,299
: 4,394.300
4.394,301
4.394,302
4.394.303
4,394,304
4,394,305
4,394.306
CLASS 254
4.394,004
CLASS 256
4,394,005
CLASS 260
112.5 R 4.394.308
140 4.394.309
162 4.394.310
239 BB 4.394.311
CLASS 261
18 B 4.394.331
CLASS 264
8
37
80
82
109
122
135
177 1
219
225
292
296
239
249
9
10
22
4,394,332
4.394,333
4,394,334
4.394,335
4.394.336
4.394,337
4.394.338
4,394.339
4.394.340
4,394.341
4.394.342
4.394.343
CLASS 266
4,394.006
4.394.007
CLASS 271
4.394.008
4,394,009
4,394.010
4.394,01 1
CLASS 272
119 4.394.012
CLASS 273
1.5 R 4,394.013
73 C 4.394,015
73 G 4,394,014
109 4.394,016
237 4.394.017
4.394,018
256 4.394,019
CLASS 277
1 4,394.020
34.3 4.394.021
36 4.394.022
84 Re.31.314
124 4,394.023
207 A 4,394.024
4,394,025
231 4.394.026
CLASS 280
5C
11.19
11.23
434
515
618
736
801
804
816
4.394.027
4.394.028
4,394.029
4.394,030
4.394.031
4.394,032
4.394.033
4,394.034
4.394.035
4,394.036
4.394,037
CLASS 299
16 4.394,051
18 4,394,052
81 4,394.053
CLASS 307
108 4.394.583
117 4.394.584
140 4.394,585
355 4.394,587
443 4,394.588
450 4.394.589
584 4.394.590
CLASS 310
11 4,394.591
12 4.394,592
54 4,394.593
68 R 4.394,594
162 4.394,595
184 4,394.596
268 4.394.597
CLASS 312
7.2 4.394,054
196 4,394.055
216 4,394,056
CLASS 313
51 4,394.598
422 4,394.599
500 4,394,600
509 4.394,601
CLASS 315
71 4.394,602
311 4,394.603
CLASS 318
4,394,604
4.394,605
4.394,606
4.394.607
4,394.608
4,394,609
4.394.610
CLASS 282
\jk 4.394.038
CLASS 285
85 4.394.039
CLASS 290
4 C 4.394.582
CLASS 294
66 R 4.394.040
163 4.394,042
181 R 4.394.041
CLASS 296
97 H 4,394.043
218 4.394.044
CLASS 297
118 4.394.045
132 4.394.046
361 4.394.047
367 4.394.048
439 4,394.049
468 4.394.050
257
280
434
453
578
603
803
CLASS 320
21 4,394.611
31 4.394,612
48 4,394,613
CLASS 323
210 4,394.614
CLASS 324
51 4,394,615
52 4.394.616
57 Q 4.394,617
83 D 4.394.618
117 H 4,394.619
149 4.394,620
163 4.394,621
CLASS 330
4.3 4.394.623
151
267
4.394.624
4.394,625
CLASS 331
12 4,394,626
66
4,394,627
CLASS 332
19 4,394,628
CLASS 333
109 4,394,629
116 4,394,630
132 4,394,631
218 4.394.632
238 4.394,633
CLASS 335
216 4.394.634
CLASS 336
55 4.394.635
172 4.394.636
192 4.394,637
CLASS 337
264 4.394.638
292 4.394,639
CLASS 339
15 4.394.057
59 R 4.394.058
125 R 4,394,059
CLASS 340
23
347 DD
365 C
571
572
594
4,394,640
4,394,641
4,394,642
4,394,643
4,394,644
4,394.645
4,394,646
CLASSIFICATION OF PATENTS
PI 49
645 4. 104,647
194.1
4.394.691
105
4.394.758
232
4,394,352
CLASS 430
424
4.394.478
679 4,394.648
229
4.394.692
110.1
4.394.759
CLASS 423
432
4,394.488
711 4.394.649
264
4,394.685
111
4,394.760
6
4.394.424
459
4.394.479
728 4.394.650
298
4,394,693
CLASS 371
21.5
4.394.353
65
^ 4.394.425
776
4.394.307
756 4.394,651
^^W * r%£^ ^ ^ f\
25
4.394.354
4,394,426
764 4,394,652
CLASS 360
8
4.394.761
27
4.394,355
68
4,394,427
CLASS 525
802 4,394,653
14.3
4,394.694
38
4,394,762
43
4.394,356
83
4,394,428
43
4.394.480
825.34 4,394,654
53
4.394.695
4.394,763
140
4.394,357
102
4.394.429
545
4.394.481
825.36 4,394,655
78
4.394,696
CLASS 372
305
4,394.358
110
4.394.430
4.394.482
825.73 4,394,656
91
4,394,697
4.394.359
119
4.394.431
60
4.394.483
825.93 4.394.657
96.5
4,394,698
4.394,764
317
4.394.360
120
4.394.432
72
4.394.484
CLASS 343
113
4,394,699
CLASS 373
321 S
4.394.361
151
4.394.433
74
4.394.485
VfLi^t^iJ t^^mf
133
4,394,700
328
4.394.362
270
4.394.434
162
4.394,486
7.7 4.394.658
137
4.394.701
52
4.394,765
356
4.394.363
287
4.394.435
281
4.394.487
16 M 4.394.659
CLASS 361
120
4,394,766
483
4.394.364
311
4.394.436
370
4.394.489
100 SA 4,394.660
315
Bl 4,054.937
CLASS 375
485
4.394.365
312
4.394.437
438
4.394.490
CLASS 346
92
4.394,702
13
4.394.767
493
4.394.366
321
4.394.438
452
4.394.491
1 1 4 ^94 661
101
4,394,703
14
4,394.768
502
4.394.367
336
4,394.439
504
4.394.492
33 R 4.394.662
75 4.394.663
119
4,394,704
556
4.394.368
379
4.394.440
530
4.394,493
215
4.394.705
CLASS 376
588
4.394.369
524
4,394.441
CLASS 526
76 R 4.394.664
4,394,665
331
398
4.394.706
4.394.707
146
245
4.394.344
4.394.345
CLASS 424
532
4,394,442
CLASS 431
301
4.394.494
82 4,.394,666
137 4,394,667
139 R 4,394,668
140 R 4,394,669
4,394,670
399
401
408
411
4.394.708
4.394.709
4.394.710
4.394.711
4.394.712
258
105
115
4,394,346
CLASS 377
4,394,586
4,394,622
15
52
85
95
4.394.370
4.394.371
■4.394.372
4.394.373
4,394,374
4
5
254
284
4,394,118
4.394.119
Re31.316
4.394,120
67
98
101
193
229
313
CLASS 528
4,394.495
4.394.496
4.394,497
4,394.498
4.394.499
4.394.500
155 4,394.671
CLASS 350
433
4.394.713
CLASS 362
116
4,394,769
CLASS 378
114
150
177
4,394,375
4,394.376
4.394.377
11
CLASS 432
4,394.121
96.13 4.394.060
96.20 4,394.061
32
153
4.394.714
4.394.715
169
172
4.394.770
4.394.771
184
211
4.394.378
4.394.379
30
253
4.394,122
4,394.123
485
4.394,501
CLASS 536
96.33 4,394.062
162.13 4,394,063
259 4,394,064
304 4,394,065
158
247
278
4.394,716
4,394.717
4.394.718
CLASS 363
182
4
56
4.394.772
CLASS 382
. 4.394.773
4,394,774
246
269
274
283
4.394.384
4.394,380
4.394.381
4.394.382
6
11
19
CLASS 435
4,394,443
4,394,444
4,394,445
119
25
4.394,502
CLASS 544
4,394,503
307 4,394,066
18
4.394.719
285
4..394.383
88
4,394,446
28
4.394.504
334 4,394.067
37
4.394.720
CLASS 384
4.394.385
104
4.394.447
91
4.394.505
345 - 4,394,068
44
4.394.721
101
4.394,091
298
4.394.386
172
4.394.448
321
4, .194. 506
347 E 4,394.069
68
4,394,722
300
4.394.387
188
4,394,449
4.394,450
349 4,394.070
87
4.394.723
CLASS 400
304
4.394.388
191
CLASS 546
422 4,394,071
427 4,394,072
124
4.394.724
120
4,394,092
308
4.394.389
253
4! 394^451
185
4.394.507
n ASS 364
124
4,394.093
330
4.394.390
209
4.394,508
465 4,394.073
CLASS 351
200
Re 31,318
4.394,725
4.394,094
CLASS 403
366
4,394,391
CLASS 425
66
CLASS 436
4,394.452
339
4.394,509
CLASS 548
206 4,394.074
4.394.726
49
4,394,095
122
4,394,115
CLASS 441
240
4,394,510
CLASS 352
4.394,727
360
4,394,097
192 R 4.394,116
86
4.394,124
343
4,394.511
243 4,394.075
4.394.728
4,394.729
408
4,394.096
549
4,394,117
CLASS 455
365
374
4.394.512
4.394.513
CLASS 354
4,394.730
CLASS 405
CLASS 426
17
4,394,775
508
4.394,514
5 4.394.076
4.394.731
4,394.732
77
4.394.098
101
231
4,394,392
4.394,393
76
95
4,394,776
4,394,777
CLASS 549
25 4y394.077
31 4,394.078
33 4,394,079
17J 4,394,080
4,394.733
CLASS 409
285
4,394,394
182
4.394.778
12
4.394.515
4.394.734
104
4.394,099
4,394,395
277
4.394,779
495
4.394.516
4.394.735
4.394.736
CLASS 410
332
481
4,394,396
4.394.398
618
4,394,780
CLASS 556
234 4.394,081
414
4,394,737
2
4,394,100
557
4.394.397
CLASS 501
419
4.394.517
246 4,394.082
4.394.738
83
4,394,101
658
4.394.399
66
4,394,453
424
4,394.518
CLASS 355
1 4,394,083
3 BE 4,394,084
3 R 4,394.085
4,394.086
14 E 4,394.087
14 R 4.394,088
88 4.394.089
CLASS 357
10 4.394,672
15 4.394.673
23 4.394.674
24 4.394.675
29 4.394.676
38 4,394,677
68 4 394,678
426
464
483
4,394,739
4,394.740
4.394,741
5
CLASS 414
4,394,102
38
CLASS 427
4.394.400
112
117
138
4,394.454
4,394,455
4,394,456
32
CLASS 560
4.394.519
487
514
4,394.742
4,394.743
24.5 4,394.103
276 4.394.104
39
40
4,394.401
4,394.402
CLASS 521
CLASS 562
553
4.394.744
436
4,394,105
42
4,394.403
54
4,394,457
557
4.394.520
900
4.394.745
622
4,394.106
48
4.394.404
82
4,394,458
CLASS 564
36
104
106
218
227
236
CLASS 365
4.394,746
4,394,747
4,394,748
4.394,749
4,394.750
4.394,751
4,394,752
4,394,753
631
680
142
63
269
360
4,394.107
4.394,108
CLASS 416
4,394,109
CLASS 417
Re.31,315
4,394,110
4,394.111
58
86
150
231
36
43
70
174
4.394.405
4,394,406
4,394,407
4,394.408
CLASS 428
4.394.409
4.394.410
4.394.411
4.394 Jj 2
84
92
113
137
167
180
116
141
4,394,459
4.394,460
4,394,461
4,394.462
4,394,463
4,394.464
CLASS 523
4.394,465
4.394.466
271
451
479
462
716
4.394.521
4.394.522
4,394.523
4.394,524
CLASS 568
4,394.525
4,394.526
CLASS 570
81 4,394,679
CLASS 367
CLASS 418
257
4.394.413
205
4,394,467
143
4.394,527
CLASS 358
75
4,394,754
61
98
B 4.394.112
4.394,113
288.
332
4.394.414
4.394,415
212
4,394.468
4.394.469
CLASS 585
22 4.394.680
CLASS 368
269
4! 394 J 14
341
4.394,416
CLASS 524
14
4.394.528
60 4.394,681
171
4,394,090
383
4,394.417
^^&rf'^4.^h-7 *^Ar^r
667
4.394.255
73 4.394,682
1^1
CLASS 420
391
4.394.418
56
4,394,470
^^V A f^f^ M£\A
107 4.394.683
CLASS 369
453
4,394,347
416
4.394.419
92
4,394,471
CLASS 604
III 4.394.684
45
4,394,755
528
4,394.348
447
4.394.420
100
4,394,472
115
4.393.870
134 4.394.686
547
4.394.421
226
4,394,473
151
4,393,872
147 4.394.687
CLASS 370
CLA'SS 422
592
4.394,422
232
4,394,474
4,393.873
160 4.394.688
168 4.394.689
56
80
4.394,756
Re.31.319
147
150
4.394,349
4,394,350
CLASS 429
262
289
4,394.475
4,394.476
CLASS 609
180 4.394.690
100
4,394,757
171
4,394.351
86
4.394,423
319
4.394.477
58
4,393.871
PI 50
CLASSIFICATION OF DESIGNS
Dl —
26
269,729
63
269,745
D9-
370
269,761
D13-
1
269.777
114
269,793
151
269.809
D2
24
269.730
269,746
375
269,762
24
269.778
210
269,794
D24-
17
269.810
275
269,731
70
269,747
398
269,763
D14—
53
269.779
269.795
34
269.811
319
269,732
76
269,748
269.764
57
269.780
D22- 20
269.796
36
269,812
D3—
7
269.733
85
269,749
269.765
58
269.781
23
269.797
38
269.813
28
269.734
269,750
457
269,766
111
269,782
25
269.798
269,814
39
269,735
125
269,751
DIO-
38
269.767
D15—
5
269,783
27
269.799
45
269,815
71
269,736
168
269.752
Dll —
47
269.768
12
269.784
269.800
64
269,816
269,737
178
269.753
82
269,769
80
269.785
D23- 03
269.801
D26—
35
269.817
269,739
186
269,754
87
269,770
143
269,786
269,802
73
269.818
269,819
269,740
269 741
192
194
269.755
269,756
D12-
118
110
269,771
269,772
DI7-
145
14
269,787
269,788
95
97
269.803
269.804
D28-
12
77
269 738
198
269.757
153
269.773
D19-
59
269,789
125
269.805
25
269.820
D6—
16
269,742
D7— 337
269.758
157
269,774
64
269,790
127
269.806
D30—
42
269.821
31
269.743
D8- 382
269,760
192
269,775
77
269.791
139
269.807 UW—
28
269.822
56
269.744
388
269,759
204
269,776
D21-
101
269,792
146
269.808
269,823
CLASSIFICATION OF PLANTS
P-
9
5.069
5.070
48
5.071
54
5,072
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX
OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
(U.S. States, Territories and Armed Forces, the Commonwealth of Puerto Rico, and the Canal Zone)
Alabama ....I. 1
Alaska j.[ 2
American Samoa 3
Arizona 4
Arkansas 5
California ..
Canal Zone
6
7
Colorado 8
Connecticut 9
Delaware 10
District of Columbia 11
Florida 12
Georgia ..
Guam
Hawaii ...
13
14
15
Idaho 16
Illinois .
Indiana
Iowa ....
Kansas
17
IS
19
20
Kentucky 21
Louisiana , 22
Maine 23
Maryland 24
Massachusetts 25
Michigan 26
Minnesota 27
Mississippi 28
Missouri 29
Montana 30
Nebraska 31
Nevada 32
New Hampshire 33
New Jersey 34
New Mexico 35
New York 36
North Carolina 37
North Dakota ..: 38
Ohio 39
Oklahoma 40
Oregon 41
Pennsylvania 42
Puerto Rico 43
Rhode Island 44
South Carolina 45
South Dakota 46
Tennessee 47
Texas 48
Utah 49
Vermont 50
Virginia 51
Virgin Islands 52
Washington 53
West Virginia 54
Wisconsin 55
Wyoming 56
U.S. Air Force 57
U.S. Army 58
U.S. Navy 59
(First number in listing denotes location
as to inventor name, location, etc.)
according to above key. Refer to patent number in body of the Official Gazette to obtain details
04
OS
06
4.393.519
4.393.520
4.393.583
4.393,596
4.393,599
4,393,602
4,393,692
44393,975
4^394,258
4394,352
4394,532
4i394.678
4^4.728
<393,905
4.393.970
Re.31,315
Re.31.318
4,393.526
4^393.527
4393,528
41393.531
4393.541
4[393.568
4t393,575
4i393.593
4t393.600
4,393.612
4,393,628
4,393,636
4.393,649
4,393.654
4.393,662
4,393,663
4,393,668
4,393,706
4,393,708
4.393.711
4,393,727
4,393.730
4.393.757
4.393.758
4.393.765
4,393.808
4.393.816
4.393,817
4,393,828
4.393,830
4,393.868
4,393.871
4,393,884
4,393,896
4,393.906
4,393.923
4,393.926
4,393.928
4.393.932
4.393.936
4.393.948
4.393,988
4,393,991
4,393,996
4,393,997
4.394,003
4,394,014
4.394.020
4.394.037
4.394.042
4.394.046
4.394.055
4.394.056
4.394.061
4.394.069
4,394.074
4.394.101
4.394.102
4.394.103
4.394.107
4.394.117
4,394.123
4.394,136
4,394,138
4.394.154
4,394.182
4.394.213
4.394.247
4.394,250
4,394,251
4.394.253
4.394.276
4.394.277
4.394.279
4.394.296
4.394.302
4.394.303
4.394.307
4.394.344
4.394.345
4.394.362
4.394.377
4,394,381
4,394,383
4,394.394
4,394,397
4,394.398
4,394,438
4,394.449
08
09
PATENTS
4.394.464
4.394.478
4.394.496
4.394.538
4.394.543
4.394.544
4.394.556
4.394.579
4.394.610
4,394,613
4,394.632
4,394,634
4.394.639
4.394.653
4.394,667
4.394,695
4.394.700
4.394.702
4.394.711
4.394,714
4,394,726
4.394.729
4,394,742
4.394.744
4,394.745
4.394.746
4.394.769
4.394,774
4,394,780
4,393,656
4,394,051
4,394,572
4,394,575
4,394,665
4.394.671
4.394.682
4,394.693
4,394,734
4,393,651
4,393.652
4,393,707
4,393.719
4,393,814
4,393,894
4,393,900
4.393.998
4,394.01 1
4,394,047
4,394,097
4,394.131
4.394.155
4,394.228
4.394,241
10
11
12
13
15
16
17
4,394,257
4,394,347
4,394,421
4,394.435
4.394,44?
4.394.527
4.394.540
4,394.574
4;394,767
4.393.736
4.394.153
4.394.174
4.394,314
4.394.489
4,394.506
4.394.624
4.393.529
4,393.543
4.393.618
4.393.705
4,393,790
4,393.838
4.393.866
4,393.882
4.393.986
4.394,139
4,394,339
4,394,548
4,394,645
4,394,776
4,393,989
4.394,166
4.394,289
4.394.413
4.394,374
4,393,535
4,394,012
4,394.261
Re.31.316
4.393,551
4,393.563
4.393.615
4.393.659
4.393.694
4,393.712
4,393.740
4.393,763
4,393,768
4,393,803
4.393.872
4.393,879
4,393,880
4,393,908
18
4.393.909
4,393.913
4,393.915
4.393.919
4.393,950
4.394,000
4,394.025
4.394.031
4.394.065
4.394.111
4.394.248
4.394.299
4.394.372
4.394,399
4,394,408
4,394,422
4.394,447
4,394.485
4.394.547
4,394,551
4,394,612
4,394.615
4.394,647
4,394.681
4,394,703
4,394,723
4.394,756
4,394,770
4,393,524
4,393,530
4,393,688
4,393,695
4,393,751
4,393,789
4,393.809
4.393.825
4.393,963
4.394,019
4,394,096
4,394,192
4,394,220
4,394.313
4.394.341
4,394.349
4.394.417
4,394.444
4.394.450
4.394.507
4,394.510
4,394.535
4,394,545
4,394,553
4.394.555
19
20
21
22
24
25
4,394,595
4.394.707
4.394,722
4.393,635
4,393.812
4,393,847
A.i9A.052
4.393.584
4.393.791
4,393,959
4.394,718
4..193.643
4,393,885
4.393.888
4.394,143
4.394.147
4.394.216
4.394.390
4,394.564
4.394.565
4,393,544
4,393.546
4.393.614
4.393.940
4.394.282
4,394.664
4.393.582
4..^93.621
4.393.699
4.-^93.777
4.393.883
4.393,907
4,394,197
4,394,223
4,394,370
4,394,459
4,394,603
4,394,633
4,394,689
4,394,777
4,393,604
4,393,622
4,393,631
4.393,632
4,393,634
4,393,834
4,393,860
4,393,949
4,393,954
4.394,009
4,394,018
4,394,028
4.394,084
PI 51
PI 52
GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX OF RESIDENCE OF INVENTORS
4.394.149
4,394,732
4.394,679
4,394,414
4,393,863
4,393,930
4.394.179
4,394,733
4.394,743
4,394,442
4,393,877
4,393,931
4,394,219
4.394,761
4,394,757
4,394.621
4,393,957
4,393,934
4,394,226
29 : Re.31,312
4.394.773
38 : 4.393.969
4,393,973
4,393,935
4,394,304
4.393.537
35 : 4.394.622
39 : Re.31.314
4,393,976
4,393,937
4,394,439
4.393.761
4.394,623
4.393.587
4.394,027
4.393,938
4.394,448
4,393.881
36 : 4,393.539
4.393.594
4,394,040
4,393,946
4.394.458
4,393.945
4.393.552
4.393.626
4,394.045
4,393.971
4.394.479
4,394,002
4.393.578
4,393.633
4,394,059
4.394.023
4.394.519
4,394,049
4,393,660
4,393,787
4,394,064
4.394.140
4.394.628
4.394.106
4,393,661
4,393,792
4,394,075
4,394.189
4.394,635
4.394.108
4,393,769
4,393,859
4,394,098
4.394.194
4,394,640
4,394.195
4,393,802
4.393,977
4.394,128
4,394,254
4,394,649
4.394.246
4,393,810
4,393,978
4,394,132
4,394,273
4,394,651
4.394.562
4,393,852
4.394,005
4,394,134
4,394,283
4,394,658
4.394.563
4,393,857
4,394.017
4,394,142
4,394,284
4,394.688
4.394.740
4,393.862
4.394.060
4,394,160
4,394,321
4,394.736
31 : 4.393.723
4,393.867
4.394.112
4,394,184
4 394 326
26 :
4,393,616
4,394.004
4.393.911
4.394.122
4,394,185
4 394 355
4,393,617
4,394.013
4.393.965
4,394.148
4,394,202
4 394 367
4,393,619
4,394,373
4.393.967
4,394,161
4,394,205
4,394,455
4,394,461
4,394,463
4,394,474
4,394,497
4,394,587
4,394,616
4,394,748
49 : 4,393,665
4,394,199
4,394,329
4,394,642
50 : 4,393,941
4,394,419
4,394,437
4,393,696
32 : 4,393.861
4.394.058
4,394,271
4,394,212
4,393.729
4,393,927
4.394,066
4,394,287
4,394,229
4,393.731
4,394,368
4,394,072
4,394,305
4,394,240
4,393.734
33 : 4,394,451
4,394,076
4,394,325
4,394,242
4,393,754
4,394,650
4,394,083
4,394,328
4,394,262
4,393,820
34 : Re.31,319
4,394,086
4,394.332
4,394,316
4,393,845
4,393,548
4,394,099
4.394.466
4,394,322
4,393.873
4,393,549
4,394,116
4.394.476
4,394,354
4.393.964
4,393,572
4,394,137
4,394,481
4,394,385
4,393,994
4,393,588
4,394,171
4,394,482
4,394,386
4,393.999
4,393,611
4,394,178
4,394,490
4,394,388
4,394,001
4,393,690
4,394,214
4,394,528
4,394,418
4,394,033
4,393.746
4,394,266
4,394,61 1
4,394,475
4,394,034
4,393,780
4,394,318
- 4.394,643
4.394,504
4,394,044
4,393.783
4,394,330
4.394.648
4,394,524
4,394.091
4.393.796
4,394,378
40 : 4.393.603
4,394,525
51 4,393,601
4,394,100
4.393.797
4,394,393
4.393,630
4,394,526
4.393,716
4.394,124
4.393.864
4,394,406
4,393,933
4,394,592
4.393,745
4,394,133
4.393.875
4,394,410
4,393,939
4,394,602
4.393,800
4,394.236
4.393.917
4,394,424
4,393.972
4,394,614
4.394,089
4,394,272
4.394.006
4,394,428
4.394,090
4,394,631
4,394,204
4,394,288
4,394,135
4,394,429
4,394,255
4,394,705
4,394,230
4,394,317
4,394,146
4,394,430
4,394,256
4,394,709
4,394,268
4,394,351
4,394,183
4,394,440
4,394,291
4,394,710
4,394,389
4,394,486
4,394,237
4,394,453
4,394,297
4,394,724
4,394,500
4,394.491
4,394.249
4,394,467
4.394.298
44 : 4,393.701
4,394,617
4,394,517
4.394.278
4,394,469
4.394.301
45 ; 4.393.562
53 : 4,393,987
4,394,607
4,394,281
4,394,493
4.394,323
4.393.725
4,394,022
4,394,638
4,394,285
4,394,508
4,394,324
4.393,739
4,394,206
4,394,672
4,394.295
4,394,541
4,394,350
4,394,057
4,394,252
4.394.706
4,394.300
4,394.549
4,394,573
4,394,126
4,394,259
27 :
4,393,534
4.394.308
4.394.578
4,394,577
46 : 4,393,853
4,394,405
4.393,538
4,394,311
4.394,588
41 : 4,393,521
47 : 4,393,559
4,394,409
4,393,674
4.394,361
4,394,630
4,393,595
4,393,627
4,394,552
4.393,804
— 4,394,369
4,394,660
4.393,741
4,393,793
54 : 4,393,565
4,393,851
— 4,394,396
4,394,673
4.393.925
4,393,914
4,394.522
4,393,901
4,394,445
4,394,675
4.394.038
4,394,269
4.394,523
4.393,921
4,394,460
4,394,692
4.394.656
4,394,676
55 : 4,393,637
4.394.010
4,394,468
4,394,712
42 : 4.393.522
48 : Re.31,313
4.393,645
4,394,029
4,394,471
4,394,716
4.393.564
4,393,536
4,393,744
4,394,070
4,394,498
4,394,719
4.393.580
4,393,569
4,393,848
4,394,094
4,394,514
4,394,731
4.393.581
- 4,393,598
4,393,878
4,394,403
4,394,529
4.394,751
4,393.613
4,393,610
4,393,895
4,394.433
4,394,534
4,394,766
4.393.644
4,393,666
4,393,960
4.394,434
4,394,597
37 : 4.393,624
4.393.664
4.393,722
4.394,026
4,394,571
4,394.620
4,393,717
4.393,680
4.393,829
4.394,473
4.394,580
4,394.629
4,394,208
4.393.684
4,393.889
4.394,530
4,394.708
4,394,644
4,394,235
4.393,753
4,393,893
4,394,561
4,394,727
4,394,655
4,394,286
4,393,782
4,393,929
4,394,608
DESIGN PATENTS
06 :
269,746
269,770
20 :
269.798
269,741
269.791
269,785
269,763
269,821
25 :
269,773
269,750
269.807
269,788
269,764
09 :
269,767
269,801
269.752
40 :
269.755
269,809
269,765
269,802
26 :
269.735
269.766
269,799
269.822
269,771
269,782
269,787
269,793
13 :
17 :
269,817
269,729
269,759
269,772
27 :
269,776
269,783
269.816
269.768
269,781
36 : 269,730
269,733
41 :
269.800
269,805
269,792
49 :
50 :
269.823
269.789
269,732
269,794
269,784
269.808
269,754
269,796
269,806
269,795
269,803
34 :
269,736
269,769
44 :
269,778
51 :
269,779
269,813
269,815
269,737
269,790
269,812
53 :
269,810
269.814
18 :
269.777
269,738
269,811
47 :
269,745
55 ;
269,742
269.818
19 :
269,751
269,739
37 : 269.744
48 :
269,758
-
269.,756
08 :
269,749
269,797
269,740
269.747
269,775
269,757
PLANT PATENTS
06
5,069
5.070
5,071 12 :
5,072
US GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE : O— 1983
CHANGE OF ADDRESS FORM
1
NAME— FIRST.
1
LAST
COMPANY
1
NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
II III
1
STREET ADDRESS
II III
CITY
1
STATE
1
ZIP CODE
1 1
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
Mail this form to: NEW ADDRESS
(or) COUNTRY
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office SSOM
Washington, D.C. 20A02
Attach last subscription
label here.
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
SUBSCRIPTION ORDER FORM
ENTER MY SUBSCRIPTION TO:
Domestic; @ $
Foreign.
_u-
NAME— FIRST, LAST
.lJ
COMPANY NAME OR ADDITIONAL ADDRESS LINE
STREET ADDRESS
CITY
I STATE
I l_
ZIP CODE
PLEASE PRINT OR TYPE
(or) COUNTRY
Q Remittance Enclosed (Make
checks payable to Superin-
tendent of Documents)
Q Charge to my Deposit
Account No
MAIL ORDER FORM TO:
Superintendent of Documents
Government Printing Office
Washington. D.C. 20402
Vol 1032 Nur>t)e. J
OFFICIA
GAZER
Ul.%f
>rt$ O'
.'^
mnm states patent a^*o ihaoes^ark ...:=.
ki ■■
OFFICIAL GAZETTE of the
UNITED STATES PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
July 26, 1983 Volume 1032 Number 4
CONTENTS
>atent and Trademark Office Notices
Patent Cooperation Treaty (PCT) Information 1032 OG
Reissue Applications Filed 1032 OG
Request for Reexamination Filed 1032 OG
Notice of Availability for Licensing 1032 OG
Patents Available for License or Sale . . . .- 1032 OG
Deposit Account Authorizations '032 OG
PTO Status '032 OG
Patent Certificates of Correction 1032 OG
Disclaimers '032 OG
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries '032 OG
Condition of Patent Applications '032 OG
Reexaminations '032 OG
Reissue Patents Granted (31,320)
IPlant Patents Granted (5,073)
Patents Granted
General and Mechanical (4,394,781)
Chemical (4,395,261)
Electrical (4,395,581) •
JDesign Patents Granted (269,824)
j Index of Patentees
jlndicesof Reissue, Reexamination, Design and Plant Patentees .....
Classification of
Patents (Including Reissues and Reexaminations)
Designs and Plants
Geographical Index of Residence of Inventors •
j Patents (Including Reissues)
Designs and Plants •
Change of Address Form and Subscription Order Form
Page
30
30
30
31
31
32
34
35
35
36
37
39
1303
1307
1309
1479
1565
1637
PI 1
PI 38
PI 41
PI 43
PI 44
PI 45
Back Page
The following are mailed under direction of the Superintendent of Documents, Government
Printing Office, Washington. D.C.. 20402, to whom all subscriptions should be made payable and all
communications addressed:
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (PATENT SECTION), issued weekly.
THE OFFICIAL GAZETTE (TRADEMARK SECTION), issued weekly.
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning PATENTS
GENERAL INFORMATION concerning TRADEMARKS.
PRINTED COPIES OF PATENTS are furnished by the Patent and Trademark Office at $1.00
each PLANT PATENTS in color. $8.00 each; copies of TRADEMARKS at $1.00 each. Address
orders to the Commissioner of Patents and Trademarks. Washington. DC. 20231.
Printing authorized by Section 1 l(a)3 of Title 35. U.S. Code PTO.
PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE NOTICES
Patent Cooperation Treaty Information
For information concerning the PCT member
countries see the notice appearing in the Official Gazette
at 1017 O.G. 10 on Apr. 13, 1982. For use of the Euro-
pean Patent Office as a Searching Authority for PCT
applications filed in the United States, see the notice in
the Official Gazette of Sept. 28, 1982 at 1022 O.G. 52.
Note that the domestic PCT fees have been increased
as of Oct. 1, 1982 by a rule change to 37 CFR 1.445 that
was published at 1021 O.G. 11 on Aug. 10, 1982. Also
note that the international PCT fees have changed as of
Jan. 1, 1983 and the Search Fee for the European Patent
Office as Searching Authority changed as of Jan. 22,
1983. The notice regarding the change in international
fees and the Search Fee for the European Patent Office
appeared at 1025 O.G. 27, on 28 Dec. 1982. The current
schedule of fees is as follows:
Transmittal fee $ 125.00
Search fee
U.S. Patent and Trademark Office as
Searching Authority
• No corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 500.00
• Corresponding prior U.S. national
application filed 250.00
European Patent Office as
Searching Authority
• All cases 670.00
International Fees
Basic Fees (first 30 pages) 265.00
Basic Supplemental Fee (for each
page over 30) 5.00
Designation fee (for each national
or regional office) 65.00
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
Dec. 3, 1982. Commissioner of Patents
and Trademarks.
REISSUE APPLICATIONS HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(b). The reissue applications list-
ed below are open to inspection by the general public in the
indicated Examining Groups and copies may be obtained by
paying the fee therefor (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
4,094,801, Re. S.N. 430,745, Filed Sept. 30, 1982, CI.
252/33, MAGNESIUM-CONTAINING COMPLEX-
ES, METHOD FOR THEIR PREPARATION, AND
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THE SAME, John
Wesley Forsberg, Owner of Record: The Lubrizol Corp.,
Wickliffe, Ohio, Attorney or Agent: J. W. Adams, et al.,
Ex. Gp.: 116
4,205377, Re. S.N. 382,692, Filed May 27, 1982, CI.
364/431, CONTROL SYSTEM FOR INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE, Yoshishige Oyama, et al..
Owner of Record: Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan, Attorney
or Agent: Donald R. Antonelli, Ex. Gp.: 237
4,278,413, Re. S.N. 499,269, Filed May 31, 1983, CI.
425/383, APPARATUS FOR INVERTING TIRES,
Merlyn R. Holt, Owner of Record: Hilt Tire Feedbunk,
Inc., St Francis, Kans., Attorney or Agent: Ancel W.
Lewis, Jr., Ex. Gp.: 147
4,321,251. Re. S.N. 471,499, Filed Mar. 2, 1983, CI.
424/003, DETECTION OF MALIGNANT LESIONS
OF THE ORAL CAVITY UTILIZING TOLUIDINE
BLUE RINSE, Arthur Mashberg, Owner of Record:
1032 OG 30
United States of America, as represented by the Secretary
of the Department of Health. Education and Welfare,
Washington, D.C., Attorney or Agent: John S. Roberts,
Jr., Ex. Gp.: 125
4,324,072, Re. S.N. 498,055, Filed May 25, 1983, CI.
49/129, INSULATED MULTIPLE COMPONENT
SINGLE PLANE BUILDING STRUCTURE POR-
TAL CLOSURE, Maurice E. Sterner, Jr., Owner of
Record: Products Design d Development, Inc., York, Pa.,
Attorney or Agent: Paul T. O'Neil, et al., Ex. Gp.: 354
4356,532, Re. S.N. 499,095, Filed May 27, 1983, CI.
361/393, ELECTRONIC PACKAGE AND ACCES-
SORY COMPONENT ASSEMBLY, Charles J. Dona-
her, et al.. Owner of Record: nomas and Betts Corp.,
Raritan, N.J., Attorney or Agent: Robert M. Rodrick, et
al., Ex. Gp.: 215
REQUESTS FOR REEXAMINATION HLED
Notice under 37 CFR 1.11(c). The requests for re-
examination listed below are open to inspection by the gen-
eral public in the indicated Examining Groups. Copies of the
requests and related papers may be obtained by paying the
fee therefor established in the Rules (37 CFR 1.21(b)).
In the event correspondence to the patent owner is not re-
ceived, this notice will be considered to be constructive no-
tice to the patent owner and reexamination will proceed (37
CFR 1.248(aX5)and 1.525(b)).
3,416,637, Reexam. No. 90/000,401, Requested: June
15, 1983, CI. 192/98, RADIALLY MOVABLE
CLUTCH BEARING, Jean Maurice, Owner of Record:
Societe Anonyme Francaise du Ferodo, Paris, France, At-
torney or Agent: Young & Thompson, Ex. Gp.: 350, Re-
quester: Barry E. Bretschneider, Washington, D.C.
3,665,554, Reexam. No. 90/000,400, Requested: June
16, 1983, CI. 17/45, METHOD OF EVISCERATING
SHELL FISH, Richard T. Wenstrom, et al.. Owner of
Record: Slade Gorton A Co., Inc., Boston, Mass., Attor-
ney or Agent: Thomas C. O'Konski, Ex. Gp.: 320, Re-
quester: William R. Lambert, Merritt Island, Fla.
3,824,776, Reexam. No. 90/000,408, Requested: June
20, 1983, CI. 57/208, FABRIC HAVING IMPROVED
PICK RESISTANCE, Joe F. London, Jr., Owner of
Record: Requester, Attorney or Agent: Cushman, Darby
& Cushman, Ex. Gp.: 245, Requester: Burlington Indus-
tries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
34>72,174, Reexam. No. 90/000,406, Requested: June
20, 1983, CI. 52/208, TEXTURED YARN AND FAB-
RIC, Joe F. London, Jr., et al.. Owner of Record: Re-
quester, Attorney or Agent: Cushman, Darby &
Cushman, Ex. Gp.: 354, Requester: Burlington, Indus-
tries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
4,108,029, Reexam. No. 90/000,410, Requested: June
23, 1983, CI. 83/54, CUT-OFF DIE SET, Alexander
Borzym, Owner of Record: Alpha Industries, Inc.. Detroit,
Mich., Attorney or Agent: Krass & Young, Ex. Gp.: 324,
Requester: Vogel Tool & Die Corp., Stone Park, 111.
4,301,258, Reexam. No. 90/000,403, Requested: June
13, 1983, CI. 526/173, CYCLIC ORGANO CARBON-
ATE AND SULFITE COUPLING AGENTS FOR
LIVING POLYMERS OF CONJUGATED DIENES,
Joginder Lai, et al.. Owner of Record: Goodyear Tire
and Rubber Co.. Akron, Ohio, Attorney or Agent: J. Y.
Clowney, Ex. Gp.: 140, Requester: Michelin & Cie,
Cedex, France
July 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1032 OG 31
4,317,327, Reexam. No. 90/000,405, Requested: June
20, 1983, CI. 56/396, PUSHED DETHATCHING
UNIT, Charles W. Doering, Owner of Record: Brinly-
Hardy Co., Inc.. Louisville. Ky.. Attorney or Agent:
Frank C. Leach, Ex. Gp.: 330, Requester: Toro Co.,
Minneapolis, Minn.
4,349,070, Reexam. No. 90/000,397, Requested: June
6, 1983, CI. 165/173, TUBE MAT HEAT EXCHANG-
ER, Michael F. Zinn, et al., Owner of Record: Bio-Ener-
gy Systems. Inc.. Ellenville, N.Y., Attorney or Agent:
Charies J. Brown, Ex. Gp.: 340, Requester: Environ-
mental Resources, Inc., Las Vegas, Nev.
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Government-Owned Inventions
Notice of Availability for Licensing
The inventions listed below are owned by agencies of
the U.S. Government and are available for licensing in
the U.S. in accordance with 35 U.S.C. 207 to achieve ex-
peditious commercialization of results of federally funded
research and development. Foreign patents are filed on
selected inventions to extend market coverage for U.S.
companies and may also be available for licensing.
Technical and licensing information on specific inven-
tions may be obtained by writing to:
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
U.S. Department of Commerce
P.O. Box 1423
Springfield, Va. 22151
CONDUCTING ELEMENTS HAVING EX-
TENDED STRAIN OPERATING RANGE CAPA-
BILITIES WITHOUT CRITICAL CURRENT
DEGRADATION.
Department of Health and Human Services
SN 6-302,557 (4,386,093). (±) 3-DEAZARRISTER-
OMYCIN AND USES.
Department of the Interior
SN 6-293,027 (4,385,998). REMOVAL OF SUSPEND-
ED SOLIDS FROM WATER.
Department of the Navy
SN 5-895,828 (4,376,302). PIEZOELECTRIC POLY-
MER HYDROPHONE.
SN 6-101,362 (4,347,593). PIEZOCERAMIC TUBU-
LAR ELEMENT WITH ZERO END
DISPLACEMENT.
SN 6-214,601 (4,380,022). MONOLITHIC FULLY IN-
TEGRATED CLASS B PUSH-PULL MICRO-
WAVE GaAs MESFET WITH DIFFERENTIAL
INPUTS AND OUTPUTS WITH REDUCED
MILLER EFFECT.
SN 6-314,327 (4,374,665). MAGNETOSTRICTIVE
DEVICES.
Please cite the number and title of inventions of inter-
est.
AUXILIARY TORQUE
VIBRATING SEPARA-
GEORGE KUDRAVETZ,
Program Manager,
Office of Government Inventions and Patents
National Technical Information Service
U.S. Department of Commerce.
li)EPARTMENT OF AGRICULTURE
SN 6-238,401 (4,381,023).
BACK-UP ROLL.
SN 6-290,542 (4,385,702).
TOR.
Department of the Air Force
SN 6-441,814. HELMET MOUNTED TELESCOPE.
SN 6-482,377. TWO-DIMENSIONAL BULK ACOUS-
TIC WAVE CORRELATOR-CONVOLVER.
SN 6-486,477. OPTICAL DISC TRANSPORT SYS-
TEM.
SN 6-486,598. FLEXIBLE LINE SUPPORT ASSEM-
BLY
SN 6-487,340. CLOCK DISTRIBUTION CIRCUIT
FOR ACTIVE APERTURE ANTENNA ARRAY.
SN 6-488,900. ROBOTIC KITTING.
SN 6-492,862. HIGH PERFORMANCE LIQUID
CHROMATOGRAPHY (HPLC) ANALYSIS OF
SULFUR MUSTARDS AND THEIR DECOMPO-
SITION BY-PRODUCTS BY DERIVATIZATION.
Department of the Army
SN 6-328,766 (4,376,663). METHOD FOR GROWING
AN EPITAXIAL LAYER OF CDTE ON AN EPI-
TAXIAL LAYER OF HGCDTE GROWN ON A
CDTE SUBSTRATE.
SN 6-478,385. CONTOURED CONFIGURATED
DETONATING CORD AND DETONATOR.
Department of Commerce
SN 6-192,129 (4,386,233). CRYTOGRAPHIC KEY
NOTARIZATION METHODS AND APPARA-
TUS
SN 6-465,942. METHOD AND APPARATUS UTI-
LIZING CRYSTALLINE COMPOUND SUPER-
Patents Available for License or Sale
3,620,043. SPLINE-TYPE PIVOTS, UNIVERSAL
JOINTS AND FEXIBLE COUPLINGS. James A.
Oliff Esq.. Parkhurst & Oliff, 277 So. Washington St. ,
Alexandria, Va. 22314, (703) 836-6400.
3,374,022. COMBINATION CANE AND PICKUP
STICK. Howard L. Tagg. 17 Hawk Lane, Levittown,
N.Y., 11756.
3,798,374. SOUND REPRODUCING SYSTEM UTI-
LIZING MOTIONAL FEEDBACK. Stanley Thayer
Meyers, Ml N. Riverside Ave. Red Bank, NY.
3.832,965. SUBMERSIBLE TRANSPORT APPARA-
TUS. Paul J. Walker. P.O. Box 2769, Nipawm
Saskatchewanss Canada SOE lEO.
3,961,865. CONVERSION BRACKET FOR WELL
PUMP. Vernon E. Spaulding. R #3 Box 149, Vine
Grove, Ky. 40175.
4,136,764. MOTHER ALICES BREAD VENDING
MACHINE. Alice Johnson, 8650 Belford Ave #1,
Los Angeles, Calif. 90045.
4,302,883. EXACTO-MAC. Exacto-Mac Limited Part-
nership % Thompson, Weir & Barclay, P.O. Box
2044, New Haven, Conn. 06521.
4,368.391. "HYDRAULIC PROCESS AND APPARA-
TUS FOR THE RECOVERY OF ELECTRICAL
ENERGY FOR USE IN MOTOR TEST STA-
TIONS. Olivier Hellouin deMenibus. Please contact:
Neil F. Greenblum, Esq. Sandler & Greenblum 701
South 23rd St., Arlington, Va. 22202. (703) 521-7800.
The following U.S. patents are available for license by
the inventor: Harold J Weber, P.O. Box 315, Sherbom,
Mass. 01770.
4.150,497. MANUAL GEARSHIFT AND
CLUTCH TRAINING APPARATUS
INCLUDING SENSORY INDICATION
FOR MOST FAVORABLE OPERA-
TOR CONTROL.
4.300,650. MULTILEVEL POWER ASSISTED
STEERING.
4.346.766. DRILL CRADLE WITH ELONGATED
SLIDE TRACK. Salzgitter Maschinen Und Anlagen
Aktiengesellschaft Salzgitter, Germany. Correspon-
dence to: Michael J Striker, 360 Lexington Ave,
New York, N.Y. 10017.
1032 OG 32
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,321,844. KRILL BRAKE ADJUSTING TOOL. Olga
Krill, correspondence to: Andrea M. Krill, 1750 Wal-
ton Rd., Whitpain Office Campus, Blue Bell, Pa.
19422.
4,357,137. SHAFT COUPLING. James A. Oliff, Esq.,
Parkhurst & Oliff, 277 So. Washington St., Alexan-
dria, Va. 22314. (703) 836-6400.
4,364,411. LIQUID LINE THERMAL BARRIER.
Payton et aL Beach & Brown, 3107 Eastlake Ave.
East, Seattle, Wash. 98102.
4,364,703. ROTARY PARKING STRUCTURE FOR
PASSENGER CARS. Yang-Kaung Pai. Taipei, Tai-
wan. Contact Holman & Stem, 2401 Fifteenth St., N.
W., Washington, D.C. 20009, (202) 483-2234.
4,374,425. A SINGLE ACTUATOR ELECTRONIC
MINICOMPUTER. Dr. Louis R. Fuka, 2073 North
Rd., Los Alamos, N. Mex. 87544.
The inventions listed below owned by applicant Allan
Westerlund and Licensee Harald Soderlund, are avail-
able for licensing.
4,227,727. "DOORCATCH".
4,357,038. "DOORCATCH".
Please contact James M Slattery of Birch, Stewart,
Kolasch & Birch at (203) 241-1300.
The General Electric Co. is prepared to grant non-ex-
clusive licenses under the following patents upon reason-
able terms to domestic manufacturers.
Applications for license may by addressed to Patent
Counsel, Gas Turbine Division, General Electric Co., 1
River Rd., Bldg. 500, Room 218, Schenectady, N.Y.
12345.
4,350,473. LIQUID COOLED COUNTER FLOW
TURBINE BUCKET.
4,326,373. INTEGRATED GAS TURBINE POW-
ER GENERATION SYSTEM AND
PROCESS.
Application for license may be addressed to the Gen-
eral Electric Co., Division Patent Counsel Housewares
and Audio Business Division, 1285 Boston Ave., Bridge-
port, Conn. 06602.
4,370,070. DIGITAL THERMOMETER HAVING
FAHRENHEIT AND CELSIUS READ-
OUT MODES.
4,375,701. BATTERY OR AC DRIVEN RADIO
RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY.
Applications for license may be addressed to: Patent
Counsel, Mobile Radio Products Department General
Electric Co., Mountain View Rd., Lynchburg, Va. 24502.
4.350,972. MULTIPLE CONSOLE CONTROL
SYSTEM.
4.284.907. CHARGE TRANSFER FILTER.
4.284.908. CHARGE DOMAIN FILTER WITH
SINGLE TRANSMISSION ZERO.
4.284.909. CHARGE DOMAIN FILTER WITH A
PLURALITY OF TRANSMISSION
ZEROS.
Application for license may be addressed to the Gen-
eral Electric Co., Division Patent Counsel, Housewares
and Audio Business Division, 1285 Boston Ave., Bridge-
port, Conn. 06602.
4,347,464. FET MOTOR DRIVE SYSTEM.
4,355,692. THICK FILM RESISTOR FORCE
TRANSDUCERS AND WEIGHING
SCALES.
Application for license may be addressed to: General
Electric Co., Component Motor Division 1635. Broad-
way, P.O. Box 2204, Fort Wayne, Ind. 46801-2204, At-
tention: Patent Counsel.
4,323,217. MOTOR MOUNTING ASSEMBLY IN-
CLUDING EXTENDABLE BAND.
4,327,481. METHOD OF ASSENiBLING AN
ELECTRICAL DEVICE.
4,341,987. TWO-SPEED SINGLE PHASE MO-
TOR WITH CENTRIFUGAL SWITCH.
Application for license may be addressed to the Gen-
eral Electric Co., Division Patent Counsel, Housewares
and Audio Business Division, 1285 Boston Ave., Bridge-
port, Conn. 06602.
4,370,070. DIGITAL THERMOMETER HAVING
FAHRENHEIT AND CELSIUS READ-
OUT MODES.
4,375,701. BATTERY OR AC DRIVEN RADIO
RECEIVER POWER SUPPLY.
Applications for license may be addressed to: General
Electric Co., Component Products Group, 1635 Broad-
way, P.O. Box 2204, Fort Wayne, Ind. 46801-2204, At-
tention: Patent Counsel.
4,110,632. DEVICE, METHOD AND SYSTEM
FOR CONTROLLING THE SUPPLY
OF POWER TO AN ELECTRICAL
LOAD.
4,227,103. APPARATUS FOR INSULATING AN
INTERNAL MOTOR CONNECTION.
4,237,508. ELECTRICAL CONTROL.
4,247,978. METHODS OF MAKING SLOT LIN-
ERS AND STATOR ASSEMBLIES IN-
CLUDING SAME.
4,355,250. SELF-ALIGNING BEARING ASSEM-
BLY.
4,360,847. DIODE ASSISTED RELAY CONTAC-
TOR.
Otis Engineering Corporation is prepared to grant
nonexclusive licenses under the following patents upon
reasonable terms. These patents relate generally to
Through Flow Line (TFL) or Pumpdown completion
and equipment used in oil and gas wells. Address inquiries
to Patent Attorney, Otis Engineering Corp., P.O. Box
34380, Dallas, Tex. 75234, Telephone (214) 323-3882.
3,543,852. WELL TOOLS.
3,568,770. LATCH DEVICE FOR SUPPORTING
WELL TOOLS IN A FLOW CONDUC-
TOR.
3,603, 1 10. WELL TOOLS.
3,608,631. APPARATUS FOR PUMPING TOOLS
INTO AND OUT OF A WELL.
3,610,336. LANDING NIPPLE WITH LOCATOR
AND ORIENTING MEANS.
3,637,012. WELL FLOW CIRCULATING METH-
ODS.
3,642,069. JAR STROKE ACCELERATOR FOR
PUMPDOWN WELL TOOL.
3,654,995. FLUID CIRCULATING METHOD
AND SYSTEM FOR WELLS.
3,664,427. WELL FLOW CONTROLLING SYS-
TEMS, METHODS AND APPARATUS.
3,666,012. WELL CROSS-OVER APPARATUS
FOR SELECTIVE COMMUNICATION
OF FLOW PASSAGES IN A WELL IN-
STALLATION.
3,680,637. WELL TOOLS AND METHODS OF
OPERATING A WELL.
3,739,850. CROSS OVER ASSEMBLY. —
Deposit Account Authorizations
The rules of practice were amended effective Oct. 1,
1982, at 37 CFR 1.25(b) to state that: "A general autho-
rization to charge all fees, or only certain fees, set forth
in §§1.16 to 1.18 to a deposit account may be filed in an
individual application, either for the entire pendency of
the application or with respect to a particular paper
July 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1032 OG 33
filed " A general authorization would not apply to docu-
ment supply fees under §1.19, such as those required for
certified copies; to post-issuance fees under §1.20, such
as those required for maintenance fees; or to miscella-
neous fees and charges under §1.21, such as assignment
recording fees.
Many applications filed prior to Oct. 1, 1982, contain
broad language authorizing any additional fees which
might have been due to be charged to a deposit account.
The Patent and Trademark Office does not interpret
such broad authorizations, filed prior to Oct. 1, 1982, to
include authorization to charge to a deposit account the
issue fee or other fees in sections 1.16, 1.17 and 1.18 ex-
cept those associated with the paper containing the
broad authorization. However, such a broad authoriza-
tion filed in an application on or after Oct. 1, 1982, will
be interpreted as authorization to charge the issue fee; as
well as any other fee set forth in §§1.16, 1.17 or 1.18.
Fees under sections 1.19, 1.20 and 1.21 will not be
charged as a result of a general authorization under sec-
tion 1.25. . r
It is recommended that authorizations to charge tees
to deposit accounts include reference to the particular
fees or fee sections of the rules which applicant intends
to authorize. For example, if filing and processing fees
under §§1.16 and 1.17 only are intended to be mcludwl
in the authorization, and not the issue fee under §1.18,
the authorization could read: "The Commissioner is
hereby authorized to charge any fees under 37 CFR 1.16
and 1.17 which may be required during the entire pen-
dency of the application to Deposit Account No.
" Such an authorization would clearly exclude
issue fees under 37 CFR 1.18 while including all the fil-
ing and processing fees listed in 37 CFR 1.16 and 1.17.
Similariy, if it were intended to authorize the charging
of fees relating only to a specific paper, the authoriza-
tion could read "The Commissioner is hereby authorized
to charge any fees under 37 CFR 1.16 and 1.17 which
may be required by this paper to Deposit Account No.
" Such authorizations would cover situations in
which a check to cover a filing and processing fee under
37 CFR 1.16 and 1.17 was omitted or was for an amount
less than the amount required.
It is extremely important that the authonzation be
clear and unambiguous. If applicants file authonzations
which are ambiguous and which deviate from the usual
forms of authorizations, the Office may not interpret the
authorizations in the manner applicants intend. In such
cases applicants could be subject to further expenses, pe-
titions, etc. in order to correct fees which were not
charged as intended due to an ambiguous authorization.
GERALD J. MOSSINGHOFF,
July 1 1983 Commissioner of Patents
' ' and Trademarks.
1032 CXj 34
Service Item
FY 1983
Performance Goal
Filing Receipts:
Patents
22
Trademarks
30
Patent Copies:
Window Coupons
Mail Coupons
Letter Orders
5
29
34
Certified Copies:
Trademark Registrations
Applications-As-Filed
File-Wrapper/Contents
Walk-up Certification
30
20
N/A
1
Trademark Search Library:
Filing Drawings
21
Filing Reg. Certificates
3
Assignments:
Patents
25
Trademarks
25
Avg. Days from Issue Fee
Payment to Issue Date 90-100
Patent Official Gazette:
In Bookstore Issue Date
Mailed Issue Date
Patent Grants Mailed Issue Date
Patent Copies Available Issue Date
Trademark Official Gazette:
In Bookstore Issue Date
Mailed Issue Date
Trademark Regs. Mailed Issue Date
IMPROVEMENTS TO SERVICES
• Pre- Examination Processing — A major milestone in
reaching 18 month pendency has been met. The pre-
examination backlog inventory goal of 9,100 cases
was met on schedule in June. This represents mailing
receipts to applicants within an average of 22 days
and making cases available to the Patent Examining
Corps within 30 calendar days. The pre-examination
backlog was over 30,000 cases in Feb. 1982, when it
was taking 100 days to mail filing receipts and 124
days to get the applications to the Examining Corps.
The inventory now is the lowest level it has been
since 1978.
• New Microfilm Reader/ Printers — Two new Minolta
505 reader/printers were installed to replace old
equipment with U.S. Patent microfilm. This equip-
ment produces high quality bond paper output. The
response from the public has been very positive. We
iL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
fKIO Services
;s as of June 30, 1983:
Actual
Comment
22
75
Reduced by 13 days
in June.
99% within 5 days
100% within 22 days
100% within 15 days
.
13
91% within 10 days
95% within 20 days
99% within 1 day
49
15
25 /
17
Reduced by 5 days
in June
100
On Schedule
•
Avg. 1 day late
-
Avg. 1 day late
-
99%
On Schedule
On Schedule
On Schedule
plan to replace 14 more of the current reader/
printers with Minolta's.
Reconstruction of Files — In the past, when patent ap-
plication files need to be reconstructed due to loss of
the original file, applicants have been requested to
resubmit a copy of the entire file. A new procedure
has been implemented, whereby only papers submit-
ted after the original application need to be
resubmitted. A copy of the application-as-filed will
be obtained from the PTO's microfilm copy. This
will alleviate some of the burden im[>osed on the
public when it is necessary for the Office to recon-
struct a file.
June 30, 1983.
THERESA A. BRELSFORD,
Assistant Commissioner
for Administration.
PATENT NOTICES
Certificates of Correction for the Week of July 26, 1983
PP. 05,051
D. 251,401
D. 268,218
D. 268,458
D. 265,889
4,017,290
4,021,253
4,041,714
4,053,638
4,173,668
4,238,349
4,261,989
4,285,840
4,293,501
4,293,727
4,300,144
4,300,553
4,304,169
4,330,362
4,330,387
4,333,363
4,334,246
4,336,207
4,336,693
4,336,746
4,343,597
4,349,579
4,349,721
4,350,145
4,350,774
4,354,541
4,355,140
4,356,332
4,356,342
4,358,376
4,360,871
4,361,515
4,362,820
4,363,691
4,363,716
4,365,389
4,365,508
4,366,026
4,366,244
4,366,506
4,366,842
4,366,887
4,370,01 1
4,370,469
4,370,624
4,370,695
4,370,704
4,371.932
4,372,765
4,372,971
4,373,273
4,373,997
4,374,137
4,374,222
4,374,527
4,374,752
4,375,141
4,375,722
4,376,069
4,376,284
4,376,662
4,377,453
4,377,465
4,377,605
4,378,223
4,378,271
4,378,362
4,378,830
4,379,171
4,379,338
4,380,348
4,380,670
4,380,849
4,381,271
4,381,450
4,382,133
4,382,361
4,382,412
4,382,717
4,382,807
4,383,162
4,383,422
4,383,979
4,384,274
4,384,601
4,384,614
4,384,844
4,385,542
4.385,964
Disclaimers
Des. No. 264,516. — Michel Joseph. Saverne, France.
BATHING SUIT. Patent dated May 25, 1982. Dis-
claimer filed May 19, 1983, by the assignee, Adidas
Fabrique de Chaussures de Sport.
The term of this patent subsequent to Nov. 17, 1995,
has been disclaimed.
3,830,764.— Z)o«flW E. Hudgin, Princeton Junction and
Thomas Zawadzki, Princeton, N.J. DEGRADABLE
HYDROCARBON POLYMERS. Patent dated Aug.
20, 1974. Disclaimer filed June 10, 1983, by the as-
signee, Princeton Polymer Laboratories, Inc.
Hereby enters this disclaimer to claims 5, 6, 15, 17, 18
and 19 of said patent.
4,322,666.— Rolf Muller. St. Georgen, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many. BRUSHLESS, PERMANENT MAGNET
DC PULSE CURRENT CONTROLLED, ES-
SENTIALLY UNIFORM TORQUE DYNAMO
ELECTRIC MACHINE PARTICULARLY MO-
TOR. Patent dated Mar. 30, 1982. Disclaimer filed
July 14, 1982, by the assignee, Papst Motoren GmbH
& Co., KG.
The term of this patent subsequent to July 8, 1997, has
been disclaimed.
1032 OG 35
Reference Collections of U.S. Patents Available for Public Use in
Patent Depository Libraries
The libraries listed herein, designated as patent deposi- table following, the collections are organized in patent
tory libraries, receive current issues of U.S. Patents and number sequence.
maintain collections of earlier issued patents. The scope Depending upon the library, the patents may be avail-
of these collections varies from library to library, rang- able in microfilm, in bound volumes of paper copies, or
ing from patents of only recent months or years in some in some combination of both. Facilities for making paper
libraries to all or most of the patents issued since 1870, copies from either microfilm in reader-printers or from
or earlier, in other libraries. the bound volumes in paper-to-paper copies are general-
These patent collections are open to public use and ly provided for a fee.
each of the patent depository libraries, in addition, offers Owing to variations in the scope of patent collections
the publications of the patent classification system (e.g. among the patent depository libraries and in their hours
The Manual of Classification, Index to the U.S. Patent of service to the public, anyone contemplating use of the
Classification, Classification Definitions, etc.) and pro- patents at a particular library is advised to contact that
vides technical staff assistance in their use to aid the library, in advance, about its collection and hours, so as
public in gaining effective access to information con- to avert possible inconvenience,
tained in patents. With one exception, as noted in the
State Name of Library Telephone Contact
Alabama Birmingham Public Library (205) 254-2555
Arizona Tempe: Science Library, Arizona State University (602) 965-7607
California Los Angeles Public Library (213) 626-7555 Ext. 273
Sacramento: California State Library (916) 322-4572
Sunnyvale: Patent Information Clearinghouse* (408) 738-5580
Colorado Denver Public Library (303) 571-2122
Delaware Newark: University of Delaware (302) 738-2238
Georgia Atlanta: Price Gilbert Memorial Library, Georgia Institute of
Technology (404) 894-4508
Illinois Chicago Public Library (312) 269-2865
Louisiana ' Baton Rouge: Troy H. Middleton Library, Louisiana State
University (504) 388-2570
Massachusetts Boston Public Library (617) 536-5400 Ext. 265
Michigan Detroit Public Library (313) 833-1450
Minnesota Minneapolis Public Library & Information Center (612) 372-6552
Missouri Kansas City: Linda Hall Library (816) 363-4600
St. Louis Public Library (314) 241-2288 Ext. 214,
Ext. 215
Nebraska Lincoln: University of Nebraska-Lincoln, Engineering Library . . (402) 472-341 1
New Hampshire Durham: University of New Hampshire Library (603) 862-1777
New Jersey Newark Public Library (201) 733-7814
New York Albany: New York State Library (518) 474-5125
Buffalo and Erie County Public Library (716) 856-7525 Ext. 267
New York Public Library (The Research Libraries) (212) 930-0850
North Carolina Raleigh: D. H. Hill Library, N.C. State University (919) 737-3280
Ohio Cincinnati & Hamilton County, Public Library of (513) 369-6936
Cleveland Public Library (216) 623-2870
Columbus: Ohio State University Libraries (614) 422-6286
Toledo/Lucas County Public Library (419) 255-7055 Ext. 212 '
Oklahoma Stillwater: Oklahoma State University Library (405) 624-6546
Pennsylvania Philadelphia: Franklin Institute Library (215) 448-1321**
Pittsburgh: Carnegie Library of Pittsburgh (412) 622-3138
University Park: Pattee Library, Pennsylvania State University . . (814) 865-4861
Rhode Island Providence Public Library (401) 521-7722 Ext. 226
South Carolina Charleston: Medical University of South Carolina (803) 792-2372
Tennessee Memphis & Shelby County Public Library and Information
Center (901) 528-2957
Texas Dallas Public Library (214) 749-4176
Houston: The Fondren Library, Rice University (713) 527-8101 Ext. 2587
Washington Seattle: Engineering Library, University of Washington (206) 543-0740
Wisconsin Madison: Kurt F. Wendt Engineering Library, University of
Wisconsin (608) 262-6845
Milwaukee Public Library (414) 278-3043
All of the above-listed libraries offer CASSIS (Classification And Search Support Information System), which
provides direct, on-line access to Patent and Trademark Office data.
'Collection organized by subject matter.
••Call only between the hours of 10:00 a.m. and 5«) p.m.
1032 OG 36
PATENT EXAMINING CORPS
RENE D. TEGTMEYER, Assistant Commissioner
WILLIAM FELDMAN, Deputy Assistant Commissioner
CONDITION OF PATENT APPLICATIONS AS OF April 2, 1983
PATENT EXAMINING GROUPS
Actual
Filing Date
of Oldest
New Case
Awaiting
Action
CHEMICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
GENERAL CHEMISTRY AND PETROLEUM CHEMISTRY, GROUP 1 10-D. E. TALBERT, Director • •
Inorgtnic Com^unJs; Inorganic Compositions; Organo-Metal and Organo-Metalloid Chen,|s,ry Metallurgy Me aN
lurgical Apparatus; Metal Stock; Electro Chemistry; Battenes; Hydrocarbons; Mineral Oil Technology; Lubncating
Compositions; Gaseous Compositions; Fuel and Igniting Devices.
r.FNFRAI ORGANIC CHEMISTRY, GROUP 120— C. E. VAN HORN, Director •
H^r^y?!^ AmiiS; Alka^^^^^^ Sulfur; Misc. Esters; Carbohydrates; Herbicides; Poisons; Medicines; Cosmetics;
Steroids- Oxo and Oxv Ouinones; Acids; Carboxylic Acid Esters; Acid Anhydrides; Acid Halides.
HIGH POLYMER CHEMISTRY PLASTICS AND MOLDING. GROUP 140-J. O. THOMAS. JR., Director .
Synthetic Resins; Rubber; Proteins; Macromolecular Carbohydrates; Mixed Synthetic Resin Compositions. Synthetic
Resins With Natural Polymers and Resins; Reclaiming; Pore-Forming; Compositions (Part) e.g.. Coating; Molding,
Ink- Prosthdontics; Adhesive and Abrading Compositions; Molding. Shaping. Treating Process, and Apparatus
Therefor; Irradiation (Part); Bleaching; Dyeing; Leather. Fur and Je''V'^Tl^A"ol,r°?l^^'"°"*
COATING LAMINATING AND PHOTOGRAPHY. GROUP 160-S. N ZAHARNA. Director ...
Coating Processes. Apparatus and Misc. Products; Laminating Methods and Apparatus; Stock Matenals; Adhesive
Rondini?- Soecial Chemical Manufactures; Special Utility Compositions; and Photography.
SPEC?rLIZED cSeMIcJl IND^^^^^^ CHEMICAL ENGINEERING, GROUP 170-
FertiHze^;"FlSsfFlmentation; Analyticai Chemistry;' Reactors; Sugar and Starch;' Paper' Making; Gl^s Manufac-
ture; Gas; Heating and Illuminating; Cleaning Processes; Liquid Purification; Distillation. Preserving; Liquid Ga^^
and Solid Separation; Gas and Liquid Contact Apparatus; Refngeration; Concentrative Evaporators; Mineral Oils
Apparatus; Misc. Physical Processes.
ELECTRICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
INDUSTRIAL ELECTRONICS. PHYSICS AND RELATED ELEMENTS. GROUP 210-S. W ENGLE Director
Generation and UtiliS Applications; Conversion and Distribution; Heating and Related Art Conductors;
Switches; Photography; Motion Pictures; Horology; Acoustics; Recorders; Weighing Scales.
SPECIAL LAWS ADMINISTRATION. GROUP 220-KENNETH L. CAGE. Director ; ^ . _
Ordnance Firerrmrand Ammunition; Lubrication; Illumination; Nuclear Reactors; Acoustics, CommunicatK)ns Op-
tics Radar D™Jt?onal Radio; Tor^does; Seismic Exploring; Cathode Ray Tube Circuitry; Cryptography; Laser
DeCiS R^actlle Mat^^^ PoN^der Metallurgy. R^ket Fuels; Special. Fuel. Explosive and Thermic Composi-
INFORMaSSTtRANSM^^^^^^ and retrieval group 230-EARL levy. Directo-^^ .^„.
Communications; Multiplexing Techniques; Television; Facsimile; Data Processing, Computation and Conversion.
Storage Devices and Related Arts. ^„^. ,„,../»
RECEPTACLES, CLEANING, WINDING, AND MEASURING, GROUP 240-
1-16-81
11-20-81
3-1-82
3-09-82
1-12-82
5-22-81
3-30-81
1-05-81
5-12-81
8-25-80
1-30-81
RSemacTSLariS^' ?oint Packing; Conduits; Switches; Presses; Plumbing Fixtures; Textile Spinning; Cleaning;
pSd T?eating Agi^^^^^ Separa ing; Geometrical Instruments; Sound Recording; Image Projecors;
SS^FeSing^'winSng fnd Reelini; Cable Hoists; Measuring and Testing; Indicating; Fluent Material Handling;
ELECTRJiiFcOMp'gSt'NT^^Y^T^^^^ AND DEVICES. GROUP 250-S. S. MATTHEWS Director .
SmSucTor and Space Discharge Systems and Devices; Electronic Component Circuits; Wave Transmission
Lines and Networks; Optics; Radiant Energy; Measuring.
DESIGN, GROUP 290— KENNETH L. CAGE, Director
Industrial Arts; Household. Personal and Fine Arts.
MECHANICAL EXAMINING GROUPS
HANDLING AND TRANSPORTING MEDIA, GROUP 310— B. R. GRAY. Director . . . .^ rn 'a c^i^n
Seyo^rSsts; Elevators; Article Handling Implements; Store Service; Sheet Feeding DispenMng; FHuid Spnn-
kling Fire Extinguishers; Coin Handling; Check Controlled Apparatus; Classifying and Assorting Solids Boats,
sffi; Aemnautici; Motor and Land VeWcles and Appurter^nces; Brakes RajUvays and Railway Eq^
MATFHIAI SHAPING ARTICLE MANUFACTURING. TOOLS. GROUP 320— STEPHEN G^ KUNIN, Director
Sftc^un"^ PrcS;s« A^^^^^ Machines. Special Article Making; Metal Deforming; Sheet Metal
^^d W Je Workmg Mml ?usion.Bonding. Metal Founding; Machine Tools for Shaping o/pD'-d'ng Work and
Tool Holders, Wo^working; Tools; Cutlery J^^ks F.sh.ng. Etc; Butchen^^^ r Rot^ 33 J^
AMUSEMENT. HUSBANDRY. PERSONAL TREATMENT. INFORMATION, GROUP 330- ^^^ ^^
S- 18-81
7-27-81
AmuL1m°an?ExerciSJrDevices; Projectors;' Animal and Plant Husbandry; Plants; Harvesting; Earth Working and
?xcaSgTToS;Trt!hcial l^y Members; Dentistry; Jewelry; Surgery; Toiletry; Pnnt.ng; Typewnters; Infor-
11-17-80
HEAT POWER AND FLUID ENGINEERING, GROUP 340-D. J. STOCKING, Director . „• , p„„
Power Pl^U Combustion Engines; Fluid Motors; Reaction Motors; Pumps; Rotary Engines and Pumps; Heat Gener-
adon and^ Exchange; RefrigeTatioA; Ventilation; Drying; Temperature and Humidity Regulation; Couplings; Geanng.
FHuid Handling and Control; Lubrication. ^„^,,n ,,«
GENERAL CONSTRUCTIONS. TEXTILES, MINING AND GEARING. GROUP 350- ^^^^
Bu1ldL^Sr«fRa?ks;' Cabinets! Closures; Supports; Furniture; Fasteners; Locks; Pipe C^MW^^ J£^^ Miscd-
laneois Hardware; Textiles; Sewing Machines; Apparel; Footwear; Earth Engineenng; Earth Drilling. Mining.
Wells; Roads; Bridges; Tool Driving; Gearing; Machine Elements; Clutches.
sions of 35 U.S.C. 151. Numbers 3,243.822 to 3,248.737. inclusive
Patents Numbers 2,616 to 2,627 inclusive
Plant Patents
1032 OG 37
REEXAMINATIONS
JULY 26, 1983
Matter enclosed m heavy brackets C ] appears in the patent but forms no part of this reexammat,on speciHcation; matter printed in
'^ iulics indicates additions made by reexammation.
814,228,528 (110th)
MEMORY WITH REDUNDANT ROWS AND
COLUMNS
Ronald P. Cenker, Coptay; Frank J. Procyk, Center VaUey,
both of Pa., assignors to BeU Telephone Laboratories,
Incorporated, Murray HUl, N.J. ., ^ , , ,^,
Reexamination Request No. 90/000,153, Feb. 3, 1982.
Reexamination Certificate for Patent No. 4,228,528, Oct.
14, 1980, Ser. No. 10,739, Feb. 9, 1979.
U.S. a. 365/200 Int.a.3GllC/i/00
AS A RESULT OF REEXAMINATION, IT HAS
BEEN DETERMINED THAT:
Claims l-«, having been finally determined to be unpa-
tentable, are cancelled.
New Claims 7-10 are added and determined to be pa-
tentable.
7. A semiconductor memory comprising a semiconductor
chip in which the memory cells are arranged m row and
column lines, each with its own decoder, and m which some
of the lines form the standard memory array andinwhicn
some of the Unes are initially spares to be available for
substitution for lines of the standard array which include
defective cells CHARACTERIZED IN THAT each of the
decoders associated with a standard line comprises a parallel
group of address decoding transistors, one for each digit of
the address to be decoded, a drive transistor whose gate is
supplied by said parallel group and whose output is connect-
ed to the associated standard line conductor, and a fusible
link between the output of the drive transistor and the
associated line conductor, and in which the decoder associat-
ed with each spare line comprises a plurality of decoding
transistor pairs for the true and the complement of eaeh-
digit of the address to be decoded, each decoding transistor
I
COLUMDECOOEIIS
SPMES
ISA
KCOEIIS
^
ISA'
SMRES
SPME
COLIMJiS
SPAK ROWS
y
being connected between a point of reference potential and
the decode node, a drive transistor whose gate is connected
to the decode node, an associated spare line conductor, ana
a plurality of fusible links, a separete one between each
decoding transistor and the decode node.
1032 OG 39
REISSUES
JULY 26, 1983
Matter enclosed in heavy brackets £ ] appears in the original patent but forms no part of this reissue specification; matter printed in italics
indicates additions made by reissue.
Re. 31,320 whereby said water collects heat from said panel at useful
^ELF-REGULATING HEATER temperatures, said means for maintaining said stream of
Alfred Hoser, Eitensheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Audi NSU Auto Union Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Original No. 4^2,999, dated Jan. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 774,988,
Mar. 7, 1977. Application for reissue Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. v^
247,516
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 1,
1976, 2629610
Int. a.3 F02M 31/00
U.S. a. 123—549 10 Claims
7. A fuel entry system of an internal combustion engine, com-
prising a carburetor having a barrel through which fuel and air are
adapted to pass, an intake manifold connected to said barrel and
having a bent configuration to provide a wall substantially at right
angle and opposite to said barrel, a stove disposed in said wall and
offset with respect to said barrel, said stove comprising at least one
self-regulating heater element having a steeply sloped positive
temperature coefficient of resistivity, means to electrically connect
the element to a power supply so that shortly after energization
thereof the element is maintained at a preselected temperature
whereby fuel droplets coming in contact with the stove will be
vaporized to enhance start-up of the engine, said stove having a top
plate in heat transfer relationship with said element, said top plate
having a surface which faces the interior of said intake manifold
and is flush with the inner surface of said wall and is provided with
a multiplicity of heat conducting rods projecting from said surface
into said intake manifold.
water in substantially uniform contact with said lower surface
of said panel comprises a mat of wettabale fibrous material.
Re. 31,321
SOLAR HEATING SYSTEM
Henry Harrison, deceased, late of Locust Valley, N.Y. (by Do-
rothy D. Harrison, administratrix), assignor to Halm Indus-
tries Co. Inc., Glen Head, N.Y.
Original No. 4,237,863, dated Dec. 9, 1980, Ser. No. 817,335,
Jul. 20, 1977. Continuation of Ser. No. 677,265, Apr. 15, 1976,
abandoned. Application for reissue Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No.
227,510
Int. a.5 F24J 3/02
U.S. a. 126—422 10 Claims
10. A solar heating system having at least one roof mounted
panel for collecting heat from the sun, said panel having an
upper sunlight-absorbing surface [at least one translucent
cover mounted above the panel to protect it from the
weather,] said panel having a lower surface of heat transfer to
a stream of water, means for mounting said panel to form a
passage for said stream of water, wettable mat means in said
passage connected to said panel for maintaining said stream
of water in substantially uniform contact witl\ said lower
surface of said panel, insulated tank means connected for
receiving and storing said stream of water, and means for
controlling said stream of water under said panel in response
to the temperature of said panel and said water in said tank.
Re. 31,322
PROCESS FOR PRODUQNG SULFUR-CURABLE
ACRYLIC RUBBERS
Tetsu Ohishi, Tokyo; Kohichi Handa, Kamakura, and Hanio
Ueno, Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Nippon Zeon Co. Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Original No. 4,228,265, dated Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 24,476,
Mar. 27, 1979. Application for reissue Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No.
304,788
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1978, 53-35050;
Mar. 28, 1978, 53-35885
Int. a.3 C08F 220/40
U.S. CI. 526-230 W Claims
1. A process for producing a sulfur-curable acrylic rubber,
which comprises copolymerizing in the presence of a radical
initiator
(1) 90 to 99.5% by weight of at least one alkyl acrylate with
the alkyl group containing 1 to 8 carbon atoms, and
(2) 0.5 to 10% by weight of at least one monomer of the
general formula
o M
CH2«CRi-C-0-CH2-CH=C
R3
wherein Ri represents a hydrogen atom or a methyl group, and
R2 and R3, independently from each other, represent an alkyl
group containing 1 to 3 carbon atoms.
1303
1304
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
Re. 31,323
PREPARATION OF WATER-INSOLUBLE
CARBOXYMETHYL CELLULOSE ABSORBENTS
Herman L. Marder, Sommerville; Nathan D. Field, WyckofT,
both of N.J., and Makoto Shinohara, Crystal Lake, 111., as-
signors to International Playtex, Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Original No. 4,200,737, dated Apr. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 906,724,
May 17, 1978. Application for reissue Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No.
369,726
Int. a.' C08B 11/20
U.S. a. 536—87 7 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of substantially water-
insoluble, particulate carboxymethyl cellulose, which com-
prises treating a solid, water-soluble particulate sodium car-
boxymethyl cellulose having a degree of substitution of at least
0.4 with hydrogen chloride gas, and heating the carboxy-
methyl cellulose [at temperatures in excess of 100" C.J to
convert the same to a partially acid form, cross-linked and
substantially insolubilized material exhibiting a swell ratio of
from 5 to 50.
Re. 31,324
FLUORINE CONTAINING ORGANOSILICON
COMPOUNDS
David Apotheker, deceased, late of Wilmington, Del. (by Bank of
Delaware, executor), assignor to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours
and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Original No. 4,308,393, dated Dec. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 195,094,
Oct. 8, 1980. Application for reissue Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No.
367,756
Int. a? C07F 7/08. 7/18
U.S. a. 556—445 4 Claims
1. A fluorine-containing organosilicon compound made by
the addition to an organosilicon compound having at least one
alkyl group attached to a silicon atom, at least one hydrogen
atom being bonded to the carbon atom adjacent the silicon
atom, of a fluorocompound selected from the class consisting
of the following:
(A) fluoroolefins having one of the following formulas (1),
(2). and (3):
CF2=C
CF2=:C
F
>
R'/
(1)
(2)
(3)
CCF2)m
F F
\ /
F OR"/
1(5)1 (4)
where
Each R/ independently is a Ci-Cg saturated perfluoroalkyl;
R'/is Br or R/,
R"/is R/or a radical obtained by removing one fluorine atom
from a perfluoroalkyl ether; and
m in formula (3) is an integer of 2 to 12.
Re. 31,325
STEPPING AC LINE VOLTAGE REGULATOR
Roland L. Crapo, Bristol, Conn., assignor to The Superior Elec-
tric Company, Bristol, Conn.
Original No. 4,178,539, dated Dec. 11, 1979, Ser. No. 930,763,
Aug. 3, 1978. Application for reissue Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No.
326,580
Int. a.3 G05F 1/30
U.S. a. 323—263 15 Qaims
^V
iiiiiiii
l7o' ITt ITe >T«
V*
\
[(B) ketones having the following formula (4): J
t*/.
\
(4)
R/
/
C=0;
and
(C) ethers having the following formula [(S)J (4)
1. A stepping voltage regulator comprising a pair of input
terminals connectable to a source of AC power, a pair of
output terminals connectable to a load, a pair of lines connect-
ing the two pair of terminals, a transformer having a secondary
winding connected in series in one line and having at least four
primary windings, a first primary winding being connected
[through a first switch] in a first series circuit from one line
through a first switch to the other line, a second primary wind-
ing being connected [through a second switch J in a second
series circuit from said one line through a second switch to the
other line, a third primary winding having one end connected
through a third switch to the [end of] first series circuit be-
tween the first winding and the first switch, a fourth primary
winding having one end connected through a fourth switch to
the [end of] second series circuit between the second winding
and the second switch , said one end of the third winding and said
one end of the fourth [windings J winding having a common
junction, a fifth switch connected between the other end of the
third winding and the other line, a sixth switch connected
between the other end of the fourth winding and the other line,
[each of said windings having the same number of turns,]
said first and third windings when energized inducing one
direction of correcting voltage in the secondary winding and
said second and fourth windings inducing the opposite direc-
tion of correcting voltage, switch control means for providing
a selected conduction state [of only one of either] among
plural conduction states of said switches including at least (a ) the
first switch only, [or] (*) only the third and fifth switches
simultaneously, [or] (c) only the fifth and sixth switches si-
multaneously, [or] (d) only the fourth and sixth switches
simultaneously [or] and (e) the second switch only, and
July 26, 1983
U.S. PATENT AND TRADEMARK OFFICE
1305
detector means for sensing the value of the output voltage and
providing a correcting signal to the switch control means to
cause the switch control means to change to a different con-
duction state when the value of the output voltage exceeds a
selected range of values.
shifted chrominance signal in said color television signal is
cancelled; and
g. means for mixing the output of said first separating means
with the output of said adding means wherein a standard
color television signal is obtained as the output of said mixing
means.
Re. 31,326
SIGNAL TRANSLATING APPARATUS FOR COMPOSITE
SIGNAL SUBJECT TO JITTER
John G. Amery, Quincy, 111., and Robert W. Jorgenson, Pasco,
Wash., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Original No. 3,872,497, dated Mar. 18, 1975, Ser. No. 351,036,
Apr. 13, 1973. Application for reissue Mar. 18, 1977, Ser. No.
779,009 1 1
1 1 Int. a.5 H04N 9/12
U.S. a. 358—322 16 Qaims
INPUT
coHPOsn
SIGNiU.
IMIRIEO
SUBC
FORMAT)
Re. 31,327
PROPORTIONAL DIGITAL CONTROL FOR RADIO
FREQUENCY SYNTHESIZERS
Max E. Peterson, Richardson, Tex., assignor to Rockwell Inter-
national Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Original No. 3,665,323, dated May 23, 1972, Ser. No. 141,895,
May 10, 1971. Application for reissue Jun. 18, 1979, Ser. No.
49 868
Int. a.i H03J 5/04. 5/00; H03K 21/30
U.S. a. 455—157 12 Oaims
OUTPUT
COHPOSITE
SIGUL
^,HTSC FORMT)
•loEurf-— jT^^
80
16. A video processing system comprising:
a. a source of a color television signal of the form obtained by
colorplexing a frequency shifted chrominance signal shifted
to a lower frequency band with a luminance signal by using
frequency interlacement;
b. an extracting means for extracting a signal in the lower
frequency shifted chrominance signal band from said color
television signal and providing the extracted signal at its
output;
c. a first frequency conversion means having an output terminal
for frequency converting the extracted signal in the lower
frequency shifted chrominance signal band into a first signal
in the chrominance signal band of a standard color television
signal;
d. a first separating means connected to the output terminal of
said first frequency conversion means for separating the
chrominance signal from said first signal, said first separating
means including a first comb filter including a oneline delay
element and providing the separated chrominance signal at
its output;
e. a second frequency conversion means for frequency converting
the chrominance signal separated by said first separating
means to the frequency band of said lower frequency shifted
chrominance signal band;
f. an adding means for adding the output of said second fre-
quency conversion means to said color television signal in
opposite phase to each other so that only the lower frequency
1. In a proportional digital control system using binary
coded decimal control for tuning radio frequency synthesizers:
a switching signal control source with reference signal pulse
output means t<l fof" producing a reference signal pulse wave-
form and an up-down count signal pulse means for producing an
up-down count pulse waveform, with a change in count deter-
mined by said reference signal pulse waveform and the count
direction, whether up or down [count], determined by phase
relation of said up-down count signal pulse waveform to [the
signal pulses of] said reference signal pulse [output means]
waveform, and means for shifting [signal pulse] the phase of
said up-down count signal [means] pulse waveform relative to
[the] said reference signal [pulses] pulse waveform; a circuit
chain of a plurality of up-down counter to binary coded deci-
mal output circuit units connected to receive directly from said
switching signal control source only the two said reference signal
[pulses] and the phase shiftable up-down count signal
[pulses] pulse waveforms, and with carry over interconnect
between adjacent digit locations of said up-down counter
circuit units; a frequency synthesizer with a BCD input fre-
quency selector control circuit connected to the BCD output
of said up-down counter circuit units; and a plurality of digit
display devices with BCD signal input circuit means con-
nected individually to receive the BCD output signals of the
individual up-down counter circuit units of the respective digit
locations.
PLANT PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 26, 1983
Illustrations for plant patents are usually in color and therefore it is not practicable to reproduce the drawing.
5,073
ALMOND TREE ("MESA")
Leonard D. Jiitles, 4017 Tully Rd., Modesto, Calif. 95356
Filed Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,845
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/03
U.S. a. Pit.— 30 1 aaim
1. A new and distinct variety of almond tree, substantially as
illustrated and described, particularly characterized by a
bloom-time two or three days earlier than the Mission and
substantially the same as the Nonpareil, and by a harvest per-
iod about two weeks earlier than the Mission.
5,075
WILTON PYRAMIDAL HYBRID YEW TREE
Dirk van Heiningen, 6850 Carlisle Rd., Dover, Pa. 17315
Filed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,085
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 50 1 aaim
1. A new and distinct variety of hybrid Yew substantially as
herein shown and described, characterized particularly by it's
novel shape and unique color and extent of foliage.
5,074
PLUM TREE (AP-3)
Alvin Peters, 41736 Road 62, Reedley, Calif. 93654
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,454
Int. CI.3 AOIH 5/03
U.S. a. Pit.— 38 1 aaim
1. A new and distinct variety of plum tree, substantially as
illustrated and described, which — while otherwise most simi-
lar to the Laroda in tree and fruit characteristics — bears fruit
which ripens about six to seven weeks later than the fruit of the
Laroda.
5,076
CHRYSANTHEMUM NAMED HREBRAND (FP6.143-BS)
Leonard H. Shoesmith, Westfield- Woking, England, assignor to
Pan American Plant Company, Parrish, Fla.
Filed Oct. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 312,887
Int. a.3 AOIH 5/00
U.S. a. Pit.— 74 1 aaim
1. A new and distinct sp)Oon-tipped chrysanthemum, sub-
stantially as herein shown and described, particularly charac-
terized by the bronze coloration of its ray florets and its florif-
erous and vigorous growth habit.
1307
PATENTS
GRANTED JUL. 26, 1983
ERRATA
For See
CLASS PATENT NO.
604-067 4,394,862
604-090 4,394,863
384-092 : 4,395,076
525-351 4,395,501
377-0 1 5 4,395 ,624
382-041 4,395,697
382-027 4,395,698
382-041 4,395,699
382-027 4,395,700
PATENTS
GRANTED JULY 26. 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
4,394,781
SWIMSUIT
Otto Axmann, kheinitrasse 50, 1000 Berlin 41, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,600
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 19,
1981, 3111280
Int. C1.3 A41D 5/00. 9/00; A41C i/02
U.S. a. 2—67 6 Qaims
n
YZIL
IZZI
' " !
,
1. A swimsuit comprising a fabric covered, elastic, air-pene-
trable form insert including a longitudinal rib having a plural-
ity of transverse ribs secured thereto, said insert having the
shape of a substantially U-shaped clamp having two shanks, a
front shank which serves to resiliently engage the pubic bone
of the wearer and a rear shank of which serves to resiliently
engage the coccyx of the wearer.
4,394,782
MULTI PURPOSE HEAD SWEATBAND
John J. Wasson, P.O. Box 5667, 6329 Masonic Dr., Alexandria,
La. 71301
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,205
Int. a.3 A42B 5/0O
U.S. a. 2— 181 7aaim8
1. A head sweatband for a person to wear comprising
a cloth member for wrapping around the person's head, the
cloth member having two sides, a top, a bottom, a mid-
portion and two end portions, a front surface and a rear
surface and
a peak formed integrally of the top of the cloth member
and
two flaps, one formed integrally of each of the side por-
tions of the cloth member at the bottom thereof, and
securing means connected to the cloth member for securing
the head sweatband on the wearer's head.
a top cushion;
a bottom cushion;
a first connector made of soft flexible material and having
one end flxedly connected to the top of the base cushion
and the other end attached to the top cushion;
a second connector made of soft flexible material and having
one end flxedly connected to the bottom of the base cush-
ion and the other end attached to the bottom cushion;
means for adjusting the length of the flrst and second con-
nector for varying the separation between the top cushion
r < ,10
and the base cushion and between the bottom cushion and
the base cushion; and
a pair of body straps each having a flrst end flxedly attached,
in a spaced apart relationship to one another, to the top of
the base cushion and each having a second end flxedly
attached, in a spaced apart relationship to one another, to
the bottom of the base cushion wherein the body straps
are adapted for attachment around the shoulders of a
person for securing the body cushion to the back of said
person.
4,394,784
AIR BED WITH nRMNESS CONTROL
Gerald R. Swenson; Emil S. Swenson, both of Coon Rapids, and
Gary A. Young, Bumsville, all of Minn., assignors to Dial-A-
Firm International, Inc., Bumsville, Minn.
Filed Jul. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 281,368
Int. a.3 A47C 27/10
U.S. a. 5—453 27 Claims
4,394,783
BODY CUSHION
Elizabeth J. Simmons, 18 Norton Rd., Broad Brook, Conn.
06016
FUed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,702
Int. a.3 A47G 9/00
U^. a. 5— 432 13 Claims
1. A body cushion comprising: • wi j
a base cushion having a generally trapezoidal shape with a 1. An air bed system having firmness control of an air blad-
top, a bottom substantially parallel to the top, a front der confined within a mattress, comprising
section, a back section and nonparallel sides; (a) an air blower having an intake to atmospheric air and
1309
1310
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
having an exhaust to attnospheric air, and having a pres-
surized air outlet;
(b) an air line connected to said pressurized air outlet and
connected to said air bladder;
(c) an air valve interposed in said air line for selectively
opening and closing air flow therethrough;
(d) means for actuating said air valve for opening air flow
through said air line and for energizing said air blower;
and
(e) means for actuating said air valve for opening air flow
through said air line and for deenergizing said air blower.
4^94,785
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING SOLDERING IRON BITS
Franz Vogler, Niederrohrdorf, Switzerland, assignor to Elvo
Elektronik AG, Niederrohrdorf, Switzerland
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,777
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 6, 1981,
1524/81
Int. a.3 A46B 13/02
MS. a. 15—21 D 16 Qaims
3 7b 8
4 18a 5 6
7 7b
1. An apparatus for mechanically cleaning hot solderi|ig iron
bits contaminated with contaminants, such as tin oxides and
soldering residues, comprising:
at least two cooperating oppositely situated, counter-rotat-
ing cleaning bodies for cleaning a soldering iron bit of
contaminants;
each of said cleaning bodies having a lengthwise extending
axis;
means for mounting said two cleaning bodies such that the
distance between said lengthwise extending axes is less
than the mean diameter of said cleaning bodies, so that
said cleaning bodies are continuously in mutual contact
with one another at least at portions of their circumfer-
ence; and
means for rotatably driving said counter-rotating cleaning
bodies at different rotational speeds, whereby said mutu-
ally contacting ]X>rtions of said cleaning bodies exert a
kneading action upon one another and thus a self-cleaning
action upon one another, to thereby ensure that during
cleaning of a contaminated soldering iron bit essentially
only non-contaminated portions of said counter-rotating
cleaning bodies come into contact with said contaminated
soldering iron bit.
4,394,786
APPARATUS FOR CLEANING AND SCALE DUST
REMOVAL FROM STEEL ROD AFTER MECHANICAL
DESCALING
Stanley L. Station, Richfield, and William H. Johns, Stow, both
of Ohio, aMignore to Wire Lab Company, Richfield, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 152,354, May 22, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 356,482
Int a.3 A47L 5/38
\5S. a. 15—306 A 5 Claims
1. A waterless particle removing apparatus for removing
scale particles from a carbon steel strand, the apparatus com-
prising:
a housing which deflnes an entrance opening, an exit open-
ing, and a central chamber disposed in alignment along a
central axis such that the strand is adapted to be moved
linearly along the central axis through the entrance open-
ing, the central chamber, and the exit opening;
a compressed air manifold for supplying air under pressure;
a tubular entrance nozzle having an entrance nozzle passage
and a plurality of entrance air jet oriflces, the entrance
nozzle being disposed in the entrance opening with the
entrance nozzle passage in alignment with the central axis,
the entrance air jet orifices being disposed in fluid commu-
nication between the air manifold and the nozzle passage
and being directed toward the central chamber in such a
manner that a venturi effect is created drawing air from
exterior of the housing, through the entrance nozzle pas-
sage where it mixes with scale particles freed from the
steel strand, and into the central chamber, whereby the
venturi effect prevents scale particles from escaping
through the entrance nozzle passage to the exterior of the
housing;
a tubular exit nozzle having an exit nozzle passage and a
plurality of exit air jet oriflces, the exit nozzle being dis-
posed in the exit opening with the exit nozzle passage in
t alignment with the central axis, the exit air jet oriflces
being disposed in fluid communication between the air
manifold and the exit nozzle passage and being directed
toward the central chamber in such a manner that a ven-
turi effect is created drawing air through the exit nozzle
passage where it mixes with scale particles freed from the
steel strand and into the central chamber, whereby the
venturi effect prevents scale particles from escaping
through the exit nozzle passage to the exterior of the
housing; and,
a scale particle Altering device operatively connected with
the central chamber for allowing scale particle free air to
be returned to the exterior of the housing and collecting
scale particles therein.
4,394,787
HYDRAUUC DOOR CLOSER CONSTRUCTION
Sidney Lieberman, Lancaster, Pa., assignor to Donna Door
Controls Inc., Reamstown, Pa.
FUed Jul. 27. 1978, Ser. No. 928,403
Int. a.J E05F 3/14
U.S. a. 16—58 5 Claims
1. For use in hydraulic door closer apparatus of the type
comprising a housing having a cylinder therein, a piston dis-
posed in said cylinder, rotary output shaft means joumalled in
said housing, and means mechanically interconnecting said
piston and said output shaft for transmitting forces to and from
said piston and said output shaft, a fluid seal for said output
July 26, 19
tf
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1311
shaft comprising a cylindrical surface on said shaft adjacent to
an end thereof, and an elongated annular chamber surrounding
a portion of said surface and having a pair of axially spaced end
walls, and a pair of O-ring members disposed side-by-side in
diameter of said internal surface whereby said collar can
be retained by said shoulder on said trunnion pin.
434,789
TOOTHED EDGING MEANS FOR TEXTILE
MACHINERY
Josef Egerer, Schwabach, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Staedtler A Uhl, Schwabach, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,398
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 27,
1980,3007245
Int. a.3 DOIG 15/84
U.S. a. 19—97 8 Qaims
said chamber, the axial dimension of said chamber being
greater than the combined axial dimension of said O-ring mem-
bers, so that said O-ring members can adjust themselves axially
within said chamber.
4,394,788
RATCHET BEARING FOR SHUTTER SLATS AND THE
UKE
Henry G. Kohler, and Emeric L. M^Jor, both of San Diego,
Calif., assignors to Shutter Mart of California, Inc., San
Diego, Calif.
Filed Jul. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 173,571
Int. a.J E05D 11/08
U.S. a. 16—334 3 Qaims
■i—-.:::
'SO
::^:?
1. A ratchet bearing for rotationally mounting a flrst mem-
ber relative to a second member and creating a plurality of
detent stops throughout at least a portion of the course of
relative rotational motion therebetween, said bearing compris-
mg
(a) -a trunnion pin element having one end engageable in a
first member and a projection portion defining a generally
cylindrical surface;
(b) a bearing collar element with an internal surface at least
in part engaged on said cylindrical surface and having
means to engage said bearing element in a second member;
(c) said surfaces each defining unitary high and low portions
when angularly traversed and at least one of said surfaces
being at least in part biased against the other of said sur-
faces, whereby mutual rotation of said two elements about
the axis of said generally cylindrical surface causes succes-
sive detention of one element relative to the other ele-
ment; [
(d) one of said surfaces, defining a multiplicity of consecu-
tive longitudinal ribs of the other of said surfaces defines a
plurality of detents engaging between consecutive adja-
cent pairs of said ribs as said elements are mutually rotated
causing successive detention of one element relative to the
other; and
(e) said trunnion pin has at the end thereof opposite said
engageable end a tapered tip expanding to a circular
shoulder adjacent said cylindrical surface said shoulder
being of diameter greater than that of the smallest inside
n u
1. Toothed edging apparatus for mounting on a rotatable
support element of a textile machine comprising tooth seg-
ments each having a plurality of teeth elements arranged gen-
erally along an arc, each of said segments being formed as a
stamped sheet metal element, each of said segments having a
foot portion from which said teeth elements extend, mounting
means mounting said foot portion on said rotatable support
element of said textile machine, said mounting means compris-
ing a dovetail male element on said support element of said
textile machine and a mating dovetail female groove in said
foot portion, said dovetail male element having a longitudinal
axis extending parallel to the axis of rotation of said rotatable
support element, said tooth segments being insertable on said
suppori element by being slid longitudinally along the axis of
said support element as said male and female dovetail elements
are engaged, and fastening means detachably fastening said
dovetail male element on said support element of said textile
machine, said dovetail male element having a radial inner face
having a partial cylindrical surface, said support element of
said textile machine also having at least a partial cylindrical
surface corresponding to the cylindrical surface of said dove-
tail male element, said fastening means comprising threaded
element extending between said dovetail male element and said
support element to thereby threadedly connect said dovetail
male element to said support element as said cylindrical surface
of said dovetail male element engages said corresponding
cylindrical surface of said support element.
4,394,790
nBER FEEDING APPARATUS WITH CONTROLLED
AIRFLOW
Alex J. Keller, Qo?er, S.C, and Akira Pinto, Gastonia, N.C.,
assignors to Automatic Material Handling, Inc., Bessemer
Qty, N.C.
Filed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 336,016
Int a? DOIE 15/40
MS. Q. 19—105 10 Claims
10. Apparatus for feeding fibers to textile processing equip-
ment such as a carding machine, said apparatus including:
(a) an axially extending ojjening roller;
(b) a substantially enclosed fiber collecting chute means
extending generally downwardly beneath said opening
roller to receive fibers therefrom, said chute means includ-
ing a generally vertically extending wall having an upper
portion formed with perforations and having a lower
portion arranged for oscillating movement for densifying
1312
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
the fiber in said chute means during movement in one
direction; and
(c) a closed compartment adjacent said chute means and
separated therefrom by at least a portion of said perforated
said fulcrum means and the free ends of said handles with
the free ends of the spring engaging the handles at the
juncture thereof with the jaws and being adatped to hold
said fulcrum means together and to urge said jaws closed,
whereby said tubes are adapted to grippingly engage a bag
along the full width of said jaws.
4,394,792
BUCKLE FOR A SAFETY BELT
Yves Schmidt, Audincourt, France, assignor to Aciers et Outil-
lage Peugeot, Audincourt, France
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,249
Qaims priority, application France, May 14, 1980, 80 108277
Int. a.3 A44B 11/25
U.S. a. 24—230 A 10 Claims
44
wall portion and by said oscillating wall portion, whereby
movement of said oscillating wall portion in the other
direction thereof will cause air to be forced into said chute
means through said ^rforated wall portion.
4,394,791
CLOSURE CLAMP FOR FOOD BAGS
Francis R. Groth, 12561 Glenfield, Detroit, Mich. 48213
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,128
Int. C\? B65D 77/10
U.S. a. 24—30.5 R 5 Claims
1. A clamp for closing food bags and the like comprising,
a pair of clamp members,
each clamp member including a bar-like jaw which is wide
relative to its depth and a bar-like handle which is long
relative to its width,
each of said jaws defining a channel extending the width
thereof, a tube of pliable material coextensive with said
channel and seated in said channel with a circumferential
portion thereof extending outside the channel,
each of said handles extending transversely from said jaw
and terminating in a free end with a fulcrum means on the
handle,
said jaws being of equal length and said handles being of
equal length,
said clamp members being disposed with the fulcrum means
of one clamp member in pivotal engagement with the
fulcrum means of the other clamp member with said jaws,
tubes and handles respectively opposite each other,
said fulcrum means and said tubes holding the jaws and
handles in spaced relation with clearance space between
the jaws throughout the depth thereof to receive the end
of a bag,
and a torsion spring having a torsion rod disposed between
1. In a safety belt buckle for attaching a portion of a safety
belt to retaining means by means of a tongue member forming
a latch which is fixed to said portion of the safety belt to be
attached, said buckle comprising a support for fixing to the
retaining means and defining a rectilinear passage in which the
latch may be inserted and which defines a sliding plane for the
latch, locking means for locking the latch which are mounted
on the support to pivot about an axis which extends in a direc-
tion parallel to the plane of the passage and which define at
least a first abutment surface for retaining the latch and extend-
ing in a direction perpendicular to the plane of the passage and
transversely in the passage in a locked position of the buckle,
stop means, means for mounting the stop means on the support
so that the stop means are movable in translation in the support
in a direction perpendicular to said pivot axis of the locking
means, the stop means being cooperative with the locking
means for stopping the locking means from releasing the latch
in one position of the stop means and releasing the locking
means in another position of the stop means when opening the
buckle, the locking means defining at least a second abutment
surface for coming in contact with the stop means in said
locked position of the buckle, an operating knob for opening
the buckle and mounted relative to the support so as to be
movable in the same direction as the stop means, the buckle
further comprising return springs for respectively acting on
the stop means and the locking means and the operating knob;
the improvement wherein said stop means comprise a body
which is in a single piece and defines guiding and maintaining
means for said springs, said guiding and maintaining means
extending from opposite sides of said body in a direction per-
pendicular to said pivot axis of the locking means, and said
means for mounting the stop means on the support comprise
two opposed slide portions of said body which extend in direc-
tions transverse to said direction in which the stop means are
movable in the support, and two opposed openings defined by
the support, into which openings said slide portions respec-
tively extend, each of said openings having a first part for
guidingly engaging said slide portions in operation of the
buckle and a second part for allowing engagement of said slide
portions in said openings when initially assembling the buckle.
July 26, 19W
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1313
4,394,793
ROLL FOR USE IN CALENDERS OR THE LIKE
Josef Pav, and Erhard Miinch, both of Krefeld, Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Kleinewefers GmbH, Krefeld, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Hied Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 269,986
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 14,
1980, 3022491
Int. a.3 B21B 13/14. 29/00
U.S. a. 29—116 AD 22 Qaims
1. A roll, particularly for use in calenders or like machines,
comprising an elongated carrier; a hollow cylindrical rotary
shell spacedly surrounding said carrier and having a cylindri-
cal internal surface; bearing elements forming a row extending
in parallelism with the axis of said shell and being interposed
between said shell and said carrier in the interior of said shell,
each of said bearing elements having a convex surface adjacent
to said internal surface and each of said convex surfaces having
a plurality of pockets; and a plurality of fluid-operated pressure
generating devices interposed between each of said bearing
elements and said carrier to urge the convex surfaces of said
bearing elements toward said internal surface, each of said
pressure generating devices defining a plenum chamber for
pressurized fluid and each of said bearing elements having
means for admitting pressurized fluid into the respective pock-
ets from more than one plenum chamber, the pressure generat-
ing devices of each of said pluralities forming a row, as consid-
ered in the circumferential direction of said shell.
said punch having a working portion proportioned to cooper-
ate with said die to cut a ribbon from said sheets, to displace
said ribbon to one side of said sheet into said cavity and to
deform said ribbon to increased width to prevent separation of
said sheets, said cavity being shaped with increasing dimen-
sions in one longitudinal direction to allow release of said
ribbon from said cavity by relative longitudinal movement in
said one direction.
13. A method of connecting a plurality of sheets comprising
positioning said sheets in face-to-face contact adjacent to an
elongated die cavity having side walls which diverge as they
extend from the cavity entrance to a back wall said walls being
fixed against relative movement, shearing superposed ribbon
portions from each sheet into said cavity, moving said portions
to one side of said sheets to form an opening in said sheets and
to position said ix>rtions in said die cavity against said back
wall, deforming said portion within said die cavity to a size
preventing return movement thereof through said opening,
releasing said deformed f)ortions from said die cavity by rela-
tive movement therebetween in a direction lengthwise thereof,
and forming said die cavity with increased cross section in said
one direction lengthwise thereof so that longitudinal move-
ment in said one direction causes an immediate release of
substantial frictional contact between said portions and the
walls of said cavity.
4,394,795
CONNECTOR INSERTION TOOL
Ralph R. Goss, Hershey, Pa., assignor to AMP Incorporated,
Harrisburg, Pa.
Filed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263,377
Int. a.3 H05K 3/30
U.S. a. 29—739 1 Claim
1 1 4,394,794
METAL FASTENING SYSTEM AND METHOD
Richard Shirey, Avon, Ohio, assignor to Donn Incorporated,
Westlake, Ohio
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,385
Int. a.3 B23P 7//0ft 17/00
U.S. a. 29—432 15 Qaims
(""^^c^
r^
^33
1. A die set for fastening two or more sheets of metal or the
like together comprising a die and a mating punch, said die
providing an elongated die cavity having a pair of opposed
cutting edges at the entrance of said cavity, said cutting edges
being contained within a single plane, said cavity being defined
at least in part by opposed side walls and a back wall, said
cavity having a lateral width back from said cutting edges
greater than the spacing of said cutting edges, said cutting
edges and cavity walls being fixed against relative movement,
1. A tool for mounting a connector having depending
contact pins into a printed circuit board, said tool comprising:
a. a housing having a slot extending longitudinally there-
through and two spaced apart rows of a plurality of
spaced apart apertures extending vertically from above
the slot to the underside of the housing with the apertures
intersecting the slot;
b. a plurality of channel-shaped push pins having an arcuate-
shaped notch adjacent an upper end and positioned in the
apertures with the lower ends extending below the hous-
ing for insertion into a connector to engage contacts
therein; and
c. a bar having rounded edges positioned in the slot and
passing through the arcuate-shaped notches in the push
pins to retain the pins in the apertures and further to
permit the pins to pivot laterally.
1314
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^94,796
VEGETATION STEM CUTTING APPARATUS
Brian A. Winer, P.O. Box 13 • Gallo Mannor, Johannesburg
2052, South Africa
^ FUed Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,043
Int a.3 AOIG i/00
U.S. a. 30—178 - . 8 Claims
1. Vegetation stem cutting apparatus comprising
(a) elongated tongs which are interconnected at a pivot,
(b) a table carried by one tong proximate the end thereof,
(c) and a thin knife carried by the other tong to close toward
the table when the tongs are pivoted to cut the stem
placed on the table,
(d) the knife extending at a substantial angle relative to a
normal to the table when the knife edge is closed into
proximity to the table,
(e) the thin knife defining a first plane, and the table surface
defines a second plane, said planes intersecting non-per-
pendicularly when the knife edge is closed into proximity
to the table, the direction of relative closing of the thin
knife toward the table surface being angularity offset at an
angle /3 from a perpendicular to said surface,
(f) and a shallow groove in said surface to receive only an
edge portion defined by the blade.
4,394,797
COVER FOR A RIFLE SIGHT
Ronald D. Schuster, P.O. Box 92, Qaremont, Minn. 55924
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,583
Int. a.3 F41G 1/04
U.S. a. 33—244 1 Oalm
1. One piece cover for a barrel-mounted gun sight for allow-
ing the gun to be slipped into and out of a gun case without the
gun sight tearing the inside of the gun case comprising, in
combination: a substantially hollow elongated body open at the
bottom including: a first lowermost wall portion arcuately
formed transversely of the elongated body having a first end, a
second end, a top edge, and a bottom edge; a second lowermost
wall portion arcuately formed transversely of the elongated
body having a first end, a second end, a top edge and a bottom
edge; a first flat upper elongated sidewall portion having a
bottom edge integrally formed with the top edge of the first
lowermost wall portion, a top edge, a first end, and a second
end, with the distance between the first end and the second end
of the first fiat upper elongated sidewall portion being less than
the distance between the first end and the second end of the
first lowermost wall portion; a second flat upper elongated
sidewall portion having a bottom edge integrally formed with
the top edge of the second lowermost wall portion, a top edge,
a first end, and a second end, with the distance between the
first end and the second end of the second fiat upper elongated
sidewall portion being less than the distance between the first
end and the second end of the second lowermost wall portion;
a first forward wall portion having a top edge, a bottom edge,
a first end, and a second end, with the bottom edge of the first
forward wall portion being attached to the top edge of the first
flat upper elongated sidewall portion and disposed angularly
inwardly of the vertical axis of the elongated body, with the
distance between the first end and the second end of the first
forward wall portion being generally equal to the distance
between the first end and the second end of the first flat upper
elongated sidewall portion; a second forward wall portion
having a top edge, a bottom edge, a first end, and a second end,
with the bottom edge of the second forward wall portion being
attached to the top edge of the second flat upper elongated
sidewall portion and disposed angularly inwardly of the verti-
cal axis of the elongated body, with the distance between the
first end and the second end of the second forward wall por-
tion being generally equal to the distance between the first end
and the second end of the second flat upper elongated sidewall
portion, with the top edge of the first forward wall portion
being attached to the top edge of the second forward wall
portion; a first end wall, with the first ends of the first flat
upper elongated sidewall portion, the second flat upper elon-
gated sidewall portion, the first forward wall portion, and the
second flat forward wall portion being attached to the first end
wall along an arcuate jxjrtion; a top portion having a first end,
a second end, a first edge, and a second edge, with the first
edge being attached to the top edge of the first lowermost wall
portion, with the second edge of the top portion being attached
to the top edge of the second lowermost wall portion, with the
first end of the top portion being generally co-planar with the
second ends of the first and second lowermost wall portions; a
second end wall having an arcuate shape, with the second ends
of the first flat upper elongated sidewall portion, the second
flat upper elongated sidewall portion, the first forward wall
portion, the second forward wall portion, and the top portion
being attached to the second end wall; a first notch formed in
the first lowermost wall portion between the first and second
ends of the top portion; a second notch formed in the second
lowermost wadl portion between the first and second ends of
the top portion, with the first and second lowermost wall
portions being spaced for clamping engagement of the gun
barrel, with the first and second notches allowing positioning
on a ring formed on the gun barrel and for prohibiting the
elongated body from sliding on the gun barrel.
4,394,798
WHEEL ALIGNMENT MEASURING APPARATUS
Osmond Beissbarth, Sulzbacher Str. 15, 8000 Miinchen 40, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
FUed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,126
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 12,
1980, 3022073
Int. a.5 GOIB 7/il5
U.S. a. 33—335 19 Claims
1. A wheel alignment measuring apparatus for a vehicle
having a nearside front wheel and an offside front wheel, said
apparatus being operable to produce, in one operation, read-
JULY 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1315
ings for the steering difference angle, the caster and the king
pin angles, said apparatus comprising,
a first angle measuring instrument including means for pro-
viding a first output signal representative of the steering
angle of the nearside front wheel,
a second angle measuring instrument including means for
providing a second output signal representative of the
steering angle of the offside front wheel,
a third angle measuring instrument including means for
providing a third output signal representative of the incli-
nation of the nearside front wheel in a plane of motion
which is substantially normal to the length direction of the
vehicle when the wheels are in a straight ahead position,
a fourth angle measuring instrument including means for
providing a fourth output signal representative of the
inclination of the offside front wheel in a plane of motion
which is substantially normal to the length direction of the
vehicle when the wheels are in a straight ahead position,
a fifth angle measuring instrument including means for pro-
viding a fifth output signal representative of the inclina-
tion of the nearside front wheel in a plane of motion which
is substantially parallel to the length direction of the vehi-
cle when the wheels are in a straight ahead position,
a sixth angle measuring instrument including means for
providing a sixth output signal representative of the incli-
4,394,799
CONDUIT BENDING PLANE INDICATOR
Elwood D. Moree, Rte. 1, Vienna, Ga. 31092, and Dennis C.
Snowden, 740M Muckalee Creek Rd., Leesburg, Ga. 31763
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 298,205
Int. a.3 GOIC 9/00
U.S. a. 33—343 9 Qaims
23-
10-
1. An apparatus for insuring coplanar bends in conduit,
comprising:
a base member;
fastening means attached to said base member for rigidly
fastening said base member to a section of conduit to be
bent;
first plane indicating means attached to said base member for
providing an indication that a bend in the conduit is sub-
stantially planar in a first plane;
second plane indicating means attached to said base member
for providing an indication that a bend in the conduit is
substantially planar in a second plane orthogonal to said
first plane;
gravity sensitive angle indicating means attached to said base
member for providing an indication of the angle of a bend
in the conduit; and
detachable attachment means for detachably attaching said
angle indicating means to said base member and allowing
said angle indicating means to rotate on said base member.
nation of the offside front wheel in a plane of motion
which is substantially parallel to the length direction of
the vehicle when the wheels are in a straight ahead posi-
tion,
a signal pr<x:essing means for receiving said output signals
and performing the following functions:
(a) calculating the steering difference angle from the out-
put signals of the first and second angle measuring
instruments;
(b) calculating the caster of the nearside front wheel from
changes which occur in the output signals of the first
and third angle measuring instruments as a result of
steering motion of the nearside front wheel;
(c) calculating the caster of the offside front wheel from
changes which occur in the output signals of the second
and fourth angle measuring instruments as a result of
steering motion of the offside front wheel,
(d) calculating the king pin angles of the nearside front
wheel from changes which occur in the output signals
of the first and fifth angle measuring instruments as a
result of steering motion of the nearside front wheel;
(e) calculating the king pin angles of the offside front
wheel from changes which occur in the output signals
of the second and sixth angle measuring instruments as
a result of steering motion of the offside front wheel.
4,394,800
GUIDE CLAMP
Norman Griset, 380 Jennifer La., Orange, Calif, 92669
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 326,840
Int. a.' B43L li/02
U.S. a. 33—443 17 Claims
1. A guide clamp adapted to grip a workpiece between
opposing jaw faces, comprising:
(a) a bar having guideway means along the reach thereof;
(b) a clamp jaw at one end of the bar having a jaw face
facing towards the bar and a lever means adapted to be
actuated to exert a pull in a direction away from the bar;
(c) a shifting jaw carried on the guideway means, having a
jaw face facing the clamp jaw and being shiftable along
the bar to space the jaw faces to embrace a workpiece
between them;
1316
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
(d) a pull rod extended alongside the bar with one end being
attached to the lever means to be pulled thereby; and,
(e) a lock means at the shifting jaw connecting with the pull
rod to normally slide along the pull rod as the shifting jaw
is moved along the bar but to lock onto the pull rod when
a workpiece is embraced by the jaws whereby actuation of
the lever means to pull the rod moves the jaws together to
grip the workpiece.
4,394,801
MULTIFUNCTION, MULTIPURPOSE CONSTRUCTION
TOOL
Francis Thibodeaux, Rte. 1, Box 125, Krotz Springs, La. 70750
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,998
Int. a.3 B43L 7/06
U.S. a. 33—496 8 Oaims
1. In apparatus characterized as a multifunction, multipur-
pose tool for use in the construction trades, which includes in
combination
a pair of operating arms having rounded terminal ends, the
arms being pivotally connected via an axis through said
rounded terminal ends one to the other,
an angle indicator provided at the pivotal connection for
reading the angular relationship between said pair of arms,
the improvement comprising,
on a Tirst arm
an angular scale of indicia marks located on the outer
surface of the outermost rounded end of said arm out-
board of the pivotal axis through which said pair of
arms are adjoined,
a pair of alternately disposed abuttments located at the
extremities defming the rounded end of said arm, the
abuttments further defming the beginning and end of
said scale of angular component values, and
on the second arm
a stop located on an outer edge of the rounded terminal
end of said arm movable in unison therewith for index-
ing the scale of angular values between the alternately
disposed abuttments.
4,394,802
COUNTER-CONVECTION VAPOR CONTROL SYSTEM
Donald J. Spigarelli, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to The HTC
Corporation, Concord, Mass.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,141
Int. a.J F26B i/04
U.S. a. 34—27 17 Claims
1. For use in a vapor phase processing system having a vessel
having top walls containing a vapor in a processing vapor zone
and a central opening in the vessel top walls by which a work
product is introduced into and removed from the processing
vapor zone and through which the vapor in the processing
vapor zone tends to upwardly flow by convection, a counter-
convection vapor flow system comprising:
a structure disposed in association with the vessel and hav-
ing one or more first surfaces for forming a vertically
oriented central channel in the vessel in communication
with said opening and having one or more second surfaces
for forming with said top walls a peripheral space in the
vessel substantially not in communication with said open-
ing; and
means associated with said structure for providing a temper-
ature differential in the vessel to cause a flow of the vapor
in the vessel which is upward in the peripheral space and
downward in the central channel, said downward flow
providing a counter-convection flow which opposes the
upward flow of vapor from the processing vapor zone
toward the vessel opening.
4,394,803
ELASTiaZED OVERLAY
Samuel A. Goldstein, Newtown Square, Pa., assignor to Polsam,
Inc., Newtown Square, Pa.
Filed Jun. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 272,284
Int. a.3 A43B 11/ 00; A43C 7/06
U.S. a. 36— 51 12 Claims
1. In a shoe having an upper of the blucher construction type
adapted to be secured to the foot of the wearer by a shoe lace,
the combination of
a modified blucher construction, said modified blucher con-
struction having no lacing openings therethrough, the
blucher construction defining a longitudinal blucher open-
ing therebetween;
a blucher overlay assembly means affixed to the blucher
construction and defining an overlay opening in registry
above the blucher opening,
said blucher overlay assembly means comprising an elasti-
cized fabric and a plurality of eyelets therein for receiv-
ing portions of the lace therethrough,
the fabric having a connected longitudinal edge and a free
longitudinal edge, the connected edge being secured to
the modified blucher construction and the eyelets being
secured in the said free edge,
whereby the fabric can be tensioned by the shoe lace.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1317
4^94,804 fastening, each hinge catch plate to a said window frame, each
FI6T0R DRIVEN BUOYANT TOY said hinge hook third portion passing through a slot in a hinge
Nilson V. Ortiz, 2911 16th St. #210, San Francisco, Calif. 94103 catch plate with the hinge catch plate covering the hinge hook
Filed No?. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,817 fastening means and the hinge hook covering the hinge catch
Int. Cl.^ A63H 2i/04 pjatg fastening means, and the means for freeing further includ-
U^. CI. 46—^^ 3 Claims j^g gggj, \(xn%<t hook third portion proportioned for free with-
drawal from a said hinge catch plate when a said grill is at said
open position.
1. A floatable toy simulating a space saucer for placement in
and movement in water, comprising:
an endless ring body having a planar horizontal bottom
surface and an inner peripheral surface normal to its bot-
tom surface;
a hollow housing extending diametrically across and pro-
jecting above said body,
said housing having a horizontal bottom wall secured to
said inner peripheral surface in upwardly spaced rela-
tion with respect to said body bottom surface;
motor means within said housing including a reversible
motor having a drive shaft projecting downwardly
through said housing bottom wall;
a reversing switch mounted on said housing and having a
control button projecting above the upper limit of said
housing;
a battery within said housing and operatively connected
with said motor through said switch; and,
paddle wheel means axially secured to said drive shaft and
loosely received by the inner peripheral surface of said
body for moving said toy.
4^94,805
ESCAPABLE-WINDOW-SECURITY-GUARD SYSTEM
Roger L. Napper, 2064 Rainier Ave., Bel Air, Md. 21014
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,331
Int. a.' E06B i/6S
U.S. a. 49-55 ♦ Claims
-.in^-e-'l:
••^,?>
-y
4,394,806
MULTIPLE PANE INSULATING STRUCTURE HAVING
MEANS FOR REMOVING MOISTURE BETWEEN
FAONG SURFACES THEREOF
Ralph K. Day, 307 W. Harrison Ave., Maumee, Ohio 43537
Filed Sep. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 185,291
Int. C\? E06B 7/12
U.S. a. 52—172 2 Qaims
1. In a system having means for hinging and locking grills
over openings at window frames and the like, the improvement
comprising: the means for hinging having means for fastening
a said grill to a window frame, including means for freeing a
said grill from a window frame on hingedly pivoting a grill to
an open position relative to a window frame; the means for
locking having respective means for attachment to a window
frame and to a said grill; means for protecting all said fastening
means from tampering when a said grill is hinged and locked to
a window frame; said means for hinging including: a plurality
of hinge hooks, said means protecting including each hinge
hook having a first portion proportioned for fitting a recess in
a side of a said grill, a second portion extending at an angle
from the first portion and a third portion extending from the
second portion in a direction generally parallel with the first
portion, means for fastening each hinge hook to a said grill; a
respective hinge catch plate for each hinge hook, means for
1. A multiple-glazed window structure comprising:
at least two substantially parallel and spaced apart panes
having an outer periphery defined by the outer marginal
edges of said panes;
an impervious gasket means disposed between the facing
surfaces of said panes, said impervious gasket means ex-
tending along only a portion of the outer periphery of said
panes and having spaced apart end portions defining the
remaining portion of the outer periphery;
a pervious gasket means disposed between the facing sur-
faces of said panes and extending between the ends of said
impervious gasket means along the remaining portion of
the outer periphery of said panes, said pervious gasket
means and said impervious gasket means cooperating to
define a chamber between said panes;
an impervious flexing container positioned along the outer
periphery of said panes adjacent said pervious gasket
means, said container having an interior in fluid communi-
cation with said chamber through said pervious gasket
means;
a desiccant within the interior of said flexible container; and
frame members supporting said panes and compressing said
impervious and said pervious gasket means between said
panes; said impervious gasket means, said container, and
said panes defining a closed zone generally impervious to
the ambient atmosphere.
1318
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,807
SHEET METAL STRUCTURAL SHAPE
Frank E. Carroll, 237 Maple Rd., Barrington, III. 60010
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 943,866, Sep. 19, 1978, which is
a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 762,778, Jan. 25, 1977, Pat
No. 4,114,335, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
648,500, Jan. 12, 1976, Pat. No. 4,048,777, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 457,9%, Apr. 4, 1974, Pat No.
3,965,641. This application Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,902
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 20,
1994, has heen disclaimed.
Int a.3 E04C 1/00
VS. a. 52—332 18 Claims
1. A rollformed sheet metal structural shape fabricated from
a single sheet of metal for use in building construction, said
shape being substantially symmetrical about a vertical bisect-
ing plane, said shape comprising
two symmetrical legs extending from a point in said plane at
the top of said shape downwardly, said legs extending
away from said plane forming an included angle of about
30* to about 90° between said legs, said legs having a
vertical height of about 11 to about 10 inches;
a mounting flange generally perpendicular to said plane
extending outwardly from the lower extremity of each of
said legs;
a stiffening flange generally perpendicular to said plane
extending outwardly from each of said legs at said point;
said stiffening flanges being narrower than the distance
between the outer extremity of said mounting flanges and
having a projection extending from the outer extremity of
at least one of said stiffening flange<s) for increased stiff-
ness; and
a closure extending across the bottom of said shape from the
outer extremity of each of said mounting flanges.
434,808
FASTENER FOR ATTACHING PANEL TO STUD
Stanley E. Thoraell, Edmonton, Canada, assignor to Robert S.
Agar, Inc.; Thoraell Holdings Ltd. and Mudlake Holdings
Ltd., aU of, Canada
Filed Not. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,179
Int CV E04H 1/00: E04B 5/52
MS. CL 52-483 1 Chum
side edge thereof at least one gang nail plate, said plate
having tangs extending from the inner face thereof and
being embedded in the panel, said plate further having a
transverse slot member extending outwardly from the
outer face thereof, said slot member forming a clip-receiv-
ing slot extending in a generally horizontal direction;
a stiff, resilient clip, said clip comprising
a first end portion which lies generally flat against the panel
and extends beyond the latter's side edge.
a second end portion which is upwardly and angularly dis-
posed away from the panel, the end of said second end
portion being wedged in the slot,
and a central portion extending upwardly and angularly
from the panel and connecting said end portions, said
second end portion and central portion combining to
provide a V-shaped configuration with the apex directed
away from the panel;
said first end portion forming an aperture in the section
extending beyond the panel side edge;
a support member; ^^
and means extending through the aperture into the support
member to tie the clip and support member together;
whereby the clip wedges against the transverse slot member '
and thus the plate and clip remain tight together and
provide, in conjunction with the tie means, a firm connec-
tion between the panel and support member.
434309
CORELESS HUNG PANEL ASSEMBLY
Edward F. Sherwood, Gettysburg, and Karl B. Omdorff, Bon-
neauTille Boro, both of Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Elec-
tric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
FUed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,136
Int a.3 E04C 2/08
U.S. a. 52—512 2 Claims
1. In combination:
a gypsum board panel having attached thereto adjacent a
1. A coreless, fireproof, hung panel assembly including a
panel member which is disposed against, and which extends
outwardly from, a wall surface, comprising:
a metallic panel member having top and bottom edges, first
and second side edges, first and second major, parallel
opposed sides, and first, second, third and fourth outer
comers;
a plurality of metallic rib members fixed to, and extending
outwardly from, the second major side of said panel mem-
ber to stiffen as well as give depth to the resulting panel
assembly said plurality of rib members including first and
second horizontally oriented, elongated channel members,
each of which have first and second leg portions and a
connecting bight portion, with their bight portions being
fixed to the second major side such that said first and
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1319
second channel members extend horizontally across the
second side, immediately adjacent to the top and bottom
edges, respectively, of the panel member, said first and
second leg portions of the first and second horizontally
oriented channel members extending outwardly by a
predetermined dimension to function as top and bottom
edges, respectively, of the resulting panel assembly;
a wall defining a flat surface;
and at least first, second, third and fourth support members
of like construction fixed to said wall, each of said support
members including an upstanding metallic tab portion
which angles outwardly at a predetermined small angle
from said wall;
said second leg portion of the first channel member having
first and second elongated openings adjacent to the first
and second outer corners, respectively, of the metallic
panel member;
said first leg portion of the second channel member having
first and second elongated openings adjacent to the third
and fourth outer corners, respectively, of the metallic
panel member;
said elongated openings being spaced inwardly by a prede-
termined dimension from the extreme ends of their associ-
ated outwardly extending leg portions;
said metallic tab portions of the first and second support
members extending through the first and second elon-
gated openings of the first channel member, and said
metallic tab portions of the third and fourth support mem-
bers extending through the first and second elongated
openings of the second channel member;
wherein the predetermined dimension of the first and second
leg portions of the first and second channel members,
respectively, the predetermined angle between the tab
portions and said wall, and the predetermined spacing
between the elongated openings in the first and second
channel members and the ends of their associated leg
portions, are all selected such that said tab portions are
flexed slightly outward by the weight of the resulting
panel assembly when the ends of at least the first and
second leg portions of the first and second channel mem-
bers are cammed tightly against the wall surface via the
angled metallic tab portions, to resiliently force the first,
second, third and fourth comers of the metallic panel
member tightly against said wall surface to assure flatness
of said panel member.
jaw-head in sliding relationship with the said plurality of
guide rods,
(d) Means for forcing the said jaw-heads towards each other
when the actuator screw is rotated in a clockwise direc-
tion,
(e) Engagement surfaces extending in a direction perpendic-
ular to the guide rods and suitable for insertion between
the links of a roller chain and engaging the rollers thereof,
(0 A flange extending out of each of the said jaw-heads in a
direction perpendicular to the said guide rods,
(g) Impact Means provided on said flanges for transmitting a
blow to drive a pin out of any of the rollers of the said
roller chain.
4394,811
FUEL CONTROL FOR GAS TURBINE WITH
CONTINUOUS PILOT FLAME
Robert M. Swick, Indianapolis, Ind., assignor to General Motors
Corporation, Detroit Mich.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,785
Int a.J F02C 9/38
U.S. CI. 60—39.28 R ♦ Claims
■•<■ COmBuSTOB
t —.ji* •, iSC STAB --Ni
■ vt» N022^tS
4394,810
CHAIN LINK REPAIR DEVICE
Larry E. Womble, 1400 Hardisty Rd., Bedford, Tex. 76021
■ Filed Not. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 207,210
1 1 Int a.' B21L 27/00
U.S. a. 59—7 5 Claims
1. A chain link repair device for the repair or replacement of
roller members of a roller drive chain comprising:
(a) A pair of jaw-heads,
(b) An elongated frame for the jaw-heads formed by means
of a plurality of guide rods and at least one actuator screw
all of which connect the jaw-heads with one another,
(c) Means for securing the guide rods in rigid relationship
with one of the jaw-heads while maintaining the other
1. In a fuel system for a gas turbine engine of the type having
a main nozzle means and continuous pilot flame nozzle means,
said fuel system including a source of fuel, positive displace-
ment pump means, fuel inlet means between said fuel source
and said pump means, and distribution means between said
pump means and said main nozzle means for directing pressur-
ized fuel to said main nozzle means, the improvement compris-
ing, means defining a control loop between said distribution
means and said inlet means operative to bypass pressurized fuel
back to said inlet means, throttle valve means disposed in said
control loop operative to restrict fuel bypass flow in propor-
tion to main nozzle means demand and to permit subsUntially
unrestricted bypass flow at minimum main nozzle means de-
mand, minimum flow valve means in said control loop down-
stream of said throttle valve means operative to maintain a
minimum pressure in said control loop ahead of said minimum
flow valve means, branch tube means connected to said contin-
uous pilot flame nozzle means and to said control loop between
said throttle valve means and said minimum flow valve means
for directing fuel to said continuous pilot flame means, and
pressure compensating means in said minimum flow valve
means operative to increase the pressure in said control loop
ahead of said minimum flow valve and in said branch line in
proportion to a control parameter of said gas turbine engine.
1320
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
434.812
SUPERCHARGED INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
FOR MOTOR VEHICLES
Hans Mezger, Freiberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Dr.
Ing. h.c.F. Porsche Aktiengesellschaft, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,587
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 22,
1980, 3011203
Int. a.3 P02B i7/l2
U JS. Q. 60—600 5 Claims
heat transfer sections including a preheating section, an evapo-
rating section and a superheating section; a feed water heater
for heating water fed to said heat transfer sections of the ex-
haust gas economizer; a steam separation drum for separating
steam and saturated water from fluid of steam-water mixture
discharged from the exhaust gas economizer; a mixed-pressure
turbine having a high pressure side and a low pressure side, a
piping for feeding part of the steam separated in said steam
separation drum to said superheating section of the exhaust gas
economizer and further transferring said steam to the high
pressure side of said mixed-pressure turbine; a piping for feed-
1. A supercharged internal combustion engine for motor
vehicles, comprising an exhaust turbocharger including an
exhaust gas turbine and a charging blower driven thereby, said
charging blower receiving fresh air through an intake line and
delivering same under pressure to the engine through a charg-
ing air line; a charge pressure control valve arranged in an
exhaust manifold of the internal combustion engine, said
charge pressure control valve being responsive to the charging
blower charge pressure, and regulating an exhaust gas bypass
line that bypasses the exhaust gas turbine; a selectively actu-
ated performance control member regulating the passage cross
section of the charging air line downstream of the charging
blower; and a charging blower-coupled bypass line connecting
the charging blower intake line to the charging air line at a
location in the charging air line upstream of the performance
control member, a blow-off valve means in said bypass line,
means actuated in response to the position of the performance
control member for closing the said blow-off valve means in all
positions of the performance control member for which the
passage is open; an additional bypass line coupled to the charg-
ing blower and connecting the intake line of the charging
blower to the charging air line at a location in the charging air
line upstream of the performance control member, said addi-
tional bypass line containing a solenoid valve means controlled
by at least one of the operating parameters of the internal
combustion engine for regulating the passage cross section of
the additional bypass line,
characterized in that the at least one operating parameter
includes engine rpm and said solenoid is actuated by an
rpm transducer.
ing part of the saturated water separated in said steam separa-
tion drum to said feed water heater and said evaporating sec-
tion of the exhaust gas economizer, respectively; a low pres-
sure steam generator provided in said piping for returning the
saturated water separated in said steam separation drum to said
feed water heater; a piping for feeding low pressure steam in
said low pressure steam generator to the low pressure side of
said mixed-pressure turbine; and a piping for condensing ex-
hausted steam from the mixed-pressure turbine in a condenser
and thereafter circulating the water thus condensed to said
feed water heater.
4.394,814
ENERGY GENERATION SYSTEM
John C. Wardman, 1060 San Tomas Aquino Rd., Campbell,
Calif. 95008, and James Y. Adams, 26966 W. Fremont Rd.,
Los Altos Hills, Calif. 94022
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,908
Int. a.J P03G 7/02
U.S. a. 60—641.15 7 Oaims
434,813
EXHAUST GAS HEAT RECOVERY SYSTEM IN
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yothihani Tanaka, Machida; Yoshiaki Watanabe, and Kou
Sasaki, both of Kawasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Mitsui
Engineering and Shipbuilding Company Limited, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Sep. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 304,600
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 25, 1980, 55-184755
Int. a.5 POIK 2i/l0
U,S. a. 60—618 4 Claims
1. An exhaust gas heat recovery system in an internal com-
bustion engine, comprising: an exhaust gas economizer having
1. A solar powered energy generation system comprising:
(a) a solar collector comprising
1. at least one mirror, the mirror further comprising a
laminated panel including a paperboard base having a
generally parabolic cross-sectional shape and a reflec-
tive sheet overlaying the concave face of the parabolic
base;
2. a copper conduit for conducting the flrst fluid means.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHAMCAL
1321
the conduit positioned along a line approximating the
locus of points defining the focus of the mirror;
3. means mounting the collector for rotating the mirror's
reflective overlay toward the sun;
4. means mounting the collector for tilting the mirror and
conduit relative to the angle of the sun'< radiation tc he
earth;
(b) a heat storage device;
(c) a heat engine;
(d) motive fluid means driving the heat engine;
(e) first fluid means transferring heat from the solar collector
to the motive fluid means, the first fluid means passing in
heat exchange relationship with the heat storage device
intermediate the solar collector and the motive fluid
means; and
(0 second fluid means for absorbing and removing heat from
the motive fluid means, and
(g) wind means for cooling the second fluid means.
4,394,815
PROCESS FOR GENERATING ELECTRIC POWER BY
MEANS OF TURBOGENERATORS USING HIGH
PRESSURE VAPOR
Otto F. Domdey, Buchenstrasse 58, D-67 Ludwigshafen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
PCT No. PCr/EP80/00012, § 371 Date Nov. 6, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 6, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/01932, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 18, 1980
PCT Filed Mar. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 224,571
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Mar. 8, 1979,
2223/79 1
I Int. a.5 POIK 25/06
U.S. CI. 60— 649 5aaims
a first heat exchanger located within an enclosure for con-
densing refrigerant vapor from the compressor means;
a second heat exchanger located outside the enclosure m
heat exchange relationship with a heat exchange medium
located ouside the enclosure, for evaporating condensed
refrigerant from the first heat exchanger;
an expansion device located between the first and second
heat exchangers for expanding condensed refrigerant
passing from the first heat exchanger to the second heal
exchanger, and including
a body defining an inlet, an outlet, a first flow passage for
conducting refrigerant from the inlet to the outlet, and a
second flow passage spaced from the first flow passage
and also for conducting refrigerant from the inlet to the
outlet,
first restriction means located in the first flow passage and
1. An improvement in a process for generating electrical
current by means of hydraulic turbogenerators, wherein a
water stream is used to supply motive power to the turbines
and wherein high pressure vapor is injected into the water
stream, said improvement comprising the steps of:
injecting the high pressure vapor at a point outside of the
turbine spaces;
injecting the high pressure vapor through conduits with
relatively small interior cross-sectional areas; and
injecting the high pressure vapor into a water stream having
a very high flow rate,
such that continuous pressure and velocity increases are
caused in the water stream by the injected vapor and
practically no heat exchange ukes place between the
injected vapor and the water prior to conuct with the
turbines.
34'^ «< 60 il
defining first port means for metering refrigerant flow
through the first flow passage at a first flow rate,
second restriction means located in the second flow passage
and defining second port means for metering refrigerant
flow through the second flow passage at a second flow
rate less than the first flow rate, and
a valve supported within the body for movement between a
first position, closing the second flow passage to direct
refrigerant through the first flow passage, and a second
position, closing the first flow passage to direct refrigerant
through the second flow passage;
a sensor for sensing the temperature of the medium outside
the enclosure which is in heat exchange relationship with
the second heat exchanger; and
means responsive to the sensor for moving the valve from
the first position to the second position when the sensed
temperature falls below a preset level.
4 394 817
APPARATUS FOR MAKING AND MAINTAINING AN
ICE SURFACE
Jean M. Remillard, 9390 Eastman, LaSalle, Quebec, Canada
H8R 2K8
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,573
Int. a.' A63C 19/10
U.S. a. 62— 235 5 Claims
:;! — ^it.
—^^'^
434.816
HEAT PUMP SYSTEM
Roger J. VooJiis, Liverpool, N.Y., assignor to Carrier Corpora-
tion, Syracase, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,093
Int. a.3 F25B 41/06
\}&. a. 62-205 ' Claims
1. A heat pump system comprising:
compressor means for compressing refrigerant vapor;
' a I , hi .1 <. J:L HJri*
3^M^cUt MS
.smmm-
1. In an apparatus for making and maintaining an ice surface,
a plurality of elongated strips adapted to be laid on a predeter-
1032 O.G.-rT52
1322
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
mined area, each strip comprising at least a strip module ex-
tending longitudinally of the strip, each strip module being a
flexible extruded plastic member including a plurality of
spaced-apart parallel tubular sections interspaced by integral
uninterrupted web portions, the web portions being in a com-
mon plane, and the longitudinal edges of each module having
-web extensions forming wings adapted for attachment with
similar wings of adjacent strip modules to form the strip; and
wherein alternating tubular sections of each module forming a
strip communicate with a supply header for supplying a flow-
able refrigerant thereto, and the remaining tubular sections in
the strip communicate with a return header at the same end of
the strip, and a common closed reverting header is connected
to each tubular section of the strip at the other end of the strip.
4,394,818
TRANSPORT REFRIGERATION UNIT WITH
REMOVABLE POWER PACK FRAME
Jerry A. Brownfield, Minneapolis; Richard J. Sandberg, Bloo-
mington; Thomas J. Niemi, Minneapolis, and Leiand L. How-
land, Bell Plaine, all of Minn., assignors to Thermo King
Corporation, Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Sep. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 302,901
Int. a.' B60H i/(W
U^. a. 62—239 7 Claims
section for driving said compressor input means from said
engine when it operates;
said power pack frame means includes an engine mount
section including front and rear bottom horizontal rails to
which said engine is secured, and front and rear vertical
gusset members of generally rhomboid shape extending
from closely adjacent one side of said exterior section for
a major part of the length of said frame means and having
said engine mounted in nested relation therebetween, said
frame means including upper rail means extending from
said gusset members to adjacent the other side of said
section, said upper rail means supporting compressor
mounting means.
4,394,819
VIBRATION ISOLATION AND PRESSURE
COMPENSATION APPARATUS FOR SENSITIVE
INSTRUMENTATION
Robert D. ATerill, Newport News, Va., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Aug. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 408,575
Int. a.3 F25B 79/00
U.S. a. 62—514 R 13 Claims
1. In a transport refrigeration unit including an exterior
section adapted to be mounted on the front face of a transport
trailer or the like, an interior section including a refrigerant
evaporator adapted to project rearwardly from the top, rear
part of said exterior section into said trailer, and including a
refrigerant compressor and at least an internal combustion
engine for driving said compressor, a construction and stnic-
' tural arrangement of elements for said unit comprising:
said exterior section is of generally rectangular box shape
and of significantly greater height than width, and in-
cludes a refrigerant condenser generally vertically dis-
posed at the upper front face of said exterior section;
said exterior section includes means defining a front opening
having a height from closely adjacent the bottom of said
exterior section to closely adjacent the lower edge of said
condenser, and a width for substantially the width of said
exterior section;
power pack frame means disposed in the lower portion of
said exterior section for mounting, in separated relation
and independently, at least both said engine and said com-
pressor at vertically displaced levels, said engine being
located with its base at a substantially lower level than the
level of the base of said compressor;
said engine and compressor being disposed with their output
and input ends, respectively, projecting in directs toward
each other and with the compressor input end overlying
said engine output end, each of said ends including flrst
pulley means connected by first belt means lying in a
vertical plane transverse to the width of said exterior
1. The combination of sensitive instrumentation for detect-
ing and measuring chemical constituents of the atmosphere and
a cooler unit for cryogenically maintaining components of the
sensitive instrumentation at cryogenic temperatures during
operation thereof, the improvement therewith comprising:
vibration attenuating mechanism for minimizing vibrations
transmitted from the cooler unit to the sensitive instru-
mentation components, said vibration attenuating mecha-
nism including a housing assembly module secured to an
instrument platform and housing a mount therein for
retaining a sensitive instrumentation component in fixed
position;
a reaction bracket module also secured to the instrument
platform and spaced from said housing assembly module;
a cooler unit module secured to the instrument platform
intermediate said housing assembly module and said reac-
tion bracket; and
means for connecting said cooling unit module to said hous-
ing assembly module and said reaction bracket such that
said cooling unit is substantially floating therebetween and
vibrations inherent in said cooler unit operation are damp-
ened and isolated from said sensitive instrumentation
component.
4394,820
DOUBLE ACnON BARREL LOCK
James A. Swisher, 464 MiU HiU Dr., Southport, Comi. 06490
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,747
iBt a.3 E05B 67/56
U.S. a. 70—34 10 Claims
1. A lock of the type having a housing with an elongated
aperture opening to the rear of the housing and a lock operat-
ing plunger axially movable in the housing, in which said
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1323
plunger is formed of a rear tool engaging portion spring biased
forwardly and a forward locking portion spring biased rear-
wardly so that the plunger normally has a predetermined
'hz f J^
14
4,394,822
HIGH REDUCnON METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR
CONTINUOUSLY HOT ROLLING PRODUCTS
Keith F. Simons, Worcester, Mass., assignor to Morgan Con-
struction Company, Worcester, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 156,940, Jan. 6, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 257,029
Int. a.' B21B U/12
U.S. a. 72—235 15 Oaims
10
overall length, and means engagable by an inserted picking
tool to cause said forward locking portion to move forwardly
in relation to the rear tool engaging portion to increase the
overall length of the plunger.
Ji=C>
4,394,821
boOR LOCK MECHANISM
Walter E. Best, and William R. Foshee, both of Indianapolis,
Ind., assignors to Best Lock Corporation, Indianapolis, Ind.
FUed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,825
Int a.5 E05B n/04. 63/00
U.S. a. 70—422 36 Claims
1. Door-lock mechanism having a torque-releasable knob,
comprising
a knob sleeve mounted for rotation on its axis and connected
to retract a door bolt, means for locking the sleeve against
rotation to prevent it from retracting the bolt,
a knob mounted for rotation on the axis of the sleeve and
having a coaxial part surrounding a part of the sleeve,
means for normally connecting the knob to route the sleeve
to retract the bolt, and releasable under excessive relative
turning force,
said means comprising a drive lug mounted on one of said
parts and movable toward the other, drive faces on one
and cam faces on the other of said lug and other part,
means biasing the lug in a direction to engage said drive
and cam faces for transmitting limited torque from the
knob to the knob sleeve for rotating the latter to retract
the bolt,
said drive and cam faces being so shaped and said biasmg
means having such force that excessive knob-turning force
will cause the lug to be yieldingly cammed to a retracted
position to release the normal drive connection from the
knob to the sleeve.
1. A high reduction method of continuously hot rolling a
product, comprising: passing the product through a series of at
least three roll passes and effecting in said roll passes progres-
sively larger reductions on the product, with at least two
successive roll passes in said series having their roll axes ar-
ranged at right angles relative to each other, and with the
distribution of horizontal forces in at least the third roll pass
being such that spontaneous entry is prevented in said third roll
pass by a maximum opposing force which is greater than the
available delivery force generated by the rolling action of the
second roll pass; and employing the available delivery force of
the first roll pass to exert an additional momentary force on the
product in advance of the second roll pass, the said additional
momentary force being of sufficient magnitude when com-
bined with the available delivery force of the second roll pass
to overcome said maximum opposing force and thus achieve
forced entry of the product in said third roll pass.
12. Apparatus for continuously hot rolling a product, com-
prising: a series of at least three roll passes which effect pro-
gressively larger reductions on the product, with at least two
successive roll passes in said series having their roll axes ar-
ranged at right angles relative to each other, the third of said
roll passes having an angle of bite such that spontaneous entry
of the product therein is prevented by a maximum opposing
force which is greater than the available delivery force gener-
ated by the rolling action of the second roll pass; the available
delivery force of the first roll pass being sufficient to exert a
momentary additional force on the product in advance of said
third r9ll pass, the said momentary additional force being of
sufficient magnitude when combined with the available deliv-
ery force of said second roll pass to overcome said maximum
opposing force and thus achieve forced entry of the product in
said third roll pass.
4,394,823
ELECTRICAL SIGNAL GENERATING FUEL INJECnON
VALVE
Odon Kopse, Utzenstorf, Switzerland, and Nestor R. Amaya,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch
GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 311,052
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 30,
1980, 3040811
iBt CI? GOIM 15/00
U.S. a. 73—119 A * Claims
1. Electrical signal generating fuel injection valve having
a housing (10, 13);
a reciprocable needle valve element (11, 17) positioned m the
housing;
an induction coU (20) positioned to surround the needle
valve element so that, upon movement of the valve ele-
1324
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
ment, the reluctance of the electromagnetic circuit includ-
ing the induction coil will change, thereby generating an
electrical operating response signal,
said housing including an insert ring (62, 72) formed with a
central opening (61, 7l) and having a bottom wall (63, 73)
therein, in which opening the coil (20) is retained,
and comprising, in accordance with the invention.
4,394,825
FLUID FLOW MEASURING APPARATUS
Zell DuVall, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to TSI Incorporated, St
Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 155,312, Jun. 2, 1980, Pat. No.
4,331,037. This application Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,525
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/56
VJS. a. 73—861.09 71 Claims
a holding sleeve (65) having a generally cylindrical, axially
extending portion (66) and a radially inwardly extending
flange (67) joined to said axially extending portion, fitted
in the opening (61, 71) of the insert ring (62, 72),
the induction coil being positioned within the cylindrical
portion (66) of the holding sleeve and pressed against the
bottom wall (63, 73) of the opening (61, 71) by said flange
(67^
4,394,824
ACOUSTIC MICROSCOPE
Hiroshi Kanda, Tokorozawa; Isao Ishikawa, Hino; Toshio
Kondo, Kunitachi, and Kageyoshi Katakura, Nakamachi, all
of Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,032
Clainu priority, application Japan, May 6, 1980, 55-58707
Int. a? GOIN 29/00
VJS. O. 73—606 7 Qaims
no
fi
AMP
± TIMING-
- I —GATE -—
CIRCUIT
lANALOG
ISWITCH
I 120 «
COUPL£B ^^ *
am.
GENERATOR
7
-l«0
I
57. An apparatus for measuring the movement of a fluid
comprising: housing means having a fluid flow path, side wall
means having a plurality of rows of openings open to the
outside of the housing means, and annular passage means be-
tween and in communication with said plurality of rows of
openings and the fluid flow path, whereby fluid flows through
said openings and annular passage into and out of said fluid
flow path, and means for sensing the flow of fluid in said fluid
flow path and providing information signals providing infor-
mation as to the movement of the fluid flowing in said flow
path.
4,394,826
ORinCE METER WITH ISOLATION VALVE ON THE
CARRIER
Davis A. Van Scoy, Simonton, Tex., assignor to Grove Valve and
Regulator Company, Oakland, Calif.
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,144
Int. a.3 GOIF 1/42
U.S. a. 73—861.61 4 aaims
-■^. M
1. An acoustic microscope having a flrst ultrasonic propa-
gating solid medium, ultrasonic wave generator means for
generating an ultrasonic wave from one end of said solid me-
dium, a concave spherical surface formed at the other end of
said solid medium, a second ultrasonic propagating medium
arranged between said conical spherical surface and a speci-
men, driver means for driving said ultrasonic wave generator
means with an electrical signal to effect generation of the
ultrasonic wave whereby in response to the generated ultra-
sonic wave an ultrasonic wave is reflected from said specimen
and a ultrasonic wave is reflected from the boundary between
said concave spherical surface and said second ultrasonic prop-
agating medium, and detector means for detecting the ultra-
sonic wave reflected by said specimen, said driver means driv-
ing said ultrasonic wave generator means with an electrical
signal having characteristics to cause the reflected ultrasonic
wave from said specimen to interfere with the reflected ultra-
sonic wave from the boundary between said concave spherical
surface and said second ultrasonic propagating medium.
«. ^'XImT
p'
mmM
20
1. An orifice meter comprising:
a body having a lower main chamber with aligned flow
passages therein and an upper service chamber;
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1325
an orifice disc carrier plate movable in said body between
said main chamber and said service chamber;
a downwardly directed, sealing surface around the lower
end of said service chamber; and
an isolation valve plate pivotally suspended from the bottom
of said carrier plate;
an edge of said valve plate being engagable with said sealing
surface when said carrier plate is raised to pivot said valve
plate into horizontal position to then be moved into seal-
ing engagement with said sealing surface upon further
lifting of said carrier plate.
4 394 827
TRANSMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM WITH MODIHED
FRICTION ENGAGING MECHANISM ACTUATING
PRESSURE
Seitoku Kubo, Toyota; Koujiro Kuramochi, Okazaki, and Tatsuo
Kyushima, Toyota, all of Japan, assignors to Toyota Jidosha
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Toyota, Japan
Filed Nov. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 210,214
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 27, 1980, 55-39537
Int. a.^ B60K 41/10
U.S. CI. 74—868 2 Oaims
the vehicle, selectively supplies it as an actuating fluid
pressure to one of said friction engaging mechanisms;
whereby the overall shape of a graph of said output fluid
pressure of said fluid pressure control means as the ordi-
nate, and engine load as the abscissa, is convex upwards;
whereby said shift valve is provided with a pressure to
supply to said friction engaging mechanism as an actuat-
ing fluid pressure, the variation of which with respect to
engine load is of the same general nature, as is the varia-
tion of engine torque with respect to engine load.
4 394 828
SHIELDED/JACKETED RIBBON-CABLE SHEATHING
STRIPPING TOOL
Dennis J. Garbis, P.O. Box 1555, Santa Ana, Calif. 92702, and
Donald E. Baker, 11314 212th St., Ukewood. Calif. 90715
Filed Apr. 14. 1981, Ser. No. 254,154
Int. a.5 H02G 1/12
U.S. a. 81—9.51 3 Oaims
"50 100
THROTTLE OPENING (%1
1. For an automatic transmission for an automotive vehicle,
comprising a gear transmission mechanism and a plurality of
fluid pressure actuated friction engaging mechanisms, a plural-
ity of speed stages being provided by said gear transmission
mechanism according to selective actuation of said friction
engaging mechanisms;
a fluid pressure control system, comprising:
(a) a line fluid pressure control valve which produces a
line fluid pressure which increases from a predeter-
mined base pressure approximately proportionally to a
quantity representative of engine load;
(b) a throttle fluid pressure control valve which produces
a throttle fluid pressure which is approximately propor-
tional to said quantity representative of engine load;
(c) a means for controlling fluid pressure, which receives
supply of said line pressure and said throttle pressure
and outputs an output fluid pressure, and which com-
prises;
a first fluid pressure modulation valve, which is supplied
with the throttle pressure, and which outputs a throttle
modulator fluid pressure which is the same as throttle
pressure when the throttle pressure is below a first prede-
termined level, and is equal to said first predetermined
level when the throttle pressure is greater than said first
predetermined level; and
a second fluid pressure modulation valve, which receives
said line fluid pressure and said throttle modulator fluid
pressure, and which produces, as said output of said fluid
pressure control means, a fluid pressure which, when the
line pressure is lower than a second predetermined pres-
sure, is less than line pressure, but increases faster with
increasing engine load than does said line pressure; when
said line pressure is between said second predetermined
pressure and a third predetermined pressure, is substan-
tially equal to line pressure; and, when line pressure is
greater than said third predetermined pressure, is substan-
tially equal to said predetermined pressure;
(d) a shift valve which receives said output fluid pressure
and which, according to the operational conditions of
1. A tool for use in stripping sheathing from a ribbon cable
of the type characterized by a series of parallel conductors
lying in a plane encased in one or more layers of sheathing
having first and second opposite sides essentially parallel to the
plane of the conductors connected along their longitudinal
edges comprising a frame having at least two spaced-apart
upright supports adapted to be mounted on a horizontal sur-
face and when mounted, extending generally at right angles
thereto, and a cutting assembly supported by said upright
supports at a predetermined position above the honzontal
surface, said cutter assembly including a cutting blade having
a forward end, a central axis and at least two cutting edges in
the plane of said blade extending rearwardly and at an angle to
said central axis with the central axis being an axis of symmetry
for said cutting blade, said blade being secured to said upright
supports in a position generally parallel to the horizontal sur-
face, and a non-cutting guide member mounted on a surface of
said blade symmetrical with the central axis thereof and having
a leading edge extending forwardly of the forward end of said
blade, said guide member adapted to be inserted between the
conductor sheath and conductors of said ribbon cable to sepa-
rate the same prior to the cable contacting the cutting edges as
the cable is pushed rearwardly to slit said sheath while permit-
ting the enclosed conductors to pass therethrough undamaged.
4 394 829
FLYING SHEAR FOR METAL STRIP STOCK
Herbert M. Stoehr, New Berlin, Wis., assignor to Artos Engi-
neering Company, New Berlin, Wis.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,620
Int. 0.3 B26D 7/00
U.S. O. 83-314 ' Claims
1 Shearing apparatus for making a transverse cut through a
strip while said strip is in lengthwise movement in a forward
direction, said shearing apparatus being characterized by:
A. a lower blade carrier confined to forward and rearward
motion and having thereon an upwardly projecting lower
shearing blade and an upwardly facing clamping surface;
1326
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
B. an upper blade carrier having thereon a downwardly
projecting upper shearing blade cooperable with said
lower shearing blade;
C. means connecting the upper blade carrier to the lower
blade carrier for up and down motion relative thereto and
for forward and rearward motion in unison therewith;
D. vertical biasing means urging the upper blade carrier to a
raised position in which the shearing blades are vertically
spaced apart;
E. thrust exerting means at a relatively stationary location
above the blade carriers, engageable with said upper blade
carrier to force it downwardly so that said blades can
shear through a strip between them;
F. a gripper carried by the lower blade carrier for pivoting
relative thereto about a gripper axis that extends trans-
€>
®
&
©1 n
J-' ■•.
'?
C.-^.'.'-
-M-"
%
k
versely to said forward direction and is spaced above the
level of said clamping surface, said gripper having a bot-
tom surface curved eccentrically to said gripper axis for
wedging engagement with the top surface of a strip there-
beneath to clamp the strip against said clamping surface as
the gripper swings forwardly about said gripper axis,
thereby constraining the lower blade carrier to move
forward with the strip; and
G. link means providing a lost motion connection between
said gripper and the upper blade carrier whereby move-
ment of the latter to its raised position swings the gripper
rearwardly to a normal position in which its said bottom
surface is spaced substantially above said clamping surface
but whereby the upper blade carrier is allowed to con-
tinue its descent after said bottom surface is engaged with
a strip.
sound hole formed in the top plate of an acoustic guitar when
converting such acoustic guitar to an acoustic electric one, and
adapted to be easily manually inserted into and removed from
such sound hole without the need for tools and to hold its place
in such sound hole after insertion until manually removed, said
plug comprising:
a head portion in the form of a rigid plate adapted to overlie
the top surface of a top plate such as aforesaid and to
completely cover the sound hole therein, and
a securement portion extending from said head portion, said
securement portion being adapted to extend into said
sound hole and having means for holding said plug in
place relative to a top plate such as aforesaid by a press Tit
engagement with the edge surface of said sound hole
which edge surface extends from the top surface to the
bottom surface of said top plate and deflnes said sound
hole.
4,394,830
FEEDBACK REDUCER FOR AN ACOUSTIC ELECTRIC
GUITAR
Paul J. Damiano, Manchester, Conn., assignor to RMI Corpora-
tion, Emerson, N J.
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 266,903
Int. a.' GIOD im: GlOG 7/00: GIOH i/lS
U.S. a. 84—1.15 12 Oalms
4,394,831
HELMET METAL MASS COMPENSATION FOR
HELMET-MOUNTED SIGHTING SYSTEM
Werner H. Egli, Minneapolis; Jeffirey M. Setterholm, Minne-
tonka, and E. Jack Weir, Roseville, all of Minn., assignors to
Honeywell Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,747
Int. a.5 F41G 9/00; GOIR ii/02
M&. a. 89—41 EA 11 Claims
T**NtMITTCR ll,
CONTROL »AN€L^
TRANSMITTER
CONTROL »*N€L
1. A feedback reducing plug for insertion into a sound hole
formed in the top plate of an acoustic electric guitar, or into the
--SICMT tLCCTRONICS
ASOCMetV
1. An electromagnetic system for utilizing electromagnetic
field vectors in determining the orientation of a helmet, and for
compensating for distortions of said electromagnetic field
vectors caused by the metal mass of the helmet, the system
comprising: /
transmitting means for^ransmitting electromagnetic field
vectors, said transmitting means including a transmitting
antenna having at least two transmitting coils;
a receiving antenna having three non-coplanar receiving
coils fixed to the helmet, said receiving coils sensing the
electromagnetic field vectors transmitted by said transmit-
ting antenna; and,
control means responsive to said electromagnetic field vec-
tors received by said receiving antenna for iteratively
determining helmet orientation compensated for distor-
tions of said electromagnetic field vectors caused by hel-
met metal mass, said control means having an output for
supplying said compensated orientation to a utilization
means.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1327
4394,832
BRAKE BOOSTER FOR AUTOMOTIVE VEHICLES
Rolf Weiler, and Peter Boehm, both of Frankfurt am Main, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to ITT Industries, Inc., New
York, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,838
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 20,
1980, 3010605
Int a.3 F15B 9/10
U.S. a. 91—376 R 1* Claims
surface of said tube being closely adjacent the inner sur-
face of said hub;
a mechanically actuatable control valve to connect said
working chamber to a selected one of said low-pressure
chamber and atmosphere, said control valve being dis-
posed in a control valve housing which is axially movable
in said tube in a force-transmitting relationship with a
master cylinder piston actuating rod; and
1. A brake booster for automotive vehicles comprising:
a low-pressure casing sealingly subdivided into a low-pres-
sure chamber and a working chamber by an axially mov-
able wall; ,_ ..
a reinforcement tube extending axially through said casing
having its ends fastened to the end walls of said casing and
sealed to said movable wall by a rolling diaphragm;
a mechanically actuated control valve to connect said work-
ing chamber with a selected one of said low-pressure
chamber and atmosphere, said control valve having a
housing axially movable within said tube and connected to
said movable wall by ribs extending radially through
longitudinal slots disposed in said tube, said rolling dia-
phragm rolling over at least a portion of said slots adjacent
said working chamber; and
a sliding element engaging and axially guided by axially
extending rims of each of said slots, said elements having
means distinct from said wall to axially displace said ele-
ments together with said wall and each of said elements
having a covering bead which overlaps said portion of
said slots between said slots and said rolling diaphragm.
a metallic spacer ring having a radially outwardly projecting
shoulder outside said tube disposed coaxially of said axis in
an abutting relationship with said annular end surface, said
spacer ring having radially extending ribs projecting
through said slots in a force-transmitting relationship with
said control housing to transmit boosting forces from said
wall to said control housing, said spacer ring being se-
cured to said annular end surface by a lock-in connection
means extending axially into said low-pressure chamber
from said annular end surface.
4,394,834
CAN CRUSHER
Richard D. Lowe, 3 West St., Windsor Locks, Conn. 06096
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,670
Int. a.^ B30B 9/U
U.S. a. 100—245 13 Claims
4,394,833
BRAKE BOOSTER
Rolf Weiler, FVankfurt am Main-Sindlingen, and Wilfried Wag-
ner, Frankfurt am Main, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signors to nr Industries, Inc., New York
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,736
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 19,
1980, 3015187
Int. a.3 F15B 9/10
U.S. a. 91—376 R ^^ Claims
1. A brake booster for automotive vehicles comprising:
a low-pressure casing having a longitudinal axis sealingly
subdivided into a low-pressure chamber and a working
chamber by an axially movable wall, said wall including a
flexible diaphragm and a rigid diaphragm plate having a
cylindrical hub disposed coaxially of said axis extending
into said low-pressure chamber, said hub having an annu-
lar end surface in said low-pressure chamber:
a reinforcement tube disposed coaxially of said axis concen-
trically within said hub extending through said casing
having its ends fastened to end walls of said casing, said
tube having slots therein parallel to said axis, the outer
Hr^VvT, ~~-T2
1. A can crusher comprising:
a housing having a tubular configuration with a base end and
a front end, all symmetrically disposed about a centerline
axis;
mounting means for attaching the can crusher to a support
means;
1328
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
a front plug fixedly disposed within the housing symmetri-
cally about the centerline axis at the front end, having a
back surface for providing a crushing surface;
a ram, having a cylindrical configuration, disposed within
the housing and slidably engageable therein having a front
surface in a variable spaced-apart relationship to the front
plug and together with the housing and the front plug
deflne a can cavity therebetween;
guide means for guiding the ram along the centerline axis
toward and away from the front plug;
a pair of ratchet arms disposed in a spaced-apart relationship
to one another with the housing positioned therebetween;
means for attaching the ratchet arms to the ram;
a pair of pivot plates disposed in a spaced-apart relationship
to one another proximate the front end of the housing;
means for rotatably attaching the pivot plates to the housing;
handle means attached to the pivot plates for rotating the
pivot plates about a rotation axis;
means for engaging the ratchet arms for providing move-
ment of the ram toward or away from the front plug as the
handle is rotated in a counterclockwise or clockwise
direction respectively;
said housing having a first opening therein for inserting a can
into the can cavity; and
a second opening in said housing for removing a crushed can
from the can cavity.
4,394,835
DRIVE FOR ROTARY-ROLLER OFFSET PRINTING
MACHINES
Peter Gertsch, and Robert Imhof, both of Bern, Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 308,484, Oct. 5, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation of Ser. No. 113,376, Jan. 18,
1980, abandoned. This application Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No.
333,683
Claims priority, application Sweden, Jan. 22, 1979, 7900573
Int. a.3 B41F 5/18. 13/00
U.S. a. 101—177 14 Oaims
impression roll gears to the impression roll means for
rotating therewith;
a drive for the two impression roll gears;
a countershaft wheel connected with the drive for being
rotated thereby; the one impression roll gear engaging the
countershaft wheel for being driven thereby; an interme-
diate wheel connected with the countershaft wheel for
being driven thereby to rotate in the direction counter to
the direction of rotation of the countershaft wheel; the
other impression roll gear engaging the intermediate
wheel for being driven thereby; whereby depending upon
which of the two impression roll gears is connected with
the impression roll means, the direction of rotation of the
impression roll means is determined;
an axle drivingly connected with the plate roll; an indexing
wheel at that axle and rotatable therewith;
a sliding gear rotatably mounted for engaging and for rotat-
ing the indexing wheel and also being axially slidable for
selectively meshing with the one or the other impression
roll gear, whereby the direction of rotation of the plate
roll is determined by whichever one of the impression roll
gears is engaged by the sliding gear.
4,394,836
RIFLE-GRENADE WITH BULLET PASS-THROUGH
DEVICE
Rene M. Chavee, and Andre J. Gabriels, both of Genk, Belgium,
assignors to Fabrique Nationale Herstal, en abrege F.N.,
Societe Anonyme, Herstal, Belgium
FUed Nov. 20, 1980, Set. No. 208,691
Qaims priority, application Belgium, Nov. 30, 1979, 58241
Int. a.3 F42B 11/42
U.S. a. 102—485 4 Qaims
1. Rifle-grenade, of the type comprising a head which is
prolonged by a tubular shank, the aforesaid head being tra-
versed by an axial bore running into the bore of the aforesaid
tubular shank, characterized in that a bullet-pass-through de-
vice, of a single piece of material, is located in one of the
aforesaid bores, this bullet-pass-through device being made
from a material the hardness of which ranges from approxi-
mately 30 Shore A to approximately 70 Shore D.
1. Drive means for a rotary-roller offset printing machine,
with arbitrary reversibility of the rotation direction of impres-
sion roll means and of plate rolls of the machine, the drive
means comprising:
impression roll means comprising an impression roll; a plu-
rality of separate plate rolls for communicating with the
impression roll means; a respective offset roll for each
plate roll and being rotation-secured to the associated
plate roll; each of the offset rolls being settable to be
applied to the impression roll means for rotating together
therewith;
two impression roll gears, each independently and rotatably
connected with the impression roll means; coupling means
for individually coupling one or the other of the two
4,394,837
PASSENGER STATION FOR ELEVATED RAILWAY
SYSTEM
Lawrence K. Edwards, 3507 Slade Run Dr., Falls Church, Va.
22042
FUed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,954
Int. a.3 B61B 1/02, 13/04
U.S. a. 104—28 19 Claims
1. In an elevated railway system comprising a beam struc-
ture, a track extending longitudinally of the beam structure
along one side thereof, the track comprising a lower rail and an
upper rail, and a car adapted to travel on the track having a
door in its side toward the beam structure: a station comprising
an elevator shaft structure extending up from ground level
generally in the vertical plane of the beam structure in a gap in
the beam structure, the gap in the beam structure being be-
tween first and second transition beam sections, the transition
beam sections being effective to spread the upper and lower
rail of the track, a track section extending alongside the transi-
tion beam sections on the same side thereof as the track on the
beam structure and comprising a lower rail and an upper rail in
continuity with the lower and upper rails of the beam struc-
ture, a track section extending alongside the elevator shaft
July 26, 1985
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1329
structure on the same side thereof as the track on the beam
structure and comprising a lower rail and an upper rail in
continuity with the lower and upper rails of the first and sec-
ond transition beam sections, the lower and upper rails of said
track section extending to the bottom and top of the door of a
ascending whirlpool of air between the centrally arranged
reduced diameter opening of said partition and the centrally
arranged reduced diameter opening of said roof, whereby the
large particle fuel is totally burned in said pile in the lower
chamber, and the partially burned fines are entrained by the air
from the tuyeres of said lower chamber and are conveyed
upwardly into the said central ascending whirlpool through
said upper chamber, to more thoroughly bum said fines while
preventing sufficient contact between said fines and the walls
of said upper chamber to cause said fines to stick to the walls
of said upper chamber.
4,394,839
COMBUSTION APPARATUS
Ikeda Toshio, 12-19, 6 chome, Chiyoda, Sagamihara, Kanagawa,
Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,5%
Oaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 16, 1980, 55-143629
Int. a.' F23B 7/00
U.S. Q. 110—234 7 Claims
car stopped at the station for passenger egress from and ingress
to the elevator shaft structure between the rails, and a passen-
ger elevator movable up and down in the elevator shaft struc-
ture for carrying passengers from ground level up to car door
level and back.
4 394 838
BURNING CELL FOR SOLID WASTE FUEL MATERIALS
David D. D'Agrosa, Boulevard de la Luz 209, Mexico City 20,
Mexico
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,978
Qaims priority, applicaf'-^n Mexico, Apr. 30, 1980, 182176
Int. a.J f23B 7/00
U.S. CI. 110—234 11 Cl«"™s
u.
.>
:* ■i^r/.r.i
,--U
^jt -'li'l ...ft.-
1. A burning cell for solid waste fuel materials which com-
prises in combination a vertical lower cylindrical burning
chamber for waste fuel, a vertical upper cylindrical burning
chamber for fines, a partition separating said chambers, a re-
duced diameter opening centrally arranged in said partition
between said two chambers, a roof on said upper chamber, a
reduced diameter outlet opening centrally arranged in said
roof, a bottom in said lower chamber, feed means for solid
waste fuel material arranged for feeding said waste fuel in the
said lower chamber to build up a waste fuel pile on the bottom
thereof, a plurality of circumferential arrays of inwardly radi-
ally directed tuyeres arranged in the side wall of said lower
chamber near the bottom thereof, first air feed means to blow
air into said lower chamber through said radially directed
tuyeres and against said waste fuel pile, a helical array of
downwardly inwardly and sidewardly inclined tuyeres ar-
ranged in the cylindrical wall of said upper chamber, second
air feed means to blow air into said upper chamber through
said tuyeres to produce an outer descending whirlpool of air
which reverses direction at said partition to form a central
1. A combustion apparatus comprising:
a hermetic casing including a furnace and a cyclone device
operatively disposed therein with a space being provided
therebetween;
said furnace being in communication with said cyclone
device through a passage;
said hermetic casing having an inlet port for supplying fluid
to said space and an outlet port for discharging fluid from
said space;
said furnace including a firing port and a fire hole for supply-
ing waste materials and an ashes hole for removing ashes
all of which extend out of said hermetic casing;
an exhaust pipe being operatively positioned to extend
through the top portion of said hermetic casing and a fire
grate being disposed adjacent a bottom portion of said
furnace;
a blower being operatively connected with said exhaust pipe
and said fire grate to supply air to said furnace;
and said cyclone device including an ashes hole for remov-
ing ashes at the bottom portion thereof which extends out
of said hermetic casing.
4,394,840
WORKPIECE GUIDE FOR AUTOMATIC SEWING
MACHINE
Herbert Diekmann, VIotho, and Helmut Niedrich, Gutersloh,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Durkoppwerke
GmbH, Bielefeld, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,193
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 2,
1980, 8032048
Int. a.' D05B 21/00
U.S. a. 112—121.15 10 Claims
1. In combination with a sewing machine having a work
table and a fabric feed for displacing a workpiece to be sewn on
said table in a predetermined forward longitudinal direction
1330
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
through a sewing station on said table, a fabric guide compris-
ing:
a transversely elastically deformable band extending gener-
ally in said direction and oriented on edge;
holder means engaging said band at a plurality of longitudi-
nally offset locations for securing said band on said table
with each of said locations in any of a multiplicity of
influence of said side heelings on the position of the first con-
veyor and the direction of the first axis.
transversely offset positions, whereby said band can be
deformed into and held in a nonstraight shape;
a carriage displaceable on said table along said guide and
provided with a clip fastenable on said workpiece; and
means urging said carriage and clip longitudinally in a back-
ward longitudinal direction opposite said forward longitu-
dinal direction.
4,394,841
VESSEL FOR RECOVERING MATERIAL
Per B. Lundback, Vasterleden 48 nb., 199 00 Enkoping, Sweden
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,327
Int. aj B63B 35/28
U.S. a. 114-26 19 Qaims
1. A vessel for recovering material such as oil from the
water, comprising a first conveyor, which is pivotably
mounted on the vessel about an axis extending generally hori-
zontally and transversely relative to the longitudinal direction
of the vessel, a portion of said first conveyor being adapted to
be located below the water level so as to enable the first con-
veyor to transfer the oil out of the water, and a lifting device
connected to the first conveyor to pivot the first conveyor
about said axis, the improvement comprising said lifting device
being designed to adjust the lower portion of the first conveyor
into different levels below the water level to locate the lower
portion of the first conveyor in the vicinity of the bottom of the
sea to pick up material such as timber therefrom, wherein the
first conveyor is rotatably mounted to the vessel about a sec-
ond axis extending generally in the longitudinal direction of
the vessel, and further wherein the first conveyor is rotatable
about the second axis by means of at least one operating mem-
ber, the actuation of which is automatically controlled by a
device sensing side heelings of the vessel and which is adapted,
upon side heelings of the vessel, to route the first conveyor
about the second axis to entirely or partially eliminate the
4,394,842
ANCHOR
Rob van den Haak, Allegro 114, Krimpen an der tjssel, Nether-
lands
Continuation of Ser. No. 973,239, Dec. 22, 1978, abandoned.
This application Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,368
Oaims priority, application Brazil, Dec. 29, 1977, 7708742;
Netherlands, Jun. 30, 1978, 7807093
Int. aj B63B 21/34
U.S. a. 114-304 3 Qaims
1. An anchor comprising:
a fluke comprised of fluke hands of a reinforced closed
hollow structure formed by upper and lower plates inter-
connected by inner edge plate members and converging
towards each other to form thin leading, trailing and side
edges, each of said fluke hands formed with an outwardly
turned front tip portion;
a forwardly pointed flange member mounted normal to said
fluke and on said outwardly turned front tip portion to
enhance the stabilizing action of said anchor;
a hinge pin disposed at a point substantially coincident with
the geometric center of gravity of said anchor;
a shank mounted to said fluke by said hinge pin;
a central box formed about said hinge pin and defined by
upstanding plates and head plates to delimit fluke angle;
rear stabilizer elements mounted at side corners of each of
said fluke hands; and
wing plates extending from said head plates convergently
towards said rear stabilizer elements and divergently
towards said trailing edge.
4,394.843
SELF-RIGHTING TRAFTIC MARKER
Gananath W. Ediriwira, 29, Qoister Rd., Acton W.3 London,
England
FUed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,323
Int. a.3 EOIF 9/01
U.S. a. 116— 63 F = 4 Qaims
ey ^7
1. A portable self-righting traffic marker comprising:
July 26
• 1
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1331
a generally rigid body having a base on which the marker
can rock and an integral rigid upper part,
an outwardly flaring multi-faced region merging said base
with said integral upper part,
said integral rigid upper part of said body comprising a
plurality of contiguous generally flat outwardly flaring
side wall portions which define a nesting facility, formed
as a hollow upper region having an open top, whereby a
plurality of said traffic markers can be nested, one within
the other,
weight means for selectively weighting said base so that said
marker returns to its upright position by itself when it is
knocked over,
land means on the bottom of said base for facilitating stand-
ing the marker on the ground in its upright position, and
drain means for draining rain water entering said body
through said open top.
4,394,844
CHIP COATER
Laurior A. Wood, 34 Bloody Brook, Amherst, 03031, and Don-
ald N. Humphries, 45 Beave U., Bedford, N.H. 03102
Division of Ser. No. 259,854, May 4, 1981, Pat. No. 4,346,124.
This application Jan. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 337,953
Int. a.3 B05C 1/06. 3/18
U.S. a. 118-260 ^ ' Claims
agglomerated mass, the upstream end of said conveyor means
being located in seed receiving relationship to the discharge
end of said mill assembly, and a disagglomerator assembly
located at the discharge end of said conveyor means in position
to receive and adapted to singulate seeds in agglomerated seeds
discharged from said conveyor means.
4 394 846
CULTURE OF MARINE SPEOES
Oswald A. Roels, 28 Hewit Dr., Corpus Christi, Tex. 78404
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,565
Int. a.5 AOIK 61/00
U.S. a. 119-2 1' Claims
1. Apparatus for applying an adhesive or the like to a circuit
chip comprising:
a bath tray for carrying a quantity of a liquid adhesive or the
like,
a mesh screen,
means securing said mesh screen to said bath tray with the
screen extending at approximately the level of the liquid in
the bath tray,
a leveling paddle,
and means supporting the paddle so as to sweep relative to
the screen, essentially pressing the screen into the adhe-
sive as the weeping action occurs.
4,394,845
SEED COATING APPARATUS
Frederic E. Porter, St. Louis, and James M. Scott, Minneapolis,
both of Minn., assignors to Sandor Ltd., Basel, Switzerland
Division of Ser. No. 191,528, Sep. 29, 1980, abandoned, which is
a division of Ser. No. 73,882, Sep. 10, 1979, Pat. No. 4,238.523.
This application Feb. 5, 1982. Ser. No. 346,282
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 9, 1997,
1 1 has been disclaimed.
11 Int. Cl.^ AOIC 7/06
U.S. a. 118— 303 5 Qaims
1 A seed coating apparatus comprising, in combination, a
mill assembly having an upstream end and discharge end and
adapted to mix and advance plant seeds, metenng means at the
upstream end of said assembly and adapted to introduce con-
tinuously a measured amount of seeds into said assembly, spray
means downstream from said metering means and adapted to
apply a curable liquid seed coating composition onto a seed
mass advancing in said assembly, conveyor means havmg an
upstream receiving end and a downstream discharge end and
adapted to accumulate seeds for advancement thereon as an
1. A method of utilizing nutrient deficient ocean waters for
the culture of marine species, which comprises:
(a) maintaining a flow of nutrient deficient ocean waters into
and through a finfish culture stage at a sufficient rate to
limit the development of planktonic species in that sUge,
and supplying finfish feed to the stage for the culture of
finfish therein;
(b) maintaining a flow of finfish culture stage effluent
through a shrimp culture stage, and supplying plankton
nutrients to that stage for the culture of plankton to consti-
tute shrimp feed for the culture of shrimp in that sUge; and
(c) maintoining a flow of shrimp culture suge effluent
through a filter feeder stage for the culture of filter feeders
therein.
1332
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^94,847
UNIT FOR THE ADMINISTRATION OF LIQUIDS TO
ANIMALS, MORE SPEOALLY A WATERING BOWL
Gcorg Langenegger, Bachstr. 10; Franz Bauer, Unterer Graben
2, both of D-8050 Freising, and Josef Langenegger, Deutsc-
hherrenstr. 10, D-8891 Petersdorf, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,961
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 14,
1980,3030758
Int. a.3 AOIK 7/02. 7/04. 7/06: F16K 7/17
U.S. a. 119—75 13 Qaims
1. An animal waterer comprising:
a bowl formed with an animal actuatable movable member;
a main valve connected to said bowl and having:
a housing,
a water inlet communicating with said housing,
a water outlet communicating with the interior of said
bowl,
an annular wall separating said inlet from said outlet and
having an annular edge,
a valve diaphragm in said housing spanned across said
edge and defining in said housmg a pilot space pressur-
izable to press said diaphragm against said edge and
block communication between said inlet and said outlet,
and
a first passage formed in said diaphragm communicating
between said inlet and said space for enabling water
from said inlet to pressurize said space and press said
diaphragm against said edge;
means defining a throttle passage communicating between
said space and through said outlet; and
a pilot valve operatively connected to said member and
displaceable thereby for said throttle passage whereby
actuation of said member by an animal enables throttled
flow of water from said space through said throttle pas-
sage and said outlet into said bowl and relieves the pres-
sure in said space whereby said diaphragm is displaced by
the pressure of water at said inlet from said edge to permit
water to flow past said edge from said inlet to said outlet,
said throttle passage being a hole formed in said dia-
phragm, said pilot valve including a valve body disposed
at said hole and biased to close said hole in the absence of
displacement of said member.
CENTRAL HEATING BOILER
Dirk B. L. Siebeit, Nuenen, Netherlands, assignor to AWB
Apparatenfabriek Warmtebouw B.V., Beek en Donk, Nether-
lands
Filed Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 285,837
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Aug. 4, 1980,
8004437; Aug. 4, 1980, 8004613
Int. a.3 F22B 7/00
U.S. a. 122-13 R .4 Claims
1. A boiler construction comprising, in combination:
a pair of upright, coaxial wall constructions comprising an
outer wall of sheet metal having essentially a cylindrical
shape and an inner wall formed for a substantial extent of
its length by a group of longitudinally extending stave
elements joined by weldments to provide a liquid tight
cylindrical upper portion of the inner wall having a prede-
termined spacing from said outer wall,^aid inner wall also
including a lower portion in the form of a bell shaped skirt
of sheet metal defining a combustion chamber welded to
said upper portion at the lower end thereof and spaced
inwardly from the lower portion of said outer wall, said
stave elements defining longitudinally extending flue gas
passages at the inner side of said upper portion of the inner
wall, which fiue gas passages are in communication with
the core region of said inner wall portion, and there being
a closure means for said core region at that end thereof
opposite said combustion chamber; and
wall means joining said inner wall construction to said outer
wall construction for forming a water jacket between such
inner and outer wall constructions and for relieving the
boiler construction of destructive mechanical stresses due
to unequal thermal stresses which occur in normal opera-
"^ (' f
tion of the boiler, said wall means comprising first and
second annular wall portions of different radial widths
respectively extending radially between the upper end of
said upper portion of the inner wall and the outer wall and
between the lower end of said combustion chamber and
the outer wall whereby the spacing between the inner and
outer wall constructions and the spacing between said
annular wall portions defines a relatively small volume
such that water therein is heated rapidly to temperature,
inlet and outlet means for flowing water into said small
volume, said skirt which defines the combustion chamber
having its upper end of a diameter substantially the same
as the diameter of said upper portion of the inner wall and
having its lower end of a different diameter so that the
radial width of one of the annular wall portions is suffi-
ciently greater than the radial width of the other annular
wall portion as to relieve said boiler construction of said
destructive thermal and mechanical stresses.
4,394,849
VAPOR GENERATOR HAVING DRAINABLE TUBE
BENDS AROUND BURNER OPENINGS EXTENDING
THROUGH FURNACE BOUNDARY WALLS FORMED IN
PART BY ANGULARLY EXTENDING FLUID FLOW
TUBES
Harry H. Pratt, deceased, late of West Orange, N.J., by Mary
D. Pratt, executrix, and William J. Gill, New York, N.Y.,
assignors to Foster Wheeler Energy Corporation, Livingston,
N.J.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,122
Int. a.3 F22B 15/00. 25/00, 37/10
U.S. a. 122—235 K 7 Claims
1. A vapor generator comprising a plurality of tubes con-
nected together and arranged to form at least a portion of the
boundary walls of a gas-tight enclosure; at least one opening
extending through at least one of said boundary walls; a series
of adjacent tubes extending around at least a portion of said
opening with one of said tubes of said series extending in the
plane of said one boundary wall and the other tubes of said
July 26, 19
If
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1333
series respectively extending in additional planes spaced from
each other and from said first plane; at least one additional
series of adjacent tubes extending around said first series, with
one of said tubes of said additional series extending in the plane
of said one boundary wall and the other tubes of said additional
wall section of said outer wall means, thereby forming
first and second coolant passages which are separate and
independent from each other, each coolant passage being
defined between said side wall section and said cylinder
row structure, the top surface of each connecting wall
means lying on said common plane.
4,394,851
DECOMPRESSION DEVICE IN AN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Josef Greier, and Colin T. Pomfret, both of Graz, Austria, as-
signors to Hans List, Graz, Austria
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,279
Claims priority, application Austria, Apr. 15, 1980, 2038/80
Int. a.3 FOIL li/08
U.S. CI. 123—182 5 Claims
series extending in said additional planes, respectively; said
tubes extending at an acute angle with respect to a horizontal
plane for the entire lengths of said tubes; burner means register-
ing with said opening to apply heat to said enclosure; and
means for passing fluid through said tubes to apply said heat to
said fluid.
4,394,850
CYLINDER BLOCK FOR AUTOMOTIVE INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE
Yoshimasa Hayashi, Kamakura, Japan, assignor to Nissan
Motor Company, Limited, Yokohama City, Japan
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 302,238
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-128400;
Sep. 17, 1980, 55-131882[U]
Int. a.5 FOIP i/02
U.S. CI. 123-41.74 7 Oaims
1. A cylinder block for an automotive in-line multiple-cylin-
der internal combustion engine, comprising:
outer wall means including oppositely located first and
second end wall sections, and oppositely located first and
second side wall sections, the top surface of said wall
sections being continuous and lying on a common plane;
an elongate cylinder row structure spacedly located within
said outer wall means, said cylinder row structure includ-
ing a plurality of cylinder sections whose neighbounng
cylinder sections are integrally connected with each
other, said cylinder sections containing first and second
extreme cylinder sections located at the opposite extremi-
ties of said cylinder row structure and positioned in the
vicinity of said first and second end wall sections of said
outer wall means, each cylinder section being formed with
a cylinder bore therein, the top surface of said cylinder
row structure lying on said common plane; and
first and second connecting wall means located between said
outer wall means and said cylinder row structure, said first
connecting wall means integrally connecting said first
extreme cylinder section with said first end wall section,
said second connecting wall means integrally connecting
said second extreme cylinder section with said second end
1. A decompression device for an internal combustion en-
gine having at least one cylinder, at least one valve, and a
camshaft including at least one cam having a base circle cam
surface, said decompression device comprising:
a controllable operating spindle mounted on said engine and
extending along the length of and parallel to said cam-
shaft;
at least one decompression cam disposed on said operating
spindle and provided for each said at least one cylinder;
a follower element for transmitting an operative lift of said
camshaft cam to said valve;
a ratchet wheel connected to said spindle;
a trip element coacting with said ratchet wheel for restoring
said decompression cam to an original position;
a decompression lever having one end for contacting said
follower element and being articulately disposed between
said decompression cam and said follower element;
a vertically adjustable bearing contacting the other end of
said decompression lever; and
spring means for articulately mounting said decompression
lever on said adjustable bearing and for applying said
decompression lever to said decompression cam under
spring loading, said at least one decompression cam being
controllable to cause said decompression lever to selec-
tively maintain said follower element in a decompression
position with said follower element being spaced apart
from said base circle cam surface.
4,394,852
COWL MOUNTED PULSE CONTROL START VALVE
Charles H. Tuckey, Cass City, and Alan D. Romig, Gagetown,
both of Mich., assignors to Walbro Corporation, Cass Qty,
Mich. ,^
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,787
Int. a.3 F02M 1/16
U.S. CI. 123-187.5 R ^ Claims
1. A system for priming a carburetor for an internal combus-
tion engine which comprises:
(a) a conduit connected to the body of an engine to receive
and conduct pulses from said engine, said conduit being
directly connected to a carburetor having a fuel and air
mixing passage operatively associated with said engine
1334
OFFICIAL GAiZETTE
July 26, 1983
wherein pulses in said conduit will propel fuel into the
mixing passage of said carburetor,
(b) a valve in said conduit located remote from said engine
having a manually movable part to close said conduit in
one position and to open said conduit in a second position,
(c) said valve comprising a valve body having a bore ens-
mailed at one end to provide a valve seat, and said mov-
able part comprising a plunger slidable in and guided by
said bore, and a valve element on one end of said plunger
to cooperate with said valve seat,
(d) said valve plunger having an actuating stem on the other
end extending from said body, and an actuating lever
-.r^
-40
pivoted on a first axis on said stem, a spring urging said
plunger toward a valve closed position, and a plurality of
surfaces on said lever spaced at respective angles around
said first axis to bear selectively against said body in se-
lected positions of said lever to control the position of said
valve element relative to said valve seat, and
(e) said plurality of surfaces comprising two flat surfaces
lying in planes parallel to the said first axis and contiguous
to a comer surface, said corner surface forming a third
surface, each surface to position said valve element, re-
spectively, in a closed position relative to said valve seat,
a maximum open position, and an intermediate position.
4^94,853
ENGINE OIL PAN ISOLATION MOUNTING
Jose M. Lopez-Crevillen, Westland, and John W. Huber, Plym-
outh, both of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corporation,
Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 275,739
Int. a.3 F02F 7/00
U.S. a. 123—195 C 3 Claims
1. In combination in a combustion engine,
a crankcase having a pair of laterally spaced longitudinally
extending generally parallel side rails connected laterally
at their ends by end elements, said side rails and end ele-
ments having downwardly facing sealing surfaces com-
prising an oil pan receiving surface and fastener receiving
openings through said side rail sealing surfaces,
an oil pan defining an open topped downwardly closed
container with a peripheral flange extending laterally
outward from open upper edges of the container, said
flange having a top surface sealingly engageable with the
oil pan receiving surface and spaced parallel side portions
supportingly attached to said crankcase side rails, said side
portions having openings aligned with said side rail open-
ings,
a resilient vibration absorbing seal attached to said flange,
said seal having an upper sealing portion extending along
and clamped between said flange top surface and said oil
pan receiving surface and peripheral retaining and isolat-
ing lips depending from said upper sealing px)rtion and
extending beneath said flange to secure the seal on the
flange prior to assembly to the crankcase, said seal having
openings through said sealing portion and said lips and
aligned with said crankcase side rail openings and said oil
pan side portion openings, and
securing means, including fasteners engaging said side rails
and abutting support members engaging said seal isolating
lips and urging said lips against the oil pan flange, to
compress a predetermined limited amount the seal upper
sealing portion between the flange and the oil pan receiv-
ing surface and the seal lips between the flange and the
support members to thereby maintain sound isolating
sealing enegagement between the oil pan and the crank-
case and sound isolating engagement between the oil pan
and the securing means,
said support members including sleeves extending through
said seal and oil pan openings and engaging said crankcase
side rails to limit compression of said seal, said fasteners
extending through said sleeves to said side rails, said oil
pan openings being large enough to avoid engagement
with said sleeves and said seal openings being small
enough to grip the sleeves upon assembly of the support
members with the seal and oil pan to retain these members
together for assembly to the crankcase.
4,394,854
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR SEPARABLY
CONNECTING CRANKSHAFTS IN INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINES
Lothar Huber, Biihl-AItschweier, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Luk Lamellen und Kupplungsbau GmbH, Biihl, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,890
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 13,
1980, 3005343
Int. a.^ F02D 17/02
U.S. a. 123—198 F
53aaims
! - -27
1. A method of establishing a separable connection between
a rotating flrst crankshaft and a second crankshaft in an inter-
nal combustion engine wherein the flrst and second crankshafts
respectively form part of discrete first and second units and the
first and second units respectively further comprise first and
second cylinder means for rotating the respective crankshafts
and first and second camshafts rotating with the respective
crankshafts, comprising the steps of accelerating the second
crankshaft through the medium of the first camshaft; and
thereupon connecting the second crankshaft with the rotating
first crankshaft.
July 26, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1335
4 394 855
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE WITH
EXTERNALLY SUPPLIED IGNITION HAVING AN
IGNITION CHAMBER ASSOCIATED WITH THE MAIN
COMBUSTION CHAMBER
Reinhard Latsch, Vaihingen; Ernst Linder, Muhlacker; Helmut
Maurer, Horrheim; Klaus MUUer, Tamm, and Franz Rieger,
Aalen-Wasseralfingen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 261,413
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rg). of Germany, May 10,
1980, 3017948
Int. Q\> F02B 19/12
U.S. a. 123-254 1* Cla'^s
valve means operatively positioned to normally block flow of
fuel from the control chamber to the fuel return passage, the
improvement wherein a variable flow orifice means is opera-
tively associated with the fuel return passage next adjacent to
the solenoid valve means that is operative to control the pres-
sure of fuel in said fuel return passage upstream of said variable
p-ri-
M^
." " t
^
"r
T 1 ^
/ n\
-- - ' -^
i
""
--' -i
lIlL
^ -A
1 An internal combustion engine having a main combustion
chamber with externally supplied ignition having an ignition
chamber associated with said main combustion chamber, said
ignition chamber arranged to communicate directly with said
main combustion chamber via a discharge means and separated
therefrom by a first wall in which said discharge means is
formed and which partitions ofi" said ignition chamber from
said main combustion chamber, said discharge means including
a first overflow conduit which is formed by a nozzle that
protrudes into said ignition chamber and through which a fuel
mixture is directed from said main combustion chamber to said
ignition chamber, said discharge means further including at
least one additional overflow conduit arranged to discharge a
fuel mixture tangentially into an annular chamber formed
between an outer circumference of said nozzle and a portion of
said ignition chamber wall surrounding said nozzle, said igni-
tion chamber having an ignition device including an electrode
terminating radially across the annular chamber from the end
of said nozzle which forms a radial spark gap with said nozzle
directed toward said wall of said ignition chamber, a heat pipe
disposed in a wall of said nozzle and at least in a portion of the
ignition chamber wall adjoining cooled portions of the engine
and surrounding said nozzle.
flow orifice means as a function of engine speed and load when
the solenoid valve means is energized so as to regulate the flow
of fuel from the fuel control chamber whereby to control
engine compression operation of the cylinder means and
thereby to correspondingly regulate the rate of fuel injection
from the fuel injector as a function of engine speed and load.
4,394,857
INSERT FOR A STOVE
Samuel J. lannone, 15 W. Willow St., Beacon, N.Y. 12508
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 268,005
Int. C\} F24C l/QO
U.S. a. 126-60 *0 Claims
If
4,394,856
COMPRESSION OPERATED INJECTOR WITH FUEL
INJECTION CONTROL
Richard H. Smith, Birmingham, and Donald J. Armstrong, Troy,
both of Mich., assignors to General Motors Corporation,
Detroit, Mich.
I iFiled Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,657
I I Int. CI.' F02M 49/02
US CI 123—506 2 Qaims
V In a compression operated diesel fuel injector for use with
an internal combustion engine, the fuel injector being of the
type having a housing means with a compression operated
cylinder means and piston means operatively associated there-
with- the cylinder means and piston means defining an injec-
tion pump chamber and also defining with the housing means
a fuel control chamber; the housing means having a supply
passage to the fuel control chamber for supplying fuel thereto
and a fuel return passage from the control chamber for the
retu'm of fuel to a source of low pressure fuel; and, a solenoid
L A stove comprising: ., h
an outer rear wall, an outer front wall and outer side walls
connected to said outer rear and front walls;
a plurality of inner walls located within said outer walls and
including an inner rear wall and inner side walls con-
nected to said inner rear wall, said inner walls being
spaced from said outer rear walls, said spacing between
said outer and inner walls defining a first gap;
a base including a base rear wall and base side walls con-
nected to said base rear wall, said base rear wall being
spaced from said inner rear wall and said base side walls
1336
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
being spaced from said inner side walls to define a second
gap;
a grate and grate support means on said base walls for re-
movably mounting said grate on said base walls, said grate
including bars having bumps projecting upwardly there-
from;
grate moving means for moving said grate;
first air flow directing plate means on said base for deflecting
air into an area located beneath said grate;
means for removably mounting a second air flow directing
means on said base for directing air flow to a coal fire ori
said grate; and
granular heat transfer means located in said second gap for
modulating heat transferred from said insert member to
said stove outer walls, said heat transfer means including a
mixture of a first material having a high thermal conduc-
tivity and a second material having a low thermal conduc-
tivity.
from said heliostat field and reradiate heat energy to pro-
duce heated air in the vicinity of said slats; and
4,394,858
PHOTOCHEMICAL CONVERSION AND STORAGE OF
LIGHT ENERGY BY ENDOERGIC ISOMERIZATIONS
Paul J. Giordano, Hudson, and Richard C. Smierciak, Warrens-
ville, both of Ohio, assignors to Standard Oil Company, Cleve-
land, Ohio
Filed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,589
Int. a.3 F24H 7/00: F24J i/02
U.S. a. 126—400 10 Qaims
1. A process for the capture and storage of radiant energy
comprising exposing an oxidatively stable photocatalyst to said
radiant energy in the presence of a reversibly isomerizable
carbon containing compound, wherein said photocatalyst
comprises a carbonyl compound of a metal selected from Re,
Ir, Rh, Ru, Os, Pt and Pd and wherein said isomerizable com-
pound is capable of forming an intramolecular strained carbon
containing ring structure.
4394,859
CENTRAL SOLAR ENERGY RECEIVER
M. Kevin Drost, Richland, Wash., granted to U.S. Department
of Energy under the provision of 42 U.S.C. 2182
Filed Oct. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 315,397
Int. Q\? F24J i/02
U.S. a. 126-438 6 Oaims
1. An improved point focus central solar energy receiver,
mounted on top of a tower surronded by a heliostat field, for
heating air, in the vicinage of said receiver, which is then
drawn by a low pressure, induced draft fan through ductworlc
having an air inlet orifice on top of said tower, wherein the
improvement comprises:
(a) a first plurality of solar energy absorbing, spaced-apart,
and generally vertically oriented, elongated fin-shaped
slats disposed in a first pluralism of concentric cylindrical
arrays having a common axis and surrounding said air
inlet orifice, with each of said slats generally radially
oriented with respect to said axis and with said slats of
adjacent said arrays not radially aligned with respect to
each other, and wherein said slats absorb said solar energy
(b) means for distributing airflow of said heated air, which is
pulled by said fan, from said vicinity of said slats to said air
inlet orifice.
4,394,860
SOLAR LIGHT BULB
Derrick A. Smith, P.O. Box 1974, Hollywood, Fla. 33020
Filed Sep. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 191,122
Int. a.3 F23J 3/02
U.S. a. 126-439 14 Qaims
1. A system for generating light directly using solar energy
comprising:
(a) a single master concentrator and accumulator for the
sun's rays to generate a concentrated beam of visible solar
radiation;
(b) a single master distributor shaft for distributing said beam
of visible solar radiation as a collimated light;
(c) a fork in said single master distributor shaft providing a
pair of branch shafts extending in opposite directions, the
fork being provided with a pair of mirrors to direct said
collimated light beam along each branch shaft, each
branch shaft being provided with a plurality of light-ray
conducting tubes extending at right angles to said branch
shaft, each branch shaft being provided with a mirror at
the intersection of said branch shaft with said light-ray
conducting tube to direct said beam down each said light-
ray conducting tube by reflecting parallel fractions of said
beam, the cross-sectional area of said branch shaft de-
creasing as the distance from the fork increases;
(d) a solar bulb operatively associated with each light-ray
conducting tube, said solar bulb including a double walled
upper bulbous portion providing an inlet from said light-
ray conducting tube and a pair of heat outlet tubes, and a
July 26, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1337
double walled lower bulbous portion, the upper portion
thereof being divergently reflective, with the lower por-
tion having walls which are either transparent or translu-
cent to provide greater light diffusion, and the space
first end of the conduction means connected to the con-
nection means for conducting ram air scooped from out-
side the aircraft by the ram air source means into the
conduction means, the second end of the conduction
means being freely movable within the aircraft in relation
to the connection means and the ram air source means for
positioning the second end of the conduction means near
a face of a user,
support means connected to the second end of the conduc-
tion means for supporting the second end of the conduc-
tion means near a face of a user,
attachment means connected to the support means for at-
taching the support means to a user,
distribution means connected to the support means and
connected to the second end of the conduction means for
distributing substantially unpressurized, free flowing ram
air from the ram air source and the conduction means to a
facial area of a user, thus providing emergency outside
ram air from outside of an aircraft to a user inside of the
aircraft whereby a small aircraft controlled by the user
may be flown to a safe landing area and safely landed
during an emergency in which smoke or noxious fumes fill
an interior of the small aircraft.
between the two walls being maintained under vacuum to
provide heat insulation values;
and (e) means within said solar bulb for the absorption and
radiation of said concentrated beam of visible solar radia-
tion.
4,394,862
METERING APPARATUS WITH DOWNLINE PRESSURE
MONITORING SYSTEM
Norm Shim, Glenview, 111., assignor to Baxter Travenol Labora-
tories, Inc., Deerfield, III.
Filed Aug. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 180,939
Int. a.' A61M 5/00
U.S. CI. 604—67 6 Oaims
4 394 861
OUTSIDE AIR BREATHING SUPPLY SYSTEM
Lawrence A. Sciortino, 313 Yacht Qub Dr., Fort Walton Beach,
Fla. 32548
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,232
Int. C1.3 A62B 7/00
U.S. a. 128—205.25 13 Oaims
1. Small aircraft low altitude emergency outside ram air
breathing supply apparatus comprising:
ram air source means for scooping external ram air from
outside of an aircraft, the ram air source means having an
inlet adapted to be mounted outside of an aircraft and an
outlet adapted to be mounted inside of an aircraft, said ram
air source means including mounting means adapted to be
mounted in a surface structure of the aircraft,
opening and closing means connected to the ram air source
means and extending inward in the aircraft for selectively
opening and closing the ram air source means and thereby
selectively scooping external ram air from outside of the
aircraft,
connection means connected to the outlet of the ram air
source means inside the aircraft for connecting a conduc-
tion means to the ram air source means,
ram air conduction means having first and second ends, the
1. A flow system for infusing a fluid from a supply reservoir
into the human body, comprising, in combination:
a length of flexible-walled tubing extending from the supply
reservoir to the body;
metering means continuously including at least one pressure
member compressively engaged to the sidewall of said
tubing for occluding the lumen thereof;
drive means for advancing the point of engagement of said
pressure member along a segment of said tubing to urge
fluid through said tubing;
downline pressurization means comprising a plunger spring-
biased agamst said tubing downline of said tubing segment
for continuously at least partially restricting the lumen of
said tubing to increase the pressure of the fluid within said
segment downline of said point of engagement;
pressure sensing means including a pressure transducer oper-
atively engaging said tubing downline of said pressuriza-
tion means for producing an output signal havmg a level
1338
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
continuously indicative of the downline pressure level in
the tubing; and
pressure monitor circuit means responsive to said output
signal for terminating operation of said drive means in the
event said pressure level reaches a predetermined maxi-
mum level.
continues through said by-pass bulge and outwardly
through said needle.
4,394,863
AUTOMATIC INJECTOR WITH CARTRIDGE HAVING
SEPARATE SEQUENTIALLY INJECTABLE
MEDICAMENTS
Elliot Bartner, Piscataway, N.J., assignor to Survival TechnoN
ogy. Inc., Bethesda, Md.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,381
Int. a.^ A61M 5/00
U.S. a. 604—90 5 Qaims
1. In an automatic injecting device mcluding an elongated
housing assembly having a forward end, stressed spring means
mounted within said housing so as to be released in response to
a predetermined manual actuation procedure, and a medica-
ment injection cartridge assembly mounted within said housing
assembly in cooperating relation with said stressed spring
means, the improvement which comprises said medicament
injection cartridge assembly comprising
a medicament container,
a hypodermic needle disposed forwardly of said container
mounted in a sterile condition within said housing assem-
bly adjacent the forward end thereof,
forward seaing means for sealing the forward end of said
container from said hypodermic needle,
a rearward piston mounted in the rearward end of said
container for forward movement therein in slidably sealed
relation thereto,
- a plurality of individual dosages of different relatively in-
compatible liquid medicaments within said container be-
tween said forward sealing means and said piston, said
plurality of dosages including a forward dosage and a
rearward dosage,
movable interior sealing means within the interior of said
container between said piston and said forward sealing
means maintaining the individual dosages sealingly sepa-
rated from one another, said interior sealing means com-
prising an intermediate piston between said forward and
rearward dosages mounted for forward movement within
said container in slidably sealed relation thereto,
means operable in response to the manual accomplishment
of said manual actuating procedure and the resultant re-
lease of said stressed spring means for moving said hypo-
dermic needle forwardly and outwardly of said housing
assembly into the muscle tissue of a patient and said piston
forwardly into said container so that the plurality of indi-
vidual dosages therein are moved forwardly out of sealed
relation with respect to said forward and interior sealing
means outwardly through said needle into the muscle
tissue of the patient,
said manual actuating procedure responsive means compris-
ing a by-pass bulge in the peripheral wall of said container
adjacent the forward end thereof of an axial extent suffi-
cient to enable the forward movement of said rearward
dosage to move said intermediate piston forwardly into a
by-pass position adjacent the forward end of said con-
V — -^ner during which said forward dosage is moved for-
wardly and outwardly through said needle and following
which the forward movement of the rearward dosage
4,394,864
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR EFFECTING
OCCLUSION OF THE VAS DEFERENS
Jeffrey Sandhaus, Rte. 9W, Snedens Landing, Palisades, N.Y.
10964
Filed Apr. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 254,393
Int. a.J A61B 17/12. 17/28
U.S. a. 128—321 18 Oaims
30a ^4 l^
iOo. '24
15. Apparatus for occluding a vessel in a body, particularly
the vas deferens in a vasectomy, comprising:
a locking clip delivering instrument including a pair of jaw
members pivotally coupled to each other for pivotal actu-
ation between closed and open positions, said jaw mem-
bers each tapering in a forward direction to a sharp point
such that said clip delivering instrument, when said jaw
members are in the closed position, constitutes a sharp
pointed instrument capable of puncturing body tissue, said
pair of jaw members deHning an interior space between
them for receiving a substantially U-shaped locking clip,
said interior space tapering in the direction towards said
pointed ends of said jaw members when said jaw members
are in the closed position,
a substantially U-shaped locking clip of the self-locking type
positionable within said interior space between said jaw
members such that when said jaws are in a closed position
and said clip is in a position distal from said pointed ends
of said jaw members, said clip is in an unlocked mode and
when said instrument is actuated to an open position the
clip is opened to an extent such that the vessel to be oc-
cluded is receivable therein;
means for actuating said jaw members between closed and
opened positions; and
means for positioning the clip member within said interior
space between said jaw members to a position proximal to
said pointed ends of said jaw members such that when said
jaw members are actuated to the closed position, said clip
is closed and locked.
4,394,865
APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING LEVELS OF
PHYSICAL LOADS
Georgy I. Sidorenko; Vladimar I. Stankevich; Vitaly V. Katsy-
gin, and Georgy P. Lopato, all of Minsk, U.S.S.R., assignors
to Belomssky Nauchnoissledovatelsky Institut Kardiologii,
Minsk, U.S^.R.
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,269
Claims priority, application U.S.S.R., May 22, 1980, 2920298;
May 22, 1980, 2920300
Int a.3 A61B 5/10
U.S. a. 128—782 7 Claims
1. An apparatus for determining levels of physical loads,
comprising:
a housing;
a seismic mass constituted by a permanent magnet;
elastic suspension means for securing said seismic mass in
July 26, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1339
said housing for movement in a given direction in re-
sponse to movement of a user carrying the housing;
a first switching element positioned in said housing along the
direction of movement of said seismic mass and consti-
tuted by a group of magnetically operated hermetically
sealed changeover contacts including a normally open
contact, a normally closed contact and a common contact;
a second switching element positioned in said housing along
the direction of movement of said seismic mass and consti-
tuted by a pair of magnetically operated hermetically
sealed normally open contacts, one of which is connected
to said common contact of said first switching element;
an indicator positioned in said housing and including a first
indicating element for indicating a first, minimum level of
physical load and having a first termmal and a second
terminal, a second indicating element for indicating a
second level of physical load greater than the minimum
level and having a first terminal and a second terminal,
and a third indicating element for indicating a third level
of physical load greater than the second level and having
a first terminal and a second terminal, said first terminal of
said first indicating element of said indicator being con-
nected to said normally open contact of said first switch-
ing element, said first terminal of said second indicating
connected to the electrical conductor adjacent one end of the
conductor, and S-A Node helix, said helix extending from the
electrode tip toward the other end of the electrical conductor
INFERIOR
VENA CAwA
a distance of 6 to 12 inches and having at least one-and-a-half
turns and a non-conductive biocompatable coating encasing
the electrical conductor except the electrode tip.
4,394,867
SUCTION ARRANGEMENT IN A BOTTLE-CLEANING
MACHINE FOR REMOVING OF LABELS FROM
BOTTLES
Joachim Ciongwa; Werner Heckmann, both of Dortmund; Klaus
Jendrichowski, Holzwickede; Karl Quest, Dortmund; Chris-
tian Riippell, Unna, and Wolfgang Siishardt, Dortmund, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Holstein und Kappert
GmbH, Dortmund, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 275,514
Int. a.' B08B 15/00
U.S. a. 134—104 7 Qaims
element of said indicator being connected to said normally
closed contact of said first switching element, and said
first terminal of said third indicating element of said indi-
cator being connected to the other of said normally open
contacts of said second switching element;
a power supply unit having a first output terminal and a
second output terminal, said first output terminal being
connected to said common contact of said first switching
element; and
a cut-out switch having a first terminal and a second termi-
nal, said first terminal of said cut-out switch being con-
nected to said second output terminal of said power sup-
ply unit and said second terminal of said cut-out switch
being connected to said second terminals of said first,
second and third indicating elements, said first and said
second switching elements being positioned with respect
to the direction of movement of said mass such that move-
ment of said mass resulting from changes in levels of
physical loads energizes said first indicating element when
the level of physical load is less than the second level,
energizes said second indicating element when the level of
physical load is between said first and said third levels, and
energizes said third indicating element when the level of
physical load reaches the third level.
1 1 4,394,866
S-A NODE HELICAL LEAD FOR ATRIAL PACEMAKERS
AND METHOD OF PLACEMENT
Howard C. Hughes, Cornwall, Pa., assignor to Research Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 226,831
Int. C1.5 A61N 1/04
U.S. a. 128—785 5 Qaims
1. An improved electrically conductive lead for at least S-A
Node Atrium Contoct to provide atrium pacing and sensing
comprising an electrical conductor having a lumen there
through, an electrode tip, said electrode tip being electrically
1. In a bottle-cleaning machine, a suction arrangement for
removing of labels from bottles comprising a label-softening
container adapted to contain a liquid and having a bottom; a
plurality of elongated bottle-receiving cells having each an
open end for insertion of bottles with labels into the cells and
for withdrawing the bottles after the labels have been removed
therefrom, said bottle-receiving cells having each opposite said
open end a plurality of openings for the passage of liquid into
the cells, said cells having axes and retaining the bottle in
axially displaceable manner; conveyor means for transporting
the cells with bottles inserted therein through said label-soften-
ing container and above its bottom; means for causing a stream
of liquid from said softening container to detach and transport
the labels and including wall means defining a suction compart-
ment within said label-softening container and having a bottom
portion upwardly spaced from said bottom and being formed
in said bottom portion with a single opening having a width at
least equal to the width of said open end of each cell as consid-
ered in the direction of movement of said cell, said conveyor
means being arranged to transport said bottle-receiving cells
with said open ends thereof under and closely adjacent to said
bottom portion of said wall means past said single opening
therein, said means for causing a stream of liquid further in-
eluding means for sucking liquid from said suction compart-
1340
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
ment arranged so that a stream of liquid forcedly flows up-
wardly from said label-softening container via said openings of
said cells through said cells, then leaves said cells through said
open ends thereof, flows upwardly into said suction compart-
ment through said opening in said bottom portion of said wall
means of said suction compartment, and then is discharged into
said label-softening container, whereby under the action of the
suction-caused stream of liquid the labels are loosened from the
bottles inside said cells, transported through said open ends of
the cells into said suction compartment, and then withdrawn
from the latter; and means arranged above and adjacent said
cells to prevent said bottles to leave said cells through said
open ends under the influence of the stream of liquid passing
therethrough and tending to displace the bottles.
4,394,868
HORIZONTAL DISCHARGE ASSEMBLY FOR
VERTICALLY ORIENTED FIRE EXTINGUISHER
Bruce McLelland, Blue Springs, Mo., assignor to Fike Metal
Products Corporation, Blue Springs, Mo.
Filed Dec. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 211,696
Int. a.J F16K 13/04
U.S. a. 137—68 A 6 Qaims
I. A horizontal discharge hazard suppression assembly,
comprising:
a tank for holding a pressurized hazard suppression material
and having a lower outlet;
an elongated, gently arcuate tubular elbow operatively se-
cured to said tank outlet and in open communication with
the interior of said tank;
a selectively operable, rupturable disc;
means mounting said disc in closing relationship to said
elbow and adjacent the outlet end of said elbow remote
from said tank;
structure for mounting said tank and elbow adjacent a zone
to be protected from hazard, with said tank being gener-
ally upright and said outlet end of said elbow being ori-
ented generally horizontally, such that said material is
disposed within said tank and elbow and bears directly
against said disc; and
means for rupturing said disc in response to the presence of
a preselected hazardous condition within said zone such
that said material flows directly from said outlet end of
said elbow into said zone.
ing a force to alter the force applied by said bias member to
said flapper, said mechanism comprising a pivoted lever for
altering the force applied by saic^ bias member to said flapper as
said lever is swung back and forth, said mechanism further
comprising first and second actuators for producing first and
second forces as functions of first and second variable signals,
respectively, the improvement in said pneumatic controller
comprising, means for receiving said first and second forces
■j- :i <.
jCU^ Ml
and for causing said lever to be positioned with a force which
varies as a function of the sum of the weighted values of said
first and second forces, said force receiving means comprising
a second lever extending transversely of and pivotally
mounted on said one lever to turn about a predetermined axis
relative to said one lever, said actuators acting on said second
lever so as to cause said second lever to pivot in one direction
when said first force increases and to pivot in the opposite
direction when said second force increases.
4,394,870
SYSTEM FOR MIXING CONCENTRATE AND WATER
TO FORM FOUNTAIN SOLUTION FOR OFFSET
PRINTING PRESSES
John MacPhee, Rowayton; David Wirth, Norwalk, both of
Conn., and John St. John, Blue Jay, Calif., assignors to Bald-
win-Gegenheimer Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 793,716, May 4, 1977, abandoned. This
application Oct. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 314,012
Int. a.3 G05D U/02
U.S. a. 137—99 5 Qaims
4,394,869
RESET CONTROLLER WITH IMPROVED INPUT
MECHANISM
Gilbert H. Avery, Memphis, Tenn., assignor to Barber-Colman
Company, Rockford, III.
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331^2
Int. a.J G05D 16/06
U.S. a. 137—82 5 Qaims
1. A pneumatic controller for providing a pneumatic control
signal, said controller comprising a pneumatic control signal
bleed nozzle, a flapper associated with said nozzle, means for
applying a force tending to move said flapper in one direction
relative to said nozzle, a bias member for applying a force
tending to move said flapper in the opposite direction relative
to said nozzle, said pneumatic control signal varying as a func-
tion of the position of said flapper, and mechanism for produc-
1. A system for continuously and automatically mixing con-
centrate and water to form fountain solution comprising:
(a) a water motor including a reciprocating piston having a
stroke of fixed distance;
(b) first water motor valve having first and second operating
chambers;
(c) a second water motor valve having a first and second
operating chambers;
(d) a first conduit at one end of said water motor adapted to
communicate with first and second operating chambers of
said first water motor valve;
July 26, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1341
(e) a second conduit at the other end of said water motor
adapted to communicate with said first and second operat-
ing chambers of said second water motor valve;
(0 third water conduit means extending from one of said
operating chambers in said first and second water motor
valves;
(g) a concentrate pump having a cylinder and piston therein
and adjustable means interconnecting said water motor
piston and said concentrate pump piston;
(h) a concentrate valve in fluid communication with said
concentrate pump;
(i) a concentrate conduit extending from said concentrate
valve into fluid communication with said third water
conduit means to form a mixing conduit for mixing con-
centrate and water;
(j) pneumatic means operatively associated with said water
motor pistons and said water motor valves to move said
water motor piston to cause water to flow into or out of
said first and second operating chambers of said first and
second water motor valves and into said third conduit
means;
(k) pneumatic means operatively associated with said con-
centrate pump and said concentrate valve for causing
concentrate to flow through said concentrate valve and
into said mixing conduit;
(1) pneumatic valve means for actuating said pneumatic
means; and
(m) means connected to said reciprocating water motor
piston for actuating said pneumatic valve means.
4,394,871
PROGRAMMABLE PRESSURE REGULATOR FOR
TITANIUM SUPERPLASTIC FORMING APPARATUS
Dennis C. Czajka, and David P. Nordstrand, both of Bellevue,
Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
Faed Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,786
Int. Q\} G05D U/OO
U.S. a. 137—115 7 Qaims
X
^HTTTt/h <Trix}>
'30
f^
n
jiteui! »
apply an electrical signal to said first electrically respon-
sive valve means in the event the difference between said
electrical signal from said pressure-sensing means and said
low set point signal represents a pressure in said forming
chamber less than said lower pressure limit, said compara-
tor means further operating to provide an electrical signal
to said first electrically responsive valve means in the
event the difference between said upper set point signal
and said signal from said pressure-sensing means repre-
sents a gas pressure in said chamber greater than said
upper pressure limit.
4,394,872
VALVE ASSEMBLY FOR PACKING REMOVAL
Howard T. SchobI, Coraopolis, Pa., assignor to SchobI Enter-
prises, Inc., Imperial, Pa.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,535
Int. Q.' F16K 41/02, 41/14
U.S. Q. 137—315 8 Qaims
1. An apparatus for controlling gas pressure in a metal form-
ing chamber comprising:
a source of pressurized gas;
first electrically responsive valve means interposed between
said source of pressurized gas and said forming chamber
and operable in response to an electrical signal to admit
gas from said pressurized source to said forming chamber;
second electrically responsive valve means coupled to said
forming chamber, said second valve means being operable
in response to an electrical signal to bleed gas from said
forming chamber;
pressure-sensing means coupled to said forming chamber,
said sensing means being operable to produce a signal
representative of the pressure of said gas in said chamber;
a profile generator operable to produce time varying high
and low set point signals representative of preselected
upper and lower pressure limits of a series of linear profile
segments, each segment enduring for a predetermined
period of time during which said set point signal varies
linearly from a first set point level to a second set point
level;
comparator means for comparing said electrical signal from
said pressure-sensing means with each of said high and
low set point signals, said comparator means operating to
1. In a valve including a valve body having a flow chamber
with a valve seat therein and a closure member to move in said
flow chamber relative to said seat, the combination compris-
ing,
a yoke supported by said valve body,
a bonnet having a packing chamber supported by said valve
body,
a valve stem extending from said yoke through said packing
chamber into said flow chamber for supporting said clo-
sure member,
stem drive means supported by said yoke and spaced from
said bonnet for displacing said valve stem in the direction
of its length along said packing chamber,
a packing gland detachably mounted and directly connected
to the bonnet for slideably receiving said stem with a
lower portion of said packing gland extending into said
packing chamber for holding packing therein,
said packing circumposed about an intermediate portion of
said stem within said packing chamber below said lower
portion of said packing gland, and
packing removal means circumposed about said stem below
said packing, said packing removal means including a
drive ring adapted to engage a bottom portion of said
packing, said packing removal means further including a
collar member on said valve stem in said flow chamber to
engage said drive ring independently of said closure mem-
ber for displacing said packing from said packing chamber
externally of said bonnet, said packing removal means
applying an upwardly directed force to said packing by
operation of said stem drive means after detachment of
said packing gland from said bonnet.
1342
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26. 1983
4^94,873
FLUID VALVE WITH COMPRESSIBLE CHANNEL
Thomas G. Switall, WheeUng, III., assignor to Ryco Graphic
Manufacturing, Inc., Wheeling, lU.
Filed Apr. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 145,370
Int. a.3 F16K 31/143
U.S. a. 137—613 16 Claims
sleeve and said housing and having one end proximal to and
another end remote from said recess; at least one axially mov-
able annular piston bounding said chamber at least at said other
end thereof; locking means in the region of said recess for
locking the plug valve in the latter, said sleeve being movable
axially out of a securing position in which said locking means
lock said plug valve, into release positions in which the locking
means release the plug valve; means for admitting pressure
fluid into said chamber to urge said piston to bear in said secur-
1. A fluid valve for regulating the delivery of fluid through
a passageway, said fluid valve comprising:
a. a valve seat in the passageway, said valve seat including an
inside wall slightly tapered along the longitudinal axis of
the passageway such that a cross-sectional dimension
across said inside wall decreases in the downstream direc-
tion;
b. a flow adjustment member at least partially disposed m,
and adjustable along the longitudinal axis of the passage-
way and including at its lower end a nozzle extending
from and of reduced diameter relative to an upper portion
of said flow adjustment member;
c. an elastomeric valve element in said passageway upstream
of said valve seat and having a fluid conducting channel
therein, at least the portion of said valve element having a
cross-sectional dimension larger than the smallest cross-
sectional dimension of the tapered inside wall and said
valve element being attached to said flow adjustment
member nozzle for adjustable movement along said valve
seat so that said valve element portion will be increasingly
radially squeezed as it is moved in the downstream direc-
tion while m engagement with said tapered inside wall,
and said valve element will be allowed to radially expand,
as it is moved by said adjustment member in the upstream
direction,
d. a fluid conducting conduit through said flow adjustment
member in fluid communication with said valve element
channel; and
e. fluid interruption means disposed upstream of said valve
element and said valve seat for interrupting the fluid flow
to said passageway.
33 32 31 30 29 36
ing position of said sleeve against shoulders of said sleeve and
said housing, respectively, said shoulders being annular shoul-
ders; and biasing means urging said sleeve to said securing
position, ends of said chamber being closed off with said annu-
lar piston, said piston being subjected to said fluid and effect of
said biasing means, said piston being positioned for preventing
parts of said coupling from separating when subjected to the
force of said pressure fluid, said chamber closed off with said
piston subjecting said sliding sleeve and said housing to fluid
pressure for maintaining said sliding sleeve in sealing position.
4 394 875
ACTUATOR FOR A MINE ROOF SUPPORT UNIT
Walter Weirich, and Werner Grommas, both of Dortmund, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Gewerkschaft Eisenhutte West-
falla, Lunen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 247,029
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 29,
1980, 3012291
Int. a.3 F16K 31/52 "
U.S. a. 137—636.1 11 Claims
fin rrh
4,394,874
VALVE CONSTRUCTION FOR QUICK-CLOSURE
COUPLING
Friedrich C. Walter, Karlsruhe, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Argus Verwaltungsgesellschaft mbH, Ettlingen, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,943
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 23,
1980, 3015485
Int. a.3 F16L 37/28
U.S. a. 137—614.02 12 Claims
1. A socket valve, for use with a cooperating plug valve of
a quick-closure coupling for fluid lines, comprising: a fixed
housing; a sliding sleeve axially movable in said housing and
having an end recess for insertion of a plug valve portion; a
closure member on said sliding sleeve and biased to a closure
position; an annular chamber defined between said sliding
1. An actuator for use in the hydraulic control of a mine roof
support unit, the actuator comprising a housing, a plurality of
pairs of valves, and a respective common rocker arm for actu-
ating the valves of each pair of valves, the valves of each pair
of valves being detachably mounted in a respective pair of
generally parallel bores formed in the housing, each of the
rocker arms being mounted on a respective cover plate which
covers the mouths of the corresponding bores, and each of the
cover plates being detachably mounted on the housing,
wherein a sleeve is detachably mounted on the housing, the
sleeve being made of resilient material and extending away
from the housing to provide a protective surrounding for the
rocker arms, and wherein a resilient protective bellows is
arranged on. and extends across, the sleeve, the rocker arms
July 26, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1343
passing through respective apertures in the bellows which
thereby conprises means for biasing each of the rocker arms
into a position in which neither of the associated valves is
actuated.
4,394,877
WASTE FLUID RECEPTACLE
Lance Whyte, 5307 Queensberry Aye., Springfield, Va. 22151
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,525
Int. CI.' B65B 3/04
U.S. a. 141—98
4,394,876
CONTAINER HLLING MACHINE
Jonathan G. Brown, Rockford, III., assignor to Anderson Bros.
Mfg. Co., Rockford, III.
FUed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 316,982
Int. a.^ B65B 3/04
U.S. CI. 141—137 13 Qaims
1. A filling machine having a stationary support structure,
conveyor means for advancing containers along a generally
horizontal path with adjacent containers spaced apart a prese-
lected pitch distance, at least one valved dispenser assembly
for dispensing product into containers as they are advanced by
the conveyor means, the valved dispenser assembly including
a dispenser body having a product inlet and a downwardly
opening product outlet and dispenser valve means on the
dispenser body movable relative thereto between a closed
position blocking flow from the product inlet to the product
outlet and an open position for passing product from the prod-
uct inlet to the product outlet, dispenser mounting means
including crank means mounted on the stationary support
structure for rotation about a generally horizontal crank axis
and having an eccentric connected to the dispenser body to
move the dispenser body in a generally upright closed loop
course having horizontal and vertical components of move-
ment, means for driving the crank means in timed relation with
the conveyor means and such that the horizontal component of
movement of the dispenser body is in the direction of move-
ment of the conveyor means during the lower half of the
closed loop course and in the opposite direction during the
upi>er half of the closed loop course, fluid pressure operated
valve actuator means mounted on the dispenser body for
movement therewith and having an output member movable
relative thereto and connected to the dispenser valve means for
rapidly moving the dispenser valve means to its open position
when the fluid pressure operated valve actuator means is oper-
ated to a first condition and for rapidly moving the dispenser
valve to its closed position when the fluid pressure operated
valve actuator means is operated to a second condition, control
means for controlling application of fluid pressure to said fluid
pressure operated valve actuator means to operate said fluid
pressure operated valve actuator means to said first condition
as the dispensing body moves through at least a portion of the
lower half of its closed loop course and to operate said fluid
pressure operated valve actuator means to said second condi-
tion during the remainder of the closed loop course.
13 Qaims
1. A waste fluid drain assembly mountable on and selectively
manipulated for extension and retraction relative to a service
vehicle for selective alignment beneath a fluid reservoir in a
vehicle to be serviced, said assembly comprising a waste fluid
receptacle, vehicle engagable support means for mounting said
assembly on a service vehicle in underlying dep>ending rela-
tionship therefrom, and selectively extensible and retractable
positioning means engaged between said fluid receptacle and
said support means for selectively adjusting the position of the
receptacle relative to the support means between a stored
position beneath an assembly mounting service vehicle and an
extended portion wherein the receptacle is located remote
from the service vehicle in alignment beneath a fluid reservoir
of a vehicle to be serviced, whereby waste fluid can be drained
from a fluid reservoir and into said receptacle.
4,394,878
COMBINATION PLANAR MOLDER
Verle L. Rice, and Dwight E. Check, both of Harrisonville, Mo.,
assignors to R. B. Industries, Pleasant Hill, Mo.
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,946
Int. Q.'. B27C 1/14
U.S. Q. 144—131 9 Qaims
1. A combination planar molder for wood comprising:
a support framework;
shaft means mounting either a planing knife or a molding bit;
means for removably mounting said shaft means on said
framework and comprising a sheave rigid with said shaft
and bearing means mounted in said framework for pivotal
movement and adapted to receive one end of said shaft
means;
prime mover means for turning said shaft means; and
drive means for moving a length of wood past said planing
knife or said molding bit.
4,394,879
METHOD OF REPAIRING DAMAGED KEYWAY
William A. Reynolds, 311 Graham St., Emporia, Kans. 66801
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,678
Int. CIJ B22D 23/00
U.S. Q. 164—76.1 6 Qaims
1. A method of repairing a deformed or damaged keyway in
1344
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
a shaft or the like to provide a finished keyway having desired
length and width dimensions, comprising the steps of:
providing an insert having length and width dimensions
corresponding to the dimensions of the desired finished
keyway;
adding or removing drill pipe sections to or from said drill
string.
placing said insert into the damaged keyway;
filling the free space between the defining walls of the dam-
aged keyway and said insert with metallic weld material;
and
removing said insert.
4,394,881
DRILL STEERING APPARATUS
Kirk R. Shirley, 15719 Tumbling Rapids, Houston, Tex. 77084
Filed Jun. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 158,948
Int. a.' E21B 7/08
U.S. CI. 175—76 27 Qaims
4,394,880
METHOD OF PREVENTING DRILL STRING
OVERFLOW
Ben V. Faulkner, Rte. 1, Box 15, Washington, Okla. 73093
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 202,797, Oct. 31, 1980, Pat. No.
4,351,400. This application Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 257,754
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Sep. 28,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.J E21B 21/14
U.S. a. 175—69 5 Qaims
1. A method of preventing drilling fluid overflow when
adding or removing drill pipe sections to or from a drill string
disposed in a well bore comprising the steps of:
introducing a gas into said drill string until a predetermined
volume thereof is introduced therein;
introducing drilling fluid into said drill string after introduc-
ing said gas until a predetermined volume thereof is intro-
duced therein and said gas is pressurized thereby displac-
ing drilling fluid originally contained in said drill string
downwardly within said drill string and upwardly within
the annulus between said drill string and said well bore to
lower the level of said drilling fluid in said drill string a
distance such that upon releasing the introduced pressur-
ized gas and drilling fluid from said drill string and remov-
ing drilling fluid and gas therefrom, the resulting level ol
drilling fluid in said drill string is below the level at which
said drill pipe sections are added to or removed from said
drill string;
releasing said introduced pressurized gas and drilling fluid
from said drill string whereby said gas and drilling fluid
flow upwardly through said drill string and drilling fluid
and gas are removed therefrom; and then
1. A steering tool adapted to control the angle and direction
of a rotary well drilling string in the drilling of a well bore
through earth formation, said tool comprising: an elongated
body having an upper end connectible with the drilling string
and a lower end connectible with the drilling string adjacent to
the bit, a bore through said body for the flow of drilling fluid
through the drilling string and the bit; master piston means
adjacent the upper end of said body including a radially shift-
able piston inwardly shiftable by engagement of the master
piston means with the low side of the well bore wall; slave
piston means adjacent the lower end of said body including a
plurality of circumferentially spaced radially shiftable pistons
for applying lateral thrust on the lower end of said body upon
radial outward movement said body having a valve chamber
between said master piston means and said slave piston means;
fluid passage in said body establishing communication between
said valve chamber and each of said slave piston means; and
selective valve means in each of said passages between said
valve chamber and said slave piston means for establishing
fluid pressure communication through said valve chamber
between said master piston means and selected passages be-
tween said valve chamber and said slave piston means to cause
radial outward movement of a selected slave piston upon radial
inward movement of said master piston.
4,394,882
CONTINUOUS CHAIN BIT WITH DOWNHOLE
CYCLING CAPABILITY
Don F. Ritter; Jack A. St. Qair, and Henry K. Togami, all of
Albuquerque, N. Mex., assignors to The United States of
America as represented by the United States Department of
Energy, Washington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,573
Int. a.J E21B n/06
U.S. CI. 175—89 17 Qaims
1. A continuous chain bit for hard rock rotary drilling and
down hole cycling comprising:
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1345
a support body;
an auxiliary slidable drill head assembly on said body;
means for effecting rotation of the drill head assembly upon
rotation of the support body;
means to shift said head assembly longitudinally relative to
said body-
an endless chain on said head assembly having links for
cutting into the rock and moveable along a feed path; and
finger means carried by the support body to engage and hold
said chain with respect to the support body while shifting
said head assembly longitudinally relative to said support
body, whereby said chain may be moved along the feed
path and cycled to present new links for drilling.
annulus forming an elongate chamber isolated from the fluid in
the wellbore and latch means in the chamber to releasably
latch the mandrel to the barrel until the latch means are selec-
tively released for delivering an impact between hammer and
anvil surfaces on the mandrel and barrel, the rotary well jar
comprising;
(a) a plurality of individual resilient vibration snubbers longi-
tudinally, individually mounted circumferentially around
said mandrel and at an upper end of said annulus above
said latch means and also aligned longitudinally in said
annulus between said mandrel and said barrel;
(b) said snubbers spaced longitudinally from said fluid seal at
a location to slideably engage with said barrel through out
its telescoping movement along said mandrel;
(c) said snubbers disposed in circumferential spaced apart
relationship about said mandrel with spaces forming flow
channels therebetween in said annulus to accomodate well
fluid flows when said mandrel and said barrel are rotated
with the string of well pipe in the well bore;
(d) said snubbers having a curved exposed surface for engag-
ing the inner surface of said barrel to dampen vibrational
movements between said mandrel and said barrel during
their telescoping movements for preventing injury to said
fluid seals; and,
(e) said snubbers having a diameter, when not confined,
larger than the internal diameter of said annulus to define
an interference fit on positioning of said snubbers in said
annulus.
4,394,884
SHOCK SUB
Uvon Skipper, 11710 Scottsdale Rd., Stafford, Tex. 77477
Filed Jul. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 172,662
Int. a.^ E21B 77/20
U.S. a. 175—321 12 Qaims
4,394,883
WELL JAR
Edward L. Briscoe, Sheridan, Tex., assignor to Dailey Oil Tools,
Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,527
Int. CV E21B il/107
U.S. a. 175—304 20 Qaims
1. A rotary well jar subject to severe lateral and longitudinal
drill string forces in a fluid-filled wellbore and the well jai
having an elongate body with an axial passageway for fluid
flows, the body having threaded connections at its ends for
assembly into a string of well pipe, the body formed of a tubu-
lar barrel with an annulus exposed to well fluid between the
mandrel and barrel, fluid seals positioned at one end of the
1. A shock absorbing tool to be installed in a drill string
above the drill bit, comprising:
(a) an upper mandrel which includes
(1) an upper end threaded connector for connection into a
drill string;
(2) an outer tubular sleeve below said threaded connector
- and having a lower end seal around the interior thereof;
(3) an inner tubular sleeve concentric within said outer
tubular sleeve;
f4) an annular cavity defined between said inner and outer
tubular sleeves;
(5) means for closing said annular cavity at the upper end;
(6) alignment spline means extending axially into said
annular cavity, said alignment spline means supported
1346
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
interiorally of said outer tubular sleeve and further
being located above said lower end seal;
(b) a lower mandrel which includes
(1) a lower end threaded connector for connection to a
drill bit at the bottom of a drill string;
(2) an upstanding tubular sleeve;
(3) a bottom fitting joined to said connector and to said
upstanding sleeve and further including an upwardly
facing shoulder adapted to abut the lower end of said
outer tubular sleeve to limit axial displacement of said
outer tubular sleeve relative to said bottom fitting shoul-
der;
(4) a first set of splines on said upstanding sleeve meshing
with a second set of splines for longitudinal displace-
ment therebetween wherein said first and second sets of
splines prevent relative rotation and permit relative
axial displacement;
(5) wherein said first and second sets of splines are located
for meshing above said lower end seal to define a lower
fluid chamber above said lower end seal;
(6) wherein said lower end seal forms a leakproof seal
against the exterior surface of said upstanding sleeve;
(7) wherein said upstanding sleeve extends above said
meshed first and second sets of splines into said annular
cavity to define an upper fluid chamber therein;
(8) seal means on said upstanding sleeve sealing against
said upper mandrel to limit leakage from said upper
fluid chamber on telescoping movement of said up-
standing sleeve in said annular cavity;
(c) means for introducing a charge of compressable fluid into
said annular cavity;
(d) wherein said first and second sets of splines telescope
relative to one another, and said splines are constructed
with a specific clearance to define a lengthwise flow path
along said meshed splines between said upper and lower
fluid chambers;
(e) a lengthwise axial passage for flowing drilling mud
through said shock absorbing tool wherein said passage
extends along the interior of said inner tubular sleeve and
also serially through said upstanding sleeve and said fitting
therebelow wherein said upstanding and inner sleeves
telescope relative to one another and further wherein said
sleeves include shoulder means exposed to mud flow
along said passage;
(0 shoulder means, on exposure to drilling mud under pres-
sure, are located and arranged to form a mud pressure
depending force forcing said upper mandrel and lower
mandrel apart and wherein the weight on the drill string
forces said upper and lower mandrels towards each other;
and
(g) wherein said upper and lower mandrels move relatively
as fluid is transferred between said upper and lower fluid
chambers along the flow path of said meshed splines.
4,394,885
LOAD RECEIVER WITH IMPROVED nXING MEANS
Gilbert V. Dauge, Lagny; Jacques F. Langlais, Coudray Mon-
tereaux, and Daniel J. Quehen, Chilly Mazarin, all of France,
assignors to Testut Aequitas, Paris, France
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,156
Qaims priority, application France, Feb. 4, 1980, 80 02377
Int. a.^ GOIG 3/12. 21/23
VS. a. 177—210 C 8 Qaims
1. A load receiver for use in a weighing scale or the like
comprising:
a solid member having opposed lateral surfaces and at least
one constricted zone arranged to provide an elastic re-
sponse to stresses;
first and second support members, each of said support
members including opposed connector portions for sup^
porting said solid member therebetween; and
i6.
1° ^^
attachment means rigidly connecting said connector por-
tions to said solid member with said connector portions in
fixed spaced relationship with the lateral surfaces of said
solid member.
4,394,886
STEERING GEAR WITH STEERING-ARM LEVER
Uwe Rathje, and Manfred Lappe, both of Dortmund, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to OAK Orenstein & Koppel Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 28, 1980, Ser. No. 116,358
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 26,
1979, 2902927
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 22,
1997, has been disclaimed.
Int. Q.^ B62D 5/08
U.S. Q. 180—140 4 Qaims
1. A steering gear with pitmans arm, steering tie rod and
steering gear connecting rod for a vehicle which is drivable on
the road and in terrain on wheels, with a steering mechanism
which is actuated selectively hydraulically supported mechani-
cally or purely hydraulically by means of hydraulic cylinders
and electromagnetic valves, and a universal shaft which is
connected with the steering wheel changing from the hydrauli-
cally supported system over to the purely hydraulically oper-
ating system by selectively connecting said universal shaft with
one of two systems which serve the actuation of the steering
mechanism, wherein in combination one of said systems com-
prises a steering transmission and the other of said systems
includes a steering valve, said steering transmission and said
steering valve being selectively actuated by said steering gear
by selective connection with said universal shaft, respectively,
said hydraulic cylinders include hydraulic cylinders of a front
axle and hydraulic cylinders of a rear axle of the vehicle,
further comprising
a hydraulic pump operatively connected to both of said
systems.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1347
4,394,887
LADDER STANDOFF DEVICE
Donald E. Spinks, 2808 Gennessee Ave., West Palm Beach, Fla.
33409
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,871
Int. Q.5 E06C 7/48
U.S. Q. 182—214 10 Claiois
motor means for driving said pump,
a plurality of control valves,
a flow control- and pressure limit-valve,
first conduits and said flow control- and pressure limit-valve
connecting said pump to a first of said control valves,
a first line being connected to said first control valve and to
said steering transmission,
second lines are connected to said steering transmission and
to a second of said control valves, said second control
valve constituting a two-way control valve,
third lines connecting said second control valve operatively
with said hydraulic cylinders of the front axle of the vehi-
cle, 1 1
a fourth line being connected to said first control valve and
to said steering valve,
a fifth line being connected to said steering valve and a third
of said control valves,
a sixth line being connected to said hydraulic cylinders of
the front axle,
a seventh line being connected to said steering valve and to
a fourth of said control valves,
an eighth line being connected to said third and fourth con-
trol valves,
a ninth line being connected to said third control valve and
to said hydraulic cylinders of the front axle, i. a ladder standoff device adapted to be readily attached to
two tenth lines connecting said fourth control valve with and detached from a ladder and adapted, when attached, to be
said hydraulic cylinders of the rear axle, manually varied in position by a person standing on the ladder
said hydraulic cylinders of said rear axle including pistons thereby to vary the orienUtion of the ladder relative to an
and piston rods connected thereto, each of said hydraulic adjacent wall structure, said device comprising an elongated
cylinders in cooperation with said pistons defining a pis- axle member having a pair of wheels rototably mounted at
ton-side chamber and a piston-rod-side chamber, opposing ends thereof for selective rolling engagement with
one of said tenth lines connects to said piston-side chamber and along a wall structure adjacent the ladder, an elongated
of one of said hydraulic cylinders of the rear axle and to standofl" bar one end of which is attached to said axle member
the piston-rod-side chamber of the other of said hydraulic at a position between said wheels, said standoff bar extending
cylinders of the rear axle and the other of said tenth lines away from said axle member at substantially nght angles
connects to the piston-rod-side chamber of said one of said thereto, first attachment means on sa.d sundoff bar. said first
hydrauUc cylinders of the rear axle and to the piston-side- attachment means compnsmg fixed abutment means atUched
chamber of the other of said hydraulic cylinders of the
rear axle,
a first selective operative pressurized oil flow path compris-
to said standoff bar and extending outwardly of said standoff
bar, said fixed abutment means bemg adapted to be positioned
adjacent one side of a rung of the ladder, and movable abut-
._,.._ , . ment means adapted to be variably positioned along said stand-
ing in order: said first conduits and said flow control- and ^^ ^^ ^^j^^^^^ ^^ ^j^^ opposite side of the ladder rung in op-
pressure limit-valve to said first control valve, said fourth ^^^ ^^j^j.^^^ ^^ ^-^ f^^^ abutment means, said fixed and
line, said steering valve, said fifth line connecting to said njo^abie abutment means cooperating with one another to
third control valve, said third control valve, said eighth provide a pivotal attachment of said standoff bar on the said
line, said fourth control valve and said another of said jajder rung, handle means attached to the other end of said
tenth lines connecting to the piston-rod-side chamber of standoff bar, said handle means being operative upon manual
said one of said hydraulic cylinders of the rear axle and to manipulation to pivot said sundoff bar about said pivoul
the piston-side chamber of the other of said hydraulic attachment thereby to vary the position of said axle member
cylinders of the rear axle, and wheels relative to the adjacent wall structure, and second
a second selective operative pressurized oil flow path com- attachment means mounted on said handle means for selective
prising in order: said first conduits and said flow control- releasable engagement with a portion of the ladder spaced
and pressure limit-valve to said first control valve, said from the said ladder rung to lock said standoff device against
fourth line, said steering valve, said seventh line connect- pivotal movement about the said ladder rung.
ing to said fourth control valve, said fourth control valve,
said one of said tenth lines connecting to the piston-side
chamber of said one of said hydraulic cylinders of the rear
axle and to the piston-rod-side chamber of the other of
said hydraulic cylinders of the rear axle,
said steering wheel, said steering column and said universal
shaft constituting means for selecting one of said first and
second selective operative pressurized oil flow paths,
respectively, depending on the turning of said steering
wheel,
4,394,888
BRIDGING BAR ATTACHMENT MEANS FOR
BI-ELEVATIONAL PLATFORM LIFT
David E. Qarke, St. Charles, III., assignor to Advance Lifts,
Inc., St. Charles, lU.
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 270,995
Int. Q.3 B66B 9/00
VJS. Q. 187—1 R 6 Claims
1. Bridging bar attachment means for use with bi-elevational
other selective operative pressurized oil flow paths through platform lifts having a platform member which is pivotally
selective of said lines and selective of said control valves attached on one end portion thereof and the opposite end
to said hydraulic cylinders of said front axle, and respec- portion thereof being free for angular movement to present
tively, to said hydraulic cylinders of said rear axle, desired angular positions of the platform member including in
said control valves being selectively switched such that any combination post means connectible to the platform level
one ofsaid selective operative pressurized oil flow paths is approximate to the free end portion thereof and extending
operative with flow of pressurized oil therethrough. upwardly generally perpendiculariy therefrom to a predeter-
1348
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
mined height, bridging bar frame means being pivotally con-
nected to the post means and extending generally perpendicu-
larly therefrom to define a free end portion thereof, the briding
bar frame means including on the free end portion thereof
generally rounded and protruding shoulder means having a
rounded contact surface thereon, the bridging bar frame means
being pivotal with respect to the post means to be selectively
positioned in a first extended position extending outwardly
from the free end portion of the platform member, first re-
straining means for restraining the bridging bar frame means
against movement with respect to the post means with the
motor speed (MS) signal reflecting V in relation to the
angular velocity of the shaft,
a reference signal generator for producing a predetermined
digital reference (REF) signal manifesting the motor
speed at V MAX,
means for producing, from said REF and MS signals, a
difference (DIP) signal reflecting the diflerence between
V MAX and V, and
means triggered by the control signal from the motor and
brake operation system and responsive to said DIP signal
for initiating the stopping operations after a delay follow-
ing production of said control signal and for varying said
delay in proportion to the difference between V MAX and
V reflected by said DIP signal.
4,394,890
AUTOMATIC SLACK ADJUSTER
Charles W. Kleinhagen, Jr., Battle Creek, Mich., assignor to
Eaton Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Aug. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 289,030
Int. C1.3 F16D 65/56
U.S. a. 188—71.9 28 aaims
bridging bar frame means in the first extended position thereof,
the bridging bar frame means alternatively being selectively
positioned in a second and non-extending position with respect
to the platform member, and second restraining means for
restraining the bridging bar frame means against movement
with respect to the post means with the bridging bar frame
means in the second non-extended position whereby with the
bridging bar frame means extended from the platform member,
the bridging bar frame means are useful to suspend the free end
portion of the platform member from an adjacently spaced
vertically offset loading level.
4,394,889
MODIHED SLOWDOWN AND BRAKING OF AN
ELEVATOR CAR
John E. Gray, Milperra, Australia, assignor to Otis Elevator
Company, Farmington, Conn.
Filed Mar. 25, 1980, Ser, No. 261,240
Qaims priority, application Australia, Apr. 5, 1979, PD8347
Int. a.' B66B 1/32
VS. a. 187—29 R 21 Claims
L.4n3
^:ti
-HSTOPI I
1. An elevator system comprising a car, a motor, having a
shaft coupled to the car, and brake system for stopping the car,
a motor and brake operation control system including a system
for generating a control signal to initiate car stopping opera-
tions at a fixed distance from each floor based upon a predeter-
mined maximum car velocity (V MAX), and a load compensat-
ing system for modifying said operation based upon actual car
velocity (V), said elevator system characterized in that said
compensating system comprises:
a motor speed sensor coupled to the motor shaft for produc-
ing, at least once during each motor revolution, a digital
1. An automatic, clearance sensing slack adjuster for main-
taining a predetermined running clearance between the selec-
tively engageable and disengageable friction surfaces of a
brake comprising:
a housing;
a displaceable brake actuation means displaceable relative to
said housing;
a rotatable driving member rotationally received in said
housing;
means for rotating said driving member in response to
greater than predetermined displacement of said brake
actuation means;
a rotatable driven member rotationally received in said
housing, said driven member rotatable relative to said
driving member;
a rotatable adjustment member rotationally received in said
housing, rotation of said adjustment member in a given
direction of rotation effective to decrease slack in the
brake and in the other direction of rotation to increase
slack in the brake;
a normally engaged positive clutch for rotationally coupling
said rotatable adjustment member to said driven member;
a force limiting friction clutch for rotationally coupling said
driving member to said driven member, the torque trans-
fer capacity of said force limiting friction clutch when
rotating said driven member in the direction of rotation
which will cause said adjustment member to be rotated in
said given direction of rotation being greater than the
torque required to rotate said adjustment member when
said brake friction surfaces are not in contact but being
less than the torque required to rotate said adjustment
member when said brake friction surfaces are in contact;
and
means accessible from the exterior of said housing for disen-
gaging said normally engaged positive clutch and for
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1349
simultaneously rotating said rotatable adjustment mem- juster and thereadedly connected to the cam member, and an
ber. adjusting gear engaged with said adjusting rod and rotated to
4,394,891
DISC BRAKE
Harumi Osh ma, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Tokico Ltd.,
Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,486
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 19, 1980, 55-5018;
Mar. 11, 1980, 55-31672[U]
Int. a.5 F16D 65/02
U.S. a. 188— 73 J8 4 Oaims
1. A disc twake comprising a carrier adapted to be secured to
a non-rotatable part of a vehicle and having two circumferen-
tially spaced arm portions which straddle respectively the
outer circumference of a rotatable disc, a pair of friction pads
positioned on backing plates supported on said arm portions of
the carrier to slide in the direction of the axis of the disc, a
caliper mounted on the carrier to slide in the direction of the
axis of the disc, said caliper including a brake actuator for
applying one friction pad against one surface of the disc, said
caliper having a limb portion straddling the outer circumfer-
ence of the disc and engaging with the other friction pad to
apply the same against the other surface of the disc, and a pad
spring formed of a rod member and being retained on the
caliper to bias the friction pads in the radially inward direction
with respect to the disc, said backing plates having hook por-
tions formed thereon which engage with the pad spring to
retain and suspend the pad backing plates when the caliper has
been disassembled from the carrier.
cause said adjusting rod to move longitudinally so that said
wedge adjuster is urged to thereby expand said brake shoes.
4,394,893
ENGINE SHUT-OFF SYSTEM WITH FLYWHEEL
BRAKING
Peter G. Kronich, Sheboygan, and Dan R. Arendt, Belgium, both
of Wis., assignors to Tecumseh Products Company, Tecumseh,
Mich.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 205,010
Int. a.^ B60K 4J/20
U.S. a. 192—1 25 Qaims
4,394,892
AUTOMATED BRAKING-GAP ADJUSTER SYSTEM FOR
MECHANICAL DRUM BRAKE
Mitsutoyo Mizusawa, Ueda; Masayuki Seki, Tateshina, and
Kazuo Sunohara, Ueda, all of Japan, assignors to Nisshin
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Ueda, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,185
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1980, 55-41863;
Mar. 31, 1980, 55-42952[U]; Mar. 31, 1980, 55-42953[U]; Mar.
31, 1980, 55.42954[U]; Mar. 31, 1980, 55-42955; Jan. 27, 1981,
56-9110[U] 1 1
I ' Int. a.5 F16D 65/56
U.S. a. 188—196 BA 17 Qaims
1. An automated braking-gap adjuster system for mechanical
drum brakes, including a back plate, a pair of brake shoes each
having one end pivotally supported on the back plate, a cam
member interposed between the other end of the brake shoes
and adapted to be rotated by a brake arm, a wedge adjuster
having its tapered cam surfaces taking sliding abutment upon
the brake shoes, said adjuster being disposed in the cam mem-
ber such that it is rotatable with the cam member and slidable
at right angles to the direction of expansion of the brake shoes
when braking, an adjusting rod abutting upon the wedge ad-
1. A safety device for an internal combustion engine pow-
ered implement having a deadman control normally biased
toward a first position and actuable by an implement operator
to a second position comprising:
a flywheel coupled to the engine crankshaft for rotation there-
with;
a braking member having a friction surface normally biased
into engagement with an annular surface of the flywheel,
biasing of the deadman control and the biasing of the braking
member both being accomplished by one coil spring, the
braking member comprising a friction surface supporting
lever, a pivot pin fixed relative to the engine pivolably sup-
porting the friction surface supporting lever near one end
thereof, the coil spring encircling the pivot pin and having
one end fixed relative to the engine and the other end fixed
relative to the friction surface supporting lever;
means coupling the braking member to the deadman control
for retracting the frictional surface out of engagement with
the flywheel annular surface upon movement of the dead-
man control to the second position;
a pair of electrical switches actuated by movement of the
braking member, one of the electrical switches being actu-
ated by movement of the braking member toward its engme
engaging position to disable the engine ignition system.
1350
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^94,894
MACHINE FOR MACHINING PANELS, PLANKS AND
SECTIONS OR SIMILAR, IN PARTICULAR FOR WOOD
AND THE DERIVATIVES THEREOF
Giuseppe Gemmani, Rimini, Italy, assignor to SCM Finanziaria
S.p.A., Rimini, Italy
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,075
Qaims priority, application Italy, Oct. 25, 1979, 3519 A/79
Int. a.^ B65G 47/00
U.S. a. 198—339 13 Claims
prising a movable carriage having means for supporting and
transporting at least one radioactive body, a relatively thick
radioactive shield having the property of shielding substan-
tially all radioactive emissions, said shield surrounding and
defming a shielded passage forming a path of travel for the
carriage and having a transverse dimension to substantially fit
about a corresponding dimension of the carriage, a plurality of
examination stations spaced along the path of travel with said
stations being confined within the dimensions of the shielded
passage, examination equipment for said stations located out-
side the said shield at each examination station and in commu-
nication with its respective examination station within the
shielded passage and means for moving the carriage along the
shielded passage.
4,394,896
BACKLOG CONTROL SYSTEM FOR PROCESSING
MACHINE
Jerry L. McComas, Sunnyvale, Calif., and Donald C. Crawford,
Green Bay, Wis., assignors to FMC Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Jul. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 168,834
Int. a.3 B65G 43/00
U.S. a. 198—341 9 Claims
1. Machine for machining workpieces. such as panels, planks
and sections or similar, in particular for wood and the deriva-
tives thereof, said machine comprising:
conveying means for conveying workpieces in an infeed
direction along a conveying line;
gripping means disposed above and cooperating with said
conveying means for gripping workpieces being infed;
a plurality of operating stations fixed in position along said
conveying line for performing machining operations on
workpieces being infed by said conveying means and said
gripping means;
carriage means cooperating with said conveying means for
supporting and for infeeding workpieces, said carriage
means being positioned at the side of the conveying means
and being movable in the infeed direction and in a return
direction opposite the infeed direction, said carriage
means supporting a support surface for supporting a por-
tion of a workpiece projecting laterally from the convey-
ing means, and having means for adjusting the lateral
spacing between said support surface and said conveying
means to accommodate different size workpieces; and
means for coupling said carriage means with said conveying
means for conjoint movement therewith.
4 394 895
FACILITIES FOR THE EXAMINATION OF
RADIOACTIVE BODIES
Maurice E. Ginniff, Seascale, and Eric K. Richardson, Sale, both
of England, assignors to United Kingdom Atomic Energy
Authority, London, England
FUed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,116
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 23, 1980,
8002193
Int. a.3 B65G 51/26, 54/02
\5S. a. 198—339 3 Claims
1. The method of controlling a backlog of articles supplied
to a variable speed article processing machine; said method
comprising the steps of serially removing unprocessed articles
from the backlog and introducing them to the machine at a rate
that is synchronized with machine speed, effecting a count
corresponding to each article being removed from the backlog,
randomly supplying unprocessed articles to a conveyor for
addition to the backlog, counting each article being thus sup-
plied at a point upstream of a selected maximum backlog posi-
tion, delaying the transmission of each article supply count by
a length of time equal to that required for the conveyor to
transport an article from said upstream point to said selected
backlog position for providing a delayed count, toking the
difference between said delayed counts and said backlog re-
moval counts and controlling machine speed on the basis of
said count difference.
f'tff' 1 y^.^'
'W r — 1 ^^-3 I'i
"TZ
"7/^//////
1. Facility for the examination of radioactive bodies com-
4,394,897
PALLET REGISTRY MECHANISM AND TRANSFER
LIFT SYSTEM
John H. Brems, 32867 White Oaks Trail, Birmingham, Mich.
48010
Filed No?. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,701
Int. a.J B65G 47/00
U.S. a. 198—345 ♦ Claims
1. In a multiple station transfer machine in which workpieces
are located and supported in pallets, and in which said pallets
are moved in sequence through said machine, utilizing, in part,
vertically moving transfer means, interrelated registry mecha-
nisms for locating and clamping said pallets, each of which
comprises:
(a) a registry frame,
(b) one or more locating pin means slidably mounted in said
July 26, 19
P
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
13S1
frame to engage corresponding locating holes in said
pallet,
(c) clamping means for said pallet movably mounted in said
frame,
(d) energy storage means mounted in said frame,
(e) mechanical means interconnecting said energy storage
means with said locating pin means and with said clamp-
ing means to sequentially engage said locating pins in said
holes in said pallet and clamp said pallet to said registry
frame, and that improvement which comprises:
(a) external actuating means for said registry interconnected
with and operating said mechanical means to retract said
clamping means from said pallet and thereafter to disen-
gage said locating pin means from said holes, said external
actuating means comprising a shaft rotatable about an axis
stacking wherein each diaper is oriented 180 degrees relative to
the next adjacent diaper.
4. Apparatus for orienting diapers and the like comprising a
frame, a drum mounted on said frame, means on said frame for
rotating said drum, means operably associated with said frame
for delivering a series of diap>ers to the surface of said drum for
travel thereon, means for removing said series after traveling
on said drum, said drum being equipped with an even-num-
bered plurality of turning devices for vacuum engagement of
said diapers, and said drum being equipped with means for
rotating alternate of said turning devices 90 degrees in one
direction and the remaining turning devices 90 degrees in the
opposite direction whereby adjacent diapers on said removing
means are oriented 180 degrees relative to each other to facili-
tate balanced stacking.
extending transversely to the line of transfer of said trans-
fer machine and having a short actuator arm extending
therefrom, and
(b) lift means for said transfer means substantially contiguous
with said external actuating means and operatively associ-
ated with said external actuating means comprising a lever
having a fulcrum portion rotatable on said shaft, said lever
having a long arm on one side of said fulcrum to be actu-
ated by a power system, a first short arm on the other side
of said fulcrum to contact and actuate said actuator arm to
rotate said shaft, and a second portion eccentric to said
shaft to provide a lift member for said transfer means, said
lift means being sequentially interrelated with said clamp-
ing means and said locating pin means to raise said transfer
means after said clamping means are retracted and said
locating pin means are disengaged.
4,394,898
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR PROVIDING
BALANCED STACKS OF DIAPERS
James F. Campbell, Green Bay, Wis., assignor to Paper Convert-
ing Machine Company, Green Bay, Wis.
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,915
Int. a.3 B65G 47/24; B65H 289/24
U.S. a. 198—374
14 Claims
2J 22
4,394,899
ARTICLE GROUPING APPARATUS
Rene Fluck, Schleitheim, Switzerland, assignor to SIG •
Schweizerische Industrie-Gesellschaft, Neuhausen am
Rheinfall, Switzerland
Filed Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,724
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Dec. 13, 1979,
11066/79
Int. a.' B65G 29/00
U.S. a. 198—408 8 Qaims
1. A method of arranging diapers for balanced stacking
comprising advancing a series of diapers all in a particular
orientation along a predetermined path toward a rotating
drum, vacuum gripping each diaper in sequence for travel on
said drum, rotating alternate diapers in said series 90 degrees to
the right about an axis extending radially of said drum and
rotating the remaining diapers in said series 90 degrees to the
left also about an axis extending radially of said drum, and
removing said series of diapers from said drum before comple-
tion of a drum rotation to provide a stream of diapers for
1. In an apparatus for forming groups of upright-oriented,
stacked articles, including a supply conveyor for advancing
the articles in a flat-lying, spaced relationship; the improve-
ment comprising
(a) a conveyor wheel supported for rotation about a wheel
axis and situated adjacent said supply conveyor;
(b) means for rotating said conveyor wheel;
(c) a plurality of transfer pushers pivotally secured to said
conveyor wheel in a circular array about said wheel axis;
said transfer pushers extending, from their pivotal attach-
ment, in a direction oriented away from said wheel axis;
said transfer pushers being arranged for consecutively
lifting offflat-lying articles from said supply conveyor and
for conveying the articles in a curvilinear path from an
upstream end to a downstream end thereof;
(d) guiding means for imparting a pivotal motion to said
transfer pushers during their travel along said curvilinear
paht; said guiding means including
(1) a plurality of pivot shafts rotaUbly mounted in said
conveyor wheel in a circular array about said wheel axis
and in an orientation parallel to said wheel axis; said
transfer pushers being mounted to a respective said
pivot shaft;
(2) a crank arm attached to each pivot shaft;
(3) follower means carried on each crank arm; and
(4) a control disc supported adjacent said conveyor wheel;
said control disc including a closed cam track into
which project said follower means of said crank arms;
the course of said closed cam track being such that upon
rotation of said conveyor wheel the ends of said transfer
pushers remote from their pivotal attachment are closer
1352
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
to one another in the zone of said downstream end than
in the zone of said upstream end of said curvilinear path;
(e) a guide track having a first, circularly acruate portion
coinciding with said curvilinear path; said first portion
having a clearance through which said transfer pushers
project for advancing articles by sliding the articles in an
upright position along said first portion of said guide
track; said guide track having a second portion adjoining
said first portion and extending tangentially thereto in an
upwardly sloping orientation; said second portion of said
guide track constituting a gathering channel adjoining the
downstream end of said curvilinear path for receiving
articles from said transfer pushers in an upright orienta-
tion;
(0 a gathering mechanism including a gathering pusher and
moving means for displacing said gathering pusher in a
closed orbiul path for periodically engaging and advanc-
ing a group of upright-oriented, face-to-face arranged
articles along said gathering channel from said down-
stream end; and
(g) synchronizing means connected to said transfer pushers
and said gathering pusher for mechanically coupling se-
lected transfer pushers with said gathering pusher by
interfitting engagement of said synchronizing means for
synchronizing the motion of said gathering pusher with
each said transfer pusher.
4,394,900
CENTRAL SYSTEM ELEVATOR
Roger T, Becker, John W. Hathaway, and J. Michael Harbour,
all of Kalamazoo, Mich., assignors to Kalamazoo Conveyor
Company, Kalamazoo, Mich.
Filed Jan. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 224,356
Int. a.^ B65G i7/Q0
U.S. a. 198—614 19 Claims
tending lengthwise along said trough for moving larger
materials upwardly alon^ said trough, said second con-
veyor means including first and second reciprocating
conveyors extending lengthwise of said trough in parallel
relationship with one another and supported for recipro-
cating lengthwise movement therein;
each of said first and second reciprocating conveyors includ-
ing support means fixed to said wall means and defining an
elongated path which extends in the lengthwise direction
of said trough, an elongated support extending lengthwise
of said trough and being guidably supported on said sup-
port means for linear reciprocal movement, and a plurality
of material engaging elements mounted on said support at
longitudinally spaced locations therealong, said material
engaging elements having a configuration for engaging
and advancing the materials upwardly along the trough
during the forward stroke of the respective conveyor
while permitting the material engaging elements to slid-
ably move past the materials during the rearward stroke;
said material engaging elements as associated with each of
said first and second reciprocating conveyors projecting,
generally into the interior of said trough, and said material
engaging elements as associated with the respective first
and second reiprocating conveyors being spaced laterally
a substantial distance apart to permit the positioning of
said materials therebetween; and
second drive means drivingly connected to said first and
second reciprocating conveyors for effecting linear recip-
rocation thereof in generally parallel relationship to the
lengthwise direction of said trough.
4,394,901
MODULAR PLASTIC CONVEYOR BELT
Gerald C. Roinestad, Winchester, Va., assignor to Ashworth
Bros., Inc., Fall River, Mass.
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 217,205
Int. a.3 B65G 75/iO
U.S. a. 198—850 18 Claims
L^m ^^2
1. An elongated inclined conveyor apparatus for advancing
and elevating solid materials, such as a mixture of large and
small material pieces, for example fine and large metal chips
and turnings, in a lengthwise direction along the conveyor
apparatus, comprising:
elongated trough means disposed so as to incline upwardly
relative to the horizontal, said trough means having a
lower end for receiving therein said materials and an
upper end for discharge of said materials, said trough
means having wall means defining a generally channel-
shaped trough having a bottom wall and a pair of gener-
ally upwardly projecting side walls, said bottom wall
having means defining a substantially semicylindrical
recess which opens upwardly and extends lengthwise
along the trough;
first conveyor means movably disposed within and extend-
ing lengthwise of said trough for moving small materials
upwardly along the trough, said first conveyor means
including elongated helical flight means disposed in said
recess means and being rotatable about the lengthwise
axis;
first drive means operatively connected to said helical flight
means for eff^ecting rotation thereof in such direction as to
cause the materials engaged by said flight means to be
moved upwardly along said trough toward the upper end
thereof;
second conveyor means movably disposed within and ex-
1. A modular plastic conveyor belt for conveying articles in
a conveying direction comprising a plurality of plastic belt
modules releasably connected to one another to form an ex-
tended belt, each module being formed of a single integral
piece of plastic material bendable in a direction away from a
plane in the conveying direction and having an upper surface,
a lower surface, a first and a second end extending transversely
of the conveying direction of the belt and a pair of opposed
sides, a plurality of male members disposed along substantially
the entire first end, and a plurality of female members disposed
along substantially the entire second end for receiving and
connecting to said male members of an adjacent connected
module, each female member being shaped and dimensioned to
delimit a connecting space within which the male members of
an adjacent connected module can be shifted both laterally and
longitudinally, means formed integral with said modules for
laterally aligning adjacent modules when a tractive load is
placed on the belt, each of said female members completely
surrounding without a gap at least a portion of a respective
male member in the aligned position and each of said male
members along one of their sides being removed from the
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1353
surrounding relationship of said female members in a position
wherein adjacent modules are shifted laterally whereby adja-
cent modules can be uncoupled by bending one of the modules
in a direction away from a plane in the conveying direction to
uncouple the laterally shifted male members from said female
members.
are folded inwardly into face-to-face contacting relationship
with each other whereby the carton is tightened about its top
4,394,902
OFFSET DEVICE FOR ARRANGING ALONG TWO
PARALLEL LINES, ARTICLES WHICH ARRIVE FROM A
SINGLE LINE
Guido Mazzoni, Busto Arsizio, Italy, assignor to Costruzioni
Meccaniche G. Mazzoni S.p.A., Busto Arsizio, Italy
Filed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,295
Claims priority, application Italy, Jun. 6, 1980, 22626 A/80
Int. a.' B65G 47/26
U.S. a. 198—436 5 Qaims
32
26
., 7TS
1 17a iGa'-"] -"^
30-
25
T
e
^
^T^
J r-rv-l^'- n n - n
^
no
.ooot)OC-y
|;9 9 9>r^y y;^„
■0 ® op, ^ 0,A'
!la^
^ U ^ ^ V U ,
o O CJ "y
cc>
ends as the top flaps are folded downwardly and said gusset
panel portions are folded about said diagonal fold lines.
1. An offset device for arranging along two parallel lines
articles which arrive from a single line, wherein a row of
articles is arranged one after the other on a movable conveyor
belt or the like so as to make up a continuous row subjected to
a longitudinal guide device, a stop member for stopping the
leading article in front of a cavity into which said article is to
be introduced, pushing means for introducing said leading
article into said cavity of the molding box, a drawing member
mounted for reciprocating motion at right angles to said first
row of articles to displace preselected articles from said first
row to a second row parallel to the first row, a second guide
device, a second stop member for the leading article of said
second row and a second pushing means for introducing said
leading article of said second row into a second cavity of the
molding box capable of receiving the same.
4,394,904
PERIPHERALLY SUPPORTED PACKAGE FOR
ADHESIVE-SURFACED ARTICLES
Franklin C. Larimore, Shoreview, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 224,446, Jan. 12, 1981,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 203,566,
Nov. 5, 1980, abandoned. This application Aug. 11, 1981, Ser.
No. 292,008
Int. a.' B65D 85/70
U.S. a. 206-447 18 Qalms
2* /<
4,394,903
WRAP-AROUND TYPE PACKAGE FOR BOTTLES
Martinus C. M. Bakx, Roosendaal, Netherlands, assignor to The
Mead Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 208,205, Nov. 19, 1980, abandoned.
This application Nov. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 440,786
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 15, 1979,
7939621
I Int. a.3 B65D 75/08
U.S. a. 206—427 5 Qaims
1. A carton of the wrap-around type for packaging a group
of bottles arranged in a plurality of adjacent rows, which
carton comprises top and bottom walls interconnected by
spaced side walls forming a tubular strcture with top and
bottom walls substantially parallel to one another, top flaps
joined to the ends of said top wall and folded downwardly to
close at least partially the ends of said carton, gusset panels
foldably joined to said top flaps at each end thereof and to
adjacent side walls, each of said gusset panels including a
diagonal fold line defining foldable gusset panel portions,
characterized in that said fold lines by which said gusset panels
are joined to the ends of said top flap are substantially parallel
to but offset inwardly from the fold lines between said side
walls and said top wall and in that said gusset panel portions
1. A package comprising:
(a) an adhesive-surfaced, delicate sheet-like article;
(b) a release sheet laminated to the adhesive surface of said
article and cut to form
(1) a peripheral release carrier that is releasably adhered to
peripheral areas of said adhesive surface and that has a
central aperture exposing a major portion of the adhe-
sive surface of said article; and
(2) a release cover cut out of said release sheet and having
the exact dimensions of said aperture in said peripheral
release carrier, releasably adhered over the portion of
said adhesive surface exposed by said aperture;
the ratio of the length of a straight line joining any two points
on the perimeter of said article and passing through the center
of said article, to the summation of the segments of that line
overlapped by said peripheral release carrier, being at least
about S to 1.
1032 O.G.— 53
1354
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,905
AUTO PLATFORM CARTON
Robert A. Hackenberg, East Lyme, Conn., assignor to Robert-
son Paper Box Co., Inc., Montville, Conn.
FUed Nov. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 206,063
Int. a.3 B65D 73/00. 5/36
U.S. CI. 206—486 1* Claims
portion having a length sufficient to contain substantially all of
said food and said foamed plastic body and said corrugation
bands facilitating advancement of said food through said open-
ing and maintaining said advancement.
1. A folding carton for containing fragile articles comprising
A. four wall panels hinged together for collapsing into a flat
structure and opening up to form a generally rectangular
tube,
B. a lock bottom for the carton, said bottom comprising
(l)a pair of parallel, generally rectangular bottom panels
hinged to one pair of opposite carton wall panels and
extending between the other pair of opposite carton
wall panels, and
(2) a pair of gusset panels hinged to said other pair of wall
panels and to the rectangular bottom panels, said bot-
tom panels being foldable up inside the collapsed struc-
ture and opening out to occupy a substantially common
plane perpendicular to the wall panels when the carton
is set up, and
C. a platform foldable up inside the collapsed structure and
spaced above the carton bottom panels when the carton is
set up, said platform comprising a pair of similar mating
platform sections, each section including
(1) a generally rectangular platform panel hinged at one
edge to one panel in said first pair of wall panels, and
(2) a support panel hinged to the opposite edge of said
platform panel and also to the underlying rectangular
bottom panel so that, when the carton is set up, the
platform panels swing down into a substantially com-
mon plane above the plane of the bottom panels with
the support panels abutting one another to form a me-
dial reinforcing rib between the platform and the carton
bottom all along the platform which inhibits platform
sag and rigidifies the carton as a whole.
4 394 907
DISPLACEMENT ERROR CORRECTION IN SORTING
SYSTEMS
Rolf C. Bohme, Kyalami, and Max M. Lazerson, Northcliff,
both of South Africa, assignors to General Mining Union
Corporation, Limited, Johannesburg, South Africa
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,515
Qaims priority, application South Africa, Dec. 4, 1979,
79/6566; Jul. 15, 1980, 80/4248
Int. a.3 B07C 5/346
U.S. a. 209—556 8 Claims
4,394,906
FOOD CONTAINER/HOLDER
John C. HoUenbeck, 11 Mount Darwin a., San Rafael, Calif.
94903
Filed Jun. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 276,666
Int. a.5 B65D 1/26. 17/28. 83/00
U.S. a. 206-525 5 Qaims
1. A food container/holder comprising a unitary foamed
plastic body having a bottom container portion for said food
with a plurality of corrugation bands ascending from a closed
bottom to an opening, said opening defined in a first plane
surface, a top hinged to an edge of said first plane surface, said
top having a second plane surface, with a recess therein and a
catch on an edge of said second plane surface for securing said
first plane surface to said second plane surface, said bottom
I
CLg
^
D-«i
200
|ACCWMUlATOW.^?0*
-JMtMOWV I Ifwoce&soB
IICAO
MCMOKY
^"
6. A method of sorting particles which includes the steps of
causing the particles to move in line spaced from one another
sequentially past a plurality of in-line detectors, the detectors
being responsive to the presence of a desired property in the
particles and each producing, for each particle, an output
signal which is dependent on the degree to which the property
is present in the particle, and, for each particle, accumulating
the output signals of the detectors, obtaining a measure of the
displacement of the particle from the centre line of the detec-
tors, and applying to the accumulation of the output signals a
correction factor which compensates for the displacement of
the particle from the centre line.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1355
4394,908
TOOt MAGAZINE FOR AUTOMATIC
TOOL-CHANGING DEVICE
Pierre Pinchemaille, Albert, France, assignor to Line S.A.,
Albert, France
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 238,603
Qaims priority, application France, Mar. 26, 1980, 80 06758
Int. Q.3 B23Q 3/157, 13/00
U.S. Q. 211—13 8 Qaims
^
on said second section, said second detent successively engag-
ing said first detents when said second section is slid inwardly
and outwardly thereby to hold said second section releasably
in selected adjusted positions along said first section, and said
guard further comprising a shield on the outer end of said
second section and located in front of the outer end of said
hanger arm.
m
19
4,394,910
SHELF FOR ORDER PICKING SYSTEMS
Daniel A. Miller, Lebanon, Ohio, assignor to Nestier Corpora-
tion, Columbus, Ohio
Filed Sep. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 189,195
Int. Q.3 A47F 5/00
U.S. Q. 211—490 22 Qaims
7 !S 17 ^
1. A tool magazine for an automatic tool-changing device,
comprising:
(a) a first substantially circular disc mounted for rotation
about a magazine axis, said first disc having on the periph-
ery thereof a plurality of first tool-receiving housings, the
axes of said first housings being arranged substantially on
radii of said first disc;
(b) a second substantially circular disc mounted for rotation
about said magazine axis;
(c) a plurality of second tool-receiving housings pivotally
mounted on said second disc, the axes of said second
housings being arranged substantially on radii of said
second disc, said second housings further being pivotable
about respective axes substantially perpendicular to said
second radii; and
(d) an opening on the periphery of said first disc wherein a
first housing would normally be positioned for selectively
receiving a second housing therein.
30b
1 1 4,394,909
GUARD FOR A HANGER ASSEMBLY
Stanley J. Valiulis, and Richard D. Barnes, both of Rockford,
III., assignors to Southern Imperial, Inc., Tupelo, Miss.
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,576
Int. Q.3 A47F 5/00
U.S. Q. 211—59.1 9 Qaims
1. A shelf for an order picking system comprising:
a generally rectangular frame defined by opposite side frame
members and front and rear rails, said rails having upwardly
facing bottom support surfaces inside of said frame, each of
said rails having a plurality of uniformly spaced notches
above said support surfaces opening inwardly of said frame,
track members extending across said frame between said
rails and having a width substantially less than the width of
said frame between said side frame members, said track
members having bottom end portions supported on said
support surfaces and having end edge portions received in
certain of said notches, and said track members being selec-
tively adjustable across said frame in a direction between
said side frame members by lifting same upwardly of said
frame for transverse shifting and then lowering to a new
position; further including, said bottom support surfaces
being on bottom flanges having bottom flange edges inside
said frame, said notches being defined on an upper rail flange
spaced above said bottom flange, said upper rail flange
having spaced-apart teeth between which said notches are
defined, and said teeth having teeth ends spaced in a direc-
tion outwardly of said frame from said bottom flange edges.
1. A guard for a hanger assembly adapted to be attached to
an upright perforated panel and having an outwardly extend-
ing hanger arm, said guard comprising an elongated first sec-
tion having inner and outer ends, means for attaching the inner
end of said first section to said panel in overlying relation with
said hanger arm, said guard further comprising an elongated
second section having inner and outer ends, said second section
being telescoped with said first section and being selectively
slidable inwardly and outwardly relative thereto to enable
adjustment of the effective length of said guard, a series of first
detents spaced along said first section, a second detent formed
4,394,911
HEAVY DUTY CRANE
Leroy L. Wittman, Marion, and Lyie B. Jensen, Cedar Rapids,
both of Iowa, assignors to FMC Corporation, Chicago, III.
Filed Apr. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 138,461
Int. Q.' B66C 23/72
U.S. Q. 212—189 55 Qaims
1. A mobile heavy duty self propelled crane for use on a
foundation at a work site having a generally horizontal K>ad
supporting surface substantially at ground level, said crane
including a lower works having ground engaging transport
means, an upper works including an auxiliary frame means and
mobile components operatively connected thereto and
mounted on said lower works for rotation about a vertical axis,
a large diameter steel ring having a lower surface and an upper
surface, rotatable means for supporting the auxiliary frame on
said ring for rotation relative thereto; the improvement which
comprises means mounting said auxiliary frame means and
certain components operatively connected thereto for substan-
tial vertical movement, jack means operatively connected to
said auxiliary frame means for vertically moving said frame
1356
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
means and said vertically movable mobile crane components
operatively connected thereto between a lowered working
position wherein the auxiliary frame means is supported by said
rotatable means on the upper surface of said ring while the
lower surface of the ring is supported on the load supporting
mounted in said recessed pocket of said box and having an
elongated threaded shaft extending from and rotatable in either
direction by said motor means, and a non-rotatable threaded
member carried by said beam and threadably engageable by
said threaded shaft, whereby rotation of said shaft causes tele-
scoping movement of said beam with said box.
surface of said foundation, and a raised transport position
wherein said mobile ground engaging means supports all other
vertically movable components of the crane a sufficient dis-
tance above the lower surface of said ground engaging trans-
port means to provide adequate road clearance.
4^94,912
MOBILE CRANE HAVING TELESCOPING
OUTRIGGERS AND POWER OPERATED SCREW
MEANS FOR SAME
Stephen R. Epps, and Narahari Gattu, both of Cedar Rapids,
Iowa, assignors to Hamischfeger Corporation, W. Milwaukee,
Wis.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 203,942
Int. a.5 B66C 2i/78. 23/30
VS. a. 212—189 9 aainw
4,394,913
CRANE HAVING POWER OPERATED OUTRIGGERS
AND LOCK MEANS THEREFOR
John M. Lanning, Solon, and Stephan R. Epps, Cedar Rapids,
both of Iowa, assignors to Hamischfeger Corporation, West
Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Nov. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 203,944
Int. a.3 B66C 23/78
U.S. a. 212—189 3 Claims
1. A mobile crane comprising, an elongated main frame,
ground engaging means on said frame for supporting said
frame for movement over the ground, a superstructure rotat-
ably mounted on said frame and having an elevational boom
pivoted thereto; and a pair of outriggers each having an inner
end pivotally secured to said main frame at a location interme-
diate the length of said frame, said inner end of said outriggers
is of bifurcated construction and defines an outwardly facing
recessed pocket, vertically positionable ground engageable
means carried by the outer end of said outriggers, one outrig-
ger being secured to said frame at each side thereof and about
a vertical axis for swinging between a transport position along-
side said elongated main frame and a boom operative position
extending transversely outwardly of said main frame, said
outriggers comprising an elongated box and an inner beam
telescopingly slideable within said box for contraction within
said box and extending from said box, power operated exten-
sion means mounted between said box and beam of each of said
outriggers for telescopingly sliding said beam relative to said
box, said extension means comprising reversible motor means
1. A mobile crane comprising, an elongated main frame,
ground engaging means on said frame for supporting said
frame for movement over the ground, a superstructure rotat-
ably mounted on said frame and having an elevational boom
pivoted thereto; and a pair of outriggers each having an inner
end pivotally secured to said main frame at a location interme-
diate the length of said frame, one outrigger being secured to
said frame at each side thereof and about a vertical axis for
swinging between a transport position alongside said elongated
main frame and a boom operative position extending trans-
versely outwardly of said main frame, said inner end of said
outriggers being of bifurcated construction formed by a gener-
ally semi-circular plane welded transversely across said inner
end and defining an outwardly facing recessed pocket, power
operated means mounted on said outriggers and in said pocket
for swinging said outriggers relative to said main frame, said
power operated means comprising a hydraulic motor and a
gear reducer driven thereby, said motor and reducer being
disposed in a vertical direction, and a pinion gear attached to
the lower end of said reducer and driven by said reducer, and
a gear segment secured to said main frame adjacent a lower
side of said main frame, said segment being in mesh with said
pinion gear whereby rotation of said pinion gear causes swing-
ing of said outrigger.
4,394,914
TELESCOPIC CRANES
Albert Privat, St. Chamond, France, assignor to Creusot-Loire,
Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 956,597, Oct. 30, 1978, abandoned.
This appUcation Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,175
Qaims priority, application France, Nov. 21, 1977, 77 34850
Int. CI.' B66C 23/00
U.S. a. 212—203 3 Oaims
1. A telescopic crane comprising:
(a) a telescopic shaft comprising a plurality of telescopic
elements;
(b) a boom of variable length comprising an outer section
and at least one slidable inner section;
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1357
(c) means connecting said boom to said shaft for rotation of
said boom relative to said shaft;
(d) means for varying the length of said boom and compris-
ing a double-acting jack;
(e) a mast;
(0 means connecting one end of said mast to said boom for
rotation of said mast relative to said boom;
(g) means connecting the body of said jack to one of said
telescopic elements of said shaft for rotation of said jack
relative to said one telescopic element;
10 21 20 19 23 8
0^
(h) the outermost of said telescopic elements of said shaft
comprising a mortise into which said jack fits in retracted
position;
(i) means connecting the rod of said jack to the other end of
said mast for rotation of said jack relative to said mast; and
(j) tie means connecting said other end of said mast to a point
on said boom located outwardly of said means connecting
said boom to said mast.
4,394,915
HOT MELT ADHESIVE COMPOSITIONS AND BOTTLE
ASSEMBLIES USING SAID COMPOSITIONS
Jeffrey Nelson, Milwaukee, Wis., assignor to Findley Adhesives
Inc., Elm Grove, Wis.
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,738
Int. a.3 B65D 23/00; C08L 53/00
U.S. a. 215—12 R 10 Claims
1. A hot melt adhesive which comprises a blend of: (1) ?
block copolymer selected from the class consisting of: (a) an
A-B-A block copolymer where A is a monovinyl aromatic
hydrocarbon and B is either a conjugated diene or a rubbery
mono-olefin and (b) a teleblock copolymer comprising mole-
cules having at least three branches radially branching out
from a central hub, each said branch having polystyrene termi-
nal blocks and a butadiene segment in the center; (2) an
ethylene/vinyl acetate copolymer; (3) a tackifying resin which
serves to extend the adhesive properties of the system; (4) a
stabilizer; and (5) a wax or oil diluent.
permitting limited relative axial movements of said inner
and outer cap members;
a plurality of peripherally spaced, upstanding ratchet lugs on
said inner cap panel;
a plurality of depending integral leaf spring elements on the
bottom surface of said outer cap member normally biasing
said inner and outer cap members to a second relative axial
position in which said non-concentric aperture and driv-
ing lug are out of engagement, said leaf springs being
arranged to drivingly engage said ratchet lugs when said
outer cap member is rotated in a closure tightening direc-
tion and to cam past said ratchet lugs when said outer cap
member is rotated in a closure removal direction; and
said non-concentric aperture being angularly misaligned
with said upstanding drive lug when said leaf spring mem-
bers are drivingly engaging said ratchet lugs.
4,394,917
SEALED CLOSURE-CONTAINER PACKAGE
Christian Looser, Lutzenberg, Switzerland, assignor to Alcan
International Limited, Montreal, Canada
Filed Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 344,005
Oaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 3, 1981, 721/81
Int. a.5 B65D 81/36
U.S. CI. 215—232 7 Qaims
4,394,916
CHILD.RESISTANT CLOSURE ASSEMBLY
Ned J. Smalley, Perrysburg, Ohio, assignor to Owens-Illinois,
Inc., Toledo, Ohio
FUed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,584
Int C1.3 B65D 55/02
VJS. a. 215—220 4 Qaims
4. A safety closure assembly for a threaded container neck
comprising:
an inner cap member incuding a top panel and a depending
annular skirt, said inner cap skirt having threads formed
thereon for engaging the threaded container neck, said
inner cap panel having at least one upstanding, non-con-
centric driving lug formed on the upper surface thereof;
an outer cap member including a top panel and a depending
annular skirt, said outer cap member loosely encompass-
ing said inner cap member and p)ermitting relative rota-
tional movement therebetween, and means for retaining
said inner cap member within said outer cap member but
1. Sealed package for use or reuse as a drinking vessel com-
prising a container having an essentially cylindrical surface
adjacent the container mouth, a ring, formed of a length of
tape-like material, adhered to said cylindrical surface by means
of a layer of pressure sensitive adhesive carried by said Upe-
like material, said pressure sensitive adhesive being selected to
be peelable from said container surface without leaving objec-
tionable residues thereon, and a foil cover secured to said ring
by means of a heat-sealable material.
1338
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
434.918
SCREW CAP WITH TAMPER-PROOF HOLD RING
Jcu GruMca, Brcval, France, Msignor to Charles A. Breskin
Amoc. Inc., White Ptaini, N.Y.
FUed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,364
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 11, 1981, 81 02723
Int. a.' B65D 41/34
MS. a. 215—243 18 Claims
tainer comprising a generally flat cap- hermetically sealed to
the neck, a score line in a suriace thereof, a tear-initiating
means associated with the score line which comprises a hollow
tubular member extending upwardly from the top surface of
the cap and adapted for initiating a rupture of the score line at
a stress-concentrating locus on the score line, said tubular
member having a generally flat closed outer end and an open
inner end which coincides with an opening in the surface of the
cap, and said tubular member having a generally oval cross-
section, said oval cross-section defming a major axis and a
minor axis.
1. A screw cap for covering the opening in the neck of a
container, comprising:
the cap being a single molded member comprised of a semi-
rigid material, having the ability to flex elastically;
the cap comprising:
a cap body, including an end for covering the opening in the
container neck and including a lower edge away from the
end;
a closed, annular, hold ring for surrounding the container
below the neck thereof; the ring being connected to the
cap body at the lower edge of the cap body by a plurality
of attachment tabs which are sized and shaped for being
breakable upon being stressed more than a predetermined
amount;
a plurality of lock-lugs attached to the ring and protruding
inwardly from the ring and also toward the end of the cap
body, and the lock-lugs terminating at respective free
ends, which free ends are adapted for engaging an element
of the container to prevent raising of the lock-lugs past
that conuiner element; the lock-lugs protruding in such a
manner that a circle passing through the free ends of the
lock-lugs has a diameter less than the diameter of the
container element;
a flange for providing a generally non-breakable connection
between the cap body and the ring, said flange being
flexible for permitting the cap body to pivot off the hold
ring with the flange serving as the pivot hinge, said flange
being located between two tabs of said plurality of attach-
ment tabs.
4,394,920
SELF LOCKING CONTAINER CLOSURE
Ernst R. Jamer, 625 Shelter Creek La. #353, San Bruno, Calif.
94066
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 182,552, Aug. 29, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,331,248, and a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 256,350,
Apr. 21, 1981, abandoned. This appUcation Oct. 23, 1981, Ser.
No. 314,282
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 25,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 B65D 41/48
U.S. a. 215—253 20 Claims
4^94,919
CLOSURE FOR CONTAINER
Raymond D. von AWen, San Ratel, and Lee E. McGill, Orinda,
both of Calif., assignors to Cutter Laboratories, Inc., Berke-
ley, Calif.
FUed Jul. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 286,117
Int a.J B65D 41/32
UJS. a. 215—253 16 Claims
1. A container closure for use on a container of the type
having a hollow neck, a rim at the end of the neck, the rim
circumscribing the mouth of the container, and a ring extend-
ing around the neck, the closure comprising:
a top portion adapted to seat against said rim to seal said
container;
a radially expandable skirt depending from said top portion
to surround a portion of said neck, said skirt having an
upper edge attached to said top portion and a lower edge
opposite said top edge, said lower edge extending past said
ring;
said skirt having a plurality of inwardly directed shoulder
portions, said shoulder portions having means for rota-
tionally biasing said shoulder portions away from the ring
as said shoulder portions pass the ring on the container,
said shoulder portions also including a ring engagement
surface adapted for engagement under said ring to secure
said closure on said container; and
a retaining ring frangibly attached to said skirt below said
ring engagement surface to restrict the radial movement
of said shoulder portions.
1. A closure for a container for sealing the neck of the con-
4,394,921
GLASSWARE STOPPER WITH VENTING VALVE
Robert J. Miskinis, 9758 Airport Visto Rd., Santee, Calif. 92071
FUed Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,166 .
Int a.J B65D 39/16
U.S. a. 215—296 1 Claim
1. A vent stopper for a glassware vessel having a standard
taper opening with a tapered surface comprising:
a reusable stopper body (made of a polymer resin) having a
diameter less than the diameter of the vessel opening and
having a standard taper outer surface to sealably conform
to the tapered surface of the vessel, an inner end for ex-
tending into the neck of the vessel, and an outer shank
end, said shank end having a diameter no greater than the
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1359
diameter of the stopper body to enable the stopper body to
be totally and instantly sealed within the vessel opening
below the rim of the vessel opening anywhere along the
entire standard taper surface,
a flrst bore extending from said inner end to proximate the
center of said stopper body,
a second bore extending from said outer end and communi-
cating with said first bore,
a valve seat at the intersection of said first and second bores,
a valve stem having a passage therein mounted within said
second bore and selectively movable into and out of en-
4,394,923
THREADED CAP WITH INNER PLUG
Hiroaki Sugiyama, Numazu, Japan, assignor to Ricoh Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 337,210
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 14, 1981, 56-285 1[U]
Int. a.' B65D 41/04
U.S. a. 215—329 3 Oaims
gagement with said seat for selectively blocking and open-
ing communication between said bore and said passage,
an extractor assembly for extracting said stopper from the
vessel opening by breaking the seal between said standard
taper surfaces, said shank end of the stopper being
threaded, an extractor nut threadedly mounted on the
threaded shank end and having a diameter greater than the
diameter of the vessel opening so as to engage the rim of
the vessel opening and upon turning exert an axial force
on the stopper body to break the seal between said sur-
faces and allow the stopper to be lifted freely out of the
vessel opening.
4,394,922
RUBBER STOPPER WITH PLASTIC PULL RING
Hans Wimmer, Aachen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to The
West Company, Phoenixville, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 126,888, Mar. 3, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,020
Int. a.3 B65D 39/00. 39/16. 41/28
U.S. a. 215—300 6 Qaims
1. A closure assmbly for containers or the like comprising a
stopper made of resilient material including a flange overlying
the axial end face surrounding the discharge opening in the
container, a gripping member detachably secured to the stop-
per including a body portion and a ring member pivotally
connected to the body portion and adapted to overlie the
flange of the stopper, said ring member being hinged to said
body portion at diametrically opposed hinge locations and an
overcap having a peripheral skirt portion and a top flange
overlying at least the ring member and the juncture of the ring
member and the body portion.
1. A cap for a container, comprising a cap body and an inner
plug fitted therein, said cap body having an annular groove in
the inner wall thereof, said inner plug having a cup-shaped
body and an outwardly extending annular radial flange on the
uppermost portion of said body, said flange having an annular
shoulder on a lower face thereof so as to define an upper flange
portion and a lower flange portion of smaller diameter than
said upper flange portion, said upper flange portion being
received in said annular groove in said cap body, and the lower
face of said lower flange portion being engageable with the
upper edge of the mouth of the container when said cap is
fitted on the container, said cap body having a threaded por-
tion on said inner wall thereof and below said annular groove,
said threaded portion having radially inwardly projecting
ridges and being engageable with a thread on the container, the
internal diameter of said annular groove in said cap body being
substantially the same as the internal diameter of said ridges of
said threaded portion, and the external diameter of said annular
flange on said inner plug being slightly smaller than said inter-
nal diameters of said annular groove and said ridges.
4,394,924
PROCESS FOR MAKING GABIONS PROVIDED WITH
INNER PARTITIONS
Giulio Zaccheroni, Bologna, Italy, assignor to S.p.A. Offlcine
Maccaferri gia Raffaele Maccaferri &. Figli, Bologna, Italy
FUed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,881
Qalms priority, application Italy, Jun. 10, 1980, 67902-A/80
Int. a.3 B65D 6/08, 25/04
U.S. a. 220—19 3 Qaims
1. A process for the articulated connection of an edge por-
tion of a hexagonal-mesh, wire-netting panel to a further net-
ting panel intended to form the bottom of a gabion, said edge
portion comprising a marginal row of meshes of which each
adjacent pair has a common side formed by twisting two wires
together, free end portions of said two wires diverging each to
form a side of a respective one of said pair of meshes, wherein
said articulated connection is effected by:
bending each said free end portion of wire back into said
respective one of said pair of meshes to form a hook, so
that each common side of said marginal row of meshes
terminates in two said hooks; and
inserting said common sides through a row of meshes of said
1360
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
further netting panel and laterally shifting and withdraw- 4,394,926
ing said hexagonal-mesh wire-netting panel so as to en- REVERSE BUCKLING RUPTURE DISK APPARATUS
Sam A. Ou, Bixby, and Ronald J. LaPeUe, Tulsa, both of Okla.,
assignors to BS A B Safety Systems, Inc., Tulsa, Okla.
FUed Feb. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 350,100
Int. a.3 F16K 17/40
n I U.S. a. 220— 89 A 2 Claims
2
L
10
gage said hooks with the netting of said further panel to
form the articulated connection.
4,394,925
FUEL TANK-nLLER PIPE PARTICULARLY FOR
MOTOR VEHICLES
Egon Rump, Cologne, and Wolfgang Franzen, Hurth, botb of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ford Motor Company,
Dearborn, Mich.
FUed May 29, 1981, Ser. No. 268,452
Int. a.3 B65B 3/04: B67C 3/00; G05B 00/00
U.S. a. 220—86 R 5 Claims
1. An improved reverse buckling rupture disk apparatus
comprising:
a reverse buckling rupture disk including a concave-convex
portion connected to an annular flat flange portion by a
transition connection;
at least one support member for supporting said flat flange
portion of said rupture disk in a pressure relief area; and
knife means attached to said support member and positioned
with respect to the concave-convex portion of said rup-
ture disk whereby upon the reversal thereof, said con-
cave-convex portion is severed by said knife means, said
knife means comprising:
four blade legs positioned at right angles to each other
having sharpened cutting edges thereon attached to-
gether at the internal ends thereof and attached to said
support member at the external ends thereof, each of
said blade legs having at least a portion of the cutting
edge thereof inclined towards said rupture disk from the
internal end to the external end thereof and having a
portion of the cutting edge adjacent the transition con-
nection of said rupture disk extending towards the
concave-convex portion thereof beyond the plane of
the annular flange portion thereof whereby upon rever-
sal of the concave-convex portion of said rupture disk,
said concave-convex portion is progressively severed
by said cutting edges of said blade legs from points
adjacent said transition connection to the center of said
concave-convex portion of said rupture disk; and
a spike attached to said knife means at the point where the
internal ends of said blade legs are attached together
positioned extending towards said rupture disk whereby
upon reversal of said concave-convex portion of said
rupture disk, said concave-convex portion is punctured
by said spike.
1. A fuel tank-filler neck for avoiding the return of fuel from
a fuel tank during the filling process, said fuel tank-filler neck
being adapted to be disposed sloping upwards from said fuel
tank at an oblique angle, comprising a filler pipe, an air vent
being provided in a lower portion of said filler pipe adapted to
be disposed within said fuel tank; a mouth at an upper end of
said filler pipe adapted to receive a fuel pump nozzle; a Ven-
turi-type neck of reduced diameter extending said lower por-
tion of said filler pipe below said air vent; and an air vent pipe
extending within said filler pipe from said mouth to said air
vent in said lower portion of said filler pipe.
4,394,927
METALLIC CONVENIENCE CLOSURE
Edgar H. Zysset, Sylvania, Ohio, assignor to General Can Com-
pany, Inc., City of Industry, Calif.
FUed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,554
Int a.3 B65D 17/36. 17/34
U.S. a. 220—273 5 Claims
1. A metallic convenience closure for a cylindrical container
comprising
a centra] panel,
an endless severing line formed in the central panel and
defining a central removable portion and a peripheral
fixed portion,
means forming a part of the fixed portion for attaching a
closure to the end of a container to close the end,
a manually graspable pull-tab attached to the removable
portion of the panel and having a nose portion movable
upon lifting of the tab into position adjacent the score line
for severing the score line,
said tab including a first portion riveted to said removable
portion of the panel,
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1361
a second portion extending radially outwardly toward the tainer, liquid and air ports extending through said raised por-
score line and terminating in said nose portion,
and a manual grasping portion integral with the second
portion and extending radially inwardly,
said first portion having at least one straight edge,
tions to the exterior of said container, said shelf, said raised
portions in said peripheral rim, said generally radial rib pas-
sages and said ports forming connecting passages for liquid to
flow from said container when said container is tilted and for
air to flow thereinto but forming baffles and deflectors for the
liquid contents of said container when said container is vertical
and is shaken.
said removable portion of the panel having a portion thereof
deformed including a complementary straight edge en-
gaging the straight edge of said first portion of the tab
preventing rotation of the tab about the axis of the rivet
thereby maintaining registry of the nose portion with the
score line during the opening of the convenience closure.
4,394,928
SPLASH-PROOF CONTAINER AND COVER
Morris Philip, c/o Philip Knitting Mills, 26 Bruckner Blvd.,
Bronx, N.Y. 10454
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 138,444, Apr. 22, 1980, Pat. No.
4,322,014, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 61,197,
Jul. 27, 1979, abandoned. This application Mar. 20, 1981, Ser.
No. 246,043
I Int. a.5 B65D 41/26. 51/16
U.S. a. 220—366 6 Qaims
4,394,929
CRYOGENIC LIQUID STORAGE CONTAINER HAVING
AN IMPROVED ACCESS CONDUIT
Nandlal P. Patel, Indianapolis, Ind., and Roger J. Dolida, King-
wood, Tex., assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Dan-
bury, Conn.
FUed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,949
Int. a.3 B65D 25/18: F17C 13/00
U.S. a. 220—421 1 Claim
1. A splash-proof container for liquids and a cover recessed
within the open end of said container, said container having an
upwardly extending flange defining the perimeter of its open
end and extending upwardly above said cover and a shelf
interconnecting said flange and the body of said container, said
shelf extending substantially at right angle to the vertical axis
of said container and transverse to said body and said flange
and circumferentially around said vertical axis, said cover
having a peripheral rim defining the outer perimeter thereof,
said peripheral rim having flat portions thereof in engagement
with said shelf, said peripheral rim having raised portions
extending upwardly away from said shelf, said raised portions
having spaced rib passages extending generally radially in-
wardly from said raised portions and said peripheral rim
toward the center of said cover and opening into said con-
1. A vacuum insulated cryogenic container comprising:
an inner vessel for holding a cryogenic liquid, said inner
vessel having an access opening;
an outer shell enclosing said inner vessel in a spaced apart
relationship so as to form an evacuable space therebe-
tween, said outer shell having an access opening disposed
substantially in alignment with said access opening of said
inner vessel;
thermal insulation material disposed in said evacuable space;
and
an access conduit joining said access opening of said outer
shell to said access opening of said inner shell such that
said inner vessel is supported within the outer shell in said
spaced apart relationship by said access conduit; wherein
said access conduit is an elongated body having a substan-
tially constant inside diameter of cylindrical configuration
and a variable outside diameter which decreases linearly
in dimension within said evacuable space to form a grad-
ual taper from a point proximate to the juncture of said
access conduit with said outer shell to a point proximate
the juncture of said access conduit with said inner vessel,
said variable outside diameter of said access conduit de-
creases linearly such that the ratio of stress in said conduit
due to bending moment to said strength of said conduit
material is substantially constant along the length of said
conduit within said evacuable space between said two
juncture points, said access conduit being composed of a
material whose strength increases with decreasing tem-
perature.
1362
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,930
ABSORBENT FOAM PRODUCTS
Ralf Korpman, Somerset City, N.J., assignor to Johnson A
Johnson, New Brunswick, N.J.
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,387
Int. a.' H05B 3/68: A47J 41/00; B32B 27/00: C08J 9/00
U.S. a. 220—444 W Claims
1. An absorbent foam product prepared by mixing together
a solid, particulate, water-insoluble, water-swellable polymer
having a gel capacity of at least 10, a solid, particulate blowing
agent, and a liquid polyhydroxy organic compound and allow-
ing the mixture to foam.
14. An absorbent article comprising a foam coated substrate,
said foam coated substrate obtained by (a) mixing together a
solid, particulate, water-insoluble, water-swellable polymer
having a gel capacity of at least 10, a solid, particulate blowing
agent, and a liquid polyhydroxy organic compound to obtain a
foamable composition, (b) coating said composition onto a
substrate, and (c) allowing the mixture to foam.
19. A dual walled container for transporting aqueous fluids
having a breakable inner wall and a non-breakable outer wall
and having in a portion of the space between the two contain-
ers walls, a foam prepared by mixing together solid, particu-
late, water-insoluble, water-swellable polymer having a gel
capacityy of at least 10, a solid, particulate blowing agent, and
a liquid polyhydroxy organic compound and allowing the
mixture to foam.
4,394,932
VENDING MACHINE HAVING TILTABLE FLAP
CLOSURE
Allan Ahlstrom, Mahults Herrgard, Simlangsdalen, Sweden
31038
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,429
Int. a.' G07F 11/52
U.S. a. 221—83
4 Claims
11-1 r
4 394 931
HEAT-INSULATED CONTAINER PROVIDED WITH A
LOCATING AND/OR SUPPORTING DEVICE
Terence Cotgreave, Decside, Wales, and David A. Qiffe, Mid-
dleton, England, assignors to Shell Internationale Research
Maatschappij B. V., The Hague, Netherlands
Filed Apr. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 258,028
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 25, 1980,
8013743
Int. a.3 B65D 25/02, 90/04. 25/10
U.S. a. 220—453 13 Qaims
1. A heat-insulated container for liquefied gases, comprising
a rigid outer shell internally lined with a heat-insulating rigid
polyurethane foam material and provided with a means for
locating and supporting structures or apparatus to the inner
surface of said container, wherein:
said locating means comprises a plate member formed of a
material having a low coefficient of thermal expansion;
said plate member being bonded to the inner side of said heat-
insulating material with a cured epoxy resin formulation;
said plate member being provided with means for securing or
locating a structure or apparatus thereto; and
a laminate collar comprising a fiber material and a cured epoxy
resin formulation mounted about the periphery of said plate
member, said laminate collar being bonded to said plate
member and said heat-insulating material with a cured epoxy
resin formulation.
1. A vending machine of the type where a number of drums
are arranged in a cabinet to be rotatable about a horizontal
shaft and which includes a mechanism for selecting either of
the drums and a release mechanism permitting rotation of a
selected drum, the machine further comprising
a front shield and a rear shield each covering less than 90° of
the lower circumference of said drums, said front shield
being stationary while said rear shield is swingable about
the shaft carrying said drum between a first position in
which it leaves a passage between itself and said front
shield and a second position in which it closes said passage
a flap tiltable about a horizontal axis to occupy either of two
positions and adapted in one of said positions to partly
close said passage, and
an actuator operable by said release mechanism for rotating
a drum selected by said selector mechanism and to tilt said
flap into the other of its said positions.
4,394,933
CAPSULE ORIENTING APPARATUS
E. Michael Ackley, 1273 N. Church St., Moorestown, N.J.
08057
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,745
Int. a.J B65G 47/24
U.S. a. 221—173 23 Qaims
1. Apparatus for orienting capsules having telescoping cap
and body portions, said apparatus comprising:
means for supplying, in random orientation, capsules having
telescoping cap and body portions;
rectifying means for receiving said capsules in random orienta-
ton and for delivering said capsules in uniform orienUtion;
and selection means for receiving said capsules from said recti-
fying means and for segregating any of said capsules which
are not in uniform orientation, said selection means includ-
ing:
(1) a transfer mechanism having a set of pockets for receiv-
ing said capsules from said rectifying means and for mov-
ing said capsules to a discharge point, each of said pockets
having a recessed portion disposed perpendicular to the
direction of movement of said transfer mechanism and
sized larger than said body portions of said capsules and
smaller than said cap portions of said capsules;
(2) means for driving said capsules from said rectifying
means into said pockets in said transfer mechanism.
July 26, 198:
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1363
whereby capsules having their body portions in said re-
cessed portions of said pockets are loosely held and cap-
sules having their cap portions in said recessed portions of
said pockets are tightly held;
(3) means for discharging said loosely held capsules from
said pockets in said transfer mechanism at said discharge
point; and
(4) means for ejecting said tightly held capsules from said
pockets in said transfer mechanism at an ejection point.
4,394,934
FLUID DISPENSING ANTI-BURGLAR DEVICE
Charles R. Fegley, 1606 Frush Valley Rd., Laureldale, Pa. 19605
Continuation of Ser. No. 53,990, Jul. 2, 1979, abandoned. This
apptication Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 242,053
Int. a,J B67B 7/24
U.S. a. 222—$
27 Claims
1. A fluid dispensing anti-burglar device for use with a pres-
surized container, the device comprising:
(a) a body member;
(b) means for supporting said pressurized container in said
body member, wherein said pressurized container has a
fluid-dispensing element adapted to release fluid under
pressure from said pressurized container when actuated;
(c) a passageway in said body member having an entry
section at one end thereof;
(d) dispensing element-actuating means mounted in said
body member and adapted to engage and actuate said
fluid-dispensing element;
(e) spring means biased to force said fluid-dispensing element
and said dispensing element-actuating means into engage-
ment with each other, thereby causing said fluid-dispens-
ing element to be actuated;
(0 trigger means adapted to releasably retain said spring
means in a cocked position in which said fluid-dispensing
element and said dispensing element-actuating means are
separated from each other;
(g) trigger-actuating means associated with said trigger to
actuate said trigger upon the application of an electric
current to said trigger-actuating means, whereby said
spring is released from its cocked position causing said
fluid-dispensing element to be actuated, and fluid under
pressure is released from said container to pass through
said passageway;
(h) delay means for causing the delay of the application of
. electric current to said trigger-actuating means after elec-
tric current is applied to said device, thereby permitting
the removal of said electric current if the electric current
is accidentally applied to the device;
(i) and a circuit board containing the trigger-actuating means
and the delay means mounted within said body member.
4,394,935
ZERO SETTING MECHANISM FOR SERVICE STATION
PUMPS
Mario Orlando, 2320 E. North La., Phoenix, Ariz. 85021
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,337
Int. a.3 B67D 5/26
U.S. a. 222—35 9 Qaims
r"
1. An actuating mechanism comprising an actuatable shaft,
an actuating member adapted to rotate a predetermined dis-
tance in one direction and the reverse thereof, a coupling
element between said actuauble shaft and said actuating mem-
ber and attached to said actuatable shaft, said coupling element
and said actuating member being adapted to move relative to
each other, movable stop means on said coupling element,
fixed stop means for engagement by said movable stop means,
interengaging means between said coupling element and said
actuating member having one position for effecting movement
of said coupling element upon movement of said actuating
element until engagement of said fixed stop by said movable
stop, whereupon relative movement in one direction occurs
between said coupling element and said actuating element, said
interengaging means having a second position for effecting
movement of said coupling element in the reverse direction
upon movement of said actuating element in the reverse direc-
tion to a predetermined position, and means for moving said
interengaging means from said second position to said one
position while holding said actuating member stationary.
1364
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4 J94 936 4,394,937
DEFORMABLE CONTAINER AND A FLAT PIECE FOR SAFETY CAN CONVERSION APPARATUS
MAKING A CONTAINER Frank S. Flider, Mattoon, III., assignor to Justrite Manufactur-
Henri Shavit, General Guisanstrasse 1, 4144 Arlesheim, Switzer- ing Company, Chicago, 111.
,g„j Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser, No. 203,588
Filed Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 270,988 Int. Q.^ B65D 47/08
Int. a.3 B65D 35/08. 35/14 U.S. Q. 222-189 20 Qaims
U.S. a. 222—107 9 Qaims
/ 7
. A a / - >
^-
~ ~.
1. A deformable container of semi-rigid material consisting
of.
a. a planar first work piece resistant to thermoplastic deforma-
tion with an at least one side having a fusible coating
thereon,
b. a shaped folding edge means defining a center segment with
an opening therethrough,
c. a first side wall segment transverse to the said center seg-
ment commencing at a section of the said shaped folding
edge means and terminating at the periphery of the said first
work piece furthest from the said shaped folding edge,
d. a second side wall segment transverse to the said center
segment commencing at a section of the said shaped folding
edge symmetrically opposite that of the commencement of
fold of the first side wall segment and terminating at the
periphery of the said first work piece furthest from the said
shaped folding edge from whence the second side wall
segment commenced,
e. said center segment disposed to controllably deflect the said
first and second side wall segments into depressed cavities
therein having an elevation following the shaped folding
edge means and thereto fixedly separate the first side wall
segment and second side wall segment proximately situated
to the said shaped folding edge,
f. side edge means on the periphery of the said first and second
wall segments defining the depressed cavities therein and
disposed to be fusibly mated to form a hollow space for filler
material,
g. closing edge means around the periphery of said mated side
walls defined by the unfused portions of the said fused right
and left side alls disposed to be fusibly mated after filling the
said hollow space,
h. a second work piece consisting of an extended collar means
and a discharge opening means with a connecting means
thereon projecting transversely from the said collar with a
bore through the longitudinal axis of the said discharge
opening means and extended collar means, said discharge
opening means disposed to project through the said opening
in the said central segment and said collar means to be fusi-
bly connected to the said fusible coating, and
i. a closing lid means operatively associated with the said
connecting means on the said discharge opening means to
stop discharge of the filler material.
12. An improved safety closure adapter arrangement for
mounting on a storage container such as the type known as a
Jerry can, said container including a hollow interior for receiv-
ing fluid contents, the upper surface of said container being
provided with an opening though which said fluid content may
be poured, said improved safety closure adapter arrangement
comprising:
pour spout means;
means for securing said pour spout means in said opening;
safety cap means, said safety cap means adapted to seat on
the outer surface of said pour spout means in closing
relation to said pour spout means whereby -a substantially
fluid-and-vapor-tight seal results when said safety cap
means is in a closed position;
operating handle means;
pivot support means, said pivot support means designed to
be secured to the upper end of said container proximate to
said opening;
said pivot support means supporting said operating handle
means for pivotal movement thereof;
link means, said link means connecting said safety cap means
to said operating handle means whereby pivotal move-
ment of said operating handle means is effective to selec-
tively move said safety cap means from a closed position
to an open positon relative to said pour spout means;
said operating handle means being pivotally connected on
one side and extending over and across said spout's outer
end opening, whereby said operating handle makes sup-
porting and stabilizing contact with the bottom of a
stacked Jerry can when said safety cap means is in its
closed position;
spring means, said spring means cooperating with said link
means to bias said link menas to a default position wherein
said safety cap means is securely seated on said pour spout
means in said closed position;
said improved safety closure adapter arrangement being
designed to fit completely within the open region of the
Jerry can proximate to said opening when in said closed
position, whereby said handle means, said link means, said
pour spout means, and said safety cap means do not extend
beyond the sides of said container or above a line extend-
ing from the elevated horizontal handle of said Jerry can.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1365
4,394,938
DISPENSER AND PACKAGE FOR LIQUID OR
GRANULAR MATERIALS
John R. Frassanito, San Antonio, Tex., assignor to Sani-Fresh
International, Inc., San Antonio, Tex.
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 176,909
Int. a.3 GOIF 11/02
U.S. a. 222—207 12 Qaims
container to define a boundary of the storage chamber, the
piston member being movable towards and restrained from
movement away from said compressible portion; a top surface
to define another boundary of the storage chamber; and an
elastically compressible pump means defined by said compress-
ible portion and by said top surface and having an inlet valve
in the top surface, an outlet valve, and a pump chamber be-
tween the valves, said inlet valve comprising (1) an annular slot
1. Apparatus for dispensing liquid or granular materials, for
use with a package which contains liquid or granular material
and has a resilient tube associated with said package, compris-
ing:
a housing, said housing including means for supportmg said
package;
a backup block, having a compression surface thereon, asso-
ciated with said housing;
a dispensing arm having a first end portion pivotally associ-
ated with said housing and having a second, free end
portion;
a first dispensing block associated with said dispensing arm,
said first dispensing block being disposed adjacent the
compression surface of said backup block; and
a second dispensing block pivotally and yieldably mounted
(associated) with respect to said dispensing arm, said
second dispensing block disposed beneath, and spaced
from, the first dispensing block whereby, upon an actuat-
ing force being imposed upon the free end portion of said
dispensing arm, the first dispensing block contacts the
resilient tube at a first predetermined impact point to
compress the resilient tube against the compression sur-
face of the backup block, and the second dispensing block
contacts the resilient tube at a second predetermined
impact point spaced from, and below, said first impact
point, to apply a force to the resilient tube.
extending circularly in the top surface symmetrically to the
longitudinal axis of the container and having a cross-section
extending at an angle of from about 45° to 75° from the direc-
tion normal to the container axis and (2) a circular cover ring
held sealingly in front of the annular slot and elastically under
constant stress, the cover ring being held by three or more
spokes radiating from a hub positioned in the center of the top
surface.
4,394,940
DISPENSER FOR n.UENT MATERIALS
Oscar F. A. Peterson, 3125 Portage Are., Winnipeg, Manitoba,
Canada R3K 0W4
Filed May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,317
Int. a.5 GOIF 11/24
U.S. a. 222—276 5 Qaims
/6 AO
II' 4 34^ 939
DISPENSER CONTAINER FOR VISCOUS FLUIDS
Giinter Thor, Krefeld-Traar; Albert Stoffler, and Dietholf Mehl,
both of Diisseldorf, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Henkel Kommandltgesellschaft auf Aktien, Diisseldorf-Hol-
thausen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,149
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 22,
1980, 3035728
Int. a? B65D 83/00. 37/00
U.S. CI. 222—207 ' Claims
1. A dispensing container intended for single use prepared
by pressure diecasting, which comprises a container body
provided at one end with a resiliently compressible portion
including a mouthpiece; a storage chamber to hold material to
be dispensed; a piston member arranged at the other end of said
1. A dispenser for fluent materials comprising in combina-
tion a hopper for holding said material, said hopper includmg
an apertured base, said apertured base including a pair of feed-
ing apertures one on each side of a center line of said base, a
metering and dispensing plate supported below said base,
actuating means extending from said plate for partial roUtional
movement thereof relative to the vertical axis of said dispenser
from one dispensing position through to another dispensing
position and vice versa, means to support said plate relative to
said base, dispensing means situated below said plate and oper-
atively connected therewith, and means in said plate for meter-
ing fluent material from said hopper and dispensmg same
through said dispensing means, said means in said plate includ-
ing aperture means formed through said plate, one of said
aperture means aligning with one of said feeding apertures in
said base and the other of said apertures aligning with said
1366
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
dispensing means, when said plate is in one dispensing position,
and the other of said aperture means aligning with the other of
said feeding apertures and the one said aperture means aligning
with said dispensing means, when said plate is in the other
dispensing position, a pair of movable wall portions one in each
of said aperture means in said plate, linkage means op>eratively
extending between said actuating means and said movable wall
portions for moving said wall portions relative to said aperture
means to vary the volume thereof, said aperture means com-
prising an elongated slot formed through said plate and having
a metering portion at each end thereof, said actuating means
including a rod rotatably mounted in said plate and extending
into the center of said slot, said linkage means comprising a
pair of crank arms each pivotally connected by one end
thereof, to one end of said rod and by the other end thereof one
each to one of said movable walls.
4^94^2
AUTOMATIC APPARATUS FOR SUPPLYING A HXED
QUANTITY OF PARTICLE OR POWDER
Yoshitomo Yoshioka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to K.K. Yoshioka
Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
FUed Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,861
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 11, 1980, 55-093861
Int. a.3 GOIF 11/10
U.S. a. 222—361 . 13 Oaims
4394,941
FLUID DISPENSER
Giuseppe Recine, Philadelphia, Pa., assignor to Thomas L. Shan-
non, Jr., Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,691
Int. a.5 BOID 53/04
U.S. CI. 222—355 4 Claims
1. A dispenser for dispensing fluent materia! comprising:
an outer tubularly shaped body member including an opening
in a side wall adjacent the first end thereof and having a
second open end;
an inner tubularly shaped member within said outer member
and axially movable with respect thereto, both ends of said
inner member being closed, a first opening in a side wall of
said inner member adjacent the first end thereof and a sec-
ond opening in an opposite side wall adjacent the second end
thereof;
means for biasing said inner member toward the first end of
said outer member to a fill position wherein the opening of
said outer member coincides with said first opening of said
inner member and wherein the portion of said inner member
having said second opening is within said outer member;
a plunger means extending from the first end of said outer
member and being connected to said inner member for mov-
ing said inner member to a dispensing position wherein the
portion of said inner member having said second opening
extends outward beyond the second end of said outer mem-
ber, and
a closure means for closing communication between the open-
ing in said outer member and said first opening in said inner
member prior to movement of said inner member.
1. Apparatus for repeatedly and laterally transferring a pre-
determined amount of powdered or particle material contained
in a fixedly located hopper having an outlet port to a fixedly
located working table installed separately at a lateral distance
from said hopper, comprising:
measuring transfer means provided below said hopper and
which is reciprocably movable laterally from an original
position below said hopper to a predetermined position
above said working table, and laterally back to said original
position below said hopper;
measuring cavity means including at least one through hole of
a predetermined configuration provided vertically and pene-
tratingly through said measuring transfer means such that
said at least one through hole is located at a position above
said working table when said measuring transfer means is at
its predetermined position above said working table, and
said at least one through hole is located at a position directly
below said outlet port of said hopper when said measuring
transfer means is at said original position below said hopper;
gate means provided beneath said measuring transfer means
and which includes means for interlocking with said measur-
ing transfer means to move with said measuring transfer
means from its original position to its said predetermined
[>osition, said gate means including means for closing the
bottom of said at least one through hole of said measuring
cavity means during said movement from said original posi-
tion to said predetermined position, said interlocking means
including means for releasing said gate means from said
measuring transfer means at said predetermined position,
said gate means being slideable back to its original position
when so released, thereby leaving the bottom of said at least
one through hole open directly above said working table at
said predetermined position;
said measuring transfer means comprising a main substantially
horizontally arranged plate of a predetermined thickness
reciprocably driven to reciprocate between said original and
said predetermined positions along a given path;
said gate means comprising a bottom plate provided beneath
said main plate and contacting the bottom of said main plate
for closing the bottom of said at least one through hole
during said movement from said original position to said
predetermined position; and
an upper plate substantially horizontally arranged above said
main plate and having an opening therein in registration with
said outlet port of said hopper and being in fixed position
relative to said hopper;
said main plate having a solid portion which covers said open-
ing in said upper plate during movement of said main plate
between said original and predetermined positions, thereby
maintaining said outlet port of said hopper in a closed condi-
tion during movement of said main plate; and
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1367
said upper plate, said main plate and said bottom plate compris-
ing a sandwich-type structure with said main plate inter-
posed between said upper and bottom plates and being slid-
able in the horizontal direction relative to said upper and
bottom plates.
" 4,394,943
TILTING TRAP CHAMBER
Goran Sjbnell, 11 Askrikeviigen, Lidingb, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 147,380, May 7, 1980, abandoned. This
applicadon Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,032
Qaims priority, application Sweden, May 16, 1979, 7904286
Int. C\? GOIF 11/26
U.S. a. 222—456 8 Claims
1. A container for dispensing measured amounts of a pow-
dered material comprising a top wall, a bottom wall and side-
walls connecting said top and bottom walls, said top wall being
provided with a discharge opening, a partition being disposed
adjacent said discharge opening and extending downwardly
from the bottom surface of said top wall, a first inclined wall
extending upwardly from the sidewall below said discharge
opening, said first inclined wall having one end attached to said
sidewall and the other end being free and extending upwardly
beyond said partition below the bottom surface of said top
wall, and a second inclined wall extending downwardly from
said bottom surface of the top wall towards the sidewall oppo-
site to said first inclined wall, openings being provided be-
tween said first and second inclined walls, between said free
end of said first inclined wall and said bottom surface of said
top wall, and between the lower end of said partition and said
first inclined wall form a flowpath for said powdered material,
and said second inclined wall preventing the presence of a
column of the powdered material above the opening between
said free end of said first inclined wall and said bottom surface
of said top wall when said container is tilted during dispensing
of said powdered material.
4,394,944
VALVED CLOSURE FOR DISPENSING CONTAINER
Jakob Rech, Detroit, Mich., assignor to Jerome Applefield and
Sheldon Applefield, both of Southfield, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 943,534, Sep. 18, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 726,418, Sep. 24,
1976, Pat. No. 4,141,476. This application Sep. 15, 1980, Ser.
No. 187,321
Int. a.5 B65D 47/30
U.S. a. 222—553 9 Claims
said closure cap comprising a housing, means for attaching said
housing in communication with the interior of said container, a
substantially rectangular slotted dispensing aperture formed in
a wall of said housing, a pair of exterior side surfaces on said
housing each extending along one of a pair of opposite edges of
said slotted dispensing aperture, said side surfaces being mutu-
ally disposed such as to substantially converge toward the
centerline of said slotted dispensing aperture and to extend
away from said aperture to a point below said slotted dispens-
ing aperture centerline, a cylindrical bore having an axis paral-
lel to the centerline of said slotted dispensing aperture and
disposed in said housing such as to be intersected by said slot-
ted dispensing aperture, a cylindrical valve body disposed
rotatably in said bore and extending at least from one side of
said housing to an opposite side, said cylindrical valve body
having a peripheral surface normally obturating said slotted
dispensing aperture and projecting slightly through said slot-
ted dispensing aperture, said valve body having a radial pas-
sageway therethrough placing the interior of said housing in
communication with the exterior of said housing through said
slotted dispensing aperture when said valve body is rotated in
said bore from a first position whereby said passageway is out
of registration with said slotted dispensing aperture to a second
position whereby said passageway registers with said slotted
dispensing aperture, said slotted dispensing aperture having
each of said pair of opposite side edges chamfered such as to be
substantially tangential to and diverging from the peripheral
surface of said valve body and forming at least one sharp edge
engaging the peripheral surface of said valve body whereby a
ribbon of pasty material dispensed from said container is
sheared off upon rotation of said valve body from said second
to said first position, said peripheral surface of said cylindrical
valve body projecting beyond the opposite edges of said slot-
ted dispensing aperture such that cleaning of the edges of said
aperture is greatly facilitated, an elongated lever integral with
said valve body and extending generally alongside the longitu-
dinal axis of the dispensing container from the neck toward the
bottom portion of said dispensing container, said lever being
for rotation of said valve body by a finger and having a sub-
stantial surface engageable by said finger, means holding said
valve body in position for rotation in said bore and preventing
longitudinal motion therein, said means comprising a slot
through said housing formed opposite said slotted dispensing
aperture, said lever projecting through said slot and being
adapted to engage one side of said slot for limiting rotation of
said valve body in one direction to said first position and to
engage the other of said slot for limiting rotation of said valve
body in opposite direction to said second position, said slot
having a length corresponding substantially to the dimension
of said lever along the longitudinal axis of said valve body such
as to prevent longitudinal motion of said valve body in said
cylindrical bore in said housing, wherein said valve body is a
hollow cylinder having a closed end and an open end placing
the interior of said housing in communication with the exterior
of said housing through the passageway in said valve body,
said passageway being a substantially rectangular aperture in
the wall of said cylinder.
ZQ'80ljX^^i> ^>^
/o-
1. A closure cap for a dispensing container, said closure cap
being operable by a finger of the hand holding said container.
4,394,945
VALVE HAVING SUCK-BACK FEATURE
James H. Taylor, Jr., PlaiuTille, Conn., assignor to Loctite
Corporation, Newington, Conn.
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,421
Int CI.' B65D 5/72
U.S. a. 222-571 8a*im8
1. In a valve assembly comprising a housing containing a
liquid discharge passage, a discharge nozzle extending from
said passage, a discharge valve in said passage for closing the
flow of liquid therethrough upon engagement with a valve
seat, and said passage downstream of said valve defining a
variable volume chamber in communication with said nozzle
for creating a suck-back flow of liquid from said nozzle upon
an increase in volume of said chamber, the improvement
1368
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
wherein said valve is spring-biased into a closing position and
is moved into an open position in response to a predetermined
level of liquid pressure in said passage upstream thereof, said
valve having a portion engaging said valve seat in said closing
position, said valve seat being defined by the wall of said
discharge passage upstream of said variable volume chamber,
and said valve having a stop shoulder thereon axially spaced
from said valve portion, the wall of the variable volume cham-
ber adjacent to said valve seat defining an abutment, said stop
of said link for preventing upward pivoting movement
of the yoke legs,
whereby said yoke legs may be pivoted downwardly to lie
in the plane of said link and said yoke and said link may
be pivoted forwardly and downwardly as a unit to
underlie the plane of said base when not in use.
4,394,947
AUTOMOBILE CARGO CARRYING RACK
Paul Tartaglia, 12414 Veronica Cir., Dallas, Tex. 75234
Filed Mar. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 244,262
Int. a.3 B60R 9/06
U.S. a. 224—42.43 1 Oaim
shoulder and said valve portion being disposed in said chamber
adjacent said abutment, said stop shoulder and said valve por-
tion being disposed in said chamber when said discharge valve
is in said open position, whereby upon a decrease of said liquid
pressure below said predetermined level said valve moves into
said closing jx)sition and thereafter continues movement up-
stream into said passage until said stop shoulder and said abut-
ment interengage the volume of said chamber thereby expand-
ing to effect said suck-back flow of liquid from said nozzle.
4,394,946
COLLAPSIBLE BOOTJACK
Robert C. McCormick, Grand Prairie, Tex., assignor to Hy-
Jacker Products, Inc., Santa Maria, Calif.
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,377
Int. a.3 A47J 51/02
U.S. a. 223—115 3 Qaims
1. A compact foldable bootjack, comprising:
an elongated horizontal base having a forward bifurcated
end portion;
an elongated tongue struck out of said base adjacent its
bifurcated end,
said tongue having a transverse forward edge surface
disposed above the upper surface of the base;
an elongated upstanding planar link pivotally connected at
its depending end portion with the bifurcated end portion
of said base and normally contacting said tongue edge
surface for preventing rearward pivoting movement of
said link; and,
a normally horizontal yoke comprising a generally U-shaped
planar member having a bight portion and forwardly
projecting diverging legs adapted for frictionally engag-
ing a boot quarter when disposed therebetween to facili-
tate removal of the boot from the user's foot,
said yoke legs straddling the upper end portion of said link
and pivotally connected therewith with said bight por-
tion normally contacting the adjacent rearward surface
1. An all purpose cargo carrying rack for connecting to the
tongue of a standard trailer hitch, said carrying rack compris-
ing:
a platform forming a horizontal supporting surface for cargo
to be carried, said platform including a rectangular frame
surrounding said supporting surface;
securing means for connecting said platform to the trailer
hitch tongue, said securing means including:
(1) a vertical member having a first horizontal plate mem-
ber at one end having means for aligning and releasably
securing to one of the sides of said frame, the other end
of said vertical member having a threaded extension for
passing through an aperture in the trailer hitch tongue
to releasably secure said vertical member by means of a
threaded nut, a second horizontal plate member adja-
cent to said threaded extension and offset therefrom;
(2) a pair of spaced struts having means for releasably
securing one end of each strut to a side of the frame
opposite said one of the sides, said struts constructed to
extend from the side of the frame opposite said one of
the sides downwardly toward and below said second
horizontal plate member;
(3) a third horizontal plate member;
said second horizontal plate member, said third horizontal
plate member, and the ends of said spaced struts opposite
said one end of each strut having means to substantially
vertically align the second and third horizontal plate
members and to releasably secure them and said ends of
said spaced struts together while a portion of the trailer
hitch extends between said second and third horizontal
plate member.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1369
4,394,948 rations with said pins creating bunched portions of said docu-
BICYCLE CARRIER FOR VEHICLES ments between adjacent pins as said documents are fed, said
Joseph V. Graber, 3739 County Trunk M, Middleton, Wis. wheel having a notch formed in the surface thereof between
53562
Filed Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 356,197
Int. a.' B60R 9/10 ^
U.S. a. 224-^14 11 Claims
1. A foldable bicycle carrier for mounting on a body portion
of a vehicle comprising:
(a) front and rear transverse frames of generally U-shaped
configuration each formed of one-piece tubular stock and
each having first and second leg portions and a transverse
intermediate portion integral with one end of the first and
second leg portions and extending therebetween,
(b) front vehicle engaging feet on the free ends of each of the
first and second leg portions on the front transverse frame
- and rear vehicle engaging feet on the free ends of each of
the first and second leg portions on the rear transverse
frame,
(c) first and second bicycle support arms,
(d) first and second side plates,
(e) means including said first and second side plates connect-
ing the front and rear transverse frames at a location
adjacent their intermediate portions for relative move-
ment between a folded position in which the leg portions
on the front frame are disposed adjacent the leg portions
on the rear frame and an open position in which the leg
portions on the front frame diverge relative to leg portions
on the rear frame in a direction away from said intermedi-
ate portions to space the front vehicle engaging feet from
the rear pair of vehicle engaging feet,
(0 arm mounting means mounting one end portion of the
first and second bicycle support arms respectively on the
first and second side plates for angular adjustment relative
thereto and relative to the front and rear transverse frames
through a plurality of positions in which each of the arms
extend outwardly from the rear transverse frame at differ-
ent angles to a plane through the front and rear vehicle
engaging feet, and
(g) strap means for attaching the bicycle carrier to a vehicle
with the front and rear vehicle engaging feet resting on a
body portion of the vehicle.
each pair of adjacent pins, said bunched portions of said docu-
ments projecting in said notches to prevent disengagement of
said perforations from said pins.
4 394 950
APPARATUS FOR FLOATINGLY MOVING A LENGTH
OF MATERIAL
Carl Kramer, Am Chorusberg 8, 5100 Aachen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,219
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 10,
1980, 3026132
Int. QV B65H 17 /i2; F26B U/00
US. a. 226—97 12 Claims
4,394,949
PIN WHEEL FEED MECHANISM
Yoshifumi Gomi, Shiojiri, Japan, assignor to Epson Corporation,
Nagano and Kabushiki Kaisha Suwa Seikosha, Tokyo, both of,
Japan
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,971
Oaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 15, 1980, 55-
51128[U] I
I Int. a.J G03B 1/24
U.S. a. 226—76 10 Claims
10. A feed mechanism for transporting documents having
perforations along the marginal edges thereof, the improve-
ment comprising a pin wheel having a plurality of equiangu-
larly spaced pins which project radially from the surface of
said wheel rotatably supported on said feed mechanism, said
pins successively engaging in said perforations in said docu-
ments as said pin wheel rotates, the engagement of said perfo-
1. A system of nozzles for guiding a length of material in a
floating manner by a blowing medium, comprising nozzle
frame means with slit nozzles extending laterally transversely
to the direction of motion of the length of material having hole
nozzles between the slit nozzles, characterized by a guide-vane
grille arranged along the axis of the nozzle frame means for the
supplied blowing medium and a diffuser joining the guide- vane
grille with an exhaust impedance for delaying the blowing
medium in separation-free manner.
1370
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,951
ACTIVE TAPE STORAGE BIN
Joseph C. Ruda, Noblesville; Richard E. Wartzok, Indianapolis,
and Robert J. Wedekind, Logansport, all of Ind., assignors to
RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 340,772
Int. a.' B65H 17/42: GllB 15/56
U.S. a. 226—118 10 Qaims
30 74 M Tsaj
predetermined amount endwise out of said one hopper
through said area, said driving members being adjustable
in position along the length of said hoppers; and,
means for simultaneously moving predetermined ones of
said driving members from a rest position to a position
causing simultaneous pushing of bottom deck boards from
the ends of predetermined ones of said hoppers, said mov-
ing means thereafter retracting said driving members to
said rest position.
4,394,953
METHOD OF JOINING INDIVIDUAL PARTS OF AN
X-RAY ANODE, IN PARTICULAR OF A ROTATING
ANODE
Alfred Sonnweber, Lemioos; Hubert Bildstein, Reutte, and
Lambert Egger, Hofen, all of Austria, assignors to Schwarz-
kopf Development Corporation, New York, N.Y.
per No. PCr/AT80/00022, § 371 Date Mar. 12, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 10, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00226, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 5, 1981
PCT Filed Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 247,539
Int. a.3 B23K 1/20; HOI J 35/10; B23K 1/19
U.S. a. 228—124 2 Qaims
1. A magnetic tajje handling apparatus comprising:
(A) a substantially vertical compartment defined by a pair of
walls which are so spaced as to require the supply of tape
in said compartment to form a stack of folds as the tap)e is
fed into said compartment at one end thereof; said tape
being paid out from said compartment at its other end;
(B) a conveyor belt located along the bottom of said com-
partment for supporting said tape stack; said conveyor
. belt having an upper run and a lower run;
(C) means arranged in said compartment for shaping at least
a portion of the upper run of said conveyor belt along a
U-shaped path; and
(D) means for driving said conveyor belt from said one end
to said other end to rotate said stack of folds around said
U-shaped path for presenting the payout end of said tape
stack at said other end for removal from said compart-
ment.
4,394,952
ADJUSTABLE DECK BOARD FEEDER FOR
AUTOMATIC PALLET NAILING APPARATUS
Richard A. Crane, Rte. 2, Box 246A, Beaverdam, Va. 23015
Filed Oct. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 1974»63
Int. C1.3 B27F 7/02
U.S. a. 227—7 31 Qaims
3 4 5^6 e
1. A method for joining individual parts of an X-ray anode,
in particular of a rotating anode, comprising providing a metal
part composed of a high-melting metal or an alloy thereof and
at least one graphite part having a graphite surface provided
with grooves which are non-intersecting with the edges of said
graphite surface, and said graphite part being provided with a
plurality of approximately vertical boreholes extending
through said graphite part towards said graphite surface and
oi>ening into said grooves, soldering the metal part to the
graphite surface of said graphite part and removing excessive
solder and gases formed during said soldering through said
grooves and said boreholes.
4,394,954
CONTAINER AND BLANK FOR CONSTRUCTING SAME
Robert E. Lisiecki, Orchard Lake, Mich., assignor to Ex-Cell-O
Corporation, Troy, Mich.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,739
Int. a? G65D 5/74
U.S. a. 229—17 G 7 Qaims
1. A board feeding apparatus for feeding deck boards to a
pallet nailing machine comprising:
a plurality of elongated hoppers arranged in parallel for
receiving respective stacks of deck boards, each of said
hoppers having a board restraining means on one end
thereof defining an area permitting passage of a deck
board endwise out of said one end, said plurality of
hoppers being commonly supported at a rear end by
means establishing a pivot about which said hoppers can
rotate and at a front end by a common releasable support,
said hoppers being pivotable as a unit upon raising of said
releasable support;
a plurality of driving members, each respectively associated
with one of said hoppers for pushing the deck board a
1. A plastic coated paperboard blank for constructing a
container adaptable to being folded into a flat end container,
the blank comprising; four body panels and a side seam flap;
end closure panels respectively connected by horizontal score
July 26, 19
w
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1371
lines to one of the ends of the body panels; end closure panels
including a pair of outer panels consisting of upper and lower
closure panels respectively connected by horizontal score lines
to the other ends of two of the body panels, a front panel and
a back panel respectively connected by horizontal score lines
to said other ends of the other two body panels, each including
a gable panel defined by diagonal score lines extending toward
each other from the horizontal score lines, a pair of fold back
panels connected by the diagonal score lines to opposite sides
of the respective gable panels, and a pair of infold lips sepa-
rated from each other by a centrally located vertical score line
and separated from the respective fold back panels by substan-
tially horizontal score lines, one of which is lower than the
other, and both of which meet the respective diagonal score
lines at the upper ends thereof at spaced points along the verti-
cal score line, resulting in a short vertical side at the top of each
of the gable panels.
4,394,956
ELECTRIC STOCK PROD
James S. Andrews, Westminster, and Leonard L. Hierath, Den-
ver, both of Colo., assignors to The Magrath Company,
McCook, Nebr.
Continuation of Ser. No. 754,341, Dec. 27, 1976, abandoned.
This appUcation Jul. 30, 1979, Ser. No. 62,450
Int Q.^ B68B 11/00; F41B 15/04
U.S. Q. 231—2 E 23 Claims
II 4,394,955
BAG WFTH BENDABLE RETAINER STRIP, AND
METHOD OF MAKING THE SAME
Charles D. Raines, Columbus, Ga., and Earl W. Williams, Phe-
nix City, Ala., assignors to Plicon Corporation, Columbus, Ga.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,337
Int. Q.^ B65D 33/02, 33/06
U.S. Q. 229—65 16 Qaims
1. A head for an electric animal prod or the like comprising
a body of insulating material having a width subsuntially
greater than its thickness and having a shaft attaching means at
its rear end adapted to receive a shaft extending rearwardly
thereof, a pair of spaced electric contact tips secured to and
projecting forwardly from the front end of said body, the front
end of said body having a configuration between said tips
providing a long insulated path between said tips having a
length substantially greater than the spacing between said tips,
said body being adapted to be placed laterally agamst an ani-
mal with said tips in position for simultaneous electrical
contact wfth the animal.
4,394.957
SENSOR CONTROL DEVICE
John P. Newton, III, Box 55, Selkirk, N.Y. 12158
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,724
Int. Q.^ F24F 7/00; H03K 5/159
U.S. Q. 236—49
24 Qaims
1. A bag of the type having opposed first and second bag
walls with their opposite side edges sealed to one another in
respective sealed areas adjacent each of such side edges, and
with their bottom edges sealingly attached to one another to
provide a bag having a top bag mouth opening, and compris-
ing:
a substantial portion of said first bag wall projecting substan-
tially upwardly as a lip above said second bag wall and
thereby above said bag mouth opening;
a bendable retainer strip secured to, carried by, and extend-
ing across said lip;
a clearance indentation in each of such sealed side edges of
said bag each indentation extending into but not beyond
such sealed area and further extending from adjacent to
the lower edge of said lip downwardly to a substantial
distance below said bag mouth opening, thereby to define
an end tab extension at each opposite end of said lip; and
each of said opposite end tab extensions of said lip including
said strip and projecting into overhanging relation to said
indentations and said end Ub extensions each having its
respective tip end in alignment with its adjacent such side
edge, so that said lip is adapted to be folded over into
closing relation to said bag mouth opening and onto the
* outer face of said second wall, and said end tab extensions
being then adapted to be bent over within said clearance
indentations onto the outer face of said first wall for main-
taining said bag closed, but permitting said bag to be
reopened by bending said end tab extensions out of en-
gagement with said first wall and unfolding said lip away
from said bag mouth opening.
1. A control circuit adapted to be coupled with a power
source for providing an output capable of controlling the
operation of a device such as a blower, with said circuits out-
put being a function of a change in a controlled environment
from a predetermined level, comprising:
sensor means capable of sensing a change in the environment
and providing a signal corresponding to said change;
logic means capable of receiving said signal and providing
an output for controlling the operation of the device, said
logic means includes: first generating means capable of
generating periodically a reference pulse of predeter-
mined pulse width; second generating means capable of
generating a pulse having a width that varies as a function
of the signal corresponding to the change from the pre-
detemined level; and means capable of determining the
difference in width of said pulses and based upon said
difference gate or inhibit the output of the control circuit
so that the output is proportional to the change in the
environment with small changes from the predetermined
level inhibited from causing undesired oscillation of the
output about said level.
1372
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,958
AIR FLOW AND CONDITION RESPONSIVE DAMPER
John A. Whitney, Fort Wayne, and Richard Rosenbrock, Bluff-
ton, both of Ind., assignors to Franklin Electric Co., Inc.,
Blofflon, Ind.
FUed Dec. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 333,753
Int. a.' F24F 13/06
U.S. a. 236-49 15 Cltdms
14. A method of controlling the air flow in a forced air
system including a blower, a plurality of air outlets, and ducts
leading from said blower to said outlets, each of said outlets
including a flapper valve that is movable to an open outlet
position and to a closed outlet position, said valves being nor-
mally in said open outlet position and the force of air through
the ducts and to the outlet acting to move the valve to the
closed outlet position, a releasable latch for holding the valve
in the open outlet position, and a control including a tempera-
ture sensor for releasing the latch at a present temperature
level, said method comprising the steps of opening said flapper
valves, engaging said latches, operating said blower to exert a
force on each of said flapper valves, at each of said outlets
sensing the temperature utilizing said sensor, and releasing the
latch utilizing said control when the sensed temperature is
displaced from said preset temperature.
.Ji^;
Ifpalplpripilp! i
Q^ ^
-[_2zl '
i3^
I X^ Il«-T :
.mil i; \t
circulation means including primary heat pump means through
which the operating fluid and absorbing liquid are circulated
for absorbing heat from cold and hot heat sources, means for
transferring heat within said second circulation means to the
heating fluid within said flrst circulation means by one or more
heat exchangers, and control means for controlling changes in
the operation of the multimode heating system between first
and second operating modes in response to exterior tempera-
ture conditions so that when exterior temperatures are above a
predetermined point, the system operates in a first mode
wherein The operating fluid is circulated through said cold
heat source and subsequently mixed with said absorbing liquid
for circulation through said hot heat source and when exterior
temperatures fall below said predetermined point, said control
means changes the system to the second operating mode
wherein the flow of the operating fluid bypasses said cold heat
source and said absorbing liquid and passes directly as a liquid
from said transfer means to said hot heat source to be evapo-
rated there with substantially only the operating fluid being
circulated and used to heat the heating fluid in said first circu-
lation means.
4,394,959
MULTIMODE HEATING SYSTEM AND METHOD FOR
HEATING
Auke O. T. de Vries, Leek, Netherlands, assignor to N.V. Neder-
landse Gasunie, Groningen, Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 955,609, Oct. 30, 1978, abandoned.
This application Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,486
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 28,
1977, 2748415
Int. a.3 G05D 23/00; F25B 27/02
U.S. a. 237—2 B 25 Claims
1. A multimode heating system for heating one or more
rooms comprising first circulation means for circulating a
heating fluid to treat the environment in the rooms, second
circulation means for circulating an operating fluid and an
absorbing liquid through a heat absorption path, said second
4,394,960
HEATING APPARATUS FOR A PASSENGER
COMPARTMENT OF A MOTOR VEHICLE
Sadahani Nakazawa, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nissan Motor
Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,301
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 1, 1980, 55-91416[U]
Int. aj B60H 1/02
U.S. a. 237—12.3 C 10 Qaims
8
I©
L
=£5j==i
te
1. A heating apparatus for a passenger compartment of a
motor vehicle, said vehicle having an engine and a liquid
cooling circuit system for the engine, said cooling system
including a radiator and a pump forming a high pressure por-
tion and a low pressure p>ortion during operation of said pump
within the liquid cooling system,
the heating apparatus comprising:
means defining a vehicle cabin heating circuit including a
liquid flow passage having an upstream end communicat-
ing with the high pressure portion of the liquid cooling
system and a downstream end communicating with the
low pressure portion of the cooling system so as to allow
a portion of the liquid within the cooling system to flow
through said liquid flow passage;
a heat exchanger fluidly disposed within said liquid flow
passage;
control means ressponsive to cooling fluid temperature for
selectively causing cooling fluid to flow through the liq-
uid flow passage and through the heat exchanger means in
a first circulating mode wherein cooling fluid in the liquid
flow passage is substantially isolated from the cooling
circuit to prevent flow through the engine and the engine
cooling system to enable the heater means to rapidly heat
the portion of cooling fluid in the liquid flow passage
without heating fluid in the cooling system for rapid pas-
senger compartment warm-up, and a second circulating
mode wherein cooling fluid from the engine and cooling
circuit flows into said liquid flow passage of the heating
circuit, said control valve means including a normally
•July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1373
closed first valve preventing liquid flow from the cooling
circuit into the heating circuit liquid passage in the first
circulating mode and being operable to gradually open
when liquid temperature in the heating circuit is above a
first predetermined level, thereby initiating the second
circulating mode wherein fluid in the cooling circuit grad-
ually flows into the heating circuit to prevent a sudden
temperature drop in said heating circuit;
means for defining a bypass passage in the heating circuit
having one end communicating with the liquid flow pas-
sage at the downstream end thereof and an opposite end
communicating with said liquid flow passage at the up-
stream end thereof, said bypass passage being positioned
to allow cooling liquid to circulate through the liquid flow
passage and bypassing the engine cooling system;
pump means within said liquid flow passage for effecting
circulation of liquid through said liquid flow passage and
said bypass passage; and
heater means for heating the cooling liquid flowing through
said liquid passage.
\t
4,394,961
TRACK FOR TOY VEHICLES WITH JUMPINGOFF AND
JUMPING-ON RAMPS
Werner Miiller, Blumberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Helmut Darda Spielwaren- und Maschinenbau GmbH, Blum-
berg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 113,501
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 20,
1979, 2902191
Int. CV A63H 18/08; EOlBJi/QO^
outlet passages through said valve cavity, said valve hous-
ing including a valve seat surrounding said flow control
passage;
(b) a ball positioned within said valve cavity and movable
between a closed position in which said ball contacts said
valve seat to form a seal capable of preventing back flow
from said outlet passage to said inlet passage and an open
position in which fluid may flow in either direction be-
tween said inlet and outlet passages;
(c) ball biasing means for continuously biasing said ball
toward said closed position with a closing force sufficient
to maintain said ball in said closed position even when the
back pressure drops below the supply pressure;
and
(d) operator means included within an operator housing for
moving said ball between said open and closed positions in
response to an electrical control signal, said operator
means including
(I) a stem having a longitudinal axis aligned with the
center of said ball and movable between an advanced
position in which one end of said stem contacts said ball
to move said ball to said open position and a retracted
position in which a predetermined gap is formed be-
tween said one end of said stem and said ball when said
U.S. a. 238—10 R
10 Qaims
1. A track arrangement for toy vehicles, comprising a vehi-
cle track including arcuately curved jump-off and jump-on
ramps between which a toy vehicle can carry out a free-flying
jump, at least said jump-off ramp being of flexible material so
as to be deflectable transversely of the track elongation, said
jump-on ramp having a free-vehicle touchdown end which is
wider than the remainder of said jump-on ramp, a handle at a
rear side of said jump-off ramp, and a sighting device above
said handle so that the jump-off ramp may be sighted-in on the
jump-on ramp.
4 394 962
SOLENOID OPERATED FUEL INJECTOR AND
I CONTROL VALVE
Dennis A. Wilber, EHzabethtown, Ind., assignor to Cummins
Engine Company, Inc., Columbus, Ind.
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,257
Int. a.3 F02M 47/02
U.S. a. 239—88 16 CI""*
1. A valve for controlling fluid flow between a low pressure
fluid supply and a fluid utilizing device which produces a back
pressure which varies above and below the supply pressure,
comprising
(a) a valve housing containing a valve cavity, an miet pas-
sage for connection with the low pressure fluid supply, an
outlet passage for connection with the fluid utilizing de-
vice, and a flow control passage arranged to provide the
sole path for fluid communication between said inlet and
to
•r
1
2t
lOhi pressure
fUt^ SOPPUY
)
'n
ball is in said closed position to insure full closure of said
valve,
(2) operator biasing means for biasing said stem toward
said advanced position with an opening force sufficient
to overcome the biasing force imparted to said ball by
said ball biasing means, said operator biasing means
including a coil compression spring positioned coaxially
around said stem,
(3) an electromagnetic means for moving said stem from
said advanced position to said retracted position when
electrically energized and for allowing said stem to be
moved to said advanced position under the force im-
parted thereto by said operator biasing means, said
opening force being sufficiently greater than said clos-
ing force to cause said ball to move from said closed to
said open position in less than one millisecond, and
(4) adjustable connecting means for adjustably connecting
said operator housing to said valve housing in a manner
to permit said operator housing to be moved in position
along the longitudinal axis of said stem relative to said
valve housing to adjust the clearance between said
valve seat and said ball when said stem is moved to its
advanced positions and for adjusting said predeter-
mined gap between said ball and said one end of said
stem when said stem is in said retracted position.
1374
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26. 1983
4^94,963
FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE
Masatoshi IwaU, Oyama, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Komatsu Seisakusho, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 299,129
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 4, 1980, 55-125045[U]
Int. a.^ F02M 61/08
U.S. a. 239— 89 6 Qaims
from the bore bottom, and a second position corresponding to
the position of the end of injection, where the tapered lower
end of the plunger obturates the spray nozzles, said pump-
injector unitary assembly comprising means for metering the
fuel quantity injected through said spray nozzle, said metering
means comprising a transfer passageway provided in the
plunger and communicating at a first end with a fuel discharge
duct when the plunger is in its first position, with said fuel
discharge duct opening through the wall of said axial bore, a
metering ring surrounding said plunger and located in an annu-
1. A fuel injection nozzle for the delivery of fuel, premixed
with air, to the combustion chamber of a cylinder in an internal
combustion engine, comprising:
(a) a hollow nozzle boidy having formed therein at least one
spray hole adapted to open to the combustion chamber of
the engine cylinder;-
(b) a piston slidably mounted in the nozzle body for recipro-
cating movement between a first and a second position
and defining therein a premixing chamber to be placed in
and out of communication with the combustion chamber
of the engine cylinder via the spray hole, the piston having
a bore formed axially therein;
(c) there being in the nozzle body a fuel inlet port and an air
inlet port which are both open to the premixing chamber
when the piston is in the first position and which are
closed by the piston upon movement thereof from the first
- toward the second position;
(d) a valve member slidably fitted in the bore in the piston
and having one end projecting outwardly therefrom for
opening and closing the spray hole in the nozzle body; and
(e) spring means acting between the piston and the valve
member for normally causing the latter to close the spray
hole in the nozzle body;
(0 the valve member being adapted to be acted upon, during
the piston stroke from the first to the second position, by
the compressed fuel-air mixture in the premixing chamber
so as to move against the force of the spring means for
opening the spray hole.
lar chamber of the injector body, with said bore and said
discharge duct opening in said annular chamber, and said
metering ring having an upper edge of which at least a portion
co-operates with the first end of said transfer passageway to
effect fuel metering, and means for regulating the position of
the ring in the injector body, said transfer passageway having
its second end opening at the free or lower end of the plunger
and said portion of the upper edge of the metering ring defin-
ing the beginning of the injection by obturating said first end of
said longitudinal passageway.
4,394,965
PULSATING SHOWER USING A SWIRL CHAMBER
Wolfgang Backe; Wolf-Dieter Goedecke, and Reinhard
Schwenzer, all of Aachen, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Friedrich Grobe Armaturenfabrik GmbH & Co., Hemer, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,563
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 17,
1980, 3018917
Int. Q.^ B05B 3/14
U.S. Q. 239—102 5 Qaims
4,394,964
FUEL PUMP-INJECTOR UNITARY ASSEMBLY FOR
INTERNAL COMBUSTION ENGINE
Andre Ecomard, Marly le Roi, and Pbilippe Pincbon, Rueil-
Malmaison, both of France, assignors to Institut Francais Du
Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Filed Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,543
Qaims priority, application France, Jun. 27, 1980, 80 14369
Int. Q.' P02M 45/00
VS. Q. 239—90 10 Qaims
1. A fuel pump-injector unitary assembly for an internal
combustion engine, comprising an injector body having an
axial bore with the bottom traversed by at least one fuel spray
nozzle, at least one fuel inlet duct opening in said axial bore
near the bottom thereof, a plunger or needle slidable in said
bore between a first position wherein said plunger is spaced
1. A shower fixture connected to a fluid supply, said shower
fixture comprising:
a swirl chamber,
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1375
said swirl chamber being of approximately cylindrical shape
and having a central longitudinal axis,
said chamber having an upstream end face, said upstream
end face having an inlet opening, said inlet opening being
positioned on said central longitudinal axis and in fiuid
communication with said fluid supply to provide a supply
jet, said swirl chamber having a downstream end face
having a plurality of outlet apertures arranged along a
pitch circle, said pitch circle being concentric with said
central longitudinal axis,
and means for generating a control flow, said control flow
means comprising one or more tangentially located inlet
apertures in the wall of said swirl chamber, said inlet
apertures being located near said upstream end face.
pump means, said anti-vortex means including mounting
means mounted on the bottom wall of said fluid storage
tank and fastened to said fluid outlet pipe and anti-vortex
cap means overlaying the opening of said fluid outlet pipe
at a fixed distance therefrom for forcing the fluid in said
fluid storage tank to make a substantially 90 degree turn in
order to enter said fluid outlet pipe.
4,394,966
SPRAYING APPARATUS HAVING A FLUID STORAGE
TANK WITH AGITATOR AND ANTI-VORTEX TANK
HTTINGS
Larry L. Snyder, and Martin T. Smith, Jr., both of Lincoln,
Nebr., assignors to Snyder Industries, Inc., Lincoln, Nebr.
Filed May 9, 1978, Ser. No. 904,274
Int. Q.^ B05B 9/00
U.S. Q. 239—127 25 Qaims
4,394,967
GUN FOR APPLYING PAINTS BY HOT PROCESS
Jean Amiaut, 1 Rue des Quzeaux, F-93240 Stains, France
per No. PCr/FR80/00184, § 371 Date Aug. 12, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 12, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01670, PCT Pub.
Date Jun. 25, 1981
PCT Filed Dec. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 293,641
Qaims priority, application France, Dec. 18, 1979, 79 30910;
Oct. 31, 1980, 80 23293
Int. Q.' B05B 1/24
U.S. Q. 239—133 7 Qaims
1. A spraying apparatus comprising:
a fluid storage tank;
pump means connected to said fluid storage tank by a fluid
outlet pipe for pumping fluid from said fluid storage tank;
spray means connected to said pump by a spray pipe for
spraying fluid pumped from said fluid storage tank;
a bypass return pipe connected between said spray pipe and
said fluid storage tank for returning a portion of the fluid
in said spray pipe to said fluid storage tank;
agiutor means connected to said bypass return pipe in said
fluid storage tank for mixing the fluid in said fluid storage
tank by transferring the momentum of the fluid in said
bypass return pipe to the fluid in said fluid storage Unk,
said agitator means comprising agitator cap means over-
laying the opening in said bypass return pipe at a fixed
distance therefrom for directing the fluid discharged by
said bypass return pipe into said fluid storage tank in a
spiral routing fashion, said agitator cap means being
formed by a conical plate having its concave side posi-
tioned adjacent the opening in said bypass return pipe to
provide a focus for the fluid discharged thereby, said
conical plate having spiral shaped fins on its concave side
for imparting a spiral rotating motion to the fluid dis-
charged by said bypass return pipe, and nozzle means
coupled to said bypass return pipe for defining a fixed gap
between said conical plate and said nozzle means to con-
trol the flow momentum in said fluid storage tank; and
anti-vortex means connected to said fluid outlet pipe and
mounted on the bottom wall of said fluid storage tank for
preventing the formation of a gyrating vortex as the fluid
in said fluid storage tank discharges through said fluid
outlet pipe to thereby prevent pump cavitation in said
1. A gun for the hot application of paints, comprising a
substantially horizontally extending body having a down-
wardly extending grip, an assembly comprising a cylindrical
heating block having a vertical axis and including electric
resistances mounted on the body, a first envelope defining with
the block a sinuous path for the heating of air, and a second
envelope defining a path for paint, means for automatically
controlling the temperature of the spraying air, said second
envelope being in the shape of a bell pivotally mounted on top
of and around the first envelope and defining with means
provided on an outer surface of the first envelope communicat-
ing first and second annular paths for the paint superimposed
around said first envelope and communicating with a chamber
defined between end walls of the first envelope and second
envelope, said chamber having an outlet conduit which ex-
tends through said heating block, a vertical hot air outlet
passageway which coaxially surrounds said outlet conduit, said
conduit and said passageway separately opening outside said
block into said body, said body being of insulating material and
carrying a rotary spraying head having lateral branches, each
of said branches comprising two air jets at least one of which
two jets is adjustable, said block, first envelope and second
envelope being in coaxial relation to one another on said verti-
cal axis in said assembly, means for securing said assembly to a
top part of said body, said second envelope comprising a lat-
eral boss having a passage which communicates with said first
path and second path for the paint, said boss being connectible
selectively to a source of paint supplied by gravity located
above the body and to a source of paint supplied by aspiration
located below said body, and means for allowing said second
envelope to be adjusted in position about said vertical axis
relative to said first envelope and for securing said second
envelope in the adjusted position relative to said first envelope,
whereby said source of paint can be placed in a convenient
position relative to said body, said vertical axis being so located
relative to the grip that said passage in said boss can be placed
in close proximity to a second vertical axis in vertical align-
ment with said grip.
1376
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^94,968
POSITIONING APPARATUS FOR BOOM STRUCTURES
Loren E. Tyler, Box 170, Benson, Minn. 56215
FUed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,066
Int a.' AOIC 23/04
U.S. a. 239—167 4 Claims
1. A. positioning apparatus comprising:
a boom structure;
means for pivotably mounting said boom structure on a
vehicle, said mounting means including a pin member
about which said boom structure pendulously swings;
means for moving said boom structure upwardly and down-
wardly between an upper transit position and lower oper-
ating positions, said moving means including an hydraulic
cylinder for moving upwardly and downwardly said pin
member and said boom structure swinging from said pin
member; and
means for angularly self-centering said boom structure when
said moving means moves said boom structure from a
lowfer operating position to the upper transit position, said
angularly self-centering means including a pair of chains,
one said chain attached between said boom structure and
said vehicle on each side of a vertical plane passing
through said pin member.
4,394,%9
SHOWERHEAD CONTROL
Emile Jette, 1328 NE. 110 Ter., Miami, Fla. 33161
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 219,851, Dec. 31, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 868,200,
Jan. 9, 1978, Pat. No. 4,273,289, which is a continuation-in-part
of Ser. No. 863,694, Dec. 29, 1977, abandoned, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 790,277, Apr. 25, 1977,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 743,766,
Not. 22, 1976, abandoned. This application Feb. 10, 1981, Ser.
No. 233,209
Int. a.3 B05B 1/18. 1/32. 7/00
U.S. a. 239—414 9 Claims
1. A showerhead device assembly including means for con-
trolling temperature and the flow of water therethrough pivot-
ally connected by a ball and socket means to a shower arm
having separate hot and cold water passages extending there-
through comprising:
A. A main housing having passage means between an inlet
and a discharge pKirtion including separate hot and cold
water chambers divided by a first partition, a water tem-
perature and flow control means in the form of a second
partition positioned at the downstream end of said cham-
bers for varying the temperature and volume of water
leading to the discharge portion and screwthreads at its
downstream end;
B. The discharge portion including connection means for
engaging a valve and spray producing means;
C. The valve and spray producing means comprising:
(a) an annular frustoconical skirt shaped body having an
inner surface and an upstream end adapted to contact
said second partition to shut off the flow of water,
(b) a disc having a frustoconical peripheral surface with a
plurality of grooves, said grooves cooperating with the
inner surface of said skirt shaped body to define outlet
passages, and a stem extending in an upstream direction
for connecting the disc to the first partition,
(c) the connection means comprising screwthreads for
cooperation with the screwthreads of said main housing
whereby by screwthreading said valve and spray pro-
ducing means to said main housing the texture of the
spray exiting said outlet passages can be varied and the
flow of water past said second partition can be shut off
by contacting said second partition with the upstream
end of said skirt shaped body; and
D. An elongate control means having an upper end carried
by said main housing and connected to said second parti-
tion and to said valve and spray producing means for;
(a) varying the volume and temperature of the water
leading to the discharge portion;
(b) moving the valve and spray producing means with
respect to said main housing to vary the spray texture of
the spray exiting said outlet passages; and
(c) varying the direction of the spray by moving the
socket with respect to the ball of said ball and socket
means.
4,394,970
FUEL INJECnON NOZZLE FOR COMBUSTION
ENGINES
Karl Hofmann, Remseck; Kurt Seifert, Esslingen, and Josef
Jungbauer, Erding, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors t^
Robert Bosch GmbH, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,338
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 7,
1980,3004454
Int. a.3 B05B 1/32
U.S. a. 239— 453 7 Qaims
1. A fuel injection nozzle having an inlet end from which
direction fuel flows and an injection end from which fuel is
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1377
injected for combustion engines comprising a nozzle housing
having a flat injection end surface, a bore in said nozzle hous-
ing, said bore including a small diameter section and an en-
larged cylindrical end portion of uniform diameter which
directly adjoins said small diameter section to form a valve seat
through which a fuel jet is discharged, said enlarged cylindri-
cal end portion extending from said valve seat to said flat
injection end surface of said housing, a valve needle in said
bore, said valve needle including a valve needle head portion,
said valve needle head portion including a conical section with
a cross sectional portion of greater diameter than said valve
seat which conical section is arranged to close against said
valve seat to close said bore and arranged to open in the direc-
tion of fuel flow, said valve needle head portion including a
cylindrical portion of uniform diameter which adjoins said
conical portion and extends downstream of said conical por-
tion, said cylindrical head portion extends into said enlarged
cylindrical end portion of said bore with a slight radial play
when said valve needle is seated in a closed position against
said valve seat, said valve needle head portion further includes
a cone portion extending axially from said cylindrical portion
with the vertex end of the cone in the direction of fuel injection
to thereby shape the fuel jet emitted by said nozzle.
4,394,972
FUEL INJECTION NOZZLES
James C. Potter, London, England, assignor to Lucas Industries
PLC, Birmingham, England
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,803
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 14, 1981,
8111783
Int. Q.3 F02M 61/00: B05B 1/32
U.S. Q. 239—453 10 Qaims
4,394,971
FUEL INJECTION NOZZLE ASSEMBLY
David J. Gaskell, Sudbury, England, assignor to Lucas Indus-
tries Limited, Birmingham, England
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,547
I Int. a.3 F02M 61/08
U.S. Q. 239—453 1 Claim
1. A fuel injection nozzle assembly for use in a fuel injection
nozzle for an internal combustion engine, the nozzle assembly
comprising a body portion defining a bore having a seating at
one end thereof, a valve member having a stem portion extend-
ing through the bore, a head located at one end of the stem for
cooperation with said seating, a spring abutment located about
said stem, a coiled compression spring positioned between said
abutment and said body portion, an enlarged portion on the
stem, a collar having a first arcuate aperture extending there-
through and through which can pass the enlarged portion of
the stem, second and third arcuate apertures intersecting said
first aperture, each of said second and third apertures being
sized to accommodate a reduced portion of the stem, said
apertures defining a gap through which can pass the reduced
portion of the stem, said apertures all having different diame-
ters and a part annular shoulder defined by and recessed in said
second and third apertures, said shoulder defining a convex
surface and being engaged by a surface of convex form defined
on said enlaged portion of the stem, said shoulder being di-
vided into two portions, said portions being non-diametrically
located on opposite sides of said first aperture, said collar being
engaged by said spring abutment whereby the force exerted by
the spring acts to maintain said surface in engagement with said
shoulder.
1. A fuel injection nozzle for supplying fuel to an internal
combustion engine comprising a body defining a chamber, a
fuel inlet to said chamber, an outwardly opening valve member
extending within said chamber, a head carried by the valve
member for co-operation with a seating, resilient means lo-
cated in the chamber and acting to urge the valve head into
contact with the seating the arrangement being such that when
fuel under pressure is supplied to said chamber, the pressure
acting upon said valve member lifts the head from the seating
to allow flow of fuel from said chamber in the form of a spray,
a tubular member slidable in the body and located about said
valve member, said tubular member being axially movable
relative to the valve member, means for limiting the extent of
movement of the tubular member as the valve member is
moved against the action of the resilient means, said tubular
member defining the seating whereby when movement of the
tubular member is halted the head is lifted from the seating to
allow substantially unrestricted flow of fuel, said tubular mem-
ber defining orifices which are uncovered to the exterior of the
body during the initial movement of the valve member and
tubular member against the action of the resilient means.
4,394,973
INJECTION VALVE
Rudolf Sauer, Benningen; Wolfgang Kienzle; Werner Paschke,
both of Schwieberdingen, and Waldemar Hans, Bamberg, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Robert Bosch GmbH,
Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249,297
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 3,
1980 3013007
Int. Q.5 F02M 61/16. 61/18. 51/08
U.S. Q. 239—467 * Claims
1. An injection valve for fuel injection systems of internal
combustion engines including a movable valve element associ-
ated with a fixed valve seat in a valve seat body,
said valve seat body having an annular wall recess down-
stream of said valve seat,
a nozzle means downstream of said valve seat having hori-
zontal fuel guidance bores therein.
1378
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
said nozzle means having an end portion having a plurality
of flat sides,
said end portion protruding into said recess,
and intermediate chambers formed between the sides of the
end protrusion and the wall of said recess,
said horizontal fuel guidance bores extending from said
intermediate chambers to a spin chamber in said nozzle
means.
chamber to be filled with fuel, said valve chamber being
defined between the main magnetic pole tip section and
said valve seat member, the fuel within said fuel chamber
being supplied through the fuel passage of said main mag-
netic pole and dischargeable out of said fuel chamber
through the fuel injection opening of said valve seat mem-
ber; and
a side magnetic pole securely connected to said casing and
located spaced around said spherical valve member, the
axis of said side magnetic pole being aligned with the axis
of said main magnetic pole; and
an adapter member in contact with and interposed between
the main magnetic pole tip section and said casing to
secure the locational relationship therebetween, said
adapter member being generally annular and having inner
and outer peripheral surfaces which securely contact the
main magnetic pole and said casing, respectively; said
adapter member including a cylindrical section containing
said inner peripheral surface thereof, and a radially and
outwardly extending flange section containing the outer
peripheral surface thereof, said cylindrical section being
fitted in a peripheral cutout section of said main magnetic
pole, said flange section being fitted in a lower inner recess
of said casing so that the bottom surface thereof contacts
said side magnetic pole.
said spin chamber having a frusto-conical interior wall,
said fuel guidance bores extending tangentially of said spin
chamber interior wall whereby fuel is tangentislly dis-
charged into said spin chamber,
the interior wall of said spin chamber diverging outwardly in
the direction of flow whereby a fuel stream emerges from
the spin chamber in a conical configuration.
A 304 074 4^94,975
FIJFI INJECTOR VALVE "^^^ °^^^ BLOWER
Japan, assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan ^ n^i,i»„ w v- ^wuii
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No.742.421 »725, Beckley^W.V.. 25801 ^^ ^^
Claims pnonty, application Japan, Mar. 24, 1980, 55- '^ ^ AOIC 3/06
38319[UJ iTc n MO <IS4 4 Claims
Int. a.5 B05B 7/JO U.S. U. 23V— ©54
U.S. a. 239—585 6 Oaims
1. A fuel injector valve, comprising:
a casing;
a main magnetic pole securely disposed within said casing
and provided with an electromagnetic coil wound
thereon, said main magnetic pole being elongate and cy-
lindrical and formed with an axial fuel passage through
which fuel is supplied and a tip section;
a valve seat member securely connected to said casing so as
to be located opposite to the tip section, said valve seat
member being formed with a fuel injection opening
through which fuel is dischargeable out of said fuel injec-
tor valve, the axis of said fuel injection opening being
aligned with the axis of the fuel passage of said main
magnetic pole;
a spherical valve member movably disposed within a valve
1. A rock dust applying device comprising a framework
having mounted thereon a roller adapted to engage with the
undersurface of a travelling endless conveyor and to be rotated
thereby, a gear train rotated by said roller, a blower mounted
on said framework and being driven by said gear train, said
blower directing a stream of air through a conduit which
directs some of the air through a hopper to thereby agitate a
rock dust contained therein which is to be sprayed on to the
surface of a mine tunnel or shaft, said blower also directing a
stream of air through a conduit extending below said hopper to
aspirate some of the dust from within said hopper and to direct
the rock dust laden air to a nozzle for spraying the surface of
a mine shaft or tunnel with said rock dust laden air.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1379
4,394,976
HYDRAULICALLY OPERATED PUSH-OFF MANURE
SPREADER
Rory Rae, Port Colborne, Canada, assignor to Deere & Com-
pany, Molinc, III.
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,746
Int. C\? AOIC 15/12. 15/16
U.S. a. 239—679 6 Qaims
6. In a manure spreader having a box open at its rear end for
discharge of animal waste contained therein, said box having a
floor structure composed of a rear lower horizontal portion at
the rear part of the box, and a front upper horizontal portion
supported at its opposite fore-and-aft extending edges to move
lengthwise of the box from a front extension of the rear portion
to a rear overiying relation to the rear portion, said rear floor
portion having an upper plastic surface so that animal waste
may s' de easily thereover as the forward portion moves rear-
wardly; transversely spaced parallel and fore-and-aft extending
rails mounted on the upper surface of the rear four portion
transversely inwardly respectively of said fore-and-aft extend-
ing edges of said front floor portion and engaging the under-
side of the front floor portion for retaining the underside of the
front portion out of engagement with the upper plastic surface
of the rear floor portion as it moves between its front extension
and overlying positions with respect to the rear floor portion,
a transverse vertically extending push-off supported to shift
lengthwise of the front portion; and power means for shifting
the front portion relative to the rear portion and the push-off
relative to the front portion.
into a steam separator (11) wherein the heat energy con-
tained in the groundwood pulp is released in the form of
steam (H),
the groundwood pulp is brought from the steam separator
into a thickener (18) from which removed water is
brought back into the grinding space as shower water (G),
water (E) is added to the shower water, and
steam (H) released in the steam separator is recovered for
further use,
characterized in that,
the steam separator (11) is pressurized in order to recover
under pressure the steam (H) released from the ground-
wood pulp (A),
the additional water (E) for the shower water (G) is after the
steam separator mixed with the pulp suspension (B) re-
lieved of steam,
the pressure of the steam (H) released in the steam separator
is adjusted so that the temperature of the pulp suspension
(B) after the water addition (E) corresponds substantially
to the desired temperature of the shower water (G).
4,394,978
METHOD FOR TREATMENT OF WASTE METAL AND
LIQUID DROSS
Anton Weiss, Vienna, Austria, assignor to Waagner-Biro A.G.,
Austria
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,309
Oaims priority, application Australia, Feb. 18, 1980, 870/80
Int. a.3 B02C 77/04
U.S. a. 241—23 7 Oaims
4 394 977
METHOD FOR IMPROVING THE UTILIZATION OF
HEAT ENERGY PRODUCED IN A WOOD GRINDING
TJ PROCESS
Ari A. M. M^ala, Tempere, Finland, assignor to Oy Tampella
AB, Tampere, Finland
Filed Nov. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 318,095
Oaims priority, application Finland, Nov. 18, 1980, 803598
Int. O.^ B02C 19/12
U.S. O. 241—21 5 Oaims
1. A method for improving the utilization of the heat energy
produced in a wood grinding process according to which
method
wood is ground by means of a routing grinding member (2)
in a grinding space (3) under a pressure exceeding atmo-
spheric pressure,
warm shower water (G) is sprayed into the grinding space,
groundwood pulp (A) is conveyed from the grinding space
:il
1?J •^..jf... I- — w
1. In a method for treating liquid dross obtained from metal
smelting and remelting operations, such as in connection with
aluminum-extraction, including the steps of pouring the dross
from the melting furnace into a skimming trough, charging the
dross from the skimming trough into a rotating, substantially
horizonul cooling pipe, passing the dross through the cooling
pipe from one end to the other so that the inner surface thereof
is at least partially wetted thereby, and so that the dross is
cooled to a temperature below the melting point thereof and
wherein it is granulated, the improvement comprising:
conducting the steps of charging the dross from the skim-
ming trough into the cooling pipe and passing the dross
through the cooling pipe substantially in the absence of air
or oxygen;
subjecting the granulated dross to an autogenous grinding
process; and
separating the ground dross into a granulated metal fraction
and a fine-grained fraction, the latter fraction containing
substantially powdered metal oxide.
1380
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,979
WEAR AND ABRASION RESISTANT WALL
STRUCTURE, PARTICULARLY FOR MILLS FOR
GRINDING A CHARGE COMPRISING MAGNETIC
MATERIAL
Bertil Brandt, Skelleftea, Sweden, assignor to Socared S.A.,
Switzerland
Filed Jun. 25, 1980, Ser, No. 162,855
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Jul. 13, 1979, 7906098
Int. a.3 B02C 77/00
U.S. a. 241—26 28 Qaims
for the feed of liquid material positioned on the inner wall of
the feed branch and means for feeding the solid material lo-
cated in the center of the ring passage, characterized in that the
free cross-section of said aperture means is adjustable.
4,394,981
APPARATUS FOR DISPERSING nNELY DIVIDED
SOLID PARTICLES IN A LIQUID VEHICLE WITH A
MECHANISM FOR REDUONG SCREEN CLOGGING
George R. Schold, 8460 Macoma Dr. NE., St. Petersburg, Fla.
33702
Filed Jul. 25, 1980, Ser. No. 172,134
Int. a.J B02C 2i/i6
U.S. a. 241—46.17 18 Oaims
1. A method of operating a mill for processing particulate
material in which said mill includes a mill barrel wall defming
therein a treatment chamber, means for establishing at points
on the barrel wall a magnetic field substantially normal to said
barrel wall as said field emanates from said barrel wall into the
treatment chamber, and means for rotating said mill barrel, said
method comprising the steps of introducing into said chamber
particulate magnetic material of sufficient quantity to be at-
tracted to said barrel wall at said points to form on said barrel
wall an automatically regenerating abrasion protective layer,
rotating said mill barrel, and maintaining said magnetic field at
sufficient strength to retain said magnetic material against said
barrel wall as the abrasion protective layer at said points dur-
ing complete rotations of said mill barrel.
4394,980
DEVICE FOR THE SIMULTANEOUS AND
CONTINUOUS FEEDING OF PULVERULENT SOLIDS
AND OF LIQUIDS INTO TREATMENT MACHINES
Dieter Miirz, Mannheim; Philipp Schmitt, Lampertheim, and
Peter Weidenhammer, Mannheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Draiswerke GmbH, Mannheim, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed May 6, 1981, Ser. No. 261,245
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1980, 3018729
Int. a.5 B02C 2i/i6
U.S. a. 241—46.02 10 Qaims
1. Device for the simultaneous and continuous feeding of
pulverulent solids and of liquids into a treatment machine,
having a feed orifice for solid and liquid materials the orifice
being formed on the casing of the treatment machine and
having a walled feed branch extending upwardly therefrom, a
ring passage located above said orifice having aperture means
X ^3e
1. Apparatus for deagglomerating and dispersing solid parti-
cles held in agglomerated form and carried in suspension in a
liquid vehicle by the action of a dispersing media on the solids
comprising:
a mixing vessel having a fluid inlet at one end thereof and a
fluid outlet at the other end thereof, said vessel being
adapted to have a charge of dispersing media introduced
thereinto, and said inlet being adapted to be operatively
connected to a pump means whereby a fluid mixture may
be moved by said pump means under pressure through
said inlet and through the dispersing media in said vessel
to said fluid outlet;
a rotatable shaft extending into said vessel and adapted to be
driven from a power source;
a rotor separator mounted on said shaft for rotation there-
with for separating dispersing media from the fluid mix-
ture, said rotor separator being disposed on said shaft near
said fluid outlet and in the path of flow between said vessel
inlet and said outlet, said rotor separator including a filter
screen surrounding and spaced from said shaft;
agitator means disposed in close association with said separa-
tor to prevent dispersing media from clogging said filter
screen, said agitator means including
a pair of axially spaced radially extending slinger agitator
members disposed at each end of said screen and sur-
rounding and attached to said shaft to rotate therewith
and extending radially outwardly substantially beyond
the radial position of said screen, and
a plurality of circumferentially spaced elongated agitator
bars extending between and connecting said slinger
agitator bars, said elongated members being disposed
radially outwardly from and spaced from said screen.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1381
4394,982
LINER PLATE FOR GRINDING MILLS
Clive J. WUsoif Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Midland-Ross
Corporation, Cleveland, Ohio
Filed Mar. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 249^04
Int. a.5B02C 77/22
U.S. a. 241—183 15 CUums
height above the same, so as to accommodate the lower por-
tion of the tire swung laterally into the same over the top of the
rotor, said rotor comprising a series of disc-like cutters succes-
sively spaced from each other and each with a circumferen-
tially projecting cutting element extending from side to side
thereof and formed by radially inner and outer faces mutually
converging at an acute angle forwardly in the direction of
cutter rotation to a cutting edge sharpened so as to pierce
through the tire as it bottoms into engagement with the cutter
and thereby initiate cutting a flap-like segment out of the tire
and, conjointly therewith, initate lateral advancement of the
bottom portion of the tire toward said recess, and shredder
tooth means comprising a generally horizontal series of succes-
sively spaced teeth mounted to project generally horizontally
from the hopper's second side substantially at rotor axis level
into interdigital relationship with the successive cutters and
with side edges in closely spaced relationship with such cutters
for shearing of the tire rubber at such side edges by cutting
element rotation past the same.
1. A liner plate for grinding mills comprising: a generally
transparent shaped plate having front and rear surfaces, oppo-
site sides, and short and long ends, an integral lifter bar section
upstanding from said front face adjacent said long end thereof
and spaced inwardly from said sides, said integral lifter bar
section extending over substantially less than one-half the
length of said plate between said ends thereof, at least one bolt
receiving hole extending through said integral lifter bar section
substantially perpendicular to said plate, and cooperating
means on said plate between said integral lifter bar section and
said short end for securing a replaceable lifter bar section
thereto.
4,394,983
TIRE AND REFUSE SHREDDER
Carl M. Ulsky, Lake Stevens, Wash., assignor to KACA Corpo-
ration, Lake Stevens, Wash.
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,219
Int. a.3 B02C lH/18
U.S. a. 241—243 1* Claims
4394,984
ICE BLOCK LOADING MECHANISM FOR AN ICE
SHAVING MACHINE
Rayburn M. Hight, and Paul M. Corrick, both of Houston, Tex.,
assignors to Polar Bear, Inc., Houston, Tex.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,545
Int. a.' B02C li/2S6. 18/22
U.S. a. 241—278 R 17 Qaims
?7
26
1. A shredder operable to shred vehicle tire carcasses com-
prising a feed hopper including a descending chute cross-sec-
tionally configured and dimensioned so as generally to both
orient and guide the tires in a path of descent, a driven elon-
gated shredder rotor of generally cylindrical configuration
mounted extending horizontally across said path of descent
with a first side of the rotor substantially adjacent one side of
said path, said hopper having a widening recess extending
laterally outward from the opposite, second side of the chute
path at the level of the rotor axis and for a predetermined
1. A feed mechanism for an ice shaving apparatus which
comprises:
(a) ram means for engaging a block of ice to be fed into an ice
shaving apparatus;
(b) an elongate guide rod connected to said ram means;
(c) means for mounting said guide rod to move axially along
a locus which moves said ram means toward and away
from the ice shaving apparatus;
(d) means for incrementally advancing said guide rod to
thereby advance said ram means;
(e) means for initially positioning said guide rod and said ram
means to receive a block of ice between said ram means
and the ice shaving apparatus; and
means for releasably and controllably engaging said guide
rod which includes;
(1) a loose coil spring about said guide rod;
(2) means for pulling said spring to a tight gripping condi-
tion;
(3) means relaxing said coil spring to a loose condition;
and
(4) means for anchoring one portion of said coil spring.
1382
OmCIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,394,985
WINDING APPARATUS FOR THREADS OR YARNS
Felix Graf, Winterthur, and Arinin Wirz, Ossingen, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Rieter Machine Works Limited,
Winterthur, Switzerland
per No. PCr/EP80/00037, § 371 Date Mar. 10, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 2, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/00248, PCT Pub.
Date Feb. 5, 1981
per Filed Jun. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 243,922
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 10, 1979,
6408/79
Int. a.J B65H 54/42
U.S. a. 242—18 DD 12 Oaims
1. A winding apparatus for threads or the like, comprising:
a bobbin support roll upon which there is formed at least one
bobbin package;
a friction drive roll cooperating with said bobbin support
roll;
each of said rolls having an axis of rotation;
said rolls being arranged substantially mutually parallel to
one another and with their axes of rotation located in
superimposed fashion in a substantially vertical plane;
one of said rolls being subjected to displacement movements
caused by an increase in the size of the bobbin packages
formed upon the bobbin support roll;
means for mounting and guiding said one roll to enable said
one roll to carry out said displacement movements in a
direction substantially parallel to said vertical plane;
means providing a pivot axis for enabling pivotal movement
of one of the rolls in a direction substantially parallel to
said vertical plane about said pivot axis;
said mounting means including bearing means located at one
end of said roll subjected to said displacement movements
for supporting said roll; and
coupling means responsive to the displacement movements
of said one roll for causing pivotal movements of said one
pivotable roll about said pivot axis in the sense of bringing
about an automatic parallelization of said rolls with re-
spect to one another.
4,394,986
YARN WINDING APPARATUS
Katsumi Hasegawa, Kusatsu; Takahiro Kawabata, and Shintaro
Kuge, both of Otsu, all of Japan, assignors to Toray Indus-
tries, Inc., Japan
FUed May 13, 1981, Ser. No. 263^50
Int. a.i B65H 54/08, 59/38
VS. a. 242—18 R 7 Claims
1. A yam winding apparatus comprising:
(a) a winding device for winding a yam to form a yam
package on a bobbin, which includes a pair of winding
spindles for mounting a bobbin and capable of being alter-
nately positioned in a winding position of the winding
device, a traverse element for imparting a traverse motion
to the yam, and a driving shaft for driving the traverse
element;
(b) a pair of first motors, each driving a corresponding wind-
ing spindle which is in the winding position;
(c) a second motor for driving the traverse element driving
shaft;
(d) a pair of spindle speed detecting means, each detecting
the speed of rotation of a corresponding winding spindle
which is in the winding position, and for generating a first
electrical signal corresponding to the detected rotational
speed thereof;
(e) means for detecting the speed of rotation of the traverse
element driving shaft and for generating a second electri-
cal signal corresponding to the detected rotational speed
thereof; and
(0 a pair of means for controlling rotational speed of said
motors.
a first speed controlling means including means for control-
ling one of the pair of first motors which is positioned in
the winding position so as to keep a yam winding speed
substantially constant from the beginning to the comple-
tion of the winding operation of the yam package; and
a second speed controlling means including means for con-
trolling the second motor so as to substantially keep the
ratio of the rotational speed of the winding spindle to the
rotational speed of the traverse element driving shaft at a
predetermined value or values from the beginning to the
completion of the winding operation of the yam package
in response to the first electrical signal and the second
electrical signal.
4,394,987
MECHANISM FOR CAUSING THE ROTATION OF THE
SPOOL IN A MACHINE FOR TYING A KNOT
Luigi Pedroia, Via Cadogno 1, 6648 Minusio, Switzerland
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,780
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Apr. 14, 1980,
2832/80
Int. a.3 B65H 75/30; A22C I1/J2
U.S. a. 242— 46 J 3 Claims
13 U 12
1. In mechanism for rotating a spool adapted to receive a
supply of filament about the axis of the spool, a motor, a clutch
member driven by the motor and selectively engageable with
the spool to rotate the spool, and means to reciprocate the
motor bodily along the axis of the spool to engage and disen-
gage the clutch member thereby to drive and release the spool,
respectively; the improvement comprising means mounting the
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1383
motor for limited bodily rotation about said axis upon an in-
crease in tension in the filament on the spool, and means limit-
ing said bodily rotation of the motor in both directions.
4,394,988
ARRANGEME?^ FOR CONSTANT FEEDING OF YARN
Jan Hruby, Svomosti, and Karel Pleskac, Jiraskova, both of
Czechoslovakia, assignors to Zbrojovka Vsetin, narodni pod-
nik, Vsetin, Czechoslovakia
Filed Dec. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 212,429
Oaims priority, application Czechoslovakia, Dec. 3, 1979,
8322/79; Jun. 6, 1980, 4006/80
Int. a.3 B65H 57/22
U.S. a. 242—47.12 4 Claims
1. Arrangement for the constant feeding of yarn to textile
machines, comprising a rotatable cage drum supported on a
driven rotatable member coaxially thereof, the circumference
of the drum being formed by a number of spaced stable bolts
parallel with the rotation axis of the drum, the drum being
adapted for the deposition of a number of yarn windings, and
elements on the drum shiftable in a direction axially of the
drum, the shiftable elements being situated between said stable
bolts, the axially shiftable elements being rollers, the middle
part of the rollers being recessed to a smaller diameter so as to
form faces of the rollers for guiding yarn along the circumfer-
ence of the cage drum, and comprising a stable face cam firmly
connected to a bolt on a holder adapted to be fixed to the frame
of a textile machine, said rollers bearing with their extreme
faces on said stable face cam.
4,394,989
ADJUSTABLE ENDLESS LOOP TAPE CARTRIDGE
WITH SHIPPING LOCK
Alfred H. Moris, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Minnesota Mining
and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Apr. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 259,184
Int. a.' GllB 23/ W
U.S. a. 242—55.19 A 4 Oaims
^'n^M'
1. In a cartridge comprising:
a housing adapted to be received in a machine and having
access openings adapted to receive heads and a tape drive
mechanism in said machine;
a cylindrical hub attached to said housing at a position
spaced from said access openings, said hub having a cen-
tral opening and a slot extending axially across the full
width of the hub and communicating with said central
opening;
an endless length of tape having a major portion wrapped
about said hub to form a coil and a minor portion extend-
ing from the innermost wrap of the coil through said slot
into said central opening, and around the side surface of
the coil to the outermost wrap of the coil; and
means on said housing for defining a tape path for and pro-
ducing tension in said minor portion, comprising means
for guiding said minor portion past said access openings in
a predetermined position for engagement by the heads and
drive mechanism of the playback machine, a guide pin
guiding said minor portion between said access openings
and the outermost wrap of said coil, means mountmg said
guide pin for movement between a first position providing
a first path length between said access openings and said
coil and a second position providing a second path length
longer than said first path length between said access
openings and said coil, and means for biasing said guide
pin toward said second position with a low force to pro-
vide a low tension in the outermost wrap of the coil, the
improvement wherein:
said hub comprises a flexible cantilevered portion having a
first end partially defining said slot, having a second end
spaced from said first end that is fixed on said housing, and
being separated from said housing between said first and
second ends, and said cartridge comprises an adjustment
member movably mounted on said housing and having a
surface contacting said cantilevered hub portion, said
adjustment member being movable to change the position
of the surface contacting said cantilevered portion and
thus change the position of said cantilevered portion radi-
ally of said hub to adjust the length of said minor portion
and position said guide pin at a predetermined position
between said first and second positions.
4,394,990
WEB CINCHING AND WINDING APPARATUS AND
METHOD
Maurice A. Kildal, Webster, and Stephen J. Hassall, Church-
ville, both of N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company,
Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,592
Int. a.JB65H J 7/08
U.S. O. 242—65 15 Oaims
1. Apparatus for automatically cinching the end portion of a
web onto a cylindrical core and winding convolutions of web
on the core to form a roll comprising:
means for transporting a web to said core at one speed;
means for guiding the end portion of the transported web
around the outer periphery of said core;
core driving means adapted to be (1) drivingly engaged with
said core in a first mode of operation for rotatably driving
said core at an outer peripheral speed in excess of said one
speed for automatically cinching the transported web end
portion ontofsaid core and winding convolutions of web
onto the core to form a roll havmg a roll surface, and (2)
1384
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
drivingly disengaged from said core in a second mode of
operation;
roll surface driving means adapted to be drivingly engaged
with the roll surface in a first operating condition, and
drivingly disengaged from the roll surface in a second
operating condition, said roll surface driving means being
in its second operating condition when said core driving
means is in its first mode of operation; and
means responsive to a predetermined roll surface diameter as
web is wound on the roll for substantially simultaneously
placing said core driving means in its second mode of
operation and said roll surface driving means in its first
operating condition.
4,394,992
ENERGY ABSORBER FOR LOAD CARRYING FLEXIBLE
PULLING MEANS
Artur Fohl, Schorndorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Repa
Feinstanzwerk GmbH, Alfdorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,428
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 14,
1980, 3001091
Int. CI.' A62B 35/00; B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242—85 4 Qaims
4,394,991
DOUBLE BEARING HSHING REEL
Hideo Noda, Sakai, Japan, assignor to Shimano Industrial Com-
pany Limited, Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 6, 1981, Set. No. 222,990
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 24, 1980, 55-7861 [U]
Int. CI.' AOIK 89/00
U.S. a. 242—84.1 R 8 Qaims
1. Energy absorber for a load carrying flexible belt pulling
means for a safety belt system, comprising a rigid body, a
wind-up roller as a storing element for the belt pulling means at
the body with one end of the belt pulling means fastened to the
wind-up roller, at least one non-rotatable friction roller around
which the belt pulling means are partly wrapped-around, said
friction roller spaced from said wind-up roller and mounted in
said body, a form-spring for the belt pulling means disposed
between said storing element and the friction surface of said
friction roller, said form-spring fixed in the body solely to press
the belt pulling means against the body to exert a predeter-
mined tension force on the belt pulling means.
4,394,993
RESILIENTLY MOUNTED SPLIT PAWL LOCKING
MEANS FOR DUAL SPOOL RETRACTOR
Nazareth Stamboulian, Los Angeles, Calif., and Fred F. Neu-
mann, Rochester, Mich., assignors to American Safety Equip-
ment Corporation, San Fernando, Calif.
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,117
Int. a.' B65H 75/48
U.S. a. 242—107.4 A 10 Qaims
1. A fishing reel comprising a pair of first and second side
frames connected opposite to each other at a regular interval;
a housing mounted adjacent said second side frame to define an
enclosed space between said second side frame and housing; a
spool shaft rotatably supported between said side frames and
having an extending shaft portion extending through said
second side frame and extending outwardly therefrom into said
space; a spool disposed between said side frames and rotatable
with said spool shaft; a tubular shaft being positioned in said
space on said extending shaft portion of said spool shaft, slid-
able between a position where a clutch element on said tubular
shaft engages with a clutch element on said spool shaft and a
position where said clutch element on said tubular shaft disen-
gages from said clutch element on said spool shaft, and having
a pinion; a driving gear mounted in said space and engaging
said pinion; an input shaft carrying said driving gear and hav-
ing a handle; and first and second bearing cylinders mounted
adjacent said first and second side frames for joumalling said
spool shaft, said second bearing cylinder having a support arm
connected therewith and extending into said space in the same
direction as said extended shaft portion of said spool shaft, said
support arm having at an extending end portion thereof a
support member with a shaft bore for supporting said extend-
ing shaft portion whereby said support member supports said
extending shaft portion.
1. In an emergency locking dual spool safety belt retractor
having a frame, two belt storage spools rotatably mounted in
said frame, a spool locking ratchet on each spool, inertia sensor
means and pawl means operated by said sensor means to en-
gage each said ratchet to lock said spools against further belt
protraction, the improvement in pawl means comprising the
provision of:
split pawl means for locking said two belt storage spools and
including two separate pawl members; and
resilient means for mounting said pawl members to said
July 26, 19M
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1385
frame and to each other operably located between said
spools and ratchets to normally act as a unitary double
ended pawl with resilient material thereof being inter-
posed between said pawl members and between said mem-
bers and said frame whereby in the event either one of said
members engages a tooth of one of said ratchets in a
tip-to-tip condition, said resilient means will be com-
pressed between said members and said one member will
be resiliently urged into engagement with a next tooth of
said one of said ratchets.
4,394,995
REEL-TURNTABLE TORQUE ADJUSTING MEANS
Hideki Hayashi, and Kazuki Takai, both of Toda, Japan, assign-
ors to Qarion Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,702
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 21, 1980, 55-
37610[U]
Int. a.' G03B 1/04; GllB 15/32; B65H 17/02
U.S. a. 242—207 2 Qaims
I ' 4,394,994
TAPE FAST-FORWARDING AND REWINDING
APPARATUS
Hirotoshi Oono, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Victor Company
of Japan, Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,282
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 20, 1980, 55-83553
Int. aJ G03B 1/04; GllB 15/32
U.S. Q. 242—200 6 Claims
Csr<^
1. A tape fast-forwarding and rewinding apparatus compris-
ing:
rotating means for rotating a tape take-up side reel in a
direction so as to take up a tape upon tape fast-forwarding
mode, and for rotating a tape supply side reel in a direc-
tion so as to take up the tape upon tape rewinding mode;
rotation driving means for driving said rotating means so
that the tape which is taken up by said tape take-up side
reel or said tape supply side reel travels at a first fast-for-
warding or rewinding speed, and so that the tape travels at
a second fast-forwarding or rewinding speed which is a
high speed faster than said first fast-forwarding or rewind-
ing speed;
detection means for substantially detecting the radii of tape
rolls of wound tape which are wound around both the
take-up side and the supply side reel rotated by said rotat-
ing means.
memorizing means for memorizing a ratio between the radii
of the tape rolls of wound Upe which are substantially
wound around both the reels obtained by said detection
means, when said tape is travelling at said first fast-for-
warding or rewinding speed; and
controlling means for controlling said rotation driving
means so that said tape travels at said second fast-forward-
ing or rewinding speed after travelling at said first fast-for-
warding and rewinding speed, and controlling said rota-
tion driving means so that the speed of said tape becomes
said first fast-forwarding or rewinding speed from said
second fast-forwarding or rewinding speed when a value
^ which is a reciprocal of the ratio between the radii of the
tape rolls of wound tape which are substantially wound
around both the reels obtained by said detection means
when said tape is travelling at said second fast-forwarding
or rewinding speed, is equal to the value of the ratio
memorized in said memorizing means, as a result of com-
parison jjerformed.
3221 20 30 1
1. A reel-turntable torque adjusting means which comprises:
a reel-turntable member for conveying a rotational force to
a reel turntable;
said reel-turntable member being formed with a plurality of
steps having different heights at an upper peripheral por-
tion thereof;
a spring member having one or more tip ends pressed against
the steps, respectively;
said spring member having slanting portions on opposite
sides of each of said tip ends; and
a motor-driven friction plate against which said reel-turnta-
ble member is pressed by said spring member.
4,394,996
DRAPERY PACKAGE
Eli Heimberg, North Dartmouth, Mass., assignor to Cameo
Curtains, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,555
Int. a.' B65H 75/06
U.S. a. 242—222 5 Qalms
1. A drapery package assembly comprising:
a core member having a central portion and two enlarged
end sections, one of said two end sections containmg a
substantially uniformly spaced gap adjacent to said central
portion,
a longitudinally folded drapery having a top end, a bottom
end, and a middle section therebetween,
said bottom end of said drapery being located within said
substantially uniformly spaced gap of said one end section
of said core member,
said middle section of said drapery being wrapped around
the core^ member in spiral fashion, and
the top end of the drapery lying against and being exposed
on the exterior of the wound drapery.
1032 O.G.— 54
1386
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
434,997
SEQUENTIAL TIME DISCRIMINATION SYSTEM FOR
SUB-DELIVERY SYSTEMS
Inge Maudal, Claremont, Calif., assignor to General Dynamics,
Pomona Division, Pomona, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 139,947, Apr. 14, 1980. This application
Jan. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 345,311
Int a.3 F41G 7/22
U5. CL 244— 3.16 7 Qaims
anisol, said second container being constructed to fracture
under the pressure forces developed by said fluid at a
second altitude lower than said first altitude,
and a payload commensurate in weight with the buoyancy
of said envelopes and connected to said envelopes.
4,394,999
REDUNDANT OR EMERGENCY STEERING
MECHANISM ESPEOALLY FOR AN AIRCRAFT
Ludwig Botzler, Neubiberg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Messerschmitt-Boelkow-Blohm Gesellschaft mit beschraenk-
ter Haftung, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,102
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 21,
1979, 2933780
Int. CI.3 B64C 13/16, 13/40
U.S. a. 244—78 7 Qaims
1. A method for directing a plurality of sub-missiles to se-
lected targets comprising the steps of:
sequentially and at predetermined time intervals releasmg a
succession of guided sub-vehicles directed to at least one
predetermined target;
marking a target upon impact by a sub-vehicle;
detecting the marking of the impacted target; and
directing subsequently released sub-vehicles to preselected
targets other than an impacted target.
4,394 998
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR EXPLORING THE
ATMOSPHERE OF A PLANET
Joseph Taillet, Boulogne, and Jean Maulard, Qamart, both of
France, assignors to Office National d'Etudes et de Recherche
Aerospatiales (ONERA), ChatUlon Sous Bagneux, France
FUed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,852
Int. a.J B64B 1/62
VJS. a. 244—31 8 Claims
8. An apparatus for exploring the atmosphere for Venus at a
predetermined constant altitude, comprising:
a gas tight, rigid enclosure;
means for opening said enclosure in said atmosphere above
said predetermined altitude;
and a buoyant assembly located in folded condition in said
enclosure; said buoyant assembly comprising:
a first gas tight deformable inflatable envelope accomodat-
ing a first container containing water, said first container
being constructed to fracture under the pressure forces
developed by water vapour at a first altitude in said atmo-
sphere,
second gas tight deformable inflatable envelope ac-
comodating a second container containing a fluid selected
from the group consisting of toluene, 2-octene(cis) and
a
1. A redundant emergency control mechanism for steering
an aircraft, comprising pilot controlled mechanical steering
means (1, 2), first pressure transducer means (3) operatively
connected to said pilot controlled mechanical steering means
(3) for converting a movement of said mechanical steering
means into a first hydraulic steering control signal component
representing a pilot control action, operating condition sensor
means (12) which are independent of an electrical power sup-
ply for sensing instantaneous flight operating conditions, sec-
ond pressure transducer means (13) operatively connected to
said operating condition sensor means (12) for converting
flight operating condition representing signals into flight oper-
ating condition representing second hydraulic steering control
signal components, pressure operated control actuator means
(18) including a source of pressure (P) and conduit means
operatively connecting said control actuator means (18) to said
first and second pressure transducer means for receiving said
first and second hydraulic steering control signal components
in a superimposed manner in said control actuator means (18)
for converting the resulting combined signal into a mechanical
steering control action when an electrical power supply failure
occurs in the aircraft, said mechanism further comprising
pressure operated power actuator means (25), valve means (23)
operatively connecting said second pressure transducer means
(13) to said pressure operated power actuator means (25), and
mechanical linkage means (22, 24, 26) operatively intercon-
necting the output (22) of said pressure operated control actua-
tor means (18) to the respective outputs (26, 24) of said valve
means (23) and of said pressure operated power actuator means
(25), whereby an operation of said control actuator means (18)
overrides the normal automatic operation of said power actua-
tor means (25).
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1387
4,395,000
LATCH AND LOCK MECHANISM FOR AN AIRCRAFT
CARGO DOOR ASSEMBLY
James E. Deviny, Redmond, and Miloslav Puncoch, Seattle,
both of Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle,
Wash.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,178
Int. a.3 B64C 1/14: E05C 1/08
U.S. a. 244—118.3 14 Qaims
435,001
ATTTTUDE SELECTIVE AIRCREW ESCAPE CONTROL
W. James Stone; Vernon D. Burklund, and Robert B. Dillinger,
all of Ridgecrest, Calif., assignors to The United SUtes of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Mar. 27, 1978, Ser. No. 890,099
Int a.3 B64D 25/10
U.S. a. 244—122 AE 8 Claims
AMCMR iNTOVaa.
COMCntON
6. A latch and lock mechanism for an aircraft fuselage door
assembly wherein an outwardly opening nonplug-type closure
member and an inwardly opening plug-type closure member
are hinged to the aircraft fuselage along opposite sides of a
fuselage doorway such that said closure members meet in the
midsection of the doorway when the door assembly is closed,
comprising:
latch means affixed to fixed structure of the aircraft fuselage
and positioned to receive and secure said outwardly open-
ing closure member in a closed position, said latch means
being selectively deployable between a latched position
and an unlatched position by means of an elongated push-
pull latch actuator rod operably coupled to said latch
means;
cam interlock means for securing said latch actuator rod
with said latch means in said latched state, said cam inter-
lock means including a lock body having first and second
spaced-apart bores and a transverse channel extending
therebetween, said latch actuator rod being slidably en-
gaged in said first bore and a push-pull lock actuator rod
slidably engaged in said second bore, a locking member
slidably engaged in said channel, said latch and lock actua-
tor rods having mutually opposing detents each sized to
receive a portion of said locking member in locking rela-
tionship, and the dimension of said locking member along
said channel being greater than the length of said channel
between said bores such that said locking member is con-
strained to be engaged at all times with the detent of one
or the other of said actuator rods; and
cam-actuated linkage means responsive to opening and clos-
ing of said plug-type closure member for moving said lock
actuator rod between an unlocked position wherein said
detent of said lock actuator rod opens into said channel so
as to receive said locking member and a locked position
wherein said detent of said lock actuator rod is displaced
from said channel so as to constrain said locking member
to engage and lock said latch actuator rod with said latch
means in said latched position, said linkage including a
cam mounted on said inwardly opening closure member,
said cam being cooperably engageable with a movable
cam follower coupled to said lock actuator rod such that
said lock actuator rod is moved to said locked position
when said inwardly opening closure member is closed and
said lock actuator rod is moved to said unlocked position
when said inwardly opening closure member is opened.
1. An improved escape system for an aircraft having a cata-
pult-boosted ejection seat, wherein the improvement com-
prises:
a seat mechanism mounted in the aircraft and adapted to be
ejected therefrom;
sustainer motor means associated with said seat mechanism
for providing ejection movement of said seat mechanism
at a predetermined time;
means for firing said sustainer motor means mounted on said
seat mechanism;
a pressure hose in open communication between said means
for firing said sustainer motor means and said sustainer
motor means; and
interrupter means associated with said seat mechanism for
selectively preventing action of said sustainer motor
means, wherein said interrupter means disconnects said
pressure hose from one of said means for firing said sus-
tainer motor means and said sustainer motor means during
an ejection occurring when the attitude of the aircraft
exceeds predetermined limits on pitch and roll.
435,002
EMERGENCY DRAINING MECHANISM FOR THE
CENTRIFUGAL SPREADER OF AN AIRPLANE
Jouni Kantojiinri, Sompatie 13 E 9, 80230 Joensuu; Pertti Lahti,
Lentoasema as 6 B, 80100 Joensuu, and Veikko Lindbolm,
Uukuniemenkatu 3, 80200 Joensuu, all of Finland
Filed Jul. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 285,512
Claims priority, application Finland, Aug. 4, 1980, 802435
Int. a.5 B64D 1/16
U.S. a. 244—136 10 Claims
1. An aircraft mounted system for dispensing granular or
powdered material including:
a container for holding granular or powdered material, said
1388
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
container having a lower downwardly facing discharge
opening;
pivotal support means mounted on a pivot fixedly positioned
with respect to said container for pivotal movement be-
tween a first position in which an outer end of said pivotal
support means is positioned immediately adjacent and
beneath said discharge opening pf said container and a
second position spaced away from said discharge opening;
a centrifugal dispensing wheel mounted on said outer end of
said pivotal support means so as to adjacently face said
discharge opening to receive granular or powdered mate-
rial therefrom when said pivotal support means is posi-
tioned in said first position;
motor means supported on said pivotal support means for
drivingly rotating said centrifugal dispensing wheel; and
power means for moving said pivotal support means to its
second position so as to move said centrifugal dispensing
wheel to a position remote from said discharge opening to
permit a rapid emergency release discharge of substan-
tially all granular or powdered material in said container.
4,395,004
MODULAR SPACECRAFT STRUCTURES
Eugene R. Ganssle, Skillman, N.J., and Nelson F. Samhanuner,
Fairless Hills, Pa., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York,
N.Y.
Filed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,251
Int. Cl.^ B64G 1/22
U.S. CI. 244—158 R 12 Qaims
4-- ,M c«
4,395,003
DEVICE FOR SUSPENDING UNDER AIRCRAFT
MISCELLANEOUS LOADS WITH VARIABLE DISTANCE
BETWEEN CENTERS
Pierre F. Coutin, Paris, France, assignor to R. Alkan A Cie,
France
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 272,845
Claims priority, application France, Jun. 13, 1980, 80 13252
Int. a.J B64D 1/02
U.S. a. 244—137 R 10 Claims
1. A structure adapted to be stored in a launch vehicle, said
structure supporting components which together with the
structure form a spacecraft, the spacecraft to be launched from
the launch vehicle when the latter is in space, said structure
comprising:
a first module comprising a first support body having a given
longitudinal extent including means adapted to receive
said components, said body including a first pair of trun-
nion members extending in opposite directions from said
body, said trunnion members being adapted to be received
in respective trunnion receiving means in said launch
vehicle, said body including first mounting means for
securing another body to said first support body, and
a substantially planar keel structure means of a thickness
much less than said longitudinal extent of said first support
body and including second mounting means secured to
and mating with said first mounting means and including
a keel member adapted to engage said receiving means on
said launch vehicle, said keel member extending in a direc-
tion normal to the direction of said trunnion members, said
second mounting means being adapted to receive third
mounting means from said another body.
4,395,005
APPARATUS FOR REMOTELY INDICATING
ALIGNMENT OF MALE AND FEMALE MEMBERS
Eugene R. Ganssle, Skillman, N.J., assignor to RCA Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
FUed Mar. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 133,250
Int. a.3 B64G 1/64
U.S. a. 244—161 3 Claims
1. A device for carrying under aircraft multiple loads dis-
posed at variable distances between centers, which comprises:
(a) a central frame structure equipped at its upper face with
suspension members adapted to co-act with hook means of
the aircraft,
(b) a pair of lateral hollow nacelles carried on each side of
said central frame structure,
(c) load supports disposed within each lateral nacelle and
presenting load suspension means registering with an
aperture of the corresponding nacelle, said load supports
being mounted in bearings carried by each nacelle to
rotate about the longitudinal axis of said nacelle, and
(d) control means associated to said load supports to cause
the load supports disposed within each nacelle to rotate
about the longitudinal axis of said nacelle, thus ensuring a
variation in the distances between centers of the loads
suspended to the load supports of one nacelle and to the
load supports of the other nacelle.
cut!
24
lUCIIC MIU
l«CUEU
32^36
1. In combination:
a spacecraft cradle adapted to be mounted in the cargo bay
of a spacecraft launch vehicle and including means for
receiving a spacecraft thereto, a male keel member de-
pending from and below said cradle,
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1389
a female keel receiving means adapted to be secured to said
launch vehicle cargo bay,
illuminating fiber optic means attached to said keel member
for illuminating said keel receiving means during insertion
of said keel member therein, and
image display means including fiber optic imaging means
attached to said keel member for receiving and remotely
displaying the image of said illuminated keel receiving
means and its spaced relation to the keel member during
said insertion at a location remote from said keel receiving
means, said displayed image providing information suffi-
cient to provide alignment guidance of the keel member to
said keel receiving means during said insertion.
4,395,007
ACTUATION SYSTEM FOR A CONTROL SURFACE OF
AN AIRCRAFT
George A. Owl, Jr., Gardena, Calif., assignor to Rockwell Inter-
national Corporation, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Nov. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 206,597
Int. Q\} B64C i/50
U.S. a. 244—215 5 Qaims
4,395,006
MECHANISM FOR CAPTURING AND RELEASING A
SPINNING OBJECT
Henry J. Taylor, Willowdale, Ontario, Canada
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 13,379, Feb. 21, 1974,
abandoned. This application Feb. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 237,820
Int. a.5 B64G 1/64
U.S. a. 244—161 1* Claims
1. A coupling system for capturing, braking and deploying
an object which rotates about a first axis prior to capture
comprising: |
an adaptor and an end effector,
said adaptor comprising;
(a) an adaptor housing having an adaptor axis, said adap-
tor housing being adapted to be mounted on said object
with its adaptor axis aligned with said first axis,
(b) a passive turntable mounted on and carried by said
adaptor housing, said passive turntable being free to
rotate about said adaptor axis independently of said
adaptor housing,
said end effector comprising,
(a) clamping means adapted to be movable between a
capture/deploy position and a clamping position with
respect to said passive turntable to receive and release
said turntable when in the capture/deploy position and
to prevent rotation of the turntable when in said clamp-
ing position,
(b) means for driving said clamping means between said
capture/deploy position and said clamping position,
(c) brake means carried by said clamping means for apply-
ing a brake torque to said adaptor housing when said
turntable is secured by said clamping means,
(d) spin-up drive means carried by said clamping means
and adapted to engage said housing to cause the housing
to be rotatobly driven about said adaptor axis prior to
deploying of said object in use.
1. An actuation system for positioning a control surface
mounted on an aircraft airfoil, said control surface being rotat-
able about a first axis at an ^ute angle to the longitudinal axis
of said aircraft, comprising:
a first crank having a first end and a second end. said second
end being pivotally mounted to said airfoil, said first crank
being rotatable about a second axis substantially perpen-
dicular to said longitudinal axis;
a second crank having a first end pivotally mounted to said
first crank rotatable about a third axis substantially per-
pendicular to said second axis, said second crank having a
second end pivotally mounted to said control surface
rotatable about a fourth axis substantially perpendicular to
said second and third axes; and
an actuator coupled to said airfoil and to said first end of said
first crank,
such that upon extension or retraction of said actuator in a
direction parallel to said longitudinal axis of said aircraft
said control surface is rotated by rotation of said first and
second cranks, said first and second cranks rotating rela-
tive to each other to compensate for the relative change of
position of said control surface relative to said longitudi-
nal axis of said aircraft.
4 395 008
AIRCRAFT WING AND FLAP ARRANGEMENT
Barry Sharrock, and David P. Halliday, both of Preston, En-
gland, assignors to British Aerospace Public Limited Com-
pany, London, England
Filed Jan. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 224,959
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 22, 1980,
8002176
Int. a.5 B64C i/50, 9/16
U.S. CI. 244—215 8 Claims
1. A wing and flap arrangement including a fixed wing
portion, a flap member extending rearwardly of the fixed wing
portion, a variable camber upper surface member in the form
of a cantilevered leaf spring, said upper surface member being
anchored to said fixed wing portion such that it trails there-
from and is biassed toward said flap member at all times, a
pivot pivoting said flap member to said fixed wing portion
about a generally spanwise axis, actuation means adapted to
effect deflection of said fiap member about its pivot, and upper
surface urging means for urging said upper surface member
from said flap member against the bias of the leaf spring when
a slot is required, said upper surface urging means including a
cam track and cam track engaging member, one of which is
1390
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
carried by said upper surface member and the other is carried
by said flap member and arranged so that on relatively small
upward and downward deflection from a neutral position, said
upper surface member and the upper surfaces of said fixed
(*17V
wing portion and said flap member together define a substan-
tially continuous surface, whilst on relatively large downward
deflection from the neutral position said cam track and cam
track engaging member co-operate to urge said upper surface
member from said flap member.
435,009
RACEWAY CLAMP
Odo S. Bornike, Gig Harbor, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,953
Int. a.3 F16L 3/22
U.S. CI. 248—68 CB 1 Oaim
1. A raceway clamp assembly comprising:
a three-part clamp for retaining an array of wire bundles a
predetermined distance spaced individually one from
another, said three-part clamp including a U-shaped base
member having serrated side arms for retaining in snap fit
relationship an intermediate wire bundle supporting ele-
ment, and a cushioned third element in pressure fit rela-
tionship with said intermediate wire bundle supporting
element within said raceway clamp assembly;
said third element having an aperture, said aperture having
an inner facing surface portion with complementary serra-
tion for interlocking with said serrated side arms;
said U-shaped base member having a bottom portion, and
said bottom portion including a plurality of mounting
holes for securing said raceway clamp assembly to aircraft
structure;
said serrated side arms being resiliently movable towward
and away from each other, said serrated side arms being
substantially parallel, and said serrated side arms having
exterior surface serrations facing downward toward said
bottom portion;
said intermediate wire bundle supporting element having an
aperture, said aperture having an inner facing surface
portion with complementary serration for interlocking
with said serrated side arms; and
each of said apertures of said third element and said interme-
diate wire bundle supporting element having associated
respectively therewith a finger tab for releasing respec-
tively said third element and said intermediate wire bundle
supporting element, thereby permitting adjustment re-
spectively of said third element and said intermediate wire
bundle supporting element along the length of said ser-
rated side arms.
4,395,010
DEVICE FOR THE SETTING UP OF A DATA DISPLAY
DEVICE ON A WORK SURFACE
Olav Helgeland, Nittedal; Guttorm Rudi, Fjellhamer, and Odd
Engely, Faren, all of Norway, assignors to Tandberg Data
A/S, Oslo, Norway
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,368
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 30,
1980, 3036852
Int. a.' A47G 29/00
U.S. a. 248—371 6 Oaims
1. A system for setting up a data display device on a work
surface, comprising: an elevation adjustment means; rotation
means for rotation of the device about a vertical axis; swivel
means for swivelling or tilting the device about a horizontal
axis; a weight balancing means for compensating at least a
portion of a weight of the data display device; a stand having
a stationary telescope member and an extendable telescope
member in cooperation therewith; a base plate arranged on the
extendable telescope member which receives a rotary plate in
rotary fashion; said swivel means comprising the rotary plate
provided with an arch, and at least two sliding elements ar-
ranged on the arch for bearing the data display device; said
weight balancing means comprising a substantially linear en-
ergy storage member arranged on the stand; said elevation
adjustment means comprising a toothed rack arranged on the
extendable telescope member and a pinion which engages in
the toothed rack, said pinion being arranged on a shaft which
is provided with a first control knob located on the stationary
telescope member; the base plate having a passage for the
linear energy storage member and at least two concentrically
arranged base plate guide slot means for guiding rotation of the
rotary plate; two rotary plate guide slot means corresponding
to the two sliding elements of the swivel means which run in a
direction of the arch for guiding the sliding elements; said
swivel means comprising two outside supports or abutment
members lying opposite the sliding elements at the rotary plate
guide slot means, and first connection element means aligned
through the rotary plate guide slot and which holds the sliding
elements and the outside abutment members in a releasable
connection; second connection element means passing through
said base plate guide slot means and which hold the rotary
plate to the base plate in a releasable slidable connection to
permit rotation of the rotary plate relative to the base plate;
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1391
and said second connection element means including a screw
with a nut designed as a control knob.
4,395,011
MOUNTING AND GUIDING DEVICE FOR ADJUSTABLE
MOTOR VEHICLE SEATS
Mario Torta, Turin, Italy, assignor to Lifel di Torta E C. SA.S.,
Beinasco, Italy
Filed Not. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 210,709
Int. C\? A45D 19/04: B60N 1/02
U.S. a. 248—393 13 Qaims
bracket and is fixed at its upper end to the front of a
respective said side member of said base frame, said two
uprights being pivoted about a common horizontal trans-
verse axis to permit the seat to tip forwards, and
said support means further comprising, in correspondence
with each fixed guide, a fork mounted at the rear of said
side member of said base frame, and a roller which is
rotatably mounted in said fork to rest on an upper edge of
said fixed guide which serves as a track.
435,012
SUPPORT FOR A MAILBOX
Frederick K. Ranee, 402 14th St., Rte. 1, Derils Lake, N. Htk,
58301
Filed Not. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,341
Int. a.^ F16M 13/00
U.S. a. 248—545 6 Qaims
■W
t
1. In an adjustable motor vehicle seat having a base frame
with two side members, a mounting and guiding device of the
type comprising:
a pair of fixed guides formed by profiled sheet metal ele-
ments having means of attachment to lower internal wall
parts of the vehicle so as to extend substantially horizon-
tally and parallel to each other longitudinally of said
vehicle;
a pair of movable guides which are formed by profiled sheet
metal elements slidably connected to respective said fixed
guides;
respective support means which connect said movable
guides with respective said side members of said base
frame, which overlie said guides;
at least one longitudinal rack fixed to a respective said fixed
guide and defining a longitudinal array of positioning
slots, and
a respective hand-operated movable latch which, is selec-
tively engageable and disengagable with the slots of said
rack, and is carried on the movable guide corresponding
to said fixed guide having said rack,
wherein the improvement consists in:
each fixed guide comprising a box-section which defines a
longitudinal slot facing inwardly of said device, and a side
wall facing outwardly of said device for fixing said guide
to a vertical part of said lower internal wall part of said
vehicle;
each movable guide comprising a guide part which is slid-
able within said fixed guide, and a lateral part which
projects inwardly of said device through said slot and
carries said support means;
each rack comprising a strip of sheet metal fixed centrally to
said side wall of said fixed guide so that a part of said rack
projects from said slot in said guide, said positioning slots
being formed in said projecting part,
said projecting lateral part of each movable guide associated
with said rack comprising a pair of walls which are spaced
above one another and between which is interposed said
projecting part of said rack, said projecting lateral part of
said movable guide defining an opening in which said
latch is slidable,
said support means comprising, for each movable guide, an
articulation bracket fixed to said projecting lateral part
adjacent the front end of said movable guide, and an
upright which is articulated at its lower end to said
3. A support comprising:
a first cylindrical element,
two annular washers, each attached to said first cylindrical
element and each having a central hole aligned with an
axis generally parallel with the axis of said cylindrical
element,
support means for supporting an object and adapted to be
held by said two annular washers,
a locking collar adapted to be secured to said support means,
for preventing relative motion, past a predetermined
point, between said support means and said first cylindri-
cal element and,
means for attaching an object to said support means;
wherein said support means comprises a second cylindrical
element having threads on one end, and said means for
attaching an object to said support means comprises:
a plate for supporting said object,
a threaded cylindrical element, secured at one end to said
plate, for mating with said threaded portion of said
support means,
means attached to said threaded element, for frictionally
grasping said support means,
elastic means connected between said threaded cylindrical
element and said support means for returning said plate
to a predetermined orientation with respect to said
support pipe after rotational displacement of said plate.
1392
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
435,013
LANTERN HOLDER
Lawrence H. Wissinger, 337 Montgomery Ave., Springfield,
Ohio 45506
FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,002
Int. a.5 F16M 13/00: A47K 1/08
U.S. a. 248—558 2 Claims
1. A lantern holder, comprising, in combination, a base, a
split-clamp ring secured to said base for clamping onto the
outer periphery of a lantern base, an upright member secured
to said split-clamp ring, for removably supporting an ele vat-
able light reflector and shade combination, and a clamp screw
received in said base for clamping said base to an object, such
as a seat or ladder top, said base is open, on one end, to receive
the longitudinal side edge of a seat, and a lip formed and ex-
tending downwards from said open end, includes a pair of
spaced-apart legs fixedly secured thereto, and said legs, said
lip, and a plate secured to the opposite end of said base, forms
surface rest means, for said base, when said base is not clamped
to an object, and said split-clamp ring comprises two arcuately
curved valves, one pair of ends including an elongated hori-
zontal slot for freely receiving a bolt fastener, which is re-
ceived through a spacer, said opposite end of said base and said
plate, which is elevated when said holder is to be mounted to
the top of a ladder.
4,395,014
POOL DECK FORM FOR VINYL LINER SWIMMING
POOL
Max W. Deason, 1818 W. Price St., Tucson, Ariz. 85705
FUed Nov. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 322,394
Int. a.' E04B 1/16
U.S. a. 249—9 6 Claims
a first elongate generally horizontally oriented inner sur-
face extending along said liner retainer,
a second elongate generally horizontally oriented inner
surface extending along said liner retainer and generally
parallel to said first elongate inner surface,
a lip extending outwardly from said first elongate inner
surface toward said second inner surface, -
the space between said lip and said second elongate inner
surface representing a longitudinal channel opening
facing said central area of said pool and extending along
said liner retainer generally parallel to said pool wall,
the vertical distance between said lip and said second
inner surface generally being constant along the length
of said retainer strip and being less than the vertical
distance from said first inner surface to said second
inner surface,
(b) a continuous strip of semirigid material including
(i) a facing surface free of adhesive and positioned below
and horizontal edge against said upper portion of said
pool wall,
(ii) a front form surface extending upwardly from said
facing surface to form a contoured surface for tempo-
rarily supporting concrete poured above said horizontal
edge onto said horizontal support surface of said pool,
said concrete forming a pool deck and coping thereof
contiguous to said pool wall when set, and
(iii) a back wall surface generally oppxjsed to said front
form surface and facing said central area of said pool,
and
(c) an elongate suppxjrt member having
(i) a first end shaped and contoured to pass through said
strip of semirigid material and be fixedly detachably
secured in said liner retainer, and
(ii) a second end provided with a head having an inner
surface contoured to contact said back wall surface of
said continuous semirigid strip and to hold said continu-
ous semirigid strip in position against said upper portion
of said pool wall when said first end is fixedly secured in
said liner retainer, said elongate member being under
tension along at least a portion of the length thereof
when said first end is secured in said liner retainer chan-
nel and said head is contacting said back wall surface of
said semirigid strip of material.
4,395,015
CAKE MOLD
Margaret Reardon, 8 Kimball St., Worcester, Mass. 01605
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,848
Int. a.3 B28D 7/36
U.S. a. 249—115 3 Claims
1. An apparatus for forming a deck and coping thereof for a
pool, said apparatus comprising,
(a) a liner retainer strip having a channel extending along the
length thereof contoured and dimensioned to receive the
peripheral edge of a pool liner of flexible, waterproof
material, said channel including
1. Cake mold, comprising:
(a) a main container having a bottom wall with a circular
peripheral edge and having an annular side wall extending
upwardly and outwardly from the said peripheral edge of
the bottom wall to define a primary top opening, and
(b) an annular division wall extending upwardly from the
bottom wall coaxially of the side wall and terminating in
a free top edge to define a secondary top opening, the
division wall being tapered inwardly and upwardly from
July 26, 198;
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1393
the bottom wall and having a height which is substantially
less than that of the side wall.
4,395,016
AXIAL FLOW REGULATOR IMPROVEMENTS
INCLUDING RESTRICTOR
Robert H. Welker, Sugar Land, Tex., assignor to Welker Engi-
neering Company, Sugar Land, Tex.
IfUed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,206
Int. a.3 F16K 7/07. 47/14
U.S. a. 251-f$ ♦ Claims
face, the improvement comprising a groove formed in the
valve disc sealing surface, the groove in cross section having
an outer portion communicating with the disc sealing surface
and an inner portion, the groove outer portion having paral-
leled sidewalls in said cross section, the inner portion being
also defined in part by paralleled sidewalls in said cross section,
the width of the inner portion between its sidewalls being at
least 140% of the width of the outer portion between its side-
walls, the cross-sectional area of the inner portion in said cross
section being at least 140% of the cross-sectional area of the
1. An apparatus including a restrictor for installation on the
downstream side of an axial flow regulator which flow regula-
tor includes a central plug diverting fluid flow into an annular
space thereabout, said regulator having an annular housing
having inlet and outlet body elements received therein, said
body elements each defining a plurality of integral spaced ribs
forming opposed cage elements for retention of said central
plug therebetween, said body elements defining cylindrical
inlet and outlet openings, locking opening means being defined
in the downstream one of said body elements, the restrictor
comprising:
a surrounding cylindrical sleeve defining a solid circumfer-
ential wall forming a close fit within said outlet opening of
said downstream body element a plurality of fluid flow
openings being formed in said cylindrical wall to thereby
define a maximum throughput capacity, said restrictor
further including a generally conical central closure mem-
ber being integral with said cylindrical wall and extending
across and within said cylindrical wall to close off an axial
flow path there through an annular seal groove being
formed in the outer peripheral portion of said restrictor
and opening toward said plug, seal means received in said
seal groove and establishing a seal between said restrictor
and plug, locking means extending through said cylindri-
cal wall and into said locking opening and securing said
restrictor in assembly with said downstream body ele-
ment.
r^i 1 L
o
groove outer portion in said cross section, the juncture of the
inner and outer portions in said cross section providing op-
posed ledge surfaces in a common plane; and
an O-ring gasket received in said groove, the cross-sectional
area of the total of the groove inner and outer portions
being about 105% of the cross-sectional area of the O-ring
gasket, the O-ring gasket when in position in the groove
normally extending slightly beyond the disc sealing sur-
face to compressibly engage the valve body sealing sur-
face when the valve is in the closed condition.
4,395,018
VALVE MEMBER WITH nXED SEAL SHUTOFF
Alfred M. Moen, Grafton, Ohio, assignor to Stanadyne, Inc.,
Windsor, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 173,490, Jul. 30, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 925,538, Jul. 19, 1978,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 871,178,
Jan. 23, 1978, abandoned. This application Feb. 16, 1982, Ser*
No. 348,997
Int a.3 F16K 5/04
U.S. a. 251—310 29 Qaims
4,395,017
BUTTERFLY VALVE SEALING MEANS HAVING AN
IMPROVED O-RING GROOVE
Richard A. Brautigan, Tulsa, Okla., assignor to Dover Corpora-
tion, Tulsa, Okla.
Continuation of Ser. No. 124,538, Feb. 25, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,959
Int. C\? F16J 15/32: F16K 1/226
U.S. a. 251—306 1 Claim
1. In a butterfly valve having a body with an internal cir-
cumferential sealing surface and a disc rotatably supported in
the valve body, the disc having a circumferential sealing sur-
face therearound, the disc being rotatable so that when the
valve is in the closed condition the disc sealing surface is
adjacent to or in physical contact with the body sealing sur-
1. Fluid valve means including sleeve means, inlet and outlet
port means in said sleeve means, a stem movable within said
sleeve means between open and closed positions and having
1394
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
inlet and outlet port means, said stem inlet port means being in
communication with said sleeve means inlet port means, said
stem outlet port means being movable into register with said
sleeve means outlet port means to thereby define a path of flow
through said valve means from said communicating stem and
sleeve means inlet port means through said stem outlet port
means and said sleeve means outlet port means, and a fixed seal
member carried by said sleeve means and for closing flow
between said said sleeve means inlet and outlet port means, said
seal member being annular, at least in part, with the annulus
being arranged about an axis perpendicular to the axis of said
stem, said seal member being spaced from said sleeve means
outlet port means with said path of flow through said valve
means never being through said seal member at any position of
said stem to thereby protect said seal member from movement
and wear caused by dynamic water pressure and foreign mat-
ter within the water, said stem outlet port means being in
register with and closed by said seal member when said stem is
in a closed position.
4,395,019
SEAL FOR WEAR RESISTANT INSERTS
Raymond C. Seiyrles, Russell, Ky., assignor to Mobil Oil Corpo-
ration, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,049
Int. a.' F16K 3/02
U^. a. 251—357 13 Qaims
members freely pivotable about an axis extending trans-
versely to the longitudinal axes of said rails, and front and
iu7j,i^\? |T
rear spring engaging slides adjustably mounted to said
pivot members and extending therebetween for engaging
said other end of said coil spring.
FIXCD
OHIFia PLATE
IFIXCBCHOU)
VtKIASLl CHOKE
4,395,021
VERTICAL CONTINUOUS ANNEALING FURNACE AND
ITS OPERATING METHOD
Ryoji Terakado; Masaru Iwasa; Ituo Takahashi; Norio Anzawa,
and Gen Yoshida, all of Muroran, Japan, assignors to Nippon
Steel Corporation, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 347,235
Int. a.3 C21D 9/56
U.S. a. 266—85 15 Oaims
Ficmm
1. In a pressure let-down valve comprising a valve body and
a variable choke within said body, said variable choke com-
prising a fixed disc assembly and a rotating disc assembly, said .
rotating disc assembly comprising a retaining ring and a wear-
resistant insert means affixed to said retaining ring,
an improvement wherein:
said wear-resistant insert means is attached to said retain-
ing ring by a split locking ring means containing a
fastening means in the front surface thereof.
4,395,020
STRUT COMPRESSOR
Phillip A. Spainhour, Waukegan, III., assignor to Ammco Tools,
Inc., North Chicago, III.
Filed Mar. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 358,204
Int. a.3 B23P 19/04
U.S. a. 254—10.5 7 Qaims
1. Apparatus for use in assembling and disassembling a strut
assembly of the type having a shock absorber axially disposed
within a coil spring, comprising in combination
a plurality of mutually parallel support rails,
first platen means mounted at a fixed position on said support
rails for operatively engaging one end of a coil spring
disposed between said rails in substantial parallelism there-
with,
second platen means mounted for movement along said rails
for engaging the other end of said coil spring, and
means for applying a force to said second platen means to
move said second platen means toward said first platen
means to compress said coil spring between said first and
second platens,
said second platen means comprising first and second pivot
1. A vertical continuous annealing furnace, comprising:
a furnace proper having a furnace mouth opening upward in
the top thereof, for admitting a steel strip into the furnace,
the strip forming a catenary-like loop therein;
a first furnace cover horizontally mounted on the top of the
furnace proper so as to close said furnace mouth, the first
furnace cover being laterally slidable with respect to the
furnace proper so as to open and close the furnace mouth
and having two long narrow openings laterally extending
from one side to the other thereof and longitudinally
spaced so that the descending and ascending portions of
the strip can pass therethrough; and
a second furnace cover horizontally spaced below said first
furnace cover so as to divide the furnace proper into an
upper pre-chamber and a lower heating chamber, the
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1395
second furnace cover being laterally slidable so as to
permit the two chambers to be cut off and connected as
required, having two long narrow openings laterally ex-
tending from one side to the other thereof and longitudi-
nally spaced so that the descending and ascending por-
tions of the strip can pass therethrough, the second fur-
nace cover also having a partition extending from the
undersurface thereof to near the bottom of the furnace to
vertically divide the heating chamber into a heating zone
and a soaking zone.
in registry with the opening in the top wall, said openings
being of a minimum width enough for a suspending device of
said scrap bucket to move transversely to the center of said
electric-arc furnace main body, said suction duct having its
Q "
4,395,022
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLED
COOLING OF METALLURGICAL PRODUCTS
Philippe A. Paulus, and Marios Economopoulos, both of Liege,
Belgium, assignors to Centre de Recherches Metallurgiques-
Centum Toor Research in de Metallurgie, Brussels, Belgium
Filed Feb. 2, 1978, Ser. No. 874,629
Qaims priority, application Belgium, Feb. 8, 1977, 851213;
Apr. 29, 1977, 854158; May 10, 1977, 854478
I Int. a.3 C21D 9/56
U.S. a. 266-^106 * Claims
/I4
^'
JUWilUUUUUU^J^
suction port in communication with said openings of minimum
width, and a movable top door provided over said dust collect-
ing suction duct and adapted to open or close said openings of
minimum width.
1. An installation for controlled cooling of a metallurgical
product, comprising, a vessel for holding a liquid bath, a de-
vice for continuously transferring the product to said vessel, a
cover arranged above the vessel, said cover being provided
with a condenser for recovering vapour from the bath, means
for continuously raising the product from the vessel, and
means for keeping a substantially homogeneous temperature
throughout the bath, in which the cover of the vessel com-
prises:
(a) a first portion formed by a corrugated condenser of the
contact type, arranged above the vessel and extending
from its inlet side to at least a point where the conveyor or
the product emerges from the path; and
(b) a second portion which is of a heat-insulating nature and
extends from the said point at least to the outlet of the
vessel.
4,395,024
APPARATUS FOR HARDENING METALLIC
WORKPIECES INCLUDING FURNACE AND
WORKPIECE TRANSPORT STRUCTURE, A PART OF
WHICH CAN REMAIN IN THE FURNACE DURING
FURNACE OPERATION
Wolfgang Rembges, Cologne, and Jan G. Elwart, ErftsUdt, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to KIbckner lonon GmbH,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 338,058
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 17,
1981, 3101351
Int Q.3 C23C 11/10
U.S. Q. 266—252
17 Qaims
4,395,023
SHROUD FOR STEEL MAKING ELECTTIIC-ARC
FURNACE
Fumio Tomizawa; Katsutoshi Sobata, both of Yokohama; Yo-
shiaki Yoshimatsu, Kure; Sadayuki Saito, Yotsukaido; Taka-
shi Otani, and Senzaburo Hirano, both of Chiba, all of Japan,
assignors to Ishikaw^jima-Harima Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha
and Kawasaki Seitetsu Kabushiki Kaisha, both of, Japan
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 388,154
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 22, 1981, 56-149808;
Sep. 22, 1981, 56-149809
Int. Q.' H05B 7/20
VJS. Q. 266—158 « Qaims
1. In a shroud for a steel making electric-arc furnace com-
prising insulating and dust proofing walls surrounding sides
and a top of a steel making electric-arc furnace main body, and
doors provided in a side wall of said sound insulating and dust
proofing walls to allow a scrap bucket which is suspended to
pass through from the side; the improvement which comprises
an opening provided in the top wall of said sound insulatmg
and dust proofing walls, a dust collecting suction duct on the
top wall covering said opening and having an opening therem
1. An apparatus for the treatment of a workpiece which
comprises:
a furnace, said furnace including a hollow body having an open
end and defining a treatment chamber therein, a door pivot-
ally connected to said hollow body to open or close the open
end thereof, upper and lower heating means located within
said treatment chamber, two electrodes located within said
treatment chamber between said upper and lower heating
means, one of said electrodes being in the form of a cup-
shaped Faraday cage whose open end faces the open end of
said hollow body, and two electrical lines, each of said
electrical lines being attached at one of its ends to a respec-
tive electrode and then extending through an electrically
insulated opening in said hollow body so as to be connected
to a voluge source located outside of said hollow body, each
1396
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
said electrical line being electrically insulated from all other
elements of the furnace, and
a transport structure, said transport structure being movable
with respect to said furnace and including a metallic mount-
ing portion and a metallic platform portion, said platform
portion being electrically insulated from said mounting
portion, and said transport sturcture being constructed such
that said mounting portion is located outside of said hollow
body when said transport structure is moved with respect to
said furnace such that said platform portion, which at least
initially supports the metallic workpiece to be treated, is
operatively positioned within said treatment chamber and
the door of said furnace is pivoted to close the open end of
said furnace.
4^95,025
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE CONTINUOUS
FURNACE BRAZING AND GAS SOFT-NITRIDING
TREATMENTS OF IRON ARTICLES
Teniold Watanabe; Tadao Kanno; Akio Hidaka, all of Kawagoe,
and Shunji Kobayashi, Sayama, all of Japan, assignors to
Honda Giken Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 113,649, Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 56,922, Jul. 12, 1979, abandoned.
This application Sep. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 305,341
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 12, 1978, 53-84680;
Jul. 13, 1978, 53-85384
Int. a.3 C21D 1/06
U.S. a, 266—257 5 Oaims
21 23
19
20 8
;f|^S^^i^^^
ris
/"^
27
25
29
26
1. A continuous treatment furnace for brazing and gas soft-
nitriding iron parts, comprising:
a furnace body including:
a brazing chamber for brazing said iron parts in a protect-
ing atmosphere substantially comprising a controlled
gas for brazing;
a furnace cooling chamber, provided subsequent to said
brazing chamber, for gradually cooling said iron parts
in a protecting atmosphere substantially comprising said
controlled gas; and
a gas soft-nitriding chamber, provided subsequent to said
furnace cooling chamber, for gas soft-nitriding said iron
parts in a gas soft-nitriding atmosphere substantially
comprising said controlled gas and an ammonia gas;
a protecting gas supply line branched to feed said controlled
gas to said brazing chamber, said furnace cooling cham-
ber, and said gas soft-nitriding chamber;
an ammonia gas supply line connected to feed said ammonia
gas to said gas soft-nitriding chamber;
said chambers being provided with partition walls therebe-
tween;
each said partition wall being provided with an opening
therein to permit communication between said chambers;
and
a shielding steel curtain being disposed so as to cover each
said opening while permitting said iron parts to be passed
therethrough.
4,395,026
REFRACTORY GAS-PERMEABLE STRUCTURAL UNIT
Fritz Hiidl, Vienna, and Friedrich Kassegger, Wiener Neustadt,
both of Austria, assignors to Arbed S.A., Luxembourg, Lux-
embourg
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,218
Claims priority, application Luxembourg, Jun. 25, 1980,
82552; Jun. 25, 1980, 82553; Jun. 25, 1980, 82554
Int. a.3 C21B 7/16
U.S. a. 266—265 26 Oaims
1. A refractory gas-permeable structural unit for blowing a
gas into a metal treatment vessel and through its casing, char-
acterized by a passageway formed by faces of at least two
elongated refractory elements, said elements being separated
from one another by a thin metal layer so that gas passage takes
place between said elements along said metallic layer, said
elements each having first and second longitudinal faces and
hot and cold end faces, said metallic layer being arranged on
the first longitudinal face of at least one of said elements; a
metal housing surrounding said elements to connect them with
one another and sealingly abutting against said second longitu-
dinal faces of said elements; and means for supplying gas and
including a gas distribution chamber formed at said first end
faces of said elements and a conduit communicating with said
distribution chamber.
4,395,027
PRESSURE INTENSIFYING DEVICE
Robert A. Nordmeyer, 5034 Marmol Dr., Woodland Hills, Calif.
91364
Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 187,588
Int. C\? B23Q 3/08
U.S. O. 269—25 8 Claims
1. A two stage hydraulic pressure device comprising:
a housing cylinder having a telescoping inner cylinder dis-
posed concentrically therein and movable between a re-
tracted position and extended workpiece contact posi-
tions, said telescoping cylinder including an outer solid
workpiece contact end and an inner sealing end, said
sealing end including means for sealing said telescoping
cylinder to said housing cylinder during movement be-
tween said extended and retracted positions;
a drive rod concentrically located within said cylinder hous-
ing, for applying power to said telescoping cylinder, said
drive rod having a body portion, a narrower neck portion
and an enlarged head fixed to said neckwork, said head
having a larger cross-sectional area than said rod body;
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1397
means for sealing said drive rod body to said cylinder hous-
ing and means for introducing hydraulic fluid into the
telescoping cylinder and fluid reservoir chamber defined
by the interior of said housing cylinder between said
telescoping cylinder seal means and said drive rod seal
means;
means on the inner surface of the telescoping cylinder seal-
ing end for engaging said drive rod head to prevent move-
ment of said drive rod head rearward out of said telescop-
ing cylinder, said engaging means including partial seal
means on the inner surface of said telescoping cylinder
sealing end for partially sealing said drive rod head to said
telescoping cylinder when said head is at said sealing end
whereby as said head is forced against hydraulic fluid in
said telescoping cylinder, said telescoping cylinder is
extended until it meets sufficient resistance force to cause
hydraulic fluid to bleed past said head through said partial
seal as said head is moved forward and said telescoping
cylinder remains stationary;
and additional drive rod body seal means for sealing the
drive rod body to the cylinder housing, said additional
sealing means encompassing said drive rod neck when said
drive rod is retracted, whereby forward movement of said
drive rod body causes sealing contact with said additional
seal whereupon more pressure is applied to said telescop-
ing cylinder as said drive body rod is forced into said
telescoping cylinder.
4,395,028
WORKPIECE POSITIONING, CLAMPING AND
CONVEYING APPARATUS
William C. Kent, Garland, Tex., assignor to Western Electric
Company, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Piled Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 314,941
Int. a? B23Q 7/00
U.S. a. 269—50 6 Cl^'^s
4,395,029
nXTURE FOR MANUFACTURING RATTAN TYPE
FURNITURE
Denny G. Davis, Littleton; Robert C. Emerson, Aurora, and
George J. Banks, Jr., Littleton, all of Colo., assignors to
Almar Products Corporation, Calif,
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,253
Int. a.' B65H 81/00
U.S. a. 269—57 1 Claim
1. An apparatus for locating and clamping an article, which
comprises:
a workholder having a nest formed therein to receive an
article with a hole therein;
a locating pin slidably mounted in the workholder for move-
ment into the nest and into the hole formed in the article;
a clamp for engaging the article positioned in said nest;
a first lever means having a first cam follower mounted on
one end thereof and means mounted on the other end for
moving said slidable pin into the nest and in the hole
formed in the article positioned in said nest to accurately
locate the article in the nest;
a second lever means having a second cam follower
mounted on one end and means mounted on the other end
for pivotally mounting said clamp;
spring means for urging said clamp against said other end of
said second lever; and
cam track means for sequentially engaging said first and
second cam followers to pivot said first and second lever
means to sequentially move said locating pin into the hole
formed in the article positioned in said nest, and to pivot
said clamp to engage the article positioned by said locat-
ing pin.
1. A rattan type furniture manufacturing assembly compris-
ing:
(a) a pair of interchangeable base members each comprising
a flat plate having four angle members secured to one
major surface thereof to define four arm holding supports
with a square socket member secured to and projecting
normally from said one major surface in given orientation
with respect to said arm holding supports,
(b) eight interchangeable arm means in the form of square
cross-section tubes each removably secured in a different
one of said arm holding supports of said two base mem-
bers with the four arm means secured to each of said base
members extending outwardly thereof at right angles to
each other,
(c) a square central shaft having each of its ends releasably
received with a close fit in a different one of said square
socket members of said pair of base members for support-
ing said base members apart with said arm means of one of
said base members in alignment with said arm means of the
other of said base members,
(d) four torque rods each rotably received through bores in
a different aligned pair of said arm means at the free end
thereof,
(e) a plurality of hollow tubular disc holding means each
receiving a different one of said torque rods and being
releasably secured thereto, and
(0 adjustable foot means mounted on each of said arm means
of one of said base members at the free end thereof and
projecting axially outward of said assembly, whereby said
assembly may be supported on said foot means when
associated with either one of said base members with said
central shaft and said torque rods extending vertically.
4,395,030
QUICK ACTION VISE
Frank G. Eskuchen, Coral Gables, Fla., assignor to Leonard G.
Eskuchen; Raymond F. Eskuchen and Wayne R. Lindholm, all
of Palatine, III.
Filed Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 345,1%
Int. a.3 B23Q 3/02
U.S. CI. 269—181 * Claims
1. A quick action vise comprising:
a base defining a longitudinal axis and including a generally
upstanding portion;
a first clamping jaw fixedly secured to said base in spaced
relation to said upstanding portion;
a second clamping jaw;
means cooperative with said base for supporting said second
clamping jaw for movement along a predetermined path
1398
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
relative to said first clamping jaw between a position
spaced therefrom and a position cooperative with said first
clamping jaw to facilitate support of a work piece therebe-
tween;
said generally upstanding portion of said base having a first
bore therethrough the axis of which is substantially paral-
lel to said predetermined path, and having a second bore
therein transverse to and intersecting said first bore:
a control rod extending through said first bore and being
rotatable relative to said base, said control rod being
operatively connected to said second clamping jaw so as
to effect movement of said second clamping jaw relative
to said first clamping jaw upon longitudinal movement of
said control rod;
a clutch member disposed within said second bore and longi-
tudinally moveable therein to a first position engaging said
control rod so as to effect positive longitudinal movement
stream along said collating conveyor from said one feeder
station;
(d) means located adjacent said conveyor downstream of said
spaced stations and said selection means and operatively
interconnected to said selection means to cooperate with
said collating conveyor to move a page of said selected
signature out of superpositioned relationship with a signa-
ture delivered to the conveyor just prior to the delivery of
said selected signature and thereby open each book of signa-
tures at said selected signature to expose an inside page of
said book of signatures; and
(e) signature printer means located adjacent said opening
means for printing information on an inside page of said
book of signatures when opened by said opening means.
18. A signature printing method for collating and printing
signatures to form books of signatures having customized
information printed on the inside thereof, said books having a
plurality of inside pages and two cover pages, said signatures
^.-^ 6^ .18 10^
! CARTimSE
fM«G»IETIC
of said control rod in a first direction relative to said base
upon rotation of said control rod in a first rotational direc-
tion, said clutch member being movable to a second posi-
tion in response to rotation of said control rod in an oppo-
site rotational direction such that said clutch member
enables longitudinal movement of said control rod in a
direction opposite to said first longitudinal direction while
maintained in relatively fixed rotational relation to said
base; and
a sleeve-like actuator frictionally cooperative with said
control rod and operatively associated with said clutch
member so as to effect longitudinal movement of said
clutch member between its said first and second positions
in response to selective rotational movement of said con-
trol rod in said first and second rotational directions,
movement of said clutch member to its said second posi-
tion enabling rapid movement of said second jaw relative
to said first jaw without rotating said actuator rod.
4,395,031
APPARATUS FOR PRINTING BOOKS OF SIGNATURES
AND METHOD FOR SAME
Damie C. Gruber, St. Paul, and Bernard J. Robichaud, Rose-
ville, both of Minn., assignors to The Webb Company, St.
Paul, Minn.
Filed Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,304
Int. a.i B65H 39/02
U.S. a. 270—54 23 Qaims
1. A signature printing system for collating and printing
signatures to form books of signatures having customized
information printed on the inside thereof, said books having a
plurality of inside pages and two cover pages, said signatures
each having two centerfold pages and two outside pages, said
signature printing system comprising:
(a) a collating conveyor for receiving said signatures so as to
progressively build up books of said signatures, said con-
veyor conveying said signatures in a downstream direction;
(b) a plurality of feeders at stations spaced longitudinally along
said collating conveyor for delivering said signatures to said
conveyor in superpositioned relationship;
(c) means located adjacent said conveyor for selecting a signa-
ture from one of said feeders, said means extending down-
REJECTER
each having two centerfold pages and two outside pages,
comprising the steps of:
(a) delivering said signatures onto a collating conveyor from a
plurality of feeders at stations spaced longitudinally along
said collating conveyor;
(b) conveying said signatures in a downstream direction past
said feeders so as to progressively build up books of said
signatures as said signatures are delivered onto said collating
conveyor in superpositioned relationship;
(c) selecting a signature from one of said feeders;
(d) moving a page of said selected signature out of superposi-
tioned relationship with a signature delivered to the con-
veyor just prior to the delivery of said selected signature
thereby opening each book of signatures at said selected
signature at a location downstream from said spaced stations
to expose an inside page of said book of signatures; and
(e) printing information on an inside page of each said book of
signatures when opened.
4,395,032
DOCUMENT FEEDER
Richard D. Hipp, Jr., Rushseba Township, Chisago County,
Minn., assignor to Minnesota Mining and Manufacturing
Company, Saint Paul, Minn.
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,765
Int. a.J B65H 5/00
U.S. a. 271—10 12 Oaims
1. A document feeder for advancing a document along a
defined path within an office machine comprising,
frame means for supporting the document,
a first document feed member positioned adjacent a first side
of the path, and rotatably mounted on said frame means to
urge the document along the path,
a second document feed member positioned adjacent a sec-
ond side of the path, and rotatably mounted on said frame
means to urge the document along the path,
lever means individually and pivotally supporting each of
said feed members on said frame means, for affording the
independent angular adjustment of each of said feed mem-
JULY 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1399
bers with respect to the adjacent side of the path, so as to
align each of the feed members with respect to each other
and with respect to the document path, and
means for biasing said feed members into contact with the
4,395,034
SHEET FEEDING DEVICE
Kazuyuki Fukui, Toyokawa, Japan, assignor to Minolta Camera
Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
FUed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,647
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 9, 1980, 55-62084
Int. a.3 B65H 3/30
U.S. CI. 271—21 15 Claims
document including a single spring connected between
said frame means and both of said lever means so that said
spring simultaneously biases each of said feed members
into contact with the document with substantially equal
force.
4,395,033
SHINGLING WITH CONTROLLED FORCE AND/OR
VELOCITY
Donovan M. Janssen; Robert Magno; William S. Seaward, all of
Boulder, and James A. Valent, Longmont, all of Colo., assign-
ors to International Business Machines Corporation, Armonk,
N.Y.
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,290
Int. C1.5 B65H 3/06
U.S. CI. 271—10 18 Oaims
1. A sheet feeding device comprising:
a casette for holding a stack of sheets;
feeding means for longitudinally advancing from the cassette
the uppermost sheet of the stack in pressing contact with
the sheet at approximately its medial longitudinal axis;
separating pawl members for separating the uppermost sheet
from the other sheets by engaging the uppermost sheet at
its opposite leading corners; and
pressure means for pressing the uppermost sheet at its oppo-
site side portions and being retracuble, at least in part
independently of any moement of said pawl members
from the pressing position in response to the resilient force
of the uppermost sheet when the uppermost sheet is bent
by its advance in engagement with the separating pawl
members;
whereby the sheet is properly discharged regardless of the
size or thickness or resiliency of the sheet
4,395,035
AIR SHINGLER
Ronald E. Hunt, Georgetown, Tex., assignor to International
Business Machines Corporation, Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 219,624
Int. 0.3 B65H 3/14
U.S. O. 271—97 * ^**™*
7. Device for shingling sheets in seriatim from the top of a
stack comprising in combination:
shingling-type sheet separating means operable to contact
the topmost sheet of said stack, said separating means
being rotatable in a plane generally parallel to the topmost
sheet, and including means to apply a force to the topmost
sheet at the center of rotation of said separating means;
variable-force generating means associated with sheet sepa-
rating means and operable to apply a variable force with
which said sheet separating means engages said stack;
variable-velocity rotary means operable to rotate said sheet
separating means;
sensor means operable to sense a sheet which has been shin-
gled from said stack; and
controller means responsive to said sensor means and opera-
ble to simultaneously adjust the force applied by the force
generating means and the rotational velocity of the sepa-
rating means.
1. A method of separating sheets in a stack for feeding seria-
tim to an operating station including the steps of:
(1) downwardly directing a fluid jet to the topmost sheet
such that the jet includes a force component normal to the
topmost sheet; and
(2) moving the jet in the feed direction whereby uppermost
sheets are shingled.
1400
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^95,036
SHEET FEEDER WITH STACK-HOLDING TRAY
HAVING FLEXIBLE-BAND-COUPLED GUIDE
ELEMENTS
Carl A. Bergman, South Dartmouth; Roy L. Thomas, New Bed-
ford, and Richard A. Bourbeau, North Dartmouth, all of
Mass., assignors to Standard Duplicating Machines Corpora-
tion, New Bedford, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 204,559, Nov. 6, 1980, abandoned, which is
a continuation of Ser. No. 33,740, Apr. 26, 1979, abandoned.
This application Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,779
Int. a.3 B65H 1/04
U,S. a. 271—171 5 Claims
characterised by: the stacking rake comprising a plurality of
laterally spaced and longitudinally oriented prongs (38) and
the clamping plate defining, on a clamping side thereof, a
plurality of laterally spaced and longitudinally oriented reces-
ses (40) located in a working region of the stacking rake prongs
and cooperable therewith to grippingly engage textile fabrics,
the width of said recesses corresponding at least to the cross-
sectional width of said prongs.
1. Apparatus for holding a stack of sheets for entry into a
sheet feeder, comprising:
a tray for veticaliy supporting said stack,
left and right stack guide elements moveable toward and
away from the lateral edges of said stack for centering said
stack in said tray,
extensions of said stack guide elements that extend below
said tray,
a flexible band formed in a loop,
said band being attached at a first location to a first of said
extensions and a second location to the second of said
extensions, said second location being about halfway
around said loop from said first location, such that said
stack guide elements move inward and outward later-
ally in unison,
band guide elements at the lateral edges of and below said
tray,
said band guide elements having slot means for vertically
restraining said band, and
band-bending means for bending said band during inward
movement of said stack guide elements so that when said
movement stops the band tends to move said stack guide
elements outwardly as it assumes an equilibrium position,
thereby preventing overtightening of said stack guide
elements against said stack.
4,395,037
APPARATUS FOR STACKING TEXTILE FABRIC
SHEETS ON TOP OF ONE ANOTHER
Rolf Heine, Rinteln, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to Herbert
Kannegiesser GmbH & Co., VIotho, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,494
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 16,
1980, 3022619
Int. a.3 B65H 29/70
MS. CI. 271—188 5 Qaims
1. Stacking apparatus for stacking sheet-like textile fabrics or
the like on top of one another as they exit devices for process-
ing textile fabrics in the manufacture of articles of outer cloth-
ing on a feed mechanism (12), which apparatus includes a
stacking table (19) mounted to be movable vertically, a mov-
able clamping plate (20) mounted to be pressed towards the
stacking table, and a stacking rake (21) disposed between the
stacking table and the clamping plate and movable forwards
and backwards in the conveying direction of the feed mecha-
nism and onto which the textile fabrics are conveyed by the
feed mechanism, in order to be deposited on the stacking table.
4,395,038
TELESCOPING AIR JETS FOR PILING
Donald C. Fitzpatrick, Chatham, N.Y.; Gerald A. Guild, Dalton,
and Arthur T. Karis, Lenox, both of Mass., assignors to Beloit
Corporation, Beloit, Wis.
Continuation of Ser. No. 113,722, Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,736
Int. C1.3 B65H 29/24
U.S. a. 271—195 13 Qaims
1. A method of handling sheets to be stacked in a pile against
a backstop, comprising:
conveying sheets seriatim upstream of said pile in a direction
towards said backstop,
continuously issuing pressurized air in a generally downward
and lateral direction in the direction of conveyance of said
sheets from means mounted directly overlying said pile
directing lift air against the undersurface of each successive
sheet at a point upstream of said pile as the sheet is being
conveyed toward said pile, and
transporting each successive sheet over said pile into jogging
relationship with said backstop and depositing the sheet onto
said pile with combined lift and transport forces effected by
the pressurized air and lift air.
4,395,039
METHOD OF EXEROSING
Robert T. Kaiser, South Jordan, Utah, assignor to Kaiser-
Farmer Development Corp., Utah
FUed May 26, 1981, Ser. No. 267,382
Int. C1.3 A61H 1/02; A63B 21/02. 21/32
U.S. a. 272—126 17 Claims
1. A method of exercise specifically adapted for indepen-
dent, individual use by a patient for rehabilitation of the pa-
tient's injured shoulder or arm using the patient's non-injured
arm as an actuating force, the method comprising the steps of:
a. grasping with the non-injured arm of the patient, an elon-
gated rigid member, said rigid member having a free end
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1401
with an attached exercise gripping means coupled thereto by
an elastic connecting means;
b. grasping the exercise gripping means with the hand of the
injured arm or shoulder of the same patient while maintain-
ing the injured arm in a relaxed condition;
c. moving the free end of the elongated rigid member with a
non-injured arm to rotate the injured arm and shoulder to a
comfortable extreme position in preparation for exercise;
435,041
BALL TRANSFER AND CAPTURE GAME AND METHOD
Adolph E. Goldfarb, 4614 Monarca Dr., Tarzana, Calif. 91356,
and Emil H. Von Winckelmann, Van Nuys, Calif., assignors to
Adolph E. Goldfarb, Northridge, Calif.
Filed Feb. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 233,463
Int. CIJ A63F 7/00
U.S. a. 273—119 A 22 Qaims
\ JO ?
'-xi^^/
d. reciprocating the free end of the rigid member in a desired
exercise path to apply gentle tension through the elastic
connecting means to reciprocate the patient's injured arm or
shoulder; and
e. repeating steps c and d of the foregoing sequence while
gradually increasing the extent of injured arm movement to
greater extremities.
** .— L . 1 ./ •'
4,395,040
ADJUSTABLE BASKETBALL GOAL
David White, 119 S. Main St., Fayette, Iowa 52142
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,441
Int. Q.3 A63B 63/08
U.S. Q. 273—1.5 R 2 Qaims
1. An adjustable support for basketball backboards and goals
and the like, said support comprising a rear vertical support, a
front vertical support spaced forwardly from the rear vertical
support, upper and lower horizontal supports pivotally con-
nected to the front and rear supports so as to form a parallelo-
gram arrangement, tightening means extending between the
rear vertical support and the front vertical support to maintain
the rigidity of the structure as its pivotal connections wear
through normal use, a main support arm fixed to the rear
vertical support and extending forwardly therefrom, adjust-
able means having its upper end pivotally connected to the
outer end of the main support arm and having its lower portion
pivotally connected to the lower horizontal supports so as to
provide for raising and lowering of the front vertical supports,
backboard mounting means affixed to the front vertical sup-
port, and goal mounting means on the lower end of the front
vertical support providing for direct fastening to said support
of the goal and the backboard.
('
1. A competitive multi-player game-playing apparatus, com-
prising:
a frame means;
a plurality of sets of balls, each set distinctively marked for
association with each player;
at least three wheels, mounted in the frame means such that
each wheel is adjacent to at least one other wheel and is
rotatable about a vertical axis, including at least one wheel
associated with each player, and at least one wheel inter-
mediate the player-associated wheels, each wheel includ-
ing a plurality of peripheral pockets, each proportioned
and arranged so as to receive and carry a ball and permit
a ball to pass outwardly;
motor means mounted in the frame means for effecting
simultaneous rotation of all of said wheels, each at a rate of
rotation which generates sufficient centrifugal force such
that the balls tend to move out of the pockets, and wherein
the rates of rotation of the wheels are syncronized and the
respective sizes of the wheels, and the proportions and
arrangements of the pockets are designed such that a
space is formed between pockets m adjacent rotating
wheels through which a ball tend to transfer;
means on the frame means for confining the balls in the
pockets in the rotating wheels other than at the transfer
spaces, so that a ball will move through a path about the
periphery of the rotating wheel between transfer spaces;
and
means mounted in the frame means for controlling transfer
of balls through at least one transfer space, said control
means being operable by each player.
20. A method of moving a plurality of balls unidirectionally
along a figure eight route having a first circular path, a second
circular path and a junction therebetween, including the steps
of:
automatically by use of a motor and continuously directing
certain Of said balls in a linear sequence around the first
path one at a time past the junction;
automatically by use of a motor and simultaneously and
continuously directing certain others of the said balls in a
linear sequence around the second path one at a time past
the junction;
transferring to a different path automatically any ball passing
the junction when another ball is not already occupymg
the different path at the junction; and
selectively blocking the junction point during different
spaced time periods to prevent any ball from going
through said junction to a different path.
1402
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^95,042
GAME APPARATUS
James W. Boswell, 2401 Rockmart Hwy., Apt. 7A, Rome, Ga.
30161
Filed Mar. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 356,776
Int. a.3 A63B 69/ i6
U.S. a. 273—176 B 10 Qaims
having marked spaced defining a path,
means associated with said spaces for identifying a value
associated therewith,
first chance means operable by the players for determining
the number of spaced to be traversed,
a plurality of pieces representing money, a plurality of said
money pieces being allocated to each player before the
game commences,
means for providing penalties to a player and rewards to a
player according to his position on said playing path, and
second chance means selectively operable by the players of
the game, said second chance means comprising an up-
standing member defining a plurality of generally elon-
1. A game apparatus of diminutive size used to improve a
player's golf stroke in which a golf ball is hit to the game
apparatus from a location spaced from the game apparatus,
comprising an upright structural framework having a front,
back and two sides, said framework having a plurality of levels
one atop the other, each level having a floor to separate it from
the adjacent levels, the floor extending from the front to the
rear of the game apparatus, each level having a vertically
disposed flexible means spaced rearwardly from the front edge
of the floor, a plurality of apertures within the flexible means,
board means located rearwardly of the flexible means in con-
junction with each level to which there is attached on the
rearwardly side thereof a net means, said board means includ-
ing a plurality of apertures juxtaposed with the net means to
thereby provide a passage through the board means into the
net means, whereby the player's properly stoked golf ball
penetrates a selected aperture of the flexible means and a se-
lected aligned aperture in the board means to lodge in the net
means.
4^95,043
GAME CHIP
Frank Gargione, Absecon Highlands, N.J., assignor to Keystone
Bingo Products, Inc., Levittown, Pa.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,419
Int. a.' G09F 3/lH: A63F 3 /OS
U.S. a. 273—239 8 Qaims
/4>
1. A game chip comprising a circular disk of translucent or
transparent material, a ring surrounding said disk with discrete
flanges on the ring overlying and contacting the outer periph-
ery of the opposite side faces of said disk, said ring being a
smooth magnetizable sheet material free from burrs and wrin-
kles, said sheet material being substantially thinner than the
thickness of said disk, at least one of said flanges being inclined
inwardly whereby the thickest portion of the chip is across the
ring at the outer peripheral surface of the disk, the inner pe-
riphery of said ring being concave, and a gap between the
outer periphery of said disk and the inner periphery of said
ring.
4^95,044
SPACE BOARD GAME APPARATUS
Carl J. Hula, 9021 Forest Dr., Hickory Hills, III. 60457
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 278,341
Int. a? A63F 3/00
U.S. a. 273—253 9 Gaims
1. A board game apparatus comprising a playing board
gated vertical apertures, and means receivable within said
apertures for selectively plugging and closing the bottom
of at least one of said apertures and inseri means receiv-
able in said apertures and being adapted to pass through
unplugged ones of said apertures,
whereby during play a player is required to place one of said
insert means into one of said apertures after at least one of
said apertures has been closed by another player with said
plug means, said player continuing in said game if said
insert means falls completely through an unplugged one of
said apertures, and said player being penalized if said
insert means remains in a plugged one of the apertures.
4,395,045
TELEVISION PRECISION TARGET SHOOTING
APPARATUS AND METHOD
Ralph H. Baer, Manchester, N.H., assignor to Sanders Associ-
ates, Inc., Nashua, N.H.
Filed Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,530
Int. a.' A63F 9/22
U.S. a. 273—312 13 Claims
1. Apparatus for shooting at targets displayed on the screen
of a raster scan display, comprising:
a simulated weapon having means for sensing at a distance
brightened raster scan segments on the screen of a raster
scan display and trigger means; and
means responsive to a trigger pull for generating a signal to
brighten the raster to thereby permit said simulated
weapon to sense brightened raster scan segments.
July 26, 198!
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1403
9. A method ofshooting at targets displayed on the screen of containing a materials processing rotor and the material is
a raster scan display with a simulated weapon having a trigger
and electro-optical sensing means, comprising the steps of:
therein processed and subsequently discharged therefrom at
substantially atmospheric pressure, said seal assembly compris-
ing,
coNTmudi
MO
LOOK
SCCTION
t
—
1 1
X-.4 1
1
CHMICTC*
VtOCOnSPLAT
QC NCR ATOM
51
*
1 1,
<«
^
1
aiming at the displayed target;
pulling the trigger;
brightening the display screen; and
sensing short segments of the brightened display raster.
IL
4,395,046
lAND THROWN GAME DISC
Stavros Cosmopulos, 8 Bridge St., Norwell, Mass. 02061
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,304
Int. a.3 A63B 65/10
U.S. a. 273—424 3 Qaims
26
1. A game disc, comprising:
(a) a generally circular body of monolithic construction
formed with top and bottom faces;
(b) at least one of said faces being in the form of an auger
flight of up to 360°;
(c) said auger flight defining an obtuse angle of about 160°;
(d) said generally circular body of monolithic construction
formed with at least one notch in the peripheral edge
thereof;
(e) said game disc being of a solid water bouyant material of
composite construction comprising a hard, heavy center
portion and a lighter resilient outer portion.
a cylindrical seal stator carried on said housing and through
which the shaft of said rotor extends,
a cylindrical seal impeller carried on said shaft within said
seal stator, said cylindrical seal impeller comprised of an
initial body portion adjacent fluid restraining means, and a
main body portion terminating in direct proximity with
the interior of said machine housing, said fluid restraining
means extending between said housing and said rotor shaft
at a location outboard of said seal impeller, and said fuid
zzzs^z^s?^^
<^5^
restraining means comprised of a ring member extending
to within close proximity of said rotor shaft, but spaced
therefrom,
a plurality of elongated, oblique, impeller vanes forming the
perimeter of said seal impeller, said impeller vanes on said
main body portion located coaxial with and radially out-
ward of the impeller vanes on said initial body portions;
and
fluid injection means extending from the exterior of said
machine housing to a position forward of said fluid re-
straining means and aft of the inboard extremity of said
seal impeller.
4,395,048
PUMP SAFETY DEVICE i
Francis Timmermans, Jeumont, and Jean Vandervorst, Ferriere
la Grande, both of France, assignors to Jeumont-Schneider,
Puteaux, France
per No. PCT/FR81/00006, § 371 Date Sep. 24, 1981, § 102(c)
Date Sep. 24, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02184, PCT Pub.
Date Aug. 6, 1981
per Filed Jan. 22. 1981, Ser. No. 306,615
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 24, 1980, 80 01517
Int. a.3 F16J 15/3%
U.S. a. 277—65 10 Claims
4 395 047
SHAFT SEAL WITH SEAL IMPELLER FOR MATERIALS
PROCESSING MACHINERY
William F. Lahner, III, Lewisburg, Pa., assignor to Koppers
Company, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Feb. 10, 1982, Ser. No. 347,645
Int. Q\} F16J 15/42
U.S. a. 277—3 3 Claims
1. A shaft seal assembly for materials processing machinery
of a type in which the material is fed into a machine housing
1. A pump having a casing, a pump shaft rouubly mounted
1404
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
within said casing, a high pressure fluid chamber, a low pres-
sure fluid chamber, and a dynamic gasket mounted in said
casing and contacting said shaft for separating said high pres-
sure chamber from said low pressure chamber and a safety
device, comprising:
a compressible safety gasket;
a cylindrical piston coaxially surrounding said shaft and
having a flrst sealing surface facing a second sealing sur-
face on said shaft with said safety gasket received therebe-
tween, said first sealing surface being spaced from said
second sealing surface by an amount such that said safety
gasket is in an uncompressed state, said cylindrical piston
being mounted in a chamber formed in said casing for
movement axially of said shaft; and
means for moving said cylindrical piston axially of said shaft
to compress said safety gasket between said flrst and sec-
ond sealing surfaces in the event of a rupture of said dy-
namic gasket, whereby, while said dynamic gasket is
operative, said safety gasket is not used, but when said
dynamic gasket ruptures and high pressure fluid enters
said low pressure chamber, said safety gasket is com-
pressed to prevent leakage of fluid from said low pressure
chamber.
4,395,049
METALLIC SEALING DEVICE FOR A HIGH-VACUUM
CLOSURE
Siegfried Schertler, Haag, Switzerland, assignor to Vat Aktien-
gesellschaft Fiir Vakuum-Apparate-Technik, Haag, Switzer-
land
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,404
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1979, 2951150
Int. a.^F16L/ 7/00
U.S. CI. 277—236 5 Claims
I 200
1. Metallic sealing device for a high-vacuum closure where
the sealing device is rejjeatedly opened and closed, such as a
high-vacuum valve, comprising a first sealing surface formed
as a surface of revolution, a second sealing surface formed as a
surface of revolution, said first and second sealing surfaces
being coaxial, said sealing surfaces being repeatedly adjustable
relative to one another in the axial direction for movement
between an open position and a closed position, a metallic
sealing ring located between said first and second sealing sur-
faces, said sealing ring having a cross-sectional configuration
capable of rolling on said sealing surfaces when said first and
second sealing surfaces are moved relative to one another
between the open and closed positions, said sealing ring con-
sists of a substantially non-ductile material, in the closed posi-
tion of the sealing device the sealing forces act on said first and
second sealing surfaces and on said sealing ring in the range of
exclusively elastic deformation, said sealing ring being fixed to
one of said first and second sealing surfaces by shrinking said
sealing ring theron, the generating angle of said first and sec-
ond sealing surfaces in the region of contact with said sealing
ring is smaller than the friction angle, and at least the surfaces
of said sealing ring in contact with said first and second sealing
surface have a rounded convex configuration.
4,395,050
SEALING ARRANGEMENT SPEOnCALLY FOR SHUT
OFF DEVICES
Peter Wirz, Unterkulm, Switzerland, assignor to Klinger AG,
Zug, Switzerland
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,274
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1980, 3019516
Int. a.3 F16K 25/00
U.S. a. 277—236 9 Oaims
1. In a sealing arrangement for a valve having a valve seat
member and a cooperating valve closure member, a thin-
walled elastically deformable member carried by one of said
valve members and which is engageable with the other of said
valve members substantially in line contact therewith, and
means for moving one of said valve members laterally rela-
tively to the other of said valve members to seat said thin-
walled elastically deformable member on the other of said
valve members, the improvement comprising:
each of said thin-walled elastically deformable member and
said other valve member being comprised of a metal body of
a hardness in excess of 30 HRC (298 HV);
a continuous coating on top of one of the metal bodies and
being of a soft, ductile metal of a hardness appreciably less
than the hardness of said metal body and located at least at
the area of said line contact and overlying thereat the surface
of said metal body completely filling any surface, discontinu-
ities, micropores and interstices;
said soft metal coating being shearing by lateral movement of
said valve and deformable members relatively to each other
by abrasive action of the hard metal surface onto the soft
metal surface until establishment of direct contact between
the surface of the hard metal body without coating and the
exposed hard metal areas of the metal body provided with
the coating, the surface discontinuities, micropores and
interstices of later metal body remaining filled by said soft
metal such that the mechanical closure forces are carried
and transmitted by the exposed hard metal body areas only,
and said no load carrying surface discontinuities, micropores
and interstices remain filled by said soft metal to ensure a
perfect seal.
4,395,051
QUICK-CHANGE HOLDER
Takashi Tonomura, Toyama, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kai-
sha Fiyikoshi, Toyama, Japan
FUed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,417
Oaims priority, application Japan, Feb. 21, 1980, 55-20381[U]
Int. a.' B23B 31/22
U.S. a. 279—75 3 Claims
1. A quick-change holder comprising:
a cylindrical body of sleeved shape having one end fixed to
the spindle of a machine tool and formed with both a
plurality of radial through-holes, which are arranged in a
circumferential direction thereon, and a center bore
which extends in the axial direction thereof;
a plurality of balls loosely fitted in said radial through-holes,
respectively, and having a larger diameter than the radial
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1405
thickness of said cylindrical body at the circumferential
portion where said radial through-holes are arranged;
a nut insertable into the center bore of said cylindrical body
at the other end thereof opposite to said spindle for attach-
• ment of an adaptor coupled in a driving power transmit-
ting relationship to said spindle, said nut having its outer
circumference formed with a circumferential groove,
with and from which said balls can engage and disengage,
so that said balls are brought into engagement with said
circumferential groove when said nut is inserted into said
circumferential body; and
a sleeve mounted on said cylindrical body, said sleeve en-
closing said cylindrical body, being movable in the axial
direction and being urged uni-directionally in the axial
direction by means of a spring, said sleeve having its inner
circumference engageable with said balls and composed
of portions having larger and smaller diameters, said
sleeve being axially moved against the action of said
spring so that said balls can be moved outwardly in the
radial direction from the smaller diameter portion to the
larger diameter portion of said inner circumference
thereby bringing said balls into and out of free engage-
i e 20 7 22 17 9 5
ment with said circumferential groove whereby said nut
can be mounted on and demounted from said cylindrical
body,
wherein the improvement resides in that the portion of said
cylindrical body which merges into said radial through-
holes and which is located at the side of said spindle is
formed with a conical inner circumference which di-
verges to the outside; and in that a spring having free wire
ends with a gap therebetween so as to be compressible
inwardly in the radial direction and brought into abutment
engagement with the conical inner circumference of said
cylindrical body is in contact with said conical inner
circumference, so that said second-named spring made
engageable with said conical inner circumference is
brought into abutment engagement, when said nut is not
inserted, with those portions of said balls, which protrude
inwardly from said radial through-holes, to push said balls
outwardly in the radial direction and is thrusted, when
said nut is inserted, by the leading end of said nut facing
the spindle so that it is released from engagement with said
balls until it is positioned on the inner conical circumfer-
ence of said cylindrical body.
' ' 4,395,052
URANIUM SLURRY HAULING SYSTEM
Curtis W. Rash, Corpus Christi, Tex., assignor to Proco, Inc.,
Corpus Christi, Tex.
FUed Apr. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 136,487
Int. a.5 B60P i/22 ..
U.S. CI. 280— S C * 13 Qaims
1. A trailer for hauling liquid uranium slurry, comprising
a frame having a plurality of longitudinally extending frame
members, a plurality of transverse frame members rigid
with the longitudinally extending frame members, wheels
at one end of the frame defining a path of trailer move-
ment generally parallel with the longitudinal frame mem-
ber and a towing tongue at the other frame end for con-
nection to a towing vehicle;
a generally cylindrical liquid slurry tank having a horizontal
cylindrical axis generally parallel to the direction of travel
and including at least one depending saddle mounted in
direct load supporting relation with one of the transverse
frame members;
a metal framework rigid with the trailer frame members for
protecting the tank during trailer rollover, the framework
comprising upstanding members extending to adjacent the
height of the tank and horizontal members extending to
adjacent the length of the tank; and
means confining the saddle and allowing racking movement
of the frame independent of the tank, comprising
means constraining the saddle against movement parallel to
the direction of travel; and
means allowing independent limited upward vertical move-
ment of the saddle relative to the frame.
4,395,053
ELECTRIC CORD SUPPORT BRACKET ASStlMBLY FOR
LAWNMOWERS AND THE LIKE
Paul P. Kalfas, 2735 S. Christiana Ave., Chicago, III. 60623
Filed Apr. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 256,916
Int. a.3 B62B 11/00
U.S. a. 280— 47.34 5 Oaims
E^^'
1. A bracket assembly for supporting the electric pKJwer
cord of a wheeled electric implement having a push handle of
tubular construction, comprising a clamp having an opening
for receiving a tubular portion of said handle and having screw
fasteners for securing said clamp in place; a generally rigid and
vertically-extending rod having a lower end secured to said
clamp and a length sufficient to locate the upper end thereof at
least as high as the shoulder of a user holding said push handle
in normal operation of said implement; and guide means at the
upper end of said rod for supporting and guiding the power
cord of said implement upwardly over a user's shoulder, said
clamp being generally C-shaped and having a pair of parallel
arms joined by an integral connecting portion; said arms being
spaced apart to receive said tubular portion of said handle
therebetween; said arms being provided with a pair of aligned
openings adjacent the free ends thereof for receiving the lower
end portion of said rod; said screw fasteners being threadedly
mounted upon said clamp to engage said tubular portion of said
handle and to urge the same into tight locking engagement
with said clamp and the portion of said rod between said arms
when said fasteners are tightened, said portion of said rod
between said arms being provided with a recess facing towards
said connecting portion of said clamp and adapted to receive
an arcuate portion of said tubular portions of said handle,
whereby, upon tightening of said fasteners against said tubular
1406
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
portion of said handle, said rod is locked against both axial and the rear of the heel of the ski boot wherein, during release, the
rotational movement relative to said clamp. jaw member is moved, the improvement comprising means for
435,054
' SKI BRAKE
Heinz Wittmann, Vienna, Austria, assignor to TMC Corpora-
tion, Baar, Switzerland
Continuation of Ser. No. 46,553, Jun. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jun. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 272,620
Oaims priority, application Austria, Jun. 22, 1978, 4533/78
Int. C1.3 A63C 7/10
U.S. a. 280—605 10 Qaims
--^56
7a>«a>»»^« 9,
1. A ski brake for use on a ski, comprising:
a base plate adapted to be mounted on said ski;
bearing means on said base plate;
a pair of laterally spaced brake arms pivotally and laterally
slidably mounted on said bearing means, each of said
brake arms having a brake leg portion and a pedal portion,
said brake arms each being pivotal between (1) a braking
position wherein said brake leg portions project beneath
the running surface of said ski and said pedal portion
extends upwardly inclined to the upper surface of said ski
and (2) a retracted position wherein said brake leg por-
tions and said pedal portion extend above said upper
surface of said ski;
a control part and pivotal securement means pivotally secur-
ing said control part to said pedal portions of each of said
brake arms, said pivotal securement means effecting, upon
a pivotal movement of said control part relative to said
pedal portions between an initial position wherein said
brake arms are positioned in their laterally outermost
position and a final position wherein said brake arms are
positioned in their laterally innermost position, a laterally
inward movement of said brake arms, said control part
including a generally inverted U-shaped member having a
bight portion with an upwardly facing surface and a pair
of downwardly extending support legs at the lateral edges
of said bight portion, said support legs being formed at a
right angle to said bight portion and opening at a diverg-
ing angle away from the free ends of said brake leg por-
tions, said pivotal securement means effecting said pivotal
coupling about an axis that is normal to the plane of said
support legs; and
resilient means effecting an erection of said brake arms to
said braking position and a simultaneous urging of said
control part to said initial position thereof to urge said
brake arms to their said initial position thereof.
4,395,055
SKI RELEASE SIDE CLAMPING BINDING WITH
HINGED JAW MEMBERS
Richard G. Spademan, 1421 Old County Rd., Belmont, Calif.
94002
FUed Mar. 20, 1978, Ser. No. 890,574
Int a.3 A63C 9/0%
MS. a. 280—624 7 Claims
1. In a ski release binding comprising at least one movable
jaw member and means for releasably clamping a ski boot to a
ski with the jaw member rearward of the toe and forward of
allowing the jaw member to move in a second direction after
the jaw member is moved a predetermined distance in a first
direction.
4,395,056
NOTE BOOKLET, PROVIDED WITH A FOLDABLE
COVER, EFFECnVE TO ACT AS A SHEET AND PEN
HOLDER
Enrico Sferragatta, Monza, Italy, assignor to Mille Note System
Sj'.I., Monza, Italy
Filed Jul. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 282,519
Qaims priority, appUcation Italy, Oct. 16, 1980, 23113/80[U]
Int. a.3 B42D i/00; B65D S/52
U.S. a. 281—31 4 Qaims
1. A note booklet, which comprises a plurality of superim-
posed note sheets secured in a pad to the back of a cover
member, said cover member having a first plane section con-
nected to said back along a first fold line, a second plane sec-
tion connected to said first plane section along a second fold
line, a third plane section connected to said second plane sec-
tion along a third fold line, and a flap connected to said second
plane section to define therewith a pocket; said cover member
being foldable into a configuration whereby said first plane
section extends backwards from said pad of note sheets to
position said second plane section and flap behind said note
sheets with said flap and pocket exposed behind the note
sheets, and with said third plane section extending in underly-
ing relation to the bottom of said note sheets pad.
4,395,057
BOOK HOLDER
John W. Young, 260 Overlook Dr., Lancaster, Ohio 43130
FUed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,609
Int C\? B42D 9/00, 3/16
UJS. a. 281—42 8 Claims
1. A holder for a book which has opposing covers attached
at opposite sides to a book spine, each cover having in it read-
ing position a top and a bottom edge, the holder comprising:
(a) a handle means constructed to contact the cover of the
July 26, 198i
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1407
book on the spine of the book and having a digit receiving
opening;
(b) a pair of elastic bands connected to the handle means,
each band having attachment means at each end con-
structed to attach over the opposite top and bottom edges
of a different one of said book covers the combined length
gage opposite faces of the magazine adjacent the spinal portion
thereof to enhance the gripping action of the clip by resisting
end-wise as well as rotational displacement of the clip; said
hook part having an open-sided recess opening in a depthwise
direction, whereby when two clips are engaged at opposite
ends of the spinal portion of a magazine, the hook part on each
clip is engageable over a respective side rail of the suspension
filing system with said rail received in the recess and said
fingers being disposed horizontally, whereby the magazine and
associated clips are removably suspended from the two side
rails of the suspension filing system.
4,395,059
FOLDABLE POSTING BOARD ASSEMBLY
Thomas H. Russell, III, 14 Sulgrave Rd., West Hartford, Conn.
06107
Filed Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,306
Int. a.3 B42F U/00
U.S. a. 282—29 B 27 Qaims
of each band and its attachment means being less than the
distance between the top and bottom edges of said covers
when said connection means are detached from the covers
and said elastic bands are relaxed and being constructed to
attach to the book by elastic tension of the bands when the
attachment means fit over the opposite top and bottom
edges of the book covers.
' ' 4,395,058
CLIP FOR SUSPENSION nLING
Christopher E. Terrell, London, England, assignor to W. F.
Industries, Inc., Wheeling, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 955,655, Oct. 30, 1978,
abandoned. This application Mar. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 244,709
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 3, 1977,
45845/77
Int. Q.3 B42D 77/00; B42F 15/00
U.S. Q. 281—46 3 Qaims
13w?1
^^^^3|
11"'^
-J
1. A clip for removably engaging the side rail of a suspension
filing system for the filing of magazines, journals and the like,
comprising a generally flat, one piece, resilient plastic member
having a bifurcate part and a hook part, said member having a
length and depth both substantially greater than its thickness,
the bifurcate part having two fingers extending in a direction
lengthwise of said member away from the hook part and being
displaced from one another in a direction depthwise of said
member, said fingers being engageable respectively inside and
outside the spinal portion of a magazine for gripping said spinal
portion therebetween, one of said fingers having at least one
resiliently deflectable arcuate prong having a free end and a
convex portion projecting therefrom for engaging the inside
spinal portion of a magazine; the other of said fingers having at
least two longitudinally spaced, alternately arranged projec-
tions on opposite sides of an edge of said other finger facing
said one finger, the space between successive projections form-
ing a notch aligned with the convex portion of said prong,
whereby the prongs bias the inside spinal portion of the maga-
zine to thereby press the outside spinal portion of the magazine
into the notch while the alternately arranged projections en-
1. A foldable posting board assembly comprising a foldable
posting board and at least one record sheet, said foldable post-
ing board having at least two generally rectangular panels and
means for hingedly connecting said panels together in foldable
relation to each other about a hinge line and defining a column
of mounting elements located along a line substantially coinci-
dent with said hinge line to hold a portion of said one record
sheet in a predetermined position relative to said posting board,
said posting board being movable between an opened position
wherein said panels are disposed within a generally common
plane and a closed position wherein said panels are in generally
overlying relation relative to each other, said mounting ele-
ments projecting beyond a surface of said panels when said
posting board is in its opened position, said one record sheet
having a column of apertures therethrough spaced inwardly
from the edges thereof and a fold line extending thereacross in
generally bisecting relation to said apertures and dividing said
record sheet into separate sections, said mounting elements
projecting bodily through said apertures and beyond said one
record sheet when said posting board is in its open position and
said one record sheet is unfolded along said fold line, said
apertures when said record sheet is unfolded along said fold
line serving to each entirely surround a respective one of said
mounting elements to locate said record sheet relative to said
mounting elements, said one record sheet being foldable along
said fold line with said mounting elements projecting there-
through and to a position wherein one of said sections overlies
another of said sections, and said apertures when said record
sheet is folded along said fold line serving to each partially
surround a respective one of said moilnting elements to locate
said record sheet relative to said mounting elements.
4,395,060
PORTABLE, REUSABLE PIPE COUPLING
Edward L. Lapham, 13219 Pine Dr., Cypress, Tex. 77429
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,232
Int. Q.' F16L ii/OO
U.S. Q. 285—39 » d**""
1. A portable, reusable coupling for connecting cylindrical
conduit, said coupling comprising:
(a) an elongated tubular coupling body defining a generally
1408
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
cylindrical internal passage of sufficient dimension to re-
ceive end portions conduit therein, said coupling body being
formed to define internal shoulder means at each extremity
thereof, said coupling body also having internal body
threads at each extremity thereof;
(b) annular metal seal support ring means being provided
within each extremity of said coupling body and having
abutting relation with said internal shoulder means;
(c) seal retainer means being provided at each extremity of said
coupling, each of said seal retainer means defining annular
externally threaded connection rim means adapted to be
received in connected adjustable relation by said internal
body threads, said seal retainer means cooperating with said
annular seal support ring means to define a variable volume
internal seal chamber having said seal support ring means as
a circular wall thereof and to define an annular variable
volume internal seal locking groove, said seal retainer means
further defining a curved concave circular seal support
surface extending to the inner periphery of said seal retainer
means and forming a seal supporting wall of said seal cham-
ber; and
34 56 ?6 54
(d) annular resilient seal means being disposed within said
internal seal chamber and defining a deformable annular
sealing portion having a generally cylindrical inner sealing
periphery for sealing engagement with end portions of con-
duit, said resilient seal means being of sufficient internal
dimension to receive end portions of conduit therein, upon
linear movement of said seal retainer means to reduce the
volume of said seal chamber said sealing portion of said seal
means being mechanically deformed thus forcing the inner
peripheral sealing portion thereof into sealing engagement
with end portions of conduit, said seal means defining a
convex curved circular surface having mating engagement
with said curved concave circular support surface of said
seal retainer means, said seal means further defining a ra-
dailly outwardly extending circular locking flange being
received within said seal locking groove, upon said linear
movement of said seal retainer means said locking flange of
said seal means being mechanically locked within said seal
locking groove.
outer housing and having a neck portion protruding from
said outer housing;
bearing means for rotatably mounting said outer housing
about said inner shaft; and
4^95,061
SWIVEL UNIT
Lawrence E. Helzer, Buena Park, Calif., assignor to Hugbes
Tool Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,821
Int. a.3 F16L 27/00. 17/02, 21/00
U.S. a. 285—281 5 Qaims
1. A swivel unit for an inflatable packer drill stem test tool
assembly, comprising:
an outer housing having a lower end adapted for connection
to said drill stem test tool and having an upper end;
an inner shaft having a base portion received within said
.)'^^
wherein said outer housing has a downwardly facing shoul-
der formed in the exterior surface thereof for supporting
said assembly.
4,395,062
COVER HOLD DOWN MECHANISM
Erwin FGeppert, Novi, Mich., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Wash-
ington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 2, 1980, Ser. No. 193,225
Int. C\? E05C 5/04
U.S. a. 292—64 1 Qaim
,-e7
a?'
St
-7=^
1. In combination, first and second members (16 and 10)
designed to be secured together, said first member having an
accessible face and an inaccessible face, said first member
having a triangular opening (26) extending between the two
faces, said second member having an opening (27) extending
therethrough; a connector device comprising a scew (24)
having an enlarged accessible head (30) and a threaded shank
extending through the opening in the second member toward
the first member, a nut (22) threaded on the shank, said nut
having a triangular perimetrical configuration that is slightly
smaller dimension than said triangular opening whereby the
nut can be extended through the triangular opening without
disconnecting the nut from the screw, said nut having a cut-
away area (20) whose length measured about the axis of the
screw is approximately sixty degrees, and a motion-limiting
member (18) extending from the second member into the cut-
away area of the nut so that after the nut has been passed
through the triangular opening in the first member the screw
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1409
can be turned to initially produce limited rotary movement of
the nut approximately sixty degrees into a position of axial
overlapment with the inaccessible surface of said first member,
said screw being further tumable to cause the nut to move
axially along the screw into tightened engagement with the
inaccessible face of said first member; said motion-limiting
member acting to prevent rotation of the nut while said nut is
undergoing said last-mentioned axial motion toward the inac-
cessible face of said first member.
4,395,063
SELF INTERLOCKING DEAD BOLT ASSEMBLY
Eric L. Bianco, 405 E. First Ave., Roselle, N.J. 07203
Filed May 12, 1980, Ser. No. 148,720
Int. a.3 E05B 9/02
U.S. CI. 292—150 22 Qaims
1. A self interlocking dead bolt assembly movable from an
unlocked position to a locked position and vice versa relative
a strike member comprising,
a. bolt guide means having a bore end to end therethrough,
and locking groove means inwardly of one end of said
bore,
b. an elongated dead bolt means slidably mounted in the bore
of the bolt guide means for movement from the unlocked
to the locked position and vice versa,
c. said dead bolt means having a strike end and an elongated
chamber extending inwardly from the end remote from
the strike end to define an annular wall on said dead bolt
means, j
d. transverse passage means in said annular wall a predeter-
mined distance from the strike end of the dead bolt means,
sized ball means operatively associated with said trans-
verse passage means,
an actuating means for moving the dead bolt from the
unlocked to the locked position and vice versa,
said actuating means also connected for relative move-
ment with the dead bolt means to normally urge said sized
ball means to move through said transverse passage means
into engagement with said locking groove means to inter-
lock the dead bolt in the locked position, and
said ball members to move out of said locking groove and
to return through said transverse passage means when said
actuating means initiates movement of said dead bolt to
the unlocked position.
e.
a blocking lever adapted to block said bolt in a locked posi-
tion;
crankshaft means connected to said motor shaft;
first and second links respectively connecting said crank-
shaft means to said bolt and said blocking lever; and
means for rotating said electric motor shaft by half turn
intervals in a first direction;
whereby each half turn of said motor shaft alternately locks
and blocks said lock, and unlocks and unblocks said lock.
4,395,065
DOOR STOP MECHANISM
Ben L. Nelson, Rte. #1, Box 4995, Bonita Springs, Fla. 33923,
and Leonard L. Hayes, 1906 • 10th Ave., Lewiston, Id. 83501
Filed Aug. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 297,872
Int. a.3E05C77/itt 17/32
U.S. a. 292—339 9 Claims
4,395,064
ELECTRIC AUTOMOBILE TRUNK LOCK MECHANISM
Dominique Bellot, Rueil, and Michel Barre, Chaville, both of
France, assignors to Regie Nationale des Usines Renault,
Boulogne-Billancourt, France
Filed Apr. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 253,909
Qaims priority, application France, Apr. 14, 1980, 80 08259
Int. a.3 E05C 3/26
U.S. a. 292—201 6 Claims
1. An electric lock mechanism for the servo locking and
unlocking of a vehicle hatch lid, comprising a fixed catch
mounted on said hatch lid and a compact motor unit mounted
on the body of said vehicle, wherein said compact motor unit
comprises:
an electric motor having a shaft;
a rotary bo t engagable with said catch;
^/77i
1. A door stop mechanism comprising,
a lower rod segment having upper and lower ends,
a center rod segment having upper and lower ends, the
lower end of said center rod segment underlying the
upper end of said lower rod segment and being pivotally
secured thereto by a first pivot means,
an upper rod segment having upper and lower ends, the
lower end of said upper rod segment underlying the upper
end of said center rod segment and being pivoully se-
cured thereto by a second pivot means,
said first pivot means attached to the upper end of said lower
rod segment and receiving the lower end of said center
rod segment,
said second pivot means attached to the lower end of said
upper rod segment and receiving the upper end of said
center rod segment.
1410
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^5,066 4,395,068
GRAB STATIC LINE RETRIEVAL APPARATUS
Leendert van Huuksloot, Zevenbergschen Hoek, Netherlands, Gerald C. Sinunons, Bothell, and Noel E. Hilby, Maple VaUey,
assignor to Nemag B.V., Zlerikzee, Netherlands both of Wash., assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle,
Filed May 27, 1981, Ser. No. 267,660 Wash.
Claims priority, appUcation Netherlands, May 30, 1980, FUed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,025
8003176
U.S. a. 294—70
Int. a.3 B66C 1/14
Int. a.3 B66C 3/12
U.S. a. 294—78 R
5 Claims
1. A grab comprising a pair of buckets interconnected by
arms capable of pivoting movement relative to each other, the
free ends of said arms are provided with means for guiding
operating or closing ropes by which the buckets can be opened
and closed, said buckets have rear edges secured by means of
hoist ropes or the like to a cross-beam, to which said hoist
ropes are connected, characterized in that the arms are pro-
vided at some distance from the free ends with arcuate bridge
members forming arcuate elevations directed to one another,
and as the grab buckets are opened and closed the contact
point between said bridge members is displaced as said bridge
members and said arcuate elevations roll one over the other.
4,395,067
LIFTING ASSEMBLY
Peter D. L. Robin, Cheshire, England, assignor to Spanset Inter
A.G., Basel, Switzerland
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,446
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jun. 26, 1980,
8020924
Int. C\? B66C 1/18
MS. a. 294—74 10 Claims
9 Claims
1. Winch cable driven retrieval apparatus for retracting
static lines slidably mounted on a fixed anchor cable or the like,
comprising:
a retrieval member having an opening extending completely
therethrough of a diameter sufficient to insert an anchor
cable completely through said retrieval member, said
retrieval member further including a front end surface
adapted to confront at least one static line attachment
member slidably mounted on said anchor cable;
a pair of attachment members extending from oppositely
disposed side portions of said retrieval member, said at-
tachment members including spaced forward end portions
positioned on opposite sides of said anchor cable and
located along an imaginary line which passes through said
anchor cable;
coupling means joining a winch cable assembly with each
forward end portion for smoothly drawing said retrieval
member along said anchor cable toward a retracted posi-
tion responsive to selective retraction of said winch cable;
whereby said retrieval member contacts and slides said at
least one static line attachment member toward said re-
tracted position while inherently resisting the formation of
kinks in said anchor cable and keeping friction to a mini-
mum.
4,395,069
PINCERS-TYPE GRIPPER FOR SEIZING OBJECTS AND
GRIPPING HEAD EQUIPPED WITH SUCH GRIPPERS
Gerard Lebret, Dompierre sur Avre, France, assignor to E. P.
Remy et Cie., Dreux, France
FUed Aug. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 290,506
Qaims priority, application France, Sep. 30, 1980, 80 20941
Int. C\? B25J 15/00
U.S. a. 294— 87 J2 6 Claims
1. A lifting assembly, comprising: a cloverleaf lifting sling in
combination with a base of plastics sheet material, said sling
having a central portion and four loop portions forming a
cloverleaf configuration, said base serving to hold said central
portion to maintain the sling in its cloverleaf configuration, and
having peripheral sleeve means for storing said loop portions
of the sling.
1. A gripper for seizing elongated objects such as bottles, the
gripper comprising:
July 26, 198
i
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1411
stationary support means having a central axis extending
between a clevis end portion and an opposite end;
a set of jaws hingedly mounted in said clevis end portion,
each jaw being rotatable between an open position and a
shut position about a respective pivot axis spaced from
and lying in a plane perpendicular to said central axis;
an operating rod slidably disposed in said stationary support
coaxial with said central axis, said operating rod having a
first end portion extending between said jaws and a sec-
ond end portion;
an actuating member fastened to said operating rod adjacent
said first end and extending transversely to said rod, each
of said jaws having an aperture loosely receiving said
actuating member, the actuating member having two
lateral contact surfaces parallel to each other, and the
aperture of each jaw having a planar opening cam surface
and an opposed planer closing cam surface, said cam
surfaces being non-parallel and extending at an angle such
that said opening cam surface is parallel to the contact
surfaces of the actuating member when the jaws are in the
open position and said closing cam surface is parallel to
the contact surfaces of the actuating member when the
jaws are in the shut position;
stop means fixed on said operating rod; and
spring means disposed between the stationary support means
and said stop means and urging the operating rod in the
direction such that one contact surface of the actuating
member bears against the opening cam surfaces of said
jaws for urging the jaws to said open position.
mined amount to limit the rotational movement of said rod
member relative to said base member;
said movable external member being biased in said normally-
closed position adjacent said stationary external member
in a fashion so that there is an axis of rotation disposed
between between said moveable external member and said
stationary external member;
said rod member being constrained to move in a plane which
intersects said axis of rotation disposed between said mov-
able external member and said stationary external member
in a predetermined angular relationship; and
said resilient means automatically urging said rod member to
rotate into said upper position when said movable external
member is moved away from said normally-closed posi-
tion adjacent said stationary external member.'
4,395,071
FURNITURE WITH REMOVABLE CUSHIONS
William B. Laird, 861 E. Market St, Marietta, Pa. 17547
Filed Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 237,338
Int. C\? A47C 4/02
U.S. a. 297—440 10 Claims
4,395,070
HOLD OPEN APPARATUS
Jan S. Veltman, 6747 Norwood Ave., Allen Park, Mich. 48101,
and Edward A. Ferrari, 809 E. Seven Mile, Detroit, Mich.
48203
Filed Feb. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 234,615
Int. C\? B62D 25/00
U.S. a. 296—1 C 9 Claims
1. Furniture of the chair, love seat and couch type compris-
ing a frame having at least one removable cushion, said cushion
having oppositely disposed grooves, a pair of tongues on said
frame, each tongue projecting into one of said grooves, latch
means within said removable cushion, said latch means includ-
ing a latch member projecting into at least one of the grooves
on the cushion for latching cooperation with mating structure
on the associated tongue, and an actuator on the cushion and
connected to the latch member for releasing the latch member
so that the cushion may be removed.
1. A hold open apparatus for permitting a movable external
member which is biased in a normally-closed position adjacent
a stationary external member to be held in an open position
spaced apart from said stationary external member, compris-
ing:
a base member having means for attaching said apparatus to
said movable external member;
a rod member pivotally mounted on said base member;
resilient means on said base member urging said rod member
to automatically rotate into a position in which said rod
member extends upwardly from said base member;
said rod member being rotatably connected to said base
member so that said rod member can be rotated into a
position in which a substantial portion of said rod member
extends substantially parallel to said base member;
said rod member having a lower portion thereof which
limits the movement of said rod member upwardly to an
upper position under the influence of said resilient means;
said lower portion of said rod member cooperating with said
base member after said rod member has routed a predeter-
4,395,072
VEHICULAR HYDRAULIC BRAKE SYSTEM
Juan Belart, Walldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to ITT
Industries, Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 289,015
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 13,
1980, 3034628
Int. a.5 B60T 8/02. 13/14
U.S. a. 303—114 16 Claims
1. A control arrangement for use in hydraulic braking sys-
tems, particularly of automotive vehicles equipped with anti-
skid control devices, for controlling the pressure of hydraulic
fluid admitted into brake circuits leading to respective brake-
operating cylinders in dependence on pressures developed in a
master cylinder and an auxiliary source, comprising
a housing part having at least one internal surface bounding
a chamber centered on an axis; and
a control unit accommodated in said chamber and including
an actuating piston axially movable in said chamber and
subdividing the same into at least an actuating compart-
ment hydraulically connected with the master cylinder
and a working compartment hydraulically connected
with at least one of the brake circuits in use;
1412
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
means on said actuating piston for at least partially bound-
ing a communicating path open toward the auxiliary
source in use and toward said working compartment;
and
means for preventing flow of the hydraulic fluid in said
m» r
C_[_)
path when the pressure in said working compartment
predominates and for permitting such flow when the
pressure supplied from the auxiliary source predomi-
nates in use, including a deflectable sealing element
carried by said actuating piston and extending into said
path.
4,395,073
BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE CONTROL APPARATUS IN
SKID CONTROL SYSTEM
Tetsuro Arikawa, and Yasuo Samatsu, both of Yokosuka, Japan,
assignors to Nippon Air Brake Co., Ltd., Kobe, Japan
Filed Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,417
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 3, 1980, 55-26239;
Mar. 14, 1980, 55-32827
Int. Q\? B60T S/02
U.S. a. 303—116 6 Qaims
^^
1. A brake fluid pressure control apparatus in a skid control
system for a vehicle having at least one wheel and a brake for
the wheel comprising:
(a) a fluid pressure control valve device arranged between a
master cylinder and wheel cylinder of said brake for the
wheel, said fluid pressure control valve device receiving
control signals of a control unit measuring the skid condi-
tion of the wheel to control the brake fluid pressure to said
wheel cylinder;
(b) a hydraulic reservoir which, when the brake fluid pres-
sure to said wheel cylinder is decreased with control of
said fluid pressure control valve device, reserves the brake
fluid discharged through said fluid pressure control Valve
device from said wheel cylinder;
(c) a pressure fluid supply conduit connecting said master
cylinder with said fluid pressure control valve device;
(d) a fluid pump for returning the brake fluid from said
hydraulic reservoir into said pressure fluid supply conduit;
(e) a flrst check valve arranged in said pressure fluid supply
conduit, said first check valve being opened when the
brake fluid flows from said master cylinder toward said
fluid pressure control valve device, and the outlet of said
fluid pump being connected to said pressure fluid supply
conduit between said first check valve and said fluid pres-
sure control valve device;
(0 a pressure fluid return conduit connecting said master
cylinder with said wheel cylinder;
(g) a second check valve arranged in said pressure fluid
return conduit, said second check valve being opened
when the brake fluid flows from said wheel cylinder
toward said master cylinder; and
(h) means for receiving the brake fluid discharged from said
fluid pump, said receiving means being a fluid pressure
adjusting valve having a chamber, said brake fluid dis-
charged from said fluid pump being led into said chamber
of the fluid pressure adjusting valve and said chamber,
when said valve is opened, communicating with said
hydraulic reservoir.
4,395,074
CONNECTING SPIKE FOR FLEXIBLY CONNECTING
TWO CHAIN LINKS OF A TRACK
Walter Haldimann, PTaffikon; Fritz Held, Forch, and Rudolf
Fehr, Pfaffikon, all of Switzerland, assignors to Huber &
Suhner AG, Herisau, Switzerland
Filed Jul. 1, 1980, Ser. No. 165,194
Int. a.3 B62D 55/20
U.S. a. 305—43 3 Oaims
1. Connecting spike for flexibly connecting the chain links of
a track, where said spike comprises a metal rod, and an integral
elastic sheathing undetachably bonded thereto, said sheathing
having thicker and thinner portions, said thicker portions being
provided by longitudinal ribs and said thinner portions being
provided by longitudinal channels having an approximately
circular-segmented cross-section, such that the radius of the
cross section of said spike at said thicker portions is greater and
at said thinner portions is smaller respectively than the radius
of the chain link bore of said track, said sheathing upon inser-
tion of the spike into said chain link bore being elastically
deformed such that axial shift of said spike within said bore is
substantially prevented.
4,395,075
MISALIGNMENT SYSTEM FOR A MICROTOME
Lawrence R. Barrett, Washington, and Allan J. Weiner, Weston,
both of Conn., assignors to E. I. Du Pont de Nemours & Co.,
Wilmington, Del.
Filed Mar. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 361,262
Int. a.J F16C 32/02; GOIN 1/06
U.S. a. 308—2 R 9 Qaims
1. In a microtome of the type having a first member pivotally
July 26, 198^
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1413
movable with respect to a second member on a pair of main
pivot balls captured between fixed sockets provided on one of
the members and a fixed and a movable socket provided on the
other of the members, the improvement which comprises:
a misalignment pivot system for permitting movement with-
out the generation of a restoring force of the movable
socket in the direction of an axis (Q-Q') connecting the
centerlines of the balls to match the exact separation be-
tween the main pivot balls,
plurality of steps mating in bearing contact with said steps
of said bearing journal.
pivot bal
s.
4,395,076
BEARING DESIGN FOR DRILL BIT
Daniel R. Sabre, 1520 Palethorp St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19122
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,185
Int. Q.3 F16C 79/00
U.S. Q. 384—92 9 Qaims
4,395,077
SPINDLE ASSEMBLY
Simon F. Wong, Sunnyvale, Calif., assignor to Sperry Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,903
Int. Q\} F16C l9/0(>
U.S. Q. 308—189 A 6 Qaims
the misalignment pivot system itself comprising a socket and
a groove formed on either the movable socket or on one of
the members and a pair of fixed sockets confrontationally
provided on the other of the movable socket or the one of
the members, a first misalignment pivot ball captured
between a pair of fixed sockets and a second misalignment
pivot ball captured between the fixed socket and the
groove, the axis (W-W) between the centers of the mis-
alignment pivot balls being substantially perpendicular to
the axis (Q-Q') connecting the centerlines of the main
1. A rotary earth boring drill bit comprising
a bit body having at least one apron,
a bearing journal extending from said apron, and
a rotary cone cutter rotatively mounted on said bearing
journal,
said bearing journal having a generally cone-shaped bearing
wall formed by a plurality of steps extending along said
bearing wall,
each of said steps comprising a pair of adjacent walls joined
at an apex having an acute included angle,
said cutter having a bearing wall cooperating with said
bearing wall of said bearing journal and formed with a
lo' ^"
1. A spindle assembly comprising: a hub having an inner
cylinder having an interior wall forming a hub bore, an outer
cylinder having an exterior wall around which a member to be
rotated is positioned, and a plurality of ribs angularly disposed
about said inner cylinder and each extending lengthwise of the
hub for connecting the exterior wall of the inner cylinder to
the interior wall of the outer cylinder, a shaft extending
through said bore and adapted at each end for fixed mounting
to a stationary support, said shaft defining an annular shoulder
near one end thereof, bearing means disposed within the hub
bore intermediate the hub and the shaft for rotatively support-
ing the hub concentrically about the shaft such that the center
line of the hub bore is substantially collinear with the longitudi-
nal axis of the shaft, said bearing means comprising first and
second ball bearings disposed along the hub bore in spaced
relation to one another, said ball bearings each having an outer
race bonded to the hub bore, said first bearing having a side
distal the second bearing, said side contacting said shoulder,
preloading means engaging said bearing means for supplying a
force therethrough to hold the shaft longitudinal axis in sub-
stantially collinear alignment with said hub bore center line
during rotation of the hub about the shaft, said preloading
means including a spring circumscribing said shaft proximate
the side of said second bearing distal the first bearing, said shaft
having a threaded portion and a nut engaged with said
threaded poriion for compressing said spring so as to establish
forces between said shaft and said hub via said ball bearings,
and a pulley part connected with the outer cylinder of said hub
for receiving applied force to rotate the hub with respect to the
shaft.
4395,078
BEARING UNIT WITH IMPROVED INNER RACE
Harvey E. Smith, Sr., Grand Rapids, and Seigfried K. Weis,
Byron Center, both of Mich., assignors to C. L. Frost A Son,
Inc., Grand Rapids, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 124,556, Feb. 25, 1980, Pat. No.
4,323,288. Thu application Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,871
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 6, 1999,
has been disclaimed.
Int. Q\? F16C 19/06
U.S. Q. 308—196 10 Claims
1. In a bearing assembly having inner and outer race means
for supporting a plurality of anti-friction ball members therebe-
1414
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
tween, and a plurality of such balls positioned between inner
and outer raceways on said race means, the improvement
comprising:
said inner race means having first support means including a
major portion of said inner raceway for supporting the
primary portion of any load on said assembly and second
support means engaged with said first support means and
including a minor portion of said inner raceway for retain-
ing and guiding said ball members and supporting a minor
portion of any load on said assembly;
said major raceway portion on said first support means
extending on both sides of a radial plane of said assembly
which passes through the center line of said ball members
and the root diameter of said inner raceway;
longitudinal threads being interwoven so as to intersect to be
integrally interconnected together at each area of intersection
to provide a unitary structure having a diameter measured
from a mold parting line, said line defined as passing through
said areas of intersection, to a diametrically opposite point on
each of said respective threads in a direction facing outwardly
from said cabinet, said diameter being substantially equal to the
diameter of said threads.
4,395,080
CONSTRUCTION SET FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF
FRAMES FOR FURNITURE
Klaus Winn, Giessen; Klaus-Ludwig Engelbach, Dillenburg, and
Leo Schnirch, Haiger, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Weyel KG Visuelle Einrichtungen, Haiger, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jan. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 229,387
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 31,
1980, 3003367
Int. a.' A47B 47/00; F16B 72/00
U.S. a. 312—257 R 23 Claims
said first support means including a first shoulder having a
diameter slightly larger than said root diameter of said
inner raceway to allow insertion of said ball members
between said inner and outer raceways prior to assembly
of said second support means without heating or other-
wise resizing or modifying any part of said inner or outer
race means or ball members during assembly, said first
shoulder also providing resistance to removal of said ball
members after insertion;
said first support means also having a generally radially
extending surface adjacent said first shoulder and a recess;
said second support means including a portion engaging said
generally radially extending surface of said first support
means and a flange bent into and engaging said recess to
retain said inner race members in engagement.
4,395,079
PLASTIC MOLDED MESH SCREEN COVERING FOR
AUDIO CABINETS
Masayoshi Yano, and Fuminori Hirose, both of Hirakata, Ja-
pan, assignors to Matsushita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
FUed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 226,089
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 19, 1980, 55/4793;
Jan. 19, 1980, 55/4886[U]
Int. a.J A47B 57/06
U.S. CL 312—7.1 * Claims
1. A molded plastic mesh screen covering for at least one
sound emitting opening defined in an audio cabinet, said mesh
screen structure comprising a plurality of equally spaced latitu-
dinal threads extending generally perpendicular to a plurality
of equally spaced longitudinal threads, said latitudinal and
1. A construction set for the assembly of frames for fumi-
turelike display cabinets and show cases, comprising:
an elongated first profile means having a closed surface at
one edge thereof and a first connecting edge means at
another edge remote from said one edge, said first profile
means having a first flat surface thereon;
an elongated second profile means having a second connect-
ing edge along an edge adjacent said first connecting edge,
said first and second connecting edges being a mirror
image of the other, said second profile means having a
second fiat surface thereon coplanar with said first planar
surface, said first and second connecting edges each in-
cluding first means defining a space between said first and
second profile means and separating said first and second
flat surfaces and second means defining a connecting leg,
said connecting legs extending parallel to each other and
perpendicular to said first and second flat surfaces, said
first and second profile means abutting one another along
said first and second connecting edges on a side thereof
remote from said space; and
connecting profile means received in said space and having
a pair of spaced and parallel legs straddling and engaging
said first and second connecting legs, and a connecting flat
wall member connected to and extending at a right angle
to said first and second connecting legs, said connecting
profile means functioning to hold said first and second
profile means together, said connecting flat wall member
having an outwardly facing surface which is coplanar
with said first and second flat surfaces and closing said
space between said first and second profile means.
4,395,081
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR
Aleksandras A. Melys, HUlside, N J., assignor to Sweda Inter-
national, Inc., Pine Brook, N J.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,426
Int. a.' HOIR 4/66
U.S. a. 339—14 R * Claims
1. An electrical ground plane connector system, comprising:
an integral sheet metal contact having an open barrel crimp
July 26, 198
\
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
141S
portion which crimps about a conductive wire and a
ground plane connector portion; and
a ground plane of a conductive material having a plurality of
slots cut into an edge thereof to form at least a pair of tines
each tine having a plurality of longitudinally extending
sharp conductive edges;
said ground plane connector having rolled longitudinal sides
I0<
which form partially open spring cylinders for receiving
said tines, wherein said sharp conductive edges friction-
ally engage said spring cylinders;
each of said spring cylinders being adapted to be in contact
engagement with at least three of said plurality of conduc-
tive edges of its respective tine; whereby the degree of
electrical contact between said ground plane and contact
is improved.
4,395,082
OBTURATOR
Give S. Rumble, Apt. 2106, 330 Spadina Rd., Toronto, Canada
Filed May 27, 1980, Ser. No. 153,523
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 1, 1979,
7919147
Int. C1.3 HOIR U/44
U.S. a. 339-n41 3 Qaims
of said second plate but being unaligned with the apertures
of said second plate when said second plate is in said first
position; and
two reciprocating detents extending from the surface of said
third plate, each having a first end which extends into one
of the apertures qf said second plate when said second
plate is in said first position, to prevent rotation of said
second plate, whereby said first plate may be routed
against the bias of said spring means by prongs situated in
the apertures of said first plate so that the apertures of said
first plate become aligned with the apertures of said sec-
ond plate, whereupon the ends of said reciprocal detents
may be moved toward said third plate by the prongs and
said first and second plates may be rotated with respect to
said third plate by the prongs so that the apertures of said
second plate are aligned with said first pair of apertures of
said third plate, relative rotation between said second and
third plates being prevented unless each of said detents is
moved.
4,395,083
ELECTRICAL CONNECTOR HAVING REMOVABLE
CONTACTS
David L. Frear, Afton, N.Y., assignor to The Bendix Corpora-
tion, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,147
Int. C1.J HOIR li/42
U.S. a. 339—59 R 10 Qaims
1. An obturator, comprising:
an outer housing having an inner surface with a key means
extending inwardly of said inner surface;
an outer first plate rotatably disposed in said housing, having
a first arcuate keyway for cooperating with said key
means to allow limited rotation of said first plate with
respect to said housing, two apertures for accepting
prongs, and first means for anchoring a spring;
a second plate rotatably disposed in said housing adjacent
said first plate, having a second arcuate keyway for coop-
erating with said key means to allow limited rotation of
said second plate with respect to said housing, two aper-
tures for accepting prongs capable of alignment with the
apertures of said first plate, and second means for anchor-
ing a spring;
spring means cooperating with said first and second means
for anchoring for rotatably urging said first and second
plates to a first position in which the apertures of said first
and second plates are not aligned;
an inner third plate fixed with respect to said housing adja-
cent sakl second plate, having a first pair of apertures for
accepting prongs capable of alignment with the apertures
1. In combination with an electrical connector having re-
movable contacts said connector of the type having: a housing;
a plurality of contacts, each contact having a rear portion, a
forward mating portion, and an annular groove between said
forward and rear portions, and means for releasably mounting
said contacts in said housing including an insert having a plu-
rality of bores therein, each bore having therein a portion of a
respective contact having the annular groove therein and a
contact retention member, the improvement wherein said
contact retention member comprises:
an arcuate segment having forward and rear ends, axially
extending sides between said ends, one of said sides being
radially deflectable, on the inside of said segment an in-
wardly projecting and radially tapered arcuate shoulder
engaging the annular groove in a respective contact, said
shoulder extending radially inward a greater distance at
said deflectable side of said segment than at said other
side, and on the outside of said segment, means, located
adjacent said other side of said segment and between said
ends thereof, for pivotally mounting to said insert the
arcuate segment in each bore so that an axial side of said
arcuate segment may be deflected radially outwardly to
disengage the projecting shoulder from the groove in the
contact whereby, a tool may be inserted into a bore in said
insert to engage and pivot an axial side of said arcuate
segment radially outwardly in said bore so that the pro-
jecting shoulder of said segment disengages from the
groove in the contact thereby releasing the contact in said
bore for removal from the connector.
1416
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,084
ELECTRICAL SOCKET FOR LEADLESS INTEGRATED
ORCUTT PACKAGES
Richard A. Conrad, Vista, Calif., assignor to Teledyne Indus-
tries, Inc., Los Angeles, Calif.
Filed Jul. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 280,324
Int. a.3 HOIR 2i/72
U.S. a. 339—75 MP 7 Qaims
1. A socket for making electrical connections to leadless
integrated circuit packages comprising:
a frame having elongated, generally T-shaped sides where
the center leg of each T is horizontally disposed and
extends outwardly from the center of the frame;
contact assemblies, each corresponding to a respective side
of the frame, where each assembly includes an elongated,
generally C-shaped support having a vertical side, two
resilient horizontal sides and an open end, and a plurality
of parallel, spaced-apart, resilient, electrically conductive
contacts embedded within, parallel to, and along the
length of the vertical side of the C-shaped support; and
means for detachably mating the contact assemblies to the
frame.
4,395,085
WATERPROOF CONNECTOR
Nori Inoue, Yokkaichi, Japan, assignor to Tokai Electric Wire
Company Limited, Yokkaichi, Japan
FUed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,689
Oaims priority, application Japan, May 23, 1980,
55/71794[U]
Int. Q\} HOIR li/S2
U.S. a. 339—94 R 1 Qaim
a female housing part adapted to flt on said male housing
part, and
an "O" ring made of rubber or the like elastic material resil-
iently pressed between said housing parts,
said male housing pari having a fitting poriion constituted by
an inner sleeve around which said "O" ring is wound and
a large-diameter sleeve portion which is formed at a pre-
determined radial distance from said inner sleeve.
said female housing part having a cylindrical wall deflning
the opening for receiving said male housing part,
said cylindrical wall being fitted in the gap between said
inner sleeve and said large-diameter sleeve portion of said
male housing part,
said "O" ring being pressed between the outer peripheral
surface of said inner sleeve and the inner peripheral sur-
face of said cylindrical wall of said female housing part,
said male housing part includes said inner sleeve and an
outer sleeve formed as separate bodies,
said inner sleeve having an annular protrusion formed on the
outer periphery of one ojsen end thereof,
said outer sleeve including said large-diameter sleeve and a
small-diameter sleeve portion having an inside diameter
substantially equal to the outside diameter of said inner
sleeve and a thickness substantially equal to the projection
length of said annular protrusion,
said large-diameter sleeve portion being connected to said
small-diameter sleeve portion through an annular wall and
being extended forwardly beyond an opening of said
small-diameter sleeve portion with a predetermined radial
distance from the latter, and
said male housing part being provided with an annular recess
for receiving said "O" ring between said annular protru-
sion of said inner sleeve and said open end of said small-
diameter sleeve portion of said outer sleeve.
4,395,086
ELECTRICAL CONTACT FOR ELECTRICAL
CONNECTOR ASSEMBLY
Edward K. Marsh, Orlando, Fla., assignor to The Bendix Corpo-
ration, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Apr. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 255,600
Int. a.3 HOIR n/50
U.S. a. 339—176 M 16 Claims
4kf,^.f.43
^
■44
1. A waterproof connector comprising:
a male housing part.
4*:' ^4^43^^^
1. An electrical contact for electrically interconnecting with
a conductive blade, the contact characterized by a plurality of
interconnected plate-portions (40) with each said plate-portion
(40) having a lateral forward edge (41a) and a longitudinal slot
(46) extending inwardly from the lateral forward edge, said
slots (46) being aligned with one another and defining the axis
of a single uninterrupted passage that extends through all the
plate-portions, the plate-portions cooperating to form a com-
mon jaw for receiving the blade.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1417
4,395,087
STRIP OF BORDER-HELD CONTACT ELEMENTS FOR A
CONNECTION DEVICE, AND A PROCESS FOR
FORMING SUCH CONTACT ELEMENTS
Paul Gorre, and Jean M. Giraud, both of Suresnes, France,
assignors to Socapex, Suresnes, France
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,482
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 7, 1980, 80 05203
Int. CI.' HOIR 13/00
U.S. CI. 339—278 R 3 Claims
(a)
4^ 5
(b)
1. In a strip of border-held contact elements for a connection
device, comprising a support forming the border, in the form
of a ribbon, and a plurality of contact elements in the form of
rectangular-section rails, secured by one of their ends to one of
the sides of the border by a securing means, in a comb arrange-
ment, the border, the elements and their securing means being
formed from the same continuous electrically conducting
material, said securing means is formed by a bar disposed
perpendicularly to the axis of the rail along two symmetrical
wings, and a U-shaped stirrup whose base, which is common to
the legs thereof, is supported by the border, the respective ends
of the wings and of the legs being connected together and said
bar having a triangular-shaped section whose apex is turned to
face said common base.
4,395,088
ICOLOR SELECTIVE FILTERS
Kenneth Firth, Chelmsford, and Richard K. Howard, Witham,
both of England, assignors to The Marconi Company Limited,
Chelmsford, England
Filed Mar. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 242,610
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 13, 1980,
8008564
Int. CV G03H 1/04. 1/26
U.S. a. 350—3.7 9 Qaims
Sim VERTICAL
I- '-5 CONCWE
LSNS
IS ,n 9-
^ RST HOReONTAL
S :*V GAU/ANO^TER
1. A method of making a colour selective filter in the form of
a holographic reflector including the steps of: illuminating a
photosensitive film with a beam of light from a coherent mono-
chromatic laser in which the area of the beam spot on the film
is small as compared with the total area of the film; moving the
laser beam relative to the film so that each point on the area of
the film is illuminated a large number of times and the total
illumination received by each point is substantially constant;
causing a wave derived from the illuminating beam to interfere
with the illuminating beam; and developing the film so as to
change the latent image thereon into a colour selective filter.
4,395,089
CLAMP CONSTRUCTION FOR USE IN OPTICAL HBER
CABLES
William H. McKee, West Covina, Calif., assignor to TRW Inc.,
Elk Grove Village, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 943,153, Jun. 11, 1979. This
application Jun. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 159,716
Int. CI.' G02B 7/26
U.S. CI. 350—96.20 15 Qaims
8. In combination, an optical fiber cable comprising concen-
tric sheaths spaced apart by interposed, parallel strength mem-
bers; an optical fiber element disposed in the innermost sheath
and extending therefrom at one end; a clamp comprising clamp
elements pivotally connected in a scissoriike manner and hav-
ing spaced pairs of clamping jaws disposed at opposed clamp
ends extending from a central clamp body portion, and clamp-
ingly engaging concentric elements of said cable; said jaws
comprising opposed end portions of said clamp elements
whereby said opposed pairs of jaws are simultaneously mov-
able into cable gripping and releasing positions during pivotal
movement of said clamp elements; the interval between the
jaws in gripping position being such as to enable such jaws at
said one end to securely engage the optical fiber cable outer
sheath disposed therebetween; the interval between the clamp-
ing jaws at the opposed end in grippping position being such as
to enable said jaws at said other end to securely engage said
optical fiber element disposed therebetween; said clamp ele-
ments defining a passageway extending through said clamping
jaws in which said cable is received; each clamp element hav-
ing an arcuate recess and projecting lug formed in opposed
relation on opposite sides of said passageway; the lug of each
clamp element being received in the recess of the other clamp
element and coacting therewith so as to define such pivotal
connection between said clamp elements.
4,395,090
OPTICAL CUT-OFF FILTER
Hans F. Mahlein, Unterhaching, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin A Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Mar. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 240,868
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 25,
1980, 3011501
Int. CI.3 G02B 5/28
U.S. Q. 350—166 10 Qaims
1. In an optical cut-off filter in the form of a multilayer
system comprising a sequence of dielectric layers A and B
interposed between a transparent bordering medium having an
index of refraction no, and with an index of refraction n^ for
each of the layers A and an index of refraction n^ for each of
said layers B selected so that, for a preselected radiation angle
of incidence B, the pass band of the filter has an envelope Ej of
1032 O.G.— ,S5
1418
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
the reflecting secondary maxima for the s-component vibrating
perpendicular to the radiation plane of incidence and an enve-
lope Ep for the p-component vibrating parallel to the radiation
plane of incidence of the electrical field vector of the incident
4,395,092
COMPACT TELEPHOTO ZOOM LENS
Takayuki Itoh, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Asahi Kogaku Kogyo
Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,421
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 10, 1980, 55-30037
Int. C\J G02B 15/14
U.S. a. 350—427 2 Qaims
FOURTH
GROUP b
radiation, and wherein each envelope has a zero location, the
improvement comprising having the indices of refraction n^
and n^ of the dielectric layers A and B of the filter selected so
that the zero locations of the two envelopes E^ and Ep lie at
somewhat different wavelengths.
4,395,091
OPTICAL COUPLING DEVICE FOR USE WITH A
PLASMA EMISSION SPECTROMETER
Albert J. Russo, Norwalk, Conn., assignor to The Perkin-Elmer
Corporation, Norwalk, Conn.
Filed Oct. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 202,511
Int. a.' GOIN 21/73; G02B 5/00
U.S. a. 350—319 9 Qaims
' ^ > ■ ■ ^^ ■ t
^°\
J< to
1. A compact telephoto zoom lens comprising, in order from
the object side, a variator system including a first lens group
functioning as a focusing group having a positive focal length,
a second lens group functioning as a main variator having a
negative focal length, a third lens group functioning as a com-
pensator for maintaining an image plane constant having a
positive focal length, and a relay lens system, said first lens
group including a positive meniscus lens convex on the object
side and a positive cemented lens comprising a negative menis-
cus lens convex on the object side and a positive lens, said
second lens group including a negative lens whose lens con-
cave surfaces confront each other and a negative cemented
lens comprising a biconcave lens and a positive lens, said third
lens group including a positive cemented lens composed of a
biconvex lens and a negative meniscus lens, said relay lens
system including a fourth lens group a comprising a positive
lens having a stronger convex surface on the object side and a
biconcave negative lens and a fourth lens group b comprising
a biconvex positive lens and a negative meniscus lens having a
stronger concave surface on the object side, said fourth lens
group b being disposed a predetermined distance from said
fourth lens group a, said zoom lens satisfying the following
conditions:
1. An optical coupling device for use with a plasma emission
spectrometer comprising:
a hollow optically transparent high temperature body, said
body having a first segment and a second segment, said
first and said second segments being axially aligned and
affixed to each other;
means for gaseously sealing the end portions of said body;
means for venting said body whereby said device provides
an oxygen-free optical path along said body; and
a hollow optically transparent high temperature tube inte-
gral with said first segment at the end thereof distal from
said second segment, said tube being adapted to surround
a plasma torch and align said body therewith.
FNo. 1:4.5
f =
82.0 ~ 195.0
w = 15.2*
~ 6.2'
LENS NO. r
d
N
V
/
87.373
3.95
1.51633
64.1
FIRST
284.393
0.10
LENS
69.120
2.30
1.80518
25.4
GROUP
46.684
8.05
1.48749
70.1
<
-1885.831
4.409
/
-161.880
1.70
1.69680
55.5
SECOND
46.010
4.45
LENS
8
-60.000
1.50
1.69680
55.5
GROUP
9
40.111
3.80
1.80518
25.4
V
10
-1590.000
30.980
THIRD /
114.300
5.00
1.58913
61.0
LENS {
-42.520
1.60
1.80518
25.4
GROUP V
-83.000
11.897
39.214
4.10
1.58913
61.0
FOURTH /
-2275.000
1.79
LENS {
-269.221
2.10
1.80518
25.4
GROUP a \
269.221
32.87
18
71.700
3.50
1.62588
35.7
FOURTH (
19
-265.000
8.45
LENS
20
-30.398
1.70
1.80610
40.9
GROUP b ^
21
-79.717
Vari-
able
Distanci
f
82.0
135.0
195.0
ds
4.409
26.751
37.624
d|o
30.980
17.429
1.718
di3
11.897
3.105
7.943
JULY 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1419
-continued
fnv„/{l = 0.759,
fmm/f/~//= -1-246,
fmm/fl~lll = -0.085,
(mm/tl-IVa = 1 088,
fmm/fl-im = 1 920,
(n//i -I- n//2)/2 = 1.6968,
riya\/fmin = i\*/fmin = 0.478,
l/Ke/Kj/fmm = dp/fm/n = 0.401,
Uni/fmin = d|9/fm/>i = 0.103,
I ^/^^3 1 /f mm = I r20 1 /f mm = 0.371, and
niVb2 = 1 80610,
where:
fmin is the overall focal length of said zoom lens at a wide angle
position thereof;
f/ is the focal length of said first lens group;
fj~n'K the resultant focal length of said first and second lens
groups at said wide angle position;
fj^ljl'is the resultant focal length of said first, second and third
lens groups at said wide angle position;
fj-IVa is the resultant focal length from said first lens group to
said fourth lens group a at said wide angle position;
U~iyh\ is the resultant focal length from said first lens group tb
said positive lens of said fourth lens group b at said wide
angle position;
n//i is the refractive index of said first negative lens of said
second lens group at the d-line thereof;
n//2 is the refractive index of said second negative lens of said
second lens group at the d-line thereof;
Tiva\ is the radius of curvature of the first lens surface of said
fourth lens group a;
\lValVb is the distance between said fourth lens groups a and b;
1/^2 is the distance between said positive lens and said negative
meniscus lens of said fourth lens group b;
r/»^3 is the radius of curvature of the first lens surface of said
negative meniscus lens of said fourth lens group b;
^ivbi is the refractive index of said negative meniscus lens of
said fourth lens group b at the d-line thereof;
f is the overall focal length;
o) is the half viewing angle of the designated lens;
r is the radius of curvature of the designated lens;
d is the lens thickness or distance between adjacent lenses;
N is the refractive index at the d-line; and
V is the Abbe number.
as to form an entrance pupil for said optical system adapted for
passing therethrough chief rays and marginal rays of image
forming light, and thereby reduce the vertical field angles of
said chief rays and marginal rays of image forming light to a
predetermined magnitude wherein the improvement com-
prises, in combination:
first lens means spatially disposed downstream from said
mirror means on said optical axis for providing a positive
power to correct for negative field curvature caused by
said mirror means, and for bending the marginal rays of
image forming light toward said optical axis and into a
position approximately parallel to said optical axis, said
first lens means having first and second negative lenses
spatially disposed downstream from said mirror means on
said optical axis, each negative lens of which has a low
refractive index, and each negative lens of which is spaced
for air cooling so as to prevent heat damage, and first,
second, third and fourth positive lenses spatially disposed
downstream from said second negative lens on said optical
axis, each positive lens of which has a high refractive
index, and each positive lens of which is spaced for air
cooling so as to prevent heat damage;
second lens means spatially disposed downstream from said
first lens means on said optical axis and having an overall
power of zero for providing primary and secondary color
correction;
third lens means spatially disposed downstream from said
second lens means on said optical axis for bending the
marginal rays of image forming light from the aforesaid
position approximately parallel to said optical axis toward
a predetermined image plane, and for providing additional
field curvature correction and secondary color correc-
tion; and
fourth lens means spatially disposed downstream from said
third lens means on said optical axis for adding a positive
Petzval curvature such that an image may be formed at
said image plane, for bringing the chief rays of image
forming light incident uf>on said image plane at a predeter-
mined angle, and for providing additional field curvature
correction and secondary color correction.
4,395,093
LENS SYSTEM FOR PANORAMIC IMAGERY
Ck>ttfried R. Rosendahl, and Wiley V. Dykes, both of Winter
Park, Fla., assignors to The United States of America as
represented by the Secretary of the Navy, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,874
I Int. a.3 G02B 13/06
U.S. a. 350—441 7 Claims
'f -- MAItOMAL MAYS
4,395,094
LARGE APERTURE RATIO PHOTOGRAPHIC LENS
WITH MEANS FOR CORRECTING ABERRATIONS
Yoshinari Hamanishi, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Nippon Kogaku
K.K., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,539
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 31, 1980, 55/10703
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 7, 1998,
has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 G02B 9/62. 15/14
U.S. a. 350—467 8 Claims
s^ - » -Mem
tt -MMMOI
53^
■s
1. An optical system for 360° annular image transfer having
mirror means positioned upon a predetermined optical axis so
1. In a large aperture ratio photographic lens with means for
1420
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
correcting aberrations comprising a forward group including
at least one negative lens and having a composite positive
refractive power, a rearward group also including at least one
negative lens and having a composite positive refractive
power, and a diaphragm provided between said two groups,
the improvement residing in that during the shift from an
infinity object photography condition to a short distance ob-
ject photography condition, focusing is effected by moving
both of said two groups toward the object side while enlarging
the diaphragm space between said two groups and that said
photographic lens satisfies the following conditions:
4,395,096
VARIABLE MAGNinCATlON TELESCOPIC SIGHT
HAVING RETICLE CENTERING MOUNT
Dale E. Gibson, Salem, Oreg., assignor to Leupold & Stevens,
Inc., Beaverton, Oreg.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 311,001
Int. a.' G02B 7/10. 27/32; F41G 1/38
U.S. a. 350—560 20 Oaims
2.4<fi/f<4.5
2.5<fi/f2<5.5
(1)
(2)
where f is the total focal length of the entire system during the
infinity photography condition, fi is the focal length of said
forward group, and h is the focal length of said rearward
group.
4,395,095
OPTICAL SYSTEM FOR INFRARED TRACKING
Richard F. Horton, Dunkirli, Md., assignor to The United States
of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed MdV 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,273
lnt.a.^G02B 17/06, 23/06
U.S. a. 350—504 5 Qaims
i=T
1. Reticle mounting apparatus for a telescopic sight, com-
prising:
a housing tube containing lenses supported in axial alignment
along an optical axis;
a reticle mounting ring secured within said tube;
a reticle sight means attached to said mounting ring and
providing a sight point; and
a reticle centering sleeve provided around said mounting
ring, said sleeve having a longitudinal cross-section of
tapered shape which is wedged between said tube and said
mounting ring to center the sight point on said optical axis.
4,395,097
COMPACT REFRACnON INSTRUMENT
Richard C. Mohrman, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Bausch &
Lomb Incorporated, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 177,144
Int. a.3 A61B 3/02
U.S. a. 351—201 5 Qaims
V »'
1. An optical system for relaying a telescope image from a
movable telescope by folding the bundle through a movable
telescope mount to a fixed focal plane remote therefrom with
improved imaging for off axis focusing comprising:
means folding the bundle out of the telescope optical axis
and converging it to a focal point outside the telescope;
a first apertured flat mirror disposed around the bundle axis
with its plane at an oblique angle thereto and containing
the focal point;
a spherical concave mirror downbeam of an facing the first
apertured fiat mirror for folding the bundle back to the
apertured flat mirror from which it is folded to a second
apertured flat mirror;
said second aperatured flat mirror disposed around the bun-
dle axis with its plane at an oblique angle thereto and
folding the bundle to an ellipsoidal concave mirror;
said ellipsoidal concave mirror disposed downbeam of an
facing the second apertured flat mirror for folding the
bundle back to the second apertured flat mirror and con-
verging it to focal points in the aperature thereof in the
plane of the second aperture flat mirror;
whereby aberrations caused by off-axis focusing of objects
by the telescope are minimized in the periphery of the
field at the focal plane.
1. A refraction instrument comprising:
(a) housing means;
(b) target means supported by said housing means, said
target means including at least one binocular target having
first and second halves;
(c) first and second optical means, supported by said housing
means, for making said target means appear at or near
infinity when said target means is viewed through said
optical means, said optical means and said target means
defining a pair of optical paths;
(d) first and second sets of corrective optics for emulating a
series of ophthalmic prescriptions, said corrective optics
supported relative to said housing means in optical align-
ment with said optical means;
(e) means, supported by said housing means and interposed
along said optical paths between said optical means and
said target means, for separating said optical paths so as to
July 26, 198,
fi
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1421
provide separate and independent views of said halves of
said binocular target;
(0 means, supported by said housing means, for suppressing
accommodation; and
(g) apparatus, supported by said housing means between said
optical means and said target means, for permitting retino-
scopic examination through at least one of said first and
second optical means and one of said sets of corrective
optics while simultaneously maintaining a view of at least
one of said halves of said binocular target through at least
the other of said first and second optical means and other
of said sets of corrective optics.
' ' 4,395,098
SHUTTER TIME CONTROL CIRCUIT
Masanori Uchidoi, Yokohama, and Kazunobu Urushihara, Inagi,
both of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 147,268, Feb. 5, 1980, abandoned. This
application Oct. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 309,385
Claims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1979, 54-56541
Int. Cl.^ G03B 7/08
U.S. CI. 354—23 D 5 Claims
r
fsi rsi ai a2
1. A shutter control circuit for a shutter having a mechanical
condition producing a delay, comprising:
(a) a counter circuit for counting pulses when a shutter
release operation is performed;
(b) a shutter time information circuit for producing a digital
value corresponding to an exposure time;
(c) preset means having impedance means for adjustably
presetting time information corresponding to a mechani-
cal condition of the shutter mechanism;
(d) converting means for converting the time information
preset by said impedance means into a digital value";
(e) a shutter time information setting circuit including a first
part coupled to said shutter time information circuit -for
setting said digital value from the shutter time information
circuit and a second part coupled to said converting means
for setting said digital value from the converting means;
(Oa shutter time control circuit coupled to said counter
circuit and the first and second parts of said shutter time
information setting circuit, said shutter time control cir-
cuit forming a shutter closing signal when the value
counted by said counter circuit has assumed a value corre-
sponding to the sum of the digital values set by said first
and second parts of the shutter time information setting
circuit; and
(g) shutter control means for closing the shutter in response
to the closing signal.
4,395,099
SCENE BRIGHTNESS MEASURING SYSTEM
Takaaki Terasita, Minami-ashigara, Japan, assignor to Fuji
Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed May 4, 1981, Ser. No. 260,410
Claims priority, application Japan, May 2, 1980, 55/58820
Int. CI.' G03B 7/097. 7/099
U.S. CI. 354—31 13 Qaims
ill
4iK isl
•^5
Bfiw^
o»J2
StTTWG CBCml
-4 OPtRATiNe
CIRCUIT
CMCm POSITION OETKTKS CUCUIT
SCCMC CLASaFVMG CIRCUIT
.20 '^
UIT~| J
' EIPOSIAC
24 ' CONTirai.
CIBCUIT
3
1. A method of determining the correct exposure for photo-
graphing a scene in which n various parts thereof have differ-
ing amounts of illumination comprising the steps of measuring
respective brightness values B,, where i = 1, 2, 3, ... n. for said
n various parts of said scene with respective photosensitive
devices sensitive to the brightness of associated ones of said
parts; determining the maximum brightness value B^jxand the
minimum brightness value Bmin from among the measured
brightness values B,; automatically assigning weighting factors
Ki, K2, K3, K(i + 3), and a for said brightness values Bmajt,
Bmm, and B;-, electronically computing the correct scene
brightness B according to the following formula:
B = Ki + Kz- B„ax + ^3 • Bmin + a 2. K(i + 3) • Br,
and automatically adjusting the camera exposure for photo-
graphing said scene in accordance with the calculated scene
brightness B.
4,395,100
ILLUMINATION MODE SWITCHING CIRCUIT FOR
AUTOMATIC ELECTRONIC FLASH
Isao Kondo, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Company Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 173,051, Jul. 28, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 16, 1982, Ser. No. 389,039
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 5, 1979, 54-114672
Int. Q.5 G03B 7/16
U.S. Q. 354—33 11 Qaims
T>— V^
1. An illumination mode switching circuit for an automatic
1422
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
electronic flash which permits a selection among an automatic
illustration control mode in which the emission of flashlight
from a flash discharge tube is interrupted in response to an
output from a photometric integrating circuit including a pho-
toelectric transducer element, a manual illumination control
mode in which the emission of flashlight from the flash dis-
charge tube is interrupted with a time constant which is deter-
mined by a time constant circuit, and a full illumination mode
in which a full emission of flashlight from the flash discharge
tube is permitted; characterized by the provision of an illumi-
nation mode selecting changeover switch having a first termi-
nal connected to an automatic illumination control level pre-
setting circuit for selecting an automatic illumination contro
level a second terminal for a manual illumination control
which is connected to the time constant circuit and a third
terminal for full emission which is connected to the photomet-
ric integrating circuit, and an isolation diode connected be-
tween the second and the third terminal, the arrangement
being such that whenever the changeover switch is thrown to
the second terminal, the photometric integrating circuit is
disabled through the isolation diode while the time constant
circuit is enabled to thereby select the manual illumination
control mode, while whenever the changeover switch is
thrown to its third terminal, the photometric integrating cir-
cuit is disabled and the time constant circuit is also disabled by
the isolation diode to thereby select a full illumination mode.
4,395,101
APPARATUS FOR PRESETTING PHOTOGRAPHING
DISTANCE FOR CAMERA
Ichiro Morimoto, Hachioji, Japan, assignor to Olympus Optical
Company Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 308,476
Oaims priority, application Japan, Not. 14, 1980, 55-
162958[U] , , Z,^,
Int. a.J G03B i/02. 15/05
U.S. a. 354—128
said electronic flash and in which said power switch is
turned off.
4,395,102
BELLOWS FOR FOLDING CAMERA
Donato F. Pizzuti, Lynnfield, Mass., assignor to Polaroid Cor-
poration, Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Dec. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 334,982
. Int. a.^ G03B 7 7/04
U.S. a. 354-lV "f ^»'"»
7 Claims
1 An apparatus for presetting the photographing distance
for a camera which includes means for adjusting the photo-
graphing distance by causing a movement of a taking lens in
The direction of an optical axis and means for establishing a
normally focussed position of the taking lens in response to the
closure of a lens protective cover which opens or closes the
front surface of the taking lens; the apparatus comprising:
switch operating means disposed on an electromc flash
which is internally housed within or which is detachably
mounted on the camera for turning on or off a power
switch of the electronic flash;
flash photography operating means for operating the switch
operating means in a direction to turn the power switch
interlock means responsive to a movement of the flash pho-
tography operating means to operate said means for ad-
justing the photographing distance to bring the takmg lens
to a flash photography position which is located on the
nearer side than the normally focussed position; and
said switch operating means including an indicator member
having a lamp for indicating the completion of a chargmg
operation within said electronic flash; said indicator mem-
ber being movable between a position in which it projects
outwardly of said electronic flash and in which said power
switch is turned on, and another position retracted withm
1 A folding bellows for light shielding the exposure optical
path in a folding camera of the type including a base housing
section having a film plane therein, a lens housing section
mounting an objective lens and being pivotally coupled to the
base section, adjacent one end of the fllm plane, for movement
between an upstanding operative erected position and a stor-
age position folded back over the base section so as to overlie
at least a portion of the fllm plane, and a mirror assembly
including a mirror pivotally coupled to the base section, adja-
cent an opposite end of the film plane, for coordinated move-
ment with the lens housing section between an erected position
for reflecting image forming light rays transmitted by the lens
onto the film plane to expose a film unit thereat and a folded
storage position overlying at least a portion of the filni plane
with at least a portion of the mirror located between the film
plane and the lens housing section located in its folded position,
said bellows being formed of a thin, flexible, light opaque
material and comprising:
a bottom section attached to the base housing section in
surrounding relation to the film plane;
a forward wall joined to a leading end of said bottom section
and being attached to a rear wall of the lens housing
section, said forward wall having an opening therein
aligned with said lens through which image forming light
rays are transmitted into the interior of said bellows;
a rear wall joined to a trailing end of said bottom section and
configured to overlie a back side of the mirror when said
bellows and mirror are erected, said rear wall including
lower section thereof that is attached to a facing portion ot
the mirror, and an upper section thereof that is not at-
tached to that portion of the mirror facing said upper
a p'^r/oToppositely spaced side walls, each of said side walls
extending between a corresponding side portion of said
bottom section and adjacent ends of said forward and rear
an'^extensible top wall joining adjacent upper ends of said
forward, rear and side walls, said top wall being movable
between retracted and extended positions;
said bellows being movable in response to corresponding
movement of the lens housing section and mirror assembly
between an erected position, wherein said upper and
lower sections of said rear wall are in substantially copla-
nar relation overlying the back side of the erected mirror,
said top wall is in its said retracted position and said bel-
lows forms at least a portion of an ambient light excluding
exposure chamber surrounding the exposure optical path
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1423
extending between the lens, mirror and film plane, and a
substantially flat folded storage position overlying at least
a portion of the film plane wherein said upper section of
said rear wall is folded back over its lower section and said
top wall is in its said extended position.
' ' 4,395,103
nLM WINDING DEVICE FOR CAMERA
Nobuo Tezuka, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 283,883
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-100080
Int. CV G03B 1/04
U.S. a. 354—212 6 Qaims
■: a :
1. A camera having a film winding mechanism, comprising:
a spool for winding film thereon;
an engagement member having a guide groove into which a
rotation shaft of the spool is engaged and having an engag-
ing portion at its end, said engagement member being
engaged at a predetermined position on a circle coaxial to
the rotating shaft within the circumference of the spool,
and rotatable around said predetermined position within a
range defined by the contact of the guide groove wall
against the rotation shaft of the spool; and
an elastic member for urging the engagement member out-
wardly out of the circumferential surface of the spool,
whereby when the film is engaged at its perforation with
the engaging portion and wound, the engagement member
is moved by the tension of the film against the urging force
of the spring to a position where it is restricted by the
contact of the rotation shaft against the guide groove wall,
the shape of the guide groove being designed so as to
allow the projection of the engaging portion out of spool
circumference to be slightly larger than the base thickness
of the film.
rings, the blades opening in response to rotation of the
opening ring in the first rotational direction with respect
to the closing ring and closing in response to rotation of
the closing ring in the first rotational direction with re-
sponse to the opening ring; and
electromagnetic means for holding said closing ring in the
first rotational direction; said opening ring including hold-
.•^d
ing means restricting rotation of the closing ring until the
opening ring has traveled a predetermined distance, said
holding means operatively engaged with the electromag-
net means for insuring a predetermined minimal opening
of the shutter blades for providing a minimum lens apera-
tuTe by releasing said closing ring only after said opening
ring has been displaced a predetermined distance.
4,395,105
DEVICE FOR ADJUSTING DRIVING SPRING OF FOCAL
PLANE SHUTTER
Michio Senuma, Tokyo, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 336,497
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 13, 1981, 56-3160
Int. a.' G03B 9/40
U.S. a. 354—246 4 Qaims
"" 23. %»
%\
^XA.
M^\
4,395,104
ELECTRICALLY PROGRAMMED SHUTTER ASSEMBLY
Karl-Heinz Lange, Bunde, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Balda-Werke Photographische Gerate und KunststofT GmbH
& Co., KG, Bunde, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,339
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 11,
1980, 3034214
Int. a.^ G03B 9/24
U.S. a. 354—230 8 Qaims
1. An electronically controlled programmed shutter assem-
bly for a camera for insuring a predetermined minimum lens
opening comprising:
an opening ring biased for rotation in a first rotational direc-
tion;
a closing ring mounted adjacent to said opening ring and
biased for rotation in the first rotational direction;
shutter blades mounted on one of the opening and closing
31
1. A shutter mechanism including a shutter, a shutter driving
spring and an adjusting device for adjusting said shutter driv-
ing spring, comprising:
a ratchet wheel capable of adjusting the driving force of said
shutter driving spring, said ratchet wheel consisting of a
ratchet part which has fine teeth and a gear part which has
relatively coarse teeth, said gear part being arranged to
engage the gear of an automatic adjuster; and
a ratchet pawl which keeps the ratchet wheel stationary by
engaging the teeth of the ratchet part, said ratchet pawl
being arranged to be disengaged from one of the teeth of
the ratchet part and to come into engagement with an-
other tooth of the ratchet part to consequently have the
driving force of said spring adjusted when the automatic
adjuster is actuated with the gear thereof engaged with
said gear part of the ratchet wheel.
1424
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,106
COMPENSATION FOR DIAPHRAGM CONTROL IN SLR
CAMERA
Masahiro Kawasaki, Tokyo; Zenichi Okura, Ichikawa, and
Fumio Urano, Omiya, all of Japan, assignors to Asahi Kogaku
Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,683
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 11, 1980, 55-126782
Int. a.3 G03B 7/20
U.S. a. 354—271 * Claims
j'^Lkii
releasable by a disconnecting element of a camera and located
between said body part and the film strip inside said body part.
4,395,108
COLOR BALANCED SCRATCH SUPPRESSING
PROJECTION APPARATUS FOR COLOR
TRANSPARENCIES
John E, Morse, Rochester, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Feb. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 348,383
Int. a.5 G03B 27/00: G02B 5/14
U.S. a. 355-1 9 Cl«S"w
( ioa\
30-aiji
1. A camera comprising:
a first displaceable actuator;
a second displaceable actuator;
a diaphragm adjustable between a maximum aperture value
and a minimum aperture value responsive to displacement
of the second actuator;
means for generating a first signal representative of the
displacement of the first actuator;
means for generating a second signal representative of the
desired aperture value of the diaphragm for correct expo-
sure;
means for comparing the first and second signals;
means for displacing the first actuator upon shutter release;
means for maintaining the second actuator stationary during
an initial portion of the displacement of the first actuator
and displacing the actuators as a unit during the remainder
of the displacement of the first actuator; and
means responsive to the comparing means for arresting
displacement of the actuators when the first and second
signals assume a predetermined relationship.
4,395,107
nLM CASSETTE
Hermann Liihrig, Leverkusen; Franz Hoffacker, Langenfeld;
Guido Koyacic, Unkel; Dieter Engelsmann, Unterhaching;
Siegfried Zobel, Munich; Hubert Hackenberg, Holzkirchen,
and Karl Wagner, Munich, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Agfa-Gevaert AG, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,668
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 22,
1980, 3019664
Int. a.5G03B7 7/26. 1/04
U.S. a. 354—275
104
1. In apparatus for projecting color transparencies, a color
balanced scratch suppressing optical arrangement comprising:
an objective lens having a rectangular aperture and defining
first and second conjugate planes;
a rectangular light integrating bar having a first end face
adjacent said first conjugate plane and a second end face;
means for defining a plurality of color regions on the second
end face of said bar; and
a condenser lens disposed between said first conjugate plane
and said first end face of said integrating bar, said coji-
denser lens being constructed and located with respect to
said second end face to form an image of said rectangular
aperture at the plane of said second end face, the linear
dimensions of said image being an even multiple of the
corresponding dimensions of said second end face.
4,395,109
nXING DEVICE FOR ELECTRONIC DUPLICATOR
MACHINE
Shunichi Nakajima, Yokohama, and Hiroshi Odaira, Chigasaki,
both of Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki
Kaisha, Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Jun. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 156,866
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1979, 54-73325;
Jun. 11, 1979, 54-73326; Jun. 11, 1979, 54-73327; Jun. 11, 1979,
54-73328; Jun. 11, 1979, 54-73329; Jun. 11, 1979, 54-73330; Jun.
11, 1979, 54-73331
Int. a.3 G03G 15/20
U.S. a. 355—3 FU 8 Claims
35 Qaims
"8 120 fij
13. A film cassette for multi-exposure film strips, comprising
a body part having an inner compartment for a film strip, and
at least one opening for passage of the film strip therethrough
between an initial position before exposure and a final position
after exposure of the film strip; and means for preventing
unintentional withdrawal of the film strip from said body part
in each of said positions, said preventing means being arranged
1. A fixing device for an electronic duplicator machine for
heating toner attracted to copying paper and for fixing the
toner onto the copying paper, said fixing device compnsmg:
a rotatable heat generating roller which includes:
(a) a hollow cylindrical body joumally supported at each
end for rotation about its elongated axis;
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1425
(b) a heat insulating layer formed on the outer circumferen-
tial surface of said hollow cylindrical body for preventing
heat transmission to said hollow cylindrical body;
(c) a heat generating layer covering said heat insulating layer
and including an electrically resistive layer through which
electric current flows to generate heat and an electrically
insulating layer disposed between said electrically resis-
tive and said heat insulating layers, and
(d) conducting means including a first group of conducting
members circumferentially disposed at regular intervals
on one end portion of said electrically resistive layer and
a second group of conducting members circumferentially
disposed at regular intervals on the other end portion of
said electrically resistive layer;
power supply means including a first terminal and a second
terminal each having a fixed position relative to said rotat-
able heat generating roller and being connected to a
power source, said first and second terminals respectively
contacting a predetermined number of said conducting
members of said first group and a predetermined number
of said conducting members of said second group as said
heat generating roller rotates relative thereto so as to
preferentially heat that portion of the electrically resistive
layer which lies between said predetermined number of
conducting members of said first group in contact with
said first terminal and said predetermined number of con-
ducting members of said second group in contact with said
second terminal; and
a supporting roller disposed parallel to said heat generating
roller to support the copying paper in a contacting rela-
tionship with said heat generating roller, said supporting
roller including a nip area in contact with said preferen-
tially heated portion of said electrically resistive layer.
developer support means positioned with a small clearance
between it and said latent image bearing member;
developer supply means for supplying the developer to said
developer support means; and
applying means for applying the developer supplied by said
developer supply means onto the surface of said developer
support means and for defining the thickness of a layer of
the developer on said developer support means;
said applying means being positioned in the proximity of or
in contact with said developer support means, and com-
prising a screen provided with surface irregularities at
least on a surface thereof facing said developer support
means and a pressing member for pressing said screen
against said developer support means.
4,395,111
SHEET CONVEYING DEVICE
Yuji Takahashi, Tokyo, and Hisaji Masaki, Kawasaki, both of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,257
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 28, 1980, 55/118612;
Aug. 28, 1980, 55/118613
Int. a.' G03G 75/00
U.S. a. 355—14 R 22 Qaims
4,395,110
DEVELOPING DEVICE WITH APPLICATOR
CONTOURED TO STIR DEVELOPER APPLIED TO A
DEVELOPER SUPPORT
Nagao Hosono, Chofu, and Hatsuo Tajima, Matsudo, both of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 26, 1981, Ser, No. 238,633
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 4, 1980, 55-27730;
Mar. 4, 1980, 55-27731
Int. Cl.^ G03G 15/0%
U.S. a. 355—3 DD 12 Qaims
1. A conveying device, comprising:
(a) a sheet conveying pathway;
(b) sheet conveying means for conveying a sheet along said
conveying pathway;
(c) abnormal feed detection means for detecting that the
sheet is abnormally conveyed along said conveying path-
way;
(d) jam detection means for detecting sheet jamming, said
detection means being provided on one part of said con-
veying pathway at a position downstream of said abnor-
mal feed detection means; and
(e) control means for delaying a jam check timing by said
jam detection means for a predetermined time when ab-
normal feeding is detected by said abnormal feed detec-
tion means.
1. A developing device for developing a latent image formed
on a latent image bearing member with a developer, compris-
ing:
4,395,112
LATENT ELECTROSTATIC IMAGE DEVELOPING
DEVICE
Nobuhiro Miyakawa, Suita; Kiyoshi Shibata, Osaka; Toshio
Watanabc, Takatsuki, and Yosuke Ohata, Habikino, all of
Japan, assignors to Mita Industrial Co., Ltd., Japan
Filed Sep. 9, 1981. Ser. No. 300,525
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 19, 1980, 55-131073
Int. Q.' G03G 15/00
U.S. Q. 355—14 D ♦ CI"""
1. In a latent electrostatic image developing device for de-
veloping a latent electrostatic image formed on an image-bear-
ing member by applying a developer thereto, said developing
device comprising developer applicator means for holdmg
1426
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
developer on the surface thereof, carrying the developer to a
developing zone and applying it to a latent electrostatic image
in the developing zone and bias voltage applying means for
applying a bias voltage to the developer held on the surface of
the developer applicator means; the improvement wherein the
bias voltage applying means comprises a first dc fixed voltage
supply and a second dc fixed voltage supply and wherein the
developing device further includes detector means for detect-
ing the relative humidity of the environmental atmosphere and
-8i -^
control means for connecting both the first and the second dc
fixed voltage supplies to the developer held on the developer
applicator means to adjust the applied bias voltage to a first
value when the detected relative humidity is less than a prede-
termined value, and connecting only the first dc fixed voltage
supply to the developer held on the developer applicator
means to adjust the applied bias voltage to a second value less
than the first value when the detected relative humidity ex-
ceeds the predetermined value.
4,395,113
METHODS AND APPARATUS FOR CLEANING
PHOTOCONDUCriVE MEMBERS
William R. Buchan, Pepperell, and Eddie W. Cielakie, Westford,
both of Mass., assignors to Nashua Corporation, Nashua,
N.H.
Filed Oct. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 316,285
Int. a.' G03G 21/00
U.S. a. 355—15 8 Qaims
3. A method of cleaning a photoconductive surface compris-
ing:
providing elastically yieldable roller means having a smooth,
yieldable periphery adjacent the jseriphery of a photocon-
ductive surface;
moving said photoconductive surface so as to carry a layer
of developer, comprising toner particles dispersed in a
gelatex dispersant, generally toward said yieldable roller
means;
applying a lubricating liquid to said developer layer;
pressing said yieldable roller means against said developer
layer with its axes being parallel to said photoconductive
surface and with
the smooth yieldable periphery of said elastically, yield-
able roller means being arcuately deformed into con-
cave, smooth faced pad means penetrating said devel-
oper layer to a depth such that said concave smooth
faced pad means is generally spaced from said photo-
conductive surface by a distance not exceeding the
diameter of the minimum sized particles of said toner;
rotating said elastically yieldable roller means so that its
periphery moves at a speed at least equal to the speed of
said moving photoconductive surface but in a direction
opposite thereto, with
said rotation being operable to apply a shearing force to
said gelatex dispersant operable to reduce the viscosity
thereof;
maintaining a gap between said concave, smooth faced, pad
means and said photoconductive surface, with said gap
having a thickness not exceeding the diameter of said
minimum sized toner particles; and
applying doctor blade means to the periphery of said rotat-
ing, elastically yieldable roller means to remove toner
particles therefrom.
4,395,114
TONER RECOVERY DEVICE
Hiroaki lira, Kunitachi; Tsugio Hirabayashi, and Junichi Koiso,
both of Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Konishiroku Photo
Industry Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,623
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55/183882;
Dec. 26, 1980, 55/183883
Int. a.^ G03G 15/00. 15/08
U.S. a. 355—15 9 Qaims
1. In a toner recovery device in which a non-magnetic ro-
tary member positioned coaxially with, and adjacent to, a
charge receptor and having magnets embedded around the
circumferential surface thereof is rotated and an endless belt
wound on said rotary member is moved so as to recover a
toner collected by a cleaning device into a developing unit, the
improvement wherein a plurality of protuberances are equidis-
tantly and projectingly formed around the circumferential
surface of said rotary member to prevent said endless belt from
floating as a whole, and said protuberances drive said endless
belt.
4,395,115
CONVEYOR UNIT FOR BOOK CARRIER IN
ELECTRO-PHOTOGRAPHIC COPYING MACHINES
Hiroshi Tsuda, Mitaka; Kiyoshi Miyashita, Hachioji; Akira
Shimizu, Hachioji; Mas^ji Nishikawa, Hachioji, and Muneo
Kasuga, Hachioji, all of Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical
Co. Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,169
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 27, 1979, 54-124886
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to May 26,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. C\? G03B 27/62
U.S. a. 355—25 14 Claims
1. A conveyor unit in an electrophotographic copying ma-
chine for selectively conveying either a thin original or an
original having substantial thickness, such as a book, to an
exposure station to form an electrostatic latent image of said
original for a copying purpose, comprising:
July 26, 1983
if
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1427
a book carrier including a frame having a transparent central
portion on which said original having substantial thickness
is placed to be conveyed to said exposure station;
a driven member formed on said book carrier for conveying
first and second commonly driven drive members on said
unit respectively engageable with said thin original and
said driven member for respectively driving said thin
original and said carrier; and
4,395,117
PRINTING APPARATUS HAVING AN IN-FOCUS
DETECTOR
Akiyoshi Suzuki, Kawasaki, Japan, assignor to Canon Kabushiki
Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 242,349
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 18, 1980, 55-34376
Int. a.3 G03B 27/52, 27/70
U.S. a. 355—43
4 Claims
<A
55
50
>c:^--^
51 *^ ^» go 57
4A
a rigid, aationary carrier retainer plate on said unit for
maintaining a slight clearance with respect to the upper
surface of the frame of said book carrier to constrain said
book carrier from shifting upward as said drive member
cooperates with said driven member while providing
sufficient clearance to facilitate simple and rapid insertion
and/or removal of the book carrier from the conveyor
unit.
4,395,116
ARTWORK GENERATION APPARATUS AND PROCESS
[ FOR CHARTS
Charles R. Patton, III, 895 Palo Verde, Long Beach, Calif.
90815, and Douglas E. Lippincott, 7861 Harhay, Midway
City, Calif. 92655
I Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,215
I Int. a.3 G03B 27/32. 41/00
U.S. CI. 355— 32 17 Qaims
( SS fc>|p-"»~ lcv>\«ss"
\
'-1^ r-
c:ri
"1 /
-^
ft**
V V:-,<1 \\Zi7iom\ ( , •* (■00**6
IT-* '•" ,
1. A printing apparatus having an in-focus detector, com-
prising:
a mask carrier for supporting a mask thereon;
a wafer carrier for supporting a wafer thereon;
an imaging optical system for projecting the image of the
mask onto the wafer;
an optical system for directing to the wafer through said
imaging optical system a detection light having a prede-
termined inclination with respect to the optical axis of said
imaging optical system; and
means for observing therethrough the position of the re-
flected detection light from the wafer;
whereby in-focus condition may be detected depending on
whether or not the position of said detection light is a
predetermined position.
4,395,118
COPYING APPARATUS
Shtgehiro Komori, and Masaru Yamaguchi, both of Yokohama,
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 46,627, Jun. 8, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 748,396, Dec. 7, 1976, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 556,201, Mar. 7, 1975,
abandoned. This application Feb. 11, 1982, Ser. No. 347,784
Gaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 12, 1974, 49-28361
Int. a.5 G03B 27/62
U.S. a. 355—75 2 Qaims
1. A method for preparing artwork for charts from predeter-
mined data depicting type of information and associated loca-
tion for application to a chart, comprising the steps of:
establishing relative movement between a image receiving
medium and an imaging source of an imaging station in
accordance with said data to establish said locations se-
quentially;
providing a plurality of different symbols of halftone pat-
terns useful for making apparent said type information at
said station;
selecting from said plurality, the symbol to be imaged onto
said medium in accordance with said type of information
data; and
flashing the selected symbol onto said medium at the associ-
ated location.
1. A copying apparatus compnsmg:
1428
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
an original holder having a holding surface for supporting a
thick original for exposure;
sheet original transport means having at least two pairs of
rollers, said apparatus further comprising an exposure
station disposed between said pairs of rollers and provided
independently from said original holder at a position con-
tiguous thereto, said original holder and said sheet original
transport means being integrally connected, wherein a
sheet original is scanned while being fed by said transport
means past said exposure station toward said thick original
holding surface;
movable optical means having a scanning range for scanning
an image of a thick original supported on said holding
surface, said optical means being movable substantially
within the scanning range, wherein said movable optical
means scans the thick original while moving toward said
sheet original transport means;
mode selecting means for moving said original holder be-
tween a first position wherein said exposure station of the
sheet original is within said scanning range for the thick
original to allow exposure operations for sheet originals
substantially within said scanning range, and a second
p)osition wherein said exposure station of the sheet original
is out of said scanning range;
copy processing means for producing on copy material an
image of an original image scanned by said optical means;
a frame for integrally supporting said original holder and
said sheet original transport means; and
a guiding member for moving said original holder and sheet
original transport means together with said frame through
a distance substantially corresponding to the distance
between said exposure station and a contiguous end of said
holder surface, wherein the scanning distance for thick
originals corresponds to the length of the holder surface.
4,395,119
METHOD FOR AUTOMATIC, NON-DESTRUCTIVE
MEASUREMENT OF ECCENTRICITY OF COATED
ELECTRODES
Kazuo Nakata, Fujisawa; Akihiko lochi, Odawara; Isamu Kaise,
Fujisawa; Kazuo Takeuchi, and Katsuhiko Nomura, both of
Kamakura, all of Japan, assignors to Kobe Steel, Limited,
Kobe, Japan
Filed Oct. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 202,240
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 8, 1979, 54-144996
Int. CI.' GOIN 21/88: GOIB 11/02
U.S. a. 356—73 8 Qaims
Lhs^^MD^
1. A method for automatic, non-destructive measurement of
eccentricity of a core wire located within a coating composi-
tion of a coated electrode by the use of optical means, compris-
ing:
moving, in a direction substantially transverse to the axis
thereof, at least one coated electrode having an exposed
core wire portion;
providing at least two paired optical detecting means each
having a light source for projecting a light beam toward a
coated electrode on one side of the coated electrode and a
signal generator located on the other side of said coated
electrode to generate signals according to the intensity of
incident light, positioning at least one of said detecting
means to measure the diameter and location of said ex-
posed portion of said core wire and positioning at least
one of the remaining detecting means at a point spaced
from said one of said detecting means in the axial direction
of said wire to measure the diameter and location said
coating of said coated electrode; and
processing the signals from said signal generators by an
arithmetic means to measure the eccentricity of said
coated electrode.
4,395,120
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR MEASURING THE
REFRACTIVE POWER OF A CONTACT LENS
Fumio Takahashi, Yokohama, Japan, assignor to Nippon
Kogaku K.K., Toyko, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 954,207, Oct. 24, 1978, abandoned.
This application Feb. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 231,029
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 1, 1977, 52-104191;
Oct. 28, 1977, 52-128628; Oct. 13, 1978, 53-12589
Int. a.' GOIB 9/00
U.S. a. 356—125 19 Qaims
1. A method of measuring the refractive power of a contact
lens comprising:
combining a reference lens system of small refractive power
the refractive elements of which are known with a contact
lens to be inspected;
measuring the back focal distance of the combined optical
system of the reference lens system and the contact lens
combined together, namely, the distance from the vertex
of the last refractive surface of the lens to the focus
thereof; and
determining the refractive power of the contact lens from
the value of said back focal distance and the known value
of said reference lens system.
4,395,121
APPARATUS FOR DETERMINING THE ANGULAR
POSITION OF A TARGET ILLUMINATED BY LIGHT
PULSES
Pierre Nory, Orsay, and Guy Ripart, Le-Plessis-Robinson, both
of France, assignors to Societe Anonyme dite: Compagnie
Industrielle des Lasers, Marcoussis, France
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,347
Claims priority, application France, Feb. 20, 1980, 80 03676
Int. a J GOIB 11/26; GOIJ 1/20
U.S. a. 356—152 8 Qaims
1. Apparatus for determining the angular position of a target
which is illuminated by light pulses, said apparatus including:
objective lens means for concentrating light from the illumi-
nated target onto a reception surface so as to form a light
spot on said surface when the target is illuminated by a
light pulse;
a system fo.- receiving said light spot, said system including
a photoelectric receiver; and
an electric circuit connected to the output of the photo-elec-
tric receiver to generate signals which are representative
of the position of the light spot on the reception surface;
the improvement wherein the receiving system includes:
a group of n bundles of optical wave guides with the wave
guides which form part of the same bundle being all of the
same length, and said bundles being of different lengths so
as to form a sequence of predetermined lengths, the input
surfaces of the wave guides of each bundle being disposed
July 26, mi
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1429
side by side and facing n respective predetermined por-
tions of the reception surface so that the wave guides of
the n bundles transmit light pulses from said spot, the
output surfaces of the wave guides being disposed so that
the pulses caused by light from said spot act on the same
photoelectric receiver in a time sequence which is repre-
sentative of said sequence of predetermined lengths,
whereby the photoelectric receiver delivers, in operation,
successive electric pulses whose amplitudes are represen-
tative of the illumination of respective portions of the
reception surface by the spot, and
wherein said electric circuit includes:
-i3li
'31 Phoiotacistc Kuc'os
— I
•KOlOOiCI^C
«EC£<£«
^21 CKCUII
a separator circuit whose input is connected to the output
of the photoelectric receiver, said separator circuit
including n outputs to deliver respectives ones of said
successive electric pulses corresponding to each light
spot received on the reception surface;
n measuring circuits respectively connected to the n out-
puts of the separator circuit to deliver measuring signals
which are representative of the amplitudes of respective
ones of the successive electric pulses; and
a processing circuit connected to the outputs of the n
measuring circuits to transform the measuring signals
into signals which are representative of the position of
the light spot on the reception surface.
sensitive surfaces, said detecting means being positioned
such that said first light sensitive surface is illuminated, to
the relative exclusion of said second light sensitive sur-
face, by said light beam when said light beam is reflected
from a first f)ortion of a protuberance on said disc surface,
said second light sensitive surface is illuminated, to the
relative exclusion of said first light sensitive surface, by
said light beam when said light beam is reflected from a
second portion of said protuberance and said first and said
second light sensitive surfaces are illuminated substan-
tially equally by said light beam when said light beam is
refiected from a portion of said disc surface where protu-
berances are absent;
the structure of the groove in the region of the spot illumi-
nated by the light beam serving as a diffraction grating for
diffracting light reflected from said illuminated spot to
form a zero diffraction order cone and higher diffraction
order cones of light;
an anamorphic optical system for focusing a plurality of said
higher diffraction order cones onto said first and second
light sensitive surfaces; and
means, responsive to said detecting means, for indicating the
presence of said protuberance.
— 4,395,123
INTERFEROMETRIC ANGLE MONITOR
Peter O. Minott, Bowie, Md., assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Administrator of the National
Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Filed Oct. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 195,227
Int. Q.' GOIB 9/02
U.S. Q. 356—353 H Qaims
v.
4,395,122
DEFECT DETECTION SYSTEM
Peter D. Soutfagate, and Istvan Gorog, both of Princeton, N.J.,
assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,759
Int. Q.' GOIN 21/89
U.S. CI. 356—237 10 Claims
FmWGf UOTIOM M
I 24
30
iWOCfSSW
1. A flaw detection system for detecting protuberances on a
surface of a disc having a groove formed thereon, said system
comprising:
a source of illumination for providing a beam of light;
means for focusing said beam of light to a spot on the surface
of said disc;
means for detecting the light beam reflected from said sur-
face, said detecting means having first and second light
1. Apparatus for measuring the angular displacement of a
rotatable object having means for reflecting optical beams, by
measuring the linear displacement of a series of optical interfer-
ence fringes, comprising:
means for providing from sources (Si, S2) separated by a
distance (d) coherent radiation in the form of two mutu-
ally coherent, generally parallel optical beams (bi, b2)
directed toward said reflecting means (20) of said rotat-
able object;
imaging optical means (10) positioned to receive said two
optical beams from said reflecting means (20), for provid-
ing a focal plane (12) optically at a distance (Z) from said
reflecting means of a relatively larger magnitude in rela-
tion to the distance (d) separating said sources whereby an
interference fringe pattern (14) is formed at said focal
plane (12) which translates linearly thereacross in re-
sponse to angular movement of said reflective means;
detector means (22) located at a predetermined point along
said focal plane and being operable to provide an output
signal indicative of translation of said fringe pattern; and
means (30) responsive to said output signal for providing a
measure of said angular movement of said reflective
means.
1430
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
435,124
APPARATUS FOR POSITION ENCODING
Paul W. Remijan, Souttabridge, Mass., assignor to Randwal
Instrument Co., Inc., Southbridge, Mass.
Division of Ser. No. 863,948, Dec. 23, 1977, Pat. No. 4,265,534.
This application Mar. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 239,524
Int. a.' GOIB 9/00
U.S. a. 356—373 20 Qaims
signal generator means and capable of commencing operation
when said second signal is put in and having a second predeter-
mined definite operation time to generate a third signal, a
carrier shifting controller connected to said shifting timer and
capable of being operated by said third signal, and a carrier
shifting mechanism connected to said carrier shifting control-
ler and capable of stopping said carrier with a signal from said
carrier shifting controller, said second signal being generated,
when said first signal is generated if said first signal is gener-
ated within said first predetermined definite operation time, or
when said first predetermined definite operation time has
lapsed if said first signal is not generated within said first prede-
termined definite operation time.
1. Apparatus for indicating the position of a movable ele-
ment along a motion axis, said apparatus comprising:
A. interference pattern generating means for generating a
first diffraction and a second diffraction that are of differ-
ent order, that have equal strength and that overlap
thereby to produce a first high contrast, low noise inter-
ference fringe pattern in a first area of overlap,
B. first detection means positioned to view the first interfer-
ence fringe pattern for producing signals dependent upon
the first interference fringe pattern, and
C. motion means for producing relative movement of said
generating means and said detection means along the
motion axis thereby to move said first interference fringe
pattern with respect to said detection means.
1
if-
]
1
4,395,126
APPARATUS FOR REFLECTANCE MEASUREMENT OF
FLUORESCENT RADIATION AND COMPOSITE
USEFUL THEREIN
Donald L. Kramer, Indian Harbor Springs, Fla., assignor to
Miles Laboratories, Inc., Elkhart, Ind.
Filed Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,890
Int. a.3 GOIN 21/64
U.S. CI. 356—417 15 Oaims
4,395,125
CENTERING SYSTEM
Nobutaka Kaneko, Hachiouji, and Toshihide Fujiwara, Fuchu,
both of Japan, assignors to Olympus Optical Co., Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Aug. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 175,415
Oaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 16, 1979, 54-103612
Int. a.3 GOIB U/00; GOIN 21/86
U.S. a. 356—400 2 Qaims
3(8) - i -* II I
1. A sample centering system comprising a photometric
means for colorimetrically measuring samples applied onto a
carrier shifted in a certain definite direction, a sample detecting
means arranged at a definite interval apart from said photomet-
ric means in the carrier shifting direction, a sample detection
signal generating means connected to said sample detecting
means and capable of generating a first signal when the output
from said sample detecting means varies so as to be coincident
with a predetermined threshold level, a shifting timer start
signal generator means connected to said sample detection
signal generating means and capable of generating a second
signal, a sample detection permitting timer means connected to
said shifting timer start signal generator means and capable of
commencing operation at a predetermined definite time after
shifting of said carrier is started and having a first predeter-
mined definite operation time, a sample detection inhibiting
timer means connected to said sample detection permitting
timer means and capable of inhibiting sample detection during
a predetermined definite time after shifting of said carrier is
started, a shifting timer connected to said shifting timer start
®" () %6r
KM
orrccTM
ANALOG
VOLTAGE
C011P4«ATD«
LOGIC
CIRCUIT
OeiKTOR
1. Apparatus useful in reflectance measurement of fluores-
cent radiation emitted by an analyte during transition thereof
from an excited state to a ground state, comprising an integrat-
ing sphere within which an analyte can be subjected to incident
radiation effective to raise such analyte to an excited state, the
inner surface of said integrating sphere comprising a composite
of two components, at least one of which is in a finely divided
state, is dispersed in a vehicle binder which is substantially
nonabsorptive of radiation, is transmissive of fluorescent radia-
tion, and is absorptive of incident radiation; and the other
component is reflective of both incident and fluorescent radia-
tion.
4,395,127
OPTICAL PAPER DETECTOR
Kenneth R. Duvall, Washington, D.C., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the
Treasury, Washington, D.C.
Filed Sep. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 186,364
Int. a.3 GOIN 21 /S9: GOIB 11/06
U.S. a. 356—430 8 Claims
L3-ii!-i-BIl3
I
1. In an improved optical paper control assembly wherein a
light source and an optical paper detector are adapted to sense
the presence of more than a single sheet of paper to be printed
wherein said improvement comprises an improved optical
paper detector, said improved detector comprising a planar
July 26, 19
II
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1431
array of photosensors having individual sensing angle a, sub-
stantially equal to 75 degrees, said photosensors being spaced
from each other a first distance substantially equal to s and
from said paper a second distance d substantially equal to 0.65s
where d and s are related to a by the following relationship
«/=i/2 tan(90"-a/2)
where said array is responsive to light transmittance through a
continuous area of said paper which is substantially coincident
with the physical area of said planar array.
11 - '*
" 4,395,128
MIXING TOWER FOR CONCRETE OR THE LIKE
Paul Mathis, Merdingen, and Max Zimmer, Efringen-Kirchen,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Mathis System-
Technik GmbH, Merdingen, Fed. of Germany
RIed Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,384
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 17,
1980, 3027069
Int. CI.3 B28C 7/04, 9/00
U.S. CI. 366—18 23 Claims
means including a plurality of feed ports through the outer
drum spaced circumferentially therearound, a conical inner
drum within and fixed to the outer drum in axial alignment
therewith, the large and small ends of the inner drum constitut-
ing upstream and downstream ends thereof corresponding to
said ends of the outer drum, the feed ports opening radially
onto the exterior of the inner drum adjacent its upstream end
and having leading and trailing edges with respect to the direc-
tion of drum rotation, a stationary shroud of generally annular
configuration surrounding the exterior of the outer drum and
the feed ports effective to define an enclosed channel of annu-
lar configuration between the shroud and the feed ports, the
shroud including a circumferential wall, and a hopper associ-
ated with the shroud for introducing aged mix into said chan-
nel, aged mix from the hopper entering the shroud circumfer-
ential wall tangentially thereof; means in conjunction with
rotation of the outer drum for moving virgin aggregate and
aged mix in a downstream direction through the interiors of
the outer and inner drums including flighting arranged about
the interiors of the outer and inner drums; and means for intro-
ducing fresh asphalt into the interior of the outer drum down-
stream of the inner drum, the improvement comprising: a pair
of annular side walls in said channel and carried upon the outer
drum wall, the side walls being respectively disposed upstream
and downstream of the feed ports and \n close proximity to the
interior of the shroud; a plurality of aged mix deflectors dis-
1. A mixiilg tower for the production of concrete, dry mor-
tar and like materials comprising:
a plurality of prefabricated, superimposed modules including
a lowermost module which constitutes at least the pre-
dominant source of support for the remainder of said
modules and a mixing module having a mixing device for
mixing ingredients to form a flowable product, said lower-
most module being in direct contact with a selected mod-
ule supported by the same, and said lowermost module
having a maximum transverse dimension as considered
along a predetermined direction which is smaller than the
corresponding maximum dimension of said selected mod-
ule so that the latter projects to at least two sides of said
lowermost module, at least one of said modules being
provided with outlet means for discharging the product
formed in said mixing module to transport means.
4 395 129
FEED SYSTEM FOR ASPHALT RECYCLING DRUM
MIXERS
Joseph E. Musil, Ely, Iowa, assignor to Iowa Manufacturing
Company of Cedar Rapids, Iowa, Cedar Rapids, Iowa
I Filed Feb. 4, 1982, Ser. No. 345,565
' Int. a.' B28C 1/22. 5/20. 5/46
U S. CI. 366—25 * Claims
1. In a drum mixer for recycling old asphalt pavement which
has been removed and sized to produce an aged mix, the mixer
including a cyhndrical outer drum having upstream and down-
stream ends; means for rotating the outer drum about its axis;
burner means at the outer drum upstream end for injecting hot
gases axially into the outer drum towards its downstream end;
means for introducing virgin aggregate into the outer drum
adjacent its upstream end; means for introducing aged mix into
the outer drum at a medial location thereon downstream of the
virgin aggregate introducing means, the aged mix introducing
posed in said channel, the deflectors being carried upon and
rotating with the outer drum relative to the shroud, the deflec-
tors having leading and trailing faces and ends with respect to
the direction of drum rotation, each deflector being secured
between the annular side walls and disposed in close proximity
to the interior of the shroud and one of the feed ports efl^ective
so that aged mix introduced into the shroud from the hopper is
immediately directed by the annular side walls and the deflec-
tor leading face into the associated feed pori and onto the
exterior of the inner drum during drum rotation; and a plurality
of flights circumferentially spaced about the exterior of the
inner drum between the same and the outer drum interior, the
flights having upstream and downstream ends corresponding
to said ends of the inner drum such that aged mix passing
through the feed ports contacts the flights adjacent their up-
stream ends and is directed therealong and the exterior of the
inner drum to the downstream ends of the flights and the inner
drum, aged mix thereupon joining virgin aggregate emerging
from the interior of the inner drum during drum rotation, the
flights extending in skewed relation to the drum axis so that
said flight upstream and downstream ends constitute leading
and trailing ends of the flights with respect to the direction of
drum rotation, the deflectors and the trailing edges of the feed
ports also extending in skewed relation in the same direction to
the drum axis as are said flights, the trailing ends of the deflec-
tors abutting respective ones of the trailing edges of the feed
ports.
1432
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,130
INTERCONNECTED PUMPING MECHANISM
Oleh Kutowy, R.R. #3, North Gower, Ontario, Canada
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 249,938
Int. a.' BOIF 5/12
U.S. a. 366—137 20 Claims
-/34
j{- SOLlOS/LlOUlO
S5 83 87
1. A dual pump comprising:
(a) a casing;
(b) a first pumping mechanism within said casing, said first
pumping mechanism having an operating shaft within said
casing, said operating shaft being operated by a motor,
said first pumping mechanism having pumping structure
so constructed and arranged as exclusively to provide a
high pressure, low volume liquid flow, said first pumping
mechanism having axial output;
(c) a second pumping mechanism within said casing, in
direct liquid flow connection with said first pumping
mechanism, said second pumping mechanism having an
- operating shaft within said casing, said operating shaft
being operated by the same said motor, said second pump-
ing mechanism having an axial input in direct liquid flow
connection to said axial output of said first pumping mech-
anism; said second pumping mechanism having a first
radial port at said direct liquid flow connection between
said first pumping mechanism and said second pumping
mechanism, and a second port at said opposite end
thereof; said second pumping mechanism having pumping
structure so constructed and arranged as exclusively to
provide a low pressure, high volume aqueous liquid flow;
and
(d) a connection between said first pumping mechanism and
said second pumping mechanism, said connection being
within said casing and being in the direct axial path of said
liquid flow, thereby obviating the need of the shaft seal
between the output of said first pumping mechanism and
the input of said second pumping mechanism.
(i) a housing having a feed opening in the upper part
thereof,
(ii) a rotating agitator in said housing,
(iii) a shaft drivingly connected to said agitator, and
(iv) a delivery opening in a lower part of said housing,
(b) a screw conveyor below said agitator hopper comprising
(i) a housing having an inlet in the upper part thereof in
communication with the outlet of said agitator hopper,
(ii) a conveyor screw in said housing having a shaft, and
(iii) a delivery conduit connected with said screw con-
veyor housing for receiving material therefrom and
having a cut-off valve therein,
(c) a weighing hopper including
(i) an inlet connected to the delivery conduit,
(ii) material receiving and weighing means, and
(iii) discharge means for discharging weighed material
therefrom, and
(d) drive means for said shafts of said agitator hopper and
screw conveyor including means for selectively varying
the speed thereof,
whereby the rate of delivery of material of said weighing
hopper may be selected to utilize the entire filling period
available at the slowest delivery speed and thereby to
obtain the least amount of material in flight subsequent to
the closure of said valve.
4,395,132
STIRRING GEAR WITH INTERNAL HEATING
Achiel Wyffels, Roeselare, Belgium, assignor to Constructie
Werkhuizen Vandekerckhove N.V., Roeselare, Belgium
Filed Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 220,920
Claims priority, application Belgium, Dec. 28, 1979, 880930
Int. C1.3 BOIF 15/06
U.S. CI. 366—147 19 Claims
^ 4,395,131
APPARATUS FOR AGITATING, CONVEYING AND
WEIGHING PARTICULATE MATERIAL
Robert C. Barlow, Seaford, Dei., assignor to O. A. Newton &
Son Company, Bridgeville, Del.
Filed Sep. 30, 1980, Ser. No. 192,376
Int. a.3 BOIF 15/02
U.S. a. 366—141 5 Oaims
_ JL
2S
GQ
)--
\
63 57 ^^^
^ B2
82
a
83 8S
J)
1. In combination,
(a) an agitator hopper comprising
1. Stirring gear with internal heating comprising a central
tubular shaft for the supply of the heat exchange medium and
stirring paddles mounted perpendicular to said shaft and pro-
vided with hollow inner spaces for the access of the heat
exchange medium, wherein a stirring paddle comprises a solid
plate with a hollow inner space therein and said space further
comprising a system of interconnecting ducts, wherein a num-
ber of said ducts extend substantially radially of said shaft and
a number of said ducts extend substantially transversely of said
shaft, wherein said transversely extending ducts define at least
one radial array of ducts, wherein adjacent said radial ducts are
interconnected by said radial array.
4,395,133
COOKING APPARATUS HAVING A STIRRING DEVICE
Roy L. R. Qevenholm, StafTanstorp, and Carl-Olof H. Mellq-
vist, Helsingborg, both of Sweden, assignors to Landskrona
Finans AB, Landskrona, Sweden
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,585
Oaims priority, application Sweden, Sep. 25, 1980, 8006705
Int. a.3 BOIF 7/32
U.S. a. 366—241 2 Qaims
1. A vessel provided with a stirring device for stirring con-
tents charged in the vessel comprising, a bowl shaped con-
JULY 26, 1982
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1433
tainer open at the top, tiltable support means operatively con-
nected to said container to support said container upright and
tilt said container for pouring the contents therefrom, and a
stirring device comprising a stirrer having a central shaft ex-
tending into said container from the top thereof sub"stantially
parallel with respect to the geometric central axis of said con-
tainer, and agitators attached to said central shaft to stir the
contents of the container when said shaft is rotated about its
longitudinal axis, a fixed conical stud at the bottom of said
container, a substantially conical recess in the bottom of said
stirrer operatively and removably engaging said stud so that
said stud rotatably supports said stirrer, a truss structure hav-
ing radial arms, detachable connectors for connecting the
radially outer ends of said truss arms adjacent the upper edge
of said container, a first angular ge?iring supported on said truss
structure adjacent the upper end of said central shaft, a stud
shaft operatively connected to said angular gearing and ex-
tending substantially parallel to said central shaft, quick cou-
pling means interconnecting said stud shaft and the upper end
of said central shaft, a radially extending stud shaft operatively
connected to said angular gearing, a radial drive shaft extend-
ing from adjacent the outer end of said radial stud shaft to a
position adjacent the outer top edge of said container, a quick
connect coupling interconnecting said radial stud shaft and the
radially inner end of said radial drive shaft, a drive motor
mounted on the outer side of said container adjacent the radi-
ally outer end of said radial drive shaft and having an output
shaft extending substantially perpendicular to said radial drive
shaft, a second angular gearing operatively connected to said
output shaft and having a stud shaft extending substantially
radially to a position adjacent the radially outer end of said
radial drive shaft, and a quick coupling means interconnecting
said outer end of said radial drive shaft and the adjacent end of
said stud shaft of said second angular gearing, so that said
container can be tilted while simultaneously operating said
stirrer by said drive motor.
4,395,134
JOYSTICK SWITCH FOR TIMEPIECES
Nunzio A. Luce, 39 Galston Dr., R.D. #4, Trenton, N.J.
08691
Int. a.5 G04B 47/00; G04F 8/00. 10/00
U.S. a. 368—3 10 Oaims
1. An electronic game timepiece having a display device for
displaying game elements and electronic circuitry including a
printed circuit board having a plurality of conductors thereon
connecting electronic-circuit elements on said printed circuit
board to drive said display device;
said electronic timepiece including a casing having said
display device and said electronic circuitry mounted
therein;
a joystick-type switch mounted on said timepiece casing and
adapted to be moved into a plurality of contacting posi-
tions;
said joystick-type switch having contacting means normally
spaced a distance away from said printed circuit board
conductors; and
a plurality of conductors mounted on said printed circuit
board in close proximity and corresponding to said con-
tacting means of said joystick-type switch, said plurality
of conductors being connected to said electronic-circuit
elements such that movement of said joystick-type switch
into each of its contacting positions causes simulated
displacement of at least one of said game elements across
said display device.
4,395,135
OPTIONAL ALARM AND BATTERY BACKUP SYSTEM
FOR A TALKING TIMEPIECE
Richard J. Frantz, Cheshire, Conn., assignor to Timex Corpora-
tion, Waterbury, Conn.
Filed May 6, 1982, Ser. No. 375,412
Int. O.^ G04B 21/08
U.S. O. 368—63 3 Oaims
i«r
*^TI"'
1. A talking timepiece including a keyboard having a voice/-
tone switch, a speech processor, and a tone alarm generator,
said timepiece having at least two modes of operation includ-
ing a first mode in which said voice/tone switch is provided
for selective manual switching between said speech processor
adapted to provide for audible speech sounds in the form of
voice messages for announcing time and said tone alarm gener-
ator adapted to provide for tone sounds for announcing time
and including a power supply failure mode in which said voi-
ce/tone switch is bypassed, said speech processor is disabled
and tone sounds are automatically produced by said tone alarm
generator for announcing time, said timepiece comprising:
a. a computer electrically coupled to said keyboard, to said
tone alarm generator and to said speech processor and
responsive to said selective manual switching of said voi-
ce/tone switch for controlling both said speech processor
to produce said voice messages at selected times and said
1434
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
tone alarm generator to produce said tone alarm sounds at
selected times during said first mode of timepiece opera-
tion; and, said computer adapted for automatically con-
trolling said tone alarm generator to produce said tone
sounds, independent of said selective manual switching of
said voice/tone switch, at predetermined times during
said power supply failure mode of timepiece operation,
b. a power supply for providing power to said computer and
said speech processor during said first mode of timepiece
operation,
c. a battery backup electrically coupled to said power supply
for providing power to substantially only said computer
during said power supply failure mode of timepiece opera-
tion when said power supply fails, and
d. circuit switching means electrically coupled to said power
supply and battery and to said computer and responsive to
a failure of said power supply for bypassing said voice/-
tone switch to provide for said computer to automatically
control said tone alarm generator independent of said
voice/tone switch to produce said tone alarm sounds at
predetermined times during said power supply failure
mode of timepiece operation.
resetting signal resetting said plurality of- partial counting
circuits of said counting circuit will be provided.
4,395,137
SYNCHRONIZING SYSTEM FOR OSOLLATING
MECHANISM
Wallace F. Wiley, 9200 Elmonte, Prairie Village, Kans. 66207
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,601
Int. a.3 G04B 17/02, 15/14, 17/12
U.S. a. 368—179 13 Qaims
4,395.136
ELECTRONIC TIMER
Kenichi Yoda, Hirakata; Hideo Togawa, Tsu; Eizou Ogawa, Ise,
and Masao Kayahara, Kadoma, all of Japan, assignors to
Matsushita Electric Works, Ltd. and Matsushita Electric
Industrial Co., Ltd., both of Osaka, Japan
Filed Jan. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 223,326
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jan. 17, 1980, 55-3845
Int. a.5 G06F 1/04
U.S. a. 368—156 8 Qaims
o«sd ^^\^
1. An electronic timer comprising a CR oscillating circuit, a
counting circuit including a plurality of partial counting cir-
cuits connected in cascade to one another for counting oscil-
lated outputs of said CR oscillating circuit, an output circuit
driving an associated following circuit in response to an output
selected out of outputs from one of said partial counting cir-
cuits in the final stage of said cascade connection, an automatic
resetting circuit for automatically resetting said plurality of
partial counting circuits of said counting circuit upon an appli-
cation of a source current, an external resetting circuit for
resetting the partial counting circuits in response to an external
signal, a test circuit for dividing said plurality of partial count-
ing circuits into a plurality of groups, and a test signal generat-
ing circuit for inspecting the function of each of said divided
groups by externally driving said test circuit, said external
resetting circuit and said test signal generating circuit being
formed of a common circuit comprising first and second in-
verting circuits receiving a common external signal and respec-
tively having a low inverting threshold value and a high in-
verting threshold value so that, when said external signal
reaches only said low inverting threshold value, a signal driv-
ing said test circuit will be provided and, when the external
signal reaches said high inverting threshold value, an external
1. Apparatus for enhancing the accuracy of a timing system
including a mechanism controlled by a powered oscillating
member, said apparatus comprising:
an oscillating structure having a greater mass than said
member;
a magnetic attracting device including a pair of components,
one of the components being carried by the member for
movement therewith and the other component being
carried by the structure for movement with the latter; and
means mounting the structure for oscillatdry movement on a
path of travel bringing the components periodically into
spaced apart mutually magnetically attracted relationship
during oscillation of the structure and the members,
whereby energy is transferred between the member and
structure through the device during such relationship to
govern the rate of oscillation of the member and to con-
tinue the oscillation of the structure.
4,395,138
ELECTRONIC TIMEPIECE
Hiroyuki Chihara, Suwa, Japan, assignor to Kabushiki Kaisha
Suwa Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 22, 1981, Ser. No. 266,674
Claims priority, application Japan, May 22, 1980, 55-68221;
May 22, 1980, 55-68222; May 22, 1980, 55-68223
Int. a.3 G04B 1/00
U.S. a. 368—204 16 Claims
'^$^-gTk&^^H^
*-E^;S
n
Ho»t».r hirl *•■"■" h pLiSii
1. In electronic timepiece including a time standard signal
generating circuit, divider circuit means receiving said stan-
dard signal and outputting timekeeping signals of lower fre-
quency, display means indicating at least timekeeping data, and
a source of voltage, and at least one heavy load circuit inter-
mittently operating and drawing a current from said voltage
source, said heavy load current being large in comparison with
normal operating current for timekeeping, the improvement
therein comprising:
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1435
a voltage reduction circuit, said reduction circuit providing
a voltage output which is a division of said source voltage;
a voltage regulation circuit, said regulation circuit providing
a constant voltage output;
power control circuit means for selecting one of said voltage
reduction and voltage regulation circuits to provide volt-
age input to said timekeeping circuits, said regulation
circuit being selected when said at least one heavy load
circuit operates, said reduction circuit being selected
when said at least one heavy load circuit is inoperative;
and
means for detecting operation of said at least one heavy load
circuit.
said piston means to tension the element and second means at
its other end for applying the force of said piston means to one
of said second structure and said bearing member to clamp said
4 395 139
TEMPERATURE DETECTING DEVICE
Masayuki Namiki; Masaaki Kamiya; Yoshikazu Kojima, and
Kojiro Tanaka, all of Tokyo, Japan, assignors to Kabushiki
Kaisha Daini Seikosha, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,492
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 14, 1980, 55-32215
Int. a.^ GOIK 7/00
U.S. a. 374—178 10 Cla™s
second structure and bearing member together with one of the
first and second means comprising a separable connection for
enabling the element to be removed from its receiving hole in
at least one of said second structure and said bearing member.
1. A temperature detecting device comprising: a constant
voltage circuit and a series circuit of a temperature detecting
means and a constant current circuit connected to a power
source in parallel, a resistance ladder circuit connected be-
tween an output terminal of said constant voltage circuit and
one terminal of said power source, means connecting an output
terminal of said resistance ladder circuit to a first input terminal
of a differential amplifier, and means connecting a second input
terminal of said differential amplifier to a connection point of
said temperature detecting means and the constant current
circuit, whereby a temperature signal is produced as an output
voltage of said differential amplifier.
4 395,141
BEARING AND SEAL ASSEMBLY FOR STERN TUBES
OF VESSELS
Giinter Pietsch; Gerhard Walten Giinter Mewes, all of Ham-
burg, and Gert Schrader, Rosengarten, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Howaldtswerke Deutsche Werft Ak-
tiengesellschaft Hamburg und Kiel, Hamburg, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,586
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 13,
1981, 3114494; Sep. 26, 1981, 3138413
Int. a.' F16C 33/74; F16J 15/40
U.S. a. 384—147 7 Oaims
v..
"^ "/L-h-*
4 395,140
BEARING MOUNTING WITH HYDRAULIC FASTENING
MEANS FOR CRANES AND THE LIKE
Harvey J. Sable, Hudson, Ohio, assignor to Rotek Incorporated,
Aurora, Ohio
FUed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,780
Int. a.3 F16C 27/00
U.S. CI. 384— 99 13 Oaims
1. In an apparatus having a multiload rolling contact bearing
for transmitting relatively high loads including moment loads
between first and second structures and having a bearing mem-
ber releasably connected to said second structure and a plural-
ity of spaced elongated clamping elements extending between
said bearing member and said second structure, said elements
extending through receiving holes in said bearing member and
second structure, the improvement comprising piston means
for tensioning said elements to apply a clampmg force between
said bearing member and said second structure, said piston
means being received in hydraulic chamber means on one of
said second structue and said bearing member for receiving
hydraulic pressure fluid to urge said piston means away from
said bearing member and said second structure for tensioning
said elements during operation of said bearing to transmit loads
between said structures, each of said elongated elements hav-
ing first means at one end thereof for transmitting the force of
1. In a bearing and seal assembly for stem tubes of vessels
wherein there is a rotatable stern shaft and a bearing surround-
ing a portion of the stem shaft and wherein there is means for
supplying oil under pressure to provide lubrication between
said bearing and said portion of the stem shaft, and wherein
there is an aft seal assembly surrounding said stem shaft at the
outboard end of said bearing, and wherein said aft seal assem-
bly contains two sealing elements spaced apart axially and an
annular chamber defined by said sealing elements and means
for applying a liquid lubricating the sealing elements into said
annular chamber under pressure, the improvement comprising
a gravity tank for a lubricant providing lubrication of the
bearing, the gravity tank being arranged inside the vessel
in a height to induce a head of the oil lower than the
possible minimum of the head of the sea-water sun-ound-
ing the aft seal assembly,
a circulation system for the liquid in the annular chamber,
1436
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
which comprises a tank for said liquid, the tank being an annular plate having an inner diameter slightly larger than
positioned inside the vessel in a height to induce a head of that of the inner ring; and
said liquid in said annular chamber lower than the head of a flexible, annular bearing pad comprising alternate layers of
the oil in the bearing, rigid material and elastomer stacked and bonded together,
a separating tank for separating and purifying the liquid, a
first pipe for said liquid connecting the upper part of the tank
with the annular chamber,
a second pipe for said liquid connecting the annular chamber
with the separating tank, and
pumping means for circulating said liquid from the tank
through said first pipe, circumferentially through said
annular chamber and through said second pipe to the ^m
separating tank which is connected with the tank inducing
the head of the liquid in the circulation system.
4,395,142
SELF-ADJUSTING ANGULAR CONTACT SPHERICAL
BEARING
John H. Lobeck, South Bend, Ind., assignor to The Torrington
Company, Torrington, Conn.
Filed Mar. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 245,180
Int. CV F16C 23/04
UJS. CI. 384—192
2 Claims
the bearing pad being bonded on one side to the thicker edge
of the inner ring; and
means for compressing said bearing assembly by moving the
annular plate toward the outer ring in an axial direction, and
moving the inner ring via the annular bearing pad.
1. A spherical bearing comprising: an outer race having a
curved, indented inner surface generally tapering inwardly
from one axial end of the outer race toward the other end; a
one piece support having an annular channel, the bottom sur-
face of the annular channel tapering toward the axis of the
support from one side of the annular channel to the other side
of the annular channel and in the same direction as the curved,
indented inner surface of the outer race; and a single removable
annular plastic liner snap fitted within said annular channel,
and having an inner surface complementary with the bottom
surface of the annular channel and an outer surface comple-
mentary with the curved, indented inner surface of the outer
race.
4,395,143
ANNULAR, FLEXIBLE BEARINGS FOR RADIAL LOADS
Gordon J. Bakken, Buzzards Bay, Mass.; Alfred R. Randall,
Brigham City, Utah, and Richard W. Bodily, Malad, Id.,
assignors to Thiokol Corporation, Newtown, Pa.
Filed Aug. 21, 1978, Ser. No. 934,754
Int. a.3 F16C 27/02
U.S. a. 384—221 4 Gaims
1. An annular, flexible bearing comprising:
a bearing assembly comprising concentric, annular, conic
layers of rigid material and similarly shaped layers of elasto-
mer alternately arranged therewith, each said layer being
bonded to adjacent layers;
an inner ring having an inner, cylindrical surface and an outer,
conic surface bonded to the inner, conic surface of the bear-
ing assembly;
an outer ring having an inner, conic surface bonded to the
outer conic surface of the bearing assembly;
4,395,144
APPARATUS FOR PRINTING ALPHANUMERIC
INFORMATION ON PHOTOGRAPHIC SLIDE MOUNTS
Daniel O. Adams, Blaine, and Gregg S. Beckman, St. Louis
Park, both of Minn., assignors to Pako Corporation, Minne-
apolis, Minn.
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,296
Int. a.^ B41 J i//a- B41F 77/00
U.S. a. 400—30 16 Qaims
1. Apparatus for printing alphanumeric information on pho-
tographic slide mounts, the apparatus comprising:
(a) a generally horizontal slide track along which the photo-
graphic slide mounts are advanced, the slide track having
an entrance end and an exit end and including a film
insertion station proximate the entrance end and a printing
station between the film insertion station and the exit end;
(b) film insertion means for causing a photographic film
transparency to be at least partially inserted into the slide
mount at the film insertion station;
(c) mount indexing means for causing the slide mount to be
indexed from station-to-station along the slide track;
(d) a frame positioned generally below the slide track which
includes first and second side supports and a top platform
having a printing aperture therein at the printing station of
the slide track;
(e) guide means cooperating with the platform for defining
the slide track from the film insertion station to the print-
ing station;
(0 a plurality of horizontal guides supported by the frame
and defining a carriage track, the horizontal guides and
carriage track both being positioned below the slide track
and carriage track being aligned in a plane parallel to a
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1437
plane defined by the slide track and running in a generally
transverse direction to the slide track;
(g) a carriage movable on the carriage track below the slide
track;
(h) a print head carried by the carriage below the slide track
for printing alphanumeric characters through the printing
aperture of the top platform of the frame onto a bottom
surface of a slide mount when the slide mount is posi-
tioned at the printing station of the slide track;
(i) carriage drive means for moving the carriage on the
carriage track; and
(j) control means for controlling the print head and the
carriage drive means to print selected alphanumeric infor-
mation on the slide mount positioned at the printing sta-
tion, the control means including:
(1) means for storing data representative of the alphanu-
meric information to be printed on the slide mount:
(2) means for providing a carriage drive control signal to
the carriage drive means to move the carriage in a
selected direction on the carriage track;
(3) means for providing signal pulses representative of the
incremental motion of the carriage on the carriage
track, the means for providing signal pulses including:
(A) a linear optical encoder having a first end portion, a
second end portion and an intermediate portion, with
a plurality of lines spaced at predetermined incremen-
tal distances being carried on the intermediate portion
of the linear optical encoder;
(B) optical sensor means for optically sensing the lines
of the linear optical encoder and producing signal
pulses as the linear optical encoder moves relative to
the optical sensor means as a result of movement of
the carriage on the carriage track;
(C) aperture plate means having an aperture which
defines a window portion of travel of the carriage on
the carriage track during which actuation of the print
head is permitted; and
(D) window sensor means for optically sensing the
aperture and producing a signal as relative movement
of the aperture occurs as a result of movement of the
carriage on the carriage track; and
(4) means for controlling the print head as a function of
the stored data and the signal pulses, the means for
controlling the print head initiating operation of the
print head after a first predetermined number of signal
pulses have been provided and being responsive to the
signal from the window sensor means to disable the
print head when the carriage is outside of the window
portion of travel.
printing device mounted on said carriage, wherein said frame
has two lateral pivots which lie adjacent to the lateral ends of
said guides on an axis parallel to said platen in such a way that
said guides can swing about said axis while remaining con-
stantly parallel to said platen, wherein a motor mounted on
said base controls the displacement of said carriage along said
guides by means of a flexible connection cable, wherein a
coaxial hole is provided in each one of said lateral pivots of said
frame and wherein said fiexible cable passes through the coax-
ial hole of said pivots.
4,395,146
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR OPERATING A
THERMAL PRINTER WITH UNIFORM HEAT
DISTRIBUTION
Kiyoshi Arai, Higashikurume, Japan, assignor to Sony Corpora-
tion, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,064
Oaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 6, 1980, 55-156242
Int. C1.5 B41J 3/04; GOID 15/10: G08B 5/36
U.S. a. 400—121 10 Claims
4,395,145
SERIAL PRINTER
Felice Giacone, Giaveno; Raffaele Becchi, and Boris Ukmar,
both of Ivrea, all of Italy, assignors to Ing. C. Olivetti. & C,
S.P.A., Italy
FUed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,911
Claims priority, application Italy, Jun. 5, 1980, 67869 A80
Int. a.3 B41J 1/24. 19/20, 11/20
U.S. a. 400—59 1* Claims
^-&^
1. Apparatus for controlling a printer of the kind having m
blocks of print heads, each block including n print heads (m
and n are integers), comprising storage means for storing data
representing the selective energization of said print heads;
selecting means for selecting a group of nonadjacent data in
each block, where the number of data in each said group is less
than n; and energizing means responsive to said data for ener-
gizing print heads in each block corresponding to said selected
group of data, each successive block being energized sequen-
tially, said selecting means including means for selecting a
different group of data following each energization of the
corresponding print heads in the m-th block.
1. A serial printer comprising a base, a platen mounted on
said base, a frame pivoted on said base and including guides
parallel to said platen, a carriage slideable on said guides and a
4,395,147
DAISY WHEEL PRINTER
Gerald Avison, Cambridge, and Philip T. Blenkinsop, Herts,
both of England, assignors to Spiralux Limited, Kent, England
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,758
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 9, 1980,
8022459
Int. a? B41J 1/30
U.S. a. 400—144.2 * Claims
1. A printer having a printing head comprising:
a daisy wheel including a plurality of radial sulks, each of
said stalks having a zone, the radial position of said zones
being identical for all of said stalks;
at least one slit-like aperture at said zone of each said stalk,
said at least one aperture being positioned so as to divide
said stalk into at least two branches of equal circumferen-
tial width, said stalks and apertures being sized and config-
ured such that equal circumferential widths are provided
1438
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
; for said apertures and the spacing between branches of
adjacent ones of said stalks;
means for rotating said daisy wheel; and
non-contacting sensor means constructed and adapted for
providing a signal in response to a sensed transition of an
respectively said plurality of different positions of the
ribbon guide.
4,395,148
POSITIONING OF A MULTICOLOR RIBBON
Manfred Griiner, Ulm, and Wolfgang Hendrischk, Neu-Ulm,
both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Mannesmann
Aktiengesellschaft, Dusseldorf, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,874
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 15,
1980, 3014820
Int. a.3 B41J 35/14
U.S. a. 400—212 5 Oaims
1. In a printer having a movable carriage with a print head
mounted thereon, an arrangement for obtaining different color
printings, there being an ink ribbon having a plurality of ink
tracks, comprising:
a ribbon guide displaceably mounted on the head for holding
the ribbon in front of the head in a plurality of different
positions so that different ink tracks face the head;
at least two electromagnets, respectively having plungers,
and each one providing either a fully retracted or a fully
protracted plunger position;
first lever means, including a one-arm lever pivoted at one
end about a point fixed relative to the carriage, and being
coupled to the plungers, to establish four different dis-
placement positions of the free end of the one-arm lever,
the positions depending upon the combination of states of
energization and de-energization of the magnets, there
being four such combination states accordingly; and
second lever means connected to the one arm lever at a point
between a pivot point of the one-arm lever and the free
end thereof for translating the four displacement positions
thereof into four different guide positions for establishing
4,395,149
RIBBON DRIVE MECHANISM
Scott J. Longrod, Woodbury, Conn., assignor to SCM Corpora-
tion, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,342
Int. a.3 B41J 33/18. 35/10
U.S. a. 400—215 3 Qaims
edge of one of said branches as said daisy wheel is rotated,
whereby a train of said signals is generated at regular
intervals during rotation of said wheel, the frequency of
said signals being a multiple of the number of said stalks
passing said sensor means.
1. A system for feeding a ribbon in typewriters and similar
machines having a frame and a print point comprising:
a supply spool fixed with respect to the frame carrying a
supply of ribbon;
a ribbon guide fixed with respect to the frame for guiding the
ribbon from the supply spool towards the print point;
a bracket vertically moveable relative to the frame;
a take-up spool mounted on the bracket for vertical move-
ment therewith and for receiving the ribbon from the
supply spool;
a ribbon guide mounted on the bracket for vertical move-
ment therewith for guiding the ribbon from the fixed
ribbon guide toward the take-up spool;
means for raising the bracket for raising the ribbon to the
print point;
"means for incrementally winding the ribbon on the take-up
spool for feeding the ribbon relative to the print point
including;
a metering disc (78) mounted on the bracket (26) for
vertical movement therewith for rotating the take-up
spool (14),
a feed pawl (82) mounted for movement with the bracket
and engaging the metering disc,
a shaft (104) mounted on the frame,
a lifting arm (100) pivotably mounted directly on the shaft,
a first pin (108) for coupling the feed pawl to the lifting
arm and located a predetermined distance from the
shaft, and
a second pin (96) for coupling the bracket to the lifting
arm for moving the lifting arm in response to the verti-
cal movement of the bracket, the second pin located a
distance from the shaft less than the predetermined
distance of the first pin from the shaft causing the lifting
arm to move the first pin a greater amount than the
movement of the second pin for moving the feed pawl
relative to the bracket to advance the metering disc for
feeding the ribbon relative to the print point.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1439
4,395,150
TYPEWRITER DEaMAL TAB MECHANISM
Jorge Costa, Yverdon, Switzerland, assignor to Hermes Precisa
International S.A., Yverdon, Switzerland
PCT No. PCT/CH79/00024, § 371 Date Oct. 14, 1979, § 102(e)
Date Aug. 28, 1979, PCT Pub. No. WO79/00621, PCT Pub.
Date Sep. 6, 1979
PCT Filed Feb. 13, 1979, Ser. No. 166,972
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Feb. 14, 1978,
1607/78
Int. a.3 B41J 21/14
U.S. a. 400—285 7 Qaims
coupling said bracket means to said first side frame, said
bracket means including inwardly and downwardly slop-
ing slot means in each leg of said bracket means and adja-
cent to the open end of said U-shaped bracket means for
retentatively receiving said axle of said idler pulley;
clamping means consisting of screw means for selectively
freeing or fixing the pivot action of said bracket means;
spring means for exerting belt-tightening pressure against
said U-shaped bracket means when said bracket means is
1. Decimal tab mechanism for a typewriter of the type hav-
ing a printing element carried on a carriage moving parallel to
a platen, said mechanism comprising a tab bar capable of being
displaced longitudinally and comprising a series of tab blades
which may be separately selected, activation means for activat-
ing the tab blades selected to place said selected tab blades in
active position for cooperation with a carriage stop, an assem-
bly of decimal tab stops each controlled by a key on a key-
board so as to be activated and made to cooperate with a tab
bar stop, and a drive shaft connected by temporary coupling
means to a continuously rotating machine function shaft, char-
acterized in that the decimal tab mechanism comprises an
apparatus for displacing the tab bar longitudmally ahead in the
direction of typing, said apparatus being activated by the drive
shaft by spring means, a first lever rotating around a stationary
axis and disposed orthogonally to the rotation axis of the drive
shaft, a control lever having a cam driving the means for
activating the selected tab blade, said control lever and cam
being integral with the drive shaft and acting on said activation
means before the longitudinal displacement of the tab bar, a
first angle plate swivelling around said stationary axis and
having a nose which rests against the control lever, said spring
means including a first spring urging said nose against said
control lever, a second spring connecting said first angle plate
to said first lever so that a rotation of the control lever is
transmitted elastically to a rotation of the first lever cooperat-
ing with the tab bar, said first lever comprising clips which
engage in an arm of an axle coaxial to the tab bar in such a way
that a rotation of the first lever effects a sliding of said tab bar,
and connection means between the drive shaft and the decimal
tab stops, said connection means including devices for moving
a selected decimal tab stop into active position only after longi-
tudinal displacement of the tab bar.
' ' 4,395,151
PRINT HEAD DRIVE BELT TENSIONING MEANS AND
METHOD FOR LINE PRINTER
Horst M. Krenz, St. Joseph, Mich., assignor to Zenith Radio
Corporation, Glenview, III.
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,663
Int. a.3 B41J 19/14
U.S. a. 400—320 2 Qaims
1. For use in a line printer having a print head for traversing
between a first side frame and a second side frame of said
printer, said print head being driven in its traverse by a flexible
synchronous belt close-looped around a synchronous idler
pulley rotatably mounted on an axle external to said first side
frame and a motor-driven synchronous pulley external to said
second side frame, improved means for providing and main-
taining a predetermined tension on said belt comprising:
U-shaped bracket means for supporting said idler pulley,
said bracket means including pivot means adjacent to the
closed end of said U-shaped bracket means for pivotally
«, 69
free to pivot for providing a predetermined pressure on
said belt;
such that when said clamping means is set to free the pivot
action of said U-shaped bracket means, said idler pulley
support means and said pulley pivot in response to said
belt-tightening pressure of said spring means, and when
said pivot means is thereafter fixed by said clamping
means, said predetermined tension on said belt is main-
tained without an undesired continual pressure on said
belt by said spring means.
4,395,152
DRIVE FOR FRICTION ROLLS IN PRINTERS
Wolfgang Hendrischk, Neu-Ulm, Fed. Rep. of Germany, as-
signor to Mannesmann Aktiengesellschaft, Diisseldorf, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,408
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 14,
1980, 3014609
Int. Q.' B41J 11/50. 19/78
U.S. Q. 400—569 8 Claims
1. Friction drive in printers, including a common shaft and
first and second juxtaposed friction rolls, journaled on that
shaft, the improvement comprising:
a differential having a cage and two meshing planet gears
journaled on the cage for revolving about the shaft, the
planet gears being in engagement with each other;
first and second gears disposed respectively inside the first and
second rolls and respectively meshing the planet gears for
driving engagement; and —
holding means for selectively holding the first roll or the sec-
ond roll so that the respective other one is driven via the
respective planet gear as engaging respectively the first or
1440
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
the second gear pertaining to the roll not being held by the
holding means.
435,153
HLE
Huibertus Schimmel, Alphen aan den Rijn, Netherlands, as-
signor to Samson Efficiency B.V., Alphen aan den Rijn, Neth-
erlands
Filed Sep. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 306,630
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Aug. 14, 1981,
8103821
Int. a.3 B42F 13/06
U.S. a. 402—15 13 Qaims
J>>v,
1. A file, comprising a cover and at least two securing mem-
bers, each securing member being formed of an oblong, nar-
row lacing portion pointed at one end and connected at its
other end to a foot portion which is short and wide with re-
spect to the facing portion; said cover being connected to a
support sheet wherein at least two inserting openings, which
are wide with respect to the foot, and pertaining to each insert-
ing opening, at least one protruding opening and one securing
opening are provided, said protruding openings and said secur-
ing openings being narrower than the foot of the securing
member so that the securing member is insertable and lacable
with its p)oint through the inserting opening and subsequently
through the protruding opening, resulting in that the foot will
be hooked on the support sheet at the protruding opening
whereas, after possibly lacing the lacing portion through sheet
material to be filed in the file, the point of the lacing portion is
insertable through the securing opening; the distance between
the inserting opening and the pertaining protruding opening
being larger than the length of the foot portion, measured
along the longitudinal axis of a securing member.
4,395,154
GEODESIC DOME CONNECTOR
Martha E. PhilUps, 3906 Ridgecroft Rd., Baltimore, Md. 21206,
and Roger A. Dudik, 21619 Gunpowder Rd., Lineboro, Md.
21088
Filed Oct. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 307,530
Int. a.3 F16B 7/00
U.S. a. 403—172 2 Cbiims
1. In a connector for geodesic dome struts, having a tubular
hub wall of axially aligned facets forming interior comers of
the hub wall, with a plurality of arms radiating lengthwise
from respective of the facets in peripheral angular spacing and
in elevational-angle relation to respective of said facets, the
improvement comprising: said arms being perpendicular to
resp)ective of said facets in plan view, and a system for assem-
bly to comprise a said connector with selected said peripheral
angular-spacing between said arms, at least a majority of said
arms being paired in plane-parallel relation, said system for
assembly including means for bracing the hub-wall against
forces applied in any direction along said struts, said hub wall
and means for bracing being separate and requiring assembly,
means rendering said hub wall flexible for assembly, and said
hub wall flexibly guidable on said means for bracing during
assembly, including: said bracing means being in the form of a
gusset for assembly to said hub wall, a plurality of peripheral
edges on said gusset in pre-selected adjacent relation for corre-
spondence with respective adjacent facets of said hub wall, the
means rendering the hub wall flexible for assembly to the
gusset comprising said hub wall being in two separate periph-
erally extending pieces prior to assembly, said two separate
peripherally extending pieces being substantially equal in pe-
ripheral extension, said means rendering the hub wall flexible
for assembly further including said peripheral extension leav-
ing peripheral gaps between said two separate peripherally
extending pieces on assembly, said peripheral gaps propor-
tioned for receiving material for joining said at least two sepa-
rate peripherally extending pieces on assembly, and means for
better conforming the gusset to the hub wall on assembly,
comprising said adjacent edges on the gusset being straight and
with the corners cut off leaving respective spacings at the
interior corners of the hub wall.
4,395,155 —
REFLECnVE HIGHWAY MARKER
Frank Bartolotti, Camby Rd., Millbrook, N.Y. 12545, and Doug-
las Dockstader, 48 High Meadows Pk., Dover Plains, N.Y.
12522
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 178,990
Int. a,3 EOIF 9/04
U.S. a. 404—9 5 Oaims
1. A method of providing a reflective marker in a highway,
comprising the steps of:
(a) forming in a highway pavement an elongated groove
oriented with its longitudinal axis entending substantially
longitudinally of the highway, and
(b) affixing the said groove a reflective highway marker
whose height does not exceed the depth of the groove at
the place of affixation,
(c) said reflective highway marker having a reflective sur-
face which is oriented to face oncoming vehicles,
(d) the length and depth of the groove forward of said reflec-
tive highway marker being sufficient to expose said reflec-
tive surface to drivers of oncoming vehicles when their
approach distance from the reflective highway marker is
adequate for highway guidance purposes,
(e) the groove which is formed in the highway pavement
being narrower that the width of vehicle tires to prevent
destructive contact between the vehicle tires and the
reflective highway marker,
(0 said elongated groove being tapered in depth forward of
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1441
the reflective highway marker from substantially zero
depth where the groove terminates at the pavement of the
highway to a depth substantially corresponding to the
height of the reflective highway marker at the place of
affixation thereof,
(g) the length of the elongated groove formed in the high-
way pavement ranging from approximately 1 foot to
approximately 3 feet,
(h) the length of the elongated groove forward of the reflec-
tive surface ranging from approximately 1 foot to approxi-
mately 1 foot, 6 inches,
(i) the depth of the elongated groove at the place of affixa-
tion of the reflective highway marker approximating 1
inch,
(j) the width of the elongated groove ranging from approxi-
mately 1.5" to approximately 3.5", and
(k) the reflective surface on the reflective highway marker is
inclined rearwardly from its lower to its upper edge at an
angle ranging from approximately 1 degree to approxi-
mately 5 decrees from the vertical.
4,395,156
SURFACE MATERIAL SPREADING
Henry W. Sprague, III, 21 Geneva Walk, Long Beach, Calif.
90803
Filed Aug. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 176,286
Int. Cl.^ EOIL 19/18
U.S. CI. 404—110 »<» ^^'aii^s
and the height adjusting structures lie outside the width of
the arms.
4,395,157
SAFETY OFF-SHORE DRILLING AND PUMPING
PLATFORM
Byron H. Cunningham, 1661 Los Piedras Ct., Los Gatos, Calif.
95030
Filed Jul. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 281,575
Int. CI.' E62B / 7/00; E02D 23/00
U.S. CI. 405—60 ♦ Claims
12. A particulate material spreader rake for use with a vehi-
cle already fitted with an attachment lifter capable of pulling it
and a pile of particulate material when the spreader rake is
disposed at the rear of said vehicle and is mounted on said
lifter, said spreader rake comprising:
a bucket formed by a transverse back plate and side plates;
means for attaching said bucket to an attachment lifter such
that the back plate is held in a substantially vertical plane
transverse to the direction in which it is to be pulled; and
height selection means for holding said transverse plate at a
selected height above a roadway independently of the
action of said lifting means but held down by side arm
hydraulic force;
said attachment means comprising a pair of arms, extending
substantially in parallel one to the other, each fixed at a
first end thereof to a respectively associated one of said
end plates; ^ e a
a pair of bucket extensions carried one on each end ot said
bucket and extending parallel with said arms respectively,
and downwardly therefrom, and forward from said end
plates; . r u r
means for adjusting the height of the lower edge of each of
said bucket extensions above the roadway relative to the
position of said transverse plate above said roadway; and
said end plates lying in parallel planes perpendicular to the
plane of said transverse plate, said arms being fixed to
respectively associated ones of said end plates at the outer
opposite said transverse plate;
said means for adjusting height comprising two indepen-
dently acting structures each fixed to a respectively asso-
ciated one of said arms adjacent to, and at the side of the
arm opposite from, the end plate associated with said one
arm whereby said arms lie outside the width of the bucket
1. A safety off-shore drilling, pumping and storage platform
comprising in combination:
a. a surface floating platform comprising a catchment basin
in the form of a first inverted funnel having flotation
means thereon and flexible means for anchoring said plat-
form to the ocean floor,
b. a second catchment basin being in the form of an inverted
submerged funnel, said basin having flotation means
thereon and flexible anchoring means for attaching said
funnel to the ocean floor, and
c. a flexible lightweight tube connecting said lower funnel to
said upper funnel.
4,395,158
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR ENTRENCHING AN
ENLONGATED UNDERWATER STRUCTURE
Jerry A. Brooks, Rte. 2, Box 204, Silver Creek, Miss. 39663
Filed Jan. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 227,219
Int. a.5 E02F 5/08
U.S. CI. 405—161 1* Claims
1. Apparatus for entrenching an elongate submarine struc-
ture such as a pipe or cable comprising
a vehicle having a front and a rear and adapted to be moved
along the floor of a body of water;
a first auger assembly mounted at a location offset toward
one side of the vehicle;
a second auger assembly mounted at a location ofl^set toward
the other side of the vehicle;
means mounting said assemblies on said vehicle for move-
ment to a first position in which the augers are spaced
apart to receive therebetween the pipeline to be en-
trenched, and to a second position in which the augers are
inclined inwardly and lower end portions of the auger
assemblies are adjacent to each other beneath the elongate
structure; .
motor means on said vehicle for moving said augers to said
first and second positions;
1442
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
each auger assembly comprising 4,395,160
an auger having an upper portion and a lower portion; TENSIONING SYSTEM FOR MARINE RISERS AND
motor means for rotating the auger; GUIDELINES
a casing partially surrounding said lower portion to leave a Sijtze deJong, San Jose, Calif., assignor to Lockheed Corpora-
front face of the auger exposed for cutting, said casing *'**"' Burbank, Calif.
Filed Dec. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 216,800
U.S. CI. 405—195
Int. C1.^E02B 77/00
46 Claims
cooperating with said auger to convey bottom material
toward the upper portion of the auger; and
casing means substantially enclosing said upper portion and
cooperating with said upper portion for conveying the
material away from the trench thus formed by the augers.
4,395,159
MECHANICAL PROTECTION COATING FOR COATED
METAL SUBSTRATE
Ergo Karuks, Don Mills, and Martin Rohn, Willowdale, both of
Canada, assignors to FRC Composites Limited, Don Mills,
Canada
Filed Feb. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 235,719
Claims priority, application Canada, Jun. 6, 1980, 353491
Int. CI.' F16L 1/04
U.S. a. 405—172 16 Claims
1. A method of maintaining substantially constant tension on
an elongate structure, said elongate structure being secured to
a stationary underwater object and extending upward to a
buoyant object, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) positioning a weighted structure in proximity to said
elongate structure;
(b) positioning first rack means to interact with said elongate
structure so that said elongate structure restrains upward
motion of said first rack means;
(c) securing second rack means to said weighted structure,
said second rack means facing said first rack means;
(d) securing pinion means to said buoyant object, said pinion
means extending between said first and second rack means
and having teeth that mesh with corresponding teeth on
said first and second rack means, gravity acting down-
ward on said weighted structure thereby causing said
second rack means to exert a torque on said pinion means
that causes said pinion means to impart an upward force to
said first rack means, said pinion means undergoing rota-
tional motion as said buoyant object changes position
relative to said underwater object, said rotational motion
of said pinion means causing said pinion means to travel
vertically along said first rack means and to produce
concomitant vertical motion of said weighted structure
relative to said elongate structure, said upward force
imparted to said first rack means remaining substantially
constant as said pinion means travels along said first rack
means, thereby causing a substantially constant upward
tension to be transmitted to said elongate structure.
1. In combination with an elongated metal pipe having a thin
smooth corrosion protective coating thereon, said corrosion
protective coating being one of an epoxy coating, a polyethyl-
ene coating, a polyurethane coating and a coal tar coating, a
thin cementitious coating adhered to said corrosion protective
coating to provide protection for said corrosion protective
coating, said cementitious coating being capable of fiexing
with said pipe and comprising: a cementitious material, a fine
filler material of quantity in the range of 0 to 3.5 parts by
weight per part of said cementitious material, a polymeric
material of quantity in the range 0.05 to 0.55 parts by weight of
polymer solids per part of said cementitious material, chopped
fibres or flakes of quantity in the range 0 to 0.20 parts by
weight per part of said cementitious material, the thickness of
said cementitious coating being between 0.5 to 5.0 millimeters,
said coating adhering to said corrosion protective coating, said
cementitious coating having substantial electrical conductivity
when saturated with water, to enable cathodic protection of
said pipe by an electric current conducted through said cemen-
titious coating.
4,395,161
TRANSITION PLATE FOR A MINE ROOF TRUSS
Edwin B. Wilson, Quakertown; C. Frederick Eben, Laureldale;
Charles L. Meyer, Bethlehem, and Charles W. Schaeffer,
Lebanon, all of Pa., assignors to Bethlehem Steel Corporation,
Bethlehem, Pa.
Filed Nov. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 323,151
Int. aj E21D 20/00
U.S. a. 405—259 7 Qaims
1. A transition plate for connecting the inclined and horizon-
tal chords of a mine roof truss comprising a generally flat body
having a longitudinal axis extending between the body ends,
one face of said flat body defining a generally planar plate
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1443
bearing surface adapted to be closely received against a mine
roof, a first opening in said flat body adjacent one end of the
flat body positioned on said longitudinal axis and adapted to
receive a mine roof bolt, and an elongated saddle portion
extending outwardly from said one face along said longitudinal
axis adjacent said other end adapted to receive a tie member.
I ' 4,395,162
CARTRIDGE FOR USE IN ANCHOR BOLTING
John M. Murphy, Mansfield; Robert H. Spensley, Swanwick,
and John Ellis, Sutton in Ashfield, all of England, assignors to
Societe Anonyme d'Explosifs et de Produits Chimiques, Paris,
France
Filed Jun. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 277,343
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 23, 1980,
8024033
Int. a.3 E21D 20/02: B65D 25/OS
U.S. a. 405—261 * Claims
above said canopy, a substantially vertical shield extend-
ing downwardly along one edge of said canopy, and a seat
on said vertical shield; and
means defining a vertical pivot axis for said cab at a corner
of said canopy remote from said shield whereby said cab
is integrally swingable from an internal position wherein
said canopy forms the sole roof for said driving station to
an external position wherein said shield covers and pro-
tects said operating station and extends downwardly be-
hind an operator working said tool from said operating
station.
~^~I0
1. An anchoring cartridge for use in anchoring a reinforcing
or fixing element in a borehole in a substrate, said cartridge
comprising: . ^ r .
a frangible flexible, sealed casing formed from an mert,
liquid-impermeable material; and
a particulate liquid-settable solid component in said casing,
said cartridge being at least partially evacuated so as to
cause the casing to be in contact with the solid component
over substantially its whole outer surface within the cas-
ing, said casing material being perforable to permit ingress
of liquid therethrough upon perforation thereof and upon
immersion in a body of the component-setting liquid.
4,395,163
MINING APPLIANCE
Raymond J. Perraud, Villeurbanne, France, assignor to Societe
d'Etude et de Construction de Machines pour Toutes Indus-
tries S.E.C.O.M.A. S.A., Meyzieu, France
Filed Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,683
Qaims priority, application France, Oct. 26, 1979, 79 27267
Int. Cl.^ E21C 11/ 02
U.S. CI. 405-303 ♦ C'"'"*
4 395,164
PNEUMATIC TUBE INSTALLATION FOR POSTING
SAMPLES OF MATERIAL
Herbert Beltrop, Hamm; Josef Teutenberg, Beckum, and Man-
fred Hilbig, Neubeckum, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Krupp Polysius AG, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 133,982, Mar. 26, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 907,009, May 18,
1978, abandoned. This application May 28, 1981, Ser. No.
267,800
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 20,
1977, 2722865
Int. a.' B65G 57/26
U.S. a. 406—74 ^ Claims
1 In a traveling mining machine with an internal driving
station for controlling the movement of the machine, an oper-
ating station located on a side of said machine, and a tool
controlled by the operating station, the improvement which
comprises: , r _ j
a cab including a substantially horizontal canopy formed
with openings enabling an operator to observe an area
1. In an installation for automatically posting a sample car-
rier between at least one dispatch station and a receiving sta-
tion, said installation comprising pneumatic tube means com-
municating at one end with one end of one of said stations and
at its opposite end with one end of the other of said stations and
through which tube means said carrier may travel between
said dispatch station and said receiving station, and air blower
means coupled to said tube means and operable to effect move-
ment of said carrier through said tube means, the improvement
comprising carrier support means at least at one of said stations
and having an opening therein for the accommodation of said
carrier means mounting said support means for movements
between a plurality of positions at said one of said stations;
driving means for moving said support means between said
positions in one of which said opening is aligned with said tube
means; sealing means for efl^ecting a seal between said tube
means and said support means when the latter is in said one of
said positions; means for adjusting said sealing means to break
said seal prior to movement of said support means from said
one of said positions to another; clamp means carried by said
support means; and means for moving said clamp means into
engagement with said one of said carriers prior to movement of
said support means from said one of said positions.
1444
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4^95,165
CHIP SHUTTLE TRACK
Ignatius J. DeRobertis, Poughquag; Javathu K. Hassan, Hope-
well Junction; Robert L. Judge, Poughkeepsie, and John A.
Paivanas, Hyde Park, all of N.Y., assignors to International
Business Machine Corp., Armonk, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,292
Int. a.3 B65G 51/02
U.S. a. 406—88 8 Oaims
»^
nil ~
M M H n ni
■ ■NHH
e
1. An air film conveyor and transporting prismatic conduc-
tor chips, the chips having a spaced distribution of a plurahty
of hemispheric solder mounds within an area on a surface
facing said air film, said conveyor comprising:
(a) a base plate, and a pair of upstanding side guide walls
extending longitudinally of said base plate, said guide
walls being spaced apart a distance slightly greater than
the lateral dimension of said chips;
(b) means providing a motion-controlling laminar air flow,
which surrounds the chips and forms an air film support-
ing said chips and propelling them downstream such that
the slight spacing between the chips and the guide walls
causes the flow resistance to be higher in the one region
defined by such slight spacing than in the region defined
by the longitudinal spacing between the ends of individual
chips, whereby a continuous and flexible separation action
occurs between the chips;
(c) the volumetric fiow rate of air per foot of conveyor being
in the range of 0.0005 to 0.015 standard cubic feet per
second.
4,395,166
FLUIDIZATION AND DISTRIBUTION
Leon Ulveling, Howard, Luxembourg, assignor to Paul Wurth
S.A., Luxembourg
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,511
Claims priority, application Luxembourg, Apr. 4, 1980, 82336
Int. a.' B65G 53/36
U.S. a. 406—124 20 Claims
1. In a process for transportation of a pulverized material,
the material being delivered to and temporarily stored in a first
container and being subsequently fed from the first container
to a second container, the material being thereafter withdrawn
from the second container and fluidically conveyed to a con-
suming device, the improvement comprising:
injecting a pressurized gas into the second container to
maintain a pressure therein greater than the consuming
device pressure;
venting some of said gas from the second container;
filtering pulverized material from the vented gas;
increasing the pressure of the vented and filtered gas;
re-injecting at least a portion of the vented and pressurized
gas into the second container;
selectively delivering gas to the first container at a pressure
which is at least as high as the pressure within the second
container;
establishing communication between the first and second
containers during the delivery of pressurized gas to the
first container whereby the pressurized gas aids in feeding
material from the first container into the second container;
and
continuing to vent gas from the second container during the
time that communication is established between the con-
tainers whereby at least a portion of the gas injected into
the second container is filtered, increased in pressure and
thereafter delivered to the first container.
4,395,167
ROUTER ESPECIALLY FOR USE AS A nBER-METAL
CUTTER
Fred Maternus, Chicago, III., assignor to National Carbide Tool,
Inc., Skokie, III. _
Filed Mar. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 241,489
Int. a.3 B26D 1/12; B23B 27/10
U.S. a. 407—54 — 14 Oaims
1. A router comprising a shaft having at least two intersect-
ing sets of fiutes formed thereon, wherein each of said flutes is
turned in the same direction, said two sets overlapping in any
circumference of said shaft, each flute in a first of said sets
having an edge for cutting a kerf, and each flute in a second of
said sets having a relatively large cross-section to carry debris
cut away by said first set, the pitch angle of both sets of said
flutes and the cutting edge of said first set of flutes being such
that said router turns in a direction which drives cutting debris
downwardly.
4,395,168
MULTIPLE CUTTER ROTARY TOOL
Frank Vicari, 249 Conklin St., Farmingdale, N.Y. 11735
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,397
Int. a.3 B27C 3/00
U.S. a. 408—20 19 Qaims
1. A tool for use with a rotary drive for cutting a workpiece,
comprising:
a disc -shaped body having centrally located means for
mounting to the rotary drive and defining an axis of rota-
tion;
a first plurality of elongate (apertures) slots formed substan-
tially radially in said disc -shaped body and passing
through from one side to the other side of said disc-shaped
body and being adapted for receiving a first tool bit in
each of said first plurality of slots;
each of said first plurality of slots being elongated to have a
length substantially greater than a width of said first tool
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1445
bit to permit said first tool bit to be positioned at prese-
lected points along the length of said first elongate slot;
a second plurality of slots formed in the rim of the said
disc-shaped body pointing generally ouwardly from the
center of said disc -shaped body and being adapted for
receiving a second tool bit in each slot; and
a third plurality of slots formed in one side of said body and
the rim of said disc-shaped body and not extending
through said body and pointing generally outwardly from
longitudinally through said bit body and opening to said
end face;
one of said two side faces having semi-cylindrical convex
surface extending radially outwardly from said comer and
a flat surface extending radially outwardly from said semi-
cylindrical surface to the periphery of said cylindrical bit
body;
said semi-cylindrical surface and said flat surface extending
along the longitudinal axis of said bit body;
said semi-cylindrical surface terminating at its forward end
in an arcuate inward cutting edge while said flat surface
terminates at its forward end in a straight outward cutting
edge;
said arcuate inward cutting edge and said straight outward
cutting edge sloping radially outwardly in a direction
away from said forward end of said drill bit body;
said forward end of said drill bit having an apex in the vicin-
ity of said longitudinal axis, and the inner end of said
arcuate inward cutting edge being disposed at said apex of
said forward end; and
said arcuate inward cutting edge being offset from said
straight outward cutting edge when viewed from the
forward end of said bit body.
the center of said body and being adapted for receiving at
least one of the first tool bits in each slot, whereby upon
said disc-shaped body being mounted to the rotary drive
and a first tool bit being arranged in each of said first
plurality of slots the tool is adapted for axial cutting and
upon a second tool bit being arranged in each of said
second plural ty of slots, the tool is adapted for radial
cutting and upon at least one of the first tool bits being
arranged in each of said third plurality of slots the tool is
adapted for radial cutting of the workpiece.,
I 4,395,169
DRILL BIT
Takashi Kashiwagi, and Hiroshi Kasutani, both of Gifu, Japan,
assignors to Mitsubishi Kinzoku Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Jun. 26, 1980, Ser. No. 163,264
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 4, 1979, 54-92229[U]
Int. a.3 B23B 51/06
U.S. a. 408—59 11 Criaims
23. 14
4,395,170
DRILL, DRILL CHUCK, AND METHODS OF CHUCKING
AND UNCHUCKING
Michael E. Qarcy, Easley, S.C, assignor to The Singer Com-
pany, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Aug. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 179,359 _
Int. a.' B25B 13/44: B23B 31/06
U.S. CI. 408—241 R 3 Claims
.Ht^r^
1. A drill bit comprising:
a body of a cylindrical shape having a face at its forward end
and a straight groove of a generally V-shape including
two side faces and a comer into which said faces merge;
said groove being formed in the circumferential surface
thereof and extending along the longitudinal axis of the bit
Hodv*
said corner being disposed in the vicinity of the longitudinal
axis of said bit body;
said bit body having a drilling fluid passageway extendmg
1. Powered drill comprising a housing and including a key-
less slidable jaw chuck having a plurality of slidable jaws
provided with externally extending teeth mounted withm a
chuck body having mating angularly spaced slideways for said
jaws extending forwardly and inwardly in said chuck body and
a traverse nut rotatable on said chuck body having internal
threads engaged with said jaws together with a locking shell
slidable relative the traverse nut so as to rotate together there-
with relative the chuck body, at least one and preferably a
plurality of lugs or teeth extending around an annular end of
said locking shell adjacent said drill housing and at least one
and preferably a plurality of mating lugs or teeth provided on
said drill housing adjacent said locking shell, wherein said lugs
or teeth are angulated to provide a vector force during torqu-
ing which acts in a direction forwardly of the chuck tending to
release said lugs or teeth of said sliding shell from their toothed
engagement with said drill housing so that, when said shell is
slid rearwardly towards said drill, said shell and traverse nut
are held against rotation relative said drill and upon actuation
of the drill to rotate said chuck body, said jaws will be auto-
matically extended or retracted, depending upon the dnll
rotation direction, to chuck or unchuck a drill bit or other
accessory inserted therebetween, and spring means for retain-
ing said sliding shell in its forward, released or unlocked posi-
tion to enable normal operative rotation of said chuck while
requiring positive operator applied rearward pressure thereon
1446
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
for engaging said locking means, said spring means further
comprising a spring detent for selectively holding said shell in
either a forward position wherein said teeth are disengaged for
drilling, or the like, and in a rearward position wherein said
teeth are engaged for chucking and unchucking so that the
inclination of said teeth pops said detent from said rear position
to said forward position at a predetermined torque.
quentially actuating each system of levers to move the pallet
locks along the rail into a third position where the locks will
prevent forward movement of a pallet but will permit aft
movement of the pallet by movement of a lock against a biasing
force of a spring acting on the lever system thereof; wherein
each system of levers includes an actuator arm coupled by a
uniball joint to a control arm, and a pivot shaft supported by a
4^95,171
CHUCK KEY
Giinter H. Rohm, Heinrich-Rohm-Str. 50, 7297 Sontheim, Fed.
Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,174
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 8,
1980, 3004644
Int. a.' B23B 31/06
U.S. a. 408—241 R 9 Qaims
single one of said rails to interconnect said control arm and a
pallet lock, and wherein said system further includes troughs
formed in said floor of the aircraft, and means mounting said
guide rails for pivotal movement from positions where they
extend upwardly from the floor to positions where they are
rotated downwardly into the troughs and form a flush surface
with the remainder of the aircraft floor.
1. A chuck key comprising:
a body extending along an axis and having an axially for-
wardly directed end formed with an array of teeth cen-
tered on said axis, said body being formed with a bore
opening axially forwardly at said forward end;
a crosspiece extending generally radially from said body and
fixed thereon remote from said forward end;
a pin displaceable axially in said bore of said body between
a front position projecting axially forwardly from said
body beyond said teeth and a rear position withdrawn
axially backwardly in said body;
a spring braced between said pin and said body and urging
said pin into said rear position;
' an operating member mounted to be movable radially rela-
tive to said body and having an outer end projecting
radially from said body; and
means including a pair of interengaging formations on said
member and on said pin for displacing said pin against the
force of said spring from said rear to said front position on
depression of said one end of said member radially in-
wardly.
4,395,173
DRILL SCREW WITH PROTECTIVE BURRS
Henry A. Sygnator, Arlington Heights, III., assignor to Illinois
Tool Works Inc., Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 279,103
Int. C\? F16B 25/00
U.S. a. 411—387 4 Qaims
4,395,172
CARGO RESTRAINT SYSTEM WITH SPRING FUSE
Dieter W. Hoener, Bellevue; Neville L. Lambert, Seattle, and
Erwin V. Schweizer, Kent, all of Wash., assignors to The
Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Dec. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 215,613
Int. a.J B64D 1/10
U.S. a. 410—84 11 Qaims
1. A combined cargo delivery and logistics cargo restraint
system comprising a pair of parallel guide rails fot.cargo-carry-
ing pallets extending longitudinally along a floor of an aircraft
which has a cargo-receiving and delivery opening, a single one
of said rails at spaced points therealong being provided with
pallet locks for releasably engaging pallets to hold them in
positions along the guide rails, a logistics control means cou-
pled to simultaneously move the pallet locks into a first posi-
tion where said pallet locks will release pallets for movement
either forward or aft of the aircraft and a second position
where said locks will prevent either forward or aft movement
of a pallet, a system of levers coupled to each of said locks, and
a cargo-delivery control system including cam means for se-
1. A drill screw comprising an elongated shank, a first shank
end having a head with drive receiving surfaces thereon and a
second shank end having a drill tip formed thereon, said tip
having first and second opposing flutes extending partially
along said shank each flute intersecting first and second termi-
nal end portions, said intersection of said first flute with said
first terminal end portion defining a first cutting edge and the
intersection with said second terminal end portion defining a
first drag edge, the intersection of the second flute with said
second and first terminal ends defining second cutting and drag
edges, respectively, the first and second terminal end portions
intersecting to define a chisel which extends angularly between
said first and second flutes, a first and a second burr extending
at least partially along said first and second cutting edges,
respectively, at points spaced from said chisel to protect said
cutting edges thereby preserving their effective cutting action.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1447
4,395,174
SELF-PENETRATING FASTENER FOR FASTENING
ROOFING PANELS TO METAL BEAMS
James D. Freeman, 11 W. Grand Ct., Springfield, 111. 62704
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,453
Int. CI.' F16B 15/06
U.S. CI. 411—510 ' Claims
>%
L^^
.^
VT^*
'-
lir
11-
1^'
■■-J
lI
1. A self-penetrating fastener for attaching a sheet -material
panel to a plate-like support, comprising: a relatively rigid shaft
having an enlarged head and an enlarged hole-forming tip; a
sleeve closely surrounding the portion of said shaft between
said head and said tip and having axially spaced resilient barb-
like projections sized to squeeze through an aperture formed
by said tip and to expand beyond the rim of the exit end of said
aperture, so as to fasten said panel to said plate-like support by
gripping them between said head and expanded portions of
said projections; and a bowed spring-material thin spider-like
wafer positioned to be compressed between said head and the
top surface of said panel.
4 395 175
PROCESS FOR TREATING SCRAP ANODES AND
APPARATUS THEREFOR
Hidetoshi Tsurimoto, Tanashi; Koichi Tokunaga, Funabashi,
both of Japan, and Martin K. Schonfeldt, Townsville, Austra-
lia, assignors to Mesco, Inc., Tokyo, Japan and Copper Refin-
eries Pty. Ltd., Townsville, Australia
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,805
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 20, 1979, 54-149481
Int. QV B65G 57/08
U.S. CI. 414—21 17 Claims
29 8"!
V?'
8' 81 8«
5. An apparatus for handling scrap anodes, each of which
has a barrel, comprising:
an endless conveying means comprising a pair of upper and
lower strips having projections for engaging scrap anodes
disposed thereon at regular intervals, said conveying
strips being disposed in parallel and at regular intervals
from each other;
a pair of fixed rails disposed parallel to and under said con-
veying strips and along the moving direction thereof
adapted to have scrap anodes hang therefrom by their
upper end shoulder portions, said scrap anodes bemg
pushed along said rails by said projections of said lower
strip;
a pair of movable rails disposed following said pair of fixed
rails, which movable rails are adapted to move recipro-
cally in a horizontal direction, which movable rails re-
ceive scrap anodes from said fixed rails, said anodes being
pushed along said movable rails by said projections of said
lower strip;
supporting means for supporting the barrels of the scrap
anodes disposed between said movable rails, under said
endless conveying strips, and designed to be reciprocally
movable horizontally;
working means for moving said supporting means horizon-
tally;
a vertically rotatable rotating plate disposed under said pair
of fixed rails and connected through drive-transmitting
means with said endless conveying means, said rotating
plate being arranged to support the scrap anodes at their
lower ends and adjust the scrap anodes to a nearly hori-
zontal position by lifting, in proportion to their move-
ment, the lower ends of said scrap anodes each being
suspended by both upper end shoulder portions thereof;
a horizontally rotatable receiving stand disposed under said
supporting means and being adapted to ascend and de-
scend between an upper no load position and a lower full
load position, as well as rotate horizontally;
lifting means for causing said receiving stand to ascend and
descend between the no load position and the full load
position;
rotating means for rotating said receiving stand in a horizon-
tal plane, and
controlling means for controlling the operations of the afore-
said respective means, said controlling means being con-
structed so that said conveying strips and rotating plate
are operated thereby to move the scrap anodes to a sub-
stantially horizontal position during their transportation
along said fixed and movable rails, then move said anodes
up to and on the supporting means and halt said anodes
thereat; further said working means being operated for
moving said supporting means and dropping the scrap
anodes onto said receiving stand while maintaining their
horizontal position; and still further said rotating means
being operated for turning said receiving stand supporting
said dropped scrap anodes through a predetermined angle,
and said lifting means being operated for lowering said
receiving stand by predetermined distances.
4,395,176
APPARATUS FOR HANDLING HARVESTED MATERIAL
John C. Green, Ely, England, assignor to Hassy Horticultural
Development Ltd., Cambridgeshire, England
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 111,096, Oct, 1, 1980,
abandoned. This application Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,994
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 5, 1979,
7907585
Int. a. J B65G 67/08. 67/22
U.S. a. 414—57 10 Claims
1. Apparatus for use in handling material harvested by a first
vehicle and loaded from the first vehicle on to a second vehicle
travelling alongside the first vehicle; the apparatus comprising:
a base mounted on the first vehicle, a conveyor support
mounted on the base, a conveyor and conveyor drive means
carried by the conveyor support for conveying harvested
material from the first vehicle towards the second vehicle in a
conveying direction which lies at an oblique angle to the direc-
tion of motion of the vehicles, shuttle means arranged to cause
the conveyor support to reciprocate on the base parallel to the
conveying direction, drive interrupting means connecting the
shuttle motion with the conveyor drive means to cause the
conveyor to be driven only during one sense of reciprocation
of the conveyor support, and throttle means on the respective
vehicles for adjusting the relative speeds of the vehicles m
relation to the value of said oblique angle of the conveying
1448
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
direction to cause the harvested material to be delivered to said *'^??ol^^l».^„mwT m A-rcrkovfc
ANOTHER
Wayne O. MacDonell, San Francisco, Calif.; Donald L. Graves,
Federal Way, and Thomas Timar, Seattle, both of Wash.,
assignors to The Boeing Company, Seattle, Wash.
Filed Dec. 8, 1980, Ser. No. 214,257
Int. a.J B65G 67/58
U.S. CI. 414—138 49 Qaims
-J u.
in successive conveyor operations between its drive interrup-
tions laid in rows at right angles to the direction of travel of the
vehicles and across the width of the second vehicle.
4,395,177
APPARATUS FOR FEEDING FOLDED AND FLATTENED
CARTONS TO A PACKAGING MACHINE
Enzo Seragnoli, Bologna, Italy, assignor to G. D Societa per
Azioni, Bologna, Italy
Filed Apr. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 257,357
Claims priority, application Italy, May 15, 1980, 3425 A/80
Int. a.' B65G 59/06: B65H 3/24. 5/02
U.S. a. 414—130
10 Claims
1. In an apparatus for feeding folded and flattened cartons to
a packaging machine, a combination comprising:
a continuous path formed of a first rising section, a junction
zone, and a second substantially horizontal section associ-
ated with its end portion opposite to said junction zone
with a packaging line for said packaging machine;
conveyor means movable in a single direction along said
continuous path;
pusher means carried by said conveyor means;
a magazine for holding said folded and flattened cartons and
overlying said rising section, said magazine having an
upper loading opening and a lower outlet opening;
movable supporting means for the cartons at said junction
zone between said first and second sections of the path;
and
actuating means synchronized with said conveyor means for
oscillating said supporting means between a first position
arranged in continuation of said first rising section and a
second position, where they are arranged substantially
coplanar and parallel to said conveyor means along said
second substantially horizontal section.
1. A docking station adapted to be used in conjunction with
a vessel adapted to float on water, a carrier adapted to be
positioned at a landing location on the carrier, a downhaul line
operatively connected from said vessel to said carrier, and
uphaul means to lift said carrier to said station, said docking
station comprising:
a. a docking structure having an upwardly facing receiving
surface to engage said carrier as said carrier is lifted by
uphaul means and placed on said docking structure,
b. said docking structure having a laterally open through slot
to receive said downhaul line extending downwardly
from said carrier to said vessel.
3. A transfer system comprising:
a. a first platform;
b. a second platform movable relative to said first platform;
c. first uphaul means operatively connected to said first
platform;
d. a carrier adapted to be moved between said first and
second platforms, said carrier comprising a carrier hous-
ing and extendable and retractable intermediate uphaul
means adapted to be connected between said carrier hous-
ing and the first uphaul means, said intermediate uphaul
means including actuating means to raise and lower said
carrier housing relative to the first uphaul means by re-
tracting and extending said intermediate uphaul means;
e. downhaul means operatively connected between the car-
rier and the second platform and adapted to pull said
carrier to said second platform;
f. said actuating means being characterized in that it exerts a
tension force through said intermediate uphaul means
greater than weight of the carrier;
g. said downhaul means being characterized in that it has a
downhaul operating mode where it exerts on said carrier
a downhaul force greater than a value which is equal to
the tension force less the weight of the carrier;
h. said actuating means comprising a resilient actuating
mechanism comprising an actuating member which is
yieldingly urged toward movement in a direction to re-
tract said intermediate uphaul means and yieldingly resist
movement in a direction to extend said intermediate
uphaul means;
i. said actuating mechanism comprising velocity control
means to limit velocity of the actuating member in a direc-
tion to retract said intermediate uphaul means.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1449
4,395,179 4,395,180
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR CHARGING ENGINE UNIT MAINTENANCE COMPLEX
MATERIAL INTO A RECEPTACLE John A. Magnotte, La Mirada, Calif., assignor to Westmont
Andrejs Berzins, Parma, Ohio, assignor to Davy Inc., Cleveland, Industries, Santa Fe Springs, Calif.
Ohio Filed Sep. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 186,970
Continuation of Ser. No. 25,877, Apr. 2, 1979, abandoned, which Int. Cl.^ B65G 1/06; B66C 7/14
is a continuation of Ser. No. 822,811, Aug. 8, 1977, abandoned, U.S. CI. 414—282 18 Claims
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 665,552, Mar. 10,
1976, Pat. No. 4,067,452. This application Jan. 15, 1981, Ser.
11 No. 225,442
' ' Int. CV F27B 9/38
U.S. CI. 414—161 22 Claims
1. Apparatus for charging particulate charge material into a
receptacle having an upper portion including a top and upright
side wall means defining a chamber into which charge material
is to be deposited to form a stockline, said apparatus compris-
ing
choked feed means above said receptacle adapted to dis-
charge charge material downwardly in a single down-
wardly flowing stream of compact cross section along a
single path;
nonrotatable and laterally immovable dividing means below
said choked feed means in said path of said stream and
above said receptacle adapted to have said downwardly
flowing single stream of charge material substantially
directly impinge downwardly on said driving means and
uniformly divide said downwardly flowing single stream
of charge material. into a plurality of separate streams of
charge material;
gas lock means at the upper portion of said receptacle per-
mitting the entrance of charge material into said recepta-
cle without harmful loss of gas from within said recepta-
cle;
means for causing said plurality of separate streams from
said dividing means to pass through said gas lock means
into said receptacle; and
said receptacle having distributor means located therein for
distributing within said receptable material delivered
thereto, spreader means above said distributor means for
laterally spreading charge material to said distributor
means from said gas lock means, and said distributor
means and said spreader means being operable substan-
tially independently of said gas lock means.
1. An engine maintenance complex comprising a main frame
forming a delivery way having a loading station at one loca-
tion, service frames forming a plurality of service bays at other
locations laterally of the delivery way and a receiving station
for the end of each service bay adjacent the delivery way, a
transportation rail system on said main frame extending
throughout said delivery way, said transportation rail system
having a transverse transportation bridge providing a transpor-
tation track, horizontally moveable engine support means in
travelling engagement with said transportation bridge, a ser-
vice bridge in each of said service bays adapted to provide a
service track for said moveable supports, a plurality of verti-
cally moveable connection means between said service bridge
and respective service frame for moving said service bridge
vertically between an uppermost position and a lowermost
position, and releaseable interconnections at adjacent ends of
said service bridge and said transportation bridge adapted for
mutual engagement when said bridges are at the same eleva-
tion and in longitudinal alignment to enable said moveable
supports to pass between said transportation bridge and a
selected service bridge.
4,395,181
ROBOT VEHICLE
Weston R. Loomer, Walton, Ky., assignor to Litton Systems,
Inc., Florence, Ky.
Continuation of Ser. No. 925,525, Jul. 17, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 729,393, Oct. 4, 1976,
abandoned. This application Mar. 13, 1980, Ser. No. 130,019
Int. CI.* B65G 65/00
U.S. CI. 414—284 9 Claims
& &3 <3 ^J
1. A load transporting system comprising:
(a) a movable vehicle;
(b) means for moving said vehicle along a first predeter-
mined path;
(c) substantially horizontally disposed lift means mounted on
said movable vehicle to raise or lower a load with respect
thereto;
(d) a plurality of flexible members each extending along
second predetermined paths and each having a respective
first end and a respective second end;
(e) first connecting means interconnecting said lift means
and said flexible members proximate said respective first
ends of said flexible members;
(0 second connecting means interconnecting said movable
vehicle and said flexible members proximate said respec-
tive second ends of said flexible members;
10.^2 O.G.— 56
1450
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
(g) eccentric means carried by said vehicle for rotation in a
predetermined rotative direction;
(h) said eccentric means further including a surface disposed
for coaction with said flexible members such that there is
a first portion of each of said flexible members extending
between said first connecting means and a place at which
said flexible members first engage said surface, whereby
rotation of said eccentric means in said predetermined
rotative direction effects movement of said first portions
of said fiexible members and effects operation of said lift
means for either raising or lowering a load;
(i) means for driving said eccentric means in said predeter-
mined rotative direction; and
(j) a plurality of spaced guide means for facilitating passage
of said fiexible members about said eccentric means;
(k) said guide means being located between said eccentric
means and said first connecting means.
4,395,182
HLLING AND DISTRIBUTION APPARATUS AND
METHOD FOR SILOS
Donald W, Suwyn, 3535 - 108th St., Caledonia, Mich. 49316
Filed Oct. 10, 1980, Ser. No. 196,096
Int. a.' B65G 3/04. 31/04. 65/32
U.S. CI. 414—299 11 Claims
.^^fH
1. Apparatus for selectively center filling and distributor
filling a feed storage structure, the structure being of the type
including a roof having an access aperture, said apparatus
comprising:
a center fill tube having a central axis, an upper inlet end and
a lower discharge end, said fill tube dimensioned to fit
through the access aperture;
feed distributor means selectively positionable at the dis-
charge end of the center fill tube for distributing feed in a
generally circular pattern radially of the central axis of the
fill tube;
support means connected to said feed distributor means for
supporting said distributor means in a first operative posi-
tion in line with said center fill tube and in a second inop-
erative position out of alignment with said center fill tube;
and
positioning means connected to said feed distributor means
for selectively moving said distributor means between said
first operative position in line with said center fill tube to
said second inoperative position out of alignment with
said center fill tube after a predetermined quantity of feed
is loaded into the feed storage structure and from said
second position to said first position after another prede-
termined quantity of feed is loaded into the feed storage
structure, said positioning means including a cable having
an end secured to said feed distributor means, said cable
having a length sufficient to pass out of the feed storage
structure to an operator, and wherein said feed distributor
means comprises:
a first tube having a central axis, an inlet end and an outlet
end;
a second tube having a central axis, an inlet end and an outlet
end, said second tube being positioned in telescoping
relationship with said first tube;
means for rotatably supporting said second tube on said first
tube;
drive means engaging said second tube for rotating said
second tube with respect to said first tube, said drive
means including a drive motor mounted on one of said
first and second tubes, said drive motor having an output
shaft; and
a pan secured to said second tube at its outlet end and posi-
tioned at an angle with respect to the central axis of said
second tube so that when said distributor means is in the
first operative position, feed will be directed by the pan
radially outwardly from the central axis of said second
tube, said feed distributor means is dimensioned to fit
within the access aperture of the feed storage structure,
said means for rotatably supporting said second tube com-
prises:
an annular mounting ring secured to said first tube adjacent
its outlet end;
a channel-shaped ring secured to said second tube adjacent
its inlet end; and
a bearing secured to said mounting ring and riding within
said channel-shaped ring so that said second tube is rotat-
ably supported from said first tube, and wherein said drive
means further comprises:
means interconnecting said output shaft of said drive motor
to said second tube for rotating said second tube as said
output shaft rotates, and wherein said apparatus further
includes:
control means operatively connected to said drive motor so
that said drive motor may be actuated only when said
distributor means is in said first position.
6. A method of top filling a feed storage structure with feed
having coarse and fine elements, said structure being of the
type which includes an elongated, generally cylindrical tank
defining an interior side surface, a closed top having a centrally
located access aperture and a bottom discharge aperture, said
method comprising the steps of:
directing feed from ground level to said access aperture;
distributing said feed in a circular pattern and towards the
interior side surfaces of said cylindrical tank until a prede-
termined quantity of feed is loaded into said structure;
center filling feed into said structure through said access
aperture until another predetermined quantity of feed is
loaded into said structure; and
repeating said distributing and center filling steps until said
structure is fully loaded so that alternating layers of coarse
feed elements and fine feed elements are formed within
said structure.
4,395,183
LOADING DEVICE
Stig Wlrholm, Sollentuna, and Soren Berggren, Vallentuna, both
of Sweden, assignors to Tellus Maskin AB, Vallentuna, Swe-
den
Filed Mar. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 243,500
Claims priority, application Sweden, Mar. 17, 1980, 8002061
Int. C1.J B65G 25/00
U.S. CI. 414—416 6 Qalms
1. A loading device for loading and unloading a container or
similar receptacle with one side to be opened, comprising: a
carrying stand (2), said stand having a plurality of oblong
lifting beams (5), each of which along their entire length are
formed of a lower beam portion (10) and an upper beam por-
JULY 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1451
lion (11), and are provided with a flexible closed hose (12)
between the beam portions with adjustable air supply for re-
stricted control of the lifting and lowering of the upper beam
portion (10), a number rows of carrying of wheels on said stand
for carrying the lifting beams (5) and mechanical drive means
for moving said beams in longitudinal direction, characterized
in that each lower beam portion (10) along its length is pro-
vided with vertical side flanges (13), which stand on the pe-
riphery of rows of said carrying wheels (14), and running
wheels (8) distributed and mounted along the side flanges (13),
which running wheels are located entirely free from engage-
ment with the carrying stand (2) and the lowermost portion of
their periphery being located at a slightly lower level than the
level of the highest portion of the periphery of the carrying
wheels (14), whereby the longitudinal stand (2) is supported by
the carrying wheels (14), and the portion of the lifting beams
(5) projecting outside the carrying stand (2) can be supported
by means of said running wheels (8) rolling against a support,
such as a container bottom.
being aligned with said pushers, whereby said pushers
may be forced into said passageways to force parts dis-
posed in said passageways into locations with the ends of
the parts oriented relative to a face of said plate-like body
in position to be operated upon, and
(c) a part unloading plate disposed on said support means
between said part handling plate and said support means
and said part unloading plate having a multiplicity of
recesses in its face toward said part handling plate match-
ing the locations of said passageways whereby parts can
be unloaded from said passageways by forcing said parts
with said pushers out of said passageways and into said
recesses whereupon said part unloading plate can be re-
moved from said support means to dump said parts.
4,395,185
SELF-LEVELING BOAT TRAILER
Morris L. Whaley, Star Rte. (Moss Lake), Gainesville, Tex.
76240
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 288,544, Jul. 30, 1981,
abandoned. This application Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,516
Int. a.' B60P 1/28. 3/10
U.S. a. 414—483 11 Claims
4 395 184
MEANS AND METHOD FOR PROCESSING MINIATURE
ELECTRONIC COMPONENTS SUCH AS CAPACITORS
OR RESISTORS
Denver Braden, Carlsbad, Calif., assignor to Palomar Systems &
Machines, Inc., Escondido, Calif.
Filed Feb. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 123,201
Int. C\? H05K 3/30; B65G 65/04
U.S. a. 414—417 16 Qaims
1. A self-leveling boat trailer comprising:
a support platform adapted to receive the hull of a boat, said
support platform including a wheeled undercarriage and
means for coupling a first end of said support platform to
a vehicle;
flotation means disposed at a second end of said support
platform for causing said second end of said support plat-
form to float upon immersion into water; and
means for lowering said first end of said support platform in
response to the flotation of said second end whereby said
support platform is maintained in a level position.
4,395,186
VEHICLE FOR TENDING LOW GROWING
VEGETATION
Garry R. Whyte, Portland, Oreg., assignor to Turtle Tractor
Company, Portland, Oreg.
Filed Aug. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 176,193
Int. a.5 B60P 1/00
U.S. a. 414—528 1 Claim
1. Means to handle miniature electronic parts such as capaci-
tors, resistors or the like, comprising:
(a) part pushing means having support means and having a
bank of juxtaposed pushers secured together to move as a
unit and said pushers facing said support means, and said
pushing means having means operative to force said bank
of pushers toward said support means,
(b) a part handling plate having a plate-like body having a
multiplicity of juxtaposed passageways extending from
face to face of said body, said passageways having resilient
walls whereby when said passageways are slightly smaller
in cross-section than the cross-section of the parts to be
supported thereby, the passageways will resiliently grip
the parts, said plate being disposed between said bank of
pushers and said support means and said passageways
f'
1. A powered vehicle for tending low growing vegetation
comprising:
1452
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
a frame having intersecting cross-braces;
a platform mounted to the frame having an engine mounted
thereon;
front and rear center swing tubes having a torsion bar spnng
suspension and a double articulated steering system in
which the torsion bars are held by a vise means, said vise
means being surrounded by a collar, and said collar being
wrapped in a stainless steel mesh screen, and glued to the
interior of the swing tube; and
four legs, each adjustable in at least two directions and
mounted within said swing tubes, having a motor con-
nected by hydraulic lines to the engine, and supporting a
wheel and tire.
frame, and carrying means operable for engaging an object to
be lifted,
comprising in combination:
two upright elongated members spaced apart from each
other and connected at least with relation to said mount-
ing element, wherein each of said upright members defines
a passage extending longitudinally of the respective up-
right member, and
means near an end portion of each upright member for
releasably securing said carrying means to said upright
4 395 187
AUTOMATIC cargo' ELEVATOR FOR VEHICLE
Quentin D. Corley, Jr., 326 S. Rock Island, Dallas, Tex. 75207
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,317
Int. a.3 BMP 1/48
U.S. a. 414—557 17 Claims
member, wherein said releasably securing means includes
two mounting projections on said carrying means each
extending through one end into one of said passages, and
means for positionally fixing said projections in said pas-
sages, and
wherein said carrying means includes a pair of fork prongs
each having a load-engaging portion and a mounting
portion constituting said projection and adapted to be
selectively introduced into the respective passage through
one of its lower and upper ends.
4 395 189
DUAL MAST LIFT TRUCK FOR UNBALANCED LOADS
AND THE LIKE
Gerard H. Munten, 4089 Remembrance Rd., Grand Rapids,
Mich. 49504
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,611
Int. aJ B66F 9/03. 9/22
U.S. CI. 414—635 18 CI""'
14. In a cargo elevator for attachment to a cargo vehicle
having a cargo bed; an elevator platform including a base
platform and a folding platform hingedly attached to said base
platform; said elevator platform being mounted, by means of
said base platform, to be raised and lowered between a ground
position and a bed position, with said base platform being
maintained in a generally horizontal position during these
movements; the improvement comprising
an articulated locking and folding mechanism connected
between fixed pivots on said base platform and said fold-
ing platform, for effecting the locking of said folding
platform in the plane of said base platform, and for effect-
ing the downward folding and unfolding of said folding
platform; said mechanism including an actuator lever;
said actuator lever being engageable with an actuator arm on
said vehicle, during upward movement of said elevator
platform, to effect the folding of said folding platform
from a load position to a stored position under said base
platform and said cargo bed; and said engaged actuator
lever and actuator arm effecting the unfolding of said
folding platform to said load position, during downward
movement, of said elevator platform and effecting the
locking of said folding platform in said load position.
4 395 188
LOAD CARRYING ARRANGEMENT FOR A LIFT TRUCK
Otmar Kaup, Aschaffenburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Kaup A Co. KG, Aschaffenburg, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 258,7%
ioS"^7'^"''' "'"""*'" ^'^' ^''' "' '^™""' '^"' ''' 1 In a conventional lift truck having a frame w.th front and
19»0, J0U/8W ^^^ ^ ^ ^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^ ^^^^^ j.^^ propelling said truck, the improve-
U S a 414—622 * " 9 Claims ment of a dual mast arrangement for handhng unbalanced
V A load carrying arrangement for a lift truck having a loads and the like, comprising:
frame a mounting elemenf displaceably mounted on said first and second lift masts connected with the front end of
^
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1453
said truck frame in a side-by-side relationship; each lift
mast having a fork slideably connected therewith for
translating up and down its respective mast; said forks
extending generally outwardly from said masts in a gener-
ally parallel relationship;
means for independently moving said forks along their re-
spective masts, whereby each fork is individually elevated
into abutment with a load, and raised slightly to a position
wherein the load is balanced on said forks; and
coupling means for .selectively interlocking said forks and
moving the same in unison, substantially simultaneously at
the same rate and in the same direction, by manipulation
of a single control, whereby said forks are raised together
to lift the load balanced thereon to a transport position,
and are lowered together to set the load down in place.
4,395,191
EXCAVATOR-HOIST CONSTRUCTION VEHICLE
Josef Kaiser, Heuwies 65, FL-9491 Schaanwald, Liechtenstein
Filed Dec. 11, 1980, Ser. No. 215,403
Claims priority, application Austria, Dec. 24, 1979, 8138/79
Int. a.' B66F 9/00
U.S. a. 414—694 13 Qaims
4,395,190
POWER OPERATED EXTENSIONS FOR FORKS OF A
FORK LIFT TRUCK
John Barchard, Crystal Lake, III., assignor to Spyder Sales &
Service, Inc., Needville, Tex.
Filed Mar. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 240,121
Int. a.^ B60P }/46
U.S. a. 414— 664 IQaim
1. Power operated fork extensions for a lift truck in which a
pair of forwardly projecting regular conventional forks
mounted on a carriage are capable of being raised and lowered
relative to a vertical mast, comprising a sleeve telescopically
engaging each of the regular conventional forks of the lift
truck, said sleeves constituting members which convert the
conventional load carrying regular conventional forks to ex-
tensible load carrying members, a cross member fixedly adjoin-
ing the sleeves at their rearward ends, said carriage having a
pair of spaced apart lugs, a transverse shaft supported in said
spaced apart lugs, a pair of laterally spaced apart links jour-
nally supported at their lower ends on said transverse shaft, a
cross shaft joining the upper ends of said pair of links, a pair of
laterally spaced apart bell-crank lever links pivotally mounted
at their upper ends on said cross shaft, said cross member
having a pair of spaced apart lugs on its rear surface, said pair
of bell-crank lever links pivotally mounted at their lower ends
to the spaced apart lugs on the cross member, said bell-crank
lever links each having an upper portion and an angularly
disposed lower portion, a rod affixed between said bell-crank
lever links at the juncture between the upper and lower por-
tions, an extensible and retractable hydraulic cylinder having
its upper end pivotally mounted on said rod between said
bell-crank lever links and having its lower end pivotally
mounted on said transverse shaft, whereby when the hydraulic
cylinder is extended the bell-crank lever links act to push or
extend the sleeve extensions forwardly and when the hydraulic
cylinder is shortened the bell-crank lever links act to retract
the sleeve extensions.
1. An excavator-hoist construction vehicle comprising an
undercarriage arranged generally horizontally, said undercar-
riage having a front edge and an oppositely directed rear edge
with side edges extending between said front and rear edges, a
superstructure mounted on said undercarriage and rotatable
relative thereto about a vertical axis, an elongated boom hav-
ing a first end and a second end with the first end thereof
secured to said sup)erstructure and the second end thereof
spaced outwardly from said superstructure, the second end of
said boom arranged to support a tool such as for use in excavat-
ing, hoisting and the like, a pair of first supporting legs each
having a first end and a second end with the first end of each
leg being hinged to said front edge of said undercarriage with
said hinged connections being spaced apart, and the second
ends of said first supporting legs spaced outwardly from said
undercarriage, a pair of second support legs each having a first
end and a second end with the first end of each being hinged to
the rear edge of said undercarriage with the hinged connec-
tions being spaced apart and the second ends thereof being
spaced outwardly from said undercarriage, said first and sec-
ond supporting legs being movably adjustable in vertical and
horizontal planes, means on the second ends of each of said
first and second supporting legs for supporting a wheel, means
for steering wheels on at least one pair of said first and second
supporting legs, and said steerable wheels being deuchably
mounted on said supporting legs and being replaceable by
holding members depending on the type of work to be per-
formed by the construction vehicle, and means for driving at
least one of the wheels on said first and second supporting legs.
4,395,192
BOOM CYLINDER
Paul W. Schlafly, New Philadelphia, Ohio, assignor to The
Warner & Swasey Company, Qeveland, Ohio
Filed Jan. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 227,020
Int. a.3 E02F 3/00
U.S. a. 414—718 6 Oaims
1. A material handling vehicle comprising:
an upper structure;
an outer boom rotatable about its longitudinal axis;
an inner boom rotatable with said outer boom about their
common longitudinal axis and partially disposed for tele-
scopic positioning within said outer boom and said inner
boom supporting a material handling device at its exposed
end;
a boom cradle, pivotally supported from said upper struc-
ture, supporting said outer boom for rotation about its
longitudinal axis;
1454
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
a hydraulic cylinder, not rotatable with said outer boon),
having one end connected to said boom cradle and having
operating rod means extending from the other end thereof
which engages and permits said inner boom to rotate
around its longitudinal axis with respect to said hydraulic
cylinder and for telescopic positioning of said inner boom
with respect to said outer boom; and,
a cylinder support, longitudinally fixed in close proximity to
the rod end of said cylinder, providing support for the end
of said cylinder from the inside of said inner boom.
stress concentration point from the upper terminal end
portions acting upon the channel member means in re-
sponse to operation of the hydraulic ram powered bucket
tilting link; said stress distributing plate means is generally
elliptical in shape, and said portion of reduced cross-sec-
tional area is a circular hole centered on the ordinate or
minor axis of the ellipse and is spaced upwardly toward an
upper longer curved side of the generally elliptical shaped
stress distributing plate means from the abscissa or major
axis of the ellipse; and connecting means are provided in a
lower longer curved side of the generally elliptical shaped
stress distributing plate means for mounting the terminal
end portions thereto.
4,395,194
METHOD OF HANDLING HARVESTED MATERIAL
John C. Green, Ely, England, assignor to Hassy Horticultural
Development Ltd., Cambridgeshire, England
Division of Ser. No. 111,096, Oct. 1, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 242,993
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 5, 1979,
7907585
Int. CI.' B65G 67/08, 67/22
U.S. CI. 414—786 5 Qaims
4 395 193
MATERIAL HANDLING BUCKET
Robert B. Christensen, Kenosha, Wis., and Lee F. Kramer,
Waukegan, III., assignors to Dresser Industries, Inc., Dallas,
Tex.
Filed Apr. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 251,004
Int. a.3 B66F 9/06
U.S. a. 414—722 11 Claims
2*-,
1 1
i&^
\-AJ\ /
7
/I
7--
/
/
' i
/
Iw
1 \ \i \i
1 1 /
Hi
\„
1. In a material handling bucket having generally vertical
sides end capping a generally hyperbolic shaped bucket bowl,
a transverse channel member means externally mounted to an
upper forward edge of the bucket bowl for reinforcing the
edge, two pairs of symetrically positioned outboard bucket
bowl reinforcement ribs having boom arm pin bearing mount-
ing means for pivotally mounting the bucket to a pair of verti-
cal swingable boom arms, at least one pair of inboard bucket
bowl reinforcement ribs having bucket tilting link pin bearing
mounting means for pivotally mounting a hydraulic ram pow-
ered bucket tilting link to the bucket on a transverse link pin
axis parallel to and above the boom pin axis, the three pairs of
bucket bowl reinforcement ribs extending on parallel planes
and transversely uniformly spaced-apart between the vertical
sides of bucket bowl reinforcement ribs having upper terminal
end portions mounted to the channel member means; and,
wherein the improvement comprises:
an oblong stress distributing plate means having at least one
portion of reduced cross-sectional area defining at least
one stress concentration point offset toward an upper
longer side of the plate means from a predetermined mid-
point of the plate means and having a lower longer side
symetrically connected to the upper terminal end portions
of the inboard pair of bucket bowl reinforcement ribs and
to the channel member means for distributing stresses
transversely across the plate means transmitted to the
,^
1. A method of handling material harvested by a first vehicle
and transferring it to a second vehicle moving alongside the
first vehicle comprising the steps of loading the material on a
conveyor arranged on the first vehicle with its conveying
direction at an oblique angle to a direction of motion of the
vehicles, advancing the two vehicles at differential speeds and
simultaneously both reciprocating the conveyor along its con-
veying direction and driving the conveyor to advance the
harvested material to the second vehicle.
4 395 195
SHROUD RING FOR USE IN A GAS TURBINE ENGINE
Anthony R. De Cosmo, Wallingford, and John H. Young, South
Windsor, both of Conn., assignors to United Technologies
Corporation, Hartford, Conn.
Filed May 16, 1980, Ser. No. 150,489
Int. CI.' FOID 25/26
U.S. a. 415—137 13 Claims
1. For a gas turbine engine of the type having a stator struc-
ture outward of a flow path for working medium gases, rotor
structure inward of the flow path for working medium gases
and an array of stator vanes extending inwardly across the
flow path from the outward stator structure into proximity
with the inward rotor structure, an improved shroud ring for
supporting the inward ends of the vanes and a seal member
radially outwardly of the rotor structure, wherein the im-
provement comprises:
a first ring formed of a plurality of segments extending
circumferentially, each segment spaced from an adjacent
segment leaving a gap therebetween and each segment
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1455
engaging at least two stator vanes at the inward end of the
stator vane to support the stator vanes in guided cantilever
fashion, each segment being adapted by a hole at each
vane to receive the vane;
a second ring inwardly of the first ring, the second ring
formed of a plurality of segments, each segment slidably
engaging in the circumferential direction a corresponding
segment of the first ring and each segment having an inner
wall extending inwardly of the corresponding segment of
site directions into adjacent cells with their maximum deforma-
tion appearing at the split center of the diamond configuration.
4,395,197
CENTRIFUGAL FLUID MACHINE
Yoichi Yoshinaga, Minorimachi; Hideo Nishida, Shimoinayoshi,
and Shinjiro Ueda, Kashiwa, all of Japan, assignors to Hita-
chi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 171,268
Claims priority, application Japan, Aug. 1, 1979, 54-97273
Int. CI.' FOID J/02. 9/00; F04D 29/44. 29/54
U.S. a. 415—211 4 Qaims
the first ring to cover at least one of said holes in the
corresponding segment which adapt said corresponding
segment of the first ring to receive the stator vanes for
blocking the leakage of working medium gases between
the vanes and the first ring;
wherein the sliding engagement between the first ring and
the second ring enables the stator structure to position the
second ring radially about the rotor structure in response
to inward and outward movement of the stator structure.
4,395,196
TURBINE SHROUD HONEYCOMB MATRIX
MECHANICAL LOCKING STRUCTURE AND METHOD
John R. Plautz, 18061 Parke La., Grosse He, Mich. 48138
Filed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,389
Int. CI.' FOID 11/08
U.S. a. 415—174 1 Claim
1. A shroud for a turbine engine or the like comprising an
arcuate base member having a convex side with a convex
surface and a concave side with a concave surface including
means for securing the shroud to a turbine engine casing, a
six-walled, two ended cell, honeycomb structure secured to
the base on the concave side thereof, a matrix of abradable
material within the honeycomb structure, and mechanical
locking means operable between the honeycomb structure and
abradable matrix material for securing the abradable matrix
material within the honeycomb structure including portions of
at least some of the walls of the cells being deformed trans-
versely only between and in spaced relation to the ends of the
cells so as to extend into the cells and comprising split and
deformed portions of walls of the cells extending into the
abradable matrix material wherein the split and deformed
portions of the honeycomb structure are deformed in a
diamond configuration with the center of the diamond config-
uration split substantially parallel to the concave surface of the
base and the upper and lower portions of the diamond shaped
deformed portion of the honeycomb material extend in oppo-
1. A centrifugal fluid machine comprising:
an impeller having an outlet;
a diffuser having performance characteristics of the vaneless
diffuser type located around the outlet of said impeller and
including a pair of opposed, but spaced annular diffuser
plates having respective inner surfaces which define a
diffuser channel therebetween, said diffuser channel hav-
ing an inlet continuous to the outlet of said impeller and an
outlet radially remote therefrom; and
a plurality of guide vane means, provided in a circular array
on at least one of said inner surfaces of said pair of diffuser
plates in a manner extending from a position within the
inlet of said diffuser channel contiguous with the outlet of
the impeller toward the outlet of said diffuser channel to a
position which does not exceed about one-half the dis-
tance between said inlet and outlet of the diffuser channel
in a region of a low fiow angle portion of fiuid fiow intro-
duced into the diffuser channel from the impeller outlet by
said impeller, for guiding only said low flow angle portion
of the fluid flow from the outlet of the impeller, said guide
vane means each having a height, corresponding substan-
tially to that of the low fiow angle flow region, i to 1/5
the spacing between said pair of diffuser plates.
4,395,198
CONTINUOUS TWIN-STAY COLUMNS FOR BULB
HYDRAULIC TURBINES
Thomas R. Schucker, York, Pa., assignor to Allis-Chalmers
Corporation, Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,926
Int. a.' F04D 29/40
U.S. a. 415—219 R 4 Qaims
1. A support structure for a hydraulic turbine having a
rotatably mounted runner having a generally horizontal axis of
rotation with a rotatable drive shaft affixed to one end of said
runner and extending axially therefrom; said shaft terminating
in a generator unit remote from said runner; a stationary bulb
housing adjacent said runner and enclosing said drive shaft and
generator unit; a duct wall surrounding said runner and bulb
housing and cooperating with said runner and bulb housing to
define a hydraulic passage; said bulb housing including an
inner stay cone axially disposed along said drive shaft between
said generator unit and said runner; said inner stay cone being
perpendicular to said shaft; an outer stay cone embedded in
said duct wall and coplanar with said inner slay cone; the
improvements comprising:
a pair of vertical stay columns extending through said bulb
housing with said drive shaft extending between said suy
1456
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
columns; each of said columns being affixed to said outer
stay cone beneath said bulb housing and extending verti-
cally through said inner stay cone in said bulb housing and
being affixed to said outer stay cone above said bulb hous-
ing; said vertical stay columns being affixed to said inner
stay cone where said columns pass through said inner stay
cone; and,
externally manipulated variable for inclination of a swash plate
of the hydraulic pumps, and inputting the calculated value to a
regulator of the hydraulic pump as a target value for inclina-
tion of the swash plate thereof to thereby control the inclina-
tion angle of the swash plate of the hydraulic pumps; and
simultaneously converting said engine speed deviation into a
rack displacement value which is in a functional relation with
the engine speed deviation, and adjusting rack displacement of
the fuel injection pump by the converted value to thereby
control the amount of fuel injection.
a pair of bottom vertical piers adjacent said stay columns
remote' from said runner; said bottom vertical piers being
integral with said duct wall beneath said bulb housing and
extending vertically upward into communication with
said bulb housing.
Zuci
ENGfC SPIED
SENSOR
4,395,200
DOWNHOLE OIL WELL PUMP
David S. Anthony, and Michael D. Anthony, both of 1235 W.
Laurel, San Antonio, Tex. 78201
Filed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,778
Int. a.' F04F 1/06
U.S. a. 417—131 1 aaim
4,395,199
CONTROL METHOD OF A SYSTEM OF INTERNAL
COMBUSTION ENGINE AND HYDRAULIC PUMP
Eiki Izumi; Hiroshi Watanabe; Yukio Aoyagi, all of Chiyoda;
Kazuo Honma, Amimachi, and Kichio Nakajima, Shimoinayo-
shi, all of Japan, assignors to Hitachi Construction Machinery
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP80/00247, § 371 Date Jun. 15, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Jun. 15, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/01031, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 16, 1981
PCT Filed Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 276,367
Qaims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1979, 54-131846;
Mar. 14, 1980, 55-31584; Mar. 14, 1980, 55-31585; May 13,
1980, 55-62309
Int. Cl.^ F04B 49/00
U.S. CI. 417—53 12 Qaims
1. A method of controlling a system for generating hydraulic
power, the system including an internal combustion engine
controlled by fuel injection by a fuel injection pump, and a
plurality of hydraulic pumps of the variable displacement type
driven by the internal combustion engine, the method compris-
ing the steps of calculating a difference between a target engine
sp)eed set by a manipulated variable of an accelerator for the
internal combustion engine and an output engine speed to
obtain an engine speed deviation; converting the engine speed
deviation into a pump control coefficient which is in a func-
tional relation with the engine speed deviation, performing a
calculation with the converted pump control coefTicient and an
1. An automatic gas operated downhole fluid pump, com-
prising:
an elongated cylindrical chamber for receiving fluid and
having a concentrically mounted cylindrical float with a
predetermined buoyancy and weight mounted therein for
vertical reciprocating movement in said cylindrical cham-
ber responsive to rising and falling of fluid in said cylindri-
cal chamber;
a valve operably connected with the cylindrical float to
automatically communicate a soiy;ce of pressurized gas
with the cylindrical chamber for injecting pressurized gas
into the cylindrical chamber when fluid in the cylindrical
chamber rises and moves the cylindrical float upwardly in
the cylindrical chamber to a predetermined height to
force the fluid from the cylindrical chamber;
said valve having an actuator biased and retained in either an
open or closed position and actuable to either the open or
closed position upon movement of the cylindrical float
within the cylindrical chamber as the fluid rises and falls
to predetermined levels;
said cylindrical float being connected with the valve actua-
^ tor by a lost motion connector including a vertically
disposed elongated control rod connected at one end with
the valve actuator and extending through a passageway
through the cylindrical float with spaced adjustable tap
means to adjustably connect the control rod with the
cylindrical float to apply force to the actuator only when
it is desired to actuate the valve;
said elongated cylindrical chamber being formed from a
cylindrical housing enclosed by upper and lower cap
members;
July 26, 198
1
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1457
an air supply line extending between the upper and lower
cap members to supply air between pump stages;
an oil discharge line being provided within the cylindrical
chamber for flowing fluid from the cylindrical chamber
during pumping;
said cylindrical float including passageways therethrough
which are slidably mounted upon the air supply line and
the oil discharge line; and
said lower cap member including an adjustable stop member
to allow the cylindrical float to move to a predetermined
lower limit within the cylindrical chamber.
from said second chamber by a second wall and having a third
wall spaced from said second wall,
at least one first plurality of nozzles arranged in series in a
flow direction from said first chamber to said other cham-
ber, including a first nozzle extending through said first
and second walls from said first chamber to said other
chamber, and a second nozzle extending through said
third wall from said other chamber,
at least one second plurality of nozzles arranged in series in
a flow direction from said first chamber to said other
chamber, said second plurality of nozzles being spaced
from said first plurality of nozzles, including a first nozzle
4,395,201 —
INJECTOR PUMP
Dan Bron, 36 pialmach St., Haifa, Israel
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,750
Qaims priority, application Israel, Feb. 21, 1980, 59439
Int. Q.' Ft)4F 5/22
U.S. Q. 417—169 13 Qaims
1. An in-line, two-stage, variable-bypass injector pump for
controllably admixing a secondary fluid to a main fluid, com-
prising:
a housing connectable into a pipe line carrying said main
fluid;
a main venturi extending along the central axis of said hous-
ing and comprising an entrance, throat and exit portion,
a secondary venturi off center but substantially parallel to
said central axis, comprising an entrance, throat and exit
portion which exit portion leads into the throat portion of
said main venturi;
a connector, one end of which leads into the throat portion
of said secondary venturi and the other end of which is
connectable to a source of said secondary fluid;
at least one passageway located off center with respect to
said main venturi and designed to permit a variable pro-
portion of said main fluid to flow from one end of said
housing to the other end thereof, while bypassing said
main venturi, and
shutter means to control said bypassing flow between a
maximum and zero flow,
wherein, by selectively creating a misalignment between at
least two different portions of said passage way, a variable
constriction is produced in said passage way, which con-
striction, when maximum, results in zero bypass flow and,
when zero, results in maximum bypass flow.
., , . .A^ \e~ . ■■/■
extending through said first wall from said first chamber
to said second chamber, and a second nozzle extending
through said second wall from said second chamber to
said other chamber,
a plurality of ports extending through said partition from
said vacuum collecting compartment to selected of said
chambers, including a first port extending from said com-
partment to said second chamber and a second port ex-
tending from said compartment to said other chamber,
and,
at least one check valve, said check valve positioned in said
other chamber and associated with said second port.
4,395,203
VANE CQilPRESSOR HAVING A DISCHARGE RATE
CONTROL
Haruhiko Takada, Konan, Japan, assignor to Diesel Kiki Co.,
Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 247,780
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 29, 1980, 55-41074
Int. Q.^ F04B 49/06
U.S. Q. 417—282 ^ Qaims
4,395,202
MULTI-EJECTOR
Peter Tell, Osterskar, Sweden, assignor to AB Piab, Sweden
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,941
Qaims priority, application Sweden, May 21, 1980, 8003819
Int. Q.3 F04F 5/22
U.S. Q. 417—169 5 Qaims
1. An ejector comprising a housing enclosing a plurality of
chambers arranged in series and separated from a vacuum
collecting compartment by a partition, said plurality of cham-
bers comprising a flrst chamber, which is a pressure supply
chamber, separated from a second chamber by a first wall, and
at least one other chamber, said other chamber being separated
1. In a vane compressor including: a rotary shaft; a rotor
rotatably fitted on and secured to said rotary shaft, said rotor
having an outer peripheral surface thereof formed with a plu-
rality of axial slits; a plurality of vanes radially movably re-
ceived in said axial slits; a housing within which said rotor and
said vanes are accommodated, said rotor, vanes and housing
cooperating with each other to define pump working chambers
therebetween; and a fluid suction passage communicating with
the pump working chambers to guide fluid thereinto from the
1458
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
outside of said compressor; wherein rotation of said rotor
which takes place in unison with rotation of said rotary shaft
causes a pumping action of said fluid;
the improvement which comprises:
valve means disposed to close part of said fluid suction
passage for controlling the rate at which said fluid is
introduced into said pump working chambers;
valve driving means coupled to said valve means for
controlling the closing action of said valve means;
a sensor disposed to detect the rotation rate (r.p.m.) of said
rotor;
and
electronic control means coupled to said sensor and to
said valve driving means and being responsive to an
output of said sensor for controlling the operation of
said valve driving means, said electronic control means
controlling said valve driving means to drive said valve
means so as to vary the opening of said part of said fluid
suction passage, as a function of a value of the rotation
rate (r.p.m.) of said rotor detected by said sensor.
4,395,204
OIL WELL PU.MP
Richard L. Turner, Rte. 2, Box 138, Broken Arrow, Okla. 74012
Filed Oct. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 194,781
Int. a.3 F04B 21/04
MS. a. 417—554 2 Claims
1. A subsurface well pump for disposition within a working
barrel of a well bore and arranged for reciprocal movement
therebetween, said pump comprising housing means having a
chamber provided in one end thereof in communication with a
well fluid reservoir, ball check valve means secured to the
housing means and disposed in the chamber to provide alter-
nate open and closed pxjsitions for the pump during operation
thereof, said chamber having one end thereof closed for limit-
ing the movement of the ball in one direction during opening of
the ball check valve means, passageway means provided in
said housing means and having one end in communication with
the chamber and the opposite end open to an annulus between
the housing means and the working barrel for elevation of the
well fluid to the surface of the well during operation of the
pump, sealing means removably secured to the outer periphery
of the housing means above the closed end of the chamber and
in sealing engagement with the outer periphery of the housing
means and the inner periphery of the working barrel for sealing
the annulus from the well fluid reservoir, said sealing means
comprising a plurality of substantially identical sealing ring
assemblies disposed in stacked relation around the outer pe-
riphery of the housing means, each of said sealing ring assem-
blies comprising a flanged sleeve disposed around the outer
periphery of the housing means and having a resilient sealing
member secured around the outer periphery thereof for sealing
engagement with the inner periphery of the working barrel,
and follower assembly means removably secured to the hous-
ing means and engagable with the uppermost sealing ring
assembly for securely locking the sealing ring assemblies
around the housing means, and wherein the outer periphery of
the resilient sealing members is of a stepped configuration for
an efficient sealing with reduced wear of the sealing members,
and wherein the resilient sealing members are provided with an
annular chamber around the inner periphery thereof for re-
ceiving fluid therein to enhance the sealing qualities thereof,
and wherein the flanged sleeves are provided with a plurality
of circumferentially spaced radially extending bores in com-
munication with the chamber of the sealing rings for directing
fluid thereto, and said housing means is provided with longitu-
dinally extending passageways cooperating with the radially
extending bores to provide fluid inlet passages for the chamber
of the sealing rings.
4,395,205
MECHANICALLY ACTUATED TIP SEALS FOR SCROLL
APPARATUS AND SCROLL APPARATUS EMBODYING
THE SAME
John E. McCullough, Carlisle, Mass., assignor to Arthur D.
Little, Inc., Cambridge, Mass.
Filed Feb. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 233,915
Int. a.3 FOIC 19/08: F16F 1/08: F16J 15/16: B23P 15/00
U.S. a. 418—55 13 Qaims
54 37
43
41
1. A method of making an axially biasing spring element for
a tip seal element in an involute scroll fluid moving apparatus,
including a scroll member having an involute curved channel
including a bottom wall and at least one side wall extending
along the axial end of the scroll member, said tip seal element
being of involute configuration and normally disposed at least
partially in said channel above said bottom wall for axial move-
ment therein, comprising the steps of:
(a) forming an involute curved sheet metal spring element
from spring metal so that the thickness of the sheet metal
element all lies in substantially the same plane in its re-
laxed state, with the pitch of the involute curve of the
spring element being greater than that of the channel, the
width of the spring element being substantially greater
than its thickness and less than the width of the channel;
(b) deforming the spring element by bending it in its own
plane so that the pitch of its involute curve matches that of
the channel, the deformation not exceeding the elastic
July 26, 19
II
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1459
limit of the sheet metal material and causing said spring
element to assume a coned angle along its length; and
(c) placing the deformed spring element in the channel
adjacent the bottom wall of the channel.
7. A method of making a tip seal in an involute scroll fluid
apparatus including a scroll member having an involute curved
channel including a bottom wall and at least one side wall
extending along the axial end of the scroll member, and a tip
seal element normally disposed at least in part in said channel
above said bottom wall for axial movement therein, comprising
the steps of:
(a) forming the tip seal element so that it has an mvolute
curved configuration substantially matching that of the
channel;
(b) forming the length of the tip seal element so that it is
shorter at its inner end than said channel and longer at its
outer end than said channel; and
(c) placing the seal element in the channel in its normal,
relaxed condition and subsequently torqueing it within the
channel to force the inner and outer ends into the channel
and to therefore provide a circumferential load on the seal
element against a side wall of the channel.
4,395,206
SEAL COmIpENSATED GEOMETRY ROTARY MOTION
DEVICE
Benjamin Hoffmann, Minneapolis, Minn., assignor to Trochoid
Power Corporation, Eden Prairie, Minn.
Filed Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,429
Int. a? FOIC 1/10. 1/22: B23P 15/00. 15/10
U.S. a. 418—61 A 24 Qaims
^^
said tracing disk having a radius equal to said predeter-
mined distance, such that said first working member pro-
file surface is radially recessed by said predetermined
distance everywhere about the periphery thereof relative
to said conventional trochoidal curve, and
said second working member profile surface is that of a
modified envelope curve derived from said modified tro-
choidal curve traced by said tracing disk such that said
second working member profile surface is radially en-
larged by said predetermined distance everywhere about
the periphery thereof relative to said conventional enve-
lope curve.
4,395,207
GEAR PUMP OR MOTOR WITH BEARING PASSAGE
FOR SHAFT LUBRICATION
Erkki Manttari, and Matti Korpinen, both of Jyviiskylii, Fin-
land, assignors to Valmet Oy, Finland
Filed Oct. 16, 1980, Ser. No. 197,471
Claims priority, application Finland, Oct. 22, 1979, 793282
Int. CI.' F03C 2/08: F04C 2/18. 15/00
U.S. CI. 418—102 5 Qaims
U 1 10 5 "
1. An improved trochoidal rotary device of the type com-
prising a first working member having a shaped peripheral
profile surface derived from a conventional geometrically
exact trochoidal curve formed from a predetermined base
circle, generating circle, and generating arm length and a
second working member having a shaped peripheral profile
surface in the form of a conventional envelope curve derived
from said conventional trochoidal curve, said second working
member profile having a plurality of apices at which are corre-
spondingly mounted radially outward extending apex seals,
said apex seals each having a sealing face profile for sealably
engaging said profile surface of said first working member and
being offset a predetermined distance from said envelope
curve, said apex seals defining working chamber spaces be-
tween said first and second working members, wherein the
improvement comprises:
said first working member profile surface is that of a modi-
fied trochoidal curve formed from said predetermined
base circle and generating circle and a modified generat-
ing arm length comprising said predetermined generating
arm length with a tracing disk centered on the tip thereof.
1. Gear pump and motor apparatus adapted to operate alter-
natively either as a pump or as a motor, comprising: a housing
having a chamber defined therein, said chamber including a
pair of superimposed substantially cylindrical portions defined
by respective substantially cylindrical inwardly facing sur-
faces, said chamber portions intercommunicating with each
other; a pair of parallely extending toothed gears situated in
said housing chamber in meshing engagement with each other,
each of said gears having an axial shaft fixed to and extending
from at least one of its ends; a pair of bearing sleeves, each
bearing sleeve being mounted in a respective chamber portion
of said housing chamber and including a body having an inner
face surface adapted to normally sealingly engage the end face
of a respective gear, an opposed outer face surface, a substan-
tially cylindrical outer peripheral surface having a diameter
smaller than the diameter of said inwardly facing cylindrical
surface of a respective cylindrical chamber portion and defin-
ing a space between it and said inwardly facing surface of the
respective cylindrical chamber portion of said housing cham-
ber, and a central opening which receives and supports a shaft
of a respective one of said gears for mounting the latter in a
respective portion of said housing chamber, and an oil supply
bore formed through each bearing sleeve substantially in the
plane which passes through the axes of said chamber portions,
each bore opening at one end into the space defined by the
outer peripheral surface of a respective bearing sleeve and the
inwardly facing surface of a respective chamber portion and
opening at its other end into the central opening of said bearing
sleeve, and wherein the ratio of the length to the diameter of
each of said oil supply bores being less than or equal to about
10, whereby oil is directed from said spaces defined between
the peripheral surfaces of the bearing sleeves and the inwardly
facing surfaces of the respective chamber portions through
1460
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
said bores into said bearing sleeve openings to lubricate the upper bead of a green tire, and means for engaging and holding
gear shaft received therein. the tread of the green tire away from said bead grip means to
4,395,208
ROTARY VANE COMPRESSOR WITH WEDGELIKE
CLEARANCE BETWEEN ROTOR AND CYLINDER
Teruo Maruyama, Neyagawa; Tatsuhisa Taguchi, Shiga, and
Tadayuki Onoda, Toyonaka, all of Japan, assignors to Matsu-
shita Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Kadoma, Japan
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,943
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 7, 1980, 55-45350
Int. a.' F04C 18/00. 27/00. 29/02
U.S. CI. 418—102 2 Claims
hold open the tire with the upper bead and tread held apart in
fixed axial relation to one another to facilitate insertion of said
bladder into the green tire.
1. A rotary vane compressor comprising:
a rotor member;
a plurality of vanes slidably mounted in corresponding slid-
ing grooves in said rotor member;
a hollow cylinder in which said rotor member and vanes are
rotatably mounted at a position eccentric to the cross-sec-
tional center of the hollow interior of said cylinder;
end plates secured to opposite ends of said cylinder for
closing the hollow interior to define a vane chamber
therein;
said rotor member having a rotor head portion where the
peripheral surface of said rotor member approaches the
inner peripheral surface of the hollow interior of said
cylinder for dividing the interior of said hollow interior
into a fluid discharge side and a fluid suction side;
said cylinder having a seal portion at the position opposed to
said rotor head portion at which the inner surface of said
hollow interior has a cross-sectional shape lying on the arc
of a seal circle having a radius of curvature smaller than
the radius of curvature of the cross-section of the inner
surface of the hollow interior on circumferentially oppo-
site sides of said seal portion, said seal portion having a
cross-sectional seal circle center lying between the cross-
sectional center of said rotor member and the cross-sec-
tional center of said hollow interior, and at a distance ei
from said cross-sectional center of said rotor and having a
radius r2 = ri -|-ei +h2, where ri is the radius of said rotor
member and h2 is the minimum clearance at the seal por-
tion, and ei has a value 0<ei <e2, where e2 is the distance
between said cross-sectional centers of said hollow inte-
rior and said rotor member.
4,395,209
TIRE PRESS
Anand P. Singh, Youngstown, Ohio, and Daniel Shichman,
Trumbull, Conn., assignors to NRM Corporation, Akron,
Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 255,733, Apr. 20, 1981, Pat. No. 4,338,069,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 138,658, Apr. 9, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 7, 1982, Ser. No. 375,985
Int^.3 B29H 5/02
U.S. a. 425—33 18 Qaims
1. A tire curing press assembly comprising mating mold
sections, means to open and close said mold sections, a center
mechanism including an infiatable shaping and curing bladder,
bead grip means for engaging the interior underside of the
4,395,210
APPARATUS FOR MANUFACTURE OF TURBULENCE
MEMBER MADE OF SYNTHETIC RESIN
Mamoru Hama, Chino, Japan, assignor to Mihama Manufactur-
ing Co., Ltd. and Kato Hatsujo Kaisha, Ltd., both of, Japan
Filed Nov. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 323,704
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 21, 1980, 55-164820
Int. a.3 B29C J7/00
U.S. CI. 425—71 1 Claim
90 '84 V
86 CO
1. In an apparatus for the manufacture of turbulence mem-
bers made of a synthetic resin, which comprises:
(a) an extruding machine provided with an extrusion outlet
for melting therein a synthetic resin by heat and extruding
the molten resin out of said extrusion outlet,
(b) a rotary nozzle rotatably attached to the leading end of
said extrusion outlet and provided with a slit for allowing
the molten resin to be rotated around its axis and simulta-
neously extruded from said slit in the horizontal direction,
(c) a water vessel filled with water and tightly closed on the
upper portion thereof for cooling and solidifying therein
the molten resin extruded from said slit, and
(d) a drawing device for drawing the resin cooled and solidi-
fied in said water vessel,
the improvement wherein said water vessel is divided by a
partition wall into a first relatively narrow cooling chamber
and a second relatively wide cooling chamber,
the lateral wall of said first narrow cooling chamber on the
rotary nozzle side, said partition wall and the lateral wall of
said second wide cooling chamber on the drawing device
side each being provided with an aperture of a diameter
slightly larger than the outside diameter of the resin ex-
truded from said slit so as to be aligned with one another,
said first narrow cooling chamber being connected to a water-
supplying means, and
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1461
said second wide cooling chamber being connected to a sue- therebetween to permit normal free sliding movement of said
tion pipe having the upper end thereof opening to the inte- slide member, a cooling channel in said fiange for fiow of a
rior of said water vessel so as to be positioned at a higher coolant for cooling said fiange to minimize said gap and to cool
level than the level of said apertures and having the lower pjastic material in said gap for solidifying said plastic material
end thereof connected to a suction pump.
13x12
4,395,211
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR MANUFACTURING A
PLASTIC RECORD CARRIER
Egbert Broeksema, and Arnoldus A. Smeets, both of Eindhoven,
Netherlands, assignors to U.S. Philips Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 102,720, Dec. 13, 1979, Pat. No. 4,301,099.
This application Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,905
Claims priority, application Netherlands, Aug. 10, 1979,
7906117 11
" Int. CI.' B29D 77/00
U.S. a. 425—174.4 4 Claims
to prevent outflow of plastic material from said gap. and ther-
mal insulation means between said fiange and said housing for
preventing cooling of said housing by the cooling of said
fiange.
1. An apparatus for manufacturing a record carrier having a
stratified structure and at least one data track, said apparatus
comprising a mold having a surface with a pattern formed
therein corresponding to the data track to be provided on the
record carrier, means for supporting a planar, flexible substrate
opposite said mold for movement towards and away from said
surface, said mold having a cavity formed in the center of said
surface for receiving a curable, fluid resin, said cavity being
configured to mate with a central projection on the substrate
so that upon movement of the substrate towards said mold, the
projection enters said cavity and squeezes the resin in the
cavity onto said surface, means for deforming said substrate
into a convex form bulging toward said mold and for changing
the configuration of said substrate from said convex to a planar
form when said substrate contacts the resin on said surface as
said substrate is moved towards said mold by said supporting
means to thereby roll out the resin over said surface and means
for covering the periphery of said substrate during curing of
the resin.
4,395,213
NOISE SUPPRESSING BLOCK MOLDING MACHINERY
Thomas W. Springs, Alpena, and William F. Wallis, Atlanta,
both of Mich., assignors to Besser Company, Alpena, Mich.
Continuation of Ser. No. 952,634, Oct. 19, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 713,920, Aug. 12,
1976, abandoned. This application Dec. 29, 1980, Ser. No.
220,792
Int. a.' B28B 1/08
U.S. d. 425—211 1 Claim
4 395 212
SCREEN-CHANGE DEVICE FOR EXTRUDERS
Friedrich Lambertus, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Werner & Pfleiderer, Stuttgart, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,329
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Apr. 3,
1980, 3013038
Int. CV BOIB 25/12; B29F 3/02
U.S. a. 425—185 9 Claims
1. Screening apparatus for molten plastic flowing from an
extruder of plastic material, said screening apparatus compris-
ing a housing adapted for being mounted on the extruder and
having a feed channel for flow of plastic material from the
extruder through said housing, a slide member, said housing
having a borehole in which said slide member is slidably
mounted with clearance, replaceable screen elements on said
slide member for being discontinuously positioned in the path
of the plastic material flowing from said extruder, and means
for sealing the clearance between the slide member and said
housing to prevent outflow of plastic material therefrom, said
means comprising a flange on said housing surrounding said
borehole and facing said slide member with a minimal gap
1. In blocking making machinery having a vibratable mold
for the reception of moldable material, a head member mov-
able into said mold for compacting moldable material therein,
a frame member movable relatively to said mold in a direction
toward the latter, and connecting means interposed between
said frame member and said head member and connecting said
head member to said frame member for movement with and
relative to the latter, the improvement comprising first and
second yieldable cushioning means forming part of said con-
necting means and arranged in opposition to one another
thereby to apply a yieldable, cushioned force in each of two
opposite directions on said head member; and means for in-
creasing or decreasing the force applied on said head member
by a selected one of either of said cushioning means and sub-
stantially simultaneously decreasing or increasing, respec-
tively, the force applied on said head member by the other of
said cushioning means, each of said cushioning means being
inflatable and deflatable, and means for inflating and deflating
said cushioning means in timed relation to movement of said
head member into said mold.
1462
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
435,214
FOAM EXTRUSION APPARATUS HAVING
DOWNSTREAM UPPER AND LOWER HINGED
SHAPING MEANS AND SIDE RESTRAINING MEANS
Arthur L. Phipps, Tallmadge, and Ben Stoyanov, Akron, both of
Ohio, assignors to U.C. Industries, Tallmadge, Ohio
Filed Aug. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 297,036
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00; B29F 3/04
U.S. a. 425—214 37 Qaims
1. A foam extrusion apparatus comprising an extrusion die
having a die orifice, opposed surface shaping members on
respective opposite sides of the extrudate flow path down-
stream of said die orifice, opposed surface finishing members
on respective opposite sides of the extrudate flow path down-
stream of said surface shaping members, first hinge means
pivotally supporting the upstream ends of said shaping mem-
bers adjacent said die orifice, second hinge means pivotally
connecting the downstream ends of said shaping members to
said finishing members, respectively, and means adjustably
supporting said finishing members for movement toward an*,
away from the extrudate flow path as well as for movement
along the extrudate flow path.
4,395,215
HLM FORMING STRUCTURE FOR UNIFORMLY
DEBOSSING AND SELECTIVELY APERTURING A
RESILIENT PLASTIC WEB AND METHOD FOR ITS
CONSTRUCTION
Delmar J. Bishop, Hamilton, Ohio, assignor to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Feb. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 230,919
Int. a.'B29C 17/04
U.S. a. 425—290 12 Qaims
tured planar sheet exhibiting a second pattern of apertures
corresponding to the portions of said web to be debossed
and apertured and a third pattern of smaller sized aper-
tures corresponding to those portions of said web to be
debossed without aperturing; and
(c) superposing said continuously apertured planar sheet on
said selectively apertured planar sheet so that at least a
portion of said apertures in said second and third patterns
in said selectively apertured planar sheet are placed in
fluid communication with said apertures in said continu-
ously apertured planar sheet, whereby those portions of
said selectively apertured planar sheet exhibiting said
third pattern of fluid communicating apertures contact
and provide support to said heated plastic web when said
web is subjected to said fluid pressure differential, thereby
preventing rupture of said web at said points of contact,
while those portions of said selectively apertured planar
sheet exhibiting said second pattern of fluid communicat-
ing apertures provide no support to said heated plastic
web when said web is subjected to said fluid pressure
differential, thereby permitting rupture of said web in
areas coinciding with said second pattern of fluid commu-
nicating apertures.
9. A three-dimensional forming structure for imparting a
substantially continuous three-dimensional pattern of deboss-
ments, a predetermined portion of said debossments being
apertured at preselected points along the surface of a heated
plastic web subjected to a fluid pressure differential while in
contact with the surface of said forming structure, said forming
structure comprising:
(a) at least one continuously apertured planar sheet exhibit-
ing a first substantially continuous pattern of apertures
corresponding to the debossments to be imparted to said
web; and
(b) a second selectively apertured planar sheet having an
overall size and shape generally similar to said continu-
ously apertured planar sheet, said selectively apertured
planar sheet exhibiting a second pattern of apertures cor-
responding to the portions of said web to be debossed and
apertured and a third pattern of smaller sized apertures
corresponding to those portions of said web to be
debossed without aperturing, said continuously apertured
planar sheet being superposed on said selectively aper-
tured planar sheet so that at least a portion of said aper-
tures in said second and third patterns in said selectively
apertured planar sheet are placed in fluid communication
with said apertures in said continuously apertured planar
sheet, whereby those portions of said selectively aper-
tured planar sheet exhibiting said third pattern of fluid
communicating apertures contact and provide support to
said heated plastic web when said web is subjected to said
fluid pressure differential, thereby preventing rupture of
said web at said points of contact, while those portions of
said selectively apertured planar sheet exhibiting said
second pattern of fluid communicating apertures provide
no support to said heated plastic web when said web is
subjected to said fluid pressure differential, thereby per-
mitting rupture of said web in areas corresponding with
said second pattern of fluid communicating apertures.
1. A method for constructing a three-dimensional forming
structure for imparting a substantially continuous three-dimen-
sional pattern of debossments, a predetermined portion of said
debossments being apertured at preselected points along the
surface of a heated plastic web subjected to a fluid pressure
differential while in contact with the surface of said forming
structure, said method comprising the steps of:
(a) forming at least one continuously apertured planar sheet
exhibiting a first substantially continuous pattern of aper-
tures corresponding to the debossments to be imparted to
said web;
(b) forming a second selectively apertured planar sheet
having an overall size and shape generally similar to said
continuously apertured planar sheet, said selectively aper-
4,395,216
DOUGH PERFORATOR
Richard J. Anetsberger, and John A. Anetsberger, both of
Northbrook, III., assignors to Anetsberger Brothers, Inc.,
Northbrook, III.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,608
Int. a.3 B29C 17/08: A21C 11/10
U.S. a. 425—290 8 Qaims
4. In a dough sheeter having rollers for sheeting a dough
piece, and drive means for rotating said rollers; dough sheet
perforator means, comprising an axially aligned and spaced set
of dough sheet perforator members rotated by said drive
means, means for guiding a dough sheet into contact with said
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1463
perforator members, and a backup unit including sheet metal and with the two opposing acute angles being not greater than
spring members individually cooperating with said perforator 60° and having a dimension measured along the axis of rotation
members to effect lineal scraping thereagainst of the latter, which is 60-80 percent of the corresponding dimension of the
duct whereby in the position of maximum closure said butter-
fly valve cuts off at least 70 percent but not more than 90
percent of the flow cross section of the respective duct.
4,395,218
MECHANICAL EXPANSION PLUG FOR THE
INTERNAL CALIBRATION OF PLASTIC MATERIAL
TUBES IN GENERAL, PARTICULARLY FOR
FASHIONING THE SEATS FOR GASKETS
Neri Ermes. Bagnacavallo (RA), Italy, assignor to S.I.C.A.
Serrande.Infissi.Carpenteria.Attrezzatura S.p.A., Alfonsine
(RA), Italy
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,222
Claims priority, application Italy, No?. 14, 1980, 3570 A/80
Int. a.3B29C/ 7/00
U.S. a. 425—392 5 Qaims
whereby spaced apertures are formed completely through a
dough sheet to prevent forming of any aperture-closing mem-
branes thereover.
4,395,217
ADAPTOR FOR EXTRUDING A PLURALITY OF
STREAMS OF SYNTHETIC THERMOPLASTIC FOAM
SIMULTANEOUSLY FROM A SINGLE EXTRUDER
Alberio Benadi , Turin, Italy, assignor to Lavorzaione Materie
Plastiche LJVI.P. S.p.A., Turin, Italy
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,472
Qaims priority, application Italy, Dec. 19, 1980, 68950 A/80
Int. a.3 B29D 27/00: B29F 3/04
U.S. a. 425—382 R 3 Qaims
1. A synthetic thermoplastic foam extruder comprising a
barrel, injection means for injecting a foaming agent into said
barrel and an adapter for extruding a plurality of streams of
thermoplastic synthetic foam simultaneously from said ex-
truder, comprising: a body having at one end means for attach-
ing said body to said barrel of said extruder in axial alignment
therewith; a manifold chamber formed frontally in said one
end to receive the thermoplastic mass from said barrel; a plu-
rality of ducts formed in said body, radiating from said mani-
fold chamber and opening on the opposite of said body, each of
said ducts terminating with attachment means for a respective
extrusion head; a butterfly valve in each of said ducts and
means for locking each of the valves individually in a desired
angular position, each butterfly valve being comprised of a
disc member having a median transverse section in the form of
a rhomboid with the two opposing obtuse angles rounded off
1. Mechanical expansion plug for the internal calibration of
plastic material tubes in general, particularly for fashioning the
seats for gaskets, comprising a tubular extending body that can
be inserted inside the tube to be machined and has a circumfer-
ential aperture along its lateral surface, characterized by the
fact that it comprises: a movable element of truncated cone
conformation, supported and able to slide, in the two direc-
tions, inside the said body, coaxially thereto, without the possi-
bility of one rotating with respect to the other, under the action
of operating means, the said element being provided, peripher-
ally, at equal angular spacing one from the other, with a first
and second set of guides that extend along generatrices of the
said element, alternate, and slope with respect to the longitudi-
nal sliding axis; a first plurality of sectors of circular conforma-
tion, movable radially inside the said circumferential aperture,
virtually triangular when viewed along a radial section of the
said body, bent externally to conform to the maximum circum-
ference of the seat to be fashioned in the tube, and provided
internally with a first tailpiece that can be coupled to a corre-
sponding guide in the aforementioned first set; and a second
plurality of sectors, also movable radially inside the said aper-
ture, virtually trapezoidal when viewed along a radial section,
bent externally to conform to the said maximum circumfer-
ence, placed alternately with respect to the corresponding
sectors of the said first plurality with their lateral sloping
surfaces mating, and provided internally with a second tail-
piece that can be coupled to the corresponding guides of the
said second set, the latter having an inclination more pro-
nounced than that of the guides of the said first set, said first
and second pluralities of sectors being movable between radi-
ally retracted and radially expanded positions and adopting, in
the radially expanded position, a conformation identical to the
internal conformation of the calibrated material.
1464
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,219
APPARATUS FOR FORMING COMPACTIBLE
MATERIAL INTO A BODY
Jeffrey J. Franken, Birdsborough; Walter W. Gladney, Kutz-
town, and William R. Yeich, West Lawn, all of Pa., assignors
to Western Electric Co., Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 222,424, Jan. 5, 1981, Pat. No. 4,370,294.
This application Sep. 27, 1982, Ser. No. 424,689
Int. a.J AOIJ 21/00
U.S. CI. 425—405 R 5 Claims
1. Apparatus for forming compactible material into a body
having a desired size and shape, comprising:
a pouch of a first size, having elastic walls of sufficient
strength to at least partially compact the material, such
walls being expandable to a second size, larger than the
body, said pouch having a necked opening therein at a
first end thereof;
a chamber for receiving the pouch, said chamber having
inside walls conforming to the desired shape of the body
but of the second size, the first end of the pouch being
extendable through a necked opening in said chamber and
the walls of the first end being sealable to the walls of the
opening such that the interior of the pouch is accessible
from outside the chamber;
means for forming a sufficient vacuum condition between
the pouch and chamber to substantially elastically expand
the pouch to the size and shape of the inside walls of the
chamber;
means for introducing the material into the pouch to load the
same, said material substantially conforming, as it is intro-
duced, to the shape and second size of the expanded
pouch; and
means for introducing air into the chamber to break the
vacuum condition thereby permitting the pouch to com-
press the loaded material and maintain the shape for fur-
ther compacting into the desired body size and shape.
4,395,220
APPARATUS FOR FORMING CONSTRUCTION BLOCKS
Warren L. Harter, Rte. 3, Box 1038, Newport, Wash. 99156
Filed Jun. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 271,599
Int. a.5 B28B 21/92
U.S. a. 425—413 10 Claims
and evenly while producing a cylindrical hollow core through
a formed block, comprising:
a continuous smooth cylindrical outer surface formed about
a center axis;
a curved vane projecting axially outward from one end of
the cylindrical surface to an outer edge lying within a
plane perpendicular to the axis of the smooth cylindrical
surface;
said curve vane having a radial edge that intersects said
outer edge and is an extension of said cylindrical surface;
the vane presenting a transversely curved convex face in the
intended direction of rotation of the rotor;
the face of the vane having a radial orientation at the center
axis of the cylindrical surface and constantly receding
from the direction of rotation spirally to a tangential ori-
entation at the cylindrical surface.
4,395,221
TUBULAR EXTRUSION APPARATUS
F. John Herrington, Holcomb, N.Y., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 109,696, Jan. 4, 1980, Pat. No.
4,285,656. This application Aug. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 294,599
Int. CI.' B29F 3/04
U.S. CI. 425-467 12 Claims
1. A rotor for displacing and compacting materials smoothly
1. A side-fed tubular extrusion die comprising:
a sidewall defining the exterior of said die, an inlet orifice in
said sidewall for introducing a molten resin into said die, a
first chamber located interiorly of said die in communica-
tion with said inlet orifice and extending circumferentially
of said die so that the longitudinal extent of said chamber
forms a C-shape, said inlet orifice communicating with
said C-shaped first chamber at a point intermediate the
ends thereof, said C-shaped first chamber receiving a
molten resin introduced through said inlet orifice, a sec-
ond toroidal -shaped chamber located interiorly of said
die, an annular interior die wall separating said first and
second chambers, a plurality of openings provided in and
spaced along said interior die wall, said openings intercon-
necting said first and second chambers to allow said sec-
ond chamber to receive a molten resin from said first
chamber, and an extrusion gap defined by a mandrel posi-
tioned coaxially within said die and an interior die side-
wall coaxial with said mandrel, said extrusion gap receiv-
ing molten resin from said second toroidal-shaped cham-
ber.
7. A side-fed tubular extrusion die comprising:
a sidewall defining the exterior of said die, an inlet orifice in
said sidewall for introducing a molten resin into said die, a
first at least partly toroidal-shaped chamber located interi-
orly of said die in communication with said inlet orifice for
receiving a molten resin introduced through said inlet
orifice, a second toroidal-shaped chamber located interi-
orly of said die, an interior die wall separating said first
and second chambers, a plurality of openings provided in
and spaced along said interior die wall, said openings
having respective lengths which progressively decrease
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1465
from an opening closest to said inlet orifice to an opening
farthest removed therefrom, said openings interconnect-
ing said first and second chambers to allow said second
chamber to receive a molten resin from said first chamber,
and an extrusion gap defined by a mandrel positioned
coaxially within said die and an interior die sidewall coax-
ial with said mandrel, said extrusion gap receiving molten
resin from said second toroidal-shaped chamber.
excess of the stoichiometric rate required for the combustion of
the fuel, injecting only a secondary fuel in the absence of air
into the furnace in the vicinity of the first-stage combustion
zone at a rate in excess of the stoichiometric rate required for
the consumption of the excess oxygen resulting from the com-
bustion in the first-stage zone to form a second-stage combus-
tion in the vicinity of the first-stage zone, the secondary fuel
being supplied at the ratio of secondary fuel supply to total fuel
4,395,222
INJECTION MOLDING APPARATUS
William R. Gaiser, Dayton, Ohio, and John W. Gaiser, Schaum-
burg. III., assignors to The Broadway Companies, Inc., Day-
ton, Ohio
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 263,841
Int. CI.' B29F 1/00
U.S. CI. 425—548 14 Claims
1. For use with an injection molding apparatus of the type
having an injector portion including a plurality of mold cavi-
ties communicating with a source of molten plastic material, a
heated manifold comprising:
an elongated shell having an exterior surface defining at least
one inlet sprue for communicating with a source of mate-
rial and a plurality of outlet gates for communicating with
mold cavities;
said shell having an interior portion defining a central longi-
tudinal passage therethrough;
heating means positioned within said passage for radiating
heat into said interior portion; and
said interior portion having a plurality of discrete spiral
runners extending from said inlet sprue to said outlet gates
and spiraling about said heating means such that molten
plastic material may flow from said inlet sprue through
said runners to said outlet gates and receive heat energy
from said heating means.
4,395,223
MULTI-STAGE COMBUSTION METHOD FOR
INHIBITING FORMATION OF NITROGEN OXIDES
Noboru Okigami; Hiroshi Hayasaka; Yoshitoshi Sekiguchi, and
Harushige Tamura, all of Osaka, Japan, assignors to Hitachi
Shipbuilding & Engineering Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 914,146, Jun. 9, 1978. This application Dec.
31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,825
Int. CV F23M 3/04
U.S. a. 431—10 6 Qaims
1. A multi-stage combustion method for inhibiting the for-
mation of nitrogen oxides comprising injecting a primary fuel
and primary air into a furnace to burn the fuel and form a
first-stage combustion zone, the air being supplied at a rate in
"^T — ': ■"' *
supply of 0.2 to 0.5, the heat produced therein being absorbed
by heat absorbing means provided in the wall of the furnace,
and supplying secondary air downstream of the second-stage
zoiie, at a rate not less than the stoichiometric rate required for
the oxidation of the unburned components resulting from the
combustion in the second-stage zone to oxidize the unburned
components and form a third-stage combustion zone down-
stream from the second-stage zone.
4,395,224
BURNER CONTROL SYSTEM
Phillip J. Cade, Winchester, Mass., assignor to Electronics
Corporation of America, Cambridge, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser, No. 9,307, Feb. 5, 1979, Pat. No.
4,243,372. This application Sep. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 190,243
Int. CI.' F23N 5/00
U.S. CI. 431—31 5 Claims
rMAtd ruCL Oft
r»>tOT Off
'uCk OFT U)C"OW t
1. Burner control apparatus for use with a fuel burner instal-
lation having an operating control switch which is actuated to
produce an ignition request signal, an air fiow switch which
provides an air fiow signal to indicate the presence of an ade-
quate air flow through the burner, and means responsive to
said burner control apparatus for controlling fuel flow, said
burner control apparatus comprising:
an electronic timing circuit for providing an ignition cycle
having successive timing intervals including in sequence a
purge interval, a pilot ignition interval, a pilot stabilization-
interval and a main fuel ignition interval;
air means for providing an air flow through the burner
during said ignition cycle;
lockout means, responsive to a lockout signal applied thereto
for a predetermined time, for terminating burner opera-
tion and stopping fuel flow to said burner installation;
1466
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
means, responsive to said operating control switch, for acti-
vating said timing circuit, including:
a first photocoupler having a light source connected in
parallel with said air flow switch and providing an
output signal across its output terminals when said air
flow switch is open;
a second photocoupler having a light source connected in
series with said air flow switch and providing an output
signal across its output terminals when said air flow
switch is closed;
means, operative in response to an ignition request signal,
for initially applying power to the timing circuit to
begin an ignition cycle only if said first photocoupler
output signal is present; and
' means, operative in response to an ignition request signal,
for applying a lockout signal to said lockout means until
the occurrence of said second photocoupler output
signal;
whereby said timing circuit is disabled to prevent further
ignition cycle operation if said air flow switch is closed
before said air means is operative and said lockout means
is actuated to prevent further ignition cycle operation if
said air flow signal is not present within a predetermined
time after said air means is operative.
of a burner by monitoring combustion exhaust gas of said
burner comprising:
a detecting tube positioned adjacent said burner receiving
exhaust gas into an inlet thereof, said burner having gas
supply pipe, and an inlet mixing tube, said detecting tube
having an outlet in communication with said mixing tube
of said burner,
a tubular oxygen concentration cell element having elec-
trodes on its inner and outer surfaces, said cell element
4,395,225
BURNER OPERATED WITH LIQUID FUEL FOR
HEATING DEVICES
Bernd Mittmann, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Webasto-Werk W. Baier GmbH and Co., Munich, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No, 241,369
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 15,
1980, 3010078; Jan. 13, 1981, 3100744
Int. CI.' F23N 5/00
U.S. a. 431—62 27 Claims
iiniiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiiii
,'H I VniiiiiiiiiMiiiMii)
ll Vlllllll lllllllllllllllllllll
na
3b
45 6
'• ^ w*
[UTTTTTTTT
IIIIIIIIIIIIinillllllllllK
l^^W _a CL a!l
9
r
tfclQ
being interposed in said detecting tube, a difference in
oxygen concentrations at each of said electrodes produc-
ing a certain output when said cell element is heated to a
high temperature,
means for heating said cell element to said high temperature,
and
safety valve means in said gas supply pipe and connected to
said cell element for shutting off gas supply to said burner
when said cell element produces less than said certain
output.
4,395,227
FLAME THROWER ATTACHMENT
Scotlund Stivers, Box 60, Star Route, Bruno, Minn. 55712
Filed Mar. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 245,966
Int. C1.J F23Q 2/00
U.S. CI. 431—142 7 Claims
1. Burner operated with liquid fuel, for heating devices,
especially for vehicle heaters, comprising a low-pressure atom-
izer arranged at one end of a combustion chamber, said atom-
izer including a burner insert and a nozzle projecting into an
end of the burner insert facing away from the combustion
chamber, supply means for feeding a fuel and a primary air
stream into said nozzle, and flow control means for automati-
cally controlling at least the quantity of primary air passing
through the burner in dependence on the temperature of the
burner, further comprising flow control means for automati-
cally controlling the quantity of a second air stream fed to the
burner in dependence on the burner temperature.
4,395,226
COMBUSTION SAFETY APPARATUS
Masakatsu Nakanishi, and Toshiyuki Nomura, both of Nagoya,
Japan, assignors to Rinnai Kabushiki Kaisha, Nagoya, Japan
Filed Aug. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 178,346
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 20, 1979, 54/104995
Int. a.3 F23N 5/00
U.S. a. 431—76 3 Qaims
1. A combustion safety apparatus for controlling operation
1. A flame thrower attachment for use with a container of
combustible material comprising:
a housing for mounting to and partially encapsulating an
aerosol like container of pressurized combustible material;
a nozzle head located on said housing and adapted to con-
nect to an aerosol like container of pressurized combusti-
ble material to permit said nozzle head to release a com-
bustible material from an aerosol like container of pressur-
ized combustible material, said nozzle head having an
opening for directing a pressurized combustible material
along an axis and a diverging section to direct a flame in a
first direction;
an ignition means for igniting combustible material as it
discharges from an aerosol like container of pressurized
combustible material; and
a finger guard attached to said housing, said finger guard
having a section extending in the first direction, said finger
guard located proximate but off-set from said nozzle head
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1467
so that a flame issuing from said nozzle head will pass over
said finger guard without burning the user's fingers.
4,395,228
ROTARY BURNER FOR LIQUID FUELS
Vladimir G. Bazarov, ulitsa Matveevskaya, 42, korpus 5, kv.
135; Alexei V. Kuzmin, prospekt Vemadskogo, 89, korpus 2,
kv. 64; Gennady A. Smaga, ulitsa Akademicheskaya, 71, kv.
79; Zelik F. Kapchits, Oktyabrskaya ulitsa, 69, kv. 51; Sergei
J. Dennikov, ulitsa Veshnyakovskaya, 26, kv. 334, all of Mos-
cow, and Peter I. Soosalu, Pyizmyae TEE, 113, kv. 14, Tallin,
all of U.S.S.R.
Filed Feb. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 232,113
Int. C\? F23D 11/04
U.S. Q. 431—168 4 Qaims
1. A rotary burner for viscous liquid fuels, comprising a
casing; a nozzle mounted on said casing for axial movement; a
fuel atomizer rotatably mounted in said nozzle made in the
form of a cup which together with an output portion of the
nozzle defines an annular convergent channel connected to an
air supply means; a circular row of vanes shaped as wedges
whose bases face the cup edge, and mounted on an external
surface of the cup near to an edge of said cup.
4,395,229
DISCHARGE TYPE IGNITOR FOR OIL STOVE
Shuji Yasuhira, Tondabayashi, and Shinichi Naka, Yao, both of
Japan, assignors to Sharp Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 247,250
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 22, 1980, 55-
104103[U]
Int. Q.3 F23Q 3/00
U.S. CI. 431—261
9 Qaims
said wick and reestablishing the supply of electric power
to the ignitor plug if said wick is inadvertently extin-
guished while being in a predetermined operative posi-
tion.
4,395,230
IGNITION CARRY-OVER IN MULTIPLE BURNER
HEATING APPARATUS
Max A. Berry, Covina, Calif., assignor to Abdul R. Ghafoori,
Monterey Park, Calif.
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,416
Int. Q.' F23D 13/36
U.S. Q. 431—286 3 Qaims
1. In a heating apparatus of the type including a multiplicity
of spaced, separate burners, each burner including an elongate
length of pipe along which a flame extends, and at least one
manifold connected to said burners for conducting air and gas
thereto, the improvement wherein said burners are arranged in
a zig-zag pattern with the first end of each burner spaced
relatively closely to the first end of the adjacent burner on one
side thereof and spaced relatively far from the first end of the
adjacent burner on the other side thereof.
4,395,231
METHODS OF AND APPARATUS FOR SINTERING
TUBULAR CERAMIC ARTICLES
Gilbert Sands, Northwich, and Ian H. Jennens, Chester, both of
England, assignors to Chloride Silent Power Limited, London,
England
Filed Oct. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 316,715
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 6, 1980,
8035728
Int. Q.' F27D 3/00
U.S. Q. 432—11 13 Claims
1. An ignitor assembly for oil stoves comprising:
an electric power supply;
an ignitor plug held in alignment with an exposed portion of
a wick for firing the wick through the utilization of dis-
charge originated from the electric power supply to the
ignitor plug; and
a flame sensor disposed at a predetermined distance from the
ignitor plug and in alignment with the exposed portion of
the wick, said flame sensor element terminating the supply
of electric power to said ignitor plug after combustion of
1. A method of moving ceramic tubes into and through a
pass-through sintering furnace comprising pushing a succes-
sion of the tubes into the furnace at a uniform speed and, at the
exit end of the furnace, gripping each tube as it leaves the
furnace and pulling the tube forwardly at a uniform speed
which is less than the speed at which the tubes are fed into the
furnace but sufficient to hold the pulled tube clear of the next
following tube.
1468
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,232
OVEN CONTROL APPARATUS
Albert P. Koch, Kinnelon, N.J., assignor to Nabisco Brands,
Inc., Parsippany, N.J.
Filed Dec. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 327,846
Int. a.' F27D 27/00. 19/00
U.S. a. 432—32 18 Cl«»ns
// » ti »'i *', ",
ing compartment and having a second means operable to estab-
lish a recirculated forced air flow internally within said heating
compartment without entry of said internal forced air flow into
said air conduit, said first and second air fan means enabling
tu iu i« 'ttt 'ru U- 1
mixing of said heated air stream with said internal forced air
flow, and vent means formed in said heating compartment to
enable the outflow of heated air from said heating compart-
ment.
,a ui lU m at IU m
1. An apparatus for displaying the rate of heat input to a zone
of an oven of the type comprising burner means, gas supply
means comprising a supply conduit for transporting combusti-
ble gas between a pressurized source and the burner means,
and valve means operable to vary the flow of combustible gas
through the supply conduit, wherein the apparatus comprises:
(a) a manometer in communication with the supply conduit,
having two upwardly-directed legs and containing suffi-
cient fluid to at least partially fill each leg throughout the
intended operating range, wherein one of said legs is a
display leg and the cross-sectional areas of both legs are
proportioned effectively to cause the level of fluid in the
display leg to move in direct proportion to the rate of flow
of combustible gas to the burner means;
(b) an adjustable scale juxtaposed with the display leg and
linearly calibrated to indicate the rate of heat input to the
zone of the oven for a given rate of flow of combustible
gas indicated by the level of fluid in the display leg; and
(c) means for adjusting said adjustable scale to correct for
the heating value of the combustible gas. comprising a
calibration scale having markings indicating a range of
heating values for various combustible gases, a set point
indicator, and means for aligning the set point indicator
with a marking on the calibration scale corresponding to
the heating value of the combustible gas in use.
4 395 234
OPTICAL SCANNING PROBE WITH MULTIPLE
OUTPUTS
Martin Shenker, Pomona, N.Y., assignor to Farrand Optical
Co., Inc., Valhalla, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 16, 1977, Ser. No. 833,842
Int. a.3 G09B 9/08
U.S. a. 434—33 5 Qaims
\>,
v.„
4,395,233
DUAL FLOW HEATING APPARATUS
Robert C. Smith, Vergennes, and A. Bcnns Cox, II, North Fer-
risburg, both of Vt., assignors to G. S. Blodgett Co., Inc.,
Burlington, Vt.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,182
Int. C\? F27B 3/22: A21B 1/00: F24C 15/32
U.S. a. 432—176 37 Claims
1. In a forced air heating apparatus having a heating com-
partment and an associated air conduit means connected
thereto; the improvement comprising heater means disposed
within said conduit means for heating an intake ambient air
stream drawn into said conduit means at a first location, said
conduit means enabling transport of a heated air stream from
said heater means into said heating compartment at a second
location, an air fan means located in said heating compartment
and having a first means operable to forcibly draw said heated
air stream into contacting therewith at its entry into said heat-
1. A multiple output scanning probe having an entrance
pupil, an exit pupil and an optical axis, the optical elements
between said pupils comprising a relatively distortion-free
telesope of approximately one power, said telescope including
an image collimating element, wherein a coUimated output at
the exit pupil is divided into a plurality of images by a plurality
of imaging systems, each of said imaging systems received a
portion of the output field to provide a true angular image of
said portion of the output field.
JULYi26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1469
4,395,235
FOUR PIVOT LINKAGE TO SIMULATE HEAD/NECK
KINEMATICS
Edward B. Becker, Riverhead, N.Y., assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Secretary of the Navy,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Feb. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 344,916
Int. C1.3 G09B 23/32
U.S. a. 434—270 2 Claims
/
1. An apparatus for simulating head/neck kinematics com-
prising:
_ a roll-pitch link having means for pivotable attachment to
the torso of an anthropomorphic dummy;
a yaw-pitch link having means for pivotable attachment to
the head of said anthropomorphic dummy; and;
a neck link having an arcuate form, the upper end of said
neck link being pivotally connected to said yaw-pitch link
and the lower end of said neck link being pivotally con-
nected to said roll-pitch link such than when said appara-
tus is attached to said anthropomorphic dummy a four
pivot linkage is formed between the torso and the head.
' ' 4,395,236
METHOD OF GENERATING PROCESS INSTRUCTIONS
John P. Gotthold, 1258 Mandarin Dr., Sunnyvale, Calif. 94087
Filed Oct. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 307,726
Int. CV G09B 79/00
U.S. CI. 434—219 3 Qaims
A'
J ViOi >
VIDEO
MONITOR
i-i
UAfiOCOPV
OCviCfe I
"^ »
I
kW ttFECTS I-
CLN£RATO«
r- '"
MEUOP •
OCv) E
1. The method of generating a set of instructions for con-
ducting a process, comprising the steps of;
conducting the process to show the various steps of the process
in sequential order;
imaging each step of the process with a video camera to gener-
ate a video signal;
supplying the video signal to a video monitor to allow study of
the image for correction and alteration;
generating a hard copy of the image by supplying the video
signal to a hard copy device capable of receiving a video
signal and generating a hard copy photograph-like record on
a paper-like medium;
recording the video signal on a video signal recorder for future
use in generating subsequent hard copies; and
assembling the hard copies in proper sequence to form a set of
instructions showing the process.
4,395,237
AMPHIBIOUS BICYCLE
Yaichi Watanabe, 5-11 Kitakasugaoka, 4-Chome, Ibaraki-Shi,
Osaka-Fu, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 971,885, Dec. 21, 1978, abandoned.
This application Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,204
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 24, 1977, 52-156205
Int. CI.' B60F 3/00
U.S. CI. 4W-27 7 Claims
221
221 '7 11 „
212 21 213 22 ;-, 221 213
221
2
6i
,4 213 \2i'
,.VJnL'.. 2131
222 "22213^^^"
213 15 . 2T3
22 11^221
21 213 221 '>{' 22 213 21
212
212
"222 222
213 18 - 213
12
212
1. An amphibious vehicle comprising a bicycle having a
body and ground engaging front and rear wheels for running
on land, front wheel shaft means and rear wheel shaft means
respectively on said body, each of said shaft means having
opposite end portions projecting transversely outwardly of the
body, a float mounting frame freely rotatably mounted on each
end of each shaft means, and floats detachably securable one to
each float mounting frame, each float being an inflatable air-
tight bag capable of being inflated into a ball-like shape, each of
said float mounting frames comprising a cage within which
part of the inflated float may be disposed, and with each of said
float mounting frames including a flanged sleeve which sur-
rounds the associated shaft means with said cage connected
with said flanged sleeve, and means for mounting each cage on
the respective flanged sleeve with the direction of each of the
cages reversed so that each cage may be accommodated in-
wardly of the end of the associated shaft means.
4,395,238
OUTBOARD MOTOR MOUNTING MEANS AFFORDING
UPWARD TILTING WITHOUT TRAVEL OF THE
MOTOR FORWARDLY OF THE BOAT TRANSOM
Guy D. Payne, Lake Villa, III., assignor to Outboard Marine
Corporation, Waukegan, III.
Filed Feb. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 236,319
Int. Cl.^ B63H 27/26
U.S. a. 440—53 23 Qaims
1. A marine propulsion device comprising a bracket adapted
to be fixed to the transom of a boat and including a mounting
surface engaged with the boat transom when said bracket is
boat mounted, said bracket also including a lower part having
a lower bearing with a fixed steering axis which extends gener-
ally vertically when said bracket is boat mounted, a member
including a lower portion extending in said lower bearing, and
a pair of laterally spaced arms connected to said lower portion
and respectively including upper horizontal bearings having a
common axis located in spaced relation above said lower bear-
ing, a steering arm fixed to said member for steerably rotating
1470
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
said member within said lower bearing about said generally
vertical axis, a propulsion unit including a powerhead and a
lower unit extending fixedly downwardly from said power-
head and including a rotatably mounted propeller, and means
on said powerhead adjacent the top thereof and cooperating
with said horizontal bearings for pivotally connecting said
propulsion unit to said member for movement about the hori-
zontal axis between a running position with said propeller
submerged in water and with said propulsion unit located
wholly aft of said bracket mounting surface and an elevated
position with said propeller substantially out of the water and
with said propulsion unit located wholly aft of said bracket
mounting surface.
ports, first conduit means communicating between said first
pump port and one end of said trim cylinder-piston assembly,
second conduit means communicating between said first pump
port and one end of said tilt cylinder-piston assembly, third
conduit means including first valve means dividing said third
conduit means into an upstream portion communicating with
said second pump port and a downstream portion communicat-
ing with the other end of said trim cylinder-piston assembly,
second conduit means including second valve means dividing
said fourth conduit means into an upstream portion communi-
cating with said second pump port and a downstream portion
communicating with the other end of said tilt cylinder-piston
assembly, and third conduit means including third valve means
communicating between said downstream portion of said third
conduit means and said downstream portion of said fourth
conduit means, said third valve means being operable to pre-
vent fluid flow from said downstream portion of said third
conduit means to said downstream portion of said fourth con-
duit means, and to permit fluid flow from said downstream
portion of said fourth conduit means to said downstream por-
tion of said third conduit means in response to the presence of
fluid under pressure above a predetermined level in said down-
stream portion of said fourth conduit means.
4,395,239
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM FOR MARINE PROPULSION
DEVICE WITH SEQUENTIALLY OPERATING TILT AND
TRIM MEANS
Charles B. Hall, Ingleside; Edward D. McBride, Waukegan,
both of III., and Robert F. Yonng, Kenosha, Wis., assignors to
Outboard Marine Corporation, Waukegan, III.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,813
Int. a.J B63H 5/12
U.S. CI. 440—61 14 Oaims
14. A marine propulsion device comprising transom bracket
means adapted to be connected to a boat transom, a stern
bracket, first pivot means connecting said stem bracket to said
transom bracket means for pivotal movement therebetween
about a first pivot axis which is horizontal when said transom
bracket means is boat mounted, a swivel bracket, second pivot
means connecting said swivel bracket to said stern bracket for
pivotal movement with said stern bracket and relative to said
stern bracket about a second pivot axis parallel to said first
pivot axis, a propulsion unit including, at the lower end
thereof, a rotatably mounted propulsion element, means pivot-
ally connecting said propulsion unit to said swivel bracket for
steering movement relative to said swivel bracket and for
common pivotal movement with said swivel bracket, a trim
cylinder-piston assembly pivotally connected to said stern
bracket and to said swivel bracket, a tilt cylinder-piston assem-
bly pivotally connected to said transom bracket means and to
said stern bracket, a reversible pump including first and second
4,395,240
MARINE PROPULSION LOWER UNIT WITH BALL
CLUTCH MECHANISM
Clarence E. Blanchard, Kenosha, Wis., assignor to Ourboard
Marine Corporation, Waukegan, III.
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,589
Int. a.' B63H 2im
U.S. a. 440—86 14 Oaims
1. A marine propulsion device comprising a lower unit
including a propeller shaft supported in said lower unit against
axial movement and for rotary movement relative to said
lower unit and including an axial bore extending from one end
of said shaft, said axial bore defining an annular wall including
first and second axially spaced series of circumferentially
spaced cylindrical apertures communicating with said bore
and having radially extending axes, a propulsion element fixed
on said propeller shaft for common rotation therewith, respec-
tive balls in each of said apertures, first and second axially
spaced facing bevel gears mounted in said lower unit co-axially
with said propeller shaft for rotation relative to said lower unit
and said propeller shaft and against axial movement relative to
said lower unit and said propeller shaft, said first and second
bevel gears including respective axial bores having therein
respective first and second series of circumferentially spaced
sockets opening radially inwardly and located in axial align-
ment with said first and second series of apertures in said
propeller shaft, and an actuator extending in said axial bore in
said propeller shaft and movable between axially spaced for-
ward drive, neutral, and reverse drive positions, said actuator
including means for selectively engaging said balls with said
bevel gears to selectively establish said device in forward
drive, neutral, and reverse drive conditions, said means com-
prising a series of circumferentially spaced, axially extending
grooves in said actuator, each of said grooves including a
raised central portion having first and second ends axially
spaced at a distance less that the axial spacing of said first and
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1471
second series of apertures and having, intermediate said ends, a
concave cross sectional contour with a part thereof having a
common radius equal to that of said balls such that engagement
of said part with an associated one of said balls forces the
associated ball radially outwardly relative to the associated
aperture in said propeller shaft, and into engagement with an
associated socket in one of said bevel gears, each of said
grooves further including first and second end portions extend-
ing respectively from said first and second ends of said central
portion, each of said end portions having a cross sectional
contour of such dimension as to permit receipt thereinto of an
associated ball so as to permit withdrawal of the associated ball
from an associated socket, said end portions of said grooves
having respective axial extents such that, when said actuator is
in said forward drive position, said first series of apertures is
axially aligned with said central portions of said grooves and
said second series of apertures is axially aligned with said
second end portions of said grooves, whereby rotary drive is
established between said first bevel gear and said propeller
shaft and rotary drive is disengaged between said second bevel
gear and said propeller shaft, such that, when said actuator is in
said neutral position, said first and second series of apertures
are respectively axially aligned with said first and second end
portions of said grooves and said central portions of said
grooves are located intermediate said first and second series of
apertures, whereby both of said bevel gears are disengaged
from rotary drive with said propeller shaft, and such that,
when said actuator is in said reverse drive position, said second
series of apertures is axially aligned with said central portions
of said grooves and said first series of apertures is axially
aligned with said first end portions of said grooves, whereby
rotary drive is established between said second bevel gear and
said propeller shaft and rotary drive is disengaged between
said first bevel gear and said propeller shaft.
4 395 241
AMPHIBIOUS SLED DEVICE
John E. Comparetto, 108 Cropper St., Chincoteague, Va. 23336
Continuation of Ser. No. 18,207, Mar. 7, 1979, abandoned. This
application Nov. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 317,820
Int. C1.3 A63C 15/00
U.S. a. 441—65 9 Oaims
1. A sled for use over ice, snow, and water, said sled com-
prising:
a semi-rigid buoyant member adapted to support a user;
a flexible member attached to said buoyant member and ex-
tending beyond one end thereof;
a centrally located opening;
a cord having two ends, each end being attached to said flexi-
ble member substantially at a corner thereof
said cord passing through said opening and enabling said user
to form a venturi-like passage with said flexible member.
4,395,242
METHOD OF ELECTRICALLY PROCESSING A CRT
MOUNT ASSEMBLY TO REDUCE AFTERGLOW
Paul R. Liller, and Donald J. Shahan, both of Lancaster, Pa.,
assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,132
Int. a.' HOIJ 9/20
U.S. CI. 445—5 6 Qaims
,23
•j1/^i:
f-f„
., ^-.
1. In a method of electrically processing a completed CRT
having an electron gun including a focus electrode and a high-
voltage electrode, said high-voltage electrode being closely
spaced from said focus electrode, the steps comprising
(a) heating the portion of said focus electrode that faces said
high-voltage electrode at temperatures above about TOO"
C, (b) and then RF spot-knocking said portions of said
focus electrode.
4,395,243
METHOD OF FABRICATING CATHODE-RAY TUBE
Noboru Toyama, and Yoshinori Oyamada, both of Mobara,
Japan, assignors to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 8, 1981, Ser. No. 261,757
Claims priority, application Japan, May 16, 1980, 55-64127
Int. CI.' HOIJ 9/44
U.S. CI. 445—6 6 Claims
^f ^ T^
1. A method of fabricating a cathode-ray tube, comprising
the sequential steps of
(a) preparing an evacuated and sealed bulb with a funnel
portion thereof having a phosphor screen formed thereon
and a neck portion thereof having an electron gun
mounted therein including a decomposed and activated
oxide cathode and an assembly of grids, a getter being
attached to a predetermined portion of the interior of said
bulb;
(b) flashing said getter to deposit a film of getter material on
the inner surface of said bulb, so that a large part of gas
molecules remaining in said bulb are absorbed by said
getter material film;
(c) causing said cathode to emit an electron beam while
deflecting said electron beam by means of deflecting
means arranged around said bulb to scan a region between
said cathode and said phosphor screen with said electron
1472
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
beam, so that gas molecules still remaining in said bulb are
decomposed by said electron beam; and
(d) heating said cathode to emit a predetermined electron
current therefrom for aging thereof.
4^95,246
UNIVERSAL JOINT
Alistair G. Taig, and David D. Jordan, both of South Bend, Ind.,
assignors to The Bendix Corporation, Southfield, Mich.
Filed Sep. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 184,491
Int. a.J F16D 3/20
U.S. a. 464—153 5 Qaims
4,395,244
METHOD OF MAKING A DISPLAY PANEL
David Glaser, 1112 NE. 23rd Dr., Wilton Manors, Ra. 33305
Division of Ser. No. 51,152, Jun. 22, 1979, Pat. No. 4,303,847.
This application Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,993
Int. C\? HOIJ 9/36. 9/385
L'.S. a. 445—25 7 Qaims
1. A method of manufacturing a display panel, comprising
the steps of
positioning an electrode structure against one face of a rigid,
glass pane having a window area,
positioning a substantially impervious, flexible sheet over
said electrode structure,
sealing said sheet to said pane along a continuous area sur-
rounding said electrode structure, and
reducing the pressure in the space between said sheet and
said pane in which said electrode structure is located
below the pressure on the external side of said sheet to
press said electrode structure against said pane.
4 395 245
CHAIN COUPLING ELASTOMER COVER
Dennis L. Carlson, Waukesha, Wis., assignor to Rexnord Inc.,
Milwaukee, Wis.
Filed May 5, 1980, Ser. No. 146,557
Int. CI.' F16D 3/54. 3/84
U.S. a. 464—49 ' Claims
1. In a universal joint, a housing having a pair of openings for
receiving an input assembly with an input shaft and an output
assembly with an output shaft, said input assembly being rotat-
able to impart rotation to said housing and to said output
assembly, a pilot assembly disposed within said housing and
cooperating with said input and output assemblies to substan-
tially maintain equal angles between said assemblies and said
housing, characterized by said input and output assemblies
terminating in cylindrical ends having their longitudinal axis
extending substantially normal to said input and output shafts,
and said housing defming a first pair of arcuate surfaces en-
gageable with said input cylindrical end and a second pair of
arcuate surfaces engageable with said output cylindrical end,
said housing rotating with said input and output assemblies to
provide for sliding engagement between said cylindrical ends
and their respective housing arcuate surfaces when said input
assembly is imparting rotation to said housing and said output
assembly, and said cylindrical ends remain in spaced relation so
that the rotation of said input cylindrical end is transmitted to
said output cylindrical end via said housing.
4 395,247
SHAFT COUPLING
Derek A. Roberts, Bristol, England, assignors to Rolls-
Royce Limited, London, England
Filed Jul. 21, 1980, Ser. No. 170,924
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 31, 1979,
7930366
Int. a.3 F16D 3/18
U.S. a. 464—158 12 Qaims
•E
i.27 ni
1. A semi-rigid elastomeric cover for a roller chain coupling
of the type including two sprockets connected to two associ-
ated hubs for mounting on substantially aligned shafts, said
sprockets having a diameter substantially greater than said
hubs and being connected by a double strand of roller chain for
transmitting torque from one shaft to the other; said cover
comprising:
a one-piece elastomeric member having a generally cylindri-
cal center portion, a contour on the radial interior surface
of said center portion configured to tightly fit the double
strand of roller chain of said coupling, and two opposed
axially extending, outwardly directed flanges connected
to said center portion, said center portion having an inte-
rior diameter that is substantially greater than the interior
diameter of said flanges.
1. A coupling comprising relatively inner and outer mem-
bers having a common axis, the members being provided with
intermeshing splines that have one or more pairs of circumfer-
entially confronting first surfaces, each of the members addi-
tionally provided with one or more circumferentially confront-
ing second surfaces spaced from the said first surfaces and
extending at an angle relative to the first surfaces, an axially
facing abutment distinct from both the first and second sur-
faces provided on a first of the members, the abutment being
positioned relative to the second member so that the second
member can abut against it, displaceable means for allowing
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1473
relative radial displacement between the first and second sur-
faces of at least one of the inner or outer members, and urging
means for urging the first member along the common axis
relative to the second member, the urging means being opera-
ble to move the first member to an initial position where the
first and second surfaces are urged into contact with each
other and opposing circumferential forces are imposed on the
first and second members and being operable to move the first
member to a final position where the first member abuts the
abutment.
passages extending through the flange for directing air out-
wardly and toward the center plane of the pulley, said passages
4,395,248
MULTI-SPEED TRANSMISSION
John M. Kern, Ithaca, N.Y., assignor to Borg-Warner Corpora-
tion, Chicago, III.
Filed Oct. 20, 1980, Ser. No. 198,506
Int. Q.3 F16H 55/56, 55/30. U/04
U.S. CI. 474—24 7 Qaims
1. A multi-speed drive system comprising:
a multiple part drive means;
a multiple part driven means;
means connecting said drive and driven means;
one part of both said drive and driven means having external
teeth;
a second part of both said drive and driven means compris-
ing a pair of axially movable members each having inter-
nal teeth meshing with said first-named external teeth;
means for moving one of said pairs of axially movable mem-
bers to change the speed ratio between said drive and
driven means;
said connecting means being a chain;
the radially outermost part of said drive means having exter-
nal teeth with which said chain meshes in one speed ratio;
and
the radially outermost part of said driven means having
external teeth with which said chain meshes in another
and different speed ratio.
66
being close to but in trailing relation with respect to respective
vanes extending from the flange.
4,395,250
TENSIONING DEVICES
Alan G. King, Bedfordshire, England, assignor to Borg-Warner
Limited, Letchworth, England
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,028
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Sep. 29, 1980,
8031352
Int. Q.' F16H 7/08
U.S. Q. 474—111 9 Qaims
1. A tensioning device for an endless driving element, com-
prising a pivoted arm, a rod, an actuator slidably mounted on
said rod, compression spring means mounted about said rod
and biasing said actuator in one axial direction along said rod,
link means coupled between said actuator and said pivoted arm
by which to convert axial movement of said actuator into
pivotal movement of said arm, and vice versa, said arm being
caused to pivot in a tensioning sense in response to spring
biased movement of said actuator in said one direction, a catch
disc mounted on said rod and tiltable into binding engagement
therewith in response to return movement of said arm, by
which to inhibit said return movement of said actuator and
hence said return pivotal movement of said arm, and a shoe
adapted to directly engage the endless driving element and
connected to said pivoted arm.
4,395,249
VARIABLE SPEED DRIVE CLUTCH
Keni K. Prasad, and Eugene G. Hayes, both of Beaver Dam,
Wis., assignors to Deere & Company, Moline, III.
FUed Dec. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 218,854
Int. Q.^ F16H 55/52
U.S. Q. 474—93 7 Qaims
1. In a V-belt drive having a rotating pulley and an annular
flange closely adjacent the pulley periphery formed about the
pulley axis and extending axially from a side of the pulley; a
plurality of vanes extending radially from the radial outer
surface of the flange; said flange having means including air
4,395,251
TENSIONING DEVICES
Alan G. King, Biggleswade, and Keith Hunt, Meppershall, both
of England, assignors to Borg-Warner Limited, Letchworth,
England
Filed Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 229,969
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Feb. 11, 1980,
8004449
Int. Q.5 G05G 5/06; F16H 7/08
U.S. Q. 474—111 12 Qaims
1. A tensioning device for an endless driving element, com-
prising a rod, a pivotal arm, an actuator slidably mounted on
said rod, compression spring means biasing said actuator in one
direction along said rod, said arm being caused to pivot in a
tensioning sense in response to spring biased movement of said
actuator in said one direction, a catch disc mounted on said rod
and tiltable into binding engagement therewith in response to
return movement of said actuator against said spring bias along
1474
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
said rcxi, as would be caused upon return pivotal movement of
said arm, by which to inhibit said return movement of said
actuator and hence said return pivotal movement of said arm,
and means carried by said pivoted arm to engage said endless
driving element.
4 395 252
APPARATUS FOR MAKING BAGS OF THIN
SYNTHETIC-RESIN HLM
Hans Lehmacher, Im Hummerich, 5216 Niederkassel-Moodorf,
Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,547
aaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 24,
1980, 302009
Int. a.5 B31B 2i/02, 23/14
U.S. a. 493— 28 6 aaims
-<* ?
number of operations of said cutting/welding means,
stripping said bag blanks off said needles with said stripper
bar and operating said conveyor to displace the stack of
bag blanks stripped from said needles downstream to said
punching station;
flattening means in said flattening station having a plurality
of flattening elements for engaging each of said bag blanks
as same is cut free from said tube and pressing same flatly
down against the platform supporting it;
a gripper carriage displaceable in and against said direction
and having a holding element displaceable vertically
toward and away from said stretch, said control means
being connected to said carriage to press said holding
element down against said stack of bags blanks as same are
stripped from said needle bar and for thereafter displacing
said carriage synchronously and codirectionally with the
platform supporting said stack downstream to said punch-
ing station;
punching means at said punching station for punching said
stacks of bag blanks as same arrive, said punching station
being spaced in said direction downstream of said wel-
ding/cutting station by a distance substantially greater
than said predetermined length of said; and
a deflecting plate at said stacking station, said control means
being connected to said plate for pivoting said plate by
and deflecting a new tube end over a stack when same is
engaged by said gripper element.
4,395,253
METHOD OF MAKING CORRUGATED PACKAGES
James A. Goodman, Glencoe, III., assignor to Consolidated
Foods Corporation, Deerfield, III.
Division of Ser. No. 974,065, Dec. 28, 1978, Pat. No. 4,250,797.
This application Oct. 15, 1980, Ser. No. 197,363
Int. C\? B31C 7/06; B31F 1/20
U.S. a. 493—87 21 Qaims
1. An apparatus for making bags from an elongated synthet-
ic-resin tube, said apparatus comprising:
an endless conveyor having a stretch defining a transport
path extending in a transport direction from an upstream
cutting/welding station through a stacking station and a
flattening station, to a downstream punching station, said
conveyor having an endless support element and a plural-
ity of groups of transverse rigid bars forming along said
path a plurality of respective platforms having predeter-
* mined lengths in said direction and spaced apart by gaps,
the bars of each platform engaging one another in said
direction;
means for feeding said tube generally continuously in said
direction to said upstream cutting/welding station;
cutting/welding means in said cutting/welding station for
periodically transversely cutting through said tube and
generally simultaneously forming upstream of each cut a
transversely throughgoing weld for subdividing said tube
into a succession of bag blanks;
stacking means in said stacking station including a trans-
versely reciprocal needle bar provided with a plurality of
needles including at least one blocking needle, and a trans-
versely reciprocal stripper bar through which said needles
engage;
control means for synchronously operating said conveyor,
cutting/welding means, and stacking means for piercing
said needles through the upstream edge of each of said bag
blanks as same is cut free from said tube while supporting
each said bag blanks as same are cut free from said tube on
a one of said platforms and for, after a predetermined
1. The method of forming a corrugated package comprising
the steps of:
corrugating a first sheet of material having a selected width
into fluted corrugations and maintaining the shape of said
corrugations by vacuum while forming said sheet into a
shape defining a portion of the sidewall of a package;
positioning a bottom wall member having an outer edge
adjacent said first sheet so that said outer edge is aligned
with said fluted corrugations;
wrapping a second sheet of uncorrugated material having a
width greater than the width of said first sheet adjacent
said fluted corrugations of said first sheet so that a portion
of said second sheet projects over the outer edge of said
bottom wall member; and
simultaneously joining said sheet to the fluted corrugations
of said first sheet and to said bottom wall member so that
said second sheet forms an outer ply of the side wall of
said package and joins said bottom wall to said side wall,
whereby said corrugated side wall and said package are
formed substantially simultaneously.
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1475
4,395,254
APPARATUS FOR MAKING DISPOSABLE,
BREATHABLE RECEPTACLES
Samuel J. Schuster, 617 Vallombrosa, Pasadena, Calif. 91107
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 55,159, Jul. 6, 1979, abandoned,
which is a division of Ser. No. 955,221, Oct. 27, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,195
Int. CI.' B31B 1/64
U.S. CI. 493—196 10 Qaims
1. In an apparatus for making breathable receptacles from
continuous, laminated web material drawn from web supply
means, the web material comprising a layer of paper, or the
like, impermeable to microorganisms but highly permeable to
sterilizing vapor and a layer of thermoplastic, polymeric mate-
rial, the combination including:
means for advancing the web material;
means for superimposing areas of said web material with the
polymeric layerslof said areas in confronting relation;
a heat sealer, haviflg individual heat seal elements, posi-
tioned adjacent the advancing web material and operable
to bond together the polymeric layers with a plurality of
small heat seals; and
means disposed between the confronting polymeric layers
for separating the portions of the polymeric layers bonded
together by the heat sealer as the web material advances
to cause localized delamination of the paper and poly-
meric layers and rupturing of the polymeric layers at the
positions of the small heat seals.
4,395,255
>VeB FOLDING APPARATUS
George N. Branecky, Bethel; Frank T. Roetter, Westport, and
Frank A. Oeschger, East Nonvalk, all of Conn., assignors to
Pitney Bowes Inc., Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 188,174, Sep. 17, 1980, Pat. No.
4,378,223. This application Oct. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 311,719
Int. C\? B65H 45/22
U.S. CI. 493—439 8 Qaims
fixedly attached to the frame and horizontally extending
across the path of travel of an unfolded web for frictional
engagement thereby;
(c) an elongate lower roller rotatably attached to the frame
below the level of the drag member and extending trans-
verse to the drag member such that the axis of the lower
roller extends downwardly and at an angle of 95* plus or
minus one degree with respect to a vertical plane extend-
ing through the drag member such that an unfolded web
may extend downwardly in the path of travel from said
drag member to and into engagement with said lower
roller and be guided thereby so as to be gradually folded
between said drag member and lower roller;
(d) an output roller, said output roller rotatably attached to
the frame below the level of the drag member and extend-
ing transverse to said drag member such that said folded
web may extend in the path of travel from beneath said
lower roller to said output roller and into engagement
therewith and such that said folded web may extend up-
wardly in the path of travel from beneath said output
roller to said machine; and
(e) web guide means including a pair of drag elements
spaced apart from each other and connected to the frame
and extending into engagement with the web between the
drag member and lower roller such that said elements
respectively engage the gradually folding web on opposite
sides of the fold line for pre-creasing the web along the
fold line as said machine feeds the web in said downstream
path of travel.
4,395,256
CENTRIFUGE ROTOR CLOSURE
Gerhard Schroter, Osterode, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor to
Heraeus-Christ GmbH, Osterode, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,503
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 13,
1980, 3047118
Int. a.^ B04B 7/00
U.S. a. 494—38 11 Claims
1. For use in combination with a machine for feeding a web
of paper in a downstream path of travel, apparatus for folding
an unfolded web of paper along a longitudinally-extending
weakened fold Une thereof, said apparatus comprising:
• (a) a frame;
(b) web drag means including an elongated drag member
1. Centrifuge rotor closing structure having
a rotor stub (15);
axially extending ducts (11, 12) passing through said rotor
stub (15) and terminating at an end portion thereof;
and a cover cap closing off the end portion of said stub and
inhibiting communication between the ends of said axially
extending ducts and the ambient surrounding thereof,
said closure comprising, in accordance with the invention,
the combination of
a plug element (1);
means (8, 9) sealingly fitting said plug element against the
end portion of the stub (15);
a cover cap fitted over the plug element (1). said cover cap
having a depending portion externally surrounding the
stub (15);
radially movable rolling engagement elements (6) located in
said depending portion of the plug;
an axially movable outer sleeve (3) surrounding said depend-
ing portion and, selectively, positioning said rolling ele-
ments in engagement with the stub (15) when moved to
extend over the rolling elements, and releasing said rolling
1476
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
elements from engagement with the stub (15) when moved
axially out of engagement with the rolling elements.
4,395,257
SEPARATING VESSEL AND A SEPARATING
CENTRIFUGE FOR USE IN THE CENTRIFUGAL
SEPARATION OF A LIQUID
Paul Manella, Dubendorf, Switzerland, assignor to Doltron AG,
Uster, Switzerland
Filed May 28, 1981, Ser. No. 267,715
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Jun. 10, 1980,
4450/80
Int. a.i B04B 5/00, 9/00
U.S. a. 494—47 • 10 Qaims
29^ il-tuj
6. A separating centrifuge for the separation of a liquid into
fractions of different densities, said centrifuge comprising a
separating vessel and control means for controlling the separat-
ing process, said separating vessel consisting of a double-
walled hollow cylindrical body defining an annular chamber
and at least three conduits opening into and integral with said
annular chamber, said control means including a centrifuge
rotor rotatable about a first vertically extending axis of rota-
tion, supporting means for supporting said separating vessel in
said centrifuge rotor and arranged to rotate about a second
horizontally extending axis of rotation, and a connection mem-
ber for receiving connecting conduits of said separating vessel,
said connecting conduits being held at one end against rotation
and lying generally on said first axis of rotation and being
mounted at the other end on said supporting means.
4,395,258
LINEAR INTRA-OCULAR SUCTION DEVICE
Carl C. T. Wang, Piedmont, Calif.; Steve Charles, Memphis,
Tenn., and Joseph T. Buckingham, Moraga, Calif., assignors
to Cooper Medical Devices, San Leandro, Calif.
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,143
Int. a.i A61M 31/00
U.S. a. 604—65 11 Claims
a conduit for suctioning material from a surgical rone compris-
ing:
a cannula adapted to be inserted into the surgical zone for
suctioning material from the surgical zone,
receptacle means for receiving the material from the can-
nula;
a vacuum supply which is maintained at a predetermined
level;
vacuum delivery conduit means for providing communica-
tion between the vacuum supply and the receptacle
means, and between the receptacle means and the cannula;
vacuum supply conduit means, including an electrically
operated vacuum supply valve, adapted to control com-
munication along said vacuum delivery conduit between
said receptacle and said vacuum supply;
a vacuum exhaust control means, including an electrically
operated vacuum exhaust valve adapted to be opened to
the atmosphere and to control communication along said
vacuum delivery conduit means between the atmosphere
and said receptacle;
a pressure transducer communicating along said delivery
conduit with said receptacle for detecting the vacuum
level of said receptacle;
and
control means communicating with said pressure transducer
and said vacuum supply conduit means and exhaust con-
trol means for automatically opening the vacuum supply
conduit means when there is an insufficient vacuum level
in said receptacle and for automatically opening the vac-
uum exhaust conduit means when there is an excessive
vacuum level in said receptacle so that said receptacle is
maintained at a selected vacuum level and so that the
material is suctioned by the cannula from the surgical zone
at the selected vacuum level.
4 395 259
DEVICE FOR THE INFUSION OF FLUIDS INTO THE
HUMAN OR ANIMAL BODY
Karl Prestele, Erlangen; Manfred Franctzki, Uttenreuth, and
Erich Reif, Erlangen, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors
to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Berlin & Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,780
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 22,
1980, 3035670
Int. CV A61M 37/00
U.S. Q. 604—67 28 Qaims
POTCNTIOIC^ER
1. Apparatus for automatically controlling the vacuum along
1. An infusion system for the infusion of fluids into the
human or animal body, said system comprising
(a) a metering device to be implanted within the body, hav-
ing a delivery unit for the dosed delivery of fluid to the
body, said delivery unit having operating circuitry for
controlling operation of the delivery unit, and said meter-
ing device having coupling means for receiving an opera-
tional signal transmission and for eflecting an operation in
accordance therewith,
(b) an external monitor device having coupling means cou-
pled with said metering device for supplying a monitoring
signal in accordance with an operation produced at the
metering device by an operational signal transmission, and
July 26, 1983
GENERAL AND MECHANICAL
1477
(c) evaluation means operatively associated with said exter-
nal monitor device for receiving a transmission signal in
accordance with an operational signal transmission trans-
mitted to the metering device, and connected with the
coupling means of the external monitor device for receiv-
ing a monitoring signal in accordance with an operation at
the metering device produced by an operational signal
transmission, and operative for supplying an information
signal where a received monitoring signal has a predeter-
mined relationship to a received transmission signal, the
information signal thereby being indicative of receipt of
the operational signal transmission by the metering de-
vice,
(d) the delivery unit comprising a roller pump and a stepping
motor drive therefor, said coupling means of said meter-
ing device comprising an induction coil associated with
the roller pump for coupling with the coupling means of
the external monitor device, said induction coil being
connected with the stepping motor drive and said step-
ping motor drive being actuated by an operational signal
transmission so as to cause the coupling means of the
external control device to supply said monitoring signal in
a predetermined relationship to the operational signal
transmission, and
(e) said evaluation means comprising time sensitive compari-
son means for receiving the transmission signal to initiate
a timing comparison and receiving the monitoring signal
upon actuation of the stepping motor drive by the opera-
tional signal transmission, and being operative to compare
the timing relationship between said transmission signal
and said monitoring signal and supplying said information
signal only where a received monitoring signal has a
predetermined timing relationship to a received transmis-
sion signal, said time sensitive comparison means thereby
being operative to monitor for an answer back response
resulting directly from an actual test operation of said
stepping motor drive, as well as to discriminate such
answer back response from incorrectly timed spurious
signals.
4,395,260
DRIP CHAMBER
Robert J. Todd, Salt Lake City, and Gordon S. Reynolds,
Bountiful, both of Utah, assignors to Sorenson Research Co.,
Inc., Salt Lake City, Utah
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 269,937
Int. Q.3 A61M 5/16
U.S. Q. 604—122 18 Qaims
1. An improved drip chamber comprising:
a housing having a fluid inlet, a fluid outlet, and walls defin-
ing a chamber;
means for deflecting incoming fluid from said outlet so as to
reduce turbulence of the incoming fluid;
a filter membrane carrier assembly positioned over said fluid
outlet, said filter membrane carrier assembly having a
means for filtering said fluid; and
means for displacing at least a portion of said filter mem-
brane carrier assembly to release entrapped air bubbles
from beneath said means for filtering said fluid.
CHEMICAL
4,395,261
VAPOR HYDROGEN PEROXIDE BLEACH DELIVERY
Charles W. Lutz, Princeton, N.J., assignor to FMC Corporation,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,197
Int. a.3 D06L i/02. 3/14; B05D 1/26
U.S. a. 8—111 6 Oaims
i. A method for bleaching damp textiles while they are
exposed to heated gases in a clothes dryer by means of hydro-
gen peroxide initially confined as a liquid by the inner surface
of a wall of a container, at least part of said wall being a micro-
porous, hydrophobic membrane having an effective pore size
of approximately 0.01 fim to 0.4 p,m in size with the exterior
surface thereof accessible to the heated gases of the dryer
whereby said liquid hydrogen peroxide is vaporized by the
heat of said gases and delivered as a vapor through said mem-
brane into the heated gases of the dryer primarily at a time
when the textiles to be bleached are still damp, yet near the end
of the drying eye
the highest.
e when the temperature within the dryer is
4,395,262
HAIR DYEING AGENT
Eugen Konrad, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany, and Herbert
Mager, Fribourg, Switzerland, assignors to Wella Aktien-
gesellschaft, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
PCT No. PCT/EP79/00060, § 371 Date Apr. 16, 1980, § 102(e)
Date Mar. 6, 1980, PCT Pub. No. WO80/00417, PCT Pub.
Date Mar. 20, 1980
per FUed Aug. 2, 1979, Ser. No. 196,551
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 28,
1980, 2835776
Int. a.J A61K 7/13
U.S. a. 8—410 11 Qaims
1. Composition for the oxidative dyeing of hair, comprising
a combination of at least one developing substance and at least
one coupling substance, comprising as coupling substance at
least one derivative of 1,2-methylene dioxybenzene of the
general formula
CH2
in which R signifies an OH—, NH2— , NHR'— , or NH>R2—
group wherein R' and R2 represent, independent of each other,
an alkyl or hyHroxyalkyl group with 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
4,395,263
UNITARY LAMINATE WITH PERMANENT INDICIA
PATTERN: TRANSFER PRINTINGS ONTO
PLASTIC-COATED RIGID PANELS
R. Elbert Davis, 1401 Valley View Rd., #425, Glendale, Calif.
91202
Filed Apr. 21, 1977, Ser. No. 789,488
Int. a.J B32B 27/14: D06P 5/13
U.S. a. 8—471 13 Oaims
1. In a sublimination transfer dyeing process in which sub-
limable dyestuff is transferred from an auxiliary carrier web to
a support stratum, the improvement whereby a print can be
formed on a non-textile stratum, comprising the steps of
(a) laminating together as said support stratum (i) a binder
layer comprising polyester resin containing 50-85 weight
percent glass fiber and containing pigment and (ii) on said
binder layer, a substantially pigment-free transparent layer
of thermosettable material receptive to sublimatic dyestuff
selected from alkyd resin, melamine formaldehyde resin
and combinations thereof;
(b) curing to form a thermoset, heat resistant laminate; and
(c) transferring said dyestuff to said transparent layer by
heat-induced sublimation from said auxiliary carrier web.
4,395,264
AZO COUPLING PROCESS
George W. Fenwick, Holland, Mich., assignor to BASF Wyan-
dotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Nov. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 318,750
Int. a. J C07C 113/00
U.S. a. 8—662 8 Qaims
1. A process for coupling a beta-naphthol with a diazotized
amine comprising
1. (a) dissolving a beta-naphthol in water with a strong base
(b) precipitating the beta-naphthol with a strong acid and
(c) cooling the slurry to about 0* C. to 15' C.
2. (a) adding a diazotized amine and
3. (a) increasing the pH to about 1 .0 to 4.0 with a strong base
and
(b) further increasing the pH to about 5.0 to 10.0 with a weak
base.
4,395,265
FUEL PELLETS
Charles Reilly, 777 E. 31st St., Brooklyn, N.Y. 11210, and
Richard G. Bailey, 4308 W. 82 St., Prairie Village, Kans.
66208
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,044
Int. a.3 ClOL 5/14; ClOF 7/06
U.S. a. 44—15 R 10 Oaims
1. A process for producing a fuel material which may be
readily transported comprising the following steps:
a. Make a particulate composition of a peat binder material
of combustible properties,
b. Dry the ground binder material to remove excessive
moisture,
c. Mix a particulate coal or dry sludge fuel material with the
said particulate binder material,
d. Pelletize this mixture in a pelletizer type machine so as to
produce pellets,
e. Dry the pellets to further reduce the moisture content of
the pellets.
3. The process as recited in claim 1 in which coal fines arc
employed as the particulate fuel material in step c.
4,395,266
STABILIZED WATER-IN-MINERAL OIL EMULSION
Kong W. Han, Oosterhout, Netherlands, assignor to Internatio-
nale Octrooi MaatschappU "Octropa" B.V., Rotterdam, Neth-
erlands
Filed May 19, 1980, Ser. No. 150,827
Oaims priority, application Netherlands, May 21, 1979,
7903961
Int. 0.5 ClOC //i2
U.S. O. 44—51 15 Oaims
1. Water-in-mineral oil emulsion comprising:
(a) 1-50 vol.% of water,
(b) 99-50 vol.% of a mineral oil selected from the group
consisting of gasoline, kerosene, diesel oil, heavy gasoline
and fuel oil,
(c) an effective proportion of a surfactant, and
(d) a finely divided stabilizer which is substantially undis-
solved in the constituent phases of the emulsion and forms
1479
1480
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
an interface between said phases, said stabilizer being a
compound comprising at least one polar group having a
dipole or being capable of forming a hydrogen bridge and
at least 2 non-polar hydrocarbon groups containing at
least 8 carbon atoms, said compound being selected from
the group consisting of (i) a di- or tri-amide obtained by
reacting a fatty acid with a compound containing 2 or 3
amino groups, (ii) the product obtained by reacting a
mono-, di- and/or tri-alkanolamine soap derived from a
r'»fural or synthetic fatty acid and a quaternary ammo-
nium salt comprising at least one substituent containing at
least 8 carbon atoms, whereby the remaining substituents
may consist of alkyl groups containing 1-3 carbon atoms,
and (iii) a polymer obtained by reacting a polyalkyl anhy-
dride with a compound containing at least 2 amino groups.
2. Water-in-mineral oil emulsion accordiang to claim 1,
which comprises a stabilizer which has been formed in situ.
4,395,267
NOVEL METHOD OF EXTENDING A HYDROCARBON
FUEL HEAVIER THAN GASOLINE
William M. Sweeney, Wappingers Falls, N.Y., assignor to Tex-
aco, Inc., White Plains, N.Y.
Filed Mar. 26, 1980, Set. No. 134,036
Int. CI.' ClOL 1/18
U.S. a. 44—56 2 Claims
1. A novel hydrocarbon fuel composition heavier than gaso-
line comprising a hydrocarbon fuel heavier than gasoline; a
water-miscible alcohol, ethanol or methanol which is substan-
tially immiscible with said fuel; and as a cosolvent an ortho-
ester.
4,395,268
HOT GAS COOLER FOR A COAL GASIFICATION
PLANT
Jarosiav Zabelka, Myihenstrasse 46, CH 84 00 Winterthur,
Switzerland
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,571
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Sep. 19, 1980,
7051/80
Int. a.' ClOJ 3/84. 3/86
U.S. CI. 48—67 6 aaims
a plurality of peripherally disposed openings to exhaust
the hot gas flow from said fall chamber;
a jacket of polygonal cross-section of n-sides including a
plurality of pipes for conducting a cooling medium there-
through, said pipes being secured together to form a gas-
tight wall, said jacket being circumferentially offset from
said inset by an angle equal to 360°/2n and spaced about
said insert to define a first annular chamber therebetween
communicating with said peripheral openings of said
insert and sealed from said casing, said jacket being spaced
from said casing to define a second annular chamber
therebetween;
at least one gas exhaust passage connected to said jacket and
communicating an upper end of said first annular chamber
with the exterior of said casing for exhausting the cooled
gas therethrough; and
means for discharging slag from said outlet of said insert,
said means including a funnel passing through said pres-
sure vessel.
4,395,269
COMPACT DUST FILTER ASSEMBLY
Frederick E, Schuler, St. Paul, Minn., assignor to Donaldson
Company, Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 307,166
Int. CI.' BOID 46/04. 46/48. 50/00
U.S. CI. 55—302 14 Claims
1. A hot gas cooler for a coal gasification plant comprising
a pressure vessel having a vertically disposed casing with an
inlet spigot at an upper end for receiving an exit of a
reaction vessel;
an insert of polygonal cross-section of n-sides in said pres-
sure vessel including a plurality of pipes for conducting
cooling medium therethrough, said pipes being in secured
relation to each other to define a fall chamber for conduct-
ing a hot gas therethrough, said insert having an inlet to
said fall chamber at an upper end in sealed relation to said
inlet spigot to receive a flow of hot gas, an outlet from said
fall chamber at a lower end to discharge slag particles and
5. An air filter assembly for filtering air laden with particu-
late matter, said assembly comprising:
a housing having a clean air chamber and a filtering cham-
ber, said housing having an upper wall, a substantially
closed bottom, and a plurality of side walls;
a clean air outlet from said clean air chamber in one of said
side walls;
means separating said clean air chamber from said filtering
chamber including means mounting a plurality of spaced
apart, filter elements within said filtering chamber, said
elements including an uppermost filter element, with each
of said elements being in fluid communication with said air
outlet, said mounting means positioning each of said filter
elements in a generally downward, inclined direction with
respect to said upper wall;
said upper wall, a portion of said side walls, and said upper-
most filter element defining an airflow distribution space
in said filtering chamber above said filter elements;
a dirty air inlet in a wall opening into said distribution space,
whereby the velocity of the air entering said filtering
chamber and passing through said distribution space is
reduced;
pulse-jet cleaning means intermediate said outlet and said
mounting means for removing particulate matter accumu-
lated on said filter elements;
July 26, 1983i
CHEMICAL
1481
and a lowermost portion in said filtering chamber arranged
and constructed for the collection of particulate matter,
said portion incuding at least one sloping surface con-
structed from a material which is movably responsive in a
flexing motion to the pressure differentials created by said
cleaning means;
whereby the filtered particulate matter is caused to move
downwardly for collection by the flexing of said sloping
surface in response to the increases in pressure within said
filtering chamber caused by the operation of said pulse-jet
cleaning means.
to the central rod within said tube, said first pair of rods
being formed of a glass having a temperature coefficient
of expansion different from that of said cladding glass, and
disposing a plurality of rods of cladding glass in at least some
of the interstices between said centrally disposed rod, said
first pair of rods and said tube.
4,395,270
METHOD OF FABRICATING A POLARIZATION
RETAINING SINGLE-MODE OPTICAL WAVEGUIDE
Michael G. Blankenship, Corning, and Donald B. Keck, Big
Flats, both of N.Y., assignors to Corning Glass Works, Cor-
ning, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 253,224
Int. CI.' C03B 19/00. 37/075
U.S. CI. 65—3.12 6 Claims
4,395,271
METHOD FOR MAKING POROUS MAGNETIC GLASS
AND CRYSTAL-CONTAINING STRUCTURES
George H. Beall, Big Flats; Gerald R. Mansfield, Painted Post,
and Jan W. H. Schreurs, Corning, all of N.Y., assignors to
Corning Glass Works, Corning, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 29,577, Apr. 13, 1979, Pat. No. 4,233,169.
This application May 9, 1980, Ser. No. 148,260
Int. CI.' C03C 3/22. 15/00
U.S. CI. 65—31 40 aaims
1. The method of forming an optical waveguide comprising
the steps of
providing a substantially cylindrical mandrel,
providing burner means for emitting a stream of glass soot,
rotating said mandrel,
reciprocatingly moving said burner means longitudinally
along said rotating mandrel to deposit on said mandrel a
first coating of glass soot,
reciprocatingly moving said burner means longitudinally
along said rotating mandrel to deposit on the outer surface
of said first coating a second coating of glass soot having
a refractive index lower than that of said first coating,
halting rotation of said mandrel,
moving said burner means longitudinally with respect to said
mandrel while depositing on said second coating a first
crescent-shaped longitudinally extending region of glass
soot having a thermal coefficient of expansion difTerent
from that of said second coating,
rotating said mandrel 1 80° and thereafter again halting man-
drel rotation,
moving said burner means longitudinally with respect to said
mandrel while depositing a second crescent-shaped longi-
tudinally extending region of glass soot that is of the same
composition as said first region, said seco'nd region being
azimuthally spaced from and diametrically opposed to
said first region,
depositing on the outer surface of the resultant soot body a
coating of cladding soot having a thermal coefficient of
expansion similar to that of said second coating and hav-
ing a refractive index equal to or lower than that of said
second coating,
removing said mandrel, and
forming an optical waveguide fiber from the resultant soot
preform.
5. A method of forming an optical waveguide preform com-
prising the steps of
providing a tube of cladding glass,
disposing centrally within said tube a first glass rod having
an axially disposed core region surrounded by a layer of
cladding glass,
disposing a first pair of glass rods diametrically with respect
1. A method for making porous bodies of magnetic glass
with interconnected pores less than 10,000 A in diameter and
having iron-containing, magnetic crystals enveloped there-
within with dimensions less than about 1000 A which method
comprises the steps of:
(a) melting a batch for a glass which, upon cooling and/or
subsequent reheating, separates into at least three phases,
viz., iron-containing magnetic crystals and two co-con-
nected, chemically-distinct, vitreous phases of different
solubility;
(b) simultaneously forming the melt into a glass body and
cooling to a temperature at least within the range begin-
ning in the vicinity of the transformation range of the glass
but below the miscibility temperature of said two vitreous
phases, whereby separation of said two vitreous phases
and development of said iron-containing magnetic crystals
can be initiated;
(c) exposing said glass body to a temperature within the
range beginning in the vicinity of the transformation range
of the glass but below the miscibility temperature of said
two vitreous phases for a period of time sufficient to
induce separation of said two vitreous phases and to de-
velop said iron-containing crystals and/or to coarsen the
structure of said vitreous phases and to modify the mag-
netic properties of said body; and then
(d) contacting said glass body with an etchant for a period of
time sufficient to remove one of said vitreous phases and
thereby produce a porous glass body with interconnected
pores, wherein said glass consists essentially of a vitreous
silica skeleton.
4,395,272
PRESSURE SIZING OF FLOAT GLASS
Gerald E. Kunkle, New Kensington; John E. Sensi, Arnold, and
Joseph A. Gulotta, New Kensington, all of Pa., assignors to
PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 326,890
Int. a.' C03B 18/08
U.S. a. 65—99.5 8 Claims
1. A method of producing float glass of less than equilibrium
thickness comprising: continuously metering a stream of mol-
ten glass through an opening having a width not substantially
l032O.q.— 57
1482
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
less than the final product glass width, and depositing the
stream of glass onto a molten metal pool within a pressure
chamber including side basin walls for containing the molten
metal, and maintaining the molten glass in the pressure cham-
ber in contact with the side basin walls so as to cover the entire
surface of the molten metal pool within the pressure chamber
and to separate the molten metal from a gas space above and
essentially coextensive with the molten metal pool in the pres-
sure chamber; imposing a pressure greater than atmospheric on
the molten glass in the pressure chamber by pressurizing the
gas space, so as to reduce the thickness of the glass as it passes
through the pressure chamber to a thickness less than the
equilibrium thickness; withdrawing the glass as a thinned rib-
bon from the pressure chamber to a cooling chamber where
the pressure is lower than in the pressure chamber, and in the
cooling chamber supporting the glass ribbon on molten metal
while restraining the ribbon against lateral shrinkage until the
ribbon has cooled to a dimensionally stable condition; and
withdrawing the dimensionally stable glass ribbon from the
cooling chamber.
8. Apparatus for producing float glass of less than equilib-
rium thickness comprising a forming chamber having a basin
adapted to hold a pool of molten metal, the forming chamber
ylaminoacids, which comprises: reacting the N-carboxyalk-
ylaminoacids, in the presence of water, with the trace elements
or trace element compounds in a molar ratio of N-carboxyalk-
ylaminoacids to trace elements or trace element compounds of
not less than 0.8:1, at least 20% by weight of the trace element
compounds being oxides, hydroxides and/or carbonates to
form an anionic trace element chelate, and at the same time, or
subsequently, raising the pH of the solution to 3.5-6 by adding
a magnesium compound selected from the group consisting of
magnesium oxide, hydroxide and carbonate, whereby said
magnesium compound reacts with said anionic trace element
chelate.
435,274
MICROBiaOAL AGENT AND ITS USE
Wilfried Paulus, and Hermann Genth, both of Krefeld, Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengesellschaft, Leverku-
sen. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 52,872
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 10,
1979, 2909550
Int. a.' AOIN 25/00, 31/08. 43/50. 43/52
U.S. a. 71—67 14 Qaims
1. A composition for killing bacteria, algae, fungi and yeast
which comprises a bacteriacidally, fungicidally, algaecidally
or yeasticidally effective amount of;
(a) a benzimidazolyl-alkyl-carbamate of the formula
(I)
including a pressure chamber encompassing an upstream por-
tion of the molten metal pool, and a cooling chamber encom-
passing a downstream portion of the molten metal pool, the
downstream end of the pressure chamber being closed by a
vertically extending seal wall spaced slightly above the eleva-
tion of the molten metal only a sufficient distance to permit
passage of a ribbon of glass therebetween but insufficient to
permit substantial escape of pressurized gas from the pressure
chamber, at least a portion of the cooling chamber basin having
a width greater than the maximum width of the pressure cham-
ber basin, an entrance opening between a source of molten
glass and the pressure chamber adapted to admit molten glass
into the pressure chamber and prevent escape of pressurized
gas from the pressure chamber, the entrance opening having a
width substantially as great as the width of the pressure cham-
ber, an essentially enclosed gas space overlying and essentially
coextensive with the portion of the basin in the pressure cham-
ber, means to impose a pressure in the pressure chamber gas
space greater than in the cooling chamber, means in the cool-
ing chamber for engaging edge portions of a glass ribbon
emerging from the pressure chamber and for restricting lateral
shrinking of the glass ribbon, and an exit opening in the cooling
chamber through which the glass ribbon may be withdrawn
from the pool of molten metal.
in which
R' denotes an alkyl with I to 4 carbon atoms, and
R2 denotes hydrogen or an alkyl with 1 to 4 carbon atoms
and
(b) a phenolic compound selected from the group consisting
of (2,2'-dihydroxy-5,5'-dichloro) diphenylmethane and 2
hydroxy diphenyl which is present in an amount of 0.5 to
20 parts by weight per part by weight of said carbamate.
4,395,275
MONO AND DIESTERS OF
N-PHOSPHONOMETHYLGLYCINATES AS
HERBICIDES
William R. Purdum, Maryland Heights, Mo., assignor to Mon-
santo Company, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,486
Int. a.3 AGIN 57/28: C07F 9/40
U.S. a. 71—87 12 Claims
1. Alkylphosphonate diesters of N-phosphono-methylglyci-
nate of the formula
4,395,273
PREPARATION OF MULTI-TRACE ELEMENT
FERTILIZERS
Bernd Leutner, Frankenthal; Berndhard Purucker; Eberhard
Rottaer, both of Ludwigshafen; Geerd F. Juergens, and Dieter
Wagner, both of Schifferstadt, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to BASF Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
FUed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,672
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 28,
1980, 3044903
Int. a.J C05D 5/00
VJS. a. 71—11 6 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of a multi-trace nutrient
fertilizer which contains magnesium as a further nitrient and in
which the complexforming trace elements are present in the
form of anionic chelates with one or more N-carboxyalk-
O H O
II I II
C2H5— 0-C-CH2-N-CH2-P-0-eC„H2„-S-X)
OR2
wherein X is ethyl or
O
II
—C—O— ethyl
and R2 is hydrogen or — C„H2n— S— X), n is an integer of 1 to
4.
9. A herbicidal method which comprises contacting a plant
with a herbicidally effective amount of a compound of claim 1.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1483
4,395,276
THIOSULFENAMIDE DERIVATIVES OF
N-PHOSPHONOMETHYLGLYCINONITRILES AS
HERBICIDES
James A. Sikorski, West Lafayette, Ind., and Tommie G. Curtis,
University Gty, Mo., assignors to Monsanto Company, St.
Louis, Mo.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 160,677, Jun. 18, 1980, Pat. No.
4,344,572. This application Oct. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 309,323
lat. a. J AOIN 57/22; C07F 9/40
U.S. a. 71—87 39 Qaims
1. A method of controlling undesired plants which com-
prises applying to said plants or plant growth medium a herbi-
cidally effective amount of a compound of the formula
dicotyledonous cultivated crops as well as in cereals and
maize, which method comprises applying thereto or to the
locus thereof a herbicidally effective amount of an a-[4-(5'-tri-
nuoromethylpyridyl-2'-oxy)-phenoxy]-propionic acid-y-
butyrolactone ester of the formula 1, claim 1.
O
n
SSRi
(RO)2— P— CH2— N— CH2— C=N
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of phenyl,
naphthyl or biphenylyl; or phenyl, naphthyl or biphenylyl
substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently se-
lected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy,
lower alkylthio, alkoxycarbonyl, methylenedioxy, trifiuoro-
methyl, cyano, nitro and halogen; and Ri is alkyl, aralower
alkyl, cycloalkyl, naphthyl or phenyl or phenyl or naphthyl or
aralower alkyl substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents inde-
pendently selected from the group consisting of lower alkyl,
lower alkoxy, halogen, and trifiuoromethyl.
14. A compound of the formula
O SSRi
N I
(llO)2— P— CH2— N— CH2— C=N
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of phenyl,
naphthyl or biphenylyl; or phenyl, naphthyl or biphenylyl
substituted with from 1 to 3 substituents independently se-
lected from the group consisting of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy,
lower alkylthio, alkoxycarbonyl, methylenedioxy, trifiuoro-
methyl, cyano, nitro and halogen; and Ri is independently
alkyl, aralower alkyl, cycloalkyl, phenyl, naphthyl or phenyl
or naphthyl or aralower alkyl substituted with from 1 to 3
substituents independently selected from the group consisting
of lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, halogen, and trifiuoromethyl.
4,395,277
[4-(5'-TRIFLUOROMETHYLPYRIDYL-2-OXY)-
PHENOXY]-PROPIONIC ACID ESTERS WITH
a-HYDROXY OR a-MERCAPTO
GAMMA-BUTYROLACTONE AND THEIR USE AS
HERBiaDES
Beat Biihner, Binningen, and Hermann Rempfler, Ettingen, both
of Switzerland, assignors to Ciba-Geigy Corporation, Ardsley,
N.Y.
Filed Jul. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 288,860
Claims priority, application Switzerland, Aug. 11, 1980,
6060/80
Int. a.3 AOIN 43/40; C07D 413/12
U.S. a. 71—94 8 Qaims
1. a-[4-(5'-Trifluoromethylpyridyl-2'-oxy)-phenoxy]-pro-
pionic acid-y-butyrolactone ester and -thioester of the formula
I
f \ I
4,395,278
METHOD FOR PRODUCING COBALT METAL POWDER
Qarence D. Vanderpool; Richard A. Scheithauer, and Richard
G. W. Gingerich, all of Towanda, Pa., assignors to GTE Prod-
ucts Corporation, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Sep. 29, 1980, Ser. No. 191,882
Int. a.' C22B 23/04
U.S. Q. 75—0.5 AA 11 Qaims
1. A process for producing a fine cobalt metal powder from
an aqueous cobaltic ammine chloride solution comprising
treating said aqueous cobaltic ammine chloride solution with
an alkali metal hydroxide to form a wet cobaltic hydrated
precipitate, contacting said wet cobaltic hydrated precipitate
with steam at a temperature greater than about 800' C. for
sufficient period of time to convert said cobaltic hydrated
precipitate to cobaltous oxide and reducing said cobaltous
oxide to produce a fine cobalt metal powder.
(I)
<Hy
CH3
O— CH— CO— X
O
CO
/
wherein R is hydrogen or chlorine, and X is oxygen or sulfur.
7. A method for selectively combating gramineous weeds in
4,395,279
PLASMA SPRAY POWDER
David L. Houck, Towanda, Pa., assignor to Gte Products Corpo-
ration, Stamford, Conn.
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,267
Int. Q.3 B22F 1/00
U.S. Q. 75—0.5 BB 6 Qaims
1. A plasma spray powder consisting essentially of metals
selected from the group consisting of nickel, iron or cobalt, or
mixtures and alloys thereof, with the balance being from about
50 to about 90 percent by weight tungsten and carbon, said
tungsten and carbon being present in a one to one molar ratio
and said iron and nickel being present in a weight ratio of at
least about 4 parts by weight iron and nickel combined to 1
part by weight cobalt, said powder having a particle size distri-
bution of about 60 to 90 percent minus 20 microns, and less
than about 15 percent minus 5 microns and consisting essen-
tially of homogeneous plasma densified and melt alloyed parti-
cles having a substantially uniform composition.
4. A process for producing a plasma spray powder compris-
ing preparing a uniform powder blend consisting essentially of
metals selected from the group consisting of iron, nickel or
cobalt being present in a weight ratio of at least 4 parts iron or
nickel to 1 part cobalt with the balance of said powder being
from about 50 to about 90 percent by weight tungsten and
carbon, said tungsten and said carbon being present in a one to
one molar ratio, said powder blend having an average particle
size less than about 10 microns, agglomerating the powder to
produce agglomerated particles, sintering the agglomerated
particles, entraining the sintered agglomerated powder in a
carrier gas, feeding the entrained agglomerated powder
through a high temperature reactor having a temperature
above the melting point of the highest melting component of
the powder material to densify said particles, wherein said
densified particles consist essentially of particles having sub-
stantially uniform composition, and comminuting and classify-
ing, said densified particles to produce a powder having a
particle size distribution of about 60 to 90 percent minus 20
microns, and less than about 15 percent minus 5 microns.
1484
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,280
PREHEATING PROCESS FOR STEEL-MAKING
MATERIALS
Akira Takenouchi, Aichi, and Yukio Niwa, Kounan, both of
Japan, assignors to Daidotokushuko Kabushiki Kaisha, Na-
goya, Japan
Filed Feb. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 237,768
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 29, 1980, 55-25836;
Aug. 5, 1980, 55-107979
Int. a.3 C22B 1/00
least one straight electromagnetic stirrer longitudinally on the
outside of the window so as to project a traveling multi-phase
AC field into the iron causing stirring of the iron longitudinally
in the torpedo.
U.S. a. 75—28
4,395,282
DESULFURIZATION MIXTURE AND PROCESS FOR
MAKING IT
Albert Braun, Hiirth; Willi Portz; Georg Strauss, both of Erft-
3 Qaims stadt, and Hans-Martin Delhey, Duisburg, all of Fed. Rep. of
Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,228
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Mar. 24,
1981, 3111510
Int. a.' C22C 7/02
U.S. a. 75—58 9 Qaims
1. A mixture for the desulfurization of steel and crude iron
melts comprising
(a) a CaC2/CaO-crystalline blend containing 40 to 80 weight
% CaO and having crystallized out of a fused mass of CaO
and CaC2,
(b) 1 to 6 weight % of chemically combined water having
hydrated CaO in the CaC2/CaO-crystalline blend to form
Ca(OH)2;
(c) 0.5 to 8 weight % free carbon; and
(d) 0.5 to 20 weight % carbonates of a substance selected
from calcium, magnesium and sodium.
1. A. preheating process for steel-making materials, which
comprises the steps of:
(a) preheating steel making materials by contacting said
materials with waste gas fluid containing dust from a
steel-making furance in a preheating furnace, some of said
dust sticking to said materials.
(b) scattering any dust sticking to the heated steel-making
materials by impact of dumping the materials,
(c) collecting the scattered dust, and
(d) charging the steel-making materials into the steel-making
furnace after collecting the dust.
4,395,283
METHOD OF SWITCHING BOTTOM-BLOWN GASES
AND APPARATUS THEREFOR
Shozo Murakami; Hukuyosi Isomura, and Yoshihiro Koga, all of
Kitakynshu, Japan, assignors to Nippon Steel Corporation,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Feb. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 351,094
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 27, 1981, 56-26978
Int. C1.3 C21C 5/34
U.S. a. 75—60 8 Qaims
4,395,281
TREATING MOLTEN PIG IRON IN A TORPEDO
Goran Grimfjard, Vasteras, Sweden, assignor to Asea AB, Vast-
eras, Sweden
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,335
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Dec. 23, 1980, 8009116
Int. Q.3 C21C 7/02
U.S. Q. 75—53 7 Qaims
1. A method for treating molten pig iron containing sulfur, in
the torpedo of a torpedo car, the torpedo comprising a hori-
zontal generally cylindrical body having tapered ends extend-
ing horizontally from both ends thereof and the body having a
substantially central opening in its top and through which a
lance is inserted into the iron and a desulfurizing agent is blown
through the lance into the iron by compressed gas for reaction
with the sulfur in the iron; wherein the improvement compris-
ing providing the torpedo with at least one longitudinally
extending magnetically permeable window and positioning at
MTnOGEN
<l^
OOOEN
o
^XjmS^
AHOO* V
1. A method of switching bottom blown gases successively
from a first gas to a second gas without interruption immedi-
ately after the blowing of said first gas into a molten metal in
a steel making furnace, which blowing is effected from tuyeres
or porous plugs through piping means connecting the tuyeres
or porous plugs to gas sources, said tuyeres or porous plugs
being disposed at a part of the steel making furnace below the
surface of the molten metal, comprising the steps of:
increasing the pressure of gas in the piping means to a higher
level than a steadystate gas pressure flow condition which
occurs when switching from the first gas to the second gas
is completed;
releasing into the atmosphere at least a portion of the gas in
the piping means from a predetermined position in the
piping means between the gas sources and said furnace
when the pressure of the gas is increased to exceed said
predetermined level higher than the gas pressure in the
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
148S
steadystate flow condition whereby gas in said piping density of between about 0.8 and 1.2 grams per cubic centime-
means is diverted from said furnace into the atmosphere; ter, a bulk density of between about 25 and 40 pounds per cubic
and
inhibiting the release of the gas into the atmosphere after a
lapse of a j>redetermined period of time from the initiation
of the release of the gas, or when the pressure of the gas
flowing through the piping drops below a predetermined
level.
4 395 284
ABRASION resistant' MACHINABLE WHITE CAST
IRON
Robert J. Dawson, Newmarket, Canada, assignor to Falcon
bridge Limited, Toronto, Canada
Filed Jan. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 340,053
Qaims priority, application Canada, Feb. 20, 1981, 371420
Int. Q\? C22C 38/56
U.S. Q. 75—123 CB
8 Qaims ^^'^^^
foot and an internal porosity of between about 50 and 60%
» JO 5C
1. A cast iron alloy consisting essentially of about 2.5-3.5%
carbon, 0.5-1.0% manganese, 0.25-1.5% silicon, 13-19% chro-
mium, 0.8-3.0% nickel, balance iron and incidental impurities;
which is abrasion resistant in the hardened condition and ma-
chinable in the annealed condition.
5. A method of heat treating a cast iron alloy consisting
essentially of about:
2.5-3.5% carbon
0.5-1.0% manganese
0.25-1.5% silicon
13-19% chromium
0.8-3.0% nickel
balance iron and incidental impurities,
comprising cooling said alloy at a rate between 100° C. and
350° C. per hour from a temperature above the austenitizing
temperature so as to produce an annealed machinable alloy
having a hardness of less than about 45 Re.
4,395,286
WATER-BASED COATING OIL
Robert J. Sturwold, Cincinnati, Ohio, assignor to The Cincin-
nati-Vulcan Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Jun. 30, 1982, Ser. No. 393,718
Int. Q.3 C09D 5/08
U.S. Q. 106—14.13 13 Qaims
1. An aqueous coating composition for providing corrosion
and rust protection for metal surfaces comprising a compatible
mixture of the following components:
a sulfonate selected from the group consisting of monovalent
metal and amine salts of sulfonic acids;
a polybasic fatty acid;
an alkanolamide; and
a water soluble ether wherein said components are provided
in an effective amount to provide rust and corrosion pro-
tection for a metal surface and to provide a compatible
solution.
4,395,287
LIQUID RECORDING MATERIAL
Masatsune Kobayashi, Yokohama; Seiko Matsumoto, Atsugi;
Masahiro Hanita, Funabashi, and Tokuya Ohta, Yokohama,
all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Nov. 23, 1981. Ser. No. 323,881
Qaims priority, application Japan, Dec. 1, 1980, 55-169862;
Dec. 1, 1980, 55-169863; Dec. 1, 1980, 55-169864
Int. Q.^ C09D 11/02
U.S. Q. 106—20 13 Qaims
4,395,285
LOW DENSITY COMPACTS OF PREPARED MIX FOR
USE IN THE PRODUCnON OF SILICON AND
FERROSILICON
Rodney F. Merkert, Buffalo, N.Y., assignor to Elkem Metals
Company, Pittsburgh, Pa.
Division of Ser. No. 134,205, Mar. 26, 1980, Pat. No. 4,309,216.
This application Sep. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 304,652
Int. Q.3 C22B 9/10
U.S. Q. 75—256 8 Claims
1. Pieces of a low density, porous compact for use as the feed
to an electric furnace in the production of silicon and ferrosili-
con comprising finely-divided silica-containing material in-
cluding at least about 25 parts by weight of silica fume per 100
parts by weight of total silica, and a finely-divided carbona-
ceous reducing agent in an amount such that the total carbon
ranges from about 35 to 50 parts by weight carbon per 100
parts by weight of total silica; the compact having an apparent
\ :-": ;■
-6
- ' ~=-7
■
-^ <
o o o d o 0 o
5
12-
1. A liquid recording material comprising a recording agent
for forming a recording image and a liquid vehicle for dis-
solving or dispersing said recording agent therein,
characterized in that a polyalkylene glycol having an aver-
age molecular weight of 150 to 350 (A component) and a
polyalkylene glycol having an average molecular weight
of 400 to 750 (B component) are incorporated in combina-
tion in said material, wherein the weight ratio of said A
component to said B component is in the range of from
10:1 to 1:10.
1486
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,288
LIQUID RECORDING MEDIUM
Tsuyoshi Eida, Chiba; Yasuhiro Yano, Tokyo; Masahiro Haruta,
Funabashi; Yohji Matsufuji, Tokyo, and Tokuya Ohta, Yoko-
hama, all of Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 54,489, Jul. 3, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,731
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 4, 1978, 53-81122
Int. a.3 C09D 11/02
U.S. a. 106—22 18 Claims
1. In an ink jet recording process for discharging a liquid
recording medium in the form of droplets for recording from a
discharge orifice in a recording head, the improvement which
comprises employing a liquid recording medium comprising:
(a) a carrier liquid selected from the group consisting of
water and a mixture of water and a water-soluble organic
solvent; and
(b) a recording agent having the formula
Ri R2
Q2-N=N-0|-N=N— j^gYg^N=N-0i-N=N-Q2
R4 Rs
4,395,289
PROCESS FOR PRODUCING CONCRETE
Anatoly A. Baiakirev, and Boris A. Balakirev, both of Chimkent,
U.S.S.R., assignors to Kazakhsky Khimiko-Tekhnologichesky
Institut, Chimkent, U.S.S.R.
Filed Dec. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 327,055
Int. C\? C04B 7/02
U.S. CI. 106—98 15 Qaims
1. A process for producing concrete comprising mixing
barkhan sand with a fuel selected from the group consisting of
a liquid fuel and a solid fuel, and with a plastic binder selected
from the group consisting of clay, loess, loam and surfactant
which liquifies and reduces water-consumption of the compo-
sition, said plastic binder being present in an amount sufficient
to provide for granulation of said sand and said fuel and, the
components of the mixture being in the following proportions
in percent by weight:
barkhan sand: 95 to 30
fuel: 3 to 20
plastic binder: 2 to 60;
granulating the resulting charge; calcining the granules at a
temperature ranging from 1,000° to 1,600° C; crushing the
calcined material; mixing the crushed material with cement
and water, cement being used in an amount of from 10 to 100%
by means of the calcined material and water in an amount of
from 10 to 60% by mass of the total of the calcined material
and cement.
wherein said recording agent has 2-8 sulfo groups per
molecule, each in the form of a sodium salt or quaternary
ammonium salt and wherein the Qi radicals are similar or
dissimilar members selected from the group consisting of
phenylene and naphthalene, the Q2 radicals are similar or
dissimilar members selected from the group consisting of
phenyl and naphthyl, the Q\ radicals and the Qi radicals
may be unsubstituted or amino substituted, hydroxyl sub-
stituted or sulfo substituted, and Ri-Re are similar or
dissimilar members selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen, amino, hydroxyl and sulfo.
10. In an ink jet recording process for discharging a liquid
recording medium in the form of droplets for recording from a
discharge orifice in a recording head, the improvement which
comprises employing a liquid recording medium comprising:
(a) a carrier liquid selected from the group consisting of
water and a mixture of water and a water-soluble organic
solvent; and
(b) a recording agent having the formula
NH2OH
Q2— Ns=N— Qi — N=N
Rl
N=N— Qi— N=N— Q2
R4
R2 R3
wherein said recording agent has 2-8 sulfo groups per
molecule, each in the form of a sodium salt or quaternary
ammonium salt and wherein the Qi radicals are similar or
dissimilar members selected from the group consisting of
phenylene and naphthalene, the Q2 radicals are similar or
dissimilar members selected from the group consisting of
phenyl and naphthyl, the Qi radicals and the Q2 radicals
may be unsubstituted or amino substituted, hydroxyl sub-
stituted or sulfo substituted, and R1-R4 are similar or
dissimilar members selected from the group consisting of
hydrogen and sulfo.
4,395,290
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING CEMENT RAW MIX
Osvaldo A. Oiler, Cape Girardeau, Mo.; Eric R. Hansen,
Omaha, Neb.; and Gerad L. Eaker, Cape Girardeau, Mo.,
assignors to Gulf & Western Industries, Inc., New York,
N.Y.
Filed Jan. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 339,089
Int. CV C04B 7/02
U.S. a. 106—100 21 Qaims
1. A method for regulating the mixture of limestone with
other raw materials to produce a cement raw. mix of desired
composition, said method comprising the steps of:
(1) estimating the chemical composition of the limestone and
the several other raw materials;
(2) selecting the desired characteristics (Ch) of the overall
raw mix composition;
(3) determining the relative proportions (W,) of raw material
to produce raw mix of the desired characteristics (Ch/));
(4) producing raw mix for a time interval by mixing raw
materials in relative proportions (W,);
(5) after producing the raw mix for the time interval, directly
analyzing the chemical composition of the raw mix and
calculating the actual characteristics (Ch^) of the raw
mix;
(6) determining the theoretical relative proportions (T,) of
the raw materials that could have theoretically produced
the actual characteristics of the raw mix;
(7) adjusting the estimated chemical compositions of the
limestone and the several other raw materials by adjusting
estimated components in response to the degree of diver-
gence between T, and W, in the limestone and for the
several other raw materials;
(8) reselecting the desired characteristics of the raw mix
composition (Ch/j) over the next subsequent time interval
to adjust the overall raw mix towards the overall desired
characteristics (Ch); and
(9) repeating steps three through eight.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1487
4,395,291
PROCESS FOR MAKING NON-DUSTING HIGH LEAD
OXIDE-LOW SILICA ADDITIVE
Armand Limare, Bouillet; Bernard Razumowski, Plaisir, and
Claude Sindezingue, Senlis, all of France, assignors to Societe
Anonyme Societe Miniere et Metallurgique de Penarroya,
Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 128,259, Mar. 7, 1980, abandoned. This
application Mar. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 359,781
Claims priority, application France, Mar. 9, 1979, 79 06049
Int. CV C09C 1/14
U.S. CI. 106—297 9 Claims
1. A process for producing a lead additive which contains a
lead oxide and an alkaline silicate having a weight ratio of lead,
calculated as PbO, to alkaline silicate, calculated as Si02,
between about 18:1-32:1, a moisture content of less than or
equal to about 2%, and a density of less than about 5 g/cm^ the
process comprising the steps of:
(a) mixing the lead oxide with all or a portion of a predeter-
mined amount of a water-soluble alkaline silicate to obtain
a mixture comprising a malleable paste;
(b) conditioning the mixture obtained in step (a) to produce
granules having a predetermined size;
(c) subjecting the mixture obtained in step (a) to a heat
treatment of drying or drying and fritting, comprising a
first phase conducted at a temperature of between about
50° and 200° C. for a period from several minutes to about
one hour and a second phase conducted at a substantially
higher temperature than the first phase of between about
80° and 700' C. for a period of from several minutes to
about one hour; and
(d) adding any remaining portion of the water-soluble alka-
line silicate to the mixture obtained in step (a).
16. A process for producing a fructose rich non-crystallizing
syrup derived from starch comprising the steps of:
(a) passing a starch conversion syrup feed having on a dry
solids basis more than 49% dextrose, about 25 to 51%
fructose and about 0.1 to about 8% higher saccharides
through a molecular exclusion column,
(b) removing dextrose and higher saccharides from the
syrup, and
(c) recovering a product containing more than about 52%
fructose, less than about 48% dextrose and less than about
2% higher saccharides.
4,395,293
ACCELERATED ANNEALING OF GALLIUM ARSENIDE
SOLAR CELLS
Ronald C. Knechtii, Woodland Hills; Robert Y. Loo, Los An-
geles, and G. Sanjiv Kamath, Malibu, all of Calif., assignors to
Hughes Aircraft Company, El Segundo, Calif.
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,360
Int. C\? HOIL 21/26i: C03C 3/04
U.S. CI. 148—1.5 7 Qaims
i
I^
-+-4 J
4-
\ •■ ' — I — \ — ' — • ' — \ — ' — y—
i^-^'t H'i>f-t'| t r 1 T- ■
-•I — \
-U-L
Hn: i.i_
u
-4-^-
-t— t— i— t— t--
4—1 1 I \ X t
~f— t--t— f_-^
-"T- f
■r
^ -^_+.;-a-
S «0 B
mmM IIS. k
a a •
MBtllKIIK. k
4,395,292
HIGH FRUCTOSE SYRUP AND PROCESS FOR MAKING
SAME
Edward Katz, St. Louis County; Henry S. Davis, St. Louis, and
Barrett L. Scallet, Qayton, all of Mo., assignors to Anheuser-
Busch, Incorporated, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Apr. 10, 1974, Ser. No. 459,788
Int. C1.3 C13K 1/00. 11/00
U.S. a. 127—29
rece
■ i/% reucrosritsej
fa » ^ttiM£P 5*/Wi
tex uxTMse
6<ifc /»'"> /" '
20 Claims
WII5M ttfureg
( B£IOfr/^J^J))
nmrSTfrcM
Cinitri. ae/r^fM
FQJtM
H
murrif
mix
fpacresi
Bit TMtt
1. A method of repairing GaAs solar cell damaged by radia-
tion which comprises:
(a) thermally annealing the damaged solar cell by maintain-
ing the solar cell at a temperature substantially above the
temperature at which the solar cell operates most effi-
ciently for a predetermined period of time, while substan-
tially simultaneously;
(b) injecting minority carriers into the damaged solar cell at
an energy level of the order of circuit potentials.
4,395,294
COPPER CORROSION INHIBITOR
Norris D. Hobbins, North PlainField, and Ronald F. Roberts,
Somerset, both of N.J., assignors to Bell Telephone Laborato-
ries, Incorporated, Murray Hill, N.J.
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,446
Int. C\? C23F 5/02
U.S. CI. 148—6.14 R 13 Qaims
Mr'iwc
14. A non-crystallizing syrup derived from a syrup having a
D.E. of over 90 and a fructose content of less than 49%, said
non-crystallizing syrup consisting essentially of, on a dry solids
basis, from abcMit 52% to about 95% fructose, less than about
48% dextrose and from about 0.5% to about 2% higher molec-
ular weight sugars.
1. A product formed by the process of contacting a metal
comprising copper with an oxidation inhibitor to form a pro-
tective coating CHARACTERIZED IN THAT said oxida-
tion inhibitor comprises 5-methyl benzimidazole and where
said protective coating has a thickness of at least 5 nm.
1488
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,295
PROCESS FOR TREATING
COPPER-ALUMINUM-SILICON ALLOYS TO IMPROVE
FATIGUE STRENGTH
Eugene Shapiro, Hamden, Conn., assignor to Olin Corporation,
New Haven, Conn.
Filed May 28, 1982, Ser. No. 382,865
Int. CV C22F 1/08
U.S. a. 148—11.5 C 8 aaims
1. A process for providing a substantially single phase cop-
per alloy having a fatigue strength in a longitudinal direction
substantially in excess of about 31 ksi and in a transverse direc-
tion substantially in excess of about 46 ksi and having a fatigue
life of at least about 10 million cycles, saiid process comprising:
providing a copper alloy consisting essentially of from about
\% to about 5% silicon, from about 2% to about 12%
aluminum and the balance essentially copper;
cold working said alloy from about 80% to about 90%; and
heating said alloy at a temperature of about 250° C. to about
300° C. for a time period of about 30 minutes to about 24
hours.
8. A flexible contact member for an ink jet printer, said
contact member comprising:
a member formed from a copper alloy, said copper alloy
consisting essentially of from about 1% to about 5% sili-
con, from about 2% to about 12% aluminum and the
balance essentially copper and having a fatigue strength in
a longitudinal direction substantially in excess of about 31
ksi and in a transverse direction substantially in excess of
about 46 ksi and a fatigue life of at least about 10 million
cycles from being cold worked from about 80% to about
90% and being subjected to a final heat treatment at a
temperature of about 250° C. to about 300° C. for a time
period of about 30 minutes to about 24 hours.
4,395,296
THERMAL MECHANICAL PROCESS FOR STEEL SLABS
AND THE PRODUCT THEREOF
Halle Abrams, Allentown, Pa., assignor to Bethlehem Steel
Corporation, Bethlehem, Pa.
Filed Jun. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 276,103
Int. CV C21D 8/02
U.S. a. 148—12.4 4 Claims
5r«Av Timf-toucomn
MrC-««0»TO/hr-ft*-'F
Time mioules
1. In a thermal-mechanical process for treating a carbon or
low alloy steel slab by a modified controlled rolling schedule
to improve the strength and toughness properties of said steel
slab, where such schedule includes a high temperature reduc-
tion of the steel slab, and quenching the steel slab to reduce the
time for initiating a second low temperature reduction of the
steel slab to final thickness, the improvement comprising in
combination therewith the steps of
(a) subjecting said steel slab to a high temperature reduction
step at a temperature above 2000° F. (1053° C),
(b) quenching said steel slab from a temperature above about
1900° F. (1038° C.) by the application of low pressure
water uniformly to the surfaces thereof, where the rate
and time of application of said water is such as to achieve
a heat transfer coefficient within the range of 200 to 600
BTU/HR-ft2-°F.,
(c) ceasing said quenching prior to the surfaces of said steel
slab reaching a temperature of about 1000° F. (539° C.) to
avoid transformation of said steel slab to martensite,
(d) holding said steel slab for a period of time to reduce the
thermal gradient from surface to center thereof to a range
of 50° to 150° F. (28° to 83° C),
(e) subjecting the steel slab to said second reduction at an
average temperature of 1450° to 1750° F. (739° to 954° C.)
to form a steel plate, and
(0 cooling said steel plate to ambient temperature, whereby
such plate is characterized by a fine-grained microstruc-
ture that is essentially grain size symmetrical from the
center to the surface of the plate.
4,395,297
BONDING PROCESS FOR SECURING OBJECTS TO A
SMOOTH SURFACE
Howard F. Patterson, 1840^ W. High St., Springfield, Ohio
45504
Filed Aug. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 411,262
Int. aj GOIB 5/00; C09J 5/02
U.S. CI. 156—64 10 Claims
1. The method of securing an object to a smooth surface
comprising the steps of
contacting a thermally activated adhesive substrate with a
solvent rendering said adhesive substrate tacky, said adhe-
sive substrate, until so contacted, being in a non tacky
state at ambient atmospheric temperature,
affixing said tacky adhesive substrate to said surface,
supplying heat to said object apart from said surface and said
adhesive substrate thereon,
pressing a surface of said heated object against said adhesive
substrate, and
allowing the object of cool under pressure so as to make
contact with the adhesive substrate.
4,395,298
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR MAKING TOOTHED
BELTS AND BELT MADE EMPLOYING SAME
Robert E. Wetzel, Springfield, Mo.; Wayne C. Fieler, Oran-
geburg, S.C, and Gerald C. Hollaway, Springfield, Mo., as-
signors to Dayco Corporation, Dayton, Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 205,832, Nov. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,585
Int. a.^ B29D 17/00; B29H 7/22
U.S. a. 156—137 26 Qaims
1. In a method of making toothed endless power transmis-
sion belts each having a particular thickness and comprising
the steps of, forming a polymeric material to define an elongate
toothed belt element, helically wrapping said toothed belt
element on cylinder means with successive helical turns in
adjoining side-by-side relation and with each tooth of each
turn in substantial axial alignment with associated teeth of
other helical turns, bonding said adjoining helical turns to-
gether to define a toothed belt sleeve, and cutting said sleeve to
CHEMICAL
July 26, 1983
define a plurality of said toothed belts, the improvement
wherein said forming step comprises the steps of defining hot
strip means of said polymeric material with said strip means
having an overall substantially self-supporting quadrilateral
cross-sectional configuration throughout the length thereof
and a thickness throughout the length thereof roughly equal to
said particular thickness, disposing load-carrying means in said
hot strip means with said load-carrying means comprising at
least one elongate flexible member that forms a corresponding
helically wound load-carrying means in said endless belts, and
thereafter working said self-supporting quadrilateral cross-sec-
tional configured strip means to define said toothed belt ele-
1489
<y.
^'
ment with a thickness at the teeth thereof roughly equal to said
particular thickness and prior to said step of helically wrapping
said toothed belt element on said cylinder means, said dispos-
ing step comprising the step of disposing said flexible member
axially along and within said hot strip means prior to said
working step so that said hot strip means engages said flexible
member substantially completely around the same throughout
substantially the entire length thereof that is disposed within
said hot strip means, said working step comprising the step of
working a portion of said hot strip means along its entire length
while keeping said flexible member substantially intact to
define said toothed belt element having said flexible member
extending in a rectilinear path along its full length.
4,395,299
BONDED BULK GRAPHITE AND PROCESS FOR
BONDING
Dennis M. Riggs, Simpsonville, S.C, and Edward L. Harvey,
Watertown, Mass., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Secretary of the Army, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Aug. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 295,167
Int. C\} C09J i/iO
U.S. a. 156—285 5 Qaims
1. A process for bonding graphite pieces together wherein a
graphitizable binder consisting essentially of a liquid crystal-
line component of pitch obtained by extracting an isotropic
pitch with a hydrocarbon solvent to yield a solvent insoluble
fraction which softens at about 240° C. and becomes very fluid
at about 300° C. to about 500° C. is spread uniformly over at
least one of the two graphite surfaces to be bonded together,
the pieces are then joined and held in intimate contact and the
entire assemblage is heated under vacuum or in an inert atmo-
sphere to a temperature in the range of from about 700° C. to
about 3000° C. under a pressure of from about 20 psi to about
1000 psi applied in a direction normal to the bond interface
until bonding is effected.
Jl
4,395,300
BASE CUP APPLYING APPARATUS AND METHOD
Wolfgang Hoffmann, Turlock, Calif., assignor to B & H Manu-
facturing Company, Inc., Ceres, Calif.
Continuation of Ser, No. 84,594, Oct. 15, 1979, Pat. No.
4,300,966. This application Oct. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 311,420
Int. Q.^ B29C 27/10
U.S. a. 156—294 2 Qaims
1. Apparatus for applying flat bottom cups to the bottoms of
round bottom containers comprising:
(a) a cup holder adapted to hold a cup in upright position
and capable of spinning about the common axis of the cup
and the holder.
(b) means at a cup delivery station for delivering a cup to the
holder in such position,
(c) means for transporting the holder and cup to an adhesive
applying station,
(d) means for spinning the holder and cup in upright position
at such adhesive applying station and for applying adhe-
sive to the interior of the spinning cup,
(e) means for then transporting the holder and the cup to a
container delivery station.
(0 means for transporting a container to such delivery sta-
tion and for depositing the container within the cup to
adhere it to the cup.
(g) means for separating the container and adhering cup
from the holder, and
(h) means for transporting the empty holder back to the said
cup delivery station.
4,395.301
ADHESIVE COMPOSITIONS AND METHOD
Herbert Bauer, Lutry, Switzerland; Gerhard Piestert, Schwet-
zingen, and Heinz G. Gilch, Bad Homburg-Kirdorf, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to USM Corporation, Far-
mington, Conn.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980. Ser. No. 199,348
Int. CI.' C09J 5/02: C08F 20/10
U.S. CI. 156—307.5 12 Qaims
1. A two part adhesive composition curable on combination
at room temperature to provide a cured adhesive composition,
one part of the composition being a polymerizable adhesive
part comprising a source of free radicals and an ethylenically
unsaturated monomer selected from the group consistmg of
diacrylates or dimethacrylates of mono, di, tri or tetraethylene
glycol, trimethacrylates from trihydric alcohols, hydroxy and
glycidyl terminated esters of acrylic and methacrylic acid and
reaction products of these having two or more acrylate or
methacrylate terminal groups, acrylates and methacrylates
derived from epoxy resins and, mixtures of these monomers,
the other part being an activator part and comprising an azine
dye material which can be reacted with a reducing agent to
provide a product capable of initiating curing of the first part
and where said azine dye material is selected from the group
consisting of:
6
(C2H5)2N
N(CH3)2
CI-,
1490
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
-continued
6
N(CH3)2
C1-.
6
NH:
CI-.
xx;xc
6
cr
-1 +
(C2H5)2N
6
•N(C2H5)2
CI-.
Na03S^N^^NH
SO3-.
Na03S
6 6
SO3- -\
C1-,
9 jO
H3C-N N^^ ^^NH2
CH3
C1-.
(a) applying an activator part of claim 1 to a surface of one
or both of the substrates,
(b) allowing the applied activator part to dry,
(c) applying the polymehzable adhesive part of claim 1 to
one of the surfaces carrying the applied activator,
(d) pressing the substrates together with the polymerizable
and activator compositions in intimate contact with exclu-
sion of air and
(e) allowing polymerization of the monomer to form and
adhesive bond between the surfaces.
4,395,302
METAL DISSOLUTION PROCESS USING H2O2— H2SO4
ETCHANT
Constantine I. Courduvelis, Orange, Conn., assignor to Enthone
Incorporated, West Haven, Conn.
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,650
Int. a.3 C23F ]/00; B44C 1/22; C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. a. 156—642 8 Claims
5«ruB«TioN cuRvfS Of fopre^ sulfbte
IN noii£ou5 soujrms of sulfuric miv
(Mfr«iic cofpen V5- TtMi-eHflraitf Piors)
or mixtures of these and where said activator further includes
a promoter selected from the group consisting of sulfur con-
taining compounds, transition metal comp>ounds and mixtures
of these.
12. A method of adhesively bonding two air-impervious
substrates at ambient temperature which comprises the steps of
so X 100 110
TeMPERoruRe/F
1. In a process for dissolving a metal by etching with an
aqueous solution, wherein the aqueous etching solution in-
cludes initial predetermined high levels of of H2O2 and H2SO4
in water, the improvement comprising:
etching the metal from work pieces with the etching solution
while permitting the concentration of H2SO4 in the etch-
ing solution to decrease from its high level to a predeter-
mined low level which is not more than about one-half of
the predetermined high level, and until the concentration
of etched metal dissolved in the etching solution reaches a
predetermined level;
removing the etching solution from use;
adding H2SO4 to the etching solution to increase the H2SO4
concentration to the predetermined high level;
allowing the metal dissolved in the etching solution to pre-
cipitate out of the etching solution, and
recycling the metal-depleted etching solution to the etching
step.
4,39533
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING THIN-WALLED
CORROSION RESISTANT METALLIC OBJECTS
Charles R. Weir, Bloomfield Hills, Mich., assignor to Masco
Corporation, Taylor, Mich.
FUed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,003
Int. a.3 C23F 1/02
U.S. a. 156—656 31 Claims
1. A method of making a thin- walled corrosion resistant end
product from a workpiece comprised of a starting metal not
resistant to an etchant and from an alloying metal which is
selectively soluble in said starting metal to produce an alloy
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1491
metal impervious to said etchant, the method comprising the
consecutive steps of forming said workpiece into the shape of
said end product, forming an alloy case of said alloy metal on
f< f.^
a surface of said workpiece, and exposing said workpiece to
said etchant to remove the pnartion of said workpiece which is
not alloyed.
4,395,304
SELECTIVE ETCHING OF FHOSPHOSILICATE GLASS
Werner Kern, Hightstown, N.J., and George L. Schnable, Lans-
dale. Pa., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,001
Int. CI.-^ B44C 1/22: C03C 15/00. 25/06
U.S. CI. 156—657 8 Claims
4,395,306
METHOD FOR PREPARING FIBROUS MATS FROM A
FIBROUS SUSPENSION
George R. Killat, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Company, Midland, Mich.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 117,166, Jan. 31, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 337,923
Int. CI.' C04B 43/02
U.S. a. 162—156 16 Claims
1. An improved method for preparing a fibrous mat or sheet
by depositing a layer of a thickened fibrous suspension of
synthetic fibers and an aqueous suspending medium thickened
by a carboxamide synthetic addition polymer on a support,
removing substantially all of said suspending medium to leave
a fibrous mat with a residuum of a minor amount of said car-
boxamide polymer on the fibers, the improvement wherein
said carboxamide polymer is reacted with a hypohalite to form
a reaction product in said suspending medium, which as said
residuum will cross-link to provide a fibrous mat of improved
strength. >
^
Jl
2^ /28
1
28
26
18
:^
.^
'14
1. An acidic etchant solution for the preferential etching of
phosphosilicate glass in the presence of silicon dioxide consist-
ing essentially of at least about 80 weight percent of a carbox-
ylic acid, and between about 1 and 10 weight percent of both
hydrogen fluoride and water.
4,395,305
CHEMICAL ETCHING OF ALUMINUM CAPACITOR
FOIL
Alfred Whitman, Williamstown, Mass., assignor to Sprague
Electric Company, North Adams, Mass.
Filed Aug. 23, 1982, Ser. No. 410,271
Int. a.3 C23F 7/00
U.S. a. 156—665 6 Qaims
Vent
^
21
^!P=h
tei
2(\--
22KJ-3Q
23
4,395,307
THERMOTROPIC LIQUID CRYSTAL POLYMER PULP
AND METHOD OF PREPARATION THEREOF
WHEREIN SAID POLYMER COMPRISES RECURRING
UNITS WHICH CONTAIN A
2,6-DIOXYANTHRAQUINONE MOIETY
John R. Kastelic, Rockaway; Larry F. Charbonneau, Chatham,
and Thomas P. Carter, Jr., Parsippany, all of N.J., assignors
to Celanese Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 319,521
Int. a.' D21F 11/00
U.S. a. 162—157.3 18 Qaims
1. An improved method of providing a pulp comprised of
fibrils of a polymer which exhibits desirable thermal stability
and chemical and solvent resistance comprising the steps of:
providing a shaped article comprised of a polyester capable
of forming an anisotropic melt phase which comprises not
less than about 5 mole percent of recurring units which
units comprise a 2,6-dioxyanthraquinone moiety; and
masticating said shaped article to form a pulp comprised of
fibrils of said polyester.
12. A pulp comprised of fibrils of a polyester which is capa-
ble of forming an anisotropic melt phase and which comprises
not less than about 5 mole percent of recurring units which
units comprise a 2,6-dioxyanthraquinone moiety.
4,395,308
SPIRAL FABRIC PAPERMAKERS FELT AND METHOD
OF MAKING
Donald Dawes, Waycross, Ga., assignor to Scapa Dyers Inc.,
Waycross, Ga.
Filed Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,031
Int. CI.' D21F 1/10: D04H 3/02
U.S. a, 162—232 36 Qaims
18v
]!£2&!
Spent
Etchad
1. A process for the chemical etching of aluminum capacitor
foil to produce a fine tunnel etch structure comprising passing
said foil through an aqueous etchant bath containing sodium
chloride and sulfuric acid, the weight percentage of said sulfu-
ric acid being at least equal to the weight percentage of said
sodium chlorideu
1. A papermakers fabric comprising:
a plurality of hinge yams, all of said hinge yarns extending in
a common direction; and
a plurality of spiral coils disposed in a common plane in a
1492
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
side-by-side relationship, each of said coils extending in
said common direction, adjacent coils of said spiral inter-
meshed and joined together in a hinged relationship by at
least one of said hinge yarns, said hinge yarns having
non-circular cross sections.
23. A dryer fabric comprising:
a plurality of spiral coils arranged side-by-side in a common
plane with adjacent coils being joined together by a hinge
yarn in a hinged relationship, said coils providing a flat
paper receiving surface and a flat machine roll contacting
surface, two of said hinge yarns occupymg substantially
the entire interior of any given spiral coil.
24. The method of making a dryer fabric comprising the
steps of:
positioning a plurality of spiral coils in a common plane in a
side-by-side relationship;
intermeshing adjacent coils;
joining said intermeshed coils through the introduction of a
hinge yarn of non-circular cross section to create a hinged
relationship between the adjacent coils; and
subjecting the fabric to heat treatment while under con-
trolled tension in order to cause said spiral yarns to flatten
and press up against the long surfaces of said non-circular
yarns.
28. A papermakers fabric comprising:
a plurality of hinge yarns, all of said hinge yarns extending in
a common direction; and
a plurality of spiral coils disposed in a common plane in a
side-by-side relationship, each of said coils extending in a
common direction, adjacent of said spiral coils being
4,395,310
FRACTIONATION SYSTEM
John E. Idenden, Belleville, N.J., assignor to Exxon Research
and Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,231
Int. a.' BOID 3/42
U.S. a. 203—2 4 Claims
1. A method for reducing the energy input to a fractionation
system comprising a fractionation zone, a reboiler zone com-
municating with the fractionation zone, and a compression
zone communicating with the fractionation zone and the re-
intermeshed and joined together in a hinged relationship ^^j,^^ ^^^^ ^^^^ ^^^^^^ comprising:
by at least one of said hinge yarns, each of said spiral coils
formed from yarns having a non-circular cross section.
4,395,309
FRACTIONAL DISTILLATION OF HYDROCARBONS
FROM COAL
Ernest P. Esztergar. 6308 Avenida Cresta, La Jolia, Calif. 92037
Filed Nov. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 203,255
Int. Cl.^ ClOB 49/06. 49/18. 57/02
U.S. CI. 201—22 16 Qaims
A. introducing a hydrocarbon feed into the fractionation
zone, the fractionation zone adapted to separate the feed
into an overhead fraction and a bottoms fraction;
B. passing at least a portion of the bottoms fraction from the
fractionation zone through a reboiler zone for reheating
prior to returning bottoms fraction to the fractionation
zone;
C. passing overhead fraction through a compression zone
wherein the overhead fraction is compressed;
D. passing substantially all the overhead fraction from the
compression zone through the reboiler zone, the com-
pressed overhead fraction transferring heat to the bottoms
fraction;
E. returning an overhead fraction consisting of a liquid
phase quantity and a vapor phase quantity to the fraction-
ation zone;
F. monitoring the composition of at least one of the fractions
separated in the fractionation zone; and,
G. regulating the rate of said liquid phase quantity of the
overhead fraction returned to the fractionation zone suffi-
cient to thereby reduce the energy input to the fraction-
ation system as compared to a fractionation system having
no compression zone.
1. The process for recovering liquid fuel from coal compris-
ing continuously forming a bilayer coal bed on a foraminous
conveyor, passing the coal bed through a substantially oxygen
free processing zone, heating the bed in said zone to a tempera
4,395,311
PREPARATION OF AMINOMETHANOLS
Charles J. McDonald, Midland, Mich., assignor to The Dow
Chemical Company, Midland, Mich.
Filed Nov. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 325,946
Int. C\? BOID 3/10. 3/34
U.S. a. 203—34 8 Qaims
1. A process for the purification of a reaction mixture con-
ture of higher than about 550° P., while maintaining the bottom taining an acid-soluble aminomethanol, and an unreacted alde-
of the bed at a temperature of not higher than about 450° P., hyde having 1 to 3 carbon atoms, said aminomethanol being
removing the top of the coal bed bilayer from the processing represented by the general formula:
zone as product char, recycling the bottom of the coal bed
bilayer to the processing zone to form the top of a coal bed (R)2NCHOH
bilayer in another pass through the processing zone, and re- I
moving liquid through the foraminous conveyor as product '^'
liquid fuel.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1493
wherein R| is hydrogen or an alkyl group having 1 or 2 carbon
atoms and each R is independently hydrocarbyl or inertly
substituted hydrocarbyl or both R groups are collectively a
divalent hydrocarbon or ether radical which combine with the
nitrogen of the aminomethanol to form a heterocyclic ring
represented by the formula:
\
NCHOH
/ I
Ri
said process comprising the steps of:
(a) contacting the reaction mixture with an acid of sufficient
strength and quantity to effect protonation of the
aminomethanol under conditions such that essentially all
of the aminomethanol is protonated, and
(b) distilling the acidified reaction mixture under reduced
pressure under conditions including a temperature at or
below 85° C such that the amount of said unreacted
aldehyde in the reaction mixture is reduced.
4,395,313
VACUUM PRETREATMENT PROCESS FOR DURABLE
ELECTROPLATED COATINGS ON ABS AND PPO
PLASTICS
James H. Lindsay, Fenton; Joseph 1^ Sala, St. Oair Shores,
both of Mich., and Hamid M. Ghorashi, Midlothian, Va.,
assignors to General Motors Corporation, Detroit, Mich.
Filed Jul. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 402,899
Int. CI.' C25D 5/54
U.S. CI. 204—30 6 Qaims
1. A method of forming adherent electrodeposited coatings
onto a surface of a thermoplastic polymer selected from the
class consisting of ABS and PPO comprising the steps of ex-
posing the polymer surface to an RP oxidizing glow discharge
equivalent to at least about 3 minutes at a power setting of at
least about 50 watts, vacuum depositing onto the so-exposed
surface a first thin film of a metal selected from the class con-
sisting of nickel, chromium, titanium, molybdenum, silicon,
zirconium, aluminum and alloys thereof to form a blanket
metal layer strongly bonded to the so-exposed surface, vacuum
depositing a blanket thin film of a readily electroplatable metal
strongly bonded to the first thin film, and then electrodeposit-
ing an overlayer onto the last-mentioned vacuum deposited
thin film, without producing peeling or blistering of the films
or the overlayer on them.
4,395,312
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR THE ANALYSIS OF
SOLUTION ADJACENT AN ELECTRODE
Richard L. McCreery; Clyde W. McCurdy, and Paula J. Rossi,
all of Columbus, Ohio, assignors to The Ohio State University
Research Foundation, Columbus, Ohio
Fited Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 250,168
Int. a.' COIN 27/46
U.S. a. 204—1 T 25 Claims
4,395,314
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCING CONCENTRATED
SOLUTION OF SODIUM HYDROXIDE AND CHLORINE
Sergei V. Golubkov, ulitsa Menzhinskogo, 21, kv. 420; Ernest A.
Druzhinin, ulitsa Gvardeiskaya, 4, kv. 32; Vladimir M. Zimin,
8-ya ulitsa Textilschikov, 10, kv. 18; Vladimir L. Kubasov,
Kirovogradskaya ulitsa, 4, korpus 2, kv. 135; Florenty I.
Lvovich, 1 .Nizhne Mikhailovsky proezd, 16, kv. 55, and
Anatoly F. Mazanko, Stavropolskaya ulitsa, 56, korpus 1, kv.
73, all of Moscow, U.S.S.R.
Filed May 3, 1982, Ser. No. 374.205
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., May 7, 1981. 3291365
Int. CI.' C25B 1/34
U.S. CI. 204—98 2 Claims
1. A process for producing a concentrated solution of so-
dium hydroxide and chlorine comprising an electrochemical
decomposition at a temperature within the range of from 90° to
108° C. of a concentrated solution of sodium chloride with a
concentration of from 4.3 to 5.3 mol/l with a degree of decom-
position of sodium chloride of 0.9-1.0 and at a rate of fiow of
the solution of sodium chloride through a filtering diaphragm
of from 3 to 5 ml/hr per I A of the electrolysis current and the
electrolysis products are withdrawn from the process.
1 . A method TOr the analysis of a layer of solution adjacent a
surface of an electrode, said solution being capable of undergo-
ing an electrochemical oxidation or reduction which alters its
absorbance of electromagnetic radiation of at least one wave-
length, said method comprising:
passing a beam of electromagnetic radiation at least part of
which is of said wavelength across and substantially paral-
lel to said surface;
measuring the radiation diffracted at an angle to said beam
by means of radiation measuring means lying outside said
beam;
altering the potential of said electrode, thereby causing at
least part of said solution to undergo said electrochemical
oxidation or reduction;
again passing said beam across and substantially parallel to
said surface; and
again measuring said radiation diffracted at an angle to said
beam by means of radiation measuring means lying outside
said beam.
4,395,315
RECOVERY OF NICKEL FROM WASTE MATERIALS
Adolfo R. Zambrano, Hibbing, Minn., assignor to The Hanna
Mining Company. Cleveland. Ohio
Continuation of Ser. No. 143,781, Apr. 25, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 44,558, Jun. 1, 1979,
abandoned. This application Nov. 18. 1981. Ser. No. 322,631
Int. a.' C25C 1/06
U.S. a. 204— 112 6 Qaims
1. A method for recovering nickel from a waste material
consisting essentially of nickel, small amounts of iron and
aluminum and organic impurities consisting essentially of the
steps of:
(a) removing the organic impurities from the waste material
by calcining said waste material at a temperature in the
range of about 400° C. to about 500° C;
(b) leaching the calcined material from step (a) with an acid
to provide an acid solution, in which the a»id concentra-
tion initially is in stoichiometric excess relative to nickel,
the leaching being continued in a single step until no
significant nickel concentration remains in the residue of
the waste material;
1494
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
(c) precipitating said iron and aluminum from the acid solu- 4,395,317
tion by adjusting the pH of said acid solution to about 2.5 WETTING TENSION TREATING APPARATUS AND
to 3 5; and METHOD
Darwin L. Whiteside, Rte. 2, Box 85 N., Royse City, Tex. 75089
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,403
Int. a.3 BOIK 7/00, HOIT 19/04
8 Gaims
J
WASTE MATERIAL \-
IT
10 A
U.S. a. 204-165
REMOVAL OF
ORGANIC IMPURITIES
Hi
SIZE REDUCTION
I
10 B
SPtNT
LEAPING [— , ^.eCTROLYTE
*'2
IRON ANO ALUMINUM
REMOVAL
TIT
IWECOVERY OF NICKElT*---''
ti4 y
I RESIDUE TO WASTE I
(d) recovering nickel from the acid solution by electrowin-
ning.
\
^*#
jj-vJ^-^^2^
.s^^^/^^^fe*
^/ / / /y ySi
v/r/\
v< / / /^ "^ / ^J
J«
»,
M
^*-*^b**' i^
' ^/
/
4,395,316
HYDROGEN PRODUCTION BY BIOMASS PRODUCT
DEPOLARIZED WATER ELECTROLYSIS
Michael R. St. John, Chicago, III., assignor to Institute of Gas
Technology, Chicago, III.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 234,692, Feb. 17, 1981, Pat, No.
4,341,608. This application Apr. 19, 1982, Ser. No. 369,534
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jul. 27,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.' C25B 1/04
U.S. a. 204— 129 52aaims
1. An apparatus for the treatment of thin sheeting by subject-
ing said sheeting to a corona discharge, said apparatus compris-
ing:
A first elongated electrode;
A second elongated electrode;
means supporting said first and second elongated electrodes
in a relationship defining a gap therebetween; and
means for passing said sheeting through said gap,
said first elongated electrode including an exterior surface
disposed near said second elongated electrode, said exte-
rior surface including a plurality of intersecting furrows
defining a plurality of mesa structures each having at least
one acute angle comer.
COj
PNOOUCT
*^^^
-3S
^
'e-
.<:-;
v.-
CLECTNOLYtf
TKCATMENT
4 RECrCfcE
H* e"
M*
*1
— »
^'
X.
• ftgya"
OXIOtZfO
ilOMASS
mooucr
4,395,318
PITTING CORROSION METER
William S. Tait, Racine, Wis.; Richard L. Martin, and Richard
A. Rodgers, both of St. Louis, Mo., assignors to Petrolite
Corporation, St. Louis, Mo.
Filed Jan. 15, 1982, Ser. No. 339,527
Int. a.^ GOIN 27/30, 27/46
U.S. a. 204—404 29 Qaims
1. A process for hydrogen production by biomass product
depolarized water electrolysis comprising: maintaining an
electrical potential across an anode comprising metal selected
from the group consisting of nickel and lead-rich ruthenium
polychlore compounds having a formula Pb2[Ru2.;(Pb;t]07->r
wherein x is greater than 0 and less than or equal to about 1.2
and y is greater than or equal to 0 and less than or equal to
about 1.0 in a metallic anode zone and a metallic cathode in a
cathode zone of an electrolytic cell; oxidizing, in an aqueous
electrolyte in said electrolytic cell anode zone, oxidizable
biomass product selected from the group consisting of mono-
saccharides, lignins and mixtures thereof with water producing
oxidized biomass product, hydrogen ions and electrons; trans-
porting said hydrogen ions through said electrolyte to said
cathode zone; forming molecular hydrogen in said cathode
zone.
1. A pitting corrosion meter comprising:
test electrode means for immersion in a corrodant fluid;
reference electrode means for immersion in said corrodant
fluid;
auxiliary electrode means for immersion in said corrodant
fluid;
cathodic circuit means for cathodically polarizing said test
electrode means with respect to said reference electrode
means thereby causing current flow in said auxiliary elec-
trode means;
first monitoring means for monitoring said current flow and
storing a peak value of said current flows;
computer circuit means for producing a cathodic polariza-
JULY 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1495
tion curve and its extrapolation containing said peak
value;
anodic circuit means for increasingly anodically polarizing
said test electrode means with respect to said reference
electrode means to a first predetermined value, and there-
after decreasingly anodically polarizing said test electrode
means with respect to said reference electrode means;
second monitoring means for monitoring the anodic current
and corresponding potentials of said test electrode means
with respect to said reference electrode means during said
decreasing anodic polarization of said test electrode
means, thereby generating a reverse anodic polarization
curve; and
comparator means for determining the point of intersection
between said reverse anodic curve and said cathodic
curve or its extrapolation.
(3) as viewed in said travel direction, whereby said smoothing
stations and said electroplating stations are arranged in alter-
nate sequence with each other for achieving a smooth-surfaced
compact electrolytic plating layer, said surface smoothing
means (411, 412, 413, 414) comprising at least four rotatable
rollers arranged along and adjacent to the wire in each smooth-
ing station, said rollers being spaced apart from one another
and so positioned that substantially the entire periphery of the
wire is contacted as it passes through each smoothing station,
each of said rollers having a circumferential groove with a
rounded groove bottom in its peripheral surface to abut on the
outer peripheral surface of the wire in a compressive manner
so that the surface of the wire is brought into compressing
contact with the rollers each of said rotatable rollers having a
rotational axis extending substantially perpendiculariy to the
travel direction of the wire.
4,395,319
LEAN SENSOR
Yoshio Torisu; Shigenori Sakurai; Takashi Kamo, and To-
shinobu Furutani, all of Toyoto, Japan, assignors to Toyota
Jidosha Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Aichi, Japan
Filed May 11, 1982, Ser. No. 377,017
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 11, 1981, 56-70440
Int. a.3 GOIN 27/58
U.S. a. 204— 426 11 Claims
1. A lean sensor comprising:
a sensor element consisting of a tubular solid electrolyte
having opposed sides provided with respective electrodes
and at least one electrode thereof coated with a porous
coating layer;
an element-fixing plate having a receiving hole to which said
sensor element is fitted; and
a pair of heat-resistant and insulating support plates having
opposing windows, said element-fixing plate to which said
element is fixed being clamped between said support
plates such that said sensor element is disposed in said
windows.
4,395,321
SEPARATOR ELECTROLYTIC CELL
Tokuzo lijima, Kobe; Yasushi Samejima, Kakogawa; Kazuo
Kishimoto, Takasago, and Kimihiko Kono, Kobe, all of Japan,
assignors to Kanegafuchi Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Osaka, Japan
Filed Jul. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 284,517
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 17, 1980, 55-98453
Int. a.3 C25B 9/00
U.S. a. 204—252 11 Claims
4,395,320
APPARATUS FOR PRODUCING ELECTRODEPOSITED
WIRES
Tatsiyi Kasashima, Toyanaka; Shuji Morita, Kobe; Hiroyuki
Hayami, Itami; Seiroku Ose, Higashiosaka; Yoshinori
Takada, Ami^asaki, and Fumihiro Nozaki, Nishinomiya, all
of Japan, assignors to Dainichi-Nippon Cables, Ltd., Amaga-
saki, Japan
FUed Feb. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 231,610
Claims priority, application Japan, Feb. 12, 1980, 55-16293
Int. C1.3C25D7 7/00
U.S. a. 204—206 5 Qaims
X
e
I
• ' \el
eJ
1. An apparatus for electroplating a wire to provide the wire
with an electrolytic plating layer, comprising: a plurality of
electroplating stations arranged in a row, each electroplating
station comprising an electrolytic bath (3) for coating the wire
with an electrolytic plating layer, drive means (5, 5') for pass-
ing the wire through the electrolytic baths (3) in a given travel
direction, and a plurality of smoothing stations (4) each com-
prising means (411, 412, 413, 414) for smoothing the surface of
the wire substantially over the entire periphery thereof, said
smoothing stations being arranged so that at least one smooth-
ing station is located downstream of each electroplating station
1. An electrolytic cell for the production of an aqueous alkali
metal hydroxide liquor by the electrolysis of an aqueous alkali
metal halide solution, wherein the cell is partitioned by a
glove-shaped finger comprising two finger-shaped supports
having fingers and extending parallel toward the inside of the
cell from the opposite inner peripheries of a releasable plate
secured to an inner wall of the cell by one releasable wall plate
and a separator positioned adjacent to the fingers, said glove-
shaped finger separating the cell into a first electrode compart-
ment including said wall plate and a second electrode compart-
ment including remainder walls of the cell, the first electrode
compartment comprising at least one anode or cathode in-
serted in the glove-shaped finger and mounted on the releas-
able wall plate, and the second electrode compartment com-
prising opposite polar electrodes arranged along the outer
surface of the separator of the glove-shaped finger.
4,395,322
CATALYTIC ELECTRODE
Lawrence A. Harris, Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General
Electric Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 322,482
Int. Q.^ C25B 11/00
U.S. Q. 204—290 F 12 Qaims
1. A catalytic electrode consisting essentially of a supporting
electrical conductor carrying an adherent catalytic metal in a
thickness of at least about 10 Angstroms and in at least a cata-
lytic amount on a predetermined surface thereof, said electrical
conductor being selected from the group consisting of silicon,
titanium, tantalum, and niobium, and said catalytic metal being
1496
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
selected Trom the group consisting of platinum, palladium,
nickel, rhodium, and iridium.
4,395,323
APPARATUS FOR IMPROVING A SPUTTERING
PROCESS
Richard A. Denton, Marlton, and Bawa Singh, Cherry Hill, both
of N.J., assignors to Denton Vacuum Inc., Cherry Hill, N.J.
Filed Apr. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 257,314
Int. CV C23C 15/00
U.S. CI. 204—298 6 Claims
ring aromatic compound under hydrogen transfer condi-
tions;
(e) separating hydrogenated heavy aromatic portion from
the reaction product of step (d); and
LIGHT LI0UI05
ICAVY D6TLUITE
1. In a sputtering device, the combination of: vacuum cham-
ber means adapted to be in a substantial state of vacuum; planar
cathode means disposed within said vacuum chamber means
and comprising a material to be deposited on a substrate; elec-
trical conducting means formed into a mesh like structure
whereby said mesh like structure forms a mesh anode means;
said mesh anode means disposed wihtin said vacuum chamber
means in close proximity to said cathode means; electrical
voltage generating means connected to both said cathode
means and mesh anode means to provide a sufficient voltage
difference therebetween to cause a gaseous glow discharge
between said cathode means and said anode means; and sub-
strate holding means characterized by being electrically float-
ing and located in said vacuum chamber means on the side of
said mesh anode means away from said cathode means and out
of the gaseous glow discharge between said cathode and an-
ode, whereby when said gaseous glow discharge is in effect,
particles of cathode material are dislodged therefrom and pass
through said mesh anode means to be deposited on said sub-
strate means and whereby a majority of the electrons resulting
from said gaseous glow discharge are intercepted by said mesh
anode means.
(0 recycling hydrogenated heavy aromatic portion from
separation step (e) to cracking step (a).
4,395,324
THERMAL CRACKING WITH HYDROGEN DONOR
DILUENT
Francis J. Derbyshire, Ewing; Philip Varghese, Trenton, and
Darrell D. Whitehurst, Titusville, all of N.J., assignors to
Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 317,036
Int. CI.' ClOG 47/34
U.S. CI. 208—56 13 Qaims
8. An improved hydrogen donor diluent cracking process
for hydro-treating heavy hydrocarbon charge stock compris-
ing the steps of
(a) contacting the hydrocarbon charge stock in the substan-
tial absence of cracking catalyst with a hydrogen donor
containing hydrogenated condensed ring aromatic com-
pounds under hydrogen pressure and thermal cracking
conditions at a temperature of about 650° F. to 900° P.;
(b) distilling the cracking product of step (a) to separate a
fraction boiling above about 600° P.;
(c) extracting from said fraction a heavy aromatic portion by
contacting said fraction with liquid hydrocarbon naphtha
containing about 10 percent to 50 percent by weight of
aromatic compounds, wherein said naphtha comprises a
mixture of hydrocarbon boiling between about 85° P. and
430° P.;
(d) reacting extracted heavy aromatic portion from step (c)
with at least one lower boiling hydrogenated condensed
4,395,325
REDUCING SULFUR TRIOXIDE CONCENTRATION IN
REGENERATION ZONE FLUE GAS
Stephen J. McGovern, Deptford; Peter J. Owens, West Dept-
ford, and Michael J. Dolan, Laurel Springs, all of N.J., assign-
ors to Mobil Oil Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 298,404
Int. CV ClOG 11/18; BOIJ 37/14
U.S. CI. 208—113 9 Claims
1. In a catalytic cracking process comprising:
contacting a hydrocarbonaceous feed with a cracking cata-
lyst to produce cracked hydrocarbon vapors and deacti-
vated catalyst containing carbonaceous deposits;
separating the deactivated catalyst from the hydrocarbon
vapors and conducting the deactivated catalyst to a regen-
eration vessel;
at least partially removing the carbonaceous deposits from
the deactivated catalyst in the regeneration vessel by
means of an oxygen-containing gas introduced into the
regeneration vessel, thereby forming a flue gas comprising
onygen, sulfur dioxide, sulfur trioxide, carbon monoxide
and carbon dioxide;
the improvement which comprises monitoring the sulfur
trioxide and the oxygen concentration in the flue gas from
the regeneration vessel; and
adjusting the amount of the oxygen-containing gas in the
regeneration vessel in relation to the concentration of the
sulfur trioxide to maintain the concentration by volume of
the sulfur trioxide in the flue gas such that the ratio SO3/-
SOjt in the flue gas is less than 5%, thereby preventing the
appearance of a visible condensation plume in the flue gas.
4,395,326
TREATMENT OF COAL TAR EMULSIONS
Samuel Cukier, 27 Newgate Rd., Toronto, Ontario, Canada
(M6B 3G5)
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 202,363, Oct. 29, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 342,210
Int. a.^ ClOG 33/04
U.S. a. 208—188 12 Qaims
1. A process for treating a stable emulsion of coal tar mate-
rial containing water and quinoline insolubles, comprising
mixing a surface active composition with said material, so as to
facilitate the segregation of at least a portion of at least one of
said water and said quinoline insolubles from said mixture,
July 26, 198^
CHEMICAL
1497
where said surface active composition is chosen from the class
of compounds having the general formula
CH3(CH2)xCH2(OCH2CH2)>OS03-M+ where the average
value of x is in the range 6.5 to 13, y is at least 1.5, and M +
represents one of sodium and ammonium ions.
4,395,327
IIYDROTREATING PROCESS
Bruce P. Pelrine, Lawrenceville, N.J., assignor to Mobil Oil
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FUed Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,953
Int. CI.' ClOG 45/12
U.S. CI. 208—216 R ^ Claims
1. A process for producing a lubricating oil of improved
properties which comprises hydrotreating a lubricating oil
base stock in the presence of a hydrotreating catalyst compris-
ing zeolite ZSM-39.
9c of 'V in pores of a diameter lower than 100 A; 0-10
9: of 'fin pores of a diameter from 100 to 600 A: 35-60
9c of ' 7 in pores of a diameter greater than 600 A; 35-55
9c of ^ J inporesof a diameter greater than 10.000 A: 10-25.
4,395,328
CATALYST AND SUPPORT, THEIR METHODS OF
PREPARATION, AND PROCESSES EMPLOYING SAME
Albert L. Hendey, Jr., Munster, Ind., and Leonard M. Quick,
Naperville, III., assignors to Standard Oil Company (In-
diana), Chicago, III.
Filed Jun. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,553
Int. CV ClOG 45/04. 45/08. 45/26: BOIJ 27/18
U.S. CI. 208—251 H 13 Qaims
1. A process for the conversion of a hydrocarbon stream,
which process comprises contacting said stream under suitable
conditions ar»d in the presence of hydrogen with a catalyst
comprising a hydrogenating component comprising at least
one hydrogenating metal and a large-pore, high-surface area
support comprising an alumina and one or more oxides of
phosphorus, said at least one hydrogenating metal being pres-
ent in the elemental form, as the oxide, as the sulfide, or mix-
tures thereof, said catalyst having been prepared by forming a
composite comprising alumina and one or more oxides of
phosphorus into a shaped catalyst support material having a
selected shape and at least 0.8 cc/gm of its pore volume in
pores having diameters of 0 nm (0 A) to 120 nm (1,200 A) and
at least 0.1 cc/gm of its pore volume in pores having diameters
of 120 nm (1,200 A) to 5,000 nm (50,000 A), heating said
shaped catalyst support material in the presence of steam at
sufficient elevated temperature, steam pressure, and time per-
iod to increase the average pore diameter of said shaped cata-
lyst support material in the absence of any appreciable reduc-
tion in pore volume so as to provide a steam-treated support
material having an average pore diameter of at least 18 nm (180
A) and a surface area below 200 m^/gm, and subsequently
impregnating said steam-treated support material with said at
least one hydrogenating metal.
1 1 4 395 329
CATALYST AND PROCESS FOR HYDROREFINING
HYDROCARBON CHARGES WITH HIGH CONTENTS
OF METALS, RESINS AND/OR ASPHALTENES
Jean-Francois Le Page, Rueil Malmaison; Alain Billon, Or-
lienas, and Yves Jacquin, Sevres, all of France, assignors to
Societe Francaise des Produits pour CaUlyse, Rueil-Malmai-
son, France
Filed Jul. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 279,637
Claims priority, application France, Jul. 2, 1980, 80 14787
Int. a.' ClOG 45/08. 45/60; BOIJ 21/10. 27/18
U.S. a. 208—251 H 26 Qaims
1. A process for hydrodemetallizing a hydrocarbon charge
of high metal content, comprising passing said charge, in the
presence of hydrogen, in contact with a catalyst comprising (a)
alumina, (b) at least one metal from group VI and (c) at least
one metal from the iron group; wherein said catalyst has all of
the following characteristics:
specific surface: 120 to 200 mVg
total pore volume ('^t): 0.8 to 1.2 cc/g
4,395,330
PROCESS FOR SOLVENT DEASPHALTING OF
RESIDUAL HYDROCARBON OILS
Pierre Auboir; Pierre Bonnefond, both of Rueil-Malmaison, and
Larry Mank, Orgeval, all of France, assignors to Institut
Francais du Petrole, Rueil-Malmaison, France
Filed Nov. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 325,254
Claims priority, application France, Nov. 28, 1980, 80 25405
Int. a.' ClOC 3/00. 3/08
U.S. CI. 208—309 8 Qaims
1. In a process for solvent deasphalting an asphaltene-con-
taining residual hydrocarbon oil, wherein the residual oil is
contacted with a light hydrocarbon solvent, in an extraction
zone, deasphalting conditions are maintained to allow the
formation of a liquid solvent-deasphalted oil phase and a fluid
solvent-asphalt phase, the two resultant phases are separated
and the solvent is separately vaporized from each of the two
phases, so as to separately obtain a deasphalted oil and an
asphaltic residue, the improvement comprising:
a. passing a portion of the deasphalted oil, substantially freed
of solvent, through a zone of indirect heating by flame, so
as to raise its temperature;
b. contacting the reheated deasphalted oil from step (a), in
indirect heat exchange relation, with the fluid solvent-
asphalt phase, so as to deliver to said phase at least a part
of the heat necessaary to vaporize the solvent therein; and
c. admixing the deasphalted oil, after the heat exchanger of
step (b), with the liquid solvent-deasphalted oil phase
recovered from the extraction zone.
4,395,331
APPARATUS FOR PRESSING LIQUID OUT OF
MATERIAL CONTAINING LIQUID
Harald Andersson, Saffle, Sweden, assignor to AB Saffle Gjuteri
and Mekaniska Verkstad, Saffle, Sweden
Continuation of Ser. No. 154,400, Jul. 9, 1979, abandoned. This
application Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,866
Int. Q.' BOID 33/04
U.S. Q. 210—329 12 Qaims
22' 21" «J '"j
--^Effi
1. Apparatus for pressing liquid out of liquid-containing
material, said apparatus comprising
(a) dewatering means for dewatering said material, said
dewatering means including at least one pair of converg-
ing, endless, vertically disposed filter members each in-
cluding
(i) a back and a front braking roller each roller havmg a
vertical axis, —
(ii) a perforated support base,
(iii) a filter supported on said support base,
(iv) drive means for driving said filter at a variable speed
around said braking rollers, and
(v) adjustment means for rendering at least one of said
filter members variably adjustable to vary the pressing
angle between that filter member and the other filter
member of the pair,
(b) a horizontally disposed screw feeder means for feedmg
1498
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
said material in an axial, horizontal direction towards said
dewatering means, and
(c) toothed worm wheel means for preventing material from
retreating into the thread of said screw feeder means as a
result of high flow resistance in the dewatering means by
maintaining at least one tooth of said toothed worm wheel
means in sealing engagement with said screw feeder
means in the thread thereof
a refractory cement Tilling said pores in said peripheral edge
region; and
4,395^32
ADSORPTION AND nLTRATION MAT FOR LIQUIDS
Max Klein, 257 Riveredge Rd., Tinton Falls, N.J. 07724, as-
signor to Max Klein and Frederick G. Crane, Jr., both of
Dalton, Mass.
Continuation of Ser. No. 66,085, Aug. 13, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 922,656, Jul. 7, 1978,
abandoned. This application Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,443
Int. aj BOID 39/08
U.S. a. 210—496 18 Qaims
1. A filter mat for removing particulate, colloidal or dis-
solved substances from a liquid containing same, said mat being
in the form of a non-woven matrix consisting essentially of
(i) from 10 to 95 weight percent of randomly arranged,
irregularly intersecting and overlapping cellulose fibers,
(ii) from 2 to 90 weight percent of polymer micro-bits pro-
duced from an expanded, thermoplastic polymer selected
from the group of (a) a styrene-polymer, (b) a lower poly-
olefin, which is the polymer of an ethylenically unsatu-
rated hydrocarbon monomer having from 2 to 6 carbon
atoms, (c) a melt alloy of polyethylene with up to about 10
percent by weight of polystyrene, (d) a copolymer of
propylene with from about 20 to about 30 percent by
weight of ethylene, (e) a melt alloy composed of at least 50
percent by weight of polypropylene and the balance
being a copolymer of ethylene with up to about 30 percent
of said copolymer being vinyl acetate, and (0 a flexible
foamed polyurethane, each said polymer being non-brittle
in expanded form, said polymer micro-bits being substan-
tially completely free of intact cells of the expanded poly-
mer from which they are produced; and at least one of the
following:
(iii) from about I to 10 weight percent of polyethylene
terephthalate fibers; or
(iv) an adsorbing agent selected from the group of:
(a") finely divided activated carbon in an amount of 70
weight percent or less;
(b") diatomaceous earth in an amount below that at which
undesirable dusting of diatomaceous earth from the mat
can occur; and
(c") colloidal alumina monohydrate in an amount suffi-
cient for removing from an aqueous medium a signifi-
cant portion of any chromic acid, dissolved dichro-
mates and chromic salts contained in said medium, or a
combination of two or more of said adsorbing agents.
4,395,333
PRE- WET AND REINFORCED MOLTEN METAL RLTER
Daniel E. Groteke, 1228 Ridge QifT Rd., Cincinnati, Ohio 45215
FUed Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,107
Int. a. J BOID 39/14. 37/02
U.S. a. 210—510 13 Claims
1. A filter element for insertion into a filtering vessel for
filtering molten metal the filter element having reduced start-
up time and reduced damage caused as a result of thermal
shock, the filter element, comprising:
a porous ceramic body with interconnected pores through-
out, said body having a central region bounded by a pe-
ripheral edge region;
a metal alloy filling the pores of said central region of said
porous ceramic body to thereby reduce start-up time and
damage to the filter element.
4,395,334
TREATMENT OF WASTE WATER IN
NON-EVAPORATING DEHYDRATION OF LOW GRADE
COAL
Yasuyuki Nakabayashi, Yokohama; Yoshio Matsuura, Funaba-
shi; Michio Kurihara, Mitaka; Takao Kamei, Ashiya; Akira
Nakamura, Akashi; Keiichi Komai, Akashi; Akira
Shimotamari, Akashi, and Takeshi Wakabayashi, Kobe, all of
Japan, assignors to Electric Power Development Co. Ltd. and
Kawasaki Jukogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, both of Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 362,605
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 31, 1981, 56-48951
Int. a.3 BOID 15/00; F26B 7/00
U.S. a. 210—631 10 Qaims
1. A method for dehydrating porous low grade coal com-
prising the steps of: classifying the coal into lumps and fine
particles, subjecting the lumps of coal to a non-evaporating
dehydration under steam and hot water to produce dehydrated
coal and waste water, bringing the waste water into contact
with the fine particles of coal so that such components in the
waste water that cause an increase in COD value of the waste
water are absorbed by the coal particles, then subjecting the
waste water to a solid-liquid separation to thereby remove fine
particles of coal contained in the waste water, and burning the
fine particles of coal to produce stream for carrying out the
non-evaporating dehydration, and recycling said steam to the
non-evaporating dehydration step.
4,395,335
REPRODUCTION METHOD OF HLTER .
DEMINERALIZER IN CONDENSATE CLEANUP
SYSTEM OF REACTOR
Tom Saito, Hitachi, Japan, assignor to Hitachi, Ltd., Tokyo,
Japan
Filed Feb. 28, 1979, Ser. No. 16,162
Qaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 8, 1978, 53-25403
Int. Q.3 BOID 15/04
U.S. Q. 210—675 3 Claims
1. A method of reproduction of a filter demineralizer in a
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1499
nuclear reactor condensation cleanup system, comprising the
steps of
backwashing the filter demineralizer to separate therefrom
ion-exchange resin precoated on the filter demineralizer
contaminated with crud;
removing the crud from the ion-exchange resin thereby to
reproduce the ion-exchange resin; and
precoating new ion-exchange resin to form a new ion-ex-
^-
change resin layer on the filter demineralizer and deposit-
ing at least a part of the reproduced ion-exchange resin on
the new ion-exchange resin layer to form a reproduced
ion-exchange resin layer so that a condensate to be treated
will flow from the reproduced ion-exchange resin layer to
the new ion-exchange resin layer on the filter demineral-
izer; the amount of the new ion-exchange resin precoated
being nearly equal to the reproduced ion-exchange resin
precoated by weight.
4,395,336 ->
MttnOD OF ABSORBING LIQUIDS
Kjell Eng, Mallsjo, Sweden, assignor to AB Eiser, Boras, Swe-
den
Division of Ser. No. 117,977, Feb. 4, 1980, abandoned. This
application Sep. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 414,316
Qaims priority, application Sweden, Feb. 16, 1979, 7901400
Int. Q.3 BOID 15/00
U.S. Q. 210—693 12 Qaims
1. The method of picking up petroleum spills comprising the
steps of placing a blanket made of an improved liquid-absorb-
ing textile product of a double-layer fabric comprising pile
threads of a hydrophobic and oleophilic synthetic material,
said pile threads interconnecting the two layers of said double-
layer fabric in contact with the spill for absorption of the
petroleum into said blanket and removing the blanket and
adsorbed petroleum.
(a) removing hydrocarbon contamination from the brackish
water by:
(i) causing a substantial proportion of said hydrocarbon
contamination to separate from the brackish water as a
substantially continuous phase,
(ii) separating the continuous phase from the hydrocarbon
contamination-depleted brackish water, and
(iii) oxidizing any residual hydrocarbon contamination in
the hydrocarbon contamination-depleted brackish wa-
ter; and
(b) subsequently removing mineral contamination from the
brackish water by subjecting hydrocarbon contamination-
free brackish water to reverse electrolysis to remove all
mineral contaminants therefrom except for silica and
removing silica from the electrodialyzed aqueous phase,
thereby to form decontaminated water suitable for boiling
to form steam.
4,395,338
METHOD AND SYSTEM FOR DEWATERING RESERVE
PITS
Billy L. Rowton, Rte. 3, Box 65, Marlow, Okla. 73055
Filed Apr. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 367,415
Int. Q.3 C02F 1/04: E21B 21/06
U.S. Q. 210—747 3 a«inis
4,395,337
TREATMENT OF BRACKISH WATER
Edmund J. Ciepiela, Willowdale, Canada, assignor to Francis
Hankin A Co. Limited, Scarborough, Canada
IPiled Jun. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 277,648
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Jul. 1, 1980,
8021481
Int. Q.3 C02F 1/46
U.S. Q. 210—703 8 Claims
1. A method of treating hydrocarbon- and mineral-con-
taminated brackish water from the steam extraction of a heavy
oil from a subterranean deposit thereof to render the same
susceptible of reuse in steam regeneration, which comprises:
1. A method of dewatering a reserve pit of the type used in
drilling oil and gas wells comprising:
pumping water and entrained solids from the pit to a holding
tank;
straining solid particles from the material pumped from the
pit before the material reaches the holding tank;
settling out solids from the liquid and solids pumped into the
holding tank;
pumping liquid from the holding tank to a boiler;
1500
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
boiling away liquid pumped into the boiler from the holding
tank;
returning to the reserve pit all solids separated from the
material pumped from the reserve pit; and then
filling the reserve pit with earth.
4,395,339
METHOD OF OPERATING PURE OXYGEN WET
OXIDATION SYSTEMS
Ajit K. Chowdhury, Schofield; Gerald L. Bauer, Rothschild, and
Richard W. Lehmann, Rib Mountain, all of Wis., assignors to
Sterling Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 364,536
Int. a? C02F 1/74. 11/08
U.S. a. 210—761 8 Qaims
1. A method for startup, operation and shutdown of a wet
oxidation apparatus which uses a flow of pure oxygen for
oxidizing combustible substances, said apparatus including a
reactor, valved means for introducing water and combustible
substance into said reactor, valved means for introducing a
flow of pure oxygen into said reactor, valved means for passing
gaseous and liquid combustion products from said reactor,
valved means for introducing a stream of purge water into
oxygen introducing means, valved means for introducing
cleaning solution into said oxygen introducing means, and
valved means for purging said reactor with an inert diluent gas,
said method comprising the steps of:
initiating a potential for oxidation in said reactor prior to
starting the flow of oxygen to said reactor, and maintain-
ing the potential for oxidation until the flow of oxygen is
stopped; starting a continuous purge of inert diluent gas
into said reactor prior to starting the flow of oxygen, and
continuing the addition or in situ generation of inert gas in
the reactor until after the flow of oxygen is stopped; and
cleaning the portion of the oxygen introducing means
within said reactor with a cleaning solution and subse-
quently introducing a stream of purge water into oxygen
introduction means prior to starting the flow of oxygen to
said reactor, and continuing the flow of said purge water
until after said flow of oxygen is stopped.
4,395,340
ENHANCED OIL RECOVERY METHODS AND SYSTEMS
Homer C. McLaughlin, Duncan, Okla., assignor to Halliburton
Company, Duncan, Okla.
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 282,989
Int. a? C09K 3/00
U.S. a. 252—8.55 D 10 Qaims
ranean oil-containing formation comprising injecting a viscous
aqueous solution containing one or more water-soluble organic
polymers into the formation by way of at least one injection
well penetrating the formation and forced through the forma-
tion towards at least one production well penetrating the for-
mation, and further comprising
combining water-soluble polymerizable vinyl monomers and
a water-soluble ionizing sulfite with an aqueous inorganic
salt solution at the site of said injection and production
wells whereby said monomers are rapidly polymerized to
form a concentrated high viscosity polymer solution, said
water-soluble polymerizable vinyl monomers being se-
lected from the group consisting of acrylamide monomers
alone, and acrylamide monomers and one or more other
vinyl monomers which are copolymerizable therewith;
diluting said concentrated high viscosity polymer solution
with additional aqueous fluid at the site of said injection
and production wells to form an injection solution having
a desired viscosity; and
injecting said injection solution into said formation.
4,395,341
USE OF METRONIDAZOLE IN OIL RECOVERY
Robert D. Muir, Glenview, III., assignor to G. D. Searle & Co.,
Skokie, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 814,969, Jul. 21, 1977, abandoned. This
application Sep. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 300,092
Int. aj E21B 43/22
U.S. a. 252—8.55 D 5 Qaims
1. In a process of oil recovery characterized by the steps of
injecting flooding water into oil-bearing subterranean forma-
tioils to displace portions of the residual oil therein the im-
provement comprising using flooding water containing an
effective antibacterial amount of metronidazole.
4,395,342
GRANULAR FABRIC SOFTENING COMPOSITION
Daniel L. Strauss, Mason, Ohio, assignor to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 156,995, Jun. 6, 1980,
abandoned. This application May 21, 1981, Ser. No. 265,757
Int. C\J D06M 13/46
U.S. a. 252—8.75 11 Qaims
1. A comelted, solid, granular fabric softening composition
comprising:
A. 60% to 85% of a first compound having the formula:
^'""fM.f
-K
X' K
1 ■» I
^ — — 1 h->-"
1
^
I SToQMae
1. A method of enhancing the recovery of oil from a subter-
R4— N— R2
I
R3 J
X-
wherein Ri and R2 are lower alkyl moieties, R3 and R4are
each higher alkyl or alkenyl moieties having from about
14 to about 22 carbon atoms, and X is an anion; and
B. 15% to 40% of a second compound having the formula:
_ +
R8-N-R6
I
R7 J
wherein R5, Re and R7 are each lower alkyl moieties, Rg
is an alkyl or alkenyl moiety having from about 10 to
about 14 carbon atoms, and Y is an anion;
wherein the softening effect of said solid, granular composition
is improved with, improved rinse water dispersibility.
July 26, 198: 1
CHEMICAL
1501
4,395,343
ANTIOXIDANT COMBINATIONS OF SULFUR
CONTAINING MOLYBDENUM COMPLEXES AND
ORGANIC SULFUR COMPOUNDS
Louis de Vries, Greenbrae, and John M. King, San Rafael, both
of Calif., assignors to Chevron Research Company, San Fran-
cisco, Calif.
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,915
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 18,
2000, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' ClOM 1/20, 1/32. 1/38. 1/54
U.S. a. 252—32.7 E 16 Claims
1. A lubricating oil additive comprising a combination of
(a) an oil soluble sulfur containing molybdenum complex
prepared by (1) reacting an acidic molybdenum com-
pound and a basic nitrogen compound selected from the
group consisting of a succinimide, carboxylic acid amide,
Mannich base, phosphoramide, thiophosphonamide, phos-
phonamide, dispersant viscosity index improvers, or mix-
tures thereof to form a molybdenum complex wherein
from 0.01 to 2 atoms of molybdenum are present per basic
nitrogen atom, and (2) reacting said complex with carbon
disulfide in an amount to provide 0.1 to 4 atoms of sulfur
per atom of molybdenum, and
(b) an oil soluble organic sulfur compound or mixtures
thereof wherein the organic sulfur compound of compo-
nent (b) is present in an amount of from 0.02 to 10 parts by
weight per part by weight of the sulfur containing molyb-
denum complex of component (a).
comprising from 5 to 60 percent by weight of the alkalimetal
tripolyphosphates, from 95 to 40 percent by weight of the
alkalimetal silicates, and from 0.05 to 5 percent by weight of a
hydrophobing substance, selected from the group consisting of
paraffins, silicones, insoluble fatty acid salts and zeolites.
4,395,346
METHOD FOR CLEANING CONTACT LENSES
Frederick D. Kleist, I^guna Hills, Calif., assignor to Allergan
Pharmaceuticals, Inc., Irvine, Calif.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 176,077, Aug. 7, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 3,294,
Jan. 15, 1979, abandoned. This application Nov. 18, 1981, Ser.
No. 322,616
Int.CI.'CllDi/06. 7/76
U.S. CI. 252—135 12 Claims
1. A method for the treatment of contact lenses to remove
inorganic deposits on the lenses comprising contacting a
contact lens having inorganic deposits with an aqueous solu-
tion containing an amount effective for removing inorganic
deposits of a sequestering agent selected from the group con-
sisting of hexametaphosphate. gluconic acid and salts thereof
for a period of time sufficient to remove inorganic deposits.
4,395,344
DRAIN OPENER COMPOSITION
Lodric L. Maddox, Oakland, Calif., assignor to The Clorox
Company, Oakland, Calif.
Continuation of Ser. No. 361,882, May 21, 1973, abandoned.
This application Jul. 29, 1976, Ser. No. 709,652
Int. CV CUD 7/54
U.S. CI. 252—99 17 Claims
1. A drain opener composition that provides improved mix-
ing with liquids trapped within a plugged drain, comprising a
strong caustic in an amount of greater than about 50% by
weight of the composition, aluminum metal in an effective
amount for producing hydrogen gas in the presence of said
caustic and for causing a mixing action, said effective amount
of aluminum metal comprising less than about 5% by weight of
the composition, a peroxy compound suitable for the process
of generating oxygen gas over an extended period of time in an
effective amount for generating oxygen gas to produce a
strong mixing action, said amount of said peroxy compound
comprising less than about 10% by weight of composition, a
heavy metal salt catalyst in an amount sufficient for promoting
the evolution of oxygen from said peroxy compound in the
presence of water and the strong caustic, a surfactant which is
stable in a highly caustic environment, and a water soluble
potassium salt other than said surfactant, said potassium salt
producing potassium ions in water solution, said ions upon
contact with saponified fats and greases in said drain producing
soft, highly soluble soaps which easily dissolve in drain water.
4,395,347
POWDERED CARPET CLEANER CONTAINING ETHER
ALCOHOL SOLVENTS
James H. McLaughlin, Vero Beach, Fla.; Stephen V. Dente,
Lodi, N.J.; Robert Carmello. Dumont, N.J., and James A.
Smith, Old Tappan, N.J., assignors to Airwick Industries,
Inc., Carlstadt, N.J.
Continuation of Ser. No. 100,175, Dec. 4, 1979, abandoned. This
application Apr. 28, 1981, Ser. No. 258,481
Int. CI.' CUD 3/02. 7/04
U.S. CI. 252—139 26 Claims
1. A powdered carpet cleaning composition comprising a
^lend of from about 40.0 to 98.5%, by weight, of a borax
carrier and a primary cleaning system comprising from about
1.0 to 10.0%, by weight, of an ether alcohol cleaning solvent
and from about 0.5 to 10.0%, by weight, of a surfactant, sub-
stantially all of the particles of said composition being between
0.06 to 0.44 millimeters, all percentages based on the total
composition weight.
4,395,348
PHOTORESIST STRIPPING COMPOSITION AND
METHOD
Wal M. Lee, Milpitas, Calif., assignor to EKC Technology, Inc.,
Hayward, Calif.
Filed Nov. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 323,724
Int. a.' CUD 7/26. 7/34
U.S. a. 252—143 10 Claims
1. A composition for the removal of an organic photoresist
from a substrate, which consists essentially of:
an organic sulfonic acid and
1,2 dihydroxybenzene in sufficient amounts to remove the
photoresist from the substrate.
4,395,345
FREE-FLOWING PHOSPHATE/SILICATE
COGRANULATES CONTAINING HYDROPHOBING
SUBSTANCE(S)
Kurt Walz, Glinde; Peter Dittmann, Oflersheim, and Hartmut
Hbhne, Pfungstadt, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Lever Brothers Company, New York, N.Y.
I Filed Oct. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 309,757
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 10,
1980, 3038413
Int. Q.5 CUD 3/04. 3/08
U.S. Q. 252—135 ♦ Cl«'ms
1. Cogranulates of alkalimetal tripolyphosphates and alkali-
metal silicates with improved dispensability, said cogranulates
4,395,349
VULCANIZATION ACCELERATOR FOR
CHLOROPRENE RUBBER
Kojl Kinoshita, Takarazuka, Japan, assignor to Osaka Yuki
Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,549
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 11, 1980, 55/77880;
Jan. 27, 1981, 56/9582
Int. Q.' C09K 3/00; C08K 9/J2; C07C 149/22
U.S. Q. 252—182 10 Qaims
1. A vulcanization accelerator composition for chloroprene
rubber comprising an inorganic powder impregnated with a
thioglycolic acid ester.
1502
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395.350
LIQUID CRYSTAL MIXTURES
Arthur Boiler, Binningen; Alfred Germann, Basel; Martin
Schadt, Seltisberg, and Alois Villiger, Basel, all of Switzer-
land, assignors to Hoffmann-La Roche Inc., Nutley, N.J.
Filed Jul. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 279,493
Qaims priority, application Switzerland, Jul. 10, 1980,
5299/80; May 7, 1981, 2966/81
Int. a.3 C09K 3/34: G02F 1/13
U.S. a. 252—299.1 20 Qaims
1. A coloring substance-containing liquid crystal mixture
which comprises about 5 to about 40 weight % of one or more
trans-p-[5-(4-alkylcyclohexyl)-2-pyrimidinyl]benzonitriles of
the formula
R'
<x:v^
CN
wherein R' is a straight-chain alkyl group containing 2 to 7
carbon atoms,
about 10 to about 60 weight % of one or more trans-4-alkylcy-
clohexane carboxylic acid phenyl ester of the formula
II
R2-/ Vcoo-/ \-r3
wherein R2 is a straight-chain alkyl group containing 2 to 6
carbon atoms and R^ is cyano or a straight-chain alkoxy group
containing I to 6 carbons atoms,
and about 0. 1 to about 1 5 weight % of one or more coloring
substances of the formula
N=N
XII
/m
wherein m is the integer 1 and X is alkoxy and Y is nitro, or m
is the integer 1 or 2, and X is p-alkoxyphenyl and Y is nitro or
dialkylamino, or X is alkoxy and Y is p-nitrophenyl or p-(dialk-
ylamino)phenyI; or m is the integer 2, and X is alkoxy and Y is
alkoxy, nitro or dialkylamino, or both X and Y are dialkyl-
amino groups; and wherein the alkoxy denotes a straight-chain
alkoxy group containing 1 to 12 carbon atoms and the alkyl
groups in the dialkylamino each denote a straight-chain alkyl
group containing 1 to 4 carbon atoms.
4,395,351
POLYETHER-BASED THICKENERS WITH ADDITIVES
FOR INCREASED EFFiaENCY IN AQUEOUS SYSTEMS
Ronald L. Camp, 14029 Cranbrook, Riverriew, Mich. 48192
Continuation of Ser. No. 86,836, Oct. 22, 1979, Pat. No.
4,310,436. This application Apr. 8, 1981, Ser. No. 252,165
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Jan. 12,
1999, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ BOIJ 13/00
U.S. a. 252—315.1 20 Qaims
10. The process of thickening an aqueous system comprising
the addition of an effective thickening amount of a polyether-
based thickening agent to said aqueous system, said polyether-
based thickening agent comprising in admixture:
A. a polyether having a molecular weight of about 1000 to
about 25,000, which is selected from the group consisting
of
(1) f)olyethers prepared by reacting a mixture of ethylene
oxide and at least one lower alkylene oxide having 3 to
4 carbon atoms with at least one active hydrogen-con-
taining aliphatic or alkylaromatic compound containing
no more than one active hydrogen and about 12 to
about 18 carbon atoms and at least one glycidyl ether
having a carbon chain length of about 12 to about 18
aliphatic carbon atoms and wherein said glycidyl ether
is present in the amount of about 1 to about 20 percent
by weight based upon the total weight of said polyether,
(2) polyethers prepared by reacting ethylene oxide and at
least one lower alkylene oxide having 3 to 4 carbon
atoms with at least one active hydrogen compound
containing no more than one active hydrogen and about
12 to about 18 aliphatic carbon atoms to prepare a
heteric or block copolymer and further reacting said
copolymer with at least one glycidyl ether having a
carbon chain length of about 12 to about 18 aliphatic
carbon atoms and wherein said glycidyl ether is present
in the amount of about 1 to about 20 percent by weight
based on the total weight of said thickener, and
(3) polyethers prepared by reacting (a) ethylene oxide and
at least one glycidyl ether with at least one active hy-
drogen compound containing no more than one active
hydrogen to prepare a heteric copolymer or (b) ethyl-
ene oxide with at least one active hydrogen compound
containing no more than one active hydrogen to pre-
pare a homopolymer and further reacting said homo-
polymer with at least one glycidyl ether, said glycidyl
ether having a carbon chain length of about 12 to about
18 aliphatic carbon atoms and wherein said glycidyl
ether is present in the amount of about 1 to about 20
percent by weight based on the total weight of said
thickener,
and about 10 to about 35 percent by weight based upon the
total weight of said polyether-based thickener of:
B. a mixture of a water-soluble amine and an ethoxylated
phosphate ester, or an ethoxylated phosphate ester,
wherein said phosphate ester is selected from the group con-
sisting of
RO— (EO)„— P— OX and RO— (EO)„— P— (EO)„— OR
OX OX
and mixtures thereof, wherein EG is ethylene oxide; R is se-
lected from the group consisting of linear or branched chain
alkyl groups having about 6 to about 30 carbon atoms, and aryl
or alkylaryl groups wherein said arylalkyl groups have about 6
to about 30 carbon atoms; X is selected from the group consist-
ing of the residue of hydrogen, ammonia, an amine, an alkali or
alkaline earih metal and mixtures thereof; and n is a number
from 1 to 50.
4,395,352
HIGH EFnOENCY ANTIFOAM COMPOSITIONS AND
PROCESS FOR REDUaNG FOAMING
Ravindra D. Kulkami, Pomona; Bernard Kanner, West Nyack,
both of N.Y., and Errol D. Goddard, Haworth, N.J., assignors
to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 920,459, Jun. 29, 1978,
abandoned. This application Jan. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 112,138
Int. Q.^ BOID 19/04; C09K 3/00
U.S. Q. 252—321 12 Qaims
1. An antifoam composition which comprises a polydimeth-
ylsiloxane oil, 1-20 parts by weight per 100 parts by weight of
the oil of a finely divided hydrophobic silica having a surface
area of at least 50 square meters per gram, and 1-20 parts by
weight per 100 parts by weight of the oil and solid together of
JULY 26, 1982
CHEMICAL
1503
a siloxane-oxyalkylene block copolymer surfactant having a
hydrophilic-lipophilic balance in the range of 4 to 14 wherein
the improvement comprises the polydimethylsiloxane oil hav-
ing a viscosity in the range of 5,000 to 30,000 centistokes at 25°
C.
10. A process for reducing foaming in aqueous liquids hav-
ing a tendency to foam which comprises forming a mixture of
said liquid and a composition as defmed in claim 1.
milligram of Specific Emulsification Activity is defined as that
amount of emulsifying activity per milligram of bioemulsifier
1 1 4,395,353
POLY ANIONIC HETEROPOLYSACCHARIDE
BIOPOLYMERS
David L. Gutnick, Ramat Aviv; Eugene Rosenberg, Raanana;
Igal Belsky, Ramat Aviv, and Zinaida Zosim, KefarSava, all
of Israel, assignors to Petroleum Fermentations N.V., Antil-
les, Netherlands
Division of Ser. No. 12,971, Feb. 22, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 146,056
Int. CV BOIF 17/30. 17/34, 17/52
U.S. Q. 252—356 10 Qaims
HOURS
which yields 100 Klett absorption units using a standard hydro-
carbon mixture consisting of 0.1 ml of 1:1 (v/v) hexadecane/2-
methylnaphthalene and 7.5 ml of Tris-Mg buffer.
I . 900
>/V^8 ^^
UNITS ptr ml
1. Polyaniinic heteropolysaccharide biopolymers in which
(a) substantially all of the sugar moieties are N-acylated amino-
sugars, a portion of which is N-acylated-D-galactosamine and
another portioa of which is N-acylated aminouronic acid, a
part of the N-acyl groups of such heteropolysaccharide being
N-3-hydroxydodecanoyl groups; and (b) at least 0.2 micro-
moles per milligram of such heteropolysaccharide consisting
of fatty acid esters in which (1) the fatty acids contain about 10
to about 18 carbon atoms and (2) about 50 percent by weight or
higher of such fatty acids are composed of 2-hydrox-
ydodecanoic acid and 3-hydroxydodecanoic acid.
4,395,354
EMULSANS
David L. Gutnick, Ramat Aviv; Eugene Rosenberg, Raanana;
Igal Belsky, Ramat Aviv, and Zinaida Zosim, KefarSava, all
of Israel, assignors to Petroleum Fermentations N.V., Antil-
les, Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 12,971, Feb. 22, 1979, abandoned. This
application Jul. 17, 1980, Ser. No. 166,981
Int. Q.^ BOIF 17/30, 17/34, 17/52
U.S. Q. 252—356 28 Qaims
1. Extracellular microbial protein-associated lipopolysac-
charides (herein collectively called "a-emulsans") produced
by Acinetobacter Sp. ATCC 31012 and its mutants, in which
the lipopolysaccharide components (herein collectively called
"apo-a-emulsans") are completely N-acylated and partially
O-acylated heteropolysaccharides made up of major amounts
of D-galactosamine and an aminouronic acid, such apo-a-
emulsans containing at least 5 percent by weight of fatty acid
esters (1) in which the fatty acids contain from about 10 to
about 18 carbon atoms; and (2) about 50 percent by weight or
more of such fatty acids are composed of 2-hydrox-
ydodecanoic acid and 3-hydroxydodecanoic acid, the a-emul-
sans being characterized by a Specific Emulsification Activity
of about 200 units per milligram or higher, where one unit per
4,395,355
PROCESS AND APPARATUS FOR TREATING A
PRESSURIZED FEED STREAM CAPABLE OF
UNDERGOING AN ENDOTHERMIC REACTION
Manfred Lembeck, Buch; Patrick W. Kinsella, Wolfratshausen,
and Allan M. Watson, Ottobrunn, all of Fed. Rep. of Ger-
many, assignors to Linde Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed May 15, 1981, Ser. No. 264,000
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 20,
1980, 3023170
Int. Q.^ COIB 3/32. 3/48
U.S. Q. 252—373 1 Claim
1. A process for reforming a pressurized hydrocarbon feed
stream comprising dividing said hydrocarbon feed stream into
a first hydrocarbon feed stream and a second hydrocarbon feed
stream, heating said first hydrocarbon feed stream in a reform-
ing reaction zone so as to cause said reforming reaction to
occur and to produce a reforming reaction product, expanding
said second hydrocarbon feed stream so as to produce an
expanded second hydrocarbon feed stream of reduced pressure
and temperature, indirectly contacting said expanded second
hydrocarbon feed stream with said reforming reaction product
so as to reduce the temperature of said reforming reaction
product and increase the temperature of said expanded second
hydrocarbon feed stream, and utilizing said expanded second
hydrocarbon feed stream having an increased temperature as a
fuel for supplying heat to said first hydrocarbon feed stream in
said reforming reaction zone.
4,395,356
METHOD FOR REMOVING CATALYST RESIDUES
FROM SOLUTIONS OF POLY-1-BUTENE
Lynn H. Slaugh, and Carl L. Willis, both of Houston, Tex.,
assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
Continuation of Ser. No. 210,907, Nov. 28, 1980, abandoned.
This application Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,492
Int. Q.' BOID 15/06: BOIJ 37/00
U.S. Q. 252—413 6 Claims
1. A process for removing catalyst residues from poly-1-
butene which comprises conucting an organic phase conuin-
ing poly-1-butene dissolved in an inert hydrocarbon solvent
with an aqueous phase containing an alpha-hydroxysulfonic
acid prepared by reacting a carbonyl compound of the general
formula R1R2CO wherein Ri and R2 are individually hydro-
gen or hydrocarbyl of up to about 7 carbon atoms with sulfur
dioxide and water and subsequently separating the poly-1-
butene-containing organic phase from the aqueous phase.
1504
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
435,357
CALOUM SILICATE GRANULES FORMING A
MICROPOROUS STRUCTURE
Walter Kramer, Soltau-Friedrichseck, and Rainer Follmann,
Minden, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Mars
Inc., McLean, Va. .
Continuation of Ser. No. 114,140, Jan. 21, 1980, abandoned. This
application Jun. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 273,224
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 19,
1979, 2902108
Int. a.J BOIJ 20/22, 20/10: AOIK 1/015; COIB 33/24
U.S. a. 252—428 9 Qaims
12 3 6
VVVTV
C3 .^-
y 2 3
(
^ ' -
\
17
r
nTX."
16^
1
'
-
J
\y
• 1. Calcium silicate granules with a fatty amine addition
produced by a process comprising the steps of:
(a) dispersing crystalline and optionally amorphous silicon
dioxide or a material containing the same, calcium oxide
or a material containing the same, and fatty amine in
water, and mixing with a microporous stable foam pro-
duced from an anionic surface active substance and water,
wherein the molar ratio of calcium oxide to silicon dioxide
is 0.8:1 to 1.1:1,
(b) shaping the foam mixture prepared in step (a),
(c) autoclave hardening,
(d) comminuting,
(e) drying, and
(0 grading and recovering particle sizes.
3. Calcium silicate granules having a polyamide wax addi-
tion, produced by a process comprising the steps of:
(a) dispersing crystalline and optionally amorphous silicon
dioxide, or a material containing the same, and calcium
oxide, or a material containing the same, the molar ratio of
calcium oxide to silicon dioxide being 0.1:1 to 1.1:1 and a
polyamide wax, and mixing with a microporous, stable
foam produced in water by means of an anionic, surface-
active substance, accompanied by the formation of a foam,
(b) shaping the foam mixture prepared in step (a),
(c) autoclave hardening,
(d) comminuting,
(e) drying, and
(0 grading into particles.
7. Calcium silicate granules having a fatty amine salt addi-
tion, produced by the steps comprising:
(a) dispersing crystalline and optionally amorphous silicon
dioxide, or a material containing the same, and calcium
oxide, or a material containing the same, the molar ratio of
calcium oxide to silicon dioxide being 0.8:1 to 1.1:1, and
fatty amine salt, mixing in a microporous, stable foam
produced in water by means of an anionic, surface-active
substance, accompanied by the formation of a foam com-
prising calcium silicate,
(b) shaping the foam mixture prepared in step (a), .
(c) autoclave hardening,
(d) comminuting,
(e) drying, and
(0 grading into particles.
8. Calcium silicate granules having a saponification-resistant
alkoxy silane addition, produced by the steps comprising:
(a) dispersing crystalline and optionally amorphous silicon
dioxide or a material containing the same, and calcium
oxide, or a material containing the same, the molar ratio of
calcium oxide to silicon dioxide being 0.8:1 to 1.1. :1 and
mixing with a microporous, stable foam produced in water J
by means of an anionic, surface-active substance, accom-
panied by the formation of a foam,
(b) shaping the foam mixture prepared in step (a),
(c) autoclave hardening,
(d) drying, .
(e) adding saponification-resistant alkoxy silane selected
from the group consisting of alkyl alkoxy silanes, whose
branched or straight chain alkyl radicals has 1 to 6 carbon
atoms and whose branched or straight chain alkoxy radi-
cals have 1 to 3 carbon atoms and phenyl alkoxy silanes,
whose alkoxy radical has 1 to 3 carbon atoms or mixtures
thereof,
(0 classifying.
4,395,358
TITANIUM TRICHLORIDE CATALYST COMPLEX AND
PROCESS FOR THE PRODUCTION THEREOF
Harry J. Wristers, Baytown, Tex., assignor to Exxon Research
& Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
Division of Ser. No. 11,340, Feb. 12, 1979, Pat. No. 4,262,104,
which is a division of Ser. No. 811,507, Jun. 30, 1977, Pat. No.
4,151,112. This application Nov. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 208,212
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Apr. 24,
1996, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.^ C08F 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 10 Qaims
1. An improved catalyst composition adaptable for use in a
stereopolymerization of alpha-olefms comprising:
(a) an organometal compound co-catalyst, in contact with;
(b) a titanium trichloride composition catalyst, said titanium
trichloride catalyst being produced by a process compris-
ing:
(i) in a reduction step, contacting titanium tetrachloride
with an organo metal compound of the formula
R„A1X3.„, wherein R is a group having 1 to 18 carbon
atoms selected from alkyl or aryl, X is a halogen and n
is a numeral within the range of 1 = n = 3 at about — 50°
C. to about 100° C. in^an inert diluent to obtain a re-
duced solids product;
(ii) in an activation step, contacting the reduced solids of
(a) with a chlorinated hydrocarbon and a titanium tetra-
chloride in the presence of a Lewis base complexing
agent, said chlorinated hydrocarbon, titanium tetra-
chloride and Lewis base complexing agent, respec-
tively, being present in amounts of about 0.1 to about 10
mols chlorinated hydrocarbon, about 0.1 to about 2.0
mols titanium tetrachloride and about 0. 1 to about 2.0
mols Lewis base complexing agent per one mol of tita-
nium trichloride in such reduced solids of (a), and said
titanium tetrachloride being in a concentration of about
2 to about 1 5 volume percent at an elevated temperature
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1505
within the range of from about 50° C. to about 1 50° C.
for about 5 minutes to about 10 hours until a crystal
conversion of the reduced solids product of (a) is ob-
tained; and
(iii) in a recovery step, recovering the resulting activated
reduced solids product as said titanium trichloride cata-
lyst complex in high yield.
as to avoid the need for drying the fully active catalyst to
remove the solvent therefrom.
4,395,359
POLYMERIZATION CATALYST, PROCESS FOR
PREPARING, AND USE FOR ETHYLENE
HOMOPOLYMERIZATION
Burkhard E. Wagner, Highland Park; Frederick J. Karol;
George L. Goeke, both of Belle Mead, all of N.J.; Robert J.
Jorgensen, Dunbar, W. Va., and Nils Friis, Macungia, Pa.,
assignors to Union Carbide Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Division of Ser. No. 14,412, Feb. 27, 1979, which is a
continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 892,037, Mar. 31, 1978,
abandoned. This application Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,447
Int. C1.3 C08F 4/64
U.S. CI. 252—429 B 7 Claims
1. A process for preparing a catalyst composition which
comprises
(A) forming, a precursor composition of the formula
Mg;„Tii(OR)„X^[ED],
wherein
R is Ci to Ci4 aliphatic or aromatic hydrocarbon radical,
or COR' wherein R' is a Ci to Cu aliphatic or aromatic
hydrocarbon radical,
X is selected from the group consisting of CI, Br, I, or
mixtures thereof,
ED is an electron donor compound,
m is ^0.5 to ^56
n is 0 or 1
pis =6 to i 1 16 and
qis =2 to §85 and
by dissolving at least one magnesium compound and at
least one titanium compound in at least one electron
donor compound so as to thereby form a solution of said
precursor composition in said electron donor com-
pound, and recovering said precursor composition from
said solution,
said magnesium compound having the structure MgX2,
said titanium compound having the structure Ti(OR)aXft
wherein a is 0 or 1, b is 2 to 4 inclusive and a + b = 3 or 4
said electron donor compound being a liquid organic
compound in which said magnesium compound and
said titanium compound are soluble and which is se-
lected from the group consisting of alkyl esters of ali-
phatic and aromatic carboxylic acids, aliphatic ethers,
cyclic ethers and aliphatic ketones,
and said magnesium compound, said titanium compound
and said electron donor compound being employed in
such amounts as to satisfy the values of m, n, p and q,
(B) diluting said precursor composition with about 1 to 10
parts by weight, per part by weight of said precursor
composition, of at least one inert carrier material,
(C) partially activating the precursor composition outside
the polymerization zone in a hydrocarbon slurry with >0
to < 10 mols of activator compound per mol of titanium in
said precursor composition, said activator compound
having the structure
Al(R")cXVHf
wherein X' is CI or OR ', R " and R " are the same or
different and are Ci to Cu saturated hydrocarbon radicals,
d is 0 to 1.5, e is 1 or 0 and c + d+e=3, and
(D) completely activating the precursor composition in a
fluid bed polymerization zone with ^ 10 to about 400 mols
of said activator compound in the absence of a solvent so
4,395,360
CATALYST COMPONENTS AND CATALYSTS FOR THE
POLYMERIZATION OF ALPHA-OLERNS
Enrico Albizatti, Arona; Enzo Giannetti, Norvara, and Um-
berto Scata, Ferrara, all of Italy, assignors to Montedison
S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,235
Oaims priority, application Italy, Apr. 22, 1980, 21535 A/80
Int. CI.' C08F 4/64
U.S. a. 252—429 B 6 Qaims
1. Components of catalysts for polymerizing olefins compris-
ing the solid product of the reaction of:
(a) a halogenated Ti compound containing at least a Ti-halogen
bond, and
(b) an electron-donor compound not containing active hydro-
gen atoms (ED) reacted as such or as a complex with prod-
uct (c), said complex being obtained without cogrinding, and
employing in such amount, that from 0.2 to 4 moles of com-
pound (ED) per gram atom of Ti of component (a) are
present in the catalytic component with
(c) the solid product, prepared without cogrinding, of the
reaction between at least an electron-donor compound con-
taining active hydrogen atoms (HED), selected from ali-
phatic, cycloaliphatic and aromatic alcohols and thioalco-
hols having 1 to 20 C, phenols and thiophenols having 6 to
20 C and the silanols having 1 to 20 C, and a Mg dihalide, or
complexes thereof with an (ED) compound, said Mg dihal-
ide being obtamed by decomposition, with halogenating
agents other than the Ti compounds of (a), of reaction prod-
uct (d) of an organometallic Mg compound of general for-
mula RmMgXn, in which R is an alkyl, aryl. cycloalkyl or
alkenyl radical having 1 to 20 C. or a group OR, and X is a
halogen, R, OR inr which R has the meaning as specified or
COX' in which X' is a halogen, m is 0<m^2, n is 0<n<2
and M + n = 2; with a silicium compound selected from poly-
siloxanes, hydropolysiloxanes, silanols and polysilanols,
product (c) being reacted as such without any intermediate
pretreatment with an Al-alkyl compound.
4,395,361
CATALYSTS FOR OXYGEN-INITIATED FREE-RADICAL
POLYMERIZATION REACnONS
David J. Eickhoff, Crescent Park, Ky., and Medford D. Rob-
bins, Whitewater Township, Franklin County, Ind., assignors
to The Procter & Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,908
Int. a.^ C08L 67/06, 67/00: C08F 4/32: BOIJ 31/12
U.S. a. 252—431 C 12 Qaims
1. A stabilized oxidation catalyst comprising a mixture of (a)
a storage stabilizer having the formula
4>
N N
H
CH— <|>
N^ N
<J>
and (b) an oxidation catalyst consisting essentially of: (I) an
autoxidizable component having the formula
1506
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
(CH2)„
:>V°
o -V-R3
CHO
^
R3 R3
4,395,362
ELECTROCONDUCriVE RESIN COMPOSITE
MATERIAL FOR MOLDING
Hiroaki Satoh, Tokyo, and Masaru HiruU, Iwaki, both of Ja-
pan, assignors to Kureha Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Aug. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 296,523
Int. a.J HOIB 1/06
U.S. a. 252—511 7 Qalms
_ 60O
"6
t
9
a
I
400
— 2
I 300
R3^ ^R3
R.-J o R3^^^
o — ^R3
^R3
o '
R3 R3
and mixtures thereof, wherein each R3 is hydrogen, methyl,
phenyl or COOH; R4 is C1-C20 alkyl or alkenyl; and n is from
about 1 to 10; and (2) a peroxide-decomposing transition metal
catalyst.
8. An oxidation catalyst for oxygen-initiated free-radical
polymerization reactions consisting essentially of: (1) an autox-
idizable component having the formula
0 10 20 30 -W 50
par 100 para by ««n»>t <* poiyi«»yW»
1. A resin composite material consisting essentially of 100
parts by weight of polypropylene, from 10 to 50 parts by
weight of a modified polypropylene, said modified polypropyl-
ene being polypropylene chemically modified with an organic
unsaturated carboxylic acid of 3 to 10 carbon atoms or a co-
polymer of propylene and an organic unsaturated carboxylic
acid of 3 to 10 carbon atoms, said modified polypropylene
containing 0.5 to 8.0 mol% of said organic unsaturated carbox-
ylic acid as carboxylic acid units, from 5 to 65 parts by weight
of carbon fiber having a diameter of from 5 to 20 micrometers
and a ratio of length to diameter of not less than 10 and from
5 to 65 parts by weight of electroconductive carbon black
having a specific surface area of not less than 800 m^/g.
R3^ ^R3
(CH2)„ O -\-R3
R3
o R3
R3 R3
R3^ ^R3
I R3 R3. /
4,395,363
ALPHA-SULFOXIDE AND ALPHA-SULFONE
CARBOXYL COMPOUNDS
Robert J. Crawford, Wyoming, Ohio, assignor to The Procter &
Gamble Company, Cincinnati, Ohio
Division of Ser. No. 180,213, Aug. 21, 1980, Pat. No. 4,317,779.
This application Dec. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 326,316
Int. a? CUD 1/52, 1/755. 1/83. 1/94
U.S. a. 252—526 14 Qaims
1. A detergent composition comprising:
(a) from about 0.005% to about 99% by weight of an alpha-
substituted compound having the formula:
O R^
R^CHC— N— R<
R^S— ^O
R3 R3
and mixtures thereof, wherein each R3 is hydrogen, methyl, or
COOH; R4 is C1-C20 alkyl; and n is from about 1 to 10; and (2)
a peroxide-decomposing transition metal catalyst.
9. An oxidation catalyst according to claim 8 wherein the
transition metal catalyst is a cobalt(II) compound.
wherein R^ is a C6-C18 hydrocarbyl group; R' is a C1-C4
hydrocarbyl group; each R* is hydrogen, a C1-C4 hydro-
carbyl group, or a C2-C3 alkylene oxide group, or mix-
tures thereof, containing from about 1 to about 10 alkylene
oxide units; and
(b) from about 1% to about 50% by weight of an organic
surfactant selected from the group consisting of anionic,
cationic, nonionic, ampholytic, and zwitterionic surfac-
tants, and mixtures thereof
9. A detergent composition comprising:
(a) from about 0.005% to about 99% by weight of an alpha-
substituted compound having the formula:
^
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1507
O R*
R^CHC— N— R*
wherein R^ is a C6-C18 hydrocarbyl group; R-^ is a C1-C4
hydrocarbyl group; each R** is hydrogen, a C1-C4 hydro-
carbyl group, or a C2-C3 alkylene oxide group, or mix-
tures thereof, containing from about 1 to about 10 alkylene
oxide units; and
(b) from about 1% to about 95% of a detergent builder
material.
in random order, and the other symbols have the same mean-
ings as defined above,
compounds having the formula
RiO(BuO)miS03M
(6)
wherein the symbols have the same meanings as defined above,
and compounds having the formula
RlCKPrO.EtO.BuOmiSOjM
(7)
4,395,364
DETERGENT COMPOSITION CONTAINING
SULFONATE SURFACTANT AND POLYOXYALKYLENE
ALKYL OR ALKENYL SULFURIC ACID ESTER SALT
Moriyasu Murata, Chiba, and Kenji Okahashi, Funabashi, both
of Japan, assignors to Kao Soap Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser, No. 205,220, Nov. 10, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 368,483
Claims priority, application Japan, Nov. 16, 1979, 54-148462
Int. CI.5 CUD 1/37. 3/065
U.S. CI. 252—526 9 Oaims
1. A powder detergent composition, consisting essentially of
(A) from 8 to 30% by weight of anionic surface active agent
selected from the group consisting of linear or branched, alkyl
benzene-sulfonic acid salts in which the alkyl group has an
average carbon atom number of from 10 to 16, olefin-sulfonic
acid salts having an average carbon atom number of from 10 to
20 and alkane-sulfonic acid salts having an average carbon
atom number of from 10 to 20, wherein the counter ion of said
salts is selected from the group consisting of sodium, potas-
sium, ammonium or alkanolamine having 1 to 3 alkanol groups
having 2 or 3 carbon atoms, (B) from 1.5 to 15% by weight of
polyoxyalkylene alkyl or alkenyl sulfuric acid ester salt se-
lected from the group consisting of compounds having the
formula
wherein the symbols have the same meanings as defined above,
(C) 1 to 20% by weight of detergent builder suitable for use in
powder clothes washing detergent compositions, and (D) from
1 to 50% by weight of at least one alkali metal salt selected
from the group consisting of alkali metal silicates, alkali metal
carbonates and alkali metal sulfates.
4,395,365
METAL CLEANING COMPOSITION CONTAINING A
FATTY ACID SUCCROSE ESTER AND OTHER
DETERGENT COMPONENTS
Masami Hasegawa, Fuji, and Koji Kato, Uozu, both of Japan,
assignors to Nissan Motor Co., Ltd., Yokohama, Japan
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,149
Qaims priority, application Japan, Sep. 8, 1980, 55-124198
Int. CV CUD 1/14. 1/66. 1/72
U.S. CI. 252—545 14 Claims
1. An industrial detergent useful for degreasing and cleans-
ing of metal parts, the detergent being in the form of an aque-
ous solution and comprising:
(a) 3 to 20 parts by weight of a fatty acid succrose ester
having an HLB value within the range of from about 12 to
18;
(b) 3 to 15 parts by weight of a polyoxyethylene alkyl ether
having an HLB value within the range of from about 12 to
20;
(c) 1 to 10 parts by weight of a chelating agent for metal ions;
(d) 1 to 5 parts by weight of a petroleum sulfonic acid salt;
and
(e) 3 to 10 parts by weight of propylene glycol.
RiO(PrO)miS03M
(2)
wherein RiO is a residue obtained by removal of a hydrogen
from coconut oil-derived higher alcohol, beef tallow-
derived higher alcohol, synthetic secondary higher alcohol
having 8 to 22 carbon atoms, or synthetic primary alcohol
having 8 to 22 carbon atoms and having an iso ratio of 20 to
80%, PrO is oxypropylene, ml is a number of from 1 to 10,
and M is an alkali metal, an alkaline earth metal or an alka-
nolamine having 1 to 3 alkanol groups having 2 or 3 carbon
atoms,
compounds having the formula
RlO(PrO);„2(EtO)m3S03M
(3)
wherein each of m2 and m3 is a positive number with the
proviso that the sum of m2 and m3 is from 1 to 10 and the
m2/m3 ratio is in the range of from 4/1 to 1/4, EtO is oxy-
ethylene, and the other symbols have the same meaning as
defined above,
compounds having the formula
4,395,366
CARBOMETHOXY METHYL NORBORNANES,
ORGANOLEPTIC USES THEREOF AND PROCESS FOR
PREPARING SAME
Philip T. Klemarczyk, Old Bridge; James M. Sanders, Eaton-
town; Manfred H. Vock, Locust; Joaquin F. Vinals, Red
Bank; Frederick L. Schmitt, Holmdel, and Edward J. Granda,
Englishtown, all of N.J., assignors to International Flavors &
Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 284,107, Jul. 16, 1981, Pat. No. 4,350,823,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 133,870, Mar. 25,
1980, Pat. No. 4,319,036. This application May 20, 1982, Ser.
No. 380,423
Int. a.J CUD 3/50
U.S. a. 252—545 ♦ Claims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma of a
solid or liquid anionic, cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic deter-
gent comprising the step of adding to a solid or liquid anionic,
cationic, nonionic or zwitterionic detergent base an aroma
augmenting or enhancing quantity of at least one norbornyl
compound defined according to the structure:
R lO(BuO)m2(EtO)m3S03M
(4)
wherein BuO is oxybutylene, and the other symbols have the
same meanings as defined above,
compounds having the formula
RlO(PrO,ElO)mlS03M
(5)
OCH3
wherein (PrO.EtO) is oxypropylene and oxyethylene arranged wherein the dashed line represents a carbon-carbon single
1S08
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
bond or a carbon-carbon double bond and one of Ri or R2 is
methyl and the other of Ri and R2 is hydrogen.
4. The process of claim 1 wherein the detergent is a liquid
detergent containing lysine salts of n-dodecyl benzene sulfonic
acid.
4,395,367
PROCESS FOR TREATING FISSION WASTE
Charles A. Rohrmann, Kennewick, and Oswald J. Wick, Rich-
land, both of Wash, (granted to U.S. Department of Energy
under the provisions of 42 U.S.C. 2182)
Filed Nov. 17, 1981, Scr, No. 322,144
Int. aJG2\F 9/16
U.S. a. 252—629 6 Claims
4,395,369
MANUFACTURE OF ISOCYANATE
William A. Henderson, Jr., and Balwant Singh, both of Stam-
ford, Conn., assignors to American Cyanamid Company,
Stamford, Conn.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 331,6%, Dec. 17, 1981, Pat. No.
4,361,518. This application Mar. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 355,945
Int. a.^ C07C 118/00
U.S. a. 260—453 P 12 Qaims
1. A process for the production of tertiary aralkyl isocya-
nates which comprises reacting a halide of the formula
FISSION
WASTE
GLASS FORMER -
REDUCING AGENT -
SCAVENGER-
PHASE
SEPARATION
GLASS
' STORAGE
NOBLE
METAL
PROCESSING
-»R»
-»Tc
SCAVENGER
RECYCLE
V
R2— c— X
R3
in which X represents a halogen atom, K\ and R2 represent the
same or different hydrocarbon radicals selected from normal,
branched and cyclic alkyl groups, and phenyl, naphthalyl and
higher aryl groups, and can be joined to form substituents
forming cyclic compounds, such bivalent substituents being
selected from— (CH2)«— where n is an integer from 3 to 5,
1. A process for the treatment of fission waste comprising:
(a) mixing a glass forming agent, a scavenging metal oxide,
and a reducing agent with said fission waste;
(b) melting said mixture and thereby forming a glass phase
and a metal phase; __
(c) separating the two phases; and
(d) cooling said glass phase and thereby forming a stable
leach-resistant solid suitable for long-term storage of radi-
oactive materials.
and R3 represents an aromatic hydrocarbon groups selected
from phenyl, naphthalyl, higher fused ring aryl and biphenyl
groups, polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbon groups of the for-
mula
4,395,368
AZO DYES FROM
2-AMINO-5-ORGANOTHIO-l,3,4-THIADIAZOLES AND
N-CYANOETHYL-M-ACYLAMIDOANILINES
Max A. Weaver, and Qarence A. Coates, Jr., both of Kingsport,
Tenn., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester,
N.Y.
Filed Oct. 26, 1981, Ser. No. 315,108
Int. a.' C09B 29/02, 29/36
VS. a. 260—158 6 Qaims
1. A compound having the formula:
X
RS
\*=*^ C2H4CN
NHR2
O
in which Y represents a bivalent radical selected from
— S— , — O— , — C— and — (CH2)m— .
wherein m is an integer from 1 to 3, and such aromatic groups
having halogen, methyl, methoxy substituents or substituents
of the formula
wherein R is alkyl, aryl or cycloalkyl; X is hydrogen, or alkyl;
Rl is hydrogen, alkyl or aralkyl; and R2 is formyl or alkanoyl;
and wherein the alkyl, aryl, and cycloalkyl moieties of R and
R2 may be substituted where appropriate with 1-3 groups
independently selected from alkyl, aryl, cycloalkyl, —OH,
OOC-alkyl, — COO-alkyl, succinimido, phthalimido, alkoxy,
carbamoyl, alkylcarbamoyl, dialkylcarbamoyl, alkanoylamino,
halogen, phenoxy and benzoyloxy.
Rl
I
X— c—
I
R2
with a stoichiometric excess of isocyanic acid in a solution in a
solvent for said halide and isocyanic acid.
July 26, 198:
CHEMICAL
1509
4,395,370
BRANCHED CHAIN ALKENYL METHYL CARBONATES,
USES THEREOF IN AUGMENTING OR ENHANONG
THE AROMA OF PERFUME COMPOSITIONS,
COLOGNES AND PERFUMED ARTICLES AND
FORMATE INTERMERIATES USEFUL IN PREPARING
SyWtE
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach; Theodore J. Tyszkiewicz,
Sayreville, and Michael Licciardello, Farmingdale, all of N.J.,
assignors to International Flavors & Fragrances Inc„ New
York, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,222
Int. CI.' C07C 69/96; A61K 7/46
U.S. a. 260—463 2 Oaims
1. An ester defined according to the structure:
O
II
o
'O— CH,
...M
wherein one of the dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon
double bond and each of the other of the dashed lines represent
carbon-carbon single bonds.
4,395,371
PROCESS FOR THE PREPARATION OF
2-HALOGENO-3-SULPHONYL-ACRYLONITRILES
Siegfried Oeckl; Gero Zahl, both of Cologne, and Walter Radt,
Krefeld, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer
Aktiengesellschaft, Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,701
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 31,
1980, 3041154
Int. CI.* C07C 720/00. 121/30 121/48. 121/70
U.S. CI. 260—464 3 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of a 2-halogeno-3-sulpho-
nyl-acrylonitrile of the formula
R'— ^2— CH=CX'—
CN
4^95,372
ALKYLATION PROCESS
Robert Q. Kluttz, Houston, and Lynn H. Slaugh, Cypress, both
of Tex., assignors to Shell Oil Company, Houston, Tex.
Filed Aug. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 406,665
Int. a.J C07C 121/52: C07B 27/00: C07C 2/66
U.S. a. 260—465 R 6 Gaims
1. A process for alkylating benzene and substituted benzenes
with olefins having carbon numbers ranging from 3 to about 6
which process comprises contacting said benzene or substi-
tuted benzene with said olefin at a temperature ranging from
about 50° C. to about 300° C. and a pressure ranging from
about 1 to about 200 atmospheres with a rare-earth-exchanged
zeolite in the presence of sulfur dioxide.
435,373
PHOSPHATED AMINE OXIDES
Robert B. Login, Media. Pa., assignor to Jordan Chemical
Company, Folcroft, Pa.
Filed Apr. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 251,851
Int. a.' C07F 9/09
U.S. CI. 260—928 15 Qaims
1. Phosphated Amine Oxides Compounds of the formula
R'
I
R— N— X— O-
O
o
II
-P-(A)^
Jy
Wherein R and R', which may be the same or different are
alkyl, alkenyl, or alkoxy groups containing from 5 to 24 carbon
atoms, R and R' may also form a cyclic structure and be at-
tached together, R' may be further selected from the same
group as X with the requirement that said group terminate in a
hydroxyl or phosphate ester,
X is a polyalkoxide of the formula
R"
I
i-CH2CH-Otr
Wherein
R" is hydrogen, C1-C20 alkyl, C1-C20 alkoxy, phenyl,
n is an integer from 1 to 50
Y and Z are integers from
1 to 2 such that when Y is '
2, Z is 1 and vice versa,
A is — OM wherein M is hydrogen, alkali metals, alkaline
earth metals or quaternary ammonium counterions.
wherein
R' denotes C6 to Cig aryl, aralkyl where the aromatic portion
has up to 10 carbon atoms and the alkyl portion has up to 6
carbon atoms, Ci to C12 alkyl
or C6 to C|7 cycloalkyl, any of which radicals can optionally
be substituted by a radical which does not change during the
process and
X' denotes halogen, which comprises contacting a 2,2-
dihalogeno-3-sulphonyl propionitrile of the formula
R 1 -SO2-CH2-CX2 ' -CN
wherein 1 1
R' and X' have the meaning given above with a composition
consisting essentially of water in a stoichiometric excess at a
temperature of 20°- 130° C, employing a molar ratio of
2,2-dihalogeno-3-sulphonyl-propionitrile to water of 1:5-550
at pressure of at least 0.5 bar whereby a halogen halide is
formed additionally.
4,395,374
ALKYL
N-ARYLSULFENYL-N-DIARYLOXY-PHOSPHINYLME-
THYLGLYCINATES
Gerard A. Dutra, Ladue, Mo., and James A. Sikorski, West
Lafayette, Ind., assignors to Monsanto Company, St. Louis,
Mo.
Filed Jan. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 222,213
Int. a.' C07F 9/40: AOIN 57/22
U.S. a. 260—941 12 Gaims
1. A compound of the formula
O SR| O
II I II
(RO)2— P— CH2— N— CH2C— OR2
m
wherein R is phenyl, naphthyl, biphenylyl, benzyl or naphthyl,
biphenylyl, benzyl or phenyl substituted with from one or two
1510
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
substituents independently selected from the group consisting
of hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, lower alkylthio, triflu-
oromethyl, alkoxycarbonyl, methylenedioxy, cyano, nitro and
halogen; Ri is phenyl, naphthyl or phenyl substituted with
from one or two substituents independently selected from the
group consisting of hydrogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy,
halogen, trifluoromethyl and nitro; and R2 is selected from the
group consisting of lower alkyl and lower aralkyl.
screw, means for heating the barrel to promote the flow of
plastic material in contact with the inner surface of the barrel
and a spreader fixed in the discharge end of the barrel for
conducting heat from the barrel into the material to fuse the
material passing through the spreader, the screw having an
internal passage for conducting a cooling fluid to inhibit fusing
and mixing of vari-coloured material carried between the
flights of the screw.
4,395,375
METHOD OF ELECTRICALLY TESTING MOLDED
CORD-SETS DURING THE MOLDING OPERATION
William E. Ferris, deceased, late of Stamford, Conn.; Gail He-
nnessy, executrix. New Fairfield, Conn.; John Doumas, Wil-
ton, and Harry McCarter, Old Greenwich, both of Conn.,
assignors to Electrolux Corporation, Old Greenwich, Conn.
Filed Oct. 15, 1974, Ser. No. 514,391
Int. a.^ B29C 6/(W
U.S, a. 264—40.1 4 Qaims
3. A method of moulding vari-coloured articles in an injec-
tion molding machine having a barrel housing a reciprocable
screw, comprising the steps of heating the barrel to promote
the flow of plastic material in contact with the inner surface of
the barrel, cooling the screw internally to inhibit fusing and
mixing of vari-coloured material carried between the flights of
the screw, and passing the material through a spreader fixed in
the discharge end of the barrel to conduct heat from the barrel
into the material to fuse the material without mixing it.
1. The method of molding and electrically testing a cord-set
while the female contacts and male contacts of said set are in a
metallic mold having first and second portions comprising the
steps of securing female contacts to one end of an insulated
cord and securing male contacts to the other end thereof,
positioning said female contacts in a first cavity of said first
mold portion for molding a female receptacle, positioning said
male contacts in a second cavity of said first mold portion for
molding a male plug, removably securing said female and male,
contacts to electrically conductive locating means mounted in
fixed positions on said first portion of said mold and electri-
cally insj^atsd/therefrom, connecting a plurality of electrical
test circuits to connectors carried by said second mold portion
in positions to engage said locating means when said first and
second mold portions are closed, moving said first and second
mold portions into engagement with each other thereby simul-
taneously electrically connecting said test circuit connectors to
said locating means while closing said first and second cavities,
introducing thermoplastic molding compound into said first
and second cavities to mold a receptacle and a plug on opposite
ends of said cord and around at least portions of said contacts,
electrically testing said cord-sets by applying test voltages
through said test circuits while said first and second mold
portions are closed, separating said first and second mold
portions and automatically disconnecting said test circuit con-
nectors from said locating means as a result of such separation,
and removing said receptacle and said plug from said first mold
portion while removing said female and male contacts from
said locating means.
4,395,377
POROUS ACRYLIC SYNTHETIC HBERS COMPRISING
CELLULOSE ACETATE IN AN ACRYLIC MATRIX AND
METHOD FOR PRODUCING SAID HBERS '
Yoshikazu Kondo; Toshihiro Yamamoto, and Takaji Yamamoto,
all of Hofu, Japan, assignors to Kanebo, Ltd., Tokyo and
Kanebo Synthetic Fibers, Ltd., Osaka, both of, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 156,993, Jun. 6, 1980, Pat. No. 4,351,879.
This application Jul. 12, 1982, Ser. No. 397,282
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 18, 1979, 54/77046;
Jun. 18, 1979, 54/77049; Oct. 1, 1979, 54/127065; Oct. 1, 1979,
54/127066
Int. a.3 B32B 27/02; DOIF 8/02. 8/10; D02G 3/00
U.S. a. 264-46.1 21 Qaims
4,395,376
INJECTION MOULDING MACHINES
John Matthews, Tadworth, England, assignor to Crayonne Lim-
ited, Middlesex, England
FUed Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 288,047
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 12,
1980, 8026165
Int. a.5 B29F 1/02
VS. a. 264—73 3 Claims
1. An injection moulding machine for producing vari-
coloured articles, comprising a barrel housing a reciprocable
1. A method for producing porous acrylic synthetic fibers
having substantially no microvoids but having mainly mac-
rovoids wherein a surface area A of the voids is not greater
than 15 m^/g, a porosity V is 0.05-0.75 cmVg and V/A is
1/30 or more, which comprises spinning an organic solvent
solution containing 15~35% by weight of a polymer consist-
ing of 2 ~ 30 parts by weight of cellulose aceUte and 70~98
parts by weight of an acrylic polymer into a coagulation bath
at a temperature of no higher than 30' C. to form fibers
July 26, 198
CHEMICAL
ISll
wherein the formation of microvoids is restrained, primarily
drawing the spun fibers at a draw ratio of 2.5-8.0 times to
form water swelled fibers wherein macrovoids are distributed,
drying the water swelled fibers at a temperature of 100° - 180°
C. to a water content of no greater than 1 .0% by weight to
substantially eliminate microvoids and secondarily drawing
the dried fibers under wet heat at a draw ratio of no greater
than 3 times to promote the macrovoid structure.
4,395,378
METHOD FOR MAKING AN INJECTION STRETCH
BLOW MOLDED CONTAINER WITH AN INTEGRAL
TAB
Alfred C. Alberghini, Dunwoody, and Gerhard E. B. Nickel,
Kennesaw, both of Ga., assignors to Sewell Plastics, Inc.,
Atlanta, Ga.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,765
Int. a.3B29C; 7/07
U.S. a. 264—532 3 Oaims
\f^
to . 1
r y^ _ 1
\l :
32
//
> -^
r-
U^^
\J
1. The method of forming a container having a finish end
and an integral appendage opposite the finish end of the con-
tainer comprising the steps of:
(a) molding a parison having a finish end and an integral
appendage formed at an end of the parison opposite the
finish end,
(b) situating the parison in a blow mold having a finish-
receiving portion, a wall defining a cavity and having a
pocket in the wall at a base of the mold opposite the
finish-receiving portion and adjacent an axis of the mold,
(c) stretching the parison to a point that the pocket receives
the appendage, one surface of the appendage contacting
the pocket portion of the wall, another surface of the
appendage facing into the mold cavity, and
(d) blowing the parison to form a container, said another
surface of the appendage acting as a part of the mold wall
for a portion of the blown part of the container, the appen-
dage remaining substantially undeformed during the
blowing operation.
4,395,379
METHOD AND DEVICE FOR FORMING AN INTERNAL
ANNULAR GROOVE IN A PLASTIC TUBE PART
Kornelis Herder, and Wilhelmus F. T. C. Olderaan, both of
Hardenberg, Netherlands, assignors to Wavin B.V., Zwolle,
Netherlands
Continuation of Ser. No. 865,134, Dec. 28, 1977, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 70,353, Aug. 28, 1977,
abandoned. This application Mar. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 248,487
Qaims priority, application Netherlands, Jun. 30, 1977,
7707299
Int. Q.' B29C 17/07
U.S. CI. 264—573 1 Claim
-» K
1. A method for forming an internal annular groove in a
plastic tube part by sliding the part onto a core and surround-
ing same with a mold having an annular recess, heating the
tube part and forming the groove by applying an expandable
and retractable segmented rigid groove forming a ring in a
recess in the interior of the tube part which ring is removed by
a retracting action after forming the final groove and cooling
down the plastic tube part, subjecting first the plastic tube part
to the action of an internal medium overpressure in order to
form a groove with a bottom having an inner circumference
which is greater than the periphery of the completely ex-
panded groove forming ring, performing an upsetting action
simultaneously with the action of said internal medium over-
pressure and after having formed the groove by means of the
internal medium overpressure moving the groove forming ring
to its completely expanded position, whereafter the inner side
of the groove which was formed by the internal medium over-
pressure is shrunk onto the completely expanded groove form-
ing ring and the recess for expanding the groove forming ring
is closed by a sleeve which is pushed away during sliding of the
plastic tube part onto the core.
4,395,380
METHOD OF TESTING FLUID FLOW CONDITION IN
EXTENSION OF A PIPE
Donald M. Rosh, 83 Orchrd Rd., Briarcliff Manor, N.Y. 10510
Continuation of Ser. No. 29,648, Apr. 13, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 11, 1981, Ser. No. 262,623
Int. a.^G2lC 17/00
U.S. Q. 376—247 6 Qaims
5. A method for remotely testing the fiuid fiow condition of
a plurality of metal spray nozzles mounted in spaced relation
on a ring-shaped, metal header within the containment build-
ing for a nuclear reactor, said nozzles having fluid communica-
tion with said header and extending outwardly from said
header for delivering fluid supplied to the header to the inte-
rior of said building, said method comprising:
supplying air under a pressure above atmospheric pressure
to said nozzles by way of said header, said air having a
temperature such that the temperature of the air passing
through the nozzles is in the range from 5* F. above the
temperature of the ambient for the nozzles to 200° P., and
continuing the supply of said air to said nozzles for a time
sufficient to raise the temperature of an unblocked nozzle
to a temperature at least one-half degree P. above the
1512
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
ambient temperature and above the temperature thereof
prior to the supply of air thereto; and
scanning said header and said nozzles while said air is sup-
plied thereto with an infrared camera located remotely
from the header and having a thermogram display to
height, said channels being grouped according to said
zones, and the channels of each zone being filled with
water in communication with said pressurizing means
constituted by a free level water reservoir located inside
the enclosure at a higher level than the corresponding
height section;
whereby any fluid passing through a crack in said wall is
prevented from entering any channel and only fluid pass-
ing into said channels is permitted to reach the outside of
said housing.
4,395,382
GLASSWARE STOPCOCK WITH FREEZE EXTRACTOR
Robert J. Miskinis, 9758 Airport Vista Rd., Santee, Calif. 92071
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,619
Int. CI.' BOIL 11/00
U.S. CI. 422—103 * Claims
obtain a thermogram of the header and each nozzle, an
unblocked nozzle appearing as an image of the nozzle and
a blocked nozzle not providing a significant image,
whereby the fluid-flow condition of the nozzle is indicated
by the image of the extension on the thermogram.
4,395,381
CONRNEMENT ENCLOSURE, NOTABLY FOR A
NUCLEAR REACTOR
Didier Costcs, Meudon, France, assignor to Commissariat a
I'Energie Atomique, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 4,338, Jan. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 240,548
Qaims priority, application France, Jan. 30, 1978, 78 02498
Int. a.3 G21C 9/00
L!.S. a. 376—293 3 Qaims
2. A confinement enclosure for a nuclear reactor, compris-
mg
a housing in which a nuclear reactor is located, said housing
consisting of a single wall formed of reinforced concrete;
containment means in said single wall for preventing flow of
gas through said wall in the event of an accident involving
the nuclear reactor, said containment means including a
network of channels defined in said wall;
pressurizing means fiuidly connected to said channels and at
all times maintaining a pressure on fluid inside said chan-
nels at a level which is higher than the pressure inside said
housing and higher than any fluid passing through a crack
in said wall, said channels being located in a plurality of
zones with each zone corresponding to a section of wall
1. A glassware stopcock comprising the combination of:
a glass body member having an inlet and an outlet and a
through passage communicating between the inlet and the
outlet.
said body member having a tapered transverse bore mter-
secting said passage,
a smooth, reusable, substantially rigid polymeric, tapered
stopcock plug member complimentary to and rotatably
mounted in and capable of sealing engagement in said
bore, and rotatable between open and closed positions of
said passage,
resilient retaining means mounted at the smaller (one) end of
said plug for securing said plug in said bore,
said plug member having a threaded stem portion extending
from the larger diameter end of said tapered plug and
beyond said body member, means for rotating said plug
member between said open and closed positions, and
a finger operable one piece retractor nut having a textured
outer surface and mounted on said threaded stem (at the
other end of said plug) and engageable with the glass body
member for applying an axial force to break the sealing
engagement of said plug for at least partially retracting
said stem from said bore to enable the plug to be rotated
between positions against said means and being smaller in
length than said threaded stem portion.
4,395,383
APPARATUS FOR CONTROLLING TEMPERATURE
BELOW 212 DEGREES FAHRENHEIT IN A STERILIZER
CHAMBER
Edward M. Kackos, Belmar, N.J., assignor to Vernitron Corpo-
ration, Lake Success, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 188,973
Int. a.' A61L 2/06. 2/24
U S. CI. 422 112 * Claims
1. Apparatus for sterilizing media in a chamber from a prede-
termined sub-atmospheric pressure correlation point below
212° F. comprising: .. . •
a closed sterilizing chamber for containing said media during
sterilization;
July 26, 198-
CHEMICAL
1513
vacuum system means connected to said chamber for evacu-
ating air and vapor therefrom, said vacuum system being
operable continuously;
a source of steam operatively connected to said chamber for
supplying steam thereto;
a steam regulator valve having electrically operable means
and connected between said chamber and said source of
steam for selectively injecting steam into said chamber
and for cutting off steam supplied to said chamber;
a pressure sensor operatively disposed to sense a sub-atmos-
pheric pressure in said chamber;
a temperature sensor operatively disposed to sense tempera-
ture in said chamber;
a first relay operable by said pressure sensor at a preset
sub-atmospheric pressure and having normally open first
switch contacts;
4,395,385
PROCESS FOR REMOVING HYDROGEN SULFIDE
FROM SOUR GAS STREAMS
Charles J. Welsh, Oklahoma City, Okla., assignor to Kerr-
McGee Refining Corporation, Oklahoma City, Okla.
Filed Nov. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 209,836
Int. a.' BOID 53/34
U.S. a. 423—234
18 Claims
^^^^m^\
a second relay operable by said temperature sensor at a
preset temperature and having second normally closed
switch contacts; and
circuit means connecting said first and second switch
contacts in series with said electrically operable means for
activating said valve to pass steam into said chamber when
the pressure in said chamber reaches said preset sub-
atmospheric pressure, whereat said first switch contacts
are closed, and wherein said valve is deactivated by open-
ing said first switch contacts to cut off steam from said
chamber when the pressure in said chamber, as sensed by
said pressure sensor, rises above said preset sub-atmos-
pheric pressure, and wherein the aforedescribed cycle is
continued until the temperature in said chamber has
reached said preset temperature whereupon said tempera-
ture sensor operates said second relay to open said second
switch contacts to prevent any further activation of said
valve by said pressure sensor.
1. An improved process for removing hydrogen sulfide from
sour gas streams to provide a sweet gas stream substantially
free of hydrogen sulfide and an aqueous sodium hydrosulfide
solution, the process comprising;
contacting a first sour gas stream containing hydrogen sul-
fide and carbon dioxide with an aqueous alkali metal
hydroxide solution containing a stiochiometric excess of
alkali metal hydroxide, based on the amount of hydrogen
sulfide present in the first sour gas stream, at conditions
preferential to the reaction between the alkali metal hy-
droxide and the hydrogen sulfide to form a mixed phase
effluent;
separating the mixed phase effluent into a gas phase and a
partially spent aqueous alkali metal hydroxide solution
containing alkali metal hydrosulfide;
recovering the gas phase as a carbon dioxide-containing first
sweet gas stream substantially free of hydrogen sulfide;
reactively contacting the partially spent alkali metal hydrox-
ide solution with a substantially carbon dioxide-free, non-
process-derived second sour gas stream containing hydro-
gen sulfide; and
recovering a second sweet gas stream and a substantially
alkali metal hydroxide-free aqueous solution of alkali
metal hydrosulfide.
4,395,384
PROCESS FOR TREATING ZIRCON
Corbett J. Poynton, Perth, Australia, assignor to Allied Eneabba
Limited, Perth, Australia
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,369, Apr. 17, 1980, abandoned.
This application Apr. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 365,884
Int. C\? COIG 25/02: C22B 34/14; C03C 23/00: C09C 1/28
U.S. a. 423—1 10 Claims
1. A process for the removal of surface impurities from
4,395,386
APPARATUS FOR ISOTOPE EXCHANGE REACTION
Yamato Asakura; Teiji Suzuki, and Fumio Kawamura, all of
Hitachi, Japan, assignors to HiUchi, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Mar. 12, 1980, Ser. No. 129,753
Oaims priority, application Japan, Mar. 13, 1979, 54-29082
Int. C\? BOlD 59/33: G21C 19/32
U.S. a. 423—249 6 Claims
1. An apparatus for isotopic exchange reaction, which com-
prises a plurality of units arranged in succession, each unit
comprising a mist-forming means for forming water containing
hydrogen isotopes into a mist of fine water particles containing
hydrogen isotopes, said mist having a fine particle size of from
0.1 fim to 50 |im, a catalyst bed for promoting isotope ex-
change reaction between at least one of hydrogen gas and
deuterium gas, and the hydrogen isotopes in the mist of fine
zircon grains which comprises coating the zircon grains with a water particles supplied in a mixed state from the mist-forming
strong basic reagent, the coating being of an amount of 2 to 4% means, means for removing the mist from the gas passed
by weight of the zircon grains, calcining the coated grains at a through the catalyst bed, a first conduit leading the water
temperature of at least 600° C. for a retention time of more than containing hydrogen istopes to the mist-forming means, a
about 10 minutes and no more than about 20 minutes! and second conduit for discharging the gas freed from the mist by
removing the calcinated surface impurities from the calcined the mist-removing means, and a third conduit for discharging
. the mist collected by the mist-removing means as a liquid
10.12 O.G.-I458
1514
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
containing hydrogen isotopes; the mist-forming means of a
preceeding unit being connected to the second conduit of a
Mj-02
fccoMeiN
ATION
Device
ran
NUCLEAR
REACTOR
ISOTOPt
EXCHANGE
REACTOR
ISOTOPE
EXCHANGE
REACTOR
J
ELECTROLYTE ^
•Ht
29
28-
66
.T.T.Trt'
-ISA
29
24
J e
23
-27
2li^°-l
^3r
■^.17
3S
i
succeeding unit and the third conduit of the preceeding unit
being connected to the first conduit of the succeeding unit.
H20/Si02: 2-5000
wherein R is a polyvalent hydrocarbyl radical of 2 to about 5
carbon atoms, n is an interger of 2 to about 4, and M is at least
one alkali or alkaline earth metal cation havmg a valence of v,
or ammonium; and (2) maintaining the mixture at suitable
reaction conditions to effect formulation of the cristobalite,
said reaction conditions comprise a pH of the slurry prior to
crystallization that falls within the range of about 9.0 to about
13.5, a reaction temperature within the range of about 30° C. to
about 300" C. and a pressure of at least the vapor pressure of
water at the reaction temperature.
4,395,389
CHLOROSILANE DISPROPORTIONATION PROCESS
Kishankumar K. Seth, Baton Rouge, La., assignor to Ethyl
Corporation, Richmond, Va.
Filed Mar. 1, 1982, Ser. No. 353,491
Int. a.' COIB ii/04, 33/107
U.S. a. 423—341 14 Qaims
1. A process for the redistribution of one or more of trichlo-
rosilane, dichlorosilane, and monochlorosilane, said process
comprising the steps of:
(a) passing such chlorosilane over a catalyst bed of polyvinyl
cyclic, tertiary amine hydrocarbons having nitrogen in the
ring, said hydrocarbons being selected from polyvinylpyr-
rolidone, polyvinylpyrrolidine, polyvinylpyridine, and
substituted analogs thereof where the substituent groups
do not interfere with catalyst activity and which are essen-
tially homopolymers, for a period of time sufficient to
produce a silane containing less chorine than is contained
in the chlorosilane fed to the catalyst bed and a silane
containing more chlorine than is contained in the chlorosi-
lane fed to the catalyst bed; and
(b) separately recovering the silanes produced by redistribu-
tion.
4 395 387
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING WATER GLASS
CEMENT HARDENERS
Kurt Goltz, Exton, and William T. West, Strafford, both of Pa.,
assignors to Pennwalt Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Oct. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 310,559
Int. a? COIB 25/36
U.S. a. 423—305 12 Qaims
1. A method of making a condensed aluminum phosphate
comprising dry mixing aluminum hydroxide with an ammo-
nium phosphate and heating the mixture at an initial tempera-
ture which is sufficient to decompose the ammonium phos-
phate but below about 250° C. for longer than about two hours
and then raising the temperature in stages so as to form by a
solid state reaction a condensed aluminum phosphate which is
useful as a hardener for water glass cements the X-ray diffrac-
tion pattern of said condensed aluminum phosphate showing a
high peak at 20 = 61.1°, but not showing a peak at 20= 1 1.2°.
4 395 390
PROCESS TO PRODUCE SULPHUR FROM TWO ACID
GASES, BOTH CONTAINING HYDROGEN SULPHIDE
AND ONE OF WHICH CONTAINS AMMONIA
Guy Desgrandchamps, Pau; Georges Kvasnikoff, Monein, and
Claude Blanc, Pau, all of France, assignors to Scoiete Na-
tionale Elf Aquitaine, Paris, France
Continuation of Ser. No. 33,169, Apr. 25, 1979. This application
Jul. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 283,614
Claims priority, application France, May 2, 1978, 78 12899
Int. a.^ BOID 17/04
U.S. a. 423— 573 G 8 Qaims
8 9
J
,V
4,395,388
SYNTHETIC CRISTOBALITE
James A. Kaduk, Naperrille, 111., assignor to Standard Oil Com-
pany (Indiana), Chicago, III.
Filed Noy. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,531
Int. a.5 COIB 33/12, 33/00
U.S. a. 423— 339 7aainis
1. A method for preparing cristobalite, which comrises: (1)
preparing a mixture containing sources for an oxide of silicon
and for an oxide of boron, a base or precursor of such base, a
polyhydric alcohol, and water, wherein the composition of the
mixture of initial reactants in terms of mole ratios of oxides is:
Si02/B203: 0.5-200
R(OH)„/B203: 0.01-20
M2/^/B203: 0.05-10
1. In a process for producing sulfur from two hydrogen
sulfide containing gas steams, one of said gas streams contain-
ing ammonia, wherein said gas streams are subjected to a
heat-reaction step followed by a gas-cooling step and at least
one catalytic reaction step, the improvement which comprises,
a heat reaction which comprises:
(a) burning the ammonia containing gas stream to form a
first combustion mixture in a first heat-reaction chamber,
with air introduced into the first heat-reaction chamber
wherein the quantity of air is such that the ratio p, of the
quantity of air injected into the first heat-reaction chamber
to the quantity of air theoretically required for the total
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1515
combustion of the hydrogen sulfide and ammonia to sulfur
dioxide and nitrogen, respectively, in said first heat-reac-
tion chamber is between 0.4 and 1 and the temperature of
the gases in said first heat-reaction chamber is maintained
from 1350° to 1550° C.
(b) passing said first combustion mixture to a second heat-
reaction chamber;
(c) burning the gas stream free of ammonia in said second
heat-reaction chamber with a quantity of air sufficient to
provide a molar ratio of H2S/SO2 in the gas mixture
leaving said second heat-reaction chamber of about 2/1
and maintaining the temperature of the gases in the second
heat-reaction chamber at from 1000° to 1500° C.
4,395,391
UNSYMMETRICALLY SUBSTITUTED
DICARBOXYLIC.AaD-BIS-(2,4,6-TRIIODO.ANILIDES),
THEIR PREPARATION, AND X-RAY CONTRAST MEDIA
CONTAINING SAME
Heinrich Pfeiffer; Wolfgang Miitzel, and Ulrich Speck, all of
Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Schering Aktien-
gesellschaft, Berlin, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Nov. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 324,368
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Nov. 25,
1980 3044814
Int." C\? A61K 49/04: C07C 101/68
U.S. a. 424—5 14 Claims
1. A compound of the formula
4,395,393
ARTIFiaAL BLOOD EMULSIHERS
Irving R. Schmolka, Grosse lie, Mich., assignor to BASF Wyan-
dotte Corporation, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 291,264
Int. a.J A61K 31/74. 31/02
U.S. a. 424—78 6 Claims
1. An artificial blood comprising from 10 to 40 percent by
weight of a perfluoro chemical, from 40 to 80 percent by
weight physiological saline and from 2 to 8 percent by weight
of a polyoxybutylene-polyoxyethylene block copolymer emul-
sifier, said emulsifier being a cogeneric mixture of conjugated
polyoxybutylene-polyoxyethylene compounds containing in
their structure oxybutylene groups, oxyethylene groups and an
organic radical derived from a water-soluble organic com-
pound containing a plurality of reactive hydrogen atoms and 2
to 12 carbon atoms; the compounds being characterized in that
all of the oxybutylene groups are present in polyoxybutylene
chains that are attached to the organic radical at the site of a
reactive hydrogen atom thereby constituting a polyoxybuty-
lene polymer; the oxyethylene groups being attached to the
polyoxybutylene polymer in polyoxyethylene chains; the aver-
age molecular weight of the polyoxybutylene polymers in the
mixture being between about 1200 and 3000, as determined by
hydroxyl number, and the oxyethylene groups present consti-
tuting 60 to 85 percent by weight of the mixture.
COOH
COOH
wherein
X is Ci.i2-alkylene optionally interrupted by 1-4 oxygen
atoms;
R> is — NH-i-C2^-alkanoyl, — CH2NH— C2^-alkanoyl, in
both of which alkanoyl can optionally be substituted by 1
or 2 hydroxy or Cm alkoxy groups, or — CONHR^
wherein R^ is hydrogen. Cm alkyl or C1.5 alkyl substi-
tuted byi-4 hydroxy or CM-alkoxy groups;
R2 is hydrogen or Cm alkyl;
or a physiologically compatible salt thereof with an inorganic
or organic base.
10. An x-ray contrast medium comprising an amount of a
compound of claim 1 effective as an x-ray contrast agent and a
pharmaceutically acceptable carrier.
4,395,394
USE OF LIPID AMINES FORMULATED WITH FAT OR
LIPID EMULSIONS AS VACONE ADJUVANTS
John S. Wolff, III, River Vale; George R. Hemsworth, Sparta,
both of N.J., and Keith E. Jensen, Waterford, Conn., assignors
to Pfizer Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 88,638, Oct. 26, 1979, Pat. No. 4,310,550.
This application Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,240
Int. C\? A61K 39/00. 39/12
U.S. a. 424—88 12 Claims
1. A method of inducing or enhancing the immunogenic
response of an antigen in man or an animal which comprises
parenteral co-administration to said man or animal of said
antigen and a pharmaceutical composition which comprises a
compound of the formula
4 395 392
METHOD FOR TREATING KIDNEY STONES
Richard L. Wolgemuth, Plain City, Ohio, assignor to Adria
Laboratories Inc., Columbus, Ohio
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 162,477, Jun. 24, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jun. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 278,014
Int. a.3 A61K 31/795
U.S. a. 424—78 2 Claims
1. A treatment for decreasing urinary calcium content which
comprises orally administering to a host in need of such treat-
ment, a therapeutically effective amount of an agent selected
from water-soluble vinylbenzenesulfonic acid polymers having
a viscosity average molecular weight in the range of from
about 50,000 to about 500,000 and containing less than 5% by
weight of polymers having a molecular weight of less than
20,000, wherein the polymers have from about 70 to over 90%
molar monosulfonation and the nontoxic pharmaceutically
acceptable salts thereof
R, CH2CH2OH
N— CH2CH2CH2— N
/ \
R2 CH2CH2OH
(I)
or
Ri
\n-CH2-^)J
CH2NH2
(II)
/
R2
or a pharmaceutically accepuble acid addition salt thereof
wherein Ri and R2 are each alkyl of 12 to 20 carbon atoms;
and a lipid or fat emulsion comprising about 10% vegeuble
oil and about 1.2% phosphoUpids;
in an amount to effectively induce or enhance the immuno-
genic response of said antigen.
1S16
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,395
DETECTION OF NONA, NON-B HEPATITIS
ASSOCIATED ANTIGEN
Edward Tabor, Rockville, and Robert J. Gerety, Potomac, both
of Md., assignors to The United States of America as repre-
sented by the Department of Health and Human Services,
Washington, D.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 192,291, Sep. 30, 1980,
abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 40,921,
May 21, 1979, Pat. No. 4,356,146. This application Nov. 10, -
1981, Ser. No. 319,995
Int. a.' A61K i9/12: C07G 7/00; A61K 17/00
U.S. a. 424—89 4 Claims
1. A vaccine efTective against non-A, non-B hepatitis infec-
tion in mammals comprising an antigen isolated from a speci-
men of blood serum or liver tissue which has been shown to
transmit non-A, non-B hepatitis.
generating signals in response to the presence of said un-
wanted cells in said flowing stream, and
4,395,396
BLOOD-COAGULATION-PROMOTING PREPARATION
BASED ON HUMAN PROTEINS AND A METHOD OF
PRODUCING THE SAME
Johann EibI; Otto Schwarz; Fritz Eisinger, all of Vienna, and
Anton Philapitsch, Ebenfurt, all of Austria, assignors to Im-
muno Aktiengesellschaft fiir Chemisch-medizinische Pro-
dukte, Vienna, Austria
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,143
Claims priority, application Austria, Jul. 22, 1980, 3781/80
Int. CI.' A61K ii/l4
U.S. CI. 424—101 14 Claims
1. A blood-coagulation-promoting preparation based on
human proteins, having a content of coagulation factors II,
VII. IX and X and factor-VIII-inhibitor-by-passing-activity
(FEIBA), which preparation is characterized in that
it is free of thrombogenic activity up to at least 2 units of
FEIBA per kg rabbit in the thrombosis inducing activity
test according to Wessler,
it is free of kallikrein activity and free of prekallikrein activa-
tor activity, measured in an aqueous solution of said prep-
aration with a FEIBA concentration of up to at least 10
units per ml,
it is affinity-chromatographically separable on dextran sul-
phate agarose by means of an NaCl gradient so as to
obtain an eluate containing a protein with factor IX activ-
ity and an eluate containing a protein with FEIB-activity,
said protein with factor IX activity eluting at a lower
NaCl concentration than said protein with FEIB-activity,
said eluate containing said protein with factor IX activity
and said eluate containing said protein with FEIB-activity
contain a- and /3-globulins when electrophoretically sepa-
rated thus obtaining a separation curve having a main peak
in the a-globulin region corresponding to a content of 60
to 80% of the total protein, a shoulder of 10 to 20% of the
total protein following thereupon, and a slightly pro-
nounced peak in the /3-globulin region corresponding to a
content of 10 to 20% of the total protein following upon
the shoulder-like course of said separation curve.
^3lb^cttLi}-3-^
I M
in response to said signals, providing pulses of laser light
focused on said flowing stream to impinge on and Jcill said
unwanted cells in said flowing stream.
4,395,398
DENTAL HEMOSTATIC COMPOSITION
Hiroji Yamamoto, Kawabe, Japan, assignor to Bee Brand Med-
ico Dental Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Mar. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 249,726
Claims priority, application Japan, Apr. 2, 1980, 55-43973
Int. CI.3 A61K ii/iO 33/26, 7/16. 33/06
U.S. CI. 424—145 8 Claims
1. A liquid dental hemostatic composition consisting essen-
tially of astringent, surfactant and carrier or diluent,
said astringent being a member selected from the group
consisting of aluminum chloride, tannic acid, ferric chlo-
ride, zinc chloride and potassium aluminum sulfate and the
amount of aluminum chloride being from 5 to 30 w/v%,
the amount of tannic acid being 10 to 35 w/v%, the
amount of ferric chloride being 5 to 25 w/v%, the amount
of zinc chloride being 10 to 45 w/v% and the amount of
potassium aluminum sulfate being 1 to 10 w/v%,
said surfactant being a member selected from the group
consisting of cetyl pyridinium chloride, benzalkonium
chloride, benzethonium chloride, sodium lauryl sulfate
and a polyoxyethylene sorbitan fatty acid ester and the
amount thereof being 0.01 to 2.0 w/v%, and
said carrier or diluent being a member selected from the
group consisting of water and a mixture of water with
ethanol, propylene glycol, glycerin or a polyoxyethylene
glycol having polymerization degree of 200 to 400,
all percentages being based on the total composition.
4,395,397
APPARATUS AND METHOD FOR KILLING
UNWANTED CELLS
Howard M. Shapiro, West Newton, Mass., assignor to Sidney
Farber Cancer Institute, Inc., Boston, Mass.
Filed Sep. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 303,141
Int. a.3 A61K 35/14: A61L 2/08; G21K 5/00
U.S. a. 424—101 4 Qaims
2. A method for killing, in a flowing liquid stream containing
a suspension of living cells, a subpopulation of unwanted cells
having one or more characteristics distinguishing them from
the rest of said living cells, said method comprising
detecting the presence of unwanted cells in a flowing stream
containing a suspension of living cells.
4,395,399
GLYCOPEPTIDES AND METHOD FOR PREPARING
SAME
Jury A. Ovchinnikov; Vadim T. Ivanov; Larisa I. Rostovtseva;
Tatyana M. Andronova; Irina B. Sorokina, and Veronika P.
Malkova, all of Moscow, U.S.S.R., assignors to Institut Bioor-
ganicheskoi Khimii Imeni M.M. Shemyakina Akademii Nauk
SSSR, Moscow, U.S.S.R.
Filed Nov. 1, 1978, Ser. No. 956,538
Qaims priority, application U.S.S.R., Nov. 2, 1977, 2543268
Int. a.3 A61K 37/02: C07C 103/52: C07G 7/00
U.S. a. 424—177 9 Qaims
1. Glycopeptides of the general formula:
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1517
r CH2OH "I
[_ Q CH2OH [
-H
1 O R* O
II I II
^>— C— NH— C— C— R
\nhac
H3CCHCOR
where n = l oij 2; R is a residue of a linear peptide of 2 to 5
amino acids and Ac is acetyl.
8. A method of inhibiting the growth of tumors in mammals
which comprises administering thereto an effective amount of
a compound as claimed in claim 1.
9. A method for preparing glycopeptides as claimed in claim
1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6 or 7 comprising condensation of non-blocked
muramyl-containing N-acetyl aminosugars of the formula:
in which:
R is
NH
-NH-CH-{CH2)3-NH-C-NH2.
I
CO2H
H
NH
-NH-(CH2)3-NH-C-NH2
,r — NH-(CH2b-NH2;
R VR^ or R^ are each hydrogen, hydroxy or methoxy; and
R'*is lower alkyl of 1-3 carbons; or pharmaceutically accept-
able acid addition salts thereof.
H3CCHCOOH
wherein n= I br 2 and Ac is acetyl with protected linear pep-
tides as defined in, said reaction proceeding by activation of
the moiety of said unprotected aminosugars of formula II and
participation of these activated aminosugars in the coupling
reaction.
4,395,400
NONAPEPTIDE, A PROCESS FOR ITS PREPARATION,
AN AGENT CONTAINING IT AND ITS USE
Wolfgang Konig, Hofheim am Taunus; Rolf Geiger, Frankfurt
am Main, and Jilrgen K. Sandow, Konigstein, all of Fed. Rep.
of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Frank-
furt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 1, 1981, Ser. No. 268,677
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 3,
1980, 3020941
Int. CV A61K 37/00: C07C 103/52
U.S. Q. 424—177 * Claims
1. The peptide of the formula
n
I— nil
Glu— His-rTrp— Ser— Tyr— D-AacKOBuO—
4,395,402
ANALGESIC AGENT
Hamao Umezawa; Tomio Takeuchi, both of Tokyo; Takaaki
Aoyagi, Fujisawa; Mitsugu Hachisu, Tokyo; Kenji
Kawamura, Ohiso; Shunzo Fukatsu, and Yasuharu Sekizawa,
both of Tokyo, all of Japan, assignors to Zaidan Hojin Bisei-
butsu Kagaku Kankyu Kai, Japan
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 303,938
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 24, 1980, 55-131583
Int. Q.'A61Ki 7/00
U.S. CI. 424—177 6 CI"'"!*
1. A method of therapeutically treating an animal feeling
pain which comprises administering to the animal a compound
of the formula (I):
(I)
R,— / \-CH2-CH-CH-X
\ / NH2 OH
wherein Ri denotes a hydrogen atom or a hydroxyl group. X
denotes a group — COR2 where R2 is a hydroxyl group, a
lower alkoxy group, a benzyloxy group, an amino group or
a lower alkyl mono- or di-substituted amino group, or X
denotes a group — CH2OH. a group
— Leu— Arg— Pro— NH— C2H5 — CONH— CH— Y or a
I
R3
in which -D-Aad(OBuO- represents D-a-aminoadipic acid
8-tert.-butyl ester.
4 395,401
HENALLY ACTIVE DIPEPTIDES
Francis R. Pfeiffer, Cinnaminson, N.J., assignor to SmithKline
Beckman Corporation, Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Sep. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 300,546
I Int. Q.^ A61K 37/00: C07C 103/52
V.S. Q. 424i-l77 " Claims
1. A chemical compound of the structural formula:
group -CONH-CH-CONH-CH-Y9""*\~'^
R3
R4 [oh J^
where R3 and R4 are equal to each other or are different
from each other and are each a hydrogen atom, an alkyl
group of 1 to 7 carbon atoms, a hydroxyalkyl group contain-
ing 1 to 7 carbon atoms, a mercaptoalkyl group containing 1
to 7 carbon atoms, a carboxyamidoalkyl group containing 2
1518
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
to 8 carbon atoms, an aminoalkyi group containing 1 to 7
carbon atoms, a guanidyl-N-alkyl group containing 2 to 4
carbon atoms, an alkylmercaptoalkyl group containing 2 to
8 carbon atoms, a carboxylalkyl group containing 2 to 8
carbon atoms, an aryl group, especially phenyl, an aralkyi
group, especially phenyl-(Ci-C4)alkyl, or a substituted aral-
kyi group, and Y is a group — CH2OH, a group — COR2 or
a group — CH2COR2 where R2 is as defined above,
n is zero or 1. and the asymmetric carbon atoms present in the
compound may take the R-configuration or the S-configura-
tion or a combination thereof in a non-toxic amount suffi-
cient to reduce or eliminate the pain.
4,395,403
NOVEL POLYPEPTIDES, PROCESSES FOR THEIR
PRODUCTION, PHARMACEUTICAL COMPOSITIONS
COMPRISING SAID POLYPEPTIDES AND THEIR USE
Wilfried Bauer, Lampenberg, and Janos Pless, Basel, both of
Switzerland, assignors to Sandoz Ltd., Basel, Switzerland
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 208,888, Nov. 21, 1980,
abandoned. This application Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,663
Gaims priority, application Switzerland, Nov. 27, 1979,
10524/79; Jun. 13, 1980, 4574/80
Int. a.3 A61K i7/00; C07C lOi/52
U.S. a. 424—177 21 Qaims
1. A polypeptide of formula (I)
A CH2-S-Y1 Y2-S-CH2 <')
N— CH— CO— B— C— D— E— NH— CH— F
. A' • 2 3 4 5 6
wherein
A is C1.12 alkyl, C7.10 phenylalkyl or a group of formula
RCO— , whereby
(i) R is hydrogen, Cmi alkyl, phenyl or
C7. 10 phenylalkyl, or
(ii) RCO— is
(a) an L- or D-phenylalanine residue optionally ring-
substituted by halogen, NO2. NH2. OH, C1.3 alkyl
and/or C1.3 alkoxy
(b) — Asn— or the residue of a natural a-amino acid
having a hydrocarbyl side chain other than defined
under (a) above or of a corresponding D-amino acid,
or
(c) a dipeptide residue in which the individual amino
acid residues are the same or different and are se-
lected from those defined under (a) and/or (b) above,
the a-amino group of amino acid residues (a) and (b)
and the N-terminal amino group of dipeptide residues
(c) being optionally mono- or di-Ci.12 alkylated,
A' is hydrogen or, when A is C1.12 alkyl or C7-10 phenylal-
kyl, also C1.12 alkyl or C7.10 phenylalkyl,
B is — Phe— optionally ring-substituted by halogen, NO2,
NH2, OH, C1.3 alkyl and/or C1.3 alkoxy,
C is — (L)— or — (D)— Trp— optionally a-N-methylated
and optionally benzene-ring-substituted by halogen, NO2,
NH2, OH, C1.3 alkyl and/or C1.3 alkoxy,
D is — Lys— optionally a-N-methylated and optionally
€-N-Ci.3 alkylated,
E is — Thr— or —Ala— each in (D)- or (L)- form and each
being optionally a-N-methylated,
F is a group of formula
/
.R3
C-j
— COORi, — CH2OR2 — CO— N or — CO— N — ^X
\
R4
wherein
R] is hydrogen or C1.3 alkyl,
R2 is hydrogen or the residue of a physiologically accept-
able, physiologically hydrolysable ester,
R3 is hydrogen, C 1.3 alkyl, phenyl, benzyl or C9- 10 phenyl-
alkyl.
R4 is hydrogen, C1.3 alkyl or, when R3 is hydrogen or
methyl, also a group of formula — CH(R5)— X wherein
R5 is hydrogen, — (CH2)2— OH, — (CH2)3— OH, -CH-
2— OH, — CH(CH3)— OH, isobutyl or benzyl and
X is a group of formula
— COORi, — CH2OR2 or — CO— N
/
I
\
R6
R?
wherein
Ri and R2 have the meanings given above,
Rb is hydrogen or C1.3 alkyl and
R7 is hydrogen, C1.3 alkyl, phenyl or C7.10 phenylalkyl,
the group — CHCRs)- X having the D- or L-configura-
tion, and
Y| and Y2 are each hydrogen or together represent a direct
bond,
whereby the residues in the 1- and 6-position each indepen-
dently have the L- or D-configuration,
with the proviso (i) that D- and/or L-cysteine residues are
present at the 1- and 6-positions only, and (ii) that when
R5 is benzyl, X is a group of formula
— CH2OR2 or — CO— N
/
J
\
R6
R7
or a group of formula —COORi, wherein Ri is C1.3 alkyl,
or a pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition salt or
complex thereof.
4,395,404
SYNTHETIC THYMOSIN &■>, AND /34 ANALOGUES
Teresa L. K. Low, Annandale, Va., and Allan L. Goldstein,
Washington, D.C., assignors to George Washington Univer-
sity, Washington, D.C.
Filed May 14, 1982, Ser. No. 378,463
Int. a.3 A61K 37/00; C07C 103/52
U.S. a. 424—177 13 Qaims
1. A peptide of the formula
R-Gly-GIu-Ser-R]
wherein R represents H-Q, Q-Ala-, Q-Gln-Ala, Q-GIu-Lys-
Gln-Ala, Q-Gln-Glu-Lys-Gln-Ala-, Q-Glu-Gln-Glu-Lys-
Gly-Ala, Q-Ile-Glu-Gln-Glu-Lys-Gin-Ala, Q-Thr-Ile-
Glu-Gln-Glu-Lys-Gln-Ala, Q-Glu-Thr-Ile-Glu-Gln-Glu-
Lys-Gin-Ala, or Q-Gln-Sar-wherein Q represents H or
acyl; and Ri represents -OH, -A-C or -A-B-C wherein A
represents Asp or Asn, B represents -Glu-Ile-Thr- and C
represents -Ala-Lys-Thr-Oh.
and the pharmaceutically acceptable acid or base addition salts
thereof.
July 26. 1983
CHEMICAL
1519
4,395,405
ALKYL-KETOHEXOPYRAND-SIDE DERIVATIVES AND
METHOD OF USE
Kanji Noda, Chikushino; Akira Nakagawa, Tosu; Yasushi
Haraguchi, Kamimine; Koichiro Ueda; Munehiko Hirano,
both of Tosu; Itsuo Nishioka, Fukuoka; Akira Yagi, Kasuya;
Akihide Koda, Gifu, and Hiroyuki Ide, Fukuoka, all of Japan,
assignors to Hisamitsu Pharmaceutical Co., Inc., Tosu, Japan
Filed May 15, 1980, Ser. No. 150,129
Claims priority, application Japan, May 23, 1979, 54-64769
Int. a.3 A61K 31/70; C07H 15/04
U.S. a. 424—180 5 Qalms
3. The method of selectively treating the production of
antibody immune globulins causing allergic diseases without
inhibiting the production of immune globulins governing im-
mune reaction by administering an antiallergic effective
amount of a compound represented by the following general
formula
HO.H
(I)
4,395,407
NOVEL PARASITICIDAL POUR-ON COMPOSITIONS
John M. Ballany, Cumbernauld, and Andrew R. Galbraith,
Glasgow, both of Scotland, assignors to Janssen Phar-
maceutica N.V., Beerse, Belgium
Filed Apr. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 365,700
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, May 8, 1981,
8114169; Nov. 16, 1981, 8134406
Int. Cl.^ A61K 31/675, 31/425
U.S. a. 424—200 19 Claims
1. A pour-on or spot-on composition for eradicating or
controlling parasites in non-human animals, said compositions
comprising
(a) from 1 to 30% by weight of tetramisole and/or levamis-
ole;
(b) from 2 to 15% by weight of phosmet; and
(c) one or more optionally substituted aliphatic carboxylic
acids, having each a pK^-value comprised between 0.6
and 6 in a molar excess of 1.5:1 to 12:1 over tetramisole
and/or levamisole
in a suitable solvent and/or carrier.
O— R
CH2OH
OH H
wherein R is an alkyl group having 3-6 carbon atoms, the
compounds excluding the D-fructose derivative wherein R is
n-propyl group.
4,395,406
5-HALOPYRIMID-2-ONES
Mikkel J. Gacek; Reidar Oftebro; Soren Laland, and Kjell
Undheim, all of Oslo, Norway, assignors to Nyegaard & Co.
A /c ^orwflv
Continuation of Ser. No. 61,269, Jul. 27, 1979, abandoned, which
is a continuation of Ser. No. 937,579, Aug. 29, 1978, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 732,189, Oct. 13, 1976,
abandoned. This application Jul. 7, 1980, Ser. No. 166,600
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 16, 1975,
42509/75
Int. a.' A61K 31/505; C07D 239/36, 239/56
U.S. a. 424—180 9 Claims
1. A compound of the formula:
(I)
4,395,408
NOVEL STEROIDS
Vesperto Torelli, Maisons-Alfort; Roger Deraedt, Pavillons-
sous-Bois, and Lucien Nedelec, Le Raincy, ail of France,
assignors to Roussel Uclaf, Paris, France
Filed Aug. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 292,794
Qaims priority, application France, Nov. 21, 1980, 80 24749
Int. a.^ C07J 5/00; AOIN 45/00; C07C 117/00
U.S. a. 424—238 13 Qaims
- 1. A compound selected from the group consisting of (Z)
3a-amino-A'"'(20).5a-pregnene, (20S) 3a-amino-19-nor-5a-
pregnane-20-ol and (208) 3)3-amino-19-nor-5a-pregnane-20-ol
and their non-toxic, pharmaceutically acceptable acid addition
salts.
6. A composition for the treatment of auto immuno maladies
resulting from a deficiency of lymphocytes or malady of an
organ comprising an amount of at least one compound of claim
1 in an amount sufficient to treat autoimmune maladies and an
inert carrier.
wherein X represents a fluorine, chlorine or bromine atom; R'
and R2, which may be the same or different, each represent
hydrogen or a group Alk or SAlk; and R^ represents a group
Alk; Alk being an alkyl, alkenyl or alkynyl group having up to
4 carbon atoms, which group may carry one or more halogen
atoms or 0x0 groups or optionally substituted hydroxy, mer-
capto, carboxyl, carboxamido or amino groups, wherein the
optional substituent is a Cm alkyl, alkenyl, or alkynyl group,
with the proviso that R^ is other than a methyl or ethyl group;
or salts thereof.
7. A pharmaceutical composition for the inhibition of the
metaphase in the growth of malignant tumors and leukaemia,
comprising in association with a pharmaceutical carrier or
excipient, at least one compound as claimed in claim 1.
4 395,409
CARBAMOYLOXYAMiNO-l,4-BENZODIAZEPINES
AND MEDICAMENTS CONTAINING THESE
COMPOUNDS
Manfred Forsch, Nauheim, and Hermann Gerhards, Hofheim
am Taunus, both of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Ho-
echst Aktiengesellschaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Jun. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 269,689
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 4,
1980, 3021107
Int. Q.' C07D 243/20: A61K 31/55
U.S. Q. 424—244 ' Claims
1. A carbamoyloxyamino-l,4-benzodiazepine of the formula
O
H II " ^
N— O— C— N— R*
or of the formula
1520
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
o
N— O— C— N— R^
Rl
or a physiologically tolerated salt of such a compound,
wherein
R' is halogen, nitro. or trifluoromethyl;
R2 is phenyl, pyridyl, or phenyl which is mono- or di-sub-
stituted by Ci-C4alkyl, Ci-C4alkoxy, hydroxy, halogen,
or trifluoromethyl;
R3 is hydrogen, C1-C4 alkyl, monoalkylcarbamoyloxy, or
dialkylcarbamoyloxy; and
R* is phenyl or phenyl which is mono- or di-substituted by
halogen, nitro, cyano, trifluoromethyl, C1-C4 alkyl,
C1-C4 alkoxy, hydroxy, or dialkylamino having 1-4 car-
bon atoms in each alkyl.
4,395,411
PYRIMIDINYL CEPHALOSPORANIC ACID
DERIVATIVES AND PHARMACEUTICAL
COMPOSITIONS
Takashi Kamiya, Suita; Tsutomu Tersyi, Toyonaka; Yoshihani
Nakai, Otsu; Kazuo Sakane, Amagasaki, and Jiro Goto, Suita,
all of Japan, assignors to Fujisawa Pharmaceutical Co., Ltd.,
Osaka, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 32,778, Apr. 24, 1979, Pat. No. 4,267,176,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 960,226, Not. 13,
1978, abandoned. This application Dec. 5, 1980, Ser. No. 213,684
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Nov. 14, 1977,
47352/77; Apr. 27, 1978, 16810/78; Sep. 4, 1978, 35436/78
Int. a.3 A61K 31/545; C07D 501/34
U.S. a. 424—246 16 Qaims
1. A compound of the formula:
R2
R'— X— CONH-
r Y
R3
o^^ ^ Y^^'
wherein
R' is a group of the formula:
4,395,410
QUATERNARY AMMONIUM ANTIARRHYTHMIC
DRUGS
Bryan B. Molloy, North Salem, and Mitchell I. Steinberg, Indi-
anapolis, both of Ind., assignors to Eli Lilly and Company,
Indianapolis, Ind.
Division of Ser. No. 102,043, Dec. 10, 1979, Pat. No. 4,289,787,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 861,789, Dec. 19,
1977, abandoned. This application Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No.
273,822
Int. CI.' A61K 31/33. 31/445; C07D 207/04; A61K 31/40
U.S. a. 424—244 13 Qaims
1. A compound having the general formula
r6
R> r5
I I ,
CH2— (CH2)„— C— + N— R* X-
R2 r5
Rfc' Re'
in which
Rfl' is hydrogen, amino or a protected amino group, R*' and
Re' are each hydrogen, halogen, lower alkoxy, phe-
nylthio, tolylthio, xylylthio, mesitylthio or naphthylthio,
R2 is hydrogen or lower alkoxy,
R3 is hydrogen or lower alkyl,
R^ is hydrogen, halogen, carbamoyloxymethyl, lower alkyl,
lower alkoxy, lower alkanoyloxymethyl or lower al-
kanoylthiomethyl,
R5 is carboxy or a protected carboxy group, and
X is a group of the formula:
R'
wherein:
n is 1 or 2;
R' is hydrogen or C1-C2 alkyl;
R2 is hydrogen or C1-C3 alkyl;
R3 is C1-C4 alkyl or phenyl C1-C4 alkyl;
R* and R' taken together with the adjacent nitrogen to
which they are attached complete a heterocyclic ring
having 4 to 7 carbon atoms;
R^ and R^ independently are hydrogen, hydroxy, halogen,
nitro, C1-C3 alkoxy, or C1-C3 alkyl, provided that at least
one of R^ and R^ is hydrogen, and
X is a therapeutically acceptable anion.
10. A method of treating re-entrant arrhythmias in humans
suffering from such arrhythmias and in need of treatment or in
humans suspected of developing a re-entrant arrhythmia com-
prising administering to such subject an antiarrhythmically
effective dose of a compound of claim 1.
— C—
II
N
O— R^
in which R^ is hydrogen, lower alkyl, mono to trihalo
(lower) alkyl, lower alkenyl, lower alkynyl, phenyl, tolyl,
xylyl, cumenyl, naphthyl, phenyl (lower) alkyl, mono or
dihalo (lower) alkanoyl, or lower alkoxy, and non-toxic,
pharmaceutically acceptable salts thereof.
15. An anti-bacterial pharmaceutical composition compris-
ing, as an active ingredient, an effective amount of the com-
pound of claim 1, in association with a non-toxic, pharinaceuti-
cally acceptable carrier or excipient.
July 26, 198:
CHEMICAL
4,395,412
7a-METHOXYCEPHALOSPORINS
Isamu Saikawa; Shuntaro Takano; Hiroyuki Imaizumi; Isamu
Takakura; Hirokazu Ochiai; Takashi Yasuda; Hideo Taki;
Masaru Tai, and Yutaka Kodama, all of Toyama, Japan,
assignors to Toyama Chemical Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Division of Ser. No. 117,784, Feb. 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,321,265,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 926,939, Jul. 21, 1978,
abandoned. This application Dec. 31, 1980, Ser. No. 221,622
Claims priority, application Japan, Jul. 23, 1977, 52-88733;
Feb. 2, 1978, 53-9869; Jun. 13, 1978, 53-70417
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Dec. 12,
1995, has been disclaimed.
Int. CI.' C07D 501/57; A61K 31/545
U.S. CI. 424—246 23 Claims
1. A 7a-methoxy-cephalosporin or a saU thereof, said 7a-
.C^N— O— A— N
/
\
1521
/I/
R|
osporin being represented by the formula
methoXy-cepha
o o
H
A— N N-l-CONH— CH— CONH-
I
B
wherein
A represents a C2-6 straight or branched alkylene chain, R
and R' each represent a C1.6 alkyl group or they form to-
gether with the adjacent nitrogen atom a piperazinyl
group optionally substituted with a C1.3 alkyl or benzyl
group,
R2 and R^ each denote a hydrogen atom or together form a
valency bond,
R"* denotes a Ci-io alkyl or C2. 10 alkenyl group, and n is 4 or
5.
OCH3
S
coor'
wherein R' represents a hydrogen atom or a carboxyl-protect-
ing group; R^ represents a substituted or unsubstituted lower
alkoxy, lower alkylthio, or Ci-ioacyloxy group, the substitu-
ent of the substituted group being selected from halogen, lower
alkyl, phenyl, C2-5 alkenyl, hydroxyl, lower alkoxy, lower
alkylthio, nitro, cyano, lower alkylamino, di-lower alkylamino,
Ci-ioacylamino, Ci-ioacyl, Ci-ioacyloxy, Ci-io acyl-lower
alkyl, carboxyl, carbamoyl, amino-lower alkyl. N-lower al-
kylamino-lower alkyl, N,N-di-lower alkylamino-lower alkyl,
hydroxy-lower alkyl, hydroxyimino-lower alkyl, lower al-
koxy-lower alkyl, carboxyl-lower alkyl, sulfo-lower alkyl,
sulfo, sulfamoyl-lower alkyl, sulfamoyl, carbamoyl-lower al-
kyl, carbamoyl-C2-5 alkenyl, and N-hydroxycarbamoyl-lower
alkyl; R^ represents a lower alkyl group; n is 0, 1 or 2; A
represents a hydrogen atom or a substituted or unsubstituted
straight or branched chain Cu 14 alkyl group, the substituent of
the substituted group being selected from halogen, lower alk-
oxy, cyano, nitro, carboxyl, lower alkoxycarbonyl, lower
alkylthio, and Cmo acyl; and B represents a substituted or
unsubstituted C5-6 cycloalkyl, C5-6 cycloalkenyl, C5-6 cy-
cloalkadienyl or heterocyclic group, said heterocyclic group
being composed of a 5 or 6 membered aromatic heterocyclic
ring which is composed of carbon and at least one hetero atom
selected from S, O and N, or of said aromatic heterocyclic ring
fused to a benzene ring, the substituent of the substituted group
being selected from halogen, lower alkyl, lower alkoxy, hy-
droxyl, Ci-ioacyl, Ci-ioacyloxy. mercapto, lower alkylthio,
nitro, amino, protected amino, imino, protected imino, and
carboxyl.
4,395,414
SUBSTITUTED QUINOLINONE-ALKANECARBOXYLIC
ACIDS AND MEDICAMENTS CONTAINING THEM,
HAVING A HYPERGLYCAEMIC ACTION
Klaus Eistetter, Constance; Erich Rapp, Radolfzell, and Horst
Wolf, Constance, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Byk Gulden Lomberg Chemische Fabrik Gesellschaft mit
Beschrankter Haftung, Constance, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,247
Claims priority, applicgtion European Pat. Off., Aug. 14,
1980, 80104800.0
Int. CI.' A61K 31/47; C07D 215/22
U.S. CI. 424—258 8 Claims
1. A substituted quinolinone of the general formula I
(1)
4,395,413
OXIME ETHERS AND PHARMACEUTICAL
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING THE SAME
Zoltin Budai; Aranka Lay nee Konya; Tibor Mezei; Lujza
Petocz; Katalin Grasser; Ibolya Kosoczky; Enikd Szirt nee
Kiszelly, and Peter Gorog, all of Budapest, Hungary, assign-
ors to Egyt Gyogyszervegyeszeti Gyar, Budapest, Hungary
Filed Jun. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 162,674
Claims priority, application Hungary, Jul. 3, 1979, EE 2675
Int. CI.' A61K 31/15; C07D 295/08
U.S. CI. 424—250 7 Qaims
1. An oxime ether of the general formula /!/ or a pharma-
ceutically acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
wherein
R', R2 and R^ are identical or different and each denotes a
hydrogen atom, a halogen atom, a hydroxyl group, an
alkoxy group with 1 to 4 carbon atoms, an amino group, a
dialkylamino group, each alkyl radical having 1 to 4 car-
bon atoms, or a nitro group,
R* and R^ are identical or different and each denotes a hy-
drogen atom, a halogen atom, an alkoxy group with 1 to 4
carbon atoms, a hydroxyl group, an amino group or a
dialkylamino group, each alkyl radical having 1 to 4 car-
bon atoms, or
R^ and R' together denote a methylenedioxy group bonded
to two adjacent ring carbon atoms, and A denotes an
alkylene group with 1 to 5 carbon atoms,
an ester thereof with an alkanol with 1 to 5 carbon atoms, or a
salt thereof with an inorganic and organic base.
7. A hyperglycaemic pharmaceutical composition having
pharmaceutically-acceptable inert carrier in admixture with an
effective amount of a pharmaceutically-acceptable compound
according to claim 1, 2, 3 or 4.
1522
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,415
N-OXOPYRIDIN-2-YL-DITHIO-(4-NITRO-2-TRI-
CHLOROMETHYLBENZENE) AND A FUNGICIDAL
FORMULATION CONTAINING SAME
Helmut Hagen, Frankenthal; Hans Ziegler, Mutterstadt; Celia
J. Mappes, Westheim, and Ernst-Heinrich Pommer, Limbur-
gerhof, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Ak-
tiengesellschaft. Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,128
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, May 16,
1980, 3018716
Int. a.3 C07D lli/l]: A61K il/44
U.S. a. 424—263 2 Qaims
1. N-Oxo-pyridirv-2-yl-dithio-(4-nitro-2-trichloromethylben-
zene).
2. A fungicidal formulation comprising a carrier and/or
diluent and from 0.1 to 95 weight percent of the compound of
claim 1.
4,395,416
1-SPIRO ISOBENZOFURANIC AND 1-SPIRO
ISOBENZOTHIOPHENIC DERIVATIVES THE PROCESS
FOR PREPARING THE SAME AND THEIR USE IN
THERAPEUTICS
Michel Langlois, Buc; Bernard P. Bucher, Marnes la Coquette;
Philippe L. Dostert, Paris; Alain P. Lacour, La Varenne, and
Gerard H. Moinet, Orsay, all of France, assignors to Dela-
lande S.A., Courbevoie, France
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,415
Claims priority, application France, Jan. 29, 1981, 81 01692;
Jan. 14, 1982, 81 00518
Int. a.5 A61K i7/i95; C07D 491/07
U.S. a. 424—267 13 Claims
■ 1. A compound of the formula
(CH2)„
(CH2)„
in which Z is >N— R| or — CH2— , wherein Ri is alkyl having
1 to 5 carbon atoms, phenyl or chlorophenyl, and in which
1. when
Zis>N— Ri,
n is 1, or 2,
the pair (A,>C==X) is selected from the group consist-
ing of (S, C=0), (S, CH2), (O, CH2) and (O, CH— C6H5).
and
R is hydrogen, halogen, one or two methoxy groups or
— CH=CH— CH=CH— connected to the 5 and 6
positions of the phenyl nucleus whereby to form a
naphthyl nucleus, and
2. when
Z is — CH2—
n is 1 or 2,
A is oxygen, _
>C===X is >C=0 or >C=:S, and 7
R is the same as defined above,
and the pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof when Z is >N— Ri, in combination with a pharmaceu-
tically acceptable vehicle.
4,395,417
ANTIHYPERLIPIDEMIC COMPOSITIONS
Iris Hall; George Cocolas, both of Chapel Hill, and James M.
Chapman, Jr., Ashville, all of N.C., assignors to Research
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 142,678
Int. a.J A61K 21/045. 31/19. 31/12
U.S. a. 424—270 14 Qaims
1. Antihyperlipidemic compositions comprising a pharma-
ceutically acceptable carrier and, as the principal active ingre-
dient, a compound of the group represented by the formulas:
in which Z is >N— R| or — CH2— , wherein Ri is alkyl having
1 to 5 carbon atoms, phenyl or chlorophenyl, and in which
1. when
Zis>N— Ri,
n is 1 or 2,
the pair (A,>C X) is selected from the group con-
sisting of (S. C=0), (S. CH2), (O, CH2) and (O,
CH— C6H5). and
R is hydrogen, halogen, one or two methoxy groups or
— CH=CH— CH=CH— connected to the 5 and 6
positions of the phenyl nucleus whereby to form a
naphthyl nucleus, and
2. when ^
Zis— CH2—
n is 1 or 2
A is oxygen,
>C=^X is >C=0 or >C=S, and
R is the same as defined above, with the provisos that
(a) when- >C X is >C=0, R is not hydrogen,
and
(b) when the pair (>C X, n) is (>C3=0, 2), R is
not 5— Br,
and the pharmacologically acceptable acid addition salts
thereof when Z is >N — Ri.
13. An analgesic or anticonvulsant composition comprising a
therapeutically effective amount of a compound of the formula
OC >-*^"^"^ oc
R
o
o
R
c
Y-(CH2)„^ X
O
It
c
\
Y-(CH2)„^
S
o o
<JO'
wherein X is aryl, cycloalkyl, or cycloalkylene containing up
to ten carbon atoms; Y is CH or N; Z is alkyl containing up to
five carbon atoms, carboxyl, carboalkoxyl wherein the alkyl
group contains up to four carbon atoms, acyl containing up to
four carbon atoms, alkylene, aryl, aralkyl or aralhylene; n is 1
to 10; and further compounds wherein the group represented
by X is replaced with at least one hydrogen on each of the
carbon atoms adjacent the oxygen bearing functional groups
and pharmaceutically acceptable acid; and alkali metal addi-
tion salts thereof.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1523
4,395,418
PENEM-3.CARBOXYLIC ACID DERIVATIVES
Eiji Ohki; Sadao Oida; Akira Yoshida; Teruo Hayashi, and
Shinichi Sugiwara, all of Hiromachi, Japan, assignors to
Sankyo Company Limited, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jun. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 271,010
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 6, 1980, 55-76128;
Jun. 23, 1980, 55-84981
Int. a.3 A61K 31/425; C07D 499/00
U.S. a. 424—270 8 Qaims
1. Compounds of formula (I):
effective amount of doxepin or a physiologically acceptable
acid addition salt thereof.
rI S
s— A— n:
,R^
^R3
(I)
R«
wherein:
R' represents a 1-hydroxyethyl group;
R2 represents a hydrogen atom or a C1-C2 alkyl group;
R3 represents a hydrogen atom, a formimidoyl group, or an
acetimidoyi group;
A represents an ethylene or trimethylene group having one
methyl group in the a-position in its carbon chain; and
R^represents a carboxy group or a pivaloyloxymethoxycar-
bonyl group; and pharmaceutically acceptable salts
thereof.
4,395,421
DISODIUM CROMOGLYCATE FORMULATIONS
James E. Taylor, Loughborough, and Neil A. Stevenson, Nan-
pantan, both of England, assignors to Fisons Limited, Ipswich,
England
Continuation of Ser. No. 830,617, Sep. 6, 1977, abandoned. This
application Aug. 16, 1979, Ser. No. 67,104
Gaims priority, application United Kingdom, Oct. 16, 1976,
43054/76
Int. a.^ A61K 31/35
U.S. a. 424—283 14 Qaims
1. Disodium cromoglycate produced by wet granulation in a
form having a bulk density of from 0.34 to 0.7 g per ml. and
containing less than 5% by weight of any other compound,
with the exception of water.
4,395,419
PHARMACOLOGICALLY ACTIVE COMPOUNDS
Graham J. Durant; Charon R. Ganellin, both of Welwyn Garden
City, and Rodney C. Young, Bengeo, all of England, assignors
to Smith Kline & French Laboratories Limited, Welwyn Gar-
den City, England
Division of Ser. No. 65,478, Aug. 10, 1979, Pat. No. 4,308,275,
which is a division of Ser. No. 914,329, Jun. 12, 1978, Pat. No.
4,189,488, which is a division of Ser. No. 773,590, Mar. 2, 1977,
Pat. No. 4,118,502. This application Aug. 10, 1981, Ser. No.
291,196
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Mar. 11, 1976,
9750/76
Int. a.3 A61K 31/425; C07D 285/10 285/12
U.S. a. 424—270 10 Oaims
1. A compound of the formula
Het-(CH2)m— Y-(CH2)„-NH-C=NR
4,395,422
SPRAY DRIED VITAMIN E POWDER
Douglass N. Schmidt, Grosse He, Mich., and Frank Fischctti,
Jr., Flushing, N.Y., assignors to BASF Wyandotte Corpora-
tion, Wyandotte, Mich.
Filed Apr. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 251,076
Int. a.' AOIN 43/16
U.S. a. 424—284 8 Qaims
1. A vitamin E powder suitable for the preparation of direct
compression vitamin Ublets comprising 20 to 60 percent by
weight Vitamin E, 0.5 to 2.0 percent by weight silicon dioxide
having a particle size of 1 millimicron to 1 micron, I to 25
percent by weight hydrolyzed gelatin, and about 20 to 30
percent by weight caseinate, with the proviso that the weight
ratio of caseinate to gelatin be greater than 1:1 all weight based
on the total weight of powder.
wherein Het is a thiadiazole ring, which ring is optionally
substituted by lower alkyl, halogen, lower alkoxy, hydroxy,
trifluoromethyl, hydroxymethyl or amino; m is 0, 1 or 2 and n
is 2 or 3 provided that the sum of m and n is 3 or 4; Y is sulphur,
methylene or oxygen; R is hydrogen, lower alkyl or He-
t— (CH2)m— Y— (CH2)n— where Het, m, n and Y are as de-
fined above; Q is — CO2H or — SO2H; or a pharmaceutically
acceptable acid addition salt thereof.
9. A method of blocking histamine H2-receptors which
comprises administering to an animal in need thereof in an
effective amount to block said receptors a compound of claim
1.
4,395,423
POLYCYCLIC CYANOKETONES
Helmut C. Neumann, East Greenbush, N.Y., assignor to Steriing
Drug Inc., New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 950,254, Oct. 10, 1978, abandoned.
This application Dec. 6, 1979, Ser. No. 100,983
Int. Q.' C07C 121/48; A61K 31/275
U.S. Q. 424—304 2 Qaims
1. A composition for the prevention and/or healing of gas-
tric or intestinal ulcers in a mammal which comprises a thera-
peutically effective amount of a compound having the formula
CH3
4,395,420
METHOD AND COMPOSITION FOR TREATING
PRURITIS
Joel E. Bernstein, 615 Brierhill Rd., Deerfield, III. 60015
Filed Dec. 9, 1981, Ser. No. 328,955
Int. a? A61K 31/02. 31/33. 31/135. 31/335
U.S. Q. 424-278 !« Claims
1. A method of treating pruritis in humans in need of such
treatment comprising topically applying a therapeutically
NC-
0='
COOR
CH3
wherein R is hydrogen or lower-alkyl of one to three carbon
atoms; a 3-lower-alkanoyl enol ester thereof wherein lower-
alkanoyl has from two to four carbon atoms; or an alkali meul
salt thereof incorporated in a pharmaceutical carrier suiuble
for oral administration.
1524
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,424
COSMETIC COMPOSITION AND METHOD OF MAKING
THE SAME
Ruby G. Veney, 4520 Pine St., Philadelphia, Pa. 19143
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 21,551, Mar. 19, 1979, Pat. No.
4,255,452. This application Feb. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 236,989
The portion of the term of this patent subsequent to Mar. 10,
1998, has been disclaimed.
Int. a.3 A61K 47/00
U.S. a. 424—359 3 Claims
1. A composition for topical application to the body consist-
ing essentially of a mixture of about 25 to 35 parts by weight,
non-fat dry milk solids, about 15 to 25 parts by weight witch
hazel, about 35 to 45 parts by weight olive oil, about 150 to 200
parts by weight water and about 1 to 2 parts by weight poly-
oxyethylene having a hydroxyl number of from about 40 to
about 60 .
4,395,426
DRY MIX FOR BREAD
Steve T. Fan, Maple Grove, Minn., assignor to General Mills,
Inc., Minneapolis, Minn.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 287,457
Int. a.3 A21D 10/00
U.S. a. 426—62 7 Qaims
1. A dry mix for preparing bread without requiring a knead-
ing step, said mix comprising:
A. flour having an average vital gluten content of at least
about 8% by weight;
B. about 2 parts to 10 parts by weight of active dry yeast per
100 parts flour;
C. about 1 part to 10 parts by weight of a chemical leavening
agent per 100 parts flour;
D. 0.5 to 1.5 parts by weight per 100 parts of flour of a
propylene glycol alginate; and
E. about 2 parts to 10 parts of a gum member by weight per
100 parts flour selected from the group consisting of kar-
aya gum, guar gum, xanthan gum, high viscosity carboxy-
methyl cellulose, high viscosity carrageenan gum, and
mixtures thereof.
4,395,425
USE OF PRINS REACTION PRODUCTS OF
DIISOAMYLENE DERIVATIVES TO AUGMENT OR
ENHANCE THE AROMA OR TASTE OF FOODSTUFFS
Richard M. Boden, Monmouth Beach, N.J., assignor to Interna-
tional Flavors & Fragrances Inc., New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 267,850, May 28, 1981, Pat. No. 4,359,412.
This application Jun. 24, 1982, Ser. No. 391,588
Int. a.3 A23L 1/226
MS. a. 426—3 8 Claims
1. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma or taste
of a foodstuff or chewing gum comprising the step of adding to
said footstuff or chewing gum from about 0.2 parts per million
up to about 150 parts per million based on total foodstuff
composition or chewing gum composition of a mixture of
compounds defined according to the structure:
y^
wherein R represents hydrogen or C2-C4 acyl and wherein i
each of the compounds of the mixture, one of the dashed linei
is a carbon-carbon double bond and each of the other of the
dashed lines are carbon-carbon single bonds.
6. A process for augmenting or enhancing the aroma or taste
of a foodstuff or chewing gum composition comprising the
step of adding to said foodstuff or chewing gum composition
from about 0.2 parts per million up to about 150 parts per
million based on total food composition or a chewing gum
composition of a mixture of compounds defined according to
the structure:
4,395,427
METHOD AND APPARATUS FOR DEPOSITING DOUGH
ON A CONVEYOR
Harry A. Fischer, Ada; Paul J. Koepnick, Grand Rapids;
Thomas A. Dennis, Nunica, and Joseph R. Anderson, Ada, all
of Mich., assignors to Werner Lehara, Inc., Grand Rapids,
Mich.
Filed May 12, 1981, Ser. No. 262,999
Int. a.3 A23P 1/00; B29F 3/04
U.S. CI. 426—231 23 Claims
wherein in the mixture in each of the molecules one of the
dashed lines represents a carbon-carbon double bond and each
of the other of the dashed lines represent carbon-carbon single
bonds.
5>/ ^^
1. A method of dispensing food product mix onto a con-
veyor or the like to make shaped food products, said method
comprising the steps of:
depositing a quantity of mix into a hopper, said hopper being
of the type having a plurality of discharge apertures and a
plurality of dies, each supported at one of said apertures;
forcing the mix through said apertures and into said dies;
severing the mix to form a shaped product which is depos-
ited on the conveyor;
monitoring the flow of mix through said dies and the food
product shapes; and
varying the flow area at selected ones of said apertures in a
balanced, uniform fashion from complementary portions
of the periphery of said selected ones of said apertures so
that the weight of the food product shapes deposited onto
the conveyor is maintained substantially the same from
each of said dies.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1525
4,395,428
PROCESS FOR PREPARING COOKED MEAT HAVING
REDUCED LEVELS OF N-NITROSAMINES
Richard F. Theiler, Scottsdale, Ariz., assignor to Armour and
Company, Phoenix, Ariz.
Filed Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,743
Int. a.3 A23B 4/02. 4/14
U.S. a. 426—266 17 Qaims
1. A process for preparing a cured meat product which,
when cooked for comsumption, contains substantially reduced
levels of N-nitrosamines, comprising the steps of introducing
into uncured meat a nitrite-containing curing composition, a
tocopherol, and an inhibitor substance selected from the group
consisting of preneutralized liquid smoke, buffered liquid
smoke, reducing sugar, and mixtures thereof, and processing
said meat to effect curing.
4,395,429
EXPANDABLE FOOD COMPOSITION
Jean-Claude Ctmpagne, and Guy Frappier, both of Melle,
France, assignors to Rhone-Poulenc Industries, Paris, France
Filed Mar. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 246,158
Oaims priority, application France, Mar. 21, 1980, 80 06305
Int. a.' A23J 3/02; A23G 9/04; A23C 9/154
U.S. CI. 426—271 29 Qaims
1. A storage-stable composition of matter comprising: (i) a
purified, undenatured lactoserum protein fraction obtamed by
extracting lactoserum first with at least one anion exchange
resion and then with silica, or by extracting lactoserum first
with silica and then with at least one anion exchange resin, the
lactoserum being contacted with said anion exchange resm at a
pH between about 4 and about 7.5 and at a temperature be-
tween about 0- and about 50° C, whereby protein becomes
fixed to said anion exchange resin and to the silica, and then
eluting the fixed protein from the anion exchange resin and
from the silica, said anion exchange resin comprising a support
of alumina or silica, coated with less than 20 mg/m^ of a cross-
linked polymer film bearing tertiary amine functional groups
or quarternary ammonium salts having the general formulae
-CH2-N-CH2- or -CH2-N( + >-(R)3X<-),
R
O
II
O O— C— R3
II /
c — c
/ / \
Rl R2 O— C— R4
II
o
wherein Ri and R2 are methyl radicals or one of them is a
methyl radical and the other is an ethyl radical and R3 and R4
are the same or different Cj to C18 alkyl radicals.
6. A method of imparting or enhancing the effect of a vicinal
diketone in a foodstuff of which said vicinal diketone forms an
essential element of the flavor or aroma, which method com-
prises incorporating into said foodstuff, prior to cooking, about
1 to 2000 ppm by weight of an alpha-keto diacyloxy compound
having the structural formula
O
II
O O— C— Rj
II /
c — c
/ / \
R, R2 O-C— R4
wherein Ri and R2 are methyl radicals or one of them is a
methyl radical and the other is an ethyl radical and R3 and R4
are the same or different Ci to Cig alkyl radicals, whereby said
vicinal diketone is generated substantially continuously during
the cooking cycle.
wherein each R, which may be identical or different, repre-
sents an alkyl or hydroxyalkyl radical having 1 to 4 carbon
atoms and X is a mineral or organic anion, said silica and said
support having a grain size between about 4 ^.m and 5 mm. a
specific surface of about 5 to 150 m2/g, a pore volume of about
0.4 to 2 cm Vg and a pore diameter between about 250 and 2500
A; and (ii) a Xanthomonas hydrophilic colloid; sufficient
amounts of (i) and (ii) being present such that said composition
is capable of being whipped to form a stable edible food sub-
strate.
4.395,431
PROCESSING OF HOP RESINS AND SIMILAR
MATERIALS
David G. Lance, St. Andrews, and Raymond N. Skinner, Greens-
borough, both of Australia, assignors to Carlton and United
Breweries Limited, Carlton, Australia
Filed May 14, 1980, Ser. No. 149,566
Qaims priority, application Australia, May 15, 1979, PD8792;
Jan. 22, 1980, PE2085
Int. a.' C12C 9/02
U.S. CI. 426—600 7 Qaims
1. A method for producing a hop resin product comprising
the steps of:
contacting an inert hydrophobic support with a solvent-free
two phase system comprising a hop resin extract and an
aqueous phase to effect coating of said resin onto said
support, and
separating the resin-coated support from said system.
4,395,430
DIKETONE GENERATORS
Brian Byrne, Hamburg, and Robert S. DeSimone, Oakland, both
of N.J., assignors to Hercules Incorporated, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Jun. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 276,630
Int. a.3 C07C 69/76, 67/02; C09F 5/08; A23L 1/226
U.S. a. 426—534 ^^ Claims
1. An alpha-keto diacyloxy compound having the structural
formula
4,395,432
iS-ALUMINA COATING
Frank D. Rizzelli, and Kimon Papadopoulos, both of Pittsburgh,
Pa., assignors to Westinghouse Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,107
Int. C\? B05D 1/08. 5/12
U.S. a. 427—34 10 Cl"™«
1. A method of coating a substrate with /3-alumma, a com-
pound of alumina and an alkali metal oxide, comprising:
(1) forming a powdered mixture of about 80 to about 95% by
weight /3-alumina and about 5 to about 20% by weight of
a carbonate of an alkali metal; and
(2) spraying said powdered mixture through a source of heat
sufficient to melt it, and onto said substrate.
1526
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
435,433
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING A
SEMICONDUCTOR DEVICE HAVING REGIONS OF
DIFFERENT THERMAL CONDUCTIVITY
Yoshihide Nagakubo, and Susumu Kohyama, both of Kawasaki,
Japan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Nov. 18, 1980, Ser. No. 207,934
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 22, 1979, 54-150731
Int. O? HOIL 21/26. 21/268
U.S. a. 427—35 10 Qaims
4,395,434
METHOD FOR IMPROVING SURFACE PROPERTIES
OF SHAPED ARTICLES OF SYNTHETIC RESINS
Kiyoshi Imada, Omiya; Susumu Ueno, and Hirokazu Nomura,
both of Ibaraki, all of Japan, assignors to Shin-Etsu Chemical
Co., Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,536
Claims priority, application Japan, Sep. 16, 1980, 55-128093;
Sep. 16, 1980, 55-128094
Int. a.J B05D 3/04: B08B 17/02
U.S. a. 427—38 10 Oaims
1. A method for modifying the surface properties of a shaped
article of a synthetic resin which comprises exposing the sur-
face of the shaped article to a low temperature plasma gener-
ated in a gaseous atmosphere containing a nitrogen-containing
organic compound selected from the group consisting of or-
ganic amine compounds represented by the general formula
R'-NR22i in which R' is a monovalent hydrocarbon group and
R2 is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hydrocarbon group,
organic acid amide compounds represented by the general
formula R3-C0-NR*2. in which R^ is a monovalent hydrocar-
bon group and R* is a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hydro-
carbon group, organic diamine compounds represented by the
general formula R52N-R*-NR'2. in which R* and R' are each
a hydrogen atom or a monovalent hydrocarbon group and R^
is a divalent hydrocarbon group and heterocyclic organic
compounds having at least one nitrogen atom in a molecule as
the ring member, at a pressure in the range from 0.001 to 10
Torr, and then contacting the compound with a halogen or a
halogen-containing compound.
4,395,435
METHOD FOR MANUFACTURING INFORMATION
RECORDING MEDIUM
Hideo Sanpei, Hiratsuka; Kunio Matsuno, Yokosuka; Shyoji
Hirano, and Katuya Kumagai, both of Yokohama, all of Ja-
pan, assignors to Tokyo Shibaura Denki Kabushiki Kaisha,
Kawasaki, Japan
Filed Mar. 5, 1982, Ser. No. 355,114
Claims priority, application Japan, Mar. 11, 1981, 56-34837
Int. a.3 CUB 23/00
U.S. a. 427—38 12 Claims
S
1. In a method for manufacturing a semiconductor device,
the process comprising the steps of:
a. forming an insulating film on selected portions of a semi-
conductor substrate; and
b. tending to accumulate polysilicon on the entire surface of
the insulating film and the exposed portions of the semi-
conductor substrate simultaneous with or followed by
exposing said polysilicon to an energy beam, whereby the
polysilicon tending to accumulate on the exposed portions
of the semiconductor substrate is crystallized to silicon
and the polysilicon tending to accumulate on the surface
of the insulating film is not crystallized but scattered by
the energy beam.
1. A method for manufacturing an information recording
medium, comprising:
placing, in a reaction region, a target on a surface of which is
recorded information in a form of an indented pattern and
the surface of which exhibits electrical conductivity;
introducing a plasma generating gas into a plasma generating
region isolated from said reaction region, activating the
plasma generating gas by microwaves to generate a plasma;
and
introducing the plasma from said plasma generating region and
an organic monomer into said reaction region independently
of each other to initiate polymerization of the organic mono-
mer, thereby forming a dielectric layer of a polymer of the
monomer and of a uniform, small thickness along the in-
dented pattern of said target.
4,395,436
PROCESS FOR PREPARING ELECTROCHEMICAL
MATERIAL
Giuseppe Bianchi; Antonio Nidola, and Gian N. Martelli, all of
Milan, Italy, assignors to Oronzio de Nora Impianti Elettro-
chimici S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Filed Nov. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 206,746
Qaims priority, application Italy, Dec. 20, 1979, 28250 A/79
Int. Q.3 B05D 5/12
U.S. Q. 427—53.1 51 Qaims
1. In a process of preparing an electrode comprising a valve
metal substrate and an electroconductive metal coating by
applying a compound of said metal capable of decomposing to
said substrate and decomposing said coating by heating to form
said electroconductive coating, the improvement which com-
JULY 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1527
prises subjecting said coating to localized high intensive heat
sufficient to decompose said compound while maintaining at
least a portion of the substrate at a lower temperature than that
of said coating to quench cool the coating and wherein the
bulk of the substrate and the atmosphere surrounding the
coating are maintained at a lower temperature than that of said
coating during the localized high intensive heat.
20. A process for preparing homogeneous phases of oxides
of at least two different metals wherein a mixture of thermally
reducible salts of said metals is subjected to localized heating in
an oxidizing atmosphere to a temperature above the decompo-
sition temperature of the reducible salts by means of a scanning
laser beam and the oxides are cooled to below 350° C. within
100 seconds or less from the instant of the application of the
heat.
serve as a mask for diffusion or implantation of selected impuri-
ties into selected regions of said wafer, the steps of:
disposing said wafer in a closed reaction chamber evacuated
to a pressure less than about 1 Torr and heated to an
elevated temperature in the range of about 650 to 900
degrees Centigrade;
supplying to the interior of said chamber a gaseous mixture
comprising primarily ammonia and a silicon compound
£t=£
«-
42
^
■^
3
1 GROW TWIN LAYER OF
SIUCON DIOXIDE (300-eOOl)
2 DEPOSIT LAYER OF SILICON
NITRIDE (900-2000l)
4 395,437
METHOD OF FORMING A SECONDARY EMISSIVE
COATING ON A DYNODE
Alan G. Knapp, Crawley, England, assignor to U.S. Philips
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Continuation of Ser. No. 135,965, Mar. 31, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jul. 27, 1981, Ser. No. 286,906
Qaims priority, application United Kingdom, Apr. 2, 1979,
7911400; Mar. 13, 1980, 8008511
Int. CV B05D 5/12
U.S. Q. 427—78 *3 Qaims
adapted to react together with said ammonia at said ele-
vated temperature gradually to deposit said layer of sili-
con nitride on said wafer at a deposition rate greater than
approximately 50 Angstroms per minute, said silicon com-
pound having a flow rate of greater than approximately 12
cubic centimeters per minute, said ammonia and said
selected silicon compound having a ratio of relative con-
centrations in said mixture preselected to be in the range
of 4:1 and 20:1.
JT"
"ZZZZLIZZZZ.
',••,".
izzr:
4 395 439
METHOD OF MANUFACTURING MAGNETIC
RECORDING MEDIUM
Tatsuji Kitamoto, and Ryuji Shirahata, both of Odawara, Japan,
assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Filed May 19, 1981, Ser. No. 265,123
Qaims priority, application Japan, May 20, 1980, 55-66877
Int. Q.3 HOIF 10/02
U.S. Q. 427—132 *3 Qaims
6. A method of forming a secondary emissive coating on a
dynode, said method comprising the steps of:
vapor depositing a composite coating of magnesium and
aluminum onto the dynode;
vapor depositing a coating of aluminum over the composite
coating;
oxidizing the exposed aluminum layer; and
activating the coated dynode by heating it in an oxygen
atmosphere until at least part of the magnesium diffuses
through the oxidized aluminum coating and becomes
oxidized.
'^ 4,395,438
LOW PRESSURE CHEMICAL VAPOR DEPOSTTION OF
SILICON NITRIDE nLMS
Ping-Wang Chiang, Los Gatos, Calif., assignor to Amdahl Cor-
poration, Sunnyvale, Calif. ^„ ,_ j j tu-
Continuation of Ser. No. 185,294, Sep. 8, 1980, abandoned. This
application Dec. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 447,464
Int Q.5 B05D 5/12; HOIL 7/44; B44C 1/22; C03C 75/00
U S. Q. 427—94 ^® Qaims
1 In a process for forming on a semiconductor wafer a high
quality layer of silicon nitride adapted to be patterned and to
1. A method of manufacturing a magnetic recording medium
comprising the steps of: evaporating molten metal from a metal
evaporating source; and transporting a flexible belt-shaped
support above said evaporating source at a substantially con-
stant speed along a curved path forward such that evaporated
metal flow lines connecting a central point on an evaporation
surface of said molten metal to said support from a substan-
tially constant angle of incidence with respect to a longitudinal
direction of said support throughout an area where said evapo-
rated metal flow lines contact said support.
1528
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,440
METHOD OF AND APPARATUS FOR
MANUFACTURING ULTRAHNE PARTICLE HLM
Atsushi Abe, Ikoma; Hisahito Ogawa, Nara, and Masahiro
Nishikawa, Amagasaki, all of Japan, assignors to Matsushita
Electric Industrial Co., Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Oct. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 309,088
aaims priority, application Japan, Oct, 9, 1980, 55-141218;
Oct. 9, 1980, 55-141219
Int. a.3 B05D 1/12: C23C 11/00
U.S. a. 427-180 6 aaims
1. A method of manufacturing an ultrafine particle film
comprising the steps of:
continuously supplying a gas into a vessel containing a cylin-
der, an evaporation source and a substrate;
arranging said substrate and said evaporation source so that
they oppose each other through said cylinder in the axial
direction of said cylinder;
continuously discharging the supplied gas from said vessel.
« thereby forming an atmospheric system within said vessel,
said atmospheric system having a reduced gas pressure in
the range of greater than approximately 10"' Torr to
approximately 10 Torr and a forced unidirectional flow of
the gas from said evaporation source towards said sub-
strate;
said evaporation source producing evaporated matter;
conveying said evaporated matter from said evaporation
source to said substrate, after a steady evaporation rate is
obtained, by means of said forced flow of gas; and
said evaporated matter and said gas interacting to form
ultrafine particles, whereby said ultrafine particles are
deposited on said substrate to form said ultrafine particle
film.
4,395,441
METHOD OF COATING LIQUID PENETRABLE
ARTICLES WITH POLYMERIC DISPERSIONS
Robert G. Farnam, 1230 N. Western Ave., Lake Forest, III.
60045
Continuation of Ser. No. 14,991, Feb. 26, 1979, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 933,893, Aug. 15,
1978, abandoned. This application Jul. 22, 1981, Ser. No.
285,860
Int. a.3 B05D 3/06
U.S. a. 427-211 38 Qaims
-f/
'.'^ » « •<
♦ -In '» '■' T J " . . ' ' -I] '■' ■>
-"- — V. , ■ .ji,^>-ii.^L .- -i : jm \' ^ } ..I
1. A method of coating a liquid-penetrable material with a
liquid dispersion of a polymer, comprising:
preheating said liquid-penetrable material to a temperature
sufficient to prevent any substantial penetration of liquid
into said material when said material, at said preheated
temperature, is contacted with a liquid dispersion of a
polymer;
coating a major surface of said preheated material while at
said temperature with a liquid dispersion of a curable
polymer;
supporting the coated, liquid-penetrable material on a plural-
ity of elastomeric elongated support members while said
coating is dried to a substantially tack-free condition; and
curing said coating to form a polymer-coated article.
4,395,442
METHOD OF COATING THE WORKING SURFACES OF
PISTON OPERATING DEVICES
Gunther Meise, Hanover, and Herbert Unger, Springe, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Wabco Fahrzeugbremsen
GmbH, Hanover, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 327,338
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 19,
1980, 3047978
Int. C\? B05D 7/22
U.S. a. 427-236 5 Qaims
1. A process of protecting the mating surfaces of a piston
type of machine including the steps of: coating at least one of
the mating surfaces of the piston-cylinder members by spray-
ing under pressure a varnish having an epoxy-resin base in
which is mixed a ceramic oxide material which contains sin-
tered aluminum oxide and zirconium oxide, placing the varnish
coated member in an oven, and heating the varnish coated
member at a given temperature for a given period of time to
result in a hardened wear-resistant surface finish.
4,395,443 ^
METHOD OF FORMING SILICONE HLMS
Chiyuki Shimizu, and Kiyoshi Hosokowa, both of Ohta, Japan,
assignors to Toshiba Silicones, Ltd., Japan
Filed May 7, 1981, Ser. No. 262,272
Claims priority, application Japan, May 9, 1980, 55-61502
Int. C\? A23F 3/00
U.S. a. 427—387 16 Qaims
1. A method of forming dust-resistant films which comprises
coating on the surface of a silicone elastomer a composition
formed by dissolving (1) a condensation reaction product
between (A) 100 parts by weight of a benzene-soluble polyor-
ganosiloxane consisting essentially of Si02 units and Rs'SiOj
units, in which groups R', which may be the same or different,
stand for a substituted or unsubstituted monovalent hydrocar-
bon group, wherein the amount of the Rj'SiOj units is 0.4 to
1 .0 mole per mole of the Si02 units and a reactive group se-
lected from hydroxyl and alkoxy groups is bonded to the
silicon atom in an amount of 0.0004 to 1 per silicon atom; and
(B) 20 to 200 parts by weight of a silanol-terminated polydior-
ganosiloxane having a viscosity of 10,000 to 2,000,000 cSt as
measured at 25° C, in (2) a mixed solvent comprising (a) a
volatile organosilicon compound having a boiling point of 70°
to 250° C. as measured under atmospheric pressure and being
represented by the molecular formula:
R42Si,
R33SioIR2'»SiO]^SiR33,
R5Si[OSiR3'']3 or
[R2^SiO]„, in which R2 through R'', which may be the same
or different, stand for a hydrogen atom or an alkyl group,
m is 0 or a positive number and n is a positive number, and
(b) a hydrocarbon solvent, the amount of the volatile
organosilicon compound (a) being at least 5% by weight
based on the total amount of the organosilicon compound
(a) and the hydrocarbon solvent (b); and drying and cur-
ing the coated composition.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1529
4,395,444
THERMOSETTING CATIONIC ACRYLIC LATEX
COMPOSITIONS CONTAINING BLOCKED
ISOCYANATES
Suryya K. Das, Pittsburgh, and Charles M. Kania, Tarentum,
both of Pa., assignors to PPG Industries, Inc., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,566
I Int. C\? B05D i/02
U.S. a. 427—388.4 7 Oaims
1. A stable thermosetting cationic acrylic latex composition,
comprising a blocked isocyanate curing agent and a cationic
acrylic latex; the cationic acrylic latex is prepared by a process
which comprises copolymerizing in an acidic medium, in the
presence of a cationic surfactant, ethylenically unsaturated
monomers, at least one of which contains an active hydrogen
group; the cationic surfactant comprises a gegen-ion derived
from an aliphatic or aromatic sulfonic acid selected from the
group consisting of methanesulfonic acid, ethanesulfonic acid,
propanesulfonic acid, benzenesulfonic acid, toluenesulfonic
acid, phenolsulfonic acid and cresolsulfonic acid.
denatured hydrocarbon resin composition having an acid value
of from 0.1 to 20 and a second layer containing an epoxy resin,
said denatured hydrocarbon resin being obtained from the
reaction between (A) a hydrocarbon resin precursor selected
from the group consisting of (i) petroleum resins which are
obtained by polymerization of cyclopentadiene or C9 to Cn
olefin hydrocarbons, (ii) cumarone-indene resins and (iii) ter-
pene resins, and (B) an ethylenically unsaturated carboxylic
acid or its anhydride.
4,395,445
COATING AND PRIMER FORMULATION ON THE
BASIS OF A COPOLYMER OF
TETRAFLUOROETHYLENE AND A
PERFLUORO-(ALKYLVTNYL) ETHER, AND USE
THEREOF
Gerhard Gebauer, and Franz Mayer, both of Birrgkirchen, Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft,
Frankfurt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Continuation of Ser. No. 122,591, Feb. 19, 1980, abandoned.
This application Sep. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 300,900
Int. CI.' B05D 1/36
U.S. CI. 427—407.1 * Claims
1. A method for improving the coating of a substrate with a
fluoropolymer which comprises applying a primer composi-
tion and subsequently without an intermediate heat treatment
for sintering applying a topcoat of a tetrafluoroethylene homo-
polymer or copolymer wherein the improvement comprises
applying a primer composition consisting essentially of
(a) from 100 to 20 weight %, relative to the total polymer
solids of the components (a) and (b). of a copolymer of
copolymerized tetrafluoroethylene units; from 0.5 to 11
weight % of copolymerized units of a perfiuoroCalkyivi-
nyl) ether of the formula CF2=CF— OR, in which R is a
perfluoroalkyl radical having from 1 to 10 carbon atoms;
and from 0 to 12 weight % of copolymerized units of
hexafiuoropropylene or vinylidene fluoride, each relative
to the total weight of the copolymer;
(b) from 0 to 80 weight %, relative to the total polymer
solids of components (a) and (b), of dispersed polytetraflu-
oroethylene particles having a mean grain size of from
0.05 to 30>m;
(c) from 10 to 70 weight % of the weight sum of (a) plus (b)
plus (c) of lithium hydroxide and suspended, fine-particle
Si02 produced by thermal treatment; the molar ratio
LiOH: Si02 being from 1:0.5 to 1:30; and
(d) water a^ liquid carrier.
4,395,446
PEELABLE ADHESIVE STRUCTURE
Go Kunimoto, Chigasaki; Isao Ichinose, Hiratsuka; Noboru
Suzuki, Fujisawa, and Fumio Mori, Yokohama, all of Japan,
assignors to Toyo Seikan Kaisha, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 94,570, Nov. 15, 1979, abandoned. This
application Mar. 22, 1982, Ser. No. 360,368
Qaims priority, application Japan, Nov. 17, 1978, 53-141065
Int.a. B32B 15/08
U.S. Q. 428—35 *0 Claims
1. A peelable adhesive structure comprising a plurality of
parts, at least one of which is made of metal, adhering together
by means of a coating, chracterized in that said coating has a
peelable surface formed between a first layer of an acid-
4,395,447
MEDIUM FOR RECORDING
Yoshiro Nakamatsu, 1-10-309, Minami Aoyama 5-chome, Mina-
to-ku, Tokyo, Japan
Filed Apr. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 256,316
Claims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1980, 55-59984
Int. CI.' B32B 3/02
U.S. CI. 428—66 3 Claims
U
1. A recording medium comprising:
(a) a recording disc,
(b) a magnetic coating on said disc and with said coating
having a thickness which decreases from a maximum to a
minimum radially inwardly from the outer periphery
toward the center of said disc to provide correspondingly
increasing recording density from the outer periphery
toward the center of said disc, said coating containing
magnetic particles,
(c) said magnetic particles being oriented relative to the
surface of said disc generally inversely to the change in
thickness of said coating and being essentially non-ori-
ented at the periphery of said disc in the area of maximum
coating thickness and increasing in orientation radially
inwardly toward the center of said disc to a maximum
uniform orientation in the area of minimum coating thick-
ness, to thereby provide an essentially constant output for
the recording medium from the disc periphery radially
inwardly to the inner termination of said magnetic coat-
ing.
4,395,448
HLLING SHEET ATTACHING MEANS FOR GAS AND
LIQUID CONTACT APPARATUS AND METHOD OF
ASSEMBLY OF PLURAL PARALLEL FILLING SHEETS
Marcel R. Lefevre, Branchburg, and Anthony M. DePalma,
South Plainfield, N.J.. assignors to Research-Cottreli, Inc.,
Somerviile, N.J.
Filed Dec. 22, 1981, Ser. No. 333,409
Int. Q.' B32B 3/06
U.S. Q. 428—99 3 Qaims
1. Filling sheets for a gas and liquid contact apparatus com-
prising a plurality of identical sheet members, each of said
sheet members having a plurality of male type and female type
locking tabs, said tabs being positioned in rows and columns
1530
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
and male type tabs in any row or column being adjacent a the length of span and an intersecting panel that extends be-
female type tab whereby rotation of alternate sheets 180° bring tween, becomes interwoven with, and extends laterally beyond
each of the spaced apart panels; a honeycomb core to extend
between the two panels and adjacent one side of the intersec-
tion panel; a formed core between the two panels and adjacent
the opposite side of the intersecting panel with the formed core
having a center of honeycomb aligned in a crisscrossing direc-
tion, a reinforced resin layer above and below the honeycomb,
and a covering of wound resin impregnated reinforcement
fibers; a pair of reinforcement members located on opposite
sides of the formed core and adjacent the intersecting fabric
panel with each reinforcement member having a center of
honeycomb, a load bearing resin impregnated reinforced layer
above and below the honeycomb and a resin impregnated
would fiber reinforcement covering; and the units are all cured
into a composite wing spar joint.
the male and female type tabs of said alternate sheets into
alignment.
4,395,449 4,395,451
PREFORMS FOR REINFORCEMENT OF BATTERY SEMICONDUCTOR WAFER AND DIE HANDLING
GRIDS METHOD AND MEANS
Joseph J. Duffy, Newark, Del., assignor to E. I. Du Pont de victor E. Althouse, 393 Traverso Ave., Los Altos, Calif. 94022
Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del. Filed Jul. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 168,031
Filed Jun. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 390,537 Int. Q.^ B32B i/26, 25/20
Int. a.^ B32B 5/12 u.S. Q. 428—141 16 Qaims
U.S. a. 428—105 7 Qaims
1. A network sheet preform comprising an array of spaced
bundles of inorganic filaments superimposed upon and direc-
tionally displaced from another array of spaced bundles of
inorganic filaments, said arrays being bonded to each other at
filament bundle crossover points through bonds of a fugitive
binder having a melting point of at least about 0° C. and a
boiling point below about 300° C.
4,395,450
COMPOSITE STRUCTURAL SKIN SPAR JOINT AND
METHOD OF MAKING
Philip C. Whitener, Seattle, Wash., assignor to The Boeing
Company, Seattle, Wash.
PCT No. PCT/US81/01319, § 371 Date Sep. 30, 1981, § 102(6)
Date Sep. 30, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO83/01238, PCT Pub.
Date Apr. 14, 1983
PCT Filed Sep. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 333,247
Int. a.' B64C 3/18; B32B 5/00
U.S. a. 428—116 16 Qaims
? 1. ■' \
r^ 34^ 32, .
-Kb
1. A non-adhesive carrier for handling semiconductor arti-
cles having a smooth face, said carrier comprising,
a rigid substrate having a flat upper face,
a resilient silicone elastomeric sheet having a Shore A hard-
ness of between 1 5 and to about 90 member attached to
the flat upper face of the substrate, said silicone elasto-
meric sheet member having a flat lower surface attached
to the upper fiat face of said substrate and having an upper
exposed texturized surface for support of semiconductor
articles, the texturized upper surface being effective to
substantially reduce interfacial forces between said sur-
face and the smooth surface of a semiconductor article
supported thereon so that the semiconductor article can
be readily removed from said surface.
4,395,452
ABRASION RESISTANT LAMINATE
Herbert I. Scher, and Israel S. Ungar, both of Randallstown,
Md., assignors to Nevamar Corporation, Odenton, Md.
Division of Ser. No. 136,220, Apr. 1, 1980, Pat. No. 4,305,987,
which is a division of Ser. No. 879,848, Feb. 22, 1978, Pat. No.
4,255,480, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 758,265,
Jan. 10, 1977, abandoned. This application Sep. 2, 1981, Ser. No.
298,548
Int. C\? B32B 3/00
U.S. a. 428—148 13 Oaims
POrNTEO INK PATTERN
ILzOj P4BTICLES
ULTRA- THIN COATING OF ALjOj
ANO MICROCRTSTALLINE
CELLULOSE BINDER
PATTERN SHEET
CORE SHEETS
10. A composite wing spar joint comprising: a resin impreg-
nated woven fabric having two spaced apart panels to extend
1. A print sheet for use in the preparation of decorative
July 26, 198J
CHEMICAL
1531
laminates of high abrasion resistance, comprising: a paper sheet
substrate having a print design thereon, and an ultra-thin abra-
sion resistant porous coating over said print design, said ultra-
thin abrasion resistant coating comprising a mixture of (1) an
abrasion resistant hard mineral of particle size 20-50 microns in
high concentration sufficient to provide an abrasion resistant
layer without interfering with visbility and (2) binder material
for said mineral compatible with a thermosetting laminating
resin selected from the group consisting of melamine-formalde-
hyde resin and polyester resin, and being impregnable with
said laminating resin, said binder material being present in an
amount sufficient to bind and stabilize said abrasion resistant
mineral to the surface of said paper sheet.
4,395,453
FIRE Xf4D HEAT RESISTANT STRUCTURE
Ellwood L. Lines, Jr., New Haven, and Douglas A. Farmer, Jr.,
Madison, both of Conn., assignors to Olin Corporation, New
Haven, Conn.
Filed Sep. 11, 1981, Ser. No. 301,160
Int. CI.' B32B 7/02. 15/08. 9/06. 27/00
U.S. a. 428—216 ^ 39 Claims
44^
ness and strength formed at least partially of aluminum
^nd having generally planar opposing sides with one of
the opposing sides being adjacent the second lamina;
iii. a fourth generally planar lamina of fibrous material of
predetermined thickness and strength adjacent the
other of the opposing sides of the third lamina; and
iv. a first bonding agent bonding each lamina of fibrous
material to each of the opposing sides of the third lam-
ina;
(c) at least one lamina of fibrous material of predetermined
thickness and strength bonded to the outermost ply by
bonding means; and
(d) a second fire resistant bonding agent of predetermined
thickness bonding each ply to each adjacent ply.
4,395.454
ABSORBENT MICROBIOCIDAL FABRIC AND
PRODUCT
A. Frank Baldwin, Greensboro, N.C., assignor to Burlington
Industries, Inc., Greensboro, N.C.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 310,416, Oct. 9, 1981,
abandoned. This application Jul. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 400,092
Int. CI.' B32B 27/00
U.S. a. 428—290 3 Qaims
o^y^<^
srfytAi c^/rs
>
1. In a fire and heat resistant partition having a first side and
an opposing second side with a plurality of laminae therebe-
tween to protect an object adjacent the first side from a fire or
heat generating source adjacent the second side, the combina-
tion comprising:
(a) a first lamina of predetermined thickness defining the first
side and formed at least partially of aluminum;
(b) at least one ply bonded to the first lamina, the ply com-
prising:
i. a second lamina of fibrous material of predetermined
thickness and strength adjacent the first lamina;
ii. a third lamina of predetermined thickness formed at
least partially of an aluminum and having generally
planar opposing sides;
iii. a fourth lamina of fibrous material of predetermined
thickness and strength; and
iv. a first bonding agent bonding each lamina of fibrous
material to each of the opposing sides of the third lam-
ina; and
(c) a second bonding agent of predetermined thickness bond-
ing the at least one ply to the first lamina.
18. In a fire and heat resistant partition having a first side and
an opposing second side with a plurality of laminae therebe-
tween to protect an object adjacent the first side from a fire or
heat generating source adjacent the second side, the combina-
tion comprising:
(a) a first generally planar lamina of predetermined thickness
defining the first side formed at least partially from alumi-
num;
(b) a plurality of plies adjacent the first lamina including at
least an innermost ply and an outermost ply arrayed such
that the innermost ply is a shorter distance from the first
side than the outermost ply;
i. a second generally planar lamina of fibrous material of
predetermined thickness and strength adjacent the first
lamina;
ii. a third generally planar lamina of predetermined thick-
^/ta e/9r^
1. An absorbent, bioactive, highly wettable non-woven
cellulosic medical substrate having incorporated thereon a
non-leachable, bioactive amount of 3-(trimethoxysilyl)-
propyloctadecyl dimethyl ammonium chloride present in an
amount from about 0.15% to about 1.05% on the basis of the
weight of the substrate; as a wettable hydrophilic coupling
agent, an organosilicone terpolymer of the formula:
M
I
CH3— Si— O
CH3 J
D
CHi
I
•Si— o-
I
.CH3
-o-
D'
CH3
I
-Si —
I
C„H2h
I
(CH2CH20)a
I °^
/CHCH2O \
D"
CH3
O
I
R
]
M
CH3
I
Si— CH3
I
LCH3
-V
present in an amount of from about 0.25% to about 1.25% on
1532
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
the basis of the weight of the substrate; and a tinctorial amount
of a direct dye
wherein the bioactive material and the hydrophilic coupling
agent and the dye are substantively attached to the fibers
of the cellulosic substrate, such that the bioactive com-
pound, the hydrophilic coupling agent and the dye are
substantially non-leachable from the substrate.
4,395,455
POLYESTER nBERFILL BATTING HAVING
IMPROVED THERMAL INSULATING PROPERTIES
Michael S. Frankosky, Wilmington, Del., assignor to E. I. Du
Pont de Nemours and Company, Wilmington, Del.
Filed Jan. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 343,499
Int. CI.' B32B 5/24. 15/14. 27/02
U.S. CI. 428—299 2 Claims
1. An improved insulating material for use in thermally
insulated textile articles which material consists essentially of a
plurality of substantially parallel layers of high-loft polyester
fiberfill consisting essentially of intermingled hollow fibers
having a denier per fiber of 4 to 6 and a void content of from
8 to 30 percent with adjacent layers being separated from one
another by a thin flexible sheet of metal foil or metalized poly-
meric film with the layered structure having an average den-
sity within the range of from about 0.35 to about 0.6 Ib./ft.^ and
the thickness of each fiberfill layer is within the range of about
0.25 to 0.6 in. so that compared to an all fiber sample of the
same weight and density the increase in CLO units due to the
separating sheets corresponds to an increase of at least 15
percent.
barrier layer at a relatively deep penetration with respect to an
exposed accessible surface of the structure, and subsequently
injecting an insulating liquid within the structure, in situ, to
form a second barrier layer at a relatively shallow penetration
with respect to the surface of the structure, the barrier layers
being in juxtaposition with one another, thereby entrapping
dead air between the granules of the masonry structure,
wherein the insulating liquid is injected into the structure by
means of a liquid-air stream, wherein the first relatively-deep
layer is applied under given parameters of viscosity and tem-
perature of the insulating liquid, velocity of the liquid-air
stream, and time of application, and wherein any of said given
parameters may be varied to apply the second relatively-shal-
low layer.
2. A masonry structure made in accordance with the method
of claim 1.
4,395,458
GRAPHITE IMPREGNATED POLY AMIDE TENNIS
STRINGS
Ben T. Huang, 16652 Gemini La., Huntington Beach, Calif.
92647
Filed Aug. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 293,529
Int. Cl.^ B32B 9/00: D02G 3/04. 3/36
U.S. CI. 428—367 14 Claims
4,395,456
INORGANIC FOAM
Graham V. Jackson, Vicars Cross; Terence Goulding, Garswood,
and John A. A. Bradbury, Runcorn, all of England, assignors
to Imperial Chemical Industries Limited, London, England
Filed Jan. 5, 1981, Ser. No. 222,683
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Jan. 10, 1980,
8000881
Int. CI.' B32B 19/02. 19/04: C04B 27/00
U.S. CI. 428—304.4 38 Claims
1. A rigid inorganic foam product consisting essentially of
prills of foam of one or more layer minerals, each prill being of
cellular structure.
4,395,457
THERMAL INSULATING AND WATERPROOHNG OF
MASONRY STRUCTURES BY ENTRAPMENT OF
MULTILAYERED DEAD AIR SPACES WITH USE OF
HIGH SPEED INJECTED LIQUID-AIR STREAM
Jay S. Wyner, Sands Point, N.Y., assignor to Therma-Plex
Corporation, Long Island City, N.Y.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 126,194, Mar. 3, 1980,
abandoned. This application Jan. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 230,257
Int. CI.' B32B 3/26
U.S. CI. 428—312.4 7 Claims
1. A filament comprising a polymer having an amount of
graphite particles present throughout the entire volume of the
filament sufficient to introduce significant polymer cross-link-
ing substantially in the absence of polymer cleavage.
9. A tennis racket string having a cross-sectional diameter of
about 0.054 inch, said string comprising about 79 entwined,
fused filaments, wherein said filaments consist essentially of
substantially linear nylon having 0.9 weight percent graphite
particles having a diameter ranging from about 0. 1 to about 2.0
microns, said particles being present throughout the entire
volume of the filament, and said string has a tensile strength of
about 63,900 psi, an elongation of about 17.1% at the tension of
the breaking point, modulus of elasticity of about 0.268 X 10^
psi and loss coefficients of about 7.5% at 50 lbs., about 9.8% at
60 lbs., about 1 1% at 70 lbs., and about 1 1.5% to 80 lbs. applied
force.
J7 X
1. The method of insulating an existing masonry granular
structure without substantially altering the outward appear-
ance of the structure, comprising the steps of injecting an
insulating liquid within the structure, in situ, to form a first
4 395 459
REINFORCED LAMINATES PRODUCED FROM
CROSSLINKABLE THERMOPLASTIC OLEHN
POLYMER MATERIAL
C. George Herschdorfer, 336 Betsy Brown Rd., Port Chester,
N.Y. 10573, and Dennis J. Vaughan, Rte. 10 Longview Dr.,
Anderson, S.C. 2%21
Division of Ser. No. 51,837, Jun. 25, 1979, Pat. No. 4,292,106,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 923,654, Jul. 11, 1978,
abandoned. This application Oct. 27, 1980, Ser. No. 200,894
Int. CI.3 B29D 7/14. 7/16. 9/04. 23/04
U.S. a. 428—391 37 Qaims
1. Reinforced laminates of crosslinkable thermoplastic olefin
polymer material, produced by the process of
(a) heating a normally solid, high molecular weight cross-
linkable thermoplastic olefin polymer selected from the
group consisting of ethylene homopolymers, copolymers
July 26, 198:
CHEMICAL
1533
of ethylene and at least one acyclic mono-1 olefin hydro-
carbon having 2 to 8 carbon atoms per molecule, and
mixtures thereof, having a melt index of at least about 10,
and a density in the range of 0.910 to 0.970 and containing
an acetylenic diperoxy catalyst which reacts with and
effects crosslinking of said polymer and which has a de-
composition temperature between about 310° F. and about
525° P., to a molten state at a melting temperature be-
tween about 270° F. and 300° P.,
(b) forming a continuous non-reinforced sheet from said
molten polymer at a temperature below said decomposi-
tion temperature,
(c) cooling said continuous sheet to a temperature below said
melting temperature to a self-supporting, two-dimensional
molecular state.
the ratio of c to d is in the range of 1:1 to 2:1,
the sum of a-fb is equal to three;
the sum of c + d is equal to three; and
R in each case is selected from the group consisting of
the vinyl group, alkyl radicals of 1-3 carbon atoms
and the phenyl group.
(d) combining said sheet in said self-supporting state with a
glass fibrous substrate treated with an unsaturated or-
ganosilanol coupling agent which reacts with said poly-
mer and said glass fibrous substrate and effects bonding of
said polymer to said substrate to form a laminate,
(e) heating said laminate under pressure to a temperature
between about 310° F. and about 525° F. to react said
catalyst with said polymer and effect at least 80% cross-
linking of said polymer to a three-dimensional molecular
state, and
(0 cooling said laminate to a temperature below said melting
temperature to a self-supporting state,
(g) said laminate having a dielectric constant in Condition A
at 1 MC/Sec. of about 2.40 to about 3.43.
4,395,461
METHOD FOR MAKING SILICON COATED
POLYCARBONATES AND ARTICLE OBTAINED
THEREFROM
Ta-Yen Ching. Schenectady, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Schenectady, N.Y.
Filed Oct. 23, 1981, Ser. No. 314,165
Int. CI.' C08L 83/12: C09K 9/00: B32B 27/36: B05D 3/02
U.S. CI. 428—412 5 Claims
1. A method for making a composite of a polycarbonate
substrate and a silicon hardcoat having improved weatherabil-
ity which comprises.
(1) treating a polycarbonate substrate with a solution of the
hydrolysis product of a silylated organic UV screen
which has been allowed to hydrolyze for a period not
exceeding about three days and curing the applied hydro-
lyzate on the treated substrate at a temperature of from 75°
C. to 150° C. and
(2) applying onto the treated polycarbonate substrate a
silicone hardcoat composition and thereafter heating the
resulting composite to a temperature in the range of from
75° C. to 150° C. until the applied hardcoat composition is
cured.
5. A polycarbonate silicone hardcoat composite made in
accordance with claim 1.
It
4,395,460
PREPARATION OF POLYSILAZANE POLYMERS AND
THE POLYMERS THEREFROM
John H. Gaul, Midland, Mich., assignor to Dow Corning Corpo-
ration, Midland, Mich.
Filed Sep. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 304,446
Int. a.3 B05D 3/02; C04B 35/52: B32B 9/00: C09K 3/00
U.S. CI. 428—408 31 Qaims
1. A process of preparing a polysilazane polymer which
consists of contacting and reacting in an inert, essentially anhy-
drous, atmosphere, at a temperature in the range of 25° C. to
370° C.
(A) ammonia and
(B) chlorine-containing disilanes selected from the group
consisting of
(i) a chlorine-containing disilane having the general for-
mula
[ClflRftSib
and II
(ii) a mixture of chlorine-containing disilanes having the
general formula
[ClfR</Si]2
wherein
a has a value of 1.5-2.0;
b has a value of 1.0-1.5;
4,395,462
FLUOROELASTOMER COATED SILICONE RUBBER
Keith E. Polmanteer, Weidman, Mich., assignor to Dow Corning
Corporation, Midland, Mich.
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 416,805
Int. a.' B32B 25/20
U.S. CI. 428—420 21 Claims
1. An article of manufacture comprising a silicone rubber
substrate having a cured coating on at least one surface thereof,
said coating being cohesively bonded to the substrate and
comprising in the uncured state (a) a peroxide-curable fiuoro-
elastomer gum wherein the repeating units are derived from
the polymerization of at least one fluorine-containing ethyleni-
cally unsaturated organic compound, (b) an amount of an
organic peroxide sufficient to achieve curing of said fiuoroelas-
tomer gum at a temperature of from 100° to 200° C. and (c) an
amount of an epoxide compound sufficient to react with the
acidic by-products evolved during curing of said fiuoroelasto-
mer gum.
4 395 463
ARTICLE COMPRISING SILICONE RESIN COATED,
METHACRYLATE-PRIMED SUBSTRATE
William D. Kray, Burnt Hills, N.Y., assignor to General Electric
Company, Waterford, N.Y.
Filed Jun. 3, 1980, Ser. No. 156,268
Int. a.' B32B 27/36. 27/30
U.S. a. 428—447 22 Qaims
1. An article comprising a solid substrate having at least one
surface on which is deposited:
(i) a layer of a primer composition; and,
(ii) a layer of a cured top coat containing a colloidal silica
filled thermoset organopolysiloxane, said primer composi-
tion comprising
(a) from about 2 to about 10 parts by weight of a high molec-
ular weight thermoplastic methacrylic ester polymer or
copolymer selected from
(1) polymers and copolymers comprising C|-C6 alkyl meth-
acrylate;
1534
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
(2) copolymers comprising Ci-C6 alkyl methacrylates and a
reaction product of glycidyl methacrylate and a hydroxy-
benzophenone ultraviolet light screening agent;
(3) copolymers comprising Ci-C6 alkyl methacrylates and
(A) a reaction product comprising units of methacrylic
acid and y-chloropropyltrimethoxysilane (B) acrylic or
methacrylic acid, or (C), a mixture of (A) and (B); or
(4) a mixture of any of the foregoing;
(b) from about 60 to about 90 parts by weight of 2-ethoxye-
thanol;
(c) from about 10 to about 30 parts by weight of 4-hydroxy-
4-methyl-2-pentanone; and
(d) from about 0 to about 20 parts by weight of glacial acetic
acid, per 100 parts by weight of (a), (b), (c) and (d) com-
bined.
18. A process for producing a coated article which com-
prises the steps of:
(i) applying onto at least a surface of a substrate a layer of a
primer composition of claim 1:
(ii) air drying and evaporating the volatile solvents from said
primer composition at a temperature of from about 15° to
about 30° C;
(iii) applying into said air dried primer layer a silica filled
curable organopolysiloxane top coat solvent-containing
composition;
(iv) evaporating the volatile solvents from said top coat
composition; and
(v) applying heat to said top coat composition to cure to
4 395 465
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM AND PROCESS FOR
PRODUCTION THEREOF
Toshinori Takagi, Nagaokakyo; Shinsaku Nakata, Toyoaka;
Yoichi Mikami, Kyoto; Masahiro Hotta, and Yoshiyuki
Fukumoto, both of Osaka, all of Japan, assignors to Sekiswi
Kagaku Kogyo Kabushiki Kaisha, Osaka, Japan
Filed Aug. 7, 1981, Ser. No. 290,966
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 13, 1980, 55/112121
Int. C1.3 C23C 15/00
U.S. a. 428—626 ♦ Cl«n»s
same.
1. A process for producing a magnetic recording medium,
which comprises
imparting a kinetic energy in a range of 100 eV to 10 KeV to
an ionized cluster composed of ferromagnetic metal atoms
in a high vacuum corresponding to a pressure of 8 X 10~
to 1 X 10- '0 torr and impinging the resulting ionized clus-
ter beam against a flexible substrate of polymeric material
to deposit a first magnetic layer of the ferromagnetic
metal on said substrate, and then,
imparting a kinetic energy in a range of 1 eV to 10 KeV tb
atom ions of a ferromagnetic metal by an ion plating
method in a high vacuum corresponding to a pressure of
8x10-* to IXlO-'O torr and impinging the resulting
atom ion beam against said first magnetic layer to deposit
a second magnetic layer of the ferromagnetic metal on
said first magnetic layer, wherein in forming the above
first magnetic layer, a plate-like accelerating electrode is
disposed on the side of the flexible substrate opposite its
surface facing the ionized cluster source to field-acceler-
ate the ionized cluster, and, in forming the said second
magnetic layer, a plate-like accelerating electrode is dis-
posed on the side of the substrate opposite its surface
facing the atom ion source to field-accelerate the atom
ions.
4 395,464
COPPER BASE ALLOYS MADE USING RAPIDLY
SOLIDIHED POWDERS AND METHOD
Viswanathan Panchanathan, Billerica; Ranjan Ray, Waltham,
and Bill C. Giessen, Cambridge, all of Mass., assignors to
Marko Materials, Inc., No. Billerica, Mass.
Filed Apr. 1, 1981, Ser. No, 249,926
Int. CI.5 C22C 9/06: B22F 7/00. 9/00
U.S. a. 428—546 5 Qaims
1. Fine grained Copper-Nickel alloys containing borides in
bulk form having composition CuoNifcAlcCrrfMeB/, wherein
Cu, Ni, Al, Cr, and B are copper, nickel, aluminum, chromium
and boron respectively, and M represents one or more of iron
(Fe), cobalt (Co), vanadium (V), and manganese Mn) and
wherein a, b, c, d, e and f represent weight percent of Cu, Ni,
Al, Cr, M and B respectively and having the following values:
a = 40-87, b= 10.5-44, c = 0-10, d=0-18, e=0-8, f= 1.5-4
wherein the maximum value of b + c-t-d-l-e may not exceed 56,
the maximum value of c-(-d may not exceed 22.5 and the sum
ofa-|-b-l-c + d-|-e-l-f=100, made by subjecting the powders of
the said alloy by application of pressure and heat, said powders
being made by the method comprising the following steps:
(a) forming a melt of said alloy
(b) depositing said melt against a rapidly moving quench
surface adapted to quench said melt at a rate in the range
of approximately 10^ to 10'° C./second and form thereby
a rapidly solidified brittle strip of said alloys characterized
by predominantly a single solid solution structure,
(c) comminuting said strip into powders.
4,395,466
MAGNETIC RECORDING MEDIUM
Hiroshi Ogawa, and Yasuo Tamai, both of Kanagawa, Japan,
assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Odawara, Japan
Filed May 20, 1981, Ser. No. 265,492
Claims priority, application Japan, May 21, 1980, 55-67558
Int. C1.3 GllB 5/70
U.S. CI. 428—695 3 Qaims
0? Oi 0« 05 06 OT__Oe 10
tuouin Of i«tti!»i OIL i«t%r"
1. A magnetic recording medium, comprising:
a non-magnetic base;
a magnetic layer formed on said base; said magnetic layer
consisting essentially of a binder and fine ferromagnetic
particles dispersed within said binder, a mineral oil having
JULY 26, 198
CHEMICAL
1535
a viscosity of 300 cs or less at 37.8° C. contained in said
magnetic layer an an amount of 0.05 weight percent to 1
weight percent, and an aliphatic acid having 12 to 22
carbon atoms contained in said magnetic layer in an
amount of about 0.2 weight percent to 5.0 weight percent,
based on the weight of the fine ferromagnetic powder.
4,395,469
LOW PRESSURE NICKEL HYDROGEN BATTERY
David H. Fritts, Dayton, Ohio, assignor to The United States of
America as represented by the Secretary of the Air Force,
Washington, D.C.
Filed Jul. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 283,245
Int. Q.' HOIM 2/00. 2/04. 4/36, 8/18
U.S. Q. 429—34 3 Qaims
4,395,467
TRANSPARENT CONDUCTIVE HLM HAVING AREAS
OF HIGH AND LOW RESISTIVITY
John L. Vossen, Jr., Bridgewater, N.J., and Joseph Zelez, Tan-
nersville. Pa., assignors to RCA Corporation, New York, N.Y.
FOed Dec. 30, 1981, Ser. No. 335,707
Int. Q.3 C23C 15/00: B05D 3/06
U.S. Q, 428—697 8 Qaims
7. A method of forming a transparent conductive layer
having areas of high and low resistivity on a substrate compris-
ing depositing a film of indium oxide and zirconium oxide on
said substrate, ion implanting protons into a portion of said film
and annealing the film in reducing gas at a temperature above
about 700° C. thereby substantially lowering the resistivity of
that portion of the film not ion implanted.
8. A structure produced in accordance with the method of
claim 7.
4,395,468
FUEL CELL GENERATOR
Arnold O. Isenberg, Forest Hills, Pa., assignor to Westinghouse
Electric Corp., Pittsburgh, Pa.
Continuation of Ser. No. 219,185, Dec. 22, 1980, abandoned.
This application Nov. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 321,137
Int. Q.3 HOIM 8/12
U.S. Q. 429—31 18 Claims
0^3
m;;is
J/J2
Qk:
i
I MO PS I
'H I'i'i-i n
STACK
OF
CELLS
10'
1. A nickel-hydrogen battery system comprising:
at least one nickel-hydrogen cell which includes a plurality
of positive and negative electrodes with separators in a
starved electrolyte condition enclosed in a low pressure
casing, with positive and negative terminals and a cell gas
line sealed into said casing;
storage means for storing only hydrogen outside of said cell;
gas lines comprising parallel discharge and charge paths
between said cell gas line and said storage means, with the
discharge path comprising a first valve means with a
pressure regulator, and the charge path comprising a
second valve means in series with a pump;
the first valve means being open and the second valve means
being closed during discharge, so that hydrogen is sup-
plied via the regulator at a controlled low pressure to said
cell;
the first valve means being closed and the second valve
means being open during charge, and power being applied
to the pump, so that hydrogen evolved by said cell is
supplied to the storage means;
so that said cell is at a relatively low pressure at all times
during discharge, charge, and standby.
4,395,470
PROCESS OF FORMING MAGNETIC LATENT IMAGES
Koichi Saitoh, Ebina, Japan, assignor to Fuji Xerox Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed Jul. 31, 1981, Ser. No. 288,876
Qaims priority, application Japan, Aug. 1, 1980, 55/106192
Int. CI.' G03C 19/00
U.S. Q. 430—39 10 Qaims
1. A high temperature solid electrolyte fuel cell generator,
comprising:
a housing means defining a plurality of chambers including a
generator chamber and a combustion product chamber;
a porous barrier separating said generator and combustion
product chambers;
a plurality of elongated annular fuel cells, each having an
electrochemically active length disposed within said gen-
erator chamber;
means for flowing a first gaseous reactant through said
annular fuel cells and through said porous barrier into said
combustion product chamber;
means for flowing a second gaseous reactant into said gener-
ator chamber, about said fuel cells, and through said po-
rous barrier into said combustion product chamber; and
means for segregating said first and second gaseous reactants
from direct contact with one another prior to entry of
each into said combustion product chamber.
1. A process of forming magnetic latent images using a
magnetizable magnetic recording body, thermal pattern input
means for heating the magnetic recording body in accordance
with a picture image to be recorded, and a master magnetic
body uniformly magnetized in advance, said process compris-
ing the steps of:
(a) heating said magnetic recording body to a temperature at
least equal to its Curie point in a pattern of a picture image
to be recorded with said thermal pattern input means; and
1536
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
(b) bringing the heated magnetic recording body and said
master magnetic body into contact with each other
wherein said uniformly magnetized master magnetic body
causes a thermomagnetic transfer onto said magnetic
recording body to form a magnetic latent image on said
magnetic recording body corresponding to said pattern of
said picture image by thermal residual magnetization.
4 395,471
BLENDED TONERS OF FUNCTIONAL COLOR
Oscar G. Hauser, Rochester, and Frederick R. Ruckdeschel,
Webster, both of N.Y., assignors to Xerox Corporation, Stam-
ford, Conn.
Continuation of Ser. No. 212,789, Dec. 4, 1980, abandoned,
which is a continuation of Ser. No. 80,625, Oct. 1, 1979,
abandoned. This application Apr. 9, 1982, Ser. No. 366,946
Int. Cl.^ G03G 9/10. 13/08
U.S. CI. 430-45 ^ ^, "Claims
1 A developer composition comprised of a blend ot toner
particles containing a styrene/n-butyl methacryalte copolymer
rsin and the cyan colorant copper tetra-4-(octadecylsuI-
fonomido)phthalocyanine, a styrene/n-butyl methacrylate
copolymer resin and the magenta colorant 2,9-dimethyl substi-
tuted quinacridone. a styrene/n-butyl methacrylate copolymer
resin and the yellow colorant diaryldide 3,3-dichlorobenzidene
aceto acetanilide, and an uncoated single steel carrier material.
4 395 473
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC SENSITIVE MATERIALS
CONTAINING BARBITURIC ACID OR
THIOBARBITURIC ACID DERIVATIES
Seiji Horie; Masayoshi Nagata; Junji Nakano, and Hideo Sato,
all of Asaka, Japan, assignors to Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd.,
Kanagawa, Japan
Filed Dec. 17, 1981, Ser. No. 331,745
Claims priority, application Japan, Jan. 16, 1981, 56-4734
Int. CI.' G03G 5/00
U.S. CI. 430—58 " C'"'"s
1. An electrophotographic sensitive material havmg an elec-
trophotographic sensitive layer containing a charge generating
material and a charge transfer material, wherein said charge
generating material comprises a barbituric acid derivative or
thiobarbituric acid derivative represented by formula (1) or (II)
(I)
(II)
4,395,472
PLAIN PAPER REPRODUCTION PROCESS
Jean J. Robillard, 46 Arnold Rd., Pelham, Mass. 01002
Filed Jun. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 275,207
Int. CI.' G03G 9/14. 9/08
U.S. CI. 430-47 »0 Claims
1 A light sensitive photographic process for producing a
permanent record on plain paper of a light image which com-
prises: (a) exposing to said image the surface of a photodielec-
tric recording medium supported on a plastic belt, said photo-
dielectric medium comprising a layer of a homogeneous inti-
mate mixture of photodielectric pigments dispersed in a binder
which exhibits a change of dielectric constant and dielectric
loss factor in those areas of said photodielectric recording
medium exposed to said light image and forming as a result of
exposure to said image a latent image in terms of local varia-
tions of dielectric constant and dielectric loss factor in said
photodielectric recording medium; (b) contacting the surface
of said exposed photodielectric recording medium with the
surface of a plain paper image receiving sheet backed with a
plastic substrate coated with an image forming medium com-
prising a dispersion of sublimable dyes in a binder, the surface
of said image forming medium being in contact with said plain
paper image receiving sheet; (c) impressing a high frequency
electric field through said photodielectric recording medium,
plain paper image receiving sheet and image forming medium
to provide the sublimation of the sublimable dyes of said image
forming medium in selected areas corresponding to said light
image onto said plain paper receiving sheet by selective gener-
ation of heat due to dielectric losses in said photodielectric
recording medium, said heat generation in said photodielectric
recording medium being substantially proportional to the
change in dielectric constant and dielectric loss factor in said
photodielectric recording medium according to the previous
exposure of said medium to said radiation image, thereby pro-
ducing a photographic record of the image made of sublimed
dyes from said image forming medium onto said plain paper
image receiving sheet.
wherein
(i) X represents an oxygen atom or a sulfur atom,
(ii) R' represents an alkoxy group, an aralkyl group or a
substituted amino group represented by
R8
\
1
/
N—
wherein R'' and R^ each represents an unsubstituted or
substituted alkyl group or phenyl group, or R^ and R
together represents a group forming a nitrogen atom-con-
taining heterocyclic ring,
(iii) R2 and R^ each represents a hydrogen atom, a halogen
atom, an alkyl group, or a lower alkoxy group,
(iv) R4 represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, or an
unsubstituted or substituted phenyl group,
(v) R5 and R* each represents an alkyl group, an aralkyl
group, or an unsubstituted or substituted phenyl group,
(vi^Ar represents a group selected from those represented
by the formulas
R"^^
.J^ "
. and
Wherein Y and Z each represents S, O, or N-R'2, wherein R'2
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1537
represents an alkyl group having from 1 to 4 carbon atoms, R^
and R'^each represents a hydrogen atom, an alkyl group or an
alkoxy group, or R** and R'^ together represent a group form-
ing a benzene ring or a naphthalene ring, and R" represents a
hydrogen atom, an alkyl group, an aralkyl group, an alkoxy
group, an aryloxy group, an acyl group, an alkoxycarbonyl
group, an aryloxycarbonyl group, a halogen atom, a monoalk-
ylamino group, a dialkylamino group, an amido group, or a
nitro group.
intensity than in the first stage, to leave a developed image on
said image bearing member.
4,395,474
ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC PHOTOSENSITIVE
MEMBER WITH CURED CYCLIZED RUBBER BINDER
Hideyo Kondo, Toride, and Naoto Fujimura, Abiko, both of
Japan, assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 950,728, Oct. 12, 1978, abandoned.
This application Oct. 22, 1980, Ser. No. 199,531
Claims priority, application Japan, Oct. 15, 1977, 52-123683
Int. CI.' G03G 5/087
U.S. CI. 430—67 2 Claims
1. In an electrophotographic photosensitive member having
a coated photoconductive layer comprising a photoconductive
material dispersed in a binder, the improvement which com-
prises a curable cyclized rubber selected from the group con-
sisting of cyclized butadiene rubber and cyclized isoprene
rubber as said binder and said curable cyclized rubber is cured
after coating to form said photoconductive layer.
2. The electrophotographic photoconductive member ac-
cording to claim 1 further including an insulating layer on said
photoconductive layer.
4,395,477
NEUTRALIZING-TIMING LAYER FOR COLOR
TRANSFER ASSEMBLAGES CONTAINING LACTONE
POLYMER
Edward P. Abel, Webster, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jan. 21, 1982, Ser. No. 341,412
Int. CI.' G03C 1/40 1/10
U.S. CI. 430— 216 29 Claims
1. In a photographic assemblage comprising:
(a) a photographic element comprising a support having
thereon at least one photosensitive silver halide emulsion
layer having associated therewith a dye image-providing
material;
(b) a dye image-receiving layer;
(c) neutralizing means for neutralizing an alkaline processing
composition; and
(d) timing means located between said neutralizing means
and said dye image-receiving layer;
the improvement wherein said neutralizing means and said
timing means are provided by a single layer which
functions as a combined neutralizing-timing layer and
consists essentially of a carboxy-ester-lactone polymer
having recurring units of the formula
4,395,475
CONDENSATION POLYMERIC PHOTOCONDUCTORS
CONTAINING PENDANT ARYLAMINES
John M. Noonan, and Jerome H. Perlstein, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to Eastman Kodak Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Jul. 20, 1981, Ser. No. 285,235
Int. CV G03G 5/07
U.S. CI. 430—69 13 Qaims
1. An electrophotographic element comprising an electri-
cally conducting support and a photoconductive layer in elec-
trical contact with said support, said photoconductive layer
comprising a condensation polymer containing, as repeating
units, the condensation residues of:
(a) a diacid, and
(b) an organic difunctional compound capable of undergoing
condensation polymerization with said diacid,
wherein at least one of said residues contains an appended
arylamine photoconductor group.
4,395,476
DEVELOPING METHOD FOR DEVELOPER TRANSFER
UNDER A.C. ELECTRICAL BIAS AND APPARATUS
J I THEREFOR
be; Tsutomu Toyono, both of Tokyo; Nagao
Hosono, Chofu, and Tohru Takahashi, Tokyo, all of Japan,
assignors to Canon Kabushiki Kaisha, Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 58,434, Jul. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application May 18, 1981, Ser. No. 264,516
Oaims priority, application Japan, Jul. 28, 1978, 53-92105;
Jul. 28, 1978, 53-92106; Jul. 28, 1978, 53-92107; Apr. 28, 1979,
54-52641; Jun. 1, 1979, 54-68562
Int. a.' G03G 13/09. 15/09
U.S. a. 430—102 32 Gaims
1. A method of developing an electrostatic latent image on
an image bearing member comprising bringing a layer of one-
component dry developer on a carrier to a developing zone in
which the gap between the image bearing member and the
carrier is greater than the thickness of the layer and creating in
the gap an alternating electric field which, in a first stage,
causes transition of developer from the carrier to the image
bearing member and back transition of developer from the
member to the carrier and which, in a second stage, is of lower
COOH
R'
wherein
R is alkyl having from 1 to about 12 carbon atoms or
aralkyl having from 7 to about 12 carbon atoms;
R' and R^ are each independently hydrogen or methyl;
X is about 1 to about 15 mole %; and
y is about 85 to about 99 mole %.
4,395,478
DIRECT-POSITIVE CORE-SHELL EMULSIONS AND
PHOTOGRAPHIC ELEMENTS AND PROCESSES FOR
THEIR USE
Harry A. Hoyen, Webster, N.Y., assignor to Eastman Kodak
Company, Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 12, 1981, Ser. No. 320,902
Int. a.' G03C 1/34
U.S. a. 430—217 24 Qaims
1. A radiation-sensitive emulsion particularly adapted to
forming a direct-positive image comprised of
a dispersing medium and
silver halide grains capable of forming an internal latent
image,
said silver halide grains being comprised of a sensitized core
and a shell, and
said shell incorporating in an amount sufficient to reduce
rereversal one or more polyvalent metal ions chosen from
the group consisting of manganese, copper, zinc, cad-
mium, lead, bismuth, and lanthanides, said emulsion when
coated on a transparent film support at a silver coverage
of 4 grams per square meter, exposed to a 500 watt tung-
sten lamp for times ranging from 0.01 to 1 second at a
distance of 0.6 meter, developed for 5 minutes at 20° C. in
Developer Y below, fixed, washed, and dried, having a
maximum density at least five times the maximum density
1538
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
of an identical test portion which has been exposed in the aqueous developer mixture containing about 0.5 to 15 percent
same way and developed for 6 minutes at 20° C. in Devel- by weight of at least one salt of an alkanoic acid having 8 to 13
oper X below, fixed, washed, and dried: carbon atoms and having an Na+, NH4+ or K+ ion as the
cation, and about 0.5 to 20 percent by weight of at least one
— low-foaming, nonionic surfactant.
Grams
Developer X
N — methyl-p-aminophenol sulfate
2.5
Ascorbic acid
10.0
Potassium metaborate
35.0
Potassium bromide
1.0
Water to 1 liter
Developer Y
N — methyl-p-aminophenol sulfate
2.0
Sodium sulfite, desiccated
90.0
Hydroquinone
8.0
Sodium carbonate, monohydrate
52.5
Potassium bromide
5.0
Potassium iodide
0.5
Water to 1 liter.
4,395,479
STRIPPING COMPOSITIONS AND METHODS OF
STRIPPING RESISTS
Irl E. Ward; Lisa G. Hallquist, and Thomas J. Hurley, all of
Easton, Pa., assignors to J. T. Baker Chemical Company,
Phillipsburg, N.J.
Continuation-in-part of Set. No. 304,787, Sep. 23, 1981,
abandoned. This application Aug. 17, 1982, Ser. No. 408,051
Int. a.5 BOIF 1/00: B08B 7/00: G03C 5/00
MS. a. 430—258 32 Qaims
1. A stripping composition comprising from about 30 to
about 90 weight percent of a 2-pyrrolidinone compound of the
formula
4,395,481
METHOD FOR THE MANUFACTURE OF RESIST
STRUCTURES
Siegfried Birkle, Hochstadt; Roland Rubner, Rottenbach; Hans
Hauschildt, Erlangen, and Eva-Maria Rissel, Forchheim, all
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Siemens Aktiengesell-
schaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 25, 1981, Ser. No. 305,798
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Sep. 29,
1980, 3036615
Int. a.3 G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—326 3 Qaims
1. In a method for the manufacture of resist structures on the
basis of positive resists wherein a polymer material in the form
of a layer or film is exposed with a predetermined pattern to
short-wave UV rays and the exposed portions of the layer or
film thereafter removed, the improvement wherein the poly-
mer material comprises a copolymer of
(a) 1 to 70 mol percent alkylmethacrylate with an alkyl
radical having 1 to 4 C atoms; and
(b) 30 to 99 njol percent of an ethylenically unsaturated
monomer having chlorine and/or cyan substituents.
n
N "^O
I
R
wherein R is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
alkyl of 1 to 3 carbon atoms and hydroxyalkyl of 1 to 3 carbon
atoms, and from about 10 to about 70 weight percent of a
tetrahydrothiophene- 1,1 -dioxide compound of the formula
R'
wherein R' is selected from the group consisting of hydrogen,
methyl or ethyl.
4,395,480
DEVELOPER MIXTURE AND PROCESS FOR
DEVELOPING EXPOSED NEGATIVE-WORKING
DIAZONIUM SALT LAYERS
Gerhard Sprintschnik, Hofheim, Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignor
to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jan. 6, 1982, Ser. No. 337,396
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 8,
1981, 3100259
Int a.3 G03C 1/58. 5/30
U.S. a. 430—309 4 Claims
1. A process for developing negative-working reproduction
layers containing a diazonium salt polycondensation product,
which comprises treating an exposed reproduction layer and
dissolving away the unexposed areas of the layer with an
4,395,482
METHOD FOR THE PREPARATION OF
HEAT-RESISTANT RELIEF STRUCTURES USING
POSITIVE RESISTS
Hellmut Ahne, Rottenbach; Eberhard Kiihn, Hemhofen, and
Roland Rubner, Rottenbach, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany,
assignors to Siemens Aktiengesellschaft, Munich, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Division of Ser. No. 170,935, Jul. 18, 1980, Pat. No. 4,339,521.
This application Apr. 28, 1982, Ser. No. 372,540
Gaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Aug. 1,
1979, 2931297
Int. a.3 G03C 5/00
U.S. a. 430—326 7 Claims
1. A method for the preparation of heat-resistant relief struc-
tures, comprising:
(a) applying to a substrate, in the form of a layer or foil, a
heat-resistant positive resist comprised of (1) a precursor
of a highly heat-resistant polymer and (2) a light-sensitive
diazoquinone, said precursor comprising an oligomeric
and/or polymeric precursor of a polyoxazole in the form
of a polycondensation product of an aromatic and/or
heterocyclic dihydroxydiamino compound and a dicar-
boxylic acid chloride or a dicarboxylic acid ester;
(b) generating exposed or irradiated portions on said resist
by treating said resist by a method selected from the group
consisting of (1) exposing said resist through a mask with
actinic light and (2) irradiating said resist by deflection of
a light, electron or ion beam;
(c) removing the exposed or irradiated portions from said
layer or foil; and
(d) annealing the relief structure so obtained.
July 26, 198J
CHEMICAL
1539
4,395,483
DIRECT POSITIVE TYPE SILVER HALIDE
PHOTOSENSITIVE MATERIAL
Tenimi Matsuda; Shoji Ishiguro; Shigenori Moriuchi, and Yo-
sbiaki Suzuki, all of Minami-ashigara, Japan, assignors to
Fuji Photo Film Co., Ltd., Kanagawa, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 142,954, Apr. 23, 1980, abandoned.
This application Feb. 26, 1982, Ser. No. 352,928
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 27, 1979, 54-52115
Int. G.5 G03C 5/24. 1/36
U.S. G. 430—411 17 Gaims
1. A direct positive type silver halide photosensitive material
for obtaining a high contrast image in the highlight portions
thereof, said image comprised substantially of only silver pre-
pared by:
(a) chemically fogging silver halide grains, and
(b) subsequent to said fogging, adding at least one metal
ammine complex salt in an amount of 10-' to 10" ^ mol
per mol of silver wherein the metal component is selected
from the group consisting of cobalt, nickel, ruthenium and
chromiuni.
comprising a core covered with a film no greater than
1,000 anstroms thick of a non-hydrophilic synthetic resin
selected from the group consisting of epoxy resin, polyes-
ter resin, polystyrene resin, polyvinyl chloride resin, poly-
ethylene resin, polypropylene resin, acrylic resin, xylene
resin and silicone resin, the core being consisted of one
member selected from the group consisting of carbon
black, silica, alumina, magnesia, titania, calcia, zirconia,
molybdenum disulfide, tungsten disulfide, boron nitride,
silicon nitride, aluminum nitride, metallic soap, higher
fatty acid, fatty acid amide, higher alcohol, higher alcohol
ester, iron, copper, tin, nickel, cobalt, zinc, silver, iron
alloy, copper alloy, tin alloy, nickel alloy, cobalt alloy,
zinc alloy, and silver alloy.
4,395,484
ROOMLIGHT-STABLE ULTRA V lOLET-RESPONSE
PHOTOTHERMOGRAPHIC IMAGING MATERIAL
Greg J. McCarney, Hudson, Wis., assignor to Minnesota Min-
ing and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Jun. 25, 1982, Ser. No. 392,324
Int G.^ G03C 1/02. 1/84
U.S. G. 430—620 8 Gaims
1. A thermophotographic layered construction comprising:
a. a transparent or opaque substrate
b. coated upon one surface of said substrate, a continuous
layer of a dry silver dispersion coating, said coating com-
prisng:
(1) a blend of organic silver full soap and half soap to
provide in said layer a weight ratio of total silver in the
coating to silver soap in the range of 1:7 to 1:4.2,
(2) a polyvinyl acetal resin, said resin to silver soap weight
ratio being in the range of 0.6:1 to 2:1, and
c. a protective/reaction topcoat layer comprising a cellulose
acetate resin admixed with an effective amount of a devel-
opment accelerator,
and construction further comprising
d. 0.5 to 20 mole percent of halide ion compared to silver in
said silver coating layer or said topcoat layer, at least 96
mole percent of said halide ion being chloride ion, and
e. an effective amount of at least one antihalation agent
incorporated in any of layers, a., b., c, or d., or in a sepa-
rate layer between said substrate and said silver coating
layer,
said construction being intrinsically ultraviolet light-respon-
sive and roomlight stable for at least one minute, and capable
of forming graphic arts images having a contrast of at least 2.5.
4,395,486
METHOD FOR THE DIRECT ANALYSIS OF SICKLE
CELL ANEMIA
Lois B. Wilson; John T. Wilson, both of Richmond County, Ga.,
and Robert F. Geever, Aiken County, S.C, assignors to Medi-
cal College of Ga. Research Inst., Inc., Augusta, Ga.
Filed Aug. 19, 1981, Ser. No. 294,227
Int. G.3 C12Q 1/68: GOIN 33/50: C12P 19/34: C12N 15/00
U.S. G. 435—6 27 Gaims
1. A method for the direct analysis of sickle cell anemia in
the human )3 gene, comprising the steps of:
(a) obtaining an effective amount of amniotic fluid cells from
a human;
(b) isolating DNA from said cells;
(c) digesting said DNA with restriction enzyme Dde 1 to
form DNA fragments;
(d) separating said DNA fragments according to their re-
spective molecular weights to form a pattern for said
fragments on filter paper; and
(e) detecting the absence of an approximate 175 base pair
fragment and the presence of an approximate 376 base pair
fragment on said pattern, thereby indicating the sickle cell
genotype.
4,395,487
METHOD FOR ASSAY OF a-AMYLASE ACHVITY
Narimasa Saito, and Tatsuo Horiuchi, both of Noda, Japan,
assignors to Noda Institute for Scientific Research, Noda,
Japan
Filed Apr. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 256,194
Gaims priority, application Japan, May 8, 1980, 55-59980
Int. G.' C12Q 1/40
U.S. G. 435—22 6 Gaims
1. A method for the assay of a-amylase activity, which
comprises adding an a-amylase-containing sample to mal-
tohexaitol or maltohexaonic acid used as substrate, reacting, at
the same time or subsequent to the addition, a-glucosidase with
the resulting mixture, and determining the reaction product to
assay the a-amylase activity.
1 1 4,395,485
DRY ELECTROPHOTOGRAPHIC TONER COMPRISING
SMALL, POLYMER COATED PARTICLES AS FLOW
AGENT
Michio Kashiwagi, and Kiichi Nak^ima, both of Otsu, Japan,
assignors to Toray Industries, Inc., Tokyo, Japan
PCT No. PCT/JP81/00073, § 371 Date Nov. 9, 1981, § 102(e)
Date Nov. 9, 1981, PCT Pub. No. WO81/02935, PCT Pub.
Date Oct. 15, 1981
PCT Filed Apr. 2, 1981, Ser. No. 321,178
Gaims priority, application Japan, Apr. 3, 1980, 55-43860
Int. G.3 G03G 9/08. 13/09
U.S. G. 430—903 18 Gaims
1. A one-component type dry toner, comprising
a resin powder having a particle size of between 5 and 50
microns, and
from 0.01 weight % to 20 weight % of a flow agent powder
having a particle size of no greater than one micron and
4,395,488
DRIVE-THROUGH PIT PRODUCOON OF ETHANOL
Delton J. Rowe, 1740 Speyer La., Redondo Beach, Calif. 90278
Filed Sep. 14, 1981, Ser. No. 301,718
Int. G.3 C12P 7/06
\3S. G. 435—161 8 Gaims
1. A method for producing ethanol, comprising the steps of:
depositing carbohydrate-containing material into a pit hav-
ing a bottom with one end lower than the other and heat-
ing pipes within grooves in the bottom below the surface
of the bottom;
driving a vehicle into the pit and using it to spread said
carbohydrate-containing material;
flooding the pit with a mixture of water and hydrolyzing
agents until the material is covered with at least six inches
of liquid;
fermenting the contents of the pit;
1540
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
draining the liquid contents of the pit from the lower end of
the pit;
separating the drained liquid into concentrated ethanol and a
mixture of water and hydrolyzing agents;
CHOP
FOLIAGE
FILL PIT WITH
, FOLIAGE a YEAST
J FLOOD PIT WITH
1 WATER a ENZYMES
^
I DRAIN P1TTHH0U5H
SEDIMENT TRAP
HEAT CONTENTS
OF PIT
I SEAL PIT AND IN
i STALL BREATHER TUBE
^
_ iPITRESnjE
FOR USE AS FEED
OR FERTILIZER
STORE ETHANOL
IN FUEL TANK
DISTILL
PIT DRAINAGE
"store water a
-^ENZYMES IN
I RESERVOIR
y
.J
removing the mixture of water and hydrolyzing agents for
later use in flooding the pit; and
driving a vehicle into the pit and removing the solid residue
from the pit with the vehicle.
4 395,491
METHOD FOR ISOLATING SOLID MATTER FROM A
SALINOMYON CULTURE BROTH
Rolf Hohl, Hofheim, and Helmut Heine, Kronberg, both of Fed.
Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesellschaft,
Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Feb. 13, 1981, Ser. No. 234,318
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Feb. 15,
1980, 3005642
Int. a.3 C07G 77/00
U.S. a. 435—262 * ^'""'»
1. A method for isolating the solid matter from a broth m
which salinomycin has been produced by fermenUtion, which
method consisting essentially of fermenting said broth to re-
duce its content of fats and fat-like substances to a value of less
than 2 percent, which fats and fat-like substances are present m
said broth as a carbon source and defoaming agent, and spray
drying said broth while adding thereto a physiologically ac-
ceptable finely powdered material as an anti-agglomeration
agent in a manner so that the particles of said anti-agglomera-
tion agent strike those portions of the culture broth solids
which have already been largely dried, said anti-agglomeration
agent being present in an amount sufficient to suppress agglom-
eration of said solid matter.
4 395,489
PROCESS FOR THE RECOVERY OF GLYCEROL
DEHYDROGENASE
Peter Stahl, Bernried; Hans Seidel, Tutzing, and Herwig Brun-
ner, Weilheim, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to
Boehringer Mannheim GmbH, Mannheim-Waldhof, Fed. Rep.
of Germany
Filed Dec. 19, 1980, Ser. No. 218,138
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Dec. 27,
1979, 2952410
Int. a? C12N 9/04: C12R 1/01
U.S. a. 435-190 1* Claims
1. Process for obtaining glycerol dehydrogenase from mi-
cro-organisms, which process comprises culturing a glycerol
dehydrogenase-forming Aerobacter aerogenes micro-organism
in a glycerol-containing nutrient medium, culturing the micro-
organism first under aerobic conditions, up to the end of the
log phase, thereafter under anaerobic conditions, during which
more glycerol is added to the nutrient medium than is used up
by the micro-organism, and then isolating the glycerol dehy-
drogenase formed from the biomass or from the nutrient me-
dium.
4,395,492
PERFUSION CHAMBER
Douglas Rees, Wellington, New Zealand, assignor to Res-Del
Group Ltd., Wellington, New Zealand
Filed Jun. 3, 1981, Ser. No. 270,139
Int. a.^ AOIN 1/02; E03C 1/24
U.S. a. 435-283 1" <^""«»
4,395,490
PROCESS FOR PRODUCnON OF IMPROVED
MALTASE
Charles L. Cooney, Brookline, and Eugene J. Schaefer, Somer-
ville, both of Mass., assignors to Massachusetts Institute of
Technology, Cambridge, Mass.
Continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 177,709, Aug. 13, 1980, Pat.
No. 4,332,899. This application Dec. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 329,449
Int. CI.5 C12N 9/26. 1/16
U.S. a. 435—201 8 Qaims
1. In a process for forming maltase utilizing Saccharomyces
italicus in a growth medium, said Saccharomyces italicus being
obtained by mutation of Saccharomyces italicus and having the
property of producing maltase while grown on a carbon
source selected from the group consisting of maltose, glycerol,
acetate, fructose, glucose and sucrose, the improvement which
comprises utilizing in the growth medium yeast extract at a
concentration of between about 1 and 15 g/L.
1. A bath for use in the study of in vitro maintained human
or animal tissue, comprising a body having a bath cavity,
means to allow fluid entry into said bath cavity, and means to
allow fluid exit from said bath cavity, wherein the means to
allow fluid exit from said bath cavity comprises a spillway
formed into a wall of the bath, said spillway having an upper
horizontal edge defining the maximum level for fluid in said
bath cavity and having a spillway surface sloping downwardly
from said edge, said spillway being provided with means to
regulate the fluid flow from the bath cavity, said means to
regulate comprising a choke having a surface cooperating with
said spillway surface and adjustably separated therefrom to be
maintained in a predetermined contiguous relationship with
said spillway. \
4 395 493
MONOLAYER DEVICE USING nLTER TECHNIQUES
David J. Zahniser, Wellesley, and Gerardo L. Garcia, Harvard,
both of Mass., assignors to Coulter Electronics, Inc., Hialeah,
Fla.
Filed May 14, 1981, Ser. No. 263,712
Int. Cl.^ C12M 1/36. 1/00. 1/34; GOIN 1/00
U.S. a. 435-289 ' Clainw
1. A monolayering device for applying cells from a liquid
suspension to a slide to be examined, comprising: measunng
means for obtaining a quantity of the liquid suspension having
therein a desired number of said cells; application vessel means
located at a first station for receiving said quantity of liquid; a
filter tape for receiving at said first station the liquid suspension
from said application vessel means, said filter tape bemg capa-
JULY 26, 198:
CHEMICAL
1541
ble of passing the liquid of the liquid suspension, while retain-
ing said cells; vacuum means coupled to said application vessel
means for sucking the liquid of the liquid suspension through
said tape, thereby to deposit the cells on a tape portion of said
4,395,496
CURED CELLULOSE ESTER, METHOD OF CURING
SAME, AND USE THEREOF
Joseph W. Wittmann, and John M. Evans, both of Rochester,
N.Y., assignors to UCO Optics, Inc., Rochester, N.Y.
Filed Nov. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 321,506
Int. CI.' C08G 77/20. 77/04: C08L 1/02: G03B 21/46
U.S. CI. 523—107 28 Claims
1. A shaped transparent contact lens of concavo-convex
shape with the concave surface substantially conforming to the
cornea of the eye, said lens being formed of a composition from
the polymerization of a composition comprising an organic
cellulose ester selected from the group of cellulose acetate,
cellulose acetate buiyrate, cellulose acetate propionate or
mixtures thereof; and a polymerizable ethylenically unsatu-
rated silicone ester.
filter tape; moving means for moving said tape portion having
said cells from said first station to a second station; and biasing
means for biasing said tape portion having the cells against the
slide at said second station and thereby causing the cells to
adhere to the slide.
4,395,494
REAGENT AND METHOD FOR THE DETERMINATION
OF HYDRAZINE
Detlef Bodart, Darmstadt, and Roland Bitsch, Pfungstadt, both
of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Merck Patent Gesell-
schaft mit Beschrankter Haftung, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of
Germany
Filed Oct. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 200,249
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 24,
1979, 2942960
Int. CI. ^ GOIN ii/00
U.S. a. 436—111 9 aaims
1. A reagent for use in the colorimetric determination of
hydrazine in an aqueous solution comprising 4-dime-
thylaminocinnamaldehyde and an ethylene glycol mono-Ci.4-
alkylether.
4,395,497
PREPARATION OF ELECTRICALLY CONDUCTIVE
SOLUBLE HETEROPOLYPHENYLENES
Herbert Naarmann, Wattenheim; Dieter Naegele, Worms; Klaus
Penzien, Frankenthai, and Johannes Schlag, Ludwigshafen,
all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to BASF Aktiengesell-
schaft, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,688
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jul. 8,
1980, 3025771
Int. CI.' C08L 77/02
U.S. CI. 523—135 7 Oaims
1. A process for the preparation of an electrically conductive
heteropolyphenylene having a conductivity greater than 10"^
S/cm, wherein from 0.5 to 5 percent by weight, based on
heteropolyphenylene employed, of an activating additive is
introduced, in the absence of moisture and of oxygen, into a
heteropolyphenylene of the formula
(I)
4,395,495
PRODUCTION OF METHANOL
Donald R. Cummings, Cheltenham, England, assignor to D.U.T.
Pty Ltd., Sydney, Australia
Filed Jul. 24, 1980, Ser. No. 171,962
Claims priority, application United Kingdom, Aug. 2, 1979,
7926932
Int. CI.' C07C 29/15
U.S. a. 518—704 12 Claims
1. In a method of producing methanol from a methane-con-
taining gas by (a) steam reforming said gas at elevated tempera-
ture and superatmospheric pressure in a reaction vessel and in
the presence of a catalyst to form a reformate containing hy-
drogen, oxides of carbon and unreacted methane and (b) sub-
jecting a reaction stream comprising said reformate to condi-
tions of elevated temperature and superatmospheric pressure
for the formation of methanol by partial reaction of the oxides
of carbon with the hydrogen in said reaction stream, the im-
provement comprising (c) separating the product of step (b)
above into a methanol-containing stream and a recycle stream
comprising unreacted hydrogen, unreacted oxides of carbon
and methane; (d) recycling a first part of said recycle stream,
which first part contains hydrogen and oxides of carbon, to
step (b); (e) recycling a second part of said recycle stream,
which second part contains methane, to step(a); (0 immersing,
at least partially and for deriving the heat for the steam reform-
ing step, said reaction vessel in a fluidized bed of finely divided
solid which is heated at least in part by the combustion of a
solid fossil based fuel; and (g) incorporating into said reaction
stream for step (b) carbon dioxide provided from flue gas
formed by the combustion of said solid, fossil based fuel.
Y —
where X is O, S or Se, Y has one of the meanings given for X
or is SO, SO2 NH, CH2, CO or phenylene and n is from 2 to
250.
4,395,498
HIGH TEMPERATURE PHENOLIC RESINS AND
FRICTION ELEMENTS PREPARED THEREFROM
Judith L. Benham, Stillwater, Minn., assignor to Minnesota
Mining and Manufacturing Company, St. Paul, Minn.
Filed Sep. 18, 1981, Ser. No. 303,554
Int. a.' C08G 14/04
U.S. a. 523—158 18 Claims
1. A composition of matter heat stable to at least 371° C.
comprising a physical blend of
a. 10 to 95 weight percent.-based on resin solids, of a curable
resin which is the acid-catalyzed reaction product of
(1) at least one phenolic compound having the formula
(OH),
1542
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
wherein each R independently represents an aliphatic
group of 1 to 20 carbon atoms, or an aryl group having
6 to 12 carbon atoms, g is 1, 2, or 3, and z is 0, 1, or 2;
(2) at least one naphthalenic compound having the formula
being cross-linked in an amount of up to 5 weight percent
(relative to the total of monomers).
wherein each R' independently is a halo or an aliphatic
group of 1 to 15 carbon atoms, and v isO, 1, 2, and 3; and
(3) formaldehyde;
the mole ratio of naphthalenic compound:phenolic compound-
:formaldehyde in said composition being in the range of
1:0.8-5:1-10,
b. 5 to 90 weight percent, based on curable binder resin
solids, of prior art resins selected from bodied cashew nut
shell liquid resin, bodied linseed oil resin, oil-modified
phenolic resins, and mixtures thereof.
4,395,499
HIGH STRENGTH PIGMENT BINDERS FOR PAPER
COATINGS CONTAINING CARBOXYLATED VINYL
ESTER ALKYL ACRYLIC INTERPOLYMERS
Josephine M. Rosenski, North Plainfield, and Joseph M. Fer-
nandez, Plainsboro, both of N.J., assignors to National Starch
And Chemical Corporation, Bridgewater, N.J.
Filed Sep. 13, 1982, Ser. No. 417,291
Int. Cl.^ B32B 23/08, 27/10
U.S. a. 523—206 11 Claims
1. A pigmented paper coating composition comprising an
aqueous synthetic polymer latex binder, pigment and sufficient
alkali to achieve a pH of 6 to 10, the latex comprising dispersed
therein an interpolymer having a T^ value of -1-30° to -40° C.
which consists essentially of:
(a) a vinyl ester of an alkanoic acid having one to 13 carbon
atoms interpolymerized with the following comonomers:
(b) from 0 to 75% by weight of an alkyl acrylate;
(c) from 0.01 to 1 parts per 100 parts (a) and (b) of a polye-
thylenically unsaturated comonomer selected from the
group consisting of triallyl cyanurate, triallyl isocyanu-
rate, diallyl maleate, diallyl fumarate, divinyl benzene and
diallyl phthalate; and
(d) from 0.5 to 15 parts per 100 parts (a) and (b) of an ethyl-
enically unsaturated mono- or dicarboxylic acid or the
half esters thereof.
4,395,501
POLYMER-CARBON BLACK MIXING
George J. Briggs, and Yung-Kang Wei, both of Sarnia, Canada,
assignors to Polysar Limited, Sarnia, Canada
Filed Aug. 4, 1981, Ser. No. 289,993
Claims priority, application Canada, Oct. 31, 1980, 363667
Int. a.J C08K 3/04
U.S. a. 523—351 16 Qaims
1. A process for producing a vulcanizate having improved
properties, said process comprising the steps of:
(a) mixing in at least two separate steps two or more C4 or
C5 conjugated diolefin containing polymers with carbon
black and other compounding ingredients except cure
active agents, followed by resting of the compounds so
produced,
(b) mixing the compounds from (a) with other compounding
ingredients including sulphur and sulphur-containing or
peroxidic cure active agents,
(c) shaping the mixture from (b), and
(d) vulcanizing the shaped mixture by heating at a tempera-
ture of from about 145° C. to about 225° C. for a time of
from about 3 to about 60 minutes,
characterized in that in step (a), the polymers are mixed in at
least two separate steps wherein:
(i) about 33 to about 60 weight percent of one or more of the
polymers is mixed with from about 60 to 100 weight
percent of the carbon black and with other compounding
ingredients except cure active agents, said polymers being
selected from C4 or C5 conjugated diolefin containing
synthetic polymers,
(ii) about 67 to about 40 weight percent of one or more of the
polymers is mixed with from 0 to about 40 weight percent
of the carbon black and with other compounding ingredi-
ents except cure active agents, said polymers being se-
lected from C4 or C5 conjugated diolefin containing syn-
thetic polymers and natural rubber, such mixing of poly-
mers, carbon black and other compounding ingredients
being in a single mix or in separate mixes containing only
a single polymer,
(iii) the compounds from (i) and (ii) are supplied to step (b).
4,395,500
PROTECTIVE COLLOID-FREE PLASTICS DISPERSION
HAVING A BIMODAL PARTICLE SIZE DISTRIBUTION
Gemot Lohr, Mainz, and Rolf Reinecke, Wiesbaden, both of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Hoechst Aktiengesell-
schaft, Frankfurt am Main, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Sep. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 306,875
Claims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Oct. 1,
1980, 3036969
Int. a? C08L 25/14
U.S. a. 523—221 3 Qaims
1. A protective colloid free plastics aqueous dispersion hav-
ing a bimodal particle size distribution, wherein the plastics
portion consists of from 60 to 80 weight % of a coarse-grain
polymer having an average particle size of more than 0.25 \im
and from 40 to 20 weight % of a fine-grain polymer having an
average particle size of below 0.2 fim, the average particle size
ratio of said coarse-grain polymer to said fine-grain polymer
being at least 2:1, and wherein the coarse-grain polymer and
the fine-grain polymer are copolymers consisting essentially of
styrene and/or esters of acrylic acid or esters of methacrylic
acid and, optionally, unsaturated acids or amides of unsatu-
rated acids in an amount of below 10 weight percent (relative
to the total monomers) and, optionally, monomers capable of
4 395 502
CATHODICALLY DEPOSITABLE COATING
COMPOSITIONS FOR ELECTRODEPOSITION (II)
Helmut Honig, and Georgios Pampouchidis, both of Graz, Aus-
tria, assignors to Vianova Kunstharz, A. G., Vienna, Austria
Filed Dec. 1, 1977, Ser. No. 854,628
Int. a.' C08L 63/02
U.S. a. 523—415 7 Qaims
1. A coating composition which is cathodically deposited
when used in an electrodeposition process comprising as the
coating binder, an aqueous emulsion of 98 to 50 percent by
weight of at least one self-crosslinking cationic binder based on
a modified epoxy compound, water-dilutable upon partial or ^
total neutralization with inorganic and/or organic acids, and 2
to 50 percent by weight of a urethane of the general formula
o 9
II N
R,— C— NH— R— (NH— C— R2)«
wherein R represents an aromatic, cycloaliphatic, or aliphatic
hydrocarbon radical; Ri stands for a hydroxyethyl(meth)acry-
late or a hydroxypropyl(meth)acrylate radical; R2 is the radical
of a member of the group consisting of an aliphatic monoal-
cohol with at least 6 carbon atoms, an alkyl radical with at least
6 carbon atoms, and an alkylene radical with at least 6 carbon
atoms; and n is an integer of 1 to 2.
July 26, 198:
CHEMICAL
1543
4,395,503
ANTENNA GROUT REPLACEMENT SYSTEM
Charles E. McClung, Kettering, Ohio, assignor to The United
States of America as represented by the Administrator of the
National Aeronautics and Space Administration, Washington,
D.C.
Filed Feb. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 233,271
Int. a.3 C08L 63/00
U.S. a. 523—440 9 Oaims
1. A fast-curing, non-sagging, oil-compatible, support grout
consisting essentially of between 10-20% by weight of epoxy
resin; 80-90% by weight of inert, inorganic filler having a
mesh size below 10, less than 5% by weight of colloidal silica
thickening agent and a fast curing agent for said epoxy resin in
an amount effective to cure said epoxy resin in less than one
minute to a rigid, cured state which is dimensionally stable
under high loads and high pressures.
4,395,504
ADHESIVE SYSTEM FOR PARTICLEBOARD
MANUFACTURE
Theodore Sulzberg, Highland Park, and Chi Ma, Parsippany,
both of N.J., assignors to Sun Chemical Corporation, New
York, N.Y.
Filed Sep. 7, 1982, Ser. No. 415,143
Int. a? B32B 21/02: C08G 12/12; C08L 1/00
U.S. CI. 524—14 5 Qaims
1. In a particleboard that comprises particles of wood and a
formaldehyde-free resin adhesive system, the improvement
wherein the resin adhesive system comprises the product of the
reaction of a cyclic urea and glyoxal in the equivalent ratio of
about 1.1-1.5:1.
1 1 4,395,505
ASCENSION PIPE AND ASCENSION PIPE CAP
SEALERS FOR BY-PRODUCT COKE OVENS
Ronald S. Doles, Oak Lawn, III., assignor to Naico Chemical
Company, Oak Brook, III.
Filed Jun. 14, 1982, Ser. No. 387,914
Int. Q.J C03C 5/02; C04B 35/00
U.S. CI. 524—55 10 Qaims
1. A curable composition useful in oven sealers comprising
an aqueous solution of a composition which is a combination of
silica and from about 44-75% by weight of a water-soluble
borate having a curing temperature in the range of about
4(X)°-775° C. and each having a particle size in the range of
44-210 microtis.
3. The composition according to claim 1 having the follow-
ing weight percent analysis which, when heated to 750° C.
forms a viscous glass with a composition of 52.3% B2O3 and
37.7% Si02:
62.00% Boric acid
21.00% Silica
2.85% Vinyl acetate/acrylic emulsion polymer
14.00% Water
0.15% Xanthan gum.
4,395,507
SELF-BONDING ONE-COMPONENT DIMEDONE RTV
SILICONE RUBBER COMPOSITIONS
John J. Dziark, Ballston Spa, N.Y., and Kazuto Shinohara,
Ohta, Japan, assignors to General Electric Silicones, Water-
ford, N.Y.
Filed Dec. 16, 1981, Ser. No. 331,232
Int. C\? C08K 5/34
U.S. Q. 524—101 110 Qaims
1. A self-bonding one-component RTV silicone rubber com-
position comprising (A) 1(X) parts by weight of an organopoly-
siloxane consisting essentially of chemically combined units of
the formula,
R
I
-SiO— ,
I
R
and having terminal alkoxysiloxy units of the formula,
4,395,506
ADDITION OF MINERAL RUBBER TO HALOBUTYL
BLENDS
Hayao Nagano, Yokohama, Japan, and Bernard J. Costemalle,
Rhode-Saint-Genese, Belgium, assignors to Exxon Research
A Engineering Co., Florham Park, N.J.
FUed Jun. 15, 1981, Ser. No. 273,314
Qaims priority, application Japan, Jun. 13, 1980, 55-80088
Int. C\? C08L 95/00
U.S. Q. 524—68 5 Qaims
1. A rubber composition having high cured adhesion to high
unsaturation rubber compounds comprising chlorobutyl and
bromobutyl rubbers and up to about 20 parts by weight per 100
parts of the total amount of chlorobutyl and bromobutyl rub-
bers of a mineral rubber.
C
/ \ ,
(X)A CR'
z
I
(YV-
c— o-
ieg
I *
-SiOos
where R is a C(|.i3) monovalent organic radical, R' is selected
from hydrogen, halogen and R, R^ is a C(i.g) alkyl radical, X
and Y are divalent radicals selected from — O — , — S — , and
9}
I
— N— .
Z is a divalent C(i.t3) organic radical selected from alkylene,
cycloalkylene, arylene and a fused ring structure, b and c are
equal to 0 or 1, R^ is selected from hydrogen and R, e is a
whole number having a value of 0 or 1, g is equal to 1 or 2, and
the sum of e-l-g is equal to 1 or 2; (B) from 3 to 8 parts by
weight of an adhesion promoter which is selected from the
class consisting of silyl maleates, silyl fumarates, silyl succi-
nates, silyl isocyanurates and mixtures thereof.
4,395,508
POLYCONDENSATES OF SUBSTITUTED PIPERIDINES
AND USE THEREOF AS STABILIZERS FOR POLYMERS
Giuseppe Nelli, and Roberto Oriani, both of Milan, Italy, assign-
ors to Montedison S.p.A., Milan, Italy
Continuation of Ser. No. 163,085, Jun. 26, 1980, abandoned.
This application Jul. 29, 1981, Ser. No. 287,908
Claims priority, application Italy, Jun. 28, 1979, 23947 A/79
Int. Q.3 C08K 5/34, 5/16; C08G 73/00; C07D 211/30
U.S. Q. 524—103 15 Qaims
1. Polyamides having the general formula (II):
1544
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
-N-
-N— CO— N— CO-
(II)
I
i
R
R2
N
I
R3 Ri
R4 R2
N
I
R5
R3
R4
acid amide being selected from the group consisting of N-lau-
ryl lauric acid amide, N-lauryl myristamide, N-myristyl myris-
tamide, N-palmityl myristamide, N-lauryl palmitamide, N-
myristyl palmitamide, N-palmityl palmitamide, N-palmityl
stearamide and N-stearyl stearamide; said N-substituted fatty
acid amide being employed in an amount such that if said olefin
polymer composition is foamed by extrusion using a volatile
organic blowing agent, the presence of said fatty acid amide
prevents the freshly prepared foam from shrinking by more
than 10% from its initially foamed volume when subjected to
prolonged exposure to atmospheric pressure air at 150° F.
wherein: each of Ri, R2. R3 and R4, which may be the same or
different, is an alkyl radical having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R5 is
hydrogen or an alkyl radical having 1 to 4 carbon atoms; R6 is
hydrogen, an alkyl radical having 1 to 20 carbon atoms, a
cycloalkyl radical having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, an aryl radical
or an alkyl-aryl radical having from 6 to 20 carbon atoms; A is
an alkylene radical having 3 to 10 carbon atoms or a cyclo-
alkylene radical having 3 to 10 carbon atoms, and n is an inte-
ger from 2 to 100.
4,395,509
POLY(ARYLENE SULnOE) COMPOSITION SUITABLE
FOR MOLDING
Jennings P. Blackwell; Dale O. Tieszen, both of Bartlesville,
Okla., and Jack G. Scruggs, Greenville, S.C, assignors to
Phillips Petroleum Company, Bartlesville, Okla.
Filed Mar. 2, 1982, Ser. No. 354,129
Int. aj C08L 81/04
U.S. a. 524—127 11 Claims
1. A composition suitable for molding comprising:
(a) from about 30 to about 50 weight percent poly(arylene
sulfide),
(b) from about 10 to about 30 weight percent glass fibers,
(c) from about 30 to about 60 weight percent of a component
chosen from glass beads, fused silica and mixtures thereof,
and
(d) from about 0.5 to about 2 weight percent of a processing
aid chosen from N,N'-alkylenebis(alkanamides), glycer-
ides and phosphated glycerides of saturated fatty acids,
containing from 10 to 30 carbon atoms, mono- and dialk-
anolamides derived from saturated fatty acids and esters
derived from a saturated long-chain fatty acid and long-
chain saturated aliphatic alcohol.
4,395,511
HEAT SEALABLE, FLAME AND ABRASION RESISTANT
COATED FABRIC
Richard P. Tschirch, Westwood, and Kenneth R. Sidman, Way-
land, both of Mass., assignors to The United States of America
as represented by the Administrator of the National Aeronau-
tics and Space Administration, Washington, D.C.
Division of Ser. No. 145,107, Apr. 30, 1980, Pat. No. 4,284,682.
This application Mar. 6, 1981, Ser. No. 241,155
Int. a.' C08K 5/06
U.S. a. 524—371 3 Qaims
1. A name retardant elastomeric composition for coating
fabrics made from synthetic or natural fibers, the coating being
flexible, abrasion resistant, and heat scalable, which elasto-
meric composition comprises from about 30 to about 60 per-
cent by weight of a soluble, thermoplastic polyurethane and
from about 70 to about 40 weight percent of a flame retardant
additive selected from the group consisting of decabromodi-
phenyloxide and antimony oxide in a weight ratio of 3:1, re-
spectively, and decabromodiphenyloxide, antimony oxide, and
ammonium polyphosphate in a weight ratio of 3:1:3, respec-
tively.
4,395,510
NOVEL OLEHN POLYMER COMPOSITIONS AND
FOAMED ARTICLES PREPARED THEREFROM
HAVING IMPROVED ELEVATED TEMPERATURE
DIMENSIONAL STABILITY
Chung P. Park, Pickerington, Ohio, assignor to The Dow Chemi-
cal Co., Midland, Mich.
Division of Ser. No. 375,606, May 6, 1982, Pat. No. 4,368,276,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 267,207, May 26,
1981, abandoned, which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No.
Ij54,333, May 29, 1980, abandoned. This application Sep. 24,
1982, Ser. No. 422,768
Int. a.' C08K 5/20: C08J 9/14
U.S. a. 524—230 9 Qaims
1. An olefin polymer composition consisting essentially of an
olefin polymer and from about 0.15 to about 10 weight percent
based upon the weight of said olefin polymer of an N-sub-
stituted fatty acid amide of the Formula:
4,395,512
POLYPHENYLENESULHDE RESIN COMPOSITION
Yoshihiro Kubota, Takasaki, and Osamu Kuriyama, Annaka,
both of Japan, assignors to Shin-Etsu Chemical Co., Ltd.,
Tokyo, Japan
Filed May 24, 1982, Ser. No. 381,563
Claims priority, application Japan, Jun. 8, 1981, 56-87945
Int. a.3 C08K 3/10
U.S. a. 524—413 2 Qaims
1. A polyphenylenesulfide resin composition which com-
prises
(a) 100 parts by weight of a polyphenylenesulfide resin,
(b) from 10 to 300 parts by weight of an inorganic filler, and
(c) from 1 to 100 parts by weight of a fluorine-containing
rubber having a Mooney viscosity as specified by ASTM
D 1646 in the range from 5-MLl-l-lO (100° C.) to
300-MLH-10(12rC.)
O H
II I
Rl— C— N— R2
(I)
wherein R\ represents an alkyl group of from about 1 1 to about
17 carbon atoms and R2 represents an alkyl group of from
about 12 to about 18 carbon atoms, said N-substituted fatty
4,395,513
HIGH PERFORMANCE THERMALLY STABLE
POLY(6-OXY-2-NAPHTHOATE)
Gordon W. Calundann, Plainfield, N.J., assignor to Celanese
Corporation, New York, N.Y.
Filed Apr. 8, 1982, Ser. No. 366,679
Int. a.5 C08G 63/06
U.S. a. 524—599 H Chums
1. A high performance thermally stable polymer consisting
of recurring 6-oxy-2-naphthoyl moieties and 0 to approxi-
mately 3 mole percent of other ester-forming and/or amide-
forming moieties which include at least one aromatic ring.
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1545
4,395,514
PROCESS FOR PREPARING A CARBON FIBER
REINFORCED COMPOSITE ARTICLE WHICH
UTILIZES A POLYIMIDE MATRIX
Robert Edelman, Staten Island, N.Y., assignor to Celanese Cor-
poration, New York, N.Y.
Division of Ser. No. 141,701, Apr. 18, 1980, Pat. No. 4,338,430.
This application Jan. 29, 1982, Ser. No. 343,868
Int. CV C08L 67/02
U.S. a. 524—600 7 Claims
1. A process for preparing a carbon fiber reinforced compos-
ite article wherein a polyimide constitutes the continuous
phase which comprises:
(1) providing a polyimide forming catalyst-monomer mix-
ture comprising:
(a) at least one ester of the formula:
O
II
C— O— R4
f
'c— O— R4
II
o
I
R4— o— c
R4— O— G
\ /
R3
\
wherein R3 is a tetravalent aryl radical, and R4 is se-
lected from the group consisting of a lower alkyl radical
having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and hydrogen, with two R4
groups being alkyl and two R4 groups being hydrogen;
(b) at least one amine of the formula:
H2N-R5— NH2
wherein R5 is a divalent aryl radical; and
(c) at least one ester of the formula:
R6
/
b
\
o
II
C— 0*-R4
C— O— R4
"1,
o
wherein R4 is selected from the group consisting of a
lower alkyl radical having 1 to 4 carbon atoms, and
hydrogen with one R4 group being alkyl and one R4
group being hydrogen, and K(, is a divalent radical of
the formula:
wherein V, which is the same or different, is selected
from the group consisting of hydrogen, and methyl and
X is an alkylidene radical of from 1 to 6 carbon atoms;
wherein monomers (a), (b) and (c) are present in said
mixture at a molar ratio of n:(n + x):y respectively,
wherein n is an integer of from about 1 to about 20, x is
an integer of from about 0.5 to about 1, and y is an
integer of from about 1.5 to about 2, and from about 0.5
to about 15%, by weight, based on the weight of the
monomer mixture, of at least one peroxide catalyst
represented by the structural formula:
R R
I I
R— C — CH2— CH2— C— R
I I
o o
o-
/ \
R R|
-O
wherein R, which is the same or different, is a lower
alkyl group having from 1 to about 3 carbon atoms, and
R I is an alkyl acetate group of the formula:
O
II
— CH2— C— O— R2
wherein R2 is an alkyl group having from 1 to about 4
carbon atoms;
(2) impregnating at least one carbon fiber lamina with said
polyimide forming catalyst-monomer mixture of step (1);
(3) reacting said polyimide forming catalyst-monomer mix-
ture in the presence of the at least one carbon fiber lamina
at a temperature of from about 250° to about 350° F. for a
period of from about 0.5 to about 3 hours and at a pressure
of from about 2 to about 30 in.Hg to form a prepolymer;
and
(4) curing the prepolymer to form a carbon fiber reinforced
composite article while employing a short cure procedure
which comprises the steps of heating the prepolymer to a
temperature of from about 375° to about 425° F. at a
continuous or intermittent pressure of from about 1 75 to
about 225 psi; raising the temperature of the prepolymer
to a temperature of from about 450° to about 625° F. while
under a continuous or intermittent pressure of from about
175 to about 225 psi; and maintaining the temperature of
the prepolymer thereat for a period of about 10 to about
120 minutes.
4,395,515
RESIN DISPERSIONS HAVING HIGH PIGMENT
BINDING CAPACITY
Horst Dinklage, Dieburg; Herbert Fink, Bickenbach; Peter
Frank, Seeheim-Jugenheim; Hubert Ranch, Weiterstadt, and
Werner Siol, Pfungstadt, all of Fed. Rep. of Germany, assign-
ors to Rohm GmbH, Darmstadt, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Dec. 24, 1981, Ser. No. 334,228
Oaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jan. 22,
1981, 3101892
Int. a.3 C08L 33/02
U.S. CI. 524—832 10 Claims
1. A method for making an aqueous dispersion of a synthetic
resin copolymer by the free radical copolymerization of from
92 to 97 percent, by weight of the copolymer, of water insolu-
ble ethylenically unsaturated monomers and from 3 to 8 per-
cent, by weight of the copolymer, of an acid component se-
lected from the group consisting essentially of a,/3-ethyleni-
cally unsaturated mono- and di-carboxylic acids and the water
soluble salts thereof, the weight of salt in each instance being
calculated as the weight of the corresponding free acid, said
dispersion having high pigment binding capacity, which
method comprises gradually adding said water insoluble mon-
omers, under free radical copolymerization conditions, to-
gether with a portion of said acid component which is at least
2 percent by weight of the copolymer, to an aqueous medium
comprising from 1 to 4 percent, by weight of the copolymer, of
at least one water soluble salt of a mono- or di-carboxylic acid
forming the remainder of said acid component.
1032 O. G.— 5 V
1546
OFFICIAL GAZETTE
July 26, 1983
4,395,516
THERMOPLASTIC RESIN COMPOSITIONS
, COMPRISING COPOLYMER OF UNSATURATED
DICARBOXYLIC ACID ANHYDRIDE AND VINYL
AROMATIC MONOMER, ABS, AND
METHYLMETHACRYLATE POLYMER
Tatuhiko Imai, and Akira Ohi, both of Sakai, Japan, assignors to
Daicel Chemical Industries, Ltd., Osaka, Japan
Filed Dec. 21, 1981, Ser. No. 332,892
Claims priority, application Japan, Dec. 26, 1980, 55/186163
Int. a.3 C08L 55/02. 25/08, 33/12
U.S. a. 525—71 10 Claims
1. A thermoplastic molding composition which consists
essentially of a blend of
(A) from 5 to 95 wt. % of a copolymer consisting essentially
of
(1) from 5 to 50 wt. % of an unsaturated dicarboxylic acid
anhydride,
(2) from 50 to 95 wt. % of a vinyl aromatic monomer,
(3) from 0 to 30 wt. % of a vinyl cyanide monomer, alkyl
acrylate monomer or alkyl methacrylate monomer, and
(4) from 0 to 50 wt. % of a rubber
(B) from 5 to 95 wt. % of an ABS resin containing from 2 to
70 wt. %, based on said ABS resin, of a butadiene rubber,
and
(C) from 0.1 to 20 wt. %, per 80 to 99.9 wt. % of the sum of
the amounts of (A) plus (B), of thermoplastic acrylic resin
different from (A) and (B) and which is a copolymer or
multi-stage polymer containing at least 20 wt. % of methyl
methacrylate, based on said acrylic resin.
4,395,519
PHYSICALLY BLENDED PROPYLENE POLYMER
COMPOSITION
Syuji Minami, Ohtake; Norio Kashiwa, Iwakuni; Akifumi Kato,
and Junichi Watanabe, both of Ohtake, all of Japan, assignors
to Mitsui Petrochemical Industries, Ltd., Tokyo, Japan
Continuation of Ser. No. 31,298, Apr. 18, 1979, abandoned. This
application Oct. 14, 1980, Ser. No. 196,550
Int. CI.3 C08L 23/16. 23/12. 23/06
U.S. a. 525—240 5 Qaims
1. A physically blended propylene polymer composition
comprising
(A) 100 parts by weight of crystalline polypropylene con-
taining 0 to 10 mole% of a member selected from the
group consisting of ethylene, another a-olefin, and a mix-
ture thereof,
(B) 1 to 30 parts by weight of a propylene/ethylene random
copolymer composed of 30 to 85 mole% of propylene,
said copolymer containing 0 to 10 mole% of a diene com-
ponent and having (i) a micro-isotacticity of at least 0.8
and (ii) a boiling n-cyclohexane insolubles content of 0 to
10% by weight, said random copolymer being prepared
by using a catalyst comprising a carrier-supported solid
titanium catalyst component containing magnesium, halo-
gen, titanium and an electron donor, and an organoalumi-
num compound catalyst component, and
(C) 0 to 30 parts by weight of polyethylene containing 0 to
1 5 mole% of an a-olefm, said components (A) and (B)
having been physically mixed with each other.
4,395,517
MODIFIED OLEnNE POLYMERS
Helmut Waniczek, Cologne; Carlhans Siiling, Odenthal; Chris-
tian Lindner, Cologne, and Herbert BartI, Odenthal, all of
Fed. Rep. of Germany, assignors to Bayer Aktiengescllschaft,
Leverkusen, Fed. Rep. of Germany
Filed Jun, 17, 1981, Ser. No. 274,545
Qaims priority, application Fed. Rep. of Germany, Jun. 25,
1980 3023822
Int. a. 3 C08L 75/06. 67/00. 69/00
U.S. a. 525—168 3 Qaims
1. A process for the preparation of modified olefine poly-
mers, wherein 20 to 98 parts by weight of an olefine homopoly-
mer or copolymer, 0.5 to 80 parts by weight of a polymer
containing saturated aliphatic polyester blocks and 0.5 to 40
parts by weight of a monomer containing olefinic double bonds
are polymerized in the presence of a radical initiator at 50° to
250* C. in the absence of a solvent.
4,395,520
PROCESS FOR CURING THERMOSETTING RESINS
USING SULFUR DIOXIDE CONTAINING COMPOUNDS
AS LATENT CATALYSTS
Sui-Wu Chow, and George L. Brode, both of Bridgewater Town-
ship; Somerville County, N.J., assignors to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,852
Int. C1.3 C08G 8/28, 8/30. 8/32. 12/40
U.S. CI. 525—502 1* Claims
1. In a process for the curing of a thermosetting resin which
is curable using an acid catalyst, the improvement being the use
of a sulfur dioxide containing compound as a latent catalyst,
said compound being stable at at a temperature less than about
60° C. and dissociable into sulfur dioxide at a temperature
greater than about 100° C.
4,395,518
POLYETHERIMIDE-ACRYLATE COPOLYMER BLENDS
Harold F. Giles, Jr., Cheshire, Mass., and Dwain M. White,
SchenecUdy, N.Y., assignors to General Electric Company,
Pittsfield, Mass.
Filed Mar. 18, 1982, Ser. No. 359,509
Int. a.5 C08L 79/08
U.S. a. 525—180 9 Claims
1. A composition comprising a blend of (a) a minor propor-
tion of an acrylate copolymer and (b) a polyetherimide.
4 395 521
PROCESS FOR CURING THERMOSET RESINS USING
PHENYL ESTERS OF CARBOXYLIC AODS AS LATENT
CATALYSTS
Sui-Wu Chow, and George L. Brode, both of Bridgewater Town-
ship, Somerset County, N.J., assignors to Union Carbide
Corporation, Danbury, Conn.
Filed Jan. 20, 1982, Ser. No. 340,854
Int. C\? C08G 8/30. 8/32, 12/40. 12/44
U.S. a. 525—502 10 Claims
1. In a process for the curing of a thermosetting resin which
July 26, 1983
CHEMICAL
1547
is curable using an acid catalyst, the improvement being the use
of a phenyl ester of a carboxylic acid as a latent catalyst, said
phenyl ester being hydrolyzable at a temperature greater than
100° C. and in the presence of water to form a carboxylic acid
having a pKa of about 2 or less.
4,395,522
Paitent Not Issued For This Number
4,395,523
METHOD OF MAKING AND RECOVERING OLERN
POLYMER PARTICLES
William Kirch, Clinton, Iowa, assignor to Chemplex Company,
Rolling Meadows, III.
Continuation of Ser. No. 257,222, Apr. 23, 1981, abandoned,
which is a continuation-in-part of Ser. No. 71,129, Aug. 30, 1979,
abandoned, which is a division of Ser. No. 887,668, Mar. 16,
1978, Pat. No. 4,199,546. This application May 27, 1982, Ser.
No. 382,488
Int. CI.3 C08F 2/14
U.S. a. 526—64 3 Qaims
4,395,524
ACRYLAMIDE COPOLYMER THICKENER FOR
AQUEOUS SYSTEMS
William D. Emmons, Huntingdon Valley, and Travis E. Stevens,
Ambler, both of Pa., assignors to Rohm and Haas Company,
Philadelphia, Pa.
Filed Apr. 10, 1981, Ser. No. 252,721
Int. Q.J C08F 220/54. 220/56. 220/58
U.S. CI. 526—307.2 17 Qaims
1. A nonionic or anionic water-soluble addition copolymer
of monomers comprising, by weight,
(A) at least 50% of acrylamide;
(B) 0.01 to 50% of a compound having the formula
O Ri
II I
CH2=CH— C— N— R2
wherein
Ri is
1. A method for producing and recovering solid polyolefin
particles in a particle form olefin polymerization process, com-
prising:
directing a flowing liquid stream comprising liquid diluent,
olefin monomer and catalyst for the polymerization and
the resulting polyolefin pariicles under polymerizing heat
and pressure conditions in the flow path through a contin-
uous loop comprising a polymerization zone;
directing a poriion of said flowing liquid stream from said
loop through a liquid cyclone separator for producing a
concentrated slurry of a poriion of said particles and a
separate relatively clear liquid, while exchanging heat
between said flowing liquid stream in said loop and said
flowing liquid stream in said separator by immersing said
cyclone separator in said flowing liquid stream in said
loop at said polymerization zone for maintaining said
flowing liquid stream within said separator at substantially
the same temperature as said flowing liquid stream in said
loop at said polymerization zone to continue said polymer-
izing conditions while said portion of said flowing liquid
stream is passing through said separator;
returning said relatively clear liquid to said polymerization
zone; and
directing said concentrated slurry to a place of recovery of
said pariicles.
R2 is H or
V
-(CH2CHO)„R4.
-(CH2CHO);„R6.
R3 and R5 are H or methyl, independently,
R4 and Rb are hydrocarbyl having 6 or more carbons,
independently, and
m and n are zero or a positive integer, independently; and
(C) 0 to 49.99% one or more other olefinically unsaturated
monomers;
the copolymer having a weight average molecular weight
gre